https://cpw.cvlcollections.org/files/original/5cdee9c47dbde748d314c87543bf00ab.pdf dca4a38f58723f3b5d124dc8b4060f34 PDF Text Text January, 196--S -1- JOB COMPLETION REPORT REbEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT btate of 00LORA 00' ------~~~~----- Project No.: W-88.,.R-7 1 Work Plan No. : Title of Job: Period Covered: burv~ Waterfowl Surveys and Investigations Job No. 9 of Potential Waterfowl Shooting Areas in Colorado April 1, 1961 to March 31, 1962. Abstract: Results of the wetlands inventory and habitat evaluation of the irrigated portion of eight counties in the South Platte Valley reveal that: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. The average section for the eight counties contained 1.5 wetlands (52 acres), 0.71 miles of ditches and canals, and 0.19 miles of streams and rivers. Stream and river habitats make up a progressively higher percentage of the total wetland acreages of counties furthest from the foothills and the Denver area, while lakes and reservoirs become less abundant. Jotal estimated wetlands for the study area amounted to: lakes and marshes, 128,007 acres; streams and rivers, 469.99 miles; and ditches and canals, 1,750.15 miles. It is estimated that only 46 per cent of all wetland areas over five acres in size are open to public hunting, another 17.2 per cent is leased for hunting, and the rest are not open to hunting except by the landowner or hi s personal friends. An estimated 8.2 per cent of all wetlands over five acres in size are leased for fishing, while 35 per cent of the areas suitable for boating are leased by boating clubs. There is an increase in public hunting privileges with an increase in distance from the foothills and/or Denver. By the same token, there is also a decrease in the number and acres of wetlands leased as hunting areas. Only 7.3 per cent of the sample wetlands are under public ownership. It is strongly recommended that: a. A wetlands acquisition program should be concentrated in the counties adjacent to Denver -- Adams, Boulder, Weld, and Larimer. b. Studies relating to habitat development and hunting should be initiated as soon as possible on the state-owned Tamarack Ranch in Logan County to determine the feasibility of acquisition of river bottom tracts. �-2- c. d. e. Wetland areas larger than one section (640 acres) in size should be given priority over smaller type areas in the acquisition program. Every effort should be made to lease or otherwise secure management rights for publio recreational activities on all important large 'reservoirs and lakes not alreaqy under state control in the South Platte Valley. This Department should actively, and aggressively, compete with private individuals or clubs for the acquisition of public hunting areas throughout all of the State of Colorado. Introduction: Background and need for this survey were given in the job completion report of January, 1961. Objectives: Only a summary of the objectives given in last year's report will be presented here: (1) To determine the amount of wetlands in Colorado, beginning with the irrigated portion of the eastern slope. (2) To determine the number and amount of wetland areas leqsed for hunting, fishing, and other recreational purposes. (J) To set up a method to rate wetland areas in terms of value for acquisition as public hunting areas. (4) .To establish a priority list of public hunting areas for presentation to the Commission. Procedures: report. All methods remained the same as explained in the 1961 Only two counties, Larimer and Weld, Were inventoried during the first summer (1960) of this survey. The remaining major counties that contain irrigated land in the South Platte Valley were completed during the summer of 1961. These counties are as follows: Adams, Boulder, Logan, Morgan, Sedgwick, and Washington. A small portion of the South Platte River and adjacent irrigated land in eastern Weld County, not included in the first summer's work, was also inventoried in 1961. Several (litches and canals included in the previous report for Larimer and Weld Counties were omitted because they did not meet the standards for inclusion in this inventory. Only ditches and canals of sufficient width that carry water during most of the year and continue through more than one section of land are considered of such importance to waterfowl to be included. In addition, only streams and rivers of a permanent nature were included. The stu~ was conducted on a county by county basis, in which the irrigated portion of each county constituted one stUtzy area. The stu~ �-3areas for the eight counties comprised a total of 2,465 sections or 1,577,600 acres of irrigated land. The location of this acreage is shown in Figure 1. Two study sections were randomly selected from each township of irrigated land. Table 1 shows the n~~ber of study sections in each county; Table l.--Number of Study Sections in the Irrigated Portion of each of Eight Counties in the South Platte Valley. County, =t Adams Boulder Larimer Logan Horgan Sedgwick Washington Weld TOTAL = Number of otudy oections _. 9 12 19 12 20 7 2 56 137 Per Cent 6.6 8.8 13.9 8.8 14.6 5.1 1.4 40.8 100.0 ��-5- b'URVEY OF POTENTIAL PUBLIC WATERFOWL bHOOTING AREAb Richard M. Hopper Findings: The results presented herein incorporate information Ci.'e'ri'VeCr-from 13'1 study sections in the South Platte Valley. This number includes information obtained from 70 study sections in Larimer and Weld Counties, as presented in the previous report. Amount of wetlands Tables I-VII in the appendix give acres and miles of wetlands in individual counties. These tables are arranged by county in order of increasing distance from Denver to help show the availability of wetlands to recreationists in regard to quality and quanti ty. Logan and Wa shington Counties were combined in Table VI because the latter county contained only two study sections as a result of a small amount of irrigated land associated with it. Only a few statements concerning Tables I-VII are worthy 'of mention, since the most important information is summarized in tables within the text. study sections revealed that stream and river habitats make up a progressively higher percentage of the total wetland acreages of counties with an increase in distance Lrom the foothills and the Denver area. At the same time, lakes and reservoirs become generally less numerous. streams and rivers accounted for zero and 10 per cent of the total acres of wetlands in Adams and Boulder Counties, respectively, while lakes and reservoirs resulted in about one-third of the acreage in both cases. These two counties lie adjacent to the foothills and the Denver area (Figure 1). On the other hand, the total wetland acreage of study sections in Sedgwick County consisted of riverbottoms. Of the eight counties included in this inventory, Sedgwick County is the greatest distance from the foothills and major population centers. The above situation is explained in the following way. Although streams and rivers are normally more numerous near the foothills at the western edge of the South Platte Valley, they are smaller and contain fewer acres of marginal or bottom land than those further east on the plains. Large acreages of riverbottom are associated wHh the South Platte River in logan and Sedgwick Counties, as contrasted to small acreages along Boulder Creek in Boulder County. Further, irrigated land in Sedgwick and other counties toward the eastern end of the South Platte Valley in Colorado is restricted to a narrow strip on either side of the South Platte River, whereas that near the foothills extends for many miles beyond the borders of natural waterways. In the random �I N. I STER~ING RES. I ~ I N r I I [VdRoAli -Cr - - - - - -L_ IJACKSON I ~AKE RES. I I I , AKRON • 0'\ COLORADO 01101120 SC~ IN MIUS Figure 1. The eight major counties of the South Platte River Valley in Colorado, with the slant-shaded portion denoting the location of irrigated land. �-7- selection of stuqy sections in the former area, there existed a greater likelihood of including riverbottom land, as compared to the area near the foothills. At the western edge of the South Platte Valley, where irrigated farming forms a more important part of the basic agricultural economy than further east, lakes and reservoirs would be expected to be more numerous. This is especially notable in Larimer County, where almost 70 per cent of the total acreage of wetlands in the stuqy sections consisted of lakes and reservoirs and their associated marginal land (Table IV). Tables 2 and 3 show the combined water composition of all study sections in the irrigated portion of the South Platte Valley and the proportion of total wetlands in each wetland category. A total of 205 wetland areas, excluding ditches and canals, were observed on 137 study sections, resulting in an average of 1.50 wetlands per section. Total acres of wetlands on these study sections amounted to slightly over 7,100 acres, or 52 acres per square mile. Average miles of flowing water per square mile were found to be 0.19 for streams and rivers and 0.71 for ditches and canals. Ponds and marshes of less than five acres appear to be the predominant wetlands in regard to numbers in the South Platte Valley, with about 46 per cent of the 205 wetland areas in the sample fallin this category (Table 3). However, these areas contributed less than 3 per cent of the total acres of Wetlands. Lakes and reservoirs accounted for approximately 80 per cent of the total surface acres of water, but streams and rivers, with their large acreages of associated bottom lands, accounted for about three-fourths of the total acres of marginal land. Stream and river habitats constituted 50 per cent of the total acres of wetlands on the stuqy sections, followed by lakes and reservoirs with about 37 per cent. Together these two wetland categories comprised nearly 90 per cent of the total wetland acreage. Their importance to wintering ducks and geese and to waterfowl hunters is evident. These wetlands offer perhaps the greatest potential for the development of waterfowl production-habitat and public hunting grounds in the South Platte Valley of Colorado because of their extent. Additional discussion concerning this subject will be presented later in the report. It will be extremely interesting to compare all of the above figures with those obtained in other areas of Colorado and with those found in other states of the Central F~yway. Pooling of this information by the states involved will prove valuable in the coordination of future wetlands work in the Central Flyway. �Table 2.--Total Water Composition of 137 Stuqy Sections in the Irrigated Portion of the South Platte Vall~. Wetland Category No. Lakes and reservoirs 36 Ponds and marshes over 5 acres 52 Ponds and marshes less than 5 acresll 95 Streams and rivers 22 Ditches and canals -TOTA~ 205~ Ave. Surface Acres of Water Acres of Av~. Marginal Land Ave. Total Acres Ave. 0.26 2039.0 14.88 623.5 4.55 2662.5 19.44 0.38 189.2 1.38 536.1 3.91 725.3. 5.29 172.8 1.26 24.31 3554.1 0.69 0.16 223.7 1.63 3330.4 -1.50 --- --- --- --- -- 7114.731 II Only total acres of wetland was determined for each of these smaller areas. ~I Excluding ditches and canals. Miles Ave. 25.94 26.08 0.19 -51.93 96.85 122.93 0.71 0.90 I co I �Table 3.--Proportion of Total l'ietlandsin each Wetland Category for 137 Study Sections in the Irrigated Portion of the South Platte Valley. Wetland Category Lakes and reservoirs Ponds and marshes over 5 acres Ponds and marshes less than 5 acrea!1 streams and rivers Ditches and canals TOTAlS % . Acres of Marginal Land % Total Acres % Miles -- No. % Surface Acres of Water 36 17.6 2039.0 83.2 623.5 13.9 2662.5 37.4 52 25.4 189.2 7.7 536.1 12.1 725.3 10.2 95 46.3 -- -- -- -- 172.8 2.4 22 10.7 223.7 9.1 3330.4 74.0 3554.1 50.0 26.08 21.2 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 2451.9 100.0 4497.9 100.0 96.85 122.93 78.8 100.0 20531 100.0 7114.731 100.0 II Only total acres of wetland was determined for each of these smaller areas. -y Excluding ditches and canals. % I \0 I �-10Table 4 presents a summa~ of wetlands composition of 137 stuqy sections and total projected acres and miles of wetlands in the irrigated portion of the South Platte Valley. Weld County supports the largest acreage of irrigated land of the eight counties involved with almost 6So,000 acres, while Sedgwick County contains the smallest acreage (excluding Washington County which has been included with Logan Coun~) with only about 60,000 acres. The abundance of irrigated land in Weld County is explained by the fact that it is much larger than any of the other counties and lies in the heart of the irrigation district of the South Platte Valley. Sedgwick County supports a small. acreage of irrigated land because not only is it the smallest of the eight counties involved but, as mentioned earlier, irrigated land is restricted to a narrow strip adjacent to the South Platte River. Average acres of wetlands per sample section ranged from 19.57 in Weld County to 118.30 in logan County. Weld County appears to have flatter land with fewer depressions than the other counties. The large figure for Logan County is explained by the importance of riverbottoms in the irrigated portion of 'thi.sarea. The + t .0S standard error value following each average figure indicates, in most cases, wide variations among study sections within the counties. These variations are undoubtedly the result of relatively small sample sizes for the individual counties. In general, with an increase in sample size the standard error value becomes smaller in comparison to the observed mean (average) value. When the sample sizes for all counties were combined in order to determine average acres of wetlands per sample section for the irrigated portion of the South Platte Valley, a relatively smaller t .OS standard error value was obtained (51.93 + 16.37). This yielded a total projected wetland acreage of 128,007 + 40,3S2 or 8.1 + 2.6 per cent of the irrigated portion of the South Platte Valley. Streams or rivers occurred in only 22 of the 137 study sections (Table 2). Large numbers of study sections with zero miles of streams or rivers contributed greatly to the large variation about the average number of miles per section for each county and for all counties combined (Table 4). Average miles of streams and rivers per sample section for all eight counties was 0.19 + 0.08, with 469.99 + 197.20 miles being the projected figure for the irrigated po"rtion of the South Platte Valley. As would be expected, ditches and canals are much more common than streams and rivers. Therefore, variations within counties were less than for streams and rivers. According to the study sections, Larimer County contains more miles of ditches and canals than any other county in this study, with an average of 1.33 + 0.46 miles per sample section. An extensive network of ditches and canals is needed to transport water into and from the large number of reservoirs also associated with this county. An average of 0.71 + 0.14 miles per section for all counties resulted in a total estimated mileage of 1,'750.1S+ 345.10 for the irrigated portion of the South Platte Valley (Table -4). �Table 4. --Summary of Wetlands Composition of the Irrigated County Adams Boulder Weld Larimer Horgan Logan ~edgwick TOTAL..'-) Portion of the South P'latte Valley. Total Irrigated LandY' ~ections Acres ""-- .- -Totii-A-;-;';s -~i-W~-ti~ridsY Av. Acres/Section % Total Projected in Sample Acres 156 99,840 223 142,720 1,015 649,600 336 215,040 353 225,920 2881/ 184,320 94 60,160 2,465 1,577,600 22.42+ 23.3~ 47.41!46.15 1~.57! '10.42 83.39:26.07 78.69+ 24.42 118.30 '~4.82 61.87!98.88 51.93!16.37 ! 3.5~ 3.6 7.4! 7.2 3.1+ 1.6 13.0+ 4.1 12.3+ 3.8 18.5:-14.8 9.7! 15.4 8.1+ 2.6 3,498! 3,644 10,572!10,292 19,864+ 10,576 28,019+ 8,760 .27,778+ 8,620 34,070+ 27,308 5,816! 9,295 128,007!40,352 I 1/ 11 ~tuqy areas from which sample sections were selected. Excluding ditches and canals. Includes 30 sections in Washington County, two of which were stu~ ~ • t .05standard ]I errors. I-' I-' I sections. �Table 4.--Summaryof Wetlands Compositionof the IrrigatedPortion of the South Platte Valley (Continued). County Streams and Rivers Total Irrigated Landbl Av. flilesl~ectionTotal Projected ~ections Acr-e s in Sample l'liles Adams Boulder Weld Larimer Horgan logan Sedgwick 156 223 1,015 336 353 288]~ 94 TOTALti ===txe = 99,840 142,720 649,600 215,040 225.,920 184,320 60,160 2,465 i toe tit: 1,577,600 Lt·: :at., **=::±:!:±± 0 0 0.14! 0.181/ 31.22 ~ 40.14 0.07! 0.08 71.05 + 81.20 0.35! 0.34 117.60: 114~24 0.16 +0.19 --5b.-GB-+-67.07 0.47 +- 0.45 135.36 +- 129.60 0.62-+-6~-86- -58.28 +- 80.84 0.19! 0.08 = tt *2 469.99! 197.20 1ft .t±iiliiL:==-e Ditches and Canals Av.--H:iTesTtiection Total Projected in SampLe Miles 0.36! 0.34 0.44! 0.53 0.76! 0.24 1.33 + 0.46 0.56 + 0.31 0.54 +- 6~41 0.27 +- 0.34 56.16! 53.04 98.12! 118.19 446.88 + 154.56 771.40 + 243.60 197.68 + 109.43 155.52 + n8.oS 25.38 +- 31.96 0.71 _+ 0.14 1750.15 + 345.10 et::! 1/ Study areas from which sample sectionswere selected. ~ Excluding ditches and canals. Includes 30 sections in Hashington County, two of which were study sections. ~ + t .05 standard errors. 11 == = I I-' I\) I �-13- Each wetland area over five acres in size was classified according to the 20 types described by Martin et ale (1953). Only four types were encountered in the eight--major counties of the South Platte Valley. Other types are undoubtedly present, especially if wetlands of less than five acres are considered. Brief descriptions of these four types were presented in the previous report, but they are repeated here for easy reference. boil is covered with water or waterlogged during variable seasonal periods, but well drained during much of the growing season. Located on riverbottoms, along borders of dra~-down reservoirs, and in shallow potholes and other shallow upland depressions. The vegetative COver normally consists of grasses, sedges, smartweeds, and annual weeds. (2) Type 3--~~ fresh marshes boil is normally waterlogged and sometimes covered with as much as six inches of water during the growing season. They may nearly fill shallow lake basins, potholes, or sloughs, may border deep marshes on the landward side of such depressions, or may adjoin irrigation systems. Common plants consist of grasses, sedges, rushes, bulrushes, spikerushes, cattail, arrowheads, and smartweeds. (3) Type 4--Deep fresh ~~~ Marshy depressions covered with one to three feet of water during the grot-lingseason. These deep marshes may nearly fill shallow lake basins, potholes, or sloughs, or may border open water in such depressions. Emergent vegetation includes such plants as cattails, reeds, and bulrushes. In open areas, pondweeds , naiads, coontail, watermilfoil, waterweeds, duckweeds, or other aquatics may occur. (4) Type 5--Open ~ ~ Open water of variable depth that has emergent vegetation restricted to a narrow border. Ponds, lakes, and reservoirs are included in this type. Open water may completely occupy lake and pond �-14basins, potholes, sloughs, ditches, oanals, or stream beds, or it may be fringed with marsh. Vegetation (mainly at depths of less than six feet) includes pondweeds, naiads, coontail, watermilfoil, and muskgrasses. In regard to numbers, "type 5" wetlands appear to be more common in the South Platte Valley than any of the other types with respect to water areas over five acres in size (Table 5). "Type 5" wetlands made up about S7 per cent of these larger water areas in the 137 study sections, while "types 1 and 4" each constituted approximately 20 per cent. This is no surprise, since ponds, lakes, and reservoirs are particularly prevalent in the South Platte Valley and each falls under the "type S" category. "Type 3" wetlands accounted for less than 3 per cent of the 110 water areas over five acres in size. "Types 1, 3, and 4" would be ex-pected to occur with greater frequencies if wetlands of less than five acres were considered. t)mall water areas of these three types appear to be characteristic of intensively farmed lands. Irrigation waste-water and seepage from ditches and canals contribute to the formation of many small, marshy water areas too wet for cultivation. Although "type 5" wetlands constituted the greatest number of water areas, "type I" wetlands contributed more acres than any of the other types (Table S). The latter type amounted to 51.5 per cent of the total acreage in the study sections, disregarding areas less than five acres, while the former type made up on~y about 43 per oent. This agrees closely with Table 3, where it was shown that streams and rivers and their associated bottom lands accounted for So per cent of the total wetland acreage. Riverbottoms constitute the great majority of "type I" wetlands. The increasing importance of "type I" wetlands and decreasing importance of "type 511 wetlands as one progresses from the foothills and Denver area toward the eastern edge of the valley coincides with this same characteristic in regard to streams, rivers, lakes, and reservoirs, respectively, as mentioned previously. Because of their small size total acreage of wetland types less than five acres would presumably affect the above percentages very little. Recreational uses A total of 110 wetland areas over five acres in size were rated for recreational and wildlife values. Types of recreational use of these wetlands, whether private, public, leased, or none, in each of the eight major counties of the South Platte Valley are presented in Tables VIII-XIII of the appendix. Table 6 lists types of recreational use for all eight counties combined. Hunting, fishing, or boating rights were classified as "none" when �Table 5.--Wetland Type Classification of 110 Water Areas1!in the South Platte Valley, Colorado. Wetland Type 1 County No. Adams Boulder Weld Larimer Morgan La gan-Na shingtonSedgwick TOTAL 4 3 ~ No. 0 2 5 5 3 0 20.0 18.5 15.2 21.4 8 23 ~ No. % 6 7 17 25 5 66.7 70.0 63.0 75.8 35.7 9 10 27 33 14 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 29.4 3 17.6 17 100.0 19.1 63 57.3 110 100.0 ~ 3 1 3 3 6 33.3 10.0 11.1 9.1 42.8 5.9 5 2.7 21 ~ 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 7.4 0 0 47.0 1 20.9 3 Total 5 No. No. Y Excluding ponds and marshes less than five acres and ditches and canals. 1 }-J xn Table 5.--Continued. I Wetland Type 1 3 ~ ~ County Acres % Acres % Acres % Adams Boulder ftleld Larimer Horgan Logan-WashingtonSs dgwi.ck 0 0 56.8 10.1 452.4 h4.5 329.5 21.3 873.0 55.8 0 0 14.0 0 0 0 0 1.4 0 0 80.3 24.2 53.8 46.0 56.8 45.1 4.3 5.3 3.0 3.6 1866.0 90.0 22.6 1.1 90.7 4.4 94.7 TOTAU:i 3577.7 51.5 36.6 0.5 351.8 5.1 2975.8 Y Acres % % 178.0 561.0 1017.2 1546.1 1565.6 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 4.5 2074.0 100.0 42.9 6941.9 100.0 97.7 54.9 480.0 85.6 497.0 48.8 1170.6 75.7 635.8 40.6 Excluding ponds and marshes less than five acres and ditches and canals. Total Acres �landowners indicated that recreationists could not obtain permission for these privileges or when conditions were not suitable to allow such uses. Table 7 shows the type of ownership of the 110 wetlands. These tables are discussed below. Hunting--Although hunting on wetlands is not necessarily restrIcted to waterfowl shooting, ducks and geese are normally of primary concern where water areas occur and any interpretations or conclusions to follow will emphasize this type of hunting. Of 110 wetlands that occurred in the study sections, only 51, or 46.4 per cent, are open to public hunting (Table 6). This number amounts to 60 per cent of the total wetland acreage in the study sections, excluding areas less than five acres in size. Nineteen, Or 17.2 per cent, of these 110 wetlands are leased for hunting. Almost one-fourth (23.0 per cent) of the total wetland acreage is leased. Areas where sportsmen can not obtain permission to hunt account for most of the remaining percentages. Relatively large variations in the above percentages apparently exist among the counties, as shown in Tables VIII-XIII. Number of wetlands open to public hunting ranged from 22.2 per cent in Adams County to 100 per cent in the three eastern counties combined (Logan, Washington, and Sedgwick). Per cent of sample acres of wetlands available for public hunting varied from 12.3 and 17.3 in Weld and Adams Counties, respectively, to 100 per cent in the above three eastern counties. In contrast, per cent of wetlands leased for hunting decreased from 33.3 in Adams County to zero in Logan, Washington, and Sedgwick Counties combined. Acres of leased wetlands also had the greatest range between these counties, with 47.3 and zero per cent, respectively. Graphic representations of the foregoing relationships are shown in Figure 2. The graphed values indicate a general increase in public hunting privileges with an increase in distance from the foothills and Denver. In this same direction there appears to be a decrease in the nmnber and acres of wetlands leased as hunting areas. Fewer leased wetlands plus the presumable tendency for landowners to be less hesitant in giving permission to hunt in lightly populated areas because of decreased hunting pressure probably account for greater public hunting privileges toward the eastern end of the valley. A greater number of leased wetlands near important population centers is to be expected because of easy accessibility, and r-e Lat Lve Iy short traveling distances which allow more actual hunting time and reduce expenses. �•• 17•.. NUHBER OF W11'T LANDS 100 ----- Public use Leased 75 50 ..... 25 .•.. _------ ........••...••..•... ........•......•......•......•..... .•.•. . '-------....... .•.. .•....... ..•....•.. ..... OL- ~~------~~~~----~~~----~--~------~~--------~ Adams Boulder Weld Larimer Morgan COUNTY .... ~ Logan Washington Sedgwick ACRES OF WETLANDS 100 ----- Public use Leased 75 50 25 OL- ~~----~~~----~~~--~~------~------~~ Adams Boulder Weld Larimer COUNTY \ Morgan Logan Washington Sedgwick Figure 2.-Percentages of total number and aCl'GD of wetlando in sample sections open to public and leased hunting. �-18- Large wetlands seem to be most valuable for leasing because of their attractiveness to hunting clubs. Although Boulder County is close to the Denver area, it appears to contain few wetlands of sufficient size to be of value to hunting clubs for leasing. The increase in number of leased wetlands and corresponding decrease of public hunting in Weld County (Figure 2) may be explained by the fact that this is the closest eounty to Denver with extensive areas of riverbottom. These wetlands, plus others, provide desirable areas for leasing. Fishing--About 57 per cent of the number and acres of sample wetlands over five acres in size provide little or no fishing because permission can not be obtained from landowners or because game-fish populations are restricted due to shallow or turbid waters (Table 6). Thirty-one, or 66 per cent, of the remaining 47 wetlands are open to public fishing, with the other 16 divided about equally between private and leased fishing. Public fishing areas amount to about 75 per cent of the total wetland acreage, although this includes marginal land as well as surface water. There seems to be n~ apparent pattern in fishing rights with respect to distance from the foothills and population centers. Boating--Ninety, or 82 per cent, of the 110 wetlands over five acres in size are undesirable for speed-boating and water skiing because of their small size or because they are streams or rivers. Only wetlands with Over 75 acres of open water are considered of sufficient size to allow safe public use. Five (25 per cent) of the remaining 20 wetlands are closed to speed-boating and associated activities. PuhLf,c and leased boating constituted seven wetland areas each (35 per cent), with only one (5 per cent) under private use. Although leased areas make up a large number of the desirable boating sites, public boating areas account for over three times as much acreage as those that are leased. Therefore, the need for public hunting grounds is apparently more critical than the need for public fishing or boating areas. Importance of leasing--Twenty-two, or 20 per cent, of the 110 wetlands Involved are leased for one or more recreational uses. Hunting appears to be the primary purpose for leasing wetlands. Hlmting rights are leased on 19 (86 per cent) of these 22 areas, of which 10 are for hunting only. The remaining three areas are leased for fishing or boating only. Since only three leased areas restrict hunting, it is doubtful that much conflict occurs between fishing or boating interests and hunting interests as a result of leasing. This may well be expected, since these sports are active during different periods of the year. Likewise then, conflicts of this nature would seem to be slight where unleased areas are concerned. Leasing �Table 6.--Combined Recreational Use of 110 Wetland Areas1lin the Irrigated Portion of the South Platte Vall~. Type of Use No. Hunting Acres % Private Public Leased None 20 51 19 20 18.2 474.3 46.4 4,243.3 17.2 1,624.0 18.2 712.1 6.7 60.2 23.0 10.1 7 31 9 63 6.4 28.2 8.2 57.2 TOTAIB 110 100.0 100.0 no 100.0 7,053.7 % No. Fishing Acres % Boating Acres % % No. 304.7 2,259.3 429.6 4,060.1 4.3 32.0 6.1 57.6 1 7 7 9sY 0.9 6.4 6.4 86.3 191.7 1,416.5 459.4 4,986.1 2.7 20.1 6.5 70.7 7,053.7 100.0 110 100.0 7,053.7 100.0 % Y Excluding ponds and marshes less than five acres and ditches and canals. y All except five of these wetlands are unsuitable for speed-boating and water skiing because of their small size or because th~ are streams or rivers. 1 ((; I �-20- of wetlands for hunting, rather than for fishing and boating, is apparently the primary cause for the reduction in numbers and acres of wetlands open to public hunting. Type of mmership--Table 7 presents the type of ownership of the 110 sample wetlands over five acres in size. Together, private and corporation or company ownership accounts for 102, or 92.7,per cent, of these wetlands. Only eight (7.3 per cent) are owned by the public. These figures would undoubtedly be representative if they included all lands in the irrigated portion of the South Platte Valley, but they appear to be disproportionate when only wetlands are considered. Recreation is one of the greatest uses of wetlands and it would seem desirable for a higher percentage of wetlands to be in public ownership. Yet most recreationists are constantly trying to obtain permission from private landowners or are faced with the problem of losing public use of wetlands through leasing. Public ownership or management rights of 25 per cent of the large wetlands would probably not be too great a figure to strive for in the future. At any rate, wetlands for public recreation should meet the demand presently and in the future, regardless of the percentage of total wetland acreage needed to fulfill this objective. TBble 7.--Type of Ownership of 110 Wetland Area~in Portion of the South Platte Valley. Type of Ownership ~ -_ ..--r Corporation or Company the Irrigated Number Per Cent 22 80 8 110 20.0 72.7 7.3 100.0 ...... , Private Public TO TA Le> ------------------, l! Exci;cting p;~ and m;;;he; le;;than five acres and ditches and canals. Conclusions: The information presented has shown that leasing of wetlands for"hunting is most prominent in counties closest to Denver. Likewise, public hunting increases with an increase in distance from Denver. This suggests that a wetland acquisition program in the immediate future should be concentrated in the counties a~iacent to Denver; namely Adams, Boulder, Weld, and Larimer. These areas have the greatest potential public use because of their proximity to the main population centers. Acquisition of wetlands for public use in the above counties would help alleviate the loss of public recreation rights due to leasing. Many more people would be benefited under such a program. �-21- tie should not overlook the possibility of acqin.r-angpublic hunting grounds at greater distances from Denver in order to help distribute hunters more evenly throughout the valley and to take some of the pressure away from areas close to the main population center. Wetlands in counties some distance from Denver--Morgan, I.ogan,Washington, ::iedgwick--consist largely of riverbottoms along the South Platte River. These wetlands then, constitute the greatest potential with regard to public hunting areas in this portion of the South Platte Valley. Because the need for public hunting grounds in these northeastern counties is not as critical as closer to Denver, it is recommended that time be taken to conduct waterfowl studies on the state-owned Tamarack Ranch in Logan County to determine the feasibility of acquiring additional riverbottom tracts in this area. Such studies should include (1) the construction and evaluation of water developments aimed at increasing waterfowl production- and wintering-habitat; (2) the evaluation of planting waterfowl food-crops to attract more birds and to help control depredations; and (3) the determination of methods for improving waterfowl hunting and for obtaining adequate harvests in and along riverbottoms. At this time it is felt that we should concentrate most of o ur-efforts on acquiring rather large wetland areas; that is, of no less than one section (640 acres) in size, including drier areas adjacent to wetlands. This recommendation is based on the reasoning that (1) small wetlands will always exist in irrigated regions, but in the future large wetlands will continue to decrease in size as a result of general agricultural practices and probably be lost forever as waterfm'll habitat; (2) it is highly probable that larger wetlands can be purchased at a lower cost per acre than can smaller ones; (3) development and maintenance time and costs would undoubtedly be less for several large areas as opposed to many small, scattered areas of about the same total acreage; (4) large wetlands add more to total waterfowl production, wintering habitat, and public hunting area than smaller wetlands; and (5) larger areas are more likely to include a variety of habitat types, thereby producing a variety of game animals for hunting, which further justifies their acquisition. However, this recommendation does not mean that small wetlands should be entirely excluded from an acquisition program, because some of these areas with desirable characteristics can be of considerable value. Large reservoirs and lakes are owned by corporations or companies composed of private individuals or groups of farmers who depend upon these waters for irrigation of croplands and their general livelihood, thus the purchasing of such areas by the state is quite remote. However, it is possible for the State to lease the recreational rights on many of these areas or to obtain permission to manage the various resources through agreements or similar contractions. For all of the important large reservoirs and lakes not already under State management in the South Platte Valley an attempt should be made to secure these rights regardless of location, especially those of value as waterfowl Wintering areas and as public shooting grounds, while at the same time not overlooking other r'ecr-eat.Iona.l potentials. �Literature Cited Martin, A. C., N. Hotchkiss, F. M. Uhler, and W. S. Bourn. 1953. Classification of wetlands of the United States. U. S. Dept. Int., Fish and Wildl. Servo Spec. Sci. Rpt.: Wildl. No. 20, p. 14. Prepared by: Richard M. Hopper Approved by:Laurence E. Riordan Assistant Director,Research Approved by: Jack R. Grieb, Leader Waterfowl Project Date: ~J~an~u~a_r~y~,~1~96~3~ Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator _ �Table I.--Total Water Composition of Nine Stuqy Sections in Adams County. Wetland Category Ave. l>- Lakes and reservoirs Fonds and marshes over 5 acres Fonds and marshes 11 less than 5 acres= ::>treamsand rivers Ditches and canals No. Ave. Surface Acres of l'iater 3 0.33 41.9 4.66 20.9 2.32 62.8 31.1 6 0.67 11.1 1.23 104.1 11.57 115.2 57.1 12.80 13 1.44 -- -- -- -- 23.8 11.8 2.64 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Q -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 2.44 -- -- --- 2,J.1 TOTA~ 0 Acres of Marginal Land Ave. Total Acres % Ave. 6.98 -- Miles Ave. j ~ 0 0 -- 3.21 0.36 201.sY 100.0 22.4 3.21 0.36 11 Only total acres of wetland was determined for each of these smaller areas. :v Excluding ditches and canals. Table II.--Total Water Composition Wetland Cate~oEI Lakes and reservoirs Ponds and marshes over 5 acres Ponds and marshes less than 5 acred ::>treamsand rivers Ditches and canals TOTAL:) I t ro w I of 12 ::>tuqySections in Boulder County. No. Ave. ::>urfaceAcres of Water Ave. 6 0.50 260.7 21.72 2 0.17 6.5 5 0.42 2 Acres of Harginal Land Ave. Total Acres % 199.3 16.61 460.0 80.8 38.33 0.54 37.7 3.14 44.2 7.8 3.68 -- -- -- -- 7.9 1.4 0.66 0.17 9.7 0.81 47.1 3.92 56.8 10.0 -- -- -- -- -- -- lsY 1.25 -- --- -- -- 11 Only total acres of wetland was determined for each of these smaller areas. ~I Excluding ditches and canals. Ave. Miles Ave. 4.73 1.25 0.14 -- -- 5.27 0.44 568.931 100.0 47.41 6.52 0.54 �Table III.--Total Hater Composition of 56 study Sections in Weld County. ~'letlandCategory Lakes and reservoirs Ponds and marshes over 5 acres Ponds and marshes / less than 5 acres! ::;treamsand rivers Ditches and canals Ave. ::iurfaceAcres of Hater Ave. Acres of Marginal Land Ave. Total Acres % Ave. 7 0.12 258.4 4.61 96.1 1.72 354•.5 32.3 6.33 15 0.27 82.6 1.48 127.7 2.28 210.3 19.2 3.76 38 0.68 78.8 7.2 1.41 5 0.09 452.4 41.3 8.08 0.79 44.1 653.1 408.3 7.29 Miles Ave. I !;:! 4.15 0.07 42.54 0.76 46.69 0.83 _~.====~=================== 1/ Only total acres of wetland was determined for each of these smaller areas. 1"OTAL:i ., No. . __ :=:::41 1096.051100.0 19.57 ===-=-=====-=-=====t=~~~===:==2=Z=t- ~.Or."r"'" 31 Excluding ditches and canals. Table IV.--Total Water Composition Hetland Catego!:y' __.. lakes and reservoirs Ponds and marshes over 5 acres Ponds and marshes 1/ less than 5 acr'e s-. Streams and rivers Ditches and canals No. Ave. I I\) .;:J of 19 ::;tudySections in Larimer County. ::iurfaceAcres of Water_ fa tt 3"'. j Ave. = : -: ti tit. Acres of Marginal ==~~ =Land : it := Ave. :ee ft: ·ti tE Total Acres =====z liE % tz2 t Ave. Miles : = :::ss::::= 18 0.95 912.1 48.01 193.0 10.16 110.5.1 69.8 58.16 10 0.53 34.5 1.82 77.0 4.05 21 1.11 .5 0.26 42.5 2.24 287.0 15.11 111.5 7.0 5.87 38.8 2.4 2.04 329.5 20.8 17.34 1"OT.41.0 l,84.,Y 100.0 83.39 --1/ Only total acres of wetland was determined for each of these smaller areas. ~/ Excluding ditches and canals. Ave. 6.70 0.35 25.22 1.33 31.92 1.68 �Table V.--Total Water Composition of 20 StucW Sections in Horgan County. \vetland Category Lakes and reservoirs Ponds and marshes over 5 acres Ponds and marshes 1/ less than 5 acresStreams and rivers Ditches and canals _ TOTALS 1/ No. Ave. Surface Acres of Water Ave. Aores of Harginal Land Ave. Total Acres % 1 0.05 558.0 27.90 51.6 2.58 609.6 38.7 30.48 10 0.50 33.1 1.66 49.9 2.50 83.0 5.3 4.15 8 0.40 8.2 0.5 0.41 3 0.15 2/ 22- 1~10 36.7 -- 1.84 -- 836.3 -- 41.81 -- 873.0 Ave. Miles Ave. !:! 55.5 4.3.65. 3.22 0.16 11.25 0.56 14.47 0.72 2/ 1573.~ 100.0 78.69 Only total acres of wetland was determined for each of these smaller areas. 31 Excluding ditches· and canals. I I\) VI t Table VI.--Total Water Composition of 1421~tucW Sections in Logan and Washington Wetland Category Lakes and reservoirs Ponds and marshes over 5 acres Ponds and marshes 2/ less than 5 acresStreams and rivers Di tohes and canals No. Ave. Surface Acres of 1{ater Ave. Acres of Marginal Land 1 0.07 7.9 0.56 9 0.64 21.4 1.53 10 0.71 4 0.29 21 60.7 4.34 Counties. Ave. Total Acres % Ave. 62.6 4.47 70.5 4.3 5.04 139.7 9.98 161.1 9.7 11.51 15.3 0.9 1348.6 96.33 1409.3 TOTAUi 24 1.71 IT--o-rliytwo- study sections in Washington County. 2/ Only total acres of wetland was determined for each of these smaller areas. Excluding ditches and canals. 11 I Hiles Ave. 6.64 0.47 7.49 0.54 14.13 1.01 1.09 85.1 100.66 100.0 118.30 �Table VII.--Total Water Composition of Seven Stuqy Sections in Sedgwick County. No. Ave. ===04•.2= as:: I Surface Acres of Water a: Ave. Ave. Total Acres :2il Ave. 0 0 0 0 o o 0 o o 0 0 0 0 o o 0 o o 0 0 o o o 3 0.43 reservoirs Fonds and marshes over 5 acres Fonds and marshes 11 less than 5 acre~ Streams and rivers Ditches and canals TOTALb -J:.I ~ 30.0 4.29 57.59 403.1 433.1 11 Only total acres of wetland~as================~====;:========== determined for each of these smaller areas. Hiles Ave. 1&: 100.0 61.84 I ~ 4.32 0.62 1.87 0.27 100.0 61.87 ~I Excluding ditches and canals. ~ 0'\ • Table VIII. --Recreational Uses of Nine Wetland Areas~1in Ada~s County. Boating Acres % ~ 0 ~-0 0 No. 0 0 0 0 4 44.5 67.9 38.4 0 0 0 0 47.3 3 33.3 83.7 47.3 0 0 0 0 35.4 2 22.2 25.4 14.3 9Y 100.0 177.0 100.0 177.0 100.0 9 100.0 177.0 100.0 100.0 177.0 100.0 Acres % No. !'LEeof Use Private No. 0 0 0 0 0 Public 2 22.2 30.6 17.3 Leased 3 33.3 83.7 None 4 44.5 62.7 TOTAL;:) 9 100.0 % Fishing Acres 'B! 1° % .. 9 11 Excluding ponds and marshes less than five acres and ditches and canals. y All nine wetlands are unsuitable for speed-boating and water skiing because of their small size. �Table IX.--Recreationa1 Use of 10 Wetland Areas1lin Boulder County. Hunting Acres Type of Use No. % Private 1 10.0 Public 5 50.0 % No. 23.6 3.5 1 475.2 70.6 3 Fishing Acres % ' -% No. Boating % Acres % - 10.0 23.6 3.5 o o o 0 30.0 424.4 63.0 1 10.0 358.8 53.3 ~ Leased 2 20.0 140.6 20.9 1 10.0 99.2 14.7 1 10.0 99.2 14.7 None 2 20.0 33.9· 5.0 5 50.0 126.1 18.8 831 80.0 215.3 32.0 TOTA~ 10 100.0 673.3 100.0 10 100.0 673.3 100.0 10 673.3 100.0 1/ 2/ - 100.0 Excluding ponds and marshes less than five acres and ditches and canals. All eight wetlands are unsuitable for speed-boating and water skiing because of their small size or because they are rivers. ~ S H x 1 ro ~ Table X.--Recreational Uses of 27 Wetland AreaJi in Weld County. Type of Use No. Hunting, Acres % Private 9 33.3 321.6 31.6 5 Public 8 29.7 124.9 12.3 Leased 7 25.9 467.2 None 3 11.1 104.5 TOTAL'::i 1/ 2/ - Fishing Acres % % No. Boating Acres % % 18.5 268.6 26.4 1 3.7 191.7 18.8 8 29.7 159.5 15.7 0 0 0 0 45.9 1 3.7 16.7 1.6 2 7.4 39.3 3.9 10.2 13 48.1 573.4 56.3 2431 88.9 787.2 77.3 % No. 100.0 1018.2 100.0 27 100.0 1018.2 100.0 27 27 100.0 1018.2 100.0 Excluding ponds and marshes less than five acres and ditches and canals. All except one of these wetlands are unsuitable for speed-boating and water skiing because of their small size or because they are rivers. �Uses of 33 Wetland Areas!/in Table XI.--Recreational Hunting Acres % Larimer County. % No. Fishing Acres % No. Boating Acres % 0 0 0 % 0 Private 3 9.1 78.3 5.1 1 3.0 12.•5 % 0.8 Public 14 42.4 625.4 40.5 13 39.4 912.1 59.0 4 12.1 377.6 24.4 Leased 5 15.2 330.9 21.4 4 12.1 230.0 14.9 4 12.1 320.9 20.8 None 11 33.3 511.0 33.0 15 45.5 391.0 25.3 25Y 75.8 847.1 54.8 Type of Use No. 33 100.0 1545.6 100.0 33 100.0 1545.6 100.0 1/ Excluding ponds and marshes less than five acres and ditches and canals. TOTJ\L':i 33 100.0 ~ t;>;1 6 ~ 1545.6 100.0 except four of these wetlands are unsuitable for speed-boating and water skiing because of their small :v All size or because they are rivers. t ro co Uses of 14 Wetland Areas.Yin Horgan County. Table XII.--Recreational t Private 7 50.0 50.8 3.2 o o o 0 o o o 0 Public 5 35.7 913.2 58.3 1 7.1 609.6 38.9 1 7.1 609.6 38.9 Leased 2 Ih.3 601.6 38.5 o o o 0 o 0 o 0 None o o o 0 13 92.9 9.56.0 61.1 1:J/ 92.9 956.0 61.1 TOTAL0 Ih 100.0 14 100.0 1565.6 14 1565.6 100.0 1565.6 100.0 and ditches and canals. 100.0 Excluding ponds and mars~less than five acres :v1/ All 13 wetlands are unsuitable for speed-boating and water skiing because of their small size or because they are rivers. �Table XIII.--Recreational Use of 17 Wetland Area~in Hunting Acres % 0 0 Logan, Sedgwick, and Washington Counties. 0 0 Fishing Acres % 0 0 2074.0 100.0 2 11.8 85.8 4.1 1 5.9 70.5 3.4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 88.2 1988.2 95.9 lJi 9L..l 2003.5 96.6 17 100.0 2074.0 100.0 17 100.0 2074.0 100.0 17 100.0 2074.0 100.0 Type of Use No. Private 0 Public 17 100.0 Leased 0 None TOTAlli t1I /0 No. 0 Boating Acres % 0 0 % 0 % No. 0 1/ Excluding ponds and marshes less than five acres and ditches and oanals. ~/ All 16 wetlands are unsuitable for speed-boating and water skiing because of their small size or because they ~ S .~ are rivers. t ro r \0 ��-31JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO ------------------------------------ Project No. w-88-R-7 ----------------~--------------- Work Plan No. 7 1 --------------------------~------------~-------------------- Title of Job: Waterfowl Habitat Improvement Studies. Period Covered: Objectives: Waterfowl Surveys and Investigations April 1, 1961 to March 31, 1962. To improve waterfowl habitat, particularly on areas owned or controlled by the Game and Fish Department, but elsewhere if needed. To submit detailed habitat improvement plans for each area. Findings: The only work accomplished under this job this year was a review of conditions existing at the goose pond on Johnson's Ranch near Ovid, Colorado. Recommendations for improvement of operations for the breeding Canada goose flock were given on the ground to Richard Takes, Lloyd Tripplet, and Clark Ford. Further activity on this job was restricted by a lack of personnel, time, or request to review areas and make recommendations for habitat improvement. Prepared by: Date: Jack R. Grieb Waterfowl, Leader Approved by: Laurence E. Riordan Assistant Director,Research January, 1963 --------------~~--~~--------------- Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator ��January, 1963 -33JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO --------------~~~~~------------ Project No. Work Plan No. W~-~8~8_-R~-~8 ~W~at~er~f~ow~1_=Su~rv~ey~s-=a=n=d-=In=v~e~s~t=i~ __ 1 ------------------------------ Title of Job: Period Covered: 1 Waterfowl Production Survey April 1, 1962 to July 1, 1962. Personnel: Those cooperating on the 1962 counts were: Kenard Baer, Robert Ballou, Jack Frost, Charles Hayes, Jack Randall, Mitchell Sheldon, and Cecil Williams, U. S. Bureau of Sport Fisheries and Wildlife; George Wrakestraw, Wyoming Game and Fish Department; Art Kinski and Don Smith, Utah Game and Fish Department; and Jack Grieb, Norman Hughes, and William Rutherford, Colorado Game and Fish Department. Objectives: To determine, through statistically reliable sampling techniques, the number of ducks and geese, by species, produced on Colorado waterfowl breeding grounds. Techniques Used: After eight years of intensive study, present breeding-pair and production surveys have been consolidated into a breeding-pair inventory in late May and a production study in July. One week of the breeding study requires roughly 30 to 40 hours of aircraft use. All other work is done on the ground, usually in cooperation with local Bureau of Sport Fisheries and Wildlife personnel. On the basis of these studies, reports are made, as required, to the Bureau of Sport Fisheries and Wildlife, which constitute Colorado1s part in the annual cooperative breeding ground survey. The 1962 breeding-pair surveys were conducted within the period May 8 to June 5. During this time, ground counts were made in the Yampa Valley and Brown1s Park; and aerial counts were conducted in the South Platte, Cache la Poudre, and San Luis Valleys, and in North Park. As for the past several years, intensive brood surveys were not conducted this year due to a lack of time. Thus, this final breeding ground report considered only the breeding-pair surveys with last minute notes on weather and water conditions, accompanied by gross observations of early nesting success in the breeding areas. All survey methods and sample areas remained the same as in past years. In 1962, all flying was done with a DeHavilland Beaver airplane. Two observers were used in the San Luis Valley, while the North Park transects were flown with only one observer, thereby reducing the sample size to one-half. Other areas are sampled by blocks or sections, rather than by transects, and therefore the number of observers used does not influence sample size. �-34WATERFOWL PRODUCTION SURVEY William H. Rutherford Findings: Weather and water conditions in Colorado during the spring and early summer were considered to be excellent for waterfowl nesting and production. In general, water levels statewide were higher then normal. In eastern Colorado, most sloughs and ditches, and all reservoirs, were fullj and in North Park and on the western slope, meadows were flooded and water surface area was greater then normal. High country snow pack appears to be good., and mid-summer water supply should hold up well. In summary, then, overall weather and water conditions in Colorado seem to point toward an excellent year for waterfowl production and brood rearing. Table I--Summary of Colorado Duck Breeding Ground Population Estimates, 1962 with 1961 and the Eight-year Average for Comparison. Area San Luis Valley North Park South Platte Valley Cache la Poudre Valley Yampa Valley Brown is Park Total Estimated Breeding Pairs 8-year average, 1954-1961 21,717 15,567 8,515 3,167 3,722 3,853 4,596 5,188 2,522 1,848 2,295 1,637 4,924 2,875 2,728 82 117 120 29,764 19,375 Examination of the duck breeding-pair estimates by area (Table 1) reveal that the 1962 totaJ counts were up 22.1 per cent from 1961, and 87.5 per cent above the 1954-1961 eight-year average. It is appa.rent that Colorado is experiencing a yearto-year upward trend in breeding-pair numbers, possibly as a result of continuing drought conditions in the northern breeding grounds. Comparison of individual breeding ground estimates between 1962 and 1961 showed that the duck population i.nthe San Luis Valley was 39.5 per cent above last year and 155.0 per cent above the eight-year average. In the Yampa Valley, ducks were 71.3 per cent above last year and 80.5 per cent above the eight-year average. Duck populations in all other breeding grounds were slightly below those of last year, but only North Park and Brown's Park were also below the eight-year average. In the case of these two areas, the decrease is somewhat surprising in view of the fact that water levels are higher than last year. In Brown's Park, early high water filled some of the flood plain marshes, thus improving conditions over those of 1961j but in general, this area is experiencing a severe downward trend in breeding habitat quality. �.. -35- Table 2--Species Composition of the Colorado Breeding Duck Population; 1962, 1961, and the 1954-1961 Eight-year Average. Species Mallard Blue-w. Teal Pintail Gadwall Baldpate Shoveller Cinn. Teal Green-w. Teal Redhead Scaup Ruddy Duck Bufflehead Canvasback Am. Merganser N. Mex. Duck Wood Duck Ringneck Duck Number of Duc.ks 1962 1961 1954-1961 Average 16,186 29,691 11,767 1,084 1,501 991 1,451 1,446 2,237 4,187 1,830 3,454 66 321 293 340 1,360 713 471 629 571 232 1,296 511 621 1,372 943 536 835 351 60 220 67 2 26 75 111 120 59 29 14 1 56 TOTALS 36,334 29,425 19,367 Species compositiont Per cent 1962 1961 195 -1961 Average 60.7 55.2 73.5 4.1 5•. 1 3·7 4.0 7.6 7·5 14.2 9.5 9·5 1.1 1.5 0.2 4 .. 6 3 .• 7 0·9 1.6 1.6 3.3 0.6 4.4 2.7 3.8 3.2 3.2 1.4 1.8 2.8 0.2 0.8 0 .. 3 T 0.2 0.1 0.4 0.6 0.2 0.1 T 0.1 T 100.0 100.0 100 •• 0 Species composition of the breeding duck population was similar to past years (Table 2). Mallards were up and gadwalls, green-winged teals, and shovellers were down somewhat, with most other species holding at about the same level. Table 3 -- Number of Canada Geese by Breeding Classification, Moffat County, Colorado, 1962. 1 Nesting 2-yr. old No. Birds Total Estimated Area Pairs Pairs No. Goslings In Groups Birds Yampa-Craig to Juniper Spgs. 10 20 42 179 77 Juniper to Cross Mtn. 100 45 27 7 7 Lily Park 1 34 9 39 93 TOTALS 26 28 126 138 372 Green (Brown's Park) 4 4 21 20 57 Little (25 mi. upstream Snake from lower bridge) 6 4 53 73 GRAND TOTALS 211 36 36 147 502 11 Novice pairs which are potential nesters next year. This category includes both eggs and goslings counted. ?J g; �-36Table 4--Total Canada Geese Observed, Moffat County, Colorado, 1962. No. Geese Counted Per cent Change Area 1956-61 Ave. From 1961 From 1956-61 Ave. Yampa River 144 201 + 85 +158 372 Green River 44 62 + 30 8 57 Little Snake River 73 TOTALS 206 502 +108 + 75 11 11 !/ Includes Yampa and Green data only. Table 5 -- Number of Canada Goose Goslings Observed, Moffat County, Colorado,1962. Per cent Change Number of Goslings Area From 1961 From 1956-61 Ave. 1956-61 Ave. Yampa River 126 74 + 70 +138 53 Green River 21 8 26 +162 - 19 Little Snake River --!/ TOTALS 147 82 79 + 79 + 86 It is doubtful if any nests were hatched in the 25-mile stretch of the Little Snake River covered in this survey, because of high water. 11 In 1962, the western slope Canada goose breeding area contained the largest number of adult geese and goslings observed since the beginning of the study in 1966. Table 3, 4, and 5 list the numbers, age composition, locations, and past year's comparisons of this breeding flock. Brown's Park (Green River) held more geese than last year, when all marshes were completely dry, but the habitat was still not as attractive as in former years as witnessed by the eight per cent decline from the six-year average. If Flaming Gorge Dam begins water impoundment this fall, the days of high flood water are over in Brown's Park; and, in turn, we can write off this area as a significant Canada goose breeding ground. The goose population on the Yampa River increased 85 per cent over 1961, and 158 per cent over the 1956-1961 average. No information is available for past years on the Little Snake River, since this year marked the first time this area has been surveyed. The steady and healthy increase of this goose flock for the past several years strongly suggests that we recognize and are controlling the factors which caused the sharp population decline in the early 1950 IS. It further indicates that the restrictive harvest type of management employed by the Bureau of Sport Fisheries and Wildlife, and individual states up and down the flyway of this flock, will be a necessary part of future flock management. Specifically, three different factors appear to be responsible for this year's encouraging increase in this goose flock: (1) The protective seasons of the past, not only in Colorado but especially in California Game Management Unit 22; (2) excellent water supplies in the areas which attracted and held birds; and (3) early high water which forced pairs to choose nesting sites on more permanent type islands, thus preventing heavy loss due to flooding. �-37- Fall Flight Prediction: It is anticipated that fall duck flights from Colorado's 1962 production will be considerably above average, due to the increased breeding population coupled with expected excellent water supplies through the summer. Geese present a vastly improved status over that of previous years, but continued hunting restrictions are still very much in ordero We must be careful not to permit our original mistake of over-harvesting. The recommended bag and possession limit for Moffat County for the 1962 season is one gooseo Prepared by: William H. Rutherford Senior Game Biologist Approved by: Jack R. Grieb Leader, Waterfowl Date: ~J~a=n=u=a=ry~,~1~9~6~3 Approved by: Laurence E. Riordan Assistant Director, Research Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator _ ��January, 1963 -39- JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO ------------~~~~---------------- Project No. ~W_-~3_8_-~R~-_1~5 Work Plan No. 6 ----------~------------------ Job No. Period Covered: ~l=l~ ~ ~D_e_e_r_-_E_l_k~I~n~v_e_s_t_i~g~a~t_i_o_n_s _ Damage Studies Methods of Evaluati?g Deer and Elk Use o_f_A __l_f_a_l_f_a __un __d_e_r __S~u_mm __e_r_-_l_o_n~g~U_s_e-• _ April 1, 1961 through March 31, 1962. ABSTRACT The necessary legal agreement with Mr. Charles Clark was drawn up and signed by both Mr. Clark and the Colorado Game and Fish Department. The study field was surveyed and the test plots randomly located and marked on the field. A weather station consisting of a hygrothermograph was set up at the study field so that maximum and minimum air temperatures could be recorded. Very high correlation as shown to exist between high temperatures on the study field and temperatures at the U. S. Weather Bureau Station near Rifle, Colorado. A significant relationship between low temperatures was also shown. Counts of deer using the study area showed that the same general pattern existed in late summer counts as was shown in early spring counts in previous studies of this type in Colorado. Recommendations: 1. No recommendations for management can be made at this stage of the study. 2. Harvest hay and weigh it in all plots in order to establish the variation between plots before the plots are fenced and harvest data taken. This harvest should be on both first and second cuttings of the hay. 3. Continue the weather observations in order to determine if the high correlations continue from year to year. 4. If time is available, count deer on the study field with the aid of the portable tower and light. 5. Work out the sample design and install the soil moisture stacks in the study plots. �-40Objectives: 1. To determine if any actual loss in production of alfalfa occurs from summerlong grazing by deer or elk, and if a loss occurs, how much. 2. To correlate the actual amount of use by game animals on the study plots, as to numbers of animals and length of time grazed on the plots, with changes in production, so that estimates of game use may be converted to a change in pounds of hay produced. Techniques Used: 1. Test Plots A series of randomly selected paired plots were set up on the study field. The plots were 30 x 200 feet in size, and were marked only at the corners. Deer Counts - A portable counting tower was used in the study area to count deer on three different alfalfa fields on Mr. Clark's ranch. 2. The tower and spotlight were set up for three days at each location, then moved to the next area. The deer counted with the aid of binoculars until dark, at which time the spotlight was used. Counts were started at 6:00 P.M. and continued until daylight the next morning. Counts were taken every half-hour until 9:00 P.M., every hour until midnight and every other hour until daylight. Since counting had to be done at three locations we decided that some sort of portable counting tower would be better than building a permanent tower at each location. A.ccordingly, a design was drawn up by M. C. Coghill, W. C. A. at the Sapinero Game Management Area, and the tower constructed by the author and Mr. Coghill. The actual construction of the tower was pipe and angle iron welded together (Figures 7 and 8). The same 1,500 watt aircraft landing light was used on the tower and power for the light was obtained from a gasoline powered generator carried on the bed of the trailer. A 12 foot camper trailer was parked by the tower and used as shelter and sleeping quarters by the biologist while counting was being carried on. 3. Weather observations - A weather instrument shelter and a hygrothermograph were set up at the south end of the field where the intensive study was to be carried out. Charts were changed at weekly intervals in order to have a complete record of air temperature and relative humidity during the growing season. Findings: None of the harvest data could be collected this year because the legal agreement between Mr. Clark and the Colorado Game and Fish Department was not completed in time. �-41Another delay was experienced when it was found that the hay baler that was to be used on the study was in such poor mechanical condition that it was not feasible to repair it. The decision was finally reached that the Game Management Division could buy new haying machinery out of the Damage Control budget and let Federal Aid use it on this particular study. Arrival of the baler and rake was not until most of the summer was gone. 1. Test Plots The field chosen for study was photographed from t he air by Mr. Norman Hughes, pilot for the Colorado Game and Fish Department. The field was measured on the ground and the scale of the photo was determined. A map of the field was drawn from the photo. The map was stratified into three levels in order to locate study plots near the edge of the field and also the center of the field. This type of sampling was used in order to give every portion of the field an equal chance to be included within a plot, and still not bias the study by having more plots near the edges of the field where deer use is the heaviest. Seven pairs of plots (Figure 1) were set up randomly within the three strata on the field. One plot in each pair was randomly chosen to be fenced. These plots were marked at the corners with steel posts, but nothing else was accomplished on the study plots during segment 15 of this project. Deer Counts - Delays in getting materials and trial and error construction of the tower precluded any counts of deer using the study area until August 7,1961. Counts were then made on a more or less regular basis until September 5, 1961. 2. Counts were taken on three areas of Mr. Clark's ranch in order to get use on his whole place, but only one of these areas was to be studied intensively. Deer use was very light compared to spring deer counts at the Billy Creek Game Management Area (Federal Aid Quarterly Report, July, 1960). However, the. same general pattern was evident in that a peak in deer numbers occurred right after dark (Figures 5 and 6). 3. Weather Observations - The charts on the hygrothermograph were changed at weekly intervals from July 11 to October I, 1961. Temperature data from the U. S. Weather Bureau Station located six miles northeast of Rifle, Colorado was extracted from their monthly summaries and compared with the high and low temperatures that were recorded at the study field, about eight miles north of the Government station. correlation analysis was run on the daily high temperatures at both weather stations and also on the daily low temperatures. A. Figure 3 shows the coefficient of correlation and the regression line for the maximum daily air temperatures while figure 4 shows the same inf~mation for the minimum temperatures. �-42Extremely high correlation was shown to exist between the maximum air temperatures at the Government station and the Game and Fish Department station on the study area. Less correlation, but still reasonably good, was shown to exist between the minimum air temperatures at the two stations. This indicates that we can very accurately predict the high temperatures at the study field by using only the official temperatures at the Weather Bureau Station. Less accuracy can be expected if we predict the low temperatures at the same basis. Prepared by: Date: R_a~ym o_n_d~J_. B_o~y_d Approvedby: January, 1963 --------------------~~~~~~~------- Laurence E. Riordan Assistant Director, Research Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �January, 1963 -43JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO Project No. W~-~3~8_-_R_-_l~5~ ----------------------------------- ~D~e~e~r~-~E~l~k~In~v~e~s~t~i~g~a~t~i~o _ Work Plan No. J~ 2 Populations Surveys ------------------------~~--------~~~~~~~~~---White River Elk Study ~. 7 ------------------~---------------- Period Covered: April 1, 1961 through March 31, 1962. ABSTRACT The elk winter range in the main White River drainage was surveyed with 642 transects that sampled something more than 149,435 acres. Browse composition, density, and vigor, soil condition and amount of elk use was determined on each transect. Pre and post season sex and age counts were taken of the elk on the study area by using a helicopter and recording the classifications on a tape recorder. A population, after the hunting season, of 8,920 animals was projected by using the sex and age data. The total kill on the study area, as determined by card projections, was 1,964 elk which was composed of l,4h4 bulls, 449 cows and 51 calves. The success of nonresident hunters was 31.47 per cent while that of residents was 27.25 per cent. Recommendations 1. Continue to survey.the winter range on the study area until all of the available range has been surveyed. Determine areas where range improvements or other practices might be applied to improve winter range carrying capacity, and try these various practices on a pilot area to see how practical they might be on a large scale program. 2. 3. Continue the pre and post season sex and age classification counts with the helicopter and get at least 1,000 animals in each sample. Complete coverage of the study area is a must in this phase of the study. 4. Run several check stations around the study area in order to get data on the sex and age of the kill, hunter effort, wounding loss, blood samples, ear tag returns a~d neck band sightings. 5. Compile data from the card projections that will help in a complete picture of the kill and success of the hunters using the study area. Objectives To evolve a sound management plan for the White River elk based on factual biological data. �-44Techniques Used Phase A - Range Surveys: The standard Interagency Big Game Range Analysis technique will be used to sample the winter range in the study area. A complete copy of the procedures are already on file in the Regional Office of the Fish and Wildlife Service in Albuquerque, New Mexico, so all of the items will not be repeated here. In order to more completely understand the terms that are included in this report, particularly in the section on range surveys, a few definitions will be given here. Browse Condition Class Scorecard COMPOS ITION High: Desirable and intermediate species (must be two or more) making up at least 75% or more of the composition, with desirables at least 45% of the composition. Medium: Desirable and intermediate species making up 50% or more of the composition, with desirables at least 15% of the composition. Low: Desirable and intermediate species making up less than 50% of the composition. DENSITY Very Dense: High Medium Low 66% plus 36% to 65% 16% to 35% 15% minus VIGOR High: Hedging on key species mostly light or moderate with ~ess than 16% of the plants heavily hedged, and decadent minus young less than 15% of the total number of plants. Medium: Hedging on key species mostly moderate, not more than 35% heavily hedged and decadent minus young not more than 35%. Low: More than 35% of the plants of the key species heavily hedged or minus young more than 35%. decadent Soil Stability Condition Class High: Soil movement slight or none, usually 65 or more hits on ground cover and rocks. Medium: Soil movement moderate, usually 35-65 hits on ground cover rocks. �-45Low: Soil movement advanced, usually less than 35 hits on ground cover and rocks. Phase B - Population Analysis: Step 1 - Sex and age class composition. The herd sex and age structure will be determined from pre and post season sex ratio counts and the age composition of the kil14 Thepre and post season ratios will be obtained by using a helicopter to locate and classify the elk. All classifications will be done on a tape recorder and later the date will be extracted. The age structure of the kill will be determined by setting up nine check stations around the study area and looking at each elk as it is brought out the hunting area. Age will be determined by tooth wear and replacement of 0 Step 2 - Pre and post season population estimate. The population estimate will be determined by mathematical projection of the pre and post season sex and age ratio data. This projection will be based upon a formula found in Rasmussen and Doman (1943). Step 3- Abundance and distribution on sumner and winter ranges. The distribution of the elk as they are counted with the helicopter will be mapped and compared, both pre and post season, in order to get an idea of how much hunting pressure moves the elk around within the study area. Phase C - Hunter Harvest Surveys: Most of the hunter harvest data will be obtained through post mortem examination of the animals at special check stations in the study area and from hunter report card returns. The elk aging technique, based upon tooth replacement and wear, worked out by Quimby and Gabb (1957) will be used for determining the age composition of the kill. The age-pyramid method of analysis will be used to aid in interpreting these data. An effort will be made to determine the influence of present management practices, hunting pressure and distribution, hunter selectivity, weather, etc. on the success ratio and sex and age structure of the kill. Findings Phase A - Range Surveys: During the sumner field season of 1961, within the White River Elk Study area, the student crews ran a total of 642 transects that sampled something more than 149,435 acres of elk winter range. 'I'he vegetation consisted of four separ-at.etypes according to the Interagency Blg Game Range Analysis classification of range types. There were four basic vegetat.ive types found to be present on the area surveyed (Figure 1). They consisted of Aspen, Pinon,-Juniper, Mountain Browse and Sagebrush. �Within the four classifications were 14 sub-types consisting of the following: 1. Aspen with Snowberry understory (lO-A-SYM) - - - - - 17,162 acres 2. Aspen with Serviceberry understory (10 A-AME) - - - 13,891 acres 3. Aspen and Douglas Fir mixed (10 A-DF) - - - - 141 acres 4. Aspen with Oregon Grape understory (10 A-Mare) - - - 162 acres 5. Pinon-Juniper with Mountain Mahogany understory (9 PJ-Cemo) - - - - 2,820 acres 6. Mountain Browse consisting of Serviceberry (5-AME) - - - 4,516 acres 7. Mountain Browse consisting of Mountain Mahogany (5-Cemo) - - - - - 5,146 acres 8. Mountain Browse consisting of Rabbitbrush (5-Chvi) - - - - - - - - 6,454 acres 9. Mountain Browse consisting of Oregon Grape (5-Mare) - - - - - 132 acres 10. Mountain Browse consisting of Squawapple (5-PER) - - - - - - 180 acres 11. Mountain Browse consisting of Chokecherry (5-Prvi) 245 acres 12. Mountain Browse consisting of Oakbrush (5-QUE) - - - - - - - 33,406 acres 13. Mountain Browse consisting of Snowberry (5-SYM) - - - 24,307 acres 14. Sagebrush type (4,::.A.rtr) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 40,873 acres 149,453 acres For the purpose of this report only general statements will be given for browse condition, density and vigor, soil stability and amount of elk use as determined by pellet counts on the transects. A complete detailed summary has been worked up for the 1961 surveys, but it will not be included here. When all of the winter range has been completely surveyed (end of summer 1963) a complete report will be written to cover all three summers work on the elk winter range. Generally the condition of the various types are as folows: Table 1 - Summary of the Browse Composition, Density and Vigor on Elk Winter Range as Determined by 642 Transects in the White River Drainage of Colorado, 1961. Vegetative Composition Type Low Med. High ! 10A11 49 i 57 2 9 PJ 8 7 0 5 AME 10 12 5 Cemo 0 18 5 5 Chvi 6 1 1 5 Mare 0 0 1 5 PER 0 1 0 5 Prvi I 0 2 0 5 QUE 144 19 19 64 5 SYM 73 3 4 Artr 2 92 35 Total for All types 327 75 )240 12 51 % 37 Ii I I I Density VIgor Low Med High Low Med. High 12 51 8 54 106 3 14 0 12 1 4 3 4 0 8 13 10 9 2 14 6 7 14 3 2 0 2 4 3 5 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 2 60 119 29 62 3 91 48 87 20 84 36 5 20 96 13 47 25 57 98 15 291 45 253 40 131 148 20 23 363 57 �-47It can be seen from the above table that approximately 76,221 acres of the area surveyed has a medium composition (see procedures for definitions), while 55,298 acres are low in compo,Sition and 17,934 acres are in ,a high composition category. DenSity of browse species within the area surveyed indicates that 67,254 acres are medium in density, 57,781 acres are high in density and 22,418 acres are low in density. Vigor of browse plants shows 34,374 acres are medium in vigor, 85,188 acres are high in vigor, while 29,891 acres are low in browse plant vigoro Table 2-Summary of Soil Conditions on Elk Winter Range as determined by 642 Transects in the White River Drainage of Colorado, 1961. Vegetative Type 10 A Low 1 16 9 14 2 0 0 0 41 23 33 9 PJ 5 AME 5 Cemo ~ Chvi Mare 5 PER 5Prvi 5 QUE 5 SYM 4 Artr Total for All Types 139 22 % Soil Condition High Med. I:) 101:) 1 0 4 9 8 1 4 2 1 0 1 0 1 1 84 57 62 55 64 32 234 36 269 42 Information gained from the soil ratings listed above show that 53,803 acres are in medium condition, 62,770 acres are in high condition, while 32,880 acres are low in soil condition rating. Elk use of the winter range area, as determined by pellet group counts on each transect are shown below: Table 3- Summary of Elk Pellet Group Counts on 642 Transects in the White River Drainage of Colorado, 1961. Pellet Groups Vegetative Type Winter Summer 802 10 A 386 44 9 PJ 3 211 12 5 AME 19 305 5 C'emo 34 7 5 Chvi 0 1 5 Mare 1 5 5 PER 18 5 Prvi 5 5 Que 3,571 367 278 5 SYM 936 4 Artr 245 1,177 Total for all t.ypes 7,284 1,323 85 15 % I �-48- Phase B - Population Analysis: 1. Sex and Age-Class Composition of the White River Elk Herd. The 1961 pre season sex and age ratio counts of the White River elk herd were made October 2, 3 and 4. The counts are tabulated as follows: Date 10/2 A. M. Bulls Spikes Cows 5 o 4 3 4 18 1 1 1 10 10 33 2 5 8 8 6 3 1 5 10 38 37 7 26 3 o 1 7 17 4 10 10/2 P. M. 14 10/3 14 A. 2 M. 6 11 o o 10/3 P.M. 10/2 A. M. Calves 3 11 9 5 18 28 Total 12 36 24 17 66 76 17 68 6 28 17 69 Location Head of Turret Creek Head of Dry Sweetwater Creek Dry Sweetwater Creek South Fork Falls Mouth of Park Creek Between Solar and Park Creek Lost Solar Creek .Above South Fork Campground West Marvine Creek 12 7 1 1 32 28 22 10 91 Hack Lake Red Dirt Creek Derby Creek 8 6 12 13 59 17 40 51 1 11 45 16 39 46 7 126 41 97 121 19 2 Trappers Lake Area Trappers Lake East Fork of Williams Fork South Fork of Williams Fork Beaver Creek Lost Park South Side of Pagoda Peak 5 2 6 10 34 24 3 9 74 o 11 4 18 6 8 3 18 12 6 39 42 28 84 5 6 14 3 4 18 10 10 1 o o 35 35 5 5 6 5 o o 1 1, 1 9 Total 135 ojo 9 o o 4 3 6 145 11 19 40 623 46 4 3 13 32 461 34 1 10 10 14 36 87 Deep Creek-Sweetwater Divide Deep Creek Grizzly Creek West Side of South Fork Burro Mountain Oak Ridge West Rifle Creek East Rifle Creek Middle Elk Creek East nein-Top Canyon Creek 1,364 A total of 1,364 elk were classified resulting in a ratio of 47 bulls to 100 cows, and 74 calves to 100 cows. The 1961 post season sex and age ratio counts were made December 13, 14 and 15. The counts are tabulated as follows: �-49Date Bulls Spikes Cows Calves Total 12;13 o o o 1 5 o 20 11 55 47 13 10 53 35 33 23 114 82 Location Mitchell Creek Storm King Canyon Creek Elk Creek 3 9 9 15 27 53 13 25 56 34 63 122 Middle Rifle Creek North Elk Creek Burro Mountain 3 5 4 4 12/14 1 1 1 P.M. o 42 46 15 25 19 o 8 44 46 17 22 18 5 94 102 39 48 39 13 Sweetwater to Derby Cr. Derby Creek South Side Sweetwater Cr. Deep Creek Beaver Creek Little Beaver 12/15 o 5 10 2 23 9 9 75 60 68 12 13 35 10 71 41 49 41 60 56 60 8 145 125 153 38 8 33 22 Buford Peak to Hill Cr. Park and Solar Creek Upper South Fork Hill Creek to Buford (high) Buford to Trappers Lake Trappers Lake Drainage Marvine Creek North Sideof Main White Lost Creek to Buford South Fork of Williams Fork East Fork of Williams Fork A.M. o 12/13 3 Po M. 2 4 12/14 3 6 A. Mo o A. M. o 4 o 7 o o o 2 4 1 6 o 7 4 7 7 79 40 54 40 78 17 164 85 110 85 818 44 1,864 4 --------------"--------------------------~-Total 50 115 % 3 6 881 47 A total of 1,864 elk were classified, resulting in a ratio of 19 bulls per 100 cows and 93 calves per 100 cows. The classification counts in 1961 averaged well within the ranges found in previous years work. All of the classification counts since the study was initiated are listed below for comparative purposes4 Pre Season Classification Counts Year Bulls* Cows Calves 1957 1958 1959 1960 1961 100 87 146 218 280 226 164 317 325 623 123 117 205 209 461 * Spikes are included with the bulls. Total Cows Bulls 449 368 668 752 1,364 100 100 100 100 100 44 53 46 67 47 Ratio Calves 54 71 64 64 74 �-50- Post Season Classification Counts Cows Calves Total Cows i'957 50 278 279 100 607 1958 356 93 320 100 769 81 1959 238 222 541 100 1960 451 409 93 100 953 1961 881 165 818 1,864 100 *Spikes are included with the bulls. Year Bulls* Ratio Bulls 18 25 34 21 19 Calves 100 90 93 91 93 Table 4 - Age and Sex of Kill Checked thru Nine Special Stations - 1961 Big Game Season. Check Calf 1 2 4 6 3 8 5 10+ 7 9 Station M F M F M F M F M F M F M F F* M F F* F* Meeker 10 129 16 33 14 14 14 5 7 2 1 6 4 0 5 2 1 0 1 Newcastle 10 13 8 3 53 11 18 10 3 2 2 6 1 5 0 0 1 1 3 Deep Creek 1 4 43 2 10 1 4 7 21 2 2 0 3 3 0 0 1 2 1 Rifle 2 4 61 4 12 1 3 2 3 5 6 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 Phippsburg 1 0 0 16 38 2 1 0 6 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 Hamilton 0 0 0 13 0 2 2 3 33 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 Hayden 0 0 0 32 0 5 :2 1 :0 0 7 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 McCoy 1 0 8 0 1 4 1 0 0 2 3 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Idaho Spgs.O 0 8 0 2 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 Total 24 29 405 38 125 36 39 31 31":10 14 12 5 12 9 ~1 2 4 3 * No males in sample. Summary of the Elk Aging Data 53 6.3% - - - 443 53.4% - 161 19.4%) -- 92.4% 70 8.4%) - - - 41 4.90) - - - 26 3.10 17 2.0% 9 3 4 3 ~ jaws actually examined for age. The total 1961 elk kill in the eight game management units within the study area was determined by the Game Management Division to be 1,964 animals. These figures are based upon projections from hunter card returns to the department. �-51Of the 1,964 elk killed on the study area, the nine check stations actually checked or looked at 1,182 of them. Thus the data obtained is based upon a 61% sample of the kill. Of the 1,182 elk that were brought through the check stations, enough jaws were brought out to enable the research personnel to actually age 830 elk by tooth wear and replacement techniques. Table 4 indicates the sex and age makeup of the elk actually aged through the nine check stations. In addition to the 830 animals that were actually aged by dentition, we were able to assign ages to an additional 127 elk based upon antler formation. One hundred and nine yearlings were added because they had typical spike antlers and 18 4-point bulls were added to the 2-year old class. Adding these two classes into those obtained from Table 4 will give a total of 552 yearlings and 179 2-year olds. These figures will show a 57.7% yearling kill and an 18.7% 2-year old kill. Therefore, 94.3% of the kill checked was under five and one-half years old. Population Estimate Results of Classification Counts and Hunter Harvest: Bulls 280 1,464 165 Pre season Kill Post season Cows b23 449 881 Calves 461 51 818 Total 1,364 1,964 1,864 Cows and Calves 1,084 500 1,699 Ratios and Kill Pre season ratio Kill Post season ratio Bulls 47 1,464 19 Cows 100 449 100 Calves 74 51 93 Bulls and Unantlered 1 3.9 1 10.3 Population Projection x = number of cows in fall before the hunting season • •47 x = number of bulls in the fall before the hunting season. x - 449 = number of cows after the hunting season • •47 x - 1,464 = number of bulls after the hunting season • •19 (x - 449) also = number of bulls after the hunting season. Thus: .47 x - 1,464 .19. (x - 449) .19 x - 85 .47 x - 019 x - 1,464 - 85 .28 x = 1,379 x = 4,925 cows in the fall before the hunting season • •47 x 3,664 calves in the fall before the hunting season. �-52Total fall population = 10,884 Less total kill = 1,964 Total post season pop.= 8,920 Composed of: Bulls 803 ( 9%) Cows 4,192 (47%) Calves 3,925 (44%) Phase C ..:.. Hunter Harvest Surveys: The sex ratio of the elk kill, as determined by the hunter report card returns and check station data are listed in Tables 5 and 6. Table 5 - Sex Ratio of the 1961 Elk Kill on the White River Elk Study Area - Based upon Hunter Report Cards. Unit Bulls 0 Cows 0 Calves 12 13 23 24 25 26 33 34 Total 22 184 324 396 79 85 91 79 100 4 97·9 62.8 177 70.0 149 79.8 17 72.6 26 64.1 50 71.8 26 2.1 34.3 26.3 17·2 22.2 35.2 23.6 15 21 3 6 1 5 2.9 3.7 3.0 5.1 0·7 4.5 1,464 74.5 449 22·9 51 2.6 1,964 110 Table 6 - Sex Ratio of the 1961 Elk Kill on the White River Elk Study Area Based Upon Check Station Data. 0;0 Unit Bulls Cows Calves Total % % 12 13 23 24 25 26 33 34 Total 154 664 111 ~6 74 14 57 26 906 96.2 6 100.0 66.•9 43 72.4 127 87.0 10 4 70.0 62.6 26 74.3 7 76.6 223 3.8 25·9 22 .. 6 11.8 20.0 28.6 20.0 18.9 12 28 1 2 8 2 53 7.2 5•. 0 1.2 10.0 8.8 5·7 4.5 160 64 166 561 85 20 91 35 1,182 An analysis of the yearling kill, both by card projection and by check station data, is shown below in Table 7. �-53Table 7 - Yearling Kill - 1961 - White River Elk study A.rea Check Station Data Card Projection Number Unit Number % % 12 13 23 24 25 26 33 34 Total 91 73 217 263 29 25 50 42 790 40.16 39·00 42.08 46.54 29·55 21.73 35.29 38.10 36.60 83 29 76 161 29 4 31 15 428 68.6 60.4 57·1 46.1 48.3 22.2 43.0 51.7 51.6 Table 8 - Yearling Bull Antler Points - 1961 - White River Elk Study Area Number of Points 1 -1 1 -2 1 -3 2 -2 2 -3 2 - 4 330 35 4 67 15 2 3 - 3 3 - 4 5 5 4 -4 2 The above table shows that 29.03%of all yearling bulls killed and checked in 1961 had more than the tlItypical"single spike on each side. The two most common antler formations noted along with the typical single spike was 2 - 2, 14.4%and 1 - 2, 7. 5%. Table 9 below shows the number of antler points by age class of an additional 218 bulls older than yearlings. The age of these bulls was determined by tooth wear and replacement. Table 9 - Antler Points by Age Class of Elk Killed on the White River Elk Study A.rea During the 1961Big Game Season. Number of Age Class (by Dentition) Points 2 6 7 3 i 4 ! 5 1- 1 2 - 2 2 -3 2 5 3 - 3 3 - 4 3 - 5 4 4 4 4 5 6 1 I 4 2 1 1 2 2 29 19 1 5 - 5 63 4 5 - 6 6 -6 1 2 4 6 - 7 5 2 I tI i 1 �-54The success ratio on hunters choice permits in the study area, based again on the card projections, is shown below in Table 10. Table 10 - Total Elk Kill On hunters Choice Permits - 1961 White River Elk Study Area Number Success ,mals K~.led on ~~rmits Unit Area of Ratio of Permits Permits Bulls Cows Calves Total Kill 12 None 13 None 23 E 26 177 15 218 24 E 500 84.0% 32 149 21 202 . AJ 25 33 34 26 6 7 6 7 e4 X X X w Total 150 75 725 80.7% 52.0 eo.ora 17 50 26 26 _435 3 1 5 6 51 26 58 37 39 5eo,,, The success ratio of all hunters on the study area, by unit, is snown in Table 11. Tabel 11 - Total Elk Kill on the wnite River Elk Study Area, 1961 Big Game Season. Numc ber- Unit 12 13 23 24 25 26 33 34 Tltal of Hunters Success Ratio 874 645 1,796 1,663 433 403 721 479 7,014 26.09 29.15 28.73 33.67 22.86 29.03 19.69 22.96 2b.0Q20 Bulls 226 184 324 396 79 85 91 79 1,464 Animals Killed Cows Calves 4 177 149 1:726 50 :g6 449 15 21 3 6 1 5 51 Total 226 188 516 566 99 117 142 110 1,9~4 The total elk kill and success ratio of non resident hunters in 1961 is shown in Table 12. �-55Table 12 - Numbers of Non Resident Hunters, Total Kill and Success Ratio During the 1961 Big Game Season on the White River Elk Study Area. Number Success Unit of I Calves Total Ratio Cows Hunters Bulls I 44 44 12 28.57 154 I I 29 30.53 29 13 95 125 35.01 49 71 23 5 357 114 6 24 34.34 76 332 I 32 18 27.69 65 15 25 3 ! 26 16 19 56 33·93 3 22.56 18 12 30 133 33 I ! 14 8 6 24.56 34 57 i , 11 31.46 Total 105 1,249 277 393 i I I The total elk kill and success ratio of the resident elk hunters during the 1961 big game season in the study area is shown in Table 13. Table 13 - Numbers of Resident Hunters, Total Kill and Success Ratio During the 1961 Big Game Season on the Whitel River Elk Study Area. I I Number I i \ Success Unit of Cows Calves Total Ratio Hunters I Bulls i 182 182 12 25.28 720 4 28.91 13 550 159 155 I 128 10 I 27.17 23 1,439 1 253 391 I 24 452 320 117 1,331 15 33.96 II I I 64 14 81 22.01 368 25 3 I i I 6 28.24 26 98 69 23 347 ; i I 1 112 588 38 19·05 33 73 I 422 20 34 71 96 22·75 5 ; i 1,1<:37 J344 40 Total 1,571 5,765 27·25 I I I i I I I I The non residents that hunted in the study area came from 31 states. A. breakdown of the hunting pressure, by unit, by state of residence, is shown in Table 14. �.--: -56Table 14 - Hunting Pressure by Unit, by state of Residence, in the White River Elk Study Area, 1961 Big Game Season. 26 Total Unit 12 13 23 24 25 33 34 Resident 720 550 1,439 1,331 Non Resident: Arizona 16 5 11 fl.rkansas 6 11 16 30 63 6 ;California 49 137 119 19 13 9 5 357 6 8 'Florida 8 27 5 Georgia 2 3 5 Idaho 3 3 8 6 6 16 Illinois 3 13 3 55 Indiana 6 2 8 3 30 3 5 3 8 14 Iowa 3 3 8 8 11 8 Kansas 14 19 19 90 3 Kentucky 6 8 2 8 22 11 Michigan 3 Minnesota 5 17 3 3 3 3 46' 30 Missouri 22 3 2 30 11 149 5 Mississippi 3 3 4 Montana 4 Nebraska 5 2 11 2 5 14 39 New Jersey 2 2 New York 6 3 3 2 New Mexico 3 24 13 3 3 2 8 North Carolina 3 3 North Dakota 3 3 17 Ohio 6 5 3 3 11 11 10 6 2 Oklahoma 5 3 8 56 8 6 Pennsylvania 5 19 6 South Dakota 6 Tennessee 6 3 3 Texas 16 41 30 161 11 11 5 30 17 Utah 8 6 13 3 3 33 West Virginia 3 3 Wisconsin 5 3 Non Resident Total 154 1,249 357 332 133 95 57 �-57The total hunter pressure and kill of elk on the study area since the study was begun in 1957 is shown in Table 15 below. Table 15 - Total Number of Hunters, Kill and Success since 1957 on White River Elk Study Area. the Non Resident Hunters Total 1957 Pressure Kill Success 4,368' 1,003 22.96% 755 227 30.07% 5,123 1,230 24.01% 1958 Pressure Kill Success 4,324 1,095 25.32% 75:0 327 43.60% 5,074 1,422 28.02% 1959 Pressure Kill Success 4,266 1,181 27.68% :rq2 274 39.03% 1,455 1,455 29.29% 1960 Pressure Kill Success 4,322 1,440 33.32% 877 379 43.22% 5,199 1,819 34.99% Pressure Kill Success Pressure Kill Success 5,765 1,571 27.25% 23,045 6,290 27.29% 1,249 393 31.47% 4,333 1,600 36.92% 7,014 1,964 28.00% 27,378 7,890 28.82% Resident Hunters Year 1961 Total Discussion Phase A - Range Surveys: The elk winter range area that was surveyed in 1961 constitutes the wintering area of probably 3/4 of all the elk within the study area and nearly 1/2 of the land wintering area. The more than 55,000 acres of browse winter range that is low in composition should be of some concern of the Colorado Game and Fish Department. This is more than 1/3 of the winter range area within the main elk wintering concentration areas of the study section. While no immediate remedial measures seem to suggest themselves at this time, some limited program of reseeding or revegetation should be looked into with the idea of improving the over-all composition of the main White River drainage. Density of the browse in the area does not leave too much to be desired. Some slight adjustments in both elk and livestock numbers may be of value in increasing the density ratings on public land. There is not much that can be done, at the present time, on private lands that are in low condition. �-58The vigor of the browse species in the area surveyed is very good, with over one-half of the area in high condition. Some relief from game and livestock numbers. would probably bring the rest of the area back very quickly. The condition of the soil, the basic resource, in the main White River drainage is not too bad over-all. However, there are some areas that are in very bad shape, but whether the actual potential of these areas is much more than now exists is doubtful. A greater density of plants would increase the amount of litter which would increase the soil stability in the area. \ It is obvious from Table 3 that most of the elk winter in the Oakbrush type, with Sagebrush and Snowberry secondary, followed by the Aspen type. It is also apparent that there is a small resident elk herd in the main wintering area, all year round, as evidenced by the incidence of summer pellet groups found on the transects. All of the above information is available on 2-inch to the mile base maps of the area surveyed. All plotting of the types and type designations and ratings were done on a Kail plotter by U. S. Forest Service personnel assigned to this project on a cooperative basis on the White River National Forest. Mr. William Pint was assigned during the field season and part of the winter of the 1961 segment. Mr. Jack Arney took over as project wildlife man on the elk study when Mr. Pint was transferred to Arizona. Copies of the type maps are filed at the Forest Supervisor's office, White River National Forest, Glenwood Springs, Colorado, and at the Colorado Game and Fish Department, Southwest Regional Office, 209 North Townsend Avenue, Montrose, Colorado. These maps have been planimetered and colored according to type designations by students from Colorado State University working under the supervision of RichardN. Denney, Project Leader, W-38-R, in Fort Collins, Colorado. Phase B - Population Analysis The age makeup of the kill would seem to indicate a young, growing elk herd in the White River area. This is borne out in two ways~ The large number of calves classified per cow and the large number of spike (yearling) bulls noted the following year. Also, ill ere is a definite lack of very large mature bulls in the herd as evidenced by observation during the classifi= cation counts from the helicopter. The aerial trends within the study area also show a general increase year to year, which tends to support the contention of a growing herd. Phase C- Hunter Harvest Surveys The sex ratio of the kill during 1961 indicated that there was some hunter bias in reporting their elk kill on the report card. The per cent of calves actually checked was almost double that of the report card survey_ The average hunter still seems to want to report a bull calf as a bull or female calf as a cow. �-59The Game Management Division of the Colorado Game and Fish Department bases much of its elk management upon the yearling kill. The card projections for yearling kill are considerably lower than that shown by the check station data. While much of this difference can be blamed on a biased sample (Jrearling bull heads, in particular, are easier to bring out and age), a look at Table 8 also shows a place where error can creep into the card projections. The set-up on projecting the yearling kill is based, for bulls, upon antler point count as reported by the hunters on their cards. Thus, any bull that is reported to be a spike (1 - 1) is listed as a yearling. All others, it seems, are thrown into the older age classes. Since this is the case, many yearling bulls are not counted in the card returns which, naturally, would lower the percentage of yearlings in the projected kilL This may not be of too much significance in management at the present time as long as the reported yearling kill is conservative and weknoW.that it is. However, some adjustment should be made in the near future so that as the department gets into finer management, the figures on yearling kill can be compared to previous years data. Prepared by: Date: _________ .:::R:.::a~ym.:::::o.::n:.::d:.",·.::.J..:.-==B=o~y-=d~--:---:__ Approved by: _-..:.:W-=a~yn=e~S-=a:::n:.::d=f.::.o-= __ --:- _ Senior Game Biologist Game Manager, Research ~~~~L_~~ January, 1963 _ Ferd C. IQeinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator ��-61JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of ~C~OL~O~RA~n~O~ Project NO. Work Plan No. _ ~W_-~3~8~-R~-~1~5~ _ 2 --------------~------------~ Job NO. Period Covered: ~5~ _ Deer-Elk Investigations Population Surveys Determination of Winter Loss April 1, 1961 through March 31, 1962. ABSTRACT No work was accomplished on this job during the past segment as the area under study is within the Blue Mesa dam site of the Curecanti Unit of the Upper Colorado River Basin Storage Project. CDnstruction of a new highway, power lines, etc. within the study area eliminated enough land so that the study was not deemed possible to run as it had been in previous years. For these reasons no Federal Aid time was spent on the job. All of the information gathered in past years was made available to the Southwest Region and they plan to keep up the survey as best they can in order to get an idea of how much the reservoir is affecting the deer herd in that area. Recommendations: Because of the change in the study area, it is recommended that this job be dropped. All completion reports are in, and the reporting is up to date with this negative report. Prepared by: ~R~a~ym~o~n_d~J~.~B~o~y~d __~~Approved by: Senior Game Biologist ~w~a~yn~e-=S~a=n=d=f~o~r~t __----~ Game Manager, Research Date: ~J~a=n~u=a_ry~, __1~9_6~3 Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator _ ��-63JOB COMPLETION REPORT INVESTIGATIONS PROJECTS State of COLORADO ---------------------------------- Project No. W-38-R-15 --------------~----~-------- Work Plan No.2 ---------------------------- Deer-Elk Investigations .. Populations Surveys Job No.8 ----------------------------------- .. Period covered: Analysis of Known Herd Factors April 1, 1961 to March 31, 1962. Objectives: To analyze by statistical procedures the accumulation of all known factors concerning specific herds to evaluate the effects of any given single factor or combination of factors on that herd. Procedure: All the information available on specific game management units or herds was to hwe been gathered and analyzed by correlations and variance to determine which factor or combination of factors may affect the herds significantly from a game management standpoint. These known factors are: sex ratios; number; sex and age composition of the harvest; type, kind, time and length of season; trend counts; hunter pressure and success ratios; hunting season weather and access; range production and utilization indices, etc. Results: This job was assigned to Richard N. Denney and L. Jack Lyons, an accomplished statistician. Before the data could be gathered and compiled, the latter accepted employment in Montana with the Forest Service and departed during the project year. Consequently, the analytical techniques were not worked out, and no accomplishments were made due to insufficient time and lack of knowledge on the part of the Project Leader. To prevent a recurrence of this situation, the primary elements of this job have been incorporated in the White River Elk Study (Job 7 of this Work Plan), particularly since most of the complete data are from units in the study area. Prepared by: Date: Richard N. Denney Principal Game Biologist Approved by: January, 1963 --------------~~~~--~~----------- Wayne Sandfort --~~--~------~=-----~ Game Manager, Research Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator ��-65- JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of .....:C::.,:O:.;:L:,:O:.;:,:RAD:..::::..::..O _ Project No. W_-~3_8_-~R_-l~5~ _ .) ------------~------------- .,! Work Plan No.9., Job No. Period Covered: -.....:2~ _ Deer-Elk Investigations ----~--~--~~----~------------- Study of Census Techniques -----~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~---Comparison of Air and Ground Deer ~~a.Elk Counts April 1, 1961 through March 31, 1962. ABSTRACT No work was accomplished on this job during the past segment for two reasons: One, the biologist that was assigned to this job left the department to return to college for an advanced degree. There was not enough personnel left within the project to do the work, so this job was dropped because of more important work. Two,the weather conditions needed to complete this phase of the census work did not occur during the project segment. Recommendations Continue to keep this job in the hope of obtaining can work on this phase of census work. more personnel Prepared by: Raymond J. Boyd Senior Game Biologist Date: ~J..:..a_n..:..u..:..a_ry~,_1~9_6~3 _ Approved by: so that we W..:..a:;::yn::-..e--:-S_an~d_ --__:_-_; Game Manager, Research Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator ��-67JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO --------------~~~~~--------- Project NO. ~W~-~3~8~-R~-~1~5~ _ .- Work Plan No. 9 ------------~-------------Job No. 6 ---------------------------------- Period Covered: =D=e=e=r_-=E=l=k~I=n~v=e=s=t=i~g=a~t=i=o=n=s -----J Study of Census Techniques Application of Selected Census Techniques April 1, 1961 through March 31, 1962. ABSTRACT No work was accomplished on this job as the biologist that was in charge of this job left the department to return to college to work on an advanced degree. There was not enough personnel left in the project to do any work on this job, so it was dropped in faVor of more important and pressing work. Recommendations Temporarily drop this job until more personnel can be obtained for this project. When more men are available this job should be reinstated. Prepared by: Date: R~a~ym~o=n~d~J~.~B~o~y~d~~~---Approved by: Senior Game Biologist -=J=a=n=u~ry~,~1~9~6~3~ _ W~a~yn~e~S=an==d=f~o~r~t~----~ Game Manager, Research Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator ��January, 1963 -69JOB COMPLETION RESEARCH State of SEGMENT COLORADO --------~~~~-------------- Pro j ect No. Work PROJECT REPORT Plan No. -=.:W~-_=8_=8_-.:.R:...-_"7 ...:..._ __ ..:.:W~a:.:t_=e~r_=f:...:o..:.:w~1:.....;::S:...:u::::r_=v ~2~ ~ __ ~J.:.ob~N~0~. __ 4.:....a.::._ _ Tit le of Job: -:...:In=:;.:v:...:e:.:s:...t:.:l:..!" g2;a::.t~l::." o~n=-.:.o.::f-:...:t.::h:.:e~A:::r~k=a=n:;;s:.:a::.:s=--V:....:a=l::.l::.e~y __ Period April Covered: 1, 1961 to March 31, 1962. ABSTRACT Water, food, and weather conditions were generally satisfactory for the Canada goose flock in the Arkansas Valley of Colorado during the winter of 1961-62, but local shifting of population distributions did occur, mostly attributable to weather. The first scheduled aerial census was weathered out, and the January flight had to be postponed until February, but enough information was obtained to indicate that the flock status remained excellent. The first flights of geese arrived at Two Buttes on November 8, and built up rapidly during the next few days. Hunter harvest was almost equal to the eight-year average throughout the Valley, but harvest at Two Buttes decreased substantially. The number of goose hunters in the Valley was the lowest since 1954, but the average season bag per hunter was the highest in the eight-year period. The wounding loss study estimated a loss of 15-18 per cent of the total hunting mortality. Hunters fired a total of 42,044 shots on the Two Buttes firing line, with an estimated total ammunition cost of $6,727, and an estimated 3,942 pounds of lead expended. Hunting pressure was highest during the first week of season, and varied greatly by weekly periods thereafter. Most hunting pressure was concentrated at the southeast end of Two Buttes Reservoir. A total of 850 geese were newly banded, and a total of 974 geese were fluoroscoped at Two Buttes. Data from these trapped birds reveal that (1) the sex ratio is close to 50-50j (2) the checked bag at the check stations is a more reliable index of age ratios than is the trapped samplej (3) average weights of geese are largely influenced by age and sex ratios, changes in body conditions, and changes in sub-species composition of the samplesj (4) estimation of body shot incidence at the time of arrival of geese at Two Buttes can be done more accurately by relating it to relative hunting pressurej (5) using fluoroscopy to determine total hunting pressure on geese at Two Buttes, it is apparent that less than half of the body shot are acquired while geese are wintering at Two Buttes, and therefore the Two Buttes firing line is not exerting undue pressure on this segment of the flockj (6) very limited information on the accuracy of techniques used in the study reveal that such accuracy is well within reasonable limits. Family group counts were made this year for the first time, but are not interpreted because of lack of basic trend data. Recommendations for continuing study of the Arkansas Valley goose flock are presented. Note: The completion report submitted as a part of the Colorado Quarterly Report, October, 1962, page 45 was erroneously labeled with the above job number and title. The October report should be Job No. 4b, Cooperative Lesser Canada Goose Flock Investigation. ��INVESTIGATIONS OF THE ARKANSAS VALLEY WINTER.ING GOOSE FLOCK William H. R.utherford INTR.ODUCTION: The wintering goose population in the Arkansas Valley is probably the most important single waterfowl flock in Colorado in relation to hunter use and enjoyment. Before closer management of a specific waterfowl flock can be attained, the basic knowledge of its numbers, local movements, and habits must 'be gained. The increase in hunting pressure and the corresponding increased harvest of this flock indicates the need for future recommendations which will permit the correct harvest of this resource upon a sustained yield basis. OBJECTIVES: (1) To determine the fall movement of geese into the Arkansas Valley, and the size of the wintering flock. (2) To investigate the wounding loss of geese at Two Buttes R.eservoir. (3) To determine the relationship between weather conditions and harvest of geese at Two Buttes Reservoir. (4) To determine age and sex composition, mortality, and per cent of birds carrying shot. (5) To investigate the dispersal of birds from Two Buttes during the hunting season. PROCEDURES: Techniques and procedures remained the same as reported in previous years. A complete hWlter check was obtained through operation in check stations; and birds were trapped, banded, and fluoroscoped with complete records of age, sex, weight, and nurriberof shot kept for each b Lr d., Results: Water, Food, and Weather Conditions: Water levels in the major reservoirs of the Arkansas Valley were generally excellent for winteri,ng geese. As in 1961, John Martin Reservoir was very low, but geese seem to prefer this situation. Food cond.itions in the Valley were generally satisfactory, and seemed to be best in the Eads and Two Buttes areas. Weather conditions ran the complete gamut. During most of the hunting season, the weather was considered fair for goose hunting. T'wo major storms moved through the areaJ one coming immediately after the opening of goose seasonJ and these had some local effect on the distribution of goose populations. Then, after the close of hunting season, Two Buttes Reservoir froze over completely and the entire goose population on this lake moved to the Eads area. This movement may have been caused in part by food conditions. �-72- Migration Movement and Wintering Population: Two aerial censuses were used to determine the Canada goose movement into, and wintering populations of, the Arkansas Valley (Table 1). These flights were coordinated with similar ones in the Texas panhandle so that it was possible to determine the status of the entire flock rather than just that portion wintering in Colorado. Originally, thre€ aerial flights were scheduled, but the first one had to be cancelled completely because of weather, and the third one (regular January inventory) had to be postponed to February 7, 1962. On the basis of thes~ counts, and observations of personnel in each area, it is obvious that despite a reduction in inventory numbers, there were probably as many or slightly more geese in the Arkansas Valley as in the previous year, and flock status remained excellent. Table 1 -- Aerial Canada Goose Counts, Arkansas Valley, Colorado, by dates, 1961-62. Reservoir December 19-20 January 11 February 7 Meredith 204 265 5,000 Eads 10,140 2,836 29,300 John Martin 5,000 6,000 8,550 Bonny 6 Rutherford 8,000 800 2,000 Arkansas River 52 Two Buttes 7,000 2,000 400 TOTALS 30,350 11,953 40,250 The results of the January flight are tabulated here only for purposes of comparison. Actually, it was felt that this count was completely erroneous, and that larg~ numbers of g~esewere missed, because of the effect of the weather at this time upon their feeding habits. The February count was considered to be accurate insofar as total numbers of ~e:se in the Valley were concerned, and also showed that the bulk of population had shifted to the Eads-John Martin areas. According to ground observations, the first substantial flights of geese reached Two Buttes on November 8, and rapidly increased to a maximum of 21,000 on the lake by November 12. Geese also appear-ed in other areas of the Arkansas Valley at about the same time, but because the November inventory flight was completely weathered out, it is impossible to state with any degree of accuracy what the goose population in the Valley was immediately after the arrival of maximum numbers. Comparison of January inventory information for this Canada goose flock, in Table 2, shows an increase of over 8,000 birds over 1961, and a total wintering population exceeded only in 1959. It is difficult to compare the wintering population in January, 1962, for the entire flock with that of past years, because of the erroneous January count in Colorado and the probability that some Texas geese had begun to move northward by the time (Feb. 7) an accurate Colorado inventory was made.. However, an interpretation of data indicates that flock status remained excellent , with about the same number of birds (estimated at 95,000 to 100,000 as in 1961. �-73Table 2 -- January Inventory of Canada Geese, Arkansas Valley, Colorado, 1 48 - 1962. Year Goose Count Year Goose Count Year Goose Count 1948 1949 1950 1951 1952 4,798 12,286 13,170 19,320 30,463 1953 1954 1955 1956 1957 20,236 20,280 25,110 24,212 24,617 1958 1959 1960 1961 1962 35,894 44,660 37,394 3l,36O 40,2501 11 y Inventory of February 7, 1962, substituted for January, 1962, inventory. Hunter Harvest: Check stations were operated again this year in the Two Buttes management area. This permitted collection of a variety of information relating to harvest and hunting pressure. Tabulation of this information (see Table 3) reveals that 2,392 individual hunters, hunting a total of 4,758 hunter-days, took 945 geese during the season of which 526 (55.6%) were adults, and 419 (44.4%) were birds-of-the-year. Table 3 -- Goose Harvest, Wounding Loss, Hunting Pressure, and Hunter Success, Two Buttes Management Area, 1961 - 62. Item Resident Non -Resident Total Goose Harvest Adult 412 114 526 Juvenile 326 419 93 Total 738 207 945 Wounding Loss 96 20 116 Successful Hunters: Number Average bag/hunter 476 1.55 123 1.68 599 1.57 1,907 3,704 0.39 0.20 485 1,048 0.43 0.20 2,392 4,758 0.40 O.?O All Hunters: Number Hunter days Average bag/hunter Average bag/hunter-day Table 4 compares the current goose harvest in the Arkansas Valley with the eightyear average, indicating a total harvest during the past year which was close to the average. It also shows what was evident during aerial inventory workj namely, that a considerable shift in wintering goose populations occurred among the various areas of the Valley, with the result that Baca County, which has consistently accounted for about half of the total harvest in past years, fell to only about one-fifth this~ year. �-74- Table 4 -- Goose Harvest in the Arkansas Valley, By County. Eight-Year Average, 1954 - 60, 1961 - 62, Based on Results of Random Survey. County Baca Kiowa Prowers Bent Crowley Pueblo Huer fan 0 Otero Lakes Two Buttes Eads and Blue Two Buttes and Eads John Ma.rtin, Blue and Horsecreek Meredith and Henry Number and Per Cent 8-year average No. % 51.8 6,823 2,058 15.6 2,095 15.9 of Geese Bagged 1961-62 No .. % 2,524 19 .• 8 4,553 35.8 2,293 18.0 1,347 591 91 114 1,827 1,096 66 14,,4 8.6 0.5 66 0.5 299 12,724 2.4 100.0 Horsecreek, Cheraw group, Dyes, and Holbrook Las Animas TOTAL 47 13,166 10.2 4.5 0.7 0·9 0.4 100.0 Table 5 lists goose hunting statistics for the past eight years, and shows that stamp sales for 1961 were by far the lowest of the entire period.. During 1960, the decrease in stamp sales was not reflected in a decrease of goose hunters, and it was believed that the decr-ease was almost entirely among those "Who hunt ducks only. In 1961, the further decr-ease in stamp sales showed a proportional decrease in the number of goose hunters. Duck hunting and goose hunting can be classified as independent of each other; therefore, the 1961 decrease in goose hunting activity is thought to be the result of unsettledwe.atherand erratic behavior of geeae., The season can be summed up by saying that although the Arkansas Valley carried a normal population of geese in 1961, goose hunting in general was not as good as in former years. However, those hunters who did participate showed a higher success :ratio than in past years, indicating that most of the decrease in hunting activity probably occurred among novice hunters. Table 5 -- Goose Hunting Season Statistics, 1954 - 1961. Year 1954 1955 1956 1957 1958 1959 1960 1961 Dates of Season 11/1 12/30 11/1 12/30 11/9 1/7 11/2 12/31 11/17 1/15 10/26 1/8 10/261/8 11/10 1/8 Stamp Sales 32,450 39,107 36,303 41,794 41,897 31,431 30,592 24,854 Arkansas Valley Estimated Average goose season Estimated hunters oag kill 1.04 7,071 7,372 1.54 9,054 13,904 1.05 9,833 10,276 1.39 9,113 12,656 10,082 1.51 15,205 1.61 8,888 14,309 9,838 1.39 13,629 1.68 7,577 12,724 �-75- Wounding Loss: Wounding loss in the 1961-62 season was estimated by two methods; (1) The small game hunter random survey indicated a loss of 24.5 per cent of the total goose harvest mortalityj and (2) check station information permits calculation of loss on the firing line of 12.3 per cent. In the past, a count of dead geese along the shore of Two Buttes Reservoir was also used in estimating the wounding loss. In 1961-62, snow covered many of the goose carcasses, and by the time project personnel were able to conduct a count, coyotes, eagles, and other predators had cleaned up and scattered the bones so that an accurate count was impossible. It is believed that the check station wounding loss count is low, probably because hunters are conditioning their answers so as not to reflect on the firing-line type of hunting. Also, the random survey information is undoubtedly slightly high. It is believed that the actual wounding loss in the Arkansas Valley goose flock is in the range of 15-18 per cent. Hunter Habits and Characteristics; This year, for the flrsttime, check station operators collected data from a sample of hunters on the number of shots fired. The forms which were returned to the check stations by hunters constituted a sample of 11.07 per cent of the total number of hunter-days throughout the season. Baaed on the total of 4,758 hunter-days of use, a direct projection of this sample shows that a total of 42,044 shots were fired on the Two Buttes management area, firing line, or an average of 44.49 shots for each goose brought to bag. If a very conservative value of $4.00 per box, or $0.16 per round, is placed on shotgunammuni tion, this means that a total of'$6,727 .Ol~ was expended for ammunition, or an average of $7.12 for each goose brought to bag. Also, if it is assumed that one and one-half ounces of shot per shell is an acceptable average (probably a little low, because of a high proportion of 10-gauge Magnums firing two ounces of shot), this means that a total of 3,941.62 pounds, or very nearly two tons, of lead was launched skyward. For each goose brought to bag, ~7 pounds of lead was expended. Figure 1 shows the weekly hunting pressure on the Two Buttes management area, measured in terms of total number of shots fired for each week, and average number per day for each week. These figures were derived by projecting the sample of shots fired to cover total hunter-days of use for each week. The resulting graph shows a wide variation in total weekly gunning pressure, while the graph showing average number of shots fired per day for each week of hunting season tends to level off the daily and weekly variations. Daily and weekly yariationsare caused, of course, by the combination of'varying hunter use (Weather, weekends vs., weekdays, etc.) and varying hunting conditions (weather, goose population present, changes in daily goose flight patterns, etc.). In general, gunning pressure vas highest for the first few days of the season, followed by a low corresponding to a blizzard of several days' duration, with continuing highs and lows for the remainder of the season. At no time, however, did the gunning pressure later in the season equal that of the 11th and 12th of November, which was the first weekend of the season. �-76- Table 6 shows the season totals for hunter-days of use of each of the pits on the firing line at Two Buttes Reservoir. Gross field observ;ations indicated the direction and volume of goose feeding-flights, both leaving and returning, but this tabulation is a much more reliable index,since hunters are adept at placing themselves in the most advantageous positions. The table shows approximatelytwic~e as many hunter-days of use on the south firing line as on the north firing line. It also shows that on the north side,-the bulk of hunting pressure was concentrated in the center and east end of the firing line, with pits on the west end rec'eiving relatively light hunting use. On the south Side, the bulk of hunting pressure was concentrated at the east end of the firing line. The pits at the center of the line received lighter use, and the pits at the west end received little or no use. �-77Table 6 -- Resident and Non-Resident Hunter-Days of Use by Pit Location, Two Buttes Management Area, 1961-62. South Side North Side Pit Hunter-days Pit Hunter-days Pit Hunter-days Pit Hunter-days No. Res. Non-res. No. Res. Non-res. No. Res. Non-res. No. Res. Non-res. 1 2 3 4 5 6 .7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 TOTALS 114 128 122 122 119 97 95 71 54 76 97 102 98 76 79 62 70 29 10 25 29 20 7 11 20 6 1 7 25 14 15 13 10 19 7 22 34 25 36 39 21 32 31 30 32 9 9 6 3 13 6 4 3 3 1 1 Resident: Non-resident: Total: TRAND TOTAL 31 32 33 34 35 3 1 3 1 2 2 4 2 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 80 84 68 54 57 51 53 38 35 19 29 32 51 39 35 26 2 1 2 2 4 25 13 9 16 13 4 8 6 14 4 13 12 16 8 12 9 1 1 3 2,519 658 3,177 Resident: Non-resident: Total: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 11 20 24 14 38 35 48 46 79 83 86 75 65 69 46 22 26 27 15 17 34 12 8 8 21 6 10 7 13 9 19 19 25 22 17 15 17 17 21 29 11 8 6 8 4 4 3 3 3 5 Resident: Non-resident: Total: 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 15 8 8 5 2 3 4 10 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 2 1 1 1 Unk. B. 2 6 4 7 3 7 2 2 1 3 1 1 2 5 190 2 53 1,190 391 1,581 3,709 1,049 4,758 Special Banding Investigation: During the 1961-62 wintering season , a great deal of emphasis was placed on trapping, banding, and fluoroscoping geese at intervals throughout the season. Table 7 lists the number of birds banded by interval. Weather conditions forced a drastic departure from the trapping schedule which had been set up previously, with the result that the banding crew had to make catches at any odd time that the opportunity arose. For this reason,we fell short of the goal of 1,500 geese which had been set, but nevertheless a good sample was obtained. The total of 850 geese banded, as listed in Table 7, does not include recaptures, but these recaptures are included in subsequent analyses. �Table 7 -- Two Buttes Banding Results by Interval, 1961-62. Number of Ge.ese Interval Date Banded 1 11/29 & 11/30, 1961 136 2 12/15 & 12/18, 1961 257 3 1/13, 1962 168 4 1/25, 1962 171 5 Feb. & Mar., 1962~ 118 TOTAL YBanding during tre 5th interval was done at Nee No she Reservoir, about 12 miles south of Eads. All catches are combineda.s one interval •. Inf'ormation 'obtained from trapping and banding geese, along with certain information obtained from check stations, is presented under appropriate subheadings in the following: Age and Sex Composition: Age determination of all geese trapped was by notched tail-feather method, double checked by cloacal examination. Sexing was by cloacal examination. Age determination of all geese checked through check stations was by notched tail-feather method. Table 8 compares the per cent of young birds between the trapped sample and the check station sample, revealing considerable difference between the two. It is possible that either or both samples are biased to some degree. Consideration of' sampling techniques for each sample indicates that check station information may be a more valid measure of age composition for the following reasons: 1. It is believed that firing-line harvest has less tendency to be sele'ctive by age or sex than other harvest methods, and there is better opportunity for an adequate sample of age classes, since all geese pass over the firing line. 2. Trapping was confined to one spot of the reservoir shore. Geese were baited to this area, and there is a distinct chance that for any particular: .Lnstarrt in which the net was fired,the baited area could have been occupied by a population of geese which was not representative of the entire population. On the other hand,the check station information on age composition maybe inaccurate as compared IVith the trapped sample, because of the difference in the level of training between checkers and members of the banding crew. It is known that inf'ormationon the trapped sample is as accurate as is pOSSible, because .itwas obtained by trained personnel and double checked by using two difference methods. Check station operators used only the notched tail-feather method, and may have introduced errors into the data. There is a good chance, however, that many check station errors are self-eliminating, since there always exists a 50-50 chance of'being right on any individual birdo �-79= Table 8 -- Age Comparison of the Two Buttes Reservoir Canada Goose FlockJ 1961-62, as Estimated by Trapping and Check Station Results. Trapped. Sample Total Per cent young birds DateY 11/10 to 11/20 11/21 to 12/5 12/6 to 12/31 1/1 to 1/19 1/20 to 1/31 2/1 to 31.15 2703 22.1 20.4 20.4 55.41/ 26.5 TOTALS Check Station Sample Per cent Total young birds ·------'"51.4 161 47.7 299 39.0 26.6g/ 206 191 121 977 352 173 356 64 Trapping and banding generally took place in the middle' of each date interval listed above. Not a satisfactory sample. Sample trapped at Nee Noshe Reservoir using field sets with live decoys, rather than baited lake shore sets. All information on sex ratios was derived from the trapping operation. Inthe light of information discovered in the age analysis, the information in Table 9, followingJ may be open to question. However, there is no reason to suspect that the sex composition is out of proportion9 and certainly calculation of the percentage of males and females for each of the trapping intervals indicates a fairly evenly balanced sex ratio. Table 9 -- Sex Composition of the Two Buttes Reservoir Canada Goose Flock, 1961-62. Interval Males 1 2 3 4 84 150 108 94 66 502 5Y Per cent 52.2 50·3 60.0 4902 5505 52.9 Females 77 148 72 97 53 447 TOTALS Sample trapped at Nee Noshe Reservoir. Per cent Total Per cent 4708 49.7 4000 50.8 44.5 47.1 161 298 180 191 119 949 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 10000 10000 Y Goose ~eights: Data on weights of geese .at Two Buttes for the 1961-62 banding season were presented in the completion report for Work Plan 1, Job 2, Trapping and Banding Ducks and Geese. These dat.a , however, dealt only with trapped and banded birds, and did not include the check station sample. For purposes of compar-Lson, the weights of hunter-harvested birds and of trapped and banded birds are presented here in Table 10. In spite of some variations in weight -between intervals and between the two samples for the same interval, the mean weights for all intervals combined show close agreement for the two samples. Weight variations within the sample breakdowns are undoubtedly the result of a com~ bination of changes in age ratios within the adult class, sub-species composition~ sex ratios, and -body conditions9 as explained in the completion report for Work Plan 1, Job 20 �-80Table 10 -- Comparison of Weights of Geese from Trapped and Check Station Samples, Two Buttes, 1961-62. Intervals Nov. Nov. Dec. Jan. (Jan. Feb.& All 6,-31 10-21 211-13 25) Mar.y Intervals Dec. 5 (15-18) (13) Combined (29-30 )?J Check Station: Number of Adults Average Weight, lbs. 171 6.01 91 6,.05 217 47 5;<>86 5.75 526 5.93 Number of Juveniles Average Weight,lbs. 181 5.35 82 5,.44 139 5:.34 17 5,.28 ',419 5.36 Number of Geese Average Weight, lbs. 352 173 5.67 5,.76 356 5.65 64 5•.63 945 5.68 ,Trapping and Banding: Number of Adults Average Weight,lbs. 117 5.80 230 5.87 164 5•.49 152 54 5:079 5.93 717 5.76 44 5.15 66 42 5,.16 4.79 39 67 5.59 5.38 25,8 5.22 296 206 191 121 5",71 5;.35 5·75 5.62 975 5.62 Number of Juveniles Average Weight, lbs •. Number of Geese 161 Average Weightz lDs~ 5.62 Birds caught at Nee No she Reservoir. Y are combined together. ?J All catches for February and March Banding dates are given in parentheses. Fluoroscopy: The results of the fluoroscopy operation by trapping interval are presented in Table 11, and in Figure 2, revealing a change in the estimate of the percentage of the population (both adult and juvenile) carrying one or more body shot between intervals. Naturally there is a high difference between body shot incidence of adults and juveniles, explained by the fact that t,his is the first year's hunting on juveniles while adults have been subjected to two or more years of hunting depending ,upon their age. Much effort has been made in the past to determine a method of measuring hunting pressure by means of the per cent of birds in the population carrying shot. This may not be a valid criterion since the per cent carrying shot may, and probably does, depend upon a number of different factors, each of which singly or in combination act to change the per cent of all birds carrying shot independently of the hunting pressure. Some of these factors are listed as follows: 1. Age composition of the population. If each age class component of the population is present in the same proportion year after year, then age composition will have little effect. However, if breeding success is sporadic with varying size yearling populations entering the population universe year �Figure 1-- Weekly Hunting Pressure by Sho1SFir~d, Two Buttes Reservoir} ]961- 62. 12 ~ ~ ~ q r co '-l 1-'. I ~ C) ~ ~ 6 'C) Total Shots for Each W'eek ~ .~ 4: ~3 (J ....r::: V) ;j /6 (-Nov€mber 2..3 so --?:< Goose Huntinj 7 If ---- 2J Dec em b er 21 >< ~ 8 a""lItry Season - Weekly Interval.r IS ~ �-82after year, then it is obvious that the per cent of all adults with shot will vary from year to year, and valid yearly comparisons cannot be made. 2. To eliminate the potential error in number 1, it would be necessary to confine all analysis to birds-of-the-year or juveniles. But here again, the size of the crop may have important bearing on the per cent carrying shot, since the larger the crop with a stable hunting pressure, the less probability of any individual bird acquiring shot. Thus, a measure of age composition of the flock along with annual production would seem necessary to make fluoroscopy an adequately workable technique. Table 11 -- Per cent of Geese with Shot, by Age and Sex Class and Trapping Interval, Two Buttes Reservoir,1961-62. 1 Trapping Interval 2 4 3 5Y Total 60 55.0 120 60.0 99 64.6 72 55.6 28 75.0 379 60.7 Number of Females Percent with shot 57 52.6 112 60.7 64 57.8 80 52.5 26 42.3 339 55.5 Total Adults Percent with shot 117 52.8 232 60.3 163 62.0 152 54.0 54 59.3 718 58.2 JuVeniles:?:.! Number of Males Per cent with shot 24 25.0 30 30.0 20 35.0 22 31.8 38 28.9 134 29.9 Number of Females Per cent with shot 20 25.0 36 25.0 22 36.4 17 29.4 27 29.6 122 28.7 Total Juveniles Per cent with shot 44 25.0 66 27.3 42 35·7 39 30.8 65 29·2 256 29·3 All Geese: Number of Males Per cent with shot 84 46.4 150 54.0 119 59·7 94 50.0 66 48.5 513 52.6 Number of Females Per cent with shot 77 45.5 148 52.0 86 52.3 97 48.5 53 35.8 461 48.4 Total Geese 161 298 205 Per cent with shot 46.0 53·0 56.6 Birds trapped at Nee Noshe Reservoir Birds-of-the-year. 191 49.2 119 42.9 974 50.6 Age and Sex Class Adults: Number of Males Per cent with shot g V �Distribution of Flock Hunting Pressure: One of the prime motives for emphasizing the banding and fluoroscopy effort was to establish, if possible, the effect of the firing line at Two Buttes on this goose flock. Actually in considering the information, it is recognized that it is not possible to separate the firing line from the surrounding area; thus, inferences made must include the Two Buttes area in general. A regression line was calculated on the basis of data contained in Table 11. The 5th interval was ignored, since this trapping did not take place at Two Buttes, and the 3rd and 4th intervals were combined since they were both post-season. This resulted in a graph having three points on which to calculate the regression. Projection of the regression line to the left, to cover the time period between the opening of season and the first trapping of geese, resulted in an estimate of 21.5 per cent of juveniles, and 51.2 per cent of adults, carrying shot upon their arrival at Two Buttes. Examination of gunning pressure data indicated that these estimated percentages were probably not valid, since they assumed no variation in gunning pressure. The data (Figure 1) clearly show a much greater rate of gunning pressure during the early part of the season than later on, and it was felt that this would definitely influence the rate at which the birds acquired shot. In other words, a relatively greater percentage of body shot should have been acquired before the first trapping attempt than afterward. With this in mind, it was decided to estimate the percentages of adult and juvenile birds carrying shot upon arri.val at Two Buttes by calculating the mean daily increase in incidence of body shot following the first trapping attempt, and relating it to average daily gunning pressure. Then, by using the same proportion, the greater rate of mean daily increase in body shot prior to the first trapping attempt could be calculated on the basis of the known greater rate of gunning pressure. This calculation resulted in an estimate of 18.80 per cent of juveniles, and 49.75 per cent of adults, carrying shot upon arrival at Two Buttes (Table 12). Following this calculation, new regression lines were graphed based upon four points rather than three. These regressions are presented in Figure 2. It is believed that this procedure provides a much more accurate estimate of the percentages of geese carrying body shot upon arrival at Two But~es than has heretofore been possible. Two methods are used in estimating the effect of the Two Buttes firing line upon the goose flock, as follows: 1. Juvenile method. The estimated percentage of juvenile birds carrying shot upon arrival at Two Buttes (18.8%) subtracted from the percentage of juveniles carrying shot after the hunting season (33.3%) allows an estimate that about 14.5 per cent of the juvenile population acquired shot in the Two Buttes area. Thus, ~he Two Buttes area contributed less than half of the shot to the juvenile age class, while other areas contributed more than half. �2 - - Resression Fi9ure !,tore Emhedded , Se.ason)} with One or (Length of HUI11tns of Y (Percent of Geese. Sho1-) on)( TsvoBui/es/1961-62. +-1 () "'?,"':l Iv' ~ 0) .~sc~ ~601 ~ I A J u Its • I ~ I ~ ~ L... llC CO ::-1. 111 4.. 71'1 ~ c:: . Juveniles "c- e \J r.... • 0:,0 fD 20 <.-I{(lv.mb~r 30 >~ 20 10 Oc.ccmbe,. Trapping Intervals :30 9 x-J-.n .•.• ,y �-85Adult method. This method requires that a measure of the per cent of adults with shot be made at the beginning of the hunting season at Two Buttes, and after the hunting season each year. Then, the post-hunting season rate of the previous year compared with the pre-season rate of the present year determines the per cent of adult birds which acquired shot in the interim between the two measures. This method is based on the premise that birdsof-the-year are counted as adults in the post-season banding results, so that the difference between this rate and the adult rate in the pre-season banding in Colorado should estimate the percentage of new birds with shot. 2. Application of the adult method to thi.s year I s data indicates that the sample involved does not lend itself well to this treatment. The sample is not comparable to last year's sample; thus, an unexplainable discrepancy is found in the data. At the close of the 1960~61 season, 50.1 per cent of all geese fluoroscoped (1,996) were found with one or more shot. Usingthe procedure just described for estimating the number ofadul~ geese carrying shot at the beginning of season, it was found that about 49.75 per cent of adults had body shot at the beginning of the 1961-62 season,for a difference of only 0.35 per cent. The increase in incidence of body shot among adults of 9.45 per cent from the beginning to the end of the 1961-62 season is normal and is about what should be expected, but the figure of 0.35 per cent increase for the interim between seasons is obviously in error. Table 12 -- Relationship of Gunning Pressure to Incidence of Body Shot in Canada Geese, Two Buttes Reservoir, 1961-62. Interval From season opening From first trapping to first trapping attempt to end of Item attempt season Total shots fired 18,028 24,016 Average number of shots fired per day 600 Mean percentage of daily increase in body shot incidence: Adults Juveniles 0.1930 0.2967 0.1350 0.2075 Total percentage of increase in body shot incidence: Adults Juveniles 4.05 6.20 5.40 8.30 Estimated percentage of birds carrying body shot upon arrival at Two Buttes: Adults Juveniles 49.75 18.80 �-86Actually, age composition of the flock is never directly comparable from one year to the next, since yearly success in nesting and brood rearing varies widely. Depending upon previous year's nesting success, the adult segment of the flock which arrives in Colorado in any given year may be made up ofa relatively higher or lower propo~tion of yearlings and two-year-olds, which would tend to vary the actual percentage of shot incidence in the flock. Obviously, then, the estimate of body shot acquired by geese between the close of one year's season and the opening of the next year's season in Colorado depends for accuracy upon having the same relative age composition in the sample for the two years involved. In summary, the adult method of estimating will work during some years, and will not work during others. This is not intended to detract from the logic of the method; but it does point out the necessity for having comparable data. Examination of the regression lines in Figure 2 indicate that juvenile geese acquire body shot.at a slightly greater rate than do adults. It is highly unlikely that, with the firing-line type of hunting, there is any selectivity on the part of hunters toward age-classes of birds, or that juveniles are more vulnerable than adults. In field hunting with decoys, juveniles are decidedly the more vulnerable of the two classes; but on the firing-line, all geese pass over the line at about the same height. The indicated slight difference between the two classes with regard to gunning vulnerability is most likely due to the chances inherent in the sampling method. It can be concluded that less than half of the geese newly acqu~r~ng shot, at least during the 1961-62 season, were shot at Two Buttes, while more than half received their shot prior to their arrival ai1Two Buttes. Considering this, it is believed that these data do not reveal that geese in the Two Buttes area are receiving proportionately more hunting pressure than in other parts of the flyway. Thus, it is felt tl1atthe hunting on the firing line and the surrounding area is not detrimental to this goose flock. Family Group Counts: Although it is known that the Lesser Canada geese do not exhibit the strong family ties, particularly on the wintering grounds, which are characteristic of the large Canadas and other species of geese, atrbempt.s were made to secure data on sizes of family groups in the Arkansas Valley flock. These attempts yielded the data presented in Table 13. It is hoped that these data will give a trend over a period of years which will provide an index to breeding success and production of young in this flock. Since this is the first year thai;;these family group counts were made, no interpretation of data will be attempted. Table 13 -- Family Group Counts of Canada Geese, Arkansas Valley, 1961-62. November 14, 1961 Two Buttes Reservoir M. G. Sheldon, observer Number of geese in groups Frequency November 29, 1961 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 9 6 5 8 8 6 3 3 5 1 Two Buttes Reservoir Number of geese in groups Frequency 123 4 5 6 7 5 89 5 5 43 N = 54 Sum of X = 244 X 4.52 J. R. Grieb, Observer N 39 Sum of X = 138 X = 3.54 �-87- Table 13-continued. November 30, 1961 Two Buttes Reservoir Number of geese in groups Frequency December 12, 1961 J. R. Grieb, observer N = 20 Sum of x = 73 = 3.65 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 5 5 0 3 2 12 2 Two Buttes Reservoir x w. Ho Rutherford, observer Number of geese in groups 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Frequency 233 2 4 3 010 1 N = 19 Sum of x = 81 = 4.26 x December 13, 1961 Turk's Pond Jo Ro Grieb, observer Number of geese in groups Frequency December 17, 1961 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 5 9 6 43 2 1 1 1 TurkisPond N = 32 Sum of x = 108 x' = 3.38 Jo Ro Grieb, observer N = 114 Sum of x = 347 = 3.04 Number of geese in groups 1 2 3 4 -5, 6 7 8 9 10 21 37 17 19 5 10 3 0 1 1 February 20, 1962 W. H. Rutherford, observer N = 22 Sum of x = 74 123 4 5 678 5 444 0 3 1 1 = 3.36 Nee Noshe Reservoir Number of geese in groups Frequency x x Indicated Accuracy of Sexing, Aging, and Fluoroscoping Geese: Information on which to base the following measures of accuracy is very limited, since only eleven birds were captured twice during the 1961-62 banding season. This is far fewer than the 81 birds used as a basis for determining accuracy during the previous year. Comparing the results of both times these eleven birds were handled, it was found that: (1) None of the 11 birds were sexed differently between times; thus, there is no indicated error. (2) None of the 11 birds were aged differently between times; thus, there is no indicated error. (3) Considering whether a bird did, or did not, have shot, it was found that one of the 11 birds was recorded as having one shot on the first observation and no shot on the second observation. There is a 50-50 chance of being right on each of the two 6bservations; thus, the error is estimated at 1/22, or about 4.5 per cent. (4) In determining differences in number of shot per bird (much more difficult that (3) above, a difference 'Was found in six of the 11 birds. Thus, the error is estimated at 3/11, or about 27 per cent" �-88- category (4) is not useful in present analysis work, and has little bearing on the accuracy of data presented. For one thing, if a bird is found to have a greater number of shot when recaptured, it is entirely possible that extra shot was acquired between handling intervals, and that both recorded observations are accurate. This, of course, applies only when trapping and fluoroscopy work is performed during hunting season, as was the case this year. Category (3) is considered to be well within acceptable limits of accuracy • .RECOMMENDATIONS: The Arkansas Valley Goose Flock Investigation is continuing to produce extremely important information on which to base management. We must continue to collect this information, and to make provision for new aspects of the overall investigation, so that management of this flock can be improved. Following are recommendations for continuing project work. 1. ·In order to properly assess the contribution of the Two Buttes firing line to the total flock hunting pressure, we will have to continue trapping and fluoroscopy during hunting season, with a goal of 500 birds early in season, 500 about mid-December, and 500 after the close of season. 2. Check station information should be maintained on total harvest by age class. Collection of data to measure hunting pressure by estimating shots fired should continue. 3. Other segments of the Arkansas Valley flock should be studied to determine if Two Buttes data are applicable elsewhere. Eads.Lakes, Blue Lake, John Martin Reservoir, Turk's Pond, and Meredith Reservoir are the principal areas needing study. 4. We must continue to cooperate with the Cooperative Goose Flock Investigation of the Central Flyway, so that we can determine the annual status of this flock and its distribution be~ween Texas, New Mexico, Colorado,and Nebraska. Prepared by: Date: William H. Rutherford Senior Game Biologist Approved by_~W.::.:ayn~e_W~. _S.:...an~d_f_o~r~t:--_..,-Game Manager, Research January, 1963 -----~~~~~-~~------- Ferd C. KLeinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �-89JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO Project No. W-10l-R-4 Work Plan No. 2 Title of Job: Period Covered: Game Range Investigations Job No. 1 Little Hills Grazing Study. April 1, 1961 through March 31, 1962. Abstract: Pasture stocking with livestock was accomplished on schedule. siderable difficulty with coyotes killing lambs occurred. Con- A comparatively poor year for deer trapping resulted'in 162 deer caught, of which 126 were placed in the pastures and 36 released. Drifted snow and flooded roads made many box traps inaccessible for long periods of time. One pasture (15) went unstocked. Pellet group counts in pasture ten (unfenced control) indicated a winter stocking rate of two cow days per acre and thirty-five deer days per acre. Improved methods of removing deer from the pastures, particularly more fences taken down, resulted in a reduced length of time taken to do the job. Pastures were empty by April fourth after only 41 individual drives. In twelve yearsT time (1949-1961) 1,231 deer have been ear tagged at Little Hills Station. From these deer 161 returns were received (13.190 of which one half have come in 1960 and 1961. Fifteen sight records were received at 25 to 50 miles from the Station. Deer mortality in pasture four (heavy use) amounted to 18.8% in 1961-62--one of the heaviest losses on record. This pasture was stocked initially to the planned rate but the winter loss resulted in an estimated 291 deer days understocking. Utilization of key bro~ species by deer in moderate and lightly stocked pastures continued to average higher than might be desired. Both sheep and cattle in the over-stocked pastures (1&2) were forced to subsist largely on key browse species again. There was very little evi~ence of increased use of the less palatable browse species. Generally speaking, the growing season was a poor one. This resulted in heavy use of more palatable species of both grass and weeds where they were available at all, but no appreciably increased use of the less desirables. �-90Twelve stomachs of deer which dLed in late winter in the various pastures were analysed volumctrically, wet, for relative proportions of browse, grass and weeds. New grasses ave raged less than five per cent. The remainder was browse. Paceu transects, to produce a basic fund of data on pasture range conditions and trend, were run for composition, density and vigor. Tables showing averaged grass and weed heights are included but analysis of these has not been completed. Eighty line transects set out in eight pasture exclosures (ten per exclosure) indicated a mean density as follows: Litter-21.26%, Bare Ground & Erosion Pavement-48.22%, Grass-l.36%, Forbs-2.11%, Rock-l.97%, and Browse-24.23%. Overstory of pinyon and juniper totaled 12.14%. Nineteen line transects set out in pasture ten (control) showed a density of: 88.05% Litter, Bare Ground, Rock & Erosion Pavement combined, 1.60% Grass, 1.07% Forbs, and 9.76% Browse. Overstory was 8.60%. A new bulletin board contributed greatly to our efforts to disseminate information. A total of eleven different talks and tours were given during the year. PASTURE STOCKING - LIVESTOCK. The annual stocking of cattle and sheep in their respective pastures started on May 1 and May 2 respectively. The entire grazing season for cattle went according to schedule. (Table 1). All cattle used were two year old heifers. During the spring grazing period numerous attacks by coyotes were made in pasture 1 and pasture 5 on the sheep. Six or eight ewes lambed in pasture 1 but only one lamb survived. It was finally killed in pasture 5 along with a ewe. Another ewe was lost in pasture 1. Once the lambs were eliminated, the coyotes ceased to be a problem. But in the meantime, many man hours of time were expended trying to shoot and trap these coyotes. During the past winter the services of the local Predator Control Agent were obtained and at least a few of the coyotes were removed. PASTURE STOCKING - DEER. Deer trapping started October 27,1961, except for one deer which stocked himself in pasture three on October 24. As usual, the heavy hunting pressure around the area drove many deer into Dry Fork for protection. The effective work of the Corral Gulch trap resulted in the filling of pasture 7 on October 27th. During the fall a new lane had been constructed across the back of pasture three to facilitate the moving of deer from Reagan Gulch to both pastures three and four. A squeeze shoot was incorporated within the lane to allow all deer to bc tagged. The lane was fairly effective after minor defects in the mechanism were remedied but the deer soon ceased to use the gulch after hunting stopped. As a result, early pasturc stocking was greatly reduced. �Table 1. Pasture Class No. Sheep 35 1 2 3 4 5 Cows 12 Cows 12 Deer -- Deer -- Sheep 34 Swrunary of Livestock Spring Dates Stocked Removed May 2 June 1 May 18 May 24 June 29 June 1 No. Stocking, 1961 and Deer Stocking 1961-62. Dates Fall Stocked Removed Acres Season of use No. Total Stock Acres/StoCk] Month Days Months Nov. 2 Nov. 24 Spring 35 35 Fall 76.37 Season 70 752 770 1522 25.1 25.7 50.7 3.0 3.0 1.5 Oct. 2 Spring 12 12 Oct. 16 166.25 Fall Season 24 336 168 504 11.2 5.6 16.8 14.8 29.7 9.9 12 Oct. 26 Nov. 2 Spring 12 12 161. 81 Fall Season 24 156 84 240 5.2 2.8 8.0 31.1 57.8 20.2 -- Oct. 24 Fee. 9 Mar. 27 Apr. 3 Winter 42 2456 81.9 1.98 Oct. 27 Jan. 31 Mar. 26 143.64 Winter 64 Apr. 4 5554 185.1 0.78 Spring 34 35 85.42 Fall Season 69 433 420 853 14.4 14.0 28.4 - - - - 35 12 ~lr May 24 June 7 35 Nov. 24 Dec. 7 None None - Winter . 5.9 6.1 3.0 Deer -- -- 14 Nov. 4 Dec. 14 Mar. 22 Mar. 23 98.93 Winter 14 49.8 1.99 Deer 1493 6 -- 6 Oct. 27 Mar. 30 90.67 Winter 6 30.3 3.00 Deer 909 7 Oct. 16 Sp_ring 112 12 Oct. 26 205.43 Fall Season 24 204 108 312 6.8 3.6 10.4 30.2 57.1 19.8 Oct. 11 Spring 33 35 155.55 Fall Season 68 759 735 1494 25.3 24.5 49.8 6.1 6.3 3.1 8 9 Cows 12 Sheep 33 May 1 June 7 May 18 June 30 12 35 Nov. 2 �-92The effectiveness of the ex5.st.ingwillg traps was greatly reduced by the lack of deer in the area;:;immediately adjacent to the wings. Twenty-five box traps were baited and set on November 16th; most ·of these were placed on the ridge north of headquarters. These were so placed because that is where the deer were at that time. Due to the heavy deer kill, comparatively few deer remained in the Dry Fork area at this time. Those remaining found adequate browse on the ridges to carry them late into the winter. Although good trapping weather prevailed, the box traps were ineffective as compared to previous years. Heavy drifting snows from December on inhibited travel on the access roads. As a result, many of the traps were inoperative for prolonged periods of time. Pasture stocking stopped on February 9 with no deer having been placed in pasture five. An early thaw (Febr. 11-13) washed out access roads into the pastures and deer could not be transported" In addition, it was felt that at such a late date, a representative season of use could not be attained in pasture five. Trapping and releasing continued until March 21, 1962. A total of 133 different deer were caught. In addition, there were 29 deer recaught which had been tagged in previous years. Of these 162 deer, 126 were placed in the pastures and 36 were released after being ear tagged with metal tags and orange nylon ribbons. The deer were caught in respect to the various trapping methods as follows: Group traps-13; wing traps-23; box traps-126. Of the 126 deer put in the pastures, thirty-six were fawns. In 1960, it was decided to refrain from using fawns in the pastures insofar as possible. Theil' mortality is high and the proper stocking equivalent is inconclusive. However, the unusual trapping cond.itLoris this winter made it necessary to stock the thirty-six fawns (29% of total) in order to maintain an adequate stocking rate. Table 2 shows the break-down by sex and age groups for deer trapped this year. Table 2. Sex and Age Groups of Deer Trapped at Little Hills, 1961-62. HUCkS Does (J) (J) bO bO J:: (J) J:: 3: co iJ...l lum:aggea veer Put in Pastures 0 Tagged Deer Put in Pastures 13 Tagged Deer Released 9 TOTAL 22 "rl r1 H co Q) Unknown (J) bO J:: (J) +J :J 'd r1 (J) +J J:: 3: co 0 co "rl r1 H co Total ~ J:: J:: (J) +J :J 'd r1 co +J "rl (J) r1 J:: H +J cu 'd 3: (J) r1 (J) co :J +J J:: 3: Q) 0 co "rl r1 H cu (J) +J r1 ;:J 'd r1 co +J H cu iJ...l :>< <C H 0 0 14- 14- 10 0 1 11 10 0 19 29 13 6 52 26 13 58 97 :>< <C H iJ...l 0 4- l~ 7 6 26 Q) :>< <C 0 H 71 iJ...l :>< <C 0 0 0 0 Q) 1 1 11 14- 1 10 25 8 11 LJ·l 27 7 76 110 0 0 0 0 0 23 2 11 36 10 0 1 11 59 15 88 162 Fourteen year average of deer tagged is 88 including 1961-62-133 (Max. 203). Total Bucks (Yearlings and Adults) ------------19--11.7% Total Does (Yearlings and Adults) -------------83--51.2% Total Fawns -----------------------------------59--36.4-% Unknown Sex ---------------------------1-- 0.7% �"'93PELLET-GROUP TRANSECTS During the summer of 1961, six 900-foot pellet group transects were placed in pasture ten, the 'unfenced control, in an effort to determine the approximate stocking rate there during the preceding winter. Cattle use this pasture during the early winter and of course deer are there all winter. There were ten tenth-acre plots on each transect giving a total of 60 plots. The counts made showed the stocking rate to be slightly less than that of the heavy use pastures for both cattle and deer, or two cow days per acre and thirty-five deer days per acre respectively. After the samples were taken, a further sample size test was made of the existing data. This indicated that 186 plots would be needed of the deer pellet count to be 90% accurate. There was not time to make this many more plots. DEER REMOVALS Late stocking resulted in more animals needed in the pastures, thus increasing the problem of removing -them. Due to the lack of permanent personnel, a total of six laborers were hired over the removal period (184-man hours). All pastures were empty by April 4-,with the exception of one or two deer which were removed later in the spring. Construction of new let-down portions of the pasture fences greatly decreased the removal time and the pastures were virtually emptied in 4-1 individual drives. Fortunately no accidents occurred in the stocking program and all pastures were stocked according to pre-set rates, except pasture five. The variation in the stocking rate of pasture four was due largely to the number of deer that died early in the season. Fourteen deer are known to have died of natural causes within the pastures. Twelve of these deaths occurred in pasture four, which was probably due to the poor condition of the range resulting from thirteen years of extremely heavy browsing. This resulted in an 18.8% mortality rate in this pasture, the highest thus far recorded. Amounts of snow accumulated on the ground was one of the highest on record. 3 Calculated Deer Days Desired 24-4-2 Approximate Deer Days Achieved 24-56 4- 5785 54-94- 5 1296 6 It~99 It~93 7 907 909 Pasture Number Deviation Over Under 14291 6 2 �-94TAG RETURNS The trapping and tagging program at Little Hills was initiated in 1949 and has continued to date. During this time, a total of 1,231 deer have been tagged and released. (See Table 3). Hunters have harvested and returned tags from 161 of these animals which is 13.i%. Approximately 35% of these returns were in the 1961 season while 50% were from 1960 and 1961 combined. The bright colored ribbons are believed to be largely responsible for this improved return. Although tag returns have corne from distances up to 92 air miles, 43% of these deer were killed within five miles of where they were tagged and 65%'within ten miles. This would indicate a need for a knowledge of the summer range of the herd. In an effort to learn this, all deer tagged in the last two years have been marked with colored ribbons in each year, made of nylon impregnated vinyl. Sighting records are kept by individuals in the summer range areas in the same manner as those for elk neck bands. During the summer of 1961 a total of 15 sight records were recorded between 25 and 50 air miles from where the animals were tagged. All except two of these sightings were east and south of Meeker in the Flat Tops area which would indicate that a migration of the White River'herd still exists. Records under ten miles frOm the Station are not being kept since they are almost daily occurrences. It is hoped that future records of this type will indicate definite migration patterns which in turn will contribute to the management of the herd. Table 3. Year 1948-49 1949-50 1950-51 1951-52 1952-53 1953-54 1954-55 1955-56 1956-57 1957-58 1958-59' 1959-60 1960-61 1961-62 Total Total 22, 134 43 92 22 33 64 75 151 33 118 137 203 104 1231 Per Cent of Total Number of Deer Caught by Year's According Sex and Age Group Bucks 3 .38 11 24 7 14 18 29 70 8 61 77 93 33 486 39.5% Does 19 96 32 68 15 19 46 46 81 25 57 60 110 71 745 60.5% Fawns 3 44 20 39 15 18 36 35 83 12 74 63 97 45 584 47.4% Yearl. 1 4 1 7 0 3 7 12 12 2 2, 26 31 14 122 9.9% to Adult 18 86 22 46 7 12 21 28 56 19 42 48 75 45 519 42.7% �-95UTILIZATION ESTIMATES - DEER Generally speaking, Table 4 shows that the use of key browse plants in the moderate and light stocked pastures continues to be heavier than should be. This trend has been mentioned in previous years. Fawns were again stocked as one-half a deer during this winter. The estimates shown in Table 4 were made from 1/100 acre circular plots spaced at ten chain intervals using the permanently marked grid corners. Every browse plant in each plot was examined and a weighted average figured. While numbers of plants observed is high the composition is not as well represented as in a paced transect system. Table 4. Average Per Cent Utilization of Browse Plants by Deer, Winter 1960-61, by Pasture 1P.3 Moderate P.4 Heavy P.5 Moderate P.6 Moderate P.? Light Avg. % Avg.% Avg. %. Avg. % tE\vg. % , Hdt.s Uti!., Hits Util. Hits Uti1. Hits Util. Hits Util. Species Serviceberry 218 Mountain Mahogany 53 Bitterbrush 8 Little Rabbitbrush 96 Big Rabbitbrush 1 Big Sagebrush 90 44 Oak Pine 45 Juniper 40 Snowberry 305 2 Horsebrush Oregon Grape 21 Winterfat 27 Morman Tea 9 Skunkbush Chokecherry 3 80 Myrtle Rose 16 Lanceleaf Rabbitbrush C. despressu 29 113 6 51 8 63 39 11 37 38 2 68 38 28 17 53 64 34 79 15 99 17 27 4 33 91 7 43 17 67 1 50 166 64 16 5 146 42 33 25 2 2 40 6 10 3 95 27 11 a a 1 7 123 42 28 4 140 23 26 -- --- 50 18 20 2 4 2 6 14 6 13 0 2 1 0 0 0 5 0 ----- -- ------- ---- 10 60 11 142 83 .84 26 9 93 89 28 72 90 11 11 2 1 2 28 0 44 20 --12 --3 -- --a --1 --0 --5 -- --0 5 --6 ---2 0 ---a 1 -- -- ----- ---- --8 89-- ---- Average 12 IIilil23.1 . 625 34.5 -, 523 --a --- 12.7 -- --- 655 a 1 a 1 4 4 ---- -- 18.0 -- -2 3 0 3 251 15.6 �UTILIZATION A. ESTIMATES - LIVESTOCK Browse The 1/100 acre browse plot system, as used last year, samples large numbers of individual plants but seems to inadequately sample the less abundant species and those which are unevenly distributed. It is no less time consuming, if not more so, than the paced transect. Accordingly it was decided to try using the paced transect almost altogether during the 1961 utilization estimate work. This worked better insofar as sampling went. It was more laborious of course. Both methods as used had the disadvantage that the sampling is not stratified in relation to the amount of grazing pressure in the various parts of each pasture. Cattle in particular, of course, use bottom lands much more heavily than they do the hillsides. Because a disproportionately large part of the samples fall on steep slopes the resulting estimates, when averaged out for all species and all pastures, are rather low. See Tables 5 and 6 following. Inspection of the key browse species only, however,in Table 5 shows more logical results. In pastures one and two it is evident that mahogany, bitterbrush, serviceberry, and the rabbitbrushes were heavily utilized. Many of them were destructively browsed when the two seasons use are added together. Rodent use of browse was negligible during the winter except for consistently heavy use of snowberry. It was not greatly different during the spring of 1961. See Tables 4 and 5. Considerable field time has been spent in separating the estimates by exposure in each pasture. There has not been office time as yet to properly analyse this data. It is hoped that from thi.s work some procedure can be devi.sed to reduce the amount of time needed to make these estimates. �-97Table 5. Utilization Percentages of Browse Taken by Livestock by Pasture and Season, 1961, Based on Estimates Made From Paced Transects.ll - . Forage Species !Pasture 1 H Sheep S F Little Rabbitbrush Big Sage Serviceberry Horsebrush Snowberry Pinyon Pine Mtn. Mahogany Bitter':" brush Juniper Oak Morman Tea Big Rabbitbrush Currant Oregon Grape Skunkbush Winterfat Myrtle Rose Pasture 2 H Cattle S F Pasture 3 Pasture M 5 M Cattle S F Shee S F 8 .Pasture 9 M M Cattle Sheep F F S S Pasture 45 11 74 0 15 0 70 4 7 1 18 0 ·6 1 10 0 2 1 2 2 17 0 17 0 12 4 3 T 1 0 1 0 4 0 1 1 20 3 90 0 25 4 62 3 18 3 23 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 9 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 -- 0 -- 0 0 1 0 0 9 65 15 29 0 1 5 1 3 0 4 12 14 0 0 73 0 0 13 0 8 51 -- 10 --0 1 0 0 1 0 5 ·0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 6 0 0 10 0 3 -- 3 1 0 2 -- 0 0 0 0 ---- -- --0 13 13 0 43 -- (J 0 30 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 89 ------- ------ -- ---- --- -- -- -50 --0 0 -- -- 0 -- 0 40 -- -8 0 -- --- ----- --- -0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 93 0 --0 --- --- -0 -0 -- Average util. 3 2 2 4 2 4 23 3 4 12 7 18 Plants lOaf 8 of 8 of 6 of o of o of 5 of 4 of eaton by 9 of 30f 92 112 260 96 216 216 209 208 458 99 rodents 1/ The nu'nber of browse plants examined by p asture and season to produce these averages was: #1-S97, F99; #2-S216, F216; #3-S209, F208; #5-S112, F96; #8"Sl,589, F260; #9-S203, F92. -- -- B. Grass Spring came early in 1961 and grass made a quick growth. But precipitation during the entire subsequent growing season was subnormal and as the summer advanced daily temperatures were also at normal or above. Accordingly total grass growth was not good. This resulted in a heavy utilization in pastures #1, 2, and 3 (Table 6). For some unexplained reason this does not show up in pastures #5, 8, and 9 where use was generally lower than in 1960. �Rodent use, considering all grass species, was not excessive~ It was, however, heavy where it did occur. Cottontail rabbits seem to be somewhat less numerous tha~ in 1960. C. Weeds A great many weeds dried up and disappeared long before fall grazing time. Those remaining were rather heavily used, particularly in pastures #1 and #2. In the heavy use pastures the legumes have almost disappeared or at least are completely cleaned up each season. Grouping species, as is done in Table 7, tends to mask differences that may exist between cattle and sheep in respect to preference for weeds. None-the-less there is still an evident heavier use of weeds by sheep than by cattle in almost all pastures in both 1960 and 1961. Space does not permit detailed discussion of the numerous weed species. Rodent use of weeds Table. 6. Forage Species Average utile Plants eaton by rodents in 1961 as compared to 1960. Utilization Percentages of Grass Taken by Livestock by Pasture and Season, 1961, Based on Estimates Made From Paced Transects.ll Pasture 1 H Sheep F ~ Bluegrass Carex Squirrel tail Indian Ricegrass Bluebunch Wheatgras Junegrass Needle an Thread Western Wheatgras Littleseed Ricegrass Galleta Nodding Brome also decreased Pasture 2 H Pasture 3 M Pasture 5 M Pasture 8 M Pasture 9 M Cattle S F Cattle S F Sheep S FY Cattle S F Sheep S F 30 18 21 13 32 20 42 10 46 7 14 1 14 5 18 0 18 2 27 3 20 7 37 0 33 6 9 12 18 1 0 4 2 14 12 36 23 66 12 16 4 9 9 6 5 16 20 17 9 52 30 0 17 8 2 6 8 15 12 5 1 12 3 0 2 9 2 8 2 7 66 95 20 83 32 52 24 37 39 18 0 -- -- 90 40 37 15 1 0 12 12 7 16 -- 10 95 4 0 ---- ---- -- -- 0 20 -- 28 85 --- -- -- -- 0 0 1 15 0 -- -- 2q· 30 J20f Dlof 98 99 12% 10% 9 --15 -- ---- 0 0 23 17 17 13 7 6 10 8 9 18 28of 29af 30af 48 of Jfj of ill ol. 31of .'Baf JRDf 15 of 216 216 (n 209 208 112 250 260 203 92 .1.11%11% 13% 13% It~% 23% 12% (J% 10% 16% .==== -;.;=;=~; II Number of plants "h.i t- " wh.i.Lo pa c i.ng In each pas t ur-o W;IS: #lSl)7, I., ()!); #2S2l6, F2l6; #3S209, F208; #SSl12, F91; #8S2S0, [260; #9S203. f92. 21 Snow on ground at tIme es t i.ma tr-« were made' (J 2/'~ to 7/(jl) . �-99Table 7. Group or Species Utilization Percentages of Forbs taken by Livestock by Pasture and Season, 1961, Based on Estimates Made from Paced Transects.1/ Pasture 1 H Sheep S F Half Shrubs Composites Mustards Legumes Cryptantha sp. Phlox caespitosa All Others Pasture 2 H Cattle S F Pasture 3 M Cattle S F Pasture 5 M Sheep F S Pasture 8 M Cattle F S Pasture 9 M Shee.e F S 10 19 6 32 0 0 12 9 11 0 34 16 5 15 5 8 2 30 4 1 0 0 7 7 4 32 1 2 0 7 6 0 1 0 0 0 0 9 1 7 10 0 0 6 13 2 2 0 4 0 0 0 0 1 T 20 2 18 25 2 7 10 11 0 11 0 0 T 3 8 0 0 0 2 8 0 13 4 13 4 8 2 1 2 8 1 8 9 8 22 9 Average 2 of 180f 60f 40f llof lof 9 of 8 of 3 of 8 of 4 of 20f Plants 87 203 267 260 112 91 209 208 216 216 99 eaton by 99 .otj.% .02% .02% .09% .04% .01% rodents .1% .1% .04% .02% .05% .04% 1/ The number of "h.it s" while pacing within each pasture was as follows: #lS-98, F99; #2S216, F216; #3S209, F208; #5S112, F91; #8S267, F260; #9S203, F87. STOMACH ANALYSIS - DEER Stomach contents of twelve deer which were collected, or died, during March and April 1961 were analyzed. These deer came from the pastures as follows: #3 - 3 deer, #4 - 6 deer, #5 - 1 deer, #6 - 1 deer, and #7 - 1 deer. Separation of contents was by volume, done while wet, after washing out digestive juices and uniden-tifiable fragments. Only the broad groups--grass, forbs, and browse were used. The purpose of this work was to check, in a small way, the extent to which deer use range grasses on a spring when these plants become available early. The spring of 1961 was mild and grasses grew well in March and early April. This work suggests that range grasses and forbs may be less sought after than might appear to be the case. The question is therefore imposed, TTWhat difference is there, if any, between native pasture grasses of the Piceance area and the native range grasses?TI The deer examined did not have access to native bottomland, pasture grasses and weeds (Table 8). It is evident that the various browsing intensities in the deer pastures did not alter the proportions of grasses and weeds taken. Utilization estimates made from 1950 through 1960 in these pastures after the deer had been removed each spring indicate about the same thing. Amounts used rarely exceeded five per cent. �-100..• Table 8. Comparative Amounts of Food Groups Found in Rumen Contents of Twelve Deer Taken from Various Pastures, March and April, 1961, After an Open Winter and During an Early Spring. Sample Pasture % Browse % Forbs % Grass 1 2 3 3 3 96 95 99 96 90 93 99 96 9499 99 99 Trace 45 Trace 410 3 45 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 4444445 6 7 Tt TT TI TI TI 0 Trace TI rr 7 1 46 Trace TT TT IT TT �-101PASTURE RANGE ANALYSIS A. FOR CONDITION AND TREND: Composition The paced transects were repeated in 1961/62 as planned. It was quite apparent that no appreciable change had occurred in composition of browse, grass or weeds from th~- data as reported in the 1960/61 completion report. Hence, no separate tabulation is included here. B. Density (1) Browse It was late September before browse density readings could be taken with the angle gauge. Even then it was possible only to read mahogany and serviceberry. These estimates were made along paced transects run diagonally across each deer pasture, using a standard interval. Results will appear in the report for 1961/62 since production-utilization transects by stem length were also done at this time. Time did not allow readings in the livestock pastures. (2) Grasses and Forbs The proposed Tspace measuremenfTwas not attempted. Herbaceous plants measured along the existing canfield line transects should serve the same purpose. C. Vigor \ (1) Browse To be obtained from line transects. (2-4) Grasses and Forbs One student spent nearly two months measuring in each pasture nine grass sp~cies and nineteen forbs. A total uf 2,189 grasses were measured and aged, and 2,670 forbs were JTlP;Jsurcd but not aged. A detailed procedural write-up is filed, together with forty-seven large tables. Briefly, the work inv()lved: 1. 2. 3. L~. Pacing across contour with a ten pace interval in each pasture and lines ten chains apart. Pacing in each exclosure at four pace jntervals and about eighteen transects. Measurement in millimeters of ungrazed plants located in accessible sites as the closest TThitTTto the toe. Estimating age classes of grasses accord_in~",; to the' categories: seedlings, young, ma tur-o , dC'c,ldent, and dead, with nu t;ltion "l'('('('ntTT "1' "do compo sod ' to da tc the de ad plu n L~;. �-102•.• 5. 6. 7. Details of how measurement's were made varied by species but are recorded. Data was kept separate, by exposure in each pasture. After the above procedure was done it was frequently necessary to search randomly for additional plants that were ungrazed. A minimum goal of 5 individuals of each species for each exposure and in each exclosure was sought, but not always attained, in the case of some of the rarer plants. There has not been time, nor personnel, available data for statistical significance. Tables 9, 10, means and samp~e numbers by species and pasture. and analysis of age-form class data will likewise until time and personnel are available. to analyse the and 11 show Tabulation have to wait �Table 9. Average Culm and Le~f Lengths in Millimeters of Grasses by Pasture and Exclosure, Summer, 1961, Blue-bunch Wheatgrass - 19~9.1/ PASTURES Pasture ~rass Species Irid.Lan Ricegrass Blue-bunch Wheatgrass Carex 3quirreltail Bluegrasses ~eedle and Thread Western Wheatgrass Junegrass Little-seed Ricegrass Nodd.ing Brame Blue-bunch Wheatgrass C19~9) bI 1 . 2 Z Mean . 0 Mean . Mean3 . Mean ~ 0 0 . 0 Z 5 Mean . Mean . Mean6 • 0 0 Z 0 Z Z Mean . 10 . Mean 9 . Mean 8 7 0 0 Z I~ Z Z Z 227.6 24 230.6 ~5 260.2 30 268.6 51 252.0 25 26~.~ 29 309.3 50 312.9 30 330.6 21 293.0 52 25~.5 ~o 105.3 1~ 231.2 32 131.8 21 282.9 ~7 1~3.1 32 320.8 ~6 163.1 12 316.2 21 160.3 11 3~2.~ 2~ 188.8 8 338,3 21 167.0 11 317.~ 75 170.3 29 308.6 3~ 171.3 19 352.6 ~6 170.3 16 159.~ 10 13~.5 ~ 223.5 13 125.7 7 2~2.6 17 112.5 17 183,0 165.8 6 5 282.6 1~ 139.8 8 239.8 205.0 8 7 267.3 7 223.5 11 232.3 17 199.8 2~ 237.1 21 185.~ 2~ 237.8 150.0 239.2 9 275.8 160.2 5 272.6 5 205.7 9 201.7 6 257.5 12 251.8 20 221.8 8 235.8 15 252.8 6~.0 5 5 27~.1 128.2 7 5 311.0 207.0 8 7 268.~ 7 13~.8 13 313.5 17 139.9 11 260.6 7 1~~.1 13 251.1 122.9 9 7 257.9 21 2~5.7 17 131.3 '1~ 112.6 16 282.8 5 .. - 303.2 13 218.~ 7 279.2 186.0 5 1 288.1 1~ •.. •.. - - 359.~ 5 291.0 10 371.2 ~O 352•. 2 32 377•. 6 ~O 327•. 3 32 355.3 ~8 326•. 8 LtO . - - .. ... From L. E. Riordan thesis, 1956, G.S.U. - - - .. ... .....• 387.9 15 .. - - .. . ...• ...• . ... . " ..• ..... 7 ~ 292.~ 16 75.8 6 .. -7 258.3 . l b 9 eo ..• .•. . I �Table 9. (Continued) EXCLOSURES Pasture 1 Grass Species 2 t-Iean Hean .~ Indian Rice grass Blue-bunch Wheatgrass Carex Squirreltail Bluegrasses INe,edleand i Thread ,;\Jestern ..J 1 ~~ 2U1. q 161239.0 1 I r- _.',_, 6 7 • ~ Mean ~ Mean ~ Mean -~ _ 7 ~ Mean Mean ~ 388.8 5 384.6 7 370.1 20 189.9 10 421.5 230.7 6 7 281.1 207.1 8 7 327.5 24 290.5 232.0 252.3 24 163.6 19 396.0 10 285.0 10 291.0 219.8 8 8 9 6 I 11+6.7 6 213.4 287.8 4 4 286.3 217.8 4 9 249.2 140.6 9 9 286.2 244.4 5 212.2 14 284.5 6 256.9 7 263.6 3l~ 7 8 5 i 91 293.1 NO EXCL. 9 7 . 10 . Mean . gl NO EXCL. t b .j::"' 237.8 28 7 280.~ Mean 9 . ,£ 475.8 10 5 221.3 21 254.0 30 330.0 10 276.9 12 I 130.2 179.3 S 153.9 14 148.8 5 153.6 ~J # 8 222.9 13 I I . 331. 4 11 I ~~~.u : 1223.6 '-(·ddino- Brome • 210.7 131262.2 lllL8 S 135.9 5 4 ~ [-lean 276.1 29 261. 4 211 231.7 109.8 Is·1 EA.l /2lP .9 10 1 : r: \·;neatgras3 To 1 pa ~.... u~~_oIas~ Little-seed Ricegrass _ 226.7 10 3 6 - - 1- 390.0- 1 203.1 - 117.4 10 - - 236.0 1 - - - - 5 303.0 17 252.3 10 110.7 11 295.6 13 108.8 6 -- -- - - - . f �Table 10. Average Height or Crown Diameter in Millimeters of Selected Forbs by Pasture, Summer 1961.1/ PASTURES Pasture 1 2 \feed Species Mean z Mean . z Mean 0 '6 z Mean z Mean 0 0 0 Z Z Mean Z Z Mean 77 .3 35 57.7 23 97.5 16 91. 7 19 89.8 19 65.6 21 68.8 16 31 92.1 17 33.1 4 186.5 5 (d) 129.6 115 26.0 (d) 18.0 77.6 7 108.2 46 6 176.7 24.3 6 5 125.2 67.7 24 5 105.4 25.8 5 93.3 11 57.0 16 6 152.7 22.3 6 5 80.4 73.0 13 6 142.7 31.3 8 96.3 80.5 116.4 27.5 4 6 5 6 5 156.0 35.9 12 52.4 21 228.0 7 44.8 10 113.6 46.8 15 68.0 5 ,llii te-flw Td. Buckwheat (h) 135.0 6 3ulphyr-flwTd Buckwheat (d) 102.8 5 11.3 3 I?ussytoes Cd) 14 173.6 Bedstraw (h) 2 3toneseed (h) 131.0 5 83.4 :;umweed (h) 5 350.0 iJormweed (h) p-09.9 7 3nakeweed (h) p-85.2 5 Low Loco (d) Fringed Sage (h) Yarrow (h) Leafy Spurge (h) 1./ (hI mpans - 76.5 34 - - Z Mean 72.5 20 62.6 23 81.0 15 3 99.5 3 133.3 - - ~ - - 127.7 7 89.5 6 100.0 10 121.4 7 113.2 5 112.5 240.0 6 98.9 8 129.1 14 113.5 6 99.0 9 114.1 18 130.7 .7 107.4 12 129.3 14 57.3 9 7 109.3 8 335.3 108.6 18 9 503.0 176.5 10 56.8 6 9 105.7 47.6 5 5 153.6 5 354.6 125.5 25 5 622.4 171.4 14 5 77.8 136.8 11 52.7 3 8 115.6 5 98.0 8 204.6 289.9 7 148.5 17 528.4 8 195.5 12 66.7 3 7 196.9 4 87.0 2 146.0 2 409.0 145.6 25 492.6 9 171.4 13 7 52.7 177.7 18 68.2 6 2 250.0 255.5 7 119.2 l8 8 549.1 199.3 26 50.6 11 89.2 9 9 69.3 193.2 11 6 245.2 8 134.9 9 492.3 192.6 21 41.3 9 8 146.0 3 33.3 168.5 12 8 283.1 16 285.3 12 419.7 7 270.0 9 137.7 12 160.7 9 214.2 13 2 158.0 195.2 16 110.2 13 174.2 14 145.9 7 249.0 148.2 8 5 106.0 5 179.3 12 6 75.3 131. 7 7 - 101. 7 15 - 163.3 10 - - 256.0 5 110.0 1 301.1 8 287.7 ~48.4 81.0 5 5 154.0 132.4 5 208.0 158.2 6 4 208.6 17 5 124.6 9 - - 3 260.7 120.5 11 234.5 4 172.8 18 34.0 1 362.7 7 376.9 Sage (h) 78.5 40 0 0 0 0 Mean 10 9 8 7 79.8 44 (h) WrightTs z Mean 5 . 66.8 31 ~ow Phlox (d) ~ow Penstemon Cd) :ryptanthe (d) 3ladderpod ?eppergrass 4 0 0 Iap.Lopappus 3 5 193.4 19 - 5 20.6 2 18.0 - - 27.0 - (c) means diameter of plant measured. - - 16.2 5 heig:ht of olant maasi red: 6 27.4 6 7 26.3 9 4 . - - 151.0 16 4 592.2 201.5 13 5 79.2 35.0 ·2 \J1 I �Table 11. Average Height and Crown Diameter in Millimeters of Selected Forbs by Exclosure, Summer 1961.1/ EXCLOSURES Pasture Iveed Species 1 Y1ean 2 ~ 4- 3 Mean ~ Mean ~ Mean 5 ~ Mean 6 ~ 7 Mean ~ .~lean Low Phlox Cd) 86.0 31 142.4- 30 84-.4-21 91. 4- 10 88.3 27 69.9 11 Low Penstemon 4-6.9 7 Cd) ... ... 137.0 9 76.1 17 90.1 23 Cryptanthe (d) 82.7 26 84-.0 5 77.0 29 82.4- 7 69.0 26 36.0 2 NO Haplopappus (d)228.2 ... 195.5 2 191.7 3 14-3.8 5 159.4- 5 EXCL. 5 5· 198.0 Bladderpod (d) 35.0 1 20.0 1 36.7 3 35.3 ·7 Peppergrass 14-8.4- 5 (h) •.. 133.7 ... 7 130.0 2 White-flw'd 4- 129.3 Buckwheat (h) 136.3 6 89.8 6 Sulphur-flw'd Buckwheat Cd) 276.3 ... 6 189.4- 5 293.3 3 214-.4- 5 Pussy toes (d) 4-0.0 2 87.4- 5 65.3 4- 136.5 2 59.0 11 Beds traw (h) 203.0 ... 115.0 1 5 153.4- 5 ... Stoneseed (h) 4-22.0 5 4-09.3 3 329.0 ... 311.4- 5 273.2 5 5 Gumweed (h) 79.9 17 169.2 6 169.6 5 123.5 21 173.0 10 134-.0 14Wormwood (h) 580.2 5 573.2 ... 5 628.0 •.. ... 1 Snakeweed (h) 188.4 7 186.8 21 168.3 7 183.9 16 168.8 10 212.3 7 Low Loco (d) ... ... ... 60.0 6 ... ... 102.5 5 ... Fringed Sage 44-03.8 4- 336.5 (h) •.. •.. ... 180.0 1 382.0 3 Wright's Sage (h) 235.0 5 14-5.8 6 160.4- 33 14-7.4- 9 172.7 10 168.3 10 Yarrow (h) 14-6.3 3 192.8 11 ... ... 165.0 5 ... 126.8 5 Leafy Spurge ... ... 22.2 5 [h) ... ..• ... .... 13.0 2 ... ..• 1/ (hI rne a n s hpicrht- nr nl ::Int- mO::lQllY'o,-l· (H~ ~n~~~ ~~~~~+~~ _+ ~1~~~ - - - - - - - - - - - 8 ~ 9 Mean - - 76.1 10 232.4- 5 31.6 5 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - __ •...• . .~~_..J 20 ~I, Mean Mean ~ 103.3 10 .j I 101.0 lL~ - - NO EXCL. 4-3.4- 8 68.6 17 ... - - ... •.. - 6 5 14-9.1 7 4-5.5 6 332.0 14-8.0 7 153.0 11 - ...2 309.6... 14-... - ... ... ... 8 6 55.9 9 ... ... 160.0 1 153.6 128.0 I I I , t b 0, f 184-.8 72.8 157.1 4-1.7 I -j - ... ... ... .~ I 5 3 189.1 10 ... ... ... ..• ..• ... �Fig. 1. Difficulty was encountered in maintaining a straight line with the transect cable through heavy bro¥se. �Fig. 2 Meauring browse intercept along the tr~~sect line.. Generally, the cable was nearer to ground than illustrated. Fig. 3 Use of plumb rod as a plumbing device. �-107Additional Line Transects Pasture Ten. (Canfield) for One-acre Exclosures and Sample size tests which were run in pasture five exclosure in 1960, using total browse intercept, indicated that 189 transects would be needed to detect a change of 10% at the 90% level of probability. While 47 transects would be needed to detect a change of 20%. See Completion report for 1960-61, page 144. Since both samples would be out of the question from the manpower and time standpoint, ten transects per exclosure were arbitrarily established as the maximum number feasible. Accordingly, ten 100 foot line transects were established in each exclosure during the summer of 1961. The transects were spaced evenly and parallel across the short dimension of the exclosure. Both the head and foot of each transect was permanently marked with steel fencing rods. Sections of one-half inch pipe were also driven into the ground at each end to hold the cable apparatus. Readings were taken from a tight cable, placed as near to the ground as convenient, using pointed welding rods as plumbing devices. See Figs. 1, 2, and 3. All measurements were broken down into seven catagories:l. Litter; 2. Browse; 3. Grass; 4. Weeds; 5. Moss; 6. Bare Rock; 7. Overstory. Bareground and erosion pavement were obtained by elimination. Measurements were taken after Canfield (1941) in an effort to duplicate Mustard's work of 1958. Minor changes were made to facilitate additional information needed for the project. A detailed procedural write-up has been prepared but is not in~ cluded here. Counts were made of all browse plants within a plot 2' x 50' along the regular line transect after the method used by Mustard (1958). Age classes were tabulated and the origin of seedlings recorded. An attempt was made to photograph each transect after the system set up by Mustard 1958. A three foot square picture was taken at the head end of each transect. If the head end was too much under cover, the picture was taken at the opposite end. �Table 12. Swrunation Values in Per Cent from Eighty Line Transects in Pasture Ten (Central), 1961 . in Exclosures and Nineteen Transects . No. Transects Litter Bare Grd. & Erosion Grass Forbs Rock Pave. Serviceberry Mtn. Mahogany Snowberry Big Sagebrush Gamble!s Oak Rabbitbrushes Bitterbrush Juniper Pinyon Winterfat Horsebrush Currant Oregon Grape TOTAL I Bluebunch ~Vheatgrass Indian Ricegrass Junegrass Squirrel Tail Sedges Needle and Thread Grass Bluegrass Western lVheatgrass Giant Wildrye Nodding Bromegrass Little-seed Ricegrass Tobosa Grass TOTAL * Pasture ten not included 1 10 40.57 45.92 1.02 1.57 0.11 2 10 14.19 40.11 0.43 4.62 8.15 3 10 22.33 50.40 2.19 2.21 2.40 2.10 .36 1.67 14.38 0.47 8.05 6.96 1.08 0.10 0.71 2.13 1.65 .43 .94 .15 .18 .07 .02 .12 .l4-3 .04 .01 T 2.23 .23 1.41 .09 9.01 7.73 2.47 8.54 .93 1.32 .55 .50 .20 .37 .80 31.94 22.15 .04 .25 T .01 .01 .02 .05 .01 .27 .34 .50 .06 .22 .53 .18 .09 0.63 0.01 11.05 6.34 10.22 4 10 26.99 35.99 2.35 2.74 PASTURES 5 10 7.50 71. 98 2.23 2.32 2.67 1.31 8.03 .45 .92 1.18 .97 .36 6 10 12.12 56.24 0.86 1.63 7.52 8 10 19.98 49.91 0.59 2.01 10.99 .33 .89 2.39 .03 .28 5.43 .60 .60 6.23 2.20 1.59 9 . 10 26.37 35.22 1.17 1.88 10 19 3.82 4.44 .64 1.31 .03 6.49 3.24 I 7.14 3.68 1.31 .41 .11 4.70 11.56 .01 .24 .03 .17 .05 31.92 15.90 21.78 26.78 32.32 .51 .05 .21 .64 .28 .55 .31 .97 .04 .04 .51 .20 .01 .18 .19 .24 T .03 .08 .13 .01 .08 .10 .02 .09 .02 .17 .05 .06 .07 .09 .03 .02 .25 .65 .02 .03 3.53 1.69 1.18 1.12 .64 .45 .15 .19 .05 0.86 6.25 1.60 3.52 5.66 .90 .83 1.03 1.35 2.7Lj· .05 .30 T .01 24.23 .79 .37 .09 .01 .02 .24 .08 .01 .05 .24 .19 .20 .03 .13 .42 .09 .03 .03 T T 2.23 21.26 48.22 1.36 2.11 1.97 .21 .54 .01 9.76 T .04 2.35 - 88.05 1. 60 1.07 - .26 1.02 0.43 2.19 in mean per cent column. MEAN * PER CENT 0.59 .01 1.16 1.66 0.01 T 1.36 I I J I t I t b CP r �Table 13. Continued - Forbs 1 .35 ~ow Phlox (P. caespitosa) T Gomweed .01 lHapolpappus .12 Snakewe ed .20 Cryptantha .25 ~ulphur-flwd. Buckwheat Low Penstemon (P. caespitosl s) .02 T Sisymbrium sp. .06 Hairy Golden Aster .34 (Selaginel1a sp?) ~'1oss .20 Peppergrass T IFalse Dandelion T ~ster Diversifolius Wooly Rockcress (Arabis sp.) T .02 Erigeron Pulcherimus (L. greenii) Lupine Pussy Toes WrightTs Sage Globemallow Tansy Mustard Violet Senecio multilobatus Cactus ILow Daisy (Erigeron sp.) Hairy Rockcress (Arabis sp. Fringed Sage Low Loco (A. chamaeleuce) Stoneseed Penstemon alatum Penstemon fremontii Yarrow Tall Phlox (P. longifolia) White Evening Primrose 1.57 TOTAL 2 2.97 .05 3 .65 4 .53 .05 .80 .01 .11 .38 .14 .15 T .42 .01 1.17 1.07 .37 PASTURES 5 1.37 .03 6 .18 .05 .23 .02 .02 .04 T .24 .01 .46 .02 .03 .02 .01 .01 T .02 .91 .02 8 .86 .03 .06 .61 .07 .03 T T 1.88 MEAN * PER CEN'I .98 .03 .01 .30 .05 .09 .12 .04 .10 .04 .03 T T .01 .52 .07 .01 T T T T .02 .13 .02 .08. .02 .01 T T T T .01 .02 T .01 T T T .01 .01 .01 T T T .01 T 1.07 14.94 5.11 6.23 2.37 9 .89 .15 .08 T .09 .62 T .09 .02 .11 T .20 .02 T T .01 .04 .09 .04 .01 .02 .01 .03 .01 .01 T .02 T .03 T .02 .01 .06 T .02 T .13 .01 .10 .01 .06 .01 .01 .08 .03 .03 2.74 2.32 1.63 .01 2.01 Overstory: 9.63 5.73 16.39 Pinyon 1.97 .69 .53 4.45 Juniper * Pasture ten not included in mean per cent column.- 2.41 1.22 12.97 3.10 14.38 3.60 4.62 2.21 10 .37 .08 9.56 2.58 i I t b \0 I �Table 14. Relative Proportions and Pasture, 1961. Past. #1 Species Tot. %* Serviceberry 23 19.5 ~ltn. Mahog any 15 12.7 Snowberry 15 12.7 Big Sage 21 17.8 Horsebrush 22 18.6 Juniper 5 4.2 Pine 6 5.1 Little Rabbitbrush 11 9.3 Big Rabbitbrush Lanceleaf Rabbitbrush Bitter Brush Gamble's Oak Oregon Grape Ivinterfat Currant TOTAL 118 100.0 * 23.;.118=19.5 Past. Tot. 72 3 120 68 of Browse Plants in 100 Square Foot Exclosure #2 Past. % Tot. 24-.8 24 1.0 41. 5 63 23.4 127 71 .7 4 .7 4 18.2 36.7 20.5 1.2 1.2 7 2.4 26 2 .7 23 2 2 14 #3 Past. Tot. 84 40 82 58 53 3 2 % 19.9 9.5 19.4 13.7 12.5 .7 .5 7.5 47 11.1 57 6.6 4 .9 1 % 6.9 #4 Past. #5 Tot. ~ 48 21.8 1 .5 14 6.3 64 29.1 6 2.7 6 2.7 15 6.8 Past. Tot. 86 4 34 50 8 2 3 #6 % 38.7 1.8 15.3 22.5 3.6 .9 1.4 25.9 11 5.0 .5 2 .9 Plots by Species Past. #8 Tot. % 124 L~2. 0 1.4 4 57 19.3 35 11.9 1.7 5 1 .3 10 3.4 30 10.2 Past. #9 Past. Tot. % Tot. 29 8.9 52 1 .3 23 173 52.91 25 28 8.6 21 1.5 a 5 1.2 4 20 6.11 13' J 16 4.9 1.2 17 6 27 290 100.0 346 100.0 4.0 1.4 6.4 423 100.0 8 1 3.2 .5 221 100.0 22 9.9 222 100.0 3 26 1.0 8.8 295 100.0 1 5 .3 15.3 327 100.0 6.6 19 9.6 1 ~ 4.8 4 I #10 % 26.3 11. 6 12.6 10.6 4·.5 2 18 11 ~~, I I I--' I--' o I 1.0 9.1 5.6 4 2.0 198 100.0 �Table 15. Numbers Pasture of Browse Plants Found Within Eighty Plots, Each 100 Square Feet in Size (2' X 50'), in Exclosures, Classified by Species, Age Class, Origin, and Grouping, 1961.* Serviceberry tvltn.Mahogany Snowberry Big Sage Horsebrush Juniper Pine Little Rabbitbrush Big Rabbitbrush Lance Leaf Rabbitbrush Bitterbrush Gamble's Oak Oregon Grape Winterfat TOTAL Serviceberry Mtn. tvlahogany Snowberry Big Sage Horsebrush Juniper Pine Little Rabbitbrush Big Rabbitbrush Lance Leaf Rabbitbrush Bitterbrush Gamble's Oak Oregon Grape Winterfat TOTAL * See Table 16. footnote PASTURE #1 Origin Age Class S Spt D S y M 3 4- 16 1 4- 10 7 1 7 9 12 3 5 1441 2 2 3 1 11 PASTURE #2 Origin Age Class S.Spt D S Y M 32 28 12 3 53 62 5 5 17 4-6 Group S C 2 1 2 1 2 3 Group S C 5 2 11 I S I 2 12 4-1 63 5 11 PASTURE #3 4- 45 8 4-7 29 341 8 7 3 1 44-10 2 5 12 16 1 3 7 1 6455 1 25 117 HI-8 2 2 6 1 1 4- 1 6 1 2 4-7 1 11 4-8 9 2 3 2 1 7 1 29 20 27 19 22 PASTURE #41 1 6 1 8 7 30 29 26 1 13 2 13 2 2 2 1 1 1 , 6 - 13 69 JD9 tL55 for. key to symbols. 2 11 3 10 9 3 15 ~ 14-6167 106 '::J ..J ·1 4- �Table 15. Numbers Pasture of Browse Plants Found Within Eighty Plots, Each 100 Square Feet in Size (2! X 50!) , in Exclosures, Classified by Species, Age Class, Origin, and Grouping, 1961.* (Continued) Serviceberry i':'Itn. f-'Iahogany Snowbe r-ry Big Sage Horsebrush Juniper Pine Little Rabbitbrush Big Rabbitbrush Lance Leaf Rabbitbrush Bitterbrush Gamble!s Oak TOTAL Serviceberry f-'Itn. ~Iahogany Snowberry Big Sage Horsebrush Juniper Pine Little Rabbitbrush Big Rabbitbrush Lance Leaf Rabbitbrush Bitterbrush Gamble 1 sOak TOTAL * See Table 16. footnote PASTURE #5 Age Class Origin S y M D S S~t 5 16 20 7 2 3 1 4- 6 41 10 24- 29 1 1 3 2 1 4- 1 1 3 10 2 3 3 7 35 12 2 1 1 Group S C 4- 1 1 1 3 3 PASTURE #6 Age Class Origin S Y M D S Spt 10 30 18 28 8 2 2 1 1 9 21 419 8 23 1 '+ 3 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 7 2 4- 41 14- 52 52 2 8 8 2 1 6 2 96 59 1 10 PASTURE 54- 18 2 25 2410 17 1 42 4- 1 13 1 11 #8 10 I I' I 1 10 11 66 65 80 9 PASTURE 4- 21 1 4-3 86 341 14- 13 #9 4- Group S C 10 I 2 11 2 8 S 2 2 10 18 3 I 3 13 2 1 3 6 1 8 3 3 1 3 11 1 6 /; 3 1 20 3 2 3 99 110 83 for key to symbols. .J 2 1 1 1 3 1 1135 5 9 14- 101 120 92 ~ I I ·10 I 8 �Table 16. Numbers of Browse Plants Found Within Nineteen Plots, Each 100 Square Feet in Size (21 X 501), in Pasture #10, Classified by Age Class, Origin and Grouping, 1961.* Species Serviceberry Mtn. Mahogany Snowberry Big Sage Horsebrush Pine Little Rabbitbrush Big Rabbitbrush Bitterbrush Gamblels Oak Oregon Grape Currant TOTAL * Symbols: Age ClassS - Seedlings Y - Young M - Mature D - Decadent S 6 1 4 1 6 6 1 25 Age Class Y M 23 23 10 3 9 10 13 3 1 7 2 5 10 5 1 1 3 6 2 8 2 57 1 91 D 14 9 2 4 1 Origin Seed Sprout 6 1 1 3 1 Gro:uping Single Cluster 2 4 1 4 1 6 6 4 1 3 6 1 1 39 OriginS - Seed Spt - Root Sprout 6 1 I I-' ~ 1 12 13 Grouping of SeedlingsS - Single C - Cluster 23 2 �Table 17. Pasture #1 Pasture #2 Pasture #3 Pasture #4 Pasture #5 Pasture #6 Pasture #8 Pasture #9 Pasture #10 All Pastures Comparisons Beuveen Pasture Transects (1958) and Exclosure Transects (1961) as to Total Plants Per Plot, Seedlings and Young, and Key Species Seedlings and Young. TOTAL PLANTS Pastures - 1958 Exclosures - 1961 No. Total No. Total 2x25' No. Mean 2x25' No. Mean Plots Plants Plots Plants 26 151 5.81 20 118 5.9 46 443 9.63 20 290 14.5 58 11.91 691 20 346 17.3 46 468 10.17 20 21.2 423 30 353 11.77 20 11.1 221 22 154 7.00 20 11.1 222 62 787 12.69 20 295 14.8 38 349 9.18 20 327 16.4 38 198 5.2 328 3396 10.35 160* 2241 14.01 REPRODUCTION _(So & Y_) Pastures - 1958 Exclosures - 1961 U No. Total II Total No. 1 2x25' No. 2x25 No. Mean t-Iean Plots Plants Plots I Plants 26 64 2.46 14 20 o. 46 224 4.87 20 2S II 1.2.Jj 58 380 6.55 20 I 82 q·.10 46 265 5.76 20 150 7,50 30 149 4.93 20 66 3.30 22 64 2.91 20 77 3.851 62 378 6.10 20 102 I 5.10 38 122 20 115 j 5.75 3.21/ 38 _.1 82 ' 2.16 :.....I 328 1646 5.021 160* 631 j 3,94 t: I I I 7~1 I r Pasture #1 Pasture #2 Pasture #3 Pasture #4 Pasture #5 Pasture #6 Pasture #8 Pasture #9 Pasture #10 1A"11Pastures REPRODUCTION OF KEY SPECIES Pastures - 1958 1/ Exclosures - 1961 No. Total i No. Total 2x25' No. Mean 2x25' No. Mea] Plots Plants Plots Plants 26 1.73 45 20 4 .2C 46 175 3.80 20 17 .85 58 335 5.78 20 45 2.25 46 245 5.33 20 83 4.15 30 124 4.13 20 1.65 33 22 52 2.36 20 61 3.05 62 347 5.60 20 83 4.1" 38 1.71 65 20 41 2.0t 1.2C. 38 49 328 1388 4.23 160* 367 2.2c * Pasture #10 not included in totals. I I �-115- Special short-time jobs. No work was accomplished this item. on any of the sub-jobs listed under Demonstrations. The bulletin board was constructed as planned. Attached to the office building outer wall it has attracted considerable attention~ by visitors. Maps, graphs, and large tables were kept in it as well as examples of the deer tags and ribbons being used. Seven special groups were given illustrated talks and a tour .of the pastures. Two other groups had time for only talks. Two special talks were made in Meeker about the project, making a total of eleven. Recommendations: Somehow in our planning~ more time must be donated to more complete analysis and write-ups of the numerous sets of half-raw data piling up at Little Hills Station. Prepared by William Approved by L. E. Riordan, Assistant Director F. C. Kleinschnitz, Coordinator Date T. McKean and Harold E. Burdick January 16, 1963. of Research, and � https://cpw.cvlcollections.org/files/original/67868518130a10cc9df9bbfa9f452703.pdf 1080ab20b08a41002350ee88d7f12896 PDF Text Text -1- April, 1963 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT state of COLORADO --------------------------------- Project No. W_-_8_8_-_R_-_8 Work Plan No. 1 ----------~---------------- Title of Job: Period Covered: Personnel: W_a_t_e_r_f_o_w_l __S~u_r_v_e~y_s __a_n_d~I~n~v~e~s~t~i~g~a~t~i~ __ Job No. 2 Trapping and Banding Ducks and Geese. April 1, 1962 to March 31, 1963. Ken Baer, Bob Ballou, Charles Hayes, Jack Randall, Jack Frost, Bureau of Sport Fisheries and Wildlifej Elvy Wagner, Pat Zimmermann, Art Gresh, John Pogorelz, Eugene Green, Ed Prenzlow, Dick MacDonald, Lou Vidakovich, Lloyd Hazzard, Harold Hood, Jack Truax, Gurney Crawford, Sig Palm, Bob Kitzmiller, Howard Funk, Richard Hopper, William Rutherford, and Jack Grieb, Colorado Game and Fish Department; George Mirrill and William Huey, New Mexico Game and Fish Departmentj George Wrakestraw, Wyoming Game and Fish Department. Introduction: This report summarizes the banding activities of Project w-88-R-8 for the segment year April 1, 1962 to March 31, 1963. Since the analysis of band recoveries will be done under a separate job (Work Plan I, Job 3), little interpretation will be made of these data. This report is limited to a tabulation and factual description of number and location of birds banded during the specified period with comments on trapping techniques and other pertinent information. Objectives: (1) To trap and band ducks and geese for the purpose of obtaining migration and life histoDY information. (2) To trap the Great Basin Canada Goose as a means of securing brood stock for transplanting to suitable nesting areas throughout the state for the purpose of enlarging the breeding range of this species in Colorado. Scope: North Park (Jackson CountY)j the Cache la Poudre-South Platte Valley (Larimer, Weld, and other counties)j the San Luis Valley (Alamosa, Rio Grande, and Saguache Counties)j Two Buttes Reservoir and Turk's Pond (Baca County); and Canada (western Saskatchewan and eastern Alberta). �-2- Techniques Used: Banding operations have oeen roughly divided into three phases--summer, fall and winter banding. Summer banding was conducted on Colorado breeding grounds and emphasized the banding of young ducks, and moulting adults which nested in the vicinity of the banding sites. Fall activities were restricted to banding mainly Canada Geese on the staging areas of western Saskatchewan and eastern Alberta prior to completing their migration to the wintering grounds of southeastern Colorado and other areas. Winter banding was confined to the Arkansas Valley wintering goose flock in southeastern Colorado, and was conducted specifically at Two Buttes Reservoir and Turk's Pond. Ducks trapped along with catches of Canada Geese at these sites were also banded. Four methods were employed to capture and band ducks and geese during 1962-63. Drive trapping with (1) the Hawkins type trap and (2) the corral trap was used during portions of the summer duck banding programj (3) crews of men with dip nets were used to capture young ducks along ditches and on small ponds in the San Luis ValleYj and (4) the cannon-net trap was used for winter trapping of geese. �-3TRAPPING AND BANDING DUCKS AND GEESE Richard M. Hopper Ducks Table 1 shows the number of ducks banded by species and location. A total of 1,592 ducks of 13 species were banded during Segment 8. In addition, 99 American Coot and one Pied .... billed Grebe were banded. Summer banding in North Park, the South Platte Valley, and the San Luis Valley accounted for 1,562 ducks, and an additional 30 were banded incidental to the winter goose banding program in the Arkansas Valley. San Luis Valley Cooperative Study. --A proposed five-year plan was initiated during the·summer of 1962 to band locally produced ducks in the San Luis Valley of southcentral Colorado. During past years, considerable winter banding has been done on the Monte Vista National Wildlife Refuge, but relatively little is known about the dispersal pattern and mortality of ducks raised in the San Luis Valley. Cooperating in the concerted effort are personnel of the Bureau of Sport Fisheries and Wildlife, and the New Mexico and Colorado Game and Fish Departments. On June 24, 1962, personnel of the Colorado Game and Fish Departments' Waterfowl Project began t;rapping operations on the Monte Vista National Wildlife Refuge in Rio Grande and Alamosa Counties, and in the Center area, mainly in Saguache County. M9.1lards were of primary concern in the effort, but other species were banded when possible. Banding was continued through July 17, 1962. Federal and New Mexico employees joined Colorado personnel on July 9 and 10 in drive-trapping efforts, but relatively few ducks were captured by this method. After drive-trapping proved slow, especially for Mallards, all personnel split into smaller dip-netting crews. These crews worked at this method until July 13, when all but two members of the Colorado group returned to their respective stations. The Center area was concentrated upon until July 17. Each dip-net crew consisted of at least two men. A crew would drive along barrow ditches, drain ditches,and canals which abound in the area; with one man observingfrom the bed of a pickup truck and the other driving. When a brood of bandable-sized ducks was seen,the men quickly positioned themselves in the ditch, one on each side of the brood, and closed in, netting as many ducklings as possible. Very often, the birds would dive and stay under quite long. By waiting quietly, many of these birds could be caught.when they finally came up for air. Willows and cattails growing in and along some ditches allowed the escape of all or the majority of some broods. Some young ducks would leave the water and hide in clumps of greasewood or sagebrush, sitting so tight that they could be picked out of these placed by hand. Dogs were invaluable in locating hiding birds and also in running them down in more open areas. �-4- Most ducklings were taken in non-cultivated areas; that is, from ditches and drains adjacent to pastures and rangeland, usually situated away from populated areas. Usually only Mallards of age-class IIc and older were banded. Smaller age-classes of ducklings of some of the other species were banded because of the comparatively smaller bands used on these birds. After banding, the birds were released as a group in the same location in which they were captured. ·Care was taken when releasing the ducklings, especially the younger birds and smaller species, becaLlse of frequent presence of floating algae in the ditches. Smaller birds often became tangled in this growth after diving. Usually the birds were released at the edge of the water so they could run along the banks and hide in the vegetation. During approximately the first ten days of banding operations, there seemed to be two main sizes of ducklings in most areas, age-class I and age class lIb or older. The majority of the older birds at this time were Mallards, Pintails and Shovelers. Most species of ducks which breed in the valley were represented inthe broods of very young ducklings seen during this period. The reason for the gap in Sizes, especially in Mallards and Pintails, was possibly due to severe freezing weather during the early nesting period of these species, which may have delayed those that hadn't started to nest. This gap in sizes of ducklings was more apparent on the refuge than in the Center area. The chronological order in which young ducks of the various species seemed to appear was as follows: Mallard, Pintail, Shoveler, Blue-winged Teal, Green-winged Teal, Cinnamon Teal, American Widgeon, Redhead, and Gadwall. One brood of Canvasbacks was seen northwest of Center about July 12. By July 15, most Mallards andPintails were age-class III and many were flying. Colorado personnel banded a total of 55 ducks on the Monte Vista Refuge and 605 in the area around Center. This total included 433 Mallards, which almost filled the minimum quota of 500 set for the 1962 program. Federal and New Mexico dip-netting crews and combined drive-trapping efforts yielded an additional 69 Mallards plus a number of ducks of other species. All of the ducks banded by Colorado personnel were locally raised with the exception of two adults, one Mallard and one Cinnamon Teal. �-5Table l.--Number of Ducks Banded by Species and Locationg 1962-63. Location North South Platte San Luis Two Buttes Species Park Valley Valley Vicinity y Mallard 52 Gadwall 45 American Widgeon 87 Green-winged Teal 233 Cinnamon or Blue-winged Teal 156 Shoveler 6 Pintail 162 Redhead 12 Canvasback 5 Lesser Scaup 13 Ring-necked Duck 5 Ruddy Duck 1 American Coot 99 Pied-billed Grebe 1 52 40 40 90 3 877 128 657 TOTALS 59 6 3 7 1 443 12 3 26 Total By Species 29 1 583 63 94 266 197 46 304 15 5 13 5 1 99 1 30 1,692 Y All locals except for one adult Mallard and one adult Cinnamon Teal. Geese Table 2 lists the number of geese banded by species and location. A total of 2,169 geese were banded during 1962-63, of which 1,982 were Canada Geese. The remaining 187 geese were composedof the following species banded in Canada: White-fronted Goose, Lesser Snow Goose, and Ross' Goose. The above total includes 138 Great Basin Canada Geese banded in the Cache la poudre Valley which were raised by captive flocks or artificially hatched from wild eggs. These were released as goslings to supplement previous releases made to investigate the re-establishment of wild breeding flocks. The 1962-63 winter trapping program in the Two Buttes vicinity resulted in the banding of 1,301 Canada Geese. A total of 1,016 geese were banded after being captured with the cannon'-rrettrap baited with milo maizeo These were to investigate the age, sex, weight, and condition ratios, and body shot incidence periodically throughout the hunting season, and following the hunting season. An additional 285 geese were banded in the same vicinity after being captured with unbaited cannon-net sets. This procedure involved the use of live decoys or setting cannon-nets on loafing sites during and following the hunting season. �phase 01 the study was conducted to determine if ny differences in age lnd sex ratios and.body shot incidence occurred between geese captured on baited and unbaited areas. These results will be reported under Work Plan I, Job 10, rather than in this report. .ct.I:; Trapping and banding operations during the hunting sea on were conducted entirely at Turk's Pond, located about four miles south of the town of Two Buttes. Operations were halted at Two Buttes Reservoir during this period becauseof outside plressures. However, trapping and banding were again resumed on the reservoir after the goose hunting season ended. Of the 1,301 Canada Geese banded in the Two Buttes Vicinity, 257 were dyed yellow prior to the close of the hunting season and 273 were dyed red after the hunting season ended , The purpose of tills operation was to determine the amount of goose inter-change between various reservoirs in the Arkansas Valley and Texas panhandle during and following the hunting season. This phase of the study will be covered in detail under the report for Work Plan 2, Job 4a. Table 2 shows that a total of 730 geese of four spec Le s were banded in Canada by Colorado and Wyoming personnel as part of the Central Flyway Cooperative Canada Goose Investigation. Efforts were coordinated with the white-front banding crew headed by Alex Dzubin of the Canadian Wildlife Service. As would be expected, Canada Geese made up the majority (543) of the 730 geese banded by the ColoradoWyoming crew. Further results of this investigation will be reported under Work Plan 2, Job 4b. Table 2. --Number of Geese Banded "by Species and Location, 1961-62. Location Cache la Two Buttes Species Poudre Valley ~ Vicinity Canada ?J 21 Total by Species Canada Goose 1,982 543 White-fronted Goose 93 93 Lesser Snow Goose .... ..... 83 83 Ross' Goose 11 11 TOTALS 138 1,301 730 Young from captive flock and incubated eggs experimentally planted at College and Terry Lakes, Larimer County, Colorado, July, 1962. 11 Trapped with cannon-net and released immediately after banding in December, January, and February, 1962-19630 Trapped with cannon-net and released immediately after banding in September and October, 1962. Prepared by: Date: ___________ ~R=i~c~h=a=r~d~M~.~H=o~p~p~e=r _ Approved by: __ ~ayne W. Sandfo~ __ . Senior Game Biologist Game Manager, Research April, 1963 ~~~L_~~ _ Ferd Co Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �-7JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of ~C~O=LO~RAD~~O~ Project No. w~-~8~8_-~R~-~8 _ ~W_a_t_e~r~f~o~w_l_=S~ur~v~e~y~s_=a~n~d~In~v Work Plan No. 1 Job No. 3 ----------------------------~---=~-=~~----------~~--------------- Title of Job: Analysis of Waterfowl~anding Data -------===~~~~~~~~~~~====~~~=---------------------- Period Covered: April 1, 1962 to March 31, 1963. Objectives: To analyze band recovery data from ducks and geese banded or recovered in Colorado. To make this information available for use in management. Procedure: 1. Determine the number of species of season of year. waterfowl banded by station, year and 2. Calculate the percentage distribution, by state and provinces, of the recoveries of the various species, banded at various stations during different seasons of the year. 3. Determine recoveries by counties in Colorado of waterfowl species banded at different stations during various seasons of the year. 4. Determine the per cent of recoveries in re~ation to periods following banding. 5. Compare recoveries with respect to origin of birds. 6. Summarize findings. 7. Inaugurate a system for yearly analysis of waterfowl band recoveries. Findings: This is a negative report. No work has been accomplished under this job during this segment. The duplicate deck of IBM cards for all Canada geese banded in Colorado, Texas, New Mexico and Nebraska was received several months agao. Analysis will be done under the next project segment. Prepared by: Approved by: ~J~a-c~k~R-.~G~r-l~·e-b~--~------~ Leader, Waterfowl Project Wayne W. Sandfort Game Manager, Research Date: ------ April, 1963 ~~_=L-~~ Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator _ ��.j -9- April, 1963 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO ----------~~~~~------------ Project No. ~w_-~8~8_-~R~-~8 ~ ~W~a~t~e~r~f~o~w~1~S~u=r~v~e~y~s~a=n=d~In~v ~ J~o~b~N~o~. Work Plan No. ~1=_ Title of Job: Waterfowl Habitat Improvement Studies. Period Covered: April 1, 1962 to March 31, 1963. ~7 Objectives: (1) To improve waterfowl habitat particularly on areas owned or controlled by the Game and Fish Department. (2) To submit detailed habitat improvement plans for each area. Work Accomplished: A.ctivities during this segment were confined to making habitat development recommednations on State-owned properties on the western slope, and to assessing waterfowl values of potential acquisitions sites north and east of Greeley. Findings and recommendations concerning the western slope properties are presented in detail in this report. Recommendations regarding potential acquisition sites in the Greeley area were given to the Northeast Region in a formal letter and will not be reported here. _ ��-11- WATERFOWL HABrrAT IMPROVEMENT STUDIES Richard Hopper Introduction A major factor limiting waterfowl numbers in the Piceance Creek area is the lack of open water. Where open waters occur, Mallards, Green-winged Teal, and Blue-winged Teal are fairly abundant. A total of 70 ducks of these three species was observed on three open water areas of not more than two acres each on August 15, 1962. This number included one known brood of seven Mallards. However, the few open water areas that occur are small in size and widely scattered. This situation eliminates an extensive nesting population and large fall concentrations of ducks. Therefore, it seems likely that the development of larger open-water impoundments on the Piceance Creek and Yellow Creek properties would increase waterfowl production and fall concentration on a local basis. The water of these spring -fed impoundments should remain open well into the fall, thus creating some migration and hunting habitat. On August 14 and 15, 1962, the Piceance Creek area was visited for the purpose of making recommendations for waterfowl development on State-owned lands. Each of the potential waterfowl development areas is discussed below. An attempt was made to evaluate these sites using the following criteria: (1) Amount of water available from springs and reliability of flow throughout the year and from one year to the next. (2) Amount of flat and gently sloping land in a location suitable for development. (3) Type of impoundment best suited for a particular site (economic consideration). Criterion number one was difficult to evaluate because of the absence of flow records for the various springs. Local individuals were able to provide information on reliability but not on amount of flow throughout the year. Violet Place-Yellow Creek The Violet Place is located on Yellow Creek, which is the next major drainage west of Piceance Creek. The area of interest covers about 80 acres and is composed largely of native hay meadows with a small spring-fed impoundment on the west side. Water from this one-half acre pond flows through the meadowland below. Five Mallards and 25 Green-Winged Teal were observed on the pond. Food and cover plants include pondweeds, sedges, rushes, bulrushes, and various grasses. , �-12- This property offers one of the greatest potentials for waterfowl development of those visited. Spring water flows throughout the year, but unfortunately no records have been kept of amount of flow for each month of the year. Flow at the time of this investigation (August 15) was about one cubic foot per second. This late summer estimate probably represents a minimum for the year, but gives no reliable indication of flow for other months or for future years. The gently sloping meadows are most conducive to shallow-water impoundments developed through the construction of low dikes. This results in a more economical operation than other types of developments. Fill for such dikes is obtained from the upstream side of where the dikes is to be located. The bulldozer is the most practical type of equipment to use for this construction work. Such an operation provides for a minimum of soil moving which yields a gently sloping, shallow-water impoundment. Excellent nesting and brood cover would be available in the mixed sedge-rush-grass meadows at the periphery of the impoundment. A. maximum water depth of three to four feet at the dike would encourage the growth of valuable aquatic plants throughout the area of open water. The amount of open water and flooded vegetation will depend upon the quantity of water available throughout the year and the porosity of the soil in the basin. Information on spring flow and soil porosity should be obtained as outlined later in this report. Specifications and methods for the construction of dikes and water control structures should be based upon standard designs. Discussion of this subject is unnecessary in this report because such work is left to the department engineers. Foot of Ryan Gulch-Piceance Creek A potential site for a small marsh unit is located at the foot of Ryan G~lch about seven miles south of the Dry Fork turnoff. This tract of wet meadow is found on the west side of Piceance Creek just south of the Ryan Gulch road. A reliable spring, which appears to yield somewhat less water than springs at the Violet Place, originates at the base of a hill to the southwest of the meadow. Water from this springs runs through the meadow in a small ditch. One Mallard and 18 Green-winged Teal were flushed from this ditch. The ditch contains large quantities of pondweed, and meadow vegetation is made up largely of sedges, rushes, alkali bulrush, and fbxtail grass. An additional acreage of important meadowland is located to the north of the Ryan Gulch road. The ditch mentioned above also flows through this area, but at this time it is not known whether the spring supplies enough water for the development of the entire acreage. Until more is known concerning the flow of springs, water-holding capacities of soils, and possibility of drilling wells in this area, the amount of meadowland recommended for development cannot be stated. Although there is plenty of flat meadows available, sufficient water and nonporous soils are needed to maintain proper water levels on this land. Low-dike construction, as discussed above, is also the most applicable method of development on this property. �-13Foote Place-Piceance Creek The most extensive potential waterfowl development site of those visited is located in the flat meadowland along Piceance Creek above and below the Dry Fork road. Several hundred acres are involved. The State-owned land at the Dry Fork turnoff is called the Foote Place. Some important springs originate near this property which would serve as the source of water for impoundments below this point. These springs appeared to be producing water at the rate of about two cubic feet per second or more on August 15. A shallow, two-acre pond now exists at the eastern edge of the valley where the most important spring originates. Twelve Blue-winged Teal, two adult Mallards, and one brood of seven M3.llardswere counted when this pond was visited. Pondweedsand muskgrasses are abundant in the pond, while sedges , rushes, and grasses constitute the vegetation of the meadows. This discussion presented under the Ryan Gulch property also applies to this area. Further information is needed concerning water supplies and soil properties before adequate recommendations can be made. Proper conditions could very well lead to the flooding of extensive areas of meadowland with astonishing results beyond the belief of many people concerning waterfowl numbers. A problem which stands in the way ofa development program on ,the above three sites is "tip-at. leases to local ranchers were recently renewed-'fbrfi ve years on these properties. Had it been known that waterfowl developmeni;,money was going to be available, ,an attempt could have been made to set aside a portion of each of these areas for waterfowl. This situation should definitely be taken into consideration at the end of these five years. Wherever possible we should use our lands to the advantage of wildlife. It may be possible to come to an agreement with present Lessees to develop certain sites without jeopardizing good public relations. There may already be 'a stipulation in the lease contracts for development rights on these properties. Yet, it may be asking too much for them to allow their hay meadows to be flooded while still holding on to leases. It is recommended that developmeni;, other than planning, not be started on these sites until the five-year leases have terminated. Executionof plans prior to this time may only lead to restrictions imposed by theleeseeswhich prevent the development of desirable waterfowl habitat. Meanwhile, further planning should be undertaken in order to increase the probability ofa successful operation. The Watefowl Project will submit a more complete list of recommendations at the close of the five-year lease period. But, before further recommendations can be made the following information should be obtained. (1) Flow of springs in cubic feet per second at each potential site for each month of the year during the next four or five years. This only involves taking simple measurements which will help in recommending maximum sizes of impoundments • Little time would be required for any employee of Little Hills Experiment Station to take these measurements. Complete measurement procedures will be sent to Guy Harris, ranch manager at Little Hills. �-14(2) Type(s) of soil in impoundment basin and agricultural productivity of each. Information of this nature can be obtained from the local U. S. Soil Conservation Service Office in Meeker. This knowledge of the soil will help determine the maximum depth to which basins should be flooded and the potential productivity of marsh vegetation. (3) Feasibility of drilling wells along creek bottoms for emergency water in case of spring failure or for possible expansion of waterfowl development. The U. S. Soil Conservation Service or local ranchers may be able to provide this information. Dry Fork Property There are two additional sites that are not leased which could presently be developed for waterfowl. One of these areas is located near a spring just above the Little Hills headquarters. The other is a small marsh along Piceance Creek about half way between Dry Fork and the White River. Although neither of these areas is as potentially valuable as those mentioned above, they can be developed into good waterfowl habitat at reasonable cost. The site above Little Hills headquarters maintains a reliable spring which flows into a small pond. No ducks were observed during my visit but the pond supports a good supply of pondweed. The adjacent bottomland contains mostly weeds with little in the way of permanen~ vegetation. Thisnarrow valley is scarred by creek channels and in most places does not readily lend itself to flooding through the construction of low dikes. A better approach would be to enlarge the existing pond by moving soil so as to create an artificial basin with a gently sloping shoreline. A small earth dam with a control structure could be constructed to help maintain the water level in the impoundment. It is my understanding that a contractor in Meeker has a piece of equipment called a "haul-back" which he will operate for something less than 15 cents per cubic yard of earth moved. This appears to be just the machine for the operation mentioned above. In addition, Guy Harris has had experience in dam construction in Idaho and he could do much of the work himself with his bulldozer. Such a construction job would probably cost around $1,500, maybe less. The small marshy area along Piceance Creek can be made into an impoundment approximately three acres in size simply by constructing a low dike to prevent spring water from flowing out of the marsh and into Piceance Creek. A control structure would be required to regulate the water level. The increase in water level would leave a natural island in the center for nesting ducks. Desirable aquatic and emergent vegetation are already present on this site for food and nesting cover. A bulldozer is capable of doing the complete job at a cost which should not exceed $500, bringing the total to about $2,000 for the two projects. �-15- Guy Harris will submit a detailed report outlining possible developmental procedures and specifications for these two areas in line with the recommenddations given above. Prepared by: Richard Hopper Approved by: Wayne W. Sandfort ----~~--~--~r~~~~--~~~~ ~ ~ _ Senior Game Biologist Game Manager, Research April, 1963 ------------~--~~~------------- Date: Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator ��-17- April, 1963 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of ~C~O~L~ORAD~~O~ Project No. W~-~8~8_-R~-~8 ~:=l Work Plan NO. Title of Jo~: _ ~ __w~a~t~e~r~f~ow~1~Sur~v~ey~s~an~d-=In=v~e~s~t~i __ ~~J~o~~~N~o~.~ _=l~l _ Evaluation of Duck Nesting Structures -------=~~~~~~--~~~~--~~~--~------------------------- Period Covered: April 1, 1962 to Octo~er 1, 1962. ABSTRACT A. study was initiated in the spring of 1962 to evaluate duck nesting structures with the following o~jectives in mind: 1. To determine if nesting structures will increase duck production. 2. To determine which species will utilize structures. 3. To determine what factors influence structure accepta~ility, i. e. location, territorial tolerances, etc. Knowledge gained during this first segment of the study concerned the potential productivity of'study areas prior to nesting structure esta~lishment. Twenty ponds of a~out 10 acres each were selected for study near; Fort Collins; one-half with less than 25 per cent of their shoreline containing emergent vegetation and one-half with more than 50 per cent of the shoreline with emergents. A total of 238 ~reeding pairs of ducks was o~served on the 20 ponds ~etween April 13 and June 6. Mallards and Blue-winged Teal were most numeroup of 10 species present, with Gadwalls next in a~undance. All ~reeding pairs com~ined preferred ponds with over 50 per cent of their shoreline occupied ~y emergents, as opposed to ponds with less than 25 per cent emergent shoreline vegetation. In regard to individual species, Gadwalls and Blue-winged Teal favored the former pond category, ~ut Mallards showed no distinct preference. OVer 9,500 adult ducks of 15 species were counted on study ponds during 12 intervals of o~servation ~etween April 13 and August 31. Mallards made up the highest percentage (40%),followed ~y Blue-winged Teal(20%). All species of adult ducks com~ined, as well as all individual species, preferred ponds with over 50 per cent emergent shoreline vegetation. Ninety individual ~roods of seven species were o~served during the study. Mallards constituted the majority o~served with 44, while Blue-winged Teal accounted for 32. �-18- Broods also favored pondpwith over 50 per cent emergent shoreline vegetation. There is apparently a great need for protective cover that is readily accessible during the critical rearing period. Peak hatching dates for Mallards and Bluewinged Teal were June 1-10 and June 24-30, respectively. Five ponds in each category of emergent shoreline vegetation were selected to receive duck nesting structures. One hundred structures were built and placed in a variety of sites on these 10 ponds during September. Ten structures were erected on each pond. Objectives: Several sportsmen groups have proposed to the Game and Fish Department that they sponsor, on a state-wide basis, the construction and placement of duck nesting structures on lakes and marshes in the State. This idea was prompted by an article in Outdoor Life (Cary, 1961) which publicized the effectiveness of such structures. These groups requested our opinion on such a venture and also information regarding the type of areas and placemEnt of structures for maximum benefits. This is the basic reason for this study, but also, it is well that we test the effectiveness of duck nesting structures because of their usefulness in habitat improvement programs. Therefore this study was initiated with the following ultimate objectives in mind: 1. 2. To determine if nesting structures will increase duck production. To determine which species will utilize structures. 3. To determine what factors influence structure acceptability, i. e. location, territorial tolerances, etc. The following objectives were outlined for work conducted during the spring and summer of 1962. These objectives were aimed at gathering preliminary data necessary in gaining knowledge as to potential productivity of study areas prior to nesting structure establishment and to aid in determining the proper statistical analysis to use on the study. 1. To select 20 ponds of about 10 acres each for studyj one-half with less than 25 per cent of their shoreline containing emergent vegetation and one-half with more than 50 per cent of the shoreline with emergents. 2. To conduct breeding-pair and brood counts on all study areas in order to categorize the productive potential of each. 3. To select, as treatment areas, five study ponds with less than 25 per cent of their shoreline occupied by emergents and five with greater than 50 per cent of their shoreline supporting emergent vegetation. 4. To construct and erect 10 duck nesting structures on each treatment area. Eugene E. Green and Howard D. Funk did the field work for this segment as part of their graduate work at Colorado State University. Eugene Green later gave up this study to accept the position of Big Game Biologist for the Department. �-19- Techniques Used: Twenty-three ponds, each 0 f about 10 acres or less, were selected for initial study in the area north and east of Fort Collins in Larimer County, Colorado. Thirteen had less that 25 per cent of their shoreline occupied by emergent vegetation, such as cattail or bulrush, while the other 10 had more than 50 per cent of their shoreline supporting emergents. Breeding-pair and brood counts were made on all areas to determine the productive potential of each. The techniques used in making these counts were relatively simple. Observation points were selected at each area to be used during intervals throughout the counting period. Alternate points werechosen so that the observer would not be counting while facing the sun, depending upon whether the count was made during the morning, 5:00-7:00 A.M. or evening, 5:00-7:00 P.M. Counts were made for a period of not less than 45 minutes to one hour with the aid of a 20-power' scope and field glasses. Movement was kept at a minimum to prevent any unnecessary disturbance of waterfowl utilizing the areas. During each visit, pairs, single males, single females, and broods were recorded by species on standardized forms. General remarks and phenology were also recorded. Visits were alternated so that each area was observed both early and late during morning and evening periods. A total of twelve observation intervals ranging from April 13 to August 31 was used during the counting period. The dates inclusive in each are listed in Table 1. The first counts were made April 13 on approximately one-half of the ponds and the remaining were counted on April 19. On May 4, counts were again made on all of the areas and thereafter ona weekly and bi-monthly basis. Table 1.--Observation Intervals During Which Breeding-Pair and Brood Counts were Conducted on 23 Study Ponds in Larimer County, Colorado, SpringSummer, 1962. Observation Interval (Inclusive Dates) Interval No. April 13 - April 19 1 May 4 2 May 13 3 May 20 - May 22 4 May 27 - May 29 5 June 3 - June 6 6 June 18 - June 25 7 July 2 - July 11 8 July 16 - July 26 9 July 30 - August 3 10 August 14 - August 18 11 August 27 - August 31 12 Findings: At~theend of the counting period, 20 of the original 23 of the original 23 ponds were selected for final study. Three areas were :eliminated because they had low breeding-pair and brood use or because a: some outside interfencewhd..ch prevented further study of these ponds. �-20Ten of the final study areas support emergent vegetation along less than 25 per cent of their shoreline, while ten have greater than 50 per cent of their shoreline occupied by emergents. Name and legal description of each of these study ponds are presented in table 2. They are also differentiated as to amount of emergent shoreline vegetation. Breeding pairs. Estimates were made of the number of breeding pairs on the study ponds for the period April 13 to June 6. Estimates were restricted to the period between these dates because of the peak of activity for breeding pairs at this timea..-rrd because estimates become more difficult throughout the remainder of the spring and summer. Thus, a more reliable indication of use of study ponds by breeding pairs was envisioned by making estimates of ducks counted prior to June 6. Table 2.--Nameand Location, of Study Ponds by Amount of Emergent Shoreline Vegetation Present, Larimer County, Colorado Assigned Name Legal Description Of Study Pond Township Range Section 0 Shoreline-25% Emergentsli Peterson No.2 Durbin Pond Wellington No. 2(South) Greybar No.2 (East) Schott Pond Schnorr Pond Mitchell Pond Greybar No. 1 (West) Douglas Pond Van Sant Pond Shoreline-50% Emergents Peterson No. 1 Cobb No. 2 (Middle) Cobb Mgmt. Area Kuernmerlin Pond Stewart Pond Baker Lake Seder Pond Cobb No. 1 (South) Wellington No. 1 (North) Country Club Pond ?J 8N 8N 9N 9N 9N 8N 9N 9N 9N 8N 68w 68w 68w 68w 69W 68w 68w 69W 69W 69W 26 30 14 26 30 25 27 36 8N 8N 8N 8N 8N 7N 7N 8N 9N 8N 68w 68w 68w 69W 69W 68w 68w 68w 68w 68w 35 14 14 1 23 10 11 14 26 30 25 2 11 Less than 25 per cent of shoreline occupied by emergentso V More than 50 per cent of shoreline occupied by emergents. Estimated breeding pairs by species, pond, and amount of emergent shoreline vegetation are listed in Table 3. Breeding pairs of Mallards and Blue-winged Teal were most numerous of 10 species present, with Gadwalls next in inrportanceo Table 4 shows numbers of estimated breeding pairs of the 10 species of ducks with regard to ponds containing less than 25 per cent and more than 50 per cent emergent shoreline vegetation. The number of breeding pairs were much greater on ponds having the latter amount of emergent vegetation, which indicates a preference for this characteristic. A chi-square test (Snedecor, 1956) showed this difference to �-21" ili'.11ys LgnL''Lcarrt , with a value of 28.26 and a :probability of less than .;....''l>~_ :.. --Estimated Breeding Pairs on 20 Study Ponds, A:pril 13 to June 6, 1962 Assigned Name of Study Pond Mallard Bl-w Teal Gadwall 2 1 S:pecies Shov- Gr-w Pineler Teal tail Amer. Cin. Widg. Teal Redhead Lesser Scau:p Totals 1 Shoreline - 25% Emergents Peterson No. 2 Durbin Pond Wellington No.2 (South) Greybar No.2 (East) Schott Pond Schnorr Pond Mitchell Pond Greybar No. 1 (West) Douglas Pond Van Sant Pond 3 3 6 2 1 1 2 1 5 4 4 3 2 1 2 3 3 3 67 28.2 4 5 4 3 7 1 5 4 1 20 7 13 3 3 1 2 3 2 4 5 4 1 9 2 5 6 3 5 4 4 1 1 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 4 24 35 21 19 9 1 12 12 3 2 2 2 2 3 4 1 1 4 4 41 21 Ij. 5 17.2 8.8 4.6 2.1 4 10 3 1 2 4 9 1 1 2 Shoreline-50% Emergents gj Peterson No. 1 2 Cobb No.2 (Middle) 5 Cobb Mgmto Area 7 Kuemmerlin Pond 6 Stewart Pond 4 Baker Lake 5 Seder Pond 3 Cobb No. 1 (South) 3 Wellington No. 1 (North) 2 Country Club Pond 2 TOTALS PERCENTAGES 1 1 7 17 3 1 Less than 25 :per cent of shoreline occu:piedby emergents. g/ More than 50 :per cent of shoreline occu:piedby emgergents. 8 3.4 2 0.8 238 100.0 Chi-square tests were also conducted for estimated Mallard, Blue-wmnged Teal and Gadwall breeding :pairs on :ponds of the two categories (Table 4). Mallards did not show a distinct attraction to :pondswith over 50 :per cent of their shoreline occu:piedby emergent as did all s})eciescombined. The test concerning only Mallards resulted in a non-significant chi-square value of 1.81, with a :probability of 0.19 and one degree of freedom. Gadwalls, and es:peciallyBlue-winged Teal, showed a definite :preference for :pondswith an abundance of emergents along the shoreline, but not as great as that of all s:peciescombined. The lack of this recognizable :preference exhibited by Mallards may further show their success as a waterfowl s:peciesthrough their ability to ada:ptto various habitat conditions. �-22- Table 4.--EstimatedBreeding-Pairs by Species on 20 Study Ponds Containing Less Than 25 Percent of More than 50 Per cent Emergent Shoreline Vegetation. Emergent Shoreline Vegetation Species Mallard Blue-winged-Teal Gadwall Shoveler Green-winged Teal Pintail Redhead Cinnamon Teal American Widgeon Lesser Scaup TOTAIS g ?J *** Y ?J Less than 25~ No. 28 41.8 20 32.8 13 31.7 4 19.0 7 38.9 2 18.2 3 37.5 1 20.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 Over 50% Chi-square 39 41 28 17 11 9 5 4 4 2 58.2 6l7.~ 68.3 81.0 61.1 81.8 62.5 80.0 100.0 100.0 1.81 7.23* 5.48* 0.19 0.008 0.02 78 160 67.2 28.26** 0.001 32.8 P Chi-square tests conducted only for all species combined-and for three-most abundant species. Probability with one degree of freedom. Denotes a significant difference. Denotes a highly significant difference. Total adult ducks. --A total of 9,564 adult ducks of 15 species were counted on on study ponds during the 12 intervals of observations between April 13 and August 31. Total adult ducks observed by interval and by pond are listed on Table 5. -Counts were high during the first two inter:vals due to migrant birds in the immediate Vicinity. The summer Lng population remained fairly constant, with a sharp rise in numbers during the last two intervals. This increase can be attributed to local pre-migration concentration and early fall migrants. Species composition of adult ducks for the 12 intervals is shown in Table 6. Mallards made up the highest percentage of the 15 species of ducks for the entire observation period with almost 40 per cent of the total count, followed by Blue-winged Teal with about 20 per cent. Only one diver, the 'Lesser Scaup, accounted for more than five per cent of the totaL �TABLE 5. --TOTALADULTDUCKS OBSERVED BY INTERVALONEACHOF 20 STUDYPONDS - Assigned Name of StuS! Pond ~nNo. 2 ~ Pond Wellington No •. 2 (South) Grey-bar No.2 (East) Sohott Pond 1 2 6 -8 -2 2 102 8 35 29 17 -- Sohnorr Pond Mitchell Pond Greybar No. 1 (West) Doug1asPond Van Sant Pond 84 51 3 4 - 4 5 4 11 6 - Interval Number 8 6 7 5 2 6 8 4 11 9 5 5 4 12 29 23 3 2 9 - 4 15 4 26 26 - 5 20 10 19 33 7 23 65 96 20 20 28 . 33 1 31 17 16 29 Peterson No. 1 Cobb No. 2 (Middle) Cobb Mgmt. Area Kuemmerlin Pond Stewart Pond 77 186 101 76 180 10 17 159 160 156. 159 97 .45 132 54 1 60 83 34 42 174 Baker Lake Seder Pond Cobb No. 1 (South) Wellington No. 1 (North) Country Club Pond 10 6 320 28 45 6 36 75 2 . 32 34 12 4 51 2 16 5 6 33 5 19 13 12 37 2 25 15 1404 917 649 383 514 TOTALS 11 Estimated figures. 11 19 11 - - 10 11 12 Total -- -1 -- - 5 - 35 46 16 175 155 9 18 3 9 9 18 1 9 -8 22 6 11 4 3 - 9 - 9 4 - 77 142 4 1 61 1 - 11 -7 3 500...1/ 13 72 10 21 983 160 373 182 I I\) LA) 92 19 30 60 700..1/ 114 70 124 247 2872 1181 605 782 - 82 29 375 601 89 637 1949 9564 13 83 71 40 41 5 305 65 60 52 23 15 282..l/ 104 101 67 48 52 27 15 2 29 14 7 63 10 23 7 39 12 6 4 65 56 31 1 123 123 66 25 2 9 21 7 42 428 399 668 593 448 1212 3 159 41 18 12 11 - - 231/ 500: 131 46 73 - - I �TABLE 6.--NUMBER AND SPECIES OF ADULT DUCKS PRESENT BY INTERVAlS S~ecies 1 2 Mallard Gadwall Pintail Green-winged Teal B1ue-winged.._Teal . Cinnamon Teal' American Widgeon Shoveler Redhead Canvasback Lesser Scaup Ring-necked Duck Common Goldeneye Bufflehead Rud<trDuck Unknown 214 241 101 III 147 159 17 16 139 66 127 91 77 23 8 152 108 61 26 TOTALS 5Q' 220 47 - " 62 136 64 12 299 3 - 23 33 -87 2 4 25' 25 3 ON 20 STUD!' PONIS 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Totals % 63 98 89 8 32 95 4'6 96 34 5 27 124 145 48 15 14 14 155 67 III 6 18 6 1 42 35 49 15 1 13 4 384 30 24 11 166 3 9 2 17 339 234 46· 1 15 17 5 150 166 651 129 1251 7 335 4Jlv 339 38.9 9.2 6.7 5.3 19.3 0.5 1.4 6.7 3.1 0.2 5.1 0.1 0.1 0.6 2.6 0.2 100.0 tor 3 15 77 4 13 66 16 -34 -7 --8 -2 15 16 - - - - 1404 917 649 383 -- -20 514 - - - -,2 48 428 -29 399 - 3 2 5 - - 3715 884 642 508 1850 51 138 641 294 18 484 7 4 60 253 15 448 1212 1949 9564 -e 3 -1 -2 -2 -7 1 1 -- -- --17 16 15 2 9 668 593 - 4 2 1 -4 - - 1 - -10 - -3 2 2 -1 -- --9 I f\) .pI �-25In order to better demonstrate the change in species composition throughout the counting period, Table 7 was constructed showing the number and per cent of ducks c.ounted during the first, middle, and last observation intervaL Mallards and Blue-winged Teal steadily increased as the summer progressed, while Gadwall, Green-winged Teal, Shoveler and Lesser Scaup numbers declined rather rapidly by June~ Pintails were most abundant during the last intervals, indicating the tendency for some members of this species to migrate south in late summer of early fall. Table 7.--Species Composition of Adult Ducks During Three Intervals of the Counting Period. Interval Number 1 ra Species Mallard Gadwall Pintail Green-winged Teal Blue-winged Teal Cinnamon 'I'ea L American Widgeon Shoveler Redhead Canvasback Lesser Scaup Ring-necked Duck Bufflehead Ruddy Duck No. 214 241 50 220 47 62 136 64 12 299 3 23 33 15.2 17.2 3.6 15.7 3.3 0.0 4.4 9·7 4.6 0.8 2L3 0.2 L6 2.4 TOTALS 1404 100.0 No. 124 48 14 15 67 6 6 35 49 1 13 ra 2 48 29·0 lL2 3·3 3·5 15.7 L4 L4 8.2 lL4 0.2 3·0 0.0 0.5 lL2 428 100.0 12 No .• 1251 7 335 0/0 9 64.1 0.4 17.1 0.0 17.4 0.0 0.2 0.1 0.1 0.0 0.1 0.0 0.0 0.5 1949 100.0 339 3 .. 2 2 1 Numbers and percentages of the most abundant species of ducks present on study ponds containing less than 25 per cent emergent shoreline vegetation as compared to those with over 50 per cent are shown in Table 8. Results show that individual species and all species combined exhibited a definite preference for the latter pond category. This is revealed by large, highly significant chi-square values, as indicated by probabilities of less than 0.001 in all cases. This preferen ce undoubtedly discloses the importance of emergent vegetation for protection and seclusion during the spring and summer months. Safety is more readily available in emergents because ducks need not leave the water to become secure. Their safety is threatened when they must leave water and cross land to reach cover. Large quantities of shoreline emergents normally increase the amount of edge, thereby attracting many ducks requiring seclusion, especially during the critical periods of breeding and molting. �~26- y Table 8.--Numbers and Percentages of Adult Ducks Present By Species on Study Ponds Containing Less than 25 Per Cent or More than 50 Per Cent Emergent Shoreline Vegetation. Emergent Shoreline Vegetation Less than 25% Over 50% No. No. % c: Species :Mallard Gadwall Pintail Green-winged Teal Blue-winged Teal Cinnamon Teal American Widgeon Shoveler Redhead Lesser Scaup Bufflehead Ruddy Duck 914 225 138 116 392 11 40 71 91 87 8 7 24.9 25·5 21.8 22.8 21.5 21.6 29.0 11.1 31.3 18.0 13.3 2.8 2758 658 496 392 1433 ')1-0 98 569 200 397 52 246 TOTALS 2100 22.2 7339 75.1 74.5 78.2 77.2 78.5 78.4 71.0 88.9 68.7 82.0 86.7 97.2 Chi-square Value 926.0** 212·3** 202.2** 150.0** 5937·9** 16.5** 24.4H· 387.5** 40.8** 198.6** 32·3** 225.8** 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 77.8 2907.8** 0.001 2/ P- !I Excluding females with broods and those species of which there were less than 20 individuals observed. g/ Probability with one degree of freedom. ** Denotes a highly significant difference. Brood production.-- Total broods observed by counting intervals and by study pond are presented in Table 9. Since many of the same broods were observed on successive visits to each pond, it was necessary to compute total estimated number of individual broods on these areas by recording species and age (plumage subclass) of broods for each visit. At the end of the study, agees of broods were checked carefully and those though to be duplicates were eliminated. These figures are also shown in Table 9. No brood was seen on any of the study ponds prior to the fourth interval (:May20), with the greatest number present during the ninth interval (July 16-26). :Mallard broods were the first to be sighted. Broods were completely absent on four ponds during all 12 intervals of observation. A total estimate of 90 individual broods was observed utilizing the 20 study ponds throughout the investigation. Table 10 shows species compOSition, number of young, and average brood size of the 90 broods. :Mallards constituted the majority observed with 44, or just slightly less than one-half. Broods of Blue-winged Teal were next in importance with 32, or 35.6 per cent of the total. Together, Mallards and Blue-winged Teal accounted for nearly 85 per cent of the 90 broods. �' Table 9.--Broods Observed by Interval on Each of 20 Study Ponds. Assigned Name of Study Pond Peterson No. 2 Durbin Pond Wellington No.2 Greybar No. 2 Schott Pond Schnorr Pond Mitchell Pond Greybar No. 1 Douglas Pond Van Sant Pond Peterson No. 1 Cobb No.2 Cobb Mgmt. Area Kuemmerlin Pond Stewart Pond Interval 1 - - 2 3 - - - - - - - - -- Baker Lake Seder Pond Cobb No.1 Wellington No. 1 Country Club Pond - TDrALS 0 7 8 9 10 11 12 - - .- - - - - - - 1 - - - 1 1 2 - 5 - -- -- -- .-- - - - - -- -- - - - - - - -- - - - .-- 1- - - 6 4 4 - - - - - - - - - -- - - 0 - - - - - - - - - - - 1 - - - 1 2 3 1 4 5 4 2 2 10 6 1 1 2 - - -2 - - - 6 1 3 1 5 1 2 1 3 - 5 - 1 - - - - - - -- 2 2 1 2 25 39 - - 1 - 2 0 1 1 5 13 - 2 3 1 1 1 2 - - 3 - - - 2 2 1 4 - , .. , Total Estimated Number of Individual Broods - 1 0 3 2 - 0 - 2 - - - 7 1 8 1 6 15 12 10 3 - .- - .1 0 0 4 4 6 24 18 4 90 - - - - - ! ro --.J I �-28As would be expected, broods of Mallards and Blue-winged teal made up the bulk of the total number of young, with approximately the same percentages as in the case of total broods. Average number of young per brood for these two species was found to be 6.0 and 5.7, respectively. Table 10.--Brood Data For 90 Individual Broods Using 20 Study Ponds. Broods Young Average Brood Size Species No. % No. % Mallard Blue-winged Teal Pintail Shoveler Redhead American Widgeon Gadwall Unknown 44 32 7 2 2 1 1 1 48.9 35.6 7.8 2.2 2.2 1.1 1.1 1.1 265 183 32 12 7 4 3 12 51.1 35·3 6.2 2.3 1.4 0.8 0.6 2·3 6.0 5.7 4.6 6.0 3.5 4.0 3.0 12.0 TOTALS 90 100.0 518 100.0 5.8 A comparison of brood use on study ponds with less than 25 per cent and with over 50 per cent emergent shoreline vegetation is presented in Table 11. Twentythree broods of all species combined were observed on ponds of the former category and 67 on the latter, indicating a preference for ponds with large quantities of emergent shoreline vegetation. A chi-square test was conducted to determine the significance of this difference. The test yielded a highly significant value of 21.52, with a probability of less than 0.001. Similar tests were conducted for broods of Mallards and Blue-winged Teal. These were the only two species with large enough samples to warrant such procedures. Broods of both Mallards and Blue-winged Teal showed a decided preference for ponds which had over 50 per cent of their shoreline occupied by emergents. Attractionof these two species to this specific category of pond is shown to be statistically significant in Table 11. There is apparently a great need for protective cover that is readily accessible during the rearing period, especially for dabbling ducks. Where emergents occur, broods can swim directly into this cover without climbing up on dry land or crossing mudflats to reach safety. Cover of this type is easily accessible and it allows unseen movements of young birds around its edges. The hatching date of each Mallard and Blue-winged Teal brood was calculated as accurately as possible by using the approximate age span in days for each plumage subclass according to species (Minnesota Department of Conservation, 1959). Grouping these data into weekly intervals resulted in two peak hatching periods~ one for Mallards and one for Blue-winged Teal (Figure 1). According �to Figure 1 the first brood of Mallards hatched between May 6 and May 12. The peak occurred sometime during the first 10 days of June. The last hatch of Mallards was during the third week of July. In contrast, these three dates for Blue-winged Teal were June 10-16, June 24-30, and July 29-August 4, respectively. The later dates for Blue-winged Teal are to be expected, since they are known to be late nesters. Tabel 11. --Comparison of Brood Use On study Ponds with Reference to Amount of Emergent Shoreline Vegetation. Species Mallard Blue-winged Teal Pintail Shoveler Redhead American Widgeon Gadwall Unknown T0rALS 1 Emergent Shoreline Vegetation Over 500/0 Less than 25~ 0/0 0/0 No. NQ. 32 72·7 12 27·3 71.9 28.1 23 9 100.0 0.0 0 7 50.0 1 50.0 1 100.0 2 0.0 0 0.0 0 100.0 1 100.0 1 0.0 0 100.0 1 0.0 0 23 25.6 67 74.4 y 'ij Chi-square Value 9.08** 6.12* P 0..005 0.015 21.52** 0.001 'ij Chi-square tests conducted only for all species combined and for two most abundant species. Probability with one degree of freedom. * Denotes a significant difference. ** Denotes a highly si.grri.f'Lcarrb difference. Erection of nesting structures.. -- The first five ponds in each category of emergent shoreline vegetation listed in Table 2 were selected to receive duck nesting structures. These 10 ponds were chosen by using a table of random numbers. One hundred duck nesting structures were built and placed in a variety of sites on the 10 ponds mentioned above during September after breeding-pair and brood counts terminated. Ten structures were erected on each of these ponds. Nesting structures were established on ponds duringlate summer so that effects of winter climatic conditions on these boxes could be studies and analyzed as part of the over-all investigation. �12 Mallard Blue-winged Teal 11 10 ~ ,\ I \ 9 CD 0 ., ••• \ I \ \ , ·8 '8 ~ ~ I , II 7 , I 6 I I I , j S :z; I "\ \ \ \ , ' \ \ \ ,---- -,, I W \ 4 \ _____ 3 J, ,, \ o I , .\ \ 2 \ \ \ 1 ,, , ,, , ,, ,, \/ 0 6-12 1.3~1920.:.26 27-2 May 3":'9 10-:.1617-23 2~.30 June 1-7 8-14 1>21 22-28 29-4 July Weekly Hatching Intervals Figure 1. Hatching dates ot 90 Mallard and Blue-winged Teal broods by' weekly' interval. �-31Conclusions: It can be concluded from the foregoing discussion that: (1) Mallards, Blue-winged Teal, and Gadwalls constitute the major portion of breeding pairs and total numbers of ducks using the study areas,. (2) Breeding pairs of all species combined show a distinct preference for ponds with over 50 per cent of their shoreline occupied by emergerrt.s , as opposed to those with less than 25 per cent emergent shoreline vegetation .. (3) Breeding pairs of Mallards apparently show no significant attraction to either of the above two categories of ponds, but Blue-winged Teal and Gadwalls favor the former category. (4) In regard to total numbers of ducks, individual species and all species combined exhibit a definite preference for ponds characterized by having over 50 per cent of their shoreline occupied by emergents. For this reason the importance of emergent vegetation for protection and seclusion during the spring and summer months can not be over-estimated .•. (5) Ponds with greater than 50 per cent emergent shoreline vegetation should be use.d for nesting earlier and probably to a greater degree than those without this featureo (6) Mallard and Blue-winged Teal constiture the great majority of broods produced on the study areas. (7) There is apparently a great need for protective cover that is readily accessible to broods during the rearing season, especially dabbling duckso This was suggested by the large number of broods observed on ponds with over 50 per cent of their shoreline occupied by emergents, as contrasted to G the much lower number on ponds with lesser amounts 0 f emergent vegetation. Literature Cited 1961. New: duck factory. Outdoor Life, May 1961, p. 66-67, 133. Snedecor, Go Wo 1956. Statistical methods. The Iowa State ·univoPress, Ames, p. 18-19-28. Minnesota Department of Conservation.. 1959. Manaul of instructions for game lake surveys. Div. Game and Fish, Minneapolis. 83 p. Cary, B. Prepared by: Date: Richard M. Hopper Senior Game Biologist April, 1963 ----------------~--~--~~------- Approved by: Wayne Wo Sandfort ----~~--~~~----------~-Game Manager, Research Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator ��April, -33- State of REPORT RESEARCH SEGMENT PROJECT COLORADO ------------~--~~---------- Pro ject No. Work Plan No. ~W~-...:.8...:.8_-_=_R:....-...:.8 __=:_..::W:.:::a:.:t...:.e_=_r_=_f...:.o..::w_=_l:....:.:::S Job No. 2 -----~~-~--~~~~ Experimental Studies on Improving Ti tle of Job: Period JOB COMPLETION 1963 2 Status of Canada Goose Populations. Covered: April l, 1962 to March 3l, 1963. Objectives: (l) Development and evaluation of techniques for initial establishment and/or increase of goose population on all major drainages in the State. (2) Permanent establishment of resident goose flocks on all large water impoundments and major river systems as determined by the preliminary survey of goose nesting areas in the State. (3) Retention of resident and migrant Great Basin goose flocks within the State for longer periods of time during the migration season. (4) Increase the size of the Great Basin goose flocks wintering in the State. Procedures: As given in past reports. Personnel: WCO I. Richard Crawford and Sigfrid Palm, William Hopper, and Jack R. Grieb. Rutherford, ��-35EXPERIMENTAL STUDIES ON IMPROVING STATUS OF CANADA GOOSE POPUIAT IONS Jack R. Grieb All work was again confined to the establishment ofa resident Canada goose breeding flock in the Fort Collins area. The following is a resume of these activities. Status of Geese Released During Previous Years. ---So far as we know, no geese were lost over the winter up to the time the flock dispersed into the breeding areas. About 210 geese wintered mainly at College Lake where we maintained feeding stations and kept the water open with an aerator. ,These geese would fly out to surrounding lakes and fields for additional forage, and it is suspected that they frequented Terry Lake in association with a wild wintering Canada goose flock which was fed there. Observations indicated that at times migrant birds would visit College Lake and stay for several weeks to a month before moving on. It definitely appears that despite close association between resident and migrant Canada geese, the resident geese were not lured away from the area in the spring, but remained as part of the summer population. Flock Production.-- A great deal of hard work by several people, especially WCO Gurney Crawford has resulted in a tremendous response of this resident flock in the production of young geese in Larimer County. Thus, this flock established 23 nests (probably several more), of which 21 were successful with 89 eggs hatching,and 79 goslings raised to flight. The following records production by area. 1. Twelve nests were established at College Lake of which 11 occurred on nesting structures. One was placed on the ground because the goose suffered an injured wing, and could not fly up on the structures. Only one nest was not successful, and this was on a structure. Cause appeared to be territorialism which resulted in bitter fighting between a gander protecting a nearby nest, and this nesting pair. The pair finally gave up and abandoned the nest. Forty-two goslings were hatched and 40 raised to flight_stage on this area. 2. Dean's Lake had the same pair nesting on the island as for the previous two years. This pair can be distinguished by a neck-band worn by the gander. Six eggs were hatched, and six birds raised to flight. As soon as the young go on the wing, this pair moves them to College Lake where they make ample use of the feed placed out for them. 3. Watson Lake had four pair nesting on structures placed on the island. Eighteen birds were hatched with 17 reared to flight. �4. Terry Lake contained at least two nesting pairs with eight birds hatched, and six brought to flight. 5. Lindenmaier Lake had one nest on a structure with five young hatching and five brought to wing. Not long after hatching this pari moved their brood about a half mile north to Long's Pond, where they soon discovered the tender grass of the Country Club golf course greens. We received numerous complaints from the greenskeeper mainly because the geese were fertilizing the greens to the chagrin of the players. Attempts were made by Crawford to fence the birds away from the greens, but it was not until the young birds went on the wing and left the area entirely, that this problem was solved. 6. Herring Lake had one nest on a structure with five hatching and three goslings surviving to flight stage. 7. Anderson slough, l~ miles east of Fort Collins on Prospect Street had a pair of geese nest on a muskrat house. Five goslings were hatched, but as near as could be determined, only two were reared to flight stage. 8. Greeley Filter Plant had one pair nesting on the ground near the roadway. A fence was placed around this nest to prevent cattle trampling, but it caused the pair to abandon the nest. A~otal of 20 nests were placed on nesting structures, and 19 of these hatched. On the other hand three nests were located on the ground a.ndtwo of these hatched. Obviously, the geese like the nesting structure, and these structures undoubtedly increased the hatching success, a.nd decrease loss to predators. Gosling Release Program.-- A total of 101 goslings eight weeks or older were released at College Lake on July 3, 1962, and 38 released at Terry Lake on July 27, 1962. These birds were obtained from t he following sources: 1. Crawford hatched and raised 40 goslings from 58 eggs obtained at Bowles and Ward's Lakes near Littleton, Colorado, April 25, 1962. 2. A total of 99 goslings were taken from the Denver area, June 15, 1962, including 6 from Denver City Park (Permission granted by Zoo Director Fraser), 25 from a lake on the property of Mr. Maddy (geese becoming too numerous for area), four from Ward's Lake (depredation complaint), and nine from truck garden area (depredation complaint). These birds were kept in the conditioning and holding pen at the Fort Collins Experimental Nursery until July 3 and 27, 1962, when they were banded with the follOwing band series and released: July 3.--508-27912 through 28000, and 508-46310 through 46321j July 27.--508-46323 through 46360. �-37Flock Status From Release Until January 1, 1963.--Th-ereappeared to be a general concentration of geese on both College and Terry Lakes during the summer and fall period. Undoubtedly, there was interchange between the two areas, but usually, it appeared that the College Lake geese used mainly College Lake, and likewise for Terry Lake geese. Migrant Canada geese were late arriving into the area because bf mild temperatures and lack of storms in northern areas. When they finally arrived in mid-December, local geese had apparently fairly well established their feeding pattern, and were not greatly influenced by migrant birds. Habitat Improvement.-- A few structures at College Lake were moved back from the water so thai{ ice would not damage them during the winter period. No new structures were construct,ed;however, selection of tentative sites for an additional 100 structures was begUn by Crawford during this segment. Emphasis in this program will be on smaller type areas with a wide dispersion so that the geese will have the opportunity to spread out through this vicinityo Protective Measures.--Thatportion of Larimer County west ofU. s. 87 and north ofU. S. 34 was again closed to goose hunting by State and Federal regulations. Inaddition,.no hunting, trapping,orfishingwas permitted in the immediate vicinity of College and Terry Lakes. This closure was effective in controlling hunting loss of these birds. There is evidence of some poaching during the Winter, but Officer Crawford has kept this to a minimum. Again, as a result of the closed area in Larimer County, the wintering flock of migrant Canada geese increased during the past season (Table 1). A great deal more interest in goose hunting is being played by local hunters , and the harvest has definitely increased over former years. �-38Table l.--Effect of Closing Part of Larimer County to Goose Hunting on the Number of Wintering Canada Geese. Area Open to Goose Hunting Area Closed to Goose Hunting Year No. Canada Geese y Year No. Canada Geese y 1948 1949 1950 1951 1952 1953 1954 1955 1956 1957 1958 1959 Y 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 70 0 0 22 1960 1961 1962 1963 660 1,385 1,945 2,686 Based on the number of birds counted on the January Waterfowl Inventory. Conclusions.-It is obvious that this resident flock of Canada geese has reached the stage where it can now support itself. There is present within the age structure of the flock numerous birds of age classes one to five. This means that each year the breeding population will be augmented by a new set of breeders. During the last segment, 79 young were brought to wing asa result of nesting activities of this flock. According to the annual mortality of this flock this number is more than enough to replenish current mortality occurring to the flock. In fact, it is enough to increase the size of the flock from year to year. Naturally, we expect the number of goslings produced to increase; and therefore, it is time to stop releasing goslings Lntio this flock and begin to concentrate our efforts elsewhere. Without a doubt, the tremendous success we have had in establishing this flock is due to the efforts ofWCO Gurney Crawford. In our opinion, he had made significant contribution to waterfowl management in the Larimer County area. Recommendations: (1) Goose eggs should again be taken from Bowles Lake and hatched at the Rocky Ford Experimental Bird Farm under the direction of Willis Mansfield. (2) Goose eggs should be taken from the Bonny Reservoir captive flock and hatched in the same manner as (1). (3) Goslings hatched from Bowles Lake eggs should be released at ValmontReservoir in Boulder County. �--39(4) Goslings hatched from Bonny eggs should be released in the goose pens at Bonny Reservoir. (5) All goslings taken from the Denver area should be released at ValmontReservoir. (6) Number and location of nesting structures should be determined for Valmont Reservoir, and this plus all plans for food plotsetc~ should be submitted to Game Biologist Takes for inclusion in his Development Project. (7) Production records for the Larimer County flock should be gathered and reported in the production job, Work Plan 1, Job No. 1. ��-41APPENDIX I PROCEDURES FOR CATCHING CANADA GOOSE EGGS AND CARE OF GOSLINGS For the past few years Conservation Officer Gurney Crawford has successfully hatched Canada goose eggs and reared goslings for release in the Canada goose flockrestora~ion program. Since Crawford will not longer be responsible for this phase of the work, it was decided to document his method as accurately as possible for use by other persons assigned this task. This report also includes information obtained from Mr. Carl Strutz, Jamestown, North Dakota, particularly on his use of the incubator in hatching geese, bu"t also including some data relating to robbing goose nests so as to provide additional production from each goose pair. Finally, points from both methods are used to workup a list of procedures for hatching and raising geese at the Colorado Bird Farm beginning the spring of 1963. 1. Eggs Pickup and Handling.-- According to Strutz,eggs are removed from the nest each day as they are laid,replacingthe stolen egg with a wooden one. He found that if the egg was not replaced in this manner the pair would move their nest. Remember that this is a captive flock, and considerably easier to handle than a wild one. As soon as down begins to appear in the nest, all eggs,both live and wooden, are removed. With this method he has had all of his geeserenest, and is able to double his production. Eggs removed in the manner described above were stored in a refrigerator on end at a temperature of 40 degrees. However, eggs are never stored longer than seven days as it appears that the germ becomes weaker and the hatch is not as good. For removing eggs from "wild n nests , it is believed that the best practice is to take all eggs from the nest, particularly if the egg pickup is to be done in one operation. If the eggs are to be transported,they should be numbered according to the nest, wrapped in cotton, and placed in a portable ice chest. Crawford recommends that several jars of warm water should also be included to maintain temperature for those eggs where incubation has begun. In all cases the eggs should be handled carefully. II. Hatching With Hens.-- Make a nest battery of 1 x 12 boards with a partition every 12 inches. Leave the bottom of the battery open and dish it out for the hens. Line the nests with a small amount of prairie hay, but don't make it too heavy. Put burlap on top of the battery and lay a 1 x 8 board on top of this, do not make it airtight, and do not have this battery in the sunlight since it would be too ho~. Better to have it inside a building for protection against the weather. Dig a trench 6n deep with the center one foot from the center of the battery. �Form No. 99S CROSS StCTION [: +; T-!'::l :-Fi=r-l ! : : UJJJ f;H+Pi rr,--: I '~.J'!"'!! I' 'I [1 I I , ' , , ! : I , i , I ' ' , i' I' II" ",,--, "!,~,, " I ; : : 'I! I i : : I ;---;-+--;-:-J-J !. I , I , : I ' ; ~: : ; ! ' I I ! i I I , ' , '! I I ' ! i I: I I Ii' , , Ii' ; , i'-'-: 1TTil-:H I I , I, I!! I ,i: ;, I I I I' I ' I I I I ,I I I I I I ! I I I I' I I Iii I~ rt ' ,_, If" "i~,'::,,,,, 'I ' I I I I IT, 'J,GU'f'; , " I , I '7 1'1 ' P' I, , 'I ' ", :', ' ,__ 1_' _,_I_I ! ' I I IT' I I I' I I' I: I I ': II !+:-,-':t-r : ,I I ,I I I I ': I , I I I _L' +~: I : I I ! I' I I ,I I I I I I I I I: " I ! I' I I ~ t :: ! I I I I I I : I' I I I un 1-<" I,,, I " , I I ,- I I I I 1. 'I 'II I: II I I I II I ,'I;;,.lo,l~e7iTJ I I: :' p=p=j + I+H,' ,_,_'~, I ' i -'+-;-i' .L__LlL' 'I II:!I::: I'! Ii _ """" I I 1 ~~:I rTTi"K.'i': I '-I I , ;:q ~_' ; , il~ WJ~ i W-!L ' '-LI !.L,III i " :...J_ I' I '" ," I I : , !:':'_ ,..: : ! ; , Ii' __I-!-'il'I;~'I!:i'\:' ~....L.,-_ --'- I~~_i,_'_' , ' '_L,L,.Lli _!_' _, 1 , I 1\1 I ,J_',""':,_'_i_','_i," li~f4~ , I I ! '.::L! I I I I 'II I --'-j_'_'_! __ i_.1..J_LLf-_' J d I I I Ill. II I I I I I ~ I 1./ I i I ! :/1 I I I I !./ I I '/'I , " !" :....c_ I I I I '-i± rr 'tbts II liC'fi I I -.... ,'I I I I I, I I I I I , 1 I I I I ! I 111'1'111 I T I I I I I I I I I I I Irl II Ul I i I II I I, 'I I I II I I I T T TTTT, I I I I' I I' T " IT I I ' fl':.j' I, l:C:li1 i ITi ' I ' I I I TIII -0-, ,i: i j i iJ. I .r.r:«I I f I I I I I I i , h ,: I I I" I I : I I I I I I I ' I I, Ii" I I i i I :i - - - ee~~ I ii' I i t ill \, Ii: II I! ! I i III I I I I j, I I I 'I' I I : : " I I I r W I I I i I ! ! I" I I I I II I I i! I! I ',' i Ii! I ' I I I' !! , I I r r I r i : I I I ! I I I I i 1IIIIil I I I I I I : : ' ! I I I! I i ' ! Iii I I I II" Ii, I lilll!I"" I! j II!!' I i I I I Ii, ' i I • I r I I r r r i i ! ! I I ~~i ; ,I I t I I I I I IT! ' I ,.1. I 1-! r I-H ~ro 1 1 :: 'I: :: III !__ U.LL--J--l--l I ,I I II Iii i I I I Iii 'L ,I II ' I I i I I I I I I Ii' Ii' I ! I I I' 1 ,1,1 " I ! I "I i I I , ,I r : :111111,11 I :i I I I : I ,I J I I I I I I ' , i 'I I I . I I I II , , I I i 1 I I I I I-I I I I ' I ,I i !--I I I I I I I ' : I, I' !, i, "1 ""'" + _LL I I : ! ~ J ;: i : : :' I: I ' i '" "I I I . I I , i : ! I I I, I I I i I I I I " ; I : I: I I ,I, I! II Ii! ',! " I I I ! I ' I I.I-j i I I j: I II ' : --LLLT II ! 'i; ' ' I, " ,I I I i I : ,---+-,---+--f I, Ii" I I " I : : ,,' : , I I: j i I I I I !, I .!,!II! I I II I I I I I i i I Ii, ',I ' i ,_ I I __ ,_,-,-, - I I' ! i i " ' , I III 1 I I I I I I I ' : -' I ~ I I I ' I,! ,I ,I I , ! I I I 'i I ! i i ; IITTTl'II III I I TT IT! ! I I I I I I I , , I I I '! II I I' T, I I T ' i I I, I! 1\!lll---1 I' ! "I I I TT \ i I i I I \ I 'I I 1 I ,\1 i i I I ! I , i '\J ' I ,'Ii I 1\ i i II 11\1' 'III i 11\1 I I I '1~L ,7 I , Iii ! \1 ! : : I ::;:: 1+ II "II' 'I I : , , i I' I I I ' , I I i t • I: I l-Ll I " 'I I i I --;-if ; i : ! I I I ' ii" I I , 'I " ,!, I I, '; I, I I, I I: I I I 1-1- 'I I I '" I I Ii: : I I I I 'T I I + ; I I I : I: 11111' I I ' I liT I Ii: I I i I, I !, I I I I' I I I ,! I' I I ,~ ' , I,; t J I! I I I I I ' ' I -1-I I : -r.. : I TTTTTT T , I I i I Iii T i I i I TIT .i). I II, I, 7 I eeKi, I IJ I 11 I I 7: : <-...... ;), : ~i L ..J; : ' L 1"1111'7: I LA'" I I I I I I I I I I ! I I I I I I I I I I I I i I 1111111, Ii' I I I TTTTTTT I I' I II I I I II I II 'II 1111' III: I' I ~' ~U i I: I I I I 1'1 I ,I I' ~' I ,~ ~'~'il' I ' I I i i : I I I I" I I I ' ! I I" i : I ! ~ I I I' II II ~r I : IL~ I I I I I IT I ~, ' ,...,..-' 1[, :. I I I 'I ' " CJIfIJ."r."'~' -,,, 'L! " :: I I I I! I I' ' i I I I " I I i : :: ,', I I I I I I 1 TTT I I I I I " - '"- -Yi" --,- tt'ye -r. -rJ.,: =-=~-=-~==.l-=__'a~.e,_ -- O'DHB __ei, _CI., l~rs i - J l==~-==--~ [1"" -I- I I i -Ai ,! r'-, - -- - ----- - ------- I I 'I I I I I i i I: I I + I I : I I I I I I I " ; , ! I I I I I ,!,IIJ. II, !, I ,\!' ! '7';.., 1-1 ! i I \' "I ;, ,~rJ.TS _CI1:5:::::""_'- _, ' : ; , !_'_~~'_'_~F'.!lt~~tt'j ' I ,I J 1..1- _I .Ll I.' ',J...-'---c_, ! '. t.,_,_, -i-;-!=al ' i :_1 i i Ii, I I I I f-,4..:-' ,i ;! I : I i I: I,! I I I, -, ' ! :.~F-'-:-i-i~j-!, 1\ 1111 , ~,_ _ ,; i ' ! ; , '.J' I 111~i;:;;t't 'i':II"II,Yli I '_J~ ••••. _'_' ":""'':.--I.tlLS ! eill I~ i-1_L;_'_""~i_ £_'.""'"ihJ'11 I'~III: G I I '1\\H+H'11I1 I liT i I I I I, ,- ,_~ I ,i ff t:t:, IJ ! I I----r-t---l-! : I -t ' I , I"!, '+' 'I I": J:': I ,'JT'Pi I I I T I I I I I I ' I I I I I I I I I I I I , ';::S-'--'- ' ' , S13± I I ' , ---n--t- I I I I. I I ,- I , i I E-pj{, ' I I I ! IT! , I I I ' I I I I 'I I 'I I I I""I"I 'I I ' I I I I I I' :.!, i~'Jtt,.L,[.'ml-'_UuL!~-' I I I I I I I I II I I I , IT T I + 1 11 I I I I ; I I I , I I "I' I ,I I' W'_Il~lp I '/1 I ifill I ••••..• I I I If i..-LL. L K if VI f Iln '')I "I I II ,'IIL I tIi I II I i "--'-:_-' ,I L'l ",,0'_,_, ' ' , ,' , ,J W,,-+:H: ~ I L...L.L1 , 'i _~ I ' 111 1111 -: -:-,-~-:-: 'II ~ IITI Iii T : I : I , ~~'" II I liT I I' 'I: __f-4--' _,_ I , :-1 I I I I ,I I I I 'I I , ,_,_, " 'I i I : I I ' I I I I 1 I I I I :, : I : ' : ' I I_Ii I -J- .] I I I I , ' ! , _,j:'; I ill/' \i~ I I' I' ~'1 '~ I I I ' , ~ , " I" I, ' I ~ I, II I I I I I I I I T I I I __ -r-r- --'---L-' , 'I I, I II I 'ri', ,,_ ::: I I i I _!~ .1 I I! I I I I' I T T 1 I I! I I " __ ' ' ' I I , , i : I I I I I I I I" I I I I I C'C , ,-, ,I I ,T ' 1 ' ! I I ; I i I I I I, I I I I' I' I; -. I " I Cd--' I_I_I_'_'/! ' I \ I I I : " I, I 'T: ' ,I i I I: : I , ,I I -LLl...J~' I,' "L 1\'\ I ! I '::' r i t t : IT I ~--I I' I " I ! I ,, -H--:-""'--: FR+t" 'I liT I I I' ,I I I' T I' r+i ' " ':J I ' ,,"++!~ :'T I AMERICAN PAD &. PAPER CO, HOLYOKE, MASS. I-T " ,""""ri ,,:, ,:: ;...;;: ; '" =sf " ':':';:: , : , ' , , I I Iii Ci I I '! !' I I : ' I' ' I , ,'~" I' I f-'-_i _'-'-W-J-L: H+' Lll'lll I ' PAPER SQUARES TO INCH 10 r ..1 T I r t : 1I II! 'I ! I I I ' ili--++-! I I I I, I I I I I I 1I I ! i I...LLLJ I I I , , Iii T I I I I I ! ! I I I Ii, I i I I I : I ! i 'lILL ii, =~t./j;=t~~~1~i~i~~;f~~~~=t~~t!f~; '~J~1~ij .~: ::j 1-.". ~::=,::.~:-:.=:Gi70!=:Hantr.n3L~e:a;s!.o11l.rr:We:~"~a:z.;, 8":;I__ ~==:=Li-:;==;---:--,-~-:f--i-'~'::-i--h--J,--h-, ~~,:t--H,',',~~f':'I+--,-:-f-h-~-+: : 11 ' , : +' i .~+-·hI : I : I ~_..:..,_=-" i 'I ii, ! 1 I l! l : 1 ! i \ !!!!! I i I 1 I '! l!!!! I I I I 'I :' I I I! "I I II I I I I I f i! I .;, , " : if I! :! ,I' : ; I I I' ! '" 1-++ I j I �Form No. 998 CROSS S&:eTION PAPER AMERICAN PAD 6. PAPE" CO. 10 SQUARES TO INCH r::-i-'; 1-------: 'L:.....:-L 'I' 1-· , . : : -====:L-: -, ----====__=__~ ---_-=--=-=-==~; ! . -r:-;-J t===_~-:-_-:::= ~_._~===-=-_= rr(IJIT~c. ; . :J---~.-;. i _.-~~-_~i-=--.--,.--. -'-'-'-:-1 '. ;-.- '. -~--lI i , II I, " I "I I , , I ' :: ' : I ::,' _._L __ ~.'!'.':. "'.'. ~ -.------------i---'-·,,!' I". I: ....!. .' ,'-'!, -,--:-, ;-:!-' .. _' _,_,_.-, -.-, i I ~ I I, I I I I i I J J _ --,I _... .' __,.;_.~,.---s::::'0 .1 ' i-:~----.-60- Ii! ~ __ r-- ~-~O _ '. , I , , . . '~. i I j _ .... . .'" _. . " ---' . 'I _ . _...... tv ,/> • _ ._ ___ ' :., . , • , • i I " ! " ' , , I , , '. ! ' , " " , , ", ,I II '" i,'" .. ,, !_:-=:---:-~=_:_=..:__=__i_===_==_ I ., ._ , i i Iii Iii ", I " " " " . I I ,I 11'1 "II ,,' , I : , ; :. :' tit:" III , ,, "" , ,"TT'''", i j I 1 I I 1111 1;: I! t tI :I ; I I : ., I, ' , I II I I , , ' " i i ,I I I I' , ', "Ii II"" I" ".,. .'" 1:',": " ' ,,'. " " " ' " ' , ' ,' ' " ...• I, i I I " , iI I 1 I I , •• " I - .",. I I '11"I.1 J.'ill I ,,, i' ,I 1 I' ; I I I :-I'r-t-+I-+-H---+-+I-I ! I [ 1 1!--";;7T I. ~ 1 1 I I' I' I ! I 1'1111. I! I I I I " , "" I ! i ' , : : .,',' ,,:' I ,, ' " , " "" .. I ' 11 1 ,1 ,111111 ' I Ii T •: :I "" I, " 'I " I , I '" t- , , , " ", , :T" .:' 1"'" :' , •, , I , ,':!' ,: I"I 'i I ,. 'I' , , , ", , ",,' 1 I I ' •'T II I IT' I "" ' ' ,i I n,I I I II ' , 1 I " II ! , II I T ,T : , Ii, ..J.' I :-~-.' -, .• ; 1 , I I I II. T'l ,,, I" T T II ~ " J,'" ': : : ~.! I , ' . , -1 '.' ' '. L:' , '" II ,I I ..1. I,,';il:1:" I ' I , .I , '..I. 'i , ,I I}, I I : r I ,,' ' I i I ; I " I i I I ." . .~ 1 I ~ ~ . ; ! , '_L' I: ; , : ' , • I +=- W I ,I "" i ' ! •, " ",' I , " .' I!!IT ""iI I " . . I"I : ' ,, , " "" I , , ""," I , ,I ,,:1"'" "'" " ,,', . I I , IT, I I I " t ,i I , ! I.... , I I ' ",,,, , t II I "" "'--rr:J1] " ,I "" : : . ,: I I I, """i ,. 'I, I i ' t " I" I , .. I I'+U I I I ,III I i' I!', '. I I I ' , I' " .i' I 1-' I . ' I , , I I I _~ " I I I I Jet" Uo;d~-'-' ,-~ . :-'-;---'-: ' I :,:: " -'-. -:--, j---;---;--~--8E' .' .-.It:tt:t±1 i I i j I II "Ii' , I /0__. "'-'. ' - cD ' , . : : ' 21c''.J. ' , , :--.-;-50. ; ; , : , , .~. .. . i-:~±~[-~L,.- I ." " I. I , , , ~, I I ; ' ,.,' "" "I iI i' , i' " I," '. " , , .""I ., " : ,I , ' •, I " 'T : ,,' I I I ", " ' " , . ,,' IT •, , ! " ,.,'1 I, , I I " "ii, i, IT I I I , I I I, "" I Or. U,,' i"":' . '" ",. Iii: I" ' , I , I ",' 'II , ,! ' , , " I ,." T T I I ,I '~:.'.I I _'-' •."1 '" I . , , I"! , ,: " --;,I ,I ". I I' ", ttrt TiT! rtrtrrtrrrtr: " ;!. ; I ! I I r , Ii:'I ! ./ r el l I I III ,I t ;-, I I !;! i ill I! I -.c.il'.l': ~·'I ""' ' 1 ...In77U'i-~.· I 1;llllii I' I 1I T "" I, I' !! I , I IIii I' I J I I!!: I! ! j I : t I I I I , ! I '.-1 ! I i ii I'IIII_I'I! I I ! II i I I I I il : : : I ,I I" I " TI I , I I ' : I I . .", "/'.,,, I! T.FLr-;-1 ~JI : 10 Ii, I ~" I rI' ,~ " ' ,,:,.' I, I I I : : : ' , , I , I , I, " 'Ii' ,I' i Iii .,+7J .'Qlor} I '. I I I e, Vv' e IlL' ,I I I,' I I ii" i I I I " ' I! T" I I ; liT: •I " I, I I I I i t I, I I., I I '" , I : I I ,I ,- 'Ai I! ! i I I I! ,! I I i , I ! I ' I I"" Ii! 'i I i f::: e '7 ,i I I! I -I I I I . I' 111111 I. I "," I I I ,-;r: I, , !, i 11,""'" C nl I -_~--_~--L-: ~,..ft!-:eJtl--'Lci-Li _t I" :7GFA': • " (r'); 'I,., -j--l--Ii[i-II I I I j I I I ,I T , " ----FEr.-JZ?'J-'7 ,__ 'H' I I " ", 'I . " t : .! ': I "t"" iI ,,' ,., ' ! I Ii IIlIi-1 . I,' .c' _ .. -30 '< _.:IV o-ve-,!,IH r: ._ )'«_. : . c ~:.::: __~ ::: __- 1' -- -=-;-_~~'~e-m-~~d.., ;, } To F'rren 11.'n.,o I I '"'"' ,., , ~ -"0-' _'I, , ' " , ~" ,", ., " I '~: Ii ' , , , , , " ' Ii! 1,,~liil 1'111 ", " ,., , , , I ,I . I/'i '" 11""" •• , . I' I ':I'."J_II I I Ile"", ," ' , ._. .__ -.--.-__ _ I', I I .: -::. ill::' __' .~ I=±$'.," I'! i I I I, I' I II ' I I I , I: i I 'I! t Ii'. Ii ii~ I ,.,,' I I " I " I ' I ! I '" Ii ,,' ,. ,+ :+" .t : . " . ::-..----"'"-1......- O_ .. ,1:.:=:,..:' .''''LLU,I I I I ' i ,,: I:i::::>-=-T ' I -,---,-----A~- __ I ..__ .. _.. " , I cc--,-,-:----0-~= ' , ,r-c-c-, , :; c-~, ." c-c------'-ru--/ . __ ... ',' Ii T----, _'-____ --;--t-:~~--(,J----- 't 1___ _ III ", :, " "i I I I I I J'II)/!'II 11.,111111 '" I I I I I, : I I I II, I TI !I 'I I i I I I .. I I I' ,,1 " f--' .~' ' " ,,,...,.. I::-.c" .' _ .• 8± .. .' . <ti_ ___ I i, . . I ,'~. ' , ", ~--:--'--, , I ~ ", ~. r,-n~ 30 .. 0 ,,__ ,"_ . ~, f', ..' _ ' i I I I!! + I "Ii" I I II I',I I " ,:::'.' • " i::' H ! +1--!- ' I , '-'- I , ,I ":: ; i.,. ," I =r:cr--_ L I I I I ..•. ~I,.i.'.,,~-/.17 !PO.li:lnni,' I' IWOIF)Q' P:.(', i II'':' I I I !! ! 17; I ! t I I j I I: I i /1 ! ' I I I ! I I I I I I , I I I I I I III.~ II I 1111 I II I I I " I I! I I ,I" II i! !ll !11J illlilj !!...!..Ii!il' 1-[-11 I II . --~ It! ,,' , I I I ' I i I ,I I ,! I! i ! :! t"', \/ II I ;;.)' i ;"" I' C'il'!",' "I_'_.I_ill I:! I I ii' I.' t If I 'I' . ' , , , -/li-.•••,-,,, I ., I _ __ --'- r---=. I. n-<>-Iii y_'-+"~---W ." I I ~ <?-__ I~ , i i I ,_ ~_.-.'-' I ._~, fI,,' r I ' I I 'J, !! I I I' i I i ,__ '. _" " II' I re..j 'I ~'.L.I I ~nea.'J.E',"O I I I I I! _ I I' I I !, I ii' ~--;:.: "M, , ",: l~----'-'-' ~ ," i ' I' "7:0- ....__ ..--:-' . Uti!, I ' I' , ' '-L' _----:--:~-L-: _,_LLl....! i :~. :" Ll ' . , I I ' " L-'_, -'--(~___ . : , I , , , , I , , " I I i . I I I II-ill--ril-- .__ ; : : ! ,ITI-,---jj '_' __ ';' , !I !I I1.1/ I i I 'i I i . .''---'------;-,'. __ ~---,-,----,-- I~ .I..__ ,_~ . I I1 Ii, ____ --:_. .. __ ~ " I I I 1 I ' ' 1 . "_'_~,'·I!·'" __ .__ " 'r-1l~are.s-JS]lI/7 ,0.T , : Ii! I ,,!. _.__ . , , I _._1_,_._'_. .;__ _ --r . I _'_I I ~ i I I I IJ !: 11111' 'I ii' HOLYOKE, MASS. I • .: " ~Iim I TT I , , ~:. i ; ::. ., ,Ii' I ! I I , �-44- This trench is filled 3/4 full of water once a day. Select hens from one of the heavy breeds such as white rocks. Take the medium sized hens rather than the fat, heavy ones. Get hens 10 days to two weeks prior to setting them on the goose eggs. Put them in the battery on three glass eggs apiece. When goose eggs are obtained set three to the hen, and if obtained from a wild nest try to use eggs from the same nest so that they will be in the same stage of incubation. Take the hen off the nest once a day, usually at the same time. Give her a half hour to feed and water. Be sure to cover the eggs while she is off particularly if the day is cold, also the nest must be covered to prevent her from jumpingb,ack on. The hen should probably be taken off at about 11:00 avm , since this would be in the warm part 0 fthe day • Place the hen carefully back on the nest. Do not turn the eggs since the hen will do this herself. Keep the hen in the dark all of the time. Thus, when the geese hatch she won't pick them. Also m1..Stwatch the hens since all will not accept goslings. Pluck some of the feathers off the breast of heavy feathered hens, and powder them with Sodium Chloride just as they are set. Apply the Sodium Chloride around vent, neck, and under wings to eliminate lice. As the eggs begin to hatch they can be slipped under the gentle hens. Each hen can take care of four to six glosings after hatching,and some of the poorer hens can then be eliminated. Once the nest is hatched remove goslings and hen to a small cardboard box. Do not give the goslings anything for the first 72 hours, then give them some water. Let the hen brood them and keep them warm for that time. After three or four days put in wire run with the hen. This run should be about 2' x 2'x 6' with a wooden shelter at the end. The rest of the run should be screened including Sides, top and bottom. Feed can be provided at this time consisting of equal measures of lay mash (20 or 21% protein), shorts, and bran. This should be fed the bf.nds in dry form, and water should be placed at the other end of the pen so the birds will exercise ba.ckand forth from food to water. At from five to six days the goslings will begin pecking at the hens and pulling their feathers out. When this happens the hen should be removed and placed on top of the run, then put back in at night. �-45On the seventh day add greens such as winter wheat or alfalfa to the diet. This must be chopped finely at first and more coarsely as the birds become older. The greens are put in a separate pan from the grain. Take out of the wire runs at about four weeks and place in large ground pens. Separate by age or size so the big ones are not mixed with the small ones. Also only one hen is now needed for each pen. She can either be turned loose or penned in the center so the goslings can see her. Should only have about two pens --one for small geese, other for the larger ones. At four to five weeks increase grain, use what is called hen scratch which is a combination of corn chop,wheat, and milo. Gradually the geese will use this in preference to the mash. As this occurs eliminate the mash. Must continue greens at all times unless have a pasture into which the birds can be turned. Water the birds in the ground pens with a five gallon bucket partially sunk into the ground. At five to six weeks, put all birds together with one hen in a very large conditioningpen such as the Fort Collins nursery. There should bea tank of some kind to provide drinking and swimming water, a field for grazing, preferably of alfalfa. Birds will start to fly at about eight to ten weeks so must have them planted by the tenth week. III. Hatching with Incubatror-s , -- Strutz uses a Farm Master incubator purchased from Sears and Roebuck. Apparently itwas especially for hatching waterfowl. It was water trays on top, and he added a large water tray below the egg trays so that the water surface is doubled. He also puts sponges into the trays so that theev~oration surface is doubled. He keeps the humidity at 92-94 per cent at all times, and turns the eggs fivetimesa day. After the first week he sprays the eggs twice a day with water, and during the third and fourth week he sprays them three times a day. Temperature is kept at 99 3/4deg±-ees at all times and as incubation progresses he allows more oxygen into the machine (this is important~) Temperature must be watched since there is a tendency for it to rise as the embryos develop. Strutz starts the goslings on a 26%·turkeys tarter supplementing this feed with greens. When they are two weeks old he cuts down the protein feed to 22 to 24 per cent. He has found that keeping them on a high protein with greens has a tendency to give the geese··"f'Lf.pped wings tI • When they are six weeks , he gives them scratch grains (corn, millet, oats, etc.) along with the greens. �-46- IV. Recommended Procedures for Hatching and Raising Geese at the Colorado Bird Farm. -- Considering all of the above information the following will be the procedures for hatching geese at the Bird Farm beginning in April of 1963. All plans will be for 100 eggs with an expected hatch of 70 goslings. A. Equipment needed: 1. Two incubators capable of handling at least 50 eggs each. Extra water trays should be added so that the water surface is doubled. Sponges should be placed in all water trays. 2. Egg Chandler. So that embryo development can be determined. 3. Brooder house capable of being separated into ~wo pens so that large and small birds can be kept separate. 4. One pen not less than 50' x 50' with one or more dividers so that geese can be separated by size. B. Hatching: The eggs will arrive in two groups, one from Bowles Lake, and the other from Bonny Reservoir. These will undoubtedly contain eggs in different stages of Lncubat.Lonj however, for this purpose, we will atrcempt to make our egg pickup earlier to catch the eggs in the beginning stages of embryo development. As the eggs are unwrapped they will be candled, and those with advanced embryo development placed in one incubator, and those with little or no embryo development placed in the other incubator. Temperatures in both incubators will be maintained at 99 3/4 degrees and humidity at 92-94 per cent at all times. As a majority of the embryos in the incubator reach the age of one week they will be sprayed twice a day with water. This will be increased to three times a day during the third and fourth weeks. Also oxygen will be increased as the embryos become older (this apparently is important and care must be taken with this item. ) C. Rearing: As the goslings are hatched they will be placed into the brooder and kept without food or water for about 72 hours. At the end of this time they will be given water, and on the third day mash will be provided. Separate the large and small birds into two pens, also watch to see that there isn't unnecessary harassment of individual birds. If this occurs these birds might have to be placed into a separate pen. The brooder should be available as long as it is needed. This will probably be until the birds are about four weeks old. It may also depend upon the weather and other circumstances. This will be decided on the ground. �-47Food and water should be separated in each pen so that the birds will be encouraged to run back and forth. A five gallon can can be partly sunk in each pen for watering. It will not be necessary to provide a tank for the geese to swim. If possible the older geese 'shouldbe turned out into a pasture of some nature so that they can begin to learn to forage for themselves. Also picking at grass, or alfalfa, etc. will keep them busy and cut down on their harassment of each other. D. Diet: 1. 2. 0 to 72 hours -- nothing. 72 hours to t.hree days -- water. 3. Three to seven days -- feed all they will eat of equal parts of lay mash (20 to 21% protein), shorts, and bran. This will be in dry form with no moisture added. 4. Seven days to four or five weeks -- continue the equal mixture of mash, shorts, and bran with chopped greens (alfalfa). Chop the greens finely at first becoming coarser as the birds are older. 5. Four to five weeks and older -- gradually substitute hen scratch (corn chop, wheat, and milo) for mash. Continue the greens, however, at this age it would be better for the geese to forage for greens on their own if this is possible. E. Conditioning for release: At about five weeks the geese will be picked up from the Bird Farm and part transplanted to the Bonny goose pen and the rest to the Nursery at Fort Collins. The young geese at Bonny will be provided hen scratch slowly switching to milo or wheat along with corn. Those brought to the Nursery will be placed on hen scratch also switching to straight wheat. At eight to ten weeks of age they will be banded and released on an area previously selected. Prepared by: Date: Approved by: Wayne W. Sandfort Jack R. Grieb ------------------~---=----~--------=-------------------~--Game Manager, Research Leader, Waterfowl Project -------------------------------------- Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator ��April, 1963 -49JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO ------------~~~~~--------- Project No. w-88-R-8 Waterfowl Surveys and Investigations ------------------~----------~------------------~------------~~------ Project No. Title of Job: 2 ~ 4_b _ Cooperative Lesser Canada Goose Flock Investigations ----------~~~~~---=--~~~~~~~~--~~~~~--~~~~~------ Period Covered: April 1, 1962 to March 31, 1963 Objectives: (1) Investigate the possibility of establishing an annual goose flock trend count in east-central Alberta and west-central SaSkatchewan, Canada. (2) Determine if the Canada geese migrating through this staging area belong to the Arkansas Valley goose flock. (3) Determine age and sex ratio information from the Canada geese within the staging area. (4) Determine the size of the Canada goose flock wintering in western Nebraska, southeast Colorado, northeast New Mexico, and the panhandle of Texas. (5) Determine age and sex composition of the wintering flock. (6) Determine harvest and migration areas for geese from each wintering area of the general flock winter range. Techniques Used: (1) Aerial survey of Canada geese in east-central Alberta during the first two weeks of October. (2) Trap and band geese in east-central Alberta from late September to late October to verify that these birds are part of the Arkansas Valley flock. 3) Analyze data from the banded sample. 4) Conduct periodic, cooperative aerial surveys over the wintering areas. ~5) Trap and band geese on the wintering grounds, and analyze the data from banded sample. (6) Analyze band recoveries and compare between banding stations. �-50Figure l.--Known Migration and Wintering Canada "Goose Flock. / ~( ~ Staging Area ~ Migration Area ~ Wintering Area Areas of the Arkan~as Valley �-51COOPERATIVE LESSER CANADA GOOSE FLOCK INVESTIGATION Jack R. Grieb The following report is a compilation of all information available on the small white-cheeked goose flock wintering in the Nebraska panhandle, southeast Colorado, northeast New Mexico, and the Texas panhandle (Figure 1). It lists the results of surveys and bandings beginning in September, 1962, in Canada, and ending in February, 1963, on the wintering grounds of the United States. This report is a product of the efforts of many persons and agencies. Each is given credit in the section in which they participipated. RESULTS CANADA STAGING AREA CENSUS. --The first flight of small Canada geese appeared in the Kindersley, Saskatchewan area September 7, 1962. Build-up after·that time was slower than normal because of dry and mild fall weather. Results of the staging areas census of Canada geese are presented in Table 1. Comparison of this count (57,007) to that of the U. S. wintering area count (123,024) gives a staging to wintering area ratio of .4 to 1. This is further compared to similar ratios of .5 to 1 for 1961, and .7 to 1 for 1960. The relationship between staging and wintering area counts for the three years was tested by Chi-square analysis resulting in a Chi-square value "greater thantf 1,000, indicating that these annual ratios are significantly different from each other. Thus, we must say that size of the wintering population cannot be predicted on the basis of staging area counts. The obvious trouble with staging area counts is that the same per cent of the population is not available on the area to be counted from one year to the next. Depending upon weather and food conditions, the boundaries of the staging area vary from year to year. Thus, some years the geese are forced i10 concentrate into those parts of Alberta and Saskatchewan covered by aerial transects. Other years, they are found scattered from the Athabaska Delta and Hay Lakes all the way down to the Red Deer River. Aerial surveys undertaken as a part of this investigation could not take these factors into consideration and therefore could not reflect year to year differences in population size. Recommendationsfor1963.--Before completely abandoning this technique, I feel that we should make one more attempt to test its validity. This time the count will be delayed until the third or last week of October to see if there is a late movement of birds into the lower portion of the staging area prior to movement into the U. S. This will be discussed at the forthcoming Central Flyway Technical Committee meeting and a final decision reached at that time. �Table 1.--Canada Staging Area Census of Canada Geese, 1962. :Province .Alberta Saskatchewan Area Athabaska Delta and Hay Lakes Observers - 1962 Date - No. Canada Geese - 1961 Inventory _ 1960 Inventory 1,108 East Central Boeker-Grieb Oct. 9-10 29,4-80 19,4-90 30,995 Wilkie':Unity Nelson Oct. 2 2,620 2,665 5,255 N. Sask. River TOTALS 535 S. Sask. River and Naplecreek Nelson Oct. 4- &,840 8,060 Kindersley Dzubin-Lamont Oct. 12 13,067 8,275 54-,007 38,4-90 8,400 24 925 I f:S I 71,178 �MIGRATION ANDWlNrERJNG COUNTS IN TEE UNfl'EDSTA'I,JES. ,-,- The following persons ageYi'cies-cooperated i,n the migration and wintering census of this goose flock. Ln the Urd.bed States. a~d. Agency Bureau, of Sport Fishe~cies and 'Wildlife Person Robert Brown Mel Evans Don Kre Lb.l.e Ed Wellein NewMexico Department of Gameand Fish Mr. Goodwin Nebr-aska Game J Forestation Commission George Schildman and Parks Colorado Department of Gameand Fish Bill Rutherford Dick Hopper Mel Barron Wayne Long Herman Wilson Jack Grieb The flight of this small Canada goose flock into U. S. wintering areas was greatly delayed this past fall because of record breaking warm weather in Alberta and Saskatchewa..n.. Where normally the birds would arrive on the wintering grounds the first week or 10 days of November; this yearJ they began straggling into the wintering areas the last week of November. Build-up after this t.Lme seemed to beat a leisurely pace climaxed by a strong movement into the area dur.ing the lOth, 11th, and 12th of December. Don Kr-LebLeindicated that birds began moving into the Waggoner 'Ranch area the last two days of November and peaked on December 4 • Bob Brown wrote of a strong bufLd=trp dur-Lng early December. George BchLLdmanfelt that mar~y'birds moved into the Nebr-aska panhandle early in the week of December 9 with movement continuing throughout the week. ObvLousLy, this is the la-test migration. of this flock into the winteri.ngareas on record. Once they arrived, it became obvious that: (1) the population had done well on the breeding grounds; and (2) their distribution pattern throughout the wintering areas was different than last year (Table 2). Thus J considerably more geese than normal were counted at Buffalo Lake Ln the Texas panhandle J and in the Nebraska panhandle. In additionJ the largest count ever recorded at Waggoner Ranch occurred during the second Inventory with an estimated. 69,000 birds present on the area. This number dropped to 35,000 on the January 9 inventory which may indicate that the former high number could have been caused by includi.ng geese which norma.l.Ly mi,gr te to areas further south. Incidentally J there WHS no aerial harassment of geese at Waggoner Ranch thi.s year to alleviate depredations. The reason for this is not known (Figure 2 shows the long term trend in goose number-sbased on the January Inventory from Texas and Colorado areas). �Table 2. --Migration and tvintering Canada Goose Census of the Arkansas_VaJ.ley-Texas Panhandle Flock. NUMBER OF CANADA GEESE Count III High Count 1961-62 High Count 1960-61 High Count 1959-60 29,377 ~5,250 31,360 54,320 4,295 18,000 10,154 10,000 5,000 69,230 35,000 16,90011 55,000 33,000 866 1,~00 1,800 660 250 6,226 7,808 3,879 ~,S90 280 Area Count I Nov. 13-1~, 1962 Count II Dec. 12, 1962 Colorado 208 38,911 Buffalo Lake 50 \vaggoner Ranch 800 Jan. 9-10, 1963 Texas Muleshoe Refuge 377 Nebraska I \J1 .j::"'" 382 3,496 2,355 2,150 1, 7L~5 2,6~2 1,817 123,024 93,940 80,133 103,355 95,492 New Mexico TOTALS 11 Aerial harassment of geese scattered birds and made census difficult. This count is low. I �Recommendat.ions for the 1963-64 Migrat.ion and W.intering Census.-- This Va~luable survey Ls needed to provide annual flock management .information. Because of w:Lde variation in tl!.etime of goose movement into the wintering grol1ndsJ .it 1.S recommended that only two inventories be taken during the 196364 season. The first of these will be used to indicate relative flock status as a pr-ecaut Lon against over-harvest. The second will estimate flock status after the hunt.ing season, and the expect.ed breeding population for the coming year. Dates of these inventories'will De: 8,. 'b, Decerriber4, 1963. January Inventory .interval as established by the Bureau. Should come in first week of January to take advantage of the full moon period. Procedures will remai.n the same as past years: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Nebraska personnel will cover western Nebraska goose concentration areas on designated days. New Mexico personnel w.ill cover northeastern New Mexico goose concentration areas. Mllleshoe National Wildlife Refuge personnel will coverall goose concentrations in the Muleshoe area. All other Texas areas including the Waggoner Ranch Vicinity, and Buffalo Lake area, will be covered on designated days by an aerial crew composed of a plane and pilot from the Denver Wildlife Research Center, and an observer from the Colorado Game and Fish Department. These counts will be supplemented by ground counts in these areas , where and when possible J by Bureau of Sport F.isheri.es and Wildlife personnel. All Colorado areas will be covered by Colorado personnel on the appropr.iate days. Information for these inventories w.ill be forwarded to Jack Grieb J Box 513, Fort Collins, Colorado, for compilation and distribution to all interested person. CANADA BANDING. --This work was done by a three man state crew composed of George Wrakestraw, Wyoming, and B.ill Rutherford and Jack Grieb of Colorado)' Ln cooperation with the White-front banding crew head.ed by Alex Dzubin. The white -f'rorrt crew saved all Canada s caught in their trapping program while we concentrated our efforts on those lakes conta.ining the most Canada geese. Birds caught by the white-front crew were banded, fluoroscoped. and released the f'oLl.ov.Lng day by the Canada crew. i �Figure 2.--January Inventory Results in Colorado and Texas Wintering Areas of the Arkansas Valley - Texas Panhandle Goose Flock, by years. 100 /\ 90 I i / 80 70 / <-: / . ./ -'-~--- --..---....... ~,~. .: ./ -~'-v'/ / I / I 30 ---- .. --"""-"""~ ___-I' / 20 " 10 ,, " --_. ,- -: -: " "- ;::..::" »>: .•.. / / ~'" /' /' ,. , '- " .r-; '" --- '-- ---- - --- - - -, " / 1 / -- - - - - - - 1,,, ".-- -/ // I I '''" ; / // -, i I /"".. <, / /' ". V1 / I \~ / •... 40 /// /1 /' 50 NWJlber Geese (Thousands) \, I, / / . \ Total ./ 60 \, v" ./ ,. / / \ Texas \ 11 \--::---- '" Colorado / . " / " 19~8 19~9 1950 1951 1952 1953 195~ 1955 1956 1957 1958 1959 1960 1961 1962 1963 Year 0\ I �-57- On September 30, the Canada crew moved to Alberta and setup on the Kirkpatrick Lake where Alberta Fish and Wildlife Officer Al Boggs had been pre-baiting d-uring the last week of September. However, geese did not use Kirkpatrick this year because of the abundance of other, more desirable lakes. Other areas were scouted for a good trapping site, but it wasn't until the aerial inventory that two potential areas were located. These were Coleman Lake, about 12 miles south of Hanna, and Sunnynook Lake about 30 miles southeast of Hanna. Three traps were moved to Coleman, and one trap was used to make set-ups on small areas where geese were found to rest. No Canada IS were caught in Alberta, and only one catch was made of Snow and Ross's geese. Trapping results are listed in Table 3. Age composition of trapped birds is listed,by dates, in Table 4. This reveals that early movement of Canada geese into the Kindersley area did not contain many family groups. Itappearsthat a true proportion of young was not reached until the end of September. Thus we estimate percent of young in the population as 58 percent rather than using the composite of all birds trapped. Fluoroscopy results are given in Table 5. These results are not conclusive in that the Canada population using the Kindersley area was constantly being replenished by northern birds which caused wide fluctuation in percent of adults or young with shot between dates of the trapping season. The over-all estimate of adults with shot (30 %) does not compare with our estimate of adults with shot based on last year's post hunting season trapping and fluoroscopy work (53 %). Reasons for this discrepancy may be due to a poor sample during either trapping effort; or, to the fact that birds trapped in the Kindersley, Saskatchewan area are part of the Waggoner Ranch group and as such are not subject to the same hunting pressures as those trapped at Two Buttes. We must wait for a complete analysis of band recoveries contemplated for this spring before answering this question. Reco~mendationsfor 1963.-- Correspondence with Alex Dzubin has indicated that white .... front banding may be attempted in eastern Alberta as well as the Kindersley area. Thus, we may have the opportunity to cooperate again as during the past season. If it would be possible to obtain a sample of birds from Hanna across to Kindersley all in one year we may be able to determine the relation of the staging area to the wintering areas. This will be discussed at the Technical Com.mittee meeting and plans formulated at that time. UNI'l'EDS'l'ATESBANDING.-- Currentbandings of Canada geese of this complex are tabulated in Table 6. Only two crews were active this year as follows: 1. 2. Robert Brown, Refuge Manager and cr-ew, banding at Buffalo Lake National Wildlife Refuge, Texas panhandle. Bill Rutherford, crew leader, Richard Hopper, Howard Funk, Robert Kitzmiller, and Jack Grieb, banding in the Two Buttes Reservoir area of southeast Colorado. �crable3.--Number of Geese Trapped by.Species and Area, 1962. Number of Geese Species Saskatchewan Alberta 1~---------5=5~0Cana da goose y Total 550 White-fronted goose 92 92 3 11 TOTAL 645 93 Includes 7 foreign retraps and 32 large type Canada geese. 738 Lesser Snow goose Ross's goose 17 Percentages, by Dates, for Small Canada Geese Trapped Near Table 4.-··-Age Kindersley, Saskatchewan, Fall, 1962. Immature Adults Total No. No. No. Date % % 80 10 12.5 70 87.5 9715-21 9/22-28 109 58·9 76 41.1 185 9/29-10/5 64 41.6 90 58.4 154 10L6-12 41 41.4 58 58.6 99 TOTAL 284 54.8 234 45.2 518 Table 5.-Dates 9/15-21 Per cent of Small Canada Geese with Shot, by Dates, Kindersley, Saskatchewan, Fall, 1962. Total Immature Adults No. % with shot No. % with shot % with shot No. 0010.0 10 25.0 27.1 70 9/22-28 109 33·0 76 2.6 185 20.5 9/29-10/5 64 31.2 90 7.8 154 17·5 10L6-12 41 22.0 58 5.2 99 12.1 TOTALS 284 29.6 234 5.6 518 18.7 �-59Table 6.--NumberCanadaGeese state Colorado Area Two Buttes Texas Waggoner Ranch New Mexico Nebraska Y Banded and Returns by Areas and Years. No. Birds No. Band Returns Year Banded Number Per cent 644 240 1951 37 ·3 1952 1,278 395 30·9 1,478 1953 29.4 435 41 1954 10 24.4 182 1956 50 27·5 516 1957 90 17.4 1958 529 94 17.8 46 526 1959 8.7 1960 417 -y 1961 1,940 1962 858 1,301 1963 1955 1956 1957 1958 1959 1960 1961 1962 50 140 316 165 721 0 0 0 3 18 26 33 32 Buffalo lake 1961 1962 1963 32 224 659 -y la Queva 1958 1959 1960 1961 1962 90 149 355 54 190 :\-7 25 1952 1953 1959 1961 55 31 51 2 North Platte R. Returns not available for tabulation. ~y - .y -y 6.0 12.9 8.2 20.0 4.4 18.9 16.8 �-60- Both crews caught a good sample of geese with 659 trapped and banded at Buffalo Lake, and 1,301 in the Two Buttes area. Birds banded by year, and by location are listed in Table 6. No analysis is presented at this time since a duplicate IBM deck has only recently been received from Patuxent and sufficient analysis time was not available. Age Composition Information.-- Table 7 tabulated age data for all available bandinginformation from all areas, compared to check station data from Two Buttes. Data from all sources are similar ranging from a low of 51.1% estimated young for the Two Buttes Check Station to the high estimate of 57.1% young from geese banded at Buffalo Lake. Comparison of current information relating to differences between banding and check station estimate of percentage of young are list;ed in Table 8. Only two trapping intervals were used this year and comparable check station data reveal that while age percentages did not compare closely between the two for any interval, both experienced a decrease in the per cent. of young for the second interval. Two Buttes Area Group Count Information. -- Group counts were attempted while the birds were on resting areas, while landing in fields, and taking off from feeding fields. A total of 1,388 groups containing 3,474 birds were counted for a mean group size of 2.5. This is compared to an average group size of 3.5 for the previous year when all indications were that production was lower than this year. Since the previous year was the first attempt at group counting, it is possible that results were not accurate. Fluoroscopy.-- Per cent of birds with shot are compared to past years in Table 9. This tabulation is limited to those birds trapped after the hunting season so that these data will estimate the per cent of adults and young with shot at the conclusion of the season. Results show a downward trend in the number of young with shot for the past two years. This is probably a result of a decrease in hunting pressure in the Two Buttes area. Recommendations for 1963-64 Banding Season.--Every effort should be continued for a coordinated banding program on all wintering areas during the next season. This is especially needed at Waggoner Ranch so that direct comparison can be made to determine amount of interchange between major wintering areas. Target for each area should be a minimum of 500 geese with the most deSirable number set at 1,000. All birds should be aged by the notched-tail feather technique, and sexed by cloacal examination. �-61Table 7.--Age Composition of the Arkansas Valley Canada Goose Flock. Banding Check Station Adult Young Adult Young state Year No. Per cent No. Per cent No. Per cent No. PerCent Colorado 1951 343 300 46.7 53.3 1952 649 627 49.=1: 356 46.8 404 50·9 53.2 66.4 1958 346 175 33.6 42.2 1959 214 293 57.8 929 47.9 1010 52.1 1960 269 60.0 40.0 377 179 36.5 655 63.5 1961 1171 62.3 710 45.5 732 54.5 37·7 612 1962 671 192 22.3 77.7 527 419 44.3 55.7 1963 607 44.7 51.1 750 48.9 55.3 204 213 New Mexico 1959 1960 1961 1962 65 197 27 118 43.6 61.9 69.2 62.1 84 79 -12 72 62.6 38.1 30.8 37·9 Texas 1962 111 82 42.5 57.5 (Buffalo 1963 !!133 42.9 177 57.1 Lake) 11 Percent of adult and young males used as·estimate of age composition. �-62Table 8.--Comparison of Age Composition Estimates Between Trapping and Check Station Samples by Periods, Two Buttes Reservoir, 1960-61, 1961-62, and 1962-63. 11/8 to 11/25/60 11/26 to 12/4/60 12/5 to 12/14/60 12/15 to 12/24/60 12/25 to 1/8/61 1[11 to 1/15[61 79·9 73.3 70.6 57.5 51.2 56.5 20.1 26.7 29.4 42.5 48.8 43.5 Check Station Per cent Per cent Total Adult Young Birds 19 0- 1 278 44.1 55.9 535 240 38.0 62.0 295 163 56.5 43.5 239 214 40.2 59.8 199 418 64.5 76 35.5 568 .TOTALS 62.3 37.7 1881 45.5 54.5 1344 11/10 to 12/6/61 12/7 to 12/28/61 1[9 to 1[26[62 72.7 78.0 79.6 27·3 22.0 20.4 161 300 402 50.1 58.5 71.2 49.9 41.5 28.8 535 265 146 TarALS 77.7 22·3 863 55.7 44.3 946 44.6 62.1 55.4 37·9 314 103 y Date :t~· Trapping Per cent Per cent Adult Young Total Birds .' 19 2- 3 11/23 to 12/21/62 12[22 to 2/9[63 61.3 51.2 38.7 48.8 555 802 TOTALS 44.7 55-3 48.9 1357 51.1 417 Trapping and banding generally took place in the middle of each intervaL Y Table 9.--Summary of Fluoroscopy Results, Two Buttes Reservoir, Colorado, 1959-62. Total Per cent total Per cent Adults Per cent Young Date Sample Size with shot with shot with shot y 1959 1960 1961 1962 1963 500 417 568 ?J Y 783 g; 402 49.4 42.7 51.9 53.0 42.0 65.3 45.9 63.6 57.8 58.3 37.6 37.1 36.8 34.1 26.7 Young-of-the-year birds. This sample represents only those birds trapped after conclusion of the hunting season. #-'1:,:~~' �-63- FLOCK STATUS AND MANAGEMENT RECOMMENDATIONS.-- All data gathered during the past few months strongly indicated that 1962 was an excellent production year for this small Canada goose flock, with populations recorded at all time highs. Cursory examination of staging and wintering areas revealed no specific ecologic factor which will limit the continued growth of this population. Size of the annual harvest does not appear excessive and therefore is not presently lim:i.ting flock growth. If limiting factors do exist, they probably are present during the breeding season on the northern breeding grounds. Consideration of these things, permits the prediction that this flock of small Canada geese will continue to increase during coming years. Thus, we must be prepared for larger numbers of birds in all parts of the migration and wintering rangej and further, we must bealertt:o the potential for depredation so that measures may betaken to alleviate this problem before it becomes serious. The time is approaching when we must manage this flock separately from other Canada goose flocks in the Central Flyway. Certainly, we have, or are developing, the information necessary for separate management, and if weare to maintain control,we must establish regulations based upon the specific needs of this group of Canada geese. Thus, I strongly recommend that the Council request the Bureau of Sport Fisheries and Wildlife to: (1) begin keeping winter inventory, banding age and sex ratiOS, and group counts separately for this flockj and (2) carefully consider the needs of this flock and establishing hunting regulations based thereon. Prepared by: Date: ~J~a~c=k~R~.~G=r=i~e=b~--------~Approved by: Waterfowl,Leader April, 1963 -----------~~~~~~--------------- .Wayne W. Sandfort Game Manager, Research Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator ��April, 1963 -65JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO ----------~~~~~-------------An Ecological Investigation of the Project No. W-105-R-3 Cache la Poudre Deer Herd ------~~~~~----------~~~~~~~~~~~~~---------Work Plan No. 6 1 --------~--------------~------------~--------------------Title of Job: Nutritive Content and Digestibility of Key Browse Species ------------------------------~--------~------~--------~----------- Period Covered: June, 1962 to September, 1962. ABSTRACT Work done on this job included the completion of qomb calorimetric an~lyses to determine the nutritive value of important deer browse plants sampled during 1961, from the different seasons and different study areas of the Cache la Poudre Deer Range. In addition calorie per gram data and carbohydrate analyses were accomplished on feeding trial data obtained durin~ February-May, 1962. Assistance was also rendered to other work plans of Federal Aid Project·W-105-R-3. Recommendations: The objectives of this job proposal have been fulfilled and it is recommended that this job be termined as of December 31, 1962. Objectives: To determine for key browse species: 1. The nutritive content, especially caloric values, of browse species collected throughout 1961 from the Cac~e la Poudre Deer range, and believed to be of importance to mule deer. How mule deer digest certain browse materials, with special emphasis on energy and plant cell-wall constituents. 2. Procedures: 1. Analysis of the nutritive content of the collected browse materials utilized standard bomb calorimetric procedures. Analysis of the digestibility of fed plant materials by mule deer, utilized standard bomb calorimetric, extractive and gravimetric procedures. 2. 3. Laboratory measures to determine physical characteristics of mule deer used techniques outlined in Work Plan 5, Job 1. A schedule of findings is given in the tabular material attached. ��-67NDTRITIVE CO:NTENT AND DIGESTIBILITY OF KEY BROWSE SPECIES Cathleen Peeke and Henry L. Short Findings: Nutrient Content of Browse Plants The bomb calorimetric determinations of the 77 plant samples collected in 1961 were completed. These plant materials are described in Sub-project 10, "Correlation of Climatological and Physiological Records with Nutritional Values of Plants, " of the entitled study, "Effects of the Environment on a Wild Deer Population, " done by personnel of the Colorado Cooperative Wildlife Research Unit, Colorado State University, in conjunction with Federal Aid Project W-I05-R-3. Energy of combustion data appears to be closely related with measured crude fat levels and dry matter percentages of willow, juniper, vaccinium, bitterbrush, rabbitbrush, aspen, sagebrush, mountain mahogany, and tufted hairgrass plant tissue. Data obtained from this work job suggest that the potential energy-'.ofbrowse plant tissue is greatest at that time period when the available energy (to deer from digestion of the plant tissue) is least. Digestibility of Browse Materials by Mule Deer Bomb calorimetric determinations of 7 feed and 9 fecal samples allowed the calculat.ion of the apparent energy digestibility of the trial feeds from each of the 9 digestion trials performed during 1962. Apparent energy digestion is an indication of both (1) an animal's performance on a particular diet and (2) the amount of available energy in a particular ration. The determination of the cellulose, hemi-celluoseandlignin composition of the feed and fecal samples allowed the calculation of digestion coefficients for these constituents. Apparent digestible energy coefficients of the 1962 feeds were correlated with the relative cellulose levels of the feed materials but not the lignin or hemicelluose levels of the trial rations. Physical Characteristics of Mule Deer Assisted in the determination of normal physical values of mule deer from the Cache la Poudre Deer Range. This research is reported in the job completion report of W-I05-R-3, Work Plan 5, Job 1. Prepared by: H_e_n_r~y __L_. __S_h_o_r_t =Approved by: Date: ~A~p~r.i_l~I~1_9~6~3~------_ ~W~a~yn--e~W-.~S~an--d-f~o~r-t----~ Game Manager, Research Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �-68The nutritional chemistry provided in this job completion report, and carried out in the Wildlife Research Laboratory of the Colorado Cooperative Wildlife Research Unit at Colorado State University, has been previously reported in the Colorado State University Research Foundation report on Atomic Energy Commission Contract No. AT(11-1)-898, November 30, 1962, 64 pp. (mimeographed}, Data pertinent to the present report are abstracted from that bulletin and presented in tables 1 and 2 following. It is anticipated that these data-will be included in formal manuscripts for publication at a later date. Table l.--A listing of caloric determinations (calories/gram) of 77 plant samples collected from 5 ranges, at 4 seasons, during 1961. These data were gathered cooperatively with Colorado Federal Aid Project W-105c-R-3 and U. S. AEC Contract A:f 11-1)-898 to Colorado State University. ?:. <1> bO ~ &1 l. 2 -e. Low winter Middle winter 3. High winter 4. Transitional 5. Summer s:: I H.£1 0 <1> .GS ~ ~ -rl,D t1.l <1> (/) t1.l /lQ' Winter Spring Summer Aut.umn 4889 4849 4423 4747 Winter Spring Summer Autumn .~ ~ III bO -> §.£1 0 ~~ .£1 I t1.l I ,D,D ~~ ~ p::; ~,D .r-! ~ .£1 t1.l +' ::l .r-! H H <1> Pi ~ Q:> Pi t1.l <t: ~ ~ ~ or-! o -rl ~ r-I r-I o ~ ~ --- -- -- -.- t1.l rei III <1> lH ..p HbO G--i .r-! ~,g -- 4611 4663 5319 5194 5123 5340 4t567 4852 4462 4648 4843 4870 4415 4845 4772 4777 4645 4738 5378 5133 5210 5472 ---- -- -- Winter Spring Summer Autumn 4t575 4804 4380 4899 14t554 4683 4591 4703 --- --- -- -- 5151 4737 4876 5052 Winter Spring Summer A'J.tumn 5000 4816 4409 4755 -- ---- I ---- -- -- ----- 4961 4826 4821 4748 4662 4780 4845 4738 4600 4657 4141 4104 4091 Spring Summer Autumn -- -- -- --- ---- 4699 4605 4745 4676 4798 4740 4608 4462 4518 4163 4210 --- 1~~6 -- -- ---- --I --- -- -- -- -- --.- -.- -.--,._.- -- -- ---- ---:- -- -- --- -- --- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --- -- -.50/:)7 -- 14908 -4744 -- 4587 --.- 4738 4675 4399 -.- 4424 -- 4986 -- ;. -- �-69Table 20-- Composition and apparent utilization of energy (calories/gram), alcohol and ether extract, lignin, hemi-cellulose and cellulose components of 7 feeds fed in 9 feeding trials during spring 1962. Portions of the collection or analysis of these data were done cooperatively with Colorado Federal Aid Project W-I05-R-3 and Uo S. AEC Contract AT (11-1)898 to Colorado State University . Q) tQ rO <, tQ Q) @ 0 .-I q) ~ 1.-1 ~ ',::::l ~ .-I H tJ Q) cO H P or! Q) Q) or! tQ Feed component or apparent utilization Composition Per cent utilized A Per cent utilizi3.tionB .~~ o H .-IQ() g ~ 4759 44.76 49.40 29.27 75.48 81.36 22.81 27·28 380rq 36022 45.29 41.21 19.96 27.74 32.53 Bitterbrush Composition Per cent utilized 4822 40.77 33.59 74.03 26.53 20.22 37.29 23.62 18.76 22.38 Sagebrush Composition Percent utilized 4817 46.31 33.64 73.46 30.66 16.74 45.26 36.32 18008 20.•10 Mahoganysagebrush Composition Per cent utilized 4800 42.16 34.11 75.62 22.10 20.95 28.51 34.09 21.72 22.82 Bitterbrushsagebrush Composition Per cent utilized 4836 48.72 39.05 78.19 24.25 17.76 37.85 29.83 18.05 33047 Bitterbrushmahogany Composition Percent utilized 4772 53·37 36060 85050 24.46 19.17 44.44 44.45 19·00 29.. 79 .Mahogany bitterbrushsagebrush Composition Per cent utilized A Per cent utilized B 4519 60.38 63.24 34.. 23 85007 85027 29.57 21.84 59018 45.21 65.46 50.58 13042 33062 36.. 02 Feed Mountain mahogany o .Q.Qi< o~ tJ .-I p Q() H or! Q) S C) :ii .H . .-1 IV -0 ��April, 1963 -71- JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of ~C~O=L=ORAD~~O~ Project NO. W~-~3~9~-~R~-~1~0 ~ Work Plan NO. Title of Jo~: =-1 _ W~l~·1~d~T~ur~k~e~y~In~v~e~s~t~i~g~a~t~i~o~n _ ~ __ ~J~0~~~N~0~ .• ~8~ _ Mapping of Wild Turkey Range. ----------~~~~--~~~--~~~~~~~--------------------- Period Covered: July 1, 1961 to June 30, 1962. ABSTRACT Wild turkey range in Colorado has ~een mapped according to summer, winter, yearround, and occasional range. As of 1960, there were 3,928.0 square miles of wild turkey range on the eastern slope and 5,902.5 square miles on the western slope. In 1960 there were 5,193.3 square miles of occupied range open to hunting and 4,637.2 square miles closed to hunting. In 1961, there were 6,242.8 square miles of occupied range open to hunting and 3,586.2 square miles closed to hunting. A comparison of wild turkey range ~y precipitation ~elts shows that most of the wild turkey range in ColoradO. is found within the 15 to 20 inch precipitation ~elt. Written descriptions of wild turkey range ~y county have ~een completed. Recommendations: With the completion of this work, this jo~ should be discontinued. Additional work on this jo~ should ~e accomplished in future years to determine changes in the wild turkey ranges and study qualities of the various ranges. O~jectives: (1) To assem~le availa~le information on wild turkey range and distri~ution. (2) To compile data and prepare distri~ution and density maps of popUlations. (3) To show correlation ~etween distri~ution and density and elevations, vegetative types, precipitation, and soils. (4) To determine possi~le, potential range through comparlslons ~etween present range characteristics and similar areas, as indicated ~y map overlays. ��-73MAPPING OF WILD TURKEY RANGE Martin L. Burget Four counties in Colorado contained native flocks of Merriamis wild turkey as of 1940. These were Archuleta, Huerfano, PlPlata and Las Animas Counties. As of 1960, wild turkeys occurred in thirty additional counties as a result of ex,tensive livetrapping and transplanting activities and natural movements. The major vegetative types utilized by wild turkeys are similar for most of the mountain type ranges. Within these ranges, the wild turkeys normally winter in the pinon pine-juniper or ponderosa pine-oak-Douglas fir belts and spend the .sunmerfrom the ponderosa pine-oak-Douglas fir belt into the aspen and spruce-fir belts. The wild turkeys within the eastern canyon areas spend all their time within the pinon pine-juniper belt and canyon bottoms since higher elevations are not found. Tables 1 and 2 show square miles of 1960 and 1961. wild turkey range open and closed to hunting in Table 3 shows the wild turkey range by square miles in each county. It was found there was a total of 3,928.0 square miles of wild turkey range on the eastern slope and 5,902 square miles on the western slope in 1960. A total of 9,830.5 square miles of range was calculated for the state. A C.ornparisonof Range and Average Precipitation A precipitation map overlay was prepared from a U. S. Weather Bureau moisture map of Colorado. This was projected to the proper size for compari·son with turkey range maps by use of a pantograph. It was found that 10.4 per cent of the turkey range on the western slope was in the 10 to 15 inch moisture belt. The turkey range outline ran close to the 15 inch range. There was a total of 630 square miles in this moisture belt with most of the area classified as winter range. The mext moisture belt varying from 15 to 20 inches contained 62.2 per cent of the western slope turkey range and included some 3,811 square miles. This included both winter and summer habitat. Within the 20 to 30 inch moisture belt, there was a total of 22.2 per cent of the western slope range containing some 1,354 square miles. This is mostly summer range. The smallest amount of habitat was in the 30 to 40 inch moisture belt. This 5.2 per cent of the range is in the higher mountains and is classified entirely as summer range. �Table l.--SQUARE MILES OF WILD TURKEY RANGE OPEN AND CLOSED TO HUNTING, 1960 Area County Occupied range not open to hunting Occupied range open to hunting Area Eastern slope Baca Bent Boulder Chaffee Clear Creek Costilla Custer Douglas Fremont Gilpin Huerfano Jefferson Larimer Las Animas Otero Park Pueblo Teller County Occupied range not open to hunting Occupied range open to hunting 234.2 126.8 364.0 136.8 241.8 748.6 .Western slope 39.8 ---10.8 153.6 191.6 208.8 88.0 24.4 402.4 54.4 79.6 34.4 ---- Archuleta Delta Dolores Eagle Garfield Hinsdale La Plata Mesa Mineral Montezuma Montrose Ouray Pitkin Rio Blanco Routt San Miguel ---- ---- ---- 141.2 -.--- ---- ---- --- ---- 422.4 ---- ---- 1535.4 46.8 ---- 183.2 168.8 ---- 18.4 ---- 112.4 Totals 1555.8 Total Occupied Range Eastern slope Total Occupied Range in State 2372.2 31.2 573.0 43.2 244.4 --289.2 860.4 --499.2 60.8 80.2 56.0 95.6 36.4 52.0 ---583.0 171.4 ---- 374.3 3081.4 2821.1 11.6 3928.0 9830.5 I I Western slope 5902.5 I "# I �Table 2.--SQUARE MILES OF WILD TURKEY RANGE OPEN AND CLOSED TO HUNTING> 1961 Area County Occupied range not open to hunting Occupied range open to Area hunting County Occupied range not open to hunting Occupied range open to hunting 234.2 126.8 364.0 136.8 241.8 748.6 Western slope Eastern slope Totals Archuleta Delta Dolores Eagle Garfield Hinsdale La Plata Mesa Mineral Montezuma Montrose Ouray Pitkin Rio Blanco Routt San Miguel 79.6 34.3 39.8 Baca Bent Boulder Chaffee Clear Creek Costilla Custer Douglas Fremont Gilpin Huerfano Jefferson Larimer Las Animas Otero Park Pueblo Teller ---- ---- 10.8 153.6 123.2 208.8 ---- 68.4 ---- ---- 229.6 ---109.2 24.4 293 .• 2 54 .• 4 ~- --- 422.4 --- ---- --- 183.2 168 •. 8 ---- 1535 .• 4 46 •. 8 18.4 112.4 ------ 31•. 2 573.0 43.2 244.4 766.2 52.0 ---583.0 171.4 --- 289.2 94.2 ~- 499.2 60.0 80 •. 2 56.0 95.6 36.4 --- 374.3 2314.4 3587.3 11•. 6 2656 •. 5 1271.8 Total Occupied Range Eastern slope 3928.3 Total Occupied Range in State 9830.0 I I Western slope 5901.7 , -.:r \Jl I �-76- Table 3.--WILD TURKEY RANGE BY COUNTIES IN SQUARE MILES Area County Summer Winter YearRound Occasional Total Range 40.8 10.8 7.6 44.4 28.0 84.4 56 .• 4 9.6 111.6 12.8 89.0 25.6 362.6 16.8 18.4 29.2 4.4 952.4 119.4 34.4 10.8 153.6 191.6 208.8 229.2 24.4 402.4 54.4 422.4 183.2 1704.2 46.8 18.4 112 •. 4 11.6 3928.0 982.8 126.8 395.2 136.8 814.8 43.2 533.6 860.4 52.0 499.2 643.8 251.6 56.0 95.6 36.4 374.3 5902.5 9830.5 Eastern slope Baca Bent Boulder Chaffee Clear Creek Costilla Custer Douglas Fremont Gilpin Huerfano Larimer Las Animas Otero Park Pueblo Teller Sub-totals 78.6 23.6 3.2 53.6 163.6 90 •.. 0 55.6 34.4 122.4 50.4 58.0 172.4 14.8 60.4 41.6 333.4 514.4 250.0 30.8 52..4 7.2 865.8 815.6 157.6 577 .2 30.0 1294.2 Western slope Archuleta Delta Dolores Eagle Garfield Hinsdale La Plata Mesa Mineral Montezuma Montrose Ouray Pitkin Rio Blanco Routt San Miguel Sub-totals 146.8 51.2 126.6 66.8 195.6 31.2 52.0 146.0 36.0 80.0 299.6 39.2 21.6 26.0 24.8 209.6 1553.0 18.8 1375.2 28.4 647.4 443.6 50.8 251.8 32.4 260.8 12.0 270.0 307.2 16.0 273.6 111.0 106.4 23.2 39.0 11.6 117.5 2326.9 TOTALS 2368.6 2241.0 1941.6 3279.3 267.6 24.8 16.8 19.6 290.6 124.8 30.0 302.0 181.6 105.2 130.0 233.2 15.6 18.0 67.8 106.0 11.2 30.6 �-77Within the eastern slope turkey range~, the precipitation pattern is similar. A higher percentage of the turkey range, however, occurs in areas of lower precipitation. Within the 10 to 15 inch moisture belt, there is 22.5 per cent of the occupied turkey rangeo This covers a total of 872 square miles. Forty per cent of the total eastern slope turkey range or some 1,480 square miles receives 15 to 20 inches of annual precipitation. A total of 37.5 per cent of the range receives in excess of 20 inches of moisture per year. Description of Ranges by County Archuleta County -- Archuleta County contains the largest number of square miles of occupied wild turkey range of any county on the western slope. Elevations within the turkey ranges averages about 5,500 feet in the south to more than 9,000 feet at the foot of the Continental Divide. Higher elevations are used only for summer range. Because the area is mountainous, the turkey range lies along the numerous canyons and mountain parks. A number of small grass-covered parks with ponds or small lakes are favorite feeding areaso A large part of the county is forested or has been forested. an active industry from early settlement times. Lumbering has been Precipitation varies from 10 to 50 incheso Some of the turkey range within the Indian Reservation in the southern portion of the county has precipitation amounting to 10 to 15 inches per year. The largest portion of the turkey range within the county has 15 to 30 inches of moisture, while a small part of the summer range is included within the 30 to 50 inch moisture belt. Water for the turkeys is supplied by springs, streams, ponds, and small lakes. Vegetation is ideal for wild turkey development. Many of the south and west facing slopes have mixed mountain brushlands interspersed with forested areas. Ground cover consists of fescues, bromes, wheatgrass, needlegrasses, timothy, sedges, and weeds. Baca County.-- Baca County is the most southeasterly county of Colorado. county is historical wild turkey range. This Birds were introduced into this county in the Carrizo Creek area in 1951 and 1952. The turkey range is characterized by deep canyons. the main canyons and side canyons The turkeys inhabit both 0 Precipitation varies from 13 to 17 inches. The principal source of water in this area is from springs and streams. Normally there is an abundance of water. The vegetation is largely pinon-pine-juniper associations within the canyon areas. Cottonwoods are found along the canyon bottoms and a few ponderosa pine are found in some areaso Wild plum, chokecherry, skunkbush, cholla cactus, and scrub oak are common shrubs. Ground cover is principally grasses including grama, wheatgrass, sand drop-seed grasses and weeds. �-78Bent County.-- Bent County contains a few flocks of turkeys in the canyons along the lower Purgatoire River. These flocks have reportedly drifted into the county from Otero County. Precipitation is classified in the 10 to 15 inch belt. springs and streams for the most part. Free water is found in The vegetation within the areas the turkeys inhabit is largely river bottom types with a few ponderosa pine, pinon pine, and junipers. Boulder County.-- There have been only two sight records of wild turkeys reported in this county. These covered a total area of only 11 square miles. This should not be considered as established turkey range due to the activity of large human populations. Chaffee County Chaffee County is historical wild turkey range. The Salida area received one of the earliest transplants in 1936 or 1937. These birds never developed to any extent. In releases starting in 1946, there has been some development. This, however, has been rather erratic. The turkey range lies in a portion of the lower valleys and park-like areas within the mountainous regions. 0 -- The average precipitation within the turkey range varies from 15 to 17 inches. The Arkansas River flows through the area and there is an abundance of water in the form of springs, streams, ponds, and lakes. Within the wild turkey ranges there is a good interspersion of mountain brushlands and forested areas. Gooseberries, currants and greenleaf manzanita are common. Grasses, including dropseed, bluestems, wheatgrass, needlegrass, fescue, brome, and grama, and weeds form the principal ground cover. Clear Creek and Gilpin Counties.-- These two counties are treated together because they are closely associated and the turkeys of these counties developed from the same releases. Birds were introduced into the Mount Evans Management Area in the fall of 1956. These birds have developed rapidly and have scattered in small bunches over a wide area. This is historical wild turkey range. Precipitation in this county is classified from 15 to 50 inches per year with the occupied turkey range receiving less than 30 inches. The area is tranversed by many streams running into the South Platte River. Much of the water is supplied from winter snow. Food producing shrubs and plants are greenleaf manzanita and false raspberries. The ground cover consists of a variety of grasses and weeds. �-79costilla County.-- Turkey range in costilla County is found mostly along the east side of the County within the area known as the Trinchera Grant. This covers the mountain area along the Sangre deCristo Range. While this area is not open to general hunting, it is historical turkey range of good quality. There is evidence of interchange between turkeys on the east side of the Sangre de Cristo Range in Las Animas and Huerfano Counties) and the turkeys in Costilla County. Precipitation within the turkey range varies from 8 to 15 inches. Water is supplied primarily from small streams originating in the high mountains. Most of the food shrubs necessary for good turkey development are found in the pinon pine-juniper, ponderosa pine-oak-Douglas fir, aspen and spruce fir associations. Ground cover consistsof native grasses, greenleaf manzanita, and weeds. Custer County.-·- Custer County has had no releases of wild turkeys but populations have developed from stocking areas in FremontJ Huerfano, and Pueblo Counties. This county is historical range, however. This county contains rough, broken, rocky canyons in the lower areas and high mountainous regions along the central portion. There are many south facing slopes, offering protection to the birds in stormy periods. Elevations average from 5)500 to 8,500 feet within occupied turkey ranges. Precipitation within turkey ranges aver-ages 15 to 30 inches per year. is found in streams, springs, pondsJ and small lakes. Free water The principal vegetative types within the turkey ranges aTe pinon pine-juniper, ponderosa pine-oak, Douglas fir, aspenJ and spruce-fir. Mountain brushlands are found within the lower ranges furnishing food and cover. Ground cover consists of grass species and weeds. Delta County.-- Delta County, lying in the west central section of Colorado, is divided into two main highland areas with a flat region between. Turkey range is found only within the highland areas. These consist of the foothill portion of Grand Mesa and a small section of the Uncompahgre Plateau. Elevations in the county range from 5,500 feet to 8,500 feet. The higher portions consist of rough, rocky, timbered canyons. A.number of small streams and lakes in the area provide water for turkeys. A wide variety of food species including scrub oak make it ideal turkey range. Ground cover consists of a variety of grasses, sedges and weeds. �-80Dolores County,,-- Dolores County is predominantly mountainous terrain. There are many small mesas an? va.LLys under cultivation. The principal occupation within the county is livestock raising. There has been an active lumbering indUstry from early settlement times to the present. This county is one of the principal historical ranges. The county contains many deep canyons stemming from ~he Glade", a large rolling plateau region. M9.in canyons include Glade Creek, Narraguinep Creek, Cabin Canyon" Ferris Canyon, and Salters Canyons. The turkey range varies from 6,000 to 8,500 feet. Precipitation ranges from 10 to 50 inches within the countyo lie mostly in the 15 to 30 inch belt. The turkey ranges Within the vegetative types utilized by turkeys there is a good interspersion of shrubs such as oakbrush, serviceberry" thornapple, rose, and snowberry. Ground cover consists of a variety of grasses, sedges and weeds. Douglas County.-- This county, lying directly south of Denver, includes areas of historical wild turkey range. Some wild turkeys were introduced into Perry Park around 1930 according to Robert J. Niedrach of the Denver Museum of Natural History. These never became established. Restocking was carried out in 1954. Precipitation within the turkey range varies from 15 to 18 inches per year. The elevation varies from 5,800 to 6,800 feet. There are scattered pines and clumps of scrub oak within the area similar to other mounbafnous ranges. Ground cover consists of grama gras ses, bluestem grasses, sand reedgrass, mountain muhly and weeds. Eagle County.-- The two main sections within this county consists of the Eag;Le River Valley and the Basalt-Roaring Fork area which joins Garfield County. Two releases of wild turkeys have been madejone within the Basalt Game Management Area, and the other at Crystal Springs east of Carbondale. These transplants have made considerable progress, filling portions of the Basalt Management Area, Missouri Heights, Cottonwood Creek, and the Crystal Springs areas. Precipitation varies from 10 to 16 inches within the lower areas with higher amounts occurring in the higher mountains. Large patches of mixed mountain brush are found over much of the lower turkey ranges. These shrubs contain important food species and afford cover for the turkeys. Ground cover consists of a variety of grass species, sedges, and weeds. �-81- Fremont County.-- The turkey range lies within the foothill, valley, and mountain park areas as with much of the mountainous areas. The county is historical wild turkey range. The turkeys occur in areas with altitudes from approximately 6000 to 8500 feet. Precipitation varies from about 9 to 50 inches within the county. turkey range varies from 15 to 30 inches for the most part. The wild GooseberriesJ currants, and greenleaf manzanita are common in the turkey ranges. Ground cover consists of grass species and weeds. Garfield County.-- Wild turkey populations in Garfield County are among the newer developments in non-historical range. Releases of turkeys in this area have shown excellent development. The first release in this county was made in 1952. Additional releases have been made through 19610 Precipitation ranges from about 10 inches in the western portion of the county to 15 to 30 inches in the eastern portion. Many of the lower turkey ranges are covered with mixed mountain brushJ.ands. This contains an abundance of the food shrubs that are important within wild turkey wintering range. Ground cover contains bluegrasses, wheatgrasses, mountain muhly grass,bromegrasses, elk sedge, and weeds. Hinsdale County •. -- This county is situated north of Archuleta County and lies along the Continental Divide. It is generally too high for turkeys during the winter period but they range into the area for summer range. Thi s summer range lies in the headwaters area of the Piedra River for the most part. The county is relatively unimportant in the overall wild turkey range. Elevations in the county range from 8000 to above 14000 feet. !Iuerfano County.-- The major wild turkey range lies along the western port.ion of the county on the east side of the Sangre de Cristo Range. This is historical wild turkey range. The elevation of the turkey range varies from 6000 to 9000 feet. Precipitation averages 20 to 30 inches within the turkey range. turkeys depend on springs, streams, and ponds for water. The wild A. wide variety of food producing shrubs are found within the typical vegetative zones. Ground cover includes greenleaf manzanita, grass species,and weeds. �--82- Jefferson C01mty. -- Jef'ferson County lies within historical wild turkey range. The suburbs of Denver have developed over much of the northern portion of the county and the Denver Mountain Parks much of the remaining portion. In spite of this, there have been reports of wild turkeys in the county. These have not, however, been confirmed. La Plata County.-- This county is situated in the heart of the mountains of western Colorado. Wild turkeys in La Plata County have survived the inroads of settlement, lumbering, and poaching activities over the years .• A ranch family by the name of Womer has protected a few surviving flocks over a period of more than 25 years. These flocks, occurring along the Pine River had remained nearly static until restocking activities were initiated in 19400 Since that time, there has been an upswing in numbers and the birds have spread to the east, north, and west. Range occupied by wild turkeys varies from 67000 to 8.,500 feet in elevation .• Precipitation ranges from 10 inches in the more arid southern portions to 50 inches in the high mountains. Within wild turkey range, the average varies from 15 to 30 inches. Free water is found in streams, springs, ponds, and lakes .. There is an abundance of south-facing slopes that are invaluable to wild turkey winter range.. Mixed mountain brushlands are interspersed throughout timbered areas producing valuable foods. Persistent - type shrubs such as skunkberry, rose, tharnapple," and snowberry are plentiful. A wide variety of grasses, sedges, and weeds form the ground cover. Larimer Cpu,nty.-- There are historical records indicating wild turkeys were found on Buckhorn Creek in 1861. Scrub oak which is normally considered essential to wild turkey development is not found in this area. A transplant was made in 1957 on Buckhorn Creek. development has occurred. Since this time, considerable Las Animas County.-- This county contains the largest amount of occupied wild turkey range in the state. The range consists chiefly of the Spanish Peaks and Sangre de Cristo mountain ranges, Raton and Mesa de Maya mesa ranges, and the Purgat.odre River canyon ranges. These areas have all played important roles in the development ·of wild turkey popUlations within the county. Precipitation averages from 11 to 15 inches in the eastern portion to 30 inches at higher elevations. Free water is found in streams, springs and ponds. �-83Pinon pine-juniper plant associations are found within the eastern canyon and mesa wild turkey ranges. Here, cottonwoods, scattered ponderosa pine, scrub oak, pinon pine, and junipers form the main overstory. There are also various food producing shrubs such as skunkbush, cholla cactus, wild plum, and chokecherry. Blue grama is the principal grass. Within the mountain ranges, vegetation consists of pinon pine-juniper and ponderosa pine-oak-Douglas fir associations at lower elevations and aspen and spruce~fir associations at higher elevations. A. good interspersion of mixed mountain brushlands are found in the transition belts. Ground cover consists of a variety of grass species and weeds. Wild turkey range in the mountains varies from 5,500 to 9,500 feet in elevation. Mesa County.-- This county contains no historical wild turkey range but areas have responded well to transplants. Wild turkey transplants have been made in the Uncompahgre Plateau area and the Grand Mesa area. Elevations within the wild turkey ranges average from 6,000 to 9,000 feet. Within the wild turkey ranges, t he precipitation varies from 15 to 30 inches per year, with considerably more at the top of the mesa. Free water is found in streams, springs, ponds, and lakes. Vegetative cover types produce a large amount of foods for wild turkeys. Within the lower range, there is a heavy growth of mixed mountain brushlands containing oak;>pinon pine, rose, thornapple, serviceberry, skunkbush, and snowberry. Groillld cover includes grasses, se~s, and weeds. Mineral County.-- Mineral County contains only a limited amount of summer range. The wild turkey range lies in the mountainous regions along the southeastern corner of the county. Elevations vary from 8,000 feet to above timberline. Precipitation ranges from 30 to 50 inches per year primarily in the form of snow. Vegetation is characteristic of the higher mountain ranges. Montezuma County.-~ Turkey range in Montezuma County is among some of the best historical range in the state. For this reason, it was one of the first counties to receive releases of live-trapped wild t.ur keys , Terrain of the county is rough and broken with a number of canyons draining into the Dolores River. These include the canyons of Beaver Creek, Big and Little Bean Greeks, House Creek, La Plata River, and the Mancos River. These all have south facing slopes and are good turkey ranges. The south end of "The GladelJ originates in the north portion of the county. �-84Elevations within occupied range varies from 6,000 to 8,500 feet. Precipitat.ion within the wild turkey ranges averages 15 to 30 inches per year. In the highermountains,precipitation approaches 50 inches per year. Free water is found in streams, springs, and ponds. Within the lower vegetative types, there is a good interspersion of mixed mountain brushlands. Ground cover consists of elk sedge, various grass species, and weeds. Montrose County.-- Montrose County is another of the non-historical wild turkey ranges. The county is mountainous, enclosing a large portion of the Uncompahgre Plateau. Examination of this area indicated there was potent.ial for wild turkey development. Foods were pl:entiful, roosting sites were scatteredthrougnout the area, and other features were favorable. The first release of live-trapped wild turkeys was made at Clay Creek Hill in November, 1946. Other releases followed including 28 in the Coyote Springs area and development has been outstanding. Elevations within occupied range vary from 6,000 to 9,000 feet .• Precipitation ranges within the 15 to 30 inch zone within most of the occupied range. Within the lower vegetative associations there is a good interspersion of mixed mountain brushlands and forested areas. Ground cover consists of elk sedge, a variety of grasses, and weeds. Ouray County.-- Much of this county is not considered as wd.ld turkey range. The portion within the Uncompahgre Plateau west of Highway 550, while not historical range, has shown progress in development through releases of live-trapped birds. Elevations within the occupied range varies from 6,000 to 8,000 feet. Precipitation within the turkey range averages from 15 to 25 inches per year. Free water is abundant and well distributed. Vegetation is typical of the mountain ranges. Pitkin County.-- Habitat evaluations in this county indicate that it is too high in elevation and winters are too severe for suitable year-round turkey range. Most of the turkeys within this county have been obse~ed during the sununerperiod.. They winter in Garfield and Eagle Counties. Pueblo County.-- Pueblo County contains areas of historical range. The wild turkeys are thought to have disappeared around 1900. Some of the earliest releases of live-trapped birds were made in western Pueblo ocounty. Four releases were made in this area in 1943 and 1944 and development has been rapid. There has been movement from Pueblo County into Custer County. �-85Precipitation within the wild turkey ranges average 15 to 17 inches per year. Free water is found in streamsJ springs, and ponds. There is a good interspersion of scrub oak and other shrub species over many of the lower ranges. Ground cover consists of a wide variety of'grass speciesJ greenleaf manzanita~ and weeds. Rio Blanco County.-- Rio Blanco County contains a limited amolllltof "borderline" wild turkey range. A release of live-trapped birds was made at the Litt.le Hills Experiment Station in 1956 and some development has occurred along the White River east and north of this release. Reports of flocks have been received on the Strawberry Road leading to Maybell and on the South F10rk of the White River •. It is believed that turkeys have moved into the White River area from plants on West Elk Creek and Rifle Creek. There has been very little development in the vicinity of the Little Hills Experiment Station. Routt Countyo-- Routt County is another COlllltywhich has only a small amollllt of ''borderline wild turkey range. The only possible turkey range occurs along the Colorado River rims and in the McCoy district. Winter snows are believed to be one of the deterring factors. II Wild turkeys were released in the Derby Mesa area in 1956 on the border between Eagle and Garfield cOllllties. These -turkeys have shown considerable development. The first movement into RouttCollllty was into the Cedar Creek-Sunnyside Creek area. Lat.er, in 1959, there was a report of a flock at the foot of King Mountain These turkeys winter in the Sunnyside Creek area, and flocks continue to improve in numbers. Even so~ this county cannot be considered as good quality turkey range and existing flocks will require some care to insure their welfare during the winter periods. Prepared by: Date: Approved by: ~Ma~r~t_i_n~L~o~B~u~r~g~e~t--~~ Senior Game Biologist April, 1963 ------------~~--~~~---------------- Wayne W. Sandfort Game ManagerJ Research Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator 0 ��April, 1963 -87- JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO ------------~---------------- Project NOr W~-~3~9~-~R~-_1_0 ~ Work Plan No. ~1 ~ J~o~b~N~o~. ~9~ ------------Outlining Procedures for the Selection of Wild Turkey Release Sites. Title of Job: Period Covered: __il~d W __T_ur~k_e~y~I~n_v_e_s_t_i~g~a_t_i~o_n_s _ July 1, 1961 to June 30, 1962. ABSTRACT Procedures for the selection and evaluation of wild turkey release sites are discussed including land ownership, size of area, foods, water, exposure, roosting sites, nesting cover, escape cover, and predators. A rating sheet to assist field personnel in evaluating possible wild turkey development areas and release sites was prepared. Recommendations: The information gathered under this job should prove -a valuable aid to Wildlife Conservation Officers and other Departmental field personnel in the selection and evaluation of areas proposed as wild turkey range. With the completion of this work, this job should be discontinued until such time that more specific information is required. ��-89OUTLINING PROCEDURES FOR THE SELECTION OF WILD TURKEY RELEASE SITES Martin L. Burget It has been found that Merriam s turkeys develop best in rather wild, undisturbed areas in Colorado. I Areas in which they have shown the best increases are the ponderosa pine-oak and pinon pine-juniper associations which are primarily wintering ranges but may be utilized year-round. Within these lower ranges, large or small patches of mixed mountain brush occur. Where higher elevations are found, the birds may range into the aspen and spruce-fir belts during the summer period. These associations provide both food and cover for the species. Openings or clearings of from ten to fifty per cent of the total area interspersed within wooded or forested areas are highly desirable within wild turkey range. These are utilized mainly for feeding areas. Small cultivated fields surrounded by suitable cover provide waste grain and a variety of insects. Elevations of wild turkey ranges vary from 5,000 feet in southeastern Colorado to around 8,000 feet on the Uncompahgre Plateau in western Colorado. They may, however range higher during the summer period. The best ranges are found within the 15 to 30 inch precipitation belts. The largest amount of moisture within wild turkey range in Colorado comes in the form of snow. Other specific qualities of wild turkey habitat are discussed below: Land ownership Turkeys should be released on Forest Service, Bureau of Land Management '"or State owned lands if at all possible. The use of privately-owned lands present many problems. If private land is to be used, the W. C. O. should have a thorough understanding as to the landowner I s willingness to have the birds released on his property. Also, there should be full agreement to open the area to hunting when the birds have increased sufficiently to have an open season. Extent or size of area A transplant site should contain an area large enough to allow for good development of turkeys. Foods MastAcorns, pine nuts (both pinon and ponderosa pine), spruce and fir seeds. Fruits and berriesThornapples, rose fruit, skunkberry fruit, serviceberries, snowberries, kinnikinnick fruit, and cactus fruit. Grasses and sedgesA. wide variety of grass and sedge leaves and seed heads including bromegrasses, gramagrasses, bluegrasses, and sedges. Animal foodsGrasshoppers and a wide variety of other insects. �-90Water Water in the form of streams, springs, ponds, or lakes should be well distributed over the area. In the winter, moisture required for digestive purposes may be obtained from snow or open water. Exposure There should be south-facing slopes ina release area. These open up quickly following snows making it possible for the birds to teed. Roosting sites Several types of roosts are utilized by wild turkeys. Over-mature and mature ponderosa pines in sites protected from prevailing winds are preferred. These are chosen for more or less permanent roosts. Even dead ponderosa pines are preferred to many other trees. Broad-leaf cottonwoods have limbs spread rather flat and are used for roosts particularly in the eastern canyon ranges~ Large spruce and Douglas firs are used occasionally but the upper limbs normally grow too thickly to make good roosts. Tall junipers in groups are used occasionally. Nesting cover Preferred nesting cover is in brush clumps or in areas of slash left .from logging operations. The hens prefer to have an opening facing downhill to provide easy escape when disturbed. In eight nests observed, five were in thick brush - all with an opening facing downhill. Three of these were in dense brush near the base of trees and two were in a straight oak brush type. Three nests were under the tops of pines left from logging operations. If the eggs are near hatching time" the hen may rely upon her protective coloration to avoid detection. Escape cover Suitable escape cover is normally present if the other range requirements are found in the area. This may consist of 1) dense stands of timber or brushlands interspersed with clearings, or 2) rugged terrain. A combination of both may be found in some areas. Predators The importance of predators in limiting wild turkey development has not been fully explored. For best results, however the area should not contain an abnormally heavy population of predators. Predators that may hinder development of wild turkey populations when occurring in excessive numbers include bobcats, coyotes, foxes" skunks, eagles, hawks, and owls. Prepared by; Martin Burget Approved by: Wayne Sandfort ------~~~--~--~~~--~~----~~~~--~--~------~ Senior Game Biologist Game Manager" Research L. Date ------------::..:::....;::..;::.~--=~..:::...-------April, 1963 W. Ferd C;.Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �~91'" WILD TURKEY RANGE RATING SHEET Name of area~ ~ Legal Description: Section Land Status: Nat. Forest Owner ~Drainage Township BLM County Range Private _ P.M. ------------------------------------Distance and direction from nearest town.~__----~------------------------------------ _ State --------~Locality ---------- ----------,----~--- Elevation ft. (Approx.) Extent or size of area for development Describebriefly ---------------------------~ Sq.mi. (Approx.) Annual precipitation, Inches (Approx.) Human habitation factor: Is area relatively undisturbed with little human population or traffic? Yes Additional information. _ No. _ Major vegetative type(s): River bottom Meadow Mountain shrub Aspen Pinon-juniper Spruce-fir _ Ponderosa pine-oakDouglas fir Cultivated _ Other (name) Composition of Cover: Approx. per cent of area wooded or forested, ~Approxo per cent openings Food species: Mark as C - common; P-present; A-absent Oak pinon pine -ponderosa pine hawthorne rose ------- kinnikinnick ------skunkbush serviceberry snowberry Other (name)~------------ __---_---- __-------------. grasses (name ----------------------- _ ----------------------------_ weeds (name) _ cultivated grains (name) --------------------------------------------------.----------- Amount of food available at time of inspection: Ample Fair Poor ------ Ponds Water sources: Streams Springs Lakes Other Slope or aspect of terrain: Are south facing(or slopes which open-up quickly following snows) found? Yes No ---------,-Roosting sites: Describe potential areas ----------------- -------------------------------------------------- Nesting cover: Suitable Unsuitable Escape cover: Suitable Unsuitable'------Predators: Mark as A abundant: R -rare; ------M -missing Coyotes Bobcats - Foxes Skunks Eagles, Hawks ----~ ~---Owls Others (name) ---------- ----------------------------------------------------- Over-all evaluation of area: Inspection by: Date: Excellent Good ---~ Title: ~--~ Fair --------~Poor--------------~ ---------------------- ��April, 1963 -93JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of C~O~LO~RAD~O~ Project No. ~W~-~3~9~-~R~-~1~0~ ~ Work Plan. ~l~--~----~~~~J~O~b~N~o~.--~~~l~O~~~---------Relationships of the environment to wild turkey productivity and distribution. Title of Job: Period Covered: _ W~l=·1=d~T~u~r~k~e~y~In~v~e~s~t~i~g~a~t~i~on _ July 1, 1961 to June 30, 1962. ABSTRACT The study area selected for this investigation covers 887 square miles of wild turkey range on the Uncompahgre Plateau of western Colorado in portions of Mesa and Montrose Counties. The area varies in elevation from less than 6,000 feet to over 9,500 feet. The vegetative type composition by per cent was determined for ten selected foursquare-mile areas. Several methods of determining turkey food production were tried, but none of these seemed practical to gain the desired information. Plants were collected from throughout the study area as they came into bloom. The plants were mounted on cardboard and labelled after being dried in a plant press. Unknown species were sent to the Botany Department at Colorado State University for positive identification. Turkey distribution during various seasons of the study period was determined by personal field observations, reports of turkeys by local ranchers, forest rangers, and Game and Fish Department personnel, and by occurrence of recent turkey sign such as tracks, droppings, feathers, etc •• Distribution of turkeys during the two fall hunting seasons was determined by the location of kills made by hunters. A total of fifteen turkeys were trapped, tagged, and released at two sites during the winter months. None of these birds have been observed since their release. Climatological data for the past year were collected from three primary and four secondary weather stations, and monthly weather summaries were prepared. These weather stations were located in typical turkey wintering and summering areas. Objectives: (1) to determine and evaluate the characteristics of seasonal ranges of the wild turkey, emphasi~ing the breeding, nesting, brood rearing, and wintering ranges in terms of primary foods, vegetative types, elevation, topography, exposure, and weather factors. (2) To determine productivity and use as related to primary cover types, primary foods, available water, elevation, topography, exposure, and weather. ��-95RELATIONSH1PS OF THE ENVIRONMENT TO WILD TURKEY PRODUCTIVITY AND DISTRIBUTION Roger L. Evans Study Area The Uncompahgre Plateau located in portions of Delta, Mesa, Montrose, Ouray~ and San Miguel Counties of western Colorado~ was chosen as the general area to carry out this study. A representative portion of this larger area, including 887 square miles of known turkey range~ was selected as an intensive study area. This area is located in Montrose and Mesa Counties on the north end of the Uncompahgre Pl.ateau. The area was established to include all the major vegetative types used by turkeys during the year in this part of the state, and with regard to accessibili ty and the number of turkeys thought to be present. j The area selected for intensive study is enclosed by U. S. Highway 50 and State Highways 141 and 90. The northern 'boundary is formed by C.olorado 141 between Whitewater and Gateway, the western boundary by Colorado 141 between Gateway and Nucla, the southern b.oundary by Colorado 90 between Nucla and Montrose, and the eastern boundary by U. S. 50 between Montrose and Whitewater The area includes turkey winter range on both the northeasterly and southwesterly sides of the divide and summer range at the higher elevatIons. The main access roads into this area are the road going from Delta across the divide in a southwesterly direction to Nucla and the road going along the divide bisecting the study area in a general north-south direction. -e- The major vegetat.ive types as you go from the lower to the higher elevations include pinon-juniper, cakbr-ush , ponder-osa pine, aspen, and spruce-fir. Small patches of sagebrush, mountain browse, and dry mountain meadow are scattered through the area. The ponderosa-pine type is scattered throughout the study area from 7,000 feet t.o 9,000 feet with no definite altitudinal distribution" The higher -eLevat.Lons are covered by alternating pure stiands of aspen and sprucefir with ponderosa pine and Douglas fir interspersed singly or in small groups t.hr-oughout <> The boundary of the turkey range within the study area was determined by personal observations of turkeys, occurrence of recent tracks:; droppings, or other turkey sign, and reports of turkeys or recent sign by Game and Fish Department personnel. A line was drawn around all known turkey range within the study area on a l.:125~000 scale topographic map. The area within the boundary line for each county was determined by use of a planimeter. It was found that the turkey range within the study area amounts to 887 square miles of which 489 square miles are in Montrose County and the remaining 398 square miles are in Mesa County. Turkey range within the Uncompahgre National Forest boundary amounts to 611 square miles or 68.9 per cent of the total. On a county basis, 318 square miles (65.0 per cent) of the turkey range in Montrose County and 293 square miles (74.6 per cent)in Mesa County are on Forest Service land. The remainder of the turkey range is on BLM or privately-owned land adjoining the forest. The area of the turkey range in each county by 1000-foot elevation intervals was also determined, and the results are shown in Table 1. �-96- Table 10 County Montrose Mesa Study Area --Turkey Range in Square Miles for Counties by 1,000-Foot Elevation Intervals Turkey Range in Square Miles 5000-6000' 6000-70001 7000-8000 ' 8000-9000' 9000-10,0001 Total 29 92 162 138 68 489 7 51 119 186 35 398 36 143 281 324 103 887 Original plans included mapping of the entire study area by primary and :principal secondary vegetative types. However, this was not possible as there are no vegetative-type maps available for areas outside the IOrestboundary. Also, the Forest Service type maps available were printed in 1937,. and are inaccurate in many areas due to subse:guent changes in the vegetation. New timber-type maps of individual townships, compiled and :printed since 1960., are available for most of the Forest Service land within the study area. By the use of these maps, it was decided to select 10 areas on which to determine the vegetative type composition by use of the planimeter. These areas are in good turkey habitat, and each of them contains four square miles of range. Six of these areas are in typical summer range, while the other four are in wintering areas. Although the type composition on these selected areas has no direct relationship,to the study area as a "Whole, it should give an indication of the vegetative-type composition of good turkey range in the study area .• Table 2 summarizes the type composition by percentages for the 10 selected areas. These areas were named after prominent geological features, and are located on Figure 3. The area names corresponding to the numbers in Table 2 are as follows: Area No .• 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Area Name Pine Ridge Moore Mesa Sawmill Mesa Love Mesa Massey Camp Gill Creek Hill Ranch 25 Mesa Pickett Corral Pine Mountain Type of Range Summer Summer Summer Summer Summer Summer Winter Winter Winter Winter �Figure 1. Figure 2. Typical turkey winter range on the east side of the study area. Vegetation inclues: oakbrush, mO'IDtain browse, ponderosa pine, and pinon-juniper in the background. Photic by Wayne Sandfort. Prime turkey summer range in Tabeguache Basino M'3.jorvegetative types include oakbrush, mouut9.in browse, ponderosa pine, aspen, and spruce-fir along the divide. Photo by Wayne Sandfort. �-• . Turkey range boundary Primary weather station Secondary weather. station X V~Fetative:typ~. composition area ~',.'~" . "eo,_ . .: j " . ~ '. LFJ}END ........ ;; •• ~,.:,:. SCALE. OF MILES : .0' , Fig. 3- til ~~:::3;;;~l==~iiiiiiiI - j stations and vegetative type composition ar-e as , -'~- ~:~;;;;c~.o ::..: "UflltMT ~ C""f'f'~ 13 LEGEND I Glade Park M .. '- ...•• E, S· -- Turkey range boundary X F Field observation X R Reported observation XS Recent turkey S,ig!l SCALE" Fig. 4- Turkey distribution OF MilES for summer season (July-Sept. 19,61) �-97Table 2.-- Vegetation Type Composition by Per Cent for Ten Selected Areas. Type ComJ?osition by Percent Type and Size ClassY' 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ·9 10 All Areas Aspen: 6 Sampling 18 Pole Small Sawtimber Douglas Fir: Small Sawtimber Pinon-Juniper Ponderosa Pine: Pole 3 Small Sawtimber 29 large Sawtimber Spruce-Fir: Pole Small Sawtimber OthersY ~=----;----. Chaparral 11 44 4 2 34 46 42 4 1 3 2 1 1 1 72 4 88 42 1 11 1 2006 2 44 1 27 14 18 41 1 3 56 18 .2 2 2 8 10 25 Non-Forest!±! 1 2 50 24 82 1 3 2 10 57 1t Size classes are as follows: samplingJ 0" to .9" d.boh.; pole~ 5.0 to 10.9'" dob.h.; small sawtimber, 11.0" to 20.9 d.b.h.; and large sawtimber, 21.0" and over d bsh , s This includes miscellaneous non-commercial tree species. Chaparral includes oakbrush and mountain browse. Non -forest is primarily sagebrush and dry mountain meadow. Food Production Several systems of collect.inginformation on turkey food production were considered, but none of these seemed practical to gain the desired informati on. The original job description called for the establishment of randomly-selected, one-mile-long transects. These transects were to be oriented in an east,-west cardinal direction from 500-foot or l,OOO-foot elevation points along a surveyed guide meridian line. The sample transects would have numbered approximately 14 (using 500-footcontour intervals) or 7(using l,OOO-foot contour intervals). Within this selected sampling pattern of transects, randomly-selected, circular plots were to be established, numbering at least three per transect. Then, within each plot, potential food producing species were to be quantitatively and qualitatively scored according to exposure, soil type, slope and overstory. The transect method of collecting food production data was discarded for several reasons after field trips through the study area. These reasons included: 1) The extremely-rough terrain and thick vegetation would make the establishment and checking of these transects very difficult, 2) the large number of'plots that would be necessary to make this method statistically reliable on this large area would make it impractical from the standpoint of time and effort involved, and 3) any attempt to relate the food production determined. in this manner to actual turkey use would be nearly impossible. �A second method that was attempted to determine food production was the establishment of plant phenology plots. The plots were established in the vicinity of the primary and secondary weather stations, and are circular with a lOO-foot diameter. The plots are marked in the center with a steel post on four sides with iron stakes. The various plant species within the plots were identified and checked weekly. The phenological stage of development for these plants was recorded by use of a rating system devised by Dean Medin and Charles Loveless for the Poudre River deer study being conducted by the Colorado Game and Fish Department. After a few weeks of collecting data on plant phenology, it became apparent that the information gained was of little value in determining food production. Many of the grass .and forb species differ greatly phenologically within an individual plot due to variations in exposure, overstory, soil type, and other ecological factors of the micro-habitat. Another failing of the plant phenology method is the fact that it doesn't rate the quality or abundance of food production by various species. The collection of plantphenology data is of value for detailed study on a limited area , but it is unsuited for a more general study on a large, diversified area such as the one with which we are dealing. Following the discovery of inadequacies in the previously-described methods, it was decided that an original method of determining food production would have to be devised to fit this particular study. Although a new method has not yet been developed to the point of practical field use, a general idea of what this method should include will be discussed. The use of lOO-foot circular plots established at known elevations should be adaptable to this study. These plots would be established in the vicinity of the weather stations on either side of the divide and at regular intervals along Divide Road. The plots would be checked and rated monthly to determine the food production at the various elevations. The vegetation would be divided into three categories: shrubs, forbs, and grasses. The shrub species would be rated individually, but the forbs and grasses would each be combined under a single heading" The rating system would probably vary somewhat for the different categories. The relative abundance of the species in the plot and its potential value as turkey food would be included in the rating system. Under this type of a system, food production at a certain elevation and time of year could be relat.ed to turkey use in the surrounding area. Plants were collected from various locations within the study areao The data collected, elevation, exposure, soil type, vegetative type,and general location were noted for each species collected. The plants were mounted and labeled after being completely dried in a plant press. The species that were not known were sent to the B.otany Department at Colorado state University for positive identification. Due to the late date on which the collection was started, few of the annuals were collected. �-99Following is a list of the plants collected and identified within the study area. An asterisk indicates the species to be of valu:e as a turkey food. Trees and Shrubs: Scientific Name Common Name Amelanchier alnifolia Arctostaphylos patula Arctostaphylos urva-ursi Artemisia tridentata Atriplex canescens Berberis fendleri Cercocarpus montanus Chrysothamnus nauseosus Clematis ligusticifolia Crataegus sp. Juniperus scopulorum Juniperus utahensis Peraphyllum ramosissimum Pinus edulis Populus tremuloides Prunus virginiana Purshia tridentata Quercus gambelli Rhus trilobata Rosa woodsi Rubus parviflorus Symphoricarpos sp. Serviceberry* Manzanita* Be arberry* Big sagebrush Four -wingsal tbrush Fendler s barberry Mountain mahogany Rabbitbrush Virginsbower Hawthorn* Red cedar Utah juniper Sguawapple* Pinon pine* Aspen Chokecherry* Antelope bitterbrush Oakbrush* Skunkbush* Wild rose* Western thimbleberry* Snowberry* I Forbs: Achillea lanulosa Balsamorhiza sagittata Castilleja linariaefoli Calochortus gunnisonia Erodium ci,cutarium Epolobium paniculatum Erigeron speciosus Grindelia sguarrosa Helenium hoopesi Lupinus greenei Monarda fistulosa Osmorhiza obtusa Potent ilIa pulcherrima Solidago missouriensis Western yarrow* Arrowleaf balsamroot* Painted cup Mariposa lily Heronbill* Willow weed* Fleabane Gumweed Sneezeweed Lupine* Horsemint Sweetcicely* Cinguefoil* Goldenrod �-100Grasses: Scientific Name Common Name Agropyron cristatum Agropyron trachycaulum Agrostis scabra Blepharoneuron tricholepis Bouteloua gracilis Bromus anomalus Bromus polyantus Bromus tectorum Carex egglestoni Carex festivella Carex kelloggi Danthonia intermedia Deschampsia caespitosa Elymus glaucus Hordeum jubatum Juncus confusus Koeleria cristata Melica spectabilis Oryzopsis hymenoides Ph.l.eumalpinum Poa pratensis Sitanion hystrix Stipa columbiana Stipa comata Crested wheatgrass* Slender wheatgrass* Bentgrass* Pine dropseed* Blue grama* Mountain bromegrass* Bromegrass* Cheatgrass* Sedge* Sedge* Sedge* Oatgrass* Tufted hairgrass* Wildr~ Foxtail bar ley* Rush* Junegrass* Melic grass* Indian ricegrass* Alpine timothy* Kentucky bluegrass* Squirreltail* Needle and threadgrass* Needle·and threadgrass* Turkey Distribution and Seasonal Movements Turkey distribution during various seasons of the study period was determined by personal field observations, reports of turkeys by local ranchers, forest rangers, and Game and Fish Department personnel, and by Occurrence of recent turkey sign such as tracks, droppings, feathers, etc.. Distribution of turkeys during the two fall hunting seasons was determined primarily by the location of kills made by successful hunters contacted at the check stations. The follow.:.. ing figures show turkey distribution for the various periods: Figure 4 Figure 5 Figure 6 Figure 7 Figure 8 Summer season (July - September 1961) First~turkey hunting season (October 7-15, 1961) Second turkey hunting season (November 18-26, 1961) Winter season (December 1961 - March 1962) Nesting and brood rearing season (April - June 1962) �. ;~;;;;.';;~40 ""'t11iT ~, ~..., C'rP."/r: Glad. Pa,k .. 13 M E S: - Turkey range boundary X K Turkey ldlled XF Field observation XR Reported observation_, SCALt OF MILES Fig. 5- T (Oct. F ------ r .r:': .•..~.'\ .~' ~'.;::::~~40 13 I Glade Pork M E I LEGEND IIIUII' Cr~(>Ic~ S - 1 j 1 Turkey range boundary Turkey k:iJ.led Reported observation I !( XI< XR XS Recent turkey sign SCALE OF I MILES I 2~ '. b30E~~~===l;~ -(f"~' ~ ~ 'I 12 1-lSV. Fig. 6- Turkey distribution for 1961) �r 3~O eere IUfl0N.L •••'~ LEGEND "",(NT C",.(>(>~ 13 Glode Park . M --- Turkey range boundary Field observations XR Reported observation XS Recent turkey sign XF E S 5CALE OF MILES Fig. 7 - Turkey -distribution for 11inter season 1961-March 1962). ···-...------n a-r--'----"..-.~--~-....•..•.•••...•• ....,,...., •.......•.. _r....,... (0\01l00 "aTIO".t 3.0 -~~--' ""(II' C'''f>f'~ lJ Glade Park M E ~ - Xf XR XS Turkey ranee boundary Field observation . Reported observation Recent sign SCALE Fig. 8 OF MILES and brood season �-101A. detailed mimeagraphed farm was preparedta recard the variaus enviranmental factars in the vicinity of turkey field abservatians by the authar. A. similiar farm was prepared far use by ather Game and Fish Department persannel far reparting field abservatians .ofturkeys within the study area. In additian, camplete nates were kept in a small laase-leaf natebaak an all miscellaneaus infarmatian pertaining ta turkeys .ortheir enviranment. These nates included infarmatian an the .occurrence .ofrecent turkey sign, any unusual ecolagical .orclimatalagical factarsnaticed while in the field, and reparts .ofturkeys seen by peaple traveling thraugh the study area. Only twa field abservatians were made during the 1961 summer seasan. Twa adult toms were seen an Calarada Highway 90 appraximately .onemile west .ofDivide raad an June 30. A. hen with a half -grawn br-ood was observed near Parter's caw camp just .off of Divide Road an September 14. An accurate caunt of the yaung was nat obt.a.Lned , but it is believed that this was the same br ood of ten reparted earlier by Canservatian Officer William Mink. Bath .ofthese observations were made in .openaspen stands at an elevatian of appraximately 9,300 feet. Occurrence .offresh turkey sign and reparts .ofturkeys seen indicated a preference for open stands of aspen fram elevations of 8,500 to 9,500 feet.. Two turkey braodswere .observed in a mature stand .ofpanderasa pine at the lower end .of Lave Mesa. No general movement of turkeys was apparent during this periado Turkey kills during the first weekend of the Octaber hunting season indicated the birds were still in the same general areas as they were during the summer season. The first general mavement .ofturkeys ta their winter range was reparted by Jahn Howlett, Conservation Officer at Nucla. He .observed turkeys moving into the Hill Ranqh wintering area during the week of Octaber 9-15, and by the first week in Navember, he counted 74 birds in twa large flacks in this area. Turkeys were also sighted in Daminguez Canyan and Pickett Carral on Escalante Creek during the first week .ofNavember. Almast all the turkey kills checked during the secand hunting seasan were taken from established wintering areas. Two adult tamp, one·.ofwhich was killed, were seen on Sawmill Mesa at an elevation of abaut 8,200 feet an November 19. The average snaw depth at the time was about six to eight inches in this area. Winteringflacks .ofturkeys or fresh sign were observed in the fallowing areas with the approximate elevations in parenthesis (see Figure 7): 25 Mesa Pickett Carral Escalante Farks Dominguez Canyan Atkinsan Creek San Miguel River Hill Ranch (7,500 feet) (7,200 feet) (6,400 feet) (7,200 feet) (5,400 feet) (6,000 feet) (6,400 feet) �-102The first sign that turkeys were moving up from their wintering area on 25 Mesa was observed on April Ll, 1962. A single set of fresh turkey tracks was seen gOing uphill across a snowdrift blocking the road at just over 8,000 feet. Mr. Wiemer, who Leases the Hill Ranch, reported the turkeys moved out of their wintering area there during the first week in April. Only one field observation was made during the nesting and brood rearing season this spring. A Single adult tom was seen on May 24 just off of Colorado Bighway 90 about one mile below Ute.. Glenn Rogers, game biologist, reported seeing three unclassified adult turkeys along Divide Road north of Columbine Pass. Several areas where broods were seen or reported last summer were checked during May and June. Fresh turkey tracks and droppings were found in most of these areas. This seems to indicate that the turkeys are using the same general areas for nesting this spring as were used in 1961. Turkey Hunter Check Stations I-f;" Five hunter check stations were operated from 8:00 A.M. to 6:30 P. Mo. on October 7 and 8 during the first turkey season..:These stations were located at Taylor I sRanch in Unaweep Canyon, at the North Fork of Cottonwood Creek on Colorado Highway 90, at Coal Creek Northeast of Nucla, in Shavano Valley southwest of Montrose, and on 25 Mesa southwest of Delta. The following Colorado Game tmd Fish Department personnel worked on these stations: Glenn Rogers, Martin Burget, Dwight Owens, Rogers Evans, Ray Boyd, Jesse Williams, Wayne Sandfort, Don Hoffman, and Bill Rutherford .• Information collected on each turkey checked through a station included weight, length of middle toe, length of 2nd primary, depth of bursa on young, and length of spur and beard on adult toms. The location of each kill was plotted as accurately as possible on a map and the total number of hours hunted was recorded for all of the hunters checked. All reports of turkeys or recent sign seen by hunters was also recorded. Table 3 summarizes the check station data collected Tor both seasons. Information collected during the second turkey season was generally the same, but the length of the 4th primary rather than the 2nd was measured. The station locations were somewhat changed due to the seasonal shift in turkey distribution. Check stations were operated on November 18 and 19 at the following locations: the Big Dominguez-Carson Hole area south of Taylor's Ranch, 25 Mesa west of Delta, Pickett Corral on Escalante Creek, the Hill Ranch east of Nucla, and Tabeguache Bas Ln on the Delta-Nucla Road. Game and Fish Department personnel who worked during the second season included Jack Lyon) Ray Boyd, Roger Evans, Glenn Rogers, Wayne Sandfort, Bob Tully, Fran Waugh, and John Howlett .• �-103Table 3. --Summary of Information Gathered at Hunter Check Stations During The October and November 1961 Turkey Seasons. October 7to 15, 1961 First Season Birds Killed Hens Toms Total Hours Total Hunters Total Unclassified Young YoUng Adult Adult Hunted Checked 2 45 18 1 15 9 168 1093 111.0 310 •• 0 Ave. length of middle toe Ave. length of 2nd primary Ave. depth of bursa --,- 99.8 248.4 29 •• 0 94.8 262.6 --- 87.7 245 •• 0 31..0 Total Hours Hunted 410 Ave length of middle toe Aye. depth of bursa 0 --- ----,- November 18 to 26,1961 Second Season Total I\mters Checked 62 ------- Toms A.dult Young 1 3 114.0 --- 106.7 39.7 Birds Killed Hens Adult Young 4 5 ----- 92.4 31.0 Unclassified 0 Total 13 --- --.- ---- --- The following figures are based on data collected during both turkey seasons. The figures in parenthesis are from the second turkey season, November 18 to 26, 1961, so a direct comparison can be made with those from the first season. Total hours hunted/hunter: 6.51 (6.61) Total hunters/bird killed: 3.73 (4•. 77) Total birds killed/hunter: 0.27(0.21) 2710 (2110) Success ratio: 24.29 (31.54) Total hours/bird killed: Sex and age composition of the kill: Adult t0ms -- 2.210 (7.710) Young toms --40.010 (23.010) Adult hens--33.31o (30.810) Young hens--20 .010 (38.510) Unclassified- 4.510 (0.010) Total 100.0% (100.0%) Trapping and Tagging Operations Turkeys were trapped and tagged on February 22 at the Hill Ranch and on March 8 at Pickett Corral. St.andardslat-type traps with canvas drop gates at either end were used for the trapping operations. The ground under each trap was covered with straw, and they were bai ted with ear corn and feed wheat. The trip mechanism was operated manually from a tent blind located nearby. �Table 4.--Summary,ofTurkeys Turkeys Age Adult Adult Adult Young Adult Young Adult Young Adult Adult Adult Adult Adult Adult Adult Adult No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Caught &ex Hen Hen Hen Hen Hen Tom ' 'Hen Jien Hen Hen Hen Tom Tom Tom Tom Tom Trapped 'of '1961";1962'- and Tagged During the Winter y Weight 9 lbs 11 lbs 8! Lbs , 8 lbs. lllbs 9 Lbs , 10! Lbs , 8 lbs. 10 lbs 10 lbs. 9 lbs. 17 lbs 17! lb$ .• 17 lbs. 19 lbs. I" 172 bls. Typ~ pf.Tags, Neck Tag x \:orange x (orangeJ Leg Band =/f.l #2 ~, no I ••• .., • , " -- x x x x x x x x x x x x x #3 #4 $~ #7 #8 #9 1[10 #501 #502 #503 #504 #505 " , " Back Tag ~ ---.---- I ---- --.-- (orangeJ (orange) ~orangel (crange} (orangeJ (orapge (orange, (orange) (blue)~ (blue) (blue) (blue) ,(blue) -----.-=/f.1T~orange! '#1' (orange) 1, --.---.-- ---- ---- -----.-#IT (blue) #2T (blue) #3T (blue) . ~ Used , . -- - - - - , , , - ' f /-I o +=I �-105- All of the birds trapped were aged, sexed, and weighed before being tagged and released. Leg bands and neck bands were put on all the birds while back tags were put on four adult toms and one adult hen. As of yet, none of the tagged birds have been observed or reported since their release. Table 4 summarizes the information collected during the trapping and tagging operations. Climatological Data All climatological data collected from three primary and four secondary weather st.ations has been summarized from the time the stations were put into operation through June 30, 1962. Table 5 gives a general summary of the information gained during this period for the primary stations. station No. 1 is located at .an elevation of 7,520 feet about t mile inside the Uncompahgre National Forest boundary on a small knoll just east of 25 Mesa RoacI. The second primary station is located at 9,000 feet near Columbine Pass. The station is across Monit.or Creek from 25 Mesa Road aboutt mile below its junction with Divide Road. Station No. 3 is located on a trail approximately.3 mile off Colorado Highway 90. This station is 15 miles east of Nucla near the old Hill Ranch at an elevation of 6,420 feet. The maximum and minimum temperatures for each month, shown in Table 5, are the highest and lowest temperatures recorded on either the hygrothermograph or the maximum-minimum thermdmeters. All other data in the table on temperature and relative humidity are taken from the hygrothermograph charts. In addition to the information presented here, the average weekly maximum, minimum, and mean temperatures for the maximum-minimum thermometers were computed. Relative humidity readings were taken with a sling psychrometer at the time of the weekly checks. These readings were used as a basis for setting and adjusting the relative humidity needle on the hygrothermograph. The instruments were removed from station No. 2 for the period from December 1, 1961 until May 18, 1962. The stat.ionwas inaccessible to normal travel during this time due to deep snow. The station was checked on February 5 by use of a snow-cat, and at that time the snow depth averaged 38 inches with a water content of over 12 inches. The measured precipitation for this station for the six and one-half months it was in operation totalled 15.42 inches, so it is safe to assume the annual precipitat.ion was somewhat over thirty inches. �Table 5. --Summaryof Climatological Wild Turkey Investigation, for the Period July 1, 1961, +o June 30, 1962, for Primary Weather Stations , UncompahgrePl~tea.u,•.. 11. . Data. Station No;. 1 7,520 Fee-t 25 Mesa Yearly Totl3.l Month Data Collected July - - Aug. MaxTemp (OF) 93 87 Min Temp (OF) 38 42 Ave. MaxTern (OF) 83.2 77.1 Ave.Min Tern (OF) 48.9 48.4 Ave. MeanTemp (OF) 66.3 62.7 MaxRe1 Hum(%) 100 100 Min ReI Hum(%) 4 18 Ave MaxReI Hum(%) 74.0 94.2 Ave Min Re1 Hum(%) 19.9 35.3 Ave MeanRe1 Hum(%) 46.8 64.7 Total Precip (In) 0.85 1.62 Tota1Miles-Wind 2452•• 0 1757.3 Ave Wind Vel (mph) 3.18 2.36 Sept. 76 18 58.9 34.6 46,.8 100 20 94.3 4.1.0 67.7 3;.93 2471.3 3.43 Station No. 2 ?J 82 MaxTemp. ~OF) Min Temp ( F) 27 Ave MaxTemp(OF) 73.•0 Ave Min Temp (OF) 36.7 54.7 Ave MeanTern:!?(OF) MaxReI Hum(,%) 100 6 Min ReI Hum(%) Ave MaxRe1Hum (%) 88.2 21.5 Ave Min Re l, Hum(%) Ave MeanRe1 Hum(%) 54.8 Total Precip (In) 1.91 Total Miles-Wind 1047.3 Ave Wind Vel (mph) 1.36 Oct. Nov. Dec. Jan. Feb. Mar. Apr. May June & Ave. 69 50 47 46 55 57 78 76 88 93 16 2 -16 -24 -20 -1~ 11 16 29 -24 54.7 38.1 29.6 26.5 33.8 36.5 56.7 61.6 73.3 52.5 29..2 17.4 9.4 4.9 18.1 16.6 30.3 34.6 40.3 27.7 41.9 27.6 19.• 9 15.8 25.8 26.5 43.5 48.1 56.7 40.1 100 100 1QO 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 20 30 34 34 30 34 14 11 15 4 87.6 97.0 97.9 94.5 95.7 91.9 82.1 72.8 71.5 87.8 37.5 48.3 56.3 60.0 59.4 53.9 31.7 29.1 26.8 41.6 62.5 72.7 77.1 77.3 77.6 72.8 56.9 50.9 48.9 64.7 2.01 1.42 0,.6~ 0.70 0.98 0.90 2.06 0.49 0.40 16.00 2775.4 2204.8 '2032.0 2340.CL 2365.9 2412.0 2471.4 3413.3 2365.2 29060.6 ~ 3.71 3.09 2.56 3.06 3.19 3•.96 3.44 4.50 3.33 3,.32.~ I. 9,000 Feet 79 32 68.2 41.3 54.6 100 20 97.9 44.8 71.4 3.30 928 4 1.25 0 67 12 52.9 29.0 41.3 100 22 98.7 46.5 72.6 5.16 1900.9 2.64 62 45 5 -17 47.0 30.4 21.6 7.9 34.3 19.1 100 100 20 30 97.0 95.8 42.3 54.5 69.7 75.1 2.46 0.64 2450.6 1251.4 3.27 1.89 37 -~5 -- Columbine Pass 34 -40 63 84 84 20 19 -45 48.5 62.9 54.7 27.2 28.6 27.5 37.9 45.8 41.1 100 100 100 16 10 6 90.4 96.9 94.9 36.7 23.7 38.6 63.5 60.3 66.8 1.01 0.94 15.42 846.7 1989.310414.6 4.• 31 2.70 2.49 �Table 5 cont.--Sumrnary of Climatological Data for the Period July 1, 1961, to June 30, 1962, for Primary Weather Stations, Wild Turkey Investigat.ions, Uncompahgre Plateau. Hill Ranch 6.,420 Station No.3 July 101 44 90.5 Data Collected Max Temp OF Min Temp (OF Ave Max Temp (OF ~ 53.5 Ave Min Temp (OF 72.0 .Ave Mean Temp (OF) 100 Max Rel Hum (%) 2 Min Rel Hum (%) Ave Max Rel Hum (%) 64.6 AveMin Rel Hum (%) 18.1 Ave Mean Rel Hum(%) 40.8 0.49 Total Precip (In) 533.0 Toal Miles-Wind 0.70 Ave Wind Vel (mph) Aug. 99 45 86.9 52.9 6~.6 100 12 87.8 27.3 57.6 2.89 1356 .•1 1.82 Sept. 5 26 68.5 41.1 54.8 100 18 91.1 35.6 63.3 3.31 405.0 0.56 Month Oct. Nov. 0 59 20 7 62.6 45.9 22.5 32.5 34.2 47.6 100 100 18 25 87.4 76.5 42.8 33.0 60.2 69.6 1.16 1.39 531.9 277.9 0.38 0.71 Jan. Dec. 52 5 -11 -17 33.6 35.8 12.8 8.3 20.8 24.2 100 100 24 24 97.8 97.6 48.1 51.9 73.0 74.7 0,,69 0.80 185.0 224.2 0.23 0.35 Feb. 3 -11 41.4 20 •• 4 30.9 100 31 95.2 50.4 72.9 2.90 383.2 0.55 Mar. 72 - 2 43.8 17.8 30.9 100 24 90.1 37.8 64 •. 1 0.54 619.4 0.86 Yearly Totals June & Ave. April May 101 9 24 §4 17 20 84.6 60.9 64.5 72.3 31.6 46.4 31.3 40.0 46.2 65.4 48.2 56.2 100 100 100 100 2 8 4 13 83.9 63.3 82.7 73·0 34.4 19.1 24.7 40.0 60.0 41.2 56.2 53.6 1.28 0.82 0.56 16.83 I 902.6 997.0 849.27264.5 1.22 0.83 '.~ 1.19 1.34 -::,;J - I Y Several days of temperature and relative humidity records were lost during the winter months due to the stations being inaccessible. gj Averages were figured for the number of days that were recorded. Station No. 2 was not in operation from December 1, 1961, until May 18, 1962, due to deep snow. Thermometers were checked in January and February by use of asnow>ocat. The Maximum-Minimum �Table 6.--su.mma;ryof Climatological Data for the Period July 20, 1961, to June 30, 1962, for Secondary Weather Stations, Wild Turkey Investigation, Uncompahgre Plateau. Stat.ion No. lA 8,000 Feet 25 Mesa 11 Data Collected July Max TemP (OF) 84 Min Temp (OF) 35 Ave Wkly Max Temp (OF) 82.5 Ave WklY,Min 'I'emp(OF) 43.5 Ave Wkly Mean Temp (OF) 63.0 Total Precipitation (In) -Station No o. 2A Aug. Mont1£! Sept. Oct. ~( Jt 83.8 68.8 46.4 34.4 65.2 51.6 0.63 3.80 67 Nov. 50 20 5 63.8 45.8 25.0 12.8 44.2 29.6 2.08 1.56 Totals May June & Ave. 75 86 86 28 33 5 70-3 82 .. 2 71.0 30 .• 0 39.8 33.1 50.0 61..0 52.1 0•. 48 0,..33 8.88 8,500 Feet Max Temp (OF) 91 Min Temp (OF) 36 Ave Wkly Max Temp (OF) 87.0 Ave Wkly Min Temp (OF) 41.5 Ave Wkly Mean Temp (OF) 64.5 Total Precip (In) 1.75 Station No. 3A 91 81 43 21 87.6 72.8 44.6 29.0 66.0 50.6 2.76 5.12 25 Mesa 71 51 16 0 65.0 47.6 22.4 5.• 6 43.6 26.8 2 •. 41 2.00 8,500 Feet 4g Max Temp (OF) Min Temp (OF) Ave Wkly Max Temp(OF) 87.0 Ave Wkly Min Temp (OF) 45.0 Ave WklyMean Temp (OF) 66.0 ,Total Precip (In) 0.35 Station No. 4.tJ} Max Temp (OF) 96 Min Temp (OF) 38 Ave Wkly Max Temp (OF) 93.5 Ave Wkly Min Temp (OF) 44.5 Ave Wkly Mean TeIflP(OF) 69.0 Total Precip (In) 0-33 86 70 41 21 80.0 65.4 46.0 29.0 62.8 46.8 3·53 4.86 92 o 74.6 29.8 52.1 15.29 Taheguache Basin i~ 67.0 22.2 44.8 2.55 8,000 .Feet 93 79 43 23 89.2 72.2 46.4 31.4 67.8 51.6 3.10 4.80 77 92 26 28 74 •. 7 87 .• 5 28.7 36.5 51.3 62.0 0•• 60 0.65 81 91 24 33 78.0 88.2 25.7 39.0 51.3 63.8 0.80 0.78 91 16 77.6 34.5 55.9 12.87 Tabeguache Basin 74 10 71.0 20.8 45.8 2.53 82 104 25 33 80 •. 7 100.0 27.0 39·5 54.0 0 __ 67 69.8 0.98 104 10 84.4 34.9 59.7 12.41 Y No precipita'tion records for the period July 20-August 21, 1961, due toa ?J JI leak in the rain guage . No records were kept for the period December 1961 through April 1962 for all stations. No records were kept for November 1961 for Stations 3A and 4A only. No precipitation records for the period August 7-21, 1961, due to the 'guage being knocked down by grazing cattle. �Figure 9. Figure 10. Prim9.ry weather station Noo 1 on 25 Mesa. Instruments shown include anemometer (wind~ge), plastic rain gage, and instru.'nent shelter. Photo by Wayne Sandfort. Close-up of instru.rnent shelter showing maxtmumm.inimumthermometers and r-ecor-d.tng hygrothermograph. Photo by 'wayne Sandf'or'b , �Figure 11. Secondary weather station Noo 4A at 8,000 feet in Tabeg"J.acheBasLn, Instruments incluie a Taylor maxtmum-mtnfmum thermometer and a plastic rain gage. Photo by WayneSandforl. Figure lr? Weighing a snow core tube to determine the water content. Pict-'rre taken at an elevation of 8,500 feet on February 5, 1962. Photo ~y Jesse Williams. �Table 6 summarizes the information collected during the past year at the four secondary weather stations. These stations are located at 8,000 and 8,500 feet on either side of the divide. They were only operated during the months that turkeys were present at these elevations. Each secondary station consists ofa Taylor maximum-minimum thermometer and a plastic rain guage. The stations are checked weekly along with the primary stations. It is interesting to note in Table 5 that the total annual precipitation at station No. 3 exceeded that at station No. 1 although it is over 1:,000 feet lower in elevation. Table 6 shows that the secondary station at 8,000 feet on the west side of the divide also showed considerably more -precipitation than the station at the same elevation on the eastern sideo The a-pparently greater amount of precipitation on the western side of the divide probably helps explain the similarity in vegetation in the wintering areas on the two s.ides despite the differences in elevation. The western side wintering areas average approximately 1,000 feet less in elevation than those 6ll.theeastern side. Several more years of weather data will have to be collected before theories such as this can be definitely proved. It is felt that most of the other climatological data presented are self explanatory. More work should be done in the future to correlate local extremes in weather with wild turkey movements, distribution, and productivity. I firmly believe that climatic fact.ors are among the most important influences on turkey productivity and distribution. Prepared 'by ; Date ~R:;o.sg~e~r-=L:.::.o----::::E:..:.v.:;:an==s-:Approved by: Wayne Wo Sandfort Field Assistant Game Manager, Research April, 1963 --------------~~~~--~~------------- Ferd Co Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator � https://cpw.cvlcollections.org/files/original/ac938b5fb1af6cedd075f926d39b47df.pdf 8c1b5a8cb0935355fecba485fd6faea7 PDF Text Text July, 1963 -1- JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO ------~~~~~--------------- Project No. Work Plan No. W~-8~8_-~R_-_8 ~ W~at~e~r~f~ow~1~S~u_r_v~e~y~s~an~d~In~v~e~s~t~i 5 1 Job No. ------------------------~----~--~~---------------------------- Title of Job. Period Covered: Waterfowl Kill Report October, November, December, 1962. ABSTRACT Results of the 1962 random survey of waterfowl hunters reveals that of the 17,701 Colorado duck stamp buyers, 13,918 hunted ducks bagging an estimated 38,499, and crippling an additional 5,790 for a total hunting loss of 44,289 ducks. The average season duck bag per hunter was 2.6 and 3.5 birds on the east and west slope respectively. Mallards accounted for 72% of the harvest on the east slope and 91% on the west. Duck kill estimates by county reveal that the eastern slope accounted for about 71% of the total state harvest which was slightly lower than in the past. Weld was the high duck kill county. Combination of fewer hunters, shorter season, and small bag limit resulted in the smallest waterfowl harvest since the beginning of the survey in 1954. For geese, an estimated 9,159 hunters bagged an average of 1.5 geese during the season for a total estimated harvest of 13,671 birds. In addition, another 3,218 birds were reported wounded for a loss of 19.1%, and a total hunting mortality of 16,889 geese. The southeast again accounted for about 86% of the total harvest with Prowers, Kiowa, Crowley, and Baca the high harvest counties in that order. Fewer hunters and a small increase in average bag resulted in a harvest only slightly below last year, and above the seven-year average. ��-3WATERFOWL KIlL REPORT Jack R. Grieb!! and Gilbert N. Hunterg/ This random survey of Colorado small game harvest is a cooperative venture between Federal Aid Project W-88-Randthe Game Management Division of the Colorado Game and Fish Department. Techniques were the same as those used in the past, with randomly selected hunters notified immediately preceding the season, and a sample questionnaire included to show the questions that would be asked. After the se~son, the hunters were contacted a second time and requested to fill out and return the questionnaire. One follow-up letter was sent to all non-reporting hunters after an interval of about two weeks, and the sample was concluded, when the response to this follow-up has dropped off. Questionnaires were sent to 12,000 randomly selected license buyers in 1962, and a total of 8,558 responded for a return of 71.3 per cerrt ,« Of the 8, 558 r-et.urns , 2,392 reported that they had not purchased a license, 4,049 reported hunting, and 1,137 bought a license but did not hunt. Most of the hunters in this last category were found to have purchased a combination hunting and fishing ,license which was used for fishing only Thus, of the total license sales of 179, 620 during 1962, it is estimated that 118,225 hunters, hunted one or more species of small game. 0 WATERFOWL HARVEST Colorado duck stamp sales are plotted in Table 1 revealing that the 1962 sale of 17,701 was the lowest in the last eight yearso This decrease is attributed to adverse advance publicity which stressed the low supply of ducks and forecasted a poor hunting season; and, the very restrictive hunting regulations (25 days and one mallard) on the eastern slope. Table l.--Duck Stamp Sales for Colorado. Number of Year stamps sold 1962 17,701 1961 24,854 1960 30,592 1959 31,431 1958 41,897 1957 41,794 1956 36,303 1955 39,107 1954 32,450 Percent change from previous year -28.8 -18.8 - 2·7 -24.9 + .02 +15·1 - Y;2 +20.5 +20·5 Leader, Federal Aid Waterfowl Project, w-88-R .• Work carried on under Plan 1, Job 5. Jack Grieb. g/ State Game Manager, Gi,lbert N. Hunter. �-4- Table 2 classifies Duck Stamp buyers by the type of hunting in which they engaged for the past nine years. Thus, it appears that number of duck and goose hunters were down significantly (39%) from 1961. This is not true of mean days hunted which is a direct reflection of an increase in season length for the western slope combined with the long goose season. Comparison of east and west slope average days hunted for ducks revealed a mean of 4.7 days for the east slope and 6.4 days for the west. This difference is due to the longer season on the west slope. Duck Harvest Hunting statistics of the 1962 season are tabulated and compared with past years in Table 3. This reveals that total estimated retrieved kill of 38,499 was the lowest recorded during the nine years of this survey. In addition, it was estimated that 5,790 birds were crippled for a wounding loss of 13.1 per cent permitting an estimated total hunting mortality of 44,289 ducks for 1962 in Colorado. Table 2. -- Estimated Number of Duck and Goose Hunters, Average Number of Days Hunted and Season Length, by Year. Bag and Average number' Season length possession Number of Number of days hunted for (days) limit Year duck hunters goose hunters ducks and geese ducks geese ducks geese 1 19621961 1960 1959 1958 1957 1956 1955 1954 2 13,918 22,920 29,480 29,060 38,773 37,166 34,793 37,816 31,834 9,159 11,245 14,107 13,647 14,705 12,057 12,477 17,634 12,136 5.27 4.40 6.05 5·70 5.78 6.52 7.37 8.87 7.64 25 30 60 50 90 75 75 75 60 75 60 75 75 60 60 60 60 60 2-4 3-6 3-6 4-8 4-8 5-10 5-10 5-10 5-10 Hunting regulations for East Slope. West Slope had a general season of 75 days with 4 ducks in bag, and 8 in possession. One mallard allowed in bag, and two in possession. 2-2 2-2 2-2 2-2 2-2 2-2 2-2 2-2 2-2 �-5liable3.--Duck Harvest Statistics, 1954-1962. Year 1961 1960 1959 1958 1957 1956 1955 1954 Slope East Nwnber of hunters 11,349 ~~k- -1~~~~~ - - -~~- 22,920 29,480 29,060 38,773 37,166 34,793 37,816 31,834 Average seasonal bag 2 .. 6 3.8 5.0 4.2 6.1 6.. 8 5.9 6.7 5.• 6 - - Total estimated harvest 29,507 Wounding loss Per cent number 13.5 4,603 -3~~~ - 86,408 147,400 122,924 236,515 254,587 185,737 253,367 179,856 -- Total estimated hunting mortality 34,110 10,179 44,289 110,016 169,657 145,341 269,603 296,266 221,932 291,549 210,252 -~~:t - -~~~~~21.4 13.1 15.5 12 .. 3 14.1 16 .. 3 13.. 1 14•. 5 23,608 22,257 22,417 33,088 41,679 36,195 38,182 30,396 Species composition of the 1962 bag is Listied in Table 4 and compared with the average of the eight previous years. These data indicate that total duck harvest was 7901 per cent less than the eight-year average because of the short season, reduced number of hunters, and lower average seasonal bag than the past. Table 4 .• --Species Composition of t.heBag .• 8-year average 1962 1954 - 1961 Number Number % of % of Species Killed Total Killed Total Mallard 30,569 79.4 122,249 66 .. 4 Pintail 2 .. 4 924 5,949 3 .. 2 Green-wo teal 3,543 902 16,269 8.9 B1ue-w .•teal 1,501 3 .• 9 6,965 3 .. 8 Baldpate 269 0 .. 7 1,978 1.1 Gadwall 1.. 5 577 5,578 3.0 Shoveller 2,193' 10.2 231 0.6 Scaup 1.4 539 1,339 0·7 Redhead 1.0 1,764 Canvasback 1,494 0 .. 8 Others 346 Qp.9 18,190 9 .. 9 Total 10000 38,499 100.0 183,995 == % change 1962 from 8-year Average Harvest 75.0% - 84 .. 5% - 78.2% - 78.4% - 86 .. 4% - 89 .. 7% - 89.5% - 590,.7% - 9801% - 79.1% Comparison of eastern and west.er-n slope species composition is made in Table 5•. This reveals that .despitethe longer hunting season which began earlier in the fall on the western slope, the mallard made up an even greater per cent of the t.otal harvest there as compared t.othe east slope• This probably indicates a lack of other species in this area during.the entire fall period so that ,a hunting season, regardless of when set is bound to place pressure on mallards .. �-6- Duck kill and hunting pressure by 10-day intervals of the season for both east and west slopes is tabulated in Table 6. These data indicate that harvest for each area was fairly evenly divided over the season intervals indicating that no one part of the season was better than the other. It is fairly obvious that east slope hunters had to pack their hunting into the short season allotted them while west slopers could spread their hunting out over the longer season. In this respect, it is significant that despite thit longer season and more liberal bag limits, west slope hunters hunted only 6.4 days compared to 4.7 days for those on the eastern slope and bagged only 3.5 compared to 2.6 ducks average. for the season for east slope hunters. Table 5. -- Comparison of Species Composition between Harvest. East Slope Number of Species Killed Total Mallard 71.7 21,156 Pintail 3.1 915 Green-wo teal 12.4 3,659 Blue-wo teal 1,534 5.2 1.0 Baldpate 295 Gadwall 2.3 679 Shoveller 266 0·9 Scaup 2.2 649 1.2 Others 354 TOTAL lCJO.O 29,507 % East and West 'slope Duck West Slope Number % of Killed Total 8,219 91.4 105 135 4 .•3 387 1.9 171 0.1 9 0.1 9 0.1 9 0.1 9 44 0·5 100.0 8,992 Table 6 •...- Ducks Bagged and Hunting Pressure by 10-day Intervals of the 1962 Season. Estimated Birds Estimated Hunting Bagged Pressure Average No. of % Total Bag "by No. of of Dates Ducks Kill Hunters Total Hunters Periods % EAST SLOPE Nov .• 9-18 19-28 29-Deco3 10,386 11,862 7,259 35.2 40.2 24 .• 6 3,995 4,358 2,633 35.2 38.4 23 .• 2 2.6 2.7 2.8 34.2 29.1 25.3 34.2 31.6 21.3 17.7 22.8 2.3 1.6 WEST SLOPE Oct. 12-21 22-31 Nov. 1-10 11-20 21-30 Dec. r-ro 11-20 21-25 2,041 1,187 971 1,268 1,214 836 531 944 22.7 13.2 10.8 14.1 13·5 9~3 5·9 10.5 879 748 650 879 812 547 455 586 1.5 1.4 1.5 1.5 1.2 1.6 �-7Considering .al1 information it is obvious that there was a drastic reduction in duck harvest during the past hunting season. In particular, the limitation of bag to one mallard with two in possession was bitterly resented by the sportsmen, and this resentment was increased when they did not observe a significant reduction in east slope wintering mallard populations. Goose Harvest Hunting statistics of the goose season presented in Table 7 estimates 9,159hunters bagged an average of 1. 5 geese during tIE season for a total estimated harvest of 13,671birds. In addition, another 3,218birds were reported wounded but not retrieved for a wounding loss of 19.1percent. This permits a total hunting mortality estimate for Colorado during 1962of 16,889geese. Table 7. -- Goose Harvest Statistics, 1954-1962. Wounding Percent loss number Total estimated hunting mortality 8,828 1.5 13,241 19.5 l3! !·l__ . 64lO 0 9,159 1.5 13,71 19.1 1961 11,245 1.25 14,056 24.5 1960 14,107 1.11 15,659 20.7 1959 13,647 1.61 21,972 17.8 1958 14,705 1.34 19,704 22.3 1957 12,057 1.21 14,589 23.5 1956 11,541 .98 11,310 21.6 1955 17,364 1.02 17,711 18.3 19~4 12,136.67 8,168 22.8 Eight-year average goose harvest is 15,395-- 1954 1961 3,218 16,459 3,210 4,568 4,087 4,730 5,655 4,473 3,116 3,884 2,410 16,889 18,624 19,746 26,702 25,359 19,062 14,426 21,248 10,578 Year 1962 Y Slope East ~e~t TOTAL Number of hunters Average seasonal bag Total estimated harvest g. Y _....,._4.,;, No cripples reported on the west slope. S~ecies composition of geese killed was similar between all nine years of the survey being 90 per cent or above Canada geese. The remaining percentages were "other and unknown" species of geese, and were probably mainly Canada geese which the hunters were not able to correctly identify. It is known that there were a few snow geese taken in Colorado during this hunting season and an even smaller number of white fronts. The 1962goose hunting season was characterized by excellent water and food conditions in the Arkansas Valley during the fall and winter periods. Census figures taken at weekly intervals in the Arkl3.nsasValley indicated a normal nurnberof geese present in Colorado during the seaSDn. However, the birds seemed to be distributed on all water bodies r.ather than concentrating in the Two Buttes area as in the past. This was particularly true of the Eads lakes which carried the bulk of the birds during the entire hunting season, and the remainder of the winter" �-8Comparison of the 1962 season with past years shows a small decrease in number: of hunters and total harvest. Average seasonal bag increased slightly from the previous year, indicating that while numbers of hunters and harvest declined, there was not a decline in the quality of hunting. Waterfowl Harvest by County The reader is cautioned that information presented in this section of the report is subject to a great deal more error in accuracy than estimates in previous sections, since the original sample has been broken down to a county basis, thus decreasing the size of samples on which to base estimates. This is probably even more true of geese than ducks, becausethere'were many more duck hunters. Cons equent.ly, it is nea.Lf.z ed that in some counties, both duck and goose kill have been over-estimated, and in others, under-estimated. However, despite this error, these data represent the most accurate information on this subject possible at the present time. +tis hoped to increase the accuracy of coUnty data in the future. Tables 8 and 9 compare the 1962 duck and goose kill respectively with the average of the previous seasons, by county, within each waterfowl region. These regional divisions of the state were located on the basis of waterfowl migratiOn, locations, and topographyj and permit a closer evaluation of kill, yearly changes in kill, and the effect of different types of hunting seasons on various portions of Colorado. Regional recap of the 1962 duck season as summarized at the conclusion of Table 8 shows that the harvest .strongly decreased in all regions of the State compared to the eight-year average. This was undoubtedly a result of the short seasons and small bag limits, on the eastern slope, but no explanation can be offered for the decrease found on the western slope. The eastern slope again contributed to the bulk of the duck harvest being about 77 percent in 1962 which is slightly lower than previous years. Weld was again the high harvest county. The 1962 goose harvest compared to the :eight-year average in Table 9 shows that total harvest was only slightly below the average. Also, that the Southeast Region again accounted for more than 86 percent of the total goose bag, with Prowers, KiOwa, Crowley and Baca the top harvest counties, in that .order. Other regions showed similar harvest to past years with the exception of the San Luis Valley which increasedsign±ficantly in harvest. �-9- :r'able8G--Duck Kill by Region. and Count Yo Estimated 1962 Eight-year Average Hunting Pressure 1962 Duck Kill Waterfowl 1954 - 1961 Nwriber Per cent Region Number Percent Number Percent of Total. of TO'ta:1' Killed Killed and County Hunters of Total East Slope NGR'I'HEAST Cheyenne Kit Carson Lincoln Legan Mor>gan Phillips Sedgwick Washington Yl1lIla NGRTHEAST TOTAL SOUTBEAST Baca Bent; Crowley Huerfano Kiowa Las Animas otero Prowers Pueblo SGUIHEAST 'l'OTAL CENTRAL Adams Arapahoe Boulder Douglas Elbert El Paso Jefferson Larimer Weld CENTRAL TGTAL 59 236 ·l.5 .61 10'2 .. 24 073 742 2,128 1,693 1,416 3.68 2.84 488 579 3.51 4016 9,440' 50'2 1.30' 1.88 59 561 .15 1.46 261 125 10'2 3,925 10'019 1JG92 34 073 11J635 324 5,469 2,439 3,553 1,691 12015 38,0'74 20'.76 024 2036 1.88 1,957 3,9959 4-,217 1.0'6 944 561 266 89 2045 1,121 354 2.91 1.53 092 3,925 10'019 12793 2~862 885 1,151 7.34 2030' 590' 20'7 2099 .54 092 5Gl4 6G34 017 2.98 1.33 1.93 34 329 261 125 227 68 329 227 193 1.46 .69 023 040' 1.16 .90' 2015 2 .. 29 .49 090' 90'9 l.63 049 2036 2,384 1,559 2,:;182 4.24 1.39 5,740' 4,20'4 1.18 3 13 2029 12088 27,111 14 .. 78 1,260' 9 .•0'5 363 874 125 2.61 6028 9.,674 1,627 9,841 94 5·27 .88 5036 440' 023 .• 73 090' 1.30' 085 c. .•0'5 1,711 9.767 1.23 1.53 4.44 25037 2,,497 17094 34$'0'69 7091 18057 17,645 45083 6,413 46.0'8 73z485 40'.0'7 472 590' 261 193 840' L88 1.39 1,346 1,875 6 .•0'4 14,519 1.0'2 �•.. 10 •.• Table 8.--Duck Kill by Region and County. Haterfow1 Region and County 1962 Duck Kill Number Per cent killed of total SAN LUIS VALLEY Alamosa 826 Conejos 944 Costilla 59 Rio Grande 1,652 Saguache 207 SAN LUIS V. TOTAL 3,688 2.14 2.15 .15 5.42 '~54' 9.58 Contld. Estimated 1962 huntin~ eressure Number Per cent hunters of total Eight-year average 1954-1961 Number Per cent killed of total 454 295 68 329 102 1,248 4,297 2,962 681 5,114 4 829 17,882 2.34 1.61 .37 2.78 2.63 9.75 730 .39 3.26 2.12 .49 2.36 .73 8.79 " " HIGH COUNTRY Chaffee Clear Creek Custer Fremont Gqpin Jackson Lake Park Teller HIGH COUNTRY TOTAL '. . , 3 118 59 --89 59 325 .31 .15 .23 .•15 .84 34 68 68 34 204 .24 .49 445 1,192 .24 .65 .49 .24 1.47 263 274 408 65 3,379 .14 .14 .22 .03 1.84 West Slope NORTHWEST Garfield Moffat Rio Blanco Routt NORTHWEST TOTAL WEST CENTRAL Delta Hesa Hontrose Ouray WEST CENTRAL TOTAL SOUTHWEST Archuleta Dolores Hinsdale La Plata Mineral Montezuma San Juan San Miguel SOUTHWEST TOTAL 414 1,061 252 99 1,826 1.08 2.76 .65 .26 4.74 260 195 98 64 617 1.87 1.40 .70 .46 4.43 1,930 622 910 11204 4,666 1.05 .33 .49 .65 2.54 845', 3,318 1,322 2.19 .B.•62, 260 650 390 1.87 4.67 2.80 3,282 5,658 3,416 285 1.78 3.08 1.86 12,642 6.89 .10 .01 .01 1.05 .08 .58 .14 2.00 3.43 5,485 14.25 1,300 9.34 117 .30 33 .24 566 1.47 98 .70 360 .94 33 .24 198 23 23 1,934 165 1,069 144 1,187 .37 3.08 33 197 .24 1.42 263 3,674 .15 �-11- Table 8.--Duck Kill by Region and County. Haterfowl Region and County 1962 Duck Kill Number Per cent killed of total HIGH COUNTRY Eagle Grand Gunnison Pitkin Sunnnit HIGH COUNTRY TOTAL Contld. Estimated 1962 hunting eressure Number Per cent hunters of total 198 270 27 .51 .70 .07 131 260 64 .94 1.87 .46 495 1.29 455 Eight-year average 1954-1961 Number ·Per cent killed of total 3.27 1,089 254 734 292 85 2,454 .59 .13 .40 .15 .04 1.33 38,074 27,111 73,485 17 ,882 3,379 4,666 12,642 3,674 2 454 20.76 14.79 40.08 9.75 1.84 2.34 6.89 2.00 1.34 Summarl , bl Region , NORTHEAST 3,925 SOUTHEAST 3,925 CENTRAL 17 ,645 SAN LUIS VALLEY 3,688 HIGH COUNTRY(EAST) 325 NORTHWEST 1,826 WEST CENTRAL 5,485 SOUTHWEST 1,187 HIGH COUNTRY(WEST) 495 TOTAL OF REGIONS 38,501 10.19 10.19 45.83 9,58 •84 4.74 14.25 3.08 1.29 1,691 1,793 6,413 1,248 617 1,300 197 455 12.15 12.88 46.08 8.97 1.47 4.43 9.34 1.42 3.27 100.0 13,918 100.0 183,367 100.0 EAST SLOPE WEST SLOPE 76.64 23.36 11,349 2,569 81.54 18.46 159,931 23,436 87.22 12.78 29,508 8,993 20t• �-12Table 9.--Goose Kill by Region 1:.~ounty. Estimated 1962 Eight-year average Waterfowl 1962 Goose Kill hunting Pressure 1954-1961 Region Number Per Cent Number Per Cent Number Per Cent and County Killed of Total Hunters of Total Killed of Total East Slope NORTHEAST Cheyenne 17 .1 Kit Carson 35 .4 39 .2 Lincoln 7 t Logan 66 265 . .5 .5 115 .7 1.9 Morgan 265 362 4.0 439 2.9 Phillips 3 t Sedgewick 35 .4 66 .4 Washington 265 1.9 35 .4 51 .3 Yuma 26 .1 35 .4 131 .9 NORTHEAST TOTAL 622 4.5 767 8.4 813 5.3 SOUTHEAST Baca 1,232 9.0 1,227 13.4 6,183 40.3 Bent 834 6.1 989 10.8 ~,4l0 9.2 Crowley 1,298 9.5 494 5.4 630 4.1 Huerfano 1.1 26 .1 98 95 .6 Kiowa 2,662 19.5 1,324 13.9 2,349 15.3 Las Animas 1.9 265 168 1.8 111 .7 Otero 331 1.5 2.4 300 3.3 224 Prowers 2,847 21.5 20.8 1,386 2,148 14.0 Pueblo 35 .4 80 .5 69.5 SOUTHEAST TOTAL . 9,495 6!021 65.7 13,228 86.2 CENTRAL Adams 569 1.8 4.2 397 4.3 271 Arapahoe 569 4.2 327 3.6 40 .3 Boulder 1.9 1.1 265 98 22 .1 Douglas Elbert 11 .1 El Paso 13 .1 Jefferson 1'.1 596 4.4 98 83 .5 Larimer 26 1.4 .1 132 71 .5 Held 305 2.2 591 6.5 558 3.6 CENTRAL TOTAL 2,330 17 .0 1,643 17 .9 1,079 7.0 SAN LUIS VALLEY Alamosa 26 .1 35 .4 Conejos 1.5 199 1.8 168 24 .2 Costilla .I.• 569 1.4 4.2 132 68 Rio Grande 62 .7 3 t Saguache SAN LUIS VALLEY 794 5.8 397 4.3 95 .6 TOTAL -- ..- �-13Table 9.--Goose Kill by Region and County. Cont'd. Estimated 1962 Eight-year average Waterfowl 1962 Goose Kill hunting eressure 1954-1961 Per Cent Region Per Cent Number Per Number Number of Total and County Killed Killed Hunters of Total of Total HIGH COUNTRY (EAST) Chaffee Clear Creek t Custer 2 .2 Fremont 26 Gilpin Jackson Lake t Park 3 Teller .2 31 HIGH COUNTRY TOTAL West Slope NORTHWEST Garfield .05 7 1.1 1.0 Moffat 44 .25 132 99 Rio Blanco Routt 1.1 1.0 NORTHWEST TOTAL .3 132 51 99 WEST CENTRAL Delta 10 .05 33 .4 1.5 1.0 Hesa .05 8 132 133 1.2 25 Montrose .2 166 66 .7 Ouray t.]ESTCENTRAL 42 .3 298 232 2.5 2.2 TOTAL SOU THt-JES T Archuleta Dolores Hinsdale LaPlata 3 t Mineral Montezuma San Juan San Miguel SOUTHWEST TOTAL t 3 HIGH COUNTRY (WEST) Eagle Grand t Gunnison 4 Pitkin Summit t 4 HIGH COUNTRY TOTAL cent -- -- -,- -- -- -- �-14- Table 9.--Goose WaterfoWl Region and County NORTHEAST SOUTHEAST CENTRAL SAN LUIS VALLEY HIGH COUNTRY (EAST) NORT~T WEST CENTRAL SOUTHWEST HIGH COUNTRY (WEST) TOTAL OF ~egions EAST SLOPE WEST SLOPE Kill by Region and County. Cont'd. Estimated 1962 1962 Goose Kill hunting pressure Number Per cent Number Per cent Killed of Total Hunters of Total Eight-year average .. 1954-1961 Number Per cent Killed of Total 622· 9,495 2,330 794 4.5 69.5 17.0 5.8 Summary by Region 767 6,021 1,643 397 8.4 65.7 17.9 4-3 813 13,228 1,079 95 5.3 86.2 7.0 .6 132 298 LO 2.2 99 232 Ll 2.5 31 51 42 3 .2 .3 ,.3 t 4 t 15,346 15,246 100 100.0 13z671 13,241 430 100.0 96.9 3.1 9,159 8,828 331 100.0 96.4 3.6 9903 .7 Residence of Waterfowl Hunters Table 10 lists the residence county of hunters in each hunt county 0 Because of the greatly reduced J:lumberof waterfowl hunters this year we were not able to obtain a·satisfactory sample in many of the hunt counties. Thus, data presented in this table should be interpreted with caution. Information of this nature has been extremely valuable in the past in determining the ·effectof special regulations on the harvest, and in predicting number and movement of hunters. It is planned to collect this type of information again as soon as the number of waterfowl hunters shows an upward trend. �-15Table 10.--Residence of Duck and Goose Hunters Hunting in Each County. County where hunted --- Adams Alamosa Arapahoe County residence of hunters -- Duck Hunters No. % Adams Arapahoe. .Boulder Denver Jefferson Weld 421. 129 32 517 161 33.4 ·10.2 2.5 41.1 12.8 Alamosa Boulder E1 Paso La Plata Pueblo Saguache 1,260 260 32 32 32 65 33 454 100.0 57.2 7.1 7.1 7.1 14.3 7.2 100.0 132 198 36.4 54.5 9.1 100.0 Arapahoe Denver Jefferson 33 363 Baca Bent Adams Arapahoe Baca Bent Boulder Denver E1 Paso Fremont Jefferson Kit Carson Las Animas Morgan Prowers Pueblo Sedgwick Washington Held Yuma Adams Alamosa Bent Denver Fremont Huerfano Larimer Otero 34 100.0 34 100.0 197 60.0 33 10.0 66 20.0 Goose Hunters No. % 165 33 41.7 8.3 166 41.7 33 397 35 8.3 100.0 100.0 35 100.0 131 196 40.0 60.0 327 100.0 66 99 201 33 33 133 66 33 66 33 33 66 33 167 33 66 33 33 1,227 5.4 8.1 16.3 2.7 2.7 10.8 5.4 2.7 5.4 2.7 2.7 5.4 2.7 13.5 2.7 5.4 2.7 2.7 100.0 33 66 263 165 66 33 33 165 3.3 . 6.7 26.7 16.7 6.7 3.3 3.3 16.7 �-16Table 10.--Residence of Duck and Goose Hunte~s.Hunting (Cont'd). County where hunted Bent (cont'd) Boulder County residence of hunters Prowers Pueblo Rio Grande Adams Arapahoe Boulder Denver Jefferson Otero Duck Hunters No. % 33 10.0 329 100.0 32 32 714 32 32 32 874 3.7 3.7 81.5 3.7 3.7 3.7 100.0 -- Cheyenne Che-renne 34 34 100.0 100.0 Conejos Alamosa Conejos El Paso La Plata 131 131 33 44.4 44.4 11.2 295 100.0 34 50.0 34 50.0 Costilla Crot~ley Alamosa Conejos Fremont Garfield Rio Grande Crowley Denver E1 Paso Otero Pueblo 68 100.0 87 33.4 29 116 29 261 11.1 44.4 11.1 100.0 Custer Fremont 34 34 100.0 100.0 Delta Delta El Paso Lake Mesa 130 33 32 65 260 50.0 12.5 12.5 25.0 100.0 33 33 100.0 100.0 Dolores Dolores in Each County. .Goose Hunters No. % 3.3- 33 .99 ·33 989 10.0 3.3 100.0 '98 100.0 -.... 98 100.0 34 100 20.0 60.0 34 168 20.0 100.0 66 50.0 33 33 132 25.0 25.0 100.0 197 33 33 165 66 494 40.0 6.7 6.7 33.3 13.3 100.0 33 100.0 33 100.0 �-17Table 10.--Residence of Duck and Goose Hunters Hunting in Each County. (Cont'd). County where hunted . County residence of hunters Douglas Arapahoe Denver Douglas Eagle Eagle Garfield Jefferson El Paso Alamosa El Paso Fremont Garfield Fremont Arapahoe Garfield Grand Bou Ider Denver Grand Rio Blano Duck Hunters No. % 31 63 31 125 65 33 33 131 33 228 261 25.0 50.0 25.0 100.0 50.0 25.0 25.0 100.0 12.5 87.5 100.0 8 60 68 12.5 87.5 100.0 33 130 64 33 260 12.5 50.0 25.0 12.5 100.0 Gunnison El Paso Gunnison 32 32 64 50.0 50.0 100.0 Huerfano Clear Creek Denver El Paso Huerfano 31 31 31 32 125 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 100.0 Boulder Denver Jefferson 32 97 64 193 16.7 50.0 33.3 100.0 32 14.3 32 14.3 32 14.3 32 14.3 Jefferson Kiowa Adams Arapahoe Boulder Cheyenne Denver Douglas E1 Paso Jefferson Kiowa Kit Carson Lake Goose Hunters No. % -- 65 33 98 66.7 33.3 100.0 65 33 98 66.7 33.3 100.0 66 100 33 33 66 33 66 33 233 99 33 5.0 7.5 2.5 2.5 5.0 2.5 5.0 2.5 17 .5 7.5 2.5 �-18Table 10.--Reside~ce of Duck and Goose Hunters Hunting in Each County. (Cont'd). County where hunted Kiowa (cont'd) Kit Carson County residence of hunters Larimer Logan Morgan Prowers Pueblo Sedgwick Washington Yuma 32 32 35 14.3 14.3 14.2 Denver Kit Carson 227 34 68 102 100.0 33.3 ..66.7 100.0 98 98 32 100.0 100.0 3.8 129 15.4 161 486 32 840 19.2 57.8 3.8 100.0 34 34 68 33 130 '65 227 33 488 50.0 50.0 100.0 6.7 26.7 13.3 46.6 6.7 100.0 33 33 551 33 650 5.0 5.0 85.0 5.0 100.0 32 16.7 32 131 195 16.7 66.6 100.0 33 33 100.0 100.0 La Plata La Plata Larimer Arapahoe _ Boulder Denver E1 Paso Jefferson Larimer Moffat .... Las Animas Logan Mesa Hoffat Montezuma Duck Hunters No. % Adams La Plata Pueblo Boulder Denver Jefferson Logan Phillips Adams Alamosa Hesa Ouray Denver Lake Mesa Moffat Montezuma Goose Hunters No. % 66 -33 99 99 133 33 33 33 1,324 35 5.0 2.5 7.5 7.5 10.0 2.5 2.5 2.5 100.0 100.0 35 100.0 33 25.0 33 33 33 25.0 25.0 25.0 132 34 100.0 20.0 134 168 33 66 33 100 265 80.0 100.0 12.5 25.0 12.5 37.5 12.5 100.0 100 33 133 75.0 25.0 100.0 33 33.3 67 99 66.7 100.0 .- 33- �-190:Table 10 •. ~~Residence of Duck and Goose. Httnters Hunting in Each County. (Cont'd). County where hunted Montrose Morgan Otero County residence of hunters Denver Montrose San 11iguel Teller Arapahoe Chaffee Denver Moffat Morgan Weld Denver Otero Pueblo Weld Park El Paso Park Prowers Adams Boulder Denver E1 Paso Jefferson Larimer Mesa Morgan Otero Prowers Pueblo Rio Grande Pueblo Las Animas Pueblo Rio Blanco Jefferson Morgan Rio Blanco Rio Grande Alamosa Boulder Lake Rio Grande Duck Hunters % No. 32 294 32 32 390 8,3 75.1 ·8.3 8,3 100.0 61 10.6 305 52.6 213 36,8 579 100.0 197 99 33 329 60.0 30.0· 10.0 100.0 34 34 68 50.0 50.0 100.0 ..-. 162 65 71.4 28.6 227 100.0 193 193 32 33 33 98 100.0 100.0 33.3 33.3 33.4 100.0 33 33 263 329 10.0 10.0 80.0 100,0 Goose Hunters % No. 33 33 50.0 50.0 66 100.0 32 132 33 132 33 362 9.0 36,4 9.1 36,4 9.1 100.0 38 150 112· 12.5 50.0 37.5 300 100.0 33 98 199 165 67 98 33 33 33 395 199 33 1 386 35 2.4 7.1 14.3 11.9 4.8 7.1 2.4 2.4 2.4 28.5 14.3 2.4 100.0 100.0 35 100.0 31 50.0 31 62 50.0 100.0 �-20Table 1O.--Residence of Duck and Goose Hunters Hunting in Each County. (Cont'd). County where hunted Routt County residence of hunters Larimer Moffat Saguache San Higuel Sedgwick 50.0 50.0 100.0 34 68 102 33.3 66.7 100.0 San Miguel 33 33 100.0 100.0 Arapahoe Clear Creek Denver Phillips Sedgwick 32 32 66 32 261 12.5 12.5 25.0 12.5 37.5 100.0 34 34 62 63 125. 100.0 100.0 50.0 50.0 100.0 292 65 97 874 32 162 975 2 l}97 11.7 2.6 3.9 35.0 1.3 6.5 39.0 100.0 68 34 102 66.7 33.3 100.0 Alamosa Saguache E1 Paso tlashington Morgan Washington Weld 99 Adams Arapahoe Boulder Denver E1 Paso Jefferson Weld Yuma Kit Carson Yuma byt __ Goose Hunters No. % 32 32 64 Teller Prepared Duck Hunters No. % J_a_c_k_R_._G_r_i_eb -" " 35 35 , 100.0 100.0 35 100.0 35 100.0 33 5.6 33 197 5.6 33.3 328 591 55.5 100.0 35 35 100.0 100.0 J_U_l~y~,_1~9~6~3 -- Approved byt_ Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Date .. .' _ Aid Coordinator �July, 1963 -23- JOB COMPLErION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO Pro ject No. ...:;W:----=8-=8_-..:.R:....--=8 ---=:_-=.:Vl..:.a:...:t-=e..:.r..:::f-=o...:;w..:::l:..... Work Plan No. 1 Job No 9 --------------~-~-~~-------~--------- Title of Job: Period Covered: 0 Survey of Potential Public Waterfowl Shooting Areas in Colorado. April 1, 1962 to March 31, 1963. ABSTRACT Results of the wetlands inventory and habitat evaluation of the irrigated portion of the South Platte and Arkansas Valleys and the eastern slope as a whole reveal that: 1. The average section in the South Platte Valley contains 1.50 wetlands (52 acres), 0.19 miles of streams and rivers, and 0.71 miles of ditches and canals. These same figures for the Arkansas Valley are 1.09 (116.3 acres), 0.40, and 0.31, respectively. 2. Total projected numbers of wetlands by category for the irrigated portion of the South Platte Valley is as follows: lakes and reservoirs, 640; ponds and marshes over five acres, 937; ponds and marshes less than five acres, 1,701. These same figures for the irrigated portion of the Arkansas Valley are 14, 77, and 531, respectively. 3. Total estimated wetlands for the irrigated portion of the eastern slope amount to 240,053 acres, with 856 miles of streams and rivers and 2,049 miles of ditches and canals. 4. Riverbottoms make up 50 per cent of the total wetland acreage Platte Valley and almost 70 per cent in the Arkansas Valley. 5. An estimated 46 per cent of all wetlands over five acres in size in the South Platte Valley are open to public hunting, another 17.2 per cent is leased for hunting, and the rest are not open to hunting except by the landowner or his personal friends. An estimated 8.2 per cent are leased for fishing. in the South �-246. An estimated 20 per cent of all wetlands over five acres in size in the South Platte Valley are privately leased for one or more recreational uses. Hunting rights are leased on 86 per cent of these wetlands. The remaining 15 per cent are leased for fishing or boating only. It appears that hunting is the primary purpose for leasing wetlands. 7· In the South Platte Valley, there is an increase in public hunting privileges with an increase in distance from the foothills and/or Denver. There is also a decrease in the number and acres of wetlands leased as hunting acres. 8. An estimated 82 per cent of all wetlands over five acres in size in the Arkansas Valley are open to public hunting, with the remainder closed to hunting except by the landowner or his personal friends. No leasing of wetlands for hunting or fishing was found on the study sections. 9. Only 7·3 per cent of the sample wetlands over five acres in size are under public ownership in the irrigated portion of the eastern slope. Recommendations: 1. WE MUST BEGIN AN ACTIVE AND AGGRESSIVE PROGRAM OF LOCATING, EVALUATING, AND ACQUIRING WETLAND TYPE PUBLIC HUNTING AREAS. Lease and purchase of lands for wildfowl hunting is probably at an all time low. Much of this can be attributed to the restrictive waterfowl hunting regulations. Nevertheless, we should take advantage of this situation by concentrating our acquisition efforts in this field so we will be prepared when more liberal regulations will increase lease and purchase activities of private individuals. 2. AN lliJITIALPUBLIC HUNTING AREA ACQUISITION PROGRAM SHOULD FIRST BE CONCENTRATED WITHIN REASONABLE DISTANCE OF CENTERS OF POPULATION. We highly recommend tvo sites for consideration in the South Platte Valley: (1) the St. Vrainriverbottom from the U. S. Highway 87 bridge to its confluence with the South Platte River; and (2) that portion of land lying between Latham and Milton Reservoirs southeast of Greeley. Both areas have excellent potentials in regard to waterfowl and upland game. 3. WE SHOULD INITIATE AN ACQUISITION PROGRAM IN THE ARKANSAS VALLEY AS SOON AS POSSIBLE TO TAKE ADVANTAGE OF THE INCREASED RECREATION POTENTIAL OF THIS AREA AS A RESULT OF THE FRYINGPAN -ARKANSAS PROJECT. Perhaps the most important single area from a recreational standpoint is Lake Meredith. Some excellent wetlands development can be undertaken on the west end both for waterfowl production and hunting. We should attempt to gain control of this area at the first opportunity. 4. WE MUST ADVANCE OUR KNOWLEDGE OF HOW BEST TO DEVELOP WETLANDS FOR WATERFOWL AND AS PUBLIC HUNTING AREAS. Special emphasis should be given to studies relating to habitat development and hunting on the State-owned Tamarack Ranch in Logan County to determine the feasibility of acquisition of riverbottom tracts. �Only a summary of the objectives given in the report of January, 1961 will be presented here: To determine the amount of wetlands in ColoradoJ begirming with the irrigated portion of the eastern slope. (2) To determine the nurriberand amount of wetland areas leased for hunting, fishing) and other recreational purposes. To set up a method to rate wetland areas in terms of value for acquisition as public hunting areas. (4) To establi.sh a priority list of public hunting areas for presentation to the Commission. Procedures: Al.L methods remained the same as explained in the 1961 report. The South Plat~and Arkansas Valleys constitute the major portion of the irrigated land.of significance on the eastern slope of Colorado These were the only two regions to be included. in the "Sirrvey of Potential Publi.c Waterfowl Shooting Areasn on the eastern slope. The wetlands survey of the South Platte Valley was conducted during the past three summers (1960-1962) Re su.Lt;sare presented in the job completion report of JanuarYJ 1963. Work conducted in the Arkansas Valley was completed in the spring of 1963 and the findings are presented in this report. Included are summarizations and conclusions for the irrigated portion of the eastern slope as a whole. 0 0 Counties included in the Arkansas Valley survey that contain significant amounts of irri.gated.land are as follows: Bent, Crowley J Otero) Prowers, and Pueblo. This survey was conducted on a county by county basisJ in which the irrigated portion of each county constituted one study area. The study areas for the five count.Les comprised a total of 965 sections or 617 J 600 acres of i.rrigated land. The location of this acreage is shown in Figure 1. Two study sections were randomly seLec+ed from each township of irrigated Land.,making a total of 53 study sections for the irrigated portion of the Arkansas Valley. Table 1 shows the nurriberof study sections in each county. Table 1.,--Nuniberof Study Sections in the Irrigated Portion of Counties in the Arkansas Valley • NUmber of County Study Sections each of Five ~~~~~----~----------------------------------- . Bent Crowley Otero Prowers Pueblo TOIAL 12 '7 12 16 6 53 Per Cent 2206 13.2 2206 30.3 11.,3 10000 �~ 0\ I Figure l.--Location of irrigated portion of the Arkansas Valley, Colorado. �-27SURVEY OF PorENTIAL PUBLIC WATERFOWL SHOOTING .ABID\.S RichardM. Hopper The results represented herein include information obtained from 53 study sections in the Arkansas Valley. These are later incorporated with 137 study sections in the South Platte Valley in order to present a summary and conclusions for the entire eastern slope. Amount of wetlands Tables 1-5 in the appendix list acres and miles of wetlands in individual counties. Study sections revealed that stream and river habitats make up the majority of wetland acreage in all counties except Crowley. Stream and river habitats in Crow~ey County accounted for only 22.1 per cent of the wetland acreage in the sample for that county, while the other counties ranged from 65.1 per cent in Bent County to 99.5 per cent in Pueblo County. In Crowley County, lakes and reservoirs, which comprised 75.6 per cent of the sample wetland acreage, are much more important than streams and rivers. The two counties with the lowest percentages of stream and river habitat, Crowley and Bent, are the only ones with appreciable acreages of lakes and reservoirs. The noticeable lack of lakes and reservoirs accounts for the importance of riverbottoms in the other three counties. Riverbottom land in Pueblo County amounted to an average of slightly over 200 acres per study section, more than twice as much as the next highest county. The importance of this wetland category in Pueblo County was brought out in the above paragraph which stated that 99.5 per cent of the wetland acreage consisted of streams and rivers and their associated marginal land. The significance of stream and river habitat in Pueblo county, as opposed to the other counties, can be explained by the restriction of irrigated land to a relatively narrow band on either side of the Arkansas River. Irrigated land in the other counties tends to broaden as you go eastward, with riverbottom sections becoming a less important part of the total area. The above situation is just the opposite of conditions in the South Platte Valley, where irrigated land is restricted to a narrower band along the river as you proceed eastward. Floodplains produced by a system of streams and rivers at the western edge of this valley resulted in an extensive area of flat land suitable for irrigated farming. This network of streams and rivers flows into the South Platte River forming one large channel and a relatively narrow valley east of Greeley. The Arkansas River receives few major tributaries from Pueblo to the Kansas State Line. Rough topography and a narrow valley prevent extensive irrigated farming in PUeblo County, but the valley gradually broadens and becomes flatter in the remaining counties. �Table 2.--Total Water Composition of 53 Study Sections in the Irrigated Portion of the Arkansas Valley. Wetland Category No. Ave. Surface Acres of Water Ave. Acres of Marginal Land Lakes and reservoirs 4 0.08 1,649.6 31.12 0 Ponds and marshes over 5 acres 4 0.08 13.1 0.25 196.5 Ponds and marshes less than 5 acres1/ 29 0.55 - -- -- Streams and rivers 21 0.40 175.6 3.31 4,095.9 Total Acres Ave. 1,649.6 31.12 3.71 219.6 4.14 - 23.2 0.44 4,271.5 80.59 Ave~ 0 Ave. 21.37 0.40 I Ditches and canals -- -- -- TOTALS 5827 1.09 1,838.3 34.68 4,292.4 77.28 80.99 1/ Only total acres of wetland was determined for each of these smaller areas. 2/ Miles Excluding ditches and canals. 6,163.9-2/ 116.30 16.22 0.31 37.59 0.71 ro 0> I �Table 3.--Proportion of Total Wetlands in each Wetland Category for 53 Study Sections in the Irrigated Portion of the Arkansas Valley. % Acres of Marginal Land % Total Acres % Wetland Category No. % Surface Acres of Water Lakes and reservoirs 4 6.9 1,649.6 89.7 0 0 1,649.6 26.7 Ponds and marshes over 5 acres 4 6.9 l3.l 0.7 196.5 4.6 219.6 3.6 Ponds and marshes less than 5 acres.Y 29 50.0 -- -- -- - 23.2 0.4 Streams and rivers 21 36.2 175.6 9.6 4,095.9 95.4 4,271.5 Ditches and canals -- -- -- -- -- - -- TOTALS 582:.7100.0 1,838.3 100.0 4,292.4 100.0 6,163.9-" 11 :?:.I Only total acres of wetland was determined for each of these smaller areas. Excluding ditches and canals. 27 Miles 10. 69.3 21.37 56.9 -- 16.22 43.1 100.0 37.59 100.0 ~ \0 I �-30Tables 2 and 3 present the combined water composition and proportion of total wetlands in each wetland category for all study sections in the irrigated portions of the Arkansas Valley. A total of 58 wetland areas, excluding ditches and canals, were observed on 53 study sections, resulting in an average of 1009 wetlands per section. Total acres of wetlands on these study sections amounted to 6,163.9 acres, or 116.30 acres per square mile. Average miles of running water per square mile were found to be 0040 for streams and rivers and 0.31 for ditches and canals. Ponds and marshes of less than five acres seem to be the predominant wetlands in regard to number-s in the Arkansas Valley , just as they were in the South Platte Valley. Fifty percent of the 58 wetland areas in the sample fell in tbds category (Table 3). However, these areas contributed only 0.4 per cent of the total acres of wetlands. Lakes and reservoirs accounted for approximately 90 per cent of the total surface acres of water, while streams and rivers, with their large acreages of associated bottom lands, made up about 95 per cent of the total acres of marginal lando Stream and river habitats constituted almost 70 per cent of the total wetland acreage on the study sections, followed by lakes and reservoirs with about 27 per cent. Together, these two wetland categories comprised 96 per cent of the total wetland acreage. This is perhaps why the Arkansas Valley can never be an important waterfowl production area in Colorado in its present condition. It simply does not contain sufficient amounts of production habitat such as that found in the San Luis Valley and parts of the South Platte Valley. However, high quality production habitat could be developed on the marginal land bordering reservoirs and riverchannels • The importance of riverbottomsand lakes and reservoirs to wintering ducks and geese and to waterfowl hunters in the Arkansas Valley is evident. The development of a combination of waterfowl production, and wintering and hunting habitat on these areas should yield results equal to that in any other portion of the state. Additional discussion concerning this subject will be presented later in the report. Table 4 presents a summary of wetlands composition of 53 study sections and total projected acres and miles of wetlands in the irrigated portion of the Arkansas Valleyo The amount of irrigated land in each county increases in a west to east direction, with Pueblo County supporting the least acreage (71,680) and Prowers County the greatest (179,200). As mentioned earlier, the gradual broadening of the valley from west to east explains this situation. Total acres of wetlands per study section ranged by county as follows: Prowers (53088), otero (82016), Bent (134.24), Crowley (205.90), and Pueblo (210.63). The lower acreage in Prowers County is explained by an absence of lakes and reservoirs and by the smaller width of the Arkansas River and associated riverbottom surrounded by broad expanses of irrigated land. The width of the river and its marginal land decreases below John Martin Dam, resulting in fewer acres of riverbottom per mile in Prowers County as compared to the area above this large reservoir. The riverbottom is wide in otero County, but the large amount of irrigated land on either side reduces the average. wetland acreage per square mile. Bent County also supports a large area of irrigated land on both sides of the river, but the presence of John Martin Reservoir increases the average wetland acreage persection:ibr this county. The �Table 4.--Summary of Wetlands Composition of the Irrigated Portion of the Arkansas Valley. 1/ County Total Irrigated LandAcres Sections Total Acres of Wetland~ Av. Acres/Section in Sample 2/ Total Projected Acres 10. Bent 225 144,000 134.24 ±. 144.5421 21.0 + 22.6 30,204 ±. 32,522 Crowley 133 85,120 205.90 + 224.36 32.2 + 35.1 27,385 :t 29,840 Otero 215 137,600 82.16 + 67.70 12.8 + 10.6 17,664 ±. 14,556 Prowers 280 179,200 53.88 + 49.86 8.4 + 7.8 15,086 ±. 13,961 Pueblo 112 71,680 210.63 + 209.82 32.9 + 32.8 23,590 :t 23,500 TOTALS 965 617,600 116.11 + 18.1 + 112,046 + 46,281 1/ Study areas from which sample sections were selected. 2/ Excluding ditches and canals. 3/ + t .05 standard errors. I w I-' I 47.96 7.5 �Table 4.--Sunnnary of Wetlands Composition of the Irrigated Portion of the Arkansas Valley (continued). County Total Irrigated Land Y Sections Acres Streams and Rivers Av. Miles! Total Section Projected in Sample Miles Ditches and Canals Av. Miles! Total Section Projected in Sample Miles Bent 225 144,000 3/ 0.26 :!: 0.40- 58.50 + 90.•00 0.28 :!: 0.34 63.00 :!: 76.50 Crowley 133 85,120 0.39 + 0.46 - 51.87 + 61.18 0.06 ±. 0.14 7.98 :!:. 18.62 Otero 215 137,600 0.53 :!: 0•. 40 - 113.95 :!:. 86.00 116.10 + 98.90 Prowers 280 179,200 0.28 :!: 0.32 78.40 + 89.•60 - 0.27 + 0.27 - 0.54 + 0.46 75.60 :!: 75.60 Pueblo 112 71,680 0.81 :!: 0.74 90.72 :!:. 82.88 0.30 :!:. 0.58 33.60 :!: 64.96 TOTALS 965 617,600 0.40 :!:. 0.17 386.00 +164.05 - 0.31 :!:. 0.15 299.15 :!:114.75 1/ 2/ 3/ -.. Study areas from which sample sections were selected. Excluding ditches and canals. + t .05 standard errors. I lA.l J\) I �-33irrigated portionof Crowley County maintains a large reservoir acreage (Lake Meredith and Lake Henry) and considera-ble river-bottom area to account for its hf.gh acreage of 'Net lands • Pueblo County contains no lakes or reservoirs in the irrigated por-tLon , but. the relatively narrow strip of ix-rigated land on either side of the Arkansas River yields a high average wetland. a::::reage per square mile in the form of riverbottom areas. The + t. 005 standard error value following each average figure indicates, in most~·casesJ wide variati.ons among study sections wi thin the counties. These variations are undoubtedly the result of relatively small sample sizes for the indiv::Ldualcounties. GenerallYJ with an increase in sample size the standard error value -becomes smaller in comparison to the o"bserved mean (average) value. When the sample sizes for all counties were combined in order to determine average acres of wetlands per sample section for the irrigated portion of the Arkansas Valley, a relatively smaller t.05 standard error value was obtained (116.30 + 47.96). This resulted in a total projected wetland acreage of 1120046 +" 46,281 or 18.1 + 7.5 per cent of the irrigated portion of the Arkansas Valley. . - - Streams or rivers were present in only 20, or 37.8 per cent~ of the 53 study sections Large numbers of study sections with zero mile s of streams or rivers con+r-tbut.ed greatly to the large variation about the average number of miles per section for each county and for all counties com-bined (Table 4). Average miles of streams and rivers per sample section for all five counties was 0.40 + Oo17p with a projected f'Lgur'eof 386000 + 164.05 miles for the irrigated p·ortion of the Arkansas Valley 0 0 Intensity of irrigated farming appears to increase -by ccunty as follows according to average miles of ditches and canals per study section: Crowley (0.06), Prowers (0.27), Bent (0.28), Pueb Lo (0.30), and otero (0.54). Ditches and canals averaged 0.31 ± 0.15 miles per study section for all counties, resulting in a total estims.ted figure of 299.15'" 144.75 for the irrigated portion of the South Platte Valley (Table 4). ~and types Each ·"retlandarea over five acres in size was classified according to the 20 types described 'by :tJf.artin et a1. (1953) • Only four types were encountered in the five major counties or" the Arkansas Valley. Other types are undoubtedly present:; especially if wetlands of less than five a.cres are considered. Brief descriptions of thes'2 four types were present in the previous two reports, but they are repeated here for easy reference. (1) Type 1 _.-Seasonally flocd.ed basins or flats Soil is covered with water or waterlogged during variable seasonal periodsJ but well drained during much of the growing season. Located on river·,bottoms} along borders of dr-awn-down reservoirs ~ and in shallow potholes and other shallow upland depressions. The vegetative cover normally consists of grassesJ sedges, smartweeds, and annual weeds. �-34(2) Type 3 -- Shallow Fresh Marshes Soil is normally waterlogged and sometimes covered with as much as six inches of water during the growing season. They may nearly fill shallow lake basins, potholes, or sloughs, may border deep marshes on the landward side of such depressions, or may adjoin irrigation systems. Common plants consist of grasses, sedges, rushes, bulrushes, spikerushes, cattail, arrowhead, and smartweeds. (3) Type 4 -- Deep fresh marshes Marshy depressions covered with one to three feet of water during the growing season. These deep marshes may nearly fill shallow lake baSins, potholes, or sloughs, or may border open water in such depressions. Emergent. vegetation includes such plants as cattails, reeds, and bulrushes. In open areas, pondweeds, naiads, coontail, water-milfoil, waterweeds, duckweeds, or other acquat.Lc.smay occur. (4) Type 5 -- Open fresh water Open water 0:(' variable depth that has emergent vegetation restricted to a narrow border. Ponds, lakes, and reservoirs are included in this type. Open water may completely occupy lake and pond bas tns , potholes, sloughs , ditches, canals, or stream beds, or it may be fringed with marsh. Vegetation (mainly at depths of less than six feet) includes pondweeds) naiads, coontail, watermilfoil, and muskgrasses. In regard to numbers, nType 111 wetlands appear to be more common in the Arkansas Valley than other types with respect to water areas over five acres in size (Table 5). They made up about 60 per cent of these larger wetlands in the 53 study sections, while nType 5n constituted only about 29 percent. "Type 3 and 4n combined accounted for little more than 10 per cent of the total number of wetland areas in the study sections. This may be expected, since riverbottoms (nType In) were the most abundant of the wetlands over five acres and numbers of ponds, lakes and reservoirs (nType 5'°) were conspicuously low in the Arkansas Valley (Tables 2 and 3). In addition, numbers of marshes over five acres ("Types 3 and 4n) were very low. Table 5 also present a comparison of the South Platte and Arkansas Valleys with respect to wet.landtypes. Contrasted to the Arkansas Valley, "Type 5n wetlands (57.3 percent) in the South Platte Valley were more common in regard to numbers than "Type 1" wetlands (20.9 percent). This situation exists because ponds, lakes, and reservoirs are noticeably more abundant in the latter area, while riverbottoms occur with greater frequency in the Arkansas Valley. Marshes in general, are undoubtedly less numerous in the Arkansas Valley, because of fewer ponds, lakes, reservoirs, ditches, and canals from which seepage can occur to produce marshy areas too wet for cultivation. Also, more intensively farmed lands in the South Platte Valley produce an excess of irrigation waste-water which contributes greatly to the formation of ponds and marshes in many depressions. �-35nType In wetlands in the Arkansas Valley also contributed more acres than any of the other types (Table 5). This type constituted 68.6 per cent of the total acreage in the study sections, disregarding areas less than five acres. nType 5n wetlands made up only 28.3 per cent, with a total for both types of 9609 per cent. Only about three per cent of the total wetland acreage in the study sections was composed of marsh types, further indication of limited waterfowl production habitat in this area. Recreational uses A total of 28 wetland areas over five acres were rated for recreational and wildlife values. Types of recreational use of the wetlands~ whether private, public .•leased, or none, in the Arkansas Valley as a whole are presented in Table 6. Hunting, fishing, or boating rights were listed as "none" when landowners indicated that recreationists could not obtain permission for this privileges or when conditions were not suitable to allow such activities. Table 8 shows the type of ownership of the 28 wetlands. These tables are discussed below. Hunting -- Although hunting on wetlands is not necessarily restricted to waterfowl shooting~ ducks and geese are normally of primary concern where water areas occur and any interpretations or conclusions to follow will emphasize this type of hunting. Of the 28 large wetlands that occurred in the study sections, 23, or 82.1 per cent are open to public hunting (Table 6). This number amounts to 83.3 per cent of the total wetland acreage in the study sections, excluding areas less than five acres in size. None of the 28 wetlands is leased for hunting. Areas where no hunting of any kind is allowed account for most of the.remaining percentage. There is a definite contrast between the South Platte and Arkansas Valleys concerning hunting opportunity. Although hunting information for the South Platte Valley was presented in the previous report, a short summary of findings is given here for comparison with the Arkansas Valley. Only 51, or 46.4 per cent,of 110 wetlands that occurred in study sections of the South Platte Valley are open to public hunting (Table 7). This number yields 60 per cent of the total wetland acreage in the sample, excluding areas less than five acres. Nineteen, or 17.2 per cent, of these 110 wetlands are leased for hunting. Almost one-fourth (2300 per cent) of the total wetland acreage is leased. There isa general increase in public hunting privileges with an increase in distance from the foothills and Denver in the South Platte Valley. In this same direction there appears to be a decrease in the number and acres of wetlands leased as hunting areas. �· 1/ Table 5.--Comparison of Wetland Type Classification of Water Area~ on Sample Sections on the Eastern Slope of Colorado. Wetland Type 3 4 No. % No. 1 Area South Platte Valley Arkansas Valley TOTALS 1/ 5 Total r. No. r. No. % 21 19.1 63 57.3 110 100.0 7.2 1 3.5 8 28.6 28 100.0 3.5 22 16.0 71 51.5 138 100.0 No. % 23 20.9 3 2.7 17 60.7 2 40 29.0 5 Excluding ponds and marshes less than five acres and ditches and canals. J, , 0\ Table 5.--Continued. Wetland Type 1 3 4 5 Area Acres 7. Acres % Acres % Acres 7. Total -% Acres South Platte Valley 3,577.7 51.5 36.6 0.5 351.8 5.1 2~975.8 42.9 6,941.9 100.0 4,204.4 68.6 164.9 2.7 26.9 0.4 1,730.8 28.3 6,127.0 100.0 7,782.1 59.6 201.5 1.5 378.7 2.9 4,706.6 36.0 13,068.9 100.0 Arkansas Valley TOTALS 1/ Excluding ponds and marshes less than five acres and ditches and canals. �1/ Table 6.--Recreationa1 Uses of 28 Wetland Areas- in the Irrigated Portion of the Arkansas Valley. Boating Acres No. Fishing Acres 7e- 7. No. % Type of Use No. Hunting Acres % Private 1 3.6 171.3 2.8 0 - 0 - 0 - 0 Public 23 82.1 5~106.8 83.3 5 17•. 9 1,669.6 27.2 2 7.1 560.1 9.1 Leased 0 - 0 - 0 - 0 2 7.1 1,089.5 17.8 None 4 14.3 848.9 13.9 2;.1 - 82.1 4,457.4 72.8 24 85.8 4,477 .4 73.1 '7.. 3/ % I VJ TOTALS 1/ 28 100.0 6,127.0 100.0 28 100.0 6,127.0 100.0 Excluding ponds and marshes less than five acres and ditches and canals. 2/ Not suitable for fishing. 3/ Not suitable for boating. 28 100.0 6,127.0 100.0 ~ I �1/ Table 7.--Combined Recreational Use of 110 Wetland Areas- in the Irrigated Portion of the South Platte Valley. Type of Use Private Public Leased None No. 20 51 19 20 Hunting Acres % 18.2 46.4 17.2 18.2 %. Fishing Acres No. % Boatin~ Acres %. %. No. % 474.3 6.7 7 6.4 304.7 4.3 1 0.9 191.7 2.7 4,243.3 60.2 31 28.2 2,259.3 32.0 7 6.4 1,416.5 20.1 1,624.0 23.0 9 8.2 429.6 6.1 7 6.4 459.4 6•. 5 712.1 10.1 63 57.2 4,060.1 57.6 9sY 86.3 4,986.1 70.7 I TOTALS 1/ 2/ w 110 100.0 7,053.7 100 •.0 110 100.0 7,053.7 100.0 110 100.0 7,053.7 100.0 Excluding ponds and marshes less than five acres and ditches and canals. All except five of these wetlands are unsuitable for speed-boating and water skiing because of their small size or because they are streams or rivers. CP I �~39 Fishing-- Only about 18 per cent of the number and 27·per cent of the acreage of sample wetlands over five acres in size are suitable for sport fishing. All of these are open to the public. The remaining 82 per cent and 73 per cent, respectively, provide little or no. fishing because game-fish populations are restricted due to shallow or turbid waters (Table 6). In the South Platte Valley, where ponds, lakes, and reservoirs are more abundant, about 57 percent of the number and acres of sample wetlands over five acres in size are unsuitable for fishing (Table 7). Only 66 percent of the remaining wetlands are open to public fishing, with the others divided about equally between private and leased fishing. Boating-Numbers of lakes and reservoirs of sufficient size for speedboating are definitely limited in the irrigated portion of the Arkansas Valley. Almost 86 per cent of the 28 sample wetlands are totally un.suitable for speed-boating and water-skiing because of their small size or because they are streams or rivers. Of the four remaining areas, public and leased boating constituted two wetlands each. Boating information for the South Platte Valley shows very close agreement with that in the Arkansas Valley (Tables 5 and 7). Type of ownership -- Table 8 shows the type of ownership of the 28 sample wetlands over five acres in size. Together, private and corporat.ion or company ownership represents 26, or 92.8 per cent of these wetlands. Only two (7.2 per cent) are owned by the public. Almost identical percentages were found in the South Platte Valley. These figures would undoubtedly be representative if they included all lands in the irrigated portions of these two valleys, but they appear to be disproportionate when only wetlands are considered. Recreation is one of the most important uses of wetlands and it would seem desirable to have a higher percentage of wetlands in public ownership. Yet, in the South Platte Valley, most recreationists are constantly· trying to obtain permission from private landowners or are faced with the problem of losing public use of wetlands through leasing. Public ownership or management rights of 25 per cent of the larger wetlands would probably not be too great a figure to strive for in the future. At any rate, wetlands for public recreation should meet the demand presently and in the future, regardless of the percentage of total wetland acreage needed to fulfill this objective. Table 8.--Type of Ownership of 28 Wetland Areas~ the Arkansas Valley. Type of Ownership Number Corporation or Company Private Public TOTALS !I in the Irrigated Portion of Per cent 6 20 2 100.0 Excluding ponds and marshes less than five acres and ditches and canals. �Table 9.--Summary of Wetlands Inventory Data for the Irrigated Portion of the Eastern Slope of Colorado. Area South Platte Valley No. % Wetland Criterion No. of study sections 137 Arkansas Valley No. % 53 Total for Eastern Slope No. % 190 No. of wetlands/study section1! lakes and reservoirs ponds and marshes over 5 acres ponds and marshes less than 5 acres streams and rivers 1.50 0.26 0.38 0.69 0.16 17.6 25.4 46.3 10.7 1.09 0.08 0.08 0.55 0.50 6.9 6.9 50.0 36.2 1.38 0.21 0.29 0.65 0.23 15.•2 21.3 47.2 16.3 Acres of wetlands/study section1! lakes and reservoirs ponds and marshes over 5 acres ponds and marshes less than 5 acres streams and rivers 51.93 19.44 5.29 1.26 25.94 37.4 10.2 2.4 50.0 116.30 31.12 4.14 0.44 80.59 26.7 3.6 0.4 69.3 69.89 22.70 4.97 1.03 41.19 32.5 7.1 1.5 58.9 Total wetland percentage/study 8.1 sectionl/ Miles of streams and rivers/study section Miles of ditches and canals/study section Total sections of irrigated land Total acres of irrigated land Total projected no. of lakes and reservoirs Total projected no. of ponds and marshes over 5 acres Total projected no. of ponds and marshes less than 5 acres Total projected acres of wetlands.!! Total projected miles of streams and rivers Total projected miles of ditches and canals 1/ 2/ Excluding ditches and canals. Actual count. 18.1 10.9 I +:- 0 I 0.19 0.71 2,465 1,577 ,600 640 0.40 0.31 965 617,600 / 14! 0.25 0.60 3,430 2,195,200 654 937 77 1,014 1,701 128,007 469.99 1,750.15 531 112,046 386.00 299.15 2,232 240,053 855.99 2,049.30 �-41- Summary of Eastern Slo:pe Data~ A summary of wetlands inventory data is :presented by area in Table 9 for final com:parison and analysis. The average number of wetlands :per study section in the South Platte Valley (1.50) was 37.6 :per cent higher than in the Arkansas Valley (1.09). This difference is due to the much higher density of :ponds, marshes, lakes and reservoirs in the South Platte Valley. More intensive irrigation in this area as com:pared to the Arkansas Valley results in the need for numerous lakes, reservoirs, ditches, and canals. See:page from these water areas and excess irrigation water :produce many :ponds and marshes of variable size. An indication of this contrast is found in Table 9, which shows an average of 0.26 lakes and reservoirs and 0.38 :ponds and marshes over five acres :per study section in the South Platte Valley, as compared to only 0.08 for each of these wetland categories in the Arkansas Valley. Ponds and marshes less than five acres in size accounted for about 50 :per cent of the sam:ple wetlands in both areas, but the average number :per study section was somewhat higher in the South Platte Valley. The greater number of streams and rivers :per study section in the Arkansas Valley (0.40) com:pared to that in the South Platte Valley (0.16) results from the smaller amount of irrigated land associated with the Arkansas River. This smaller area of irrigated land bordering the Arkansas River sim:ply yields moreriverbottomsections :per section or irrigated land than in the South Platte Valley with its broad ex:panses of irrigated farmland. The large difference between average acres of wetlands :per study section in the South Platte (51.93) and Arkansas Valleys (116.30) is reflected in the average figures for lakes and reservoirs and streams and rivers for both areas. These figures do not indicate that there are more acres of lakes and reservoirs and streams and rivers in the Arkansas Valley than in the South Platte Valley, quite the contrary, but it sim:ply means that smaller acreage of irrigated land in the Arkansas Valley resulted in more acres of reservoir and riverbottom :per section of irrigated land than in the South Platte Valley. Average miles of streams and rivers :per study section was greater in the Arkansas Valley (0.40) than in the South Platte Valley (0019) for the same reason as discussed above. Average miles of ditches and canals :per section of 0071 and 0.31, res:pectively, for the South Platte and Arkansas Valleys is a reflection of the higher intensity of irrigated farming in the former area. There is a:p:proximatelytwo and one-half times as much irrigated land in the South Platte Valley as in the Arkansas Valley. Total sections or square miles of irrigated land for these two areas amounts to 2,465 and 965, res:pectivelyo These figures result in a total for the eastern slo:pe of 3,430 square miles or 2,195,200 acres of irrigated land. �A major objective of this survey was to determine the amount of wetlands in ColQrado. This end was achieved in the irrigated portion of the eastern slope by projecting figures obtained from study sections in the South Platte and Arkansas Valleys. Total projected numbers of ponds and marshes, and lakes and reservoirs are given in Table 9. An actual count of lakes and reservoirs was obtained in the irrigated portion of the Arkansas Valley because limited data from study sections in regard to this category produced a biased estimate when projected. Total projected acres of wet,lands for these two areas amounted to 128,007 and 112,046, respectively, with a combined figure of 240,053 for the irrigated portion of the eastern slope. Unfortunately, all of this wetland acreage does not represent habitat available to waterfowl on a year-round basis. Study sections revealed that 50 per cent of the total wetland acreage in the South Platte Valley and almost 70 percent of that in the Arkansas Valley consists of streams and rivers and their associated bottom lands. The only permanent, year-round habitat ,supplied by riverbottoms is in the form of stream or river channels and adjoining sloughs, marshes, and oxbows. It is doubtful that such areas make up more than 10 per cent of the total riverbottom acreage, probably considerably less. The remaining 90 percent or more consists of seasonably flooded bottom lands. Flooding generally occurs for a short period in the spring, during which time migrating waterfowl generally utilize these areas in great numbers for feeding and resting. However, these bottom land soils are usually well drained during the remainder of the year. Perhaps the term "potentially flooded bottom lands" should be used~ since modern flood control measures, such as reservoir and dike construction, have kept excess waters in check with limited submergence of marginal land .. This situation has allowed the encroachment of irrigated farming intoriverbottom sections, resulting in an overall reduction in wetlands of this category. The frequency with which marginal lands become flooded to any great extent along major river courses on the eastern slope is extremely low during this modern age. Considering all factors, probably not more than half the total projected wet.Land acreage for the eastern slope is of exf.st.Lng , year-round value waterfowl. Using the figures and percentages given above, total acres of wetland presently of value to waterfowl on a year-round basis in the South Platte and Arkansas Valleys is estimated to be 70,400 and 41,400, respectively, resulting .in a combined figure of about 112,000 acres for the irrigated port,ionof the eastern slope. There remains then, an estimated 128,000 acres of wetlands in the form of riverbottoms in the irrigated portion of the eastern slope which is presently of little or no benefit to waterfowl. However, this wetland acreage holds probably the greatest potential for waterfowl habitat development that exists in Colorado today.. There is plenty available, and every effort ,should be made by this Department to acquire the very best of this type of habitat. Total projected, miles of streams and rivers was somewhat higher for the South Platte Valley (469099) than for the Arkansas Valley (386.00), with a resultant total of 855.99 miles for the irrigated portion of the eastern slope. The much higher mileage of ditches and canals in the South Platte Valley again reflects the greater intensity of irrigated farming in this area as compared to the Arkansas Valley. �-43- Conclusions and Recommendations: Conclusions and recommendations are presented separately for the South Platte and Arkansas Valleys because of somewhat different results obtained from the two surveys. In addition, certain conclusions and recommendations which apply to both areas are discussed under a third heading dealing vrith the irrigated portion of the eastern slope as a whole. South Platte Valley Much of the discussion presented below is a repetition of that found in the report of January, 1963 concerning this subject. However, it is duplicated here to make this section complete and under one cover for the eastern slope of Colorado. Importance of leasing-- Twenty-two, or 20 per cent, of the 110 wetlands involved are leased for one or more recreational uses. Hunting appears to be the prirr~ry purpose for leasing wetlands. Hunting rights are leased on 19 (86 per cent) of these 22 areas, of which 10 are for hunting only. The remaining three areas are leased for fishing or boating only. Since only three leased areas restrict hunting, it is doubtful that much conflict occurs between fishing or boating interests and hunting interests as a result of leasing. This may well be expected, since these sports are active during different periods of the year. Likewise then, conflicts of this nature would seem to be slight where unleased areas are concerned. Leasing of wetlards for hunting, rather than fishing and boating, is apparently the primary cause for the reduction in numbers and acres of wetlands open to public hunting. It is apparent from the information presented in this and other reports, that of the two irrigated regions of eastern Colorado, an acquisition program is most justified in the South Platte Valley. The information presented has shown that leasing of wetlands for hunting is most prominent in counties closest to Denver. Likewise, public hunting increases with an increase in distance from Denver. This suggests that a wetland acquisition program in the immediate future should be concentrated in the counties adjacent to Denver; namely Adams, Boulder, Weld, and Larimer. These areas have the greatest potential public use because of their proximity to the main population centers. Acquisition of wetlands for public use in the above counties would help alleviate the loss of public recreation rights due to leasing. Many more people would be benefited under such a program. We should not overlook the possibility of acquiring public hunting grounds at greater distances from Denver in order to help distribute hunters more evenly throughout the valley and to take some of the pressure away from areas close to the main population center. Wetlands in counties some distance from Denver-Morgan, Logan, Washington, Sedgwick--consist largely of riverbottoms along the South Platte River. These wetlands then, constitute the greatest potential with regard to public hunting areas in this portion of the South Platte Valley. Because the need for public hunting grounds in these northeastern counties is not as critical as close to Denver, it is recommended that time be taken to conduct waterfowl studies on the state-owned Tamarack Ranch in �-44Logan County to determine the feasibility of acqulrlng additional riverbotton tracts in this area. Such studies should include (1) the construction and evaluation of water developments aimed at increasing waterfowl productionand wintering-habitat; (2) the evaluation of waterfowl food-crops planted to attract more birds and to help control depredations; and (3) the determination of methods for improving waterfowl hunting and for obtaining adequate harvests in and along .riverbottoms. There undoubtedly has been a recent decline in the number of wetlands leased for hunting by sportsmen groups because of the poor waterfowl seasons granted in this area in the past few years. Short seasons and very restricted bag limits have hardly made it worthwhile for many sportsmen to buy a duck stamp, not to mention their refusal to spend money on a private huntingsportavailahle only for a limited period. The immediate future holds little promise of more liberal waterfowl seasons than we have experienced lately. For this reason, it is unlikely that leasing of wetlands for hunting will increase, in fact, it should drop very low during this time. With this being the probable situation, our Department should concentrate considerable effort toward locating, evaluating, and acquiring the most attractive wetlands in the next few years so that we will be ready for the public when desirable waterfowl seasons return. Immediate attention should be given to the possible acquisition of two strategically located wetland areas north of Denver. The most .important of these is the St. Vrain Creek in Weld County. The portion of interest consists of about 12-15 miles of riverbottom from Highway 87 northeast to the South Platte River. It presently hosts one of the largest wintering flocks of ducks in the South Platte Valley. The area already contains a fair amount of surfac~ water, but a development program could produce breeding and wintering habitat for waterfowl and upland game that should equal any in the country. Many people from Denver and surrounding communities would reap the benefits of a public shooting area of this type. The second area is also located in Weld County, just south of Greeley. It contains about 10,000 acres of wetland and farmland between Latham and Milton Reservoirs. This area offers a great potential for waterfowl and upland game habitat development. Its nearness to two large reservoirs would produce one of the finest public hunting and waterfowl wintering areas in existence anywhere today. Arkansas Valley Information obtained from study sections indicate that loss of public recreation rights on private lands is not presently affected by leasing in the Arkansas Valley. Apparently the public has little trouble in acquiring permission to go hunting on fishing or private property. This portion of the State has a considerably lower population than the South Platte region, resulting in much lighter hunting and fishing pressures. Likewise, the demand for areas to lease for recreational purposes would be lower. The amount of leasing of wetlands for these uses by various groups or individuals seems to be directly proportional to the hunting or fishing pressure of an area, depending upon which is involved. �-45Although it appears on the surface that the Department does not require an immediate wetlands acquisition program in the Arkansas Valley, there is a definite need for such a program in the very near future. With the advent of the Fryingpan-Arkansas Project we can expect the following chain of events to occur in the Arkansas Valley: (1) more water for municipalities, recreation, and irrigation; (2) large increase in population due to a boost in economy; (3) higher recreational demands, including an increase in hunting pressures; (4) greater demand for public recreation facilities, including hunting areas; (5) increase intensity of irrigated farming; (6) rapid loss of the few remaining wetlands through drainage; and (7) increased value of land, resulting in higher price tags. This project will not be completed for another 10 to 15 years, but we should plan ahead for the future and try to obtain a position on the ground floor. What we do regarding land acquisition in the Arkansas Valley in the next five years may greatly affect future public recreational activities in this area. It is during this period that we will obtain the greatest return from the sportsmen's dollar, because it can be assured that the price of land will not drop. There are presently some excellent wetlands in the Arkansas Valley with great potential for waterfowl and upland game that bear examination. Most of these wetlands are in the form of broad, flat riverbottom areas. Two examplesof such riverbottom sites are on the north side of the Arkansas River just below Pueblo and just above Las Animas. The future Fryingpan-Arkansas Project may affect the present reservoir system in the Arkansas Valley to such an extent that some of the poorer irrigation reservoirs are eliminated entirely. Lake Meredith is an existing reservoir of this nature. A high evaporation rate and shallowness make it an inferior body of water from the irrigation standpoint. However, it is an important hunting, fishing, and boating center in the Valley, and elimination of this reservoir would greatly reduce public recreational opportunities. An attempt should be made by the Department to acquire and preserve this important recreation reservoir. Lake Meredith is a significant waterfowl wintering area and presently a fair number of ducks and other water birds breed and spend the spring and summer here. Because of its shallowness, Lake Meredith produces large beds of emergent vegetation valuable for waterfowl food and cover. Proper management could produce even more food and cover in the form of emergent and submergent vegetation. This condition in combination with the acquisition and development of the meadowland at the west end of the lake could result in one of the greatest multi-purpose wetlands in the country. This meadowland is presently too heavily grazed to permit nesting of large numbers of ducks and other birds. Improvement of breeding and nesting habitat on this area through the development of shallow impoundments interspersed with undisturbed marsh-meadow vegetation would greatly increase waterfowl and upland game production in this region of Colorado. �Eastern Slope At this time it is :felt that we should concentrate most of our efforts on acquiring rather large wetland areas; that is, of no less than one section (640 acres) in Eiize, including drier adjacent areas. Tbis recommendation is based on the reasoning that (1) small wetlands will always exist in irrigated regions, but in the future large wetlands will continue to decrease in size as a result of general agricultural practices and probably be lost forever as waterfowl habitat; (2) it is highly probably that larger wetlands can be purchased at a lower cost per acre than smaller ones; (3) development and maintenance time and costs would undoubtedly be less for several large areas as opposed to many small, scattered areas of about the same total acreage; (4) large wetlands add more to total waterfowl production, wintering habitat, and public hunting area than smaller wetlands; and (5) larger areas are more likely to include a variety of habitat types, thereby producing a variety of game birds for hunting, which further justifies their acquisition. However, this recommendation does not mean that small wetlands should be extirely excluded from an acquisition program, because some of ·these areas with desirable characteristics can be of considerable value. Large reservoirs and lakes are owned by corporations or companies composed of private individuals or groups of farmers who depend upon these waters for irrigation of croplands and their general livelihood, thus the purchasing of such areas by the state is not easy. However, it is possible for the State to lease the recreational rights on many of these areas or to obtain permission to manage the various resources through agreements or similar contractions. For all of the important large reservoirs and lakes not already underState management on the eastern slope an attempt should be made to secure these rights regardless of location, especially those of value as waterfowl wintering areas and as public shooting grounds, while at the same time not overlooking .other recreational potentials. One of the objectives of this survey was to develop a method for rating wetlands in regard to their value for acquisition as public hunting area. Such a rating system can be developed only after the wetlands survey for all import.ant areas of Golorado is completed. This survey is not completed for the eastern slope, and the western slope survey will terminate by the fall of 19630 Therefore, a method for rating wetlands will be available for use by the Department men involved early in 1964. Literature Cited Martin, A. C. N. Hotchkiss, F. M. Uhler, andW. S. Bourn. 1953. Classification of 'Wetlands of the United States. U. S. Dept. Int., Fish and Wild. Servo Spec. Sci. Rpt.; Wildl. No. 20, 14 p. Preparedby: R_i_c_h_a_r_d_M_o_H_o..=p..=p_e_r Approved by: __ W~ayn~_=e-___=W.--:::-S-a_nd-f=o-r-t--: Chief of Game Research Date: ~-------- July, ~L-~~ 1963 _ Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �Table I.--Total Water Composition of 12 Study Sections in Bent County. Ave. Acres of Marginal Land Ave. Total Acres % Ave. Wetland Category No. Ave. Surface Acres of Water Lakes and reservoirs 2 0.17 560.1 46.68 0 0 560.1 34.8 46.68 Ponds and marshes over 5 acres 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Ponds and marshes less than 5 acres1! 4 0.33 -- -- -- -- 1.1 0.1 0.09 -- I .j::"" I 3 0.25 30.9 2.58 1,018.8 84.90 1,049.7 Ditches and canals -- -- -- -- -- -- -- TOTALS 91:./0.75 -- -- -- -- 1,610.~ 1/ Ave. .......:J Streams and rivers 2/ Miles 2/ 65.1 87.48 3.06 0.26 -- -- 3.39 0.28 100.0 134.24 6.45 0.54 Only total acres of wetland was determined for each of these smaller areas. Excluding ditches and canals. ~ § !;! �Table II.--Tota1 Water Composition of Seven Study Sections in Crowley County. No. Ave. Surface Acres of Water Lakes and res ervor is 2 0.29 Ponds and marshes over 5 acres 1 Ponds and marshes 1/ less than 5 acre~ 6 l-le tland Category Streams and rivers Ave. Acres of Marg ina1 Land 1,089.5 155.64 0 0 0.14 8.7 1.24 19.1 0.86 _ ..• -- -- Total Acres % Ave. 1,089 •. 5 75.6 155.64 2•. 73 27.8 1..9 3.97 -- 5.6 0.4 0.80 Ave. Miles Ave. -- -- 4 0.57 18.9 2.70 299.5 42.79 318.4 22.1 45.49 2.70 0.39 cana Ls -- - -- - -- - -- -- -- 0.40 0.06 TOTALS 131:.1 1.86 -- -- -- -- 2/ 1,441.3- 100.0 205.90 3.10 0.44 Ditches and 1/ 2/ Only total acres of wetland was determined for each of these smaller areas. Excluding ditches and canals •. ~ § ~ I .j::"" CP I �Table III.--Total Water Composition of 12 Study Sections in Otero County. Wetland Category No. Ave. Lakes and reservoirs 0 0 Ponds and marshes over 5 acres 1 0.08 Surface Acres of Water Ave. Acres of Marginal Land 0 0 0 2.3 0.19 24.6 Total Acres % Ave. 0 0 0 0 2.05 26.9 2.7 2.44 Ave .• Miles Ave. I ~ \0 Ponds and marshes 1/ less than 5 acres- 11 0.92 -- -- - Streams and rivers 6 0.50 55.8 4.65 - - - 18Y 1.50 -- Ditches and canals TOTALS 1/ 2/ I -- 8.8 0.9 0.73 894.4 74.53 950.2 96.4 79.18 6.37 0.53 -- - -- - -- -- 6.47 0.54 . -- - -- 985.glj 100.0 82.16 12.84 1.07 Only total acres of wetland was determined for each of these smaller areas. Excluding ditches and canals. ~. § !;4 �Table IV.--Tota1 Water Composition of 16 Study Sections in Prowers County. Surface Acres of Water Acres of Marginal Land Total Acres '4 Ave. Wetland Category No. Ave. Lakes and reservoirs 0 0 0 0 Ponds and marshes over 5 acres 2 0.12 241 0.13 Ponds and marshes 1/ less than 5 acres.....:6 0.38 -- - - -- 1.1 0.1 0.07 - -- Streams and rivers 4 0.25 27.1 1.69 668.9 41..81 696.0 80.8 43.50 4.40 0.28 Ditches and canals - - -- -- - - -- -- - 4.18 0•.27 TOTALS lzY 0.75 -- -- -- - 862.rJ! 100.0 53.88 8.58 0.54 1/ 2/ Ave. Ave. 0 0 0 0 0 162.8 10.18 164.9 19.1 10.31 Miles Ave. I Only total acres of wetland was determined for each of these smaller areas. Excluding ditches and canals. I ~ , \J1 0 �Table V.--Total Water Composition of Six Study Sections in Pueblo County. Surface Acres of Water Acres of Marginal Land Wetland Category No •. Ave. Lakes and reservoirs 0 0 0 0 0 Ponds and marshes over 5 acres 0 0 0 0 0 Ave. Total Acres 70- Ave. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Ave. 2 0.33 -- -- -- -- Streams and rivers 4 0.67 42.9 7.15 1~214.3 202.38 -- -- -- - -- -- 6Y 1.00 -- - -- -- TOTALS 1/ II Ave. -- -- I \Jl l-' I Ponds and marshes 1/ less than 5 acre~ Ditches and canals Miles 6.6 0•. 5 1.1 1,257.2 99.5 209.53 1,263.~ 2/ 100.0 210.63 4.84 0.81 1..78 0.30 6•. 62 1.10 Only total acres of wetland was determined for each of these smaller areas. Excluding ditches and canals. i S !;;! � https://cpw.cvlcollections.org/files/original/0a870aba18a9f4efb39dac95cb30ee91.pdf 874df2de5ecf3f4a786a91e6f6190e3c PDF Text Text October, 1963 -1- JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO ----------~----~------------- Project No. W-37-R-16 Work Plan No. 3 Title of Job: Period Covered: Game Bird Survey Job No. 4 Sage Grouse Hunter Check April 1, 1962, to March 31, 1963 ABSTRACT Additional wings from sage grouse of known age and sex were collected at the Cedar Mountain (55 wings) and Walden (74 wings) check stations in August and September of 1962. These increased the total known age and sex wing sample to 266 in 8 molt groups for statistical analysis. There was not a sufficient sample in any single molt group to assure statistical accuracy. A standard normal distribution analysis was used to determine reliability of primary feather measurements to separate males and females within categories. If sage grouse are first aged by primary replacement and then adults and young are sexed by measuring designated primary for each molt group, the probability of misclassification will not exceed 3 per cent in August or 2 per cent in September. A formula is given for correcting this error. A variation of 22 per cent was found between age and sex ratio data determined at check stations and in ~he office. The greatest amount of error may have occurred in classifying young males as adult males or adult females at the check station. Sage grouse were aged by primary replacement in both places, but sex was determined at the check station by undertail covert coloration or gonads, and in the office by measuring wing primaries. Harvest information including hunting pressure, kill per hunter, and hours hunted can be collected along with a wing from each bird by untrained personnel. These wings can them be studied and measured in the office to obtain an accurate age and sex harvest ratio. �-2- Recommendations: Only harvest data dealing with hunting pressure and trend in kill should be collected at checking stations. A sample of wings should also be collected and processed later by qualified personnel to obtain an accurate age and sex harvest ratio. The minimum sample size necessary for accuracy is yet to be determined. Objectives: (1) To collect wings of sage grouse during the open season in all (2) hunting areas. To determine sex and age in the bag from condition, measurements, and molt of primaries, using established procedures. To determine statistical reliability of data obtained. To correlate sex and age data from wing inspections with that obtained at established check stations. Techniques~: Wings were collected at the Cedar Mountain and Walden check stations from grouse whose age and sex had been determined. All wing primaries were measured according to molt group. Data on primary measurements Statistical Center. were analyzed at the Colorado State Uhiversity Correlation between age and sex ratios determined at the check station and through wing measurements was studied. �-3- SAGEGROUSE HUNTER CHEC~ Glenn E. Rogers After an initial analysis of 123 sage grouse wi.ngs , collected in 19.59 and 1960 for determining sex by wing primar,y feather measurement, the statistical section of the Department requested additional wings in all molt groups. For an accurate statistical analysis, a minimumof .50 wing samples would be required in each molt class for each age and sex. Winf Collection: The early sage grouse season opened on August '18, 1962, in Mof at Oourrty , During the first two days of this season, I collected .5.5wings from birds of known age and sex. The wings collected are shown m Table 1 by age, sex, and molt class. All primar,y measurements by molt r,roup fell within those of previously collected wings. Table l.--A SUM'.'!.ARY OF COUECTED WINGSBYAGE, SEX, ANDMOLTFRa1 THE CEDAR MOUNTAIN CHECK STATION,1962. .Ar:,eand Sex 1 2 3 Adult Males Adult Females Young :Males Young Females 4 TOTALS 6 2 Pre: 5 Molt 6 6 14 9 6 7 8 1 1 3 6 2 1 18 2.5 .5 1 During the September season, wings were collected at the 'Walden check station in Jackson County by Charles Stone, Wayne W•• Sandfort, Harold M. Swope, Robert Tully, R. D. Teague, and others. They collected 74 wings of known age and sex as shown in Table 2. TvIO wings feLl completely outside of prevfous measurements, and it is believed that these were errors caused by group participation. Table 2.-A SUMMRY OF COLLECTED WmGSBY AGE, SEX, ANDMOLTFR(].fTHE W}JJ)ENCHECK STATION,1962. Primary M:olt Age and Sex 1 2 Adult Males Adult Females Young Males Young Females 3 6 TOTALS 9 3 7 ti 5 1.5 1 .5 4 3 16 10 2 28 30 7 2 6 7 8 �-4Table 3 shows the total number of wings (266) collected by age, sex, and molt class. In no single category does the number of wings equal the sample size requested by the statistical section. To attain 50 wings in each age, sex, and molt, the collection period would have to range from June through December. The statistical section was given the data from all wings collected, total kill figures by age and sex, kill by each age and sex for each molt class, and informed figures by age and sex, kill by each age and sex for each molt class, and informed of the improbabilities in harvesting some molt classes during August and September. Table 3.--A SUMMARY OF COLLECTED WINGS BY AGE, SEX, AND MOLT FOR AUGUST AND SEPrEMBER IN COLORADO Age and Sex Adult Males Adult Females Young Males Young Females TOTALS .1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 5 8 24 20 30 30 14 4 6 3 1 9 8 18 39 44 54 109 74 13 1 1 1 13 8 1 1 Statistical Analysis: The statistical analyses were processed by Dave Bowden and Jack R. Grieb. Sage grouse primaries were measured by molt class as described and designated by Eng, 1955. One additional molt class (Group E) was added. Molt Group A--Primary number 1 not molted, or all primaries molted. Molt Group B--Primaries number 1 and 2 not molted, (3rd primary molted). Molt Group C--Primaries number 1, 2, and 3 not molted (4th primary molted). Molt Group D--Primaries 1, 2, 3, and 4 not molted (5th primary molted). Molt Group E--Primaries 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 not molted (6th primary molted). The sample size was too small in all molt groups for statistical accuracy, but trial analyses were run on all groups except A. This group (all adults) was never collected in August and comprised less than 6 per cent of the September harvest. Eng's (1955) measurements for this group showed a high degree of accuracy and his figures have been adopted. For August, 91 per cent of the harvested birds fall in Groups B, C, and Dj and in September, the same 91 per cent fall in only two groups (B and C). In addition to primary feather measurements being divided by sex into molt groups, 3 test categories were established as follows: 1) all ages, 2) adults only, and 3) young only. The type of analysis used was to determine the standard normal distribution of feather length for each of the categories, then to compare this distribution between males and females within categories. For Groups B, C, and D, there is less probability of sex misclassification if the sage grouse are first divided into adult and young categories and then measured. The greatest probability of misclassification (0.071) is for young females in Group D, since some young birds in this molt group have not completed �-5gr-owth on primary 2 while molting primary 5. For field work the measurement of an alternate primary will reduce this error to less than 0.024. In research the following formula. may be used to estimate the true per cent of males and females in any of the above categories. The formula is: F = Total females classified Zl - Zo in sample - ZoN Where: F equals the corrected number of females in your measures sample. N equals the total males and females you measured in the category you wish to correct. Zo equals the probability of incorrectly c Lasaaf'yi.ngmales. This is found by subtracting the probability of correctly classifying males from 1.000. Zl equals the probability of correctly classifying females.· For· an example, let's take the 3rd molt, 2nd primary, lumping both adults and young. Say that you measured 100 birds, thus N is 100; and that 40 of them were females and 60 of them males. Then: Total females in sample was 40, Zo equals 1.000 - .913 or .087, and Z1 equals .754. Calculating: !rO - (.087 • 100) •754 - .087 . 31.3 .667 = 46.9 or round to 50 Thus, your corrected estimate of the number of females measured in this 100 bird sample was 50 and you would calculate the per cent of females in the population as 50 per cent. Check Station CorreJa tion: A study of check station figures from 1953 through 1961 revealed little or no correlation between stations or years in age and sex of grouse harvested, nor between age of grouse harvested and age ratios from production countso In 1962, I proposed that only information on number of hunters, residence of hunters, hours hunted, and kill-per-hunter alonrr,with a wine from each grouse killed be collected at each check station. The wi.ngs collected at each station would be measured in the regional office by qualified personnel to determine age and sex ratios of sage grouse har-vested, (Table 4). The possibility of bias in age and sex of birds dressed and in age and sex of birds harvested late in the season was considered. The assumptions were that more young birds would be fully dressed, and that an increase in adult kill would occur as the season progressed. Of the 411 sage grouse checked through Cedar Mountain station in Moffat County, 144 or 35.03 per cent were fully dressed. Of the ll~ dressed birds, accurate aee and sex could be determined on 75. Of these 75 birds, 56 per cent were adults and LL per cent were young ; a higher percentage of adults was present than in the wing sample (Table 5). The difference by age groups is not con5idered sienificanto ·Wings were also collected the f'oLl.owi.ngweekend, but due to the extremely light hunting pressure, the sample was very small 00 wings). There was little variation �-6in this sample except in the two female categories, young and adult. There was a decrease of 7.6 per cent of young females and an increase of 6.6 per cent in adult females. Table 4.--PRDffiRY TO BE MEASURED ANDTHEBREAKPOINT IN MILLD,!IETERS TO DETERMINE SEX IN SAGEGROUSE ACCORDING TOWINGMOLT. Primary to be Measured Adult Breakpoint Over-Males Under=Females h 225 Group B 6 225 Group C 2 195 Group D 2 Group E 3 195 215 i!),ling GrouE Group A Primary to be Measured Group F 3 215 -r<GroupsA, B, C, andD taken from Eng, 1955. Youn~ Breakpoint Over-Males Under-Females 2 2 195 2 4 195 160 4 160 195 Table 5.--A COMPARISON BETI1,'EEN AGEAND SEX RATIOSOF DRESSED ANDNOT-DRESSED (WINGSPRESENT)SAGEGROUSE THROUGH THECEDARMOUNTAIN CHECK STATION,1962. No. in Sage Grouse. Samrle Dressed 75 Adults Young Males Females 56.0 h4.0 28.0 72.0 Adult Males Females 12.0 44.0 Yount; M.ales Females 16.0 28.0 Not-Dressed 49.2 12 •.5 19.8 207 .50•• 8 32.4 67.6 36.7 30.9 Claude E. rfuite, with the help of regional personnel, operated the Ohio Creek check station in Gunnison County during the first two days of the season, September 22 and 23. Besides gather-ing hunting information, all birds were aged and sexed by wing primaries and undertail coverts; and ·wings were collected on all birds possible. There were 377 sage grouse checked through the station and 232 vangs (61.5 per cent) were collected for later measuring (Table 6). Table 6.--A Ca'!iPARISON IN AGEANDSEX RJ\ TIOS 1"NTHEHARVEST FRm CHECKSTATION FIGURESM.JD WINGMEASUIllil;[EN'IS, OHIOCREEK,1962. Type Check Station Wing Measurements No. in Sample Adults Young Ma.l.eaFemales Adult Yount; Males Fep\a).eS' Males Females 325 69.8 40.2 31.1 68.9 2.5.8 h4.0 232 45.7 .54.3 44.0 .56.0 16.8 28.8 From these figures, it appears that an error may have occurred at the check station in classifying young males as adult males or adult females. Although some error occurs in sex determination by wing measurement, determination of age by primary replacement and measurements .under office conditions is very accurate. �-7- The same procedures, collecting hunting information and wings, was supposed to be used in the operation of the Walden check station in Jackson County on September 22 and 23. However, only 113 wings (22.3 per cent) were collected from the 506 birds checked. An additional 79 wings were collected (Table 2) from birds whose sex and age could be determined. Evidently age and sex was more readily determined for adult than young as this sample showed 6.4 per cent more adults than the wing sample. However, there waS less than 3 per cent variation between samples in any single age or sex category (Table 7). Table 7.--A COMPARISON OF AGE AND SEX RATIOS OF TWO WING SAMPLES, COMBINED WINGS, AND CHECK STATION OPERATIONS FOR WALDEN, 1962. T~e of Sample Wing Sample MO~ Wings Combined Wings Check Station No. in Sample 113 Adult Males Females 10.6 36.6 Young Males Females 30.0 25.6 Adults Young 44.2 55.8 Males Females 40.7 59·3 79 50.6 49.4 35.8 64.2 13·9 36.7 25.3 24.0 l~ 46.9 53·1 38.9 61.1 11·9 34.8 28.1 25.0 364 50·3 49.7 39·0 61.0 18.4 31.8 20.6 29·1 A slightly different pattern of hunting pressure prevails in Jackson County compared to Gunnison and Moffat counties. There is a higher percentage of nonlocal hunters, and the kill checks for the second day of the season exceeds the first day. The variation in these two factors between the 3 check stations is not great, and unfavorable weather conditions could cause a greater variation for a specific period. Personnel operating the Walden check station in Jackson County recorded the number of hunters, hours hunted, and birds harvested by age, sex, and unclassified for each hour of the 2-day check station operation. Data collected was analyzed for hunting pressure and hunter success for each hour, 4 hours, and by days. While too variable to determine trend from previous seasons, the data should be capable of showing trend in hunting pressure and success if the check station is operated in the future for these shorter, but comparable periods of time. From the data available, the minimum period that should be considered for check station operation is 4 hours. Even then, unfavorable weather might bias trend figures. For the Walden check station (Table 8) the smallest hunter samples were obtained on the first day between the periods of 2:00 to 6:00 p.m., 1:00 to 5:00 p.m., and 8:00 a.m. to l2:00 noon. The largest sample was obtained on the second day between 9:00 a.m. and 2:00 p.m. Data regarding the age, sex, and the number of unclassified birds in the harvest was also analyzed for the same time periods. Due to the pressures of �-8- check station operations, the per cent of unclassified birds was very high for both afternoons (Table 8). A high percentage of unclassified birds resulted in an increased aduit ratio (they are easier to classify), and a decrease of young (particularly males) in the age and sex ratios (Table 7). The same procedure, analyzing hunting pressure and kill by hours and days, should be instituted at the Gunnison and Moffat check stations; but wings should be collected for these time periods instead of age and sex data. Table 8.--COMPARISON OF NUMBER OF HUNTERS, HOURS. HUNTED, BIRDS KILLED, AND BIRDS UNCLASSIFIED AS TO AGE AND SEX BY 4-HOUR PERIODS, 1st DAY, 2nd DAY, AND SEASON TOTAL, WALDEN, 1962. Hunters Hours Birds Birds per Hunter 1st 8 - 12 95 9 -1 III 10 - 2 107 107( 107 91 87 104 270 363 391 469 543 493 450 464 72 82 92 96 92 85 95 101 .75 ·73 .85 .89 .85 ·93 1.09 .97 1,091 237 1- 5 135 169 135 136 109 101 345 482 466 477 390 421 121 150 146 154 118 117 Sub-Total 273 910 GRAND TOTAL 551 2,001 Day Period 11 - 3 12 - 4 1 - 5 2 -6 3 - 7 Sub-Total 2nd 8 - 1 9 -2 10 - 3 4 12 - 5 11 - 506 Hours per Bird 3· 75 Unc Birds Per Cent Unclassified 2 7 12 17 23 25 24 27 2 4.42 4.25 4.88 5·90 5.80 4.73 4.59 13 17 25 29 25 26 .85 4.60 46 16 .89 2.85 3.21 3.19 3·09 3.30 3.59 19 25 35 51 42 66 15 16 23 3.38 91 33 3·95 137 27 .88 1.08 1.13 1.08 1'.15 ·91 8 33 35 56 �-9Conclusions: Age and sex ratio data, from wing samples collected at checking stations and processed in the office, are more consistent and accurate than ratios determined by the same methods at the check station. The pressures of check station operation and insufficient numbers of qualified personnel makes accuracy and consistency difficult. The collection of wing samples and other hunting information can be done by laborers or incidental department employees and allows biologists or conservation officers to continue their regular duties. If the hunting pressure and harvest trend is not considered important, wing samples may be collected by mail or through regular conservation officer field contacts for age and sex ratio data. A study of variations in age and sex ratios should be made to determine the minimum sample needed and if a bias in harvest occurs as the season progresses. This could be done by separating collected wing samples by hours for the first 2 days, then comparing the first day to the second, and the first· 2 days to the following weekend at each check station. This might allow reduced check station oper~tions, suggested minimum of four hours, with equal trend accuracy. In Moffat County, there was little variation between age and sex in the kill between the first 2 days .and 1 week later. Collected sage grouse wings should first be aged by studying replacement length, and condition of primaries. Then, wings in each age class should be measured to determine sex (Table 4). Accuracy and consistency should be increased with these procedures more than has been achieved heretofore. Literature Cited Eng, R. L. 1955. A method for obtaining age and sex ratios from wings. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 19(2): 269-272. Prepared by: Glenn E. Rogers Senior Game Biologist Date: October, 1963 Approved by: Wayne W. Sandfort Chief, Game Research Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �-11- JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROtTEDT SEGMENT State of COLORADO ----------~------------------ Project No. W-37-R-16 --------~~~~------------ Work Plan No. 3 Game Bird Survey Job No. Title of Job: Summarization of Sage Grouse Studies Period Covered: April 1, 1962, to March 31, 1963. 6 ABSTRACT A publication on sage grouse in Colorado has been prepared, edited, and delivered to the printer. It is estimated that the pUblication will be available within the next three months. Recommendations: It is recommended that this phase of the sage grouse project be concluded with the publication. That a study be conducted in 1967 to evaluate the application of census procedures established in this study. Objectives: (1) To complete write-up and pUblication of sage grouse studies. (2) To guide and reinstruct management personnel in sage grouse census methods. Techniques Used: All sage grouse work in Colorado was reviewed. Published sage grouse work from other states was reviewed for references. Data from sage grouse stUdies in Colorado were compiled to follow the outline as prescribed in the PS&E. Two trips were made to count strutting grounds and to instruct northwest regional personnel in technique changes. Prepared by Glenn E. Rogers Senior Game Biologist Date: October, 1963 Approved by Wayne W. Sandfort Chief, Game Research Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator ��-13- JOB COMPIE-nON REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO ----------------~------------ Project No. W-37-R-16 Work Plan No. 3 Title of Job: Period Covered: Game Bird Survey Job No. 7 Programming computer machine analysis of sage grouse census and hunter check data. April 1, 1962, through March 31, 1963 ABSTRACT Sage grouse census and harvest summary forms were revised and statewide evaluation forms devised to simplify recording and analyzing census and harvest data. A schedule was prepared designating completion, transmission, and reporting dates for each category. The State Game Manager was designated to receive and process all census and harvest reports. A basic computer code was prepared for all upland game birds. All past sage grouse census and harvest data were coded, punched, and filed for future use. Sample census and harvest evaluation reports were prepared and distributed. There was direct correlation between census and harvest information in these analyses. �-14- Recommendations: Analysis and publication of statewide evaluation reports on the breeding, production, and harvest status of sage grouse should be continued by management. The cost in man-hours and money should be calculated for computer and manual analyses. Objective: To arrange for rapid and efficient transfer of field data from operational sage grouse surveys to periodic reports for use by management and research. Techniques Used: A) Summary forms were revised and new forms devised for statewide evaluation. B) A schedule was prepared for assempling and transmitting data on strutting ground counts, production counts, and hunter checks. c) The State Game Manager's office was designated to receive and process all data. D) A computer code was prepared, and all past census and harvest data were coded and punched onto cards. E) All cards were punched, and an analysis was run for each category. F) Sample management reports were prepared for each census activity and harvest. �-15- FROORAMNJID COMPUTER MACHmE ANALYSIS OF SAGEGROUSE CENSUS ANDHUNTER CHECK DATA Glenn E. Rogers Hinor revisions were made in sage grouse summaryforms to allow consistent recording and transmitting of census and harvest data at all managementlevels. A netr series of summaryforms was prepared for use in the statewide evaluation reports. A schedule was established by activity for each managementlevel to assure prompt and orderly transmission of data to the State GameHanager. All sage-grouse field counts (breeding and production) and harvest checks are processed through area and regional channels to the State GameManager for analysis and publication. strutting ground counts must be completed by Nay 1, and the state'tdde eval.uatd.on report is due by July 1. Production counts for the August season must be completed by July 15 and for the September season by August 15. Statewide production evaluation reports are to be completed by July 25 and August 22. The harvest evaluation report should be processed before October 10. Someyearly changes may be necessary in the deadline date for the completion and transmission of production count data as this information should be available for Commissionconsideration while meeting to establish sage grouse seasons and bag limits. All sage grouse managementdata are sent to the State GameNanager Tor' processing. However, the permanent files on sage grouse are maintained at the Gameand Fish Research Center in Fort Collins. A uniform computer code for all upland gamebirds was prepared and pla.ced on file at the Research Center. Uniformity is needed in area, regional, and county designations as these will be used for more than one game species. All past sage grouse census and harvest data were coded and punched onto I.B.M. cards. Velma Nerl<le and Robert Tully of the Game}Ianagers' office staff aided in the coding and evaluation and will process all future data. The Colorado State University Computing Center supervised the card preparation and the machine analysis for each category. Before analysis could be accomplished, it was necessary to prepare a sample report and tables as a guide. These sample reports are given in their entirety below: SAGEGROUSE BREEDING POPUI~TION STATUS,1962 Introduction Sage grou.se population surveys inclu.de: (1) strutting ground counts, (2) production or "brood" counts, and (J) kill data from checking stations and HCOhunter contacts. Population status reports 'tfill be compiled by the State GameHanager from these surveys and distributed to all interested personnel. The errors in these initial reports may be greater, both in methods of counting and methods of evaluating, then should be expecbed after several years. of operation. �-16Analysis of strutting Ground Counts The winter of 1961-62 was colder and wetter than normal. A number of strutting grounds could not be counted due to bad road and snow conditions. The inclement weather probably had little, sage grouse population. if any, direct effect on the Somestrutting grounds within strutting complexes (Lake John in North Park) were counted singly rather than as a group, and interground movementmayhave inflated the sununarized counts. The highest number of strutting grounds (89) and the highest number of sage grouse (2,932 cocks and 3,693 total) ever counted in Colorado were counted in 1962. 1Vith only 1h of the 93 trend grounds counted, the breeding population trend status for some areas is unknownor subject to error. vlith some adjustment for insufficient information the statewide and regional breeding population trends are as follows: Statewide - Increased over 1961 and over averages Northeast Region - Increased over 1961 and over averages Southwest Region - The Gunnison area increased over 1961 and 5-year average. other areas of this region ha.ve light populations with too few birds and grounds to eval.uabe, Northwest ~ion - Showsthe least percentage increase of the three regions. of Routt County and the Big Gulch area, near Craig, show a continued decline. l'fiddle Park, while still below past averages, shows an increase (on limited information) over 1961. The other sage grouse areas of Moffat County, except Big Gulch, show a definite increase with Blue Hourrtadn slightly off .its peak of 1961. The limited information from Eagle, Garfield, Nesa, and Rio Blanco areas cannot be considered conclusive. �-17- Table 1. -- SAGEGROUSE srRUTTINGGROmmSCOUl'ITED IN COLORADO, 1962 - Region Supervisor Area NOrtheas"t Dormer- County Nameof Ground Jackson ---:ILi}{aJT1'~a1ce BoettC11er1~lat,i Boettcher LaJ-:eJunction --~~------------------------~C~oa1Flo~-----_____ ____~ Condrey No.1 -_-_-_-_-_-_-_"""'C:Ot;:,;.::r,;;;;::drey tro. 2 C~o~1~1ili.~1rc).' J . C01·rdreyNo. h ---------------------Deer-creoK Number of Counts m.ghest Sine;le Count . Total Cocks Birds 3 3 33 219 ~ 5 8 221 5 26 3 '0 3 o--cr- --;- 71 j -r '7 0 0 150 73' ______ •..D::.,e;:;,;.lanei Butte3 -23 23 Lal,:eJ01ii1RO"ciC1No. 1 3 0 0 -Lal~e John---rfOadNo.2 3' 30 -----~--'------...;Lost Creek No. 1 3 -Se.--73 Lost Creelc'lToo 2 -3-W' , 7L ---rTonahanl;;a;r.f------:s'2 5"2'-----...:;,;0;.;i~1~1,;eiis 3 0 --0_________ -_-_--Rid6;noa~_ 3 ~ SmjEB Creek No.1 _--1.3 36 3>:_ ----------------....;;-S·J..:.:)ril1F Cr-eek No.2 55 59 -- -is ------------------------------~----~-----------------,~~------~~----~~ in Creek No. 3 ---------------....;.s:Drinr~ Creek Ho. h 3 l2 12 Spr' 13 ---"------------~-....:::;;;-..•.----, ..."Td2,tt_~~1"~'Jo.1 ________________ 'NOrtlieast ____ Larmer ::;.;;.:;.::,;;----.;;;:,; Downer ~·Jattenber1.L No. 2 Four Corners lJ,loming L~~ 2 0_ 3 .-4- 7 3 0 9 1 1 22 33 0 4?00 Tota1 - lIE Region 898 1,039 70 ---------------------.--.----------~Southwest Andr-ews Gunnison Chance Gulch Hos. 1 & 2 0 0 Chance Gulch Nos. 3" & Ii Gold Basin Nos. 1 & 2 ----------------.;101"£0[0. 1 Iola No. "2"" ---------------.-:South SouthHest Andre1-ls Southwest Bessire . Kezar Creek LOHerAntelope No. 1,2,3 Onio Creek . Parlin Flats Razor Creek Nos. 1 &: 2 Sapinero l'1esa South Parlin Nos. 1 &: 2 Parlin No. 3 Hoods Gulch Nos. I & 2 Saguache Needle Creek No. 1 Needle Creek No. 2 Ra.zor Creek No. 3 SanlJjiguel Dry Basin Nos. 1 & 2 Greagor Flats No. 1 Greagor Flats No. 2 I'1esa Dominguez Hontrose Bostwick Park Cerro Sumnrit SimmsHesa 0 0 2 3 7 12 t5 0 ° ---0 "9 26 0 0 9 217 3 201 2Bj 0 °° 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 67 3 61 81 69 0 0 0 0 0 0- 3 3 1 1 1 16 16 20 32 0 2~ 0 0 3 34 3 3h 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Total. - S1.rJ Region 34 634 812 Sub-Totals - HE & Sl-JRegi.ons 10h 1,532 1,851 Southvrest DeGuelle DeGue1le 1 1 �-18Table 1, cont. -- SAGE GROUSE STRUTTTIJG GROUnDS CamITED llif COLOU])O, 1962. IlortJiuest BrC\}_r __ ------ ..,---~- --------------------Sub-Total - All ReGion::> -~-----.,----------_._---------- 188 2,658 3,188 �-19SAa~ aROUSE STRUTTINa aROUNDS COUNTED IN COtORAD02 cont. -Table 12 Supervisor Area Region County Totals Brought forward Northwest Gilbert Eagle Northwest Gilbert Grand Northwest Gilbert Routt Total - NW Region GRAND TOTAL Number of Counts Name of Ground 188 Big Red Hill 3 Bowen Ranch 3 Newcomers, Burns Rodeo b Antelope Pass No. 1 0 Back of Junction Butte 1 Back Troublesome No. 1 3 Back Troublesome No. 2 3 East Fork of Rock Creek 0 Kremmling Dump 3 Mitchell Ranch 3 Pinto Creek 3 Sheep Creek 3 Troublesome, Deberards 3 West Fork of Rock Creek 0 Yust Ranch 3 Egeria Creek 3 Finger Rock Creek 3 Five Pines 3 Sunnyside No. 1 3 Toponas No. 1 3 Toponas No. 2 3 Watson Creek 3 142 246 1962 Highest Single Count Total Bir9.-s Cocks 2,658 3,188 21 15 b2 50 48 29 0 0 0 3 34 29 12 30 00 lb 27 104 29 2b 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 13 0 0 b 5 0 7 0 0 7 7 eo 34 35 35 1,400 lz842 2,932 3,693 Table 2. -- SAGE GROUSE STRUTTING GROUNDS COUNTED BY SUPERVISOR AREAS, 1962 Supervisor Area Downer Andrews Bessire DeGuelle Steele Bray Dobbs Gilbert TarAL 3b 22 Number Grounds Counted 25 10 3 2 3 b 21 19 Number of Counts 70 29 3 2 9 15 bO 58 Highest Single Count Cocks Total Birds 898 1,039 775 597 37 37 0 0 4b 37 227 30b 8b2 985 274 505 123 89 246 2,932 Number of Grounds 25 17 3 4 9 7 3,693 �-203. -- SAGEGROUSEsrRurTING GROUNDSCOUNl'EDBY COUNTY,1962. Table Number of Grounds Number Grounds Counted Eaele 3 3 12 94 131 Garfield 3 .2 6 37 46 Grand 12 9 25 99 239 Gunnison 14 8 23 565 723 Jackson 23 23 68 843 934 Larimer 2 2 2 55 105 Mesa 7 0 0 0 0 Moffat 38 23 66 1,020 1,190 11ontrose 3 2 2 0 0 Pitkin 1 1 3 0 0 Rio Blanco 2 2 3 22 33 Rout.t 9 9 27 128 203 Saguache 3 2 6 32 52 San Higuel 3 3 3 37 37 123 89 246 2,932 3,693 County TarAL Number of Counts Highest Cocks Single TotaI Count 'Birds �-21Table 4. -- SAGEGROOSEsrRUTTING GROUNDSCOUNl'EDBY MANAGEr-lENT AREAS, 1962. Hanagement Area Bi~ Gulch Blue Hount.adn Blue River Cold SEings Delaney Butte Eagle East I,roff at Garfield Greagor Flats Great Divide Lake John Lay Creek Haybell Hontrose Huddl Creek Ohio Creek Ovr1Ridge Pinon Nesa Rand Cutoff Razor Needle Rio Blanco Southern Routt South Noffat 0unbeam Troublesome 1pTest Rou.tt lTyoming-Lariroer T(Jl'AIJ Nuniber of Grounds NUlTIber Grounds Counted 5 l~ 4 2 2 4 2 0 2 2 1 1 2 2' 2 2 2 - HUT,mer of Counts 12 12 4 0 6 3 6 6 Highest Cocks 2 2 5 6 2 0 4 2 2 2 2 105 205 13 0 152 50 90 37 37 27 395 321 76 0 29 322 174 0 122 32 17 46 81 0 57 47 55 93 74 199 2,1.00 4 12 3 3 3 4 1 5 6 3 4 1 5 2 2 12 3 3 2 3 1 5 0 3 2 1 5 '2 6 36 9 8 2 9 6 14 0 9 6 2 15 6 0 12 6 Single Count rsrsr El.ras 115 273 18 0 163 62 118 3,152 ).+6 37 51 415 3Ll4 78 0 130 421.; 183 0 173 52 25 100 81 0 91 68 105 �~22- Table 5 •••.•. EVALUATION OF SAGE GROUSE STRUTTING GROmm BY MANAGE\iIiENT AREAS, 1962 iViianagement Area Big Gulch Trend Grounds 5 Blue Mountain 4 Blue River TRENDS Maximum Cock Counts *$=Year Average 1961 1962 105 W 139 181 ~ Change for L9b2 from 5-Year Average 1961 l.iL9 24.4 - .J. - 19.6 - 27.7 W 1LJ. 255 205 2 W 14 18 13 7.1 Cold Springs 2 y 47 0 0 Delaney Butte 2 J! 147 77 152 No Counts .j. 3.4 .j. Eagle 1 27 36 50 .J. 85.1 .f. 38.8 East Moffat 2 ll4 14 90 2 35 39 37 ;' 104.5 .j. 5.7 .J 542.8 Garfield W W y , Greagor Flats 2 y 38 0 37 2.6 Great Divide 4 J! ll2 102 27 Lake John 12 J! 392 363 395 Insufficient Counts .j. 26.2 .j. 36.3 Lay Creek 3 87 35 321 .f. 268.9 .j. 817.1 Maybell 3 70 90 76 .j. Montrose 3 y - 15.5 8 0 0 Insufficient Counts Muddy Creek 4 J! 99 113 29 Ohio Creek 1 199 2ll 322 Owl Ridge 5 21 V Insufficient Counts .j. 61.8 .j. 52.6 109 106 17h .f. 59.6 Pinon Mesa 6 19 0 0 No Counts Rand Cutoff 3 114 llO 122 .J Razor-Needle 4 71 49 32 Insufficient Counts Rio Blanco 1 13 0 17 .f. Southern Routt 5 64 81 46 - 28.1 South Moffat 2 Sunbeam 5 Troublesome 6 West Routt 2 'Vp'0ming-Larimer 2 TOTALS 93 2.1 W y y 21 21 W 21 21 21 W .j. 45.3 8.5 7.0 62 81 54 0 0 No Counts 76 43 57 - 25.0 ll6 65 47 71 0 55 2,251 2,050 2,490 Adjusted Statewide Per Cent Chnnge 5.1 .f. 61.3 .j. 10.9 30.7 46 y 97.4 76.1 .j. 43.2 30.6 .j. 32.5 - 59.4 - 27.7 .j. .f. - 22.5 25.9 28.3 * Five-year average or nearest equive1ant 'with actual number of years averaged shown by sub-number. �-23- SAGE GROUSE PRODUCTION REPORT, 1962 Introduction Sage grouse population surveys include: (1) strutting ground counts, (2) production or "brood" counts, and (3) kill da.ta from checking stations and I-TeO hunter contacts. Population status reports i-rill be compiled by the State Game l1anager from these surveys a.nddistributed to all interested personnel. The errors in these in~tial reports maybe greater, both in methods of counting and methods of evaluating, then should be eA~ected after several years of operation •. Analysis of Production Route Counts In 1962, personnel of the Colorado Gameand Fish Department drove 1,1-1.50 miles on 2h established sage grouse production routes. The sage grouse population along these routes (1,813 birds) was slightly higher than last year (1961), but slightly be'Lowthe 3- to 5-year average. Most of the changes in sage grouse densities oC~lrred on routes with law populations and have little, if any, signifi cance, Sage grouse reproduction for the year was sienificantly 10l,Jerthan last year and the 3- to 5-::rear aver-age, The greatest reduction in young-per-adult ratio occurred in Hoffat and vTestern Routt counties. No reason can be ascertained at this time for this reduction. The trend in sage grouse production for the state and regions is as follows: StateHide - Downfrom 1961 and 3- to 5-year averages, but "1ith population densities fairly stable. Northeast Region - An increase in production, but a general 10VJerpopulation. SouthHest Region - Generally static both in production and population. Northuest Region - Someincrease Lr, production for Niddle Park and southern Routt areas, buE a heavy decrease in tresbern Routt and Noffat counties. The general population trend appears fairly stat.ic in all areas. �Tallde 1. -- SAGEGROUSEPRODUCTIONROUTESCOUNTEDIN COLORAOO,1962. Supervisor Area Dormer Name of Route Lake John Owl Ridge N.E. Dovmer towner S.H. S.H. Kennell KennelJ. S.H. S .1.1. Region N.E. N.E. s.w. I 8.'\1'. S •• 11" SoH. S .11. S •.U. n,v, N.H. N.1.,]. N.1;1• N.H. N.li'l. .N;rN. N.H. TOTALS .. - Total Y.d.n. Sage Grouse Counted Adults Young Unc , 22 16 9 20 9 13 198 2 1.)J~ 4 545 245 285 89 219 235 175 163 46 9 170 8 25 80 32 95.3 66.8 31.4 Antelope Cr. BIue.Hesa 3 45.2 3 44.b Kennell Kennell Kennell Kennell Kennell Kennell Kennell Kennell Gold Easin-Iri s Kezar-Hillow Cr. Lost Canyon N" Parlin Flats S. Beaver-Pole Rd. Parlin-Doyleville Upper Ohi,o Cr. i:Joods Gulch 3 2 3 Dobbs Dobbs Big~h Cold Springs Elk Head Grea t Divide T\venty Hile Hot SUlpnur-Rock Cr HUddy Cr.-Antelope Toponas Troublesome Holcott Divide Blue Mountain 3 3 3 78.5 56.2 61.6 15.2 47.2 73.9 12.1 2935 140.0 41.2 97.0 85.0 3 58.0 491 410 340 340 272 j 2!±.0 jbO 3 -OO:U 17 2 3 3 3 54.0 66.0 60.0 3 '(2.1 230 235 270 330 370 5 14 1 -90- 73 1,45'0.8 6,859 643 Dobbs Dobbs Gilbert G~lbert Gilbert Gilbert U~l.oert, Bray N.H. Total Niles 3 6 3 Dobbs N.H. N.H. No. of Counts Rand Cut-off 2 3 3 2 3.; 4 331 384 147 j ~ . 6 2 4 124 121 20 102 2 Total 44 2 0 0 25 22 0 10 .2,.4 0 4~ 11 0 0 33 43 6 23 6 4 0 35 82 92 18 83 10 -63 11 19 0 0 b3 126 86 28 6 64 55 6 39 206 398 38 186 12 - - 9b 185 0 1 0 0 0 0 19 0 11 199 838 332 1,813 -44 5 -80 13 24 77 6 I I\) +=I �Table 2. _- SAGE GROUSE ProDUCTION ROUTES COUNTED BY SUPERVISOR ARFAS, Total Miles Total Min. 1962. Sage J.1rouse Goun't~<l_ Young Une. Supernsor Area No. 01" Routes No. 01: Counts Dol-mer 3 12 193-' 862 47 42 2 91 Dobbs 5 16 421.2 1,853 369 285 186 840 Gilbert 5 15 300.0 1,425 39 142 19 200 Kennell 10 27 464.0 2,349 98 2n 114 483 370 90 98 11 199 332 1,813 Bray Adults Total 1 3 72.1 I TOTALS 24 73 1,450.8 6,859 643 838 I I'\) Vl I �Table 3. -- SAGEGROUSEPRODUCTIONROUTESCOUNTEDBY MANAGEMENT AREAS, 1962•.. " Management Area No. of Routes North Park 3 12 Gunnison Saguache 10 27 Vlest Central NO COUN'S • .•- .•.• - Cen. Colo. Bear River - No. of Counts ',l'o1ial Minutes Adults 193.5 862 47 464.0 2,349 98 Total Hiles ------- ------- ------- --Sage Grouse CountedYoung Unc. Total !&2 2 91 271 114 483 - - - .. - .......... .. .. - ~ 2 6 114.0 565 6 24 0 30 Mi. ddle Park 3 9 186.0 860 33 118 19 ~70 ro 0'\ Moffat-Routt 6 19 493.3 2,22) 459 383 197 1,039 TOTALS 24 73 1,450.8 6,859 643 838 332 1,,81) , , �Table 4. -- EVALUATION OF SAGE GROUSE PRODUCTION ROUTES, 1962. Name of Route Antelope Creek ~g-Gu1ch-Timber1ake Blue Hesa Blue l'Iountain Cold Springs Elkn3ad Go1d-Basin-Iris Road Grea. t Divi de Hot Su1phur- Rock Creek Kezar Creek-~'1i11owCreek Lake John Lost Canyon l~ddy-Ante1ope Creek OvI1 Ridge Pinon £:resa Rand Cut-off sIa:Cer ParK: S. Bea~r-Po1e Creek S. ParTrn-DoyTevi11e Toponas 'lroub1esome TvlentymiLe -. upper Ohio Creek ~volcott Divide vloods Gulch TOTALS - STATEHIDE Young~Per-Adu.Lt * ~-Yr Average 3.92 4/ 1.13 !:y 1.27 1961 4.40 2.05 -3.10'- 6o~O --:7~ 1.33 1.37 .40 2.03 2.76 .64 .89 1.31 .35 1 .• 00 .23 .59 .93 .96 1.21 1.13 .58 .28 .72 1.64 1.37 1.10 1.51 4.00 V 3.50 4.19 1.00 1.59 2.04 1.30 2.b1 1.90 2.87 4.25 1.71 3.13 2009 1.93 5.00 1.50 .46 3.22 .16 7.00 8.11 1.10 1.00 -1.tl5 5.25 -- ~-Yr AVIe. 1.92 2.04 1962 4.00 ,60 1.08 .76 .90 2.00 .81 3.70 3050 .90 .65 5,,50 .56 NGRe 1e44 None 4.00 7.00 3080 3.14 5.00 2.00 5.00 8.50 '}/ 2.07 ~/ 1.35 -y 1.93 3.40 1.77 3.13 1.16 3/ 1025 4.• 38 1,,15 21 .77 3.22 W .15 3.95 5.31 ~ ~, 1.35 .30 1.57 .Bl.I'-ds"'per-FJl.nu~e ~Yr Ave. 1961 1962 .12 .05 •• 33 .41 .48 .55 Hirds-Per";f1iTe 1961 .67 1.70 --.ts3 15.10 .32 .61 1.32 .39 .77 2.06 .11 .11 .21 .55 1962 .22 1.47 l~40 2.16 9.06 .39 1;60 2.18 1.48 .34 1050 .46 .45 .19 .37 r.se --••70 .66 2.35 1.16 .21 1.30 1.30 .44 .34 1.16 .32 1.48 1.38 .20 2.00 .10 1.30 1.00 1.24 -- .15 .25 1~69 .10 -~ - .59 .88 923 .29 .09 ••30 .05 .12 .16 019 .25 .31 .16 .09 .15 .16 .03 .26 834 -- .1t> 1.61 •• 08 .13 .26 1.31 .22 .33 .03 .04 .05 .12 .37 .08 .44 .36 .04 .12 .07 .17 3.15 .54 097 .11 .23 .54 .22 2080 .13 .,09 .,65 .06 --.14 --.30 4:30 .10 ,,28 ,,04 .43 3.00 002 .24 .24 .26 .- - *5-year average or nearest equivelant with actual number of years averaged shown by sub.number. I [\) -.J I �I ro 0:> I Table 5. - PER CENT CHANGEIN SAGE GROUSEPRODUCTIONBY MANAGEl'mNT AREAS, % Change fo~ 1962 1962 •. % Change for 1962 ,-Year .:fAverage 1961 *3 yr av •• 53 -48 Hanagement Area Number of Routes North Park 3 GQ':..T'.i son S2.guache 10 ~-1est Central NO com n;S----- - - - - - - - - ------ 2 .49 1.CO 4.00 /-920 ,!300 .03 .21 .26 ,l566 /.19 Middle Park 3 2.22 3.06 3.57 f. 61 .J 17 .09 1.34 .91 1-911 ~ 32 11offat-Routt 6 1.39 2.05 .83 - 40 - 59 2.47 1.12 2.10 -14 I- 78 1.59 2.04 , 1.30 - 18 - 36 1.51 1.00 1.24 - 17 I- 24 Cen. Colo. Bear River - Young-Per-Adult -.s:-Year * Average 1961 *3 yr av .80 .48 2.40 c89 5-Year * Average r~3 yr av ,! 11 ,! 85 2.76 ,! 15 - 18 1962 3.37 1961 l- - - *4 yr av STA'!ElITDE .!VERAGES I Birds-Per-Mi1e !;I-Year * Average 1961 *3 yr av .90 .99 1962 .80 1.04 1.04 - f-- - - - - - ~ .47 ---. --- I- 30 0 ----_ .• *4 yr av I I --- I ro 0:> I �-29SAGEGROUSE HARVESr REPORT, 1962 Introduction Sage grouse population surveys include: (1) strutting ground counts, (2) production or "brood" counts, and (3) kill data from checking stations and HCOhunter contacts. This is the third and final yearly report dealing 'Vdth sage grouse. Information in this report was derived from check station data obtained by the three regions containing sage grouse. Checking stations Here opera.ted at Cedar lfountain in Moffat, County, at Ohio Creek in Gurmison County, and at Halden in Jackson County. All stations were operated for two d~s from 7:00 a.m. to 7:00 p.m. Although no check station 'Has operated during the second Hoffat County season, intensive field checks were made in this area to evaluate the hunting pressure. Abstract state'tvide -- The 1962 sage grouse hunting pressure lIas above the 5-year average and 1961. The kill, while still 30;s above the 5-year average, was dorm 18%from 1961 mainly in the r10ffat County area. Northeast Region -- A heavy increase in hunt-Ing pressure and kill reduced success-per-hunter. Southvrest Region -- A static and hunting success. hunting pressure with a slightly NorthHest Re[;ion -- An increase in hunting pressure and kill ~-year aver-age but considerably be'Low 1961. with reduced kill over the The per cent of young in the kill (Table 2) folloued closely the prediction of the Production Re:port .!2E. 1962. A decrease teas predicted for r10ffat and Routt counties 1uth equal or increased production for Gunnison and Jackson c01L~ties. Analysis of Sa[;e Grouse Harvest from Check Stations Seasons The 1962 sage grouse season had several innovations from previous years. An initial season in most of Hoffat and part of Routt counties Has established for the weekend of August 18 and 19. This season Ha.Sf'o'LLowed by another season in the nor-bhwesbern part of Hoffat County the follmring weekend, August 25-27. A regular season for the remainder of Hoffat and Routt counties and the rest of Colorado 't-rest of U.S. Highvl~ 85 1-1aS set for September 22-24. The daily bag limit Has reduced from 3 to 2 birds for all seasons, but the possession lirllit vlaS increased to 4 or 6 birds depending on the number of days in the season. Season hours ran from sunrise to s1L~seteach day. �Table 01 fil01 .CII-t fH O~ s:: 0 (.).,-1 Vl a ~-g ~j g~ 1 -- SAGE GROlJ'SE CHECK STATION KILL I:ATA FOR 1962 ~I-t I-t i£lQ) ~ .§ .~"Cl 1IlQ) Q)Q)+' ~fH :;1; 0 0 ~o ~ ~ ~ ~&! ~~ ~ <l! la6~{J) Q) r-l1i8 01 +'''Cl ~I-t Q) 8 bD~ ~ § ~ "Cl 'M III 01 ~0 0 r-l ~ g ~ 1iJ ~p., 1Il 0 0 "Cl 01 ~ ~ ~ ~ "Cl+' r-l.8 O{J) 8 0 r-l r-l0l <1I"Cl +' I-t r;;l +' r-l ~0 E-t gi£j g "Cl r-l .::g g 01 eo §~ § ~65 r-lCll <Il"Cl I-t +' ~i£j ~~o bI) ~ "Clbl) 0 Obi) § 8ta tH~ ~,s Q) +'~ fij'M 001 gs 3~ os:: H~ g g ~ fl. 'M ~,s §bI) ~ ~ § :l "Cl bI) 81 os:: 0 '§,s ~I=lQ)'M ~.~ Q) ~~' r..Q) 'M r.. I=l~ Q)'M 0 (I) 1-tS:: 01 51 bI) "Cl S+, ~.8 {J) ~Ol Q)"Cl Ol-t 8+, +,.8 51{J) o~ .~ Q) 0 fl.0 Q) 0 fl.0 fl. ~:r: ~~ fili£l ~ fl. fl.1Il Cedar MotUltain 1 Moffat 4ll 1,331 524 1.27 2.54 71 135 102 26 76 104 45 59 34.4 12.6 21.8 65.5 36.8 28.6 50.4 49.5 Ohio Creek 22 Gunnison 324 1,078 377 1.16 2.85 102 130 106 39 67 126 63 63 43.9 16.8 27.1 56.1 28.8 27.1 54.3 45.7 Walden 3 Jackson 551 2,001 506 .91 3.9' 46 67 50 12 63 34 29 40.7 10.6 30.0 59.2 33.6 25.6 55.7 44.2 13.9 25.7 60.2 32.8\ 27.4 53.1 46.8 - -- 38 : Stateuide - 1,286 4,410 1,407 219 3.13 1.09 I I I 332 258 77 181 293 142 151! 39.7 I I I �Tabla 2. -- EVALUATION OF SAGE GROUSE KILL BYCHECK STATION AND BY TOTALS FOR 1962. s:: .!oIO u ••.• 1!+' o~CI) ~ s 8 Per Cent Change froM fo./II) o fa fa+=> j~ ~ .. 'tl Per Cent Change from Q) 110 fo./bD 0&\ Mil) • ~!I ~! ~ !i£I oJ.. - 19..5 524 .j. 12.2 !4 oJ.. 21: Sot Q) 1l<t1 {(j Ill+' Per Cent Change from •• M ~~ ~~ oJ..<Sl - 47.3 1.27 - 35.5 o-, fa Il<'tl II) M {(j ai£l ~ :£ - 34.8 2.54 Sot110 Per Cent Change from •• Per Cent Change from ~&\ tl.~ Q) •• 0110 {(j d3 ~! o-, ~~ .J..<Sl M 8!~ ;. 47.6 ;. 38.7 50.4 - 10.9 - 3.2 ;i. l.t'I ~ Cedar 110untain Moffat 411 I- 73.4 Ohio Creek Gtumison 324 r 7.6 - 2.7 377 - 1.3 - 10.8 1.16 - 7.9 - 16.5 2.85 I- 14.0 I- 1.0 54.3 9.8 I- 16.7 l,oJalden Jackson 551 f253.2 1-185.4 506 .j.119.0 I- 64.8 I- 85.3 II- 24.0 , 1,407 ; Totals 1,286 I I I- 30.2 - 18.4 .91 - 38.5 .34.5 3.95 I- 79.5 .j. 73.2 55.7 I ,t 15.5 I- 24.3 1.09 ,- 29.6 - 34.3 3.131 ;. 32.9 I- 32.9 53.1 I- ;. 7.9 I 1~9 �-32- Weather Excellent hunting weather prevailed for all three sage grouse seasons. A few light showers occurred during the first season, but not enough to interrupt the hunting. Hunting Pressure and Kill Checks for the first August season showed both the hunting pressure and kill to be down from 1961, but still above the 5-year average. This reduced hunting pressure could have been influenced by the canceling and reopening of this season, the reduced bag limit, or the knowledge among local hunters that the hatch was lower than for previous years. This poorer hatch was confirmed by a reduced per cent of young birds in the hunters bag.· (Table 2). The hunting pressure was very light during the second Moffat County season. Most of the hunting pressure was in the Spring Creek and Great Divide areas with only two cars of hunters seen west of these areas. During the regular september season, the Gunnison area was fairly static in both hunting pressure and kill. Jackson County showed a remarkable increase in both, perhaps influenced by the excellent fishing in this area and the desire for a combination hunting and fishing trip. Both areas had a decrease in hunter success as shown (Table 2) in the reduced birds-per-hUnter and increase in hours-per-bird. Conclusions: There was direct correlation between census and harvest data in 1962. Analyses and publication of these three sage grouse status reports should be continued by management. However, the use of computer machines in the analyses may not be economically sound for the small amount of data processed. Also, manual analyses is faster than machine analyses conSidering all factors. Prepared by: Glenn E. Rogers Senior Game Biologist Date: October, 1963 Approved by: Wayne W. Sandfort Chief, Game Research Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �October, 1963 -33- JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJEX:T SEGMENT State of COLORADO ----------~~~~-------- Project No. W-37-R-16 Game Bird Survey Work Plan No. 4 Job No. '2 Title of Job: Period Covered: Personnel: Chukar Partridge Production Studies July 22 through August 5, 1962. Dwight OWens, Glenn Rogers, Wayne Sandfort, and Richard Bartmann. Abstract: Counts of chukar broods and adults were made between July 22 and August 5, 1962, in 32 major chukar areas within six counties in western Colorado. A total of 1,595 birds was observed in 29 areas, which gave a 3.89 young-per-adult ratio, the second highest ratio of the eight years of record. The average brood size in 1962 was 8.7, the fifth highest average of the seven years recorded. Though the average brood size was low, the youngper-adult ratio was quite high and is considered the more reliable index for measuring reproductive success. The peak of chukar hatching in 1962 occurred during the period June 17 to June 25. The bulk of the hatching appears to have occurred over an extended period from May 30 to July 4. The good reproductive success in 1962 is difficult to explain on the basis of weather data alone. Evidence from past years, however, shows this to be one of the main factors affecting good chukar production. Data from this investigation were used as the basis for recommending a split hunting season for the second consecutive year during the fall of 1962. An increase in the season length from seven to eighteen days was also recommended. �-34- Recommendations: Data gathered during this study indicated adequate reproduction to justify a split hunting season for the second consecutive year in 1962 in areas of the western slope. The first season, September 15 through September 23, was two weeks earlier and six days longer than the early 1961 season. The second season, November 10 through November 18, occurred about the same time but was five days longer than the second 1961 season. Escalante Canyon was recommended for closure again in 1962. These recommendations were accepted and passed by the Game and Fish Commission. A bag limit of three and a possession limit of nine birds was established. The possession limit was increased by three over 1961. Production studies provide the most reliable known index of both success in development work and production on a sustained yield basis. In light of this fact, it is recommended these investigations be continued. Current and future work on standarized route maps and census forms should enable these reproduction counts to be made by Wildlife Conservation Officers in the near future. Objectives: To determine annual production by chukars. To determine the factors or conditions responsible for reproductive success. Techniques Used: Counts of young and adult chukars were made in forty areas during Mid-summer, 1962, to determine reproductive success of these birds. All Figures and Tables were computed from data acquired during these counts from July 22 through August 5, 1962. Survey techniques and specific types of data obtained are described in the Federal Aid Quarterly Report, October, 1959, p. 99. �-35- CHUKAR PARTRIDGE PRODUCTION STUDIES Richard M. Bartmann Findings: Principal data obtained during this investigation pertain to youngper-adult ratios, average brood sizes, the peak hatching period, and factors responsible for reproductive success. Information pertaining to these four categories is presented in the following sections. Young-per-Adult Ratios A total of 1,595 chukars was counted in 32 areas of six counties during midsummer, 1962. This total was composed of 1,167 young, 300 adults, and 128 unclassified chukars, giving a 3.89 young-per-adult ratio for the 1962 breeding season (Table 1). As shown in Table 2, this figure is the second highest of the 1955-1962 period, only 1958 being higher. Table l.--CHUKAR PARTRIDGE PRODUCTION COUNTSz JULy 22 THROUGH AUGUST 5z 1962. County Area Delta Angel's Ranch Escalante Canyon Indian Rock Ranch Little Peach Valley Oak Creek Smith Fork Well's Gulch #1 Well's Gulch #7 Sub-totals Garfield Camp Gulch (Guzzler) East Salt Creek Parachute Creek Prairie Canyon West Salt Creek Sub-totals Date of Count Birds Observed Young Adults Unclass. Total 7/30 7/28 30 7/28 10 24 49 11 48 9 181 8 1 4 3 6 5 19 11 57 44 16 24 29 17 130 22 9 4 3 2 40 7/30 8/5 8/4 7/30 7/30 8/1 8/4 7/24 7/26 7/26 6 25 15 6 52 Young/Adult Ratio 44 1 39 27 70 16 67 26 290 3.18 66 25 28 32 19 170 3·25 �-36- Table l.--CHUKAR PARTRIDGE PRODUCTION COUNTS, JULy 22 THROUGH AUGUST 5, 1962, Continued. County Area Date of' Birds Observed Count Young Adults Unclass. Total Mesa --Coal Creek (Cameo) Columbus Canyon (Guzzler) Gateway Hunter Canyon Kannah Creek (upper) Plateau Creek .SI::ove Canycn-Coal Gulch (Guzzler-) Sub-totals 7/25 7/25 7/31 7/23 7/22 7/23 7/29 Mof'f'at Blevins' Ranch Bull Canyon Calloway Place Irish Canyon Simos Ranch Sterling Springs Sub-totals 7/26 7/26 7/26 7/26 7/26 7/26 Montrose Mesa Creek Red Rocks Ranch Roc Creek South Canal Sub-totals 8/2 7/29 8/2 7/29 Rio Blanco Chase Draw Staley Mine Sub-totals 7/27 7/27 GRAND TOTALS Young/Adult Ratio 72 214 9 50 32 95 472 21 33 2 6 17 17 96 46 6 52 44 118 24 7 239 8 32 4 6 56 52 150 28 13 295 4.27 63 5 26 94 28 1 3 32 116 6 29 151 2.94 30 21 51 6 13 19 13 49 34 83 2.68 1167 300 128 1595 3.89 10 7 21 38 25 25 13 103 254 32 56 49 ll2 606 4.92 �-37- Table 2.--SUMMARY OF CHUKAR PARTRIDGE YOUNG-PER-ADULT 1955-1962. No. of Y01mg Observed Year 1955 1956 1957 1958 1959 1960 1961 1962 ALL YEARS 186 219 186 1,424 676 1,655 852 1,167 6,365 No. of adults Observed RATIOS, WESTERN COLORADO, Young/100 Adults 117 133 186 488 169 370 179 389 272 159 165 100 292 400 447 477 300 2,340 Average Brood Size Chu~ar partridge broods averaged 8.7 young-per-brood during 1962 (Table 3). This average was derived from the 77 broods that the observer believed to be distinct and of which he obtained an accurate count. The average brood size is one of the lowest in the seven year period. The young-per-adult ratio, however, was quite high and as indicated in the Quarterly Report, April, 1961, p. 125, is the more reliable index for measuring reproductive success. Table 3.--SUMMARY OF CHUKAR PARTRIDGE BROOD-COUNT ·1956-1962 Year Number of Broods Observed 1956 1957 1958 1959 1960 1961 1962 ALL YEARS 53 14 52 82 43 127 77 448 DATA, WESTERN COLORADO, Number of Young 448 116 568 728 388 1,315 672 4,235 Average Brood Size 8.5 8.3 10·9 8.9 9·0 10.4 8.7 9·5 �-38- Data in Table 4 show the relationship between brood age and brood size for those broods of accurate count that were aged in the field during 1961 and 1962. Brood sizes for 1962 averaged about one young-per-brood more than those for 1961 in the older age classes. The normal trend for brood sizes to diminish with age is evident in the older age groups but not in the younger ones. This. lack of consistency is, obviously, due to an inadequate sample. +..i ttle significance can be shown in this table, however, until a standard for brood mortality can be established to make annual comparisons of brood size at various ages meaningful. Table 4.--COMPARISON OF CHUKAR PARTRIDGE BROOD SIZES AS RELATED TO AGE OF BROODS, WESTERN COLORADO, 1961-1962. Number of Broods Total Number Average Age in Days Observed of Young Brood Size 1961 1962 1961 1962 1961 1962 1-10 11-20 21-30 31-40 41-50 51-60 11 10 26 20 16 4 AlJ..AGES 87 9 10 15 12 110 74 265 187 125 27 49 788 3 68 115 133 90 10.0 7.4 10.2 9.4 7.8 6.8 7.6 11.5 8.9 7.5 429 9.1 8.8 23 7.7 Peak Hatching Period Ageing of young during production counts and calculating approximate hatching dates was again employed in 1962. Figure 1 shows the peak of chukar hatching to have occurred between June 17 and June 25. The peak is not a prominent one and it appears that the bulk of the hatching occurred over an extended period from May 30 to July 4. A larger sample might have shown a more definite peak. Factors Affecting. Reproductive Success As explained in the Quarterly Report, April, 1961, p. 124, the critical period for moisture in relation to chukar breeding success seems to be February, March and April. If rainfall is 8ufficient during this period, green feed should be abundant and the hatch should be good. This reasoning is borne out by the good hatches of 1958 and 1960, both of which were preceeded by a wet spring. As shown in Table 5, adequate moisture was available during the spring of 1962 and apparently resulted in enough green feed to produce a good hatch. The average brood size for 1962 was low but the young-per-adult ratio was high, indicating a good total production. However, it is difficult to explain this success on the basis of.precipation and temperature alone as these data are for the Grand Junction area only. Differing weather conditions in other areas may allow other factors to figure· into this successful hatch. �-39- 36, 1959 1960 196.1. 1962 34· 32 \ 30 ' ,i.:. . 28 ' I 26, '(. . 24, 20, ~ if ~16. ';' , I. " / ." \ \ . \ \ \, I I \ I \\) I ~10 I ~ ~ /.. \\ I I , ~ 12' \, \ . . \.... .LLj.- \• • j:' ~18' \ \ if• i :' 22 . {) \ 8, 6 , - l--' , \ .'. ,, '. .\ ,, '.\ ,, .' ,, , " , 4 . 2 ' , o ~ ~~ Hay 30June 7 JlUle8 __ ~-J~ June 17 -16 -25 __ ~ __ ~~~~~~~ June 26July 4 July 5 -13 __ ~ __ ~~~~ July 14 -22 July 23Aug. 1 Figure l.--Peak of chukar partridge hatching in western Colorado, 1959-1962. �-40- Table 5. --MONTHLY WEATHER RECORDS,GRAND JUNCTION, COLORADO, AUGUST,1961, THROUGH JUNE . 1962. . Preci;Eitation Temperature Departure Departure Month Year Inches from Normal Average from Nom1 August September October November December January February March April May June If If " " 1962 " " " " " * * 1.63 2.22 0·70 0.66 0.63 0.39 1.09 0.28 0·97 0.17 0.30 1961 July not available Literature Cited: Prepared Date: by: at this +0.43 +1.20 -0.14 +0.11 -0.05 -0.25 +0.40 -0.47 +0.22 -0.43 -0.12 76.2 58.9 52.9 37.9 23·1 22.9 37.9 38.4 55·5 61.7 71.3 +0.6 -8.4 -1.5 -0·7 -5.4 -3·1 +5.3 -3·1 +3·2 -0·5 0.0 time. Sandfort, Wayne W. 1961. Chukar Partridge Production Studies. Colo. G. and F. Dept. Quarterly Report, April pp , 119-126. Richard M. Bartmann October, 1963 Approved by: Wayne.W. Sandfort Chief, Game Research _ Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �6ctober, 1963 -41- JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO --------~~~~-------- Project No. W-37-R-16 Game Bird Survey Work Plan No. 4 Job No.6 Title of Job: Chukar Trap ing and Transplanting of Game-Farm Stock Period Covered: March 21 through April 1, 1963 Personnel: Including Release Dwight Owens, John Howlett, Robert Mangus, Tom Barnes, Willis Mansfield, Harry Terrell, Foster Barker, Glenn Rogers, Hugh Jones, Merle Hodges, Charles Brown, Corrin Davidson, Troy Morgan, Guy Harris, Preston Steele, and personnel at the Little Hills Experiment Station. ABSTRACT One-thousand four-hundred and eighteen chukars were removed from holding pens at the Little Hills Experiment Station and at the Experimental Bird Farm, Rocky Ford, during the latter part of March and the first day of April and released in previously selected areas. Birds were released in 11 areas within eight counties. All releases were made in western Colorado except for 178 released on the Harvey Brothers Ranch west of Parkdale in Fremont County. Seventy-three birds escaped at the holding pen at Little Hills during loading operations on March 30. These birds supplemented previous intentional stocking in this locality. �-42Recommendations: Chukar partridge populations have shown continuous development in western Colorado during the trapping and/or transplanting program dating back as far as 1939. Although most of the potential areas for development of chukar populations have been stocked, there are several sites remaining where development potential exists. Escalante Canyon populations have failed to return to pre-hunt levels following heavy hunting during the 1960 season. It is recommended that this area be restocked with a minimum of 200 birds. As stated in the Federal Aid Quarterly Report for July, 1962, Part One, Page 21, additional releases in the San Luis Valley area may aid in extending the range of existing populations and bring these to shootable numbers. It is recommended that selection of suitable sites and release of gamefarm stock continue on a limited basis as long as potential development with this species exists • .Objectives: To increase the range and number of chukar partridges. Techniques Used: Game-farm chukars were loaded from holding pens at the Experimental Bird Farm, Rocky Ford, and the Little Hills Experiment Station, Rio Blanco County, and distributed in previously selected areas. Birds were held over winter for spring release to aid in survival of breeding stock. Birds were transported by vehicle to release areas where they were permitted to walk or fly from the shipping crates. �-43- CHUKAR TRAPPlNG AND TRANSPLANTlNG Wayne W. Sandfort A total of 1,418 game-farm chukars was released during the latter part of March and early April in 11 areas wi thin eight counties. All releases but one on the Harvey Brothers Ranch, Fremont County, were made in western Colorado. Chukar releases in 1963 were designed to supplement previous. releases and to fill gaps in existing chukar range. P1antings northwest of the .Staley Mine and at Yellow Creek were planned to extend the range of chukar population in the White River area, Rio Blanco County. Roan Creek releases were made in an attempt t? develop additional populations in the Bookc1iff Mountain range. P1antings at Cross Mountain and Harvey Brothers Ranch supplemented re+eases made last year, which were attempts to develop chukar populations in new areas. Placement of birds in Yellow Jacket, Delores River and Disappointment Creek areas was designed to develop chukar populations and increase their range in southwestern Colorado. Prepared Date : by: Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief Approved by: Lawrence E. Riordan Ass't Director, Research Ferd C. Kleinschnitz --...:.O..;:.ct..:.o.;:..b.:;,.e.:..;r:....,~1::.:::9;..:6~3 __ Federal Aid Coordinator �Table 1. -- Releases of Chukar Partridges, Game-Farm Stock, March and April, 1962. County Section, Township and Range Date of Release Cocks Montrose Sec. 5, T49N, R18W 3/21/63 -- -- 150 150 San Miguel Sec. 12, T43N, R17W 3/27/63 50 50 -- 100 Yellow Jacket Montezuma Sec. 26, T37N, R18W 3/28/63 100 100 -- 200 N.W. Staley Mine Rio Blanco Sec. 36 or 31, T3N, R102W or 101W 3/29/63 50 50 -- 100 N.W. Staley Mine Rio Blanco See, 1 or 6, T2N, R101W or 102W 3/29/63 50 50 -- 100 Cross Mountain Moffat 3/29/63 75 75 -- +=150 +=- Yellow Creek Rio Blanco Sec. 16, T2N, R98W 3/30/63 75 75 -- 150 Dry Ford, Piciance Cr. Rio Blanco See, 31, T1N, R96W 3/30/63 -- -- 73 73 Roan Creek Mesa Sec. 12 or 13, T9S, R99W 3/30/63 65 52 -- 117 Roan Creek Mesa Se~. 17, T8S, R97W 3/30/63 50 50 -- 100 Harvey Bros. Ranch Fremont Sec. 12, T18S, R72W 4/1/63 -- -- 178 178 515 502 401 1,418 Name of Release Site / Dolores River Disappointment Cr. TOTALS -- ALL AREAS Number of Birds Hens Unclass Total I I �October, 1963 -45- JOB COMJ?I..ErION REPORT RESEARCH state Project of PR()J'IDT SEGME:N:r --=c.:.O=LO.::;RADO:.=.::;:..:...---No. Work Plan Game Bird Survey 4 Job No. __ 8 No. Title of Job: Period Covered: Personnel: W-37-R-16 Dwight _ .=;C=hukar;::;;;:=-.:.:~:;;;;da;::.Iptr;..:;.;;:a:.;;;b..;;;:i~li;;;.t~yu,:.._;;.S.. ...;a;:.;;;n;;..;d;;...;;.P.;;.,apula~;;:;;;;. __ June 11, 1962 through September Owens, Roger Glenn Rogers, 1, 1962 Evans and Richard Bartmann Abstract: Field checks were conducted in 73 areas in 12 counties to obtain information of the population status, adaptability, and survival of chukars in Colorado. Information from additional areas was obtained from local residents, sportsmen, and Game and Fish Department personnel. A total of ~,828 birds was observed during single high count (by age groups) surveys in 44 areas. A population estimate of 7,425 chukars was derived fram these observations in conjunction with sign of birds and verbal reports. The population estimate was about 23 per cent higher than in 1961. Recommendations: It is recommended that these studies be continued indefinitely in order to evaluate the success of the chukar development program. Continued effort should be made to complete chukar census maps and forms so that routine censusing of key areas can be done by management personnel. Population checks should then be restricted to new reports of birds, new releases, and other areas not censused by management personnel. �-46- Objectives: (1) To determine the adaptability and survival of chukars in areas of new or recent releases, and in areas of established populations. To determine dispersal of birds from the point of original introduction. To eValuate the environmental factors in relation to the increase or decrease of this species. Techniques Used: Field checks were conducted in 73 areas in 12 counties, during 1962, which-contained both established populations and new release groups. Surveys ~ere usually carried out with a vehicle or on foot durL~g early mornings or evenings around cultivated fields, waterways, reservoirs, guzzlers, and other areas where birds commonly concentrate. Methods of determining the presence and numbers of chukarsincluded actual observations, calls, tracks, droppings, dusting areas, and reports by local residents and Department personnel. Data on chukar populations in areas other than those actually surveyed were obtained from verbal reports by local residents, sportsmen, and Department personnel. Chukar population estimates were made for 87 specific areas. MOvements of chukars both in and out of localities were recorded. �-47- CHUKAR ADAPTABILITY, SURVIVAL, AND POPULATION CHECKS Richard M. Bartmann Findings: Information obtained during the survey is divided into two categories: (1) chukar census· and population estimates, and (2) distribution. These are discussed in the following text. Census and Population Estimates A total of 1,828 chukars was observed during the summer of 1962. This total represents the maximum number of birds observed in each area during single high-count (by age groups) surveys. From these figures, and with other factors taken into consideration, the total population in 104 portions of the chukar range was estimated to be 7,425 birds. The estimated popUlations for counties and for specific areas are shown in Table 1. Table 1.--CHUKAR PARTRiDGE OBSERVATIONS AND SUMMER POPULATION ESTIMATES, 1962 County Delta 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 2l. 22. Area' Alkali Creek Angle's Ranch Black Canyon Broughton's Orchard County Line Dominguez Escalante Canyon Hargrave's Ranch Hotchkiss Ranch Indian Rock Ranch Little Peach Valley North Fork of Gunnison Oak Creek Peeples' Orchard Point Creek Redlands Mesa Smith Fork Tounge Creek Well's Gulch 111 Well's Gulch 112 Well's Gulch, N. Fork, 116 Well's Gulch 117 Sub-totals Date of Count 7/30 6/12 61.29 6/12 7/28 6/12 7/2 7/28 7/30 8/5 6/12 6/27 8/16 8/4 8/17 7/30 6/14 6/29 7/30 Maxinrum Birds Observed Adults Young Unclass. Total Pop. Estimate No survey, 1962 30 6 8 Report only Interview only General evaluation* General eva1uation* 1 Gen~ral evaluation* Interview only 10 25 4 24 3 No survey, 1962 15 6 49 1 8 1 4 Interviews only 11 5 Interviews only 19 48 General evaluation* General eva,luation* 6 11 9 190 52 62 50 100 100 50 25 25 100 25 25 100 100 44 1 39 27 '1 70 9 5 16 67 26 304 250 75 50 50 200 25 150 25 25 100 1650 �-48- Table l.--CHUKAR PARTRIDGE OBSERVATIONS AND SUMMER POPULATION ESTIMATES, 1962 Continued County Area Garfield 23. Camp Gulch (Guzzler) 24. Coon Hollow 25. Cottonwood Gulch 26. Demaree Canyon 27. Dry Canyon (Guzzler) 28. E. Salt Creek (Doug. Pass) 29. 30. 3l. 32. 33. 34. Mesa 35. 36. 37. Grahm Mesa Parachute Creek Prairie Canyon (Guzzler) Prince Creek Rifle Creek W. Salt Creek (Baxter Pass) Sub-totals Anchor Canyon Coal Creek (Cameo) Columbus Canyon (Guzzler) Columbus Canyon Area 38. Reeser Mine ) 39. Rock Cliff Mine ) 40. First Canyon West ) 4l. Second Canyon West) 42. Debeque Canyon ;/43. Gateway (Dolores River) 44. Horsethief Canyon 45. Hunter Canyon, 46. Indian Creek 47. John Brown Creek 48. Kannah Creek (Lower) 49. Kannah Creek (Upper) 50. Lipan Wash 5l. Plateau Creek 52. Rapid Creek 53. Ruby Canyon 54. Stove Canyon - Coal Gulch (Guzzler) 55. Watson Creek 56. West Creek (Near Gateway) 57. Windy Creek Sub-totals Date of Count Maximum Birds Observed Adults Young Unclass. Total Pop, Estimate 8/1 22 44 No survey, 1962 Interview only General evaluation* Sign only 9 18 27 100 1 25 25 25 100 28 42 1 150 100 35 4 37 50 100 35 204 675 10 25 94 150 150 46 20 75 50 25 25 6/18 9/1 8/29 6/22 8/4 ,No survey, 1962 4 24 3 39 No survey, 1962 7/13 . 1 3 8/30 2 7/24 7/26 41 6/26 7/25 7/10 7/9 7/25 7/11 7/31 6/14 7/23 6/13 7/22 7/12 7/23 7/29 6/26 8/21 128 No survey, 1962 4 21 19 65 1 ? 6 40 2 18 Sign only 2 10 No survey, 1962 33 214 Sign only 2 9 No survey, 1962 No survey, 1962 Sign only 6 50 Sign only 17 32 No survey, 1962 No survey,. 1962 17 95 Sign only No survey, 1962 Sign only 108 554 66 12 ? 7 254 21 32 400 50 100 1 ? 56 49 75 125 50 200 '/ ? 38 112 200 700 25 100 50 1850 �-49- Table l.--ClillKARPARTRIDGE OBSERVATIONS AND SUMMER POPULATION ESTIMATES, 1962 Continued County Area Moffat 58. Blevins' Ranch 59. Bull Canyon 60. Calloway Place 6l. Chukar Springs 62. Cross Mountain 63. Green River 64. Irish Canyon (Guzzler) 65. Jack Springs 66. Little Joe Basin 67. Simos Ranch 68. Spitzie Draw 69. Sterling Springs 70. Vermillion Creek Sub-totals Montrose 7l. Black Canyon 72. Blue Creek 73. Bostwick Park 74. Cimarron Area 75. Cottonwood Creek 76. Dry Creek 77. Duckett's Draw Mesa Creek J 78. 79. Olathe Gap 80. Paradox Valley 8l. Red Canyon 82. Red Rocks Ranch 83. Roc Creek 84. Shinn Park 85. South Canal Sub-totals Date of Maximum Birds Observed Pop. Count Adults Young Unclass. Total Estimate 7/26 7/26 7/26 6/21 6/21 7/26 6/20 7/26 7/26 7/26 6 46 Sign only 8 44 General eva1uation* 7 7/4 7/29 7/5 7/29 Rio Blanco 86. Burke Ranch (Piceance Cr.) 7/31 87. Chase Draw 7 /27 88. Little Hills 6/19 89. OldlandRanch (Piceance Or) 90. Skull Creek 6/20 91. Staley Mine (White River) 7/27 92. Warde 1 's Ranch (White Riv) 6/20 93. Yellow Creek 6/19 Sub-totals Report only Sign only No survey, 1962 No survey, 1962 No survey, 1962 No survey, 1962 No survey, 1962 5 1 No survey, 1962 No survey, 1962 No survey, 1962 28 63 3 10 Report only 3 26 39 100 2 6 30 28 296 100 150 100 25 100 50 200 50 100 50 25 50 50 1050 100, 50 100 100 '1 ? ? 6 25 100 'l 1. 25 116 13 25 29 164 12 13 49 14 7 7 Report only Sign only 13 21 34 2 Interview only 30 51 150 13 No survey, 1962 57 ··239 7/4 52 1 1 No survey, 1962 32 118 General Eva1uation* No survey, 1962 4 24 General Evaluation* 6 52 2 25 106 15P 75 150 150 1000 100 100 50 75 100 50 25 500 �-50- Table l.--CHUKAR PARTRIDGE OBSERVATIONS AND SUMMER POPULATION ESTIMATES, 1962 Continued . County Eagle 94. Area Date of Count Willow Creek (Sweetwater) 6/18 Maximum Birds Observed Adults Young Unclass. Total 2 18 20 Pop. Estimate 100 Fremont 95. 96. 97. 98. 99. 100. Canon City Area Four Mile Creek ) Priest Canyon ) Red Rock Canyon ) Twin Mt. Area ) (Adkisson Ranch» Wilson Creek ) Parkdale (Harvey Bros. Ranch) Montezuma 101. McE1mo Canyon Rio Grande 102. Del Norte Area Saguache 103. Saguache Area San Miguel 104. Disappointment Creek Sub-totals TOTALS ALL COUNTIES 7/8 No survey, 1962 No survey, 1962 No survey, 1962 Interview only 7/7 No survey, 1962 22 5 7/4 ? ? ? 50 ? 7 27 50 7 200 7/10 Sign only 100 7/9 Interview only 100 7/4 Interview only 31 23 368 1285 175 54 100 700 1828 7425 .*Based on past history and present range conditions. As shown in Table 2, the population estimate for 1962 is about 23 per cent higher than for 1961 and ranks close behind. the good chukar years of 1958 and 1960. The total number of birds observed in 1962 is about 32 per cent higher than in 1961. All estimates, particularly for those areas not censused this year, are believed to be conservative. �-51- Table 2.--SEVEN YEAR SUMMARY, CHUKAR PARrRIDGE POPULATION ESTlMATES, 1956-1962 Maximum Number Observed Year 4,425 2,280 7,950* 6,850 7,925 6,050* 7,425 936 375 2,678 1,698 2,050 1,388 1,828 1956 1957 1958 1959 1960 1961 1962 Population Estimate *Mean figure of high and low estimates. Distribution Distribution of the chukar partridge in 1962 offers little change to the 1960 distribution maps in the Federal Aid Quarterly Report, April, 1961, p. 144. The Cross Mountain release in Moffat County and the spread of chukars into the Chase Draw area north of Rangely are the notable exceptions. Chukar populations still remain low in the Escalante Canyon, Saguache, and Del Norte Areas. It is the general consensus of most people concerned that the birds have moved to other areas but thus far reports do not confirm this. Literature cited: Sandfort, Wayne W. 1961. Chukar Partridge Adaptability, Survival, and Population Checks. Colo. G. and F. Dept. Quarterly Report, April, pp. 139-145. Prepared by: Richard Bartmann Date: October, 1963 Approved by: Wayne W. Sandfort Chief of Game Research Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �October, 1963 -53- JOB COMPLErION REPORr RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO ------~~~~----------- Project No. Game Bird Survey W-37-R-16 Work Plan No. 4 -------------------- Title of Job: Chukar Hunter Check Period Covered: September 15 through November 18, 1962. Personnel: Job No. 9 Dwight E. Owens, Chad Crosby, Richard \1. Bartmann, and Wildlife Conservation Officers. ABSTRACT An early chukar hunt was held September 15-23 in northwest and west-central Colorado. This season was utilized to obtain information concerning the size of young chukars bagged by hunters in the field. A second season, November 10-18, was held in west-central Colorado only. Shooting hours were from sunrise to sunset. The bag limit was three birds and the possession limit six. The 1961 chukar seasons, not covered as a Federal Aid project were from September 30 to October 2, and November 11-14. Shooting hours were from 8:00 a.m. to sunset. The bag limit was three birds and the possession limit six. Information on chukars and hunting activity was obtained through general field checks and analysis of Wildlife Conservation Officer contact reports. Most information obtained was for the September season while that for the November season is almost lacking. Hunting pressure during the September season was moderate the first two days and then dropped abruptly. One hundred and thirty-nine hunters bagged 132 chukars in 55~ hours of hunting. This gives 0.94 birds per hunter per day, and 0.235 birds per hour. The age ratio was 67.4% young and 32.6% adults. Reproduction counts the preceding July and August showed 79.6% juveniles in the population. The hunter success during September in western Colorado (0.94 birds per hunter per day) was the second highest in the four years on record; 0.82 birds per hunter occuring in 1958, 0.11 birds per hunter in 1959, and 0.99 birds per hunter in 1960. No data is available for 1961. Figures for 1958 through 1960 are from Escalante Canyon during November seasons. The four year average shows hunters can expect to bag about 0.81 birds per day, and it will take about four hours to get one bird. The effects of this hunt can best be evaluated during mid-summer, 1963, when chukars again concentrate in the valley areas. �-54Weights of young chukars in western Colorado during September, 1962 ranged from 5.96 to 18.54 ounces, the average being 14.79 ounces. This compares with an average weight of 15.03 ounces for nine immature chukars taken in Brown's Park during September 17-18, 1960, and with an average weight of 17.63 ounces for 123 juvenile chukars taken over a three year period, 1958 to 1960, during November seasons in Escalante Canyon. The sex ratio showed 44.8% females and 55.2% males during September, 1962. Measurements of the bursa of fabricius have been used as an indicator of age in chultars during the open season. Average depths for immature birds have been 18.2 mm. in 1958, 16.0 mm. in 1959 (one bird), 13.8 mm in 1960, and 16.3 mm. in 1962. Measurements from years prior to 1962 were taken during November seasons. The slowness and difficulty encountered in using this technique indicate there is a need for refinement of aging methods for this species. Little information is available for the November 10-18, 1962, chukar season. The results of Wildlife Conservation Officer contact reports show that four hunters shot four birds in l3~ hours of hunting. This gives 1.00 birds per hunter per day and 0.296 birds per hunter per hour. From all indications the chukar hunting pressure was extremely light during the November season. Chukar kill data from the statewide random small game survey show 1,987 chukars were killed by 1,418 hunters during 1962 for an average season bag of 1.40 birds. In 1961, 1,274 chukars were shot by 1,202 hunters for an average season bag of 1.06 birds. In 1960, 2,938 birds were taken by 1,399 hunters for an average season bag of 2.10 chukars. An average of 29.0% of the total estimated chukar population was harvested during the 1960 through 1962 period. It is recommended that mid-September chukar seasons be continued, in addition to the regular November season, so that hunters may bag some of the birds before the late fall dispersal. Liberalizing the chukar seasons through increased bag limits, or extended seasons, or both, would also tend to increase the harvest. Special restrictions should be considered in Escalante Canyon if longer seasons are set in other areas. This may tend to discourage the hunter concentration that may develop here when this area is again open to hunting. Objectives: (1) To determine the success of hunters during the open season. (2) To collect various data on chukars in Colorado, which may include: (a) crops for food habits analysis, (b) weights, (c) incidence of parasitism, (d) molting characteristics, and (e) sex and age ratios. Techniques Used: An early chukar hunt was established by the Game and Fish Commission on September 15-23 in northwestern and west central Colorado. Field checks were conducted to obtain weight, sex, and age data from birds bagged by hunters in the field. Several crops were collected for food habits analysis. The regular season, November 10-18, was held in west-central Colorado only. During both the September and November seasons, shooting hours were from sunrise to sunset. The bag limit was three birds and the possession limit nine. �-55- CHUKAR HUNTER CHECK Richard M. Bartmann Chukar hunter checks were resumed as a Federal Aid activity in 1962 after being dropped in 1961 because they were considered a routine management function. Information on chukars and hunting activity in western Colorado was obtained through general field checks and analysis of Wildlife Conservation Officer contact reports. A summary of the 1962 chukar hunting seasons shows some changes from the 1961 seasons. The 1961 seasons were from September 30 to October 2, and November 11-14, with the hunting hours being from 8:00 avm, to sunset. The bag limit was three birds and possession limit six. The 1962 seasons were from September 15-23, and November 10-18, with the hunting hours being from sunrise to sunset. The bag limit was three birds and possession limit nine. During 1961 and 1962 the first season was held in northwest and west-central Colorado and the second season was in westcentral Colorado only. Escalante Canyon was closed both years due to a scarcity of birds. Field checks of hunters were made in the Brown's Park, White River, and Grand Junction areas during the first three days of the September 15-23 chukar season. Special forms, as used in previous years, were utilized in recording data on hunting pressure and hunter success and in tabulation data on chukar weights, sex, age, and bursa depths. Forty-five chukar crops were obtained incidental to other work. These have been turned over to the Department of Forest Recreation and Wildlife Conservation, Colorado State University, for analysis. The results of this are not available at this time. Findings: Results of chukar hunter checks during the 1962 season are given under appropriate headings below. Since the chukar hunter checks were dropped as a Federal Aid activity in 1961, the kill data from the statewide random small game survey for that year are also summarized. SEPTEMBER CHUKAR HUNT Hunter Success On opening day hunter success was 0.93 birds per hunter but dropped to 0.70 birds per hunter the second day. Also the birds were higher up on the hillsides and thus more difficult to hunt as revealed by the decline in the number of birds taken per hour from 0.203 the first day to 0.199 the second day. Hunting pressure the following week, through Saturday, was light. This is probably the reason for the increase in hunter success the last day, Sunday, of' the season when, on the average, each hUnter bagged 1.78 birds or 0.379 birds per hour of hunting. Table I breaks the hunting pressure down by county and areas as compiled from field checks and Wildlife Conservation Officer contact reports. �-56- Table 1.--CHUKAR PARTRIDGE HUNTER CHECK, WESTERN COLORADO, SEPTEMBER 15-23, 1962. Number Number Number Birds Birds of of Hours of Birds per per County Area Hunters Hunted Killed Hunter Hour Delta Smith Fork 1 5 2 2.00 0.400 ??'l 2 13 63.00 0.462 Sub-total 3 18 8 2.67 0.444 Garfield West Elk Creek 1 4 2 2.00 0.500 Mesa Gateway Kannah Creek (Upper) Stove Canyon-Coal Gulch Sub-total 14 56 16 69 141 36 2.57 0.22 0.08 0.83 0.643 0.125 0.029 0.284 0·33 0.00 3.00 0.45 0.67 1.50 0.97 0.067 0.000 0.857 0.102 0.133 0.243 0.182 1.42 0.50 0.80 1.08 0.312 0.167 0.364 0.315 0.76 0.00 1.00 1.38 0.89 0.128 0.000 0.444 0.512 0.192 Moffat B1evin 's Ranch Bull Canyon Calloway Place Irish Canyon Sterling Springs 25 48 3 2y 3 11 6 6 ??? Sub-total Montrose 9 Orme Ranch South Canal 15 12 10! 49 30 37 2 2 40 1 o 9 5 4 9 29 12 17 2 1 10 24 22 8 Chase Draw Staley Mine Warde1 Ranch 21 125 6 16 ??? 8 2J:1- 11 35 16J-2 31 ??? ??? 2 10 TOTAL ALL AREAS 139 558! ~ These hunters also included under Irish Canyon. 6 132 ??? Sub-total Rio Blanco 2 4 Sub-total 9 o 4 0.600 0.235 Information was also obtained from 51 hunters in 1962 in northwestern Colorado on the number of chukars observed. During the first day of the season, 24 hunters saw an average of 12 birds each. On the second day, 27 hunters saw an average of eight birds each. This reflects, somewhat, the effect of the first day's hunt. In 1958 it was found that about 16.4% of the birds were taken in the valley bottems and 83.6 were shot on the rocky hillsides. In 1962 approximately 33.3% of the birds were bagged in the valley areas and 66.7% were taken on the rocky slopes. In 1958, 11% of the hunters used dogs and in 1962, 12% hunted with them. In both years dogs were found ineffective for working chukars. �-57Miscellaneous Data Information on chukar weights, sex, and age, was obtained during the first four days of the September 15-23, 1962 season. Sex was determined by inspecting the gonads. Age was determined by measurement of the bursa. The feasibility of an early chukar hunt was tested in 1962 in northwestern and west-central Colorado. Previously only a special four day season, September 17-20, was tried in the, Brown's Park area of Moffat County in 1960 with poor success. Only five hunters were checked and 10 chukars were examined during the first two days of the season. A slightly later season, September 30 to October 2, was held in 1961 but insufficient data were collected. Weight.--Fifty-two chukars were weighed in the field during the first four days of the September, 1962, season. Data from these weights are shown in Table 2. Table 2. --CHUKAR PARTRIDGE WEIGm'S, BROWN'S PARK, WHrrE RIVER, AND GRAND JUNCTION AREASz WESTERN COLORAOOz SEP.rEMBER l5-l8.! 1962. Number Minimum Maximum Average of Weights Weights Weights Sex. Age Birds Lbs. ozs. lbs. ozs. lbs. ozs. Females Immature 1.78 14 0 7.82 1 0 14.21 Mature 8 0 14.30 1 2.46 0 15.99 All Females 0 7.82 1 2.46 23 0 14.91 Immature Mature Males 17 12 29 0 1 0 5.96 1.64 5.96 1 1 1 2.54 4.41 4.41 0 1 1 15.27 3.54 1.04 All Immature Birds 31 0 5.96 1 2.54 0 14.79 All Mature Birds ALL BIRDS 21 52 0 0 14.30 5.96 1 1 4.41 4.41 1 1 2.02 0.09 Males All The weights of young chukars were of particular interest during the September period. It was found that 12 of the 31 young chukars, 38.7%, weighed less than the lightest adult. The average weight of these 12 birds was 11.96 ounces. The smallest chukar weighed 5.96 ounces and the average weight of all immature birds was 14.79 ounces. No hunter was heard to complain of any chukar being too small although a few may have had reason to. Sex.--Sex of 58 chukars was determined during September, 1962, with the data showing a slight preponderance of males--26 females and 32 males. Age.--Age of chukars was determined by checking for and measuring the bursa of fabric ius • Average bursa depths for 11 immature females and 16 immature males were 14.8 and 17.4 mm., respectively. Bursa depths for all young birds ranged from 11 to 22 mm., the average being 16.3 mm, This compares with an average depth of 13.8 mm. in 1960, 16.0 mm. (one bird) in 1959, and 18.2 mm. in 1958. �-58- Bursa depths on 10 adult chukars ranged from 4 to 6 mm., the average being 4.9 nun. NOVEMBER CHUKAR IWNT Few data are available from the November 10-18, 1962, chukar season. No field checks were undertaken and only four Wildlife Conservation Officer contacts were made. These are show.n in Table 3. Table 3. --CIDJKAR PARTRIDGE HUNTER CHECK, WESTERN COLORADO , NOVEMBER 10-18, 1962 Number Number Number Birds Birds of of Hours of Birds per per County Area Hunters Hunted Killed Hunter Hour Delta Redlands Mesa 2 8 3 1.50 0.375 Garfield Rif'le Creek 1 4 1 1.00 0.250 Montrose South Canal TOTAL ALL AREAS 1 11.. 4 0 l3t 0.00 1.00 0.000 0.296 4 Though these data seem insufficient, the number of birds per hunter, 1.00, and the number of birds per hour, 0.296, are not far removed from corresponding figures shown in Table 2 from the September season. General information received on chukar hunting pressure during November indicates very few hunters were out after these birds. This may have been due to the hunter's attention being directed towards the more easily hunted pheasants. Table 4 summarizes the chukar hunter checks for the past five years. Table 4.--CO.MPARISON OF CIDJKAR IWNTER CHECKS IN WESTERN COLORADO, 1958-1962. Number Birds Birds _.,.,....;Ag~e~....__ of Hours Birds Bagged Cripples Per Per % % Year Hunters Hunted Adult Young Total No. Hunter Hour Young Adult % Y 148 1958 1959 Y. 57 1961 Y Y. 93 448 148 274 1962 1962 TOTALS f; 143 572 1960 30 5 41 92 1 51 14 90 29 173 l22 6 92 23 0 21 18.6 5 9 10.4 15.7 15·9 136 35 0.82 0.11 0·99 0.272 0.041 0.336 0.94 0.235 75.4 16.7 55.4 24.6 83.3 44.6 Results of chukar hunter checks in Escalante Canyon during November seasons. No data available. Data from September 15-23 season in western Colorado, excluding Escalante Canyon but including ~. Data based on 51 hunters checked in Moffat and Rio Blanco Counties, September 15-16. �-59The data in Table 4 are not quite comparable with that of previous years in that they were taken from different areas during different times of the year. However, the results appear in close agreement with the general trend set by previous year's data. Table 5 shows the 1962 chukar hunting pressure and kill broken down by county. Table 5.--CHUKAR PARTRIDGE HUNTER SUCCESS IN COLORADO, 1962. Number Birds County Of Hunters Kill Per Hunter Boulder Delta Garfield Larimer Mesa Moffat Montrose Pueblo Rio Blanco TOTALS 27 321 106 27 375 81 348 27 106 1418 0.00 0.79 3.95 0.00 0.97 2.09 1.20 0.00 3.43 1.40 252 419 364 169 419 364 1987 Chukar kill data for 1960 through 1962 are summarized in Table 6. Table 6.--SUMMARY OF CHUKAR PARTRIDGE KILL DATA, WESTERN COLORADO, 1960-1962 Number Average Total Estimated of Estimated of Season Chukar Population Chukar Population Year Hunters ~ll Bag In Colorado Killed % TOTALS 1,399 1,202 1,418 4,019 2,938 1,274 1,987 6,199 2.10 1.06 1.40 7,925 6,050 7,425 21,400 Y 37.1 21.1 26.8 29.0 Y Information from the statewide random small game survey. Recommendations: Information from the chukar hunter check in 1962 and during preceeding years indicates the chukar harvest is lower than this species might be able to withstand. This is especially true during the November season. Rough �-60terrain, remoteness of some of the areas, lack of familiarity with terrain and hunting techniques, the running and climbing habits of this species, and generally widespread dispersal of birds following fall rains, all contribute to low hunter success. In view of the above, the following recommendations are made: 1. Continue mid-September chukar seasons, in addition to the regular November season, in all areas of the state so that hunters may bag some of the birds before the late fall dispersal. 2$ Liberalize the chukar hunting in all areas, except Escalante Canyon, through increased bags, extended seasons, or both, to increase the chpkar harvest. 3. Consider special restrictions on chukar hunting in Escalante Canyon if extended seasons are set in the other areas. This may tend to discourage the hunter. concentration in this area that could develop from an extended season when this area is again open to hunting. Prepared by: Richard M. Bartmann Date: October, 1963 Approved by: Wayne W. Sandfort Chief, Game Research Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �October, 1963 -61- JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of C;;..;O;.;;LO~RAD;;.;;.;..O~ __ Project No. __ W;.;.,-..,;3:;.;,7_-,;;.;R-_;;:.;16:..__ Game Bird Survey Work Plan No • .....,:4 Title of Jobs Job No. 10 --~------------------------------- Mapping Zones and Routes for Chukar Partridge Census Period Coveredt Personnel: _ July 16, 1962 to March 31, 1963 Glenn E. Rogers, Wayne W. Sandfort and Richard M. Bartmann Abstractt Maps for six important chukar areas in western Colorado. were prepared during 1962. This brings the total number of chukar census route maps completed to 12. Twenty-four other areas in western Colorado are to be considered for establishment of chukar census routes. Recommendations: Mapping of all important chukar areas within the state should be completed and assistance should be given in orientation of management personnel in the standardized census procedure. Record books should be assembled for use by Area Supervisors in recording census data. Consideration should be given to preparation of an annual statewide report on chukar partridge reproduction success for use in establishment of hunting seasons. Oblectivest (1) To standardize methods for determining annual chukar partridge reproduction. (2) To establish, map and describe zones or routes for use during counts of chukar broods or flocks. (3) To instruct Department personnel in a standardized census procedure. (4) To' prepare forms and record books for systematic recording of information. Techniques Usedl Selection of areas.-~Most important areas, from the standpoint of chukar populations, accessibility and significance for hunting, were given consideration during the selection of areas to be used in annual chukar census. Six areas were mapped during this segment (16) and 24 more are scheduled for consideration during 1963. �-62- Description of times for reproduction counts and methods for making counts.-Information pertaining to times and methods for chukar census was gathered during past survey work. This information has been summarized and reported in the Colorado Game and Fish Department Quarterly Report for July. 1962, Part Two. Mapping of routes and areas for census.--Co1orado county highway maps, scale one-half inch per mile, have been used as the base map for mapping chukar areas. Aerial photographs may be required to aid in plotting roads in areas that do not contain established state or county roads. The general outline of chukar range within the census 'unit has been placed on the base map and concentration areas, where chukars will be normally observed, are indicated by a shaded section. Orientation on the map has been shown by a "north" arrow. In addition to designating the chukar census area on a map, detailed descriptions (including mileages) have been prepared to showt (1) access to the general area, and (2) the specific method of survey_ Each census area has been named, and the county or counties where it occurs is indicated. �-63- MAPPING ZONES AND ROUTES. FOR CHUKAR PARTRIDGE CENSUS Richard M. Bartmann Maps of six important chukar areas were prepared during 1962. These areas are (1) Staley Mine in .Rio Blanco County, (2) Smith Fork in Delta County, and (3) East Salt Cr~ek, (4) Plateau Creek, (5) Upper Kannah Creek, and (6) Indian Rock Ranch, all in Mesa County. These six new maps are appended. This brings the total number of chukar census area maps completed thus far to 12. A complete description of census procedures and forms used to record census data is given in the Colorado Game and Fish Department Quarterly Report for July, 1962, Part Two. Other areas being considered for establishment given in Table 1. Table 1.--Areas to be Considered Routes During 1963. County of chukar census routes are for Establishment Area Delta Angel's Ranch Little Peach Valley Oak Creek Well's Gulch, Guzzler #1 Well's Gulch, Guzzler #7 Disappointment Creek Willow Creek Camp Gulch Prairie Canyon West Salt Creek Columbus Canyon. Blevins' Ranch Bull Canyon Calloway Place Irish Canyon Simos Ranch Sterling Springs Red Rocks Ranch South Canal Chase Draw Warde 11 Ranch Dolores Eagle Garfield Mesa Moffat Montrose Rio Blanco Approved by: Date: of Chukar Partridge Census O~c~t~o_b_e_r~, 19~6~3~ _ Wayne W. Sandfort Chief of Game Research Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �-64- N METHOD OF SURVEY:Drive slowlY east along State Highway64 for 9.5 miles to F1.etcher GUlch (marked by sign). Turn around and drive west 3.4 miles to Staleyaine turnoff and turn right. Proceed 0.4 mile to gate on left. Drive through gate 1.1 miles to shear pens and return. If gate is locked, ; omit the 1.1 miles to shear pens. Continue north and east 0.1 mile and turn left just before bridge. Drive in 0.4 mile to mine and return. Cross bridge, turn left, and drive 0.1 mile and turn right on road leading. to Highway40. Drive up 1.0 mile towards top of hill and turn around and I return to Highway64. Turn right . ; and return to starting point at ---P'-+~~--N::---+~--+---H--Gillam. Draw. Interview local ---t~~~~~E~~~~~~Bm~~F~9= .residents permits. Watch both sides asof time highway, side roads and fields. Chukars are most commo~ observed along a 4.0 mile area extending from 3.0 to 8.5 miles east of the starting point along Colo. HiglrWay64" and around the Staley mine. -~~~~~l¥S~~~--r-~+-e-~r--7-+-~~ 22 23 17 20 O. •• 20 •• •7 ~ ... or ~ CHUKAR PARTRIJ:GE CENSUS AREA. STALEY MINE Rio Blanco County ACCESS: Travel east of the junction of State Highway64 and Rio Blanco County 1J9 (Douglas Pass road) for 1.8 miles to Gillam Drawand starting point for count. Accessible by all vehicles. �-65METHOD OFSURVEY:Drive slow~ west down road along the north side of the carzy-on .6.6 miles to a fork. Take left (south) 'fork and immediate~ cross the creek. :Continue on 2.8 miles to Calsumix diggings. Turn around and return to starting point. ,Interview local residents as time permits. ,Chukars ~ concentrate along lower :fields lying 6.0 miles below starting point. " I. .. ..• /, " CHUKAR PARTRIOOE CENSUS AREA. SMITHFORK Delta County ACCESS: Travel 0.5 mile south from the corner of State Highway92 and B Street at the west end of Hotchkiss to bridge. Proceed south 0.5 mile to junction. Continue straight ahead (south) 0.5 mile to fork. Take left (east) fork for 0.5 mile to junction. Continue straight on left fork 2.3 miles to another fork. Take right (south) fork 0.1 mile to driveway leading to house on left. Continue straight 1.6 miles to intersection. Turn left and drive 0.5 mile to fork. Take right (south) fork and continue 0.9 mile to mail box (road junction) and starting point for count. Pickup or jeep required. �METHOD OF SURVEY:Drive slow~ up the Douglas Pass road 2.2 miles and turn right off main road. Drive north and east 0.2 milel across East Salt Creekl to gate. Drive or walk 0.3 mile past gate to old cabin and original release site. Turn around and return to main road. Turn right and drive north 5.6 miles to fork • . Take right fork off main roadl across oreek and through ranchl and travel 1.2 miles to gate. Turn -around and return to Douglas Pass road, Drive south and make another round trip to release site. Return to starting point at bridge. Interview local residents as time per.mits. Birds usua.J4r concentrate in vicinity. of fields along first portion of the route. -66.0 2. 10 I. " 12 " s. CHUKAR PARTRIOOE CENSUS AREA EASTSALTCREEK Garfield County ACCESS: Travel north from the junction of U. S. Highway50 and 13 Road (Douglas Pass.·road)1 at Iomal for 14.7 miles to bridge over East Salt Creek and starting point for oount. Pickup or jeep advised. �-67:METHOD OF SURVEY:Drive slowl3r along State Highway for 10.5 miles to the DeBeq.ueturnoff (gravel road on -M~~-l----':the left). Turn around and drive 9.3 miles to lower ranch (Steffan's) in Plateau Canyon. Turn around and drive ,--;'i';":-'<>--~I---,~-4f~~-I-=t::E/b,.-l~:.-back up the canyon 3.3 miles, past -'< Erven I s and Alexander's" to wide graveled shoulder on the right side of ------:-:-'=-..v.-~____=I_!11-_l1IJ~;'*~~~-the _road. Turn around and return to starting point by U. S. Highway 6 & 24. -Birds usuall3r concentrate along -the +--'---I+---\,,~~,..,I~--I-\---Il--+-~"'Ll-+ first 4.0 miles of the route around the : lower ranches in the ca.tzy'on,but may be \ observed along other portions of the ~o---+--~j~/gf---:~~_, r-..+-l--+----'ll--+"icl-t--: route. Interview local residents as 'time permits. .--"~i!lJK--ri::=- 65 2. CHUKAR PARTRIroECENSUS AREA PIATEAU CREEK Mesa County ACCESS: Travel to the junction of U. S. Highway 6 & 24 and State Higb:w'a\Y 65 north and east of Palisade and starting point for count. Accessible by all vehicles. �-68METHOD OF SURVEY:Dri ve slowly up Kannah Creek I. road for 6.5 miles to Grand Mesa National Forest -+--+1 boundary and Intake. Turn around and return to ll---+---\----\-J~-__4_ •• , starting point. Interview local residents as time permits. Birds may be observed anywhere along route. One of main concentration areas occurs from Raber t s ranch to Girl Scout Camp, about 4.5 to 5.7 miles above starting point. 15 •5 \ •• •• •• 25 '0 CHUKAR P.AR.TlUOOECENSUS AREA UPPERKA.NNAH CREEK Mesa County ACCESS z Travel 3.7 miles south and east from the junction of U. S. Highway50 and State HighwayJ.4l near Whitewater to the land I s End road. Turn left and drive 307 miles' and take right' fork leading to Purdy Mesa. Take right forkagaiD., 0.1 mile further, which leads to the Kannah Creek road and City Intake~ Continue east and south 0.8 mile to bridge and starting point for count. Accessible by all vehicles. �-69- '~~~~~~~~9~~~?1 METHOD OF Drive slow~ along railroad. tracks 1.0 mile to suspension, SURVEYs .;t;i . , bridge. Oross bridge and. turn right. Drive 0.5 mile to gate on left (where , ---y-ae"c-g road turns toward house) and turn left. \ Drive 0.3 mile, along fields, to fork ' R==~-p\~-{~~-~--+ just before gate. Take left fork, l -1-#11+f--l through gate, 0.7 mile to another gate.: . Turn around and return to bridge. ~-+----t-~.-+--~+ Continue. 0.7· mile, along west side of ~f----II-+---" : river, to large boulder at mouth of " DominguezCa,n;ron. Return to house and then return to suspens~on bridge and cross to east side. Turn right and drive 0.1 mile to old railroad buildings. .Turn around and return to --U----t--I~ffstarting point at cattle guard. Interview residents at ranch. Birds may be observed ~here along the a+~-1~~~~~~~tr~~j--~route. ~Ro=f<~s:-1~~-t---"'1" 25' t. " 50 , \ \ ..~ " .-- .---.- - - -- -_.- I - . "' __ 10 " CHUKAR PARTRIOOE CENSUS AREA nIDIANROCK RANCH Mesa Oounty ACCESSsTravel ll.3 miles south and east from the junction of U. S. Highway50 and. State HighwC\V J.4l.' near Whitewater to Indian Rock Ranch road. Turn right and drive for 3.3 miles to cattle guard near Gunnison River and starting po~ for count. Accessible by all vehicles. �October, 1963 -71- JOB COMPLE.TION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of Project No. ---::.C.;:,.OLO=.,;RAOO=:...:.._ W-37-R-16 ------~~----------------- Game Bird Survey Work Plan No. 4 Title of Job: Locating Sites for Artificial Period Covered: June 11, 1962, to September 1, 1962. Job No. 11 Water Developments. Abstract: Aerial and ground surveys were conducted to locate permanent water in the Grand Mesa Foothills and lower Bookcliffs areas. All water found was plotted on a map to act as a guide in the future selection of guzzler sites. Two Areas investigated in the course of these surveys are recommended as potential locations for guzzlers: (1) Second canyon northwest of Rock Cliff mine (Sec. 12, T 10 S, R 100 W) and (2) second canyon northwest of Columbus Canyon, (Sec. 22, T 9 s, R 100 W), both in Mesa County. The Brown's Park section of Moffat County, the area north of Rangely in Moffat and Rio Blanco Counties and the Yellow Creek and Douglas Creek Drainages south of Rangely in Rio Blanco County remain to be surveyed. Recommendations: Information obtained by Ken E. Nicolls, graduate student, under Work Plan 4, Job No.7, Segment 14, indicates water developments in the Well's Gulch area, Delt~ County, are responsible for the development of good chukar populations. In years of poor reproduction these developments tend to hold a reserve of adult birds which otherwise would not be maintained. It is recommended surveys be continued in potential chukar areas to locate and map permanent water and also describe sites for artificial water developments. Objectives: To locate suitable sites within potential chukar range for installation of artificial water developments, "guzzlers". To determine legal descriptions, including metes and bounds, of potential guzzler sites. To provide information on potential guzzler sites in report form for use in development programs by regional land managers. Procedure: Aerial and ground reconnaissance was conducted within potential, but arid, chukar ranges during the hot, dry, summer period. Surveys were restricted, generally, to the Grand Mesa foothills and lower Bookcliffs areas. All water found was plotted on B~planimetric maps. Food conditions were noted in some areas and aided in recommending suitable areas for guzzler sites. �-73- LOCATING SrrES FOR ARTIFICIAL WATERING DEVICES Richard M. Bartmann Emphasis was placed on locating and mapping areas. containing permanent water within potential, but dry, chukar ranges in western Colorado. The grand Mesa foothills and lower Bookcliffs areas were surveyed during the summer of 1962. Mapping Permanent Water Aerial surveys were made to locate areas that might contain permanent water. These areas were then covered on foot and all water found was plotted on BLM planimetric maps. General food conditions found in some of the areas were also noted. Potential Areas for Guzzler Sites Two general areas were noted as being potentially suited for placement of guzzlers: (1) Second canyon northwest of Rock Cliff mine and (2) second canyon northwest of Columbus Canyon, both in Mesa County (Fig. 1). These areas were selected on the basis of seemingly adequate food supplies and accessibility. A few chukars and chukarsigns were found in both canyons. It is believed larger chukar populations than are estimated to exist there could be maintained if a permanent water supply is provided. Both areas are accessible by ~ickup truck. other areas to be surveyed in the future include the Brown I s Park section of Moffat County, the area north of Rangely in Moffat and Rio Blanco Counties, and the Yellow Creek and Douglas Creek drainages south of Rangely in Rio Blanco County (Fig. 1). Much of this land is dry and could possibly support chukar populations if permanent water were available. Approved by: Wayne W. Sandfort Chief, Game Research Date: o~c~t~o_b_er_,~1~9~6~3 _ Ferd C. KJ..einschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �W\ E : RO UTT i i i L o 3 LOGAN .'\. III ll@ iI ,.."i LEGEND i\~. General.outline of survey areas ~ •- 0 Brown's Park @ North Rangely area ® Yellow Creek drainage @ Douglas Creek drainage E [~'''''IBWRAY e LowerBookoliffs @ Grand Mesafoothills • ~i-" ~ ">}L. Figure 1.-- General areas being oonsidered for guzzler sites. ~"~~4~1 I Areas reoommendedfor placement of guzzlers --.J ~'N·~·~.. ..f::"" I �October, 1963 -75JOB COMPLErION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of ~CO~LO~RADO~~ Project No. W-3!7-R-16 Work Plan No. 5 _ Game Bird Survey 5 Job No. Title of Job: Correlation of Mourning Dove Call-Counts Major Habitat Types. Period Covered: April 1, 1962 to October 1, 1962. and Productivity in ABSTRACT Coo-count routes were established in four habitat types in north-central Colorado. Seasonal cooing trends were determined for each habitat type, and for each coo-count station. Study areas were established and mapped for each habitat type, and seasonal nesting data was collected for each study area. The importance of the city study area as nesting habitat is evident. The numbers of doves heard cooing at coo-count numbers of breeding doves and numbers of young of the stations in four habitat types. Cooing wild doves showed that there was little cooing in the nest. , stations produced behavior activity were compared to within hearing radius studies of individual when young squabs were Objectives: 1. Evaluate calling doves in relation to breeding pairs, nesting densities, and production in four representative habitat types. 2. Determine dove production during seasonal progression representative habitat types. in the four 3. Band fledgling and mature doves as a contribution to further understanding of migration and longevity patterns of the species. �-77- CORRELATION OF MOURNING OOVE CALL-COUNTS .AND PRODUCTIVITY IN MAJOR HABITAT TYPES Charles P.Stone, Jr. Introduction Mourning doves are among the few game species capable of living in harmony with increasing populations a valuable resource, of men. As such, they comprise and present dove research will possibly be more important to the hunter of the future than research on less adaptable game species. Frequently, decisive action in wildlife management taken only when crises arise (Kie1, 1961). game populations is Shortage of time and low in times of crises often make it impossible to obtain much of the needed information. There is no crisis at hand for Colorado dove populations, dove numbers are apparently and continental but the number of unknowns in mourning dove management numerous for highly successful management high; are far too of one of our most hunted game birds. The Dove Technical Committee of Game, Fish, and Conservation of the International Commissioners needs of highest priority the following: call-count technique; evaluation breeding pairs and production range; development Association lists among research Improvement of the basic of calling doves in relation to in various habitat types of the dove and evaluation of a breeding-season production �-78- index; determination of actual nesting densities in different localized habitat types; comparison of densities shown by call count transects with habitat characteristics vegetation, ecological such as cropland, soils, topography, natural zones, etc.; evaluation of population produc- tivity in different habitat types in different parts of the continent; and determination breeding of the contribution of different periods of the season to fall population. There has been insufficient time to analyze thoroughly the data ~o11ected this summer, but it is hoped that the fo11owing report will add to the increasing fund of knowledge on the problems involved in dove management. Coo-count Trends Coo-count Routes-lations of doves. The coo-count is an index to breeding popu- Coo-count routes were established in 1950 and 1951 (Foote .and Peters, 1952) in the contiguous United States fo11cndng investigations of several workers. length with listening Standard coo-count routes are 20 miles in stations at one-mile intervals. Coves heard cooing and the number of coos heard in a 3-minute period at each station are recorded. Doves seen on the route are also recorded. Routes are initiated one-half hour before sunrise, and require 2 hours to complete. are made nationally relatively Counts from May 20 to June 10, a period which calling is stable, as indicated by studies in the eastern states. Routes for this study were established roads, representativeness on the basis of available of type, available COOing perches, type of �-79- road surface, and proximity considered to Fort Collins. important for dove production the basis of previous type abundance. observations The types are: The routes sample 4 types in Larimer County, either on or coo-counts, shortgrass-shrub, or on the basis on foothills vegetation, farmland, and urban vegetation. The city route is irregular it is only 10 miles in length. Urban noises after sunrise and the small size of Fort Collins made a shorter route desirable. were made from April 1 to September Collection 2! Coo-count .~ -- Doves produce at least 3 types The perch coo or territorial call is used chiefly to announce territory possession or young. Coo-counts 11, 1962. of calls other than the copulation note. female doves. in that and to attract The warning call is used to comnrunicate danger to mate The nest call attracts the mate to the established to call the female to prospective nest sites. nest or The perch coo is given only or chiefly by males; and the warning and nest calls are given by either s~x (Frankel, 1961). The perch coo is the basic unit of the coo-count census. Instruc- tions for making a dove coo-count do not specify how much of the perch coo should be heard to record a dove call, or a calling dove, in the appropriate co1unms of the data sheet. The amount of the call required is important for at least 2 reasons; first, the nest call can sound like the first part of the perch coo and, by recording nest coos, both members of a pair may be recorded; coo contain different of sonagrams. secondly, different parts of the perch energy levels, as shown by preliminary studies Thus, counts based on different parts of the call serve only to sample different size areas. formly within or among dove-management If data are not collected uniunits, comparisons of calling �-80- doves among states are questionable. of' the questionnaire described Table I presents in the previous the f'inal results quarterly (Stone, 1962) and indicates clearly that data are not collected unif'ormly within or among units. The majority management of' states in the Central and Western dove units require the f'irst double note of' the dove call and thus ignore f'aint calls, whereas the Eastern dove unit records peripheral calls. Calling populations in the Central and Western units are lower than they would be if' compared on an equal basis with the Eastern unit. In the present study, the basic unit utilized was the lower-energy double note plus one additional note. Habitat TYPe cooing trends -- Cooing trends f'or each of' the habitat types are presented grass-shrub areas increased abruptly sharp cooing increases somewhat in Figure 1. later. Cooing in the city and short- in late April and early May, whereas in the f'oothills and f'arm areas were manif'ested Cooing began to decrease in the later half' of' July. Increased decrease was characteristic in all types. Table 2 presents sharply in all habitat types cooing bef'ore any pronounced cooing data f'or the period between the rapid cooing increase and, decrease. The city was by f'ar the pref'erred type f'or cooing doves on the basis of' doves heard per 20 stations. tion in the number of' doves heard per route is noteworthy, discussed 4 Varia- and will be f'urther in relation to the number of' doves actually within an audibility radius. Apparently consistent cooing is not related to the number of'birds heard in a given area or on a given route. Routes �-81- with the smallest and next to the largest number of cooing birds were the most variable, Table 2. Table 2 -- COO COUNT DATA FOR FOUR HABITAT TYPES IN LARIMER COUNTY, COLORADO Habitat Type Mean Calls Per Route Range Percent Deviation From Mean Calls City 32.0 !I 26-38 18.75 Foothills 26.5 16-37 39.62 Shortgrass 15.0 11-19 26.67 Farm 12.5 6-19 52.00 !I 10 stations only. Coo-counts in different parts of the United States have generally shown a,uniform pattern pre-plateau (Foote and Peters, 1952). Usually there is a peak of calling in late April and early May, followed by a month of near level calling activity. during the period of near-level National coo-counts are made calling. Pre-plateau peaks are not evident in this study, except in the city and shortgrass types. calling-period plateau The (May 10 to June 10) is especially variable in the foothills type, which is at a higher elevation (5,360-5,700 feet) than the other habitat types, and where calling may not have stabilized by the national census dates. The great variation route may be due in part to utilization in doves heard per of the low-energy double note in the perch coo for the basic unit of the coo-count route. This pro- duced a smaller audibility radius, fewer doves recorded at each station �40 ~ 35 l ./\ "0 J.c '11 Q) .'.'! \' , , / \ • .. • 25 t :x: -- Shortgrass • • • City • 30 ~ -.- Farm .. •. . "' ~ Foothills • Ul CD > 0 Q 20 '+-i .rr, 0 J.c Q) ..0 S z 15 • . . 10 ~ s / \ I •<, 5 L • 10 20 April <, \ \ / t• 10 20 May / 30 10 . , , co I\) . \ '" \ ® -Ii> .-,. " .. $- 20· 30 June . \' / • \ / 30 , ~ e • • ~ , • /, 1 . 10 20 July 30 10 20 August Figure 1. Mourning dove cooing trends in four habitat types, Larimer COtUlty, Colorado. 30 �-83- and more variability presumably results than if a dove was recorded after hearing any note. Figure 2 depicts the calling activity at each station on the city coo-count route during the summer. More doves were heard in June at most stations than in any other month. This suggests that there were more doves present frequency in June at each station, that greater cooing increased the chances of hearing doves in June, or both. Peak numbers at most stations in the foothills type were also heard in June (Figure 3). Graphs of cooing activity at stations in the other habitat types present different pictures (Figures ~ and 5). Peak num- bers of calling doves were heard at most stations on the shortgrass route in June, but nearly as many .stations had peak numbers in May and July. Peak numbers were heard at many stations on the farm route in July, but several stations had peakS in each of the other months. If peak calling is associated with peak nesting, nesting in the shortgrass and farm types appears to be spread quite evenly over the season, whereas nesting in the other two types is more concentrated in the month of June. �__ e .- -- . • 1 / \ \ / • 6 5 . . / / 4 ~ o z (1) bD s..qJ . 2 ~ < 1 \\ • >< P , .I' \ '\ \ ./ '\ . / ~ \ \1- 1- I' /-1- \ •• \• + ~ --s J( ,,10 s> • !I -' . • / - • .,. ,. 1/ ,'~ ~. ~ ~. I / 2 3 4 5 6 I.~ '" V',t 1 8' Station Figure 2. Dove calling activity at stations en city It'OO-countroute. p lIT- • ,OFT" • 9 10, • . ..e.::::::: • / .•.• \ r'< ;.\ ./ -" >'" • -. • I • '{f \• ,I .r x 1 ~ \ \ ,I 1- -. I 'I • . /">1 • x )l x July •. , ••August '\ • -t Jt 'I . )( ,J -. - June .,..•~ '\\ ,\ •\ , , . 'I \ , ., . It \ /./' / l .••..•. April - - - May \ -t , ' ~ "- ',,- .••\ , ., 3 -- \ \\ \ ~.,.. ~ \ ~ " /' 8 (1) ....x ,,.' • / / / • ~ s.. / I/ Q) ~ / 1/ 'ElU CI) ------, / • �-85Foothills 5 4 3 ? 1 ~ 0 ~ 20 ,.:» a 0 X 0 u ~ 5 ).. 0 'E CIS 3 Q) ~~ fI) 2 Q) > li 1 ft.4 0 J.. 1 Q) Stations ~ :z: Q) bO J.. '" Q) > ,5 It <II 3 2 1 Figure 3. Calling activity at stations on foothills coo-count route. �-86- Shortgr~ 2 1 ,-May ~ ~ +' s 1 ..,",-Apri1 10 Stations 0 X 0 0 6 'E 2 t1I Q) t.:: 0 1 L-June ~ 8 'H 0 ~ Q) § 1 ~ 5 10 Stations 15 20 Q) bD 1II ~ Q) I>- ~ 2 1 ,,-July 10, Stations Figure 4. Calling activity at stations 15 on shortgrass route. �-87- Farmland 5 4 3 ...,CD g ~ -+3 2 ~ay 1 a . -~ 0 Y 0 0 0 ~ 0 '0 ~ CD ~ ------~ 10 Stations a~Aprll . 20 15 5 4 3 U) g! 2 fo.I 1 ,8 0 •... CD 0 ~ ~ CD' be •... 5 < 4 ill g! August 3 y-July /Ju1y 2 1· 1 5 10 Stations 15 20 Figure 5. Calling activity at stations on farmland route. �-88- Description of Study Areas Study areas in each of the 4 habitat types were chosen to represent the particular route. type and to be near the center of the coo-count study areas were chosen after extensive reconnaissance type, and without previous areas. Centrally lation purposes information located call-count since dove-calling in relation to sunrise. as to dove populations in each on the stations were desirable for corre- activity generally A description follows a pattern of each of the study areas follows. Foothills Study Area -- The foothills area is in T6N, R70W, Sections 22 and 23 of Larimer County. The center of the l50-acre tract is one mile south of Masonville, Colorado, road at an elevation of approximately is a moderately steep, rocky slope, and is dissected by 2 canyons. Mountain mahogany ponderosa) 5,360 feet. on a blacktop (Cercocarous montanus) predominate, The area west of the road and ponderosa with skunk bush (~ trilobita) pine (Pinus and different species of willow (Salix spp.) and cottonwood the lower areas. The area east of the road is composed largely of pasture and bottomland, with cottonwoods, negundo) being the predominant species. (Populus spp.) common in willows, and boxelder (~ There are 422 trees on the entire 150 acres. There are 3 used dwelling houses and several shacks, corrals, and buildings on the area. Water is abundant in Buckhorn Creek just to the east in several irrigation ditches on the eastern portion, and in one ditch on the western Acreages are given in Table 3. side. in various land use in 1962 Some of the common animals are listed in Table 4. �Table -3. -- LAND USAGE OF FOUR STUDY AREAS m LARmER City Acres Foothills Acres Residential 48.0 Mountain mahoganyponderosa pine 65.8 Pasture 22.9 Corn Bottomland 21.0 Alfalfa Park and Golf Course 42.7 Road 28.4 Playground Y 14.0 COUNTY, COLORADO, 1962 Farm Acreas Shortgrass Pasture 54.2 Shortgrassshrub 137.9 37.4 Dry channels 8.4 17.9 Road 3.7 Wheat 11.3 Crested Wheatgrass 13.2 I Water 12.7 Farm Buildings and pens 11.1 Beans 13.0 Cemetery 4.2 Alfalfa 7.7 Road 5.9 Road 5.0 Farm buildings and pens 4.8 Water 3.9 Water 2.8 Orchard 1.3 Beets 0.8 Total I (» '-0 150 11 MOstly even-aged, pole-size trees. 150 150 150 �Table 4. SOME COMIDN AND1ALS ON FOUR STUDY AREAS m IARIMER COUNTY, COLORADO . City Study .Area Class Amphibia ~ Leopard frog-~ Pipiens !I Class Reptilia Red-sided garter snakeThamnophis sirtailis parieta1is Class Mammaliagj Fox squirre1-Sciuras niger Dog-Canis fami1iaris ----cat-Felis domesticus Cottontai1-Sy1vi1agus spp. Class Aves ~ Robin Common grackle House sparrow Red-shafted flicker House finch Franklin's gull Crow Nighthawk y. Nomenclature-from g;, Nomenclature ~ Nomenclature Conant-;-1.958 from Palmer, 1954 from Peterson, 1961 Farm Study Area Foothills Study .Area Shortgrass Study Area Class Amphibia Leopard frog- Class Reptilia Prairie rattlesnake Class Reptilia Red-sided garter snake Class Reptilia Prairie ratt1esnakeCrota1is viridis Bull snake-Pituophis me1ano1eucus Class Mammalia Thirteen-lined ground squirre1-Spermophi1us tridecemlineatus Gray Fox-Urocyon cinereoargenteus Cottontail Dog Class Mammalia Rock squirre1-Citellus Variegatus Least chipmunk-Eutamias minimus Mule deer-Odocoi1eus Hemionus Dog Class Aves Black-billed magpie Robin Red-winged blackbird Rock dove Eastern kingbird Bullocks oriole Lewis woodpecker Red-shafted flicker Starling Brewer's blackbird Western meadowlark Franklin's gull Mallard Great blue heron Sparrow hawk Class Aves Black-billed magpie Robin Stellar's jay Rufous-sided towhee Canon wren Western meadowlark Red-shafted flicker Red-headed woodpecker Lazuli bunting Sparrow hawk Belted kingfisher Ring-necked pheasant Chukar Class Mammalia Black-tailed jackrabbit-Lepus ca1iforiiicUs Cbttontai1 Striped skunkMephitis mephitis Class Aves . Western.mockingbird Lark bunting Lark sparrow Eastern kingbird Western kingbird Nighthawk Horned lark I '8 • �-91- Shortgrass Study Area -- The shortgrass area is in TION, R69W, Sections 11, 12, 13, and 14 of Larimer County. acre tract is along a gravel road The center of the 150- 5.5 miles west of Highway 87. It is flat to gently s~oping, and is dissected by two dry channels on the eastern half. There are no buildings, for farming. The chief land use is cattle grazing, with some infrequent sheep use. Predominant western wheatgrass canescens )• and none of the tract is utilized plant species are blue grema (Bouteloua gracilis), (Agropyron smithii), and fourwing saltbush (Atriplex Russian Thistle (Salsola kali), fringed sage (Artemesia frigida), and prickly-pear cactus (Opuntia spp.) have invaded portions of the area. There is one plains cottonwood (Populus sargentii) present. Some water collects in the arroyos after rains but it generally does not last long. Acreages the land uses are given in Table 3, and some of the common animals are listed in Table 4. Farmland Study Area -- The farmland area is in T7N, R68w, Sections 28, 29, 32, and 33 of Larimer County. The center of the 150- acre tract is on a gravel road 3 miles east of highway 287; is approximately 5,000 feet. buildings with associated grazing. elevation There are 2 residences and several corrals and pens. The chief land use is There are 53 trees, chiefly plains cottonwoo4s and willows. Water is abundant in several large irrigation ditches, and after May most of the land is flooded by irrigation. Land use acreages are given in Table 3, and some of the common animals are listed in Table 4. Cj.ty study Area -- The city area is in T7N, R69W, Sections 10 and 15 of Larimer County. The center of the l50-acre tract is at the �-92- junction of Oak street and Bryan Avenue, elevation of 5,004 feet. The north half of the area is chiefly residential, whereas the south part consists of mowed grass with peripheral or scattered trees. There is a stand of even-aged, pole-size trees near the center, and a portion of the city cemetery extends into the sample on the east. Park Lake is southeast of the area center. Water is abundant, the lake, many public and private law.n sprinklers, birdbaths, and a ditch running through the center of the area, provide water throughout. There are 1,812 trees, American elm (Ulmus americana), silver maple (Acer saccharinum), blue spruce (picea pungens), (Fraxinus spp.) predominating. Land use acreages are presented and some of the common animals are listed in Table and ash in Table 3, 4. Climate -- Because doves are generally thought to be "weather birds", some general information be of interest. behavior on the summer climate of Colorado may Local weather is certainly important in the flocking of doves, and may have implications during the breeding season. The 'climate of the plains, on which 3 of the types are located, is comparatively uniform from place to place, with low relative humidity, light rainfall, moderate to high wind movement, abundant sunshine, and a near uniform daily range in temperature. Approaching winds are less severe, summer temperatures are lower, the daily range in temperature increases is less, and precipitation eastern Colorado, most of the precipitation June being one of the wetter months. the foothills, (Berry, 1960). L~ falls in the spring with The agricultural area immediately east of Fort Collins annually receives nearly 2 inches less rain than the city. However, thunderstorms are prevalent on the eastern plains �-93- and along the eastern slope of the mountains in the spring and summer. On occasion these storms are the cause of hail damage to crops, especially in the northeastern "hail belt". The mean date for the last spring frost in Fort Collins is May 21, with extremes or April 25 and June 20 over a 7l-year period (Parshall, 1961). On the average, the first fall frost is September 19, with extremes on August 22 and October 11. The growing season averages 121 days, the last spring frost in 1962 was May 1, and the first fall frost (very light) was September 9. If frost is a limiting factor for doves, there is time for approximately 3 complete nesting cycles in the region. Nesting Results Spot-mapping Method -- The spot-mapping lation density was used in this study. method of measuring popu- It consists of plotting territorial, and usually COOing, doves on a sketch map of a particular area. Since doves coo near their nests, the nests can usually be associated with cooing birds. practical The spot-mapping method has been judged effective and in regions where breeding populations are scattered. Hopkins and Odum (1953), who originated the method for doves, state that if dove behavior in the vicinity of the nesting site is observed, it is not necessary to spend much time looking for nests if only an estimate of breeding denSity is desired. The spot-mapping accurately method has the advantage of speedily and estimating breeding density if all doves are assumed to be mated and on territory when the census is made. likely to underestimate A count of nests is denSity since all doves are not likely to be �-94- nesting at the same time. gives no information Like the coo-count, the spot-mapping method on production. In this investigation, territorial unmated until an associated doves were assumed to be nest was found. Nests were usually within 150 feet of cooing doves in the city, but in the other areas nests were as much as 200 yards from cooing perches. the study, population densities in conjunction for purposes of in these areas were low enough to enable the observer to follow individual an estimate of production Fortunately cooing doves to their nests. was desired, the spot-mapping Since method was used with a search for nests near all doves sighted or heard on the several areas. Production the 4 areas. -- Table 5 presents the results of nesting on each of Since doves were heard consistently at a distance of 2,444 feet from the listening point, the shortgrass area was enlarged to a radius of 2,444 feet (431 acres). radii on the farm and foothills Audibility areas averaged 1,442 feet, the radius of a 150-acre circle. The audibility radii in the city averaged less than 200 feet, but an area of 150 acres was censused for additional data and comparative pur- poses. It is evident that the city area is highly preferred by nesting doves. The city and farm type were both utilized more than the native shortgrass-shrub type, but there were fewer nesting attempts per pair on these areas. Doves using shortgrass habitat produced more nestlings per pair and showed higher nesting success. used least successfully, although Foothills habitat was it ranked second only to the city area in number of doves per 100-acres. �-95Table 5. -- PRODUCTION DATA. FOR FOUR :L50-ACRE STUDY AREAS IN LARIMER COUNTY, COLORADO, 1962 Nest Data City Study Area Y Farm Study Area Foothills Study Area Shortgrass Study Area Maximum number of nesting pairs gj 46 2 6 Active nests Found '}} 108 3 16 4 Clutches attempted n8 3 181./ 61./ 3 3 Clutches attempted per pair 2.6 1.5 Clutches hatched 58 2 8 3 Clutches yielding young 51 2 7 3 Nestlings raised ~ 86 4 12 5 Nestlings raised per pair 1.87 2.0 2.0 Nestlings raised per clutch 1.4 1.3 43.2 66.7 Nestling success 21 §j 1.2 33·3 Doves per 100 acres 61.3 8 Young fledged per 100 acres 57.3 8 ~ 50.0 1.1 10.1% of nests were inaccessible, and data was estimated from sign. g; Highest number spot-mapped. ~ Active nest is any nest containing eggs or young. ~5 Those leaving nest. ~ ~ Nesting success: clutches producing young. Clutches attempted. Hen of one pair killed at the end of June, so one pair for most of season. An estimated 2 nests not found. Explained in text. �-96Table 6 presents results of several other nesting studies for comparison with this study. attempt, and the.number Although the number of young fledged per nesting of nesting attempts per pair, are comparable, the number of young fledged per pair in the present work is lower than in other studies except those in Georgia. the spot-mapping Studies in Georgia also utilized method whereas, in others, nests were counted and the ·number of breeding pairs estimated from the greatest number of nests active at one time. (In the case of the California study an unexplained per- centage was added to the greatest number of nests active at one time.) Since not all pairs are nesting at once, the number of doves are underestimated, and clutches attempted per pair are overestimated. other hand, the spot-mapping method may overestimate On the the number of nesting doves if all birds are not nesting or if they move in and out of the census areao Table 6. -- COMPARISON OF SOME NESTING DATA FOR MOURNING DOVES State Young Fledged per Nesting Attempt Nesting Attempts Per Pair North Dakota 4.6 4.4 1.38 2·3 California 6.2 1.28 4.4 Idaho 3.2 1.21 2.7 Iowa 5.3 0.87 Colorado 3.4 Georgia 2.1 2.1 This study .~ Young Fledged Per Pair gJ Y 2.09 Adapted from Fitcher (1958). Average of 4 areas in north-central 1.35 Colorado 2.53 �-97- In this study, one dove on the foothills type cooed often and at different cooing perches up to 450 yards apart. He was never seen associated with a female, and no nest was found near his cooing stations. A dove on the farm area cooed at odd intervals from stations 500 yards apart after his mate was shot and his nest destroyed by irrigation. A dove on the shortgrass area cooed from stations over 800 yards apart after his mate left or was killed. An estimated 9 doves on the city study area were never seen with females, and nests were never found within the usual 150 feet of their cooing stations. They all cooed frequently and at unusual hours, but did not appear to remain on the area for long. predators, Some may have been the mates of females destroyed by and some may have been ranging especially wide in the courting stage of the nest cycle. male. Most of the birds seemed to coo close to another All were judged unmated. ~ Losses -- Nesting losses are hard to determine accurately an extensive study such as this. on Most of the destroyed eggs found on the city area were punctured as if eaten by predaceous birds, although a few were crushed. Young losses were obscure since few were located. Three young were found dead with puncture wounds about the body and head; several young were found without marks on them. Some of these were in low nests near the powerful park sprinkler systems, and may have been scared out of their nests prematurely. Prime predator suspects in the city are grackles, crows, and blue jays, the first of·which were easily the most abundant. Fox squirrels are also abundant, and on two occasions were observed on branches near dove nests although they seemed to be ignoring the nests. played no noticeable Weather role in nesting losses, although a localized hail storm took a heavy toll elsewhere in the city. �-98Losses on the foothills area were attributed chiefly to magpies, there were 4 active magpie nests scattered over the l50-acre area, and each nest produced 4 or 5 young. A litter of bull snakes and at least 3 litters of rock squirrels may have been important predators on the western half of the area where ground nests predominated. The only predators prairie rattlesnakes centration loss. sighted on the shortgrass study area were and a striped skunk. On the farm tract, a con- of starlings near one nest may have been responsible The other nest was destroyed by irrigation flooding. for its Mr. George Hoff, owner of most of the farm, said that he usually cuts up a dove or two during haying each year. Any ground-nesting species is, of course, subject to much the same losses as pheasants on irrigated farmland. Nesting Sites -- Allen (1954) stated that a knowledge of nesting habitat is important in case any specific requirements insure breeding success. For this reason, a count was made of trees on all the study areas, and the percentages pared with percentages must be met to of each species were com- of different species used for nesting. Data on nest heights and locations were also gathered. On the shortgrass, there were 3 plains cottonwood trees, but dove nests were all on the ground, and all within 25 yards of a cooing perch in the form of a tree or telephone wire. under saltbushes, Three nests were located and one was in a field of grass. On the farm, there were 53 trees, chiefly plains cottonwood and willows. One nest was in a cottonwood 100 feet high, another in a willow 40 feet high, and another in an alfalfa field. �-99There were 422 trees on the foothills area, chiefly cottonwoods, willows, boxe1ders, and ponderosa pines. Nine nests were on the ground, 5 in cottonwoods, and 2 in willows. Tables 7 and 8 present data on the city nests. There were 1,812 trees on the sample, and the 10 species utilized for nesting comprised 1,212 trees or 66.9 percent of the total. The percentage of nests in American elms was greatly in excess of the percentage of elms present, thus indicating preference. Conversely, the percentage of nests in blue spruce was much lower than the percentage of spruce trees. Common grackles utilized the clumps of spruces to a great extent, and interspecies competition for nesting sites was quite likely a factor contributing to low dove usage. The average nest height in the deciduous species was much greater than in spruce, and nests were likely to be located farther from the main trunk in deciduous trees. The residential and park-like sections of the area were utilized approximately in proportion to their abundance, but the playground area was utilized somewhat in excess of its abundance. Relationship of Coo-counts to Territorial Doves and Nests Figures 6 and 7 depict the relationships of doves heard from stations on coo-count routes to doves heard the next day on a spot-mapping census and to the number of active nests. It is evident that a dove heard on a coo-count can represent a different number of breeding doves and a different number of active nests in different types and in the same types. Individual differences in cooing behavior playa in determining whether or not a dove is heard at a given time. great role For �-100Table 7. -- TREES USED FOR NESTING BY IDURND"G DOVES IN FORT COLLmS, . . COLORADO, 1962 . Tree-Nest Categories American Silver Cotton- Blue Ash Willow BoxElm Maple wood Spruce elder Number of trees on area 442 187 Percent of total trees 36.5 15.4 7·9 Number of nests in species gj 69 16 Percent of nests in species "J/ 58.5 13.6 5.9 y 96 7 154 154 42 HoneyLocust Hack- Hedge berry 21 79 3 34 ]2.7 ]2.7 3·5 1.7 6.5 0.3 2.8 8 5 6 2 1 1 3 6.8 4.3 5.1 1.7 0.8 0.8 2.5 !I Speeien total ~ total of 10 most important trees, or 1,2]2. gz Including reused nests. ~ Total nests in species total of nests, or 118 nests. t Table 8. -- NEST LOCATIONS FOR COMMJNLY USED TREE SPECIES m COLORADO, 1962 Average Height (feet) Range in Height (feet) Median Height (feet) Modal Height (feet) American elm 33.9 15-60 30 30 15.8 Silver maple 33.5 10-70 30 Cottonwood 42.1 30-60 Blue Spruce 17.8 8-25 Species Y Discounting 2 trunk nests. gj Discounting 1 trunk nest. 11 Discounting reused nests. Average Distance From main Trunk (feet) FORT COLLINS Median Distance (feet) Number of Trees with Nests Y 15 67 "J/ 20.3 14.9 gj 1 13 ~ 40 30 13.7 ]2 7 20 25 5.3 5 6 �-101- t!!3Coo-count ~ Breeding Birds r.:=:;:::' ~ Active Nests I June 14 June 24 July 4 June 18 June 28 July 7 July ll~ Jy:ly 26 August 9 2 rn Q) :> 8 1 II II IJI Iii Shortgrass July 17 ~tudy Area.· 2 I IJ1 Jilm 1!:-:-:'·;·..:·::·r····· fjl1 ~\MIill o ~-...•• ,,}i-::.:.: ·.. ::":t;.·.·. June 12 July '27 August 15 June 23 July 2' July 1~ ,July 23 August 3 Figure 6. Relationships of noves heard calling at coo-count stations in three habitat types, to breeding birds within a radius of audibility and to active bests. �-104- It was found in the city, where territory size in relatively constant, that cooing doves can be associated with their nests after some observational experience. Cooing observations were concentrated on the city birds. Table 9. -- RELATIONSHIP OF DOVES HEARD ON A COO-COUNT STATION TO BREEDING PAIRS .AND PRODUCTION, COLORADO, 1962 Area Average Number of Average Number Doves Heard on of Doves Coo-count Station"}) Spot-mapped Young Produced Young Per Cooing Produced Dove Young Produced Per Dove Spot-mapped City 6 32.2 86 Farm o 1.4 4 Shortgrass 0.8 2.0 4 2.0 Foothills '0.8 12 2.1 11 Period between sharp rise and sharp fall in cooing. Cooing Observations ~ Nest Locations -- A record was kept of the nesting status of cocks when they were first heard calling during spot-mapping census. Forty-six nests were thus located during the courting and guilding state, 15 when the doves were brooding large young in the nest, 28 when doves were incubating eggs, and 29 after nest destruction, after the male had not been heard, or was unknown. Notebly, none were found during the early brood period, suggesting that cooing at this time is of low frequency. Records of indi~idual dove cooing in hourly morning and evening periods are given in Table 10. Most of the observations were taken in July and August due to the marking difficulties discussed. The number of perch coos per hour, 3-minute intervals cooed in, and average calls per 3-minute period are all less in the early brooding state than at �-105- Table 10. -- RECORDS OF INDIVIDUAL DOVE COOING IN FORT COLLms, 1962 !I Status Perch Coos Per Hour a.m. Courting and building 5 p.m. 42 3 1 31 10 gj NUmber of 8-minute Intervals Cooed In a.m. 3 2 1 4 p.m. 7 2".5 gj COLORADO, Average Calls Per 3-minutes Nest Calls Per hour a.m. E·m. 1.4 6 1.5 1.0 7.8 2.9 gj a.m. 36 36 0 0 p.m. 4 IS" gj --------------------------------------------------------------------------------Incubating 10 19 2 13 OJ.! 26 10 12 42 18.5 gj 4 1 6 2 1 7 3·5 gj 3 5 0 4.8 2.0 4.3 5.0 12.0 6.0 53Jgj 3.3 2.6 0.0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ogj 0 0 0 --------------------------------------------------------------------------------Young brood 0 2 19j 0 0 10 0 2 0 0 1 .5 gj 0 0 3 0 1 0 9 0 2 19j 0 0 3.3 0 2.0 0 10 0 0 0 5 ?J 10 0 0 0 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------Old . brood 3 22 9 2 9Y 38 1 4 4 1 2.5 gj 9 3·0 5.5 2-3 2.0 3.2 gj 4.2 0 0 0 76 114 47.5 gj !I Most taken in late nesting season: 1 hour after sunrise and 1 hour before sunsete . �-106- any other time. In this case, doves in the incubating stage coo more than doves in the late brooding is the substitu~ion statuses. or courting stage. of nest calls for perch coos by doves in the last 2 Nest calls are not counted on coo-count routes, since females also produce them, as explained earlier. mentioned, Part of the reason After the localized hail storm many doves on 3 stations hard hit by the storm were pre- sumably building new nests. The number of doves heard giving perch coos at these stations decreased markedly, but the number of nest calls was greatly increased. In addition to uttering nest calls, many doves in the courting and building stage are occupied with carrying nest materials and have little time for perch cooing. Flocking Trends Although no specific observation observations routes were run in the spring, on coo-count routes indicate that doves continue migration into the state until mid-June.. Small flocks of adult, apparently non- breeding birds, were observed until this time, especially on the city and foothills areas. Fall flocking reached a peak in mid-August, somewhat after breeding began to decline on the study areas. Figure 8 shows the results of a count made near Fort Collins in cooperation with the Colorado Game and Fish Department. are being made throughout population Similar counts the state in an attempt to correlate fall movements with climatic data. The decrease in birds per mile after the first frost, and only 8 days after the opening of dove season, explains some of the season-setting northerly states. headaches faced by the more �3.5 3.0 ., 70 I Doves per Hour Temperature 2.5 l ~ joo / n:t\ ..oc ~ :::s 1-'0 § C1> r-i ..-4 ;:;:: 2.0 M l? r::: « 1-'0 I-' c, C1> 50 t-3 C1> C1> tr.l III Jt A 1.5 '0 M ..-4 ~ 1.0 \ r V ~ CD ..•...•. 1 \\ 1'r 1 0 1 "'J .5 30 o 10 20 30 ~ 0 -.J ~ ~ 40 August I-' CD Ii t j 10 September 20 30 10 October Figure 8. Relationship between doves seen per mile near Ft. Collins, Colorado, and minium ~aily temperature. I CD '-'" I �-108Literature Cited Allen, D. L. 1954. Our Wildlife Legacy. York, 422 pp. Funk and Wagnalls Company, New Berry, J. W. 1960. Climates of the states-Colorado. Commerce, Weather Bureau, Washington. 16 p. U. S. Department Conant, R. 1958. A field guide to reptiles and amphibians. Mifflin Co., Boxton. 366 p. Houghton Fitcher, E. 1958. MOurning dove production in four Idaho orchards and some possible implications. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 23 (4): 438-447. Foote, L. E., and H. S. Peters. 1952. Introduction. Investigations of methods of appraising the abundance of mourning doves. U. S. Dept. of the Interior, Fish and Wildl. Servo Spec. Sci. Rept., Wildl. 17: 1-3. Frankel, A. I. and T. S. Baskett. 1961. The effect of pairing on cooing of penned mourning doves. J Wi1dl. Mgmt. 25(4): 372-384. e- Harris,. S. W., and M. A. Morse. 1958. The use of mist nets for capturing nesting mourning doves. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 22(3): 306-309. Hopkins, M. N., and E.P. Odum. 1953. Some aspects of the papulation ecology of breeding mourning doves in Georgia. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 17(2): 132-143. Kiel, W. H., Jr. 1961. The mourning dove program for the future. N. Am. Wild. Conf. 26: 418-435. Palmer, R. S. 1954. City. 384 p. The mammal guide. Doubleday and Co., Inc., Garden Parshall, M. 1961. Meteorological data 1887-1957. Exper. Sta. Bull. 509-S. 17 p. Peterson, R. T. 1961. Co., Cambridge. Trans. Colorado State Univ. A field guide to western birds. 366 p. Houghton Mifflin Stone, C. P. 1962. Mourning dove production and cooing behavior in Larimer County, Colorado. Colo. Coop. Wildl. Res. Unit, Quart. Prepared by: Charles P. Stone, Jr. Date: ~0~c~t~o~b~e~rL,_1~9~6~3~ _ Approved by: Wayne W. Sandfort Chief, Game Research �October, 1963 -109- JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of --:;C..;:.O.;;;;LO.;:.;RADO=~ _ Project No. __ Game Bird Survey ...;.;W:..,.-;::.37.!,..-...;;R..;,..-.::;1_6 _ Work Plan No. 6 Title of Job: Experimental Period Covered: April 1, 1962 to March 31, 1963. Job No. habitat improvement 1 for scaled quail ABSTRACT Part 1. Windmill Cover Development study Evaluation studies consisted primarily of census of the five windmill cover development areas and their controls. No scaled quail were found during either the summer or winter census periods. A total of 337 trees and shrubs were planted in March of 1962. A majority of these·were replacements for previous plant loss. Survival percentage was uncertain because of a prolonged dry summer, fall, and winter period in 1962-63. Part II. Old Homestead Development Study This study was reorganized to a ratio of six development areas utilizing two undeveloped sites as controls. and six control Hunter checks of study areas revealed an approximate 20 to 30 per cent bird removal. Information on kill per hunter, kill per hour, bird weight, sex, age and species kill ratios was collected. Banding of quail progressed study areas. through the late winter on and near the Late and inadequate development on development area #6 combined with influences which were not found on the controls resulted in exclusion of the area from the analysis of census results. Scaled quail and total bird populations were found to be significantly greater on the remaining development areas than on the controls between the 1960-61 and the 1962-63 winter periods. A significant difference was found in the capacity of the development areas to retain scaled quail from the 1962 summer to pre-hunting season census period. �-1l0- Part III. Brush Shelter Development Study 'The study was initiated with the selection of three development sections and three comparable control sections within the better sandsage -- yucca rangeland of Southern Baca County. Each section was divided into quarter-section study areas for evaluation purposes. A brush shelter structure was constructed near the center of each of the twelve development study areas during the spring of 1962. Mapping and data recording progressed on all the areas during the same period. A pre-development (winter 1961-62) census revealed thirteen scaled quail within study area #1 of control section 2 and ten bobwhite along the west edge of this same area. No other stable coveys were located. Quail utilization was observed at all shelters in development sections #1 and #2 during the summer and fall. Winter (1962-63) census comparisons revealed thirteen scaled quail utilizing shelter #4 in section #1 and sixteen scaled quail using shelters #1 and #3 in section 2-D. No stable coveys were observed in area controls, however, a covey of fourteen were observed in area #3 of section 2-C during the latter part of the winter. Part IV. Technical Assistance in upland Game Bird Habitat Development Assistance was provided in the planting of 1200 shrubs and trees in and near exclosures in the Timpas District of the Comanche,National Grasslands. Assistance in development site selection was provided in the Carrizo District with recommendations offered for various phases of the work. Recommendations: All phases and parts of the study should continue in an effort to determine the most beneficial and economical methods of habitat improvement. Objectives: 1. To determine the value of water and cover developments in increasing the range and numbers of scaled quail. 2. To cooperate with u.S. Forest Service Comanche National Grasslands Personnel in the selection and technical advice in the development of surplus grazing tracts for upland game bird habitat. �-111- Techniques Used: I. Windmill Cover Development A. B. II. B. C. D. D. E. F. G. B. study. Selection of suitable development and control study areas. Development of limited brush shelter cover. Mapping of study areas and localities by detail, vegetative cover, improvements and water. Compile data records of conditions and changes. Determine existing quail populations by census. Banding and marking of scaled quail coveys to check movement, survival and other factors. Determine the value of development work (by statistical and other comparative methods) in: 1. Increasing present populations. 2. Maintaining populations for improved harvest. 3 • Both (1) and (2) above. Technical Assistance A. study Census of study areas by summer counts, pre-season counts, winter counts and pheasant crowing counts. Hunter Checks to determine pressure, success and harvest. Banding of quail to determine movement , survival and other factors. Determination of value of development work (by statistical and other comparative methods) in: 1. Increasing present populations. 2. Securing improved harvest of game bird pbpulations. 3. Both (1) and (2) above. Brush Shelter Development A. B. C. IV. study plot development. Summer and winter census of study sections. Old Homestead Site Development A. III. Study. in UPland Game Bird Habitat Development Coordinate planning and advise in the selection of suitable upland game bird development areas. Advise and assist in initial habitat improvement work on the development areas. �-113EXPERIMENTAL HAB:rM.T IMPROVEMENT FOR SCALED QUAIL Warren Snyder Windmill Cover Development Part I. Study Continued census checks of the windmill areas during the summer and winter revealed no quail using or in residence on the square mile development or control study areas. The following table provides a summation of 1962 replacement each of the development plots. Table plantings on The March, 1962 Tree and Shrub Planting On the Windmill Development Plots. 1. 1 2 3 4 5 Total per S;eecies Russian Mulberry 14 1 10 17 9 51 Black Locust 8 5 10 17 9 49 Osage Orange 3 2 20 12 21 58 Wild Plum 9 9 9 13 9 49 E. Red Cedar 10 10 10 7 13 50 Monosperm 3 2 7 0 0 12 Button Bush 7 20 19 0 0 46 Fontenesia f. 6 0 2 0 0 8 Foresteria n. 6 0 2 0 0 8 Winterberry 0 0 6 0 0 6 Total Per Area 66 49 95 66 62 337 Plot Number Species (Juniper) Weed competition was reduced through cultivation around the trees and shrubs during the spring and early summer growing period. Fairly good growth and survival were noted during this period on areas #1 and #2, however, the west three areas continued too dry for satisfactory results. Fall survival could not be accurately determined because of early plant defoliation due to prolonged dry conditions extending from August 1st through the winter of 1962-63. �-114- Part II. Old Homestead Development Study Introduction This study was established to evaluate the effects of habitat improvements for scaled quail on old homestead sites. The original agreement called for eight selected sites to be developed by the Carrizo District of the U.S .•Forest Service. As only six of the eigbt had received habitat improvement work before the second summer census it was deemed necessary to utilize the two remaining undeveloped sites as controls rather than to drop them from the study. The resultant study thus has six development and six control areas. Reference is made to the Quarterly Report of The Colorado Game And Fish Federal Aid Division for July, 1962 pp. 53-70; wherein an eight and four ratio was used in summarizing parts of the firs t year study findings. This data was necessarily changed to comply with the current study area ratiOe Renumbering the study areas also was essential so that both the development and control areas were listed consecutively from east to west. The two arens which changed status are now controls 4 and 5 and what was formerly control 4 is now ://6. Development areas 6,7 and 8 are now numbered 4, 5 and 6. Acknowledgements The writer's sincere thanks go to Donald Hoffman for his assistance during the hunting season and advice in various phases of the work; and to Jack Grieb and Dave Bowden for their much appreciated work and assistance in the statistical analysis of the census data. Results Of Study Some additional development work progressed on the harestead sites during the winter and spring of 1962. It consisted of fencing area 6, planting tree cactus on that area and construction of brush shelter cover on all areas., These shelters have received considerable use during the past year with as many as seven,ty quail being flushed from a single structure. General vegetative ground cover has increased rapidly during the last two growing seasons. The guzzler installations have remained full since initial installation and filling, and the water gathering aprons over the retainers have proven a highly valuable source of resting cover for scaled quail and bobwhite. Feeders on areas 1 and 2 were not in operation during the pas t year, howeve r , some feeding and baiting was used in most areas in conjunction with census and banding operations. Hunter checks were conducted on and near the areas in the East-Campo region in a manner similar to that of the previous year. Due to the �-115- length of the seBson (November 10-18) contacts were restricted to the first two and 1as t four days. Moderate hunting pressure was noted during the opening weekend and light pressure continued thereafter. Unfavorable weather prevented an increase in hunting pressure the final weekend. Forty-five hunters were checked who had hunted an approximate total of 167.5 hours. They had bagged 159 scaled quail or 3.53 per hunter and 0.94 per hour. At least 37 scaled quail were crippled in the effort. Also included in the bag were 12 bobwhite and 3 pheasants which increased the total take to 3.87 birds per hunter and 1.04 birds per hour. Bird removal could not be measured accurately for all areas but observations indicate that it ran between 20 and 30 percent for scaled quail with high varience in pressure and kill between areas. As the development areas were more attractive to hunters a slightly higher kill percentage might r-e au Lt, but pre-season checks showed a considerable number more quail on these along with good excape tover which might tend to offset such a factor. The lengthened period of harassment resulted in a considerable number of quail leaving the areas to winter elsewhere as indicated by the substantial decline to winter populations. Emmigration exceeded immigration to the areas because some of the movement was toward protected farmyard areas. The respective ratio of scaled quail to bobwhite on summer and pre-season counts has totaled 1,362 to 338 or approximately 4 to 1. Season checks of quail killed in the better bobwhite range for 1961 and 1962 show a kill of 212 scaled quail to 19 bobwhite or an approximate 11 to 1 ratio. This would indicate that the scaled quail which use a major cover location more consistently receive the brunt of the hunting pressure while roving hard to find bobwhite more often excape the gun. This factor merits consideration in future development and management planning. The checked birds were weighed, sexed, aged and where possible the crops were collected. A summation of the data is presented in the following tables. Table 1. The Average weight of Quail in Southern Baca County As Checked During The 1962 Hunting Season. Adult Female Young Male Young Female Species Average Weight in Oz. 6.84 7.27 6.85 7.08 Number Weighed 19 61 37 140 Scaled Quail Adult Male Bobwhite Average Vit. Number Weighed 6.43 12 �-116- Table 2. 1962 Observed Age and Sex Ratios of Upland Game Birds Period Sex Unclassified Adult Young Ratio Adul t : Young 71 227 1 : 3.19 25 2~ 50 41 68 109 1 27 49 59 68 106 1 : 2.16 17 71 1 • 4.18 7 8 15 16 22 38 1 2.53 65 1 I 1.65 Scaled g,uail Summer Hunting Season Winter Trapping 1043 Males Females Males Females 22 2.18 Bobwhite Summer 128 Hunting Season & Males Winter Trapping Females Pheasants Summer 26 Trapping and banding of scaled quail and bobwhite progressed on and near the study areas during the last three months of 1963. Aluminum consecutively numbered leg bands stamped "Colo. G. & F, Denver" were used along with consecutively numbered plastic leg bandettes. Red bande ttes we're placed on males; yellow ones on females. Red and white back tags of fabric backed vinyl plastic were placed on about twenty percent of the trapped quail. Bobwhite were found to be easier to trap than scaled quail, and could generally be retrapped one or more times within a few days. Qbverleaf or lilypad type trap assembles were baited with grain sorghum. Although over 200 quail have been trapped to date operations have not been completed so no record of banding per area is presented at this time. Two bobwhite were killed in traps by marsh hawks on development #2. This area also suffered from a marsh hawk moving in on flushed coveys during census checks. One bobwhite was. known removed and a scaled quail may have survived after being caught but later droppedfue to my harrassment of the hawk. Predation of three scaled quail by a golden eagle occurred in a trap on development #3. . �-117- Predation presents little indication of being serious where coveys are not otherwise disturbed. Marsh hawk predation may remove one, two or more birds from a covey during the fall and winter but no large inroa.ds into coveys have been noted. Wood rat predation on scaled quail occurred on development #1 during the last two winters, however, the conditon of the birds at the time of death was unknown. Competition for cove~ and food between the two may be a more important factor. Census Results: A summation of the totals per census for all census periods is provided in the following table. These figures indicate a general increase in populations of quail during the past two years but a decrease in pheasant numbers. The 1962-63 summer, pre-hunting season and winter census counts are respectively recorded in tables -2-, -1and-2- for the development areas, and in tables ~, ~ and 10 for the controls. Table ~ Census Period Winter 1960-61 Winter 1961-62 Win.ter 1962-63 Summer 1961 Summer 1962 Pre-Season 1961 Pre-Season 1962 The Total Birds Per Census On The Homestead Development And Control (C) Study Areas. Scaled Quail D C Bobwhite D C Pheasants D C (D) Combined Total D C 48 83 22 13 29 22 99 118 94 112 20 20 62 5 116 131 124 97 48 30 20 3 192 130 158 174 63 28 56 11 217 219 181 211 90 24 53 12 330 253 135 124 13 9 31 14 119 147 213 154 13 38 22 6 308 198 In the analy.sis of the census information ·we are immediately confronted with factors on development area 6 which throw a bias into the compared data. These factors are listed as: Late development (one year behind schedule); inadequate development; poor 1961 reproduction with no control nearby to compensate this factor; severe hunting pressure in 1961; illigal hunting in September, 1962 resulting in complete removal of the quail from the study section, and no known source within two miles to replenish the depleted area (all controls have nearby quail sources). �-118- These combined effects were believed suffiuient for excluding the area from the present study analysis. Efforts are being made to further develop the area so that it can be included in future comparisons. Fourteen scaled quail were p~aced on the section during the late winter of 1962-153 and to prevent a future bias in the study an equivilent number were placed on control #6. These birds will provide an indication of development effect by using or not using the areas in the forthcoming years. This would not have been deemed essential if a quail source were known to exist near the development area. A comparison using scaled quail census figures on the five development and six control areas contrasts pre-development (winter, 1960-61) populations with those of the 1962-63 winter period. An analysis of covarience showed a significantly greater number of scaled quail on the development areas than on the controls during the latter census period (F = 5.57, f= 1,8 at the 5% level). The significant difference between the two study area groups was attributed to development. Summer census checks reveal a continued greater number of scaled quail using the controls during both 1961 and 1962. The retention rate from the 1962 summer to pre-season periods was found to be significantly greater on the development areas (F = 9.65 f = 1,8 at the 5% level). This is of primary importance in that it denotes the capacity of the development areas in holding quail in the field and thus available to the hunter. One major problem has been fall migrations to protected farmyard areas where quail become inaccessible to the hunter, in~rease competition within the species a~d ~rovide a source of public relations trouble between the farmer and the hunter. No significant difference could be determined to date in winter bobwh i te numbers between the development and control areas. Census figures would indicate the development areas were possibly of greater value than the controls to the species before development and have continued to remain more attractive. The sprinG pheasant crowing count was continued on all areas during 1962. Table 4. provides a comparison with 1961 counts showing no evidence of a populution - development correlation as related to the large area radius covered by this census index. Census totals as presented in table ~ indicate that development area use by pheasants may be increasing in greater propo rt i on than control area use but continued census is needed before definite proof would be availAble. �-119- Table 4. A Comparison of Pheasant Crowing Rates* On The Homestead Development And Control Areas During 1961 and 1962. I Development Area Control 1961 1962 1961 1962 1. ,.5 5 2. ** ** 10 4. 5. 16.5 11.5 1, 16 20 4.5 , b. .1.0.5 9·5 15 2·5 1,.5 15 5 1.5 1 5 5.5 12.5 Average 10.8 8.4 9.25 8.83 ,. * .The average of the two highest rates per area. ** Area #2 has continuous nearby motor disturbance preventing a count. Scaled quail, bobwhite and pheasant counts were combined for each area and tested to determine the effect of development on the combined bird population. Considerable error does exist in visual counts of pheasantts, therefore, this analysis assumes that census area totals are at least good indicators ;of the numbers of each species using the areas if not the actual number present. A significant difference was found between the five development areas and the six controls for the winter of 1962using pre-development winter area total bird figures as a basis for comparison (F =9.9, f = 1,8 at the 5% level). 6, �-120- -2.:.. Table Summer Brood Census Of Homestead Summer, 1962 Area Birds Observed Areas. SubTotals A - B A - B A - B A - B A - B 8-13 6 10 0 12 2 2(4 8-20 55 16 o 2(1 0 (3 8-30 52 11 0 11 0 0 9-11 48(8 43 1 18(2 0 0 9-22 60 32 2(8 18 0 10(1 80 10 3 43 20 11 101 Scaled Q. 28 Bobwhite 11 Pheasants 8-9 0 0 1(2 0 0 0 8-11 0 3 0 0 1(6 0 8-29 0 0 2(14 0 (3 1 9-10 1 0 18(20 1(6 2 1 9-21 0 3 0 41 0 0 3 41 8 0 0 1 3 Scaled Q. 41 Bobwhite 8 Pheasants 8-1 1(10 0 0 0 1 0 8-20 10 0 2(1 0 (4 0 8-213 0 0 1(1 0 0 0 9-10 6 0 10 0 0 3 9-21 16 0 0 0 12 0 16 10 12 0 O' 16 Scaled Q. 10 Bobwhite 12 Pheasants 8-6 0 15(4 2 0 0 0 8-15 0 14(6 0 0 0 1(2 8-21 20 11 0 0 1 0 9-6 25(2 0 0 0 0 0 9-19 6(6 16 0 0 2 0 21 2 2 20 8-4 ~1(2 8-24 8 13 0 0 0 1 9-5 5 14 0 3 1(3 0 9-18 0 10 0 0 1 0 13 3 5 14 8-24 0 1(1 0 0 0 14 9-5 9-18 0 4 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 0 14 9 Scaled Q. 0 Bobwhite 14 Pheasa.nts 139 12 30 86 20 30 181 Scaled Q. 90 Bobwhite 53 Pheasants 2. 3. 4. 6. 0 0 0 1(4 0 8-14 0 4(5 2 0 1(4 0 1-30 0 0 0 0 0 0 '8-14 0 1(8 0 0 0 2(5 Census Totals 0 0 0 2(1 0 8 0 0 3 0 1 e Total Birds Counted A B Study Area Total A - B 1. 5· Development 1(1 - Birds outside the development or control but within square mile study area. Adult (Young - form of distinction. 21 Scaled Q. 3 Bobwhite 5 Pheasants 330 - Birds found within the development or control area - 31 Scaled Q. 2 Bobwhite 3 Pheasants the �-121.•. Table ....2.!. Summer Brood Census Of Homestead Summer, 1962 A - B A - B A - B A - B A - B Study 'SubTota.ls Area Total A - B 8-10 53(8 2 0 0 2 2(1 8-21 23(8 18 0 0 o .' '0 8-30 26(8 0 0 0 0 3 9-11 6 45 0 0 1 5 9-22 15 19 0 0 0 0 61 0 3 2 . 63 Scaled Q. o Bobwhite 0 7 Pheasants 5 8-10 2(10 0 0 0 1(1 0 8-21 3(3 0 0 0 0 0 8-30 13(8 0 0 0 1 0 9-11 17(11 2(15 0 0 0 0 9-22 12 0 0 0 0 0 28 0 3 17 0 0 45 Scaled Q. o Bobwhite 3 Pheasants 8-16 8-7 3(10 4(15 3(10 21(8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8-28 23 25 6 0 0 0 9-1 8)11 21 0 0 0 0 9-20 24 11 0 0 0 0 24 0 0 29 0 0 48 Scaled Q. o Bobwhite, o Pheasants 8-9 16(12 2 0 0 0 0 8-16 29 9)6 0 0 0 0 8-28 14 11(6 0 0 0 0 9-1 11 9(6 0 0 0 0 9-20 11 21(6 0 0 0 0 29 0 0 21 0 0 46 Scaled Q. o Bobwhite o Pheasants 8-6 0 0 0 0 0 0 8-16 0 0 0 0 0 0 8-27 0 0 0 0 0 0 9-6 0 0 0 0 0 0 9-19 0 15 0 0 0 0 15 0 0 0 0 0 15 Scaled Q. o Bobwhite o Pheasants 8-6 0 0 1(1 0 0 0 8~15 0 0 0 0 0 0 8-21 0 0 0 0 0 0 9-6 0 24 0 0 0 0 9-19 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 24 2 0 0 0 o Scaled Q. 24 Bobwhite 2 Pheasants 157 24 8 15 0 5 217 Scaled Q • 24 Bobwhite 12 Pheasants Birds Observed Area 1. 2. 3· 4. 5. 6. Control Study Areas Census .Totals Total Birds Counted 253 �-122- Table ..:L:. Pre-Season 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Study Areas A - B A - B A - B SubTotals A - B 11-3 50 45 0 20 0 4 11-7 53 35 0 5 1 0 11-9 25 46 0 0 0 0 53 0 1 46 20 4 99 Scaled Quail 20 Bobwhite 4 Pheasants 11-2 17 37 0 11-6 10 0 0 32 0 0 11-9 0 0 0 43 0 0 0 17 37 0 0 0 0 17 Scaled Quail 37 Bobwhite 0 Pheasants 11-3 11 9 4 0 0 0 11-7 4 0 0 9 2 0 11-8 11 0 0 0 0 0 11 9 5 0 0 0 11 Scaled Quail 9 Bobwhite 5 Pheasants 11-1 58 4 0 0 0 0 11-5 0 35 0 5 2 7 11-8 0 56 0 0 0 0 58 5 7 0 0 2 58 Scaled Quail 5 Bobwhite 9 Pheasants 10-31 22 0 2 0 2 0 11-5 15 10 0 0 2 0 11-8 10 18 0 0 0 0 22 2 2 18 0 0 28 Scaled Quail 2 Bobwhite 2 Pheasants 10-31 0 0 0 0 0 2 11-5 0 0 0 0 0 0 11-8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 o Scaled Quail o Bobwhite 161 53 15 64 20 8 213 Scaled Quail 73 Bobwhite 22 Pheasants Area 1. Census Of The Homestead Development November 1-9, 1962 Birds Observed Census Totals Total Birds Counted 0 Study Area Total 2 Pheasants 308 �-123- Table ~ Pre-Season Census Of The Homestead November Area 1. 2 3. 4. 5. 6. Control study Areas 1-9, 1962 B-irds Observed SubTotals A ~B Study Area Total A - B A - B 11-3 35 17 0 18 0 3 11-7 41 21 0 0 0 0 11-9 4412 5 0 0 0 41 21 5 11 18 0 52 Scaled Quail 21 Bobwhite 5 Pheasants 11-3 0 0 0 0 0 1 11-1 39 0 0 0 0 0 11-9 23 0 0 0 0 0 39 0 0 0 0 1 39 Scaled Quail o Bobwhite 1 Pheasant 11-2 40 0 0 0 0 0 11-6 0 10 0 0 0 0 11-8 33 0 0 0 0 0 40 0 0 10 0 0 40 Scaled Quail o Bobwhite . 0 Pheasants 11-2 0 23 0 0 0 0 11-6 21 0 0 0 0 0 11-9 9 0 0 0 0 0 21 0 0 23 0 0 23 Scaled Quail o Bobwhite 0 Pheasants 11-1 0 0 0 0 0 0 11-6 0 0 0 0 0 0 11-9 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o Scaled Quail o Bobwhite o Pheasants 11-2 0 0 0 0 0 0 11-5 0 0 0 0 0 0 11-8 0 11 0 0 0 0 0 11 0 0 0 0 o Scaled Quail 11 Bobwhite o Pheasants 141 38 5 50 18 1 154 Scaled Quail 38 Bobwhite 6 Pheasants A - B Census Totals Total Birds Counted 198 �-124- Table -2.:. Winter Census Of The Homestead Development Winter, 1962-63 A - B A - B A - B SubTotals A - B 12-18 30 0 0 0 00 1-2 21 0 0 5 0 2 1-28 30 4 0 0 0 1 2-15 20 4 0 0 0 0 31 10 0 0 0 3 41 Scalee: Quail o Bobwhite 3 Pheasants 0 0 0 12-19 9 0 0 0 0 0 1-15 16 0 10 0 + 0 1-25 18 0 23 0 3 0 2-18 20 0 34 0 0 0 20 34 3 0 0 0 20 Scaled Quail 34 Bobwhite 3 Pheasants 12-10 0 0 6 0 1 0 12-19 6 0 9 0 0 0 1-16 10 0 6 0 1 0 2-4 8 9 0 0 0 0 2-18 13 0 0 0 0 0 13 9 1 0 0 0 13 Scaled Quail 9 Bobwhite 1 Pheasant 12-10 9 0 4 0 0 0 12-27 16 0 0 0 1~ . 0 1-17 15 0 0 0 3 0 2-1 15 0 13 0 0 0 2-19 21 0 0 0 0 0 21 4 13 0 0 0 21 Scaled Quail 4 Bobwhite 13 Pheasants 12-16 21 0 0 0 0 0 12-21 29. 0 1 0 0 0 1-17 0 0 0 2-1 1 0 0 0 0 0 2-19· 22 0 1 0 0 0 29 0 0 0 0 29 Scaled Quail 1 Bobwhite o Pheasant 12-19 0 0 0 0 0 0 12-21 0 0 0 0 0 0 1-11 0 0 0 0 0 0 2-1 0 0 0 0 0 0 2-19 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o Scaled Quail o Bobwh i te o Pheasant 114 10 48 0 17 3 124 Scaled Quail 48 Bobwhite 20 Pheasants Area 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Study Areas Birds Observed A - B A - B 12-1 31 10 0 0 O· 0 12-1 19 28 0 Census Totals ~3 0 0 1 Total Birds Counted A B + Birds found within the development or control area Birds outside the development or control but within square mile study area. Tracks only Study Area Total 192 the �-125- Table .!2.:. Winter Census of the Homestead Control Study Areas Winter, 1962-63 A - B A - B A - B SubTotals A - B 12-26 21 1 0. 15 0.'+ 1-14 19 0. 0. 0. 1 1-30. .L9 (25) 1 0. 0. 1 2-18 17 20. 0. 0. 0. 0. 24 5 20. 19 1 1 25 Scaled Quail 27 Bobwhite 2 Pheasants 0. 0. 0. 12-26 0. 0. 0. 1-14 0. 0. 0. 0. 0. 0. 1-28 0. 0. 0. 0. 0. 0. 2~18 5 0. 0. 0. 0. 0. 11 0. 0. 0. 0. 0. 11 Scaled Quail 0. Bobwhite 0. Pheasants 12-7 13 0. 0 0. 0. 0. 12-19 11 25 0. 0. 0. 0 1-16 0. 0. 3 0. 0. 1-25 14 0. 0 0. 0. 0 2-21 11 0. 0 0. 0. 0 14 25 0. 0. 0 0. 36 Scaled Quail 0. Bobwhite 0. Pheasants 12-7 25 0 0. 0. 0 0. 12-27 0 0. 0. 0. 0 .0. 1-16 0. 0 0. 0. 0. 0. 2-4 0. 24 0 0. 0. 0. 2-20 0. 23 0 0 0. 0. 25 24 0. 0. 0. 0. 25 Scaled Quail 0. Bobwhite 0. Pheasants 12-10. 0. 0 0. 0. 0. 0. 12-27 0. 0. 0. 1-15 0. 0. 0. 0. 0. 0. 2-4 0. 0. 0. 0. 1 2-19 0. 0. 0. 0. 0 0. 0. 0. 0. 0. 0. 1 0. Scaled Quail 0. Bobwhite 1 Pheasant 12-10. 0. 0 0 0. 0. 0. H~~27 0. 0. +2 0. 0 0 0. +3 0 0. 0. 2-19 0 0. 0. 0. 0. 0. 0. +3 0 0. 0. 0. 0. Scaled Quail 3 Bobwhite 74 54 23 19 1 2 97 Scaled Quail 30. Bobwhite Area 1. ~ 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. o B"irds Ob servad A - B A - B 12-6 24 1 8 19 0. 0. 12-6 11 0. 0. 0. 0. 0. 6 0. 0. 0. 5 1-15 0. 0. +2 0. 0. 0. 0. . 2-4 0. Census Totals Total Birds Counted (25) +2 Mixed bobwhite Tracks of two and scaled quail group Study Area Total o Pheasants 3 Pheasants 130 �Figure 1. The shelter in the foreground on Homestead area #1 was constructed by cutting the dead limbs of the tree and bracing them against the standing trunk. Figure 2. The brush shelter constructed on area #2 of section I-D. Old Christmas trees and deciduous tree branches were used in the structure development. �-]27- Part III. Brush Shelter Development Stud~ Although nesting pairs are widely dispersed during the spring and early summer in the open sandsage - yucca grassland association, almost no scaled quail are observed wintering in this range type. Annual migrations of the brood coveys is toward a farm or ranch unit or some location which provides an additional item of resting cOver value. This brush shelter study was initiated because \'Iorkthus far has revealed that resting cover is an essential factor limiting winter populations where economical shelters might provide the only improvement necessary to increase the number of quail and hold them in the rangelands. Each of the three established development sections was chosen on the basis of it's having a control section nearby which contained comparab~ factors of cover, water, cover type perpheries and other outside influences. Fou~ quarter section study areaS were established on each section resulting in twelve development and twelve control study areas. The size of the study areas was based on scaled quail winter home range which seldom exceeds 80 acres. A shelter improvement was placed near the center of each development Table -L. Location Of Brush Shelter Development And Control Study Sections In Southern Baca County.* Legal Description Study Section Development #1 E.}4 of Section 22 & VI .}4 of Section 23, R.44 W., Control #1 T.34 S. Section 25, R.44 w. , T.34 S. Development #2 Section 27, R.46 w. , T.34 S. Control 112 Development Control #3 R.46 VI. , T·35 S. Section 30, R.46 VI. , T.34 So Section 5, 113 Section ll, R.47 VI. , T.35 S. * Sections were consecutively numbered from east to west. Areas within each aect Lon were numbered from left to right, north to south. A framework approximately eight to twelve feet square and three feet high of tree limbs or posts was draped wit~ deciduous tree branches forming a fairly dense canopy of cover. Old Christmas trees were used when available in the development. Although the structure was probably higher and larger than necessary for scaled quail use; lowering or condensing this type of shelter seems to induce wood rat occupancy with resultant wood rat house construction and associated predation potential· on quail. �-128- Initial cover density was approximately the same on all sides of the structures, however, the south facing side of each will have been opened up to allow more sunlight into the shelter prior to next year's study. A partial screening provides adequate protection from avian predators while allowing the birds to dust and sun themselves under cover protect.d.on. Section maps were completed revealing study area, boundary lines, fences, trails, roads, water and windmills, drainages and vegetative cover types. Brush shelters were located within the development areus. Nine section locality maps were constructed for each section revealinG general detail, forest service land and private lands. A vegetative cover type overlay was constructed for each. Ini tial work was started on complete records noting ex Ls t tng-study area conditions described in detail, however, much work is pending. Photos and color slides pertinent to the study are in progress. Results of pre~development checks (winter, 1961-62) of all the development and control study areas are shown in the following table. Wintering scaled quail were found in the north-central part of area #1, of control section 2. The bobwhite ~ere found along the west edge of this, same area but their major use area was to the west of the study section. The cover type that retained these birds in the field was a high quality yucca - annual weed association of sparse to moderate ground cover densities combined with past and present severe blow-out conditions. Summer use was noted in the same general location but no quail were found during the winter of 1962~63. 'fable 2. The Winter (1961-62) Pre-development Census of The Brush Shelter Development And Control Study Areas. Study Section Area I-Development 1-26' 0 2-20 All Areas 1-18 0 2-20 All Areas 1-24 0 2-17 All Areas 1-17 0 0 2-19 Area 1 Areas 2,3 &4. All Areas I-Control 2-Development 2-Control 3-Development 3-Control All Areas + * Number o o of Birds Observed 3-6 3-6 o o 3-7 3-21 3-7 3-21 o o o 3-16 7* 3-23 + 3-8 12 o o 3-16 13 1-17 0 2-19 2-23 1-24 2-17 o o o o o 3-5 Date of census check Tracks Only Unstable covey found along study area boundary o o o o 3-22: 11 o 3-8 22* 3-23 o 3-22 o �-129- A rather thorough check of all study sections conducted during late July indica ted aome quail U8.e on mos t of the ae c tions during the late spring early summer nesting period. No accurate counts could be conducted comparing area populations due to heavy summer cover, scattered birds, poor tracking conditions and lack of time; however, the brush shelters were checked to determine use by quail. This data is revealed in the 1a~ two collumns of table ~ This table also reveals obsevations within the study areas during the two October checks conducted on each area. Table ...i!. The 1962 Summer and Fall Census Of Brush Shelter Development And Control Study Areas. Section Area No. I-Development 1. 2. 3· 4. I-Control All 2-Development 7-20 1(12 o o 10-2 26x 4x Shelter Checks 10-9 27x o o 13x 21 44 7-23 10-1 10-9 o o o 4 Phs. 8-13 0 2x 0 1(2 8-30 13x 0 0 1(1 8-13 1(2 Phs. 7-24 10-3 10-10 1. u u 2 •. 4x o 9-3 15 0 3. 1(13 2/1 o 7 1 4. + 2 + + U U 0 0 7-27 10-6 9(2 10-11 10 10-12 8-15 o o 9-3 2-Control 1. 2. 3· 4. 3-Development 1. 2. 3· 4. 3-Control ( x U /1 Phs. study Area Checks 2(11 o o o o o 14 + 7-26 10-8 2(6 o o o o o o o o o o o o 7-25 10-8 10-12 1,2,3 o o 4 + o o o Denotes young birds. Indicates covey use of shelter at time flushed Shelter use noted, no birds flushed Bobwhite Quail Pheasant + Track Only o o o o o o o �-130- No qua LL were known to have been removed from the brush shelter study areas during the 1962 quail season. The fact that the shelters were not easily noticed and were not publicized may have influenced this study variable. Although normal scaled quail winter home range seldom exceeds 80 acres the continuous sandsage rangeland provides for unrestricted movement of the birds. The 1962-63 winterinG covey which normally resided at shelter #4 in section I-D was observed at shelter #3 on the first census check. Likewise in section 2-D the covey normally in area #3 was observed using the shelter #1 for a considerable period during the winter. Table 4. The 1962-63 Winter Census Of The Brush Shelter Development And Control Study Areas. Study Section Area I-Development 12-3 12-18 0 1-2 0 2-18 0 1. 2. 3. 4. 13 0 0 0 0 0 0 11 0 0 7 5 11-28 0 12-3 All Areas 12-28 0 0 2-13 0 12-4 0 1-2 12 0 0 16 + 2-5 + 0 14 0 14 0 0 0 12-5 1-3 0 2-5 0 2-15 0 I-Control 2-Development 1. 2. 3· 4. 2-Control 1. 2. 3· 4. 3-Development All Areas 3-Control All Areas * Number of Birds Observed 0 0 2-15 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 + 14* 0 0 0 12-4 1-3 0 0 2-15 0 12-5 1-5 2-15 0 0 0 Covey not stable on area Scaled quail utilization of all the shelters on development sections I-D and 2-D at various times during the summer and fall provides unmistable evidence as to the importance of resting cover to this species. However, �-131- the major purpose of the study was to determine shelter value in retaining quail in the field through the fall and winter months. As noted in the preceeding table some retention was evident in that coveys of 13 and 16 wintered at shelters in sections l-D and 2-D respectively through the winter. As the quail did use the shelters to a major extent and as no stable coveys were evident on these areas during the previous winter, there is strong indication as to the importance of the shelters in these two situations. Part IV. Technical Assistance In Upland Game Bird Habitat Development Assistance in the Timpas District of the Commanche National Grasslands included spring planting of several hundred shrubs and trees in and near four exclosures. This cooperative effort was completed by Vernon Eckhart (U.S.F.S.) and Donald M. Hoffman. The following table provides a record of the species planted ann their location. Table ~ The 1962 Tree and Shrub Planting on Five Locations in the Timpas District of the Commanche National Grasslands. Location Legal Description Number 200 Species Osage Orange Near Carrico Excl. N.E.~ Sec. 6, T.25 S., R.54 w. Same Edgar Exclosure S.E.~ Sec. 15, T.26 S. 100 Russian Olive 100 Box elder 100 Black Locust Avery Exclosure N.W.~ Sec. 11, T.26 S. R.55 w. 100 Box elder Harrington N.E.~ Sec. 26 & N.W.~ Sec. 25, R.56 w. T.26 S. 100 Sand Cherry 100 Russian Olive 100 Black Locust Carrico Exclosure Excl. Total Number Planted R.51 «, 200 Chinese Elm 100 Sand Cherry 1200 A dry summer followed planting on the sites, however, no fall check of plant survival was made. Most were planted below existing reservoirs where there was ~ chance for survival and growth. Work on the Carrizo District was almost entirely advisory in nature. Recommendations as to development area size; potential of the sandsage cover type versus other vegetative cover types for quail production; brush shelter development value; ideas on shelter construction, and selection of canyon block development sites were among factors discussed with Elmer Miller, Carrizo District Ranger. �-132- LrrERATURE CITED Snedecor, George W. 1956. Ames, Iowa. 534 p. statistical Methods. Iowa State College Press. Snyder, Warren Do. 1962. Experimental Habitat Improvement For Scaled Quail. Federal Aid Quarterly Report, Colorado Department of Game and Fish. July: pp. 53-70. (Mimeo). Prepared by Date Warren D. Snyder Game Biologist ~0~c~t~o~b~e~rL,_1~9~6~3~ _ Approved by Wayne W. Sandfort Chief,Game Research Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �October, 1963 -133- JOB COMPLEl'ION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of ~C~O~LO~RADO~~ Project NO. ~W~-~3~7_-R~-1~6~~ Work Plan No •. Title of Job: Period Covered: ...:.6 _ __= ~G~a~m~e~B=ir~d~S~u~rv~e~y _ ~J:..:O::...b::.....:.N~O...:.. __=2~ _ Mapping of Scaled Quail Range. April, 1962 to March 31, 1963. ABSTRACT Accomplishments on this job during the report period has consisted of: Additional observations of scaled quail by vegetative cover type occurrence were secured. The scaled quail range in the area north of the Arkansas River was mapped by field surveys, inspection of SCS maps, and personal interviews. The large base map showing vegetative cover types and overlays showing distribution, range classes, and areas of good scaled quail cover were brought up to date. This job should be concluded during the next project segment. Recommendations: Work should continue on this job for one more year toward the completion of field data collections, completion of map sheets, and write-up of the final report covering this work. Objectives: (1) To assemble available information on scaled quail range and distribution. (2) To complete mapping of scaled quail range. (3) To compile data and prepare distribution and density .maps of scaled quail range. �-134Techniques Used: (1) Determine perimeter of scaled quail range by county through observation of birds, inspection of range, and personal interviews. (2) Trace outline of range on overlays, placed on county map sheets, scaled 1/2 inch per mile. (3) Determine densities. (4) Map various units of range classes. (5) Planimeter units of range classes to determine square miles of various ranges, and total range for each county. (6) Prepare written descriptions of scaled quail range for each county. (7) Prepare distribution map of scaled quail range. Findings: The field mapping of scaled quail range by vegetative cover type delineation has been completed for the natural range of the species. Maps at the SCS Office in Denver were used to good advantage for mapping portions of Kiowa, Lincoln, and Cheyenne Counties. Additional field surveys, particularly in the northern limits of the natural range, must be accomplished to complete this work. Observations of scaled quail during miscellaneous surveys were again recorded during the past year bringing the total number of birds observed to 5409. Due to major route revisions and the use of additional field personnel in securing trend counts, information on cover type occurrence was not recorded for the summer roadside trend counts in 1962. The large base map showing major vegeta.tive cover types within the natural range of the species and the overlays showing distribution, range classes, and areas of good cover were brought up to date in February, 1963. These will be reduced in size during the next segment. Information relative to past transplants of scaled quail outside their natural range was recorded. Prepared by: ~D_on_a~l_d~M~.~H~o_f_f_m_anApproved by: W~a~yn~e~W~.~S~an~df--o~r~t--~Chief, Game Research Date: 0~c~t~o~b_e~r~,~1~9~6~3 _ Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �October, 1963 -135- JOB COMPLETION RESEARCH State of Project REPORT PROJECT SEGMENT c.::.O::..:LO==RAD=:..::O _ NO. ~W~-~3~7_-~R~-=1~6 Work Plan No. ~6 ~_~G~a::..:m::..:e_=B=ir~d~S::..:u=rv~e~y ~ ~J~o~b~N~0~. _ ~3~ _ Ti t.Le of Job: ~D:.::e:.::v~e:.::l:..::o£P::..:me..:..:n::..t.:......:o:.:f:.........::C:..::e.:.: ~T~e:.::c:.:hn==i:.::q:.::u:..::e=s~. ~(S::..c~al==_e_...:d.::.......::Q::.:;ua== _ Period April 1, 1962 to March Covered: 15, 1963. ABSTRACT Part I. Late Fall-Winter Area Covey Counts. Late fall-winter area covey counts of scaled quail were continued census units during the 1962-63 period. within three An average of 9.58 scaled quail were counted per square mile within the nineteen square miles censused. During the previous wintering period, 8.29 scaled quail were counted per square mile within four census units consisting of a total of twenty-five square miles. ,The summer roadside trend counts during 1962 also indicated in scaled quail populations. There were 1.37 birds counted compared with 1.02 birds counted per mile in 1961. The following Scaled Period 195 1959 19591960 19601961 19611962 19621963 Totals Average (5 Yr.) table shows a comparison an overall increase per mile in 1962 of da.ta by years: Quail Late Fall-Winter Area Covey Counts No. of Census Total ATea Total No. Units Censused Scaled Quail 1958 - 1963. Total No. Coveys Birds/ Sq. Mile Ave. Covey Size 2 12 Sq. miles 274 14 28.83 19·57 3 18 sq. miles 316 16 17·56 19·75 4 25 sq. miles 102 6 4.08 17·00 4 25 sq. miles 207 9 8.28 23·00 3 19 sq. miles 182 11 9·58 16.55 16 99 sq. miles 1081 56 3·20 19·80 216.20 11.20 10·92 19·30 �-136Part II. Brood Counts (Roadside Trend Counts) During the summer of 1962, some of the ten routes established in previous years were altered or abandoned and new routes were added to improve the sampling of scaled quail populations. A total of eleven routes were counted a minimum of three times each in 1962. Additional counts were made on some of the established routes and on several trial routes. The early morning counts were started approximately forty five minutes after sunrise. Methods outlined in previous reports were followed with the above exceptions. In comparing birds per mile, it was found that there was an increase in the scaled quail populations in 1962 compared with the previous year. The numbers of birds counted "were below the three years average from 1959 through 1961, however. The brood count data were programmed for analysis by IBM machines in future years. This should speed the analysis a great deal. The follOwing table shows the results of comparing the 1962 summer scaled quail trend counts with the 1959, 1960 and 1961 counts. Scaled Quail Trend Route Data 1959 - 1962 No. Broods Ave. Ave. Total No. Recorded Young/ Birds/ Covey Quail Counts (Routes) Brood* Mile Size ** Counted Year No. Routes 1959 10 2 1960*** 10 3 66 (2 counts) 49 (3 counts) 1961*** 10 3 18 ( 3 counts) 1962*** 11 3 44 ( 3 counts) * 8·92 (based on 100 broods) 8.09 (based on 67 broods) 7.76 (based on 37 broods) 8.00 (based on 57 broods) Young to Adult Ratio 284 : 100 ( 2 counts) 1.52 11.08 725 1.02 1.37 242 : 100 (3 counts) 108 I 100 ( 3 counts) 12.84 682 204 : 100 ( 3 counts) Includes miscellaneous broods counted as well as those counted along established routes. ** Covey -- three or more birds. *** Calculations for 1960, 1961, and 1962 based upon 2 highest out of the three or more counts made except where indicated. �-137- Recorrunendations: Due to the relatively small sample possible with the late fall-winter area covey counts, it is recorrunendedthat these counts be used in the future to secure estimates of post season population levels within important census units and for intensive type investigations on the species. The roadside trend counts have proven to be a reliable method of estimating summer population levels of scaled quail and should be continued. Work toward the transfer of the collection of field data to the Game Management Division should be continued. Objectives: (1) To determine methods for ascertaining annual changes in scaled quail populations. (2) To establish permanent zones, areas, or routes for counting scaled quail. (3) To prepare forms and record books for the systematic recording of data. (4) To transfer routine surveys to the Game Management Division. Techniques Used: (1) Fall-winter area covey counts. a. Selection of areas for trend counts. b. Census of scaled quail within designated areas. (2) Brood Counts. a. Selection of routes. b. Regular census of scaled quail along routes. (3) Analysis of data, assembling of forms, and preparation of record books for the systematic recording of data. (4) Familiarization of W.C.O.'s with methods and procedures. �-139- DEVELOPMENT OF CENSUS TECHNIQUES Donald M. Hoffman Part I. Late fall-winter area covey counts. Late fall-winter area covey counts were continued during the present report period within three established census units to further test the method and procedures. Procedures used during the study were similiar to those described in the April, 1961 Job Completion Report. Assistance was received from Warren D. Snyder in the gathering of field data for the Dye, Glover, Bright U.S.F.S. Pasture census unit. Results of the counts are shown in Table 1. A total of 182 scaled quail were counted in eleven coveys within the nineteen square miles censused. There were three separate areas censused. An average of 9.58 scaled quail were counted per square mile within the established units. This compares with 8.29 counted per square mile censused in the twenty-five square miles censused during the 1961-62 period. The summer roadside trend counts in 1962 also showed an increase in scaled quail populations. The number of units and numbers of square miles which may be censused using late fall-winter area covey counts are limited due to the type of field work and limited manpower. The use of this type of census to determine population levels for large,areas is not recommended for this reason. It has been found, however, that this method of census has value to determine post season populations within specific census units if carefully done. �-140- Table lA Name of Census Unit Late Fall - Winter Area Covey Counts 1962-1963 Approxima.~~ Size of Chit Dates County (Sq. miles) Counted Number Scaled "quail Number Coveys Vogel Canyon Otero 6 11-26-62 to 12-5-62 31 2 Carey Dam Bent 6 11-27-62 to 12-4-62 25 2 Dye, Glover, Bright U.S.F.S. Pasture Baca 7 126 7 Totals 19 1 2 11 12-18-62 to 1-2-62 Counts during the 1962-63 late fall-winter period averaged 9.58 scaled quail per square mile within the nineteen square miles censused. Average covey size was 16.55. ; \ �Part II. -141Brood Counts (Roadside Trend Counts) Scaled quail roadside trend ·counts during the summer of 1962 were continued generally along the order of those run during the years 1959 through 1961. Deviations were that all early morning counts were started approximately forty five minutes after sunrise and revisions were made in the locations of some of the routes. More complete coverage of the scaled quail range and increased adaptability toward Wildlife Conservation Officer participation were the main reasons for the route revisions. Assistance was received from Wildlife Conservation Officers Bill Kent, Alfred Heins, and Keith Wilson in gathering the field data. Assistance was received from Wayne W. Sandfort in the programming of data for IBM machine analyses. A minimum of three counts including both early morning and late evening counts were made along each of the eleven selected routes. In addition, a fourth count was made on five of the routes and trial counts were made on several other possible trend routes. A young to adult ratio of 204 : 100 was calculated for the 1962 brood counting period from mid July through mid September based upon a sample of 843 scaled quail. These were counted in three counts along each of eleven trend routes in southeastern Colorado. Of these, 383 were young, 188 were adults, and 272 were unclassified. A total of forty four separate broods were counted accurately along the eleven trend routes in the three counts utilized. In addition, eight broods were counted in miscellaneous checks and five in additional reruns of established routes and trial runs on other routes. An average of 8.00 young per brood was calculated for the total of fifty seven broods. The average length of the eleven routes run in 1962 was 22.64 miles (Table 1 ). An average speed of 14.58 miles per hour was maintained for all routes including the time when the vehicles were stopped to flush birds. Table 2 shows the results of the 1962 roadside trend counts. Based upon the two highest counts out of the total counts made on each established route, there were an average of 1.37 scaled quail counted per mile and an average of 19.96 birds counted per hour. An average covey size of 12.84 was recorded during the study. Based upon the replications run in earlier studies, the number of samples secured in 1962 should be sufficient for estimating within twenty five per cent of the true mean. As more Wildlife Conservation Officers are orientated in the methods for securing scaled quail population trend data, the sample size will be enlarged and greater accuracy secured. �Table 2 SCALED QUAIL TREND ROUTE COMPARISONS -- 1962 * Census Unit No. ·· · 1 : Two Highest Counts Combined Total Total Ave. Covey Broods Birds Size'*'* 0 2 8 4 6 5 0 6 · : 1 • 7 · : ·· ·: ·: : • 8 9 10 11 -- : 1 " 0 3 7 36 .. :..,. .. 1652: • ·· · 111 ••· ·· 158 •• •• • • • •• • • 52 •• • 14 · ·.. · •• : • 21: .. 28: : ..". : 2: .. : .. 38: •• : : 91: 682 : a) Average covey size b) c) Average: Average: Average: Average: ~~ f) Young to adult ratio ----1~·21 2".00 17.:23 26.00 12.00 7.00 . .: • • •· • · •• •• •• •• • • • .: . : Birds/ Hour 0 •73 44.26 :20.2,2 42.:26 ----11.33 11.00 .. : .•. : .. : ·•·· • •• · •• 0 •00 1.91 Birds/ Mile . :_ _ · • 2.18 0 •05 •• · • .84 Broods/ Mile 0.00 0.16 1. O~ 1.61 .11 0.12 1.28 0.00 O. 0.0 18. 'Z'L •• 0.00 5.13 • • O. 6.84 ·. : 0.45 7 .9'3 . 0 .3'3 : 0 .8 0.54 0.06 0.73 .: : 0 .00 0.0,2 O.OQ • 9.33 . .: Broods/ Hour _13.24 :23.:2:2 • . : 1.04 2.56 · • : . .: : 0 •.76 2.79 . •. . : I'\) 0.02 0.06 0.21 12.84 19~96 birds per hour. 1,05 broods per hour, 1.37 birds per mile. 0.07 broods per mile. 204 : 1QO(from routes using. data from 3 counts) * Based upon two highest counts out of the three counts made on each route. Routes revised 1962. ** Repeat observations not disregarded. Covey -- three birds or more. �Table ..1.... SCALED Q.UAIL TREND ROUTE INFORMATION •••• 1962 Year Total Census Time Ave. Total Unit Name of (min.) Time Miles Ave. ~_N'o.__ Unit ~o-,~.rrty(iJ!~_S~_2COl.!rrts_ J~~Il,,--)2~~1..1l'lts }Iiles Vegetative Coyer TYJ)es ~a.nrQled : Apishapa: ::::: Dense cholla, sandsage, greasewood, 1: aands~e n~O~ero : 245 : 82 : 6LL~_:_.20.•4. _=- _Bpal"..se._Qhol_~~.~_ . Campo Sand- : ::::: Sandsage, dryland, dense cholla. 2: : sage West : Baca : 330 :Jl0 : 64.5 : : 21.5 : . . Carrizo : Baca : : : : Dense cholla, cedar breaks, sands age , 3: Mountain : T,asAnimas : 330 :1]0 : 95.3 : 3] ~B : sparse : 4 : C F &I : Pueblo: : : Ditch : Fremont __.: _1.1.5._._:l12. Fowler 1·1esa-: 5: Cakerock : 6: : 7: : ::::: Hanover : E1 Paso : 245 Holly : ::::.: : 8: Prowers La Junta-: : 275 : 61.0 dryIandJ river bottoms. Cedar breaks,greasewood, dense cholla, 2.5.4_ :s.-OaJ:'.Be cbol] a-----d..r.tland...... Dense cholla,· cedar breaks, dryland, L..26.~':t: : B3 cho1la, : ::::: : T.BsAnirnas : 250 Sand sage: .: : 20.3 : sparse cholla, sandsage. . Dense cholla,· sandsage, dryland, : B2 : 59.3 : J 9.B : : 92 : 70.5 : 23.5 : sparse choll a, r;1yer bottoms. Sand sage , dryland, irrigated,dense ::::.: cbol1 a, sbortgra ss. Cedar breaks, dense cholla, sparse : Otero : 31B !)o6 : 77.9 : 26,0 : cbolla, : Lake : Bent : : : : : Cedar breaks, dense cholla, sparse 9: Setcbt"eld : Otero : 245 : B2 : : 19.2 : : 10: : Rule : ::::: Creek : Rent : 257 11: : 245 ---:3075 57,5 cholla, irrigated, greasewood, greasewoOd. dryJand. Dense cholla, cedar breaks, sparse : 86 : 74.8 : 24.9 : cholla, : : : : : 82 : -- ; 49.0 : 16.3 : Dense cholla, cedar breaks, greasewood, sparse cbolla,dryland. ""'" : ---- .•. Average length of routes: Average miles per hour for all routes: Average time for running routes: * Routes revised 1962. I . H;1gbee Wetmore Hill-: Fremont: Pa'bco PlaIlt : pue'blo .• TotaJ.B ~ &" i --.:747.2 22.64 miles. 14.58 mph~ 93.20 min. drylgnd. . �-144other game and predatory species observed in conjunction with the scaled quail trend counts along the eleven established routes includes numerous doves, one pair of bobwhite quail with five young, eight pheasants, seventy eight cottontails} two antelope, five deer, nine ducks, one bobcat, and five coyotes. Prepared by: Donald M. Hoffman Principal Game Biologist Approved by: Date: ~O~c_t~o_b~e~r}~1~9~6~3~ _ Wayne W. Sandfort --~C~h~i-e~f-,~G-am--e-=R-e-s-e-a-r-ch~-Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �October, 1963 -145- JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO ----------~~~~------------- Project NO. ~W~-~3~7_-~R_-_16 8 Work Plan No. ~ G~am __e_B~ir_d __S_u_rv __e~y _ ~ ~J_O_~~N~O_. _ 2 Title of Job. C~e~n~s_u~s~o_f~Le~s~s~e~r~P~r~a_i~r~i~e_C~h~i~c~k~e~n~s_. Period Covered: April 1, 1962 to March 15, 1963. ABSTRACT A total of 130 lesser prairie chickens was counted on thirteen active display grounds during the spring of 1962. Of these, 104 were cocks, 1 was a hen, and 25 were unclassified. Two grounds in use during the spring of 1961 were not used in the spring of 1962 for dancing. Two new grounds were located and mapped during the study period. Recommendations I The inventory of known display grounds and field checks to locate new grounds of lesser prairie chickens should be continued in order that information on population levels may be secured. Objectives: (1) To determine changes in populations of flocks at known display ground locations. Techniques Used: (1) Spring counts on display grounds. (2) Spring listening checks of areas where prairie chickens have been reported in recent years. (3) Mapping of areas in which lesser prairie chickens are located. _ �-147CENSUS OF LESSER PRAIRIE CItICImNS Donald M. Hoffman Thirteen lesser prairie chicken display grounds in use during the spring of 1961 were rechecked during the present report period. Of these thirtee~ grounds, eleven were found to be in use during the spring of 1962 and two had been abandoned. In addition to the eleven grounds in use which were located previous to the spring of 1962, two more were located during the present report period bringing the total number of active grounds to thirteen. One of the new grounds was located by Warren Snyder and the other by the writer. Males were heard calling in two additional areas but the exact location of the grounds was not found. A total of 130 lesser prairie chickens was counted on the thirteen active grounds during the spring of 1962. The average number of birds per ground was determined to be 10.00. Of the total of 130 birds counted, 104 were cocks, 1 was a hen, and 25 were unclassified. The total number of birds (130) was 30 more than the 100 coUnted on thirteen active grounds during the spring of 1961. Table 1 shows the best 1962 count on each of the display grounds located to date. Table 2 shows a comparison of numbers of birds counted on the fourteen grounds located prior to the spring of 1962. Of these grounds, three have been abandoned during the study.· This comparison indicates that the lesser prairie chickens have continued to increase in numbers with a total of 115 counted in the spring of 1962 compared with a total of 100 counted during the previous spring. The two new grounds with a total of 15 birds account for the additional lesser prairie chickens as shown in Tabel 1. Figure 1 shows the approximate during the spring of 1962. locations of the thirteen active display grounds All display grounds located to date are in the sand sagebrush-grassland vegetative type or close proximity. Approved by t __ W:~ayn7=e-::-W:.:..::•....:S:..:a::;.n;:.;d=-f. Ohief, Game Research Date: ~0:.;:c....:t....:ob~er::;.,~1~9~6~3~ _ Ferd O. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Ooordinator �Table --L LESSER PRAIRIE CHICKEN DISPLAY GROUND COUNTS --- SPRING 1962 Ground Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Date & Time Name of Ground Countl (Highes~Count) Clifford Low Ranch (a) Apr. 19,1962 Sec. 6 T24S R41W. Prowers 5:45 A.M. Ted Stalford Ranch (a) May 24,1962 Baea Sec.36 T34S R42W. 4:55 A.M. Dye,Glover,Bright USFS Lease (a)Baca Apr. 27, 1962 Sec.22 T34S R44W. . 7:00 A.M. Ted Stalford Ranch (b) May 23, 1962Sec.35 T34S R42W. Baca May 25, 1962 Ted Sta1ford Ranch (c) May 24. 1962 See.35 T34S R42W. Baca 5: 25 A.M. Hanes Ranch (a) May 17, 1962 Baca Sec.17 T34S R43W. 5:00 A.M. Perkins,Tanner USFS Lease (a) May 2, 1962 Bacs. 8ec.32 T34S R46W. 4:50 A.M. Clifford Low Ranch (b) Apr. 19,1962 Sec. 5 T24S R41W. Prowers 6:15 A.M. Hanes Ranch (b) Apr. 27,1962& Baca Sec.18 T34S R43W. May 17,1962 Dye,Glover,Bl~ight USFS Lease(b) May 2,1962 Sec.ll T35S R44W.Baca 5:45 A.M. May 23,1962 Ted Stalford Ranch (d) Bacs. Sec. 1 T35S R42W. 6:25 A.M. Lowder USFS Lease (a) Apr. 26,1962 Sec.23 T34S R44W. Bacs. 6:30 A.M. Dye,Glover,Bright USFS Lease(c) May 2,1962 Sec. 3 T35S R44W. Baca 6:15 A.M. May USFS Lease (a) 2,1962 Baes. Sec.27 T34s R45W 5:00 A.M. Chick,Dow USFS Lease (a) Apr. 26,1962 Baca Sec. 8 T34S R45W. 5:00 A.M. Shell Oil USFS Area (a) May 17,1962 Baas. Sec.33 T34S R44W. 6:15 A.~. TOTALS Average number birds per ground ( thirteen grounds) 10.00 Cocks Hens Unclass. Total 5 1 0 6 10 0 J 13 12 0 :3 ·0 0 0 15 Ground abandoned. 13 0 3 16 12 0 8 20 4 0 2 6 ~ -I=" 7 0 1 8 0 0 0 Ground abandoned 5 0 1 6 2 0 0 2 13 0 3 16 7 0 0 0 0 0 Ground abandoned 9 0 1 10 5 104 0 1 0 25 130 co 7 5 I �Table ~ A COll.PARISON OF LESSER :PRAIRIE CHICKEN DISPLAY GROUND COUNTS BY YEARS FOR GROUNDS LOCATED PRIOR TO 1962 Spring 1959 Spring 1960 Spring 1962 ~.~ring 1961 : Cocks Unclass. : Cocks Unolass. :Cocks Unclass. t docks Unclass-. Hens Total : Hens Total Name of G~ound : Hens Total : Hens Total : ls 2. 3· 4. Clifford Low Ranch (a) 4 Ted Stalford • • Ranch (a) o Dye,G1over, Bright Le ase (a' 2 Ted Stalford o Ranch (b) Ted Stalford • o Ranch (c) Hanea Ranch •• (a) Perkins, '.L'anner• Lease (a) • Clifford Low •• Ranch (b) Hanes::Rench • • (b) Dye,Glover, Bright Lease(b' Ted Stalf'ord • • Ranch (d) Lowder Lease • o, 7• 8. 9s 10. 11. 12. 1:3. (a) •6 4 o 10 • 5 • 1 o 6 o 2 12 • 7 o 2 9 • 10 • o :3 13 : 6 5 11 • 012 0 0 • • 7 o 7 12·• 12 0 15 .'ground abandoned • ground abandoned 000 0 0 • o 000 • • 2 2 • • 13 • 13 o 3 16 6 6 1:3 1:3 • 12 • o 8 20 • • 1 o o 1 • •0 • o o 8 • • o o o o o o •7 1 o 8 : o 2 6 • 5 o o o o 1 6 : 7 7 7 : o 4 : o 1 3 2 : 2 10· • 13 0 4 4· 6 • 72 o 8 8 • • 10 2 o 4 o • • " Dy e,Glover, Bright Leaae (c~ 14. -(-a'""") Lease • TOTALS 9 o o 5. " o 2 o •5 11 • • • • • :4 • • • •0 : •2 : 6 :: 0 :r 6 4 8 18 39 7 2 48 018 ground abandoned o 0 0 0 5 o o 1 6 o 2 o :3 16 • • : 4 : 2 0 0 2· 56 6 38 100 7 0 0 7 ground abandoned 0 0 0 0 90 1 24 115 I ~ \0 I �fMoFrAT------TI MAP OF COLORADO .. ~U"").Iii'ourr--!jAC.I(SOi''- \J ~~ ,: "-. ., r \:::"~ ~ : r) ,j I L --'::'~·---------.I---'l -"'Iono OA.'" ft:a-a.'LANCO_~ I~' - 1 • o~6.,.'Y e AIllIoN ",Iffw 0 DHs ~.j °1~ i i /tm;;---'-/ .-./ , I 1""';"0 Hu$ho I r.-.--. i""""!Y I I .. _._._j I I , 0':,):_ OArZ C , <~.J \ObR,iY' oN••• '" ~(j(JFI.• • OVI< _ J "L, /0..- DaLO~ - ----"""' I , 00-. r* , _ . '-',-,-", .-. i I I.. OUP"O,.J YI~,o P,ftp' I \ • ~ l"I~w""'o _ SAGUACHE '') : ~ . i JICROWiY'" '''N~._ I "''&~b'-'-'---I' ,HINSDALE , '1.......... • . OiAKFt:lry / ~' ;,""'"t: -..->,J' .m . '--'/ fh~NER"L"'\..' ~') •••• 'qf 'ltTDK , r..",-h.,.\.. ./ ~"'tv~~ \ Figure ~«"UOI 1-" r, _. . ol,Ui_ih OG/~.I~ ---1.. 0".11. APPROXIMATE LOOATIONS rjOK_,c.t 6.- MaNTROS£ H- t~.~. SAN '-_ """" fMoNr~o.Sr I o1tld •••• OF THIRTEEN LESSER PRAIRIE '·flUtlO /1"''''''0 CHIOKEN DISPLAI GROUNDS IN USE SPRING 1962. oJwlo_ 0/'" ,~ ~ w'!. �October, 1963 -151- JOB COMPLErION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO ----------~~~~-------------- Project NO. Work Plan No. ~W~-3~7~-_R_-_l_6 8 G_am __e__B_ir_d __S_urveLy _ 4 ------------------------------------------------------------------Job No. Title of Job: Environmental Relationships of the Lesser Prairie Chicken. Period Covered: April 1, 1962 to March 31, 1963. This job was included within this segment to determine the relationship of the lesser prairie chicken to its environment in detail and to relate and compare habitat requirements of this species with that of the greater prairie chicken. It was planned that Graduate student, Keith Evans, would do this work in southeastern Colorado in conjunction with similiar studies on the greater prairie chicken in northeastern Colorado. At a meeting in Wray, Colorado, it was decided that due to the distances involved between the two ranges, one man could not do justice to both species. The securing of information to improve management of the greater prairie chicken precluded work on the lesser and no work has been accomplished on this job for this reason. Recommendations: This job is needed as a basis for future work on the lesser prairie chicken but should be postponed until current studies on the more important game bird species are concluded. Objectives: (1) To relate post and present distribution of the lesser prairie chicken to climatic, physiographic, and biotic factors of the environment, including land use. (2) To devise a rating system for evaluating potential lesser prairie chicken habitat. (3) To make recommendations for increasing this species in Colorado. �-152- Techniques Used: Ecological reasons for distribution of the lesser prairie chicken were to be studied by comparing distribution data to climatic, topographic, edaphic, geologic, vegetative, and faunal data for Colorado. These data were to be obtained partly by systematic observations on all areas where the lesser prairie chicken occurs. Climatic summaries and maps prepared by various federal and state agencies were to be used as well. Prepared by: Date: Donald M. Hoffman Approved by: Wayne W. Sandfort -----~~~~~~~~-----------~~~--~--~-----~~-----Chief, Game Research ~Q~c~t~o~b~er~,~1~9~6~3~ _ Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �October, 1963 -153- JOB COMPLE.rION REPORT RESEARCH PROJEX::TSEGMENT State of C;:..O=.,;LO::.::;:RADO=-=------ Project No. ~W_-~3~7~-R~-~1~6 Work Plan No. Title of Job: ~9~ ~ ~G~am~e~B~i~r~d~S~urv~~e~y ~ __ ~J~o~b~N~o_. ~1~ _ _ Review of Information on Forest Grouse Management and Research with EmphasiS on Blue Grouse (Dendragapus obscurus obscurus). Period Covered: April 1, 1962 to March 31, 1963. ABSTRACT A 15-page rough draft of a manuscript entitled, A Summary of Blue Grouse Management and Harvest ,in the United States and Canada, has been completed. All available blue grouse literature has been reviewed and. abstracted. As the majority of these were listed in July, 1962 Quarterly, they are not repeated here. Recommendations: Final editing and printing of this manuscript will be delayed until 1963. A summarization project shpuld be approved to allow for editing and printing costs. Objectives: (1) To review literature on forest grouse species, particularly to blue grouse (Dendragapus spp.). that pertaining (2) To abstract published and assemble unpublished information on past, current, or proposed management and research pertaining to blue grouse. Techniques Used: A literature search was made for blue grouse publications. A blue grouse questionnaire was mailed to states, provinces, and universities. Answers to the questionnaire were compiled, mimeographed, and distributed to participating organizations. �-154- REVIEW OF OO'ORMATION ON FOREST GROUSE MANAGEMENT AND RESEARCH WITH EMPHASIS ON BLUE GROUSE. Glenn E. Rogers In 1961, correspondence (partly in questionnaire form) was initiated with all states and provinces with blue grouse (Dendragapus obscurus) populations. The primary purpose was to discover management procedures applicable to Colorado. After compiling the information (Rogers, 1962) contained in the questionnaires and accompanying correspondence, it was apparent that further information on results (harvest) and methods of attaining these results were needed. Additional correspondence was conducted with all states and provinces through 1962 to collect this information. It was decided that the information collected on management and harvest might be valuab.le to other states and should be compiled and published as a technical bulletin. A rough draft of this publication has been completed and printing should be accomplished in 1963. All available literature has been reviewed and only minor additions to the blue grouse bibliography, as published in the July 1962 Quarterly, were found. The majority of life history and ecology studies have been conducted on the subspecies D. o. fuliginous and D. o. pallidus. Most of the management studies and the majority of the harvest is also on these two subspecies. With no previous research that the behavior and the management requirements are the same for all sub.species, or specific ecology and management studies must be initiated on D. o , obscurus. Literature Cited Rogers, Glenn E. 1962. Review of information on forest grouse management and research. F. A. Quarterly, Colorado Game and Fish Department, pp. 102-119. Approved by: Date: October 1963 -------------------~------~--~~----------- w_a~yn e~w_. S_a_n __ dfo_r_t Chief, Game Research Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator _ �-155JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of ~C~O=LO~RAD~~O~ _ Project NO. W_-~3~7_-_R_-l_6 G_am_e __B_i_r_d_S_urv e~y Work Plan NO. ~9~ Title of Job: Mapping Blue Grouse Range Period Covered: April 1, 1962 through March 31, 1963. ~ J_O _ b._N_O_. _ ~2~ _ _ A rough draft of a publication, The Distribution of Blue Grouse in Colorado, has been completed. Maps have been prepared, but good photographs are still needed to illustrate the text. Recommendations: Final editing and printing of this pUblication will be delayed until 1963. A summarization project should be approved to allow for editing and printing costs. Objectives: (1) To assemble data on blue grouse range and distribution. (2) To prepare ~istribution and density maps for this species. Techniques Used: Personnel of Federal land agencies and field men of the Colorado Game and Fish Department were interviewed as to location and number of blue grouse observed during the past three years. Numbers of blue grouse and location were plotted on large scale maps. Field crews of the Forest Service and Game and Fish Department were requested to map routes of travel and blue grouse observed during the summer of 1961. All blue grouse observed during census and environmental studies were recorded on maps and analyzed as to birds-per-mile of travel Prepared by: Glenn E. Rogers Approved by: Principal Game Biologist Date: ~O~c~t~ob~e~r~,~1~9~6~3 _ Wayne W. Sandfort --~~~~~--~------~-Chief, Game Research Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator ��October, 1963 -157- JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of -.::..C.::;OL::.O:..::RAD:..::.=:.:O~ _ Project No. W-37-R-16 Work Plan No. 9 Job No. Title of Job: Development of Blue Grouse Census Techniques Period Covered: Game Bird Survey 3 April 1, 1962, through March 31, 1963 ABSTRACT Efforts were concentrated on a 62.5-1nile area of the Uncompahgre Divide road in an attempt to determine a degree of consistency between census factors. Factors measured were territoriality (none observed), best time of day (2:00 to 5:00 p.m.), and best brood period (July 15 to August 10) for counts. However, the consistency of blue gro'J.seseen by habitat type, weather, and food variations was good. The sample of blue grouse broods seen for the two years was too ,small for census purposes. lIarvest success was much improved in 1962 (1.09 birds-per-hunter) over 1961 (0.26 birds-per-hunter). Size of broods, successful hens, and br-oods=per=mf.Le figures indicated a poorer harvest in 1962, while birds-per-mile predicted a better harvest. Light hunting pressure, differential migration due to food and weather conditions, and extremely small sample tend to invalidate any census trend conclusions. Recommendations: It is recommended that the present study be concluded with this report, but it is also recommended that the project be reactivated at a future date as an intensive study on a limited area. There has not been an intensive life history or ecology study of the blue grouse (Dendragapus obscurus obscurus) and this species may vary considerably in behavior from the much-studied D. o. fuliginous and 12.. £.. pallidu. Objectives: (1) (2) Development ofa reliable census technique for ascertaining changes in blue grouse populations for use in management. To investigate environmental relationships of blue grouse during the reproductive period to determine factors which may influence occurrence, movement, and visibility of this species. Techniques Used: Recording forms were prepared. The better blue grouse areas as shown from interviews of Federal agencies and Game and Fish Department personnel were surveyed. Information pertaining to blue grouse observed, miles and minutes traveled, location of water, range type, land use, and other related environmental factors were recorded. �-159DEVELOPMENT OF BLUE GROUSE CENSUS TECHNIQUES Glenn E. Rogers During 1962, efforts to develop a census technique were concentrated on a portion of the Divide Road of the Uhcompahgre Plateau, since more time and effort had been spent on this area in 1961 than any other section of Colorado. It was hoped that comparative figures from the two years would indicate some area or degree of consistency between census factors. The main factors to be compared were: degree of territoriality, the best time of day, and the best brood period for counts; consistency of sightings by habitat type, weather, and food variations; and harvest success. Only one change in procedures was attempted in 1962, hooting counts were tried with very little success. Hooting Counts: Snows were unusually deep and persistent the spring of 1962. Roads onto the Uncompahgre Plateau remained impassable until the second week in May. On May 8 (5:23 a.m.), two male blue grouse were observed strutting at an altitude of 8,200 feet in a mixed ponderosa pine, brush, range type. The two birds I-rereobserved for 23 minutes at this time, and again for 19 minutes starting at &:20 a.m. During these periods, an attempt was made to determine at shat distance the cocks were audible. The larger, and more active cock was barely audible at 105-paced feet. The smaller cock, although making all the motions, was not audible at an estimated 20 feet. However, during part of this time he was strutting on the limb of a small ponderosa tree about 12 feet above the ground. A week later at an ~ltitude of 8,700 feet and six miles south of the first sighting, another cock was observed strutting. It was difficult to measure the distance this bird was audible as he kept moving continuously during his strutting activities and finally moved into the timber 200 feet down the road. On July 6 at 6:30 a.m. a cock, accompanied by a hen and four checks, was observed going through all the strutting motions, but was not audible at 50 feet. Area Consistency: The portion of the Uncompahgre Divide road used as a census trend was 62.5 miles long •. This portion was further divided into five sections of as nearly equal length as mechanical division features would allow. Besides the variations in length, each section also varied as to range type, elevation, and water proximity (Table 1). The miles driven on each section was greater in 1961 than 1962, but except for Section 1, more birds and broods were observed for each mile of travel in 1962 (Table 2). The highest density of birds was observe~, both years, in Section 3 with 0.06 and 0.15 birds-per-mile respectively. Blue grouse were not observed at the same location or within 300 yards of the same location in the two years. Time of Day: For recording blue grouse observations the total daylight hours Generally, the length of each period was three hours with some variation, as the season progressed, in the first (daylight) and the last (darkness) periods of the day. All periods of the day were not equally were divided into five periods. �Table I.-RELATIONSHIPS OF SIZE ANDOTHE?~,'ACTORS BETllffiENT.tiE FIVE CENSUSSECTIONS OF THE UNCOMPAHGRE DIVIDE ROADo Section Length Miles Altitude Range Range Type Dominant Secondaries Water Proximi!l Canopy Thickness 1 16.2 9,600-9,100 Spruce Aspen . Fair Heavy 2 1109 9,10~9,275 Spruce-Fir Aspen Poor Medium 3 14•• 6 9,275-9,175 Aspen Brush Good Light 4 10.2 9,175-8,675 Brush Aspen Fair Light I f-' 0\ 0 5 9.9 8,675-8,025 Ponderosa' I Aspen-Brush Poor Medium �Table 2.-COMPARISON Year Section No. ! Total Vdles Birds Broods 1961 311.7 14 OF HILES 2 DRIVEN AND BLUE GROUSE SEEN BY SECTIONS AND YEARS, Section No. ~ Total Miles Birds Broods 340.3 0 0 Section No. :3 Total Miles Birds Broods 345.4 22 6 UNCOMPAHGRE.ROADTREND Section No. Ii Total. Miles Birds Broods Section No.-S Total Miles Birds Broods ria,a 58.2 0 0 0 0 I I-' 0'\ I-' I 1962 224.0 2 0 197.2 3 1 142.9 22 4 100.2 1 0 94.4 0 0 �-162Samplea. in miles driven and areas cover-ed; Without further analysis ,dth all other factors, it would be difficult to determine if the degree of coverage was significan'G. Tables 3 and 4 show a breakdown of miles traveled ruld the total blue grouse and broods observed. Table 5 shows direct comparison between years in milesper-bird and miles-per-brood observed during each period of the day~ For 1961 and 1962, the time from 2:00 to 5:00 p sm, was the best average period for observing birds. These same hours and until dark were the best for seeing broods in 1961, but in 1962, the best brood hours were from sunrise to 8:00 a.m. However, the very dry summer of 1962 may have been a contributing factor to the early hours. Therefore, any statement as to the best hours for observing broods would be assumptive~ Best Brood Periods: Brood counts for management purposes must be accomplished by August 15 for two reasons: 1) The blue grouse season is established by the Game and Fish Commission at a meeting the latter part of August or the first of September and all season recoID~endations must be compiled prior to this meeting. 2) Brood break-up occurs about the middle of August and any information after that date might not be valid. Therefore, all brood counts after August 15 have been excluded from this analysis even though for both years more birds, yound and adult, were observed per mile traveled after September 1 than for any comparable periodo Probably, in the allowable time, the best period for seeing broods is the latter half of July and, perhaps, early August. Due to pressure of other work, parts of this critical time were not spent on the trend areas, and the basis for assumption as to the best time is meager. In 1961, the last week of July and the first week of A~st, and in 1962, the thrid week of July and the first week of August were spent off the trend. There were no afternoon or evening counts from' July 16 to August 1 in 1962. In 1961, from July 18 to July 20, four broods were observed, and on August 7, 8, and 10, three more broods were seen. In 1962, only one brood was seen for 368 miles of travel during this period. This lack of consistency between the two years invalidates any possibility of conclusions. However, with July 15 the earliest date for two years that a brood has been observed on the trend area, concentrated effort in the period from July 15 to August 15 should give the best results. At lower elevations, broods were observed on June 29 and July 10. Brood size: For all ascertainable broods observed in 1961 (eight) on the trend route, the average brood size was 4.14. For the same area in 1962 (five broods), the average brood size was 2.6. In 1961, only one hen without a brood was observed while in 1962, three broodless hens were seen. From the small sample involved, it would appear that there was better production in 1961. Vegetative Relationship: The majority of blue grouse observed both years (Table 2) were in Section 3, a predominantly brush-type range, heavily interspersed with aspen. Table b shows a breakdown of the dominant trees, shrubs, forbs, and grass for each blue grouse .observation in 1962. This compilation of cominant plrults shows very little variation from the 1961 sightings (Rogers, 1962). �-163- Table 3.-CQ\1PARISON OF BLUE GROUSE OBSERVED DURING FIVE PERIODS CF WE DAY, 1961. Period of The Dal Daylight to 8:00 am :0 am to ll:OOam 11:00 am to 2:00 Em 2:00 pm to 5:00 Em 5:00 pm to Dark Totals % of Mi.1es Traveled Total Miles No. of Blue Grouse Number of Broods of Total Birds Observed Miles per Bird Miles per Brood 643.1 23 2 0 2 321.$0 349.1 13 2$ 4 2$ 13.90 87.2 466.$ 17 2$ 6 2$ 18.60 77.7 731.1 26 13 13 56.20 182.7 $63.8 20 35 35 16.10 112.1 27.$3 144.92 100 2,753.6 Table 4.--CWPARISON 19 I OF BLUE GROUSE OBSERVED DURING FIVE PERIODS OF THE DAY, 1962. Miles Traveled Total Miles No. of Blue Grouse Number of Broods of Total Birds Observed Miles per Bird Miles per Brood 606.8 39.17 15 3 37.$0 40.45 202.2 366.$ 23.66 2 5.00 183.2$ to 2:00 m 2:00 pm to $:00 Em 5:00 pm to Dark 160.0 10.32 228.2 14.73 20 50.00 li.U 187.$ 12.10 3 7.$0 62.$0 Totals 1,$49.0 Period of The Dal Sunrise to 8:00 am :00 am to 1l:00 am % of !I:oo am 40 2 38.72 114.1 2$8.16 �Table 5.--CONPARISON OF BLUE GROUSEOBSERVEDON UNCOI:lPAHGRE TRENDDURTI1G FIVE PERIODS OF THE DAY, 1961-1962. 8:00 to 11:00 am I-uTes I-ales per per Bird Brood 11:00 to 2:00 pm Hiles Hiles per per Brood Bird 2: 00 to 5: 00 E!: Hiles Hiles per per Bird Brood 5:00 E!! to Dark Yules Hiles per per Bird, Brood Year Dayli~ht Hiles per Bird to 8 <3.111 Hiles per Brood 1961 320.0 -- 133.5 -- 198.6 -- 38.1 267.2 13.6 1962 40.4 202.2 183.25 -- - -- 11.1J1 114.1 62.5 75.1 I I-' 0\ +="" I �-165- Table 6.--TIME, ELEVATION, WEATHER, AND VEGErATION AT BLUE GROUSE OBSERVATIONS COLORADO, 1962. :Nearest:! ! !!!,!!,!(!!,'Dominant ! Time i Water : Trees Shrubs Forb Date . . 6/8 . .. Gra.ss :Eley.:Temp:Cloud:Precip. . :7:19am: 600 ft:Populus:SYmPhoricarpos:Ligusticum:Bromus ·· · .. 6/12 :4:56am: 300 ft:Populus:SYmPhoricarpos:Taraxacum :B~omus .!· .. :8,970: 58°; · ' 9 12 J: 40° _•• ;~ 1:' ·· . · :6:37am: 100 ft:Populus:Symphoricarpos:Taraxacum :Bromuq :9~2S0: 6Qo; · 8/9 :5:52pm: 50 ft: :Salix :Ligusticum:Festuca. :8,9SQ: 80°; 50% 8/6 8/20 :7:00am: 1(2 mi:Populus:Symphoricarpos:Helenium · · :Bromus :9 2S0: 60°: 2% 8/20 :7:55am: 300 ft:Populus:Symphoricarpos:Helenium :Bromus : : 8/20 :6:12am: 600 ft: . :Symphoricarpos:Astragalus:Bromus . 8/28 :2:05pm: 200 ft:Picea E:Rubus 8/28 :2: !2prrl: 150 ft:Abies : :9,QOQ: SQo: 10% 1 :9,000: : :Astragalus: :Symphoricarpos:Sieversia :Bromas 8/28 :5:15pm: 50 ft:Populus:Salix :Delphinium:Stipa. :8,20Q: · · :8,175: :9,1QQ: : :Helenium :Koeleria:9,225: --a· ·· . . 9/4 :3:4Opm: 400 ft:Populus:Symphoricarpos:Astragalus:Koeleria.:9,lOQ: 78°: 5% ·· .. 9 4 :4:05pm: ulus:Salix 9/4 :7:46am: 1/2 mi:Picea E:Potentilla , :Astra a.Iuse 00 ft: :Rosa 400 · . 10/11:2:35pm: 100 ft:Pinus :Quercus : ·· :Poa : 10/11:3:35pm: . 50 ft:Populus:Symphoricarpos:Astragalus:Bromus .. 10 11:6:5Opm: 100 ft~ :Salix · · 'Bo; 10% :8.900: . : :Lupinus m :7;800: 74°; 10% �-166All plant species, within 100 square feet of each blue grouse sighted, were entered on a special form along with other information including elevation, nearest water, soil type, nearest conifers, type and degree of grazing, and disturbance factors. In this compilation, there were 19 grasses, 40 forbs not including separate species, 17 shrubs, and 7 trees listed in the 2 years. Table 7 shows the grasses, forbs, shrUbs, and trees occurring most frequently at each brood sighting. The growing conditions for the two summers were not comparable; but due to the wet spring of 1962, this difference was not reflected in the vegetation until August. While the summer and fall of 1961 were wetter than normal, the same period for 1962 was extremely dry with May, June, and August each having less than one-half inch of precipitation and July, only 0.56. The effect of moisutre on vegetative conditions between years may have affected harvest more than census. Weather: Personnel making brood counts on upland game birds are usually admonished to work only when weather conditions are clear, calm, and dry. While working on sage grouse census trends (Rogers, 1963), it was found that wet vegetation apparently influenced the birds to move to denuded areas, including roads, and counts were often higher immediately after a storm. Many unimproved mountain roads are slick and difficult to drive under rainy or wet condit.ions, and the Uncompahgre blue grouse trend is no exception. Occasionally, a trend count was begun only to have a quick mountain shower blow in or although dry conditions prevailed at the start of the trend in the valley, heavy rain would have fallen on part of the trend area during the night. In 1961, while less than ten per cent of the travel on the trend area was done under wet or rainy ~onditions--except for morning dew--one of eight broods were observed during rain storms; five of eight were observed while vegetation was wet from rain; four of eight were observed when the cloud cover exceeded fifty per cent; and five of eight were observed while the sun was not shining. In 1962, only one trip was made with more than a fifty per cent cloud cover and none was made during or immediately after a rainstorm. With only 0.56 and 0.43 inches of precipitation in July and August, it was seldom that the vegetation was even damp with morning dew. However, two of five broods were observed while the sun was not shining. In only one instance was a brood observed when the wind velocity exceeded four miles-per-hour. The mean temperature for July and August of 1962 was 4.9 and 3.9 degrees lower than in 1961, but with the wide temperature range for brood observations in 1961, no correlation could be determined. Harvest: The hunting seasons for 1961 and 1962 were the same--nine days and a three-bird bag limit. The 1961 season opened on the 16th of September--one day earlier than the 1962 season. Precipitation during the 1961 hunting season was heavy with 3.93 inches of moisture compared with 0.75 inches in 1962. Food conditions (berries, hips, and mast) were excellent in 1961, but very poor in 1962. Also, the lack of available water during the dry summer of 1962 may have caused some movement of blue grouse. �-167- Table 7.--PER CENT FREQUENCY OF OCCURRENCE OF PLANT SPECIES FOR BLUE GROUSE BROOD LOCATIONS, 1961-1962. Type GRASSES: FORBS: SHRUBS: TREES: Genera Poa Bronms Festuca thurberi Stipa Agrostis July August September 37.5 50.0 33.3 75.0 ]2.5 40.0 40.0 30.0 10.0 33.3 33.3 Senica Erigeron Potentilla Achillea Astragalus Delphinium Cirsium Lathyrus Taraxacum Helenium hoopesi Ligusticum 25.0 50.0 37.5 62.5 50.0 ]2.5 ]2.5 25.0 50.0 37·5 25.0 60.0 60.0 40.0 40.0 Symphoricarpos Prunus Rosa Artemisia tridentata Chrysothamnus Sambucus 75.0 ]2.5 25.0 25.0 25.0 70.0 40.0 30.0 30.0 10.0 20.0 100.0 Populus tremuloides Picea Pinus ponderosa Juniperus utahensis 62.5 60.0 10.0 10.0 33·3 :12.5 20.0 40.0 40.0 50.0 10.0 20.0 33·3 33·3 33·3 66.6 66.6 �-168In conjunction with WCO John Howlett, grouse hunters within the census trend area were checked in the field until 2:00 p5m. Shortly after 2:00 p.m. a roadblock was established at the north end of the census area and all hunters were stopped and checked until 8:00 p.m. Although hunters were contacted throughout the season, intensive efforts and comparisons were limited to the first two days of the season (Saturday and Sunday). In 1961, 132 hunters, checked during these two days, killed 35 blue grouse in 409 hours of hunting for 0.26 birds-per-hunter or 11.6 hours hunted-per-bird. In 1962, 87 hunters killed 95 blue grouse in 396 hours of hunting for 1.09 birds-per-hunter or 4.16 hours hunted-per-bird. Besides the increase in blue grouse kill in 1962, there was a corresponding increase in the kill of sharptailed and sage grouse on part of this area. Conclusions: One item, the small sample Size, appears to be the major drawback in developing a census technique for blue grouse. While many inconsistencies were present, some of which might be resolved with more intensive work, it appears unlikely that the sample would exceed 0.25 birds-per-mile. Observations of blue grouse by Forest Service crews, on foot and from horseback, did not reach this figure except in very limited areas. While the sample was small, particularly on the trend area (1961, 36 birds and 8 broodsj 1962, 28 birds and 5 broods), it is still comparable to numbers of birds observed in other states with management procedures. It was not equal in accordance with time and effort expended. The total sample for the two years (1961, 100 birds and 19 broodsj 1962, 40 birds and 5 broods plus 1,454 birds from Forest Service reports) might be large enough for analysis, but with the variables encountered and the time and effort needed to procure an accurate sample, it is not at this time considered feasible. If conclusions could be postulated on this small sample, they would be as follows: The one best period of the day to observe blue grouse and broods is mid-afternoon between 2:00 and 5:00 p.m. The best road area, at least ten miles in length, on the Uncompahgre Plateau is between 9,000 and 9,300 feet in elevation through a mixed-brush range type interspersed with aspen and a few conifers. The canopy is open with a good understory of forbs and grasses and there is free water closely associated with the trend route. Hunting success, with our present short seasons and light pressure, may be more closely related to the availability of food, water, and other factors than with blue grouse population densities. Literature Cited Rogers, Glenn E. 1962. July, pp. 125-131. Federal Aid Quarterly Rep., Colo. Game and Fish Dept., 1963. The Sage Grouse in Colorado. Colo. Game and Fish Dept., Denver. Prepared by: Glenn E. Rogers Senior Game Biologist Date: October, 1963 Approved by: Wayne W. Sandfort Chief, Game Research Ferd C. IG.einschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �October, 1963 -169JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of ~C~O~LO~RAD~O~ _ Project No. ~W~-~3~7_-~R~-~1~6 ~ Work Plan No. Title of Job: ~G~am~e_B~ir~d~S~ur~v~e~y _ 11 Job No. 2 --------~--------------~------~--~----------------------------- Trial Introduction of Spanish Red-legged Partridges. ----~~~~~--~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~----------- Period Covered: April 1, 1962 to March 31, 1963. This job was to be carried out only in the event enough birds for trial field releases were raised at the Rocky Ford Experimental Bird Farm. Due to poor egg production during the spring of 1962, no Spanish red-legged partridges were produced for field releases. Climatic data analyses for 25 stations in Colorado were studied by Roger L. Evans (W-37-R-15, Job 1, Work Plan 11) to compare the climates of these areas with that of the native red-legged partridge range in Spain. As a result of this study, the Canon City, Palisade, and Walsenburg areas were recommended as general release sites in the order of their suitability. The Rocky Ford Experimental Bird Farm secured only about 33 or 34 eggs from the 80 Spanish red-legged partridge breeders during the spring of 1962 according to Superintendent Willis G. Mansfield. Of this number of eggs, 22 birds were hatched and 14 young have survived. Entering into the 1963 egg laying period, Superintendent Mansfield estimates he will again have 80 breeders or approximately 40 pairs of Spanish red-legged partridges. He hopes that with a change of feed he will be able to solve some of the problems encountered in the past. Recommendations: Superintendent Willis G. Mansfield has hopes that enough birds for trial field releases will be raised at the Rocky Ford Experimental Bird Farm for release in March of 1964. This job should be continued with this possibility. Objectives: To determine possibilities for adaptation of this species within the State. �-170- Techniques Used: A. Areas for release - selected sites determined from information obtained under W-37-R-15, Job 1, Work Plan 11. B. Time of release - late March. Prepared by Donald M. Hoffman Principal Game Biologist Date: ~0_c_t_o_b_e_r~,_1~9~6~3~ _ Approved by Wayne W. Sandfort ----~~~~~~~~----~Chief, Game Research Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �October, 1963 -171- JOB COMPLErION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO Project No. W-37-R-16 Work Plan No. 12 Game Bird Survey Job No. Title of Job: Mapping of Wild Turkey Range Period Covered: July 1, 1962 to March 31, 1963. 8 Work on this job was accomplished by M~rtin L. Burget under W-39-R, Job 9, Work Plan 1, prior to July 1, 1962. Products of his work consisted of the following I (1) Maps illustrating summer, winter, year-round, occasional, and total range. (2) Written description of wild turkey range by counties. (3) A comparison of wild turkey ranges by precipitation belts. (4) Tables showing square miles or range open and closed to hunting during 1960 and 1961. (5) Tables showing wild turkey range in square miles by counties. This work on the mapping of wild turkey range was based upon his knowledge of the species and range, and information secured from other Departmental field personnel. Due to health conditions, he was not able to accomplish extensive field work. An inspection of his maps and data shows that as of 1960, most of the better Merriam's turkey potential range on both the western and eastern slopes have been filled through an extensive live-trapping and transplanting program combined with natural increase and movement. Recommendations: The work accomplished by Martin L. Burget should be utilized as a basis for future work on the species. The range will, however, require revision from time to time due to future live-trapping and transplanting activities, natural movement or other factors. �-172- Objectives: (1) To assemble available information on range and distribution. (2) To complete wild turkey range mapping. (3) To compile data and prepare distribution and density maps. (4) To show correlations between distribution and density and vegetative types, precipitation, and soils. (5) To determine possible, potential range through comparisons between present range characteristics and similiar areas, as indicated by map overlays. elevations, Techniques Used: These are outlined under W-39-R-10, Job 9, Work Plan 1, and are not repeated herewith since no work was accomplished under W-37-R-16. Prepared by: Date: Donald M. Hoffman Approved by: ---=~--~~~----~~--~~ Principal Game Biologist ~O~c_t~0_b~e~rL,_1~9~6~3~ _ W~a~yn~e~W~. __S_an~d~f_o_r_t __ ~ _ Chief, Game Research Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �October, 1963 -173- JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENr State of COLORADO ----------~~~~--------- Project No. W-37-R-16 Work Plan No. 12 Title of Job: Period Covered: Game Bird Survey Job No. 10 Relationships of the productivity and Distribution of Wild Turkeys on the Uncompahgre Plateau to the Envirorunent. January 2, 1963 to March 31, 1963. ABSTRACT During the winter of 1962-63, 34 wild turkeys were trapped on the Uncompahgre Plateau. Five of these birds, from Pickett Corral, were transplanted. The remaining 29 turkeys were aged, sexed, and banded with leg bands, back tags, and neck bands. Nineteen of the birds tagged were trapped at Pickett Corral and banded with blue back tags and blue neck bands. Five, caught on 25 Mesa, were banded with white back tags and white neck bands. The remaining birds were captured in Dominguez Canyon where yellow back tags and yellow neck bands were employed. Weights of 28 banded turkeys were recorded to the nearest 1/4 pound , The average weight of 14 adult toms was 17 pounds, while 11 adult hens aver averaged 10 1/4 pounds. Three banded birds were recaptured, while eight others wearing neck bands or back tags were seen from 0 to 26 miles from where the birds were banded and released. In addition to banded birds, 33 unbanded wild turkeys were seen when a small portion of the study area was flown with a helicopter. Reconnnendations.: Throughout the remainder of this study, no wild turkeys should be transplanted to or removed from any area on the Uncompahgre Plateau. A turkey censusing technique employing the helicopter should be tested on the Uncompahgre Plateau. Results of the census might then be compared with population estimates obtained from ground observations, W.C.O. reports, and from ratios such as the Lincoln index. Notation of back tagged turkeys seen from the helicopter during the census might also prove helpful in determining the movements of wild turkeys. Similarly, new concentrations of wild turkeys might be found in areas relatively inaccessable to other means of census. �-174Objectives: (4) Determine the size and distribution of the wild turkey population within the study area. Record movements of wild turkeys and determine how environmental factors affect these movements. Determine the age and sex structure of the turkey kill. on the Uncompahgre Plateau to provide estimates Of: (a) net productivity, (b) hunter harvest, and (c) size of the turkey population. Locate the roosting, feeding, breeding, and broodrearing areas used by wild turkeys. Where applicable evaluate the characteristics of these areas in terms of food production, food availability, variety of foods, floristic composition, vegetation coverage, elevation, topography, exposure, and availability of free water. Techniques Used: A standard slat-type turkey trap having a canvas drop-gate at either end was used to capture turkeys at Pickett Corral in Escalante Canyon. Each drop-gate extended the full width of the trap. A similar type trap with a slat drop~gate three feet wide at each end was employed in trapping operations on 25 Mesa. In Dominguez Canyon, turkeys were trapped with a cannon net. The traps were tripped or fired from a tent located from 20 to 40 yards away. Ear corn, wheat, and oats were used for bait. Wild turkeys were banded with neck bands, one foot long, made from 1/2 inch plastic belting, a product of the Cee-Bee Manufacturing Company Incorporated of Brooklyn. Holes for securing the neck bands about turkeys' necks were made with a 5/8, inch punch available from C. S. Osborne and Company in Harrison, New York. A notch system was used to number the nexk bands, each narrow and each broad notch representing one and ten units respectively. For example, neck band number 15 was marked with one broad notch and five narrow notches. A similar system was used to number the back tags. In addition, large numbers were painted on the back tags to facilitate identification of each banded bird seen in the field. Home-Cote quick dry enamel proved unsatisfactory for this purpose; so black vinyl upholstery finish manufactured by Ram Cote Products of Chic age was used on all back tags during 1963. Back tags were made of three different materials, Naugahyde (a product of the U. S. Rubber Company), Herculite (made by Herculite of Newark, New Jersey), and Coronet Feather Touch (supplied by Silver State Suppliers of Salt Lake City). Twenty-four inch lengths of no. 76 (1/2 inch) or no. 23 (3/8 inch) Colton elastic braid was stapled to each back tag with a model 702 stapling plier built by the Ace Fastener Corporation of Chicago. The back tag was placed on the turkey's back. The end of each elastic band was passed in front of each wing, beneath the "wing pits", over the turkeys back, and secured with a stapler to the upholstery back tag. Care was taken to maintain proper tension on the elastic braid to prevent injury to the birds. Wild turkeys were weighed with a Viking model 829 scale manufactured by the Hansen Scale Company of Northbrook, Illinois. Methods given by Keiser and Kozicky (1943) were used to sex and age wild turkeys. �-175- RELATIONSHIPS OF THE PRODUCTIVITY AND DISTRIBurION OF WILD TURKEYS ON THE UNCOMPAHGRE PLATEAU TO THE ENVIRONM!!TIw.r Gary T. Myers There is much to learn about the wild turkey on the Uncompahgre Plateau in Colorado. A large scale trapping program in this area will reveal useful information concerning the movements, longivity, size of the turkey population, and per cent of the turkey population harvested. During much of the 1962-63 trapping season, temperatures were mild and snowfall light making it difficult to bait turkeys into the traps. Difficulties were increased by the inexperience of the turkey trapping personne., especially myself. Still 34 wild turkeys were trapped. Five of these birds, caught at Pickett Corral, were taken from the Uncompahgre Plateau for transplanting. The remaining 29 turkeys were aged, sexed, banded, and released (Table 1). Five wild turkey hens were captured with the cannon net at Dominguez Canyon. Socks were placed on the heads of these birds soon after capture. None of the birds suffered feather losses which might endanger their ability to survive the cold winters in Colorado. Turkeys trapped with the cannon net lost slightly more feathers than birds which were captured in the slat-type traps. Three banded birds were recaptured during the trapping period. An adult tom wearing a blue back tag was trapped at Pickett Corral on December 21, 1962. The tom was originally banded with a blue neck band, blue back tag, and leg band on March 6, 1962 at Pickett Corral. The back tag number, painted with Home-Cote quick dry enamel, was not visable. The leg band and neck band were gone. The back tag was removed, and the bird was taken from the Uncompahgre Plateau for transplanting. Another adult tom with a blue neck band was caught at Pickett Corral on February 5, 1963. This tom had been banded March 6, 1962 with a blue neck band and a leg band. Aback tag mayor may not have been on this bird. No leg band or back tag was present at the time of recapture. The neck tag showed no signs of wear, nor had the turkey been injured because of the neck band. A new blue neck band, a blue back tag, and a leg band were put on this bird before it was released. An adult hen turkey wearing white back tag number one was seen on March 20, 1963 at 7:30 a.m. inside the trap on 25 Mesa. The hen was first captured on March 16, 1963 in the same trap. This bird was recaptured at 25 Mesa on March 22. Examination of the bird showed no injury resulting from having worn the back tag, neck tag, and leg band for six days. She had neither lost or gained weight. Weights were recorded for 28 of the trapped and banded turkeys. The average weight (to the nearest 1/4 pound) of five adult hens captured in Dominguez Canyon in 1963 ~as 10 1/4 pounds. Weights of hens in this area ranged between 9.75 and 10.75 pounds. In Escalante Canyon four adult hens, averaging 10 1/4 pounds, weighed between 10 and 11 pounds. Two adult hens banded on 25 Mesa weighed 10 and 10 1/4 pounds. The average weight of these 11 hens was 10 1/4 pounds. �-176TABLE 1. - - INFORMATION CONCERNING WILD TURKEYS TAGGED AND BANDED AT PICKETT CORRAL (BLUE), 25 MESA, (WHITE) AND DOMINGUEZ CANYON (YELLOW) DURING THE WINTER OF 1962-63. Back Tag and Neck Tag Color No. Back Tag Material Width of Elastic (Inches) Leg Band No. Sex Age Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue White White White Whi'te White Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow Unknown Unknown Naugahyde Herculite Herculite Herculite Herculite Coronet Coronet Coronet Coronet Coronet Naugahyde Naugahyde Coronet Naugahyde Herculite Coronet Coronet Herculite Herculite Herculite Herculite Herculite Coronet Coronet Coronet Coronet Naugahyde 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 ,1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 3/8 3/8 3/8 3/8 3/8 T-506 T-507 T-508 T-509 T-510 T-5ll T-512 T-513 T-514 T-515 T-516 T-517 T-518 T-519 T-520 T-ll T-12 T-13 T-14 T-15 T-521 T-522 T-17 T-18 T-16 T-19 T-20 T-21 T-22 Hen Hen Tom Tom Tom Tom Tom ,Tom Tom Tom Tom Tom Tom Tom Tom Hen Hen Hen Hen Hen Tom Tom Hen Hen Hen Hen Hen Hen Hen Young Young Adult Adult Adult Adult Adult Adult Adult Adult Adult Adult Adult Adult Adult Adult Adult Adult Adult Adult Adult Adult Young Adult Adult Adult Adult Adult , Adult 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 J.4 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 Weight (Pounds) Date of Capture 6 1/2 8 19 18' 17 1/2 16 3/4 17 1/2 16 Dec. 21 Dec. 21 Feb. 5 Feb. 5 Feb. 5 Feb. 5 Feb. 5 Feb. 5 Feb. 5 Feb. 5 Feb. 5 Feb. 5 Feb. 5 Feb. 5 Feb. 5 Feb. 19 Feb. 19 Feb. 19 Feb. 19 Mar. 16 Mar. 16 Mar. 16 Mar. 22 Mar. 22 Mar. 21 Mar. 23 Mar. 23 Mar. 23 Mar. 23 16 1/4 16 1/4 16 3/4 17 1/2 17 3/4 17 1/4 10 1/2 10 10 11 10 1/4 15 1/4 15 1/4 8 10 10 1/4 10 1/4 10 3/4 10 1/4 9 3/4 The weights of 14 adult toms, averaging 17 pounds, fell between 15 1/4 and 19 pounds. The two 15 1/4 pound birds were two years old. In addition to trapping turkeys, a card catalog containing abstracts of 192 articles about wild turkeys was compiled. An additional 37 references were not abstracted but appear in the card catalog. Movements In February 1962, 10 wild turkeys were trapped and banded with orange neck bands and leg bands at the Hill Ranch. Orange back tags were put on two of these �-177- birds, a young tom and an adult hen. In December 1963, the adult hen was seen near the trap at Pickett Corral in Escalante Canyon, 21 miles from the Hill Ranch. Two hens wearing orange neck bands were seeri on the south fork of Mesa Creek with six and seven young on August 20, 1962. These two hens were from 22 to 26 miles from the Hill Ranch. On February 17, 1963 at 6:00 p.m. four hens were seen in two large, live ponderosa pine trees 1/2 mile north-east of Pickett Corral. Fourteen minutes later, six wild turkeys were observed in one large ponderosa pine tree three miles north-east of Pickett Corral. Two turkeys were seen in a nearby tree. All of these birds were making their way from the lower to the uppermost branches bf the trees. Two birds were seen as they flew into the trees. The four hens mentioned above were trapped at Pickett Corral at 7:30 a.m. on February 19, 1963. These birds were back-tracked in fresh snow to the roost. These four birds had walked 1/2 mile by 7:30 avm, At 6:45 a.m. on February 19,1963, eight toms were seen in one large ponderosa pine tree, three miles north-east of Pickett Corral. Two of these birds wore back tags. The same evening nine toms were seen returning to the roose area. Three of the birds wore blue back tags and blue neck bands. Numbers on the back tags were not seen. Probably these birds were some of the toms trapped February 5, 1963 at Pickett Corral. Two adult toms wearing white back tags and white neck bands were seen with a group of 11 other tome 1/4 mile above the trap at 25 Mesa on March 22. These two birds had been trapped and banded six days before on 25 Mesa. Disease and Mortality Little effort has been made to determine the sources of mortality important in limiting the size of the turkey population on the Uncompahgre Plateau. Yet some information has been obtained incidental with turkey trapping activities. On March 22, 1963 an adult hen was captured which had a growth or tumor about 1/2 inch thick and two inches wide on the back of its neck. The bird was examined by Dr. Porter in Delta. He concluded that the abnormality resulted from an injury sustained when the bird was young. Since no evidence of disease was found, the bird was banded and released at the capture site. This turkey wears white back tag and white neck band number five. The feet and wings of an adult tom were found hidden beneath boards in an old school house on the Old Transfer Road near Olathe on February 17. The legs had been removed from the turkey's body with a knife. A reliable source reported another set of feet and wings in this same general area. Evidence of a poached turkey was· also reported seen four miles north-east of Pickett Corral. Mortality due to causes other than poaching was not noted. �-178- Census Thus far, I have made no attempt to census turkeys on the Uncompahgre Plateau. However, Dominguez Canyon and Escalante Canyon were flown with a helicopter on January 31, 1963. In about one hour. of flying, five wild turkeys were seen in Dominguez Canyon and 28 in Escalante Canyon. From the ground, I counted 13 toms and four hens on 25 Mesa, 25 toms and four hens at Pickett Corral, and five hens and four toms in Dominguez Canyon. Additional birds (three others) were seen in Dominguez Canyon but their sex was not determined. I have seen a total of 58 wild turkeys, two of which were young. Conclusions No valid conclusions can be drawn from the limited amount of data gathered. Thus far, observations of banded birds indicate that some wild turkeys on the Uncompahgre Plateau travel great distances and may, during some years, winter in different areas. Weights of wild turkeys in Dominguez Canyon, Escalante Canyon, and on 25 Mesa suggest that food may be equally available to wild turkeys in the three areas. Although expensive, the helicopter seems to be the fastest and most reliable method of censusing wild turkeys on the Uncompahgre Plateau. Some wild turkeys captured and released from slat-type traps probably are not frightened from the general trapping area. Turkeys trapped with the cannon net were not defeathered to the extent that their ability to survive cold winters in Colorado was appreciably lessened. Leg bands of the type used by the Colorado Game and Fish Department may not be retained by wild turkeys as well as neck bands and back tags. Literature Cited Keiser, L. P., and E. L. Kozicky. 1943. Sex and age determination turkeys. Pa. Game News 14 (8):10-11,26. Prepared by: Gary T. Myers Game Biologist Date: October, 1963 Approved by: of wild Wayne W. Sandfort Chief, Game Research Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �October, 1963 -179- JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESE.A1,tCH PROJ:WT SEGMENT State of COLORADO ------~~~~~------------- Project NO. W~-3~7~-~R~-_1_6 Work Plan No. 12 Job No. 11 ------------------------~------~--~~----~--------------- Title of Job: Period Coveredl Publication of G_am __e__B_i_rd __S_u_rv __e~y _ Wild Turkey Information April 1, 1962 to March 31, 1963. Work was started by Martin L. Burget to assemble and analyze information to revise the pUblication '~he Wild Turkey in Colorado". His death on September 1, 1962 following a long illness left this work unfinished. An illustrated pUblication "The Wild Turkey in Eastern Colorado" consisting of 48 pages by Donald M. Hoffman was published by the Colorado Game and Fish Commission in July, 1962. The research findings in this pUblication covers a nine year period. Contents of this pUblication include: Natural history Age and sex characteristics Life history notes Range requirements Food Water Cover Special requirements Food habits Review of literature Scope of study Procedures Results of study Population limiting factors Predation Poaching Casualties of the open season Accidents Diseases Casulties resulting from adverse weather Population status Sex-ratio counts Field signs of wild turkeys Brood counts Additional management studies Transplanting Banding studies Winter food plots Baled oat hay stacks �-180- Recommendations: With the publication of data from past studies on the eastern slope, this job should be discontinued until current studies are concluded. Objectives: (1) To publish findings from wild turkey research in eastern Colorado. (2) To summarize all data on wild turkey investigations in the State and revise the current publication "The Wild Turkey in Colorado". Techniques Used: (1) Assemble and analyze all published and unpublished information from wild turkey research in Colorado. (2) Prepare manuscripts for pUblication. Prepared by: Date: Donald M. Hoffman Principal Game Biologist ~O~~~to_b_e~r~,~1~9~63~ Approved by: _ Sandfort ---~~~--~---~----~---Chie~, Game Research 'Wayne W. Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �October, 1963 -181- JOB COMPLEl'ION REPCRT RESEARCH PROJEGr SEGNENT state of COLORADO --------------------------- Project No. Game Bird Survey 1f- 37-R-16 -------~---------------Work Plan No. 13 ----~----------------Title of Job: Job No. 1 --~------------------------- Revievr of information on sharp=tailed grouse management and research Period Covered: April 1, 1962, to l1arch 31, 1963 ABsrRACT Except for the state of Utah, in the late 1930's, there have been very few life history or ecology studies on the columbian sharp-tailed grouse (Pedioecetes ~hasianellus cohunbianus). 1Vh.ilethe provinces of Saskat chewan a'iid13ritish olumbia and the state of Hontana lead the far west in kill of shar-p-t.af'l.ed grouse (mainly P., ~. jamesi) most of the studies on this subspecies have been done by the prairie states. The gross environmental requirements of the plains and columbian sharptails are different for vegetation and elevation, but are very similar in regard to climate and topography. Changes in land management practices in the past 25 years appear chiefly beneficial to sharptails and consideration should be given to restoring this species throughout its historical range. e The emphasis on sharp-tailed grouse work should be switched from general to specific. Dancing grounds and production routes should be located, counted, and mapped for future reference ~nd studies should be initiated into their enviromnental requirements to determine the restoration potential for this species. Recommendat.Lons Objectives: (1) To rcvimr literature on sharp-tailed grouse species, particu(2) larly that pertaining to west.ern United states and Canada. To abstract published and assemble unpublished information on past management and research perta:ining to sharp-tailed grouse. TechniCiues Used: Literature Has rcvicHed and abstracted for future reference. Sharp-failed grouse information collected during sage and blue grouse stUdies vras assembled. �-183- REVIEW OF INFORMATION ON SHARP-TAILED GROUSE MANAGEMENT AND RESEARCH Glenn Eo Rogers In only a few of the western states and Canadian provinces are sharp-tailed grouse an important game species. Saskatchewan leads in harvest with MOntana and British Columbia second and third respectively. Except for British Columbia, this kill is primarily on the plains sharptail (Pedioecetes phasianellus jamesi). All the other western states (California, Colorado, Idaho, Oregon, utah, Washington, and Wyoming) and the provtnce of Alberta may contain two subspecies of sharptails, but the Columbian sharptaii (Pedioecetes phasianellus columbianus)is the principal subspecies None of these areas harvest over 2,000 sharptails annually. 0 The number of management and research studies are closely correlated with harvest in these areas except for utah. In the late 1930's six studies were conducted on t)le columbian sharptail by the state Department of Fish and Game and the utah state College. Additional studies on the columbian sharptail were made in Washington and British Columbia and on the plains sharptail by Saskatchewan. However, most of the studies on the plains sharptail have been conducted by the mid-western prairie states 0 Changes in land use caused an increase in numbers and range. Prairie fires, timber cutting and farming initially increased habitat for these birds at the expense of pralrle chickens (Tympanuchus cupido) (Schorger, 1944). Later, overgrazing, extensive farming, and timber regrowth depleted sharptail habitat and a sharp decline was noticed in numbers and range. Some of these more harmful land management practices have been modified (chiefly in the sharptail's favor) in the past 25 years. Lighter grazing, brush eradicating, grass reseeding, and decreased dry-farming are generally favorable to restoration of sharp-tailed grouse in many of our western states In Colorado alone, sagebrush eradication has averaged 50 square miles a year for the past three years. While very detrimental to sage grouse (Centrocercus urophasianus), sharptailshave moved into some of these areas. 0 Environmental Requirements: A generalized condensation of environmental needed for sharp-tailed grouse in Colorado follows by category: requirements Elevation: The plains sharp-tailed grouse may be found at elevations ranging from 5,000 to 7,500 While the columbian sharptail inhabits areas between 7,000 to 9,200 feet. Vegetation: A grass-type range, well interspersed with mixed shrubs, appears to be preferred by sharptails in Colorado. Habitat of the plains sharptail is mainly of the mid-grass type with rather limited shrub areas. Occasionally, conifers may be present. The habitat of the columbian sharptail is generally a mixed-shrub type with a very high grass density. Often this range has scattered aspens and cottonwoods present. �-184- Topograp11z: At the present time, only the rougher areas on the eastern plains contain shrubs. r10st of the flat land has been pl.owedor treated so that little browse remains even along the ditch and stream banks. These rough breaks and low hills are limited in size and elevation and comprise only a small portion of the plains area. Hovever, sharptails may prefer rough or gently-rolling terrain regardless of plant occurrence. The range of the columbian sharp-tailed grouse is larger in extent and varies more in elevation and slope. The sharptails, however, appear-to congregate on the relatively-flat or the gently-rolling portions. Climate: The majority of the sharptai1 range is within the 15- to 20-inch precipitation zone 'VTith10 to 30 inches the maximums in variation. Precipitation on the plains is greater in the sununermonths iYhi1ewinter moisture predominates in the mountains. Temperature extremes range from 40 be1mTto 100 above l-Tithlittle difference .between the plains and mountains in means. Snowdepths range from generally bare to continuous cover--from non-persistent to a persistent cover averaging over a foot in depth. Literature Schorger, A. H. Hisconsin. Cited 1944. The prairie chicken and sharp-tailed grouse in early Trans. "lisconsin Acad. se., Vol. 35, pp. 1-59. Bibliography Aldrich, John H. and Allen J. Duvall. 1955. Distribution of American gallinaceous gamebirds. Cir. 3h, Fish and Hi1dl. Ser., Dept. of Interior, 1fash., 30 p. Allen, J •.A. 1872. Notes on an ornithological reconnaissance of portions of Kansas, Colorado, Hyomingand Uta.h. Bull. Nus. of CompoZool., Howar-d College, Cambridge, Hass. 3(6): 16h-173. Annnan,George A. 194h. Determining age of pinnated and sharp-tailed J. vJi1dl. Bgnt. 8(2): 170-171. grouses. Baird, Spencer F. 1858. Reports of exploration and surveys (for railroad Pacific), 9: xxi, xliv, 619, 625. to the Buss, Irven O. and Eugene S. Dziedzic. 1955. Relation of cultivation to the disappearance of the Columbian sharp-tailed grouse from southeastern 1-1ashington. Condor 57(3): 185-187. Cade, TomJ. and John L. Buckley. 1953. A mass migration of sharp-tailed grouse from the Tanana Valley, Alaska, in 1934. Condor 55(6): 313. Cooke, 1;.J. H. 1897. The birds of Colorado. Bull. No. 37 Tech. Series No.2, State AL,T:t. Co'l.Ls , Smith-Brooks Printine; Co, , Denver,143 pp. • 190C. The birds of Colorado. Bull. No. 56 Tech. Series No. :5, --""Exp'.'r,,,,-. -.~SrTtat.ion,Fort. Co'Ll.Lns , Colo., pp. 179-239. �-185- Coues, :Elliott. 1874. Birds of the northvrest. Surv., No.3, p. 407. 1lisc. Pub. U. S. Geol. Dargan, Lucas 1-1., Robert J. Kelley, Harold R. She.pherd, and Robert N. Randall. 19'-r2. Sharp-tailed grouse studies, Craig area, fall and Hinter, 1941-1942. Fed. Aid, h-R Colorado Gameand Fish Dept , , mimeo, 10 pp. Deming, Oscar. 1938. A fall and winter study of the Columbian sharp-tailed grouse in southern Cache Valley, Utah, during 1937-38. (Unpub. B.S. thesis). Utah state Agri. cerr., Logan. 75 pp. Dillon, Paul R., Diane Osborn, PamPleasant, and Harold Kiever, 1959. Sharptailed grouse in Hoffat County. Hoffat Co. High School, Craig, Colo., mimeo, 17 pp•. Hart, Chester N., Orville S. Lee, and Jessop B. Lm-r. 1950. The sharptailed grouse in Utah, its life history, status, and management. Utah Dept. of Fish and Game. 79 pp, Hatter, J. 1957. Somerequirements of a managementprogram for upland game birds in British Columbia. Proc. 37th Ann, Conf , 1-1. Assn. state Gameand Fish Coroms.,pp. 239-250. Jenson, Hax S. 1931. study of vnnter activity of sharp-tailed grouse in Cache Valley, Utah, during 1936-31. (Unpub. B.S. thesis) Utah State Agri. ColI., Logan, 46 pp. Lee, Orville S. 1936. The life history of the Columbian sharp-tailed grouse in Utah. (Unpuh, r'l. S. thesis). Utah state Aeri. ColI., Logan, 86 pp. Lincoln, Frederick C. 1917. A revie"r of the genus Pediocetes in Colorado. Pr-oc, BioI. Soc. vJash., D.C., 30: 83-86. Loa, J. B. and D. }1. Gaufin. Bull., 3(3): 8. 1946. Sharp-tailed grouse. Utah Fish and Game Harshall , Hilliam H. n. d. Not.es on the matirig activities of the sharp-tailed grouse (Pediocetes phasianel11.ls columbian1.ls)in northern Utah. (Unpub. H.S. thesis f. Utah ~~taEeAgri. CoIl., Logan. tailed and Hax S. Jenson. 1937. Hinter and spring studies of the sharpgrouse in Utah. Jour. uuai, Hngt. 1: 84-99. Ridgeway, Robert. 1877. Ornithology, Part 3, Vol. 4: 303-669 in Clarence King's report of U. S. Geol. Exploration of the fortieth parallel U. S. (Army). and H. Friedmann. 1946. The birds of north and middle America. BUiT.>o, U. S. Govern. Printing Office, Hash. D.C., 463 pp. Rowan,llilliam. 1948. The ten-year. Univ. of Alberta, Edmonton, 15 pp, Scott, John lI. 1950. A study of the phylogenetic or comparative behavior of three species of grouse. Ann. N.Y. Acad. of SCience, 51(6): 1062-1073. �-186- Snyder, L. L. 1935. A study of the sharp-tailed Univ. of Toronto, Toronto Press, 66 pp. grouse. Bio1. Servo No. 40. Swenk, Myron H. and Lyle F. Se1ko. 1938. The late autumn food of the sharptailed grouse in western Nebraska. Jour. Wi1dl. Mgmt., 2: 184~189. Symington, D. F.and T. A.·Harper. 1957. Sharp-tailed grouse in Saskatchewan. Sask. Dept -. Nat. Resources, Cons. Bull. No.4, 1-24 p , , 13 fibs. . Yocom, Charles F. 1952. Columbian sharp-tailed grouse (Pedioecetes phasiane11us co1umbianus) in the state of Washington. Amer. Midland Nat. 48 (1) 185-192, i11us. Prepared by: Glenn E. Rogers Senior GameBiologist Date: October, 1963 Approved by: WayneW. Sandfort Chief, GameResearch FerdC. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �October, 1963 -187- JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO --------~~~~~-------- Project No. W-37-R-16 Work Plan No. 13 Game Bird Survey Job No. Title of Job: Mapping sharp-tailed grouse range Period Covered: April 1, 1962 through March 31, 1963. 2 ABSTRACT Information on the distribution and density of sharp-tailed grouse in Colorado was collected from interviews, earlier studies, and personal reconnaissance. Personnel of federal and local agencies--Forest Service, Bureau of Land Management, Fish and Wildlife Service, Game and Fish Department, and the Denver MUseum-were interviewed along with other interested individuals. Also, the results of two early studies were compiled. Sharp-tailed grouse were found to occupy 16 of Colorado's 63 counties and may be present in 5 more counties. Although 14 dancing grounds have been located and counted, and numerous sharptail kills checked by conservation officers, very little is known regarding statewide population densities. Apparently, Routt county has the highest sharptailed grouse density followed by Moffat, Dolores, Douglas, Elbert, and Mesa, but not necessarily in that order. �-188- Recommendations: The emphasis on sharp-tailed grouse work should be switched from general to specific. Dancing grounds and production routes should be located, counted, and mapped for future reference and studies should be initiated into their environmental requirements to determine the restoration potential for this species. Objectives: (1) To assemble (2) data on sharp-tailed grouse range and distribution. To prepare 'distribution and density maps for this species. Techniques~: Interview United States Forest Service, Bureau of Land Management, and Colorado Game and Fish Department personnel regarding sharp-tailed grouse distribution and density. Plot location of sharp-tailed grouse observed during recent years. Interview ranchers, sheepherders, sportsmen, and other individuals for general information on sharp-tailed grouse distribution. Travel and inspect as much of the sharp-tailed grouse range in Colorado as possible in the time allowed. Assemble and record sharp-tailed blue grouse studies. Map sharp-tailed grouse information gathered during sage and grouse distribution and density on a statewide basis. �MAPPING SHARP-TAILED GROUSE RANGE Glenn E. Rogers There are two subspecies of sharp-tailed grouse in Colorado according to Ridgew~ and Friedmann (1946) and Aldrich and Duvall (19.5.5). The exact division line between the two subspecies is rather obscure, In general, sharp-tailed grouse (Pedioecetes phasi;anellu~ columbianus) are found in the mountains of Colorado, ana:.:t:.edioecetesphasianellus jamesi are residents of the eastern plains. The only stuay skins in the DenverJliluseum of Natural History are of ~. E.. jemesi from the eastern plain counties of Arapahoe, Douglas, Elbert, and Yuma. No effort has been madein this report to separate distribution by subspecies. DISTRIBUTION: A study was initiated in 1941 under Pittman-Robertson Act funds to determine sharp-tailed grouse distribution and environmental relationships. Several flocks of sharptails were located in Routt and Moffat counties during this study (Dargan, et al., 1942). All of the birds were on serviceberry-oak-type range between 0;550 and 8,000 feet elevation. Records were made of all sharp-tailed grouse observed during the sage-grouse study (1957-62) and the blue-grouse study (1960-63). Sharptails were frequently seen in association vdth both sage and blue grouse. On two occaSions (Mesa County), sharptails were performing -rdth sage grouse on strutting grounds. A sharptail on the Glade Park strutting ground appeared to imitate the strutting sounds of the sage grouse rather than the typical sharptail calls. Numeroustimes sharptails were observed feeding adjacent to blue grouse and on one occasion in Eagle County, one sharptail was flushed with 11 (male) blue grouse, flew, and landed with them•• Four sharp-tailed grouse were brought through the sage grouse checking station northwest of Craig in 1961 even though the season on sharptails was closed. Conservation officers in Dolores, Gunnison, Mesa, Moffat, Routt, and Teller counties frequently check sharptails along wi.th blue and sage grouse•• In 1962, Forest Service, Bureau of LandManagement,Fish and Wildlife Service, and Gameand Fish Department per-sonneL, Dr••Bailey and Mr. Niedrach of the DenverMuseumof Natural History, and various ranchers and individuals were interviewed regarding location of sharp-tailed grouse in Colorado.. Except for Dr. Bailey, Mr••Niedrach, and other experienced individuals, there was some question as to correct sharp-tailed grouse identification. Manyindividuals frankly admitted an inability to differentiate between grouse, others insisted sharp-tailed grouse were present above timberline.. On the eastern plains all grouse were referred to as "chickens" or prairie chickens. In the mountainous areas they were sometimes confused with pbarmigans, hen blue grouse, and young sage hens and variously referred to as Willow grouse, pintails, and sharptails. In one inst~ce, chukars were reported as sharptails, in another, one agency group reported occurrence of chukar-swhile the second agency reported sharptails for the same specific ar-ea, A Forest Service report on gamebird populations in Colorado forests (1940) did not include sharp-tailed grouse. �-190- The map (Fig. 1) shows the distribution of sharp-tailed grouse as reported except for three deletions that should not be sharptai1 ranee. Sharp tails should also be present in one area not shown. Mr. Niedrach counted, 20 years ago, dancing grounds in the northeast corner of the state (Loean, Sedgwick, or Yuma counties), and since 1950, an occasional sharp tail has been brought through the pheasant check station for this area. Sharp-tailed grouse are knovVllto be present in 16 of Colorado's 63 counties and lnay be present in 5 more counties. Routt County has the largest area of occupied range .vith eastern Moffat, Mesa, and Douglas counties respectively less. DENSITIES: One of the earliest records of sharp-tailed grouse distribution and densi~ was by Cooke, 1897. Cooke listed the sharp-tailed grouse as not com~on and went on to say: "Twenty years ago [i87il,it was plentiful up to 7,000 feet on both sides of the range. Even as late as 10 years ago it was not uncommon throughout Larimer Co. ••• • A few are still found across the whole of northern Colorado from Nebraska to Utah and south to at least Burlington and the "Df.vi.de" south of Denver. Formerly a few were found throughout the southern half of Colorado, but there are no late records of its occurrence south of the places named ••• •" In the 1941-42 studies (Dargan, et al., 1942), an estimated 110 sharpta11s were observed in Routt and Moffat counties. The largest flocks were seen during the month of February with an average of 15.4 birds a sighting. Bailey (letter, 7 May 1962) writes of counting 25 sharp tails on the Winkler dancing ground (Douglas County) in 1944, and at that time, he was told that this ground had been used, by approximately the same numbers, for 30 years. TriO counts showed 17 and 27 sharptai1s on this ground in 1962. The advanced biology class of the Moffat County High School, under the Leadershtp of Paul R. Dillon (1958 to 1960), interviewed ranchers, located and counted sharp-tailed grouse dancing grounds in eastern Moffat County. Their count on seven grounds in 1960 was 140 sharptails with data for 1958 and 1959 comparable for a lesser number of grounds (Dillon, ~ al., 1960). A number of sharp-tailed grouse dancing grounds were located by the author while searching for sage grouse strutting grounds. Two grounds were located on Pinon Mesa (Mesa County), the largest with 20 birds; four grounds in Routt County, 18 birds on Cottonwood Creek, 3 birds on Long Gulch, 8 birds south and 12 birds north of Elk Mountain. Several other dancing grounds have been reported; but due to the pressure of sage grouse and blue grouse work, these locations have not been verified. Routt County has the highest sharp-tailed grouse density, closely followed by the adjacent eastern Moffat County. Other localized areas in Dolores, Douglas" Elbert, and Mesa counties have fair to high population densities. However, until more intensive studies are conducted, a distribution and density report on this species must be considered tentative and subject to future modification. �MOFFAT ( 1 ROUTt( :.~ ! \ '"'" i/.l ; !~; ". ~ fA LARIMEP w E L 0 LOGAN n . ' '" •.. i ~~ JACKSON ':J )~ ~i I l I-OLYQK£ i i " - ~.//:: ~~TEAM:"f.T ..,-.-._ .,...-.-.~-j YU M A '~~~i'tING: } ~. I ; i i .. I """ RIO BLANCO WAS '-'~_._. __ H 11"l G TON ,.-._._.-._._._•..o GAR FIE L 0 I I-' \0 I-' I ~'-. . I i i i i i , i ._.-1-.--_.,_._._.-'..i ; iI i i lhg. �-192- Literature Cited Aldrich, John W. and Allen J. Duvall. 1955. Distribution of American gallinaceous game birds. Cir. 34, Fish and Wildl. Svc., Dept. of Int., Wash. D. C., 30 p. Bailey, Alfred M. May 7, 1962. Letter. Cooke, W. W. 1897. The birds of Colorado. Bull. No. 37 Tech. Sere No.2., state Agr. ColI., Smith-Brooks Printing Co., Denver. p. 143. The Dargan,Lucas M., Robert J. Kelley, Harold R. Shepherd, and Robert N. Randall. Sharp-tailed grouse studies, Craig area. Colorado Game and Fish Dept., mimeo. 10 p. Dillon, Paul R., Diane Osborn, Pam Pleasant, and Harold Kiever. grouse in Moffat County, Colorado. Mimeo. 17 p. 1960. Sharp-tail Ridgeway, R. and H. Friedmann. 1946. The birds of North and Middle America. Bull. 50, U. S. Govern. Printing Office., Wash., D. C., pp. 463. Prepared by: Glenn E. Rogers Senior Game Biolog~ Date: October, 1963 Approved by: Wayne W. Sandfort Chief, Game Research Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �October, 1963 -193- JOB COMPLNrION REPORI' RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of -.;;C.:.O;::;LO.:..;RAOO=~ _ Project No. W-37-R-16 Work Plan No. 14 Game Bird Survey Job No. Title of Job: Ecology of the Greater Prairie Chicken Period Covered: June 11, 1962 to September 30, 1962 2 Abstract: Three sections of rangeland in the sandhill region of Colorado were chosen for an intensive habitat analysis study. The sections were selected as to represent the main prairie chicken population center. Eight vegetation transects were run on each section to determine density, composition, and height growth. The average density of all grasses was 35.33 per cent. The average density for blue grama (Bouteloua gracilis) was 13.58 per cent. Weather data were collected for the area and each section was mapped to show topography and man-made objects. Recommendations: Additional areas should be selected in areas which appear to be similar to the three sections studied, but which lack a prairie chicken population. These areas should be compared to the populated areas in an effort to determine the limiting factors. More research should be conducted to determine seasonal movements, food habits, production rate, and decimating factors of the greater prairie chicken in Colorado. Objectives: (1) (2) (3) To relate distribution of the greater prairie chicken to climate, physiographic and biotic factors of the environment including land use. To devise a rating system for evaluating potential greater prairie chicken habitat. To make recommendations for increasing this species in Colorado. �-194- Techniques ~: Vegetation Analysis:--Data to devise an evaluation system for potential greater prairie chicken habitat will consist primarily of an intensive range analysis on nine sections of rangeland. Three sections have been chosen on the basis of size of display grounds as surveyed by Warren Snyder in the spring of 1962. The legal descriptions of the three sections are as follows: Section 13, Township 3 North, Range 43 West of the 6th P.M.; Section 18, Township 3 North, Range 43 West of the 6th P.M.; and Section 18, Township 3 North, Range 45 West of the 6th P.M. These three sections are located about ten miles north of Wray, Yuma County, Colorado, in sandhill-type rangeland. Density and composition were obtained by the step-point method. This method involves choosing a pace interval and recording either grass, forb, browse, bare ground, or litter, whichever lies directly in front of the point of the toe. The plants will also be recorded by species. I have chosen to take a reading on every ninth pace, which gives me 100 readings in a mile-long transect. I ran eight one-mile transects per square mile. Four of these transects ran north and south and four ran east and west. Height growth was measured in late August, after the plants had achieved their seasonal growth. Comparable. data will be obtained for six other sections which will be chosen from areas in which the greater prairie chicken has recently died out and/or where there is a much reduced population. Mapping:--The nine sections of rangeland mentioned above were also mapped. One map was drafted for each section, showing section boundaries, man-constructed objects (roads, fences, houses, and windmills), vegetation types (fields, sagebrush type, grassland type, and windbreaks or other trees), and topography. C1imate:--Climatic summaries published by the U.S. Weather Bureau were obtained for the Wray, Colorado, station. Wray is the closest town adjacent to the major part of the prairie chicken range in Colorado. The elevation at Wray is 3,5l2 feet. �-195- 1.--VE~ETA'!'I()N ANAf.rSI£. Ti.blc Plant Grass Forbs Species Bare Ground Litter Agropyrotr 5Mithii Andropogon hallii Aridropogon scoparius Artistida longiseta Boutcloua gracilis Bouteloua hirRuta Bromus t.e ct.o r-um Calaffiovilfa longifo1ia Distichlis stricta Eragrostis trichodes Festuca octof1ora Muhleubergia sp. Panicum v i.r-g at.um Paspalum stramineum Sporobo1us cryptandrus Stipa comat a Carex sp. .'\mar'anthus retroflexus Artemisia gnapholoides Chenopodium album Cryptantha sp. Er:igel'on sp. Euphorbia missurica Evolvolus nuttalianus Haplopappus spinulosus HelJanthus pe c i o Lar-Ls Liatris punctata Lygodesmia juncea Penstemoll ambiguus Physalis 6uhglabrata Plantago pu r s h ii P90raJea lanceolata Scdsola kali Artemisia filifoli,a Opuntia Yucca po1ycantha glauca Petalostemun Unknown 3 N T 3 N It 43 11 T l N R 45 w 31.75 5.75 7.375 47.125 37.75 13 V 36.S 3.375 Browse v.illosus _ Sec. 18 T R & Grasslike ~! S'l·\mL.M!;.~:.;;AS~ Sec. 13 5.75 46.75 7.625 8.0 Sac. 18 3.875 2.5 41.75 14.125 0.0 0.0 2.875 1.875 0.125 0.625 0.75 2.0 0.0 0.375 0.75 0.5 15.75 10.00 1.5.0 0.0 0.625 1.375 0.0 0.0 3.25 4.375 C.l7.S 2. 75 0.5 0.125 0.0 2.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 6.625 0.0 1.75 0.0 0.0 1.12.5 0.0 1.5 0.25 4.375 5,5 1.0 1.5 3.375 1.0 0.75 0.0 0.125 0.125 0.0 6.625 1.625 0.25 0.0 0.125 0.125 0.0 0.25 '0.5 0.0 0.125 0.125 0.875 1.25 0.0 0.0 0.125 0.125 0.375 0.375 0.0 0.125 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.375 0.25 0.0 0.0 1. 75 0.0 0.125 0.125 0.12S 0.125 0.625 0.25 0.0 5·0 0.375 0.125 0,,1S 1. 7 S 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 S·lS 0.75 0.125 0.0 0.25 0.25 0.125 0.375 2.125 1. 375 0.25 0.12.1 0.J'h5 0.0 1. ~~) 2.8'15 �COLORADO MOF'AT wet» ROVTT L.OGAN SU)GW/cK RIO BL.ANCO EAGLE GAIIF/E~ OO{JGL.AS PARK EL.BERT LINCOLN ItUSA I I I I-' \0 0'\ I I ~ I \(b \~~~:i·· !'UEBLO SAGUACHE I SAN MIGUEL I I!'ROWERS 18ENT /JOLOR£S ·c ~/O MONTEZUMA bZJ SANDHILL-TYPE SOIL GNAND£ , ,---- I LAS ANIMAS I SAGA �\ ,. I I~ ,i ... - =--=-=--::-:. ~~~-----:.: -:.~~:..~:.;~. ._.. ':"_--~~~2..~:"_~~' ::.".~ ~:..~ I, -c ; ,I -:v'..-: ..::-----. _. __ .'-"- --0---/ - :-:"..: --'~-:-= -:..'=---.:-::..-:-::"--.-:.:::.-: -'197- .-" =:.::..".= :-,':': :.•• ---:.-,',-: ',:.---,.,-:= " "" " 'I '. " :1,. o "". :' " " 'It) ",-, "I, " " ",. " " "".' I', ."~ I, \ I:! <. \, I" I' ", " : s: = = " r r~-'r--". r- 'I"": : =- z = = =-.-.= = ==---== = I ) )."/ (-- • " \~ I / /l30 ~-o -;ELL ~ j-------_ ..._NORTH 1 G!1.TE SECTION 13· TOWNSHIP 3 NORTHRANGE 43 WEST; 6 PRINCIPLE ~1~RIDIAN. .....--.... FENCE o EXCLOSUUE YUHA COUrTY COLORADO cow 'l'ftAIL n,.~" UNGRADED ROAD DRA\VN BY: KEITH --SEC'l'ION Lnm - , - " . QUARTER SECTIOfJ LINE ~Q fT. CONTOUR E. LINE EVANS �" "" ~~"\\, ~ "" " ,. " -Htr- GA'l'E W)Il'l'H --- FENCE 1 ~ Wnmr'>!ILL SECTION 18- TO~~SHIP J NORTHR!NGE 43 WEST; 6 PRINCIPLE UUGRADED ROAD SECTION J.•TIm QTiJ.RT};n.SECTION LINE YlJN.C~ COmlfTY COIJJP.J:.HO 14ERIDIAN. \ �" II II I, 1/ II /1 // /1 1/ " II , I, II \I I' ,I \I II 1\ \I I' ----'- II __.;ru._ " II ,: \1 i1 -----, I' -. ! FEN C E tt,~~ie.3i..~~~~m."~~~J<~ o .-4 C>-<> CATTLE rS'Y4 II<>yJ .,<f0rd 1 I --t--_. -~ NOHTH t;t5~1J 1 GUARD SECTION 18; TO\'fNSHIP 3 NORTH; RANGE 1;.5 'WEST; 6 PRH1CIFLE MEHIDTAN UNGRADED ROAD SEC'fT0N LINE ·~u~:t"Eft SECTION ::I.~()f.,j I ~I '\.~'-; -41 ••..--_____ t '[u}:t~ CO UN 1'1' LIHE COLOIU~nO �-200- Table 2.--WEATIIE;RDATA FOR WRAYz COLORADO Morrt.h of Low Month of High Total Hean Range of Year T2~e:rattire Precipitation Precipit,fltionTemperature Pr.eciEitati~n ••••••. ::::-=~ = 1927 1928 1929 1930 1931 1932 1933 1934 1935 1936 1937 1938 1939 1940 1941 1942 1943 1944 1945 1946 1947 1948 1951 1952 1953 1954 1955 1956 1957 1958 1959 1960 TOTAL AVERAGE 50.0 16.92 21.15 18.43 18.28 7.92 21. 51 17.38 11.63 13.14 18.83 12.17 19.31 13.51 14.66 30.36 26.31 11.17 18.51 18.51 20.80 21.48 19.17 22.36 14.21 13.63 11.01 10.95 13.84 22.27 23.89 15.75 18.73 1423.7 50.8 51.6 51.7 48.8 49.0 51.8 50.6 52.7 53..8 49.7 49.7 48.8 50.6 50.9 51.3 51.6 50.3 52.0 50.0 49.8 51.9 51.4 50.7 51.5 53.1 50.6 ----49.8 50.0 Oct. Dec. Dec. Dec. Jan. Nov. Oct. Jan. Jan. Nov. Nov. Nov. Nov. Feb. Nov. Dec. Jan. Sept. Dec. Feb. Feb. Feb. March Oct. Jan., Mar-ch April Oct. Sept. Feb. Jan. Nov. , Dec. Nov. June June April May June July Aug. June Hay May June May July Sept. July Sept. July April April Hay April May Hay April April Aug. May Aug. May May July June -20 -20 -20 105 103 102 ----------8 -24 -7 -16 -22 -30 -23 -11 -17 -22 -11 -26 -25 -8 -12 -12 -4 -23 107 105 105 108 104 110 107 106 110 110 98 103 104 100 100 102 104 102 ----------- •..• 24 108 106 112 104 104 100 103 102 105 557.74 438 3139 17.43 -16 105 -14 -1 -10 -12 -10 -e �-201- Findings: Vegetation Analysis:--A summary of the data collected on the vegetation transects on the three sections studied is located in the following table. The largest percentage of the density was composed of grasses with an average of 35.33 per cent. Blue grama was the major plant of the composition, having an average of 13.58 per cent. Climate: -- The data collected on the mean temperature, temperature range, total precipitation, and the month of the lowest and highest monthly precipitation are shown in the preceding table. The highest total precipitation on record for Wray, Colorado, was in 1941, when 30.36 inches were recorded. The lowest temperature ever recorned was -300 F. in 1936, and the highest temperature ever: recorded was 112° F. in 1954. Prepared by Keith E. Evans Graduate Assistant Date October, 1963 Approved by Wayne W. Sandfort Chief, Game Research Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �-203- October, 1963 JOB COMP'.LE.TION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of ...:C:..:O..::LO;,:;RADO:.::..=:.:=.. _ Project No. W-37-R-16 Work Plan No. 14 Title of Job: Period Covered: Personnel: Game Bird Survey Job No. 1 Inventory of Greater Prairie Chickens April 3, 1962 to September 15, 1962 Warren D. Snyder and Keith E. Evans Abstract: A total of 21 booming grounds were located, mapped, and censued in Yuma County, north of Wray, Colorado. There were 127 prairie chickens on these 21 display grounds, for an average of 6.05 per ground. Seventy landowners and other persons spending time in prairie chacken habitat were interviewed to locate flocks of chickens that were not located during the booming ground census. Flocks were reported in Sedgwick, Logan, Washington, Yuma, Phillips, and Kit Carson Counties. Recommendations: The known booming grounds should be censused each year in the spring. An effort should be made to locate new booming grounds and also grounds in other areas of known populations. MOre research should be done on census methods for the greater prairie chicken. Objectives: (1) To determine past distribution of the greater prairie chicken in Colorado. (2) To locate, map, and describe display grounds of current greater prairie chicken populations. (3) To determine annual changes in populations of greater prairie chickens. (4) To record data on locations of display grounds and census within permsnent record books. (5) To turn over routine surveys to the Game Management Division at a future date. �-204- Techniques ~: Review 2! Literature.--All literature available was reviewed to determine past and present distribution, management practices used in other states, and life history of the greater prairie chicken. This included published articles and books located in the Colorado state University Library. Also included are the records and unpublished files of the Colorado State Game and Fish Department, U.S. Forest Service, U.S. Soil Conservation Service, U.S. Bureau of Sport Fisheries and Wildlife, U.S. Geological Survey, Colorado State Planning COmmission, and other land use agencies. Distribution was determined in part from records of the following museums: Colorado State University, University of Denver, Colorado College, Colorado State College, Denver Museum of Natural History, and museums of neighboring states. Interviews.--Systematic farmer-rancher interviews were conducted in northeastern Colorado; primarily in Sedgwick, Phillips, Yuma, Kit Carson, Logan, and Washington Counties. These interviews are designed to help determine past and present distribution, location of display grounds, approximate number of prairie chickens, and landowner ideas on why the prairie chicken population has decreased. Census.--Early morning surveys were conducted by automobile and on foot to 'locate spring display grounds of the greater prairie chicken. This method involves driving along known roads from one-half hour before sunrise until about two hours after sunrise, stopping about every mile to listen for the boom of the greater-prairie chicken. They can be heard as far away as two miles on a calm morning. The display grounds were then approached on foot to obtain a ,count of birds on the ground. The location of the grounds were marked on a county road map of the scale one-half inch equals one mile. These grounds were accurately mapped and described for future reference. The number of greater prairie chickens on each display ground was obtained, together with a sex ratio where possible. Observations.--All observations of importance were recorded. A special effort was made to obtain information on phenology, life history, and habits of the greater prairie chicken and other important species of wildlife occupying the same range. These observations were recorded according to date and location. Exact locations, after general observance, were determined from county road maps obtained for each of the above named counties and were logged according to section, township, and range. �-205~ORY OF GREATER PRAIRIE CHICKENS Warren D. Snyder Keith E. Evans Findings: Literature Review.--Greenway (1958)* states that the center of the population is between the Missouri and the Mississippi Rivers at about 0 Latitude 35 - 450 North. The northern limits of the greater prairie chicken distribution reaches south central Alberta, southern Saskatchewan and southern M9.nitoba, through Minnesota, Wisconsin, and Michigan. Formerly there were greater prairie chickens in eastern Ohio and Kentucky, but at the present the eastern and southern boundaries pass through southern Indiana, illinois, Missouri, northern Arkansas, and northern Texas. The western limits run about parallel with the Rocky Mountains from central Alberta through the eastern segments of Montana, Wyoming, Colorado, New Mexico, and northern Texas. The greater prairie chicken entered Colorado in about 1897. It gradually extended its range westward in eastern Colorado as the native sod gave way to farms and wheatfields. In 1907 and 1908, the greater pra~r~e chicken nested near Barr, Adams County, which is the most western record of this species in the United States (Cooke, 1909)**. The University of Colorado Museum contains three specimens. One has no location or date of collection; one was collected on September 15, 1924 near Kirk, Yuma County, Colorado; and the other one was collected in March, 1913. The location on this last collection was just Colorado. Spring Display Ground Census.--The number of prairie chickens on located grounds, and maps of each display ground are summarized in the following tables and maps. * Greenway, J.C. 1958. Extinct and vanishing birds of the World. Am. Comm. For Internat 'I Wildl. Protection. Spec. Bull. #13. 518 p. ** Cooke, W. W. 1909. The birds of Colorado. Auk. 26:400-422. �-206- Ta.ble ESTABLISHED GROUND LOCATIONS OF THE GREATl!:RPRAIRIE CHICKEN IN YUMA COUNTY, COLORADO * 1962 Ground* Number Looation Birds Observed Date 1. S~ Seo. 33, R42W, T~N. 4 males April 10, 1962 2. S~ Seo. 1, R42W, T3N. 6 males 2 UncI. April NW}4.Sec. 12, R43W, T~N. 20 Males 8 UncI. April 13, 1962 4. swy:. Sec 24, R43W; T3N. 4 Malee 1 UncI. April 13, 1962 5. SE¥4 Sec. 11, R43W, T4N. 2 Males April 26, 1962 6. ~ Sec. 17, R4~w, T3N. 3 Males April 23, 1962 7. S~A Sec. 18, R43W, T3N. 8 Males 2 UncI. April 20, 1962 8. S~A Sec. 13, R44w, T3N. 5 UncI. April 20, 1962 NW}~ Sec. 1, R44w, T3N. 6 Males 1 UncI. April 18, 1962 S~A Sec. 2, R44w, T3N. 3 males April 20, 1962 11, 1962 10. 11. N':;};:' Sec. 28, R44w, T 3N • 6 males 2 females April 12. S~ Sec. 32, R44w, T4N. 3 Males April 20, 1962 1~. ~ Sec. ~1, R44W, T3N. 4 ma.les April 19, 1962 14. Center Sec. 12, R45W, T2N. 3 males April 18, 1962 15. ~ Sec. 12, R45W, T2N. 3 Malee April 19, 1962 16. ~ Sec. 12, R45W, T3N. Maya, 1962 17. ~ Sec. 27, R45W, T4N. May 8, 1962 18. SW}{.Sec. 15, R45V1, 'l'3N. 4 Males 3 UncI. 5 UncI. luay 8, 1':)62 19. NE.y{. Sec. 19, R45W, T4N. 4 UncI. May 9, 1962 20. NE};.Sec. 19, Rl~5W, T3N. 7 Males April 19, 1962 2'+, 1962 :I UncI. 21. Total Avera~e H1'i}'4 See. 18, R45'l1, T3N. Nl~ber Per Ground * Ground locat:l.oH8 are numbe re d from 7 UncL 127 6.05 e as t be W(!flt. Ma.y 7, 1962 �-207- Table ~ Location UNCERTAIN GROUND LOCATIONS OF THE GREATER CHICKEN IN YUMA. COUNTY, COLORADO PRAIRIE 1962 Description Date Birds Observed NE}~ Sec. • 4, R42W, 'l\~N 5 Unclassified May 9, 1962 Swy4 Sec. 4, R42W, T2N. 2 males ~ Uncalseified May 10, 1962 SE}f.Sec. 26, R4~w, T~N. SE}1.Sec. 2i, R43W, T3N. NW}I. Sec. 35, R4}W, T41i. It I Unol. April 16, 1962 It 3 Malee 2 UncI. April + 11, 1962 May 10, 1962 N~ Sec. 12, R45W, T2N. SE1;4Sec. 30, R45W. T3N• SE}i'. Sec. 21, R46w. T} N " 2 males April •• •• 1 male April 24, 1962 1 or 2 Males April 24, 1902 Total hirds on uncertain grounds 20 ] Birds may have been same group II No 'established ground located + Aerial Observation 18, 1962 �19.7'6W I I e II 'I) i I 6 ! ! I /l I jI I 8 I 2 , I I I i I i /0 Y , ! I 8 Il I r '1# --- I N i 'J~ I P 28 I , I 16 I 3. i i , --- i I'; I i I f\ 2'1 r:. tl I I <f8 i I NI i:! i I .3'1 "0 i I i 8 12. I I I IY I 18 I ;:21'1. /I. "4 i i I /6 i. I l 1/.105 w: w: I Id II' I eo ZZ :0 I I ! I" Ground 6 ~ r.r'I • IC@' I ! 18 y i 1,/ BOOMING (Birds 28 CJ -. • 2 l' I J\) 10 o co 8 Iii. I 16 18 r.s « i i 010 20 .30 t!~ 28 .- I i 31 I I de () I 0 32 0&= I I I I I /6 I s: I I 61 i I /0 ! ,: 6 I i 3y 32 8 /8 .12 ' II' : i IZ ,fl'yvY. 0Uncertain Ground Observed) - 22 28 ;11 ;1) 0 . i I 0 -jI 2 16 I i i I .]0 I i .it) 24 ! 8 i 16 llJ r r lu i r:0 0 ~ ;'1 ~ 31' 32 I! 20 1'1 I IV 8 ! I I ! \ ! T. 'II( ! I 'I I,] I GREATER PRAIRIE CHICKEN Yuma County, Colorado Established I /1 I I I i8 013'1 10136 ..1i1. b I /6 i 28 ~I I i I N , I I i ~I .76 i z r 6 10 I i 32, I y ~ I i I d' - i ~ 8 i I jZZ cO I I 8 21' ! 3'1 ! IZ I '\...V .16 Jy i i .,vffi oj i 6 11 .y 12 I I If' I~ 18 21' I () I 2tJ <, 1/ i 26 I ! -, V ! I I() I r: -:{6V V i Z2 II! 28 .J~ I!V, G , I r». I I i I <:» /jI1 i l I Y S /-i I 22 ! 10 i ! ~'o I I i 6 I I I I I I ~ T.ill! I I I 31' I ! 32 , i I 22 ZO I I I 3-1 " I , 26 "0 8 I:/. I ;, i 22 i I /8 II' ; i I ! I J6 I 2'1 I I~ 10 I 2 Y I 1 ~' 22 , I 6 ! i i 18 I 2 I IY /?'Yt! W ; I i R+'.3W. t9.¥l'W 19.j1j'w, I IY! II. 'tJw. I 6 /2 I i i I 18 i• [ I --j----i i 16 -- - dl'uy' GROUND LOCATIONS April-May, 1962 o Potential Ground (Birds Heard Not Located) , 21Y. �-209- Farmer-Rancher Interviews. -- A total of 70 landowners and mail carriers were interviewed to determine location of prairie chicken flocks in Sedgwick, Phillips, Logan, Washington, Yuma, Lincoln, and Kit Carson Counties. The preceding two maps summarize the location of the interviews and the information obtained. Prepared by Warren D. Snyder Game Biologist Keith E. Evans Graduate Asst. Date October, 1963 Approved by Wayne W. Sandfort Chief, Game Research Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �- 211 - State of JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH SEGMENT PROJECT COLORADO ----------------------- Project No. W-37-R-16 Game Bird Survey Work Plan No. 1 ------------------ Title of Job: Summarization Period Covered: April Job No. 12 ----~~------------------------- and Publication 1, 1962 through March of Pheasant Research Findings 31, 1963. ABSTRACT Work on this job was very limited due to transfer of the Project Leader to a new position as Game Research Chief during this project segment. Minor work was accomplished on assembling data and organizing it in major categories, preparatory to final publication. These categories are outlined in the Quarterly Report of the Federal Aid Division, July, 1962, Part One, pp. 1- 3. Recommendations: Additional time is needed to complete this publication. Current plans call for co-authorship of this publication with the new project leader of pheasant investigations, Harold M. Swope. Sufficient time should be allowed in subsequent project segments to carry out this work. Objective: To publish available data on pheasant research in Colorado. Techniques Used: Findings obtained under Work Plan 1 (Jobs 1, 3, 5 and 10; see Segment 14, W-37-R), results of other pheasant research conducted by other projects or organizations, and miscellaneous information pertinent to pheasant management or research in Colorado have been considered for incorporation in this work. Principal categories involved include: natural history, distribution and density, factors affecting distribution and density, nesting and production, census techniques and procedures, and management practices. Findings: New responsibilities connected with the transfer of the Project Leader to the position of Game Research Chief resulted in little activity on this job during this segment. Minor work was accomplished on continued assembly of data by major categories described in the Quarterly Report of the Federal Aid Division, July, 1962, Part One, pp. 1-3. Since the final results of this job will be in the form of a major publication, partial data collected are not included here. Prepared Date: by: Approved Wayne W. Sandfort ------ Octobe~~63~ by: Laurence E. Riordan Assistant Director, Research _ Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator ��- 213 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH SEGMENT PROJECT State of COLORADO .--~~~~~----------- Project No. W-37-R-16 Work Plan No. Game Bird Survey 1 ----~--------- Title of Job: Period Covered: Job No. 13 ----~~---------------------- Programming Computer Machine and Hunter Check Data April 1, 1962 through March Analysis of Pheasant Census 31, 1963. ABSTRACT Responsibilities for general census of upland game birds and the specific schedule for the census of pheasants and determination of hunter success are shown. Codes used in designating species, administrative regions, area supervisor districts, pheasant management areas and the specific pheasant census units are described. The manner by which data are summarized preparatory to punching IBM cards,&nd the wide variety of data derived from computer machine analysis of these data are explained. Finally a brief description is given on how the population status and hunter success reports are prepared, and how data are related to climate, farming activities and cover conditions, which affects not only pheasant reproduction but hunter success. Recommendations: The schedule of operations for pheasant census, as described here creates unnecessary handling of data by personna1 at different administrative levels, resulting in delays in funneling information to the computer machine and in turn preparation of final reports. It is recommended that the mailing of forms and instructions for various census and hunter checks be handled by one individual or group for the entire State and that original field data be returned directly to this group. With such organization, information can be analyzed much more rapidly and made available for more effective use in pheasant management. NOTE: At this date, February, 1964, most of the responsibilities as recommended here have been placed under the Game Management Division, located at the Denver Office of the Department of Game, Fish and Parks. Objective: To arrange for rapid and efficient transfer of field data from operational pheasant surveys to periodic reports for use by management and research. Techniques Used: The current management program for pheasants in Colorado includes census and hunter checks, as well as other activities. The census techniques and procedures involving sex ratio, crowing, and brood counts were developed under Federal Aid Project W-37-R, in cooperation with management, field personnel. The establishment of permanent check points whereat pheasant hunters are contacted each fall, for the purpose �- 214 - of obtaining specific data on harvest, etc., was also an original function of the Game Bird Surveys project. Data were collected at these stations by Federal Aid personnel for many years. The purpose of this job was to arrange for efficient transfer of data, gathered under the various census programs and hunter check operations, to periodic reports, as explained under the objective above. The techniques involved five major operations as follows: 1. Establishment of schedules or deadline dates for assembling various types of data on sex ratios, crow counts, brood counts and hunter checks. 2. Designating 3. Determining methods for entering all types of data on IBM cards in preparation for computer machine analysis. This· to be carried out for each major type of survey shown under "1" above, and for each . year since establishment of the surveys. 4. Initiating 5. Assisting in developing procedures for transfer analysis sheets to management reports. the individuals IBM card punching or offices to receive data. and machine analysis. of data from machine Findings: Work accomplished under this job included preparation of a summary of general .responsibilities for upland game bird census for various groups in the Department of Game, Fish and Parks, preparing a schedule of operation for pheasant census, developing general and specific codes to unify coding of various types of upland bird census data, and assisting with the actual IBM card punching and machine analysis and development of the initial reports from machine analysis sheets. Details of these activities are given below. Responsibilities Upland Bird Census Procedures The following general responsibilities were developed in 1962 and 1963, after consultation with appropriate research and management personnel. Conduct research to devise suitable census procedures for use in determining reproductive success and annual changes in game bird populations. Emphasis placed on simplicity, accuracy and continuity. Assistance given in initial application of proven techniques. Periodic evaluation of methods may be required. Biologists. W.C.c. 'so -- Conduct census according to prescribed procedures, with emphasis on accuracy and completeness. Send information dire~tly to Area Supervisors. Area Supervisors. -- Direct supervision of work to insure accuracy and completeness. Responsible for initial summary of field data on "a" forms and for sending these forms to Game �- 215 Management Division in Denver. Also responsible, for forwarding all original field forms to Regional Game Biologists for permanent filing. Regional Game Biologists. -- Send out field forms at appropriate times directly to W.C.O. 'so Maintain permanent files of original and final data. Periodically inspect census operations and interpret data to evaluate accuracy and completeness. Assist in interpretation of population changes through correlation of data on weather, agricultural activities, etc., with actual population changes. Prepare new maps and plates of census zones, routes, stations, or grounds when population changes require such modifications. Game Management Division. -- Supervise general analysis of data and prepare appropriate reports for statewide distribution. Responsible for final season recommendations for presentation to Game and Fish Commission -- these based on field data and interpretations by Department personnel at all levels. Pheasant Census Schedule of Operation November and December. -- Hunting season held. December 1. -- Regional Game Biologists send out sex ratio count forms P-l to W.C.O.'s. Ten forms for each management area to each W.C.O. December IS-March 1. -- W.C.O.'s conduct sex ratio counts according to prescribed procedures. W.C.O.'s keep notes on dates and severity of prolonged blizzard conditions which may adversely affect pheasants. Information is sent to Area Supervisors with copies to Regional Game Biologists. March 2l-April 30. -- Spring harem counts should be made by W.C.O. 's using form P-l (only in the event good data were not obtained during the winter months). April 10. -- Regional Game Biologists send out crow-count forms P-2, with accompanying maps of stations. Eight forms for each management area to each W.C.O. April 20-June 10. -- W.C.O.'s conduct counts during the periods of ,April 20-30, May 1-15, May 16-31, and June 1-10. June 10. -- Deadline date for W.C.O.'s to record all sex ratio data in their record books on' forms P-la and P-lb and all crow-count data on forms P-2a and P-2b, and to send all original sex ratio count forms (P-l) and crow-count forms (P-2) to Area Supervisors. These forms may be sent periodically during the course of census work. �- 216 June 15. -- Deadline date for Area Supervisors to record all sex ratio data in their census books on forms P-la, P-lb, P-lc and ~11 crowcount data on forms P-2a, P-2b and P-2c and to send duplicate copies of forms P-la and P-2a to the Game Management Division . , Denver Office. Work is initiated by Game Management on coding data on IBM cards and analyzing data through computing center facilities. Area Supervisors send all original sex ratio and crow-count data (P-1 and P-2 forms) to Regional Game Biologists for permanent filing. Month of June. -- Regional Game Biologists record peak alfalfa mowing dates and notes are made on the correlation between this farming activity and the peak of pheasant hatching. General precipitation data are recorded. July 1. -- Deadline date for statewide report on the spring breeding population status, using sex ratio and crow-count data. To be compiled by the Game Management Division from computer machine analysis and distributed to all personnel concerned. All P-la and P-2a forms are returned to appropriate Regional Game Biologists by the Game Management Division for permanent filing. Upon receipt of statewide reports, all record books are brought up to date by individuals concerned completing forms "b" and "c" as required. Month of July. -- Precipitation data are recorded by Regional Game Biologists. Notes are kept on possible damaging hail storms. July 20. -- Regional Game Biologists send out brood counts forms P-3 to W.C.O. 'so Eight forms for each management area to each W.C.,O. August l-August 20. -- W.C.C.'s conduct at least one morning count on established routes during the periods August 1-7, 8-15, and 16-20. August 21. -- Deadline date for W.C.O.'s to complete recording of brood count.data on forms P-3a and P-3b in their handbooks and to send original copies of all brood count forms (P-3) to Area Supervisors. August 23; -- Deadline date for Area Supervisors to record all brood count data in their census handbooks on forms P-3a, P-3b, and P-3c and to send duplicate copies of forms P-3a to the Game Management Division, Denver Office. Work is initiated immediately by Game Management on coding data on IBM cards and analyzing data through computing center facilities. Area Supervisors send all original brood count data (forms P-3) to Regional Game Biologists for permanent filing. August 28. -- Deadline date for statewide report on the fall pheasant population status to be in the hands of all personnel concerned. To be compiled and mailed by the Game Management Division. Data are used for immediate formulation of hunting season recommendations to be presented to the Commission by the first Friday in September -- these based on interpretations of field data by Department personnel at all levels. Upon receipt of this fall �- 211 population status report, all record books are brought up to date by individuals concerned, completing "b" and "c" forms as'required. All P-3a forms are returned to Regional Game Biologists by the Game Management Division for permanent files. Third day of pheasant season. -- Regional Game Biologists and/or Area Supervisors forward summaries of pheasant check station data, from established and permanent check points" to the Game Management Division, Denver Office. November 15. -- Deadline date for mailing of a statewide report on pheasant check station data, showing comparative data for the first two days of the season. To be compiled by the Game Management Division from computer machine analysis and distributed to all personnel concerned. Original check station forms are placed in permanent files by Regional Game Biologists. Codes Upland Game Bird Census (For use with IBM analysis) In order to maintain uniformity in punching and storing IBM cards, as related to all present and proposed game bird census procedures, standard codes were developed for: (1) species of upland game birds, (2) administrative regions in Colorado for the Department of Game, Fish and Parks, (3) Area Supervisor districts or areas, (4) pheasant management units or areas, and (5) the census units (established for pheasants). In the development of IBM analysis of census data for other species, specific code sheets would be developed for management areas, grounds, routes, etc. The species, region and Area Supervisor codes, however, would remain constant. All codes used in the analysis of pheasant census data are included here: Upland Game Bird Species 1. Band-tailed pigeon 2. Blue grouse 3. Bobwhite 4. Chukar 5. Gambel's quail 6'- Mourning dove 7 • Prairie chicken (greater) Prairie chicken (lesser) Ring-necked pheasant 10. Sage grouse 11. Scaled quail 12. Sharp-tailed grouse 13. White-tailed ptarmigan 14. Wild turkey 8. 9. Administrative Region 1. Northeast Region 2. Southeast Region 3. Southwest Region 4. Northwest Region �- 218 Area Supervisor Districtsll l. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. North-central South Platte Denver Upper Arkansas South-central Lciwer Arkansas San Luis Valley 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. Gunnison San Juan Basin Uncompahgre Colorado River Valley White River Valley Yampa Valley Middle Park 11 Blank numbers to provide for future expansion or change. Pheasant Management Areas 1. 2. 3. Northeast tablelands (dry-farmed Northeast irrigated East-central 4. North-central 5. Arkansas Valley 6. Southeast (Baca County) 7. San Luis Valley 8. Southwest 9. West-central Pheasant Census Units (Alphabetical), Statewide Supervisor Management Census Unit Region Area Area 1 Amhurst-Paoli 1 2 1 2 Balzac-Snyder-Narrows 1 2 4 3 Bayfield-Allison 3 11 8 4 Bedrock-Paradox 3 12 9 5 Bonny Management Area 2 7 3 6 Brighton-Firestone 1 1 4 2 7 Burlington Area (north) 7 3 8 Cheraw-Rocky Ford-Hawley 2 7 5 9 Cortez-Lewis 11 3 8 10 Delta-Cedaredge 12 3 9 11 Delta-Olathe-Montrose 12 3 9 1. 12 Derby-Aurora-Littleton 3 4 13 Eckley-Yuma 1 2 1 14' Erie-Lafayette 1 3 4 15 Evans-Gilcrest-Milliken 1 2 4 16 Fleming-Leroy 1 2 1 2 17 Fort Lyon-Las Animas-Keller 7 5 18 Grand Junction-Fruita-Mack 4 14 9 1 2 19 Greeley-Eaton-Severance 4 20 Holyoke-Fleming 1 2 1 1 2 1 21 Julesburg-Amhurst 2 22 Julesburg-Crook 1 2 1 2 4 23 Keenesburg-Prospect V.-Hudson 2 6 7 24 Konant Z-Stoni nguon-Hfdway Condensed Code 1-1-2-1 2-1-2-4 3-3-11-8 4-3-12-9 5-2-7-3 6-1-1-4 7-2-7-3 8-2-7-5 9-3-11-8 10-3-12-9 11-3-12-9 12-1- 3-4 13-1-2-1 14-1- 3-4 15-1-2-4 16-1-2-1 17-2-7-5 18-4-14-9 19-1-2-4 20-1-2-1 21-1-2-1 22-1-2-2 23-1-2-4 24-2-7-6 �- 219 - Census Unit Region 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 1 3 2 1 1 3 3 1 4 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 Lafayette-Longmont-Va1mont LaGarita-Center-Monte Vista Lamar-Bristo1-Ho11y Lone Star-Akron Mead-Berthoud-Love1and Monte Vista-Morgan-Bountifu1 Nucla Proctor-Sterling Rifle-Silt Seibert-Flagler St. Charles M.-Avonda1e-Vine1 Wages-C1arkvi11e-Haxtun Waterton-Morrison Wind.sor-Timnath-We1lington Woodrow-Brush-Fort Morgan Wray-Vernon Supervisor Management Condensed Area Area Code 1 9 7 2 1 9 12 2 14 7 6 2 3 1 2 2 4 7 5 1 4 7 9 2 9 3 5 1 4 4 4 3 25-1-1-4 26-3-9-7 27-2-7-5 28-1-2-1 29-1-1-4 . 30-3-9-7 31-3-12-9 32-1-2-2 33-4-14-9 34-2-7-3 35-7.-6-5 36-1-2-1 37-1-3-4 38-1-1-4 39-1-2-4 40-1-2-3 Recordin~Census and Hunter Check Data (Preliminary to IBM Analysis) Two main types of reports are prepared from pheasant census data: (1) The "Pheasant Breeding Population Status" report due on July 1, as shown in the "Schedule of Operation" for pheasant census and (2) the "Fall Pheasant Population Status" report due August 28. Prior to punching IBM cards, sex ratio and crowing count data are summarized and recorded on the form "Pheasant Sex Ratio and Crowing-count Data", shown below. Data from brood counts are recorded on the form "Pheasant Brood Count Data." The data from sex ratio, crowing and brood counts are taken from the appropriate record forms during actual IBM card punching. The "Pheasant Hunter Success" report is prepared from data gathered at 10 permanent check points in the state. To date these data have not been placed on IBM cards. IBM Analysis During actuai machine computation the analysis is programmed to compute the following: Sex ratios. -- Total birds, average hens per cock, birds per mile, and birds per minute are computed for regions, supervisor areas, pheasant management areas and individual census units. Crowing counts. -- Average calls per two-minute period are calculated and the spring breeding population index is determined. Calculations are again made for regions, supervisor areas, pheasant management areas and individual census units. Breeding population status. -- Breeding population trend data are calculated for each of the nine major pheasant management areas in the State. Sex ratio data, including hens per cock from winter and spring counts, birds per mile �- 220 - PHEASANT SEX RATIO AND CROWING-COUNT DATA SPECIES CODE G enera 1 ----- YEAR . D ata P erta i n1n to Sex Ratl.os Total Time of UnMin. Cocks Hens class Count2/ ------- Data Pertaining to Crowing Counts Cond en sed}j Total No. of Total. Number of Counts Code Miles Stations Calls A Route3/ B Route 1-1- 2-1 2-1- 2-4 3-3-11-8 4-3-12-9 5-2- 7-3 6-1- 1-4 7-2- 7-3 8-2- 7-5 9-3-11-8 10-3-12-9 11-3-12-9''( 12-1- 3-4 13-1- 2-1 14-1- 3-4 15-1- 2-4 16-1- 2-1 17-2- 7-5 18-4-14-9* 19-1- 2-4 20-1- 2-1 21-1- 2-1 22-1- 2-2 23-1- 2-4 24-2- 7-6 25-1- 1-4 26-3- 9-7o{( 27-2- 7-5 28-1- 2-1 29-1- 1-4 30-3- 9-7* 31-3-12-9 32-1- 2-2 33-4-14-9 34-2- 7-3 35-2- 6-5 39-1- 2-1 37-1- 3-4 38-1- 1-4* 39-1- 2':'3 40-1- 2-3 17 Se q uence of condensed code census unit '" region supervisor area management are as 2/ Code numbers designate the following -- (1) winter counts, (2) sprl.ng counts. 3/ Single crow-count routes in a census unit will be designated as "A" routes for the purpose of this recording. Minimum requirements call for 4 good counts on all route "A" or "B". * Census unit contains both "A" and "B" route. -- �- 22l - PHEASANT BROOD COUNT DATA SPECIES CODE ------ YEAR ------ General Data Pertaining to Brood Counts 2/ Condensed }j Total Total Total Total UnNumber of Counts Code Miles Min. Cocks Hens Young class Broods Brood1ess Hens A.M. P.M. 1-1- 2-1 2-1- 2-4 3-3-11-8 4-3-12-9 5-2- 7-3 6-1- 1-4 7-2- 7-3 8-2- 7-5 9-3-11-8 10-3-12-9 11-3-12-9 12-1- 3-4 13-1- 2-1 14-1- 3-4 15-1- 2-4 16-1- 2-1 17-2- 7-5 18-4-14-9 19-1- 2-4 20-1- 2-1 21-1- 2-1 22-1- 2-2 23-1- 2-4 24-2- 7-6 25-1- 1-4 26-3- 9-7 27-2- 7-5 28-1- 2-1 29-1- 1-4 30-3- 9-7 31-3-12-9 32-1- 2-2 33-4-14-9 34-2- 7-3 35-2- 6-5 36-1- 2-1 37-1- 3-4 38-1- 1-4 39-1- 2-4 40-1- 2-3 1/ Sequence of condensed code -- census unit, region, supervisor area, management area. 2/ Minimum requirements call for 3 morning counts on each route. �- 222 for winter and spring, and birds per minute for winter and spring; crowing count data, including the average calls per stop; and breeding population indices using winter and spring sex ratios are shown for the current year, past year and the five-year average. The percent change of current year's data from the past year and the five-year average is also shown. Brood counts. -- The index to the total hens (total number of hens without broods, plus total broods)~ total pheasants, average young per hen, average young per brood, percent hens with broods, birds per mile, birds per minute, broods per mile and the fall population index (combining sex ratio, crowing count and brood count data) are calculated. Data are derived for regions, supervisor areas, pheasant management areas and individual census units, as for sex ratio and crowing count data. Fall population status. -- Fall population trend data are calculated for each of the nine major pheasant management areas in the State. Brood count data, including average number of young per hen, average number of young per brood, percent of hens with broods, birds per mile, birds per minute, and broods per mile; and the fall population index using winter and spring sex ratio data, crowing count and brood count data are shown for the current year, past year and the five-year average. As in the breeding population indices, the percent change of current year's data from the past year and the five-year average is shown. As in the breeding population indices, the percent change of current year's data from the past year and the five-year average is shown. Hunter checks. -- As explained under the section on "Recording Census and Hunter Check Data" calculations have not been made by computer machine to date. Types of data for each check station include birds per hunter and birds per hour for the current year, past year and five-year average and the trend comparison, in percent, of the current year's data with the past year and the five-year average. Data are derived only from checks during the first two days of the season. Preparation of Reports All calculations described above under IBM analysis are accomplished in a matter of minutes and presented in printed form on the standard computer machine sheets. Data are taken directly from these sheets and placed in tables with appropriate headings. Results are readily apparent for each census unit, region, management area or the entire State. The report on the breeding population status shows the trend in the number of breeding birds and gives an indication as to what may be expected in the way of fall populations, pending favorable hatching conditions. The late August report indicates actual reproductive success and gives a much better picture of the pheasant population status and what the hunter may expect during the fall season. This latter report is of primary significance in the establishment of appropriate hunting seasons, based on the rise or fall of bird populations. During the preparation of both the "breeding population status" and "fall population status" reports, data are analyzed in relationship to such �- 223 - factors as weather, over-wintering success, and correlation of peak hatching dates with peak alfalfa mowing dates to point out not only the change in pheasant populations, but the factors which have probably affected these changes. Upon receipt of hunter check data the report is compiled by hand, snowing data and trend comparisons for each check station and for all stations combined. The harvest figures are related to both the spring and fall population status reports, as well as to weather, cover and general hunting conditions during the open season. Prepared by: Wayne W. Sandfort Date: Approved by: Laurence E. Riordan Assistant Director, Research O_·c_t_o_b_e_r~, __1~96~3~ _ Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �- 225 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH SEGMENT PROJECT COLORADO --~~~~~----------- State of Game Bird Survey Pro jec t No .__ W:.:...-.....:3~7_-..:.;R:--~1.;;...6 _ Work Plan No. Title of Job: Period Covered: Personnel: Job No. 5 --~------------Location April 1 --~~------------------ and Census 19, 1962 through October 31, 1962 Dick Bartmann, Warren Snyder, Dean Manning, Don Hoffman, Charles Stone, Chad Crosby, Keith Evans, Dwight Owens, Glenn Rogers, and Wayne Sandfort ABSTRACT This Federal Aid research project was established in April, 1962, to study flocking and migration patterns of mourning doves in Colorado during the late summer and early fall months. Objectives were: (1) To determine peaks of late summer flocking and migration by latitude zones, (2) To correlate flocking and migration with climatic conditions, and (3) To correlate flocking and migration phenomena with normal hunting season dates. The state was divided into three latitude zones (over-all latitude extending from 370 to 410) and into two longitudinal zones -- one east and one west of the Continental Divide. One route, approximately 30 miles in length, was selected in the farmland-river bottom-wasteland complex, for use in roadside census of doves within each of the six areas formed by the described method of division. One evening and one morning roadside count was conducted on each of the six routes during an 11-week period extending from July 30 to October 11. Preliminary analysis, based on a summary of counts on all routes, show that the peak of flocking occurred during the period August 13-16 when 3.72 birds per mile were observed. By August 27-30, immediately preceding the season, a drop in population of 41.94 percent was indicated. Several days after opening of the season, September 3-6, two-thirds of the population had moved from the State with 33.33 percent remaining. Practically all birds had left the State by October 11, with 0 birds observed on most routes during the final counts. Movement appears to be closely correlated with freezing temperatures. Dove populations in Colorado held up best in the most southern latitude zone and at the lowest elevation. Recommendations: Data devised from this investigation provided a clear picture of mourning dove flocking and migration, as correlated with the opening day of the dove season (September 1) in 1963. It is recommended that this study be carried out during one or more late summer and early fall periods to determine dove movements under different weather conditions. It is also recommended that a comparison study be initiated to �- 226 correlate flocking and migration phenomena with the periods of reproduction. Emphasis in such a study should be directed toward the percentage of the total production that occurs after August 15, particularly that occurring in early September. Objectives: (1) To determine peaks of late summer flocking and migration by latitude zones. (2) To correlate flocking and migration with climatic conditions. (3) To correlate flocking and migration phenomena with normal hunting season dates. Techniques Used: The State of Colorado was divided into three equal latitude zones (over-all latitude extending from 370 south to 410 north) and into two longitudinal zones -- one east and one west of theContinenta1 Divide. Within each of the six zones thus formed, one census route approximately 30 miles long, in the farm1and-fencerow-river bottom-wasteland complex was selected. Maps were prepared of the six census routes. Forms were prepared for recording data and plans were made to conduct one evening and one morning count on each route, once each week for an e1evenweek period. Evening counts immediately preceded mourning counts. Evening counts were started 90 minutes preceding sunset and morning counts initiated 15 minutes before sunrise, varying with official sunrise and sunset times for dates involved. The speed traveled on routes did not exceed 20 miles per hour. Initiation dates for evening counts were July 30, July 31 and August 1 for the north, middle and south routes, respectively. By having one day's delay in starting times for the middle and south routes, it was possible for one individual to conduct all counts for either the west or the east slope areas, thus making more efficient use of available personnel. During actual counts pertinent data were recorded at the heading of census forms (sample shown below) and doves observed were recorded as singles, pairs and groups or flocks. Findings. -- Tables 1 through 7 contain the summaries of all counts conducted during this survey. The number of each count, dates of evening and morning counts, length of the route, the number of doves observed during evening and morning counts and the average for the two counts, and the birds per mile are all included. Data from these tables are plotted on Figures 1 through 7. In these figures the population trend is correlated with maximum and minimum temperatures and periods of precipitation. Close analysis of the various graphs show that movement of doves appears to be closely correlated with freezing temperatures as related to late August and early September storms. Analysis of data in Table 7 and comparison of the data with Figure 7 show that the peak of flocking occurred during the period August 13-16 when 3.72 birds per mile were observed. By August 2730, immediately preceding the season, a drop in population of 41.94 percent is indicated. Several ·days after opening of the season, September 3-6, two thirds of the population had moved from the State with 33.33 percent remaining. �II 110 10 100 9 90 - PERIODS OF PPT. 8 IL. C/) 7 ~170 a:: MAX. TEMP. (!) IIJ 6 IIJ 160 Z ..J - ::E a:: o IIJ 5 G;150 I- « IIJ Q. a:: MIN. TEMP. s!!: 4 ~140 IIJ IIJ CD I- 3 30 2 20 -- 10 o """- ~PO~P~U~L~ATlON TREND O~ 15 _ 20 25 JULY 30 5 10 15 AUGUST 20 25 30 DATE 5 10 15 20 25 30 SEPTEMBER FIGURE I-CORRELATION, MOURNING DOVE NUMBERS AND POPULATION TREND WITH TEMPERATURE AND PRECIPITATION NORTHERN ZONE (FORT COLLINS AREA) EASTERN COLORADO 5 10 OCTOBER 15 �II 110 PERIODS 10 100 9 90 8 IL. OF PPT. .80 CI) lIJ 7 lIJI70 a:: MAX. TEMP. o lIJ o lIJ 6 ..J 160 Z - :IE lIJ lIJ I- a:: a:: 5 =>150 a. <t a:: lIJ ~ 4 ~140 ~ lIJ en I- 3 30 2 20 MIN. TEMP. 10 o 0 15 POPULATION 20 25 JULY 30 5 10 15 AU.GUST 20 25 30 DATE 5 10 15 20 25 30 5 SEPTEMBER FIGURE 2- CORRELATION, MOURNING DOVE NUMBERS AND POPULATION TREND WITH TEMPERATURE AND PRECIPITATION CENTRAL ZONE (CASTLE ROCK AREA) EASTERN COLORADO 10 OCTOBER TREND 15 �II 110 - 10 100 9 90 8 80 u, PERIODS OF PPT. MAX. TEMP. 7 (1)170 IJJ IJJ a::: t!> 6 ~160 z IJJ ...J ~ 5 ~150 :::l a::: MIN. TEMP. ti IJJ a.. a::: ~ 4 ~140 a::: _ III :E IJJ I- 3 30 2 20 10 POPULATION 0 TREND 0 15 ~" •.'" 25 JULY 30 5 10 15 AUGUST 20 25 30 DATE 5 10 15 20 25 30 SEPTEMBER FIGURE 3-CORRELATION, MOUNING DOVE NUMBERS AND POPULATION TREND WITH TEMPERATURE AND PRECIPITATION SOUTHERN ZONE(SPRINGFIELD AREA)EASTERN COLORADO 5 10 OCTOBER 15 �II 110 - 10 100 9 90 - PERIODS OF PPT. 8 I.L 7 (1)170 w w a:: (!) 6 MAX. TEMP. - -l :IE a:: ~160 z w 5 w ~150 !;i w a.. a:: ~ 4 a:: CD w 0..140 :IE W I- 3 30 2 20 MIN. TEMP. 10 POPULATION 0 0 15 20 25 JULY 30 5 10 15 AUGUST 20 25 30 DATE 5 10 15 20 25 30 5 SEPTEMBER FIGURE4-CORRELATION, MOURNING DOVE NUMBERS AND POPULATION TREND WITH TEMPERATURE AND PRECIPITATION NORTHERN ZONE (CRAIG AREA) WESTERN COLORADO 10 OCTOBER TREND 15 �II 110 - PERIODS OF PPT. 10 9 8 80 u, C/) 7 MAX. TEMP. ~170 Q: (!) UI 0 UI -..I 6 ::E Q: 2160 _ UI Q: 5 UI =>150 ~ a. ~ Q: C/) UI o 4 ~140 ~ al UI MIN. TEMP. ~ 3 30 2 20 10 __ 0 0 15 20 25 JULY .. 30 5 10 15 AUGUST 20 25 30 DATE 5 10 15 SEPTEMBER 20 25 30 POPULATION 1--- TREND 5 15 10 O~TOBER FIGURE5-CORRELATION, MOURNING DOVE NUMBERS AND POPULATION TREND WITH TEMPERATURE AND PRECIPITATION -CENTRAL ZONE (GRAND JUNCTION AREA) WESTERN COLORADO �II 110 - 10 100 9 90 8 80 -- PERIODS OF PPT. u, 7 ~170 MAX. TEMP. LLI 0:: (!) 6 ~160 z LLI ::! ::E 0:: - LLI' 5 0::150 ::> l- LLI MIN. TEMP. « n. 0:: ~ 4 ~140 0:: ::E - LLI III I- 3 2 o O~ 15 __ POPULATION -- __ -TREND _ ~~~ 20 25 JULY 30 5 10 15 AUGUST 20 25 30 DATE 5 10 15 20 25 30 SEPTEMBER FIGURE 6-CORRELATION. MOURNING DOVE NUMBERS AND POPULATION TREND WITH TEMPERATURE AND PRECIPITATION SOUTHERN ZONE (CORTEZ AREA) WESTERN COLORADO 5 10 OCTOBER 15 �6 ~ 5 Ii: m LaJ ...J4 -I: 0:::3 LaJ Q. 0a. " ,, " , , , ~ o ,, 01 o I , , :TULY3Q-AUG.! AUG.G-9 AUe.,a-" , AUG.!O-21 ,I, AUG.27-30 3-' SEPT. , SEPlIO-II , , SEPT.17-aOSEPT.2+-27 ::==r OCT. 1-+ OCr. 8-1' PERIOD OF COUNT FIGURE~-"MOURNING DOVE POPULATION TRENDS IN COLORADO, STATEWIDE» 19£»2 �- 234 MOURNING DOVE CENSUS FORM Observer{s) ------------------- Weather at start of count: Date,~~~~--~~~--~~~------------Period of Day (A.M. or P.M.) Temp: % cloud cover --------------Name of Route Wind (M.P.H.) County{ies) '----------------------Weather at end -o-::f~c-o-u-n-t-:-------Time Started Temp. % cloud cover _ Wind {M.P.H.)._-:-_ Beginning Mi1eage ~--~~------Time Finished Total Time Precipitation during count: ~------Ending Mi1eage Total Mi1es _ 7----------------------- --------- SINGLES PAIRS GROUPS OR FLOCKS Sub-Totals Total Doves Observed -------------- General Instructions for Making Dove Roadside Counts: 1. Enter all information requested at head of form. 2. Drive route slowly (about 15 m.p.h.). 3. Count all doves observed and separate by singles, pairs, or flocks. Use figure (2) to designate a pair. �-235 Table 1. -- Mourning Dove Census Data, Fort Collins Area, 1962 • . Count Date of Count Length of Number of Doves Number P.M. Route (Miles) P.M. A.M. A.M. Ave. 1 No Count No Count 30.0 2 8/6 8/7 30.0 5 54 29.5 3 8/13 8/14. 30.0 20 65 42.5 4 8/20 8/21 30.0 30 38 34.0 5 8/27 8/28 30.0 20 55 37.5 6 9/3 9/4 30.0 35 35 35.0 7 9/10 9/11 11.0 30.0 9 13 8 9/17 9/18 30.0 5 9 7.0 9 9/24 9/25 30.0 3 4 3.5 10 10/1 10/2 30.0 0 1 0.5 11 1.0 10/8 10/9 30.0· 2 0 Birds per Mile .98 1.42 1.13 1.25 1.17 .37 .23 .12 .02 .03 Table 2. -- Mourning Dove Census Data, Castle Rock Area, 1962. Count Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Date of Count P.M. A.M. 7/31 8/1 8/7 8/8 8/14 8/15 8/21 8/22 8/29' 8/30 9/5 9/5 9/11 9/12 9/18 9/19 9/25 9/26 10/2 10/3 10/9 10/10 Length of Route (Miles) 30.4 30.4 30.4 30.4 30.4 30.4 30.4 30.4 30.4 30.4 30.4 Number of Doves P.M. A.M. Ave. 146 131 138.5 165 224 194.5 142 68 105.0 49 17 33.0 13 6 9.5 19 27 23.0 47 14 30.5 27 6 16.5 46 60 53.0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Birds per Mile 4.56 6.40 3.45 1.09 .31 .76 1.00 .54 1.74 0 0 Table 3. -- Mourning Dove Census Data, Springfield Area, 1962. Count Number 1 2 3 4 5· 6 7 8 9 10 11 Date of Count P.M. A.M. 8/1 8/1 8/8 8/9 8/15 8/16 8/22 8/23 8/29 8/30 9/5 9/6 9/12 9/13 9/21 9/21 9/26 9/27 10/4 10/3 10/10 10/11 Length of Route (Miles2 30.1 30.1 30.1 30.1 30.1 30.1 30.1 30.1 30,1 30,1 30,1 Number of Doves Ave. P.M. A.M. 64 104 84.0 61.5 88 35 131 39 85.0 50 94 72.0 39 162 100.5 22 34 28.0 29 167 98.0 115 396 255.5 27,5 42 13 3,0 3 3 0 0 0 Birds per Mile 2.79 2.04 2.82 2.39 3.34 .93 3.26 8.49 .91 .10 0 �- 236 Table 4. -- Mourning Dove Census Data, Craig Area, 1962. Count Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Date of Count P.M. A.M. 7/30 7/31 8/7 8/6 8/l3 8/14 8/20 8/21 8/28 8/27 9/4 9/3 9/11 9/10 9/18 9/17 9/24 9/25 10/1 10/2 10/8 10/9 ,. Length of Route ~Miles) 35.9 35.9 35.9 35.9 35.9 35.9 35.9 35.9 35.9 35.9 35.9 Table 5. -- Mourning Dove Census Data, Count Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Date of Count P.M. A.M. 7/31 8/7 8/14 8/21 8/28 9/4 9/11 9/18 9/25 10/2 10/9 8/1 8/8 8/15 8/22 8/29 9/5 9/12 9/19 9/26 10/3 10/10 Number of Doves P.M. A.M. Ave. 99 47 73.0 143 118.0 93 123 242 182.5 114 200 157.0 102 117 109.5 91 57 74.0 20 15 27.5 21.5 19 24 8 7 7.5 8 4 6.0 1.5 3 0 Birds per Mile 2.03 3.29 5.08 4.37 3.05 2.06 .77 .60 .21 .17 .04 Grand Junction Area, 1962. Length of Route (Mi1es) 29.6 29.6 29.6 29.6 29.6 29.6 29.6 29.6 29.6 29.6 29.6 55.0 104.5 97.5 90.0 74.5 42.0 19.0 22.0 11.5 9.0 2.5 Birds per Mile 1.86 3.53 3.29 3.04 2.52 1.42 .64 .74 .39 .30 .08 Number of Doves Ave. A.M. P.M. Birds per Mile Number of Doves Ave. P.M. A.M. 25 78 71 59 57 49 11 18 13 8 3 85 131 124 121 92 35 27 26 10 10 2 Table 6. -- Mourning Dove Census Data, Cortez Area, 1962. Count Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Date of Count A.M. P.M. 8/1 8/8 8/15 8/22 8/?9 9/5 9/12 9/19 9/26 10/3 10/10 8/2 8/9 8/16 8/23 8/30 9/6 9/l3 9/20 9/27 10/4 10/11 Length of Route (Miles) 36.5 36.5 36.5 36.5 36.5 36.5 36.5 36.5 36.5 36.5 36.5 82 135 l35 76 40 22 16 7 3 0 0 170 260 274 231 128 52 12 24 5 0 0 126.0 197.5 204.5 153.5 84.0 37.0 14.0 15.5 4.0 0 0 3.45 5.41 5.60 4.21 2.30 1.01 .38 .42 .11 0 0 �- 237 - Table 7. -- Mourning Dove Census Data, Statewide Summary, 1962. Number of Doves A.M. Ave. Birds per .Mile Count Number Length of Transect P.M. 1 162.5 416 537 476.5 2.93 2 192.5 561 850 705.5 3.66 3 192.5 530 904 717.0 3.72 4 192.5 378 701 539.5 2.80 5 192.5 271 560 415.5 2.16 6 192.5 204 274 239.0 1.24 7 192.5 127 253 190.0 8 192.5 191 485 338.0 .99 1.76 9 192.5 114 100 107.0 .56 10 192.5 19 18 18.5 .10 11 192.5 8 2 5.0 .03 As shown in Figure 3 a large build-up of doves occurred in sou~heas~ern Colorado during mid-September, being an exception to the rule ~ha~ birds have largely mfgrabed by this time of year. Prepared by: Wayne W. Sandfort Date: Approved by: October, 1963 ---------~~------~~~-------- Laurence E. Riordan Assistant Director, Research Ferd C. IG.einschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �- 239 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH SEGMENT PROJECT State of COLORADO ----------~----------Game Bird Survey Project No. W-37-R-16 Work Plan No. 10 ----------------- Title of Job: Job No. Study of Hungarian Period Covered: April 1 ----~------------------------ Partridge Adaptability 1, 1962 through March 31, 1963 ABSTRACT No birds were received for trial introduction during the current segment. and this job was inactive Recommendations: A special report by Roger L. Evans and Wayne W. Sandfort indicates that the climate and habitat is suitable for Hungarian partridge in several areas in Colorado. It is recommended that attempts be continued to obtain these birds from the states of Oregon and Idaho, through trade agreements involving wild turkeys from Colorado, and that initial, trial introductions be made in the Fort Collins area. Objectives: (1) To release Hungarian partridges in pre-determined (2) To determine success of introduction. areas. Techniques Used: Techniques of the study, in the event birds are received, will involve gentle release from a holding pen in the excellent cover around Douglas Lake, north of Fort Collins. Several birds will be held in captivity in attempts to establish a sizeable breeding flock, making large-scale trial releases eventually possible. Following introduction, periodic field surveys will be conducted to determine reproductive success, dispersion, general survival and adaptability. No birds were received during this segment. Findings: NOTE: As of this writing, three groups of Hungarian partridge have been received, two from Oregon and one from Idaho. Another shipment from the state of Idaho is scheduled for early March, 1964. Distribution and reaction of birds during these initial releases will be reported under Segment 17 of the Game Bird Surveys project, W-37-R. Prepared Date: by: Wayne W. Sandfort Approved by: Laurence E. Riordan Assistant Director, Research O_c_t_o_~_e_r~,~1~9_6~3~ _ Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator ��- 241 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH SEGMENT State of. ~CO~L~O~RAD~~O~ Project W-37-R-16 -------~------------ No. Work Plan No. PROJECT _ Game Bird Survey 15 -----~------------ Title of Job: Appraisal Period Covered: April Job No. of Mountain 1 -----~------------------------ Quail Habitat 1, 1962 through March 31, 1963 ABSTRACT The principal investigators assigned to this job resigned or were assigned new responsibilities during this segment and no work was accomplished. Recommendations: The mountain quail currently occupies range that is believed to be similar to some areas in Colorado. If time becomes available, it is recommended that a study of the habitat and climate in the native range of this species be made, to determine possibilities for its adaptation to conditions in Colorado. Objective: To determine quail in Colorado. possibilities for adaptation Technigues Used: See Plans, Specifications Project W-37-R-16, p. 70. of the mountain and Estimates, Federal Aid Findings: No work was accomplished on this job. Mr. Roger L. Evans, to whom the major portion of the work was assigned, accepted a permanent position with the U. S. Forest Service and resigned from the Department of Game, Fish and Parks on July 15, 1962. Wayne W. Sandfort was assigned duties in a new position and was unable to carry out this study in the absence of Mr. Evans. Prepared Date: by: Wayne W.Sandfort Approved by: Laurence E. Riordan Assistant Director, Research O.~c_t_o_b_e~r~,~1~9~6~3~ _ Ferd C. K1einschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator � https://cpw.cvlcollections.org/files/original/b193926941fab1a0d24085de16425c56.pdf 632623d95a65caffd22f7b5ff75c0bf8 PDF Text Text January, 1964 -1- JOB COMPLETION REPORT INVESTIGATIONS PROJECTS State of COLORADO ------------------------Game Range Investigations Project No. _W-'--1_O_1_-_R_-.;...5 _ Work Plan No. 1 Job No. 1 Title of Job: Mesa Verde Clip Plot Study Period Covered: May 1, 1962 to March 31, 1963 Objectives: For sound winter game range management, it is necessary to know the percentage of current annual growth game may be permitted to remove yearly from key browse plants without injury to the plants. Also, it is important to know the effect of different intensities of use on the forage produced. The Mesa Verde Clip Plot Study is a long-term clipping experiment simulating different intensities of game use on five key species of browse plants: big sagebrush, antelope bitterbrush, mountain mahogany, serviceberry and gambel oak. The purpose of the study is to attempt to learn how the yearly removal of certain percentages of the current annual growth stems and of old stems affects the plants and their forage production. Procedure and Findings: All field work outlined for the study was completed according to plan, and much has been accomplished toward the preparation of a final report for publication. This includes the compilation, organization, and statistical analysis of most of the data, a first draft of the Introduction, Description of Study Area, Methods, and a portion of Results. The photographs and most of the required charts and graphs have been prepared. In writing the Discussion of Results, the desirability of some further statistical tests and data organization not previously planned became evident. The first data analysis interpreted effects of treatment on the basis of units of production per inch of precipitation. �-2- After working with this analysis it appeared that an analysis of forage weight production relating each year's production and the total production to the original production for a given plot would supplement the first analysis and help in the interpretation and presentation of the results of the study. Consequently, many preliminary, experimental data comparisons were made to form a basis for judging the kind, result, and utility of such an analysis. Finally, the job of making a new analysis was given to Game Department and Colorado State University statisticians. The new analysis has not yet been completed. Upon its completion, the first draft of the final report will be finished, submitted to reviewers, and a final draft prepared for publishers. Prepared by: Harold R. Shepherd Date: January, 1964 Approved by: Richard N. Denney Project Leader Wayne W. Sandfort Chief, Game Research �January, 1964 -3JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO Project No. W-10l-R-5 Work Plan No. 1 Game Range Investigations Job No. 2 Title of Job: A Detailed Study of Range Forage by Use of Fenced Exclosures Period Covered: April 1, 1962 to March 31, 1963 ABSTRACT Employing the method of making pellet group counts of entire study areas, indicated rates of stocking were obtained on treatments inside of partially protected exclosure parts for big game animals and for big game and livestock on adjacent open range. Deer stocking rates were found to be high on accessible treatments at the Calloway, Irish Canyon, and Dry Basin exclosures for the winter of 1961-62. Indicated rates of stocking were found to be moderate at the Bar D Exclosure by deer for the same season, and no stocking by either deer or elk was indicated at the two Saguache Park exclosures. Cattle stocking was extremely light for both the fall season of 1961 and spring season of 1962 on the open range treatment of the Bar D Exclosure. Stocking by cattle was light outside at the Saguache Park Cattle Exclosure and heavy outside at the Saguache Park Exclosure for the summer season of 1962. Also found to be heavy was the cattle stocking rate at the Irish Canyon Exclosure. Separate deer and sheep stocking rates were not computed on open range treatments where the two classes occurred together in winter of 1961-62, however, evidence was present to indicate that because of heavy snow cover, sheep had not used the open range adjacent to the Dry Basin Exclosure. Some light stocking was estimated attributable to sheep for open range treatments at the Calloway and Irish Canyon exclosures for the winter of 1961-62. Field surveys to consolidate basic information were accomplished at the McPhee Gulch and Blue Ridge exclosures. Detail and vicinity maps were prepared of those two exclosures and are reproduced in this report. Department supervisory and district personnel were assisted in planning new exclosures to be constructed in cooperation with the Forest Service on elk winter ranges of upper South Park and on a P-J chained area in use as winter deer range in Dry Park. The latter is located nmthof Norwood immediately north and above the San Miguel River. Recommendations: At the Bar D Deer-Cattle Exclosure, both deer and cattle numbers appear to be in balance with forage at the present time. It is recommended that stocking rate studies be continued through 1964 in order to conclude the five-year schedule and also check on cattle stocking by the new lessee as well as deer stocking after a possible conservative hunter take in 1962. �-4Continued poor vigor characterizes browse on the accessible Calloway Deer-Livestock Exclosure treatments. There was a slight lessening of use in the winter of 1961-62 compared with the previous three winter seasons. A special 2-deer pre-season was held in 1962 for part of unit #2, although not enough of the unit was open to effect a reduction of the herd that winters on the Calloway range. It is again recommended that unit #2 in its entirety be subjected to the most liberal seasons possible. Rates of stocking by deer in 1961-62 at the Dry Basin Deer-Livestock Exclosure were the highest yet obtained. Upward trend in deer kill in unit #70 for 1959 and 1960 had supported optimism that herds were being reduced. The 1961 kill dropped off nearly 50% of that in 1960, changing the picture again. Despite the manner in which hunter kill has fluctuated in accord with unpredictable variables, every effort must be continued to reduce the deer in unit #70. It is recommended that the Department, through action and expenditures by the Southwest Region, cooperate with the Norwood District of the Grand MesaUncompahgre National Forest in construction of an exclosure on the Forest portion of a joint BLM-Forest Service pinon-juniper chained area north of Norwood. The plot should exclude cattle only and be two acres in size. A deer-proof part adjoining or nearby would be optional. Also recommended is that the Department, in cooperation with the Pike National Forest, establish a minimum of one two-part exclosure where cattle are in joint occupancy of ranges west of Kenosha Pass. Tentative agreement had been reached by Ranger Burke and Area Supervisor Ogilvie to build one exclosure. No action has occurred, although present indications are that construction will proceed in 1963. Results of stocking rate studies at the Irish Canyon Deer-Livestock Exclosure substantiate those at Calloway in that deer use continues to be too great in the Browns Park portion of unit #2. Future liberal seasons are in order for deer as well as complete removal of all livestock to effect improvement of the low productive desert brush ranges. No recommendations are made for big game and cattle on the Saguache Park area pending proposed management plan changes by the Forest Service. �-5A. DETAILED STUDY OF RANGE FORAGE BY USE OF FENCED EXCLOSURES Bertram D. Baker INTRODUCTION Job accomplishments at exclosures in 1962 will be detailed by exclosure in following paragraphs. Scheduled pellet group counts for animal stocking rates were all completed. Aid was rendered Regional and Area supervisory personnel in the selection of sites, preparing cost estimates, planning exclosure designs, and other assistance concerning new exclosure construction. Base year plant inventories and stocking rate study plans by the Forest Service relieved me of those responsibilities at the new Blue Ridge Game-Cattle Exclosure in Middle Park. However, for purposes of Department record, primary information surveys were done both at the Blue Ridge plot and older McPhee Gulch exclosure. The Blue Ridge exclosure was the only new one constructed within the work period. BAR D DEER-CATTLE EXCLOSURE Pellet Group Counts for Indicated Rates of Stocking Objectives: 1. To determine the indicated rates of stocking by deer on the treatments accessible to them for the fall-winter-spring season of 1961-62. 2. To determine the indicated rates of stocking by cattle for the fall season of 1961 and spring season of 1962 on the one-acre open range treatment. Procedures: The one-acre study treatments were systematically scanned in theirentirety for fecal droppings by walking string guide lined strips. Deer pellet groups were counted on the treatments inside of the livestock part and on the outside open range on April 10, 1962. Cow dung groups were tallied on the open range on the same date and then again on September 26, 1962. Paint was applied to the cow dung from commercial pressure cans in order to cancel them from future counts. Findings: On the one-acre study treatment of the livestock part of the exclosure deer stocking was found to be at a rate of 8.3 acres per deer-month for the fallwinter-spring season of 1961-62. For the same season on the outside one-acre treatment the indicated rate of stocking by deer was determined to be 3.6 acres per deer-month. Cattle were found to have occupied the outside one-acre study treatment at the indicated rates of stocking of 100 acres per AUM in the fall of 1961 and 333 acres per AUM in the spring of 1962. The rate of stocking for the two seasons combined was 90.09 acres per ADM. Cattle stocking on this state-controlled range was extremely light for the period of observation because the management lease was in the process of changing hands. Nevertheless, stocking is expected to remain light under terms of the agreement with the new lessee. �-6Wintering deer stocking rates were the lowest that they have been since the exclosure was constructed. Recent successively high hunter harvests in this unit #22 apparently brought deer populations into near proper balance with at least this part of the winter range. Differential use of the treatments by deer continues with the unprotected area being preferred to the partially protected area under livestock fence. Ratios in past winters have been 2 to 1 in 1958-59, 3 to 1 in 1959-60, about 3 to 1 in 1960-61, and 2.3 to 1 last winter (1961-62). BLUE RIDGE GAME-CATTLE EXCLOSURE Introduction The Blue Ridge Exclosure was constructed in June 1962. Area Supervisor Paul Gilbert of the Department and Kremmling District Ranger George Sieward of the Arapahoe National Forest cooperated to establish the fences. I gave assistance to these men in the early planning stages. , The study plot is located just inside of the National Forest Boundary in the ~SWtNWt, Section 31, Township 1 South, Range 79 West, 6th Principal Meridian (see Figure 1). More generally, the location is in Grand County and game unit 28. Total area enclosed is five acres. One 2-t-acre part is within woven and barbed wire game-proof fencing, and the other is bounded by standard four-strand barbed wire stock fencing. Vegetative type designation of the cover at the site is big sagebrushbitterbrush-balsamroot (4-Artr-Putr-BAL). Very dry conditions, shallow, rocky soil, steep slopes varying from 35 to 6010, and southwest exposure at 9,100 feet elevation further characterize the site. Both deer and elk have made heavy use of the area in winter and spring by indications from numbers of pellet groups present and barking of aspens nearby. The Forest Service classified the type as unusable for cattle because of slope, although the type falls within an existing cattle allotment. From gross examination, little past cattle use is evident due probably to the lack of a close water supply as well as the rough terrain. Studies Because the Forest Service planned and executed base year range vegetation inventories of the three treatments in July 1962, it was not necessary forme to initiate what would have been duplicating studies. Included in the Forest Service field studies were pellet group counts on permanently marked circular plot transects. Records and results will not be given here, however, they are available in files of both the District Ranger and Department Area Supervisor already mentioned. Vicinity and detail maps were prepared from field surveysaccornplished August 1962 and are included in this report (Figures 1 and 2). in �Figure VICINITY 1. MAP-BLUE RIDGE GAME-CATTLE EXCLOSURE 6th PRINCIPAL MERIDIAN N SCALE IN MILES • l>l i 2 B. D.Bak., 1962. �Fif<ure 2. BLUE RIDGE GAME-CATTLE SEC. 31 T.I S. R.79W. EXCLOSURE 6th PRINCIPAL MERIDIAN LEGEND ••••••••. Standard 4-Strand Barb Wire Fence. Elk and Deer Proof Fence. IOO-Foot Parker TronsectsMarked With One-Inch Angle Iron Stak••. )f----. Paced BrowseConditionTran.eeh, X Marking location Of ~k Cairn Starting Paint. • .ol-Acre Pellet Group Plot Center. Marked With One-Half Inch Rebar Stak ••• +-+ B.D. Boker I �- 9 CALLOWAY DEER-LIVESTOCK EXCLOSURE Pellet Group Counts for Indicated Rates of Stocking Objectives: 1. To determine the indicated rate of stocking by deer and sheep combined upon the one-acre study treatment outside of the exclosure south of the drift fence for the fall-winter-spring season of 1961-62. 2. To determine the indicated rate of stocking by deer on the one-acre study treatment outside of the exclosure north of the drift fence for the same season. Procedures: The total count technique was employed to tally pellet groups on the one-acre study treatments outside and adjacent to the exclosure. Treatments were examined on April 11, 1962. It was difficult to estimate the proportion of deer to sheep pellet groups in the combined count south of the drift fence, however, by far the greater number were probably deposited by deer. There was some evidence of light trailing by sheep on that treatment. Findings: The open range one-acre study treatment north of the drift fence received an indicated rate of stocking of 0.81 acre per deer-month for the fallwinter-spring season of 1961-62. A light rate of use by horses of 50 acres per ADM was also found. Observations of current utilization on spiny hopsage (Grayia spinosa), big sagebrush (Artemisia tridentata), and rabbitbrushes (Chrysothamnus nauseosus, Q.. viscidiflorus) revealed severe to destructive use. South of the drift fence, deer and sheep combined to yield in indicated rate of stocking of 2.1 acres per deer-sheep-month. DRY BASIN DEER-LIVESTOCK EXCLOSURE Pellet Group Counts for Indicated Rates of Stocking Objectives: 1. To determine the indicated rate of stocking by deer for the fall-winterspring season of 1961-62 on the one-acre study plot inside of the livestock part of the exclosure. 2. To determine the indicated rate of stocking by deer and sheep combined for the same season on the one-acre open range study area. Procedures: Total counts were made upon the two treatments on April 25, 1962. Only winter deposited pellet groups were tallied, and no attempt was made to differentiate deer and sheep droppings on the outside treatment. There were strong indications that sheep had not been on the outside treatment due to heavy snow cover in this particular part of the allotment. Findings: Deer occupied the livestock exclosure part treatment in the winter of 1961-62 at an indicated rate of stocking of 0.58 acre per deer-month. The combined deer and sheep stocking rate on the outside open range treatment was found to be 0.61 acre per deer-sheep-month. No use by horses was indicated by the pellet group count on the outside area even though there now isa permitted number for the area. �-10- utilization of big sagebrush by deer inside of the livestock part was judged as being severe. DRY PARK AND SOUTH PARK EXCLOSURES (PROPOSED) Preliminary Surveys Objective: To aid regional staff and supervisory personnel in the planning, design, and site selection of new exclosures. Procedure: Field planning trips were made on April 26, 1962, into the Dry Park area north of Norwood, and on July 3, 1962, into the Rock Creek Hills and Kenosha Pass areas at the north end of South Park. In the earlier instance, Norwood District Forest Ranger Jim Schoenbaum, Regional Forest Staff Officers Ralph Gierisch and Morley Brandborg, Grand Mesa-Uncompahgre National Forest Range and Wildlife Staff Officers Wayne Cloward and Ladd Frary, and I discussed the desirability, possible designs, and placements of exclosures on a large cooperative BLM-Forest Service pinon-juniper chained tract. The July field planning trip to South Park winter ranges was made with Bailey District Forest Ranger Burke, W.C.O. Tom Lynch, and Area Supervisor Stan Ogilvie. Exclosure designs and costs were explained and discussed, and sites were examined relative to a possible cooperative exclosure action program between the Department Southeast Region, Pike National Forest, and Project W-IOI-R. Findings: At Dry Park, on-site inspection of the pinon-juniper chaining north of Norwood revealed a definite need for studies. The treated area is used by deer in large numbers for winter and spring range. Higher elevation areas northeastward on the Uncompahgre Plateau apparently serve as summering grounds for the deer. Cattle are grazed in the spring starting on the portion controlled by the BLM and then moving up through the National Forest as the season progresses. The original thick stand of mature timberevidentally contained considerable amounts of browse including serviceberry (Amelanchier spp.), mountain mahogany (Cercocarpus montanus), and oakbrush (Quercus spp.). The chaining was accomplished in such a manner as to naturally windrow the fallen trees thereby establishing lanes between high and dense fence-like barriers. Effects of this type of wildland manipulation, done primarily to improve the forage for livestock, could also be highly important in deer and elk management. Aspen and grassland intermingled ranges in the Rock Creek Hills and Kenosha Pass areas of upper South Park evidentally are receiving more use each year by wintering elk as herds increase in size. Currently, numerous local haystack damage complaints involving elk might lend credence to the Forest Service concern over ranges being overstocked by elk. Manuevers by a Camp Carson military unit in the Rock Creek Hills served to disturb much vegetation. However, irrespective of such happenings, unless the elk herd numbers are watched, winter ranges could become a progressively more serious problem. �-11- IRISH CANYON DEER-LIVESTOCK EXCLOSURE Pellet Group Counts for Indicated Rates of Stocking Objectives: 1. To determine the indicated rate of stocking by deer on the one-acre study treatments inside of the livestock part of the exclosure and on open range for the fall-winter-spring season of 1961-62. 2. To determine the indicated rate of stocking by cattle and horses on the one-acre open range treatment for the period of April 1961 to April 1962. Procedures: A total count of all winter deposited deer pellet groups was made on the one-acre study treatments April 11, 1962. Cattle and horse fecal groups lacking evidence of paint were tallied and then cancelled withapplication of paint from spray cans. Findings: Indicated rates of stocking by deer for the winter of 1961-62 were 0.65 and 1.25 acres per deer-month respectively on the inside and outside treatments. One female fawn deer carcass was found on the outside one-acre treatment. Cattle and horses (two horse pellet groups in a total of 47) combined to stock the outside open range treatment for the 12-month period at the rate of 7·7 acres per AUM. There was some evidence of sheep having been on the outside treatment, although pellet groups could not be differentiated from those of deer. Sheep were seen just south of theexclosure on the date of the counts. Use of the two exclosure treatments by deer increased in intensity over the previous winter of 1960-61. In fact, the rate of stocking on the inside livestock part treatment was the highest since construction of the fences. It is presumed that sheep might have influenced the deer to use the partially protected plot more than the outside plot. In any case, deer stocking continues to be too high for this range. A small central portion of unit #2 was open to shooting of 2 deer in an August 1962 pre-season, but the area probably was not large enough to help reduce the herd. McPHEE GULCH GAME-CATTLE EXCLOSURE Basic Information Survey The McPhee Gulch Game Exclosure was constructed in June 1960. The cattle part had been in since about 1941. Base year plant inventories were made at the former soon after construction (Baker, 1961), but maps of the study plot were not prepared due to a lack of information of the adjoining cattle part. In August 1962, an attempt was made to locate a land survey corner from which to tie in theexclosure parts. No success was experienced in that phase. The livestock part was surveyed, however, and a composite map was prepared. Also drawn was a vicinity map, both of which are presented here (Figures 3 and 4). �Figure 3. VICINITY MAP - McPHEE GULCH GAME-CATTLE EXCLOSURE 6th PRINCIPAL MERIDIAN N SCALE IN MILES It I 2 B. D. Boker 196 �Figure .4. McPHEE GULCH GAME-CATTLE EXCLOSURE SEC. 9 T. 2 S. R.82 W. 6th PRINCIPAL MERIDIAN NATIONAL FOREST BOUNDARY N ., , .,,I I ,I ,I I I I I, , I I I I I , I , ' I , I I • I , ,I , • , I I I , I I I I I / ' ,! ", , , I ,, . , I II ", II " "" "" I· ,, ,, , I I I ,, • I I I • , I , I • ,• I' I I • I ,I ,, ,,, I ,, SCALE 100FEET • I , I I I ,, I I I I I I I I I I I I I ,, "" "" "" ...•..... ~ I. I , ,, , "" ~ • " ... .... "'" .••.. ", • LEGEND _______ Standard Barb Wire Stack Fence. +--+ Game Proof Ellclosure Fence. Wood Staku Marklno 1/2 Acre Study Unit and Sub-unit Corner •. 50 Foot Line Intercept Tronsect Locotlons Marked At Ends With Steel Stakes. • 8 D.8aker 1962. .••.. ...• .... �-14SAGUACHE PARK EXCLOSURE Pellet Group Counts for Indicated Rates of Stocking Objectives: 1. To determine the indicated rate of stocking by elk and deer on the outside !-acre study area for the fall-winter-spring season of 1961-62. 2. To determine the indicated rate of stocking by cattle on the outside treatment for the summer grazing season of 1962. Procedures: The outside !-acre study treatment was checked for game pellet groups on May 28, 1962. No groups were located as the elk and deer had abandoned the Park early and returned very late. The study treatment was visited again on October 18, 1962, and all cattle fecal groups were counted and cancelled by paint applications. Findings: Early heavy snows in the fall of 1961, plus a long, severe winter forced and kept the elk and deer out of at least that portion of the Park where this and the Cattle Exclosure are located. The winter of 1961-62 was the first winter that no use was recorded since the start of stocking rate studies in 1959. It was found that cattle stocking of the outside plot was a heavy 4.0 acres per AUM for the summer of 1962. Cursory examination of the grasses also showed that utilization of them had been high. Stocking rates in the Park should lessen since the Forest Service is planning a demonstration allotment with a deferred rotation system of use. SAGUACHE PARK CATTLE EXCLOSURE Pellet Group Counts for Indicated Rates of Stocking Objectives: 1. To determine the indicated rates of stocking by deer and elk on the two oneacre treatments for the fall-winter-spring season of 1961-62. 2. To determine the indicated rate of stocking by cattle on the outside one-acre study area for the s-wmmer season of 1962. Procedures: As had occurred at the one-acre total exclosure (Saguache Park Exclosure), no stocking was recorded for game when treatments were visited May 28, 1962. A count of cow dung made on October 18, 1962 was a total tally on the outside one-acre study area. Cancellation of fecal groups from future counts was accomplished by painting them as the tally was made. Findings: No deer or elk pellet groups were found indicating total lack of use by game of both study treatments in the winter of 1961-62. ) �-15Cattle were found to have occupied the outside one-acre study area at an indicated rate of stocking of 22.7 acres per AUM in the summer season of 1962. References Cited: Baker, B. D. 1961. Federal Aid Quarterly Report. and Fish Dept., July, pp. 104-109. Prepared by: B. D. Baker ~----~~-------------- Date: January, 1964 Approved by: Colo. Game Richard N. Denney Project Leader Wayne W. Sandfort Chief, Game Research ��January, 1964 -17JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO Project No. W-10l-R-5 Work Plan No. 1 Title of Job: Period Covered: Game Range Investigations Job No. 3 Forage Plant Utilization by Elk on Controversial Ranges. April 1, 1962 to March 31, 1963. ABSTRACT Studies were conducted in Cat Creek Park, Rio Grande County, to determine rates of utilization and animal stocking by elk in the winter of 1961-62 and by cattle in the summer of 1962. The method of clipping and weighing plant production from paired protected and unprotected plots was used to determine utilization. Pellet group count transects yielded stocking rate indices. utilization of plants in total by elk was found to average 19.3% Park-wide. Bottomland percentages compared closely to upland percentages with both falling near 19%. Grasses provided the bulk of the forage on all plots, but average percentages of forbs (plus very minor amounts of browse) that were utilized also compared closely with composite averages. Elk were found to have been present at the indicated average rate of stocking of 5.4 elk-days use per acre from counts of ten lO-plot pellet group transects. The average utilization of forage (all plants) by cattle in 1962 was found to be 44.1% on nine sets of plots. Utilization of grasses averaged out to be 35.4% over-all and 53.2% on the lower Park that is consistently used by cattle. Average utilization in 1962 was higher over-all than in 1961, although figures for the lower Park plots were down. The latter was compensated for by increases in utilization in 1962 on perimeter slopes, due probably to drouth conditions which forced the animals to range farther out and higher. Recommendations: No recommendations are proposed on management of the elk herd wintering in Cat Creek Park pending results of the 1962-63 study now in progress. Also, consideration must be made of current local population trends. Previous recommendations for reduction in the numbers of cattle permitted on the area still stand. Although utilization findings might be questionable because of weaknesses inherent in methodology, stocking rate indices presented strong evidence of cattle increasing use of perimeter Park slopes. That occurrence certainly is not desirable consistent with principles of good range management. ��-19FORAGE PLANT u~ILIZATION BY ELK ON CONTROVERSIAL RANGES Bertram D. Baker INTRODUCTION The Cat Creek Park study was started in May 1961 when ten double paired plot locations were selected and cages were set. Forage was clipped from one pair of each set in October 1961 to obtain forage utilization by cattle for the summer season of196l. Results of that work have been reported (Baker, 1962). The present report concerns follow-up procedures in 1962 on the second pair of plots at each set of the original ten to obtain utilization by elk for the winter of 1961-62 as well as the reselection of plot locations, resetting of cages, and clipping of forage to determine utilization by cattle in the summer of 1962. Ob,jectives: 1. To obtain an indication of utilization by elk of browse, grasses, and forbs on pounds per acre and percentage bases for the winter-spring season of 1961-62. 2. To obtain an indication of the amount of utilization by cattle of browse, grasses, and forbs on pounds per acre and percentage bases for the 1962 summer season. 3. To determine indices of the rate of stocking by all classes of animals. Procedures: The study area is located between approximately the 9,300 and 10,000 foot elevation levels on Rio Grande National Forest lands in all or portions of Section 21 through 28, Township 37 North, Range 6 East, New Mexico Principal Meridian. The Park is on the southern edge of Rio Grande County in the Deer Creek drainage, an upper main tributary of Cat Creek. Forage Production-Utilization Wildlife Staff Officer RobertPizel, Alamosa District Ranger Bob Tice, and I visited the sites of the ten pairs of plots on May 23 - 25, 1962. Site locations have been described (Baker, 1962). Total annual production of browse and total above-ground parts each of grasses and forbs from the plots were removed and placed in paper sacks. One 9.6 square foot plot of each pair had been protected by a conical cage the full year from May 1961. The other plot had been protected from cattle utilization by a cage through the summer of 1961 and was uncovered in October 1961 to allow for use by elk over-winter. Clippings were permitted to air-dry in the opened sacks in storage until October 1, 1962 when they were weighed in grams on an Ohaus triple beam balance. Although not used in this report, plot production in grams times ten equals yield directly in pounds per acre. Winter utilization of forage by elk in per cent was computed by subtracting the production of the plot caged in the summer of 1961 and left open in winter of 1961-62 from the production of the plot cage-protected all year and dividing the difference by the latter. �-20- Extra cages that had been stored were carried along. As clipping was accomplished, new plot centers were chosen for four 9.6 square foot plots that contained equal amounts by weight of forage. Cages were secured over three plots chosen to receive protection. Site locations were changed of two sets in the new series. Set #11 was located about one mile west of Set #1 up Deer Creek but still in the bluegrass bottom. Set #16 was located in an open stand of conifers with grass about one third of a mile north of old Set #6. All other sets of plots were established in the immediate vicinity of those in the first series. ~nus was initiated the second and, as now planned, final year of observations. On October 8 and 9, 1962, Bob Pizel, Range Analyst Carroll Tyson, Assistant Alamosa District Ranger Ken Strain, and I visited the new series of plots to clip forage from pairs previously designated for determining forage utilization by cattle. Sacked clippings were allowed to air-dry until March 5, 1963 and were then weighed. In each set the cage was removed from the plot that had been chosen for protection from cattle but available to elk over the winter .of 1962-63. Also, in the course of October field work lists of plants found on the plots of the new series were prepared. Percentage forage utilization by cattle was computed by subtracting the production of the unprotected plot at each of the ten sets from the production of the corresponding cage-protected plot and dividing the difference by the latter. Animal Stocking Rates A pellet group transect of ten 0.01 acre circular plots at each site was examined for winter droppings in May and summer cattle and game droppings in October. Produced from these were current rates of stocking by class of animal. Findings: Table 1 summarized the study of winter utilization of forage by elk in the 1961-62 season. The second f::Lvesets of paired plots were selected by choice where elk use had been presumed to be more heavy. That assumption proved correct both by the degree of utilization (20.9% average) and by the average stocking rate index (7.4 elk-days use per acre). Elk were forced to stay out of the Park the entire winter because of extremely deep snow. Use of the range was restricted to a short time in late April and early May, except of course, for the few animals that summered there. The light stocking is reflected in the low percentages of utilization and stocking indices that were found. The present winter of 1962-63 has been less severe and should produce results more near average. Year-to-year shifts of elk on wintering areas does introduce a factor favorable to vegetation (and soil) in elk management in that respite from consistently heavy use of anyone area occurs frequently. Results of exclosure study stocking rate investigations in Saguache Park and elsewhere over longer periods also supports this contention. The summer drought produced changes in patterns and intensities of utilization of forage by cattle in 1962 compared with 1961. The average of 44.1% utilization of plants was greater than the 38.2% in 1961. �Table 1.--Summary of results of clipping paired plots for production and utilization and pellet group counts for animal stocking rate indices, Cat Creek Park, Rio Grande County - May 1962 - Utilization plot size of 9.6 sq. ft., circular; Ten 0.01 acre plot transects for pellet groups. (Wts. net air-dry in grams). Production - Unprotected Plot Grasses Total Browse & Forbs Wt. % ';'it. % Wt. % Ut. Ut. V.Jt. Ut. Ut. Wt. ue, Ute Wt. Plot Set .LI Production Protected Plot Browse & Forbs Grasses Total #1 33.7 64.8 98.5 21.4 12.3 36.5 161.1 0.0 0.0 182.5 0.0 0.0 6 o #2 0.0 182.4 182.4 0.0 0.0 0.0 185.7 0.0 0.0 185.7 0.0 0.0 3 o #3 0.0 66.6 66.6 0.0 0.0 0.0 30.2 36.4 54.7 30.2 36.4 54.7 o o #4 58.1 131.1 189.2 30.0 28.1 48.4 95.6 35.5 27.1 125.6 63.6 33.7 7 o #5 1.6 52.4 54.0 2.1 0.0 0.0 73.6 0.0 75.7 0.0 0.0 0.0 Number Days Use Per Acre 2/ Elk Deer o , I-' , f\) o #6 10.9 86.6 97.5 5.9 5.0 45.9 1.2 1.4 91.3 6.2 6.4 2 #7 10.4 194.8 205.2 10.2 0.2 1.9 111.7 83.1 42.7 121.9 83.3 40.6 9 #8 9.8 117.2 127.0 1.4 8.4 85.7 122.2 0.0 0.0 123.6 3.4 2.7 9 o #9 3.2 96.1 99.3 8.4 0.0 0.0 57.0 39.1 40.7 65.4 33.9 34.1 8 o #10 16.3 42.6 58.9 10.8 5.5 33.7 36.0 6.6 15.5 46.8 12.1 20.5 9 o Average All Plots 14.4 103.5 117.9 9.0 6.0 25.2 95.9 20.2 18.2 104.9 23.9 19.3 5.4 0.1 1 8. 7 99.5 118.1 1o. 7 8.1 17 •0 109 •2 14.4 16 •4 119.9 20.0 17.7 3.4 0.0 10.1 107.5 117.6 7.3 3.8 33.4 20.1 89.8 27.8' 20.9 7.4 0.2 Average 1']0 s • 1 - 5 85.4 Average l-os . 6 - 10 ?J 82.5 26.0 Set Nos, 1 - 5, level portions used more heavily by cattle. Nos. 6 - 10, Park peri.rneterslopes used predominantly by game animals. For Fall-\'linter-SpringSeason, 1961-62. Fellet groups aged as current in best judgement of observers. �-22- Table 2.-Checklist of plants present on elk forage utilization plots, Cat Creek Park, Rio Grande County, 1962 (U=Ungrazed Plot; G=Grazed Plot; X=Plant is present). ._----_.-----_ .. _ _-.. Plant Set Number - Paired Plots JiL Syrnbol1f- U COJIUnonName ASI2en {ReI2roduction2 Potr Big Rabbitbrush Chna Little Rabbitbrush Chvd Rose ROS Fringed Sage Arfr Muttongrass Pofe Bluegrasses POA X Sedges CAR Mat Muhl;y: Muri X i1estern Wheatgrass Agsm Junegrass Kocr Needle and Thread stco NeedlegrassesSTI Arizona Fescue Fear Canada Bluegrass Poco Squirreltail Sih;y Mountain Muhl;y: Mumo Fine DroQseed BUr Par:r;yOatgrass Da a Gentian GEN X Borage Beardtongue PEN -Acle. Yarrow X Herbaceous Sages ART Dandelion TAR X Lupines LUI' False Carrot PSE Cinguefoils FOT Lambsguarter CHE Goldenrod SOL Buckwheat ERO Mountain Dandelion AGO X Fleabane ERr Knotweeds rOG Aster ASR CRY Cr;YQtantha ~- Forest Service designations G 112 U JtL JiJL G U G U G #5 U G X X ~ U G JlL .Ji!L ...J!:L U G X X U G U If1L G U G X X X X X ------_. X X X X X X X X. X X X ----_._------X XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X· XI " X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X ,_,_. ____________ 0 .... X X 'X X X X X X X X X _---X X X ~.".~-¥--,---.".~~---~-,.-.,.-~~--.-----.-.--,---X ,-~.-~ . .~ ----.~.---------. ---.---- .. .. X X X X ... X X ,- ~-,.-.-~ ... X X X X X X X X X for species or genera. X X X X X �Table 3.-Swnmary of results of clipping paired Dlots for production and utilization and pellet group counts for .animal stocking rate indices, Cat Creek Park, Rio Grande County - October 1962 - Utilization plot size of 9.6 sq. ft., circular; Ten 0.01 acre plot transects for pellet grouDs. (Wts. net air-dry in I!.rams). Production - UnDrotected Plot Browse & Forbs Grasses Froduction Protected Plot Plot Set 'I!t. % '-'it. ;JUt• Ut. Total Ht. Ut. \it. 1::'6,6 38.9 0.8 2.0 41.1 15.026.7 9 o o 68.4 61.195.5 61.0 61.7 96.861.1 16 o o 0.9 69.2 24.8 52.3 67.8 25.2 53.2 67.8 10 o o 0.7 24.1 17.7 47.2 72.7 19.9 47.9 70.6 6 o 23 o Ivt. Br-owse & 7b Ute 1./ Forbs Grasses Total ;,!t. .#11 16.4 39.7 56.1 2.214.2 #12 1.9 156.6 158.5 0.6 1.3 .7'13 1.3 77.1 78.4 0.4 ::,,14 2.9 64.9 67.8 2.2 #15 Cages Disturbed - One Pair of Plots Left for Elk #16 45.7 60.4 106.1 Ut , , 3.7 42.0 % Ut. Number Days Use Per Acre 2/ Cattle Elk Deer ' 91.9 20.5 39.9 66.1 24.2 81.9 77.2 9 o o I I\) W o ,0 #17 5. 1 142.3 147.4 7.2 0.0 0.0 116.3 26.0 18.3 123.5 23.9 16.2 #18 5.0 121.9 126.9 4.3 0.7 14.0 94.7 27:2 22.3 99.0 27.9 21.2 #19 3.8 121.5 125.3 4.3 0.0 0.0 82.5 39.0 32.1 86.8 38.5 30.7 #20 15.5 76.9 92.4 27.5 0.0 0.0 41.4 35.5 46.2 68.9 23.5 25.4 8 o o Average All Plots 10.8 95.7 106.5 5.8 6.6 39.3 55.3 40.4 43.2 61.1 35.4 44.1 8.3 0.4 0.0 5.6 84.6 90.2 1.4 4.3 62.1 35.6 48.9 50.9 36.9 53.2 56.6 12.4* 0.4* 0.0 16 - 20 15.0 10L.6 119.6 9.4 8. 5 21.2 71.1 33.5 37.0 39.1 34.1 3.8 Average - Ncs, 11 - 14 o o A.verage Los. V3et l[os .--,-,- 15, level portions of Park used more heavily by cattle. 80.5 0.4 Nos. 16 - 20, Park perimeter slores used predominantly by game animals. For summer season 1962. Summer deposited pellet groups 'in best judgement of observers. -:~-Includes transect at Set No. 15. ?J o 0.0 I �-24- Table 4.--Checklist of plants present on cattle forage utilization plots, Cat Creek Park, Rio Orande County, 1962 (U=Ungrazed Plot; CFGrazed Plot; X=Plant is present) • -----_._-- .-- Plant Common Name Big Rabbitbrush Little Rabbitbrush Squirreltail Needle and Thread Needlegrasses Parr;y Oatgrass Western Wheatgrass Arizona Fescue Sedges Mountain Muhl;y Mat Muhl;y Junegrass Wheatgrass Bluegrasses Rush Yarrow Aster Avens Fleabane l,)andelion LUEines Mustard Herbaceous Sages Knotweeds Scarlet Globemallow Buckwheat Cinguefoils 1?eardtongue Puss;ytoes Sunflower .----_ .. __ ._---------_. Set Number - Paired Plots 1113 #14 ~ ff1L #16 #17 Syrnbol~(-U G U G U G U G U G U G Chna X X Chvd X .---.-.-------~ -- --- ... Sih;y: X X X stco X X STI X X X DaEa X X X Agsm X X X X Fear X CAR X X X X X X X X Mumo X X X Muri X X X X X X Kocr X X X X AGH X X POA X X X JUN X X Acla X X ASR X X GEU X ERI X X X X TAR X LUP X X X X CRlJC X ART X X X POG X X SEcO X FRO X POT X X #12 U G ... P~l:L____ ._. ____________ ANT HEL ~~Forest Service designations .__ ..___ . 1118 #20 1119 U ._._--_ G U __ G ._._U G X X X X ..•.. .. X _-_X _--X X .. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X for species or genera. �-25utilization of grasses of 35.4% over~all and 53.2% on the lower Park were noticeably below 1961 figures of 39.0% and 60.8% in the same coverage and area. More tAan making up for that change was the manner in which the cattle worked the slopes for forage. In 1961, perimeter plots averaged only 13.6% utilization (all plant categories) as compared to 1962 when 34.1% was found on comparable plots. The average stocking rate index of 0.4 cow-days use per acre in 1961 on perimeter areas was upped to 3.8 cow-days use per acre in 1962. The Park-wide index fell from 10.7 in 1961 to 8.3 in 1962, however. Summer occupancy by big game of Cat Creek Parks, as in 1961, was very negligible (Table 3). Several cages were moved by what appeared to have been bumping by cattle. The soil was dried out so much that by fall the steel stakes used to anchor the cages were loose. Three pairs of plots in the new series were rendered valueless by the cages being moved, two that had been established for elk and one for cattle (see Table 3). The reliability of the paired plot technique methodology has been di.scussed (Baker, 1962) • Although no statistical testing of data has been done, it is suspected that sample size in Cat Creek Park is not large enough to compensate for errors caused by inaccuracies involved in selecting plots of equal value. This is thought to be particularly true of bunchgrass cover which would cast doubts on results of the Park perimeter plot clipping. Suffice to say that unless demands for known and high precision are requested and required in any similar future study, the chance exists for obtaining misleading results. References Cited: Baker, B. D. 1962. Federal Aid Quarterly Report. Game & Fish Dept., April, pp. 25-39. Prepared by: Bertram D. Baker Date: January, 1964 Approved by: Colo. Richard N. Denney Project Leader Wayne W. Sandfort Chief, Game Research ��January, 1964 -27- JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT St~te of COLORADO Project No. W-10l-R-5 Work Plan No. 1 Title of Job. Period Covered: Game Range Investigations Job. No. 4 Paddock Studies on Effects of Varying Intensities of Deer Use April 1, 1962 to March 31, 1963. Abstract: Sites were selected and the paddock system was constructed to accommodate six two-acre enclosures, one four-acre enclosure, and a holding pen. Base year inventory of vegetative composition was taken with the use of line-interception transects placed in each paddock. Changes in vigor should be reflected in photos of key browse plants taken in each paddock. Ten plants each of the key species, mountain mahogany, serviceberry, and bitterbrush, were chosen by random and all the annual growth on each plant was measured. Measurements were recorded separately for one branch in each of the four cardinal directions as a comparison with the whole bush. We stocked seventeen deer in the paddocks after obtaining weights and blood samples. All deer were removed after a twenty day stocking period. �-28- Through cooperative efforts with the Colorado State University School of Veterinary Medicine, a necropsy was made on each animal. Data collected will be analysed by the veterinarians. Blood test results were negative on all samples for both leptospirosis and brucellosis. Tests made for anaplamosis are positive in eight out of twenty animals tested. Complete pellet counts were made in each paddock to determine the difference between usage in the middle acre and the area adjacent to the fence. Partial rodent control was done with the use of strychnine-impregnated alfalfa and live traps in each paddock. Snow lay at depths of five to eight inches during the period of treatment but almost none fell. Extremely cold weather prevailed. �-29- PADDOCK ST"lJDIESON EFFECTS OF VARYING INTENSITIES OF DEER USE William T. McKean Harold E. Burdick SELECTION OF SITE With the use of aerial photographs of the Little Hills area, tracts of land were selected of adequate size for the paddock system. The areas were selected primarily on southwest exposures because of the lesser degrees of variability in slope and vegetative composition. On the ground inspections of each area were then made by members of the research division of the Game and Fish Department, accompanied, in many cases, by members of the Bureau of Land Management and the U. S. Forest Service. Results of these visual Lnspections reduced the potential area to sufficient surface acres to acco~modate eight two-acre paddocks. A crew of student assistants surveyed the areas and marked them off in two-acre divisions. The district office personnel of the Bureau of Land Management approved a twenty-acre special use permit for this study. Condition and Trend transects as per the Interagency Big Game Range Analysis Procedures, were placed in each two-acre tract to determine the homogeneity in regard to composition, density, age and form class, and vigor of the three key browse speciesj serviceberry, mountain mahogany, and bitterbrush. Results of these transects are listed in Table 1. In addition, actual plant counts were made of the key species and mapped within a one-acre centered plot. Paddock No. 8 had no bitterbrush present and consequently was eliminated. The remainder of the two--acre paddocks were believed to be as homogeneous as possible except for a shortage of mountain mahogany in Paddock No.4. As a result, we made this paddock the fenced control. It had sufficient mahogany outside of the one-acre plot. At this point, a group of Forest Service and State College range men reviewed the findings and proposed design. They approved the objectives and design and made suggestions concerning the stocking rates as well as vegetative studies. �Table 1. Paddock Number - 1 2 3 4 5 6. -7 Results Browse Density and trend transects before treatment, Key SPP. Amut Putr Ground Cover Index Other Area Factor Soil High High % Composition Cerno in paddocks, 1962. Condi tion Ratings Browse Compo Browse Vigor Medium High 25.4 4 44 '1S' n.5 4.7.8 27.0 30.8 30.5 10 00 00 54 48 48 4 7 4.3.8 41.5 41.7 High Medium High 2 94.2 84.7 88.7 High Hedium High 28.4 3 1 12 41 6 88.3 43.0 Hedium Medium Nedium 57 32 15 85.9 83.7 42.0 Nedium Hedium High 46.7 Hedium i-iedium . Medium 30.0 - of condition 22.2 5 High Low I LV o I �-jl- DesLgn of the Paddocks All paddocks were made two acres in size with the exception of Paddock No. 6 which is f'our acres T.':::.is 'was done to avoid having one animal alone in a pasture to gain the desired ten deer days per acre stocking rate. 0 The holding pen is approximately four acres in size and accommodates up to twenty-five deer prior to stocking. The paddocks were designed as shown in Figure 1 with a ten foot lane through the middle to facilitate movement of the deer from the holding pen into each paddock. We constructed a group trap and a squeeze chute in the lane for purposes of handling the deer. Fence Construction The fence enclosing the paddocks is similar to that used in the Little Hills pastures (Figure 2). It was constructed with twelve foot treated posts and two layers of 39-inch woven wire with one strand of barbed wire on the bottom and two on top. There are 1.47 miles of fence. All gates were framed with 2 x 6 lumber and covered with woven wire. Bolt and eye type hinges were used to swing the gates. The total cost of the materials was $1,961. The construction labor was contracted to a private individual for $2,598. The construction was completed on November 20, 1962. We had an access road dozed o~ completely around the paddocks. FQ~ds for all this construction were provided by amendment of Project W-98·-D6. Base Year L~ventory of Vegetative Composition 1. Design 'IDdLocation of Transects We located a one-acre study plot in the center of each paddock (2001 x 2181) to eliminate the fence effect of the small enclosures. In order to obtain pre-inventory data on compositionJ density, age and condition classJ and vigor of existing plant species,a modification of line-interception transects was used. These transects were placed in each paddock after a pattern used by Bertram Baker in his exclosure studies in Colorado. Each one-acre study plot was subdivided into four equal sub-plots 218 feet by 50 feet. Each sub-plot was in turn divided at one foot intervals because we felt that this was the minimu..mdistance which could exist between transects. 'rhusJ we had the possibility of 872 transects. By using a table of random numbers, four transects were located in each fifty foot strip, giving a total of sixteen, 50 foot transects per paddock (Figure 3). Statistical analysis of Baker'S exclosures showed that 16 transects per acre were adequate for most types in western Colorado. �-32Paddock #1 2 Acres 6 Deer 60 DD/A { I~ Paddock #2 2 Acres 4 Deer 40 DD/A C ~ Paddock 116 4 Acres 2 Deer 10 DD/A Paddock #3 2 Acres 3 Deer 30 DD/A \~----\. Paddock #4 2 Acres Fenced Control Ho lding Pen ~ Paddock 115 .2 Acres 2 Deer 20 DD/A < r---------- -I I Paddock /17 1 Acre Unfenced Control I L Figure 1. I I I I I .J Structural layout of paddock system showing size and stocking rates. �Figure 2. Lane for handling deer between paddocks and holding pen. �-34- 264' 218' 14 13 T 1 o \J\ 1S 12 11 10 9 16 -oo N 1 8 7 6 S 2 3 4 Figure 3. Paddock design showing random location of line interception transects. -o ('Y') ('Y') �-35- 2. Measurements All transects were read according to Canfield (1941) with minor exceptions which we made because of vegetative characteristics occurringin this area. Annual grasses and weeds were not measured because, on this site, the number of existing plants is insignificant compared to the total vegetative cover. We made a numerical count on these plants asa record of their occurrence. In browse measurements, all inclusive dead material orinterspaces were disregarded. Measurements were taken from the outermost boundaries of the crown where intercepted by the transect cable, with the exception of current leaf growth. Also, where several shrubs of the same species formed a seemingly closed, intermingled canopy, if the distance between the shrub crowns was no greater than the largest interspace of anyone of the plants involved, one measurement was taken to include all crowns intercepted. Portions of trees under six feet in height were measured as browse intercept as described above. Browse plots were established in conjunction with each transect, as described by Mustard (1958) for purposes of determining composition and age and condition class for all existing browse species. The plots were established one foot wide running adjacent to the full length of the 50 foot transect. Individual plant stems were tallied according to species and age and condition class (Table 3). We have compiled these transect data and prepared a summation table (2). An analysis of variance is in progress but has not been completed in time for this report. We have taken one photo of one marked bush of each key species (Mahogany, serviceberry, and bitterbrush) in each paddock using a lined white backboard. Comparisons with similar photos taken each year should reflect the changes in vigor and condition of these plants (Figure 4). We also have taken one oblique photograph in each paddock, with a permanent stake centered in each picture as well as a data board (Figure 5). These, we hope, will assist in appraising changes in smaller herbaceous vegetation. �Table 2. Paddock Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Summation values from-112 line transects (16 per paddock) located in seven paddocks at Little Hills Experiment Station, 1962. (Figures are per cent of total area, except for annuals). Litter 33.26 30.55 26.43 26.03 28.17 28.61 25.91 Browse 8.33 9.38 10.69 11.61 10.95 10.86 10.33 Hoss 0.46 0.14 0.33 1.42 0.29 0.18 0.39 Grass Perennial 0.34 0.08 0.19 0.53 0.40 0.04 0.94 vleeds Perennial 0.70 0.34 0.44 0.52 0.21 0.38 0.28 Bare Ground & Rock 56.90 59.51 61.92 57.19 59.97 59.92 62.16 Annual Annual Grass Weeds (Counted & Averaged) 1.13 -0.75 -1.69 -4.00 --2.75 3.63 -0.06 2.38 - Overstory 16.93 16.89 14.06 14.50 13.95 9.46 12.85 I Table 3. Total browse plant numbers as counted on I' x 50' plots by paddock, age class, origin, grouping, and hedging class, without respect to species, 1962. Class Nature 299 361 422 586 465 498 343 A~e Pad 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Seed 75 44 36 49 32 44 10 Young l25 105 ·129 179 93 158 114 Decadent 166 180 198 212 152 189 154 Dead 120 183 192 194 186 266 162 Ori in SPT See 21 54 9 35 3 33 11 38 6 26 40 4 0 10 Grou ing Si. C1. 24 51 28 16 11 25 17 32 14 18 9 35 8 2 1 211 181 185 290 196 221 155 Hedi7.ing 2 3 191 383 351 341 477 315 571 359 283 449 572 332 224 404 W 0\ I �Figure 4. Mountain mahogany bush and backboard for estimation of change in vigor due to treatment. �-38- Production and Utilization of Key Species In an effort to determine the production and utilization in the paddock systems, we chose ten plants of each of the key species, serviceberry, mountain mahogany, bitterbrush, and measured all of the annual growth on each plants. Where evenly dispersed populations of a species occurred, plants were chosen by random numbers along the existing line transects. One foot intervals were chosen as the closest any two plants could fall, thus giving a possibility of 800 locations along the 16, 50 foot transects. Where limited populations existed, each plant was numbered and ten numbers were chosen by random to give the ten plants. From each point chosen along the line transect, the closest plant was taken outside a three foot wide belt on either side of the existing transects. This was done to eliminate the possibility of obliterating the transect while measuring the bush. Maps of each paddock were made with lines drawn from the chosen point on the transect to the actual plant, indicating approximate bearing and distance. Four specific branches were tagged on each plant in each of the four cardinal directions (Figure 4). Each branch contained 12 measurable stems and a tag; then 10 more stems and another tag. The first 12 stems on each branch will give us the opportunity to check the system used in the Big Game Range Analysis Procedures where only twelve measurements are taken on each plant. The additional ten measurements combined with the original twelve give 22 measurements per branch. We did this because data obtained from stem length measurements (1954-59) in the Little Hills pastures indicated a need for 22 measurements per plant in order to be statistically accurate. The remainder of the plant was then measured to allow comparisons with individual branches. Measurements were made in millimeters because all other Little Hills measurements were so measured. All stems were painted with fingernail polish at the annual growth ring. Spurs were also counted. Some 38,763 stems were measured. 1. 7. 5,355; 2. 6,413. 5,895; 3. These occurred by Paddock as follows: 5,556; 4. 4,167; 5. 5,949; 6. 5,428; This task was begun on August lOth and pursued interruptedly until December lOth. A.major part of the work was accomplished during September when two three-man crews were engaged almost full time with it. All field sheets have been tabulated and an anylysis of variance is being made to determine differences between paddocks. The Statistical Laboratory is also making a correlation study of the relationship between the tagged branches and the total. �Figure 5. Oblique view of paddock vegetation densi~ and a tagged bush (right foreground) for production-utilization measurements. �-40- Paddock Stocking In preparation for the new paddock stocking, we placed deer in a holding pen until the proper number were captured. Due to the small size of the pen and the large number of deer confined, supplemental feeding was required. Key browse plants from the surrounding area were cut and placed in the pen during the last ten days of the holding period. On January 8, 1963, we put fifteen deer in their respective paddocks. There were 3, 4, and 6 deer placed in the two-acre paddocks and 2 deer in a four-acre paddock, thus giving the desired stocking rates of 30, 40, 60, and 10 deer days per acre respectively. Because of insufficient numbers of suitable animals, Paddock #5, which contains two deer at the rate of 20 DD/A, was not stocked until two days later. To compensate for this discrepancy in stocking rates, an additional deer was placed in the paddock for a period of four days. Both bucks and does were used in the stocking program. Weights were taken on all deer (Table 4) and blood samples were taken on ten deer. One animal was lost on January 9 apparently because of overexertion during the stocking operations. Another animal was immediately placed in the paddock so as to maintain the desired stocking rate. All deer were removed from their respective paddocks on January 28 after a twenty day grazing period. Weather Conditions During the twenty day period of treatment (January 8-28) snow lay on the ground in each paddock at depths ranging from six to eight inches, except immediately beneath the pinon and juniper trees where small patch of bare ground and needles were exposed. Precipitation, in the form of snow, fell on four days for a total of .14 inches moisture during the period of treatment. Most of the days were clear or partly cloudy. Maximum temperatures ranged from -6 to +49 and averaged 29.4. Mimimum temperatures ranged from an extreme low of -48 up to +3 and averaged -9. There were twelve nights out of the twenty when the temperature was below zero. Ten of these were colder than -10. The -48 reading on January 19th was the coldest observed in sixteen years of records at Little Hills. The extreme cold possibly has a bearing on the weight loss by all deer regardless of stocking rates (Table 4). �Table 4. Paddock Number' 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 Paddock stocking record, January 8-28, 1963. Deer Days Use Per Acre 60 40 2 2 2 3 3 3 5 5 5 6 6 Open Range Open Range Average 30 20 10 --- Sex Doe Doe ilie Buck Doe Doe Buck Buck Doe Doe Buck Doe Buck Buck Doe Doe Doe Buck Buck Doe Live ldeights Age Years* . Before After 2 115.5 135 140 123 3 128 8 117 142 121 2 8 105 113 117 119 3 110 1 94 1 105 95 1 104 92 121.5 8 132 101 1 91 2 123 123 105 1 113 118 105 1 2 131 135 120 -7 121 121 2 110 1 117 2 123.5 112.5 -3 121 112 3 -- Per Cent ~1eight Increase Decrease 14.8 12.1 8.6 14.8 7.1 1.7 14.5 9.5 11.5 8.3 9.9 0,0 7.1 11.0 3.0 - -- 0.0 6.0 --- 7.4 * Approximately eight months could be correctly added to each age shown. Paddock Bean Decrease 9.9 10.9 5.7 7.0 3.0 Temperature ~lhen Rerr.oved 1070 1070 1040 1070 1020 1030 1020 1010 1040 1030 1040 1030 1010 1040 1030 loEP 1060 1070 1050 1050 1040 I -!="" I-' I �-42- Physiological Effect on Deer 1. Methods Through the cooperative efforts of Dr. Davis and Dean Jensen of the Colorado state University School of Veterinary Medicine, a complete necropsy was made on all of the animals. The data collected included: rumen samples; intestinal parasites; ecto-parasites; fecal samples; blood samples; various weights of internal organs; ether extract of bone marrow; tests for brucellosis and leptospirosis, as well as anaplasmosis reactors; urine anaylsis. We also collected embryos from twelve does and weighed, sexed, and measured these. Mandibles and eyeballs were removed and preserved. Tests on the collected data will be made by the Colorado State University School of Veterinary Medicine as time permits. 2. Results Tests made on the blood samples taken prior to stocking were negative for both brucellosis and leptospirosis. Tests made for anaplasmosis have indicated that five out of twenty animals are 4+ reactors and three are 3+ reactors. Studies have shown that anaplasmosis is not seriously pathogenic to deer but that they may serve as transmitters for this disease to domestic livestock. If a comparable percentage of the entire herd is infected with this disease, serious effects could result in domestic livestock herds. Final analysis of the remaining data has not been completed. Pellet Counts We made complete counts of all pellet groups in each paddock, both inside and outside of the one-acre study plot (Table 5). This was done primarily to determine the difference between the use adjacent to the fence and that in the centrally located study plot. The data will also be used to check the defecation rate figure of 13-15 pellet groups per deer per day as originally established in the Little Hills pastUres. Rodent Control Because of the tendency for large populations of rodents (especially cottontail rabbits) to concentrate in protected areas, we placed strychnine impregnated alfalfa, in small quantities, in each paddock to partially control this influx. In addition, rodent live-traps were constructed and placed in the three paddocks which seemed to have the heaviest populations of rodents existing. It is planned to transplant these animals to other areas. �Figure 6. Capturing deer from the paddocks preparatory to weighing and taking temperatures. Group trap, chute and paddock fence in background. �Table 5. Total pellet counts for each paddock both inside and outside the one-acre stuo'y plot. Paddock Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Actual Stocking Rate DD/Acre 60 (2A.) 40 30 Fenced Control 20 10 (4 A.) Unfenced Control 11 Using 13 pellet ~I Using 15 pellet No. Animals Stocked 6 4 3 0 2 2 ? Pellet Grouos Inside Outside Total 909 749 477 000 316 204 429 groups per deer per day. groups per deer per day. 881 570 372 000 327 327 -- 1790 1319 849 000 643 531 429 Gr~~s Per Deer Per Day Inside Outside Total 7.57 9.35 7.95 7.33 7.13 6.20 -- -- 7.9 . 5.1 8.18 8.18 -- -- 14.9 16.5 14.1 -- 16.1 13.3 -- Calculated Stocking Rate Per Acre 68.84'y 59.673/ 50.75 32.70 -- 24.80 10.23 33.00 43.40 28.30 -- 21.43 8.85 28.60 I +=+=I �-45- Prepared by: William T. McKean and Harold E. Burdick Date: JanuarYJ 1964 Approved by: Richard N. Denney Project Leader Wayne W. Sandfort Chief, Game Research �-46BID AND AGREEMENT ITEM: Construction of what will be known as the Little Hills Experiment Station Deer Paddocks. SIZE: The paddocks will be of two sizes. Five will be two acres each and one will be of four acres. A third holding pen will be constructed to be approximately four acres. The two acre paddocks will each be 330 feet by 264 feet. The four acre paddock will be 660 feet by 264 feet and the holding pen the same. A total of 7,788 feet will be involved (1.475). Five of the paddocks each adjoin one another in a series. The sixth, four acre paddock and the holding pen, are separated from the others by a twelve foot lane which runs the length of the series. MATERIALS: Supplied and placed at the site of construction. FENCE SPECIFICATIONS: The paddock fence which is to retain deer, shall be constructed of 12 foot long creosote-treated posts spaced at 16 foot intervals in line except the first ones from each corner which shall be spaced 12 feet from the corner posts. Two sections of 39 inch woven wire will be used. The bottom section shall be attached to the 12 foot posts four inches above the ground level, and the top section shall be attached immediately to and above the bottom section. The top and bottom sections will be tied together along the place of meeting by at least three pieces of galvanized wire spaced along each interval between the 12 foot posts. One strand of barbed wire shall be placed along the posts half way between the ground level and the bottom of the lower section of the woven wire. Two other single strands of barbed wire will be installed, one 6 inches above the top section of woven wire and the second strand 6 inches above the first. Corner posts and the first line posts shall be set into the ground a minimum of 36 inches and line posts 30 inches deep and thoroughly tamped as they are set. Slash and trash necessarily accumulated inside each paddock fence will be removed by the contractor. Ten gates will be constructed and hung on corner or brace posts as instructed. Each gate shall be approximately eight feet square. They will be constructed of 2" x 10" lumber and covered with woven wire. Hinges will be of the bolt and eye type. Outside fences will be dozed clear by the Department to permit access by a tractor-powered digger. Division fences however will not be so cleared, and construction will need to be done so as to disturb the existing vegetation as little as possible. Approximately 80 holes will need to be dug by hand or with a two-man gasdriven digger. Approximately 500 posts in all are to be set. SCHEDULE: Assuming that materials are available on schedule, the completion date will be December 1, 1962. AGREEMENT: I agree to construct the Little Hills Experiment Station Paddocks according to the above specifications for the total amount of $ All materials will be furnished by the Colorado Game and Fish Department and fence lines marked. Tools, labor, and transportation will be furnished by me. Procedure for payment for said work shall be promptly started after acceptance of the work is given by the project leader for the Department. Date of bid: Signed Address _ �January, 1964 -47- JOB COMPLETION REPORT INVESTIGATIONS PROJECTS State of COLORADO Project No. W-10l-R-5 Work Plan No. 2 Title of Job: Period Covered: Game Range Investigations Job No. 1 Little Hills Grazing Study April 1, 1962 to March 30, 1963. Abstract: Eighteen yearling heifers had to be stocked in the pastures rather than twelve two-year oldsj schedules were maintained. During the spring, sheep losses due to coyotes, bobcat, and maverick ewes were a bother but the scheduled animal days use were achieved. Fall brought an exasperating delay in delivery of the sheep until November 1. We stocked all pastures concurrently and succeeded in grazing for the desired sheep days, but the relation pattern had to be broken. An initial effort was made to determine weight gains or losses of grazed livestock by pasture and season. Results were not very satisfactory, but indicated that animals in heavy use pastures lost weight both in spring and fall, with one exception. A total of 241 deer were captured of which 36 were recatches from previous years. We placed ear tags and ribbons on 171 of these. A new group trap and lane enabled us to fill all deer pastures at an earlier average date. This reduced the number of deer necessary to be enclosed to 95. Average age of the deer caught seems to be decreasing, with fifty-one per cent being fawns and yearlings and very few old deer (over five years) . Deer removals took about a month and were accomplished on schedule. Winter losses increased particularly in pastures four (31%) and seven (30%) . Utilization estimates made by paced transect in deer pastures, after the browsing season 1961-62, indicated an average use figure by pasture as follows: #3 - 24.6%j #4 - 36.5%j #6 - 13.8%j and #7 - 15.7%. Because of a good growth of herbaceous species during the spring of 1962, the utilization estimates in all livestock pastures decreased from six to thirty-five per cent below the 1961 data. �-48- Line transects in deer pastures were re-read during 1962. Preliminary tabulation of the results indicates that vegetative degeneration is occurring in almost all of them but not in proportion to the browsing intensity rates. In a study of vigor of 1,817 grasses and weeds as influenced by grazing rates (or other factors) the plants in heavy use pastures have definitely decreased in size. This was true even in the deer pasture number four but to a lower degree. Moderate and light grazing have not appreciably influenced vigor of herbaceous plants. Data derived from standard Production-Utilization transects within "key areas" in each deer pasture showed much heavier use than did data from ocular estimates along paced transects, covering all exposures and types. Pellet group counts were made along standard "Condition and Trend" transects in each deer pasture. Comparison between these and known stocking rates gave good results in light and moderately stocked pastures but inconsistent results in heavier-used pastures. Weather data as taken at the Station for seventeen years is included, with mean annual precipitation of 12.68 inches being shown. Great variation in monthly temperatures is evident and expected through the years. Over 105 vistors were toured and talked to on nine occasions. PASTURE STOCKING - LIVESTOCK CATTLE - The annual stocking of cattle in the pastures started on May 2, 1962 and terminated on June 18, 1962 for the spring grazing. The fall stocking program began on October 1 and ended on October 30, 1962. No serious mishaps were encountered in either season but there were some anxieties. The desired stocking days were achieved for the most part at the times when they had been planned. A change in the lessee of the Square S ranch, from whom we have obtained cattle in the past, necessitated our looking elsewhere. Unfortunately we were obliged to use yearlings instead of the desired two-year olds. Grazing equivalents for the difference in ages called for eighteen yearlings. SHEEP The spring stocking of sheep was started on May 2, 1962 and ended on July 3, 1962. At the outset of work on May 2nd two ewes escaped from the flock and were never recovered though many man hours time were devoted to chasing them. Another ewe died in pasture nine. The owner was reimbursed for these three animals. An unknown number of lambs were killed by predators or died; they were not paid ~or. �Table 1.--Summary of Stocking Records for Livestock Grazing Year 1962; and Deer Grazing Year 1962-63 i Pasture Class oflNo No. I Animal 1 Sheep 32 J Spring No.. Fall I Dates Stocked Removed Ju1 3 35 Nov 1 Nov 24 Dates Stocked Removed Jun 9 I I I Acres Season of Use I I I Total Days E.E.ring 736 Fall 805 Season 1541 Spring 387 243 166.25 Fall Season 630 198 lSErin~ t 161.81 I Fall 108 Season 306 1 I AUM , A! AUM 3.1 2.8 1.5 19.3 20.5 10.0 36.8 44.9 20.0 ~.5 76.37 Remarks 26.8 51.3 8.6 8.1 16.7 4.4 3.6 8.0 Short Year1in~s 1:2/3 2 Cattle 18 May 14 Jun 5 18 Oct 16 Oct 30 3 I Cattle 18 May 2 May 14 18 Oct 10 Oct 16 Nov 7 Dec 20 Oct 24 Dee 1 Apr 5 Apr 15 161.81 Winter 1 2111 70.4 2.3 Apr 8 143.64 Winter 1 5076 169.2 0.85 14.0 14.0 28.0 41.0 6.1 6.1 3.05 t 2.1 I 48.4 2.0 I , t 4 Deer 20 Deer 45 31 I May 2 May 161 35 Nov 2 Deer 10 6 I Deer 10 7 Deer 10 Oct 30 Nov 14 Oct 26 Oct 29 Oct 24 Nov 14 8 Cattle 18 Jun 18 18 Oct 1 9 Sheep 331 May 16 Jun 9 35 Nov 2 5 Sheep Jun 5 I 1 - Short Yearlings 1:2/3 I lSpring 418.5 420.0 Nov 15 85.42!Fall 1 Season 838.5 1 Apr 2 1231 85.42 !Winter Apr 3 Mar 28 1452 98.93 Winter Apr 4 Mar 11 1167 90.67 Winter Apr 1 Spring 234 153 Oct 10 205.43 Fall Season 387 Spring 747,0 822.51 Nov 25 155.55 Fall Season I 1569.5 I I 2.3 38.9 Short Yearlings 1:2/3 5.2 39.5 5.1 40.3 10.3 19.9 24.9 6.2 27.4 i 5.7 i 52.3 3.0 I I .j::"" \.0 I . �-50- The fall stocking started on November 1, 1962 and ended on November 25, 1962 for all pastures. Unfortunately the sheep contractor failed to provide the sheep on October 1 as specified. So each pasture had to be stocked during November. The required sheep-days were .obtained but the pasture rotation plan was broken. Fortunately deep snows and cold did not arrive to interrupt the grazing entirely as it very well might have at so late a date. One hundred and five head of sheep were obtained and stocked at thirty-five head per pasture. (Table 1). LIVESTOCK WEIGHTS For the first time in the history of this experiment both sheep and cattle were weighed before and after entering each pasture in an effort to determine the effect of the various grazing intensities on the animals. Portable scales were borrowed from the Rio Blanco County Agent. A breakdown of these weights may be found in Table 2. Animals in heavy use pastures lost weight. Others gained varying amounts. In doing this work we neglected to allow the standard 12 hours time between weighings for shrinkage. This fact diminished the value of our figures somewhat. It will be corrected in the future. On one occasion the sheep were quite wet when weighed. Weight changes in ewes due to birth of lambs are not corrected in the spring data either. Table 2.--Average Seasonal Gains of Eighteen Yearling Heifers and Thirtyfive Adult Ewes by Pasture, 1962 Heavily Grazed .:'No',D,eer Season Moderately Grazed Including Deer* Moderately Grazed No Deer Cattle Past. No. Pounds Per Head Spring Fall 2 2 22·5 -24.3 Past. No. Pounds Per Head 3 3 15.6 17·0 Past. No. Pounds Per Head 8 8 68.6 6.4 Sheep Past. No. Pounds Per Head Spring Fall * ** 1 1 - 3.0 - 5.7 Past. No. Pounds Per Head 5 5 10.1 3·7** Past. No. Pounds Per Head 9 9 During 5 winter months - not in spring and fall. Wet from rain when weighed on removal from pasture five. 6.9 1.2 �-51- PASTURE STOCKING - DEER Deer tra~~ing started on October 24, 1962, Due to extremely warm, dry weather conditions, a majority of the migratory deer herd did not reach the winter range until late in the season. Because of this, the area received somewhat lighter hunting ~ressure and fewer deer than usual were found in the bottoms in October. A new grou~ tra~, cou~led with a fenced lane running ~arallel to existing ~asture fences, made it easier to transfer deer from Corral Gulch to ~astares 5, 6, and 7, Through the use of this grou~ tra~, the deer could also be tagged and transferred to various other pas tureawf th little difficulty. The second cutting of alfalfa on a small field within the ~asture 7 wing tra~ was left standing. This resulted in a heavy concentration of deer later in the season and ~roved very effective in filling other ~astures. The attraction of water at a running well in Corral Gulch also hel~ed us catch deer at this site. Twenty-four box tra~s were baited on November 20. Because of lightweather conditions, 90% of these were ~lacedon the ridgeto~s. In s~ite of the weather, they ~roved very effective and all ~astureswere filled to the desired stocking rate by December 20, 1962. Deer tra~~ed after this date were tagged and released at the tra~~ing location. The tra~~ing ~rogram was ceased on February 5, 1963 due to the lack of good tra~~ing weather. A total of 171 new deer were ca~tured and tagged during the 1962-63 season. In addition, 36 recatches were made from ~revious years and 34 deer were put into the pastures through wing traps where it was impossible to tag them. Of the total 241 deer captured, 95 were placed in the pastures. Of the remaining 146, 20 were used in the new paddock study (WP-l, J-4), 28 were transported to Colorado State University for various experimental purposes, 6 were donated to the U. S. Bureau of Sport Fisheries and Wildlife in Denver for the same purpose, and 92 were released after tagging. These deer were caught in respect to the various methods as follows: Group traps -32; Wing traps - 74; Box traps - 135. Of this total 95 deer put into the pastures, only 9 were fawns or 9.5%. This was a result of the ~rogram initiated last year in which it was decided to rerrain from using fawns in order to cut down on the winter mortality. These nine fawns were put in through wing traps with adults where sorting was either impossible or impractical. Table 3 shows the breakdown of sex and age groups for deer trapped this year. �-52- Table 3.--Sex and Age Groups of Deer Trapped at Little Hills. Bucks Does bO C/l TOTAL H I'd Unknown bO H ::l +J ~ ..-I ~ C/l ~ ~ H I'd eo bO 'r'l Q) Total Q) H ::l +J ..-I I'd ~ ..-I 'r'l C/l c:l H I'd Q) H ::l +J ..-I ~ ..-I 'r'l C/l I'd Q) H ..-I >t I'd ::E +J 0 E-l H I'd ::l +J I'd 1%1 ~ ::E +J 0 E-l 0 4 4 8 0 1 2S 26 8 0 0 8 8 S 29 42 1 3 4 8 0 3 20 23 0 0 0 0 1 6 24 31 19 4 5 28 25 1 ·8 34 21 0 0 21 65 5 13 83 0 7 1 8 0 1 6 7 0 0 0 0 0 8 7 15 20 18 14 52 25 6 59 90 29 0 0 29 74 24 73 17 I.!1 ~ Untagged Deer Put Into Pastures Tagged Dee.r Put Into Pastures Tagged Deer Released Tagged Deer Put Into Paddocks ~ 'r'l ..-I 1962-63 Q) I'd ::E +J 0 E-l 1%1 >t I'd Q) 1%1 ~ ~ Q) ::E +J 0 E-l 1%1 I'd ~ Q) .!I Total does not include 36 recatches from previous years. Total Bucks (Yearlings and Adults)----------------------------32---l8.7% Total Does (Yearlings and Adults)-----------------------------65---38.0% Total Fawns---------------------------------------------------45---26.3% Total Unknown-------------------------------------------------29---17.0% DEER REMOVALS Early stocking resulted in fewer deer needed in the pastures, thus decreasing the problem of removing them. All pastures were emptied by April 10. The period of deer driving extended from March 11 to April 10, 1963. Aside from permanent personnel, one laborer and three college students assisted in the drives. A total of 40 individual drives were made to remove the deer from the pastures. �-53- Pasture Number Calculated Deer Days Desired Approximate Deer Days Achieved 3 4 5 6 7 2427 5746 1281 1484 907 2111 5076 1231 1452 725 Deviation Over Under 316 670 50 32 182 Although snow depth and duration were unusually light, periods of severe cold during January may have resulted in greater winter losses within the pastures. Twenty-one deer are known to have died of natural causes. This resulted in a 22% mortality rate in the pastures as a whole, thus an under stocking resulted in most pastures. Of these twenty-one mortalities, fourteen (67%) occurred in pasture four which is the heavy use pasture. Browse production in this pasture has deteriorated to a low degree. Table 4 gives a breakdown of mortality rates in the various pastures. Table 4.--Mortality Rate by Natural Causes in Pastures Pasture .Number Total Deer Stocked Total Deer Winter Killed Percent Mortality 3 4 5 6 7 20 45 10 10 10 3 14 1 0 3 15 31 10 0 30 TOTAL 95 21 22% UTILIZATION ESTIMATES - DEER (1961-62) The method of obtaining use estimates of browse by means of 1/100 acre plots around grid corners was attempted in 1960 and 1961. Its several disadvantages, discussed in the last report, have lead us to return to the standard paced transect system as used in the livestock pastures. Results of this work during the spring of 1962 appear to be more consistent (Table 5). We were unable to catch enough deer (1961-62) to stock all the pastures. Hence pasture five went unstocked. Others were satisfactory. �-54- Table 5.--Average Percent Utilization of Browse Plants by Deer, Winter 1961-62, by Pasture Pasturef~3 Pasture1~4 Pasturef~5 Pasturef~6 Pastureff07 Moderate Heavy Moderate Moderate Light No. % Hits Util No. % Hits Util No. % Hits Util No .• % Hits Util No. % Hits Util Serviceberry Mtn.. Mahogany Bitterbrush Big Rabbitbrush Lanceleaf Rabbitbr. Little Rabbitbrush Big Sagebrush Snowberry Oak Horsebrush Winter fat Pine Juniper Ribes Oregon Grape Ckr. depressus .Mormon Tea 57 26.7 39 52.2 13 42.7 3 20.0 49 48 12 5 8 15 14 19 28 16 13 3 13.9 33.1 25.7 51.7 52 26 13 13.1 28.1 30.2 18 22 14 3 5 13 .• 3 5.2 0.0 0.0 1.0 8 10 3 0.0 11.2 0.0 15.0 1 2 0.0 0.0 1 2 4 0.0 2.0 0.0 1 2 0.0 0.0 Average 128 13.8 125 15.7 Browse Species 13 19 24 12 4 2 9 6 16.2 23.9 0.0 4.4 7.5 50.0 1 T 2 0 1 20.0 205 24.6 6 2 3 4 1 1 187 35.8 65.4 50.8 81.0 55.6 2.5 15.7 0.1 12.3 25.0 O~O 20.5 0.0 10.0 36.5 N 0 N E 6 UTILIZATION ESTIMATES - LIVESTOCK Forage production during the spring of 1962 was better than average. A good snow pack, beginning in October 1961, occurred. This snow melted in large part during a brief period of unseasonable warm weather in February. However, the ground was not deeply frozen and water absorption was good. Timely rains and snows in April also were a help. As a consequence of the above, utilization estimates dropped somewhat from the long time average in almost all pastures, particularly during spring grazing (Table 6). This year only the seasonal averages by pasture for browse, grass and weeds are being included in this report. The long summation tables are filed with field data sheets. No changes were made in the paced transects procedure as previously described. �-55- Table 6.--Average Utilization Estimates for Browse, Grass and Weeds by Livestock, 1962 1 SheeE H S F Browse 19 23 2 Cattle H S F 10 9 Grass Weeds 10 10 27 4 20 8 27 8 Pastures 3 5 Cattle M SheeE M S F S F 2 2 1 14 3 16 2 6 1 8 Cattle M S F 3 3 9 SheeE M S F 2 6 8 6 8 7 18 2 19 6 RE-READING LINE TRANSECTS A student crew of four men re-read eighty line transects in pastures three, four, six, and seven. These pastures had been grazed or browsed a full five years since last being read. Transects in other pastures will be read during the summer of 1963. Because of this no attempt is being made at this time to analyse the data for differences, but Table 7 gives the summation values. Table 7.--Comparison Between Summation Values for Eighty Line Transects in Four Deer Pastures as Measured Summer 1957 and Remeasured Summer 1962 No. of Bare Bare Ground, OverPasture Year'Transects Litter Rock Moss Browse Grass Weeds Erosion Pan & Story Bare Rock 3 4 6 7 1957 1962 1957 1962 1957 1962 1957 1962 30 25 13' 12 36.44 31.33 25.78 20.55 38.14 20.71 31.90 19.00 22.06 2.73 0.23 21.55 21.50 4.68 0.87 19.62 24.89 2.39 0.20 25.99 18.76 2.08 0.27 17.72 (1.32) 0.18 1.09 (1.65) 0.34 1.84 (0.98) 0.60 1.99 (0.60) 0.99 0.89 (40.18) 2.73 42.87 (51..14) 4.68 52.11 (35.99) 2.39 48.03 (48.74) 2.08 59.74 With regard to total numbers of browse plants occurring in two x fifty feet plots along the transect lines, and without regard to species, the results thus far obtained aret pasture three - 679; pasture four - 374; pasture six - 225; and pasture seven - 254. Similar totals by age class, grouping, and hedging class are at hand but will not be presented until all nine pastures can be included. 12.48 15.78 7.44 9.88 9.44 12.34 11.61 12.55 �-56- VIGOR SURVEY OF GRASS AND FORBS A large quantity offield data collected during the summer of 1961, and briefly discussed in the report for the last segment, has been further tabulated. Parts of it were turned over to student assistant Ronald E. Lambertson who prepared, during the summer and fall months, a school paper from it. The following constitutes the essence of his paper, abridged and edited. The objective of this work was to compare the vigor of selected ungrazed plants in each pasture to that of ungrazed plants inexclosures. Ten grass species and ten forbswere measured in varying ways depending upon the species. Of these twenty plants, ten of the more abundant were selected for study for this report. Measurements were taken during late July and August, 1961 by student assistant B. A. Goetze. A. series of paced transects was established (five chains apart) to determine the locations of the plants to be measured. Measurement stations were located every ten paces along the transects, which traversed each pasture across contours in an east-west direction. In the one-acreexclosures the transects were located eighteen feet apart and crossed the narrow width of the area. A four pace interval was used. Almost invariably an insufficient sample resulted and further random search was necessary in the exclosures. At each "hitllthe examiner measured in millimeters the amount of unused foliage on the nearest grass and forb of the desired species. An unused plant was one that had not been utilized by any animal during that growing season. It was necessary for the examiner to look closely to determine that a small animal had not taken a portion of the plant. Different plant species were measured by different methods. The four methods and the species for which they were used are: 1. Crown Diameter -- The crown diameter method was used for prostrate plants such as Low Phlox (Phlox caespitosa) and Cryptantha (Cryptantha sp.). Two measurements were taken at right angles to one another-alld an average computed. 2. Stem and Leaf Height -- The stem and leaf height method was used to measure Gumweed (Grindeliasp.), Snakeweed (Gutierrezia sp.), and Wright s Sage (Artemisiawrlghtii). The ruler was placed next to the plant at ground level. Measurement included the stem and the length of the uppermost leaf. That portion of the stem above the uppermost leaf and the flower head were not included. I 3. Culm and Leaf Height -- The culm and leaf height method was used for western wheatgrass (Agropyron smithii) and Beardless Bluebunch Wbeatgrass (Agropyron inermi). This consisted of measuring the culm of the grass from ground level up to the highest leaf and included the length of the highest leaf. That portion of the culm above the highest leaf was not included. �-57- 4. Leaf Height -- The leaf height method was used for plants with basal leaves such as Indian Ricegrass (Oryzopsis hymenoides), sedges (Carex spp.), and Needle-and Thread Grass ,Stipa comata). Only the length of the longest basal leaf was measured in these species. For comparative purposes, the mean pasture figures for each species were divided by the mean figures for the five exclosures. This allowed the vigor of those plants measured in the pastures to be expressed as a per cent of the unused exclosure plants. Per Cent Vigor Mean Measurement for Pasture Mean Measurement for Exclosures 1-5 Two problems tend to confound the'·,datato be presented. 1. Rabbits and smaller rodents tended to congregate in the exclosures and to make finding truly ungrazed plants more difficult than anticipated. 2. In the heavily grazed pastures (1 and 2) it was difficult to find ungrazed plants in sufficient numbers except in rather unavailable situations. Though believed to have influenced these results somewhat, these variables are not believed to be of major consequence. Further study may be necessary because of them. In this study only the factor of grazing is measured; soil, exposure, water etc., or their interactions are not. This report discusses results of a study involving 1,817 plants comprising 987 grasses and 830 weeds. Table 8 shows the distribution of the sample by pasture and species. Here it will be seen that, in spite of a seemingly large total plants measured, there is much to be desired for sample numbers of some species and some pastures. RESULTS Grasses showed the greatest loss of vigor in pastures one through five which have been grazed for twelve years. The grasses in deer pastures six and seven,which had been grazed for ten years, and in livestock pastures eight and nine (eight years), appeared to have more vigor than the baseexclosure grasses. It is difficult to explain the reasons for this, except perhaps that these pastures had been grazed only long enough and heavy enough to stimulate growth. See Tables 9 and 10. The grazing effects upon grasses in the pastures were observed as follows: Pasture 1 Heavy Use Sheep. The mean vigor for the grasses in this pastur~ was 77.9% of the base,which was the lowest vigor of all the pastures. An examination of this pasture shows clearly the many bad effects of over grazing. �Table 8.--Samp1e Size, Number of Selected Grasses and Weeds Measured for Vigor During Summer, 1961 by Pasture, Exc1osure, and Species 5 Pastures 6 7 8 9 Total 1/ Contro1- Exc10sures 1 2 3 4 Grasses Oryzopsis hymenoides Agropyron inermii Stipa comata Agropyron smithii Carex sp. 73 97 69 86 59 22 40 5 5 14 45 32 5 7 21 30 47 9 8 32 51 46 6 7 12 25 21 12 17 11 29 24 20 7 8 50 21 8 9 11 30 75 15 21 29 21 34 9 17 19 303 340 89 98 157 52 46 4 16 16 Weeds: Phlox sp. Cryptantha sp. Gutierrezia sp. Artemisia wrightii Grindelia sp. 119 93 61 53 59 15 17 7 5 5 31 31 10 5 15 44 46 10 6 18 23 24 14 17 25 16 16 18 19 11 19 13 12 12 17 19 6 13 13 25 40 34 26 16 18 35 21 21 14 8 242 208 131 107 142 1817 20 15 8 8 16 Species: - J:/ Pasture 10 (control) not included in this analysis. I \J1 CP I �Table 9.--Vigor Ratings of Gra~~es in Little Hills Experimental Pastures Species Basel/ Oryzopsis hymenoides Agropyron inermi Stipa comata Agropyron smithii Carex spp , 306.5 mm. 286.4 235.1 246.5 188.9 Average 1/ 2/ Pastures11 5 6 1 2 3 4 74.2 89.4 68.1 102.5 55.7 75.2 80.7 11$.9 111.2 69.9 84.9 98.7 87.5 126.2 75.7 87.6 112.0 85.8 108.8 86.3 82.2 110.4 109.5 127.2 84.8 77 .9 90.5 94.6 96.1 101.0 7 8 9 Ave. 86.3 119.5 107.1 105.7 99.9 100.9 118.1 94.3 101.8 88 .• 4 102.1 110.8 100.3 104.6 90.2 125.4 147.2 128.8 119.9 122.1 90.9 109.6 99.7 111.9 85.8 103.5 100.6 101.2 128.6 Average measurement in millimeters of grasses in exclosures one through five. The vigor rating of the grasses in pastures expressed as a per cent of the base. I \.Jl xo I Table 10 .• --Vigor Ratings of Forbs in Little Hills Experimental Pastures Pastures17 5 6 Species Basel) 1 2 3 4 Phlox spp. Cryptantha sp , Gutierrezia sp. Artemisia sp. Grindelia sp. 98.5 79.0 179 •. 2 172.9 141.2 47.5 41.8 63.5 86.1 59.0 67.8 116 .• 5 91.1 89.4 72.0 81.0 136.9 102.4 120.7 76.9 58.5 85.7 95.6 120.8 88.8 98.9 72.1 96.4 112.3 85.3 52.9 86.8 99.3 81.2 88.1 Average 7 8 9 Ave. 93.1 92.4 109.0 79.9 105 •. 1 91.1 101.9 95.6 124.3 103.1 79.6 96.8 111.2 113.3 84.4 78.4 66.3 107.4 101.1 95.5 77 .3 90.0 96.9 105.3 85.5 99.9 97.9 93.0 86.9 1,/ Average measurement in millimeters of forbs in exclosures one through five. 1:.1 The vigor rating of forbs in the pastures expressed as a per cent of the base. �-60- Pasture 9 Moderate Sheep. The grasses in this pasture showed little effect from grazing. The mean vigor was an unusually high of 128.6% of the base. When sheep are not overstocked on a range, it is apparent that they will utilize primarily forbs. Under this type of grazing, the vigor of grasses probably increases because of a lack of competition from the forbs. Pasture 2 Heavy Use Cattle. The mean vigor in this pasture was 90.5% of the base. Of the five grasses measured, three showed low vigor ratings and two showed high ratings. The two grasses with high vigor ratings were needle-and thread grass and bluestem wheatgrass. Both of these have been found to be highly preferred by cattle in other Little Hills studies. The reason for the high vigor ratings for these two plants appears to be that the examiner was forced to measure plants that had not been grazed by cattle. Almost all of the plants of these two species that were found by the examiner had already been grazed. To find ungrazed plants, it was necessary on some occasions to measure plants that were partially or totally inaccessible to the cattle in or around shrubs and rocks. Pasture 8 Moderate Use Cattle. A vigor rating of 101.2% was found for this pasture. The fact that this pasture has been grazed for only eight years may be part of the reason for the high vigor of the plants. A problem of poor distribution of the cattle exists in this pasturej therefore the sample as taken very likely traversed a major part of the ungrazed areas. Pasture 4 Heavy Use Deer. Surprisingly the heavily stocked deer pasture showed a slight decrease in the vigor of the grasses 96.1% of the base. Grass denSity is believed to be among the highest of any pasture (1.65%). Since the deer are removed from the pastures early in the spring, those grasses which produce foliage earliest undoubtedly receive the greatest grazing pressure, if any. Pasture 6 Moderate Use Deer. As might be logical, with the deer being removed early in the spring, the mean vigor rating was 103.5% of the base. Pasture 7 Light Use Deer. The vigo:r conditions under light deer use appear to be the same as under moderate use with a mean vigor of 100.6% of the base. Pasture 3 Moderate Use Cattle and Deer. Evidently some competition exists between cattle and deer for grass under the conditions of pasture three. The mean vigor was 94.6% of the base value. �-61- Pasture 5 Moderate Use Sheep and Deer. Judging by vigor on this moderately stocked.range there is not competition between the sheep and deer. A. vigor rating of 101.0% of the base was found. Forbs The forbs, as a whole, showed a greater reaction to the various grazing intensities than did the grasses. Part of this probably resulted from the fact that the forbs were relatively undisturbed by the rodents in the base exclosures. The newer pastures showed a greater loss in forb vigor than grass vigor. The effects of grazing on the vigor of forbs as observed were as follows: Pasture 1 Heavy Sheep. The forbs in this pasture were greatly reduced in vigor by the overgrazing of sheep. The vigor rating of 52.9% of the base was the lowest of any pasture. Pasture 9 Moderate Sheep. The vigor of forbs is definitely affected under this grazing pressure. The rating of 86.9% is approximately the same as under heavy cattle use. Pasture 2 Heavy Use Cattle. The vigor rating for this pasture was 86.8% of the base. This is about the same as for the moderately grazed sheep pasture. Pasture 8 Moderate Use Cattle. Under this grazing pressure forbs showed some effect as far as vigor is concerned. A rating of 93.0% of the base was found under these conditions. Pasture 4 Heavy Use Deer. On the depleted deer winter range the forbs were taken to a large extent by deer. A. figure of 81.2% of the base was found. This figure shows high utilization compared to the other deer pastures. Pasture 6 Moderate Use Deer. Under moderate grazing conditions the forbs were little affected by deer grazing. A vigor rating of 99.9% was found. Pasture 7 Light Use Deer. A vigor rating of 97.9% of the base was found under light use conditions. Pasture 3 Moderate Use Cattle and Deer. As would be expected, this stocking combination had little effect on the forbs. The vigor rating was 99.3% of the base. Pasture 5 Moderate Use Sheep and Deer. Under these grazing conditions the vigor of the forbs was about the same as under moderate sheep use. The vigor was found to be 88.1% of the base. �-62Table ll.--Vigor Ratings of Grasses and Forbs as Related to the Amount and Type of Animal Use Use;!:/ Grass Vigor?:..! Heavy Use - Sheep Moderate Use - Sheep Heavy Use - Cattle Moderate Use - Cattle Heavy Use - Deer Moderate Use - Deer Light Use - Deer Moderate Use - Sheep and Deer Moderate Use - Cattle and Deer 1/ 77·9 128.6 90·5 101.2 96.1 103 ·5 100.6 101.0 94.6 Forb Vigor?:..! 52·9 86·9 86.8 93·0 81.2 99·9 97·9 88.1 99·3 Stocking rate and species stocked. g; The vigor rating of grasses and forbs in the pastures expressed as a per cent of the exclosure measurements. PRODUCTION - UTILIZATION Production-utilization transects for browse key species were placed in the deer pastures during September, 1961, as per the Interagency Big Game Range Analysis procedures. Two transects were placed in each of the five deer pastures; one on Mountain Mahogany and one on Serviceberry in key areas within the pastures. These key areas were chosen from data collected over the past ten years as areas in which heavy concentrations of deer occur during the stocking period. It is hoped that the data collected from these transects can be compared with data from existing utilization transects to determine the accuracy of this new method used on a state wide basis for management of big game winter range. Table 12 shows a breakdown of the data from both types of transects over the past two years. On an average, the data from the P-U transects shows heavier utilization than does the previously established method. This is to be expected because the P-U transects are placed in key areas where as the data from ocular estimates are an average of the pasture as a whole, including many unused areas. CONDITION AND TREND In addition to production-utilization transects, are condition and trend transect, as per the Interagency Big Game Range Analysis procedures, was placed diagonally across each of the five deer pastures. �-63- It is planned to compare this data, at five year intervals, to data collected from line interception transects. This should provide an opportunity to check this method with the previously established line transects. (Table 13). In the cases of pastures three and four, where several deer died on unknown dates during the winter and were not found until spring, the "actual stocking rate" is therefore parti.;tllyan estimate. Table 12.--Uti1ization Based on Standard P-U Transects as Compared to Ocular Estimates on Key Species by Pasture, 1961-1963. Pasture No. Pasture tfo3 Pasture tfo4 Pasture tfo5 Pasture tfo6 Pasture #7 * Species Mountain Mahogany Service Berr:x: Mountain Mahogany Service Berr:x: Mountain Mahogany Service Berrl Mountain Mahogany Service Berr:x: Mountain Mahogany Service Berrl Transects 1961-1962 1962-1963 83.1 34.4 63.9 35.9 88.6 85.9 66.8 39.4 Not Stocked 63.3 Not Stocked 30.7 63.4 30.7 56.3 9.1 71.7 29.5 46.7 8.7 Ocular Estimates* 1961-1962 1962-1963 52.2 30.9 26.7 6.56 65.4 73.9 35.8 26.1 Not Stocked 23.9 Not Stocked 15.8 33.1 27.57 1.56 13.9 21.95 28.1 13.1 0.60 Made by Harold E. Burdick Table 13.--Comparison, in Deer ,Days per Acre, Between Known Stocking Rates and Pellet Counts from Standard P-U Transects in Deer Pastures, 1961-1963 Stocking Year 1961-62 1962-63 Pellet Counts on * 1961-62 Production-Util. Tran. 1962-63 Pasture#3 Pasturetf04Pasture#5 Pasture#6 Pasturetfo7 Actual Known Rate 15.1 13.0 25.0 14.0 38.1 35.3 52.3 48.0 Not Stocked 14.4 Not Stocked 23.7 15.2 14.7 15.7 16.3 10.0 12.9 13.0 5.3 Desired Rate 20.0 40.0 20.0 20.0 10.0 * Data based on defecation rate of 15 pellet groups per deer per day. �Table 14.--Tota1 Precipitation by Month for Seventeen Years at Little Hills Experiment Station Year Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun July Aug Sept Oct Nov Dec Ann 1946 1947 1948 1949 1950 1951 1952 1953 1954 1955 1956 1957 1958 1959 1960 1961 1962 1.05 0.95 1.87 1.10 0.71 0.52 1.21 1.14 0.86 1.50 0.98 0.33 0.45 0.33 0.06 0.65 0.42 1.00 0.07 0.40 0.85 0.37 0.54 0.23 1.27 1.55 0.60 1.45 1.76 1.32 0.57 0.83 0.61 1.77 1.76 0.82 0.30 1.26 1.68 2.14 0.39 0.23 1.75 1.78 0.92 1.39 1.64 0.29 1.76 0.63 1.23 3.00 1.94 0 .• 73 1.69 0 .• 56 1.29 1.02 1.46 1,,03 0.77 0.74 1.58 1.62 1.32 0.59 0.70 0.89 0.49 1.18 1.66 0.85 1.44 0.58 1.94 0.42 0.31 1.80 2.25 0.58 2.00 1.26 2.07 T 0.56 1.39 0.37 0.31 1.16 0.07 1.56 0.02 1.19 0.96 0.46 0.46 1.24 1.40 1.73 1.34 1.06 0.34 2.61 0.74 0.13 1.66 1.46 0.49 0.65 0.31 0.47 0.11 3.09 2.02 0.82 0.31 0.22 3.18 3.66 1.50 1.19 2.35 0 .• 93 4.07 0.13 1.53 0.60 1.42 0.17 0.17 0,,80 0.41 1.71 2.12 0.01 0.02 0.00 3.01 0.47 T 0.00 1.63 1.92 0.99 5.29 1.01 2.59 2.02 0.43 2.12 0.22 2.54 0.00 1.02 0.80 0 .• 47 1.49 2.28 0.05 0.95 0.89 1.26 0.25 1.57 1.24 0.89 0.27 0.52 0.90 0.47 1.18 0.85 1.34 0 .• 73 1.74 1.;14 0.09 1.02 0.85 0.75 0.18 1.13 1.39 0.39 0.70 2.65 0.73 1.34 0.76 0.32 1.42 0.76 0.69 0.65 0.50 0.58 0.• 78 7.60 15.61 11.54 14.23 11.33 15.19 10 .• 67 14.80 12.58 11.49 11.18 18.60 9.17 11.19 10.85 16.43 9.76 Average 0.86 0.83 1.17 1.32 1.06 0.87 0.98 1.51 1.15 1.14 0.91 0 .• 88 12.68 I 0\ +=I �Table 15.--Average Temperature by Month at Little Hills Experiment Station Year 1946 1947 1948 1949 1950 1951 1952 1953 1954 1955 1956 1957 1958 1959 1960 1961 1962 Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Ju1 Aug Sept Oct Nov Dee Ann 19.6 19.8 11.1 21.5 20.0 17.6 30.4 27.9 19.3 30.8 31.0 23.0 20.2 26.3 29.7 19 •. 8 23.3 31.7 18.0 19.0 35.0 26.9 36.6 32.5 31.9 25.8 35.1 32 •. 1 29.8 31.8 43.0 42 •. 2 45.6 41.3 41.9 42.8 39.0 45.7 38.3 40.9 54.3 52.5 51.5 46.2 51.0 50 .• 7 47.1 52 •. 0 48.7 66.6 65.8 64.9 60.1 66.1 64.5 67.9 68.6 65.1 64.7 65.0 63.6 63 •. 6 59.9 63.2 62.8 62.8 63.0 64.9 60.9 32.8 25.9 18.6 30.2 29.9 31.9 31.4 34.5 35.3 27.7 39.2 41.0 44.1 41.1 45.7 51.9 49.7 50.3 52.1 51.1 62.2 65.8 65.9 67 •. 1 64.6 64.3 64 .• 0 64.6 66.9 62 •. 9 59.6 57.8 56 .. 0 53.1 54.3 56.9 55.8 57.0 55.3 56.5 54.0 54.0 54.8 59.5 51.0 56.6 48.0 43.2 41.3 46.8 43.0 45.6 44.3 47 •. 1 42.2 43.9 46.2 42.0 43.5 45.6 43.8 47.4 27.1 26.4 38.1 35.0 27.7 26.1 36.1 35.6 30.6 25.2 29.5 29.3 33 •. 5 35.8 30.6 37.4 22.6 23.1 23.8 27.9 21.7 22.2 22.6 21.8 30.0 18.3 26.0 28.5 25.5 22.8 22.4 24.4 44.0 42.0 42.6 42.0 42.2 41.2 43.7 45.1 41.5 21.9 22.4 19.7 22.1 16.4 57.0 59.4 58.2 53.9 55 .. 6 60.1 59.9 58.8 55.6 62.4 59.3 59.1 62.3 60.3 62.2 59.1 -- 43.1 43.3 43.5 43.8 43.6 I 0'\ \J1 I �Table 16.--Maximum-Minimum Temperatures by Month for Little Hills Experiment Station Year Temperature 1946 Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min 1947 1948 1949 1950 1951 1952 1953 1954 1955 1956 1957 1958 1959 1960 1961 1962 Jan 56 -35 54 -35 42 -32 58 -28 55 -20 48 -31 60 -10 54 - 3 57 -25 58 -12 48 -28 39 4 54 -27 52 -25 55 -20 47 -27 Feb 55 - 5 54 -20 52 -27 63 -25 59 -32 47 -15 55 -19 59 - 4 52 -28 53 -19 64 -18 47 19 48 -16 49 -24 58 -11 55 -23 Mar 63 7 50 -25 63 10 62 5 63 - 7 55 -12 69 0 60 - 6 58 -11 70 -12 62 -12 44 20 57 4 68 - 8 68 - 3 63 -15 Apr 73 ' 10 76 12 80 17 76 7 70 7 75 11 75 11 74 18 70 8 70 7 --56 23 77 10 78 7 73 12 80 12 May 86 27 87 18 80 27 80 13 84 19 79 21 80 18 85 16 80 16 -22 75 -- 69 35 80 19 84 17 80 25 80 22 Jun 89 23 90 30 87 24 88 20 86 22 88 24 90 25 97 22 90 22 91 27 90 28 79 39 91 24 90 26 94 32 90 26 Ju1 98 31 95 33 93 32 92 30 94 34 93 31 94 36 94 40 93 30 92 34 90 41 82 43 95 33 96 35 93 34 93 33 Aug Sept Oct Nov Dee 98 38 98 32 97 33 94 31 90 28 91 33 89 36 89 35 93 31 94 29 88 28 89 13 95 20 94 24 85 18 93 22 83 18 86 24 86 22 91 23 88 19 89 12 84 21 73 35 89 20 91 27 81 19 87 19 79 13 91 18 80 5 77 10 79 16 75 14 80 6 80 14 77 10 79 - 1 81 1 83 15 64 20 75 15 78 10 75 9 79 12 63 - 8 68 - 2 62 -17 70 5 64 -16 61 -15 65 -27 68 -14 68 8 65 - 6 65 -16 60 - 9 46 12 62 - 3 65 0 63 64 -10 49 -13 70 -24 64 -12 60 - 5 50 -23 50 -17 53 -14 53 -19 58 - 9 52 -30 54 -10 46 11 59 -11 60 -14 53 -25 61 -37 --39 84 45 93 34 93 30 91 40 94 25 - 8 68 4 I 0\ 0\ I �-67- WEATHER 1962 Precipitation, principally in the form of snow, during the period November, 1961, through March, 1962, was normal or slightly above. Snow lay at a depth of a foot or more for many weeks. It melted in a rush and flood in February, but residual moisture was still good and was enhanced by ample rains in April. This started growth of all herbaceous vegetation at a fast rate in May. Both volume of grass and annual growth of browse in 1962 exceeded any single year for several years back. But as far as summer precipitation was concerned--there was practically none in June, July, and August. This sub-normal summer precipitation trend was only slightly changed for the better through September, October, and November, 1962. For reference purposes a tabulation of precipitation and temperature data taken. at the Station during the past 17 years, together with averages, has been included in this report. Custodian, George E. Crandell has very faithfully kept these records since 1959. Demonstrations: The year was an unusually successful one from the standpoint of visits by outsiders. A partial list of groups of persons by date and number, who heard both an illustrated talk and toured the pastures and or paddocks, includes nine parties and over 105 individuals. In addition, we were hosts to forty-five persons who only heard us discuss the work but were unable to tour the Station. Month April 10-13, 1962 April 23-26, 1962 August 4, 1962 August 6, 1962 September 27, 1962 October 4, 1962 January, 1963 March, 1963 March, 1963 Total Group C.S.U. Seniors and White River Foresters Newspaper editor and forester General laymen, sportsmen, and Dept. personnel C.S.U. Range Management Professor Science teachers from northwestern Colorado Area staff members Colorado Cattlemen s Assoc. Committee Colorado Archery Association President Area staff, B.L.M., and Foresters No. of Persons 20 2 31 1 20 plus 12 plus 6 I 1 12 105 During hunting season from one to fifteen parties per day paid short visits to inquire about hunting, but incidentally observed our bulletin board and visited briefly with us about the Station. Prepared by: William T. McKean and Harold E. Burdick Date: January, 1964 Approved by: Richard N. Denney Project Leader Wayne W. Sandfort Chief, Game Research ��January, 1964 -69JOB COMPLETION REPORT INVESTIGATIONS PROJECT State of COLORADO --------------~------------- Project No. W-10l-R-5 Work Plan No. 2 Game Range Investigations Job No. Title of Job: Rodent Effects on Deer Winter Range Period Covered: April 1, 1962 to January 31, 1963 3 ABSTRACT A study is being made in southwestern Colorado by the Colorado Department of Game and Fish to learn how rodents affect deer winter range in a pinon-juniper type. The study, located in Mesa Verde National Park, is in its seventh year. This seventh Job Completion Report presents the data collected in 1962, some data for previous years, and results observed to date. Two three-acre plots have been established: one a rodent exclosure, the other a control with a dummy fence. Deer have free access to both. The original rodent population in the Exclosure was virtually eliminated by trapping. The few which since have gotten in have been killed by trapping and poisoning. The elimination of rodents from the Exclosure has had no measurable nor visible effect on the vegetation. Rodents are being live trapped, marked, and released for recapture to obtain an estimate of population density. A food habits study of rodents is being conducted. ��-71- RODENT EFFECTS ON DEER WINTER RANGE Harold R. Shepherd INTRODUCTION Many winter deer ranges in Colorado are deteriorating. Theyare often marked by the die-off of woody shrubs and by a scarcity of seedling shrubs. Game biologists have become accustomed to blaming over-use by big game and livestock. However, there is reason to suspect rodents may be partially responsible, for rodent damaged browse plants have been found in some areas. It is suspected that in some areas rodents may be largely responsible for the scarcity of bitterbrush and mountain mahogany seedlings. In any sound program of game-range management all of the factors contributing to range use and deterioration should be taken into consideration, including the effects of rodents. A study is needed to learn how rodents affect deer winter range. Such a study was begun in August of 1956 in Mesa Verde National Park. It is expected that several years will be required to complete the study and accomplish its stated objectives. This is the seventh Job Completion Report on the continuing study. It reports the progress made during the period April 1, 1962 to January 31, 1963 toward accomplishment of the long-term objectives of the study. Previous reports were published in Quarterly Reports (now Research Reports) of the Federal Aid Division t'orvthe years 1957 through 1962. OBJECTIVES The long-term, over-all objective is to study how rodents affect the composition, ground cover, and reproduction of vegetation in a pinon-juniper type deer range, with particular emphasis on browse plants. The objectives for the period covered by this report are as follows: 1. Collect plant composition and density data from established line transects. 2. Make photographic records from permanent photo stations. 3. Collect deer pellet-group data from established pellet-group plots. 4. Continue rodent control inside the rodentexclosure. 5. Obtain home-o-ange data by live trapping, toe marking, and recapturing rodents according to methods of Calhoun and Casby. 6. Calculate home-range sigmas from recapture data. Using homerange sigmas and census data, estimate rodent populations per acre. �-72- 7. Make a collection of plants from the vicinity of the study, and press, identify, and mount them to provide a herbarium for positive identification of plants within the study area. 8. Continue the investigation of rodent food habits by analysis of stomach contents. (a) During each season of spring, summer, fall, and winter, collect from the vicinity of the study 20 individuals of each species of rodent common to the area. (b) Preserve stomachs in F.A.A. solution. (c) Prepare microscope slides of stomach materials, and determine kinds and proportions of foods eaten seasonally in the study area. PROCEDURE Line Transects Plant composition and density data were collected from 70 permanent line transects, using the Parker-Savage method described in the July, 1958 report. Photographic Records Color and black and white photographs were taken of vegetation from permanent photo stations. Pellet-group Data Deer pellet-group data were collected from 70 permanent 1/100 acre plots, as in previous years. Rodent Control To capture any rodents which may have gotten into the Exclosure during the winter, snap traps were set, spaced about 15 feet apart, over the entire 3-acre area. They were baited with a mixture of equal parts of suet, raisins, oatmeal, peanut butter, and paraffin. Trapping was begun May 2, and traps were kept set and baited through September 13. Poison stations were maintained constantly. These are constructed of quart motor oil cans spaced at approximately 30-foot intervals. Collecting Home-Range Data Home range data collections begun in 1961 were continued from July 10 through September 4 in 1962. Collection of the data entailed the live-trapping, toe-marking, and recapture of rodents within a home-rangegrid approximately 1000 feet square composed of 448 numbered trap stations spaced at 50-foot intervals. The stations are arranged and numbered in groups of four. Seven of these groups make up a QDit. And there are 16 units in the grid. One sixteenth of the trap stations are activated on anyone trap day. By systematically moving traps from one group to another, the grid can be covered in 7 days. �-73- Two Sherman live traps baited with apples and oatmeal, were placed at activated stations. Animals caught were numbered by a system of toe, ear, and tail clipping and then released for recapture. A record was kept of the capture and recapture locations. These data together with those from the yearly census are used to estimate rodents per acre, using the method of Calhoun and Casby. Plant Collecting Additional plants from Mesa Verde and vicinity were collected and prepared for the study herbarium. Rodent Census As in previous years, a rodent census 'was made within the permanent census area in the manner described in the 1959 report. The standard procedures of the Advisory Committee of the North American Census of Small Mammals was followed. Food Habits Investigation Additional plant parts and insects were collected within the study area and preserved in F.A.A. solution. When microscope slide mounts of these materials have been prepared, they will serve as reference materials for the identification of food items in rodent stomachs. Rodents were trapped for their stomachs in the vicinity of the study area. Stomachs were preserved in F.A.A. solution. Microscope slide mounts of their contents will be made and the food items identified and measured. RESULTS, DISCUSSION, AND CONCLUSIONS Line Transects An analysis of variance made of the line transect data for the first 3 years of study showed that rodent control had not significantly affected the amount of total browse, grass, and forb intercept during that period. Data analyses for other categories of vegetation measurements, particularly for species differences, have not been made. Nor have statistical analyses of the data been made for 1961 and 1962. These will be left for a later report. A comparison of the data for all years of the study (Table 3) reveal no variations in density, composition, or number of plants that appear to be caused by rodent activity or the lack of it. The fluctuations which do occur, usually small, seem to fall into no clear pattern, and they are suspected to be the results of fluctuating precipitation and vagaries of sampling. One striking difference that hasoccured is the extreme fluctuation in annuals from year to year. Annuals have varied from none in 1959 to an average per transect of over 4 in 1960. These differences are no doubt due to fluctuations in precipitation--the fewest numbers of annuals occur;ing in the two driest years, 1959 and 1962 . (Tables 1, 2, 3 and 4). �-74- Visible Effects of Rodent Control No effects of rodent control are evident in photographs. Deer-use of Control and Exclosure During the year 1961-62, pellet-group counts indicated 21.1 deerdays use in the Exclosure and 29.2 deer-days use in the Control. However these differences are not statistically significantly different, and use may actually be the same (Table 5). In only one year, 1960-61, could use be shown to be different between the two plots. Rodent Control Although the Exclosure was saturated with traps from May 2 through September 13, no rodents were caught. There seems little doubt but that the Exclosure is free of rodents. Rodent Census In 1962 the census was taken September 6, 7, and 8. Only 19 Peromyscus maniculatus were taken (Tables 6 and 7). The population in 1962 was the lowest for any year of the study. The totals for the 5 years are as follows: 83 in 1958, 112 in 1959, 228 in 1960, 50 in 1961, and 19 in 1962. The largest observed population in 1960 was 12 times the smallest observed population in 1962. Of the 19 caught, 12 were males and 7 females. Of the males, 11 were adults and only one was a sub-adult. All of the females were adult, and 2 or 40 per cent were pregnant. This is in contrast to 77 per cent pregnancy in 1961. Home-Range Data Because of the extreme low in the rodent populations it was possible to live-trap and mark but few rodents. The data on Peromyscus maniculatus caught are summarized in Table 8. Although few animals were caught, much valuable data was obtained, for many of the rodents were recaptured 3 or more times--one as many as 31 times. The data on home range collected in 1961 and 1962 together with census data for 5 years is being used in the computation of population estimates for presentation in a future report. Food Habits Investigation Additional time will be required to complete the analysis of stomachs collected, so results of this phase of the study will be reported at a future date. Botfly Larvae Fewer mice were afflicted with botfly warbles in 1962 than in previous years, for reasons unknown. �Table 1.• - Line Transect Data for Rodent ExcLcsure , 1962. St:8cies and I:casurements meThn ctn.€re ail1u'olia (service l'€l'ry) Lrtsl:lisia tridentata ( big sagebrush) C:U7sot::a:o:.'1US depre ssus (rabbit'o1'ush) Chr~otha;'".r.~.:s nause osus (1'a'obitbrush) Cs::,coca1'pu3nont.anus (mountain mahogany) P,-'_;:siliat.r ident.at.a (antelope 'oitterbrush) S:r~;cp;,0ricarpos spp , (snouoer-ry) Tetl"tacl~~ia J:otal cane sceris br ccse .-,0r.,·~;.,.,",..r·n .•.•• .•.""';:--..;. • v. srri, .• .l.1'1l'': ~ .l. (','0<::"'''1'''' ~._ •••. l.o .•.•• LJ. ",'~-·"a·~ grass) \.'b •.••..••..•.. r~r~~ 'sod-o) v __ •.......• ·.• sn~ 1:'/:"\ '..... G.. l'eraa cr a' s .•. ~'.Oe ca t a \ JU1e Jras~ rca !.c:1gili,;ula (lcngtonc'~:_(; mutton grass) -:::-- i--'.•. ~.,..-.l.e v·:.e nt.uckv '0'..•.. (1.1....!1......"'6 t\ .•. l J '-i.',,",..--) 6..1oCl~S I, .• '.J~'.. ~L~_~ __ ~ ...• _ ...)l".' ~r_~_ (---~' \"1. ) •••• a-' +~- -d ~- - ) c, l.~''';·-i.~eil..G.-vl..\._ea.·-6J.c",,:;,s ~","",~-,,~-J' f-"",·';r-'~""+"l·l gr'a ss ) \~'-iA.•. 5 .,:), Total grass and 3edb8 ._ •••.•• ~, .• ~ ::':1t."".;-", _ ••••••••••.. ~ •.L~ •.•.• ·l.J, ••••. l~Jl..,)v ..•• ..:-J' •. c .....-v<:..<. ;.rte~lisia £:r:apha1ocles l_ster ru b:~otinc:t 1.:.S .~ ... :tTagal~s scopul.or-um ...":..nt.en11al"'ia sppo L.c~lsa:.:o:':-liza sa3ittata 8::'~si1X.:l platteL1se Summaryof 35 Transects. Total Intercept (em) Percent Density (cover) Conposition Total Number Plants H8::.t: l'h~';l'cer 849 ~.42 9. 73 13 1711 1136 -.37 19.63 13.03 .08 .32 37.94 82 77 1 2 109 2.~4 2.20 .03 27 3302 4.88 3.24 .02 .08 9.43 10 7042 .03 20.10 .12 GO.35 235 8.14 .01 .04 3 .09 .52 3.00 2.10 12.06 113 3Lo 3.23 9.71 .57 13.36 7 4 PerG8r:t 1 Plants .06 3.11 .03 182 1051 ._- ---- ---- ----- 30 61 132.3 .09 .17 3.79 .36 15.24 9 20 485 1 .002 .008 1 .•03 .08 .20 2 5 .06 .14 .02 2 - 6 17 2 ---- .02 .05 .005 .68 ----- -- .26 - .06 14 ---01, ----- 8o:-::E;.r:c1ra It'1 be TLa ta :l"igsrc:1 di "l2?:'se:;'!3 c ir-e reus ::~i68ron di ~y18r-gens di vergens :ri6cron phi.Lade Lphi.cus ~rJ..g8~cn spp. =:"'i~cron spec i.csus '--+ .16 ,/ c --.25 16 .05 .20 6 .17 :r~ogon~i subaLpdrium ::::r::ogonum unbe I'Lat.um Ho Leant.hus nuttalii Luparius aduncus 7 • -----.06 ---- 2 42 .005 .02 .12 .02 2 .03 8 12 .48 .23 .34 I ~ \J1 I �Table 1. --(continued) Spec Ics and l:easurenents .l:'ercent Composition To'taT Number' Plants Eean HUl1.Cer Plants •.02 •. 08 3 .09 4 .01 •• 04 3 .09 2 110 .005 .31 .02 1.26 2 29 .06 .82 99 .28 1.13 21 .59 330 .94 3.78 105 3.00 Total Intercept (em) Percent Density B (cover) Ldt.hospermum angllstifo1ium L-1,,":~_::'1le1-:is ii Lac t uca spp .• Lc:-::atium sinplex ::alvastru.'11 coccineum 2p~mti2.. spp , Penstemon eo:::arrhenus 7enatemon eaespitosus Pnaeelia heteropp~la Solidago petradoria c . ..,enecJ.o spp. Tragopogon spp. :;~1~·:1lC;~·:n F01~b Total forbs (perennials) I -.J 0\ I C ordy'lant.hus;'1I'ightii :I:..ap?ula spp. Orthoearpus purpureo a1bus Pol;jrgonumsauatchense Total annuals 1 1 .002 .002 .08 .08 1 1 .03 Total vegetation (except trees) 8701 24.86. 100.09 876 25.03 Pinus edulis (pinion pine) Jun i.pe rus utahensis (utah juniper) Total trees 5358 4394 9752 15.30 12.55 27.85 54 ••. 93 45.06 100.00 44 34 78 1.26 .97 2.23 .03 �~ ,_-. ...• ~'2 "",,"v ~ '-. - 11.'1e Tra11sect Species Jata for ::tocient Control, TotaT- . .~ .·J.C~S ur ement.s f::J:;J.. 1962. Surraar'y of 35 'I'r'ansec t.s , Irrt.e rccpt. (CT1) .1 ("l'~-~"'i:-"'in nahogany ) •• b 1132 253 + "~ ,·1,-•,..,.",+ '" ("......L4,nt.e I fj>',-' ]-..~+ + ,:0 r-br-ush) ..•. 32? I, ./ 1(6< -'''' --'- v\,..a,,;. .•• -" 1:"G .••••• J •••••• '-'..... ez r""l:'P. •• -:.:.~~ ••..:- IoI·V'.... ..• V'/V.~I 1r:'()'" :;; 1 ~CI •••••• ,;,._ ..•.r •."",..-.!""! v > .....•• •.•. -.•. -- • .!+ .... ).; 4 r- ..•..•. >.J •• _~ •••';'_":" "- •.• 1 70/ '<;"0"1-. \1.,..:"' •.•• t_''-'.J._v~ 0",,,,,,,,) :t'3t::'tz~c:~;::!iaC£'~r:83CS::S :c~.;l::'r-:r~:Ee 7973 (".-c.eLc.-n T."1-, ato.Jg ra Sv .s) 1r.\oivVl....L •.•.• J.&."e sr:~::. (S'~::ll,::e) '··C~';P~-::-: CJ...,+.Cl (-i""'e"'rac:c:) ..•..•..•..•. ..J. ..L_ c"-; . ...L.-.. v 6 '--'~ - r c .., .""" ',.L M 1:'1', :-', ;', "''' ;" I\- • on·"0"'"·C,!'"1-1J......, •.•.•• - . en ''''b--~o-~ ~.•. .:.):......w •.• _.... ,t·O" 2"1"''"' SS Pea :)r£:.tc:r:se (:centl.l.cky bluegrass) ("~~d'~nd - J-h~c~d grass) i....~ •...... .r, ;Q. Lc, -'-C -c:.J. -.jc>,. -::-'~ ·',·.:~n /~""'l-rrplt"il -_ ••1.,.... •••...••."-' •••..•.•.,,"C:"'''i'( ("••••• t...1....:....J" 0gra •.•••ss,:) ) :ctal g~ass.a~d sedge 30 203 c:. \,...... \ (f' c· ftr-~J-~ .&. .•• U_C"1o J,. ••••:;~ V.4 \0~L,;. .... ..• J. t;;-._ ) •. 0 • ~?1 • 22 22.78 .08 ._~ .,- 11,1'2 .t.; 2 62 ~2 57 78 7" " '102 "11 •. 06 2.91 .03 eO.52 2'7r.:: .... '7 p~ .28 26 .7l 110 397 3.11 11 1'"';) 4 43 .11 1.37 585 16.71 11. .63 v , .; ••••.. '.... _-' • • . 14 .0L ,1. 115 .33 h.!l? 1.17 15.30 .0[; 3 31 .01 .01 .02 .01 .01 .09 7 6 .02 ---- ---- 1566 ~ 1 Po oo ...L."'''' '=·'~,r,+'., ,""u • ~.t:., 2.09 12.12 , i E'-1.;1Cer 1t, 0' .59 3 .1~3 • y'i.:, •••••••• \,0 ~:2,::'Jl V ----- 10.-..4 •. J-' I. 4.,.'.,,1 TotC'..l i!UJ'71Oer FLant s ~ ---- C2-re:: ~::-~-;~~ I",.. .•...••. '-,_ r::., 3"" .'-.) 7"'-+. '::-C-'·"·-'(,"'~C::-l,-.fj'" -Cl'·'~L--'· .•...... - •.•.. --~'"' ...•. -' . .--.-.-.- Y 1'7 10 r'.o~~_,~:O"",'1·" '..J _ •. - ~'-'":'~ ••• !:' --.•.......,..·r;,-J-nl~l-s 1..•••••••• --'''''. <.-. .•...0- ." Percent Composition 4 tJL1 ._1~~~"."_.~-~-·'~.~~1 ,.;~ (s~-"~ce1iA rv) ..::..-l .•_ .• O~-.d.. C.!..,'_ I...._r.; ',,-'-. : ",:~. 7-: r1 ,,":;d <J (' -i c R~""l,~ 1<:,1') .•.......... ~.. -"-"-...:..e ..~L -~<;. 0""""0 S-"'6--""··1. •..~... ,-~·_,··C,_.i;~"'~ <": 1_.,._1.'"'-:---~')""'''''''' ~;-.",.'.""'<"','" rr'a1)lo-;J-'or'ush) V"'-~f.i~"""".';'-'4''''' ...I..''''' \•..•..•.. v ...;••..• .;;"""".:...... .•..•.\...-J......:...\;;o ..•• Pursln.a Pe:ccent Density (ccvcr ) ....., a.f 1 --- •. _,/ '-. j •. '/V ---- .~ ~~~~t::::i2ia ~-::.a::'halodes ~\.st~:r rubroti~-l,::tt.:..S :.'4: -: ~"E.;~:.1l,;.3 S~ ::·==·'-~.lcrl!.'";1 ..;'.~:~>:==:':';2..:~~;:spp. =~ls.;:-~~'c~l:iz.::~:-:-a;;ittata "::"::t::=:;;:~ ~:.;. t-L~;-:se Ccr.andra t~'~bellata ~ri;eron div3r~~~s cinereus =:''';:'b2rc,:-~ :~~i·.'\:rg·~~ls d.i"v~erge.!1s :ri6Gron L)~~ilaclelphj_cus 2 4 7., .; .0L .07 ,0L .04 .32 .07 .07 ;) .---. .1L .." .09 2 25 .06 .71 5 3 .14 .09 "+ ., -;! ~~l;::-::"G~ spp. ~~~ge~cn speciosus speciosus :=icbonu.:n :ri06,):-lUJ.1 sU::3.1pirlU11 1l:-n::sllatur1 ~~eleanthusnutta1ii L"C.ri:': J1S adW1CUS '5 .02 .01 ----- .o!! ---1 --_ .•... .03 I --.1 --.1 .. I �Table 2. - (continued) TotaJ. Intercept (em) I .?ercent Density (cover) ---- ?cn.3temon 58 Sc-1idago petradoria Senecio spp. 'I'ragopogonspp. U'nl:n own i or b 236 Spec Les and measurernent s Li~::()sr:'err:;l.l.;n a..'1gustifolium Percent Composition TotaIlTt:mber Plants :':8<::'1"< Number' .01 1 Plants -;-OJ .17 .58 27 .77 .67 2.36 50 1.h3 Linum leuisii ~ct'.l2a spp. LC'::o.~,iur.l sanp'Lex i:alvastrun cocc.lneum Cpuntia spp. F~r:.s-:c:r::on. ccnar-r-henus caespitoaus Phacelia he t.er-ophy'La CaLcc oor-t.us -- I gunn i.sond.L Total forbs ,-- (;er~~ials) 363 1.oL 3.68 127 3.63 9902 28.29 100.00 987 28.20 5692 16.26 57.54 54 1.54 4202 9394 12.00 42.46 43 26.26 100.00 97 1.23 2.77 CC1'd;ilanthus ,\·;rightii Lappv.La spp , Crt,l:ccarpus purpure o albus Pol;:rgcnu."'1 satrat.chense I'otaL annuals Total Ve;statio!: (except trees) -.: ::...'"'.us " ' " . (.. ine ) ecnu.a,s .parn.on pane ~·~iper'.ls utahensis (utah juniper) Total trees ~ I �Table 3.--Su."1rlariss of Transect Data Compared 1:!ith Respect to 'I'reat.merrt and Years. Ye2.r 1962 Per c~nt Density Browse Grass 2.: Sed~e .2orbs AnnuaLs Total Veg. Total T:'1eCS Per cent Cos~osition I·lean :!·-,·.~l:er FLan't.s Control Exclosure Di.f.'. Control Exclosure Di.f.'. Control L. 7d 20.1.0 -2.68 UO.j2 80.25 - .27 7.86 4.47 1.0u 3.79 .94 .002 24.86 27.85 - .68 - .10 + .002 -3.43 - •.!:1 15.20 3.68 ----100. CO 100.00 15.24 3.78 .08 100.00 100.00 - .56 16.71 -3.63· ----28.20 28.29 23.2-S + .10 + .08 --------- 2.77 Ezclos:.:re Dif. 3.1L + •• 2b 13.86' -2.85 3.00 - .63 .OJ. + .03 25'.03 -3.17 2.23 ..- .5!.l Year 1961 Brouse Grass 2.:. Sed:;e Forbs Annua Ls Total Ves• 'I'o t a L 'J>-ees 2b.10 2.99 1.17 .11 30.37 27.18 21.17 3.18 1.37 .31 26.02 26.87 -L:.93 + .19 + .20 + .20 -L.34 - .31 85,94 9.84 3.87 .36 100.00 100.00 81.34 12.22 5.25 1.19 100.00 100.00 -L.bo +2.38 +1.38 + .83 --------- 7.85 7.57 13.06 2.23 1.14 2~~97 2.L3 13.h3 3.00 3.20 27.L9 2.30 .8.06 15.83 S.h3 .3.91 33.23 2.83 8.L13 13.14 4.00 L.37 29.9Ll 2.3h 7.49 7.91 + 17.63 L.34 13.31 3.20 -~:.32 -1.14 29.!J6 2.L9 2t: .LO -5.06 - .37 + .29 + .37 + .77 +2.06 +2.52 - .13 Year 1960 Bro"./sG G:-aC3 .: Ss.~:.gc For-bs AnnuaIs Total Vc.g. Total T~"'s': s 2);,08 1,.52 2.10 .39 31.05 28.L7 21.56 2.90 1.70 .h4 26.50 26.3J -2.52 77.55 -1.62 + .Lo + .05 IlL.56 -L!.L5' -2.17 6.75 1.2~ 100.00 100.00 rn.28 i1.00 6.23 1.6l 10C.CO lCO.CO +3.73 -3.56 _ .52 + .Lo + .37 -2.69 -1.L3 + .L6 -3.29 - .b7 Year 1959 ~~o~,~se Grr.:..s ~=: Se~:.ge ?orbs .h!"::1 ~_'.als Totc:l VOC. Tot.al rr~_es ZO.l!Ii 17.96 5.Lo '1:2-8 3.15 1.04 27.15 22.16 21.53 26.86 -2.',8 -2.25 - .211 -4.99 -5.33 7~.36 (.\l.oL 19.93 4.71 14.23 L.70 100.00 lOO.CO 100.CO 100.CO +5.68 -5'.70 - .01 2.12 .t2 I --l \0 I �-80- CX) co 0::> \C· • ' r"\ 0:) ..:~ () €\J 1 • • • • • • ...• _:r (~1 \) C) r'i 'f (\1 I I + . . .. . r--· ~) '\.(\ ,_., •Cd• • •C'\• • I I a' S-I ;:, o C-' 0-1 U\ -::J (',I l') \! (", 1'-- \0 0\ 0:] o r-~ '.J C) '1.1\ .-1 (V\ .-~ d (V\ o •...' r-I \[) -::t t-- '-- 'l.r\ -- 'LI\ + I I -I ..:::t (V\ r;-..:. '-!) \.1\ r-I N ...-lco 0:.' •r-l ...-l• ':.1•\,"!•\0• r-I • r-I' (V\ ~',j ,--l o t:: o n . ('-- 0 r--- c·, C'J r ("_.'-0 r-t 0 <:) .J S-, ~ 'J 0 r--- ,-10::> (\) 0J (V\ ") C, -::r r-I 0 (\I ) \0 C..,v\...:::t 0 e. • • y, eel \0 • • • \.1\ 0J r-l (V\ r: ( ) ..--1("'\.-11 1 -p ,.1 'f (i) o (::-1 r: o o Q) +) ~ ~.: o (0) ,.\ (,.J r;-,. (",j , NCl'\! 1\ lJ' r-.-1 • • r-l I + + ('.1"';;\000 U)c-, C",,,:~'u,0 0 r-t ,"':.1r- 0 o· •••• 0 t) ,-- d • • I• '-\ 1 + + I I -I- :N ("'\(" ('--0 0 0""('1(V\00 e 0 U ~ 1 • •...-l .> 0-.. I 1 I I • • • • • )OG.., 00 -N 00 r-Ir-I r-tr-l ,--l o .) ,0 (" r- 0 0 H :J' _::.r r--- (V\ 0 0 +> • • • • • • t:: f) ,0 '.0 0 0 o r·- r-I 0 0 o r-tr-t • _.! Cr-,(\1 ..::7 d 'LI1 .-, 0, 0 0 '-I). r-! C.-I -r-i • • n " I • • I + • .• 1 I ('\\.0. 000\000::· -.:'<o ...::.t 0 ,(I () • 0-,• • •rt• r\• + + + I I -:j' 1 r . ; : (!) (:1 (1.) ~·1r-, C'-J'•-.J \0 'I.;, N .--1 .-1 o +) l') C •_-Cj• (",j• r:oI C) o .J ,, c' o ~.r -, (\' '-I) •C)• 0 • (,J ", _:J (V\ r-I '0 'LI1 ....•.-1 O:J r-I (,J 0 • • • •0.--1 • • -I'J)N (V\ ('\1 N () (P C'< d o s., 0 ...-l (V\ 0J '-0 r+' ,. ... ·..t (\.1 .--1 ,-I 0:' ['-. () ·:t 1.1\ (\/• • • o "J . (J c· ..• (() (f) <(3 ,--I .il (;1 E··' f'\ ('J l\O to (f) If) ".0 .' .-, ,; ~-t ~: (l.; • (I) o In f:3 (,"' 1J1 ") 1.:-.0 () G.) H U) ~< ~~ fc< r"\ r1 d <J ~lS r' .p +' t., r. 0 0 Co 1'1 CJ r,·, ... ,~ [-I E-..' ~2 15 .. (V\ (\J reI I:l c.) DO c. f;) CJ • • • •r-l•0J• f\ '>J (\'! 0) Iill '(j (l) I\..:::t r) V\ ,0 CV\ U\_'.r C' c'.! r~ r) l'l : ...• [., '; .-1 ~) ('1 rl r"1 ;j (.j i5 ,0~,,,, j:' j +. 1-1 f·, 0 t! 0 0 I') ~j .1 r!l C) r'• ..··1: H E·' �-81- Table 4.--September-August Precipitation for Mesa Verde National Park 1956-57 1957-58 1958-59 1959-60 1960-61 1961-62 September .98 .00 ·98 1.06 .60 1.72 October 1.25 3.43 1.19 2.56 2.62 2.62 November .83 2.09 ·73 1.01 .82 2.03 December 1.59 1.06 .04 3·02 2·97 1.22 January 2·57 1.25 .42 2.09 ·98 ·71 February 1.18 1.98 1.85 2.67 ·93 2·33 March 1.10 2.60 .16 1.01 3.81 1.33 April 1.47 1.08 2.05 1.42 ·72 .45 May 1.24 .40 T .62 .29 1.07 June ·79 .26 1.61 .49 .10 .16 July 2·34 1.04 ·39 .76 ·55 .37 August 2.08 1.39 2·93 .15 2·75 .21 Totals 17.41 16.58 13·35 16.86 17.14 14.22 �-82- Table 5.--Deer Use in Rodent Exclosure and Control as Indicated by Pellet-Group Counts, 1962 Exclosure 96 2.74 2.0 Total pellet groups Mean pellet groups per plot s s x Confidence limits Deer-days use per acre Control 133 3.8 3.32 .561 2.66 to 4.94 29·2 ·338 2.05 to 3.42 21.1 Table 6.--Sex-Age Composition of Rodent Catch by Species and Day, 1962 Census Males Adult First day 7 Second day 1 Third day 3 Total 11 Females Sub-adult Juvenile Total Adult Sub-adult Juvenile Total 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 7 2 3 12 3 3 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 3 1 7 7 �-83- Table 7.--Rodent Census Data, 1962 Date traps first set: September 5, 1962 Time of day traps first set: 9:00 a.m. - 2:00 p.m. Time of day traps were visited on the following 3 days: First day: 8:00-10:00 a.m. Second day: 8:00-9:30 a.m. Third day: 8:00-9:30 a.m. Weather: 1. From time of setting to first visit: Hot and clear day, cloudy and cool night. 2. From first to second visit: Cloudy, rainy, cool. 3· From second to third visit: Cloudy, cool, dry. Type of trap: Snap trap (Museum Special) Type of bait: Oatmeal, peanut butter, raisins, suet. Species taken: Peromyscus maniculatus First Day: Capture Species Location Sex P.m. P.m. P.m. P.m. P.m. P.m. P.m. P.m. P.m. P.m. F M F M M M M F M M I-5 I-8 II-4 III-l V-17 VI-l VI-6 VII-19 VIII-2 VIII-20 Weight (gm) 17·3 17.6 13.4 19.4 19·1 12.4 19·2 17·6 18.6 18.0 September 6, 1962 Hind Total Tail Ear Foot (Length in MM.) 64 145 18 19 18 139 58 19 60 16 135 19 150 18 63 19 149 61 18 19 140 64 20 17 18 139 20 59 138 63 19 19 150 18 21 73 144 62 20 19 Remarks AdultPreg. Not Lact. 2L Adult Testes scrotal Adult Not. Preg. Not Lact. Adult Testes Abd . Adult Testes scrotal Adult Testes Abd. Adult Testes Abd. Adult Preg.Lact. 5L-2R Adult Testes scrotal Adult Testes scrotal Second Day: Capture Species Location Sex Weight (gm ) P.m. P.m. P.m. P.m. P.m. I-5 DJ-20 VIII-2 VIII-3 VIII-18 M M F F F 16.7 15·1 18·9 13.1 18.4 September 7, 1962 Hind Total Tail Ear Foot (Length in MM.) 142 68 20 17 147 65 20 19 152 64 21 17 66 145 20 19 20 159 70 20 Remarks Adult Testes Abd. Subadult Testes Abd. Adult Not Lact. Adult Not Lact. Adult Not Lact. Third Day: Capture Species Location Sex P.m. P.m. P.m. P.m. M M F M II-4 II-16 III-12 VI-19 Weight (gm) 18.7 13.2 11.2 18.4 September 8, 1962 Hind Total Tail Ear Foot (Length in MM.) 145 64 18 20 130 18 58 19 123 18 55 19 148 18 65 21 Remarks Adult Testes scrotal Adult Testes Abd. Adult Not Lact. Adult Testes scrotal �-84- Table 8.--Number, Sex, and Age of Peromyscus maniculatus Marked, and Observed Distances Traveled from Calculated Centers of Home Range, 1962. 3 or More Number Marked A. S.A. J. Captures A. S.A. J. 18 5 13 4 27 1 1 2 3 or More Number Marked A. S.A. J. Captures A. S.A. J. 19 3 15 7 29 3 19 1 Females Home-Range Radius in Feet Maximum Minimum Average A. S.A. J. A. S.A. J. A. S.A. J. 184 333 149 900 460 335 10 175 30 Males Home-Range Radius in Feet Maximum Minimum Average A. S.A. J. A. S.A. J. A. S.A. J. 165 133 334 775 275 765 30 40 85 A. -----Adult S .A.---Sub-adult J.-----Juvenile Prepared by Harold R. Shepherd Date: January, 1964 Approved by: Richard N. Denney Project Leader Wayne W. Sandfort Chief, Game Research �January, 1964 -85JOB COMPLETION REPORT INVESTIGATIONS PROJECT State of COLORADO ------~~~~------------------ Project No. W-10l-R-5 Work Plan No. 3 Game Range Investigations Job No. 2 Title of Job: The Value of Internode Counts in Determining Browse Utilization Period Covered: October 1, 1962 to March 31, 1963 Objectives: Explore the possibility of determining an index-of-utilization for browse annual stem growth by a comparison of the number of internodes left uneaten with a number typical for the species. Procedure: For several years, current annual growth stems were collected from oakbrush and serviceberry plants growing in different sites. During this project segment, data were tabulated for the oakbrush stems on hand. This included recording the number of internodes and nodes, length of each internode, length of each stem, and number of apical buds for each stem. These data were then subjected to a variety of analyses to determine the relationship of each internode in succession to the total length of the stem. Findings: The results of the initial analysis encourage the belief that per cent utilization of oakbrush annual stem growth may be estimated by internode counts. However, this is contingent on the results of further tests now being run on the data by Game Department and Colorado State University statisticians. Complete results of the study must await completion of the tests. Prepared by: Harold R. Shepherd Date: January, 1964 Approved by: Richard N. Denney Project Leader Wayne W. Sandfort Chief, Game Research ��January, 1964 -87JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO Project No. W-IOI-R-5 Work Plan No. 3 Title of Job: Period Covered: Personnel: Game Range Investigations Job No. 3 Browse Transect Analysis and Application. April 1, 1962 to March 31, 1963. Richard N. Denney, Harold R. Shepherd, and Bertram D. Baker, biologists. Larry Mullen, Bob Franklin, Dale Wills, Fred George, Bill Hlavachick, Bill Jones, Gary Brown, and Dave, Stearns, student assistants. Cooperating Agency: U. S. Forest Service. ABSTRACT Cooperative crews of Department and Forest Service personnel using standardized inter-agency and Forest Service procedures surveyed big game winter range areas of approximately 141,000, 146,000, 595,000, and 342,000 acres extent respectively on the Gunnison, Rio Grande, San Juan, and Grand Mesa-Uncompahgre National Forests. Included in the 141,000 acres on the Gunnison is approximately 17,000 acres of the state-controlled Sapinero Management Area and adjoining lands. Man-days spent by the Gunnison crew of three men (two Department, one Forest Service) approximated 190. Of a total of 92 new browse condition transects that were established and read in game management units 54, 55, and 67, seventy-eight were located in types dominated by big sagebrush. Condition ratings of Gunnison ranges generally were low in browse composition, density, and vigor and were medium in soil stability. The Rio Grande crew of two men (one Department, one Forest Service, plus variable short-term assistance) established and read 25 browse condition and 35 paced or modified Parker condition transects in units 68, 76, and 79 in approximately 185 man-days afield. Also, 102 non-transected type designation write-ups were prepared. Because grassland types are important components of these ranges, the paced condition transect was included as standard analysis technique in order to avoid loss of information not readily obtainable by browse range study procedures. Probably of greater importance as forage producers than browse types on the Rio Grande are the grassland and timber types that favor elk rather than deer. Density and vigor ratings of browse were mostly low, composition ratings were about equally distributed in the three categories, and soil stability ratings were mostly medium from the 25 browse condition transects that were read. The 35 paced Parker transects yielded nearly comparable results making allowances for five rating categories that are used in it rather than the three used in browse condition transect procedures. �- 88 Approximately 373 man-days afield were spent by the San Juan crew of four Forest Service and two Department men in establishing and reading 135 browse condition transects. The crew type mapped on air photos National Forest big game winter range in all of units 73, 74, 75, 77, 78, and part of unit 71. Much time was used to delineate key areas from field type mapping reconnaissance. Transect work was done after key areas were located. Browse composition generally was medium, vigor was low, density was high, and soil stability was high from the 135 transects. Oakbrush was by far the most widely distributed and abundant browse species on the winter ranges. The Grand Mesa-Uncompahgre crew of four men (two Forest Service, two Department) used 162 man-days to establish and read 44 new browse condition transects in units 41, 42, 61, 62, and 65. Vegetative type mapping was done in unit 52, although no key areas were located there, and no transects were read. Transects were established and read in unit 65, but lack of air photos for that unit forced postponement of type mapping. Wide variability of terrain and vegetation makes summary results of transect work unmeaningful, however, browse composition and vigor ratings were largely low, density was mostly low or medium, and soil stability was predominantly medium. Recommendations: It is rQcommended that this work be continued state-wide on a cooperative basis between agencies in order to effect closer working relationships and accomplish the long-needed inventory of vegetation on winter ranges. With present plans, the field work should be completed on all National Forests in 1963. An additional big job will still remain on Public Domain and private lands outside of the Forests. However, until wholehearted cooperation is assured by the Bureau of Land Management, it is not recommended that the Department try to do surveys independently on public land except where lands are included in Department management tracts. Objectives: Conduct surveys and inventories on National Forest land (1) to establish more definitely boundaries of territory occupied by deer and elk in winter for most years, (2) to provide maps of existing vegetative cover and condition ratings where obtained on ranges determined in (1), and (3) to delineate crucial and key areas that require more intensive observation, investigation, and possible management manipulations. Surveys Organization and Training: Pre-field season activities were initiated by Project Leader Dick Denney when he jointly presided with Region 2 Forest Service Staffmen Morley Brandborg and Ralph Gierisch at meetings on March 27 and 29, and April 3, 1962. Respectively, the meetings were at Durango, Steamboat Springs, and Colorado Springs with Department, Forest Service, and BLM personnel regarding revisions and interpretations in procedures. Plans were finalized of the Department's part of cooperative summer field surveys with the aid of a series of conferences April 17, 18, and 19, 1962. These meetings by Mr. Denney were with various National Forest and BLM officials directly concerned. In the order of the dates given, the meetings were at Monte Vista, Durango, and Delta where such details as job responsibilities and crew housing and transportation were worked out. Biologist Baker attended and participated in the April meetings and conferences at Colorado Springs and Monte Vista as well as in field trials of original and modified portions of procedures. �-89Additional training in field procedures of type mapping on air photos, establishing and reading browse condition transects, and plant identification was offered by Messrs. Denney, Brandborg, and Gierisch the week of June 11-15 at Rifle Falls. Crew-chief Chet Anderson and his assistants Jim Webb and Floyd Osborn of the San Juan National Forest, Department Biologists Ray Boyd and Bert Baker (assigned respectively to the White River Elk Study and Rio Grande and Gunnison National Forest surveys), crew-chiefs Jack McCrain of the Gunnison National Forest and Jack Arney of the White River National Forest, and student assistant crew-members assigned to all Forests attended the training sessions. Techniques Used: Procedures that were employed in the field surveys on the Gunnison, Rio Grande, San Juan, and Grand Mesa-Uncompahgre National Forests in the summer and fall of 1962 have been detailed by Denney (1962). Under date of June 1962, and in effect during the 1962 field season, were minor changes in procedures which will not be reproduced here. Two forms that were employed in supplementary work, however, will be explained and included herein. Applications of techniques to distinctly dissimilar situations on the four National Forests necessitates separate treatments of them which is done in following paragraphs. Gunnison National Forest Following the Rifle Falls meeting, Department-employed student assistants William Hlavachick, Bill Jones, Fred George, Gary Brown, and Dave Stearns were started on analysis of the Department's Sapinero Management Area winter ranges. Headquarters were established and maintained in the state-owned Ellgen place west of Gunnison. After a week at Ellgen, Messrs. Hlavachick and Jones moved to the Rio Grande National Forest to continue work under crew-leader Robert Pizel, and Fred George went to the Grand Mesa-Uncompahgre National Forest under Ladd Frary in his crew. Gary Brown and Dave Stearns stayed on as the crew for Gunnison area surveys working directly under Jack McCrain. The latter two assistants were housed at Ellgen and, later on, in a 2-man house trailer supplied by the Southwest Region. Contribution of the trailer is gratefully acknowledged. Department interest were coordinated by H. R. Shepherd for the San Juan and Grand Mesa-Uncompahgre National Forests and B. D. Baker for the Gunnison and Rio Grande National Forests. Two-inch base maps covering most of the upper main Gunnison River drainage were supplied by the Southwest Region. The Forest Service provided quarter-inch maps, air photos, and some type maps for reference. Forest Service air photos of coverage off bf the National Forest were later replaced. Inter-agency pr'occedures were followed by the Gunnison crew to establish a total of 92 browse condition transects in game units 54, 55, and 67. An attempt was made to establish at least one browse transect in each browse-containing vegetative type on what was determined to be a key area (for either or both deer and elk). However, it was not possible to adhere to this rule in all cases. In some instances, where low browse densities occurred as understory to trees, and a check was desirable on whether the type was in use as cover, a non-transected type designation form was filled out for the type (Figure 1). Grassland types low in browse density also were treated in that manner because of a lack of direction in the procedures. In order to obtain more information on game use in non-transected types, a 10•.. plot pellet group transect was read and recorded on either the front or back of Form RG 2200-15 (Figure 1). Eleven of these reconnaissance data write-ups were made during the course of the Gunnison surveys. �- 90 Figure 1. RANGE MANAGEMENT ANALYStS -- TYPE DESIGNATION (NON-TRANSECTED AREAS)* UNIT KEY AREA ------------~ rOREST OR B.L-M. DISTRICT ------------ ---------------------- DATE. RECORD TYPE DESIGNATION AERIAL EXAMINERS TYPE IDENTIFICATION (FROM PHOTO ------------------------_ NUM8ER MAP) ---r( ~L-E -TT-E-R"""· -A-L-P-H-A-B-E-T-I-C-A-L-L-y-B-Y-P-H-O-T-O-.-.--A-J-B-,-C-,) AREA LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION ----------------------------------------------VEGETATIVE ASPECT ~(~Do~M":"1 N~A~N~TS:--) -:S~E~C~O:":'N~D-:A~R-Y:-=S-::P-::E-::C~I ':"E':""5 -,-O.•• V~E~R:-:S~T~O~R~Y---U-N-D~E-R~S~T~O-R-Y-D-E-N-S-I T-Y-. ) SEASON or USE ---r(-AS~-IN-D--IC-A-T-E-D--B-Y--A-M-O-U-N-T--A-N-D--TY-P-E--O-F--P-E-L-L-E-T--G-R-O-U-P-S~)---HEDGING ON AVAILABLE DEGREE OF BARKING BROWSE ----------------------------------------------- (IN ASPEN) --------~(~L-I-G-H-::T-)-M-O-O-E-R-A-T-E-j--H-EA-V-Y-)r------------------ WHY TRANSECT REMARKS NOTE: COVER, ETC. NOT EMPLOYED ~--------------------------------------------------------------- UNDER REMARKS, INDICATE THE RELATIVE VALUE OF THE AREA WITH REGARD TO SPRING RANGE, CALVING AREA, PROXIMITY TO IMPORTANT FEEDING (KEY)AREAS, * rOR USE ONLY ON ASPEN BROWSE RG --------------------------------------------------- AND ALSO 2200·15 CONIFER TYPE WITHOUT UNDERSTORY TYPE WITHOUT UNDERSTORY BROWSE �-91- Only lands lying within National Forest boundaries were sUYiTeyed, although vegetative type lines were left open at the boundary or were closed, in cases of small types, short distances outside of the boundary. By mutual consent, it was agreed to include the state-controlled Sapinero Winter Range Management Area in the surveys. Appreciation for this inclusion is extended to the Gunnison National Forest Range Staff. Rio Grande National Forest Activities preliminary to the actual field work on the Rio Grande National Forest have been presented in foregoing paragraphs. Personnel-wise, Bill Hlavachick resigned after two weeks on the crew to accept a job in Kansas. Two Colorado State University post S-Qffiffier camp students, Steve Peterson and Warren Sanders, were added in late August to give the work a boost until they and Bill Jones returned to college in September. The Department paid Sander's salary and the Forest Service took care of Peterson's wages. Big game winter range on the Rio Grande National Forest presents a situation unlike most others in Colorado in that grassland types predominate. Where browse types rarely do occur, generally least desirable shrub species are most abundant or densities are so low as to discourage use of the browse condition transect procedure. It was obvious that a supplementary technique was needed to evaluate key grassland range areas that were primarily cof.nhab Lbed by elk and cattle. As a result, agreement was reached to employ the paced (or modified Parker) condition transect procedure. Range allotment type maps were referred to frequently to avoid duplication of any previous transect work of this nature. Figure 2 is the standard form in Region 2 of the Forest Service for recording paced condition transect data. Pellet group transect information was recorded in the space provided for "Vigor Measurements" since the latter were not done (acceptable omission). Paced condition transect procedures and scorecards are found in the Region 2 Range Analysis Handbook. Mention should also be made that in April instruction was given Naturalist Bob Fulz of the Sand Dunes National Monument on performing post-use browse measurements and utilization procedures including techniques of making extensive utilization checks. This was in follow-up to the establishment of a tagged and measured browse transect in the fall of 1961 on a portion of the Mon-wnent receiving fairly heavy use by deer. One half of another day was spent in April on the utilization phase of analysis when W.C.O. Hawker was assisted in making post-use measurements on mountain mahogany (Cercocarpus montanus) on the Ward Gulch transect in game unit 68. San Juan National Forest Big game winter range on the San Juan National Forest is quite extensive in comparison with the other three Forests treated in this report. Because of the size of the area involved, the problem was most considerable relative to key area location and designation. Through the aid of aerial observation flights in the winter of 1961-62, game concentrations and distribution were outlined on maps. That information, combined with general observations of plant vigor and form obtained as crew-members field type mapped vegetation on aerial photos, led to generally reliable delineati.ons of key areas. Priority was given to the job of type mapping as much as possible first. Then.browse condition transects were established and read in key areas afterward and as time would allow. �- 92 Fit!ure ? PACED TRANSECT RECORD FORM AND SUMMARY 2210 Allotment -Fo-r-e-s-.t-.-------District Sample No. .Photo No. Date TYPe ----~S~c-o-r-ec-a-r~dr~~Ex~am--o ----Transect location -------------------- ----------------------------------------------------------Transect Hits Item Tl T2 T3 Total Average Q) r-I .0 m Q) : • I · .~ (/) Q) ~ • Litter Moss Bare Soil E. Pave. & Ro~k Other Impt. Spp. ~ VIGOR MEASUREMENTS Graze d Ran e .Tl T2 T3 Species ~fl W2 W3 1#4 ~5 r6 '17 ~8 'f) 10 Total Average 1% of Optimum Remarks: R2-2200-10 10/60 Ungraze d(Stuy d Pl0t,etc.) SUMMARY: Forage D. Index Plant D. Index Ground Cover Index CONDITION CLASSIFI=CA~T=I=O~N Forage D.& Comp.Rating (Fair-,Poor+,etc.) -Vigor Rating, ~_~_ (High,Medium or Low) Veg. Condo Class__ ~ _ (Fair-,Poor+.etc.) Soil Stab.Cond.Class (Poor,Fair,etc.) Acres per A .Mo _ ----------------------------------------------------- �-93- A total of 135 browse condition transects were established and read in game units 71, 73, 74, 75, 77, and 78. The non-transected type record or write-up was not employed because of the priority objective of mapping, although plans in 1963 call for examination of aspen and conifer types lacking understory browse in use as game cover in key areas. Grand Mesa-Uncompahgre National Forest The Grand Mesa-Uncompahgre crew adhered to inter-agency prodecures in reading 44 browse condition transects in units 41, 42, 61, 62, and 65. As was the case on the other Forests, the biggest problem seemed to be in determining key areas in which to locate transects. Of importance, too, was the factor of winter ranges extending into the National Forest generally only short distances with the bulk of the range and, consequently, key areas on private land and public domain outside. The administration of this Forest, however, adopted a more liberal view than that of the other three Forests of what was to be covered and, in many instances, the crew apparently was limited in the amount of territory that it surveyed off of the Forest only by lack of air photo coverage or area inaccessibility. Findings: Gunnison National Forest The field survey of winter ranges on Gunnison National Forestlands in units 54, 55, and 67 is virtually complete. Some additional paced condition transects are needed in unit 67 in the upper Cochetopa Creek drainage. Also, although not included in this summary because the Department did not give direct assistance, was the work done by Jack McCrain in analyzing restricted amounts of ranges in units 52, 62, and 63 in the North Fork of Gunnison River area. Of a total of approximately 141,000 acres that were surveyed in units 54, 55, and 67, 55,000 are in unit 54, 51,500 in unit 55, and 34,500 in unit 67. The 55,000 acres in unit 54 are composed of 38,000 acres of National Forest lands and 17,000 acres on the Sapinero Management Area and adjacent Dillon Mesa lands. Approximately 190 man-days were required to accomplish the field work. Sagebrush was by far the most extensive vegetative type on the Gunnison ranges. Of the 92 browse condition transects that were run, 78 were in Type 4 Sagebrush. Other types in minor acreages that contained browse were 5 - Mixed Browse, 6 - Conifer, 9 - Juniper, and 10 - Broad-leaved Trees. Table 1 presents the complete distribution of transects by type and game unit. For all vegetative types and game units, browse composition ratings were predominantly low (58%), with 40% and 2%, respectively, in the medium and high categories. Density ratings were somewhat more encouraging from the following results: 83% of 92 transects were medium, 15% were low, and again, 2% were high. Browse vigor ratings resulted in 52% being low, 39% medium, and 9% high. Sixty-seven per cent of all transects were medium in soil stability, with 25% rated low and 8% high. Condition ratings for browse composition, denSity, and vigor, and soil stability for total transects by unit follow closely the pattern of percentages listed above for all units. �Table 1.--Summary C-ame Unit -_._--- 54 Sapinero 55 Taylor River 67 Tomichi of 92 browse condition transect ratings, Gunnison National Forest ~dnter ranges - Smmner 1962. 1I Vegetative No. of Type Tvpe Transects Rating ~cies Artr,Putr,Cemo 4 Low ::agebrush QUE,Chvd,DF, 44 Ned. SYM10rh;Y:IST1 High 5 QUE, Ar-t r ,Al'1E, Low Mixed Putr Med. 4 Browse High 6 DF, Artr, AME, Low Conifer QUE Med. 5 Hioh J,Artr,Putr 9 Low Juniper 1 Med. High 10 A,Artr Low Broad-leaf 1 Ned. Trees High Artr, Putr, J, 4 Low Sagebrush 21 Chvd,PP,SYl1 Med. High 6FP,Artr,Putr Low Conifer 1 Med. Hi h 9 J,Artr,Chvd Low Juniper 1 Ned. High 4 Artr,Putr,Chvd Low Sagebrush Chna,PP,Feid 13 Med. High 6 DF ,PP ,Artr Low Conifer 1 Hed. High 1I Includes analysis of Game and fish Department Composition No. % 28 64 16 36 0 0 1 25 3 75 0 0 2 40 2 40 1 20 0 0 1 100 0 0 1 100 0 0 0 0 12 57 8 38 1 5 0 0 1 100 0 0 1 100 0 0 0 0 7 54 6 46 0 0 1 100 0 0 0 0 Sapinero Nanagement Densit;y: No. % 11 5 84 ~7 2 5 0 0 4 - 100 0 0 80 4 1 20 0 0 0 0 1 100 0 0 1 100 0 0 0 0 1 5 20 95 0 0 0 0 1 100 0 0 1 100 0 0 0 0 2 15 11 85 0 0 0 0 1 100 0 0 Vigor No • % 18 24 2 2 2 0 2 1 2 0 0 1 1 0 0 15 41 54 5 50 50 0 40 20 40 0 0 100 100 0 0 72 14 14 0 100 0 100 0 0 69 ;21 0 0 100 0 3 3 0 .1 0 1 0 0 9 4 0 0 1 0 Soil No. % 14 32 26 59 4 9 0 0 3 75 1 25 0 0 80 4 1 20 1 100 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 100 5 24 16 76 0 0 0 0 1 100 0 0 1 100 0 0 0 0 2 15 11 85 0 0 0 0 1 100 0 0 Associated S~~cies___ Teca,RIB,AHE,Hare.ROS Cemo,Chna,Chvd,SYM RIB,Ivlare,SYM,Putr,ROS SYM,QUE \0 Chvd,ROS Teca, Chvd, Chna,Mare, ROS,AME SYN Futr, Teca ROS,Teca,SYM,POA,Mare Chvd Area and adjacent Dillon Mesa lands. +"" �-95- Type 4 big sagebrush (Artemisia tridentata), had associated most commonly with it, bitterbrush (Purshia tridentata), mountain mahogany, oakbrush (Quercus spp. ), little rabbi tbrush (Chrysothamnus viscidiflorus), snowberry (Symphoricarpos spp.), and big rabbitbrush (C. nauseosus)as co-dominants. Sagebrush occurred fairly frequently under Douglas fir (Pseudotsuga menziesii), ponderosa pine (Pinus ponderosa), and juniper (Juniperus spp.). Principal subordinate plants to sagebrush were ricegrass (Oryzopsis hymenoides), needlegrasses (Stipa spp.), and fescues (Festuca idahoensis,~. thurberi). The m~xed browse type was recorded only in unit 54. Oakbrush characteristically dominates the aspect in the Type 5 mixtures and disappears from associations near lola, Colorado. Distribution appears to be related closely to elevation. The distribution of serviceberry (Amelanchier spp.) corresponds with that of oakbrush generally, although it is found sporadically at higher elevations where oakbrush seems only very rarely to occur. Big sagebrush and bitterbrush are other co- or sub-dominants with oak and serviceberry in Type 5. The wide distribution and importance of sagebrush is further demonstrated by the fac,tthat it appeared in all of the minor vegetative types which were recorded,/namely conifer (Type 6), juniper (Type 9), and broad-leaved trees (Type 10 ?l. Winter range Type 6 dominants were Douglas fir, juniper, and ponderosa pine with the first species the most common. Pinon pine (Pinus edulis) is conspicuously absent in Gunnison area 9 Types. Aspen (Populus tremuloides) was the dominant broad-leaved tree where the one Type 10 browse transect was run. Lesser shrub species occurring sporadically in the various types were smo-bthhorsebrush (Tetradymia canescens), currant (Ribes spp.), and rose (Rosa spp.) . Table 2 very briefly summarizes the 11 miscellaneous reconnaissance data write-ups. Pellet group indices obtained through performance of these and the browse condition transect procedures have not been analyzed. The pellet group indices were employed in the course of the surveys, however, to help delineate average upper limits of winter range and key areas within the winter range. Table 2.--Summary of 11 miscellaneousrecon data write-ups, Gunnison National Forest winter ranges - Summer 1962. Vegetative Type 4 - Sagebrush 55 Taylor River 6 - Conifer Game Unit 67 Tomichi Number of Write-ups 1 1 1 - Grassland 6 6 - Conifer 3 *Various mixtures of Fear,Feid, and Feth. Type Species Artr,Chvd DF,J,Artr Mumo,Artr,Chvd, HYM,FES*, CAR Fear,Arfr PP,DF,LP,A, FES* Fear Assoc. Species DF,Putr Chvd,SYM DF,PP, Kocr,Chna SYM Feid,Mumo,RIB, Artr �Table 3.--SWnmary of results of 25 browse condition transects, Rio Grande National Forest winter ranges - Summer 1962. CarneUnit 76 Creede 79 La Garita Vegetative Type 5 Hixed Browse 1 Grassland 5 Mixed Browse 6 Conifer No. of Transects 2 1 3 5 9 Finon-Juni;cer 3 6 68 Saguache Conifer 8 9 Finon-Juniper 3 Type Composition Species Rating·· No. % CHY~:,RIB,SYH, Low 2 100 Rhtr,Orhy Hed. 0 0 High 0 0 Humo,Fear, Low 0 0 Cemo Med. 1 100 High 0 0 Cemo,RIB,CHY~~ Low 2 67 SYH,Bogr,1viumoMed. 1 33 High 0 0 PP,CHY~~, Cemo, Low 2 40 SYH,RIB,Numo Med. 3 60 High 0 0 P,J,Cerno, CHY~:-Low 1 33 RIB,Bogr,Humo Ned. 1 33 High 1 34 P,PF,DF,A, Low 0 0 Cemo,RIB,Fear, Hed. 2 25 !.fumo High 6 75 P,J,DF,Cemo, Low 1 33 RIB,Bogr,Artr Ned. 2 67 Hi h 0 0 Density No. 7b 2 100 0 0 0 0 1 100 0 0 0 0 3 100 0 0 0 0 4 80 0 0 1 20 2 67 1 33 0 0 8 100 0 0 0 0 3 100 0 0 0 0 Vigor No. % 2 100 0 0 0 0 1 100 0 0 0 0 3 100 0 0 0 0 4 80 1 20 0 0 2 67 1 33 0 0 8100 0 0 0 0 2 67 1 33 0 0 Soil No. :;,;Associated Species 1 50 0 0 ROS,AGO,Bogr 1 50 0 0 1 100 CHY~:-, Teca 0 0 1 33 1 33 Arfr,Pofr,ACT,Rhtr 1 34 0 0 5 100 ROS,HOL,ANT,Bogr 0 0 0 0 3 100 0 0 0 0 3 38 5 62 0 0 2 67 1 33 Teca SYH,Arfr,Aruv,Porr CHY-l:-,SYM,Mumo,Hufi * CHY=Various mixtures of Chrysothamnus with Chna and Chvd commonly together and most abundant in associations. \D CJ'\ �Table 4.-Su.1nmar;yr of results Game Unit Vegetative Type Grassland of 35 paced Number of Transe~tf3 11 76 Creede 4 Rabbitbrush 5 Nixed Brows e 16 Grassland 79 La Garita 4 Rabbitbrush 5 2 condition Rio Grande National Forage Density and Composition i.~o. Per cer,t Type ~pecies SYM,CHY';:·, HUH';H:·, Fear, Humo,Hufi, Bogr Rating V. Poor 6 Poor1 Poor 1 Poor+ 1 Fair-. 2 Fair 0 Fair+ 0 Good 0 Foor1 CHY-;~, Fear, j\[ufi Fair+ 0 1 SY11,CHY-;:·, V. Poor Fair0 Bogr V. Poor 4 RIB,Chvd, CHY·::-,HUH-;H~ V. Poor+ 1 Poor2 Mumo,Mufi, Poor 1 Fear, Bogr, Poor+ 1 Dapa,ERO, Fair1 Sihy, Kocr, Fair 0 POT Fair+ 3 Good2 Good+ 1 V. Poor 1 CHY';:-, Chvd, Foor (0 Bogr ,Humo, Fair+ 1 2 RIB, CHY";-, V. Poor Poor0 Bogr !~ixed Br-ows e 2 _______ -----------------------------~Poor+ CHY';:-,IvIufi, HUi110, Fear, 2 68 Kocr Grassland Saguache .;:. Ch'Y=iJarious mixtures .;:·~c i-lUE=iJarious mixtures transects, of Chrysothamnus with of Mufi and Mumo. Poor Fair C~odExcellent 0 1 0 0 1 55 9 9 9 Forest winter Vegetative Condition No. Per cent Soil Stability No. % 6 1 1 1 9 9 0 0 1 9 9 46 9 9 0 100 0 100 12 6 12 6 1 55 9 9 9 18 2 18 1 0 0 0 100 0 100 0 25 6 13 6 6 6 0 19 13 6 50 0 50 100 0 0 50 0 0 50 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 4 1 2 0 0 0 100 0 100 0 25 6 13 6 6 6 0 19 13 6 50 0 50 100 0 0 50 0 0 50 5 1 Chna and Chvd commonly together ranges 1 1 1 1 0 3 2 1 1 0 1 2 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 2 1 2 1 0 . 2 0 3 3 2 13 19 19 13 0 0 - Sununer 1962. Associated Species Arfr, CAR,ERO,FOT,ROS, ANT,ERI POT,ANT Hufi ARE,CAR,ANT,ASR, Cemo , Arir,Feth,ERI,Pofr 0 0 Cemo,CAR,ANT 2 100 0 0 0 0 Arfr,CAR,Sihy,ANT 1 50 ~1---5~0~~.--_=__----------0 0 CAR,JUN 1 50 1 50 0 0 and most abundant in associations • \0 -.J I �- 98- Rio Grande National Forest A total of approximately 146,000 acres were surveyed on the Rio Grande National Forest in game units 68, 76, and 79. Except for a small area on Goose Creek near Wagon Wheel Gap, field work in unit 76 is complete. Unit 79 also is done, and approximately three fourths of unit 68 has been surveyed. Survey acreage totals by unit are 53,000 in 68, 54,000 in 79, and 39,000 in 76. About 185 man-days were spent in performance of the work. Twenty-five browse condition transects, 35 paced condition or modified Parker transects, and 102 miscellaneous write-ups were run or prepared. As has been discussed, the dearth of browse, particularly more highly preferred species, is characteristic of Rio Grande ranges. Thus, it was necessary to supplement the procedures with the modified Parker and miscellaneous recon techniques in order to obtain a minimum of information about the vegetation and condition of it and the soil in relation to game animals. Of the 25 browse transects read, one was in Type 1 - Grassland, five were in Type 5 - Mixed Browse, 13 were in Type 6 - Conifer, and six were in Type 9 Pinon-Juniper (Table 3). Low and medium ratings predominated the condition categories that are shown in the following table: Table 5.--Summary of browse condition and soil stability ratings from 25 browse condition transects, all types and game units, Rio Grande National Forest winter ranges - Summer 1962. Category Rating Low Medium High No. Trans. % of Tot. No. Trans. % of Tot. No. Trans. % of Tot. Browse Composition 8 32 10 40 7 28 Browse Density 23 92 1 4 1 4 Browse Vigor 22 88 3 12 0 0 Soil Stability 2 8 15 60 8 32 The only part of the foregoing analysis from which some optimism is possible is in the soil stability ratings. If mountain mahogany had not been present in many types to the exclusion of other browse species, high composition ratings would not have been as frequent as they were. Density and vigor ratings point up the low available forage supplies from the browse that is present. The ratings that are possible from paced condition transects are finer in that five main categories of very poor, poor, fair, good, and excellent exist with minus (-) and plus (+) adjectives that can be assigned in addition. Of 35 transects, 29 were in Type 1 - Grassland, 3 were in Type 4 - Rabbitbrush, and 3 were in Type 5 - Mixed Browse. Staying with the five main rating classes, the transects yielded the results presented in Table 6. �-99- Table 6.--Summary of vegetation condition and soil stability ratings from 35 paced transects, all types and game units, Rio Grande National Forest winter ranges - Summer 1962 Category Rating Excellent Fair Good Very Poor Poor No. of of No. of of No. of of No. of of of No. of Trans. Total Trans. Total Trans. Total Trans. Total Trans. Total % % % % % Forage Density and Composition 15 43 9 26 7 20 3 9 1 2 Veg. Condition 15 43 9 26 7 20 3 9 1 2 Soil Stability 4 11 9 26 18 51 4 12 0 0 Despite the use of two systems for rating ranges, results were reasonably comparable on factors of vegetation and soil. Vigor ratings were omitted in paced condition procedures so that general comparisons were not possible of that factor. Table 7 summarizes the 102 non-transected type write-ups which were made. The majority of non-transected types were aspens or conifers where checking was necessary relative to the extent such areas were used for cover. None of the non-transected type write-ups were prepared in unit 68 because forms were not available then in the early stages of field work. A pellet group transect of ten 0.01 acre circular plots was read as part of browse condition transect, paced condition transect, and non-transected type write-up procedures. Indices of stocking rates that were obtained have not been analyzed but were employed as guides in delineating key area and winter range boundaries. The vegetative cover of winter ranges in units 76 and 79, and the western three fourths of 68 is characterized by a pronounced deficiency of browse. However, where transect and reconnaissance information was gathered on browse types, big and little rabbitbrushes, mountain mahogany, snowberry, currant., and skunkbush (Rhus trilobata) were found variously to occur as dominants and/or co-dominants.-Variously subordinate to the shrub species are Arizona fescue (Festuca arizonica), mountain and slimstem muhlys (Muhlenbergia montana, M. filiculmis), ricegrass (Oryzopsis hymenoides), blue grama (Bouteloua graciliS), and fringed sage (Artemisia frigida). Most important of the associated species in the browse types are rose, shrubby and herbaceous cinquefoil (Potentilla fruticosa, Potentilla spp.), rock spirea (Holodiscus dumosus), pingue (Actinea spp. ), fleabane (Erigeron spp.), mountain dandelion (Agoseris spp.), penstemon (Penstemon spp.), sedges (Car-exspp.), lupine (Lupinus spp.), and squirreltail (Sitanion hystrix). Although mountain mahogany is found in all units that were surveyed, abundance was great enough only in vegetation of unit 79 for it to rate in type designations on basis of aspect. Of even greater importance than the browse types in supplying forage, particularly for elk, ar-e;the grassland and open timber types· in the units inventoried. �- 100 - Table 7.--Sununary of non-transected type write-ups, winter ranges - Summer 1962. Game Unit Vegetative Type 1 - Gr~§Ela~n~d~__. 5 - Hixed Browse _________________ hio Grande National Forest Number of vvrite-ups Type Species Assoc. Species ~l C.~H~y_,<~,~F~e~a~r~,M~u~f~i __ ~M~u~m~o~,~K~o~c~r _ 3 RIB, Rhtr, CHY~~, Arfr, Bogr, PEN, :::.SYM=t.:Qrhy, Chvd LUP ,Chna.JAGO DF,BF,BS,A,ES, VIC,Arfr,ASR,THA 6 - Conifer 24 PP, AF, .Iuco,RIB, Kocr, CHY':-, Shca , 76 SYM,LUF, Fear, Aruv ,Pofr, FRG, 'Creede CAR, FES-lH:-, Mumo ROS, Dapa Feth ------------~~~,..:--=-~---------::---A,DF,ES,BP,Shca, Pofr,ROS,Dapa, 10 - Broad-leaf 21 Aruv, -Juco , FES~H~, THA, Mare, Sihy, Trees (Aspen)-""",LUP,BRO,IvIumo, SEN,RIB ________________ ~~ __ ~~----------~ __ -- __ ~F~e=a~r~F~~J.CA~R~-----------.-:.l __ ---=G;;;.,r-=a:.:::s:..:.;s~l;.;:a~n:.;::d:.___:.l __=C;.;.:.:HY ~c•Mumo ,Bof,r Fear 4 - Rabbitbrush 2 CHY-::-,Cemo,RIB, PP,Fear,Mumo, Arfr Bo r 5 - Mixed Browse 2 P ,Bogr DF, BP, A, PP , ES, POT, HOL, SYM,LP, 6 - Conifer RIB, Juco, Aruv, 36 P,LUP,POA,ROS Cemo,CAR,Fear, 79 La Garita Mumo Feth FES~_H_c 9 - Pinon-Juniper P, J, CHY~:-,RIB, Cemo ,Mumo, Fear 4 Mufi Bo r A,DF,ES,Shca, CHY-l~, Juco,ROS, 10 - Broad-leaf RIB, Dapa ,FES-li-, BP, LUP, BRO, 8 Trees (Aspen)~HH:Fear,Feth,Thmo, Aruv FOT Total 102 ~c CHY=Various mixtures associations. ,H~ FES=Fear of Chrysothamnus with Chna and Chvd most abundant in and Feth in association. ~HHc Symbol for aspen (A) not included in type de s i.gnat.Lons when other species rated inclusion since it was the only broad-leaf tree encountered. �-101Gra.ssland dominants and/or co-dominants were found variously to be slimstem and mountain muhlys, Arizona fescue, blue grama, Parry oatgrass (Oanthonia parryi), Junegrass (Koelaria cristata), squirreltail, herbaceous cinquefoils, and buckwheats (Eriogonum spp.) with occasional occurrences in small amounts of mountain mahogany, rabbitbrushes, and snowberry. Principal associated plants are smooth horsebrush, fringed sage, sedges, rose, pussytoes, fleabane, asters (Aster spp.), Thurber fescue (Festuca thurberi), and shrubby cinquefoil. The timber types (6, 9, and 10) variously have as dominants and/or co-dominants ponderosa pine, Douglas fir, bristlecone pine (Pinus aristata), blue spruce (Picea pungens), Englemann spruce (Picea englemanni), alpine fir (Abies lasiocarpa), pinon pine, and juniper with mountain mahogany, rabbitbrushes, currant, snowberry, low juniper (Juniperus communis), bearberry (Arctostaphylos uva-ursi), russet buffaloberry (Sheperdia canadensis), Arizona and Thurber fescues, Parry oatgrass, herbaceous cinquefoils, mountain and slimstem muhlys, sedges, bromes (Bromus spp.), lupines, and blue grama as lower story main associates. Listed as minor associates are rock spirea, smooth horsebrush, rose, shrubby cinquefoil, fringed sage, pussytoes, bluegrasses, senecio (Senecio spp.), Oregon grape (Mahonia repens), meadowrue (Thalictrum spp.), squirreltail, strawberry (Fragaria spp.), June grass, vetch (Vicia spp.), and asters. San Juan National Forest Of the total of approximately 595,000 acres analyzed in 1962, 62,000 were in game unit 71, 63,000 in 73, 104,500 in 74, 87,000 in 75, 140,000 in 77, and 138,500 in 78. The job of type mapping in all units was completed except for a portion of 71 on what is known as the Glade. The latter, plus possibly a small portion of the Glade in unit 72, will be finished in 1963. Approximately 373 man-days afield were spent by the crew in survey work in 1962. A total of 135 browse condition transects were read despite emphasis on type mapping and the determination of key areas first. Intensification of browse condition transect work will take priority in 1963 to complete the analysis of all units. The summary of results of the 135 transects shows that 71 transects were placed in Type 5 - Mixed Browse, 50 in Type 6 - Conifer, 13 in Type 9 - Pinon-Juniper, and 1 in Type 4 - Sagebrush (see Table 8). Browse composition ratings were mostly medium, vigor ratings were generally low with density generally being high (Table 9). Soil stability ratings were high on the whole, although Chet Anderson feels that results are not indicative of the true status of soil stability. The reasoning for this is that the prevailing high overstory tree and browse densities influence the ground cover index to produce high soil ratings, with the high densities, however, apparently not being effective soil pr-ot.ect.or-s.; HeIbe'Lfeve s that this is particularly so of perimeter portions of shrubs. The principal shrub species throughout the San Juan winter ranges is oakbrush whether in stands of mixed browse or under conifers. Variously associated in major abundance with oakbrush are bitterbrush, serviceberry, snowberry, chokecherry (Prunus spp.), mountain mahogany, rose, Fendler's ceanothus (Ceanothus fendleri), big sagebrush, and little rabbitbrush. In coniferous types with browse understory, .ponderosa pine is the principal tree species followed in importance by pinon pine and juniper. �Table b.-Swnmary Game Unit 71 Dolores of 135 browse condition transects, San Juan National Forest winter ranges - Summer 1962. Type Vegetative No. of Type Species Transects QUE,Futr 5 M1Xed 'Browse 2 6 Conifer 5 5 i-fixed Browse 73 ~-1ar:co s 6 Conifer 5 _________________ 5 74 Her;:10 sa Hixed Browse 13 6 Conifer 13 5 l-lixedBr-owse 26 6 75 _-illis&s River Conifer 11 9 Pinon-Juniper 8 5 l'Iixed Browse 77 Piedra 12 6 Conifer 10 9 Pinon-Juniper 3 Composition Density Vigor Soil Rating No. % No. ;& No. % No. % Associate Species Low 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Ned. 2 100 0 0 1 50 0 0 CEA,ROS,AME,SYH High 0 0 2 100 1 50 2 100 Low 0 0 0 .0 3 60 0 0 PP,QUE,Futr Ned. 1 20 2 40 0 0 0 0 CEA,ROS,fuVili,SYM High 4 80 J 60 2 40 5 100 Low 0 0 0 0 1 100 0 0 QUE,ANE Ned. 1 100 0 0 0 0 1 100 Artr,Chvd Hi.gh 0 0 1 100 0 0 0 0 Low 0 0 0 0 2 40 0 0 FP,QUE,Futr, ANE,SY;;f Ned. 3 60 3 60 2 40 0 0 ROS,PRU ,,--_. .--:.;.Hl=.·< g~h=__...;2::..__=40::..__ 2 40 1 20 5 100 QUE,SYH,At'1E, Low 2 15 0 0 3 23 0 0 PRU,Cemo,ROS Hed. 10 77 0 0 6 46 0 0 CEA,Rhtr,Feru High 1 8 13 100 4 J1 13 100 PP,QUE,Sy}f, Low 5 38 0 0 3 23 0 0 CEA,ANE,ROS, Med. 8 62 2 15 4 31 0 0 DF,WF,Pera,Feru •..... PRU,Cemo High 0 0 11 85 6 46 13 100 Cl I\.l QUE,ROS,Putr, Low 3 12 0 0 18 69 2 8 AHE,PF,SYH, Ned. 12 46 2 8 3 12 15 57 FRU,Feru,Rhtr,Fera Cemo,Artr,Chvci---.l:1:i,gh ll 42 24 --'9_2 __ "'-5 __ 1'-'9'---_-'-9_~3"_'5"_ _ PP,QUE,Futr Low 0 0 0_ 0 11 100 0 0 Ned. 10 91 0 i? 0 0 3 27 Chvd , Artr,...u'1E, ROS, Hig.!:l___1 _3__ 1_1 tQQ__ ~ __ i? 8 73 PR~ SYJL __ P,J,QUE,Cemo, LO~l 0 0 0 0 7 88 0 0 Putr,AHE Hed. 3 3;3 7 88 0 0 5 62 Feru,Chvd,Artr Hifh 5 62 1 12 1 -12 3 38 QUE,Putr,Cemo, Low COO 0 10 83 1 8 AEE,PP MtSd. 5 1:,2 1 8 2 17 11 92 PRU,ROS,SYM,Chvd, High 7 58 11 92 0 0 0 0 Rhtr low 0 0 0 0 8 80 2 20 ?F,QUE,Futr, Hed. 1 10 5 50 1 10 8 80 Rhtr,Al'-:E,CEA,SYH,ROS Cemo Hiph 9 90 5 50 1 10 0 0 P,J,Cemo,QUE, LO'..; 0 0 1 34 3 100 1 33 Putr Eed. 1 33 1 33 0 0 2__ iil SY]:'i, Al1E Hi~h '2 67 1 33 0 0 0 0 u �Table 8.--Summar:! Came Unit of 135 br-owse condition Vegetative Type 4 Sagebrush No. of Transects 5 Hixed Br-ows e 17 transects, Type Species .. RatiDg_ Artr,Chvd,QUE Low Ned, High AHE,QUE,SYM, Low Med. Chvd,PP !ii.&.~_ 78 San Juan San Juan 6 Conifer J-ow P,J,QUE,Putr Med. High Low Med. High 6 9 Pinon-Juniper PP,QUE,SYH 2 National Forest winter ranges - Summer- 1962 (Continued), Composition Density Vigor Soil }lo_._% __ }J.9.• _ %"._1100._ {l.--.l'.9-,- __ %_ 1 0 0 10 7 0 4 2 0 0 1 1 100 0 0 59 41 0 67 33 0 0 50 50 0 0 1 0 0 17 0 1 5 0 2 0 0 0 100 0 0 100 0 17 83 0 100 0 1 100 0 0 0 0 11 65 2 12 4. 23 .l 11 3 50 2 J3 2 100 0 0 0 0 .Assoc:L~E3.~ecies 0 0 1 100 Putr 0 0 0 0 1 6 CEA,FRU, ROS,Chvd,POA, 16 94 CAR 0__ 0 0 0 AME,ROS 6 100 0 0 2 100 Rhtr,Artr,Cemo,PRU 0 0 •.... Cl '"'" �- 104Table 9-- Summary of browse condition and soil stability ratings from 135 browse condition transects, all types and game units, San Juan National Forest winter ranges - Summer 1962. Category Rating High Medium Low No. Trans. % of Tot. No. Trans. % of Tot. No. Trans. % of Tot. Browse Composition 25 18 67 50 43 32 Browse Density 1 1 26 19 108 80 Browse Vigor 84 62 24 18 27 20 Soil Stability 6 4 49 36 80 60 Of minor abundance in associations are such shrubs as Fendlerbush (Fendlera rupicola), skunkbush, and squawapple (Peraphyllum ramosissimum. Bluegrasses and sedges are abundant enough to rate type designation only rarely when the shrub and tree species are very few in number in the type. Grand Mesa-Uncompahgre National Forest The total acreage that was surveyed on and adjacent to lands of the Grand Mesa-Uncompahgre National Forest approximated 342,000 acres. In unit 41, 13,000 acres were analyzed to complete the survey that was initiated in 1961 when about 8,000 acres were mapped from Kannah Creek south to the Mesa-Delta County line. About 22,000, 15,000, and 131,000 acres respectively were covered in units 42, 52, and 62. Unit 62 was completed except for possible additional transect work. Approximately 161,000 acres in unit 61 were surveyed to complete it and the analysis which was started in 1961. Air photos of the Billy Creek Management Area and vicinity were borrowed temporarily from the SCS to establish browse condition transects, although that portion of unit 65 could not be finished due to the lack of photos in permanent possession for purposes of type mapping. Of 44 browse condition transects that were established and read in unit 41, 42, 61, 62, and 65, 25 were in Type 4 - Sagebrush, 7 were in Type 5 - Mixed Browse, and 12 were in Type 9 - Pinon-Juniper (Table 10). No key areas were found in unit 52 between Kizer Creek and Leroux Creek. Thus, no transects were put out in that unit. Because of the wide variability in terrain and vegetation, broad-scope summary of transect ratings lack meaning. Nevertheless, for whatever significance it has, most transects were low for browse composition and vigor. Browse density ratings were about equally divided between low and medium while soil stability ratings were mostly medium. Vegetative type maps of the areas surveyed on the Rio Grande, Gunnison, and Grand Mesa-Uncompahgre National Forest are being prepared either by Region 2 staffmenor personnel of the Forests. Mapwork from San Juan surveys will not be done until the end of the 1963 field season. Quarter-inch National Forest maps of survey coverages to-,dateare on file in project records in-Fort Collins and/or Salida. �Table 10.--Sumrnaryof 44 browse condition transects, Grand Hesa-Uncompahgre National Forest winter ranges - Surmner1962. Vegetative G?Jlle Unit Type 41 4 Kar~ah Creek Sagebrush ~2 Grand Hesa 61 ~'iest Side Uncompahgre No. of Transects 2 4 Sagebrush 2 9 Pinon-Juniper 2 4 Sagebrush 7 5 Mixed Br-owse 1 9 Pd.non-c-Jun.i.per4 Sagebrush 62 5 East Side Hixed Browse Uncompahgre 9 Finon-Juniper 4 Sagebrush 65 Alpine 4 11 4. 5 3 5 Mixed Browse 9 Pinon-Juniper 2 Type Species Artr-l;',P,J Rating Low Med. High Artr,P,J Low Med. Hi h P, J,Artr Low Med. High Artr,P,J,QUE Low Hed. High QUE,Artr Low Hed. .High F,J,Putr,Cemo, Low Artr Hed. High Artr,P,J,OPU, Low Stco Med. Hi~h . QUE,Artr,Cemo __ Lm4' Hed. High P,J,Artr,QUE Low Med. High Artr,P,J,Pera Low Med. Birh QUE,Fera,M-'IE Low Med. High P,J,AHE Low M ed• Hiuh Composition No. % 2 100 0 0 0 0 2 100 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 100 0 0 Density No. % 1 50 1 50 0 0 1 50 1 50 0 0 2 100 ~ O 0 0 3 43 4 57 0 0 0 0 0 0 7 100 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 3 11 0 0 2 1 1 4. 1 0 3 0 0 0 100 0 25 0 75 100 0 0 50 25 25 80 20 0 100 0 0 2 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 50 50 0 0 100 0 0 0 2 0 1 0 0 1. 4 0 0 7 4 0 0 4 0 1 4 0 1 100 100 0 0 64 36 0 0 100 0 20 80 0 33 67 0 0 100 0 100 0 0 Vigor Soil__ No. % No. % Associated Species 1 50 1 50 1 50 1 50 Cemo,ANE,QUE 0 0 0 0 2 100 2 100 0 0 0 0 Erte 0 0 0 0 2 100 1 50 0 0 1 50 Cemo , .tu\fl!. , Atco 0 _-:-O.:;-_-=O_---=O~ _ 6 86 1 14 0 0 5 72 A1-lli, SYM,Pera 1 14 1 14 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Putr,Pera, STIll 1 10.9..__ 1 100 4 100 1 25 0 0 3 75 QUE,AME,Cost 0 0 0 0 9 82 .0 0 1 9 10 91 Atca,AME 1 9 1 9 1 25 0 0 2 50 1 25 Prvi ,_S1M, AI{w 1 25 3 75 3 60 2 40 2 40 3 60 Atca,AlviE, Cemo,OPU 0 0 0 0 2 67 1 13 QlJE, SYM 1 _)]h 1 33 CHY,AlvIE, 0 0 1 34 2100 0 0 0 0 0 0 Artr,SYlvI, CHY 0 0 2 100 0 0 0 0 0 0 .1 100 Pera,Cemo,Artr 1 100 0 0 '"Artr includes variable amounts of black sagebrush (Artemisia nova) in some associations. I-' Cl Ul �- 106 - Table 11.-- Summary of browse condition and soil stability ratings from 44 browse condition transects, all types and game units, Grand MesaIncompahgre National Forest winter ranges - Summer 1962. Low No. Trans. Category % Rating Medium of Tot. Trans. of Tot. No. % High No. Trans. % of Tot. Browse Composition 33 75 7 16 4 9 Browse Density 21 48 22 50 1 2 Browse Vigor 32 73 7 16 5 11 Soil Stability 9 20 26 59 9 21 References Cited: Denney, Richard N. 1962. Federal Aid Quarterly Report. Colorado Game & Fish Dept., April, pp. 52-96. Prepared by: Bertram D. Baker Sr. Game Biologist Date: January, 1964 Approved by: Richard N. Denney Project Leader Wayne W. Sandfort Chief, Game Research �January, 1964 - 107 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT state of ------~~~~~-----COLORADO Project No. W-10l-R-5 Work Plan No. 4 Title of Job: Game Range Inveetigations Job No. 5 Chemical Control of Rabbitbrush Period Covered: April 1, 1962 to March 31, 1963 ABSTRACT Certain ecological, physiological, and environmental factors are known to affect the response of rabbitbrush to chemical control. Information was gathered on the following factors; relative humidity, air temperature, soil temperature, soil moisture, stages of vegetative growth, carbohydrate reserves of roots, and phenology of associated species. The study area is located 32 miles southwest of Meeker, in northwestern Colorado. A total of 90 plots, 1/50 acre in size, were established on an abandoned field overgrown with rabbitbrush (Chrysothamnus nauseosus). Sixty of these plots were irrigated to determine the effect of soil moisture. The brush was sprayed with 2,4-0 at two different rates (50#/A and 5#/A acid equivilent) in two separate carriers (Water: diesel oil and water alone). Each plot was sprayed only once using a hand sprayer. Treatment began May 3 and continued at two week intervals until September 15. The survival will be determined in 1963. Compilation and snalysis of data is now being done and will be reported in ths next segment. Recommendations: 1. To complete the analysis of this phase of the study. 2. To continue this job for one or two more years for the purpose of gathering additional information on the eradication of this species. Knowledge gained from this experiment should be incorporated in a research program aimed at improving rangelands controlled by our Game and Fish Department. 3. To attempt the control of rabbitbrush by mechanical means to see if a one-shot treatment is practical. �- 108 Objective: To determine the effect of certain ecological and environmental factors on the response of rabbltbrish to chemical control. TECHNIQUES USED Review of literature. A review of liter.ature on the chemical control of rabbitbrush was accomplished and is submitted with this report. Since the use of herbicides is a relatively new method of control, little work has been done on rabbitbrueh. Hence, additional advice was solicited from people who have had experience with herbicides. 1. 2. Study Area: The study area is located 32 miles southwest of Meeker, in northwestern Colorado. The area is approximately 34 acres in size and is relatively level. It lies along Duck Creek, a subsiderary of yellow Creek, which drains into the White River. The site is an abandoned field completely overgrown with almost a pure etand of Tall Rabbitbrush (Chrysothamnus nauseosus). This brush has been burned six times previously and is from three to six feet tall. Other species present are big sagebrush (Artemesia tridentata), black greasewood CSarcobatu8 vermiculatus), basin wild rye CElymus cinereus), lambsquarter (Chenopodium spp.), and lesser plants. The soil is a deep clay loam, fairly fertile, slightly alkaline, and is derived from sandstone and shale of the Green River Formation. 3. Factors Measured: A. Air Temperature: Air temperature was continuously recorded on a seven-day Casella & Co. Thermo-hygrograph. This instrument was placed in a home-made weather shelter placed within the study area. The air temperature at time of spraying was taken directly from the recording paper. A Mason-Form hygrometer, which is a standard wet and dry bulb type, was also housed in the shelter and was used to check the accuracy of the hair hygrometer. Relative Humidity: The humidity was also recorded on the sevenday thermo-hygrograph and checked by the bulb type hygrothermograph. Readings at time of spraying was taken directly from the recording paper. This type of hygrothermograph permits a check of the humidity (and air temperature) both before and after spraying. 8. C. Soil Temperature: The soil temperature was taken with a Weston testing (FD) soil thermometer at an eight inch depth. Readings were taken at three different locations within each plot, summarized, and averaged. Temperatures were obtained at time of spraying. They were taken at various times of the day in order to obtain a wide range of temperatures. D. Soil Moisture: Moisture in the soil was collected by taking soil samples with a 4' Veihmeyer soil,tube. Samples were placed in soil cans~ weighed, placed in e soil oven for 24 hours, end reweighed. The samples were taken at three different depths; one, two, and three feet at five eeparate locations within each plot. Bulk density samples were also obtained at each depth in order to calculate inches of moisture in the soil. �- 109 - E. Twig Length: The annual growth of rabbitbrush twigs were measured at time of spraying using two systems of measurement. 1. Actual measurement of 20 twig lengths by a tape measure. Only one bush per plot was measured, it being the most prolific individual present. These measurements were summarized and averaged, 2. An estimate of the average twig length (and the range in . lengths) of all the bushes in each plot. Length of current annual growth may be related to the susceptibility of rabbitbrush to chemical control. F. Carbohydrate Content of Roots: Samples of lateral roots were collected from three to seven plants per plot at time of spraying. A Shovel, knife, and garden fork were used to open the soil and expose roots on one side of the plant. Root sizes varied fro~ oneeight to one-half inches in diameter. After collection, they were washed, chopped up, placed in polyethelene bags, and frozen. They were taken to the Colorado State Department of Agriculture laboratory in Denver for chemical analysis. 2,4-0 is translocated to the roots by the carbohydrate and we are interested in knowing when that occurs. G. Phenology: The phenology of rabbitbrush and associated species within each plot were recorded during the entire field season. Notes were kept on the stage of growth, variations among plants of the same species, weather and light at time of spraying, and any phenomena which might be related to optimum spray dates. PROOEDURE Establishment of Plots: The study area was mapped and its dimensions measured. It was divided into five separate sections, four of which were later irrigated. Thirty plots with three replications, B total of 90 plots, were established in a systematic manner. Each plot covered an area of 1/50 acre, was rectangular in shape with dimensionsof 20 by 43.5 feet. Actual treatment plots were marked within this rectangle. These treatment plots were 1/100 acre in size and were 14 by 31 feet. Both plots were sprayed but only those bushes in the 1/100' acre plot will be counted for survival. Boundaries of the 1/100 acre plots were delineated by string lines and staked. later, when two different rates of 2,4-0 were applied, the large plot was divided in half. To eliminate the possibility of chemical drift, non-irrigated plots were spaced 50 feet apart. Irrigated plots were spaced 20 feet apart in order to make water application possible. , ·r 1/100 A.I 1/100 A. I T 1/50 Acre 1/50 Acre �- 110 Irrigatioh: Irrigation was done to determine the effect of soil moisture on the susceptibility of rabbitbrush to 2,4-0. A total of 60 plots were irrigated using a sprinkler system. Equipment included a small gasoline operated Gorman Rupp pump, two inch aluminum pipe, and "Rainbird" sprinklers. The source of water was a continuously flowing stream within the area. Each plot was irrigated only once, just prior to spraying. Enough water was supplied to penetrate three feet in order to bring the soil moisture up to field capacity. Irrigation time varied from 12 to 52 hours depending on soil moisture present. Irrigation was begun May 24 ,and was terminated August 31. Date of Spraying: Spraying was done on 10 different dates, approximately two weeks apart, beginning in May and ending in September. The dates were May 3, May 17, June 2, June 15, July 2, July 17-18, August 1, August 16, August 31, and September 15. The date a plot was to be sprayed was randomly selected from a table of numbers to eliminate personal bias. only three plots were sprayed on May 3rd, but each month this number was multiplied so that by September there were 15 plots being sprayed. See table 1. Chemical Control: The herbicide used was 2,4-0 (2,4 dichlorophenoxyacetic acid) in the butyl ester form. The rate of application was 50 lb./acre, acid equivilent, in a 1:1 mixture of water and diesel oil used as a carrier. The mixture was prepared the night before spraying. A one-gallon hand sprayer with a large nozzle opening was used for application. Each plot was sprayed by walking through the brush and wetting every portion of the plant. Time of spraying varied from 5 a.m. to 7 p.m. in order to obtain a wide range of variables. This sprayer was later replaced by a three gallon Hudson hand sprayer with a smaller size nozzle for greater efficiency. This reduced the amount of spray used per plot from 1 1/2 gallons to 3/4 gallons. By late July many treated plants began resprouting and it was decided to compare a lighter treatment on adjacent plots. The rate of application on these plots was 5 lb./acre, acid equivilsnt, in a straight water carrier. These plots were sprayed in August and September. �- III - Survival Counts: The number of live rabbitbrush plants on each 1/100 acre plot was counted prior to spraying. The number of young plante and the condition of the plants were also recorded. Dead plants were removed from the plots immediately before spraying to eliminate confusion in making survival counts. Each plant was numbered and tagged with an aluminum "Twist-on" tag for accurate identification in the future. Plants will be recounted in 1963 to determine the number killed. only those plants with no green foliage will be considered dead. Discussion: This ~eport covers only the preliminary field work. Follow up work, during the summer of 1963, will be necessary before a final analysis can be completed. Data collected will be analyzed statistically by multiple regression and correlation. Much of the data is now being compiled and a complete report will be submitted in the next segment. Prepared by: Don Smith Date: January, 1964 Approved by: Richard N. Denney Project Leader wayne W. Sandfort Chlef, Game Research �- 112 - REVIEW OF LITERATURE CHEMICAL CONTROL OF RABBITBRUSH by Don Smith Description of Rabbitbrush Rabbitbrush are small to medium sized shrubs belonging to the Compositae fafuily and have conspicuous small yellow flower heads in flat or rounded clusters at the tips of abundant stems. They are frequently called yellowbrush or ray-less goldenrod. This species is found on the open plains and foothills of arid lands and stream channels from sea level to over 10,000 feet elevation. Their range is distinctly confined to western North America, being most abundant within the Great Basin area. The majority of these species grow at comparitively low altitudes on fairly deep, heavy soils although they may be present on alkaline plains and sandy soils. Most species of Chrysothamnus have little or no forage value, but a few such as lanceleaf rabbitbrush (C. lanceolatus) and twistleaf rabbitbrush (C. vicidiflorus var. tortifolius) rank as good to fair forage for sheep and cattle. Rubber rabbitbrush (C. nauseosus) often grows abundantly in the desert and furnishes considerable winter feed for sheep (12). Deer and elk will utilize rabbitbrush to a limited degree when it is intermixed with other Shrubs. Rabbitbrush is sometimes a useful indicator of range deterioration. For example, it now grows abundantly in areas which formerly supported good stands of giant wild rye (Elymus condensatus), winter fat (Eurotia lanata), and on abandoned croplands. Harrington (3) reports seven species and 21 sub-species of rabbitbrush in Colorado most of which are confined to the western portion of the state. They are usually found on semi-arid sites and range in altitude from 5,000 to 10,500 feet. �- 113 - EcoloQY Rabbitbrush is an invader plant which is dif~icult, to control and quick to re-establish itself. Seedlings often appear in large numbers where competing vegetation has been reduced or where the soil has been disturbed. Eventually they overtop grasses and forbs making them relatively inaccessible to animals. Rabbitbrush is oommonly associated with sagebrush (Artemesia) but it is much more a pioneer and less exaoting in its soilrequirements as indicated by its salt tolerance enabling it to grow with gr€asewood (Saroobatus) and saltgrass (Oistichlis). Rising water tables are no hinderence and thus it dissipates valuable ground water (8). It has a deep and extensive root system which serves as an impediment to wind and water erosion. The stem bases and the larger branches of the plant have many dormant buds which are revived by mechanical or chemical injury to the tops. Hence it is a free-sprouting species and fire is rarely fatal. When pure stands are found it is usually an indication of a previous fire. Experiments with chemical controls Before World War II, brush control was limited to burning or mechanical treatments which ~eren't always feasible. Advanced knowledge of chemicals during the war gave birth to growth regulators which offerred a solution to problems in brushland management. Most of the early research on the chemical control of brush was done on sagebrush with only incidental observations on rabbitbrush and associated species. only recently have the researchers concentrated their attention toward the control of rabbitbrush and consequently, there has been little work Accomplished in this field. However, preceding studies on chemical control of sagebrush have indioated what methods would be most effective in controlling rabbitbrush. Early studies by Tingay and Robertson (11) indicated that rabbitbrush was most susceptible to 2,4-0 butyl esters. This was applied at acid equivilent rates of 2 to 4 pounds per acre when the plants were in the early leaf stage and gave kills of 25 to 33 percent. Kissinger and Vaughn (6) experimented with chemical controls on mixed stands of sagebrush and rabbitbrush near Lander, Wyoming. The work was done at an elevation of 6,800 feet where the annual precipitation was 14 inches. They found that rabbitbrush showed definite resistance to herbicidal treatments which was most effective for sagebrush. Although the rabbitbrush shrubs were killed back to the root crown, many plants grew new shoots the following year with no apparent damage. TheY'concluded that rabbitbrush was more susceptible to 2,4-0 than 2,4,5-T and that treatments applied late in June were more effective than early in June. �- 114 - stoddard (10) reports that early leaf stage application of 2,4-0 butyl ester gave the best kill, He also found that 2,4-0 was superior to 2,4,5-T and that acid rates of 4 Ib/A gave twice the kill as 2 Ib/A. Cornelius (2) claims that Chrysothamnus bloomeri is highly susceptible to 2 Ib/A of 2,4-0 butyl ester. This was applied in an emulsion of ~ gallon of diesel oil to 9~ gallons of water per acre and applied early in June. This work was done in California. In contrast to the previous studies, rabbitbrush has been controlled in the fall of the year (7). This work was done on the A. R. Hamilton ranch near Murray, Utah, in 1953, 1954, and 1955. The altitude is approximately 6,000 feet and the annual rainfall is 14 inches. Mr. Hamilton used 3 lb/A acid equivilent of 2,4-0 butyl ester in 10 gallons of water on both irrigated land and non-irrigated range. He had little success with spring and summer applications but fall spraying gave phenominal kills on irrigated land and good success on small patches of range land. Records were not kept on ecological factors but the majority of plants were in the ~ bloom stage. Follow-up work was necessary to prevent the re-invasion of new seedlings. Robertson. and Cords (9) were among the first to intensively study means of controlling rabbitbrush. Their work was done near Reno, Nevada, at an elevation of approximately 5,000 feet. The site chosen was on a mixed stand of sagebrush, yellowbrush, and rabbitbrush which had been reseeded to standard crested wheatgrass (Agropyron desetorum). Normal precipitation is 9.13 although it was below normal during the experiments. Procedures Although they compared burning, chemical, and mechanical treatments of rabbitbrush, this paper will be concerned only with the chemical control. Five experiments were performed with herbicides; three on rabbitbrush (C. nauseosus) and two on ysllowbrush (C. Vicidiflorus var. elegans). An attempt was made to relate the mortality of rabbitbrush to readily available carbohydrate reserves in the shrubs at the time of treatment. one-year-old wood of 20 twigs were taken from small, medium, and large bushes in addition to portions of the crown wood and analyzed by Weinmann's method as modified by Lindahl et ale Soil moisture was also sampled to help interpret results of the treatments. Plots 20 x 50 feet in three replications were sprayed. All low volume applications were made with a propane powered paint gun sprayer and tank carried by hand. High volume applications were made with a back-pack sprayer. The data was analyzed statistically. Brush counts were taken before treatment on 1/100 acre plots (10 x 43.5) in the center of each treatment plot. Any plant with green tissue was considered alive. Notes on phenology were recorded and applied to the data. �- 115 - The first experiment was to compare times of application of 2,4-0 and 2,4,5-T in 3 gallA of diesel oil on rabbitbrush. only 2,4-0 approached satisfactory results and then only where applied twice. The best dates of spraying were July of one year and repeated in June of the following year. In the second experiment on rabbitbrush, herbicides were tested in three carriers; water, diesel oil, and shale oil. The herbicides were Silvex, 2,4,5-T, and a carrier alone at 10 gallA. Although a favorable date was used (June 3) none of the treatments were regarded as satisfactory. Of the three carriers, diesel oil proved to be the most effective. The third experiment compared rates of application of Silvex on rabbitbrush. The four rates (0,1,2, and 4 lb/A) were applied on June 3, 1954, in 10 gallA of diesel oil. Mortality appeared higher among the yellowbrush than among the rabbitbrush.The 4 pound rate gave the highest kill (56 percent). Although all rates gave significant results, none appeared efficient enough to recommend for large-scale use. The fourth and fifth experiments were concerned with the survival of the yellowbrush understory. A split plot design with four replications was used. Oates selected were mid-April, midMay and mid-June. Herbicides selected were 2,4-0 and 2,4,5-T in 3 gallons of either diesel oil or shale oil. Two sites were compared, one where yellowbrush was an understory of sagebrush, and one where yellowbrush was growing in a stand of crested wheatgrass. The kill of yellowbrush as an understory to sagebrush was better in May than in April but the differences between other months were not significant. On the stand of wheatgrass, mean survivals did not differ significantly between any treatment dates. In both stands, 2,4-0 proved to be superior to 2,4,5-T. Conclusions Robertson and Cords concluded that 2,4-0 was superior to other herbicides for killing both species of Chrysothamnus although there were times when no treatment was effective. Rabbitbrush was most susceptible when Agropyron is in the milk stage and the seed of Poa is ripe. Vellowbrush was most susceptible during the pre-bloom stages of Agropyron and Poa. The most effective date of spraying was during the middle of the active growing season when carbohydrate reserves in the twigs were relatively high but being rapidly depleted. Indications were that this rapid d~pletion of carbohydrates in the twigs during June may have been due to rapid root growth following early June rains. This rapid dislocation of both carbohydrates and herbicides to the root and crown buds may have been the cause of effectiveness. More than just the date of application and stage of development appears to be involved. �- 116 - They found no correlation between the size of the plant and carbohydrate content of either the crown wood or twigs. The trend of carbohydrate content in crown wood was inconsistent and nonsignificant but the trend in twigs showed significant carbohydrate changes at each date. The reserves increase during late summer, level off during the winter months, and rapidly decline in June. Available soil moisture was exhausted to a depth of six inches during the rainless July of 1953 and June of 1954. Moisture was available below 12 inches at all dates of sampling. Site comparisons were made between a shallow swale and an adjacent ridge. More favorable kills were made in the swale suggesting that the high available moisture present may have resulted in growth conditions favorable to herbicidal action. Shale oil and diesel oil were equally effective as carriers of 2,4-0 and 2,4,5-T on yellowbrush although diesel oil proved superior on rabbitbrush. water was about equal to diesel oil as a carrier of 2,4,5-T but not as a carrier of Silvex. They believe that the best success can be attained by burning one year and spraying 2,4-0 the next or spraying the same area with 2,4-0 in successive years. Hyder, Sneva, Chilcote, and Furtick (4) conducted experiments on the chemical control of rabbitbrush with emphasis on big sagebrush (Artemesia Tridentata) in 1950, 1954, and 1955. The work was conducted in central and southeastern Oregon at an elevation of approximately 5,000 feet. The annual precipitation was 11 inches. Their experiments inclUded various dates of application, herbicides, and acid rates. Procedures Appllcation was made by a compressed-air back pack sprayer on four trials and a jeep-mounted power sprayer with a 13 foot boom on one trial. Solution volumes of 5 to 10.9 gallons per acre at acid rates from ~ to 4 pounds per acre were used on various dates throughout the growing season. Herbicides included a variety of 2,4-0 and 2,4,5-T esters and one salt, Silvex esters, Amitrol, and several other acid esters. Notes were kept on vegetative development of the brush and associated species and on soil moisture levels. All tests, except the screening trial, were subject to statistical analysis. Screening trials were conducted in 1954 on two species of rabbitbrush (Chrysothamnus vicidiflorus and C. nauseosus). Eight different herbicides were applied at a rate of 3 lb/A on plots ~ square rods in area. These plots were 'arranged in 3 randomized blocks for each species. The spraying was done on June 5 and survival counts were made 13 months later. Age classes were defined as seedlings, young mature, and old mature. �- 117 - The most effective herbicide on each species was 2,4-0. bicidal effect on age classes was inconclusive. Her- A second experiment tested additives with both 2,4-0 and 2,4,5-T on green rabbitbrush (C. vicidiflorus). These two herbicides, as propyleneglycol butyl ether ester, were applied at acid equivilent rates of 1/2, 3/4, and 1 pound per acre emulsified in 6 gallons of water per acre. A split plot design, using 1/50 acre plots, were arranged in 3 random blocks. A 2 x 3 factorial of herbicides and acid rates were assigned to whole plots and 8 levels of additives were assigned to sub-plots. The eight levels of additives were compounds of urea, boron, iron, copper, magnesium, zinc, maleic hydrazide, and a non-additive check. The three blocks were sprayed on three different dates; May 18, 1954, May 28, 1955, and June 7, 19~5. Dates of spraying, herbiCides, and additives were sources of significant variation in rabbitbrush mortality. The growing seasons were short and dry. Spraying on May 28, 1955, gave best results but the mortality was only 47 percent. The most effective additive was the zinc-containing solution. A third test consisted of spraying green rabbitbrush twice in one season. A mixed stand of big sagebrush and green rabbitbrush was sprayed with 2,4-0 butyl ester emulsified in 9 gallA of water. The plots were 100 x 100 feet in area in 3 randomized blocks of four plots each. The four treatments were applied at different acid rates and included; (1) a split application of 2 pounds of 2,4-0 (1 lb. on March 22 and 1 lb. on May 14), (2) 1 lb. on May 14, (3) 2 Ibs. on May 14, and (4) an.untreated check. The split application was first applied when the leaf buds were beginning to swell and appliad a second time when sandberg bluegrass (Poa secunda) was flowering. The first application killed most of the leaves and terminal buds and induced vigorous lateral and basal sprouting. It was believed that this re-sprouting would cause the plant to be highly susceptible to later treatment but this method was less effective than either the 1 lb. or 2 lb. application during the active growing stage. Mortality was determined from five 100 square foot samples per plot. The 2 lb. single application on May 14 gave the highest kill, 85 percent. A fourth experiment tested rate and time of application on green rabbitbrush. The plots were 10 x 50 feet in area and were sprayed on 9 different dates. The dates were; April 18, May 2, May 16, May 24, May 30, June 8, June 15, June 20, and July 6. The experiment was a 9 x 4 x 3 complete factorial with a single replication. This factorial included four herbicides; (1) a 1:1 mixture of 2,4-0 and 2,4,5-T isopropyl ester in 20 percent diesel oil, (2) 2,4-0 butyl ester in water, (3) 2,4-0 butyl ester in 20 percent diesel oil, and (4) 2,4-0 sodium salt in 20 percent diesel oil. Each herbicide was applied at acid equivilents of 1,2, and 3 Ib/A in a solution of 10.9 gal/A. �- 118 - Time of spraying~ herbicides and acid rates were sources of significant variation. Time of spraying was critical to herbicide effectiveness. Best kills were obtained the first of June when rabbitbrush had produced 3 to 4 inches of new twig growth, squirreltail (Sitanion hystrix) and Thurber needlegrass (Stipa thurberiana) were heading and sandberg bluegrass was in early flower. The 2,4-0 butyl esters in oil or water proved most efficient. The 3 Ib/A rate gave the highest consistent kills. The final test compared rates and time of application on mixed stands of green rabbitbrush and big sagebrush. A split plot design in 3 replications was used. Whole plots were the seven dates of spraying, sub-plots were a 4 x 2 factorial of herbicides and acid rates. The plots were 10 x 88 feet in area. The seven dates were April 29, May 9, June 3, June 28, July 14, July 26, and August 10. The four herbicides were 2,4-0 in two esters, 2,4,5-T ester, and Silvex at rates of 2 and 4 Ib/A in 6 gallA of water. Conclusions Oates of spraying, herbicides, and acid rates gave highly significant differences but the interaction of these main effects were not significant. The 2,4-0 esters again proved more efficient than the other herbicides although a dry year reduced the mortality. The two best dates for spraying were June 28 when green rabbitbrush was in full leaf but twig elongation was slow, and July 14, when the flower buds were full and beginning to show some color. Green rabbitbrush appeared to reach maximum susceptibility three to five weeks later than big sagebrush. Hyder, et al., concluded that both green and gray rabbitbrush were more susceptible to ester forms of 2,4-0 at an acid rate of 3 Ib/A if treated under favorable conditions. There was no difference between solutions of diesel oil or a 1:1 mixture of diesel oil and water. 80th species of rabbitbrush can be controlled simultaneously with proper timing which requires the choice of favorable years as well as the susceptible stage of development. They suggest a plant growth index to indicate optimum susceptibility when: (1) new twig growth must exceed 3 inches in length, (2) sandberg blugrass must have reached flowering stage and retain its green color, and (3) squirreltail and Thurber needlegrass must be heading. The most recent research work on rabbitbrush has been done by Hyder, Sneva, and Freed (5). They made a 3-year study of the relative susceptibility of big sagebrush and green rabbitbrush to 2,4-0 to certain environmental, phenological, and physiological conditions. The work was conducted near Burns, Oregon, at an elevation of 4,600 feet where the average precipitation between September 1 and June 30 is 11.3 inches. �- 119 Procedures Spraying experiments were conducted in 1956, 1957 and 1958. Each experiment was a 6 x 4 x 2 factorial arranged in split plot randomized blocks. Dates of spraying were assigned randomly to whole plots, and were scheduled according to the phenological development of green rabbitbrush. These dates were; (1) the halfleaf stage (late April), (2) full-leaf stage (mid-May), (3) two weeks after full-leaf stage (late May), (4) three or four weeks after full-leaf stage (mid-June), (5) five or six weeks after full-leaf stage (late June), and (6) early flower (mid-July). The 4-level factor was acid rates of 1, 2, 3, and 4 lb/A of 2,4-0 butyl ester. The 2-level factor was solution volumes of 5 and 10 gallA. A back-pack compressed-air sprayer was used to spray between the hours of 5:00 and 8:00 a.m. while the air was calm and relatively cool and moist. Retreatments of several replications were made at 2 lb/A of 2,4-0 butyl ester emulsified in 10 gallA of water to consider retreatment effects. The size of individual treatment plots were 1/50 acre and survival counts were made on areas 8 x 80 feet centered within these plots before spraying and one year later. Soil thermistors and plaster of paris soil-moisture blocks were planted 6, 12, and 18 inches below the soil surface at eight locations. Readings were made between 8:00 and 9:00 a.m. at weekly or biweekly intervals. At each date of spraying data on the growth development of herbaceous species and twig elongation of brush species was gathered. Samples of the current growth of the twigs and of lateral roots were collected for laboritory analysis of herbage dry matter, herbage and root crude protein, and herbage and root total available carbohydrates. Treated rabbitbrush herbage was sampled at 1, 3, 6, 8, and 10 days following spraying to determine the effect on the physiology of the plants. The treatment factors causing significant variations in green rabbitbrush mortality were dates, rates, volumes, an~ interactions of dates-by-rates, years-by-dates, and year-by-dates-by-rates. A rate of 4 IblA of 2,4-0 ester gave the highest kill (89 percent) and 3 lblA gave an 80 percent kill. Susceptibility in rabbitbrush increased more slowly as soil moisture was depleted. Sprays diluted to 5 gallA killed 59 percent rabbitbrush and at 10 gallA killed 63 percent. Retreatment applied in early June killed the remaining sagebrush and 80 percent of the remaining rabbitbrush. Environmental conditions. Since the susceptibility of rabbitbrush to 2,4-0 develops more slowly in the spring it is less likely to be related to soil temperature than sagebrush. Rabbitbrush was most susceptible when soil temperatures were 58-64° F. at a depth of 6 ~nches and 53-59° F. at depths of 12 and 18 inches. Green rabbitbrush has a deeper and more widely spreading lateral root system than sagebrush and consequently has a greater dependence on soil moisture at depths of 12 inches or more. This partially explains the seasonal differences in susceptibility to herbicides. �- 120 - Phenological conditions. Green rabbitbrush became susceptible to 2,4-0 when new twigs averaged 3 inches in length, sandberg bluegrass was flowering, and squirreltail and Thurber needlegrasB were headed out. Twig elongation is important because it relates foliage growth necessary for spray interception and photosynthesis which promotes carbohydrate accumulation. Susceptibility decreased moderately as sandberg bluegrass leaves lost green color. Physiological condition. The highest mortality of green rabbitbrush was obtained with spray applications coinciding with high carbohydrate contents (above 20 percent glucose equivilent) in the twigs. Otherwise, the physiological conditions of this species seemed unrelated to susceptibility. Carbohydrate concentrations in the roots revealed seasonal increases in early June when the plants were most susceptible to 2,4-0 and averaged 19.4 percent at this time. The principal storage carbohydrate form is believed to be pentosan. Crude protein in the roots were uniformly low and essentially constant in contrast to strong seasonal decreases in the twigs. Conclusions. Hyder, et al., concluded that the susceptibility of green rabbitbrush to 2,4-0 ester depends on phenological and physiological conditions as well as environmental ones. The entire plant was killed only when phenological and physiological conditions permitted the interception and downward translocation of sufficient herbicide to kill dormant lateral and basal budso Spray interception is dependent upon the amount of leaf tissue present. The downward movement of carbohydrates to the roots are presumed to translocate the herbicide. This requirement of downward translocation of herbicide. This requirement of downward translocation of herbicide to lateral and basal buds may explain why higher rates of 2,4-0 are required to kill rabbitbrush. To maintain optimum susceptibility, environmental conditions must be satisfactory to vigorous growth activity while phenological and physiological conditions are favorable. The available soil moisture should be at least 30 percent at a depth of 12 inches. Green rabbitbrush can be controlled about 80 percent with a single application of 2,4-0 ester at 3 Ib/A if the spray is applied after the new twigs are 3 inches long and the soil moisture content remains satisfactory. �BLOCK 1 SPRAY DATES MAY 3 MAY 17 JUNE Z. JUNE NON-IRR/G-A 3 NO. OF PLOTS TED SPRAYED BLOCK 2 ~ EACH £QUIlL S 3 PLOTS SQUARE. IRRICTATEO 3 May 3 3 .3 .3 BLOCK 3 6 IRRICTATED J5 3 3 3 ,3 6 June ~. "':K4 --IRRIGATED 3 3 vuly 3 3 J 3 3 -3 3 .3 3 ---, IRRIGI/TEO I August - P ~ - - FIG.1 I •.... "'''K 5 DL.Ul" OATES OF SPRAYING FOR EACH . BLOCK �x ~ DENVER N - Road to Cath~dra.1 Blurts J r-x-x-x-x-x-x-x-x-x)( I LOCATION OF" STUDY AREA )( I SCALE lin.: 165 ft. " I SLOCK 4 x I BLOCK 5 x To MeeKer ..• I )( I ~~~ I )(. r )< BLOCK I 1 I 29 I 30 I )( I ( x -- I J( -- I IS I 2 x-- I /" I 17 I I I 8 I .3 I 4 I Sib x -- FIG. Z x -- I~ I I 20 I 2/ 22 I I 7 I 8 I 9 I X --X---)<. --- LOCATION 2.3 /0 X--- I 24 1 II )(---)I. I I 'Wea.ther 12. --- j 13 I 14 X --- OF PLOTS StQtlon M I X --- X --- ON STUDY ---x --- X. AREA X.---l< --_ - _ xI} x ----x II DUCK C.REEK �Fig. 3 Fig. 4 Spraying was done with a 3-gallon Hudsonhand sprcqer. Soil samples were taken with a Veibmeyer soU tube pounded into the ground with a lb. hammer. s �Fig. 5 Air temperature and humidity were measured with a 7 day recording Thermohygrograph (on platform). A Mason-Formhygrometer was used to check accuracy. Fig. 6 A portion of the stuQy area was irrigated with a sprinkler system. �Fig. 7 Annual growth of twigs were measured by a steel tape. Fig. 8 The annual grolfth of twigs on September 12 averaged 10 inches. �Fig. 9 A plot sprayed June 2 showing 108s of foliage within 30 da,ys. Fig. 10 A view of the study area on DuckCreek looki.ng toward Cathedral Bluffs. �- 121 - LI~£RATURE CITED (1) Cords, H. Pe, and J. H. Robertson. Nevada. Nevada. (2 ) 1955. Brush control in Res. Prog. Report. Western Weed Control Confo Reno, Cornelius, Donald R. No date. Unpublished personal U. S. D. A., A. R. S. Berkeley, California. notes. (3) Harrington, H. D. 1954. Manual of the plants of Colorado. alan Swallow. Denve~, Colorado. (4) (5) Hyder, D. N., Forrest A. Sneva, D. O. Chilcote, and W. R. Furtick. 1958. Chemical control of rabbitbrush with emphasis on simultaneous control of big sagebrush. Weeds 6(3): 289-297. , Forrest A. Sneva, and Virgis H. Freed. 1962. Susceptibility of big sagebrush and green rabbitbrush to 2,4-D as related to certain environmental, phenological, and physiological conditions. unpublished manuscript. U. S. D. A., A.R.S. Ft. Collins, Colorado. --:::----:-:- (6) Kissinger, N. A. Jr., and W. T. Vaughn. 1952. Reaction of small rabbitbrush to 2,4-D and 2,4,5-T in central Wyoming. Res. Prog. Report. Western Weed Control Conf. Reno, Nevada. pp. 25-26. (7) Murray, Glenn E. 1960. Letter to Ellis Sedgley, S.C.S. on chemical control of rabbitbrush. Mgt. Agr. S.C.S. Murray, Utah. (8) Robertson, J. H. 1952. Important range weeds of the Great Basin from the ecological point of view. Proceedings of .the Thirteenth Western Weed Control Conf. Reno, Nevada. (9) , and H. P. Cords. 1957. Survival of rabbitbrush, Chrysothamnus spp., following chemical, burning, and mechanical treatments. Jour. Range Mgt. 10(2):83-89. (10) Stoddard, L. A. 1955. Letter to Karl G. Parker on chemical control of Chr-ys o t .arnnusnauseosus var. consimilis. Utah State Agri. ColI ege Exp. Sta. Logan, Utah. (11) Tingay, D. C., and lVIaxR. Robinson. 1952. Chemical control of rabbitbrush (Chrysothamnus nauseosus va!'. consimilis). Res. pr-og , Report. Western Weed Control Con r , Reno, Nevada •. pp. 61-62. (12) United States For-e s t Service. 1937. Range plant handbook. U.S.D.A. U. S. Gov't. Printing Office. Wahhington. ��. January, -123- State of JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH SEGMENT PROJECT COLORADO --~~~~~----------An Ecological Investigation Project No.: W-10S-R-3 of the Cache 1a Poudre Deer Herd, Colorado Work Plan: 2 Dist~ibution Job No.: 1 Herd Boundaries Period Covered: Personnel: January, D. E. Medin 1962 - December, Studies 1962 and A. E. Anderson Abstract: Tentative boundaries of the Cache 1a Poudre deer herd (including total, summer, and winter range) have been determined. The total herd boundary has been accepted as that of the present Colorado Game Management Unit 19. A current study on seasonal movements (Work Plan 6, Job No.2) may determine a more realistic herd boundary. A map indicating tentative distributional relationships is presented in Figure 1 • .Recommendations: It is recommended that the present distributional relationships be accepted until further work (Work Plan 6, Job No.2) indicates modifications . .Objective: Establish tentative herd (total, summer, and winter unit for study. boundaries of the Cache la Poudre deer range) to provide a discrete population Technigues Used: Field observation has been the primary technique used to date in determining winter-summer distributional relationships of the deer herd. Published maps, including U. S. Forest Service vegetative type maps and U. S. Geological Survey topographic maps, have supplemented field reconnaissamce methods. HERD BOUNDARIES Dean E. Medin The boundaries (total, summer, and winter) of the Cache 1a Poudre deer herd are presented in Figure 1. The total boundary, indicated by the hachured line, is that of the present Colorado Game Management Unit 19. The conception of this unit, established in 1948 and revised in 1953, was a definition of the Poudre deer herd based primarily on topographic or river gr.ainage relationships. ,. 1964 �-124- Tentative summer and winter ranges are indicated with a zone of transition between. These are flexible and subject to annual refinement depending on seasonal climatic conditions. A seasonal movement study (Work Plan 6, Job No.2) was initiated in 1963 and is presently being carried out by a Colorado Cooperative Wildlife Research Unit graduate student. Findings from this study may indicate a more realistic definition of distributional relationships. Prepared by: Dean E. Medin January, 1964 Approved by: Wayne W. Sandfort Chief, Game Research �50' 40' 105·30' 10' zo' T9N 40 1 I ~ \Jl I CACHE LA POUDRE DRAINAGE LARIMER COUNTY, COLORADO SIXTH IJ 0 PRINCIPAL 1 MERIDIAN ~Ce 3 4 -dMile. 1-----" LEGEND ~ Management Unit Boundary T6N Appro~imot. Transitional Zone B,tween Summlr And Wint•. Rang.s Polyconic pt:"Ojedion North American datum Figure 1. Boundaries of the Cache la Poudre deer herd with a tentative and winter range. definition of summer 40· 30' ��January, 196 -127- State of JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH SEGMENT PROJECT COLORADO Project No.: An Ecological Investigation of the Cache la Poudre Deer Herd, Colorado W-lOS-R-3 Work Plan: 2 Distribution Job No.: 2 Sub-unit Period Covered: January, Personnel: D. E. Medin 1962 - December, Studies Classification 1962 and A. E. Anderson Abstract: A tentative sub-unit classification of the Cache la Poudre deer herd (Colorado Game Management Unit 19) has been determined. The divisions were determined from consideration of vegetative zones, elevational gradients, seasonal distribution of deer, hunting and harvest intensity, public and private land, and accessibility. The sub-units (presented in Figure 1) are used in locating and interpreting hunting pressure, deer harvest, and related distributional patterns. Recommendatio~s: It is recommended that the sub-unit classification be used ·in its present form to (1) locate and interpret harvest intensity, and (2) direct hunting pressure to underharvest areas. Objective: Establish a tentative sub-unit classification, delineating harvest areas of primary importance, to better assess the effects of hunting on the herd. Techniques Used: Location of hunting pressure and deer harvest by hunter interview at a check station, natural topographic divisions, land ownership, and accessibility, were used as the primary basis for dividing the herd into sub-units. Elevational gradients and associated vegetative cover types were considered as well. SUB-UNIT CLASSIFICATION Dean E. Medin A tentative sub-unit classification of the Cache 1a Poudre deer herd (Colorado Game Management Unit 19) is presented in Figure 1. Land ownership, accessibility, elevational gradients, vegetative zones, harvest �-128- intensity, and hunting pressure were used as the basis for the divisions. Sub-units 1 and 3 are privately owned lands; 2, 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8 are primarily lands within the boundary of the Roosevelt National Forest. Sub-units 1, 3, 4, and 5 are located on primary winter range areas; 2. 6,7, and 8 are largely summering and intermediate range locations. The sub-units are used in locating and interpreting hunting pressure, harvest intensity, and related distributional patterns. Slight changes in boundaries may be made as additional harvest and hunting data become available. Prepared by: Date: Dean E. Medin ------------------- Approved by: ~J~a_n_u~a_r~y~,~1~9_6_4_ Wayne W. Sandfort Chief, Game Research �50' 40' 105'30' 10' 2.0' 00 1 Ho=oo4 140· I ~ \0 I 7N SUB-UNITS OF GAME MANAGEMENT ~.\!-~f~ ?4P l>Al"1¥z~~_If'i~. ~ 11,:::1-19 1 I <I I.~ 1 i:I.c]f>yJ \~,. 1 1 I-LiV'=r~t~'lw~.;;j <;t::::COLORADO 19 OEPT. OF GAME AND FISH SIXTH w UNIT 0 PRINCIPAL 1 MERIDIAN ~re , , 40' f-----lao· PWiles 8N Polyconic p:'Ojed1on North Americen datum Figure 1. Tentative sub-unit classification of the Cache la Poudre deer herd range (Colorado Game Management Unit 19), ��January, -131- JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH SEGMENT PROJECT State of COLORADO --~~~~~-------------An Ecological Investigation of the Project No.: W-l05-R-3 Cache la Poudre Deer Herd, Colorado Work Plan: 3 Environmental Job No.: 1 Climatic Period Covered: Personnel: January, D. E. Medin, Studies Environment 1962 - December, 1962 A. E. Anderson, C. M. Loveless Abstract: Environmental measurement stations have been established on each of five deer-range study areas (lower-winter, middle-winter, upperwinter, transitional, summer) and have been in continuous operation since December, 1960. Station sites were selected to characterize a portion of the environment on which deer ecology studies are presently being carried out. A small southeasterly exposed ridge within the prevalent browse type was selected for each of the three winter range areas. Transition and summer range measurement stations were located on similar southeast exposures in the dominant forest type occurring at these elevations. Stations were located approximately midway in a given area's altitudinal spread. In establishment, primary emphasis was given to situations best representing "deer environment" for a particular study location. Data recorded weekly on each of the five altitudinal levels include: continuous air temperature and relative humidity, maximum and minimum soil temperatures, average wind velocity, wind direction, precipitation, soil moisture, snow depths on four contrasting slope exposures, snow and crust type classification, and supplementary notes regarding wind gust velocity, depth of snow over soil temperature installation, condition of surface soil and type and extent of cloud cover. Factors measured during 1962 have been summarized condensed form in Appendices I-V. and are presented in Recom~endations: Continue operation of environmental measurement stations on each of the five elevational study areas. Summarize data obtained in both tabular and IBM punch-card form. Prepare monthly and annual summary sheets for each station. Objective: Determine the local climate on each of five selected study locations believed to be representative of the lower-winter, middle-winter, upper-winter, transitional, and summer ranges of the herd so that data relevant to the biota under study can be adequately interpreted, particularly from the standpoint of elevational relationships. 1964 �-132- Techniques Used: (1) Installation -- a 24-foot by 10-foot barbed-wire exclosure was constructed on each site to protect the installation from domestic stock. Weather shelters were installed and secured by bolting to 4 by 4 inch cross supports and uprights. Wood in contact with the soil was creosoted to prolong its usability. Uprights were drilled to allow raising or . Lowe r Lng of the shelter to compensate for snow depths. Appropriate supports for the precipitation gauge and anemometer were installed within the exclosure. The entire installation was guyed with steel aircraft cable with turnbolt attachments, insuring firmness and instrument stability. (2) Instrumentation -- A Weather Bureau "cotton belt" instrument shelter houses a Bendix-Friez Model 594 hygrothermograph; standard maximum and minimum thermometers mounted on Townsend supports; a sling psychrometer; and a kit-box containing ink, alcohol, oil, and other necessary servicing items. A metal rod was attached to one side of the shelter to serve as a weighing bar for precipitation gauge contents. A Kahl hygrothermograph (Model WE-24-0l), equipped with a 3l-day clockwork, is used at the summer range station and read monthly during the December-April period. A three-cup totalizing anemometer, a standard 8-inch precipitation gauge, and a metal soil-temperature box were also installed in each exclosure. The soil-temperature box houses Weather Bureau type maximum and minimum thermometers in a metal tube at a depth between 5 and 7 inches below the soil surface. The soil was removed at the time of installation and packed lightly back into place after the sOil-temperature box had been properly positioned. ~ small vane-type wind direction indicator was mounted on each weather shelter. All instruments have been placed approximately 36-inches above the ground surface, considered comparable to "deer height". Methods and procedures used in servicing instruments and maintaining records are essentially those outlined by the Institute of Arctic and Alpine Research (1958) and the U. S. Weather Bureau (1955). (3) Soil Moisture -- Soil moisture samples from a depth of 5-7 inches are collected weekly from a soil pit adjacent to the station installation. One side of the pit is exposed with a mattock to remove dry material and about one pint of soil is spooned into a polyethylene collection bag. After removing excess air, the bag is sealed, tagged as to date and area, and placed in a canvas bag for protection. In the laboratory the soil is sieved through a 2 mm. screen and percent moisture determined by oven drying. (4) Snow -- Snow stake lines were established on four environmental situations at each measurement station: a southeast-sloping ridgetop, a draw adjacent to the ridge, open south-facing slope, and forested north-facing slope. Ten steel fence posts, equidistantly spaced, comprise each snow stake transect line, yielding a total of 40 snow depth observations at each station. Stakes are calibrated in one-tenth foot intervals. �-133In addition to depth, the snow along each stake line is classified as to specific type and crust characteristics developed by U. S. Forest Service snow studies (Appendix VI). Experience with the classifica~ion indicates that a reasonably precise selection of categories can be made. (5) Recording Forms, Summarization, and Servicing Kits -- All station~ are serviced weekly (with the exception of the summer range station which is serviced monthly during the months of December-April) and data are recorded on appropriate forms (Appendix VII). Data are summarized monthly (Appendix VIII) and annually (Appendices I-V). Three specialized servicing kits have been developed in "back-pack" form to assist in servicing the stations, all of which are located varying distances from roads. The kits include all the necessary forms, charts, soil-sample bags, clip boards, spare parts, etc., to properly meet all servicing needs. CLIMATIC ENVIRONMENT Dean E. Medin Findings: Five environment measurement stations have been installed on each of five deer-range study locations. Station 1 (Hewlett Gulch -6,440 ') represents the lower-winter range area; station 2 (Kelly Flats. 7,000') the middle-winter; station 3 (Sevenmile Creek -- 8,120') the upper-winter; and stations 4 (little Beaver Creek -- 8,940' and 5 (Crown Point -- 10,320') the transitional and summer ranges. With the exception of the summer range station (Crown Point), all stations were in operation by January 1, .1961. The summer range station was installed during June of 1961. All have been in continuous operation since the dates of establishment. Data recorded weekly on each of the five altitudinal levels include: continuous air temperature and relative humidity, maximum and minimum soil temperature, average wind velocity, wind direction, precipitation, soil moisture, snow depths on four contrasting slope exposures, snow and crust type classification, and supplementary notes regarding wind gust velocity, depth of snow over the soil temperature box, condition of surface soil, and type and extent of cloud cover. Appendices I-V present in condensed form the large mass of raw data collected at each environment measurement station. The factors measured are summarized and presented in tabular form only. The value of the data lies in its eventual use as an interpretive aid as related phases of the deer study become more advanced or completed. The data summarized in the annual sheets should not be interpreted as IIregional" or "standard" weather observations in the sense of Weather Bureau determinations. The environmental measurement station locations and methods of instrumentation were chosen to charaeterize the environment in which deer exist and on which studies relating to deer ecology are presently being carried out. Results may not necessarily reflect regional climate or be directly comparable to standard weather observations. �-134Acknowledgements: The Institute of Arctic and Alpine Research, University of Colorado, through operations currently in progress, gave valuable advice concerning the orientation, establishment, and operation of environmental measurement stations. Its personnel have been generous with both time and counsel. Procedures used in collecting certain of the environmental data are essentially those developed by the Institute. C. M. Loveless, a Doctor of Philosophy candidate (Colorado Cooperative Wildlife Research Unit), aided in the installation and has been the sole servicer of the station located on the Sevenmile Creek (upper-winter range) study area. Instrumentation at each environmental measurement station has been provided through an Atomic Energy Commission grant to the Colorado Cooperative Wildlife Research Unit (AEC Contract AT(11-1)-898). Literature Cited Institute of Arctic and Alpine Research. 1958. Servicer's manual: A summary of the procedures to be used in collecting certain data from environment measuring stations. University of Colorado, Boulder, 8 pp. U. S. Forest Service." 1953. Avalanche handbook. Washington, 146 pp. (mimeo.) U. S. Govt. Ptg. Off., u. S. Weather Bureau." 1955. Instructions for climatological observers. Circular B, Ed. 10, U. S. Govt Ptg. Off., Washington, 70 pp. Prepared by ~D~e~a~n~E~.~M~e~d~i~n __ Approved by Date .January, 1964 Wayne W. Sandfort Chief, Game Research �APPENDIX I Deer Ecology Investigations - Cache 1a Poudre Drainage, Colorado - Annual Summary of Environmental Data Station No. 1 Area Hewlett Gulch Elevation 6 440' Year 1962 ----- Honth Jan. Feb. Mar. Apr. Hay June July Aug. Sept. Oct. Nov. Dec. YEAR Instruments & Hethods Temp.orature Air vF. Mean Mean of Hean Daily Daily Daily Nax. Max. Min. Min. Max. & Min. 26 15 60 37 -16 30 9 41 -14 69 22 32 5 43 64 46 35 16 58 74 55 44 66 33 81 60 48 36 70 87 66 54 46 90 79 68 55 81 39 94 60 48 30 72 87 41 53 27 66 79 43 32 14 53 67 35 24 47 - 1 65 48 59 -16 I 36 94 Thermograph (Bourdon Tube) ;Re 1. Hum ,,% Temperature Soil "F. 5-7" Depth Mean of Mean of Mean Mean Daily Weekly Weekly Weekly Max. Max. Min. Min. Max. & Min. Max. & Min. 52 34 27 31 38 45 57 40 33 31 48 54 52 41 34 31 48 57 54 52 42 63 37 71 52 61 46 49 72 76 62 65 54 48 76 81 59 72 61 59 83 87 46 73 62 56 85 88 80' - 78 51 68 58 51 50 58 48 46 68 73 55 47 39 35 61 55 51 39 30 33 45 50 53 54 45 27 63 88 Hygrograph Maximum and Minimum Thermometers (Hair) (Weather Bureau Type) B~~lW~~iS5':1"% "Precip., Depth ne an or week ry Inches Determinations Water 0.93 13.7 0.58 14.0 0.69 14.6 1.27 8.6 2.28 6.6 2.58 11.4 3.72 13.2 0.72 7.1 0.52 5.3 1.20 9.5 0.55 7.8 0.20 6.5 15.24 9.9 8-inch Oven-Dry Precip. Method Gauge I f-' W V1 I .. Wind Maximum Predominant Hean I Total Recorded Gust Direction Honth ! Hiles Velocity mph. 9 N-NW 3.84 2,855 Jan. 12 N-NW 3.28 2,205 Feb. 12 W-SW 2.75 2,048 Har. 20 S-SW 2.99 2,154 Apr. 25 W-SW 3.37 2,508 May 22 S-SE 3.01 2,170 June 30 E-SE 2.90 2,154 July 16 S-SW 3.02 2,244 Aug. 25 SE-SW 2.88 2,070 Sept. 18 E-SE 2.75 2,045 Oct. 12 S-SW 2.59 1,864 Nov. 20 NW-NE 2.53 1,884 Dec. 30 S-SW 2.99 26 201 YEAR Dwyer Totalizing InstruWind Wind Anemometer ments & (3-Cup) Heter Methods Vane I mph. Snow Depth Ft. Ridge Top Draw North Exposure South Exposure Min. Mean Max. Mean Max. iHin. He an Max. Hin. He an Max. Min. 0.0 0.38 0.7 0.8 0.0 0.44 0.5 0.0 0.16 0.9 0.1 0.66 0.4 0.0 0.10 0.29 0.5 0.0 0.18 0.1 0.0 0.03 0.6 0.0 0.0 0.08 0.2 0.5 0.1 0.30 0.1 0.0 0.02 0.5 0.2 0.32 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.01 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.3 0.0 0.56 0.2 0.0 0.04 0.3 0.0 0.06 0.3 0.0 0.07 0.3 0.0 0.06 0.3 0.0 0.07 0.4 0.0 -0.10 0.4 0.0 0.07 -- 0.9 0.0 0.5 0.0 -- 0.7 0.0 0.8 0.0 -- -- Snow Stakes �APPENDIX II Deer Ecology Investigations - Cache la PoudreRiver Drainage, Colorado - Annual Summary of Environmental Data Station No.2 Area Kelly Flats Elevation 7,000' Year 1962 Month Jan. Feb. Har . Apr. May June July Aug. Sept. Oct. Nov. Dec. YEAR Instruments & Methods Month Jan. Feb. Mar. Apr. May June July Aug. Sept. Oct. Nov. Dec, YEAR Instruments & Methods -- Temperature Air of. Mean Mean Mean of Daily Daily Daily Max. Max. Min. Min. Max. & Min. 57 12 24 35 -18 65 38 -18 19 28 60 40 19 29 0 74 56 13 31 43 78 64 32 40 52 85 70 35 45 58 88 42 78 51 65 89 80 52 37 66 86 72 28 46 59 77 65 24 38 52 65 52 12 30 41 61 43 - 4 22 32 89 58 -18 34 46 Temperature Soil. of. 5-7" Depth M.ean Mean ot Mean Weekly Weekly We'ekly Max. Max. Min. Min. Max. & Min. 26 34 32 29 31 50 44 31 32 38 42 52 30 32 37 . 37 60 53 41 47 66 62 44 47 55 70 66 44 50 58 79 73 56 58 66 76 60 73 55 66 71 66 50 54 60 65 60 43 46 53 46 34 38 53 42 28 38 32 35 34 26 79 54 43 49 Thermograph (Bourdon Tube) Maximum and Minimum Thermometers (Weather Bureau Type) Wind Total Mean Velocity Predominant Maximum Recorded Miles mph. Direction Gust mph. 4,350 5.85 W-SW 18 W 3,955 5.88 42 3,929 5.28 W-SW 36 3,269 E-NE 4.54 28 3,703 W 4.98 42 2,871 3.99 E-NE 24 E 2,897 28 3.89 SW 3,294 4.43 26 NE 3,013 4.18 28 3,082 4.14 E-SW 40 SW 3,370 4.68 62 SW 20 3,930 5.28 41 663 4.76 W-SW 62 Totalizing Wind Dwyer Enemometer Vane Wind (3-cup) __ ~ ____~ ___MetE;!r --- ----- Rel.Hum., % -So~T M.o~st., 70 Dry ~~Pth5-7" Mean of Daily Mean of Weekly Max. & Min. Determinations 11.4 67 73 10.7 68, 13.9 11.3 64 64 7.7 68, 10.0 59 6.9 48 3.2 50 4.8 50 5.5 54 4.5 50 5.0 60 7.9 Hygrograph (Hair) Oven-Dry Method Precip., Inches Water 0.93 0.72 1.24 1.24 1.76 2.54 3.41 0.59 1.10 1.10 0.52 0.34 15.49 8-inch Precip. , Gauge , ~ , 0\ Snow Depth Ft. North Exposure South Exposure Draw Ri~ge Top Max. Min. Mean Max. Min. Hean Max. Min. Mean Max. Min. Mean 0.8 0.2 0.65 0.5 0.0 0.16 0.7 0.1 0.50 0.3 0.0 0.15 0,6 0.0 0.32 0.3 0.0 0.08 Q,5 0.0 0.20 0~3 0.0 0.07 1.1 0,3 0,63 0.5 0.0 0.10 0.8 0.0 0.35 0.4 0.0 0.10 0,0 0.0 0,00 0.0 0.0 0,00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0,0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0,0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0,00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0,0 0,00 0,0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0,0 0,00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0,0 0,00 0,0 0,0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0,00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0,00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.4 0.0 0.09 0.3 0.0 0.06 0.3 0.0 0.07 0.3 0.0 0.05 0.4 0.0 0.13 0.3 0.0 0.07 0.4 0.0 0.12 0.4 0.0 0.07 1.1 0.0 -- 0.5 0.0 -- 0.8 0.0 -- 0.4 0.0 -Snow Stakes �APPENDIX Deer Ecology Investigations Month Jan. Feb. Mar. Apr. May June July Aug. Sept. Oct. Nov. Dec. YEAR Instruments & Methods - Cache 1a Poudre River Drainage, Colorado - Annual Summary of Environmental Data Station No. _3___ Area Sevenmi1e Creek Elevation 8,120' Year 1962 Temperature Air, OF. Mean Mean Mean of Daily Daily Daily Max. Max. Min. Min. Max. & Min. 55 13 23 33 -18 61 18 27 37 -18 58 37 - 2 18 28 72 14 30 42 53 29 59 38 49 73 83 65 32 54 43 84 43 50 62 75 87 76 34 49 63 82 68 26 44 56 72 23 61 35 48 65 47 10 30 38 62 23 32 40 - 8 44 87 32 54 -18 Thermograph III Temperature Soi 1, of., 5-7" Depth Mean of Mean Mean Weekly Weekly Weekly Max. Max. Min. Min. Max. & Min. 28 29 31 37 33 50 43 32 32 38 50 40 30 32 36 64 56 35 38 47 61 40 44 52 65 74 66 41 47 56 79 72 49 63 53 81 77 60 69 53 47 64 77 75 53 68 61 44 52 37 60 34 38 45 53 29 32 51 44 38 28 42 49 81 57 Re1. Hum., % Mean of Daily Max. & Min. 58 65 61 56 57 65 59 52 53 53 56 55 58 ~o~1_M01st .. .70 DrYD~~th 5-7" Mean of Weekly Determinations 11.5 8.9 10.2 8.6 10.8 8.3 8.9 3.0 2.6 1.5 2.9 3.9 6.8 Maximum and Minimum Thermometers (Weather Bureau Type) Hygrograph (Hair) Oven-Dry Method (Bourdon Tube) . - -------- - - --- Month Jan. Feb. Mar. Apr. May June July Aug. Sept. Oct. Nov. Dec. YEAP, Instruments & Methods Predominant Direction w-SW y.t.SW SW E-SE SW N-NE SW NW-SW SW S-SW SE-SW W W-SW Wind Vane -..:] , Snow Depth, Ft. Wind Mean Total Velocity Miles mph. 3,749 5.04 3,342 4.97 2,956 3.97 2,619 3.64 2,424 3.26 3.26 2,347 2,105 2.83 2,299 3.09 2.68 1,933 2,574 3.46 3,070 4.26 4,84 3,138 32 556 3;17 Totalizing Anemometer (3-cup) Precip. , Inches Water 1.86 1.41 1.18 2.36 2.61 2.14 3.13 0.59 0.89 0.52 0.49 0.97 18.15 8-inch Precip. , I f-' Gauge W Maximum Recorded Gust--'.. m~h. 26 30 10 16 30 18 18 14 18 16 32 16 32 Dwyer Wind Meter North Exposure Max. Min. Mean 1.1 0.5 0.95 1.3 0.4 0.87 1.7 1.2 1.43 1.2 0.0 0.42 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.3 0.0 0.16 0.8 0.0 0.34 1.7 0.0 -- South Exposure Max. Min. Mean 0.8 0.1 0.48 0.6 0.0 0.24 0.5 0.1 0.28 0.1 0.0 0.04 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.4 0.0 0.12 1.0 0.0 0.30 1.0 0.0 -- Draw Max. Min. Mean 1.1 0.2 0.76 0.8 0.2 0.42 1.2 0.2 0.66 0.2 0.0 0.04 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.6 0.0 0.13 0.9 0.0 0.30 1.2 0,0 Snow Stakes -- -- - -- Ridge Top Max. Min. Mean 0.7 0.0 0.43 0.6 0.0 0.20 0.8 0.1 0.47 0.1 0.0 0.02 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0,00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0,0 0.0 0.00 0.3 0.0 0.08 0.8 0.0 0.24 0.8 0.0 -- �APPENDIX IV Deer Ecology Investigations - Cache 1a Poudre River Drainage, Colorado - Annual Summary of Environmental Data Station No. ~ Area Little Beaver Elevation 8,940' Year 1962 Month Jan. Feb. Mar. Apr. May June July Aug. Sept. Oct. Nov. Dec. YEAR Instruments & Methods I I Temperature Air, vF. Hean Mean Mean of Daily Daily Daily Hax. Hax , Min. Min. Max. & Min. 54 35 -19 14 24 58 36 -19 17 27 55 14 37 - 5 26 69 50 13 27 39 72 60 26 37 48 82 42 65 31 53 84 48 73 40 60 86 74 30 48 61 80 22 42 67 55 71 60 24 34 47 64 48 28 9 38 61 20 40 -10 30 86 42 54 -19 31 Temperature Soil, of., 5-7" Depth Mean Mean Mean of Weekly Weekly Weekly Max. Max. Min. Min. Max. & Min. 32 31 27 28 29 32 32 30 31 31 32 32 28 30 31 46 31 57 34 40 64 59 36 40 50 72 63 39 44 54 80 74 49 52 63 78 76 47 53 64 42 75 72 48 60 61 64 38 40 50 47 55 33 35 41 43 28 37 31 34 80 53 27 46 39 ReI. Hum.,% Mean of Daily Max. & Min. 62 70 64 59 59 68 63 58 56 58 63 64 62 Thermograph (Bourdon Tube) Haximum and Minimum Thermometers (Weather Bureau Type) Hygrograph (Hair) .ssrr MOl.st. 10 Dryn~~;h 5-7" Mean of WeekTy Determinations 11.9 13.6 16.5 15.0 9.4 11.8 9.3 4.9 2.8 4.6 4.8 5.1 9.1 Oven-Dry Method Precip. , Inches Water 1.79 1.55 1.27 2.06 1.93 2.20 4.14 0.51 1.07 0.93 0.68 1.14 19.27 8-inch Precip. , I ~ Gau_~ co I - Sum·; Depth, Ft. Wind Month Jan. Feb. Mar. Apr. May June July Aug. Sept. Oct. Nov. Dec. YEAR lnstruments & Methods Mean Velocity Total Miles mph. 4.48 3,334 2,259 3.36 1,919 2.58 1.92 1,382 1,834 2.46 1.65 1,191 1.57 1,170 1.81 1,348 1.57 1,130 1.90 1,411 1,794 2.49 1,957 2.63 20,729 2.36 Totall.Zl.ng Anemometer (~- ClI~2 _____ Maximum Predominant Recorded Direction Gust mph. 12 NW-SW NW-SW 14 22 W-NW 12 E-NE E 20 E-SE 11 E 12 12 SW SE 12 SE 10 14 S-SW W 10 22 SE-SW Dwyer Wind Wind ~8.!l5!~ __ ~eter North Exposure Max. Min. Mean 1.2 0.6 1.03 1.3 0.7 0.97 1.6 1.2 1.34 1.4 0.1 0.69 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.4 0.0 0.16 0,6 0,1 0,32 1.6 0.0 -- South Exposure Max. Min. Mean 0.9 0.2 0.64 0.7 0.1 0.35 0.9 0.3 0.59 0.2 0.0 0.09 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0-.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.4 0.0 0.08 0,6 0,0 0,22 0.9 0,0 -- Draw Max. Min. Mean 1.0 0.2 0.68 0.9 0.1 0.50 1.0 0.4 0.69 0.2 0.0 0.12 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.7 0.0 0.15 0.9 0,0 0,38 1.0 0,0 -- Snow Stakes -~ I I Ridge Top Max. Min. Mean 0.5 0.1 0.35 0.6 0.1 0.29 0.7 0.3 0.52 0.3 0.0 0.15 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.4 0.0 0.08 0.5 0,0 0.15 0.7 0,0 -- �APPENDIX V Deer Ecology Investigations - Cache 1a Poudre River Drainage, Colorado - Annual Summary of Environmental Data Station No. _5____ Area Crown Point Elevation 10,320' Year 1962 Honth Jan. Feb. Mar. Apr. Hay June July Aug. Sept. Oct. Nov. Dec. YEAR Instruments & Methods Temperature Air vF. Mean Mean Hean of Daily Daily Daily Max. & Min. Max. Min. 15 24 -25 6 45 12 19 46 26 -16 44 28 -14 8 18 42 22 32 56 8 47 24 30 39 57 74 25 48 58 37 44 66 36 55 74 56 27 44 79 68 20 48 69 38 59 22 40 62 30 50 30 6 23 38 55 21 28 -17 14 48 26 44 -25 3S 79 Temperature Soil, of., 5-7" Depth Mean Mean Mean of Weekly Weekly Weekly Max. Max. Min. Min. Max. & Min. 16 26 28 31 30 32 18 25 29 32 29 29 32 31 30 32 30 31 31 32 36 28 32 34 39 40 52 44 35 37 46 47 52 50 55 56 46 49 52 57 50 56 43 59 37 49 46 35 40 33 36 29 30 31 40 26 26 29 31 31 16 34 40 37 59 Rel. Hum.,% Mean of Daily Max. & Min. 74 82 75 64 60 68 63 58 56 61 65 72 66 !?O~l._Mo~st. .?y Dry Wt. 5-7' DeEth Mean of Weekly Determinations 14.5 19.7 17.8 22.2 18.3 19.1 9.2 5.2 7.9 10.0 7.0 7.2 13.2 Thermograph (Bourdon Tube) Maximum and Minimum Thermometers (Wea(:her_B~r~?~ Type) Hygrograph (Hair) Oven-Dry Method Preci p ,, Inches tITater 1.83 2.57 1.21 3.13 1.31 1.51 1.24 0.66 1.44 0.55 0.82 1.24 17.51 8-inch Precip. , ~auge , I-' W \.0 I Snow Depth, Ft. Wind Month Jan. Feb. Mar. Apr. May June July Aug. Sept. Oct. Nov. Dec. YEAR Instruments & Methods I Mean Velocity Total Miles mph. 1.55 1,152 1,481 2.20 1.98 1,471 1.54 1,107 1.82 1,357 1.38 994 1.26 940 1.36 1,016 1.44 1,039 1.64 1,218 2.09 1,502 2.19 1,633 1.70 14,910 Totalizing Anemometer (3-cup) Maximum Recorded Predominant Gust, moh , Direction 6 S-SW 12 S-SE 12 E-SE 8 SE SE 7 SE 6 SE 7 SW 9 10 SE 7 S-SE 10 S-SW 9 SW 12 S-SE Dwyer Wind Wind Vane i Meter I -- North Exposure South Exposure Max. Min. Mean Max. Min. Mean 3.1 2.1 2.65 2.7 1.8 2.25 4.1 3.1 3.[.4 3.5 2.7 3.00 4.3 3.8 4.03 3.8 3.4' 3.54 4.2 3.5 3.77 3.7 2.3 2.96 3.7 1.6 2.50 2.3 0.1 0.90 1.1 0.0 0.44 0.1 0.0 0.01 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.5 0.0 0.27 0.5 0.0 0.25 0.9 0,7 0.80 0.8 0.7 0.77 4.3 0.0 3.8 0.0 --Snow stakes Draw Max. Min. Mean 3.2 1.9 2.64 4.1 3.2 3.54 3.8 3.2 3.59 4.1 3.0 3.43 3.2 1.3 2.07 1.3 0.0 0.51 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0,0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.4 0.0 0.24 0.9 0.7 0.82 -4.1 0.0 Ridge Top Min. Mean 3.2 2.2 2.82 4.3 3.2 3.60 4.4 4.1 4.21 4.5 3.3 3.86 3.2 1.0 1.90 0.8 0.0 0.26 0.0 0,0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.5 0.0 0.28 1.0 0.8 0.87 4.5 0.0 -Max. �APPENDIX VI Standard Snow Terminologyl! SNOW A. New: Snow falling or freshly fallen. 1. Dry: Fell at temperatures 5 degrees or more below freezing. Either refuses to pack or disintegrates of squeezed in the hand. a. Powder: Crystalline. (1) Fine: Similar to whole wheat flour. (2) Medium: Similar to bran. (3) Coarse: Similar to corn flakes. b. Granular: Irregular non-crystalline, sandy. (1) Fine: Similar to fine sand. (2) Medium: Similar to corn meal. (3) Coarse: Similar to coarse ground coffee. c. Pellet: Round but irregular and rough finished. (1) Fine: Similar to birdshot. (2) Medium: Similar to BB shot. (3) Coarse: Similar to tapioca. 2. Damp: Fell at temperatures close to freezing _ thawing. Packs readily in hand but will shatter. a. Flake: Very sticky. b. Granular: Packs very firmly. c. Hail: Frozen, slick-surfaced, globular. 3. Wet: Fell at temperatures above freezing. Sno·wballpacks firm and becomes wet and slippery on surface. Water can be squeezed out with added pressure. a. Flake: Coarse and soggy. b. Granular or sleet: Melts on contact except with other snow. c. Hail: Coarse and soggy. d. Slush: Extreme form of wet snow, melts on contact. B. Old: Snow which has settled or which has been packed. 1. Old powder: Includes all types of dry snow. Will not form snowball. 2. Old damp or wet: Same test as for new snow. 3. Windpack: Snow made firm by wind, not crusted or slabbed. a. Dry: Brittle. b. Damp: Stiff like cake batter. c. Wet: Slushy on the surface. 4. Corn: Damp or wet. A coarse textured snow similar to rock salt, the product of repeated thawing and freezing. 5. Slush: Drips water when held in hand. SNOW CRUSTS A. Form. 1. Breakable: Will not support weight of 160 lb. man on foot. 2. Unbreakable: Supports weight of 160 lb. man on foot. 3. Variable: Breakable and unbreakable crusts interspersed. B. Types. 1. Wind crust: Forms by wind blowing across or against a slope. Rippled, non-reflecting surface. Strong bond to undersurface. Fractures locally. -140- �-141- APPENDIX VI (Continued), 2. Wind slab: 3. 4. 5. Formed by wind action, particularly on lee slopes. Snow is under tension; has poor bond to undersurface. Fractures readily ~nd extensively. May be soft or hard. Smooth, chalky surface. Sun crust: Light, thin, polished, Formed by strong sun action for a short period followed by freezing. Common crust: Rough, granular surface. Formed by freezing and thawing, Becomes corn snow eventually. Slush forms under high temperatures. Icy crust: A slushy surface frozen. !/ Modified from U. S. Forest Service, (1953) ~ �APPENDIX VII -142- -142- DEER ECOLOGY INVESTIGATIONS ENVIRONMENTAL DATA RECORD FORM (Page 1) Installation Station No. Week ~Date, ~---- Time _ Observer(e) Area Prev.Read.Date, _ Current Weather: Temperature Trend Visibility _ Precipitation Clouds (Cover, kind, etc.) Additional Remarks ---------------------TEMPERATURE: REL. HUMIDITY: Pres.Temp.Min.Therm. OF Pres.Temp.Hygro. OF Psychr.Wet Bulb OF, Dry Min.Th. OF, Max.Th. Mean Therm. Temp. Min.Hygro.Temp. OF,Max. Mean Hygro.Temp. " Pres.Soil Temp.(Min.Therm.) Soil Min.T. OF, Soil Max.T. Mean Soil Temp. Remarks~ PresoPsychr.R.H., Pres.Hygro.R.H~ Min.Hygro.R.H. Remarks OF OF OF OF OF OF OF OF _ %(Calc.below) % %,Max.Hygro.R.H. % _ PRECIPITATION: Precip.G. Now lbe. Prevo lbs. Total (wk.) lbs. Total Inches (wk.) Reset lbs. Remarks WIND: Instantaneous Wind Vel.-Max._" Instantaneous Wind Vel.-Min. Anemom.Miles: Now Prev, Total Miles' (wk.) Ave. Vel. (wk.) Wind Direction, Wind Characteristics & Remarks~ oz. m.ph mph _ "!"" ...;mph SOIL MOISTURE AND SNOW COVER: _ _ Soil Moisture (5"-7") Condition Soil Surface~ CALCULATION SPACE AND REMARKS: Psychro. Calculations: Trial No. ____~1~...;2~~34~ __5~~6__ Depr. WB. OF DB. OF Final Calc.R.H. % (enter under Pres.Psychr.R.H. under REL.HUM.above) Servicing Information: _ ---- C?z. oz. oz. ~ _ Depth Snow OVer Soil Tube~ Condition Snow Over Soil Tube ft. _ Remarks, _ PRECIP. GAGE CALCULATIONS: Lbs. Reading Now: Reading Previous: Difference: ANEMOM. CALCULATIONS: Oz. I Miles Reading Now: Reading Previous: Difference: (Use Back of Form for Additional Remarks) In. I �APPENDIX VII -143- (Continued) DEER ECOLOGY INVESTIGATIONS (Page 2) ENVIRONMENTiU. DATA RECORD FORM Snow Station No. Date Preliminary R~marks Area __ -= Time~ ~ Stake Number 1 North ~-=--~~-----=_~__ _= -= Observer(s) __ Week~ _ =_.__ ===_ __ _=_= =___ ===_==~_======_ ~~ Draw South _= _ R1dg<! 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Totals Mean Time Read Snow Designation Crust Designation REMARKS =- North Exposure: _ South Exposure: _ Draw: _ Ridge: ~ _==_ _ �APPENDIX VIII Deer Ecology Investigations Station Noo - Cache la Poudre River Drainage, Colorado - Monthly S~ary Area Elevation Day II Tem]2. Air. of 0 IIMax.\ Mino I i'iean, Max. Min. Mean Temp. Soil, of. 5-7 in. Depth Max. Min. Mean Year --------- Soil Moisture Precip., Inches Water % Drv Wt. 5-7 in. Depth I 1 I 2 II 5 I I _6_ I 7 8 9 10 I il I I I 3 4 Temp. Air. of. Max. Min. Mean Humt dd ty , % Month Relative Humidity. % Max. Min. Mean Relative (Page 1) of Environmental Data I I I II I ! I I 11 I II 12 13 I 14 I I I i I I I 15 16 I 17 I 18 I 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 II Ii I i-' +"" +"" I I I I I I I I I I !I I I I :1 I, I 27 28 I 29 30 31 Month Month Mean Instruments & Methods I I I I Thermo- Mean of graph (BourdortMax. & Tub~ Min. Hygrograph (Hair) Mean Thermograph of Max. 6 (Bourdon Tube) Min. Mean of Daily Means I Hygrograph (Hair) Mean of Daily Means I I Max. and Min. Thermometers (Weather Bureau Type) 8-inch Non-recording I Precipe Gage Moisture Determination Balance �APPENDIX VIII (Continued) Deer Ecology Investigations ~ Cache la Poudre River Drainage~ Colorado - Monthly Summary of Environmental Data Station Noo Day 1 2 3 Area Year _ Ridge Type Classification Ridge Draw NorthExposure South Exposure Crust Snow Crust Snow Crust Crust Snow Snow I 1 I 6 7 Month Snow Wind Mean Depth. ft. Mean ~nstant.Instant.DirecSouth North Min. tion Total Vel. Hax. Exposure Exposure Draw mph mph Miles mph 45 8 9 Elevation (Page 2) I l I 10 11 I 12 ! 13 14 15 16 I 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 ! Month I Month 1 Mean Dwyer Instru- Totalizing Wind ments & Anemometer (3-~u1!l_---. Meter Methods I .I ! I . I I ; I I-' +=\.n I , ! I Windlr vanetl Snow Stakes U.S.F.S. Avalanche Handbook ��J'anmu'Y, -147JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH SEGMENT PROJECT State of COLORADO --~~~~~--------An Ecological Investigation of the Project No.: Work Plan: Job No.: W-105-R-3 Cache la Poudre Deer Herd, Colorado 3 --~~------------- 3 --------------------- Period Covered: Personnel: January, Dean E. Medin 1962 Environmental Studies Vegetative Analysis December, 1962 and Allen E. Anderson Abstract: Twenty-seven plant species were observed during 1962 for seasonal development (Table 1). Phenological stages recorded are shown in Table 2. Development was recorded systematically each week at five elevations (6,440' to 10,320') on contrasting slope exposures (northfacing slope, south-facing slope, and no aspect). Observations were accomplished in conjunction with the weekly reading of environmental stations (Work Plan 3, Job No.1). Woody plant density was estimated on three winter range study locations (lower-winter, middle-winter, upper-winter) through establishment of 960 permanently marked 100-sq. ft. circular plots. Antelope bitterbrush (Purshia tridentata), true mountain mahogany (Cercocarpus montanus), and big sagebrush (Artemisia tridentata) comprised 56.4% of the total woody plant population on the three sampled areas. Density of these three primary species for each study location were as follows: Hewlett Gulch (lower-winter): Mountain mahogany -- 665 ± 122 plants/acre at 90% level (N = 366). Bitterbrush -- 350 ± 65 plants/acre at 90% level (N = 366). Kelly Flats (middle-winter): Mountain mahogany -- 757 ± 105 plants/acre at 90% level (N = 299). Bitterbrush -- 838 ± 113 plants/acre at 90% level (N = 299). Sevenmi1e Creek (upper-winter): Bitterbrush -- 1593 f 157 plants/acre at 90% level (N = 295). Big sagebrush -- 1787 196 plants/acre at 90% level (N = 295). ± Annual production of the above species for the 1962 growing season was determined on each study location using weight estimate and double sampling methods. The same circular 100-sq. ft. plots established for density estimates were used in sampling yields. Oven-dry weights of production estimates were as follows: 1964 �-148Hewlett Gulch (lower winter): + Mountain mahogany --+1L~.0- 3.4 lhs/acre at 90% level (N = 128). Bitterbrush -- 30.7 - 22.9 lbs/acre at 90% level (N = 136). Kelly Flats (middle-winter): Mountain mahogany -- 9.5 :!.- 3.3 lbs/acre at 90% level (N = 104) .. Bitterbrush -- 40.6 t 20.9 lbs/acre at 90% level (N = 107). Sevenmile Creek (upper-winter): Bitterbrush -- 40.4 f ~8.9 lbs/acre at 90% level (N = 104). Big sagebrush -- 75.0 - 26.7 lbs/acre at 90% level (N = 102). Acknowledgements: Drs. Meredith J. Morris and Jacob L. Kovner, Mathematical Statisticians, Rocky Mcuntain Forest and Range Experiment Station, gave helpful advice in the planning and analysis phases of the vegetative studies. Student assistants Ken E. Nicolls, William F. Wallace, Brent R. Baker, Thomas E. Hakonson and Frank Abelard aided in gathering vegetative density and annual production data. Recommendations: Continue observation of the phenological development of important forage species on a weekly basis at five elevations. Determine the percent utilization of current annual growth on the permanent production plots during the spring of 1963. Make production estimates for the 1963 growing season during the fall of 1963 with an increased sample size. Begin quantitative descriptions of vegetation (cover, constancy, fidelity) on each of the five study locations during the summer of 1963 (Objective 2). Objectives: (1) Record the phenological development of important range forage plants on five selected study locations believed to be representative of the lower-winter, middle-winter, upper-winter, transitional, and summer ranges of the herd. This will further our understanding of the seasonal patterns of forage use by deer at various elevational levels as evaluated hy food preference studies (Work Plan 3, Job No.5). (2) Quantitatively describe the vegetation (by vegetative type) of each of the above study locations to: (a) provide basic data on vegetative coverage, constancy, fidelity, and to (b) aid in interpretation of deer distribution, food preference, and activity as related to food and cover. (3) Estimate the mean yield and use of important browse species on the winter range study locations to provide data relative to the effects of various population levels (Work Plan 4, Job No.1) on important seasonal food items. Technigues Used: (1) Phenology -- Plant-development observations are presently being made in Poudre Canyon on important forage plants at five elevations. Plants observed are reasonably close to operational meteorological stations (Work Plan 3, Job No.1) so that general climatic conditions recorded by tnstruments approximates those influencing the plants. Observations on �-149- weather are recorded year-around while plant phenology data are recorded from the beginning of growth in the spring until the appearance of heavy snows in the late fall or early winter. The species observed and the elevations of associated meteorological stations are shown in Table 1. Plant development is recorded on three different exposures (N = north, S = south, NA = no aspect) if the species occurs on more than one exposure. Absence of a given species on some exposures or stations is due to altitudinal or site limitations. Plant development stages recorded are summarized in Table 2. Individual plants of each species are staked along designated routes which are traversed weekly. Staked plants serve as guides and reminders for stage entries, but several plants are observed of each species (if present) and a general conclusion as to the present plant-development stage is entered on prepared forms (Figure 1). Stages are entered on the field form by numbers representing the various developmental phases (Table 2). (2) Woody plant density -- The number of woody plants per unit area was estimated on the three winter range study locations, each approximately 500 acres. The woody plant population was defined as those shrubs, trees, and vines having a crown diameter greater than 4 inches (determined by averaging a measurement of the greatest and least breadth of the plant). Coniferous tree species, with the exception of Rocky Mountain juniper (Juniperus scopulorum), were excluded. Only those aspens (Populus tremuloides) under five feet in height were included. Sampling was systematic. Parallel transects were established at 8-chain intervals oriented against contours with plots spaced at 2-chain intervals along the transects. Circul~r 100-sq. ft. plots were marked perman~ntly with 18-inch yel16w-painted steel angle-iron center stakes. Density on each plot was determined using a 5.64-foot length of light chain rotating about a fixed center upright fitted to the angle-iron stake by a sleeve and hand tightened thumb screws. Only woody plants having their root crown within the plot area were counted. A plot record was kept by pin-holing each plot location on an enlarged aerial photograph of each area. (3) Browse yield -- Production of current annual growth for the 1962 growing season was estimated for mountain mahogany, bitterbrush, and big sagebrush during the months of October-November on each winter range study location. Reference to "current annual growth" is inaccurate for big sagebrush where all current growth plus all leaves (which mayor may not have been current) were included. Weight estimate (Pechanec and Pickford, 1937), double sampling (Wilm, et al., 1944; Hilmon, 1959), and regression analysis techniques described by Blair (1959) as the "Dry Weight Prediction Method" whereby oven-dry weights of forage are predicted directly from estimated green weights were used to determine actual yields. Green forage weights were estimated, by species, on the same permanent 100-sq. ft. circular plots established �-150as described above for woody plant density on each winter range study area. Annual growth on a small number of plots, in this case at an arbitrarily chosen ratio of 1:6, was first estimated, then clipped, sacked, oven-dried for 24 hours at 100-105 degrees C., and weighed. A linear regression was then calculated to define the relationship of actual oven-dry forage weight (Y) to estimated green weight (X) for each species. Several days were spent training in the weight estimate method as described by Pechanec and Pickford (1937) for each species until a 10% accuracy was obtained before actual sample estimates began. Dietary scales calibrated to 2-grams were used during the-training period. There was no further training or checking of estimates once the survey ~egan. Double sample (clipped) plots were systematically selected prior to beginning the survey and were offset a consistent distance and direction from the permanently marked plots by a 20-foot length of light chain. The clipped plots were not permanently marked and will not be included in any future sampling. All current growth below a 5-foot height was included in the weight estimates. Mountain mahogany weights were estimated without leaves, bitterbrush and big sagebrush with included leaves. Green weights were estimated to the nearest gram on smaller plants, and to the nearest 5 or 10 gram interval on larger plants. Oven-dry weights were recorded to the one-tenth gram. Each plant of the sampled species on the permanent weight estimate plots was tagged with an aluminum strap label for identification during utilization estimates to be made on the same plots the following spring. Labels were marked with both plot and plant number, e.g., B2-3 identifies the transect line (B) ,plot number (2), plant number (3). Records were kept on field forms by the same identification system. A categorized estimate of the degree of utilization on each plant was made prior to estimating current annual growth: H = heavy (over 60% utilization), M = moderate (20% - 60%), L = light (under 20%), N = none. VEGETATIVE ANALYSIS Dean E. Medin Findings: Three objectives are listed under vegetative analysis: (1) phenological development of important range-forage plants, (2) vegetative descriptions, and (3) production and utilization. During Segment 3 (1962) progress was made on the first and third objectives. (1) Phen~ -- Tentative forage species and phenological phases (stages) were chosen during Segment 2, observed on a trial basis for one growing season, and modified for application during succeeding Project Segments. �-151- The choice of forage species and developmental phases are presented under Techniques. Phenological stages. as summarized in Table 2 are presently being recorded on the 27 range-forage species listed in Table 1. Summarization of this data has not been attempted at the date of this writing. (2) Woody plant density -- Densities of woody plants on three winter range study areas were determined to provide information necessary to undertaking production and utilization studies. Results are presented in Table 3. At least 30 species were represented in the sample taken on the three winter range areas. Of these, mountain mahogany, bitterbrush, and big sagebrush constituted 56.4% of the total. Frequency indexes (Dice, 1952) Numb2r of samples in which the species is present (Frequency index = Total number of samples examined were also highest for these three abundant distribution as well as high densities. species indicating ) widespread Elevationally, bitterbrush had the widest distributional abundance, varying from 350 plants per acre on the low winter range to 1593 plants per acre on the high winter range. Big sagebrush exists in abundance only at the higher wintering elevations. Mountain mahogany, a high density woody plant on the lower and middle study locations, gradually declines as a major component as the upper winter range is approached. Woody plant densities and frequencies as a whole increased with increasing elevation. Dead plant percentages, although somewhat variable, were consistently higher on the same three most numerous species. It is possible that this is a reflection of the degree or selectivity of browsing by deer and/or livestock on these species. Several woody plant species known to be present on the study locations were not represented in the sample taken. Some of these are: thinleaf alder (Alnus tenuifolia), Oregon grape (Berberis repens), water birch (Betula occidentalis), Fendler ceanothus (Ceanothus fendleri), snowbrush ceanothus (Ceanothus velutinus), pipsissewa (Chimaphila umbellata), dogwood (Cornus stolonifera), beaked filbert (Corylus cornuta), hawthorn (Crataegus sPP.), rockspirea (Holodiscus dumosus). Coniferous tree species, with the exception of Rocky Mountain juniper, were not included in the population to be sampled. These are: ponderosa pine (Pinus ponderosa), Douglas fir (Pseudotsuga taxifolia), lodgepole pine (Pinus contorta), limber pine (Pinus flexilis), Engelmann spruce (Picea engelmanii), and Colorado spruce (Picea pungens). (3) Browse yield -- The three most abundant woody plant species, mountain mahogany, antelope bitterbrush, and big sagebrush, were selected for production and utilization studies. Yields of current annual growth were estinlated for each of these species for the 1962 growing season on the winter range study areas. Results are presented in Table 4. The oven-dry yields per acre listed in Table 4 are averages derived from a sample of an entire study area (each approximately 500 acres) consisting �-152of several vegetative typ~s including such non-browse types as coniferous forest and grassland meadow. Perhaps the most significant result of the production estimates is the surprisingly low total yields. The high browse densities (Table 3), also encompassing all the vegetative types, would lead one to expect much greater yields. For example, on the Hewlett Gulch study area there was an estimated 665 mahogany plants per acre and an average yield of 14.0 pounds per acre. This gives an average of 0.021 pounds (9.53 grams) of current annual growth yield per individual mahogany plant. Observing that mountain mahogany is the most abundant woody plant on the Hewlett Gulch study area (Table 3), and having some ,knowledge of deer forage requirements, it doesn't take a great deal of imagination to realize, at least in a gross way, the large number of producing forage plants necessary to support a deer population. Utilization estimates will be made during the spring of 1963 on the same plants and plots used in determining browse yields on each study area. Confidence intervals and sample sizes listed in Table 4 were calculated using variance equations given by Cochran (1953:282): n n where, = f ('1-Y) 2 { t...y2 _ n-l (i.. y) 2 n } 1 n-l = no. of clipped plots n = total no. of plots n 1 ( (x-x) -2 n-l Sxy "(x-x) (y-y) n-l Sample sizes in most cases were too small in 1962 to reach a desired precision of 20% at the 90% confidence level. Sampling for 1962 yields will be increased to needed sizes as much as time will allow. Literature Blair, Cited Robert M. 1959. Weight techniques for sampling browse production on deer ranges. In Techniques and methods of measuring understory vegetation. Proceedings of a Symposium at Tifton, Georgia, Oct., 1958. Southern Forest Expt. Sta. and Southeastern Forest Expt. Sta., 174pp. Cochran, W. G. 1953. York, 330 pp. Sampling techniques. John Wiley and Sons, New �-153Dice, Lee R. 1952. Natural communities. Arbor, 547 pp. Univ. of Michigan Press, Ann Hi lmon , J. B. 1959. Determination of herbage weight by double-sampling: weight estimate and actual weight. In Techniques and methods of measuring understory vegetation. Proceedings of a Symposium atTifton, Georgia, Oct., 1958. Southern Forest Expt. Sta. and Southeastern Forest Expt. Sta., 174 pp. Pechanec, J. F. andG. D. Pickford. 1937. A weight estimate method for the determination of range and pasture production. Jour. Amer. Soc. Agron. 29:894-904. Wilm, H. G., David F. Costello, and G. E. Klipple. 1944. Estimating forage yield by the double-sampling method. Jour. Amer. Soc. Agron. 36:194-203. Prepared by Dean E. Medin Date January, 1964 --------------------------- Approved by ~Wtta~yn~e~w~.~S-a-n~d~f-o-r-t---~----Ch~ef, Game Research �Table 1. -- Species Observed and Meteorological Station Elevation at Which Plant-Development Data are Recorded, Cache la Poudre Canyon, Colorado. Plant SEecies Observed Rocky Hountain Juniper (JuniEerus scopulorum) Quaking Aspen (Populus tremuloides) True Mountain mahogany (Cercocarpus montanus) Skunkbush Sumac (Rhus trilobata) Big Sagebrush (Artemisia tridentata) Antelope Bitterbrush (Purshia tridentata) Wax Currant (Ribes cereum) Bearberry (Arctostaphylos uva-ursi) Bush Cinquefoil (Potentilla fruticosa) Willow (Salix sp.) Russet Buffaloberry (SheEherdia canadensis) Blueberry (Vaccinium scoparium) Fringed Sagebrush (Artemisia frigida) Blue Grama (Bouteloua gracilis) Cheatgrass Brome (Bromus tectorum) Spikefescue (Hesperochloa kingii) Needle and Thread (Stipa comata) Tufted Hairgrass (Deschampsia caespitosa) Bluejoint Reedgrass (Calamagrostis canadensis) Sunflower (Helianthus Eumilus) Hairy Goldaster (ChrysoEsis villosa) Pasqueflower (Pulsatilla ludoviciana) Thermopsis (Thermopsis divaricarEa) Western Yarrow (Achillea lanulosa) Heartleaf Arnica (Arnica cordifolia) Arrowleaf Groundsel (Senecio triangularis) Marshmarigold (C~lth~JLeptosepala) ];.1 Station 1 Hewlett Gulch 62440' N S NAlI N S S NA NA N N S S NA NA N N N N S S S S NA NA NA NA NA N NA NA NA N NA N S S Station and Elevation Stat~on 3 Stat~on 4 Station 2 Little Beaver Kelly Flats Sevenmile Creek Creek 72000' 82120' 82940' N S NA N S NA N S NA N S NA N S NA S N S NA S N S NA N S NA N S NA N S NA N S NA N S NA N S NA N S N S NA NA NA N N N S NA N S NA N S NA N S NA S NA N S N S NA S NA N S NA N S NA NA NA N S NA NA NA S N S NA N S NA S NA N S NA N NA N N S NA N S NA N S NA N S NA N S NA N Observations on plant-development for a given species are made on three separate exposures (N = north, NA = no aspect) if the species occurs on more than one exposure. Station 5 Crown Point 102320' S I N S S I-' NA NA S S NA NA S = south, xn oj:"" I �Table 2. -- Plant-Development Stages Recorded, Cache la Poudre Canyon, Colorado. Grass Species Woody Species (1) Leaf buds swelling (1) Growth starting (2) (3) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) ( 8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16) (17) Flower buds swelling Leaf buds bursting Flower buds bursting Leaders elongating Leafing out Full leaf Flowers blooming Full bloom Bloom over Fruit forming Seed ripe Seed disseminating Leaves drying, changing color Leaves falling Seed dissemination over Leaves dropped Flower stalks evident Heads in boot (4) Heads out (5) Flowers in bloom (6) Seed ripening (7) Seed ripe (8) Seed disseminating (9) Seed dissemination over (10) Plant drying (11) Plant dried Forb species ( 1) Growth starting Flower buds evident Flowers blooming (4) Full bloom (5) Bloom over (6) Fruit forming (7) Seed ripe (8) Seed disseminating (9) Seed dissemination over (10) Plant drying (11) Plant dried (2) (3) I f-' VI VI I �-156DEER ECOLOGY INVESTIGATIONS PHENOLOGY DATA RECORD FORM Area Observer Date --- Week;...------------------------ Station No. Species Juniperus scopulorum Populus tremuloides Station Occurrence 1 2 3 345 Cercocarpus montanus Rhus trilobata Artemisia tridentata Purshia tridentata Ribes cereum Arctostaphylos uva-ursi Potentilla fruticosa Salix sp. Shepherdia canadensis Vaccinium scoparium 1 2 3 1 2 3 3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 5 5 Artemisia frigida 1 2 3 4 Bouteloua gracilis Bromus tectorum HesEerochloa kingii Stipa comata Deschampsia caespitosa Calamagrostis canadensis 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 4 4 5 Helianthus pumilus Chrysopsis villosa Pulsatilla ludoviciana Thermopsis divaricarpa Achillea lanulosa Arnica cordifolia Senecio triangularis Caltha leptosepala 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 4 1 2 345 4 5 Additional Remarks: Phenological Stage South North No Aspect Remarks 5 5 ------------------------------------------------------------------ Figure 1. Plant phenology data field record form. �-157Table 3. -- Woody plant density on three winter range study locations, Cache 1a Poudre Canyon, Colorado' Study Location HEWLETT GULCH (Lowerwinter) N = 366 Live P1ants/ Acre SEecies True mountain mahogany, (Cercocareus montanus) Antelope bitterbrush, (Purshia tridentata) Skunkbush sumac, (Rhus trilobata) Currant, (Ribes cereum) Mountain ninebark, (Physocar:eus monogynus) Rocky Mountain juniper, (JuniEerus scoEulorum) Rabbitbrush, (Chrysothamnus sPp.) Common juniper, (JuniEerus communis) Willow, (Salix sPp.) Common chokecherry, (Prunus virgiriiana) Buckwheatbrush (woody), (Eriogonum sPp.) Rose, (Rosa sPp.) Boulder raspberry, (Rubus deliciosus) Western poisonivy, (Rhus radicans) Grape, (Vitis vu1Eina) Yucca, (Yucca sPp.) American plum, (Prunus americana) Snowberry, (Sym:eoricaq:!os spp.) Cliff jamesia, (Jamesia americana) Clematis, (Clematis spp , ) Serviceberry, (Amelanchier spp.) Currant, (Ribes spp.) Rocky Mountain maple, (Acer glabrum) Frequency Index % Dead Plants 665 t1/ 122350 :t" 65 .374, 7.9 .322 21.4 94 .093 7.0 112 .169 4.1 320 .068 0.7 98 14 .128 .022 8.9 14.3 .003 .005 0.0 0.0 37 .024 8.8 14 12 .011 .003 0.0 0.0 39 .060 0.0 .003 .003 .014 40.0 0.0 20.0 38 46 .014 .014 8.6 0.0 39 4.8 2.2 3.5 .046 .005 .003 .003 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 1.3 .003 50.0 1.3 7.0 3.5 2.2 9.6 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------KELLY FLATS (Midd1ewinter) N = 299 }j Antelope bitterbrush, (Purshia tridentata) True mountain mahogany, (CercocarEus montanus) Skunkbush sumac, (Rhus trilobata) Currant, (Ribes cereum) Mountain ninebark, (Physocarpus mono~ynus) Confidence intervals at the 90% level. 838 ~ 1l~ 757 105 157 348 .525 3.7 .498 .177 .381 1.3 0.9 0.8 832 olOL! 0•• 3 �-158Table 3. -- (Continued) Study Location KELLY FLATS (Cont.) Species Rocky Mountain juniper, (Juniperus scopu1orum) Rabbitbrush, (Chrysothamnus spp.) Rose, (Rosa spp.) Cliff jamesia, (Jamesia americana) Rocky Mountain maple, (Acer glabrum) Currant, (Ribes spp.) Boulder raspberry, (Rubus de1iciosus) Big sagebrush, (Artemisia tridentata) Yucca, (Yucca spp.) Snowberry, (Symphoricarpos spp.) Common chokecherry, (Prunus virginiana) C1emati~ (Clematis spp.) Live P1ants/. Acre Frequency Index Dead Plants 20 17 32 .040 .020 . .023 0.0 0.0 4.3 14 .023 0.0 4.4 13 .010 .010 0.0 10.0 34 .050 4.2 19 19 30 .013 .017 .010 0.0 0.0 0.0 .007 .003 0.0 0.0 16 1.3 % -----------------------------------------------------------------------------SEVENMILE CREEK (Upperwinter) N = 295 Big sagebrush, (Artemisia tridentata) Antelope bitterbrush, (Purshia tridentata) True mountain mahogany, (Cercocarpus montanus) Mountain ninebark, (Physocarpusmonogynus) Currant, (Ribes cereum) Skunkbush sumac, (Rhus tri1obata) Bearberry, (Arctostaphylos uva-ursi) Rocky Mountain juniper, (Juniperus scopu1orum) Willow, (Salix spp.) Aspen, (P~s tremu1oides)· Boulder raspberry, (Rubus de1iciosus) C1iffbush jamesia, (Jamesia americana) Rocky Mountain maple, (Acer glabrum) Russet buffa1oberry, (Shepherdia canadensis) Snowberry, (Symphoricarpos spp.) Rose, (Rosa spp.) Elder, ~bucus spp.) Currant, (Ribes spp.) Rabbitbrush (Chrysothamnus spp.) Common chokecherry, (Prunus virginiana) . Serviceberry, (kne1anchier spp.) Poplar, (Populus spp.) American red raspberry, (Rubus strigosus) 1787 ± 196 1593 ~ 157 .641 11.0 .702 8.2 179 .095 4.0 1073 193 78 30 .156 .292 .051 .017 25 62 .047 .010 0.58 5.5 0.0 4.5 108 .183 0.0 61 43 .074 .074 0.0 0.0 122 139 99 7.4 47 88 .068 .074 .074 .003 .034 .102 3.5 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 32 10 19 .007 .007 .010 0.0 0.0 0.0 12 .003 0.0 4.4 0.0 4.4 0.0 0.0 �Table 4. -- Oven-dry yields per acre of true mountain mahogany, antelope bitterbrush, and big sagebrush on three winter range study locations, 1962, Cache la Poudre Canyon, Colorado. Study Location HEWLETT GULCH (Lower-winter) Species True mountain mahogany, (Cercocarpus montanus) Antelope bitterbrush, (Purshia tridentata) Oven-Dry Yield/Acre (pounds) 14.0 ± 3.41/ 30.7 + - 22.9 1962 Sample Size 000- s9. ft. plots) Sample Size Needed for 20% Precision at the 90% level 128 70 136 600 I I-' --------------------------~---------------------------------------------------------------------------KELLY FLATS (Middle-winter) Antelope bitterbrush 40.6 + - 20.9 107 . 350 True mountain mahogany 9.5 + - 104 . 140 3.3 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------SEVENMILE CREEK (Upper-winter) Big sagebrush, (Artemisia tridentata) Antelope bitterbrush 1.1 Confidence intervals at the 90% level. 75.0 + - 26.7 102 188 40.4 + - 18.9 104 350 \J1 \0 I ��-161- State of JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH SEGMENT PROJECT COLORADO --~~~~-------An Ecological Investigation of the Project No. Work Plan: 3 Job No.: 4 Period Covered: Personnel: Cache la Poudre Deer Herd, Colorado W-105-R-3 Environmental Studies Food-cover Relationships by Environmental Factors January, 1962 December, as Affected 1962 Charles M. Loveless Objectives: (1) Measure or otherwise appraise selected characteristics of the physical, climatological, and biological factors of a winterrange environment on a representative study area, and evaluate the influence of these factors on deer use of food-cover types. (2) Assess, refine, and develop methods attendant to the research problem. Techniques Used: Micro-climate Procedures Work Plan 3, Job 1. employed are those as outlined under Vegetative Type Mapping The Kuchler (1955) type mapping method was used and details as to methods are discussed under Work Plan 3, Job 2. Sample Design -- A restricted stratified random sampling procedure was employed in selecting pellet group, production-utilization, quarter method, and point quadrat plots on the intensive study area. Pellet Groups -- During the summer of 1961 a preliminary sample of 30 plots was taken in the four major vegetative types on the intensive study area, All pellet groups present in the 100-square foot circular plots were counted and then removed. These data were employed as a guide to the sample size needed in order to attain reliability at P =~0.30. As indica~e2 by these preliminary counts, utilizing the formula N = ~ (Snedecor, 1946), a p sample size (N) of approximately 260 plots was determined. There were subsequently established, permanently marked, and the pellet groups counted and removed from the plots. Production-Utilization -- Deer winter range appraisal methods outlined by Passmore and Hepburn (1955) were employed. This as �-162- involved counting the number of living stems on each sample plant which provide twigs available to deer up to 6 feet above the ground at approximately the end of the growing season. In late spring and early summer these same plants are again examined and the percentage of twigs which have had some part of their length removed by deer tallied by the midpoints of the ranges 0-2, 2-10, 20-40, 40-60, 60-S0, and SO-lOO. Browse units are calculated by mUltiplying the number of living stems on each plant by the degree of browsing which applies to them. From these data the percentage of total browse units furnished by each species is determined. A total of 52S individual shrubs, including 21 species, was chosen for this phase of the investigation. Plants were selected employing the angle order method and each marked with a numbered metal tag. Vegetative Studies -- Density and relative frequency of occurrence of tree species was determined by the point center quarter method (Cottam and Curtiss, 1956). At each sampling point four equal quarters are defined and the horizontal linear distance to the nearest tree in the separate quadrants is measured. The height and DBH of each tree is also measured. At each sample point four crown canopy coverage determinations were made with a Lemmon Densiometer (1956). A total of 113 plot points were employed which trees in the three timber types studied. involved 452 sample Density and relative frequency of occurrence of shrub species was estimated through employment of the angle-order method (Morisita, 1954). This technique is similar to the quarter method except the distance to the third-nearest plant is measured. A total of 132 plot points, involving 528 shrub plants (21 species), constituted the sample. After determining the third-nearest shrub, and recording its horizontal distance from plot center, measurements of crown-canopy coverage and plant height were taken. These sample shrubs were also employed in connection with productionutilization studies. The point-quadrat or point-contact method (Drew, 1944) was utilized in order to characterize the vegetative matrix of the four communities of interest. A metal frame with ten vertical pins each 5~ feet long, positioned 6 inches apart through holes provided in the cross supports of the frame, served as the sampling unit. The frame was set up at each plot location, the pins lowered, and the vegetation contacted by the tapered end of the pin recorded by species according to the following height classifications: 4 feet or over, 3 feet to 4 feet, 2 feet to 3 feet, 1 foot to 2 feet, 6 inches to 1 foot, and 6 inches or less. If a plant part was not contacted "hits" on bare ground, litter, stones, or erosion pavement were recorded. Two hundred sixty-four sample plots were taken which included 2640 observations. �-163Deer Activity and Use Patterns -- Insight into relative use by deer of various vegetative types was obtained from the pellet group (Riney, 1957) and browse utilization data. Additional information was obtained through periodic observations of deer through the winter period, and qualitative observations of trails and beds following fresh snowfall. In connection with the necessity for' obtaining quantitative continuous information of deer activity a photoelectric cell device was developed. This unit is presently undergoing field and laboratory tests. Physical Environmental Factors -- Procedures employed in the collection of micro-climatic data are those 'as outlined under Work Plan 3, Job 1. In addition to these, ten maximum-minimum thermometers, located at deer height and spaced equidistance apart from slope base to ridge top Oil a south-facing browse covered exposure were read at weekly intervals. In connection with the vegetative type mapping activity, measurements of slope aspect and angle were determined for each cover type examined. Also, after completion of the type map from aerial photos, on which corrections for topographic distortion were made, the length, width, and orientation was determined for each separate cover type. The number of hours each of the four weather station locations received sunlight, on cloudless days, was determined with a Horizontoscope" for the periods June, May-July, April-August, March-September, February-October, January-November, and December. Another related technique has involved employing contour maps of the area, and utilizing these along with information relative to the sun's altitude and azimuth at each hour of the day during the winter and summer sollices and the equinox to prepare "shadow" maps. These maps show the portions of the area which are shaded due to topographic relief for the periods indicated. FOOD-COVER RELATIONSHIPS AS AFFECTED BY ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS Charles M. Loveless Findings: The results of this study are presented in summary form below from the Doctoral dissertation of C. Loveless. It is anticipated that formal publication of the study will be forthcoming. Summary -- Ecological characteristics of a selected mule deer winter range. Ph.D. Dissertation, Colorado State University, 1963, 318 pp. 1. The investigation was designed to characterize the environment, particularly the physical aspects, of mule deer (Odocoileus hemionus), on a selected winter range of approximately 960 acres, and to evaluate the response of deer to these environmental factors. Data were collected from January, 1961, through November, 1962. �-1642. Studies were conducted in the Front Range, eastern-most unit of of the Rocky Mountains, north-central Colorado. The area of investigation is in the Roosevelt National Forest, Sections 19, 20, 29, and 30, T9N, R73W, 6th P.M., Larimer County, approximately 45 miles west-north-west of Fort Collins. The study sit~ was selected because it appeared to be representative of the surrounding region • .3. .The most characteristic feature of the vegetation was an obvious separation into communities dominated by big sagebrush and other shrubs, One dominated by lodgepole pine, an~ther in which quaking aspen and narrow1eaf cottonwood were the most conspicuous species, and a community dominated by grasses. The topography of the study area is very diversified, and elevations range from about 7,400 to 9,000 feet. Soils, developed mostly from granitic parent material, are generally shallow, rocky, well drained, and low in organic content. Surface features include numerous loose stones and exposed rock outcrops. 4. Evaluation of the physical environment involved measurements of microc1imatic elements in four basic vegetative-topographic units representative of the study area. Micro-climatic elements measured included air and soil temperature, relative humidity, precipitation, snow depth, soil moisture, atmospheric pressure, wind, duration of direct sunlight, and solar radiation. Additionally, land surface characteristics and the nature of indigenous soils were investigated. The width, length, orientation, shape, gradient, and aspect were determined for all vegetative-topographic types examined. 5. Investigations of the biological environment included characterization of the vegetation, and determinations of deer activity and distribution based upon observations of the animals, pellet group counts, food utilization, and bed counts. 6. A stratified random design was employed to sample the vegetation, deer pellet groups, and soil surface characteristics. Vegetative mapping procedures were according to Kuchler (1955). Techniques employed to measure quantitatively vegetative features included the point-center quarter, angle order, and point-contact methods. This latter method also provided information on soil surface characteristics. Pellet groups were counted in 100-square foot circular plots. 7. Approximately 75 percent of the horizontal surface acreage on the study area is between gradients of 41 and 60 percent. About 45 percent of these slopes, according to acreage, face toward the southern quadrant, and approximately 45 percent are northern aspects. The mean radiation index for south-facing shrub types in winter is 37, while the mean index for north-facing timber types in winter is 19. Furthermore, south aspects receive about nine times as much direct sunlight in winter as north exposures. �-1658. Bare ground and rock were considerably more extensive on the south-facing exposure as contrasted· with other exposures, while soil-surface stones were most prevalent on the west aspect. Surface litter was most frequent on the north-facing exposure. 9. Soils were slightly acid (6.4 to 6.7) on the north and west exposures, the two coniferous timber types sampled, while soils in the aspen-grown valley and on the shrub-covered, south aspect were slightly basic (7.1 to 7.5). Soluble salts and organic matter were higher in soils of the valley than in the soils of the other locations sampled. Lime was essentially absent from soils on the west exposure, and amounts were very low (less than 0.5 percent) in soils on the other three sites. Phosphate and potassium were highest in the north aspect soils. 10. Mean daily maximum air temperatures were significantly higher on the south aspect during all seasons than on the north exposure, but were not significantly different from mean maximums measured in the aspen-grown valley, or on the west-facing slope. Comparisons showed that mean maximums were significantly different between all seasons both years in the four locations sampled. The highest maximum temperature recorded during the study was 87 F, and occurred on the south exposure in August both years. The lowest minimum air temperature, -28 F, was recorded during January in the valley. The number of times air temperatures reached 32 F and OOF was most frequent in the valley, but the duration of such temperatures was longest on the north- and westfacing aspects. 11 •. On the south-facing exposure mean maximum and mean temperatures were significantly higher on the upper half of the slope, during most of the period deer were on the winter range, as contrasted with the lower half of the slope. Mean minimum temperatures were significantly lower on the bottom half of the slope. 12. Mean weekly maximum soil temperatures both years were significantly higher on the south and west aspects during all seasons than those on the north-facing exposure, and south exposure temperatures were significantly higher than those in the valley. Differences in mean maximums between the four seasons were significant in both 1961 and 1962. During the period of study the highest maximum soil temperature recorded was 81 F and occurred on the south exposure in August, 1962. The lowest minimum soil temperature recorded was 14 F and occurred on the west aspect during March, 1962. Mean soil temperatures on the north exposure were significantly lower during all seasons in both 1961 and 1962 than those on the south and west aspects. 13. Mean daily maximum relative humidity was significantly higher in both years and during all seasons in the aspen-grown valley than means occurring on the north-, south-, and west-facing exposures. In 1961 and 1962 relative humidity was significantly lower during winter and fall than in spring and summer, but differences between spring and summer were non-significant. The frequency of 100 percent relative humidity was greatest in the aspen-grown valley, �-166- but the duration 'of 100 percent relative humidity was longest on the north-exposure. The lowest minlmum relative humidity recorded during the study was 4 percent and occurred in May, 1961, on the south exposure. Mean relative humidity percentages were mostly in the 60's during each month of both years on the four exposures studied except in summer when mean values frequently dropped to' .t he 50's. 14. Atmospheric pressure was lowest during the spring and highest in summer. The lowest pressure recorded was 29.69 inches of mercury and occurred in the spring, while the highest, 30.30, occurred during summer. 15. The maximum amount of precipitation in 1961 occurred from early spring through early fall, and in 1962 from early spring through mid-summer. The greatest amount of monthly precipitation, 6.65 inches, was recorded in the valley during May, 1961, and in July during 1962. The lowest monthly precipitation, 0.24 inches, occurred during January and was measured on the north exposure. Total annual precipitation in 1961 varied from 18.52 inches on the north aspect to 28.31 inches on the south exposure, and during 1962 from 10.74 inches on the north exposure to 17.37 inches in the valley. Mean weekly precipitation between exposures in 1961 and 1962 was non-significant. 16. The annual pattern of soil moisture content showed a close relationship to the annual pattern of precipitation, especially on the west and south aspects. Soil moisture was highest during the spring. and lowest in the winter during 1961 on the four exposures sampled. In 1962 soil moistures were lowest in fall, and highest in winter. The north aspect and the aspen-grown valley had significantly higher soil moisture content than the south and west exposures. Soil moisture percent in 1962 ranged from 1.5 in October on the south exposure to 40.1 percent during February in the valley. 17. Wind velocities on the four exposures studied in both 1961 and 1962 were greater in the late fall, winter, and early spring than during the summer. Velocities in 1961 ranged from a monthly mean of 0.59 miles per hour in August on the north aspect to 6.89 miles per hour on the south exposure in February. Wind velocities on the south aspect were significantly higher during all seasons than velocities recorded on the other three exposures. Winter winds during both years were significantly higher on each exposure as contrasted with spring, summer, and fall. 18. Ground surface snows were deeper during March in 1961 on all exposures sampled. In 1962 snow depth was greatest during January, except on the north aspect where it was greatest in March. The maximum snow depth recorded at a measuring stake was 1.66 feet and occurred on the north aspect in March, 1962. Drifts to 5 feet and over were observed in localized areas on the ridges, however. The study area was essentially snow free from June through August in 1961, and from May through October in 1962. Ground surface snows were significantly deeper on the north exposure than in the other locations sampled. �-167- 19. A photoelectric-cell device, packaged for field use and designed for operation under climatic conditions such as prevail in the Rocky Mountains, was developed. The unit id described in Loveless et a1. (1963). 20. The vegetation of the study area is made up of five major plant communities. They are: 1) Artemisia tridentata-Purshia tridentata; 2) Pinus ponderosa-Pseudotsuga menziesii; 3) Pinus contorta; 4) Populus tremu1oides-Popu1us angustifo1ia; and 5) Boute1oua graci1is-Muh1enbergia-Poa. Vegetative types characteristic of the first four of these five communities wer.e studied intensively. Tree density in the lodgepole pine-Doug1as-fir type (north aspect) was 2,540 stems per acre as compared with 1;381 and 436 stems per acre in the quaking aspen (valley) and ponderosa pine-Doug1as-firtypes (west aspect), respectively. Shrub density was significantly greater on the north exposure than in the other three locations studied, but mean crown diameter per plant was greatest in the Artemisia tridentata-Purshia tridentata (south-facing exposure) community. Canada buffalo-berry and small ninebark constituted about 76 percent of the shrubs on the north exposure, and bitterbrush and big sagebrush made up about 85 percent of the shrub vegetation on the south aspect. Squaw currant, small ninebark, and quaking aspen constituted about 44 percent of the shrubs and shrub forms in the valley while bitterbrush constituted 48 percent of the shrubs on the west exposure. The spatial distribution of all shrubs combined is random, but tests of individual species showed their spatial distribution to be non-random. 21. Average number of stems of current annual growth per plant was higher for shrubs on the south and west aspects than in the valley or on the north exposure. Bitterbrush and sagebrush on the south and west exposures accounted for 93 percent of the deer browse units measured on the study area. Total deer browse units on the south and west exposures were significantly greater than units measured on the north exposure and in the valley. The correlation coefficient for crown diameter versus number of stems of current annual growth for bitterbrush and big sagebrush was 0.79. 22. The number of deer pellet groups was significantly greater during both years on the south exposure as contrasted with the other three sites, and the number of pellet groups on the west aspect was greater than in the valley or on the north exposure. Differences between these two latter sites were non-significant. A significantly larger number of pellet groups were deposited by deer on the upper half of the south exposure during both years as contrasted with the lower half of the slope. The spatial distribution of pellet groups on the south and west-facing exposures was non-random, but characteristics of randomness were indicated on the north aspect and in the valley. 23. Seventy-three percent of the deer observed during the study were in shrub types, 13 percent in open-timber types, 11 percent were observed in drainage channe1s~ and only 3 percent in heavy timber �-168types. Of the tDtal number Df deer seen, 70 percent were Dbserved Dn the upper-half Df the expDsures invDlved. Deer were Dbserved thrDughDut the daylight hDurs, and under a wide variety Df weather cDnditiDns. Feeding periDds generally ranged frDm 3 to' 4 hDurs in length, interrupted by bedding-dDwn periDds Df 1 to' 2 hDurs. While actively feeding the deer mDved little actual distance. Deer beds Dccurred mDst frequently in Dpen-timbered, brDwse understDry types, and the animals appeared to' chDDse bed sites near large trees. MDvement Df deer intO' the area began bDth years in mid-September, and the animals had vacated the area bDth years by mid-May. These mDvements were apparently irrespective Df prevailing weather cDnditiDns either Dn the study area Dr elsewhere. 24. Deer appeared to' "seek-Dut" an air temperature ZDne frDm abDut 15 to' 45 F. Temperatures Df -10 to' 10 F appeared to' be the level causing deer to' CDncentrate in winter. High wind velDcities (25 miles per hDur and abDve) was an impDrtant related factDr, hDwever. Decreased activity Df deer was related with air temperatures Df 45 to' 50 F and abDve, accDmpanied by very dry atmDspheric cDnditiDns. Deer exhibited nO' particular reactiDn to' either falling rain Dr snDW, independent Df Dther weather elements. Severe snDW stDrms accDmpanied by 10'w temperatures and high winds, hDwever, did induce an apparent respDnse, and deer sDught the shelter Df drainage areas Dr heavy timber during these periDds. GrDund surface snDWS Df l-fDDt hampered the lDcDmDtiDn Df deer, and depths Df 2-feet Dr mDre essentially precluded their use Df an area. SnDw depth, assDciated with lDW air temperatures, was alsO' aSSDciated with the aggregating tendency Df deer. 25. Decided preference was shown by deer for vegetative types which prDvided available fDDd, viz., sDuth- and east-facing slDpes, and areas which prDvided bDth fDDd and cDver, such as Dpen-timbered, brDwse understDry types. LDcatiDns prDviding cDver, but few available preferred brDwse species, were little used by deer; fDr example, the heavy-timber types. The prDximity Df brDwsecDvered slDpes to' sites dDminated by Dpen-timber with a browse understDry influenced deer distributiDnal patterns. The deer were nDt randDmly dispersed Dver the range, but were essentially cDncentrated, particularly Dn the upper pDrtiDns Df the shrub cDmmunities. RegiDns in which the surface acreage is apprDximately Dne-half shrub types, and Dne-half timber types, with neither represented by individual areas Dverly extensive, appear to' prDvide excellent habitat fDr wintering mule deer. At Sevenmile the CDmpDsitiDn Df the vegetative cDmmunities, and their size, shape, DrientatiDn, and distributiDn, are undDubtedly very impDrtant to' the maintenance Df what is seemingly a healthy, stable, deer herd. 26. Deer activity, mDvement, and distributiDnal patterns were assDciated with a variety Df interrelated envirDnmental factDrs. These relatiDnships were very cDmplex, and seldDm did the reactiDns Df the animals appear to' be induced by independent elements acting alDne. Of the envirDnmental factDrs measured, deer respDnse seemed to' be mDst clDsely associated with, Dr induced by, high �-169air temperature and low atmospheric moisture, low air temperature accompanied by high winds or high atmospheric moisture or both, presence or absence of ground surface snow, duration of direct sunlight, availability and abundance of preferred browse species and the interspersion of sites providing these species, and the proximity of feeding areas to locations providing both food and cover. Literature Cited Cottam, G. and J. T. Curtiss. 1956. The use of distance measured in phytosciological sampling. Ecology, 37:451-460. Drew, W. B. 1944. Studies on the use of the point quadrat method of botanical analysis of mixed pasture vegetation. J. Agri. Res., 69:289-297 • Kuchler, A. W. 1955. A comprehensive method of mapping vegetation. Annals Assoc. Am. Geo. XLV:404-4l5. Lemmon, p. E. 1956. A spherical densiometer for estimating forest overstory density. For. Sci., 2:314-320. Loveless, Charles M., Joseph D. Coffelt, Dean E. Medin, and Lee E. Yeager. 1963. A photoelectric-cell device for use in wildlife research. AIBS Bulletin, 13(4):55-57. Morisita, Masaaki. 1954. Estimation of population density by spacing method. (In Japanese, English Translation); Kyushu Uni., Fukuoka, Japan, 187-197. Passmore, R. C. and R. L. Hepburn. 1955. A method for appraisal of winter range of deer. Onto Dept. Lands and Forests, Res. Rep. No. 29, 7 pp. Robinette, W. L., R. L. Ferguson, and J. S. Gashwi1er. 1958. Problems involved in the use of deer pellet group counts. Trans. N. A. Wi1dl. Conf., 23:411-425. Riney, T. 1957. The use of faeces counts in studies of several freeranging mammals in New Zealand. N.Z. J. Sci. and Tech. 507-532. Scheffe, H. 1959. The analysis of variance. N. Y. 477 pp. John Wiley, New York, Snedecor, G. W. 1946. Statistical methods applied to experiments in agriculture and biology. Iowa State College Press, Ames. 485 pp. Prepared by: Charles M. Loveless Date: JdJlUary, 1964 Approved by: Wayne W. Sandfort Chi-ef, Game Res eat-ch ��January, -171JOB COMPLETION RESEARCH State of PROJECT COLORADO --~~~~~- Project No.: Work Plan Job No.: Personnel: 3 -----~------------------~5 _ January, D. E. Medin SEGMENT An Ecological Investigation of the Cache 1a Poudre Deer Herd, Colorado W-105-R-3 Period Covered: REPORT Environmental Studies Food Preferenci 1962 -- December, 1962 and A. E. Anderson Abstract: Fifty-six stomach samples were taken during the reporting period from deer collected at elevations ranging from 5,300 to 10,700 feet. Fortyeight of the samples were from regularly collected deer and eight from supplementary sources (road kills, hunter wounding loss, etc.). Collection locations were chosen to correspond with seasonal use areas. Winter collections were from·wintering elevations (5,300' - 8,500'); spring and fall collections were generally from transitional areas (8,500' - 9,200'), and were made during the period of seasonal movement to higher (spring) or lower (fall) ranges. Summer collections were generally made at elevations in excess of 9,000 feet. Approximately four deer per month are being collected regularly (Work Plan 5, Jobs 1 and 2). All stomach samples have been sorted into component or like parts and await identification and measurement. No results are available to date. Recommendations: Continue taking a stomach sample for botanical analysis from regularly collected deer. Take advantage of supplementary deer reported as road kills, wounding losses, etc., for a stomach content sample. Sort and individually package component parts of preserved samples prior to identification and quantification. Estimate food preference by season for different elevational Objective: vegetative types so that seasonal forage use by deer can be ranges and the vegetation at each elevational level under study. related to Techniques Used: Approximately four deer per month were collected from locations corresponding to seasonal use areas (Table 1). Winter collections were from wintering elevations (5,300' - 8,500'); spring and fall collections from transitional areas (8,500' - 9,200'); and summer collections generally from elevations in excess of 9,000 feet. A stomach content sample was obtained after a thorough mixing of the contents of the rumen and reticulum. Approximately one quart of material was squeezed to eliminate excess moisture, placed in a cardboard carton lined with polyethylene and partially filled with 10% formalin, tagged, and stored for sorting and analysis. 1964 �-172- Botanical composition of the contents of collected samples will be determined using methods recommended by Beck (1952), Julander (1952), and Martin et al. (1946). FOOD PREFERENCE Dean E. Medin Findings: Fifty-six stomach samples have been taken from deer collected at elevations ranging from 5,300 to 10,700 feet. Collection locations were chosen to correspond with seasonal use areas (Table 1). Each sample (approximately one quart) has been sorted into component species or similar plant parts (leaves, stems, fruits) and await determination of botanical composition. Results are unavailable for reporting at this date. As an aid in estimation and interpretation of range-plant preference, sample plots are being established on each study area (lower-winter, middle-winter, upper-winter, transitional, and summer ranges) to record plant composition, cover, annual production, and annual utilization (as described under Work Plan 3, Job No.3). Eventual preference ratings will be estimated using data from stomach analyses and range-environment evaluations. Literature Beck, J. R. 1952. 398-399. A suggested Cited food rank index. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 16: Julander, Odell. 1952. Forage habits of mule deer during late fall as measured by stomach contents analyses. Intermountain Forest and Range Expt. Sta., Res. Note No.2, 5 pp. (mim~o). Martin, A. C., R. H. Gensch, and C. p. Brown. 1946. Alternative methods in upland game-bird food analysis. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 10:8-12. Prepared Date Approved by __~D~e~a~n~E~.~M_e~d~in~_ January, 1964 ----------------------------- by Wayne W. Sandfort Chief, Game Research �-173Table 1. -- Date, elevation, seasonal range, sex, and age from which deer stomach samples were collected, Poudre Canyon, Colorado, 1962. Stomach Sample No. 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 06 44 45 46 47 07 48 49 50 51 52 53 08 54 55 09 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 Date 1-9-62 1-19-62 1-23-62 1-30-62 2-6-62 2-13-62 . 2-20-62 2-27-62 3-8-62 3-20-62 3-22-62 3-29-62 4-1-62 4-5-62 4-12-62 4-20-62 4-26-62 4-27-62 5-2-62 5-9-62 5-16-62 5- 23-62 5-30-62 6-6-62 6-10-62 6-13-62 6-20-62 6-23-62 6-27-62 7-9-62 7-16-62 7-23-62 7-30-62 8-6-62 8-13-62 8-20-62 8-27-62 9-5-62 9-11-62 9-18-62 9-27-62 10-4-62 10-10-62 Sex Male Female Female Female Female Female Female Male Male Female Female Male Female Male Female Female Female Male Female Male Female .Female Male Male Male Male Male Female Female Female Female Female Male Female Female Male Female Male Female Male Male Female Male Estimated.!./ Age (Year-Month) 1-7 3-7 9-7 2-7 1-8 4-8 4-8 3-8 1-9 4-9 2-9 0-9 O-lO 4-10 5-10 8-10 2-10 0-10 11-11 1-11 1-11 0-11 0-11 1-;0 1-0 2-0 2-0 2-0 5-0 2-1 1-1 3-1 5-1 2-2 1-2 1-2 2-2 7-3 3-3 1-3 1-3 2-4 1-4 Elevation (Ft.) Seasonal Range 6,700 6,800 7,700 8,000 ,6,500 7,500 6,900 7,100 8,000 6,200 6,300 7,400 6,100 7,300 6,000 7,800 7,500 5,300 7,800 7,800 8,400 7,400 7,500 9,100 7,400 8,500 9,200 8,500 10,200 10,100 10,500 10,000 8,500 10,700 8,700 10,000 10,100 9,400 9,600 9,700 8,400 7,700 9,000 Middle winter Middle winter Upper winter Upper winter Lower winter Upper winter Middle winter Middle winter Upper winter Lower winter Lower winter Upper winter Lower winter Middle winter Lower winter Upper winter Middle winter Lower winter Middle winter Upper winter Upper winter Middle winter Upper winter Transitional Upper winter Transitional Transitional Transitional Summer Summer Summer Summer Summer Summer Summer Summer Summer Sunnner Summer Summer Transitional Upper winter Transitional 11 A June birth date is arbitrarily assumed for tabulation purposes. �-174Table 1. -- (Continued) St omach : Sample No. Date Sex 010 011 71 72 012 013 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 10-10-62 10-11-62 10-18-62 10-23-62 10-30-62 11-10-62 11-15-62 11-21-62 11-28-62 12-5-62 12-12-62 12-19-62 12-26-62 Male Female Female Female Female Female Female Male Female Male Female Male Female Estimated Age (Year-Month) 0-4 0-4 0-4 3-4 1-4 0-5 9-5 2-5 9-5 0-6 4-6 4-6 9-6 Elevation (Ft .) SeasonaJ. Range 5,800 5,600 5,~00 6,700 ·7,600 5,500 6,900 5,600 7,700 6,400 8,500 5,700 7,800 Lower winter Lower winter Lower winter Middle winter Upper winter Lower winter Middle winter Lower winter Middle winter Lower winter Upper winter Lower winter Upper winter �.january, 1964 -175JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH SEGMENT PROJECT State of COLORADO "--~~~~--------An Ecological Investigation of the Pro ject No. :_--.:.W_-.=.l..:.; 05=--~R:.:..-_~3=-__ Cache la Poudre Deer Herd, Colorado Work Plan: Job No. : 4 ------~------------.;:;1 Period Covered: Personnel: Physiological January, Population 1962 to December, Allen E. Anderson and Studies Density and Structure 1962. Dean E. Medin Abstract: The density of mule deer pellet groups was estimated on winter range study areas by a systematic sample of 960, permanent, 100 square foot, circular plots. A total of 4,448 deer pellet groups were either marked with paint, or removed, and the mean number of total pellet groups per plot were: Hewlett Gulch, 5.89; Kelly Flats, 5.09; and Sevenmile Creek, 2.87. On 5 broad, physiognomically similar vegetative types delineated on the study areas (timber, juniper-browse, browse, riparian, and meadow), pellet group plot means ranged from 0.51 (meadow) to 10.09 (juniper-browse). Both extremes were from the Hewlett Gulch study area. "In general, the highest plot means were found on the browse and timber types and mean plot values from the timber type on Hewlett Gulch exceeded those from the browse type on Sevenmile Creek. Mule deer herd structure (buck, doe, fawn, and unclassified) was sampled on the winter ranges by 2 observers walking 10 routes and about 180 miles during each of 2 post-hunting season periods; November 29December 18, 1962 and January 28-February 16, 1963. There were 1,125 deer recorded during the first period and 1,665 during the second with unclassified deer comprising 17.4 and 16.5 percent of the total, respectively. These data are referred,to as summary method 1 and from these are extracted all classified solitary deer and only deer from those groups in which all deer were classified. The latter is referred to as summary method 2. Buck:doe:fawn ratios and percentages of the total sample comprised of bucks, does and fawns, by method 2 were 37:100:79 and 17.1, 43.3, 36.6 (first period) and 24:100:70 and 12.2, 51.5, 36.3 (second period). Fawn:doe ratios adjusted for an estimate of nonbreeders in the doe popUlation were 117:100, 96:100, 102:100, and 100:100 during October, 1961, January, 1961, December, 1962, and February, 1963, respectively. The between period 1962-63 buck:doe ratios were significantly wider (P = .05) during February, 1963, and while fawn:doe ratios were also wider at this time, the difference was not �-176- significant. In the February, 1963, sample, fawn:doe ratios tended to narrow with decreasing elevation but these differences were not significant. There were no significant between-year differences (1961-62 __ 1962-63) in either buck:doe or fawn:doe ratios. Recommendations: The field work should be continued as outlined herein. However, there is a definite need for a more satisfactory analytical and interpretative approach to the data presented. These data and similar data to be collected in the future should be analyzed by a mathematical statistician interested in formulating statistical theory or in applying existing theory to problems of this type. Acknowledgements: We would like to thank Dr. Elmer Remmenga, Department of Mathematics, C.S.U., Fort Collins, for reviewing the statistical methods employed herein. Brent Baker, Ken E. Nicolls, and William F. Wallace capably assisted in the pellet-group counts. Objectives: (1) Estimate population density on each of 5 study locations believed to be representative of the lower winter, upper winter, transitional, and summer ranges of the herd to: (a) relate density to changing environmental conditions (Work Plan 3), and (b) elucidate density-elevational relationships, particularly between years. (2) Estimate sex and age structure (composition) of the population to provide basic information on herd dynamics. Techniques Used: Estimates of population density During the late summer and fall of 1962, a systematic sample of permanent, pellet group plots was established on the Hewlett Gulch, Kelly Flats, and Sevenmile Creek study areas. On each area, parallel northsouth transects consisting of 100 square foot, circular plots with their centers marked with numbered, angle-iron stakes at 2-chain (132 feet) intervals were established at approximate 8-chain intervals with a steel tape, and compass. The approximate initial point of each transect and the plot locations were first plotted on large-scale aerial photos. The beginning of each transect was marked with a steel fence post. I �-177The area of each plot was defined by a light chain of 5.64 feet radius revolving about a metal rod fastened to the plot stake. Plot radius was the distance along the ground surface, no compensation being made for slope. Each plot was searched twice (clockwise and counterclockwise) by a 2-man crew. The crew exchanged position (inner and outer) when the search direction changed. Deer pellet groups were counted and either sprayed with paint or completely removed on each plot. Paint sprayers included both tree-marking guns of one-quart capacity, or one-quart pump oil cans. Various paints were used LncLud Lnge tree-marking, implement, and barn of red, yellow, and orange colors thinned with either paint thinner or gasoline. A deer pellet group was considered to be 5 or more fecal pellets of the same general size, shape, and appearance. Fecal pellets strewn across the plot were counted as a group if about one-half of the total scattered-out distance fell within the plot. "New" pellet groups were recorded separately on the basis of the relatively mOist, shiny, and uncracked exterior of the individual pellets. Deer pellet groups on the plot periphery were counted if about one-half of the total group area was bisected by the end of the radius chain. Estimates of herd structure Herd structure or composition as used here is the relative proportion of males, females, and fawns of unknown sex sampled on the winter range. These data were first obtained, primarily by the writer, during the winter of 1961-62 as described by Anderson (1962:227-235). Route modifications suggested therein were incorporated in the two samples reported on here; November 29-December 8, 1962 and January 28-February 16, 1963. The present routes are shown in Figure 1. These 10 routes sampled during each of the two periods are estimated to average about 9 miles in length. The individual observer thus walked about 180 miles in 20-man-days. A total walking effort of about 360 miles in 40-mandays was expended to provide.the 1962-63 herd structure sample. The resultant data were summarized by two methods: Summary method 1 is simply a record of all deer seen. Summary method 2 consists of extracting from method 1 data, all classified deer including solitary deer and only those from groups in which all deer were classified. In addition, the effects of the annual fluctuation in net productivity indices (percent of female yearlings comprising the adult females) on the fawn:doe ratios are considered by computing an estimate of the number of reproductively capable females from the number of females counted. This was done by subtracting the percent of female' yearlings (16-18 months old) in the adult doe kill sample as obtained at the checl station in 1961 (24.0 percent) and 1962 (22.4 percent) (Anderson. 1963) from the number of does observed as summarized by method 2. �-178- The following data were analyzed by the chi square test for independence using a 2 x 2 contingency table at the 5 percent level of significance; all between-year and between sampling period comparisons of the buck: doe and fawn:doe ratios. A 1 x 3 contingency table was used to compare the January, 1963, fawn:doe ratios sampled on the upper, middle, and lower winter range. The unpaired-unequal "t" test (P==.05)was used to compare mean group size between the November-December, 1962, and JanuaryFebruary, 1963, samples. Statistical methods follow Croxton and Cowden (1955.) Results: Estimates of population density Pertinent aspects of each of the 3 winter range study areas and the pellet groups counted on each are shown in Table 1. Both old and "new" pellet groups appear to decrease with increasing elevation. The density and distribution of old pellet groups by vegetative physiognomy on each of the 3 study areas are given in Table 2. On all 3 areas, maximum pellet group densities were counted on the browse and timber types. The maximum variability among plot means was found at Hewlett Gulch and plot means in the Hewlett Gulch timber type exceeded those in the browse type at Sevenmile CreeR. Estimates of herd structure Herd structure samples, bucks: fawns per 100 does, and mean group size are given by 2 periods, individual route, and two summary methods in Tables 3 and 4. Sample sizes increased substantially and group size significantly during the January-February period. Including both periods, there were 2,890 deer available for analysis by method 1 and 1,905 by method 2. Buck:doe ratios-Method 2 These widened considerably between November-December, 1962, and JanuaryFebruary, 1963, and this change was highly significant. When the 1961-62 and 1962-63 ratios were compared, however, there was no significant difference. Fawn:doe ratios-Method 2 These ratios also widened considerably between November-December, 1962, and January-February, 1963, but the change was not significant. Neither was there a significant difference between the 1961-62 and 1962-63 ratios. �-179- Buck: doe: fawn ratios from Method 1 and Method 2 compared: These ratios fro~ both methods were almost identical during both sampling periods with greater discrepancy in the buck:doe ratios from the first period. Since method 2 data are included in that from method 1, the samples are not independent and therefore the chi-square value would be significant. (Dixon and Massey, 1957). It is of interest, however, that in the 1961-62 data which consisted of much smaller sample sizes there was more discrepancy between Method 1 and Method 2 ratios. Buck:doe ratios were not tested in either year. Percentage composition-methods land 2: Pursual of Tables 3 and 4 reveal that even though buck: doe: fawn ratios were similar by methods 1 and 2 there is a marked discrepancy in the buck-doe-fawn percentages between methods with method 2 indicating much higher values. Moreover, this discrepancy is greatest in the doe and fawn category. This same teIldency was noted in the 1961-62 samples. Fawn:doe ratio-elevational relationship: It appears from Table 4, that there may be a tendency for d09:fawn ratios to narrow somewhat with decreasing elevation. Data from 3 routes with a difference in mean elevation of about 1,000 feet are-listed in Table 5. The ratio differences exhibit considerable magnitude but are not significant.· Doe:Fawn ratios, less non-producers, 1961-62-63: Perhaps the most important estimate of fawn:doe ratios are the 4 samples computed from method 2 on the basis of a crude estimate of the percentage of non-breeding age or non-fawn producers among the adult females observed in the field (Table 6). It is assumed that these differences are not significant because the method 2 fawn:doe ratios between 1961-62 and 1962-63 were not significantly different and the percentages of female yearlings in the 1961-62 kill samples are nearly identical. Discussion: Estimates of population density The interpretation of the pellet group data must be tempered by the following factors. Each area had different crews and it is known, on the basis of the proportion of missed groups found on subsequent readings to total groups, that the Sevenmile Creek plots were searched less diligently than on the other study areas. Also, only one crew {Hewlett �-180- Gulch) systematically sifted the duff,and needle litter in searching for old groups. We believe, however, that the general relationships in between-vegetative type and between-area comparisons of pellet group densities are valid but their magnitude is probably exaggerated in Tables 1 and 2. Winter range deer population density estimates will be presented when the data from the 1963 spring and fall pellet group plot counts are available. It is suggested that the pellet group densities presented are conservative because: 1) a few groups are apparently always missed and 2) I have observed pellet group removal on steep slopes by both heavy rainfall and animal disturbance. Estimates of herd structure Some error in field classification must be assumed since a few fawns may be out of sight or classed as does because of precocious development. Also, by the time the Jan~ary-February sample was taken, a few bucks had lost one or more antlers. This error, at least on a summ~ route basis, is not believed serious enough to invalidate general conclusions. Also, as Dasmann and Taber (1956 a-b) have pointed out, buck: doe classifications during the b ree'd Ing season are strongly affected by the relative lack of variness in bucks. The significant difference in buck:doe ratios previously noted is almost certainly the results of this phenomena. Group size data are probably somewhat affected by the observer, since adjacent groups sometimes merge on the observers' approach. They ,probably reflect, however, a general tendency for deer to occur in progressively higher densities during the winter period. Also, a "group" is sometImes difficult to delineate when deer population densities are high on limited areas. The large differences in fawn: doe fawns ratios at the 3 e1evationa1 levels may be of ecological importance though I recognize that the probability of these differences being due to chance alone is very great. Each level represents gross ecological differences: (1) browse type-sagebrush, bitterbrush, mountain mohogany; (2) hunting mortality-low, moderate, and high; and (3) cover characteristics-high, moderate, and low proportions of timber ground cover. If similar differences continue in future samples, our hypothesis will be strengthened. It will be noted again, as previously discusses, that Method 2 data is believed to be the most valid because of the large possibility of cumulative bias (Anderson, 1962). In an effort to learn how our sample of herd structure compares with others, a brief review of the available literature was cnnducted. Robinette (1956:418) has summarized 1934-50 data(a11 obtained from late �-181- November through early January 'and including yearlings) based on 174,000 deer from 9 western states. On a percentage basis, this sample consisted of 14.2 bucks, 47.4 does, and 38.4 fawns and an 81:100 fawn:doe ratio. The same author cites data from the Piceance-White river herd of western Colorado where a January, 1950, sample indicated a fawn:doe ratio of 110: 100 (p. 420) with 13.1 percent bucks, 41.6 percent does, and 45.3 percent fawns (p. 425). There are many variables involved in the foregoing: ' different environments, various degrees of competence among personnel, and various techniques that make it very difficult to assess or interpret these data in relation to that from the Poudre. It appears that the Cache 1a Poudre mule deer herd structure sample resembles others but has not approached the maximum recorded fawn:doe ratios. Another interpretative difficulty is that unless an index to net productivity (percent of female yearlings in the adult doe population) is available, a fawn:doe ratio may be misleading as an estimate of the fawn crop. Thus, a very high net productivity adds a large number of nonbreeders to the adult doe population counted in the field. Insofar, as the breeding age component is concerned, the average fawn per doe may actually increase, yet because of the proportionally large number of non-breeders among the does counted the fawn:doe ratio could indicate a declining fawn crop. It is also difficult to assess the importance of annual fluctuations in fawn:doe ratios to the dynamics of the Poudreherd. How much fluctuation is normal variability, and how much constitutes an important variable? What type of statistical analysis is best suited to these kind of data? Insofar as I can find, there are no satisfactory answers to these questions in the available literature. �-182- Literature Cited Anderson, Allen E. 1962. Population density and structure. WP5-Jl Completion Report, pp. 227-235 in W-105-R-2 Quarterly Report, 1962, Part 2. Colorado Game and Fish Dept. Denver. pp 163-339 (processed). Anderson, Allen E. 1963. Harvest analysis. WP5-J3 Completion Report. Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Dept., Denver. Croxton, Frederick E. and Dudley J. Cowden. 1955. Applied general statistics. 2nd Ed. Prentice-Hall, Inc., Englewood Cliffs, N. J. 843 pp. Dasmann, Raymond F. and Richard D. Taber (a) 1956. Behavior of Columbian black-tailed deer in reference to population ecology. J. Mamm. 37(.2):143-164. -- (b) 1956. Determining structure in Columbian black-tailed deer populations. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 21(1): 62-65. ( " Dixon, W. J. and F. J. Massey. 1957. Introduction to statistical analysis. 2nd Ed. McGraw-Hill Book Co. Inc., New York and London, 488 pp. Robinette, W. Leslie. 1956.' Productivity-the annual crop of mule deer. pp 415-429 in The Deer of North America. W. p. Taylor, Ed. The Stackpole Co., Harrisburg, Pa. and The Wildlife Mgmt. Institute, Wash., D. C. 669 PP. Prepared by: AllenE. Anderson Date: ~J=an~u=a~ry~,~1~9~64~ _ Approved by Wayne W. Sandfort Chief, Game Research �-183- Table 1. E1evationa1 Range and Si~e of Three Winter Range Study Areas and the Number of Deer Pellet Groups Sampled On Each During the Late Summer and Fall, 1962. Hewlett Gulch Study Areas Kelly Flats E1evationa1 Range (ft) 5,800-7,100 Total Surface Acres 490.1 Total Pellet Groups Plots (100 sq.ft.) 366 Total Old Pellet Groups 210~ Mean No. Old Groups Per Plot 5.75 Total New Groups* aa Mean No. New Groups Per Plot 0.077 Mean Total Groups Per Plot 5.83 6,600-7.760 509.2 299 1502 5.02 19 0.064 5.09 Values * Sevenmile Creek 7,440-8,760 495.0 295 842 2.87 4 0.014 2.87 Estimated on the basis of appearance to have been deposited during May, June, July, August, 1962. �Table 2. -- Density and distribution of deer pellet groups by vegetative physiogonomy on three winter range study areas; summer-fall, 1962. ~tu<iy Areas Physiognomic T - - - No. Plots x-+ - -- SD s - Ke11v Fl --(Middle) Gulch Hewl (Lower) 1-'- No. C.V •(%) Er eq ,* . Plots x+ SD - C.V •(%) Freq. * No. Plots - x+ - Ole Creek (Upper) SD C. v. (%) Er e q , * Timber 93 4.40 2.66 60.5 88.2 112 3.51 2.64 75.2 80.4 84 2.04 2.30 112.7 61.9 Juniper-Browse 58 10.09 7.22 71.7 93.1 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Browse 160 6.70 5.77 86.3 90.6 179 6.07 4.39 72.2 94.4 192 3.45 2.91 84.3 79.2 I ~ Riparian 6 2.17 2.79 28.6 66.7 -- -- -- -- -- 19 0.74 1.45 Meadow 49 0.51 0.84 164,7 36.7 8 2.88 2.29 79.5 100.0 -- -- TOTAL 366 5.75 5.69 99.1 82.8 299 5.02 3.89 77 .5 89.3 295 2.87 2.80 + Mean number of old groups per 100 sq. ft. circular plot. deposited during the late spring and summer of 1962. * Percent of total plots with old pellet groups. f-' -- I 195.9 26.3 -- -- 97.6 70.8 Does not include groups judged to have been �Table 3. -- Summary of herd structure samples which include all deer recorded on 10 all-day, walking routes, Nov.-Dec., 1962 and Jan.-Feb., 1963. Group Size Ratios Per Numbers 100 Does (SD) Fawn x Unc1. Buck Total Does Fawns Bucks Date Route and No. - 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7• 8. 9. 10. 17 1 1 28 42 14 13 10 22 21 22 3 13 54 101 40 61 38 54 40 15 2 10 49 81 28 49 21 35 44 20 1 6 27 68 6 8 10 28 22 74 7 30 158 292 88 131 79 139 127 77 33 77 51 42 35 21 26 41 53 68 67 77 91 80 70 80 55 65 110 2.7 1.8 3.8 3.3 3.8 2.8 3.8 3.6 3.4 3.4 (1.8) (0.96) (3.8) (3.1) (3.6) (3.1) (3.1) (2.9) (2.9) (2.2) Total 169 426 334 196 1,125 40 78 3.4 (3.0) Percent of Total 15.0 37.9 29.7 17.4 Washout G. 7-Mile Bennett Ck. Kelly Flats Elkhorn Hewlett G. W. Hewlett G. E. Young's Gulch Livermore Mtn Seaman Res. E. 11-29-62 11-30-62 12-3-62 12-4-62 12-7-62 12-10-62 12-11-62 12-15-62 12-17 -62 12-18-62 I I-' 100.0 co Vl I 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 16 21 0 35 35 16 0 2 37 19 71 38 11 105 126 115 32 33 118 68 43 25 5 78 91 66 24 29 80 51 3 12 4 43 57 27 18 16 34 61 133 96 20 261 309 224 74 80 269 199 23 55 0 33 28 14 0 60 31 28 61 66 45 74 72 57 75 88 68 75 4.9 4.6 2.9 4.8 5.5 5.6 4.4 4.2 5.8 5.5 (3.8) (3.8) (1.4) (3.7) (5.2) (4.6) (2.8) (3.2) (5.3) (3.8) Total 181 717 492 275 1,665 25 69 5.2 (4.3) Percent of Total 10.9 43.0 29.6 16.5 Washout Gulch 7:-Mile Bennett Ck Kelly Flats Elkhorn E. Hewlett G. W. Hewlett G. E. Young's Gulch Livermore Mtn Seaman Res. E. 1-28-63 1-29-63 1-31-63 2-4-63 2-5-63 2-11-63 2-14-63 2-7-63 2-12-63 2-16-63 . 100.0 �Table 4. -- Summary of herd structure samples which include all classified solitary deer and only deer from groups in which all deer were classified on 10 all-day walking routes; Nov.Dec., 1962 and Jan.-Feb., 1963. Route and No. Date Bucks Numbers Does Washout G. 7-Mile Bennett Ck Kelly Flats Elkhorn E. Hewlett G. W. Hewlett G. E. 11-29-62 11- 30-62 12-3-62 12-4-62 12-7 -62 12-10-62 12-11-62 10 1 1 20 32 14 12 15 3 12 43 92 38 56 9 2 7 40 76 25 44 34 6 20 103 200 77 112 Young's G. Livermore Mtn 12-15-62 12-17 -62 12-18-62 8 20 20 30 50 34 19 33 40 Total 138 373 Percent of Total 17.1 Seaman Res. E. Fawns Total Ratios Per 100 Does Buck Fawn Group Size (SD) x -- 60 67 58 93 83 66 19 63 66 118 2.0 2.0 4.0 2.9 3.9 2.9 57 103 94 67 33 8 47 35 37 21 27 40 59 3.6 3.2 3.3 3.1 (1.2) (1.0) (4.6) (2.3) (3.5) (3.3) (3.2) (2.7) (3.3) (1.9) 295 806 37 79 3.2 (2.7) 46.3 36.6 100.0 16 16 0 26 21 13 0 2 24 16 69 33 11 75 90 84 22 33 94 55 41 22 5 59 66 52 17 29 67 41 126 71 16 160 177 149 39 64 185 112 23 48 0 35 23 15 0 61 26 29 , 59 67 45 79 73 62 77 88 71 75 5.0 4.7 3.2 4.6 4.4 4.9 4.9 4.6 5.4 4.7 134 566 399 1,099 24 70 4.8 I I-' co 0'\ I Washout G. 7 -Mile Bennett Ck. Kelly Flats Elkhorn E. Hewlett G. W. Hewlett G. E. Young's G. Livermore Mtn. Seaman Res. E. 1-28-63 1-29-63 1-31-63 2-4-63 2-5-63 2-11-63 2-14-63 2-·7-63 2-12-63 2-16-63 Total Percent of Total 12.2 51.5 36.3 100.0 - (3.9) (4.3) (1.5) (2.7) (3.7) (2.9) (3.5) (3.5) (3.8) (3.8) (3.7) �-187Table 5. -- The relationship between elevation and anol fawn: doe ratios during January, 1963. Total Ratio Fawns Per 100 Does 69 110 59 66 90 156 73 41 55 96 75 Elevation+ (Ft.) Fawn Numbers Doe Washout G. 8,100 41 Elkhorn E. 7,100 Seaman E. 6,100 Route -1+ + Approximate midpoint of extremes sampled on each route. -1+ Based on summary method 2 (Table 4). Table 6,.-- Summary of fawn:doe ratios computed from an estimate of fawn producers in the number of does observed, 1961-62-63.+ Period Fawns/lOa Does ++ Fawn Same1e Size Doe Total Oct. 1961 117 120 103 223 .Jan. 1961 96 75 78 153 Nov. -Dec . 1962 102 295 289 584 Jan.-Feb. 1963 100 399 399 798 + Based on the percent (24, 1961) (22.4, 1962) of yearling does (non-producers) in the adult doe kill obtained at the check during the Oct.-Nov. 1961-62 big game seasons (Anderson 1962:1963). -1+ Based on summary method 2 (Table 4) and (Anderson 1962: 233) . �I ~ co I 50' rv IU I; 40' zo' 105'30' 10' ,., TION i'- KS1. 50 T9N 11M 140 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~lt.1r1~~~~T8N SUB-UNITS OF B. .\ •• ) •• i 1 71" ~. -::k ';."t it':"" "~' i J£i.~ pd~ .,. .,' II :47 9 .r GAME MANAGEMENT UNIT I I 1\ \:1\ '1'. '-..,;~Jf~ I ~T I ~r:rp[.'¥1("~ q:COLORADO \: _. 'l" ii" i, ee 19 DEPT. OF GAME AND FISH ..' SIXTH PRINCIPAL MERIDIAN 40' f----130' 1 t 0 Sc¥c ~14iles ITeN Polyconic projKi'ion ~th American detum Figure 1. Approximate location (dashed line) of 10, all-day, walking routes used to sample mule deer herd structure. �-189- JOB COMPLETION RESEARCR State of PROJECT REPORT SEGMENT ------~~~~~-----------COLORADO Project NO.1 W-105-R-3 An Ecological Investigation of the Cache la Poudre Deer Herd, Colorado Work Plan: 5 Physiological Job No.: ~l Period Covered: Personnel: _ January, I Physical 1962 through December, Allen E. Anderson 'Studies Characteristics 1962. and Dean E~ Medin Acknowledgements: We would like to thank all those who assisted us in the field and lab.; especially Frank Abelard, Brent Baker, Tom Hakonson, Ken E. Nicolls, William F. Wallace, and John Wolloch. Mrs. Vonnie Campbell, Mrs. Florence Fields, Miss Roberta Hartman, and Mrs. Nancy Weeks analyzed the whole blood and a portion of the serum blood. Mrs. Campbell and Mrs. Weeks, employed under AEC contract AT(11-1)-89, also weighed, measured, and determined volumes on most of the glands and organs. All of the gross morphological work was done in the laboratory of the Colorado Cooperative Wildlife Research Unit, Colorado State University, Fort Collins. Wildlife Conservation officers Sigfrid S. Palm and Gurney I. Crawford were especially helpful in providing carcasses of deer other than the regular collection. Abstract: Over 8,000 measurements of selected physical characteristics of 19 male and 29 female mule deer are tabulated chronologically. Regular collections were made at approximate weekly intervals throughout 1962. Some data from eight additional deer are also presented. Included are external body measurements, carcass weights and density, hide weights, pelage sample weights; measurements, weights, and volumes of discrete organs and endocrine glands, values for 18 blood components, liver carotene and vitamin A content, adrenal ascorbic acid, indices of physical condition and bone structure, and measurements of teeth and mandibles. Since sample sizes are still inadequate by sex, age class, and season no analyses or interpretations are attempted. Blood values obtained during 1961 and 1962 are described statistically and discussed in relation to those appearing in the literature. Recommendations: This job should be continued as previously outlined. Tabulated data from the 79 deer collected during 1961-62, include about 15,000 values and should be punched on IBM cards. Plans should be initiated for the various types of statistical analyses appropriate to these data. Finally, if time permits, some descriptive statistics should be computed for organs and glands. �-190Techniques Used% The techniques were described in detail in the 1961 report (Anderson, 1962) and because of their length will not be repeated here. As recommended in the 1961. Work Plan 5, Job 1 Completion Report; blood serum and tissue analyses were performed by a commercial laboratory as shown in Table 1. Their work began with deer number 47. During 1962, 19 males and 29 female mule deer (collection numbe~32-79 inclusive) were taken as part of the regular collection. An additional three males and five females were obtained from other sources, principally highway mortality. On the latter sample, such data were collected as the circumstances and condition of the carcass permitted. The collection numbers of deer taken in addition to the regular collection are prefixed with a "0". In general, regular collections were made above 8,500 feet elevation (summer range) from June to mid-October and below this elevation (winter range) during the other months. Most of the deer were shot between 5rOO A.M. and 9:00 A.M. and usually in the lower neck or thoracic-spinal area. Death occurred almost immediately in most instances. The approxtma te location of kill for each of the 48 deer collected in 1962 are shown in Figure 1. Objectives, Measure relevant physiological and morphological characteristics of deer collected seasonally so that: (a) the response of the herd to its environment can be more adequately interpreted, (b) establish "physiological norms," and (c) provide basic morphological data as related to sex and age class. Findings: The raw data from over 8,000 measurements of selected physical characteristics of 19 males and 29 female and several "0" series deer are tabulated chronologically in Tables 2-13. A statistical description of four blood elements obtained during 1961-62 is presented in Table 14. The initial' experimental difficulties involved in several current laboratory techniques; -'specificgravity of the eviscerated carcass, pelage color and weights and blood vitamin A, carotene, protein, calcium, and adrenal ascorbic acid, and mentioned in the 1961 report were f~lly overcome by deer number 54. In the case of specific gravity of the eviscerated carcass and subsequent estimation of per cent body fat; apparently reliable results have been obtained since the skinned, eviscerated, carcass has been thoroughly slashed to eliminate gases trapped in the tissue. The density of mule deer fat (subcutaneous, bone marrow and internal) has been determined and the following working equation derived for estimating per cent body fat of the skinned, eviscerated, mule deer carcass.!! % Fat = 100 6.0598 Specific Gravity - 5.5089 Body fat values for 1962 were estimated by this method to range from 10.2 to 27.3 in males and from 7.6 to 17.6 in females (Tables 10; 11). A summary Whicker, Floyd W. 1963. Density studies of mule deer body fat. u Unpublished manuscript, 8 pp. (processed). �50' 1"\ 40' 10' 2.0' 105' 30' 10 YV ~'r T~N ~g\l T9N f=lb] 140 ~T8N I f-' \0 f-' I MANAGEMENT UNIT 19 DEPT. OF GAME AND FISH SIXTH 1 t 0 PRINCIPAL .k~e MERIDIAN ~ .,. pMiloS t---~30' LEGEND ~ Mcncqement Unit ~Boundory Approximote Transitional IT6N Zone Bot ween Summer And Wintc;r Ram.1os Polyconic projedion North Amor'iceo detum Figure l.--Approximate locations of 48 mule deer collected Hatched numbers indicate a male animal. in 1962. 40' �Table 1.--Out1ine of Procedures Used in Blood Analyses and Chemical Determinations+ Item Blood: erythocyte count leukocyte count differential leucocyte count packed cell volume vitamin A hematocytometer hematocytometer thin smear slides centrifuge - graphic reader colorimetric Reference phosphorous potassium. -protein sodium colorimetric flame photometry colorimetric flame photometry magnesium. titrimetric EDTA calcium. titrimetric EDTA (Hepler, 1958) (Hepler, 1958) (Hepler,. 1958) none (Baird Assoc., n.d.) modified from (Kitson and Mallon, 1944) (Baird Assoc., n.d.) (Gorne11, et a1., 1949) (Baird Assoc.:--n.d.) modified from (4ewis and Melnick, 1960) mod ified from (Lewis and Me1nick:o 1960) colorimetric colorimetric colorimetric ether extraction, gravimetric ~ and Evelyn, 1938) (Dann and Evelyn, 1938) (Maicke1, 1960) (Assn. Agric. Chem., 1960) Liver vitamin A Liver carotene Adrenal ascorbic acid Bone marrow fat and moisture content + Procedure Some blood counts were performed in the laboratory of the Coop. Wildlife Res. Unit. The rest were done in the laboratories of the College of Veterinary Medicine, Colorado State University, Fort Collins~ Other analyses are performed by the Industrial Laboratories, Denver, Colorado. Their procedures may differ somewhat from this outline. ? 'r8 I �-193Table 2.--Weights (kg) and External Body Measurements (em) of 20 Male Deer--1962 Collection No. Date-Age-Measurements Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Carcass Wt - Bled (kg) Carcass Wt - Eviscerated (kg) Body Length~ tail Length Head Length Interorbital Width Girth Shoulder Height Neck Circumference (a) Neck Circumference (b) Ear Length (Left) Ear Length (Right) Hind Foot Length (Left) Hind Foot Length (Right) Hoof Length (Front Left) Hoof Length (Front Right) Hoof Length (Rear Left) Hoof Length (Rear Right) Meta-gland Length (Left) Meta-gland Length (Right) Meta-gland Width (Left) Meta-gland Width (Right) Tarsal Gland Width (Left) Tarsal Gland Width (Right) Scrotum Length Scrotum Width Scrotum Height Prepuce Length Antler Beam Dia. (Left) Beam Dia. (Right) Beam Length (Left) Beam Length (Right) Point No. (Left) Point No. (Right) Antler Inside Spread Antler Tip-to-Tip Spread Antler Wt Left (g) Wt Right (g) .*Skin covered pedicel ~Does not include tail length 32 39 40 43 44 49 52 1-9 1-7 44.4 31.6 132.0 16.0 27.5 11.0 80.0 87.0 30.0 40.0 21.0 21.0 46.0 45.8 6.8 6.7 6.3 6.6 14.0 15.0 4.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 6.0 3.5 4.5 12.0 1.5 1.5 15.5 18.0 1 1 17.0 16.0 31.0 38.0 2-27 3-8 64.6 46.4 150.0 21.0 32.2 13.4 90.0 97.0 42.0 52.0 21.0 21.0 49.9 49.8 7.1 7.1 6.4 6.9 14.0 15.0 4.5 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.5 6.0 5.0 10.0 2.7 2.7 40.0 43.0 3 2 34.0 31.5 292.0 288.0 3-8 1-9 43.1 32.2 126.0 17 .0 28.1 11.7 81.0 84.0 31.0 42.0 19.0 19.0 45 •. 5 44.7 6.0 6.0 5.9 5.9 15.0 15.0 5.0 5.0 5•. 0 7.0 5.0 3.5 5.0 10.0 3-29 0-10 3'4.9 24.9 118.0 17 .0 25.1 10.8 71.0 79.0 28.0 37.0 19.0 19.0 44.0 43.9 6.2 6.1 6.0 5.9 13.0 12.5 4.5 5.0 4.5 4.0 4.0 4.0 2.5 9.0 4-5 4-10 80.2 58.9 167.0 18.0 34.0 14.3 105.0 104.0 40.0 61.0 21.5 21.5 50.9 .50.9 7.5 7.2 6.8 6.7 15.5 15.5 4.0 4.0 5.5 5.0 5.5 6.5 2.5 13.0 5-9 1-11 50.4 38.2 139.0 17.0 28.3 12.7 84.0 94.0 34.0 45.0 19.5 19.7 46.3 45.5 6.9 6.9 6.8 6.8 14.5 14.5 4.5 5.0 6.0 5.5 3.5 5.0 4.0 11.0 2.6 2.6 2.5 3.0 5-30 0-11 39.4 28.8 127.0 19.0 25.9 11.9 78.0 81.0 27.0 33.0 20.0 20.0 44.4 44.5 6.5 6.6 6.3 6.3 12.0 12.5 5.5 5.5 4.0 4.0 5.5 4.0 2.5 11.0 1.86 1.89 5.5 6.5 1 1 7.0 7.0 17.0 19.0 2.5* 2.5* 1 6.5 6.5 8.0 8.0 1 7.5 7.5 19.0 21.0 �-194Table 2.--Weights (kg) and External Body Measurements (em) of 20 Male Deer--1962 Date-Age-Measurements Antler Brow Tine Length (Left) Brow Tine Length (Right) Carcass Wt - Skinned (kg) Ride Wt (kg) Pelage Sample Wt (g) Pelage Color Dorsal Rostrum Interorbital Occipital Brisket Outer Thigh Umbilical (Anterior) Front Knees (continued) Collection No. 32 39 40 43 44 49 52 0.0 0.0 4 •. 0 1.5 42.2 3.6 29.5 2.7 22.6 2.3 53.5 5.4 35.0 3.2 9 •. 9 26.2 2.6 9.5 5YR3/2 5YR4/4 5YR7/2 lOYR7/2 10YR7/2 lOYR8/2 10YR7/B 10YR7/2 5YR6/4 5YR5/4 lOYR7/2 10YR7/2 lOYRB/2 10YR7/4 2B.O 3 •. 5 �-195- Table 2.--Weights (kg) and External Body Measurements (cm) 20 Male Deer--1962 (continued) Collection No. Date-Age-Measurements 53 08 54 55 60 63 65 6-6 Collection Date (Month-Day) 1-0 Estimated Age (Year-Month) 42.4 Carcass Wt - Bled (kg) 30.8 Carcass Wt - Eviscerated (kg) 129.0 Body Length 20•. 0 Tail Length 26.1 Head Length 11.4 Interorbital Width 77.0 Girth 87.0 Shoulder Height 27.0 Neck Circumference (a) 35.0 Neck Circumference (b) 20.5 Ear Length (Left) 20.5 Ear Length (Right) 44.1 Hind Foot Length (Left) 44.2 Hind Foot Length (Right) 6.5 Hoof Length (Front Left) 6.6 Hoof Length (Front Right) 6.3 Hoof Length (Rear Left) 6.4 Hoof Length (Rear Right) 14.5 Meta-gland Length (Left) 14.0 Meta-gland Length (Right) 4.5 Meta-gland Width (Left) ·4.0 Meta-gland Width (Right) 4.0 Tarsal Gland Width (Left) 3.5 Tarsal Gland Width (Right) 5.0 Scrotum Length 5.0 Scrotum Width 4.5 Scrotum Height 10.5 Prepuce Length 2.0 Antler Beam Dia. (Left) 2.1 Beam Dia. (Right) 7.0 Beam Length (Left) 8.5 Beam Length (Right) 1 Point No. (Left) 1 Point No. (Right) 12.5 Antler Inside Spread 12.5 Antler Tip-to-Tip Spread 33 Antler Wt Left (g) 36 Wt Right (g) Antler Brow Tine Length (Left) Antler Brow Tine Length (Right) 28.0 Carcass Wt - Skinned (kg) 6-10 1-0 6-13 2-0 66.0 48.9 148.0 17.0 29.9 12.8 87.0 87.0 34.0 47.0 22.0 22.0 47.8 47.7 6.6 6.6 6.4 6.3 16.0 17 .0 4.0 4.5 4.5 4.5 6.5 4.5 2.0 9.5 2.6 2.7 14.0 15.0 2 2 30.0 30.0 136.0 140.0 2.5 2.5 44.5 6-20 2-0 70.2 52.4 153.0 19.0 31.5 13.6 89.0 96.0 39.0 48.0 22.5 22.5 50.3 50.2 7.4 7.3 7.0 6.9 13.5 13.5 4.5 .5.0 4.5 5.0 6.0 5.5 '3.0 12.0 3.1 3.0 25.0 23.0 2 2 30.0 30.0 348.0 318.0 7~30 5-1 112.3 83.0 162.0 15.0 33.2 14.6 111.0 99.0 53.0 64.0 21.5 21.5 46.6 46.4 8.0 8.0 7.6 7.6 13.5 14.0 4.5 4.5 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 5.0 12.5 6.1 5.3 60.0 56.0 5 5 51.0 35.0 2160.0 2170.0 9.0 10.0 70.6 8-20 1-2 55.0 40.3 142.0 16.0 29.3 12.7 86.0 89.0 33.0 48.0 20.5 20.5 45.7 45.5 6.6 6.6 6.4 6.3 11.5 12.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 3.5 8.0 5.0 12.5 2.4 2.4 20.5 20.5 2 3 28.0 22.0 171.0 216.0 9-5 7-3 106.0 79.2 159.0 16.0 34.6 14.7 110.0 105.0 47.0 61.0 21.5 21.0 47.2 47.2 7.3 7.4 7.5 7.4 15.0 14.5 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.5 7.5 8.0 6.0 10.5 3.9 4.1 55.0 51.0 4 4 55.0 52.0 1630.0 1715.0 5.0 6.0 68.2 10.,0 8.0 1 1 47.8 36.6 �-196Table 2.--Weights (kg) and External Body Measurements (cm) 20 Male Deer--1962 Date-Age-Measurements Collection No. 53 Hide Wt (kg) Pelage Sample Wt (g) Pelage Color Dorsal Rostrum Interorbital Occipital Brisket· Outer Thigh Umbilical (Anterior) Front Knees (continued) OS 54 55 60 63 65 2.7 12.5 4.1 11.1 3.9 9.7 B.l S.S 3.3 6.7 7.7 14.3 5YB/1 10YR7/2 lOYR7/6 10YR7/S 10YR7/6 lOYR7/S 10YR8/4 lOYR8/4 SYB/2 SYR5/2 10YR5/4 10YR7/2 lOYR7/6 10YR8/2 lOYR8/4 SYRS/2 lOYR7/2 10YR7/4 5YR7/4 SYR6/S 10YR8/4 lOYR7/4 10YR7/2 10YR7/6 10YRS/4 lOYR7/6· 10YR7/6 10YR9/6 lOYR7/6 10YR7/2 10YR6/1 10YRS/2 lOYR7/4 10R8/1 lOYR8/4 10YRS/2 . 10YR3/2 10YR3/1 10YRS/2 lOYR6/2 10YR7/1 lOYR7/S �-197- Table 2._~eights (kg) and External Body Measurements (cm) of 20 Male Deer--1962 Collection No. Date-Age-Measurements Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Carcass Wt - Bled (kg) Carcass Wt - Eviscerated (kg) Body Length Tail Length Head Length Interorbital Width Girth Shoulder Height Neck Circumference (a) Neck Circumference (b) Ear Length (Left) Ear Length (Right) Hind Foot Length (Left) Hind Foot Length (Right) Hoof Length (Front Left) Hoof Length (Front Right) Hoof Length (Rear Left) Hoof Length (Rea! Right) Meta-gland Length (Left) Meta-gland Length (Right) Meta-gland Width (Left) Meta-gland Width (Right) Tarsal Gland Width (Left) Tarsal Gland Width (Right) Scrotum Length Scrotum Width Scrotum Height Prepuce Length Antler Beam Dia. (Left) Beam Dia. (Right) Beam Length (Left) Beam Length (Right) Point No. (Left) Point No. (Right) Antler Inside Spread Antler Tip-to-Tip Spread Antler Wt - Left (g) Wt - Right (g) Antler Brow Tine Length (Left) Brow Tine Length (Right) (continued) 67 68 70 74 76 78 9-18 1-3 61.8 45.0 143.5 11.5 29.4 12.7 88.0 91.0 38.0 53.0 21.5 21.5 45.0 45.2 6.7 6.6 6.3 6.4 11.5 11.5 3.5 3.5 5.0 4.5 5.5 5.0 3.5 12.5 2.00 2.10 23.0 17 .0 2 1 17 .0 14.0 63.0 45.0 9-27 1-3 47.4 34.2 131.0 18.0 26.6 11.4 84.0 94.0 31.0 39.0 21.0 21.0 45.9 45.8 10-10 ~-4 53.5 38.8 132.0 16.0 27.1 12.0 87.0 89.0 42.0 51.0 19.5 19.5 45.5 45.5 6.8 6.8 6.6 6.6 16.0 14.0 4.0 3.5 4.5 5.0 7.0 5.5 5.5 9.5 2.00 1.79 26.0 26.0 2 2 25.0 26.0 103.0 92.0 11-21 2-6 61.2 48.5 139.0 1.6.0 29.2 12.7 95.0 86.0 43.0 52.0 20.0 20.0 44.8 44.4 6.9 6.9 6.9 7.0 14.5 14.5 4.5 4.5 4.0 4.0 8.0 5.0 5.5 9.5 2.24 2.37 32.0 37.0 3 3 34.0 34.0 222.0 230.0 12-5 0-6 28.2 19.6 107.0 12.0 22.0 9.7 12-19 4-6 72.0 56.6 148.0 20.0 31.0 14.0 94.0 96.0 49.0 63.0 19.0 19.0 48.1 48.1 7.1 7.0 6.6 6.5 14.0 15.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 7.0 6.0 3.5 14.0 28.0 27.8 39.0 39.0 4 3 36.0 32.0 310.0 300.0 3.0 3.0 6.7 6.7 19.0 19.0 5.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 8.0 5.0 5.0 9.0 1.28 1.39 18.5 20.0 1 1 17 18.5 35.0 50.0 75.0 27.0 36.0 19.0 19.0 38.8 38.8 5.8 5.7 5.2 5.2 12.0 13.0 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.0 4.0 3.5 2.0 8.0 1.2 1.5 2.0 1.5 1 1 8.0 8.0 3.0 2.9 �-198Table 2.--Weights (kg) and External Body Measurements Date-Age-Measurements Carcass Wt - Skinned (kg) Hide Wt (kg) Pelage Sample Wt (g) Pelage Color Dorsal Rostrum Interorbital Occipital Brisket Outer Thigh Umbilical (Anterior) Front Knees (cm) of 20 Male Deer--l962 (continued) Collection No. 67 6B 70 74 76 7B 40.1 4.7 37.6 30.B 34.5 4.1 42.6 5.4 24.B 50.0 6.0 47.B 17 .4 2.•2 43.2 10YRB/2 10YR3/2 lOYR4/2 lOYR4/2 10YR7/4 10YRB/2 lOYR7/6 5YR7/1 lOYR8/2 10YR7/1 10YRS/1 10YRB/2 10YR8/2 5YR7/6 5YR7/1 5YR3/1 5YRS/1 5YR3/1 5YR7/2 5YR5/1 10YR8/6 lOYR9/1 10YR4/2 10YRs/2 lOYR3/2 lOYR6/2 10YRB/2 10YR7/6 5R9/1 5YR4/1 5YR6/l 5YRS/1 5YR7/2 5YRB/l 5YR8/4 lOYR9/1 10YR4/1 10YR6/1 10YRS/1 10YR8/2 10YR8/1 10YR8/2 3.3 14.0 -- �-199Table 3.--Weights (kg) and External Body Measurements (cm) of 30 Female Deer--1962 Collection No. Date-A~e-Measurements Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Carcass Wt - Bled Carcass Wt - Eviscerated Body LengthJ Tail Length Head Length Interorbital Width Girth Shoulder Height Neck Circumference (a) Neck Circumference (b) Ear Length (Left) Ear Length (Right) Hind Foot Length (Left) Hind Foot Length (Right) Hoof Length (Front left) Hoof Length (Front right) Hoof Length (Rear left) Hoof Length (Rear right) Meta-gland Length (Left) Meta-gland Length (Right) Meta-gland Width (Left) Meta-gland Width (Right) Tarsal gland Width (Left) Tarsal gland Width (Right) Vulva Width Vulva Length Mammary Gland Length Mammary Gland Width Mammary Gland Depth Nipple Length (Front left) Nipple Length (Front right) Nipple Length (Rear left) Nipple Length (Rear right) Basal Dia. (Front left) Basal Dia. (Front right) Basal Dia. (Rear left) Basal Dia. (Rear right) Carcass Wt - skinned (kg) Hide Wt (kg) Pelage Sample Wt (g) Pelage Color Dorsal Rostrum Interorbital Occi ital J Does not include tail length rr Uterus appeared gravid 1/ (Munsell, 1960) * * 37 1-30 2-6 2-13 2-20 3-20 2-7 55.7 41.4 143.0 16.0 28.8 11.7 91.0 92.0 33.5 48.0 20.0 20.0 46.0 46.7 7.3 7.5 6.6 6.8 17 .0 16.0 5.0 5.0 6.0 5 •. 0 2.0 4.0 12.0 10.0 2.5 0.8 1.0 0.9 1.0 0.5 0.3 0.7 0.5 37.1 4.3 1-7 43.9 31.6 132.0 15.0 26.8 .11.2 82.0 86.0 29.0 36.0 19.0 19.0 45.5 45.7 5.9 6.3 5.9' 5.9 14.0 13.0 5.0 5.5 6.0 6.0 0.8 2.0 9.0 9.0 1.0 0.5 0.5 ·0.8 0.8 0.3 0.3 0.5 0.5 28.2 3.4 4-7 58.1 41.1 138.0 17 .0 28.9 12.0 88.0 89.0 30.0 41.0 20.0 20.0 44.6 45.0 6.5 6.5 5.7 5.6 16.0 16.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 2.0 4.0 12.0 13.0 2.5 1.5 1.5 2.0 1.9 0.8 0.8 0.7 1.0 37.0 4.1 4-8 69.2 49.2 152.0 18.0 31.8 12.9 96.0 96.0 32.0 46.0 21.0 20.0 49.0 49.1 7.1 7.1 6.6 6.8 14.0 15.0 5.0 5.0 6.0 6.0 2.5 3.0 15.0 13.0 4.5 1.8 1.0 1.8 1.5 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 45.3 3.9 4-9 52.4 36.9 136.0 14.0 28.0 12.3 86.0 84.0 31.0 45.0 17.5 20.0 43.5 43.5 6.6 6.4 6.7 6.5 15.0 15.0 5.0 5.0 6.0 6.0 1.2 2.0 9.0 9.0 1.9 1.2 1.5 1.4 1.5 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 33.2 3.7 * 34 * 35 * 36 1-19 1-23 9-6 3-6 68.5 63.3 48.3 46.5 152.0 146.0 15.0 20.0 30.6 30.2 12.1 13.0 91.0 96.0 92.0 96.0 34.0 28.0 46.0 42.0 22.0 22.0 21.5 22.0 46.0 50.0 46.4 50.0 6.8 7.1 6.5 7.9 6.2 6.8 6.6 7.1 21.0 15.0 21.0 14.0 4.5 6.0 4.5 5.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 7.0 1.7 1.3 3.7 4.0 10.0 11.0 9.0 8.0 2.2 3.0 1.5 2.1 1.8 1.5 1.7 . 2.0 1.5 2.0 1.9 0.6 1.7 0.5 1.8 0.7 1.9 0.8 41.4 43.7 5.1 4.6 * Pregnant (young visible macroscopically)· ** , , Lactating (milk visible in bisected gland) * * 33 38 41 �Table 3.--Weights (kg) and External Body Measurements (cm) of 30 Female Deer--1962 Date-Age-Measurements * 33 Pelage Color (Continued) Brisket Outer Thigh Umbilical (anterior) Front Knees * 34 (continued) Collection No. * 35 * 36 * 37 * 38 * 41 �-201and External Body Measurements Table 3.--Weights (kg) Collection No. Date-Age-Measurements * Collection Date (Month - Day) Estimated Age (Year - Month) Carcass Wt - Bled (kg) Carcass Wt - Eviscerated (kg) Body Length Tail Length Head Length Interorbital Width Girth Shoulder Height Neck Circumference (a) Neck Circumference (b) Ear Length (Left) Ear Length (Right) Hind Foot Length (Left) Hind Foot Length (Right) Hoof Length (Front left) Hoof Length (Front right) Hoof Length (Rear left) Hoof Length (Rear right) Meta-gland Length (Left) Meta-gland Length (Right) Meta-gland Width (Left) Meta-gland Width (Right) Tarsal Gland Width (Left) Tarsal Gland Width (Right) Vulva Width Vulva Length Mammary Gland Length Mammary Gland Width Mammary Gland Depth Nipple Length (Front left) Nipple Length (Front right) Nipple Length (Rear left) Nipple Length (Rear right) Basal Dia. (Front left) Basal Dia. (Front right) Basal Dia. (Rear left) Basal Dia. (Rear right) Carcass Wt - Skinned (kg) Hide Wt - (kg) Pelage Sample Wt (g) Pelage Color Dorsal Rostrum Interorbital Occipital Brisket Outer Thigh Umbilical (anterior) Front Knees (continued) (cm) of 30 Female Deer--1962 * 42 45 4-12 3-22 5-10 2-9 59.8 49.9 41.2 36.1 137.0 150.0 15.0 18.0 30.7 28.5 11.3 12.5 90.0 90.0 91.0 94.0 29.0 29.0 39.0 39.0 19.5 20.0 19.0 20.0 46.3 45.1 46.5 45.4 6.5 6.0 6.9 5.9 6.2 5.9 6.0 5.9 15.0 15.0 15.5 15.0 4.5 5.0 4.0 5.0 5.5 6.0 6.0 6.0 1.5 3.5 13.5 10.0 13.5 10.0 4.2 3.5 1.2 1.1 1.2 1.0 1.9 1.5 1.6 1.4 0.5 0.4 0.7 0.5 0.8 0.6 0.5 0.5 39.0 32.4 2.2 3.7 * 46 4-20 8-10 48.2 32.9 139.0 12.0 27.6 11.8 84.0 80.0 29.0 39.0 19.0 19.0 41.8 41.9 6.3 6.3 6.1 6.4 16.0 17 .0 5.0 5.0 6.0 6.0 0.9 2.7 11.0 10.0 2.0 1.5 1.4 1.2 1.5 0.7 0.7 0.6 0.7 29.9 3.0 * 47 4-26 2-10 66.5 47.2 141.0 20.0 30.5 11.9 .92.0 90.0 37.0 50.0 21.0 21.0 48.4 49.1 7.1 7.3 7.1 7.2 16.0 18.0 5.0 5.0 7.0 6.0 0.9 3.1 12.0 11.0 3.5 1.2 1.5 1.8 1.8 0.7 0.7 0.8 1.2 42.6 4.6 - * * 50 5-16 1-11 53.0 38.6 139.0 16.0 29.2 12.3 86.0 86.0 29.0 39.0 20.5 20.5 45.4 45.4 6.8 6.7 6.9 6.9 14.0 16.5 5.0 5.0 5.0 4.0 0.5 2.8 10.0 9.0 3.5 0.9 1.5 1.0 1.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 0.7 35.1 3.5 19.8 .51 5-23 0-11 36.2 2].6 125 •• 5 13.5 25.5 10.9 75.0 81.0 28.0 36.0 19.5 19.5 42.5 42.5 6.1 6.1 5.8 5.7 12.5 13.5 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 0.5 1.6 8.0 10.0 1.8 0.7 0.7 0.9 0.9 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 25.5 2.1 20.4 10YR4/4 10YR7/l 10YR4/4 10YR6/2 10YR5/6 10YR6/4 10YRS /2 10YR7/l 10YR7/4 lOYR7/4 10YR8/1 10YR7 {1 lOYR8/6 10YR8/6 10YR7/2 10YR5/2 10YR5/4 10YR7/2 10YR7/4 10YR8/2 10YR8{6 48 5-2 11-11 75.2 50.7 154.0 18.0 31.5 12.8 97.0 98.0 33.0 43.0 20.5 21.0 48.5 48.5 6.9 7.0 6.9 6.7 14.0 14.5 4.5 4.5 5.0 4.0 0.9 2.5 12.0 11.0 1.2 1.5 1.4 1.8 1.9 0.9 0.9 1.0 0.9 46.4 4.3 �-202- Table 3.--Weights (kg) and External Body Measurements Date-Age-Measurements (em) of 30 Female Deer--1962 (continued) Collection No. ** 09 ** 56 ** 57 58 7-16 1-1 38.7 27.5 118.5 14.5 25.6 11.3 74.0 81.0 26.0 ** 59 ** 61 62 64 Collection Date (Month-Day) 6-23 6-27 7-9 7-23 8-6 8-13 8-27 Estimated Age (Year-Month) 2-0 5-0 2-1 3-1 2-2 1-1 2-1 Carcass Wt - Bled (kg) 47.8 62.5 60.8 69.1 41. 9 53.5 55.7 Carcass Wt - Eviscerated (kg) 37.8 45.0 44.1 46.3 40.7 33.6 37.0 Body Length 125.0 148.0 140.0 156.0 140.5 130.0 138.0 Tail Length 16.0 17.0 19.0 15.5 20.0 19.0 Head Length 28.4 30.3 29.2 31.0 28.5 26.7 28.8 Interorbital Width 11.1 12.2 12.0 12.9 11.8 12.1 11.6 Girth 91.0 86.0 89.0 81.0 89.0 78.0 85.0 Shoulder Height 90.0 95.0 92.0 92.0 88.0 88.0 89.0 Neck Circumference (a) 31.0 31.0 28.0 31.0 29.0 28.0 27.0 Neck Circumference (b) 40.0 49.0 39.0 47.0 46.0 38.0 40.0 Ear Length (Left) 21.0 21.0 20.0 21.0 19.0 20.5 18.0 19.5 Ear Length (Right) 21.0 19.5 21.0 21.0 19.0 20.5 18.0 19.5 Hind Foot Length (Left) 45.5 47.7 45.4 42.7 45.1 46.4 45.2 47.7 Hind Foot Length (Right) 45.9 47.8 45.4 42.5 45.3 46.7 44.7 47.7 Hoof Length (Front Left) 7.2 7.2 6.9 6.3 6.7 7.3 6.7 7.1 Hoof Length (Front Right) 6.9 7.4 7.0 6.3 6.6 7.2 6.7 7.5 Hoof Length (Rear Left) 6.4 6.8 6.7 5.9 6.5 6.9 6.2 7.4 Hoof Length (Rear Right) 6.3 7.0 6.6 5.8 6.5 6.9 6.2 6.9 Meta-gland Length (Left) 16.0 14.0 17.5 13.5 15.0 14.0 15.0 16.5 Meta-gland Length (Right) 16.5 16.0 16.5 12.0 14.5 14.5 14.5 16.0 Meta-gland Width (Left). 4.5 4.0 5.5 3.5 4.5 3.5 4.5 3.0 Meta-gland Width (Right) 4.5 5.0 5.5 3.5 4.5 3.0 4.0 3.0 Tarsal Gland Width (Left) 4.5 5.0 6.0 5.5 4.0 4.0 6.0 4.5 Tarsal Gland Width (Right) 4.0 5.5 6.0 5.5 4.5 4.0 5.0 5.0 Vulva Width 0.7 0.7 0.8 1.2 0.4 0.8 0.3 Vulva Length 1.5 3.7 3.0 3.5 2.5 3.0 3.0 Mammary Gland Length 18.0 19.0 13.5 7.5 11.0 19.0 10.0 17.0 Mammary Gland Width 14.0 13.0 11.5 7.0 18.5 8.5 7.0 14.0 Mammary Gland Depth 7.0 1.1 8.0 11.5 7.2 1.0 2.2 6.0 Nipple Length (Front Left) 1.2 1.7 2.0 1.7 1.3 0.7 1.2 1.5 Nipple Length (Front Right) 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.5 0.7 1.0 0.9 1.5 Nipple Length (Rear Left) 1.7 2.5 2.0 0.6 1.3 2.0 1.4 2.0 Nipple Length (Rear Right) 1.8 1.6 1.7 2.6 1.2 0.5 1.2 2.5 Basal Dia. (Front Left) 0.7 0.7 0.9 0.5 1.0 0.8 0.6 1.2 Basal Dia. (Front Right) 0.8 0.7 1.0 0.5 0.9 0.8 0.5 0.9 Basal Dia. (Rear Left) 1.2 0.9 1.1 0.5 1.1 0.8 0.6 1.2 Basal Dia. (Rear Righ t) 1.0 0.8 1.0 0.5 1.1 1.4 0.8 0.5 Carcass Wt - Skinned (kg) 35.6 41.8 40.0 25.3 42.8 37.2 30.3 33.8 Hide Wt (kg) 2.2 3.2 4.1 2.2 3.5 3.5 3.3 3.2 Pelage Sample Wt (g) 11.4 7.5 6.9 9.1 10.5 Pelage Color Dorsal Rostrum 10YR7/2 5YR7/l 10YR8/2 10YR8/2 10YR7/4 10YR7/2 10YR8/2 10YR8/2 Interorbital 10YR7/6 5YR6/8 10YR7/8 10YR7/6 10YR7/6 10YR7/8 10YR7/2 10YR7/4 ·Occipital 5YR3/l 10R5/1 10YR4/2 10YR4/2 5YR3/2 10YR4/2 10YR7/l 10YR4/1 Brisket 10YR7/2 10YR7/6 10YR7/l 10YR7/2 10YR6/6 10YR7/4 10YR7/8 lOYR7/6 Outer Thigh lOYR7/6 lOYR7/6 lOYR7/8 lOYR7/8 lOYR7/8 lOYR7/6 10YR7/8 5YR6/8 Umbilical (Ant¢rior) 10YR8/4 lOYR8/6 10YR8/6 lOYR8/4 lOYR8/6 lOYR9/4 lOYR8/4 5R9/l Front Knees lOYR8/4 10YR8/6 10YR7/6 lOYR8/6 lOYR7/6 lOYR7/6 10YR7/8 lOYR7/6 �-203- Table 3.--Weights (kg) and External Body Measurements (continued) Collection No .• Date-Age-Measurements ** 66 Collection No. (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Carcass Wt - Bled (kg) Carcass Wt - Eviscerated (kg) Body Length Tail Length Head Length Interorbital Length Girth Shoulder Height Neck Circumference (a) Neck Circumference (b) Ear Length (Left) Ear Length (Right) Hind Foot Length (Left) Hind Foot Length (Right) Hoof Length (Front Left) Hoof Length (Front Right) Hoof Length (Rear Left) Hoof Length (Rear Right) Meta-gland Length (Left) Meta-gland Length (Right) Meta-gland Width (Left) Meta-gland Width. (Right) Tarsal Gland Width (Left) Tarsal Gland Width (Right) Vulva Width Vulva Length Mammary Gland Length Mammary Gland Width Mammary Gland Depth Nipple Length (Front Left) Nipple Length (Front Right) Nipple Length (Rear Left) Nipple Length (Rear Right) Basal DLa , (Front Left) Basal Dia. (Front Right) Basal Dia. (Rear Left) Basal Dia. (Rear Right) Carcass Wt - Skinned (kg) Hide Wt (kg) Pelage Sample Wt (g) Pelage Color Dorsal Rostrum Interorbital Occipital Brisket Outer Thigh Umbilical (Anterior) Front Knees (em) of 30 Female Deer--1962 9-11 3-2 71.4 49.5 142.0 21.0 32.1 12.9 91 .• 0 93.0 33.0 50.0 21.0 21.0 46 •. 2 46.2 7.4 7.3 7.0 7.0 14.0 17.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 0.7 3.0 20.5 17 .0 5.5 2.0 2.0 2•. 3 3.0 1.1 1.2 1.1 1.2 44.2 5.3 10.S 69 10-4 2-4 65.3 47 .. 2 141.0 18.0 29.1 12.1 93.0 90.0 33.0 45 .• 0 21.5 21.5 44 •. 6 71 10-18 0-4 40.0 33.0 120.5 14.5 24.3 10.6 79.0 75.0 29.0 39.0 18.0 18.0 39.5 44.B 6.• B 39.B 6.8 6.4 6.4 14.5 14.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 0.6 2.5 B.O 9.0 2.6 1.0 1.0 1.1 1.1 0.6 0.5 0.7 0.6 42.0 5.2 22.3 6.0 6.• 0 5.7 5.6 14.0 14.0 4.0 4.0 4.5 4.5 0.3 1.4 7.0 7.0 1.6 05 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 27.2 0 5.B 32.S ** 72 ** 73 ** 75 10-23 3-4 60 .• 8 43.8 138.0 19.0· 29~7 12 .• 5 87.0 89.0 36.0 49.0 21.0 21.0 45.7 46.2 6.9 6.7 6.4 6.5 12.0 12.0 4.0 4.0 5.5 5.• 0 1.5 2.5 12.0 10.0 5.5 1.7 1.2 2.1 1.5 1.7 1.4 1.0 1.4 39.4 4.4 11-15 9-5 67.4 47.1 153.0 19.0 29.8 11.2 97.0 96.0 35.0 46.0 20.5 20.5 46.1 46.6 7.2 7.0 7.3 7.2 13.0 13.5 4.0 4.5 4.5 4.5 0.7 2.8 17 .0 14.0 6.0 2.0 1.5 2.3 2.1 0.6 0.7 0.7 0.7 42.2 4.9 30.4 11-28 9-5 67.6 48 .• 6 150.0 17 .0 30.0 12 .• 8 95.0 94.0 35.0 48.0 20.5 20•. 5 46 •. 3 46.4 6.B 6.9 6.4 6.5 17 .5 17.5 4.5 4.5 5.0 5.0 0.3 2.8 11.0 12.0 3.S 1.7 1•. 6 2.3 2.4 O.S O.B 1.2 1.0 43.6 5.0 49.B TW TW 77 12-12 4-6 56.6 41.6 144.0 17 .0 29.7 12.0 87.0 87.0 31.0 46 .• 0 21.0 21.0 47.7 47.6 7.2 7.3 7.1 7.0 15.0 17.0 6.0 6.0 4.5 4.0 1.0 3.0 11.0 11.0 2.6 1.9 1.5 2.0 2.1 0.6 1.1 0.7 0.9 37.6 4.0 49.1 79 12-26 9-6 52.5 39.5 141.0 15.0 29.6 12.3 93.0' 92.0 32.0 49.0 19.5 19.5 47.1 46.9 7.1 7.1 6.6 6.7 15.0 15.0 4.0 4.5 4.0 4.0 0.9 3.1 10.0 10.5 4.0 1.3 1.5 1.7 1.6 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 35.0 4.5 42.1 10YR7/2 10YR7/2 10YR7/2 10YRB/2 10YR7/1 10YRB/2 10YRS/1 10YR9/2 10YR7/4 10YR5/4 10YR4/2 10YR6/1 10YR5/1 10YR4/2 10YR6/2 10YR6/2 lOYR5/2 lOYR4/2 lOYR4/2 lOYR4/1 lOYR5/1 10YR4/2 l0YR5/2 10YR6/2 10YR7/6 lOYR3/2 lOYR4/1 lOYR5/1 lOYR3/1 lOYR3/1 lOYR4/2 lOYR4/1 lOYR6/S 10YR7/2 lOYR7/2 10YRS/2 10YR6/2 lOYR7/2 lOYR7/2 lOYR7/1.5 lOYRS/2 lOYRS/2 lOYR7/2 lOYR7/1 lOYRS/2 10YRS/4 lOYR9/4 lOYR7/1 10YRS/6 lOYR7/S lOYRS/6 10YRS/4 10YRS/S 10YR7/6 lOYRY10 10YRS/4.5 �Table 4.--Blood and Tissue Analyses of 19 Male Deer--1962 Date-Age-Wt Ratio-Item Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt Ratio Degree of Blood Serum Hemolysis Erythrocyte Count (millions/mm3) Packed Cell Volume (%) Hemoglobin (g/100 m1) 3 Leucocyte Count (hundreds/mm ) Differential Counts (% of 100) Segmented Neutrophils Band Neutrophils Lymphocytes Monocytes Eosinophils BasophHs Blood Salts Na (meq/L) K (meq/L) Ca (meq/L) P (mg %) Mg (meq/L) Blood Protein (g %) Blood Vi_tamin A (IU/cc) Blood Carotene (IU Pro Vitamin A/100 m1) LLver Vitamin A (IU/g) Liver Carotene (IU Pro Vitamin A/g) Adrenal Ascorbic Acid (;ug/g) Bone Marrow Fat (10-) Bone Marrow Moisture (%) Collection No. 32 39 40 43 44 49 52 1-9 1-7 0.24 0 2-27 3-8 0.31 slight 14.5 51 17.6 24.5 3-8 1-9 0.26 0 4-5 4-10 0.35 large 5-9 1-11 0.27 large -- 3-29 0-10 0.21 slight 22.87 52 19.0 28.0 5-30 0-11 0.23 0 9.16 41 14.5 50.0 22 1 71 3 3 0 - 21 16 55 6 2 0 138.0 15.70 152.0 7.90 132.0 12.90 135.0 7.50 4.67 2.19 3.24 1.96 7.88 1.• 20 6.• 07 - - - - - - -- - - 72.2 22.4 -2.73 - - 89,9 7.9 - - - - -- 73.5 20.1 - - - 61.3 31.4 - - - --- - - - - -6.4 74.6 -- 17 2 69 12 0 0 142.0 6.32 3.60 8.70 3.88 7.0 1.52 0.0 540 910 1170 17.0 74.6 136.4 9.33 4.64 13.00 3.37 7.2 1.66 11.69 420 880 545 34.1 59.5 I ro +:- 0 r �Table 4.--Blood and Tissue Analyses of 19 Male Deer--1962 Date-Age-Wt Collection No. Ratio-Item Co L'l ec t Lon Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt Ratio Degree of Blood Serum Hemolysis Erythrocyte Count (millions/mm3) Packed Cell Volume (%) Hemoglobin (g/lOO ml) Leucocyte Count (hundreds/mm3) Differenti.al Counts (% of 100) Segmented Neutrophils Band Neutrophils Lymphocytes Monocytes Eosinophils Basophils Blood Salts Na (meq/L) K (meq/L) Ca (meq/L) P (mg %) Mg (meq/L) Blood Protein (g %) Blood Vitamin A (IU/cc) Blood Carotene (IU Pro Vitamin A/100 ml) Liver Vitamin A (IU/g) L ;.ver Caro tene (IU Pro Vi tamin A/g) Adrenal Ascorbic Add <p.g/g) Bone Marrow Fat (%) Bone Marrow Moisture (%) -. _. (continued) - ~Slight clotting in EDTA blood 53~ 54 55 60 63 65 6-6 1-0 0.24 0 8.63 38 12.0 40.0 6-132-0 0.33 0 9.39 42 11.4 28.0 6-20 2-0 0.34 0 11.82 50 16.2 18.5 7-30 5-1 0.51 0 8-20 1-2 0.28 0 11.136 43 14.9 28.0 9-5 7-3 0.50 0 8.81 44 13.7 47.5 17 0 51 32 0 0 36 2 49 12 1 0 49 5 40 5 0 1 - 17 1 60 10 12 0 28 2 30 10 30 0 136.0 8.20 3.83 8.90 2.55 7.0 0.72 0.0 490 1100 360 21.9 64.8 149.2 7.50 4.08 11.70 2.74 5.8 1.42 38.41 610 2800 545 61.4 34.5 131.4 6.15 4.78 11.00 3.20 6.6 2.59 11.69 1110 1900 260 83.9 13.8 125.5 9.90 4.10 9.15 1.75 7.3 2.20 8.35 1050 900 690 94.1 5.3- 132.0 6.37 5.90 9.82 2.55 6.2 2.93 15.03620 850 1020 82.2 14.9 145.3 6.50 4.45 7.05 2.96 7.4 1.16 5.01 935 1100 670 90.2 8.5 - I I\) 0 \J1 I �Table 4.--Blood and Tissue Analyses of 19 Male Deer--1962 (continued) Date-Age-Wt Ratio-Item Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt Ratio Degree of Serum Hemolysis Erythrocyte Count (mi11ions/mm3) Packed Cell Volume (%) Hemoglobin (g/100 ml) Leucocyte Count (hundreds/mm3) Differential Counts (% of 100) Segmented Neutrophi1s Band Neutrophils Lymphocytes Monocytes Eosinophils Basophils Blood Salts Na (meq/L) K (meq/L) Ca (meq/L) P (mg %) Mg (meq/L) Blood Protein (g %) Blood Vitamin A IU/cc Blood Carotene (IU Pro Vitamin A/100 ml) Liver Vitamin A (IU/g) Liver Carotene (IU Pro Vitamin A/g) Adrenal Ascorbic Acid (/Ug) Bone Marrow Fat (%) Bone Marrow Moisture (%) Collection No. 67 68 70 74 76 78 9-18 1-3 0.31 0 9.16 48 17 .6 26.0 9-27 1-3 0.26 great 13.6 69 21.6 32.5 10-10 1-4 0.29 0 11-21 2-6 0.35 great 7.1 47.5 15.5 26.5 12-5 0-6 0.18 0 7.75 48.0 15.9 31.5 12-19 4-6 0.38 0 6.0 49.0 15.4 47.5 40 4 30 12 14 0 -- -- - 28 0 58 6 8 0 64 0 20 10 6 0 73 1 26 0 0 0 155.7 6.5 4.60 4.50 3.14 7.2 1.52 8.35 580 980 1030 89.3 9.2 148.4 7.1 5.05 6.85 1.85 7.5 1.60 8.35 690 1020 685 78.5 18.8 158.4 3.9 5.75 9.15 4.03 7.0 1.19 26.72 640 1930 900 89.3 8.7 138.0 7.32 5.20 9.15 3.16 6.8 2.10 26.72 995 410 535 92.9 5.3 137.5 6.6 5.85 7.90 2.80 6.0 1.64 11.69 230 530 510 53.9 39-.9 139.8 4.37 3.69 5.90 3.04 6.3 1.30 1.67 780 1010 990 55.1 40.3 -- I ro 0 0\ I �Table 5.--Blood and Tissue Analyses of 30 Female Deer--1962. Collection No. Date-Age-Wt Ratio-Item Collection Date (Month-Day) Esttmated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt Ratio Degree of Blood Serum Hemolysis Erythrocyte Count (millions/mm3) Packed Cell Volume (%) Hemoglobin (g/lOO ml) Leucocyte Count (hundreds/mm3) Differential Counts (% of 100) Segmented Neutrophi1s Band Neutrophils Lymphocytes Monocytes Eosinophils Basophils Blood Salts Na (meq!L) K (meq/L) Ca (m~q/L) P (mg %) Mg (meq/L) Blood Protetn (g %) Blood Vitamin A (IU!cc Blood Carotene (IU Pro Vitamin A/100 ml) Liver Vitamin A (IU/g) Liver Carotene (IU Pro Vitamin A/g) Adrenal Ascorbic Acid (JUg/g) Bone Marrow Fat (%) Bone Marrow Moisture (%) *Pregnant 33* 34* 35* 36* 37* 38* - 41* 1-19 3-6 0.32 0 6.18 29 9.6 28.5 1-23 9-6 0032 0 10.78 50 17.6 24.0 1-30 2-7 0.29 0 14.04 52 18.4 30.5 2-6 1-7 0.24 large 10.5 46 14.5 21.0 2-13 4-7 0.30 slight 10.57 49.5 18.0 30.0 2-20 4-8 0.32 large 14.44 42 15.3 25.5 3-20 4-9 0.27 0 26 0 62 4 8 0 45 1 46 6 2 0 45 41 0 39 2 18 0 23 4 65 2 6 ~ 44 2 6 0 26 10 58 4 2 0 137.0 6.60 138.0 8.70 140.0 7.20 139.0 8.00 144.0 6.40 132.0 9.10 148.0 5.00 3.19 4.90 3.47 2.70 3.78 2.80 2.98 4.60 2.72 6.20 3.31 4.90 2.21 3.75 90.9 96.3 - 90 •.4 95.3 6.8 2.5 7.8 3.1 .,. 97.0 1.7 85.7 10.8 3 95.7 3.1 .. 0 I ro 0 -..;J I �Table 5.--B1ood and Tissue Analyses of 30 Female Deer--~962 (continued) Date-Age-Wt Ratio-Item Collection Date OMonth-Day) Estimated Age- (year-Month) Eviscerated Wt Ratio Degree of Blood Serum Hemolysis Erythrocyte Count (mil1ions/rom3) Packed Cell Volume (%) Hemoglobin (g/lOO ml) Leucocyte Count (hundreds/mm3) Differential Counts (% of 100) Segmented Neutrophils Band Neutrophils Lymphocytes Monocytes Eosinophils Basophils Blood Salts Na (meq/L) K (meq/L) Ca (meq/L) P (mg %) Mg (meq/L) Blood Protein (g %) Blood Vitamin A (IU/cc) Blood Carotene (IU Pro Vitamin A/lOO ml) Liver Vitamin A (IU/g) Liver Carotene (IU Pro Vitamin A/g) Adrenal Ascorbic Acid (Itlg/g) Bone Marrow Fat (%) Bone Marrow Moisture (%) *Pregnant ~Slight clotting in EDTA blood Collection No. 42* 45* 46* 47* 48* 3-22 2-9 0.26 large 11.54 48 17.6 25.5 4-12 5-10 0.27 slight 18.25 58 20.0 42.0 4-20 8-10 0.24 large 12.35 55 19.6 20.5 4-26 2-10 0.33 0 14.58 45 14.9 21.5 5-2 11-11 0.33 0 7.72 42 15.7 40.5 5-16 1-11 0.28 large 15.25 66 22.4 18.5 5-23 0-11 0.22 large .14.6 52 19.2 17.0 22 1 72 2 3 0 34 8 51 4 3 0 17 6 63 1 13 0 38 2 46 1 13 0 27 0 37 4 28 4 - 18 0 68 3 11 0 135.0 16.0 138.0 9.70 135.0 12.90 4.59 6.81 2.17 1.87 2.38 2.46 150.0 8.70 3.67 6.20 4.06 6.2 1.24 20.04 745 1080 415.0 80.5 15.8 143.0 7.74 3.56 4.90 6.20 6.7 1.36 0.0 715 780 1290 89.1 9.2 143.0 14.30 3.25 9.9 3.93 6.5 1.10 16.70 710 1790 980 ?8.2 9.6 141.3 8.15 3.60 11.4 3.60 7.4 1.24 15.03 580 1400 460 48.8 43.2 - - - 93.5 4.2 - - 77 .0 20.9 - - 82.7 15.4 5Uo 50~* I I'\:) 0 CO . I �Table 5.--Blood and Tissue Analyses of 30 Female Deer--1962 (continued) Date-Age-Wt Ratio-Item Collection No. 57~J 58 6-27 5-0 0.30 0 11.0 50 17.6 61.0 7-9 2-1 0.32 slight 7.98 41 14.5 28.0 7-16 1-1 0.23 0 9.45 48 16.2 25.0 29 2 36 33 0 0 23 0 62 15 0 0 153.1 3.88 4.55 9.90 3.62 7.4 1.42 11.69 540 860 315 68.9 25.7 134.1 12.7 5.25 9.65 2.88 7.7 1.77 15.03 905 1210 420 86.7 11.0 09** Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt Ratio Degree of Blood Serum Hemolysis Erythrocyte Count (mi11ions/mm3) Packed Cell Volume (%) Hemoglobin (g/100 ml) Leucocyte Count (hundreds/mm3) Differential Counts (% of 100) Segmented Neutrophi1s Band Neutrophi1s Lymphocytes Monocytes Eosinophils Basophils Blood Salts Na (meq/t.) K (meq/L) Ca (meq/L) P (mg %) Mg (meq/L) Blood Protein (%) Blood Vitamin A (IU/cc) Blood Carotene (IU Pro Vitamin A/lOO ml) Liver Vitamin A (IU/g) Liver Carotene (IU Pro Vitamin A/g) Adrenal Ascorbic Acid (JUg/g) Bone Marrow Fat (%) Bone Marrow Moisture (%) **Lactating 1/Sma11 crystals in EDTA blood 6-23 2-0 0.30 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 61.3 31.0 56** 61 62 7-23 3-1 0.30 0 7.25 49 14.5 36.0 8-6 2-2 0.29 0 8.95 45 14.5 26 •. 0 8-13 1-1 0.26 0 8.27 47 16.6 22.0 35 0 16 19 30 0 33 0 33 12 20 0 40 0 37 13 9 0 28 3 37 9 23 0 148.9 9.55 5.10 6.40 1.89 6.8 1.64 21.71 810 1600 485 19.1 65.4 145.0 7.64 5.20 7.57 3.09 7.0 1.86 0.0 980 850 790 55.2 41.5 133.0 10.0 4.29 11.7 1.53 5.8 1.36 106.88 980 1000 1150 82.2 15~1 135.0 9.36 5..15 8.90 2.32 6.7 1.67 11.69 1240 1100 1100 62.2 32.9 59** I I\) 0 \0 I �I I\) b I Table 5.--Blood and Tissue Analyses of 30 Female Deer--1962. (continued) Date-Age-Wt Ratio-Item Collection No. 2/ 64"Jrlr Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt Ratio Degree of Blood Serum Hemolysis Erythrocyte Count (mil1ions/mm3) Packed Cell Volume (%) Hemoglobin (g/lOO ml) Leucocyte Count (hundreds/mm3) Differential Counts (% of 100) Segmented Neutrophils Band Neutrophils Lymphocytes Monocytes Eosinophils Basophils Blood Salts Na (meq/L) K (meq/L) Ca (meq/L) P (mg %) Mg (meq/L) Blood Pro tein (%) Blood Vitamin A (IU/cc) Blood Carotene (IU Pro Vitamin A/lOO ml) Liver Vitamin A (IU/g) Liver Carotene (IU Pro Vitamin A/g) Adrenal Ascorbic Acid (jUg/g) Bone Marrow Fat (%) Bone Marrow Moisture ('70.) **Lactating 2/Bad1y clotted EDTA blood flU TV terus appeared gravid 69 71 - 9-11 3-2 0.35 0 10.0 57 13.4 24.5 10-4 2-4 0.33 0 8.75 44- 10-11 0-4 0.27 great 14.0 58.5 19.8 44.5 10-18 3-4 0.32 great 7.5 47 15.7 39.0 11-15 9-5 0.31 0 9.2 46 16.8 36.5 11-28 9-5 0.32 0 7.4 47.5 15.5 29.0 12-12 4-6 0.29 0 8.05 51 .• 5 16.1 28.7 12-26 9-6 0-28 0 6.1 51 16.5 35.5 26 1 37 15 21 0 33 2 32 23 10 0 - 40 0 58 2 0 0 33 0 48 2 13 0 29 0 46 2 13 0 67 0 ·25 1 1 0 72 0 25 3 0 0 60 0 37 3 0 0 139.2 9.7 4.25 8.65 1.92 7.3 1.24 0.0 665 2000 550 30.3 59.3 151.0 7.77 4.48 8.65 3.29 7.0 1.71 20.04 1195 980' 660 84.3 11.4 166.0 4.9 5.10 6.00 3.37 6 6 1.95 11.69 720 795 790 92.2 5.6 140.1 10.1 5.40 7.25 2.68 6.3 1.08 26.72 680 1390 580 88.3 9.0 147.0 13.0 5.45 8.77 3.91 6.5 1.77 5.01 550 440 570 94.3 5.1 150.0 9.55 5.39 9.65 2.75 6.0 1.58 11.69 810 675 440 90.3 7.8 142.0 5.60 5.05 1.05 3.29 6.5 1.77 8.35 340 785 640 91..2 7.7 129.0 5.40 5.45 6.31 2.66 6.2 0.90 0.0 280 840 910 92.3 6.1 146.0 3.78 4.28 7.90 3.95 7.4 1.52 5.01 740 950 1150 89.8 7.8 8-27 2-1 0.27 0 37 66** 29.0 - e- 7:3** 72** 77H 75** 79~! �-211- Table 6.--Measurements (em), Fresh Weights (g), and Volumes (cc) of Organs from 21 Male Deer--1962 Date-Age-Wt Ratio-Organ 32 1-9 1-7 .24 11.9 7.6 177.5 171.7 Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt/Body Length Ratio Brain Long. Dia. Trans. Dia. Wt Vol Eyeball (Left) Long. Dia. 2.81 Trans. Dia. 3.31 Wt 16.08 Vol 15.76 Eyeball (Righ t) Long. Dia. 2.79 Trans. Dia. 3.25 Wt 15.84 Vol 15.55 Lung (Left) Wt 242 Lung (Right) Wt Heart Long. Dia. Trans. Dia. Wt Vol Liver Long. Dia. 26.0 Trans. Dia. 13.4 Height Dia. 2.4 Wt 776.9 Vol 726.3 Kidney (Left) Long. Dia. 7.42 Trans. Dia. 4.69 Height Dia. 2.75 61.08 Wt Vol 58.43 Kidney (Right) Long. Dia. 8.04 Trans. Dia. 3.92 Height Dia. 2.73 Wt 56.8 Vol 54.05 Spleen Wt 129.0 Vol 123.3 Stomach Wt with Contents 6871 Rumen-Reticulum Wt with Contents 6449 Rumen-Reticulum Contents Wt (Wet) 5700 Rumen-Reticulum Contents Wt (Oven-dry) 984 Per cent Moisture (Rumen-Retic. Contents) 84.7 39 2-27 3-8 .31 11.8 8.1 207.4 200.6 Collection No. 40 43 3-8 3-29 1-9 0-10 .26 .21 12.7 11.8 7.8 7.5 177.5 167.5 172.6 163.1 44 4-5 4-10 .35 12.0 7.5 178.8 176.1 3.20 3.47 19.19 17.96 2.61 3.16 15.48 14.89 2.70 3.15 13.28 12.95 2.94 3.35 20.32 19.77 3.14 3.51 19.94 19.08 316 532 16.6 11.3 615.2 594.8 29.5 17.2 3.5 2.69 3.09 15.97 15.64 204 318 14.0 9.2 359.4 345.8 27.3 12.4 3.0 925.4 864.6 2.60 3.12 13.39 13.05 225 326 12.9 8.6 279.6 270.7 26.0 11.3 3.2 906.8 860.1 3.45 3.10 19.65 18.80 551 1147 13.5 12.8 655.6 631. 2 31.8 16.4 3.8 1573.6 1508.8 8.40 3.50 2.20 78.8 74.9 8.10 3.40 1.80 61.1 58.6 6.80 4.60 2.30 61.5 58.4 9.00 4.50 4.00 137.1 l30.9 8.50 4.80 2.20 75.8 71.3 164.6 156.8 6910 6125 4955 882 82.2 8.20 4.00 1.80 58.8 56.1 110.4 105.7 4510 3960 3320 485 85.4 7.10 4.20 2.10 53.0 50.7 150.7 142.5 4240 3705 3225 514 84.1 10.10 4.30 3.20 122.4 117.2 199.8 193.6 8585 7615 6645 1059 84.1 07 4-27 0-10 83,5 82.8 �-212Table 6.--Measurements (em), Fresh Weights (g), and Volumes (cc), of Organs from 21 Male Deer--1962 (continued) Date-Age-Wt Ratio-Organ 49 5-9 1-11 .27 12.6 8.2 199.2 195.4 Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt/Body Length Ratio Brain Long. Dia. Trans. Dia. Wt Vol Eyeball (Left) Long. Dia. 3.24 Trans. Dia. 2.85 Wt 16.31 Vol 15.87 Eyeball (Right) Long. Dia. 3.11 Trans. Dia. 2.91 Wt 16.71 Vol 16.24 Lung (Left) Wt 490 Lung (Right) Wt Heart Long. Dia. 12.1 Trans. Dia. 8.5 Wt 389.4 Vol 371.2 Liver Long. Dia. 29.1 Trans. Dia. 17 .0 Height Dia. 4.0 Wt 1617 .4 Vol 1547.0 Kidney (Left) Long. Dia. 9.00 Trans. Dia. 5.00 Height Dia. 2.80 Wt 110.0 Vol 103.7 . Kidney (Right) Long. Dia. 9.40 Trans. Dia. 4.50 Height Dia. 2.60 Wt 113.2 Vol 107.4 Spleen Wt 182.2 Vol 172.8 Stomach Wt with Contents 4460 Rumen-Reticulum Wt with Contents 3970 Rumen-Reticulum Contents Wt (Wet) 3230 Rumen-Reticulum Contents Wt (Oven-dry) 402 Per cent Moisture (Rumen-Retic. Contents) 87 •. 6 Collection No. 52 53 08 5-30 6-6 6-10 0-11 1-0 1-0 .23 .24 10.5 11.1 8.0 7.1 177.0 178.3 170.5 173.0 54 6-13 2-0 ,33 11.1 8.6 191.7 187.9 55 6-20 2-0 .34 11.6 8.4 207.8 196.5 3.04 2.78 13.72 13.30 2.50 2.90 13.85 13.15 2.89 3.33 17.02 16.59 2.78 3.40 17.75 17 .21 2.97 2.69 14.48 14.00 2•. 68 2.98 13.90 13.24 364 829 14.2 9.3 440.4 422.2 28.5 15.2 2.7 3.13 3.40 17 .48 17 .08 16.6 10.5 522.1 502.8 31.0 16.0 4.1 1530.9 1450.0 3.06 3.24 17.66 17 .06 386 989 17 .0 12.1 672.7 643.3 31.9 17.6 4.6 1656.9 1557.6 8.50 3.60 3.60 82.1 8.14 5.58 3.97 108.5 107.5 9,30 5.50 4.10 127.2 121.7 9.00 3.80 3.40 80.1 8.47 5.40 4.69 110.0 109.6 176.1 169.2 6135 5535 4145 716.0 82.7 10.3 5.5 3.8 129.3 125.4 202.3 189.2 6970 6320 4700 564 88.0 13.8 8.5 357.9 344.8 25.3 15.0 3.2 1020.8 961.9 8.30 4.60 2.50 82.1 77 .8 8.50 4.40 2.50 86.4 83.6 316.0 195.5 3850 3395 2420 340 85.9 8.57 5.35 3.80 109.4 105.9 237.5 221.8 4065 3590 2930 345 88.2 �-213- Table 6.--Measurements (em), Fresh Weights (g), and Volumes (cc) of Organs from 21 Male Deer--1962' (continued) Date-Age-Wt Ratio-Organ 60 7-30 5-1 .51 14.0 8.2 201.0 196.5 Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt/Body Length Ratio Brain Long. Dia. Trans. Dd.a , Wt Vol Eyeball (Left) Long. Dia. 3.51 Trans. Dia. 3.35 Wt 19.49 Vol 18.71 Eyeball (Right) Long. D'La, 3.49 Trans. Dia. 3.23 Wt 19.89 Vol 19.21 Lung (Left) Wt 710 Lung (Right) Wt· 1260 Heart Long. Dia. 17.0 Trans. Dia. 13.0 Wt 782.5 Vol 743.5 Liver Long. Dia. 33.4 Trans. DLa , 18.9 Height Dia. 2.5 Wt 2350.0 2238.3 Vol Kidney (Left) Long. Dia. 9.20 Trans. DLa , 5.50 Height Dia. 5.20 Wt 168.0 16106 Vol Kidney (Right) Long. Dd.a , 9.60 Trans. Dia. 5.50 Height Dia. 4.90 .Wt 154.5 Vol 151.5 260.6 Spleen Wt 249.8 Vol Stomach Wt with Contents 11850 Rumen-Reticulum Wt with Contents 10940 Rumen-Reticulum Contents Wt (Wet) 9030 1238 Rumen-Reticulum Contents Wt (Oven-dry) Per cent Moisture (Rumen-Retic. Contents) 86.3 63 8-20 1-2 .28 12.1 8.2 187 •. 0 181.6 Collection No. 65 67 9-5 9-18 7-3 1-3 .31 .50 . 68 9-27 1-3 .26 12.5 8.0 195.4 187.7 70 10-10 1-4 .29 12.0 8.4 174.1 172.7 2.94 3.16 14.28 3.04 3.17 14.78 14.34 170.1 164.8 8.0 154.9 148.2 3,00 3.31 15.57 15.24 3.41 2.96 19.20 18.78 2.93 3.22 14.90 14.38 3.02 3.28 15.96 15.56 780 630 15.2 9.9 461.9 443.7 28.4 16.5 4.7 1505.0 1424.3 3.30 3.07 19.28 18.61 770 860 17.9 12.4 766.2 738.4 32.0 17.9 5.0 1990.0 1874.8 2.74 3.09 14.84 14.19 440 695 16.3 11.0 565.1 542.6 19.4 15.4 5.2 1205.0 1133.2 2.87 3.03 14.26 13.81 390 470 12.5 10.3 365.9 350.5 27.8 14.2 2.7 990.0 927.7 3.20 2.95 14.93 14.49 390 790 13.7 10.0 477 .0 462G2 24.7 13.7 3.0 920.0 862.5 8.10 4.90 4.30 113.2 109.6 10.20 5,,60 5.10 171.7 166.4 6.80 3.50 2.90 116.2 109.9 8.28 4.13 3.71' 77 .8 72.0 7.70 4,,40 3 70 82.1 79.4 8.00 8.90 4.50 5.50 4.30 3.70 101.5 159.0 152.8 98.3 170.6 286.9 274.0 159.9 11410 5380 10565 4970 3460 8915 1386 536 84.5 84.5 7.30 2.• 90 2.90 112.9 106.3 204.2 194 8 7100 6350 5460 826 84.9 8.13 3.91 3.32 75.5 72.1 149.8 142.2 5050 4540 3650 518 85.8 7.50 4.50 3.40 86.1 83.8 123.9 116,,3 6110 5530 4820 0 14a80 e �-214- Table 6.--Measurements (em), Fresh Weights (g) and Volumes (cc) of Organs from 21 Male Deer--1962 (continued) Date-Age-Wt Ratio-Organ Collection No. 76 78 11-21 12.,.19 12-5 2-6 0-6 4-6 •. 35 ,,38 .18 10,,0 12.1 13.7 8 1 7.20 7.5 19104 140.5 190.3 187.7 134.7 183.1 74 Collection Date ~onth-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt/Body Length Ratio Brain Long. Dia. Trans. Dia. Wt Vol Eyeball (Left) Long. Dia. Trans. Dia. Wt Vol Eyeball (Right) Long. Dia. Trans. Dia. Wt Vol Lung (Left) Wt Lung (Right) Wt Heart Long. Dia. Trans. Dd.a , Wt Vol Liver Long. Dia. Trans. Dd a , Height Dia. Wt Vol Kidney (Left) Long. Dia. Trans. Dd.a , Height Dia. Wt Vol Kidney (Right) Long. Dia. Trans. Dia. Height Dia. Wt Vol Spleen Wt Vol Stomach Wt with Contents Rumen-Reticulum Wt with Contents Rumen-Reticulum Contents Wt (Wet) Rumen-Reticulum Contents Wt (Oven-dry) Per cent Moisture (Rumen-Retic~ Contents) 0 3.31 3 09 17.00 16.68 2.96 2.67 11.76 10.48 3 32 2.90 16.20~ 15.93 3.32 3.06 16.76 16.32 2.89 2.68 11.75 3.34 2.97 17.11 16.50 440 610 14.0 11.0 553.0 530.6 27.6 16.• 2 4.00 1335.0 1261.1 0 415 *485,,1 *467.1 27.9 15.4 3.3 970.0 913.8 7.49 3.83 3.42 71.8 69.6 7.41 3.85 3.67 11.54 180 230 12.4 9.6 219.1 208.4 23.6 14.6 4.0 780.0 7.35 3.98 3.23 54.2 51.3 8.33 5.04 4.08 92.2 87..4 1051 8.61 4.48 4.02 90.4 86.5 187.6 175.9 71.1 4.23 2.93 50.0 67.3 147.3 140.9 4010 3590 2970 118.0 111.2 :3360 2900 2460 *Slight1y damaged ~Eyeba11 punctured, some loss of fluid and shrinkage 0 47.1 �-215- Table 7.--Measurements (em), Fresh Weights (g), and Volumes (cc), of Organs from 30 Female Deer--1962 Date-Age-Wt Ratio-Organs 33 1-19 3-6 .32 10.5 8.5 203.7 199.2 Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (year-Month) Eviscerated Wt/Body Length Ratio Brain Long. Dia. Trans. Dia. Wt Vol Eyeball (Left) Long. Dia. Trans. Dia. Wt Vol Eyeball (Right) 3.1 Long. Dd.a , 3.4 Trans. Dia. 18.28 Wt 17.84 Vol 410 Lung (Left) Wt 607 Lung (Right) Wt 16.5 Heart Long. Dia. 11.4 Trans. Dia. 557.7 Wt 543.1 Vol 31 •. 6 Liver Long. Dd.a , 17 .8 Trans. Dia. 5.3 Height Dia •. 1364.5 Wt 1279.8 Vol Kidney (Left) 9.20 Long Dia. 6.40 Trans. Dia. 3.40 Height nra , 101.9 Wt 98.7 Vol Kidney (Right) 8.80 Longo Dia. 5.20 Trans. Dia. 2.90 Height Dia. 105.5 Wt 101.9 Vol 151.6 Spleen Wt 146.0 Vol 8250 Stomach Wt with Contents 7470 Rumen-Reticulum with Contents 6190 Rumen-Reticulum Contents Wt (wet) 920 Rumen-Reticulum Contents Wt (Oven-dry) 85.1 Per cent Moisture (Rumen-Re t Lc , Contents) Collection No. 36 34 35 2-6 1-23 1-30 1-7 9-6 2~7 .24 .32 .• 29 1100 10.9 12.5 8.0 8.0 9.0 192.7 165.0 177.3 188.0 158.0 172.1 37 2-13 4-7 .30 12.0 8.5 187 •. 7 182.8 38 .2-20 4-8 .32 12.5 8.2 183.9 177 .6 2.78 3.32 18.91 18.42 2.89 3.30 19.06 18.51 2.78 3 38 16.52 16.06 2.94 3.37 17.40 16,,90 2.90 3.26 18.97 18.50 2.89 3.38 20.23 19.71 342 506 14.8 11.2 531,,7 516.0 27.7 14.5 3.7 1275.2 1205.8 3.05 3.37 18.29 17.84 321 488 15.7 10.8 546.2 535,,1 27.1 14.4 4.2 1243.4 1180 •. 2 2.98 3.27 16 •. 50 15,,94 2.92 3.18 17 .90 17 .65 380 527 15.6 11.7 510.4 493.5 27.3 16.3 3.4 1240.2 1168.7 3.0 3.25 19.51 19.0 403 569 16.4 10.4 592.3 571.5 32.2 12.5 3.7 1406.9 1345.9 8.40 5.00 3.10 125.2 117,,9 7.50 4.30 3.10 80.0 76.4 7..60 3.40 2.50 56 •. 8 54 .• 2 7.80 3.80 2.30 73,,4 70.4 9•. 20 5.00 2.80 106.2 102.2 7.70 8.40 9.00 3,,90 .9.20 3.50 2,,60 3,,60 3.10 56.3 72.7 108.6 53.7 69.7 104.2 113.5 143.3 168.6 16106 107.2 135.6 4790 5680 4260 3720 5360 3545 2990 4245 577 482 595 83.7 83.9 86.0 7.00 4.00 2.30 9.50 4.40 3.10 98.5 94 •. 7 33].4 315,,6 0 12.2 9.7 365.0 357.5 25.9 13.2 2.3 798.8 754 .• 4 6102 64.8 136.4 129 •. 3 �-216Table 7.--Measurements (em), Fresh Weights (g), and Volumes (cc) of Organs from 30 Female Deer--1962 (continued) Date-Age-Wt Ratio-Organs Collection No. 41 Collection Date (Month-Day) 3-20 Estimated Age (Year-Month) 4-9 Eviscerated Wt/Body Length Ratio .27 Brain Long. Dia. 11.8 Trans 8•.4 Wt 178.2 Vol 172.3 Eyeball (Left) Long. Dd.a, 2.9 Trans. Dia. 3.45 Wt 17.77 Vol 17.15 Eyeball (Right) Long. Dia. 2.85 Trans. D'La , 3.25 Wt 17.47 Vol 16.76 Lung (Left) Wt Lung (Right) Wt Heart Long. Dia. 14.0 Trans. Dia. 9.1 Wt 428.2 Vol 411.3 Liver Long. Dia. 27.5 Trans. Dia. 9.9 Height Dia •. 2.8 Wt 900.6 Vol 847.7 Kidney (Left) Long. Dia. 8.10 Trans. Dia. 3.40 Height Dd.a , 3.00 Wt 70 .• 6 Vol 68.2 Kidney (Right) Long. Df.a , 8.10 Trans. Dd.a , 4.00 Height Dd.a , 2.50 Wt 60.8 Vol 58.8 Spleen Wt 135.9 Vol 127.6 Stomach Wt with Contents 4600 Rumen-Reticulum Wt with Contents 3880 Rumen-Reticulum Contents Wt (Wet) 3075 Ru~n-Reticu1um Contents Wt (Oven-dry) 440 Per cent Moisture (Rumen-Retic. Contents) 85.7 45 46 47 4-20 8-10 .24 10.7 2.3 159.7 155•. 1 4-26 10.5 6.8 177.6 173.1 4-12 5-10 .27 12.7 7.7 204.4 201.3 2-10 .33 12.0 8.5 182.6 176.5 48 5-2 11-11 .33 11.2 8.0 216.2 209.5 2.88 3.39 17.90 17.34 3.0 3.36 17 .74 17.14 2.95 3.38 20.35 19.85 3.10 3.34 17.32 16.81 3.25 3.50 20.34 20.18 2.94 3.31 18.05 17.51 27.6 12.2 2.0 883.8 830000 2.90 3.22 17.45 16.93 391 589 15.5 lO.6 463.5 449.4 23.0 17 .0 3.7 1282.0 1227.5 3.07 3.31 20.90 20.32 425 620 14.2 9.5 400.0 385.0 29.1 13.8 5.6 1165.0 1110.0 2.98 3.23 17.38 16.87 334 620 13.7 11.4 546.2 524.3 29.5 14.7 4.2 1156.3 1102.2 3.28 3.51 21.12 20.77 420 670 14.6 9.4 532.1 511.9 31 5 15.3 3.6 1433.• 3 1356.5 7.10 4.10 2.70 60.8 58.0 7.20 3.80 2.50 73.6 72.6 8.40 4.09 3.87 78.9 76.1 8.50 5.10 2.30 93.1 88.2 9.00 4.80 3.00 111.2 106.9 7.30 3.20 2.20 58.6 55.9 98.8 93.6 8•• 10 3.80 2.50 81.4 78.1 137.0 129.9 8.20 4.11 3.91 77.6 74.6 106.7 102.0 8.50 4.60 2.70 86.9 83.3 148.3 140.0 5490 4855 3885 561 85.6 9.70 4.40 2.80 108.1 105.1 195.4 187.9 6310 5940 4310 728 83.1 42 3-22 2-9 .•26 0 �-217- Table 7.--Measurements (em), Fresh Weights (g), and Volumes (cc), of Organs from 30 Female Deer-1962 (continued) .Date-Age-Wt Ratio-Organs Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt/Body Length Ratio Brain Long. Dia. Trans. Dia. Wt Vol Eyeball (Left) Long. Dia. Trans. Dia. Wt Vol Eyeball (Right) Long. Dia. Trans. Dia. Wt Vol Lung (Left) Wt Lung (Right) Wt Heart Long. Dia. Trans. Dia. Wt Vol Liver Long. Dia. Trans. Dd.a , Height Dia. Wt Vol Kidney (Left) Long. Dia. Trans. Dia. Height Dia. Wt Vol Kidney (Right) Long. Dia. Trans. Dia. Height Dia. Wt Vol Spleen Wt Vol Stomach Wt with Contents Rumen-Reticulum Wt with Contents Rumen-Reticulum Contents Wt (Wet) Rumen-Reticulum Contents Wt (Oven-dry) Per cent Moisture (Rumen-Retic. Contents) 50 5-16 1-11 .28 10.9 8.2 186.6 177.5 51 5-23 0-11 .22 10.6 7.4 175.2 170.5 2.97 3.3 16.51 15.76 Collection No. 09 56 6-23 6-27 2-0 5-0 .30 .30 11.5 186.1 180.1 57 7-9 2-1 .32 12.5 8.4 190.1 182.6 1-1 .23 10.0 6.2 171.6 167.6 3.13 2.65 14.58 14.15 3.14 3.25 16.91 16.57 3.29 3.34 16.62 16.09 2.85 3.22 14.57 14.09 3.10 2.86 16.73 15.93 320 500 13.0 8.7 468.3 445.0 26.7 15.4 3.2 1173.3 1105.3 3.16 2.79 14.49 13.80 220 460 11.8 8.3 353.7 339.0 24.7 16.0 3.5 920.0 864.5 2.96 3.29 17.50 17.01 190 850 17.5 12.4 479.7 455.1 30.1 17.3 6.8 1675.0 1505.5 3.18 3.10 16.78 16.32 31.0 16.3 3.2 1260.0 1181.0 2.85 3.04 14.05 13.51 480 795 12.4 9.5 344.5 334.5 26.0 13.4 3.7 980.0 922.5 7.90 4.70 2.60 90.4 82.8 7.00 3.90 2.50 73.6 69.7 9.30 5.20 4.10 144.5 137.6 9.00 5.20 4.20 103.6 99.16 8.00 4.50 3.50 92.7 87.2 7.90 4.70 2.60 88.5 81.5 165.4 164.8 3435 3075 2115 243 88.5 8.40 4.20 2.00 68.8 65.0 169.8 162.4 3355 2925 2545 355 86.0 9.10 5.00 4.30 141.5 135.0 256.4 244.5 6090 5630 4575 532 88.4 8.50 5.00 4.10 95.6 91.76 132.4 126.7 7930 7320 6090 755 87.6 8.40 4.10 3.30 86.7 83.1 130.2 126.0 4995 4525 3815 566 85.2 7.7 299 405 419.0 935.0 69.6 69.8 168.1 58 ·7-16 �,-218Table 7.--Measurements (em), Fresh Weights (g), and Volumes (cc), of Organs from 30 Female Deer--1962 (continued) Date-Age-Wt Ratio-Organ 59 7-23 3-1 •. 30 61 8-6 2-2 .29 11.4 8.2 190.2 182.2 Collection No. 62 64 8-13 8-27 2':'1 1-1 .26 .27 10.4 11.1 8.0 7.3 174.1 165.6 168.9 158.1 66 69 Collection Date (Month-Day) 9,-11 10-4 Estimated Age (Year-Month) 3-2 2-4 Eviscerated Wt/Body Length Ratio .35 .33 Brain Long. Dia. 12.0 11.3 Trans. Dia .• 8.2 7.4 Wt 236.0 191.3 215.9 Vol 229.9 208.7 185.3 Eyeball (Left) Long. Dia. 3.04 2.79 3.28 3.29 3.45 3.12 Trans. Df.a; 3.41 3.26 2.84 3.02 2.93 3.45 Wt 17 .97 16.33 15.28 17.13 18.92 18.43 Vol 17 .37 15.76 14.74 16.79 18.35 17.74 Eyeball (Right) Long. Dia. 3.12 2.77 3.28 3.32 3.20 3.19 Trans. Dia. 3.37 3.34 2.84 2.95 3.02 3.41 Wt 17.94 16.59 15.31 17 .36 18.61 18.01 Vol 17 .44 15.96 14.89 16.98 18.01 17.21 Lung (Left) Wt 560 440 530 455 410 Lung (Right) Wt 710 680 740 740 690 Heart Long. Dia. 14.9 14.8 15.0 14.8 14.9 15.3 Trans. Dia. 12.2 10.2 10.7 10.1 10.6 10.9 Wt 623.1 512.5 468.1 381.1 610.9 530.2 Vol 600.9 488.5 450.0 364.7 591.1 509.6 Liver Long. Dia. 32.8 26.2 25.0 30.2 30.4 30.0 Trans. Dia. 16.0 15.8 15.7 ·14.2 17.6 15.4 Height Df.a , 5.3 4.5 3.8 3.9 3.8 3.4 Wt 1715.0 1080.0 1215.0 1270.0 1520 .• 0 1360.0 Vol 1026.0 1149.1 1204.2 1440.0 1281.5 Kidney (Left) Long. Dia. 9.10 8.20 8.40 8.80 8.70 7.90 Trans. Dia. 6.80 5•. 30 5.00 5.00 5.40 4.90 Height Dia. 3.90 4.20 4.10 4.00 4.10 2.90 Wt 140.9 93.4 101.1 103.5 119.2 93.0 Vol 134.3 89.3 100.2 99.2 113.7 87.9 Kidney (Right) Long •.Dd.a , 9•. 60 8.60 8.60 8.90 8.90 8.00 Trans. Dia. 5.80 4.10 5.10 5.10 5.30 4.70 Height Dia. 4.90 3.70 4.10 3.90 3.50 3.70 Wt 150.1 93.8 113.4 109.9 118.9 85.7 Vol 142.5 87.8 108.4 105.2 113.3 82.3 Spleen Wt 238.1 150.6 186.1 105.8 156.3 171.4 Vol 226.4 142.2 176.4 100.0 149.3 163.2 Stomach Wt with Contents 10440 4770 5620 8990 9790 6940 Rumen-Reticulum Wt with Contents 9235 4230 6350 . 5160 8170 8690 Rumen-Reticulum Contents Wt (Wet) 7675 3120 3970 6620 7500 5460 Rumen-Reticulum Contents Wt (Oven-dry) 960 287 468 803 929 807 Per cent Moisture (Rumen-Retic. Contents) 87.5 90.8 88.2 87.9 87.6 85.2 �-219- Table 7.--Measurements (cm), Fresh Weights (g)1 and Volumes (cc), of Organs from 30 Female Deer--1962 (continued) Date-Age-Wt RatiO-Organ 7l 10-18 0-4 .27 11,,2 8.2 163.7 146.9 Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt/Body Length Ratio Brain Long. Dia. Trans. Dia .. Wt Vol Eyeball (Left) Long. Dia. 2.70 Trans. Df.a , 2.98 Wt 12.78 Vol 12.31 Eyeball (Right) Long. Dd.a , 2•. 66 Trans. Dia. 2.97 Wt 12.60 Vol 12.16 Lung (Left) Wt Lung (Right) Wt Heart Long. Dia. Trans. Dia •. Wt Vol Liver LOIig. Dia. 28.0 Trans .•Dia. 13.3 Height Dia. 4.9 Wt 790.0 Vol 724.0 Kidney (Left) Long. Dia. 7.72 Trans. Dd.a , 3.63 Height Dia. 3.58 Wt 68.9 Vol 58.51 Kidney (Right) Long. Dia. 8.05 Trans. Dia. 3.50 Height Dia. 3.61 Wt 68.3 Vol 58.3 Spleen Wt 95.7 Vol 79.7 Stomach Wt with Contents 3950 Rumen-Reticulum Wt with Contents 3630 Rumen-Reticulum Contents Wt (Wet) 3080 Rumen-Reticulum Contents Wt (Oven-dry) Per cent Moisture (Rumen-Retic. Contents) ~Slight1y damaged 72 10-23 3-4 .• 32 10.6 7.7 165.0 158 4 0 Collection No. 73 75 11-15 11-28 9-5 9-5 .31 .32 11.0 12.38 8.0 7.87 178.4 204.3 174.4 198.3 77 12-12 4-6 .29 11.2 6.9 177.3 171.0 79 12-26 9-6 .28 11.19 7.48 185.7 178.8 3.08 3,,38 18.75 18 .• 12 3.46 3,,22 18.91 17.91 3.39 3.17 19.44 19.0 3.35 3.10 18.81 18.32 3.50 3.39 20.03 19.58 2.86 3.27 19.06 18.42 450 550:' 13.3 9.1 460.0 443~7 28.4 14 .• 5 3.4 1050.0 996.1 3.48 3.28 19.41 18.61 440 680 3.47 3.13 19.50 18.98 322 700 13.5 12.0 560.8 539 •. 5 28.1 14.3 3.7 1240.0 1175.2 3.30 3.16 18.85 18.22 400 730 14.1 10.9 431.1 424.0 28.2 14.3 2.4 1030.0 967.5 3.56 3.17 19.56 18.94 515 710 14.0 9.4 378 .• 6 36L.8 26.3 15.0 3.1 960.0 900.7 31.0 16.0 4.5 1150.0 7.98 4.15 3.59 80.1 77 ,,1 8.60 4.72 4.14 85.5 83.9 8.30 5.06 4.30 107.6 103.6 7.80 3.90 2.30 71.3 68.4 8.28 5.02 4,.12 94.4 89.0 8.40 3.97 3.79 78.5 76 .• 1 120.3 116.9 8010 7230 6230 8.74 4.54 3.55 93.9 9l.7 139 •. 5 134.8 9085 8175 7115 8.68 4.78 4.49 107.1 103 .• 2 156.8 149.7 7500 6800 5780 8.0 4.0 3.0 72~2 69.3 135.7 128.1 6835 6105 5280 907 83.0 8 .• 60 5.04 3.96 98.4 93.3 105.9 98,,9 �-220- Table 8.--Measurements (em), Fresh Weights (g), and Volumes (cc), of Endocrine Glands from 19 Male Deer--1962 Date-Age-Wt Ratio-Gland Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt/Body Length Ratio Adrenal (Left) Long. Dia. Trans. Dia. Height Dia. Wt Vol Adrenal (Right) Long Dia. Trans. Dia. Height Dia. Wt Vol Thyroid (Left) Long Dia. Trans. Dia. Height Dia. Wt Vol Thyroid (Right) Long Dia. Trans. Dia. Height Db. Wt Vol Thymus (Left) Long Dia. Trans. Dia. Height Dia. Wt Vol Thymus (Right) Long Dia. Trans. Dia. Height Dia. Wt Vol Pituitary Long Dia. Trans. Dia. Wt Vol 32 1-9 1-7 .24 39 2-27 3-8 .31 Collection No. 40 43 3-8 3-29 0-10 1-9 .26 .21 44 4-5 4-10 .35 49 5-9 1-11 .27 2.96 1.07 0.67 1.86 1.84 3.07 1.58 0.69 2.36 2.18 2.62 1.55 0.58 2.00 1.98 2.72 1.57 0.49 1.73 1.68 3.71 1.64 0.73 3.89 3.64 2.76 1.71 0.78 2.96 2.87 2.68 1.82 0.58 2.17 2.13 2.41 1.25 0.50 3.45 2.00 0.85 3.65 3.40 2.65 1.87 0.82 3.01 2.81 3.13 1.36 0.60 2.04 2.01 5.00 1.05 0.56 1.17 1.13 3.92 1.93 0.51 2.28 2.03 3.64 1.26 0.58 1.98 1.97 3.66 1.25 0.61 1.92 1.82 5.04 1.55 0.61 3.44 3.29 3.57 1.47 0.73 2.53 2.49 4.41 1.18 0.41 1.10 1.07 4.33 1.44 0.69 2.16 1.93 4.23 1.33 0.53 2.17 2.10 3.50 1.37 0.60 2.03 1.90 5.20 1.59 0.63 3.20 3.05 3.66 1.53 0.73 2.40 2.33 6.28 0.71 0.36 0.87 0.83 5.90 1.28 0.39 2.14 2.02 3.66! 0.35 0.28 0.27 0.22 8.25 2.28 0.66 4.93 4.65 7.21 1.04 0.37 1.16 1.14 4.27 1.80 0.60 2.29 2.16 0.95 0.32 0.20 0.19 ! Probably includes both left and right thymus 1.07 0.67 0.30 0.29 1.17 0.60 0.28 0.27 1.10 0.49 0.29 0.28 6.66 1.42 0.73 5.38 5.12 0.95 0.92 0.56 0.47 1.15 0.83 0.40 0.39 �-221- Tab1e.8.--Measurements (em), Fresh Weights (g), and Volumes (cc) of Endocrine Glands from 19 Male Deer--1962 (Continued) Date-Age-Wt Ratio-Gland Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt/Body Length Ratio Adrenal (Left) Long. Dia. Trans. Dia. Height Dia. Wt Vol Adrenal (Right) Long. Dia. Trans. Dia. Height Dia. Wt Vol Thyroid (Left) Long. Dia. Trans. Dia. Height Dia. Wt Vol Thyroid (Right) Long. Dia. Trans. Dia. Height Dia" Wt Vol Thymus (Left) Long. Dia. Trans. Dia. Height Dia. Wt Vol Thymus (Right) Long. Dia. Trans. Dia. Height Dia. Wt Vol Pituitary Long. Dia. Trans. Dia. Wt Vol 44- A1?norma1 growth on both ends 52 5-30 0-11 .23 53 6-6 1-0 .24 Collection No. 54 55 60 6-13 6-20 7-30 2-0 2-0 5-1 .33 .34 .51 63 8-20' 1-2 ,,28 65 9-5 7-3 .50 2.20 1.35 0.57 1.48 1.43 2.75 1.33 0.57 1.66 1.54 2 60 1,,91 0,,81 2.65 2.54 2.79 1".43 0 .• 84 2.15 2 04 3.24 1.70 1.07 4.28 3.88 3.18 1.35 0.86 2.46 2.32 3,,16 1.61 1.26 4.46 4.21 2.75 1,,61 0.73 2.80 2.69 2.58 1.61 0.83 2.30 2.23 2.95 1.71 1.27 4.25 3.85. 2.55 1•. 39 0.99 2.16 2.09 3.10 1.56 1.37 4.77 4.45 2.08 1.30 0.66 1.68 1.65 0 0 5.19 1.18 0.45 1.80 1.66 5.35J4 1.80 0.98 4.09 3.70 5.08 1.25 0.55 1.73 1.68 5.83 1.40 0.79 3.36 3.30 4.07 1.79 0.73 2.89 2.68 4.41 1.65 0.95 2.98 2.81 4 .• 26 1.59 0.74 2.72 2.46 3.32 1.10 0.47 1.33 1.28 4.03 1.87 0.85 4.00 3.74 4.20 1.68 0.68 1.69 1.68 5.81 1.87 0.88 3.40 3.20 3.97 1.86 0.67 3.24 2.96 4.48 1.87 0 79 3.12 2.91 3.78 1.75 1.00 3.07 2.87 12.28 2.69 0.93 10.69 10.28 10.62 2.14 0.79 11.47 10.84 1096 3.05 0.59 7.12 6.83 10,,31 2.69 0.96 10,,32 9.88 8.14 2.96 0.39 3.48 3.26 13.40 2.49 1.50 12.27 11.69 9.50 3.09 1.28 11.59 10.95 10.07 2.32 1.02 10.37 9.81 6.87 2.29 0.78 6.80 5.53 9.78 1.67 1.00 9,,91 9.42 6.12 1.17 0.39 2.03 1.80 12.39 1.57 0.95 6,,77 6,,47 0.80 0.70 0.32 0.31 1.31 0.84 0.79 0.76 1.29 0.80 0.48 0.45 1.19 1.14 0.92 0.70 1.04 1.36 1.34 0.99 1.30 0.82 0.31 0.24 0 1.30 1.19 1.00 0.89 �-222Table 8.--Measurements (em), Fresh Weights (g), and Volumes (cc) of Endocrine Gland from 19 Male Deer--1962 (Continued) 67 9-18 1-3 .31 68 9-27 1-3 .26 Collection No •. 76 70 74 12-5 10-10 11-21 2••6 0-6 1-4 .18 .35 .29 Z8 12-19 4-6 .38 2.19 1.44 0.77 1.92 1.62 2.66 1.57 0.83 2.41 2.24 2.51 1.43 0.70 1.81 1.63 2.99 1.60 0.86 2.88 2.73 2.44 1.36 0.83 1.39 1.33 3.19 1.32 0.88 2.66 2.53 2.38 1.27 0.78 1.84 1.55 2.78 1.37 0.91 2.29 2.12 2.57 1.41 0.75 1.76 1.54 2.61 2.09 0.81 2.61 2.52 2.55 1.18 0.73 1.30 1.29 3.24 1.43 0.90 2.92 2.82 4.46 1.19 0.56 1.52 1.34 3.24 1.34 0.43 1.22 1.12 3.69 1.02 0.47 1.05 0.84 3.92 1.35 0.66 1.73 1.65 4.13 1.22 0.18 1.98 1.91 4.24 1.34 0.60 1.99 1.90 4.83 1.24 0.57 1.69 1.34 2.87 1.37 0.58 1.23 1.11 3.14 1.29 0.55 1.27 1.12 3.50 1.45 0.65 1.88 1.76 3.10 1.15 0.63 1.45 1.40 4.12 1.48 0.68 2.32 2.09 8.93 1.68 0.35 4.44 4.09 9.13 1.15 0.58 1.85 1.75 6.25 0.73 0.23 0.85 0.69 6.52 2.87 0,,42 2.25 2.23 8.90 0.79 0.21 1.03 0.93 7.12 1.74 0.61 4.54 4.17 -* 0.55 0.47 4.52 0.75 0.49 0.94 0.80 6.50 1.00 0.60 2.01 1.91 4.22 0.42 0 18 0.42 0.99 0.81 0.55 0.29 0.86 0.84 0.22 0.19 0.95 0.89 0.38 0.35 1.04 0.73 0.29 0.25 1.12 Date-Age-Wt Ratio-Gland Collection Date CMonth-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt/Body Length Ratio Adrenal (Left) Long. Dia. Trans. Dia. Height Dia. Wt Vol Adrenal (Right) Long. Dia. Trans. Dia. Height Dia. Wt Vol Thyroid (Left) Long. Df.a , Trans. Dia. Height Dia. Wt Vol Thyroid (Right) Long. Dia. Trans. Dia. Height Dia. Wt Vol Thymus (Left) Long. Dia. Trans. Dia. Height Dia. Wt Vol Thymus (Right) Long. Dia. Trans. Dia. Height Dia. Wt Vol Pituitary Long. Dia. Trans. Dia. Wt Vol * Perhaps damaged by bullet 1.03 0.97 0.45 0.43 0 0.3L~ LOO 0.72 0,,68 �-223- Table 9.--Measurements (em), Fresh Weights (g), and Volumes (cc) of Endocrine Glands from 30 Female Deer--1962 Date-Age-Wt Ratio-Gland Collection Date (!Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt/Body Length Ratio Adrenal (Left) Long. Dd.a , Trans. Dia. Height Dia. Wt Vol Adrenal (Right) Long. Dia. Trans. Dia. Height Dd.a , Wt Vol Thyroid (Left) Long. Dia. Trans. Dia. Height Dia. Wt Vol Thyroid (Right) Long. Dia. Trans •.Dia. Height Dia. Wt Vol Thymus (Left) Long. Dia. Trans. Dd.a., Height Dia. Wt Vol Thymus (Right) Long. Dia. Trans. Dia. Height Dia. Wt Vol Pituitary Long. D'La , Trans. Dia. Wt Vol 33 1-19 3-6 .32 34 1-23 9-6 .32 Collection No. 35 36 1-30 2-6 2-7 1-7 .29 .24 37 2-13 4-7 .30 ·38 2-20 4-8 .32 41 3-20 4-9 .27 3.08 1.77 0.59 2.79 2.64 2.99 1.44 0.90 3.15 2.99 1.98 1.39 0.80 1.71 l.68 2.01 1.38 0.66 1.72 l.63 2.27 1.54 0.78 1.82 1.74 2.85 2.12 0.80 3.02 2.82 2.90 1.53 0.84 2.72 2.49 2.49 1,,85 0.73 2.62 2.50 2.99 l.50 0.97 3.15 3.10 2.23 1.41 0.68 1.89 1.81 2.24 1.37 0.68 1.60 1.51 3,,03 1.45 0.72 2.11 1.96 2.90 1.43 0.73 2.68 2.45 2.91 1.64 0.85 2.97 2.71 4.56 1.45 0.55 2.68 2.55 4.61 1.44 0.60 2.54 2.46 4.11 l.58 0.50 2.32 2.29 4.15 1.20 0.46 l.37 1.28 5.68 1.25 0.60 1.88 1.79 4.46 1.40 0.43 l.27 1.18 4.21 1.22 0.38 1.79 1.62 3.60 2.03 0.55 2.75 2.53 4.90 l.57 0.69 3.10 2.95 4.99 1.69 0.51 2.74 2.68 3.48 l.16 0.43 1.09 1.05 4.55 1.62 0.52 2.05 1.95 4.20 1.57 0.36 1.39 1.27 4.34 l.22 0.35 1.80 1.56 5.88 0.73 0.20 0.63 0.61 !2.19 0.50 0.26 0.20 0.195 H3.23 0.65 0.15 0.20 0.19 4.18 0.61 0.19 0.40 0.39 ~2.52 . 0.40 0.26 0.17 0.165 0.94 0.85 0.31 0.30 1.10 0.91 0.38 0.375 1.19 0.70 0.42 0.41 1.20 0.85 0.73 0.72 .. Left and right thymus not distinguishable I ~~Probably includes both left and right thymus 0.92 0.89 0.46 0.45 1.06 0.98 0.65 0.62 0.95 0.93 0.52 0.50 �-224Table 9.--Measurements (em), Fresh Weights (g), and Volumes (cc), of Endocrine Glands from 30 Female Deer--1962 (continued) 42 3-22 2-9 .26 45 4-12 5-10 .27 Collection No. 48 46 47 4-26 5-2 4-20 11-11 8-10 2-10 .33 .33 .24 50 5-16 1-11 .28 51 5-23 0-11 .22 2.52 1.25 0.83 1.88 1.76 2.75 1.82 0.81 2.89 2.77 2.70 1.45 0.74 2.50 2.42 . 2.99 1.45 0.74 2.41 2.34 2.99 1.88 0.92 3.96 3.85 2.88 1.50 0.73 2.48 2.42 2.41 1.79 0.49 2.04 1.75 2.39 1.27 0.99 1.86 1.76 2.40 1.50 0.87 2.56 2.46 2.90 1.59 0.76 2.47 2.37 2.73 1.30 0.81 2.17 2.12 3.17 1.94 1.03 4.21 4.06 2.40 1.50 0.74 2.24 2.09 2.55 1.61 0.63 1.83 1.56 4.62 1.28 0.50 2.02 1.92 2.96 1.54 0.49 2.05 1.96 3.20 1.34 0.66 2.01 1.93 5.59 1.40 0.69 3.11 2.98 3.55 1.39 0.49 1.74 1.70 3.14 1.49 0.64 1.84 1.72 3.60 1.50 0.56 1.77 1.45 4.24 1.53 0.48 .1.82 1.74 3.66 1.68 0.55 2.55 2.35 3.00 1.65 0.68 2.11 2.01 4.69 1.34 0.58 2.31 2.19 3.96 1.59 0.58 2.11 2.06 3.89 1.98 0.50 2.21 2.09 3.81 1.44 0.46 1.85 1.50 3.87 0.65 0.32 0.52 0.51 4.70U 0.40 0.15 0.41 0.40 8.38 2.53 1.05 7.99 6.55 3.56 0.87 0.38 0.51 0.49 12.28 2.56 0.68 15.32 14.63 6.20 2.70 0.70 6.53 6.11 2.58 1.08 0.46 0.54 0.51 9.07 2~19 0.71 7.92 7.30 1.26 0.98 0.62 0.42 1.40 1.20 0.79 0.78 Date-Age-Wt Ratio-Gland Collection Date ~onth-Day) . Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt/Body Length Ratio Adrenal (Left) Long. Dia. Trans. Dia. Height Dia. Wt Vol Adrenal (Right) Long. Dia. Trans. Dia. Height Dia. Wt Vol Thyroid (Left) Long. Dia. Trans. Dia. Height Dia. Wt Vol Thyroid (Right) Long. Dj.a. Trans. Dia. Height Dia. Wt . Vol Thymus (Left) Long. Dia. Trans. Dia. Height Dia. Wt Vol Thymus (Right) Long. Dia. Trans. Df.a', Height Dia. Wt Vol Pituitary Long. Dia. Trans. Dia. Wt Vol HProbably 2.78 0.83 0.20 0.26 0.25 1.06 0.95 0.56 0.55 1.20 0.83 0.65 0.63 inclUdes both left and right thymus 1.20 0.96 0.67 0.52 1.04 0.99 0.60 0.50 1.06 0.68 0.32 0.29 �-225- Table 9.--Measurements (em), Fresh Weights (g), and Volumes (cc), of Endocrine Glands from 30 Female Deer--1962 (continued) Date-Age-Wt Ratio-Gland Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt/Body Length Ratio Adrenal (Left) Long. Dia. Trans. Dia. Height Dia. Wt Vol Adrenal (Right) Long. Dia. Trans. Dia. Height Dia. Wt Vol Thyroid (Left) Long. Dia. Trans. Dia. Height Dia. Wt Vol Thyroid (Right) Long. Dia. Trans. Dia. Height Dia. Wt Vol Thymus (Left) Long. Dia. Trans. Dia. Height Dia. Wt Vol Thymus (Right) Long. Dia. Trans. Dia. Height Dia. Wt Vol Pituitary Long. Dia. Trans. Dia. Wt Vol 09 6-23 2-0 .30 1.67 1.73 8.31 3.11 Collection No. 58 59 7-16 7 -23 1-1 3-1 .23 .30 56 6-27 5-0 .30 57 7-9 2-1 .32 3.27 1.70 0.61 3.33 3.09 2.89 1.69 0.54 2.67 2.54 2.52 1.64 0.70 2.15 1 .• 97 3.46 2.05 0.87 4.33 4.08 2.61 1.54 0 •. 95 2.15 2.02 4.07 1.44 0.83 1.78 1.77 61 8-6 2-2 .29 62 8-13 1-1 .26 2.85 2.78 2.93 1.42 0.90 2.68 2.25 2.24 1.39 0.71 1.42 1.26 2.35 1.45 0.78 2.03 1.88 2.89 1.57 1.10 3.03 2.85 2.79 1.57 1.01 2.74 2.33 2.26 1.43 0.79 1.49 1.28 4.28 1.57 0.54 2.74 2.50 3.76 1.07 0.75 1.77 2.17 4.00 1.28 0.66 1.59 1.53 4.41 1.84 0.69 2.60 2.28 5.27 1.44 0.88 3.50 3.21 4.16 1.45 0.57 1.89 1.78 3.37 1.71 0 .. 76 2.99 2.81 3.58 1.55 0.78 2.52 2.33 3.37 1.50 0.68 1.73 1.65 4.65 1.78 0.76 2.54 2.23 3.99 1.78 0.81 2.81 2.53 8.35 1.42 0.25 1.99 1.99 13.40 1.30 0.39 3.43 3.34 7.78 2.38 0.82 7.81 7 .. 35 9.59 2.. 26 0.48 4.99 4.77 10.47 3.58 0.61 13.61 12.84 9.45 3.55 0.99 15.49 14.52 6.73 0.57 0.26 0.63 0.63 12.89 1.58 0.38 3.41 3.27 7.06 1.99 1.08 7.94 7.45 7.73 1.82 0.69 4.07 3.80 8.84 2.39 1.08 12.04 11.26 8.29 3.20 1.68 13.43 12.51 1.42 0.93 1.08 1.08 1.28 1.06 0.77 0.74 1.09 0.91 0.52 0.37 1.47 1.28 0.90 0.82 1.17 0.97 0.72 0.42 0.90 0.89 0.39 0.20 �-226Table 9.--Measurements (c«V, Fresh Weights (g), and Volumes (cc) of Endocrine Glands "from 30 Female Deer--1962 (continued) Date-Age-Wt Ratio-Gland Collection Date ~onth-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt/Body Length Ratio Adrenal (Left) Long. Dia. Trans. Dia. Height Dia. Wt Vol Adrenal (Right) Long. Dia. Trans. D'La, Height Dia. Wt Vol Thyroid (Left) Long. Dia. Trans. Dia. Height Dia. Wt Vol Thyroid (Right) Long. Dia. Trans. Dia. Height Dia. Wt Vol Thymus (Left) Long. Dia. Trans. Dia. Height Dia. Wt Vol Thymus (Right) Long. Dia. Trans. Dia. Height Dia. Wt Vol Pituitary Long. Dia. Trans. Dia. Wt Vol 64 8-27 2-1 .27 66 9-11 3-2 .35 69 10-4 2-4 .33 Collection No. 71 72 73 10-18 10-23 11-15 0-4 3-4 9-5 .27 .32 .31 75 11-28 9-5 .32 77 12-12 4-6 .29 79 12-26 9-6 .28 2.58 1.56 0.67 2.35 2.26 3.03 1.82 0.60 2.65 2.52 2.77 1.49 0.78 2.30 2.13 2.54 0.98 0.89 1.25 1.17 "2.61 1.27 0.74 1.83 1.77 2.18 1.66 0.97 2.21 1.96 2.70 1.53 0.88 2.45 2.33 2.53 1.42 0.77 2.28 2.15 2.58 1.48 0.81 2.32 2.23 3.00 1.54 0.69 2.21 2.06 2.80 1.78 0.97 2.78 2.61 2.61 1.45 0.87 2.24 2.07 2.50 1.10 0.82 1.13 1.08 2.31 1.38 1.00 1.68 1.61 2.51 1.73 0.93 2.50 2.13 2.29 1.70 1.10 2.48 2.38 2.63 1.25 1.05 2.23 2.06 2.64 1.35 0.88 2.30 2.18 4.29 1.17 0.48 1.75 1.71 4.26 1.38 0.65 2.00 1.84 4.73 1.71 0.99 4.39 4.05 4.15 0.83 0.43 0.96 0.91 3.63 1.11 0.52 1.33 1.29 5.91 1.29 0.58 2.66 2.32 3.89 1.36 0.57 1.88 1.82 4.43 0.87 0.45 1.19 0.87 4.49 1.02 0.73 1.97 1.89 4.93 1.27 0.65 2.10 2.06 3.08 1.26 0.65 1.78 1.66 4.49 1.72 0.72 4.00 3.67 3.81 1.08 0.49 0.98 0.94 4.62 1.11 0.53 1.56 1.52 5.73 1.18 0.54 2.46 2.19 4.59 1.50 0.69 2.40 2.32 3.36 1.56 0.46 1.46 1.16 3.67 1.41 0.56 1.91 1.82 6.37 1.41 0.29 3.33 3.18 6.19 1.48 0.45 2.20 2.06 8.77 1.46 0.69 3.89 3.68 4.34 0.77 0.34 0.52 5.43 1.75 0.37 2.80 2.71 4.75 1.12 0.32 1.17 1.08 5.50 1.00 0.49 1.83 1.71 2.48 0.45 0.23 0.17 1.00 0.80 0.44 0.37 1.37 1.19 0.82 0.69 1.18 0.81 0.47 0.28 *Too much fatty tissue to obtain volume measurement -* -* 0.93 0.82 0.29 0.20 1.10 1.10 0.62 0.60 1.34 0.93 0.64 0.39 1.64 1.09 0.85 0.80 1.25 1.22 0.71 0.69 1.28 0.80 0.67 0.53 �Table 10 --Indices o of Physical Condition and Bone Structure for 21 Male Deer--1962 Date-Age-Index Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (year-Month) Eviscerated Wt/Body Length Ratio Kidney Fat Index (%H Depth of Back Fat (mm.)~ Bone ¥~rrow Fat ~)~~ Bone Marrow Co1or* Esto Eviscerated Carcass Fat ~)** Cannon Bone (Right) Length (mm) Width (mm) Fresh Wt (g) Per cent of Brain Wt 32 1-9 1-7 ,,24 8,,3 39 2-27 3-8 .31 14.5 Collection No. 40 43 3-8 3-29 1-9 0-10 .26 ••21 8.9 7.5 44 4-5 4-10 .35 202 72.2 89.9 73 .• 5 61•. 3 6.4 205 16 •. 6 85 47 •. 9 221 18.,4 113 54 •. 8 203 17•. 3 85 47.9 197 15.8 73 43,,6 224 21•. 8 134 74 9 07 4-27 0-10 4,,0 0 o I\) --~4~9----------5~2~--------~53~--------~0~8--------~5~4-·--------~5=5~~ Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (year-Month) Eviscerated lvt/Body Length Ratio Kidney Fat Index (%):,. Depth of Back Fat (mm)~ Bone ~~rrow Fat (%)~~ Bone }1arrow Co1or* Est. Eviscerated Carcass Fat ~)** Cannon Bone (Right) Length (mm) Width (mm) Fresh Wt (g) Per cent of Brain Wt r fRiney ~~(Assn~ Agric. Chemop 1960) * (Munsell, 1960) **(Behnke, 1962) 5-9 1-11 .27 3.8 0.0 17•. 0 5-30 0-11 u23 7.1 0.0 34.1 5R5/12 15.5 6-6 1-0 .24 0.0 2109 5R4/14 13.9 207 1706 94 47.2 194 15.9 80 45,,2 195 16.6 80 44.9 6-10 1-0 701 - 6-13 2-0 .33 7 61.4 lOR8/4 17.0 6~20 2~O 034 11 3 4 83,,9 5R6/10 11 •. 2 216 18,,4 110 57 •. 4 224 17 .9 113 54,,4 8 •.7 0 I �Table 10.--Indices of Physical Condition and Bone Struc~ure for 21 Male Deer--~962 Date-Age-Index Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt/Body Length Ratio Kidney Fat Index (%)iDepth of Back Fat (nunH Bone Marrow Fat ('10.) ~'" Bone Marrow Co1or* Est. Eviscerated Carcass Fat (%)** Cannon Bone (Right) Length (nun) Width (nun) Fresh Wt (g) Per cent of Brain Wt Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt/Body Length Ratio Kidney Fat Index (%)iDep th of Back Fat (nun) ~ Bone Marrow Fat ('1~~iBone Marrow Co1or~ Est. Eviscerated Carcass Fat (%)** Cannon Bone (Right) Length (nun) Width (nun) Fresh Wt (g) Per cent of Brain Wt i-Riney (1955) ~~(Assn. Agric. Chem., 1960) (Munsell , 1960) **(Behnke, 1962) * 60 7-30 5-1 .51. 71.0 53 94.1 10R8/4 21.9 63 8-20 1-2 .28 17 .0 0 82.2 10R6/10 10.7 65 9-5 7-3 .50 52.9 39 90.2 5R10/1 27.3 202 19.3 108 54.9 206 17.0 94 51.8 210 19.1 114 69.2 - --- --76 19.7 12-5 0-6 .18 12.2 0 53.9 5R4/12 14.4 78 12-19 4-6 .38 6.2 0 55.1 5R6/10 11.8 195 18.1 92 49.0 153 15.3 57 42.3 218 17.7 105 57.3 74 11-21 2-6 .35 69.9 10 92.9 - (continued) Collection No. 67 9-18 1-3 .31 33.4 7 89.3 5R7/10 18.1 201 18.0 101 68.2 68 9-27 1-3 .26 20.2 4 78.5 5R7/8 10.2 -70 10-10 1-4 .29 57.6 12 89.3 5R8/4 15.5 202 18.0 90 47.9 198 16.5 86 49.8 I ro 0:> �Table ll.--Indices of Physical Condition and Bone St~ucture for 30 Female Deer--1962 Da te-Age-Index Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt/Body Length Ratio Kidney Fat Index (%H Depth of Back Fat (mm) b Bone Marrow Fat (%) H Bone Marrow Color* Est. Eviscerated Carcass Fat (%)~~ Cannon Bone (Right) Length (mm) Width (mm) Fresh Wt (g) Per cent of Brain Wt 33 1-19 3-6 .32 13.1 34 1-23 9-6 •. 32 67.4 Collection No .• 36 37 2-6 2-13 1-7 4-7 .30 .24 36 •. 9 38.3 38 2-20 4-8 .32 24.9 41 -------q:2 3-20 3-22 4-9 2-9 027 .26 28.9 31.3 90 9 - - 35 1-30 2-7 .29 69.5 96.3 95.7 90.4 97.0 85,,7 219 18.0 97 47 .• 6 209 17 5 93 56.4 206 16.5 80 45.1 - 0 0 - - 200 15.8 74 38 •• 4 95.3 - 196 17 .1 80 42.6 - 212 18,,7 99 53 •. 8 - 193 16.3 78 43.8 93.5 ee 208 15~0 74 41.7 I ro ro \0 I Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt/Body Length Ratio Kidney Fat Index (%) ~ Depth of Back Fat (mmH Bone Marrow Fat (%)l-b Bone Marrow Color* Est~ Eviscerated Carcass Fat C7J** Cannon Bone (Right) Length (mm) Width (mm) Fresh Wt (g) Per cent of Brain Wt HRiney, 1955) t~(Assno Agric~ Che~, * (Munsell, 1960) **(Behnke, 1962) 1960) 45 4-12 5-10 .,27 12,,7 77 .,0 46 4-20 8-10 .• 24 12 •. 8 0 82.7 47 4.,.26 2·-10 •. 33 19.2 3 80 •. 5 - - - - 207 17 ,,0 88 43 •. 1 181 16.8 67 41 •. 9 213 17 .3 99 54 •. 2 220 17.4 107 49.5 - - - - 48 5-2 11-11 •. 33 10.4 0 89 .• 1 50 5-16 1-11 .• 28 15,,3 1 88 2 5R7/8 - 51 5-23 0-11 022 6.7 0 48 .• 8 5R6/10 17.0 209 16.,9 81 43.4 190 15.0 67 38 .• 2 0 - 56 6-27 5-0 .30 3,,2 1 68.9 5R5/12 13 .. 9 - 214 17.6 93, 49.9 09 6-23 2-0 030 14 .• 5 - 61,,3 5R4/12 �Table ll.--Indices of Physical Condition and Bone Structure for 30 Female Deer--1962 57 7-9 2-1 .32 10.5 0 86.7 SR7/8 17.6 58 7-16 1-1 .23 6.7 0 19.1 5R4/4 8.7 59 7-23 3-1 .30 4.4 0 55.2 5R6/10 7.6 Collection No. 62 61 8-13 8-6 1-1 2-2 .26 .29 8.6 16.2 3 7 62.2 82.2 5R4/10 SR6/12 11.8 11.8 207 17.5 90 47.3 199 15.6 73 42.5 208 17 .9 95 40.3 208 17.9 91 47.8 71 10-18 0-4 .27 38.5 10 88.3 5R7/10 17.6 72 1Q-23 3-4 .32 43.7 4 94.3 5R8/4 13.9 73 11-15 9-5 .31 39.1 5 90.3 5R8/4 14.9 75 11-28 9-5 .32 20.4 8 91.2 10R8/6 12.3 77 12-12 4-6 .29 23.9 4 92.3 5R8/8 14.4 79 12-26 9-6 .28 28.7 10 89.8 SR10/2 17.0 179 . 16.2 66 40.3 206 6.8 92 200 17 .5 87 48.8 209 18.0 102 49.9 209 17 .0 93 203 17.1 86 46.3 Date-Age-Index Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (year-Month) Eviscerated Wt/Body Length Ratio Kidney Fat Index (%)~ nepth of Back Fat (mm)~ Bone Marrow Fat (%)H Bone Marrow Co1or* Est. Eviscerated Carcass Fat (%)** Cannon Bone (Right) Length (mm) Width (mm.) Fresh Wt (g) Per cent of Brain Wt Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt/Body Length Ratio Kidney Fat Index ('7 •• )~ Depth of Back Fat (mm)~ Bone Marrow Fat {%)H Bone Marrow Co1or* Est. Eviscerated Carcass Fat (%)** Cannon Bone (Right) Length (mm) Width (mm) Fresh Wt (g) Per cent of Brain Wt ~(Riney, 1955) ~~(Assn. Agric. Chem, , 1960) *(Munse11, 1960) **(Behnke, 1962) (continued) 5S.8 204 15.9 83 47.7 1 30.3 5R4/12 8.1 66 9-11 3-2 .35 10.9 0 84.3 SR7/8 9.2 69 10-4 2-4 .33 31.2 20 92.2 5R8/8 12.8 214 17 .2 90 . 50.3 200 17.5 89 41.2 198 16.7 85 44.4 64 8-27 2-1 .27 S.O I I\) co S2.5 I �Table l2.--Measurements Date-Age-Wt (mm) of Teeth and Mandibles from 29 Female Deer--1962 Ratio-Item Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt Ratio Length of Tooth Rowst Maxillary premolar-molar (Left) Maxillary premolar-molar (Right) Maxillary molar only (Left) Maxillary molar only (Right) Mandibular premolar-molar (Left) Mandibular premolar-molar (Right) Mandibular molar only (Left) Mandibular molar only (Rig1lt) Length of Left Mandibular Diastema Length of Left Ramus Collection No. 33 1-19 3-6 .32 34 1-23 9-6 .32 35 1-30 2-7 .29 82.9 81.9 47.8 47.8 89.7 90.5 55.5 56.9 71.9 231 77 .4 78 •. 2 44.0 44.5 89.2 89.3 55.5 55.0 73.5 221 86.0 83.0 50 •. 6 50.2 93.7 93.0 57.9 56.6 64.3 216 36 2-6 1-7 .24 77.3 77.0 45.0 44.8 85.2 85.0 59.0 58.5 59.0 202 37 2-13 4-7 .30 82.4 83.3 48.3 49.0 86 •. 5 87.0 54.5 53.5 66.7 220 38 2-20 4-8 .32 85.5 86.1 49.0 49.0 93.3 94.5 56.4 58.0 73.8 228 41 3-20 4-9 .27 79.3 79.0 45.3 46.2 89.5 89.5 56.1 54.1 64.5 ~ 210 co I-' I Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt Ratio Length of Tooth Rows: Maxillary premolar-molar (Left) Maxillary premolar-molar (Right) Maxillary molar only (Left) Maxillary molar only (Right) Mandibular premolar-molar (Left) Mandibular premolar-molar (Right) Mandibular molar only (Left) Mandibular molar only (Right) Length of Left Mandibular Diastema Length of Left Ramus 42 3-22 2-9 .• 26 45 4-12 5-10 .27 46 4-20 8-10 .24 47 4-26 2-10 .33 79.2 80.6 45.0 45.0 88.5 88.5 54.1 54.0 65.0 215 77 .4 77 .1 45.3 45.2 84.7 84.0 51.9 51.4 72.3 224 79.4 76.9 48.1 43.6 82.0 83.2 48.2 50.3 68 .• 3 210 80.8 81.4 46.5 47.0 90.0 89 .• 3 54.5 54.2 73.8 232 48 5-2 11-11 .33 82.3 82.1 48.1 48.1 91.2 92.4 55.3 56.1 75.6 235 50 5-16 1-11 .28 84.3 85.2 47.1 48.5 93.1 93.5 56.1 56.3 -65.3 220 51 5-23 0-11 .22 61.9 61.9 22.7 23.8 66.4 68.9 32.3 30.6 64.2 127 �Table 12.--Measurements Date-Age-Wt (mm) of Teeth and Mandibles from 29 Female Deer--1962 Collection No. Ratio-Item Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt Ratio Length of Tooth Rows t. Maxillary premolar-molar (Left) Maxillary premolar-molar (Right) Maxillary molar (Left) Maxillary molar (Right) Mandibular premolar-molar (Left) Mandibular premolar-molar (Right) Mandibular molar (Left) Mandibular molar (Right) Length of Left Mandibular Diastema Length of Left Ramus (Continued) 56 6-27 5-0 .30 57 7-9 2-1 .32 58 7-16 1-1 .23 80.7 80.9 47.0 45.8 88.0 87.2 54.5 53.0 72.8 226 80.5 80.5 45.9 46.0 88.9 89.0 55.9 55.7 61.3 212 67.8 65.7 42.1 41.5 72.1 72.0 35.5 36.0 61.1 191 59 7-23 3-1 .30 89.5 89.5 51.7 52.5 95.7 96.0 61.8 61.3 74.6 234 61 8-6 2-2 .29 62 8-13 1-1 .26 64 8-27 2-1 .27 82.3 82.2 46.9 46.9 ·88.3 88.7 53.3 53.3 61.9 208 68.9 68.7 32.5 32.8 66.3 66.6 33.0 34.0 69.0 197 87.7 92.0 49.5 49.0 93.6 84.8 59.3 57.9 69.6 225 66 9-11 3-2 .35 86.0 84.3 49.6 49.0 90.5 90.0 54.9 54.6 77.0 234 I I\) W I\) I Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt F~tio Length of Tooth Rows:. Maxillary premolar-molar (Left) Maxillary premolar-molar (Right) Maxillary molar (Left) Maxillary molar (Right) Mandibular premolar-molar (Left) Mandibular premolar-molar (Right) Mandibular molar (Left) Mandibular molar (Right) Length of Left Mandibular Diastema Length of Left Ramus 69 10-4 2-4 .33 71 10-18 0-4 .27 72 10-23 3-4 .32 73 11-15 9-5 .31 75 11-28 9-5 .32· 77 12-12 4-6 .29 79 12-26 9-6 .28 84.8 84.6 49.1 49.1 98.7 98.8 60.3 60.6 60.9 220 50.2 50.1 9.9 10.0 53.9 53.3 17.2 18.0 59.9 174 83.9 81.8 48.0 48.0 88.6 88.6 55.4 55.1 68.5 221 82.9 83.0 46.3 47.3 89.8 89.0 53.3 54.4 72.3 224 80.3 80.0 46.0 45.9 87.4 87.3 54.0 53.9 70.1 226 82.5 82.7 48.4 48.7 79.0 78.9 46.1 46.1 87.3 87.0 55.6 55.5 70.6 218 - 87.7 - 57.1 72.9 220 �Table 13.--Measurements Date-Age-Wt (mm) of Teeth and Mandibles from 19 Male Deer--1962 Ratio-Item Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt Ratio Length of Tooth Rows: Maxillary premolar-molar (Left) Maxillary premolar-molar (Right) Maxillary molar (Left) Maxillary molar (Right) Mandibular premolar-molar (Left) Mandibular premolar-molar (Right) Mandibular molar (Left) Mandibular molar (Right) Length of Left Mandibular Diastema Length of Left Ramus Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt Ratio Length of Tooth Rows: Maxillary premolar-molar (Left) Maxillary premolar-molar (Right) Maxillary molar (Left) Maxillary molar (Right) Mandibular premolar-molar (Left) Mandibular premolar-molar (Right) Mandibular molar (Left) Mandibular molar (Right) Length of Left Mandibular Diastema Length of Left Ramus (Continued) Collection No. 60 7-30 5-1 .51 63 8-20 1-2 .28 65 9-5 7-3 .50 67 9-18 1-3 .31 68 9-27 1-3 .26 72.3 72.3 35.2 35.1 69.5 69.4 34.8 69.8 70.4 33.0 33.0 6709 66 9 86.1 85.6 50.0 48.9 92.9 84.0 56.8 56.9 75.9 242 74.5 74.9 36.0 36.2 75.6 75.8 36.7 36.6 70.4 214 ·84.5 84.4 47.6 47.7 93.2 93.2 56.6 57.1 81.1 253 34 6 33",5 73 4 206 6.5.6 70 10-10 1-4 .29 74 11-21 2-6 .35 76 12-5 0-6 .18 78 12-19 4-6 .38 73.0 72.6 35.2 35.0 72.6 70.9 34.2 33.9 68.4 81.9 83.0 48.2 48.9 86.0 85.9 55.1 54.8 69.1 207 55.2 54.5 16.9 16.5 55.1 55.1 16.9 17 ,0 51.3 159 81.1 80.7 46.7 46.4 85.8 85.S" 53.9 54.2 73.9 213 - 0 0 0 33,,8 197 I ro w w I �Table 13.--Measurements Date-Age-Wt (mm) of Teeth and Mandibles from 19 Male Deer--1962 Ratio-Item Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt Ratio Length of Tooth Rows: Maxillary premolar-molar (Left) Maxillary premolar-molar (Right) Maxillary molar only (Left) Maxillary molar only (Right) Mandibular premolar-molar (Left) Mandibular premolar-molar (Right) Mandibular molar only (Left) Mandibular molar only (Right) Length of Left Mandibular Diastema Length of Left Ramus Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt Ratio Length of Tooth Rowst Maxillary premolar-molar (Left) Maxillary premolar-molar (Right) Maxillary molar only (Left) Maxillary molar only (Right) Mandibular premolar-molar (Left) Mandibular premolar-molar (Right) Mandibular molar only (Left) Mandibular molar only (Right) Length of Left Mandibular Diastema Length of Left Ramus = i Right side Collection No. 32 1-9 1-7 .24 3~ 2-27 3-8 .31 70.5 70.5 33.7 33.8 83.2 83.1 47 .. 8 46.8 61.lf 1974 85.4 85.9 49.4 49.1 94 .. 2 93.6 59 .. 6 59 .. 1 76.5 238 75.6 74.2 40.1 39.6 89.8 89.7 56.8 56.3 64.3 205 56.4 56.7 17 .6 17 .0 60.9 61.1 24.1 24.0 62.3 187 85.0 84.0 48.0 48.0 90.5 90.8 55.6 55.9 80.2 249 49 5-9 1-11 .27 52 5-30 0-11 .23 53 6-6 1-0 .24 54 6-13 2-0 .33 55 6-20 2-0 .34 68 .. 7 68.6 31.2 31.8 70.2 70.4 33.0 32.8 66.3 196 63.0 63.6 24.5 25.9 70.6 69.5 32.6 32.5 66.0 196 78.9 78.9 42.2 42.3 83.7 82.5 49.5 48.2 60.2 211 40 3-8 1-9 .26 43 3-29 0-10 .21 86.8 87.5 50.8 50.5 95.0 95.2 59.2 59.3 68.3 228 44 4-5 4-10 .35 89.1 88.6 50.7 50.6 97.9 93.5 59.9 59.7 70.7 234 I I\) co +='" I �Table l4.--Statistical Description of Four Blood Elements Sampled from the Poudre Mule Deer Herd in 1961-62. Statistic Bz Sex+ Male Female Blood Element N X' SD C. V.(%) N X SD C. V. (i'~) Erythrocytes (millions/nnn3) 24 11.27 4.05 35.9 39 10.37 2.75 26.5 Leucocytes (hundred s/nnn3) 24 32.•89 10.47 31.8 38 31.89 9•. 05 28.4 I ro Packed Cell Vol. 24 46.7 8.•03 17 .2 40 45 0 0 7.25 16•.1 24 15.27 3.21 21.0 40 15.05 2•.90 19.3 (%) Hemoglobin (g/lOO ml) + Includes all age groups; from four months to over nine years of age and collected year-round. The blood sample is aspirated from the heart, one to 12 minutes after death. EDTA is the anti-coagulant. Analyses performed in the laboratory of the Cooperative Wildlife Research Unit or in the College of Veterinary Medicine laboratories, Colorado State University, Fort Collins. UJ \.J1 I �Table l5.--Comparative Blood Values in (Odocoileus heminous) from California, Montana; coastal British Columbia, and Colorado. Subspecies - Method of collection 43 e 5-~--(8:-1) 17.2 (2.3) 39.6 (7.7) 14.1 *Jawbone o.h. ca1ifornica (Some shot,-some live-trapped) *.2..~.columbianus (Shot) (1.9) (1.8) (2.0) (2.3) 47.2 48.5 51.1 49 .• 1 (10.1) . 5 10.3 9.5 10.5 9.7 (9.6) (9.9) (6.0) 15.0 15.4 17.7 16.8 *o.h. columbianus (Shot) *o.h. columbianus (Shot) *o.h. hemionus (Shot) *o.~. hemionus (Shot) 10 9.2 (2.8) 39.6 (4.8) 12.8 (2.3) +,£..h.hemionus (Shot) 39.9 40.2 57.5 59.1 (7.8) (9.3) (7.8) (5.9) 10.2 10.6 13.7 14.9 (2.4) (2.5) (3.4) (3.4) **o.h. columbianus **o .• h. columbianus **o.h. columbianus **o.h. columbianus Sex Season N F Yr.long 74 10.7 (1.9) Feb.May Yr.long F Yr.long F 10 mos. F 6 mos , F Dec.F Aug. M,F JulySept. 53 10.1 48 48 50 F M F M F * + ** f+ Feb.Dec. Feb.Dec. Yr.long Yr.long Mean and Standard Deviation Leucocyte 3 Packed Cell Vol. (thousands/nun ) (%) Hemoglobin (g/ml) Erythrocyte 3 (millions/nun ) -- 3.3 (1.0) 37A 37B l4A l4B (Live) (Live) (Live) (Live) 14 8.0 (2.8) 4.7 (2.7) 12.1 (3.5) f+o.h. hemionus (Shot) 15 8.7 (3.4) 3.3 (1.9) 13 .• 9 (1.8) f+o.h. heminous (Shot) 24 39 11.3 10.4 (4.1) (2.8) 3.3 3.2 (1.0) (0.9) 15.3 15.0 (3.2) (2.9) 46.7 45 .• 0 (8.0) (7.3) -- o.h. heminous (This study) o.h. heminous (This study) (Ros-enand Bischoff, 1952).- Potassium oxalate was the anticoagulant. Blood in the shot deer from the jugular vein. Deer were "mature" f ema l.e s, Hemoglobin values were computed from per cent hemoglobin reported by these authors. (Browman and Sears, 1955). Heparin was the anticoagulant.. Blood from the "jugular or other large vein." Ages ranged from seven days to 8-9 years. Standard deviations were computed from their raw data. (Kitts~ et al., 1956). Potassium oxalate was the anticoagulant. Blood from the recurrent tarsal vein. (A) represents the high nutritional and (B) the low nutritional plane; 37 samples from 7 deer and 14 samples from 3 deer on each nutritional plane, with ages ranging from 20-100 days on the 37.sample group and 392-465 days on the 14 sample group. (Howell, et al~, 1959). No information given on the anticoagulant or point of blood collection. Means and SD co;Puted from the raw data. All age classes included. I I\) W 0\ I �-237of per cent body fat values of 47 deer collected from June 13, 1962 to May 27, 1963 has been presented at the 43rd Annual Meeting of the American Society of Mammalogists.~ Discussion Analysis and interpretation of the data collected thus far is not attempted, primarily because of inadequate sample sizes by sex, age class, and season. Secondarily, much of the statistical analysis will be unusually complex and specific methods are still not in the planning stage. A probable approach will be the use of one or more applications of the multivariate method (Blackith, 1961). As a matter of general interest, rable 15 has been prepared which summarizes descriptive statistics of four blood elements commonly reported in the literature. This is believed to be a fairly complete review of statistical information on these elements in mule deer. The mean values for each element obtained in this study are seen to be remarkably similar to those obtained elsewhere. Standard deviations are also similar except for the erythrocyte counts which tend to be somewhat larger in our sample. This is at least partially the result of including some extreme values which, however, were apparently valid. In the case of leukocytes, Rosen and Bischoff (1952) reported much divergence in individual total counts and extreme difficulty in differential counts and did not report their results. The very similar means and standard deviations of other leukocyte counts shown in Table 15 are, therefore, somewhat surprising. Moreover, no particular difficulty has yet been encountered in obtaining differential counts in this study.. Certain elements in the differential component such as eosinophils and monocytes are known to be indicators of stress in domestic animals (Schalm, 1962); and thus may aid in the interpretation of other physiological values. LITERATURE CITED Anderson, Allen E. 1962. Physical characteristics. pp 253-299. In 1962 Quarterly Report, Part 2. Work Plan 5, Job 1 completion report. Colorado Game and Fish Dept., Denver. Association of Official Agricultural Chemists. 1960. of analyses. Ninth Ed., Wash., D. C. 832 pp. Baird Associates. Mass. n.d. Flame photometer manual. Official methods Third Edition, Cambridge, Behnke, A. R. 1961. Comment on the determination of whole body density and a resume of body composition data. ~) Techniques for measuring body composition. Proceedings of a conference.-Quartermaster Research and Engineering Center, Nutik, Mass., June 22-23, 1959. National Academy of Sciences, National Research Council, Wash., D. C. 300 PP. Anderson, Allen E. and Dean E. Medin. 1963. Estimation of per cent body fat in mule deer by the densitometric method. Unpublished manuscript, 10 pp. (mimeo.) �-238Blackith, R. E. 1961. MUltivariate statistical methods in human biology. Sonderdruck, Medical Documentation 5(2):26-28. Browman, Ludvig G. and Howard S. Sears. 1955. Erythrocyte values, and alimentary canal, pH values in the mule deer. J. Mamm.~ 36(3):474-477. Dann, W. J. and K. A. Evelyn. 1938. Determination of vitamin A with the photoelectric colorimeter. Biochemistry J., 32(6):1008-1017. Gorne11, A. G., C. J. Burdawill, and M. M. David. 1949. Determination of serum proteins by means of biuret reaction. J. BioI. Chem., 177(2): 751-766. Hepler, O. E. 1958. Manual of clinical laboratory methods. Springfield, Illinois, 387 pp. C. C. Thomas, Howell, Barbara. 1959. Big Game Investigations. Part 3. In. Quarterly Report, Montana Coop. Wildlife Res. Unit. 10(1)f9-l0.~ontana State Univ., Missoula. (mimeo.) Kitson, R. E. and M. G. Mellon. 1944. Colorimetric determination of phosphorous as mo1ybdivanadophosphoric ac Ld, Indus t , and Engr. Chemistry, Analytical Ed., 16(6).379-383. Kitts, W. D., P. J. Bordy, A. J. Wood, and I. MeT. Cowen. 1956. Effect of age and plane of nutrition on the blood chemistry of the Columbian b1acktailed deer (Odocoi1eus hemionus Co1umbianus). A. Packed cell volume, sedimentation rate, and hemoglobin. Canadian J. Zoology, 34:477-484. Lewis, L. L. and ~ M.Ne1nick. 1960. Determination of calcium and magnesium with (ethylene dinitri1o) tetracetic acid. Analytical Chemistry, 32(1) :38-42. Maickel, Roger P. 1960. A rapid procedure for the determination of adrenal ascorbic acid. Application of the Sullivan and Clarke method to tissues .. Analytical Biochemistry, 1(6):498-501. Munsell, A. H. 1929-1960. Munsell book of color, pocket edition. Color Co., Inc., Baltimore, Md. Munsell Riney, Thane. 1955. Evaluating condition of free-ranging red deer Cervus elaphus with special reference to New Ze1and~ N.Z.J. Science and Tech., Sec. B~ 36:429-463. Rosen, Merton N¢ and Arthur I. Bischoff. 1952. The relation of hematology to condition in California deer. Trans. North American Wi1d1. Conference, 17 :482-496. Scha1m, O. W. animals. 1962. Leucocyte responses to disease in various domestic J. Amer. Vet ..Med. Assn., 140(6):557-563. Prepared by: Allen E. Anderson Da te January, 1964 ----------------~--~---------- Approved by: W~a~yn~e~W~.~S~an~d~f~o~r~t __~ _ Chief, Game Research �January, 1964 -239JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGIENT State of. C=.;O:,:LO=RADO:=..::-_ Project No. W-I05-R-3 Work Plan No. ~5 An Ecological Investigation of the :Cache la Poudre Deer Herd, Colorado ~:~P~h.y~s~i~o~l~o~g~i~ca~1_S~t~u~d=.:i~e~s~ _ Job No. 2 Period Covered: January, 1962--December, Personnel: :Reproductive Studies 1962. Allen E. Anderson and Dean E. Medin. Abstract: Selected measurements on portions of the reproductive tracts of 19 males, 29 females, and on 24 prenatal young collected for intensive study during 1962 are tabulated chronologically. Counts of the pigmented corpora lutea scars of pregnancy on 92 pairs of ovaries from deer 16-18 months of age and older collected at the check station during 1962 resulted in a mean of 1.30 per doe and 77 per cent of those examined had conceived. Excluding both fawns and 16-18 month age classes, the mean count was 1.59 and 93.1 had conceived. There were no significant differences (P • .05) between the 1961-1962 samples when these were compared by three age classes. Gestation period data, 1961-1962, indicated ovulation and fetal rates of 2.00 and 1.89 respectively, and the 19 females of reproductive age were all pregnant. Post-parturition examination of 24 potentially fertile females (196l-l962) suggest that 83 per cent had conceived or bore young and those which had not were in the 26-28 month age class. Of 36 fetuses collected, 1961-1962, 8 were of undetermined sex and the remainder had a sex ratio of 180:100 which did not differ from equality (P = .05). Nineteen conception dates, estimated from growth curves of prenatal young, occurred between November 23 and December 16; and 52 per cent of these occurred during the first week of December. Studies of testicular material from 33 males indicated: a strong linear correlation between mean testes volume and mean seminiferous tubule diqrneter, a weak linear correlation between testes and prostate gland weights, the yearlong presence of mature sperm in nearly all males of 23 months and older, and much more reliable information on the relative abundance, incidence, and the development of sperm from the histological study of seminiferous tubules as opposed to testicular sperm smears. �-240- Gross estimates of survival of the 1961 fawn crop were 62 percent during the first six months of life and 42 per cent from about 6 to 18 months. The 1962 fawn crop~survival estimate for the first 6 months of life was 64 per cent. There were no significant difterences (P - .05) between our combined 1961-62 samples of counts of the pigmented corpora scars of pregnancy, ovulation rate, and fetal rate with similar values from the Kaibab North herd in Arizona (corpora lutea counts) or mule deer in Utah (ovulation and fetal rates). ,Our fetal rate is believed to be unreliable because of small sample size. Acknowledgements: Mrs. Francis Lechleitner prepared and sectioned all the ovaries and testicular materila. She also made the measurements of seminiferous tubules and with Dr. R. R. Lechleitner, Dept. of Zoology, Colorado State University made the histological studies of the seminiferous tubules. Dr. Lechleitner stained, examined, and evaluated the sperm and vaginal smears. Mrs. Nancy Weeks and Mrs. Vonnie Campbell weighed and measured the ovaries and testes and made most of the testicular smears. We would like to thank all of these participants as well as the student assistants who helped in the field, check station, and laboratory, especially; Frank Abelard, Brent Baker, Thomas Hakonson, William F. Wallace, and John Wolloch. All of the dissection and gross morphological work was done in the laboratory of the Colorado Cooperative Wildlife Research Unit, Colorado State University. Recommendations: The job should be continued as described herein. It is again suggested that reliable fetal rate data can only be obtained by the collection of about 60 adult does during the gestation period. Objectives: Determine the reproductive pattern of the deer herd to provide data on: (a) morphology of the reproductive organs as related to age and season (b) tentatively, the relationship of productivity to the measured factors of the environment. Techniques Used: Most of the techniques outlined below are more fully described in Anderson (1962: 253-275). �-241- Reproductive Tract Collection Hunting Season Female reproductive tracts were donated by hunters at the check station during the 1962 season. Just prior to the season, hunter cooperation was solicited through various news media. At a temporary roadblock, about 3,000 Unit 19 hunters were briefed on the purposes and techniques of reproductive tract removal and given a diagram and instructions (Appendix 1) inside a polyethylene bag. At the station, the lower jaw was removed and identically-numbered tags attached to the lower jaw and reproductive tract. Tracts were trimmed of excess tissue and placed immediately in AFA fix.itive. In a few cases, the lower jaw was not available and these were classified as "unknown age." These data were used in the overall mean. Regular Collection Deer of both sexes were collected on a four per month basis. The gross morphology of portions of their reproductive tracts were studied in the laboratory. Laboratory Examination Age Estimation All deer from which reproductive material had been obtained were assigned to age classes on the basis of replacement and wear patterns of the mandibular dentition using the criteria of Robinette et al. (1957). The wear criteria are: (1) a ratio of relative wea~derived from measurements of the lingual heights and occlusal width (buccal)9 (2) lingual height of the molariform teeth, and.(3) comparison with photographs of the mandibular dentition from mule deer of known age. The ages estimated for animals with permanent dentitiod by these criteria may only be regarded as gross approximations since the knownage samples on which the criteria are based was very small. For example, the ratio of lingual height to buccal width is believed to the most reliable criterion, yet confidence limits (P = .05) for any age class exceed ± 2 years (Table 7 in Robinette ~ al. 1957). Ovaries No morphological data were obtained from ovaries taken during the hunting season. The ovaries of deer collected regularly were placed in physiological saline immediately after dissection. After draining and blotting, weight, volume and three measurements were obtained on each ovary_ Ovaries from both sources were fixed in AFA and stored in 80 percent �-242- alcohol. After embedding in celloidin, longitudinal, serial sections of about one millimeter thickness were cut with a razor blade from each ovary. Sections from each ovary were fastened together, wrapped in cheesecloth, labeled, and stored in 80 per cent alcohol. Ovaries prepared in this manner are suitable for both gross and histological-study of ovarian structures. Only gross examinations and counts of the pigmented corpora 1utea of pregnancy using the criteria of Cheatum (19g9) are reported herein. Histological examination of the ovarian material will be made if a qualified histologist becomes available. Female Reproductive Tract After dissection, the intact tract is placed in physiological saline. After draining, blotting, and removing the bladder and excess fat and tissue, the tract is weighed to the nearest gram. If gravid, the weight of the tract is obtained by subtracting the weight of the fetus(es} from the total weight. Measurements taken are those of Sears (1955) as shown in Figure 1. The tract is fixed in AFA and stored in 80 per cent alcohol for possible future study. Embryos and Fetuses When possible, the sex of the young was determined and recorded by left or right uterine horn. External body measurements were made and supplemented by morphological descriptions according to Armstrong (1950), Hudson and Browman (1959), and Morrison et al. (1959). After draining (washing and blotting for the larger fetuse;) each fetus was weighed and the volume determined. The age in days of each fetus es estimated using the growth curves of hind foot length, forehead-rump length, forehead rump/weight ratio and the left ear auricle as developed by Hudson and Browman (1959). A conception date is estimated from these values using the midpoint of the probable range. In the case of two or more fetuses the values were averaged to establish the probable range. Embryos are fixed in AFA and preserved in 80 per cent alcohol and fetuses are both fixed and preserved in 10 per cent formalin for possible future study. Vaginal smears were made within about 5 minutes of death using a dry cotton swab rotated against the walls of the anterior portion of the vagina. The swab was then rotated along the surface of a dry slide. The smear was allowed to air-dry and later stained with Wrights' for microscopic examination and identification of cell types. �-243- Ven~ral View (Bladder Removed) If-- 7 _ 6 INDEX Measurement 1. 2. 3. 4. Figure 1. uterine Horns Left Right uterine Body Med'tan Septum True Vagina Cervix Measurement No. Diameters Longitudinal Transverse 3 4 1 2 5 10 6 9 7 8 Schematic diagram of female reproductive tract showing measurements being taken as modified from Sears (1955). �-244- Male Reproductive Tract Following dissection, the intact tract is placed in physiological saline. After draining and blotting, each testis is measured, weighed, and their volumes determined. Dry smears (for the presence and absence of sperm) are made from bisected testis and epididymis. The prostate gland is drained, blotted, and weighed to the nearest 0.1 gram. These parts and the rest of the tract are fixed in AFA and stored in 80 per cent alcohol. Sections, 10 microns thick, were sliced with a rotary microtome from a wedge-shaped tissue block removed from one end of each testis. The tissue was processed through ethyl alcohol, toluol, and toluolparaffin solutions with about 24 hours in each, embedded in paraffin, stained in Harris' alum hematoxy1is and eosin Y; and mounted in piccolyte. Ten seminiferous tubules from each testis were measured with a lOX objective microscope using a lOX ocular with a calibrated ocular micometer (1 division O.M. 11.1 microns). Tubules measured were those seen in near perfect cross section and if oblique sections were measured, the smallest diameter was used. The mean of the 20 measurements was used as an index to seminiferous tubule development in each of 33 deer. The gross histology of the tubule was described for each testis examined. In order to elucidate seasonal sexual development, only the data from 26 animals, 12 months of age and older, are presented quantitatively. = Dry smears of testicular and epididymal sperm were made in the laboratory, generally 4 to 5 hours after death, by bisecting the organ and passing about 3/4 of the slide length across the freshly cut surface. The smears were allowed to air-dry and stained in Wrights' (eosin Y in number 78). Terminology The follOWing terms are defined and applied to a stated age component herein, according to the accompanying references. 1) fetal rate = total prenatal young total females (Robinette et a1., 1955) 2) ovulation rate = Total current corpora 1utea of pregnancy total females (Robinette et a1., 1955) 3) percent loss of ~ = 100- ( total prenatal young ) (total current corpora lutea of pregnancy) (Robinette et a1., 1955) 4) percent conceived = total females with C. 1. of pregnancy total females (Swank, 1958) �-245- REPRODUCTIVE STUDIES Allen E. Anderson Findings: During 1962, 19 males and 29 females of all age classes, were collected for intensive study. In addition, about 250 female reproductive tracts were collected at the check station during the 1962 hunting season. Of these, 108 were suitable for ovarian analyses. In addition to the regular collection, fragmentary reproductive data were obtained from two males (road-kills). All data omitted from the 1961 report (Anderson 1962: 303), are included herein .. Analysis of female material Hunting season ovarian analysis, 1961 Counts of the pigmented corpora lutea of pregnancy are tabulated by 7 age classes and an "unknown age" category in Table 1. These data provide an index to the rate 'and per cent of females conceiving during the 1961-62 breeding season. As in 1961,. sample sizes are inadequate but the most meaningful values are believed to be: 1) the mean (1.15) and the per cent conceiving (100) in the 2 year age class, 2) the mean (1.59) and per cent conceiving (93.1) in the mature age conponent, i. e., 2 years and older. Hunting season ovarian analysis, 1961-62 compared There were no significant differences (chi square analysis, 2 x 2 contingency table, P = .05) between the 1961-62 proportions of pigmented corpora lutea of pregnancy to the number of females in the 2, 3-4, and 2 years and older age component~. The 1962 mean corpora lutea per doe values were somewhat less, however, in most of the age classes. Reproductive tract morphology The individual measurements of the ovaries and reproductive tracts from 29 animals collected during 1962 are tabulated in Table 2. No attempt at analysis or interpretation of these data will be made until age class sample sizes increase. �-246Regular collection ovarian analyses, 1962 In Table 3, counts of the corpora lutea of pregnancy are compared to the prenatal young count in 13 females collepted January 9-May 16, 1962. All were of reproductive age (bred at 16-18 months) and there were 26 corpora lutea of pregnancy and 24 young recorded from this material. This is an ovulation rate of 2.00 and a fetal rate of 1.85. Of the 12 females of breeding age collected during the post-parturition period, there were 2 which had neither current corpora or lactating manunary glands. Counts of the pigmented corpora lutea of pregnancy thought to have originated during the 1960-61 breeding season are also cited in Table 3. These have small reliability for reasons explained in the table footnote. They do, however, indicate that in some individuals, the pigmented corpora lutea of pregnancy probably persist at least one breeding season beyond the conception date as postulated by (Robinette, 1958). Regular collection ovarian analyses-fetal rates, 1961-62 Gestation period data for 19 females of reproductive age over a 16 month period, indicates 38 current corpora lutea of pregnancy and 36 young for a per cent conceived, ovulation and fetal rates of 1.00, 2.00 and 1.89 respectively. Of the 24 females of reproductive age collected during the post-parturition period there were 4 or 16.7 per cent which did not have current or pigmented corpora lutea of pregnancy or lactatipg manunary glands. All were in the 26-28 month age class. One other young animal (14) had one current corpora lutea of pregnancy, but was not lactating. In 2 mature animals (29-30) collected during the December 1961 breeding season, current corpora lutea of pregnancy were present, but young could not be detected. It is possible that the young had resorbed in number 14, and were too small to be detected in 29 and 30. In a 2 year old lactating animal (10) collected on June 20, 1961, the only corpuslateum appeared too small and well pigmented to be of the 1960-61 breeding season. There was a 5.3 per cent loss of ova based on 36 prenatal young and 38 corpora lutea of pregnancy. Morphology of prenatal young, 1962 About 309 measurements of prenatal young are presented in Table 4. Their fresh weights ranged from 2.l2g-l,790g from mothers collected from January 19 to May 16, respectively. One female, estimated to be about 12 years of age (48) had 3 fetuses. One of these was less than one-half the weights of the others. It appeared to be living and otherwise norma 1. �-247Fetal sex ratios, 1961-62 Of the 36 young examined, 18 were males, 10 females, and 8 of undetermined sex. The latter were an'estimated 48-75 days of age, and ranged in weight from about 2g-60g. The sex ratio of the 28 was 180:100, which did not differ from equality (0.05) at the 5 per cent level of significance as estimated by the single classification chi square test. Uterine horn-fetal sex ratios, 1961-62 The same statistical test was used to detect significant departure from equality of the sexes in: 1) both uterine horn, 2) in each uterine horn, and 3) the proportion of all young in each uterine horn. None of the proportions thus tested differed significantly (P = .05) from equality. Estimated conception dates, 1961-62 The estimated conception dates cited in Table 4 are combined with those obtained in 1961 (Anderson, 1962:316). The 19 conception dates thus available were distributed in time by percentages of the total as follows: November 23-30, 21 per cent; December 1-7, 52 per cent; and December 8-16, 27 per cent. These dates cover a range of 24 days.'" Vaginal smears, 1961-62 There were 29 satisfactory slides examined, the smears of which contained mostly epithelial and leucocyte cells with some detritus. The epithelial cells were of 3 types: (1) rounded, large nucleus, (2) angular large nucleus, and (3) cornified, angu lar,', pycnotic nucleus. They occurred in 22, 18, and 11 smears, respectively. Leucocytes, primarily lymphocytes, occurred in 26 smears. None of the cells exhibited any apparent seasonal or age-related pattern and their possible relationship to the reproductive cycle is obscure, perhaps because of technique deficiencies. The smears from deer 41, collected on March 20, 1962, contained spermatazoa. Several smears contained erythrocytes with no apparent relation to season or age class. Analysis of male material Morphology of testes and prostate gland, 1962 Measurement, weights, and volumes of 21 pairs of testes and the weights of 14 prostate glands are found in Table 5. In mature animals �-248(12 months and older) weights of individual: testes ranged from 6;3g in early April to 32.4g in mid-October. A scatter diagram constructed from the prostate and testes weights suggests a linear relationship with a probable correlation coefficient of less than 0.65. The physiological implications therein, will be explored when larger samples are available. Chronological testes development, 1961-62 Mean testes volume and mean diameter of the seminiferous tubules are tabulated by month for 26 males of 12 months and older in Table 6. Their relationship within two arbritrary portions of the reproductive cycle are depicted in Figure 2. The relation appears to be linear with rather high correlation coefficients. In constructing this figure, no attempt was made to reduce the variable of body mass. Analysis of sperm, 1961-62 The incidence and relative abundance of sperm based on qualitative analysis of both smears and the histology of the seminiferous tubules are arranged chronologically in Table 7. Complete or partial material was available from 33 mule deer over an 18 month pe~iod. Examination of this table shows that sperm were present in many individuals, of 12 months and older, from June until August with one (60), possessing abundant sperm by August 1 even though the testes were well below breeding season weight. With one exception (5), some sperm was histologically detectable yearlong in those deer exceeding 23 months of age. In 7 deer, sperm were entirely lacking in the testes smears, but were observed by histological examination to be present in few to moderate numbers. When sperm were abundant, however, both techniques revealed essentially similar levels of abundance. As would be expected, smears of the epididymes revealed more sperm. than those of the testes. A comparison of Figure 2 with the data in Table 7 indicates that, while sperm per unit area (sections of seminiferous tubule) were still abundant during December, January, and February, testes volume and perhaps sperm volume declined rapidly from the October peak. Also, during this peak, spermatogenesis was still apparently occurring in some individuals. Fawn survival to 6 months (1962 crop) and 18 months (1961 crop) A gross estimate of the 1962 fawn survival to about 6 months old can be obtained by using the difference between the 1962 fawn:doe ratio (102:100) sampled by the late fall (1962) herd composition routes �-249- -NOV. 30- ·OCT. -DEC .. Prior -SEPT. to and During Br0Zding Azriods 20_AUG. •JULY "U 10- U •....•. W § 0- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - V> W t- V> W t- Z 30- « W z LatC2 Br~ding and Non-Br0Zding f'rzriods 20.FEB. -JAN. -APR. 10-f- -JUNE -MAY -MAR. 0 ..•. I I I I I 100 120 140 160 180 MEAN SEMINIFEROUS Figu~ 2.-- Chronological diarne ter- for TUBULE nzlationship of mean 26 mule deer; testes onC2 year DIAMETER VO/umC2to mean I I <MICRONS) seminiferous of agC2 and older -1961-62. tubulcz �-250~ (Anderson, 1963b) and the 1962 count of the 1961 pigmented corpor~ lutea of pregnancy (1.59). The loss, thus crudely inferred, is about 36 per cent or 64 per cent survival of the fawn crop in 1962 which compares favorably with the 1961 fawn survival of 62 per cent similarly derived (Anderson, 1962:301). The 1961 fawn crop survival from about 6 to 18 months old (Swank, 1958:79) can also be grossly estimated by assuming an equal sex ratio and negligible adult mortality. One-half of the fall, 1961, fawns per 100 does (89) (Anderson, 1962:301) is 44.5 and there were 18.8 yearling does per 100 adult does in the sample of the 1962 kill obtained at the check station (Anderson, 1963a). The difference between these estimates is 25.7 and this value divided by 44.5 yields a fawn loss of about 58 per cent or 42 per cent fawn survival. In summary, gross estimates by fawn crop year: 1962--a combined pre and post-natal survival of 64 per cent during approximately the first 6 months of life; 1961--a combined pre and post-natal survival of 62 per cent during approximately the first 6 months of life, and 42 per cent from about 6 to 18 months of age. Discussion: In general, sample sizes are yet too small to permit any more than tentative interpretations. Some of the more pertinent data will be discussed and statistical comparisons should be regarded with reservation since some of the combined annual data may well be heterogeneous. Hunting season ovarian analyses, 1961-62 The various analyses presented indicate that the reproductive performance of the Poudre herd was essentially the same during 1961-62. A comparison of combined 1961-62 Poudre corpora lutea count data with that from the Kaibab North herd (Swank, 1958:83) of Arizona (chi square test using 2 x 2 contingency tables at the 5 per cent level of significance) leads to the conclusion that there were no significant differences between these two samples. Gestation period ovarian analyses, fetal rates and sex ratios, 1961-62 Robinette ~ al. (1955:117) have summarized a large amount of gestation period data from Utah mule deer. A chi square analysis similar to that mentioned above leads to the conclusion that there were no significant differences (P = .05) in either fetal or ovulation rates between the 1961-62 Poudre, and the 1950-53 Utah samples. �-251- These authors also cite a sex ratio of 111:100 based on 1,169 live fetuses and Robinette (1956:420) reports 114:100 derived from a sample of 2,689 "fetuses and newly born fawns combined." ·No mention is made of the statistical equality of these ratios, although considerable discussion centers about the preponderance of males normally found in the prenatal young of mule deer. Mid-pregnancy fetal rates in Utah mule deer were reported to be 1.52 per doe (Robinette ~ al., 1955) while the average fetal rate was 1.50 in 5 western states with 86 per cent pregnant (Robinette, 1956:418). All of these values apparently include yearlings or animals conceiving at 16-18 months. Vaginal Smears, 1961-62 The described technique has been unsatifectory in elucidating the reproductive cycle. A new technique, using a vaginal speculum and an improved method of smear preparation has been suggested by Dr. R.R. Lechleitner, Dept. of Zoology, Colorado State University. Experimental work has been initiated with this method. Except for Sears' (1955) negative results with Montana mule deer, vaginal smears as applied to deer has not yet been noted in the literature. While vaginal smears have been used successfully in goats and domestic sheep, it is quite possible that the method may not be applicable in mule deer. It is hoped that further work will at least clarify this possiblilty. The male reproductive cycle in white-tailed deer·has been studied quantitatively by Wis10cki (1943) and Illige (1951). I know of no similar studies on mule deer. Increased sample sizes may eventually permit quantitative comparison of testicular, endocrine gland, and antler weight relationships. Fawn survival estimates, 1961-62 The statement made (Anderson, 1962:301) regarding fawn survival should have referred to the 1961 fawn crop rather that the 1960 crop as stated. The confusion arose from the breeding period, NovemberDecember, 1960, rather than the probab~ birth date, June, 1960. Obviously, environmental factors during the year prior to birth may be of considerable importance in interpreting net productivity .. An assessment of their probabl~ importance will be attempted in subsequent reports. �-252- Discrepancy in fetal rates and corpora lutea counts Since the 1961-62 fetal rate 1.89 exceeds the 1.59 corpora lutea of pregnancy per doe obtained from deer which had conceived in 1961, a question arises as to the validity of these values. It is my guess that the corpora lutea counts are more valid because of the very small sample the fetal rate is based on and there is'a definite hint of considerably less fertility from the post-parturition data. �-253- Literature Cited Anderson, Allen E. 1958. Deer Productivity studies. Job Completion Report, W-75-R-5. New Mexico Department of Game and Fish, Santa Fe, 27 pp. (mimeo.) ____________________________ 1962. Reproductive studies. Job Completion Report, WP5-J2, W-105-R-2. Pp. 301-318 in Quarterly Report, Part 2 Colorado Department of Game, Fish, and Parks, Denver. 161-339 pp (processed) _________~------~~_1963a Harvest analysis. Job Completion Report WP5-J2, W-l05-R-3, Colorado Department of Game, Fish, and Parks, Denver. __________~ --- 1963b Population Density and Structure. Job Completion Report, WP4-J2, W-l05-R-3, Colorado Department of Game, Fish, and Parks, Denver. Armstrong, Ruth A. 1950. Fetal development of the northern whitetailed deer. Amer. Midland Nat. 43:650-666. Cheatum, E. L. 1949. The use of corpora lutea for determining ovulation incidence and variations in the fertility of white-tailed deer. Cornell Veterinarian 39(3):282-291. Hudson, Paul and Ludvig G. Browman. 1959. Embryonic and fetal development of the mule deer. J. Wi1dl. Mgmt. 22(3):295-304. Illige, Denis. 1951. An analysis of the reproductive pattern of white-tailed deer in south Texas. J. Mamm. 32:411-421. Morrison, John A., Charles E. Trainer, and Phillip L. Wright. 1959. Breeding season in elk as estimated from known age embrYos. J. Wi1dl. Mgmt. 23(1):27-34. Robinette, W. Leslie, J. S. Gashwiler, D. A. Jones, and H.S. Crane. 1955. Fertility of mule deer in Utah. J. Wi1dl. Mgmt. 19(1): 115-136. Robinette, W. Leslie. 1956. Productivity-the annual crop of mule deer. p. 415-29 in The deer of North America. W. P. Taylot, The Wildlife Mgmt. Ed., The Stackpole Co., Harrisburg, Pa. ~ Institute, Wash., D. C. 668 pp. Robinette, W. Leslie, D. A. Jones, G. Rogers, and J. S. Gashwi1er. 1957. Notes on tooth development and wear for Rocky Mountain mule deer. J. Wi1dl. Mgmt. 21(2):134-153. �-254Robinette, W. Leslie. 1958. Review: Swank, W. G. 1958. The mule deer in Arizona chaparral. Wildlife Bull. No.3, Arizona Game and Fish Comm., Phoenix, 109 pp. in J. Wildl. Mgmt. 22(4):450-451. Snyder, Walter. 1959. Report, W-75-R-6. Fe, 14 pp. Deer productivity studies. Job Completion New Mexico Department of Game and Fish, Santa Swank, W. G. 1958. The mule deer in Arizona Chaparral. Wildl. Bull. No.3. Arizona Game and Fish Commission, Phoenix, 109 pp. Wislocki, George B. 1943. Studies on the growth of deer antlers. II Seasonal changes in the male reproductive tract of Virginia deer Odocoileus virginianus borealis with a discussion of factor~ controlling antler-gonad periodicity. pp. 629-653 in Essays in biology in honor of Herbert M. Evans. University of California Press, Berkeley and Los Angeles. Prepared by Allen E. Anderson Date. J~a~n_u~a_r~y~,~l~9~6_4 Approved by _ Wayne W. Sandfort Chief, Game Research �Table 1.--Counts of Pigmented Corpora Lutea Scars from 216 Ovaries Collected at the Check Station During the 1962 Hunting Season. Age Class (Years)+ ~ 1 2 3-4 5-6 7 -8 9+ Pairs of Ovaries Number of Does With Total Pigmented Corpora Lutea No. Scars Examined Scars o 1 2 3· -4 (Scars) 16 0 0 0 0 0 16 14 0 0 0 0 0 14 o 11 2 0 0 15 13 1 11 15 3 0 50 30 2 2 3 2 0 14 9 o 3 2 1 0 10 6 2 2 7 2 1 26 14 Percent Total Scars Mean Scars Per Doe. 0.0 0.0 12.5 41.7 0.0 0.0 100.0 11.7 0.0 0.0 1.15 1.67 1.56 8.3 1.67 21.6 100.0 85.7 Percent Does With Scars 96.7 77 .8 Unknown 6 2 3 1 0 0 5 4.2 1.86 0.83 Total 108 37 32 30 8 1 120 100.0 1.11 65.7 Fawns Excluded-++ 92 21 32 30 8 1 120 1.30 77 .2 66.7 I J\) \J1 \J1 I FawnsYearlingsUnknowns Excluded Percent of Total (FawnsYearlings-Unknowns excluded) 72 5 29 29 8 6.9 40.3 40.3 11.1 1 115 1.59 93.1 1.4 + Ages are those at time of collection. Fertilization occurred about 10-12 months previously. While pigmented corpora lutea of pregnancy could not be present in fawns, their ovaries will be of value in histological studies and are included here for the record. ++Some fawns might be included in the unknown age class, but most were yearlings and older as judged by carcass size. �Table 2.--Measurements Date-Age-Wt (cm), Fresh Weights (g), and Volumes (cc) of Ovaries and Reproductive Ratio-Item Collection No. 33~'( Collection Date (Month-Day) 1-19 Estimated Age (Year-Month) 3-6 Eviscerated Wt/Body Length Ratio .32 1. 98 Ovary (left) Long Dia. 1. 67 Trans. Dia. Height Dia. 0.73 1. 66 Wt 1.54 Vol 1.80 Ovary (right) Long Dia. 1.09 Trans. Dia. Height Dia. 0.61 1.08 Wt 1.03 Vol Reproductive Tractl Uterine Horn (Left) Long. Dia. (3) 9.0 Trans. Dia. (4) 4.0 Uterine Horn (Right) Long. Dia. (1) 8.0 Trans. Dia. (2) 4.0 Vagina Long. Dia. (6) 16.0 Trans. Df.a , (7) 3.0 Cervix Long. Dia. (9) 8.0 Trans. Dia. (8) 2.0 Uterine Body True Length (10) 2.0 Median Septum Length (5) 9.0 Wt with Fetus (es) 220.0 Wt without Fetus (es) 160.0 ~'(Pregnant(young detectable macroscopically) ~Sears (1955) and Figure 1. Tracts--1962 34* 35i( 36* 37* .38* 41* 1-23 9-6 .32 1.~1 1.57 0.82 1.38 1.37 1.55 1.39 0.86 1.25 1.24 1-30 2-7 .29 1.39 0.88 0.50 0.48 0.47 1.88 1.30 0.50 1.13 1.12 2-6 1-7 .24 2.09 1.21 0.59 0.93 0.92 1.95 1.16 0.81 1.16 1.15 2-13 4-7 .30 1.68 1.17 0.75 1.00 0.99 1.50 1.14 0.71 0.86 0.85 2-20 4-8 .32 2.04 1.35 0.45 0.88 0.86 1.95 1.40 1.00 2.00 1.98 3-20 4-9 .27 1.72 1.04 0.45 0.65 0.61 1.90 1.46 0.76 1.53 1.28 16.0 3.5 7.0 3.0 14.0 9.0 12.0 9.0 18.0 2.5 7.0 2.5 12.0 8.5 11.5 8.0 16.0 2.0 6.0 1.5 26.0 14.0 25.5 13.0 24.0 2.0 7.0 2.0 25.0 17 .0 24.0 15.0 22.0 2.5 10.0 1.5 25.0 18.0 19.0 15.0 16.0 2.5 7.0 2.5 3.0 9.0 1330.0 500.0 5.0 13.0 1120.0 450.0 4.5 11.0 770.0 734.0 6.0 20.0 2825.0 2706.0 7.0 14.0 3020:0 2830.0 6.0 21.0 3750.0 3045.0 - - I I\) \Jl 0'\ I �Table 2.--Measurements (cm) , Fresh Weights (g), and Volumes (cc) of Ovaries and Reproductive (continued) Collection No. Date-Age- Wt Ratio-Item 42* 3-22 Collection Date :(Month-Day) 2-9 Estimated Age (Year-Month) .26 Eviscerated Wt/Body Length Ratio 1. 80 Ovary (Left) Long. Dia. 1.50 Trans. Dia. 0.90 Height Dd a , 1.29 Wt 1.24 Vol 1.50 Ovary (Right) Long. Dia. 0.89 Trans. Dia. 0.59 Height Dia. 0.49 Wt 0.43 Vol Reproductive Tract.}. 30.0 Uterine Horn (Left) Long Dia. (3) 17.0 Trans. Dia. (4) Uterine Horn (Right) Long Dia. (1) Trans. Dia. (2) 21.0 Vagina Long. Dia. (6) 2.5 Trans. Dia. (7) 10.0 Cervix Long. Dia. (9) 2.0 Trans. Dia. (8) Uterine Body 7.0 True Length (10) Median Septum Length (5) 4550.0 Wt with Fetus (es) 3402.0 Wt without Fetus (es) - - - *Pregnant (young detectable macroscopically) JSears (1955) and Figure 1. Tracts--1962 45~( 51 46* 47* 48* 50* 4-12 5-10 .27 1.96 1.04 0.40 0.74 0.72 2.49 1.73 1.13 2.05 1.96 4-20 8-10 .24 1.55 1.20 0.73 0.86 0.84 1.69 1.36 0.86 1.03 0.99 4-26 2-10 .33 2.40 1.95 0.77 2.02 1.81 2.19 1.30 0.54 1.02 0.99 5-2 11-11 .33 2.17 1;87 0.89" 2.67 2.38 2.23 1.69 0.78 2~1l 1.84 5-16 1-11 .28 1.50 1.18 0.63 0.97 0.85 1.68 1.34 0.80 1.48 1.29 5-23 0-11 .22 1.57 0.91 0.52 0.61 0.50 1.79 0.99 0.75 0.75 I 0.54 ~-.:] 29.0 18.0 30.0 15.0 19.0 2.5 8.5 1.5 23.5 14.0 20.5 17.0 16.0 2.7 6.0 2.0 34.0 16.0 34.5 17.0 23,0 3.5 9.5 2.5 41.0 21.0 36.0 21.0 28.0 3.0 11.0 2.0 30.0 23.0 12.0 7.0 12.0 2.5 5.5 3.0 3.0 1.0 3.5 1.0 10.0 2.0 6.0 1.0 5.0 5.0 21.0 4930.0 3357.0 6.0 25.5 6660.0 3601.0 5.0 31.0 8090.0 4642.0 5.0 24.5 4120.0 2330.0 0.5 3.5 I - 5530.0 3555.8 40.0 �Table 2.--Measurements Date-Age-Wt (cm) , Fresh Weights (g), and Volumes (cc) of Ovaries and Reproductive Tracts~~1962 Ratio-Item Collection No. 56** Collection Date (Month-Day) 6-27 Estimated Age (Year-Month) 5-0 Eviscerated Wt/Body Length Ratio .30 Ovary (Left) Long. Dia. 2.48 Trans. Dia. 1.43 Height Dd.a , 0.67 Wt 1.42 Vol 1.38 Ovary (Right) Long. Dia. 1.90 Trans. DLa , 1.46 Height Df.a , 0.61 Wt. 0.96 Vol 0.94 Reproductive Tract~ Uterine Horn (Left) Long. Dia. (3) 12.0 Trans. Dia. (4) 5.0 Uterine Horn (Right) Long. Dia. (1) 11.0 Trans. Df,a , (2) 5.0 Vagina Long. Dia. (6) 17.0 Trans. Dfa , (7) 3.5 Cervix Long. Dia. (9) 6.0 Trans. Dia. (8) 4.0 Uterine Body True Length ((0) 2.5 Median Septum Length (5) 13.0 ~.Jtwith Fetus (es) Wt without Fetus (es) 730.0 iri(Lactating (milk visible in bisected gland) + Sears (1955) and Figure 1. (continued) 57** 58 7-9 2-1 .32 2.33 1.20 0.59 1.01 1.00 2.23 1.111 0.56 1.13 1.11 7-16 1-1 .23 1.57 0.91 0.42 0.59 0.48 1.79 0.90 0.71 0.90 0.76 9.5 3.0 9.0 3.5 15.0 5.0 7.0 2.0 59** 61 62 7-23 3-1 .•30 2.06 1.04 0.44 0.67 0.60 2.03 1.14 0.54 0.79 0.77 8-6 2-2 .29 1.65 0.94 0.50 0.70 0.40 1.69 1.08 0.65 0.86 0.57 8-13 1-1 .26 2.32 1.20 0.90 1.34 1.12 2.20 1.19; 0.89 1.41 1.19 8-27 2-1 .27 1.55 0.90 0.71 0.78 0.73 1.10 0.87 0.50 0.44 0.40 3.5 1.5 4.0 2.0 11.0 2.5 5.0 1.0 7.5 3.5 8.0 3.0 16.5 3.5 6.0 2.5 5.5 2.0 6.5 2.5 13.0 3.0 5.0 2.0 4.5 1.0 4.5 1.3 12.5 5.0 3.5 1.5 6.0 2.0 6.0 2.0 17.0 4.0 7.0 2.5 2.5 1l~5 1.5 2.5 2.0 7.5 1.5 5.0 1.2 5.0 4.0 5.0 175.0 36.0 135.0 66.0 80.0 130.0 64** I ro VI OJ I �Table 2.--Measurements Date-Age-Wt (cm), Fresh Weights (g), and Volumes (cc) of Ovaries and Reproductive Tracts=-1962 (continued) Collection No. Ratio-Item 66oJn'c 9-11 Collection Date (Month-Day) 3-2 Estimated Age (Year-Month) ~·35 Eviscerated Wt/Body Length Ratio 1.78 Ovary (Left) Long. Dia. 1.07 Trans. Dia, 0.78 Height Dia. 1.00 ' Wt 0.90 Vol 1.62 Ovary (Right) Long. Dia. 1.33 Trans. Dia. 0.75 Height Dia. 1.12 Wt 0.97 Vol Reproductive Tract~ Uterine Horn, (Left) Long. Dia. (3) 10.5 3.5 Trans. Dia. (4) Uterine Horn (Right) Long. Dia. (1) 10.5 2.5 Trans. Dia. (2) 19.0 Vagina Long. Dia. (6) 4.0 Trans. Dia. (7) 9.0 Cervix Long. Dia. (9) 4.0 Trans. Dia. (8) Uterine Body True Length (10) 2.5 Median Septum Length (5) 6.5 Wt with Fetus (es) 140.0 Wt without Fetus (es) **Lactating (milk visible in bisected gland) J Sears (1955) and Figure 1. ~~ Uterus appeared gravid. 69 71 10-4 2-4 .33 .1.13 0.86 0.67 0.50 0.36 1.13 0.94 0.70 0.49 0.37 10-11 0-4 .27 1.70 1.19 0.60 0.74 0.69 1.67 1.20 0.76 0.68 0.67 72~"* 10-18 3-4 .32 1.87 1.31 0.87 1.22 1.20 1.79 1.27 0.88 1.12 1.11 73** 75** nH 79H 11-15 9-5 .31 1.69 1.30 0.62 0.96 0.75 1.66 1.17 0.60 0.87 0.58 11-28 9-5 .32 1.86 1.43 0.81 1.37 1.35 1.80 1.37 0.86 1.33 1.28 12-12 4-6 .29 2.16 1.08 0.90 1.84 1.64 1.58 1.15 0.68 0.84 0.79 12-26 9-6 .28 1.67 1.27 1.05 1.50 1.33 1.20 0.70 0.49 0.46 0.33 I 1'1) Vl \0 I 4.5 1.0 4.0 1.5 13.5 4.0 4.0 2.0 4.0 1.0 4.0 1.5 11.0 2.0 3.0 1.0 5.0 1.2 5.0 1.5 20.0 2.0 5.0 1.3 6.0 2.5 7.0 2.0 17.8 4.5 6.5 2.5 9.0 2.0 9.0 2.0 18.0 3.0 5.0 1.5 10.0 1.5 9.0 2.0 13.0 3.0 6.5 2.5 6.0 2.0 5.5 2.5 12.0 2.0 5.0 1.5 1.0 3.5 1.5 2.5 1.3 4.5 1.5 4.5 2.0 7.5 1.0 9.0 8.0 1.0 53.0 26.0 85.0 150.0 145.0 140.0 110.0 �Table 3.--0varian Analysis and Fetal Rates of 29 Deer Co11ected--1962. ColI. No. ce u. Elate Est, Age 1961 Breeding Season (Year-Month) No. Current Corpora Lutea of Pregnancy Left 33 34 35 36 37 38 41 42 45 ~6 47 48 50 51 56 57 58 59 61 62 64 1-19 1-23 1-30 2-6 2-13 2-20 3-20 3-22 4-12 4-20 4-26 5-2 5-16 5-23 6-27 7 -9 7-16 7-23 8-6 8-13 8-27 3-6 9-6 2-7 1-7 4-7 4-8 4-9 2-9 5-10 8-10 2-10 11-11 1-11 0-11 5-0 2-1 Right a- --y- 1 2 1 o 1 o 1 2 o 1 2 2 1 1 o o 1 1 2 2 o 2 1 1 1 o o Total ~ 1 2 2 1 2 2 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 1 2 3 1 o 1 2 2 o o 3-1 2-2 1 o 1 o 2 2 o 1-1 2 1 1-1 o o No. Fetuses 2 o o 0+ 0+ o 0+ o o 1960 Breeding Season! No. Pigmented Corpora Lutea of Pregnancy Left Right Total ao o o o o o o o --0 2 o o o 1 o 1 ---0 2 o o o 1 o 1 o o o o o o o o o o o 2 2 o o 1 o o o o o o o o o o 1 o o o o o o o o 2-1 1 1 2 0+ 1 1 2 66 9-11 3-2 o 2 2 0+ o o o 69 10-4 2-4 o o o o o o o 71 10-18 0-4 o o o o o o o 72 10-23 3-4 1 1 2 0+ o o o 73 11-15 9-5 1 o 1 0+ o o o 75 11-28 9-5 3 o 3 0+ o o o 77 12-12 4-6 1 1 2 o 0* o o 79 12-26 9-6 2 o 2 o 0* o o + Lactating (milk visible in bisected mammary--gTand). of, Possibly gravid as judged by the flaccid, thickened, and fluid-filled uterus. ! Since the period of time between conception and collection date ranges from about 13 to 25 months and 8 months may be the maximum for reliable macroscopic counts of the pigmented corpora 1utea of pregnancy in white-tail (Cheatum, 1949) these data may be inaccurate. There is the possibility, however, that in mule deer the pigmented corpora 1utea persist one or more breeding seasons beyond the date of conception (Robinette, 1958). I ro o-, o I �Table 4.--External Body Measurements (rom), Fresh-Fixed Weights (g), Volumes (cc), and Estimated Conception Dates for One Embryo and 23 Fetuses of 13 Mule Deer--1962 Date-Age-Wt Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt/Body Length Ratio Uterine Horn (Left-Right) Sex (Male, Female, Undetermined) Fresh Wt Fixed Wt Fresh Vol Crown-Rump Forehead-Rump Contour Length Head Length Head Breadth Auric 1e (Left) Foreleg Length Left Hind Leg Length Left Hind Foot Length Tail Length Scapula (Hetacromium to ischium) Chest Circumference Est. Age of Young (Days) Est. Conception Date (Month-Day, 1961) * Based on the growth curves of: - - - auricles Collection No 35 1-30 2-7 .29 Ratio of Mother--arid Measurement 34 1-23 9-6 .32 33 1-19 3-6 .32 L. UND 2.12 --48 30.5 12-3 L. UND 14.1 10.52 10.27 72.6 68.4 100 22.3 9.9_. R. UND 10.7 6.86 6.65 71.7 62.8 100 . 21.4 13.0 L. UND 19.12 17.04 18.92 R. UND 19.38 15.45 19.28 74.2 108.0 27.0 15.0 73.0 108 28.0 13.0 20 23 14.5 4.0 38 48 19 22 13 7 35 45 26 24 17 6 41 57 63 11-28 - - - 26 24 17 6 41 55 37 2-13 4-7 .30 36 2-6 1-7 .24 - - 63 12-5 hind foot length, forehead-rump 1erigth, forehead-rump-body as well as the external morphology as described by Hudson and Browman (1959). R. R. UND 59.0 56.9 58.9 36.2 33.1 35.8 L. UND 59.9 50.8 59.4 98.8 138 36.6 23.8 8 37.8 39.6 28.0 12.0 53.8 65.0 70 11-29 110.3 109.4 161 158 40.7 39.6 22.2 22.3 6 6 45 45 54 55 32 32 8 9 70 67 81 80 75 12-1 UNi5 - - - weight ratio, and ear I I\) 0\ I-' I �I I\) Table 4.--Externa1 Body Measurements (rom), Fresh-Fixed Weights (g), Volumes (cc), and Estimated Conception Dates for One Embryo and 23 Fetuses of 13 Mule Deer--1962 (Continued) Date-Age-Wt Ratio of Mother-and Measurement Uterine Horn (Left-Right) Sex (Male, Female, Undetermined) Fresh Wt Fixed Wt Fresh Vol Crown-Rump Forehead-Rump Contour Length Head Length Head Breadth Auricle (Left) Foreleg Length Left Hind Leg Length Left Hind Foot Length Tail Length Scapula (Metacromium to ischium) Chest Circumference Est. Age of Young (Days) Est. Conception Date (Month-Day, 1961) L. R. 0' L. 96.1 87.1 94.1 2.3 81.3 91.7 135 182 47 26 12 54 60 41 13 81 93 135 184 45 25 11 53 62 41 . 14 79 94 -- 81 12-1 -~ I\) I Collection No. 41 42 3-20 3-22 4-9 2-9 .27 .26 38 2-20 4-8 .32 Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt/Body Length Ratio 0\ - (Y' 365.0 351.0 210 292 74 39 30 115 125 81 31 126 153 R. 3~.0 327 212 282 71 38 27 112 125 81 31 125 140 100 12-10 L. - - 5fT.1 565.6 251 343 90 45 36 129 57 98 38 154 70 119 11-23 45 4-12 5-10 .27 R. L. R. 5~.9 9£.8 10fl4 533.8 .- 245 335 88 44 36 124 154 96 36 147 70 918.6 292 440 100 52 49 165 205 132 33 186 215 131 12-2 300 991.9 440 102 52 50 163 205 134 35 186 220 �Table 4.--Externa1 Body Measurements (mm), Fresh-Fixed Weights (g), Volumes (cc), and Estimated Conception Dates for One Embryo and 23 Fetuses of 13 Mule Deer--1962 (Continued) d Measurement M Date-Age-Wt Aee-Wt Ratioo-f Ratio of Mother-and Moth D 46 4-20 8-10 .24 Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated WtIBody Length Ratio Uterine Horn (Left-Right) Sex (Hale, Female, Undetermined) Fresh Wt Fixed Wt Fresh Vol Crown-Rump Forehead-Rump Contour Length Head Length Head Bread th Auricle (Left) Foreleg Length Left Hind Leg Length Left Hind Foot Length Tail Length Scapula (Metacromium to ischium) Chest Circumference Est. Age of Young (Days) Est. Conception Date (Month-Day, 1961) Collection N o. 47 4-26 2-10 .33 48 5-2 11-11 .33 L. R. R. L. (J' R. L. 779.5 79~.4 1505.9 155Cf'.8 1393.8 1483.4' 5R.-o 17~.0 740.5 763.4 1436.4 1478 .• 1 1332.3 1414.2 547.0 1712.9 266 377 98 49 44 160 170 123 28 164 170 283 390 95 51 40 151 165 122 30 173 192 337 434 116 52 68 216 225 167 40 219 253 365 461 119 58 68 217 230 167 42 218 251 340 454. 114 51 61 198 249 160 40 222 236 262 . 371 95 42 45 154 184 120 35 150 175 395 529 119 55 75 232 280 190 45 254 269 160 12-7 L. cs R. 50 5-16 1-11 .28 r::J' (J' - - - 129 12-12 - - - 144 12-3 - - -- - 351 478' 116 55 60 209 249 155 35 224 248 138 12-15 - - - - I I\) (J; I �Table 5.--Measurements (rom), Fresh Wt (g), Volumes (cc),and the Mean Diameters (microns) of 20 Seminiferous Tubules From The Testes of 21 Mule Deer and the Fresh Wt (g) of 14 Prostate G1ands--1962. Date-Age-Wt Ratio-Testis-G1and Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt/Body Length Ratio Testis (Left) Long. Dia. Trans. Dia. Height Dia. Wt Vol + Dia. Semi. Tubules Testis (Right) Long. Dia. Trans. Dia. Height Dia. Wt Vol Prostate Gland Wt Collection No. 40 43 3-29 3-8 1-9 0-10 .26 .21 32 1-9 1-7 .24 39 2-27 3-8 .31 3.68 2.09 2.81 14.03 13.60 149.3 4.59 2.84 2.31 18.30 17.48 155.4 ~.05 l.81 l.58 7.03 6.73 113.3 2.90 l.49 l. 70 4.87 4.65 90.5 3.78 2.00 2.61 12.32 11.64 116.5 3.82 2.73 2.15 14.01 13.52 4.45 3.05 2.46 19.83 19.06 3.86 l.88 l.41 6.93 6.66 3.11 l. 34 l. 75 4.69 4.43 3.63 l. 93 2.65 1l.35 10.81 08 6-10 1-0 54 6-13 2-0 .33 55 6-20 2-0 .34 60 7-30 5-1 .51 3.40 2.07 l. 60 7.03 6.77 2.45 63 8-20 1-2 .28 4.80 1.80 3.70 2.29 1. 78 9.01 8.68 141.5 4.13 2.50 2.46 14.45 13.88 123.7 4.43 3.19 2.51 21.32 20.39 173.2 4.23 3.00 2.75 18.28 17.64 152.1 3.73 2.14 1. 92 8.29 7.97 3.66 4.29 2.68 2.05 14.36 13.76 4.09 3.81 2.32 1. 94 11.20 12.81 3.70 4.45 3.01 2.80 18.57 17.93 3.07 52 53 e-n. No: Collection Date (Month-Day) 5-30 6-6 Estimated Age (Year-Month) 0-11 1-0 .23 Eviscerated Wt/Body Length Ratio .24 Testis (Left) 3.40 Long. Dia 2.99 1. 90 l. 93 Trans. Dia. 1. 70 Height Dia. 11.12 Wt 6.24 6.06 10.41 Vol + Dia. Semi. Tubules 101.0 128.2 Testis (Right) 3.31 3.69 Long. Dia. l.85 2.80 Trans. Dia, l.58 1. 86 Height Dia. 6.43 9.36 Wt 6.23 8.65 Vol 2.16 2.08 Prostate Gland Wt + Mean diameter of 10 seminiferous tubules from each testis. 6.30 116.0 3.90 l. 90 6.90 44 4-5 4-10 .35 07 4-27 0-10 5.20 111.6 5.30 49 5-9 1-11 .27 3.40 2.00 1.58 7.18 6.99 110.4 I I\) 0\ .j::""" I �Table 5.--Measurements (rom), Fresh Wt (g), Volumes (cc), and the Mean Diameters (microns) of 20 Seminiferous Tubules From The Testes of 21 Mule Deer and the Fresh Wt (g) of 14 Prostate G1ands--1962. Date-Age-Ht Rat~o-Testis-G1and Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt/Body Length Ratio Testis (Left) Long. Dia. Trans. Dia. Height Dia. Wt Vol + Dia. Semi. Tubules Tes tis (Right) Long. Dia. Trans. Dia. Height Dia. Wt Vol Prostate Gland Wt 65 9-5 7-3 .50 67 9-18 1-3 .31 4.68 3.29 2.99 26.97 25.89 166.5 4.19 2.42 2.32 15.38 14.65 162.1 4.66 3.39 2.73 27.24 26.10 5.95 3.98 3.82 2.27 14.84 14.13 3.27 Collection No. 70 68 10-10 9-27 1-4 1-3 .29 .26 74 11-21 2-5 .35 76 l2-5 0-6 .18 78 12-19 4-6 .38 4.99 3.61 3.35 . 29.78 28.76 170.9 5.44 3.17 3.48 32.37 31.09 168.2 5.06 3.14 2.82 22.72 21.98 154.8 2.77 1.46 1.40 3.56 3.40 83.8 5.24 2.89 3.21 29.65 28.51 166.5 4.74 3.46. 3.14 26.39 25.44 3.12 5.39 2.91 3.29 31. 58 30.29 4.18 4.71 2.90 2.77 19.81 19.18 8.40 2.79 1.45 1.45 3.64 3.46 0.78 5.27 3.07 3.41 29.51 28.40 8.94 I ro 0'\ V1 I �-266Table 6.--Chrono1ogica1 Summary of the Testes Development of 26 Mule Deer, 12 Months of Age and 01der--1961-1962. ColI. No. CoIl. Date Est. Age (Year-Month) Mean Vol Testes (cc) 8 9 11 53 08 54 55 6-6 6-13 6-27 6-6 6-10 6-13 6-20 9-0 12-0 1-0 1-0 1-0 2-0 2-0 11.80 8.85 8.32 9.53 8.32 13.82 135.4 140.9 135.4 128.2 116.0 141.5 123.7 15 60 7-27 7-30 1-1 5-1 8.89 21.60 116.0 173.2 16 63 8-2 8-20 4-2 1-2 ~6.50 17 .79 133.8 152.1 65 67 68 9-5 9-18 9-27 7-3 1-3 1-3 26.00 14.39 27.10 166.5 162.1 170.1 01 25 70 10-2 10-18 10-10 1-4 1-4 1-4 30.75 23.32 30.69 182.0 172.6 168.2 27 05 74 11-29 11-29 11-21 3-5 2-5 2-5 36.85 35.55 20.58 200.9 175.9 154.8 78 12-19 4-6 26.96 166.5 32 1-9 1-7 13.56 149.3 39 2-27 3-8 18.27 155.4 40 3-8 1-9 6.70 113.3 44 4-5 4-10 11.23 116.5 49 5-9 1-11 6.88 110.4 Mean Dia. 20 Semi-Tubules (microns) �-267Table 7.--The Incidence and Relative Abundance of Spermatozoa From 33 Mule Deer By Analysis of Both Dry Smears and the Histology of the Seminiferous Tubu1es--1961-62. ColI. No. Age Date Year-MOnth Collected Dry Smear Testes Epidid. L. R. L. Histology of Seminiferous Tubules by Testis R. o o o 5-16-61 o N.A. N.A. o o o o 1 6-6-61 1 2 2 o o o o 6-13-61 11 o o 1 o 1 6-27-61 N.A. 15 o o o o o 7-27-61 N.A. 16 Sperma8-2-61 Spermatids? tids? t 2 2 ? 0+ 0+ 22 o o 9-27-61 0-4 N.A. N.Ao 3"·* 2 3 3 3 01 1Q-2-61 1 1-6 0+ 0+ 24 o o o o 10-11-61 0-4 2 3 3 3 25 1 1 10-18-61 1-4 2 2 27 3 3 3 3 3-4 11-29-61 2 3 1 3 05 3** 2-4 11-29-61 3** o o o o o 28 o 12-6-61 0-6 2 2 3 3 1 32 1 1-9-62 1-7 2 3 3 3 1 1 39 2-27-62 3-8 1 1 1 o 1 1 40 3-8-62 1-9 0+ o o o o o 43 0-10 3-29-62 o 1 1 o o 1 44 4-10 4-5-62 o o 4-27-62 N.A. N.A. 07 0-11 N.A. N.A. 1 1 o o 0 o 49 1-11 5-9-62 o o o o 0 o 52 5-30-62 0-11" 53 6-6-62 Sperma- Sperma-Sperma-Sperma1-0 tids tids tazoa tids 2 1 1 o 0 001 54 6-13-62 2-0 55' o 0 001 6-20-62 2-0 1++ 3 N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. 3 ++ 60 7-30-62 5-1 63 8-20-62 Sperma-Sperma1-2 2 1 tids tids o o 3 !! 2 ! o o o 0 65 9-5-62 7-3 2 ! 2 ! o o 0 1 67 9-l8-~ 1-3 9-27-62 Sperma-Sperma68 1-3 tids tids 0 0 3 ! 3 ! 70 1-4 10-10-62 N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. 3 II 3 !! 74 2-5 11-21-62 N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. 3 ~~ 3 ** 76 0-6 12-5-62 N.A. N~A. N.A. N.A. 0 0 78 4-6 12-19-62 N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. 3 3 Symbols: 1 few sperm; 2 moderate no. of sperm; 3 many sperm; N.A. not analyzed; *sperm in Serto1i's cells; + single layer of cells; ** free sperm in rings; + primary spermatocytes present; ++ many spermatids and sperm in Serto1i's cells; ! sperm in Serto1i's cells a few in lumen; !!sperm in Serto1i's cells, some free. Note-#Left and right testis were not distinguished in the histological analysiS:-- 5 8 9 5-1 9-0 12-0 1-0 1-1 4-2 �-268- APPENDIX I \ \ ~~~-. Y -t----STOM~M ~'\"'.~ •.......•.. ---I-;~~r+-----;-r-SNIQ\U. 0N'f It S YUIN[ e O!i\IMIU U,. IE:R C~IJlINIU lUIu[!RO t-.t-- !? All!.. © f DA~ ir \\J n Ib MY '-------"']Ilt1f.(;j ~~::.-... lL~rv / 4,-f----ft*-~--O VAR Y ~~~~~~--~~---VA@O~A ~_ LAD~ER V( •••• §VIM IfJ&,1'.tso's IPJ (l~DS I\.~-t-----'/M~,......~r-,...:..~ ...."" ''-\-. , \. \~ . \ \VU~V~ ~~~~~~----------~~NUS ~--":--f-::--+- (»V6i\81V IP\ VlIr[nI 0", U1T[f\V !I Diagram and directions first used by Swank (1958), later by Anderson (1958), and Sqyder (1959). �-269- APPENDIX I COLOr.AOO (Continued) SPORTSMEN I YOU CAN HELP MAKE BETTER HUNTING BY HELPING YOUR GAME AND FISH DEPARTMENT. Through research we are attempting deer production. productive Comparing to learn more of the factors influencing the age of doe deer with the condition of their re- organs is a vital part of this research. When you kill a Doel 1. Remove the lower jaw and bring to the nearest checking 2. Remove the reproductive tract, as shown in the sketch; place in plastic bag and bring to checking reproductive tract attache&ko station, OR after cleaning, As you open the animal tract will be found under the small intestine, ing along the large intestine. Be ~ ly- to get all of portion marked "reproductive tract," and include the bladder and ovaries. shows in the sketch. Frequently the ovaries leave carcass while bringing your kill to the checking station. The sketch shows the location of the needed parts. to clean it, the reproductive station. Please cut behind the bladder as it are cut off, which ruins the collection - Be sure to cut above the ovaries and behind the bladder. Thanks to each of you for your cooperation. COLORADO DEPARTMENT OVER - Sketch on other side. FedAr~l Aid PrcJect OF .GAME AND FISH W-I05-R ��January, 19b4 -271- JOB COMPLETION RESEARCH State of PROJECT REPORT SEGMENT COLORADO Project No.: __~W_-~1~0~5_-~R~-~3 An Ecological Investigation of the ~:~C~a~c~h~e~1~a~P~o~u~d~r~e-=D~e~e~r-=H~e~r~d~,~C~o~l _ Work p1an ~5 ~;~P~h~y~s~i~o~1~o~g~i~c~a~1~S~t~u~d~i~e~s Job No. 3 Period Covered: Personnel: :Harvest Analysis January, 1962--December, Allen E. Anderson 1962. and Dean E. Medin. Abstract: Data are presented on the 1962 hunters'-choice sample of the Cache la Poudre (Game Management Unit 19) mule deer harvest. The check station sample consisted of 977 deer (about 33 percent bucks, 46 percent does, and 21 percent fawns) or 28.9 percent less than the total harvest estimate of 1,259 derived from hunter report card returns. The age structure of the 1962 adult doe sample indicated a rather low net productivity index of 22.4 percent which did not differ significantly (P=.05) from the 1961 index. The 2 year age class, however, decreased significantly (P=.05) in 1962 and about 36 percent of the 1962 adult doe sample consisted of deer 5 years and older as compared to 29.0 percent in 1961. Fawn (4-6 months old) sex ratios narrowed from 129:100 in 1961 to 116:100 in 1962, but those of mature animals widened slightly in 1962. An identical sex ratio (83:100) was obtained in 1961-62. Indices of the 1962 harvest distribution and density on 8 individual subunits were generally similar to 1961 and ranged from 0.1 to 9.2 deer per square mile and about 2.0 deer per square mile for the entire unit. Antler measurements taken as a possible index to annual fluctuations in the physical condition of the herd are described statistically. There was a significant (P=.05) increase in most of the antler measurement means. Inferences drawn from some of these data are discussed in relation to the literature and to other current data. Acknowledgements: Mr. Dave Bowden of the C.S.U. Statistics Laboratory tabulated the data and computed the 1962 descriptive statistics and most of the significance tests. We would like to thank all people who assisted at the check station. Recommendations: This job should be continued as described herein. Hunters'-choice seasons should be continued. Management should attempt to improve hunter access to subunit 3, Livermore mountain area. _ �-272- Objectives: 1. Determine the age and sex structure of the deer herd kill to provide estimates of: (a) net productivity (percent of female yearlings in the kill), and (b) the effects of hunting regulations. 2. Locate the distribution of the kill by subunit to relate the age and sex structure of the kill to e1evationa1 levels and harvest intensity. 3. Measure relevant physical characteristics of the deer killed to provide an index of herd response to year-round food quality. Procedures: All data were obtained at the regularly operated big game check station from October 27 to November 5, 1962. The check station, which operated 9 days continuously throughout the 10 day season, was located about one mile north of LaPorte, Colorado, on U.S. Highway 287 (Figure 1). The techniques used in estimation of age, antler measurements, hunter interview, and statistical analyses are described in the 1961 Work Plan 5-Job 3 completion report (Anderson, 1962:320). �-213- HARVEST ANALYSIS Allen E. Anderson Findings: Total harvest estimates and sample sizes Estimates of the total Unit 19 harvests are compared to the samples obtained at the check station in Table 1. The check station samples appear to be closer to the total harvest estimates when hunters'-choice seasons are in effect. Harvest by day of season About 77 percent of the 1962 harvest sample was obtained during the first 2 days of the 9 day season (Table 2). This is a much higher percentage than obtained during 1960 arid 1961. Age structure, 1961-62 The 1962 sample of the harvest with fawns included is presented in Table 3 and without fawns in Table 4. Excluding fawns, yearlings made up 22.4 percent of the doe component. This value, regarded as an index of net productivity (Robinette, 1956), is within the lower range of similar values for mule deer. There was no significant difference (P=.05) in the 1961-62 indices of net productivity. The proportion of 2 year old does, however, dropped about 8 percent in 1962 (Anderson, 1962:333) and this difference was highly significant. Moreover, the proportion of older age components increased somewhat in 1962. Does of about 5 years and older comprised 36 percent of the 1962 sample and 29.0 percent in 1961. Most of this increase occurred in the 9+ age class. Harvest sex ratios, 1961-62 Because of the various sources of known and possible bias (Anderson, 1962: 325), the fawn age class is probably the only one where the sample obtained by hunters approximates the pop~lation sex ratio. The fawn sex ratio was 129:100 in 1961 and 116:100 in 1962. With fawns included the sex ratio was 83:100 for both years, and 75 and 76:100 during the 196162, with fawns excluded. Within the age classes, however, there are some important differences as shown below in terms of bucks per 100 does (Anderson, 1962:333). The differences include a marked widening in the �-274Age Class 1961 Sample Size--- 1 44 31 1962 722 188 127 39 21 26 12 8 845 165 60 52 2 3-4 5-6 7-8 9+ 2 year age class sex ratios and somewhat narrower ratios in each of the older age classes. These data suggest, as does the age structure sample, age specific mortality among the does and also among mature bucks. Other possibilities will be considered in the "Df scus sLon" section below. Harvest Harvest density, indices by subunit 1961-62: As in 1960-61, the highest harvest density (9.2) occurred in subunit 4, and only subunits 1,3, and 5 received substantial harvest (Table 5). The total harvest density dropped from 2.01 to 1.8 deer per square mile. Indices from subunits 1 and 3, moreover, dropped about one-half from the 1961 values. Three large landowners in these subunits were known to have greatly restricted hunting on their lands and partially or completely closed hunter access roads to the National Forest. The extremely divergent subunit harvest indices (0.1-9.2 deer per square mile) reflect assessibility, topographic and cover characteristics, hunting pressure, and perhaps to a lesser extent, relative deer population densities. Hunter effort and success: The index of hunter success expressed as the mean hours hunted by successful hunter does not consider effort expended by unsuccessful hunters and may be misleading in subunit comparisons. However, these indices exhibit less variability than do the harvest indices (Table 5) and when used together probably reflect something of the magnitude of relative hunter effort and success. Thus, these indices show that subunits 2,6,7 and 8 required subst antIa ll.y more effort with relatively low harvests. These subunits are characterized by relative inaccessibility, rough topography, and heavy cover. Bucks required an overall mean effort of 6.6 hours to bag while does required 6.4 hours (Table 5). This is about the same amount of ave rage hunter effort expended in 1961. Unlike 1961, however, d6es apparently required somewhat more effort to bag in all subunits except 4,6, and 7. �-275- Subunit sex and doe:fawn ratios. 1961-62 These ratios are presented in Table 5. Among these subunits receving fairly substantial harvests (1,3,4, and 5), only subunit 3 exhibits a marRed difference from 1961 ratios with a marked preponderance of bucks along with appreciably lower harvest density. Sample sizes are too small in the other subunits to furnish reliable comparative data. Antler measurements Descriptive statistics: »eam measurements are described statistically by age class in Table 6 (diameter), Table 7 (length), and Table 8 (spread). The 1962 means of each measurement increased over 1961 in almost all age classes. Beam diameter and beam length coefficients of variation decreased in most age classes, but antler beam spread coefficients increased. Number of antler points, 1960-6lw62: Antler point data expressed on a percentage basis by age class are listed by symmetrical and non-symmetrical categories in Table 9. A comparison with similar data from 1960-61 (Anderson, 1962: 336),reveals minor between-year differences in the yearling and 2 year age classes, but an apparent 1962 increase in symmetry in the older age classes. There were 26 non-symmetrical point categories in 1960, 23 in 1961, and 15 in 1962. The total number of points in "normal"'antlers ranged from 2-19 .(1960), 2-13 (1961), and 2-15 (1962). Incidence of brow tines: As in 1960-61, the incidence of brow tines increased with age (Table 10). Although based on progressively decreasing sample sizes, brow tines were present in 33.8, 27.2, and 28.6 percent of the total during 1960-61-62, respectively. There were slight increases in the 1962 incidence of brow tines in the yearling to 4 year old age component. Summary of antler significance tests, 1960-61-62: The results of significance tests applied to antler characteristics are summarized in Table 11. The 1962 increases in mean beam diameter and beam length noted above were significant as was the accompanying increase in brow tine incidence. Mean beam spread values were similar in 1961-62. The means of the 1962 left and right beam diameters and beam lengths were similar except for the 5-6 year age class where the left beam length was significantly larger than the right. During the three consecutive years of sampling, significant differences between left and right mean beam diameters occurred in 2 age classes where the left was larger and in one �-276where the right was larger. The left and right beam lengths were significantly larger in each of two age classes. These differences found in the yearling to 6 year age component. were Discussion: Some sources of error and bias The probable magnitude of the error associated with placing deer in age classes on the basis of tooth replacement and deer (Robinette et ~., 1957) may be quite large. These authors show (Table 7) that confidence limits (P=.05) based on their measurements of the molariform teeth of 27 known-age animals are so large as to include a minimum range of ± 2 years. Further, in the only published test of the accuracy of age assignments based on tooth replacement and wear, Brown (1961:22) reports an error of about 43 percent by 14 experienced biologists examining 50 known-age jaws in a laboratory! It is probable, then, that our age class assignments made on the basis of subjective examination under the unfavorable circumstances peculiar to check stations, include considerable error; at least in those age classes of 2 years and older which are entirely dependent on the relative amount of tooth wear. In addition to the technique error postulated above, there are other sources of bias such as differential age and sex class vulnerability to hunting mortality, (Gill, 1953); the somewhat nebulous aspects of using the percentage of yearlings in the doe herd as an index to net productivity (Robinette,1956) and the effect of various levels of harvest on the age structure sample (Quick, 1960). Within these rather stringent limitations, a tentative interpretation of the data herein, will be attempted. Age structure I will first make the assumption that hunter attitudes were similar in 1961-62 and successful hunters were similarly represented regardless of the sex or age class of their animal. I mention this because hunters with fawns are often reluctant to acknowledge the fact and hunters killing large bucks are often eager exhibitionists. Conceivably, voluntary appearance at the check station is influenced by these attitudes. It is also conceivable that attitudes of this type may change annually. In any case, the percentage of female yearlings sampled in 1961 did not improve in 1962 and the 1961 female yearling age class apparently suffered heavy mortality during the next year. This mortality was apparently specific to females as judged from the preponderance of 2 year old males. In addition, the sample of mature animals indicates proportionately fewer bucks of three years and older, and an increase of 9+ does. �-277No satisfactory explanation can be offered for the rather low net productivity or the decline of the 1961 female yearling age class. According to the work of Swank (1958) and others, one would expect an increase in net productivity and improved survival rather than the static and even negative response to two consecutive hunters'-choice seasons inferred by our data. It may well be, as indicated by the high proportion of very old does and the apparently static productivity, that hunting mortality has not been sufficiently large to stimulate productivity or to significantly affect survival of does to advanced age. In a migratory population, such as the Poudre, too few animals may be present on harvestable portions of the winter range during the hunting season for an effective harvest. This aspect is probably influenced by annual fluctuations in climatic conditions interacting with behavior patterns perhaps peculiar to different sex and age components. Antler measurements If we can apply the experimental results of French et al. (1955) and others which indicate that antler development is strongly influenced by nutritional levels and we infer that there is a strong relationship between nutritional levels and physical condition, then it is probabl~ that the physical condition of the Poudre herd improved from 1961 to 1962. When our climatic, browse production, and physiological data can be compared with antler development on an annual basis, it is hoped that the value of antler development as an index to physical condition in this mule deer herd can be evaluated. Assuming that the physical condition did improve in 1962, we may ask the following: (1) Why didn't the net productivity increase in 19627 Why did the yearling class of 1961 apparently suffer heavy mortality during 1961-627 The evidence now at hand does not suggest any plausible casual factors. Additional data and more sophisticated analytical methods may provide some of the answers in the future. �-278Literature Cited Anderson, Allen E. 1962. Harvest analysis. Work Plan 5-Job 3 Completion Report. pp 317-339. in Quarterly Report, Part 2. P-R Project W-105-~, Colorado Game and Fish Dept., Denver, 160-339 pp. Brown, Ellsworth R. 1961. The black-tailed deer of western Washington. Bio1. Bull. No. 13. Washington State Game Dept., Olympia. French, C. E., L. C. McEwen, N. D. Magruder, R. H. Ingram, and R. W. SWift. 1955. Nutritional requirements of white-tailed deer for growth and antler development. Bull. 600. Pa. State University, Co11. of Agric. Expt. Sta., University Park, Pa. Gill, John. 1953. Remarks on the kill curves of female deer. 9th Northeast Section Wildlife Conference, Bretton Woods, N. H., 12pp. (mime0) Quick, Horace F. 1960. Animal population analysis. pp. 7~1-7.35 in Manual of game investigational techniques. H. S. Mosby, Ed. The Wildlife Society and Edwards Brothers, Inc., Ann Arbor, Mich. Robinette, W. Leslie. 1956. Productivity--the annual crop of mule deer. pp. 415-429. in The deer of North America. W. P. Tay10t, Ed., The Stackpole Co., Harrisburg, Pa., and The Wildlife Management Institute, Wash. D. D. 668 pp. Robinette, W. Leslie, Dale A. Jones, G. Rogers, and J. S. Gashwi1er. 1957. Notes on tooth development and wear for Rocky Mountain mule deer. J. Wi1d1. Mgmt., 21(2):134-153. Swank, W. G. 1958. The mule deer in Arizona Chaparral. Arizona Game and Fish Comm., Wi1d1. Bull. No.3. Phoenix, 109 pp. Prepared by Allen E. Anderson Date: J~a_n_u_a_r~y~,~1~9~6_4 _ Approved by Wayne W. Sandfort Chief, Game Research �-279- Table 1. A Comparison of the Sample Obtained at the Check Station and the'-'Tota1 Harvest Estimated From Hunter Report Card Returns. Year Method Buck 1960++ Check Station Report Card+: 463 769 1961 Check Station Report Card+ 361 474 7..G"4 Check Station Report Card+ 321 424 453 641 1962 + Doe 484 Totalc % Difference 463 769 66.1 215 298 1060 1526 43.9 203 194 vrt 28.9 1259 Fawn Based on various undated, mimeographed summaries from Game Management Divisions. These estimates are extrapolations from voluntary hunter report cards and no confidence limits are available. ++ Bucks-only season. �-280- Table 2. The Unit 19 Mule Deer Ha.rvest by Day of Season as Sampled at the Check Station, 1960-61-62. Day of Season No Checked 1 160 118 18 14 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 + Season: ++ Season: 6 3 8 39 33 2 o o 7 3 28 24 463 1960+ Percentage of Total 34,6 25.5 3.9 3.0 1.3 .7 1.7 8.4 7.1 .4 o No Checked 196H+ Percentage of Total 491 92 28 26 20 19 16 127 157 11 32 47.1 8.8 2.7 2.5 1.9 1.8 1.5 12.2 15.1 1.1 3.1 o --fl -.bl 1.5 1042 100.0 No Checked 1962* Percentage of Total 505 248 18 16 22 o o 98 70 c.J77 .7 6.2 ....hQ 100.0 Oct. 22-Nov. 6 inclusive; bucks only, fawns excluded. Oct. 28-Nov. 8 inclusive; hunters' choice, 1 deer per hunter. * Season: Oct. 27-Nov. 5 inclusive; hunters' choice, 1 deer per hunter. ** Check Station not in operatio~, last day of season. 51.7 25.4 1.8 1.6 2.3 o o 10.0 7.2 --** 100.0 �-281- Table 3. Age Class (Years) % 1 2 3-4 5-6 7-8 9 + Table 4. Age Class (Years) 1 2 3-4 5-6 7-8 9+ Age Structure and Sex Ratios of 925 Mule Deer Sampled From Unit 19, Fawns Included, 1962. Does Bucks No. Classified Percentage of Total No. Classified 109 173 66 47 9 11 _5 420 26.0 41.2 15.7 11.2 2.1 2.6 94 92 52 119 42 42 64 505 J..:l 100.0 Percentage of Total 18.6'~ 18.2 10.3 23.6 8.3 8.3 12.7 100.0 Sexes Combined Percentage Bucks per of Total 100 Does 22.0 28.7 12.7 17.9 5.5 5.7 2d 100.0 116 188 127 39 21 26 8 83 Age Structure and Sex Ratios of 722 Mule Deer Sampled From Unit 19, Fawns Excluded, 1962. Does Bucks No. Classified Percentage of Total No. Classified Percentage of Total 173 66 47 9 11 5 311 55.6 21.2 15.1 2.9 3.5 92 52 119 42 42 64 411 22.4 12.7 2~.9 10.2 10.2 15.6 100.0 ~ 100.0 Sexes Combined Bucks per Percentage 100 Does of Total 36.7 16.3 22.9 7.1 7.4 188 127 39 21 26 100.0 76 ....2.:.& 8 �-282Table 5. Subunit Indices of the 1962 Unit 19 Harvest As Sampled at the Check Station Subunit No. Bucks Kill Per Mean Hours Sg. Mile' . Hunted 1.1 .1 2 .3 ,1.2 3 4 4,0 5 2.1 6 .3 7 .3 8 ~ All Units .81 Table 6. 4.9 4.9 3.1 6.1 6.7 10.3 9.7 7.6 6.6 ~ Kill Per Sg. Mile Mean Hours Hunted 1,6 .6 .9 5.2 2.6 .4 .3 5.3 7.8 6.3 5.2 7.8 9.5 4.7 8.2 6.4 ~ 1.0 Kill Per 100 Does Bucks Fawns 74 50 123 63 66 97 110 40 71 45 30 62 48 49 37 45 120 44 2.7 .9 2.1 9.2 4. T' .7 .6 -:.! 1.8 Statistical Description of Unit 19 Antler Beam Diameters By Age Class as Sampled at the Check Station, 1962. Age Class (Years) No. Measured Mean Left: 1 2 3-4 5-6 7-8 9 + 168 66 46 8 11 5 18.09 24.64 30.52 33.25 36.64 37.20 2.43 2.56 3.77 2.55 4.90 3.96 13.4 10.4 12.4 7.7 13.4 10.7 Right: 1 2 3-4 5-6 7-8 9 + 167 65 47 9 11 5 18.12 24.95 30.51 33:89 37.00 37.40 2.79 2.48 3.72 4.23 5.48 3.21 15.4 9.9 12.2 12.5 14.8 8~6 Beam Kill Per Sg. Mile Both Sexes SD (mm) Coef. of Variation (%) �-283- 1. Table Beam ~ft: Right: Table 8. Age Class (Years) 1 2 3,-4 5-6 7-8 9 + Statistical Description of Unit 19 Antler Beam Lengths By Age Class as Sampled at the Check Station, 1962. Age Class (Years) No. Measured 1 2 3-4 5-6 7-8 9 + 1 2 3-4 5-6 7-8 9+ Mean (nun) SD Coef. of Variation 161 65 47 8 11 5 23.93 36.68 43.70 48.25 49.55 55.00 5.13 4.00 5.43 3.85 3.75 4.85 21.4 10.9 12.4 7.9 163 64 47 9 11 5 24.02 36.53 43.53 46.00 50.00 53.00 5.29 4.64 5.42 5.07 4.48 2.35 22.0 12.7 12.4 11.0 8.9 4.4 (%) 1.6 8.8 Statistical Description of Unit 19 Inside Antler Spread By Age Class as Sampled at the Check Station, 1962. No. Measured Mean (em) SD 152 61 45 8 11 5 22.76 36.08 42.98 40.50 46.55 55.40 5.43 5.99 7.16 17.11 4.84 4.51 Coef. of Variation 23.8 16.6 16.6 42.3 10.4 8.1 (%) �-284Table 9. The Percentages of Unit 19 Bucks by Age Class in Symmetrical and NonSymmetrical Antler Point Categories as Sampled at the Check Station, 1962. No. Antler Points Left-Right No. Examined: 1 159 Ase Class (Years) 2 3-4 5-6 64 47 9 2=.!L -2....±.. 11 5 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 Total Percentages: 10.7 61.6 5.7 0 78.0 0 14.1 23.4 28.1 65.6 0 6.4 12.8 55.4 74.6 0 0 11.1 66.7 77 .8 0 0 9.1 36.3 45.4 0 0 0 60.0 60.0 *0 *0 2 1 2 2 2 3 3 2 4 0 2 1 3 4 1 2 4 2 1.3 0 .6 6.3 3.8 4.4 0 .6 4.4 .6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 22.0 0 0 0 0 0 12.5 1.6 0 3.1 9.4 3.1 4.7 0 0 0 0 0 34.4 0 0 0 0 0 2.1 0 0 0 6.4 0 10.6 2.1 2.1 2.1 0 0 25.4 0 11.1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 11.1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 22.2 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 0 9.1 0 9.1 9.1 0 18.2 9.1 0 54.6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 20.0 40.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 3 4 4 4 4 .5 6 7 3 5 6 4 4 8 Total Percentages: Grand Total: * abnormal development 100.0 W,O �Table 10. Age Class (Years) The 1962 Unit 19 Incidence of Antler Brow Tines Summarized by Age Class. Left No. % 1 3 2 6 3-4 2 5-6 0 1 7-8 0 9 + Total 12 Percentage of Grand Total 3.9 1.7 9.1 4.3 0 9.1 0 Brow Tines Present Right Both No. % No. 4 4 5 1 1 0 15 4.8 2 3 6.1 10.6 11.1 9.1 0 e, 2 14 25 7 9 5 62 19.9 Brow Tines Absent % 1.2 21.2 53.2 77 .8 81.8 100.0 Total No. % No. % 5.2 36.4 68.1 88.9 100.0 ...L 100.0 89 164 42 15 1 0 0 222 94.8 63.6 31.9 11.1 0 0 28.6 71.4 9 24 32 8 11 Grand Total 173 66 . 47 9 11 --L 311 I I\) ex> \Jl I �Table 11. Age Class (Years) 1 2 3-4 5-6 7-8 9+ A Summary of Significance Tests (P=.05) Between 1960-61-62 and Between Left and Right Antler Beam Characteristics by Age Class. Beam Diameter Between Between Years L. and R. Year: 60-61-62 60 61 62 NS NS NS NS NS NS S S S S -+ RS NS NS NS NS NS - RS* NS NS NS LS* NS LS NS NS NS Beam SEread Between Years -60--61--62 - Beam Length Between Between Years L. and R. 60 - 61- 62 60 61 62 NS NS NS NS NS NS S S S S NS NS NS NS NS - - - RS NS LS LS - NS RS NS - NS - NS No. Points Between L. and R. 60** 61 62 NS NS NS NS NS NS NS NS NS NS NS NS Brow Tine Incidence Between Years 60--61--62 I I\) 1 2 3-4 5-6 7-8 9 + AU- Age Classes + NS NS NS NS NS NS NS NS NS NS ~ I NS S Dash (-) indicates an inadequate sample for significance test. * RS indicates right characteristic significantly larger than left and vice-versa. ** No tests made on this characteristic. �10' zo' 105'30' 40' 50' eo on ck at .Jb;j SUB-UNITS . ~;.. I'~ _ -. ·:"'1' ~~.2"'ol;~~ I, ' . A_ ~./ l~i ~, F \ ~ ;<, ~v.~ I ~ \I ',~~ ~i;. Vc°'f 'I \ ~7'" M'7"",~YPt;. " ~J:;.4~1~,""'~ '?, -: ~!~~S~tt~ ~~?.~ 'I I,~ ~ --; ---w='1f1 1\ : i:::r..:: v:~~ "j~ I~ RI (! ~i~'s:.. '--0. ~"'~'" DEk., ~i.~, ~ • -~ .. ~=, ci ,'-.: ~ .; f--S "\" ~ UNIT 19 ,~'f~" i~'Y q' ,<2 •••••• COLORADO DEPT. OF GAME AND FISH t~ r:' I", .••+-Pl(l.rt n .~' iI ""\F-'" SIXTH PRINCIPAL MERIDIAN I '40' . ~"~;o$ f-----l30' ~...-= 1-1 \ 'l ' -c i // q) ~.:;, -~ ~. '" \\ / ~~ s ~~:~~.l l,~"'~':'" "'~- r-~~~,,~ " I~~"\\t~~ ~,)\'-:\ \ ~~r.~ 1 J 0 1 :tcre , 1 PWiles T8N (i;'~ Pol):conic pr:-cUHction Noith A"....,.ic.n datum Figure 1. The location of the big game check station, 1960-61-62. 140 OF GAME MANAGEMENT ,~V / I 1\)1 CP -.J I ��January, 1964 -289- JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEG~ENT State of COLORADO ------~~~~--------- Project No.: __~W_-l~0~5~-~R~-~3~ _ Work Plan No.: ~5~ Title of Job: _ : __~J~0~b~N~0~._4~ _ Effect of Essential Oils of Big Sagebrush in Mule Deer Rumen Metabolism. Period Covered: January, 1962 through December, 1962. Personnel: Julius G. Nagy Acknowledgements: This work has been made possible through the cooperative aid of several agencies. The Colorado Game and Fish Department, the Colorado Cooperative Wildlife Research Unit, the Department of Animal Sci~nce and Forest Recreation and Wildlife Conservation of Colorado State University all contributed to the success of this research. For scientific help, encouragement, and helpful suggestions the author is greatful to Mr. Allen E. Anderson, senior game biologist; Dr. Marvin p. Bryant, leader, Rumen Microbiology Investigations, U.S.D.A.; Mr. Donald R. Dietz, wildlife research biologist; Dr. Donald N. Hyder, range conservationist; Mr. Dean Medin, senior game biologist; Mr. Laurence Riordan, assistant director, research, Colorado Game and Fish Department; Dr. Harold Steinhoff, professor, Department of Forest Recreation and Wildlife Con.servation, Colorado State University; Mr. Gyorgy Vidacs, Junior Animal Scientist; Dr. Gerald M. Ward, professor, Department of Animal Science, Colorado State University; Dr. Lee E. Yeager, leader, Colorado Cooperative Wildlife Research Unit. Abstracts Investigations were conducted on the effects of essential oils of big sagebrush (Artemisia tridentata) on bacteria in general, on deer rumen microorganisms, on the in vitro microbial activity of deer microorganisms, and in vitro and in vivo effects of the oils on the rumen bacteria and ba~eriar-function~a fistu1ated steer. Using the disc assay method sagebrush essential oils showed inhibitory action on several gram positive and gram negative bacteria. The addition of 0.05 m1 amounts of essential oils of sagebrush inhibited the growth of deer rumen microorganisms in 9 m1 amounts of agar media. The rate of cellulose digestion was slowed down when 0.002 m1 amounts of oils were added to 6 m1 of cellulose broth and apparently inhibited by 0.04 m1 of oils. The addition of 0.1 amounts of oils added to 41 m1 of artificial rumen contents (alfalfa hay and sagebrush as substrate) and steer and deer as rumen fluid donors decreased the rate of gas production and volatile fatty acid (VFA) concentrations. W. �-290After the introduction of 21 pounds of sagebrush in seven-pound daily portions through the rumen fistula of a steer, appetite and rumen movements ceased completely. Rumen contents of cows had to.be transfered into the rumen of the steer before normal f~nction was initiated. Recommendations: . The findings suggest a need for further evaluation of the nutritional value of big sagebrush. To attain a better knowledge on the subject the following areas of study are suggestedl (1) determine the essential oil content of other important sagebrush species, (2) determine the possible effect of soil chemicals on the formation of the oils, (3) effects of fertilizers on oil formation, (4) study rumen bacterial species throughout the year and determine possible adaptation of the bacteria to the action of the oils, (5) investigate the possibility of neutralizing the antibacterial effects of the oils both in vitro and - ~~. Objectives: General: To determine the effects of essential oils of big sagebrush (Artemisia tridentata) in mule deer rumen metabolism. Specific: (1) Investigate and establish specific procedures and techniques for the chemical, metabolic, and bacteriological phases of the investigation; (2) determine metabolism rates for the different substrates; (3) determine numbers and possibly general types of microorganisms present in the rumen during digestion of different substrates; (4) determine the effects of big sagebrush on (a) rate of metabolism, (b) end products of fermentation, and (c) rumen microflora. All of the objectives except No. 3 have been accomplished and are reported in this paper. Work on objective number 3 is underway at present. �-291INTRODUCTION Previous findings Sagebrush (Artemisia) is one of,the most ,abundant natural ,plant genera of the West. Wildlife as well as livestock consume certain spec Les of sagebrush. .Bf.g sagebrush (Artemis,ia,tridentata) isutili,zed es,.., , pecia11y .Ln lat~winter by mule deer.'(Odocoileus, h~mionus) in the , Rocky Mountain Region. Here extensive sagebrush ,ranges supplydeer and other, animals with a foodatuf f that is relatively high in nut.rLents , such as protein,during the critical late,winte:J;mont'hswhen herbaceous species, supply ,a forage of low,qual.Lt y (Dietz and ,Yeager, 1959). Despite the apparent advantages, ease of availability and relatively high nutritional value, there are certain disadvantages of sagebrush as food. Bissell, ~ ale (1955) and Dietz, ~ a1. (1962), found that deer consume only small amounts of sagebrush when it is fed as a sole diet during digestion trials. It is known that sagebrush contains certain amounts of essential oils. Essential oils are volatile substances which are separated from plants by steam distillation (Steele, 1934). Many of the essential oils have been known for a longtime as agents that adversely affect certain life processes (Guenther, 1949). Maruzzella and Lichtenstein (1956), tested 110 volatile oils and found that the great majority of them exercised some kind of antibacterial action. Carlson and Bissell (1946), found that,a sagebrush extract inhibited the growth of certain bacteria. Extensive review of the literature has been submf.tted t() the Library of Colorado State University. Importance of ,bacteria in the digestion of deer Deer, like the cow and sheep, are ruminant animals. Ruminants are, known to have an enlarged forestomach, the rumen, 'in which food struf f a ingested by the animal,undergo an extensive fermentation process by the rumen bacteria. During this process plant constituents such as carbohydrates, starches, celluloses, and nitrogen containing compounds are broken down by bacteria to short chain fatty acids (acetate, pro,.. pionate, butyrate, valerate), and gases (carbon dioxide, methane, nitrogen). Some of these products wi,l1,beutilized, by the ,bacteria for energy and building blocks of bacterial cell,mat.e'r La L,. Most of the short chain fatty acids, however, will be absorbed dLrec t Ly through' the rumen wall supplying approximately 60 to 70 per cent of the total energy requirements of the ruminant (Annison and Lewis, 1959). The bacteria, along with other nutrients in the rumen, will pass through the digestive tract, digested, and ultimately utilized by the ruminant. The foregoing facts have been presented to emphasize the importance of bacteria in the digestion process of ruminants and ultimately deer. �-292- Although the rumen bacterial function of deer has not been studied yet, it is safe to assume that deer are just as dependent on their rumen microflora as other ruminants. Effects "of antibacterial substances on the nutrition of deer The rumen can be considered as a complex ecosystem. Growth of the wide variety of rumen organisms is insured by the periodic intake of food, regulation of pH and buffering action of saliva. In this anaerobic environment specialized organisms convert food'stuff s for others and ultimately, through several steps, for the host animal. It is evident that any upset in the chain of fermentation might upset the whole system resulting in the malnutrition or even death of the ruminant. Purposes The purpose of this study was to show whether there are any substances in the sagebrush which act as antibacterial agents, reduce the rate of digestion in the rumen, and consequently deprive the animal of its expected energy supply_ The project included the following important phases: (1) Methodology; working out methods and techniques how to study deer rumen microbial function; comparative study of deer, cow, and sheep rumen microbial function using alfalfa hay and sagebrush as substrates; and techniques to culture deer rumen bacteria. (2) The determination of what constituents of sagebrush, if . any, exercised antibacterial action on aerobic bacteria; and the relative degree of the antibacterial action. (3) Sensitivity of the cultured bacteria from deer rumen to the essential oils of sagebrush. (4) The inhibitory effect of essential oils of sagebrush, tested by the use of an artificial rumen. (5) .In Vivo effects of sagebrush on rumen activity and appetite of a rumen fistulated steer. Experimental Since each phase might be considered as a rather whole unit for the purpose of clarity each phase will be treated as an individual unit with separate Introduction, Methods, and Results section. �-293Phase l: ARTIFICIAL RUMEN EXPERIMENTS USING DEER, CATTLE, AND SHEEP RUMEN FLUIDS Introduction The prime purpose of these trials was to work out methods and techniques and to compare some basic rumen bacterial functions of deer with other ruminants. It is believed at present that during these trials valuable information was collected on the response of deer rumen microorganisms toward a sudden change to alfalfa hay. Methods Collection of deer rumen fluid Deer rumen fluids were obtained from wild mule deer in the Cache 1a Poudre River region of North-Central Colorado. Deer were killed by rifle shot and minutes after death the rumen wall was opened and contents of the rumen wrapped in four-folds of cheesecloth. Rumen contents were pressed gently and the rumen fluid strained into a previously warmed thermos bottle and taken to the laboratory. All of the sacrificed animals were apparently healthy females or natural range with the exception of deer No.3. This animal was a young male held in captivity and fed previously on a 100 per cent pelleted sagebrush diet for sixteen days before he was sacrificed. This deer was apparently in a very poor physical condition. Deer Nos. 1 and 2 were obtained from a predominantly bitterbrush range; No.4 was obtained from a predominantly mountain mahogony range; No.5 from big sagebrush range with considerable amount of new green grass present in the rumen. Collection of rumen from cattle and sheep Rumen fluid from cattle was obtained from a rumen-fistulated, Brown Swiss, nonlactating cow. In the first experiment the fistulated cow received a diet consisting of medium quality alfalfa hay (diet A). In the second experiment the diet was changed to a diet of beet pulp pellets, rolled barley, and barley straw (diet B). The change from diet A to diet B had occurred four days before the sampling. Rumen fluid was obtained from two sheep fed a fully pelleted diet containing alfalfa and grain. These animals were killed in the Meat Laboratory of Colorado State University. Artificial rumen procedure The in vitro artificial rumen apparatus consisted of 50 ml Erlenmeyer flasks with air-tight connections to 100 ml graduated burettes. The burettes were filled with water acidified to a pH of 2.4 to prevent C02 absorptiono The flasks were placed in a water bath maintained �-294o at 39 C. Triplicate samples were used throughout the experiments. Fifteen ml of phosphate buffer (pH 6.6) was added to 0.5 g of ground medium quality alfalfa hay. To each flask was added 25 ml of rumen fluid. To control flasks rumen fluid and buffer but no substrate was added. After placing the flasks in the water bath the flasks were capped with single-holed rubber stoppers. By means of polyethelene tubing the fermentation flasks were connected to the upper part of the 100 ml burettes. As fermentation proceeded, gases produced by microorganisms displaced the liquid in the burettes. Gas production readings were made every four hours up to twenty hours. ' At the end of the fermentation period each triplicate set of samples was mixed in a beaker, final pH was determined, and 10 ml of the strained fluid mixed with 2 ml of 25 per cent meta-phosphoric acid to stop fermentation activity. Samples were frozen and at a later date centrifuged at approximately 16,000 r.p.m. for 40 minutes. The supernatant was analysed by gas chromatography according to the method of Erwin (1961) for the presence and ratios of volatile fatty acids. A Perkin-Elmer Model l54-D vapor fractometer equipped with hydrogen flame ionization detector was used. Results Gas production Results on gas production were calculated as the means of three samples. Two types of calculations were made, the total amounts of gases produced during the fermentation period (Table 1) and net amounts of gases ,produced during the same fermentation periods (Table 3). Net gas production was obtained by substracting the values of controls (Table 2) from the total amounts. In theory substracting controls from the 'total amounts would give the amount of gas which was produced by the microorganisms attacking a particular substrate (in this case alfalfa hay) since controls have some digestible material which can be converted to volatile fatty acids (VFA) and gases. According to Annison and Lewis (1959) artificial rumen experiments show that the diet of the rumen fluid donor animal has a strong influence on the outcome of results. This can be seen in Tables 1, 2, and 3. Microorganisms from the cow on diet A produced the largest amount of gas of the different rumen fluids tested. Microorganisms from the cow on diet B produced considerably less gas than organisms on diet A. This can be attributed to the influence of the new diet on the rumen microbial function. Results indicated that gas production can be used as an index of microbial activity in pilot work when major changes occur in the rumen (Deer 3). Gas production cannot be used, however, to compare the microbial activity of weekly collected deer because of differences in the diet of the animal. �-295- It seems that alfalfa hay does not exercise antibacterial action on the rumen microorganisms of deer. Gas production never seemed to be depressed on alfalfa hay substrate. If deer die with stomachs full of undigested alfalfa hay on the natural range, death can be attributed to factors other than failure of rumen microorganisms to attack alfalfa hay. These factors could be the type of hay, the way of administering the hay, and previous condition both of the deer and their rumen bacteria. Feeding of sagebrush considerably. Volatile seemed to depress microbial activity in the rumen Fatty Acid Production Although the percentage distribution of VFA has been determined at the beginning and end of the fermentation periods; data on the subject will not be presented. It was found in later experiments that during long fermentation periods changes occur in the ratios of the acids. Results, however, indicated no major differences between VFA distribution from rumen fluid of deer, sheep, and cattle. The tested rumen fluids of the cow tended to have larger percentages of acetic acid and lower percentages of propionic acid when compared with samples obtained from deer. Deer on pelleted sagebrush diet produced the largest amount of acetic acid among the samples tested. This rumen fluid sample showed low propionic acid and very low butyric acid percentages. Phase 2: GENERAL ANTIBACTERIAL ACTIVITY OF SAGEBRUSH ESSENTIAL OILS Introduction General Considerations The rumen microflora in vivo are a completely balanced, complex ecosystem. Culturing these organisms requires complex media and strict anaerobic conditions. For this reason, it was thought that the antibacterial activity of sagebrush constituents should be investigated and established on some common bacterial species. Objectives The objectives of the first trial were to establish methods and techniques and to ascertain which constituents of sagebrush acted as antibacterial agents. In the second trial an increased number of bacterial and the level of penicillin increased. species was tested �-296- In the third trial the inhibitory activity of essential oils of sagebrush, orange oils, and penicillin were tested against the sensitivity of known species of bacteria. The ultimate goal of the investigator was to apply the same methods and techniques directly on deer rumen bacteria. Because there are several species of bacteria in the rumen, it was thought that in the first experiment a large spectrum of bacterial species from different habitats should be tried. For this reason bacteria were isolated from milk and milk products, air, and alfalfa hay in the first two trials, while in the third trial known laboratory cultures of gram positive and gram negative organisms were used. Methods Collection of Plant Material Current annual growth of big sagebrush was collected in late winter during the morning hours. Site of collection was a southern slope in the Seven-mile Creek region of Colorado. The collected plant material was taken to the laboratory in plastic bags. The essential oils were separated by steam distillation. After the oils were removed and collected, the remaining water-soluble materials of sagebrush brew were sterilized and examined for possible antibacterial action. Selection and Isolation of Organisms Bacteria tested during the first two trials were selected and isolated as follows: Milk and milk products and ground alfalfa hay were plated using the dilution method described by Black (1960). Plate Count Agar (Difco) was used for culture medium. For coliform organsims Violet Red Bile Agar (Difco) was used as selective medium. Sterile plates containing Plate Count Agar were exposed to air for thirty minutes to collect airborn organisms. These plates were treated directly with discs containing the substances to be tested. After incubation periods of 48 hours for organisms on Plate Count Agar and 24 hours for coliform organisms on Violet Red Bile Agar, well isolated colonies with markedly different appearance were transferred to sterile vials containing Nutrient Broth (Difco). Tubes were incubated for 24 hours. One 100pfu1 of bacterial suspension was streaked from each tube containing Plate Count Agar in order to separate contaminants. �-297- Plates were incubated again for 48 hours. Single, well-separated colonies were transferred again to vials containing Nutrient Broth and incubated. At this time, gram stains were made, slides were examined under the microscope for purity and staining reaction, and appearance of organisms were recorded. Sources of the organisms used in Trial I and their observed characteristics are given in Table 4. Coliform organisms were separated from milk by plating the milk on .Violet Red Bile Agar according to the method recommended by Black (1960). After 24 hours of incubation at 350C. plates were examined for the presence of large (diameter 0.5 mm or greater), purplish red colonies. Some of these colonies were transferred to Durham fermentation tubes containing Brilliant Green Bile, incubated for 24 hours and examined for gas production. One loopful from the fermentation tubes showing gas production was streaked on Eosin-Methylene Blue Agar (Difco) plates. At the same time, gram stain was made and the presence of short, non-spore-forming gram negative rods was established. After incubating for 24 hours, the colonies adhering closely to the agar surface and having dark center surrounded by a metallic sheen, were transferred to Nutrient Broth and incubated for 24 hours. Application and Description The isolated cultures following mannerf of Disc Assay Method suspended in Nutrient Broth were treated in the One ml of the broth containing the repidly growing bacteria was transferred to sterile, flat-bottom Petri dishes. Approximately 12 ml of sterile Plate Count Agar were added to each dish and mixed uniformly with the bacterial suspension. In the case of coliform organisms, Violet Red Bile Agar was used instead of Plate Count Agar. As soon as the inoculated agar solidified, sterile paper discs (7 mm diameter, Difco) were removed from their vials by flamed tweezers and dipped into the material to be tested. Excess fluid was removed by touching the discs to a piece of sterile filter paper. Discs were placed on the surface of the agar. The upper part of the discs were touched gently to insure complete adherence to the surface of the agar. The following samples were tested for antibacterial propertiesl (1) boiled and sterilized sagebrush broth from which the essential oils had been removed by steam distillation; (2) boiled and sterilized alfalfa hay broth; (3) pure, commercial grade olive oil; (4) discs containing 0.5 units of penicillin (prepared by Difco); (5) essential oils of sagebrush obtained by steam distillation; (6) pure, commercial grade orange oils; and (7) sterile distilled water. (Figure 1) �-298- Porcelain covers were placed on the prepared plates to prevent moisture from dripping back on the agar and the plates were incubated for 48 hours (in the case of coliform organisms 24 hours) at 350C. Duplicate plates were used throughout the experiments. In Trial II, bacterial cultures were separated essentially as in Trial I and tested for possible inhibitory action of sagebrush oils, olive oil, orange oils and 2.5 units of penicillin. Description of organisms tested in Trial II are given in Table 5. In Trial III, known bacterial cultures were obtained and tested for possible antibacterial action by penicillin (2.5 units), sagebrush oils olive oil, orange oils, sagebrush broth and alfalfa hay broth. The following organisms were used: coliform organisms separated from milk as described in Trial I; Bacillus subtilis obtained from Difco Laboratories (standard spore suspension in ampules); and six standard laboratory cultures (Table 6). Violet Red Bile Agar, Whey Agar, and Plate Count Agar were used to culture coliform organisms, Bacillus subtilis, and other bacteria, respectively. Tested substances diffused through the agar from the discs during the incubation period. If the sample contained any antibacterial substances, microorganisms around the diffused area were prevented from growing. After the incubation period, plates were seeded with visible growing colonies of bacteria except where inhibition occurred. The diameters of these clear, bacteria-free zones were measured and recorded. Results Trial I "The essential oils of sagebrush inhibited all organisms tested (Table 7). Sagebrush oils appear to have a rather general antibacterial spectrum acting on both gram positive and gram negative organisms. In every case the oils of sagebrush exhibited clear cut antibacterial action while, of the other tested substances, only orange oils proved to have antibacterial properties against one tested organism (Unknown 13). The concentration of penicillin (0.5 units) was too low to the organisms tested. All of the tested substances except olive oil diffused readily through the agar. Olive oil stayed on the top of the agar but bacteria were observed growing directly in and under the oil layer. An encouraged zone of growth was observed in some cases around the discs containing olive oil, alfalfa hay broth, and sagebrush broth. Alfalfa hay broth, penicillin and orange oils were used during the experiments as controls; penicillin and orange oils served essentially as measures of the degree of inhibition exercised by the essential oils of sagebrush. �-299Trial II Results obtained in this trial are summarized in Table 8. Essential oils of sagebrush proved inhibitory in every case tested. Orange oils inhibited three organisms out of the eight tested. Penicillin (2.5 units) inhibited five organisms out of eight. Trial III All of the organisms proved sensitive to the essential oils of sagebrush. Out of the eight cultures three were found sensitive to penicillin and two to orange oils. None of the test organisms were sensitive to olive oil, sagebrush broth, or alfalfa hay broth (Table 9). Figure 1 shows an agar plate seeded with Bacillus .subtilis and the effects of tested substances after the incubation period. Phase 3: EFFECTS OF ESSENTIAL FROM DEER RUMEN OILS OF SAGEBRUSH ON CULTURED MICROORGANISMS Introduction General Considerations The rumen is essentially an anaerobic, highly-reducing system at a slightly acid but buffered pH, at a temperature of 390C. and under a gas phase composed mainly of carbon dioxide, methane, and nitrogen. In this environment, a very highly specialized microbial population develops. Growth of organisms in this environment is insured by a periodic intake ·of food, regulation of pH and buffering action by the continuous inflow of saliva, passage of contents along the digestive tract, and absorption of end-products of metabolism through the rumen wall. The growth and division of microorganisms is accompanied by death of some and autolysis of others, so that there are always present in the rumen some living, dead, and damaged cells, together with a range of partially digested food particles (Annison and Lewis, 1959). It is evident that culturing of rumen bacteria is of fundamental importance as a basis for studying, understanding, and measuring the inhibitory activity of essential oils of sagebrush on the rumen bacteria. The results desired are the effects of essential oils on (1) rumen bacteria regardless of species, and (2) the nutrition and metabolic function of individual species of bacteria via studies of pure cultures. In this report, only the first part of these analyses is presented. It is hoped that the other parts can be pursued in the near future. �-300Purpose The purpose of this phase of the experimen~was to examine the inhibitory effects of sagebrush essential oils on cultured bacteria from deer rumen. Although work is underway to culture and identify pure species of deer rumen microorganisms, no data will be presented in this report on the subject. To culture deer rumen bacteria and show the inhibitory action of sagebrush essential oils on the cultures proved to be the most difficult part of the work but also the most challenging. Three approaches were made to test the inhibitory action of sagebrush essential oils on cultured deer rumen bacteria~ (1) disc assay method using the nonselective media of Bryant and Robinson (1961), but not the prescribed techniques; (2) direct incorporation of oils into the media of Bryant and Robinson (1961) using the roll tube technique of these workers; and (3) direct introduction of oils into cellulose broth of Bryant and Robinson to test the antibacterial action of the oils on cellulolytic rumen bacteria. Methods Disc Assay Method Sagebrush was obtained and essential oils prepared as described in Phase 2. Composition of media was as described by Bryant and Robinson (1961). Clarified rumen fluid which was incorporated in the media was obtained from the rumen fluid of wild deer. The rumen fluid was strained through cheesecloth, autoc1aved uuder CO2 for 20 minutes at 15 pounds pressure .and stored under CO2 in the refrigerator. Before incorporating it in the media the rumen fluid was centrifuged at approximately 25,000 x g for 20 minutes. Media and dilution fluid was prepared according to Bryant and Robinson (1961). After appropriate dilution, 0.1 m1 and 1 m1 amounts of the dilution fluids were transferred to sterile Petri dishes. Melted but cooled medium was poured on the top of the inocu1m and mixed by rotating the dishes. CO was flushed over the surface of the agar and the plates were 2 sealed with plastic tape while under a constant stream of CO2 in a plastic container which was also sealed when the operation was completed. Incubation was carried out for 48 or 72 hours at 390C. Colonies were counted after the incubation period. Deer rumen bacteria grew in the range from one million to one hundred million. Variation was probably due to increased efficiency during the latter part of the culture work. �-301- Well-isolated colonies were transferred to a liquid medium which contained the same ingredients as the agar medium but not agar. Most isolates were lost during the process. A few isolates which produced growth after 24 hours were transferred to agar media and tested for sensitivity to the essential oils of sagebrush by the disc assay method, described in Phase 2. At this point there was either no growth or if growth occurred there was either no inhibition around or only immediately below the discs. For this reason other media were tried. The most successful combination was a medium 'which contained Tryptone Glucose Extract Agar (2.4 g) (Difco) and 0,5 g each of cellobiose and glucose per one hundred m1 of water. This medium supported the growth of three isolates, Direct Incorporation of Oils in the Media Because the foregoing methods were obviously incorporations of the oils were tried. not very promising, direct Upon the suggestion of Dr. Bryant, rumen fluid from a cow fed on alfalfa hay was collected 6 hours after feeding. This rumen fluid was processed according to Bryant and Robinson (1961), and incorporated in the medium as described previously. The use of rumen fluid from the cow instead of the deer has the advantages that nutrients in the rumen fluid will be relatively constant and large amounts can be collected at one time. This provides a medium of very uniform composition for several months. Rumen contents of freshly killed wild deer were processed and diluted according to prescribed methods. From the 4th to 8th dilutions, 1 m1 and 0.1 m1 amounts were transferred to melted agar tubes. They were kept at 470C. during the inoculation period. To test the inhibitory effects of sagebrush oils on rumen bacteria of deer three sets of triplicate tubes were treated as follows: (1) no essential oils added; (2) 0.05 m1 of essential oils; and (3) 0.1 m1 of essential oils added. After inoculating each set, tubes were closed and rolled rapidly under cold tap water. Incubation was carried out at 390C. Growth occurred after 48 hours in tubes without the oils but the tubes were incubated for an additional 48 hours before results were recorded. Inhibitory organisms Action of Essential Oils on Cellulolytic Deer Rumen Micro- Cellulose broth was made up according to Bryant and Burkey (1953), except that instead of ball-milling the 2 percent Whatman No. 1 filter paper suspension, it was mixed in a Waring blendor for five minutes, then transferred to a beaker and stirred with a magnetic stirrer for 72 hours. �-302Ten grams of the rumen contents were blended with 90 ml of diluting solution for one minute. One ml of this mixture was transferred to 9 ml of diluting solution. This diluting solution was shaken thirty times and then 0.1 ml amounts were transferred to .tubes containing 6 ml of cellulose broth. Essential oils of sagebrush were added, by means of a Hamilton syringe, to duplicate tubes containing cellulose broth in the following amounts: no oil; 0.002 ml; 0.006 ml; 0.01 ml; 0.02 ml; 0.03 ml; and 0.04 ml of oils respecitvely. Tubes were incubated and shaken periodically because the.oils stayed on top of the suspension. Every day for a week tubes were examined for the amounts of cellulose digested. Results Disc Assay Method The limited information obtained by this method is summarized in Table 10. Direct Incorporation of Oils in the Media Microorganisms were growing in the range of 40 billion per gram of rumen contents with the roll tube method. Incorporation of 0.05 ml and 0.1 ml of essential oils in 9 ml portions of media inhibited all bacterial growth except in a few isolated cases when the agar partially solidified before rotating the tubes. These few organisms were growing close to the wall of the tube under a thick protective layer of agar. Subsequent tests showed that the growth of these organisms can definitely be attributed to inefficient technique rather than lack of inhibition by the oils. Action of Oils on Cellulolytic Bacteria Apparently all of the incorporated cellulose was digested in the tubes without the oils after two days of incubation. Some cellulose was left, in increasing amounts, in tubes with 0.002 ml, 0.006 ml and 0.01 ml of oils added. Some activity, but very little, was observed in tubes containing 0.02 ml and 0.03 ml of the oils. No apparent activity was observed in tubes containing 0.04 ml of oils. Tubes were examined again after four days, one week, and two weeks of incubation. Apparently bacterial activity ceased around the third or fourth day in all tubes. Complete cellulose digestion was observed in tubes containing 0.002 and 0.006 ml of the oils. Tubes containing, 0.01 ml, 0.02 ml, 0.03 ml, and 0.04 ml of the oils showed respectively the following approximate percentages of the undigested cellulose: 20 percent, 80 percent, 80 percent and 100 percent (Figure 2). �-303- Phase 4: INHIBITORY ACTION OF SAGEBRUSH ESSENTIAL OILS ON DEER RUMEN MICROBIAL ACTIVITY AS MEASURED BY 1! VITRO GAS AND VFA PRODUCTION Introduction General Considerations The end-products of rumen microbial fermentation are various acids: predominantly, acetic, propionic, and butyric acids, and gases such as carbon dioxide, methane, and nitrogen. A relatively simple and inexpensive method to study the formation of the acids and gases produced by rumen microorganisms is the artificial rumen. Several experiments have been conducted by this investigator and his associates using various forms of in vitro apparatus, substrates, and rumen fluids of cattle, sheep, and deer. Results of some of these experiments have been presented in Phase 1 of this report. During these trials the artificial rumen apparatus has been modified several times to achieve greater accuracy. Time of fermentation has been reduced from twenty to six hours of fermentation period. These trials have shown that in vitro gas production can be used safely as an indicator of rumen bacterial activity when antibacterial substances such as penicillin and bacitracin are incorporated in the rumen fluid. There is also indication that gas production can be used as an index of digestibility in the case of many forages of the same nature. As indicated by Annison and Lewis (1959), and also by the work of Rojas (1962), the substrate to be tested should not differ greatly from that of the animal's diet. The amount of gas produced on a particular substrate will also vary from day to day. Comparative interpretations of this nature are thus rather difficult. The amounts and ratios of volatile fatty acids (VFA) produced in vitro can also be used as indicators of microbial activity although interpretations of this nature will require more understanding of the fermentative processes in the rumen. For this reason deductions should be used rather carefully. Because of technical difficulties, as yet the rumen contents of only 15 deer have been analyzed. Ranges of values obtained on VFA concentration and composition are given in Table 11. Preliminary work indicated that substrates to which essential oils of sagebrush were added produced smaller amounts of gas than substrates .without the essential oils. Rumen fluids of sheep, cow, steer, and deer were used during these trials. The amounts of gas produced varied with the individual rumen fluid but the tendency for the addition of the essential oils to reduce gas production remained the same. �-304- ,Annison and Lewis (1959), and Rojas (1962) state that in artificial rumen experiments the diet of the animal is of prime importance. Substrates tested ~ .!!!E£ should closely correspond with the diet of the animal. The ~ vitro experiment to be presented in this chapter was chosen considering the above mentioned findings. The rumen contents used in this experiment contained large amounts of sagebrush indicating that this plant was not a strange substrate to the rumen microflora of the animal. Purpose The purpose of 'the in vitro experiments was to collect information on the antibacterial action of sagebrush essential oils using gas production and VFA production as indices of bacterial activity (metabolism). Methods Collection of Rumen Fluid Deer rumen fluid was obtained from a wild mule deer in the Cache la Poudre River region of North-Central Colorado. The deer was killed by rifle shot. Minutes after death the rumen wall was opened and contents of the rumen were wrapped in four layers of cheesecloth. Rumen contents were pressed gently and the rumen fluid strained into a thermos bottle. The thermos bottle was not prewarmed. Thus, the bacterial fermentation was slowed down and the rate of accumulation of end-products decreased. The rumen fluid was taken rapidly to the laboratory. The time between killing the animal and arrival of the liquid in the laboratory was approximately two hours. At this time the temperature of the rumen fluid was 3loC. The sacrificed animal used in this experiment was a female found on a sagebrush range with sagebrush present in the rumen. Rumen fluid (25 ml) was measured into fermentation flasks (125 ml Erlenmeyer) which contained one gram of the substrate to be tested and 15 ml of standard phosphate buffer solution (pH 6.65) to maintain pH during the fermentation period. Substrates Current annual growth of sagebrush was collected and essential oils obtained as described in Phase 2. The plant material was air dried, then ground through a Wiley mill to pass a 2 rom screen. The material,when air dried, contained approximately 2 percent essential oils. After milling at the time of the experiment it contained only 0.6 to 0.7 percent oils. �-305- The following substrates were used: (1) ground sagebrush; (2) the dried portion of ground sagebrush remaining after distillation; (3) same as 2 but 0.1 gram of essential oils added per gram of substrate; (4) same as 2 but 0.2 grams of essential oils added per gram of substrate; and (5) no substrate (control). After the addition of rumen fluid each flask was closed with a rubber stopper provided with a burette. Figure 3 shows the assembled apparatus. The burettes were made air tight with agar plugs two cm long. These manometric devices provided a direct reading of the gas produced. The displacement of the agar plug was observed with an accuracy of ± 0.2 m1 as indicated by standardization trials conducted previously for the purpose of determining the range of accuracy. The flasks were transferred to a water bath maintained at a constant temperature of 390C. A stirrer provided continuous flow of water around the flasks. A six-hour fermentation period was used with reading every hour. Every two hours during the fermentation period duplicate samples were removed and prepared for VFA analysis (described later). At the end of the fermentation period the remaining flasks were removed from the water bath, each triplicate sample was mixed in a beaker and the residue was strained through cheesecloth. To preserve samples for volatile fatty acid determinations 2 m1 of 25 percent meta-phosphoric acid were added to 10 ml of strained rumen fluid to stop fermentation activity. The samples were frozen and later centrifuged at 16,000 rpm in a Serval 88-1 centrifuge for 45 minutes. The presence of volatile fatty acids (acetic, propionic and isobutyric, butyric, isovaleric, and valerie) and their concentrations were determined by gas-chromatography with an Aerograph 600 B Hi-Fi with hydrogen flame detector. Essential parameters used in this study aref column -- Sf x 1/8", 10% LAC. 296 on 2% terephtha1ic acid, HMDS 80/100 w.; oven temperature -lssoC; injection port temperature 2040C; gas flow rates -- 30 ml/min. Nitrogen as carrier, flow rate -- 20 ml/min. Attenuation 4, output 109. Recorder: Brown 1/4 sec. with disc integrator. Results Gas Production Results of gas production were calculated as the mean of triplicate samples and are presented in Table 12 and Figure 4. �-306- Results indicate that the addition of oils reduced microbial activity in vitr£ as reflected by decreased gas production. In Figure 2 an acceleration of gas production can be observed after each two hours of incubation period. This is due partially to the experimental procedure. Every two hours samples were taken out for VFA analysis. At this time all of the remaining samples were shaken uniformly to mix the contents of the flasks. During this shaking some of the absorbed gases were probably released; hence, gas production appeared to increase. VFA Production Table 13 shows the percentages and total molar of samples analyzed in this experiment. concentrations of VFA Values obtained on VFA concentrations show that increasing amounts of oils in the sagebrush decreased the production of VFA in the samples. This finding corresponds closely with results obtained by gas production. Decreased molar concentrations can be attributed to decreased bacterial activity due to the inhibitory effect of sagebrush oils. Although there are certain variations in the percentages of VFA when essential oils were present in the substrate, the data indicate no major changes in proportions of the various volatile fatty acids which may be attributed to the antibacterial action of essential oils of sagebrush. Phase 5: INHIBITORY ACTION OF SAGEBRUSH ESSENTIAL OILS ON STEER RUMEN MICROBIAL ACTIVITY MEASURED IN VIVO AND IN VITRO Introduction Purpose It has been shown so far that bacteria in general as well as rumen bacteria are inhibited by the essential oils of sagebrush. In yitro experiments using an artificial rumen technique have demonstrated also that the metabolic activity of deer rumen bacteria is lowered when sagebrush oils are present in the rumen contents. It was believed that to make this study complete, in vivo observations on the effects of sagebrush essential oils should also be made. The natural choice of' animal for this study would be the deer. Unfortunately, no deer were available for this work. Through the cooperation of the Dairy Section of the University it was possible to do some of this work on a rumen-fistulated steer. The purpose of this experiment was to examine the effects of sagebrush on the rumen microbial function of a ruminant, on rumen physiological function and on the appetite of the animal. �-307- Methods Experimental Animal A Brown Swiss steer provided with a permanent rumen fistula was used for the experiment. The rumen fistula provided the opportunity to administer the sagebrush directly into the rumen, to remove rumen fluid samples, and to make direct observations on rumen motility. The animal was fed before and during the trial an ad libitum alfalfa hay diet. VFA Sample Collection Two days before the beginning of the trial and each day during the trial, rumen fluid samples were taken from the middle lower part of the rumen by means of a plastic tube. Approximately one liter of rumen fluid was collected in a thermos bottle, taken to the laboratory, and strained through four layers of cheesecloth. Two m1 of 25 percent meta-phosphoric acid was added to 10 m1 of rumen fluid to stop fermentation. The samples were frozen and later centrifuged at 16,000 rpm in a Serva1 SS-l centrifuge for 45 minutes. The volatile fatty acids were determined described in Phase 4. with the gas-chromatograph Plant Material Current annual growth of sagebrush was collected from the same region as before. The plant material was kept in plastic bags in a freezer 24 hours before administering it to the animal. The sagebrush contained approximately 2 grams of steam distillable essential oils per 100 grams. Feeding of Sagebrush Each of four days during the experiment, shortly before feeding time, some of the rumen contents were removed through the fistula and seven pounds of sagebrush was introduced into the rumen. Rumen contents were stirred by hand to insure uniform mixing. Approximately 28 pounds of sagebrush was given to the animal over the four-day period. ~n Y.i.ttu Trial Shortly before administering the first seven pounds of sagebrush a rumen fluid sample was taken and an in vitro fermentation experiment was conducted. One gram of ground alfalfa hay (obtained from the ration of the animal) was used as substrate in each fermentation flask. To the one gram portions of alfalfa hay the following were added: (1) no treatment; (2) 0.1 gram of sagebrush essential oils; (3) 0.2 gram of essential oils; and (4) no substrate added (control). To each set of flasks 15 ml of buffer solution (pH 6.65) and 25 m1 of strained rumen fluid was added in a manner described in Phase 4. �-308Equipment and procedures during the experiment were the same as described in Phase 4 except that readings were made every two hours on gas production instead of every hour and no samples were removed during the sixhour fermentation period. At the end of the six-hour fermentation period, composite samples were made from the triplicates, the residue was strained through cheesecloth, and samples were preserved with meta-phosphoric acid for VFA determination. The same experiment was repeated this time 21 pounds of sagebrush on the fourth day of the trial. had been given to the animal. At Other Observations Daily observations motility, appetite were made on color of rumen contents, smell, rumen of the animal, and physical appearance of feces. Results General Observations Observations Table 14. which were made directly on the animal are presented in The rumen color was light yellow-green on the alfalfa hay diet and changed to a dark green with increasing intensity each day during the trial. Twenty-four hours after the first treatment rumen contents had the definite characteristic smell of sagebrush. Rumen contents each day showed increasingly less and less fluid content. The last day of the trial the rumen contents became so dry that they had to be squeezed to get a few m1 of fluid. Motility of the rumen degenerated on the third day (24 hours after the accumulated administration of 21 1bs of sagebrush) to vertical, irregular contractions. It ceased entirely sometime between the third and fourth day. Loss of appetite was observed 24 hours after the accumulated administration of 14 1bs of sagebrush and the animal ceased to eat completely after that time. Feces assumed a reddish tint 24 hours after the accumulated 14 pounds of sagebrush were given. Bloody mucus covered a fecal sample taken directly from the rectum on the next day. Twenty-four hours after the administration of the last portion of sagebrush (accumulated 28 1bs) the rumen was emptied, rumen solid contents removed by hand, and the remaining portion replaced. Appetite and rumen movements were still absent after this treatment. �-309- Three days after the last administration of sagebrush the rumen contents were removed again and repl~ced with rumen contents from two fistulated cows. Within a few minute~ rumen movem~nts were initiated and normal appetite was observed on the next day. Gas Production Results, ill terms ~f gas production, of the two in vitro trials are presented together ~n Figure 5. They indicate a sharp reduction of microbial activity in the second trial as compared with the first. The decreased activity can be attributed to the effect of sagebrush feeding. Essential oils of sagebrush also depressed microbial activity in both trials. VFA Production Results obtained during the experiment (!g vivo and in yitro) are shown in Table 15. Saiebrush feeding depressed microbial activity. The concentrations of VFA in the rumen contents dropped from 123.24 roM/I to 57.09 ~~/l. There seems little doubt that essential oils of sagebrush are the major factors in this phenomenon. During in yitro trials there wa~ always a decrease in VFA concentrations of samples containing the oils. A slight tendency for higher acetic-propionic .acid ratio is observed on substrates containing essential oils in the two in vitro experiments. After administering 21 pounds of sagebrush this ratio seemed to change. This mi&ht be attributed to factors such as no rumen movement or lack of app~tite. DISCUSSION Preliminary experiments have shown that the artificial rumen technique can be applied to deer rumen studies. The uncontrolled diet of deer, however, requires a large sample size before any generalizations and strong conclusions can be made. The data presented indicate rather conclusively that the essential oils of big sagebrush are antibacterial agents. Furthermore, this antibacterial property is of a broad spectrum acting on gram positive and gram negative organisms. The rumen bacteria of deer are also affected by the essential oils of sagebrush. The disc assay method did not demonstrate this inhibition very effectively. This might be attributed to the chemical composition of the media and difficulties in diffusion of the oils into the media. Failure of the method to show inhibition therefore is probably of a technical nature and not a demonstration of resistance toward the action of the oils. This conclusion is supported by results obtained with the three isolates using Tryptone Glucose Extract Agar (Table 10). �-310When essential oils were incorporated into the agar medium (roll tube technique) 0.5 m1 amounts of oils added to 9 ml amounts of agar inhibited all bacterial growth. Addition of 0.002 ml amounts of oils to 6 m1 of cellulose broth decreased the rate of cellulose digestion. Deer rumen contents might contain one hundred grams of solid material per 1000 m1 of rumen contents. Since 0.002 m1 of oils added to 6 m1 of cellulose broth slowed down cellulose digestion, theoretically the presence 6f roughly as little as 0.5 m1 of essential oils per 1000 m1 of rumen contents might decrease slightly the rate of cellulose digestion. But if 100 grams of sagebrush (current annual growth) contain one to two percent oils, then hypothetically, as little as 25 to 50 grams of sagebrush per kilogram of rumen contents might lower the rate of cellulose digestion slightly. Whether this would be true under natural conditions is open to question and especially to more investigations. In vitro studies showed a definite depression of microbial activity due to the essential oils of sagebrush as measured by gas production (Table 12, Figure 4) and VFA production (Table 10). The rumen fluid donor animal had been eating sagebrush before. The same effect of depression in microbial activity was observed in vitro and in vivo using the rumen contents of the fistu1ated steer. Theleve1-;f oil;-used in the in vitro studies (0.1 g per 40 m1 of artificial rumen contents or 2.5 g per 1000 m1 of artificial rumen contents) might actually occur in the rumen of deer when the diet consists of 100 percent sagebrush. The foregoing experiments have shown that, due to the essential oils of sagebrush, certain levels of sagebrush in the diet slow down rumen digestion by inhibiting rumen microorganisms and slowing down their digestion rate. It is hoped that the present experiments are only the first phase of investigation of this important plant genus. Variations in the percentages and total composition of essential oils with regard to seasons and soil composition and the effects of fertilizers on essential oil production are considered ·important in further studies. Other sagebrush species also deserve consideration. The possible inhibitory effect of the essential oils of sagebrush on soil microf10ra and fauna, and on germination of seeds are important phases expecia11y when reseeding of ranges are considered. Adaptation or resistance of rumen microorganisms was also untouched in these studies. Because essential oils are known to inhibit bacteria, fungi, and also higher forms such as parasitic wo rms the possible use of sagebrush by range animals as a natural medicine would also be interesting to study. LITERATURE CITED Annison, E. F. and D. Lewis. 1959. Metabolism Co. Ltd. London, England. 184 p. in the rumen. Methnen and Bisse1, Harold D., Bruce Harris, Helen Strong, and Frank James. 1955. The digestibility of certain natural and artificial foods eaten by deer in California. Calif. Fish and Game 41:57-78. Black, Luther A., Chairman. 1960. Standard Methods for the examination of dairy products (11th ed.) Am. Public Health Assoc. Inc. New York, N. Y. 448 p. �-311Bryant, M. p. and L. A. Burkey. 1953. Cultural methods and some characteristics of some of the more numerous groups of bacteria in the bovine rumen. J. Dairy Sci. 36t205-2l7. ______, and I. M. Robinson. 1961. An improved nonselective culture medium for ruminal bacteria and its use in determining diurnal variation in numbers of bacteria in the rumen. J. Dairy Sci. 4411446-1456. Carlson, H. J., Harold D. Bissell, and M. G. Mueller. 1946. Antibacterial and antimalarial substances separated from higher plants. J. Bact. 52:155-168. Dietz, Donald R., Robert H. Udall, and Lee E. Yeager. 1962. Chemical composition and digestibility by mule deer of selected forage species, Cache La Poudre range, Colorado. Colo. Game and Fish Dept. Tech. Publ. No. 14. 89 p. _____ , and Lee E. Yeager. 1959. The apparent role of sagebrush in the management of mule deer winter range. West. Asso. State Game and Fish Corom. Proceedings. 39:155-158. Guenther, Ernest. 1949. The essential oils. Inc. ,New York, N. Y. 427 p. Vol. I. D. Van Nostrand Co., Maruzzella, Jasper C. and Marvin Lichtenstein. 1956. The in vitro antibacterial activity of oils. Am. Pharmaceutical Assoc. J. 45:378-381. Rojas Montoya, Sergio W. 1962. Effect of pelleting alfalfa on in vitro gas production, cellulose digestion and VFA production. M. S. Thesis, Colo. State Univ. Ft. Collins, Colo. 63 p. Steele, Catherine Cassels. 1934. An introduction to plant biochemistry. G. Bell and Sons, Ltd. London, England. 326 p. Prepared by _-=J-=u;.::l;.::i:.::u;.::s~G:..: •. .....:.;N;.::a:>i!gJl..Y_Approved by _-=D..:e:.::a:.::n:_E;,.:.-=.;M:;.:e:.::d:. Principal Game Biologist Date January, 1964 ----------------------- Laurence E. Riordan Assistant Director Research Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �-312APPENDIX Table 1..--TOTAL AMOUNT OF GAS PRODUCEDiDURING IN VITRO FERMENTATION -- -"'"-- Hours 12 16 Gas Production in ml., Rumen Sample 2; 8 Deer 1 Deer 2 Deer 3 Deer 4 Deer 5 Cow (Diet A) Cow (Diet B) Sheep I Sheep II 20.4 21..8 10.• 8 20.• 2 25.8 26.5 10.5 1906 15.8 39.,0 31..2 14.1 32.7 36.4 47.,4 18•.2 28.8 23.4 51.5 50.0 18.8 38.2 45.8 51.0 22.8 34.0 29.0 59.0 52.5 22.0 43.5 51,,0 64.5 27.0 38.0 33.5 20 Final EH 60.2 53.4 22.6 46.0 53.6 68.0 29.8 39.2 35.5 6.00 6.15 __ 6.15 5.85 6.20 6.10 6.25 5.90 Table 2•. --AMOUNT OF GAS PRODUCED BY CONTROLS DURING FERMENTATION Hours 12 16 Gas Production in m1 •. Rumen Sample 4 8 Deer 1 Deer 2 Deer 3 Deer 4 Deer 5 Cow (Diet A) Cow (Diet B) Sheep I Sheep II 3 7 4.,4 1.8 10.9 14.8 4 •. 1 5,,0 106 78 10.8 83 3.2 17 e 0 24.5 6.0 6.8 11.0 1L2 0 0 0 12.0 10.8 3.8 20.1 31.0 7.2 8.0 14.5 14.. 5 12.8 13.0 3.8 25.0 37.5 7.9 10•. 8 17.8 17.• 8 20 Final pH 13•. 4 14.3 3.8 26.5 42.0 8.0 12.0 19.0 19.0 6.40 6.45 6.50 6.00 6.55 6.50 6.45 6.30 �-313- Table 3.--NET AMOUNTS OF GAS PRODUCED DURING FERMENTATION Rumen Sample 4 Deer 1 Deer 2 Deer 3 Deer 4 Deer 5 Cow (Diet A) Cow (Diet B) Sheep I Sheep II 17.7 17.4 9.0 9.3 11.0 22.4 5.5 12.1 8.0 Hours 12 16 8 Gas Production in MI. .28.2 22.9 10.9 15.7 11.9 4104 11.4 17.8 12.2 39.5 39.2 15.0 18.1 14.8 49.8 14.8 19.5 14.5 46.2 39.5 18.2 18.5 13.5 56.6 16.8 20.2 15.7 20 46.8 39.2 18.8 19.9 11.6 60.0 17.8 20.2 16.5 Table 4.--MORPHOLOGICAL CHARACTERISTICS OR ORGANISMS USED IN TRIAL I Source of Organism Appearance on Agar Plate Gram Microscopic Appearance and Reaction ,Pasteurized Milk circular, convex opaque, butyrous gram negative micrococci Pasteurized Milk large, purplish red colony (on Violet Red Bile Agar) gram negative small rods Pasteurized Cream punctiform, convex opaque, butyrous gram negative micrococci Alfalfa Hay irregular, flat dull, viscid' gram positive large rods Air punctiform, pulvinate opaque, butyrous gram negative rods' Air mixed cultures mixed cultures' �-314- Table 5.--MORPHOLOGICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF ORGANISMS USED IN TRIAL II Source of Organism Appearance on Agar Plate Gram Reaction and Microscopic Appearance Ice Cream irregular, effuse, translucent, membranous gram positive, short chain streptococci Pasteurized Cream filamentous, translucent, gram negative rod circular, convex glistening gram negative rod Alfalfa Hay circular, convex glistening gram positive large rod Alfalfa Hay punctiform, glistening .gram negative Air irregular, flat dull, viscid gram positive micrococcus Air circular, opaque gram positive Skimmed Condensed Milk effuse brittle flat, convex rod rod �-315- Table 6.-~DESCRIPTION OF ORGANISMS USED IN TRIAL III Gram Reaction Source gram negative rod standard lab culture gram negative rod Difco Lab Coliform gram negative rod Milk Pseudomonas fluorescens gram negative rod standard lab culture Proteus mirabilis gram negative rod standard lab culture Sarcina lutea gram positive cocci standard lab culture Staphylococcus aureus gram positive micrococcus standard lab culture gram positive streptococcus standard lab culture Organisms Alcaligenes Bacillus faecalis subtilis Streptococcus faecalis �-316- Table 7.--Z0NES OF BACTERIAL INHIBITION PRODUCED BY TESTED SUBSTANCES IN TRIAL I Organisms Unknown Unknown Unknown Unknown Coliform Coliform Mixed Culture Mixed Culture Plate No. Zones of Inhibition ~diameter in rnrn) by: Sagebrush Alfalfa Olive Penicillin Sagebrush Broth Broth Oil 0.5 units Oil 12 13 20 21 14 15 0 0 0 0 0 0 18 Growth around all discs except sagebrush disc. 19 Growth around all discs except sagebrush disc. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 16 17 15 10 12 11 Orange Oil 0 10 0 0 0 0 Table 8.--Z0NES OF BACTERIAL INHIBITION PRODUCED BY TESTED SUBSTANCES IN TRIAL II Organisms Unknown Unknown Unknown Unknown Unknown Unknown Unknown Unknown Mean Plate No. 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Zones of Inhibition ~diameter in rnrn) by% Penicillin Olive Sagebrush 2.5 units Oil Oil 14 8 0 0 15 9 0 19 8.1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 15 11 21 16 10 9 18 14.3 Orange Oil 0 0 0 12 0 7 0 7 3.0 �-317Table 9.--Z0NES OF INHIBITION PRODUCED BY THE TESTED SUBSTANCES IN TRIAL III Organisms Penicillin 2.5 units Alcaligenes faecal is 0 Bacillus subtilis Coliform Zones of Inhibition ~diameter in mm~ b~: Olive Sagebrush Sagebrush Alfalfa Oil Oil Broth Broth 15 (0.5 units) 0 Orange Oil 0 19 0 0 13 0 24 0 0 15 0 11 0 0 0 Pseudomonas f1uorescens 0 0 8 0 0 0 Proteus mirabilis 0 0 12 0 0 0 Sarcina lutea 9 0 Hr 0 0 0 StaEhilococcus aureus 12 0 16 0 0 0 StreEtococcus faeca1is 0 12 0 0 0 0 1/ 1/ 20 rom inhibition on surface of agar �-318- Table lO.--INHIBITION PRODUCED BY THE ESSENTIAL OILS OF SAGEBRUSH ON SOME ISOLATED MICROORGANISMS OF DEER RUMEN Culture No. 53 Zones of inhibition (diameter in mm) by: Essential oils of sagebrush Growth only at outer part of plate 56 30 59 14 Table ll.--RANGES IN VFA PERCENTAGE DISTRIBUTION AND CONCENTRATION OF RUMEN CONTENTS OF 15 WILD DEER Percentages Acids Acetate Propionate and Isobutyrate Butyrate Isovalerate Valerate Total mM per liter of rumen contents: 62-76 18-23 8-13 0- 2.5 0- 2.0 43-160 �-319Table l2.--TOTAL AMOUNT OF GAS PRODUCED DURING IN VITRO FERMENTATION PERIOD Hours of Fermentation 3 4 Gas Production in mI. Substrate 1 2 Ground Sagebrush 8.2 14.1 20.5 Oil-less Sagebrush 4.7 ll.l Oil-less Sagebrush + 0.1 g E.0.1/ Added 2.0 Oil-less Sagebrush + 0.2 g E.O. Added No Substrate 5 6 23.3 28.0 31.1 5.95 20.0 25.22 34.3 35.5 6.05 4.1 10.5 12.0 16.9 17.8 6.20 0.8 2.3 6.1 6.7 9.1 9.7 6.40 0.3 1.8 6.0 7.1 t r.s 12.3 6.60 1/ E.O. means essential oils Final EH �Table l3.--CONCENTRATIONS Ferment, Time AND VFA PERCENTAGE DISTRIBUTION OF ANALYZED SAMPLES Substrate Acetate Percentage Distribution of: Butyr. Isoval, Prop. + Isobut, Valero Total VPA ~mM/l) Two Hours Ground Sagebrush Oil-less Sagebrush Oil-less S.brush + 0.1 g E,O. Oil-less S.brush + 0.2 g E,O. No Substrate 60,86 74.56 63.32 68.80 73.52 27,85 13.27 21.10 16.00 15.75 9,13 9.11 11.26 12.00 8.40 0.43 0.74 0.70 0 0,21 1.73 2.32 3.52 3.20 2.10 115.0 120.7 71.0 62.5 95.2 Four Hours Ground Sagebrush Oil-less Sagebrush Oil-less S.Brush + 0.1 g E.O. Oil-less S.brush + 0.2 g E.O. No Substrate 56.90 72.62 66.53 67.51 63.46 31. 97 15.67 20.47 16.88 22.32 9.35 9.07 10.23 12.67 12.00 0.30 1.00 0.20 0.14 0.51 1.48 1.64 2.56 2.90 1.71 128.3 121.2 97.7 71.1 58.3 Ground Sagebrush Oil-less Sagebrush Oil-less S.brush + 0.1 g E.O. Oil-less S.brush + 0.2 g E.O. No Substrate 58.66 72.62 66.54 67.51 63.46 29.33 15.67 20.47 16.88 22.32 9.77 9.07 10.23 12.67 12.00 0.44 1.00 0.20 0.14 0.51 1.78 1.64 2.56 2.80 1.71 100.0 121.2 97.7 71.1 53,8 Six Hours I \.N N Cl I �Table l4.--0BSERVATIONS MADE DURING SAGEBRUSH TRIAL USING RUMEN FISTULATED STEER Accumulated Lbs Given Up to 24 hrs Before Observations Physical Appearance of Rumen Contents Rumen Motility Appetite Appearance of Feces pH of Rumen Contents None light yellowish green yes yes regular 7.00 7 lbs darker green yes yes regular 7 .50 14 lbs dark green less fluid as on alfalfa hay yes no reddish tint 7.45 21 lbs very dark green, dry contents no regular motility, only vertical contractions no ostipation bloody mucus cover on feces 6.65 28 lbs very dark green, dry contents no motility at all no ostipation bloody mucus cover on feces 7.40 ----------------------- I \..N N I-' I �Table 15,--CHANGES IN VFA PERCENTAGES AND CONCENTRATIONS DURING IN VIVO AND IN VITRO TRIALS Samples Acetate Propionate plus Isobutyrate 24 hrs. before treat: Alfalfa Hay A1f. Hay + 0.1 g E,O. added/g substrate A1f. Hay + 0.1 g E.O. added/g substrate No Substrate added 77.40 77.04 16,10 15.68 5.00 6.08 1.42 1.10 0,08 0.1 123.24 111. 88 80.23 13.66 4.45 0.64 0.57 51.10 79.30 77.96 14.47 15.92 4.66 4.65 0.95 1.47 0.62 0 52.72 50.28 0 60.00 Durin~ treatment: 7 1bs sage added 24 hrs before sample taking 7 1bs added (14 1bs accum.) 24 hrs before sample taking 7 1bs added (21 1bs accum.) 24 hours before sample taking 7 1bs added (28 1bs accum.) 24 hours before sample taking End of treatment: Alfalfa Hay A1f. Hay + 0.1 g E.O, added/g substrate A1f. Hay + 0.1 g E.O. added/g substrate No Substrate added Total Butyrate Isova1erate Valerate mM/l I I..N N N I 80.16 13.52 5.12 1.2 79.55 14.45 5.66 0.40 0.04 54.24 73.27 16.31 8.0 2.42 0 55.00 66.24 18.56 10.40 4.0 0.80 57.06 69.77 17.70 9.06 2.41 1.06 54.32 71.11 16.44 9.71 2.74 0 31.50 71.30 16.30 31,26 10.00 2.40 0 - - - - - - - - - - - - - -,- - - Sample Lo st;- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - �-323- 35 ----..- Sagebrush Oil-less Sagebrush Oil-less Sagebrush plus 0.1 g E.O. added Oil-less Sagebrush plus 0.2 g E.O. added No substrate ••••• 30 25 / / . • .""",. ". /. . 10 / J' • AI·-", .... .. ..... . ... .- . "..--..... ... ~. .. -:.--. -~ .~. 5 ~ o o 1 2 3 4 5 HOURS OF FERMENTATION Figure 4. Gas production during in vitro incubation period. 6 �-324- 30 AlL Hay AlL Hay + 0.1 g E.O. -.-.- A1£. Hay + 0.2 g E.O. No Substrate Heavy line indicates Trial 1 ,Light line indicates Trial 2 25 20 15 -- 10 ---------...".--- 5 ....... .-.- •••• ............ .:..... ', ... ' •. .. " - . .. " .. -.-.-.-.- -.-.- .. -.~----" - -- ---- o o 2 4 HOURS OF FERMENTATION Figure 5. Gas production during two, six-hour in ,vitro fermentation trials. 6 � https://cpw.cvlcollections.org/files/original/0846821eccc5ba1ca28d91d9539f140c.pdf ccb4e038eb6438598be79dbe693413ca PDF Text Text -1- JOB CmiPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of Colorado Project No. H-38-R-17 Deer-Elk Investigations Hork Plan No. 1 ------- Migration Betv7een Summer and Hinter Rapges Experimental Trapping and Marking Techniques Job No. 5 Period Covered: April 1, 1962 through March 31, 1963. Abstract There was a total of 64 elk trapped during the 1962-63 trapping season. Of these animals, only 41 were actually tagged and banded. No fatalities occurred during trapping operations. There were nine tagged elk and 11 t agg ed deer killed during the 1962 big game season. Neck band sightings only tended to confirm previous years sighting data tvhich indicates that the elk in the Gunnison move about 35 miles to the southeast to winter and the elk on the Hhite River area move up to 30 miles to winter. Recommendations: 1. The regular, systematic schedule of aerial flights over the various trapping areas should be continued in order to determine movements of banded animals and to determine areas of concentration at different periods of the year. 2. Keep an up-to-date map of each trapping area with a cumulative record of all sightings and tag returns from hunter-killed animals. These mapped locations to be used in helping set big game seasons tnthin local areas. 3. Design and construct a IIbull eliminator" so that large bulls cannot get into the trap. 4. Design and make up a new type of colored neck band so that the problem of rolling and fraying of the lighter material can be eliminated. 5. Concentrate a trapping crew in an area for a week or 10 days, then move to another site for a period. This may help reduce the number of recatches by alloHing new bunches of elk to move into the trapping areas while there is no disturbance from Sno-Cats, horses, etc. 6. Assist Regional Game Hanagement personnel in selecting sites for new traps and act as consultant in the construction and operation of the new traps. All of the ear tags and neck bands wi l.l. be ordered by the Federal Aid Research staff, even though the various regions 't'lill pay the cost of the materials. This needs to be done in order to keep numbers and colors from being duplicated. Also, the Federal Aid Big Game Research staff will act as a clearing house for band sightings, tag returns, etc. for the same reason stated above. �-2Objectives: To obtain as much. information as is possible from a review' of pertinent literature regarding different methods of trapping and marking or identifying big game animals. 1. 2. To continue work on the experimental deer and elk traps at the Sapinero Game Hanagement Area, with the idea of developing new gates that will aLl.ow any number of animals to enter the trap and at the same time effectively seal them in. 3. To continue development of the net catching device, especially as to the proper size needed for each type of animal, and the proper height above ground for placement of the net. 4. To develop a portable big game trap that will utilize the group trap principal along with the new type gates and the net catching device. 5. To mark and tag all animals caught in the traps with specially designed tags and plastic collars. Bells may be tried if proper kinds can be obtained, and the new field of radio t.ransmtt t.ers '-1illbe investigated if they become available or prove successful in other areas. 6. To follow up on any reports of marked animals in order to determine the distance traveled, and summer range compared to winter range. 7. To run periodical snowshoe or.Sno-Cat counts in the trapping areas in order to observe movements of marked animals. These ground counts to be supplemented by aerial surveys of the various areas to get movements in both summer and ,'linter. These aerial counts of marked animals ,viII be noted incidentally during the sex-ratio counts in the fall and early vlinter. 8. To periodically analyze the sightings and tag returns to determine what significant items of management information might be gathered from these reports. 9. To assist with the trapping and banding pro~ram in the vicinity of Rocky Mountain National Park, and instruct Park Service and Forest Service personnel in the operation of the traps and nets. 10. To test drug dosages recommended by veterinarians through use of the CapChur gun as an incidental part of this study. The animals can be more easily handled when tranquilized and the dosages used can be recorded incidentally to the other work going on. Techniques Used: 1. The review of literature will be a continuing program of reading in the Journal of Wildlife Management and other publications regarding trapping and marking of big game animals that might fit our situation here in Colorado. 2. Bait deer and elk into the experimental group traps near Gunnison and on the ,·fuiteRiver Elk Study Area with alfalfa hay, salt and other types of bait. Tag and neck band all animals caught, induce the animals to jump into the net catching device for easier handling during the tagging operation. Weigh the animals while they are in the net to get an idea of the size of the animals during the winter. �-33. Make suggestions for a new type of portable trap, and design and build one to see if a practical portable big game trap can be worked up. 4. Any reports of banded or tagged animals will be checked out to get the following information: distance traveled, ease of identification, summer range vs. winter range, map all recoveries and sightings, such information to be used for management purposes. 5. Enlist the aid of a veterinarian when necessary to help work out the dosages for the drugs used, and to modify the Cap-Chur guns now on hand to make them more consistent between shots. 6. Hhen the experimental gates, net, scales and portable trap seem to be working satisfactorily, the cost per animal trapped and marked will be calculated so that an economic study can be made of the cost per animal marked, etc. Findings: Periodic revie~'lsof the literature on big game did not reveal any new techniques of trapping or marking that wou Ld help us here in Colorado. The Eligen trap was torn down and relocated on 2nd Dry Gulch about three miles north of the previous trap location. This was necessitated by the relocation of High"lay 50, which brough t the new highway to '''ithin100 yards of the trap. There is an existing road to the new trap which will make it easy to check with a four-wheel drive unit or the Sno-Cat. It is also located in a natural crossing area just be l.ow -a saddle \,hich may increase the number of animals that can be caught during the trapping season. The problem of fraying and rolling of the neck bands was only partially solved when a nylon strap l~ inches ,,,idewas located. This strap was too narxow to have the colored material sewed on it, so three straps were sewed and glued together to make a collar three inches wide to which was sewed the colored neck band material. This type of collar cost about $1.50 for the nylon before the colored material was added. More details on this type of collar '(-1ill be reported on under Work Plan II, Job 4, of this project. Just before the segment ended another type of webbing was located which shows much promise in this field of investigation. The l'JesternSaddle Company of Denver, Colorado makes a four-inch \vide cotton strap which is 1/8 inch thick. This material is used in the manufacture of Britchens, and should last a long time if it was placed around the neck of a deer or elk. None of the material could be obtained in time to be used in this segment, but it will be used during the next year's work to see if it will hold up. The cost is Low enough so that it can be used in place of the nylon mentioned above. The Miller Creek trap was reconstructed by raising the panels to the tops of the poles making a fence 10 feet high. No animals wer e lost from this trap by jumping over the fence. �-4The Hill Creek trap was also reconstucted to make the fence 10 feet high, and to strengthen the fence so that an elk could not run through it. The jump gate was moved more to the south side of the trap in the hopes that it would be easier to get the animals to jump out with the gate facing this direction. The "tvinterof 1962-63 was a light one from the standpoint of snow depth in the trapping areas. There were considerable periods of time that extreme cold was experienced, but snow did not accumulate enough to make movement difficult for the deer or elk. In spite of the poor trapping weather a total of 54 elk were trapped on the lVhite River area, and five elk were trapped at the Sapinero Game Management Area. An additional five elk were banded and tagged at the Devil Creek Management Area in an experimental portable trap that was manned for the most part by Regional personnel. Some assistance was given by Federal Aid personnel at the start of the program in this area so that the local men could become familiar with the operation of the gates, net, etc. Of the 64 elk caught, a total of 41 were actually tagged and banded. Most of the rest escaped for one reason or another, and five were recatches from previous years trapping operations. After talking vlith the trapping crews , it is felt that inexperience in the operation of the net caused most of the losses. Either more training of the crews or one of the Federal Aid trapping personnel should be in on the trapping in order to lessen the loss of animals already trapped. There were two tagged elk killed in 1962 from the lVhite River trapping area, while hunters killed seven elk and 11 deer that had been tagged and banded in the Gunnison area. None of the tag returns in either trapping area indicated new areas of movement and served only to strengthen previous years tag return locations. On the basis of information now on hand for the lVhite River Elk Study Area, most of the elk that are tagged at the Hill Creek trap move up the main South Fork during the summer and winter from Hill Creek north to the Sleepy Cat area, with enough neck band sightings on the Hilliams Fork side to indicate a natural cross-over of the elk from the Williams Fork into the North and South Fork drainages of the lVhite River. All of the tag returns from the Gunnison area indicate that the elk that are caught at either one of the traps on the Sapinero Game Management Area summer in the area north and west of the trapping sites. Many elk are killed in Management Unit 53 which is completely within the North Fork of the Gunnison drainage. These elk move between 30 and 40 miles to winter. Three specially designed portable elk traps were built by Southwest Regional personnel with assistance of Federal Aid personnel. These traps are to be used in the San Juan-Piedra and Rio Grande areas. Some help will be needed at the beginning of the trapping season to line up the Regional men on the net procedure, etc., but no great amount of time will be spent on these traps by Federal Aid personnel. However, evaluation of these traps will be done by V1-38-R personnel as they wer e constructed to our specifications at no cost to the project. �.•sHhite River Table 1 - Elk Trapped and Tagged at the.Hi11 Creek Trap, National Forest, Co1tirado, Wiriter 1962-63. Date Sex Age Tag.No. Remarks 1/16 1/16 1/17 1/19 1/19 1/21 1/21 1/21 1/21 1/21 1/21 1/23 1/23 1/24 2/ 4 2/21 2/21 3/ 2 3/ 2 3/ 2 3/ 3 3/ 6 3/ 6 .3/11 3/11 3/11 3/14 3/14 3/14 3/19 3/19 Female Female Female Female Male Male Female Female Female Male Male Female Female Female Female Female Female Female Female Female Female Female Male Male Male Female Female Female Female Female Calf Calf H-37 H-37 H-38 '{IJ-38 W-39 H-39 \-1-40 H-40 H-41 \-J-4l W-42 \'7-42 w-43 H-43 W-45 W-45 H-46 H-46 H-47 H-47 H-48 H-48 1-I-49 H-49 W-50 H-50 H-51 H-51 W-52 H-52 H-53 H-53 H-54 H-54 H-55 H-55 H-56 H-56 H-57 H-57 W-58 H-58 H-59 H-59 H-60 H-60 H-6l H-61 H-62 H-62 H-63 1-7-63 H-64 H-64 H-65 H-65 H-66 VI-66 H-67 H-67 H-68 1-1-68 \fuite plastic collar \fuite plastic collar vlliiteplastic collar ,\fuiteplastic collar lJhite plastic collar Hhite plastic collar No collar White plastic collar lfuite plastic collar ,·Jhiteplastic collar White plastic collar \fuite plastic collar lfuite plastic collar No collar Hhite plastic collar White plastic collar White plastic collar plastic collar '(-lliite l·llii te plastic collar lfuite plastic collar White plastic collar \fuite plastic collar vlliiteplastic collar White plastic collar No collar No collar Hhite plastic collar '{Illiite plastic collar vJhite plastic collar Hhite plastic collar \fuite plastic collar CaLf Yearling Calf C4lf Calf Mciture Mature Calf Calf Mature Ca Lf Mature Mature Mature Mature Mature Mature Yearling Yearling Mature Calf Yearling Yearling Mature Yearling Yearling Yearling Mature Calf Hinter 1962-63. Table 2 - Elk Recaught at the Hill Creek Trap, Date Hhere Caught \fuere Tagged Date Tagged Tag No. 1/19/63 Hill Creek Hill Creek 2/10/61 H- 8 1/19/63 Hill Creek Hill Creek 2/27/61 1/24/63 Hill Creek Hill Creek 2/ 6/61 3/19/63 Hill Creek Hill Creek 3/ 9/62 Remarks 708 days since original catch; wh i, te collar replaced. 1'1-17 710 days since original catch; white collar replaced. H- 7 717 days since original catch; collar still on animal. (This elk was recaught in March, 1962 and had its collar replaced at that time). Collar not replaced. 375 days since original catch; H-36 white collar replaced. �-6Table 3 _ Heights of Female Elk Trapped on Hill Creek, White River National Forest, Colorado, Winter 1962-i963! Date Age Tag No. Height 2/21 2/21 3/ 2 3/ 2 3/ 2 3/ 3 3/11 3/14 3/14 3/19 Mature Mature Mature Mature Yearling Yearling Mature Yearling Yearling Mature H-53 W-54 H-55 H-56 W-57 510 520 508 493 360 Remarks Hhite collar lVhite collar lVhite collar t,fuitecollar White collar White collar No collar lVhite collar lVhite collar White collar It it It 11 It 315 it 590 It 311 It 301 IF 465 It l-I-58 "1;-1-63 H-64 H-66 \-1-67 Table 4 _ Heights of Male Elk Trapped on Hill Creek, Hhite River National Forest, Colorado, Hinter 1962-1963. Date Age 3/11 3/ 6 3/11 Yearling Calf Yearling Tag No. Height Remarks 380 it 270 ift 315 1ft No collar Hhite plastic collar lVhite plastic collar H-62 H-60 "H-61 Table 5 _ Tag Returns from Elk Killed During the 1962 Big Game Season, vfuite River National Forest, Colorado. Date Killed Date Tagged Hhere Tagged Where Killed 10/22/62 1/20/62 Hill Creek W-30 Fowler Creek 4/16/62 2/15/61 Hill Creek W-12 YZ Ranch South Fork Remarks Spike bull in velvet when killed; had moved about l~ miles south of trap; collar still intact. Had been wounded during 1961 hunting season, killed as a complete cripple; antlers in velvet and 8 inches long. Table 6 _ Elk Trapped and Tagged at the East Miller Creek Trap, lVhite River National Forest, Colorado, \vinter 1962-1963. Date Sex Age 3/6 Female Mature Tag No. W-206 \'J-206 Remarks Green plastic collar �-7- Table 7 _ Elk Trapped and Harked at the Ellgen Trap, Sapinero Game Management Area, Gunnison County, Colorado, Winter 1962~1963. Date Sex Age 3/15 3/15 3/17 3/17 Female Female Female Hale Hature Yearling Hature Yearling Tag No. S-16l S-162 S.•163 S-164 S-16l S-162 S-163 S-164 Remarks White plastic lfuite plastic White plastic lfuite plastic collar collar collar collar, spike bull Table 8 _ Elk Recaught at the Sapinero Game Management Area, Winter 1962-1963. Date Where Caught lfuere Tagged Date Tagged Tag No. 3/17/63 Ellgen Ellgen 3/14/62 S-150 Remarks Hhite plastic collar put on; this elk had gotten away last year ~oJi thou t a co llar • Table 9 _ Tag Returns from Elk.Killed During the 1962 Big Game Season, Gunnison National Forest, Colorado. lfuere Tagged lfuere Killed Date Killed Date Tagged 10/20/62 1/21/62 Corral Gulch Soap Creek S-14 This was a spike bull when killed; the neck band was in good shape. It had moved about 16 miles nor rhwes t , 10/20/62 1/22/62 Corral Gulch Soap Creek S-16 This was a 6-point bull when killed; the neck band was in good shape. It had moved about 11 miles northwest. 10/21/62 3/ 9/62 Corral Gulch Hest Elk Cr. S-28 This was a yearling cow ~vhen killed. Neck band was missing. It had moved about 6 miles west. 10/29/62 3/13/62 Corral Gulch West Soap Cr. Hature cow; collar intact; had S-3l moved about 12 miles northwest. 10/62 2/ 1/62 10/26/62 2/27/59 Corral Gulch Dry Creek A-449 Mature cow; had leather collar intact; had moved about 2 miles east. Found dead by hunter, had been dead about 6 months. 10/62 2/ 5/62 Corral Gulch Little Coal 8-19 Cr. Mature bull; collar intact, had moved about 25 miles northwest. Ellgen S-104 Remarks Coal Cr .Basin Mature cow when killed; had moved about 16 miles nor thwes t , �N , , , j , § • lTUO'f AII£A . FIGURE 1 _ LOCATION OF TAGGED AND BANDED ELK' KILLED LEGEND DUR1 NG THE 1962 BIG GAME SEASON, WHI TE _ RIVER NAT IONAL FOREST, COLORAOO II£CO_V IoIAIIAO£IIIENT UHIT _V--' lOUIIDAII'f -~ IlIVU- Ki11 Location x Trap Site _ _111LA" _ _ ---- ) , , , �N j, FIGURE 2 LOCA11 ON OF NECK-BANDED ELK SEEN FROM THE AIR OR GROUND DURING 1962 , White River National Forest, Colorado. Trap Site • Band Sighting X , ii, LEGEND -y-- GAIlE MAHAGEIIENT aOUNllAllY KCO~ _---- 1l1VUCIIIIII .----..-<::::" _1:t L.AIII _ UNIT • �LEGEND GAME MANAGEMENT BOUNDARY ._--HIGHWAY SECONDARY ROAD ---- FIGURE 3 _ LOCAT ION OF TAGGED AND I3Ar~DEDELK 1<I LlED DUf~I r~G THE 1962 BIG GAME SEASON, GUNNI SON NATIONAL FOREST, COLORADO Ki l l Location x Trap Site - RIVER - CREEK ~ PEAK -:- LAKE ., UNIT �LEGEND GAME MANAGEMENT BOUNDARY HIGHWAY - FIGURE 4 _ 1..OCAT ION OF NECK_BANDED ELI< SEEN FROM THE SECONDARY ROAD ---RIVER A I R OR GROUND DUfi I NO 1962, NATIONAL FOREST, CQORAOO GUNNI SON CREEK ~ PEAK -:- LAKE •• UNIT �-8- Table 10 _ Tab Returns from Deer Killed During the 1962 Big Game Season, Gunnison National Forest, Colorado. Date Killed Date Tagged Where Tagged Where Killed 11/27/62 1/24/62 Corral Gulch S-17 Beaver Creek Both tags intact, no collar. When shot, had moved 11 miles east; 2-2 point. 12/62 2/ 5/62 E11gen Site S-110 2nd Dry Gulch No collar when shot; one mile from trap site. 12/62 2/20/62 E11gen Site S-117 2nd Dry Gulch No collar when shot; one mile from trap site; 4-5 point. 10/28/62 2/20/62 Ellgen Site S-118 Deep Creek No collar; had moved about 32 miles NW; 4-7 point. 10/62 3/ 2/62 Ellgen Site S-137 Soap Creek Died and found by hunter; both tags intact; moved 9 miles west. 12/2/62 3/ 6/62 Ellgen Site S-142 E. Elk Creek One tag when shot; 3-3 point; moved 3 miles. l2i5/62 3/ 7/62 Ellgen Site S-148 W. Elk Creek One tag when shot; 3-4 point; moved 6 miles northwest. 12/62 3/14/62 Ellgen Site S-154 2nd Dry Gulch Red collar intact when shot 1/2 mile from trap. 12/62 3/18/62 E11gen Site S-156 2nd Dry Gulch 2-2 point; one ~ile from trap. 10/62 12/13/53 E. Elk Creek A-80S E. Elk Creek Moved one mile from trap. 12/2/62 12/17 /54 E. Elk Creek A-85S No information. Remarks Table 11 - Elk Trapped and Tagged at the Devil Creek Property, Colorado, Winter 1962-1963. Remarks Tage No. Age Sex Date 2/13 2/15 2/15 2/15 2/28 Male Male Female Male Female Calf Yearling Calf Calf Mature A-427 A-428 A-429 A-430 A-43l A-432 Green plastic Green plastic Green plastic Green plastic Green plastic collar collar, spike bull collar collar collar �-9These traps are made of panels four feet by nine feet, consisting of a 4 x 8 sheet of 3/4 inch p lywood , a 1 x 12 board four feet long and the whole panel edged with 1 x 4 lumber on both sides. These panels are ,rired together and to posts set in the ground to make the trap corral. The jump gate, net frame and entrance gate are made of black pipe Helded together. Complete plans of these traps will be included in a quarterly report later on >vhen they are working satisfactorily. Limited data based upon five elk caught at the Devil Creek Management Area indicate that this trap design 'viII wo rk very we Ll, if they are set in the proper locations. No elk or deer were killed or injured during trapping the winter of 1962-63. Prepared by: Date: Raymond J. Boyd April, Approved operations during by: Richard N. Denney Project Leader 1964 Ferd Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �-10JOB COHPLETlON RESEARCH State of PROJECT REPORT SEGMENT Colorado -----------------------------------Project No. H-38-R-17 Deer-Elk Investigations Hork Plan No. 2 Population Surveys Job No. 7 Hhite River Elk Study Period Covered: April 1, 1962 through March 31, 1963 ABSTRACT The elk .,inter range in the Colorado River Drainage Area of the elk study area was surveyed ~vith 481 transects that sampled something more than 264,825 acres. Browse composi.tion, density and vigor, soil condition and amount of elk use was determined on each transect. Pre and post-season classification counts of the elk on the study area were taken by helicopter and recording the data on a portable tape recorder. A pre-season ratio of 49 bulls per 100 cows and 64 calves per 100 cows was determined, while the post-season ratio was 24 bulls per 100 cow's and 73 calves per 100 cows , An elk population elk was projected on the study area after the 1962 hunting using the sex and age data. season of 9,409 The total elk kill on the study area, as determined by hunter report card projections, was 1,906 elk which was composed of 1,426 bulls, 407 cows and 73 calves. Aging of elk at the four (4) check stations indicated that 91. 0% of the kill was in elk under 5~ years old. The success ratio of resident hunters was 23.77% whf.Le non-residents enjoyed a success ratio of 26.80%. Recommendations 1. Continue the elk Hinter range surveys on the study area until all of the available wi.nt er ranges for elk have been surveyed. 2. Determine areas wher e range improvements or other practices might be applied to improve winter range carrying capacity, and try these various practices on a small pilot area to see how practical they might be on a large-scale program. 3. Continue the pre and post-season sex and age classification counts with the helicopter and get at least 1,000 animals in each sample. Complete coverage of the study area is a must in this phase of the study. 4. Run several check stations in and around the study area in order to get data on the sex and age of the kill, hunter effort, wounding loss, blood samples, ear tag returns and neck band sightings. �-11- 5. Compile data from the card projections that will help in a complete picture of the kill and success of the hunters using the area. 6. Determine the physical characteristics of the elk herd in the study area by the collecting of two (2) elk per month and running complete necropsies, food habits, analysis of bones and tissues for fallout accumulation, blood sample analysis and other organ and tissue studies that might be required to complete the physical picture of the elk herd under study. 7. Based upon data available from the study, start to formulate management plans for the elk herd in the study area. Objectives To evolve a sound management plan for the wbite River Elk Herd based on factual biological data gathered on the area itself. Acknm:.,ledgmen ts Many people, students, professional wildlife men, Forest Service and Bureau of Land Hanagement Personnel have all had a hand in the conduct of this study. The complete list of people who contributed to the conduct of this study wou Ld be too lengthy to enumerate here, but several people should be mentioned specifically. Personnel of the Hhite River National Forest, upon wh Lch much of the present years study was run, particularly Mr. E. H. Mason, Forest Supervisor, John C. Smith, Resource Staff Assistant in charge of Hildlife and Range Management, a:ldparticularly Mr. Jack Arney, Hildlife Staff, who was in the field the ert i.r e summer field season and who did the mapping and plotting on the largescale maps. Personnel of the Routt National Forest, Mr. John Miller, Forest Supervisor, 11r. Bob Let-lis,Resource Staff Assistant and Mr. Al Crozier, Df.s-. trict Ranger in the Yampa Area were of great help the latter part of the summe r when the field crews entered the Routt Forest on the w Ln t e'rrange surveys. Personnel of the Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department, particularly Jim Reser, Furman Dunham, Chuck Roberts, Neil Van Gaalen and Richard N. Denney helped immeasurably during the field portion of the study. Techniques Used: Phase A - Range Surveys The standard interagency big game range analysis techniques will be used to sample the winter range in the study area. A complete copy of the procedures are already on file in the Regional Office of the Fish and Hildlife Service in Albuquerque, New Mexico. For that reason not all of the range procedures will be repeated here. However, in order to more completely understand the terms that are included in this report, particularly in the section on range surveys, a f ew definitions ,vill be given here. �-12Brm<lse Condition High Medium: Low Class Scoreboard Composition Desirable and inten;edia~species (must be two or more) making up at least 75% or more of the composition, with desirables at least 45% of the composition. Desirable and intermediate species making up 50% or more of the composition, with desirables at least 15% of the composition. Desirable and intermediate species making up at least 50% of the composition. Density Very Dense: Eligh Medium Low High Medium: Low Vigor Hedging on key species-mostly light or moderate '<lithless than 16% of the plants heavily hedged, and decadent minus young less than 15% of the total number of plants. Hedging on key species mostly moderate, not more than 35% heavily hedged and decadent minus young not more than 35%. More than 35% of the plants of the key species heavily hedged or decadent minus young more than 35%. Soil Stability High l1edium: Low 66% plus 36% to 65% 16% to 35% 15% minus Condition Class Scorecard Soil movement slight or none, usually 65 or more hits on ground cover and rocks. Soil movement moderate, usually 35 65 hits on ground cover and rocks. Soil movement advanced, usually less than 35 hits on ground cover and rocks. - Phase B - Population Analysis Step 1 - Sex and Age Class Composition The elk herd sex and age structure will be determined from pre and post-season sex ratio counts and the age composition of the kill. The pre and post-season ratios will be obtained by using a helicopter to locate and classify the elk. All classifications \vill be done on a tape recorder and later the data wi l.L be extracted. The age structure of the kill will be determined by setting up three special check stations along with the one regular station in the study area, and looking at each elk as it is brought out of the hunting area. Age will be determined by tooth wea'r and replacement. Step 2 - Pre and Post-season Population Estimates The population estimate wi.Ll, be determined by mathematical projection of the pre and post-season sex and age ratio data. This projection wi Ll. be based upon a formula found in Rasmussen and Doman (1943). �-13Step 3 - Abundance and Distribution on Summerand Hinter Ranges The distribution of the elk as they are counted with the helicopter will be mapped and compared, both pre and post-season, in order to get an idea of how much hunting pressure moves the elk around Hithin the study area. Phase C - Hunter Harvest Surveys Most of the hunter harvest data "tvill be obtained through post mortem examinations of the animals at special check stations in the study area and from hunter report card returns. The elk aging technique, based upon tooth r ep Lacemen t; and wear, workad out by Quimby and Gabh (1957) will be used for determining the age composition of the kill. The age-pyramid method of analysis will be used to aid in interpreting these data. An effort will be made to determine the influence of present management practices, hunting pressure and distribution, hunter selectivity, weather , etc. on the success ratio and sex and age structure of the kill. Findings: Phase A - Range Surveys During the summer field season of 1962, \vithin the Hhite River Elk Study Area, the student cr ews ran a total of L~81transects that sampled somethi.ng more than 264,825 acres of elk winter range in the Colorado River Drainage Area of the study area (Figure 1). The vegetation surveyed consisted of five separate types according to the interagency big game range analysis classification of range types. l~ithin the five types found there Here 21 sub-types. Table 1 shows the various types and sub-types and the associated acreages. Table 1 - Vegetative Types and Acreages in Each - Hhite River Elk Study Area, 1962. Type Acres 1. Aspen with Snowber-ry Understory (lO-A-Sym)- - - - - - 174· 2. Aspen (IO-A) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9,500 3. Cottomvood (lO-Pop) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 121 L;. Pinon-Juniper ,,7ith Mountain Mahogany Understory (9-PJ -Cemo) 44,650 5. Pfnon-dun Lper wi.th Serv i.ceber-r y Understory (9--PJ-Ame)- - - 10,038 6. Pinon-Juniper "tvith Oakbrush Understory (9-PJ-Que) - - - 2,787 7. Pinon-Juniper with Sagebrush Understory (9-PJ-Artr) - - - 25,075 8. Pinon-Juniper \vith Bitterbrush Understory (9-PJ-Putr) 6,563 9. Pinon-Juniper with Black Sagebrush Understory '(9-PJ-Arno)56 10. Pinon-Juniper (9-PJ) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 14,764 11. Conifer, cover for most part (6-DF) - - - - - - - - - - - 10,004 12. Mountain Browse Consisting of Oakbrush (5-Que) - - - - - - 49,380 13. Mountain ErO't'7SeConsisting of Serviceberry (S-Ame) - - - - 12,316 lL~. Mountain Browse Consisting of Mountain Nahogany (5-Cemo) 2,167 15. Mountain Browse Consisting of SquawappLa (5-Per) - - - - 478 16. Mountain Browse Consisting of Sagebrush Aspect (S-Artr)402 17. Mountain Browse Consisting of Chokecherry (S-Prvi) - - - 181 18. Mountain Browsa with Pinon-Juniper Aspect (5-PJ) - - - - 2,286 19. Mountain Browse Consisting of Hillo\v (S•.Sal) - - - - - - 386 20. Sagebrush (4-Artr) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 73,262 21. Sagebrush 'tvith Pinon-Juniper Aspect (l~_PJ-Ar t r ) - - - - - 253 '!" Total Acres - 264,825 �N ~ • 8'11JDY AII£A WHITE RIVER FIGURE 1- STUDY AREA,COLORADO ELK _v LEGEND ==--& SECONDAIIY ROAD ---- 1I1V111CII!!I( ~ LAlli •• ELK WINTER RANGE SURVEYED IN 1962 �N : ) i j i ~ • STUDY AREA FIGURE 2 - LOCATJ m~OF NECK-BANDED EU< SEEN FRO!;1 THE LEGEND A I R OR GF~OUNDDUR I NG 1962. GAME MANAGEMENT IIOUNDARY Trap Site _v ==""" • SECONDAIIY ROAD ---- 1l1VE1I- B;"1ndSighting UNIT J( --------<:::- CllfEII LAKE •• �N ~ • STUIlY AREA FIGURE 4 - KILL LOCATIONS ON 255 ELK CHECKED THROUGH THE MEEKER CHECK STATION - OCTOBER 20 THRU 28, 1962. LEGEND GAME MANAGEMENT UNIT 10UN0ARI' tlQHWAy;;::: ----r SECONDARYROAD---RIVERCREEl! --------<::::!'UK LAK£ - �N ,I • STUDY AREA FIGURE 3 - LOCATION OF TAGGED AND BANDED ELK 1<1 LLED LEGEND GAME MANAGEMENT UNIT BOUNDARY DURING THE 1962 BIG GAME SEASON, WHITE SECONDARY RIVER NATIONAL FOREST, COLORADO Ki11 Location X Trap Site ~..-? _Y IlIVEIl - CIIE!IC ~ LAKE _ • ROAD ---- �-14For the purpose of this report, only general statements will be given for browse condition, density and vigor, soil stability and amount of elk use as determined by pellet group counts on the transects. A complete, detailed summary has been workad out for the 1962 field surveys, but it will not be included here. vJhenall of the winter range has been completely surveyed (end of summer 1963) a complete report Hill be prepared to cover all three summers work on the range phase of this study. Generally the condition of the various types are as follows: Table 2 - Summary of the Browse Composition, Density and Vigor on Elk Hinter Ranges as Determined by 199 Transects in the Colorado c River Drainaae , Colorado , 1962 -c Vegetative Vigor Compositicn Density Type f.vled.li1.gn l:i1.gh LO~v LOH l:iign LOT,V Hed. Med. 9-pj 11 19 24 23 12 39 14 19 1 13 5-Que 26 2 32 1 18 22 4 5 5-Ame 1 7 14 13 14 2 7 2 6 5-Cemo 0 1 6 1 3 2 3 1 4 5-Per 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 5-Artr 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 5-Prvi 0 1 1 0 2 1 0 0 1 5-pj 0 0 4 2 1 1 1 1 2 4-Artr 48 16 2 11 51 4 29 18 19 4-pj 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 Total 75 71 53 57 84 96 46 60 55 Percent 38 It-2 36 26 29 28 48 23 30 . It can be seen from the above table that approximately 100,633 acres of the area surveyed had a low composition (see procedures for definition) while 93,337 acres are medium in composition and 68,854 acres are in a high composition category. Density of browse species within the winter range areas surveyed indicates that 76,799 acres are Low in density, 127,116 acres are medium in density and 60,909 acres are in the high density rating class. Vigor of the browse species in the area surveyed shows that 79,447 acres are low in vigor, wh Ll a 74,151 acres are medium and 111,226 acres are high in vigor. Table 3 - Summary of Soil Conditions on Elk Winter Range as Determined by 199 T~ansects in - the Colorado River Drainage , Co1orad?, 1962. Vegetative Soil Condition I I Type Low High Med. 9-pj 28 21 5 S-Que 3 16 22 5-Ame 3 6 13 5-Cemo 1 4 2 S-Per 0 1 0 5-Artr 1 0 0 5-Prvi 0 I 1 5-PJ 4 0 0 4-Artr 23 31 12 4-pJ 1 0 0 Total 64 80 55 Percent 32 40 28 �-15Information gained from the above table on soil ratings shows that 87,744 acres are in a low soil condition, while 105,930 acres are medium in soil stabilityand 74,151 acres are in a high soil rating. The amount of elk use on the winter range area, as determined by pellet group counts on each transect are shown below: Table 4 - Summary of Elk Pellet Group Counts on 481 Transects Colorado River Drainage , Colorado , 1962 Pellet Groups Vegetative Summer Type Hinter . I I 4 134 17 251 46 13 2 2 98 567 85 10-A 9-PJ 6-DF 5-Que 5-Ame 5-Prvi 5-Chvi 5-PJ 4-Artr Total Percent I in the 4 9 18 40 16 6 0 1 5 99 15 The above table shows that while most of the elk use on the winter range is in the winter, there are small numbers of elk on these same ranges the year-round as evidenced by the number of summer pellet groups found on the transects. Phase B - Population Analysis 1. Sex and age-class composition of the Hhite River Elk Herd. The 1962 pre-season sex and age-ratio connts of the White River Elk Herd were made from September 28 through October 1. The counts are tabulated as fo l Lows : Date Bulls Spikes Cows Calves Total Location 9/28 13 23 8 16 0 1 0 12 25 4 1 1 0 5 3 32 19 14 0 5 2 2 9 7 2 0 13 11 2 19 98 38 57 12 41 9 9 40 68 20 6 50 14 10 11 64 20 35 6 27 7 6 27 50 13 2 34 7 6 46 217 85 122 18 82 19 17 88 156 39 9 98 32 23 Deep-Creek-Sweetwater. Divide Head of the South Fork Park Creek Lost Solar Creek Ute Creek Marvine Creek Marvine Peak Shingle Peak ~-JilliamsFork and Sleepy Cat Patterson Creek South Fork above Buck Creek Trappers Creek Pagoda Peak North Elk Creek Derby Creek 118 11 121 11 491 L~7 315 30 1,045 100 A.M. 9 9/30 A.M. 10/1 A.M. 9/30 P.M. Total Percent A total of 1,045 elk were classified resulting in a ratio (including spikes) per 100 cows and 64 calves per 100 cows , of 49 bulls , �-16- The 1962 post-season sex and age-ratio counts of the lVhite River Elk Herd were made from December 10 through 12. The counts are tabulated as follows: Date 12/10 A.M. Bulls 2 o o o 2 3 o a P.M. 12/11 A.M. 12/12 A.M. Calves 43 22 9 o 5 1 6 5 45 37 87 23 168 85 o 4 3 21 16 1 5 5 3 72 37 14 15 71 35 37 21 38 62 28 13 12 56 21 32 21 32 7 7 l~2 o 4 1 3 10 1 Total 112 60 32 85 75 70 31 22 19 16 13 4 o Totals Percent Spikes Cows 4 63 5 33 6 17 9 45 11 40 13 35 o 5 1 a o o 12 51 135 3 9 2 3 57 73 764 51 33 48 35 131 57 82 48 71 16 102 133 561 37 1,511 100 Location Oasis Creek to Swee twa t er Derby Creek Creek Turret Creek Head of Swe etwa t er Creek Patterson Creek and Head of Canyon Creek Canyon Mi tche11 Creek Elk Creek to Blair Mountain Buck Creek South Fork Park Creek Bloomfield Bench Lost Solar Creek Fowler Bench Marvine Creek Grizzly Creek Trappers Creek Hilliams Fork Beaver Creek Divide Beaver Creek Sleepy Cat Peak A total of 1,511 elk were classified resulting in a ratio of 73 calves per 100 cows and 24 bulls (including spikes) per 100 cows , The classification counts in 1962 averaged well within the ranges found in previous years in this study. The post-season cmv/calf ratio is virtually the same as that found in the various counts the past few years also. All of the pre and post-season classification counts are tabulated below for comparative purposes. Table 5 - Pre-Season Classification Counts Year 1957 1958 1959 1960 1961 1962 ~'< Ratio Bulls 100~', 87~'( 146;', 91 135 ll8 Spikes 127 145 121 CO\vS 226 164 317 325 623 491 Calves 123 117 205 209 461 315 Total Bulls Cows 4L.9 l,4 368 668 752 1,364 1,045 53 46 67 47 49 100 100 100 100 100 100 Spikes are included with bulls in these counts Calves 54 71 64 64 74 64 �-17Table 6 - Post-Season Year Bulls 1957 1958 1959 1960 1961 1962 50,': Spikes 93* 81,";30 50 51 * Classification Counts Cows Calves Total Hulls Ratio Co,"S 278 356 238 451 279 320 222 409 818 561 6e7 769 541 953 1,862 1,511 18 25 34 21 19 24 100 100 100 100 100 100 63 115 881 76L.:· 135 Spikes are included with bulls CaI"JE:s ioo 90 93 91 93 73 in these counts The 1962 total elk kill in the eight game management units "7ithin the study area was determined by the Game Management Division to be 1,906 animals. These kill figures are based upon hunter report card returns and statistical projections of the reports. In 1962 we only had three special check stations on the study area (Meeker, Deep Creek and Newcastle), the regular Game Manageme:J.t Station at Rifle also. checked and aged elk from the study area. Table 7 - Age and Sex of Elk Kill Checked Through Three Special Stations and One Regular Check Station During the 1962 Big Game Season. Calves l~ 2}2 3~ M2 51~ -2 6~ 7~ 8~ 9 Total Bulls Cows 11 25 359 33 87 16 20 23 10 20 16 17 6 1 3 0 2 1 4 511 149 Total Percent 36 5 392 103 43 17 6 91.0% 30 4 33 4 12 3 4 2 0 5 1 660 100 Population 1 Estimate Results Pr e-rs ea son Kill Post-season 59 6 of Classification Counts and Hunter Harvest Bulls Cows Calves Total 239 1,426 186 491 407 764 315 73 561 1,045 1,906 1,511 Ratios and Kill Pre-season Ratio Kill Post-season Ratio Bulls Cm·JS Calves 49 1,426 24 100 407 100 64 73 73 on the Study Area: Cows and Calves (unan t l.er ed ) 806 480 1,325 Total Bulls to Unantlered 1 29 1 14 1,906 �-18- Population Projection x = Number of cows in fall before hunting season .L~9 x = Number of bulls in fall before hunting season x - l~07 = Number of CO'tvS after hunting season •L~9 x-I, .24 426 = Number of bulls after hunting season (x-407) also = Number of bulls after hunting season Thus: .49 x 1,426 .49 x 1,426 = .24 x 93 .49 x .24 x 98 .24 . (x-407) 1,426 .25 x = 1,328 x = 5,312 COHS in the fall before hunting season .49 x = 2,603 bulls in the fall before hunting season And .64 x = 3,400 calves in fall before hunting season Total Fall Population = Less Total Kill = Total Post-Season Pop. 11,315 1,906 9, L~09 Composed of: Bulls Cows Calves 1,129 (12%) 4,793 (51%) 3,4.82 (37%) �-19Phase C - Hunter Harvest Surveys The sex ratio of the 1962 elk kill in the study area, as determined by report cards and check station data are listed in Tables 8 and 9. Table 8 - Sex Ratio of the 1962 Elk Kill on the Hhite River Elk Study Area - Based Upon Hunter Report Cards. Unit 12 13 23 24 25 26 33 34 Bulls 202 141 260 438 106 80 149 50 Total Percent 1,426 7 l.,t. 8 % Cows % Calves al 100.0 100.0 58.9 70.8 79.7 65.0 82.3 74.6 150 161 27 34 20 15 34.0 26.0 20.3 31 19 7.1 3.2 27.6 9 11.0 22.4 12 2 7.4 6.7 3.0 10 1,906 100 73 3.8 407 21.4 Total 202 141 441 618 133 123 181 67 Table 9 - Sex Ratio of the 1962 Elk Kill on the Uh I t e River Elk Study Area - Based Upon Check Station Data. Unit U 13 23 24 25 26 33 34 Total Percent Bulls 19 1 % 100.0 100.0 52.0 79.8 74.6 44.4 81.6 83.3 39 285 M~ 4 80 10 482 76.5 COHS % 36 72 15 5 18 2 148 23.5 48.0 20.2 25.4 55.6 18.4 16.7 Table 10 - Yearling Kill, 1962 Big Game Season, Hhite River Elk Study Area. Card Projection Check Station Data U:1it }~c:r:~ber Number % 12 13 23 2l, 25 26 33 34 Total 107 54 121 181 41 13 Total 19 1 75 357 59 9 98 12 630 100 % 182 (Meeker Check Station) 121 (Newcastle Check Station) 53 (Deep Creek Check Station) 36 (Rifle Check Station) 28.9 19.2 8.4 5.7 23 53.26 38.46 46.72 41.47 38.78 16.67 43.66 47.62 605 42.43 392 62.22 65 �-20The yearling kill figures based upon hunter report card returns is concerned only Hith the bull kill, wh Ll.ethe check station data includes both bulls and cows , In the 392 yearling elk killed and checked through the check stations were 33 yearling cows , Table 11 - Yearling Bull Antler Points, 1962 Big Game Season _ 1.JhiteRiver Elk Study Area. Number of Points ...• ,., Number L.- •.• 1-1 I 1-2 1-3 2-3 2-4 3-3 3-4 of I El.k 188 I 21 1 45 14 0 10 2 4-4 3 The above table shows that out of 285 yearling bulls that wer e checked at the check stations 97 of them, or 34.0% had more points than the "typical" spike formation (1 - 1). The most common formation on the yearling bulls after the "typica1" spikes was 2 - 2, 1 - 2,..2 - 3. Table beLow shows the antler point count for all bulls other than spikes or yearlings that were aged by tooth wear and replacement at the check stations. I Table 12 - Antler Points by Age Class of Elk Killed on the White River Elk St.udy Area During the 1962 Big Game Season. Number of Points 1. 2~ 1 1 4~ 5~ 1 3 4 - 5 5 - 4 2 1 5 - 5 39 14 1 6 1 2 4 1 15 - 5 - 6 6 - 5 6 - 6 I 3-5 4 - 2 2 - 4 6~ 8~ 7~ 9 I 1 1 3 I 7 - 7 I I 15 10 10 .) I 3}z - 1 2 - 2 3 - 3 " 4 t.~_ t.~ i Age Class (By Dentition) 1 5 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 I �-21- The success ratio on the hunters choice permits that were issued on the study area in 1962, based upon card projections is shown below in Table 13. Table 13 - Total Elk Kill on Hunters Choice Permits, 1962 VJhite River Elk Study Area. Number Success Animals Killed on Permits of Ratio of Unit Area Permits Permits Bulls Co"\Vs Calves Total Kill 12 None 13 None 23 E 8 150 31 189 24 E 500 76.4% 13 161 19 193 25 X 3 27 0 30 33 X 4 20 12 36 34 X 100 85.0% 2 15 2 19 26 tv 100 45.0% 2 34 9 45 Total 700 73.1% 32 407 73 512 The success ratio of all elk hunters on the study area in 1962 is shown below in Table 14. Table 14 - Total Hunters, Total Elk Kill and Success Ratio of all Hunters, 1962 - Hhite River Elk Study Area. Number of Animals Killed Success Unit Hunters Ratio Bulls Cows Calves Total 12 885 23% 202 202 13 634 22~~ 141 141 23 1,708 26% 260 150 31 441 24 2,002 31% 438 161 19 618 25 5{~2 25% 106 27 133 26 571 22% 80 34 9 123 33 992 18% 149 20 12 181 34 516 13% 50 15 2 67 Total 7,850 1,426 407 73 1,906 The total elk kill, numbers of non-resident hunters and success ratio of the non-resident is sho\IDbelow in Table 15. Table 15 - Numbers of Non-Resident Hunters, Total Elk Kill and Success Ratio During the 1962 Big Game Seaaon-DhLt;eRiver Elk Study Area. Number of Success Unit Hunters Bulls Cows Calves Total Ratio 12 137 35 35 25.55% 13 60 16 16 26.67% 23 321 46 3l~ 19 99 30.84% 24 361 82 45 127 35.18% 25 75 11 3 1!~ 18.67% 26 51 7 7 14 27.45% 33 239 39 39 16.32% 34 73 6 3 9 12.33% Total 1,317 242 92 19 353 26.80% �-22The total elk kill, numbers of resident hunters and their success the 1962 bir; game season is shown below in Table 16. ratio in Table 16 - Numbers of Resident Hunters, Total Elk Kill and Success Ratio During the 1962 Big Game Season on the Uhite River Elk Study Area. Number of Success Unit Hunters Bulls Cows Ratio Calves Total 12 743 167 22.33% 167 13 574 21. 78% 125 125 23 1,387 214 116 24.66% 12 342 24 1,641 356 116 29.92% 491 19 25 467 25.l~8% 95 24 119 26 520 73 27 20.96% 9 109 33 753 no 20 12 18.86% 142 34 443 44 12 2 13.09% 58 Total 6,533 1,134 315 54 23.77% 1,553 The non-residents that hunted in the study area game from 29 states. A breakdown of the hunting pressure, by unit, by state of residence is shown in Table 17. Table 17 - Hunting Pressure by Unit, By State of Residence During Big Came Season-vJhite River Elk Study Area, Colorado. the 1962 ---------------U~Tn~~~·t~ .=1~2~_=1~3 __ ~2~3.~ __ ~2~4~ __ ~2~5 __ _=2~6 3~3~_~3~4~__J~o~t~a~1 Resident Non-Resident: ArizC;i;:a--Arkansas California Florida Georgia Idaho Illinois Indiana Iowa Kansas K0.ntucky Louisiana lfary1and Michigan Minnesota Missouri Nebraska Nevada New Jersey Ne~.JMexico Ohio Oklahoma Oregon Pennsylvania 743 574 1,387 1,641 6 6 3 12 18 103 24 118 3 12 3 37 467 520 753 6,533 % 3 15 51 346 3 3.87 26.27 9 6 49 3 3 3 3 3 8 12 15 6 25 9 9 7 3 25 18 6 3 12 9 6 9 9 3 3 27 3 3 3 3 339 336 12 6 10 18 3 21 333 9 33 6 9 6 3 3 3 3 3 3 _ 443 3 60 18 393 3 3 55 33 21 121 3 3 3 27 37 162 33 9 4.18' 9.19 2.81' 12.30 6 633 15 30 3 9 363 21 6 9 3 12 9 3 15 27 84 6 24 6.38 �-23Table 17 - continued Unit 12 Non-:;:esident: (Cont.T--South Dakota T0.xas 26 Utah 3 Hashington Hisconsin Non-resident Total 137 13 23 24 25 26 33 34 Total % L~8 3 46 9 15 6 36 13 3 190 21 14.43% 0 J 3 60 321 " oJ 361 75 51 4 6 10 239 73 1,317 The total hunter pressure by both resident and non-resident hunters on the study area since 1957 is shown in Table 18. Figure 2 shoos the locations of neck band sightings in the study area during the past segment. The same general movement patterns are indicated in the 1962 sightings that have been evident in the past years sightings. A composite nap of all sightings since the study has run is being kept for management purposes and Hill not be included in this report. Figure 3 shows the ear tab returns from elk killed in the study area during the 1962 big game season. He have not had enough tag returns to get any real pictu~e of movements up to the present time, but a composite map of all tag returns is also being kep t for management. Table 18 - Total NUillberof Hunters, Kill and Success Since 1957 on the Hhite River Elk Study Area, Colorado. Y~e-a-r--------------------~R~sident Hunters Non-Resident Hunters Total Pressure 4,368 755 5,123 1957 Kill 1,003 227 1,230 Success 22.96% 30.07% 24.01% 1958 Pressure Kill Success 4,324 1,095 25.32% 750 327 43.60% 5,074 1,4.22 28.02% 1959 Pressure Kill Success 4,266 1,181 27.68% 702 274 39.03% 4,968 1,455 29.29% 1960 Pressure Kill Success 4,322 1,440 33.32% 877 379 43.22% 5,199 1,819 34.99% 1961 Pressure Kill Success 5,765 1,571 27.25% 1,249 393 31.47% 7,014 1,964 28.00% 1962 Pressure Kill Success Total Pressure Kill Success 6,533 1,553 23.77% 29,578 7,843 26.52% 1,317 353 26.80% 5,650 1,953 34.57'70 7,850 1,906 24.28~~ 35,228 9,796 27.81~~ �-24Discussion Phase A - Range Surveys The elk ,.• inter range that was surveyed in 1962 constitutes the wintering area of probably 20% of all the elk in the study area and about one-fourth of the land wintering area. The 1962 area plus the area surveyed in 1961 makes up approximately three-fourths of the land wintering area, and winters about 95% of all the elk on the study area as a whole. The more than 100,600 acres of browse ,.• inter range that is 10v1 in composition should be of more than a little concern to the Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department. This is more than 1/3 of the winter range area 'tvithinthe mai.n elk wi.nt er Lng areas in the 1962 study sections. Hhile there is no immediate appar.ent solution to this problem, some limited program of reseeding or revegetation should be looked into with the idea of improving the over-all compostion of this important elk wintering ranges in the Colorado River Drainage. Density of browse species in the 1962 study area is not too bad with about 71% of the area in medium or high density rating. This is somewhat lower than that found in the 1961 survey, but this could probably be improved upon by some slight adjustments in both elk and livestock numbers on public land. There is nothing that can be done, at the present time, on lands in private ownership that are in Lot.•condition. The vigor of the brov.• se species in the area surveyed is very good, tvith over 40% of the area in high condition. Some relief from game and livestock numbers would probably bring the rest of the area back very quickly. The condition of the soil, the basic resource, in the area surveyed is no better than fair. However , it must be taken into consideration that the potential of the area in the pinon-juniper types (about 104,000 acres) is not very high at best. The soil in the 1961 winter range area is in much better condition than that found in this segment, but as was mentioned the potential is not as great in the 1962 area. If the density of the plants in this area could be increased, the resulting litter could possibly build up the soil stability ratings. It is obvious from the data in Table 4 that most of the elk winter in the oakbru sh type wh Lch is the same information that came out of the 1961 survey on the main Hhite River elk wintering area. A greater proportion of the elk on the south side of the study area ~vinter in pinon-juniper types than do the elk in the main Hhite River Area. This is again due to amount of land in the various types rather than a preference of the elk for the pinon. It is also apparent that there is a small resident herd of elk in the main wintering area all year-round, as evidenced by the incidence of summer pellet groups found on the transects. All of the above range information is available on 2-inch to the mile base maps of the area surveyed. All plotting of the types and type designations and ratings were done on a kail plotter by Eugene E. Green of the Colorado Game. Fish and Parks Department and Jack Arney of the U.S. Forest Service. Acreages were planimetered by students at Colorado State University under the direction of Richard N. Denney and by Eugene E. Green. �-25Copies of the type maps, colored and planimetered are on file at the Forest Supervisor's Office, lvhite River National Forest, Glenwood Springs, Colorado, and at the Southwest Regional Office, Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department, Montrose, Colorado. Copies of these maps may also be obtained from Richard N. Denney, Project Leader, Project W-38-R, Box 513~ Fort Collins, Colorado. Phas~ B - Population Analysis ':;:l';~emakeup '""oTthekfiT'would seem to indicate a young, growing elk herd in the Hhite River Area. This is borne out in two ways ; the large number of calves classified per CO,,] and the large number of spike (yearling) bulls noted the fo Il.owi.ng year. Also, there is a definite lack of very large mature bulls in the herd as evidenced by observation during the classification counts from the helicopter. The aerial trends vl:Hhin the study area also show a general increase yearto-year, wh Lch tends to support the contention of a growing herd. The aerial trend for 1962-63 was the largest in the history of the l\lhiteRiver Elk Herd. Phase C - Hunter Harvest Surveys The main complaint th~aches the ears of the Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department concerning the t·illite River Elk Herd is that there are too many non-resident hunters in the area, but a glance at table 18 shows that for any given year since 1957 the resident hunter has outnumbered the non-resident about five (5) times. All in all it is probably jealousy that brings this out, as it is also obvious from table 18 that the non-resident is much more successful in bagging his elk than is the resident hunter. The yearling kill that is projected from hunter report cards for the study area has been considerably Lower than that shown in the check station figures for the past three years. This is easy to explain after looking at table II. It is noted that 34% of the yearling bulls checked had more than the typical "sp Lke" antler formation. The Game Nanagement Division of the Department bases its yearling kill projection on only the bulls reported that are spikes (1 _ 1), (1 - 2) or (2 - 2). Based upon the vJhite River data there are considerable yearling bulls that are larger than spikes, and also the check stations age females wh Ich are not considered in the yearling kill projections at all. Since this is the case, many yearling bulls are not counted in the card returns wh lch , naturally, wou Ld lower the percent of yearlings in the projected k i.Ll , This may not be of too much importance in management at the present time, as long as the reported yearling kill is conservative and we know that it is. HO'wever, some adjustment should be made in the near future so that as the Department gets into finer management, the figures on yearling kill can more accurately be analyzed. Prepared by: Raymond J. Boyd Principal Game Biologist Eugene E. Green GaTIie Biologist Date: Approved by: Richard N. Denney Project Leader Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �-26JOB COMPLETION REPORT INVESTIGATIONS PROJECT Colorado State of: Project No. W-38-R-17 ----------------------------- Work Plan No. 4 Mortality Factors 3A Study of Diseases and Parasites --------------------------------- Job No. Period Covered: Deer-Elk Investigations April 1, 1962, through March 31, 1963. ABSTRACT A total of 80 blood samples from Colorado elk proved negative when tested for brucellosis and leptospirosis by the Cooperative Brucellosis Laboratory of Denver. Likewise, 185 mule deer blood samples were negative for tests on brucellosis and leptospirosis. Anaplasmosis tests using bovine serum on the complement-fixation test on 12 deer were as follows: seven negative, three 2+S, one 3+S, and one 4+R. It is felt that this is of questionable validity because of non-specific reactions. Lung tissue samples for 25 elk wer e barren of lung worm eggs or larvae. One deer liver was found to contain abcesses containing Spherophorus necrophorus, the organism causing most of the foot rot. One cow elk was found to have a brain neoplasm causing partial blindness, and another elk was found to have fractured bones of the feet, while a young bull had a general infection resulting from a compound fracture of the metatarsus. Three sets of deer feet showed evidences of chronic arthritis, the etiological agent presumed to be one of those causing foot rot. Clinical signs of infectious bovine rhinotracheitis were produced experimentally in mule deer by inoculation intratracheally, and the virus was isolated from nasal and lacrimal secretions, as well as from the feces of inoculated deer. There was a high incidence of antibody titer of IBR in deer tested but not inoculated. �-27Study of Diseases and Parasites Richard N. Denney Introduction Thorough knowl.edge of natural mortality factors in the form of parasites and diseases is still lacking, therefore whenever instances of such factors present themselves we must obtain specimens and endeavor to pin-point the causative organism and deter~ine the probable or possible implications where feasible. Many specific diseases of domestic livestock have been attributed to game animals acting as carriers or hosts, and there is a need for refuting or substantiating these accusations. The first section of this report will deal with general diseases or parasites as encountered in the course of routine work on other jobs, but the second section will deal l\litha specific disease, viral bovine rhinotracheitis, under controlled conditions. Section 1. General Diseases and Parasite Conditions. To assist in the collection of necessary blood, organ, tissue and digestive tract content samples as required for specific cooperative studies and analyses of diseases, parasites and associated ailments wi th the Veterinary College at Colorado State University and the State Veterinarian. PrClcec1.nre: During the course of the past few' years blood samples have been taken from deer and elk during hunting season, particularly the first two or three days, when freshly killed animals were brought in. Each check station in the special I·nliteRiver elk study area was provided with blood tubes, instructions, and franked mailing boxes. The equipment named was provided by the State Veterinarian, and the filled blood tubes were mailed directly into the Cooperative Brucellosis Laboratory in Denver. The objective Has to collect approximately 10 cc of blood per animal, wh i.ch was sometimes rather difficult to find as the carcasses we r e generally well bled out, but the best site was in the thoracic ar ea where it accumulated after being dressed cut. The specimens wer e then kept cool for several days until it was apparent that many more wou Ldn t be ava Ll.ab le, and then they wer e shipped in to the Laboratory, whar e tests wer e run on them for brucellosis and leptospirosis. I In addition, several blood samples and lung tissue samples wer e obtained in the field during a special early elk season in the Colc. Springs 110untain area. The blood was sent in to the Cooperative Brucellosis Laboratory, and the lung tissues were examined microscopically by Dr. George l1cCahan of CSU for lung worm eggs and larvae. An early elk season was held in game management unit 20 and a portion of 19 from January 26 through February 17, 1963, to harvest surplus animals from the Rocky Hountain National Park area when they wer e on winter ranges be l.ow the Park boundaries. Blood samples, and some lung tissues, were collected in the field, by Hildlife Conservation Officers and voluntary hunters, during the season. �-28mlen the deer wer e removed from special range study paddocks at the Little Hills Experiment Station in Heeker at the end of January, 1963, they Here sacrificed to determine the physiological effects of the stocking rates on them, and blood samples wer e analyzed by the Diagnostic Laboratory at the College of Veterinary l1edicine at Colorado State University. Other animals or tissues submitted through us to the CSU Veterinary School included several sick or dead deer, portions of elk legs from check stations, and tissues sent by parcel post from one of our field men. The carcasses wer e sent to the Veterinary Hospital necropsy room for complete examination, and other tissues or specimens wer e submitted to the proper specialists in the Veterinary College. Results and Discussion: All of the diagnostic work involved with blood, tissues and carcasses was performed by specialists at the Cooperative Brucellosis Laboratory, or at the College of Veterinary Hedicine at Colorado State University. The Game and Fish Department served primarily as a gathering agency for the materials tested or analyzed. Findings and discussions \vill be grouped according to categories, such as the results of brucellosis and leptospirosis tests, anaplasmosis tests, tissue sample tests, gross necropsy of carcasses, and miscellaneous ailments. Brucellosis and Leptospirosis Six blood samples from elk killed during the Cold Springs Hountain season in early October, 1962, were run by the Cooperative Brucellosis Laboratory in Denver, and found to be negative for both diseases, brucellosis and leptospirosis. This is particularly significant in the relationship of game animals to livestock diseases, since this range is used in common by deer, elk and antelope, 't(lith very high numbers of sheep and cattle. The range condition in this area is generally poor, 'with overgrazing the rule, and under these circumstances, dissemination of disease organisms wou Ld be at a maximum, particularly around the water holes and springs on the mountain. In addition, 14 elk blood samples were collected at check stations during the regular hunting season in the Uhite River area. These, also, wer e negative for both brucellosis and leptospirosis. Some local areas of the Hhite River have suffered from leptospiral infections in cattle, wh i ch were blamed on big game indigenous to the area. For the second year, blood samples from this area have proven that big game does not have the diseases indicated, nor are they acting as reservoirs for them. Sixty blood samples obtained from elk harvested during the January-February, 1963, season in the Estes Park vicinity were run for both brucellosis and leptospirosis, and found to be negative in all instances. This encompassed elk of all ages, from calves to over 15 years old, and represented 37 COvlS and 23 bulls. Deer blood samples from several different points in the state totalling 173 deer were all negative for both of these diseases. Some of these wer e even sent in by individuals from areas of known lepto infections in cattle, and much to the chagrin of certain stockmen, big game animals still have a clean bill of health. �-29Blood samples obtained from 12 deer prior to their stocking in experimental paddocks at Little Hills were run for both diseases at the Diagnostic Laboratory at the CSU College of Veterinary l1edicine. Again, all samples wer e negative for both leptospirosis and brucellosis. One deer wh i.ch had to be shot in May, 1962, to get it out of an experimental pasture was also found to be negative on both counts. In regard to brucellosis and leptospirosis, the deer and elk of Colorado either do not have it to any extent, or the sample that we have obtained may be too small to be reliable. The latter is not a plausible explanation, as many of the samples tested have come from areas of kno-;;vn infections in domestic cattle, and a significant number has been tested nOH in the past two years. Anaplasmosis Samples of blood from 12 deer used in the paddock studies at Little Hills wer e submitted to the Diagnostic Laboratory at the CSU College of Veterinary Hedicine for the an ap La smo s Ls comp Lemcn t f Lxat Lon test. Results xrer e as f o Llows : seven of them wer e negative, three had 2+8 results, one had 3+8 resu l t s , and one had 4+R results. Since the complement-fixation test is set up for bovine serum, there have been and are many questions relative to the validity of its application to other species, as in this case, deer, because of the possibility of nonspecific reacti~ns due to species differentiation. c Mixed results from similar tests in Hyoming and Montana recently have led them in a search for a more SpeC~!LC serum for various big game species, such as deer and elk. As far as is known currently, a satisfactory serum is not yet available. Tissue Samples Lung samples from 25 elk taken during the Cold Springs early October, 1962, season and from the January-February, 1963, Estes Park season Here sectioned, mounted on a glass slide, stained Hith hematoxylin and eosin, and microscopically examined by Dr. George HcCahan at CSU for evidence of lungworm eggs or larval forms. All of these specimens wer e negative for this eviderlce of Lungwo rms , This method searches only about 1/10,000 of a lung, but experience ga Lned by investigators in the Southeastern Cooperative Hildlife Disease Laboratory at Athens, Georgia, indicates that uhen tissue taken from the peripheral third of a lung is examined in the described manner a reliable index of infection is obtained. One of the Department field men sent a bottle containing tissue with small nodules in it to the Research Center. This was analyzed by Dr. HcCahD.n, and found to be nothing more than lymph tissue, found in very f ew animals, but both ca t t ls and deer have them of this type. They are known as hemolymph nodes. Further parasitological and bacteriological examinations wer e made on the tissues, and all wer e negative. �-30- Another field man sent in a deer liver sample which was sent to the clinical diagnostic laboratory of the Department of Pathology and Microbiology at the CSU College of Veterinary Hedicine. It uas found to have multiple abscesses, and smears and cultures demonstrated Spherophorus necrophorus, the organism which causes most of the foot rot. It causes severe tissue damage and liberates a toxin uhich usually proves fatal to deer suffering from necrotic stomatitis. It is probable that the incidence of this organism and damage caused from it is greater than realized. An outbreak of this same organism occured in the deer compound where the animals for the infectious bovine rhinotracheitis study were being held, and it was only through the diligent efforts of Dr. Davis that the experimental animals Here protected from a severe epidemic and possible extirpation. Carcass Necropsy A cow elk was found entangled in a fence on the Hhite River in September, 1962, and was brought over to the Veterinary School by pickup. She died within two days of her arrival here, and a post mortem Has run on her at the necropsy room of the Veterinary Hospital. She had abrasions on her right hip, head, and thorax ,vith hemorrhages. The heart contained a white fibrous focus in the external myocardium, cause by two occluded veins. The stomachs were almost devoid of food, the internal fat was minimal and the kidney fat showed mucoid atropy. Lungworms approximately six cm. long were found in pneumonitis foci in the ventral borders of the apical lobes of the lungs. A neoplasticlike mass was found in the optic chiasm area, exerting pressure on the brain, and affecting both the right and left optic tracts. The thyroid glands and adrenal glands exhibited edema. The right eye had collapsed leaving a whf.t e irregularly shap~d fibrin mas s., . This cow had been seen wandering around in a hay field near the fence where she was finally found, and appeared to have a hard time seeing, as Hell as trouble lvith coordination, and she appeared to be very weak , Around the middle of October, 1962, two f'awnswer e found in the Hontrose area, both with similar symptoms when observed alive. One was found dead and the other was delivered to the Veterinary Hospital alive, but died during the first night. Necropsy reports on both are quite similar. The live one exhibited conditions like calf septicemia, according to a resident of the area; and the other one had been observed slobbering and folloHing youngsters before it Has found dead. Hinute ulcerations were found in the abomasum or thoracic portion of the esophagus. Both f.awnshad l.ungworms, l-Jithmarked edema of the lungs, emphysema, congestion, and pneumonia. The diagnosis was death from bronchiopneumonia from a probable Dictyocaulis infection. Necropsies were run on two other deer, both of which came from the Little Hills Game Experiment Station near Heeker, Colorado, and wer e being transported over to Fort Collins via truck to the radiology pens for a captive herd foundation. One died in trarxport from a perforated esophagus at its midpoint, allowing ingesta to infiltrate ventrally and penetrate into the thoracic inlet and rib cage. The second died five days after arrival at the deer pens. She was covered with ticks of all sizes, and post mortem degeneration was quite advanced, with no significant lesions found. Her cause of death was not determined. �-31Miscellaneous Ailments During the 1962 hunting season, a hunter brought a cow elk through one of the Hhite River check stations that had both fetlocks badly swollen. These legs were brought into the Department of Pathology and Microbiology at the College of Veterinary Medicine at Colorado State University for examination. It was revealed that both of the first phalanges of the left fetlock wer e fractured, and the lateral first phalanx of the right fetlock was also fractured. Because of such an injury resulting in failure to use the foot over a long period of time the hooves tend to grow excessively long from lack of wear on the horn surface. In a large population of elk, such as on the ~Jhite River, a fevl such cases of injuries to the feet could be logically expected to occur. During this same hunting season, a yearling bull elk was brought through another of the Uhite River check stations i'lithan infected-appearing hind leg. This was also brought to the diagnostic laboratory, and found to have a draining opening on the metatarsus. Cultures from the exudate isolated Proteus, a common organism as a contaminant in purulent processes, but probably not of primary importance. The third metatarsal bone had a healing fracture with a callus approximately eight inches in diameter present at the fracture site. It appeared that the fracture might have been a compound one originally, and was infected secondarily through the break in the skin. A field man sent in feet from three deer from the Kremmling area, all of wh Lch showed erosion and lesions of the phalanges or articular surfaces. The laboratory diagnosis were that they suffered chr on.Lc arthritis of the coffin and pastern joints of undetermined etiology, although the lesions in the joints appeared similar to those found in cattle and sheep affected with foot rot. The probability of selenium as the etiological agent is unlikely, as extensive studies of long duration on selenium with sheep and cattle at CSU failed to produce any signs of lameness. Section 2. Viral Bovine Rhinotracheitis Study. Objectives: To determine the susceptibility of deer, elk and antelope rhinotracheitis (commonly referred to as Red-nose). to viral bovine Procedure: This section of the study was conducted primarily by Drs. Robert H. Davis and T. L. Chow, using units of the College of Veterinary Medicine at the Colorado State University. These facilities included Hell equipped laboratories for virology, physiological chemistry and histopathology, as well as a 12 acre deer compound at the Veterinary Foothills Research Unit. Each of the 50 deer at the compound Here blood tested prior to test to determine whe the'r the animals had been exposed to viral bovine rhinotracheitis by means of the sera neutraliz:::.tiontest. They wer e then injected with V.B.R. virus of bovine origin by intratracheal inoculation, and a number of them held for control. Their reactions were observed, and then convalescence sera were obtained to determine anitbody titer. Those \lith the neutralizing titer of V.B.R. wer e then challenged with V.B .R. virus intratracheally, and serum samples taken to check the anamistic response and clinical reactions. �-32The specific details of the procedure are enumerated in the paper which follows in the next section, reproduced in its entirety as it will be presented by Dr. Chow at the American Veterinary Medicine Association Centennial Meeting in New York, July 30, 1963. Results and Discussion: The study was initiated by means of a cooperative agreement between the Game and Fish Department and the College of Veterinary Medicine at Colorado State.University. A review' of the literature revealed that a new disease in deer, epizootic hemorrhagic disease, was reported during the same period viral bovine rhinotracheitis was reported in cattle. Dairy cattle in California were reported to have an upper respiratory infection, and necrotic rhinotracheitis was found in Colorado cattle. Later the etiological agent of this disease was identified and it was named infectious bovine rhinotracheitis. Chow reported the isolation of the virus and serological identification of this disease among the range cattle in the mountainous part of Colorado. A North Carolina deer disease was called black tongue, and a hemorrhagic epizootic disease in Michigan whitetailed deer was found to be similar to it. New Jersey reported a highly fatal deer disease which ran rampant from August, 1955, to mid-September, from which 233 carcasses wer e found, wi.th an estimated death loss of 500-700 animals. The disease was characterized by small hemorrhages in the skin and subcutis, with varying degrees of hemorrhage in the trachea, esophagus and abdominal viscera. The pericardial sac and the peritoneal cavity contained s txaw-co l.ored fluid. A virus was found to be the causative agent. The disease was designated epizootic hemorrhagic disease (EHD), and has proven readily transmissible in deer but not in other experimental or domestic animals tested. ~'l0 serologically different types of EHD virus have been described, one more lethal strain in New Jersey, and a South Dakota strain obtained from an outbreak which occurred there a year after the New Jersey outbreak. In view of the high mortality and economic loss resulting from these viral diseases they indicate that additional study is needed. Apparently EHD and VBR are not the same, although some symptoms are similar. The follo'tnng report represents the results of this study on the susceptibility of mule deer to VBR. �-33THE SUSCEPTIBILITY OF MqLE DEER TO INFECTIOUS BOVINE RHINOTRACHEITIS T. L. Chow, D.V.H., Ph.D., R. H. Davis, M.S., D.V.M.* and R. N. Denney, B.S., U.S.*"': Infectious bovine rhinotracheitis (IBR) has been reported among ranch cattle which had no history of contact 'tv-ith cattle from other herds. I, 2 On many ranches in Colorado deer are the cormnon Vlild animals roaming with cattle. This study was undertaken to determine the susceptibility of deer to IBR. Materials and l1ethods Fifty captive mule deer (Odocoileus hemionus hemionus),the most common species in Colorado, were used. These included both sexes and varied in age from ten weeks to six years. These animals were maintained at the Veterinary Foothills Research Unit of Colorado State University in an area of approximately twelve acres wh Lch was formerly used as cattle range. Uith the exception of six individuals, all the deer tested wer e born at the Unit or 'tv-ere obtained as f awns six months old or younger and raised at the Unit. Blood samples were taken from all the deer, and IBR antibody was tested by the serum neutralization index of 50 or higher. Tw'elve had equivocal titers. These animals were excluded from the experiment. Twenty deer wer e found to be free of IBR, and twelve of this group were used for IBR virus inoculations. These twe lve deer 'tv-ere divided into two groups of six animals each; each animal was kept in an individual pen. The deer in one group served as controls. Animals in the other group received intratracheal injections of IBR virus. Each animal was inoculated once with 5 ml of virus preparation wh Lch contained 50,000 TCID50, and five 'tveekslater it was cha ll.ang ed with 500,000 TCID50 of IBR virus. Blood samples were taken at two-day intervals to follow the immunological response and hematological changes. Nasal, rectal and eye swabs were prepared for virus isolations. Five blind passages of each sample in tissue culture were carried out before it Has considered negative. Virus used in this experiment was the 15th passage of tissue culture material designated as IBR Cooper isolate. The IBR antiserum used to identify the isolated viral agents was prepared in rabbits '-lith"Genetron ll3"~':**treated IBR Cooper virus. Clinical observations were made daily during the experiment. * From the College of Veterinary Medicine, Colorado State University, Fort Collins, Colorado. ** From Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department, Fort Collins, Colorado.This study was supported partly by the grants of A.R.S., U.S.D.A. and Colorado Game, Fish, and Parks Department. *** Allied Chemical, New York 6, N.Y. �-34Results: ~vo to four days after inoculation with IBR virus, clinical reactions were noted. Anorexia, depression, excessive salivation and respiratory distress, such as increased respiration,' dyspnea and occasional cough, were observed for five to seven days. No vulvo-,vaginitis was observed. lJhite blood cell counts and differential counts wer e lvithin normal limits. Virus was isolated from the nasal secretions for five days after inoculation. In two deer only, virus was isolated from eye and fecal swabs four weeks after inoculation. The ocular exudat;e was collected from a deer which showed kerato-conjunctivitis. The pattern of antibody response was similar to that of cattle. Measurable antibody titer 'vas first detected four to five days after inoculation, and it reached from 103•5 to 104•5 approximately 9 to 11 days after inoculation of the virus. No clinical reactions wer e observed after challenge which was made five weeks after initial inoculation. There were no death losses due to the infection. Discussion: At the beginning of the experiment, it 'vas found that among the 50 deer collected there lJere 18 deer with significant IBR antibody titer. This number indicated a high incidence of natural infection of IBR in the deer tested. The incubation period of this disease in deer is about two to four days, which is similar to that of cattle. The clinical signs of sickness and the immunological response to virus inoculation give convincing evidence of susceptibility of the deer to IBR. Although the clinical signs shown by the experimentally infected deer were not as serious as those exhibited by cattle in natural outbreaks of IBR, it should be pointed out that, even among cattle, the experimentally infected ones usually manifest milder clinical reactions than those of natural incidence. It is likely that deer fo l.l.ow the pattern, even though there is no report of IBR in deer under natural conditions. Due to the excitable and skittish nature of deer and the force necessarily used in handling them during the experiment, the body temperatures varied so much that they were of little or no value. The period of recovering virus from the nasal secretions was short. This may be an indication that the inoculated virus was not propagated in the nasal epithelium. The isolation of virus from the eye and fecal materials, even though only one case of each, is of value from the epizootiological point of view, because the virus \Vas isolated four "leeks after inoculation. The virus in the feces was obtained from a clinically normal animal. The virus from the eye was obtained from an animal l-1hichhad kerato-conjunctivitis. It should be noted that both Abinanti and Plumer3 and the virus laboratory at Colorado State University have isolated IBR virus from lacrimal secretions of cattle. These two cases indicate that deer can carry the virus for a considerable period of time and could be potential spreaders of the disease. Summary: 1. There was a high incidence of antibody titer of IBR in the deer tested. 2. 3. Clinical signs of IBR were produced experimentally in deer. IBR virus was isolated from nasal and lacrimal secretions, as well as from the feces. �-35References 1. }lcKercher, D. G. and Straub, O.C.: Isolation of the Virus of Infectious Bovine Rhinotracheitis from Range Cattle. J.A.V.M.A. 137, (Dec., 1960): 661-664. 2. Chow, T.L.: Infectious Bovine Rhinotracheitis in Range Cattle of Colorado. J.A.V.M.A., 138, (Jan., 1961): 59-60. 3. Ab Lnan t L, F. R. and Plumer, G. J.: The Isolation of Infectious Bovine Rhinotracheitis Virus from Cattle Affected with Conjunctivitis-Observations on the Experimental Infection. Am. J. Vet. Res. 22, (Jan., 1961):13-17. -- Prepared by: Richard N. Denney Date: Apr Ll , 1964 Approved by: Hayne H. Sandfort Game Research Chief Fcrd K1einschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �-36JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of Colorado ----~~~~----- Project No. H-38-R-17 Deer-Elk Investigations Hork Plan No. __ ...:4_ Mortality Factors Affecting Deer and Elk Herds Job No. 3B Study of Deer Losses on Colorado Highways Period Covered: April 1, 1962 through March 31, 1963 Abstract: A standard field form was designed and distributed to all field men in the Department. Information on the location of highway losses to big game animals, sex and age of the animals killed, time of day, amount and cost of damage to the automobile and personal injuries to persons involved in the accident were items to be noted, if at all possible, on the form. There were 1,081 deer reported killed on Colorado highways during the past segment. Also listed as highway mortalities were nine elk, seven antelope and two "Jhite-tail deer. Most of the accidents (69%) occurred between 4:00 P.M. and Midnight; the average cost to repair the vehicle was $142.01; and 72% of all the accidents occurred on known crossings. Rio Blanco County led the state with 372 reported highway kills, most of these on Highway 13 south of Meeker and Hf.ghway 64 wes t of Meeker. Recommendations 1. Furnish the Colorado Department of Highways a copy of this report to go along with the report that was sent to them after the last segment. 2. Bring the map showing locations of deer-auto accidents up to date in the office of the State Hf.ghway Planning Division, if they so request. 3. Drop this job, as such, and write up a new project to evaluate the new signs that are being placed in critical crossing areas in the state. Include, in the new project, work plans for construction of "scare" devices in critical areas and plans to determine the amount of use the deer crossing tubes are receiving in the vicinity of Blue Mesa Reservoir. 4. lvrite up a comprehensive report on the past three years work on this job and submit it to the Journal of Hildlife Management for publication. Objectives To determine the various factors that affect the loss of deer by automobiles on Colorado highways. �-37Techniques Used A standard field form was designed (Boyd, 1961) and distributed to all field men in the Department. Each time a highway-killed big game animal was seen, the form 'vas to be filled out as completely as possible and the animal removed from the h Lghway right-of-way. The animal was also to have one ear cut off so that another man wou l.d not duplicate the report on the location, etc. of the kill. Forms were to be filled out even if the sex, age and the location of the kill Here the only information available. All information from the forms was summarized by the biologist in charge to be included in this report. Findings It has been brought out in the last two reports on this job (Boyd, 1961, 1962) that there are many areas in the state that have large numbers of big game animals killed each year by automobiles, but very few reports have been received from these areas. Efforts have been made by both Federal Aid personnel in charge of this job and the Regional staff members to interest the local W.C.O. in the problem, but in most cases we have not had much success. All figures listed in this report, then, are an absolute minimum for deer mortality on Colorado hf.ghways , Class of Animal Killed 1,081 reported deer kills (see Figure 2) 9 reported elk kills 7 reported antelope kills 2 reported white-tail deer kills All of the data listed in the balance of this report will be concerned only with deer. Age: Sample size - 1,081 deer Adult ---- 602 - 55.6% Fa'tID. ----- 211 -- 19.7% Unknown -- 268 - 24.7% Sex: Sample Size - 765 deer Male ----- 295 - 38.6% Female --- 470 - 61.4% Amount of Damage to the Automobile Sample Size - 138 reports listed damage to the vehicle. Average cost per accident - $142.01. �•.. 38Time of Accident Sample Size - 262 reports listed time of accident Midnight 2:00 a.m. 4:00 a.m. 6:00 a.m. 8:00 a.m. 10:00 a.m. to 2:00 a m, to 4:00 a.m. to 6:00 a m, to 8:00 a.m. to 10:00 a.m. to 12 Noon i i 14 14 18 16 6 ------ 3 12 Noon 2:00 p m, 4:00 p m, 6:00 p m, 8:00 p m, 10:00 p m, i i s i i to 2:00 p.m. 5 3 to 4:00 p.m. to 6:00 p.m. 27 10.3% 82 31.3% to 8:00 p m, to 10:00 p m, 53 20.2% Hidnight to --- 21 8.0% i s Location of Accident Sample Size - 821 reports listed the location of the accident. On a Known Crossing ----- 592 - 72.1% Not on a Kno,m Crossing - 229 - 27.9% On a Knotm Crossing Area - 592 reports listed this type of information. Crossing Marked ----- 405 - 68.4% Crossing Not Harked - 187 - 31. 6% County of Accident and High,'7ay(by Regional boundaries) Southwest Region - 204 deer reported Archuleta 37 deer Costilla -•.. - 1 deer Delta ------ 3 deer Gunnison 21 deer Hinsdale 1 deer La Plata 67 deer Hesa ------- 3 deer Mineral ---- 3 deer Montezuma -- 15 deer Montrose --- 8 deer Ouray ------ 30 deer Rio Grande - 11 deer Saguache --- 4 deer 8 elk, Highway 160, Chimney Rock and vicinity Highway 50, Gunnison to Sapinero 1 elk, Highway 160 east of Bayfield; Highway 550 north of Durango Highway 160, Ha11ervi11e area Highway 550, Colona to Ouray Highway 160, South Fork to Del Norte Northwest Region - 607 deer reported Eagle ------ 34 deer Garfield ---145 deer Grand ------- 11 deer Hesa ------- 3 deer Moffat --•.. -- 25 deer Pitkin ----- 7 deer Rio Blanco -372 deer Routt -----Summit ----- 4 deer 6 deer Highway 24, Avon to Glenwood Canyon Highway 24, Rifle to DeBeque; Highway 13 north of Rifle; Highway 83 south of Glenwood Highway 40 west of Craig 13, Rio Blanco to Meeker; Highway 64 west of Meeker; Highway 13 north of Heeker; Highway 132 east of Meeker Hi.ghway �-39Northeast Region - 116 deer reported Boulder ----- 10 deer Clear Creek - 31 deer Douglas ----4 deer Elbert -----1 deer Gilpin -----1 deer Jackson ----- 14 deer Jefferson --- 4 deer Larimer ----- 37 deer Logan ------1 deer :t-lorgan ------ 4 deer Hashing ton -- 4 deer Held -------5 deer Highway 40; Idaho Springs area 1 white-tail Highway 66, southeast of Estes Park Southeast Region - 167 deer reported Bent -------1 deer Chaffee ----- 45 deer Cheyenne ---- 4 deer Crowley -'---'Custer -----9 deer El Paso ----- 56 deer Fremont ----- 20 deer Huerfano ---- I deer Lake -------6 deer Lincoln ----3 deer Otero ------1 deer Park -------- 15 deer Prowers -----'- 3 deer Pueblo -----2 deer Teller -----1 deer Highway 24 north and east of Buena Vista; Highway 285, Buena Vista to Poncha Springs 1 antelope 2 antelope 1 white-tail deer, 2 antelope; Highway 87 north of Colorado Springs; Highway 115 southwes t of Colorado Springs Highway 50 east of Salida 1 antelope 1 antelope Highway 285, Bailey to Kenosha Pass Month of Accident Sample Size - 1,081 reports listed this information January, 1963 72 accidents February, 1963 - 65 accidents March, 1963 ---- 49 accidents April, 1962 ---- 136 accidents Hay, 1962 ------ 61 accidents June, 1962 ----- 67 accidents July, 1962 ------ 80 accidents August, 1962 ---- 69 accidents September, 1962 - 38 accidents October, 1962 --- 222 accidents November, 1962 101 accidents December, 1962 -- 121 accidents Discussion The one single group that was classified that suffered the greatest mortality from automobiles was the mature female segment of the herd. This information is consistent with that obtained in the previous two years work (Boyd, 1961, 1962). �5 Yt. ",i \.5 <,~.. ~".d(j. . . f' r r" " { ~ '" .. :: .fi ~.~ ~ ~ ;, ~,••.•• u•• ",""~ (' .? ( / ., .I",. ~ ,.t. 4.....,;A"'<' '\!oo,;"."•. t'\ (" f , ) ) J II'!. r '""'(.)~ r ( ~'. /"" '.} ~\., e: .••••.••• ..tI '."" :.®) •.' 4,.,.,.it ~ "", . ;::'. / y oJ '-0 -:;'~.," -..,.. •• .( ',...• /" I ' , ( ...• .. • ~C"ilo.h'", "l, ~..J-l ..., ••••• Figure 1 - Special Study Section, 26 miles Long. Location of Reported Highway Ki lIs Shown by Dots •• Sixty-three Kills are shown on the Above Mape e Proposed Area Where "Scare" Devices Are to be Constructed is Also Shown • �Figure 2 - Location of Highway - Killed Deer - Statewide, 1962 �Figure 3 - New Type of Large Deer Crossing Signs on Highway U.S. 24 - west of Grand Valley, Colorado, 1963. �FIGURE 4 - TIME OF DAY DEER-AUTO ACCIDE'NTS OCCURRED, 1962. 40 30 ~ Z iLl 0 -oo ct 20 La.. 0 a: iLl m 2 ::l 10 Z 2:00 4:00 6:00 8:00 10:00 NOON a:oo 4:00 6:00 8:00 P. M. A.M. TIME OF ACCIDENT 10:00 12:00 �FIGURE 5 - TIME OF YEAR· DEER-AUTO ACCIDENTS OCCURRED, 1962. ZZI ~ Z 180 lIJ - 0 U U <t &L. 0 120 a:: lIJ (D 2 ::;) Z 60 "AN FEe MAR APR MAY "UNE "ULY MONTH AUG SEPT OCT NOV DEC �-40The average cost per accident was almost exactly the same in the 1962 segment as it was in the 1961 project writeup. The number of accidents that reported monetary damage to the vehicle was one less than it was in the 1961 report. The time of day that the accidents occurred again showed the pattern that was evident in the 1960 report, with 69.8% of the accidents occurring between 4:00 p.m. and Midnight. This also concurs with the data on deer activity reproted on another job in this project concerning use of alfalfa by deer. There were 592 reported killed on known crossings, which is 72.1% of the total. This would tend to support the contention proposed in the last segment that the signs are either too small or that they are left out all year so that local people get too used to them and do not pay close enough attention to the crossing areas. It is also evident, although no actual figures are available on this supposition, that local Colorado residents hit more deer than do outof-state drivers, or even drivers from the eastern slope of Colorado. With nearly 71% of the accidents occurring between October 1 and April 30 it would seem proper to take down the crossing signs during the five months that do not materially contribute to the deer-auto mortality figures. The number of deer that wer e killed in the special study section during the past segment was almost half that reported in 1961. There is no reason to suspect that less interest on the part of the local W.C.O. accounted for this drop in reported kills. Therefore, the lower kill on Highway 6 and 24 is due to one or more of several causes. One, a light winter in 1962-63 did not force deer down to the vicinity of the highways as it had in the past; or, two, the hunting season kill in this area during the 1961 big game season reduced the herd sufficiently enough to cut down on the highway losses; or, three, that motorists were being made more conscious of the deer crossing area in Garfi0ld County. All three reasons probably have had some effect, but it is felt that more than a little good was done when the Colorado Department of Highways installed four extremely large deer crossing signs in the 26 mile area in G~rfield County late in November, 1962 (Figure 3). These signs are very striking, and the additional fact that they caution the motorist as to how far the crossing area extends should help a great deal. For the second year data was collected on whether known deer crossing areas were marked at all or not. In the 1962 report there were 43.1% of the known crossing areas that were not marked; during the past segment this figure dropped to 31.6% of the known crossing areas were not marked. It is believed that the local W.C.O.'s have begun to order deer crossing signs for these areas as they become aware of the large numbers of deer that are being killed by automobiles in their districts. Until the statewide survey was started no complete records were kept, and the fact that the local man had to report highway kills brought to his attention the problem that always existed, but the extent of which was not always known. Continued cooperation with the Colorado Department of Highways on this problem will be 'a very inportant phase of this project as Lt is continued. �-41 Literature Cited Boyd, Raymond J. 1961. Study of deer losses on Colorado highways. Federal Aid Quarterly Report, Colorado Game and Fish Department. April: 75-82. (Mimeo). Boyd, Raymond J. 1962. Study of deer losses on Colorado highways. Federal Aid Quarterly Report, Colorado Game and Fish Department. October: 93-100. (Mimeo). Prepared by: Ra~ond J. Boyd Date: April, 1964 Approved by: Richard N. Denney Project Leader Ferd Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �.42•. JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of Colorado Project No. H-38-R-17 Hork Plan No. --~------------- 6 Damage Studies Job No. 11 Methods of Evaluating Deer and Elk Use On Alfalfa Under Summer-Long Grazing. Period Covered: Deer-Elk Investigations April 1, 1962 through March 31, 1963 Abstract: Fourteen plots measuring 200 x 30 were harvested twice during the 1962 growing season. A total of I,205~ pounds of hay was produced from the 1st cutting and 2,072~ pounds wer e produced from 2nd cutting. Soil-moisture "stacks" were installed in each plot, but no readings were taken. High correlation was shown to exist be tween maximum daily air temperatures at the study area and the Weather Bureau Station, but no relationship could be shown between minimum daily temperatures on the t,'10 areas. Recommendations: 1. No recommendations for management purposes can be made at this stage of the study. 2. Construct IO-foot fences around the plots that are to be protected from deer grazing and mark all other plots at their corners. 3. Harvest and we Lgh hay produced from all plots, and compare the fenced plots with the unfenced plots. This harvest should be on both first and second cuttings. 4. If time is available, count deer on the study field ,..rith the aid of the portable tower and light. Continue to file for permanent record the periodic counts of the local H.C.O. that are made on the study area. 5. Take we ek'l y soil-moisture readings and calibrate the soil type on the study area according to the instructions that are included '-liththe Coleman Meter and the Fiberglass Resistance Blocks. Objectives: 1. To determine if any actual loss in production of alfalfa occurs from summer-long grazing by deer or elk, and if a loss occurs, how much. �-432. To correlate the actual amount of use by game animals on the test plots with changes in production, so that estimates of game use may be converted to a change in pounds of hay produced. Procedure: Alfalfa fields belonging to Mr. Charles Clark on West Rifle Creek, Garfield County, Colorado, have been selected as the site for this study. A legal agreement has been drawn up and signed by Mr. Clark and the Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Commission to cover the conduct of this study. Copies of this agreement have been sent to the Bureau of Sport Fisheries and Wildlife Office in Albuquerque, and to Mr. Clark and his attorney. 1. Test Plots - A series of randomly selected paired plots will be set up on the study field. These plots will be approximately 30 feet wide and 200 feet long. One-half of these plots, again selected randomly, will be fenced against deer use, the others will be marked only at the corners, and used for the control. Since irrigation seems to have such a great effect upon the production of the alfalfa, it will also be necessary to measure the soil-moisture inside the plots to see if the amount of moisture present can be correlated with the actual production without deer use. This will be accomplished by burying induction blocks in the ground at the center of each plot, and measuring the soil-moisture present at specified times with a soil-moisture measuring device, or Coleman meter. The fences around the fenced plots will be constructed of woven wire and steel posts, lO-feet high. Only one-half of the fences around the test plots will be taken down at each harvest in order to speed up the whold operation. As soon as the crop is harvested, the fences will be put back up in order to keep the deer from using the plots between the two cuttings or harvest. Hay harvested from the protected and unprotected plots will be weighed plot-by-plot, and the resulting figures will be subjected to statistical analysis (analysis of covariance and regression) so that any significant differences can be determined between the plots used by the deer and the plots that were protected from them. The first year of the study the plots will be marked only at the corners so that the variation between plots can be determined before they are fenced. 2. Deer Counts - Nightly counts of the deer using the fields will be done with the aid of the portable counting tower already constructed and used last year on the area. The large spotlight and binoculars will be used after dark to get accurate counts of the deer using the fields. These counts will be graphed to show the best hours to count deer on the fields in future years if it is necessary. 3. Weather Records - A semi-permanent weather station will be set up on the fields to get air temperature and relative humidity readings for the study area. This information will be recorded on charts by weekly periods by a hygrothermograph. Information taken from these charts will be compared with data from the nearest Federal Weather Station to see if correlation exists between �-44the two areas as far as air temperature is concerned. If this correlation exists, prediction formulas will be set up so that growing seasons may be predicted without having an actual weather station in the area under study. Findings: The 1962 growing season in the West Rifle Creek Area was very dry and the supply of irrigation water from the creek itself was barely sufficient to irrigate the first cutting. Any growth that occured after the first cutting was due to residual soi1moisture, as there were no rains to speak of in the area in late July or early August. The small amount of Lr-r Lga t Lon water that was available was put on the upper sections of the study field (plots 4, 8, 11, 12, 13 and 14) as this is where the best stand of alfalfa is located. Thus the plots in the lower section of the field (plots 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 9 and 10) were not sufficiently irrigated to give a good stand. 1. Test Plots - None of the plots were fenced for the 1962 growing season in order to let us determine what statistically significant differences exist between plots before they are fenced against the deer. This is necessary before we can run the two years data through the "analysis of covariance" test for significance. The hay was harvested twice on all the plots. The first cutting started on June 29 and was completed on July 11, while the second cutting started August 24 and was completed on August 31. Table 1 shows the hay weight data from all plots from each cutting. Table 1 - Weights of Alfalfa Hay Produced From Study Plots in 1962, West Rifle Creek. Plot Number 1st Cutting 6/29 - 7/11 2nd Cutting 8/24 - 8/31 Pounds of Hay Pounds of Hay 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 103 1/4 102 1/2 96 3/4 126 1/4 75 3/4 70 1/4 107 1/2 147 1/2 78 1/2 77 1/2 67 1/4 103 65 3/4 388 1/2 85 1/4 99 1/4 101 1/2 339 3/4 40 3/4 144 1/2 220 3/4 229 3/4 186 72 1/4 Total 1,205 1/2 2,072 1/2 75 76 68 3/4 * * Hay was hauled in and stacked by mistake before it was weighed. �FIGURE I - ALFALFA DAMAGE STUDY FIELD, RANCH - WEST RIFLE CREEK, It I LEGEND I PLOT NUMBER x FENCED PLOT • SOIL-MOiSTURE" STACK" CHARLES CLARK COLORADO. • J �I--TERMINAL PLATE - COLEMAN METER CONNECTIONS 2 -INCH PIPE ----tl GROUND LEVEL SOIL TAMPED TO SAME DENSITY AS ORIGINAL SOIL -1-1•••.--1 FIBERGLAS ELECTRICAL RESISTANCE BLOCKS FIGURE 2- SOIL MOISTURE "STACK" - (DIAGRAMATIC) �FIGURE 3 - REGRESSION OF MAXIMUM AIR TEMPERATURES. 1961 WEST RIFLE CREEK. COLORADO. 95 90 • CLARK RANCH 85 TEMPERATURE • 80 75 r = 0.984 • 70 65 60 55 • 50 50 • 55 60 65 70 WEATHER 75 BUREAU 80 85 TEMPERATURES 90 95 100 �FIGURE 4 - SCATTER-DIAGRAM OF 1962 TEMPERATURE DATA. MAXIMUM AIR- 95 -• • •.. · 90· • • •• en l&.I a: •••• 85 , ..... . • ..' · . ., .. . • • •• • 80 l&.I e, " :IE l&.I to- ..•• ..•• . ••••• ::) ti a: • · 75 • ••" ::z: (,) z Cl 70 • •• a: ~ ••• •• • • 65 a: Cl ..J (,) • • •• . ., • 65 70 60 • • • 55 •• •• 50 50 55 60 75 WEATHER BUREAU 80 85 90 TEMPERATURES 95 100 �FIGURE 5 - REGRESSION OF MINIMUM AIR TEMPERATURES t 1961 WEST RIFLE CREEK t COLORADO. 60 en LLI a:: :;) , 5""1 , 501 '/' . -/ • , . ., • •• # ~ a: LLI Q. :E LLI tol: 1 0 z < a:: 40 ~ 35 a:: / . 45 r= 0.679 < -I 0 30 25 25 / 30 35 40 45 50 55 WEATHER BUREAU TEMPERATURES 60 65 �FIGURE 6 - SCATTER - DIAGRAM OF 1962 TEMPERATURE DATA. MINIMUM AIR- �-45Installation of the soil-moisture "stacks" (Figure 2) was not started until late in the project year, 50 no readings could be taken for this segment. Enough "stacks" were made up to insure at least one per plot with some in reserve in the event the readings showed enough variation to warrant a larger sample of the soil-moisture content of the soil in the plots. Each plot will have one soil-moisture "stack!' located in the center of each plot (Figure 1). Soil-moisture readings wi lI be taken at four locations at the sample point; six inches below the surface, 12 inches below the surface, 24 and 30 inches below the ground level. The soil-units, as we received them, were equipped with 6-foot leads. Installation in the field requires a waterproof cable long enough to reach the measuring location, and at the same time provision must be made for waterproof connections to the meter at the measuring location. After longer lead wires were soldered to the leads supplied with the blocks, the connections wer e taped and all four leads twisted together and taped solid vlith scotch electrical tape for vlaterproofing. 2. Deer Counts - Counts of deer using the study field in 1962 were confined to the local W.C.O. who made regular counts on the area for Game Management purposes. These counts are made a permanent part of the records on this study. Press of other duties, and almost constant supervision of a field crew of students on elk vlinter range surveys during the summer did not allow time to set up and use the portable counting tower , 3. Weather Records _ The hygrothermograph was set up April 3, 1962 and the charts were changed weekly until October 3, 1962. Air temperature and relative humidity readings were recorded by the instrument and the air temperature data was compared with temperature data from the U.S. Weather Bureau Station located six miles northeast of Rifle, Colorado. A scatter-diagram (Figure 4) of the maximum daily air temperatures at the two locations was drawn up and compared to the same information from 1961 (Figure 3). A very good straight line relationship can be seen for both years as far as maximum air temperatures were concerned. A comparison of the minimum daily air temperatures at the two locations showed no correlation between stations or between years (Figures 5 & 6). Discussion: 1. Test Plots - There was quite alot of variation evident between plots for the 1962 hay weight data (Table 1). Most of the variation can be blamed on lack of water for proper irrigation. ~bether the variation is so great that it will mask any differences under fenced conditions, is a question that will have to be answered after the 1963 growing season, and the subsequent weights of hay produced. As soon as the growing season starts in the study area, about April 15, soil-moisture readings will be taken weekly at the "stacks" in each plot. �-462. Heather Records - All of the data gathered to date indicates that a very high correlation exists between air-temperatures at the Clark Ranch and temperature readings from the U.S. Weather Bureau Station near Rifle. This means that we can accurately predict maximum daily temperatures at the study area by using the Heather Bureau figures. However, there is no correlation at all in the m1n1mum temperatures between the two locations. In fact, a scatter-diagram of the temperatures appears to have been taken from a table of random numbers rather than from instruments recording air-temperatures. This indicates, then, that we cannot expect to be able to predict 'tvith any level of accuracy the minimum daily temperatures at the study area by using the Government figures. Prepared by: Raymond J. Boyd Date: April, 1964 Approved by: Richard N. Denney Project Leader Ferd K1einschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �~47JOB COMPLETIO~ REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of Colorado Project No. W-38-R-17 Work Plan No. 9 Study of Census Techniques 2 Comparison of Air and Ground Deer and Elk Counts ------------------- Job No. Period Covered: Deer-Elk Investigations April 1, 1962 through March 31, 1963 Abstract A very light winter in the area where the comparative counts were to be made did not allow us to do any work on this job. The snow was so lacking that the elk and deer did not come down to their normal winter ranges, so a wellcontrolled ground drive was not possible. Recommendations This job should be carried on for several more years in order to get the necessary data on elk counts that we now have on comparative deer counts. Objectives 1. To determine factors required to correct air counts for different snow, light and flight conditions and to work out an easily recognized set of standards to permit an accurate selection of the proper correction factors by the aerial observers. 2. To determine whether air-to-ground deer ratios will remain the same from one vegetative type or type of terrain to another. 3. To determine whether air counts will consistently tally the same percentage of elk as are present on the ground from time to time and from area to area. 4. To make similar air-ground correlation counts using a helicopter. Techniques Used Select deer and elk areas that are represenative of Game Management aerial population-trend areas on which deer and elk are counted annually. Such sites must possess features of terrain which make it possible to obtain a potentially total ground count of the deer and/or elk present. Air crews will count the area as many times as possible and practical (without disturbing the herd) prior to each ground drive. Information thus obtained will be analyzed statistically to determine the consistency of ratios. Also data on ground conditions (snow cover, light, etc.) will be tabulated to determine the effect of various conditions on the counts made. �-48Annual aerial-ground count correlations will be continued whenever combinations of counti~g factors occur which are needed to complete the range of factors needed for analysis on the Cedar Ridge deer-wintering area and the Sapinero elk-wintering area. These counts are usually made in late February. A Bell 47G-3B helicopter will be tested for counting efficiency on both the deer and elk study areas. In addition, the population data, particularly from the ground counts, will be used for comparison with other population data which would apply to the same area or herd. Findings Proper weather and snow conditions did not occur during the past segment to allow us to do any work on this job. Prepared by: Raymond J. Boyd Date: Apri~, 1964 Approved by: Richard N. Denney Project Leader Ferd Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �-49JOB COMPLETION REPORT INVESTIGATIONS PROJECT State of: Colorado Project No ,: W-38-R •• 17 Deer"Eik Investigations Hork Plan No. : 10 Application of Findings Job No.: 1 Range and Game Management \vorkbook ABSTRACT A proto-type of a. Game and Range Workbook has been developed to enable all Wildlife Conservation Officers in the state to have a standardized and uniform manner of obtaining, recording and maintaining permanent data on which to base sound hunting season recommendations. One of these is on file at the Fort Collins Research Center and at the Denver Federal Aid Office. Management Administration Personnel will be acquainted with this workbook, and urged to adopt it, or a similar one, for WCO use. �-50Game and Range Management Horkbook Richard N. Denney Introduction There has long existed a need for a permanent record of Wildlife Conservation Officer district records. This woul.d be not only valuable to the incumbent officer, but particularly to a newly assigned one, who would be coming into an area with which he is undoubtedly totally unfamiliar. In most cases in the past, upon the transfer of an individual, he has taken all data with him pertaining to district range and game management findings. This fieldbook offers an organized manner of maintaining continuing files in a H.e.O. district, which would remain with the district, and which the officer would be responsible for keeping current during his district tenure. A new man in a district wou Ld then be able to look back through past data and have a better understanding of the district, both its merits and its problems, and he better able to evaluate current work and develop trends of range and management techniques. The manner of performing some management data-gathering functions has not been standardized in some instances, but suggested methods may be indicated. Objectives To develop a proto-type of a Game and Range Workbook to enable all Conservation Officers in the state to have a standardized and uniform manner of obtaining, recording, and maintaining permanent data on which to base sound hunting season recommendations. Procedure A model Game and Range Management Workbook was assembled, taking advantage of all the past information available in a selected w.e.o. district on range and game data, historical information, etc. Game distribution and winter range areas in the district were mapped, with game range transect locations. A suggested table of contents was organized, with district maps, and some discussion of possible ways of obtaining data, as well as the inter-agency big game range analysis procedure. �-51Results and Discussion A workbook such as this can only be assembled with data pertinent to one Wildlife Conservation Officer district, and even this is not entirely complete, as all the data desired is not available. In many cases, adequate forms have not been devised or provided. Nevertheless, it will serve as a guide for such a book which can be assembled for each district by the Regional Administrators if they feel it has merit. The fieldbook, or workbook, is suggested as one in which summaries of data will be kept for rapid reference, while field data sheets, and other such voluminous papers will be filed. A loose-leaf notebook is suggested for this purpose so that new material may be added as it becomes available, and the arrangement of subject matter may be interchanged. �-52Hildlife Conservation Officer District Range and Game Management Fieldbook Index Title and District Personnel Page Introduction - Need and purposes Regional Map of Commissioner and Game Control Districts Regional Map of Hildlife Conservation Officer Districts District H. C. O. Map - -t or }l' scale Monthly Game Management Hork Schedule Local Game History - Early records, introductions, plantings, species, number, success, dates, etc. Game Management - Definitions, objectives, etc. Population Indexes Deer and Elk Hounding Losses Post Season Sex Ratios Aerial Trend Counts - State wide, local, map of trend area lVinter Trend Counts - Ground counts by car, foot, horseback, etc. Hinter Mortality Surveys Meadow Counts Track Counts Calf and Fawn Production Counts Bighorn Sheep, Antelope, etc. Distribution, counts, production, etc. Maps Small Game - Turkey, pheasant, chukar, quail, grouse, waterfowl, etc. Distribution, counts (winter, sex ratio, crowing, strutting ground, brood, etc.) by species Habitat Factors - Guzzlers, windmills, vegetative plantings, etc. �-53Hunting Season Data Big Game State Hide Kill Reports by units, counties or areas - last five years, file older ones. Cumulative Local Kill Reports by units, species, sex, number of validations or permits where applicable, and per cent of yearlings for 10-year period with season histories, dates, length and type. Hunter Pressure and Success Ratio by species and by local units for the past 10 years. Check Station Reports Small Game Hunting Field Contacts - HOl<7they are used, the importance of and hO~7 to properly fill them out, etc. Small Game Hunting Season History (local) - Dates, length, bag limits, hours, etc. by species, and Heather Bureau sunrise and sunset times. Summary of Local Field Contacts by species for game in possession, hours hunted, number crippled, etc. Game Range Data - Needs, principles, objectives, etc. Exclosures - Hritten description, location, type, objectives, and map. Inter-Agency Cooperative Browse Range Analysis Procedures - t-lrite-up now in use, revisions as they may occur. Map of Deer Summer and Hinter Ranges with Critical or Key Areas, Showing Location of Browse Transects. Map of Elk Summer and \-linterRanges lvith Critical or Key Areas, Showf.ng Location of Browse Transects. Measured Transect Forms Transect Hork Sheets (174-R2) from beginning years. Measured Transect Summary Sheets Total number of transects by species, and graphs. Cumulative annual summary by transect. Extensive Transect Forms (189-R2) from beginning years. �-54Other Range Survey and Analysis Methods - A brief summary of other range survey methods, not that they will necessarily be used, but for awareness that they exist. Parker Three Step, and Line-Point Line-Intercept (Canfield) Leader-Use Estimates (Hormay, Cole) Height-Estimate Actual Height Stubble Height-Height Game Damage Data - Form showing date, name, location, species, type of damage, game fencing, control work, amount claimed, amount paid - for game damage to hay, crops, orchards, pastures, etc., with any additional details on supplemental pages. Land Use Patterns - },z, 1 or 211 scale maps showi.ng details of owner shfp • Department-ovmed Lands - Name, acres, cost, etc. Private Land Ownership - Particularly in winter range, damage, hunting or fishing areas. Maps. Forest Service Grazing Allotments - Driveways, areas, permittees, class and number of livestock, seasons of use, etc. Maps. Bureau of Land Management Allotments - Dr Lveways , areas, permittees, class and number of livestock, seasons of use, etc. Haps. Browse Control Programs - Type of Control (spraying, plowing, burning, railing, chaining, etc.), location, acreage, ownership, effectiveness, cost per acre, effect on wildlife, etc. Maps. Heather Data - From nearest U.S. Heather Bureau Station. Minimum, Haximum and Average Monthly Temperatures begin in 1955. Total Honthly Precipitation - begin in 1955. Hunting Season Effects of the Weather - animals, hunters, access, etc. �-55- Game Management Public Relations Conservation, Sportsman, Rod and Gun Clubs Name, headquarters, officers, meeting dates, times Civic Groups (Rotary, Kiwanis, Lions, etc.) Name, headquarters, officers, meeting dates, times Livestock Associations Cattlemen - Chapter, town, officers, meeting dates, etc. Hoolgrowers - Chapter, town, officers, meeting dates, etc. Granges - Name, community, officers, meeting dates, etc. Outfitters, Guides and Dude Ranches Name, address, operation, fee, years of experience, success, etc. Individuals (Posted lands, preserves, parks, chronic cranks, etc.) Herd Analysis and Evaluation Season Recommendations ------------------- Prepared by: Richard N. Denney Date: AprJ-l,.1964 Approved by: Hayne H. Sandfort Game Research Chief Ferd Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �•.56JOB COMPLETION REPORT I~NESTIGATIONS PROJECT State of: Colorado Project No. : H-38-R-17 Deer-Elk Investigations Hork Plan No. : 11 ----~---------- Specific Herd Studies Job No.: Historical & Research Background 1 Rocky Mountain Cooperative Elk Study This is in the form of a negative report on this job, the objectives of which were to obtain historical background data on the elk and range in the Estes Park area, and any data available on the elk and their range from earlier studies. Time, and the press of other duties, have prevented the project leader from spending any effort toward these objectives this year. An extensive search of Forest Service and National Park Service files is planned during the next segment to obtain this data, which wi.Ll. be written up at that time. Prepared by: Richard N. Denney. Date: April, 1964 Approv~d by: Wayne \01. Sandfort Game Research Chief Fcrd Klcinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �JOB COHPLETION REPORT INVESTIGATIONS PROJECT State of COLORADO ----~~~~~----~------ Project No.: W-38-R-17 Deer-Elk Investigations Work Plan No.: 11 ----~~-------- Specific Herd Studies Job No.: ~2 _ Winter Range Delimitation Rocky Mountain Cooperative Elk Study Abstract A reduced number of fixed-wing flights over those planned met with poor counting conditions and rough flying air. The few observations of wintering elk made were plotted on overlays of the study area, and with further sightings gained during the next segment will provide a good indication of concentration areas. No lVork was done as yet on mapping from past records and files. Hinter Range Delimitation Richard N. Denney Objectives: The area of use during ~-1interperiods must be determined, so as to know the usual wintering areas, and the total winter range available geographically. 1. Delimit and map the primary elk ~·,interrange in the study area, that is, those ~vinter ranges wh Lch normally sustain elk every winter. 2. Delimit and map the secondary elk winter range in the study area, that is, those ranges, sometimes referred to as intermediate or spring-fall ranges, wh Lch wLth the primary range represent the total winter range available to the elk herd. Procedure: 1. Determine through records, files, publications and field observations the areas of primary concentration in the past, and map these on quarter inch study area maps, and more specifically on two inch to the mi Le t ownsh Lp maps. �-582. Fixed-wing airplane flights, augmented occasionally with helicopter flights, will enable ~s to determine current concentration area~, and keep up Hith t he Lr shifting through by-weelcLy flights the next two or three years. This will involve approximately 150 hours of f Lxed-wt.ng flying time. The animals observed on these flights ,vill be located on maps by the observer whf le actually flying and making the observations as to locations, numbers and movements. Results and Discussion: Fixed-wing flights have been limited to far fewer observations than originally planned. The air is so turbulent on the east side of the Continental Divide that very few of the scheduled flights could be made, and often when they were, the visibility was greatly reduced because of rough air and flying conditions, or because of the heavy timber cover and lack of sufficient snOH for a good counting background. However , in spite of these handicaps, several observations have been made, sometimes incidentally, while enroute over the area on another job. These sightings have been plotted on an overlay of the study area map, and at the end of another project segment should have sufficient data thereon to give an indication of concentration areas. The press of other duties has prevented the project leader from delving into National Park Service and Forest Service files sufficiently enough to map •. ,inter usage from past known sources. During the next segment more intensive work on this job will be performed, and it ,vill be augmented by additional wor k on Job No.3, the basic range inventory, from which key areas can be delineated by pellet group counts. Prepared by: Date: Richard N. Denney April, 1964 ----------~--~------------ Approved by: lvayne 1-1. Sandfort Game Research Chief Ferd Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �-59JOB COMPLETION REPORT INVESTIGATIONS PROJECT State of COLORADO ------~~~----------- Project No.: Work Plan No.: Job No. :__ ~3 Deer-Elk Investigations W-38-R-17 Specific Herd Studies 11 _ Basic Range Inventory Rocky Mountain Cooperative Elk Study Abstract During the 1962 field season a total of 228 browse condition transects were run, 11 in Rocky Mountain National Park, 179 in Game Management Unit 19, and 38 in Unit 20. Comparatively, those in the Park indicate a higher condition rating than those on the forest and private lands, based on browse composition, density and vigor, and on soil stability ratings. Basic Range Inventory Richard N. Denney Objectives: Knowledge of the condition, trend and quality of the winter range is an essential part of the groundwork required to make sound management recommendations. 1. Within the winter ranges as delimited previously, determine: Total area in acres. b. Composition of forage by species. c. Density of forage species. d. Vigor of forage species. e. Soil movement and erosion. 8. 2. Determine the condition and trend of various components of the winter range. Procedure: 1. The composition, density, vigor and soil movement data will be obtained by the interagency big game range analysis procedure as contained in the Region II Forest Service Range Analysis Handbook, Chapter 8. It involves essentially a combination of the Parker step transect with a newly developed browse transect procedure, based on 100 hits on the ground between browse and overstory species, and 100 hits on Hoody browse plants, plus observations on soil movement and erosion. �-602. Type maps will be prepared, based On range survey data, and through the use of a planimeter, the atea in acres of the various types and conditions will be calculated. 3. The condition and trend of the elk winter ranges will be determined through the use of the brush land scorecard developed in connection with the big game range analysis procedure. Results and Discussion: During the field season of 1962 a total of 228 big game range condition transects were run in the study area. Of these, 11 were in Rocky Mountain National Park, and the remainder on Roosevelt National Forest and private lands, which included 179 transects in Game Management Unit 19, and 38 in Game Management Unit 20. Vegetative Types Within the Park boundaries 10 of these transects, located in Horseshoe Park, Beaver Meadows, Deer Mountain and Moraine Park primarily, were in type 6 vegetatively, with Ponderosa pine as the oversto+y and bitterbrush, sagebrush and Ribes in the understory. One transect was run in type 5, sagebrush, which is not an abundant type in the Park. In Unit 19, 26 transects were run in type 1, with bluegrass, mountain muhlenbergia and blue grama the most abundant grasses. Four transects were run in type 2 (meadowland) where bluegrasses and sedges were most common. Tow transects were run in type 4 with sagebrush and bitterbrush predominating. Type 5 had 45 transects, with mountain mahogany, bitterbrush, and sagebrush represented. The type of greatest coverage was type 6, where 95 transects were run with Ponderosa pine the predominating overstory. Seven transects were run in type 10, aspen. Unit 20, the one immediately adjacent to the east boundary of the Park, had 38 transects run in it. Three were in type 1, grassland; six were in type 5, browse; and 29 were in type 6, conifer, again with Ponderosa pine the dominant. Composition Within the Park the elk winter ranges are primarily in Ponderosa pine, with a bitterbrush, sagebrush and Ribes understory, along with various muhlenbergias, fescues and bluegrasses. Composition rated high in 27 percent of the transected areas, medium in 54 percent, and low in 19 percent. That is, to be in a high rating, a transect must have 75 percent of the composition made up of desirable and intermediate browse species (must be two or more), with desirables making up at least 45 percent of the composition. In Game Management Unit 19, 38 percent were high, 52 percent were medium, and 10 percent were low in composition ratings. Unit 20 revealed that 40 percent of the transected areas were high in composition, 50 percent were medium, and 10 percent were low. �-6l~ The desirable browse species in each of these areas are mountain mahogany, bitterbrush, aspen, chokecherry, serviceberry and willow. Iritermediate species are sagebrush, rabbitbrush, elderberry and kinnikinnick. While formulated primarily for browse types, these transects can be used in other types, showing the hits on grasses, forbs, litter, bare ground and rocks to obtain criteria other than on the woody plant species. Density Browse density readings were made with the angle gauge and were taken at ten stations along the transect. These showed that 64 percent of the transects run in the Park were a medium rating, and 36 percent were low. High ratings indicate a 36 to 65 percent ground coverage, medium are 16 to 35 percent, and low are less than 16 percent. In Unit 19, 45 percent of the transected areas had a medium browse density, and 55 percent were low. Thirty percent of Unit 20 transects were medium density, and 70 percent were low. Vigor ratings of the browse transects are based on the degree of hedging on key species and the relationship of young to decadent plants. These transects showed that 82 percent of those in the Park were of high vigor, and 18 percent were medium. In Unit 19, 11 percent were high, 64 percent were medium, and 25 percent were low. Unit 20 transects were rated as 20 percent high, 60 percent medium, and 20 percent 101;1. Soil Conditions The soil stability condition classes are based on the hits on ground cover and rocks on 100 points on each transect, as well as evidences of erosion through pedestalled plants, rills, alluvial deposits and runoff. For a high rating, there must be 65 or more hits on ground cover and rocks, 35 to 65 for medium, and less than 35 for low. Hithin Rocky 110untain National Park, 91 percent of the ratings were high for soil stability, and nine percent were medium. In Unit 19, 52 percent are high, 47 percent medium, and one percent low in soil condition ratings. Unit 20 revealed that 76 percent were high, and 24 percent were low soil stability ratings. Condition and Trend It is interesting to note that all the ratings are significantly higher inside the Park than those outside in Units 19 and 20. This transect procedure is aimed at game range analysis, and doesn't mean that the outside ranges are necessarily in poorer shape from a livestock standpoint, except that the soil stability ratings are also lower outside the Park. The differences are obviously due to livestock use on the forest permits and private lands, while only wildlife use is encountered in the Park. �-62When the field work is completed in Unit 20 during the next segment, a vegetative type map will be made, with the indicated condition ratings on it, and the acreage of the types will be planimetered. Pellet group counts are made in conjunction with each browse transect, and in some cases only the pellet group counts were made, to determine the class of animal, and the season of use, through the characteristics of the droppings made in seasons of succulent or drier, more fibrous feeding habits. This data will help pinpoint key areas of winter range. Prepared by: Richard N. Denney Date: ~A~p~r~i~1~l~1~9~6~4 _ Approved by: Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief Ferd Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �-63JOB COMPLETION REPORT INVESTIGATIONS PROJECT State of Colorado -------~~~~~------W-38-R-17 Deer-Elk Investigations Work Plan No.: 11 ----~~--------- Specific Herd Studies Job No.: 4 Seasonal Movements Project No.: ----------------------- Rocky Mountain Cooperative Elk Study Abstract A total of 97 elk were eartagged and neckbanded with two group livetraps. Observations were limited, but they apparently move down east of Rocky Mountain National Park into the Pole Hill area to winter. �-64Seasonal Mbvements Richard N. Denney Objectives: Knowledge of the seasonal movements and migration of the sub-units of the elk herd are essential in the setting of logical seasons as to time and place for harvesting any existing surpluses. 1. Determine the normal seasonal movements of the sub-units of the elk herd, and the general migration routes. 2. Determine the movements of individual elk between herds and drainages. 3. Determine the correlation, if any, between meteorological and phenological phenomena with individual and herd behavior. Procedure: 1. Through field and aerial observations of herd units on seasonal ranges determine the distances and direction of movement from the previous observations made during by-weekly fixed-wing airplane flights. 2. Construct and operate cooperatively with the Park and Forest Service two or more group live traps to neck-band as many elk as feasible on winter concentration areas in the Rocky Mountain National Park and the adjoining Roosevelt National Forest. Different colored collars will be used at the various trap-sites so that the movement and integration of the herd sub-units can be ascertained, based on observations by field personnel in the area, and on aerial observations. Each collared elk will also be eartagged with a tag in each ear, serially numbered, so as to be able to identify them when recovered through harvesting or other means if they should have lost their neckbands. 3. Heather station data at the Rocky Mountain National Park headquarters and other established stations will be compared with observed herd behavior and coincidental phenological observations as to time and rate of development of plants in relation to snow recession and temperatures to see if correlations exist between these various factors. Results and Discussion: Of the three steps in the objectives and procedures listed above, only one has had any reportable work or progress to date. This is number two, on determining movements of elk by means of neck-bands applied when the elk were live-trapped. In the wLnt.e r of 1961-62 a trap was constructed in Cedar Park above the Jim Bowman ranch on Forest Service land. It was a group live-trap of the same design and mechanism as used currently on the White River, and described in completion reports for Work Plan 1, Job 5 of W-38-R. The Department supplied the game fencing (eight foot) and the jump net, while the Forest Service built the framing necessary, constructed and operated the trap. �•.65This trap was in a location formerly used by approximately 80 head of elk during the winters. Due to light winters in 1961-62 and 1962-63, the elk didnit use this area much, and then, too, there was so much grass and natural feed available that they weren't too interested in the hay used for bait. Two cow elk and three deer were trapped during the latter part of the winter of 1961-62, and none during the early part of the 1962-63 winter. One of these elk lost her collar by ripping it off on a barbed wire fence near Masonville about one month later. Orange collars were used at this trap site. The other elk has not been observed since, and it is believed that the neckband has come off. Since the use of these collars, an improved design has been made and used, which has greater durability, being sewn onto nylon or cotton webbing material with orIon thread. A similar trap was constructed in Beaver Meadows in Rocky Mountain National Park by the Park Service, and one bull elk was trapped, eartagged, banded with a white Weblon collar, and released. This occurred in late 1961-62 winter. A new trap was constructed in the fall of 1962 in Moraine Park, patterned after those used in Yellowstone Park. A net was incorporated into the construction for handling the individual animals, but instead of having them jump into the suspended net as used formerly, the net was laid on the ground, and was raised by cables via pulley by backing a jeep up outside the enclosure. A total of 94 elk were trapped, eartagged and neckbanded with white collars during the winter of 1962-63. Prior to the closure of this segment some of the banded elk were observed from the fixed-wing plane east of the trap site, and outside the Park, in the Pole Mountain area. Further observations were precluded by poor visibility and rough flying conditions. Approved by: Wayne W. Sandfort Richard N. Denney --~~~~~~~~Game Research Chief Prepared by: Date : -=.:..- ..:;A..:::p..:;r:-i.:....l:..::, __1_9_6_4 _ Ferd Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �-66JOB COHPLETION REPORT INVESTIGATIONS PROJECT COLORADO -----~~~~----------- State of Project No.: Deer-Elk Investigations W-38-R-17 Hork Plan No.: 11 ----~~--------- Job No. :__ ---:5::..- _ Specific Herd Studies Population Components Rocky Hountain Cooperative Elk Study Abstract Specimens were collected during the special elk season in the Estes Park area, ~vhich included 70 heads, 60 blood samples, and 21 fetuses. Tests for brucellosis and leptospirosis proved negative. Two neckbanded and eartagged elk \.• ere killed. The average weight of the fetuses was 3.l~ pounds, vlith peak of conception on September 18, 1962. T,.• o yearling cows contained fetuses. The 70 elk heads wcr e aged by dentition development and wear, and later a correlation of eye lens \-,eightwith age will be attempted. Population Components Richard N. Denney Ob;ectives: Knowledge of the herd structure by sex and age class, as 't'lell as the productivity of the herd, is vital to the formulation of a sound management plan. 1. Determine the sex-ratio of the elk in this herd. 2. Determine the cow-caLf ratio of the elk in this herd. 3. Determine the age-class structure of this herd of elk. Procedure: Through field, f Lxed-wi.ng airplane and helicopter counts ascertain the ratio of: 1. Bulls to cows by using one observer so as to minimize the variations inherent in different observers. Enumerate the actual numbers of bulls seen and adult cows obseved to base calculations for determining the number of cows per bull, and the number of bulls per 100 cows. �-67It is anticipated that this number '\:°7ill vary considerably amongst the three types of possible herd populations found in the study area, that is (1) sub-units of the herd ,vhich are never outside the boundaries of the Park at anytime of year, (2) sub-units of the herd which live almost entirely out of the Park at all times of the year, and (3) sub-units of the herd wht ch may spend part of the year ,.,ithin the Park, and be outside during the vlinter, or possibly during part of the hunting season. 2. Calves to cows, using one observer so as to have comparable counts from year to year and area to area. Realizing that this 'vill include some yearling heifers and some dry cows , it nevertheless will indicate the calf production potential of the herd. Calves per 100 cows ,.,illbe calculated, and then the annual productivity of the herd can be projected. 3. Hature bulls to yearling bulls, again with one observer so as to have standardized counts. Er om check station data we have found that yearling bulls range from spikes to sometimes four or five point, but the antler form is not the typical tined-formation of the older bulls, nor is it as heavily beamed. This ratio ,vill provide a clue as to the survival from calf-hood to the succeeding age-classes. Data from animals taken during control harvesting and special season hunts as to sex and age classes in the harvest will be analyzed in addition. Results and Discussion: Little work has been done on this job to date, although a special elk season held from January 26 through February 17, 1963, from which the f ollowfng data was obtained 'lhich applies somewhat; to the herd productivity. A kill of 104 bulls, 270 CO,olSand 99 calves, totaling 473 elk, represented a 10 percent success ratio for the elk hunters, who could shoot an animal of their choice. If unsuccessful, they could hunt elk in Colorado during the regular season in October, 1963. Apparently there is not any sloughing of calves by cows caused by brucellosis of leptospirosis, as indicated by negative reports on blood tests run on 23 bulls and 37 cows by the Cooperative Brucellosis Laboratory in Denver, Colorado. In addition, 25 lung tissue specimens proved to be negative for the presence of lun~.,orm eggs and larvae. The heads of 70 elk Here obtained, which were aged by dentition development and wear, and the eyeballs were preserved for later analysis and correlation of lens weight with age, and possibly with range quality. The sex and age of this sample were as follows: 24 percent males and 76 percent females; 29 percent calves, 19 percent yearlings, nine percent two year olds, 10 percent three year olds, seven percent four year olds, and 24 percent five years and older, of which 10 percent Here ten years old and older. T,olOeartagged and neckbanded elk from this current study wer e killed on Pole Ridge. One other animal was killed which was tagged as a calve in Horseshoe Park in 1959 by Park Service personnel. �-68A total of 21 fetuses ,-'assecured from pregnant cow elk killed during this special season. They ranged from 84 to 2,372 grams in weight (2.8 to 125 ounces, or from 0.3 to 7.8 pounds), averaging 3.4 pounds. Fitting the fetal measurements on cr-own-crumpinto a curve based on Horrison, ~ al., (1959) findings in Horrt ana , 'ole calculate an average age of 125 days on these fetuses, ranging from 85 to 150 days. The average date of kill on the CO\vSwas established at January 28, 1963. Backdating, then, we find that the peak of conception in the Rocky Hountain National Park and Estes Park area for elk was approximately September 18, but ranged from August 31 to October 28, 1962. Two of these fetuses were taken from cows wh Lch wou Ld have had these calves on their second birthday, having conceived as long yearlings. One of these was 3.0 pounds, and the other 'vas 4.7 pounds. Hany investigators feel that the young or yearlings of any species that are capable of reproducing at an early age bear smaller progeny. Recall that the average weight here was 3.4 pounds. This small sample, however, doesn't necessarily refute this theory. Of these 21 fetuses, 12 were males and nine we re females, for a 57 :43 male:female ratio. All appeared to be normal, perfectly formed specimens, and data on crown-rump length, contour length, foreleg and hindleg length, head length and width, and tail length were recorded, along with their weights. Unconfirmed reports were made of two setS of twin fetuses during this season. References Morrison, John A., Charles E. Trainer and Philip L. Wright. 1959. Breeding season in elk as determined from known-age embryos. J. Wildl. Mgmt., 23(1):27-34. Prepared by: Richard N. Denney Date: ~A~p~r~i~12,~1~9~6~4 _ Approved by: Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief Ferd Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �-69JOB COMPLETION REPORT INVESTIGATIONS State of. ~C~O~L~ORA~D~O~ Project No.: W-38-R-17 Work Plan No.: ~l~I Job No.: ~6 PROJECT _ Deer-Elk Investigations _ _ Specific Herd Studies Management Recommendations Rocky Mountain Cooperative Elk Study No work was performed on this job as yet, as more data is required on Jobs I through 5 before management recommendations can be made based on analysis of range and population characteristics. Prepared by: Date: Richard N. Denney ~A~p~r~i~1~.~1~)~6~4_ Approved by: Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief Ferd Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �� https://cpw.cvlcollections.org/files/original/f7a26504c74a706a2a597f5cb5fe6b12.pdf c35ffa538929d6941aebb3661650f27e PDF Text Text -71- JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT S tate of COLORADO ------~--~~-----------W-37-R-17 Project No. Title of Job: Summarization and Publication of Pheasant Research Findings Period Covered: Personnel: 12 Job No. 1 Work Plan No. April 1, 1963 through March 31, 1964. Wayne W. Sandfort and Harold M. Swope ABSTRACT Anticipated progress was not made on the publication, however, some data compilation and bibliographic work was accomplished. Objectives: (1) To summarize all work done on the species in Colorado. (2) To publish results of pheasant studies, and other available information on pheasants. Techniques Used: Materials pertaining to pheasant history, management and research are being compiled for inclusion in the final manuscript. A general outline which has been prepared will be expanded under each specific category to provide a detailed manuscript guide for use in preparation of this publication. Findings: The constant press of unanticipated assignments prevented the desired progress on this manuscript. Accomplishments include the extraction of subject titles on all pheasant work from Colorado Federal Aid game research reports, (1947-1964) compilation of information on early hunting seasons and establishment of a file and system for cataloging collected materials. Prepared by: Date: Harold M. Swope Principal Game Biologist April, 1964 ----------~--~-------------- Printerl Fobruar-y, 1965 Approved by: Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief ��-73- JOB COMPLETION RESEARCH PROJECT REPORT SEGMENT State of OOLORADO Project No. Game Bird Survey W-37-R-17 ~~~~~--------------- Work Plan No. 1 -------~~------------ Job No. Personnel: Review of Literature l4a Period Covered: April Effects of Hen Pheasant Harvest 1, 1963 through March 31, 1964 Harold M. Swope ABSTRACT A questionnaire was prepared and distributed to all State and Provincial Conservation Agencies, to obtain facts and opinions relative to ,the effects of female removal in upland bird populations. Fifty states and five Canadian provinces reported open hunting seasons on 27 upland game bird species. Ten of the 25 states allowing turkey hunting protect the hen, and 25 of the 42 states and provinces with open pheasant seasons do not permit female harvest. The females of all other species were legal targets in every reported instance. Nine states and provinces reported efforts to evaluate the effects of shooting hen pheasants and seven states referred to similar studies on other game bird species. In most instances shooting the hen has not been found to be detrimental to game bird populations. Public opposition and the lack of knowledge of the effects it may have on the birds were the most commonly reported deterrents to permitting hen pheasants in the bag. The lack of nesting cover and a deficiency of winter cover were the factors most frequently blamed for limiting pheasant abundance. Pheasants are stocked for the gun in 25 states and provinces at costs (bird returned to the bag) ranging from $1.79 to $25.00. Stocked birds contribute from less than one-half of one percent, up to ninety percent of the pheasant harvest. �-74Additional information relative to hunting regulations (season lengths, bag and possession limits, opening dates, shooting hours), number of hunters, area hunted, harvest and census was also received and tabulated. Objectives: (1) (2) To review published information on removal of the hen from pheasant populations. Related studies on other species should be considered. To gather unpublished information on the effects of harvesting hen pheasants, and the females in other upland bird populations. Techniques Used: Library research produced very meager information relative to the effects of removing females from upland game bird populations. Several Western States, known to allow the hunter harvest of hen pheasants, were requested to send all pertinent data. Finally, a questionnaire was prepared requesting answers to specific questions. This was sent to all State and Provincial Conservation Agencies. A final synopsis has been compiled from the data contained in the completed questionnaires and accompanying materials. Findings: The dearth of specific information resulting from carefully planned studies to evaluate the effects of hen removal from upland bird populations emphasizes the necessity for a project of this nature. The demonstrated interest of everyone contacted also points out· the need for more information on this subject. Literature obtained through library research, and by writing to the several Western States, has been incorporated in the questionnaire synopsis (Swope, 1964). Copies of this synopsis, which reports the literature review findings in detail, have already been submitted. LITERATURE CITED Swope, Harold M. 1964. An Upland Game Bird Harvest Questionnaire Synopsis with Special Emphasis on the Legal Shooting of Hen Pheasants. Special Report No.2. Game Research Division. Colo. Dept. of Game, Fish and Parks, 44pp. Prepared Date; by: Harold M. Swope April 1964 Fe bruary, 1()65 Approved by: Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �-75- JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO Project No. W-37-R-17 Game Bird Survey ----~~~------------ Work Plan No. 1 Effects of Hen Pheasant Harvest Job No. l4b Selecting and Defining Study Areas Period Covered: April 1, 1963 through March 31, 1964 Personnel: -------------------- Harold Swope and Wayne W. Sandfort ABSTRACT An experimental area (within which it was proposed that hen permits be issued) and a control area (within which cocks only hunting was to be continued) were established and defined in the "tablelands area" of northeastern Colorado. Areas were selected for their homogeneity of habitat and pheasant populations. The experimental area is located in portions of Sedgwick and Phillips counties and is bounded by the South Platte River and the Nebraska State Line on the north, the Nebraska State Line on the east, U. S. Highway 6 on the south and State Highway 59 on the west. These boundaries had to be specific because of the special hunting regulations involved (hen permits and harvest). The control area is situated in portions of Phillips, Logan and Yuma Counties within an area south of U. S. Highway 6, west of U. S. Highway 385, north of the First Correction Line North, and east of State Highway 25. Townships were selected within the experimental and control areas for more intensive study. Recommendations: The areas selected appear to be well adapted to this study. Investigations to determine the feasibility of harvesting hen pheasants should be continued on the study areas delineated. Objectives: (1) To locate and define an experimental area within which either sex pheasant shooting will be allowed, and within which the effects of hen shooting can be evaluated. �-76- (2) To locate and define a control area within which "cocks only" pheasant shooting will be allowed, and which can be used for comparative purposes in evaluating pheasant population changes and the effects of hen shooting. Techniques Used: Study areas were selected by a process of elimination based primarily on previous surveys conducted under the pheasant Work Plan. Areas were compared on the basis of: (1) Size, (2) pheasant populations, (3) vegetative cover and land use practices, and (4) homogeneity within each area. Findings: Most Colorado pheasant ranges were readily eliminated from consideration as study areas by obvious deficiencies in size, pheasant abundance and/or land use. To conduct a study of this nature, with conclusions based on measured changes in pheasant populations, it is mandatory that areas be large enough to nullify the effects of pheasant movements, and that birds be abundant enough to permit detection of population fluctuations. Size of Area. -- Lyon (1958), reporting on his pheasant mobility study, stated that maximum recorded pheasant movement in northeastern Colorado was 8.5 miles. To avoid the possibility of pheasants moving in to the area where hens have been shot, causing an inaccurate analysis of population data, it was determined that the experimental township (for intensive study) should have a nine mile (minimum) "buffer zone" surrounding it. If there is pheasant movement from the "cocks only" area to the hen harvest area, the buffer zone can be expected to absorb this migration without 'influence on the experimental township. This consideration dictated that two areas, each approximately 25 miles square, be selected for study. Only in the drylands of eastern Colorado can such sizable areas of pheasant range be found. Pheasant Populations. -- Sandfort (1957) found only 19 percent of Colorado's 23,000 square miles of pheasant range to contain populations of pheasants rated "fair" or better. Approximately seven percent he called "good" or "very good". A great preponderance of this better pheasant range is in northeastern Colorado~ principally in Phillips and Sedgwick Counties. To accurately measure pheasant populations, and detect changes in them, it is imperative that bird numbers be sufficient to permit use of known inventory techniques. Dryland areas which appear to meet pheasant abundance requirements are found only in northeastern and east central Colorado. Vegetative Cover and Land Use Practices. -- East-central Colorado farmlands are currently in the process of change. Much of this land was idled following drouth years in 1955 and 1956. Many acres were placed in the Soil Bank and allowed to go undisturbed. This benefited pheasants and they responded with population increases. The Soil Bank contracts are now expiring and the land is being returned to crop production. In all probability pheasant populations will decline. In 1957, 61 productive irrigation wells were in operation in Kit Carson County. Early in 1964 there were close to 400 wells in the same area. These developments result in changes in land use and habitat which make the cause of pheasant population fluctuations difficult to assess. �-77- Nearly all of Phillips County, and the south two-thirds of Sedgwick County, are planted to small grain crops, primarily winter wheat. Land use practices appear to be nearly identical throughout the entire area. Homogeneity Within Each Area. -- By the time this factor was considered, all potential sites except the one selected had been eliminated. The Phillips and Sedgwick County site, as mentioned in the previous section, appears quite homogeneous in respect to cover types and land use practices. Pheasant population levels also appear to be somewhat similar over most of the area. Special hunting regulations to permit some hen harvest requires readily discernible, describable boundaries. The area north of U. S. Highway 6 most logically provides this requisite. Therefore, the experimental area has b~en defined as follows: That area north of U. S. Highway 6, east of State Highway 59, south of the South Platte River and west of the Nebraska State Line. The control area, which does not require boundaries readily recognizable by the public, is situated south of U. S. Highway 6 and east of U. S. Highway 385. It is approximately 25 miles square. Within the experimental and control areas, townships for more intensive study were selected. These townships were centrally located to-assure that the buffer zones surrounding them received corresponding hunter harvest treatment. The study areas were plotted on county maps, scale one-half inch per mile, prepared by the Research and Planning Division of the State Highway Department. Figure 1 is a reduced version of the base map showing the location of the two areas and the special study townships. Pheasant population trend routes, vegetative phenology plots, and other features pertinent to this study are also indicated on the map. These will be discussed in subsequent Job Completion Reports which appear in this publication. Prepared by: Harold M. Swope Date: April, 1964 I'd ntnn February, 1965 Approved by: Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �Interior Townships Crowing and Brood Count Routes Brood Count Routes Vegetative Photo Hubs Fig. 1. -- Experimental Colorado. hen pheasant harvest study areas, northeastern Transects • �-79- JOB COMPLETION RESEARCH REPORT PROJECT State of ~C~O=LO~RA~DO~ Project No. ~W_-=3~7_-~R_-~17~ _ SEGMENT _ Work Plan No. 1 Effects Job No. l4c Measurement Period Covered: Personnel: April 1, 1963 through March Harold M. Swope, William Michael R. Sterling. of Hen Pheasant Harvest of Environmental Factors 31, 1964. E. Jones, William E. Martin, and ABSTRACT Procedural techniques for cover type mapping were developed. Field boundaries for thirty-six sections were transposed from ~erial photographs to scaled graph paper. Time did not permit the field recconnaisance necessary to plot existing cover and compute acreages. Precipitation was much below normal during April and June with near normal moisture in July and August. Rainfall was very erratic between two stations only 22 miles apart. Unseasonably warm fall weather, complemented by late season moisture, resulted in unprecedented wheat growth continuing into December. Some of this wheat was over 14 inches tall when growth ceased. Snowfall was very light in December, January and February, totaling during several small storms, with .42'of an inch of moisture. 8~ inches Vegetative growth in the two study areas appeared to be similar. Stubble heights, however, were found to be lower in the Control area. Much grain was left uncut due to a late killing frost in the Control area, however, which appeared to more than compensate for the shorter stubble from the standpoint of pheasant cover. Stubble mulching was nearly completed in both study areas by May 9. This was exceptionally early and made possible by a warm dry March and April. Mulching or summer-fallowing activity progressed at coinciding rates in the two areas. �-RO- Eight, two-picture photo hubs were established to show year-by-year parisons of vegetative cover conditions in the study areas. com- Recommendations: The time-consuming necessity of contacting landowners in the experimental area considerably curtailed efforts on cover type mapping Emphasis should be placed on this undertaking during the next work segment. Cover type mapping should be completed first in the two intensive townships, after which each tier of sections surrounding the previously mapped area should be covered. This will assure comparable data from the two study areas. Procedures for gathering weather data and measuring vegetative be continued as described in Segment 17 Job Descriptions. vigor should pbjectives: To determine differences in vegetation, precipitation and other environmental factors between the study and control areas. Such differences can be related to pheasant population variations as an aid in interpreting the effects of hen pheasant shooting. Techniques Used: A new procedure for cover type mapping was instigated when good, fairly recent aerial photographs were found to be available in local Soil Conservation Service offices. Detail of each section is transposed from the aerial photo to graph paper, where each small square was equal to 1.6 acres. By visiting the "mapped" section-on the ground the various cover types were rapidly identified and a code description inserted within the proper field boundaries on the graph paper. It was then an office procedure to compute acreages by cover types for each section. Pacing and chaining were held to a minimum, using this procedure. A special form was devised for recording and computing acreages of the several cover types. A sample of this form is included in the appendix. The precipitation gauge order, one for each corner of the two study townships, was not consummated until late summer. Rainfall data therefore had to be obtained from established stations and from two plastic gauges that were put into temporary use. Transects for measuring vegetative vigor were established in two wheat fields at each corner of the study and control townships, with transects extending from the corners into the field at a 450 angle from either field edge. Fifty vegetative height measurements, one pace apart, were made along each transect during the period of vegetative growth. The last measurement was made late in the Summer to record stubble heights, and residual weed growth, following wheat harvest. The direct effects of hail storms were checked by walking out borrow pits, swales and other areas where pheasants tend to concentrate. Dead birds were observed and tallied. The extent, or area covered by the storm, was measured by simply plotting exterior boundaries. Notes on damage to vegetation were taken. �-81- Findings: Cover type mapping. -- Most of the time originally scheduled for cover type mapping was used in making landowner contacts. These contacts were prerequisite to approval to schedule an experimental hen pheasant season. Procedural techniques were developed, however, and field boundaries from thirty-six sections were transposed from aerial photographs to graph paper. The comparative acreages of the various cover types in the two study areas will be reported in the Job Completion Report. Climatic data. -- The town of Holyoke, situated directly between the Experimental and Control areas, lies at 3,745 feet elevation. The average growing season extends from May 9 to October 3, a total of 147 days. In 1963 the last killing frost occurred on May 22, doing considerable damage to wheat which was starting to head out. This damage was especially heavy in the Control area. The first killing frost came on October 28, resulting in a 159 day growing season. The weather continued to be unseasonable warm in the fall. This, coupled with late summer moisture, caused the green wheat to reach heights in December unprecedented in eastern Colorado (according to numerous farmers interviewed, and personal knowledge for the past fifteen years). Figure 2 pictures green wheat north of Holyoke over 14" tall on December 5. Similar situations existed in both the Experimental and Control areas. For the past 28 years prior to 1960, annual snowfall at Holyoke averaged 34.2 inches. During the winter of 1963-1964 (December through February) 8.5 inches of snow were recorded during three light storms and which provided .42 inches of moisture. The influence of precipitation on pheasants may be direct, especially during the nesting season or when chicks are very young, or indirect as it affects vegetative cover. In either case it can cause abrupt population fluctuations and therefore must be reckoned with as a factor in this investigation. As previously explained precipitation gauges were not received in time to record data as originally planned. Temporary measures, however, were instigated and some information obtained. Precipitation, correlated with vegetative vigor, is very likely responsible for most major pheasant population fluctuation differences between the two areas. Precipitation data are listed in Table 1. The average precipitation at Holyoke from 1931 to 1960 was .99 inches in March and 1.91 inches in April. In 1963 this station recorded .58 inches of moisture in March and .23 inches in April. These figures, and Table 1, indicate abnormally dry months in April and June, 1963. Table 1 also points out the erratic precipitation pattern recorded at stations only 22 miles apart. The eight stations currently in operation should furnish additional data on rainfall variation in the area plus information on the general characteristics of each storm (slow and gentle, violent and torrential, presence of hail, etc.). It is believed that when climatic data are related to vegetative growth and fluctuations in pheasant qbundance a correlation will be evident. �Figure 2. -- Unusual late season green wheat growth, Holyoke area, 1963. �-83Table 1. -- Daily and monthly precipitation records for Experimental and Control areas, May through August, 1963, and comparison with 30 year average. Period of Prec ipitation May 15 17 24 26 27 28 30 31 Amount of PreciEitation to Nearest 1L100" Experimental Area Control Area .60 *30 Year Ave. .40 .05 .14 .36 .38 .52 .60 .66 .14 .18 .42 ~ TOTAL 4.08 1.33 3.19 TOTAL .42 .80 3.37 2.62 2.46 June July 4 & 5 9 & 10 11 12 22 27 29 1.30 .17 .10 .38 .08 .90 .12 TOTAL August 4 & 5 6 7 9 17 & 18 31 .18 .38 .40 .03 .18 1.43 .02 3.05 .29 .02 .06 .14 .85 .51 .68 .04 1.45 .44 TOTAL 1.36 3.12 2.00 GRAND TOTAL 8.91 7.87 11.02 * U.S. Weather Bureau Data from Holyoke, 1931-1960. Vegetative growth measurements. -- Sixteen vegetative vigor transects, fifty measurements in each, were established near the four corners of the intensive study townships (Figure 1). Because of the dependence of pheasants upon wheat, which produces the great majority of their food and cover in the area, transects were located in green wheat fields with two exceptions. These exceptions occurred where there were no wheat fields immediately proximate to the northeast corner of the Experimental area so rye fields were selected for transects 7 and 8. Four measurements were made on each �Table 2. -- Average vegetative measurements made on sixteen transects, 1963 growing season. Type of Vegetation Measured Date May 2 May 11 1 AVERAGE HEIGHT GROWTH IN INCHES Experimental Area Transects Control Area Transects 2 3 4 5 6 *7 *8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Green wheat 10.36 13.50 11.66 15 16 7.33 13.05 12.31 14.04 15.84 13.95 12.81 12.37 11.82 10.50 10.43 10.55 12.08 Green wheat 18.64 19.44 23.18 25.90 20.46 20.16 18.82 18.96 18.72 17.70 19.22 15.56 16.50 16.50 14.82 18.50 May 16 Green wheat 22.04 24.02 20.86 20.00 25.82 21.10 31.82 31.04 21.06 20.94 20.60 18.20 18.18 18.76 18.26 21.44 May 25 Green wheat 25.7225.40 Sept.3 Stubble Height Sept.3 Weed Overstory 23.24 20.28 21.20 21.28 39.32 39.96 21.62 24.14 23.48 21.76 20.12 20.42 18.40 21.12 9.03 13.38 12.64 12.26 19.95 35.00 8.25 6.34 10.29 10.26 7.50 7.00 ** 23.40 ** 18.07 6.76 7.05 ** 8.45.17.80 11.28 11.48 12.36 16.83 26.70 29.68 45.20 23.20 26.70 12.20 21.10 * Transects No.7 and 8 were in rye fields. ** Wheat uncut at time of measurement. __ , co. .p-. I �-85- transect during the May growing period. One last measurement was made in September to record stubble height and weed growth where present. Vegetation was measured as it stood in the field, not straightened up and measured. In two instances the drooping of plants resulted in a reduction in height from preceding measurements. The average vegetative heights for each transect are g Lve n in Table 2. Period of stubble mulching. -- The turning under (mulching) of small grain stubble is a spring season operation that usually coincides with the pheasant nesting period. It results in widespread nest destruction and some hen mortality. During excessively wet springs farmers are delayed in turning the stubble and pheasants benefit immensely. Since the period of stubble mulching has such a profound effect upon pheasant populations, transects were set up in both study areas to plot the progress of stubble discing. There was found to be very little variation in the progress of stubble mulching between the two study areas, as evidenced in Table 3. The fact that nearly all stubble mulching was completed prior to the peak of pheasant nest establishments should be favorable to nesting success. Table 3. -- Seasonal progress areas, 1963. of stubble mulching, Experimental and Control Percent Stubble Mulching Completed By April 25 - 26 Percent Stubble Mulching Completed By May 9 Experimenta 1 85% 98% Control 84% 96% Study Area Photo hubs. -- Eight photo hubs were established to illustrate vegetative vigor, and pictorially show cover conditions during the hunting season. Two photos were taken from each hub, one looking across green wheat and the other towards wheat stubble. If the normal crop rotation plan is followed the fields should be in reverse stages of wheat -production next year. Photo hub locations are shown in Figure 1. One of the main purposes for instigating these photo hubs was to allow graphic comparison each hunting season between the quality of the cover available to pheasants. This plays a major role in determining the success of hunter harvest. Figure 3 illustrates a cover condition that complicates the hunter harvest of pheasants. Prepared by: Harold M. Swope Date: April Printed F'ebruarv. 1964 19f,,) Approved by: Wayne W. Sand fort Game Research Chief �Figure 3. -- Cover that made pheasant December, 1963. hunting difficult, Sand Draw area, �-87- JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO Project No. W-37 -R-17 Work Plan No. 1 Effects of Hen Pheasant Harvest Job No. 14<1 Population Studies Period Covered: Personnel: April 1, 1963 to March 31, 1964. Wm. E. Jones, Wm. E. Martin, Michael R. Sterling, Harold M. Swope. ABSTRACT Pheasant population surveys were made in the experimental and control study areas. These included: (1) Crowing counts, (2) spring roadsIde harem counts, (3) individual crowing rooster observations, (4) roadside brood counts, and (5) mortality investigations. The crowing index was slightly higher in the experimental area (48.07) as compared with the control area (45.00). Spring harem counts yielded the following data: Experimental area -- 1.72 hens per cock, 1.69 birds observed per mile traveled, and .54 birds observed per minute and counted. Control area -- 1.69 hens per cock, 1.68 birds observed per mile, and .54 birds observed per minute. Individual rooster observations brought out the fact that crowing intensity is indirectly proportionate to the number of hens with the cock. An average interval of slightly over two minutes elapsed between the calls of single males. This interval increased to over five and one-half minutes when more than two hens accompanied the cock. There were 4.17 young per hen observed during brood counts in the experimental area as compared with 3.65 young per hen in the control area. The high, dense weed growth reduced birds observed per mile driven and birds observed per minute counted in the control area far below comparable figures for the experimental area. The peak of hatch in both areas came during the first two weeks in June. This was based on 210 brood observations. �-88- Compilation of population data showed ph~asant populations were eight percent greater in the spring and 16 percent greater in the fall in the experimental area as compared with the control area. One hail storm, covering about three square miles, was investigated control area. Fifty dead pheasants were found. No other condition to cause differential mortality between the two areas. in the was known Recommendations: Pheasant population surveys proceeded smoothly, on schedule, and it is recommended that current procedures be continued in most instances. Some interesting information was obtained from individual crowing rooster observations, but the value of continuing these is dubious. Sex ratios appear to play a determining role in the crowing frequency of an individual rooster but it is very unlikely that a distinct sex ratio differentation between the two study areas will be encountered. Winter snow conditions were unsuitable for sex ratio counts and population surveys. Although no heavy snows occurred during the period of this study, attempts to make these counts during following winters should be continued. Uncut grain in the control area made pheasant production inventories extremely difficult. More reliance should perhaps be placed on comparative crowing indexes than that which can be given to bird-per-mile figures resulting from brood counts. Objectives: (1) (2) (3) To determine pre-treatment pheasant population levels within. the study areas. To determine changes in pheasant populations follOWing hen pheasant shooting. To determine causes of pheasant mortality from causes other than hunting. Techniques Used: The Kimball crowing-count method, as revised in Colorado in 1953, was used on three ten-stop routes in each study area. The location of these routes is ShOWll in Figure 1, contained under the completion report for Job l4c, this publication. Following each crowing count a random roadside harem survey was made to determine spring sex ratios. Birds were flushed and counted when observation uncertainties indicated this should be done. Harem counts were made until vegetative growth rendered observations too difficult for accuracy. Individual rooster observations were made on mornings that excessive crowing counts could not be effectively made because of wind and after harem surveys were completed. Roosters were observed from as far away as circumstances permitted with binoculars and a spotting scope. Data recorded may be seen on the form developed for this purpose. The Colorado method of making roadside brood counts was employed during production inventories. The crow-count routes were used in each study area but additional routes were run in an effort to obtain a larger sample, particularly �-89- on the experimental area. Attempts were made to flush all birds if total numbers were in doubt. An estimated age was recorded for each clearly observed brood. Special efforts were made to observe and record broodless hens. Pheasant population indices were computed for the experimental and control areas by applying the formula p =C + CH for spring populations and P = C + CH + CHY to derive fall indices. In these formulas C r e Lat.es to the average cock calls per two minute period, H is the average number of hens per cock derived from sex ratio counts and Y is the average number of young observed per hen. Only one hail storm of any consequence occurred. The small area affected was searched on foot and the observed pheasant loss recorded. Findings: Crowing Counts. -- Based on crowing-count indices pheasant populations were less than ten percent greater in the experimental area than in the control area during the spring of 1963. This differential was due to heavy pheasant concentrations in the east portion of the experimental area. Pheasant abundance decreased from east to west in that area. Pheasants appeared to be spread more evenly over the control area. Crowing indices were 14 percent higher in the control township than for the experimental township. All usable crowing count indices are arranged by date and area in Table 4. Spring Harem Counts (Sex Ratio). -- Spring harem counts were made in both study areas in April--prior to the time vegetative growth obscured observations. Sex ratios, birds seen per mile and birds observed per minute were quite similar as indicated in Table 5. Individual Rooster Observations. -- Observations were made on individual crowing roosters to evaluate the effect of various sex ratios on crowing frequency. The number of hens in a rooster's harem very definitely had an effect on the interval between calls. Sex ratios were found to be nearly the same in the two study areas so this does not appear to be an important consideration at this time. However, if sex ratios vary greatly as a result of shooting hens this factor will have, to be weighted when analyzing crowing count data. The crowing interval for a rooster with no hens was observed to be 2:05 minutes. The lapse between calls was 71 percent longer when one hen was with the rooster, twice as long when two hens accompanied him and 167 percent longer when more than two hens were present. These data may be seen in Table 6. As previously explained, in the section on "Techniques," the individual rooster observations were made following the regular crowing counts and on windy mornings when crowing routes could not be run. These counts, made �-90Table 4. -- Crowing count indices and counting dates for six study area routes, 1963. Crowing Count Indices Date of Experimental Area Control Area Count West Township East West Township East April 13 15 23 24 25 26 28 May 1 3 8 9 13 16 17 21 22 26 27 28 29 30 June 4 11 13 30.4 26.3 33.6 36.9 20.2 43.6 39.6 31.3 49.1 33.2 31.0 49.9 22.5 31.4 34.4 26.4 58.4 37.4 34.4 43.7 37.4 41.3 28.8 33.9 30.8 40.8 Average}) 38.0 43.3 TOTAL AVERAGE 48.07 1/ 42.2 62.9 42.2 50.8 42.0 45.00 Based on the highest count for each station. Table 5. -- Spring harem count data from experimental and control areas, 1963. Comparisons Experimental Area Control Area Cocks observed Hens observed Total observations HenS/Cocks Miles Driven Birds observed/Mile Minutes counted Birds/Minute 319 550 869 1.72 515.8 1.69 1620 .54 140 236 376 1.69 223.9 1.68 697 .54 �-91- under less than optimum conditions (windy and "late" in the morning), probably reflect a reduced crowing frequency; however, interval differentials resulting from varying sex ratios should not be influenced. Table 6. -- Observed pheasant crowing intervals related to number of hens with the calling rooster. No. of Hens with No. of Observations Interval Between Calling Rooster Made Call (Min. & Sec.) o 77 34 45 27 1 2 Mpre than 2 2:05 3:33 4:11 5:33 Brood Counts. -- Seventy-five usable brood counts were made from July 20 to September 4. Emphasis was placed on the two interior township routes where nine experimental area and ten control area counts were made. Data from these counts reflect the relative difficulty in locating birds in the control area (due to the rank weed growth) but the young per hen figures of 3.89 (experimental township) and 3.79 (control township) were not far apart. Five additional counts were made on each "east" and "west" route in both areas. In most instances, as shown in Table 7, more birds were observed per mile and per minute in the experimental area. The young per hen figure was also higher in that area. Table 7. -- Pheasant production data, experimental and control areas, comparable counts, ~963. No. of Hen!! Young Total Young Birds Birds Route Counts Index Birds Birds Per Hen Per Mile Per Min. Exp. Township East Exp. West Exp. Total Exp. 9 5 5 19 62 56 49 167 241 214 241 696 343 307 326 976 3.89 3.82 4.92 4.17 1.62 2.75 2.79 2.22 .43 .67 .71 .57 Control Township East Control West Control Total Control 10 5 5 20 33 20 59 112 125 79 205 409 168 105 297 570 3.79 3.95 3.47 3.65 .76 .83 2.59 1.23 .21 .23 .65 .35 1/ Total broods plus brood less hens. �-92- Additional routes were established and brood counts made in the experimental area in an effort to calculate the total number of hens (to be used as a base for issuing hunting permits). Another method was later used to estimate hen numbers so these counts merely furnished supplemental production data. Four established management census routes (two in each area) were also run, giving an even Largnr sample. The compilation of all useable production data results in the totals found in Table 8. Table 8. -- Pheasant production data, experimental and control areas, all routes, 1963. No. of Hen Young Total Young Birds Birds Area Counts Index Birds Birds Per Hen Per Mile Per Minute Experimental 50 510 2110 3086 4.14 2.26 .58 Control 25 142 542 742 1.20 3.82 .33 The estimated age of each brood was recorded. By projecting brood ages back from the time counts were made hatching dates were obtained. As shown in Figure 4 the peak of hatch occurred the first week in June. Pheasant hatching patterns in the two areas were very similar. Determining Population Changes. -- Using the formulas p = C + CR and P = C + CR + CRY the spring and fall pheasant population indices were calculated for the two study areas. These computations are listed in Table 9. Table 9. -- Spring and fall pheasant population indices in the experimental and control areas 1963. Average Number 1/ Young Spring Fall Percent Crowing of Hens_ Per Population Population Difference~/ Study Area Index Per Cock Hen Indices Indices Spring Fall Experimental Township 1. 72 43.3 3.89 117.78 407.51 -14 -11 East 1. 72 62.9 171.09 3.82 584.38 +34 +32 West 1. 72 38.0 4.92 103.36 424.93 - 9 +15 Total Exp. 1. 72 48.1 4.17' 130.83 475.81 + 8 +16 Control Township East West Total Control 50.8 42.0 42.2 45.0 1. 69 1.69 1.69 1.69 3.79 3.95 3.47 3.65 1/ Not separated by areas. 2/ Compared with corresponding area. 136.65 112.98 113.52 121.05 462.02 393.35 361.00 + 9 398.63 - 8 +14 -34 +11 -32 -15 -16 �30 EXPERIMENTAL AREA 25 CONTROL 0 W AREA I ~ « 20 ~ I I I (/) 0 0 tr? rn u, 0 0::: I I 15 ' I ' " ' ' ' / -. \ \ I I \ \ / I I \ \ / / I \ \ \ \ ~ \ / 10 I ro z '" I I W ~ I I / I I I \ ' I •' / I 5 I ~I I I ' ' '' ' , ' I ••• _--- --- , I I fI' ~ ~ JUNE MAY APPROXIMATE Figure 4. Weekly hatching dates of pheasant WEEKLY broods, AUG. JULY PERIOD experimental OF and control HATCH areas, 1963. �-93- The preceding data, compared with similar post hen harvest information, was expected to indicate any changes in pheasant populations as the result of shooting hens. With the cancellation of the experimental hen season no such data comparison is possible. Mortality Determination. -- One hail storm covering a very small area south of Paoli on July 16, was the only known occurrence casuing pheasant loss not common to both study areas. Fifty dead pheasants were found in a tract (approximately three square miles in size) on the eastern edge of the control area. This mortality was so limited in scope that no population decline could be detected during subsequent brood counts. As previously mentioned winter storms were so few and so mild that birds were not concentrated and exposed. Had severe winter storms occurred the high protective weed cover in the control area would probably have resulted in increased bird survival. This cover differential may have been a factor in over-winter mortality even though severe weather was not encountered. Prepared by: Harold M. Swope Principal Game Biologist Date: April, 1964 Printed February, 1965 Approved by: Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief ��-95- JOB COMPLETION RESEARCH State of COLORADO .Project No. W-37-R-17 Work Plan No. Formulation Period Covered: September SEGMENT 14e Job No. 1 Title of Job: Personnel: PROJECT REPORT of Hunting Regulations 1, 1963 to March Norman L. Hughes, Swope and Harvest Survey 31, 1964. Wayne W. Sandfort, Francis L. Waugh, Harold M. ABSTRACT Based on crowing count, sex ratio, and brood count data it was calculated that 4,000 hen permits should be issued in the experimental season. This figure was thought to approximate 15 percent ~f the total hen population in the experimental area. A special hen permit was devised for issuance to each hunter upon request. These permits were designed to be adaptable to all special bird seasons with dates to be stamped on. Twenty thousand permits were printed. Hunting season regulations were developed, and passed by the Commission, to allow 4,000 hen permits to be issued at established checking stations during the first weekend of the season. To shoot a hen, hunters were required to obtain a permit and report back to a checking station following the hunt. Aerial transects covering 174 square miles in each of the two study areas were flown during the opening two days of hunting season to obtain relative hunting pressure. The two-day average showed 573 hunters on the experimental area transect and 585 hunters on the control area transect. Land posting surveys were run during the season in the experimental area. These revealed that 72 percent of the land was unposted, 22 percent posted hunting with permission and 6 percent posted no hunting or trespassing. Numerous public contacts were made in an effort to implement the hen season. These included 237 individual, recorded, land-owner contacts and several public meetings. Letters and news releases were also written and data were compiled and summarized for presentation to the Game, Fish and Parks Commission. �As the result of political on October 24, 1963. pressures the experimental hen season was repealed Recommendations: It is strongly recolrnnended that this season be held in much the same manner as proposed for 1963. The number of hen permits should vary with fluctuations in pheasant populations and may have to be greatly reduced at first to gain public acceptance. A proposed program for implementing an experimental pheasant season in northeastern Colorado was submitted to Game Research Chief Sandfort for presentation to the Game, Fish, and Parks Commission. The ten steps in this recommendation procedure were: 1. Meeting of higher echelon Staff Personnel (Denver and Fort Collins) for complete unanimity and understanding of individual responsibilities. Here, at the very beginning, administrators must recognize that this investigation has been directed by Department policy and that appropriate steps must be taken to impress upon all personnel the necessity for complete support. 2. Meeting of all Northeast Region personnel with Director Woodward "spelling out" the importance of the study and making it very clear that non-support will not be tolerated. (If we don't possess the organizational discipline to require all employe~ support Department policy, we might as well save time, effort and money and stop right here.) A target date should be established. 3. Meeting of Research and I & E personnel to plan the public relations approach (news releases, selling tactics, strategy). At this meeting one central authority should be designated (Wayne Sandfort) to deal with all questions and problems and to clear all news releases. (This might prevent some well-meaning individual from putting his foot in the proverbial mouth.) 4. Action at this point will hinge upon decisions made at the meeting (Step 3), but as I see it now the I & E people should be responsible for an intensive news campaign (press releases, radio and television programs, magazine articles, etc.) with information furnished them by Research. In my opinion this should be a long term (starting as soon as possible), continuous, repetitive program hammering on the experimental' theme, what other states have found, wise use of the resource, females of other species not protected, etc. We now have material available for a real propaganda deluge. 5. All Department personnel should be kept informed of the program by receiving copies of written material but personnel directly affected (WCOs, WCAs, Area Supervisors in major pheasant areas) should be called in for a training session covering all pertinent information, selling points, question answering, etc. This training session should be the primary responsibility of Research __ with assistance from I & E. �-97- 6. Community leaders, and other "key" persons will be contacted individually by the local WCO, a Representative from Research and one from I & E, if feasible. Every attempt should be made to enlist the support of these individuals for the experimental hen pheasant season. 7. Trainees (Step 5) will schedule programs with service clubs, farm organizations, church and school groups, Chamber of Commerce's, sportmen's clubs, etc., to thoroughly explain the proposed experimental hen hunt. Research personnel will assist in this program work as requested. Top level administrators (Woodward, Elliott, Riordan, Sandfort) should make appearances to support this study at special meetings where large numbers of influential persons may be present. In my op~n~on we should avoid special meetings called solely for the purpose of protesting a hen season. At this stage no specific proposals (season dates) will have been made. Our function is purely informative -- not argumentative. 8. Research personnel will continue to inform landowners, and other people in the proximity of the experimental area, as they are contacted during the normal course of the investigation. 9. When the educational "softening Uplf phase of "Project Soft Selln has progressed to the point where sufficient support is assured, a recommendation for the experimental hen pheasant hunt will be made to the Commission (specific dates, perm~t numbers, etc.). 10. Following the announcement of the experimental hunt, all personnel should be on constant alert for any "unrest among the natives". There should be a three-man team (representing management, research and I & E) ready to put down any local last minute uprisings. There are obviously details that can be worked out only after the situations arise. Selling this project offers a real challenge to every member of the Department. It is a timely opportunity to discard our petty "divisional differences" and unite with a common purpose. If we are united, informed and persistent, the task won't be insurmountable. Objectives: (1) (2) (3) To establish the exact number of hen permits to be issued within the experimental area and to issue these permits. To submit recommendations for the general hunting regulations within the experimental and control areas, including bag limits, length of season and shooting hours. To collect harvest data on hens and cocks from hunters within the study areas. Techniques Used: The number of hen permits to be issued was based on conservative estimates of the number of hen pheasants in the experimental area as derived from population surveys. These surveys were described in the job completion report covering Work Plan 1, Job l4d, this publication. �-98- Several meetings were held with research and management personnel to assemble and discuss ideas for devising a special hen pheasant permit and to develop concise, enforceable regulations covering the experimental hunt. Plans for the intensive collection of harvest data were withdrawn after the collapse of the special season 16 days before it was scheduled. Aerial transects were run as planned, however, to obtain information on relative hunting pressure in the two areas. Eighty-seven miles of linear transects were flown in each area and all cars were counted in an area one mile each side of the airplanes line of travel. TI1is gave 174 square miles of coverage in each area. Cars were recorded spearately depending on whether they were parked at farm houses, away from farm houses, or moving. The number of occupied houses was also recorded to give some idea of the resident cars not necessarily representing a hunting party. The number of hunters per car was obtained from Fleming check station data. From the furor over the proposal to shoot hen pheasants, claims evolved that nearly 100 percent of the experimental area would be closed to all public hunting. Since much of this posting had reportedly been accomplished before cancellation of the season, transects were run to record the incidence of posting. The three crowing count routes, established for their representation of the entire area, were used in the posting survey. Linear miles of fields on both sides of the roads were carefully measured by car speedometers and recorded as posted ("no hunting or trespassing!! or "hunting by permission") or unposted. Findings: Number of Hen Permits to Issue. -- This was a problem that necessitated estimating total pheasant population in the 500 square mile Experimental area, a precarious bit of neck-stretching that we have always avoided. The logical starting point was the index to roosters obtained from crowing counts. This index was slightly over 48. Based on listening observations and similar data from other states, it was assumed that crowing roosters are heard for an average distance of one mile, and that the crowing interval is two minutes (even though it appears to be longer than two minutes). To be conservative each section was assumed to house ten roosters in the spring. Winter sex ratios, made in the area by wildlife conservation officers, indicated sex ratios averaging over four hens per cock. Again we conservatively dropped the sex ratio to two hens per cock, based more nearly on the spring harem sex ratio counts. Late summer production surveys placed the number of young per hen at slightly over four. Using the data summarized above the following computations were made: 5,000 10,000 40,000 10,000 20,000 cocks hens young adult hens young hens 30,000 Total hens in Area (10 cocks per square mile x 500 square miles) (2 hens per cock) (10,000 hens x 4 young per hen) (assume young to be half male, half female) (fall population) �-99- To compensate for spring and summer hen mortality, and the probable failure to see many of the broodless hens, the number of requested hen permits was dropped to 4,000. This information was presented to the Commission, along with recommendations for 4,000 hen permits. This permit request was unanimously approv2d at their September, 1963, meeting. A cross check on population estimates was made by referring to the Colorado Samll Game Hunter Harvest Survey (Grieb and Hunter 1962). Their random sample hunter questionnaire places the average number of cock pheasants annually shot in Phillips and Sedgwich Counties to be 23,000 (last seven year average). Over half of the land area in these two counties lies within the experimental area. Thirteen years of checking hunters at Crook and Fleming leads one to believe that the majority of pheasants taken by hunters in these counties comes from the area set up for the hen harvest experiment. In a 1954 study Sandfort calculated that approximately 45 percent of the rooster pheasant population was being harvested in the Fleming area. Assuming that 12,000 pheasants are legally taken each year in the experimental area the total cock population must be around 27,000. If fall sex ratios were one cock to one hen there should be approximately 27,000 hens in the area, based on average harvest figures. The 4,000 hen permit recommendation was thought to be a conservative figure representing less than 15 percent of the total hen pheasant population. Development of the Special Permit. -- From meetings held. with management and research personnel, it was decided that the special permit should be designed to adapt to any game bird species. This was accomplished and 20,000 of the permits were printed. An example of the permit is shown in Figure 5. The three detachable coupons were incorporated in the event that more than one bird of a particular species was to be allowed. A copy of each permit issued remains in the license book. For the special hen pheasant season, two of the coupons were removed and a string inserted on the remaining one for attachment to the hen carcass following kill. Special changeable date stamps were made to identify the permit and to specify the date. Hunting Season Regulation. -- A regulation was written following several meetings with the management personnel, who were to enforce the stipulations of the special hen season. It was approved by the Colorado Game, Fish, and Parks Commission on the 6th day of Sept ember , 1963. The provisions of this regulation appeared in a 1963 upland game season information leaflet, Figure 6. The mechanics of issuing permits and collecting harvest data at the four check stations were carefully worked out. A special punch system was devised for identifying each issuing station to facilitate record handling when hunters entered one station and exited another. Each permittee was to be given a brief written explanation of the experimental season and a questionnaire asking for information pertinent to the study. Hunter Pressure. -- Upon cancellation of the special season by the Game, Fish, and Parks Corrunissionon October 24, 1963, plans to operate the four checking stations were withdrawn. Looking to the future it was decided that �-100- the aerial hunter pressure surveys should be carried out as planned. One hundred seventy-four square miles were covered, in each area to ascertain relative hunting pressures in the manner previously described. On Saturday, opening day of the pheasant season, flights were made between noon and 2:00 p.m. One hundred ninety-seven cars were counted in the experimental area and 199 in the control area. On Sunday (second day) 185 cars were observed in the experimental area and 191 in the control area. During the same flights the number of occupied farm houses were tabulated to get some idea of "resident" cars. There were 108 of these houses in the experimental area, 111 in the control area. For many years pheasant hunters checked at Fleming have averaged about three per car. Hypothetically then there were approximately 573 hunters on the ~xperimenta1 area transect as compared with 585 hunters on the control area transect. Some of the cars surely belonged to non-hunters so total numbers of hunters were not projected but data certainly indicated that hunting pressure was similar in both areas. These data are contained in Table 10. Table 10. -- Aerial transect car-count data and relative hunting pressure, experimental and control areas, Nov. 9 and 10, 1963. Number Experimental Control 71 92 34 82 83 34 197 591 199 597 Cars parked at farm houses Cars parked away from farm houses Moving cars Total cars observed 88 65 32 185 107 54 30 191 Projected 555 573 Comparisons Saturday, Cars parked at farm houses Cars parked away from farm houses Moving cars November 9 Total cars observed Projected number of huntersll Saturday, number of hunters!1 November 10 11 Total number of cars observed on each 174 square mile transect times three hunters per car (calculated from known number per car checked through the Fleming Station). This is only a.comparative figure, for the number of cars not belonging to hunters is unknown. Land Posting Surveys. - The cancellation of the season was forced by testimony that land in North-eastern Colorado would be almost 100 percent closed to pheasant hunting if the hen season was allowed. Allegedly this land posting was in process weeks before the season -- with much of it being completed prior to the date the season was repealed. �STAre ........",... III DEPARTMENT OF GAME, FISH AND PARKS OF COLORADO THIS CERTIFIES THAT a a SMALL GAME LICENSE NO. Z I- 15 Z la I- i •• ... s III 0 :i HAS BEEN ISSUED IMEN PHEASANT PERMIT NOV GOOD ONLY -~ 9 - 1.0 1@S8 '" f2 "..:f: .•. ~ l,", .- DATE ::-~ COLORADO GAME, FISH & PARKS COMMISSION DIRECTOR 4*'~ OF GAME, FISH z: <r:: o» <:t: uJ' & PARKS ... IU ••• IU CITY t ISSUED BY IU COLORADO GAME, FISH & PARKS COMMISSION DIREcTOR J: lIJ< ~ «w z~ l!)o ~ «w z~ l!)o .. Il:~ ~ «w z~ l!)O in ~ I in ~ I in" .. 0 Il:~ bOOl( DATE GAME, FISH & PARKS BIRD MUST BE TAKEN IN DESIGNATED AREA IN COM,.LlANCE WITH COMMISSION REGULATION. Special permit J: lIJ< C1!,lVSE; ~ O} primarily designed for the 1002 N~.~ Experimental Hen '" 0 ... J: 0 kR~ III c ;;; lIJ~ 0::< =rst: IN LI !: :E iI- ...0 E/F;7'A r",,_ z ...•• c '";;; COPy HAS BEEN ISSUED la I~ OF I- 15 I 0 Z SMALL GAME LICENSE NO . III Z i£. 1002 « 0 DEPARTMENT OF GAME, FISH AND PARKS THIS CERTIFIES THAT C = I s ~~Ih II. No. C> ~ ~ ... lIJ Z 0 ; ISSUED BY a ..--I 0 ;;; C:\ 1C\l 0 -::I: 0) STATE OF COLORADO 5. s ('tl W' BIRD MUST BE TAKEN IN DESIGNATED AREA IN COMPLIANCE WITH COMMISSION REGULATION. Figure om Z CITY AND STATE III I- ..." «>- lIJ~ 0 OF III '" •• z 0 M , III II. giN IN Pheasant Season. 0 .. \!) Vi �1963 COLORADO Quail Pheasant Chukar Grouse Turkey SEASON INFORMATION PHEASANT DATE BAG and POSSESSION AREA HOURS WEAPONS LICENSE Sunrise to Sunset Shotguns Only 1963 Colorado Small Game General Open Seasons 1. Noon Nov. 2. 9-17 Noon Nov. 9Dec. 22 Statewide. Weld County east of State 21, Logan, Sedgwick and Phillips counties, Yuma County north Bag 3 Poss. 6 of U. S. 36, Washington County north of U. S. 36 and east of State 71; Morgan County east of State 71. 3. Noon Nov. 9Dec. I All 4. Noon Nov. 9Dee. 8 Yuma County south of U. S. 36, Washington County east of State 59 and Kit Carson County east of State 59. of Otero, Crowley, Kiowa, Prowers, (Cocks only except as noted under "Specia I Experimental Hen Pheasant Season'") Bent and Baca counties. license Post Seasons 1. Dec. 7, 8 2. Elbert County north of U. S. 24; Weld County west of State 21; Morgan County west of State 71; lincoln County west of State 71 and north of U. S. 24; Washington County west of State 71; and all of larimer, Boulder, Denver, Douglas, Jefferson, Arapahoe and Adams counties. Dee. 14, 15,16 All of Mesa, Delta, Ouray Valley, and Montrose pahgre Plateau. counties, County Special Bag I Poss.3 San Luis Experimental Hen I. 2. 3. 4. Pheasant Season limit general son. for the open sea- License All persons obtaining a permit during the 2 day season must return the permit at one of the four check stations on leaving the area. All permits must be returned to be located at: the check stations by 6 p.m., Nov. 10. It shall be illegal on U. S. 385 on State 59. to have a hen pheasant permit in possession outside the special experimental area or after 6 p.m. November 10. Permit may be obtained at check stations from 8 e.m. to sunset on Nov. 9, and from one hour before sunrise to one hour before sunset on November 10. Persons applying for permit must have in possession a valid 1963 small game hunting license. If all permits A total of 4000 permits shall be issued during cial Experimental Hen Pheasant Season. One-half mile south of Sedgwick permits are not taken the first day, hunters may 10 as long as the are available. Than his own Regulations Transportation: No game birds or waterfowl taken during any open season or on any regu· ler Colorado small game and fish license shall be transported or shipped within or out of the state unless accompanied by the owner thereof with license in possession, subject TO the conditions and restrictions specified in this section. 1. No person shall transport in or out of the state any game birds and waterfowl other legally taken the Spe- limit. 2. Tranaportation of game birds and waterfowl season Therefor and for seven days thereafter. 3. All cut-of-stere trensportetion licenses must be accompanied of the Game, Fish and Parks shall be lawful only during 0- EXPERD!ENTAL HEN SEASON HUNTING REGULATION, the open of game birds and warerfcwl by holders of restdeot by a transportation permit to be obtained from an officer Department. continued FIGURE 6 1963 Colorado Small Game Shotguns Only Sunrise to Sunset Only one permit per day will be issued to each person and those applying for a permit must appear in person at one of the four check stations. obtain a second permit on November Important a bag North edge of Haxtun on State 59 North edge of Holyoke on U. S. 385 One mile south of Julesburg 15, without One hen pheasant per permit in addition to the daily Special Information: Hunters taking part in the Special Experimental Hen Pheasant Season must stop at one of the four check stations in the area and obtain a permit which will be given out on a first come, first served basis. Check stations will under hunting license. east of Uncom- Part of Sedgwick County south of the South Platte River and east of State 59. Part of Phillips County north of U. S. 6 and east of State 59. Noon, Nov. 9-10 Children 1963. on other side �-102- Near complete land closure would have reduced hen harvest to almost nothing and nullified the study. To ascertain just how serious this threat was, and to use as a base for future comparisons, the three experimental area crowing count transects were covered to obtain a sample of the incidence of land posting. Random roadside surveys were also made as a check on the accuracy of the transect data. It is an understatement to say that the land closure which was promised was exaggerated. Posting did not appear to be more common than in previous years. No recorded data, however, are available for comparison. The results of posting surveys are given in Table 11. Table 11. -- Land closure Data Collected Established Random by Transects Checks by posting, Experimental Area, 1963. Miles Percent Percent Posted Percent Posted of Not (Hunting (No Hunting Roadside Posted With Permission) or Trespassing2 137.6 157.6 73% 71% 23% 21% 4% 8% Public Contacts to Explain Hen Season. -- From the time that an experimental hen pheasant season in Colorado was first discussed it was recognized that this would be a controversial subject, with much opposing sentiment likely. It was felt that the support of the landotmers on whose land the special hen season would be held was the primary consideration. This support was also necessary to secure Commission approval to hold such a season. It was hoped that every landowner in the experimental area could be contacted. These interviews were sandwiched in between other data gathering activities and were so time consuming that only about 70 percent, or 237, of the landowners were reached. Each contact required an average of one and a half to two hours but the results were very rewarding. As expected the first reaction to mention of a hen season was quite often not favorable. The landowner was was given a chance to express his feelings, and then the "whys and hows" of our proposed study were explained to him. A contact form was filled out for each landowner listing his name, date of contact, acreage controlled and comments regarding the proposed hen harve&t experiment. These were tabulated and disclosed that 79 percent of the landowners contacted expressed no opposition to the study. Twenty-one percent of them were opposed. Several public meetings were held, though these were avoided in most instances in favor of individual contacts. On April 23, 1963, the study was explained in detail to about 40 members of the Holyoke Chamber of Commerce. They voted unanimously to support the Department on this project. On July 9 and 10, 1963, meetings of Department personnel were held in Holyoke. Through a mistake in a local newspaper article the public was invited on July 10 to come in and protest the hen season. Only a small group attended and for the most part appeared to be pretty well satisfied with our explanations. �-103- Also included in the appendix are copies of two typical letters written attempting to squelch opposition and gain support for the study. An explanatory news release prepared by Wayne Sandfort, Fran Waugh and Harold Swope is in the appendix along with material presented to the Game, Fish and Parks Commission to obtain approval for the hen season. Recognition should be made of the assistance given research personnel by Francis L. Waugh, Information Representative for the Northeast Region, in numerous activities pertaining to this project. All progressed smoothly until the season was suddenly made a political issue near the latter part of September. Republican precinct captains were assigned the task of contacting constituents to put pressure on legislators to see that the season was cancelled. Pressure became too great and the special hen season was repealed on October 24, 1963. Approved by: Wayne W. Sandfort Prepared by: _-=H~a:.::r...:o...:l:.:d:....:;M:..:.--=S...:;w...:o...!:..p...:e:....__ Chief Game Research Date: April, 1964 ----------~~--~-------------- Printed February, 1965 ��-105- JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO Project No. W-37-R-17 ~~~~~---------- Work Plan No. 1 Effects of Hen Pheasant Harvest Job No. l4f Analysis of Data and Interpretation of the Results Period Covered: Personnel: January 1, 1964 to May 1, 1964. Dave Bowden and Harold M. Swope Recommendations: Techniques and sample sizes should be revised as recommended in the biometrician's analyses report. Objectives: To evaluate data obtained under all preceding sub-jobs under Job 14, particularly that obtained under sub-Jobs l4c, l4d, a~d l4e, and determination of the effects of removal of a given proportion of the hens from a pheasant population. Techniques Used: With the failure to obtain the experimental season necessary for hen removal there was no basis for comparisons. Findings: With the repeal of the experimental hen season it was impossible to obtain post hen season data for comparison with existing population data. With only the one set of data available there can be no interpretation of results. The preseason population data has been discussed with statistician Dave Bowden and plans call for a statistical evaluation to analyze census techniques and sample sizes used. From these analyses we hope to learn what reliability can be placed on current methods of detecting pheasant population changes and to receive recommendations for improving presently used techniques. Prepared by: Harold M. Swope Associate Wildlife Researcher Date: April, 1964 f> jntod Fobruar 1965 Approved by: Wayne W. Sandfort Chief Game Research ��-107COVER TYPE MAPPING FORM Appendix A County ---------------- Range _________ , Section Townsh Lp Date Recorder CROP TYPES Green Wheat or Other Cereal Grain Fa llow Wheat or Other Cereal Grain Corn Sorghums Pasture PLowed Misc. Total Cultivated and Pasture CULTURAL FEATURES Farm Houses and Lots Occupied , Unoccupied Towns Cemeteries Highways Railroads Misc. Total Cultural Developments HILD AREAS AND SPECIAL COVERTS Tree Plantings ( ) rating Draws and Other Low Areas Rights of Way Fence Rows (Linear miles Edge Cover (Linear miles Misc. Total Special Coverts TOTAL ACREAGE Remarks ) ) Acres _ �-108PRECIPITATION RECORD Location of Station: T , R , Sec. Recorder's Name _ Address Date t'reCl.pl.tatlon Received Amount lfece~ved (To Nearest 1/100") 70rm Or 7pt . (Snow, Rain, Hail) Lengfli 6I 7erl.o<I Ppt. Received �-109VEGETATIVE MEASUREMENTS Location of Transect: T_, R:...-__ , Sec. _ Transect if! Measurement Taken By Date Transect Read _ _ ---------------------------------------------------------- Type of Vegetation Measured _ P pt. since last measurements _ l. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 1.l. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. Height growth measurements (nearest -kit as plant stands) l. 26. 26. 27. 2. 27. 28. 3. 28. 29. 4. 29. 30. 5. 30. 3l. 3l. 6. 32. 7. 32. 33. 8. 33. 34. 9. 34. 35. 10. 35. 36. 11. 36. 37. 12. 37. 38. 13. 38. 39. 14. 39,. 40. 15. 40. 4l. 4l. 16. 42. 17. 42. 43. 18. 43. 44. 19. l~4. 45. 20. 45. 46. 2l. 46. 47. 22. 47. 48. 23. 48. 49. 24. 49. 50. 25. 50. Total Inches Total Inches Average Height Average Height �-110- Appendix B PHEASANT CROWING COUNT FORM Observer (5) Date Name of Route County(ies) ---------------------Time Started Time Finished~--------------------------Total time for count (minutes) Local Official Sunrise A M --~~---------------------------------------- ----------....; . . _ Weather Data at Start of Count: Temperature ; Percent cloud cover Wind (m.p.h.) , & Direction ------ ----- Heather Data at End of Count: Temperature ; Percent cloud Cover Wind (m.p.h.) , & Direction _ ---- Precipitation During count: Stat i on Number Num b er of cock calls (per two-minute period) 1 2 3 Misc. remarks (interfering noises, etc.) 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Total Number of Ca1ls ================== Average Number Ca1ls per sta. ==================== Mourning Doves Observed Quail observed ---, _ Cottontail Rabbits Obse-r-v-e~d------------Miscellaneous Comments (General counting conditions, other) ~-----------------------------------------------------------------General Instructions for Making Crowing Counts:----------------------------------------1. Make counts on established routes and at established stations. 2. Conduct one count during each of the following periods: April 20-30, May 1-15, May 16-31, and June 1-10. 3. During each count be at the first station on the route 60 minutes before official sunrise time for the morning the count is being made. Wait until crowing becomes relatively constant before making the first two-minute count. Counts should be started at about 50 minutes before sunrise and completed at about 10 minutes after sunrise. 4. Count the number of cocks heard calling for a two-minute period, then drive rapidly to the next station, make a count, and so on through the route. 5. If interference is encountered during a two-minute count (train, plane, dog barking, etc.), start over after the noise has subsided and count for another two-rntnu ta period. 6. Do not make a count if the wind is blowing more than four m.p.h. (leaves on trees must be fairly still), if it is raining or misty, or if it is exceptionally cold. 7. Enter all information on the standard tally form as provided above. Form P-2 �-111- PHEASANT SEX RATIO COUNT FORM Date: Period of day (A.M. or P.M.) Area of count Time started Beginning mileage ., Time finished Ending mileage Observer(s) Weather data at start of count: Percent cloud cover ; Temperature _ Wind M.P .H. ; l~ Direction""-_ Weather data at end of count: Percent cloud cover ; Temperature Wind M.P.H. ; & Direction~ _ Precipitation during count _ _ ------------------------- --------------------------- _ Snow depth . ~-------------Was dog used during count? Yes No _ Time of Observation , I! Cocks Hens Unclass. Time of Observation Cocks Hens Unclass. I I I i I i i i I ; Suh-totals TOTAL COUNTED: I i Comments (general counting conditions, other) ----------------------------_ _ .. _-_ .. �-112- INDIVIDUAL ROOSTER OBSERVATIONS Location ------------------------------Date ----------------------------------Period of Observation -----------------Observer ------------------------------Time ]r ~fin Sec - -- ---- --- -- --- _._-- Time From Last Call Min Sec Distance & how Determined Wind Velocity Wind Direction Temperature Cloud Cover Relation of Wind Dir. to Observer & Bird -------------------- ------------------ ------------------------------------------- Aspect of Bird Pres. to Observer Clarity of Call Number of Hens with Rooster Remarks �-113PHEASANT BROOD COUNT FORM ~--~~--~~----~~~ Date Period of Day(A.M. or P.M.) Name of Route Area . Observer(s) -------- _ Weather Data at Start of Count., __ ; Percent Cloud cover --------------.----~---------_ Temperature.,..tVind (M.P.H.) ;and Direction --Time Started ~---------------------------Be!jinningHileage Heather Data at End of Count: -----------------------Time Finished Total Time Temperature ; Percent Cloud cover Ending Mileage Total Mi.les Cover Condition: Het Damp Was Dog used during Co~? Yes -~-' Dry__ Time of ·Speedometer Birds ObservaReading Cocks Hens tion No ~---., and Direction Wind(M.P.H.) ---, ------ Precipitation during Count: Observed Young Unclass. ---------------- Estimated age Young (Hks.) Cover Type Here Birds Flushed Yes No Sub-totals Total Pheasants Counted Quail Observec : Adults Young Mourning Doves Observed Cottontail Rabbits Observed Miscellaneous Comments(broods observed off of main route, general counting conditions, other �-114- LANDOHNER CONTACT FOPJ1 Appendix C Name of Landowner Recorder _ t Date of Contact Location of Land: Total Acres: _ T ---------------------T ---------------------T ---------------------T ---------------------- Deeded R~ , Sec. R~ , R~ _ Sec., _ Sec _ o R:...- --------------------------- Land Use (Crop types and approximate acreage) Comments: _ ~ _ Leased Sec. _ _ �-115- News Release by: Fran Waugh, Wayne Sandfort and Hal Swope QUESTIONS ANSWERED ON HEN PHEASANT SHOOTING EXPERIMENT For several years research personnel of the Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department have been studying the pros and cons of including hen pheasants in the bag limit. Last year four states and one Canadian province permitted hen shooting under various types of controls. Although this practice does not appear to be harmful to pheasant populations in some portions of their range, it is the feeling of biologists in Colorado that we cannot as yet recommend uncontrolled and widespread hen harvest. The Midwest Pheasant Council, of which Colorado is a member, recently issued a policy statement on hen shooting as follows: "Hen seasons should be established only if they are part of a well-conceived ex~erimental research program, designed to determine the actual, immediate and long-range effects of this practice.1I In line with this policy, Colorado is conducting a study of controlled hen shooting in a small study area (approximately 600 square miles) in northeastern Colorado. This research study was unanimously approved by the Game, Fish and Parks Commission at their March, 1963, meeting. If several years of study indicate that hen pheasants can be added to the bag limit without adversely affecting harvestable numbers ...•. then the Department owes it to the sporting public to a llow this benef i t . But if the research shows that pheasants are hurt by hen shooting, then seasons can continue as in the past, with hens protected, and the Department can be sure it is managing the birds properly. It is pOinted out that other species of game birds and waterfowl, where sex is not easily distinguished, have not been noticeably affected by shooting the female. Harvest of female big game animals is a tested and perfected method of successful and efficient mFlnagement in Colorado. It must be emphasized that the hen harvest-research study will be strictly limited and controlled on a pennit basis. The actual number of permits will be a small percentage of the total hen population, yet to be determined by late summer counts. Hunters will be checked in and out of the area during the period hen shooting is allowed (which will probably be restricted to the opening weekend of the regular pheasant season). Plans are to have hunters obtain a hen permit tag before they can shoot a hen in the area, and then be checked out at one of several stations to be set up at points convenient to the hunter. There will be a 'buffer' zone established around the intensive study area to compensate for birds entering or leaving the area because of natural movement or hunting pressure. Another similar 'control' area chosen nearby will receive the same intensive study and have an identical 'buffer'zone. This area, however, will be open to the regular "roosters only" season and bag limits. Intensive study and comparison of information from each of these two research study areas, both before, during and after several hunting seasons will yield some definite answers on the effects of hen pheasant shooting. Not until these answers are obtained through research, will any definite recommendations for or against hen pheasant shooting be made by Colorado biologists. �-116- SUMMARY REPORT ON HOLYOKE MEETING, JULY 9-10, 1963 Twenty-eight Game, Fish and Parks Department people converged on Holyoke the afternoon of July 9 to review the pheasant hen harvest research project. Personnel divided into groups and made evening brood counts in the two project study areas. These counts were repeated early the next morning. It was apparent that valid brood count data will not be available for several weeks. Following the evening meal a meeting of Department personnel was held to discuss the experimental hen pheasant season. This was a "bull session" type meeting and allowed everyone to express their opinions, observations, and objections. Assistant Director Robert Elliott made it clear that differences were to be voiced at this meeting and the public met with a firm, united explanation of the study. The July 10 meeting was originally scheduled to discuss the hen harvest study in detail among Game and Fish employees -- with a few local residents present during the morning coffee break. A misleading article in The Holyoke Enterprise on July 4 stated that the purpose of the July 10 meeting was to discuss pheasant hen shooting with farmers and sportsmen. With this open invitation to come in and protest we were gratified that only a small group attended. Nineteen farmers, eight Holyoke business men, and four persons who did not list their occupations, attended. The group was very orderly and listened closely, with a few exceptions, to our presentations. Assistant Director Laurence Riordan welcomed the group, introduced Game, Fish and Parks Commissioners William August and Ronald Strahle, and had each person introduce himself. Game Research Chief Wayne Sandfort outlined the objectives of our hen shooting experiment and summarized the findings of other states who have shot hen pheasants in recent years. The Colorado project was explained in detail, including a history of pheasant population levels and harvest statistics in northeast Colorado. Current findings on crow i.ng counts, sex ratios, vegetative growth, precipitation, responses to landowner contacts, brood count observations, and mortality were presented. The controlled hen permit system was also explained. Questions were asked and answered throughout the entire meeting. Keith Evans briefly summarized his work on the greater prairie chicken in the Wray area and Bill Martin explained the habitat evaluation study recently initiated in the Fort Collins vicinity. The meeting was adjourned with an expression of appreciation by the local residents to the Department for including them in our discussions. Following the public meeting another session was held with Department people to work out a hunting regulation covering the taking of hens and the mechanics of issuing hen permits. �-117- ATTENDANCE ROSTER HOLYOKE PHEASANT MEETING, JULY 10, 1963 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. *27. *28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. 40. 41. 42. 43. 44. 45. 46. 47. 48. 49. 50. Ronald H. Strahle Wm. H. /urgust; Clark Ford R. T. Takes Mike Sterling Keith Evans William E. Martin William E. Jones W. B. Wells Art Gresh G. P. Zimmermann F. L. Waugh Norm Hughes Earl R. Downer Lloyd W. Triplet Clyde C. Slonaker F. A. Scarpella Richard F. McDonald Wayne Nash Merle L. Hodges Elvy Wagner John M. Pogorelz Robert J. Tully Wayne W. Sand fort Laurence E. Riordan Harold M. Swope Robert R. Elliott Gilbert N. Hunter Kenneth Schlachter Emil Heermann Robert J. Saylor A. R. Smythe Lee Ritchey Charles Steward Virgil Mathews Darwin J. Kleve Wayne Carruthers John P. Kafka George Brinkema Dale Carruthers Walt Lutze Gerry Lutze Chas. H. Hassler Joe Ortner August Dubbert Loren A. Pfau Bill Lappart J. B. Lappart Karl Schulz Everette Lappart Game, Fish & Parks Connnissioner " " " " " " " " " " Game, Fish & Parks Department " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " II II " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " Ii " Ii " " " " " " " " " " " Ii " " " II Ii " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " Ii " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " II " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " Farmer Farmer Farmer Merchant Farmer Superintendant of Schools Banking Farmer & Rancher Farmer Farmer Farmer Farmer County Judge Chamber of Connnerce Secretary Farmer Farmer Farmer Farmer Farmer Farmer Farmer Farmer Fort Collins Brush Tamarack Fort Collins Holyoke Wray Fort Collins Holyoke Sterling Greeley Greeley Fort Collins Fort Collins Berthoud Julesburg Fort Collins Wray Golden Fort Morgan Akron Loveland Fort Morgan Denver Fort Collins Denver Fort Collins Denver Denver NE of Holyoke NE of Holyoke Holyoke Holyoke Holyoke Holyoke Holyoke Holyoke Holyoke Amherst Amherst Holyoke Holyoke Holyoke Amherst Holyoke Holyoke Holyoke Holyoke Holyoke Amherst Holyoke �-118- 5152. 53. 54. 55. 56. 57. 58. 59. Edward L. Lewis Billy Oliver Jim Stein Willard Clayton Harry Hessler E. Pryor Lewis Elton 01tjenbruns Vincent Dunn Otto Fu1scher Funeral Director Farmer Farm Implements Holyoke Holyoke Holyoke Motel Operator & C. of C. Pres. Farmer & Rancher Amherst Holyoke Holyoke * Attended the July 9 meeting but had previous committments on the 10th. �-119Hen Permit 11 ------ YOU are now part of an experimental study to determine whether hen pheasants may be safely harvested. If shooting hens is found to be unharmful to pheasant populations then sportsmen should be allowed to harvest a resource that is otherwise wasted. If the killing of hens proves to be harmful to our pheasants there should be no more hen seasons and the rema1n1ng birds will quickly recover. This study is designed to eliminate danger of excessive over-harvest. To help us assess the effects of hen shooting we sincerely request that you answer the following questions as accurately as possible. PLEASE CHECK APPROPRIATE SPACE BELOW. Did you kill a hen pheasant? Yes No _ How many hours did you actually hunt? (Deduct eating, travel, visiting time) 1 6 2 3 4 5 __ 7 8 How many cock pheasants did you kill? 1 _ 2 --- Was the hen the 1st ---- ,2nd killed? 3rd _ 4th --- What time did you kill the hen? Noon , Noon to 3:00 P.M. 9 __ 3 _ bird that you 9: 00 A.M. to Sunrise to 9:00 A.M. , 3:00 P.M. to Sunse t _ How many cocks did you cripple and not find? 1 , 2 __ , 3 __ How many hens did you cripple and not find? 1 __ , 2 , 3 , , • Approximately how many cocks did you flush during your hunt? Approximately how many hens did you flush during your hunt? Did you shoot any banded birds? number _ Yes , No _ If so please write Remarks: PLEASE MARK X ON MAP (REVERSE SIDE) APPROXIMATELY WHERE HEN WAS KILLED REMEMBER YOU MUST: 1. Hunt~designated area only with hen permit in your possession. 2. Turn in permit at one of four check stations before leaving area. 3. Turn in permit to check station by 6:00 P.M. Sunday (November 10th) whether you leave the area or not. �-120- Thank you for participating in this research experiment feasibility of allowing hen pheasants to be harvested. to determine the Perhaps you wonder why hens are suddenly made fair game after many years of protection. Game managers have long wondered why hen pheasants are "sacred" when the females of all other game bird species (grouse, quail, partridge, turkey, waterfowl) are not protected. Several states set out to find the answers. California, the pioneer shooting pheasant hens, made some very enlightening conclusions: in 1. On areas in California where hen shooting has been permitted for the past 18 years, and where the wild hen kill has exceeded the wild cock kill, no measurable decrease in the pheasant population has occurred. 2. The limited hen season afforded up to 120,000 additional pheasants harvested each year without any increase in cost to the hunter or without harm to the pheasant population. 3. Sixty-five percent of the hens produced each year are lost regardless of hunting. Hunting mortality was substituted for non hunting mortality. 4. Up to 45 percent of the fall hen population can be removed by hunting without endangering reproduction. each year Idaho, after shooting hens for several years, reached conclusions similar to California. They harvested over 40,000 hens last year alone -- and point out that these birds would have been wasted had the hunters not been permitted to take them. They feel they can safely take at least 40 percent of the fall hen population. Montana found through a limited research study that no harm was done to pheasant populations by shooting hens. To the contrary brood sizes actually increased in the area where hen shooting was permitted. Your Department has approached this problem cautiously to ascertain the feasibility of shooting hens under Colorado conditions. We are proceeding with a carefully designed study to be certain that no harm is done to our very important pheasant resource. For years we have spent considerable time, effort and money to put more birds into the hunter's bag (establishing refuges, controlling predators, planting birds from game farms and developing habitat). For the most part these efforts have been unsuccessful. Now it appears that we may be able to accomplish this objective by better utilizing what we already ha~ If we can harvest some hens without harm to pheasant populations then there is nothing to support the continued waste of~his resource. We need to know the facts to improve your pheasant is needed to obtain these facts. hunting. Your assistance �-121- JOB COMPLETION RESEARCH State of PROJECT REPORT SEGMENT COLORADO ----~~~~~------------Game Bird Survey W-37 -R-17 Project No. Work Plan No. 1 Job No. 15 Pheasant Title of Job: Evaluation Period Covered: April 1, 1963 to March 31, 1964 Personnel: Bill Martin, of Marginal Habitat Lands Bill Jones, Dave Stearns, and Harold Swope. ABSTRACT Three one-section plots were chosen and studied from June 1 through September 3, 1963, to determine the significant effects of marginal seep areas on pheasant production. Study sections were mapped and p1animetered with the aid of aerial photograph enlargements. Low, wet areas (seeps) accounted for 3.6 percent (57.70 acres) of the total study areas. Seventy-eight pheasant nests were located in the three study sections. Sixty-three of these nests were found in a Lf a Lf a fields. Of the 15 nests not in alfalfa fields, 26.6 percent were located in seeps and associated wastelands. Due to difficulty in locating suitable 'study areas less than a complete evaluation of nesting in marginal seep areas was accomplished. Seeps were searched after June 25th rather than during the April and May period when maximum nest occurrence could be expected. The study to date has provided the background and framework for direction and procedure during future study if such is undertaken. Introduction This is the final report of a study that was expected to continue for three years. A severe budget cut necessitated discontinuance of this study, however, the initial work has provided guide lines for future procedures on this evaluation project when sufficient funds become available. �-12?- Recommendations: A great deal of difficulty was encountered in finding study sections to meet all the necessary criteria. For this reason, initiation of field work on the project was delayed until June 1, 1963. Field work during subsequent years should begin by April 1. Nests may have been overlooked in the seeps and wastelands during the first search because the density of vegetation made intensive searching unfeasible. It is recommended during subsequent years that seeps and major wastelands be searched during April and May. The vegetation does not restrict searching at this time, and a drive line (with the co-operation of Colorado State University students) could be used effectively to flush nesting hens. It is recommended that if students are used for crow count triangulations in succeeding years the results be analysed to see if there is some correlation between the location of crowing roosters and past and future nest locations. The importance of the census should be made clear to all students concerned. Cover was so dense in the irrigated farmlands during the latter part of the summer that most of the broods present on a given section could not be seen. In no single count were more than four broods located. One brood observation and one or two single adults were the normal results of a morning's count. It is recommended that brood counts be discontinued during future study and a record be maintained to note the location and number of broods sighted during the normal field activities during the summer. Objectives: (1) (2) Techniques To determine the percent of pheasant production resulting from marginal lands in irrigated farm areas. To ascertain the importance of marginal lands for pheasant use and survival during the winter months. Used: SELECTION OF SWDY SITES Three study sections were located in Larimer c'ounty as follows: 1. Wellington - Section 16, T. 8N., R. 68W., 6th P.M. 2. Black Hollow Junction - E 1/2 Section 8 and W 1/2 Section R. 68W., 6th P.M. 3. Deadman - Section 13, T. 7N., R. 68W., 6th P.M. 9, T. 7N., Study sections were chosen to be representative of seep areas throughout the Cache La Poudre valley. Only lands available for study over a three-year period were considered for selection. Efforts were made to choose study sections in the same general location and within a short driving distance of a given headquarters area. All possible study sections were surveyed and photographed from the air before final selection of the chosen sites. Twelve-inch aerial photographs were planimetered to determine acreages each cover type in the three study sections. Each section was assumed contain 640 acres for purposes of acreage computations. of to �-123- NEST SEARCH All hay and grain fields, waste areas, and seeps within the three study sections were searched for pheasant nests at least once. Alfalfa fields were searched after the first (1-25 June) and after the second (12-31 July) cuttings. G':ain fields were searched after the crop had been harvested, and the straw baled or stacked (25 June to 10 August). Wastelands and seeps were ~earched in their entirety once (25 June to 7 July) and the seeps were sampled on a 30 percent basis later in the summer (7-21 August). Fields planted in beans, sugar beets, and corn were not searched. These fields were being prepared for planting during the first nesting and provided only scant cover for second nestings. Irrigation and cultivation further made these fields improbable nesting sites. Nest locations were described on the nest search form by measurements taken in cardinal directions to the nearest permanent field boundary. A 100 foot steel tape and a Forest Service compass and jake staff were used for nest location measurements. Field number, cover type, date, and incidental remarks were noted on the nest search form. Searching Alfalfa Fields. -- During initial investigations, effort was made to locate nests immediately after they were disturbed by cutting or windrowing machinery. This practice was soon abandoned because immediate, individual attention could not be given to all fields, and farmer participation was found to be inaccurate. Alfalfa fields were searched as soon as possible after windrowing. It was found that an observer could successfully search a strip about 30 feet wide; this width was normally three lanes. A pick-up truck was used with the farmers' permission, for searching large fields. One observer sat on top the cab and searched two lanes to the right of the vehicle. The driver was able to search one lane to the left of the vehicle. Both observers search a convenient portion of the lane in which the vehicle was driven. The truck moved at a rate of between three and five miles per hour through the field. The vehicle was used only on large fields where no secondary cover crop had been planted. One farmer (Art Karns) requested the truck be kept off all his fields. He remarked that the tire treads caused permanent damage to the alfalfa plants. Searching Barley and Oat Fields. -- Grain fields were searched in the same general manner as alfalfa fields. Most of the grain fields were larger and the stubble normally was higher than freshly cut alfalfa. Use of the vehicle was especially adaptable to searching grain fields because of the high vantage point afforded the observers and the ease with which large tracts of land could be covered. Grain fields were not searched until after the straw had been baled, because the windrows were quite wide and formed a blanket of straw on top the stubble, about six inches above the ground. �-124- Searching Seeps and Wastelands. -- All seeps and wastelands were searched on foot with the exception of dry portions of the Wellington study section seep. A vehicle was used on the Wellington seep because the height and density of vegetation restricted foot searching. Roadside waste was searched by vehicle for the most part. Heavy patches of vegetation were "walked out". Field irrigation ditch banks, railroad rights-of-way, and patches of waste inside the sections were searched on foot. Sample Searching Seeps. --A 33 percent sample of each seep was searched from 7 to 21 August. The seep was divided into 120 foot strips (on paper). Each strip was then divided into three lanes. Numbers were drawn from a hat to determine which lane would be searched. The lanes to be searched were established in the field with the use of a 100 foot steel tape, and a Forest Service compass and jake staff. All lanes were set in cardinal directions and were bordered by nylon string. It was found that, if only one lane was established and then searched, the string could be pulled from one lane to the next. POPULATION SURVEYS Crow Count Triangulation. -- Crow count triangulations were conducted from May 11-25 on various sections tentatively selected for study. Colorado State University senior students made the counts under' the supervision of Dr. Ronald Ryder and the Colorado Game Research Student Assistant. Students were placed near the four corners of each study section and asked to indicate on an outline map the apparent location of each crowing pheasant in the area. They were also asked to record the exact time of each calIon watches synchronized prior to the counts. Brood Counts. -- Brood counts were made on the study sections from 23 August through 3 September. Each section was counted twice by first driving slowly around the perimeter and then driving through the section on farm roads. Emphasis was placed on "glassing" field boundaries within the study sections. Findings: INTRODUCTION Low, untillable seep areas are believed to have potential for maintaining and increasing pheasant populations on irrigated farmlands. The seeps located on the irrigated farmlands of the Cache La Poudre valley (East of the foothills from Fort Collins to Longmont) are typically from three to 20 acres in size and are fed with waste irrigation waters. Other irrigated areas in Colorado contain similar wetlands. If these marginal islands of cover do significantly increase pheasant survival and production, land acquisition could be directed toward purchase or lease of these relatively low cost sites. In the event that prohibition �-125- of grazing or burning maintains these areas for optimum wildlife habitat, low cost leases to prevent grazing and burning might be feasible. This study is designed to provide management with guidelines for purchasing or leasing lands in irrigated pheasant habitat. During the initial investigation, research work was restricted to the low, untillable seep areas and surrounding farmlands. DESCRIPTION OF THE STUDY SECTIONS Physiography. -- The irrigated agricultural lands in the Cache La Poudre valley are typified by gently rolling topography. Irrigation canals intersperse the valley. Hopper and Grieb (1963) found 19 sample study sections in Larimer County to contain an average of 7.9 acres of pond and marsh area per section. About two-thirds of these wetlands were less than five acres in size. The sections physiography chosen for this study correspond of the Cache La Poudre valley. closely to the general Land Use. -- Alfalfa, corn, beets, barley, and beans comprised 73.6 percent (1,409.80 acres) of the land area studied. Seeps and all wasteland areas made up approximately 10.5 percent (202.67 acres) of the land in the study sections. (Seeps alone accounted for 3.6 percent or 57.70 acres). Table 1 shows the total acreage for each cover type found in the study sections. Acreages for each field may be found in Appendix C. Seep and Wasteland Vegetation. -- The permanently-wet, central portions of the seeps are characterized by extensive growths of cattail (Typhia sp.) intermingled with scatterings of roundstem bullrush (Scirpus sp.). Threesquare bullrush (Scirpus sp.) and roundstem bul1rush are dominant on marginal wetlands of the seep. The intermittently-wet sectors of the seep are typified by the outer edge of three-square bullrush growth, common occurrence of spikerush (Eleocharis sp.) and smartweed (Po1ygonum sp.), with a scattering of sedges (Carex sp.). The perimeter of the seeps are commonly vegetated with bristle grass (Setaria viridis), duck millet (Echinochloa crusgalli) , foxtail barley (Hordeum jubatum), orchard grass (Dactylis glomerate), koshia (Koshia sp.), dock (Rumex sp.), and milkweed (Asclepias sp.) • There are a few outstanding exceptions to the general vegetative character of the study seep areas: (1) Deadman study section has only a small growth of smartweed in the seep, (2) Black Hollow Junction study section has a heavy stand of smartweed growing from the edge of open water (on the south of the pond) to the cultivated field, and (3) Black Hollow Junction study section has a prominent growth of mares tail (Hippuris vulgaris) on boggy areas wi.thin the seep. Table 2 indicates the relative abundance of the more common plant species found in the seeps and wastelands of the study sections. �-126- Table 1. -- Cover Type Acreage for Three Study Sections* Cover Type Section Name Wellington Black Hollow Jct. Deadman Totals Acreage Percent Alfalfa Corn Beets Barley Beans 108.02 59.96 138.19 106.39 113.60 155.47 110.21 38.37 62.53 46.16 106.63 128.09 87.83 73.07 75.38 370.12 298.26 264.29 241.99 235.14 19.3 15.6 l3.8 12.6 12.3 Pasture Fallow (tilled) Farm Units Misc. Roads & Waste Seeps (wet) 2.51 8.34 18.31 22.30 20.52 76.25 41.70 11.43 9.35 60.04 -----13.45 15.65 10.70 80.56 78.76 63.69 45.39 43.35 4.2 4.1 3.3 2.4 2.3 Fallow (untilled) Oats Barrow Waste Seeps (Dry) Barley & Oats 4.87 8.04 10.84 17.91 ------ 18.90 16.75 2.53 -----11.21 l3.82 9.43 12.29 6.08 11.65 37.59 34.22 25.66 23.99 22.86 2.0 1.8 1.3 1.3 1.2 Irrigation Canal R.R. Right-of-way Abandoned Farms Sweet Clover Truck Garden 5.66 8.65 6.41 12.89 2.17 .28 ------ ------ 3.94 8.55 -----4.25 1.02 22.49 19.37 6.69 4.25 1.02 1.2 1.0 .3 .2 TR 640.20 639.14 638.68 1,917.74 TOTALS ------ ------ ~'(Acreage computed from 12 inch aerial photograph and 640 acres/section assumed. NEST SEARCHES Seventy-eight pheasant nests were located in the three study sections from 6 June to 21 August. Sixty-three (80.77%) of the nests were found in alfalfa fields. Other cover types in which nests were found include: barley, barley and oats, untilled fallow, dry and wet seeps, sweet clover, abandoned farm units, and waste areas along farm roads and field ditches. Analysis of the location of 15 nests not found in alfalfa, show that four (26.66%) were in water seepage wasteland. Five nests were located in fields under some form of cultivation, and the remaining 6 nests were in dry wasteland area. Table 3 shows the number of nests in each cover type by section and the average number of acres in each cover type per nest. It would appear from the inconclusive data collected during this first year of study that seep Clreasprovide some degree of "second choice" nesting cover for pheasants in irrigated farmland in the vicinity of Fort Collins, �Table 2. -- Vegetative Composition of Seeps and Wastelands in the Three Study Sections Cover Type Dominant Wellington Abundant Wet Seep Typha Scirpus (roundstem) Eleocharis Dry Seep Koshia Hordeum Echinochlba Asclepias Koshia Cirsium Medicago Roadside Waste Cornmon Black Hollow Junction Abundant Cotmnon Dominant Deadman Abundant Dominant Typha Scirpus (roundstem) Carex Eleocharis Cotmnon Scirpus (threesquare) SCirpus (threesquare) Typha Scirpus (roundstem) Polygonum Cirsium Bromus Helianthus Agropyron Setaria Polygonum Avena Medicago Setaria Trifolium Cirsium Echinochloa Hordeum Rumex Koshia Nelilotus Medicago Asclepias Poa Agropyron Helianthu s Agrostis Elymus Convolvulus Setaria Dactylis Agropyron Koshia Ekinochloa Setaria Helianthus Circium Salsola Poa Agropyron Dactylis Koshia Echinochloa Setaria Helianthus Asclepias Ambranthus Hippuris Taraxacum Deschampsia Rumex Elymus Equsetum Agropyron Distichli s I f-' I\) -..J I �Table 3. -- Nest Locations in Relation to Cover Types Cover Type Alfalfa Barley Barley & Oats Fallow (tilled) Fallow (untilled) Oats Pasture Seep (dry) Seep (wet) Sweet Clover Abandoned Farms Farm Units Misc. Roads & Waste (ditches) R. R. Rights-of-way Barrow Waste Number of Nests Wellington Black Hollow Deadman Total Wellington I -- 63 3 -- I 3.60 35.46 11.21 -- -- 2 2 ---2 -- -I 30 3 -- 20 -- ---- 13 7.77 8.20 5.88 80.66 22.86 -- --- --- 6.91 18.80 -- -- -- -- 3 8.96 22.30 --- -- -- I I -- 4.25 -- -- 2 3.21 -- -- 3.25 -- 2 9.16 -- -- 22.70 --- 2 -- 2 -- -- 'I'o ta l, -6.08 --- -- I 1 Acres Per Nest Black Hollow Deadman I -- -- -- 8.00 43.35 4.25 I-' r0 co I �-129- Colorado. A complete search of the seeps during April and May would provide invaluable data toward establishing pheasant production res~lting from marginal seep areas. CROW COUNT TRIANGULATION So much vari.ation was encountered in crow counts made by Colorado State University students (as part of a class requirement) that these were discarded. Some students recorded as many as 10 to 15 more calls than their colleagues on the same section during the identical listening period. BROOD COUNTS Broods proved to be almost impossible to locate on the study sections. So few were observed that this is not thought to be a feasible method of comparing nesting incidence and production. Most of the infrequent brood observations were made on the roads, which leaves some question as to which sections provided the nesting sites. WINTER POPULATION AND SURVIVAL CHECKS Procedures called for roadside counts and search of dense ground cover following winter snows. No winter snow storms of any consequence were received and birds were not forced to concentrate in areas of dense ground cover; hence no significant winter use and survival data were obtairied. Two sizable spring snows occurred but birds remained scattered during these warm, wet storms. Prepared by: William E. Martin Student Assistant Date: April Printed 1964 Appr-oved by: Wayne W. Sandfort Chief, Game Research Harold M. Swope Project Leader �-130APPENDIX A - LAND OWNERSHIP WELLINGTON STUDY SECTION R. J. Carlisle Carl Judson John Blehm Ross Nutter �(Cont.) -131APPENDIX A - LAND OWNERSHIP BLACK HOLLaH JUNCTION StuDy Clifton Brenimen SECTION Dorthy Becker A.J. Norcross Dykeman Residential Area �(Cant. ) -132APPENDIX A - LAND OWNERSHIP DEADMANS'l'UDY SECTION T. Ditcher H.H. Stonaker Hoover (by Bauer) Sutherland Bros. (by Karns) Hoover (by Bauer) �-133APPENDIX B - FIELD-NUMBER LOCATIONS WELLINGTON S l'UDY SECTION \-\ 2.-\ 2.-2. 2..-5 'l..-7 '2. - 10 4-1 '3-\ 3-7. - -- "3-4 4-9 4-\D 4-\£\ �(Con t ,) APPENDIX B - FIELD-NUMBER LOCATIONS BLACK HOLLOw JUNCTION STUDY SECTION /-4 \-5 I-G, \-\0 H\ J -110 8-\0 4-5 4-3 4- 3-1/ \0 4-fr �(Con t ,) -135APPENDIX B - FIEIJ)-NU'M:BER LOCATIONS DEADMAN STUDY SECTION '2.- \ 1-4 1-5 2.-4 1-3 3-/ 2.- \0 2.-12 4-1 4-2- �-136- APPENDIX C FIELD ACREAGES - 1963 Each section was divided into approximate quarters by natural dividing lines. Fields were assigned numbers from left to right within each quarter. (See Appendix B) 1. WELLINGTON Field Number I- I 1- 2 1- 3 1- 4 1- 5 1- 6 1- 7 1- 8 1- 9 1-10 T U Acres Crop 36.17 1.98 5.00 22.69 24.49 6.85 .70 6.41 4.96 2.59 Corn Fallow (T) Barley Alfalfa Barley Beans Barley Beans Beets Barley 1-11 1-12 1-13 1-14 1-15 1-16 1-17 1-18 1-19 1-20 .53 5.22 4.96 Fallow (T) Beans Barley 10.89 21.29 11.28 29.06 10.97 Beets Beans Alfalfa Beets Barley 2- 1 2- 2 2- 3 2- 4 12.16 16.11 14.09 17.91 2- 5 2- 6 2- 7 2- 8 2- 9 2-10 2-11 22.30 6.01 8.96 5.14 4.87 25.50 5.88 Beets Beans Beets Seep (Dry Gr.) Seep (Wet) Alfalfa Alfalfa Barley Fallow (U) Barley Alfalfa Tilled Fallow Un tilled Fallow Field Number Acres Crop 3- 1 3- 2 3- 3 3- 4 3- 5 4- 1 4- 2 4- 3 4- 4 4- 5 28.49 17.38 12.38 17 .25 24.98 6.06 16.64 6.10 11.50 11.06 Beans Beets Barley Beets Alfalfa Oats Beets Alfalfa Beans Beets 4- 6 4- 7 4- 8 4- 9 4-10 4-11 4-12 4-13 4-14 10.58 4.70 .62 12.99 13.21 9.13 1.36 14.66 17.73 Corn Beets Oats Alfalfa Corn Alfalfa Oats Barley Beans Farm Units 8.34 Abandoned Farm Units 6.41 R.R. Rightof-Way 8.65 Roadside Waste 10.84 Hain Irrigation Ditch 5.66 Misc. Roads and Waste 18.31 �-137- APPENDIX C (Continued) FIELD ACREAGES - 1963 2. BLACK HOLLOW JUNCTION Field Number Acres Crop Field Number Acres Crop 1- 1 1- 2 1- 3 1- 4 1- 5 3.01 1.82 10.86 10.86 11.65 Corn Alfalfa Corn Beets Beans 3- 6 3- 7 3- 8 3- 9 3-10 14.32 4.12 16.44 6.56 4.25 1- 6 1- 7 1- 8 1- 9 1-10 16.66 7.89 2.53 4.48 3.94 Alfalfa Fallow (T) Alfalfa Alfalfa Beets 3-11 3-12 3-13 3-14 3-15 11.89 1.95 4.30 2.39 9.35 Fallow (T) Alfalfa Alfalfa Pasture Sweet Clover Alfalfa Fallow (U) Pasture Oats Corn 1-11 1-12 7.75 19.05 Beets Corn 3-16 3-17 2.55 1.02 1-13 1-14 1-15 1-16 6.65 16.17 9.35 11.43 Beets Barley Seep (Wet) Alfalfa 4- 1 4- 2 4- 3 4- 4 4- 5 35.45 17.77 17.77 17 .81 16.53 2- 1 2- 2 2- 3 2- 4 2- 5 2- 6 2- 7 2- 8 2- 9 2-10 24.59 19.10 20.05 3.50 12.98 11.21 7.89 8.77 9.84 25.79 Corn Alfalfa Fallow (T) Fallow (T) Alfalfa Oats & Barley Corn Beans Barley Fallow (T) 2-11 2-12 3- 1 3- 2 3- 3 3- 4 3- 5 4.70 15.42 Fallow (T) Alfalfa 6.47 Alfalfa 14.40 14.36 Fallow (U) Oats 14.36 4- 6 7.93 4- 7 4- 8 9.17 9.66 4- .9 2.22 4-10 41.70 Farm Units Abandoned Farm Units R. R. Rightof-Way 8.55 Roadside Waste 2.53 Main Irrigation Ditch 3.94 Misc. Roads and Waste 11.43 Fallow (U) Truck Garden Corn Barley Alfalfa Beans Barley Alfalfa Beans Beets Pasture Barley �-138- APPENDIX C (Continued) FIELD ACREAGES - 1963 3. DEADMAN Field Number Acres Crop 1- 1 1- 2 1- 3 1- 4 1- 5 1- 6 1- 7 1- 8 1- 9 1-10 2.45 9.47 22.09 12.80 12.71 8.41 21.58 1.76 9.43 29.95 2- 1 2- 2 2- 3 2- 4 2- 5 2- 6 2- 7 2- 8 2- 9 2-10 2-11 2-12 2-13 3- 1 3- 2 3- 3 3- 4 3- 5 Field Number Acres Crop Alfalfa Corn Alfalfa Corn Corn Fallow (U) Corn Alfalfa Corn Alfalfa 3- 6 3- 7 3- 8 3- 9 3-10 3-11 3-12 3-13 3-14 3-15 2.08 2.27 24.13 11.65 1.06 9.80 4.67 6.75 8.50 23.32 Fallow (U) Fallow (U) Pasture Oats & Barley Fallow (U) Alfalfa Alfalfa Corn Barley Corn 27.55 22.97 26.67 9.43 15 67 25.74 4.48 19.04 15.44 27.92 Barley Beans Beans Oats Beets Beans Barley Beets Corn Beets 3-16 3-17 3-18 3-19 4- 1 4- 2 4- 3 4- 4 4- 5 3.88 16.59 1.85 2.82 27.64 25.10 7.60 1.90 6.08 Alfalfa Corn Alfalfa Pond Alfalfa Beets Seep (Wet) Misc. Waste Seep (Dry) 14.19 13.91 1.34 8.23 21.72 10.40 3.10 2.54 Pasture Barley Misc. Waste Barley Pasture Barley Seep (Wet) Alfalfa Farm Units 13.45 Abandoned Farm Units .28 R. R. Rightof-Way 2.17 Roadside Waste 12.29 Main Irrigation Ditch 12.89 Misc. Roads and Waste 15.67 0 �-139- LIST OF ANNOTATED REFERENCES Alexander, Maurice M. 1959. The habitat map: a basis for wildlife management. N. Y. Fish & Game Jour. 6(1):103-113. A method of simplifying 1945 method of vegetative mapping by Graham, based on type of vegetation and location, is described. Baskett, T. S. 1941. Production of pheasants in north-central Iowa in 1939. Jour. Wildl. Mgmt. 5(2):168-175. On a l520A study plot 84.8% of the pheasant nests were located in hay fields, fence rows, ditch banks, and small grain fields. The highest nest density was in fence rows; however, the alfalfa had more nests, 30.6%, but was sixth in nest density. Small grain fields and grass cover were higher in nesting density than the alfalfa; however, the number of nests was less. Errington, P. L. & F. N. Hamerstrom Jr. 1937. The evaluation of nesting losses and juvenile mortality of the ring-necked pheasant. Jour. Wildl. Mgmt. 1(1):3-20. Clutches laid before April 15 and after June 15 did not appear to affect production, with 76.9% of total nesting successful. Recommended that extension of the nesting habitat was best method to increase population, opposed to quality habitat improvement. Gates, John. 1958. Pheasant habitat evaluation in Wisconsin. Unpub. Mimeo. 5pp. Plans to use 15 section area to determine the value of marshlands. This outline is very similar in methodology to this study of Colorado's. However, he will use dogs for searching, make winter population counts and only sample 8% of the study area, as well as trap and release work to determine daily movements. Ginn, Wm. E. 1962. The ringneck pheasant in Indiana. Ind. Dept. of Conser. Div. of Fish & Game. P-R Bul. #6. Best pheasant populations were found where crops were 20% corn, 20% small grain, 10-20% pasture and hay, and not more than 10% waste, odd areas, etc. The preferred winter roosting cover types in Indiana were found to be unclipped grain stubble, sedges, and cattail marshes, ditch banks and weedy areas. Recommended that birds could be helped if a twenty foot wide swath of alfalfa was left around woody cover and in densely nested fields. Hopper, Richard M. and Jack R. Grieb. 1963. Survey of potential waterfowl shooting areas in Colorado. Project W-88-R-7, Colo. Game Research Report, January. pp. 1-22. Sample sections in Larimer County were each found to contain an average of 7~9 acres of marsh habitat (ponds and marshes). Klonglan, Eugene D. 1935. Factors influencing the full roadside pheasant census in Iowa. Jour. Wild1. Mgmt. 19(2):254-262. (1) Rain had various affects, but did distort the counts. (2) Dew, temperature and humidity affected the counts only slightly. (3) Time--August was best month. �Kozicky, E. L. and G. O. Hendrickson. 1951. The production of ring-necked pheasants in Winnebago County, Iowa. Iowa Acad. of Sci. 58 (Jour. Paper - 1940):491-495. Found nesting cover was primarily hay, with small gra.ins and unused land secondary. Nests were not considered if only one or two eggs present. Knott, N. P., C. B. Chester, and C. F. Yocom. 1943. Nesting of the Hungarian partridge and ring-necked pheasant in Whitman Co., Washington. Jour. Wildl. Mgmt. 7(3):282-291. Found best method to discover nests was with a probe stick to part vegetation. Also slow walking was necessary to obtain adequate search. Leedy, D. L. 1939. Some land use factors related to pheasant production. Trans. 4th N. Amer. Wildl. Conf. 525-533. Study found that 33% of the hen pheasants were killed or crippled in farming operations. , and E. H. Dustman. 1947. The pheasant decline and land use trends, 1941-1946. Trans. 12thN. Amer. Wildl. Conf. 479-490. Found 64.2% of nests in alfalfa (Ohio) 70% of pheasant crop also came from hayland. Found no significant ne s t Lng in beans OJ: corn. Wheat had 25% of nest and 75% successful. (Highest percent successful). ----=--:::-;- Linder, Raymond L. 1958. Productivity of pheasants in south-central Nebraska. 3rd Trans. Ann. Summer Conf. Central Mtn. & Plains Sect. of Wildl. Soc. 27-33. Found 88.1% of nests lost, 32.7% to predators and 33.5% to farming. Most nests were in fence rows. Alfalfa was fourth highest in nesting density. , David L. Lyon, and Phillip C. Agee. 1960. An analysis of pheasant ---nesting in south-central Nebraska. Trans. 25th N. Amer. Wildl. Conf. 214-230. TI1e preceding year's cover was thought to be responsible for higher nesting densities in roadside cover. Also, narrow cover strips did not contribute to pheasant production, due to heavy predation losses. Nesting cover quality was directly related to nesting attempts. Madison, John. 1962. The ring-necked pheasant. 104 pp. In Nebraska, 40% of the pheasant population may be killed by mowers. In Minnesota, the preceding year's cover, such as sedges, dry grass, and marsh edges are used for nesting. The first nesting found was April 6. Normally the ring-neck will incubate 23 days and take 40 days to hatch a clutch (from first egg laid). In winter, cattails do not afford good cover when heavy snow is present, due to plugging. Nelson, M. M., Robert A 'Chesness, and Stanley W. Harris. 1960. Edge affect on nests. Jour. Wildl. Mgmt. 24(4):430-434. Found that no relationship existed between edges and nesting density. �-141- Nelson, M. M. 1960. Studies affecting the success of pheasant nesting in Minnesota. P-R. Quart. Rept. in Wildl. Resear. for Minn. pp 14, 32. Farming practices were responsible for 34% of nesting mortality. Early and late nests were not of significant value for production of birds. Eighty-seven percent of all production was in small grain fields, pastures, and ditches. , 1960. Study of pheasant brood behavior and factors of brood ---survival. Minnesota P-R Progress Report. Found that roadside counts were poor due to inconsistency of brood to appear. Nelson, U. C. 1950. Pheasant use of food and cover types in northwest Minnesota. Jour. Wildl. Mgmt. 14(2):234-237. Sloughs provided roosting and escape cover; in the summer, smaller meadows and lowlands provided roosting cover. Ridley, Bromfield, L. 1957. Nesting behavior of the ring-necked pheasant. Ph D. Thesis, Iowa State College, 98 pp. Found most nest desertions were generally the result of human disturbance; however, incubation length decreased the desertions. Robertson, Stacy B. and Benson Dirck. 1958. Pheasant use of field borders in western New York. N.Y. Fish & Game Jour. 5(1):94-99. Borders used for brood cover in the summer, also protection from rain. Winter protection was primary use of field borders. Sandfort, Wayne W. 1955. Pheasant brood survey. P-R Project W-37-R-8, Colo. Quar. Progress Rept. Time was found best in August 5-25 and from 5:30 a.m. to 6:30 a.m. and 6 p.m. to 7 p.m. Shouldn't have vehicle exceed 20 mph and morning count will be two times the evening count. 1960. Pheasant Brood Surveys. P-RW-37-R-13. Colo. Quar. Progress Rept. April 1960. 49pp. An adequate sample should have three morning counts; count all birds and the miles should be four times the time elapsed for the count. Tanner, James T. 1955. Map grids for field notes. Jour. Wildl. Mgmt. 19(1):156-162. Method used 4 digit figures to designate location of nests, 2 digits for vertical location and 2 digits for horizontal location. Troutman, Carl G. 1960. Evaluation of pheasant nesting habitat in Eastern North Dakota. Trans. of 25th N. Amer. Wildl. Conf. 202-213. Cover best in fence rows and roadside waste. Block type cover patches had less mortality but less density. Alfalfa and sloughs had highest nest density in block type cover. Early nesting was dependent on residual cover. Weston, Henry G. Jr. 1953. Ring-necked pheasant nesting activities on Birge & Grass Lakes, Emmit County, Iowa. Iowa Bird Life, 23(2):26-29. First eggs were found on 18-20 March, last on August 7, with first nesting on May 1. Canary grass was found to have most nests. �-142- Wolfe, Carl. 1962. Studies of pheasant productivity. W-28-R-8, Nebraska. Job Completion Report. p. 27-30. A sixteen section study area was used. Farming took 30% of nests and 47% were lost to predators. �-M3- JOB COMPLETION RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT COLORADO State of Game Bird Survey W-37 -R-17 Project No. Job No. Work Plan No. 3 Title of Job: Effects of Sagebrush of Sage Grouse Period Covered: Personnel: REPORT April 1, 8 Control on Distribution and Abundance 1963 to March 3l,1964 Don Gore, Perry Olson, Glenn Rogers, Wayne Sandfort, Fran Waugh, Lee Yeager, Ron Ryder, Fred GI~ver, Mike Dorrance, Norm Hughes, Harold Swope, and Bruce Gill.- ABSTRACT The specific Colorado. study area was selected in the Lake John area of North Park, Known strutting grounds were censused and the study area was systematically searched in an attempt to locate all sage grouse strutting grounds. Twelve grounds were censused at weekly intervals. Only seven of these grounds were actively used throughout the strutting season. Sixty-four birds were trapped on the strutting grounds bands and colored back tag harnesses. Daily movements these tagged birds were observed. and tagged with leg and activities of Five brood routes were set up within the study area and were sampled regularly to determine sex and age composition of the birds using the study area. Fiftytwo broods, averaging 3.7 young per brood, were observed. Check stations were set up during the fall hunting season to collect additional sex and age data. Fifty-eight percent of the 506 birds checked Through by hunters were juveniles. Only 12 percent of these were adult males.~ 1/ 2/ The principal activities were carried out by the chief investigator, Bruce Gill, however, the individuals listed assisted with various segments of the study. Sexes and ages were projected from wing samples taken at check stations. �Reconunendations: 1. No reconunendations for management will be made at this stage of the study. These will be a part of the W-37-R-18 segment report. 2. A detailed study of nesting success and nesting be included in next year's program. 3. A change in the type of tagging device 4. Vegetation 5. Aerial flights should be made over the area to determine strutting grounds have been located. Objectives: transects (1) (2) (3) (4) Techniques type preference should is needed. should be run throughout the study area. if all of the To determine the seasonal distribution of sage grouse before sagebrush is controlled (later jobs to determine distribution after control.) To determine sage grouse numbers by sex and age classes on and adjacent to an area to be treated for control of sagebrush. To collect vegetative and other environmental data on an area to be treated for control of sagebrush. To recommend patterns and methods of treating sagebrush for future studies, and ultimately, for broad scale management on Public Lands. Used: 1. Many of the strutting grounds on the study area were located by Department personnel during previous breeding season surveys (Rogers, 1964). To locate additional grounds roads within the area were driven with stops every mile to listen for the "booming" sounds of the strutting males. Locations of the strutting grounds were then plotted on U.S.C.S. quadrangles. 2. Strutting grounds were counted on a weekly basis by an observer using a 20-power spotting scope. The observer's vehicle was used as a counting blind. 3. Daily activities of sage grouse were determined tions referred to in Number 2 above. 4. Trapping was accomplished by driving the strutting grounds and adjacent areas at night in a vehicle. Birds were located and held in position by blinding them with a spotlight. A long handled net was used to capture the birds. Birds were tagged with a poly-vinyl jess knot collar, a naugahyde harness back tag (Labinsky and Mann, 1962), and aluminum leg bands. 5. Five brood count routes were set up within the study area. These ranged from 17 to 23 miles in length and sampled every type of habitat in the study area. Observations of birds were recorded under four categories: during weekly observa- �-145- adult,males, adult females, young, and unclassified. Locations of birds were recorded according to type and geographic areas, in which, they were found. 6. Techniques relating to Objectives 3 and 4 are not covered here because no work was done on these phases of the investigation during this segment. This will be covered in the W-37-R-18 segment report. Findings: The study area is located in the northwestern corner of Jackson County, Colorado, in the vicinity of Lake John. It is bounded on the north by the Cowdrey-Pearl Road, on the east by the North Platte River, on the south by the North Fork of the North Platte River, and on the west by the Sheep Mountain Ridge complex. The elevation of the area ranges from 7,,900 feet to 8,600 feet, with an average elevation of approximately 8,200 feet. No additional strutting grounds were located in the spring of 1963 other than those previously located and described by Colorado Game, Fish, and Parks personnel (Rogers, 1964). These grounds were assigned a code number for easy reference. They were: 1. Cowdrey No. 2. SG-l 2. Cowdrey No. I. SG-2 3. Cowdrey No. 4. '. SG-3 4. Alkali Lake . SG-4 5. Monahan Draw SG-5 6. Wattenburg No. 2 SG-6 7 . Wattenburg No. 1 SG-7 8. Cowdrey No. 3. SG-8 9. Boettcher Lake Junction. SG-9 10. Lake John Road No. 2 SG-lO II. Boettcher Flats. SG-ll 12. Lake John Road No. 1 SG-12 · ..·· · . ··.. . ·· . .·· .. ..··· .····· ··· · ···· ·· ·· Only seven of these grounds (SG-2, SG-4, SG-5, SG-6, SG-9, SG-lO, and SG-ll) were actively used throughout the 1963 strutting season. One ground, SG-ll, had been shifted approximately one mile southeast of its original location. The old site was located on a flat in short sagebrush, but part of this area and adjacent areas were cleared of sagebrush during the spring and summer of 1962. The ground was re-established on a low grass covered ridge surrounded by patches of low (less than six inches tall) and intermediate sagebrush (between six and twenty inches tall). The strutting grounds were counted at weekly counts are presented in Figures 1-4. intervals. The results of these In general these patterns all followed the ones described by Patterson (1952) and Dalke, et al., (1964). Adult males were using the grounds when the author arrived on the area on March 23, 1963. Adult males reached maximum numbers during the period April 2-14. On most of the strutting grounds these peaks continued through the month of April and then began to gradually decline through the month of May. By May 31 all of the strutting grounds on the area had been abandoned. �-146- Females reached maximum numbers during the period April 2-10. This peak coincided with the appearance of the first full moon of the month of April. During the period from the first half moon until the last half moon, strutting was begun in the evenings at approximately one-half hour after sunset and lasted through the night until approximately one-half hour after sunrise. Mating was accomplished at all times during this period and it is possible that the coincidence of the peak of hen mating with the first full moon period in April is an annually recurring event. Subadult males arrived on the strutting grounds at approximately the same time as the females but didn't reach maximum numbers until approximately two weeks after the female peak. Subadults were observed strutting on many temporary strutting grounds before their arrival on the permanent strutting grounds, but these temporary grounds were seldom used more than two days in succession. During the strutting season a total of 64 sage grouse were trapped and tagged using the spotlight technique previously described. A breakdown of the trapping results according to strutting grounds is given in Table 1. Table 1. Strutting Ground -- Sex and age classes of birds trapped on strutting grounds in 1963. Tag Color Adult Males Subadult Males Adult Females Subadu It Females Totals per Ground Light Green Yellow Lavender Orange Dark Green Blue 6 19 3 13 2 1 2 2 0 6 1 0 0 3 0 2 0 0 1 2 0 1 0 0 9 26 3 22 3 1 Totals 44 11 5 4 64 % of all birds 68.8 17.1 7.9 6.2 100.0 SG- 2 SG- 4 SG- 5 SG- 9 SG-lO SG-ll Of all the birds trapped and tagged, 85.9% were males, and of these 68.8% were adult males. Reasons for this sex ratio disparity were: (1) Subadult males and females tended to flush frqrn the strutting grounds more readily than adult males when they were spot-lighted. Subadult males were especially nervous and flighty at this time which might have been partially due to the harassment they received on the strutting grounds from the adult males; (2) Relatively small numbers of females roosted on the actual strutting areas at night. Most of the hens would roost within a mile radius of the strutting grounds and then would fly onto the strutting grounds in the pre-dawn hours of the morning. (3) Adult males roosted on or near their strutting territories on the grounds whereas subadult males roosted in the low to intermediate sagebrush adjacent to the strutting grounds. As a result, the adult males were more easily seen than the subadults. �SG -2 ~ 15 0:: CD I I I I I I I LL o f \ \ \ I I f 10 I \ I f I I \ \ I I I I I I 5 I I / .0. I I I I I .•..... '0 \.... \ . ••••• \ I ••' I .•••. ..•.... /,,/' .............•. ....•..•....... .,/ \:~/;/ 31 14 7 MAR. ...•... 21 _- ...•.------ .•.. 28 12 5 APR. 19 26 MAY DATE SG-4 140 ADULT MALES ----------- FEMALES •................. SUBADULT MALES 120 100 .•... ~... (/) , 0 0:: CD ---- .•...........• 80 LL 0 0::: W rn 60 2: :J It : I': Z I I: I I: I I 40 II I I I I I I 20 \ \ : .' .\ : I : \ I \ \ •.. I I ---_ - .••. I I " I I I , -, .---------........ I eO - •.•. _ - .•...•.. _ 31 14 7 MAR. 21 28 5 APR. DATE Figure 1. Strutting (SG-2) ground and Alkali attendance Lake on strutting Cowdrey ground No.1 strutting (SG-4), 1963. ground �SG-g 70 ,, /~ / // e" 60 I , I , I I \ I I I I I I I I I I I I I I \ I I I I o \ \ I ,, 0::: 40 rn SUBADULT MALES I ,, ,, <.f) MALES FEMALES I I I , 50 ADULT , I I I I I I LL I I , 030 0::: I I ~ \ \ W \ rn \ , \. § 20 \ ,, \ I Z \ ,, ,, I .' .' , I 10 .' \' i .'\ I I \ \ \ \ .. \ I I I , \ \ .. J' I I I It.._ I I -------------- 31 7 14 MAR. 21 28 APR. -e- --- 5 12 MAY 19 26 19 26 DATE <.f) o SG -10 15 ct: CO LL 10 o .....•.............•. • 31 7 14 21 APR. MAR. 28 5 12 MAY DATE Figure 2. Strutting ground ground (SG-9) attendance and Lake on Boettcher Lake Junction John Road No.2 strutting ground strutting (SG-10),1963. �25 ADULT MALES FEMALES (/) SUBADULT SG-5 20 MALES 0 0::: CO LL 15 0 0::: W CO 10 2: ::> z 5 7 31 14 28 21 5 12 MAR. 26 19 APR. MAY DATE (/) 10 0 0::: CO SG-6 8 LL 0 6 0::: W CO 2: 1\ 1\ I I 4 \ \ I ::> Z \ / '\ I \ , I 2 - \ , t .. I \ \\ "I \ J I 31 •• . \.... _. , ", 14 7 MAR. 21 APR. 28 5 19 12 26 MAY DATE Figure 3. Strutting (SG-5) and ground attendance Wattenburg No.2 on Monahan strutting Draw ground strutting (SG-6), ground 1963. �SG-11 10 (./) ---- ADULT MALES --------- FEMALES •................ SUBADULT MALES o 8 0::: 11l ~ 6 0::: W CO 2 4 .•............•............ ~ ~ Z 2 .. 31 MAR. 7 14 21 28 5 APR. 12 19 26 MAY DATE Figure 4. Strutting ground attendance on Boettcher (SG-11), 1963. Flats strutting ground �-147- Daily movements of adult males were observed throughout the strutting season. The same general areas were used by the same groups of birds during the duration of strutting activities. All movements were generally confined within a mile radius of the strutting grounds. Different height classes of sagebrush were utilized for different activities during the spring. Short sagebrush (less than six inches tall) and bare ridge tops were used as strutting and night roosting sites. Intermediate sagebrush (six to twenty inches tall) was used almost exclusively for feeding sites. Tall sagebrush (more than twenty inches tall) was used as mid-day roosting and shading spots. On an average day birds were strutting from one hour before sunrise until one hour after sunrise. Then they would begin to leave the strutting grounds, either walking or flying short distances. Feeding lasted from one hour after sunrise until approximately 10:30 a.m. to 11:30 a.m. Birds would then walk into the tall sagebrush and spend the mid-day in the shade until about 4:00 p.m. Feeding would commence again and last until one-half hour after sunset. At this time birds began returning to the strutting grounds and renewed strutting activities until dark, at which time they roosted again for the night. On May 15, just before the sage grouse abandoned all of the strutting grounds for the year, brood counts were begun. Broods were first observed on May 23. The results of the brood counts are summarized in Table 2. Table 2. -- Average brood sizes by semi-monthly periods, 1963. Ave. Brood Size No. of Broods No. of Young May l5-June 15 June l6-June 30 July I-July 15 July l6-July 31 August l-August 15 6 4 20 9 13 18 18 68 38 49 3.0 4.5 3.4 4.2 3.8 Totals 52 191 3.7 young/brood Period young/brood young/brood young/brood young/brood young/brood A comparison between sex and age ratios derived from brood counts, and data on their ratios obtained at check stations, is shown in Table 3. By June 30 all of the birds had migrated to the summer range areas. Most of the summer activities were centered around the irrigated hay meadows of the Lake Creek, North Fork, and the North Platte drainages (Fig. 5). The maximum distance that any tagged bird was observed from the trapping site was seven miles. This distance is considerably shorter than those observed by Dalke, et al. (1964) in Idaho. This is probably because the study area is well supplied with the types of watering and feeding areas required by sage grouse for summer range and thus eliminated the necessity for long migrations. Winter observations of sage grouse within the study area were few. However, interviews with local Wildlife Conservation Officers and ranchers indicated that the birds grouped into one large flock (estimates ranged from 1,000 to �-1!Y- 5C41cp.: SutU1E.1t t\,,~c.!. , W91M.'le.~ f(lM t 1 Inch e 1 1/3 ~i lcs �3,000 birds). This flock tended to remain along the east side of the study area. On February 29, 1963 a flock of an estimated 1,000 birds was located by the author on the east side of the study area at the confluence of Monahan Draw and California Gulch. This area supports an extensive stand of dense sagebrush and is probably one of the key winter areas within the study area. to check station sex age data. Unclassified Young Nos. % Total Nos. % Total Source of road counts compared Adult Females Adult Males Nos. % Total Nos. % Total Road Counts 260 27.5 151 15.9 355 37.5 Check Stations 62 12.3 150 29.6 294 58.1 Table 3. Results 181 19.1 No vegetative and environmental data were collected during this segment of the investigation. This work will be done during the 1964 field season and reported at the termination of Segment 18. The patterns and methods of treating sagebrush will not be recommended until two spring and summer field seasons have been completed. These recommendations will be made in the W-37-R-18 segment report. LITERATURE CITED Dalke, P. D. 1964. Ecology, productivity, Idaho. J. Wildl. Mgt. 27(4):811-840. Labinsky, R. F. and S. H. Mann. Wildl. Mgt. 26(4):393-399. Patterson, R. L. 1952. Denver. 34lpp. 1962. and management Backtag markers The sage grouse in Wyoming. of sage grouse for pheasants. Sage Books, in J. Inc., Rogers, G. E. 1964. Sage grouse investigations in Colorado. Tech. Publ. no. 16, Game Res. Div., Colo. Game, Fish, and Parks Dept. l32pp. Prepared by: Richard B. Gill Graduate Student 1964 Date: April, Pd nt.od Februar-y, 1965 Approved by: Wayne W. Sandfort Chief Game Research Harold M. Swope Project Leader ��-151JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO ----~~~~---------------- Project No. W-37-R-17 Work Plan No. 4 Job No. 10 ----~--------------~--~~~~~------------------- Title of Job: Period Covered: Personnel: Mapping Game Bird Survey Zones and Routes for Chukar Partridge June 10 to September Census 13, 1963. Glenn Rogers, Dwight Owens, Wayne Sand fort , Harold Swope, Richard Bartmann, and Wildlife Conservation Officers Ed Wilson, Louis Vidakovich, Furman Dunham, Hugh Jones, Dudley Jerome, Richard Hess, William Mink, Charles Gill, and John Howlett. ABSTRACT Sixteen chukar census maps including 22 important chukar areas were prepared during 1963. This brings the total number of maps completed thus far to 28 and the number of areas covered to 34. This completes the mapping of all key chukar areas to date. However, more census route maps will undoubtedly be needed as the chukar range is expanded in Colorado through natural movements of birds and game farm releases. Chukar census procedures were explained to Wildlife Conservation Officers supervisory management personnel. Chukar counts by Wildlife Conservation Officers were initiated this year with the help of research personnel. The 1963 young per adult ratio is 2.30. average is 2.63. The 1963 average brood size is 8.25. is 9.1. The new nine-year The new eight-year and young per adult average brood size The poor reproductive success figures for 1963 may be attributable to the prolonged dry period that centered over'the chukar breeding season or the heavy rains encountered during the census period, or both. Data from 127 chukar broods observed and aged show the peak of hatching occurred about the third week in July. This coincides closely with the peaks of previous years. Recommendations. -- It is recommended that mapping of zones and routes for chukar partridge census be continued in coming years as the need arises. Midsummer census is, thus far, the only method Colorado has of systematically gathering data on chukar populations. As the chukar range is expanded by natural movements of birds and releases of game farm stock, new census routes should be mapped. �-1.52Objectives: 1. 2. 3. 4. To standardize methods for determining annual chukar partridge reproduction. To establish, map, and describe zones or routes for use during counts of chukar broods or flocks. To instruct Department personnel in a standardized census procedure. To prepare forms and record books for systematic recording of information. Techniques Used: Selection of areas. -- Most important areas, from the standpoint of chukar populations, accessibility, and significance for hunting, were given consideration during the selection of areas to be used in annual chukar census. Sixteen routes, including 22 areas, were mapped during this segment. This completes the mapping of all important areas to date. Description of times for reproduction counts and methods for making counts. Information pertaining to times and methods or chukar census was gathered during past survey work. This information has been summarized for purposes of this report. Mapping of routes and areas for census. -- Colorado county highway maps, scale one-half inch per mile, have been used as the base map for mapping chukar areas. Enlarged sections of these maps may be necessary where the small scale inhibits accurate mapping of the routes. The general outline of chukar range within the census unit has been placed on base maps. Concentration areas, where chukars will be normally observed, are indicated by a shaded section. Orientation on the map has been shown by a "north" arrow. Each census area has been named, and the county or counties where it occurs is indicated. Forms and procedures for recording chukar census information. __ A complete description of chukar census methods, forms, and procedures for recording census information can be found in the Quarterly Progress Report, Game Management-Federal Aid Division, July 1962, Part 1, pages 33-44. �-153Mapping Zones and Routes for Chukar Partridge Census Richard M. Bartmann Sixteen chukar census route maps including 22 important chukar areas were prepared during 1963. In six instances it was found desirable to combine two areas into one census route for better coverage of the chukar range. The new routes are marked by asterisks in Table 1. These 16 new maps are appended. This brings the total number of chukar census route maps completed thus far to 28 and the number of areas covered to 34. This completes the mapping of all key chukar areas to date. However, more census route maps will undoubtedly be needed as the chukar range is expanded in Colorado through natural movements of birds and game farm releases. Little Hills in Rio Blanco County and Rifle Creek in Garfield County were not mapped as originally anticipated. It was thought Little Hills would not give a true sample of the chukar population and a proposed dam on Rifle Creek ruled this route out. During 1963 the chukar census procedures were explained to Wildlife Conservation Officers and supervisory management personnel. An attempt was made to take each Wildlife Conservation Officer over each route in his district at least once during the census period from July 21 through August 10. However, conflicting schedules and a shortage of time did not allow this in all cases. It was hoped each Wildlife Conservation Officer would make one additional count on each route in his district. This was accomplished with only a few exceptions. Beginning in 1964, they will be encouraged to make the desired three counts on each route. The results of this year's counts are shown in Table 1. 1963 Chukar Census Young per adult ratio. -- The young per adult ratio and average brood size are the only data in Table 1 that are comparable with that of previous years. The 1963 young per adult ratio of 2.30 is below the previous eight-year (1955-1962) average of 2.72. The new average is 2.63 (Table 2). Average brood size. -- The average brood size of 8.3 is the lowest average recorded. The previous seven-year (1956-1962) average was 9.5. The new average is 9.1 (Table 3). Possible factors affecting chukar census results. -- The poor reproduction recorded this year is possibly due to the prolonged dry period that centered over the chukar breeding season, a critical time for moisture. A poor supply of green feed during February, March, and April, may have affected reproductive success. This is further borne out by the observations of large groups of, apparently, non-breeding adult birds during the chukar census period, the largest group containing 30 birds. �TABLE 1. -- Chukar Partridge Production Counts, July 20, Through August 15, 1963. Name, Production Count Area Number SEecific BroodsAve. ~o. Ave. No. Birds B1rds Chukars Counted 'total Young Per Per Young Counts Total Total Made Miles Min. Adults Young Uncl. Total Number Young Per Adult Per Brood Mile Min. ~'<'Angel's Ranch - Little Peach Valley *Blevins' Ranch Raftopoulos Ranch *Calloway Place Sterling Spring *Camp Gulch Guzzler *Chase Draw *Columbus Canyon Guzz. *Disappointment Creek East Salt Creek Escalante Canyon Gateway Hunter Canyon Indian Rock Ranch *Irish Canyon - Bull Can. *McElmo Creek *Oak Creek Parachute Creek Plateau Creek *Prairie Canyon - West Salt Creek *Red Rocks Ranch - South Canal Roc Creek Smith Fork Staley Mine Stove Canyon - Coal Cr. Upper Kannah Creek *Warde11 Ranch *Wel1's Gulch Guzz. #1 *Well's Gulch Guzz. #7 7<Wi11ow Creek TOTAL ALL AREAS 2 43.3 316 85 127 60 272 10 89 1.49 8.90 6.28 0.86 1 3.9 90 15 17 1 33 2 17 1.13 8.50 4.46 0.37 No Counts Made 1 3 2 1 3 2 4 2 2 1 1· 3 3 3 25.8 - 19 41 47 2 44 6 29 25 22 8 8 11 24 39 16 115 14 8 81 1 179 4 75 52 15 3 110 58 0 19 7 0 0 0 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 35 175 68 10 125 7 218 29 97 60 23 14 134 97 2 10 2 1 8 1 20 1 8 6 2 1 9 9 16 79 14 8 60 1 160 4 75 52 15 3 74 58 0.84 2.80 0.30 4.00 1.84 0.17 6.17 0.16 3.41 6.50 1.88 0.27 4.58 1.49 8.00 7.90 7.00 8.00 7.50 1.00 8.00 4.00 9.38 8.67 7.50 3.00 8.22 6.44 6.78 - 20.8 64.1 34.1 142.9 15.4 13.3 14.4 15.0 37.9 54.0 91.5 212 307 187 101 329 150 722 109 118 87 78 234 221 315 0.48 1.95 0.21 1.53 1.88 7.29 8.46 1.53 0.37 2.48 1.06 0.17 0.57 0.36 0.10 0.38 0.05 0.30 0.26 0.82 0.69 0.29 0.06 0.61 0.31 2 74.4 340 41 188 17 246 20 185 4.59 9.25 3.31 0.72 3 100.2 444 78 174 0 252 19 174 2.23 9.16 2.51 0.57 3 2 32.5 32.4 47.0 65.2 38.9 14.6 -- 7 3 1 50 8 14 0 0 10 59 24 0 32 36 55 0 0 23 0 0 0 12 0 8 0 0 0 66 27 1 94 44 77 0 0 33 7 3 0 3 2 6 0 0 3 59 24 0 32 17 40 0 0 23 8.43 8.00 0.00 0.64 4.50 3.93 0.00 0.00 2.30 8.43 8.00 0.00 10.67 8.50 6.67 0.00 0.00 7.67 2.03 0.83 0.02 1.35 1.13 5.27 13.5 221 167 297 328 215 112 180 10I. 104 -2.44 0.30 0.16 0.003 0.27 0.20 0.69 0.00 0.00 0.32 995.1 6085 637 1466 134 2237 155 1279 2.30 8.25 2.24 0.37 2 3 3 1 2 1 1 57 * Routes mapped during 1963. -- -- -- -- I :--' \J't .i"- I �-155- -" ,. METHOD OF SURVEYI AngeP s Ranch-_Drive slowly east along main road 0.9 mile to forks at top of hill. Take middle fork (f!rst road to . i.'tllnediate right of main road just traveled) and ~""'J.(··\Z";'·~h,.,I--'-------'------·-·--I--·drive east 0.4 mile and tru(eleft fork (main road). Continue on 4.0 miles, paralleling river, to gate entering Angel's ranch (fields). From gate, walk up hill to east (right) and walk north and east along rim of mesa to view fields around pond east of house. Return to vehicle. Turn around and return to starting point qy canal and end of Angel's Ranch part of route. Watch both sides of road, hillsides, and field edges. Birds may occu~ a~here along route but generally concentrate along last four 111ileswhere road follows river. :o;j' Little Peach Valley--Turn left (south) on west side of canal and drive alongside canal 6.8 miles to main road crossing canal (be sure to take left fork off main road 3.4 miles from starting point). Turn left (south), across canal, and drive 0.5 mile to fork qy grove of trees. Turn ar-ound and follow main road 4.2 miles to north end of cultivated field where road turns left (west) and end of route. Intervielollocal residents as time permits. ltlatchboth sides of road, hillsides, and field edges. Birds may occur anywhere along route but usually concentrate from 3.0 to 10.0 miles above starting point. s. ,. I. II so II 10 '" ,. II ClIUKAR PARTRlOOE CENSUS AREA ANGEL'S RANCH_LITTLE PEACH VALLEY Delta County ACCESS I Travel east on Colorado Highvray 92, from its junction with U. S. Highuay 50 in Delta, for 5.5 miles to Rean. Take right fork off highway and drive east 1.1 miles to intersection. Contlnlle straight (east) 0.2 mile to bridge. Cross bridge and tt~n right (east). Drive 2.1 miles to canal and starting point for count. Accessible by all vehicles. �-156- DETAIL OF CEN.5U5 ROUTE BLEVINS TO R~FTOPl)l/L.O.s METHOD OF SURVEY a Drive slowly Sf IS north 0.8 mile to Blevinso ranch. Park vehicle and lValk around south side of house and along fields to .10l·rorreservoir west of house. Walk around west side of reservoir and then north~ past second reservoir~ over bill to third reservoir in draw above house and original release site.. \-Talkback to vehicle. Drive into corrals and take road leading to right (east). Drive 2.0 miles to fork (passing Ann Basset place 0.9 mile from Blevins' and George Basset place 103 miles from Blevinso). Take left fork 0 2 mile (through wire gate) and turn left (north). On 001 mile to pond. Turn around and drive back 0.1 mile. Continue straight (south) 0 •• ) mile to Raftopoulos r-anch, Continue south 0.4 mile to Brown's Park road and end of r-oute; Interview local residents as time permits. \vatch both sides of road, hillsides, and field edges. Chukars may occur arzywherealong survey route but usually concentrate around Blev1l1sv and also from George Basset Place to Raftopoulos rancho 0 CHUKAR PARTRIDGE CENSUS AREA BLEVINS' RANCH_RAFTOPCULOS RANCH Moffat County ACCESS. Travel west on Moffat County road)18, from its junction with Colorado HighwayfA,. just west of Maybell, for 4400 miles to the southeast point of the triangle junction formed qy Moffat County road 318 and the Brown's Park ronde Tako left fork (west on BrownQsPark road) 6.4 miles to driveway leading to Blevins' ranch and starting point for count. Pickup or .1eep advised. �-157>- .• •• •• •• .. ou o. ~ •... 10 I. N Z " U I. U ::;) 0 o « METHOD OF SURVEYa CallOlorayPlaoe- ... Drive slowly north on driveway for 1.7 -'~'miles to state oabino Turn around and return to Brownes Park road and end of Callo\>layPlaoe part of eount , Watoh both sides of road and hillsides. Birds may ooour anywhere along route but usually oonoentrate in the imrnediate vioinity ot: the eabm, :J Turn left (east) and drive 282 miles to road forking off main road to left and starting point for Sterling Springs part of oount~ Sterling Springs--Drive east 0.7 mile, through gate, and turn left (north) along draw leading to Sterling Springse On 0.4 mile to ford (oreek). Turn around and drive back 0.4 mile and turn left. Drive 001 mile to Brown's Park roado Turn left (eqst) and drive 0.) mile to point where Sterling Springs crosses road and end of route. Watch both sides of road and hillsides. Birds may occur anywhere along route. CHUKAR PARTRIDGE CENSUS ~A CALLOWAY PLACE-STERLING SPRINGS Moffat County ACCESS I Travel west on Moffat County road )18, from its junction with Colorado Highway @~ just west of Maybell, for 44mO miles to the southeast point of the triangle junction formed by Moffat County road 318 and the Brown's Park road. Take left fork (west on Bro\>1ll's Park road) and drive 12.8 miles to driveway on right (north) leading to Calloway Place and starting point for count. Accessible qy all vehicles. �-158- METHOD OF SURVEY I 1..ralk north up Camp Gulch about one-third mile to guzzler situated on west side of gulch. Takef-l-----I-~r~~-.L_+-_4~f___t=:~~~~~_+_l_ position near large rocks on hillside about 200 feet north and east of guzzler on east side of gulch. Observe guzzler with the aid of binoculars for a period of several hours. Birds usually begin coming to guzzler about 7BOO acm. and may oontinue to do so until about 9130 a.m. 'I •• CHUKAR PAATRIJ>3.E CENSUS AREA CAMP GULCH Garfield County ACCESS. Travel north on 13 Road (Douglas Pass road), fr~n its junction with U. S. Highway 50 at Loma, for 10.8 miles and turn left (west). Drive back south and then west 2Q4 miles and turn right (north) just across gulch. Drive 1.7 miles and continue straight (north) at crossroad. On 0.8 mile and continue straight (north) again at fork. On 101 mile and turn right across guloh and drive OG2 mile to and of passable road. Pickup or jeep advised due to variable condition of the road. �-159- + ; " ?: so I t • r • i 10j / II I. METHOD OF SURVEY~ Drive slowly east along base of cliff 0.) mile to road leading to the right (south)o Continue strail~ht (east) along base of cliff 0.2 mile to forkQ Take left fork (straight) and drive 0.4 mile to another fork b.Y sheep penso Take right fork leading up Chase Draw 0.7 mile to junction, just after crossing to west side of drawo Turn right and drive north and west 0.2 mile to small reservoiro Turn around and return to junctiono Continue straight (south and west) 100 mileo Turn around and return to junction. Drive back across and dovm draw 0.2 mile to forko Take left fork leading up out of draw for 0.5 mile to natural water hole (guZZler) in rocks in small gully on the right. Walk over and check water hole. Return to vehicle and continue south 0.) mile to fence. Turn around and return to starting point at base of cliffo Watch both sides of road and hillsides. Birds may occur ~here along route. CHUKAR PARTRIDGE CENSUS AREA CHASE DRAW Rio Blanco County ACCESS! Travel north on White Avenue, from its lntersection with Main Street in Rangely, for 0.7 mile to bridge over \fuiteRiver. Cross bridge and turn r:lght (east) and drive 0.4 mile to fork. Take right fork (straight) and drive 0 2 mile to fork at top of hill. Take left fork and drive 0.5 mile to another fork. Take right fork and drive 0.2 mile to two successive forks. Take left fork at both places and drive 0.3 rolla to intersection. Continua straight (north) on main road 106 miles, past fanced pond on leftp to sharp right turn in road at base of cliff and starting point for count. Pickup or jeep required 0 Q �-160- CHUKAR PARTRIDGE CENSUS AREA COLUMBUS CANYON Mesa County ACCESS. Travel north and west on U. S. Highway 50, from its junction with Grand Avenue in Grand Junction, for 1.4 miles to 25 Road. Turn right (north) and drive 2.6 ~tles to fork. Continue straight (north) on gravel road 2.1 miles and turn right (east). Drive on 0.2 mile and cross bridge over Highline Canal. Continue straight (north and east) on main road for 2.9 miles and take left fork by small dirt pile. Drive 1.8 miles and take left fork (straight). On 0.7 mile and take right fork (straight). Drive on main road 2.0 miles and take left fork. Immediately talee right fork just past previous fork. Drive 0.5 miles to end of recognizable road on top of hill. Pickup or jeep a.dvised due to variable conditlon of road. �-161to' .J I N C>; \ " '-"',,••••. ••1 ..•~. ..•..•... -, •• so '-' ..-- .•. 4 //C#~(1' r -+t-7'--f-M:---4-+-.:li~+--t Ul-'rl"'=' ••••. --ji--"--L-->-' -, \ •• •• .r , s. <, \ Rtt6'''''Dt:.,i_ -t---;---t-:---+---+---+-"::::""":--I-_ ......... •• or , I. II / CHUKAR PARTRIDGE CENSUS AREA DISAPPOINTMENT CREEK San Miguel County ACCESS. Travel south on Colorado Highway 80, from its junction with Colorado Highway 145 about three and one-half miles east of Naturita, for 27.1 miles and turn left (east and south) onto Disappointment ro~d. If approaching from the south, drive north on Colorado Highway 80, from the stores in Egnar, for 2).2 miles and turn right (east and south) onto Disappointment road. Drive east and south 5.5 miles to bridge over DisappointmAnt Creek and starting point for count. Accessible qy all vehicles. �-16:?- METHOD OF SURVEY:Drive slowly up Escalante Creek road from railroad track for 3.1 miles to "Dry Fork" turn-off. Drive up Dry Fork .of Escalante Creek for .6 mile, turn around and return to main Escalante Creek road. Continue up canyon for 4.3 miles to Capt' 8mith t S abandoned rock cabin. Turn around and return to Dry Fork turnoff. Drive round trip up " Dry Fork again. Continue down Escalante Canyon to small side road on your left (.2 mile west of Escalante Creek bridge). " Drive west and north on this road for approx. .5 mile to view irrigated fields on south side of Gunnison River. Return to Escalante Canyon road and railroad track for completion of surveyo Interview Shreeves, Huffington and Musser, as time permit.s-. Chukars may be observed throughout route, but concentrate in vicinity of irrigated fieldso 2 23 17 CHUKAR PARTRIDGE CENSUS AREA ESCALAN'IE CANYON Delta County ACCESS: Gravel road turning south off of U. S. Highway 50, 27.11 miles southeast of Colorado River bridge on south 5th street :in Grand Junction. Road is marked by sign "Escalante Canyon" at junction w:i th Highway SO. Drive south on Escalante road for 2.8 miles to railroad track and starting point for count. Accessible by all vehicles. �-163- I. ) 17 24 Ie .0 .9 last h.3 miles of Colorado H1 gh1¥8.Y Gateway from the east and north slowly (from Rio Hall's place on in). From Gateway drive round trips slowly down both secondary roads along the Dolores River to the state line (about 802 miles to the state line from Gateway on the north and east side and about 1.8 miles on the south and west side). Birds may be observed around irrigated fields, in open flats and around skunkbush thickets along both sides of the Dolores. Interview local residents to gain information on concentration areaso 141 approaching 17 _->.-_-1 .,~ . CHUKAR PARTRIDGE CENSUS AREA GATEWAY AREA Mesa County ACCESS: Travel State Highway 141 from Whitewater to the town of Gateway, if approaching from the east. Two secondary roads, one on either side of the Dolores River and generally paralleUng the river downstream. 'Iheroad on the north and east side of the Yblores starts at a. stop 81 gn .2 mi Le east of the DOlores River bridge. Access to the-road on the we~t sirle of the river is through a wire gate on the west side of the road, just west of the bridge. Travel by car is possible. Pick-up or jeep advi sed. �" r /1 -fzz y.z, I /;4 ~ ·~j··-+-f U; Zl \" 2Z Z3 METHOD OF SURVEY: Drive slowly up the canyon----road from the starting point. 'Ille lower l !tHy-grade Mine" is passed 1.1 mHes above the starting pOjnt, the middle mine and permanent water lies .5 mile above the Hygrade MIne, and the upoer mine is reached .6 mile above -----r--~~--~~~--~~----~~~~ the middle mine. Birds generally concentrate around the water just above the second mine I between 9:00 and 11:00 a.m. during late July. Birds may be scattered up and down the canyon from this point. From the upper mine, return over the same route to the starting pojnt. Interview mine operators regarding s ta tus of Z8 ,z --~,---i_ IZ 10 .: I. chukar-s, .. --1.J 14~ --\: 2' 30 29 ,,-/ . 31 32 \ CHUKAR PARTRIDGECENSUSAREA HUNTERCANYON Mesa County ACCESS: 'Ira vel 6. h miles north and west from juncti on of U. S. Hjghway 50 and Orand Avenue in Grand Junction to 21 Rd. North on 21 Rd. for 6.0 miles to hfghl i ne canal. Continue north of the canal on Hunter Canyon road for 6.3 miles to point Vlest of old reservoir and starting point for count. Accessible by all vehiCles. �-165- eo to ~f .4 " :::.\~'to.••.• ~..:rJ ee ~II\\\\'··., " to ('''' R' )? t... .. '-.t, s- •• l.'7;/1"" ~""""ill ~ """';I, .e -::::';: ;Ii ;;!" ~~. •• \~·i~ .•. ' ~~ \t ••• 1111' i l\\'\.~ i ."'~ ~ ~"'''''' "I\"~ %1111'''''/11111''- ,COldSprj",. ". I " •• 14 " .i'· METHOD OF SURVEY* Irish Canyon--Drive ,. slowly north on Irish Canyon road for 6.1 ,miles to Irish Lake. Turn around and driva back (south) 302 miles to guzzler located in pocket on left {east) side of road. Check guzzler' and continue south down Irish Canyon to starting point and •• and of Irish Canyon part of count. 'Hatch both sides of road and hillsides Birds may occur anywhere along route but tend •• to concentrate along the first three miles of the canyODo III III 00 0 " It Continue south 106 miles to north point ,of triangle junction and turn right onto +-----+---~+~----~--~~--~~---4---Brown's Park roado On.l.4 miles to southwest point of triangle junction. Continue straight (west) 0.2 mile to ~~~w.:G'~r~\-II----f-/.i'iic;f-t---+-driveway leading to Simpson e s ranch and ,~, starting point for Bull Canyon part of count .• •• Bull Canyon--Drive slowly north tet miles to rancho Turn around and return to -- starting poi nt, Interview local •• residents as time permf.t.s , Watch both •• sides of road, hillsides, and fields. --,-.-Chukar-s usually concentrate around ~ fields and pond below house. 14 IS ~ ==r-~-\-J J t • I ,-,- I ·• I...J! 1=-:--1 CHUKAR PARTRIOOE IRISH /.:1~-t-~I ' ' CENSUS AREA CANYON-BULL CANYON Moffa.t County ACCESS I Travel If.1est on Moffat County road 318, from its junction with Colorado Hight.my fA, ea.st of Mayboll, for 114.0 miles to tho southeast, point of the triangle junction formod by. Moffat County rond 318 and the Brownos Park roado Take right fork (straight) for 3 0 miles t.odriveway on the right leading east to ranch and starting point for count. Accessible by all vehicles •. 0 �-16t- METHOD OF SURVEYI Drive slowly north 0.,2 mile to north end of bridge over l-1cElmo Creek and turn left (west). On le6 miles to r-anch at end of road. Turn around and return to Bridge. Turn left (east), do not cross bridge, and drive 2 6 miles to ford. Turn around and return to starting point on south dde of McElmo Creeko Interview local residents as time permits. Watch both sides of road, hillsides~ and field edges. Chukars may oocur a~lhare along route but usualLy concontrate trom 0.5 to 1.1 miles west of bridge and from 1.1 to 2.6 miles east of bridge. 0 CHUKAR PARTRIDGE; CENSUS AREA McElMO CREEK Montezuma County ACCESS. TrA.vel south on U. S. Highway 666, from its junction with U. S. Highway 160 (Main Street) in Cortez, for 2c6 miles to airport road Turn right (west) and drive on main road 7.9 miles to road lending across McElmo Creek and starting point for count. Accessible by all vehicleso Q �-167- •• •• METHOD OF SURVEY S Creek road 0.9 mile and (north) off main roado • I •• ,. t. CHUKAR PARTRIDGE CENSUS AREA OAK CREEK Delta County ACCESS, Travel north on Colorado Highway 659 from its junction with Colorado Highway 92 four miles east of Delta9 for 6 miles to the Eckert Store. Turn left (west) and drive 107 miles to end of oil road at fork. Take left fork (west) and drive 0.5 mile~ past road leading south, and turn right (north) On 0,,4 mile to smaLl, bridge and starting point for count. Pickup or jeep advised due to variable condition of the rondo 0) 0 �-168- 11 16 20 22 23 26 32 24 to 30 33 MJ!:THODOF SURVEY' Drive slowly up valley for 9.0 miles. Turn around and return to start1ng po1nt. ~tch both sides of road, fields, and hillsides. Interview local residents as time permits. Birds may be observed anywhere along survey route. I~ 13 n 24 CHUKAR PARTRIDGE CENSUS AREA PARACHUTE CREEK Garfi eld County ACCESS: Turn west and north off U. S. Highway 6 and 2h at Grand Valley Drug Store in Grand Valley. Continue up gravel road for 1.2 mf Le s to an irr1gation canal and starting point. Accessible by all vehf.c Les , �-169- 10 Ie METHOD OF SURVEYs Prairie Canyon--Drive slowly up Prairie Canyon road 5Q8 miles to gas well on left (west) side of road. Turn around and drive ,,-, ..+cy__ -+'back 0,,8 mi~f), just past ga.te,to guzzler . situated in a small pocket on left (east) side of roado Check guzzler and return to starting -+-.....j-"--\\\-'+-\=-:Tr."::6-+....~'+'-fIY-+4-+--+- point by fence corner and end of Prairie Canyon part of routso Watch both sides of road and hillsides 0 Birds may occur anywhere along route -+--t--=-'-'Il:::;..IL--J---f--J but usually concentrate from mouth of canyon to gas 'Hello Drive 206 miles back to junction of 2 and 4 Roads and turn left (north)o Drive 404 ..miles to Mesa-Garfield County line and Jf-'U~'--I-starting point for West Salt Creek route. '''estSalt Creek--Drive slowly up main Baxter Pass road 507 miles to South Canyon road leading to #1 and #3 gas wells (markedb.y sign)., Turn right (north and east) and drive 14>0 mile to point opposite old corrals situated on left ~~--+-+---+-~~~~--~-(north) side of roado ~n around and return to Baxter Pass road and turn right (nor-th}, Drive 206 miles to north end of old ranch~ ~~~--~-r--~~~~~~~-+~~~Turn around and return to starting point at county lineo Watch both sides of road and ~ ,hillsides~ Birds may occur anywhere along route '"but usually concentrate from mouth of canyon \~!=:---+'r-- on UP4> ~.~.~~~~.I{-/. t ~~ _~~ =~~~~~~.-~~-r4d=~~ CHUKAR PARTRIDGE CENSUS AREA PRAIRIE CANYON_WEST SALT CREEK Mesa and Garfield Counties ACCESS 8 Tra,velwest on U. S. Highway 50, from the Ma.ckWash bridge on the west edge of Mack, for 108 miles to 8 Rondo Turn right (north) and drive 2.9 miles to S Roa.d. Turn left (west) and drive 6.2 miles to junction of 2 and 4 Roads (marked by sign). Turn left (west) and drive 2~6 miles to fence corner and starting point for counto Pickup or jeep advised due to variable condition of the roado �-170- -+~~.~.:~~~.~.-.~\~---+--~~~4-- '.i~:~.. J. 'Q NETHOD OF SURVEYI Red Rocks Ranch--Dri v» slowly north and east along main road 002 mile and take left fork. Drive 0031 : mile and take right fork r=."ft--tt.=-"'l"r---+---=d11 (straight). On 2.1 miles, ·past old ranch, and take right fork just past gate. On 008 ~-+--*.~~;r-+----~-r-~+---~~---+-__ mile and turn right (south). On 9.3 miles, past Orme ranch, • to bridge over canal b.1 ranch ~-~~~-+~ and end of Red Rocks Ranch part of route. Interview local residents as time permits. Watch both sides of road, hillSides, and field edges. Birds may occur arzy-t.:rhere along route but generally concentrate from 5.0 to 8 0 miles above starting pointo 0 Continue intersection. miles Canal South Canal--Drive slowly east and south along main road on north side of canal for 001 mile and take right fork (along cana'L}, On 003 mile to for-k, Continue straight ahead 0.6 mile and take left f'or-k, On 1e 6 mi.Les , do not cross canal, and take left fork (straight).· On 0.4 mile to tHO successive forks and take left fork (straight) each time. On 009 mile, do not cross canalp and take left forke On 0.5 mile and .take left fork. On 0.7 mile along main road and turn right (south) across canal and immediately turn left (east).. Drive 002 mile and turn left (east) onto highway. Continue east 0,,) mile and turn right (south) off high~·lay. Drive 0 3 mile and turn left (south) to canal. Turn right at canal and drive along north and west side 1.8 miles. Take right fork leading up hill and drive 5.5 miles to road leading to right (wast) away from canal and end of route. Hatch both sides of road and hillsides •. ChQ~arB may occur anywhere along route 0 Q CHUKAR PARTRIDGE CENSUS AREA RED ROCKS RANCH_SOUTH CANAL Montrose County ACCESS! Travel north and west on U. S. Highway 50p from its junction with U. S. Highway 550 in Montrosep for 006 mila to North Ninth Street., Turn right (north and east) 0.1 milo to Cascade Avenueo Turn left (north) and take North Mesa Road leading due north, east of airport, for 502 miles. Turn right (east) and drive 008 mile to canal and starting point for count~ Pickup or jeep advised duo to variable condition of the rOl.l.d~ �-17J- N A7,.. ...,..II~ .. 'li.~ll.l~.. ~ '--..Ii PARADOX ·'1~: '!4 •• •• -: ,.--+---+----jf------f------t----;ft ... . ~=~ "'t., MBTHOD OF SURVEY: Drive 3.3 miles "'est from Colo. Hi ghway IIJl (Delore sHiver road) to fork in road. Turn right at fork (marked by sign "Rajah") and drive .5 mile to clearing below mine. Return to fork and follow left fork upstream for 1. 5 miles to Lilian Joshlin's Ranch~ Return along creek and lower fields to highway Ihl. Interview local residents. B.irds normally concentrate around lower hay-fields and may concentrate around Lilian Joshlin t s R3.nch. U.S. ATOMIC ENEFt°r RESERVE • :.:;,;, , ... :;, 17 ~; : , , ts ~'_1 ,. CHUKAR PARTRIDGE CENSUS AREA ROC CREEK Montroce County ACCESS: Drive 22.1 miles south on Colorado Highway 1111 from the Dolores River bridge at Gateway to entrance to Jerome Craig's Roc Creek ranch and starting point for count. 'IUrn right and follow road past house , along lower fields and up along creek. Acce~sible by all vehicleso �-172- 14 13 J.lliTHOD OF SURVb.'Y: Drive slOlfly up right hand dirt road (Coal Creek) -- cross Salt 'Nash, take left hand road ju~t across wash, continue east and north around edge of fields and up canyon for miles from starting point to wire gate and spring seep in creek bed. Enroute up Coal Creek check the guzzler on north side of gulch miles up canyon from starting Doint. TUrn around at 1rlre gate and return to Stove Canyon road. Chukars in Coal Creek drainage will most likely be observed from about 1.0 to 3.0 miles above starting point. ,.6 2., Dr-ive slowly up Salt Creek road from starting point for B.O miles and return to starting pof.nb to complete survey. Chukars may be observed anywhere along route, but appear most frequently in area about 3.5 to miles above star-tf.ng point. 6., CHUKAR PARTRIDGE CENSUS AREA STOVE CANYON-COAL CREEK Mesa and Garfield Counties ACCESS: Travel 13.1 miles north and west from junction of U. S. Highway 50 and Grand Avenue in Grand Junction to 16 Rd. {west of Fruita}. North on 16 Rd. for 6.3 miles to highline canal. Continue north of high11ne canal for 6.5 miles to starting point for count. Accessible by all vehicles. �-173- OD .~ / 01 00 ) ,- ;\ fO J"'. ~ Dr /34 DO 56 .0 BASE I---f+-/j~~'! +---t---t-+- ·t~··:\) 00 METHOD OF SURVEYg Drive slol-Tlywest on main graveled road 302 miles to forko Continue straight (west) Oe5 mile to fork just before Wardell Ranch. Take left fork and drive 105 miles to stand of trees along river (Utah line)Q Turn around and return to main road by rancho Continue east 001 mile to fork. Take right fork and drive south on main road 306 miles along Cottonwood Cr-eek; Turn around and. return : to starting point by smal.I r-oad, v!atch both sides of ···'1'«.'.J: /. road, ht.Llsd.des, and field edgos , Birds may occur .... anywhere along route but usually concentrate near '~~ ..,,'~/t:A:-- fields west of Wardell W s and in greasewood-cheatgrass 4 •. fiats along Cottonwood Creek. ! ~, .. .' ~.I I',:'' ~.. CHUKAR PARTRIDGE CENSUS AREA WARDELL RANCH Rio Blanco County ACCESS. Travel west and south on oil road, from its junction with Colorado Highwa.y 64 at the west end of: Rangely (whore hf.ghway 64 veers north and wast), for 0.6 mile to end of' 01.1 road at l.ntersoctiOl1o Turn right (west) and drive on main graveled road 102 miles to junction. Continue straight (west) on main road 7.7 miles to small road leading off to left (south) and starting point for count~ Pickup or jeep req~irodo �CHUKAR PARTRIDGE CENSUS AREA WELL'S GULCH GUZZLER #1 Delta County ACCESS I Travel south and ea.st on U. S. Highway 50, from its junction with Colorado Hight-ray141 near Whitewater, for 15.9 miles to vlell's Gulch road on the left (cast) at bottom of hill by Lar-ge gr~.vel pile. Turn left (east) onto I-Jell's Gulch road and immedia.tely take left fork. Drive 0.1 mile and take right fork (straight). On 1.) miles and take left fork (straight). On 1.5 Hiles and take right fork (straight). On O.L,. mile end take right fork (left leads towards #7 guzzler). On 1.0 mile and take right fork (straiGht) just pnst fence. On 0.2 mile, to rie;ht (south) of smnll dirt piles, and park vehicle. Guzzler :1.8 situated on small knob straieht ahead (east) about one quarter mile. Pickup or jeep requirod. �-175- 14 •• T.2S. --+----1 METHOD OF SURVEYI Walk to guzzler and take position behind rocks about 200 feet behind fence north and east of guzzler. Observe '-~==~~--~~~-fguzzler with the aid of binoculars for a period of several hours. Chukars usually •• appear- between 6:00 a.m, and 9tOO a.m. 10 n 30 '0 10 j, CHUKAR PARTlUOOE CENSUS AREA HELL'S GULCH GUZZLER 1f7 Dol t.aCounty ACCESS a Travel south and east on U. So Highway 509 from its junction with Colorado Highway 141 near Hhitewater, for 15.9 mi.Le s to Well's Gul.ch road on the loft (east) at bottOn! of hill by large gravel pile. Turn left (east) onto ~vell's Gulch road and immed:\.lltelytake left fork. Drive 0 1 mile and take right fork (straight). On 1.3 miles and take left fork (straight). On 1.5 miles and take right fork (straight). On 0.4 mile and take left fork and park vehiclo. Guzzler is locatod about one half mile away in a northeasterly diroction on the south facing hillside across Well's Gulch. It lies in a horizontal crease below the ridr,o and to the left of the vertical line of trees in the draw Hhich is about in lino with the road. Pickup or jeep r-equt.r-ed , 0 �-176- N t~~~~~r-~--r-----+----r4-'--~'~-----+----~l~r----r~--~~---+-----+~j ~'fi~~~r-~---D~~~-+~~~~r~~~~~~~~---·fl· I.tt f~~~~~ Bifo.Z~~ I 28 Hill \ ",.l",/) 'I,;.::~l 27 METHOD OF SURVEYg Drive road 5s~' miles to Sutton's drivewaYe Turn around and drive back west and south on main T-~~~----~~--~~·~~~----~road 1.0 mile to driveway on right leading to Shult~osG Turn right (west) and drive in 0.3 mile to suspension bridge~ Walk ~'1--+---'<---:-:-t:- across bridge and survey fields along edge of hills both north and south of the mouth of Hillow Creek Canyono Return to vehicle. I--+---Itf=~~+---l-+--J!.\Return to main road and turn right (south)" Drive 1.1 miles and turn right (west) onto road leading to fieldso Drive in 0.1 mile :~~=+----'\---'H---l---...:...t--:: and turn left (south). Drive 0,,2 mile along east edge of fieldS to main roado Return to starting point by Colorado River bridge•. r-~~rlr_~~.~_~~__~ ~ __~~,Interview local residents as time permitsQ Watch both sides of road, hillsides, and ,.field edges , Birds may occur anywhere along k.~~~~h~W~~~----~----~~--~route but usually concentrate near fields beginning 3.0 miles above starting point•. ~~----t---tlt---f-"?:"';~~-+ A EJrc;· .8 CHUKAR PARTRIDGE CENSUS AREA WILLOW CREEK Eagle County ACCESS a Travel east on U. S. Highway 6 and 24, from its junction with Colorado Highway 82 in Glenwood Springs, for 18c4 miles to Eagle County road 301 at Dotsero (Sweetwater road)o Turn left (north) and drive 7.2 miles to junction just past Boy's Ranch& Continue straight (north) 0.7 mile to east aide of Colorado River bridge and starting point for counto Accessible by all vehicles. �-177TABLE 2. -- Summary of Chukar Partridge Young-Per-Adult Ratios, Western Colorado, 1955-1963. Year 1955 1956 1957 1958 1959 1960 1961 1962 1963 ALL YEARS Number of Young Observed 186 219 186 1,424 676 1,655 852 1,167 1 ,l~66 7,831 Number of Adults Observed 159 165 100 292 400 447 477 300 637 Young/100 Adults 117 133 186 488 169 370 179 389 230 2,977 263 TABLE 3. -- Summary of Chukar Partridge Brood-Count Data, Western Colorado, 1956-1963. Year Number of Broods Observed Number of Young 1956 1957 1958 1959 1960 1961 1962 1963 53 14 52 82 43 127 77 155 448 116 568 728 388 1,315 672 1,279 8.5 8.3 10.9 8.9 9.0 10.4 8.7 8.3 ALL yEARS 603 5,514 9.1 Average Brood Size �-17gHeavy rains during the major portion of the chukar census period may also have been a contributing factor to the low figures for this year's counts. Rains during the dry summer period result in wide dispersal of birds, making counting very difficult. These conditions were especially poor at guzzlers as counts here are dependent upon the birds coming into water. No work has been done on the affects wet weather might have on counting conditions as far as young per adult ratios are concerned. It would seem likely, though, that the two age groups would be scattered in near equal proportions. Peak of hatching. -- Notations were made on the number of broods observed and the approximate ages of these. Data from 127 broods observed and aged show the peak of hatching occurred about the third week in June. Intensity of hatching rose quite sharply during the first week in June and climbed steadily to a peak during the third week in June, after which it dropped abruptly. This year's peak coincides closely with those of previous years. Prepared by: Approved Richard M. Bartmann Date: AEri.~];..!.., 19.:...6.:-."!-t Printed Februnry, 1965 _ by: Wayne W. 5andfort Game Research Chief Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �-179JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH SEGMENT PROJECT State of COLORADO --~--~~~-------------- Pro jec t No ., Game Bird Survey W.:.:..-::,;37:.--..:R:,;:..-..:l:.:.7 _ Work Plan No •. Title of Job: Period Covered: ~4:.__ _ Job No •. __~1~2~ Su~narization and Publication Research Findings April _ of Chukar Partridge 1, 1963, through l1arch 31, 1964. ABSTRACT Very little was accomplished on this job because of the termination of the employment of Mr. Richard Bartmann, to whom the majority of work was assigned, and lack of sufficient time by Wayne Sandfort, because of the press of administrative duties. A realistic target date for completion of this manuscript is March 31, 1965. Recommendations: Findings from years of study on the chukar partridge in Colorado will be of considerable value in continued management of this species. It is strongly recommended time be made available for compiling and analyzing data on this research work and that a suitable pub1icatioh be prepared. Objectives: (1) To summarize all past work on the species in Colorado. (2) To publish the results of chukar partridge studies. Technigues Used: Plans for summarization and publication of chukar partridge research findings call for compilation of all data derived under Work Plan 4, Jobs 1 through 11, W-37-R and relating this to chukar investigations and findings by other organizations. Management practices and implication~ derived from this analysis will be described. Findings: Termination of the employment of Mr. Richard Bartmann as of September 1963 resulted in little progress on this publication. Responsibilities of Wayne Sandfort, Game Research Chief, also precluded substantial work toward completion of this job. Work assi~nments and organization of the game research program are now such that l1arch 31, 1965, is a realistic target date for completion of the manuscript on chukar research findings. Plans for continued activities on this project are described in Segment 18 of the Game Bird Survey project, Work Plan 4, Job No. 12. Prepared Date: by: Wayne W. Sandfort \p't'il, Approved by: Laurence E. Riordan Assistant Director, Research 1961. Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator ��-181- JOB CUl.TPLETION REPORT HESr.:.tI.HCH PHOJ r.:CT SEG1LE,'N'l' state of Project ~C~o~l~o~r=a~d~o No. _ Name Game Bird Survey Job No. __ ~l 11-37-R-17 _ 6 VTork Plan T itl e 0 f J 0 b__-..:.E::.::'x~bJr;:;c=-r..:::.i:::m:;;:e~n:..;t::.:u:::.;l~l~I.::a:.:::b:.. Period \,;overed April 1, 1963 through March )1, ~9~4 ABSTRACT Part I. rlindmill Cover JJeveloLJment Study Tree cactus we re planted to determine the species on and around the windmill development plots survival rate, protection and cover values. Tree and shrub planting ureaa during May, 1963. survival was recorded for all develo~ment Area and locality cover mapl:iwere completed. in addition sampline of vegetation on all study areas durinL June ~na July ~rovided an index of existing cover and food conditions. Brief summer and winter census checks on the study areas did not indicate the ~resence of any stable coveys of scaled quail • .Part II. Old Homestead DevelojJrnent Study Pheasant crowing indices on the old homestead study areas were completed. An analysis of the collected information showed the counts were not of value 3S indicators of habitat in~rovement effect on pheasunt populations, due mainly to unpaired positioning of the development and control study areas. An index of veeetative species, cover and food conditions was collected on all study areas during July. Study area maps provided information on cover (luality, donsity an d cover edge ana. c on t r c..st. A camera recording device installed on tl~ guzzler in development area -Ill du r Lrir; the La t e surnmer was lJartially successful in determinine water utilization by scaled quail and other \lildlife. Surnmer , prehuntini; seo eon an o winter census comparisons of the develojlment ant, control study ar-e c.s continued to build evidence of the value of hl~bitat i!lll)YCwer.1Cnt.(iHail retention from summer �-182- to prehuntine season to winter was comparable with that of previous years' resul t s , Hinter populations on the deve Lo pmen t areas continued to make g-ains over the controls. Hunting season checks on and near the areas indicated some increased pressure with the extended season and higher scaled quail populations, however, the prec6nta~e harvest was estimated to be similar to that of previous seasons. Many more birds were available to the hunter in 1963 with increased covey size and increased distribution of coveys. Part III. Brush Shelter Development Study A descriptive written record was completed for each of the brush shelter sections and their enclosed areas. Cover conditions were recorded in area maps. Considerable scaled ~uail use of the brush shelters was observed during summer, fall and winter checks. A three year regression comparison of the development bnd control populations indicated a significant increase in scaled quail on the development areas. This is attributed to brush shelter cover develovment. The brush shel terswere hunted by a number of pa.rt Le s during 1963 season, and a number of birds were removed. Part IV. Technical assistance in upland game bird habitat the development. Assistance and recommendations were provided to the Carrizo Forest Service District in several lines of endeavor. Survival of tree and shrub plantings were recorded at all sites by both species and location. Spring counts of lesser pralrle chicken booming grounds revealed continued increases in numbers of prairie chickens on and near the Carrizo Forest Service District lands. Ideas and factor8 rel1:!.ting to shrub cover sprayinG and it's effects on wildlife were discussed. Forage production ~djacent to and at progressive distances from yucca pl~nts were measured to determine the c~npetitive reduction effect yucca has on adjacent fo~age. No significant difference could be detected in forage production althour:h the me asured s arnp Le means of production .ve re proGressively hir;her w i th decreased d i s tance from the yucca plants. Tral)lJinrr, bun d i n.; and mu.ik i.nj, of scaled quail on the Schnaufer-Glover block developm8nt provided infonuation concerning the procedures needed by the Forest Service in census of these grouped areas. It u Ls o l)rovir.edinformatiun on f'a Ll, nrovemcn t s , stability of coveys, and of birds ~ithin Lhe coveys. �-183- Assistance was also provided to the Forest Service in development of a management plan for scaled qu~il in the Carrizo District. Reco~ilmenda tions: All phases and parts of the study should continue in an effort to determine the most beneficial and economical methods of habitat ir.c,provemen t. Ob,jectives: 1. To determine the value of water and cover deve Lopmai t s in increasing the range and numbers of scaled quail. 2. To cooperate with U.S. Forest Service personnel of the Carrizo District in the selection and. technical advice in the develol-'mentor surplus grazing tracts for upland game bird habi tat. Technigues 1. Used: \'IindmillCover Dev eLcpraent Study. A. B. C. II. Old Homestead A. B. C. D. III. Development B. C. D. B. Study Mapping of study areas ana localities by detail, vegetative cover, improvements and water. Compile data records of conditions ana changes. Determine existinG quiil populations by census. Determine the value of deveLopmen t work (by statistical an d other comparative me tho ds ) in: 1. IncreasinG ~resent populations. 2. kaintaininc popUlations for improved harvest. 3. Both (1) and (2) above. Technical A. Study. Census of study areas by summer counts, prehunting season counts, winter counts and. pheasant crowing counts. Hunter checks to determine pressure, success and h8.rvest. Bandine of quail to determine movement, survival and other factors. Determination of value of development work ( by statistical and other comparative methods) in : 1. Increasing present popul~tions. 2. Securing improved harvest of game bird popUlations. 3. Both (1) and (2) above. Brush Shelter Development A. IV. Study plot development. Suiumer- and w i n t.e r census of study areas. Cover mapping and measurement or vegetation. Af;S is tance In Upland Ga:ne Bird Hab ita t Dev e Lopmen t Coordinate planninG' ana advise in the selection of suitable upland Garne bird develol;lIIent areas. Advise (JJHl assist in ini Li aI habitat improvement work on the development ureDS. �EXPERDliBNTAL HABI'l'AT B1PROVEi.,EN'l' I<'OH SCALED q,UAIL Acknovrl ede;ements Sincere thanks are expressed to Donald Hoffman, Harold Hood, Howard Stiehm, Dave Bowden of the Colorado Department of Game, Fish and Parks; and to Elmer Miller and Jim Hollenbeck 6f the U.S Forest Service for assistance in various phases of the work. Hart 1. Winamill Cover Development Study The work year was initiated with tree cactus planting on the five development plots. A number of the transplants were placed outside the plots, at the corners and along the fences, to prevent cattle rubbing ana erosion. Plalltings within the areas were replacement for non-surviving tree and shrub plantings. Areas #1 through #5 respectively received 21, 47, 75, 72 and 34 cactus for a total of 249. Cactus varying in size from one to three feet were used to determine if larger plants would survive as well as smaller ones. Because tree cactus are slow growing, larger plants will potentially provide needed cover much sooner. Al though soil conditions were dry at the time of p'Lan ting and no moisture was received for over a month afterward nearly all the transplants survived. Tree and Shrub Survival: Planting survival was checked on the development plots during May, 1963. A continued decline in survival was recorded, however, no replanting attempt was made or is recommended. A complete summarization of windmill cover development efforts in combination with data from other planted areas will be submitted in the final writeup so is excJ.uded at this time. hlaPIJing: Locality and s t udy area maps were brought to completion. 'l'heseprov Lde d information on wlindmill loca.tions, roads , fences, Forest Service Lands, and other detail plus cover type overlays. Measurement of vegetation: A saIllpl,ing pr-oceduz-e was deve Lope d to provide a descriptive and comparative index of cover conditions on the study areas. Lines radiated in four directions (north, east, south and west) from the center of the study area. A square foot sample of es t i na ted percen t age s of shortgrass, m i dgr-as s , forb species, half-shrubs, litter and bare groun~ was recorded in front of every fifth pace, yeilding 50 estimates per 250 paces (approx. ~ mile). Thus 200 estimates were recorded per area. Direction of the lines deviated from the four ~rinciple directions only if an improved approximation of the different percentages of vegetative types could be provided. A square foot hoop was used through most of the work to improve ocular estimates. Field work vias completed during �-185- the early part of July, 1963. Recorded data are summarized tables _8_ through !L in the appendix. in Fall, winter and spring moisture conditions prior to data collection hud been below nonuul, however, rains during June stimulated plant growth so that the early July measurements were not believed far from what coulti be normally expected. The disturbance by livestock around windmills generally provides an a ttrac tive f'e edi.ng location for scaLed quail if favorable co v er conditions are present. Forb production is stimulated, especially if the pasture is allowed to rest occasionally through a growing season. Although food may be adequate at these sites cover is generally lacking in the shortgrass pasture~ and efforts to estkblish it have not been successful to date. Census: No permanent coveys or indication of their presence were found on the study areas du.ri ru; the brief summer and 'Hinter checks. Part II. Old Homestead Development Study Pheasant Census: Although the pheasant crowing counts' value had been questionable, the 1963 index on the old homestead ·areas provided evidence that they were not doing the intended job. Therefore, an analysis o~ the three year effort has been completed and included here along with expected effects of habitat improvement on pheasant populations. A comparison of 1961, 1962 and 1963 average crowing rates per area locality provides an indication of population change (Table !). 'l'hecensus technique has. varified weather records for Baca County which indicate that it is one of the more windy locations in Colorado. This should be considered in future attempts at sound counting in this region wherein a number of calm or near calm mornings are needed. Such mornings arc certainly infrequent during the spring perio~. Analysis of Pheasant Census: The pheasant crowing counts on the old homestead study areas have been conducted in an effort to detect possible changes in pheasant populations as a result of habitat irnprovement m an i.pu Lations. 'I'hey have been termina ted at this time because the LnI'o rma tion they revealed is cons idered too unreliable to be of value in determining habitat improvement effects, if any, on pheasant populations. Visual census mayor may not indicate increased use of the development areas, but it will not indicate whether habitat improvement has or hasn't increased pheasant populations. Increased area use may merely mean an increased concentration of the birds due to improved cover conditions. Accurate census of the entire study section by visual counts of pheasants can not be accomplished by present methods. �-186- Table 1• A comparison of Pheasant crowing rates on the homestead development and control area localities.* Area Development Control 1961 3.5 1962 10 9.5 15 2.5 10 5. 6. 16.5 11.5 13 10.5 Average 10.8 8.4 * The average of the t'NOhighes t crowing 1. 2. 3. 4. 5 1963 11 1961 16 20 4.5 9.•5 3 1962 13.5 15 5 1.5 6.5 4 7 5 5.5 12.5 1963 31 25.5 5 1 4.5 9.5 8.2 9.25 8.83 12.75 rates per area. Not all the old homestead control areas could be located near the d.evelopment areas. Therefore, it was necessary to assume pheasant population trends would fluctuate in a like manner throughout the region of the study. However, annual population changes have apparently varied with locale, resulting in differences between control and development pheasant popUlations. As a result any Change in popUlations as an effect or habitat improvement could not be measured against the controls. The developed stUdy areas are all relatively small in size, averaging The effect of these small areas on pheasant populations would seemingly have to be dramatic to be detected by the crowd.ng census, which is conducted when the birds are widely dispersed, and which covers a rather larGe locality around each site. Significantly increased pheasant numbers should be detected on the study areas during winter concentration perio~s it the spring crowinG count showed a populution increase resulting from habitat development. 15.2 acres. In summary "ie Can say t.hut if phe as s.n t population changes h ava occurred as a resul t of habi tat improvement, census me thods have proven too inaccurate or unreliab~ to detect them. Expected effects of habitat improvement: The pheas6nt crowing counts, while inadequate as a direc t method of detec ting h ab i t.at improve!Iien t effec to on ph easan t l;opulcl tions, huv e provided a f r-amcwo r-k upon wh i ch a strong hypothesis of expected results can be projected. A positive correlation exists be~~een increasine percentaGes of farmlands ana increasinG numbers of pheasants in this old homestead study region where sandscge is the predominent range type of grasslmd. �-187- Highest pheasant populations are found in transition areas between better cultivated farmlands and dense sandsage rangeland areas. Soil bank lands also are a factor in increasing pheasant populations, however, these fields are of an annual weed type which generally does not provide quality cover as found on the rangelands and the old homestead study areas. This would indicate cover as found on the large rangeland blocks is evidently not a limiting factor. As the development sites are located within the grassland areas rather than interspersed within cultivated locations lacking in quality cover their added cover value for pheasanm would not be expected to be significant. The presence of water ana increased weed seed availability considered of major importance to pheasants. are not Measurement of vegetation: Sampling of vegetation on the old homestead study areas duplicate d techniques used on the windmill study area.s. Field measurements were taken during July, 1963. Tables 12- through 12- in the Appendix provide a condensed summarization of the findings. A general similarity of vegetation density is noted on the development and control area groups. Higher amounts of forbs and litter on the development sites is probably partially a result of fenced exclosures within the sampling areas. Half-shrub and midgrass occurrence provides an index to area cover conditions as do forb amounts and species to food availability. Additional information in this line may be provided in future comparisons of forbs and cover with foods consumed and quail numbers on the areas. A list of forb species found on the study areas is provided in table 20· Guzzler water utilization: A crunera recording device, which was installed at homes tead development area ill, was partially successful in r-ec or dd.rg guzzler water utilization by scaled quail and other wildlife. Components of the mechanism included a photo-electric cell and light source, installed across the entrance of the guzzler tank, which were connected to a solinoid operated 8 mm. movie camera. An animal entering the guzzler to drink would' break the light beam accuating the single-frame-advance camera thus recording the animal on film. The camera contained an electric eye which allowed it to adjust to variable light conditions thus recording all daytime activity. A battery powered clock VJas installed so that the time of each entrance into the guzzler was also photogra£hed. �-188- Information obtained as of January 1, 1964 indicated considerable guzzler utilization by scaled qua'il and occasional cottontail use. An automatic shut-off device which operates in case the light beam is broken more than 45 seconds has apparently caused numerous shutdowns of the 6 volt system. Therefore, continuous week to week guzzler water utilization has not been recorded to date. 1esser prairie chickens, pheasants and bobwhite quail reside in the vicinity of Area #1, however, no record of their drinking has been recorded. Census Results: Census of the old homestead development areas followed the pattern set during previous years. Summer, prehunting season, and winter counts are presented in tables -2l through ~ in the Appendix. Because of the steady upward trend in the scaled quail population since the start of the study, a regression comparison was used, by Dave Bowden, to test for trend differences between the development and control area winter populations. Development area #6 was necessarily excluded from the analysis for numerous reasons as described in last year's completion report (illigal hunting, locatio~ etc.). Table -1- Regression analysis of the old homestead development control area scaled quail winter populations. Ly2 D.F. :.?:dy.x 25 30 5543.2 4921.8 18 22 4188.96 4921. 50 55 187 10465.0 40 41 9110.46 9829.20 ~X2 Development Control 19 23 Wi thin Common 42 Difference Wi thin 1 40 2 ~XY 184 3 D.F. D.F and Sum of squares Mean square F 718.7 227.8 3.15 718.7 9110.46 Fl,40at .05 = 4.08 This test did not distinguish the development and control scaled quail winter population trends as being significantly different with 95 percent confidence although the results closely approach this. Prehunting season census resul ts were nottested, however, visual inspection of their three year regression trend (figure 1.) adds additional strength to the belief that habitat improvement has been a major influence on the capacity of the development areas to attract and retain scaled quail through the fall and winter period. �-189- 50 Figure 1. Summer, fall and wiater regression trend comparisons of the old homestead development and control area scaled quail popula.tions. S c a 1 e d Q u a i 1 40 35 p e r 30 A r e a 25 20 15 10 5 Summer Summer Summer Winter Fall Winter Fall Vlinter Fall Winter 60-61 61-62 62-63 63-64 �-190- I also interpret the summer to prehunting season differences shown in figure --L.. as additional evidence of the improvement areas' resting cover attraction. The similar development and control area Bummer trends provl.ded evidence that both groups have fairly close equality, if not as no s t Lng habitat, at least as brood rearing habitat. Hunting SeE,son: While census comparisons indicated there were more scaled quail on the development areas, hunting season inspection showed they also received more hunting pressure than the controls. It became obvious, with the longer season (November 9 - 24) and increased numbers of hunters afield in 1963, that the old homestead development areas were more attractive to hunters. Both hunter contacts on the areas and observation of sign (vehicle tracks, etc.) provided evidence of this. It would be nearly impossible to measure the influence this pressure difference has on winter populations, even if hours hunted and birds removed were known for each area. The other variables and their interactions are simply too numerous to measure. For this reason the prehunting season census figures are probably the best indicators of true values of habitat improvement. Preliminary band return results indicate that population differences brought about by different degrees of harvest between the two groups would probably be overcome by spring, summer and fall quail dispersions. Therefore, future fall populations on the two study groups would not be greatly effected by different harvest rates. It is believed that scaled quail relocate in the fall in respect to the quality of resting cover on the areas. Seventy-three hunters (including repeats) were contacted by Donald Hoffman ana myself. Most of these contacts were m~de after the opening weekend of season. The hunters had obtained 244 scaled quail and 10 bobwhite during approximately 210 hours of hunting. This condenses to 3.48 birds per hunter ana 1.21 birds per hour hunted. A majori ty of the contacts we re made in the east half of the study region which retains the higher quail populations and receives the majority ~f the hunting pressure. The low pheasant ana bobwhite numbeTs, as revealed in summer and prehunting season census counts, were evident in the kill figures. Hunter success on either species was minute. Of 309 scaled quail ag~during the hunting season, 114 were classified as adults and 195 were young birds. The ratio of adult to young was 1 : 1.71 respectively. �-191- Banding and Marking: A few quail were banded during the lute winter of 1962 to determine procedures for further operations. Major enactment of the work was withheld until the first part of 1963. It was renewed and completed during the fall of the same year. Bai t traps were used during a majority 01' the operations. Consecutively numbered size #4 leg bands (stamped "Colo. Game & Fish, Denver) were used on all quail. In addition 100 each of red and yellow consecut~ely numbered plastic leg bandettes were tried in unison with the others during the first part 01" 1963. Back tags of several colors were used to murk some of the quail at each trapping location. A general breakdown of when and where the 315 scal~d quail and 60 bobwhite were banded is provided in the following table. Table-L Record of quail banding in the Southern Baca County study region during 1962-1963. Number banded Location Date Old homestead development areas Febr.-March 11 1962 2 Jan. -Febr. 1963 Species Scaled quail Bobwhite 45 '40 45 Scaled quail Boowhite Scaled quail Old homestead control sections Jan., Febr., March Brush shel ter development areas March, 1963 10 Scaled quail Locations near study sec tions Jan. , Febr. , March Scaled Quail Bobwhite Glover-Schnaufer Block Development Jan., Febr., Oct. , Nov., & Dec. 1963 64 1 140 17 315 60 Scaled Quail Bobwhite Total 1963 1963 Scaled quail Bobwhite Band returns and retrap results indicated that the colored bandettes do not stand up well over an 8 to 10 month period. The plastic weakened and broke, and the numbers became hard to distinguish. In one case the bandette had slipped over the foot crippling the bird. The data indicate considerable movement by scaled. quail during the spring and summer. The ave r-a.;edis tance between banding site ana. kill or retrap site was 1.8 miles. �-192- Table --L 1963 scaled quail band return information. Band Number Date Banded Age Banded sex Date killed or retrapped Time Interval 716 2-21-62 Ad. M. 1-30-63* 11}2 mo. 122 3-7-62 Ad. M. 1-30-63* 11-9-63 l~~) 3}2 + Yr. 2 mi. 1}2 2 mi. 2~ + 2 mi. 1}2 2mi. Age Killed Distance Traveled o o 13 1-17-63 Yg. M. 11-10-63 14. 1-17-63 Ad. M. 11-10-63 10 84- 1-29-63 F. 11-9-63 1-29-63 Yg. Yg. 9}2 9}2 9}2 M. 10-16-63* 8~ o 91 1-30-63 Ad. M. 10-14-63* 8~ }2 mi. 110 2-1-63 Ad. F. 11-9-63 9 2}2 + 2 mi. 159 2-21-63 Ad. F. 11-?-63 8~ 2~ + 201 3-27-63 Yg. M. 11-?-63 l}2 220 2-29-63 Ad. 10-11-63 Yg. F. M. 11-9-63 11-?-63 7}2 7}2 }2 mi. 7 mi. 2}2 + 1 ~ 326 + The minimum possible age. Actual lY' mi. }2 mi. age unknown'. Colored back tags of fabric backed vinyl plastic were placed on 30 scaled quail and 8 bobwhite in the early part of 1963. Tagged birds were observed for a brief period thereafter at the trapping loca~ions. No birds were observed or reported observed during the spring and Bummer so little information was obtained. Additional tagging of quail was conducted in October, 1963 on the Schnaufer-Glover block development. Preliminary results of this data are provided in part IV. Part III. Brush Shelter Development Study Mapping and data records were prepared on all study sections revealing vegetative cover types, water, trails, fences, drainages and other detail. The descriptive records also provided information on quail present, availability of requirements, locational information and other descriptive characteristics of the areas. Table 27 shows the results of the brush shelter census during the summer-;;nths. This was a census only of the brush shelters themselves. More thorough searches of all areas were conducted in October (table 2.a..,J , and again in December (table ~) ~ �-19.3- The regression comparison of the predevelopment (1961-62) to 1963-64 winter population trends on the study areas indicated a significant difference between development and control area data. Figure 2 presents this graphically. ---Table -2-. Regression analysis of the brush shelter development control area scaled quail winter populations. and 2 d.f. ~X2 2. XY Ly2 d.f. Development Control 35 35 24 24 108 6 1881.64 687.22 34 34 1395.64 685·72 Wi thin Common 10 48 114 2568.86 68 69 2081.75 2298.11 Square F Difference Within D.F. Sum of Squares 1 216.75 2081.36 68 Mean ~ dy.x 7.08 216.75 30.61 Most of the coveys on the brush shelter development sections were hunted this year whereas they had not been last year. Quail removal was unknown on section I-D. On section 2-D 19 scaled quail and 6 bobwhite were known removed. This is believed fairly close to the actual harvest there. Few birds were available on the remaining sections and no hunting was known to have occurred. S a 1 e 9 8 d l.i u a i Fig. ~ Regression Comparison of the brush shelter development and control area winter population trends of scaled quail. 7 6 1 5 p e li- r A 3 r e 2 control a 1 Area tren d --------------------- - _36- - _. __N :. 0 Vlinter Winter WintEr 6l-()2 62-63 63-64 �-191.- Part IV. Technical Assistance In Upland Game Bird Habitat Development Close cooperatitive association and coordination with personnel of tm U.S. Forest Service, Carrizo District, was, I believe highly beneficial to both parties concerned. It has provided information valuable to the study as well as to the management planning of the Forest Service. Initial work this year included a census of lesser prairie chickens on their booming grounds, showing their continued population increase on Forest Service land. The census gave an indication of lesser prairie chicken numbers on and near both old homestead and brush shelter study areas so that comparisons could be made with habitat improvement utilization by the species. It also furnished background information to the Forest Service for their multiple-use planning. Census results (table ~) indicate increasing populations on and near old homestead development areas #1, #2 and #3 and near the brush shelter areas. I have not as yet flushed this species from within any of the developments. Table 6 1963 display ground high counts of lesser pralrle chickens on and near U.S. Forest Service land in Baca County, Colorado. Name of Ground Dye-Glover A Dye-Glover B Dye-Glover C Dye-Glover D* Dye-Glover E* M. Lowder Shell Oil Hanes A D. Chick. Perkins-Tanner * Display ground Location S.27, S.ll, S·3, S·9, S.35, S.24, S·33, S.17, S.8, S.32, T34S. , R44w. T35S. , R44w. T 35S. , R44w. T35S. , R44w. T34s., R44w. T34s. , R44w. T34s. , R44w. T34s. , R43W. T34S. , R45W. '1'34S. , R46w. Cocks Hens 20 2 4 0 0 1 11 0 0 0 17 1 0 0 19 0 0 0 0 5 located during 1963 census period. Unclass. Total 0 0 15 0 3 0 7 7 13 0 22 4 16 11 3 18 7 26 13 5 Rangeland Revegatation: Sagebrush spraying, which was scheduled for a portion of the district grasslands was cancelled by the Forest Service during the spring due to existing drought conditions. Prior to cancellation the proposed areas were inspected with the District Ranger, Mr. Elmer Miller, and procedures of spraying were discussed that would be least harmful to upland game birds. Yucca, which is considered the most valuable cover for quail and other game birds in most of the District may also be included for future reveeetation removal by the Forest Service. Because of the uncertainty of a competitive conflict between yucca and Grasses a brief study was established to determine if major competition existed. �-195- A portion of pasture I-AE was selected which contained a dense stand of side-oats grama which had not been grazed boY livestock after reseeding and prior to the tim~ the data was collected. Seed had not been harvested from the location for at least three years prior to the test. In other words, extraneous factors were largely eliminated. The location was sparsely vegetated with young to mature yucca plants or plant groups. Yucca of mature status were randomly selected because the older yucca would most logically have had the greatest effect on surrounding vegetation. At each yucca plant or plant group square foot samples of vegetation were removed adjacent to the plant on the north, east, south and west sides. Lines were projecte~ with the aid of a pole, in the four directions and additional square foot plots of vegetation were removed at 3, 12 and 20 foot from the edge of the yucca plant. All vegetation was removed at ground level, sacked, labeled, allowed to thoroughly air dry and later weighed. An analysis of varience test was run on the tabulated data. . Table -1- A measure of yucca effect on surrounding side-oats grama forage production. June, 1963. Adjacent Mean (Oz./sq.ft.) Sample Size Summation Among Within Total 2.16 35 75,7 Analysis of Varience d.f. Sum squares 3 116 119 12 feet 1.9·1 25 47.7 3 feet 1.96 25 49.1 2.37 90.33 9~.70 20 feet 1.80 35 63.1 Table Mean square F .79 .75 1.05 The F value was not significant indicating that if yucca had an effect on surrouding vegetation it could not be detected. Inspection of the trend of the means would lead us to believe that if significance were achieved with greater sample size; it would be toward more forage production closer to the yucca. Shading, snow accumulations and protection from wind are factors which might influence this. Dense yucca stands/where little quality grass is produced,are more typical of the locations where yucca removal would be initiated. This test was necessarily run in sparse yucca cover to prevent interference by other yucca plants. I can not say that results would be the same on dense yucca locations but they would expectanctly be if other variables were similar. �-196- About the best conclusions 1 can derive from the test are that more work a.long this line should be conducted, and that all factors should be considered before major efforts at yucca cOver removal are enacted. Schnaufer-GJover Block Development: In their continuing efforts to economically" increase upland game bird populations, the Carrizo District personnel enacted a new method of habitat manipulation in 1963. Fifteen new areas were established in a group in the sand sage cover type of pasture I-A. Because of their layout and location, I refer to this complex as the Schnaufer-Glover block development. Individual sites within the block each contain a guzzler and in addition some contain a brush shelter and/or feeder. Fence~ exclosures were not included. Instead tree cactus were planted around the installations to furnish protection from livestock and offer cover to the quail. The distance between the areas averaged about one-half mile. Jim Hollenbeck and Elmer Miller routinely checked these areas through the fall of 1963. They found between 100 and 200 scaled quail using the group during this period. ~o pre development census was conducted in the locality, however, searches of areas with comparable cover conditions lead us to suspect that few if any quail Vlould normally be found in this type of cover during late fall and winter. The brush shelter control areas are an example of this type of situation. To determine how stable the quail were at these sites we trapped and banded 140 scaled quail and 17 bobwhite during the fall period. 76 scaled quail and 7 bobwhite were back-tagged. Figure -2- shows observed movemen t.sof back-tagged birds wi thin the development complex during October, November and December. Some of this movement may have resulted from trapping and census, however, most was assumed to be normal travel. Considerable interchange was noted, indicating that brood coveys were not staying together but instead were mixing, grouping and regrouping. Hunting was known to have occurred within the block. at only one or two locations SpeCies Management Plan: Assistance was provided to the Carrizo District personnel in the developmental stages of management plans for scaled quail and other upland game birds in the District. �-197- l"igure..l... Fall movement Schnaufer-Glover observations of scaled quail in the Forest Service Block Development Oct.-Dec., Unit 1963 r - - - 0 ------ --------------------- ----------'-----i , 8 I I I I I •, I I ' , 16 I o 10 I o :7 '0' 6 o 15 o 3 •I :!/~~ : 01 I I L J , Scale o () Unfenced development lmi. sites c:> Fenced development �-19S- Append:ix: Table -1L . Vegetative cover percentage indices on the windmill development areas. July, 1963 Area Short Grass Mid Grass Litter Bare Ground Forbs Half Shrubs 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 10.05 14.15 2.2 .25 9.80 10.00 0.00 1.95 5.68 1.25 19.03 12.01 6.02 1.65 8.63 59.10 12.65 19.15 80.92 15.15 1.82 .33 4.13 5.50 5.18 0.00 .80 0.00 0.00 0.00 Mean 7.29 4.98 10.68 73.51 3·39 .16 Table -L. Vegetative Area Short Grass Mid Grass Litter Bare Ground Forbs Half shrubs 12. 3. 4. 5. 2.40 24.10 1.25 5.50 8.25 8.20 .83 9.58 5.76 3.28 27.43 10.45 10.38 13·55 8.75 59.22 62.75 74.62 72.41 76.55 2.75 1.25 4.15 3.40 2.60 0.00 .15 0.00 0.00 .57 Mean 8·30 5.53 14.11 69.12 2.83 .26 cover percentage indices on the windmill control areas. July, 1963 �-199- Table -1Q A comparative Species index of forb species occurrence on the percent of area occupied on the Windmill Development Areas. July, 1963. Area 1 Russian thistle 64.38 Lamb's quarter 4.11 Sunflower Malva spp. 6.85 Prostrate pigweed Psoralea Kochia 1.37 Buffalo Burr Sweet clover Evening star fl. 1.37 Milk Purslane Cocklebur Purslane 1.37 Western ragweed 1.37 Fleabane Devil's claw Unidentified 19.18 Appendix based 2 ~ 4 :2 Mean 30.77 37·58 22.42 20.00 2.42 .61 .61 2.42 17·27 13.64 19.09 9·09 6.82 9.55 13·64 18.84 14.01 4.83 16.43 13·53 3.86 27.43 14.62 12.54 9.88 6.45 5.16 5.01 2.65 1.91 1.62 1.47 1.33 1.33 1.03 .15 .15 7.23 38.46 8.21 6.25 6.06 .45 3.86 4.35 3.86 9.55 .48 1.45 ·91 3.64 30.77 4.24 Table -ll A comparative index of forb species occurrence based on the percent of area occupied on the Windmill Control Areas. July, 1963 Area Species 1 Kochia 22.73 18.18 Psoralea Lamb's quarter 6.36 Russian thistle 32.13 Malva spp. Sunflower Evening star f1. 7.27 Western ragweed Horse nettle Canadian thistle 4.55 Buffalo burr Opuntia Purslane Prostrate pigweed Fleabane Milk Purslane .91 Sweet clover Unidentified 7.27 2 ~ 4 :2 Mean 60.00 4.00 31.93 6.02 30.12 13.86 3.61 .60 1.47 40.44 21. 32 2.21 9.56 9.56 25.96 8.65 3.85 4.81 20.19 3·85 24.20 16.96 15-90 11.84 9·01 3·18 1.41 1.24 1.06 .88 .88 .70 .53 .53 ·53 .18 .18 10.78 22.00 4.22 4.41 .60 .60 .60 3.85 2.21 .74 2.21 14.00 7.83 .74 5.15 1.92 1.92 25.00 �-200- Table 12 Number of forb species hit occurrences development areas. July, 1963 Species Appendix on the windmill Area 1 2 ~ 4 !2 Total 4 26 17 4 12 1 23 20 17 18 16 12 18 9 18 14 3. 1 11 5 85 52 46 39 28 15 14 13 8 7 6 5 4 2 2 1 38 365 Russian thistle Lamb's quarter Malva spp. Sunflower Prostrate pigweed Buffalo burr Kochia Psoralea Purslane Milk Purslane Western ragweed Sweet clover Evening star fl. Fleabane Cocklebur Devil's claw Unidentified 20 3 3 6 6 5 18 2 1 3 Total 37 13 77 123 115 Table ~ Number 1 3 9 4 7 6 1 1 1 5 1 2 3 5 of forb species hit occurrences control areas. July, 1963 on the windmill Area Species 1 2 :2 4 12 20 12 3 11 2 12 16 10 Total 5 5 42 38 41 40 31 13 4 Russian thistle Lamb's quarter Kochia Malva spp. Psoralea Sunflower Buffalo burr Purslane Western ragweed 0Euntia spp. Prostrate pigweed Horse nettle Fleabane Evening star fl. Milk Purslane Canadian thistle Sweet clover Unidentified 22 4 13 5 5 6 7 14 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 37 Total 51 19 66 68 59 263 4 4 8 2 5 5 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 2 3 10 15 4 2 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 3 �-~01- Appendix Table 14 . Vegetative cover percentage Lno icies on the old homestead development Cireas. July, 1963. Area Short Grass Mid Grass Litter Bare Ground Forbs Half-Shrubs .85 .85 6.93 5.40 2.95 5·57 3.15 2·58 L~. 43 13.17 1~.60 14.35 15.46 12.85 11.79 63.97 58·32 52·35 60·34 62.65 66.54 7 .l~5 15·50 20.13 10.15 16.82 12·52 7.63 7.33 10.22 5.64 3.45 0.71 13.37 60.70 13.76 5.83 1. 2. 3· 4. 2.84 1.08 5· 6. 5.86 1.91 Mean 'fable ..12. Vegetative cover percentage indicies on the old homestead control areas. July, 1963. Area Tall Gra.ss Short Grass Mid Grass Litter Bare Ground Forbs Half Shrubs l. 2.49 2.12 .82 7.00 10.85 4.40 1.32 4.46 7·95 5.00 1.93 5.83 3.48 10·31 10.58 9·70 9·60 13.90 15.15 64.41 67.25 70.05 76.02 68.30 6.55 3·55 5·95 59·75 9.66 9·85 2·30 1.65 5.60 6.73 13·58 4.42 4.73 11.54 67.63 5.96 5·27 2. 3. 4. 5· 6. l.1ean .41 1.96 �-202- Appendix Table ~ A comparative index of forb species occumrence based on the percent of area occupied on the old homestead development areas. July, 1963. Area Species 1 2 3 4 5 6 48.28 39.30 61.47 52.45 78.63 Red root 3.35 .96 30.40 31.80 2.27 9.50 11.11 Sunflower 1.68 18.65 3.72 4.25 1.93 5.42 Lamb's 4.36 10.80 .12 3·96 7.43 1.41 4.68 Psoralea .35 8.81 .20 3·17 8.05 6.23 1.42 .74 Rag-weed 3·35 .48 8.22 8.06 4.72 4.02 1.94 3.97 4.25 3.27 ·35 1.29 5·83 1.42 2.53 2.40 3·12 2.28 ·30 2.25 Kochia 7·72 1. eO Texas croton 6.54 1. 51 .15 .96 Russian thistle quarter Morning Malva glory spp. Milk Purslane Goat-head 4.03 Pursla.ne 7.38 .16 1.93 2.01 3.70 star flower2.68 .48 Prostrate Evening .62 6.04 Fleabane pigweed 2.73 3.72 ·57 48.63 3.14 .81 3.14 1.61 3.11 .92 .20 .25 1.70 Sweet clover .89 .77 .45 .68 .37 3.40 jlild clover Alfalfa Wild Mean 2.22 gourd .33 2.83 ·30 .09 1.01 Lupine Devil's claw Buffalo burr .25 .06 .28 .03 V{ild lettuce Unidentified* * Mostly .03 2·97 small composites which were not considered importance to game birds. .60 3.48 of major food �-203- Appendix Table 1.1.- A comparative index of forb species occurrence based on the percent of area occupied on the old homestead control areas. July, 196~. Area Species 1 Russian thistle 2 3 4 5 6 Mean 49.24 2.11 1.58 11.10 24.54 33.94 2.11 25·53 18.59 1.40 Purslane Malva Spp. 2.05 8.~8 1~.04 8.51 1.43 6.66 Milk Purslane 1~.28 1.02 5.43 5.85 3.12 Sunflower 1.02 8.88 2.66 .31 5.55 4.81 Kochia 6.1~ 12.25 2.60 Ragweed 2.92 6.09 Cocklebur 4.39 1·81 1.09 18.48 9·09 1.51 2.91 4.444.44 ~.40 3.11 Horsetail 2.05 Red root 2.96 2.19 Psoralea 21.21 2.14 2··92 1.52 22.12 2.14 4.09 1.21 12.12 2.01 Lamb's quarter .29 3.55 Buffalo burr 1.46 2.54 Prostrate pigweed Goat head 2.00 2.11 6.06 4.25 Texas croton 4.35 1.06 Fleabane 6.52 1.60 Morning glory 10.81 Canadian thistle 1.11 1.18 2.66 1.12 .81 .31 .14 .14 .14 .61 .25 Sweet clover .61 Milkweed 3.03 Evening starflower Senecio .52 2.60 .52 .01 .25 Clammy weed Unidentified* .14 4.68 6.35 16.30 9.09 4.19 * Mostly small composites which were not considered importance to game bird species. 11.15 1.48 of major food �18 Table Number Appendix of forb species hit occunences on the old homestead development areas. July, 1963 Area Species 1 2 3 4 5 6 Total 31 6 51 84 39 102 403 16 1 11 3 28 93 21 8 11 6 Ragweed 21 21 8 4 Sunflower 3 32 8 2 8 Malva 8 6 10 10 10 1 51 8 21 35 1 34 Russian thistle Red root quar+e r- Lamb IS spp. 4 Psorelea 1 2 20 9 1 Milk purslane 1 5 11 4 6 Purslane 11 1 1 1 1 Koc h i.a Morning Prostrate pigweed Fleabane Evening star 4 9 5 5 7 7 2 2 3 33 6 1 3 18 1 17 1 13 13 11 Sweet clover 1 Texas croton 2 6 Alfalfa 6 9 8 5 5 3 Wild clover 3 2 Lupine 21 1 3 2 Devills 53 18 glory 10 54 Goat head 2 101 2 1 claw 1 BuTtJalo burr 1 1 Gourd 1 1 1 Wild Lettuce 1 Unidentified 13 13 11 10 5 1 53 'l'otal 135 187 251 96 200 157 1026 �-205- Appendix Table 1..2..... Number of forb species hit occurrences on the old homestead control areas.* July, 1963. Area Species 1 2 Russian thistle 56 67 2 Malva spp. 6 16 Western 6 18 13 19 ragweed Sunflower 5 6 Total 5 11 28 169 4 2 8 10 46 13 1 4 42 2 Purslane Milk Purslane 16 Kochia weed 11 Prostrate 4 3 pigweed Red root 4 2 2 2 5 Psoralea 2 1 3 4 2 11 3 11 1 36 21 34 8 1 34 5 4 25 1 18 3 17 7 5 5 17 Horsetail 8 Goat head 2 4 Buffalo burr 2 6 4 Lamb's quarter 1 1 3 1 3 Sweet clover 3 15 3 13 2 5 1 5 4 1 1 Evening star 1 1 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 this tle 1 2 2 Texas croton Fleabane Senecio spp. 2 2 Broadleaf milkweed 1 1 Morning glory 1 1 Clammy weed 11 11 9 8 Cockle burr Canadian 17 1 Unidentified 11 11 11 5 7 14 59 'fotal 147 167 50 45 76 115 600 * Number of hits on 200 sa.np Le units per area (square foot units) �-206- Table Appendix 20. A list of forb species of occassional to abundant occurrence in Southern Baca County. Summer, 1963. Bee flower Bindweed Blazing-star Buffalo burr Clammy weed Cocklebur Devills claw Evening star flower Few-flowered psoralea Psoralea (white-flowered) Fireweed, Kochia Fleabane, bundle weed Goathead, Puncture vine Groundsel, Senecio Gumweed Horsenettle Horsetail, Horseweed 1amb's quarter Milk Purslane :f.Iilkweed (ovoid) Milkweed (linear) Mint sage Morning glory Phlox Prairie coneflower Coneflower Prostrate pigweed Purslane Red root, pigweed Russian thistle Snow-on-the-mountain Stinkweed, Abronia Sunflower Sweet clover Texas croton, Doveweed Western ragweed Wild gourd Wild lettuce Verbain Mallow Cleome serrulata Convolvulus arvensis Liatris punctata Solarum rostratum Polanisia trachysperma Xanthium italicum Martynia louisiania Mentzelia nuda Psoralea tenuiflora Psoralea lanceolata Kochia scoparia Desmanthus cooleyi Tribulus terrestris Senecio .!D2.E. Grindelia sguarrosa Solarum eleagnifolium Coriyza.canadensis Chenopodium album Euphorbia spp. Asclepias latifolia Asclepias enp;elmanniana Salvia reflexa Ipomea letltophylla Penstemon 8.mbiguus Ratibia columnifera B...:. tagetes Amaranthus graecizans Portulacca oleracea Amaranthus retroflexus Salsola pestifer Euphorbia marginata Abronia fragrans Helianthus spp. lI1elilotusspp. Croton texensis Ambrosia psilostachya Cucurbita foetidissima 1actuca scariola verbena bractenata ME,lva spp. �-207- Appendix Table 2l. Summer census of homestead development study areas Summer, 1963 Area 1- 2. Birds Obse.rved A - B A - B A - B A - B A - B A - B 8-6 18 0 0 9\4 0 1 8-12 16 9 0 8 0 1 8-27 4(26 16 0 0 0 0 ·9-16 37 17 0 19 0 0 9-24 36 30 0 8 0 0 37 0 0 30 19 1 66 Scaled Q. 19 Bobwhite 1 Pheasant 8-6 (4 0 8-12 1(4 0 0 0 0 0 8-28 0 0 6 0 1 0 9-17 20 0 0 7 0 0 9-25 18 0 0 0 0 0 20 7 1 0 0 0 20 Scaled 'Q. 7 Bobwhite 1 Pheasant 8-13 0 3 0 0 0 0 8-28 9-21 0 0 0 9-26 8 0 6 0 1 0 0 0 0 8 Scaled Q. 1 Bobwhite 3 Pheasants 8-29 4(10 0 0 0 0 0 9-22 33(2 1(5 0 0 0 0 9-30 25 13 0 0 0 0 35 0 0 I} 0 0 41 Scaled Q. o Bobwhite 0 Pheasants 0 3. 4. 5. 6. .. Study Area Total 8-6 0 3(4 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 1 3 0 0 0 14 0 8 7 3 8-7 2 0 0 0 8-16 4 0 0 0 0 0 8-7 0 0 0 0 0 0 8-15 2(1 (4 0 0 0 0 8-30 0 6 0 0 0 0 9-22 18 11 0 0 0 0 9-30 20(7 10 0 0 0 0 27 0 0 11 0 0 37 Scaled Q. 0 Bobwhite o Pheasants 8-7 0 0 0 0 0 0 8-15 0 0 0 0 0 0 8-30 0 0 0 0 0 0 9-22 2 0 0 0 0 0 9-28 o . 2 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 o Bobwhite o Pheasants Census Totals 127 14 4 56 19 1 '174 Scaled Q. 33 Bobwhi te 5 Pheasants Total Birds Counted 145 76 212 22(12 0 0 = Adults or unclassified (.Young 2 Scaled Q.. �-208- Appendix Table 22. SumPlercensus of the old homestead control study areas. Summer, 1963 A - B A - B A - B A - B A - B A - B Study Area Total 8-5 28(10 23 0 0 0 0 8-12 41(6 23(6 0 0 0 0 8-27 27(3 2 0 0 0 0 9-17 46 10 0 4 1 0 9-24 3 13 0 3 0 0 47 0 1 29 4 0 76 Scaled Q. 4 Bobwhite 1 Pheasant 8-5 2 0 0 8-12 0 0 0 0 0 0 8-27 0 0 0 0 0 3 9-17 0 0 0 0 0 0 9-24 0 16 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 16 0 3 16 Scaled Q. o Bobwhite 3 Pheasants 8-5 . 6 33 0 0 0 0 8-14 20 10(1 0 0 0 0 8-28 20 11 0 0 0 0 9-17 19 32 0 0 0 0 9-25 35 15 0 0 0 0 35 0 0 32 0 0 51 Scaled Q. o Bobwhite o Pheasants 8-5 0 0 0 4 0 0 8-14 4 0 0 0 0 0 8-29 0 2(2 0 0 0 0 9-17 0 9 0 0 0 0 9;"27 0 16 0 0 0 0 4 0 0 16 0 0 16 Scaled Q. o Bobwhite o Pheasants 8-7 0 0 0 0 0 0 8-14 0 0 0 0 0 0 8-29 0 0 0 0 0 0 9-23 0 35 0 0 0 0 9-26 0 17 8 0 0 0 35 8 0 0 0 0 35 Scaled Q.. 8 Bobwhite o Pheasants 8-7 0 0 1 0 0 0 8-16 0 0 0 0 0 0 8-29 14(10 0 0 0 0 0 9-23 0 15 2 0 0 0 9-26 0 9 0 0 0 0 24 2 1 0 0 0 24 Scaled Q. 2 Bobwhite 1 Pheasant Census Totals 147 10 2 93 4 3 218 Scaled Q.. 11+Bobwhite 5 Pheasants Total Birds Counted 159 100 Area 1. 2. 3. 4. 5· 6. Birds Observed 2 0 0 237 �-209- Appendix Table 2;. Pre-season census o£ homestead development areas Fall, 1963 Birds Observed Area A - B 1. 2. 3· 4. 5. 6. A - B 11-1 11-5 41 37 27 25 O· 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Study Area Total A - B A - B 11-7 14 22 0 0 0 0 41 0 0 37 0 0 78 0 0 Scaled Quail Bobwhite Pheasants 0 Scaled Quail Bobwhite tlheasant Scaled Quail Bobwhite Pheasants 10-31 0 17 0 0 1 0 11-2 20 9 1 0 0 0 11-7 19 8 0 0 0 0 20 9 1 o .0 20 9 1 10-31 0 19 0 7 2 0 11-5 13 0 1 0 0 0 11-8 13 17 0 0 0 0 19 17 2 0 0 0 19 17 2 10-18 42 0 0 0 0 0 11-4 40 0 0 0 0 0 11-6 62 0 0 0 0 0 62 0 0 0 0 0 62 Scaled Quail 0 Bobwhite 0 Pheasant 10-29 24 11 0 0 0 0 11-3 23 22 0 0 0 1 11-6 30 0 3 0 0 0 30 0 3 22 0 0 45 0 3 Scaled Quail BObwhite Pheasants 11-3 2 0 0 11-6 11 0 0 11-8 0 12 0 0 0 0 11 0 0 12 0 0 12 0 0 Scaled Quail Bobwhite Pheasants 183 26 6 71 0 .0 236 26 6 Scaled Quail Bobwhite Pheasants 215 71 268 0 0 0 0 0 0 Census Totals Total Birds Counted �-210- Appendix Table 24. Pre-season census of the old homestead control areas Fall, 196; Area 1. 2. 3. 4. 5· 6. Study Area Total Birds Observed A - B A - B A - B 10-;1 0 55 0 0 0 0 11-5 21 0 0 0 0 0 11-1 35 0 0 0 0 0 55 0 0 0 0 0 55 0 0 Scaled Quail Bobwhite Pheasants 10-31 0 0 0 0 0 0 11-5 22 0 0 0 0 0 11-1 0 0 0 0 0 0 22 0 0 0 0 0 22 0 0 Scaled Quail Bobwhite Pheasants 11-2 32 0 0 0 0 0 11-5 21 16 0 0 0 0 11-1 0 16 0 0 0 0 32 0 0 16 0 0 43 0 0 Scaled Quail Bobwhite Pheasants 11-1 30 0 0 0 0 0 11-5 29 0 0 2 0 0 11-1 0 0 0 0 0 0 30 0 0 2 0 0 31 0 0 Scaled Quail Bobwhite Pheasants 11-1 0 0 0 0 0 0 11-4 11 0 0 0 0 0 11-6 0 0 0 0 0,0 11 0 0 0 0 0 11 0 0 Scaled Quail Bobwhite Pheasants 11-1 18 0 0 0 0 0 11-4 0 0 0 0 0 0 11-8 9 0 0 0 0 0 18 0 0 0 0 0 18 0 0 Scaled Quail Bobwhite Pheasants Totals 114 0 0 18 0 0 186 0 0 Scaled Quail Bobwhite Pheasants Total Birds Counted 114 18 186 A - B �-211- Appendix Table .l2... Winter census of homestead Winter, Area 1. 2. 3· 4. 5. areas 1963-64 Birds Observed Study Area Total A - B A - B A - B Total A - B 12-4 19 24 0 0 0 0 12-9 24 31 0 0 0 0 12-29 24 15 0 0 0 0 24 31 0 0 0 0 55 Scaled Quail 0 Bobwhite 0 Pheasants 1~-5 18 9 0 0 0 0 12-10 10 0 0 0 0 0 12-29 12 0 0 0 0 0 18 9 0 0 0 0 18 Scaled Quail 9 Bobwhite '0 Pheasants 12-4 0 0 0 lL-14 12-28 0 0 0 + 0 0 4 0 0 4 Scaled Quail 0 Bobwhite 0 Pheasants 12-3 32 0 0 0 0 0 lL-3 12-2 0 0 0 4 0 0 lL-10 0 11 0 0 0 0 6. development + 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 12-27 37 0 0 0 1 0 40 0 1 0 0 0 40 Scaled Quail 0 Bobwhite 1 Pheasant l:c-13 1~ 11 0 0 1 0 12-27 20 0 0 0 0 0 20 11 0 0 1 0 23 Scaled Quail 0 Bobwhite 1 Pheasant 12-13 12-27 40 0 0 0 Scaled Quail te 0 Bob-,Ihi 0 Pheasants No birds observed Census Total Total Birds Counted 102 46 9 0 2 0 140 Scaled Quail 9 Bobwh i, te 2 Pheasants 151 �-?12- Appendix Table 26 Winter c~nsus of homestead control areas Winter, Area Birds Observed A - B 1. 2. 3. 4. 1963-64 A - B A - B Total A - B 12-1 20 14 0 0 0 0 12-7 39 14 0 0 0 0 12-29 33 0 0 0 0 0 39 14 0 0 0 0 39 Scaled Q.. 14 Bobwhite 0 Pheasants 12-1 0 0 0 0 0 2 12-7 0 0 0 0 0 0 12-28 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 Scaled Q.. 0 Bobwhite 2 Pheasants 12-5 43 0 0 0 0 0 12-10 o 34 0 0 0 0 12-27 43 0 0 0 0 0 43 34 0 0 0 0 43 Scaled Q.. o Bobwh i te 0 Pheasants 12-9 12-26 12-1 0 Scaled Q. 0 Bobwhite 0 Pheasants No birds observed 5. 11-30 0 Scaled Q. 0 Bobwhite 0 Pheasc;.nts 12-26 12-9 No birds observed 6. jtudY rea Total 12-3 0 0 0 0 0 0 12-7 8 0 0 0 0 0 Census Total Total birds counted 12-26 0 0 0 0 0 0 e 0 0 0 8 Scaled Q. o Bo nwh i, te 0 Pheasants 90 34 14 0 0 2 90 Scaled Q. 14 Bobwhite 2 Pheasants 0 0 106 �-213- Table Appendix Summer checks of the brush shelter developments - 1963. ..:ll Section - Area l-D 2-D- 3-D- Birds Observed 1 2. 3. 4. 8-9-63 15 0 0 + 1. 2. 3. 4. 0 + + 0 1. 2. 3. 4. 0 0 0 0 8-20-63 15 0 0 19 High Count 9-16-63 19 19 + + 0 17 0 19 0 0 3 - 22 0 0 0 + - 31 17 + 31 17 0 0 0 0 42 0 0 42 0 0 + + 0 Census Total - Scaled Quail + = -23 128 Shelter use evident Birds found within area but not at shelter Table 28 Fall census check of the brush shelter study areas - 1963. Section-Area Birds observed Section-Area Birds Observed October 1 - 8, 1963 l-D 2-D 3-D Total l. 2. 18 + 3. 4. l. 2. 3· 4. l. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 0 0 3. 11 15-15 4. 0 1. 2. 3. 4. 22 12 l-C 2-C 0 +-22 18 0 23 0 + 123 Scaled Quail 3-C 1. 2. 3. 4. 0 0 5 bobwhite 14 0 1 0 0 48 Scaled Q.. 5 Bobwhite �-2M- Table Appendix 22 Winter Section- Area I-D 1. 2. 3~ 4. 2-D 1. 2. 3. census of. the brush shelter study areas. Nov.- Dec. 1963 Birds Observed 11-29 16 0 0 15 12-9 0 0 0 0 12-28 + 16 0 0 15 12-5 30 10 12-10 18 20 22 0 l. 2. 4 0 0 + 0 17 0 + 12-26 18 20 22 0 11-30 0 12-10 0 17 0 0 12-26 0 0 0 0 4. 3-D High Count + of 4 3· 0 4. + of 4 + 0 17 0 + Development l-C 1,2,3 2-C 1. 2. 3. &4 11-29 12-9 No birds observed 12-3 + 0 + + 4. 3-C 1,2,3 &4 to,tal 12-28 0 12-13 12-29 8 bobwhite + 0 0 0 0 13 19 11-30 12-13 No birds observed 108 8 Bobwhite 0 + 19 12-26 0 Control total and 19 8 bobwhite �-215- REFERENCES Barrington, B. D. 1954. Manuel of the plants of Colorado. Sage Books. Denver, Colorado. Soheanitz, Sandford D. 1961. Eoology of the soaled quail in the Oklahoma Panhandle. Wildlife Monographs No.8. 47p. Snedeoor, George W. 1956. Statistioal Methods. Iowa state College Press. Ames, Iowa. 5.thed. 534p. Prepared b7 Warren D. Snyder Game Biologist Approved by LaurenoeE. Riordan Assistant Direotor, Researoh Date Apr1l. 1964 Ferd C. Kleinsohnitz Federal aid Coordinator Printed February, Wayne W. Sandfort Chief, Game Research 1965 ��-?]7- JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO Project No. W-37-R-17 ----~~----------------- Work Plan No. Game Bird Survey Job No. 6 Title of Job: Mapping of Scaled Quail Range Period Covered: April 1, 1963 to March 31, 1964 2 ABSTRACT Hork of mapping scaled quail range was completed during this segment. A comprehensive final report covering this work has been completed and is in the process of being published. Scaled quail were found to occur naturally within 14 counties: Baca, Bent, Cheyenne, Crowley, Custer, El Paso, Fremont, Huerfano, Kiowa, Las Animas, Lincoln, Otero, Prowers, and Pueblo. Coveys were also reportedly located in past years in l~ more counties: Alamosa, Conejos, Costilla, and La Plata. In addition, Departmental transplants of scaled quail were made in 2 more counties: Larimer and Yuma. Approximately 21 percent of the total land in Colorado is native scaled quail range. Population levels were found to be higher in the area south of the Arkansas River than nor th, Important cover types within native scaled quall range in Colorado i.norder of importance were determined to be (1) sand sagebrush-grassland, (2) dense cholla cactus and/or yucca-grassland, (3) tree planting, (!~)pinon-juniper, (5) dryland farmland, and (6) gr-ca sewoodvsa ltbush wash. Recommendations: Further work on this job should be discontinued until such time that major changes in scaled quail range occur through natural movements, habitat changes, and/or transplanting activities. Objectives: (1) To assemble available informati.onon scaled quail range and distribution. (2) To complete mapping of scaled quail range. (3) To compile data and prepare distribution and density maps of scaled quail populations. �-21R- Techniques I. II. Used: Mapping of scaled quail range. A. Determine perimeter of range by county. 1. Information from Departmental personnel. 2. Inspection of habitat. 3. Interviews with ranchers and farmers. 4. Observations of scaled quail. B. Trace outline of range on overlays, placed on county maps, scale 1/2 inch per mile. C. Determine density of scaled quail populations within the range of the species. D. Map various units of range classes according to populations and quality of cover. E. Planimeter various units of range classes to determine square miles of various range classes and total range for each county. F. Prepare written description of range for each county. G. Prepare distribution maps of scaled quail range. Prepare completion report on scaled quail density and distribution. �-219- MAPPING OF SCALED QUAIL RANGE Donald M. Hoffman A comprehensive final report covering past work on scaled quail basic inventory studies has been completed. The first part of this report deals with scaled quail range under the following outline: Part 1. RANGE General Description of Native Range Location Climate Topography Vegetation Methods Discussion Results Range Classes Distribution Use of Vegetative Cover Types Departmental Transplants Outside Native Range Reported Covey Locations Various maps and tables relating to scaled quail range-included in the final report are not included in this report since this would be needless repetition. Approximately 22,400 square miles or roughly 21 percent of the total land area in Colorado is native scaled quail range. Generally, the quality of scaled quail range is better and population levels are higher in the area south of the Arkansas River than north. Scaled quail occur naturally in 14 counties. For comparative purposes, descriptions of scaled quail rnage by individual counties which follow are based upon periods of relatively high population levels such as occurred in 1959. It has been found that during years of low population levels, higher quality ranges generally contain more scaled quail than lower quality ranges, as would be expected. Baca County. -- Most of Baca County is native scaled quail range. The best range is located in the southern one-fourth of the county. These areas, which are classified as very good range, include dense cholla cactus and/or yucca-grasslands, pinon-juniper, and sand sagebrush-grasslands vegetative cover types for the most part. Areas of good quality range are located along the Two Buttes Creek drainage and in the north and northwest portions of the county within pinon-juniper, dense cholla cactus and/or yucca-grasslands and sand sagebrush-grasslands vegetative cover types. Dryland farmland areas with scattered tracts of sand sagebrush-grasslands in the area south of the Utleyville Postoffice and the town of Pritchett normally contain a fair number of scaled quail. Buffalo, Horse, and Bear Creeks; Sand Aroyo, and North Fork of the Cimarron River contain areas of fair cover potential although few coveys of scaled quail were observed in these drainages during the study period. �-2?O- Most of the remainder of the county including intensively farmed areas, sparse cholla cactus and/or yucca-grassland, or short-grass disclimax types are classed as very poor range. Bent County. -- Scaled quail native range extends over most of Bent County. Good scaled quail range is found within the sand sagebrush-grasslands belts bordering the Arkansas River and within the pinon-juniper and dense cholla cactus and/or yucca-grasslands types in the Purgatoire River, and Muddy, Rule, Caddoa, and Antelope Creeks or similar drainages. Fair populations were found within the irrigated farmland areas bordering the Arkansas River particularly where these lands are adjacent to areas of good permanent cover. Few coveys were observed within the river bottoms proper which appear to be more favorable for bobwhite quail than scaled quail. Most of the remainder of Bent County consisting primarily of sparse cholla cactus and/or yucca-grasslands and dryland farmland areas is classified as very poor scaled quail range. Cheyenne County. -- Native scaled quail range in Cheyenne County includes all drainages flowing toward the Arkansas River according to available information. This includes approximately the southern three-fourths of the county. Good quality range is found along the southern portion drainage within a sand sagebrush-grasslands vegetative of Big Sandy Creek type. The sand sagebrush becomes less dense from the town of Kit Carson north and northwest and these ranges are classified as poor range. Coveys of scaled quail have been reported in past years in the vicinity of the town of Wild Horse and within the Wild Horse and Big Spring Creeks drainages. The remainder of the land within the native primarily of grassland praLrLes and dryland very poor scaled quail range. range of the species consists farmlands and is classified as Crowley County. -- Native scaled quail range extends over most of Crowley County. The sand sagebrush-grasslands vegetative types north of the Arkansas River within the Horse Creek drainage and in the western portions of the county contain fair scaled quail cover. Population densities were low in these areas during the study period and these ranges were classified as poor. The range quality improves and scaled quail populations are better toward the Arkansas River. Irrigated areas and greasewood-saltbrush and sand sagebrush-grassland types are generally classified as fair range. The remainder of the county consisting mostly cholla cactus and/or yucca-grassland prairies quail range. of dryland farmland and sparse have little value as scaled �-::>21- Custer County. -- Year-round scaled quail range extends only into the extreme northeast corner of Custer County along the pinon-juniper foothills areas. This range is classified as very poor for scaled quail although it borders better quality range in Pueblo and Fremont Counties. The remainder of Custer County is too high in elevation and too rough in topography for scaled quail range except in years of high populations in bordering counties when coveys range into some areas, particularly in the late summer and early fall periods. EI Paso County. -- Inhabited scaled quail range is found only east of Colorado Highway 115 and south of Colorado Highway 94 in EI Paso County. Pockets of dense cholla cactus and/or yucca-grasslands intermixed with pinon.juniper types within the Turkey and Fountain Creeks drainages and the dense cholla cactus-grassland, sand sagebrush-grassland, and" greasewood-saltbrush washes of Chico Creek drainages compose good scaled quail range. Extensive areas of sand sagebrush-grasslands within the Black Squirrel Creek drainage are of comparatively low quality as scaled quail cover and are classified as poor range. The remainder of the county within poor scaled quail range. the natural range of the species is very Fremont County. -~ Scaled quail native range is found within the southeastern and eastern portions of "Fremont County. Areas of dense cholla cac,.. tus and/or yucca-grasslands, pinon-juniper, and greasewood-s<iltbush washes types north of the Arkansas River from near Parkdale to the Pueblo County line, and south and southeast of Canon City south of the Arkansas River are classified as good scaled quail range. Good populations are found in these areas during highs of the population cycle and isolated coveys have survived during years of lows. The remaining pinon-juniper range. areas within the natural range of the species are primarily types of the foothill regions classified as very poor quality Huerfano County. -- Good quality scaled quail range is located mostly in the eastern third of the county, although the majority of Huerfano County in areas under 7,000 feet elevation can be classed as native range. Dense cholla cactus and/or yucca-grassland and intermixed pinon-juniper vegeta,tive types east of U.S. Highway 85-87 compose good scaled quail range. Dense cholla cactus and/or yucca-grasslands, pinon-juniper, mountain shrub, and greasewood-saltbush washes west of U.S. Highway 85-87 normally contain populations of the species but in smaller numbers than the eastern ranges. Year-round inhabitants at the 7,200 feet level have been observed in the La Veta area during both highs and lows of the population cycle. Areas of sparse cholla cactus and/or yucca-grasslands and scattered dryland farmlands are classified as very poor range, although coveys may be found where artificial cover is provided by farmers and ranchers. �-222- Kiowa County. -- Most of Kiowa County is classified as native scaled quail range. Good scaled quail cover and populations are found within the sand sagebrush-grasslands types within the Big Sandy Creek drainage. Fair cover potential was found along Mustang and Adobe Creeks drainages in the western part of the county, although populations of scaled quail were low. These ranges were classified as poor. Scattered coveys may be located within the remainder of the county in the dry1and farmlands and prairie grasslands types classified as very poor range, particularly where ranchers and farmers have provided cover. Las Animas County. -- Native scaled quail range extends from the foothills along the front range eastward although coveys occasionally range as high as 8,000 feet in the mountain valleys. Very good scaled quail range is found in the extreme southeastern portion of the county adjoining the better quality ranges of Baca County. Habitat types in this area is composed of dense cho11a cactus and/or yucca-grasslands, pinon-juniper, and sand sagebrush-grasslands types. This area extends from the north side of Mesa de Maya to the north of Carrizo Mountain on the Baca County line. Extensive areas of good scaled quail range is found within the dense cho11a cactus and/or yucca-grasslands and intermixed pinon-juniper types east of Huerfano County and northeast of the foothills regions. Fair range is found within the scattered tracts of sand sagebrush-grasslands and dry1and farmlands in the eastern portion of the county. The remainder of the area within the natural range of the species is classified as very poor range. Lincoln County. -- Native scaled quail range is found only south of the town of Hugo according to local residents. Fair scaled quail cover is 10cated within the Big Sandy and Horse Creeks drainages. The quality of the sand sagebrush-grasslands is not as good as that farther south and lower scaled quail populations were found. These ranges were therefore classified as poor. The remainder of the county within the natural range of the species consist primarily of scattered dry1and farmland areas and grassland prairies and is considered very poor scaled quail range. Otero County. -- Most of Otero County is native scaled quail range. Good scaled quail range is found within areas of dense cho11a cactus and/or yuccagrasslands, pinon-juniper, sand sagebrush-grasslands, and greasewood-sa1tbush washes within the Apishapa and Purgatoire Rivers, and Timpas Creek drainages and along the breaks bordering irrigated farmlands. The irrigated farmlands are considered fair scaled quail range for the most part, particularly where other permanent cover adjoins these lands. Areas of sand sagebrush-grasslands north of the Arkansas River have fair cover potential but low populations of scaled quail. �-223- The remainder of the county consisting mostly of short-grass disclimax and scattered dryland farmland areas must be classified as very poor scaled quail range. Coveys are often found in these areas where farmers and ranchers have provided cover. Prowers Countx. -- Most of Prowers County is native scaled quail range. Good scaled quail range is located within the sand sagebrush-grasslands, dense cholla cactus and/or yucca-grasslands, and pinon-juniper types of the Clay, Wolf, Granada, Two Buttes, Big Sandy, and Wild Horse Creeks drainages. Irrigated farma1nds are considered fair scaled quail range, particularly where these lands are joined by areas of good quality permanent cover. Other areas consisting primarily of short-grass disclimax prairie and dryland farmland areas leave much to be desired for scaled quail habitat and are classified as very poor range. Pueblo Countx. -- Native scaled quail range is found from the foothills along the front range eastward, although coveys have been known to range to elevations of 8,000 feet in the mountain valleys occasionally. Extensive areas of dense cholla cactus-grasslands, pinon-juniper, and greasewoodsaltbush washes types east of the foothills regions, particularly in the St. Charles, Huerfano, and Apishapa Rivers, and Fountain and Chico Creeks drainages, are good scaled quail range. Irrigated farmlands along the Arkansas River constitute fair range, particularly where these are bordered by areas of good permanent type cover. Extensive sand sagebrush-grasslands in the Black Squirrel Creek drainage have fair cover potential but poor populations of scaled quail so these were classified as poor range. Other areas consisting of pinon-juniper types in the foothills areas, sparse cholla cactus-grasslands, and dry1and farmlands are considered to be very poor scaled quail range. Prepared by: Donald M. Hoffman Date: April, 1964 February, 1965 Approved by: Wayne W. Sandfort Chief of Game Research Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator ��-225- JOB COMPLETION RESEARCH REPORT PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO --------~~~~-------- Project No. W-37-R-17 Work Plan No. 6 Title ·of Job: Development Period Covered: April Game Bird Survey Job No. 3 of census techniques 1, 1963 to March for scaled guail. 31, 1964. ABSTRACT Summer population levels of scaled quail were determined through replicate counts on established trend routes during 1963, as before. In past counts, the 2 highest counts out of the total number of counts made on each route were averaged with the 2 highest counts for the other routes to establish population level estimates. Procedures for I.B.M. Computing Center analysis of scaled quail census data was accomplished during 1963. Using this method, a much faster and more complete analysis of field data is possible. Averages of all suitable counts made will be utilized to estimate population levels. The number of routes will be increased from 11 to 14 for the 1964 counts and 3 replicate counts will be made on each route if possible. Summary of trend-route counts, 1963. 1. Game, Fish, and Parks personnel counted a total of 1,082 scaled quail (611 young, 299 adults, and 172' unclassified) and 78 broods in replicate counts along 11 routes during July and August, 1963. This activity required approximately 62~ hours of time and 898 miles of travel during actual counting. 2. Scaled quail population trends· by management upon birds counted per mile are as follows: areas and region based Management Area 1. Limited data indicates populations are down 8.2 percent from 1962 and down an equal amount when compared to the past 4-year average. �-2?6- Management Area 2. -- Populations are down 82.8 percent and down 62.1 percent from the past 4-year average. from 1962 Management Area 3. -- Populations are up 157.6 percent and down 15.7 percent from the past 4-year average. from 1962 Management Area 4. -- Populations are up 25.5 percent down 0.7 percent from the past 4-year average. from 1962 and Southeast Region. -- Trend data indicates scaled quail populations are up about 7.6 percent from 1962 and down approximately 18.8 percent when compared to the past 4-year average. 3. Climatic data for five key stations within scaled quail range show precipitation amounts were far below normal for the period March through July, 1963 and above normal during August. Temperatures were warmer than normal for all stations from March through July, 1963 and generally cooler in August. Recommendations: Work on this job should be continued of routine census to management. Objectives: (1) (2) (3) (4) toward turn-over To determine methods for ascertaining annual changes in scaled quail populations. To establish permanent zones, areas, or routes for census. To prepare forms and record books for systematic recording of data. To turn over routine surveys to the Game Management Division. Procedures: I. II. III. IV. Selection of trend routes. A. Eleven suitable routes have been selected and mapped. Regular census of scaled quail along routes. Analysis of data, assembling of forms, and preparation of record books. Turn-over of routine surveys to the Game Management Division. �-227- DEVELOPMENT OF CENSUS TECHNIQUES FOR SCALED QUAIL Donald M. Hoffman A comprehensive report covering all past work on' inventory studies has been completed. Information, tables, graphs, etc. are not copied for this report. The following outline was utilized: Part II. INVENTORY Methods Discussion Results Area-Covey Counts Trend-Route Counts Time-of-Day for Counts Brood Sizes Procedures for I.B.M. Computing route count data were completed Center analysis of scaled quail trendduring the present segment. Personnel of the Southeast Region assisting with the scaled quail trendroute counts in 1963 include W.C.O.'s A. J. Heins, H. J. Hood, W. L. Kent, J. Stevenson, and L. K. Wilson. Trend-route count data are su'mmarized for individual census units (Table 1), individual management areas (Tables 2-5), and Southeast Region (Table 6). Figure 1 shows the location of the various management areas and census units. Analysis was accomplished by calculations of various data for the current year (1963), the past year (1962), and for ihe 4-year period average (1959- 1962) . Overall scaled quail populations in 1963 were up 7.6 percent from the population level of 1962 but down 18.8 percent from the 4-year average (1959-1962) based upon birds counted per mile travelled. Best population increases were indicated in management areas 3 and 4 in both birds per mile and young to adult ratio' calculations. Management areas 1 and 2 had lower scaled qua~l populations in 1963 compared to 1962. Climatic data for key stations within scaled quail range including Canon City, Lamar, Las Animas, Pueblo, and Rocky Ford are shown in Tables 7 and 8 courtesy U.S. Department of Commerce, Weather Bureau. Below .normal precipitation and average higher temperatures were the general rule for the period March through July, 1963. During August, precipitation ~as higher than normal at all stations and temperatures were generally cooler than normal. A better understanding of the effects of climate upon populations �Table 1. -- Scaled quail trend-route data, Southeast Region, 1963. Super- Manage- Census Unit visor ment Area Area No. 7 3 1 7 4 2 7 4 3 6 2 4 7 4 5 6 7 1 3 6 7 7 3 8 7 3 9 7 3 10 6 2 11 TOTALS AVERAGE Census Unit Apishapa Sandsage Campo Sandsage Carrizo Mountain C.F.eSe.I. Ditch Fowler MeS!a Hanover Holly Sandsage La Junta Higbee Lake Setchfie1d Rule Creek Wetmore Hill Ave.No. Young/ Birds/ Birds/ Broods/ Birds Observed Total Total Total Mile Mile Min. Miles Min. Broods Young Adults Unc1ass. Total Brood 81 305 1 5 3 0 8 5.00 0.098 0.026 0.012 87 382 24 195 70 124 389 8.12 4.471 1.018 0.275 129 511 19 164 80 25 269 8.63 2.085 0.526 0.147 26 150 1 9 4 0 13 9.00 0.500 0.086 0.038 63 270 2 16 14 0 30 8.00 0.476 0.111 0.031 0.009 0.027 I i\} rv f 101 72 380 265 1 2 4 14 18 4 0 0 22 18 4.00 7.00 0.217 0.250 0.057 0.067 104 480 16 86 46 23 155 5.37 1.490 0.322 0.153 84 370 10 93 24 0 117 9.30 1.392 0.316 0.119 101 385 2 25 21 0 46 12.50 0.455 0.119 0.019 50 250 0 0 15 0 15 0.00 0.300 0.060 0.000 898 3748 78 611 299 172 1082 7.83 1.204 0.288 0.086 �Table 2. -- Summer scaled quail population trend data, management area 1, 1963. Type of Data 1963 Data For 4-Year Ave. 1962 Average No. Young/Brood Birds/Hile Broods/Mile Birds/tHn. Young/ Adults 4.000 0.217 0.009 0.057 0.222 10.000 0.237 0.016 0.057 2.500 10.000 0.237 0.016 0.057 2.500 Percent Change ~1963) From 4-Year Ave. From 1962 - 60.0 8.2 - 41. 6 + 1.3 - 91.1 - - 60.0 8.2 - 41. 6 + 1.3 - 91.1 - Table 3. -- Summer scaled quail population trend data, management area 2, 1963. Type of Data 1963 Data For 4-Year Ave. 1962 Average No. Young/Brood Birds/Mile Broods/Mile Birds/Min. Young/Adults 9.000 0.368 0.013 0.070 0.473 10.066 2.147 0.105 0.458 2.960 9.700 0.972 0.050 0.218 2.811 Percent Change (1963) From 4-Year Ave. From. 1962 - 10.6 - 82.8 - 87.5 - 84.7 - 84.0 - 7.2 - 62.1 - 74.1 - 68.0 - 83.2 Table 4. -- Summer scaled quail population trend data, management area 3, 1963. Percent Change ~19632 Data For From 4-Year Ave. From 1962 4-Year Ave. 1962 1963 Type of Data Average No. Young/Brood Birds/Mile Broods/Mile Birds/Min. Young/Adults 7.193 0.778 0.070 0.190 2.275 7.750 0,302 0.020 0.076 1.148 8.240 0.923 0.051 0.234 1.745 - 7.2 +157.6 +236.7 +148.1 + 98.2 - 12.7 - 15.7 + 35.5 - 18.7 + 30.4 r ~'0 :'0 -o I �Table 5. -- Summer scaled quail population trend data, management area 4, 1963. Type of Data 1963 Data For 1962 4-Year Ave. Average No. Young/Brood Birds/Mile Broods/Mile Birds/Min. Young/Adults 8.333 2.465 0.161 0.591 2.286 7.038 1.965 0.100 0.466 1.648 7.670 2.483 0.109 0.576 2.253 Percent Change ~1963~ From 1962 From 4-Year Ave. + 18.4 + 25.5 + 61.3 + 26.8 + 38.7 + 8.6 - 0.7 + 46.9 + 2.6 + 1.5 I tv VJ Table 6. -- Summer scaled quail population trend data, Southeast Region, 1963. o I Type of Data 1963 Data For 1962 4-Year Ave. Average No. Young/Brood Birds/Mile Broods/Mile Birds/Min. Young/Adults 7.833 1.204 0.086 0.288 2.043 8.120 1.119 0.059 0.269 1.845 8.106 1.482 0.071 0.355 2.114 Percent Change ~1963~ From 1962 From 4-Year Ave. - 3.5 + 7.6 + 45.8 + 7.1 + 10.7 - 3.4 - 18.8 + 21.1 - 23.3 3.4 - �Table 7. -- Climatic data, key stations within scaled quail range, March through May, 1963.1/ -- Station Canon City Lamar Las Animas Pueblo Rocky Ford -_._---- Harch TernE_ Dept. Ave. Norm. A ril PE t . Dept. Total Norm. TernE· Dept. Ave. Norm. 55.2 57.0 57.6 55.5 56.2 44.6 1.7 0.68 -0.14 45.3 42.2 43.9 2.2 2.1 2.4 0.83 0.32 0.48 0.15 -0.20 -0.24 3.5 4.2 3.4 4.8 3.9 Mav PEt. Total Dept. Norm. TernE· Dept. Ave. Norm. PEt. Dept. Total Norm. 0.00 0.00 0.00 T. 0.00 -1.76 -1.30 -1.20 -1.18 -1.45 64.3 67.5 67.2 64.3 65.0 0.11 -1. 96 0.58 -1.82 0.93 -1.16 0.39 -1.41 0.88 -1. 14 3.7 4.6 2.8 3.7 3.3 I I\) VJ f-' Table 8. -- Climatic data, key stations within scaled quail range, June through August, 1963.1/ June Station Canon City Lamar Las Animas Pueblo Rocky Ford 1/ Jul PEt. Tern~ Dept. Ave. Norm. Total 71.6 1.5 75.8 72.9 73.2 1.2 1.8 1.3 PEt. Dept. Norm. TemE· Dept. Ave. Norm. Total Dept. Norm. 1.66 0.54 79.0 3.2 0.20 -1.29 1.33 0.46 2.04 -0.12 -0.76 0.78 82.0 79.9 78.7 2.9 3.4 1.9 0.99 0.25 0.78 -0.84 -1.57 -0.96 Information courtesy U.S. Dept. of Commerce, Weather Bureau. I August TernE· PEt. Dept. Dept. Ave. Norm. Total Norm. 73.0 78.5 77.2 74.4 74.8 -1.3 1.1 0.0 -0.2 -0.1 1.92 2.09 2.16 2.28 2.07 0.15 0.02 0.46 0.43 0.37 �IfMc'--'-OFFAr -- ---- ---- -~ROurr I I s'"' \J .- - I I r -- --rj;,c;rsoir ~O(OIv~':Y\. .... ,--; 0_' r) I - ,,_ .. ,1"mtM P«II"Dn'O )' r-: -- .j ,80. ""in,.. • o£ ., 01 y"1],,, "CA~ I"" ••.8, 01l'.j1tm<Y. .<JI:::: 6rqll ·,;t~rI,.&..., /sa..tton ""';"0 , oCd,,> ONI/eJ., \EuR,iY· O(l'~ .'" I . ~"" C~NJIcJ "'" -~~ r,:-:;-- .(0'-"'1,-. J ••--. ~" (AV"ACH;;'- " . ""'.9...,-h".,HINSOAiE·-·~! 'I • . OlAK£CITl"! Figure 1. LOOATION OF 14 SOALED QUAIL OENSUS UNITS WITHIN 4 MANAGEMENT AREAS (Oensus Unite 1 through 11 Oounted 1963) �-233- of the species should result by continuing comparisons of scaled quail summer populations and nesting period climate. Prepared by: Donald M. Hoffman Date: April, 1964 Printed Fe bruar-y , 1965 Approved by: Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator ��-;:>35- JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO ------~--~--------------- Project No. W-37 -R-17 Work Plan No. 9 Game Bird Survey Job No. Title of Job: Summarization of Blue Grouse Studies Period Covered: April 1, 1963 to March 31, 1964 4 ABSTRACT A rough draft of Blue Grouse Distribution in Colorado has been completed and awaits editing and publication. The secon~paper listed in this project with a slight change in title, Blue Grouse Census and Harvest in the United States and Canada, was published in the Journal of Wildlife Management 27 (4):579-585. Recommendations: A certain amount of editing and rewriting will be necessary for the publication of Blue Grouse Distribution in Colorado in the 196465 project year. Time and money should be allowed to~omp1ete publication. Objectives: To complete and publish results of blue grouse studies. Techniques Used: cation. Compilation and preparation of blue grouse data for publi- �-236- SUMMARIZATION OF BLUE GROUSE STUDIES Glenn E. Rogers A rough draft of Blue Grouse Distribution in Colorado has been completed and awaits editing and publication. The second paper listed in this project with a slight change in title, Blue Grouse Census and Harvest in the United States and Canada, was published in the Journal of Wildlife Management 27(4):579-585. Information was surveyed from periodic conferences with Federal agencies and Departmental personnel, attendance at workshops, questionnaire data, and publications to formulate policy on grouse. Prepared by: Date: Printed Glenn E. Rogers Senior Game Biologist April 1964 Februar-y, FJ65 Approved by: Laurence E. Riordan Asst. Director, Research Wayne W. Sandfort Game Manager Research Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �-2.37- Jon COMPLETION RESEARCH State of COLORADO Project No. W-37-R-17 PROJECT SEGMENT Job No. Work Plan No. 10 Title of Job: Study of Hungarian Period Covered: April 1, 1963 to March Personnel: REPORT Partridge 1 Adaptability 31, 1964 Harold M. Swope, Gurney Crawford; and irrigation company personnel. Corrin Davidson, local ranchers ABSTRACT Eighty-three live Hungarian partridges were received from Oregon and 115 from Idaho during the first three months of 1964. One bird died prior to release. Twenty-two (11 male and 11 female) of the birds were taken to the Rocky Ford Experimental Bird Farm with the expectation that additional flocks will be developed for field releases. One-hundred thirty-five Hungarian partridge were released in the Douglas Lake area north of Fort Collins and 40 in the Round Bottom area southwest of Craig. A few birds were seen in the Douglas Lake area for several months following Two Huns were seen near the plants, after which they seemed to disappear. the Round Bottom releas~ site one week after their release and then they too disappeared from view.ll 1/ The whereabouts of the Huns was a mystery until late August and early September, when br ood s were observed in both areas. Findings from surveys conducted after April 1, 1964 will be reported in the Job Completion Report for Segment 18, W-37-R. �-?3R- Recommendations: Additional flocks of Hungarian partridges should be released in these two trial areas regardless of the apparent success or failure of the initial plants. Objectives: (1) (2) To release Hungarian partridges in the State. To determine success of introduction. Techniques Used: The two release sites (Douglas Lake and Round Bottom) were previously selected by Roger L. Evans and Wayne W. Sandfort as explained and described in the July 1962, Federal Aid Quarterly Report by Sandfort (pp. 133-134). Birds were held in small pens at the release sites for several days prior to liberation. They were fed, watered and allowed to leave the pens voluntarily. Feed and water were placed near the release sites through the late winter months. Release areas were covered on foot and nearby roadsides were driven in an effort to observe the Huns. Local Department personnel assisted in these surveys. People working and living in the vicinity of the releases were interviewed regarding their observations. Findings: Hungarian The following is a record of the receipt and disposition partridges received from Idaho and Oregon. Received from Oregon of the January 24, 1964 - date birds received 50 - number of birds shipped 9 - dead on arrival 8 - taken to Rocky Ford Experimental Bird Farm (pairs) 33 - released in 8' by 8' pen at Douglas Lake release site, fed watered and held for one week. One bird died in pen. 32 - released at Douglas Lake release site. February 14, 1964 - date birds received 70 - number of birds shipped 28 dead on arrival 42 Lake release site, 43 - released in 8' by 8' holding pen at Douglas Lake release fed, watered and released about one week later. 43 - released at Douglas Lake release site. site, 42 Received released in 8' by 8' holding pen at Douglas fed, watered and held for about one week. released at Douglas LaKe release site. from Idaho January 31, 1964 - date birds received 43 - birds shipped February 28, 1964 - date birds received 48 - number of birds shipped 11 - dead birds removed- from shipment at Boise, Idaho. �-239- 5 - dead on arrival 14 - taken to Rocky Ford Experimental Bird Farm. 18 - released in 8' by 8' holding pen at Douglas Lake release site, fed, watered and held for about one week. at Douglas Lake release site. 18 - released March 27, 1964 - date birds received 40 - birds shipped 40 - released in small holding pen at the Round Bottom release site, fed, watered and a few released each day until all were released at the end of six days. 40 - released at the Round Bottom release site. Totals 120 - birds received 120 - birds received from Oregon (83 live birds received, one died later) from Idaho (115 live birds received - 131 shipped)17 22 - birds taken to Rocky Ford Experimental Bird Farm (paired) 135 - released at Douglas Lake release site 40 - released at Round Bottom release site In the Round Bottom area only one authenticated report of a Hun observation was received in the several months following release. They were released near the end of March, 1964. A local rancher (Lorence Ellgen) saw two birds at the release site one week later. From four to ten birds were observed on numerous occasions in the Douglas Lake release area during February and March by Wildlife Conservation Officer Crawford. I too saw these birds several times during the same period. No observations were reported by local residents, though a ditch rider (Glen Corbin) did see a few Huns in the immediate vicinity of the release site. 1/ Eleven dead birds were removed Dept. personnel. Prepared by: Harold M. Swope Project Leader 1964 Date: September, Prjnten f.'ebrunry, 1965 in Boise, Idaho by their Fish and Game Approved by: Wayne W. Sandfort Chief Game Research ��-2~1- JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO Project No. W-37-R-17 11 Work Plan No. Job No. Title of Job: Trial Introduction Period Covered: April 1, 1963 to March 31, 1964 Personnel: 2 of Spanish Red-legged Partridge Harold M. Swope ABSTRACT The program to establish the Spanish red-legged partridge in Colorado has been terminated. Birds have failed to propagate themselves in the wild and attempts to develop a sizable breeding flock at our experimental game farm has been unsuccessful. A detailed appraisal to determine possibilities for establishing this species in Colorado shows our climate to be generally unsuitable. Stock rema1n1ng from this program has been sent to the National Museum for study skins and the California Department of Fish and Game. Recommendations: Objectives: the State. Project To determine terminated. possibilities for adaptation of this species within Techniques Used: No additional releases were made due to failure to produce planting stock and based on the findings of Evans (1962) that Colorado minimum winter temperatures were conSiderably below those found in the native range of this species. Findings: Breeding stock at the Rocky Ford Experimental Bird Farm dwindled to 47 birds after several years in attempt to propagate this species in large numbers. No reports of Spanish red-legged partridge observations were received from any of the release sites. In view of the failures of this program to date, and based on findings by Evans (1962) that Colorado's average winter minimum temperatures are probably too low for this species, the project has been terminated. �Six birds were sent to the National Museum in Washington at the request of the Bureau pf Sport Fisheries and Wildlife. Study skins were made and added to the collection. The remaining 39 adults (three more died prior to shipment) were shipped to the California Department of Fish and Game where prospects of establishing these birds appear to be good. LITERATURE CITED Evans, Roger L. 1962. Federal Aid Quarterly Report. Dept., July, pp. 135-160. Colo. Game and Fish Prepared by: Wayne W. Sandfort Chief Game Research Date: Pr:inted Harold M. Swope Principal Game Biologist April 1964 Approved by: �-2~3JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of Colorado .--------~~~~~------------ Project No., ~W~-~3~7_-~R~-~1~7 Work Plan No. Title of Job: ~1~2 _ Game Bird Survey _ Job No. 10 Relationships of .the Productivity and Distribution of Wild Turkeys on the Uncompahgre Plateau to the Environment. Period Covered: April 1, 1963 to March 31, 1964. Abstract: Various census techniques were used to determine the size of the turkey population on the Uncompahgre Plateau. Best results were obtained by counting turkeys from vehicles and on foot in the vicinity of feed stations established to concentrate turkeys. Four hundred and seventy-eight turkeys, seven less than last year, were located this winter. Seventy-nine wild turkeys were trapped, banded, and released in six areas on the Uncompahgre Plateau. Most birds.were marked with back tags, wing bands, and leg bands. Movements were determined by observing the travel of marked birds; some of which moved 7, 11, 12, 14, 18, 22, and 32 air miles from sites where the birds were marked. Three turkeys in wintering areas on one side of the plateau corssed to the opposite side of the plateau where they wintered this or last year. Best estimates of the sex and age ratio of the turkey kill were obtained by finding confidence limits from the check station sample of the kill. During 1963, 9% to 31% of the birds killed were toms, from 16% to 43% hens, and 39% to 68% of the birds killed were poults. No accurate estimate of the number of hens in the population was obtained and no nests were located to determine nesting success. Similarly, little is known regarding mortality. But productivity was calculated in order that a season recommen- . dation could be made. Probably there w~re more than 800 turkeys in the study area when the turkey season opened in October. Approximately 30% of the estimated population was harvested by hunters. Radio telemetry equipment is being tested to enable the recording of turkey activity for correlation with events in the environment and to determine the sources of mortality. The radio equipment will also be used to locate turkey nests and determine nesting success. Other information incidental to the study was gathered. Recommendations: Census. __ Testing various turkey censusing techniques is beyond the scope of this �_"1,_ study. A reliable and efficient method of censusing wild turkeys is badly needed but will not be obtained until an adequate amount of time and money can be devoted to testing different census methods under various conditions. If the development of an effective method of censusing turkeys is thought to be worth the expense involved, a separs.te census evaluation study should be initiated. Movements.--Moverrent of wild turkeys has been determined by the periodic location of marked birds. However, back tags, leg bands, and wing bands are sometimes difficult to see. The chances of overlooking a marked bird would be lessened if wing markers similar to those described by Knowlton, Michael, and Glazner (1964) were used to mark birds. Distribution. __ Check station personnel should be provided with detailed maps showing the location of the various forest types. These maps would enable almost exact location of turkey kills and permit statistical analysis to determine in which forest type most turkeys are killed (provided that a large sample can be obtained). Productivity.-_Nesting success is an important factor determining the productivity of wild turkeys. If transmitters now attached to three adult hens enable the location of their nests, a number of transmitters should be obtained to locate turkey nests next year. Otherwise, an investment of over $2,000 in telemetry equipment will be used to study a sample so small that no statement can be made about the nesting success of other turkeys in the population. Longivity is another of the many factors affecting productivity. A band that turkeys will carry for several years is needed to determine life span. The a.Iumi.numleg bands now Ln use should. be replaced by stronger bands made of a different metal. Objectives: (1) Determine the size, distribution, and productivity turkey population on the Uncompahgre Plateau. of the wild (2) Record movements of wild turkeys and determine how environmental factors affect these movements. (3) Determine the age and sex structure of the turkey kill on the Uncompahgre Plateau to provide estimates of: (a) net productivity, (b) hunter harvest, and (c) size of the turkey population. (4) Techingues Determine and evaluate the characteristics of seasonal ranges of the wild turkey, emphasizing the breeding, nesting, broodrearing, and wintering ranges in terms of primary foods, vegetation types, elevation, topography, exposure, and weather factors. Used: Census.--Various census techniques were used to determine the size of the turkey popUlation on the Uncompahgre Plateau. Thirty-one feed stations were established (between December 5 and December 8, 1963) in areas where turkeys were expected to winter. A De Haviland Beaver was employed to establish 29 of the feed stations consisting of four bails of oat-hay and 100 pounds of grain (either ear corn, �-';/,5- whole oats, or wheat). The feed drops were expected to concentrate turkeys. The feeding areas were censused from the air in a Piper PA-18, a Cesna 185, and a Bell Helicopter. Feed stations were also censused on foot and from vehicles. A summer census was made with a Bell Helicopter. Random strips the entire length of the study area were flown and turkeys were counted. In addition a Piper PA-18 was used to census one roost area. at daylight and turkeys in roost trees were counted. The area was flown Movement and Distribution.--Techniques used to determine turkey distribution involved field observation, reports from reliable sources, and location of kills made by hunters contacted during the hunting season~ Movements were determined by the location of turkeys which were trapped, banded, and released in wintering areas. Standard slat-type turkey traps were used to capture birds in Big Dominguez Canyon and at Pickett Corral. Turkeys were trapped with the cannon net at the Hill Ranch on Highway 90B in Spring Creek Canyon near Montrose, in Pleasant Valley, and on Log Hill. Turkeys were sexed and aged according·to methods described by Keizer and Kozicky (1943). Most birds were marked with National "Jiffy" wing bands, aluminum leg bands, and back tags. The back tags were made from various brands of upholstery material. Twenty-four inch lengths of 1/2 inch rayon, 3/8 inch rayon, or 3/8 inch nylon Colton elastic braid was stapled to each back tag with a model 702 stapling plier built by the Fastner Ccrporation of Chicago. After placing the back tag on the turkey's back, the end of each elastic. braid was passed in front of the wing, beneath the "wing pit", over the turkey's back, and secured to the upholstery back tag with the stapler. Care was taken to maintain proper tension on the elastic braid to prevent injury to the birds. . Radio-tracking equipment was obtained. The equipment will be used to locate turkeys in order to determine the effect of environmental factors on movement and to determine nesting success& Sex and Age Structure of the Kill.--The sex and age structure of the turkey kill was obtained by conducting hunter checks during the turkey seasons. The Uncompahgre Plateau was divided into ten areas which were patrolled by one or two men on October 5-6. Check stations were established (on the roads most often traveled in a majority of the areas) from about 5:30AM to 8:00PM. A short paper presenting kill figures and explaining some of the reasons for having turkey check stations was distributed. In addition, hunters were asked to place the crop from any turkey killed in a bag provided and to leave it in an irredescent red box affixed to Forest Service signs at the forest boundries. Check station personnel spent much of the time between 8:00N~ and 4:00 PM patrolling assigned areas to sex~ age, weigh, and collect crops from birds before they could be dressed by hunters. Check stations were again manned from 4:00PM until all hunters known to be in the areas were checked. Additional hunter checks were conducted during the remainder of the October 5-1>, season. Thlring the first two days of the November 23-December 4 turkey season, hunters were checked on the north end of the Divide Road, in the vicinity of Pickett Corral in Escalante Canyon, on and around 25 Mesa, ne~r the Hill Ranch on Colorado Highway 90, and in Tabeguach Basino Additional hunter checks were made in various parts of the study area throughout the later season. �Productivity.--Wildlife Conservation Officers, Biologists, and others conducted brood counts during July, August, and September. In addition personnel attempted to count the number of toms, hens, and poults in various winter areas but were unsuccessful. �RELATIONSHIPS OF THE PRODUCTIVITY AND DISTRIBUTION OF \VILD TURKEYS ON THE UNCOMPAHGRE PLATEAU TO THE ENVIRONMENT Gary T. Myers Environmental studies are sometimes thought of as basic research often having no immediate practical application in management, yet management strives to harvest the game crop to maintain a balance between the species and its environment. This goal cannot be achieved without a reasonably accurate estimate of productivity and an understanding of the environment. Another job of management is control of limiting factors. But before a limiting factor can be controlled, it must be recognized. Recognition of limiting factors is almost impossible without a thorough knowledge of the environment. The primary objective of this study is to increase our understanding of the turkey and its environment. Acknowledgement Dwight Owens assisted with Turkey trapping, census, and hunter checks. Glenn Rogers and Don Hoffman also helped trap turkeys9 worked on check stations, and offered many helpful suggestions. Wayne Sandfort also suggested ways of improving the study, conducted hunter checks, and was responsible for my meeting Dr. Gorman who deserves the credit for the development of the transmitter described in this papere To all of these people, and to the numerous Biologist and Wildlife Conservation Officers who devoted a great deal of time to this study, I express my sincere appreciation. Census Feed was dropped in areas which were similar to those where turkeys were known to winter, where turkeys were already present, and in all known wintering areas (Figure 1). The feed drops were expected to concentrate turkeys for census and trapping. Aerial Census of Feed Stations.--Stations on the east side of the study area were checked in a Cesna 185 on December 12, between 1:40P11 and 4:00PM. Six turkeys, two of which had blue back tags, were seen at the Pickett Corral feed station. Nine birds were counted at the feed station in Big Dominguez Canyon. All feed stations on both sides of the Uncompahgre were checked the following day (December 13) between 8:05AM and 12:00 AH from the Casna , Only 13 turkeys, all at the feed station in Big Dominguez, were seen. This same flock was counted from the ground that afternoon and found to contain 16 turkeyss Feed stations from the North Fork of Escalante Creek southeast of Traver Creek were checked in a Bell Helicopter on the afternoon of January 11. Tracks were found only around the feed station at Pickett Corral and 38 turkeys were counted within three miles of the feed stationo No other birds were seen during the 2-3/4 hour flight. Feed stations on the east side of the. Uncompahgre Plateau were again checked on January 17, In a Piper PA-18 between 7:30 At1 and 10:10A..'1.Eight turkeys were �-248- Fig. 1. Location of 31 feed stations established on the Uncompahgre Plateau, December 5-8, 1964. �located in Big Dominguez Canyon, but none were found at other stations. Turkey tracks were easily seen in the snow at Dominguez Canyon around 8:00AM but none were noted in other areas (where tracks were present) later in the day. In one area, a ground observer watched us circle a flock of 30 or more turkeys in the Piper PA-18. We failed to see the turkeys or their tracks below. Snow depth in the area was at least three incheso Periodically other feed stations were checked from the air by Wildlife Conservation Officers and Aerial Observers. Yet no turkeys were seen from aircraft at feed stations other than those at Pickett Corral and in Big Dominguez Canyon. Aerial Roost Census.--Twenty-eight wild turkeys were observed in one roost tree about three miles north of Pickett Corral shortly after sundown on January 16. Twelve additional turkeys were seen roosting in trees 1/4 mile north of Pickett Corral. The following morning, a Piper PA-18 was employed to determine how many of these 40 birds could be censused in the roost from a slow flying fixed wing aircraft. The airplane left Montrose at 6:40AM and arrived at Pickett Corral at 7:05AM. There was not enough light to fly into the canyon; so roost trees in an area on Love Mesa (where tracks of 12 turkeys were seen the previous day) were examinedfirstc No turkeys were found~ About five minutes after daylight, trees in the Pickett Corral area were checked. Only nine of the turkeys in roost trees the night before were seen. The nine birds still roosting were easily spotted and were not frightened from trees by the airplane until a second and third flight was made over the roosto No turkeys were located after they flew to the ground. Aerial Summer Census.--A summer census was attempted on September 5, 1963.. A Bell Helicopter was employed. Dwight Owens, Wildlife Observer, made arrangements for the flight. Random strips the entire length of the study area were flown between 5:15AM and 8:35AM.. All of the major cover types in the area were checked. No turkeys were seeno Census Questionnaire.--A questionnaire was used in an effort to locate turkeys during the summer and wintero Self addressed postcards were distributed to ranchers and others frequenting areas where turkeys occurred. Participants were asked to record the number of turkeys or turkey tracks seen (or reported) and then to mail the post card. No cards were received although people having the cards often mentioned seeing turkeys when questioned. Ground Census.--Best results were obtained by checking feed drops from the ground where tracks were easily detected. Turkeys began coming to the feed stations two days after they were established, and 128 turkeys were present at six of the feed stations by December 31. A total of 478 birdsf seven less than last year, were seen by Wildlife Conservation Officers, ranchers? Game Biologist, and others (Figure 2)" Conclusionso--Winter census with a helicopter was not adequately tested. Only one flight of two hours and 45 minutes was made. Snow cover at the time of the flight was inadequate for tracking in most areas. A helicopter census, to be effective, should probably be conducted one or two days following a snow, when temperatures are low enough to prevent tracks from melting9 and when snow depth is such that movement is somewhat hamperedo Under normal weather conditionsp turkeys do not roost early enough in the evening or remain on the roost late enough in the mornings to permit turkey census �-250- • o.» • NATURITA 1.d4,I", • 0) Fig. 2. Distribution of 478 wild turkeys on the Uncompahgre Plateau during the winter of 1963-64. The number of turkeys counted in each area appears in parenthesis. �-25)- in roost trees from aircraft; however, during extremely cold weather, turkeys sometimes roost a few hours before dark and remain on the roost for sometime after daylight. And occasionally turkeys roost throughout the day. Perhaps aerial census of roost sites would prove worthwhile under these circumstances. Twenty-five of the 31 feed stations established for census purposes from the De Haviland Beaver were not utilized by turkeys. In one instance, a feed station was moved three times before it was located by turkeys in the area. Each time, the feed was placed where turkey tracks (less than a day old) were found. Aerial feed drops were effective only where turkeys had been fed in previous winters or where feed was dropped almost on top of the birds. Soon after the last turkey season, feed should be placed in areas where aerial drops have proved effective or where turkeys were fed in years past. All other feed stations should be established from the ground when fresh turkey tracks are located and when food is relatively scarce Q Census of feed stations from fixed wing aircraft is ineffective. Summer census should not be attempted by any method as turkeys are widely scattered throughout the study area at this time. Dense cover makes it almost impossible to see turkeys during the summer. Questionnaires were not an effective means of determining of turkey flocks on the Uncompahgre Plateau. Movements the size and distribution and Distribution Figure 3 shows the location of banding sites, the general direction, and mln1mum distance of movement of banded birds from these sites. A turkey banded in March, 1963, on 25 Mesa, was seen (by Don Hoffman) January 28, 1964, at the Hill Ranch. The turkey had moved from the east side to the west side of the Uncompahgre Plateau. This bird was wintering 18 air miles from the area where it wintered the year beforeo Similarly, a turkey with a red neck tag was captured in Dominguez Canyon on January 8, 1964. This bird was originally banded in February, 1962, at the Hill Ranch. The turkey moved from the southwest side of the Plateau to the northeast end in slightly less than two years. Minimum movement was 33 miles. Between the middle of May and the end of September9 nine turkeys with blue back tags were seen in the Love Mesa area. These birds all came from Pickett Corral. Additional birds from Pickett Corral were seen in other areas. One hen banded February 19, 1963, at Pickett Corral, was round (by Dwight Owens) with a brood of poults on August 2, 1963, near Windy Point. The hen had crossed the top of the Plateau and was 11 air miles from the banding site. A tom from Pickett Corral was also seen the same day at the head of Kelso Creek. This bird was more than 12 miles from Pickett Corral. A tom banded in Dominguez Canyon on March 30, 1963, was killed during the November 23-December 1, turkey season near Big Creek, at least seven miles from the banding site. In addition, three Pickett Corral birds were killed during this season. All but one, shot on Kelso Mesa, were harvested in the vicinity of Pickett Corral~ The winter distribution of wild turkeys is shown in Figure 2. Flocks of wild turkeys or tracks made by turkey flocks were seen in wintering areas on April 5, �-252- • C A L. 11 • NATURITA .1.0 I t V Fig. J. Location of all banding sites in the study area, general direction and minimum distance of movement of banded birds from these areas. �-253April 69 Apl"il 11, and on April 190 areas after April 19. No turkey flocks were seen on wintering Birds reached the summer range sometime before May 17, when a tom from Pickett Corral was located in the Ponderosa forest type on Love Mesa. During the later part of July and all of August twenty-seven broods were seen or reported (Figure 4). Hens having broods were often found in the Aspen forest type. Turkeys remained primarily in the Ponderosa and Aspen types until about one week before the October 5-13, turkey season when birds apparently shifted to the edges of the Aspen, Ponderosa, and Chaparral types. This shift in movement occurred soon after the acorn crop began falling from the oakbrush~ During the first season 34% of the turkeys checked were killed in areas where Aspen and Oakbrush occurred. Twenty-five per cent were harvested where Ponderosa Pine, Aspen9 and Oakbrush grew. Only 19% were killed in areas having Oak and Pinyon. Roughly 84% of the turkeys checked came from areas where oakbrush occUrred. Sometime between the end of the first season and beginning of the second. season there was another shift to lower elevations in some areas (Figures 5 and 6). Fifty-two per cent of the turkeys checked in the later season were killed in the Pinyon-Juniper forest type, while 38% were killed where Ponderosa Pine, Aspen, and Oakbrush occurred together. Following the end of the second season in December, there was a gradual buildup of birds in the Pinyon-Juniper forest type where most turkeys in the study area winter. A majority of the birds had reached wintering areas by the end of January. Sex and Age Structure of Kill The turkey seasons were held? October 5-13, and November 23-December 1, on the Uncompahgre Plateau during 1963. The October 5-13, season coincided with the second blue grouse season. Two turkeys of any sex could be killed during either the first or second season, or one could be killed in each season. Hunting with shotgun or bow and arrow was permitted be tween sunrise and sunset. Sixty-two of the turkeys killed during the two seasons were examined at check stations, {Table 1)0 Of this numbers six were of undetermined sex a.ndage. Basing sex and age ratios of the kill on ages of the 56 birds of known sex and age, the kill consisted of 9% tomsp 14% hens, ond 77% poults. Yet kill figures based on hunter report cards indicate that the kill was comprised of 39'%toms9 37'~hens, and 24% poults (Figure 7). The relationship between kill figures based on hunter checks and kill figures from hunter report cards returns was tested by Chi-square analysis. The Chi-square value was "greater than" 90 (with two degrees of freedom) indicating that the ratio of hens, toms, and poults in the reported kill differed significantly from the kill figures obtained by use of the check station sample. This difference could be due to the hunters inability to sex and age turkeys. At check stations hunters were asked whether they had killed a tom, hen, or poult. One-fourth of 12 of 48 turkeys were incorrectly called toms or hens. This small sample indicated (with 20 to 1 odds of being correct) that hunters on the Uncompahgre Plateau incorrectly called somewhere between 95 and 163 turkeys hens or toms. If hunters report the sex and age of kills based on their own judgement, the sex and age composition of the reported kill is inaccurate. Further proof of error in reported kill can be seen by comparing the reported poult kill in 1961, with the number of poults checked in the field. All but two of the 37 poults reportedly killed in the study area were examined at check stations while only �Fig. 4. Location of broods seen or reported during the summer of 1963. �-255- • C A L. ( lOII?1.) RIOIEWAY Fig. 5. Major areas where turkeys were killed on the Uncompahgre Plateau during the October 5-13, 1963, turkey season. ( �-256- 6. Major areas where turkeys were killed on the Uncompahgre Plateau during the November 23-December 1, 1963 season. Fig. �150 .-125 Key: First Column -- Toms Second Column - Hens Third Column -- Poults .-- 100 r-- 't:1 Q) I- rl rl oM .-- :.:: Ul » Q) ~s.. r-- :0 '..n --J I r-- :1 Eo< ~ 0 ~ .-- s.. <I) ~:1 I 7.5 50 Z ~ 25 o I- l- •• Fig. 7. 1959 1960 1961 .1962 Year of Kill Composition of the turkey kill on the Uncompahgre Plateau based on hunter report card returns. 1963 �-25n- Table 1. Sex and age structure of turkey kill examined by Biologists in the study area October 5-13, and November 23-December 1, 1963. Toms Hens Poults Hens or Poults Total October Season November Season No. Killed Per Cent of Kill No. Killed Per Cent of Kill No. Killed Per Cent of Kill 3 6 24 3 36 8 17 67 8 100 2 2 19 3 26 8 8 73 11 100 5 8 43 6 62 8 13 69 10 100 Both Seasons Combined 19 of the 140 hens, said to have been killed, were examined. There is no reason to believe that check station personnel would be more likely to examine poults than hens. Conclusions.--Best estimates of the sex and age ratio of the turkey kill can be obtained by determining confidence limits for the check station sample. The odds are 20 to 1 that somewhere between 22 and 76 toms were kilied, 39 to 105 hens were harvested, and 95 to 165 poults' were bagged (Figure 8). These estimates are slightly conservative since they are based on a sample size of 50 when actually the sample size was 56 (almost 23% of the total kill). ~uctivity In order to determine the productivity of turkeys in the study area, information is needed regarding the number of mature breeding hens, nesting success, mortality, and the average number of young raised per hen with brood. Of 82 turkeys seen in three areas during the winter of 1962-63, 46% were toms, and the remaining birds were hens and poults. This sample was not large enough to establish satisfactory confidence limits for the number of hens and poults in the population. The percentage of hens trapped in relation to toms and poults is also useless for determining sex and age composition becaus~ only a few birds were trapped last winter and because turkeys do not seem to be captured in proportion to their numbers in the flock. Thus no accurate estimate of the number of hens in the population was obtained. And no nests were located to determine nesting success. Still, productivity was calculated in order that a season recommendation could ba· made. Assuming that one-fourth of the 485 turkeys counted in the study area were breeding females, there were at least 120 breeding hens. Perhaps half or 60 hens were successful in their nesting attempts. Twenty-eight broods of wild turkeys were seen or reported during July and August of 1963. Accurate counts were obtained for 17 of the 28 broods which averaged 8.5 young per hen with brood. These broods contained from four to eleven young. If 60 hens raised eight young per hen, the turkey population would have almost doubled (to 965 birds). �-259Fig. 8. Comparison of sampled, reported, and predicted kill during the 1963 turkey season on the Uncompahgre Plateau. The actual kill probably lies somewhere within the black area in the estimated kill columns. 17.5 1.50 12.5 -e ,CD r-I r-I oM ~ 100 (/) ~ CD ~ J" .3 fo.4 0 J" CD 75 § Z .50 25 (/) s o E-< o Reported kill Estimated kill �-260- Assuming a 15% mortality amoungall turkeys, there would have been 818 birds at the beginning of the turkey season. Of these, 244 were killed during the two hunting seasons according to report card returns. Based on check station figures, from 13 to 55 (95% confidence inte:t'vd) tu:t'keys'W~reorippled this past season by hunters. If 55 crippled bi:t'dsdied? there should hava been 519 turkeys after the hunting seasons. Forty-one turkeys less than the population estimate, 478, were counted in wintering areas this yearo Conclusions.--It is obvious that there are many errors in the estimated productivity. Accurate information is badly needed regarding the sex ratio of the population, nesting success, number of young raised per hen with brood, and mortality. However, season recommendations based on poor estimates of turkey productivity are better than recommendations based on no estimate at all. R,.adioTelemetry The activities of wild turkeys must be continuously recorded to successfully correlate activity with events in the environment. Radio-tracking devices promise to provide the means of determining the activity of wild turkeys in their natural habitat with minimum disturbance. Telemetry equipment ma~ in addition, enable the location of turkey nests to determine nesting success. Transmitters.--There were no manufacturers of miniature transmitters suitable for use on wild turkeys. Equipment similar to that described by Verts (1963) was examined and operatedo The problem of transmitter development was then discussed with Dr. Gorman, head of Veterinary Research at the Martin Company in Denver. Dr. Gorman volunteered to build a transmitter suitable for use on turkeys (free of charge). He spoke of a transmitter in the 50 to 100 MC range, weighing 10 grams without batteries, capable of transmitting three miles, and having a battery life of about four months. The expected cost of this transmitter was less than $100.00. The transmitter, built by K. D. Heist under the supervision of Dr. Gorman, underwent preliminary testing in December of 1963. Range was over four miles in hilly terrain, and weight was 15.2 grams without batteries. Approximate dimensions were 3 x 1 x 1 inches. Weight of the transmitter and battery, after miniaturization, was expected to be about two ounces. Heist then gave the schematic diagram and specifications to ArGene Madden who built five transmitters for $225.00. A schematic diagram of the transmitter appears in Figure 9. The transmitters are said to have a power output of 85 to 100 milliwatts, an average current drain of two milliamps, a conservative battery life of 150.hours (with a 350 milliamp hour battery), and a range of about four miles, depending upon receiving equipment and terrain. Frequencies of the transmitters (which are not crystal controlled) lie between 86 and 96 megacycles. The 5-1/2 inch whip antenna is made of otpiano wire" (Figure 10). The transmitters are potted with Polyurethane Duro-Foam coated with Hysol Epoxy Patch to provide protection from moisture and dirt (Figure 11). This potting compound can be removed to make transmitter repairs. The potted transmitter weighs 5/8 ounces. Dimensions after potting are 2 x 7/8 x 7/8 inches. One Eveready No. E146, 8.40 volt mercury battery (weighing 1-1/2 ounce) powers the transmitter. Estimated battery life was 6-1/4 days. One transmitter tested to determine battery life at room temperature, quit operating somewhere between 6 and 6-1/2 days. �Cl ~----,----------------------,-----+ L 1 C3 R3 C2 B.4 V I I R1 ..•...C4 15 ~R4 I I Transistors Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 G.E. 2N914 Phi1co 2N207 Phi1co 2N207 Phi1co 2N207 Philco 2N207 Phi1co 2N207 r-' I ANIv R2 ....JYW l\) C!' R1 R2 *R3 R4 RS R6 R7 R8 I Resistors <tW 5~) ohms R9 2,000 ohms 240 2,200 R10 300 " " R11 2,200 3,900 " " R12 10,000 2,400 " " R13 33,000 2,000 " " *R14 33,000 10,000 " " R15 1,500 50,000 " " *Bias Resistors 50,000 " Capacitors Cl 5 mmf C2 15 mmf c3 .001 mf C4 .001 mf CS .01 mf c6 .01 mf C7 .01 mf CB 30 uf 10V C9 10 uf 10V Fig. 9. Schematic diagram of transmitters to be used for radio-tracking wild turkeys on the Uncompahgre Plateau. L 1 is made from five turns of No. 18 AWG with 3/8 inch inside diameter.• �Fig. 10. Miniature transmitter prior to potting. �Fig. 11. Potted transmitter, timer, and battery. Timer.--A short battery life necessitated the development of a timer to turn the transmitter off when not in use. Heist, again under the supervision of Dr. Gorman, developed a timer (Figure 11). Madden then constructed five of them for $150.00. Harnesses.--Harnesses to secure transmitters on turkeys were fashioned after those described by Marshall (unpublished). Plastic tubing (1/8 inch outside diameter) with 148 pound test nylon twine through the center, 1/8 inch plastic tubing having steel wire through its center, and 5/16 inch diameter vinyl tubing (used in the manufacture of jump ropes by Geauga Industries Co., l1iddlefield, Ohio) were employed as harnesses. Scotch Brand electrical plastic tape secured the transmitter, timer, and battery to the harness (Figure 12). The harness, transmitter, timer, and battery weighed between five and six ounces. Receiving Equipment.--Signals from the small transmitter could not be heard a mile away with a $42.00 receiver (line of sight). Reception was increased to over four miles (in rolling terrain) by using an expensive receiver. Since increased range could mean the difference between the success or failure of this study,a Marconi Eddystone Receiver (Model 770R, $997.00) having continuous coverage from 19 MC - 165 MC was purchased. A Terada (Model 50-191, $136.00) 250 to 300 watt transistorized inverter was obtained to convert the 12 volt DC supply of a vehicle to 110 volt 60 cycle AC to permit operation of the receiver from a vehicle. A Channel Master A~/FM Receiver (No. 6518, $42.00) will be carried into the field. A Mark Mobile Stereo 7FM Antenna '$13.25) was used with the Channel Master. �Fig. 12. Transmitter, battery, and timer secured to harness with plastic electrical tape. Attachement of Transmitters.--Transmitters were placed on three adult hens at Pickett Corral on April 8, 1964. One turkey (having wing band 14 and leg band T-51) was instrumented with a transmitter operating at about 94 MC. The transmitter will operate for 40 minutes, starting at 6:00AM and 6:00PM. The battery was placed over the bird's crop, while the transmitter and timer lay on the turkey's back (Figure 13). The harness was made from 1/8 inch plastic tubing which had wire running through its center. Fig. 13. turkey. Transmitter and timer secured to the back of an adult hen �Another transmitter operating at 92.5 MC was placed on a turkey wearing leg band T-ll and wing band 55. The timer was set to turn the transmitter on at 7:00AM and 7:00PM. The transmitter operates for about one hour during the morning and evening. A harness made from 1/8 inch plastic tubing with nylon twine through the center of the tubing was used to secure the transmitter to the turkey. The timer was placed over the crop while the battery and transmitter were set on the turkey's back (Figure 14). A third transmitter was secured to the back of a turkey with 5/16 inch vinyl plastic. All components were placed on the back of the turkey (transmitter sitting on top of the battery and timer forward). This turkey is marked with leg band T-13, wing band 57 and blue neck band 21. The timer will operate the transmitter (at 94.5 MC) for about two hours beginning at 1:30AM and 1:30PM. Response of turkeys to transmitters.--The first turkey instrumented flew normally upon release. The second bird ran from the area when freed. The third turkey released ran about 60 yards and then flew into a tall pinyon tree. The turkey was unable to balance itself on the limb and began flapping its wings to regain balance. After flapping and falling to lower limbs, the bird fell from the tree, landed on its back in the snow, and ran from the area. During this time, signals were being received from the transmitter. A change in signal tone was noted as the bird flew into the tree, but no change was detected throughout the flapping or during and after the fall from the tree. The transmitter was monitered for about twenty minutes with the Channel Master Receiver before we left the area. Fig. 14. Miniature transmitter and battery attached to the back of an adult hen turkey. Sock over bird's head eases handling. �-266- Proposed Use.--Various turkey flocks, as well as sex and age groups may be assigned separate frequencies to enable the location of a particular group, or sex and age of birds for observation. Turkeys will be located by triangulation on aerial photographs having a scale of eight inches per mile. The informatiou needed to plot movements will be relayed from one station to the other via two Johnson 1.5 wa~t transceivers ($269.60). It is hoped that accuracy will be such that we can determine the exact location of the tree a turkey roosts in, the spring it drinks from, and the cover types it frequents. It may also be possible to locate nesting hens and hens with broods to determine nesting success and brood survival. Sexing and Aging Technigues Several birds were picked and gutted before they could be examined by check station personnel, and occasionally the tips of the contour breast feathers on poults lacked the coloration typical of their sex. Thus, a variety of sexing and aging techniques is needed to accurately sex and age turkeys at check stations. During the first turkey season, 25 birds were correctly aged on the basis of tarsus coloration; however, eight of 21 turkeys (37% of those checked) were incorrectly aged using this characteristic during the November season. The tarsus length was measured to determine sex during the first season. There seemed to be a big difference in measurements depending upon who took them. Either the tarsus bone should be removed and measured from end to end, or a different measurement should be substituted. During the second season the length from the feather line, above the tarsus, to the tip of the 'toenail was measured. This method also proved inaccurate. 'Some personnel measured the distance down the back of the turkey's leg, while others took the measurement along the leading edge of the tarsus and toe. Measurements along the front of the tarsus were shorter than the measurements taken (on the same birds) along the back of the tarsus. During the trapping season, this characteristic was again checked. The middle toe was extended parallel to the tarsus and the length along the forward edge of the tarsus from the feather line to the tip of the toenail was measured. A significant difference in the mean length of the tarsus and middle toe in male and female wild turkeys on the Uncompahgre Plateau exists after January. This difference was found by use of the 1test (at the .05 level). The average combined length of the tarsus and middle toe of 17 males was 257 mm. This length in 52 females was 212 mm. The mean length of the tarsus and middle toe of all female turkeys in the study area lies between 209 and 212 mm. The mean tarsus and middle toe length of the male popUlation lies bet~een 253 and 261 rom. (with 95% certainty). Weights of a majority of the turkeys examined at check stations were also recorded. The field dressed weight of three mature toms was 13, 13-1/2, and 14-1/2 pounds. Four field dressed hens weighed from 7-1/4 to 9 pounds. The weight (entire) of seven male poults ranged from 9 to 13-1/2 pounds. Three field dressed male poults weighed 7-1/4, 10, and 10-1/4 pounds. The average field dressed weight of ten female poults was 5-3/4 pounds. Weights of the female poults ranged from 4-1/2 to 6-1/2 pounds. The coloration of the tips of the contour breast feathers was also used to sex turkeys. No mistakes were made on adult birds, but an occasional poult was incorrectly sexed when this technique was used. �-'/67- The length of central tail feathers in relation to adjacent tail feathers proved to be a poor technique for determining age. Central tail feathers were equal to, shorter than, or longer than the adjacent tail feathers of different poults, depending upon the birds age. Poults with tail feathers equal in length to the adjacent tail feathers could be mistaken for adult birds. The bluntness of toenails was also unsatisfactory for check station use in determining the age of turkeys. Few, if any, mistakes were made when birds were aged by the pointedness of the two outer wing primaries. Conclusions.--Trained personnel may be able to sex and age turkeys using a combination of any of the techniques mentioned above, but people who Qccasionally sex and age turkeys are often unable to use some of the techniques. The bluntness of toenails, tarsus coloration after the last of October, and the length of central tail feathers in relation to adjacent tail feathers should not be used by check station attendants to determine the age of turkeys. The most useful techniques are probably the combined length of the tarsus and middle toe, tarsus coloration during the October season, pointedness of the two outer wing primaries, ~nd coloration of the tips of the contour breast feathers. Trapping and Banding Operations Turkeys were trapped, banded, and released on the Uncompahgre Plateau during the winters of 1961-62 and 1962-63. Seven of the sixteen turkeys banded in February 1962 by Roger Evans have been seen or are accounted for. One was caught and transplanted to another area by the Management Division in Dece~ber 1962. Two were killed during the 1962 hunting season. This year three were recaptured and another was seen. In addition, 14 of the 31 birds banded during the winter of 1962-63 have been located. Four were killed during the turkey season, at least one was seen in Dominguez Canyon, and nine were recaptured this winter (Table 2). Others were present at Pickett Corral but were difficult to distinguish from recently marked birds. Turkeys, in addition to those wearing tags for nine months or more, were also recaptured. Seventy-nine turkeys were captured, banded, and released this winter on the Uncompahgre Plateau (Tables 3 and 4). Birds were trapped in five different areas (Figure 15). Back tags of various colors were used to mark birds in each area (Table 3). Twelve turkeys were captured after wearing tags for nine months or more. Of these birds, 5 were adult toms (Table 4). All five of the toms had been banded with aluminum leg bands, neck bands, and back tags. When recaptured, all were without leg bands (Table 5). Only one neck band and back tag was lost. Of the seven recaptured hens, two lost leg bands, two lost neck bands, and all of the five hens known to have had back tags retained them (Table 6). Nine back tags were recovered from recaptured turkeys. Six of the recovered back tags were made of Naugahyde. Five of the six Naugahyde back tags were cracked and in worse condition than the tags made of Coronet and Herculite. Any of the three materials from which back tags were made will, however, outlast the 1/2 inch of 3/8 inch rayon elastic used to secure back tags to turkeys. The elastic on six of the nine tags was badly worn, and the tags would probably have fallen off of the turkeys within a few months time, But elastic in the remaining tags might have held for two years or more~ �Table 2. Information concerning wild turkeys recaptured on the Uncompahgre Plateau during the winter of 1963-64. Back Tag; Color No. 1st release Recapture 2nd release Recapture 3rd release Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Neck Tag; Color No. - Blue --- -24 --24 --- 24 --- 1.-ling Band No. - -- Leg Band No. Sex Age T-50 M T-525 T-525 T-525 M M M A A A A - 11 Weight 17 -17-1/4 Date Captured Place Captured 3/8/62 1/21/641/21/643/1/643/1/64 Pickett Corral Pickett Corral Pickett Corral Pickett Corral Pickett Corral 29 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Hill Ranch 2/22/62 Orange 1st release .-10 --Dominguez 1/8/64 Orange Recapture --- Orange 1/8/64Dominguez 2nd release Yellow 11 T-29 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2/22/62 Hill Ranch T-10 9 1st release Orange ---- Orange 1/28/64Hill Ranch A 9-1/4 T-10 Recapture --A F F F A A F F F A A 1/28/64Hill Ranch A T-40 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Dominguez A 3/23/63 10-3/4 F Yellow 3 T-20 Yellow 3 1st release Dominguez 1/8/64 A F 9 Yellow 3 Recapture -- -- -- --1/8/64Dominguez A F T-26 Yellow 3 2nd release ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Dominguez A 10-1/4 3/23/63 F Yellow 4 T-2l Yellow 4 1st release -1/8/64Dominguez A F Yellow 4 T-2l Yellow 4 Recapture 2nd release Orange 11 Orange - ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2nd release Yellow 4 Yellow 4 - T-2l F A 1st release Recapture 2nd release Blue Blue Blue 5 5 40 Blue 17 T-507 T-507 T-54 F F F Y 5 -- -- - A A 8 9-1/2 - 1/8/64- Dominguez 12/21/63 2/25/64 2/25/64- Pickett Corral Pickett Corral Pickett Corral ---------------------------~------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Pickett Corral 2/5/63 A 17-1/2 M Blue 8 8 T-5l0 Blue 1st release Recapture 2nd release Recapture 3rd release Blue Blue Blue Blue 8 31 31 31 Blue Blue Blue Blue 8 8 8 8 --- -34 - T-533 T-533 T-533 M M M M A A A A 17-1/4 -17 - 1/21/641/21/643/1/643/1/64- Pickett Corral Pickett Corral Pickett Corral Pickett Corral I I\) 0" 00 I �Table 2. Continued Back Tag Color No. 1st release Recapture 2nd release Blue Blue Blue 10 10 53 Neck Tag Color No. Blue Blue Blue 10 10 10 Wing Band No. -32 Leg Band No. T-5l2 - T-.54l Sex Age Weight M M M A A 17-1/2 18 - - Date Captured Place Captured 2/5/63 3/1/64 3/1/64 Pickett Corral Pickett Corral Pickett Corral ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Pickett Corral A 16-3/4 2/5/63 M Blue Blue 1st release T-517 15 Recapture 2nd release Recapture 3rd release -Blue Blue Blue 15 -27 27 27 Blue --- -- 15 - - --- -31 T-529 T-529 T-529 M M M M A A A A 16-3/4 17-1/4 - 1/21/64 1/21/64 3/1/64 3/1/64 Pickett Corral Picket t Corral Pickett Corral Pickett Corral ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Pickett Corral A 2/5/63 M 17-1/2 Blue 16 16 T-518 1st release Recapture 2nd release Blue Blue Blue 16 50, Blue -- 16 - -- 27 - T-539 M M A A 19-1/4 - 3/1/64 3/1/64 Pickett Corral Pickett Corral ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Pickett Corral 2/19/64 A F 10-1/4 Blue T-l1 Blue 1st release 19 Recapture 2nd release 19 Blue 19 (Radio) Blue 19 - -55 T-11 T-ll F F - 4/8/64 4/8/64 A 9-1/2 A A A 9-1/4 2/25/64 2/25/64 4/8/64 4/8/64 A A 9-1/2 Pickett Corral Pickett Corral ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Pickett Corral 2/19/63 A 10-1/4 F Blue 21 21 1st release Recapture 2nd release Recaoture 3rd i-elease Blue 21 Blue Blue 35 Blue 35 (Radio) Blue 'Blue Blue Blue 21 21 21 21 - - 57 T-13 T-13 T-13, T-13 T-13 F F F F - - Pickett Corral Pickett Corral Pickett Corral Pickett Corral -----------------------------------------------------~-----------------------------------~------------~---------Corral Pickett 1/21/64 M Y 13-1/4 Blue 23 T-524 -- 1st release Recapture 2nd release Blue Blue 23 23 --- - 12 - - T-524 T-524 M M Y Y 14-1/2 - 2/25/64 2/25/64 Pickett Corral Pickett Corral -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------~------------------------- Corral Pickett 1/21/64 A 17-1/2 M T-526 Blue 1st release 25 -Recapture 2nd release Blue Blue 25 25 -- -- -- -33 T-526 T-526 M M A A 17 - 3/1/64 3/1/64 Pickett Corral Pickett Corral I N (J'. '-0 I �Table 2. Continued Back Tag Color No. Neck Tag Color No. Wing Band No. Leg Band No. Sex Age Weight Date Captured Place Captured ~ M T-530 A 1/21/64 15-1/2 Pickett Corral M T-530 A -- 3/1/64 Pickett Corral 35 14 A T-530 3/1/64 -Pickett Corral ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1st release Blue 30 M A T-532 15-1/4 1/21/64 -- Pickett Corral Recapture Blue 30 A M 15-1/4 T-532 3/1/64 -Pickett Corral 2nd release Blue 30 -J6 M A T-532 3/1/64 Pickett Corral - 1st release Recapture 2nd release Blue Blue Blue 28 28 28 -- ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1st release Blue 32 T-48 F A Recapture end release Blue Blue 32 32 1st releas~ Recapture 2nd release Blue Blue Blue 33 33 33 ---- --- 9 9 9 T-48 T-48 F F A A -- - 10 10 10 T-49 T-49 T-49 F F F Y Y Y 8-1/4 8-1/4 2/16/64 2/25/64 2/25/64 Pickett Corral Pickett Corral Pickett Corral 2/16/64 2/25/64 2/25/64 Pickett Corral Pickett Corral Pickett Corral ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ -- - 7-1/2 ----~-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------~--------1st release Blue J4 11 M T-538 A 2/16/64 Pickett Corral Recapture Blue J4 11 14-3/4 M A T-538 4/8/64 Pickett Corral 2nd release Blue J4 11 M A T-538 4/8/64 Pickett Corral -- -- -----------------------------------------------------------------~----------------------------------------------1st release Blue 14 37 -T-51· F A 8-3/4 2/25/64 Pickett Corral Recapture Blue 37 14 F A T-51 8-3/4 4/8/64 -Pickett Corral 2nd release (Radio) 14 F A T-51 4/8/64 Pickett Corral -- I --J 0 I l\J �-271Table 3. Wild turkeys trapped, marked, and released in the study area during the winter of 1963-64 Males Females 0 5 9 16 3 6 3 1 12 0 0 0 13 42 Males Females Total 0 4 2 1 1 0 9 12 32 3 4 0 3 1 8 9 5 9 5 19 79 Color of Back Tag Employed to t"1nrkBirds Yellow Orange Blue Turquoise Green BlueWhite Dots Location Where Trapped, Marked, and Released Dominquez Canyon Hill Ranch Pickett Corral Spring Cr. Canyon Pleasant Valley Log Hill Total Numbers painted on back tags and neck tags with Ram Cote black vinyl upholstery finish did not fade after weathering nine months or more. An adult tom banded with a neck band, leg band, and back tag was killed during the November season by Dwight Owens.. The turkey's lower beak was caught underneath the neck band. This hunter thought that the bird would have starved to death during the winter if it had not been killed. For fear that other birds might also catch their beaks in neck bands, they were not used to mark birds this winter. Conclusions.--Aluminum leg bands apparently are not retained long enough to merit their use on tom turkeys (these bands seem to be retained by hens). A stronger leg band is needed. Neck tags, if properly attached, are satisfactory for marking turkeys. But occasionally a bird may catch its lower beak under the neck band. If a bird in this condition happened to be killed by a hunter, the banding program might receive bad publicity. So, right or wrong, the use of neck bands was discontinued. The back tags, leg bands, and wing bands used to mark birds this past winter will be difficult to see. Next winter wing markers similar to those described by Knowlton, 11ichael, and Glazner (1964) should be used to lessen the chances of overlooking a marked turkey in the field. Incidental Information Hunter opinion was sampled to determine the popularity of the blue grouse season which was held in conjunction with the turkey season October 5-13. Two hunters were indifferent, three opposed, and 89 (94.7% of the hunters questioned) favored the joint season. No one felt that grouse hunters had interferred with turkey hunting, or that turkey hunters had hurt grouse hunting. Opposition was due mainly to the belief that there were not enough grouse to withstand additional hunting, yet 105 grouse were seen. Often hunters who saw grouse did not shoot them for fear that turkeys in the area might be frightened �Table 4. 1963-64. Information concerning turkeys banded and released on the Uncompahgre Plateau during the winter of Back Color Tag Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue (Radio) Blue (Radio) Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue No. 23 24 25 26 27 28 Back Tag Material Herculite Naugahyde Herculite Coronet Coronet Naugahyde Width of Elastic (inches) Wing Band No. Leg Band No. 3/8 Nylon 3/8 Nylon 3/8 Nylon 1/2 Rayon 1/2 Rayon 3/8 Nylon 12 29 33 T-524 T-525 T-526 T-527 T-529 T-530 T-531 T-532 T-533 T-48 T-49 T-538 T-13 T-50 T-51 T-52 T-53 T-54 T-55 T-56 T-57 T-58 T-59 T-60 T-61 T-62 T-63 T-539 T-540 T-541 T-81 30 31 32 33 34 Naugahyde Coronet Herculite Herculi te Coronet 3/8 Nylon 3/8 Nylon 3/8 Nylon 3/8 Nylon 3/8 Nylon 36 Herculite 3/8 Nylon 38 39 40 41 42 43 4445 46 47 48 49 50 52 53 54 Herculite Herculite Herculite Herculite Herculite Hercu1ite Herculite Llamalize L1amalize Llama1ize Llama1ize Llamalize Llamalize Llamalize Llama1ize Llamalize 3/8 Nylon 3/8 Nylon 3/8 Nylon 3/8 Nylon 3/8 Nylon 3/8 Nylon· 3/8 Nylon 3/8 Nylon 3/8 Nylon 3/8 Nylon 3/8 Nylon 3/8 Nylon 3/8 Nylon 3/8 Nylon 3/8 Nylon 3/8 Nylon 31 35 36 ;4 9 10 11 10 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 32 56 Sex Age M M Y M A A A A M M M M M M F F M F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F M M M F A A A A A Y A A A A A A A A Y A A A A Y A A A A A A Weight (pounds) Date of Capture 14-1/2 17-1/4 17 i8 17-1/4 2/25/64· 3/1/64 3/1/64 1/21/64 3/1/64 3/1/64 1/21/64 3/1/64 3/1/64 2/25/64 2/25/64 4/8/64 4/8/64 2/25/64 4/8/64 4/8/64 4/8/64 4/8/64 4/8/64 4/8/64 4/8/64 4/8/64 4/8/64 4/8/64 4/8/64 4/8/64 4/8/64 3/1/64 3/1/64 3/1/64 4/8/64 16 15-1/4 17 8-1/4 7-1/2 12-3/4 9-1/4 9-1/2 8-3/4 10-1/4 .9-1/2 9-1/2 9-1/2 8-1/4 10-1/2 9-1/4 9 9· 8-3/4 8-1/4 9-1/4 19-1/4 16 18 8-1/4 I Tv --.4 tv I �Table 4. Continued Ba.ck Tag Color No. (Radio) Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow Orange Orange Orange Orange Orange Orange Orange Orange Orange Orange Orange Orange Turquoise Turquoise Turquoise Turquoise Turquoise Turquoise Turquoise Turquoise ' Back Tag Material Width of Elastic (inches) 3 4 8 Coronet Coronet Llamalize 3/8 Nylon 3/8 Nylon 1/2 Rayon 10 11 12 14 15 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1 2 3 4 5 Llamalize Llalllalize Encore Naugahyde Llamalize unknown unknown 1/2 Rayon 3/8 Rayon 3/8 Nylon 3/8 Rayon 3/8 Rayon 3/8 Rayon 3/8 Rayon 3/8 Rayon 3/8 Rayon 3/8 Rayon 3/8 Rayon 3/8 Rayon 3/8 Rayon 3/8 Rayon 3/8 Rayon 3/8 Rayon 3/8 Rayon 3/8 Rayon 3/8 Rayon 3/8 Rayon 3/8 Rayon 3/8 Rayon 3/8 Rayon 6 7 8 Granville Granville Granville Granville Granville Granville Granville Llama1ize Llamalize Llamalize Granville Granville .Herculite Herculite Rood Hercu1ite Rood Herculite Rood Herculite Rood Herculite Rood Hercu1ite Rood Herculite Rood Wing Band No. Leg Band No. 55 T-ll T-26 T-21 T-24 T-25 T-29 T-27 T-28 T-30 T-31 T-32 T-534 T-33 T-34 T-35 T-36 T-37 T-38 T-39 T-40 T-535 T-536 T-41 T-42 T-43 T-44 T-45 T-537 T-46 T-47 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Sex Age F F F F F F F F F F F M F F F F F F F F M A A A Y Y A A Y Y A A Y A A A A A A A A Y M A F F F F F M F F A A A Y Y Y Y Y Weight (pounds) Date of Capture 9-1/2 9 10 9 9-3/4 10 10 9-3/4 8-3/4 9-1/4 10-3/4 12-3/4 10 11 9-1/2 8-1/4 9-3/4 10 8-1/2 9-1/4 14 18-1/4 9-1/2 9-1/2 8-3/4 7-1/2 7-1/4 10-3/4 8-1/4 7-1/4 4/8/64 1/8/64 1/8/64 1/8/64 1/8/64 1/8/64 1/8/64 1/8/64 1/23/64 1/23/64 "1/28/64 1/28/64 1/28/64 1/28/64 1/28/64 1/28/64 1/28/64 1/28/64 1/28/64 1/28/64 1/28/64 1/28/64 2/15/64 2/15/64 2./15/64 2/15/64 2/15/64 2/15/64 2/15/64 2/15/64 I ,,) -J 'v-J I �Table 4. Continued Back Color Tag Green Green Green Green Green Green Green Green Green Blue-White Dots Blue-White Dots Blue-White Dots Blue-White Dots B1ue-w'hite Dots Blue-White Dots Blue-White Dots Blue-White Dots Blue-White Dots Wing Band No. Leg Band No. Sex Age A A No. Back Tag Material Width of Elastic (inches) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Burnished Antique Naugahyde Burnished Antique Naugahyde Burnished Antique Naugahyde Burnished Antique Naugahyde Burnished Antique Naugahyde Burnished Antique Naugahyde Burnished Antique Naugahyde Burnished Antique Naugahyde Burnished Antique Naugahyde 3/8 Nylon 3/8 Nylon 1/2 Rayon 1/2 Rayon 3/8 Rayon 3/8 Rayon 3/8 Rayon 3/8 Rayon 3/8 Rayon 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 T-64 T-65 T-66 T-67 T-68 T-69 T-70 T-71 T-72 F F F F F F F F F 1 Naugahyde 1/2 Rayon 47 T-73 F Weight (pounds) Date of Capture Y A Y A 8-1/4 7-3/4 6-1/4 10-1/4 9-1/2 6-1/4 9-3/4 6-3/4 10 3/11/64 3/11/64 3/11/64 3/11/64 3/11/64 3/11/64 3/11/64 3/11/64 3/11/64 Y 8-3/4 3/26/64 Y A A I -.J i'\) 2 Naugahyde 1/2 Rayon 46 T-542 M Y 18-3/4 3/26/64 .p.. I 3 Naugahyde 1/2 Rayon 48 T-74 F A 9-1/2 3/26/64 4 Naugahyde 1/2 Rayon 49 T-75 F A 11-1/2 3/26/64 5 Naugahyde 1/2 Rayon 50 T-76 F A 12-1/2 3/26/64 6 Naugahyde 1/2 Rayon 51 T-77 F Y 8-1/2 3/26/64 7 Naugahyde 1/2 Rayon 52 T-78 F Y 8-1/4 3/26/64 8 Naugahyde 1/2 Rayon 53 T-79 F Y 8 3/26/64 9 Naugahyde 1/2 Rayon 54 T-80 F Y 10-1/2 3/26/64 �-275- • c • L. I • 0 I • 5 1 1 Big Dominguez 2 Pickett Corral 3 Spring Creek 4 Hill Ranch 5 Log Hill 6 Pleasant Valley Fig. 15. The location of sites where turkeys were trapped, banded and released during the winter of 1963-64. The number of turkeys banded in each area appears in parenthesis. �-276- Table 5. Band retention amoung adult toms marked on the Uncompahgre and recaptured. Plateau Number Leg Band Retained Lost Total away. Neck Band Retained Lost X X X X X X X X X 5 4 Back Tag Lost Retained X of Months Between Release and Recapture 22.!. X X X t 11'2 13 lIt 13 X X 1 4 1 Even so, 46 grouse or 43.8% of the 105 birds seen were killed. An attempt was also made to determine whether the joint grouse and turkey season caused an increase in hunter pressure. Of 82 turkey hunters questioned, 42 hunted turkeys last year and 52 of them hunted grouse last year. These figures indicate that there was either a big increase in hunter pressure or that a number of hunters try turkey hunting but quit after sampling it. Hunters were also asked whether they preferred to kill turkeys with a shotgun or rifle. Sixty-three (67.8%) preferred the shotgun only, 27 (29.0%) would rather use a rifle, and three (3.2%) would like to hunt turkeys with both weapons. Slightly over 50% of the rifle enthusiasts would prefer to hunt with the .22 rifle. Only 12 of at least 63 people hunting turkeys the first day of the early season killed turkeys (Table 7). Three of the successful hunters bagged two birds, while the remaining nine each killed one bird. No more than 10 of the 51 unsuccessful hunters returned to hunt the second day of the season. Table 6. Plateau. Band retention amoung hens marked and recaptured on the Uncompahgre Number Leg Band Lost Retained X X Neck Band Lost Retained X X X X X X Total 5 2 5 of Months Between Release and Recapture 22t 23 X X X X X Back Tag Retained Lost X X X X X X 2 5 ~ 9} l~ 12 14 �-277- Table 7. Number of hunters checked in the study area during the first two days of the October 5-13, 1963 turkey season. Number of Hunters Checked Game Hunted First Day Only Second Day Only Both Days Possibly Both Total Turkey Only Turkey and Blue Grouse Blue Grouse Only Unknown 14 49 3 10 9 18 1 4 1 1 0 0 0 6 0 2 22 60--66 4 12--14 Total 76 32 2 8 98-106 The loss of hunters was partly due to poor hunting conditions. tion made it difficult to locate, track and stalk birds. The dry vegeta- Between 27 and 31 turkey hunters were checked the second day of the season, and five turkeys were killed. During the two days, 145 different turkeys were seen. Turkey hunters spend an average of 49-1/3 (7~1/4 hours/man) for each turkey killed. Hunter success was between 15.7% and 19.5%. Additional hunter checks were conducted during the remainder of the October 5-13, season and a total of 36 birds were checked (Table 1). These hunters spent 557 hours (5-1/4 hours per man) killing 26 turkeys (Table 1). Hunter success was 21.7% during the first two days of the November season. A turkey was killed for every 21.4 hours of hunting. Environmental Factors A study of the relationships of the productivity and distribution of wild turkeys to their environment involves much more than gathering weather data and sampling various vegetative types. The productivity (net yield of turkeys) and distribution must first be deterlnined before its relationship to anything can be discovered. For this reason, most time has been devoted to determining productivity and distribution rather than measuring environmental factors. Climatological Data.--Climatological data was collected from three weather stations consisting of a Maximum - Minimum Thermometer, a Hygrothermograph (housed in standard weather shelters) an anemometer, and a rain guage. One station was located at 7,520 feet elevation about 1/2 mile inside the Uncompahgre National Forest boundary on a small knoll just east of 25 Mesa road. Another station was 1/4 mile below the junction of 25 Mesa road with the Divide road. This station was across Moniter Creek at 9,000 feet elevation. A third station was 15 miles east of Nucla at 6,420 feet elevation. This station was 0.3 miles north of Colorado Highway 90 above the Hill Ranch. The stations were checked weekly from April 24, 1963 to September 26, 1963 (Table 8). �Table 8. Summary of Climatological Data gathered from three weather stations on the Uncompahgre Plateau between April 24, 1963 and September 26, 1963. Data Collected at Station No. 1 April May Max. Temp. (OF) Min. Temp. (OF) Ave. Max. Temp. (OF) Ave. Min. Temp. (Of) Ave. Mean Temp. (Of) Max. ReI. Hum. (%) Min. Rel. Hum. (%) Ave. Max. Rel. Hum. (%) Ave. Min. ReI. Hum. (%) Ave. Mean ReI. Hum. (%) Total Precipe (In.) Total Miles-Wind Ave. Wind Vel. (m.p.h.) 63 76 23 23 54 70 28 38 41 54 100 100 14 19 86 69 23 35 46 61 0.47 0.58 no data 3732 no data 5.5 June July August September 85 33 76 43 60 100 13 71 24 48 0.26 3024 4.2 91 43 84 52 68 100 14 81 28 55 1.20 14342.6 83 41 74 49 62 100 19 90 42 66 1.26 2632 4.0 89 38 73 44 59 100 16 94 36 65 1.08 2757 3.8 All Six Months Combined 91 23 72 42 57 100 13 82 31 57 4.85 13579 4.0 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Data Collected at Station No. 2 Max. Temp. (Of) Min. Temp. (Of) Ave. Max. Temp. (Of) Ave. Min. Temp. (Of) Ave. Mean Temp. (OF) Max. Rel. Hum. (%) Hin. Rel. Hum, C~) Ave. Max. Rel. Hum. (%) Ave. Min. ReI. Hum. (%) Ave. Mean Re1. Hum. (%) Total Precipe (In.) Total Miles-Wind Ave. Wind Vel. (m.p.h.) 44 71 18 21 36 58 J4 22 46 29 100 100 41 17 96 95 63 27 80 61 0.0 0.0 no data 1354 no data 2.0 80 25 67 37 52 100 11 89 26 58 0.31 1673 2.3 80 30 73 41 57 ·100 14 90 33 62 1.84 854 1.5 77 35 67 43 55 100 21 99 47 73 2.47 1102 1.8 78 32 66 37 52 100 25 98 38 68 1.63 831 2.2 80 18 61 36 49 100 11 95 39 67 6.25 5814 2.0 I 0.,) <l cc I �Table 8. Continued Data Collected at Sation No. J April May 77 29 66 36 51 100 19 92 33 63 0.30 no data no data 89 100 100 42 33 49 83 88 92 45 49 57 64 69 75 100 100 100 11 8 9 66 66 78 19 28 19 43 43 53 0.18 0.065 1.42 1343 972 582 1.3 1.9 1.0 June July August September 99 49 83 91 42 84 49 67 100 18 89 29 59 no data no data no data --- Max. Temp. (OF) Min. Temp. (OF) Ave. Max. Temp. (oF) Ave. Min. Temp. (Of) Ave. Mean Temp. (OF) Max. Rel. Hum. (~) Min. Rel. Hum. (%) Ave. Max. Rel. Hum. (%) Ave. Min. Re1. Hum. (%) Ave. Mean ReI. Hum. (%) Total Precipe (In.) Total Miles-Wind Ave. Wind Vel. (m.p.h.) 54 69 100 15 96 36 66 3.0 no data no data All Six Months Combined 100 29 83 48 66 100 8 81 27 55 1.0 2897 1.4 I -..J -..D I N �-280- Literature Cited Keiser, L. P., and E. L. Kozicky. 1943. Sex and age determination turkeys. Pa. Game News 14 (8):10 - 11, 26. of wild Knowlton, F. F., E. D. Michael, andW. C. Glazener. 1964. A marking technique for field recognition of individual turkeys and deer. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 28 (1) : 167-170. Verts, B. J. 1963. Equipment and techniques for radio-tracking J. Wildl. Mgmt. 27 (3) : 325-339. Prepared by: Gary T, Myers Date: April, 1964 striped skunks. Wayne W. Sandfort A pprove d lI..tr "'01: Chief, Game Research =--:---=--~_~ __ --:' _ Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Fedell'alAid Coordinator Printed February, 1965 �-281- JOB COMPLETION RESEARCH State of COLORADO Project No. W-37-R-17 Work Plan No. 12 Title of Job: Period PROJECT REPORT SEGMENT Game Bird Survey Job No. 12 Wild TUrkey Roost Study Covered: April 1, 1963 to March 31, 1964. ABSTRACT Roost observations made at a roost in Sarcillo Canyon within the Spanish Peaks area to compare times of leaving and entering roosts with official sunrise and sunset times indicated the turkeys consistently left the roosts prior to official sunrise during the fall, winter, and spring periods. Average times varied from 21 to 25 minutes prior to official sunrise for the three periods of the year when birds used this roost. Times when the birds began entering the roost during the same periods of the year in the evenings varied from an average of 2 minutes prior to official sunset to 3 minutes after official sunset. Birds entered the roosts as early as 28 minutes before official sunset and as late as 14 minutes after official sunset during the study period. The flock remained on the roost one day (January 18, 1963) when temperatures remained below 22 degrees below zero all day and snow fell intermittently. Groups of over-mature ponderosa pine in sites sheltered from high wind are favorite choices for semi-permanent fall-winter period roosts when the birds are concentrated. Narrowleaf cottonwoods in several locations were utilized as temporary winter roosts particularly where the flocks ranged at lower elevations than normal due to prolonged deep snow cover and poor natural food availability. Recommendations: characteristics use. Objectives: (1) (2) Additional work is recommended to measure the physical of various roosts and to secure additional information on To determine the physical characteristics of roosting sites. To determine use of roosts by wild turkeys and importance in management of the species. �-282- Techniques Used: I. Locate as many roosts as possible within study areas. II. Measurement of physical characteristics. a. Size of roosting area. b. Height of trees. c. Age of trees. d. D.B.H. of trees. e. Age classes of trees. f. Exposure and slope of sites. g. Habitat in vicinity of roosts. III. Measurement of use. a. Times of entering and leaving roosts. b. Duration of use. c. Number of birds using roost. IV. Analysis of data obtained, and preparation completion reports. of progress and final �-283- WILD TURKEY ROOST STUDY Donald M. Hoffman Findings: Principal data obtained during this segment pertains to use, physical characteristics, populations, and sex-ratio counts. Information pertaining to these four categories is presented as follows. Use Table 1 lists information on use of the main Sarcillo Canyon roosting area which is one of the largest and oldest known turkey roost in Colorado. This roost is similar to a number of sites being utilized primarily from September through March each year when the birds are concentrated in wintering flocks. Some of these roosts also have minor use during the remainder of the year when most of the turkeys are ranging at higher elevations. Observations include the times of entering and leaving the roost compared with official sunset-sunrise times for the area using U. S. Weather Bureau tables for Pueblo, Colorado adjusted for upper Sarcillo Canyon. It was early found that it is impossible to determine sunset-sunrise times by visual observation from most roost sites due to mountainous terrain. Studies indicate the Sarcillo Canyon flocks entered the roost trees an average of 2 minutes before official sunset during the fall, 1 minute before official sunset during the winter, and 3 minutes after official sunset during the early spring period. During the early morning, the flocks left the roost trees an average of 15 minutes before official sunrise during the fall, 25 minutes before official sunrise during the winter, and 12 minutes before official sunrise in the early spring period observations. Flocks were observed feeding toward the roosting area as much as one and onehalf hours before going to roost. Flocks were thought to loaf in the vicinity of the roost trees long before actually flying into the trees on several occasions although seldom seen. Occasionally, a flock would arrive very late and fly directly after arrival. Birds usually flew into the roost trees singly or by twos or threes in the evenings with an average interval of 10 minutes recorded between the time the first and last birds entered the roost for 8 fall observations. This interval varied with different numbers of turkeys using the roost as would be expected. Ten or 12 turkeys were counted in individual trees from time to time when numbers of birds using the roost were highest. The flock normally left the roost trees simultaneously or within a short period of time in the early mornings. Upon alighting in the canyon below the roost or on the ridges to the west or northwest, the birds usually left the immediate vicinity to feed. �-284- The noises of calling, wing beats, and fussing inherent with the species in entering or leaving roosts were usually easy to hear and many of the birds could be seen flying from an observation point at least 500 yards from the roost site. Table l. -- Summary of Times Merriam's Turkeys Left and Entered Sarcillo Canyon Roost Compared to Official Sunrise-Sunset Times for Area.l/ Period of Day Period of Year Number of Weekly Observations Average Timd./ Interval Number Birds Using Roosts A. M. Fall Winter Spring 8 13 3 -15 min. -25 min. -12 min. 4 to 99 30 to 98 16 to 38 P. M. Fall Winter Spring 10 13 3 2 min. + 1 min. + 3 min. 4 to 99 30 to 98 16 to 38 1/ 2/ Observations made during period December, official sunrise-sunset times for Pueblo, 1962 to November, 1963, using Colorado plus 1 minute. (-) Refers to times birds entered or left roosts before official SR-SS time for area. (+) Refers to times birds entered or left roosts after official SR-SS time for area. Physical Characteristics Groves of over-mature or dead ponderosa pine in sites sheltered from high winds appear to be favorite choices of Merriam's turkeys for semi-permanent roosting areas during the fall and winter periods (Table 2). Where these are not available, white fir, Douglas fir, and narrowleaf cottonwoods may be utilized within the mountain ranges. Characteristics of the various known roosts such as size, height, age, exposure, etc. were not measured during this segment due to prolonged deep snows which covered the ground beneath the trees during much of the winter period. Several roosts were, however, visited during the period of heaviest use, field sketches of the areas drawn, and degree of use recorded for later field measurements. Populations Table 3 shows populations of Merriam's turkeys within 9 study areas during the period October, 1963--March, 1964. Although 345 birds were counted or reported in all areas, only 187 were known to over-winter within the various study areas. Low natural food production due to drought conditions during the spring and early summer of 1963 apparently caused the flocks to drift much more than usual during the "fall period. �-285- Table 2. -- Information Number Roosting Areas Study Area on Roosts, Period October, 1963-March, 1964. Species of Trees Utilized Type Narrowleaf cottonwoods 13 Creek 1 Winter, Indian Creek 1 Fall-winter, semi-permanent Winter, temporary Winter, temporary Ponderosa pine White fir Narrowleaf cottonwoods Fall-winter, semi-permanent Ponderosa pine 14 Trujillo Creek~avricio Canyon 1 FaH-winter, semi-permanent Ponderosa pine 20 Sarcillo Fall-winter, semi-permanent Fall-winter, semi-permanent Ponderosa pine, white fir Ponderosa pine, white fir 1 Winter, Narrowlea~ cottonwoods 10 1 .Fall-winter, semi-permanent Fall-winter, semi-permanent Ponderosa pine SO Ponderosa pine 0 Middle 1 1 Cucharas River Huerfano Canyon River Abbott-Duling Creeks * I 1 temporary Numbers of Turkeys temporary 6 to 30 30 to 70 3 to 5 4 to 98 0 These roosts had minor use very early in fall period. Ninety-eight turkeys were counted in upper Sarcillo Canyon following the hunting season in early October, 1963, although only 7 birds were ranging in this area during the open season. Normally the build-up occurs prior to the open season. This flock left this range on November 19, 1963. This area has been a preferred wintering area for wild turkeys for over 15 years so it is assumed the birds left due to a lack of natural foods and oats planted by local ranchers did not mature. Sixteen turkeys including 3 cripples returned later to over-winter in Sarcillo Canyon when supplemental feed was provided to complete the roost studies. The remainder of the flock reportedly over-wintered in Del Aqua Canyon where a rancher provided supplemental feed. ' A number of counts thought to be accurate were made of flocks feeding toward roosting sites in the late afternoons. Less success was had in counting flocks after alighting from the roosts in the early mornings. Attempts to count birds flying into, from, or perched on roosts were not successful since all of the roost trees or roost area could not be observed from the ground vantage points used. �Table 3. -- Populations of Merriam's Turkeys within Various Study Areas During Period October, 1963 - March, 1964. Highest Number Counted or Reported During Period Number Date Source of Data* Study Area Wintering Population Levels Number Birds Number Flocks Source* Middle Creek 20 Jan., 1964 FC, RR 20 2 FC Indian Creek 70 Jan. 24, 1964 FC 30 1 FC Cucharas River 14 Mar. 6, 1964 FC 14 1 FC Wahatoya Creek 10 Jan., 1964 RR 10 1 RR Trujillo Creek-Mavricio Canyon 50 Fall, 1963 & Mar. 17, 1964 FC, RR 20 2 FC sar ctl l.o Canyon 98 Oct. 29, 1963 FC 16 1 FC Sub-total 262 110 8 Huerfano River 16 Jan., 1964 FC, RR 10 1 FC Abbott-Duling Creeks 50 Mar., 1964 FC, RR 50 2 FC, RR Wilking-Whiskey Creeks 17 Mar., 1964 RR 17 2 RR Sub-total 83 77 5 TOTALS Ave. No. Birds/Flock 345 187 14.4 13 Key: FC -- Flock count by writer. RR -- Rancher report. I lV 00 <J'. �Fig. 1. Over-mature Ponderosa pine used by turkeys for roost in Sarci110 Canyon. Fig. 2. Roosting site in Sarci110 Canyoh containing living and dead Ponderosa pine and white firs. �-288- Weather Factors: The weather was relatively mild from late fall until early February within the Spanish Peaks turkey ranges. From early February through mid-March, 1964, deep snows and cold temperatures prevailed. Green grass which usually can be utilized from mid-February on was not found until midMarch in 1964. Weather factors combined with poor natural food production in 1963 apparently caused many flocks such as those wintering on Middle Creek, E. Indian Creek, Trujillo Creek, Mavricio Canyon, and Huerfano River to breakup into small flocks of 2, 3, 5, 8, etc. and range much lower in elevation than normal. Several of these small flocks were observed ranging in the vicinity of ranch corrals and using narrowleaf cottonwoods along roads for roosts. In contrast, flocks which were provided supplemental feed by ranchers during periods of deep snow cover such as those on Abbott-Duling Creeks did not break-up into smaller flocks nor drift to lower elevations in search of food. Remains of several turkeys were found during the late winter period indicating some loss of birds occurred during the period of most severe weather from early February through mid-March, 1964. The extent of these losses has not been determined since many roads are still blocked by snow drifts. Sex-ratio Counts Table 4 lists sex-ratio count information from a sample of 105 birds which could be viSibly sexed at close range on the various study areas. A ratio of 50 males to 100 females was calculated from this small·sample. Only 5 juvenile toms were observed in the sample indicating the reproductive success during 1963 was poor within most study areas checks. �-289- Table 4. -- Sex-ratio Counts of Merriam's Turkeys within Various Ranges During Period October, 1963 - March, 1964. Mature Toms Juvenile Toms Hens Unc1ass. Total o 1 17 2 20 Mar. 19, 1964 Cucharas River 2 o 12 o 14 Mar. Truj i110 CreekMavricio Canyon 12 o 4 4 20 Mar. 17, 1964 Sarci110 Canyon 9 1 13 o 23 Mar. 10, 1964 Huerfano 2 1 6 1 10 Mar. 12, 1964 5 2 18 o 25 Mar. 13, 1964 30 5 70 7 112 Study Area Middle Creek River Abbott-Duling Creeks TOTALS Sex-ratio: Prepared Date of Best Count 50 ma1es:100 females based upon sample of 112 Merriam's observed at close range. by: Donald M. Hoffman Date: April, 1964 Pr intcd February, 19{5 Approved by: 6, 1964 turkeys Wayne W. Sandfort Chief, Game Research Fcrd C. K1einschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator ��-291- JOB COMPLETION RESEARCH REPORT PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO ------~~~~---------------- Project No.__ ~W_-~3~7_-R~-~17~ _ ~LWork Plan No. __13 _ Title: Review of Information Period Covered: April Game Bird Survey : Job No. on Sharp-tailed 1, 1963, through March 1 Grouse Management and Research 31, 1964 ABSTRACT A few additional references to historical occurrence of sharp-tailed grouse were found, but not yet reviewed, in the literature. A prairie grouse workshop meeting was attended in September and a paper, Prairie grouse status in Colorado, was presented. Six papers and one formal discussion were in reference to sharp-tailed grouse, entirely or partially. The text of the Colorado paper is presented in its entirety. Recommendations: This phase of the sharp-tailed grouse study should be discontinued as a separate project. Necessary review of literature, correspondence, and technical meetings should be and can be continued under a summarization study. Objectives: (1) (2) Review literature on sharp-tailed grouse species, particularly that pertaining to western United States and Canada. Abstract published and assemble unpublished information on past management and research pertaining to sharp-tailed grouse. �-292- REVIEW OF INFORMATION ON SHARP-TAILED GROUSE MANAGEMENT AND RESEARCH Glenn E. Rogers Although 10 additional references to historical occurrence of sharp-tailed grouse in Colorado have been located, they have not been reviewed due to unavailability of library facilities. Correspondence with other states and Canadian provinces was continued to determine management and harvest of sharp-tailed grouse in western North America. Besides reviewing literature and assembling sharp-tailed grouse information from other states and Canadian provinces and that collected in Colorado during blue and sage grouse studies, one workshop meeting of prairie grouse workers was attended in Nevada, Missouri. Two papers at this workshop dealt solely with sharptailed grouse research. These were: The New Sharp-tailed Grouse Research Program in Minnesota by James L. Ruos, Minnesota Department of Conservation, and The Sharp-tailed Grouse in Eastern Mixed Prairie and Mountain Foothills of Montana by Robert L. Brown, Montana Department of Fish and Game. Six additional papers or discussions included sharp-tailed grouse within their framework. These were: Prairie Grouse Habitat and Plans for Management of the Sheyenne National Grasslands by John Mathisen, United States Forest Service; Prairie Grouse Populations and Land-use Studies ~ National Refuges in Nebraska and North Dakota by Merrill Hammond, United States Fish and Wildlife Service; Prairie Grouse Status in Colorado by Glenn E. Rogers, Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department; History of Prairie Grouse on Manitoulin Island and Hybridization by Harry G. Lumsden, Ontario Department of Lands and Forests; Results of Some Field and Laboratory Studies of Effects of Insecticides on Upland Game Birds by Lowell C. McEwen, United States Fish and Wildlife Service; and Telemetry with Karl Slagle, discussion leader. Captive sharp-tailed grouse and prairie chickens are being used in many of the pesticide studies. The text of the Colorado paper is presented in this report. �-293- PRAIRIE GROUSE STATUS IN COLORADO 11 by Glenn E. Rogers Prairie grouse projects in Colorado include basic inventory studies and some preliminary work on ecological requirements of the species. At present, there are two active Federal Aid projects on the greater prairie chicken (Tympanuchus cupido pinnatus) and five on the sharp-tailed grouse (Pedioecetes phasianellus columbianus and 2. jamesi). From 1959 to. 1962, booming ground counts were conducted on the lesser prairie chicken (Tympanuchus pallidicinctus) as a specific study. R. (R. While the columbian sharp-tailed grouse 2. columbianus) is not a prairie inhabitant, we have included it in this paper as studies in Colorado cover both subspecies. HISTORY The first definite record of the greater pralrle chicken in Colorado was by J. S. Robertson in 1897 (Sclater 1912). The most westernly-distributional record of the prairie chicken in the United States was reported by Cooke (1900) as being near Barr Lake, Adams County, Colorado. Information compiled from interviews of early settlers indicates that pralrle chickens inhabited 20 counties of eastern Colorado with the greater prairie chicken in 14 and the lesser limited to 6. There are very few references concerning the occurrence of sharp-tailed grouse in Colorado. Cooke (1897) lists sharp-tailed grouse as uncommon in northern Colorado, stating that 20 years previously the bird was plentiful in all parts of Colorado. Also, the use of a variety of common names and confusion with other grouse species makes it difficult to determine the history of the sharp-tailed grouse. Until 1953, any open season on sharptailed grouse was promulgated by the Game and Fish Department under the name "willow grouse." Early settlers referred to grouse on the eastern plains as prairie chickens or sage chickens depending on whether they were observed on open grasslands or in sand sage (Artemisia filifolia). In general, liberal hunting seasons were set for all grouse species until 1937. In that year the season was closed and, except for a two-day season in 1945, eastern Colorado has remained closed to all grouse hunting. This closed area includes all the occupied range of the prairie chicken and the major portion of the prairie sharp-tailed grouse. 11 A contribution from Colorado's Fed~ral Aid Project W-37-R. �-294- From 1954 until the present, an open season has been held for columbian sharptai1s in an aggregate bag with sage grouse (Centrocercus urophasianus). The estimated annual kill for sharp-tailed grouse in the past nine years has averaged 588 birds. The first official mention of a decline in grouse numbers was by Game and Fish Commissioner James A. Shinn in 1911. Since then, the greater prairie chicken population trend has continued downward, accelerating during the dust-bowl days of the 1930's and the past five years. Conversely, an increase has been noted in numbers of lesser prairie chickens in this latter period. PRESENT Inventory. -- In 1952, a survey to determine greater pra1r1e chicken populations was conducted north of Wray, Yuma County, Colorado. Twenty booming grounds were censused with counts ranging from 8 to 73 birds per ground for a 26.5 average. From these counts, a popula~ion density of 17 birds per square mile was estimated for 119 square miles of better habitat (Swope 1953). Counts of 21 booming grounds in the same area were repeated in 1962 and showed only 6.05 birds per ground indicating a decrease of 75 per cent in total numbers. Surveys were continued in 1963 when 47 booming grounds were counted in Yuma County. The 1963 counts indicated an increase of 21 per cent over 1962. However, methods and dates of the 1953, 1962, and 1963 counts were not standardized. In 1963, Evans (1963a) estimated the greater prairie chicken population density at 2.3 birds per mile for 330 square miles of inhabited range. The first work in Colorado on lesser prairie chickens was in 1959 when three booming grounds with six cocks present were located (Hoffman 1963). This study was continued until 1962 at which time 104 cocks were counted on 13 grounds in 2 southeastern counties, Baca and Prowers. At least two additional booming grounds were located in this area, but were not counted (Snyder 1963). Initial work on the columbian sharp-tailed grouse was conducted by Dargan et al. (1942) in Moffat and Routt counties of northwestern Colorado. Approximately 110 birds were located and vegetative and topographic conditions noted. The present study was activated in 1962 to determine sharptailed grouse distribution from dancing ground counts, production counts, hunter checks, personal observations, and interviews of interested personnel. Only four prairie-sharptail dancing grounds have been found, all in Douglas County. Maximt~ count for the four grounds was 66 cocks. Reports of occurrence have been received from four additional counties. The total population of this subspecies probably does not exceed a few hundred birds. During this same period, 29 columbian sharptail dancing grounds were located and counted in four western counties (Mesa, Moffat, Montrose, and Routt), yielding a maximum of 342 cocks. Columbian sharptail occurrence has been reported from an additional nine counties. Although no estimate of total numbers has been made, their population may equal that of all prairie species. �-295- Habitat. -- The environmental requirements of the four grouse have many similarities, but in Colorado only the range of prairie sharptail and the greater prairie chicken overlap (Fig. 1). I do not know the exact factors that delineate the range of one grouse from the other. In general, there is a difference in latitude, elevation, and temperature for each race of grouse. The range of the greater pra1r1e chicken in Colorado is north of 39 degrees latitude while the lesser prairie chicken occupies the area to the south. While the prairie sharptail are not presently found below 38 degrees latitude, the mountain sharptail are. Sharp-tailed grouse in eastern New Mexico (36 to 37 degrees latitude) adjacent to our lesser prairie-chicken range were listed by Ligon (1927) as !. £. columbianus. The terrain for both races varies from flat to sharply broken from 3,500 to 9,500 feet in elevation. The terrain requirements for the two sharptails are similar and both may be capable of utilizing rougher terrain than prairie chickens. The prairie sharptail occupies a portion of the same range as the greater prairie chicken in northeastern Colorado, but its range extends to the mountain foothills and an elevation of 7,000 feet, which is slightly above the historical limits (5,000 feet) of the greater prairie chicken. Although only the sharp-tailed grouse in Routt County have been definitely classified as !. £. columbianus, all sharptai1s on the western slope and those above 7,000 feet on the eastern slope are considered to be of this race. The e1evationa1 range varied from 6,000 to 9,500 feet for sharptailed grouse in western Colorado. Climatologically the range of the four grouse falls within the 15-to-20-inch precipitation zone, but the pattern is different. The peak in precipitation occurs as rainfall during the summer months on the plains and as snow during the winter months for the mountain areas. The annual mean temperature varies from a high of 52.2 degrees in the lesser prairie-chicken range, 51.8 for the prairie sharptai1, 50.0 for the greater prairie chicken to a low of 39.0 for the columbian sharptai1. The major vegetative requirement for all four grouse is a grass-type range, but there are variations in plant spec Le s , density of browse, and extent of cultivation. These four grouse are primarily limited to rolling-broken hills or sandhill areas where flat terrain is not expansive enough to allow for large ~ontiguous areas of cultivation. While most occupied prairie ranges may approach a brush-type, short grasses or mid-grasses are usually dominant. Ecology studies (Evans 1963b) on the greater prairie-chicken range of Yuma County show the dominant grass to be blue grama (Boute10ua gracilis) comprising 15.75 per cent of the ground cover and the dominant shrub to be sand sage at 5.0 per cent. Other grass species generally present on eastern-slope ranges include: Calamovilfa longifo1ia, Agropyron smithii, Andropogon hallii and scoparius, Bromus tectorum, Koe1eria cristata, Eragrostis trichodes, Festuca octoflora, Panicum virgatum, Srorobo1us cryptandrus, Stipa comata, and Muhlenbergia~. Yucca glauca is the only other major browse species at the lower elevation with oakbrush, Quercus gambe1ii, replacing the �-296- �-297- sand sage at higher elevations. The range of the mountain sharptail is dominated by mid-grasses and tall grasses such as Stipa comata, lettermani and viridula; Agropyron inerme, smithii and spicatum; Festuca idahoen~is and thurberi; Bromus anomalus and marginatus; Elymus canadensis and condensatus; Poa ampla, pratensis and fend1eriana; Koe1eria cristata; and Oryzopsis hymenoides, to mention a few. A wide variety of browse species are present with Quercus gambe1ii, Prunus me1anocar£a, Artemisia tridentata, Ame1anchier utahensis, Symphoricarpos oreophilus, and Salix spp. the preferred species. FUTURE The future of prairie grouse in Colorado depends entirely upon land and game management practices. The inclusion of 419,076 acres of southeastern Colorado in the Comanche National Grasslands under United States Forest Service supervision may have been responsible for improved habitat and increased numbers of lesser prairie chickens. An additional National Grasslands in northern Colorado (207,740 acres) and improved range management on other Federal lands may improve habitat for other species. While it is too soon to judge the effect of legislative changes in the wheat support program, this may improve the habitat for all species as marginal cultivated lands may be reseeded to grass. An extensive browse eradication program on both Federal and private lands, while detrimental to sage grouse, may prove especially beneficial to the columbian sharptail. To fully realize the pra~r~e grouse potential in Colorado, research studies must be conducted into environmental requirements, methods of trapping or rearing, and transplanting. This will involve a considerable exp~nditure of time and money, and doubt remains whether these grouse will ever furnish hunting opportunities commensurate with the cost of restoration. �-298- LITERATURE CITED Cooke, W. W. 1897. The birds of Colorado. Bull. No. 37, Tech. Series No.2, State Ag. Coll., Smith-Brooks Printing Co., Denver 143 p. 1900. The birds of Colorado. A second appendix to Bull. No. 37, Bull. 56, Tech. Serie-sNo.5, Exp. Stat. Colo. Ag , Coll., 179-239. Dargan, L. M., R. J. Keller, H. p. Shepherd, and R. N. Randall. 1942. Survey of 1941-42 sharp-tailed grouse studies, Craig area, fall and winter 1941-42. Fed. Aid Project, Colorado Game and Fish Dept., 10 p. Evans, K. 1963a. Inventory of greater pra1r1e chickens. Fed. Aid Quart., Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Dept., Printers. 1963b. Ecology of the greater prairie chicken. Quart., Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Dept., Printers. Fed. Aid Hoffman, D. M. 1963. The lesser prairie chicken in Colorado. Wildl. Mgt., Printers. Jourl. Ligon, J. S. 1927. Wildlife of New Mexico, Dept. of Game and Fish, Santa Fe, 212. p. Sclater, W. L. 1912. A histo~y of the birds of Colorado. and Co., London, 576 p. Witherly Shinn, J. A. 1912. Biennial report of the state Game and Fish Commissioner of the State of Colorado for the years 1911-1912, James A. Shinn, Commissioner, Denver Colorado. The Smith-Brooks Printing Co. Snyder, W. D. 1963. Inventory of the lesser prairie chicken. Project W-37-R, Colorado, Printers. Fed. Aid Swope, H. M. 1953. Surveys to determine the population status of the prairie chicken. Fed. Aid Project 37-R, Colorado, April, 77-80. Prepared by: Glenn E. Rogers Senior Game Biologist Date: __~A~p~r~i~1~.~1~9~64~ Printed February, 1965 Approved by: _ Laurence E. Riordan Assistant Director, Research Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator Wayne W. Sandfort Chief, Game Research �-299- JOB COMPLETION RESEARCH State of REPORT PROJECT SEGMENT COLORADO ----------------------------- Project No. Game Bird Survey W-37-R-17 ------------------------ Job No. Work Plan No. 13 Title of Job: Mapping Period Covered: April 1, 1963 through March Sharp-tailed 2 Grouse Range 31, 1964 ABSTRACT Two subspecies of sharp-tailed grouse (Pedioecetes phasianellus columbianus and P. p. jamesi) are present in Colorado. Since taxonomy has been determined only-for sharptails in Douglas and Routt counties, distribution and boundaries between subspecies are unknown. Very few references to historical distribution were found partially due to confusion between grouse species and the variety of common names used for all grouse. Environmental requirements for the 2 subspecies are similar except for elevation and plant species variations. Habitat must have grass predominating but with interspersions of shrubs and forbs. Food and cover requirements appear adequate for most areas of Colorado. Sharp-tailed grouse are known to inhabit 11 counties of Colorado and may be present in 10 additional counties. Dancing grounds have been located in 5 counties and broods have been observed in 3 counties. There are harvest records from 7 counties, but as hunter checks are not compiled nor analyzed .by grouse species, the additional information that could be available is not known. Recommendations: It is recommended that all range rehabilitation work, particularly in areas between 6,000 and 9,500 feet elevation, be considered and evaluated for sharp-tailed grouse habitat as well as an experimental trapping or rearing and transplanting program be initiated for these and other areas of suitable, unoccupied range. Also, this project should be continued for another year with efforts concentrated in the Glade, Norwood, and Uncompahgre areas, Southwest Region; Craig and Pinon Mesa areas, Northwest Region; and the Northeast Region sandhills. All regional personnel should be instructed to channel grouse distribution information to the State Game Manager for compilation and publication. Objectives: (1) (2) Assemble data on sharp-tailed grouse range and distribution. Prepare distribution and density maps for this species. �-300- Techniques Used: Interview United States Forest Service, Bureau of Land Management, and Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department personnel regarding sharp-tailed grouse distribution and density. Plot location of sharptailed grouse observed during recent years. Interview ranchers, sheepherders, sportsmen, and other individuals information on sharp-tailed grouse distribution. Travel and inspect as much of the sharp-tailed possible in the time allowed. Assemble and record sharp-tailed blue grouse studies. Map sharp-tailed grouse grouse distribution grouse range information and density gathered for general in Colorado during on a statewide as sage and basis. �-301VlAPPI'JG SHARP-TAILED GROUSE RA~\JGE Glenn E. Rogers and F. David Stearns There are 2 subspecies (Aldrich and Duvall 1955) of sharp-tailed grouse (Pedioecetes phasiane11us co1umbianus and P. p. jamesi) in Colorado. The first is commonly referred to as the columbian or mountain sharp tail and the second as the plains sharp tail relative to the topography occupied. The 2 subspecies are similar in appearance with the columbian variant slightly smaller in size and darker in coloration than the plains bird. Initial studies on columbian sharp-tailed grouse were conducted by Dargan et al. (1952) in Moffat and Routt counties of northwestern Colorado. Approximately 110 birds were observed and vegetative and topographic conditions noted. The present study was activitated in 1962 to determine sharp-tailed grouse distribution from dancing-ground counts, production counts, hunter checks, personal observations, and interviews of interested personnel. Information gained from this study will be utilized in establishing grouse-census trends capable of de,termining changes in population densities and distribution for management use. HISTORY The use of a variety of common names and confusion \"ith other grouse species makes it difficult to determine the history of sharp-tailed grouse. Specific references to sharp-tailed grouse in early Colorado are limited. The first taxonomic reference was by Cooke (1897) who stated, lilt may be that the sharp-tailed grouse of Routt County are variety columbianus but all the Colorado birds examined by the present writer are compestris.1t Lincoln (1917) published A Review of the Genus Pedioecetes in Colorado in which he describes a new subspecies, ~~amesi, as inhabiting-the eastern slope foothill region with P. p. columbianus confined to the western slope and P. p. compestris limited-to-the eastern plains and sandhills. In the latest-change (Aldrich and Duvall 1955), all sharp-tailed grouse on the Great Plains are designated as the subspecies ~. £. jamesi. Early explorers and settlers writing of pintails, willow grouse, pra1r1e hen, prairie chicken, sage chicken, partridge, and pheasant may have been referring to sharp-tailed grouse. This use of common names; the similarity in appearance among the prairie chicken (Tympanuchus cupido pinnatus), the lesser prairie checken (T. pallidicinctus), and the sharp-tailed grouse; and confusion in name usage among the sharp-tailed grouse and the blue grouse (Dendragapus obscurus), the sage grouse (Centrocercus urophasianus), and the ptarmigan (Lagopus leucurus) has made it impossible to determine historical distribution. Bryant (1887) wrote of seeing sage chickens in eastern Kansas. Schorger (1944), writing a history of pinnated grouse in Wisconsin, states II ••• that no distinction was made by the casual observer even in the southern portion of the state where their /sharptails and prairie chickenij ranges over1apped.1I �-302- Interviewing early settlers in Washington, Yocum (1952) found " ••. the columbian sharp-tailed grouse -- prairie chicken to them -- was the most abundant and best-known game bird." Eastern Colorado ranchers interviewed in 1963 still refer to all birds observed in grasslands as prairie chickens, while those seen in big sagebrush (Artemisia tridentata) or sand sage (Artemisia filifolia) are called sage chickens. Also, on 2 areas of the western slope, chukar occurrence was reported as sharp-tailed grouse distribution by technical personnel. Cooke (1897) listed sharp-tailed grouse as uncommon in northeastern (Larimer County) Colorado, also stating that 20 years previously the bird was plentiful in all parts of Colorado. He describes their range in 1897 as follows: "A few are still found across the whole of northern Colorado from Nebraska to Utah and south to at least Burlington and the "Divide" south of Denver. Formerly, a few were found throughout the southern half of Colorado, but there are no late records of its occurrence south of the places named." In 1900, Cooke quotes: "Mr. Carter says that they /S'h.arp-tailed grouse7 breed in Middle Park, but only in the lower parts,not-above 7,500 feet. -In winter they have been noted up to 9,500 feet." The description of movements by Mr. Carter would more appropriately be ascribed to blue grouse rather than sharp-tailed grouse. However, in his diary of September 3, 1878, Mr. Frank H. Mayer, hunting in Middle Park, stated, "Grouse are abundant on the higher slopes, and sage hens and sharptails exist in incredible numbers on the mesas and in the valleys," (Roth 1963). Until 1953, open seasons on sharp-tailed grouse were promulgated by the Game and Fish Commission and the legislature under the name "willow grouse." The first official mention of a decline in grouse numbers was by Game and Fish Commissioner James A. Shinn in 1911. The legislature in 1916 reduced the liberal bag and possession limit from 20 and 30 to 10 and 15 birds respectively and reduced the length of season from 60 to 45 days. Bag and possession limits and season lengths were gradually reduced every 2 to 5 years until 1937 when the newly-established Game and Fish Commission closed the season. The season was re-opened in 1953 for all of Colorado except the eastern plains (east of U. S. Highway 85) and has been continued yearly. The season is set for sharp-tailed and sage grouse, ranges from one to 3 days in length, and has 2- to 3-bird aggregate bag and possession limits. HABITAT Movements of the sharp-tailed grouse in Colorado are fairly limited with little seasonal change in habitat. In some areas, Canada and the northern states, these birds may be migratory (Snyder 1935). Low and Gaufin (1946) observed sharp tails in Utah flying out of sight on some unknovffimovement pattern. During extremely severe winters in northwestern Colorado, sharptails have moved unknown distances to towns and farmyards for feed. As the severe weather abates, the birds apparently move back to their original range. While there are some differences in the habitat of the columbian and plains sharptails, there are many similarities. Schorger (1944); Hamerstrom, Hamerstrom, and Mattson (1952); Hart, Lee and Low (1950); Marshall and Jensen (1937); Yocum (1952); Buss and Dziedzic (1955); and Snyder (1935) writing of sharp-tailed grouse habitat preference in Utah, Washington, and Wisconsin, �Fig. 1. Sagebrush parks interspersed with mixed brush and small aspen groves are often inhabited by sharp-tailed grouse. Fig. 2. Rolling sagebrush areas with scattered plants of mixed brush are utilized by sharp-tailed grouse in Moffat County_ �Fig 3. Fig. 4. Wheatfields surrounded by or adjacent to brush range can be preferred sharp-tailed grouse habitat. Sharp-tailed grouse will utilize irrigated meadows and alfalfa fields interspersed in brush range. �-305- and Ontario, Canada, generally use the same terms -- edge of forest, brushy areas with parks, and parks or openings with shrubs -- to describe the habitat. While the sharptail has not been reported from eastern and southern North America, this limitation may be due to climatological factors rather than habitat. Sharp-tailed grouse in Colorado were observed where grass is present with a light interspersion of shrubs, wheat, and trees. There are extreme variations in frequency and degree of interspersion among these plant types. Some examples of these variations in occupied habitat are shown in Figures 1 through 5. Vegetation. -- Vegetation serves 2 major functions, food and cover. The requirements for these items vary by seasons of the year and availability. However, many large habitat areas that can furnish most or all the necessary food and cover requirements are not utilized because of their continuity and lack of. "edge." Dargan et al. (1942) recorded all observations by 7 range types: (1) Oakserviceberry, (2) Serviceberry-chokecherry, (3) Sage-serviceberry, (4) Sagegrass, (5) Aspen, (6) Grass-weed, and (7) Fields. The sage-serviceberry and serviceberry-oak types received the highest percentage total use from September through March although sage-grass receiving the highest use in September and serviceberry-chokecherry in February and March. All observations of vegetative cover during 1962-63 were quantitative rather than qualitative. Plants present at each grouse observation were recorded, but not in order of dominance or per cent of ground cover. Food. -- A wide variety of plants and animals are used for food by the sharp-tailed grouse. The leaves, seeds, and buds of an individual plant may all be eaten or any single item. Hart et al. (1950) lists 14 plants and classes of animals as being used by the-mo~tain sharptail. Schmidt (1936) lists 27 plants used by the northern and plains sharptail. All grass was grouped as a single item in both analyses. Except for buckwheat, corn, oats, and wheat, all plants were native, indicating that cultivated plants, although supplemental, are not necessary to their food supply. In Colorado, the food supply is related to the plant species present and to the season of the year. Crop and stomach analysis of 21 birds collected from December through February (Dargan' et al. 1942) showed 70 to 80 per cent of the total diet was chokecherry buds wit~serviceberry buds the only other major food item. However, 5 additional shrub species and unidentified forbs received some use. Ecology studies (Evans 1963b) on the greater pra1r1e chicken range of Yuma County and Colorado's eastern-most sharp-tailed grouse range show the dominant grass to be blue grama (Bouteloua gracilis) comprising 15 per cent of the ground cover and the.dominant shrub to be sand sage at 5.0 percent. Other grass species generally present on eastern-slope ranges include: Calamovilfa longifolia, Agropyron smithii, Andropogon hallii and scoparius, Bromus tectorum Koeleria cristata, Eragrostis trichodes, Festuca octoflora, Panicum virgatum. Sporobolus cryptandrus, Stipa comota, and Muhlenbergia sp. �Fig. 5. Some small open parks above 9,000 feet on the Uncompahgre Plateau are inhabited by sharptailed grouse. Fig. 6. Although sharp-tailed grouse inhabit an open park within one mile, dense brush and aspen growth prohibits occupancy over most of the Uncompahgre Plateau. �Fig. 7. --Photo by Don Domenick Spraying small areas of brush with 2, 4-D on the Routt National Forest north of Craig may have improved this range for sharp-tailed grouse. �-307- Yucca glauca is the only other major browse species at the lower elevation with oakbrush, Quercus gambelii, replacing the sand sage at higher elevations. The range of the mountain sharp tail is dominated by mid-grasses and tall grasses such as Stipa comata, lettermani and viridula; Agropyron inerme, smithii and spicatum; Festuca idahoensis and thurberi; Bromus anomalus and marginatus; Elymus canadensis and condensatus; Poa ampla, pratensis and and fendleriana; Koeleria cristata; and Oryzops~hymenoides, to mention a few. A wide variety of browse species are present, including: Quercus gambelii, Prunus melanocarpa, Artemisiatridentata, Amelanchier utahensis, Symphoricarpos oreophilus, and Salix spp. Animal matter used is closely related to the plant species. Two crops collected from Pinon Mesa in September 1959 were filled with woolly-bear larva (Isia isabella), which was infesting the oak brush at that time. Although the plants and insects present in areas of sharp-tailed grouse observation may indicate food sources, there has not been a food habit study of the Colorado sharp-tailed grouse. Cover. -- Cover is needed by sharp-tailed grouse for nesting, roosting, and escape protection. Suitable ground vegetation is preferred for nesting and roosting (Hart et al. 1950) in the summer. However, the birds will perch in shrubs or trees for-roosting at all times of the year; and they may tunnel into soft snow during winter months. Dargan et al. (1942) found snow roosting abandoned when less than 12 inches of snow waS-present·, when snow became crusted, and when there were open areas at the base of shrubs. Taller shrubs and trees may be used for excape cover from ground predators and as perches for sentrys. On several occasions, sharptail males were observed hooting from the highest shrub available. Shrub, tree, and fence canopies may also be used as protection from aerial predators. Several dancing grounds were situated near and under fences, power, and telephone lines. All the browse and taller grass species, unless overgrazed, listed as food furnish adequate cover. Hart et al. (1950) states that alfalfa and stubble are often used for nesting where native cover is sparse. Ranchers in the Hayden area frequently destroy nests while summer-fallowing wheat stubble. Birds may nest in green winter wheat if it is rank enough in the spring. Adequate nesting cover may well be a limiting factor in areas of intensive dry-farming. Rather than a lack of cover, too dense a cover appears to be a major problem in many areas of Colorado (Fig. 6). On the Hayden Divide, only openings resulting from fires are used by sharptails. Two isolated openings on the Uncompahgre Plateau, separated by several miles of unsuitable range from habitat areas, have small populations of sharptails. It appears there should be several small openings (1 to 10 acres) adjacent to each other or single larger openings, perhaps 50 to 100 acres,' for good habitat with many small adjacent openings preferred. Present browse and pinon-juniper eradication programs where small areas of browse are retained may be beneficial to sharp-tailed grouse habitat (Fig. 7). �-308- Elevation. -- The range of the pra1r1e sharptail may extend from 4,000 to 7,000 feet in elevation, while that of the columbian sharptail varies from 6,000 to 9,500 feet. The boundary between the 2 species is not known although Lincoln (1917) stated that the mountain sharptail (columbianus) were limited to the western slope. A few birds inhabit mountainous areas of the eastern slope, but their taxonomy has not been determined. Ligon (1927) listed sharp-tailed grouse in the eastern foothills of New Mexico as P. p. columbianus. The degree of elevational migration from higher ranges is not known. In winters of heavy snow, columbian sharptails are seen in the town of Yampa and in farm lots several miles from and below their usual habitat. Areas over 9,000 feet on the Uncompahgre Plateau have been sporadically checked during winter months, but no signs of occupancy were found. Six sharptails were observed in late November, 1963, 2 miles east and 800 feet lower in elevation than the Uncompahgre Ridge, which comprises their main summer habitat. While Snyder (1935) mentions migration in the northern sharptails (P. p. phasianellus), Hart et al. (1950) lists the daily and seasonal range of the columbian sharptail of from one-quarter to three miles. However, Hart et al. (1950) and Hamerstrom, Hamerstrom, and Mattson (1952) mention longer flights and movements into suitable habitats unexplained in origin, distance, and motivation. Topography. -- The terrain inhabited by both subspecies varies from flat to sharply-broken. Seldom have birds been observed on steep slopes, but they do utilize flat to rolling areas interspersed with broken or canyon topography. Dargan et al. (1942) recorded the per cent of all sharp-tailed grouse observations in relation to exposure and slope. The most birds were flushed from north exposures (44.6 per cent) with east and south exposures about equal (24.7 and 22.9 per cent respectively) and west last with a low of 7.8 per cent. Slopes of 6 to 10 per cent were preferred (45.7 per cent of observations) closely followed by slopes of to 5 per cent (31.2 per cent). Only 2.5 per cent of all observations were on level areas while over 10 per cent were observed on slopes of over 15 per cent. It is probable that the broken topography helps in escape situations as birds fly from one high point to another. Also, the higher vantage point facilitates enemy detection. ° Climate. -- The range of both subspecies falls within the 15- to 20-inch precipitation zone, but the moisture pattern is different. The peak in precipitation occurs as rainfall during the summer months on the plains and as snow during the winter months for the mountain areas. Temperature extremes range from warm (seldom over 1000 F.) to extreme cold (under _400 F.). The annual mean temperature varies from a high of 52.20 on the plains to a low of 39.00 F. in the mountains. Snowfall varies from a non-persistent few inches on the plains to a continued depth of several feet at the higher elevations. For unknown reasons, birds do move down to lower elevations in years of above-normal snow. �-309- High winds are frequent in both areas as well as intense storms of hail, rain, and snow. While wind gusts up to 20 miles-per-hour were measured during dancing ground observations, birds were present although not as active as on calmer mornings. Soils. -- Most of the better soils have been cultivated except where prevented by slope limitations. Payne and Romine (1960) in describing the soils of Elbert and Douglas counties refer to them as: It ••• have a brown, sandy surface overlying sandy to moderately sandy subsoils." While some of the uncultivated mountain soils are deep and heavy, most are shallow, residual soils from shale, sandstone, and alluvial materials. Much of these soils are fairly productive, but all are sensitive to overgrazing and erosion. Recovery from overgrazing or mususe is slow, and when misused, are dominated by dense stands of brush and scattered annuals. DISTRIBUTION In the spring of 1959, an effort was made to interview all field personnel of Federal land agencies and the Game and Fish Department in regards to locations and numbers of grouse in Colorado. Since this project was primarily to determine blue grouse populations, individuals working the eastern plains area of Colorado were not contacted. Later, specific personnel mainly Game and Fish Department biologists working on upland game projects in eastern Colorado, were interviewed and all sharp-tailed grouse information collected was compiled onto a map (Fig. 8). Sharp-tailed grouse' are known to inhabit 11 counties (Dolores, Douglas, Elbert, Gunnison, Mesa, Moffat, Montezuma, Montrose, Rio Blanco, Routt, and Saguache) and may be present in 10 additional counties (Custer, Delta, Eagle, El Paso, La Plata, Ouray, Phillips, Sedgwick, Teller, and Yuma). Efforts since 1959 have been directed towards continued interviews to collect additional and current distribution data, personal reconnaissance to check areas of favorable habitat for occupancy, and the checking of areas where there was disagreement as to the species of grouse present. Seasonal. -- As mentioned in the preceding chapter, few data have been collected on seasonal movements of sharp-tailed grouse in Colorado. From present knowledge and a study of references, it appears that seasonal movements are slight and distributional information need not be postulated on a seasonal basis. Sharp-tailed grouse observed during dancing ground counts, production counts, and hunting seasons and winter game counts should all be correlated with distribution. Breeding Season. vey have been covered The results of the sharp-tailed in detail in a separate report. grouse breeding sur- Dancing grounds have been located in 5 counties, 4 ~esa, Moffat, Montrose, and Routt) on the western slope and one (Douglas) on the eastern slope. Reports have been received of possible dancing ground locations in 8 additional eastern slope counties (Custer, Elbert, El Paso, Phillips, Saguache, Sedgwick, Teller, and Yuma) and 6 western slope counties (Dolores, Gunnison, La Plata, Montezuma, Rio Blanco, and San Miguel). Limited surveys, 1 to 2 �MOFFAT W E L LOGAN 0 I r--.---- L-, i .MORG~N I ~. i I •. I RIO BLANCO ·-·"'>-·-·-·-·-.J"-G-;'-RF';-EL·O·- I \.>J }--i o I I j j -----.-----.-~--------.j"-----f"-------,; B L 0 jCROWLay I : . .I ! i \. :v-~'" i j j i i j T E R 0 i i __ -L ._.~__ i i i i ! B Fir!. 80 Distribution of sharp-tailed grpuse in Colorado, 1963. A �-311- mornings, were run in Custer, Elbert, El Paso, Gunnison, Saguache, and Teller counties the past spring without success. One sharptail-prairie chicken hybrid was photographed on a Yuma County prairie chicken ground in 1963 (Evans 1963a). A complete coverage of the 5 counties in which dancing grounds have been located has not been attained. More work in these counties will broaden the distribution picture for these areas. The distribution of presently located grounds are shown in Fig. 9. Brood Season. -- I have observed sharp-tailed grouse broods in only 3 counties, Mesa, Montrose, and Routt. All broods except one were observed while counting sage or blue grouse brood transects. In these 3 counties, there is an overlap in the range of the 3 grouse species. Besides the broods observed, adult birds were seen in these counties at varying locations during the brood season. It was impossible to determine if they were males or females. Only 2 of the sharp-tailed grouse observations during the brood period were in different areas from breeding season observations. One adult bird was seen on the Wolcott Divide, Eagle County, in the company of 11 blue grouse; and one group of 5 birds was seen in the Great Divide area northwes.t of Craig in Moffat County. Hunting Season. -- Efforts have been concen t.r a t.ed the past 6 years on checking blue and sage grouse hunters and their kill. During these checks, a few sharp-tailed grouse were handled. However, no special effort was made until 1963 to check areas with sharp-tailed grouse concentrations. Reports of sharp-tailed grouse kills through field checks by wildlife conservation officers has helped determine distribution for several areas of the state. In 1960, Wildlife Conservation Officer Alfred Heins checked 4 sharp-tailed grouse killed on Beaver Creek in Teller County. This area heretofore had not been considered sharp-tailed grouse range. All evidence of sharp-tailed grouse distribution in Gunnison County has been compiled from hunting checks by wildlife conservation officers in this area. If procedures were devised to channel all specific kill .Lnforma t Lon on sharp ta i.l,s to a central clearing office, more distribution data would be available. DENSITY Information, in regards to numbers and locations of sharp-tailed grouse observed, collected through interviews along with dancing ground counts, brood counts, hunting checks, and kill estimates will be used to formulate an estimate of population density. Sharp-tailed grouse in Colorado while not migratory tend to congregate during the winter and into the spring months. Dargan et al. (1942) found the average size flocks increased from 2.2 birds in September to 15.4 birds in February. As these birds are extremely difficult to observe during the sunnner .or brood season, population densities will probably need to be calculated from winter and spring populations. �COLORADO I ROUTT i i LARIMEP w E L LOGAN 0 i j X j x *0)( X !-OLyOtC:£ i " •• ' '0- # 0' i i --j ••• I YUMA ; i i i """" RIO .------.-------' BLANCO ,---_._------._.GAR FIE L 0 I \.0 f-' l\.J I ~'s. I i iI i T E R 0 i . i ·-~--·-·i-·---·.l·- ..•. ·.. ··-·-·-----·-i i i I i SPftJ"'Gf1ELO I .' i LEGEnD Danc.Ing grounds counted 0 •.•Other observations r,';f7. - "'00 9. Sharp-tailed grouse breeding season observations and dancing ground locations, 1963. �-313- Breeding Densities. A maximum of 66 males was observed on 4 prairie sharp-tail dancing grounds, all located in Douglas County in east-central Colorado. In addition, 55 sharptails were observed at other locations within Douglas County and one in Elbert County during the search for dancing grounds. Although locations and numbers of birds for 4 additional dancing grounds in Douglas County and one in Elbert County were reported by ranchers and individuals, no grouse were found utilizing these locations in 1963. Limited checks were made in Custer, El Paso, Saguache, and Teller counties without success. A maximum of 342 columbian sharp tail males was counted on 29 dancing grounds in 4 counties (Mesa, Moffat, Montrose, and Routt) of northwestern and westcentral Colorado. A limited number of birds was observed in other areas of Mesa, Moffat, Montrose, and Routt counties, and further search may disclose dancing grounds at these locations. There were no sharp-tailed grouse found in 4 trips into Gunnison County. The locations of separate sharptail observations during the breeding season and the locations of all dancing grounds have been mapped for future reference. Travel into and through sharp-tailed grouse brood range has been primarily by vehicle to determine the feasibility of establishing census or production routes for wildlife conservation officers that could be run in a systematic manner as has been done for sage grouse and pheasants. Very few birds or broods have been observed during this period. This may be due to one or to a combination of the following factors connected with vehicular use. The mixed-brush range that these birds occupy limits observations to the roadbed or to perched birds; and although they have been observed utilizing free water, this does not appear to be a constant requirement. They also use denuded areas or gopher deposits as dusting sites rather than relying on roadbeds. Preferred food is available throughout native vegetation and cultivated areas and little use is made of disturbed sites that might allow for observations at distances up to a few hundred feet. The habitat, food and water requirements, daily movements, lack of affinity for roads and openings, and an inherent wariness during the brood months precludes density evaluation by vehicular transects. Intensive foot travel and the use of trained dogs on specific, limited areas will be necessary to obtain data on size of broods and population densities. Evaluation and Recommendations. -- Evaluation of sharp-tailed grouse occupied habitat indicates that suitable range, presently unoccupied, exists in all sections of the state. Present land management practices and rehabilitation programs can be favorable to sharp-tailed grouse. It is doubtful, however, if the present population densities are great enough to fill these areas by immigration. It is recommended that all range rehabilitation work, particularly in areas between 6,000 and 9,500 feet elevation, be considered and evaluated for sharptailed grouse habitat. Also, an experimental trapping or rearing and transplanting program should be initiated for these and other areas of suitable unoccupied range. �-315- Low, J. B. and D. M. Gaufin. Game Bull. 3(3):8. 1946. Marshall, W. H. and M. S. Jenson. sharp-tailed grouse in Utah. Sharp-tailed grouse. 1937. Winter and spring studies of the J. Wildl. Mgmt. 1(1):84-99. Payne, E. M. and D. S. Romine. 1960. Land resource Agri. Exp. Sta. Gen. Series 727, 57 pp. Roth, C. 1963. Schorger, A. W. Wisconsin. 35:1-59. Utah Fish and Diary of a market hunter. areas of Colorado. Colorado Outdoors, Colo. 12(6):30-39. 1944. The prairie chicken and sharp-tailed grouse in early Trans. Wise. Acad. of Sciences, Arts and Letters Vol. Snyder, L. L. 1935. A study of the sharp-tailed BioI. Series No. 40:66 pp. grouse. Univ. of Toronto, Yocum, C. F. 1952. The columbian sharp-tailed grouse (Pedioecetes phasianellus columbianus) in the state of Washington. Am. Midland Naturalist 48(1):185-192. Prepared Date: Pr i nt.ed by: Glenn E. Rogers Senior Game Biologist April, 1964 Februury, 19(5 Approved by: Laurence E. Riordan Assistant Director, Research Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator Wayne W. Sandfort Chief, Game Research ��-317- JOB COMPLETION RESEARCH PROJECT REPORT SEGMENT State of ...::C..:.O.=L,.:.ORA=D=.O=-_ Project No. W-37-R-16 Work Plan No. __ Game Bird Survey --=1:.=3~ _ Job No. 3 Title of Job: Breeding Season Studies, Sharp-tailed Period Covered: April 1, 1963 through March 31, 1964 Grouse ABSTRACT Sharp-tailed grouse dancing grounds were located by traveling through habitat during early-morning and late-evening hours with stops to look and listen. Thirty-three dancing grounds have been located in 5 counties (Douglas, Mesa, Moffat, Montrose, and Routt). Sharp-tailed grouse seem to prefer ridges, knolls, and benches for dancing since only one of the grounds was located in a valley. Vegetation on the dancing grounds varied from scattered grass to dense brush with 15 grounds located on areas previously disturbed by fire, clearing and cultivation. The elevational range of dancing ground locations was from 6,000 to 9,000 feet with the majority between 6,500 and 7,500 feet. The movements and sounds of the dancing sharptails are extremely varied in comparison with blue and sage grouse. Audibility ranges from 100 feet to 2 miles depending on the sequence of their dancing activity. Early morning hours, daylight to 2 hours after sunrise, were the most active hours. Evening dancing was inconsistent and less active, but birds were observed dancing as early as 3:40 in the afternoon. Sharptails were active on March 27 when field work was initiated and were still active when the work was discontinued on June 13. The study should be continued in all areas of the state until enough grounds are located to establish trends suitable for management. Recornnendations: It is recommended that work be continued on this project to locate dancing grounds in all areas inhabited by sharp-tailed grouse. Unless grounds are located in all parts of the state, an adequate population trend, distribution, and population density cannot be determined. Problems on evaluation include: establishment of trend transects on a unit-area basis; determining optimum periods for transects to be run by elevation or area; and methods of flushing and counting that will insure consistency. �-318- Objectives: (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) Locate and map as many sharp-tailed dancing grounds as possible. Select permanent, representative dancing grounds which can be counted annually; these counts to be used in determining changes in the breeding population from year to year. Instruct other Department personnel in a standardized method for determining trends in the sharp-tailed breeding population. Prepare forms and record books for systematic recording of information. Eventually turn over sharp-tailed dancing ground counts to management. Techniques Used: Game and Fish Department,. Forest Service, Bureau of Land Management, Fish and Wildlife personnel and ranchers and sportsmen were interviewed regarding sharp-tailed grouse distribution and dancing ground locations. Roads were traveled through all suggested habitat areas with frequent stops for observing and listening. Rough maps were prepared for all grounds located. Location of all birds observed were recorded on maps or appropriate forms. Counts were made of dancing grounds regardless of dates, times, and weather to check activity patterns. �-319- BREEDING SEASON STUDIES, SHARP-TAILED GROUSE Glenn E. Rogers and F. David Stearns The same general procedures were used to locate sharp-tailed grouse dancing grounds as were used in the sage grouse breeding study. Wildlife conservation officers, forest rangers, land managers, and ranchers were interviewed to determine sharp-tailed grouse distribution. During 1963, we checked areas in 11 counties, mainly in northwestern and eastcentral Colorado where sharp-tailed grouse populations had been reported. Thirty-three dancing grounds have been located in 5 counties; 4 in Douglas, 4 in Mesa, 4 in Moffat, 20 in Routt, and one in Montrose (Fig. 1). Methods~-- Beginning the last week in March and continuing through the first week in June, all available mornings and evenings were spent traveling through sharp-tailed grouse' range. Travel was planned to make maximum use of the daily periods one-half hour before sunrise until 2 hours after sunrise, and 2 hours before sunset until dark. At maximums of one-half mile intervals, stops were made to look and listen for 5-minute periods. A longer listening period was deemed necessary during evening hours. After a ground was located either visually or audibly, attempts were made to locate a vantage point from which the birds could be observed. Often this was not possible and a route was chosen that would allow the birds to be counted as they flushed. Rough sketch maps were drawn showing location of the ground and surrounding area including distinctive physical features. Also recorded were time of observation, number and sex (when possible) of the birds on the ground, weather conditions, vegetation present, distance of ground from nearest town, route of travel, best observation point, and, time permitting, notes as to behavior characteristics of the birds. Although there were apparent differences in coloration, size, and dancing ground selection between the 2 subspecies, no variation in behavior or sound patterns was recorded. Results.-- At this time, 29 columbian sharp-tailed grouse and 4 prairie sharp-tailed grouse dancing grounds h~ve been located and counted. Six of the 29 grounds were located in 1959 by Paul Dillon, science teacher at the Moffat County High School, and his students. One prairie sharp-tailed grouse dancing ground (Winkler's Ranch) had been counted in 1944 (personal correspondence, Alfred M. Bailey dated May 4, 1962) and its history may extend back to 1914. Ground Locations.-- All of the prairie sharp-tailed grouse dancing grounds were located on knolls or ridges of primary or secondary importance to the immediate topography. Although other prominences might be present, usually the dancing ground was not situated closer than 500 feet to another prominence. �COLORADO MOFFAT LA R I t.1 E I' W E L LOGAN 0 r------- _----L_, _ MORGAN I i I ' ..-- -----..--.--~-j YU M A I ; .. ,i i i ! ,.ROO RIO BLANCO r---·------- ---"'\..--------' ,H:)LYJ)II(E i I GAR FIE _ L 0 I 'vJ r0 o I ~. I i i i i i , I __ --L.. i, --,.- .J.. __ I i f ! ! o - other observations Fig. 1. SPftlNGFlELD -- --" 'Dancing grounds counted LEGEND X - I Sha..-rp-tailed grouse breeding season observations an« dancing ground locations, 1963. I f:;_ ..... -.-.------ �-321- While only one of the 29 columbian sharp-tailed dancing grounds was located in a valley, 14 were situated so it was possible to observe the ground from adjacent prominences. Birds on the remaining 14 grounds were impossible to count from any vantage point. A breakdovlU of the 29 columbian sharptai1 dancing ground locations shows 10 on ridges, 8 on low knolls, 6 on high knolls, 4 on benches, and one in a valley. Birds on the valley and 4 bench grounds were dancing near fences, possibly for protection. Ground Vegetation.-- Vegetation on the 4 pra~r~e sharp-tailed grouse dancing grounds consisted mainly of grass and some low weeds with Calmovi1fa sp., Bouteloua gracilis, Agropyron spp., Bromus tectorum, and Koeleria cristata predominate. Some shrubs, yucca (Yucca glauca) and oakbrush (Quercus gambelii), were near these grounds. Except for intervention of occasional plants and small depressions, all birds on the grounds were visible to a properly situated observer. Vegetation present on dancing ground sites of the columbian sharp-tailed grouse was more varied and of greater height· than that present on the prairie grounds. Grasses present could include: Poa ampla, Poa pratensis, Poa secunda, Agropyron smithi, Agropyron spicatum, Agropyron cristatum, Agropyron inerme, Bromus inermis,Bromus tectorum, Bromus anoma Ius , Festuca thurberi, Festuca idahoensis, Sitanion hystrix, Koeleria cristata, Elymus canadensis, Elymus condensatus, Oryzopsis hymeniodes, Dactylis glomerata, Triticum aestivum, and Phleum pratense. Browse plants present could include: Artemisia tridentata, Amelanchier alnifolia, Amelanchier utahensis, Cerocarpus montanus, Prunus melanocarpa, Symphoricarpos oreophilus, Crysothamnus spp., Ribes coloradense, Rhus trilobata, Quercus gambelii, and Salix sp. Weeds present may include: Aster sp., Astragalus sp., Balsomorrhiza sp., Cirsium sp., Cleome serrulata latea, Frasera speciosa, Erigeron sp., Gilia aggregata, Helianthus sp., Delphinium sp., Phlox sp., Achillea millefolium, Crypantha virgata, Pentemon sp., Senecio sp. to mention a few. There was some indication that the columbian sharp-tailed grouse preferred disturbed areas for dancing. Thirteen of the 29 dancing grounds were on cultivated lands, mainly wheat, alfalfa, and hay meadows, with 2 additional grounds on a burn and a powerline clearing. The location, regrowth, and height of vegetation on .most of these grounds made it difficult to observe and count all birds (Fig. 2 and 3). The remaining 14 dancing grounds were in mixed brush where it was impossible to see more than one or 2 birds at a time and also very difficult to obtain an accurate count by flushing. Whether it was a result of the vegetative height in these areas or other factors, there were generally from one to several birds perched atop the taller shrubs, hooting, observing, and hoping to be observed (Fig. 4). Soils.-- A study of the soil composition of the dancing ground sites was not attempted. The terrain utilized for dancing had good drainage and was situated so snow was blown clear during the winter or melted free early in the spring. Where uti~ized areas had been disturbed by cultivation, the soils were sandy, very porous, and vegetative growth was slower and �-322- sparser than the remainder of the field. In some instances, other factors including bedding sheep, feeding cattle, and stacking hay had changed the character of the soil to make the area suitable. Elevation.-- As discussed under distribution, the pra~r~e sharptail probably inhabits several counties of eastern Colorado. However, the only dancing grounds located for this species have been in Douglas County. The elevation of Castle Rock, county seat of Douglas County just north and west of the dancing grounds, is 6,202 feet. Unless sharptails occupying eastern slope areas above 8,000 feet prove to be of this race, the elevational range of the plains sharptail dancing grounds would be from 3,500 to 6,500 feet. For the columbian sharptails, the highest dancing grounds are above 9,000 feet (Uncompahgre Plateau) while the lowest are at 6,000 feet near Craig. The majority of the grounds located were between 6,500 and 7,500 feet. Behavior.-- A qualitative study of the courtship behavior of the sharptailed grouse was not attempted. Information was collected on hours the birds were present, fluctuations in numbers of birds, the courtship calls made while dancing, the distance these sounds could be heard, the length of the silent periods, the duration of the courtship period, and the possible variation in peak numbers by elevation. A knowledge of these factors is necessary in locating grounds and will be usable in setting up procedures for management to use in counting grounds and evaluating count trends. Sounds and Activities.-The sounds and activities of a dancing sharptailed grouse are many and varied in intensity and duration. As the birds begin their dance, the body is in a horizontal position with the head and wings out-thrust, the tail vertical, and the culmen extended. The feet stamp rapidly with short steps and the tail makes a clicking sound (Fig.6 ). The dance is accompanied with a burping or bubbling sound, a series of loud challenging calls, cackling and hooting sounds, and the combined sounds are distinctive and were audible up to 2 miles or more. After the dance, the bird may freeze or may inflate and deflate its air sacs a number of times from one position (Fig.S). This produces a coo or low hooting sound and was not audible at great distances. In some areas this cooing or hooting was done from the top branches of shrubs or trees perhaps to increase the audibility. Each dancing period appears to start Qn signal with all males present moving at the same time and all corning to a stop and freezing at the same moment. The active and quiet periods alternate and vary from 3 to 20 seconds in duration. At irregular intervals, birds may jump 3 to 4 feet in the air with rapid wing beats and a loud cackling noise. This may be a challenge as it appears to bring another male to confront the challenger. Between dancing spells, 2 birds with adjoining territories may come together, glare, and crouch facing each other with wings outstretched (Fig. 7). This position may be held for seconds or several minutes depending on the time of day and presence or absence of hens on the ground. A low scolding noise is made at this time. At least 2 other calls are used on the dancing ground, but they do not seem to be connected with any specific activity. Both are fairly audible and have been heard at a distance of just under a mile. �Figs. 2 and 3. These two photographs illustrate the natural camouflage of the dancing sharp-tailed grouse and how difficult it is to make accurate counts even in open situations. �Fig. 4. Fig. 5. Where brush cover is tall and dense on or near dancing ground, sharp-tailed grouse may perch atop shrubs to hoot, observe, and, perhaps, be more readily observed and heard. The air sacs on the neck are inflated, the head bobs, wings are extended, and tail is held erect during the hooting sequences. �Fig. 6. -- Photo by George D. Andrews During the dancing sequence, the feet and tip of tail move so fast that they are blurred even with high speed photography. �Fig. 7. -- Photo by George D. Andrews The confrontation of two sharp-tailed males, either silent and staring or with a low-scolding sound, is part of the dancing sequence. �Figs. 8 and 9. Front and back views of a male columbian sharp-tailed grouse showing the extended culmen and the darker, more definite coloration than is present on the prairie sharptail. �-328- The presence of hens on the grounds greatly increases all activity and the noise in nearly continuous. All males watch the progress of the hen through the ground, approaching as close to her as his territory will allow (Figs. 8 and 9). Hens are closely pursued by males all through the ground and on flushing, one or 2 males generally will follow. When hens were not present, activities and sounds subsided and silent and confrontation periods extending from 5 to 20 minutes occurred making grounds harder to locate. Approach and Observation.-- Early in the study, sharptail ground locations were missed on the first attempt by failing to look and listen from the car before alighting. The moment sharp-tailed grouse observed a person afoot, they froze and remained still in voice and body until they were flushed or the person left. Excepting this one item, very few factors appeared to disturb the sharptails from their normal activities. Hawks, ravens, coyotes, tractors, cattle, sheep, or deer on the grounds apparently have little effect on the birds. On Pinon Mesa one morning, a deer was noticed playing with the birds, running from one to the other striking at them with feet and head. The birds would jump out of range and renew their activities. Near Elk Mountain, northwest of Steamboat Springs, 6 ravens, 4 ducks, and 2 hawks spent the entire morning on the ground watching the dancing and occasionally the hawks stooped at the dancing birds disrupting the sequence of activities. An accidental meeting of a coyote and a group of sharptails on their dancing ground in Douglas County was culminated by the coyote watching the birds for a few minutes and the grouse paying very little attention to the intruder except for the low clucking by one of the females on the edge of the ground. Often the observation vehicle was driven to the middle of the ground to observe the birds and take pictures. Although the birds would flush or run away from the vehicle while it was moving; the moment it stopped, they would move back and resume activities within a few feet of the vehicle. Movements within the vehicle or out the window would tense the birds, and if made near the end of the dancing period, would cause the birds to flush. Also, this approach with a vehicle could only be done successfully during the early part of the dancing; if near the end, the birds would not return after flushing. Hours.-- Unlike sage grouse (Centrocercous urophasianus), the sharp-tailed grouse was not heard dancing before daylight although they were occasionally observed on the ground the moment the area was visible. Perhaps this was due to the difference in their approach to the ground. Sage grouse walk into the ground often from nearby roosting areas. Invariably all sharptails were observed to fly and land close to the ground and then walk to position. While later arrivals among both species might fly or walk directly to the ground, many of these birds seemed not to take an active part in the performance. Evening hours were checked for courtship activity with varied success. Sharptailed males were observed on the Winkler dancing ground as early as 3:40 p.m. The number of males present in the evening was less than half the morning population on both prairie and mountain species. Also, the consistency of the evening gathering was very poor. �-329- Duration.-- Hart, Lee, and Low (1950) stated that dancing occurs in nearly every month of the year. Marshall and Jenson (1937:96) stated that dancing activities on the columbian'sharptail "began in the last week in March and continued until about the first week in June." Scott (1950:1064) stated that the peak of dancing activity was not reached by the prairie sharptail until near the middle of May. Folker (1960) found the peak period of activity for the prairie sharptail in Saskatchewan occurred the end of April and the first week in May. Checks of sharptail dancing grounds were started in Colorado on March 27 and continued until June 13. Peak counts for the prairie sharptail were attained during the first 2 weeks in April. Peak counts on the mountain sharptail were attained during the first 2 weeks in May. However, sample counts of both species were not adequate in either distribution, number of counts, and in determination of sex of birds present for statistical analyses. There was also a variation in duration of dancing activities not related to elevation or temperatures. For example, birds in the Hayden area (elevation 6,500 to 8,000 feet) were still very active at the end of May while birds on Pinon Mesa and the Uncompahgre Plateau (elevation 8,000 to 9,200 feet) were not~ The only sign of fall activity was on Pinon Mesa, September 18, 1962. Counts.-- The main emphasis the past year were on the location of dancing grounds and count procedures. Counts were made as grounds were located. This procedure does not give count information consistent enough for trend purposes. 'Complete and consistent counts of sharptails on their dancing grounds are difficult to obtain. Besides the dense vegetation on most grounds and the lack of observation points covering the ground location, the mobility of the birds on the ground makes an accurate count by sex very difficult. The territory of each bird may resemble a large circle or square and during periods of activity, the birds may dance, fly, jump, and run to every corner, making it difficult to keep an accurate record of the birds tallied. During the resting periods when the birds could be separately observed, they are motionless, often squatting to the ground making it difficult to see all birds present. Birds that were not participating in dancing activities, without extended culmen and air sacs, and showing a complete disregard for other birds' territories were classified as females. An attempt was made at each ground to count the number of females present to determine the peak of mating. Accurate counts of total birds on the ground were best obtained by flushing. Even this procedure had several drawbacks. The birds were hard to flush in areas of dense cover, some flushed out of sight of the observer and could only be heard, and it was impossible to separate the birds by sex for comparative counts. Grounds counted by flushing during the peak of mating with more hens present would appear much larger than the same ground counted a week earlier or later. Table 1 shows the sharp-tailed grouse dancing ground counts through the spring of 1963. �-330- Table 1.-- Counts on sharp-tailed grouse dancing grounds in Colorado, 1959 through 1963. Date Time 3/27/63 a.m. Winkler 4/ 5/63 a.m. Winkler 4/10/63 3:40pm Winkler 4/11/63 4:50am Winkler 5/13/63 3:306:45pm 4:405:21 Winkler Stearns & students Stearns & students Stearns & Rogers Stearns & Dominick Stearns Winkler Stearns Kinz1ey Kinz1ey Stearns Stearns Kinz1ey Stearns Kinz1ey Stearns Kinz1ey Stearns 4 Kinz1ey Stearns 1 Kinz1ey Stearns 6/ 4/63 4/ 2/63 4/15/63 4/21/63 4/23/63 5/15/63 5/30/63 6/ 5/63 5:00am 7:155:58am 5:156:30 4:456:10 4:007:00am 4:106:15am 4:356:00am Ground Counter Males Females Total 21 9 20 9 0 11 5 5 1 1 1 14 5 Very Windy 0 Cool-Calm 6 3 a.m. Remington Stearns 17 4/23/63 4/27/63 5/12/63 4:45pm 5:03am 5:407:15am 4:43 3:307:00am 4:106:00am 5:12am Pilcher Pilcher Pilcher Stearns Stearns Stearns 0 15 0 Pilcher Pilcher Stearns Stearns Pilcher Stearns 7 Pilcher Stearns 9 Walker Walker Stearns Stearns Walker Stearns Walker Stearns 6/ 7/63 6/13/63 4/29/63 5/ 3/63 5/ 3/63 5/14/63 4:306:43am 3:406:45pm 5:587:02 Windy 29 4/ 9/63 5/14/63 5/29/63 Weather 5 17 3 3 7 8 23 20 0 11 3 17 Very Windy �-331- Table 1.-- Counts on sharp-tailed grouse dancing grounds in Colorado, 1959 through 1963. (Continued) Date Time 5/28/63 4:206:30am 4:305:00am 4:356:49am 5/31/63 6/ 6/63 Ground Counter Males Females Walker Stearns 10 Walker Stearns 18 Walker Stearns 11 4 2 5/29/63 4:14 Sage Creek Rogers 5/26/63 Hayden Divide Hayden Divide Rogers 5/ 4/63 4:526:40 6:01 5/29/63 5/22/63 5/ 3/63 4/24/63 5:15 5:57pm 5:54 6:25 McKinney McKinney McKinney McKinney Rogers Rogers Rogers Rogers 5/22/63 Gilliland Rogers 12 Gilliland Rogers Gilliland .Rogers 18 5/21/63 5:306:00 6:36 6:227:30 5:00pm Rogers Not dancing 5/31/63 6:05 Pinon Mesa Rogers Not dancing 5/29/63 5/21/63 5/23/63 Total Gilliland 2 Rogers 13 4 Clear 10 Clear 17 0 14 26 9 9 1 13 Not dancing 18 California Rogers Park Road 24 24 18 18 5/23/63 6:45 Dry E1kRogers head Ridge 5/22/63 6:52 4/26/62 6:05 Rock Spr. Gulch Rock Spr. Gulch 5/29/63 Weather Rogers 11 Rogers 4 5:42 Mud Spring Rogers Gulch 15 5/ 3/63 7:26 Rogers 12 4/24/62 6:05 Dry E1khead Dry E1khead Rogers 17 5/ 2/63 5:00 High Mesa Rogers 10 Strong �-332- Table I.-- Counts on sharp-tailed grouse dancing grounds in Colorado, 1959 through 1963. (Continued) Date Time 4/29/59 Ground Counter Males 7:30 High Mesa Dillon & (Winfreys) Roland 6 5/ 9/63 6:00am 3 5/ 1/63 7:14 Cold Rogers Springsff2 Cold Rogers Springs1F2 Dot Camp Rogers 1 5/ 9/63 Females Total 6 5 Jct. 5/ 1/63 6:00am Cold Rogers Springs1H 2+ 5/ 5/63 5:54 Yellow Jacket Rogers 3 4/28/63 5:15 Rogers 2+ 4/26/62 5:45pm Rogers 12 .5/10/62 6:27pm Elk R. Cemetery Elk R. Cemetery Elk R. Cemetery Rogers 9 4/27/63 5:25 Dry Gulch Rogers 10 4/27/63 6:28 Salt Creek Rogers 10 4/26/63 5/11/62 5:55 5:55 Elk Mtn.1H Rogers Elk Mtn.1H Rogers 7 7 12 4/26/63 6:24 Elk Mtn.1F2 Rogers 23 ·23 4/23/63 5:10 Horsefly Creek Rogers 5 4/10/63 5/ 2/62 4:55pm 4:15 Winkler Winkler Rogers Rogers 9 17 4/19/62 5:00 29 RoaMH Rogers 3 4/24/62 7:00 18 Road Rogers 2 4/19/62 5:30 29 Road1F2 Rogers 2 Fish Creek 7 5/26/63 Rogers Weather �-333- Table l.-- Counts on sharp-tailed grouse dancing through 1963. (Continued) grounds in Colorado, Date Time Females Total 5/11/59 5/23/59 5:306:00 6:00 4/18/59 4/29/59 5/10/59 Ground Counter Males Taylors H. Keeyer 5 5 Taylors H. Keever 3 3 5:00 5:15 5:15 Pellys Pellys Pellys P. Pleasant P. Pleasant P. Pleasant 10 13 16 10 13 16 4/18/59 4/29/59 5/10/59 5:00 5:45 5:30 Wisemans Wisemans Wisemans P. Pleasant P. Pleasant P. Pleasant 12 20 38 12 20 38 5/14/59 5/16/59 - /59 5:20 5:40 5:20 Schniders Schniders Schniders D. Osborn D. Osborn D. Osborn 2 11 5 2 11 5 1959 Weather Evaluation and Reconnnendat-ions.-- Only a small part of the total dancing grounds in Colorado may have been loca.ted at this time. Several areas (central Moffat County, south-central, southwestern, and northeastern Colorado) should be searched for dancing grounds. However, it may be possible to utilize the 29 columbian and 4 prairie sharp-tailed grouse grounds located to establish trends for Mesa, Routt, and Douglas counties. Other problems appearing on evaluation include: establishment of trend transects on a unit-area basis; determining optimum periods for transects to be run by elevation or area; and methods of flushing and counting that will insure consistency. Work should be continued on this project to locate dancing grounds in all areas inhabited by sharp-tailed grouse. Unless grounds are located in all parts of the state, an adequate population trend, distribution, and population density cannot be determined. Counts should be made at weekly intervals on representative dancing grounds by elevation and area to determine optimum counting periods. These should include counts by observation and flushing to determine consistency between methods. During observation counts, the sex of birds present by weekly periods should be determined to find the best period to obtain maximum male-only numbers. The period just past the peak of female occurrence on the grounds gives the most consistent trend information for sage grouse. �-334- LITERATURE CITED Folker, R. V. 1960. Spring surveys of sharp-tailed and ruffed grouse, 1958 and 1959. Dept. of Natural Resources, Saskatchewan. 16 pp. Hart, C. M., O. S. Lee, and J. B. Low. 1950. The sharp-tailed grouse in Utah. Utah Dept. of Fish and Game. 79 pp. Marshall, W. H. and M. S. Jenson. sharp-tailed grouse in Utah. 1937. Winter and spring studies of the J. Wildl. Mgmt., 1(1):84-99. Scott, J. W. 1950. A study of the phylogenetic or comparative behavior of three species of grouse. Ann. N. Y. Acad. of Science, 51(6):10621073. Prepared by: Glenn E. Rogers Senior Game Biologist Approved by: Laurence E. Riordan Assistant Director, Research Date: April, 1964 Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator Printed February, Wayne W. Sandfort Chief, Game Research 19(:5 �-335- JOB COMPLETION RESEARCH PROJECT REPORT SEGMENT State of COLORADO Project No. Game Bird Survey W-37- R-16 ~~~~~-------------Job No. 13 Work Plan No. Title of Job: Sharp-tailed Grouse Production Period Covered: April 1, 1963, through March 4 Survey 31, 1964 ABSTRACT Although travel records since 1958 through sharp-tailed grouse brood range had indicated the infeasibility of using vehicle transects to determine production, specific sharp-tailed grouse brood transects were not tested until 1963. On 323.4 miles of transect with travel staggered through all daylight hours, only one brood was observed. Intensive foot travel using trained dogs is necessary to obtain sharp-tailed grouse production information. Present conditions and manpower will not allow intensive studies in Colorado. Recommendations: It is recommended that efforts to determine reproduction in sharp-tailed grouse be discontinued. Records of sharp-tailed grouse sighted while studying sage and blue grouse reproduction indicated that these birds would not be observed with road counts. Work in 1963 in the Hayden and Uncompahgre areas confirmed this data. Objectives: (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) Standardize methods for ascertaining annual sharp-tailed grouse production. Establish permanent, representative production count routes in all Colorado sharp-tailed grouse range. Instruct other Department personnel in a standardized production count procedure. Prepare forms and record books for systematic recording of information. Eventually turn over sharp-tailed production survey work to management. Techniques Used: Sample production transects were selected and traveled in Routt and Mesa counties. Observations in regards to miles traveled, environment, and movement were recorded for each bird sighted. �-33ESHARP-TAILED GROUSE PRODUCTION SURVEY Glenn E. Rogers Records have been kept of all travel through sharp-tailed grouse range since 1958 as studies were conducted on reproduction of sage and blue grouse. Although habitat requirements of the 3 grouse species are not identical, there are many areas where overlap oceurs. A 10-mile section of the blue grouse transect on the Uncompahgre Plateau of good sharp tail habitat, and the Elkhead and Twenty-mile sage gr0use brood routes are almost entirely within sharp-tailed grouse range. Besides these 3 areas, others in Mesa and Moffat counties are partially through sharptail range. However, not until 1963 were specific sharp-tailed grouse brood transects tested. Methods: During 1963, 323.4 miles were traveled during the first 2 weeks of August on specific potential brood areas in Mesa and Routt counties. Travel was staggered through all daylight hours from daybreak to dark. The vehicle was driven at between 15 and 20 miles per hour until birds were sighted. After sighting, the immediate area was walked until all birds had flushed. Information including mileage, vegetation, time, weather, altitude, sex and age of birds was recorded. Results: Only one sharptail brood consisting of a hen and 4 young was observed on August 6 at 8:19 a.m. The brood was mov~ng from a patch of sage, willows, and serviceberry across the raod towards an irrigation reservoir. The elevation was 7,150 feet with hills rising another 500 feet on 2 sides. Only one other sharptail was observed on the tr~nsects, an adult the same morning at 8:32 a.m., 3.6 miles below the brood sighting. This bird was dusting in the road. Vegetation on both sides was short sage interspersed with grass. The weather was sunny, warm (840), and with a 2-5 mile-an-hour wind from the northwest. From review of literature, it appears that sharp-tailed grouse production information can only be 'obtained through intensive foot travel with trained dogs on limited areas. Colorado's large conservation officer districts, limited sharp-tailed grouse densities and hunting pressures precludes intensive production census work at this time. Evaluation and Recommendations: Recortl'sof sharp-tailed grouse sighted from 1958 through 1962 while studying sage grouse and blue grouse reproduction indicated that these birds would not be observed with road counts. Work in 1963 in the Hayden and Uncompahgre areas confirmed this data. �-337- Efforts to determine reproduction in sharp-tailed grouse should be discontinued. Population trend information will need to be based on dancing ground counts and harvest checks. Prepared by: Glenn E. Rogers Senior Game Biologist Date: April, 1964 rTi~t8d February, 1965 Approved by: Laurence E. Riordan Assistant Director, Research Ferd C. K1einschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator Wayne W. Sandfort Chief, Game Research ��-339- JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO ------~~~--------------- Project No. W-37-R-17 ~~~~~---------13 Work Plan No. Title of Job: Game Bird Survey Job No. 5 Sharp-tailed Grouse Hunter Checks Period Covered: April 1, 1963, through March 31, 1964 ABSTRACT Split hunting seasons, combined with sage grouse, were established for Colorado in 1963. Moffat and the western half of Routt counties were opened from August 17 to 19 while the remainder of the state (west of U.S. Highway 85-87) was open from September 14 to 16. The aggregate bag and possession limits were 2 and 4 for the early season and 3 and 6 for the late season. The average yearly harvest for the past 9 years is estimated at 588 sharptails. Concentrated efforts in Routt County and on the Uncompahgre Plateau during the opening 2 days of each season resulted in checking only 14 sharp-tailed grouse. Most of these birds were killed incidentally by individuals hunting blue and sage grouse. The 8 males checked averaged 743.2 grams whole weight while the 6 females averaged 644.6 grams. Present length of seasons and light hunting pressures do not appear detrimental to sharp-tailed grouse populations. Recommendations: The number of sharp-tailed grouse hunters checked was inadequate for management purposes. Efforts to obtain harvest data through check stations should be discontinued. However, roadblocks to check sharptailed grouse hunters should be operated in the Hayden and Uncompahgre areas in 1964 as part of the summarization project. Objectives: (1) Determine success of hunters during the open season. (2) Collect various data on sharp-tailed grouse, which may include: (a) crops for food habit analysis; (b) weights; (c) incidence of parasitism; (d) molting characteristics; (e) sex and age ratios; (f) hunting pressure; and (g) hunting methods. Techniques Used: Instructions and forms were prepared to check sharp-tailed grouse hunters. Road blocks were established in the Hayden and Uncompahgre areas and all hunters were stopped and checked. �-340- SHARP-TAILED GROUSE lillNTERCHECKS Glenn E. Rogers A split season was held on sharp-tailed grouse in 1963. Moffat County and the western half of Routt County were opened for the taking of sage and sharp-tailed grouse from August 17 through 19. The aggregate bag limit with sage grouse was set at 2 birds with a possession limit of 4. The season for the remainder of the state (west of U.S. Highway 85-87) was opened from September 14 through 16. The bag and possession limit was 3 and 6, again in an aggregate with sage grouse. Shooting hour.s for both seasons was from sunrise to sunset. Since 1955, the estimated kill of sharp-tailed grouse, determined through random hunter questionnaires, has been grouped by Grieb and Hunter (Rogers 1964) with sage grouse. A general estimate by the regional game managers indicates 5 per cent of this combined kill may be sharp-tailed grouse. This percentage would signify an average yearly kill of 588 sharp tails in Colorado for the past 9 years. My work during the past hunting season would indicate that this may be a maximum rather than a minimum figure. Methods: During the August season, the best sharp-tailed grouse areas opened for hunting were north and south of the town of Hayden in western Routt County. Very few hunters were found in either area so arrangements were made with Wildlife Conservation Officers Harold Overmeyer and Harold Wixson for a continuous patrol and field checks of all hunters. A combination of field checks and roadblocks was used during the September season on the Uncompahgre Plateau. Besides being one of the better sharptailed grouse areas, the Uncompahgre region had been checked in 1961 and 1962 in the same manner primarily for blue grouse. Work on this area allowed for a 3-year comparison of the sharptail harvest and hunting pressure. Results: The majority of the hunters during the early season were concentrated in the Twenty-mile sage grouse-sharp tail area southeast of Hayden. Most of the hunters checked were hunting sage grouse with only 3 groups (7 hunters) concentrating on killing sharptails. Twenty-four hours of checking yielded checks on 3 adult male sharptails and a knowledge that 4 more birds, a total of 7 sharptails, had been killed. A heavy rain opening day and foggy conditions the second (Sunday) morning may have deterred hunters and also may have lowered hunting success. Comparable checks at the Cedar Mountain sage grouse trend check station, located 30 miles northwest, showed hunting pressure down 9 per cent and hunting success down 41 per cent for these same 2 days. The total grouse hunting pressure for the Uncompahgre area was about the same in 1963 as in 1962; but both years were down 35 per cent from 1961. The kill and hunting pressure on sharptails in 1963 was down slightly from 1962, but above 1961. In all 3 years the kill and hunting pressure was light averaging 10 per cent of that on blue grouse. No sharptails were checked in 1961. �-341- In 1962, 10 hunters hunted 18 hours to kill 12 sharptails; in 1963, 7 hunters hunted 47 hours to kill 6 sharptails. All birds (14 total, 9 during 1963) checked in 1963 were molting the first or second primaries (distal) which should indicate they were adult birds (Ammann 1944). However, 3 birds had bursa measurements of 3, 7, and 8 mm. Although the sample is extremely small, it is unusual if young are not represented in a kill. Weights were taken of all birds checked and, when possible, both whole- and field-dressed weights were obtained. Birds field dressed lost an average of 10 per cent of their whole weight on 3 samples, 2 males and 1 female. The 8 males averaged 743.2 grams whole weight while the 6 females averaged 644.6 grams. Evaluation and Recommendations: Obtaining enough data for an adequate sample is the main difficulty in any study of Colorado's sharp-tailed grouse. Any large scale analysis, such as a random hunter questionnaire, is handicapped by inability of the hunter to distinguish between grouse species and sampling difficulties. The sharp-tailed grouse are warier, fewer in number, and harder to find than the sage and blue grouse in most areas of the state. Areas with known high sharptail densities are on private land and the,owners are reluctant to allow the birds to be shot. Several ranchers north of Hayden wanted sage grouse removed as they occasionally wallow down alfalfa and wheat. They requested, however, that sharp-tailed grouse not be killed. The present type and length of hunting season does not appear detrimental to sharp-tailed grouse numbers. Any additional emphasis in the way of publicity or restoration projects might make some restrictions necessary in areas of limited acreage. I do not believe that the harvest is large enough in any area of Colorado to justify the establishment of a trend check station. Although much information is needed on hunting pressure, total kill, and kill by sex and age class, the cost would be high for the quantity of data obtained. Prepared by: Glenn E. Rogers Senior Game Biologist Date: April 1964 Printed February, 1965 Approved by: Laurence E. Riordan Assistant Director, Research Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator F:",yneW. Sandfort Chiei:,Game Research �� https://cpw.cvlcollections.org/files/original/4cccdc7120be5dbb228e0dacd8335fb6.pdf d6681f02e6197f0379bf1cae537cfda8 PDF Text Text -343- JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO --------~~~~---------- Project No. W-37-R-17 Work Plan No. 14 Game Bird Survey Job No. 1 Title of Job: Inventory of greater prairie chickens Period Covered: March 22, 1963 through September 6, 1963. Personnel: Keith Evans, Forest Recreation and Wildlife Conservation senior students from Colorado State University, Professors Dr. Ronald A. Ryder and Dr. Douglas L. Gilbert and Game, Fish and Parks Department employees Harold M. Swope, Francis L. Waugh, Donald M. Hoffman, Warren D. Snyder, William Martin, William Jones, and Charles Loveless. ABSTRACT This is the final report of a two year study (April 3 - September 15, 1962, and March 22 - September 6, 1963) in Yuma County, leading to a Master of Science degree. The first segment of this report is in the October 1963, Game Research Report (Part Two), pp. 203-209. Twenty-seven greater prairie chicken booming grounds were censused during the period from March 22, 1963, to May 18, 1963. The grounds were in the same general area as during the surveys in 1952 and 1962. From one to 50 birds were observed on the grounds -- averaging seven. An extensive census was conducted on April 30, 1963. During this effort 165 birds were located on 26 display grounds for an average of 6.35 per ground. The birds observed, based on the area covered during this census, averaged 1.29 per square mile. The peak of display activity appeared to occur on April 12, when 50 prairie chicken were observed on the trend count booming ground. Recommendations: Routine counts of greater prairie chickens on mapped display grounds should be made each spring. An effort should be made to locate new booming grounds. More research should be done on census methods for the greater prairie chicken. Research also needs to be done on the �-34/~- movements of this species. This would help determine the frequency of a bird visiting a display ground and would determine if a single bird will visit more than one display ground during one mating season. A food habits study on the greater prairie chicken should be conducted in this area. Objectives: (1) To determine past distribution chicken in Colorado. (2) To locate, map, and describe display greater prairie chicken populations. (3) To determine annual prairie chickens. (4) To record data on locations of display census within permanent record books. (5) To turn over routine surveys to the Game Management Division at a future date. changes of the greater prairie grounds of current in populations of greater grounds and Techniques Used: The peripheries of the range presently reported for this species were intensively searched. Fieldmen of the State Game, Fish, and Parks Department, and other land-use agencies, were interviewed and wherever possible reports of unusual interest were checked in the field. Early morning surveys were conducted by automobile and on foot to locate spring display grounds of the greater prairie chicken, and to determine the following: (1) Shifts in location of display grounds by comparing maps drawn by Warren Snyder in the spring of 1962 with maps showing display ground locations in the spring of 1963; (2) population trend, by comparing the number of greater prairie chickens visiting the display grounds in 1963 with the number that visited the grounds in 1962; and (3) population densities (present, rare, and absent) within the range of the greater prairie chicken. This information was used to select study plots for Job 2, Ecology of the greater prairie chicken. Census. -- Early morning surveys were conducted by automobile and on foot to locate spring display grounds of the greater prairie chicken in Colorado. This method involved driving along known roads from one-half hour before sunrise until about two hours after sunrise, stopping every one-half mile to listen for the "boo~" of the greater prairie chicken. The display grounds were approached on foot to obtain a count of the birds visiting the ground as they flushed. The location of the grounds was marked on a county map with a scale of one-half inch per mile. These grounds were accurately mapped and described for future reference. Where possible, the sex ratio of birds visiting the grounds was also obtained. A blind was constructed in 1963 on the largest display ground mapped by Warren Snyder in the spring of 1962. The blind, eight feet by four feet and about six feet high, was constructed with a frame of two-inch by four-inch �pine boards covered with canvas. Slits were cut in the canvas to form holes for observations. Activity trend count data were obtained by visiting this display ground (NE~, Section 13, Township 3 North, Range 43 West) every third morning through the month of April. By obtaining a count of the birds, by sex, the date of the peak of the booming season was obtained. . On April 30, 1963, an extensive census was conducted with the help of other Department of Game, Fish and Parks personnel and the senior Forest Recreation and Wildlife Conservation students and two professors from Colorado State University. Nine pre-mapped transects were run in the sandhills of Yuma County just north of Wray. The transects averaged 14.2 miles each and covered most of the main roads in the area. Occupants of each car started the transect at 4:30 a.m., and stopped everyone-half mile to listen for booming. Each car contained a driver (Game, Fish and Parks personnel or professor) and several students. When booming was heard, a student was left to locate, census, and map the booming ground as the car moved on. After the transect was run, the driver returned along the route and picked up the students. The transects were believed to cover all active booming grounds within onehalf mile on each side of the road. The total area sampled Was 127.5 square miles, out of about 330 square miles of suitable habitat in the area. The transects were located as follows: 1. Start at Laird and go north five miles, to Highway #34. LEFT OUT. then west one mile and south 2. Start at correction line on Highway #51, 19 miles north ofWray, and go east 10 miles; then turn south until you meet transect number 3. 3. Start one and one-half miles east of Laird and go north nine miles; then turn west on an unimproved dirt road for one and one-half miles; then proceed on north until you meet transect number 2. 4. Start at southwest corner of Section 36, Township 3 North, Range 43 West, and go north on an unimproved dirt road to first graded road running east and west; then turn east until you reach a road running north and south; then turn around and proceed to Highway 1/:51. 5. Start on Highway #51, six and one-half miles north of Wray, at Kitzmiller ranch sign, and go west one-fourth mile to old highway; then proceed north, taking the east fork in the road just north of the correction line and go as far as ·time allows. 6. Start on Highway #51, six and one-half miles north of Wray, at Kitzmiller ranch sign, with transect number 5, and go south three miles on Highway #51; then turn east on winding road for 13 miles. The transect ends when this road connects with a road running north and south. 7. Start at road that runs west from Highway #51, sixteen miles north of Wray, and go for two and one-half miles; then turn north and go LEFT OUT. as far as time allows. �-346- 8. Start at southwest corner of Section 31, Township 5 North, Range 42 West, (Alvin), and go north four miles; then turn west for three miles; then take road running northwest, to end of sandhill-type vegetation. LEFT OUT. 9. Start at southwest corner of Section 25, Township 3 North, Range 45 West, and proceed north on unimproved road as far as time allows. 10. Start on west side of Section 29, Township 3 North, Range 45 west (Conrad ranch), and go north on an unimproved dirt road for about five miles; then turn west for one mile; then back south; finally cutting west to the Eckley road. 11. Start at Wray Clubhouse (Section 13, Township 2 North, Range 45 West) and go north for three and one-half miles; then east one mile, south one-half mile, east two miles; then turn north and follow winding road north and west until it meets with a north-south road. 12. Start at Highway #34, about eight miles west of Wray (west border of Section 35, Township 2 North, Range 45 West) and go north and west on main road until you come to a cattle guard. Findings: Past and present distribution of the greater pra1r1e chicken in Colorado was reported in the October 1963, Game Research Report,pp. 203-209. Twenty-seven booming grounds were censused during the period from March 22, 1963, to May 18, 1963. The grounds were in the same general area as during the surveys in 1952 and 1962, and many of the grounds were the same as those mapped in 1962. The grounds contained from one to 50 birds per ground, for an average of 7.0 birds. On April 30, 1963, an extensive census was conducted. from nine transect routes are summarized in Table 1. The data collected Activity trend count data showed the peak of booming to be on April 12, 1963 (See Table 2). These data were used to project population numbers by assuming that all the booming grounds of the area followed the same trend. A total of 49 booming grounds were censused in 1962 and 1963. All the booming grounds were located in the sandhills of Yuma County, north of Wray, Colorado. The number of prairie chickens found on each strutting ground, and the changes in population encountered in 1962 compared with 1963, are reported in Table 3. Prairie chicken numbers were found to be so low that the original objectives to compile permanent record books and develop a routine survey system for management were abandoned. At current population levels prairie chickens appear to be of little management significance in Colorado. Realistic prospects for bringing the birds back to former levels are practically nil. �Table 1. -- Display ground transect routes run on April 30, 1963. Transect Number Miles Omitted ~2.b 20.5 19.0 18.5 12.5 Omitted Omitted 12.5 10.0 13.0 9.5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Driver Mr. Loveless Mr. Hoffman Mr. Evans Mr. Jones Dr. Ryder 2 2 7 2 2 16 Mr. Martin Mr. Snyder Mr. Swope Mr. Waugh 4 2 5 0 28 15 18 8 58 5 17 o 26 TOTAL 127.0 2.9 AVERAGE 14.2 Average Number of Birds Per Ground = 6.35 Average Number of Displaying Birds per Square Mile = 1.29 Table 2. Number of Birds on Display Ground Number of Grounds 165 18.3 -- Activity trend count conducted on NE\, section 13, township 3 north, range 43 west of the 6th principle meridian. Date April 2, 1963 April 5, 1963 April 8, 1963 April 12, 1963 April 14, 1963 April 17, 1963 April 20, 1963 April 24, 1963 April 30, 1963 May 1, 1963 May 18, 1963 Number of Males Number of Females Total 22 23 0 4 22 27 26 25 26 25 22 24 5 7 4 50 30 33 29 22 28 21 24 ° °° 28 unclassified 21 24 �-348- Table 3. -- Greater prairie chicken booming ground locations, in Yuma County, Colorado. Location SW~ Sec. 7 T3N R42W SW~ Sec. 31 T3N R42W SE~ Sec. 33 T3N R42W NE~ Sec. 4 T2N R42W SE~ Sec. 4 T2N R42W SE~ Sec. 21 T2N R42W NW~ Sec. 33 T5N R43W NW~ Sec. 33 T5N R43W SW~ Sec. 34 T5N R43W NW~ Sec. 1·T4N R43W SE~ Sec. 11 T4N R43W NW~ Sec. 33 T4N R43W NE~ Sec. 13 T3N R43W SW~ Sec. 17 T3N R43W SW~ Sec. 18 T3N R43W SE~ Sec. 21 T3N R43W SW~ Sec. 21 T3N R43W NE~ Sec. 23 T3N R43W SW~ Sec~ 23 T3N R43W SW~ Sec. 24 T3N·R43W *SE~ Sec. 25 T3N R43W SE~ Sec. 25 T3N R43W SE~ Sec. 26 T3N R43W NW~ Sec. 31 T3N R43W SW~ Sec. 5 T2N R43W SW~ Sec. 32 T4N R44W NE~ Sec. 1 T3N R44W SW~ Sec. 2 T3N R44W SE~ Sec. l3 T3N R44W oJ~ Sec. 21 T3N R44W NW~ Sec. 28 T3N R44W NW~ Sec. 31 T3N R44W NW~ Sec. 1 T2N R44W *oJ( Sec. 7 T2N R44W SW~ Sec. 16 T2N R44W Sec. 18 T2N R44W ** ~'(oJ( Sec. 18 T4N R45W NE~ Sec. 19 T4N R45W NW~ Sec. 27 T4N R45W *i( Sec. 27 T4N R45W NW~ Sec. 12 T3N R45W SW~ Sec. 15 T3N R45W 'f( oJri( 1962 Date Number Censused of Birds 4/11 4/10 4/9 4/10 8 4 5 5 1963 Date Number Censused of Birds Extensive Census April 30, 1963 Number of Birds 5/18 5 9 4/6 20 7 4/6 9 i 8 8 4/26 2 4/13 4/23 4/23 4/17 28 3 10 3 4/16 4/13 4/15 4/15 5/8 4/16 4/12 3/26 3/26 4 1 10 8 50 5 10 4/13 8 -- 4 5 28 6 1 1 8 9 4/20 3 4/13 5/9 2 4 4/20 4/19 3 5 3/28 3/26 3 1 4/19 4/18 4/i8 8 4 '7 4/22 2 3/26 10 4/18 1 5/9 5/8 4 3 3 2 6 2 8 1 2 3 5 3/28 3 14 5/8 5/8 4 5 6 4/4 South of other booming ground fn same section. Not mapped. 7 �-349- Table 3. -- Greater prairie chicken booming ground locations, in Yuma County, Colorado. 1962 Date Number Censused of Birds Location *SW~ Sec. 15 T3N R4SW .SW~ Sec. 16 T3N R4SW NW~ Sec. 18 T3N R45W NE~ Sec. 19 T3N R4SW SW~ Sec. 2 T2N R4SW NW~ Sec. 12 T2N R45W SE~ Sec. 12 T2N R45W 5/7 4/24 7 4/19 4/18 3 3 TOTALS AVERAGE * ** 8 1963 Date Number Censused of Birds 4/4 4/4 3/24 4/22 3/27 3/25 3/23 144 5.76 Extensive Census April 30, 1963 Number of Birds 3 3 1 8 2 7 2 189 7.0 6 9 7 165 6.35 South of other booming ground in same section. Not mapped. Appendix A contains the maps of greater prairie chicken display grounds located in the spring of 1963. Prepared by: Keith Evans Date: April. 1964 Pr i rrtcd February, 1965 Approved by: Harold M. Swope Associate Wildlife Researcher Wayne W. Sand fort Game Research Chief �-350- APPENDIX A LEGEND 1963 Greater Prairie Chicken Booming Ground Maps ~.--~K~--~~ Barbed wire fence -tJI14--- Cattle guard Old road not presently ------- - --- Unimproved used road Improved gravel road Improved paved road (5 Windmill ~ Greater prairie chicken booming c::::? Tree group ®D\®.o.® '01' 'Of Praa..r i,e d og town • Occupied o Unoccupied ~ building building Section corner stake S2 t "J'iI 5+15 Quarter section corner stake Section center stake ground �-J51- o '-I -,l ••••. II 1 ~, j'lcKinn49Y ~, c' •t l.on . uee .7 , uanch , Yuma County, Co Lor-ado , N 166 F''''Ct!!.s o lJliles ~ 1/ II // ~ ~~ 'I 1/ " 'f II 1-\........--- ••. --------.".......-.-----.,( Scale: April 30, 196): 8 Inches = 1 I'wd.1e NiQe un~lassifi~d pralrle chickens were flushed f'r-orn this ,r,round. �-352- o ,,' C' t l.on . I~l , 'l'ZN , !142VJ, 6 PM. ,..•. ~. .1/',~, Jec ~__ Se'tmrd Ranch ~ Yuma County, Colorado -- --- - -::::-::. ':::' .::: ::: ::': :::"".=. -e- "::' ~ \ ~ \ ~ 7/;:::: == ~ ~ ./... // ~ " N \ town " \\ \1 \\ \ " a Native hay Grass Type Prairie dog ~ "'- -c -c' # Sage brush type ~ /"",~ ~ t- o JUles Scale: g Inches April 6, 1963: = 1 Mile Nine unclassified nrairie chickens flushed from the p:round. �-353- s.w. 1/4, R0C. 34, T5N, and N.W. 1/4 Sec. 1 'T4N, rr43~, of the 6th P.M. North ground: HagJ!.en-bothamRanch~ Yuma Go. Colo. South Ground: Kinnie Ranch, Yuma County, IJoiorado. -------------------------------,..' " " " \I ,. II 1 ~Number ., I' ," . "1\ 'I I I I I , , :;).:l, 5' ro..<..QS I , t) I I , I , I • I / \ - Correction Line Road r ) Hay l"ield liumber 2 ~ ~ -- • c •.u:aa ==::J, Ii ~- , i-n Les -.---.--------- Apri 1 IS, ----------------------------_._----- 1 9f, 3 : ~umbpr 1, 4 males. ! ulnl:,or2, 1 mn I.e ._--4,-- �-354Gio:::P'l'i,rt etLl IRlj; N. W. 1/4, ChICKRN Fi0Cnr,HJG GROUND 33, l'5N, R43W, 6th Section ~1. Yuma Coubty, Colorado. Vag.es Ranch, N~ 1 II N 1"'------.."..----..-1 /I 1/ /1 /1 II " II II " /I I' I' o I " l"lilcs ~- ',-'- ,; " " " I, i Scale: April JYlay Z, 8 Inches = 1 Mile )0, 1963: N~ 1, eight birds 196): flushed. N~ Z, eight birds flushed. N~ 1, ·no birds present. birds flushed. N~ 2, eieht �-35)- Gi'tEATEH PiiAUUE CHICKEN EOOMING GROUND N.W. 1/4, Section 33, T4N, R43W, 6 PM. Dodge Ranch, Yuma County, Colorado. n. N \I ,/ 1/ 'I 1/ /I II I' II /1 II I, " 1/ II • "'S- II " , 4 Miles II II II ,I II " \1 '" ..:: =- = == :::-- :: -::.. .... ," \1 1\ \1 \1 \1 \1 1\ \\ ••.•...••.... Pasture Land ::::- :::-::-,\ " 'I Cultivated Land \\ Scale: g Inches ~ 1 Nile April 16, 1963: Ei.e:htmale prairie chickens. April 30, 1963: I'-'ive male prairie chickens. �-356GREATER PHJ\IlUE S.W. 1// •., Section Bledsoe CHICKEN BOOMING GROUND 17, R4JW, T.3N, 6 PM. Ranch, Yuma County, Colorado •••• o "i- Miles Scale: 4 Inches ~ 1 Mile rJlarch 26, 1963: Five unclas:::;ifiedprairie chickens flushed from ground. �-357- . S.E. 1/1 •., Section 18, R43W, T3N, 6 PI4. Bledsoe Ranch, Yuma County, Colorado N ~ W o . "if. J.ililes Scale: 4 Inches narch 26, 1963: s 1 Mile Ten unclassified prairie chickens were flushed, eight males returned within 30 minutes. �-358- s.v. 1/4, Bledsoe Sectlon ~nch, 21, T3N, R43\'i, 6th PM. Ywna eounty, Colorado. N o , "i" Miles = == -= -=: -=,,::: =- : i: -::: \' \\ \' Scale: April 8 Inches = 1 Mile 13, 1963: Eight unclassified were flushed pralrle chickens from this ground. �-359GfllATER CHIGt~E1J BClOMING OUOUND PP.~IIUE 23, T)N, R43W, 6th Pl4. l~.E. 1/1" Section McKinney Ranch, Yuma County, ~olorado. ~:: ~II II II • I' II II " I' I, II II II I' II II tl II II II o S~ Yards II I' I, II " I. II II II II Ii 'I I, . ,I " ---- -- -" If Scale: 16 Inches - I Mile. April 30, 1963: Six unclassified prairie chickens were flushed from this ground. 110 �-360- S •.E. ;"/4 S'::!(;.l; 25. and T3N, 1{43~V t 6 vhPM: s.u, 1/4, S~C. 26, McKinney Hanch, Yuma Gounty, ~olorado. Section 26 Section 25 hayfield , o T I 2" Miles Scale: 4 Inches = 1 Mile. April 30, 196): N~ 1 had eight prairie chickens. N~ 2 had one prairie chicken. N~ 3 had one prairie chicken. �-361PP•.t\jRJ!5; CHj"CKEN BOOMING GROl.WD u , \.if. 1/4, Soction 31, T31I, R43W J 6th Gl"ovea Ranch, One •.••. ,/~ T. • H' Yuma County, PM. L:olorado. L -''''''''''Y 51 fJliles Scale: 8 inches = 1 Mile. April 30, 1963: !'lineunclassified prairie chickens were flushed fro~ ground. IVlay 6, 1963: Seven males were on the ground. �-362- ,," .1,:')~, II F, S.:··.( S·,•'~• '..:(;tJ.Ol. I GrOVI?S H.anc~l, 5 , T ...• "'J n" °43 tlI, 6th .:'.1', Yuma County, PH• 1.)' CoLor-ado , I' \1 \I 1\ II II /1 II II II 1\ I, II N /I I' II /1 1/ 1\ II II ,I I' Ii (\ II " I' o I .,I t T Miles Scale: 8 Inches )\pril 13, 1963: '1'wo ms.Le s = 1 Mile on this ground. �-363GHEATt:R f~,~!'.lRIZ CHICF.EN BOO~nNG GROUND N.E. ~, Section 1., T3N, R44W, ~th P.M. Bledsoe Ranch, Yuma County, Colorado -=-= = = -.::.====::.=-- =..:.-==-::.::. • N o • :f Miles Scale: 4 Inches ~ 1 Mile. ADri1 )0, 1963: Tnree unclassified prairie chickens were flushed from the ground. May 22, 1963= . '1''',0 males on this ground. �-364GREATER. PRAJRl.E CHICKEN 1/4, Section S.I;[. School ,Section, 16, BOOMING GR.OUND R44W, 6 PM. T2.N, r uma Count.y , Colorado. " /.," /1 " /1 " 1/ II II o , ~ Miles ,n'prl·l • rs :) , Sc~le: 8 Inches = 1 hile 10,. 63., One maI ec; observed boomi nr; L,.• �-365GR1·:ATEH PfiA IRIE CHICKEN BOOlUNG GROUND S.w. 1/4, Section 15, T3N, R45W, 6 ~~. Kitzmiller Ranch, Yuma County, (,;olorado \1 ~ II II II _-__ _---.:::-_ ;p:;;"-::- - - = ~7- - - s+i;::::: = ::..::..::...:: q 1/ II 1 1/2 miles to main road junetion • 1/ A 1/ 1/ /1 /1 II '/ '/ 1/ b II 1/ N /1 II N<?2 II (//)). 1/ ~ IJ 1/ 'f II 1/ 1/ 1/ /1 1/ o , T .,-, Miles Scale: April 4, 1963= 8 Inches = 1 Mile N<?l Seven unclassified were flushed prairie chickens N?2 Threo unclas~ifi~d prairie chickens were flushect. �-366- '3.1"'. 1/4, Secti,on 16, T3N, H.45W, 6 PM. Ranch, Yuma County, Colorado Kitzmiller 1/ ~ II ,f ft // ~ ~70 p"'<~s ~ N t o Miles )1"'·~ __ Trees Scale: April 4, 1963: 4 Inches = 1 Mile NOI had one l lale N02 had two r·.ales l �-3('7- :I/llli;}TI1 Tu(-~11 Ranch ~ Yun.a County, \' o ~tj ,\ ",\ ,'" "''lOIIE<l;JI:;ac;r~:--'------'' / I \' '1/ II -S- Colo. \1 1\ I~1iles n II '; 1/ N II If /1 '/ 'I I} It /I II II I' "II I; II II 't I ~ II ,I /1 II 1\ 1/ II II ~ /f 1\ II II /1 II II II II II If I' 1/ II 1/ 1/ \\ i/ 1/ /1 /1 J .'1 _,i._ •,,>fI ._--(-._-- ~ 1',./' If .- -.".-------....JL ...•.. ---- .•..-----<'------ _,",_.1 . ----.- .. - ._--- _. -. --. -_._-_ ..-- .... -._- .._ .. _.-._--- .._- -.-.--------- "'-'-"'--'-~-----------_._-.- ��-3E9- JOB COMPLETION RESEARCH State of COLORADO Project No. W-37-R-17 PROJECT REPORT SEGMENT Game Bird Survey Work Plan No. 14 Title of Job: Ecology Period Covered: March 22, 1963 through September Personnel: 2 Job No. of the Greater Prairie Chicken 6, 1963. Keith E. Evans ABSTRACT This is the final report of a two year study (June II-September 30, 1962, and March 22-September 6, 1963) conducted in Yuma County, leading to a Master of Science degree. The first segment of this report is in the October 1963, Game Research Report (Part Two). pp. 193-201. Three study townships were selected representing areas where greater pra1r1e chickens were present (common), absent and rare. Comparisons were made between these areas to ascertain what factor(s) might contribute to the presence or absence of the birds. Climate appeared to be very similar in the areas studied, based on weather records at Wray and Akron. Ibe Wray station has recorded slightly more annual precipitation (18.19 inches) compared with Akron (17.34 inches). Topography in all three areas was found to be very similar, ranging choppy or hummocky to rolling. from Two main soil types, Dune Sand and valentine Sand, cover the majority of all three study areas. The surface soil is loose sand one to two inches deep. The elevational range was so slight (not more than several hundred feet) that it should not eliminate any of the important plants used by prairie chickens in either area. Land use may be the most important factor in limiting numbers and range of the greater prairie chicken in Colorado. There were 550 acres of land under cultivation in the "prairie chickens present" study area, 300 acres cultivated in the "prairie chickens rare" area, and no cultivation where prairie chickens were "absent". �-370- One hundred eighty randomly selected vegetative transects were analyzed. Analysis of variance was used to determine differences between bare ground, shrubs, tall grass, short grass, and litter on the study townships. At the .05 level there was a significant difference between the study areas in the first three categories (bare ground, shrubs, tall grass). A habitat evaluation form was devised and presented. This form was designed to measure the value of an area as suitable habitat. A numerical value was obtained by using a detailed rating of individual habitat elements which in aggregate comprised the range. Recommenda tions : 1. The lack of suitable cover is one of the most important factors in limiting prairie chicken numbers in Colorado. The purchase and management of grassland reserves by the Colorado Department of Game, Fish, and Parks would probably prove to be the most successful method of providing this basic need. Plots, 50 to 100 acres in size, if wellplaced throughout existing rangeland and managed properly, should be adequate for the purpose of increasing the prairie chicken population. In areas where over-grazing is practiced, these grassland reserves should be no more than four miles apart. In areas of well-managed grassland, fewer grassland reserves would be necessary. These grassland reserves should be grazed or mowed on alternate years to control the build-up of excessive litter. An area suitable for controlled grazing should be fenced and should contain one stock tank (windmill). Only half of the area should be grazed or mowed each year, leaving the other half to provide winter cover. Mowing or grazing should not take place until late August or September, after hatching has been completed. 2. Another method of improving cover is through educational programs. The Eastern Colorado Experimental Range Station, north of Akron, Colorado, has several years of data which would be useful to the Colorado Department of Game, Fish, and Parks in designing a grazing method which would be beneficial to the ranchers and to the prairie chickens. With the cooperation of the Eastern Colorado Experimental Range Station, an educational program should be initiated to convince ranchers to decrease the grazing pressure on the range, thus increasing cover. 3. The lack of food in winter is another factor limiting prairie chicken numbers. Grain fields providing winter food should be no farther apart than four miles. In areas where grain fields do not provide suita):>le winter food, food patches should be established. A small portion of the grassland reserve could be planted to a food crop such as corn or sorghum (one acre for each 30 prairie chickens). These food patches should not be grazed and the crop should be left unharvested throughout the winter. The location of food patches should not be changed, as pra1r1e chickens are birds of habit and more readily will enter a field they have frequented the previous year. �-371- 4. A food-habits study for all seasons of the year should be conducted determine the nutritional needs of this species in Colorado. 5. Routine counts of prairie chickens on booming grounds should be made each spring, with an extensive search for new grounds. This is important in determining the population trend of this species. 6. Information on the importance of decimating factors, such as predators, disease, starvation, and accidents, also should be obtained. 7. The movements and reasons for movements of prairie chickens in Colorado should also be studied. This would help determine the frequency of birds visiting booming grounds, and would indicate whether individual birds will visit more than one ground during one mating season. Objectives: (1) (2) (3) Techniques to To relate distribution of the greater prairie chicken to climatic, physiographic, and biotic factors of the environment, including land use. To devise a rating system for evaluating potential prairie chicken habitat. To make recommendations for increasing this species in Colorado. Used: Selection of Study Areas. ~- Ecological factors which might explain the distribution of the greater prairie chickens were studied by comparing this distribution to climatic, topographic, and edaphic data for Colorado. These data were gathered from publications available through the United States Weather Bureau (Climatological Data, Colorado, 1927-1962) and the United States Department of Agriculture (Soil Conservation Service Soil Survey, 1947 and 1963). Other ecological factors studied were vegetative cover and water availability. Vegetative data were analyzed in respect to food, protective cover, and nesting cover requirements. Census and inventory data obtained from the landowner interviews were used to select study areas. Three townships of rangeland were chosen and classified as follows: (1) prairie chickens present, (2) prairie chickens rare, or (3) prairie chickens absent. Twenty~ 40-acre plots per study township were chosen bya random method of plot selection because the areas were fairly uniform in vegetative cover. Using a table of random numbers from Snedecor (1956), I selected 20 sections in each township each to contain a study plot. Then, using the table of random numbers, I selected one 40-acre study plot from each section (Figs. 1, 2, and 3). Township 3 North, Range 43 West of the 6th P.M., was chosen as the intensive study area where prairie chickens were present. This area of sandhill rangeland is located in Yuma County, Colorado, with the southwest corner being �-372- 1 4 3 2 1 5 6 7 8 12 11 10 9 13 14 15 16 2 3 Fig. 1. 40-acre Fig. 3. Fig. 2. One section divided into 40-acre plots. Transects in study plot. 6 5 4 3 2 1 7 8 9 10 11 12 18 17 16 15 14 13 19 20 21 22. 23 24 30 29 28 27 26 25 31 32 33 34 35 36 One township (>2130403.cres) divided into sections. �-31'3- 6~ miles north of Wray. The eastern boundary of the study area is 3% miles west of Nebraska (Dundy County). Census data collected in 1963 disclosed that eight active booming grounds were located in this area. A range fire on this township on June 28, 1963, burned the veget~tion off three study plots. These study plots were moved to the closest site outside the fire area without crossing fences. The vegetation is similar throughout the area and the relocation of plots is believed not to have changed the accuracy of the data (F{g. 4). Township 3 South, Range 45 West of the 6th P.M., was chosen as the intensive study area where prairie chickens were rare. The northeast corner of this area is eight miles south of Vernon, Yuma 'County, Colorado. The eastern boundary is 16 miles west of Kansas (Cheyenne County). This sandhill rangeland slopes toward the Arikaree River which runs through the southern end of the township. There were no booming grounds located in this area in 1963. Jerry Fox and Bill McCoy, ranchers in the area, reported seeing prairie chickens in the area during the spring of 1962; and Leo McCoy, a landowner in the area, reported finding a prairie chicken nest in a sand lovegrass (Eragrostis trichodes) field in 1962. I found fresh prairie chicken droppings and feathers in the area; but did not see any birds (Fig. 5). Township 4 North, Range 54 West of the 6th P~M., was chosen as the intensive study area where prairie chickens were absent. The southeast corner of this township is seven miles north and eight miles west of Akron, Washington County, Colorado. The northern boundary is 3~ miles south of Prewitt Reservoir. This area also is sandhill rangeland, and is very similar to the other two areas in topography. The last report of prairie chickens in the area was in 1960, when a prairie chicken was seen by Bill Dahl at the Eastern Colorado Experimental Range Station, approximately ten miles east of the study area. The ranchers in the study area had not observed prairie chickens for several years (Fig. 6). Vegetative Analysis. -- The step point method of determining major vegetative characteristics was selected for use in this study (Costello and Schwan, 1946). The method consists of recording the plant species encountered under certain points selected by pacing across a study plot. The examiner makes a white mark about 1/8th inch wide on the tip of one shoe sole; then selects a course which is through a part of a typical plant community. To be counted, the basal portion of a plant must be hit by the mark on the shoe. Density, plant composition, percent of bare soil, and percent of area covered with litter are determined from the number of hits (Costello and Schwan, 1946; and National Academy of Science, 1962). Three transects, each one-fourth mile long, were run in each 40-acre square study plot. I recorded "hits" on every second pace, for a total of 100 readings per transect. The transects ran east and west and were five chains apart. Statistical Analysis. -- Significant differences in the density and vegetative composition of the three study townships (prairie chickens present, prairie chickens rare, and prairie chickens absent) were determined by analysis of variance. The categories were bare ground, browse, tall grass, short grass, and litter. It is assumed that if a significant difference occurs at the .05 level, the category checked may affect the distribution or �-374- , , :--~ I tJ c 5" :;, 4 I ( - t --- 0 7 9 I~ ~-- <g " ~ Iq I 1 n tJ - - 0 .:/..<> 1'7 ~~ :t./ r '3() 2." 3.>.. ::....Y r:l 'lS" n - -1 L • • • "3 ~b :>...7 """ H tJ n • • 51 ,1 r D n I'} 15'" I{, n a 33 3'1 ].~ 3~ [ n D Fig. 4. "Prairie chickens present" study township showing location of 40-acre study plots in Township 3 North, Range 43 West, Yuma County, Colorado. �-375- ; 0 c L <I S I .:t ;J tl D ,0 "f <J 7 n 0' I~ r, n D~C '''7 U ~ ~ •• '51 I I~ - If .IJ- 13 1'1 '\ D - u 0 ~~ ~I .:l.~ ~¥ n - -- A". "'''"e(! 3~ J3 0 ::l..1'O ..:l'<l ;z,,'t ':;'0 t 1:2.., If I" u 'I] n L 0 l( n .2..b --== I?;"e r ~U .3S 3'1 •• Y 3b L Fig. 5. "Prairie chickens rare" study township showing location of 40-acre study plots in Township :3 South, Range 45 West, Yuma County, Colorado. �-37(;- / Iy ? . ". 50 U U 3 'f D~ 7 . ., ::t I II;) "0 I~ Is' 11 ~ U / .. ., 11 13 0 r ~ 1"1 :J..'I ;;).3 .:>.:>.. .r r .:10 :l' -'l,t> L ::..9 ::>.7 ~8 [ '. ;)" ,;z~ - 36 - a :J ~, • U 3"'0 []~P .l'f • L :!oS "Prairie chickens absent" study township showing Fig. 6. location of 40-acre st~dy plots in T~wnship 4 No~th, Range 54 West, in Washington County, Colorado. - �-377- presence of pra~r~e chickens. The Null Hypothesis which was tested is that the means of a category (browse, bare ground, grass, and litter) are equal in the three townships (prairie chickens present, rare, and absent). Findings: Climate. -- A summary of United States Weather Bureau climatological data from 1927 to 1960 for Wray, in Yuma County, showed a range in annual precipitation from 30.36 inches in 1941 to 7.92 inches in 1931. The coldest temperature recorded in Wray was -300F in 1936, and the hottest day was 1120F in 1954. The average annual range in temperature is from -16°F to 1050F (U.S. Weather Bureau, 1927-1960). A comparison of ~ythergraphs for the Akron and Wray areas indicates that the average precipitation and average temperature is very similar in both areas (Colorado A and M College, 1952; Fig. 7). The Wray area (prairie chickens present) averages 18.19 inches of pr-ecIp-Lta t Lon per year, with an average mean annual temperature of 50.80F. The Akron area (prairie chickens absent) receives an average of 17.34 inches of precipitation per year, with a mean annual temperature of 48.50F (Colorado A and M College, 1952). In some years there has been considerable difference in the amount of precipitation received by the two areas. In 1962, Wray received a total of 28.46 inches of precipitation, and Akron only 17.79 inches (U.S. Weather Bureau, 1962). Topography. -- The topography in all three study areas is very similar. For the IIprairie chickens presentll area, the topography ranges from "choppy" on the west side to "hummocky" on the east side. In the choppy area some of the hills are about 50 feet higher than the valleys. In the hummocky area the valleys are wider and more level, with the hills rising to about 30 feet above the valley floor. The north end of the "prairie chickens rare" area is "rolling" and the valleys become deeper as they progress southward toward the Arikaree River. The "prairie chickens absent" area is classified as "hummocky" to "sharply rolling," with no definite ridges or valleys running for any great distance. The "prairie chickens absent" area is similar to the less choppy area of the "prairie chickens present" study township. Soil. -- The soils of the sandhills' in northeastern Colorado are very much alike. The surface soil is loose'sand, one to two inches deep, and in most places slightly darkened by organic matter (Colorado A and M College, 1952). The soils in Yuma County, Colorado, have not been mapped, so the soil map from Dundy County, Nebraska, was used for comparison. Dundy County is adjacent to the study township for "prairie chickens present" and the vegetation and soils of the two counties are very much alike. Comparisons were made between the "prairie chickens present" area and the "prairie chickens absent" area only. There are two main soil types covering the majority of the area and present on both sites. One of these is the Dune Sand (stabilized) soil which is light brown and located in areas of sharply rolling topography. Wind-blown sand is the parent material for Dune Sand soil. The other major soil is Valentine Sand, which is grayish-brown in color and located in areas of hummocky topography. The parent soil is wind-blown sand (U.S. Soil Conservation Service, 1963). �-37875 ...,J, , ." \ \ \ A 70 \ ,- \ ,- / J , / J / / / 65 / S '" I / / s / / / / I 60 I M I \ I \ I \ I , I 55 ,, M I I I . 0 I !;t I 50 I 0 I Q) I B I C1I I .~ Q) ~ Q) "" I ~ 45 "",." I E-t I ." I I ." I 40 ." ...- " ." "" ". / , ", "" " I N 35 N M 30 _ _ __ __ Wray, Yuma County, Colorado. Akron, Washington County, Colorado. 250~.~------------~------------------Jr------------------' Fig. 7. Precipitation - inches Hythergraphs contrasting average temperature and average precipitation for Wray, Yuma County, Colorado, and Akron, Washington County, Colorado (Colorado A and M College, 1952). �-379- There are several other soils which represent only a minor percentage of the area. Haxtun Loamy Sand, found in the "prairie chickens absentll area, is very similar to the Dundy soil found in the "pra:Lrie chickens present" area. These soils are dark grayish-brown and of finer texture than the Valentine Sand soil. Haxtun Loamy Sand and Dundy soils are found in the wide valleys where it is nearly level. Elsmere soil is found on the "prairie chickens present" area in a small quantity. Elsmere soils are in the valley'bottoms where the water table is high enough to permit sub-irrigation. This is a dark brown soil (U.S. Soil Conservation Service, 1947 and 1963). Elevation. -- Elevation probably is not a critical" factor in limiting prairie chicken numbers and range in Colorado. The elevation of Wray is 3,537 feet. The elevation of Akron is 4,560 feet. The elevational range is so slight that it should not eliminate any of the important plants used by prairie chickens in either area. Harrington (1954) listed the following elevational ranges of some of the tall grass species in Colorado. Andropogon scoparius Andropogon hallii Calamovilfa longifolia Sporobolus cryptandrus Panicum virgatum 3,500 3,500 3,500 3,500 3,500 to 8,000 to 5,200 to 7,000 to 8,500 to 7,000 feet feet feet feet feet Land Use. -- Agriculture .may be the most important factor in limiting numbers and range of the greater prairie chicken in Colorado. Baker (1953) listed optimum land use for greater prairie chickens in Kansas to be from 62 to 68 percent of an area in grassland and from 16 to 18 percent in feed crops. Baker (1953) listed feed crops as corn, wheat, sorghum, and soybeans. If too much grassland is present, the prairie chickens lack sufficient winter food. There is not enough cover,present for successful nesting and avoidance of predators if too much of the area is cultivated. Examination of aerial photographs showed 550 acres wer e under cultivation in the "prairie chickens present" study area, 300 acres were cultivated in the "prairie chickens rare" area, and there was no cultivation in the "prairie chickens absent" area. Even. on the areas where prairie chickens were present, the cultivated land was not properly interspersed to provide winter food for all locations. Five hundred fifty acres of cultivation per township is less than 2% percent under cultivation. Hamerstrom, Mattson, and Hamerstrom (1957) suggested that food patches be established where no food is available. They believed that these food patches need be no closer than approximately four miles; therefore, four or five should be sufficient in one township (36 sections) of habitat. Prairie chickens tend to concentrat~ in familiar spots winter after winter. Food patches should be located with this in mind and not placed mechanically at fixed intervals. Buckwheat, oats, wheat, and soybeans are eaten, readily; however, these crops must be harvested in the fall and distributed to prairie chicken feeding areas throughout the winter. Standing, unpicked, yellow-dent corn makes the best food patches. One acre of standing corn will feed about 30 prairie �-380- chickens throughout the winter in Wisconsin. A food patch should be large enough to last the entire winter. Hoppers and spike feeders are unsatisfactory except for small isolated flocks of prairie chickens. Hoppers and spike feeders need to be replenished throughout the winter and are often. neglected during bad storms when the birds need winter food the most (Hamerstrom, Mattson, and Hamerstrom, 1957). Vegetative Analysis. -- One hundred eighty randomly selected transects were analyzed, using the step point method of range analysis to determine plant composition and density (Costello and Schwan, 1946). Six of these . transects fell on cultivated land,three in the "prairie chickens present" area, and three in the "prairie chickens rare" are~ (Table 1). Three tran.sects were randomly selected and eliminated from'the 60 transects in the "prairie chickens absent" area, leaving 57 transects for each area on rangeland. Analysis of variance was used to determine differences between bare ground, shrubs,tall grass, short grass, and litter on the study townships. At the .05 level, there was a significant differ,ence between the study areas (prairie chickens present, prairie chickens 'rare, and prairie chickens absent) in the following'categories: bare ground, shrubs, and tall grass (Tables 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6) ",. Vegetative data indicates that prairie chickens in Colorado became scarce as one of the following occurred: the percentage of tall grass decreased; the percentage of bare ground increased; or the percentage of shrubs decreased (Figs. 8 and 9). < Habitat Evaluation. -- Winter food for prairie chickens in Colorado seems to be a primary limiting factor. Cultivated crops are an essential part of the winter diet of prairie chickens, not only in Colorado but over much of the Great Plains. Among the main winter foods are corn in Wisconsin and sorghum in Oklahoma (Hamerstrom, Mattson, and Hamerstrom, 1957; and Jones, 1963). Baker (1953) listed the main prairie chicken foods in Kansas as corn, wheat, sorghum, and soybeans. In areas of light snowfall, such as this portion of Colorado, many of the small grains remain above the snow level, providing food throughout the winter. It is important to have grain fields in an area of winter habitat for prairie chickens in Colorado. Proper interspersion is probably more important than the type of grain; however, it is desirable to have grains with stout stems, such as corn and sorghum.which stand up during heavy snow storms. To be effective, these winter food patches must be left standing and unharvested throughout the winter. Winter food is given an importance of'lO on the habitat evaluation form for this study (Table 7). Under ideal conditions an area could receive 60 points for winter food. It is important to realize that an area might receive a fair or good rating with a complete absence of winter food. It is obvious that prairie chickens could not survive on such an area, but the planting of good food patches could make the area suttable for prairie chickens. �-381- Table 1. -- Vegetative composition and density on praLrLe chicken areas, Yuma County and Washington County, Colorado. % Vegetation on Prairie Chickens Present T3N, R43W % Vegetation' on Prairie Chickens Rare T3S, R45W study % Vegetation on Prairie Chickens Absent T4N, R54W Tall Grass Andropogon hallii Andropogon scoparius Calamovilfa longifolia Eragrostis trichodes Panicum virgatum Sporobolus cryPtandrus 1.63 2.43 4.77 0.05 1.03 4.10 0.73 0.52 1.17 1.08 0.75 5.10 0.02 0.00 2.00 0.00 0~00 3.35 Short Grass Aristida longiseta Bouteloua gracilis Bouteloua hirsuta Buchloe dactyloides Distichlis stricta Muhlenbergia pungens 0.78 9.13 0.98 0.03 0.07 0.48 8.73 0.08 1.12 9.12 0.52 1.22 0.10 0.00 0.02 1. 82 0.02 1.18 1.72 0.77 0.20 0.05 0.80 0.15 0.17 1.15 0.83 0.00 0.43 0.20 0.93 1.65 1.10 Other Grasses Agropyron smithii Carex sp. Stipa comata Paspalum stramineum Other grasses Annual 0.42 0.82 0.61 Forbs Ambrosia elatior Amaranthus retroflexus Chenopodium album Helianthus petiolaris Other annual forbs Perennial 0.10 0~30 0.05 0.05 0.13 0.43 0.68 1.42 0.00 0.03 0.25 1.00 Forbs and Half-shrubs Artemisia dracunculus Artemisia gnaphaloides Evolvolus nuttalianus Ipomoea leptophylia Penstemon ambiguus Psoralea sp. Other perennial forbs 0.12 0.10 0.28 0.02 0.73 0.17 0.87 0.13 0.42 0.28 0.23 0.02 0.00 0.38 0.73 0.49 0.00 0.07 0.07 0.08 0.03 �-.382- Table 1. -- Vegetative composition and density on prairie chicken study areas, Yuma County and Washington County, Colorado. (Continued) % % % Vegetation on Prairie Chickens Present T3N, R43W Vegetation on Prairie Chickens Rare T3S, R45W Vegetation on Prairie Chickens Absent T4N, R54W 3.45 0.45 0.53 0.05 0.00 0.00 3.10 0.43 0.30 0.00 0.17 0.08 2.62 0.73 0.18 0.00 0.00 0.00 50.42 30.55 3.37 4.48 6.18 5.00 57.53 24.75 3.37 4.03 5.32 5.00. 65.70 19.30 4.52 3.53 6.95 0.00 Shrubs Artemisia filifolia Opuntia polycantha Yucca glauca Prunus besseyi Gutierrezia sarothrae Salix sp. TOTALS Bare Ground Grass Forb Shrubs Litter Cultivated land Table 2. -- Comparison of bare ground density by analysis of variance between study areas. Source of Variation Degrees of Freedom Mean Square Lot Means Individuals 2 168 2,306.00 41.65 Table 3. -- Comparison of shrub density by analysis of variance between study areas. Source of Variation Degrees of Freedom Mean Square Lot Means Individuals 2 168 21.5 5.3 �-383- Table 4. -- Comparison of tall grass density by analysis study areas. of variance between Source of Variation Degrees of Freedom Mean Square Lot Means Individuals 2 168 1,224.00 21.28 Table 5. -- Comparison of short grass density by analysis between study areas. of variance Source of Variation Degrees of Freedom Mean Square Lot Means Individuals 2 168 20.00 31.22 Table 6. -- Comparison of litter density by analysis study areas. of variance between Source of Variation Degrees of Freedom Mean Square Lot Means Individuals 2 168 22.5 12.9 �-384- Table 7. -- Greater pra~r~e chicken habitat evaluation rating form for Northeastern Colorado. Characteristic (Quality) I. Win ter Food A. Grain fields more than six miles apart. The rest of the area being primarily grassland. B. C. D. II. Value (Quantity) 10 o Grain fields less than six miles apart, but not covering over 5% of the area. The rest of the area being primarily grassland. 2 Grain fields less than six-miles apart, with from 5-10% of the area covered, or over 10% of the area in grain fields that are from 4 to 6 miles apart. The rest of the area being primarily grassland. 4 Grain fields less than four miles apart and covering from 10-40% of the area, the rest of the area being primarily grassland. 6 Grass Cover (other than nesting cover)A. B. C. It'nportance 10 Area with a tall grass density of less than 5% or with more than 60% bare ground (cultivated area not considered). 0 Grassland with a density of tall grass between 6 and 13% with less than 60% bare ground. (Cultivated area not included). 2 Grassland with a density of 14 to 20% tall grass and less than 60% bare ground. (Cultivated area not included). 4 �-385- Table 7. -- Greater pra~r~e chicken habitat evaluation. rating form for Northeastern Colorado. (Continued) Characteristic D. III. IV. Grassland with a density of more than 20% tall grass but with scattered patches of short and mid-grasses or mowed meadows, with less than 60% bare ground (cultivated area not included). 5 A. Shrub density of less than 1%.. o B. Shrub density 1 C. Shrub density of 2 to 5%. 4 D. Shrub density of 6 to 10%. 5 of more .than 10%. Nesting Cover (Medium-dense midgrass and tall grass on well-drainedSi~ LIttle bluestem is good. Within one mile of open water, and boo~g ground)-.-- B. C. D. A. B. 10 Less than 25% of the area suited to nesting. o More than 75% of the area suited to nesting. 1 25% to 50% of area suited to nesting. 4 51% to 74% of the area suited to nesting. 5 Space (Wide horizon) Less than one section acres) of grassland. Importance 6 Shrub Cover (Considered only if the tall grass density is less thart 15% i?TIUlarilysand sagebruS1i"f."" .-- -- A. V. Value (Quantity) (Quality) 10 (640 o 640 to 2,000 acres of grassland. 2 C. 2,000 to 5,000 acres of grassland. 3 D. Over 5,000 acres of_grassland. 5 �-386- Table 7. -"-Greater prairie chicken habitat evaluation rating form for Northeastern Colorado. (Continued) Characteristic (Quality) VI. Topography A. Sharp breaks with elevation difference of more than 1,000 feet from valley floors to ridge tops. B. C. D. VII. C. D. VIII. B. o 2 Choppy to hummocky, more gentle than above with an elevation difference of less than 1,000 feet from valley floors to ridge tops. 4 Rolling to level, more gentle than above with an elevation difference of less than 1,000 feet from valley floors to ridge tops. 6 2 o Heavy clay or silt with more than 50% of the area in marsh. 1 Clay or loam soil with less than 50% of area in marsh. 3 Loam to sandy soil with most of area well drained. 5 Water Availability A. No open water in the area , Windmills or ponds more than two miles apart. Importance 2 Sharp breaks with elevation difference of less than 1,000 feet from valley floors to ridge tops. Soil Characteristics A. Rocky soil or an area of predominately rock; arid land. B. Value (Quantity) 2 o 2 �-387- Table 7. -- Greater praLrLe chicken habitat evaluation Northeastern Colorado. (Continued) Characteristic VIII. Rating: (Quality) rating form for Value (Quantity) Water Availability (Continued) C. Windmills or ponds less than two miles apart. Unsuitable for prairie Less than 50 Poor habitat 51 to 100 = Fair habitat 101 to 160 Good habitat 161 to 220 221 to 277 = Excellent habitat Importance 2 5 chickens =t Comments on severity of grazing, excess human disturbance, dators, and other factors not covered above. abundance of pre- �-388- Prairie chickens must have grassland (Hamerstrom, Mattson, and Hamerstrom, In Kansas, prairie chickens are confined to areas in which at least one-third of the land is in native grass, and are most abundant where approximately two-thirds of the land is in native grass (Baker, 1953). 1957). Although short grass is needed by prairie chickens for booming grounds and for feeding, tall grass seems to be the key factor in providing suitable cover. In the sandhills of Colorado where grazing is the primary land use practice, over-grazing is often a serious problem. Blue grama (Bouteloua gracilis) readily replaces the tall grass and mid-grass species where overgrazing occurs in the sandhills of Colorado. Because grazing is difficult to evaluate, the presence of tall grass was used to determine range condition. The tall grasses, which were combined to rate an area, are as follows: Andropogon hallii, Andropogon scoparius, Calamovilfa longifolia, Eragrostis trichodes, Panicum virgatum, and Sporobolus cryptandrus. Another factor apparently related to the amount of tall grasses and mid-grasses, and also the presence of prairie chickens, was the amount of bare ground. Bare ground increased from 50.42 percent on the "prairie chickens presentlt area to 65.70 percent on theltprairie chickens absentlt area. Although the percentage of tall grasses on an area is important, other factors are involved in providing prairie chickens with suitable habitat. In hay meadows, .where the percent of tall grasses is high, there also must be enough COver around the peripheries of the mowed areas to provide suitable fall and winter cover (Figs. 10, 11, and 12). Medium-dense stands of mid-grasses and tall grasses on well drained sites are best for nesting (Hamerstrom, Mattson, and Hamerstrom, ·1957; Jones, 1963; Schwartz, 1944; and Baker, 1953). Jones (1963) reported little bluestem was the principal plant cover for nests found in Oklahoma. These nests were within a quarter of a mile from open water and a half mile from the nearest booming ground. If over 75 percent of an unmowed area covered with dense tall grasses and mid-grasses is suitable for nesting, there would be an inadequate amount of short grass areas for booming grounds, forb cover for feeding, and thick grass areas for night and winter roosts. One prairie chicken nest was found in Colorado during the summer of 1963. This nest was located on a well drained slope at a slightiy higher elevation than the nearest booming ground. The llest was between a sand sagebrush plant and a clump of little bluestem. This nest was approximately one mile from the nearest booming ground and three-quarters of a mile from open water (Figs. 13 and 14). Prairie chickens nee<i laJ;ge areas of flat to rolling grasslands that are open (free of ex,cessive amount of woody cover) for good visibility. Grange (1948) stated that the minimum area needed to support a flock of prairie chickens is from 2,000 to 5,000 acres of summer range. For best production, Hamerstrom, Mattson, and Hamerstrom (1957) estimated that not more than 20 to 25 percent of the area should be wooded. �-389- Table 8. -- Sample rating of "prairie chickens present" study area, Township 3 North, Range 43 West. Quality Quantity Importance Rating I. Winter Food 2 x 10 20 II. Grass Cover 4 x 10 40 III. Shrub Cover 4 x 5 20 IV. Nesting Cover 4 x 10 AO V. Space 5 x 10 50 VI. Topography 4 x 2 8 VII. Soil Characteristics 5 .x 2 10 VIII. Water Availability 5 x 2 10 TOTAL POINTS 198 RATING = Good Habitat Connnents Most of the ranches in the area are not severely over~grazed except in years of below normal precipitation. The ranchers are of fairly large size. Therefore, human disturbance is at a minimum. Crows, magpies, and snakes are abundant in the area. �-390Table 9. -- Sample rating of IIprairie chickens rare" study area, Township 3 South, Range 45 West. Quantity Quality Importance Rating I. Winter Food 0 x 10 0 II. Grass Cover 2 x 10 20 III. Shrub Cover 4 x 5 20 IV • Nesting Cover 4 x 10 40 V. Space 5 x 10 50 VI. Topography 4 x 2 8 VII. Soil Characteristics 5 x 2 10 VIII. Water Availability 5 x 2 10 TOTAL POINTS 158 RATING = Fair Habitat Comments -- Most of the ranches of the area are not severely over-grazed except in years of below normal precipitation. The ranches are of fairly large size. Therefore, human disturbance is at a minimum. Crows, magpies, and snakes are abundant in the area. �-391- Table 10. -- Sample rating of "prairie chickens absent!! study area, Township 4 North, Range 54 West. Quality Quantity Importance Rating I. Winter Food 0 x 10 0 II. Grass Cover 0 x 10 0 III. Shrub Cover 4 x 5 20 TV. Nesting Cover 0 x 10 0 V. Space 5 x 10 50 VI. Topography 4 x 2 8 VII. Soil Characteristics 5 x 2 10 VIII. Water Availability 5 x 2 10 TOTAL POINTS 98 RATING = Poor Habitat Comments -- Most of the ranches of the area are not severely over-grazed except in years of below normal precipitation. The ranches are of fairly large size. Therefore, human disturbance is at a minimum. Crows, magpies, and snakes are abundant in the area. �Fig. 8. Well-managed sandhill rangeland supporting a good cover of tall grasses and mid-grasses. Fig. 9. Extremes of overgrazing with an increase in short grass, sand sagebrush, and erosion. �Fig. 10. Night roosting area characterized by mid-dense stand of mid-grasses and tall grasses. Roosts are located within small openings in the major vegetative types. Fig. 11. Feeding and day roosting of blue grama. area with an abundance �Fig. 12. Switchgrass indicating cover potential on an ungrazed area. Tall grass Cover is needed for protective cover. �Fig. 13. Unhatched, and successfully prairie chicken eggs. hatched greater Fig. 14. Greater pra~r~e chicken nest located between a clump of little bluestem and a sand sagebrush plant. �-396- In Colorado it is estimated that the m~n1mum area of rangeland needed to support a population of prairie chickens is 23,040 acres (one township). Under ideal conditions, 5,000 acres would p~obably be suitable. The smaller amount of precipitation in Colorado, as compared to Wisconsin, does not support vegetation of good nesting quality except on low areas. LITERATURE CITED Baker, M. F. 1953. Prairie chickens of Kansas. Univ. of Kansas Mus. of Nat. Hist. and BioI. Surv. of Kansas Misc. Publ. 5. 68 p. Colorado A and M College. 1952. Colorado agricultural handbook. Agric. and Mech. College, Fort Collins. 590 p. Colo, Costello, D. F., and H. E. Schwan. 1946. 'Conditions and trends on ponderosa pine ranges in Colorado. U.S. Forest Service. Rocky Mtn. For. and Range Exp. Sta. 33 p. Grange, W. B. 1948. Wisconsin grouse problems. Wisconsin Conserve Dept., Madison 2, Wisc .. Fed. Aid in Wildl. Restoration Proj. 5-R 284 p. Hamerstrom, F. N., Jr., O. E. Mattson, and F.rancesHamerstrom. 1957. A guide to prairie chicken management. Wisconsin Conserve Dept., Tech. Wild 1. Bull. 15. 128 p. Harrington, H. D. 1954. Manual of the plants of Colorado. Denver. 666 p. Sage Books, Jones, R. E. 1963. A comparative study of the habitats of the lesser and greater prairie chicken in Oklahoma. Ph. D~ thesis. Oklahoma State Univ., Stillwater. 160 p. National Academy o:E,Sciences. 1962. Basic problems and techniques in range research. National Acad. of Sci., Natl. Research Council, Washington, D. C., Publ. 890. 341 p. Schwartz, C. w. 1944. Comm. 179 p .. The prairie chicken in Missouri. Snedecor, G. W: 576 p. Statistical me'thod s. 1956. U.S. Soil Soil Conservation Service. 1947. U.S. Dept. Agric. Series 1938, No. 14. Missouri Conserve Iowa State Univ. Press, Ames. Soil survey, Akron area, Colorado. 80 p. + maps. �-397- U.S. Soil Conservation Service. 1963. Soil survey; Dundy County, Nebraska. U.S. Dept. Ag rLc , Series 1959, No. 20. 86 p. + maps. U.S. Weather Bureau. 1927-1960. Climatological data, Colorado. Dep t• Commer ce . Annual summary for Vols. 32-65. n.p. 1962. Climatological data, Colorado. U.S. U.S. Dept. Commerce. 67 :204-213. Prepared by: Keith E. Evans Date: April, 1964 Printed February, 19(,5 Approved by: Harold M. Swope Associate Wildlife Researcher Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief � https://cpw.cvlcollections.org/files/original/a16f73b1e99faff22086641707487147.pdf 3431c6af03de86f53aec206c1ce0e669 PDF Text Text July, 1964 -1- JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO Project No. w-88-R-8 Work Plan No. 1 Title of Job: Period Covered: Personnel: Waterfowl Surveys and Investigations Job No. 10 Evaluation of the Reliability of the Baited Cannon-Net Trapping Technique in Determining Age and Sex Ratios, and the Percent of Canada Geese with Embedded Shot. November 15, 1962, to March 31, 1963. Those assisting in the trapping effort were: J. R. Grieb, R. M. Hopper, W. H. Rutherford, R. D. Kitzmiller, L. K. Hazzard, and J. Frost. ABSTRACT Reliability of the baited cannon-net trapping technique in estimating Canada goose population age and sex ratios, and the percentage of geese carrying embedded shot was investigated on wintering areas in southeast Colorado during the winters of 1961-62 and 1962-63. Comparison of information obtained from samples of geese captured in baited and unbaited traps indicated that age ratios between baited samples collected at Two Buttes Reservoir in 1961-62 were significantly different from those from Nee Noshe Reservoir on unbaited sites. However, age ratios were similar between trapping methods and periods in 196263 in the Two Buttes area. No difference was indicated between sex ratios obtained throughout the study. Percentages of adult geese carrying shot were found similar between trapping methods and trapping intervals. Post-hunting season percentages of young geese with shot also were quite even between baited and unbaited trapping methods. The increase in percentages of young with shot through the 1962-63 hunting season was similar in baited and unbaited samples. It was concluded that within the limits of this study, the baited technique of gathering these data is reliable. ��-3- EVALUATION OF THE RELIABILITY OF THE BAITED CANNON-NEr TRAPPING TECHNIQUE IN DEl'ERMING AGE AND SEX RATIOS, .AND THE PERCENT OF CANADA GEESE WITH EMBEDDED SH<Y.r Howard D. Funk Introduction: An important premise concerning population data gathered by sampling waterfowl flocks is that estimates of age and sex ratiOS, or other information, are valid and can be used in the management of the population. Obtaining age ratios of Canada geese (Branta canadensis spp.), and sex ratios of all species of geese can best be determined, from captured birds. The normal procedure, at least in this part of the Central Flyway, is to catch geese with cannon-net traps baited with grain. During the fall and winter of 1960-61, it was noted that Canada goose age ratios from each of five trapping intervals at Two Buttes Reservoir, Baca County, Colorado, varied considerably from age ratios of bagged geese brought through check stations on this managed shooting area during similar time periods. Examination of trapping and check station data from previous years further emphasized this discrepancy, although not as markedly as in 1960-61. This variation was never consistent between comparable samples, indicating that increased juvenile hunting vulnerability, while perhaps a contributing factor, was not the only reason for the differences. The Two Buttes investigation also included fluoroscopy of the geese at intervals during hunting season. Regressions were computed to estimate the percentages of adult and young-of-the-year birds carrying shot upon arrival at the wintering area. If wounded birds were unduly attracted to the baited area, these estimates would be, biased and would lead to erroneous conclusions regarding the distribution of hunting pressure on this flock. Thus, it was decided to initiate a study to investigate the, reliability of the baited cannon-net technique under trapping conditions experienced in sQutheastern Colorado. STUDY AREA The lower Arkansas River Valley in southeastern Colorado is the most important Canada goose wintering area in the State. Annual inventories have revealed an average of 34,000 Canada geese present each January since 1955. Most of these geese winter in three major locations: John Martin Reservoir in Bent County, 17,500 acres; Nee Noshe and Queen Reservoirs in Kiowa County, 3,700 and 1,900 acres, respectively; and Two Buttes Reservoir in Baca County, 1,800 acres. Winter wheat, grain sorghum, corn, and alfalfa are the main crops of the area, and are fed upon to a great extent by the wintering geese. �-4- Most baited trapping efforts during the study were concentrated at Two Buttes Reservoir because of a good selection of trapping sites and its convenient location near research quarters. Also, the managed Irfiring lr line hunting provided age ratio estimates of bagged geese for comparison with similar trapping estimates. The majority of the unbaited trapping was accomplished in the Two Buttes Reservoir area which included lr IrTurk'sPond , a 10-acre, privately-owned impoundment 15 miles to the southeast. ~nis pond and surrounding lands were closed to hunting and often as many as 10,000 geese utilized the area in conjunction with Two Buttes Reservoir. During the late winter of 1961-62, all geese left the Two Buttes area and joined flocks on Nee Noshe and Queen Reservoirs some 50 miles to the north. Consequently, we shifted the trapping effort to those lakes for the remainder of the seasono METHODS AND MATERIALS It was decided, during the formulation of this study, that a valid comparison of baited cannon-net trap samples would be obtained by capturing geese without the use of baitQ Thus, sex and age ratios, and the percent of birds of different age classes with shot in samples obtained by the two methods could be compared. Unbeknown to us, a study was being conducted simultaneously at Swan Lake in Missouri on the reliability of the baited cannon-net trap technique (Nass 1963). There, Nass examined catches of geese that had spent various lengths of time on the baited area. We did not consider this approach in our study, and baited samples were taken in a manner similar to that used in the past. We waited for at least 200 geese to feed onto the bait before firing the net. The time it took for this to happen varied between trapping attempts from a few minutes to several hours. Unbaited trapping was attempted in several ways: (1) by setting one or several nets along the shore of a reservoir in a favored resting site, permitting the geese to walk up on this area, usually during mid-day, and firing the net when it appeared that no more birds would feed in front of the trap area; (2) by making field sets of one or more nets in fields preferred by geese for feeding. Decoys were used to attract the birds to the net area in these fields. At first, shell body and silhouette decoys were employed; however, it was discovered that geese would merely circle these and not land in with them. Therefore, live decoys were tried with fairly good resultso Geese captured in bait trapping operations were harnessed and staked out on trapping sites as live decoys. Usually six to eight birds were placed on each site by attaching them in pairs to the ends of light, six-foot chains with the middle of each chain fastened to a swivel on a steel stake driven into the ground. Prior to their use on the trap site, the geese were staked out for a few days near their holding pen at our headquarters to accustom them to the confines of the harnesses and chains. The birds were replaced frequently so as not to cause hardship on any particular set of birds. �-5- cotton and nylon cannon-nets ranging from 60 to 75 feet long and 40 to 50 feet wide were used with !1Dill-typelr cannons (U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service 1956). The cannons were partially buried in the ground and on some sets were covered, except for the muzzles, with a burlap bag and available vegetation. Electrical squibbs in shotshell cases containing from 165 to 180 grains of block powder were detonated by current from a 90-volt dry-cell battery. Commands to fire the nets were relayed by radio from an observer with a 20-power scope to the individual at the firing point, which was located at an easily accessible position out of sight of the net. All geese were aged, sexed, banded, weighed, and fluoroscoped as soon as possible after capture. The birds were classified as young-of-theyear or adult by the notched tail-feather technique and by other plumage characteristics. Sex was determined by cloacal examination. At least two positions for each goose were viewed in the fluoroscopic examination for embedded shot, usually at right angles. All geese were released together to prevent disruption of family groups. The data on all geese caught in baited and unbaited traps, including repeats, were compared by trapping period and trapping method for age ratios, sex ratios, and percentages of geese, by age classes, carrying body shot. This was done mainly by chi-square contingency tests. Comparison of incidence of shot carried by immature geese captured by the two trapping methods during the 1962-63 season was made by analysis of covariance. Statistical procedures are described by Snedecor (1956). RESULTS Numbers of geese captured during the study are listed in Table 1 by trapping period, date of capture, location, and trapping method. Most unbaited catches during the 1961-62 season were small and therefore were combined for analysis, as were the post-hunting season catches of geese on baited areas the same year. The two unbaited catches of January 8 and 10, 1963, were included with post-hunting season samples for that year because they were collected toward the end of hunting season and the probability of birds obtaining shot during the remainder of the season was negligible. Age Ratios Age composition of trapped samples varied little between area, method, or year, except for the baited sample taken at Two Buttes Reservoir during the 1961-62 season (Table 2). No factual explanation can be given for the high precentage of adults captured during this time except that the number of birds using Two Buttes Reservoir f'Luct.uat.ed considerably from day to day with a majority of birds staying at Turk's Pond. Consequently, we believe that birds trapped from the small number of geese remaining on the reservoir did not represent a good esti-mate of the population age ratio for the Two Buttes area. Therefore, only the 1962-63 hunting and post-hunting season results were tested for difference between trapping methods and periods. Results of this test show no significa~tdifference between methods and periods (chisquare = 2.70, 3 d.f., probability = 0.45). �-6- Sex Ratios Evaluation of all geese captured on baited and unbaited areas by sex and age classes shows that sex ratios in all periods for both trapping methods were close to 1:1 (Table 3.). Analysis of these data indicated no significant difference in sex composition between trapping methods and periods (chi-square = 4.80, 5 d.f., probability = 0.45). In addition, analysis of sex ratios by age classes resulted in a nonsignificant value (chi-square = 6.65, 11 d.f., probability = 0.82). Percentages of Geese with Embedded Shot Regression analysis of the percent of geese with embedded shot and period of the hunting season by adult and immature birds, combining baited and unbaited catches, indicates the need to compare the effects of trapping methods separately between age classes (Fig. 1). Thus, adult birds increase in percent with shot slower throughout the season than do immature birds because adults have received shot in previous years, and it is impossible to separate those which also received shot in the current year. Adult. Comparison of the effects of trapping method on percentages of adult geese with embedded shot, according to sexes and trapping period, did not reveal a significant difference (chi-square = 11.89, 11 d.f., probability = 0.39) (Table 4). Furthermore, combining sexes and testing only for differences between trapping methods by periods confirmed that there was no significant difference between the two trapping methods (chi-square = 2.76, 5 d.f., probability = 0.74). Immature. -Chi-square tests for young-of-the-year geese with shot during the 196263 hunting season indicate a difference between trapping methods when sexes were combined or separated (chi-square = 4.24, 1 d.f., probability = 0.04; and chi-square = 5.75, 3 d.f., probability = 0.14) (Table 5). This undoubtedly occurred because there was a time lapse between procurement of baited and unbaited samples (Fig. 1). Thus, these data were not comparable in all cases. Consequently, it was necessary to compute the regression of increase in percentage of birds with shot by time intervals for each trapping method during the 1962-63 hunting season (Fig. 2). Comparison of the lines for each trapping method by analysis of covariance indicated no reason to believe that they were not parallel (F =2.4, 1,8 d.f.). It was further determined that these lines were similar, or that differences were not great enough to be detected by size of the samples obtained (F = 0.13, 1)9 d.f.). Therefore, the combined regression line may be considered as most representative of the increase in percentages of immature geese with shot during the hunting season. �_7_ , Comparison of data from baited and unbaited trap samples collected during the 1961-62 and 1962-63 post-hunting seasons, sexes combined, showed no difference between trapping methods in percentages of young geese with shot (chi-square = 0.55, 3 d. f., probablli ty := 0,91). A similar test revealed no significant difference with sexes separated (chi-square = 2.28, 7 d.f., probability = 0.94). Thus, the baited trap method did not appear to be selective for geese with embedded shot. DISCUSSION The question of evaluating the reliability of the baited cannon-net trapping technique for estimating various population statistics depends upon comparison of this technique with an unbiased measure of these statistics. At the onset of this investigation, the premise was made, and is still held, that data gathered by unbaited trapping of geese on resting and field feeding areas would offer a valid comparison for information gathered by bait trapping efforts. Table 1. Numbers of Canada Geese Captured in Baited and Unbai ted Cannon-nets by Trapping Period and Date. Trapping Period Date Location Trap Type Number Captured Periodic Totals Post-hunting Season * * Two Buttes Baited 402 402 Nee Noshe Unbaited 1041 104 12-4 Turk's Pond 12-5 12-7 12-12 Turk's Pond 12-14 12-21 Baited 102 194 106 53~ 59~ 50~ Post-hunting Season, 1-8 Unbaited 1962-63 1-10 1-22 1-29 1-27 1-31 1961-62 Hunting Season, 1962-63 * Resting area trapping. 402 162 33~ 50-1 Two Buttes Baited All catches for each method were combined. 1 Field decoy trapping. ~ Turk's Pond Unbaited 31t 30t 137 61 144 �Table 2. Numbers and Percentages of Canada Geese, by Age Classes, Captured in Baited and Unbaited Cannon-nets. A.dult Trapping Period Immature Location Trap Type* Totals Captured Number Per Cent Number Per Cent Post-hunting Two Buttes B 402 320 79.6 82 20.4 1961-62 Nee Noshe U 104 44 42.3 60 57·7 I OJ I Turk!s Pond B 402 159 39·5 243 60.4 1962-63 Turk!s Pond U 162 58 35.8 104 64.2 Post-hunting Two Buttes B 198 69 34.8 129 65.2 1962-63 'I'ur'k s Pond U 144 61 42.4 83 57.6 Hunting * B '"Baited U = Unbaited t �Table 3. Numbers and percentages of Canada Geese, by Sex and Age Classes, Captured in Baited and Unbaited Cannon-nets. Trapping Period Post-hunting, Location Trap Type* Age Totals Captured Two Buttes B Adult 320 Immature 1961-62 Nee Noshe U Male Female Per Cent Number Number Per Cent 55·0 51.2 144 45.0 82 176 42 40 48.8 Adult 44 24 54.5 20 Immature 59 34 57.6 25 45.5 42.4 I \0 I Hunting, Turk's Pond B 1962-63 Turk's Pond Post-hunting, Two Buttes U B 1962-63 Turk s Pond I * B = Baited U = Unbaited U Adult 159 85 53.5 74 46.5 Immature 243 132 54.3 111 45.7 Adult 58 29 50.0 29 50.0 Immature 104 60 57·7 44 42.3 Adult 69 34 49.3 50.7 Immature 129 58 45.0 35 71 Adult 61 32 52.5 47.5 Immature 83 41 49.4 29 42 55·0 50.6 �Table 4. Numbers and Percentages of Adult Canada Geese with Embedded Shot, by Sex Classes, Captured in Baited and Unbaited Cannon-nets. Trapping Period Location Trap Type* Sex Total Captured Post-hunting, Two Buttes B Male 175 106 60.6 Female 144 79 54.9 Male 24 19 79·2 Female 20 8 40.0 1961-62 Nee Noshe U With Shot Number Per Cent I I-' 0 Hunting, Turk's Pond B Male 85 51 60.0 Female 74 44 59·5 Male 29 18 62.1 Female 28 17 60.7 Male 34 23 67.6 Female 35 20 57·1 Male 32 23 71.9 Female 29 19 65.5 1962-63 Turk's Pond Post-hunting, Two Buttes U B 1962-63 Turk's Pond * B = Baited U - Unbaited U I �Table 5. Numbers and Percentages of Immature Canada Geese with Embedded ShotJ Captured in Baited and Unbaited Cannon-nets. Trapping Period Post-hunting, Location Sex Total Captured Two Buttes B Male 42 14 33·3 Female 40 14 35·0 Male 34 10 29.4 Female 24 6 25·0 Male 132 24 18.2 Nee Noshe Turk's Pond U B 1962-63 Turk's Pond Post-hunting, Two Buttes U B 1962-63 Turk's Pond * B = Baited U = Unbaited With Shot Per Cent Number Trap Type* 1961-62 Hunting, by Sex Classes, U Female 111 14 12.6 Male 60 14 23·3 Female 44 12 27·3 Male 58 22 37·9 Female 71 21 29.6 Male 41 14 34.1 Female 42 12 28.6 , I-' I-' , �-12- 80 • • + • 70 + • (b: • .085} 60 - + o s: + en "'0 Q) • 50 "'0 "'0 ..0 Q) • E + lLJ - ADULTS s: 40 - -IMMATURES - - - - --- - - - - - - ----+-- c: Q) U ... Q) o, • 30. + • • 20 + BAITED· • UNBAITED CATCHES + + + 10 DEC 4 1962-63 DEC 14 ' DEC 24 JAN 3 CATCHES JAN 13 Trapping Season (Hunting Season Closed -Jo n.13 P.M.) Fig. 1. -- Seasonal increase in percentages of adult and immature Canada geese with embedded shot, baited and unbaited cannon-net trapping, Two Buttes Reservoir area, 1962-63. �-13- 0 40 + s: U) ~ Q) '0 '0 Q) .c E • 30 LLI - s: • ~ c Q) 20 U + (b= .48) ~ BAITED CATCHES Q) a.. • UNBAITED CATCHES 10 DEC 4 1962-63 DEC 14 Trapping DEC .24 Season JAN JAN 3 13 (Hunting Season Closed Jan. 13 P. M.l Fig. 2. -- Seasonal increase in percentages of immature Canada geese with embedded shot, baited and unbaited cannon-net trapping and combined results, Two Buttes Reservoir area, 1962-63. �-14- The analysis of data shows that age ratios between baited samples collected at Two Buttes Reservoir in 1961-62 were significantly different from those from Nee Noshe Reservoir on unbaited Sites, probably because of differing populations at the two areas or non-representative samples from one or both areas. Age ratios were similar between trapping methods and periods in 1962-63 in the Two Buttes area. Furthermore, no difference was indicated between sex ratios obtained from geese trapped by either method throughout the study. Percentages of adult geese carrying shot were found similar between methods and trapping intervals as were post-hunting season percentages of young geese with shot. Comparison of the increase in percent of ~mmature geese with shot by time intervals during the hunting season indicated no Significant difference between methods. Thus, it is believed that as conditions exist in southeastern Colorado, the baited cannon-net trapping technique provides data for unbiased estimates of age and sex ratiOS, and percentages of Canada geese with embedded shot. Literature Cited Nass, R. D. 1963. Sex and age ratio'bias of cannon-netted geese. M. A. Thesis, Univ. of Missouri, Columbia. 44 pp. Snedecor, G. W. 1956. Statistical methods. State Univ. Press, Ames. 534 pp. 5th ed. The Iowa U. S. Fish and Wildlife Service. 1956. Guide to waterfowl banding. U. S. Fish and Wildl. Serv., Laurel, Md. Loose leaf. n ,p. Prepared by: Howard D. Funk Date: Wildlife Researcher Candidate July, 1964 Approved by: Wayne W. Sandfort Chief, Game Research Jack R. Grieb Project Leader �July, 1964 -15JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO Project No. w-88-R-9 Work Plan No. 1 Title of Job: Period Covered: Migratory Bird Surveys and Investigations Job No. 1 Waterfowl Production Survey April 1, 1963 to June 15, 1963. Personnel: Those cooperating on the 1963 counts were: Kenard Baer, Charles Graham, Charles Hayes, Jack Randall and Cecil Williams, U. S. Bureau of Sport Fisheries and Wildlifej Walter Gordon and George Wrakestraw, Wyoming Game and Fish Departmentj Art Kinski and Don Smith, Utah Fish and Game Departmentj and Jack Grieb, Richard Hopper, Norman Hughes, Robert Kitzmiller and William Rutherford, Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department. Objectives: To determine, through statistically reliable sampling techniques, the number of ducks and geese, by species, produced on Colorado waterfowl breeding grounds. Techniques Used: After nine years of intensive study, present breedingpair and production surveys have been consolidated into a breeding-pair inventory in late May and a production study in July. One week on the breeding study requires roughly 30 to 40 hours of aircraft use. All other work is done on the ground, usually in cooperation with local Bureau of Sport Fisheries and Wildlife personnel. On the basis of these studies, reports are made, as required, to the Bureau of Sport Fisheries and Wildlife, which constitute Colorado's part in the annual cooperative breeding ground survey. The 1963 breeding-pair surveys were conducted within the period May 13 to May 31. During this time, ground counts were made in the Yampa Valley and Brown's Parkj and aerial counts were conducted in the South Platte, Cache la Poudre, and San Luis Valleys, and in North Park. As for the past several years, intensive brood surveys were not conducted this year due to a lack of time. Thus, this final breeding ground report considers only the breeding-pair surveys with last minute notes on weather and water conditions, accompanied by gross observations of early nesting success in the breeding areas. All survey methods and sample areas remained the same as in past years. In 1963, all flying was done with a DeHavilland Beaver airplane. Two observers were used in the San Luis Valley and North Park. Only one observer was used in the other areas, since these areas are sampled by blocks or sections, rather than by transects, and therefore the number of observers used ~oes not influence sample size. ��-17- Findings: Weather conditions in Colorado during the spring and early summer were considered to be excellent for waterfowl nesting and production. Water conditions were considerably poorer than last year, since the state experienced one of the driest winter and spring seasons on record. Fortunately, reservoir storage was good, and spring run-off water was sufficient to provide adequate water areas for nesting habitat. In eastern Colorado and the San Luis Valley, most sloughs and ditches were full, and most reservoirs contained water; and in North Park and on the western slope, sufficient early water was available for meadow flooding. At the date of this writing, reservoir storage is dwindling, the high-country snowpack is rapidly diminishing, and precipitation is far below normal. It is expected that midsummer water supplies will be generally short over the State, with some areas becoming critical. In summary, then, over-all weather and water conditions in Colorado seem to point toward a good year for waterfowl hatching, but a somewhat poorer year for later brood-rearing. Table 1 -- Summary of Colorado Duck Breeding Ground Population Estimates, 1963 with 1962 and the Nine-year Average for Comparison. Total Estimated Breeding Pairs 9-year average, 1954-1962 Area 1963 1962 San Luis Valley North Park South Platte Valley Cache la Poudre Valley Yampa Valley Brown's Park 17,377 5,278 10,513 2,276 3,494 60 21,717 3,167 4,596 1,848 4,924 82 9,982 3,777 2,752 1,660 2,972 116 TOTALS 38,998 36,334 21,259 Examination of the duck breeding-pair estimates by area (Table 1) reveal that the 1963 total counts were up 7.3 percent from 1962, and 83.4 percent above the 1954-1962 nine-year average. In spite of a dry season, it is apparent that sufficient nesting habitat was available to continue the year-to-year upward trend in breeding-pair numbers which Colorado is experiencing. Comparison of individual breeding ground estimates between 1962 and 1963 showed that the duck population in the San Luis Valley was 20.0 percent below last year and 74.1 percent above the nine-year average. In the Yampa Valley, ducks were 8.7 percent below last year and 17.6 percent above the nine-year average. In North Park, the Cache la Poudre Valley, and the South Platte Valley, breeding-pair populations were increased both over last year and over the nine-year average, being 66.7 and 39.7, 23.2 and 37.1 and 128.7 and 282.0 percent, respectively. In Brown's Park, the continuing deterioration of waterfowl breeding habitat, made more acute this year by low river volume flow as a result of the filling of Flaming Gorge Reservoir, resulted in a decrease in duck breeding-pair numbers of 26.8 percent from last year and 48.3 percent from the nine-year average. �-18- Table 2 -- Species Composition of the Colorado Breeding Duck Population; 1963, 1962, and the 1954-1962 Nine-year Average. Species Number of Breeding Pairs 1963 1962 ·1954-1962 average Mallard 31,026 Blue-w. Teal 3,718 Pintail 838 Gadwall 1,358 Baldpate 76 Shoveller 471 Cinn. Teal 369 Green-w. Teal 242 Redhead 554 Scaup 2 Ruddy Duck 27 Bufflehead Canvasback Am. Merganser 317 N. Mex Duck Wood Duck Ring-necked Duck 26,691 1,501 1,451 3,454 66 340 571 232 1,372 536 60 TOTALS 36,334 38,998 59 13,425 1,048 1,447 2,010 268 672 623 480 704 372 66 2 23 113 Species Composition, Percent 1962 1963 1954-1962 average 79·9 9·4 2.1 3.4 0.2 1.2 0·9 0.6 1.4 0.1 73 ·5 4.1 4.0 9·5 0.2 0·9 1.6 0.6 3.8 1.4 0.2 0.8 0.2 T 1 63.2 4·9 6.8 9.4 1.3 3·2 2·9 2·3 3·3 1.8 0·3 T 0.1 0·5 T 21,253 100.0 100.0 100.0 In an attempt to refine the sampling technique in the San Luis Valley, the aerial counts were recorded by the number of ducks observed per fivemile transect segment. It was hoped that separate estimates of breedingpair populations according to habitat quality would provide a more realistic picture of the duck populations in the Valley, and that sampling accuracy would thus be improved. However, this did not prove to be the case. At the present level of sampling, a population change of 26 percent is the smallest which can be detected, based on 1963 sampling conditions. Species composition percentages of the breeding duck population differed somewhat from those of past years. Mallards and blue-winged teals were up considerably; shovellers and mergansers were up slightly; pintails, gadwalls, redheads, and cinnamon teals were down slightly; and other species held at about the same level. �-19- Table 3 -- Number of Canada Geese by Breeding Classification, Moffat County, Colorado, 1963. Green (Brownts Park) 2 Little Snake (25 ml. upstream from lower bridge) 4 GRAND TOTALS 34 Novice pairs which are potential nesters next year. This category includes both eggs and goslings counted. 1 15 117 343 156 638 11 g; Table 4 -- Total Canada Geese Observed, Moffat County, Colorado, 1963· Percent Change No. Geese Counted From 1956-62-Ave. Area 1963 1962 1956-62-Ave. From 1962 + 26 +164 yampa River 467 372 - 74 - 75 Green River 15 57 +114 +114 Little Snake River 156 73 +105 + 27 502 311 638 TOTALS !I Little Snake River not included in survey until 1962. Table 5 -- Number of Canada Goose Goslings Observed, Moffat County, Colorado, 1963. Percent Change Number of Goslings From 1956-62 Ave. 1963 1962 1956-62 Ave. From 1962 Area + 81 - 10 126 114 63 Yampa River - 68 - 62 8 Green River Inf. Inf. 5.1 Little Snake River 15 + 56 88 147 TOTALS 7 137 == Y =~ hatched nests were observed on the Little Snake River in 1962, because Y No of high water. 5.1 Little Snake River not included in survey until 1962. In 1963, the western slope Canada goose breeding area continued to exhibit the steadily increasing breeding flock which has been noted during the past several years. The largest number of adult geese observed since the beginning of the study in 1956 occurred this year, and the number of goslings observed was down only slightly. However, this yearts survey is not directly comparable with that of last year, because of phenological differences. The peak of hatching this year occurred about two weeks earlier, and it is known that several broods and hatched nests were present which were not observed. The volume of spring run-off water was less this year, and the peak of high water occurred earlier than normal. This means that few, if any, nests were flooded, and nesting success should have been as good or better than last year. �-20- Tables 3, 4, and 5 list the numbers, age composition, locations, and past year's comparisons of this breeding goose flock. Brown's Park continued to show a decrease in goose numbers, and it appears that it can no longer be considered significant goose breeding area. The goose population on the Yampa River increased 26 percent over 1962, and 164 percent over the 1956-1962 average. The Little Snake River was surveyed for the second year, and showed a total population increase of 114 percent. This goose flock is continuing to show a steady and healthy increase, indicating that the restrictive harvest type of management employed by the Bureau of Sport Fisheries and Wildlife, and individual states up and down the flyway, are now and will be in the future a necessary part of flock management. Fall Flight Prediction: It is anticipated that fall duck flights from Colorado's 1963 production will be normal to somewhat above average, in spite of expected short water supplies through the summer. Water areas should remain adequate to see hatching and early brood rearing completed successfully. The status of geese continues to improve, but hunting restrictions are still very much in order, to avoid the original mistake of overharvesting. The recommended bag and possession limit for Moffat County for the 1963 season is one goose. Prepared by: William H. Rutherford Principal Game Biologist Date: July, 1964 Approved by: Jack R. Grieb Project Leader Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �July, 1964 -21- JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO ------~~--~-----------w-88-R-9 Project No. Work Plan No. 1 Migratory Bird Investigations Job No. Title of Job: Trapping and Banding Ducks and Geese Period Covered: April 1, 1963 to March 31, 1964 Personnel: 2 Ken Baer, Bob Ballou, Charles Hayes, Jack Randall, Jack Frost, Bureau of Sport Fisheries and Wildlife; Jack Hogue, Art Gresh, John Pogorelz, Lloyd Hazzard, Harold Hood, Gurney Crawford, Lloyd Triplet, Jack Truax, Bob Kitzmiller, Gary Brown, Carl Leonard, Howard Funk, William Rutherford, Richard Hopper, and Jack Grieb, Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department. Introduction: This report summarizes the trapping and banding activities of Project w-88-R-9 for the segment-year April 1, 1963 to March 31, 1964. Since the analysis of band recoveries will be done under a separate job (Work Plan I, Job 3), little interpretation will be made of these data in this report. This report is limited to a tabulation and factual description of number and location of birds banded during the specified period, with comments on trapping techniques and other pertinent information. Objectives: 1. To trap and band ducks and geese for the purpose of obtaining migration, life history, and annual mortality information. 2. To determine migration routes and wintering areas of birds breeding in various parts of the State. 3. To investigate the plausibility of flock management. 4. To evaluate the effect of hunting seasons on flocks of ducks and geese wintering in this state. �-22- Scope: North Park (Jackson County); Cache la Poudre-South Platte Valley (Adams, Boulder, Larimer, Logan, Morgan, Sedgwick, Weld, and other counties); Arkansas Valley, including Two Buttes Reservoir and the Eads Lakes (Baca, Bent, Kiowa, Prowers, and other counties); Bonny Reservoir (Yuma County); San Luis Valley (Alamosa, Rio Grande, and Saguache Counties); and Canada (western Saskatchewan and eastern Alberta). Techniques Used: Banding operations have been roughly divided into three phases -- summer, fall, and winter banding. Summer banding was conducted on Colorado breeding grounds and emphasized the banding of young ducks, and moulting adults which nested in the vicinity of the banding sites. Fall activities consisted of pre-season duck banding in the San Luis Valley as part of an intensive study to evaluate the effects of a special early hunting season on local ducks in that area. In addition, a two-man crew was sent to Canada to band mainly Canada geese on the staging areas of western Saskatchewan and eastern Alberta prior to completing their migration to the wintering grounds of southeastern Colorado and other areas (Work Plan II, Job 4b). Winter banding of geese was again confined to the Arkansas Valley winter goose flock in southeastern Colorado, and was conducted specifically at Two Buttes Reservoir and the Eads Lakes (Work Plan II, Job 4a). An intensive winter duck banding program was initiated on the eastern slope of Colorado during the winter of 1963-64 as part of an overall investigation of wintering mallard populations (Work Plan III, Job 3). Banding efforts were concentrated in four general areas: (1) Cache la Poudre Valley; (2) South Platte Valley; (3) Arkansas Valley; and (4) Bonny Reservoir. Seven methods of capturing ducks and geese were employed during 1963-64. Drive trapping with (1) the Hawkins type tzap and (2) the corral trap was used during portions of the summer duck banding program; (3) crews of men with dip nets and dogs were used to capture young ducks along ditches and on small ponds in the San Luis Valley; (4) the Salt Plains trap; (5) Colorado ramp-trap, and (6) Montana type trap were used for fall and winter trapping of ducks; and (7) the cannon-net trap was used for fall and winter trapping of ducks and geese. �-23- TRAPPING AND BANDING DUCKS AND GEESE Richard M. Hopper Ducks Table 1 shows the number of ducks banded by species and location. A total of 7,659 ducks of 12 species was banded during Segment 9. In addition, 64 American Coot were banded. Mallards accounted for 5,979, or about 80 percent of the total ducks banded. About 4,700 of these mallards were banded as a result of the initiation of an intensive winter banding program on the eastern slope. Most of the remaining mallards (1,089) were banded in the San Luis Valley during the summer and fall of 1963. San Luis Valley Cooperative Study. -- Summer banding of locally produced ducks in the San Luis Valley was again undertaken in 1963 as part of the continuing coope.ratdve investigation by the Bureau of Sport Fisheries and Wildlife, and the Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department. Trapping began on June 21 and continued through July 16. Reasons for this study and techniques used were explained in the previous Job Completion Report (April, 1963) and do not merit repeating here. Colorado personnel banded a total of 847 ducks, mostly in the area around Center in Saguache County. This total included 582 mallard, resulting in an increase of about 150 birds over the previous year. Federal personnel banded an additional 346 mallards, however this number is not included in Table 1. Table 1- -- Number of Ducks Banded by Species and Location, 1963-64 Location Total San Cache la South by Luis Platte Bonny Arkansas Poudre North Valley!/ Species Valley Res. Valley Valley Park Species Mallard 183 Gadwall 50 American Widgeon 98 Green-winged 381 Teal Cinnamon or Blue-winged 120 Teal Shoveler 75 Pintail 133 Redhead 3 Lesser Scaup 13 4 Ring-necked Duck Common Merganser 46 American Coot 52 TOTALS 1,158 1,020 2,264 405 1,018 85 100 105 45 8 1,255 2,272 505 1,020 1,089 26 5,979 76 11 194 96 682 93 27 147 12 213 102 333 17 13 4 46 64 7,723 12 1,513 ~/ All locals except for one adult mallard and one adult green-winged teal �-24- Colorado was granted an early experimental duck hunting season in the San Luis Valley in 1963. In order to properly evaluate the effects of this season, State and Federal personnel agreed to band at least 500 adult and 500 immature mallards prior to the opening of the season on October 1. Colorado personnel used Salt Plains traps in September to capture and band 666 ducks in the San Luis Lakes, Russell Lakes, and Alamosa areas. Mallards accounted for 507 of this total. Federal personnel added another 960 mallards to this total, making a final figure of 1,467 mallards banded during the pre-season program by both agencies. Winter Duck Banding in Eastern Colorado. -- A duck banding program was initiated in eastern Colorado during the winter of 1963-64 to accumulate age, sex, and fluoroscopy data as part of an overall investigation of mallard populations wintering in this area. A total of 5,052 ducks was banded as a result of the program during December, 1963, and January and February of 1964. Mallards, which were of major concern, made up 4,707 of the total. Federal personnel cooperated considerably with this work. A detailed report on this program will appear as a separate Job Completion Report (Work Plan III, Job 3) and thus will not be explained further here. Geese Table 2 lists the number of geese banded by species and location. A total of 1,394 geese were banded during 1963-64, of which 1,236 were Canada geese. The remaining 158 were composed of the following species banded in Canada: White-fronted goose (136), Lesser snow goose (6), and Ross! goose (16). The above total includes 86 Great Basin Canada geese banded and released at Valmont Reservoir near Boulder, Colorado, in the South Platte Valley. These birds were raised by captive flocks or artifically hatched from wild eggs and released as goslings to supplement previous releases to investigate the re-establishment of wild breeding flocks. The 1963-64 winter trapping program in the Arkansas Valley resulted in the banding of 574 Canada geese at Two Buttes Reservoir and 12 at Nee Noshe Reservoir. These geese were caught with the cannon-net trap baited with milo maize and barley. Trapping was conducted only after the hunting season ended. Age, sex, weight, and condition ratios, and body shot incidence data were collected from trapped birds. Additional information concerning this work will be covered in detail under the report for Work Plan II, Job 4a. Table 2 shows that a total of 722 geese of four species were banded in Canada by Colorado personnel as part of the Central Flyway Cooperative Canada Goose Investigation. Efforts were again coordinated with the white-front banding crew headed by Alex Dzubin of the Canadian Wildlife Service. Canada geese made up the majority (564) of the 722 geese banded by the Colorado crew. Further results of this investigation will be reported under Work Plan II, Job 4b. �-25- Table 2. -- N~mber of Geese Banded by Species and Location, 1963-64 Location Eads South P~,tte Two Butte~ Valley'::" Vicini tY?} Vicinity~/ Canadal/ Species Canada Goose White-fronted Goose Lesser Snow Goose Ross' Goose TOTALS 86 86 574 574 12 Total by Species 564 136 12 1,236 136 6 6 16 16 1,394 722 1I Young from captive flock and incubated eggs experimentally planted at Valmont Reservoir, Boulder County, Colorado, July, 1963. ~/ Trapped with cannon-net and released immediately after banding in January and February, 1964. 11 Trapped with cannon-net and released immediately after banding in September and October, 1963. Prepared by: Richard M. Hopper Senior C~me Biologist Date: July, 1964 Approved by: Jack R. Grieb Project .Leader Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator ��July, 1964 -27- JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COIDRADO Project No. w-88-R-8 Work Plan No. 2 Title of Job: Period Covered: Waterfowl Surveys and Investigations Job No. 4a Investigation of the Arkansas Valley Wintering Goose Flock April 1, 1962 to March 31, 1963. ABSTRACT Water and weather conditions were generally satisfactory, but food conditions were judged only fair, for the Canada goose flock in the Arkansas Valley of Colorado during the winter of 1962-63. Local shiLfting of population distributions occurred, mostly attributable to food and weather. Three aerial census flights over the major wintering areas of this flock indicated that flock status remained excellent. Warm and dry weather in Canada delayed the migration of .geese by as much as ,a month, so that the Arkansas Valley did not hold a normal complement of birds untii well into December. Hunter harvest was down' f'r-omrbhe nine-year average t.hroughout the Va Ll.ey , and harvest at Two But-tes was very low. The number of goose hunters in the Valley was the lowest since 1954, but the average season bag per ,hunter was the second highest of the nine-year period. The wounding loss study estimated a loss of 18-20 percent of the total hunting mortality. Hunters fired a total of 14,357 shots on the Two Buttes firing line, with an estimated total ammunition cost of $2,297, and an estimated 1,346 pounds of lead expended. Hunting pressure was low following the delayed arrival of geese, and 'did not peak until the Christmas holiday period. Most hunting preisure on Two Buttes Reservoir was concentrated at the southeast end. A total of 1,301 geese were newly banded, and a total of 1,417 geese were fluoroscoped in the Two Buttes area. Data from these trapped birds r~veal that (1) the_sex ratio is close to 50-50; (2) the checked bag at the check stations is a more reliable index of age ratios than is the trapped sample; (3)-average weights of geese are largely influenced by age and sex ratios, changes in body conditions, and changes in sub-species composition of the samples; (4) estimation of body shot incidence at the time of arrival of geese could not be related to gunning pressure, and the best estimate is the data from the first trapping effort; (5) color-marking showed that considerable interchange of geese exists throughout the Valley; (6) using fluoroscopy to determine total hUnting pressure on geese, it is apparent that only about half of the body shot are acquired while geese are wintering in the Two Buttes area, and therefore the firing line and hunting in surrounding area? is not exerting undue pressure on this segment of the flock. Family group counts indicated lower production in the flock this year, contrary to all other reports and indications, and it is believed that the technique of counting must be improved by project personnel. Weather records failed to show a clear-cut effect upon the harvest of geese in the Two Buttes area. Recommendations for continuing study of the Arkansas Valley goose flock are presented. ��-29- Investigations of the Arkansas Valley Wintering Goose Flock William H. Rutherford INTRODUCTION: The wintering goose population in the Arkansas Valley is probably the most important single waterfowl flock in Colorado in relation to hunter use and enjoyment. Before closer management of a specific waterfowl flock can be attained, the basic knowledge of its numbers, local movements, and habits must be gained. The increase in hunting pressure and the corresponding increased harvest of this flock indicates the need for future recommendations which will permit the correct harvest of this resource upon a sustained yield basis. OBJECTIVES: (1) To determine the fall movement of geese into the Arkansas Valley, and the size of the wintering flock. (2) To investigate the wounding loss of geese at Two Buttes Reservoir. (3) To determine the relationship between weather conditions and harvest of geese at Two Buttes Reservoir. (4) To determine age and sex composition, mortality, and percent of birds carrying shot. (5) To investigate the dispersal of birds from Two Buttes during the hunting season. PROCEDURES: Techniques and procedures remained the same as reported in previous years. A complete hunter check was obtained through operation of check stations; and birds were trapped, banded, and fluoroscoped with complete records of age, sex, weight, and number of shot kept for each bird. RESULTS: Water, Food, and Weather Conditions: Water levels in the major reservoirs of the Arkansas Valley were generally excellent for wintering geese. As is typical through the winter, John Martin Reservoir was very low, but geese seem to prefer this situation. Food conditions were considerably poorer this year than last year. Corn, milo, and wheat on irrigated land made good crops, but the proportion of irrigated land is quite low. On dryland, the milo crop was mediocre, and winter wheat was poor. Dry soil conditions in the fall resulted in poor wheat germination, and poor growth of plants which did germinate. The soil remained dry, and considerable blowing of wheat fields occurred in late winter and early spring. During most of the hunting season, weather conditions were considered fair for goose hunting. No major storms were experienced, but extreme cold weather did occur late in the season. Migration Movement and Wintering Population: Three aerial censuses were used to determine the Canada goose movement into, and wintering populations of, the Arkansas Valley (Table 1). These flights were coordinated with similar ones in the Texas panhandle, and with ground observations by various personnel, so that it was possible to determine the status of the entire flock rather than just that portion-Wintering in Colorado. Unlike last year, when weather forced cancellations and postponements of inventory flights, all flights this year were completed on schedule, although the crew which conducted the January inventory in the Texas panhandle had to "hole up JI because of weather, and could not return to Colorado immediately after finishing the inventory. �-30- On the basis of these counts, and observations of personnel in each area, it is obvious that the Canada goose population in the Arkansas Valley was at least as high as in the previous year, and flock status remained excellent. Table 1 -- Aerial Canada Goose Counts, Arkansas Valley, Colorado, by Dates, 1962-63. Reservoir November 14 December 12 January 9 Meredith 39 1,414 383 Eads 20 14,900 15,000 John Martin 100 10,000 11,500 Rutherford 5,000 6,200 Arkansas River 119 Two Buttes 7,000 2,500 Blue 45 225 Dyes 4 20 Henry 90 175 Holbrook 12 Horsecreek 200 Verhoff 35 Thurston 15 CF&I 12 TOTALS 190 38,911 35,889 Compared with previous years, this year showed a vast difference in migration pattern and distribution of Canada geese in the Valley. An extremely warm and dry autumn in Canada delayed the southward movement of geese by as much as a month. Where normally the first substantial flights of geese reach the Valley about the first week of November, the first aerial inventory (see Table 1) showed only 190 geese on November 14. Canadian biologists reported up to 20,000 Canada geese in the Kindersley area and on the South Saskatchewan River on November 9, and a follow-up report indicated many geese still in Saskatchewan as late as December 4. Flights into the John Martin and Eads areas arrived about November 21, but Two Buttes Reservoir had practically no geese until about November 26. Many flights passed by Two Buttes and settled on Rutherford Lake. In Texas, flights did not begin to arrive at Waggoner Ranch until November 29, and peaked on December 4; Buffalo Lakes Refuge received flights even later -- 7,000 on December 4, and 14,000 on December 12. Western Nebraska held more wintering geese this year than ever before, with almost 7,000 being counted on December 13. By the time the second aerial inventory was conducted, on December 12, the Arkansas Valley held a normal complement of Canada geese, which then remained in fairly constant numbers. The distribution pattern throughout the Valley was somewhat changed, with the bulk of the population being centered in the Eads-John Martin areas. This distribution pattern was probably influenced greatly by food conditions, since food was judged to be poor in the Two Buttes area. �-31Comparison of January inventory information for this Canada goose flock, in Table 2, shows a normal wintering population. It cannot be compared directly with last year's count, because an accurate count last year was not obtained until February 7, and there exists a strong possibility that some Texas geese had moved northward by that time. This year's January count can, however, be compared with those of other years. An interpretation of data indicates that the entire wintering flock consisted of more than 100,000 birds, which is a notable increase over last year. The high total count was made on the second inventory flight on December 12, and consisted of 123,000 geese. A.total of 110,000 birds was counted in the January inventory. Table 2 -- January Inventory of Canada Geese, Arkansas Valley, Colorado, 1948-1963. Year 1948 1949 1950 1951 1952 1953 Y Goose Count Year Goose Count Year Goose Count 20,280 1960 37,394 1954 1961 25,110 31,360 / 1955 40,250~ 24,212 1962 1956 24,617 35,889 1963 1957 35,894 1958 44,660 1959 Inventory of Feb. 7, 1962 substituted for January, 1962, inventory. 4,798 12,286 13,170 19,320 30,463 20,236 Hunter Harvest: Check stations were operated again t~is_year in the Two Buttes Management Area. This permitted collection of a variety of information relating to harvest and hunting pressure. Tabulation of this information (see Table 3) reveals that 1,479 hunters, hunting a total of 3,178 huntersdays, took 418 geese during the season of which 204 (48.8%) were adults, and 214 (51.2%) were birds-of-the-year. These hunter use and harvest data show a considerable drop from the year before, with total number of hunters being down 38.2 percent, total hunter-days of use down 33.2 percent, and total goose harvest down 55.8 percent. . Table 3 -- Goose Harvest, Wounding Loss, Hunting Pressure, and Hunter Success, Two Buttes Management Area, 1962-63. Item Resident Non-Resident Total Goose Harvest: Adult Juvenile Total 130 153Y 283 74 61 135 204 214 418 Wounding Loss 40 36 76 Successful Hunters: Number Ave. bag/hunter 206 1.37 85 1.59 291 1.44 All Hunters: Number 1,152 Hunter days 2,283 Hunter days/hunter 1.98 Ave. bag/hunter 0.246 Ave. bag/hunter day 0.124 327 895 2·74 0.413 0.151 1,479 3,178 2.15 0.283 0.132 ~/ Includes one juvenile white-fronted goose. �-32- Table 4 compares the current goose harvest in the Arkansas Valley with the nine-year average, indicating that the total harvest during the past year was down 27.9 percent from the nine-year average. The late: arrival of geese in the Valley was primarily responsible for this decrease; the distributional pattern of goose populations after arrival in the Valley was responsible for the variations in individual counties from the nine-year average. Table 4 -- Goose Harvest in the Arkansas Valley, by County, Nine-Year Average, 1954-61, 1962-63, Based on Results of Random Survey. Number and Percent of Geese Bagged 9-year average 1962-63 County Lakes No. No. % % Baca Two Buttes 48.2 6,345 IJ232 13·0 Kiowa Eads and Blue 2,335 2,662 28.0 17·7 Prowers Two Buttes and Eads ·16.1 2,116 2,847 30.0 Bent John Martin, Blue, and Horsecreek 1,400 10.6 834 8.8 Crowley Meredith and Henry 647 1,298 4·9 13.6 Pueblo 88 0·7 Huerfano 101 0.8 26 0·3 Otero Horsecreek, Cheraw group, Dyes, and Holbrook 66 0·5 331 3·5 Las Animas 2.8 265 75 0·5 TOTALS 100.0 13,173 100.0 9,495 For example, Baca County, which has consistently accounted for about half of the total harvest in past years, fell to one-fifth in 1961-62 and to only one-eighth of the total harvest this year. Table 5 lists goose hunting statistics for the past nine years, and shows that stamp sales for 1962 were by far the lowest of the entire period. In addition, the estimated number of goose hunters in the Arkansas Valley was the lowest for the entire period. The large decrease in stamp sales can be attributed mainly to the very restrictive Central Flyway duck season, but it is apparent that in spite of liberal goose seasons, the number of goose hunters is also decreasing. The average season bag of geese per hunter has remained fairly stable, with only a slight decrease in 1962; thus it can be said that goose hunting this year was as good as in former years, for those hunters who participated. Probably the continuing decrease in goose hunter numbers in the Arkansas Valley was brought about by the late arrival of geese, and the changing distributional pattern after arrival. There is no doubt that goose behavior has been considerably more erratic the past two years than formerly. �-33- Table 5 -- Goose Hunting Season Statistics, 1954-1962. Arkansas Valley Estimated Average season goose Stamp bag hunters sales Dates of season Year 1.04 32,450 7,071 11/1 12/30 1954 1.54 11/1 9,054 12/30 39,107 1955 1.05 36,303 9,833 11/9 - 1/7 1956 1.39 41,794 9,113 11/2 - 12/31 1957 1.51 10,082 41,897 11/17 - 1/15 1958 1.61 8,888 31,431 10/26 - 1/8 1959 1.39 9,838 1960 10/26 - 1/8 30,592 1.68 24,854 1961 11/10 - 1/8 7,577 1.58 6,021 17,701 1962 10/31 - 1/13 Estimated kill 7)372 13,904 10,276 12,656 15,205 14,309 13,629 12,724 9,495 Wounding Loss: Wounding loss in the 1962-63 season was estimated by two methods: (1) The small game hunter random survey indicated a loss of 19.5 percent of the total goose harvest mortality; and (2) check station information permits calculation of loss on the firing line of 18.2 percent. These two figures show much closer agreement this year than has been the case in the past, with the random survey estimate being down somewhat and the Two Buttes check station estimate up considerably. Possibly hunters at Two Buttes are becoming less reluctant to admit wounding of geese, and their answers are now more closely approaching the actual figures. It appears that the actual wounding loss in the Arkansas Valley goose flock is in the range of 18-20 percent. Hunter Habits and Characteristics: Check station operators continued to collect data in 1962-63 from a sample of hunters on the number of shots fired. The forms which were returned to the check stations by hunters constituted a sample of 15.1 percent of the total number of hunter-days throughout the season. Based on the total of 3,153 hunter-days of use, a direct projection of the sample shows that a total of 14,357 shots were fired on the Two Buttes Management Area firing line, or an average of 34.75 shots for each goose brought to bag. The estimated total number of shots fired this year is drastically decreased from the year before, much more so than the decrease in the number of hunter-days of use, or the decrease in the goose harvest, so that the estimated number of shots fired for each goose brought to bag also shows a marked decrease. This lends further credence to the belief that the decrease in hunting pressure was almost entirely among the novice class of hunters, and that experienced goose hunters continued to hunt as before. This year's sample of shots fired shows that a total of $2,297.12 was expended for ammunition, or an average of $5.50 for each goose bagged, based on a conservatively estimated value of $4.00 per box, or $0.16 per round, on shotgun ammunition. Also, if it is assumed that one and one-half ounces of shot per shell is an acceptable average (probably a little low, because of a high proportion of 10-guage Magnums firing two ounces of shot), this means that a total of 1,345.55 pounds, or approximately two-thirds of a ton, of lead was launched skyward. For each goose bagged, 3.22 pounds of lead was expended. �-34- Figure 1 shows the weekly hunting pressure on the Two Buttes Management Area, measured in terms of total number of shots fired for each week, and average number per day for each week. These figures were derived by projecting the sample of shots fired to cover total hunter-days of use for each week. The resulting graph shows considerable variation in total weekly gunning pressure, while the graph showing average number of shots fired per day for each week of hunting season tends to level off the daily and weekly variations. Daily and weekly variations are caused, of course, by the combination of varying hunter use (weather, weekends vs. weekdays, etc~) and varying hunting conditions (weather, goose population present, changes in daily goose flight patterns, etc.). 1961-62 showed the highest gunning pressure immediately after the opening of season. 1962-63 showed a remarkable contrast to this pattern, because of the delayed and sporadic arrival of geese. Gunning pressure built up slowly after the geese arrived, then levelled off, and finally reached a peak during the Christmas holiday period. Following this, gunning pressure decreased rapidly and finally almost diminished entirely even before the hunting season ended. This corresponded to a general departure of geese from Two Buttes Reservoir in late December and early January. Geese did not return in numbers until late January, after the end of hunting season. By January 7, only a few hundred geese were using Two Buttes Reservoir, and hunting pressure had fallen to almost nothing. Check stations were closed on this date, even though the season did not end until January 13. Table 6 shows the season totals for hunter-days of use of each of the pits on the firing line at Two Buttes. The table shows more than four times as many hunter-days of use on the south firing line as on the north firing line, which is a proportional increase almost double that of last year. It also shows that pits on the west end of the north firing line received almost no hunter use, and that the bulk of hunting pressure was concentrated at the east end of the south firing line. However, the west end of the south firing line received proportionally more use this year than last year. Special Banding Investigation: During the 1962-63 wintering season, special emphasis was placed on trapping, banding, color-marking, and fluoroscoping geese at intervals throughout the season. Table 7 lists the number of birds banded by interval. Because of adverse public reaction toward in-season trapping of geese at Two Buttes Reservoir, the trapping operation was moved to Turk's Pond (Rutherford Lake as listed in Table 1), a small privately owned body of water about ten miles southeast of Two Buttes Reservoir. These two locations are used by the same group of geese, and free interchange of birds is common. During most of the season, Turk's Pond held as many or more geese than Two Buttes Reservoir. After the close of hunting season, and after geese had returned in numbers to Two Buttes, the trapping-operation was moved there. In sum total, a larger sample of geese was taken this year than last year, with 1,301 geese being newly banded. This total, as listed in Table 7, does not include recaptures, but these recaptures are included in subsequent analyses. The total includes 285 geese trapped without using nait, either on lake shore resting areas or in fields with the use of live decoys. This trapping was done to investigate the effect of bait-trapping vs. non-baited trapping upon the incidence of body shot in geese, with the results to be reported under Work Plan 1, Job No. 10 �LEGEND ~ TOTAL SHOTS ..................... AVERAGE SHOTS PER DAY 6 (/) o z « (/) ::) o I I- '-' o 4 w ~ LL Check Station Opening Nov. 23 Check , ~ o Station Closing Jan.7 I (/) 2 Season Openinq Oct. 31 / 8 15 _------=~--NOV. .......•.........................•..........................•.........................•.................. 22 29 WEEKLY 6 13 DEC. 20 INTERVALS Figure1.--Weekty Hunting Pressure by Shots fired, Two Buttes Resczrvoir Arcza- Goose Hunting Season, 1962-1963. 27 ~JAN. , �..-.. ~ z w U 0::: W 0.... '-" 80 • • • 60 0I • • • If) I ~ ADULTS 40 ~ If) • 0 0::: en 20 • •• 4 30 23 • 10 10 JAN. TRAPPING Figure 30 20 DEe. -NOV. 2. -- Regression Two Buttes of Y (Percent Area, of Geese 1962 - 1963. with One or More Ernbeded INTERVALS Shot) on X (Length of Hunting Season) , 14 �-37- Table 6 -- Resident and Non-Resident Hunter-Days of Use by Pit Location, Two Buttes Management Area, 1962-63. South Side North Side Pit Hunter-days Pit Hunter-days Pit Hunter-days Pit Hunter-days No. Res. Non-res. No. Res. Non-res. No. Res. Non-res. No. Res. Non-res. 4 18 82 2 1 1 14 1 35 4 2 1 18 2 101 2 19 36 7 7 10 1 20 2 103 13 37 3 3 5 3 4 21 21 1 1 4 64 38 25 3 5 20 1 22 10 -------------19 5 5 5 77 12 42 44 6 22 6 4 2 68 6 23 13 24 80 16 4 43 54 25 3 7 7 8 44 16 22 10 8 43 25 49 5 35 24 12 26 2 45 23 19 33 3 35 9 9 46 10 2 68 10 31 27 31 3 39 7 28 11 2 2 64 11 47 13 29 36 30 9 4 48 6 12 12 80 17 29 27 33 3 24 46 41 1 49 19 13 30 13 7 3 14 18 4 14 48 40 2 31 50 30 7 41 1 15 27 13 32 51 15 3 3 59 8 16 8 2 16 41 13 50 52 23 33 18 11 100 14 B 38 36 17 17 53 7 28 18 21 10 54 13 24 6 19 17 55 9 20 26 10 20 56 25 21 14 21 12 35 57 8 22 16 1 58 3 11 1 23 59 9 24 60 1 23 13 3 10 61 1 20 1 25 62 2 1 26 12 6 4 4 -------------27 28 1 1 17 65 1 66 10 29 5 3 8 1 -------------30 68 2 31 7 3 2 4 1 32 69 1 -------------33 5 2 1 34 71 3 -------------- 75 TOTALS Resident: Non-resident: Total: GRAND TOTAL 1 1,802 780 2,582 Resident: Non-resident: Total: Resident: Non-resident Total: 2,283 895 3,178 481 115 59b �-38- Table 7 -- Two Buttes Area Banding Results, 1962-63. Interval Number of Geese Trap Type Location Dates Banded Baited Turk's Pond Dec. 4,5,7, 1962 376 Not baited Turk's Pond Dec. 12,14,21, 1962 151 Not baited Turk's Pond Jan 8,10, 1963 75 Not baited. Field near 2 Buttes Jan. 22,29, 1963 59 4981:./ Two Buttes Baited Jan 27,31j Feb. 6,8, 1963 Baited Turk's Pond Feb. 7, 1963 142 TOTAL 1,301 1:.1 Includes 6 birds unable to fly, and later delivered to Cheyenne Mountain Zoo at Colorado Springs. Information obtained from trapping and banding geese, along with certain information from check stations, is presented under appropriate sub-headings in the following: Age and Sex Composition: Age determination of all geese trapped was by notched tail-feather methods, double checked by cloacal examination. Age determination of all geese checked through check stations was by notched tail-feather method. Table 8 compares the percent of young birds between the trapped sample and the check station sample, revealing fairly close agreement between the two, in contrast to previous years when the percent of young birds in the trapped sample was far lower than in the check station sample. Either or both samples could be biased, but it has customarily been considered that check station information may be a more valid measure of age composition for the following reasons: 1. It is believed that firing-line harvest has less tendency to be selective by age or sex than other harvest methods, and there is better opportunity for an adequate sample of age classes, since all geese pass over the firing line. 2. Trapping was confined to certain spots along the reservoir shores, or in selected fields. Geese were baited or decoyed to these areas, and there is a distinct chance that for any particular instant in which the net was fired, the area could have been occupied by a population of geese which was not representative of the entire population. On the other hand, the check station information on age composition may be inaccurate as compared with the trapped sample, because of the difference in the level of training between checkers and members of the banding crew. It is known that information on the trapped sample is as accurate as is possible, because it was obtained by trained personnel and double checked by using two different methods. Check station operators used only the notched tail-feather methods, and may have introduced errors into the data. There is a good chance, however, that many check station errors are self-eliminating, since there always exists a 50-50 chance of being right on any individual bird. �-39- Table 8 -- Age Comparison of the 'NO Buttes Reservoir Area Canada Goose Flock, 1962-63, as Estimated by ,Trapping and Check Station Results. Check Station Sample Trapped SampleI/ Percent Total Percent Total young birds young birds * Date 54.9 82 11/23 to 12/3 60.0 52.6 137 382 12/4 to 12/11 58.1 93 63·4 153 12/12 to 12/21 40.0 105 63.6 12/22 to 1/10 77 61 1/22 and 1/29 47·5 46.7 518 1/27 to 2/6 and 2/8 61.4 145 2/7 51.1 417 1,336 TOTALS 55·0 !I Includes recaptures not listed in Table 7· All information on sex ratios was derived from the trapping operation. In the light of information discovered in the age analysis, the information in Table 9, following, may be open to question, although not to the extent of that in previous years. However, there is no reason to suspect that the sex composition is out of proportion, and certainly calculation of the percentage of males and females for each of the trapping intervals indicates a fairly evenly balanced sex ratio. Table 9 -- Sex Composition of the Two Buttes Area Canada Goose Flock, 1962-63. ~/ Date Males Percent Females Percent Total Percent 12/4 to 12/11 12/12 to 12/21 12/22 to 1/10 1/22 and 1/29 1/27 to 2/6 and 2/8 2/7 TOTALS 205 84 37 33 255 69 683 53 ·7 54·9 48.1 54.1 49·3 47·9 51.2 177 69 40 28 262 75 651 46·3 45·1 51.9 45·9 50·7 52.1 48.8 382 153 77 61 517 144 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 1,334 ~/ Includes recaptures not listed in Table 7. Goose Weights: For purposes of comparison, the weights of hunter-harvested birds and of trapped and banded birds are presented here in Table 10. In spite of some variations in weight between intervals and between the two samples for the same interval, the mean weights for all intervals combined show close agreement for the two samples. Weight variations within the sample breakdowns are undoubtedly the result of a combination of changes in age ratios within the adult class, sub-species composition, sex ratios, and body conditions. �-40- Table 10 -- Comparison of Weights of Geese from Trapped and Check Station Samples, Two Buttes Area, 1962-63. Intervals Nov. Dec. Dec. Dec. Jan. All 412232222Intervals Dec. Dec. Dec. Jan. Feb. Combined II. 2I. 10. 3· 7· Check Station: Number of A.dults Average Weight, Ibs. 38 5·72 65 5·00 39 5·87 63 5.88 205 5·57 Number of Juveniles Average Weight, Ibs. 43 5·05 72 5.08 52 5·07 42 5·20 209 5·10 Number of Geese Average Weight, Ibs. 81 5·36 137 5·04 91 5.41 105 5·61 414 5·33 Trapping and Banding: Number of A.dults Average Weight, Ibs. 156 5.67 54 6.15 28 5.69 362 6·73 600 6.35 Number of Juveniles Average Weight, Lbs . 230 4.89 97 5.38 49 4·71 359 5·02 735 5·01 Number of Geese Average Weight, Ibs. 386 5·21 151 5·65 77 5·05 721 5.88 1,335 5.61 Color-Marking: This year, for the first time, samples of geese from the trapping operation were color-marked in an attempt to learn more about movement and interchange between various locations in the Arkansas Valley. A total of 258 geese which were trapped during hunting season were dyed with a yellow picric acid sQlution, and 273 geese trapped following the close of hunting season were dyed with a red analine dye (Rhodamine B). Subsequently, these colored birds (particularly the yellow ones) showed up in sightings of geese in many different locations, and yellow birds were also reported in hunter bags from locations other than the release site. Thus, we learned that complete and free interchange of birds between Two Buttes Reservoir and Turk!s Pond exists, and also that considerable interchange between the Two Buttes area and the Eads-John Martin area occurs. Later, reports were received from personnel at the Buffalo Lakes National Wildlife Refuge at Umbarger, Texas, that yellow birds had been sighted. Fluoroscopy: The results of the fluoroscopy operation by trapping interval are presented in Table 11, and in Figure 2, revealing a change in the estimate of the percentage of the population (both adult and juvenile) carrying one or more body shot between intervals. Naturally there is a high difference between body shot incidence of adults and juveniles, explained by the fact that tJiis is the first year!s hunting on juveniles while adults have been subjected to two or more years of hunting depending upon their age. Much effort has been made in the past to determine a method of measuring hunting pressure by means of the percent of birds in the population carrying shot. This may not be a valid criterion, since the percent carrying shot may, and probably does, depend upon a number of different factors, each of which �-41- singly or in combination act to change the percent of all birds carrying shot independently of the hunting season pressure. Some of these factors are listed as follows: 1. Age composition of the population. If each age class component of the population is present in the same proportion year after year, then age composition will have little effect. However, if breeding success is sporadic with varying size yearling populations entering the population universe year after year, then it is obvious that the percent of all adults with shot will vary from year to year, and valid yearly comparisons cannot be made. 2. To eliminate the potential error in number 1, it would be necessary to confine all analysis to birds-of-the-year or juveniles. But here again, the size of the annual increment may have important bearing on the percent carrying shot, since the larger the number of juveniles with a stable hunting pressure, the less probability of any individual bird acquiring shot. Thus, a measure of age composition of the flock along with annual production would seem necessary to make fluoroscopy an adequately workable technique. Table 11 -- Percent of Geese with Shot, by Age and Sex Class and Trapping Interval, Two Buttes Area, 1962-63. Trapping Interval Dec. Dec. 12, Jan. 8,10, Feb. All Intervals Age and Sex Class Combined 4,5,7 14,21 22,27,29,31 6,7,8 Adults: Number of Males 66 141 85 29 321 Percent with shot 60.0 62.1 60·7 69·7 56·7 Number of Females Percent with shot 74 59·5 28 60·7 64 60·9 134 50·7 300 56.0 Total Adults Percent with shot 159 59·7 57 61.4 130 65.4 275 53·8 621 58·5 Juveniles.!/ Number of Males Percent with shot 132 18.2 60 23·3 99 36.4 116 22.4 407 24.6 Number of Females Percent with shot 111 12.6 44 27·3 113 29·2 121 23·1 389 22.4 Total Juveniles Percent with shot 243 15·6 104 25·0 212 32·5 237 22.8 796 23·5 All Geese: Number of Males Percent with shot 217 34.6 89 36.0 165 49·7 257 41.2 728 40·5 Number of Females Percent with shot 185 31.4 Total Geese Percent with Shot 402 33·1 72 40.3 161 37·9 177 40·7 342 45.0 255 37·6 512 39·5 689 37·0 1,417 38.8 ~/ Birds-of-the-year. �-42- The final trapping interval (February 6, 7, and 8) is included in the data presented in Table 11, but the percent of birds carrying shot cannot be directly compared with the other intervals because of the certain knowledge that Texas geese had begun to move northward by the time these catches were made. A. total of five geese which had been banded at Buffalo Lakes Refuge during the previous month were included in these catches. An Examination of Table 11 shows that shot incidence for the final trapping interval was considerably lower than for the other intervals, which is a complete reversal of what would be expected. Obviously, these Texas geese, which are subjected to much lighter hunting pressure than geese which winter in Colorado, made up a considerable part of the catch during February. Distribution of Flock Hunting Pressure: One of the prime motives for emphasizing the banding and fluoroscopy effort was to establish, if possible, the effect of the firing line at Two Buttes on this goose flock. Actually, in considering the information, it is recognized that it is not possible to separate the firing line from the surrounding area; thus, inferences made must include the Two Buttes area in general. The regression lines (see Figure 2) showing the average increase in body shot incidence through the hunting season were calculated on the basis of data from each catch of geese, rather than on trapping intervals as shown in Table 11. In other words, for purposes of establishing these lines, each catch of birds was treated separately. The exception to this is that all post-season catches were combined as one catch, since there should be no difference in shot incQdence once hunting pressure ceases. The February catches were eliminated from the data, because of the presence of Texas geese in these catches. This year, no valid comparison can be made between gunning pressure and incidence of body shot, because of the erratic behavior of the geese. Gunning pressure is calculated, of course, from a sample of hunters on the Two Buttes firing line. Proportionally, the amount of gunning pressure contributed by the filing line was much less than in past years, because the geese did not stay consistently at Two Buttes. The population from which the trapped and fluoroscoped samples were drawn was subjected to gunning pressure from widely scattered areas throughout the Valley, and an accurate measure of this pressure is impossible. We can only assume that body shot incidence will increase more rapidly during periods of heavy gunning pressure, but under the conditions of the 1962-63 season, we cannot measure it. In estimating the effect of the Two Buttes firing line upon the goose flock, it has previously been customary to project the regression lines (Figure 2) to the left of the first trapping effort, in order to estimate the percentage of birds carrying shot upon arrival at Two Buttes. In the present case, this projection has not been made; first, because of the delayed arrival of the geese, and second, because of the sporadic appearance and dissappearance of geese after the migration started. Hunting pressure was concentrated on a much smaller sized flock of geese prior to the first trapping attempt than afterward, and these first small flights of geese may or may not have been components of the later wintering flock. Thus, the best measure of body shot incidence at the time of arrival of geese is the data from the first trapping interval (Table 11). It is estimated that 15.6 percent of juveniles and 59.7 percent of adults were carrying body shot upon arrival in the Valley. . �-43- Gunning pressure from the Two Buttes firing line, field hunting from surrounding areas, and hunting on lakes other than Two Buttes which this population of birds may have frequented, resulted in an increase in body shot incidence on the flock to 32.5 percent of juveniles and 65.4 percent of adults. In applying the juvenile method of estimating the effect of this hunting upon the flock, as described in previous completion reports for this job, it is seen that slightly more than half of the juveniles carrying shot at the end of the 1962-63 season acquired their shot after arrival in the Valley. Examination of the regression lines in Figure 2 and the data in Table 11 indicates that juvenile geese acquired shot at a considerably greater rate than did adults. If the bulk of hunting pressure on this flock had been contributed by the Two Buttes firing line, it would be unlikely that this difference would exist, since all geese pass over the firing line at the same height and there can be little, if any, selectivity on the part of hunters toward age-classes of birds. However, a great deal of this year's hunting pressure on the flock came from areas other than Two Buttes, where juveniles are decidedly the more vulnerable of the two classes. This differential vulnerability is reflected in the regression lines in Figure 2. It can be concluded that about half of the geese newly acqulrlng shot, at least during the 1962-63 season, were shot in the Arkansas Valley, while the other half received their shot prior to their arrival in the Valley. Flock status has continued to remain excellent, with notable increases in the flock size being registered during the past two years. What these data reveal, therefore, is that Colorado hunters are receiving a reasonably fair share of the hunting potential of this goose flock, and that this hunting is not detrimental to the well-being of the flock. Family Group Counts: For the second year, data on sizes of family groups in the Arkansas Valley flock were collected. These data are presented in Table 12. According to all available reports from Canada, this flock of geese experienced an excellent year for nesting and production, yet the average family group size as presented in Table 12 was considerably smaller than last year's. This discrepancy is impossible to explain, and it is felt that much more practice in the technique of counting is needed by project personnel. No interpretation of data will be attempted until further data are available. Effects of Weather Upon Goose Flights and Hunter Harvest: Before the beginning of hunting season, an aerator was installed at Two Buttes Reservoir, and the thermostat was adjusted so that the air pump would turn on when the air temperature dropped to freezing. The first real test of its effectiveness in preventing complete freeze-over of the lake occurred during a severe cold snap in December. Unfortunately, the accompanying storm knocked out electrical power overnight, and by the time electrical service was restored to the air pump, the lake had completely frozen over. It took about a day of steady operation of the aerator to open a hole in the ice, during which time the geese departed. From this time until the end of hunting season, the open water created by the aerator was the only open water on the reservoir. After a few days, some geese returned to Two Buttes, and the fact that we were able to hold any birds at all from then on attests to the effectiveness of the aerator. It is believed that had electrical service not been interrupted, we would have had far better success in holding birds on the reservoir. �-44- Table 12 -- Family Group Counts of Canada Geese, Two Buttes Area, 1962-63. No. No. Ave. No. Birds Location Date Observer Birds Groups Grp. Size Present Activity Turk's 11/29 Hopper, Funk 245 95 2.58 5,000 Take off from fields Turk's 11/29 Funk 427 126 3·30 5,000 Land on pond Turk's 11/29 Funk 32 9 3·50 5,000 Land in fields 2 Buttes 12/8 Hopper, Rutherford 171 51 3·35 6,800 Resting on water 2 Buttes 12/13 Hopper, Funk 189 Turk's 12/14 Hopper, Funk 79 33 2 Buttes 12/17 Rutherford 265 Turk's 12/20 Hopper, Funk 270 Turk's 12/21 Funk 141 Turk's 12/21 Funk 98 Turk's 1/8 Funk 181 77 Turk's 1/14 Funk 243 Turk's 1/14 Funk 306 Turk's 1/19 Funk 411 2 Buttes 1/20 Funk 309 2 Buttes 1/29 Rutherford TOTALS 7,000 t! 2.40 5,000 t! 108 2.45 6,500 t! 117 2·31 5,000 Land in fields 1.90 6,000 Leaving fields 6,000 Land in fields 2·35 3,500 Resting on water 109 2.23 8,000 Leaving fields 121 2·53 8,000 Land in fields 2·31 8,000 " 148 2.09 2,500 Leaving water 139 46 3.02 7,200 " 3,506 1,397 2·51 Mr. Wally Ballard, caretaker of the hunting club which leases land on the south side of Turk's Pond, cooperated with project personnel by keeping detailed records of weather, hunting pressure, and goose kill on forms provided. Appreciation for this cooperation is gratefully extended. Data are presented in Table 13. It is apparent from an examination of Table 13 that no clear-cut combination of weather factors can be said to be responsible for poor or good goose hunting. Generally speaking, an overcast sky is conducive to good hunting, but this was not altogether true. Hunting was much better from about Christmas �-45- IS Pond, Table 13 -- H~ting Pressure, Goose Kill, and Weather at 'I'ur'k Arkansas Valley, 1962-63. Date Item 12/1 12/2 12/412/5 12/3 12/6 12/7 No. hunters 2 4 '7 3 5 3 3 Goose kill 0 2 0 1 0 1 3 0.0 Bag/hunter 0.40 0.0 0.0 0·50 0·33 0·75 Sky Condition o-cast o-cast o-~ast o-cast clear clear clear Temp. AM 31 29 19 29 39 32 39 of PM 40 50 65 36 50 55 55 Snow on ground? no no no no no no no Wind velocity stiff light none stiff none light light Wind direction lIJliJ SW NW N NW 12/..9 12/..10 12/..11 12/..12 12/..13 12/..14 12/..15 No. hunters 4 13 4 9 9 5 7 Goose kill 12 10 4 0 0 0 0 1.11 0.44 Bag/hunter 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0·92 Sky condition o-cast o-cast o-cast clear clear clear clear Temp AM 21 24 28 26 29 19 30 of PM 60 29 50 58 55 55 55 Snow on ground? no Wind velocity light Wind direction NW 12 17 No. hunters 2 Goose kill 0 0 0 0 1 Bag/hunter 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.12 Sky condition clear rain o-cast o-cast clear clear o-cast Temp 44 42 AM 40 45 42 24 39 of PM 66 46 48 28 26 50 57 Snow on ground? no no no no no no no Wind velocity light none stiff stiff light hard stiff Wind direction NW NW J\TW NW N S 1272b 12727 12Z28 12Z25 12Z29 12Z30 12Z31 No. hunters 8 10 10 11 12 11 6 Goose kill 11 1 0 20 4 5 5 1.10 1.82 Bag/hunter 0.12 0.0 0.45 0.83 0·33 Sky condition snow clear clear o-cast o-cast clear clear Temp. 11 AM 18 32 28 15 32 35 of PM 18 41 52 52 58 37 52 Snow on ground? yes no no no no no no Wind velocity stiff light stiff light stiff none light Wind direction S N S SE S NW 172 lZ3 lZ5 lZ8 lZ7 lZ§ ~74 No. hunters 10 10 11 7 9 9 Goose kill 1 4 6 1 13 17 5 1.18 Bag/hunter 0.10 1.89 0.11 0·57 0·50 0·75 Sky condition clear o-cast snow clear clear clear clear Temp. AM 26 22 22 50 36 30 39 of PM 60 50 32 49 50 65 35 Snow on ground? no no yes no no no no Wind velocity none light stiff stiff stiff stiff light Wind direction S N N N NW N 12/8 '7 8 1.14 o-cast 39 47 no light N 12/16 8 0 0.0 clear 30 66 2.0 o-cast 32 45 no hard S 171 10 4 0.40 o-cast 22 46 no none lZ9 7 0 0.0 c Le ar' 55 65 no light NW �-46- Table 13 -- Continued pg Date Item No. hunters Goose kill Bag/hunter Sky condition Temp. AM of PM Snow on ground? Wind velocity Wind direction 1/10 11 5 0.45 snow 21 13 yes stiff N Season Totals: Total hunter-days -------------315 Total goose kill --------------166 Average bag per hunter-day ----0.527 Average goose kill per day ----3.77 Average no. hunters per day ---7.16 1/11 6 7 1.17 snow -4 -1 yes hard N 4 0.67 clear -4 -1 yes stiff N 1/13 9 4 0.44 clear 15 29 yes .light NW until the end of season than earlier, but the number of geese present remained fairly constant throughout the season. Hunting success at Turk's Pond is completely dependent upon the daily flight patterns of the geese, and it is believed that feeding conditions influenced these patterns to a greater extent than did weather. RECOMMENDATIONS: The Arkansas Valley Goose Flock Investigation is continuing to produce extremely important information on which to base management. We must continue to collect this information, and to make provision for new aspects of the overall investigation, so that management of this flock can be improved. Following are recommendations for continuing project work: 1. Data on the increase in incidence of body shot throughout hunting season are now complete. Further work on banding and fluoroscopy should continue, following the close of season, with a goal of 1,500 geese trapped. 2. Check station information should be maintained on total harvest by age class on the Two Buttes Management Area. Collection of data to measure-hunting pressure by estimating shots fired should continue. 3· Other segments of the Arkansas Valley flock should be studied to determine if Two Buttes data are applicable elsewhere. Eads Lakes, Blue Lake, John Martin Reservoir, and Meredith Reservoir. are the principal areas needing study. 4. We must continue to cooperate with the Cooperative Goose Flock investigation of the Central Flyway, so that we can determine the annual status of this flock and its distribution between Texas, New Mexico, Colorado, and Nebraska. Prepared by: William H. Rutherford Principal Game Biologist Date: July, 1964 Approved by: Jack R. Grieb Project Leader Wayne W. Sandfort Chief, Game Research �July, 1964 -47JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO 'Project No. w-88-R-9 Work Plan No. Migratory Bird Investigations Job. No. 1 11 Title of Job: Evaluation of Duck Nesting Structures Period Covered: April 1, 1963 to December 1, 1963. ABSTRACT A study of duck nesting structures was conducted in north-central Colorado during the spring and summer of 1962 and 1963 to determine (1) if nesting structures will increase duck production; (2) which species will utilize structures; and (3) what factors influence structure acceptability. Knowledge gained during the s.pring and summer of 1962 concerned the potential productivity of study areas prior to nesting structure establishment. Twenty ponds were selected for study; 10 with less than 25 per cent of their shoreline containing emergents and 10 with more than 50 per cent of the shoreline with emergents. Five ponds in each category were randomly selected to receive structures. Ten structures were erected on each of these 10 ponds in September of 1962. Total estimated breeding pairs on the 20 study ponds were comparable for the two breeding seasons, with 238 in 1962 and 221 in 1963. Mallards and Bluewinged Teal were most numerous, with Gadwalls next in importance. These birds are entirely of a wild nature and now known population of semi-domestic ducks exists in this area. Careful observation of the 100 structures throughout the breeding season of 1963 revealed that not a single one was used by a nesting duck. No activity was associated with these structures that could be interpreted as nesting behavior. These results lead to the conclusion that nesting boxes of the type studied here will not increase wild duck production in north-central Colorado. Construction, erection, and maintenance of nesting structures proved to be an expensive and fruitless investment. It is recommended that sportsmen's groups avoid a program involving nesting structures if they plan to work only with wild birds. These groups would be wiser to concentrate their money and efforts toward supporting the purchase, improvement, and maintenance of waterfowl breeding habitat through the use of techniques known to be of value to wild ducks. ��-49EVALUATION OF DUCK NESTING STRUCTURES !/ Richard M. Hopper There has been considerable controversy in some of the mid-western states during the past years concerning the value of artificial duck nesting structures in waterfowl management. Much of the dispute was prompted by an article in a popular outdoor magazine which publicized the effectiveness of such structures (Cary, 1961). Sportsmen's clubs became interested in the establishment of nesting structures on their favorite ponds and marshes, with the idea of producing large numbers of ducks to improve hunting in the wake of declining waterfowl populations. Several sportsmen's groups proposed to the Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department that they sponsor, on a statewide baSiS, the construction and placement of duck nesting structures on lakes and marshes in the state. These groups requested our opinion of such a venture, and information regarding the type of areas and placement of structures for maximum benefits. This is the basic reason for this studyj but also, it is well that we test the effectiveness of duck nesting structures because of their potential usefulness in habitat improvement programs. Therefore, this study was initiated in the spring of 1962 and continued through the summer of 1963 with the following objectives: Presented at the 25th Midwest Wildlife Conference in St. Louis;..December 9-11, 1963. A contribution of Colorado Federal Aid Project w-b8-R. The author is indebted to Jack R. Grieb, Project Leader, who designed the study and gave helpful suggestions for writing the manuscript. Special acknowledgement goes to the following students at Colorado State University who conducted most of the field work: Howard D. Funk, Eugene E. Green, and Gary L. Brown. 1. To determine if nesting structures will increase duck production. 2. To determine which species will utilize structures. 3· To determine what factors influence structure acceptability, i.e., location, territorial tolerances, etc. METHODS Study Areas Twenty-three ponds, each of about 10 ac~es or less, were selected for initial study in the area north and east of Fort Collins, Larimer County, Colorado. Thirteen had less than 25 per cent of their shoreline occupied by emergent vegetation, while the remaining 10 had more than 50 per cent of their shoreline supporting emergents. Ponds were chosen with respect to this difference in amount of emergent shoreline vegetation because it provided an opportunity to test the effectiveness of duck nesting structures on two contrasting types of areas. �-50- At the end of the breeding-pair and brood counting period in 1962, 20 of the original 23 ponds were selected for final study. Three areas were eliminated because they had low breeding-pair and brood use or because of some outside interference which prevented further study of these ponds. Each category of emergent shoreline vegetation accounted for 10 of the 20 final study areas. Nesting Structures The first five ponds in each category of emergent shoreline vegetation listed in Tables 2 and 3 were randomly selected to receive duck nesting structures. One hundred nesting structures were built and placed on these 10 ponds during September, after termination of breedingpair and brood counts. Ten structures were erected on each pond in a variety of sites, both in open water and in emergent vegetation. Nesting structures were established during late summer so that effects of weather and other factors on these boxes could be studies and analyzed as part of the over-all investigation. Nesting structure design was very similar to that developed by Bob Brown of Milburn, Illinois (Cary, 1961), except for the box or cylinder, which was made from fiberboard tubes instead of rolled marine plywood. These fiberboard tubes are asphalt laminated, Kraft lined inside and outside, made with water resistant adhesive, and have the following dimensions: 12 x 24 x .165 inches. Before assembling the structures, each tube was coated with a special aluminum, rubberized paint for further protection against weathering. Nesting cavities were filled with native hay, and natural marsh vegetation was wired to the tops of structures to make them more attractive to breeding ducks. Below is a list of materials and costs required to build one duck nesting structure. Total cost of materials for each structure amounted to $1.87. Cost Material 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Fiberboard tube, 12" x 2411x .165" Baffles (2) 1" x 12" X 711,1" X 12" X 5 Twelve 6d galvanized nails Two wooden washers (scrap) One 7/8 steel washer plus one 2" cotter pin 1/2" galvanized pipe (7') 7. Aluminum, rubberized paint 8. #12 galvanized wire (4') 9. Nativehay 11 11 $0.56 0.14 0.01 0.00 0.04 0.98 0.01 0.02 0.02 Total Cost During the first week in April, 1963, damaged structures were repaired in preparation for the nesting season. All 100 structures were then coated with a tan, exterior paint to give them a more natural appearance. �-51Breeding-pair and Brood Counts Breeding-pair and brood counts were made on all areas in 1962 to determine the potential productivity of each. These counts were conducted again in 1963, following nesting structure establishment. Observation points were selected at each pond and used during intervals throughout the counting period. Alternate points were chosen so that the observer would not be counting while facing the sun during early morning and late evening counts. Breeding pairs were counted throughout the day prior to the hatching of broods. The middle of May marked the beginning of early morning (5:00-7:00 A.M.) and late evening (5:007:00 P.M.) counts. Broods were more conspicuous and easily observed during these early and late periods. Counts on each pond were made for a period of not less than 45 minutes to one hour with the aid of a 20-power tscope and field glasses. Movement was kept at a minimum to prevent any unnecessary disturbance of waterfowl utilizing the study areas. During each visit, pairs, single males, single females, and broods were recorded by species on standardized filed forms. Ages of broods were recorded according to plumage subclass. Visits were alternated so that each area was observed both early and late during morning and evening periods. During counts in 1963, nesting structures were carefully observed at a distance to note any waterfowl nesting behavior associated with them. Structures were visited and examined for possible nests every other week between counting intervals. A total of 12 observation intervals, ranging from April 13 to August 31 in 1962 and March 21 to August 30 in 1963, was used during each year. The dates inclusive in each are listed in Table 1. Counting was started somewhat earlier in 1963, than 1962, thus inclusive dates within each interval do not coincide in all cases between years. RESULTS Nesting Structure Endurance It was desirable to collect some information on factors influencing the life expectancy of nesting structures of the tiPe used in this study. Structures evaluated after seven months showed that 39 of the original 100 needed replacement parts and another four needed repairs. Ten of these structures were completely lost or destroyed. A list of replacement parts included 38 fiberboard tubes, 21 steel washers, 14 cotter p Lns , . and 11 support pipes. Most tubes were frayed to some extent along the ends as a result of their inability to withstand moisture. _ Causes of damage fell under two main categories. First, and most important, was destruction due to the breaking up of ice during spring thaw. Twenty-three nesting tubes fell from their supports or became half submerged in water when ice bent or pulled out the pipes. Tubes fell apart easily when they became water soaked. Eleven pipes were lost or beyond repair. �-52Secondly, 13 tubes were destroyed as a result of fluctuating water levelsj directly in five cases and indirectly in the other eight cases. Rising water levels floated five tubes, allowing them to soak and collapse. Investigators were partially at fault for this situation because of misjudgements in the location of high water lines when structures were initially erected. Eight tubes were ruined by cattle when falling water levels left structures high and dry. Structures in this condition became favorite rubbing posts for cattle and obtaining native hay from nesting cavities must have been a great challenge. The remaining two nesting tubes became water soaked and collapsed from unknown causes. Table 1. -- OBSERVATION INTERVALS DURING WHICH BREEDING-PAIR AND BROOD COUNTS WERE CONDUCTED ON 20 STUDY PONDS IN LARIMER COUNTY, COLORADO, SPRING-SUMMER, 1962-1963. Observation Interval (Inclusive Dates) Interval Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 April 13 - April 19 May 4 May 13 May 20 - May 22 May 27 - May 29 June 3 - June 6 June 18 - June 25 July 2 -July 11 July 16 - July 26 July 30 - August 3 August 14 - August 18 August 27 - August 31 March 21 -March 25 April 1 - April 2 April 15 - April 16 April 29 - April 30 May 15 - May 16 May 27 - May 31 June 10 -June 14 June 24 - June 28 July 8 - July 11 July 22 - July 26 August 12 - August 16 August 26 - August 30 Breeding Pairs Estimates were made of the number of_breeding pairs on the study ponds for the periods April 13 to June 6 in 1962 and April 1 to June 14 in 1963. Each period contained six observation intervals. Estimates were restricted to these dates for each year because this was the time of peak breeding ,activity, and estimates become more difficult to make during the remainder of the spring and summer. Total estimated breeding pairs did not differ significantly from 1962 (238) to 1963 (221) (Tables 2-3). Also, the number of breeding pairs did not change significantly be-tween years on the same study pond. This similarity may be expected, since habitat conditions, including water levels, were comparable between the two years during the period prior to the middle of June. �Table 2. -- ESTIMA.TEDBREEDING PAIRS ON 20 STUDY PONDS, APRIL 13 TO J1JNE 6, 1962. Assigned Name of Study Pond Shoveler Species Gr-w PinTeal tail Mallard Bl-w Teal Gadwall 3 3 2 1 - - 1 - 1 1 6 2 1 5 3 2 3 2 1 2 4 2 3 4 1 - - - 1 2 3 1 3 - - 2 5 7 6 4 5 3 3 2 2 2 4 9 5 4 3 3 4 3 4 TOTALS 67 61 PERCENTAGES 28.2 25.6 17·2 Amer. Cin. Widg. Teal Redhead Lesser Scaup - - - - 7 5 - - 10 3 4 20 7 13 9 Totals Shoreline - 25% Emergents !/ Peterson No.2 Durbin Pond Wellington No.2 (South) Greybar No.2 (East) Schott Pond Schnorr Pond Mitchell Pond Greybar No.1 (West) Douglas Pond Van Sant Pond 1 4 1 3 2 - - - - - - - 1 - - - - - - 3 - - - - - Shoreline - 50% Emergents gj Peterson No.1 Cobb No.2 (Middle) Cobb Mgmt. Area Kuemmerlin Pond Stewart Pond Baker Lake Seder Pond Cobb No.1 (South) Wellington No. 1 (North) Country Club Pond 5 6 3 5 - - 2 4 2 - - - - 4 5 1 4 4 1 1 2 - - 2 - - - - - - - 3 - 4 24 35 21 19 9 12 12 7 17 18 11 4 5 8 2 238 7.6 4.6 1.7 2.1 3·4 0.8 100.0 - - 2 2 1 4 2 2 1 4 1 41 21 8.8 - - - 1 - - !I Less than 25 per cent of shoreline occupied by emergents. g/ More than 50 per cent of shoreline occupied by emergents. - - 1 1 - 2 - - - 2 - I \J1 w I �Table 3. -- ESTIMATED BREEDING PAIRS ON 20 STUDY PONDS, APRIL 1 TO JUNE 14, 1963· Assigned Name of Study·Pond Shoreline - 25% Emergents Mallard Bl-w Teal Gadwall Shoveler Gr-w Teal Pintail Amer. Widg. Cin. Teal Redhead 4 1 2 4 5 4 4 3 - - - - - - - Ruddy Totals - S 5 3 S 7 10 12 10 5 13 !/ Peterson No. 2 Durbin Pond Wellington No. 2(South) Greybar No.2 (East) Schott Pond Schnorr·Pond Mitchell Pond Greybar No.1 (West) Douglas Pond Van Sant Pond 2 2 4 - 2 1 4 5 5 2 4 1 1 2 1 2 3 1 1 - - - 1 2 1 - - - - 2 - - - - - - 2 - - - - 1 - - - - 2 - - - - - I Shoreline - 50% Emergents V1 g/ +I 3 4 9 5 4 5 5 6 3 5 1 5 4 4 3 TOTALS PERCENTAGES Peterson No. 1 Cobb No.2 (Middle) Cobb Mgmt. Area Kuemmerlin Pond Stewart Pond Baker Lake Seder Pond Cobb No.1 (South) Wellington No.1 (North) Country Club Pond 1 1 3 - 1 2 2 3 1 2 3 4 3 2 - - - - 1 3 2 2 1 1 2 - - 3 1 2 - - 77 55 21 17 17 9 34.S 24·9 9·5 7·7 7·7 4.1 - - 2 3 - !/ Less than 25 per cent of shoreline occupied by emergents. gj More than 50 per cent of shoreline occupied by emergents. - - - - - - - - - - 4 3 6 19 23 16 15 5 17 lS 5 16 2 6 11 6 221 0·9 2·7 5·0 2·7 100.0 - 1 2 .. - - - - - 2 - 1 - - 1 3 3 2 1 - - - - - �-55Both years showed that breeding pairs of Mallards and Blue-winged Teal were most numerous of 10 species present, with Gadwalls next in importance. Mallard breeding pairs increased from 28.2 per cent of the total in 1962 to 34.8 per cent in 1963, while Blue-winged Teal remained about the same. Gadwalls decreased from 17.2 per cent in 1962 to only 9.5 per cent in 1963. Cause for reduction in Gadwall n-wmbers is not known, but the increase in Mallard numbers may be partially- attributed to restrictive bag limits on this species during the 1962-1963 hunting season. Estimated numbers of breeding pairs indicated in Tables 2 &~d 3 represent only those that remained in the general area to nest. Ma~y more pairs utilized the 20 study ponds during migration to more northern breeding grounds. However, these northern ducks represented potential pairs for nesting struct.ures to attract. Brood Production A total estimate of 90 individual broods of seven species was observed utilizing the 20 study ponds throughout the investigation in 1962 (Table 4). In 1963, only 26 individual broods of four species were observed, 71 per cent fewer than the previous year. This difference can be attributed to the deterioration of habitat brought about by a decline in water levels after mid-June in 1963, shortly after the beginning of the brood season. Hatches of broods were considered as numerous and as successful as in 1962, but because of undesirable habitat conditions, brood survival was low. However, the loss of desirable habitat came too late to effect breeding pairs, nesting, and use of nesting structures, since the peak of nesting occurred near the middle of May for Mallards and during the first week in June for Blue-winged Teal. Use of Nesting Structures Careful observation of the 100 duck nesting structures throughout the breeding season of 1963 revealed that not a single one was used by a nesting duck. L~ addition, no activity was associated with these structures that could be interpreted as nesting behavior. An observation of a male Green-winged Teal loafing atop a st ruc t.ur-e in mid-l'fJay was reported but not confirmed. Even if this alleged observation had been confirmed, it could not be defined as nesting behavior related to the structure. In late March, while evaluating the effects of weather and other factors upon nesting structure endurance, it was found that muskrats utilized four for shelter and food storage. Small depressions in the native hay within the nesting cavities indicated that these mammals were sleeping or resting there. Also, caches of marsh vegetation were contained within the four structures. L~ addition to muskrat occupancy .• nesting structures were used quite regularly by gullsJ terns, and blackbirds as perches or resting sites. �-56Table 4. -- NUMBER AND SPECIES OF BROODS OBSERVED ON 20 STUDY PONDS, 1962-1963 Number of Broods Observed Species 1962 1963 Mallard Blue-winged Teal Pintail Shoveler Redhead American Widgeon Gadwall Unknown 44 32 7 2 2 1 1 1 17 90 26 TOTALS .!-.'.. 5 3 1 DISCUSSION AND CONCLUSIONS Nesting Structure Endurance It iqapparent that fiberboard tubes will not withstand exposure to moisture, especially when soaked. It is doubtful that such tubes would last more than two, or possibly three years, even if subjected only to rain and snow. There are surely more substantial and less expensive materials from which to construct the nesting box itself. One possibility would be to place coarse marsh vegetation between two or more layers of galvanized chicken-wire. When rolled, this would produce an enclosed, natural appearing cylinder. Regardless of material used, wetlands with fluctuating water levels should be avoided in order to reduce maintenance costs. Use of Nesting structures The foregoing presentation of findings has shown that total estimated.preeding pairs on the 20 study ponds were comparable for the two breeding seasons, with 238 in 1962 and 221 in 1963. Mallards and Blue-winged Teal were by far the most numerous, with Gadwallsnext in importance. These birds are entirely of a wild nature and no known population of semi-domestic or hand-reared stock exists in this area of Colorado. Ducks did not avoid study ponds containing nesting structures and .itis1:Jelieved that this investigation represents a good test of the use '"Whichwild ducks will make of structures of the type used in this investigation. A test of nesting structures for on.ly one breeding season was believed sufficient to determine their acceptability by wild ducks. It is difficult to conceive that wild Mallards, for example, could become accustomed to using nesting structuresto.§.ny significant degree. They are bir~s tnherently attracted to natural nesting cover which has little resemblance to artificial nesting structures. Also, the rapid turnover in Mallard populations would seem to reduce this possibility to some extent. However, hand-reared Mallards probably show a weaker attachment to natural nesting cover, and could quite easily become habituated to nesting structures through continued association. �-57studies relating to the value of duck nesting structures have been conducted by other organization with varying degrees of success. Little or no use of nesting structures was obtained where nesting populations consisted entirely of wild ducks. However, some studies observed that hand-reared breeding stock readily took to artificial nest boxes. At Delta Research Station in Manitoba, Hockbaum (written communications) reported heavy use of nesting baskets and boxes by free-flying, hand-reared Mallards and Redheads and their wild progeny. He believes that such structures will not hold over breeding pairs of migrant waterfowl and evidence suggests that local wild-produced Mallards are not attracted to these devices as readily as hand-reared stock. A preliminary test of Mallard nesting strruc tuxes by U'..11er .(written communications) at Patuxent Wildlife Research Center, showed insufficient use to warrant recommending their applicatioh. Hanson (1960) listed four or five per cent use of 100 nesting structures during each of three breeding seasons in the Southwest Lake Erie Region of Ohio. All were Mallard nests except for one Black Duck nest. He concluded that this low percentage of use suggests that nesting structures have little practical value as a management tool. However, Peterle (written communications) reported an increase to nearly 20 per cent after about five years with these same st~~ctures. Thompson (1962), working in the same region of Ohio, found two structures being utilized by Mallards in 1962, out of a total of 100 erected. An increase to four occupancies in 1963 was noted by Peterle (written communications), indicating an increase in use year after year. Use was presumably by wild ducks in both studies, but it is not known whether the structures were placed over water or over l~~d. Space is not available here to Lnc Lude results of all studies and reports regarding the value of ili~cknesting structures. It can be concluded from most investigations concerned with this subject that truly wild Mallards under natural conditions show little interest in using nesting structures. There may be some tendency for these wild Mallards to gradually increase their use of nesting structures year after year, but they seem very slow in becoming accustomed to them. On the other hand, semi-domestic stock appears to utilize nesting devices quite readily from the start. A program involving the establishment of artificial nesting structures in conjunction with releases of handreared Mallards appears to hold considerable promise. This problem of the value of duck nesting structures goes beyond the simple question of whether or not ducks will use them for nesting purposes. Utilization of these structures, no matter how great, is of no consequence unless it significantly increases production by attracting more breeding pairs or by increas.ing nesting success. The establishment of nesting structures in an area may simply cause a shift in the location of some nesting sites from natural cover to artificial structures without a change in the number of breeding pairs, resulting in essentially the same production as would exist in the absence of nesting devices. If over-water nesting structures are as predator-proof as they appear to be, then high "(;.tilization of these structures could conceivably increase production significantly through improved nesting success, especially in areas where nest predation is a problem. �-58These factors must be taken into consideration in order to fully evaluate the Tole of duck nesting structures in waterfowl management, regardless of whether the breeding stock is wild or hand-reared. The fact that nota single structure was utilized by a nesting duck leads to the conclusion that nesting boxes of the type studied here will not increase wild duck production in north-central Colorado. Construction, erection, and maintenance of nesting structures proved to be an expensive and fruitless investmentQ The number of breeding pairs did not change significantly between years on the same study pond, and it was impossible to compare nesting success between natural cover and artificial structures because of the absence of nests in the latter. It is recommended that sportsmen's groups avoid a program involving nesting .structures if they plan to wo:rk only with wild birds. The use of hand-reared Mallards proposes a much greater possibility of success, but I am not in favor of such an operation on a large scale because of the Uncertain long-range effects on wild duck popUlations. Sportsmen's groups would be wiser to concentrate their money and efforts toward supporting the purchase, improvement, and maintenance of waterfowl breeding habitat through the use of techniques known to be of value to wild ducks. It is important that these groups, as well as the general public, not be misguided by reports that nesting structures are the answer to increasing duck populations. LITERATDtlliCITED Cary, B. 1961. New: duck factory. Outdoor Life, May 1961, p , 66-67, 133· Hanson, C. L. 1960. An evaluation of waterfowl nesting structures. Ohio Coop. Wild1. Res. Unit Quart. Rept., Oct.-Dec. 1960, p. 5-8. Thompson, D. W. 1962. A study of waterfowl nesting in the Southwest Lake Erie Region. Ohio Coop. Wildl. Res. Unit Quart. Rept., Oct.-Dec. 1962, p. 4-7. Prepared by Richard M. Hopper Date: July, 1964 Approved by: Jack R. Grieb Project Leader Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �July, 1964 -59- JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO Project No. w-88-R-9 Work Plan No. 3 Title of Job: Job No· 4 Wintering Duck Flock Census Period Covered: Personnel: Migratory Bird Investigations December 1, 1963 through March 31, 1964. Jack Grieb, Bill Rutherford, Richard Hopper, Norman Hughes, Jack Frost, Chuck Hayes, and Mel Barron. ABSTRACT Aerial censuses were conducted in the South Platte Valley from Denver to Julesburg on December 19, 1963 and on January 6, 1964 with 148,320 ducks tallied on the former date and 264,970 ducks recorded on the latter. The December 19 count was considered minimal because many ducks were feeding during the census due to weather conditions and undoubtedly were not seen. Counts were made in the Arkansas Valley on December 3 and December 18, 1963 and January 8, 1964. Total ducks recorded in these counts numbered 70,001 on the first census, 44,115 on the second, and 40,000 on the third. The 40,000 counted January 8 is considered low due to poor weather conditions. Species composition during the January inventory is estimated at 98 percent mallards. Results of sex ratio counts from the ground were very similar between areas and indicated a 1.44:1 male-female ratio in eastern Colorado. Recommendations: It is recommended that this job be continued during the next segment. The information obtained is vital to enable banding data to be weighed for age and sex ratios and especially for differences in percentages of birds with shot according to various flock sizes in each banding area. Every effort should be made to fly the bi-weekly censuses to determine changes in populations between areas and to spot concentrations and likely trapping sites. Ground sex ratios counts should be conducted again with at least two counts of about 400 mallards each obtained at each trapping site at the time of trapping. At least two counts should be made on every large concentration of birds possible. �-60- Objectives: The objectives of this job are as follows: (1) To determine the size of wintering mallard flocks within each of the work units; (a) Arkansas Valley, (b) Bonny Reservoir Area, (c) Fort Collins Area, (d) Denver-Greeley Area, (e) Greeley-Fort Morgan Area, (f) Fort Morgan-Sterlipg Area, and (g) the Sterling-Julesburg Area. (2) To determine changes, if any, in size of these flocks throughout the work period. (3) To determine the sex ratio of each wintering mallard flock. Procedures: Aerial surveys were conducted during the 1963-64 winter in the South Platte and Arkansas Valleys to obtain population numbers and locations of wintering mallards in eastern Colorado. Ducks were counted in the Arkansas Valley on December 3, again on December 18, and during the January inventory, January 8. Two counts were made in the South Platte Valley from Denver to Julesburg and including Bonny Reservoir, one on December 19 and the other on January 6. Several supplementary flights were made into various work areas to locate concentrations of birds and trapping sites. The South Platte Valley was divided into five banding study segments with Bonny Reservoir and the Arkansas Valley making up the remaining two areas. In all cases, numbers of ducks counted were recorded by location so they could be assigned to one of the seven areas and more specifically to one of the banding sites within each area. Species composition was noted whenever possible. A.ll counts were tabulated and totaled according to area and date of census. Sex ratio ground counts were made with the aid of spotting scopes at various trapping sites and also in other areas of duck concentration. When possible, at least 400 birds were counted at each location. Most of the flocks were sampled twice during the trapping period. These counts were grouped and averaged by area for ease of comparison. It was noted that obtaining a sample of birds for sex ratio estimates was somewhat difficult at times. Such was the case when ducks were congregated in a small open water area on an almost completely frozen reservoir. Usually, birds resting around the opening were predominantly pairs while birds occupying the open water were largely males. In order to overcome this bias, it was necessary to make sure both areas were sampled in relation with total ducks in the water and on the edge. �-61- Table 1. Aerial duck counts by interval, area, and specific location, eastern Colorado, 1963-64. Area ARKANSAS VALLEY CF&I Lakes, Pueblo Arkansas River Pueblo to LaJunta LaJunta to Kansas Line Cheraw Lakes Henry Lake Holbrook Lake '-Meredith Lake Pond east of Meredith Lake Horse Creek Reservoir Adobe Creek Reservoir John Martin Reservoir Verhoeff Lake Sweetwater Lake Nee Gronda Reservoir Nee Noshe Reservoir Queen Reservoir Turks Pond Two Buttes Reservoir Totals FORT COLLINS Terry Lake Marsh north of Terry Reservoir #15 Reservoir #5 Reservoir #6 New Windsor Marsh east of New Windsor Windsor Ditch north of Windsor Timnath Reservoir Cache la Poudre River Fossil Creek Reservoir Boyd Reservoir Big Thompson River Totals Number of Ducks Counted by Date December 3, 1963 December 18-19, 1963 January 6-8, 1964 900 335 150 100 34,750 250 700 3,400 100 41 1,720 2,770 9,400 4,700 1,000 1,500 14,400 3,000 4,000 18,000 20,000 400 25 3,800 24,500 50 1,825 70,001 200 300 44,115 1,000 1,500 1,300 300 1,100 300 3,500 1,000 600 3,200 3,600 5,000 14,900** 150 1,400 3,600 14,000 1,950 50 24,000 200 51,850 �-62- Table 1. Aerial duck counts by interval, area, and specific location, eastern Colorado, 1963-64. (Cont!d) Number of Ducks Counted by Date December 3, 1963 December 18-19, 1963 January 6-8, 1964 Area DENVER -GREELEY Valmont Reservoir Macintosh Reservoir Union Reservoir Swede Lake St. Vrain River Latham Reservoir Milton Reservoir South Platte River Horse Creek Reservoir Barr Lake Lake Ladora Mile High Duck Club Lakes Totals 23,720** 29,640 400 4,700 150 4,800 74,390 GREELEY-FORT MORGAN Empire Reservoir Jackson Reservoir South Platte River Totals 600 10,000 21,400 32,000** 100 33,710 33,810 8,800 400 550 2,700 400 1,100 370 400 9,000 FORT MORGAN-STERLING Prewitt Reservoir South Platte River Totals 52,000 16,100 200 6,700 11,700 52,000** 24,000 11,470 35,470 STERLING-JULESBURG Jumbo Reservoir South Platte River Totals 9,000 4,700 13,700** 46,300 46,300 BONNY RESERVOIR Bonny Reservoir Totals 12,000 12,000** 23,150 23,150 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - TOTALS South Platte Valley Arkansas Valley * ** 70,001 148,320** 44,115 Poor count due to weather conditions. Poor count due to scattered birds in some localities. 264,970 40,000* �-63- Table 2. Mallard sex ratio counts by date and area, eastern Colorado, 1963-64. Date Location FORT COLLINS AREA. 12/24/63 Reservoir #6 12/24/63 Timnath Reservoir 12/30/63 Timnath Reservoir Reservoir #6 1/2/64 Boyd Reservoir 1/2/64 Timnath Reservoir 1/3/64 Windsor Ditch 1/7/64 Totals Number Ducks Counted Male Female Total Per Cent Males 266 250 243 233 307 279 134 1,712 198 219 184 185 236 220 91 1,333 464 469 427 418 543 499 225 3,045 57·33 53 ·30 56.91 55.74 56·54 55·91 59.56 56.22 Ave. DENVER-GREELEY AREA. Valmont Reservoir 1/7/64 1/14/64 Valmont Reservoir 2/2/64 Mile High Duck Club Mile High Duck Club 2/3/64 2/4/64 Foster Lake Totals 239 181 197 196 248 1,061 154 109 149 139 147 698 393 290 346 335 395 1,759 60.81 62.41 56·94 58·51 62.78 60.32 Ave. FORT MORGAN-SrERLING AREA. Atwood (fields) 2/17/64 Merino (Prewitt ditch) 2/27/64 Merino (fields) 2/27/64 Totals 250 342 296 888 174 210 213 597 424 552 509 1,485 58·96 61.96 58.15 59.80 Ave. STERLING-JULESBURG AREA Manuell0 Farm (S.Platte) Manuell0 Farm (S.Platte) Totals 78 195 273 49 135 lE4 127 330 457 61.42 59·09 59.74 Ave. BONNY RESERVO IR AREA Bonny Reservoir 2/12/64 2/14/64 Bonny Reservoir Bonny Reservoir 2/15/64 Totals 126 62 107 295 79 27 65 171 205 89 172 4bb 61.46 69·66 62.21 63.30 Ave. 511 56 739 200 1,056 305 35 519 108 967 816 91 1,258 308 2,473 62.62 61·54 58·74 64.94 60.90 Ave. 5,735 3,950 9,685 59·22 2/26/64 2/28/64 ARKANSAS VALLEY AREA John Martin Reservoir 1/18/64 1/19/64 Ark. R. near Rocky Ford 1/24/64 John Martin Reservoir John Martin Reservoir 2/11/64 Totals TOTALS & AVERAGE �-64- Findings: Numbers of ducks wintering in eastern Colorado during the study period are listed in Table 1 by date, work area, and specific locality. The December 3 count, which was intended mainly for goose census, revealed the maximum duck count for the winter in the Arkansas Valley, probably due to a great many ducks which had not completed their southward migration. The latter two surveys were quite similar in number of ducks present in southeast Colorado, however the January count was consideredlow due to poor weather conditions during the flight. The January inventory in the northeast route is considered the most accurate estimate of the duck population in the South Platte Valley for the winter period because the December 19 flight was made the day after a storm and birds were scattered in various feeding areas making accurate census impossible. The post-hunting season shift of ducks from the reservoirs back to the rivers can be seen by examination of the table. Estimated species composition during the January inventory is 98 percent mallards with pintail, American widgeon, green-winged teal, common merganser, and goldeneye making up the remainder. Mallard sex composition counts are listed in Table 2 by date, area, and location. There is striking similarity in the sex ratio between counts within each study area and also between areas, indicating that the eastern Colorado average male-female sex ratio of 1.44:1 can be assumed most representative for the winter of 1963-64. Prepared by: Howard D. Funk Wildlife Researcher Candidate Date: July, 1964 Approved by: Jack R. Grieb Assistant Game Manager Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �July, 1964 -65- State of ~C~O~LO~RAD~~O Project No. w-88-R-9 Work Plan No. 1 Title of Job: Period Covered: _ Migratory Bird Investigations Job No. 5 Waterfowl Kill Survey October, 1963 through January, 1964 ABSTRACT Waterfowl Duck seasons were generally improved over the previous year as a result of some relaxation in hunting regulations. The San Luis Valley experimental season was highly successful both in terms of hunter participation and harvest of mallards. Although there were fewer than normal hunters in eastern Colorado, average seasonal bags were only slightly down from many years when limits were higher and seasons longer. Hunting was good in Colorado, and duck populations average and well distributed. The west slope enjoyed a long season with liberal bags, but nevertheless harvest was below normal in this area mainly because of a continued low number of participating hunters. Harvest of Canada geese showed an upswing in the state last year. This was a result of an increase in hunters and in average season bag over the previous year. Geese were in normal numbers with increases noted in the Fort Collins area. Birds in the major hunting area of southeast Colorado were well distributed which appeared to improve harvest over past years. Complete statistics covering numbers of duck and goose hunters, harvest for the state and by county are given in the text of the report. ��-67WNI'ERFOWL KILL SURVEY Jack R. Grieb~/ and Gilbert N. Hunterg/ This random survey of Colorado small game harvest is a coo~erative venture between Federal Aid Project w-88-R and the Game Management Division of the Colorado Game, Fish and Parks De~artment. Techniques were similar to those used in the ~ast with hunters names drawn in a mechanical random fashion from·license stubs. A ~re-season contact was not sent because data from last year indicated that it did not significantly increase the accuracy of the information re~orted. This made it ~ossible to use current licenses instead of those from the prevf.ous year... One f'o'l.Lov-up was sent to non-reporting hunters after an interval of two to three weeks. The questionnaire remained the same in form and context as last year. Questionnaires were sent to 12,000 randomly selected license buyers in 1963 and a total of 8,546 responded for a return of 71.2 per cerrt . Of the 8,546 returns, 446 were unusable for various reasons, 4,781 re~orted hunting, and 3,319 bought a license but did not hunt. Most of the hunters in this last category were found to have ~urchased a combination hunting and fishing license which was used for fishing only. Thus, of the total license sales of 182,405 during 1963, it is estimated that 112,566 hunters, hunted one or more s~ecies of small game. WATERFOWL HARVEST Colorado duck stam~ sales are ~lotted in Table 1 revealing that the 1963 sale of 22,940 was significantly larger than the ~revious year but still second lowest in volume in the ~ast nine years. This increase is attributed to a slight relaxation of hunting regulations for the 1963 season, and the experimental San Luis Valley duck season which ~robably encouraged hunters to ~artici~ate. Table 1. -- Duck Stam~ Sales for Colorado Year Number of stamps sold Per cent change from ~revious year 1963 1962 1961 1960 1959 1958 1957 1956 1955 1954 22,940 17,701 24,854 30,592 31,431 41,897 41,794 36,303 39,107 32,450 + 29.6 !I Leader, Federal Aid Waterfowl Project, w-88-R. Plan I, Job 5. g/ State Game Manager. - 28.8 - 18.8 2·7 - 24·9 .02 + + 15·1 7·2 + '20·5 + 20·5 Work carried on under �-68Table 2 classifies Duck Stamp buyers by the type of hunting in which they engaged for the past nine years. Thus, it appears that number of duck and goose hunters were up significantly from 1963, but still considerably below the average. This is not true of mean days hunted which is a direct reflection of an increase in season length for the western slope combined with the long goose season. Duck Harvest Hunting statistics of the 1963 season are tabulated and compared with past years in Table 3. This reveals that total estimated retrieved kill of 88,670 was doubled that of the previous year and very comparable to the 1961 season. In addition, it was estimated that 10,552 birds were crippled for a woui!J:ding loss of 11.9 percent permitting an estimated total hunting mortality of 99,222 ducks for 1963 in Colorado. Species composition of the 1963 bag is listed in Table 4 and compared with the average of the nine previous years. These data indicate that total duck harvest was 47 percent less than the nine-year average because of restricted regulations, reduced number of hunters, and lower average seasonal bag than the past, Comparison of eastern and western slope species composition is made in Table 5 revealing that despite the longer hunting season which began earlier in the fallon the western slope, the mallard made up an even greater percent of the total harvest there as compared to the east slope. This probably dm'';' dicates a lack of other species in this area during the entire fall period so that a hunting season, regardless of when set is bound to place pressure on mallards. Duck kill and hunting pressure by 10-day intervals of the season for both east and west slopes is tabulated in Table 6. These data show that harvest for each area was fairly evenly divided over the season intervals indicating that no one part of the season was better than the other. It is fairly obvious that east slope hunters had to pack their hunting into the short season allotted them while west slopers could spread their hunting out over the longer season. In this respect, it is significant that despite the longer season and more liberal bag limits, west slope hunters hunted only an average of 5.5 days compared to 5·7 days for those on the eastern slope and bagged only 3.6 compared to 5.1 ducks average for the season for east slope hunters. San Luis Valley Experimental Season. --This was the first year of an experimental duck hunting season in the San Luis Valley. Reasons for the season and results have been reported in detail elsewhere, and will not be repeated. However, information gained through this survey on this season will be presented and compared with similar data gathered by the Bureau of Sport Fisheries and Wildlife. According to questionnaire data, 1,594 hunters bagged an estimated 10,903 ducks in the San Luis Valley during the experimental season, October 1-18, 1964-. This is compared to an estimated 1,467 hunters and 9,661 retrieved kill by the Bureau of Sport Fisheries and Wildlife. These estimates are calculated from independent surveys, and strongly indicated that the true harvest is at this general level. �-69Table 2. -- Estimated Number of Duck and Goose Hunters, Average Number of Days Hunted and Season Length, by Year. Year Number of duck hunters Number of goose hunters Average number days hunted for geese ducks 1963 1962 1961 1960 1959 1958 1957 1956 1955 1954 17,989 13,918 22,920 29,480 29,060 38,773 37,166 34,793 37,816 31,834 10,841 9,159 11,245 14,107 13,647 14,705 12,057 12,477 17 ,634 12,136 5.66 Season length (days) geese ducks 6.64 3s11 2S.!I 30 60 50 90 75 75 75 60 5.27 4.40 6.05 5.70 5.78 6.52 7.37 8.87 7.64 75 75 60 75 75 60 60 60 60 60 Bag and possession limit ducks geese 4-8 21 2-4= 3-6 3-6 4-8 4-8 5-10 5-10 5-10 5-10 2-2 2-2 2-2 2-2 2-2 2-2 2-2 2-2 2-2 2-2 !I Hunting regulations for East Slope. West Slope had a general season of 75 days with 4 ducks in bag, and 8 in possession in 1962, and 90 days, 4 in bag and 8 in possession in 1963. ~/One mallard allowed in bag, and two in possession. Table 3. -- Duck Harvest Statistics, Year Slope 1963 East .West TOTAL East t.Jest TOTAL 1962 1961 1960 1959 1958 1957 1956 1955 1954 1954-1963. Number of hunters Average seasonal bag Total estimated harvest 15,627 22362 17 ,989 11,349 2z569 13,918 22,920 29,480 29,060 38,773 37,166 34,793 37,816 31,834 5.11 3.60 4.91 2.6 3.5 2.8 3.8 5.0 4.2 6.1 6.8 5.9 6.7 5.6 80,167 8,503 88,670 29,507 8,992 38,499 86,408 147,400 122,924 236,515 254,587. 185,737 253,367 179,856 Wounding loss Percent number Total estimated hunting mortality' 9,636 916 10,552 4,603 1z187 5,790 23,608 22,257 22,417 33,088 41.679 36,195 38,182 30,396 89,803 9a419 99,222 34,110 lOa 179 44,289 110,016 169,657 145,341 269,603 296,266 221,932 291,549 210,252 12.0 10.8 11.9 13.5 11.7 T3.l 21.4 13.1 15.5 12.3 14.1 16.3 13.1 14.5 �-70Table 4. -- Species Composition of the Bag. 1963 Number of Killed Total % Species Mallard Pintail Green~wing Teal Blue-wing Teal Baldpate Gadwall Shoveller Scaup Redhead Canvasback Others 66,415 3,103 9,842 3,547 975 1,419 532 975 74·9 3·5 11.1 4.0 1.1 1.6 0.6 1.1 1,862 TOTAL 88,670 9-year average 1954-1962 Number of Killed Total % % change 1963 from 9-year Average Harvest 2.1 112,062 5,391 14,855 6,358 1 788 5,022 1,975 1,250 1,568 1,328 16,207 66·7 3·2 8·9 3·8 1.1 3·0 1.2 0·7 0·9 0.8 9·7 - 88.5% 100.0 167,804 100.0 - 47.2% - 40.7% - 42.4% - 33 7% - 44.2% - 45.5% - 71.7% - 73.1% - 22.0% Residence of hunters participating in the San Luis Valley special season is presented in Table 7. Valley residents accounted for 48.85% of the hunters, and 54.61% of the total harvest during the pre-season. Response to this season was wide-spread. Numerous hunters came from the vicinities of Denver, Colorado Springs, and Pueblo, and surprisingly enough some west-slope hunters hunted in the Valley despite the opening of their season on October 5. Goose Harvest Hunting statistics of the goose season presented in Table 8 estimates 10,841 hunters bagged an average of 1.6 geese during the season for a total estimated harvest of 17,899 birds. In addition, another 3,184 birds were reported wounded but not retrieved for a wouhding loss of 17.8 percent. This permits a total hunting mortality estimate for Colorado during 1963 of 21,083 geese. Species composition of geese killed was similar between all ten years of the survey being 90 percent or above Canada geese. The remaining percentages were "other and unknownlt species of geese, and were probably mainly Canada geese which the hunters were not able to correctly identify. It is known that there wer-e a few snow geese taken in Colorado during this hunting season and even smaller number of white fronts. �-71Table 50 -~ Comparison of Species Composition between East and West Slope Duck Harvest. ----- West SloEe i'o of Number Total Killed East SlolZe % of Number Total Killed Species 73 8 Shoveller Scaup Others 59,163 2,726 9,700 3,287 962 1,283 481 802 1,763 TOTAL 80,167 100.0 Mallard Pintail Green-wing Teal B Lue-wi.ng Teal Baldpate Oadwa I l 51 128 33 93 170 82.3 4.1 4.7 3.3 0.6 1.5 0.4 1.1 2.0 8,503 100.0 6,998 349 400 0 3.1+ 12.1 4.1 1.2 106 06 1.0 2.2 281 0 Table 6. -- Ducks Bagged and Hunting Pressure by 10-day Intervals of the 1963 Season. Estimated Birds BagGed % Total No. of Kill Ducks Dates Estimated Hunting Pressure % of Total No. of Hunters Hunters Average Bag by Periods EAST SLOPE Oct. Nov. Nov. Dec. Dec. 1-1al' 15-24 25-Dec. 4 5-14 15-19 10,903 21,966 18,278 18,117 10,903 13.6 27.4 22.8 22.6 13.6 1~5% S,l!-8S 4,797 4,016 2,969 10.2 35.1 30.7 25.7 19.0 6.8 4.0 3.8 4.S 3.7 WEST SLOPE Oct. 5-14 Oct. 15-24 Oct. 25-Nov. 3 Nov. 4-13 Nov. 14-23 Nov. 24-Dec. 3 Dec. 4-13 Dec. 14-23 Dec. 24-Jan. 2 11 Experimental 978 731 400 757 1,471 l,752 1,003 816 595 11.5 8.6 if.7 8.9 17.3 20.6 11.8 9.6 7.0 479 170 479 775 886 27.3 20.3 7.2 20.3 32.8 37.5 628 26.6 572 368 24.2 15.6 6l~5 San Luis Valley Duck Season. 1.S 1.5 2.4 1.6 1.9 2.0 1.6 1.4 1.6 �Table 7. -- Residence of Hunters Hunting in the San Luis Valley Experimental Duck Season, October 1-18, 1964. County of Residence of Hunters Adams Alamosa Arapahoe Boulder Chaffee Conejos Costilla Custer Delta Denver El Paso Fremont Jefferson Lake La Plata Las Animas Pueblo Rio Grande Saguache Weld Hunters Estimated No. 37 224 56 18 130 111 18 18 18 93 166: 18 37 18 18 18 130 317 111 18 TOTALS 1,594 2·33 13·95 3.49 1.16 8.14 6·98 1.16 1.16 1.16 5·81 11.83 1.16 2·33 1.16 1.16 1.16 8.14 19·78 6·98 1.16 Harvest Estimated No. 119 1,786 323 51 817 613 85 85 340 476 1,072 323 136 170 102 119 663 2,517 953 153 1.09 16.38 2·96 .47 7·49 5·62 ·78 ·78 3·12 4·37 9·83 2·96 1.25 1.56 ·94 1.09 6.08 23·09 8.74 1.40 100.00 10,903 100.00 % % Table 8. -- Goose Harvest Statistics, 1954-1963. Year 1963 1962 1961 1960 1959 1958 1957 1956 1955 1954 Slope East West TOTAL East West TOTAL Number of hunters 10,462 379 10,841 8,828 331 9,159 11,245 14,107 13,647 14,705 12,057 11,541 17,364 12,136 Average seasonal' bag 1.7 ·3 Total estimated harvest 1.5 1.3 1.5 17,785 114 17,899 13,241 430 13,671 1.25 loll 1.61 1.34 1.21 ·98 1.02 .67 14,056 15,659 21,972 19,704 14,589 11,310 17,711 8,168 IT Wounding loss Percent Number 17·9 0 3,184 / O.! 3,184 19·5 0 19·1 3,218 1 0y 3,218 20,969 114 21,083 16,459 430 16,889 24.5 20·7 17·8 22·3 23·5 21.6 18·3 22.8 4,568 4,087 4,730 5,655 4,473 3,116 3,884 2,410 18,624 19,746 26,702 25,359 19,062 14,426 21,248 10,578 I7.E Nine-year average goose harvest is 15,203 -- 1954-1962. Y No cripples reported on the west slope. Total estimated hunting mortality -72- �-73The 1963 goose hunting season was characterized by good water and food conditions in the Arkansas Valley during the fall and winter periods. Census figures taken at weekly intervals in the Arkansas Valley indicated a normal number of geese present in Colorado during the season. However, the birds seemed to be distributed on all water bodies rather than concentrating in the Two Buttes area as in the past. Comparison of the 1963 season with past years shows an increase in number of hunters and total harvest. Average seasonal bag increased strongly from previous years, indicating that the quality of hunting was equal to the record year of 1959. Waterfowl Harvest by County The reader is cautioned that information presented in this section of the report is subject to a great deal more error in accuracy than estimates in previous sections, since the original sample has been broken down to a county basis, thus decreasing the size of samples on which to base estimates. This is probably even more true of geese than ducks, because there were many more duck hunters. Consequently, it is realized that in some counties, both duck and goose kill have been over-estimated, and in others, under-estimated. However, despite this error, these data represent the most accurate information on this subject possible at the present time. It is hoped to increase the accuracy of county data in the future. Tables 9 and 10 compare the 1963 duck and goose kill respectively with the average of previous seasons, by county, within each waterfowl region. These regional divisions of the State were located on the basis of waterfowl migration, location, and topography; and permit a closer evaluation of kill, yearly changes in kill, and the effect of different types of hunting seasons on various portions of Colorado. Regional recap of the 1963 duck season as summarized at the conclusion of Table 9 shows that the harvest was significantly less in all regions of the State compared to the nine-year average. This was undoubtedly a result of the short seasons and small bag limits, on the eastern slope, but no explanation can be offered for the decrease found on the western slope. The eastern slope again contributed to the bulk of the duck harvest being about 90 percent in 1963 which is slightly higher than previous years. Weld was again the high harvest county. The 1963 goose harvest compared to the nine-year average in Table 10 shows that total harvest was well above the average. Also, that the Southeast Region again accounted for more than 80 percent of the total goose bag, with Kiowa, Prowers, Bent and Baca the top harvest counties, in that order. Other Regions showed similar harvest to past years. �-74Table 9. -- Duck Kill by Region and County. Waterfowl Region and Countx Estimated 1963 Huntin~ Pressure 1963 Duck Kill Per cent Number Per cent Number of·Total Hunters of Total Killed East Slo:ee Nine-year Average 1954-1962 Number Per cent Killed of Total NORTHEAST Cheyenne Kit Carson Lincoln Logan Morgan Phillips Sedgwick Washington Yuma NORTHEAST TOTAL 88 160 393 6,967 7,391 112 3,968 1,275 32535 232889 .09 .18 .44 7.86 8.34 .13 4.47 1.44 3.99 26.94 58 . 78 116 1,044 1,410 39 483 233 658 42119 .32 .43 .64 5.80 7.84 .22 2.68 1.30 3.66 22.89 666 1,918 1,505 8,548 10,464 288 4,927 2,175 32221 332712 .40 1.15 .90 5.13 6.28 .17 2.96 1.30 1.93 20.22 SOUTHEAST Baca Bent Crowley Huerfano Kiowa Las Animas Otero Prowers Pueblo SOUTHEAST TOTAL 104 2,068 1,315 104 321 465 2,431 1,635 12331 92780 .12 2.33 1.48 .12 .36 .52 2.75 1.84 1.50 11.02 97 542 425 53 233 . 136 445 483 445 22865 .54 3.01 2.36 .32 1.30 .76 2.47 2.68 2".47 15.91 1,740 3,624 3,811 838 2,129 1,386 2,064 5,168 32776 242536 1.04 2.17 2.29 .50 1.28 .83 1.24 3.10 2.27 14.72 3,168 553 3,648 176 4.25 .62 4.11 .20 755 291 1,215 39 4.20 1.62 7.09 .22 265 986 4,089 162949 3°2434 .30 1.11 4.61 19.13 34.33 155 173 852 22296 52836 .86 .96 4.14 12.75 32.44 8,917 1,545 8,875 107 391 1,249 1,732 13,096 312369 61 z 281 5.35 .93 5.32 .06 .23 .75 1.04 7.86 18.81 40.35 SAN LUIS VALLEY 3,968 Alamosa 1,563 Conejos 577 Costilla 5,836 Rio Grande 2z958 Saguache SAN LUIS V. TOTAL 14z902 4.47 1.16 .65 6.58 3.34 16.80 716 388 113 852 348 22477 3.98 2.16 .96 4.74 1.93 13.17 3,911 2,738 612 4,729 41315 162305 2.35 1.64 .37 2.84 2.59 9.79 CENTRAL Adams Arapahoe Boulder Douglas Elbert E1 Paso Jefferson Larimer Weld CENTRAL TOTAL �-75Table 9. -- Duck Kill by Region and County. tolaterfow1 1963 Ducl~ Kill Region Number Per cent and Countx Killed oCTotal HIGH COUNTRY Chaffee Clear Creek Custer Fremont 681 .77 Gilpin· Jackson 88 .10 Lake 112 .13 Park 249 .28 Teller 32 .04 HIGH COUNTRY TOTAL 1.162 1.32 (Continued) Estimated 1963 Huntin~ Pressure Number Per cent Hunters of Total Nine-year Average 1954-1962 Number Per cent Killed of Total 155 .86 649 3 409 1,066 39 39 78 19 330 .22 .22 .43 .11 1.84 234 244 373 64 32°42 .14 .15 .22 .04 1.83 .39 .25 .64 West SloEe NORTHHEST Garfield Moffat Rio Blanco Routt NORTHHEST TOTAL WEST CENTRAL Delta Mesa Hontrose Ouray H. CENTRAL TOTAL SOUTHHEST Archuleta Dolores Hinsdale La Plata Hineral Hontezuma San Juan San Higue1 SOUTHHEST TOTAL HIGH COUNTRY Eagle Grand Gunnison Pitkin Summit HIGH COUNTRY TOTAL 1,504 135 531 366 2,536 1.70 .15 .60 .41 2.86 277 74 111 129 591 1.54 .41 .62 .72 3.29 1,762 671 837 .1 081 4,351 1.06 .40 .50 .65 2.61 1,022 1,783 704 1.15 2.01 .79 258 369 241 1.43 2.05 1.34 3.509 3.95 868 4.82 3,011 5,398 3,183 253 112845 1.81 3.24 . 1.91 .15 7.11 58 --'20 1,041 .07 18 .10 .02 1.17 18 369 .10 2.05 386 .44 74 .41 176 33 20 1,782 147 990 .11 .02 .01 1.07 .09 .59 .15 2.04 .59 .15 .39 .15 .05 1.33 1z505 1.70. 479 2.66 250 3z398 222 327 96 212 96 953 .25 .37 .11 .24 .11 1.08 92 166 55 74 37 424 .51 .92 .31 .41 .21 2.36 990 256 655 260 76 2z237 .- �-76Table 9. -- Duck Kill by Region and County. (Continued) Estimated 1963 Pressure HuntinG 1963 Duck Kill Haterfow'l Per cent Number Per cent Number Region of Total Hunters of Total Killed and Count~ Summar~ b~ Region NORTHEAST SOUTHEAST CENTRAL SAN LUIS VALLEY HIGH COUNTRY (E) NORTHHEST WEST CENTRAL SOUTHWEST HIG H COUNTRY (W) TOTAL OF REGIONS EAST SLOPE. \vEST SLOPE· 2,865 5,836 2,477 330 591 868 479 424 22.89 15.91 32.44 13.77 1.84 3.29 4.82 2.66 2.36 33,712 24,536 67,281 16,305 3,042 4,351 11,845 3,398 2~237 20.22 14.72 40.35 9.79 1.83 2.61 7.11 2.04 1.33 100.00 17 ,989 100.00 166,707 100.00 90.41 9.59 15.627 2,362 86.87 13.13 144,876 21,831 86.91 13.09 23,889 9,780 30,434 14,902 1,162 2,536 3,509 1,505 953 26.94 11.02 34.33 16.80 1.32 2.86 3.95 1.70 1.08 4',119 88,670 80,167 8,503 Table 10. -- Goose Kill by Region and County. Estimated 1963 Hunting Pressure 1963 Goose Kill Waterfowl Per cent Number Per cent Number Region of Total Hunters of Total Killed and County East Sloee NORTHEAST .4 41 20 .1 Cheyenne 1.1 121 .6 98 Kit Carson .2 20 .3 59 Lincoln 3.7 403 3.7 663 Logan 1.6 5.4 585 293 Morgan Phillips .6 61 .2 39 Sedgewick .6 61 .2 39 Washington 1.5 161 .9 157 Yuma 13.5 1 ,453 7.6 1,368 NORTHEAST TOTAL SOUTHEAST Baca Bent Crowley Huerfano Kiowa Las Animas Otero Prowers Pueblo SOUTHEAST TOTAL 2,166 2,284 566 313 5,581 98 507 2,890 39 14z444 Nine-year Average 1954-1962 Per cent Number of Total Killed 12.1 12.8 3.2 1.7 31.4 .5 2.8 16.1 .2 80.8 1,371 988 665 141 1,690 222 343 1,127 121 6z668 12.6 9.1 6.1 1.3 15.4 2.0 3.2 10.4 1.1 61.2 Nine-year Average 1954-1962 Per cent Number of Total Killed 15 35 6 llO 420 3 59 75 119 842 .1 .2 t .7 2.8 t .4 .5 .8 5.5 5,633 1,346 704 87 2,384 128 236 2,226 71 122815 37.1 8.9 4.6 .6 IS.7 .8 1.6 14.7 ,5 84.5 �-'77Table 10. Haterfowl Region and Countx CENTRAL Adams Arapahoe Boulder Douglas Elbert El Paso Jefferson Larimer Held CENTRAL TOTAL Goose Kill by Region and County. (Continued) Estimated 1963 1963 Goose Kill Huntin~ Pres~ Number Per cent Number Per cent Killed of Total Hunters of Total SAN LUIS VALLEY Alamosa Conejos Costilla Rio Grande Saguache SAN LUIS V. TOTAL HIGH COUNTRY (East) Chaffee Clear Creek Custer Fremont Gilpin Jackson Lake Park Teller HIGH COUNTRY TOTAL 428 59 98 Nine-year Average 1954-1962 Number Per cent Killed of Total 2.4 .3 .5 262 ll~l 41 2.4 1.3 .4 304 99 49 2.0 .7 .3 137 78 546 1,346 .8 .4 3.1 7.5 41 202 363 585 1,635 .4 1.9 3.3 5.4 15.1 10 12 140 66 530 1,210 .1 .1 .•9 .4 3.5 8.0 20 411 176 2.3 1.0 81 383 161 61 .7 3.5 1.5 .6 43 124 3 .3 .8 t 607 3.4 686 6.3 173 1.1 .1 .2 2 25 t 20 3 t 30 .2 '20 .1 3 t .2 .,-- --20 20 .2 .3 ~3 60 119 .6 13 .1 1.1 45 .2 .6 60 239 .6 2.3 58 .3 40 60 .4 .6 100 1.0 .1 West S1°2e NORTHHEST Garfield Hoffat Rio Blanco Routt NORTHHEST TOTAL WEST CENTRAL Delta Mesa l1ontrose Ouray W. CENTRAL TOTAL 57 57 .---" 114 --- 9 .1 7 22 .1 .2 38 .4 �-78~ Table 10. -~ Goose Kill by Region and County. (Continued) Nine-year Average Eat Imat ed 1963 1954-1962' Pressure Huntin~ 1963 Goose Kill Haterfowl Per cent PerCent Number Per-cent Number Number Region of Total Killed of Total Hunters of Total Killed and Countx SOUTHWEST Archuleta Dolores Hinsdale La Plata Hinersl Nontezuma San Juan San l-1iguel SOUTHHEST TOTAL 20 .2 3 t 20 .2 3 t 20 .2 4 t .2 4 t 1,453 6,668 1~635 ..686 20 239 100 20 20 13.5 61.2 15~1 6.3 .2 2.3 1.0 .2 .2 842 12,815 1,210 173 30 58 38 100.0 10,841 100.0 15,173 100.0 9904 .6 10,462 96 3 379 15,010 103 99.3 3.7 HIG H COUNTRY (West) Eagle Grand Gunnison Pitkin Summit HIGH COUNTRY TOTAL 20 Summary by Region NORTHEAST 1~36B 14~444 SOUTHEAST 1,346 CENTRAL 607 SAN LUIS VALLEY 20 HIGH COUNTRY (E) 114 NORTHHEST "lEST CENTRAL SOUTHHEST RIG H COUNTRY (W) TOTAL OF 17 ,899 REGIONS EAST SLOPE HEST SLOPE Prepared Date by 17 ,785 114 7.6 80.8 705 3.4 .1 .6 Approved Jack R. Grieb Project Leader ~J~u~1~y~,_1~9~6~4 _ 0 by __ 3 4 505 84.5 800 1.1 .2 .3 .4 t t .7 W":"."!a~yn:---,e=--W...".,..-Sa_n~d:=-f_o_r Chief, Game Research � https://cpw.cvlcollections.org/files/original/6e96da61a38b393e10304e1b011780c1.pdf ca61d151498a25820d56a652d9edc586 PDF Text Text -1- JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO ---------------------------- Project No. w-88-R-9 Work Plan No. 1 Title of Job Migratory Bird Investigations Job No. 3 A~n~a~l~y~s~i~s~o~f~W~a~t~e~r~f~o~w~I~B~a~n~d~i~n~g~D~a~t~a~ _ Objectives: To analyze data obtained from banding ducks and geese in Colorado, and to. make this information available for management recommendations. Results: This is a negative report. The IBM recovery deck, received from Patuxent was separated by banding year and species. No further analyses of these data were attempted because of lack of time. Prepared by: Jack R. Grieb Assistant Game Manager Date: ~O~c_t~o_b_er~,_1~9~6_4_ Approved by: Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief ��October, 1964 -3- FINAL JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO Project No. W-88-R-9 Work Plan No. 1 Migratory Bird Investigations Job No. Title of Job: Waterfowl Migration Studies Period Covered: April 1, 1955 to March 31, 1964 4 ABSTRACT Knowledge of waterfowl migration patterns in Colorado is highly important in management. To gain this information, ground and aerial surveys were made over a period of years, involving the recording of waterfowl species present at different times in different areas of the state. The composite of information thus obtained for the East Slope is presented as Table 1. Information for the West Slope and mountain areas is somewhat sketchy, but indications are that waterfowl migration occurs earlier than on the East Slope, with species composition being about the same. Recommendations: The chronology of waterfowl migrations into and through Colorado is the basic information upon which to recommend waterfowl seasons within the framework provided by the Bureau of Sport Fisheries and Wildlife. This information is beginning to be used to advantage, as witness the recent placing of the West Slope of Colorado into the Pacific Flyway and the granting of a special experimental duck hunting season in the San Luis Valley. Both of these actions were substantiated partially by knowledge of migration patterns. That it can be used to greater advantage in the future is indisputable. Waterfowl management in years to come will inevitably be more intensive than at the present time. Utilization of the resource to the fullest hunter satisfaction will mean increasing emphasis on flock and species management. Migration information for all huntable species of waterfowl in Colorado is fundamental to such management. Objectives: To determine the movement of waterfowl species into and through various portions of Colorado during ,fall migration as an aid to: �-4- (1) Gather information for use in determining the best hunting season dates to choose for each area. (2) Gain data for use in regulating future kill by species if this should be necessary. (3) Better interpret the results of waterfowl kill surveys, and thus the effect of the regulations on the kill for each area. Techniques Used: Observations of waterfowl on concentration areas, by species and by time of season, were made both by use of ground and aerial survey. In some cases, the primary objective was to make such observations; in other cases, the collection of migration information was incidental to other work being performed at the time. Waterfowl present were noted and recorded at various times during the fall migration season, with changes in species composition being especially noted. Prior to 1955, work on waterfowl migration studies was carried out as a.definite and regular job assignment, and results were reported by Grieb and Boeker (1954). Following this, work on migration studies was not conducted in as intensive a manner. The job was carried in Project W-88-R Plans, Specifications, and Estimates, and reporting was limited to the segment reports appearing in the Colorado Federal Aid Quarterly, with negative reports being submitted for the past two years. This report, therefore, constitutes a gathering together of all available information which has previously appeared either in formal publications or as Federal Aid segment reports, for the purpose of closing out the job. Findings: In the following presentation, informatiqn on waterfowl migration in Colorado is separated geographically according to East or West Slope location. East Slope. -- Table 1 is a composite of information on the migration 'pattern of the species of waterfowl which move into and through the East Slope of Colorado. This table has been compiled from records obtained during several different fall migration seasons, and is considered to be generally accurate. There are, of course, records of migrations which do not fit this table. These are exceptions, and seem to be brought about by odd combinations of weather and climatic factors. Teal, gadwalls, shovellers, coots, buffleheads, and ruddy ducks are the early migrants, and for the most part are gone by the end of November. Many of the early migrants appear to be locally raised or summer resident birds. These birds are usually gone by the time flights of northern migrants enter Colorado between mid-October and mid-November. In the South Platte Valley, migrants tend to use the large reservoirs during early season. Later, starting about mid-December, when all ducks other than winter residents have left, movement from the reservoirs to the South Platte River bottomlands begins to occur. By late February, nearly all ducks are to be found in the riverbottom. This pattern of movement is greatly influenced by the length of hunting season, since hunting pressure is the major factor responsible for keeping ducks concentrated on large reservoirs. �-5- Mallards are present in substantial numbers throughout the migration and wintering seasons. Pintail, widgeon, and green-winged teal populations are relatively high through November, then tend to decrease r~pidly to the small numbers which comprise the wintering flocks of these species. Table 1. Species Fall Migration Patterns of Waterfowl, East Slope of Colorado. Northeast Southeast Interval Peak Interval Peak Mallard 1 oct.I/-Winter Res. 4 Nov. 4 Oct.---Winter Res. 1 Dec. Pintail 1 Oct.---Winter Res. 1 Nov. 4 Oct.---Winter Res. 3 Nov. Gadwall 4 Sept.--2 Nov. 3 Oct. 4 Sept~--4 Nov. 4 Oct. Widgeon 3 Oct.---Winter Res. 2 Nov. 4 Oct.---Winter Res. 2 Nov. Shoveller 3 Sept.--4 Nov. 4 Oct. 4 Sept.--4 Nov. 1 Oct. Blue-w. teal 2 Aug.---2 Oct. Unknown 3 Aug.---3 Oct. Unknown Cinnamon teal 2 Aug.---2 Oct. Unknown 3 Aug.---3 Oct. Unknown Green-w. teal 2 Oct.---4 Nov. Unknown 2 Oct.---4 Nov. Unknown Redhead 1 Oct.---3 Nov. 4 Oct. 2 Oct.---3 Nov. 1 Nov. Canvasback Similar to redhead, but no strong fall movement through Colo. Lesser scaup 4 Oct.---3 Nov. No def. 1 Nov.---2 Jan. No def. Bufflehead 3 Sept.--l Nov. No def. 1 Oct.---4 Nov. No def. Ruddy duck 3 Sept. --1 Nov. 1 Oct. 1 Oct. ---3 Nov. No def. Goldeneye 2 Nov.---l Jan. No def. 2 Nov.---2 Jan. 2 Dec. Am. merganser 2 Nov.---4 Dec. 4 Nov. 2 Nov.---2 Jan. 2 Dec. Coot 1 Sept.--l Nov. No def , 3 Sept.--4 Nov. 4 Oct. Canada goose 4 Oct.---Winter Res. 2 Nov. 1 Nov.---Winter Res. 2 Nov. Snow goose No definite flights; usually come through in late Oct.-early Nov. Sandhill crane No definite flights; usually come through from mid-Oct. to early November, except a few which stay in San Luis Valley until mid-December. 1 Numbers preceding names of months refer to the week of the month. Generally by the first or second week of January, wintering duck populations on the East Slope consist almost entirely of mallards, with small numbers of pintails, widgeon, green-winged teal, mergansers, and goldeneyes. The overall species composition for Colorado during the regular January inventory runs approximately as follows: Mallard, 96 percent; pintail, 1 percent; widgeon, 1 percent; green-winged teal, 1 percent; merganser, 0.5 percent; and goldeneye, 0.5 percent, with total numbers for the East Slope averaging about 350,000 for the past several years. By January, all migrants have departed; the great bulk of Central Flyway wintering duck populations are concentrated in Texas·,with mallard concentrations being found more in South Dakota, Nebraska, Colorado, Kansas, Oklahoma and the Panhandle of Texas. For geese, the build-up of wintering populations is fairly gradual after the first big influx in early November. Peak populations are usually recorded in January, dependent upon weather and food. Following this peak, a gradual decrease in numbers is noted until the general departure of geese occurs sometime during March. �-6The migration of sandhill cranes is of short duration, usually occurring from about mid-October to early November. For the most part, this is a straight-through migration with little tendency to linger, although recently sandhill cranes have made brief stays at a few spots in the South Platte Valley. West Slope and Mountain Parks. -- On the West Slope and in the mountains little factual information on waterfowl migration exists, since most counts which have been conducted have been limited to the once-a-year January inventory, which provides no .periodic data on the relative proportions of species at different times. Also, counts have been confined to an inventory of total waterfowl numbers, with little attempt to distinguish species. There is a strong indication that migration movements for most species are earlier than those listed for the East Slope. The greatest influx of migrants to the wintering areas of the West Slope occurs about the first week of November. Duck numbers during January inventory counts on the West Slope seem to run about 10,000 to 16,000, with mallards comprising 98 to 99 percent of the population. These counts are all from the lower Colorado-Gunnison-Uncompahgre Valleys, which is the only area of the West Slope where migrants stay for any length of time, or which holds any wintering birds. All other West Slope areas, plus North Park, South Park, and the mountain areas in general, hold only local birds and summer residents until about mid-October, when a general exodus takes place. The West Slope is not a wintering area for geese. A few are found in the lower Colorado River Valley during January inventory but, generally, fall goose migrations on the West Slope are in the form of an exodus to wintering grounds in California. The San Luis Valley. is the one other area of Colorado which holds wintering populations of waterfowl. There is an indication that this area is becoming increasingly more attractive to wintering ducks. Total numbers recorded during the January inventory have increased from about 10,000 in 1955 to 30,000 in 1963 and 27,000 in 1964. Species composition appears to be about 99 percent mallards, with gadwalls, green-winged teal, pintails, goldeneyes, and shovellers totaling about one percent in the aggregate. Wintering waterfowl populations in the San Luis Valley appear to be made up primarily of northern migrants, which arrive in the Valley about the first week of November. Locally raised and summer resident birds begin to move out of the Valley starting about mid-October, but movement is generally sporadic and of longer duration than elsewhere in the mountains, so that some are still present in wintering populations. LITERATURE CITED Grieb, Jack R. and Erwin L. Boeker. 1954. Waterfowl migration studies and their application to management in Colorado. Trans. N. Am. Wildl. Conf., 19:195-210. Prepared by:"viiiiiam H. Rutherford Asst. Wildlife Researcher Approved by: Jack R. Grieb Wildlife Researcher �October, 1964 -7- JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO ----~~==~------------- Project No. W-88-R-9 ------~----------------- Work Plan No. 1 Migratory Bird Investigations Job No. Title of Job: Waterfowl Habitat Improvement Studies Period Covered: April 1, 1963 to March 31, 1964. 7 Objectives: (1) To improve waterfowl habitat particularly on areas owned or controlled by the Game, Fish, and Parks Department; but elsewhere if needed. (2) To submit detailed habitat improvement plans for each area. Procedures: Improvements for waterfowl production is done by preserving existing pond and marsh areas, and creating new ones; in determining correct use of water available to an area; contolling physical factors such as hay mowing until a safe time; recognizing that a certain control over predator populations may be necessary; and placement of nesting structures where needed. All of this can best be accomplished by an investigation of the area. The area must first be mapped, and then plans made for improvements in the best, and most economical fashion to achieve the desired results. Practices such as hay mowing, and use of available waters should be examined on the basis of their effect on production. All recommendations should be considered in the light of their effect on other wildlife uses of the area. Findings: This is a negative report. No work has been accomplished under this 'job during this segment. The specific objective for this segment was to work up a detailed plan for the erection of goose nesting structures in the Yampa Valley, Brown's Park, and northeast Colorado. Brown's Park will soon become a Federal Refuge and therefore habitat improvement recommendations will no longer be the responsibility of the State. During this segment, the State assigned a full-time man to the job of improving the status of Canada Geese in northeast Colorado, thereby insuring a good program involving nesting structures in this area. �-8- This leaves the Yampa'Valley for which a goose nesting structure plan is needed. We are interested in developing this plan, but in view of two circumstances we feel unable to present a good plan at this time which will receive proper attention. First, the Northwest Region still lacks a Lands Manager and is presently not prepared to work on such a plan. Secondly, we have discovered a large population of Canada Geese utilizing the Little Snake River, a tributary of the Yampa River. This area appears to hold a greater potential for success with nesting structures than the Yampa River itself. However, although we have considerable information on where to locate nesting structures on the Yampa River, our knowledge of the Little Snake River is limited at the present time. A plan for the erection of goose nesting structures in the Yampa Valley would not be complete without the inclusion of the Little Snake River. It is our desire to develop such a plan during a future segment of this job. Prepared by Richard M. Hopper Senior Game Biologist Date ~O~c~t~o~b~e~r~,~l~9~6_4 _ Approved by __ ~J~a~c~k~R~.~G~r~i~e~b Project Leader Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator _ �October, 1964 -9JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of ~C~o~lo~r~a~d~o~ Project N(). W-88-R-9 Work Plan No. ~l~ _ Migratory Bird Investigations _ Job No. 9 Title of Job: Survey of Potential Public Waterfowl Shooting Areas in Colorado Period Covered: April 1, 1963 to March 31, 1964. ABSTRACT Results of the wetlands inventory and habitat evaluation of the irrigated portion of the San Luis Valley reveal that: 1. The average section in the San Luis Valley contains 1.64 wetlands (148.7 acres), 0.20 miles of streams and rivers, and 0.67 miles of ditches and canals. 2. Total projected numbers of wetlands by category for the irrigated portion of the San Luis Valley is as follows: lakes and reservoirs, 12; ponds and marshes over five acres, 962; and ponds and marshes less than five acres, 1,319. 3.. Total estimated wetlands for the irrigated portion of the San Luis Valley amount to 230,782 acres, with 310 miles of streams and rivers and 1,040 miles of ditches and canals. 4. Periodically flooded pasture and hayland (Type I-A wetlands) make up an estimated 78 per cent of the total wetland acreage in the Valley. 5. An estimated 76 per cent of all wetlands over five acres in size· in the San Luis Valley are open to public hunting, and the remainder are not open to hunting except by the landowner or his personal friends. Leasing of wetlands for hunting by private clubs or individuals was not encountered. 6. An estimated 6.8 per cent of the wetlands over five acres in size are under public ownership in the irrigated portion of the San Luis Valley. Recommendations: 1. WE MUST BEGIN AN ACTIVE AND AGGRESSIVE PROGRAM OF LOCATING, EVALUATING, AND ACQUIRING WETLAND TYPE PUBLIC HUNTING AREAS IN THE SAN LUIS VALLEY. Lease and purchase of lands for wildfowl hunting is probably at an all time low. �-10- Much of this can be attributed to the restrictive waterfowl hunting regulations. However, with quality waterfowl hunting seasons coming into' existence, such as the early experimental season, we must be prepared to meet increasing hunting pressures and lease and purchase activities of private individuals, by acquiring wetlands for public use. ' 2. AT LEAST TWO ADDITIONAL STATE-OWNED OR MANAGED PUBLIC WATERFOWL SHOOTING AREAS SHOULD BE ACQUIRED IN THE SAN LUIS VALLEY BY THIS DEPARTMENT WITHIN THE NEXT FIVE YEARS. With our present Rio Grande Management Area located in the center of the Valley, it is recommended that an additional area be .established toward the north end and one toward the south end in order to distribute hunting pressure and attain an efficient harvest of the waterfowl resource. Effort should be made to acquire the Russell Lakes in the north end of the Valley. Bottomlands in the vicinity of Lasauses along the Rio Grande River between Conejos and Costilla Counties should be acquired in the south end of the Valley. Objectives: Only a summary of the objectives given in the report of January, 1961 (Grieb and Sheldon, 1961) will be presented here: (1) To determine the amount of wetlands in Colorado, beginning with the irrigated portion of the eastern slope. (2) To determine the number and amount of wetland areas leased for hunting, fishing, and other recreational purposes. (3) To set up a method to rate wetland areas in terms of value for acquisition as public hunting areas. (4) To establish a priority list of public hunting areas for presentation to the Commission. Procedures: All methods remained the same as explained in the 1961 report. Work has been conducted in the irrigated portions of the South Platte and Arkansas Valleys in past years. Completion reports have been prepared which give results of this work in each area (Hopper 1962, 1963). The latter report also combines the South Platte and Arkansas Valley information in order to present a summary and conclusions for the entire eastern slope. Only two other areas of waterfowl hunting significance in Colorado remain to be included in this survey: (1) the irrigated portion of the San Luis Valley; and (2) the major irrigated portion of the western slope, namely the UncompahgreGunnison-Colorado River complex in the Montrose, Delta, and Grand Junction areas. �-11- Field work was completed in the San Luis Valley during the summer of 1963 .and the results are presented in this report. A similar survey will be condu~ted on the western slope during the summer of 1964. The San Luis Valley is the only inter-mountain area in Colorado of significant waterfowl-hunting value. North, Middle, and South Parks are important waterfowl-producting areas, but they contribute little in the way of waterfowl hunting. In addition to its large number of wintering waterfowl, the San Luis Valley is also the major duck-producing region in Colorado. Counties included in the San Luis Valley survey that contain significant amounts of irrigated land are as follows: Alamosa, Conejos, Rio Grande, and Saguache. The survey was conducted on a county by county basis, in which the irrigated portion of each county comprised one study area. Small acreages of dryland were included in some study areas so that they would coincide with the boundaries of our present aerial waterfowl breeding-pair transects. These acreages are included below in the total for irrigated land. Study areas for the four counties constituted a total of 1,552 sections or 993,280 acres of irrigated land. Location of this acreage is shown in Figure 1. Two study sections were randomly selected from each township of irrigated land, making a total of 87 study sections for the irrigated portion of the San Luis Valley. Table 1 shows the number of study sections in each county. Table 1. -- Number of Study Sections in the Irrigated Portion of each of Four Counties in the San Luis Valley. Count X Number of StudX Sections Per Cent Alamosa 30 34.5 Conejos 17 19.5 Rio Grande 14 16.1 Saguache 26 29.9 87 100.0 TOTAL ,! �: ROUTT L 0 3 LOGAN i3 i i i i i r:i 19 !lIE t!'! !3 €ckllylBWRAy RIO BLANCO I ~ I 13 ) ....JL Figure l.--Location of the irrigated portion of the San Luis Valley, Colorado. �-13- SURVEY OF POTENTIAL PUBLIC WATERFOWL SHOOTING AREAS Richard M. Hopper The results presented herein include data gathered from 87 study sections in the irrigated portion of the San Luis Valley. This infonnation was obtained during the summer of 1963. Little attempt will be made to compare results found in the San Luis Valley with those obtained in the eastern portion of .Colorado. Such a comparison will be included in the final completion report at a later date. Amount of wetlands Tables I-IV in the appendix list acres and miles of wetlands found on study sections in individual counties of the San Luis Valley. Study sections re-, vea1ed that ponds and marshes over five acres account for the majority of wetland acreage in each of the four counties. Wetlands within this category made up from 52.5 per cent of the total sample wetland acreage in Rio Grande County to 99.2 per cent in Saguache County. Most of this acreage is attributed to lands periodically flooded in relation to agricultural practices, i.e., pasture and hay1and. The Fish and Wildlife Service (1955) considers them a subdivision of "Type 1" wetlands (seasonally flooded basins and flats) and designates them as "Type 1-A" wetlands. They represent a valuable segment of the waterfowl habitat in the San Luis Valley. Streams and rivers, and their associated marginal land (Type 1), constituted a large percentage of the total sample wetland acreage in both Alamosa and Rio Grande Counties (40.2 and 46.4 per cent, respectively). On the other hand, study sections in Conejos and Saguache Counties contributed less than one per cent of their total wetland acreage to stream and river habitat. This situation is explained by the presence of the Rio Grande River in Alamosa and Rio Grande Counties and its absence in the latter two counties. Few lakes and reservoirs exist in the San Luis Valley. Russell Lakes, Mishak Lakes, San Luis Lake, Adams Lake, and Home Lake are the only ones of a pennanent nature. None of these were encountered on study sections in the four counties. The importance of "Type 1-A" wetlands to waterfowl in the San Luis Valley is evidenced by the absence of lakes and reservoirs. Tables 2 and 3 present the combined water composition and proportion of total wetlands in each wetland category for all study sections in the irrigated portion of the San Luis Valley. A total of 143 wetland areas, excluding ditches and canals, were observed on 87 study sections, resulting in an average of 1.64 wetlands per section. Total acres of wetlands on these study sections amounted to 12,936.6, or 148.70 acres per square mile. Average miles of running water per square mile were found to be 0.20 for streams and rivers, and 0.67 for ditches and canals. Ponds and marshes of less than five acres seem to be the predominant wetlands in regard to numbers in the San Luis Valley, just as they were i.nthe South Platte �Table 2. -- Total Water Composition of 87 Study Sections in the Irrigated No. Ave. per Section Surface Acres of Water Ave. per Section Lakes and reservoirs 0 0 0 0 Ponds and marshes over 5 acres 54 . 0.62 43.21.1 0.50 10,687.2 122.84 0.85 -- -- -- -- Wetland Categor~ Ponds and marshes less than 5 acreS£/ 74 Streams and rivers Ditches and canals TOTALS 1/ 2/ 3/ Acres of Marginal Land 0 Ave. per Section 0 Portion of the San Luis Valley. Total Acres % Ave. per Section 0 0 0 10,730.4 82.9 123.34 158.4 1.3 1.82 Miles I Ave. per Section I 15 0.17 115.4 1.33 1,932.4 -- -- -- 1431/ 1.64 --- --- -- 22.21 -- -- 2,047.8 15.8 23.54 17.01 0.20 -- -- -- 58.44 0.67 12,936.61/100.0 148.70 75.45 0.87 This feature not determined for "Type 1" wetlands because it constantly changes. Only total acres of wetland was determined for each of these smaller. areas. Excluding ditches and canals. ~ I �Table 3. -- Proportion of Total Wetlands in each Category for 87 Study Sections in the Irrigated Portion of the San Luis Valley. Wetland Category No. % Surface Acres of Water % Acres of Marginal Land % Total Acres % Lakes and reservoirs 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Ponds and marshes over 5 acres 54 37.8 43.21/ 27.2 10,687.2 84.7 10,730.4 82.9 Ponds and marshes less than 5 acre~/ 74 51.7 -- -- -- -- 158.4 1.3 Streams and rivers 15 10.5 115.4 72.8 1,932.4 15.3 2,047.8 15.8 Miles 17.01 % 22.5 I I-' \Jl Ditches and canals -- TOTALS 14~/100.0 1/ 1.1 1/ I -- -158. &V -- -- -- 100.0 12,619.6 100.0 -- -- 58.44 77 .5 12,936.~ 3/ 100.0 75.45 100.0 This feature not determine for "Type 1" wetlands because it constantly changes. Only total acres of wetland was determined for each of these smaller areas. Excluding ditches and canals. �-16- and Arkansas Valleys. Slightly over 50 per cent of the 143 wetland areas in the sample fell in this category (Table 3). However, these areas contributed only 1.3 per cent of the total acres of wetlands. Ponds and marshes over five acres, consisting primarily of "Type I-A" wetlands, (~ade up 82.9 per cent of the total wetland acreage for all study sections. \~treams and rivers and their associated marginal land accounted for only 15.8 per cent; much less than that in the South Platte and Arkansas Valleys. Table 4 presents a sunnnary of wetlands composition of 87 study sections and total projected acres and miles of wetlands in the irrigated portion of the San Luis Valley. A total of 993,280 acres of irrigated land exists in the Valley, with Alamosa and Saguache Counties contributing about two-thirds of the total. Total average acres of wetlands per study section ranged by county as follows: Rio Grande (106.73), Alamosa (111.04), Conejos (155.82), and Saguache (210.08). Alamosa and Rio Grande Counties possess lower figures because irrigated farming is practiced more intensively here than in the latter two counties. The Rio Grande River, flowing through the former two counties, provides water readily available for an intensified farming operation. Row crops and small grains form an important part of the agricultural economy in Alamosa and Rio Grande Counties, whereas Conejos and Saguache Counties emphasize the production of cattle on pasture and hayland. The abundance of pasture and hayland (Type I-A wetlands) in the latter counties explains their greater wetland acreages per section. The ± t.05 standard error value following each average figure indicates, in .most cases, considerable variation among study sections in each county. These variations are undoubtedly the result of relatively small sample sizes for·the individual counties. Generally, with an increase in sample size the standard error value becomes smaller in comparison to the observed mean. When sample sizes for all counties were combined in order to determine average acres of wetlands per sample section for the irrigated portion of the San Luis Valley, a relatively smaller t.05 standard error value was obtained (148.70 ± 46.03). This resulted in a total projected wetland acreage of 230,782 ± 71,438, or 23.2 ± 7.2 per cent, of the irrigated portion of the Valley. Streams or rivers were present in only 15, or 17.2 per cent, of the 87 study sections. Large numbers of study sections with zero miles of streams or rivers contributed greatly to the large variation about the mean number of miles per section for each county and for all counties combined (Table 4). Average miles of streams and rivers per sample section for all four counties was 0.20 ± 0.12, with a projected figure of 310.40 ± 186.24 miles for the irrigated portion of the San Luis Valley. Ditches and canals averaged 0.67 t 0.18 miles per study section for all counties combined, resulting in a total estimated figure of 1,039.84 ± 279.36 miles for the irrigated portion of the San Luis Valley (Table 4). Drain ditches, as well as �Table 4. -- Summary of Wetlands Composition'of the Irrigated Portion county Total Acres of Wet1ands27 Av. Acres/Section in Sample % Total Irrigated Lanol/ Acres Sections Total Projected Acres 17.4 + - 10.8 59,962 ! 37,460 155.82'! 110.98 24.3 + - 17.3 46,590 -.t 33,183 160,640 106.73 + - 99.60 16.7 + - 15.6 26,789t , 462 295,680 210.08 + - 105.35 32.8 + - 16 .5 97,057 + - 48,672 1,552 993,280 148.70 ~ 23.2 ~ 230,782 ~ 71,438 Alamosa 540 345,600 111.04 t Conejos 299 191,360 Rio Grande 251 Saguache TOTALS 1/ of the San Luis Valley. 69.371.1 46.03 7.2 25,000 Study areas from which sample sections were selected. J) Excluding ditches and canals. 1/ ± t.05 standard errors. I f-' -.J I Table 4. -- Summary of Wetlands Composition of the Irrigated Portion of the San Luis Valley. (continued) Streams and Rivers Av. Mi./Sect. Total Projected in Sample Miles County Total Irrigated Landl/ Sections Acres Alamosa 540 345,600 0.29! Conejos 299 191,360 Rio Grande 251 Saguache 462 Ditches and Canals Av. Mi./Sect. Total Projected in Sample Miles 156.60 -.t 140.40 0.52 t 0.33 280.80 t 178.20 0.17 + - 0.20 50.83 + - 59.80 0.66 + - 0.38 197.34 ~ 113.62 160,640 0.26 + - 0.42 65.26 - 105.42 1.12 + - 0.52 281.12! 295,680 0.07 ~ 0.10 32.34 !46.20 0.62! 0.35 286.44 ! 161.70 0.67 + - 0.18 1,039.84 + - 279.36 O.U)/ + 1,552~J1L280 0.20 + - 0.12 310.40 + - 186.24 TOTALS 1/ Study areas from which sample sections were selected. 1/ ± t.05 standard errors. 130.52 �Table 4. -- Summary of Wetlands Composition County of the Irrigated Portion of the San Luis Valley. Lakes and Reservoirs Total Av. No./Sect. Proj. No.~/ in Sample Ponds and Marshes over five acres Av. No./$ect. Total Pzo j, No. in Sample (continued) Ponds and Marshes less than five acres Av. No./Sect. Total in Sample Proj. No. Alamosa 0 1 0.53 - 0.31 + 286 ~ 167 + 0.97 - 0.49 Conejos 0 0 0.65 + - 0.44 194 ~ 132 0.65 + - 0.76 t 265 194 t 227 Rio Grande 0 1 0.50 + - 0.54 + 0.36 - 0.48 90 't 120 Saguache 0 10 0.77 + - 0.33 t 136 356 t 152 1.12 + - 0.71 517 t 328 TOTALS 0 12 0.62 + - 0.18 962 t 279 + 0.85 - 0.31 1,319 t 481 126 524 I I-' 1/ ex> Actual count of permanent lakes and reservoirs. I �-19-- regular irrigation ditches and canals, were included in the above figures. Drain ditches were incorporated in the San Luis Valley survey because of their abundance and their importance as waterfowl breeding and brooding habitat. Table 4 also presents the average number of wetlands per section and total projected number for each county and for all counties combined. Actual counts were made of permanent lakes and reservoirs in each county because of their small numbers. Only 12 lakes or reservoirs exist in the San Luis Valley, of which 10 occur in Saguache County. Information collected from study sections reveal that 962 ± 279 ponds and marshes over five acres in size exist in the irrigated portion of the San Luis Valley, with an average of 0.62 ± 0.18 per section. Saguache and Alamosa Counties account for the bulk of this number. Saguache and Alamosa Counties also account for the majority of ponds and marshes less than five acres in size, with over 500 each. The total for all counties equals 1,319 t 481 or an average of 0.85 ± 0.31 per section. Wetland types Each wetland area over five acres in size was classified according to the 20 types described by Martin et al. (1953). Only four types were encountered in the four major counties of the San Luis Valley. In addition, a subtype of "Type I" wetlands was found in great abundance and considered separately because of its value as waterfowl habitat. Other types were undoubtedly present, expecially if wetlands of less than five acres were considered. Brief descriptions of these four types were presented in previous reports, but they are repeated here for easy reference. (1) Type 1 -- Seasonally flooded basins or flats Soil is covered with water or waterlogged during variable seasonal periods, but well drained during much of the growing season. Located on river-bottoms, along borders of drawn-down reservoirs, and in shallow potholes and other shallow depressions. The vegetative cover normally consists of grasses, sedges, smartweeds, and annual weeds. "Type I-A" wetlands are pasture and hayland periodically flooded with irrigation water during the spring, summer, and early fall for the purpose of producing livestock forage. Vegetation consists primarily of a mixture of grasses, sedges, and rushes. (2) Type 3 -- Shallow fresh marshes Soil is normally waterlogged and sometimes covered with as much as six inches of water during the growing season. They may nearly fill shallow lake basins, potholes, or sloughs, may border deep marshes on the landward side of such depressions, or may adjoin irrigation systems. Common plants consist of grasses, sedges, rushes, bulrushes, spikerushes, cattail, arrowhead, and smartweeds. �-20- (3) Type 4 ~- Deep fresh marshes Marshy depressions covered with one to three feet of water during the growing season. These deep marshes may nearly fill shallow lake basins,potholes, or sloughs, or may border open water in such depressions. Emergent vegetation includes such plants as cattail, reeds, and bulrush. In open areas, pondweeds, naiads, coontail, watermilfoil, waterweeds, duckweeds, or other aquatics may occur. (4) Type 5 -- Open fresh water Open water of variable depth that has emergent vegetation restricted to a narrow border. Ponds, lakes, and reservoirs are included in this type. Open water may completely occupy lake and pond basins, potholes, sloughs, ditches, canals, or stream beds, or it may be fringed with marsh. Vegetation (mainly at depths of less than six feet) includes pondweeds, naiads, coontail, watermilfoil, and muskgrasses. In regard to numbers, "Type I-A" wetlands seem to be more conunon in the San Luis Valley than other types with respect to water areas over five acres in size (Table 5). They made up from 55.6 to 95.0 per cent of these larger wetlands in study sections of the four counties, with Rio Grande County showing the smallest percentage and Saguache County the largest. "Type I-A" wetlands constituted 78 per cent in all counties combined for water areas over five acres in size. "Type 1" wetlands were the next most abundant type, but accounted for only 15.2 per cent of the total for all 87 study sections in the four counties combined. Numbers of "Type 3, 4, and 5" wetlands over five acres in size were very low, as indicated in Table 5. However, most wetlands of less than five acres would be expected to fall into these three types. "Type 1 and I-A" wetlands also contributed more acres than any of the other, constituting essentially the same percentages as they did in regard to numbers. "Type 3, 4, and 5" wetlands combined made up less than five per cent of the total wetland acreage on all study sections, excluding wetlands 'less than five 'acres.in size. Table 6 presents a summary of wetlands inventory data for the irrigated portion of the San Luis Valley. Recreational uses A total of 59 wetland areas over five acres in size was rated for recreational and wildlife values in the irrigated portion ,of the San Luis Valley. Types of recreational use of these wetlands, whether private, public, leased, or none, are presented in Table 7 for all study sections in the four counties combined. �Table 5. -- Wetland Type Classification of 59 Water Areasl/ in the San Luis Valley, Colorado. Wetland Type 1-A 1 3 5 4 Total County No. % No. % No. % No. % No. % No. % Alamosa 6 31.6 12 63.2 o o 1 5.2 o o 19 100.0 Conejos o o 10 90.9 1 9.1 o o o o 11 100.0 Rio Grande 2 22.2 5 55.6 o o 1 11.1 1 11.1 9 100.0 Saguache 1 5.0 19 95.0 o o o o o o 20 100.0 TOTALS 9 15.2 46 78.0 1 1.7 2 3.4 1 1.7 59 100.0 1/ Excluding ponds and marshes less than five acres and ditches and canals. , ro ~ Table 5. -- Wetland Type Classification I of 59 Water Areasl/ in the San Luis Valley. (continued) Wetland Type Acres % Acres % Acres % Total Acres % 52.6 o 0 28.8 0.9 o o 3,242.6 100.0 2,164.3 82.6 455.0 17.4 o o o o 2,619.3 100.0 46.7 698.2 47.4 o 0 50.9 3.5 35.4 2.4 1,473.1 100.0 36.1 0.7 5,379.4 99.3 o 0 o o o o 5,415.5 100.0 2,231.9 17.5 9,948.5 78.0 455.0 3.6 79.7 0.6 35.4 0.3 12,750.5 100.0 1 I-A Acres % County Acres Alamosa 1,507.2 46.5 1,706.6 Conejos o 0 Rio Grande 688.6 Saguache TOTALS 1/ % 3 5 4 Excluding ponds and marshes less than five acres and ditches and canals. �-22- Table 6. -- Summary of Wetlands Inventory Data for the Irrigated Portion of the San Luis Valley. Wetland Criterion No. No. of study sections 87 No. wetlands/study sectionl/ lakes and reservoirs ponds and marshes over 5 acres ponds and marshes less than 5 acres streams and rivers 1.64 Acres of wetlands/study section!/ lakes and reservoirs ponds and marshes over 5 acres ponds and marshes less than 5 acres streams and rivers o o 0.62 0.85 0.17 37.8 51.7 10.5 148.70 o o 123.34 1.82 23.54 82.9 1.3 15.8 23.2 Total wetland percentage/ study section!! Miles of streams and rivers/study section Miles of ditches and canals/study section 0.20 0.67 Total sections of irrigated land Total acres of irrigated land Total projected no. of lakes and reservoirs Total projected no. of ponds and marshes over 5 acres To~al projected no. of ponds and marshes less than 5 acres Total projected acres of wetlandsl/ Total projected miles of streams and rivers Total projected miles of ditches and canals 1,552 993,280 12 1/ 1/ Excluding ditches and canals. Actual count of permanent lakes and reservoirs. % 962 1,319 230,782 310.40 1,039.84 �Table 7. -- Combined Recreational San Luis Valley. Uses of 59 Wetland Areas1/ in the Irrigated Portion of the B051t;i.na; T:lEe of use No. % Acres % No. % F1§b;i.na; Acres % No. % Acres % Private 10 16.9 2,126.3 16.7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Public 45 76.3 9,639.3 75.6 6 10.2 1,588.3 12.4 0 0 0 0 Leased 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 None 4 6.8 984.9 7.7 53 89.8 11,162.2 87.6 59 100.0 12,750.5 100.0 TOTALS 59 100.0 12,750.5 100.0 59 100.0 12,750.5 100.0 59 100.0 12,750.5 100.0 l:Im.ltjDg J) Excluding ponds and marshes less than five acres and ditches and canals. I ro W I �--24This same information is shown by individual county in Tables V-VIII of the appendix. Table 8 shows the type of ownership of the 59 wetlands. These tables are discussed below. Hunting -- Although hunting on wetlands is not necessarily restricted to waterfowl shooting, ducks and geese are normally of primary concern where water areas occur and any interpretations or conclusions to follow will emphasize this type of hunting. Of the 59 large wetlands that occurred in study sections, 45, or 76.3 per cent were open to public hunting (Table 7). This number amounts to 75.6 per cent of the total wetland acreage in the study sections, excluding areas less than five acres in size. Private hunting accounted for the remaining 14 (23.7 per cent) wetlands. Individually, all _counties except Rio Grande exhibited this same degree of public hunting opportunity. In Rio Grande County, only two of nine sample wetlands (22.2 per cent) featured public hunting. Greater intensity of irrigated farming and a higher human population in this county as compared to the others could explain the reluctance of landowners to permit public hunting in the former. However, the presence of Monte Vista National Wildlife Refuge in Rio Grande County compensates somewhat for this situation. None of the 59 wetlands was leased for hunting at the time of the survey. However, a few gun clubs that lease wetlands are known to operate in the Russell Lakes area, and along the Rio Grande River. But, for the most part it appears that leased rights presently form a minor segment of hunting on wetlands in the San Luis Valley. Table 4 lists a projected figure of 230,782 acres of wetlands in the irrigated portion of the San Luis Valley. An estimated 75.6 per cent, or 174,471 acres, of this total represents the portion open to public hunting. However, it should be noted that an estimated 78 percent (Table 5) of the total wetland acreage consists of "Type I-A" wetlands. "Type I-A" wetlands offer little in the way of duck hunting in the fall and winter becuase they normally don't contain surface water during that portion of the year to attract ducks. An exception to this may be during the early experimental duck season in early October when pastures or hayland may still support some surface water. But, during the later regular season, "Type I-A" wetlands cannot be expected to maintain ducks and provide hunting habitaj.:: to any significant degree. This means that hunting is restricted largely to 22 per cent of the wetlands or to areas other than "Type I-A" wetlands; namely, ponds, marshes, riverbottoms, and ditches and canals. Therefore, with the exclusion of ~itchesand canals, only about 50,772 acres in the San Luis Valley can be classed as huntable wetlands, while only 38,384 acres represent wetlands open to the public. These figures may be increased somewhat during the early experimental season. Fishing acreage Only about 10 per cent of the number and 12 per cent of the of sample wetlands over five acres in size were suitable for �-25- sport fishing. These areas were located on the Rio Grande River in Alamosa and Rio Grande Counties. All were open to the public. The remaining 90 and 88 per cent, respectively, provide no fishing because game-fish populations were restricted due to shallow or intermittent waters (Table 7). Boating -- Lakes and reservoirs of sufficient size for speed-boating and water skiing are essentially absent in the irrigated portion of the San Luis Valley. Water areas suitable for these types of recreation were not encountered on any of the 59 sample wetlands. San Luis Lake provides the only recreation of this nature in the Valley. Type of ownership -- Table 8 shows the type of o~mership of the 59 sample wetlands over five acres in size. Corporation or company ownership was not represented in the sample wetlands. Privat~ ownership accounted for 55, or 93.2 per cent of the 59 water areas, with only four (6.8 per cent) owned by the public. It would be desirable to have a higher percentage of wetlands in public ownership. Public ownership or management rights of 25 per cent of the larger wetlands would probably not be too large a figure to strive for in the future. However, the' public demand for recreation should govern the amount of wetlands needed. Conclusions and recommendations Recreational use of wetlands in the San Luis Valley is largely limited to hunting because of the scarcity of suitable fishing and boating waters. Data collected from study sections reveal that loss of public hunting righ~s on private lands is not presently affected by private leasing. The public seems to have little difficulty in obtaining permission to go hunting on private property. The San Luis Valley has a much lower human population than the South Platte or Arkansas Valleys, and major population centers are at least 100 miles away. This situation results in relatively low hunting pressures at present. Likewise, the demand for areas to lease for hunting purposes is lower. Superficially, it appears that the Department does not require an immediate wetlands acquisition program in the San Luis Valley, but a definite need exists for such-a program in the near future in light of recent developments. In addition to regular duck hunting seasons, Colorado was granted an early experimental season in the San Luis Valley in 1963. The early season was considered a success, with almost 1,500 hunters participating (Grieb et al., 1964). If quality seasons of this nature are granted in future years, hunting pressure is likely to increase considerably in the San Luis Valley. With an increase in hunting pressure, competition for hunting space will become strong, resulting in an increase in leasing by gun clubs and private individuals. Such a situation could spell disaster for many average hunters uul es s additional public shooting areas' are leased or acquired by this Department. �-26"Table 8. -- Type of Ownership of 59 Wetland Areasl/ in the Irrigated Portion of the San Luis Valley. Type of Ownership Number Per cent Corporation or Company o o Private 55 93.2 Public 4 6.8 TOTALS 59 100.0 1/ Excluding ponds and marshes less than five acres and ditches and canals. Managed public waterfowl shooting areas amount to only about 6,500 acres in the San Luis Valley, of which 4,500 acres exist as part of the Monte Vista National Wildlife Refuge. This acreage alone cannot be expected to accomodate a substantial increase in public hunting pressure brought about by quality seasons and increased private leasing. This Department should actively, and aggressively, engage in competition with private clubs and individuals for the leasing or acquisition of hunting areas. We have the opportunity to acquire top quality wetlands in the next few years before hunting pressures and private leases increase greatly. If such areas are not purchased or leased by our Department within the next five years, availability of wetlands may be limited due to excessive competition from private clubs and individuals. It is likely that two new Federal refuges will become established in the San Luis Valley, one in the Alamosa area and one in the Mishak Lakes area. In fact, some property has already been purchased in the Alamosa area. This would make a total of three refuges in the Valley. Such areas could be expected to attract and.hold large numbers of ducks during the fall and winter hunting seasons, making a large percentage of the Valley duck population unavailable to hunters. This situation could cause great concern among the hunting public, and rightly so. Even though these refuge areas would produce a large portion of the Valley's ducks and help hold them here, .they would limit public hunting to a maximum of 40 per cent of their areas. The discussion above points to another reason why our Department should initiate a wetlands acquisition program in the San Luis Valley as soon as possible. The purchase, development, and management of wetlands by this Department for public hunting would help distribute the duck population in the Valley and permit a proper harvest, instead of allowing them to concentrate on refuge areas where the harvest may be inadequate. It would also help to eliminate any public resentment towards the Federal refuges. We are just as capable of developing and managing attractive waterfowl habitat as the Federal people, if we are willing to spend the time and money to do so. A system of Federal production areas and State harvest �-27- areas would be an ideal combination in the San Luis Valley considering its unique mallard population and quality hunting potential. At least two additional public hunting areas should be acquired in the San Luis Valley by this Department within the next five years. With our present management areas located near the center of the Valley, it would be desirable that one area be established toward the north end of the Valley and one toward the south in order to distribute public hunting pressure. Effort should be made to acquire the Russell Lakes as one of these areas, either through purchase or lease. This area consists of about six sections, or 3,840 acres. It presently affords no public hunting because of leases by gun clubs. Although it is already one of the major duck production areas in the Valley, both duck and goose production could be greatly improved through habitat management. The Russell Lakes area would provide a public hunting area in the north end of the Valley. Bottomlands along the Rio Grande River between Conejos and Costilla Counties contain attractive waterfowl habitat and should produce excellent public hunting facilities toward the south end of the Valley. Marshes and oxbow ponds presently exist in these bottomlands and some development could provide even more attractive habitat. One such area occurs near the town of Lasauses, but areas of equal value can be found most anywhere along the Rio Grande River between Monte Vista and the New Mexico Stateline. Establishment of such areas in these vicinities would then place a public shooting area in close approximation to a present or future Federal refuge. �-28- LITERATURE CITED Grieb, J. R., and M. G. Sheldon. shooting areas in Colorado. Quart. Rpt. Jan. p. 47-66. 1961. Survey of potential public waterfowl Colo. Game, Fish, and Parks Dept., Fed. Aid Grieb, J. R., R. M. Ballou, and A. D. Geis. 1964. Preliminary report on the evaluation of the experimental duck hunting season in the San Luis Valley, Co1orado-1963. U. S. Fish and Wild1. Serv., Migratory Bird Pop. Stat., Admin. Rpt. No. 42, 22 p. Hopper, R. M. 1962. Survey of potential public waterfowl shooting areas in Colorado. Colo. Game, Fish, and Parks Dept., Fed. Aid Quart. Rpt. Jan. p. 1-29. Hopper, R. M~ 1963. Survey of potential public waterfowl shooting areas in Colorado. Colo. Game, Fish, and Parks Dept., Fed Aid Quart. Rpt. July. p. 23-51. Martin, A. C., N. Hotchkiss, F. M. Uhler, and W. S. Bourn. 1953. Classification of the wetlands of the United States. U. S. Fish and Wild1. Serv., Spec. ScL Rpt.,Wild1. No. 20, 14 p. Prepared by: Date: Richard M. .Hopper Senior Game Biologist October, 1964 Approved by: Jack R. Grieb Assistant Game Manager Ferd K1einschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �Table I. -- Total Water Composition of 30 Study Sections in Alamosa County. Surface Acres of Water Ave. per Section Acres of Marginal Land Ave. per Section 0 0 1,9l0.5 63.68 Wetland Cate~ No. Ave. per Section Lakes and reservoirs 0 0 0 0 Ponds and marshes over 5 acres 16 0.53 O. r)./ 0.02 Ponds and marshes less than 5 acres:;"/ 29 0.97 -- -- -- -- Total Acres % Ave. per Section 0 0 0 1,911.1 57.4 63.70 80.8 2.4 2.69 Miles Ave. per Section I IU \0 I Streams and rivers 6 0.20 66.8 2.23 Ditches and canals -- -- -- -- 1,272.5 -- 42.42 1,339.3 40.2 44.64 8.69 0.29 --- -- -- -- 15.67 0.52 111.04 24.36 0.81 3,331. 21./ 100.0 511./ 1.70 ---TOTALS 1/ This feature not determined for "Type 1" wetlands because it constantly changes. 2/ Only total acres of wetland was determined for each of these smaller areas. Excluding ditches and canals. 1/ �Table II. -- Total Water Composition Wetland Cate~ory No. Ave. per Section Lakes and reservoirs 0 0 Ponds and marshes over 5 acres 11 0.65 Ponds and marshes less than 5 acresl:/ 11 0.65 Streams and rivers Ditches and canals of 17 Study Sections in Conejos County. Surface Acres of Water Ave. per Section Acres of Marginal Land Ave. per Section Total Acres % Ave. per Section 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 __1/ -- 2,619.3 154.08 2,619.3 98.9 154.08 -- -- -- 20.5 0.8 1.21 -- Miles Ave. per Section I w 4 0.24 9.2 0.54 0 0 -- -- -- --- -- -- 9.2 0.3 262.1 1.53 TOTALS 2, 649.0~/ 100.0 1/ This feature not determined for "Type 1" wetlands because it constantly changes. 21 Only total acres of wetland was determined for each of these smaller areas. 11 Excluding ditches and canals. -- -- -- 0.54 155.82 2.90 0.17 11.14 0.66 14.04 0.83 0 I �Table III. -- Total Water Composition of 14 Study Sections in Rio Grande. Surface Acres of Water Ave. per Section Acres of Marginal Land Ave. per Section Total Acres % Ave. per Section 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.50 42.61/ 3.04 741.9 52.99 784.5 52.5 56.04 Ponds and marshes less than 5 acresl/ 5 0.36 -- -- -- -- 16.3 1.1 1.16 Streams and rivers 0.21 33.5 2.39 659.9 47.14 693.4 46.4 49.53 Wetland Cate~orx No. Ave. per Section Lakes and reservoirs 0 0 Ponds and marshes over 5 acres 7 3 Miles Ave. per Section 3.70 0.26 I w I-' I Ditches and canals. -- -- TOTALS lsl/ 1.07 1/ 2/ 3/ --- --- --- --- -- -- -- 15.61 1.12 I 494.2]/ 100.0 106.73 19.31 1.38 This feature not determined for "Type 1" wetlands because it constantly changes. Only total acres of wetland was determined for each of these smaller areas. Excluding ditches and canals. �Table IV. -- Total Water Composition of 26 Study Sections in Saguache County. Ave. per Section Acres of Marginal Land Ave. per Section Total Acres % Ave. per Section 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.77 --1/ -- 5,415.5 208.29 5,415.5 99.2 208.29 Ponds and marshes less tha7 5 acresl 29 1.12 -- -- -- -- 40.8 0.7 1.57 Streams and rivers 0.08 5.9 0.23 0 0 5.9 0.1 0.23 Wetland Category No. Ave. per Section Lakes and reservoirs 0 0 Ponds and marshes over 5 acres 20 2 Surface Acres of Water Miles Ave. per Section 1.72 0.07 I w ro I Ditches and canals -- -- -- -- TOTALS 511/ 1.96 -- -- 11 2/ 1./ --- --- -- -- -- 16.02 0.62 5,462.21.1 100.0 210.08 17.74 0.68 This feature not determined for IIType 111wetlands because it constantly changes. Only total acres of wetland was determined for each of these smaller areas. Excluding ditches and canals. �Table V. -- Recreational Uses of 19 Wetland Areasll in Alamosa County. % No. Boating % Acres % % No. Fishing Acres % 124.6 3.8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 94.7 3,118.0 96.2 3 15.8 1,330.5 41.0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 None 0 0 U 0 16 84.2 1,9l2.1 59.0 19 100.0 3,242.6 100.0 TOTALS 19 100.0 3,242.6 100.0 19 -100.0 3,242.6 100.0 19 100.0 3,242.6 100.0 Type of use No. Hunting Acres % Private 1 5.3 Public 18 Leased 11 Excluding ponds and marshes less than five acres and ditches and canals. I 'W w Table VI. -- Recreational Uses of 11 W~t1and Hunting Acres % I Areas11 in Conejos County. % No. Fishing Acres % % No. Boating % Acres % TYl2e of use No. Private 2 18.2 117.9 4.5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Public 9 81.8 2,501.4 95.5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Leased 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 None 0 0 0 0 11 100.0 2,619.3 100.0 11 100.0 2,619.3 100.0 TOTALS 11 100.0 2,619.3 100.0 11 100.0 2,619.3 100.0 11 100.0 2,619.3 100.0 11 Excluding ponds and marshes less than five acres and ditches and canals. ��October, -35- State of JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH SEGMENT PROJECT COLORADO -------------------------- Project No.__~W_-~8~8_-~R_-~9 _ Migratory Bird Investigations ~I~I~____________ Job No.~ __ ~ 2~.~~~~ _ Experimental Studies on Improving Status of Canada Goose Populations Work Plan No. Title of Job: Period Covered: April 1, 1963 to March 31, 1964 ABSTRACT No geese were released in the Fort Collins area this year; however, flock size was increased by about a hundred goslings as a result of natural nesting. Status of the Fort Collins flock is excellent and good increases in breeding pairs are expected for next year. Eighty-seven geese were released at Valmont Reservoir near Boulder, and appear to have done well to the present time. It is recommended that the program continue as in the past with birds hatched from eggs taken at Bowles Lake, and goslings taken from the Denver area to be released at Valmont Reservoir. At least a hundred nesting structures should be constructed in a variety of sites in the Fort Collins area for the 1965 nesting season to promote a better distribution of breeding birds. Specific closed areas and hunting regulations will be discussed with Northeast Region personnel. Objectives: 1. Development and evaluation of techniques for initial establishment and/or increase of goose populations on all major drainages in the State. 2. Permanent establishment of resident goose flocks on all large water ments and major river systems with suitable habitat. 3. Retention of resident and migrant Great Basin goose flocks within the State for longer periods of time during the migration and wintering season. 4. Increase the size of the Great Basin goose flocks wintering Procedures: As given in past reports. Personnel: WCO's Gurney Crawford and Brownlee Guyer, William Richard Hopper, Howard Funk, and Jack Grieb. impound- in the State. Rutherford, 1964 ��-37EXPERIMENTAL STUDIES ON IMPROVING STATUS OF CANADA GOOSE POPULATIONS Jack R. Grieb Considerable progress was made in the establishment of Canada goose flocks in the Fort Collins and Boulder areas. This year, for the first time, no birds were released in the Fort Collins flock; and instead all available goslings were placed on Va1mont Reservoir near Boulder. The following will summarize the activities at the new release site, and results of the breeding season for the Fort Collins area. Fort Collins Flock Production. -- Breeding geese in this area had a highly successful nesting season. According to information supplied by WCO Gurney Crawford, 43 nests were established with the following results: 31 successfully hatched, 12 were abandoned (probably first year nesters), and two were destroyed by coons. A total of 124 goslings were hatched of which 100 or 81% were raised to flight. Nests established by area were as follows: College Lake, 16 (12 hatch); Watson Lake, eight (four hatch); Terry Lake, 13 (10 hatch); Lindenmeier Lake, two (two hatch); Herring Lake, one (one hatch); Dean's Lake, one (one hatch); Anderson Slough, one (one hatch); Padia Pond, one (none hatch). Reports of several other nests were received, but could not be substantiated by Crawford. Table 1 lists information on number of birds released in the Fort Collins area, and those raised naturally by this flock. These data indicate that while a potential of 121 birds were three or more years old for the 1963 breeding season (assuming that none died in the interval), almost twice this number will be potential breeders for the 1964 season. Furthermore, this number will be again doubled for the 1965 season. Thus, this flock should continue to' show a large increase in nests each year for the next two years. If it doesn't, the limiting factors should be sought out and quickly eliminated. Table 1. -- History of College Lake Canada Goose Flock Establishment Year No. Birds Released No. Birds Raised in Wild Approximate Size of Flock 1957 1958 1959 1960 1961 1962 1963 31 23 48 68 95 101 0 0 0 5 14 20 79 100 31 54 60 120 210 400 500 Habitat Improvement. -- It is still believed that the major limiting factor in this area is lack of nesting sites. Construction of new sites during the past year has been held up pending initiation of a Federal Aid development project which would have specific responsibilities for the establishment of Canada goose breeding flocks in the Northeast Region of Colorado. Because of �-38his great ability and interest, Gurney Crawford will be assigned full-time this work. Thus, it is anticipated that more nesting structures will be available for the birds next season. to Protective Measures. -- A small part of the closed goose hunting area was opened for the 1964-65 season. Generally this included the area from Harmony road south and US 287 east so that the closure regulations read as follows: Part of Larimer County bounded by U.S. 87, Co. Rd. 186, U.S. 287, U.S. 34, Continental Divide and the Colorado-Wyoming State line, plus Boyd and Fossel Creek Reservoirs and all area ~ mile back of the high water line of these reservoirs. Reduction in the size of the closed area permitted an increased harvest of geese in the Fort Collins area. Actual figures are not available, but field checks and other information indicates that more than a hundred birds were bagged. It is believed that some of these were from the local breeding flock, but exact numbers are not known. Size of the Canada goose flock wintering in the area increased again this year by about 1200 birds (Table 2). A part of this increase was due to the increase in the local flock, but most of it was due to an increase in numbers of migrants. According to information from Dale Witt, Montana Game and Fish waterfowl biologist, this wintering flock had an exceptionally good breeding year. Further information from New Mexico wintering areas also indicated increases in wintering birds there. Consequently, it is believed that the increase in numbers of wintering birds was due mainly to an increase of young birds in the population rather than short-stopping these birds in th~ Fort Collins area. Table 2. -- Effect Number of Closing Part of Larimer of Wintering Canada Geese County to Goose Hunting on the Area Open to Goose Hunting Year No. Canada Geese!7 Area Closed Year 1948 1949 1950 1951 1952 1953 1954 1955 1956 1957 1958 1959 1960 1961 1962 1963 1964 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 70 0 0 22 11 Based on number of geese counted to Goose Hunting No. Canada Geese!1 on the January Waterfowl 660 1,385 1,945 2,686 3,836 Inventory. Considering the size of the wintering flock it is believed that local hunting mortality including bagged birds and losses due to crippling could be as high as 400 geese per year providing that: (1) The harvest is made mainly from migrant birds; (2) It is distributed throughout the area and not concentrated �-39on a particular segment of the flock; (3) Numbers of wintering migrants remain greater than 3,000 birds; and (4) Total hunting mortality does not exceed 25 percent in all parts of the birds' range. Thus, some relaxation in areas open to hunting can probably again be made for the coming season. However, great care must be taken to preserve sufficient closed area to provide a safe resting site for the wintering migrants, and to prevent undue harvest of local breeders. This will be discussed at a meeting with Northeast Region personnel in late spring or early summer. Valmont Reservoir Flock Gosling Release Program. -- A total of 86 goslings eight weeks or older and one adult bird with "flipped wings" taken from D2nver City Park were released on Valmont Reservoir, on July 15, 1963. These birds were obtained from the following sources. 1. On April 24, 56 eggs were taken from nests in the Bowles Lake area and flown via aircraft to the Rocky Ford Bird Farm. Table 3 records the fate of these eggs revealing that only 19 were ultimately brought to the Fort Collins Nursery pens for conditioning prior to release. An interesting facet this year is that we took 23 eggs from a dump nest at Bowles Lake. This nest was being incubated by a goose, but obviously she was having a rough time of it. Of these 23 eggs, 14 were infertile, there was one dead germ, and eight hatched. This indicates that dump nests are not a good place to collect eggs for a hatching program. Table 3. -- Record of Canada Goose Eggs Taken to Rocky Ford Bird Farm for Incubation Fate of E~gs Dead Infertile Germs Hatch Area Eggs Taken No. Eg~s Bowles Lake Bonny Reservoir 56 10 27 4 3 1 TOTAL 66 31 4 Die After Hatch Goslings Raised 26 5 7 1 19 4 31 8 23 2. A total of 71 goslings and one "flipped wing" adult were trapped at Denver City Park Lake and vicinity and brought to the Fort Collins Nursery conditioning pens. 3. At the Fort Collins pens, two birds died, and two learned how to fly and could not be caught for release. The 86 goslings were banded with the following band series prior to release at Valmont Reservoir -- 508-46361 through 400, and 508-46501 through 546. Flock Status From Release Until March, 1964. -- During the conditioning process the birds were fed from an automatic feeder which was moved to Valmont Reservoir with them. The area around the feeder at Valmont was used heavily �-40by the birds both for feeding and resting. The feeder was serviced mainly WCO Brownlee Guyer, and occasionally by project personnel. by All 87 birds stayed on or close to the reservoir during the summer. Reports of geese flying to surrounding fields to feed or to surrounding lakes to rest were common. In the fall, counts ·of birds would vary considerably from one day to the next, and at present it is difficult to determine how many birds from the original plant are using Valmont Reservoir as their home area; but, there are at least 60 there, and sometimes more. Habitat Improvement. -- Twenty-five structures will be built at Valmont Reservoir during late March. It is hoped that breeding birds from the Denver area will use some of these structures. Regardless, this will permit local birds to become accustomed to the structures prior to the time they come of breeding age. It was planned to plant feed plots particularly along the south shore of the reservoir. This was not done this year, because there was some question regarding ownership of property and exact location of property lines. This will undoubtedly be cleared up before next year so that food plots can be planted. Protective Measures. -- That portion of Boulder County, west of U.S. 287 and south of State 119 was closed to goose hunting. In addition, Valmont Reservoir and all Public Service Company lands surrounding the Reservoir were closed to all hunting, fishing and trapping. This appeared to be adequate and is recommended again for next year. Recommendations: 1. Goose eggs should again be taken from Bowles Lake and hatched Rocky Ford Bird Farm under the direction of Willis Mansfield. 2. Goose eggs should also be taken from the Bonny Reservoir and hatched in the same manner as (1). 3. Goslings hatched from Bowles Lake eggs should be released at Valmont Reservoir, and those hatched from Bonny eggs released in the Bonny goose pens. 4. All goslings Reservoir. 5. Food plants should be made at Valmont Reservoir, and at least a hundred nesting structures constructed in a variety of locations in the Fort Collins area. 6. Recommendations for closed areas and seasons will be discussed meeting with all concerned in the Northeast Region. Prepared Date: by: taken from the Denver Jack R. Grieb Project Leader Octob~r., 1964 captive area should be released Approved by: at the flock at Valmont at a Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �October, -41JOB COMPLETION RESEARCH PROJECT REPORT SEGMENT State of COLORADO ------------------------------- Project No. Waterfowl Surveys and Investigations W-88-R-9 --------~--~------------- Work Plan No. II ------------------------- Title of Job: Investigation Period Covered: April Job No. of the Arkansas 1, 1963 to March 4a Valley Wintering Goose Flock 31, 1964. Personnel: Roy Ackley*, Simon Allen*, Don Bogart, Claude Brock*, Howard Funk, Jack Grieb, Gary Hall*, Harold Hood, Richard Hopper, O. L. Jackson*, Nat Jones*, Robert Kitzmiller*, William Rutherford, Jack Truax*. * employee Temporary ABSTRACT Water and weather conditions were generally satisfactory, but food conditions were judged only fair, for the Canada goose flock in the Arkansas Valley of Colorado during the winter of 1963-64. Aerial census flights over the major wintering areas of this flock indicated that flock status remained excellent, but that numbers of geese wintering in Colorado were somewhat decreased. Warm and dry weather in Canada delayed the migration of geese, so that the wintering grounds did not hold a normal complement of geese until after December 1. Hunter harvest was increased over the nine-year average throughout the Valley, and harvest at ~wo Buttes was nearly double that of last year. The number of goose hunters in the Valley was the second lowest since 1954, but the average season bag per hunter was by far the highest of the nine-year period. The wounding loss study estimated a loss of 18-20 percent of the total hunting mortality. Incomplete data were obtained at the Two Buttes check stations, due to a shortage of manpower to operate the stations. On the basis of these incomplete data, it was determined that the number of shots fired for each goose bagged was higher than last year, hunter use stayed relatively constant throughout the season, and hunter success decreased considerably after the Christmas holiday period. Hunting pressure was about equally divided between the two sides of the Reservoir, but hunter success was more than twice as high on the north side. A total of 573 geese were newly banded, and 593 geese were fluoroscoped at Two Buttes. Data from these trapped birds reveal that (1) the sex ratio is close to 50-50; (2) the checked bag at the check stations should be a more reliable index of age ratios than is the trapped sample, provided that check station data are accurate. The accuracy of check station age data is questioned; (3) average weights of geese are largely influenced by age and sex ratios, changes in body conditions, and changes in sub-species composition of the samples; (4) using fluoroscopy to determine total hunting pressure on geese, it appears that existing hunting pressure at Two Buttes was spread over a greater number of geese than in the past, and that Colorado hunters are continuing to receive a fair share of the total hunting opportunity provided by this flock. Attempts to assess hunting pressure by fluoroscopy 1964 �-42- at other locations in the Valley, and to determine differences in age-class vulnerability among geese, were unsuccessful. Family group counts showed higher juvenile-to-adult ratios than last year, but it is still believed that these counts are not consistent enough to be reliable. No effects of weather upon goose flights and hunter harvest could be determined. Recommendations for continuing study of the Arkansas Valley goose flock are presented. �-43INVESTIGATIONS OF THE ARKANSAS VALLEY WINTERING GOOSE FLOCK William H. Rutherford Introduction: The wintering goose population in the Arkansas Valley is probably the most important single waterfowl flock in Colora4o in relation to hunter use and enjoyment. Before closer management of a specific waterfowl flock can be attained, the basic knowledge of its numbers, local movements, and habits must be gained. The expected increase in hunting pressure and the corresponding increased harvest of this flock indicates the need for future recommendations which will permit the correct harvest of this resource upon a sustained yield basis. Objectives: (1) To determine the fall movement of geese into the Arkansas Valley, and the size of the wintering flock. (2) To investigate the wounding loss of geese at Two Buttes Reservoir. (3) To determine the relationship between weather conditions and harvest of geese at Two Buttes Reservoir. (4) To determine age and sex composition, mortality, and percent of birds carrying shot. (5) To investigate the dispersal of birds from Two Buttes during the hunting season. Procedures: Techniques and procedures were changed somewhat from those of previous years. Operation of the check stations on the Two Buttes Management Area was the responsibility of the Southeast Region this year; difficulties with setting up labor to run the check stations resulted in partial closure of stations, so that the hunter check was incomplete. Geese were trapped, banded, and fluoroscoped with complete records of age, sex, weight, and number of shot kept for each bird. Goose tail feathers were collected from pickers in the area, as a source of supplementary data on age ratios. Results: . Water, Food, and Weather Conditions: Water levels in the major reservoirs of the Arkansas Valley were generally excellent for wintering geese. John Martin Reservoir was nearly dry~ and did not hold as many geese as usual, but still remained relatively attractive (see Table 1). This situation is common here, and seems to be preferred by geese. Food conditions were slightly improved over those of last year, but still considered only fair. The drought which the Arkansas Valley has been experiencing has shown no signs of abating, and only crops grown under irrigation were good. Milo and wheat on dryland were only mediocre. No major storms were experienced, and severe cold weather did not develop at any time during hunting season. This was advantageous in holding geese in the Valley, but was probably not conducive to the best hunting success. Migration Movement and Wintering Population: Three aerial censuses were used to determine the movement of Canada geese (Branta canadensis) into, �-44- and wintering populations of, the Arkansas Valley (Table 1). The first and third of these flights were coordinated with similar ones in the Texas panhandle, and with ground observations by various personnel, so that it was possible to determine the status of the entire flock rather than just that portion wintering in Colorado. The aerial count of December 18 was primarily a count of ducks in the Arkansas Valley, and geese were counted only incidentally with no attempt at coordination of counts elsewhere. Counts which in past years had been scheduled for November were cancelled this year, due to an abnormally late migration of geese onto the wintering grounds. All flights were completed on schedule, with no cancellations or postponements caused by weather. The Colorado portion of the January inventory, however, was felt to be inaccurate because of weather influence upon the birds on the day flown; consequently, this portion was flown again on the following day with much better results. On the basis of these counts, and observations of personnel in each area, it appears that although flock status remains excellent, the segment of the Canada goose population wintering in Colorado's Arkansas Valley was somewhat decreased in numbers this year. Table 1. Aerial Canada Goose Counts, Arkansas Valley, Colorado, by Dates, 1963-64 Reservoir December 3 December 18 January 8 Meredith Eads John Martin Rutherford Arkansas River Two Buttes Veerhoff C F &I Horsecreek Adobe Creek Welch Ranch 4,600 11,500 2,190 3,100 5,500 1,200 15 15,000 1,100 13,000 6,500 20 120 25 TOTALS 26,750 25 8,000 500 25 2,100 13,000 125 27,145 33,750 Again, as was true last year, an extremely warm and dry autumn in Canada delayed the southward movement of geese. Where normally the first substantial flights of geese reach the Valley about the first week of November, this year no geese were present until November 14. On this date, 1,800 geese were counted on Two Buttes Reservoir. This number stayed fairly constant until November 22, when large increases were noted at both Two Buttes and Eads Lakes. These dates seem to coincide with movement into the Texas panhandle. By December 3, when the first aerial inventory was conducted, the wintering area held a normal complement of Canada geese. The counts in Texas and western Nebraska were up over last year, and the Colorado count was down somewhat. Goose numbers in Colorado stayed slightly below last year's level, although the January inventory showed an increase over the two earlier counts. �-45- Comparison of January inventory information for the Arkansas Valley flock, in Table 2, shows a normal wintering population. An interpretation of data indicates that the entire wintering flock consisted of more than 100,000 birds, which compares favorably with last year's counts. The high total count was made on the first inventory flight, and consisted of 112,000 geese. The January inventory showed only 81,000 birds, primarily because aerial harassment on the Waggoner Ranch in Texas had succeeded in driving the geese away, and the inventory crew was unable to find them elsewhere as had been done on the earlier flight. Table 2. -- January Inventory 1948-1964 of Canada Geese, Arkansas Valley, Year Goose Count Year Goose Count Year 1948 1949 1950 1951 1952 1953 4,798 12,286 13,170 19,320 30,463 20,236 1954 1955 1956 1957 1958 1959 20,280 25,110 24,212 2'4,617 35,894 44,660 1960 1961 1962 1963 1964 1./ Inventory of Feb. 7 , 1962, substituted for January, Colorado, Goose Count 37,394 31,360 40, 25Q!/ 35,889 33,750 1962, inventory. HunterlHarvest: This year's operation of check stations at the Two Buttes Management Area was complicated by manpower difficulties. Insofar as was possible, the available manpower was spread out to cover the'most advantageous hours and locations; nevertheless, a considerable amount of information was missed. It is roughly estimated that approximately 80 percent check was obtained, but there is no way of weighing the available data to indicate whether hunting pressure and goose kill were checked at the same relative intensity. In many cases, hunters would be checked in but not checked out, and vice versa. The tabulation of check station information (see Table 3), therefore, is presented strictly as available data ~'I1ith no attempt to account for missing data. Table 4 compares the current goose harvest in the Arkansas Valley with the nineyear average, indicating that the total harvest during the past year was up 12.7 percent from the nine-year average. Apparently, the later than normal arrival of geese in the Valley had little, if any, influence upon the total harvest as was believed to be the case last year. The distributional pattern of goose populations after arrival in the Valley is continuing to show change; this is borne out both by aerial inventory flights and by figures on hunter harvest. Baca County has consistently accounted for about half the total harvest in past years; last year it fell to only one-eighth and this year to one-seventh. Prowers and Kiowa Counties, together, show about one-third of the total harvest over the long-time average, but they have accounted for more than half the total for the past two years. �-46Table 3. -- Goose Harvest, Wounding Loss, Hunting Pressure, and Hunter Success, Two Buttes Management Area, 1963-64 Resident Item Non-Resident Total Goose Harvest: Adult Juvenile Total 2511/ 223 474 128 1261:./ 254 379 349 728 Wounding Loss 70 47 117 Successful Hunters: Number Ave. bag/hunter 313 1.51 143 1.76 456 1.59 All Hunters: 1,332 Number 2,621 Hunter days Hunter days/hunter 1.97 Ave. bag/hunter 0.355 Ave. bag/hunter day 0.180 418 1,038 2.48 0.603 0.243 1,750 3,659 2.09 0.416 0.199 1/ Includes one adult lesser snow goose (Chen hyperborea). ]1 Includes one juvenile lesser snow goose and one juvenile white-fronted goose (Anser a1bifrons). Table 4. -- Goose Harvest in the Arkansas Valley, by County. Nine-Year Average, 1954-62, 1963-64, Based on Results of Random Survey County Baca Kiowa Prowers Bent Cr.ow1ey Pueblo Huerfano Otero Las Animas TOTALS Number and Percent of Geese Bagged 1963-64 9-year average % % No. No. Lakes 5,633 2,384 2,226 43.9 18.6 17 .4 2,166 5,581 2,890 15.0 38.6 20.0 1,346 704 71 87 10.5 5.5 0.6 0.7 2,284 566 39 313 15.8 3.9 0.3 2.2 236 128 1.8 1.0 507 98 3.5 0.7 12,815 100.0 14,444 100.0 Two Buttes Eads and Blue Two Buttes and Eads John Martin, Blue and Horsecreek Meridith and Henry Horsecreek, Cheraw group, Dyes and Holbrook �-47- Table 5 lists goose hunting statistics for the past ten years, and shows that stamp sales for 1963, even though significantly increased over the 1962 total, were still the second lowest of the entire period. The estimated number of goose hunters in the Arkansas Valley increased in proportion to the stamp sales increase, so that this number is also the second lowest of the entire period. The low number of stamp sales during the past two years is attributable to the restrictive Central Flyway duck seasons. Duck hunting and goose hunting are, for the most part, independent of each other, so that restrictive duck seasons would not be expected to show any influence upon goose hunting statistics. Nevertheless, figures for. the past two years do tend to show a relationship, but this relationship is obscured by the effects of late migrations, weather, and changing distribution patterns of geese, which are believed to be primarily responsible for decreased hunting pressure. The average season bag of geese per hunter for 1963-64 shows a remarkable increase over any other year in the period. The total bag is second only to the high mark set in 1958, and because the second lowest number of hunters participated, the conclusion is that goose hunting this year was far better than in former years. It appears that recent changes in Arkansas Valley goose habits have worked to the advantage of those hunters who have taken the trouble to adjust to the changes, while other hunters have quit hunting rather than adjusting. Table 5. -- Goose Hunting Season Statistics, 1954-1963 Arkansas Valley Average Estimated Estimated Season Stamp Goose Kill Bag Hunters Sales Dates of Season Year 1.04 7,372 32,450 7,071 11/1 - 12/30 1954 1.54 13,904 9,054 39,107 11/1 - 12/30 1955 1.05 10,276 9,833 1/7 36,303 11/9 1956 1.39 12,656 9,113 11/2 - 12/31 41,794 1957 1.51 15,205 10,082 41,897 1958 11/17 - 1/15 1.61 14,309 8,888 31,431 1959 10/26 - 1/8 1.39 13,629 9,838 30,592 1960 10/26 - 1/8 1.68 12,724 7,577 24,854 1961 11/10 - 1/8 1.58 9,495 6,021 17,701 1962 10/31 - 1/13 14,444 2.17 6,668 1/15 22,940 11/2 1963 Wounding Loss: Wounding loss in the 1963-64 season was estimated by two methods: (1) The small game hunter random survey indicated a loss of 17.9 percent of the total goose harvest mortality; and (2) check station information permits calculation of loss on the firing line of a minimum of 13.7 percent. The check station figure is normally lower than the random survey figure, possibly because firing-line hunters are reluctant to admit wounding of geese. These figures should be considered as minimum, and probably the actual wounding loss in the Arkansas Valley goose flock is in the range of 18-20 percent .. �-48- Hunter Habits and Characteristics: Check station operators continued to collect data in 1963-64 from a sample of hunters on the number of shots fired. The forms which were returned to the check stations by hunters constituted a sample of 12.7 percent of the total number of hunter-days recorded. Based on this total, which is incomplete as previously indicated, a direct projection of the sample shows that 27,795 shots were fired on the Two Buttes Management Area firing line, or an average of 38.23 shots for each goose brought to bag. In this projection, as well as in those following, the totals have little meaning since the check-in was incomplete, but the averages are believed to be nearly as accurate as those of a complete hunter check. This year's sample of shots fired showed that an average of $6.12 was expended on ammunition for each goose bagged, based on a conservatively estimated value of $4.00 per box, or $0.16 per round, on shotshells. Using the same average figures for weight of shot load which has been used in the past (one and one-half ounces), 3.58 pounds of lead was expended for each goose bagged. Table 6 shows the relative goose kill, hunting pressure, and hunter success for weekly intervals on the Two Buttes Management Area. Variations during the season are caused, of course, by the combination of varying hunter use (weather, weekends vs. weekdays, etc.) and varying hunting conditions (weather, goose population present, changes in daily goose flight patterns, etc.). Soon after the arrival of geese in the Valley, the Two Buttes birds found the field of milo and pro so on the north side of the Reservoir, and began using it for feeding to the complete exclusion of all other areas. This food plot was handled in the same manner this year as has been done in the past; that is, some of the grain was left unharvested in the field. Why geese used it heavily this year for the first time can be explained only by assuming that food conditions were much poorer elsewhere. The result was that for a considerable period of time only the pits on the north side of the Reservoir offered any chance of hunting success, and this was where gunning pressure was concentrated. Table 6 shows that hunter success was higher earlier in the season than later on. In spite of some severe criticism to the contrary, it appears that this predictable flight pattern was responsible for better hunting. Later in the season, the geese began to fly out to the southeast, and while hunting success on the south side picked up, it did not increase to a level to compensate for the falling off of goose use on the north side. Table 7 shows the season totals for checked hunter-days of use of each of the pits on the firing line at Two Buttes. The table shows nearly equal hunter use of the two sides of the Reservoir, which attests to the change in goose flight pattern. Normally, the south side will receive up to four times the hunter use which the north side receives. In addition, the total goose kill is broken down in the table summary according to north or south side, and shows that hunter success was more than twice as high on the north side. The overall conclusion is that the food plot left unharvested and closed to hunting served to hold geese in the Two Buttes area and improved firing-line hunting. Field hunting in this area was drastically affected; however, it was excellent in the Eads area. Viewing the Arkansas Valley as a single entity, it appears that managing different segments of the flock in different �ways offers the greatest possible spread of hunting opportunity for both firing-line and field shooters. Special Banding Investigation: During the 1963-64 wintering season, trapping, banding, and fluoroscoping of geese in the Arkansas Valley was postponed until after the close of hunting season. The trapping site at Two Buttes had been pre-baited for about 10 days, and on January 16, the day following the close of hunting season, two cannon-nets were set side by side and wired to fire simultaneously. The shot was made at about 3:30 P.M., and resulted in a catch of 598 small Canada geese, two Ross' geese (Chen rossii), and one eastern (Atlantic) brant (Branta bernicla). The orginal intent was to band a minimum of 500 geese at Two Buttes, and 500 at Eads Lakes. The January 16 catch satisfied the requirement for Two Buttes; following this catch, emphasis was placed on trapping at Eads Lakes. Almost immediately after the harassment of hunting season ceased, the birds settled down into an unchanging feeding flight routine, and further efforts at trapping were almost entirely unsuccessful. Only 12 geese were trapped at Eads Lakes. The site at Two Buttes was kept baited, but geese gradually stopped coming to this spot, so that all further trapping attempts at Two Buttes were also unsuccessful. The trapping and banding results for the 1963-64 season are presented in Table 8. It appears that'the pre-baiting is a necessary requisite to any post-season trapping program, and that emphasis should be placed upon reaching the quota within a few days following the close of hunting season. Waiting until after hunting season closes before beginning to bait the trapping sites, as was done at Eads Lakes, will seriously reduce the chances for success. Information obtained from trapping and banding geese, along with certain information from check stations and goose pickers, is presented under appropriate sub-headings in the following: Age and Sex Composition: Age determination of all geese trapped was by notched tail-feather method, double checked by cloacal examination. Age determination of all geese checked through check stations, and collected from goose pickers, was by notched tail-feather method. Table 6. -- Weekly Distribution of Goose Kill, Hunting Pressure, and Hunter Success, Two Buttes Management Area, 1963-64 Week Interval 11/19 to 11/25 11/26 to 12/2 12/3 to 12/9 12/10 to 12/16 12/17 to 12/23 12/24 to 12/30 12/31 to 1/6 1/7 to 1/15 TOTALS Number of Geese Ki 11ed 129 102 117 118 146 44 21 51 Number of Hunter Da~s 475 472 382 610 497 513 186 524 Average Bag Per Hunter Da~ 0.270 0.214 0.304 0.190 0.292 0.084 0.108 0.096 728 3,659 0.199 �-50- Table 7. -- Resident and Non-Resident Hunter-Days of Use by Pit Location, Two Buttes Management Area, 1963-64 Pit No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 South Side Pit Hunter-days Hunter-days Res. Non-res. No. Res. Non-res. 54 22 2 22 34 82 1 96 28 25 28 97 30 34 88 42 9 43 39 91 19 25 10 53 21 44 79 62 28 45 14 42 46 54 13 34 13 11 64 16 47 37 48 33 3 41 15 18 13 69 28 49 6 50 15 38 18 51 2 33 19 7 5 41 23 52 5 6 53 9 26 15 26 12 54 7 9 55 9 4 3 56 8 7 2 4 4 4 57 58 2 5 TOTALS Resident: Non-resident: Total: Goose kill: Bag/hunter-day: GRAND TOTAL 1,413 511 1,924 245 0.127 Resident: Non-resident: Total: Goose kill: Bag/hunter-day: Pit No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 North Side Hunter-days Pit Hunter-days Res. Non-res. No. Res. Non-res. 4 6 18 45 12 15 15 19 31 10 23 4 20 39 28 17 3 21 48 25 24 8 22 44 32 36 24 23 56 28 58 26 24 41 26 65 41 25 28 17 84 34 26 19 12 35 75 27 6 22 93 16 28 14 4 65 19 29 9 7 45 22 30 7 2 50 8 31 22 5 42 10 32 10 13 11 33 8 B 24 12 46 5 Resident: Non-resident: Total: Goose kill: Bag/hunter-day: 2,621 12038 3,659 728 0.199 Table 8. -- Arkansas Valley Banding Results, 1963-64 Number of Geese Banded Location Date 573 Two Buttes Reservoir Jan. 16, 1964 12 Nee Noshe Reservoir Feb. 5, 1964 TOTALS 1,208 527 1,735 483 0.278 585 Number of Recaptures 25 25 Total 598 12 610 �-51Table 9 compares the percent of young birds between the trapped sample and the check station sample, revealing fairly close agreement between the two. Either or both samples could be biased, but it has customarily been considered that check station information maybe a more valid measure of age composition for the following reasons: Age Comparison of the Two Buttes Reservoir Area Canada Goose Flock, 1963-64, as Estimated by Trapping and Check Station Results Table 9. Percent Trapped Young 42.3 Sample Total Birds 624 Check Station Percent Young 47.9 Sample Total Birds 728 1. It is believed that firing-line harvest has less tendency to be selective by age or sex than other harvest methods, and there is better opportunity for an adequate sample of age classes, since all geese pass over the firing line. 2. Trapping was confined to a certain spot along the reservoir shore. Geese were baited to this area, and there is a distinct chance that for any particular instant in which the net was fired, the area could have been occupied by a population of geese which was not representative of the entire population. The validity of the above cited reasons depends upon reasonable accuracy on the part of check station operators. In the past, it has been believed that most check station errors are self-eliminating, since there exists a 50-50 chance of being right on any individual bird. This year, spot checks coupled with data on known-age (banded) birds in the hunter's bag revealed that there is a somewhat greater tendency to call adult birds juveniles than vice versa. It is known that information on the trapped sample is as accurate as is possible, because it was obtained by trained personnel and double checked by using two different methods. It thus appears that differences in the level of training between checkers and members of the banding crew may result in a discrepancy which cannot be assessed. Information on sex ratios was derived mainly from the trapped sample. A total of 102 birds checked through the check stations were sexed when qualified personnel were present, and this sample is included for comparison in Table 10, following. It is recognized that it could be a very biased sample, and for this reason the sex ratios of the trapped sample will be considered as more valid. With respect to trapping bias, as outlined in reason 2 in the discussion of age ratios, the sex ratios of the trapped sample could be subject to bias from the same source. However, there is no reason to suspect that the sex composition is out of proportion, since the data from the trapped sample indicate a fairly evenly balanced sex ratio. �-52- Table 10. -- Sex Composition of the Two Buttes Area Canada Goose Flock, Source Males Percent Females Percent Total Percent 328 47 52.6 46.1 296 55 47.4 53.9 624 102 100.0 100.0 Trapping Check Station 1963-64 Goose Weights: The mean weights of hunter-harvested birds and of trapped and banded birds are presented in Table 11. For purposes of comparison, mean weights of geese trapped in Canada during September and October, 1963, (see Work Plan 2, Job 4b completion report) are presented also. Geese from the two Canadian locations offer the two extremes shown in the table; data from the Two Buttes birds fall between the extremes shown by the Canadian-trapped birds. In an attempt to pinpoint the sources of variation in mean weights shown in Table 11, the "t" test for significance was made on four different groups of birds, as follows: (1) Comparison of adults between the Two Buttes check station and Two Buttes trapping; (2) comparison of juveniles between the same sources; (3) comparison of adults between Saskatchewan and Alberta trapping; and (4) comparison of juveniles between the same sources. In all four analyses, the differences were significant at the .05 level, with "t" being equal to 8.14, 1.69, 4.87, and 4.20 respectively, where t.05 for the asymmetric test equals 1.645 with infinite degrees of freedom. Significant differences were expected in the analysis of data on Canadiantrapped birds. We were working in two different locations on the staging area, and it was obvious that we were working with two entirely different groups of birds. There was no doubt that birds trapped in Alberta were larger than those trapped in Saskatchewan. Significant differences were not expected in the two samples from Two Buttes Reservoir, because there was no reason to believe that any difference should exist. The fact that geese (both adults and juveniles) taken by hunters were significantly larger than those taken by cannon-net trapping raises a question regarding selectivity on the part of firing-line shooters. It has commonly been accepted that there is no selectivity, but these data suggest that hunters do, indeed, tend to pick a larger bird at which to shoot. For precisely the same reasons as discussed under age and sex ratios, either or both of the Two Buttes samples could be biased with respect to weight. Weight variations within the samples are the result of a combination of changes in age ratios within the adult class, sub-species composition, sex ratios, and body conditions, and it is entirely conceivable that these sources of variation could have tremendous effect upon the data. This is especially true of the trapped sample, because all data on trapped birds are from one catch only. There also exists the distinct possibility that weight loss as the result of hunting season stress could account for the significant difference. The sample of birds taken by hunters was distributed throughout hunting season, while the sample from cannon-net trapping was taken after the close of hunting season. �-53Table 11. -- Comparison of Weights of Geese from Trapped and Check Station Samples, Two Buttes; and Canadian Trapped Samples, 1963-64 Number of Average Geese Wt. lbs. Average Wt. lbs. Number of Adults Average Wt. lbs. Number of Juveniles Check Station, Two Buttes 378 5.61 347 4.90 725 5.27 Trapping and Banding, Two Buttes 348 5.11 252 4.58 600 4.89 Trapping and Banding, Saskatchewan 50 5.07 41 4.47 91 4.80 Trapping and Banding, Alberta 67 5.82 71 5.02 138 5.49 Source Fluoroscopy: The results of the fluoroscopy operation are presented in Table 12. There is, of course, a high degree of difference between body shot incidence of adults and juveniles, explained by the fact that this is the first year's hunting on juveniles while adults have been subjected to two or more years of hunting depending upon their age. Much effort has been made in the past to determine a method of measuring hunting pressure by means of the percent of birds in the population carrying shot. This may not be a valid criterion, since the percent carrying shot may, and probably does, depend upon a number of different factors, each of which singly or in combination act to change the percent of all birds carrying shot independently of the hunting season pressure. Some of these factors are listed as follows: 1. Age composition of the popUlation: If each age class component of the population is present in the same proportion year after year, then age composition will have little effect. However, if breeding success is sporadic with varying size yearling populations entering the population universe year after year, then it is obvious that the percent of all adults with shot will vary from year to year, and valid yearly comparisons cannot be made. 2. To eliminate the potential error in number 1, it would be necessary to confine all analyses to birds-of-the-year or juveniles. But here again, the size of the annual increment may have important bearing on the percent carrying shot, since the larger the number of juveniles with a stable hunting pressure, the less probability of any individual bird acquiring shot. Thus, a measure of age composition would seem necessary to make fluoroscopy an adequately workable technique. Distribution of Flock Hunting Pressure: One of the prime motives for emphasizing the banding and fluoroscopy effort was to establish, if possible, the effect of the firing line at Two Buttes on this goose flock. Actually, �-54in considering the information, it is recognized that it is not possible to separate the firing line from the surrounding area, thus, inferences made must include the Two Buttes area in general. Table 12. Age Class Adults Juveniles.!/ AU Geese 1/ Percent of Geese With Shot, by Age and Sex Class, Two Buttes Reservoir, Post-Hunting Season, 1964 Number of Males Percent W/Shot Number of Females Percent W/Shot Number of Geese Percent W/Shot 196 47.4 17 .5 36.1 146 131 277 -50.0 29.8 342 251 593 48.5 120 316 40.4 23.9 38.1 Birds-of-the-year. Since no trapping was done during hunting season this year, there are no data to show the average increase in body shot incidence through the hunting season or to estimate the percentage of adult and juvenile birds carrying shot at the time of arrival in the Valley. On the basis of the one catch which was made at Two Buttes, it appears that shot incidence in juveniles at the end of hunting season is somewhat less than that of previous years, and the incidence in adults is considerably less. If it is a valid assumption that shot incidence at the time of arrival in the Valley is comparable to that of previous years, the inference is that gunning pressure at Two Buttes was greatly decreased this year. The random survey showed Baca County to be below average in goose kill (see Table 4), and it is known that field hunting was very poor; in fact, the bulk of the harvest in the county'was probably contributed by the Two Buttes firing line. The same situation was believed to exist last year; however, there was considerably more interchange of birds and greater population fluctuations in the Two Buttes area last year also, so that birds had greater chance to be exposed to gunning pressure than was true this year. In addition, there were proportionately more birds available to Two Buttes area &unners this year, whicQ could result in a lower incidence of shot. It is unfortunate that we have only one catch compr1s1ng the sample, since there is reason to believe that this sample is biased. It is also unfortunate that catches of geese could not be made at Eads Lakes, since it is known that hunting was better than usual at this location, and that hunting pressure was increased considerably over last year. It is possible that body shot incidence could be higher in this segment of the flock, under 1963-64 hunting conditions, than at Two Buttes. Data from samples trapped during hunting season in previous years has shown that juvenile birds consistently acquire body shot at a greater rate than that of adults. This differential age-class vulnerability has been attributed to field shooting rather than firing-line shooting. In an attempt to learn whether juveniles are actually more vulnerable in field shooting, commercial goose pickers in the Arkansas Valley were contacted and asked to cooperate in the study. Cooperators were furnished a supply of envelopes, and were requested to pull tail feathers from each goose, place them in envelopes, �-55- and record on each envelope the date and location of the kill. A sample of 200 usable tail feathers was thus obtained. Age classification by the notched tail-feather method yielded the data shown in Table 13. A gross examination of these data shows that juveniles from field shooting actually appeared less frequently than juveniles from the firing line in the sample. A chi-square test for homogeneity failed to establish any significant difference in age ratios between field and firing-line shooting in the goose picker sample, or between field shooting and the check station sample. The chi-square value was 0.058 and 0.022, respectively, with X2.05 being equal to 3.841 with one degree of freedom. This not only shows no significant difference between ratios, but furthermore indicates a "good fit" meaning that the ratios are very nearly the same in all cases. Table 13. -- Age Ratios of Canada Geese from Tail Feathers Collected by Pickers, Compared with Check Station Age Ratios, Arkansas Valley, 1963-64 Source Adults Number Percent Juveniles Number Percent Field (pickers) Firing Line (pickers) Firing Line (ck. stat Lon) 67 40 378 51 42349 56.8 48.8 52.0 43.2 51.2 48.0 Ratio Adult/Juvenile 1.314 0.952 1.082 Family Group Counts: For the third year, data on sizes of family groups in the Arkansas Valley flock were collected. These data are presented in Table 14. The mean group size of 4.06 birds was similar to that found in Canada this year (see Work Plan 2, Job 4b completion report), and was considerably larger than the mean group size of 2.51 birds obtained in the Arkansas Valley last year. We continue to have reservations as to the consistency of these counts; therefore, no interpretation of the data will be attempted at this time. Table 14. -- Family Group Counts of Canada Geese, Arkansas Valley, 1963-64 No. Birds Location Date Observer 2 Buttes 2 Buttes 11/21 12/5 Turk's 2 Buttes Turk's 2 Buttes Nee Noshe 1/2 1/2 1/9 1/16 2/5 Kitzmiller 77 RutherfordKitzmiller 461 Kitzmiller 169 Kitzmiller 319 Kitzmiller 74 Rutherford 199 Rutherford 426 1725 TOTALS No. Groups Average Grp. Size No. Birds Present Activity 20 3.85 1,500 On water 102 49 76 17 49 112 4.52 3.45 4.20 4.35 4.06 3.80 10,000 3,400 4,000 12,000 1,100 9,000 On water On ice On ice On ice On ice On ice 425 4.06 �-56Effect of Weather Upon Goose Flights and Hunter Harvest: The use of the aerator was continued at Two Buttes again this year. Unlike last year, no power interruptions were experienced, and we were able to keep a spot of open water on the lake during the coldest weather. The use of the aerator combined with the food plot on the north side served to keep geese on the lake in consistently larger numbers than we were able to hold last year. One period of cold weather, sufficient to freeze the lake solid except for the aerator hole, was experienced; following this, the weather remained cold enough throughout hunting season to prevent thawing of the ice cover. No severe weather of any kind developed, and no effects of weather upon goose flights or hunter harvest could be determined. Certainly any such effects were minor, and were obscured by the more prominent effects of feeding conditions. Recommendations: The Arkansas Valley Goose Flock Investigation is continuing to produce extremely important information on which to base management. We must continue to collect this information, and to make provision for new aspects of the overall investigation, so that management of this flock can be improved. Following are recommendations for continuing project work: 1. Further work on banding and fluoroscopy should be done, following the close of hunting season, with emphasis on catching birds at locations other than Two Buttes. It is apparent that hunting pressure and goose harvest are shifting away from Two Buttes, to the extent that we can no longer determine trends by working at Two Buttes alone. 2. Check station information on total harvest by age class should be maintained on the Two Buttes Management Area. The accuracy potential of the aging technique should be increased by having check station operators collect goose tails for aging by qualified personnel. 3. The collection of goose tails by pickers in the Valley should be continued next year, to give a comparison with this year's data. 4. We must continue to cooperate with the Cooperative Goose Flock Investigation of the Central Flyway, so that we can determine the annual status of this flock and its distribution between Texas, New Mexico, Colorado and Nebraska. Prepared by: Date: Jack R. Grieb --~~~~~~~------Assistant Game Manager William H. Rutherford Principal Game Biologist O_c_t_o_b_e_r~, __1_9_6_4 Approved by: _ Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �October, 1964 -57JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH SEGMENT PROJECT State of COLORADO ---~~~~~-------------------Project No. W-88-R-9 --~~~~--------Work Plan No. Cooperative Period Covered: April Bird Investigations 4~b~ Job No. II --~~---------------------- Title of Job: Migratory _ Lesser Canada Goose Flock Investigation 1, 1963 to March 31, 1964 Objectives: 1. Investigate the possibility of establishing an annual goose flock trend count in east-central Alberta and west-central Saskatchewan, Canada. 2. Determine if the Canada geese migrating to the Arkansas Valley goose flock. through this staging area belong 3. Determine age and sex ratio information the staging area. from the Canada geese within 4. Determine southeast the size of the Canada goose flock wintering in western Nebraska, Colorado, northeast New Mexico, and the panhandle of Texas. 5. Determine age and sex composition 6. Determine harvest and migration areas for geese from each wintering of the general flock winter range. Techniques of the wintering flock. area Used: 1. Aerial survey of Canada geese in east-central two weeks of October. 2. Trap and band geese in east-central Alberta from late September to late October to verify that these birds are part of the Arkansas Valley flock. 3. Analyze data from the banded sample. 4. Conduct periodic, 5. Trap and band geese on the wintering the banded sample. 6. Analyze cooperative band recoveries Alberta during the first aerial surveys over the wintering grounds, and analyze and compare between banding areas. the data from stations. ��-59COOPERATIVE LESSER CANADA GOOSE FLOCK INVESTIGATION Jack R. Grieb This report summarizes the fifth year of effort in this cooperative small white-cheeked goose study. It gathers together the results of surveys and bandings from Alberta and Saskatchewan in Canada, to the wintering grounds in the Nebraska panhandle, southeast Colorado, northeast New Mexico and the Texas panhandle. This report is the product of many persons and agencies. Each will be recognized in the section in which they participated. RESULTS CANADA STAGING AREA CENSUS. -- The census this year was extracted from a series of migration counts made by the Canadian Wildlife Service, the Alberta Game Branch, and the Bureau of Sport Fisheries and Wildlife. Results of the October 9 and 10 counts are compared with those with similar dates from past years in Table 1. It has been shown in the Fourth Progress Report that number of geese counted on the staging area do not necessarily reflect the number of geese to be expected in wintering areas; nor, is the ratio between staging area and wintering area counts consistent from one year to the next. Information gathered this year fully supports this idea. Recommendation for 1964. -- It is recommended that no staging area Canada goose count be made specifically for the purpose of estimating the size of the fall flight of Canada geese to the wintering areas. Table l. -- Canada Province Area Alberta Athabaska Delta and Hay Lakes Staging Area Census of Canada Geese, Observers Number Canada Geese 1962 Inventor~ 1961 Inventor~ 1960 Inventor~ 1,108 BarryWishartShirley East-Central Saskatchewan 1963 Date 1963 Wilkie-Unity HansonLamont Oct. 910 42,048 29,480 19,490 30,995 Oct. 9 2,649 2,620 2,665 5,255 8,840 8,060 8,400 16,645 13,067 8,275 24,925 61,342 54,007 38,490 71,178 N. Sask. River S. Sask. River and Maple Creek Kinders1ey HansonLamont TOTALS Oct. 10 �-60 MIGRATION AND WINTERING COUNTS IN THE UNITED STATES. -- The following persons and agencies cooperated in the migration and wintering census of this goose flock in the United States. Agency Person Bureau of Sport Fisheries New Hexico Department and Wildlife Robert Brown Mel Evans Don Krieble Ed Wellein of Game and Fish Nebraska Game, Forestation Commission Colorado Department Mr. Goodwin and Parks John Sweet of Game, Fish and Parks Bill Rutherford Mel Barron Jack Grieb Movement of this flock into U.S. wintering areas was similar to last year except that it was not quite as late. Several thousand geese moved into the Two Buttes and Eads area after the middle of November. A large increase was noted on November 22 in both areas, and within a week most of the wintering population had come in. This seems to coincide with movement into the Buffalo Lake area during the later part of November. No specific information is available from the Waggoner Ranch area. Considerable more geese stayed in the Nebraska panhandle than usual. The result was much improved hunting in that area. By the time of the first inventory (December 4) most birds were on the wintering grounds (Table 2). Table 2. -- Migration and Wintering Canada Goose Census of the Arkansas Valley-Texas Panhandle Flock Area Colorado Texas Buffalo Lake Waggoner Ranch Muleshoe Refuge Count I Dec. 4, Count II Jan. 8, Number of Canada Geese High High Count Count High Count High Count 1963 23,750 1964 33,725 1962-63 38,911 1961-62 45,250 1960-61 31,360 1959-60 54,320 29,120 25,000 4,295 10,154 10,000 5,000 45,700 11 ,0001:1 69,230 16 ,900.U 55,000 33,000 950 1,000 866 1,800 660 250 N3braska 9,906 6,071 6,226 3,879 4,590 280 New Mexico 2,891 4,425 3,496 2,150 1,745 2,64.2 TOTALS 112,317 81,221 123,024 80,133 103,355 95,492 )J Aerial harassment has scattered geese. This count is low. �Comparison of the inventories made in December, 1963, and January, 1964, show a decrease from the first to the last. This was caused mainly by failure to find birds wintering in the Waggoner Ranch area the second count. Although a considerable area was flown, only a few birds were encountered. This is a result of constant air harassment of geese on Waggoner Ranch which has scattered them over a wide range. Game Agent Boone and Texas Warden Boynton were encountered at the Vernon airport, and they had been searching for this flock from the ground without finding it. This is similar to past years when the early count proved better because the geese were concentrated in a few areas. Recommendations for the 1964-65 Migration and Wintering Census. -- It is recommended that both the December and January Inventories be continued next year. It appears that the best count is made in December before the birds become completely scattered especially in the Texas area. However, both surveys are needed to obtain a complete picture of the population status of this flock. Dates of these inventories 1. 2. December 2, 1964 January Inventory Procedures will remain will be: intervals as established by the Bureau. the same as past years: 1. Nebraska personnel will cover western areas on designated days. Nebraska 2. New Mexico personnel will cover northeastern concentration areas. New Mexico 3. Muleshoe National Wildlife Refuge personnel concentrations in the Muleshoe area. will cover all goose 4. All other Texas areas including the Waggoner Ranch vicinity and the Buffalo Lake area will be covered by an aerial crew composed of a plane and pilot from the Denver Wildlife Research Center, and an observer from the Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department. These counts will be supplemented by ground counts in these areas conducted by Bureau of Sport Fisheries and Wildlife personnel. 5. All Colorado 6. Information for these inventories will be forwarded to Jack R. Grieb, Box 513, Fort Collins, Colorado, for compilation and distribution to all interested persons. areas will be covered by Colorado goose concentration goose personnel. CANADA BANDING. -- A state crew composed of Bill Rutherford and Dick Hopper c~op~rated with the white-front banding crew in banding Canada geese in Saskatchewan and Alberta this year. While the pre-trip inventory called for banding in the Sounding Lake-Grassy Island Lake area, it was found upon arrival that these areas did not have a sufficient concentration of Canadas. Therefore, banding in late September and early October was done at Eyre Lake close to the Alberta-Saskatchewan border. �-62On October 7 the crew moved to Lake Coleman, about 12 miles south of Hanna, Alberta, and stayed there for the rest of the banding effort. Geese did not seem to be concentrated on Alberta Lakes as in the past, instead most birds were on the South Saskatchewan and Red Deer Rivers, scattered along about 50 miles of river. This made trapping very difficult. A summary of Canada geese trapped and banded in Canada during the fall of 1963 is presented by age, sex and banding station in Table 3. According to information obtained in previous years, age ratio estimates vary according to the time of banding. These data seem to substantiate this with birds taken at Coleman in Alberta showing a higher age ratio than other stations. Trapping and banding on this area was later than on the other sites. Group counts for Canada geese were conducted mainly on Eyre Lake in Saskatchewan and Lake Coleman in Alberta. Comparison of mean group sizes with those of the previous year indicate similar production between the two years. One interesting facet is that percent of yo~ng trapped on Coleman was larger than on Eyre, but the average group size was smaller. We still have much to learn about making group counts on the small Canada geese. Recommendations for 1964. -- It is recommended that no specific attempt be made to trap Canada geese on the staging area in 1964. This recommendation is based mainly on the need for Colorado personnel to work the experimental hunting season in the San Luis Valley if this is granted again this year. But also, we need to evaluate the banding results to date to see what needs to be done before proceeding further. Table 3. -- Number of Canada Geese Trapped and Saskatchewan, 1963. Adult Female by Age, Sex and Area -- Alberta Total No. % Male Immature Total Female No. % Area Male Eyre Lake (Saskatchewan) 132.!! 117~! 249 64.3 63 75 138 35.7 387 Teo Lake (Saskatchewan) 101 93 194 79.2 23 28 51 20.8 245 Buffalo Coulee (Saskatchewan) 21 17JJ 38 52.1 24 11 35 47.9 73 28 67 48.6 33 38 71 51.4 138 255 548 65.0 143 152 295 35.0 843 Lake Coleman (Alberta) TOTALS 293 !/ Includes two foreign recaptures. ~/ Includes five foreign recaptures. 1/ Includes one foreign recapture. Total �-63Table 4. -- Canada Goose Group Counts by Area, Canada, 1963. Frequency Saskatchewan Alberta (Eyre Lake) (Lake Coleman) Class 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 TOTAL Mean Group Size Est. Ave. Canada Goose Pop. on Lake Mean Group Size 1962 Total 16 62 50 65 59 39 14 l1 5 10 29 40 50 35 20 5 1 26 91 90 l15 94 ! 59 19 12 5 321 190 511 4.03 6,000 4.05 3.82 3.96 2,000 4.25 UNITED STATES BANDING. -- Two banding crews were active on the wintering grounds as follows: 1. Robert Brown, Refuge Manager and crew, banding at Buffalo Lake National Wildlife Refuge, Texas panhandle. 2. Bill Rutherford, Crew Leader, Richard Hopper, Bob Kitzmiller, and Jack Grieb, banding in the Two Buttes Reservoir area of southeast Colorado. Both crews caught a fairly good sample of geese with 831 banded by mid-~ebruary in Texas, and 575 at Two Buttes. Birds banded by year and location are presented in Table 5. Analysis of these data are not attempted since there has been insufficient time for this during the past year. Age Composition Information. -- Table 6 tabulates age data for all available banding information from all areas, compared to check station data from Two Buttes. Banding schedules have not been received from Buffalo Lake at this date so age estimates are not available. It appears young-of-the-year birds made up about 45% of the population in the Two Buttes area. Actually, banding and check station information were fairly close in estimating percent of young this year. Two Buttes Area Group Count Information. -- A number of group counts were taken throughout the season in southeast Colorado. These revealed an average group size of 4.06 birds, l?imilarto that found in Canada (Table 7). We continue to have reservations regarding this technique; therefore, further comment will not be made regarding this information. �-64Fluoroscopy. -- Percent of birds with shot are compared to past years in Table 8. In general, there was a decrease in both adults and young with shot this year compared with past. Although both hunting and harvest increased over last year' in the Two Buttes area, there were proportionately more birds available than last, thus it appears that percent of birds obtaining shot in this area decreased. Because of favorable hunting in the Eads area this past and the previous year, much of the hunting was concentrated there. Attempts were made to trap birds in this area and compare the incidence of shot with that found at Two Buttes, but catches could not be made. Table 5. State Colorado Texas Number Canada Geese Banded and Returns by Areas and Years. Area Year No. Birds Banded Band No. Recoveries % Two Buttes 1951 1952 1953 1954 1956 1957 1958 1959 1960 1961 1962 1963 1964 644 1,278 1,478 41 182 516 529 526 417 194 858 1,301 575 240 395 435 10 50 90 94 46 37.3 30.9 29.4 24.4 27.5 17.4 17 .8 8.7 1955 1956 1957 1958 1959 50 140 316 165 721 1961 1962 1963 1964 32 224 659 21 831- 1.1 1958 1959 1960 1961 1962 90 149 355 . 54 190 17 225 1952 1953 1959 1961 55 31 51 1.1 Waggoner Buffalo New Mexico Nebraska Ranch Lake La Queva No. Platte River 2 11 Returns not tabulated 11 Trapping not complete when this report was written. at this date. 1.1 3 18 26 33 32 1.1 6.0 12.9 8.2 20.0 4.4 18.9 16.8 �-65Table 6. -- Age Composition of the Arkansas Valley Canada Goose Flock. State Year Banding Adult Young % % No. No. Colorado 1951 1952 1958 1959 1960 1961 1962 1963 1964 344 649 346 214 269 1,171 671 607 360 53.3 50.9 66.4 42.2 60.0 62.3 77.7 44.7 57.7 300 627 175 293 179 710 192 750 264 46.7 49.1 33.6 57.8 40.0 37.7 22.3 55.3 42.3 1959 1960 1961 1962 65 197 27 118 43.6 61.9 69.2 62.1 84 79 12 72 62.6 38.1 30.8 37.9 1962 1963 111 133 57.5 42.9 82 177 42.5 57.1 New Mexico Texas (Buffalo .Lake) Check Adult No. % Station Young No •. % 356 46.8 404 53.2 929 377 612 527 204 377 47.9 36.5 45.5 55~7 48.9 52.1 1,010 655 732 419 213 346 52.1 63.5 54.5 44.3 51.1 47.9 Table 7. -- Family Group Counts, Southeast Colorado. Location Two Buttes Two Buttes Turk's Two Buttes Turk's Two Buttes Nee Noshe Date Observer Birds Grps. Av. Grp. Size No. Birds Present Activity 11/21/63 Kitzmiller 77 20 3.85 1,500 On water 12/5/63 461 102 4.52 10,000 On water 1/2/64 Rutherford & Kitzmiller Kitzmiller 169 49 3.45 3,400 On ice 1/2/64 1/9/64 Kitzmiller Kitzmiller 319 74 76 17 4.20 4.35 12,000 12,000 On ice On ice 1/16/64 Rutherford 199 49 4.0.6 1,100 On ice 2/5/64 Rutherford 426 112 3.80 9,000 On ice TOTAL 1,725 425 4.06 �-66Table 8. -- Summary of Fluoroscopy 1959-1964. Results, Two Buttes Reservoir, Colorado, Year Sample Size Percent Total with shot Percent Adults with shot Percent Young with shot 1959 1960 1961 1962 1963 1964 500 417 568 402 783 593 49.4 42.7 51.9 53.0 42.0 38.1 65.3 45.9 63.6 57.8 58.3 48.5 37.6 37.1 36.8 34.1 26.7 23.9 Recommendations for 1964-65 Banding Season. -- Every effort should be continued for a coordinated banding program on all wintering areas during the next season. This is especially needed at Waggoner Ranch so that direct comparison can be made to determine amount of interchange between major wintering areas. Target for each area should be a minimum of 500 geese with the most desirable number set at 1,000. All birds should be aged by the notched-tail feather technique, and sexed by cloacal examination. FLOCK STATUS AND MANAGEMENT RECOMMENDATIONS. -- All data gathered strongly indicate that 1963 was nother excellent production year for this small Canada goose flock. Populations remain at a high level after the hunting season, and in fact would probably show an increase over the previous year if it had been possible to obtain a good inventory in the Waggoner Ranch vicinity during the January count. Last year it was pointed out that perhaps the only limiting factor at present was on the northern breeding grounds. Further that, that flock could be expected to continue to increase, with the need to be prepared for larger numbers of geese in all parts of the migration and wintering range. Depredation problems can be expected to accompany this increase and we must be prepared to handle these as they arise. The Waggoner Ranch has successfully alleviated a wheat grazing depredation problem by daily aerial harassment of birds. However, this has served simply to move the birds elsewhere; and, with the numbers of geese wintering in this area, it is obvious that depredation has not been eliminated, only alleviated for the present. The Bureau should give serious consideration toward establishment of a management area in the Vernon Texas country to solve this problem which will become increasingly serious in the future. Another management aspect which was mentioned last year and which must be further emphasized this year is the need to manage this flock separately from other Canada geese in the Central Flyway. Data gathered here indicate that separate management is not only feasible but highly desirable. The Bureau of Sport Fisheries and Wildlife should strongly consider this in the 1964-65 hunting regulations. Because of the continued growth of this flock, the depredation potential, and the size of the annual harvest, it is recommended that a small liberalization �-67be considered for this flock in the coming hunting recommendations therefore are as follows: season. Regulation 1. Season length of 75 days with January season date. 2. Bag limit of two Canada geese, possession limit of three Canada geese in the panhandle of Nebraska, southeast Colorado, northeast New Mexico, and the panhandle of Texas. Legal description of these areas will be presented at the Central Flyway Council meeting later this summer. Prepared by: Jack R. Grieb Assistant Game Manager and Project Leader Approved 15 as the latest possible by: Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief Ferd C. K1einschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator Date: o~c~t_o_b_e_-r~,~1~9_6_4 _ ��-69JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO ----~~~~~-----------Project No. W-88-R-9 --~~~~~----------- Migratory Bird Investigations Work Plan No.__ -=I~II~ __ ~________ Job No.~ ~~_l~ __ ~~~ __ ~ __ Review of Duck Literature Relating to Population Dynamics, Title of Job: and Banding Analysis Techniques and Results Period Covered: April 1, 1963 to March 31, 1964 Objectives: To review literature pertinent to a better understanding of duck population dynamics, banding analysis techniques, and duck mortality information from other states and other flyways. Procedure: Literature will be reviewed at the C.S.ll. Library. Findings: This is a negative report. No work has been accomplished under this job during this segment because of lack of assignment of an additional permanent biologist to this project. Review of literature will be carried on in the next project segment. Prepared Date: by: Howard D. Funk Wildlife Researcher Approved Candidate ~o~c~t~ob~er~,~1~9~6~4~ _ by: Jack R. Grieb Assistant Game Manager and Project Leader Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator ��-71JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT COLORADO ----------~~~--------- State of Project No. W~-8~8~-~R~-~9~ Work Plan No. _ Migratory Bird Investigations III Job No. 2 --~~--~--~~~-Analysis of Mallard Recoveries·~f~r-o-m~B~i-r~d~s~B~a-n~d~e~d~i-n-------- Title of Job: Period Covered: Eastern Colorado Prior to 1962 April 1, 1963 to March 31, 1964 Objectives: To determine the amount of usable recovery and mortality information available from previous mallard bandings in eastern Colorado. Procedure: A duplicate deck of IBM cards from the Bird Banding Office will be assembled by proposed work units and analyzed by the "Time specific" method to provide recovery and mortality information. An attempt will be made to accumulate past population information for these units for use in weighing the band recovery data. Findings: This is a negative report. A duplicate deck of IBM cards was obtained from the Bird Banding Office which includes all birds banded in eastern Colorado. No work was performed on this job because of lack of assignment of an additional permanent biologist to this project. Analysis of data concerning mallards banded in the eastern portion of the State wi,l1 be accomplished under the next project segment. Prepared by Howard D. Funk Wildlife Researcher Candidate Approved by: .Jack R. Grieb Project Leader Ferd C. K1einschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator Date: ~O~c~t~ob~e~r~,~1~9~6~4 _ ��October, 196"4 -73- JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO ------~~~~--------------- Project No. W-88-R-9 Work Plan No. III Migratory Bird Investigations Job No. 5 Title of Job: Evaluation of Data to Determine the Range and Annual Mortality of Mallard Flocks Wintering in Colorado Period Covered: April 1, 1963 to March 31, 1964 Objectives: (1) To determine band recovery rates of mallard flocks by work units described in Job 3. (2) To determine annual mortality rates of mallard flocks by work unit, (3) To determine age and sex ratios of mallard flocks by work unit. (4) To determine breeding, migration and wintering ranges of mallard flocks by work unit. (5) To determine the effect of hunting regulations and hunting pressure on mallard flocks by work unit. (6) To compare all of this information between work units and with other states and flyways. Procedure: Much of the detailed procedure will be based upon information determined during the review of literature. Thus, this portion of the job will be rewritten in the segment following completion of the literature review. Recovery and annual mortality rates will be calculated from band recovery information supplied by the Bird Banding Office. Mortality rates will be calculated by the "Time Specific" method. Breeding, migration, and wintering areas will be located by plotting band recoveries on maps of North America. Estimates of size of harvest and number of hunters will be made for each area and the effect of changes in these and in the hunting regulations will be noted in recovery and mortality rates. All of this information will be compared with similar information between work units, states and flyways. Findings: This is a negative report. One of the objectives of this job is to determine age and sex ratios of mallard flocks by work unit. This has been accomplished and reported in Job 3. As all duck banding in 1963-64 was done after hunting season, no recoveries from hunting will be obtained until after hunting season in the fall of 1964. Therefore, determination of recovery rates, annual mortality and breeding, migration, and wintering units of mallards in Colorado �-14will commence after hunting season. Effects of hunting regulations and hunting pressure on the flocks will also begin at this time. Comparison of all these items can then be made between work units and also with similar information from other states within and out of the Central Flyway. Prepared by: Howard D. Funk Wildlife Researcher Candidate Date: October, 1964 Approved by: Jack R. Grieb Assistant Game Manager and Project Leader �October, 196 -75JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of C~O~L~O~RADO~~ _ Project No. W~-_8~8~-~R~-~9 Work Plan No. ~I~V~~ ~________ Job No.~ ~~ ~2 ~~ ~ Correlation Between Call-counts and Productivity in Major Habitat Types in North-central Colorado Title of Job: Period Covered: _ Migratory Bird Investigations _ April-September, 1962 and 1963 Objectives: 1. Determine mourning dove production in four habitat types in Larimer County, Colorado. 2. Evaluate calling doves in relation to breeding pairs, nesting density, and production in the four habitat types. 3. Eva1uat~ frequency of cooing in relation to physiological stage in the nesting cycle, pair-bond presence or absence, climatic fac·tors, habitat type, and individual differences in dove cooing. Introduction: This job was used as a basis for a Master of Science thesis entitled, '~se of the Coo-count Census for Mourning Doves in Larimer County, Colorado," by Charles p. Stone. This thesis is on file at Colorado State University Library and at the Game, Fish and Parks Research Center, 317 West Prospect Street, Fort Collins. This job completion report presents the abstract of this thesis. Plans are in process by the author to publish the findings of this study in the Journal of Wildlife Management or similar media. Information on dates of submission or title are presently lacking. (Jack R. Grieb, Project Leader). ��-77ABSTRACT This investigation was conducted in Larimer County, Colorado, during the spring and summer months of 1962 and 1963. May, June, and July were months of peak calling on four coo-count routes in both years. In general, most nest establishments on study areas also occurred during this period. No consistent relationships were found between the number of doves heard at listening stations on coo-counts and the number of active nests within hearing distance of the stations. No consistent relationships were found between the number of active listening stations on coo-counts and the number of nest establishments on study areas. In general, an increasing average number of doves heard at call-count stations was associated with an increasing average number of breeding birds around the stations. No consistent relationships were found between number of birds heard at call-count stations and number of breeding birds within hearing distance of the stations with one exception: On the short-grass area a linear correlation coefficient of 0.71 was obtained. The relationship between the average number of doves heard at sample stations on coo-counts during the national call-count dates and the number of young produced within a radius of audibility of each sample station was expressed by a linear correlation coefficient of 0.96. The consistency of the relationships among cooing birds, breeding birds, and production of young was examined for two years in two habitat types. Low chi-square values were obtained in each case, indicating that ratios in each type and year were not significantly different from the expected or average ratio. Unmated doves were found to call at significantly higher rates than mated doves. There were no significant differences in cooing frequencies among incubating, brooding, and courting doves. When calling doves on Coo-c.ounts were separated into unmated and mated classes on the basis of differential calling rates, the estimated monthly percentage of unmated doves was found to decrease as the season progressed. The estimated percentage of unmated doves was not consistently related to increases or decreases in estimated population in different years. No significant relationships were found between number of calling birds and average number of calls per bird heard on coo-counts with one exception: A correlation coefficient of 0.80 was obtained expressing the relationship between the two variables'on short-grass routes for the entire season. A high linear correlation coefficient expressing the relationship between the average number of coos per dove and relative humidity (0.82) was obtained for the plateau of calling. Cloud cover, relative humidity, barometric pressure, dew point, maximum overnight temperature and mi.nim~m overnight temperature were not strongly related to number of doves or average number of coos per dove for the entire season or for the plateau, except in the instance mentioned. �-78The perch coo is approximately four seconds in duration. Notes occur at 0.2-0.4 second intervals. The frequency of the fundamental for each note is about 500 cycles per second, and overtones occur at approximate 500 cycle intervals. The relative intensities of the last three notes and the second part of the first note are 'similar. The relative intensity of the first part of the double note averaged 22 decibels less than the relative intensities of the other notes. Coo-count data are not collected uniformly within or among management units. The majority of states in the Central and Western units require at least the first double note to record a cooing dove or perch coo. The majority of states in the Eastern unit record doves or perch coos if any part of the perch coo is heard. Prepared by: Charles P. Stone Approved by: Jack R. Grieb Project Leader Ferd Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator Date: ~O~c~to~b~e~r~,~1~9~64~ _ �October, 1964 -79- JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO ----~~~~~----------------- Project No. W-88-R-9 Work Plan No. Migratory Bird Investigations 3 Job No. ------~~------------ 3 Title of Job: Winter Duck Banding in Eastern Colorado Period Covered: December 1, 1963 through March 31, 1964 Personnel: Jack Grieb, Richard Hopper, Wm. Rutherford, Carl Leonard, Robert Kitzmiller, Jack Truax, Chuck Hayes, Jack Randall, Jack Frost, Art Gresh, John Pogorelz, Lloyd Triplet, and Howard Funk. ABSTRACT A concentrated effort to trap and band mallard ducks in seven areas in eastern Colorado was initiated in December, 1963, to enable the study of mallard populations wintering in specific areas within the State. The seven areas are as follows: (1) Arkansas Valley, (2) Bonny Reservoir, (3) Fort Collins area, (4) South Platte Valley; from Denver to Greeley, (5) Greeley to Fort Morgan, (6) Fort Morgan to Sterling, and (7) Sterling to Julesburg. A total of 4,724 mallards were trapped, aged, sexed, and banded from December 26, 1963 through February 28, 1964, including 9 foreign retraps. ~lso, 320 green-winged teal, American widgeon, and pintails were banded during the period. The goal of 1,000 mallards to be banded within each of the seven areas was reached in the Arkansas Valley, the Denver-Greeley area, and the Fort Collins area. The number banded in the remaining four areas varied from 280 to 674. The extremely mild winter, especially in late January and February, made trapping efforts difficult as the birds were reluctant to enter the bait traps in any great numbers. Cannon-nets were employed in some areas where other types of trapping proved slow or unsuccessful. However, cannon-nets were usually successful for only one or two catches before the birds frequenting the trapping site would move to another location. The sex ratio of all trapped mallards during the winter was 2.96:1 in favor of males. This ratio is indicative of the bias introduced by some of the funneltype traps which often contained mostly male birds. In contrast, sex ratios of mallards trapped in eight cannon-net catches averaged close to 1.68:1 males to females which is similar to the 1.53:1 male-female ratio obtained from ground counts conducted in the vicinity of cannon-net trapping areas and also similar to the 1.45:1 average male-female ratio from ground counts in all areas. �-80- The age ratio of all captured birds was 0.72:1 immatures to adults. Again, cannon-net data indicated a higher average ratio of 0.88:1 which may be more close to correct than the overall average due to bias in age ratios probably introduced through use of funnel traps. Percentages of immature mallards carrying embedded shot as determined by fluoroscopic examination ranged by area from 2.22 per cent to 5.68 per cent for males and from 0 to 7.34 per cent for females. The average for immatures in eastern Colorado was about 5 per cent with shot for both sexes. Percentages of young birds carrying embedded shot in the Fort Collins and DenverGreeley areas were corrected by weighting the percentages according to numbers of birds censused in association with each trapping site. In most cases this caused only slight changes in estimates of percentages of immatures with shot. Thus, weighted percentages of young males ranged from 2.22 to 5.34 per cent and from 0 to 8.29 per cent for young females. Recommendations: There is need to continue this job for at least five years to accumulate age, sex, and fluoroscopy data and to permit analysis of banding return information in regard to estimates on mortality, migration routes, wintering and breeding areas, and effects of hunting regulations and hunting pressure on the mallard populations by area within the State. Objectives: The objectives of this study are as follows: (1) to band 1,000 mallard ducks at each of the following locations; (a) Arkansas Valley, (b) Bonny Reservoir, (c) Fort Collins area, (d) South Platte Valley Denver to Greeley, (e) South Platte Valley Greeley to Fort Morgan, (f) South Platte Valley Fort Morgan to Sterling and (g) South Platte Valley Sterling to Julesburg. (2) To determine age and sex ratios of mallard ducks banded at each of these locations. (3) To determine per cent of birds, by age and sex, with embedded shot at each of these locations. Procedures: All mallards trapped during this study were captured after duck hunting season which ended December 19, 1963. Prior to the trapping period, four Salt Plains type semi-portable bait traps were constructed and materials were obtained for several other types of traps to be built, such as the Colorado trap and various forms of funnel-type bait traps (U. S. Fish and Wildlife Service 1956). Aerial surveys were made toward the end of hunting season and during the study period to determine numbers and locations of ducks wintering in eastern Colorado. Seven areas were designated for individual study and ultimately for comparison with each other for factors such as differential age and sex composition of the birds present, differential hunting pressure and mortality rates as a result of varying distances of the study areas from more densely �-81- settled sections of human populations in the State, and differential migration, nesting, and wintering areas. Attempts were made to distribute the number of mallards banded within each of the seven areas according to the number of ducks censused in association with each trapping site. First trapping efforts were concentrated in the Fort Collins area followed by the Denver-Greeley area, the Arkansas Valley area, and the Bonny Reservoir area, with last efforts taking place in the South Platte Valley from Greeley to Julesburg in that order. Due to a very mild winter, it was extremely difficult to trap during most of January and February as the birds showed little interest in bait except during short periods of cold stormy weather. Cannon-nets were successful trapping tools in some sites but often the birds present in the trapping area would leave the vicinity after the nets were fired once or twice. March 1, 1964 was set as the last trapping date to avoid capturing northward migrating birds which would affect our estimates concerning ducks wintering in Colorado. Wheat, barley, milo, and corn were the various grains used for bait. Sex ratio ground counts were conducted in the vicinity of most trapping sites for comparison with trapping data. Two counts were made near most trapping sites and at least 400 birds were counted each time. Trapped birds were recorded by age and sex, location, and date of capture. Age was determined mainly by examination of wing plumage characteristics (Carney and Geis 1960). Attempts were made to fluoroscope a representative sample of each sex and age class at each trapping site to determine incidence of embedded shot in the ducks. This often meant fluoroscoping all trapped females possible because of low numbers of female mallards actually captured. The fluoroscope was mounted in a l6-foot camp trailer and 110-volt generators in project vehicles made the fluoroscopy operation mobile. Data from all trapped birds were tabulated by age, sex, and number of birds by age and sex with embedded shot, and compared by area. When possible, comparison of data was made between methods of collection such as cannon-nets, cagetype traps, and sex ratio counts. In the Fort Collins and Denver-Greeley areas, where ducks were fluoroscoped at four trapping sites in each area, percentages of birds carrying shot were weighted according to number of birds censused during· the January inventory in the respective trapping sites to produce the best estimate of total population with shot by area. Findings: Trapping efforts in eastern Colorado from December 26, 1963 through February 28, 1964 yielded a total of 4,724 mallards, nine of which had been banded previously. Also, approximately 200 green-winged teal, 70 American widgeon, and 50 pintail were banded during the winter. Numbers and percentages of captured mallards are listed by age, sex, and area of banding in Table 1. �-82Table 1. -- Numbers and percentages of mallards banded by sex and age classes and area, eastern Colorado, 1963-64. Area Totals Captured Adult Male Female No. % Tot. No. % Tot. Innnature Male Female No. % Tot. No. % Tot. Fort Collins 1,022 496 48.53 70 6.85 334 ~2.68 122 11.94 DenverGreeley 1,026 553 53.90 144 14.04 197 19.20 132 12.87 GreeleyFor t Morgan 280 99 35.36 43 15.36 67 23.93 71 25.36 Fort MorganSterling 674 336 49.85 69 10.24 194 28.78 75 11.13 SterlingJulesburg 295 91 30.85 29 9.83 112 37.97 63 21.36 1,022 515 50.39 105 10.27 234 22.90 168 16.44 256 86 4,575 2,176 33.59 47.56 24 484 9.38 98 10.58 1,236 38.28 27.02 48 679 18.75 14.84 Arkansas Valley Bonny Res.ervoir Bonny Reservoir (Unaged) 149 Male Female 117 32 The pre-established quotas of 1,000 mallards to be banded were met only in the Fort Collins, Denver-Greeley, and Arkansas Valley areas. However, at least 280 birds were tagged in the other areas with 674 banded in the Fort Morgan-Sterling area. Of the 405 birds banded at Bonny Reservoir, 149 were not aged. Sex composition of the trapped samples shown in Table 1 indicates a definite bias introduced in favor of males, 2.96:1 males to females, mainly due to types of traps used in the study. The Salt Plains traps and other cage-type funnel traps usually contained very high proportions of males. Results of sex ratio ground counts in the study areas are given in Table 2 and are considered quite accurate because of consistant similarity between counts within and between areas. The ratio of 1.45:1 male-female ratio obtained from all ground counts in eastern Colorado is considered representative of the 1963-64 ea.stern slope population. �-83Table 2. 1963-64. Mallard sex ratio counts by date and area, eastern Colorado, Number Ducks Counted Male Female Total Per Cent Males FORT COLLINS AREA 12/24/63 Reservoir 1fo6 12/24/63 Timnath Reservoir 12/30/63 Timnath Reservoir 1/2/64 Reservoir 1fo6 1/2/64 Boyd Reservoir 1/3/64 Timnath Reservoir 1/7/64 Windsor Ditch Totals 266 250 243 233 307 279 134 1,712 198 219 184 185 236 220 91 1,333 464 469 427 418 543 499 225 3,045 57.33 53.30 56.91 55.74 56.54 55.91 59.56 56.22 Ave. DENVER-GREELEY AREA 1/7/64 Va1mont Reservoir 1/14/64 Va1mont Reservoir 2/2/64 Mile High Duck Club 2/3/64 Mile High Duck Club 2/4/64 Foster Lake Totals 239 181 197 196 248 1,061 154 109 149 139 147 698 393 290 346 335 395 1,759 60.81 62.41 56.94 58.51 62.78 60.32 Ave. 250 342 296 888 174 210 213 597 424 552 509 1,485 58.96 61.96 58.15 59.80 Ave. STERLING-JULESBURG AREA 2/26/64 Manue110 Farm (S. Platte) 78 2/28/64 Manue110 Farm (S. Platte) 195 Totals 273 49 135 184 127 330 457 61.42 59.09 59.74 Ave. BONNY RESERVOIR AREA 2/12/64 Bonny Reservoir Bonny Reservoir 2/14/64 2/15/64 Bonny Reservoir Totals 126 62 107 295 79 27 65 171 205 89 172 466 61.46 69.66 62.21 63.30 Ave. ARKANSAS VALLEY AREA 1/18/64 John Martin Reservoir 511 1/19/64 Ark. R. near Rocky Ford 56 John Martin Reservoir 1/24/64 739 John Martin Reservoir 200 2/11/64 Totals 1,506 305 35 519 108 967 816 91 1,258 308 2,473 62.62 61.54 58.74 64.94 60.90 Ave. TOTALS & AVERAGE 3,950 9,685 59.22 Date Location FORT MORGAN-STERLING AREA 2/17/64 Atwood (fields) 2/27/64 Merino (Prewitt ditch) 2/27/64 Merino (fields) Totals 5,735 �-84Comparison of sex ratio data from cannon-net trapping and ground counts is shown in Table 3. Although there is considerable variation in some cases between individual net catches, the average sex composition of netted birds by area is similar to ground count data in two out of the three comparisons between methods of collection -- the Arkansas Valley and Greeley-Fort Morgan areas. The overall cannon-net trapping sex ratio was 1.68:1 males to females while the ground count ratio obtained in the cannon-net trapping areas was 1.53:1 males to females. Little can be said about age composition for the year other than the overall ratio of trapped birds was 0.72:1, immatures to adults. There is no count data to compare the trapping ratio with for accuracy or similarity but it is suggested that cage type trapping estimates of age ratios are biased somewhat the same as sex ratio estimates (Table 1). Cannon-net data indicated the age composition to be close to a 1:1 ratio, immatures to adults, in the Arkansas Valley and Greeley-Fort Morgan areas, but a 0.59:1 immature-adult ratio was suggested in the Fort Morgan-Sterling area with all cannon-net data producing an immature-adult ratio of 0.88:1 (Table 3). The two areas similar to each other in age structure of birds were also in close agreement for sex ratios. Probably cannon-net results are more accurate indicators of both sex and age ratios than data from cage type traps. Numbers of mallards fluoroscoped, and numbers and percentages of birds with embedded shot in their bodies are listed in Table 4 by work area. Approximately 41 per cent of all males and 59 per cent of all females banded were fluoroscoped. Samples examined were smaller than ideal in some instances due to trapping bias and also because the fluoroscope was not always available when and where the birds were captured. Percentages of mallards with shot, by age and sex, varied between areas. Although some of this variation is undoubtedly due to small sample sizes of birds fluoroscoped, especially females, differential hunting pressure between areas also probably had an effect on these percentages. The Fort Collins and Denver-Greeley areas had the highest indicated hunting pressure, as shown by percentages of young birds with shot, although the Arkansas Valley was also quite high. The latter may possibly be due to the effect of large numbers of goose hunters from allover the state hunting in southeastern Colorado and hunting ducks when the occasion arose. Immature males and females averaged close to 5 per cent with shot in eastern Colorado while adult males and females averaged 18 per cent and 14 per cent with shot, respectively. Weighted percentages of mallards with embedded shot are shown in Table 5 for the Fort Collins and Denver-Greeley areas. Some change in percentages of young birds with shot resulted from the weighting procedure for these areas but had little effect on the overall comparison as most percentages were quite small. �-85Table 3. -- Comparison of mallard age and sex composition from cannon-net and ground count data, eastern Colorado, 1963-64. Date of Capture Totals Captured or Counted Male Adult Immature Method No. % Tot. No. % Tot. Female Adult Immature No. % Tot. No. % Tot. 11 9 23 43 Arkansas Va11e~ Area 1/23/64 2/ 5/64 2/11/64 87 78 171 336 Net Net Net Totals by Method 336 2,473 35 35 57 127 40.23 44.87 33.33 37.80 22 15 39 76 Net 203 Count 1,506 25.29 19.23 22.81 22.62 21.84 24.36 30.41 26.78 12.64 11.54 13.45 12.80 19 19 52 90 60.42 133 39.58 60.90 967 39.10 10.42 15.63 13.02 19 11 30 Fort Morgan-Sterling Area \ / 2/25/64 2/26/64 96 96 192 Net Net Totals by Method 192 1,485 45 51 96 46.88 53.13 50.00 22 19 41 Net 137 71.35 55 28.65 Count 888 59.80 597 40.20 30.53 42.05 30.30 34.54 23 21 17 61 10.53 14.77 21.21 14.86 33 17 15 65 22.92 19.79 21.35 10 15 25 19.79 11.46 15.63 Gree1ex-Fort Mor~an Area 2/12/64 2/18/64 2/19/64 95 88 66 249 Net Net Net Totals by Method 249 Net 147 59.04 102 40.96 1,485 Counts 888 59.80 597 40.20 777 Net 487 62.68 290 37.32 3,958 Count 2,394 60.49 1,564 39.51 29 37 20 86 24.21 23.86 25.76 24.50 10 13 14 37 34.74 19.32 22.73 26.10 All Areas Totals by Method * Fort Morgan-Sterling count used. �-86- Table 4. -- Number of mallards fluoroscoped, and number and percentages with embedded shot by work area, age, and sex, eastern Colorado, 1963-64. Number and Per Cent with Shot AM 1M AF IF No. % No. % No. % No. % Area Number Fluoroscoped AM 1M AF IF Fort Collins 238 176 65 109 45 18.91 10 5.68 Denver-Greeley 144 51 60 41 34 Greeley-Fort Morgan 38 25 19 24 Fort Morgan-Sterling 83 Sterling-Julesburg 63 12.31 8 7.34 23.61 2 3.92 10 16.67 3 7.32 5 13.16 1 4.00 1 5.26 1 4.17 45 27 37 17 20.48 1 2.22 5 18.52 1 2.70 87 15 45 2 3.17 4 4.60 2 13.33 2 4.44 Arkansas Valley 171 157 64 129 28 16.37 8 5.10 9 14.06 8 6.20 Bonny Reservoir 84 17.86 5 5.32 3 0 0.00 17.78 31 4.88 38 13.92 23 5.32 94 23 47 15 Totals and Averages 821 635 273 432 146 8 13.04 ~able 5. -- Percentages of mallards carrying embedded shot by sex and age classes, and number of birds present by areas, eastern Colorado, 1963-64. January Area Inventory Per Cent with Embedded Shot Adult Immature Male Female Male Female Adult Immature 4.45* Fort Collins 51,850 19.94* 7.99* 4.54* 4.27* 17.45* Denver-Greeley 74,390 23.24* 13.29* 2.73* 8.29* 20.50* Greeley-Fort Morgan 33,810 13.16 5.26 4.00 4.17 10.53 4.08 Fort Morgan-Sterling 35,470 20.48 18.52 2.22 2.70 20.00 2.44 Sterling-Julesburg 46~300 3.17 13.33 4.60 4.44 5.13 4.55 Bonny Reservoir 23,150 17.86 13.04 5.32 0.00 16.82 3.55 Arkansas Valley 40,000 16.37 304,970 14.06 5.10 6.20 15.74 5.59 * Percentages weighted on basis of number of birds associated with trapping sites within areas. �-87Percentages of immature birds with shot are the only figures which can be used to get an indication of annual hunting pressure because the young carry shot from only one hunting season. Thus, it seems that hunting pressure was very light in eastern Colorado during the 1963 season. Also, the fairly low percentages of adult birds with shot are probably indicative of decreased hunting pressure in at least the past two seasons. A total of 150 mallards found dead at Lake Ladora at the Rocky Mountain Arsenal near Denver were fluoroscoped on March 6, 1964. Age could not readily be determined as the birds were in varying stages of decomposition and many were wet and muddy. Of 98 males examined, 8 or 8.2 per cent were found to be carrying shot. Six of 52 females examined or 11.5 per cent had shot in their bodies. REFERENCES Carney, S. M. and A. D. Geis. 1960. Mallard age and sex determination from wings. J. Wi1d1. Mgmt. 24:372-381. u.S. Fish and'Wildlife Service. 1956. Guide to waterfowl banding. Fish and Wi1d1. Serv., Laurel, Md. Loose leaf. n.p. Prepared by: Howard D. Funk Wildlife Researcher Candidate Date: ~o~c~t~o~b~e~rL,_1~9~6~4~_ Approved by: U.S. Jack R. Grieb Assistant Game Manager ��October, -89FINAL JOB COMPLETION RESEARCH SEGMENT Migratory Bird Investigations W-88-R-9 --~~~~------------- Work Plan No. 4..!:- Title of Job: Dove Migration Period Covered: April Personnel: PROJECT COLORADO State of Project No. REPORT _ Job No. 1 Investigation 19, 1963 through October 11, 1963. Dick Bartmann, Dean Manning, Don Hoffman, Chad Crosby, Keith Evans, Dwight Owens, Glenn Rogers, Wayne Sandfort, Warren Snyder, Charles Stone, Harold Hood, James Wixson, Pat Donathan, Harold Shepherd, John Burns, Bill Roland, Jack Grieb, and Howard Funk. ABSTRACT This Federal Aid research project was conducted in 1962 and 1963 to study flocking and migration patterns of mourning doves (Zanaidura macroura) in Colorado during summer and early fall months. The objectives were: (1) To determine peaks of late summer flocking and migration by latitude zones, (2) To correlate flocking and migration with climatic conditions, and (3) To correlate flocking and migration phenomena with normal hunting season dates. The state was divided into three latitude zones (north, central, and south) and into two longitudinal zones (one east and one west of the Continental Divide). One route, approximately 30 miles in length, was selected in the farmland-fencerow-river bottom-wasteland complex, for use in roadside census of doves within each of the six areas. One evening and one morning count were conducted on each of the six routes during 11 and 13 week periods in 1962 and 1963, respectively. The 1962 censuses began the end of July while the 1963 counts were initiated in mid-July. Analysis of the two years data, based on individual routes and also on a summary of counts on all routes, indicated great similarity between years. The statewide peak of flocking in 1962 was during the August 13-16 period when 3.72 doves per mile were observed. The 1963 flocking peak of 4.59 birds per mile occurred during the July 29-August 1 period. The 1962 statewide average of counts showed a definite decrease after mid-August while number of doves present in the state in 1963 declined sharply after the August 19-22 period. By the end of August, immediately before dove season began, decreases of 41.9 per cent and 38.6 per cent of the 1962 and 1963 peak dove populations, respectively, were indicated. Counts made a few days after season began revealed that 66.7 per cent of the 1962 peak population and 67.8 per cent of the 1963 peak population had left the state by this time. 1964 �-90Practically all doves had left Colorado by the end of September in 1962 and 1963. Decline in numbers of doves in the state usually was coincidental with periods of precipitation accompanied by decreasing or widely fluctuating temperatures which occurred in August and early September. Recommendations: Data obtained during 1962 and 1963 provided an indication of mourning dove flocking and migration in Colorado in relation to opening day of dove season September 1. It is recommended that every effort be made to create interest by other states in a flyway study of flocking and migration of doves which could be correlated for an overall view of fall dove movement in regard to. September 1 as the earliest possible opening date for hunting season. It is also recommended that a companion study be initiated to correlate flocking and migration phenomena with periods of reproduction (Sandfort 1963). Emphasis in such a study should be directed toward the percentage of total production occurring after August 15, particularly that occurring in early September. Age ratios obtained during concentrated trapping programs, such as will be st~rted in 1964, can also be incorporated with data from other studies for recommendations on both season dates and bag limits. �-91- DOVE MIGRATION INVESTIGATION HOWARD D. FUNK Hunting statistics reveal that the mourning dove consistently yields the highest average season bag of all upland game species in Colorado (Grieb and Hunt~r 1964). This takes place despite the fact that peak numbers of doves in the state occur before legal hunting season -- September 1. This study was initiated to document: dove flocking and movement through Colorado in relation to the September 1 opening season; flocking and movement through the state from north to south; and flocking and movement with regard to climatic conditions. Collection of these data is necessary to substantiate recommendations to improve dove hunting in the state. Objectives: The objectives of this study are as follows: (1) To determine peaks of late summer flocking and migration by latitude zones. (2) To correlate flocking and'migration with climatic conditions. (3) To correlate flocking and migration phenomena with normal hunting season dates. Procedures: The state of Colorado was divided into three equal latitudinal zones (north, central, and south) and into two longitudinal segments (one east and one west of the Continental Divide). One route of approximately 30 miles in length was selected in the farm1and-fencerow-river bottom-wasteland complex in each of the six areas. These were chosen near Fort Collins, Castle Rock, and Springfield in the eastern portion of the state and near Craig, Grand Junction, and Cortez to the west of the mountains. One evening count followed by a morning census was made weekly on each route for 11 and 13 week periods in 1962 and 1963, respectively. Evening counts were started 90 minutes before sunset and morning counts began 15 minutes before sunrise. Speed traveled on the routes during the counts did not exceed 20 miles per hour. Dates of weekly counts were staggered from north to south so it was possible for one individual to conduct all censuses in either the eastern or western zones. All doves seen during the censuses were recorded on forms by singles, pairs, or groups (See.samp1e form). When all counts for the year were completed, total numbers of doves counted during each period were tabulated by route. The average of morning and evening counts each week was employed in plotting doves per mile seen in each area by weekly intervals. Total doves per mile statewide for each year also were graphed. Data for 1962 and 1963 were compared for periods of peak numbers between years by area, and also on a statewide basis. Maximum and minimum temperatures and precipitation exceeding a trace reading were obtained (U. S. Weather Bureau 1963 and 1964) and plotted on graphs �-92MOURNING DOVE CENSUS FORM Date'--""--~=--_7":""~ __ -=-""",,,"~ Period of Day (A.M. or P.M.) Name of Route County(ies) Time Started Beginning Mi1eage Time Finished:..Ending Mileage _ Observer(s)~ .Weather at start of .counte Temp:.~-.% cloud cover '; Wind(M.P.H.) _ _ _ .~~~~--_ Weather at end of count: Temp: % cloud cover ; Wind (M.p.H. ) ~--~~-------T:otal l'ime Total Miles SINGLES _ Precipitation during count: PAIRS _ GROUPS OR FLOCKS I l~ub-Totals Total Doves Observed L_ ~ -------------------------------------------------------------------------- General Instructions for Making Dove Roadside Counts: 1. Enter all information requested at head of form. 2. Drive route slowly (about 15 m.p.h.) 3. Count all doves observed and separate by singles, pairs or flocks. Use figure (2) to designate a pair. ~ �-93- along with doves seen per mile. This was done by area to show effect of temperature and precipitation on numbers of doves present. Partial correlation was employed to determine the importance of maximum and miriimum temperatures on emigration of doves from Colorado (Snedecor 1956). Correlation tests were applied only to data collected after peaks in numbers of doves. Daily maximum and minimum temperatures were averaged for each week to coincide with counts made at the end of each weekly period. This study had its origin in 1962 under Federal Aid Project W-37-R-16, Work Plan 5, Job 1 (Sandfort 1963) but was transferred in 1963 to Federal Aid Project W-88-R-9 which now includes all migratory birds. Findings: Data gathered during 1962 and 1963 are shown in Tables 1 through 6 representing observed doves per mile in each of the six census areas during the two year study. Included are the dates of evening and morning counts, route lengths, numbers of doves tallied during each morning and evening count and the average of the two, and the doves per mile during each count interval. Table 1. -- Mourning dove census data, Fort Collins area, 1962 and 1963.* 1962 1963 Doves Doves Count Count Dates Number of Doves per Count Count Dates Number of Doves per AM Ave. Mile Number PM AM Ave. Mile Number PM AM PM AM PM 31 31 31.0 1.03 1 7/15 7/16 56 34.0 1.13 12 2 7/22 7/23 No count 14 1 7/30 7/31 3 59 36.5 1.22 7/29 7/30 2 8/ 6 8/ 7 5 23 55 39.0 1.30 54 29.5 0.98 4 8/ 5 8/ 6 8/13 8/14 20 65 42.5 1.42 30 40 35.0 1.17 3 5 8/12 8/13 6 32 43 37.5 1.25 8/20 8/21 30 38 34.0 1.13 8/19 8/20 4 206 115.0 3.83 20 55 37.5 1.25 8/26 8/27 24 5 8/27 8/28 7 6 34 29.5 0.98 35 35 35.0 1.17 8 25 9/ 3 9/ 4 9/ 2 9/ 3 16 27 21.5 0.72 13 11.0 0.37 9/10 9/11 9 9 9/ 9 9/10 7 10 9.5 0'.32 10 9/16 9/17 9 8 9/17 9/18 5 9 7.0 0.23 6 5 5.5 0.18 11 9/23 9/24 9/24 9/25 3 4 3.5 0.12 9 0.0 0.00 0 0 0 9/30 10/1 10 10/1 10/2 1 12 0.5 0.02 1.0 0.03 10/7 10/8 0 0 0.0 0.00 0 11 2 13 10/8 10/9 "k Route length 30 miles both years. �-94- Table 2. -- Mourning dove census data, Castle Rock area, 1962 and 1963.* 1962 1963 Doves Doves Count Count Dates Number of Doves per Count Count Dates Number of Doves per Number PM AM PM AM Ave. Mile Number PM AM PM AM Ave. Mile 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 7/31 8/ 7 8/14 8/21 8/29 9/ 5 9/11 9/18 9/25 10/2 10/9 8/ 1 146 8/ 8 165 8/15 142 8/22 49 8/30 13 19 9/ 5 9/12 47 9/19 27 9/26 46 10/3 0 10/10 0 131 224 68 17 6 27 14 6 60 0 0 138.5 194.5 105.0 33.0 9.5 23.0 30.5 16.5 53.0 0.0 0.0 4.56 6.40 3.45 1.09 0.31 0.76 1.00 0.54 1.74 0.00 0.00 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 7/16 7/23 7/30 8/ 6 8/13 8/20 8/30 9/ 3 9/10 9/17 9/24 10/1 10/8 7/17 7/24 7/31 8/ 7 8/14 8/21 8/31 9/ 4 9/11 9/18 9/25 10/2 10/9 35 71 35 62 .53 53 No count 41 53 32 38 27 35 17 34 22 42 44 23 3 20 1 0 2 0 53.0 48.5 53.0 1.74 1.60 1.74 47.0 35.0 31.0 25.5 32.0 33.5 11.5 0.5 1.0 1.55 1.15 1.02 0.84 1.05 1.10 0.38 0.03 0.07 * Route length 30.4 miles both years. Table 3. -- Mourning dove census data, Springfield area, 1962 and 1963.* 1962 1963 Doves Doves Count Count Dates Number of Doves per Count Count Dates Number of Doves per PM . AM Number PM AM PM AM Ave. Mile Number PM AM Ave. Mile 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 8/ 1 8/ 1 64 8/ 8 8/ 9 35 8/15 8/16 39 8/22 8/23 50 39 8/29 8/30 22 9/ 5 9/ 6 29 9/12 9/l3 9/21 9/21 115 42 9/26 9/27 3 10/3 10/4 10/10 10/11 0 104 84.0 61.5 88 131 85.0 94 72.0 162 100.5 34 28.0 167 98.0 396. 255.5 l3 27.5 3 3.0 0 0.0 1 2 2.79 3 2.04 4 2.82 5 2.39 6 3.34 7 0.93 8 3.26 9 8.49 10 0.91 11 0.10 12 0.00- 13 * Route length 30.1 miles both years. 7/17 7/24 7/31 8/ 7 8/14 8/21 8/28 9/ 6 9/11 9/18 9/26 10/2 10/9 7/18 7/25 7/31 8/ 8 8/15 8/22 8/29 9/ 7 9/12 9/19 9/27 10/3 10/10 13 21 22 22 31 23 20 17 5 0 0 0 0 37 51 30 73 69 56 33 9 8 23 0 0 0 25.0 36.0 26.0 47.5 50.0 39.5 26.5 13.0 6.5 11.5 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.83 1.20 0.86 1.58 1.66 1.31 0.88 0.43 0.22 0.38 0.00 0.00 0.00. �:"95- Table 4. -- Mourning dove census data, Craig area, 1962 and 1963.* 1962 1963 Doves Doves Count Count Dates Number of Doves per Count Count Dates Number of Doves per Number PM AM AM PM Ave. Mile Ave. Mile Number .PM AM PM AM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 7/30 8/ 6 8/13 8/20 8/27 9/ 3 9/10 9/17 9/24 10/1 10/8 7/31 99 8/ 7 143 8/14 123 8/21 114 8/28 102 9/ 4 57 9/11 15 9/18 19 9/25 7 10/2 8 '10/9 3 47 93 242 200 117 91 20 24 8 4 0 73.0 118.0 182.5 157.0 109.5 74.0 27.5 21.5 7.5 6.0 1.5 2.03 3.29 5.08 4.37 3.05 2.06 0.77 0.60 0.21 0.17 0.04 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 7/15 7/22 7/29 8/ 5 8/12 8/19 8/26 9/ 2 9/ 9 9/16 9/23 9/30 10/7 7/16 7/23 7/30 8/ 6 8/13 8/20 8/28 9/ 3 9/10 9/17 9/24 10/2 10/8 281 70 299 180 103 219 180 59 310 31 19 0 0 244 120 704 333 413 528 199 153 190 27 8 0 0 262.5 7.31 95.0 2.65 501.5 13.97 256.5 7.14 258.0 7.19 373.5 10.40 189.5 5.28 106.0 2.95 250.0 6.96 29.0 0.81 13.5 0.38 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.00 * Route length 35.9 miles both years. 'l'ab1e5. -- Mourning dove census data, Grand Junction area, 1962 and 1963.* 1963 Doves Doves Number of Doves per Count Count Dates Number of Doves per Count Count Dates Ave. Mile AM AM PM PM AM Ave. Mile Number PM Number PM AM 1962 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 '1 7/31 8/ 7 8/14 8/21 8/28 9/ 4 9/11 9/18 9/25 10/2 10/9 8/ 1 8/ 8 8/15 8/22 8/29 9/ 5 9/12 9/19 9/26 10/3 10/10 25 78 71 59 57 49 11 18 13 8 3 85 131 124 121 92 35 27 26 10 10 2 55.0 104.5 97.5 90.0 74.5 42.0 19.0 22.0 11.5 9.0 2.5 1.86 3.53 3.29 3.04 2.52 1.42 0.64 0.74 0.39 0.30 0.08· * Route length 29.6 miles both years. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 7/16 7/23 7/30 8/ 6 8/13 8/20 8/27 9/ 3 9/10 9/17 9/24 10/1 10/8 7/17 7/24 7/31 8/ 7 8/14 8/21 8/28 9/ 4 9/11 9/18 9/25 10/2 10/9 61 79 70.0 43 95 69.0 74 159 116.5 89.0 39 139 124 201 162.5 83.0 87 79 51.0 23 79 56 64.5 73 21.5 36 7 No count 15.0 25 5 0.0 0 0 1 0.5 0 2.36 2.33 3.94 3.01 5.49 2.80 1.72 2.18 0.73 0.51 0.00 0.02 �-96- Table 6. -- Mourning dove census data, Cortez area, 1962 and 1963.* 1962 1963 Count Number Doves Doves Count Dates Number of Doves per Count Count Dates Number of Doves per AM AM PM PM Ave. Mile Number PM AM AM PM Ave. Mile 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 8/ 1 8/ 2 82 8/ 8 8/ 9 135 8/15 8/16 135 8/22 8/23 76 8/29 8/30 40 22 9/ 5 9/ 6 9/12 9/13 16 9/19 9/20 7 9/26 9/27 3 10/3 10/4 0 10/10 iO/11 0 170 260 274 231 128 52 12 24 5 0 0 126.0 197.5 204.5 153.5 84.0 37.0 14.0 15.5 4.0 0.0 0.0 3.45 5.41 5.60 4.21 2.30 1.01 0.38 0.42 0.11 0.00 0.00 7/17 7/24 7/31 8/ 7 8/14 8/21 8/28 9/ 4 9/11 9/18 9/25 10/2 10/9 7/18 98 7/25 83 8/ 1 56 8/ 8 149 8/15 70 8/22 70 8/29 71 9/ 5 9 9/12 11 9/19 26 9/26 2 10/3 0 10/10 0 131 109 131 148 174 179 118 46 27 32 0 0 0 114.5 96.0 93.5 148.5 122.0 124.5 94.5 27.5 19.0 29.0 1.0 0.0 0.0 4.75 3.98 3.88 6.16 5.06 5.17 3.93 1.14 0.79 1.20 0.04 0.00 0.00 * Route length in 1962 was 36.5 miles; route length in 1963 was 24.1 miles. Examination of the tables reveals a fairly close correlation in periods of peak numbers of doves between years in each area while the number of birds present in some cases varied considerably. The peak of migration in most routes, both years, was between the first and middle of August. Number of birds present in the Springfield and Castle Rock areas showed short-lived increases in 1962 after hunting season began as did numbers present in 1963 before hunting season at Fort Collins and after September 1 at Craig. However, these situations seem to be exceptions as they happened only once in each area during the study. It would seem natural that numbers of doves in the southern part of Colorado would remain high longer than in the northern portions but this was not indicated in consecutive years. Doves per mile, daily maximum and m~n~mum temperatures, and precipitation are shown by route for each year (Figures 1 through 12). The graphic illustrations depict the seasonal variation in dove numbers by area in relation to weather conditions. In most instances, a general downward trend in number of birds present can be seen after periods of late August and September storms and widely varying and decreasing daily temperatures. Statewide summaries of data from the six routes are presented for 1962 and 1963 in Tables 7 and 8, respectively. Similarity between years in statewide population peak numbers and periods also can be seen in Figure 13. �1962 II 110 10 100 I 9 90 - - -- -- - PERIODS OF PPT. 8 LL (f) 7 t!1170 0: "-II .-J 6 :IE 0: MAX. TEMP. ""-I 0 z 160 "-I 5 ~150 "-Ia. !;t (f) "-I In "-II- 0: 0 4 0: MIN. TEMP. ~140 0 3 30 2 20 POPULATION TREND 10 0 0 15 20 25 JULY 30 - "- 10 15 AUGUST 20 25 30 5 10 DATE Fig. 1. Correlation, mourning dove numbers and population trend with temperature and precipitation, northeast zone (Fort Collins area), 1962. 15 SEPTEMBER 20 25 30 5 10 OCTOBER 15 �1963 110 II PERIODS 10 100 9 90 8 OF PPT. MIN. TEMP. ,80 LL en 7l!:l170 0:: (!) 1.1.1 0 6 1.1.11 -' Z :::a: 1.1.1 50:: ::;, 0:: I<X I.LI a.. 0:: 1.1.1 en 4 a.. 0 ~ 0:: 1.1.1 I- iD :3 130 2 20 10 POPULATION 0 TREND 0 15 20 25 JULY 30 4 9 14 19 24 29 AUGUST Fig. 2. Correlation, mourning dove numbers and population trend with temperature and precipitation, northeast zone (Fort Collins area), 1963. 3 8 13 SEPTEMBER 18 23 28 3 8 OCTOBER 13 �J962 II 110 PERIODS 10 100 9 90 8 OF PPT. u, en 7 ~170 a:: (!) MAX. TEMP. L&J 0 6 160 L&JI Z :IE L&J ..J a:: 5 ~150 L&J !;( c, a:: L&J en 0 4 ~140 a:: L&J ~ CD . 3 30 2 20 MIN. TEMP. 10 0 0 15 POPULATION TREND 20 25 JULY 30 5 10 15 AU.GUST 20 25 30 DATE- Fig. 3. Correlation, mourning dove numbers and population trend with temperature and precipitatipn, east-central zone (Castle Rock area), 1962. I:: .., 10 15 SEPTEMBER 20 25 30 5 10 OCTOBER 15 �1963 II 110 10 100 PER 10 OS OF P.P.T. 9 8 ILI80 (f) lLI 7 ~170 MAX. TEMP. MIN. TEMP. C!) lLI C lLI -I 6 - z :E lLI lLI I- a: a: 5 :::1150 a.. ~ a: ~14 ~140 lLI a: lLI iii I- 3 30 2 20 •..... .. ......• 10 o TREND °1~5--~_~_--~ __ ~~_~_~--~--~_~--~--~~~~--~--~~---------------------=~----= 2v 25 30 4 24 29 3 8 13 23 28 3 8 13 9 JULY 14 19 AUGUST Fig. 4. Correlation, mourning dove numbers and population trend with temperature and precipitation, east-central zone (Castle Rock area), 1963. 18 SEPTEMBER OCTOBER �1962 I II 110 10 100 9 90 8 80 PERIODS OF PPT.· u, MAX. TEMP. 7 (1)170 w w cr:: (!) 6 ~160 z w -I ~ 5 M:!150 ::l cr:: W a.. MIN. TEMP. ~ cr:: ~ 4 ~140 _ cr:: w :E CD I- 3 30 2 20 10 0 0 15 POPULATION TREND 20 25 JULY 30 5 10 15 AUGUST 20 25 30 DATE - Fig. 5. Correlation, mourning dove numbers and population trend with temperature and precipitation, southeast zone (Springfield area), 1962. '.., " 10 15 SEPTEMBER 20 25 30 5 10 OCTOBER 15 �1963 110 " PERIODS OF PPT. 10 9 8 LL 7 enl 70 w w a:: (!) 6 ~160 wi z ...J :E 5 wi 50 a:: ~ a:: Ia.. c:t a:: 4 ~140 :E a:: w s MIN. TEMP. ~ CD 3 30 2 20 10 POPULATION 0 TREND 0 15 20 25 JULY 30 - 4 9 14 19 24 29 AUGUST Fig. 6. Correlation, mourning dove numbers and population trend with temperature and precipitation, southeast zone (Springfield area), 1963. 3 8 13 SEPTEM BE R 18 23 28 3 8 OCTOBER 13 �1962 " 110 10 100 9 90 - - PERIODS OF PPT. 8 (No 0010) u, 7 (/)170 LrJ LrJ 0: (!) 6 ~160 MAX. TEMP. z LrJ 0:150 :::I 0: ~ LrJ a.. 0: LrJ ~14 0: iD 0..140 ~ LrJ ~ 3 30 2 20 MIN. TEMP. 10 o o 15 POPULATION 20 25 JULY 30 5 10 15 AUGUST 20 25 30 DATE Fig. 7. Correlation, mourning dove numbe~s and population trend with temperature and precipitation, northwest zone (Craig area), 1962. 5 10 15 SEPTEMBER 20 25 30 5 10 OCTOBER TREND 15 �I II 110 10 100 9 90 1963 , I PERIODS OF P.P.T. 8 u, ,80 Cf) 7 ~I a:: 70 MAX. (!) TEMP. IJJ 0 IJJ ...J 6 - :E a:: IJJ o, 160 z IJJ 5 ~150 ~ a:: ~14 a:: ~140 CQ ~ ~ - IJJ 3 30 2 20 10 POPULATION 0 TREND 0 15 20 25 JULY 30 4 9 14 AUGUST 19 24 29 Fig. 8. Correlation, mourning dove numbers and population trend with temperature and preCipitation, northwest zone (Craig area), 1963. . 3 8 13 SEPTEMBER 18 23 28 3 8 OCTOBER 13 �1962 I II 110 - PERIODS OF PPT. 10 9 80 8 IL rn MAX. TEMP. 7 ~170 IX: (!) I&J 0 I&J 6 zl60 _ -I :::E I&J IX: IX: I&J 5 ~150 Q. C( •.•• IX: I&J rn MIN. TEMP. o 4 ~140 •... ~ I&J en 3 30 2 20 10 __ 0 0 15 POPULATION TREND 1 20 25 JULY 30 5 10 15 AUGUST 20 25 30 DATE Fig. 9. Correlation, mourning dove numbers and population trend with temperature and precipitation, west-central zone (Grand Junction area), 1962. '" oJ 10 15 SEPTEMBER 20 25 30 5 '""""--- 10 OCTOBER 15 �1963 I 110 II PERIODS 10 OF P. P.T. 100 9 8 I.i.. _ 80 MAX. C/) TEMP. 7 UJ UJ a:: (!) UJ 0 UJ ...J 6 Z :IE a:: 5 UJ a:: :::> UJ Cl. ~ <t ~14 a:: CD a:: ~140 MIN. TEMP. :IE ~. 3 30 2 20 0 TREND 0 0 15 20 25 30 JULY Fig. 10. Correlation, trend with temperature (Grand Junction area), 4 9 14 19 24 29 ~ AUGUST mourning dove numbers and population and precipitation, west-central zone 1963. 8 13 SEPTEMBER 18 23 28 3 8 OCTOBER 13 �1962 II 110 10 100 9 90 8 80 PERIODS OF PPT. u, 7 ~170 MAX. TEMP. LLI a:: (!) 6 ~160 ~I z ::E a:: LLI e, (f) 0 a:: iii 5 ~150 ::) MIN. TEMP. ~ a:: 4 ~140 ::E LLI ~ 3 30 2 20 10 0 0 15 POPULATION TREND 20 25 JULY 30 - Fig. 11. Correlation, trend with temperature (Cortez area), 1962. ~ - 10 15 AUGUST 20 25 30 DATE mourning dove numbers and population and precipitation, southwest zone 5 10 SEPTEMBER 15 20 25 30 5 10 OCTOBER 15 �1963 II 110 10 1001 9 9 - - - --- -- - - - PERIODS OF PPT. 8 u, (J) w 7 ~170 t!) 1 w a 6 z wi .-l ~I a:: w TEMP. MIN. TEMP. 160 W 5 a:: => l- « ll. (J) MAX. a:: 0 4 ~I 40 - w l- :E 0::: CD I \ 1 3 30 2 20 10 o o POPULATION TREND 1·~5~---=~~~~--~~::~~---~~~~---~·----~~-----·-·~---·------:~~.------------------------------~~======~----'--2v 25 30 4 9 14 19 24 29 8 13 18 3 23 28 3 13 8 JULY Fig. 12. Correlation, trend with temperature (Cortez area), 1963. AUGUST mourning dove numbers and population and precipitction, southwest zone SEPTEMBER OCTOBER �6 ...I 1.1.1 ~ ~ a.. -& 5 1.1.1 4 = ~ ~ en •••••3 # = ~ 2 ~-, // "196}, • •••• •• •• •• • ••• • ~ 1 ~ •• •••• ••• •• .. . •• •• • o~--------------__--------------~ July 15-18 22-25 August 29-2 5-9 Figure 13. 12-16 19-23 26-30 Sept. 2-7 --__-9-13 16-21 ~~ ..... 23-27 October 30-4 MourningDovePopulation Trends in Colorado, Statewide, 1962 and 1963• • 7-11 ��-111- Table 7. -- Mourning Coun t Number Count Dates Length of Routes (Miles) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 7/30 - 8/ 2 8/ 6 - 8/ 9 8/13 - 8/16 8/20 - 8/23 8/27 - 8/30 9/ 3 - 9/ 6 9/10 - 9/13 9/17 - 9/21 9/24 - 9/27 10/1 - 10/4 10/8 - 10/11 162.5 192.5 192.5 192.5 192.5 192.5 192.5 192.5 192.5 192.5 192.5 Table 8. -- Mourning suTl1Illftry, 1962. dove census data, statewide dove census data, PM of Doves Ave. AM 416 561 530 378 271 204 127 191 114 19 8 537 850 904 701 560 274 253 485 100 18 2 Number statewide summar y, Number Count Number Count Dates Length of Rou tes (Miles) PM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 7/15 - 7/18 7/22 - 7/25 7/29 - 8/ 1 8/ 5 - 8/ 8 8/12 - 8/15 8/19 - 8/22 8/26 - 8/29 9/ 2 - 9/ 7 9/ 9 - 9/12 9/16 - 9/19 9/23 - 9/27 9/30 - 10/3 10/7 - 10/10 180.1 180.1 180.1 149.7 180.1 180.1 180.1 180.1 180.1 180.1 150.5 180.1 180.1 519 264 518 413 399 463 345 200 400 110 54 0 0 476.5 705.5 717.0 539.5 415.5 239.0 190.0 338.0 107.0 18.5 5.0 Doves per Mile 2.93 3.66 3.72 2.80 2.16 1.24 0.99 1.76 0.56 0.10 0.03 1963. of Doves Ave. AM Doves per Mile 556.0 378.5 827.0 580.5 674.5 693.0 507.5 266.0 350.5 112.5 46.5 0.5 1.5 3.09 2.10 4.59 3.88 3.75 3.85 2.82 1.48 1.95 0.62 0.31 0.002 0.008 593 493 1,136 748 950 923 670 332 301 115 39 1 3 The 1962 dove population in Colorado peaked during the period of August 13-16 as shown by the statewide route average of 3.72 doves per mile. Actually, doves were also at near peak numbers during the August 6-9 interval. During 1963, the greatest number of doves, 4.59 per mile, was observed from July 29 through August 1. However, counts remained relatively high in 1963 through August 22 whereas a definite decrease in birds per mile was noted after August 16, 1962. �-112- The extremely high counts obtained in the Craig area in 1963 were largely responsible for the early peak in numbers of birds as well as the late decline. The increase in birds per mile after September 1, 1963 was again due mainly to the Craig census. In 1962, the increase in number of doves seen state wide after opening of season was due to high counts at Springfield. Numbers of doves present at the end of August, immediately before dove season, had declined 41.9 per cent from peak populations in 1962 and 38.6 per cent in 1963. Surveys conducted a few days after dove season began revealed that dove populations in the state had dropped 66.7 per cent and 67.8 per cent in 1962 and 1963, respectively. This indicates that the dove season started after almost half of the peak population of birds had left the state. In addition, nearly all doves appeared to have left Colorado by the end of September in both years. Results of attempts to determine correlation between maximum and minimum daily temperatures and departure of doves from Colorado varied by year. Strong direct correlation was indicated in comparison of average weekly minimum temperatures and dove numbers in 1963 while the relation between maximum temperatures and number of birds was, in general, not as great and showed much variance. With partial correlation applied, which removes the effect of either maximum or minimum temperature from the test, results remained in favor of minimum temperatures as the factor more closely correlated with dove movement. However, in 1962 this was not indicated. The quite strong correlation coefficients for maximum and minimum temperatures as related to doves seen per mile were in close agreement with each other. Partial correlation also seemed to indicate that possibly both had a combined effect on dove movement and neither supported strong correlation by itself. Much of the disagreement between results of the two years data could be due to small sample sizes composed of weekly counts. Because correlation was applied only to data collected after numbers of doves had begun to decline, the number of samples was further limited to between five and nine weekly counts for each route. However, migration is probably caused by a number of factors, of which temperature and precipitation are but a part. Other factors could be availability of food and water, length of day, and even periods of nesting and nesting success could have varying effects on how long doves stay within an area during fall months. Effects of weather, as well as the aforementioned items, in other states could have influence on numbers of birds seen in the State at anyone time with no direct effect from factors present in Colorado. Thus, from this study we can say little more than it seems that temperature changes and precipitation are directly related to fall dove migration. Emigration seems to start during periods of widely fluctuating and generally decreasing temperatures in August and continues as temperatures continue to decrease. �-113- References Grieb, J. R., and G. N. Hunter. 1964. Colorado small game hunter harvest survey -- 1963. Colo. Game, Fish, and Parks Dept., Fed. Aid Project W-88-R Rept., May 1. 22 pp. Sandfort, W. W. 1963. Location and census. Colo. Game, Fish, and Parks Dept., Fed. Aid Game Research Rept., Oct. Part 2. pp. 225-237. Snedecor, G. W. 1956. Statistical methods. Press, Ames. 534 pp. 5th ed. The Iowa State Univ. u.S. Weather Bureau. 1962. Climatological data, Colorado. U.S. Dept. of Commerce, Aug., Sept., and Oct., 1962. Vol. 67, No. 8-10. u.S. Weather Bureau. 1963. Climatological data, Colorado. U.S. Dept. of Commerce, July, Aug., Sept., and Oct., 1963. Vol. 68, No. 7-10. Prepared by: Howard D. Funk Wildlife Researcher Candidate Date: ~O~c~t~o~b~e~rL,~1~9~6_4_ Approved by: Jack R. Grieb Assistant Game Manager � https://cpw.cvlcollections.org/files/original/9096fdce13b3b561efa6fec4a5910f96.pdf 5c0c05d8630967cc8a19c4948e928dd5 PDF Text Text ",1"""-- , ... .' ..Jal~~a~'~ ,._'1.':)65 JOB COMPLETION RESEARCH State of REPORT PROJECT 9206430 SEGMENT COLORADO --~~~~~---------------An Ecological Investigation of the Project No. W-l05-R-4 Cache la Poudre Deer Herd, Colorado Work Plan: 3 Environmental Job No. 1 Climatic Period Covered: Personnel: January, 1963 - December, Studies Environment 1963. D. E. Medin and A. E. Anderson '.: ...J..••_ •.• _ •.• __ ABSTRACT Environmental measurement stations have been established on each of five '. deer-range study areas (lower-winter, middle-winter, upper-winter, transitional, summer) and have been in continuous operation since December, 1960. Station sites were selected to characterize that portiotl of the environ~ent (each of the five study areas encompasses approximately 500 acres) on which deer ecology studies are presently being carried out. A small south-. easterly exposed ridge within the prevalent browse type was selected Eo r each of the three winter range areas. Transition and summer .range measurement stations were located on similar southeast ridge eXposures in the dominant forest type occurring at these elevations. Stations were located approximately midway in a given study area's elevational spread. Data recorded weekly (monthly on the summer range area during the midwinter period) on each of the five elevation levels include: continuous air t empe ra ture and relative humidity; maximum and minimum soil temperature, average wind velocity, wind direction, precipitation, soil moisture, snow depths·on four contrasting exposures, snow and crust type classification, and supplementary notes or measurements regarding wind gust velocity, depth of snow over soil temperature installation, condition of surface soil, and type and extent of cloud cover. Data measured and recorded during 1963 have been summarized in condensed form in Appendices I-V. and are presented Recommendations: Continue operation of environmental ~easurement stations on each of the five elevational study areas. Summarize data obtained in both tabular and IBM punch card form. Prepare monthly and annual sunnnary t~bles for ea~h station. 4 �-2Objective: Determine the local climate on each of five selected study locations believed to be representative of the lower-winter, middle-winter, upper-winter, transitional, and summer ranges of the herd so that data relevant to the boita under study can be adequately interpreted, particularly from the standpoint of elevational relationships. Techniques Used: Installation.--A 24-foot by 10-foot barbed-wire exclosure was constructed on each site to protect the installation from domestic stock. Weather shelters were installed and secured by bolting to 4 by 4 inch cross supports and uprights. Wood in contact with the soil was creosoted to prolong its usability. Uprights were drilled to allow raising or lowering of the shelter to compensate for snow depths. Appropriate supports for the precipitation gauge and anemometer were installed within the exclosure. The entire installation was guyed with steel aircraft cable with turnbolt attachments, insuring firmness and instrument stability. Instrumentation.--A Weather Bureau "cotton belt" instrument shelter houses a Bendix-Friez Model 594 hygrothermograph; standard maximum and minimum thermometers mounted on Townsend supports; a sling psychrometer; and a kit-box containing ink, alcohol, oil, and other necessary servicing items. A metal rod was attached to one side of the shelter to serve as a weighing bar for precipitation gauge contents. A Kahl hygrothermograph (Model WE24-01), equipped with a 31-day clockwork, is used at the summer range station during the midwinter period and is read monthly. A three-cup totalizing anemometer, a standard 8-inch precipitation gauge, and a metal soil-temperature box were also installed in each exclosure. The soil-temperature box houses Weather Bureau type maximum and minimum thermometers in a metal tube at a depth between 5 and 7 inches below the soil surface. The soil was removed at the time of installation and packed lightly back into place after the soil-temperature box had been properly positioned. A small vane-type wind direction indicator was mounted on each weather shelter. All instruments have been placed approximately 36-inches above the ground surface, considered comparable to "deer height". Methods and procedures used in servicing instruments and maintaining records are essentially those outlined by the Institute of Arctic and Alpine Research (1958) and the U. S. Weather Bureau (1955). Soil Moisture.--Soil moisture samples from a depth of 5-7 inches are collected weekly from a soil pit adjacent to the station installation. One side of the pit is exposed with a mattock to remove dry material and about one pint of soil is spooned into a polyethylene collection bag. After removing excess air, the bag is sealed, tagged as to date and area, and placed in a canvas bag for protection. In the laboratory the soil is sieved through a 2 mm. screen and percent moisture determined by oven drying. 1.'; �-~Snow.--Snow stake lin~s were established on four environmental situations at each measurement station: a southeast-sloping ridgetop, a draw adjacent to the ridge, open south-facing slope, and forested north-facing slope. Ten steel fence posts, equidistantly spaced, comprise each snow stake transect line, yielding a total of 40 snow depth observations at each station. Stakes are calibrated in one-tenth foot intervals. In addition to depth, the snow along each stake line is classified as to specific type and crust characteristics developed by U. S. Forest Service snow studies (Appendix VI). Experience with the classification indicates that a reasonably precise selection of categories can be made. Recording Forms, Summarization, and Servicing Kits.--All stations are serviced weekly (with the exception of the summer range station which is serviced monthly during the months of December-April) and data are recorded on appropriate forms (Appendix VII). Data are summarized monthly (Appendix VIII) and annually (Appendices I-V). Three specialized servicing kits have been developed in "back-pack" form to assist in servicing the stations, all of which are located varying distances from roads. The kits include all the necessary forms, charts, SOil-sample bags, clip boards, spare parts, etc., to properly meet all servicing needs. CLIMATIC ENVIRONMENT Findings: Five environment measurement stations have been installed. on each of five deer-range study location. Station 1 (Hewlett Gulch -6,400') represents the lower-winter range area; station 2 (Kelly Flats -7,000') the middle-winter; station 3 (Sevenmile Creek -- 8,120') the upperwinter; and stations 4 (Little Beaver Creek -- 8,940' and 5 (Crown Point 10,320') the transitional and summer ranges •. With the exception of the summer range station (Crown Point), all stations were in operation by January 1, 1961. The summer range station was installed during June of 1961. All have been in continuous operation since the dates of establishment. Data recorded weekly on each of the five altitudinal levels include: continuous air temperature and relative humidity, maximum and minimum soil temperature, average wind velocity, wind direction, precipitation, soil moisture, snow depths on four contrasting slope exposures, snow and crust type classification, and supplementary notes regarding wind gust velocity, depth of snow over the soil temperature box, condition of surface soil, and type and extent of cloud cover. Appendices I-V present in condensed form the large mass of raw data collected at each environment measurement station. The factors measured are summarized and presented in tabular form only. The value of the data lies in its eventual use as an interpretive aid as related phases of the deer study become more advanced or completed. The data summarized in the annual sheets should not be interpreted as "regional" or "standard" weather observations in the sense of Weather Bureau determinations. The environmental measurement station locations and �7 -4- methods of instrumentation were chosen to characterize the environment in which deer exist and on which studies relating to deer ecology are presently being carried out. Results may not necessarily reflect regional climate or be directly comparable to standard weather observations. Acknowledgements: The Institute of Arctic and Alpine Research, University of Colorado, gave valuable advice concerning the orientation,.establishment, and operation.of the environmental measurement stations. Institute personnel have been generous with both time and counsel. Several student assistants have aided in the weekly reading of the stations. These include: Thomas Hakonson, Doyle Markham, Lewis Nelson, William Jones, and Don Minnick. LITERATURE CITED Institute of Arctic and Alpine Research. 1958. Servicer's Manual: A summary of the procedures to be used in collecting certain data from environment measuring stations. University of Colorado, Boulder, 8 pp. U. S. Forest Service. 1953. Avalanche Washington, 146 pp. (mimeo). handbook. U. S. Govt. Ptg. Off., U. S. Weather Circular Bureau. 1955. Instructions for climatological observers. B, Ed. 10, U. S. Govt. Printing Off., Washington, 70 pp. Prepared D~e~a_n~E~._M_e_d~in _ ~,~JuR~D~!ula~r~_\~/+, __ ·I~L~).fu)~5~ _ Date by Approved by __~W~a~y~n~e~W~.~S~a~n_d_f~o_r~t __~ __ Chief, Game Research Ferd C. K1einschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �APPENDIX I Deer Ecology Investigations - Cache la Poudre River Drainage, Colorado - Annual Summary of Environmental Data Station No. 1 Area Hewlett Gulch Elevation 6,440' Year 1963 Temperature Air, of.· Temperature Soil, of., 5-7 In. Depth Re1. Hum.,% Soil Moist.,% Dry Wt. Mean Mean Mean of Mean Mean Mean of Mean of 5-7 In. Depth Precip., Daily Daily Daily Weekly Weekly Weekly Daily Mean of Weekly Inches Honth Max. }lax. Nin. Min. Max.& Min. Nax. Max. Nin. Min. Max.& Min. Max.& Mirt. Determinations Water Jan. 56 37 -26 9 24 42 37 18 24 30 58 7.6 0.93 Feb. 64 47 - 3 25 36 50 48 30 33 41 51 7.7 0.38 Mar. 70 46 8 25 35 60 46 32 35 40 53 10.6 2.00 Apr. 72 56 24 34 45 65 62 40 42 52 53 7.6 2.65 Hay 79 70 36 46 58 76 73 46 50 62 55 6.3 0.09 June 90 76 43 53 65 87 78 53 57 68 50 10.3 2.93 July 94 84 49 58 71 89 87 66 68 77 52 5.3 0.45 Aug. 91 77 50 55 66 83 80 60 61 71 64 7.8 2.06 Sept. 87 75 42 51 63 86 79 52 58 69 54 9.6 2.20 Oct. 80 66 25 44 55 74 69 37 52 61 44 6.8 0.48 Nov. 67 53 22 32 42 56 53 35 39 46 45 7.3 0.17 Dec. 60 42 - 2 21 32 48 42 28 32 37 51 7.1 0.35 Year 94 61 -26 38 49 89 63 18 46 54 52 7.8 14.69 ~ InstruThermograph (Bourdon Tube) Maximum and Minimum Thermometers Hygrograph Oven Dry Nethod 8-inch I ments & (Weather Bureau Type) (Hair) Precip. l-lethods .. ... .. Ga e Wind Snow Depth, Ft. Total Mean Predominant Maximum North Exposure .South Exposure Draw Ridge Top Nonth Hiles Velocity,mph. Direction Recorded Gus·t,mph. Max. Nin. Mean Nax, .Min. Mean' Max, Nin. Nean Nax, Min. Hean 4.,02 Jan. 2991 N-NE 10 0.6 0.0 0.28 0.8 0.0 0.30 0.7 0.0 0.47 0.7 0.0 0.28 Feb. 2219 3.30 E-SE 11 0.1 0.0 0.02 0,0 0,0 0,00 0.2 0.0 0.03 0.0 0.0 0.00 Nar. 2213 2,97 2,6 0,0 0.78 1.7 0,0 0,30 1.9 0.0 0.65 1.7 0.0 0.47 W-NW 10 April 2873 3.99 SW 28 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0,00 0.0 0.0 0.00 Hay 0,0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 2337 3.14 E-SE 38 June 3,11 S-SE 2242 32 0.0 0.0 0,00 0.0 0,0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0,00 July 2264 3.04 S-SW 25 0.0 0,0 0,00 0.0 0.0 0,00 0.0 0,0 0.00 0.0 0,0 0.00 Aug. 2,29 1704 E-NE 26 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0,0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0,00 Sept. 1810 18 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0,0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 2.51 S-SE Oct. 1493 2.01 S-SE 18 0.0 0,0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0,0 0.0 0,00 0,0 0,0 0,00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0,0 0.0 0.00 sw 10 Nov. 1469 2.04 SW Dec. 0.3 0.0 0.07 0.4 0.0 0.07 0:5 010 0.15 0.5 0.0 0,07 1938 2.67 25 SE-SW 38 2.6 0.0 1.7 0.0 1.9 0.0 1.7 0.0 Year 25603 2.92 Dwyer Wind Totalizing Instruments & Anemometer Vane Wind Snow Stakes Hethods C3-cup) Meter - - o: �APPENDIX II r:.t) Deer Ecology Investigations - Cache la Poudre River Drainage, Colorado - Annual Summary of Environmental Data Station No. 2 Area Kelly Flats Elevation 71000' Year 1963 TemEerature Air, OF. TemEerature Soil, °F" 5-7 In. DeEth Rel. Hum. 1% Soil Moist.,% Dry Wt. Nean Mean Mean of Mean Mean of Mean Mean of 5-7 In. DeEth Precip. , Daily Daily Daily Weekly Weekly Weekly Daily Mean of Weekly Inches Honth Hax. Hax. Hin. Min. Hax.& Hin. Hax. Hax. Hin. Hin. Max.& Min. Hax.& Hin. Determinations Water Jan. 53 34 -30 11 23 37 31 15 22 26 54 7.1 1.14 Feb. 60 22 32 40 36 42 30 32 34 - 8 52 9.6 0.62 l'larch 64 42 20 31 2 48 39 31 33 36 57 9.9 1.55 April 20 30 72 54 42 59 55 37 40 56 47 5.9 0.31 (,-lay 77 67 33 40 53 68 63 48 50 56 57 3.8 0.72 48 61 June 87 74 37 70 63 50 54 59 51 7.7 2.54 July 94 83 44 55 69 64 0.68 73 62 68 52 3.6 77 Aug. 85 45 52 64 56 65 66 11.6 75 79 74 55 3.73 Sept. 82 42 48 61 53 56 66 59 7.0 2.00 74 78 75 66 30 Oct. 23 42 54 67 50 4.4 0.41 77 72 47 57 64 40 43 0.10 Nov. 52 19 29 55 52 32 37 44 5.1 30 48 43 30 36 0.35 Dec. 58 50 20 27 52 5.2 - 3 I 14.15 35 47 79 56 15 43 50 54 6.7 Year 94 59 -30 0'\ I Oven-Dry Hethod 8-inch Haximum and Hinimum Thermometers Hygrograph Thermograph (Bourdon Tube) Instru(Weather Bureau Type) (Hair) Precip. ments & Oa ze H~th_ods. Wind Snow DeEth! Ft. Ridge Top Draw Predominant Maximum North EXEosure South EXEosure Total Hean Direction Recorded Gust!mEh. Max. Hin. Nean Hax. Hin. Mean Hax. Min. Hean Max. Min. Mean Honth Miles Velocity!mEh. NE 12 0.9 0.0 0.45 0.7 0.0 0.20 0.8 0.0 0.37 0.9 0.0 0.25 Jan. 5323 7.15 E-NE 0.2 0.0 0.06 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.1 0.0 0.03 0.0 0.0 0.00 22 Feb. 3882 5.78 ·5.14 NW-NE 30 2.0 0.0 0.71 1.4 0.0 0.24 1.6 0.0 0.54 1.4 0.0 0.31 March 3822 SW 44 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 4103 5.70 April NE 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 42 Hay 3534 4.75 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 48 0.0 E-NE June 3335 4.63 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 SW 0.0 42 0.0 4.60 July 3425 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 SW 30 0.0 0.0 3.66 Aug. 2725 0,0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.00 50 0.0 0.0 0.0 NE Sept. 2964 4.12 0,0 0,0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0,0 0.00 0.00 0.0 20 0.0 E 3028 4.07 Oct. 0,0 0,00 0.0 0,0 0.00 0.0 0,0 0.00 0,00 0,0 0.0 SW 0.0 28 Nov, 4.52 3257 a 11 a a{± a 3 a 0 a 08 o 3 o a o O{± a {± {±a a 3 a a a a {±183 5 62 SH De!::, 1,6 0.0 1.4 0.0 1.4 0.0 SW 50 2.0 0.0 4.98 Year 43581 Wind Dwyer Totalizing InstruSnow Stakes Wind Anemometer Vane ments & Meter Methods (3-cup) �APPENDIX III Deer Ecology Investigations - Cache 1a Poudre River Drainage, Colorado - Annual Sunrrnaryof Environmental Data Station No. 3 Area Sevenmile. Creek Elevation 8)120' Year 1963 TemEerature Air) OF. TemEerature Soi11 of. 1 5-7 In. DeEth Re1. Hum.z% Soil MOist.,% Dry Wt. Nean Nean Mean of Mean Mean Mean of Mean of Precip., 5-7 In. DeEth Daily Daily Daily Weekly Weekly Weekly Daily Mean of Weekly Inches Nonth Hax . Hax. Nin. Nin. Max.& Nin. Nax. Max. Min. Min. Max.& Min. Max.& Min. Determinations Water Jan. 50 27 6 -31 17 40 34 19 25 29 62 7.5 1.96 Feb. 59 38 20 29 45 42 29 - 9 31 36 60 9.6 0.93 HaT. 58 40 2 19 56 30 43 31 33 38 58 1.17 9:9 Apr. 68 49 28 19 38 60 57 35 37 47 60 7.1 1.28 Hay 63 74 29 37 50 67 65 42 47 56 56 4.6 0.55 June 84 69 36 45 57 77 71 47 51 61 54 6.4 2.86 July 88 77 43 52 65 81 77 58 59 68 56 8.0 3.33 Aug. 82 71 45 50 60 74 71 53 63 54 67 10.5 4.37 Sept. 80 70 39 47 58 70 72 52 54 62 6.6 59 1.76 22 40 Oct. 75 63 51 70 66 32 48 57 51 3.1 0.34 Nov. 60 49 18 29 39 55 52 35 38 45 45 3.8 0.11 Dec. 54 36 19 27 48 43 29 31 37 52 - 8 3.0 0.55 I Year 88 54 33 -31 43 81 58 19 42 50 57 6.7 19.21 ~ Thermograph (Bourdon Tube) Hygrograph InstruHaximum and Minimum Thermometers Oven-Dry Hethod 8-inch ments & (Hair) (Weather Bureau Type) Precip. Nethods Ga e Wind Snow DeEthz Ft. Total Nean Predominant Maximum Draw North EXEosure South E~osure Ridge TOE Honth Miles Ve1ocitYzmEh. Direction Recorded Gus.tz mEh. Hax. Hin. Mean Max. Nin. Mean Max. Min. Nean Max. Nin. Mean 4621 Jan. 6.21 E-NE 10 1.2 0.3 0.68 1.5 0.1 0.53 1.5 0.2 0.65 0.9 0.1 0.36 Feb. 3290 E-SE 24 1.3 0.0 0.50 1.4 0.0 0.13 1.3 0.0 0.26 0.3 0.0 0.07 4.90 Mar. 3037 4.08 W-SW 28 2.4 0.0 1.00 2.4 0.0 0.37 2.4 0.0 0.48 2.0 0.0 0.42 SW 36 Apr. 3169 1.1 0.0 0.20 0.3 0.0 0.05 0.4 0.0 0.06 0.2 0.0 0.03 4.40 Hay SE-NE 2342 3.15 20 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 June 3.27 SE-SW 20 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 2357 16 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 July S-SE 1870 2.52 SE-SW 18 0.0 0.0 0.06 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 O.CO 0.0 0.0 0.00 Aug. 1518 2.03 SW 20 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 Sept. 1983 2.76 30 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 Oct. 2416 3.24 S-SE SW 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 4,40 28 Nov. 3165 SW 5.30 28 0.5 0.0 0.17 0.7 0.0 0.13 0.7 0.0 0.17 0.4 0.0 0.12 3786 Dec. 2.0 0.0 2.4 0.0 36 2.4 0.0 2.4 0.0 SE-SW Year 33554 3.83 Wind Dwyer Totalizing InstruSnow Stakes Wind Vane Anemometer ment & !'"'~ Meter Hethods (3-cup) :;) �;"'~ , :cn~ APPENDIX IV Deer Ecology Investigations - Cache 1a Poudre River Drainage, CO-lorado - Annual Summary of Environmental Data Station No. 4 Area Little Beaver Creek Elevation 8 940' Year 1963 TemEerature Air of. TemEe rature Soil z OF.! 5-7 In. DeEth.. ReI. Hum. 2 % Soil MOist.,% Dry Wt. Nean Nean Nean of Nean Nean Nean of Nean of 5-7 In. DeEth Precip. , Daily Daily Daily Weekly Weekly Weekly Daily Nean of Weekly Inches Honth Hax. Hax. Hin. Min. Max.& Min. Max. Hax. Nin. Min. Ma x.&. M'in.;. Max.& Min. Determinations Water Jan. 50 28 -28 7 18 31 30 23 26 28 76 8.3 l.62 Feb. 58 39 19 29 33 33 - 7 29 30 32 69 13.6 0.83 Har. 55 39 17 28 - 1 47 36 30 31 65 33 9.8 l.48 Apr. 64 47 15 25 36 54 51 32 34 42 64 10.4 0.79 Hay 73 62 26 36 49 67 64 38 43 53 57 0.48 7.7 June 82 67 36 44 56 70 43 79 48 59 57 8.2 3.34 July 88 39 75 49 62 83 78 52 66 55 61 4.6 2.62 Aug. 66 71 41 46 56 66 71 48 50 58 73 7.2 7.03 Sept. 67 75 35 45 56 69 72 47 49 68 59 7.4 2.24 Oct. 61 72 17 38 67 62 49 33 60 44 53 5.7 0.31 Nov. 60 49 14 26 37 51 48 32 34 41 51 4.8 0.23 Dec. 36 54 26 36 -12 15 43 22 26 31 62 4.5 0.80 I Year 53 88 31 42 83 39 46 64 -28 54 22 7.7 21.71 OJ InstruThermograph (Bourdon Tube) Naximum and Ninimum Thermometers Hygrograph Oven-Dry Method 8-inch I ments & (Weather Bureau Type) (Hair) Precip. Hethods Ga e Wind Snow DeEth! Ft. Total Nean Predominant Haximum Draw Ridge TOE North E?EEosure South E!920sure Honth Niles VelocitYl mEh. Direction Recorded GustzmEh. Ha x , Hin. He an Max. Min. Mean Max. Hin. Mean Max. Nin. Mean NE-SE Jan. 2818 3.81 14 l.3 0.2 0.63 2.0 0.0 0.44 1.1 0.0 0.61 0.9 0.0 0.24 SW Feb. 1876 10 l.3 0.3 0.79 l.9 0.0 0.35 l.2 0.0 0.42 0.9 0.0 0.14 2.78 Har. W 2247 3.01 12 2.2 0.0 l.17 2.9 0.0 0.55 2.2 0.0 0.74 l.6 0.0 0.47 SE-SW Apr. 2097 12 l.0 0.0 0.16 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.4 0.0 0.01 2.92 SW Hay 1540 2.08 12 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 June 1616 SW-SE 12 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 2.24 SW-SE 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 July 1130 1.52 9 16 l.12 SW-SE 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 Aug. 835 Nlv-NE 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 l.50 9 Sept. 1076 E 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 1.71 9 Oct. 1271 S 20 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 Nov. 1825 2.53 SE-E 12 0.4 0.0 0.15 0.3 0.0 0.07 0.7 0.0 0.14 0.3 0.0 0.06 Dec. 1914 2.65 1.6 0.0 2.2 0.0 SE-SW 20 2.2 0.0 2.9 0.0 Year 2.31 20245 Dwyer Wind Ins t ruTotalizing Wind Anemometer Vane Snow Stakes ments & Hethods (3-cup) Heter l - - - �APPENDIX V Deer Ecology Investigations - Cache la Poudre River Drainage, Colorado - Annual SunnnaryofEnvirorunental Data Station No. 5 Area Crown Point Elevation 10,320' Year 1963 .'" Temperature Air, of. Temperature Soil, of., 5-7 In. Depth ReI. Hum.,% Soil Moist.,% Dry Wt. Hean He an Hean of Mean Mean Mean of Mean of 5-7 In. Depth Precip. , Daily Daily Daily Weekly Weekly Weekly Daily Mean of Weekly Inches Hanth Hax. 1-lax.Nin. Hin. Hax.& Nin. Max. Max. Min. Min. Max.& Min. Max.& Min. Determinations Water Jan. 40 -30 28 24 26 8.8 2.69 Feb. 48 -14 30 27 28 9.4 1.55 }~r. 48 - 4 32 28 30 9.6 1.34 Apr. 54 8 32 31 32 13.5 1.62 Nay 62 52 22 32 42 51 46 31 34 40 60 18.7 0.55 June 76 60 31 40 50 63 56 36 40 48 58 15.7 3.17 July 80 69 43 47 58 67 63 48 49 56 58 13.0 2.14 Aug. 74 60 38 43 52 63 60 45 47 54 71 15.3 5.37 Sept. 67 60 32 41 50 60 57 40 44 51 65 13.2 1.82 Oct. 63 54 14 34 44 54 50 32 49 45 58 11.5 0.55 Nov. 46 37 8 22 29 37 33 25 28 31 61 12.4 0.45 Dec. 41 26 -16 11 18 30 24 27 63 11.7 1.07 Ye~r 80 -30 67 24 39 12.7 22.32 ~ --- - I InstruThermograph ,bourdon Tube) Haximum and Minimum Thermometers Hygrograph Oven-Dry Hethod8-inch ments & (Weather Bureau Type) (Hair) Precip. .Gage Hethods Hind Snow Depth, Ft. Total Hean Predominant Haximum North Exposure South Exposure ,- !\fulDraw Ridge Top Honth Hiles Ve1ocity,mph. Direction Recorded Gust,mph. Max. Hin. Mean Ha x, r-fin. Mean Hax~iLJ;1i.n. Mean Max. Min. Mean Jan. 1785 2.40 H-SH 12 3.0 0.5 2.42 2.8 2.0 2.47 2.8 '1.8 2.35 4.1 1.5 2.78 SW Feb. 1319 l. 97 II 3.8 1.0 2.81 3.1 2.4 2.77 3.5 2.1 2.89 4.5 l.8 2.99 Mar. SW 6 ll81 l. 59 3.6 0.6 2.75 2.6 2.1 2.39 3.4 1.8 2.77 4.6 1.3 2.91 SE Apr. 1280 1.78 8 3.7 0.4 2.69 2.7 1.7 1. 97 3.6 1.8 2.57 4.0 0.8 2.55 Hay 1044 SW-SE 7 3.5 0.0 l. 08 2.1 0.0 0.42 3.6 0.0 0.13 3.4 0.0 0.93 l.45 18 June 1019 l. 41 SW-S 0.7 0.0 0.01 0.0 0.0 0.00 1. 3 0.0 0.08 0.4 0.0 0.01 July 650 SE-SW 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.87 9 Aug. 0.36 SW-SE 8 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 269 S 10 Sept. 807 1.12 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 ll06 l.48 S-SE 8 0.1 0.0 0.02 0.1 0.0 0.01 0.1 0.0 0.01 0.1 0.0 0.01 Oct. 16 SE-SW 0.4 0.0 0.25 0.4 0.0 0.11 0.5 0.0 0.22 0.5 0.0 0.23 Nov. 1431 l. 99 W-SW 10 l.0 0.5 0.87 l.1 0.8 0.89 l.2 0.8 1.01 l.7 0.6 0.98 Dec. 1579 2.19 SE-SW 18 3.8 0.0 3.1 0.0 3.6 0.0 4.6 0.0 Year 13470 1.54 Dwyer Wind Totalizing InstruVane Hind ments & Anemometer Snow Stakes Hethods Meter C3-cup) i I i :c,~ :;_"J �-·;J.CIAPPENDIX Standard VI Snow Terminologyl! SNOW A. New: Snow falling or freshly fallen. 1. Dry: Fell at temperatures 5 degrees or more below freezing. Either refuses to pack or disintegrates if squeezed in the hand. a. Powder: Crystalline. (1) Fine: Similar to whole wheat flour. (2) Medium: Similar to bran. (3) Coarse: Similar to corn flakes. b. Granular: Irregular non-crystalline, sandy. (1) Fine: Similar to fine sand. (2) Medium: Similar to corn meal. (3) Coarse: Similar to coarse ground coffee. c. Pellet: Round but irregular and rough finished. (1) Fine: Similar to birdshot. (2) Medium: Similar to BB shot. (3) Coarse: Similar to tapioca. 2. Damp: Fell at temperatures close to freezing - thawing. Packs readily in hand but will shatter. Very sticky. a. Flake: Packs very firmly. b. Granular: Hail: Frozen, slick-surfaced, globular. c. Fell at temperatures above freezing. Snowball packs Wet: 3. firm and becomes wet and slippery on surface. Water can be squeezed out with added pressure. Coarse and soggy. a. Flake: b. Granular or sleet: Melts on contact except with other snow. Coarse and soggy. c. Hail: Slush: Extreme form of wet snow,. melts on contact. d. B. Old: Snow which has settled or which has been packed. 1. Old powder: Includes all types of dry snow. Will not form snowball. 2. Old damp or wet: Same test as for new snow. 3. Windpack: Snow jnade finn by wind, not' crusted or slabbed. a. Dry: Brittle. b. Damp: Stiff like cake batter. c. Wet: Slushy on the surface. 4. Corn: Damp or wet. A coarse textured snow similar to rock salt, the product of repeated thawing and freezing. 5. Slush: Drips water when held in hand. SNOW CRUSTS A. Form. 1. Breakable: Will not support weight of 160 lb. man on foot. 2. Unbreakable: Supports weight of 160 lb. man on foot. 3. Variable: Breakable and unbreakable crusts interspersed. B. Types. 1. Wind crust: Forms by wind blowing across or against a slope. Rippled, non-reflecting surface. Strong bond to undersurface. Fractures locally. �-11- APPENDIX VI (Continued) 2. 3. 4. 5. Wind Formed by wind action, particularly on lee slopes. Snow is under tension; has poor bond to undersurface. Fractures readily and extensively. May be soft or hard. Smooth, chalky surface. Sun crust: Light, thin, polished. Formed by strong sun action for a short period followed by freezing. Common crust: Rough, granular surface. Formed by freezing and thawing. Becomes corn snow eventually. Slush forms under high temperatures. Icy crust: A slushy surface frozen. 11 Modified slab: from U. S. Forest Service. (1953). �ApPENb1x VII -12DEER ECOLOGY INVESTIGATIONS ENVIRONMENTAL DATA RECORD FORM (Page 1) Installation Station No. Week Date Time Observer(s) Area Prev.Read.Date Current Weather: Temperature Trend Visibility Precipitation Clouds (Cover, kind, etc.) Additional Remarks ---------------------- --------~-- ~~--------------------------------- TEMPERATURE: REL. HUMIDITY: Pres.Temp.Min.Therm. OF Pres.Temp.Hygro. OF Psychr.Wet Bulb OF, Dry Min.Th. OF, Max~Th. Mean Therm. Temp. Min.Hygro.Temp. 0F,Max. Mean Hygro.Temp. Pres.Soil Temp.(Min.Therm.) Soil Min.T. OF, Soil Max.T. Mean Soil Temp. Remarks Pres.Psychr.R.H. Pres.Hygro.R.H. Min.Hygro.R.H. Remarks OF OF OF OF OF OF OF OF ----------------------------~ wnm: %(Calc.below) % %,Max.Hygro.R.H.__ % --------------------------------- PRECIPITATION: Precip.G. Now lbs. Prevo Lbs , Total (wk.) lbs. Total Inches (wk.) -"..".--------Reset Lbs , Remarks oz. oz. oz. ~----------- -------- oz. Instantaneous Wind Vel.-Max. Instantaneous Wind Vel.-Min. Anemom~Miles: Now Prevo Total Miles (wk.) Ave. Vel. (wk.) Wind Direction~ Wind Characteristics & Remarks mph mph . --------------------------------- -------~ mph _ ---- SOIL MOISTURE AND SNOW COVER: Soil Moisture (5" - 7" ) .Condition Soil Surface ~ ---------------- . Dep t h Snow Over Soil Tube_.,..-- ~ __ ft. Conditlon Snow Over Soil Tube --------- CALCULATION SPACE AND REMARKS: Remarks Psychro. Calculations: Trial No. 234 6 I 5 WB.· DB. OF Final Calc.R.H. % (enter under Pres.Psychr.R.H. under REL.HUM.above) Servicing Information: _ ---------------------------------- PRECIP. GAGE CALCULATIONS: Lbs , Reading Now: Reading Previous: Difference: ANEMOM. CALCULATIONS: Oz. ~~~ ~ Miles Reading Now: Reading Previous: Difference: (Use Back of Form for Additional Remarks) In. I -----~----4-----_ �1..6 APPENDIX VII (Continued) -13DEER ECOLOGY INVESTIGATIONS ENVIRONHENTAL DATA RECORD FORM (Page 2) Snow Station No. Date Preliminary Remarks Week ---------- AreaTime ~----------------~~--~~-----~----------------Observer(s) ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Stake Number North South Ridge Draw 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Totals Mean Time Read ~- -L Snow Designation Crust Designation REMARKS North Exposure: South Exposure: _ ~------------------------------------------------------------ Draw: Ridge: _ ~---------- __------------------------------ �APPENDIX VIII i.,,~ , ,'aJi Deer Ecology Investigations - Cache la Poudre River Drainage, Colorado - Monthly Summary of Environmental Data Station No. Day Area Temp. Air, 0F. Ma."'t. Min. Mean Elevation Relative Humidity, % Max. Min. 'Mean Month Relative, Tempo Air. of. Humiditv. % Max. Min. }1ean Max. Min. Mean Temp ••Soil, of. 5"7 in. Depth Maxe Min. Mean (Page 1) Year Precip., Inches Water _ Soil Moisture '70 Dry Wt. 5-7 in. Depth 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Month Month Mean Instruments & Methods I +- Mean of (Bour dot Max. & - Tube) Min. Thermograph Hygrograph Mean of Max. & (Hair) Min. Thermograph (Bourdon Tube) HygroMean graph of Daily Means ~(Hair) Mean of Daily Means Max. and Min. Thermometers (Weather Bureau Type) 8-inch Non-recording Precipe Gage Moisture Determination Balance - �APPENDIX VIII ~vontinued) Deer Ecology Investigations - Cache la Poudre River Drainage) Colorado - Monthly Summary of Environmental Data Station No. Day _ Area Elevation Wind Mean ~nstant.Instant.DirecNean Depth, ft. Total Vel. }lax. Min. North tion South mph mph Miles mph Exposure Exposure Draw Year -------- Snow Type Classification NorthExposure South Exposure Ridge Draw Snow Crust Snow Crust Snow Crust Snow Crust Ridge ! 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 89 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Month Month Mean Instru- Totalizing ments & Anemometer (3-cup) Methods Month (Page 2) I , I 1 I , - I f-' - I .V1 I I I , - , ,) ::.. Dwyer Wind Meter Wind Vane Snow Stakes U.S.F.S. Avalanche Handbook ~£ ��January, BDOW022692 :._ . '. .", ..": >', .. JOB COMPLETION REPORT .. .. ' RESEARCH PROJECT S~GMENT ',!', ' , " , ,'S~ate'of' " ,COLORADO An Ecological Investigation of the . Cache la Poudre Deer Herd, Colorado Pro j ect No. _;.;W_-.=.1..;;.,0=-5-,..;R;.;.-_4;..' _ . ....... Work Plan ~ ...;3~ Job No. ~ __ Environmental Studies Vegetative Analysis --~3~-_---- ... ,-.'" " Period Covered:' January, 1963 - December, 1963. Persomiel: . . ... ':. . ... ...... _._._._._ ..".~_ .. .•.. _, .. _.. _ Dean E. Medin and Allen E. Anderson ." , . _' __ ~ .c-"._. __.... __ ..._._.. _ . '.' ABSTRACT Phenological development stages were observed and recorded for 27 plant species during 1963. Development was observed systematically each week at five'elevations (6,440' to 10,320') on contrasting slope eXposures (north,facing, south-facing, and no aspect). Observations were accomplished in .,. conjunction with the weekly reading of environmental stations (Work Plan 3, .Job Nci. i -- Climatic Environment). Mean annual production of three primary browse species for the 1963 growing season was estfma t ed on each of three winter-range study locations (lowerwinter, middle-winter, upper-winter) using weight estimate and double sam" p Hng methods'. c Yield estimates were made on 960 lOO-sq. ft. circular plots distributed throughout the three 'tvinter-rangestudy locations. Oven-dry mean weights of species yields with their confidence limits were as follows: Hewlett Gulch (lower-winter): True mountain mahogany Antelope bitterbrush .. '.;/'. . Kelly Flats (middle-winter) : True, mount.aLn mahogany " Ant eLope bitterbrush , :; <j_9 l~illllllilijl~l~ll~ifl1lli[~fl~~il~lrl]illlf -1 '1- .-....> .' 1965, 10.8 + 1.4 Lbs ./acre at the 90% level (N = 366). 12.0 + 3.1 1bs./acre at the 90% level (N = 366) . 3.1 + 1.1 lbs. /acre at the 90% level (N =- 299). 8.5 + 4.1 lbs./acre at the 90% level (N =-299). �20 -18- Sevenmile Creek (upper-winter): Big sagebrush 79.8 + 11.3 lbs./acre at the 90% level (N = 295). Antelope bitterbrush 19.3 ± 5.0 lbs./acre ,at the 90% level (N = 295). In 1963 only sagebrush yields compared favorably with those of 1962 (75.8 lbs./ acre in 1962 as compared to 79.8 lbs./acre in 1963). Bitterbrush declined 51 to 81 percent and mountain mahogany 27 to 69 percent depending on the study location. Utilization of the three primary browse species was determined for the winter of 1962-63 using a categorized estimate of use (0, 10, 30, 50, 70, 90) on the same plants (plots) established to estimate the 1962 yields. The average utilization percentages (by weight) of each species on each study location were as follows: Hewlett Gulch (lower-winter): True mountain mahogany Antelope bitterbrush 11.0% 11.7% Kelly Flats (middle-winter): True mountain mahogany Antelope bitterbrush 24.5% 24.7% '. Sevenmile Creek (upper-winter): Big sagebrush 8.9% Antelope bitterbrush ~- 10.0% Plant cover and composition were quantitatively described on two (Hewlett Gulch and Kelly Flats) of the five study locations during the summer of 1963. The point quadrat method utilizing both crown and basal contacts was used to estimate cover of woody and semi-woody, forb, grass and grass-like, dead woody and semi-woody, and other components of the vegetation from a height of five feet to ground surface by one-foot intervals. Litter, rock, erosion pavement, and bare soil'contacts were also recorded. Sample sizes were 366 quadrats on the Hewlett Gulch study area and 299 on the Kelly Flats area. Some of the pertinent ground cover percentages by study location are as follows: Hewlett Gulch (lower-winter): Plant Group Total woody and semi-woody Total forb Total grass and grass-like Other (fungi, lichen, moss) Total Vegetation Percent Basal Crown Basal Crown Basal Crown Basal Crown Basal Crown Ground Cover 0.89 20.85 0.25 5.42 1. 88 8.71 1.61 6.04 4.63 41.02 �-19- Kelly Flats (middle-winter): Plant GrouE Total woody and semi-woody Total forb Total grass and grass-like Other (fungi, lichen, moss) Total Vegetation Percent Basal Crown Ba sa L: Crown Basal Crown Basal Cr own Basal Crown Ground Cover 0.76 23.53 0.71 3.46 3.15 6.24 3.34 4.77 '7.96 38.00 Acknowledgements: Drs~ Meredith J. Morris and Jacob L. Kovner, Mathematical Statisticians, Rocky Mountain Forest and Range Experiment Station, gave helpful advice in the planning and analysis phases of the vegetative studi~s. Student assistants Thomas E. Hakonson, Frank Abelard, Don Minnich, Lewis Nelson Jr., Doyle Markham and William Jones aided in gathering data. Recommendations: Sununarize phenological data gathered over a 3-year period (1961-62-63) at five elevations. Contiuue determination of annual production' and utilization on each of the three winter range study locations. Complete the quantitative description of vegetation on the remaining study locations during the summer of 1964. Objectives: Technigues (1) Record the phenological development of important range forage plants on five selected study locations believed to be representative of the lower-winter, middle-winter, upper':" winter, transitional, and summer ranges of the herd. This will further our understanding of the seasonal patterns of forage use by deer at various elevational levels as evaluated by food preference studies (Hork Plan 3, Job No.5). (2) Quantitatively describe the vegetation (by vegetative type) of each of the above study locations to: (a) provide basic data on vegetative cover and composition, and to (b) aid in interpretation of deer distribution, food preference, and activity as related to food and cover. (3) Estimate the mean yield and use of important browse species on the 'Hinter range study locations to provide data relative to the effects of various population levels (Work Plan 4, Job No.1) on important seasonal food items. Used: Phenology.--Plant-development observations 'were made on 27 important forage or indicator species at five elevations. Plants observed were reasonably close to operational meteorological stations (Work Plan 3, Job No. 1) so that general environmental conditions recorded by instruments approximated that influencing the plants. Observations on weather were recorded yearlong while plant phenology data were recorded from the beginning of growth in the spring until the appearance of heavy snows in late fall or early winter. �-2D- The species observed and the elevations of associated meteorological stations are shown in Table 1. Plant development was recorded on three different exposures (N = north, S = south, NA = no aspect) if the species occurred on more than one exposure. Absence of a given species on some exposures or stations was due to its altitudinal or site limitations. Plant development stages recorded are summarized in Table 2. Individual plants of each species were staked along designated routes which we're traversed weekly. Staked plants served as guides and reminders for stage entries, but several plants were observed of each species (if present) and a general conclusion as to the plant development stage was entered on prepared forms.' Stages were entered on the field form by numbers representing the various developmental phases (Table 2). Vegetative description.--The vertical point quadrat method, originated by Levy and Madden (1933), utilizing both crown and basal contacts was1used to describe the vegetation on two (Hewlett Gulch, lower:"winter and Kelly Flats, middle-winter) of the five elevational study areas during 1963. The equipment consisted of a tubular 7/8" aluminum conduit horizontal frame mounted on 5/8" steel rod uprights. Thumb screws on the horizontal frame allowed adjustment to a height of 5 feet above the ground surface. Two small 3-inch line levels, facing at right angles, were attached to the frame for leveling the equipment in both the vertical and horizontal planes. Two sleeves with thumbscrew adjustments were welded to the bottom of the vertical uprights. The frame was positioned for reading by driving one 18" X 3/4" angle-iron stake into the ground, placing one sleeve on this stake and orientating the frame on the west side and at a right angle to the transect .line of travel. The westerly stake was then driven into the ground through the sleeve and the frame leveled with thumbscrews. After the data for a .plot had been recorded the thumbscrews were loosened and the entire frame removed leaving the stakes in permanent position. Ten guide holes 6 inches apart were drilled through the conduit frame for quadrat pin projection. Pins were·made of 3/16" carbon-tested drill rod in 6-foot lengths and sharpened to a needle point with a bevel approximately I inch long. Clothes pins were used as a brake to hold the quadrat pins at any desired height. Point contacts were recorded in two ways. All hits from a height of 5 feet to ground surface were "crown" cont ac t s and recorded by I-foot height intervals. The same plant or different ones may have been hit once or more than once. After crown contacts were recorded the pin was lowered until it struck a plant base, litter, rock, erosion pavement, or bare soil; this was called a "basal" contact. Definitions of the various categories of contacts are as follows: Ground cover. -.-The proportion of the ground surface occupied by vertical projection of live plant parts, both basal and aerial, plus that occupied by nonliving matter such as litter, rock, and dead plant parts. Crown cover.--The proportion of the ground surface occupied by vertical projection of live aerial plant parts, plus that occupied by ~onliving matter such as litter, rock, and dead plant part~. �..•. 21- Basal cover.--The proportion of the area occupied by live plant parts at the ground surface, or the area defined by the live root crown, plus that occupied by non-living matter such as litter, rock, and dead plant parts. The basal area of plants with basal rosettes was understood to be the area defined by the live ,root crown only; the rest of the live parts, were considered crown cover. Litter.--Dead organic material either lying on or projecting above the soil surface. All dead plant parts, with the exception of woody plants which were recorded by species, were considered as litter. Bare soil.--All exposed mineral soil and rock particles up to 1/8inch diameter, and well-dispersed rock particles up to 3/4-inch diameter which do not provide a continuous cover. Rock.--Stones surface. larger than 3/4-inch diameter appearing at th~ soil Erosion pavement.--Particles of rock from 1/8 to 3/4-inch diameter forming a continuous cover on the soil surface. Individual rock particles 1/8 to 3/4-inch diameter that do not form a continuous cover were classified as bare soil. Sampling of each study area was systematic. Parallel transects were established at 8-chain intervals oriented against contours with plots spaced at 2-chain intervals along the transects. Point quadrat locations were offset, 10 feet in the line direction from permanently marked plots (yellow painted angle-iron stakes) used in other phases of the study (Population Density, 'Annual Production and Utilization) to avoid disturbed vegetation. Point quadrat stakes (red painted angle-iron) were p'ermanently set for possible future re-reading. Locations of each plot were marked on an enlarged aerial photograph of each study area. Browse yield.--Production of current annual growth for the 1963 growing season was estimated for, true mountain mahogany (Cercocarpus montanus), antelope bitterbrush (Purshia tridentata), and big sagebrush (Artemisia tridentata) during the months of October-November on each of the three winter range study locations. Reference to "current annual growth" is inaccurate for big sagebrush where all current growth plus all leaves (which mayor may not have been current) were included. ' Weight estimate (Pechanec and Pickford, 1937a), double sampling (Wilm, et al., 1944; Hilmon, 1959), and regression analysis techniques described by Blair (1959) as the "Dry Weight Prediction Method" whereby oven-dry weights of forage are predicted directly from estimated green weights were used to determine actual yields. Green forage weights were estimated, by species, on permanent lOO-sq. ft. circular plots established in the design described above for Vegetative Description on each winter range study area. Annual growth on a proportion of the plots, in this case at a chosen ratio of 1:10, was first estimated, then clipped, sacked, oven-dried for at least 24 hours at 100-105 degrees C., ,and weighed. These. clipped plots were the "double sample" plots �-22- required of the technique and were used to correct any consistent bias that may have existed in weight estimation. A linear regression was calculated to define the relationship of actual oven-dry forage weight (Y) to estimated green weight (X) for each species (Blair, 1959). Several days were spent training in the weight estimate method as described by Pechanec and Pickford (1937a) for each species'until a 10-percent precision was obtained before actual sample estimates began. Dietary scales graduated to 2-grams were used during the training period. There was no further training or checking of estimates once the actual survey began. Double sample (clipped) plots were systematically selected prior to beginning the field survey and were offset a consistent distance and direction from the permanently marked plots by a 20-foot length of light chain. If one offset length'did not include any plants of the sampled species the offset process was continued in the same direct ibn until a plant or plants was included in the 100-sq. ft. sample plot area. The clipped plots were not marked and will not be included in any future sampling. All current growth below a 5-foot height was included in the weight estimates. Mountain mahogany weights were estimated without leaves, bitterbrush and big sagebrush with included leaves. Green W'eights were estimated to the nearest gram on smaller plants, and to the nearest 5 or 10 gram interval on larger plants. Oven-dry weights were recorded to the one-tenth gram. Each plant of the sampled species on the permanent weight estimate plots was tagged with an aluminum strap label for identification during utilization es- ' timates made on the same plots the following spring. Labels were marked' with both plot and plant number, e.g., B2-3 identifies the transect line (B), plot number (2), and plant number (3). Records were kept on field forms by the same identification system. Estimates were made on individual plants and summed for the entire plot which was the sampling unit. A categorized estimate of the pegree of utilization on each plant was made prior to estimating current annual growth: H heavy (over 60% utilization), M = moderate (20-60%); L = light (under 20%), N ,,;none., Browse uti1ization.--Utilization of available current annual growth was estimated for each of the three species sampled for yield determination the preceding fall using the ocular-estimate-by-average-of-p1ants method 0·£ Pechanec and Pickford (1937b). Percentage removal by weight for each plant examined was made by "use class" estimates described by Clark (1944). If utilization was not observed the plant was given a rating of zero. If the plant had been utilized it was assigned a "use class"; the classes 1 to 5 having mid range values of 10, 30, 50, 70, and 90 percent respectively. These mid range values were used to derive the weighted average (weighted by the yield of each plant as estimated the previous fall) utilization of the plot the sampling unit. Plots were averaged for an entire study area to give a mean utilization percentage for each species. Utilization estimates were made during the months of late April and May following several days of practice clipping and weighing for each species as recommended by Pechanec and Pickford (l937b). �-2.3- VEGETATIVE ANALYSIS Dean E. Medin Findings: Phenology.--Tentative forage species and phenological phases (stages) were chosen during 1961, observed on a trial basis for one growing season, and modified for application during 1962 and 1963. The choice of forage . or indicator species and developmental phases is presented in Tables 1 and 2. Recording of these data was completed during the 1963 growing season. Summarization ~s in process and unavailable for reporting at this date. Vegetative description.--Vertical point quadrat description of the vegetation was completed on two of the five elevational study areas during 1963 Hewlett Gulch and Kelly Flats. Ground cover percentages and composition of vegetative cover for each area are presented in Tables 5 through 8. Ground cover was determined by dividing contacts, both crown and basal, for the various species or categories of cover by the total number of pin drops (e.g. 3660 in a 366 plot sample). The quotient was multiplied by 100 to give the percentage. Vegetative composition, by plant groups or individual species, was determined by dividing the total basal contacts for each species or plant group by the total basal contacts for all vegetation and multiplying by 100 to give the percentage. The same procedure was used to get species composition for crown contacts. . Both areas were similar in that basal vegetative cover made up relatively small amounts of the total with large amounts of litter and rock covering the ground surface. Total basal vegetative coVer was 4.63% (1.88% grass and grass-likes, 0.25%'forb) on the Hewlett Gulch area and 7.96% (3.15% grass and gra ss'<Lfkes, 0.71% forb) on the Kelly Flats area. Litter (40.22%) and rock (27.98%). comprised a total of 68.20% of the basal ground cover on the Hewlett area with Kelly Flats showing similar results. When crown contacts were used to analyze cover the woody and semi-woody plants were the largest vegetal component. The crown cover percentages for Hewlett Gulch were: woody and semi-woody 20.85, forb 5.42, grass and grasslikes 8.71 and other (fungi, lichen, moss) 6.04. Percentages for the Kelly Flats area were: woody and semi-woody 23.53, forb 3.46, grass and grasslikes 6.24, and other 4.77. Perhaps significantly, true mountain mahogany, antelope bitterbrush, and fringed sage (Artemisia frigida) made up the largest components among the woody and semi-woody vegetation. Composition of vegetative cover (Tables 6 and 8) reflects the large woody aerial component. Woody and semi-woody plants comprised 50.98% of the crown cover composition on Hewlett Gulch and 61.82% on the Kelly Flats area. Mountain mahogany, bitterbrush, and fringed sage accounted for the largest percentages of the composition on both areas with skunkbush (Rhus trilobata), currant (Ribes cereum), and Rocky Mountain juniper (Juniperus scopulorum) a Lso important. �Sunflower (Helianthus pumilus), hairy gold aster (Chrysopois villosa), and herbaceous sage (Artemisia spp.) formed an important amount of the forb composition. Blue grama (Bouteloua gracilis), cheat grass (Bromus tectorum), needle and thread (Stipa comata), and mountain muhly (Muhlenbergia montana) were the abundant grasses. Browse yield.--True mountain mahogany, antelope bitterbrush and big sagebrush were selected for production and utilization studies. Yields of current annual growth were estimated for each of these species for the 1962 and 1963 growing seasons of the winter range study areas. Results are presented in Table 3. The oven-dry yields per 'acre listed in Table 3 are averages derived from a sample of an entire study area (each approximately 500 acres) consisting of several'vegetative types including such non-browse types as coniferous forest and grassland meadow. Perhaps the most significant results of the production estimates are two: (1) the surprisingly low total yields, and (2) the large decline in yield during 1963 as compared with 1962. High browse densities, also encompassing all the vegetative types, would lead one to expect much greater yields. For example, on the Hewlett Gulch study area there was an estimated 665 mahogany plants per acre (see 1962 Research Report) and an average mahogany yield of 14.8 pounds per acre. This gives an average of 0.022 pounds (9.99 grams) of current annual growth yield per individual mahogany plant. Mountain mahogany is the most abundant woody plant on the Hewlett Gulch study area. Having some knowledge of deer forage requirements, it doesn't take a great deal of imagination to realize, at least in a gross way, the large number of producing forage plants necessary to support a deer .popu Lat Lon . Reasons for the decline in yield from 1962 to 1963 can only be' speculations at this time. Drastic reductions in precipitation also occurred during this period. Confidence intervals listed in Table 3 were calculated using variance equations given by Cochran (1953:282) and Committee of the American Society of Range Management and the Agricultural Board (1962:249): VYR Sy2 - 2RSxy + ~2Sx2 + 2RSxy - R2Sx2 n where, Sy2 n' n rt' number of clipped plots total number of plots Sx2 = 2:~x-x)2 n-l x estimated plots Sxy = 2:{x-5Q~y-y) n-l y actual dry weight .1\ R ~ 2:x green weight of clipped of clipped plots �and Vy = A Yyr + ~ [ t 2 P2 1'2 where, = percent plots with species ='total number of plots sampled including Vyr = variance of plots with species ~ Y = mean yield of plots containing species plots without yield Sample sizes in most cases were too small in 1962 to reach a desired, precision of 20% at the 90% confidence level; Increased sample sizes in 1963 accomplished some of the desired reduction although greatly reduced yield means were sometimes not accompanied with equal reductions in sampling error. Browse utilization.--Mean utilization percentages by weight were estimated for each of the three species sampled for yield determination tlfe preceding fall (1962). Results are presented in Table 4. Kelly Flats (middlewinter range) had the highest utilization percentages (mountain mahogany 24.5%, bitterbrush 24.7%) of the three winter range study areas. Big sagebrush (8.9%) and bitterbrush (10.0%) on the upper-winter range were the least utilized. Mountain mahogany (11.0%) and bitterbrush (11.7%) on the lower winter area fell between the two extremes. Utilization data are still being processed and more interpretation criptive statistics will be included in the 1964 report. LITERATURE and des- CITED Blair, Robert M. 1959. Weight techniques for sampling browse production on deer ranges. In Techniques and methods of measuring understory vegetation. Proceedings of a Symposium at Tifton, Georgia, Oct., 1958. Southern Forest Expt. Sta. and Southeastern Forest Expt. Sta., 174 pp. Clark, I. 1944. Field comparisons in estimating percentage utilization of range forage plants by direct percentage and by "use class" estimates. Proc. Utah Acad. ~ci.~ Arts and Letters 21:7 (Abstract) Cochran, W. G. 330 pp. 1953. Sampling techniques. John Wiley and Sons, New York, Committee of the American Society of Range Management and the Agricultural Board. 1962. National Academy of Sciences, National Research Council, Publication No. 890, 341 pp. Hilmon, J. B. 1959. Determination of herbage weight by double-sampling: weight estimate and actual weight. In Techniques and methods of measuring understory vegetation. Proceedings of a Symposium at Tifton, Georgia, Oct., 1958. , Southern Forest Expt. Sta. and Southeastern . Forest Expt. Sta., 174 pp. �-26- Levy, E. B. and E. A. Madden. 1933. The point method New Zealand Jour. Agr. 46:267-279. of pasture analysis. Pechanec, J. F. and G. D. Pickford. 1937a., A weight estimate method for the determination of range and pasture production. Jour. Amer. Soc. Agron. 29:894-904. Pechanec, J. F. and G. D. Pickford. 1937b. A, comparison of some methods used in determining percentage utilization of range grasses. Jour. Agr. Res. 54:753-765. Wilm, H. G., David F. Costello, and G. E. Klipp1e. 1944. Estimating forage yield by the double-sampling method. Jour. Amer. Soc. Agron. 36: 194203. Prepared Date by Dean E. Medin Approved ~!~I~a~n~u~a~r~y~,~>~1~9~b~-~~_ by __~W~a~y~n~e~W~.~S~a~n~d~f~o~r~t~---Game Research Chief �Table 1.--Species observed and meteorological Cache la Poudre Canyon, Colorado. station elevation at which plant-development 8tation 1 Hewlett Gulch 8tation 2 Kelly Flats 6,440' 7,000' Plant Species Observed Rocky Mountain Juniper (Juniperus scopulorum) Quaking Aspen (Populus tremu1oides) True Mountain mahogany (Cercocarpus montanus) 8kunkbush 8umac (Rhus trilobata) Big sagebrush (Ar~sia tridentata) Antelope Bitterbrush (Purshia tridentata) Wax Currant (Ribes cereum) Bearberry (Arctostaphylos uva-ursi) Bush Cinquefoil (Potentilla fruticosa) Willo,v (8alix sp.) Russet Buffaloberry (8hepherdia canadensis) Blueberry (Vaccinium scoparium) Fringed 8agebrush (Artemisia frigida) Blue Grama (Bouteloua gracilis) Cheatgrass Brome (Bromus tectorum) 8pikefescue (Hesperochloa kingii) Needle and Thread (8tipa comata) Tufted Hairgrass (Deschampsia caespitosa) Bluejoint Reedgrass (Calamagrostis canadensis) 8unflower (Helianthus pumilus) Hairy Goldaster (Chrysopsis villosa) Pasqueflower (Pulsatilla ludoviciana) Therrnopsis (Therrnopsis divaricarpa) Western Yarrow (Archillea lanulosa) Heartleaf Arnica (Arnica cordifolia) Arrowleaf Groundsel (8enecio triangularis) Marshrnarigold (Caltha leptosepala) 1./ N 8 NA1:7 N 8 NA N 8 NA NA N N 8 8 NA NA 8 N N 8 8 NA NA N N 8 8 NA NA data were recorded, 8tation 3 8tation 4 8everunile Little Beaver Creek Creek 8,120' 8,940' N N 8 8 NA NA N 8 NA NA NA NA N N S S N S NA NA NA NA NA 8 8 8 8 S N N 8 8 NA N 8 8 S N 8 NA NA N N N .N 8 8 8 N S NA NA NA NA NA N NA NA NA N N N 8 8 8 NA NA NA N N NA N S NA N '8 N 8 8 8 8 N N NA NA NA NA NA S 10,320' 8 N' N N N N N 8tation 5 Crown Point N N I N S S S S s I NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 8 S NA N S N 8 NA N N N S S NA NA NA NA S S NA NA Observations on plant-development for a given species are made on three spearate exposures (N = north, S = south, NA = no aspect) if the species occurs on more than one exposure. )'. c .~_'l~ (t, �;'~,~;J :, ....••. .""" Table 2.--Plant-development Woody Species (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) stages recorded, Cache la Poudre Canyon, Colorado. Grass Species Forb Species Leaf buds swelling Flower buds swelling Leaf buds bursting Flower buds bursting Leaders elongating (6) Leafing out (7) Full leaf (8) Flowers blooming (9) Full bloom (10) Bloom over (11) Fruit forming (12) Seed ripe (13) Seed disseminating (14) Leaves drying, changing color (15) Leaves falling (16) Seed dissemination over (17) Leaves dropped (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) Growth starting Flower stalks evident Heads in boot Heads out Flowers in bloom Seed ripening Seed ripe Seed disseminating Seed dissemination over Plant drying Plant dried (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) Growth starting Flower buds evident Flowers blooming Full bloom Bloom over Fruit forming Seed ripe Seed disseminating Seed dissemination over Plant drying Plant dried I ~ I �Table 3.--0ven-dry yields per acre of true mountain mahogany, antelope bitterbrush, and big sagebrush on three winter range study location's, 1962 and 1963, Cache la Poudre Canyon, Colorado. Study Samp ling Error Mean Oven-dry Sample Size (% of mean) Species Locati.on Year Yield/Acre (lbs) (100 sq. ft. plots) Hewlett Gulch (Lowe:r-winter) Kelly Flats (Middle-winte r) True mountain mahogany (Cercocarpus montanus) Antelope bitterbrush (Purshia tridentata) 1962 1963 1962 1963 14.8 ± 3.217 10.8 ± 1.4 29.0 10.1 12.0 ± 3.1 112 366 115 366 22 13 35 26 True mountain mahogany 1962 1963 1962 1963 9.9 ± 2.5 3.1 + 1.1 43.6 13.7 8.5±4.l ± 88 299 91 299 25 35 31 48 1962 1963 1962 1963 75.8 ± 20.6 79.8 11.3 39.3 ± 14.8 19.3 5.0 88 295 88 295 27 14 38 26 Antelope bitterbrush Sevenmile Creek(Upper-winter) 1/ Big sagebrush (Artemisia tridentata) Antelo~e bitterbrush ± ± ± I 1'3 lID I Confidence intervals at the 90% level. ' ;,-<J i~ �~~~ (\j Table 4.--Winter (1962-63)utilization of true mountain mahogany, antelope bitterbrush, and big sagebrush on three winter range study locations, Cache la Poudre Canyon, Colorado. Mean Utilization (Weight) Sample Size Study Location Species Winter 1962-63 (%) (100 sq. ft. plots) True mountain mahogany Hewlett Gulch 11.0 41 (Lower-winter) (Cercocarpus montanus) Antelope bitterbrush (Purshia tridentata) 11.7 38 I !l I Kelly Flats (Middle-winter) Severunile Creek (Upper-winter) True mountain mahogany 24.5 44 Antelope bitterbrush 24.7 48 Big sagebrush (Artemisia tridentata) 8.9 56 Antelope bitterbrush 10.0 61 �-31- Table 5.--Ground cover percentages, Hewlett Gulch study area, Cache 1a Poudre Canyon, Colorado .. N = 366. July-August, 1963. Percentage Cover Basal Crown Total Under l' 1'-2' 2'-3' 3'-4' 4'-5' _ Crown Species Woody and Semi-woody Artemisia frigida Cercocarpus montanus Chrysothamnus sp. .Eriogonum sp. Gutierrezia sarothrae Jamesia americana Juniperus communis Juniperus scopu1orum Opuntia sp. Physocarpus monogynus Pinus ponderosa Prunus americana Prunus virginiana Pseudotsuga taxifolia Purshia tridentata Rhus trilobata Ribes cereum :ij.ubus strigosus Salix sp. Yucca glauca Totals Forbs Achillea 1anu1osa Anaphalis sp. Antennaria sp. Aguilegia sp. Arenaria sp ,: , Artemisia sp. Brickellia sp. Chrysopsis vi110sa Cirsium sp. Eriogonum sp. Euphorbia sp. He1ianthus pumi1us Heuchera sp. Lupinus sp. OEmothera sp. Oxytropis sp. Phacelia sp. Phlox sp. Pseudocymopterus sp. Psora lea tenuf10ra 3.39 .24 ::,.16 1.45 ·.03 .03 .38 , .'03 .03 .36 .49 .27 .05 2.08 .03 .41 .60 1.69 ,.05 .36 .03 .16 .03 .66 .52 .16 .03 .16 .03 .08 .30 .44 .11 .05 .11 .03 .05 .05 .03 .08 .05 ,3.68 1.51 .78 .11 .03 .68 .19 .11 .27 .05 .05 .03 .03 .03 .63 .08 .03 .89 .11 ,9.05 .79 .05 .08 .08 1.61 .68 .08 .05 .03 5.83 .11 .03 .38 .05 3.44 5.69 .14 .03 .38 .25 .77 2.43 .68 , I .19 .27 .08 .30 .79 2.83 1.91 .19 .16 .21 .11 20.85 .03 .03 .03 .19 .33 .03 .05 1.48 .22 .03 .05 .05 .03 1.23 .03 .03 .22 .33 .03 .03 .03 .03 .33 .03 .05 .03 .03 .03 .08 .05 1.37 .03 .05 .05 .03 1.04 .11 .22 .03 .22 .33 .03 .03 .03 �-32- Table 5.--Ground cover percentages, Hewlett Gulch study area, Cache la Poudre Canyon, Colorado. N = 366. July-August, .1963. (Continued) Percentage Cover' Basal Crown Total Species Under l' 1'-2' 2'-3' 3'-4' 4'-5'· Crown Forbs (Continued) Pulsatilla 1udoviciana Sedum SPa .Stellaria sp. Taraxacum SPa Unident. forb (Annual) Totals .25 Grass and Grasslikes Agropyron sp ;: .08 Aristida Spa Bouteloua curtipendu1a Bouteloua gracilis .79 Bromus tectorum .14 Ca1amagrostis SPa .05 Carex SPa Carex SPa Elymus triticoides ElyrriusSPa .03 Hesperochloa kingii .03 Koeleria cristata .05 .Muhlenbergia sp. .05 Oryzopsis micrantha Poa SPa Stipa comata .49 Stipa robusta Stipa SPa .03 Unident. grass (Perennia 1) •14 Totals 1.88 .14 .05 .05 .03 .76 4.68 .44 .05 .19 1. 75 2.35 .03 .46 .03 .03 .27 .19 .16 .~14 .08 .22 1.56 .08 .16 .74 o o .05 .14 .05 .05 .03 .92 5.42 o .03 .52 .05 .19 1. 75 2.46 .03 .46 .03 .03 .43 .22 .16 .14 .08 .25 .11 .16 .03 .03 .05' 1.61 .08 .22 .22 -------------------------------------------------8.25 .43 0 .03 0 8.71 Other Lichen Moss Se1aginella sp. Totals .57 .36 .68 1.61 Dead Woody and Semi-woody Artemisia frigida .03 Cercocarpus montanus .03 Jamesia americana Juniperus scopulorum Pinus ponderosa Prunus americana Prunus virginiana .5.00 .14 .14 5.28 .22 .87 .03 .16 .03 5.76 .14 .14 6.04 .76 .76 o o o .74 .19 .03 .14 .05 .14 .08 .05 .03 .03 .03 .03 .22 1.83 .03 .49 .22 .03 .03 �-33- Table 5.--Ground cover percentages, Hewlett Gulch study area, Cache 1a Poudre Canyon, Colorado. N-= 366. July-August, 1963. (Continued) Basal Species Under I' Dead Woody and Semi-woody (Continued) Pse~dotsuga taxifo1ia .03 Purshia tridentata .27 2.30 Rhus trilobata .03 .14 Ribes cereum .05 Rubus strigosus .03 Salix sp. Totals .36 3.86 Total Vegetation 4.63 27.26 Percentage Cover Crown 1'-2' 2'-3' 3'-4' .96 .03 .05 .03 .05 4'-5' .03 .05 2.03 .03 .52 .14 .08 7.76 3.68 1.54 .78 Total Crown .14 3.31 .17 .10 .03 .03 6.63 41.02 I LITTER ROCK ERO. PAVEMENT 40.22 27.98 .33 BARE SOIL 26.48 TOTALS 100.00 66.09 .03 .19 97.24 9.98 66.28 .03 4.20 1.68 ..86 -113.96 �-3L,- Table 6.--Percentage composition of vegetative cover, Hewlett Gulch study area, Cache la Poudre Canyon, Colorado. N = 366. July-August, 1963. Percentage Comgo5itiQD Crown Total Basal Under l' 1'-2' 2'-3' 3'-4' 4'-5' Crown Species Woody and Semi-woody Artemisia frigida CercocarEus montanus Chrysothamnus sp. Eriogonum sp. Gutierrezia sarothrae Jamesia americana JuniEerus conrrnunis JuniEerus scoEu1orum 0Euntia sp. PhysocarEus monogynus Pinus Eonderosa Prunus americana Prunus virginiana Pseudotsuga taxifolia Purshia tridentata Rhus trilobata Ribes cereum Rubus strigosus Salix sp. Yucca glauca Totals Forbs Achillea 1anu1osa ---AnaEhalis sp. Antennaria sp. Aguilegia sp. Arenaria sp. Artemisia spp. Brickellia sp. ChrYSoEsis vi110sa Cirsium sp. Eriogonum sp. EUEhorbia sp. Helianthus Eumilus Heuchera sp. LUEinu8 sp. Oenothera sp. OxYtroEis sp. Phacelia sp. Phlox sp. 5.29 3.53 .59 5.88 8.29 3.54 .07 .07 .94 .07 .87 1.20 1.67 .47 1.18 1.18 .59 .59 .59 .27 .67 1.94 1.54 .20 .07 19.42 .27 22.15 .13 4.95 .07 1.00 1.47 4.15 .13 .87 .07 .40 .07 1.60 1.27 .40 .07 .40 .07 .20 .27 .13 .27 .74 .13 .20 .20 3.95 1.67 .20 .13 .07 .27 .07 .94 1.07 .07 .13 .13 14.17 9.03 .27 .07 .13 .07 .20 .13 3.69. 1.94 8.42 13.78 .34 .07 .94 .61 1.87 5.94 1.67 .47 .67 .20 .74 1.95 6.96 4.68 .47 .40 .53 .27 50.98 .07 .07 .47 .47 .07 .13 3.61 .54 .07 .13 .13 .07 3.01 .59 .07 1.18 .59 .59 .59 1.76 .13 3.34 .07 .13 .13 .07 2.54 .07 .54 .80 .07 .07 .27 .54 .47 .07 .54 .80 .07 .07 ( �-35- Table 6.--Percentage composition of vegetative cover, Hewlett Gulch study area, Cache l,qPoudre Canyon, Colorado. N =·366. July-August, 1963. (Continued) Basal Species Forbs (Continued) Pseudocymopterus sp. Psoralea tenuflora Pulsatilla ludoviciana Sedum sp. Stellaria sp , Taraxacum sp. Unident. forb (Annual) Totals Under I' Percentage Cover Crown 1'-2' 2'-3' 3'-4' 4'-5' .07 .07 5.30 .33 .13 .13 .07 ~1~.~8~7 11.10 .~4~0~ 1.82 0 Grass and Grasslikes Agropyron sp. .1. 76 Aristida sp. , Bouteloua curtipenc1ula Bouteloua gracilis 17.06 Bromus tectorum 2.94 Calamagrostis sp. Carex sp. 1.18 Carex sp. Elymus triticoides Elymus sp. .59 Hesperochloa kingii .59 Koeleria cristata 1.18 Muh1enbergia sp. 1.18 Oryzopsis micrantha Poa sp. Stipa comata 10.59 Stipa robusta Stipa sp. .59 Unident. grass (Perennial) 2.94 Totals 40.60 .54 20.21 Other Lichen Moss Selagine11a sp. Totals 12.35 7.65 14.71 34.71 12.24 .33 .33 12.90 1. 87 1.87 o TOTALS 100.03 66.36 18.94 9.03 1.07 .13 .47 4.28 5.75 .07 1.14 .07 .07 .67 .47 .40 .33 .20 .54 3.81 .20 0 .13 0 .07 .07 .33 .13 .13 .07 ~2~.~2~7 12.92 1.27 .13 .47 4.28 6.03 .07 1.14 .07 .07 1.07 .54 .40 .33 .20 .61 3.94 .20 .07 .28 .40 .07 .07 .13 1.08 Total Crown o .54 21.36 o o 14.11 .33 .33 . 14.77 4.03 1.94 100.30 o .07 �-38- Table 7.--Ground cover percentages, Kelly Flats study area, Cache 18 Poudre Canyon, Colorado. N = 299•. July-August, 1963. Percentage Cover Basal Crown Total Under l' l'-2' 2'-3' 3'-4' 4'-5' Species Crown Woody and Semi-woody Artemisia frigida Cercocarpus montanus Gutierresia sarothrae Jamesia americana Juniperus scopulorum Leptodactylon pungens Opuntia sp. Physocarpus monogynus Pinus ponderosa Pseudotsuga taxifolia Purshia tridentata Rhus tri10bata Ribes cereum Ribes sp. Rosa sp. Syrnphoricarpos sp. Totals Forbs Achillea lanulosa Allium sp. Antennaria sp. Artemisia sp. Aster sp. Astragalus sp , Chrysopsis villosa Cirsium sp. Draba sp. Erigeron sp. Eriogonum sp. Geranium sp. Grindelia sp. Helianthus pumilus Heuchera sp. Lesguerel1a sp. Microsteris humilus Oxytropis sp. Penstemon sp. Phacelia heterophyl1a Potentilla sp. .37 .03 .03 .17 .03 .13 3.31 1.57 .33 .03 1. 77 .84 .20 .03 .17 .07 •10 .54 .54 .27 .60 .13 .47 4.05 1.47 .20 .20 .03 3.31 4.41 .33 .13 . .24 .27 .13 .07 .27 1.77 1.87 .67 .03 .10 .17 6.85 .07 .27 .03 .13 .37 .43 .80 .30 .27 .17 .03 .70 .54 \1.04 .94 5.95 3.71 1.33 .23 .13 .17 23.53 .76 13.20 .03 .20 .07 .•03 .13 .07 .03 .13 .03 .64 .64 .10 .17 .77 .10 .17 .77 .07 .23 .07 .03 .40 .03 .10 .03 .10 .10 .07 .17 .07 .23 .07 .03 .03 .03 .03 .17 .07 .03 ..03 2.24 .40 .03 .10 .03 .10 .10 .07 .17 �-3"1- Table 7.--Ground cover percentages, Kelly Flats study area, Cache la Poudre Canyon, Colorado. N ~ 299. July-August, 1963. (Continued) Basal Species Under I' Forbs (Continued) Pseudocymopterus montanus Scutellaria sp. Sedum stenopetalum .03 Senecio sp. Unident. forb __~.~0~3 Totals Grass and Grasslikes Agropyron sp. Agrostis alba Aristida longiseta Bouteloua curtipendula Bouteloua gracilis Bromus tectorum Carex sp. Elymus triticoides Elymus sp. Festuca ovina Hesperochloa kingii Koeleria cristata Muhlenbergia filiculmis Muhlenbergia montana Poa sp. Sitanion hystrix Stipa ~omata Stipa scribneri Stipa sp. Unident. grass (Perennial) Totals .03 .03 .03 .03 .~0~3~ 4'-5' ~ Total Crown .03 .03 .03 .03' ~.~0~3_ .71 3.46 3.46 .20 .03 .67 .03 .07 .03 1.20 .20 .57 .03 .03 .67 .03 .07 .03 1. 20 .20 .57 .03 .03 .23 .17 .03 .90 .07 .07 1.37 .20 .10 .23 .17 .17 .90 .07 .07 1.37 .20 .10 ~77 .10 .17 .03 .13 .17 .80 .13 .03 .40 .13 .17 .03 .13 .13 --~-------------------------------------------3.15 6.24 6.24 Other Lichen Moss Selaginella sp. Mushroom Totals Total Vegetation Percentage Cover Crown 1'-2' 2'-3' 3'-4' 1.04 .40 1. 87 .03 3.34 ~ 4.41 4.41 .33 .03 4.77 .33 .03 4.77 6.85 2.24 .70 .54 38.00 ! �o -:58- Table 7.--Ground cover percentages, Kelly Flats study area, Cache 1a Poudre Canyon, Colorado. N = 299. July-August, 1963. (Continued) Percentage Cover Basal Crown Total Under l' 1'-2' 2'-3' 3'-4' 4'-5' Crown Species Dead Woody and Semi-woody Cercocarpus montanus Jamesia americana Juniperus scopu1orum Physocarpus monogynus Pinus ponderosa Pseudotsuga taxifo1ia Purshia tridentata .03 Rhus tri10bata Ribes cereum .84 .37 .03 .03 .10 .10 .10 .03 .07 .03 .03 1.91 .64 .61 .54 .20 .13 .07 .03 4.19 1.34 .10 LITTER ROCK ERa. PAVEMENT 51.91 13.88 .64 13.61 .03 BARE SOIL 25.52 Totals TOTALS 99.94 1.27 .03 .03 .03 .03 2.52 .84 .74 .06 .03 5.72 13.64 .03 .03 45.50 .03 .09 8.22 2.34 .76 .57 57.39 �Table 8.--Percentage composit~on of vegetative cover, Kelly Flats study area, Cache 1a Poudre Canyon, Colorado. N= 299. July-August, 1963. Percentage Composition Crown Total Basal Under l' 1'-2' 2'-3' 3'-4' 4'-5' Crown Species Woody and Senii-woody Artemisia frigida Cercocarpus montanus Gutierresia sarothrae Jamesia americana Juniperus scopulorum Leptodactylon pungens Opuntia sp. Physocarpus monogynus Pinus ponderosa Pseudotsuga taxifolia Purshia tridentata Rhus trilobata Ribes cereum Ribes sp. Rosa sp. Symphoricarpos sp. Totals. Forbs Achillea lanulosa Allium sp. Antennaria sp. Artemisia spp. Aster sp. Astragalus sp. Chrysopsis villosa Cirsium sp. Draba sp. Erigeron sp. Eriogonum sp. Geranium sp. Grindelia sp. Helianthus pumilus Heuchera sp. Lesquerella sp. Microsteris humilus Oxytropis sp. Penstemon sp. Phacelia-heterophy1la Poutentilla sp. 4.58 .42 .42 2.08 .42 1.67 8.69 4.13 .88 .09 1.40 .70 1.58 .35 1.23 10.62 3.86 .53 .53 .09 4.65 2.19 .53 ..09 .44 .18 .79 .70 .44 .26 .35 .18 .70 4.65 4.92 1. 76 .09 .26 .44 18.00 .18 .70' .09 .36 .96 1.14 5.88 .09 . 1. 85 1.41 8.69 11.59 .88 .35' '.•62 1.40 .70 2.11 .2.72 2.46 15.63 9.74 3.52 .62 .35 .44 61.82 9.59 34.68 .42 .18 .09 .35 1.67 .26 .44 2.02 .18 .09 .35 1.67 .26 .44 2.02 .18 .61 .18 .09 1.05 .09 .26 .09 .26 ~26 .18 .44 .18 .61 .18 .09 1.05 .09 .26 .09 .26 .26 .18 .44 2.50 .42 .42 .42 .42 2.08 .83 .42 .42 �-4uTable 8.--Percentage composition of vegetative cover, Kelly Flats study area, Cache 1a Poudre Canyon, Colorado. N = 299. July-August, 1963. (Continued) Basal Speciesq Under l' Percentage Composition Crown 1'-2' 2'-3' 3'-4' 4'-5' Forbs (Continued) Pseudocymopterus montanus .09 Scute1laria sp. .09 Sedum stenopetalum .42 .09 Senecio sp. .09 Unident. forb __~.~4:2 ~.~0~9 Totals 9.19 Grass and Grass1ikes Agropyron sp. 2.50 Agrostis alba .42 Aristida longiseta Bouteloua curtipendu1a Bouteloua gracilis 9.58 Bromus tectorum 1.25 Carex sp. 2.08 E1ymus triticoides Elymus sp. Festuca ovina .42 Hesperochloa kingii 1.67 'Koeleria cristata 2.08 Muhlenbergia fi1icu1mis .42 Muhlenbergia montana 10.00 Poa sp. 1.67 Sitanion hystrix .42 Stipa comata 5.00 Stipa scribneri 1.67 Stipa sp. Uniderit. grass (Perennial) .42 Total Crown .09 .09 .09 .09 ~.~0~9_ 9.15 9.15 1. 76 .09 .18 .09 ·3.16 .53 1.49 .09 .09 1. 76 .09 .18 .09 3.16 .53 1.49 .09 .09 .61 .44 .44 2.37 .18 .18 3.60 .53 .26 .61 .44 .44 2.37 .18 .18 3.60 .53 .26 .35 .35 Totals 39.60 16.44 16.44 Other Lichen Moss Selaginella sp. Mushroom Totals 12.92 5.00 23.33 .42 41.67 11.59 11.59 .88 .09 12.56 .88 .09 12.56 TOTALS 100.05 72.83 18.00 5.88 1.85 1.41 99.97 �January, l:JGS, -41- JOB COMPLETION RESEARCH State of Project No. REPORT PROJECT SEGMENT C.:;;.O.::..:L=.:O::.:RA=D:..:O~ _ An Ecological Investigation of the W-l05-R-4 Cache la Poudre Deer Herd, Colorado Work Plan: 3 Environmental Job' No.: 5 Food Preference Period Covered: Personnel: January, D. E. Medin 1963 - December, Studies 1963. and A. E. Anderson ABSTRACT Fifty-six stomach content samples were taken during the reporting period from deer collected at elevations ranging from 5,500 to 10,500 feet. Fortyeight of the samples were from regularly collected deer and eight were from supplementary sources (road kills, predation, etc.). Collection locations were chosen to correspond with seasonal use areas. Winter collections were from wintering elevations (5,5001-9,0001); spring and fall collections were generally from winter-sUTI®er transitional areas (8,5001-9,2001), and were made during the period of seasonal movement to higher (spring) or lower (fall) ranges. Summer period collections were generally made at elevations in excess of 9,000 feet. Four deer per month are being collected regularly (Work Plan 5, Jobs 1 and 2). The 56 samples taken during the reporting period bring the total number of samples collected since the beginning of the study to 155. All stomach samples have been sorted into component or like parts, packaged, and await identification and quantification. No results are available to date. Recommendations: Continue taking a stomach content sample for botanical analysis from regularly collected deer. Take advantage 'of supplementary 'sources as road kills, wounding losses, etc., for additional samples. Sort and individually package component parts of preserved samples prior to identification. Objective: Estimate food preference by season for different elevational .ranges and vegetative types so that seasonal forage use by deer can be related to the vegetation at each elevational level under study. �-'12- Techniques Used: Four deer per month were collected from locations corresponding to seasonal use areas (Table 1). Winter collections were from wintering elevations (5,500'-9,000'); spring and fall collections from transitional areas (8,500'-9,200'); and summer collections generally from elevations in excess of 9,000 feet. A stomach content sample was obtained after a thorough mixing of the rumen and reticulum contents. Approximately one quart of material was squeezed to eliminate excess moisture, placed in a cardboard carton lined with polyethylene and partially filled with 10% formalin, tagged, and stored for sorting and analysis. Prior to sorting and packaging, the samples were washed through a set of four Tyler screens having progressively smaller mesh sizes down to a minimum 2 mm. Botanical composition of the contents of collected samples will be determined using methods recommended by Beck (1952), Julander (1952), and Martin et a1. .(1946). �FOOD PREFERENCE BY DEER IN THE CACHE IA POUDRE HERD Dean E. Medin Findings: Fifty-six stomach content samples were taken during the reporting period from deer collected at elevations ranging from 5,500 to 10,500 feet. Collection locations were chosen to correspond with seasonal use areas (Table 1). Each sample (approximately one quart) has been sorted into component species or similar plant parts (leaves, stems, fruits), packaged, and await determination of botanical composition. Results are unavailable for reporting at this date. Total samples collected since the beginning of the study, including those of this reporting period, are now 155. As an aid in estimation and interpretation of range-plant preference; sample plots are being established on each elevational study area (lower-winter, middle-winter, upper-winter, transitional, and summer ranges) to record plant composition, cover, annual production, and annual utilization (as described under Work Plan 3, Job No.3 - Vegetative Analysis). It is anticipated, also, that weather data presently being recorded at each elevational level (Work Plan 3, Job No. 1 - Climatic Environment) will elucidate forage habits both on a seasonal and short term basis. Snow depths, extent of snow-free or snow-cover periods, and temperature extremes should be of value in interpretation. Eventual preference ratings will be estimated using data from stomach analyses and range-environment evaluations. LITERATURE Beck, J. R. 1952. 16:398-399. A suggested CITED food rank index. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 1952. Forage habits of mule deer during late fall as Julander, Odell. Intermountain Forest and Range measured by stomach content analyses. 5pp. Expt. Sta., Res. Note No.2, Martin, A. C., R. H. Gensch, and C. p. Brown. 1946. Alternative methods in upland game-bird food analysis. J. Wi1dl. Mgmt. 10:8-12. Prepared Da te by D~e~a~n __E~.__ M_e_d_i_n -""J.;.:;i3-'.rc_:1 ~ ~ r y, 19 b 5 _ Approved by Wayne W. Sand fort Chief, Game Research �:,;AI ~"Ii'J Table l.--Deer sex and age, date, elevation, 'seasonal range, and vegetative type from which stomach content samples were collected, Cache la Poudre Canyon, Colorado, 1963. Es timated_V Deer Age Elevation Collection Date Sex (Year-Month) (Ft.) Seasonal Range Vegetative Type No. 80 81 82 83 014 84 015 85 86 87 88 016 89 90 017 91 92 93 1-2-63 1-9-63 1-16-63 1-23-63 1-23-63 1-30-63 2-4-63 2-6-63 2-13-63 2-20-63 2-27-63 3-1-63 3-6-63 3-13-63 3-18-63 3-20-63 3-27-63 4... 8-63 Male Male Female Female Female Female Female Male Hale Male Female Unknown Hale Female Male Female Male Female 4-7 4-7 5-7 9-7 1-7 4-7 9-8 2-8 0-8 1-8 3-8 Mature 5-9 9-9 3-9 8-9 1-9 8-10 7,100 5,700 7,700 7,000 6,500 6,300 6,700 8,000 7,600 6,000 7,700 8,000 7,500 7,600 7,400 6,800 5,500 6,900 Middle~winter Lower-winter Upper-winter Middle-winter Middle-winter Lower-winter Middle-winter Upper-winter Middle-winter 'Lower-winter Upper-winter Upper-winter Middle-winter Upper-winter Upper-winter Lower-winter Lower-winter Middle-winter 94 95 018 96 97 98 99 4-15-63 4-22-63 4-28-63 4-29-63 5-6-63 5-13-63 5-20-63 Male Female Female Male Female Female Male,. 0-10 4-10 3-10 0-10 0-11 8-11 2-11 7,200 5,900 5,700 6,300 8,000 7,900 8,200 Upper-winter Lower-winter Lower-winter Lower-winter Upper-winter Upper-winter Transitional 100 101 102 5-27-63 6-5-63 6-12-63 Male Female Male 6-11 4-0 5-0 8,400 8,000 9.100, Transitional Transitional ~unnner Bitterbrush-Mt. Mahogany Ponderosa pine-Mt. Mahogany Big sagebrush-Bitterbrush Mt. Mahogany Mt. Mahogany-Bitterbrush Ponderosa pine-Mt. Mahogany' Mt. Mahogany-Bitterbrush Big sagebrush-Bitterbrush Ponderosa pine-Bitterbrush Mt. Mahogany-Bitterbrush Big sagebrush-Bitterbrush Big sagebrush-Bitterbrush Ponderosa pine-Douglas fir Big sagebrush-Bitterbrush Big sagebrush-Bitterbrush Mt. Mahogany-Bitterbrush Mt. Mahogany-Skunkbush Ponderosa pine-Juniper-Mt. Mahogany Big sagebrush-Bitterbrush Mt. Mahogany-Juniper Douglas fir-Ponderosa pine Ht. Mahogany Ponderosa pine-Meadow Ponderosa pine-Aspen-Headow Ponderosa pine-AspenBitterbrush Aspen-Meadow-Big sagebrush Ponderosa pine-Bitterbrush Lodgepole pine-Spruce-Fit I ++I �Table l.--Deer sex and age, date, elevation, ·seasonal range, and vegetative type from which stomach content samples were collected, Cache la Poudre Canyon, Colorado, 1963. (Continued) Deer Estimatedll Collection Age Elevation No. Date Sex (Year-Month) (Ft.) Seas.onal Range Vegetative Type 103 Female 6-19-63 1-0 9,900 Summer Meadow-Lodgepole pine 104 Female 6-26-63 0-0.6 8,600 Transitional Riparian 105 Male 10,100 Sunnner 7-2-63 Lodgepole pine-Spruce 9-1 106 Female Suriuner 1-1 9,400 7-9-63 Lodgepole pine-Spruce-Fir Female 107 Sunnner 7-16-63 2-1 10,500 Spruce-Fir Male 108 Sunnner Lodgepole pine-Spruce-Fir 1-1 10,000 7-23-63 Female 109 Sunnner Spruce-Fir-Lodgepo1e pine 3-1 9,500 7-30-63 Female 110 Sunnner 10,000 8-6-63 Spruce-Fir-Lodgepole pine 4-2 Male 111 Summer Lodgepole pine-Spruce-Fir 9,400 8-13-63 1-2 Sunnner Female 019 10,100 8-19-63 Spruce-Fir-Willow 3-2 Female 112 Sunnner 10,200 8-20-63 Spruce-Fir-Willow 4-2 113 Sunnner Male Lodgepole pine-Vaccinium 9,000 1-3 9-6-63 Sunnner Male Spruce-Fir-Lodgepo1e pine 114 9,900 9-10-63 0-3 115 Transitional Ponderosa pine-Douglas fir3-3 8,100 9-18-63' Female Aspen Lodgepole pine-Aspen 9,000 Transitional Female 116 2-3 9-25-63 Female Lodgepole-Vaccinium 8,900 Transitional 117 0-4 10-1-63 Male Riparian 020 5,800 Lower-winter 10-6-63 1-4 Lodgepole pine-Aspen Transitional Female 118 8,500 1-4 10-8-63 Transitional Aspen-Limber pine 8,900 0-4 119 10-16-63 Male Mt. Mahogany 5,900 Lower-winter 120 10-22-63 Female 9-4 Ponderosa pine-Mt. Mahogany Middle-winter 7,400 121 11-12-63 Female 0-5 Ponderosa pine-Douglas fir6,700 Lower-winter 122 5-5 11-20-63 Male Mt. Mahogany 6,400 Lower-winter Ponderosa pine-Mt. Mahogany 123 1-5 11-26-63 Male Unknown 7,400 Middle-winter Ponderosa pine-Bitterbrush 021 11-30-63 Unknown 7,500 Middle-winter Bitterbrush-Mt. Mahogany Male 124 1-6 12-4-63 6,900 Middle-winter Bitterbrush 125 4-6 12-10-63 Female 8,000 Upper-winter Big sagebrush-Bitterbrush 9-6 12-17-63 'Female 126 9,000, Upper-winte_r Ponderosa pine-Sagebrush 127 12-26-63 Male 1-6 11 I +- Vl A June birth date is arbitrarily assumed for tabulation purposes. ;:~.:!~ "4] ��January,· liilimminijj---jjl--ill -4-7- JOB COMPLETION RESEARCH State of 1965 BDOW022694 REPORT PROJECT SEGMENT COLORADO ----~~~~~~--------------An Ecological Investigation of the Cache la Poudre Deer Herd, Colorado Project No: W-105-R-4 Work Plan: 4 Population Studie~ Job No: 1 Population Density and Structure Period Covered: Personnel: January, 1963 to December, Allen E. Anderson 1963 and Dean E. Medin ABSTRACT --"-- -- ---------------- '. -- Indices of mule deer density and their use of 3 winter range study areas during the winter of 1962-63 were obtained by pellet group counts on a systematic sample of 960, permanent, 100 square foot, circular plots. Sample size tests of these data indicated that there were insufficient plots on the individual study areas and their habitats to achieve the stipulated level of precision (20% of the true mean at the 90% confidence level). The only exception was the browse habitat on the Sevenmile Creek study area. Within these limitations, approximate confidence limits (at the above level precision) computed about the indices of density and use suggest the following: (1) Deer were at similar density levels on each of the three 'winter range study areas and extrapolated estimates ranged from 33-41 deer per square mile; (2) Deer use of individual habitats, bot~within and .. between study areas, differed substantially, Le., deer use of the timber habitat at Hewlett Gulch was similar to the browse habitat but wide differ.ences were found between these two habitats on the other study areas. Also, .as compared to the other study areas, deer use of the browse habitat was :markedly less at Hewlett Gulch. Indices of sumer population densities on these -three winter range study areas were computed (without confidence limits) to 6-13 deer per square mile. On the transition (Little Beaver) and summer (CrownPoint) range study areas and on those habitats where plot numbers exceed 25, maximum pellet group densities were counted on plot establishment 'withiri th~ Poriderosa Pine-Lodgepole Pine and Lodgepole Pine-fir-Spruce habitats~ respectively. Minimum densities on both study areas occurred within the Lodg~po1e Pine type. A 5-study area comparison of pellet group densities counted on plot establishment, 1962-63, show decreasing plot means and increasing variability with increasing elevation. Bitterbrush was important ·within.hahitats of maximum pellet group densities on 4 study areas, 5,800 8;7~~ leei elevation. of .. - ------------ �(~\ - 4 Q- Early and mid-winter herd strucllire samples totaling 3,874 classified deer (1961-1964), are expressed as male:fawn per 100 females and fawns per 100 mothers and interpreted on the basis of both chi square analysis and approximate 90 percent confidence limits. Mid-winter (January) female ratios were 26:100 (1962), 24:100 (1963), and 46:100 (1964) and the increase in males in 1964 wa s significant (P 2" .02). When the early (first) and mid-winter (second) sample ratios are compared, there were substantially fewer bucks in the ~id-winter sample in 1961-62 and 1962-63 but not in 1963-64. Relatively light harvests of mature males in 1961-62-63 and the extremely mild winter of 1963-64 are believed to be among the causal factors. Mid-winter fawn:mother ratios (approximated by deducting the percent of female yearlings in the adult female kill sample from the adult females recorded on the 10 sample routes) for 1962-63-64, were similar, being 96, 90, and 78 fawns per 100 mothers respectively. Mid-winter fawn:female ratios, 1962-63-64, were 73, 71, and 55 fawns per 100 females, respectively. They widened significantly (p> .02) from 1963 to 1964. There were no significant, between-elevation differences in fa\Vll: female ratios during either 1963 or 1964 but male:female ratios narrowed significantly (P ? .005) with decreasing elevation in 1964. Preliminaryassemblage of pertinent data from 3 elevational strata suggest no obvious relationships between elevation, male: female: fawn ratios, indices of population density, harvest density or kill ratios. The fawn:female ratio data must be interpreted with the knowledge of a significant (P ~ .02) difference betweenobservers in the January, 1964, sample. These findings and some possible interpretations are discussed in relation to similar data on Rocky Mountain mule deer. Recomnendations: This work should be continued through May 1965. Future analyses of herd structure samples should include climatic data from the appropriate environmental stations. The sampling procedures and analjsis of winter herd structure in a migratory mule deer population should be given high priority in planning future Department research. Acknowledgements: Mr. D. Bowden of the C.S.U. Statistical Laboratory computed the confidence limits and sample size estimations for the pellet group data and Mr. K. E. Porter computed the descriptive statistics therein. T. Hakonson, J. Hillman, W. Jones, D. Markham, D. Minnich, L. Nelson Jr., and R. Norman assisted in the pellet group counts. Messrs. Hillman and Norman did all the plot establishment and pellet group work on the Little Beaver and Crown Point study areas. The others worked with D. Medin or myself. Objectives: 1. Estimate population density on each of five study locations believed to be representative of the lower winter, upper winter, transitional, and sun®er ranges of the herd to: (a) relate density to changing environmental conditions (Work Plan 3), and (b) elucidate density~elevational relationships, particularly between years. _. �-4')- 2. Estimate sex and age structure (composition) basic inforn~tion on herd dynamics. Techniques of the population to provide Used: Estimates of Population Density and Use A systematic sample of permanent, pellet group transects were established on the three winter range study areas (Hewlett Gulch, Kelly Flats, Sevenmile Creek) during the late sunuuer and fall of 1962. Similar samples were established on the transition (Little Beaver) and sunuuer range (Crown Point) study areas during the summer 1963. On each area, parallel, north-south transects, consisting of 100 square foot~ circular plots (with their centers marked with numbered, angle-iron stakes at 132 foot intervals) were established at approximately 8-chain intervals with a steel tape and compass. The approximate initial point of each transect and the plot locations were first plotted on large-scale aerial photos. The beginning of each transect was marked with a steel fence post. The area of each plot was defined by a light chain of 5.64 foot radius revolving about a metal rod fastened to the plot stake. Plot radius was the distance along the ground surface, no compensation being made for slope. Each plot was searched twice (clockwise and counterclockwise) by a 2-man crew. The crew exchanged positions (inner and outer) when the search direction changed. Deer pellet groups were counted and either sprayed with paint or completely removed on each plot. Paint sprayers included both tree-marking guns of one- or pump oil cans of one-quart capacity. Various paints and thinners we re used including: tree-marking implement and barn of red, yellow, and orange colors thinned with either paint thinner or gasoline •. A deer pellet group was considered to be five or more fecal pellets of the same general size, shape, and appearance. Fecal pellets strewn across the plot were counted as a group if about one-half of the total, linear, strewnout distance fell within the plot; or if its midpotnt fell within the plot. When establishing the three winter range study area ·plots, "new" pellet groups were recorded separately on the basis of the relatively moist, shiny, and uncracked exterior of the individual pellets. Deer pellet groups on the plot periphery were counted if about one-half of the total group area was bisected by the end of the radius chain. G~o~ps missed on one reading but found on the next were included in the first reading totals. On each plot, slope gradient and exposure were measured with an Abney level and Brunton compass and visual estimates made of soil depth and texture categories. These data, obtained for their descriptive and interpretative value, will be presented in subsequent reports. The data were analyzed by assigning the individual. plots to strata Df previously described physiognomically and floristically similar vegetative types (Medin 1962). Hereafter, these major vegetative types will be �~ t"1_" e"" " ..__" -50- referred to as "habitats." Descriptive statistics were then computed for the mean number of pellet groups per plot for each habitat and for combined habitats within an individual study area. This analysis sufficed for the transition and summer range study areas (plot establishment - 1963) but on the three winter range study areas (plot establishment - 1962) indices of deer use and numbers with approximate estimates of reliability and sample size adequacy were computed. Deer use and numbers were expressed as pellet groups per day per acre and total deer present on the study area, respectively. The following formulae were used: Formula 1 was suggested by Dr. H. W. Steinhoff, Department of Forest Recreation and Wildlife Conservation, Colorado State University, Fort Collins. NP x 435.60 (1) P.G.D.A. = NA x D Where: P.G.D.A. NP 435.60 NA D (2) pellet groups per day per acre number of pellet groups counted constant for 100 square foot plot number of acres" number of days between the last or end date of each reading N = pA atd (Ferguson 1955) Where: N number of deer number of pellet gr oups counted a = area sampled area censused A assumed average daily defecatiort rate of 13 groups d per deer day number of days between the last or end data of each t reading p In addition to the average, daily, defecation rate above, I have made the following assumptions: (1) That the spring counts were made before the migratory deer had left the winter range. (2) That all groups were correctly identified and that a few groups were inevitably missed. (3) That the 100 square foot plot is an efficient sampling unit and valid estimates of sampling error were obtained. (4) That the deer pellet groups per day per acre is a valid index to relative deer use between habitats and study areas. Unfortunately, none of these assumptions have been experimentally verified on this, or any other study of free-ranging mule deer. Approximate 90% confidence limits were computed to be within 20% of the true mean for estimates of both deer use and numbers by the following formula (Kendall and Stuart 1961: 106). " ~ ~ I.J_.'- /2 +Jd_-"\/2 II 2 -4- �-5.1- .Where: . p , '/2 san~le number of pellet groups counted on the sample area from Normal Tables at 90% confidence is 1.645 Sample size adequacy at the chosen level of precision (20% of the true mean at the 90% confidence level) for estimating late fall, winter, and early spring use on the 3 winter range study areas was estimated by the following formula (Snedecor 1946:457). t2 s2 n = (x-m)! Where: n t sample size required tabular value of "t" at the chosen confidence level and required degrees freedom s = variance of the initial sample x mean of the initial sample m = units from the sample mean computed to be (in this case) within 20% The pellet groups counted on the 3 winter range study areas (1962-63) were also tested for independence by chi square. These tests included: be tweenstudy areas, habitats between study areas, and habitats within study areas using an R x C table (Snedecor 1946). Estimates of deer numbers on the three winter range study areas during the summer of 1963 were computed as stated above and extrapolated to very approximate density estimates. Pellet counts were so low that confidence limits were not computed. Estimates of Herd Structure Herd structure or composition as reported here is the relative proportion of males, females and fawns of unknown sex, about 6-9 months of age, sampled on the winter range (approximately 5,500-9,400 feet elevatiori) during the early winter (November) and mid-winter (January) periods. Ten, all-day walking routes established during October, 1961, sample all major habitats except the dense timber south of the Cache la Poudre r~ver. All routes are now run twice each winter (following the hunting season) by the same two observers and average about 9 miles in length. In most cases, deer were classified with either 9 x 35 or 8 x 40 binoculars. Under conditions of exceptional distance, poor light, or deer of atypical appearance, classifications were generally made, or verified by the use of 20X spotting scopes. In general, we used the classification criteria given in Table 1 of Dasmann and Taber (1956). In addition, we have found that the relatively smaller size of the white rump patch, the rather distinctive running gait, and the manner of holding the head and neck while running are often useful in distinguishing fawns from adults. Classifications were made �-52.- on both disturbed and undisturbed singles and groups. A fair proportion of the deer recorded were those driven out of cover by one observer and classified by the other observer. Observers were generally one-quarter to one mile apart and not visible to each other. To help avoid duplication, each classification and its time to the nearest minute were recorded on a prepared form (Appendix 1). The resultant data were summarized by two methods: Sunnnary Method 1 is simply a record of all deer recorded. Summary Method 2 consists of extracting from Method 1 data, all classified deer including solitary animals and only those from groups in which all deer were classified. In addition, the annual fluctuations in net productivity indices (percentages of female yearlings comprising the adult females) are considered by computing an estimate of the number of theoretical mothers from the number of adult females counted. This w~s done by subtracting the percentage of essentially non-producers (female yearlings, 16-18 months old) in the adult doe kill sample as obtained at the check station during the 1961 (23.9%), 1962 (22.4%), and 1963 (30.0%) hunting season (Anderson 1964); from the number of adult females observed and summarized by Method 2. This approximation is here called the fawn:mother ratio •. Table 1. -- Statistical description of deer pellet groups counted on plot establishment on each of the 5 Poudre drainage study areas. Study Area Surface Acres Hewlett Gulch+ Kelly Flats+ Sevenmile+ Little Beaver++ Crown Point++ 490.1 509.2 495.0 515.6 514.7 TOTALS ",;-'c + ++ Elevational Range (feet) 5,800 6,600 7,440 8,460 9,640 - 7,100 - 7,760 - 8,760 - 9,620 -11,000 2,524.6 Permanent, 100 sq. f t,', -cLr cu Lar Established summe r -fall, 1962. Established summer, 1963. r Total Total Pellet Groups Per Plot Plots~'~Groups X SD Freq. Index 366 299 295 301 299 2,104 1,502 842 364 241 1,560 5,053 5.75 5.02 2.87 1.21 0.81 5 .• 69 3.89 2.80 2.37 1.55 0.83 0.89 0.71 0.45 0.36 see Table 3 and text. The following samples were analyzed by the chi square test for independence using 2 x 2 or 2 x 3 contingency tables (P~ ~05):between-observers, betweenearly and mid-winter ratios, between-year or early and mid-winter ratios, and between-elevation comparisons of fawn: female, fawn:mother and male:female ratios (October, 1961-January, 1964).· The unpaired, unequal!: test (P~ .05) was used to compare mean group size between the early and mid-winter samples and for these samples between-years. Statistical methods follow Croxton and Cowden (1955). Where sample sizes exceeded 100, approximate 90% confidence limits were computed about the ratios (male per 100 females, fawns per 100 females, or fawns per 100 mothers) using the basic formula cited by Riney (1956) and replacing his terms with our equivalerits below. Fa per 100 Fe + (100 J (Fa + Fe) Fa ) Fe3 1~6449 �-Sl- .Where: Fa = Fawns counted Fe = Females counted NOTE: male is substituted for fawn and mother for female when the male:female or fawn:mother data are involved Results: Estimates of Population Density and Use The density of deer pellet groups counted on· plot establishment on each of 5 study areas are described statistically in Table 1. Therein, we see that on the 2,524.6 surface acres sampled by 1,560, 100 square foot, circular plots; 5,053 groups were counted, marked, or removed. Mean pellet group density and variability increased with elevation and was about 7 times greater at the lowest (Hewlett Gulch) elevational range than at the highest (Crown Point). A detailed description of sampling intensity and mean pellet group density on plot establishment is presented by individual habitat on the transition and summer range study areas (Table 2). On those transition range (Little Beaver) habitats with 25 or more plots, the Ponderosa-Lodgepole Pine habitat had the maximum densities. On the same sample size basis, the Lodgepole-Spruce-Fir habitat yielded maximum densities on the summer range (Crown Point). Minimum densities on both Little Beaver and Crown Point study areas were within the Lodgepole Pine habitat. The 1962-63 winter mean pellet groups per plot data are described statistically (Table 3) and on a mean deer use basis with approximate confidence limits in Table 4. In the latter table, computed estimates ~f sample size show that present sample sizes are grossly inadequate for each of the 3 study areas and on all habitats within those study areas except the browse habitat on Sevenmile Creek. The number of deer estimated on each of the 3 study areas during the winter of 1962-63, by habitat, and with approximate 90% confidence limits are cited in Table 5. On all 3 study areas, but including only the major habitats, 83 (70-102) deer were estimated to be present during the winter of 1962-63 and extrapolated estimates of density range from 33-41 deer per square mile. The confidence limit approximations permit the following interpretation of estimated deer density and use during the winter of 1962-63. Deer numbers were similar on each of the 3 study areas. There were substantial differences in deer use of individual habitats both within and between study areas. For example, deer use of the Hewlett Gulch timber habitat approximated that in the browse habitat but wide differences existed between these habitats on the. other two winter range study areas. Furthermore, as compared to the other 2 study areas, deer used the browse type substantially less at Hewlett Gulch. �55-- ·-54- Table 2.-- A description by the major habitats of the surface acres, sampling intensity, and the deer pellet group counts made on the 2 summer range study areas during plot establishment, summer-1963. Study Area and E1ev. Range (Ft.) Little Beaver 8460-9620 Crown Point 9640-11000 Major Habitat Surface Acres Plots Pellet Groups Per Plot Freq. Percent Percent Index Total of Total Total of Total X SD Lodgepole Ponderosa-Lodgepole Pine Aspen Mixture Aspen Willow-Meadow Grass-Meadow 153.7 29.7 92 30.5 0.82 1.23 0.41 179.8 116.1 41.1 11.4 13.5 34.8 22.4 7.9 2.2 2.6 87 75 25 11 11 28.8 24.8 8.2 3.6 3.6 2.28 0.88 0.92 0.18 -0- 4.33 1.92 1.81 0.41 -0- -- 0.57 0.45 0.44 0.18 -0- -- TOTALS 515.6 100.0 301 100.0 1.21 2.37 0.45 Spruce-Fir Lodgepo1e-Spruce-Fir LP - SF - Aspen Lodgepole Spruce-Fir-Willow Wi11ow-Meadow Alpine-Herbaceous 245.4 114.2 20.2 61.3 23.6 22.4 27.6 47.6 22.0 3.9 11.9 4.5 4.3 5.2 133 69 11 38 14 18 16 44.4 22.9 3.6 12.7 4.6 6.0 5.3 0.79 1.17 1.64 0.68 0.14 0.33 0.19 1.38 2.01 3.04 1.36 0.36 0.59 0.40 0.39 0.42 0.36 0.34 0.14 0.28 0.19 TOTALS 514.7 100.0 299 100.0 0.81 1.55 0.36 �-ssTable 3.-- A description by major habitats of the surface acres, sampling intensity, and the 1962-63 winter* deer pellet group counts on the 3 winter range study areas. Study Area and Elevation .. Surface Acres Plots++ Pellet Groups Per Plot Percent Percent Freq. Major Habitats Total of Total Total of Total Index x SD Hewlett Gulch 5,800-7,100 Timber Juniper-Browse Browse Riparian Meadow 113.3 80.4 207.2 8.9 80.3 23.1 16.4 42.2 1.8 16.4 93 58 160 TOTALS 490.1 Timber Browse Meadow Kelly Flats 6,600-7,760 Sevenmile 7,440-8,760 * ++ 0.32 0.81 0.27 -00.08 0.66 1.08 0.67 -00.28 0.23 0.45 0.19 49 25.4 15.8 43.7 1.6 13.4 100.0 366 100.0 0.34 0.74 0.22 196.1 293.3 19.8 38.4 57.6 3.9 112 179 8 37.4 59.8 2.7 0.25 0.58 0.25 0.59 0.85 0.46 0.18 0.40 0.25 TOTALS 509.2 100.0 299 100.0 0.45 0.77 0.31 Timber Browse Riparian 140.3 317.0 37.7 28.2 64.0 7.6 84 192 19 28.5 65.0 6.5 0.20 0.58 0.26 0.49 0.91 0.45 0.17 0.39 0.26 TOTALS 495.0 100.0 295 100.0 0.45 0.81 0.32 6 -0- 0.06 The time.interval between readings as computed from the following end dates are: Hewlett Gulch, 9/19/62 - 4/30/63, 223 days; Kelly Flats, 9/12/62 - 5/5/63, 235 days; Sevenmile Creek, 9/11/62 - 5/18/63, 249 ·days. Permanent, 100 sq. ft. circular; laid out in a systematic sample of parallel lines, 8 chains apart. Plot centers are 132 feet apart as measured along the ground surface. �:.::t-; ... r. (. '. - ~:(. .~ Table 4. Estimated mean deer utilization on the major habitats on the 3 winter range study areas based on pellet group counts, winter 1962-63, with estimates of sample sizes needed (20 percent of true mean, 90 percent confidence level). Area Major Habitats Mean Pellet Groups Per Acre Per Day x 10-5 Hewlett Gulch Timber Juniper-Browse Browse Combined 25.35+ 34.92 34.19 95.88 TOTAL 95.36 Timber Browse Combined 14.76 57.99 71.92 TOTAL 72.09 Timber Browse Combined 9.96 65.71 75.78 TOTAL 77 .54 Kelly Flats Sevenmi1e + Sample Size Plots Plots Approx. 90% Needed Confidence Limits ·Present 21.02 - 31.97 29.90 - 41.96 29.10 - 41.42 77.23 - 126.55 93 58 160 311 286 122 420 828 12.15 52.06 62.09 - 18.79 65.44 85.90 112 179 291 384 248 632 7.83 59.21 65.81 - 13.68 73.81 90.25 84 192 276 394 170 564 Expressed as an absolute value this figure would be .0002535 and the same relationship holds for the rest of ~he column figures. �Table 5. '-- Estimated deer numbers by the major habitats on the 3 winter study areas based on pellet group counts, winter 1962-63. Estimated No. of Deer Study" Area Major Habitats Hewlett Timber Juniper-Browse Browse Combined 5.5 9.8 8.3 23.2 TOTAL 24. 9*~\: Timber Browse Combined 6.6 22.7 29.6 TOTAL 30.5** Timber Browse Combined 4.0 26.1 30.1 TOTAL 3L8** Gulch Kelly Flats Sevenmile Creek Total Combined 82.6 Approx. 90% Confidence range Limits* 4.6 - 6.9 8.4 - 11.8 7.1 - 10.1 18.7 - 30.6 5.4 - 8.4 20.3 - 25.6 25.6 - 35.4 3.2 - 5.6 23.5 - 29.3 26.1 - 35.8 69.9 -101. 9 TOTAL Within 20% of true value. Those units of vegetative physiognomy which had none or very few pellet groups (e.g. riparian, meadow) could not be included in the confidence interval computations but were included in the total estimate. In Table 6, the same pellet group data are subjected to chi square analysis. Pellet group counts were significantly (P> .05) different between study areas which may have partly due to the differerices in the number of pellet groups counted on individual habitats. When pellet group counts on individual habitats are compared on the same study areas, between-habitat differences were significant on each of the 3 study areas, with the maximum and minimum levels of significance at the Sevenmile Creek and Hewlett Gulch study areas, respectively. Although the chi square between-study area comparison yields results at variance with those described above, it is perhaps biased by the unequal time intervals involved. The between-habitat comparison, however, substantiates the interpretations suggested by the use of the approximate 90% confidence limits. �-58- Table 6. -- Chi square comparisons of deer pellet groups counted on the 3 winter study areas and related to the major habitats, winter- 1962-63. Computed Chi Square Value Degrees Freedom Independence of Area and Major Habitats Study Area Major Habitats Attributal to heterogeneity 53.26 6.64 23.24 .23.38 8 2 2 4 P> P> P> P> .001 .05 .001 .001 Independence of Major Habitats within Areas Kelly Flats Hewlett Gulch Sevenmile Creek 17.13 6.59 19.98 2 2 2 P> P> P> .001 .05 .001 Comparison Level of Significance As a matter of general interest, but cognizant of their very approximate nature, estimates of pellet group density and deer populations present during the summer of 1963 have been computed (Table 7) for each habitat on the 3 winter range study areas. These values extrapolated to a density basis suggest about 6-13 deer per square mile during the 166-181 day time interval involved. An attempt is made (Table 8) to roughly relate maximum pellet group counts and·presumably maximum deer use to some vegetative and site characteristics of selected habitats. On the 3 winter range study areas, the browse habitat with bitterbrush Purshia tridentata and sunflower Helianthus sp. appeared to be associated with maximum pellet group densities. This habitat has slope gradients ranging from 16-70% and slope exposures were southeasterly on Hewlett Gulch and variable on Kelly Flats and Sevenmile Creek. The transition (Little Beaver) and summer range (Crown Point) study area habitats with maximum pellet group denslties were· characterized by:· (1) conifer mixture (ponderosa pine and lodgepole pine)"with a bitierbrush understory (transition) and (2) . Lodgepole pine, spruce-fir and aspen with a Bromus spp. understory (summer). Their slope gradients ranged from 8-30% (transition) and 30-58% (summer). These were the maximum gradients recorded for any habitat within each study area. Slope exposures were southwesterly on the transition range and easterly on the summer range. Estimates of Herd Structure, 1961-64 Sample sizes and mean group size There were 3,874 mule deer (Method 2) available for analysis and sample sizes ranged from 205 (January, 1962) to 1,099 (January-February, 1963). Since 1961-62, large increases in sample size and significant (P> .01) increases in mean group size have occurred in the mid-winter sample. �Table 7. -- Pellet group counts and estimates of deer numbers on the 3 winter range study areas during the late spring, summer and fall of 1963. Study Area Major Habitats Pellet Groups Per Plot Freq. Mean Index No. Hew le t t Gulch Timber Juniper-Browse Browse Riparian Meadow 3 15 15 1 2 .032 .259 .094 .166 .041 .022 .155 .050 .167 .041 Total 36 .098 .060 Timber B'rowse MeadO"\v 6 20 0 .054 .112 0 .054 .095 0 Total 26 .087 .077 Timber Browse Riparian 1 14 0 .012 .073 0 .012 .036 0 15 .051 Kelly Flats End of Reading Dates Time Interval (Days) Estimated No. Deer "l: 4-30 10-13 166 10 5-5 10-21 169 9 ;, ~ Sevenmile Total "i" - I 5-18 11-15 181 5 -- .027 See text. ,-"'1." ',J J .';.) ~~ .r �/;}.';) '"i :=)J, l", Table 8.-- Some vegetative and site characteristics related to those major habitats with the maximum deer pellet groups per plot value on plbt establishment for each of the 5 study areas.+ Crown Point + * i~ Lodgepole-Spruce-Fir-Aspen Populus tremuloides Pinus contorta Bromus spp. 30-58~h~ mean 86-120 Site factor values from Descriptive Summaries of Vegetative Types (Medin 1962). These species exhibit maximum estimated coverage values both within the type of maximum pellet group values and in relation to the other study area types. Maximum values as compared to the other major habitats. �-bl- Male: female: fawn ratios, 1963-64 A summary of all deer recorded (Method 1) and the male:fawn ratios per 100 females are presented in Table 9. Similar data derived from Method 2 and also including mean group sizes and their standard deviations are listed in Table 10. Inspection of these data reveal the extreme variability between routes in male: female: fawn ratios and sample sizes. The mean group size data also reveal the extreme and rather uniform variability among routes. Incorporated in the January, 1964, data, however, are significant between-observer differences in fawn:female ratios. The magnitude of these differences is shown in Table 11 where it is seen that observer (M) had consistently higher fawn:female ratios on every route. The difference between observers, moreover, decreased with cumulative sample size and decreasing elevation. This hecessitated the analytical procedures depicted in Table 12. There were no significant between-observer differences in 1963-64 male:female ratios and mid-winter ratios differed significantly (F? .02) between 1963-64 while 1962-63 ratios were similar. The significant (~ .02) difference betweenobserver fawn:female ratios in January, 1964, mayor may not be responsible for the significant (P~ .05) differences in early and mid-winter fawn:female ratios, 1963-64. The same interaction may also be involved in the significant (p? .001) difference between the mid-winter fawn:female ratios, 1963-64. Male:mother:fawn ratios, 1961-64 Since the foregoing suggest that significant differences between-observers were confined to the fawn: female ratio, it is probable that most of this bias was due to confusing yearling females and fawns. Perhaps one approach to modify this difference and, in any case, the most meaningful index to fawn production, is the mid-winter fawn:mother ratio. These calculated ratios are shown by route, 1961-64 in Table 13 with male:female ratios included for a complete record. A summary of these approximations with approximate 90% confidence limits is displayed in Table 14. In terms of male: female ratios, the 90% confidence limits lead to the same conclusions as did the chi square analysis discussed above. Unlike the fawn:female ratios, however, analysis of mid-winter fawn:mother ratios by both chi square and confidence limits reveal no significant difference in these ratios 1962-63-64. The same conclusion-Was drawn from the early winter fawn:mother ratios, 1962-63-64. Ratios related to elevation density, and kill ratios and indices of population density, harvest An attempt is made in Table 15, to explore these relationships. Examination th~rein, suggest that there were no apparent relationships between elevation and indices of population density, harvest density, and kill ratios. There was, however, a significant (p? .005) narrowing of male:female ratios with decreasing elevation during January, 1964. There were no significant differences, however, between elevational strata in fawn:female ratios. These statements of Significance as estimated by chi square are in general agreement with the conclusions inferred from the confidence limits. The indices and ratios mentioned above do not seem to offer any plausible explanation for �-b~- Table 9.-- Sunnnary of herd structure samples which include all deer recorded on 10 all-day, walking routes, Nov. -Dec ., 1963 and Jan., 1964. Route and No. Date 1. Washout Gulch 2. 7-Mile Creek 3. Bennett Creek 4. Kelly Flats 5. Elkhorn Creek 6. Hewlett Gulch (west) 7 . Hewlett Gulch (east) 8. Young's Gulch 9. Livermore Mountain 10. Seaman Reservoir 11/21/63 11/22/63 11/25/63 11/30/63 12/5/63 12/7/63 12/12/63 12/6/63 12/13/63 12/14/63 Numoers Ratios Per 100 Females Male Female Fawn UncI. Total Fawn Male 5 2 2 8 26 7 13 3 31 22 3 2 5 28 45 18 29 9 62 41 1 0 4 21 53 9 21 9 42 21 2 2 1 5 41 7 16 4 16 20 11 6 12 62 165 41 79 25 151 104 167 100 40 29 58 39 45 33 50 54 80 75 118" 50 72 100 68 51 Total 119 242 181 114 656 49 75 Percent of Total 18.1 36.9 27.6 17.4 100.0 30 9 17 36 32 18 "9 26 42 26 105 17 22 118 75 60 15 33 79 27 52 28 8 7 28 13 63 31 50 56 26 23 10 3 14 18 25 50 13 ' 13 215 41 80 248 213 127 37 91 196 79 " 29 53 77 31 43 30 60 79 53 96 50 41 59 53 67 43 67 55 63 48 Total 245 551 302 44 55 Percent of Total 18.4 41.5 22.8 17.3 1. Washout Gulch 2. 7-Mile Creek 3. Bennett Creek 4. Kelly Flats 5. Elkhorn Creek 6. Hewlett Gulch (west) 7: Hewlett Gulch (east) 8. Young's Gulch 9. Livermore Mountain 10. Seaman Reservoir 1/9/64 1/10/64 1/15/64 1/16/64 1/17/64 1/23/64 1/24/64 1/22/64 1/30/64 1/31/64 229 1,327 100.0 33 �-b3- Table 10.-- Summary of herd structure samples which include all classified solitary deer and only deer from groups in which all deer were classified on 10 all-day walking routes; Nov.-Dec. 1963 and Jan. 1964. Route and No. Numbers Female Fawns Total Ratios Per 100 Females Males Fawns Group = X Size (SD) 75 73 115 50 65 100 67 57 1.8 1.3 1.5 2.4 2.7 2.8 3.0 2.5 4.6 4.0 (1.2) (1.8) (2.3) (2.1) Date Male 11/21/63 11/22/63 11/25/63 11/30/63 12/5/63 12/7 /63 12/12/63 12/6/63 12/13/63 12/14/63 3 2 2 6 21 7 6 3 24 22 3 2' 4 26 41 18 20 6 52 37 1 0 3 19 47 9 13 6 35 21 51 109 34 39 15 111 80 100 100 50 23 51 39 30 50 46 59 Total 96 209 154 459 46 74 3.1 (2.6) Percentage of Total 20.9 45.5 33.6 100.0 26 8 15 ' 35 27 14 9 26 40 26 93 16 19 94 69 45 15 33 76 27 42 7 11 55 48 22 10 18 44 13 161 31 45 184 144 81 34 77 160 66 28 50 79 37 39 31 60 79 53 96 45 58 58 70 49 67 55 58 48 5.4 3.9 1.9 4.3 5.3 4.1 3.8 3.7 5.0 3.9 (5.5) (2.9) (2.4)' (3.4) (4.9) (3.4) (2.9) (2.6) (4.2) (1.9) Total 226 487 270 983 46 55 4.3 (3.9) Percentage of Total 22.9 49.5 '27.5 100.0 1. Washout Gulch 2. 7 -Mile Creek 3. Bennett Creek 4. Kelly Flats 5. Elkhorn Creek 6. Hewlett, G. W. 7. Hewlett G. E. 8. Young I s G. 9. Livermore Mtn. 10. Seaman Res. 1. Washout Gulch 2. 7-Mile Creek 3. Bennett Creek 4. Kelly Flats 5. Elkhorn Creek 6. Hewlett G. W. 7. Hewlett G. E. 8. Young's G. 9. Livermore Mtn. ,10. Seaman Res. 1/9/64 1/10/64 1/15/64 1/16/64 1/17/64 1/23/64 1/24/64 1/22/64 1/30/64 1/31/64 7 4 9 33 44 (4.1) (3.3) �-b4- Table 11. -- Between-observer differences in sampling fawn:fema1e ratios during the winter of 1963-64. Route+ Fawns Per 100 Females 11-21 - 12-14, 1963 1-9 - 1-31, 1964 A M A M Washout Gulch 33 a 33 61 Sevenmi1e Creek o a 17 60 Bennett Creek 100 67 38 100 Kelly Flats 75 72 50 65 Elkhorn Creek 106 120 51 93 Young's Gulch 83 a 52 60 Hewlett Gulch (W.) 75 43 42 58 Hewlett Gulch (E.) 67 60 67 67 . Livermore Mtn. 58 73 48 63 Seaman's Reservoir 42 85 44 50 65 (47.7-82.3) 81 (62.1-99.9) 44 (35.4-52.4) 63 (52.0-74.0) 162 201 348 409 Total with Approximate 90% .Confidence Limits* Sample Size * Based on Method 2 and confidence limit computation after Riney (1956). + Routes are arranged in the same sequence in which they.were run; i.e. from higher to lower elevations. �Table 12. -- The results of chi square significance tests of fawn:fema1e, male: female ratios related to observer, samples, and year. Ratio ComEarison Sample Size Fawn: Female Fawn:Female Fawn:Female Observer Observer Samples 363 757 474 Fawn:Female Samples 646 Fawn:Female Samples 1,120 Fawn:Female Years 1,031 Fawn:Female Years 1,313 Fawn: Female Years 1,374 Fawn:Female Years 1,722 Fawn:Female Years 1,900 Male:Female Ma1e:Female Male:Female Observer Observer Samples 305 713 451 Ma1e:Female Samples 567 Ma1e:Female Samples 1,018 Ma1e:Female Years 816 Ma1e:Female Years 1,413 Ma1e:Female Years 1,543 SamEling Period Results Comment+ 11/21/63 12/14/63 1/31/64 1/9/64 11/21/63 12/14/63 .1/9/64 1/31/64 11/21/63 12/14/63 1/9/64 1/31/64 11/21/63 12/14/63 119/64 1/31/64 11/29/62 12/18/62 11/21/63 12/14/63 1/28/63 2/16/63 1/31/64 1/9164 1/28/63 2/16/63 1/31/64 1/9164 1/28/63 2/16/63 1/31/64 1/9164 1/3/62 1/27/62 1/28/63 2/16/63 1/31/64 1/9/64 n. s , s.*+ n.s . M=81: 100; A=65: 100 M=66: 100; A=44: 100 A only n.s. M only 11/21/63 1/9/64 11/21/63 119/64 11/21/63 119/64 11/21/63 1/9/64 11129/62 11/21/63 1/28163 1/9164 1/3/62 1/28/63 1/9/64 12/14/63 1/31/64 12/14/63 1/31/64 12/14/63 1/31/64 12/14/63 1/31/64 12/18/62 12/14/63 2/16/63 1/31/64 1/27/62 2/16/63 1/31/64. s.* AM combined n. s , AM combined. s.** n.s. A only M only s.*+ AM combined s.* AM combined 73:100-1962; 71:100-1963; 55:100-1964 n.s. n.s. n. s. A only n. s. M only n.s. AM combined n.s. AM combined s.*+ AM combined s.*+ AM combined 26:100-1962; 25:100-1963; 46:100-1964 A refers to Anderson, M to Medin; all ratios from summary Method 2. + P >.05 * 1'* P >.001 '''+ P >.02 p >.01 * ":t:•. :.:.:. �'JJ ,'\} Table 13.-- Summary of mule deer male:mother:fawn ratios computed from an estimate of non-producers yearlings) in the number of females observe~ on individual routes, 1961-62-63-64.+ (female Route and Male:Fawn Ratios Per 100 Females By Sampling Period* Approximate Oct. 1961 Jan. 1962++ Nov.-Dec. 1962 Jan. -Feb. 1963 Nov.-Dec. 1963 Jan. 1964 Elevational Sample Sample Sample Sample Sample Sample Range (Feet) Male Fawn Size Male Fawn Size Male Fawn Size Male Fawn Size Male Fawn Size Male Fawn Size Washout G. 7,600-9,400 Sevenmile Ck. 7,300-9,000 Bennett Ck. 7,400-8,500 Kelly Flats 6,800-8,000 Elkhorn Ck. 6,700-7,700 Hewlett G. W. 6,300-7,400 Hewlett G. E. 6,500-7,000 Young's G. 6,300-7,500 Livermore Mtn. 5,400-7,400 Seaman Res. 5,500-6,800 TOTAL + ++ * 7 28 70 161 100 --- 4 50 58 31 16 50 -- 9 79 87 45 96 160 23 105 51 37 76 184 23 93 177 51 166 109 39 94. 144 15 74 149 39 69 34 31 62 81 100 -- 3 15 100 25 67 88 34 23 78 126 100 320 125 26 60 75 11 33 -- 6 48 86 71 200 -- 3 -- -- -- 8 100 20 ° 56 56 129 23 ° 114 17 47 117 103 35 40 100 43 22 82 42 35 104 200 100 150 16 24 100 42 37 ..90 77 t fT'" 0- 33 114 20 5 93 35 21 104 112 .0 96 39 30 105 39 60 91 34 -- -- -- -- -- -- 27 72 57 61 112 64 50 150 15 79 78 77 25 120 113 82 113 29 40 83 103 26 98 185 46 98 111 53 91 160 52 81 68 200 -- 4 59 142 94 29 96 112 59 72 80 96 68 66 50 117 322 26 96 205 37 102 806 24 100 1,099 46 105 459 46 79 983 Based on the percent (23.9, 1961) (22.4, 1962) (30.0, 1963) of yearlings (essentially non-producers) in the adult female kill obtained at the check station during the 1961-62-63 big game seasons (Anderson 1962-63-64). One observer (A) obtained this sample. Based on summary method 2 (Table 10) and Anderson (1962:233). t �-b7- Table 14.-- Summary of mule deer male:mother:fawn ratios sampled on the 10, all-day walking routes, October 1961-January 1964. Sample Component Oct. 1961 Male:Female Jan. 1962 Male:Female Nov. -Dec. 1962 Male:Female Jan.-Feb. 1963 Ma1e:Female Nov. -Dec. 1963 . Ma1e:Female Jan. 1964 Ma1e:Female (. Oct. 1961 Jan. 1962 Nov.-Dec. 1962 Jan. -Feb. 1963 Nov. -Dec, 1-963 Jan. 1964 * ** Sample Size Ratios Per 100 Females or Mothers With Approximate 90% Confidence Limits* 202 130 50 26 (37.8 - 62.2) (16.6 - 35.4) 511 37 (30.9 - 43.1) 700 24 (20.2 - 27.8) 305 713 46 46 (36.6 - 55.4) (39.9 - 52.1) Fawn:Mother** Fawn:Mother 206 151 110 96 (84.7 -135.3) (70.2 -121.8) Fawn:Mother 659 102 (89.1 -114.9) Fawn:Mother 1039 90 (80.8 - 99.2) Fawn:Mother Fawn:Mother 339 689 108 78 (88.7 -127.3) (68.1 - 87.9) From Riney (1956) and computed from Method 2 data only. Estimate of mothers obtained by deducting the percent of female yearlings (essentially non-producers) comprising the mature female kill sample as obtained at the big game check station, 1961-62-63, from the total females recorded during each of the six samples. �"4,,,- ,Jr <~' Table 15.-- Male:female:fawn deer ratios by elevation related kill ratios, 1962-64 on Game Management Unit 19. Routes and Approximate Elevationa1 Ranges (Feet) Major Browse Species Harvest Indices* (Deer Per Sq. Mi.) 1962 1963 to selected Winter Population Estimate** (Deer Per Sq. Mi.) 1961-62 1962-63 ecological factors and indices of deer population density, harvest density, and Ratios Per 100 Females WithApprox. 90% -Confidence Limits Sampled on the All-Day Walking Routes-+ Fawns Males Jan. -Feb. 1963 Jan. 1964 Jan. -Feb. 1963 Jan. 1964 Ratio of Kill Per 100 Fema1es+ Males Fawns 1962 1963 1962 1963 41 62(45.7-78.3) 165 45(32.3-57.7) 158 31(20.8-4l.2) 134 31 (20.8-4l. 2) 143 110 115 45 60 Washout G. Sevenmile Ck.+* 7,300-9,400 Big Sagebrush Bitterbrush .63 .34 Kelly F1ats+* Elkhorn Ck. 6,700-8,000 Bitterbrush Mountain Mahogany 4.73 2.26 -- 38 76(6l.2-90.8) 290 63(50.1-75.9) 266 28(20.3-35.7) 212 38(28.6-47.4) 225 66 94 39 24 Livermore Mtn.+* Seaman Res. 5,400-7,400 Mountain Mahogany Bitterbrush 2.68 9.19 l.10 4.40 -- 33 52(56.9-87.1) 257 55(40.1-69.9) 160 27(19.1-34.9) 189 64(47.4-80.6) 169 74 63 162 89 45 48 23 28 I * ** + +* -+ Based on hunter interviews at the check station. Based on pellet group counts on the Sevenmile Ck., Kelly Flats, and Hewlett Gulch study areas, see text and tables. Based on check station samples. Washout G.-Sevenmile Ck. includes sub-unit 7; Kelly Flats-Elkhorn Ck. -- sub-unit 5; end Livermore Mtn.-Seaman Res. -- sub-units Sample sizes are listed under each ratio and confidence limit. 1 and 4. en Ul I �this significant change in male:female ratios at the lower elevations. The significant increase in males in the mid-winter sample of 1964 is probably related to this lower elevation increase and examination of Table 10 reveals that most of this male increase occurred on the Seaman Reservoir route. \ Discussion: Population Density and Use The magnitude of the very large differences in deer pellet group densities counted on the 5 study areas during plot establishment is almost certainly exaggerated for the following reasons: (1) Marked differences in search effort expended as discussed by Anderson (1963). (2) Differential weathering and disintegration may vary widely over the approximate 5,000 foot elevational range encompassing the study areas. (3) The relatively heavy litter layer on the transition and summer range areas makes a search to mineral soil impractical. Nevertheless, because of the several years longevity presumed for pellets, the plot establishment pellet group counts pr'obab.l y provide the best comparative data now available on deer presence and perhaps use of the study areas and their habitats. There is apparently no experimental evidence on the level of precision by which pellet group densities may estimate relative deer use between different habitats. Empirically, Julander (1958:19) believes that, "deer defecate where they feed and seldom where they bed" and "the pellet group method is a reliable index to the intensity of deer use." In terms of a total populatio~ estimate, the few published studies on free-ranging mule deer populations indicate close agreement between pellet group count estimates and known or· approximately known populations but provide no measure of reliability for these values (Julander et al. 1963).· Finally, sLnc e Dasmann and Taber (1955) have inferred seasonal changes in daily defecation rates, presumably related to dietary change, it is possible that there may also be differences in defecation rates related to the different kinds and amounts ·of forage available on the study areas or within different habitats on those study areas. With these qualifications in mind, it does appear, from an anthropomorphic viewpoint, that maximum pellet group densities are sampled within those habitats which provide relatively large amounts of diverse forage and favorable excape cover in close proximity. These s i.t e characteristics, of course, interact with many other variables to influence distribution of deer. One example is the juniper-browse habitat on the Hewlett Gulch study area which has consistently shown the maximum yearlong pellet group densities of any winter range habitat. It occupies the upper one-third of a very steep and extensive southerly exposure which gradually decreases in steepness near the top, supports a relatively large variety and abundance of both forage and cover, is adjacent to excellent timber escape cover, and offers good visibility at a considerable distance from human activity. For comparative on free-ranging winter habitat. purposes, I have been unable to find similar published data mule deer pellet group densities along the Front Range Similar data on the summer habitat are also apparently lacking. �~)'--is: '.. -!-_ -'/u- In a Montana spruce-fir habitat, however, mean pellet group plot densities of .22 and .20 were obtained on 100 square foot, circular plots over 150 and 109 day time intervals (White 1960). This author extrapolates sununer range population densities of 42 and 32 deer per square mile and estimated the summer home range of an individual deer to be about 100 acres or less. According to Robinette et al. (1958:423) the average period of winter range use by deer in Utah is about 140 days and they state further that: "errors in the spring estimates can be minimized if pellet, group counts can be made before the herd leaves". On the Cache la Poudre drainage this period of departure is imperfectly known and is a very subtle phenomena. The dates cited herein, reflect both our best estimate of this period and the press of other field work. The necessarily extended reading period, exists because of manpower'limitations and the concurrent work of estimating browse production and use of the same plots. The use of,"pe11et groups per day per' acre" excludes the effects of both different time intervals used on each study area and the use of the average, daily, defecation rate constant but different chronology involved in these extended reading periods remain a source of error in comparing study area indices. The estimated population density of deer present on the 3 winter range study areas during the summer (6-13 per square mile) is about 12-40% of the winter population. This is considerably higher than the 2-3% estimated on Utah winter range (Robinette et ale 1958:422). Since both the Utah and Poucire estimates are only grossapproximations, no inferences are possible. Population Comparative Structure data Some difficulties in comparing Poudre herd structure with that from other herds have been discussed previously (Anderson, 1963). To briefly reiterate, differences in methodology, time of sampling, and experience of the observers are serious deterents in making valid comparisons. Also, many authors do not state the methodology; or so briefly, that evaluation is impossible. 'Moreover, as shown herein, ratios can be widely divergent yet conventional chi square analysis will estimate nOI\-significant differences. For these reasons, no comparative data will be brought into this, dLscuss Lon , Male:female ratios The factors involved in the apparent 1963-64 increase in males with the lower elevation samples having the major preponderance can only be a matter of conjecture. Two possible causal factors are: (1) The mild winter of 1963-64 was a major influence on deer behavior and distribution; (2) the 3 successive hunter-choice seasons 1961-62-63, greatly reduced a major source of mature male mortality and mature males increased proportionally. Thus mature male harvests since 1960, when the last mature male-only season was held, were estimated as follows: 1960 - 920; 1961- - 474; 1962 - 361; 1963 - 292 (Anderson 1964). It does not appear feasible, however, that removals of this low magnitude would have a measurable effect on male: female sample ratios. �-71- Fawn:female ratios Since one or both observers were confusing fawns and yearlings in the January, 1964, sample, the possible reasons for this serious source of bias are suggested in terms of what is known about the animal and the techniques employed by the two observers. It is known that the body mass of mule deer fawns of each sex and female yearling overlaps during the late fall and winter periods (Leopold et al., 1951:34; Anderson et a L,, 1964). It is also known that, for the first time, one observer did not use a spotting scope during the January, 1964, sample. Furthermore, there were theoretically more yearling females in the 1963-64 population than on any previous sample. Thus, in January 1964, there were probably proportionally more deer offering classification difficulties with theoretically greater probabilities of incorrect . classification perhaps accentuated by less critical scrutiny. In view of this bias, one cannot regard the results of significance tests involving the January, 1964, fawn:female sample with any degree of confidence. Fawn:mother ratios Unlike the fawn:female ratios, fawn production per potentially productive female was similar in the mid-winter samples, 1962-63-64. Perhaps this ratio tended to mask the between-observer bias, involving as it does the confusion of non-productive (yearling) females. Appa rent ly Linsdale and Tomich (1953:551) were the first to use the fawn:mother concept and Dasmann and Taber (1956) were the .first to illustrate the possible error in fawn:female ratios. These workers studied small populations intensively and were able to distinguish fawns, yearling females and adult females. The method used in our study is very crude but it probably offers a more valid index to annual changes in fawn productivity and survival than the usual fawn:female ratio. Male:mother:£awn ratios and the breeding season Present knowledge of breeding season dates for Poudre mule deer suggest that the early winter sampling period coincides ~ith the most active portion of the breeding season and therefore the mid-winter (post-breeding) period provides the most valid sample. Dasmann and Taber (1958:81) believe that during the rut, "bucks are unusually active and conspicuous and family groups tend to be disorganized. The net result is that counts taken at this time tend to err in favor of mature bucks and to be low in fawns.1I If we apply this concept to the Poudre herd the significant decrease in males recorded during mid-winter in all samples (except 1963-64) may be a partial function of seasonal behavior patterns rather than actual mortality. This supposition is substantiated by the large increase in sample size during the mid-winter period. The generally non-significant decrease in fawns over this same period could possibly indicate the relative importance of fawn-specific mortality. While the two winter samples, as used here, may be useful in detecting drastic herd structure changes as in 1963-64, it is entirely possible that differential, seasonal, patterns of behavior between sex and age classes may invalidate inferences on herd dynamics based on herd structure samples. Too little is known of mule deer behavior to adequately interpret herd structure samples. �-7z- LITERATURE CITED Anderson, A. E. 1963. Population density and structure. W-l05-R, 1962, Work Plan 4, Job 1 Completion Report. Colorado Dept. Game, Fish and Parks, Denver (processed). 1964. Harvest analysis. W-I05:R, 1963, Work Plan 5, Job 3 Completion Report. Colorado Dept. Game, Fish and Parks, Denver (processed). L. G. Frary, and R. H. Stewart~ 1964. A comparison of three morphological attributes of mule deer from the Cuada Lupe and Sacramento Mountains, New Mexico. J. Mammalogy 45(1):48-53. Croxton, F. E. and D. J. Cowden. 1955. Applied general statistics. Hall, Inc., Englewood Cliffs, N. J. 843pp. Prentice- Dasmann, R. F. and R. D. Taber. 1955. A comparison of four deer census methods. California Fish and Game 41(3):225-228. and 1956. Determining structure in Columbian blacktailed deer populations. J. Wild1. Mgmt. 20(1):78-83. Fergu sori, R. B. 1955. The pellet group count method of censusing mule deer in Utah. M.S. Thesis, Utah State Univ., Logan~ 94pp. (processed). Ju1ander, o. 1958. Techniques in studying competition between big game and livestock. J. Range Mgmt. 11(1):18-21. , R. B. Ferguson, and J. E. Dealy. 1963. Measure of animal range ----use by signs, pp. 102-108. !E Range research methods. J. P. Blaisdell, Chmn. Misc. Pub1. No. 940, U.S. Dept. Agri., Forest Service. Government Printing Office, Wash., D. C. 172pp. U.S. Kendall, M. G. and A. Stuart. 1961. The advanced theory of statistics. Vol. 2. Hafner Pub l, Co ,, New York. Leopold, A. S., T. Riney, R. McCain, and L. Tevis, Jr. 1951 The Jawbone deer herd. Game Bull. No.4. Division of Fish and Game. 139pp. 0 Linsda1e, J. M. and P; Q. Tomich. 1953. A herd of mule deer. California Press, Berkeley and Los Angeles. 567pp. Univ. of Medin, D. E. 1962. Vegetative type mapping. W-l05-R, 1961, Work Plan 3, Job 2 Completion Report, pp. 187-204. In Federal Aid Quarterly Report, Part 2, July 1962, pp. 161-339. Colorado Dept. of Game, Fish and Parks, Denver. (processed). �-73- Riney, T. 1956. Differences in proportions of fawns to hinds in red deer (Cervus elaphus) from several New Zealand environments. Nature 177: 488-489. Robinette, W. L., R. B. Ferguson, and J. S. Gashwiler. 1958. Problems involved in the use of deer pellet group counts. Trans. N. Amer. Wildl. Conf. 23:411-425. Snedecor, G. W. 1946. Ames. 485pp. Statistical methods. Iowa State College Press, White, K. W. 1960. Differential range use by mule deer in the spruce-fir zone. Northwest Sci. 34(4):118-126. Approved by Laurence E. Riordan Pre pared by _ __:.A;:.;_l;:.;_l;_e_n.;_;_E_: •.;_;_A_n_d_e_r_s_o_n _ Assistant Director, Research Da te __::J~a:.;.n.:....u=-a=-r:..Ly.L., _1_9_6..,:;5 _ Ferd Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �-74APPENDIX I. DEER ECOLOGY INVESTIGAT IONS HERD COMPOSIT ION ROUTES - 1962-63 Route No. __ Route Name ___________________________________ Observer(s) Weather B D Time Started Time Date Finished _ Total Time (hrs. ) Notes: F Uncl. Total Notes Pt s ° B D F Uncl Total Pts. Notes . -r-; i -- -- Totr1s I - GRAND TOTAL B _ D F UNCLo TOTAL. _ �I~~IIllll~'lllrll'1111~lllllrr~IIIIIIIIIIII fllrl'I~I~11 BDOW022695 JOB COMPLETION RESEARCH State of Project PROJECT REPORT SEGMENT Colorado No. An Ecological Investigation of the Cachela Poudre Deer Herd, Colorado W-l05-R-4 Work Plan No. 5 Physiological Job No. 1 Physical Period JanU81'Y, 1965 Covered: Personnel: January 1963 Allen E. Anderson December and Dean Studies Characteristics 1963 E. Medin Abstract: over 8,000 values from 23 male and 29 female mule deer collected in 1963 are tabulated chronologically. Also included are statistical descriptions of 10 blood plasma components (1961-63) and 3 indices of condition (1962-63) with _~_____ between-year significance tests (P = .05) performed on the latter. There were ---~d-~-ig~ifica-;;t-d-iTEe-~e~~es between either femur marrow- i:at--or total kidney fat percentages but females of ,all ,ages had significantly higher' mean percent body fat in 1963 than did males. The 1962-63 fenrur marrow fat and total kidney fat percentages appeared as non-linear, weakly related, complex functions of percent body fat with marked between-sex and between-index differences and extreme individual variability during any particular month. There was an indication that older females predominated in the winter and spring samples and had larger fat reserves than did younger females except during the fall. The sunnner sample was comprised of -youngar females with relatively low reserves of fat. In males, there was a positive relationship between percent body fat and increasing age during the summer arid fall but a weakly negative relationship in the spring. Including all ages maximum mean femur marrow fat and total kidney fat percentages and condition ratios occurred during the fall for both sexes and extended iIJ-tothe winter for females. Minimum means of percent total kidney fat occurred in both sexes during the spring. Percent femur marrow fat, percent body fat and condition ratios reached minimum means in the spring (males) and during the summer (females). As a possible index to seasonal ,physiological stress, mean adrenal ascorbic acid levels seemed to be associated W'ithmean percent body fat and condition ratios since less stress was indicated in the fall and winter in both sexes and max Lmum stress in the spring and sunnner for males and in the sunnner for females. Another possible stress index, however, the neutrophil:lyrnphocyte ratio, indicated maximum stress during the winter for both sexes and minimum stress during the sunnner (males) and spring and sununer (females). These findings are discussed in relation to their limitations as wei! as to similar values in the literature. the--annuaT-means-o-{ This study should be carried out as previqusiy outlined until May, 1965. The 1961-63 data should be placed on IBM cards .and plans -initiated with the Colorado University Statistical Laboratory for suitable analysis. �-76Ob j ec tives: Measure relevant physiological and morphological characteristics of deer collected seasonally so that: (a) the response of the herd to its environment can be more adequately interpreted, (b) establish "physiological norms", and (c) provide basic morphological data as related to sex and age class. Acknowl edgemen'~: Mrs. LaVonne r.ampbell and Mrs. Florence Fields, Laboratory Technicians, weighed, determined volumes, and measured most of the glands and organs and per f ormec' most of the blood plasma analyses. Mrs. Chonita Lowry of the Game and Fish Research Center, Fort Collins, drafted Figures 6 and 7 and John Hanna, graduate student, Colorado State University drafted the remaining nine figures and computed a portion of the statistical description of differential cell percentages. Student assistants W. J. Jones, T. H. Hakonson, D. Markham, D. Minnich, and L. Nelson Jr. assisted in the field and laboratory. Mr. and Mrs. Henry L. Short, formerly of the Cooperative Wildlife Research Laboratory, Colorado State University, helped during laboratory and field emergencies and in the literature review. Except as noted below most of the work was performed in the laboratory of the Colorado Cooperative Wildlife Research Unit, Colorado State University, Fort Collins. K. E. Porter tabulated the data in Tables 2 - 13. Techni.ques Used: These were described in detail in the 19&1 report (Anderson, 1962) and because of their length will not be repeated here. An outline of the laboratory procedures followed with minor modifications by the contracting laboratories is given in Table 1. During 1963, 22 male and 26 female mule deer (collection numbers 80-127, inclusive) were collected as part of the regular collection. One additional male and 3 females were obtained from other sources, principally highway mortality. On the latter, such data were collected as the circumstances and conciition of the carcass permitted. Their collection numbers are prefixed with an "0", In general, regular collections were made above 8,500 feet elevation (summer range) from June to mid-October and below this elevation (winter range) during the winter months. Most of the deer were shot between 5:00 AM and 9:00 AM and in the lower neck or thoracic-spinal area. Death usually occurred within two minutes and blood samples were aspirated from the heart 3 - 15 minutes later. Laboratory analysis of the carcass usually began 3 - 5 hours, and blood plasma analysis completed within 24 hours after death. The approximate kill locations for each of the 48 deer collected as part of the regular collection during 1963 are shown in Figure 1. �TABLE 1. -- Outline of procedures used in blood plasma, blood serum, and tissue analyses, Item Blood Plasma: erythocyte count leukocyte count differential leucocyte packed cell volume count Blood Serum: vitamin A and carotene phosphorous potassium protein sodium magnesium calcium Procedure Reference hematocytometer hematocytometer thin smear slides centrifuge - graphic (Hepler 1958) (Hepler 1958) (Hepler 1958) none reader colorimetric colorimetric flame photometry colorimetric flame photometry titrimetric EDTA titrimetric EDTA 1963.+ (Baird Assoc., n.d.) -- modified from (Kitson and Mallon 1944) (~aird Assoc., n.d.) (Gornell, et al. 1949) (Baird Assoc., n.d.) -- modified from (Lewis and Melnick 1960) -- modified from (Lewis and Melnick 1960) I :j I Tissue Analyses: liver vitamin A, liver carotene adrenal ascorbic acid bone marrow fat and moisture content colorimetric colorimetric co l cr Imet r Lc ether extraction, gravimetric (Dann and Eve 1yn 1938) (DaRn and Evelyn 1938) (Maickel 1960) (Assn. Agric. Chem. 1960) + Blood plasma analyses were performed at the following laboratories: Cooperative Wildlife Research Unit, Colorado State University; College of Veterinary Medicine, Colorado State University; and Game and Fish Research Center all at Fort Collins. Except for 9 deer (Nos. 80 - 88) all 1963 blood serum and tissue analyses were performed by Industrial Laboratories, Denver, Colorado. ',~ (i:?J �."", li 1:;6 50' I ~ I 40' ao' 105· 30' 10' ••••••• 0d ';:'" \ TION ,..•.L ~1 T9N ~-~ :. 7f<HF)D r,,~/I=cJ ': ! 4>1' I ' l'1::;::;;;)V~~;;1l:t1D"J?;HIt/~1 /1,//1' »1:l,§', 140 I ~ ~~~T8N 0:> I LA POUDRE DRAINAGE COUNTY, COLORADO SIXTH 1 t 0 PRINCIPAL 1 :fC'rC MERIDIAN 3 4.~MUU I---___j LEGEND ~ Management Unit Approximat. Transitional Between Fig. 1. Approximate kill locations of 22 male (circled) artd 26 female mule deer, 1963. Summer IT6N Boundary And Winlet Zone Ranges 40· 30' �·-79- PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS Allen E. Anderson Findings: Over 8,000 measurements obtained in whole or part on each of 52 mule deer are tabulated chronologically in Tables 2 -'II, inclusive. Various computed indices of both physical condition and bone structure are given in Table 12 (males) and Table 13 (females). In Table 14, selected condition indices ,(1962-63) are described statistically as well as the results of between-year (percent femur marrow and total kidney fat) and between-sex (percent body fat in the skinned, eviscerated carcass) significance tests (P = .05). Sample sizes did not permit between-year comparisons of the latter index. There were no significant differences between either of the 1962-63 mean condition indices. Mean percent body fat (1963) was significantly higher in the females. A statistical description of selected values of mule deer blood plasma (1961-63) is presented in Tables 15 and 16. The above condition indices and two possible indicators of physiological stress; (adrenal ascorbic acid levels and percentages of differential blood cells, 1961-63) are discussed in relation to each other and on a monthly and seasonal basis below. Seasons are defined as follows: winter - December, January, February; spring - March, April, May; summer - June, July, August and fall - SeptembeJ:",October, November. Relationships of monthly condition indices The percent body fat values estimated from the skinned, eviscerated carcasses of both sexes and all age classes are plotted against femur marrow fat values (Figures 2 and 3) and total kidney fat indices (Figures 4 and 5). Therein, the monthly notations by each plotted point illustrate the extreme individual variability found during any particular month. It is also apparent that male and female perce~t femur marrow fat remains at relatively high levels until body fat estimates approximate 10 percent. There is, however , a definite tendency for male percent femur marxow fat to remain at higher levels than females when body fat estimates range below 7 percent. Both femur marrow fat percent and total kidney fat percent appear as non-linear, complex and entirely different functions of percent body fat. Both sexes exhibit the lowest, least variable kidney fat values when body fat estimates range about 7 - 9 percent or somewhat below the average levels (Table 14). Relationship of estimated age, season, sex, and percent body fat Since younger deer with relatively rapid growth rates might be expected to store lower reserves of body fat, the relationship between estimated age and estimated body fat in the eviscerated, skinned carcasses of both sexes are depicted by season in Figure 6. There appears to be a tendency for older females to have relatively larger amounts of body fat in all seasons except during the fall when all ages have relatively high fat values. This might be associated both with the slower recovery of older, parous females from the �':1;) l:s:i'll ~ u; __ I • NOV .OCT .AUG ·DEC .FEB _NOV .FEB • .JUN AUG .SEP OJU.NOV. .SEP .SEP •• OCT JUL .SEP .DEC .JUN ftDEC .MAY .DEC .MAR .JUN 0:: _DEC ::::> I .DEC I a·FEB SEP 2: ~ W LL I- Z w U 0:: W 0.. ~~I . eJUL OMAY OAPR 11_· .APR ftMAR 0 2 4 6 8 10 PERCENT BODY FAT- 12 14 16 18 SKINNED, EVISCERATED 20 22 24 26 CARCASS Fig. 2. Chronological relation of percent body fat to percent femur marrow fat in 33 male mule deer of all age classes sampled over an 18 month period, 1962-63. en 0 I �I-ill Lt .JAN OCT .OCT SEP"'~NOV :DEC .MAR DEC .FEB .~R S OCT .DEC .SEP .NOV 08 ·JUL 0::: 0::: •• AUG JUN .OCT .APR .JUN 2: 6~ .AUG 0::: .JUL 2: .OCT ·JUL ·MAY « ::::> .SEP tlt~N~'i:C 50t .AUG I .oCT :~ ~LJ W ·JUN LL I ttl t-.>. I .APR .AUG I- .AUG Z .JUL W .JUL W. .JUN .MAY Q_1 0 2 FEMALE- 4 6 PERCENT 8 10 12 BODY FAT -SKINNED, Fig. 3. Chronological relation of percent body fat to percent of all age classes sampled over an 18 month period, 1962-63. femur marrow 14 16 18 20 EVISCERATED CARCASS fat in 41 female mule deer t~~ i~ �"lj ~~ .NOV "JU"NOV .OCT I .SEP .SEP I .SEP .NOV .OCT ·DEC .AUG .DEC .JUL eSEP .AUG eSEP .DEC • MAY .MAR .JUN .J~L • DEC.MA'1"YipMAY .FEB FEB APR .JUN ·DEC .JUN .DEC 0 2 4 6 PERCENT 8 10 12 BODY FAT - 14 ~ 16 SKINNED J 18 20 EVISCERATED Fig. 4. Chronological relation of percent body fat to percent total kidney mule deer of all age classes sampled over an 18 month period, 1962-63. 22 24 CARCASS fat (Riney 1955) in 33 male 26 �-83- •..... s >- w z o ~ .OCT _J ~ Q 8 1- z w U 0:: W 0... ·DEC .SEP .DE.C .NOV .OCT .JAN .••OCT -:JAN .AUG .DEC • NOV 2 FEMALE 4 - 6 PERCENT 8 10 BODY FAT - 12 14 16 18 SKINNED, EVISCERATED CARCASS Fig. 5. Chronological relation of percent body fat to percent total kidney fat (Riney 1955) in 41 female mule deer of all age classes over an 18 month period, 1962-63. �.. ""lJ·· ..~ ~Jl DEC-JAN - FEB MAR-APR-MAY JUN-JUL-AUG SEP-OCT-NOV (f) I' l- z 0 2: " 000 I I o I I 0 0 0 • z o I 0) +:- - • - • 0 0 I ----- '*------- -- ------------• • ... 0" o •• 0 20 30 20 30 PERCENT BODY FAT - 0 10 0 ~ • 0 10 0 ---- .•.. ~ 0 0 • 10 0 0 Males I • I 20 30 0 00 • •• • o 10 00 0 20 EVISCERATED, SKINNED, CARCASS Fig. 6. Seasonal relation between estimated age (Robinette et ale 1957) and percent body fat in 33 male (closed circle) and 41 female (open circle) mule deer over an 18 month period, 1962-63. Mean seasonal X and Y values are connected for each sex. . 30 �-95Table 2. Weights (kg) and External Body Measurements (cm) of 23 Male Deer, 1963. Date-Age-Measurements 80 Collection Date (Month-Day) 1- 2 Estimated Age (Year-Month) 4- 7 Carcass Wt-Bled 80.7 Carcass Wt-Eviscerated 58.8 Carcass Wt-Skinned 50.9 Hide Wt 6.4 Body length 161.0 Tail length 19.0 31.5 Head length Interorbital width 13.8 Girth 97.0 Shoulder height '100.0 Neck circumference (a) 45.0 Neck circumference (b) 60.0 Ear length (left) 20.5 Ear length (right) 20.5 49.4 Hind foot length (left) 49.1 length (right) Hoof length (front left) 7.0 (front right) 7.1 6.6 (rear left) 6.7 (rear right) 15.0 Meta-gland length (left) 15.D length (right) width 5.0 Meta-gland (left) 5.0 wid th (right) Tarsal gland width (left) 7.0 6.0 width (right) Scrotum length 7.0 6.0 width 5.0 height 11.0 Prepuce length 3.75 Antler beam diam (left) 3.45 beam diam (right) 51.0 beam length (left) 55.0 beam length (right) 4 (left) point no. 4 point no. (right) 53.0 inside spread 35.0 tip-to~tip spread 725 Wt-(left) g 780 Wt- (right) g 3.5 brow tine length (left) brow tine length (right) 3.0 81 Collection No. 85 86 87 1- 9 2- 6 .4- 7 2- 8 83.8 70.4 60.7 49.1 53.2 44.9 4.2 6.4 161.0 151.0 19.0 21.0 32.0 32.2 13.5 14.5 98.0 94.0 97.0 98.0 41.0 39.0 48.0 53.0 21.5 21.5 21.5 2l.5 50.2 48.4 50.1 48.6 7.9 7.5 7.7 7.9 7.3 7.1 7.1 7.0 14.0 15.5 15.5 15.0 3.0 5.0 3.5 5.0 6.0 6.5 6.0 6.5 6.0 4.5 5.0 8.0 4.5 4.5 9.5 12.0 3.19 3.17 49.0+ 46.0+ 3 3 51.0 46.0 570 + 555 + 3.4 3.3 89 2-13 2-20 3- 6 0- 8 1- 8 5- 9 30.4 76.3 59.7 21.6 41.6 55.2 49.9 19.7 37.7 5.3 1.9 3.8 117.0 146.0 163.0 18,0 17.0 18.0 34.2 29.6 23.7 15.1 10.2 12.8 98.0 87.0 70.0 98.0 91.0 79.0 39.0 25.0 . 33.0 48.0 43.0 31.0 21.0 21.0 18.0 21.0 2l.0 18.0 49.5 48.2 44.0 49.6 48.2 44.0 7.1 7.7 6.4 7.7 7.1 6.3 6.8 7.2 5.8 7.3 6.8 6.0 15.5 15.0 14.5 14.0 14.5 14.5 4.5 5.0 5.0 5.0 4.5 5.0 4.5 5.0 4.0 4.5 5.0 4.0 7.5 3 .. 0 8.0 6.0 6.0 3.0 4.0 3.5 2.5 11.0 11.0 7.0 1.75 1.73 17.0 21.0 2 1 2 1 23.0 23.0 51. 43. 92 3-27 1- 9 49.5 37.3 34.4 2.9 i42.0 17.0 30.3 12.4 81.0 91.0 31.0 44.0 20.5 20.5 47.8 48.1 6.5 6.5 6.3 6.2 14.5 14.5 3.5 3.5 4.5 4.5 5.0 4.5 4.0 12.0 2.40 2.40 1.4 1:4 1 1 7.5 7.5 �-8b- Table 2. Weights (kg) and External Measurements (cm) of 23 Male Deer, 1963. (continued) Date-Age-Measurements Antler pedicel length (left) pedicel length (right) Stage: Bone Velvet Velvet Shedding Pelage color _/ dorsal rostrum interorbital occipital brisket outer thigh umbilical (anterior) front knees Pelage sample Wt (g) 80 81 Collection No. 85 86 87 89 92 2.12 2.78 1.92 1.91 1.09 1.10 2.40 2.10 4.10 6.90 "'" '" 10YR 9/1 lOYR 5/2 10YR 6/2 10YR 4/1 10YR 6/5 10YR 9/2 10YR 8/5 45.0 lOYR 9/t 10YR 3.5/2 10YR 6/2 10YR 4/1 10YR 6.5/2 10YR 9/2 10YR 8/5 43.3 1.74 1.63 ~h~ 10YR 9/1 5YR 3/4 10YR 4/2 10YR 3/1.5 10YR 6/3 10YR 7/1 10YR 7/8 34.3 10YR 9/2 10YR 6/1 10YR 5/2 10YR 4/2 10YR 6/4 10YR 7/1 10YR 9/4 32.6 ~ "-I +~'( "'*+ 10YR lOYR 9/2 10/2 5YR loYR 4/2 7/2 10YR 10YR 5/2 6/3 10YR 10YR 3/2 5/2 10YR 10YR 7/4 7/3 10YR· 10YR 8/1.5 7.5/1 10YR 10YR 7.5/8 7.5/6 43.3 29.3 10YR 7.5/2 10YR 6/3 10YR 6/3 10YR 6/1 10YR 7/1.5 10YR 7/1 10YR 9/6 20.4 ~~ Recently shed. 1rlc Skin covered pedicels? + Tip broken off both main beams. +* Antlers recently dropped pedicels covered with "velvet" like material. ·k+ Antler growth beginning no certain way to distinguish between antler beam or diameter. _/ (Munsell, 1929-60) �-B7- Table 2. Weights (kg) and External Body Measurements (cm) of 23 Male Deer, 1963., (continued) Date-Age-Measurements 94 96 Collection Date (Month-Day) 4-15 Estimated Age (Year-Month) 0-10 Carcass Wt-Bled 35.5 Carcass Wt-Eviscerated 25.2 Carcass Wt-Skinned 23.0 Hide Wt 2.2 Body length 118.5 Tail length 14.5 Head length 26.1 Interorbital width 11.0 Girth 73.0 Shoulder height 78.0 Neck circumference (a) 29.0 Neck circumference (b) 38.0 Ear length (left) 19.0 Ear length (right) 19.0 Hind foot length (left) 44.1 length (right) 43.9 Hoof length (front left) 6.4 (front right) 6.4 (rear left) 6.1 6.1 (rear right) 11.0 Meta-gland length (left) length (right) 12.0 Meta-gland width (left) 4.5 width (right) 4.5 Tarsal gland width (left) 4.0 Tarsal gland width (right) 4.0 4.0 Scrotum length width 4.5 3.0 height 8.5 Prepuce length Antler beam diameter (left) beam diameter (right) beam length (left) beam length (right) 1 point no. (left) 1 point no. (right) 8.0 inside. spread 8.0 tip-to-tip spread Wt (left) g Wt (right) g brow tine length (left) brow tine length (right) 4-29 0-10 37.1 26.6 24.1 2.5 121.5 15.5 26.3 11.2 75.0 78.0 27.0 34.0 20.0 20.0 43.4 43.2 6.3 6.3 6.1 6.0 1l.5 11.5 4.0 4.0 4.5 4.5 4.5 3.0 2.0 9.5 1 1 6.0 Collection No. 102 99 100 105 108 6-12 5-20 5-27 7- 2 7-23 2-11 6-11 5- 0 9- 1 1- 1 66.5 78.3 71.8 100.8 46.0 52.2 32.9 49.9 60.2 69.6 46.6 62.8 30.1 45.0 53.9 l.f.7 5.4 2.7 4.7 5.4 149.0 162.0 150.5 158.5 123.0 17.5 17.0 21.0 15.0 15.5 26.4 32.2 33.3 32.0 31.9 13.9 14.7 11.5 13.7 14.8 77.0 95.0 104.0 97.0 105.0 99.0 87.0 98.0 97.0 97.0 47.0 30.0 41.0 35.0 42.0 58.0 39.0 55.0 46.0 57.0 20.0 22.0 21.0 19.5 22.5 22.0 20.0 19.5 21.0 22.5 45.0 48.2 49.0 50.4 49.8 44.5 48.1 49.1 51.1 49.8 6.8 7.6 7.4 6.8 7.4 7.4 6.7 7.6 6.8 7.6 6.3 6.9 7.0 6.6 7.1 6.2 6.8 7.0 6.6 7.1 15.0 17 .0 13.5 12.0 20.0 13.5 14.5 17.0 20.0 11.5 6.O' 4.0 3.5 4.0 5.0 3.5 4.5 4.0 5.0 6.0 4.5 5.5 4.5 5.0 4.0 5.0 5.0 4.5 4.0 5.0 5.5 3.5 6.0 5.5 5.5 3.5 6.5 7.5 5.0 5.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 5.5 3.0 13.5 10.0 10.0 11.0 U .0 1.92 3.55 4.07 3.82 2.87 2.11 4.08 3.73 2.68 4.00 13.5 39.0 23.0 24.0 11.0 11.0 24.0 36.0 24.0 13.0 1 2 2 2 1 1 2 2 2 1 16.0 49.0 38.0 49.0 21.0 16.0 49.0 38. 49. 21.0 62 770 423 481 80 51 665 463 422 91 5.5 4.0 2.0 5.5 3.5 4.5 �-85- Table 2. Weights (kg) and External Body Measurements of 23 Male Deer, 1963. (continued) Date-Age-Measurements Antler pedicel length (left) ped icel length (right) Stage: Bone Velvet Velvet Shedding Pelage color dorsol rostrum interorbital occipital brisket outer thigh umbil LeaI (anterior) front knees Pelage sample Wt (g) (cm) 94 96 Collection No. 99 100 102 2.00 1.80 2.10 2.40 1.76 1.59 1.51 preserved 1.46 ++"\J ++'v '" "" 'v '-..J <: 10YR 7.5/2 10YR 6/3 5YR 6/2 10YR 6/2 10YR 7.5/2 10YR 8/1 10YR 9/2 24.7 10YR 9/1 lOYR 6/2 lOYR 6/2 10YR 6/1 10YR 7.5/1 10YR 9/1 10YR 7/5 21.1 10YR 9/1 5YR 4/3 10YR 6/4 10YR 6/1 10YR 7/1.5 10YR 7.5/2 10YR 9/6 10YR 8/1.5 10YR 6/5 10YR 6/5 10YR 8/5 10YR 7/3 10YR 9/2 10YR 7.5/6 7.0 10YR 8/1.5 lOYR 6/3 10YR 5.5/4 10YR 8/2 lOYR 9/2 10YR 9/2 10YR 9/6 6.5 10YR 8/7 10YR 7.5/8 10YR 7/6 10YR 7.5/8 lOYR 7/3 10YR 9/8 10YR 8/7 7.3 10YR 8/1 10YR 7.5/6 10YR 4/2 10YR 7.5/6 10YR 7.5/6 10YR 8/4 10YR 9/4 11.7 105 108 1.40 1.70 ++ Antler growth barely started, difficult to distinguish antler beam and antler pedicel. �-fl9- Table 2. Weights (kg) and External Body Measurements (em) of 23 Male Deer, 1963. (continued) Date-Age-Measurements 111 113 Collection No ,: 114 119 020 Collection Date (Month-Day) 8-13 9- 6 9-10 Estimated Age (Year-Month) 1- 3 0- 3 1- 2 Carcass Wt-Bled 54.2 28.4 52.7 Carcass Wt-Eviscerated 39.2 22.0 37.9 Carcass Wt-Skinned 19.4 34.6 .34.8 Hide Wt 4.2 2.6 3.0 Body length 137.0 111.5 134.5 Tail length 19.0 15.5 16.5 Head length 27.7 27.4 22.4 Interorbital width 12.0 12.0 9.7 Girth 84.0 66.0 80.0 Shoulder height 88.0 91.0 74.0 Neck circumference (a) 31.0 34.0 26.0 Neck. circumference (b) 35.0 45.0 46.0 Ear length (left) 21.0 21.0 19.0 Ear length (right) 21.0 19.0 21.0 Hind foot length (left) 46.5 40.6 46.3 Hind foot length (right) 46.5 40.6 46.5 Hoof length (front left) 6.0 7.2 7.0 6.0 Hoof length (front right) 7.3 7.0 5.7 Hoof length (rear left) 6.7 6.6 . Hoof length (rear right) 7.0 5.6 6.5 12.5 15.0 Meta-gland length (left) 17.0 12.5 15.0 (right) 17.0 3.5 4.S Meta-gland width (left) 4.0 4.5 3.5 (right) 4.0 Tarsal gland width (left) 4.S 4.5 5.0 4.5 4.S (right) 5.0 3.5 Scrotum length 7.0 5.0 6.0 2.5 width 5.0 1.5 4.S height 4.0 11.0 6.0 Prepuce length 9.0 2.06 1.97 Antler beam diameter (left) .. beam d iameter (right) 1.90 2.07 21.5 24.0 beam length (left) 23.0 beam length (right) 26.0 1 2 2 point no. (left) 1 2 2 point no. (right) 6.5 24.5 21.0 .inside spread 23.5 6.5 16.0 tip-to-tip spread 124. 130. Wt (left) g 121. 155. Wt (right) g 0.0 brow tine length (left) 2.0 bro.w tine length (right) 122 123 10-16 11-20 11-26 0- 4 5- 5 1- 5 34.8 103.5 58.1 43.2 25.2 86.0 38.5 22.4 76.3 2.8 4.6 8.6 135.0 117.5 165.0 140.0 15.5 20.0 20.0 18.0 24.0 32.6 28.9 29.5 11.9 12.8 12.4 9.9 91.0 70.0 117.0 96.0 92.0 77.0 91.0 61.5 37.0 27.0 31.0 80.0 52.0 41.0 21.0 21.5 19.0 22.0 22.0 21.0 19.0 21.5 48.5 52.0 46.5 41.7 48.5 41.5 52.0 46.5 6.1 8.3 6.9 7.0 7.0 8.3 6.1 6.9 8.2 5.7 6.9 6.7 8.4 6.7 6.8 S.7 lS.O 15.0 13.0 12.5 15.0 13.0 16.5 l2.S 4.0 5.0 4.0 3.5 4.0 5.0 4.0 4.0 5.0 3.S 5.0 5.0 5.0 4.0 3.5 5.0 10.0 7.0 3.S 7.0 4.0 7.0 6.0 6.5 2.0 14.5 9.0 8.0 1.50 2.96 1.48 1.50 3.1S 1.54 21.0 51.0 22.0 19.5 48.0 24.0 2 1 4 2 2 4 1 2 20.0 43.5 17.5 7.0 7.b 31.0 18.0 9.0 57. 564. 72. 49. 535. 59. 1.5 0 0.0 0 10-6 1-4 56.7 41.6 �-9DTable 2. Weights (kg) and External Body Measurements of 23 Male Deer, 1963 (continued) Date-Age-Measurements Antler ped icel length (left) pedicel length (right) Stage: Bone Velvet Velvet Shedding Pelage'color dorsal rostrum interorbital occipital brisket .ou ter thigh umbi1ica (anterior) front knees Pelage sample Wt (g) * . Beam not protruding. -In'c Skin covered bone. 111 113v 1.68 1.20 0.46 0.58 (cm) Collection No.' 114 020 119 * 10YR 8/1 10YR 7/2 10YR 6/2 10YR 7/4 10YR 7.5/6 10YR 9/4 10YR 9/5 13.1 10YR ' 10YR 7/1 8/1.5 10YR" 10YR 6/2 7/3 10YR 10YR 6/2 4.5/2 lOYR 10YR 6/1 7.5/4 10YR 10YR 7/3 7.5/6 10YR 10YR 9/4 7.5/4 10YR 10YR 9/4 7.5/6 17.3 13.8 122 123 1.01 1.12 1.00 1.08 10YR 10/1 10YR 6/1 10YR 4/1 10YR 3/1 10YR 6.5/2 10YR 10/1 10YR 8/4 54.3 10YR 10/1 10YR 10/2 10YR 5/2 10YR 5/1 10YR 7/1.5 10YR 7.5/1 10YR 8/3 47.6 ** 10YR 9/1 10YR 6/1 10YR 6/2 10YR 4/1 10YR 6/2 10YR 6/1 10YR 8/3 10YR 8/1 10YR 4/2 .10YR 4/1.5 10YR 3/2 10YR 7/3 10YR 6/1 10YR 7/6 30.9 �-91Table 2. Weights (kg) and External Body Measurements (em) of 23 Male Deer, 1963. (continued) Da te-Age-Measuremen ts Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Carcass Wt-Bled Carcass Wt-Eviscerated Carcass Wt-Skinned Hide Wt Body length Tail length Head length Interorbital width Girth Shoulder height Neck circumference (a) Neck circumference (b) Ear length (left) Ear length (right) Hind foot length (left) . length (right) Hoof length (front left) (front right) (rear left) (rear right) Meta-gland length (left) length (right) Meta-gland width (left) wid th (right) Tarsal gland width (left) Tarsal gland width (right) Scrotum length width height Prepuce length Antler beam diameter (left) beam diameter (right) beam length (left) beam length (right) point no. (left) point no. (right) inside spread tip-to-tip spread Wt (left) g Wt (right) g brow tine length (left) brow tine length (right) Collec tion No .: 124 127 12-4· 1-6 52.4. 39.4 34.8 4.4 137.0 18.0 29.4 12.9 88.0 92.0 38.0 47.0 19.5 20.0 47.1 47.2 6.9 7.0 6.4 6.5 15.0 15.5 5.0 4.5 4.5 4.5 6.5 6.0 3.5 10.5 2.03 2.06 24.0 21.0 12~26 1-6 56.2 42.4 37.6 4.7 139.0 18.0 28.9 12.5 89.0 96.0 38.0 47.0 20.0 20.0 49.0 49.0 7.1 7.2 6.9 6.6 16.5 18.5 4.0 2 2 2 22.0 20.0 103. 106. 19.0 21.5 94.0 51.0 l~.0 5.0 5.0 7.0 6.0 4.0 13.0 1.78 2.05 30.0 21.0 1 �-92Table 2. Weights (kg) and Ext.er na L Body Measurements of 23 Male Deer, 1963. (continued) Date-Age-Measurements Collection 124 Antler pedicel pedicel Stage: length (left) length (right) Bone Velvet· Velvet Shedding Pelage- color dorsal rostrum interorbital occipital brisket outer thigh umbilical front Pelage (anterior) knees sample wt (g) (cm) No., 127 0.54 0.71 'v _"J 10YR 9/1 10YR 8/1.5 10YR 3.5/2 10YR 3/2 10YR 7/3 10YR 7/1 10YR 7.5/6 48.7 10YR 9/1 10YR 3/1 10YR 3/1 10YR 2/1 10YR 6/3 10YR 6.5/1 10YR 7.5/4 �-93Table 3. Weights (kg) and External Body Measurements (cm) of 26 Female Deer, 1963. (++ indicates pregnancy) Date-Age-Measurements ( ( Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Carcass Wt-Bled Carcass Wt-Eviscerated Carcass Wt-Skinned Hide Wt Body length Tail length Head length Interorbital width Girth Shoulder height Neck circumference (a) Neck circumference (b) Ear length (left) (right) Hind foot length (left) length (right) Hoof length (front left) (front right) (rear left) (rear right) Meta-gland length (left) length (right) Meta-gland width (left) wid th (right) 'I'ars a L gland width (left) wid th (right) Vulva length Vulva width Mammary gland length width depth Nipple length (front left) (front right) (rear left) (rear right) (front left) Nipple basal diam (front right) (rear left) (rear right) Collection No.' 82++ 83++ 84++ 88++ 91++ 93++ 1-16 5- 7 64.2 46.1 41.7 4.4 147.5 16.5 30.9 12.4 91.0 93.0 38.0 49.0 20.5 20.5 48.5 48.3 7.8 7.9 7.2 7.1 15.0' 16.0 5.5 6.0 5.0 5.0 2.2 0.4 11.5 11.0 3.0 1.7 1.6 1.9 2.0 1.0 1.1 1.1 1.3 1-23 9- 7 67.0 47.5 43.0 4.5 146.0 19.0 30.3 12.9 93.0 93.0 33.0 46.0 19.5 19.5 46.8 46.9 7.2 6.9 6.7 6.9 13.5 13.0 5.0 4.0 6.0 6.0 4.2 1.0 9.0 11.0 3.5 2.0 2.1 2.0 2.1 1.1 1.2 0.8 1.0 1-30 2-27 3-13 3-20 3- 8 8- 9 4- 7 9- 9 56.7 57.9 60.2 68.7 39.3 44.4 46.3 40.8 42.2 37.0 35.7 39.6 4.1 3.6 4.8 3.8 138.0 140.0 147.0 144.0 18.0 15.. 0 18.0 17.0 31.3 30.2 29.6 29.9 13.2 13.2 13.6 11.9 96.0 88.0 86.0 91.0 87.0 . 91.0 91.0 94.0 32.0 32.0 32.0 32.0 42.0 39.0 47.0 42.0 20.5 20.5 20.0 20.0 20.5 . 20.0 20.5 20.0 47.5 46.9 45.6 47.6 46.6 47.3 45.9 47.6 7.0 7.2 7.2 6.7 7.1 7.3 7.1 7.0 6.5 6.8 7.2 6.8 6.7 6.7 7.3 6.5 15.0 . 14.5 14.5 16.5 14.5 14·.5 14.0 16.5 5.0 5.0 6.0 6.0 5.0 4.5 6.0 6.0 5.5 6.0 6.0 4.5 5.5 6.0 6.0 4.5 3.6 3.2 3.0 3.2 1.5 . 1.0 1.0 1.5 11.5 12.0 9.0 9.0 12.0 11.0 11.0 10.5 1.2 1.9 2.0 1.5 1.4 1.2 1.0 1.4 1.4 1.5 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.6 1.5 1.7 1.7 1.6 1.8 1.4 0.8 0.7 0.4 0.5 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.4 1.0 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.9 0.8 0.5 0.6 4- 8 8-10 65.5 44.3 .40.0 4.3 148.0 17.0 30.2 12.5 94.0 93.0 31.0 41.0 21.0 21.0 47.5 47.5 6.9 6.5 6.4 6.4 15.0 15.0 5.5 6 .. 0 6.5 7.0 4.0 1.0 11.0 15.0 4.0 1.7 1.5 1.7 1.5 0.5 0.7 0.7 0.7 90++ �-94- Table 3. Da te-Age-Measurf:men Pelage Weights (kg) of 26 Female rostrum occipital brisket outer thigh umbilical front sample (Munsell, 84++ No .: 82++ 83++ 10YR 10YR 7/2 9/3 10YR 3/2 10YR 3.5/2 10YR 10YR 10YR 4/2 10YR 10YR 5/2 10YR 91++ 88++ 90++ 10YR 10YR 6.5/2 8/1.5 10YR 10YR 8/1.5 7.5/2 10YR 10YR 5.5/2 5/2 10YR' 10YR 6/2 5/4 10YR 10YR 6/1 4/2 10YR 1€WR 6.5/4 7.5/2 IO'Yl'{ 10YR 8/2 7.5/1 10YR 10YR 8/5 9/6 42.9 42.4 93++ -I color interorbital -/ Body Measurements (em) (++ indicates pregnancy) Collection ts dorsal Pelage and External Deer, 1963. ·wt. (anterior) knees (g) 1929-60) 6/2 10YR 5/2 10YR 4/1 3/2 10YR 6/3' 10YR 7/2 10YR 7/6 62.8 IO'YR 7/3 10YR 7/2 10YR 8/6 31. 6 3.5/2 IOYR. 3/1 lOYR 6/3 10YR ' 7/1.5 10YR 7/8 52.9 6/2 10YR 6/2 10YR 7/3 10YR 8/1 10YR 8/3 25.0 10YR 9/1 10YR 5/2 10YR 5/2 10YR 3/2 10YR 6/3 IOYR 8/1 10YR 9/5 22.4 �-99Table 3. Weights (kg) and External Body Me~surements (em) of 26 Female Deer, 1963. (++ indicates pregnancy) (continued) Date-Age-Measurements Collection No., 95++ Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Carcass Wt-Bled Carcass Wt-Eviscerated Carcass Wt-Skinned Hide Wt Body length Tail length Head length Interorbital width Girth Shoulder height Neck circumference (a) Neck circumference (b) Ear length (left) (right) Hind' foot length (left) length (right) Hoof length (front left) (front right) (rear left) (rear right) Meta-gland length (left) length (right) Meta-gland wLd t h (left) width (right) Tarsal gland width (left) width (right) Vulva length Vulva width Mammary gland length width depth Nipple length (front left) (front right) (rear left) (rear right) Nipple basal (front left) diam (front right) (rear left) (rear right) 97 4-22 5- 6 4-10 0-11 33.6 49.5 35.2 24.6 32.1 22.2 3.1 2.4 133.0 123.5 19.0 15.5 24.9 27.6 11.9 10.9 86.0 71.0 86.0 77.0 27.0 27.0 35.0 44.0 19.0 19.5 19.5 19.0 44.2 42.3 44.2 42.4 6.1 6.1 6.3 6.1 5.6 6.1 6.1 5.8 15.0 ' 15.0 15.0 13.5 5.0 5.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.0 2.0 2.0 1.0 0.5 11.0 8.5 7,0 10.0 1.1 4.0 1.0 0.3 1.0 0.4 0.4 1.5 1.5 0.3 0,3 0.5 0,5 0.4 0.7 0.3 0.4 0.8 98++ 101++ 103 104 5-13 6- 5 8-11 4- 0 ,63.6 70.8 47.3 43.1 43.3 39.8 4.0 3.3 145.5 138.0 15.5 17.0 30.2 30.2 13.0 12.7 92.0 93.0 94.0 95.0 31.0 30.0 38.0 45.0 19.0 20.5 19.0 2U.5 49.1 46.2 49.2 46.5 7.0 6.6 6.7 6.6 6.3 7.0 6.4 6.9 15.0 13.5 15.0 13.0 5.5' 5.0 5.5 5.0 5.0 4.0 5.5 4.0 2.5 4.0 1.2 1.5 12,0 14.5 14.0 11.5 6,0 <.o 1.5 1.2 1.4 1.8 1.4 2.5 1.5 1.8 0.7 1.7 0.8 1.} 0,8 1.8 1.0 0.9 6-19 1- 0 29.1 21.9 20.2 1.7 123.5 16.5 25.1 10.2 67.0 76.0 24.0 32.0 19.0 19.0 41.6 41.4 6.0 6.0 5.9 5.9 12.5 12.5 3.5 3.5 4.5 4.5 2.0 0.4 7.5 7.0 1.3 0.6 0,4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.3 0.5 0.4 6-26 7- 9 0-0.6 1- 0 40.1 6.7 5.4 27.4 4.7 '25.0 2.4 0.7 67.0 120.0 10.0 19.0 26.0 15.7 11.6 7.0 75.0 40.0 49.0 84.0 26.0 33.0 11.5 19.0 11.5 19.0 28.0 44.5 44.5 27.8 6.3 3.8 6.5 3.5 5.8 3.5 6.1 3.5 12.0 7.0 13.0 9.0 4.0 2.0 5.0 2.0 4.0 2.5 2.5 4.0 0.5 2.0 0.6 0.4 6.5 3.5 5.0 6.5 0.0 1.5 0,5 0.4 0.3 0.9 0.8 0.4 0.8 0.4 0.2 '0.4 0.3 0.2 0.4 0.2 0.4 0.2 106 �q(l c..•... -. -96- Table 3. Weights (kg) and External Body Me~surements (em) of 26 Female Deer, 1963. (++ indicates pregnancy) Collection No .. Date-Age-Measurements 9S++ Pelage color dorsal rostrum (continued) 10YR 6.S/2 SYR interorbital 6/2 SYR occipital S/3 10YR brisket 3/2 10YR outer thigh 6.S/2 umbilical (anterior) 10YR 8/1 10YR front knees 9/4 25.5 Pelage sample wt (g) 98++ 101++ 103 104 106 10YR 10YR SYR 7/1 8/1.S 6/2 10YR 10YR SYR 6/3 S.S/2 6.5/2 10YR SYR 10YR 5.S/2 ,6.S/2 6/1 10YR SYR 10YR 7/1 6.S/l 5/2 10YR 5YR 10YR 7/4 7.5/2 7/2 10YR· SYR 10YR 7.5/1 7.S/l 7.5/1 10YR 10YR SYR 9/6 9/4 9/6 5.9 19.5 10YR 8/2 10YR 7/S 10YR 6/2 10YR 7.5/2 10YR 7/5 10YR 9/4 10YR 7.5/6 11.1 10YR 7/1.S 10YR 6/3 10YR 7/3 10YR 6.5/1 10YR 6/3 10YR 10/1 10YR 7/5 8.8 10YR 9/1 10YR 7/S 10YR 4/1 10YR 7.5/4 10YR 7/S 10YR 7/1 10YR 7.5/6 10.6 97 �C;P. ,. ., t''"} ..•.. ~9'/- Table 3. Weights (kg) and External Body Measurements (em) of 26 Female Deer, 1963. (continued) Date-Age-Measurements ., { Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Carcass Wt-B1ed Carcass Wt-Eviscerated Carcass Wt-Skinned Hide Wt Body length Tail length Head length Interorbital width Girth Shoulder height Neck circumference (a) Neck circumference (b) Ear length (left) (right) Hind foot length (left) length (right) Hoof length (front left) (front right) (rear left) (rear right) Meta-gland length (left) length (right) Meta-gland width (left) width (right) Tarsal gland width (left) width (right) Vulva length Vulva width Marrnnarygland length width depth Nipple length (front left) (front right) (rear left) (rear right) Nipple basal (front left) diam (front right) (rear left) (rear right) Collection No. 112~h\- 115 116 117 9-18 3- 3 66.8 50.0 44.6 5.4 146.0 16.0 30.1 12.2 94.0 94.0 33.0 45.0 22.0 22.0 46.0 46.5 6.7 6.9 6.7 6.8 16.5 17.0 4.5 4.5 4.0 4.0 3.2 0.7 9.0 7.0 3.3 2.5 1.4 2.6 1.8 0.6 0.5 0.7 0.6 9-25 2- 3 73.2 54.2 48.0 6.2 146.0 16.0 29.2 12.7 97.0 90.0 34.0 41.0 21.0 20.5 47.3 47.3 7.4 7.3 7.0 7.1 14.0 14.0 4.5 4.0 4.5 4.5 3.2 0.4 8.0 7.5 2.7 1.3 1.2 1.3 1.2 0.7 0.7 0.8 0.7 10-1 0- 4 33.0 25.1 22.1 3.0 109.0 17.0 22.4 10.2 69.0 73.0 25.0 31.0 19.0 19.0 39.5 39.5 6.1 5.7 5.9 5.8 9.5 10.5 3.0 3.5 3.5 3.5 2.0 0.6 6.0 5.0 3.0 0.5 0.6 0.6 0.7 0.3 0.5 0.4 0.4 107~\- 109 7-16 2- 1 57.2 40.4 36.3 4.1 145.0 17.0 29.6 12.2 83.0 92.0 7-30 8- 6 8-20 4- 2 3- 1. 4- 2 53.5 65.7 62.2 38.2 44.5 45.9 35.3 40.4 41.3 2.9 4.1 4.6 135.0 147.0 138.0 19.0 16.0 13.0 30.8 28.8 28.2 13.0 12.4 12.2 89.0 86.0 87.0 91.0 86.0 87.0 29.0 30.0 32.0 44.0 ·37.0 42.0 20.0 19.5 19.0 20.0 19.5 19.5 44.8 45.7 46.5 46.5 44.9 45.7 69 7.1 7.2 6.9 7.1 7.0 6.4 6.9 6.7 6.6 6.5 7.3 13.5 15.0 13.0 13.5 15.0 12.5 4.5 4.5 5.0 4.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 4.5 4.0 4.5 4.0 5.0 4.0 2.5 4.0 1.5 0.7 0.7 1l.S 18.5 15.5 1l.0 11.0 16.5 5.1 6.5 9.2 1.6 1.6 1.2 1.2 1.7 1.3 1.6 2.5 1.8 1.7 1.8 2.2 0.8 0.7 0.9 0.8 0.8 0.9 1.1 1.0 1.2 1.1 0.9 1.3 21.5 21.5 47.7 47.6 7.2 7.0 6.8 6.7 15.0 15.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 5.0 2.8 0.9 14.0 11.5 8.4 1.5 1.2 1.6 1.7 1.0 0.8 1.2 1.1 110"( 0 �-98Table 3. Weights (kg) and External Body Measurements of 26 Female Deer, 1963. (continued) (cm) �..:.:;.. " Table 3. Weights (kg) and External Body Measurements (em) of 26 Female Deer, 1963. (continued) Date-Age-Measurements - I Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Carcass Wt-B1ed Carcass Wt-Eviseerated Carcass Wt-Skinned Hide Wt Body length Tail length Head length Interorbital width Girth Shoulder height Neck circumference (a) Neek circumference (b) Ear length (left) (right) Hind foot length (left). length (right) Hoof length (front left) (front right) (rear left) (rear right) Meta-gland length (left). length (right) Meta-gland width (left) width (right) Tarsal gland width (left) wi4th (right) Vulva length Vulva width Mannnary gland length width depth Nipple length (front left) (front right) (rear left) (rear right) Nipple basal (front left) diam (front right) (rear left) (rear right) Collection No: 118 120')'( 121 125+ 126+ 10-8 1-4 60.8 45.2 40.3 4.9 146.0 17.0 28.2 11.3 92.0 92.0 31.0 46.0 . 20.0 20.0 47.5 47.5 7.1 7.3 6.9 6.6 16.0 16.0 4·.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 2.0 0.7 8.0 7.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 0.9 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.4 10-22 9- 4 70.2 49.3 44.0 5.3 149.0 21.0 30.5 12.6 91.0 96.0 33.0 42.0 21.0 21.0 50.0 50.0 7.2 7.1 6.9 6.8 13.5 13.5 3.5 4.0 4.0 4.0 2.7 1.5 15.0 12.0 5.5 2.0 2.3 2.5 2.3 0.9 1.0 0.8 1.3 11-12 0..,. 5 35.7 26.2 23.4 2.8 122.5 13.5 24.7 10.5 75.0 76.0 28.0 36.0 20.0 20.0 41.2 41.3 6.1 6;2 5.9 5.8 12.0 12.0 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 1.9 0.6 8.0 7.0 1.6 0.5 0.5 0.6 0.6 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.5 12-10 4- 6 57.8 42.1 37.9 4.2 154.0 15.0 28.4 12.1 90.0 90.0 34.0 49.0 21.0 20.0 47.5 47.5 7.2 7.0 6.9 6.8 15.0 15.0 4·.. 5 4.5 6.0 4.0 3.0 1.0 13.0 7.0 3.0 1.6 2.0 2.0 2.0 0.8 0.9 0.7 0.9 12-17 9- 6 60.7 45.9 41.7 4.2 143.5 12.5 30.2 ii .s 92.0 87.0 34.0 47.0 18.5 19.0 43.4 43.4 6.6 6.9 6.4 6.4 13.0 12.5 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 2.9 1.2 12.0 10.5 3.1 1.4 1.3 1.5 1.5 1.0 1.1 0.9 1.1 n I!... p. �-1[10- Table 3. Weights (kg) and External Body Measurements (cm) of 26 Female Deer, 1963. (continued) 0 Collection No." Date-Age-Measurements 118 Pelage color dorsal rostrum 10YR 8/1 lOYR interorbital 5/1 lOYR occipital 6/1 brisket 10YR 3/1 outer thigh 10YR 6/1.5 umbilical (anterior)10YR 5/1 10YR " front knees 7/3 Pelage sample wt (g) 35.5 + Possibly gravid. 120~\- 121 125+ 126+ 10YR 9/1 IOYR 6/2 IOYR 6/1 10YR 4/1 18YR 6/3 10YR 7/1.5 5YR 8/4 21.7 10YR 7.5/2 10YR 4/1 10YR 3/2 IOYR 3/2 10YR 6/4 10YR 6.5/2 10YR 7.5/6 38.9 10YR" 7.5/1 10YR 5/1 10YR 5.5/1 10YR 3.5/1 IOYR 6.5/2 10YR 6/1 10YR 7.5/6 29.5 10YR 9/2 10YR 3.5/2 10YR 3/2 IOYR 2.5/2 10YR 6/4 10YR 7/1 10YR 7.5/6 34.1 �Table 4. --Blood and Tissue Analyses of 26 Female Deer, 1963. Date-Age-Wt Ratio-Item 82++ Collection Date (Henth-Day) 1-16 Estimated Age (Year-Hon th) 5-7 Eviscera ted VIti .31 Body Length Ratio Degree of Serum Hemolysis 0 Erythrocyte Count (millions Imm3) 5.77 Packed Cell Volume 52 (percent) Hemoglobin 16,.8 (g/10Om1) Leucocyte Count (thousands Imm3) 5.00 Differential Counts (percent) Segmented Neutrophils 79 1 Band Neutrophils Lymphocytes 19 Monocytes 0 1 Eosinophils Basophils 0 Blood Serum 143 Na (meq/liter) (meq11 iter) 6.7 K 4.4 Ca (meq/liter) 6.8 P (mg/100ml) Mg (meq/liter) 3.5 6.9 Protein (g/10Oml) 56 Vitamin A(IU/I00m1) 10.0 Carotene (IU provitamin A/10Om1) 83++ 84++ 88++ 90-1+ 91++ g-3-Sd- 95++ 97'1; 9S++ 101++ 103 104 1-23 1-30 2-27 3-l3 3-20 4-S 4-22 5-6 5-l3 . 6-5 6-19 6-26 9-7 4-7 3-8 9-9 8-9 8-10 4-10 0-11 8-11 4-0 1-0 0-0.6 .33 .30 .28 .30 0 0 0 0 .32 .30 .26 0 0 .20 m .32 se .31 0 0 .18 m .08 s 4.28 6.88 6.45 6.25 10.5 4.0 6.35 7.20 7.21 7.3 10.84 6.55 35 50 46 48 62 24 40 36 46 43 55 36 11.7 15.5 15,5 . 16.8 21.3 :.8,8 l3,9 16.0 15,1 16.2 22.S 10,7 2.80 2.20 2.80 2.60 4,30 1.35 2.60 2.50 2.00 1.70 7.50 4.90 I f-<> $ I 64 0 44 2 0 0 .56 0 40 4 0 0 55 1 43 1 0 0 56 0 43 1 0 0 62 0 33 5 0 0 154 7.5 5.4 13.0 3.5 5.8 125 1.7 140 3.6 4.2 9.2 2.S 5.8 124 5.0 158 10.2 5.0 6.2 4.6 6.0 113 0 155 8.9 6.1 20.2 2,8 5.8 245 160 l3.3 6.7 6.0 2.3 6.7 205 0 0 175 10.3 6.1 6,9 3,6 5.7 200 0 64 0 33 3 0 0 68 0 21 5 4 0 40 0 40 5 11 4 58 0 35 3 3 1 49 0 37 4 8 2 58 0 36 5 1 0 120 8.5 8.1 7.3 1.9 6.3 190 145 10,2 6.2 7,0 2.2 7.7 190 tr 140 8.2 6,0 6.1 2.4 5.1 210 .tr 150 10.4 6.7 6.8 2.4 6.3 lS0 tr 175 10.8 6,5 6.4 2,4 6.2 220 8 185 10.9 6,4 6.5 2,5 6,6 175 17 0 . \ r= ."f'~~ .'.:.-; ;(:\ �f""~ .,;) ;~,c) Table 4--Blood and Tissue Analyses of 26 Female Deer, 1963. (continued) Date-Age-Wt Ratio-Item Liver Vitamin A (IU/g) Liver Carotene (IU provitamin A/g) Adrenal Ascorbic Acid (ug/g) 82++- 83+t- 84++- 88++- 9Ot+ 9l++- Collection No. 95-1-1- 97"1: 93+;+ 98++- -10l++-~-lO3-~104 690 505 1230 400 1240 665 1345 2320 730 780 800 1120 690 I 1-' 865 775 500 280 960 1125 860 465 875 1165 535 2500 175 c f\J I 710 ++- Indicate~ pregnancy *+ Indicates lactation ) Indicated possibly gravid 0 None Slight s m Moderate se Severe * Blood clotted 470 150 825 750 750 795 815 650 950 260 750 330 �Table 4.--B100d and Tissue Analysis of 26 Female Deer, 1963. (continued) Date-Age-Wt Ratio-Item 106 107'>'~+109 110~'~+ 1121'~+ 115 Collection Date (Honth-Day) 7-16 7-30 8-6 7-9 Estimated Age (Year-Honth) 1-0 2-1 4-2 3-1 Eviscerated l-ltBody Length Ratio, .23 .28 .28 .30 Degree of Serum 0 s Hemolysis m 0 Erythrocyte,Count (millions /rrun3) 8.07 8.69 9.85 7.06 Packed Cell Volume 42 37 50 50 (percent) Hemoglobin (g/100m1) 12.3 13.7 17.1 17.1 Leucocyte Count 3.50 2.35 (thousands /rrun3) 1.10. 4.75 Differential Counts (percent) . Segmented 42 38 41 49 Neutrophils 1 0 2 Band Neutrophils 0 34 34 21 46 Lymphocytes 2 2 0 Honocytes 4 18 12 40 Eosinophils 9 ~O 2 2 Basophils 0 Blood Salts 190 155 170 160 Na (meq/li ter) 11.3 8.5 10.9 9.7 K (meq/li ter) 7.8 6.8 6.9 Ca (meq/liter) 6.5 8.4 8.8 6.6 6.6 P (mg/10Om1) 3.1 2.8 2.1 Mg (meq/1iter) 2.9 5.0 7.7 5.3 Blood Protein (g/lOOml) 6.9 Blood Vitamin A ll5 165 165 195 (IU/100m~) Collection No. 116 117 118 120'>'(+ 121 125) 126) 8-20 9-18 9-25 10-1 10-8 10-22 11-12 12-10 12-17 4-2 3-3 2-3 0-4 1-4 9-4 0-5 4-6 9-6 .33 .34 .37 .23 .31 .33 .21 .27 .32 m s s s se 0 s ill 0 10.03 13.18 8.73 8.51 9.48 6.50 9.82 8.00 8.85 72 27.5 77 27.4 50 18.0 49 18.6 48 17.1 34 12.5 46 18.0 47 18.0 50 21.6 4.65 2.00 2.30 1.60 6.50 1.20 1.85 2.30 2.50 I I-' a ~ I 50 0 38 0 11 1 70 0 26 0 4 0 45 1 38 6 10 0 48 0 45 5 2 0 26 2 39 10 15 4 56 0 44 0 0 0 46 0 48 0 6 0 45 42 2 8 3 41 0 30 7 20 2 130 11.4 6.1 9.1 2.4 6.3 155 11.0 6.4 8.4 2.6 4.6 140 7.8 6.4 8.4 2.7 5.3 160 10.4 6.2 7.2 2.4 4.8 140 7.1 6.6 7.5 2.4 5.8 160 7.9 5.9 4.7 2.9 '7.1 165 9.'8 7.3 6.8 2.8 5.5 165 10.2 7.2 8.6 2.5 5.4 180 10.9 6.9 7.2 2.5 5.7 165 145 185 . 105 llO 95 175 120 135 0 ~.?; .. ,:~ l' !.~;> �I"~ ";~';) ~:n Table 4--B1ood and Tissue Analysis of 26 Female Deer, 1963. (continued) :;.', t.·,!·-Age-Ht Ra tio-Item Blood Carotene (IU provitamin AI 10Om1) Liver Vitamin A (IU/g) Liver Carotene (IU provitamin A/g) Adrenal Ascorbic Acid (ug/g) o -None s -Slight m -Moderate se-Severe 106 107~'~+ 109 1l0~':+ ll2~'~+ 115 tr tr tr 3 tr 0 Collection No. 116 117 118 tr 0 0 l20~':+ 121 125) 126) tr 0 0 tr I I- c'l +- 630 1010 1250 1245 1180 700 430 580 615 1240 680 630 610 1960 2370 1940 990 1260 600 200 790 400 615 700 590 490 530 380 680 930 1300 1410 660 1500 1045 1280 1300 1220, . I �Table 5. Blood and Tissue Analyses of 23 Male Deer, 1963. Date-Age-Wt Ratio-Item 80 81 85 86 Collection Date (Honth-Day) 2-13 1- 2 1- 9 2--6 Estimated Age (Year-Hon th) 0--8 4- 7 2- 8 4- 7 Eviscerated Wt/ Body Length Ratio .38 .37 .33 .18 Degree of Serum Hemolysis + 0 m 0 0 Erythrocyte Count (millions /rrun3) 5.9 7.0 8.5 7.04 Packed Cell Volume (percent) 50 54 53 46 Hemoglobin (g/10Offi1) 16.0 18.2 15.1 16.7 Leucocyte Count (thousands /rrun3) 3.30 5.00 3.40 2.80 Differential Counts (percent) Segmented Neutrophi1s58 68 56 67 Band Neu trophils 0 0 0 0 Lymphocytes 30 32 24 42 Monocytes 2 2 4 0 Eosinophi1s 0 5 0 1 Basophils 0 00 0 Blood Serum Na (meq/liter) 148 149 109 137 6.9 3.5 9.0 8.1 K (meq/liter) Ca (meq/liter) 3.3 3.6 4.9 4.0 P (rug / 1OOm1) 7.1 8.4 10.8 7.9 Mg (meq/liter) 2.6 4.1 3.5 " 2.5 Protein (g/10Om1) 6.8 7.0 6.0 6.0 164 195 113 Vitamin A(IU/10Om1) 171 Carotene (IU provitamin A/10Oml) 1.7 5.0 8.4 8.4 87 89 92 94 96~', 99 100 102 105 2-20 3- 6 3-27 4-15 4-29 5-20 5-27 6-12 7- 2 1- 8 5- 9 1- 9 0-10 0-10 2-11 6-11 5- 0 9- 1 .28 .34 .26 .21 .22 .33 .37 .35 .44 0 0 0 0 0 se 0 0 0 6.53 5.9 8.5 8.25 6.15 9.23 6.49 9.15 9.06 44 13.9 46 14.3 50 17.3 48 16.0 32 12.0 61 22.0 42 15.5 50 17.1 49 2.85 2.65 3.40 2.35 1.60 2.15 3.00 2.70 3.00 56 0 44 0 0 0 52 0 42 4 2 0 60 0 38 2 0 0 50 0 44 6 0 0 440 34 6 16 0 66 "11 4 6 0 56 0 37 4 3 0 64 " 0 26 4 6 0 34 0 25 5 36 0 150 . 9.1 3.4 7.2 0.9 7.4 177 130 7.6 6.8 7.2 2.5 5.6 235 180 10.2 6.9 6.1 2.1 5.8 210 130 9.7 6.7 7.2 2.4 7.2 240 160 10.8 7.1 10.2 2.4 6.9 270 170 7.8 6.1 6.4 2.6 5.9 170 160 10.1 6.1 6.3 2.4 5.9 185 155 10.6 6.3 6.2 2.7 - 5.9 210 180 10.0 6.5 6.4 2.7 6.8 190 5.0 0 0 0 0 5.0 tr tr tr 2 17.1 I t-J 0 IT\ I !""" .c» "'t::. r?:t �f"'_-',\ :';~~ "\J. Table 5. Blood and Tissue Analyses of 23 Male Deer, 1963. Date-Age-Wt Ratio-Item Li ver Vitamin A (IU/g) Liver Carotene (IU provitamin A/g) Adrenal Ascorbic Acid (ug/g) 80 81 85 86 87 89 92 94 96* 99 100 102 105 625 900 575 310 1205 695 200 475 540 1030 520 1060 440 675 1385 905 t555 640 2540 395 565 585 1065 1100 1520 900 1220 1120 785 455 900 665 0 300 320 800 800 300 680 c cI + o-none; s-slight; m-moderate; se-severe. * Blood clotted. I 1-' �Table 5. Blood and Tissue Analysis of 23 Male Deer, 1963. (continued) Date-Age-Wt Ratio-Item Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt-Body Length Ratio Degree of Serum Hemolysis+ Erythrocyte Count (mil1ions/rom3) Packed Cell Volume (percent) Hemoglobin (g/lOOml) Leucocyte Count (thousands/rom3) Differential Counts (percent) Segmented Neutrophi1s Band Neu trophils Lymphocytes Honocytes Eosinophils Basophils Blood Salts Na (meq/liter) K (meq/liter) Ca (meq/liter) P (mg/100Ml) Mg (meq/liter) Blood Protein (g/100mJ) Blood Vitamin A (IU/100m1) Blood Carotene (IU provitamin A/10Om1) Liver Vitamin A (IU/g) Liver Carotene (IU provitamin A/g) Adrenal Ascorbic Acid (ug/g) 9.55 47. 15.7 4.65 111 8-13 1-2 .28 s 8.80 42 14.5 5.50 Collection No. 113 114 119 10-16 9-10 9-6 1-3 0-4 0-3 .21 .29 .20 se s s 7.98 8.57 9.95 37 51 43 13.4 15.3 18.6 4.30 4.00 2.50 38 0 28 2 32 0 44 0 39 0 15 2 36 0 64 0 0 0 175 8.3 7.4 9.3 28 6.2 195 160 8.2 7.8 9.5 2.8 5.9 135 7 820 3160 1300 . 108 7-23 1-1 .27 0 0 122 11-20 5-5 .52 m 10.36 64 24.0 2.10 123~~ 11-26 1-5 .31 se 124 12-4 1-6 .29 s 7.0 40 14.5 1.20 127 12-26 1-6 .30 s 9.34 48 19.8 1.90 46 0 38 14 1 1 54 2 30 12 2 0 52 0 35 7 6 0 45 0 42 5 8 0 150 145 10.8 . 10.0 6.8 7.5 10.5 19.8 2.1 2.4 5.0 6.4 155 120 170 6.8 6.3 8.5 2.3 5.4 125 190 10.7 7.2 7.2 2.6 5.9 140 155 9.9 7.4 7.4 2.6 6.6 155 170 10.4 7.8 7.1 2.8 5.1 160 170 10.6 7.3 9.4 2.5 6.0 150 3 99Q 0 695 0 495 tr 800 0 530 tr 700 0 490 0 710 945 1170 660 1190· 785 1140 1120 1190 390 1150 600 0 450 1025 760 950 43 0 38 15 3 1 ,_..I 0 -...J I + o-none; s-slight; m-moderate; se-severe * Blood "clotted i"'<·>-' _,··~f" .•!_-~j t-~ .••. !.~ �-108- Table 6. Measurements (em), Fresh Weights (g), and Volumes (cc), of Organs from 23 Male Deer, 1963. Date-Age-Wt Ratio-Organ Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wtl Body Length Ratio Brain Long Diam Trans Diam Wt Vol Eyeball (left) Long Diam Trans Diam Wt Vol Eyeball (right) Long Diam Trans Diam Wt Vol Lung (left) Wt (right) Wt Heart Long Diam Trans Diam Wt Vol Liver Long Di'am Trans Diam Height Dlain Wt Vol Kidney (left) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Kidney (right) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Collection No. 80 81 85 86 87 89 92 1- 2 1- 9 4- 7 2- 6 2- 8 2-13 2-20 4- 7 0- 8 1- 8 3- 6 5- 9 3-27 1- 9 .37 12.0 8.3 224.5 217.3 .26 .28 .38 .33 .18 .34 '12.0 12.0 12.1 11.1 12.1 ·10.8 8.0 7.5 7.6 8.2 7.6 7.7 181.3 194.5 174.8 186.9 185.4 216.0 179.6 209.0 175.7 188.9 165.9 3.50 3.46 18.67 18.34 3.45 3.09 3.35. 3.08 17.95 17.15 17.35 16.55 2.77 3.11 14.36 14.03 3.40 3.16 17.38 17.33 3.41 3.24 20.23 19.74 2.82** 2.62 12.27 12.04 3.23 3.59 2.70 3.25 2.93 3.41 3.44 3.11 3.03 3.22 2.93 3.00 3.38 3.00 18.45 19.00 17.47 14.28 17.53 27.95 16.55 18.37 16.85 13.88 17.12 27.42 16.09 17.95 315.0 410.0 340.0 420.0 340.0 510.0 640.0 590.0 63Q.0* 530.0 13.4 13.6 10.5 16.4 16.4 15.3 15.1 10.1 10.0 11.0 7.5 8.4 11.7 12.9 424.2 268.6 500.1 539.3 629.5· 612..8 620.5 606.6 5.86.6 592.7 265.5 478.8 513.7 408.9 32.3' 23.3 27.0 31.0 28.9 31.5 30.0 14.2 16.4 13.0 17.0 18.0 17.6 17.0 ·4.5 '4.2 4.4 3.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 1200.0 1105.0 660.0 1300.0 1370.0 1900.0 1570.0 1138.3 1047.3 1802.2 599.7 1478.3 8.97 4.66 3.90 112.2 110,1 8.84 9.44 5.59 5.40 4.75 4.32 115.9 142.5 111.9 135.8 8.79 8.88 6.96 5.48 5.97 4.32 4.45 4.13 3.18 55.5 113.3 124.9 54.9 110.0 122.2 7.89 5.12 4.00 83.2 79.4 9.51 4.51 4.30 117.9 113.0 8.40 9.08 5.62 5.49 4.53 4.46 119.2 139.1 114.6 133.3 8.88 9.27 6.88 5.58 5.15 4.22 3.10 3.97 3.96 52.7 109.4 121.8 52.1 105.6 117.9 8.20 4.87 3.78 78.8 76.4 �-109- Table 6. Measurements (cm), Fresh Weights (g), and Volumes (cc), of Organs from 23 Male Deer, 1963. Collection No. Date-Age-Wt Ratio-Organ 80 Spleen Wt Vol Stomach Wt with Contents Rumen-Reticulum Wt with Contents Rumen-Reticulum Contents Wt (wet) Rumen-Reticulum Contents Wt (oven dry) Percent Moisture (RumenRetic. Contents) * Blood in Lung. ~":* Odd Shape. 223.8 210.9 81 85 129.8 144.5 120.9 137.8 10390.0 9230.0 86 107.8 100.7 87 89 92 136.3 183-.3 135.3 174.9 8410.0 9400.0 3890.0 9560.0 8430.0 7660.0 8440.0 3380.0 8290.0 7200.0 6760.0 7360.0 2740.0 1057.0 85.3 1253.0 1192.0 81.5 83.8 425.0 84.5 �-110- Table 6. Measurements (em), Fresh Weights (g), and Volumes (cc), of Organs from 23 Male Deer, 1963. (continued) Co ll.ec tIon No. Date-Age-Wt Ratio-Organ Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt/ Body Length Ratio Brain Long Diam Trans Diam Wt Vol Eyeball (left) Long Diam Trans Diam Wt Vol Eyeball (right) Long Diam Trans Diam Wt Vol Lung (left) Wt (right) Wt Heart Long Diam Trans Diam Wt Vol Liver Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Kidney (left) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Kidney (right) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol 94 96 99 100 102 105 4-15 0-10 4-29 0-10 5-20 2-11 5-27 6-11 6-12 5- 0 7- 2 9- 1 .21 .22 .33 .37 .35 .44 11.3 7.7 176.9 170.1 9.7 8.0 188.5 181.2 9.5 7.1 211.3 203.5 11.2 8.37 200.8 192.3 11.5 8.0 186.8 180.4 11.7 8.3 219.3 211.3 2.85 3.25 14.26 ' 14.01 3.05 2.93 14.73 14.41 3.48 3.20 19.06 18.59 3.16 3.42 18.69 18.16 3.23 3.00 17.30 16.78 3.27 3.59 20.88 20.41 3.46 3.21 3.04 2.86 18.91 14.78 18.35 14.44 310. + 500. + 16.0 12.3 + 8.4 . 10.4 537.4 264.2 255.1 515.4 29.0 26.1 16.5 15.5 3.5 3.8 1380.0 1000.0 1292.7 943.3 3.29 3.10 19.02 18.36 550. 660. 14.5 9.7 583.9 558.8 32.5 18.7 4.0 1670.0 3.30 3.08 17.02 16.47 16.5 11.7 578.1 551.6 32.3 20.0 4.7 1915.0 1795.2 3.31 3.51 20.98 20.40 810. 1310. 18.0 13.9 742.8 712.4 34.5 19.5 3.1 2510.0 2389.5 2.91 3.28 14.67 14.34 340. 570. 14.0 8.8 311.6 298.6 26.0 15.6 3.1 990.0 939.6 8.11 4.71 3.53 71.5 67.1 7.60 4.49 '3.75 70.2 67.1 8.49 5.79 4.52 119.1 114.6 9.09 6.05 4.28 131.2 126.5 9.75 6.13 5.00 154.7 147.3 10.25 6.75 5.40 185.4 175.1 8.08 4.56 3.90 76.2 73.0 8.25 4.67 3.82 75.4 70.9 9.15 5.28 4.47 ll5.5 111.0 9.62 5.70 4.43 136.8 129.9 10.14 . 5.21 4.59 129.3 123.5 10.36 5.73 5.22 176.0 168.7 �-111- Table 6. Measurements (cm),.Fresh Weights (g), and Volumes (cc), of Organs from 23 Male Deer, 1963. (continued) Date-Age-Wt Ratio-Organ Collection No. 94 Spleen Wt 112.9 Vol 107.7 Stomach Wt with Contents 4120. Rumen-Reticulum Wt with Contents 3700. Rumen-Reticulum Contents Wt (wet) 3060. Rumen-Reticulum Contents Wt (oven dry) 530. Percent Moisture (RujuenRetic. C6ntents) 82.7 + Slight Bullet Damage. 96 99 100 102 105 100.2 95.6 4770. 153.5 146.2 .7440. 198.5 189.7 8100. 328.9 311.1 7940. 347.0 328.6 14150. 4300.. 6800. 7290. 12940. 3620. 5420. 6020. 10700. 533. 906. 811. 1215. 85.3 83.3 86.5 88.6 �-112Table 6. Measurements (em), Fresh Weights (g), and Volumes (ec), of Organs from 23 Male Deer, 1963 (continued) Collection No. Date-Age-Wt Ratio-Organ Collection Date (MontliDay) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt/ Body Length Ratio Brain Long. Diam Trans Diam Wt Vol Eyeball (left) Long. Diam Trans. Diam Wt Vol Eyeball (right) Long. Diam Trans Diam Wt Vol Lung (left) Wt (right) Wt Hea r t Long. Diam Trans Df.am Wt Vol Liver Long. Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Kidney (left) Long. Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Kidney (right) Long. Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol 108 III . 113 114 020 119 7-23 8-13 9- 6 9-10 10-6 10-16 1- 1 1- 2 1- 3 0- 3 1- 4 0- 4 .27 .28 .29 .20 ' .31 .21 11.2 8.02 184.7 175.4 13.4 7.82 200.5 192.0 11.3 8.4 180.0 173.5 10.1 8.8 158.7 152.1 10.2 7.8 168.2 160.1 3.26 2.92 15.52 15.15 2. 8l~ 3.09 14..31 13.66 2.93 2.99 14.38 14.02 2.37 2.74 19.88 19.57 2.99 .2.68 12.07 11.78 3.28 2.95 15.46 15.10 440. 530. 14.3 9.4 443.4 423,7 26.8 14.2 5.4 1155.0 2.54 2.80 13.77 13.20 475. 735. 14.0 10.6 496.9 480.4 30.8 15.2 5.0 l180.0 2.94 3.05 14.23 14.18 2.38 2.50 19.78 19.18 11.6 9.9 380.0 368.5 28.0 . 17.5 4.5 1220.0 11.1 8.2 273.8 253.9 22.7 13.5 3.0 730.0 682.4, 3.03 2.73 11.88 11.56 380. 490. 14.1 10.0 347.7 330.6 25.0 13.8 5.0 850.0 798.4 8.46 5.77 4.32 113.4 108.7 8.58 4.80 4.20 113.5 99.6 8.40 4.42 3.89 87.1 83.6 7.70 3.37 3.35 63.~ 60.9 8.78 5.22 4.02 102.7 96.8 9.19 4.30 4.08 106.2 101.7 8.65 4.14 3.89 84.7 81.2 7.56 3.78 3.00 59.7 56.0 300. 450. 15.1 9.5 415.3 6.98 5.97 3.70 79.3 8.04 4.68 3.48 80.2 75.0 8.82 3.72 2.96 62.0 58.5 �-113- Table 6. Measurements (em), Fresh Weights (g), and Volumes (cc), of Organs from 23 Male Deer, 1963. (continued) Date-Age-Wt Ratio-Organ Collection No. 108 Spleen Wt 182.3 Vol 172.1 Stomach Wt with Contents 4950. Rumen-Reticulum Wt with Contents 4330. Rumen-Reticulum Contents Wt (wet) 3150. Rumen-Reticulum Contents Wt (oven dry) 410. Percent Moisture (RumenRetic. Contents) , 87.0 *+ Small lobe on anterior ~dge. III 113 159.9*+ 151.0 6130. 150.0 142.6 114 020 119 148.2 137.8 2170. 214.6 200.2 3170. 5530. 1900. 2720. 4290. 1445. 2210. 498. 183. 313. 88.4 87.3 85.8 ( �-114- Table 6. Measurements (em), Fresh Weights (g), and Volumes (cc), of Organs from 23 Male Deer, 1963. (continued) Collection No. Date-Age-vlt Ratio-Organ Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wtl Body Length Ratio Brain Long. Diam Trans Diam Wt Vol Eyeball (left) Long. Diam Trans Diam Wt Vol Eyeball (right) Long. Diam Trans Diam Wt Vol Lung (left) Wt (right) Wt Heart Long. Diam Trans Diam Wt Vol Liver Long. Diam .Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Kidney (left) Long. Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Kidney (right) Long. Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol 122 123 124 127 11-20 5- 5 11-26 1- 5 12- 4 1- 6 12-26 1- 6 .52 .31 .29 .30 199.3 173.4 12.4 8.09 204.1 195.8 13.0 8.10 185.3 178.4 11.4 8.7 198.8 192.8 3.30 2.95 17.11 16.32 3.09·x 3.16 15.97 15.51 3.26 3.17 16.66 16.17 3.25 3.25 16.42 15.92 16.0 + 11.2 649.8 619.5 29.0 17.6 5.5 1700.0 1610.4 2.97 3.32 16.21 15.65 510. 530. 13.0 10.1 471.1 449.7 27.2 14.0 2.5 1550.0 1494.6 3.34 3.12 16.71 16.26 290. + 500. -I13.1 8.9 401.9 384.2 28.4 15.0 2,3 991.4 943.0 3.24 3.24 15.52 14.99 430. 530. 13.5 9.7 447.3 438.8 30.5 16.1 3.0 1010.0 950.0 9.48 4.28 4.28 123.4 121.2 7.82 5.17 3.73 82.3 78.7 7.60 4.27 3.12 66.2 63.2 8.19 4.4 3.7 76.7 71.5 9.71 4.50 4.05 119.6 116.0 7.74 4.90 3.54 75.5 72.0 7.35 4.34 2.39 60.9 57.7 8.40 4.45 3.15 80.3 75.7 3.16 3.00 17.09 16.29 460. �-115- Table 6. Measurements (em), Fresh Weights (g), and Volumes (cc), of Organs from 23 Male Deer, 1963. (continued) Date-Age-Wt Ratio-Organ Spleen Wt Vol Stomach Wt with Contents Rumen-Reticulum Wt with Contents Rumen-Reticulum Contents Wt (wet) Rumen-Reticulum Contents Wt (oven.dry) Percent Moisture (Rumen-Retic. Contents) + x Slight bullet damage. Slight dissection damage. Collection No. 122 123 124 127 181.3 172.7 4180.0 159.9 151.0 5750.0 146.0 139.1 5790.0 189.3 181.8 6530.0 3670.0 ·5070.0 5170.0 5880.0 2990.0 4360.0 4550.0 4910.0 440.0 85.3 578.0 86.7 699.0 84.6 870.0 82.3 �-lltSTable 7. Measurements (em), Fresh Weights (g), and Volumes (cc), of Organs from 26 Female Deer, 1963. Collection No. Date-Age-Wt Ratio-Organ Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt/ Body Length Ratio Brain Long. Diam Trans Diam Wt Vol Eyeball (left) Long. Diam Trans Diam Wt Vol Eyeball (right) Long. Diam Trans Diam Wt Vol Lung (left) Wt (right)Wt Heart Long. Diam Trans Diam Wt Vol Liver Long. Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Kidney (left) Long. Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Kidney (right) Long. Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol 82-1+ 83-1+ 84-1+ 88-1+ 90-1+ 91-1+ 1-16 5- 7 1-23 9- 7 1-30 4- 7 2-27 3- 8 3.,13 9- 9 3-20 8- 9 .31 .33 .30 .28 .30 .32 11.9 7.8 197.7 188.9 11.7 8.0, 198.7 191.5 11.5 8.0 190.2 180.1 12.3 8.0 187.7 178.4 11.0 8.0 182.5 174.9 10.6 7.4 207.9 199.7 3.40 3.12 20:5 19.36 3.52 3.55 20.75 19.85 12.55 12.38 3.41 3.09 17.95 17.58 3.33 3.10 17.38 16.96 3.39 3.17 19.8 19.27 3.59 3.25 20.0 13.34 490.0 570.0 15.2 10.3 606.8 579.6 29~7 16.7 6.4 1520.0 1435.0 3.49 3.17 20.79 20 .. 08 400.0 510.0 14.6 9.5 556.6 534.7 3.01 3.38 16.21 15.75 310.0 380.0 13.5 10.7 425,7 404.6 27.3 15.0 3.1 950.0 882.8 3.44 3.09 19.04 18.58 500.0 770.0 ·13.8 10.2 321.9 298.2 .·28.1 15.4 3.1 1310.0 1246.5 3.27 3.02 17.17 16.72 3:48 3.16 19.34 18.93 15.0 9.0 487.4 469.6 29.8 16.0 3.0 920.0 15.8 10.2 516.2 9.04 5.08 4.05 114.6 107.7 8.47 5.31 4.07 95.5 90.3 8.07 4.70 3.80 75.9 68.9 8.68 6.07 5.02 100.9 97.9 8.81 4.94 3.98 96.8 94.4 8.71 5.48 3.69 109.3 104.5 9.51 4.88 4.23 106.0 99.4 9.12 4.77 4.10 103.3 98.1 7.92 4.68 3.60 70.4 65.9 8.23 4.89 4·.18 90.5 86.0 9.07 4.74 4.00 96.8 96.1 8.88 5.53 4.59 115.2 109.3 + 16.1 7.0 x 495.L~ 29.5 16.6 3.3 1210.0 1127.7 �-117- Table 7. Measurements (cm) Fresh Weights (g), and Volumes (cc), of Organs from 26 Female Deer, 1963. Collection No. Date-Age-Wt Ratio-Organ Spleen Wt Vol Stomach Wt with Contents Rumen-Reticulum Wt with Contents Rumen-Reticulum Contents Wt (wet) Rumen-Reticulum Contents Wt (oven dry) Percent Moisture (Rumen-Retic. Contents) + Slight bullet damage. ++ Indicates pregnancy. x Slight dissection damage. *+ Indicates lactation. ) Indicates possibly gravid. 82++ 83++ 84++ 88++ 149.6 138.2 118.2 112.6 144.4 134.2 6390.0 209.4 197.6 '6700.0 195.7 184.9 6330.0 5750.0 6000.0 5600.0 4990.0 5120.0 4520.0 893.0 743.0 726.0 82.1 85.5 83.9 90++ 91++ �-118- Table 7. Measurements (em), Fresh Weights (g), and Volumes (cc), of Organs from 26 Female Deer, 1963. (continued) Date-Age-Wt Ratio-Organ Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt/ Body Length Ratio Brain Long. Diam Trans Diam Wt Vol Eyeball (left) Long. Diam Trans Diam Wt Vol Eyeball (right) Long. Diam Trans Diam Wt Vol Lung (left) Wt (right) Heart Long. Diam Trans Diam Wt Vol Liver Long. Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Kidney (left) Long. Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Kidney (right) Long. Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Collection No. 93+t 95+t 97 98+t 101+t 103 4- 8 8-10 4-22 4-10 5- 6 0-11 5-13 8-11 6- 5 4- 0 6-19 1- 0 .30 .26 .20 .32 .31 .18 11.5 8.1 200.1 194.4 11.6 8.0 166.5 160.7 n.5 8.9 165.0 160.0 14.1 9.1 182.1 174.7 11.1 8.1 215.6 208.0 10.7 7.4 175.1 169.0 3.48 3.n 19.35 18.92 3.44 3.13 17.05 16.66 3.17 2.91 14.22 13.79 3.22 3.41 17 .59 17.28 3.06 3.26 17.13 16.47 3.10 2.83 14.35 14.18 3.42 3.13 18.87 18.41 400.0 3.24 2.95 14.14 13.78 3.20 3.46 19.12 18.63 12.6 9.2 350.0 334.0 26.2 14.8 5.0 895.0 844.0 14.1 9.1 506.1 L~62. 0 27.7 16.1 3.0 1000.0 906.2 2.88 3.21 16.65 16.23 530. 610. 15.5 11.4 559.9 537.6 29.9 15.8 4.5 1610.0 1527.0 3.17 2.92 13.58 13.19 31.3 15.5 3.7 1165.0 1072.3 3.23 3.10 17.76 17.25 340. + 540. + 12.7 9.2 457.7 436.7 27.4 13.8 4.4 1090.0 1022.5 11.5 8.7 290.8 277.3 23.1 14.4 4.0 810.0 768.2 8.07 5.37 4.06 94.2 9l.6 7.61 4.54 3.17 71.5 66.1 8.05 4.52 3.71 77.7 74.6 8.84 5.28 4.08 108.5 10l.5 8.87 5.88 4.58 125.0 122.0 7.50 4.74. 3.35 70.0 67.0 8.20 5.42 4.25 89.7 87.1 7.67 4.81 3.70 7l.3 66.3 8.33 4.35 3.73 76.4 73.4 8.80 5.15 4.21 103.0 97.4 8.99 5.36 7.68 4.91 3.70 70.0 67.0 4.l~5 U5.1 n«, 3 �-119- Table 7. Date-Age-Wt Measurements (em), Fresh Weight (g), and Volumes of Organs from 26 Female Deer, 1963. (continued) Ratio-Organ Spleen Wt Vol Stomach Wt with Contents Rumen-Reticulum Wt with Contents Rumen-Reticulum Contents Wt (wet) Rumen-Reticulum Contents Wt (oven dry) Percent Moisture (Rumen-Retic. Contents) + Slight bullet damage. , I Collection 93-++ 95-++ 119.1 112.4 6650.0 135.5 127.5 4450.0 6070.0 (cc), No. 98-++ 101-++ 103 145.0 138.0 3570.0 163.2 134.9 5430.0 178.4 173.2 112.4 104.6 4040.0 3160.0 4640.0 4960.0 3060.0 2570.0 3600.0 849.0 366.0 416.0 82.9 88.0 83.8 97 �-120- Table Date-Age-Wt 7. Measurements (em), Fresh Weights (g), and Volumes of Organs from 26 Female Deer, 1963. (continued) Collection Ratio-Organ Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt/ Body Length Ratio Long. Diam Trans Diam Wt Vol Eyeball (left) Long. Diam Trans Diam Wt Vol Eyeball (right) Long. Diam Trans Diam Wt Vol Lung (left) "hit (right) Wt Heart Long. Diam Trans Diam Wt Vol Liver Long. Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Kidney (left) Long. Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Kidney (right) Long. Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol 104 106 6-26 0-0.6 7- 9 1- 0 .08 (cc), No. 109 110*+ 112*+ 7-16 2- 1 7-30 3- 1 8- 6 4- 2 4- 2 .23 .28 .28 .30 .33 92.4 89.0 11..6 8.4 163.4· 157.4 1l.5 8.5 215.0 207.1 12.6 9.1 189.9 175.0 9.7 8.0 193.3 186.6 7.9 164.6 154.7 2.45 2.25 7.12 6.94 3.24 2.88 14.30 13.79 3.37 3.02 17.54 17.32 2.98 3.37 17.10 16.56 2.83 3.15 17.53 16.97 3.13 2.2.9 18.20 17.67 2.59 2.32 7.15 6.96 57. 84. 8.22 4.56 65.1 62.1 12.20 8.59 3.49 187.7 175.7 3.19 2.85 14.44 14.00 270. 460. 15.0 9.5 336.3 322.8 3.28 3.05 17.70 17.03 660. 1100. 17.5 11.5 577.5 552.6 28.4 17~5 3.6 ll~80. 0 1396.2 3.08 2.95 3.34 3.26 17.82 17.06 17.30 16.62 630. 600. 1250. ~~ 765 .: 16.4 12.4 11.8 8.8 687.0 440.0 662.5 421.6 30.7 29.0 17.5 14.2 3.5 3.4 1500.0 1150.0 1410.8 1082.9 3.06 3.51 18.28 17.70 15.3 9.5 456.9 434.5 29.'7 17.1 4.1 1360.0 1280.S 4.29 3.08 2.09 16.01 15.4 7.29 4.72 3.74 66.3 64.0 8.87 5.90 4.70 127.6 , 121.. 3 8.29 4.21 3.54 92.8 89.9 9.50 5.95 4.29 132.l~ 127.7 9.12 5.76 4.27 124.4 116.1 4.80 2.67 2.07 16.03 1.5.23 7.83 4.23 3.49 66.8 64.5 9.26 5.71 4.65 126.6 122.0 8.20 4.10 3.60 88.6 9.26 5.88 4.40 115.9 111.. 5 9.1S 5.06 4.46 112.7 105.1 x Brain 8-20 9.9 �1j9? ~:;._; ..:·:'r•.~ -12;1Table 7. Measurements (cm), Fresh Weights (g), ~nd Volumes (cc), of Organs from 26 Female Deer, 1963. (continued) Date-Age-Wt Ratio-Organ Collection No. 104 Spleen Wt Vol Stomach Wt with Contents Rumen-Reticulum Wt with Contents Rumen-Reticulum Contents Wt (wet') Rumen-Reticulum Contents Wt (oven dry) Percent Moisture (Rumen-Retic. Contents) x * Slight dissection damage. Blood in lung. 106 107*+ 109 110*+ 112*+ 19.0 18.1 396.0 295.3 277 .5 6070. 160.0 151.4 6590. 194.3 186.8 8680. 168.6 162.3 5420. 78. 5460. 6080. 7880. 4710. 47. 4240. 4680. 6040. 3550. 396. 604. 631. 326. 90.6 87.1 89.6 90.8 "_ �-122- Table 7. Measurements (em), Fresh Weights (g), and Volumes (cc), of Organs from 26 Female Deer, 1963. (continued) Date-Age-Wt Ratio-Organ Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Honth) Eviscerated Wt/ Body Length Ratio Brain Long. Diam Trans Diam Wt Vol Eyeball (left) Long. Diam Trans Diam Wt Vol Eyeball (right) Long. Diam Trans Diam Wt Vol Lung (left) Wt (right) Heart Long. Diam Trans Diam Wt Vol Liver Long. Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Kidney (left) Long. Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Kidney (right) Long. Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Collection No. 115 116 117 U8 120 121 9-18 3- 3 9-25 2- 3 10- 1 0- 4 10- 8 1- 4 10-22 9- 4 11-12 0- 5 .34 .37 .23 .31 .33 .21 12.4 9.0 179.0 ,174·.1 11.4 8.3 176.1 168.6 11.2 8.3 157.8 153.2 12.0 8.2 189.7 185.5 12.3 8.5 177 .6 169.4 10.4 7.5 169.8 163.2 3.30 2.20 19.65 19.02 3.37 3.06 17 .26 16.82 3.06 2.64 12.51 12.21 3.08 2.89 14.44 13.97 3.08 3.37 18.97 18.43 2.68 3.03 11.77 11.55 3.35 3.03 19.48 18.89 17.1 11.5 547.1 526.1 31.0 17.4 3.0 1380.0 1261.0 3.92 3.30 17.08 16.66 495. 750. 16.4 10.0 560.6 535.9 28.6 18.4 5.0 1760.0 1651.0 3.06 2.97 3.11 3.35 2.81 2.64 l3.98 18.92 12.63 18.41 13.50 12.37 280. + 405. 410. 925. + 14.2 16.0 12.7 9.6 9.2 8.6 465.2 298.8 415.8 4·q·6.3 286.5 399.2 29.8 27.7 22.7 16.1 16.6 13.0 3.3 3.6 5.5 1300.0 1360.0 680.0 12l3.3 637.1 2.64 2.93 11.77 11.52 240. 470. 14.3 9.0 313.3 300.6 8.52 5.15 4.30 100.4 98.3 8.39 4.84 3.98 91.3 86.1 7.3 4.52 3.55 63.9 60.75 8.87 4.60 3.82 88.9 85.2 8.22 5.19 4.03 98.8 93.8 7.03 3.88 3.20 56.7 53.7 9.50 4.90 3.70 107.2 103.6 9.01 4.80 3.86 91.4 85.1 7.58 3.43 3.28 52.3 49.7 8.86 4.60 3.88 86.0 82.1 8.50 5.29 4.20 100.0 .95.1 7.53 3.95 3.38 53.7 53.1 �-123- Table 7. Measurements (em), Fresh Weights (g), and Volumes (cc), of Organs from 26 Female Deer, 1963. (continued) Collection No. Date-Age-Wt Ratio-Organ Spleen Wt Vol Stomach Wt with Contents Rumen-Reticulum Wt with Contents Rumen-Reticulum Contents Wt (wet) Rumen-Reticulum Contents Wt (oven dry) Percent Moisture (Rumen-Retic. Contents) + Slight bullet damage. 115 116 .117 118 120 121 207.1 199.4 6585. 214.2 200.6 5560. 83.7 80.0 3030. 211.4 200.0 5770. 139.0 134.0 10220. 104.6 100.5 5895. 5050. 2680. 5060. 9300. 4715. 3900. 2220. 4190. 8060. 835. 456. 279. 462. 1446. 82.3 88.3 87.4 89.0 82.1 �-1C::4- Table 7. Measurements (em), Fresh Weights (g), and Volumes (cc) of Organs from 26 Female Deer, 1963. (continued) Collection No. Date-Age-Wt Ratio-Organ 125) 126) Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt/Body Length Ratio 12-10 4- 6 .27 12-17 9- 6 .32 Brain Long. Diam Trans Diam Wt Vol Eyeball (left) Long. Diam Trans Diam Wt Vol Eyeball (right) Long. Diam Trans Diam 8.0 11.0 200.5 193.9 10.2 8.2 180.4 173.9 3.39 3.23 16.79 16.22 3.2 3.2 18.12 17.55 3.28 3.00 16.74 16.18 300. 520. 14.60 10.60 433.0 414.3 29.1 15.9 4.5 1190.0 3.14 3.19 18.10 17.53 290. 570. 14.5 11.4 502.4 479.3 33.1 16.8 4.5 1200.0 7.80 4.20 3.07 87.6 83.4 7.84 4.48 3.3 73.5 70.5 7.77 4.33 3.58 85.4 81.6 7.77 4.90 3.37 72.0 69.1 Wt Vol Lung (left) Wt (right) Wt Heart Long. Diam Trans Diam Wt Vol Liver Long. Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Kidney (left) Long. Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Kidney (right) Long. Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol �-125- Table 7. Measurements (cm), Fresh Weights (g) and Volumes (cc), of Organs from 26 Female Deer, 1963. (continued) Date-Age-Wt Ratio-Organ Spleen Wt Vol Stomach Wt with Contents Rumen-Reticulum Wt with Contents Rumen-Reticulum Contents Wt (wet) Rumen-Reticulum Contents Wt (oven dry) Percent Moisture (Rumen-Retic. Contents) ) Indicates possibly gravid. Collection No. 125) 168.5 159.8 6640. 126) 134.7 128.6 5000. 6074. 4465. 5194. 3655. 933. 541. 82.0 85.2 �-12b- Table 8. Measurements (cm) , Fresh Weights (g), and Volumes (cc), of Endocrine Glands from 26 Female Deer, 1963. (+1- pregnant, ~\'+ lactation, ) possibly gravid) Collection No. Date-Age-Wgt Ratio-Gland Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt/ Body Length Ratio Adrenal (left) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Adrenal (right) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Thyroid (left) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Thyroid (right) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Thymus (left) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Thymus (right) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol 82++ 83++ 84++ 88++ 90++ 91++ 93++ 1-16 5- 7 1-23 9- 7 1-30 4- 7 2-27 3- 8 3-13 9- 9 3-20 8- 9 4- 8 8-10 .31 .33 .30 .28 .30 .32 .30 2.95 2.19 0.88 3.74 3.46 3.02 1.52 1.03 3.50 3.13 2.77 1.23 1.02 2.36 2.26 2.91 1.62 0.69 2.54 2.46 2.69 1.37 0.91 2.47 2.41 2.58 1.73 1.05 2.90 2.73 2.92 1.97 0.92 3.42 3.25 3.40 1.77 1.03 3.34 3.06 2.77 1.90 1.19 3.54 3.24 2.47 1.43 1.09 2.05 1.95 2.95 1.28 0.90 2.16 2.10 2.96 1.69 1.00 2.77 2.58 2.79 1.59 1.29 3.42 1.40 0.62 1.67 1.36 4.32 1.32 0.60 1.89 1.75 4.01 1.08 0.48 1.56 1.36 4.50 1.39 0.65 2.16 2.11 5.36 0.91 0.53 1.24 1.16 6.80 1.07 0.48 2.67 2.5'6 3.96 1.49 0.45 1.73 1.41 4.37 1.62 0.60 2.48 2.27 absent 4.13 1.23 0.34 1.57 1.36 3.85 1.53 0.50 1.94 1.60 3.73 1.23 0.54 1.27 1.15 absent 4.18 4.97 1.:38 1.44 0.51 0.70 1.68 1.79 1.58 1.73 damaged absent absent absent * 7.21 1.47 0.21 0.98 + 5.56 1.19 0.59 1.49 1.45 5.51 1.06 0.40 1.30 4.37 0.62 0.17 0.42 + 4.35 0.83 0.26 0.59 2.91 2.12 1.14 ~\'* 3.73 3.56 ~', �-127- Table 8. Measurements (em), Fresh Weights (g), and Volumes (cc), of Endocrine Glands from 26 Female Deer, 1963. (++ pregnant, *+ lactation, ) possibly gravid) Date-Age-Wgt Ratio-Gland Collection No. 82++ Thymus (Comb. R & L) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Pituitary Long Diam Trans Diam Wt Vol 83++ . 84++ 1.52 1.10 0.65 0.50 1. 39 1.07 1.10 0.85 1.19 0.77 0.55 0.39 -1 Uncertain whether this is a combined measurement. Too much fat. 9O+t 1.19 0.84 0.66 0.62 91++ 93-t+ 5.83-1 2.25 0.13 0.96 12.29 1.29 0.21 1.89 1.85 thymus pieGes floated in water. *~~~~Both Small piece accidently cut from one end. + 88++ 1.47 1.05 0.66 0.57 1. 36 1.14 0.82 0.79 1. 39 1.14 0.84 0.83 �1.;2'~ -12tl- Table 8. Measurements (em), Fresh Weights (g), .and Volumes (cc), of Endocrine Glands from 26 Female Deer, 1963. (continued) �-129Table 8. Measurements (em), Fresh Weights (g), and Volumes (cc) , of Endocrine Glands from 26 Female Deer, 1963. (continued) Collection No. Date-Age-Wgt Ratio-Gland 95++ Thymus (Comb R & L) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Pituitary Long Diam Trans Diam Wt Vol 97 98++ 101-H- 103 104 106 0.96 0.65 0.25 0.24 1.24 1.23 0.90 0.85 1.23 1.25 l.16 1.10 0.98 0.57 0.14 0.12 1.00 0.89 0.46 0.39 8.22 2.39 0.47 3.15 3.05 1.10 0.94 0.62 0.60 1.27 1.00 0.60 0.57 �-130- Table Date-Age-Hgt 8. Measurements of Endocrine (em), Fresh Weights (g), and Volumes (cc), Glands from 26 Female Deer, 1963. (continued) Collection Ratio-Gland Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Nonth) Eviscerated Ht/ Body Length Ratio Adrenal (left) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Adrenal (right) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Thyroid (left) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Thyroid (right) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Thymus (left) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Thymus (right) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol No. 107~\-+ 109 UO~\-+ 112~';+ U5 116 117 7-16 2- 1 7-30 3- 1 8- 6 4- 2 8-20 4- 2 9-18 3- 3 9-25 2- 3 10- 1 0- 4 .28 .28 .30 .33 .34 .37 .23 3.02 1.69 0.80 2.64 2.52 2.73 1.74 0.75 2.66 2.58 2.73 1.69 1.03 2.84 2.64 3.00 1.34 0.99 2.42 2.26 2.50 1.60 0.83 2.36 2.27 2.57 1.32 0.93 1.76 1.72 2.40 1.22 0.62 1.10 1.05 2.85 1.90 0.93 2.60 2.44 2.40 1.70 1.11 2.77 2.64 3.09 1.47 1.14 2.96 2.76 2.83 1.43 0.85 2.45 2.29 2.57 1.46 1.03 2.35 2.28 2.98 1.21 1.00 2.12 2.05 2.47 1.02 0.60 1.14 1.10 3.39 1.75 1.06 3.08 2.99 6.43 1.60 0.69 4.66 4.47 4.90 1.48 0.91 3.15 3.02 4.30 1.47 0.82 3.12 2.90 3.26 1.26 0.60 1.23 1.12 3.69 1.47 0.70 1.71 1.60 3.41 1.08 0.67 1.37 1.32 5.00 1.48 0.60 2.94 2.8.8 3.70 1.73 0.71 2.36 2.28 4.48 1.49 0.75 2.72 2.53 3.10 1.54 0.72 1.64 1.58 3.07 1.40 0.62 2.06 1.92 2.90 1.12 0.58 1.14 1.09 10.61 2.72 1.19 8.13 7.70 6.66 2.28 0.55 5.50 5.27 9.14 1.68 0.41 2.72 2.24 9.44 1.58 0.87 4.78 4.52 8.30 2.53 1.23 7.65 7.21 10.0)"'- 8.12 2.70 2.19 1.06 1.13 12.63 11.85 11.96 11.26 6.51 2.26 1.08 5.42 4.99 5.65 2.79 0.79 6.13 5.87 6.32 L34 0.62 2.04 1.88 7.57 1.71 0.83 4.77 4.44 7.24 1.45 0.89 4.45 4.27 8.71 1.60 1.43 10.54 10.09 damaged 6.91 1.95 1.16 6.36 6.05 �-1.31Table 8. Date-Age-Wgt Measurements of Endocrine (em), Fresh Weights (g), and Volumes (cc), Glands from 26 Female Deer, 1963. (comtinued) Ratio-Gland (Comb L & R) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Pituitary Long Diam Trans Diam Wt Vol Collection No. 107~~+ 109 110')'(+112*+ 115 116 117 1.42 1.15 0.94 0.76 1.18 1.17 0.56 0.55 1.47 1.10 0.96 0.89 1.40 1.18 0.89 0.81 1.10 1.00 0.45 0.36 1.19 0.96 0.53 0.52 1.01 0.64 0.30 0.29 Thymus *Possible slight damage. �-132- Table 8. Measurements (em), Fresh Weights (g), and Volumes (cc), of Endocrine Glands from 26 Female Deer, 1963. (continued) Collection No. Date-Age-Wgt Ratio-Gland Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt/ Body Length Ratio· Adrenal (left) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Adrenal (right) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Thyroid (left) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Thyroid (right) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Thymus (left) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Thymus (right) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol 118 120''<'+ 121 125) 126) 10- 8 1- 4 10-22 9- 4 11-12 0- 5 12-10 4- 6 12-17 9- 6 .31 .33 .21 .27 .32 2.56 1.59 0.72 1.85 1.85 2.21 0.89 2.15 2.07 2.08 1.07 0.68 0.94 0.82 2.81 1.67 1.12 2.50 2.66 1.60 0.81 2.21 2.58 1.54 0.67 1.90 2.45 1.55 0.93 2.06 1.98 1.78 1.27 0.66 0.93 0.89 2.96 1.40 1.07 2.60 2.73 1.66 0.99 2.58 5.28 1.27 0.55 2.00 1.86 5.54 1.26 0.49 1.90 1.76 3.96 0.80 0.34 0.78 0.75 5.70 1.16 0.30 1.80 l.72 5.00 1.58 0.66 2.72 2.62 4.09 l.39 0.68 1.87 1.67 4.62 1.39 0.52 2.02 1.92 damaged 3.77 0.45 0.98 0.93 4.70 1.54 0.46 1.84 l.69 4.33 2.00 0.52 2.45 2.26 absent 5.41 1.49 0.82 3.37 3.25 2.48 0.74 0.39 0.37 0.36 6.99 1.39 0.74 3.78 3.66 3.49 0.60 0.23 0.54 0.53 4.78 2.27 0.79 4.12 3.86 i .os damaged 5.25 1.47 1.00 3.61 3.39 absent �-13.3- Table 8. Measurements (cm), Fresh Weights (g), and Volumes (cc), of Endocrine Glands from 26 Female Deer, 1963. (continued) Date-Age-Wgt Ratio-Gland Thymus (Comb R & L) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Pituitary Long Diam Trans Diam Wt Vol Collection No. 118 l20~'(+ 121 125) 126) 1.11 0.72 0.26 0.18 1.49 1.03 0.71 0.65 1.09 0.74 0.31 0.29 1.10 0.99 0.44 0.43 1.80 0.95 0.54 0.52 �Table 9. Measurements (em), Fresh Weights (g), and Volumes (cc), of Endocrine Glands from 23 Male Deer, 1963. Date-Age-Wgt Ratio-Gland Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt/ Body Length Ratio Adrenal (left) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Adrenal (right) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Thyroid (left) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Thyroid (right) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt VoL Thymus (left) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Collection No. 80 81 85 86 87 89 92 1- 2 4';'7 1- 9 4- 7 2- 6 2- 8 2-13 0- 8 2-20 1- 8 3- 6 5- 9 3-27 1- 9 .37 .38 .33 .18 .28 .34 .26 3.32 1.53 0.83 3.35 3.22 2.62 1.78 0.71 2.36 2.73 1.90 1.04 3.36 3.21 2.46 1.23 0.57 1.45 1.24 3.07 1.64 0.72 2.90 2.84 3.60 1.46 0.70 2.90 2.81 2.66 .1.48 0.99 2.60 2.38 2.84 1.69 0.91 3.26 3.03 2.25 1.39 0.80 1.22 1.14 2.92 1.73 0.77 2.51 2.47 3.12 1.70 0.82 3.27 3.18 2.33 1.41 1.02 2.16 1.92 3.25 1.83 0.93 3.65 3.50 4.41 1.50 0.79 2.44 2.35 4.61 1.27 0.53 1.68 1.50 4.05 1.53 0.62 2.22 1.95 5.20 0.77 0.42 1.00 0.79 6.27 1.16 0.49 1.79 1.76 8.10 0.46 0.47 3.03 2.96 5.35 1.15 0.43 1.42 1.24 3.62 1.58 0.67 2.43 2.36 absent 3.79 1.44 0.78 2.32 2.15 3.94 1.89 0.59 2.76 2.46 5.29 0.95 0.50 1.03 0.81 4.70 1.45 0.64 1.73 1.70 5.75 1.77 0.43 2.26 2.16 4.09 1.37 0.51 1.40 1.28 16.00 12.01 1.28 1.17 4.02 1.24 0.27 0.53 0.37 5.48 0.92 0.37 0.85 6.67 0.60 0.17 0.55 0.29 4.11 0.59 0.22 0.30 0.26 7.07 1.17 0.39 0.88 0.82 ver .Thymus (right) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol absent �-135- Table 9. Measurements (em), Fresh Weights (g), and Volumes (cc) of Endocrine Glands from 23 Male Deer, 1963. Date-Age-Wgt Ratio-Gland Collection No. 80 Thymus (comb. R & L) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Pituitary Long Diam Trans Diam Wt Vol ~"'F1oatedin water. 81 85 86 87 6.18 1.57 0.23 0.92 0.90 1.18 1.10 0.45 0.42 1.30 0.98 0.71 0.60 89 92 9.65 1.05 0.24 2.70 6.40 1.88 0.27 0.99 * 1.42 0.76 0.59 0.41 1.12 0.84 0.34 0.25 1.50 0.97 0.56 0.48 1.61 1.15 1.03 0.96 1.57 0.88 0.40 0.37 �-136- Table 9. Measurements (em), Fresh Weights (g), and Volumes (cc), of Endocrine Glands from 23 Male Deer, 1963. (continued) Collection No. Date-Age-Wgt Ratio-Gland Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt/ Body Length Ratio Adrenal (left) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Adrenal (right) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Thyroid (left) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Thyroid (right) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Thymus (left) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Thymus (right) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol 94 96 99 100 102 105 108 4-15 0-10 4-29 0-10 5-20 2-11 5-27 6-11 6-12 5- 0 7- 2 9- 1 7-23 1- 1 .21 .22 .33 .37 .35 .44 .27 2.20 1.29 0.64 1.08 1.03 2.73 1.29 0.66 1.59 1.46 2.90 1.73 0.80 2.92 2.82 3.44 1.39 0.73 2.33 3.08 2.22 0.96 3.87 3.66 3.50 1.96 1.14 5.51 5.31 2.21 1.36 1.34 1.70 2.15 0.99 0.87 0.99 0.94 2.46 1.32 0.73 1.49 1.40 2.63 1.83 0.90 2.96 2.85 2.73 1.41 0.67 2.46 3.28 2.14 0.92 3.81 3.58 3.19 1.85 1.52 4.05 3.88 2.14 1.46 0.92 1.10 5.28 1.15 0.58 1.97 1.91 4.07 1.36 0.58 1.68 1.64 5.28 1.29 0.61 2.03 1.94 6.62 1.52 0.50 2.57 2.53 4.95 1.40 0.68 3.09 2.86 8.15 1.46 0.74 3.82 3.65 4.41 1.44 1.60 3.50 3.88 1.38 0.48 1.98 1.92 3.14 1.48 0.44 1.32 1.29 4.00 1.50 0.76 1.99 1.86 5.03 1.65 0.54 2.23 2.20 4,15 1.68 0.81 2.43 2.32 7.12 1.93 0.81 4.41 4.18 absent 3.63 1.11 0.94 3.20 6.97 1.69 0.32 1.57 1.45 8.89 2.44 0.91 10.66 10.06 7.08 1.40 0.45 1.89 1.83 10.52 2.92 0.39 4.90 4.85 8.93 1.69 0.30 2.53 2.47 7.77 2.19 1.52 10.42 9.84 8.84 2.71 0.84 6.77 6.52 3.98 2.21 0.32 1.07 0.93 7.60 0.70 0.36 1.36 1.33 11.88 2.32 0.87 12.85 12.25 absent 7.37 1.43 0.38 1.99 1.87 11.46 2.19 1.97 14.36 13.72 �-j_3'/- Table 9. Date-Age-Wgt Measurements of Endocrine (em), Fresh Weights (g)~ and Volumes (cc), Glands from 23 Male Deer, 1963. (continued) Ratio-Gland (comb R & L) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Pituitary Long Diam Trans Diam Wt Vol Collection No. 94 96 99 100 102 105 108 1,22 0.78 0.41 0.39 1.34 0.87 0.47 0.41 1.36 1.18 0.80 0.75 1.30 1.09 0.83 0.79 1.32 1.12 0.80 0.78 1.32 1.18 1.01 0.95 1.33 0.99 0.57 0.51 Thymus �-1.'38- Table 9. Measurements (em), Fresh Weights (g), and Volumes (cc), of Endocrine Glands from 23 Male Deer, 1963. (continued) Date-Age-Wgt Ratio-Gland C;o11ection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt/ Body Length Ratio Adrenal (left) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Adrenal (right) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Thyroid (left) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Thyroid (right) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Thymus (left) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Thymus (right) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Collection No. 111 113 114 020 119 122 123 8-13 1- 2 9- 6 1- 3 9-10 0- 3 10- 6 1- 4 10-16 0- 4 11-20 5- 5 11-26 1- 5 .28 .29 .20 .31 .21 .52 .31 2.58 1.53 0.56 1.65 2.78 1.30 0.82 1.85 2.07 1.20 0.54 1.09 0.90 1.83 1.30 0.67 1.13 1.04 2.95 1.20 0.68 2.29 2.12 2.46 1.29 0.93 1.63 1.49 2.70 1.45 0.75 1.85 3.11 1.19 0.69 1.95 2.04 1.21 0.64 1.12 0.93 2.10 1.19 0.68 1.05 0.96 2.81 1.80 0.91 2.42 2.13 2.73 1.23 0.87 1.88 1.72 3.85 1.48 0.70 1.74 1.61 4.88 1.10 0.50 1.93 1.86 2.78 1.37 0.76 1.75 1.64 4.37 1.40 0.57 1.96 1.83 4.23 0.92 0.43 0.85 0.81 3.70 1.49 0.40 2.06 1.83 4.38 1.28 0.42 1.66 1.50 4.00 1.26 0.52 1.98 1.93 2.87 1.46 0.64 1.33 1.23 4.09 ,1.42 0.53 2.07 1.92 3.67 1.08 0.48 0.99 0.93 4.37 1.05 0.37 2.44 2.12 4.00 1.42 0.41 1.85 1.65 10.43 2.61 0.87 12.18 11.48 12.29+ 1.12 0.94 11. 69 11.27 5.65 1.77 1.14 4.89 4.59 6.90 1.46 0.53 3.61 3.33 5.28 1.50 0.71 2.93 2.75 9.30 1.90 0.73 7.36 7.03 8.43 3.06 1.42 10.66 10.42 6.19 2.00 0.85 5.72 5.25 8.20 2.07 0.60 6.14 5.89 7.66 1.79 1.12 8.25 7.86 damaged 9.40 0.98 0.34 1.55 1.49 damaged 6.84 1.26 0.40 1.57 1.51 �-1·')9-- Table 9. Date-Age-Wgt Measurements of Endocrine (em), Fresh Weights (g), and Volumes (cc), Glands from 23 Male Deer, 1963. (continued) Ratio-Gland (comb R & L) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Pituitary Long Diam Trans Diam Wt Vol Collection III 113 114 1.07 0.93 0.49 0.40 1.18 0,85 0.59 0.49 1.18 0,79 0.22 0,17 020 No. 119 122 123 1.12 0.78 0.27 0.26 1.01 1.00 0.67 0.48 1.340.79 0.45 0.44 Thymus . I + Slight damage �-140- Table 9. Measurements (em), Fresh Weights (g), and Volumes (cc), of Endocrine Glands from 23 Male Deer, 1963. (continued) Date-Age-Wgt Ratio-Gland Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt/Body Length Ratio Adrenal (left) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Adrenal (right) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Thyroid (left) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Thyroid (right) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Thymus (left) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Thymus (right) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Collection No. 124 127 12- 4 12-26 1- 6 1- 6 .29 .30 2.00 2.76 1.46 0.51 1.67 1. 59 1.41 0.70 1. 56 1.49 2.55 2.10 1.24 0.89 2.06 1. 96 0.64 1. 72 1. 60 3.79 4.16 1:21 1.23 0.50 1. 32 0.50 1. 36 1. 30 1.46 1.28 3.30 1. 30 0.45 4.14 1.41 1.23 1.21 1.37 damaged 1.22 0.45 7.65 0.84 0.30 1. 26 1.24 6.35 0.70 0.16 0.72 0.70 �.;..141- Table 9. Date-Age-Wgt Measurements of Endocrine (ern), Fresh Weights (g), and Volumes (cc), Glands from 23 Male Deer, 1963. (continued) Ratio-Gland (comb R & L) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Pituitary Long Diam Trans Diam Wt Vol Collection No. 124 127 1.10 0.91 0.36 0.23 0.99 0.78 0.37 0.33 Thymus �~"",_\, .:.'~ Table 10. Measurements .~~~) (mm) of Teeth and Mandibles from 23 Male Deer, 1963. Date-Age-Wt Ratio-Item Collection No. 80 81 85 86 87 89 92 94 96 99 100 Collection Date (Month-Day) 3-27 4-15 4-29 5-20 5-27 2-13 2-20 3-6 1-2 1-9 2-6 Estimated Age 2-11 (Year-Month) 0-10 0-10 6-11 2-8 0-8 1-8 5-9 1-9 4-7 4-7 Eviscerated Wt/ .26 .22 .33 .37 Body Length Ratio .38 .33 .18 .28 .34 .21 .37 Length of Tooth Rows: Maxillary 91.4 82.4 81.7 78.3 58.8 62.2 premolar-molar (left) 84.7 84.2 89.9 58.3 77 .1 Maxillary 81.6 81.5. 78.9 59.1 62.8 91.7 premolar-molar (right) 83.8 83.5 90.0 58.2 72.7 Maxillary molar only 16.9 24.8 51. 8 47.6 47.0 39.9 (left) 48.0 44.9 51.3 10.2 39.9 Maxillary molar only 23.6_ 51. 6 16.8 47.4 47.3 40.9 (right) 48.2 . 48.0 51.8 10.1 35.5 Mandibular 66.5 58.9 97.8 91.4 88.9 89.7 95.3 55.5 91.4 premolar-molar (left) 92.0 90.6 Mandibular 91.5 66.8 67.5 97.9 88.9 90.6 91.3 90.7 95.0 54.9 premolar-molar (right) 92.4 Mandibular molar only 59.4 51.0 28.5 22.9' 61. 8 56.8 55.9 (left) 60.5 15.4 55.8 57.2 Mandibular molar only 59.'3 61.4 52.3 28.2 23.6 55.0 61.0 56.7 (right) 56.3 57.0 17.7 Length of Left Mandibular 69.1 71.0 72.8 71.4 . 78.0 65.0 59.9 80.2 58 •. 2 68.3 75.6 Diastema 190. 234. 225. 191. 216. 214. 248. 231. 230. 177. 230. Length of Left Ramus 102 6-12 5-0 .35 82.7 83.3 I f-' +- 47.5 47.8 91. 7 92.1 55.8 56.3 73.2 231. [\) I �Table 10. Measurements (mm) of Teeth and Mandibles from 23 Male Deer, 1963. (continued) Date-Age-Wt Ratio-Item Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) EvisceratedWt/ Body Length Ratio Length of Tooth Rows: Maxillary premolar-molar (left) Maxillary premolar-molar (right) Maxillary molar only (left) Maxillary molar only (right) Mandibular (left) premolar-molar Mandibular .. premolar-molar (right) Mandibular (left) molar only Mandibular (right) molar only Length of Left Mandibular Diastema Length of Left Ramus Collection No. 105 108 111 113 114 020 119 122 123 124 127 7-2 9-1 7-23 1-1 8-13 1-2 9-6 1-3 9-10 0-3 10-6 1-4 10-16 0-4 11-20 5-5 11-26 1-5 12-4 1-6 12-26 1-6 .44 .27 .28 .29 .20 .31 .21 .52 .31 .29 .30 74.3 69.1 71.5 70.0 44.5 48.1 47.5 72 .. 8 87.1 80.07 73.4 69.1 71.6 69.4 44.8 48.0 47.3 70.0 86.7 80.05 I 1-' 40.6 32.7 34.0 33.5 7.0 84.9 35.3 50.5 45.6 .40.5 32.8 35.2 33.•3 6.7 .'84.0 35.4 50.5 45.01 85.3 70.0 70.0 67.5 40.6 72.3 55.3 89.5 76.0 95.0 82.8 85.7 70.0 69.8 68,0 41.1 72.3 56.0 90.8 73.6 94.8 83.0 52.0 32.8 33,9 35,9 34.6 18,0 55.0 40.6 58.9 39,0 52.2 33.2 34.6 36.0 34.3 18.1 57.0 40.3 58.7 33.7 82.0 235. 66.4 196. 67.9 205. 68.8 204. 74.0 213. 58.0 168. 81.2 243. 73.0 211. 73.6 218. 66.0 206. 53.0 160. +' UJ I f""'t, .:~:;;~. :~ �f"'~ ··~;)I ,:rc Table 11. Measurements (mm) of Teeth and Mandibles from 26 Female Deer, 1963. Date-Age-Wt Ratio-Item Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wtl Body Length Ratio Length of Tooth Rows: Maxillary premolar-molar Maxillary premolar-molar Maxillary molar only Maxillary molar only Mandibular premolar-molar Mandibular premolar-molar Mandibular molar only Mandibular molar only Length of L. Mandibular Diastema Length of L. Ramus Collection No. (left) (right) (left) (right) (left) (right) (left) (right) 82 83 84 88 90 91 93 95 1-16 5-7 1-23 9-7 1-30 4-7 2-27 3-8 3-13 9-9 3-20 8-9 4-8 8-10 4-22 4-10 .31 .33 .30 .28 .30 .32 .30 .26 85.0 84.6 50.1 49.8 90.1 90.4 55.9 55.9 80.0 81.1 44.6 47.0 87.5 88.0 56.9 57.5 82.8 83.1 48.9 48.5 "91.5 92.9 56.8 56~6 86.9 86.8 50.5 50.4 98.0 98.2 60.1 60.3 78.1 78.1 44.9 44.6 82.2 81.8 50.4 50.1 80.9 81.5 47.4 48.0 90.8 91.5 56.9 57.0 77 .0 77.6 . 42.2 43.2 83.5 83.7 51.7 51.8 79.9 80.4 46.6 46.9 85.4 85.9 53.0 53.7 73.4 72.2 62.9 66.4 s z» 70.5 74.2 66.9 219. 223. 209. 226. 214. 218. 229. 213. I I-' +- +" I �Table 11. Measurements (mm) of Teeth and Mandibles from 26 Female Deer, 1963. (cohtinued) Date-Age-Wt Ratio-Item Collection No. 97 98 101 103 104 106 107 109 110 5-6 0-11 5-13 8-11 6-5 4-0 6-19 1-0 6-26 0-0.6 7-9 1-0 7-16 2-1 7-30 3-1 8-6 4-2 .20 .32 .31 .18 .08 .23 .28 .28 .30 55.8 55.8 17 .5 17.5 60.8 61.4 24.7 25.7 84.2 84.1 48.8 48.5 91.2 90.3 57.5 57.2 89.4 89.5 50.2 50.0 98.7 98.6 61.6 61.2 60.7 60.9 19.0 19.0 62.0 60.8 28.2 26.9 36.0 67.7 35.3 67.3 20.4 30.0 20.4 29.9 29.0 ' 69.5 27.8 67.3 6.9 33.0 13.3... 33.0 78.9 78.9 44.3 43.8 78.1 78.0 53.8 53.2 84.9 85.1 49.5 48.8 90.1 92.5 59.2 5L7 96.8 96.5 61.8 61.5 Length of L. Handibular Diastema 60.0 73.8 66.4 61.2 31.2 65.4 70.2 60.9 71.5 Length of L. Ramus 179. 228. 228. 183. i iz, 192. 212. 214. 226. Collection Date (Honth-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Honth) Eviscerated Wtl Body Length Ratio Length of Tooth Rows: Haxillary premolar-molar Haxillary premolar-molar Maxillary molar only Maxillary molar only Handibular premolar-molar Handibular premolar-molar Handibular molar only Handibular molar only I (left) (right) (left) (right) (left) (right) (left) (right) f-J .cU1 I f""'\:, ,:~:.~:.)~ . ;lJ �~~ <, ., ..·:.1 ,.:;; ~. Table 11. Measurements (rom) of Teetn and Mandibles from 26 Female Deer, 1963. (continued) Date-Age Wt Ratio-Item Collection No. 112 115 116 117 118 120 121 125 126 8-20 4-2 9-18 3-3 9-25 2-3 10-1 0-4 10-8 1-4 10-22 9-4 11-12 0-5 12-10 4-6 12-17 9-6 .33 .34 .37 .23 .31 .33 .21 .27 .32 76.4 76.4 44.3 44.7 85.7 86.1 53.8 54.7 81.5 81.7 47.7 46.9 87.8 88.5 54.6 54.7 80.9 80.1 47.7 47.8 90.0 90.2 57.6 57.9 45.8 50.5 11.8 13.6 45.0 45.3 4.4 4.2 69.4 70.4 32.8 32.6 76.7 74.8 39.8 38.6 78.9 80.8 43.0 42.6 88.2 87.2 55.1 54.2 56.0 55.4 17.3 17.2 55.9 56.5 18.7 18.6 78.9 80.4 45.0 45.3 86.5 87.3 52.6 47.3 76.9 76.4 44.0 43.9 83.2 83.0 51.8 51.0 Length of L. Mandibular Diastema 67.8 71.3 66.5 51.7 73.0 57.3 66.3 66.5 Length of Left Ramus 210. 215. 211. 159. 223. 174. 212. 210. Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wtl Body Length Ratio Length of Tooth Rows: Maxillary premolar-molar Maxillary premolar-molar Maxillary molar only Maxillary molar only Mandibular premolar-molar Mandibular premolar-molar Mandibular molar only Mandibular molar only (left) (right) (left) (right) (left) (right) (left) (right) I I,__ tr I �-<>. Table 12. Indices of Physical Condition and Bone Structure for 23 Male Deer, 1963. Date-Age-Index Collection No. 80 81 85 86 87 89 92 94 96 99 100 Collection Date 5.•20 (Month-Day) 2-6 2-13 2-20 3-6 3-27 4-15 4-29 5-27 1-2 1-9 Estimated Age (Year-Month) 6-11 0-8 0-10 0-10 2-11 4-7 4-7 2-8 1-8 5-9 1-9 Eviscerated Wt/ Body Length Ratio .18 .34 .26 .21 .22 .33 .37 .37 .38 .33 .28 Kidney Fat Index (percent) + 8.0 6.4 13.7 8.2 . 15.0 6.3 9.2 B.1 7.3 7.2 7.4 Depth of Ba~k Fat (rom) + O. O. O. O. O. O. O. O. O. O. O. Bone Marrow 66.4 86.0 52.2 87.4 4.6 23.3 25.9 64.7 (percent) 9.2 67.8 62.9 Bone Marrow Co1or']( 5R9/8 5R7/10 5R4/12 5R7/10 5R8/6 5YR8/}0 5R4/12 5R6/12 5R6/12 5R8/8 5RB/6 Est. Eviscerated Carcass . 7.4 6.9 Fat (percent)"''"*' 7.6 6.5 7.8 6.3 3.5 7.6 5.7 4.9 8.7 1.5 6.1 0.3 1.1 0.4 Condition Ratio+* 6.9 1.9 2.9 6.4 2.7 3.1 Right Metacarpal: 187. 218. 214. 214. 213. 195. Length (rom) 196. 216. 213. 220. 210. 18.9 16.5 16.2 19.1 (nun) 15.8 20.4 19.1 Width 19.8 19.4 21. 3 19.6 115. 108. Ill. 131. 77. 72. 121. 126. 105. Fresh Wt (g) 120. 77. 38.2 57.3 50.0 43.5 52.5 56.2 70.7 Percent of Brain Wt 66.7 64.8 44.1 53.5 Fit ~'~ 102 6-12 5-0 .35 11.5 I I-' +....;) I O. 70.2 5R6/10 8.1 6.5 209,· 18.5 107. 57.3 . j-.,~ ,>1 y~ ,,;JJ �~.".,h ,-;:)1 Table 12. J) Indices of Physical Condition and Bone Structure for 23 Male Deer, 1963. (continued) Date-A e-Index Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt/ Body Length Ratio Kidney Fat Index (percent)+ Depth of Back Fat (rom) + Bone Na rrow t (percent) _ Bone Marrow Co1or* ? Est. Eviscerated Carcass Fat (percent)** Condition Ratio+* Right Metacarpal: Length (nun) Width (rom) Fresh Wt (g) Percent of Brain Wt Collection No. 105 108 111 113 114 020 119 122 123 124 127 7-2 9-1 7-23 1-1 8-13 1-2 9-6 1-3 9-10 0-3 10-6 1-4 10-16 0-4 11-20 5-5 11-26 1-5 12-4 1-6 12-26 1-6 .44 .27 .28 .29 .20 .31 .21 .52 .31 .29 .30 23.3 8.8 19.3 49.4 17.6 26.2 97.4 28.6 24.9 19.6 10 0 9 9 0 1 20 0 0 0 87.4 SR8/6 87.7 SR8/8 7S.7 2.SR S/10 88.6 26.7 SR8/8 SR6/8 85.0 82.S SR8/8 SR8/10 20 Sl.7 5R4/l0 5R7/8 93.1 94.3 5R6/10 SR9/2 I t-' +- co I ·14.4 29.7 4.6 l.1 4.0 6.6 13.8 S6.4 7.1 6.S S.8 14.2 17.4 lS9.8 11.S. 28.8 6.3 13.8 4.9 7.3 217. 20l. 18.8 18.0 119. 90. S4.3 48.7 20S. 17.3 9S. 47.4 197. 16.2 83. 46.1 180. lS.S 66. 4l. 6 179. 14.7 64. 38.1 223. 19.2 131. 6S.7 209. 18.1 11l. S4.4 214. 17.3 93. SO.2 216. 18.0 106. S3.3 + Riney (1955) _/ Assn. Agric. Chern. (1960) i( Munsell (1960) ** Behnke (1962) +* Product of coded values (0.1) of percent fat: evisc. carcass, total kidney, and femur marrow. �Table 13. Indices of Physical Condition and Bone Structure for 26 Female Deer, 1963. (++ indicates pregnancy, i~ indicates lactation, ) indicates possibly gravid) )ate-Age-Index :::ol1ectionDate (Hon.t h-Day) ~stimated Age (Year-Honth) ~viscerated Wt/ Body Length Ratio {idney Fat Index (percent) )epth of Back Fat· (mm)+ Bone Marrow Fat (percent) Bone Marrow Co1or* 82++ 83++ 84++ 88++ 90++ 017 Collection No. 91++ 93++ 95++ 01&H- 97 98++ 101++ 103 104 1-16 1-23 1-30 2-27 3-13 3-18 3-20 4- 8 4-22 4":28 5-6 5-13 6-5 6-19 6-26 5-7 9-7 4-7 3-8 9-9 3-9 8-9 8-10 4-10 3-10 0-11 8-11 4-0 1-0 0-0.6 .31 .33 .30 .28 .30 .32 .30 .26 .20 .32 .31 .18 .08 30.3 33.4 25.2 8.4 37.7 18.3 6.1 6.1 5.8 17.2 10.2 9.2 19.6 7 11 5 0 3 0 0 0 1 0 0 2 0 0 90.7 5R 10/4 95.8 5R 9/6 94.3 5R 9/10 89.9 5R 9/4 89.2 5R 9/5 72.2 5R 8/10 40.2 5R 6/10 51.3 10.0 5R 8/10 76.3 5R 6/10 81.6 5R 6/10 40.9 5R 5/12 13.3 5R 3/12 14.9 45.1 12.9 31.1 9.2 7.3 12.3 41.7 7.7 12.6 11.5 5.1 6.3 1.5" 5.4 0.3 9.0 11.8 10.5 8.7 2.9 1.1 4.9 1.3 206 18.3 98 49.3 201 17.0 85 44.7 214 17.5 96 51.2 202 17.1 93 50.9 216 17.7 103 49.5 210 18.5 96 47.9 195 17.3 80 48.0 184 15.5 68 41.2 218 17.3 100 54.9 230 16.9 83 38.5 183 13.8 ,57 32.6 127 12.1 24 25.9 I I-' ~ 92.2 5R 9/8 Est. Eviscerated Carcass Fat (percent)** 11.7 Condition RatiaH~ 32.7 Right Metacarpal: Length (mm) 209 Width (mm) 18.7 Fresh Wt (g) 99 Percent of Brain Wt 50.1 70.7 . .0 I ~~1 , .. :"'''":" . •.•.i:s. �~.,.1 Jl :t';~ Table 13. Date-Age-Index _~ ___ ~ Indices of Physical Condition and Bone Structure for 26 Female Deer, 1963. (++ indicates pregnancy, i* indicates lactation, ) indicates possibly gravid.) (continued) 106 107~'rl-109 11O~·.-t019 Collection No. 112~·.-t115 116 7-9 7-16 7-30 8-6 8-19 8-20 9-18 1-0 2-1 3-1 4-2 3-2 .23 .28 .28 8.7 8.0 0 _~_ 117 118 120~·.-t121 9-25 10-1 10-8 10-22 4..,.2 3-3 2-3 0-4 1-4 .30 .33 .37 .23 5.6 10.8 28.7 51.3 209.3 0 0 4 20 25 26.4 5R 7/10 80.4 5R 7/10 36.8 63.1 5R sR 5.5/10 8/10 89.1 5R 8/10 8.7 1.9 7.1 4.6 7.5 1.5 7.6 5.2 96 15.7 74 45.3 216 17.3 100 46.5 204 17.3 91 47.9 195 17.4 84 43.5 Collection Date (Honth-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Honth) Eviscerated Wt/ Body Length Ratio Kidney Fat Index (percent)+ Depth of Back Fat (mm)+ Bone Harrow 7'at (per cent.j.; Bone Harrow Color* Est. Eviscerated Carcass Fat (percent)*i: Condition Ratiot* Right Hetacarpal Length (mm) Wid th (mm) Fresh Wt (g) Percent of Brain Wt 126) 11-12 12-10 12-17 9-4 0-5 4-6 9-6 .31 .33 .21 .27 .32 30.7 120.2 14.3 107.8 42.9 70.6 38 1 30 0 7 5 34 92.4 5R 9/4 93.1 5R 9/10 87.8 5R 8/6 81.7 5R 7/8 48.8 5R 8/8 83.1 5R 6/10 88.3 5R 7/8 90.5 5R 9/4 14.9 38.1 11.1 ,52.6 19.7 383.9 8.1 :21.8 18.5 181.7 8.3 5.8 9.5 85.1 9.5 35.2 13.6 86.9 206 16.6 84 51.0 202 17.3 95 53.1 208 17.9 93 52.8 165 14.9 60 38.0 205 17.5 90 47.4 216 18.1 101 56.9 177 14.8 62 36.5 208 17.9 88 43.9 19l 16.3 76 42.1 .34 I I-' + Riney (1955), both kidneys _I Assn. Agric. Chern. (1960) * Munsell (1960) 125) 82.8 ** ~~ Behnke (1962) Product of coded valves (0.1) of percent ~fat: evisc. carcass, total kidney, .and femur marrow. I.ll 0 I �Table 14. Statistical description and results of significance tests of male and female mule deer percent fat values: fenrurmarrow, 1962-63; total kidney, 1962-63; and eviscerated, skinned carcass, 1963. Year Sex 1962 1963 Range 5:f:§f11flcanCA Coeff. of ~~etween fere~e eans Variation % 42.2 No 6.4-94.1 44.7 4.6-94.3 male male Percent Fat Heasurement femur marrow fenrurmarrow Sample Size 19 22 Mean Percent 65.64 63.33 Standard Deviation 27.70 28.29 1962 1963 female female· femur marrow femur marrow 30 29 79.99 70.79 20.09 25.74 25.1 36.4 19.1-97.0 10.0-95.8 No 1962 1963 male male total kidney total kidney 20 22 21.19 19.26 22.73 20.30 107.3 105.4 2.2-71. 0 6:3-97.4 No 1962 1963 female female total kidney total kidney 30 26 23.09 36.02 17.09 46.19 73.9 128.2 3.2-69.5 5.6-209.3 No 1963 1963 male female evisc.,skinned carcass evisc.,skinned carcass 22 26 7.76 10.12 3.53 3.97 45.5 39.2 4.0-17.4 2.9-19.7 Yes I I-' U'1 f-' I * P=.05 ~c;:l, '~~ :{"\;) �i".J-, ::..r~ :,~d Table 15. Statistical description of 4 blood values from male and female mule deer of 17 days to 12 years 5 months in estimated age and coHected by shooting yearlong, April 13, 1961December 26, 1963.* Sex Statistic Erythrocyte (millions/mm3) Leukocyte (thousands/mm3) Male: Sample Size Nean Range Standard Deviation Coef Variation (%) Confidence Interval+ 44 9.85 5.90- 22.87-++ 3.47 35.2 (8.79-10.9l) 44 .3.22 1.20-5.55 1.06 32.9 (2.90-3.54) 44 47.41 29.0-69.0 7.35 15.5 (45.17-49.65) 44 15.94 7.7-24.0 3.01 18.9 (15.03-16.85) 63 9.63 5.77 -18.25 2.63 27.3 (8.97-10.29) 63 3.28 1.10-10. 65+'{~ 1.55 47.3 (2.89-3.67) 64 46.23 29.0-77.0 8.64 18.6 (44.17-48.49) 64 15.89 9.4-27.5 3.65 22.9 (14.99-16.79) Female: Sample Size Mean Range Standard Deviation Coef Variation (%) Confidence Interva1+ * + ++ +* Packed Cell Vol (percent) Hemoglobin (g/10Oml) Blood aspirated from the heart (entry on left side) within 2-15 minutes from time of death. EDTA was the anticoagulant. Computed by x t SE (t.05) at (n-l) degrees of freedom. Counts believed accurate and no pathology observed. Count believed accurate, right fronta~ sinus infected on this animal (no.14) but no other pathology observed. I I-' VI 1\l I �A ,::.-,q .' .~ .;··~iL!t: -153'I'ab Le 16. Statistical description of differential blood cell percentages of male and female deer, 1961-63. Sample Sf.z e Range Mean Standard Deviation Males Segmented Neutrophils Band Neu trophils Lymphocytes Monocy'tes Eosinophils Basophils 45 45 45 45 45 45 12-73 0-16 11-89 0-32 0-36 0- 3 42.16 1.53 44.00 5.51 6.53 0.27 18.36 3.09 18.50 5.80 8.79 0.65 43.5 202.0 42.0 105.3 134.6 240.7 (36.62-47.70) ( 0.60- 2.46) (38.42-49.58) ( 3.77 - 7.25) ( 3.88- 9.18) ( 0.07- 0.47) Females Segmented Neutrophi1s Band Neutrophils Lymphocytes Monocytes Eosinophils Basophils 68 68 68 67 68 68 7-79 0-10 16-84 0-33 0-40 0-4 40.16 1.15 45.12 4.49 8.46 0.49 16.59 1.99 15.41 5.73 8.68 1.04 41.3 173.0 34.2 127.6 102.6 212.2 (36.14-44.18) ( 0.67- 1.63) (41.38-48.86) ( 3.09- 5.89) ( 6.36-10.56) ( 0.23- 0.75) +xt 1 S£ (t.05) at n-l degrees of freedom. Table 17. Seasonal and yearlong neutrophil: lymphocyte ratios+ based on the means of the percentage values for 45 male 'and 68 female deer of all age classes, 1961-63. Male Dec Jan-Feb Ratio N 1.46 (11) March April-May Ratio N 1.23 (9) Female 1.09 0.79 Sex Confidence Coef of Variation % Interval+ (Schalm, 1962) (16) (17) June July-August N Ratio 0.67 (13) 0.79 (21) Sept Oct-Nov Ratio N 0.95 (12) 0.95 (14) Yearlong N Ratio 0.96 (45) 0.89 (68) �-154- birth-lactation period and to those younger, non-parous animals building up fat reserves at a more rapid rate. Noteworthy also, is that the summer sample consists of relatively younger females. This may reflect a sampling bias associated with the presumably decreased maternal activity and secretive habits during the post-parturition period. Thus, perhaps proportionally more younger, non-parous, and more rapidly growing animals with lower fat :reserves are collected during the summer than is the case during any other season. No such presumed sampling bias is noted among the males, however, except for a slight increase in average age during the spring and summer periods. A positive relationship between body fat and increased age was noted during summer and fall but a weakly negative relationship during the spring. Perhaps the demands of the breeding season impose larger withdrawals of fat reserves in older males. Relationships of seasonal condition indices With these considerations in mind, 1962-63 mean seasonal indices for both sexes and all age classes are presented graphically in Figures 7 and 8. Maximum means for both sexes occurred during the fall for total percent kidney fat, percent body fat and condition ratios. Maximum means for percent femur marrow fat in females, however, occurred during the winter. Means of percent total kidney fat reached a minimum for both sexes in the spring but percent femur marrow fat, percent body fat and condition ratios reached a minimum in the spring for males and during the summer for females. Sample sizes were too small to permit computation of standard errors for mean percent body fat and condition ratios. Standard errors computed for femur marrow and total kidney fat means suggest suprisingly small variability in female winter and fall femur marrow values and perhaps significantly smaller means in the male in percent femur marrow fat during the winter and spring as well as in percent total kidney fat during the winter. Maximum percent total kidney fat variability for each sex occurred during the fall period when seasonal means reached a maximum. Relationships of possible indices of physiological stress and condition Adrenal ascorbic acid Monthly adrenal ascorbic acid values and means (1962-63) derived from left adrenals dissected from both sexes and all age classes, quick-frozen within 3 - 6 hours and analyzed within 48 - 96 hours of death are shown in Figure 9. This indicates both the extreme variability and that male and female trends appear more alike in 1962 than in 1963. The same data is used in Figure 10 to construct a seasonal depiction. The mean values are found at a maximum (low stress) in the fall in both sexes and at a minimum (high stress) in the spring for males and in the summer for females. This generally corresponds with the maximum and minimum fat reserves as indicated by condition ratio and percent body fat means (Figure 7). Differential blood cell percentages A graphic analysis of another possible indicator of physiological stress is shown in Figure 11. Interpretation of these data is dependent on the leukocyte response to stress hypothesis of Schalm (1962) and others. This proposes �LEGEND 14 80 PERCENT BODY FAT 12 CONDITION RATIO 10 60 .I' 8 6 40 ..................... 0:: 040 0 b 2 .' ..... .•..•.. MALES , 20 Z o ....................... I- ....................................................................................... o o z 1-0 o r5 12 I ~ VI U'l I U U 0:: 60 Z <t W 10 0... Z 0 ~ ~ l..L4 ~ .. ' ..... w 8 <t ...... w :2: 6 2: .... 40 ..... ...... ". 4 ". ". FEMALES ...... 2 ..•..............................................................................• . 20 . o 0 DEC-JAN-FEB MAR-APR-MAY JUN-JUL-AUG Fig. 7. Seasonal relation of mean percent body fat estimated by the densitometric method condition ratio (product of 0.1 of the decimal equivalents of total kidney, femur marrow, of 33 male and 41 female mule deer, 1962-63. SEP-OCT -NOV (Behnke 1961) and mean and body fat percentages) i""'l;, r·) ,.,!, if I ::r) �-156- MALE ~ u; FEMALE >w z o ~ _j ~ o I-I-- Z W U ~ W Q_ DEC-JAN-FEB MAR-APR-MAY JUN- JUL - AU G SEP-OCT - NOV DEC -J AN-FEB MAR-APR-MAY JUN-JUL-AUG SEP-OCT-NOV 0:: :::) 2: w u, I-- Z W U 0:: W Q_ Fig. 8. Mean seasonal patterns of percent femur marrow fat and percent total kidney fat of male and female mule deer, 1961-62-63. The top open rectangle indicates the mean (middle line) and ± standard error of the mean (top and bottom lines). Sample sizes are above each bar. �1:1 0 • 0 • • 0 0 0 ...-.. I X I \ 0 I • I I 0 \ \ \ I \ Y oI \ I \ \ / / \ / \ \ \ rI \ I • U 8 0 _j 0 \ \ \ . x • I \8 I I . I I I I 0 0 K, . \ I \ \ I I \ • I \ I J-' lJl .....) I I I \ I \ \ I \ I • • \ 0 I \ z I I \ • ./ I I '1( I \ 0:: 0 <l: \ I \ <l: w \ I \ 0 0 - -x_ X / \ I Vi <l: 0 I r '8 / / \ I 0 , \ 0 I 0:: / ,- / I \ x-- / I I o\ I \ I \ I m I I I .x\ / / \ \ \ I I ~ \ I ~ ~ '. I 0 x --- .0 --OQ!l ex MALE FEMALE I 0 APR tvtAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC 1962 Fig. 9. Monthly adrenal ascorbic acid levels for 34 male (closed 1962-63. The "x" indicates a monthly mean or a single value. 1963 circle) and 44 female (open circle) mule deer, f=\:. "~:':~ i.}J �l~\) '~n ::J,' MALE FEMALE 10 ~ 9 I:::::! 12 9 11 I I-' I.JJ CXJ I _j « z w cr: o « z « w 2: DEC-JAN-FEB MAR -APR -MAY JUN-JUL -AUG SEP-OCT-NOV Fig. 10. Mean seasonal patterns of adrenal ascorbic acid of male and female mule deer, 1962-63. The top open rectangle represents the mean (middle line) and ± standard error of the mean (top and bottom lines). Sample sizes are above each bar. �21 13 IJ) 13 12 17 I- Z ~ 14 16 o 14 9 u 12 11 _j « I- z W 0:: MARAPR-MAY W EOSINOPHILS u, u, o u 8 DECMARJAN - FEB APR- MAY MALE 12 FEMALE 21 SEPOCT - NOV ~ E;j 16 11 11 JUNJUL-AUG MONOCYTES 17 W >- SEPOCT-NOV 13 IJ) I- JU N JUL-AUG 9 I I I-' 9 14 17 14 16 , W ...L .....J -+ ~ I I I \lJ I I 21 ~ V1 12 I u, o w <.9 « Iz W U 0:: W 0... DECJAN-FEB MARAPR-MAY JUNJUL-AUG SEPOCT-NOV LYMPHOCYTES DECJAN-FEB MARAPR-MAY SEGMENTED JUN JUL-AUG SEPOCT-NOV NEUTROPHILS Fig. 11. Seasonal means (middle horizontal line), t 1 standard error of the mean (outer horizontal lines), and range (ends of vertical lines) of differential cell percentages from male (diagonal lines) and female (horizontal lines) mule deer, 1961-63. Sample sizes are above each vertical line. id , i!<t:lI" ~i!;;1>- �-160- that; under stress, as neutrophi1s increase, lymphocytes and eosinophi1s decrease and that the neutrophi1:1ymphocyte is the most significant indicator of this tendency. These ratios are computed from the means of their percentage distribution. In Figure 11, this relationship is seen to have occurred in both sexes in the transition from summer to fall and fall to winter. Maximum neutrophil: lymphocyte ratios (high stress) prevailed during the winter months in both sexes and minimum values (low stress) for males in summer and in spring and summer for females (Table 17). Yearlong, males had somewhat larger N:L ratios than females. Monocytes and eosinophi1s follow the same general seasonal patterns in both sexes reaching maximum means in the summer and fall. Female eosinophil means exceeded monocyte means yearlong but only during the summer and fall in the male. Moreover, male monocyte seasonal means were remarkably similar. Discussion: The condition indices described above are only a few of the many possible appr~hes to a description of seasonal condition levels and in establishing "phys'io1ogica1 normslr with the data now available. Blood chemistry, the relation of carcass weight to hind foot length, and endocrine gland weight related to a suitable reference standard are some of the more obvious variables to be explored in the future. The tabulation of raw data herein serves the purposes of facilitating these explorations. In·addition, since many of these variables are extremely labile the tabulations serve as an interpretative aid. The circumstances of the animals death, may for example, be of utmost importance in including or excluding a particular set of values in computations. It is anticipated that it will be necessary to somehow quantify the circumstances of death recorded for each animal; time of shooting, time'of death, behavior before and after death, etc. before processing the data for computer analysis. In analyzing the blood plasma data herein, it was noticed that in each of the four variables (Table 15) 1961-62 variances ranged higher than in 1963. This was particularly true in the erythrocyte count, perhaps the most subject to between-individual variability. Thus, male erythrocyte variances were 16.38 (1961-62) and 1.83 (1963) with sample sizes of 24 and 20, respectively. Three laboratory technicians made the 1961~62 counts and two in 1963. A review of the literature on selected mule deer blood values presented previously (Anderson 1963), show that the Poudre sample means were similar to mule deer values elsewhere but variances were larger. The factor of sampling all age classes yearlong is one possible source of these larger variances but the facts above suggest between-technician variation as the major source. The preliminary exploration of selected condition indices presented above indicate certain seasonal and between-sex relationships. It is surprising to find so similar and definite seasonal patterns with such small sample sizes and the resultant necessary inclusion of all age classes. It is believed, however, that while a 3 age class breakdown for each sex (fawn, subadu1t, adult) will eventually be possible; the inherent variability of some indices in certain seasons will not permit firm conclusions by age class at the present level of sampling. �-161- Age estimates herein indicate that females averaged older than males during all seasons except summer (Figure 6) and that this discrepancy was at a maximum during the winter and spring. Since this is a period when all deer are supposedly on the winter range, this may reflect a relatively younger average male component in the population; a not unreasonable hypothesis in a lightly harvested herd such as the Poudre, which has been subjected to periodic bucksonly harvests. It is possible also, that if there were less discrepancy in mean seasonal ages; mean annual male and female body fat percentages would not differ significantly (Table 14). . ( A meaningful comparison of the Poudre selected condition indices with mule deer herds elsewhere is hardly possible since there is a paucity of published quantitative data on the subject. Bischoff (1954) investigated fat reserves in 141 adult female mule deer co ll.ect ed yearlong in northeastern California but did not discuss the seasonal cycle except to state in regard to femur marrow fat consistency; "an increase in the number of gelatinous samples during the late winter and late spring months when the condition of the animals was generally poorer". Percent femur marrow fat values ranged from 0.3 - 95 in his study which are Lower (Table 14) than the femur marrow extremes on the Poudre. Taber et al., (n.d.) reported on 4 condition indices (live weightbody length rati~ kidney fat index, blood serum protein, adrenal weight ratio) from 50 Montana mule deer of both sexes. This sample exhibited maximum values for males in the summer and fall and minimum values during the winter and spring. This is similar to our male condition cycle (Figure 8) . Female seasonal flucuations were of less magnitude and certainty. Finally, it is of interest to note that in the pioneer investigation of Cheatum (1949) on white-tailed deer malnutrition, it was suggested that a theoretical approximation of 25 percent femur marrow fat indicated a "serious stage of malnutrition". In the Poudre study about 12 percent of the males and 10 percent of the females were at or below 25 percent femur marrow fat and estimates of percent body fat thereon ranged from about 6.5 - 8.0 (males) and 4.0 - 5.0 (females), which encompasses the mean value (7.76) for males and is about 50 percent below the mean value (10.12) for females. It would appear that there is more to evaluation of "malnutrition" than categorical assignment based on analyses of a single factor. While seasonal condition indices are scarce in the literature, comparative data on Odocoileus adrenal ascorbic acid levels and neutrophil:lyrnphocyte ratios have not yet been found. An investigation of seasonal stresses on the herbivorous ruminant wallaby Setonix brachyurus utilized adrenal ascorbic acid levels (Herrick 1961) and is the only one of its kind known to me at this writing. An interesting finding of this study was an initial increase in adrenal ascorbic acid levels (less stress) following the onset of stress (dehydration) of 3 - 6 days duration and a subsequent steady drop under continued stress until a minimum level (maximum stress) was reached 6 - 11 days later. Since these data were reported in terms of a colorimeter scale, comparison with our values are not possible. Although mean seasonal patterns of differential blood cell percentages are consistent, computed standard errors (Figure 11) suggest that few, if any~ of the seasonal means are significantly different. Stress data, moreover, should be evaluated in terms of the circumstances of death and the effects �-162of age. Thus, Guyton (1961) reports apparent age-related differences in human differential cell percentages as well as the exceedingly labile nature of neutrophils and the adrenocorticotrophic (ACTI!) - corticosteroid release of which the adrenal ascorbic acid level is but an indirect measure. These considerations in the future will aid in interpreting the seasonal cycles suggested herein. LITERATURE CITED Anderson, A. E. 1962. Physical characteristics. pp 253-299. In 1962 Quarterly Report, Part 2. Work Plan 5, Job 1 Completion Report. Colorado Game and Fish Dept., Denver, Colorado. (Processed) Anderson, A. E. 1963. Physical characteristics. In 1963 Quarterly Report, Work Plan 5, Job 1 Completion Report. Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Dept., Denver, Colorado. (Processed) Association of Official Agricultural Chemists. 1960. analyses. Ninth Ed., Wash., D. C. 832pp. Baird Associates. n.d. Cambridge, Mass. Flame photometer manual. Official methods of Third Edition, Behnke, A. R, 1961. Comment on the determination of whole body density and a resum~ of body composition data. pp 118-133. In J. Brozek and A. Henschel, (eds.). Techniques for measuring body composition. Nat'l. Acad , Sciences - Nat'l. Res. Council, Wash., D. C. vi + 300pp. Bischoff, A. I. 1954. Limitations on the bone marrow technique in determining malnutrition in deer. Proceedings Annual Conference, Western Assoc. of Game and Fish Commissioners 34:205-210. Cheatum E. L. 1949. Bone marrow as an index of malnutrition New York State Conservationist 3:19-22. in deer. 1938. Determination of vitamin A with the Dann, W. J. and K. A. Evelyn. Biochemistry J. 32 (6):1008-1017 . photoelectric colorimeter. 1949. Determination of Gornell, A. G., C. J. Burdawill, and M. M. David. J. BioI. Chem~ 177(2):751-766. serum proteins by means ot biuret reaction. Guyton, A. C. 1961. Textbook of medical physiology. Co., Philadelphia and London, l18lpp. 2nd Ed. W. B. Saunders Hepler, O. E. 1958. Manual of clinical laboratory methods. Springfield, Illinois, 387pp. C. C. Thomas, Herrick, E. H. 1961. Some preliminary experiments on adrenal function during seasonal stresses in a wild marsupial (Setonix brachyurus). J. Royal Society Western Australia 44(2):61-64. Kitson, R. E. and M. G. Mellon. 1944. Colorimetric determination of phosphorous as molybdivanadophosphoric acid. Indust. and Engr. Chemistry, Analytical Ed. 16(6):379-383. �-163- Lewis, L. L. and L. M. Melnick. 1960. Determination of calcium and magnesium with (ethylene dinitrilo) tetracetic acid. Analytical Chern. 32(1) :38-42. Maickel, R. P. 1960. A rapid procedure for the determination of adrenal ascorbic acid. Application of the Sullivan and Clarke method to tissues. Analytical Biochemistry 1(6):498-501. Munsell, A. H. 1929-1960. Munsell book of color, pocket edition. Color Co., Inc., Baltimore, Md. Munsell Riney, T. 1955. Evaluating condition of free-ranging red deer Cervus elaphus with special reference to New Zealand. N. Z. J. Science and Tech., Sec. B 36:429-463. Robinette, W. L., D. A. Jones, G. Rogers, J. S. Gashwiler. 1957. Notes on tooth development and wear for Rocky Mountain mule deer. J. Wi1d1. Mgmt. 21(2):134-153. Scha1m, O. W. animals. 1962. Leucocyte responses to disease in various domestic J. Amer. Vet. Med. Assoc. 140(6):557-563. Taber, R. D., K. L. White and N. S. Smith. n.d. The annual cycle of condition in the Rattlesnake. Montana mule deer. Proc. Montana Academy of Sciences 19:72-79 . ) . I Prepared Date by Allen E. Anderson January, 1905 Approved by Laurence E. Riordan Asst. Director, Research Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator ��111111111111111111111111111 111111111111111111111111111111111 BDOW022696 January, ).965 -165- .> . JOB COMPLETION RESEARCH REPORT PROJECT SEGMENT , State.of COLORADO Project No. W-l05~R-4 Work Plan No~ 5 --------~------------- Job No. Personnel: An Ecological Investigat ion of the Cache la Poudre Deer Herd, Colorado 2 Period Covered: January, .. _ .... Physiological Studies ,Reproductive Studies 1963 - December, Allen E. Anderson ___ .' 1963 and Dean E. Medin _._. ABSTRACT, Se Lec t ed measurements on portions of the reproductive tracts of 22 male, 26 female (17 days to about 10 years of age) and 18 prenatal young mule deer, c6llected yearlong for intensive study during 1963 are tabulated chronologically. Counts of the pigmented corpora 1utea scars of pregnancy on 26 ' pairs of ovaries from deer 28-30 months of age and older sampled in 1963 resulted in a mean of 1.27 and 92.3 percent of those examined had conceived. ' There were no significant corpora lutea count differences (P~ .05) between the 1961-62-63 samples when this age component was compared. The same age component involving 176 deer over the 3 year period yielded a mean pigmented corpora lute a of pregnancy count of 1.58 and 90.3 percent had conceived. When the proportions of pigmented corpora lutea of pregnancy to the number oLfemales in each of 5 age classes of 28 months older were compared, it was found that there were no significant (P'::;' .05) differences between these age classes. Gestation period data involving 30 females; 1961-62-63, indicated ovulation rates of 1.87 and fetal rates of 1.80. The 37-60 month age component had the maximum' fetal rate and apparent breeding failures were gene ra lLy confined to deer 36 months and younger. Of the 54 prenatal young examined (1961-62-63) 22.were males, 22 females, and 10 of undetermined sex. The sexes and number, of young were equally, 'distributed among the uterine horns. Thirty conception dates estimated from. growth curves of prenatal young ranged from November 18 to February 7 but about 63 percent occurred between November 25 and December 8. Of 30 litters examined, 22 or about 73 percent, consisted of twins; ..'_,. __ , ••. _ . ,.~ __ ~ ,c, __'" ...._ ._~ __ ._ �-166- Studies on the seasonal changes of 57 male reproductive tracts suggest maximum testes and prostate gland development in November, which coincides with the estimated period of maximum conception suggested above. Considerable individual variability in sexual development within the same age class and during any specific month was noted and the yearling age class exhibited maximum between-individual variability. Acknowledgements: Miss Florence Fields M.T.(ASCP) with the assistance of Mrs. Francis Lechleitner, prepared and sectioned all the 1963 ovarian and testicular material. Mrs. Vonnie Campbell and Miss Florence Fields measured, weighed, and obtained volumes on all ovaries and testes and made the testicular smears. We would like to thank all of these participants as well as the student assistants who aided in field collections, at the check station and in the laboratory during 1963, especially T. Hakonson, D. Minnich, D. Markham, L. Nelson Jr. and K. Porter. The latter did much of the data tabulation, herein. The dissection and gross morphological work was done in the laboratory of the Colorado Cooperative Wildlife Research Unit, Colorado State University, Fort Collins, Colorado. Recommendations: None Objectives: Determine the reproductive pattern of the deer herd to provide data on: (a) morphology of the reproductive organs as related to age and season, and (b) tentatively, the relationship of productivity to measured factors of the environment. �-167- REPRODUCTIVE STUDIES Allen E. Anderson Technigues Used: Most of the techniques cribed in Anderson (1962:253-275). Reproductive .\ outlined below are more fully des- Tract Collection Hunting season.--Female reproductive tracts were donated by hunters at the check station during the 1963 season. Just prior to the season, hunter cooperation was solicited through various news media. At a temporary roadblock, about 2,000 Unit 19 hunters were briefed on the purposes and techniques of reproductive tract removal and given a diagram and instructions (Appendix 1) inside a polyethylene bag. At the station, the lower jaw was removed and identically-numbered tags attached to the lower jaw and reproductive tract. Tracts were trimmed of excess tissue and placed immediately in AFA fixative. In a few cases, the lower jaw was not available and these were classified as "unknown age." These data were used in the overall mean. In addition, a few hunters would not permit removal of the lower jaw and their deer were placed in age classes by dentition inspection • Regular collection.--Deer of both sexes were collected on a four per month basis. The gross morphology of portions of their reproductive tracts were studied in the laboratory. Laboratory Examination Age estimation.--All deer from which reproductive material had been obtained were assigned to age classes on the basis of 'replacement and wear patterns of the mandibular dentition using the criteria of Robinette et a1. (1957). The wear criteria are a ratio of relative wea r derived from measurements of; (1) lingual height and (2) occlusal width (buccal), of the molariform teeth, and comparison with photographs of the mandibular dentition from mule deer of known-age. The ages estimated for animals with permanent dentition by these criteria may only be regarded as gross approximations since the known-age samples on which the criteria are based was very small. For example, the ratio of lingual height to buccal width is believed to the most reliable criterion, yet confidence limits (P = .05) for any age class exceed ± 2 years (Table 7 in Robinette et~. 1957a). Ovaries. --No morphological data we re obtained from ovaries taken during the hunting season. The ovaries of deer collected regularly were placed in physiological saline irrnnediatelyafter dissection. After draining and blotting, weight, volume and three measurements were obtained on each ovary. Ovaries from both sources were fixed in AFA and stored in 80 percent a lcohol. After embedding in ce Ll oLd in , longitudinal, seria I sections of about one millimeter thickness were cut with a raZOr blade from each ovary. Sections from each ovary were fastened together, wrapped in �-168- cheesecloth, labeled, and stored in 80 percent alcohol. Ovaries prepared in this manner are suitable for both gross and histological study of ovarian structures. Only gross examinations and counts of the pigmented corpora lutea of pregnancy using the criteria of Cheatum (1949) are reported herein. Histological examination of the ovarian material will be made if a qualified histologist becomes available. Female reproductive tract.--After dissection, the intact tract is placed in physiological saline. After draining, blotting, and removing the bladder and excess fat and tissue, the tract is weighed to the nearest gram. If gravid, the weight of the tract is obtained by subtracting the weight of the embryo(s) or fetus(es) from the total weight. Measurements taken are those of Sears (1955) as shown in Figure 1. The tract is fixed in AFA and stored in 80 percent alcohol for possible future study. Embryos and fetuses.--When possible, the sex of the young was determined and recorded by left or right uterine horn. External body measurements Ivere made and supplemented by morphological descriptions according to Armstrong (1950), Hudson and Browman (1959), and Morrison et al. (1959). After draining (washing and blotting for the larger fetuse~ each fetus was weighed and the volume determined. The age in days of each fetus(es) was estimated using the grovth curve~ of hind foot length, forehead-rump length, forehead rump Zwe f ghr ratio and the left ear auricle as developed by Hudson and Browman (1959). Conception dates were estimated from these values using .the midpoint of their probable ranges. In the case of two or more fetuses the values were averaged to establish the probable range. Embryos are fixed in AFA and preserved in 80 percent alcohol and fetuses are both fixed and preserved in 10 percent formalin for possible future study. Male reproductive tract.--Following dissection, the intact tract is placed in physiological saline. After draining and blotting and removing the epididymis, each testis is measured, weighed, and its volume determined. The prostate gland is drained, blotted, and weighed to the nearest 0.1 gram. These parts and the rest of the tract are fixed in AFA and stored in 80 percent alcohol. Sections, 10 microns thick, were sectioned with a rotary microtome from a wedge-shaped tissue block removed from one end of each testis. The tissue was processed through ethyl alcohol, toluol, and toluol-paraffin solutions with about 24 hours in each, embedded in paraffin, stained in Harris' alum hematoxylin and eosin Y; and mounted in picolyte. In 1962, seminiferous tubules from each testis were measured with a lOX objective microscope using a lOX ocular with a calibrated ocular micrometer (1 division O.M. = 11.1 microns). Tubules measured were those seen in near perfect cross section and if oblique sections were measured, the smallest diameter was used. In 1963, however, 2 different microscopes were used and the ocular micrometer factor on 7 sets of testes was; 1 division O.M. = 18.7 microns and the factor on the remaining was 1 division O.M. = 14.2 microns. Both microscopes had lOX objective and lOX oculars. The mean of the 20 measurements was used as an index to seminiferous tubule development in each of 57 deer. In order to elucidate seasonal sexual development, the data from deer of 12 months of age and older, are presented quantitatively. �-169- Ventral View (Bladder Removed) - I k-__ 7-4 . 6 INDEX Measurement Uterine Horns Left Right 2. Uterine Body Median Septum True 3. Vagina 4. Cervix 1. Figure 1. W~asurement No. Diameters Longitudinal Transverse 3 1 4 2 5 10 6 9 7 8 Schematic diagram of female reproductive tract showing measurements being taken as modified from Sears (1955). �-170- Dry smears of testicular and epididymal sperm were made in the laboratory, generally 4 to 5 hours after death, by bisecting the organ and passing about 3/4 of the slide length across the freshly cut surface. The smears were allowed to air-dry and stained in Wrights'. The gross histology of the seminiferous tubules and dry smears will be described in subsequent reports. Terminology The following terms are defined and applied according to the accompanying references. (1) ovulation rate = Total (3) percent conceived et al., 1955) 100- ( total prenatal young ) (total current corpora lutea of pregnancy) loss of ova (Robinette percent et al., 1955) current corpora lutea of pregnancy total females (Robinette (4) herein, fetal rate = total prenatal young total females (Robinette (2) to a stated age component = total et al., 1955) females with c. 1. of pregnancy total females (Swank, 1958) Findings: During 1963, 22 males and 26 females of all age classes, were collected for intensive study. In addition, about 80 female reproductive tracts were collected at the check station during the 1963 hunting season. Of these, 40 were suitable for ovarian analyses. In addition to the regular collection, some reproductive data were obtained from one male and one female (road-kills). Analysis of Female Material Hunting season ovarian analysis, 1963.--Counts of the pigmented corpora lutea of pregnancy are tabulated by 7 age classes and an "unknown age" category in Table 1. These data provide an index to the rate and percent of females conceiving during the 1962-63 breeding season. Sample sizes are again most inadequate but the most meaningful value is believed to be the mean (1.27) and percent conceiving (92.3) in the mature age component, i.e., 28 months and older. �Table l.--Counts of the pigmented corpora lutea scars of pregnancy from 40 mule deer obtained at the check station during the late October, 1963 hunting season. No. of Deer with Percent Age Class Sample Pigmented Corpora Lutea Scars Total No. Percent Mean Scars with (Honths)+ Size o 1 2 3 (Scars) Scars Total Scars Per Female Scars 4-6 16-18 28-30 40-52 64-76 88-100 112+ 3 9 3 9 2 o 13 1 8 1 Unknown 2 2 Total 40 o o o o o o o o 5 3 o o o 17 10 9.1 0.0. 0.0 1.00 1.31 1.25 1.00 1.50 o o 0,0 0.0 0.0 0.0 100.0 92.3 87.5 100.0 100.0 0.0 o 33 100.0 0.83 60.0 2 7 4 1 1 o 2 o o 16 15 9 1 o o o 1 o o 2 1 3 0.0 0.0 6.1 51.5 30.3 3.0 I Fawns Excluded 37 13 15 9 o 33 0.89 64.8 Fawns, Yearlings, UnknO\Y11s , Excluded 26 2 15 9 o 33 1.27 92.3 7.7 57.7 34.6 o Percent of Total, Fawns, Yearlings, Unknown Excluded * f-' .._J f-' I Ages are those estimated at the time of death. Conception occurred about 8-10 months earlier during the 1961-62 breeding season. While it is impossible for a 4-6 month old deer to have pigmented corpora lutea of pregnancy; the material collected will be useful for future histological studies and are presented here in the interests of a complete record. f"'''l), .:,,-f; ':;:.;\ �-172- Hunting season ovarian analysis, 1961-62-63 compared.--There were no significant differences (chi square analysis, 2 x 3 contingency table, P< .05) between the 1961-62-63 proportions of pigmented corpora lutea of pregnancy to the number of females in the 28 months and older age components. The data are combined in Table 2. The results of a contingency chi square suggest that there were no significant (P< .05) age class differences in the pigmented corpora lutea of pregnancy-scars/number of female proportioris in mature deer (Table 3). Reproductive tract morphology.--The individual measurements of the ovaries and reproductive tracts from 26 animals collected during 1962 are tabulated in Table 4. No attempt at analysis or interpretation of these data will be made until age class sample sizes increase. Regular collection ovarian analyses--fetal rates, 1961-62-63.--1n Table 5, counts of the corpora lutea of pregnancy are compared to the prenatal young count in 30 pregnant females collected during 1961, 1962, and 1963. There were 56 corpora lutea of pregnancy and 54 young recorded from this material. This is an ovulation rate of 1.87 and a fetal rate of 1.80. Counts and average diameters of the pigmented corpora lutea of pregnancy thought to have originated during the 1960-61 and 1961-62 breeding seasons are also cited in Table 5. These have small reliability because of the occasional difficulty in their recognition. They do, however, indicate that in some individuals, the pigmented corpora lutea of pregnancy probably persist at least one breeding season beyond the conception date as postulated by (Robinette, 1958). The recent reproductive histories of 72 females, old enough (6 months) to have lived through one breeding season, are summarized by 13 age classes in Table 6. The salient points therein are as follows. (1) Twelve deer which lacked a breeding history were estimated to be under 36 months of age. Of 7 deer which had apparently conceived but failed ~o retain their young, 3 were under 36 months of age. (2) The 37-60 month age component had the maximum fetal rate. (3) One of 4 fawns had probably conceived but did not retain her young. These values are influenced, of course, by the disproportionate sampling of age classes which indicates that 71 percent of the sample consisted of females under 60 months of age. There was a 3.6 percent loss of ova based on 54 prenatal pora 1utea of pregnancy. young and 56 cor- Morphology of pr~natal young, 1963.--All measurements of prenatal young are presented in Table 7. Their fresh weights ranged from 3.l3g-3,520g from mothers collected from January 16 to June 5, respectively. Fetal six ratios and litter size, 1961-62-63.--0£ the 54 young examined, 22 were males, 22 females, and 10 of undetermined sex. The latter were an estimated 48-75 'days of age, and ranged in weight from about 2g-60g. The sex ratio of the 44 was 100:100. The sexes were also equally distributed in each uterine horn as were the number of young and about 73 percent of the sample had twins (Table 8). �Table 2.--Counts of the pigmented corpora lutea scars of pregnancy from 248 mule deer obtained at the.check station during the late October hunting seasons, 1961-62-63. Percent No. of Deer with Pigmented Sample Corpora Lutea of Pregnancy Scars Percent with Mean Scars Age Class Total No. Per Deer (Months)* Size a 1 2 3 4 (Scars) Scars Total Scars Scars o a o a a a 5 1 9 3 2 5 12 4 4 3 1 o o 5 0.0 0.7 13.7 43.8 16.5 7.7 15.7 1.8 84 76 62 19 7 285 100.0 4-6* 16-18 28-30 40-52 64-76 88-100 112+ Unknown 27 37 39 73 25 14 25 27 36 6 3 1 3 8 6 8 Total 248 4 o 28 26 1 4 32 7 a a 2 4 39 125 47 a 22 1 45 2 0.0 . 0.05 1.00 1.71 1.80 0.0 0.3 84.6 94.5 88.0 92.9 88.0 0.62 50.0 1.15 66.1 1. 88 1.57 I I-' Fawns Excluded 221 57 76 62 19 7 285 1.29 74.2 Fawns, Yearlings, Unknowns, Excluded 176 17 73 60 19 7 278 1. 58 90.3 9.7 41.4 34.0 10.8 3.9 Percent of Total; Fawns, Yearlings, Unknowns, Excluded * " \..JJ I Ages are those estimated at the time of death. Conception occurred about 8-10 months earlier during the 1961-62 breeding season. While it is impossible for a 4-6 month old deer to have pigmented corpora lutea of pregnancy; the material collected will be useful for future histological studies and are presented here in the interests of a complete record. I""il ~~} ... '"",,) �-174- Table 3.--Results of contingency chi square for the relationship between age class and the number of pigmented corpora lutea of pregnancy in 176 breeding age mule deer as sampled during the late October hunting season, 1961-62-63. Age Class No. Females C.L. of_Pregnancy No. Pigj!!!ented Observed (Months) Expected Chi Observed Expected Chi Total 28-30 39 30.24 2.54 39 47.76 1.61 78 40-52 73 76.76 .18 125 121.24 .12 198 64-76 i5 27.91 .30 47 44.09 .19 72 88-100 14 13.96 .0009 22 22.04 .0001 36 112+ 25 27.14 .17 45 42.86 .11 70 176 176.01 3.19 278 277.99. 2.03 454 Total Computed Chi Square = 5.22 Tabular Chi Square at 4 degrees of freedom, 5 percent confidence level = 9.49 �Table 4.--Measurements (cm), fresh weights (g), and volumes (cc) of ovaries and reproductive tracts, 1963. Page 1 of 2 Date-Age-Wt.Ratio-Item Collection No. 82~\-83~\-84~\-88~'~90~\-91~'(93')'~95')'~97 98* 101~\-103 104 106 107 1-16 1-23 1-30 2-27 3-13 3-20 4-8 4-22 5-6 5-13 6-5 6-19 6-26 7-9 7-16 Collection Date (Honth-Day) 5-7 9-7 4-7 3-8 9-9 8-9 8-10 4-10·0-11 8-11 4-0 1-0 0-0.6 1-0 2-1 Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt./Body Length Ratio .31 .33 .30 .28 .30 .32 .30 .26 .20 .32 .31 .18 .08 .23 .28 1.34 1.75 1.77 2.02 2.08 1.68 2.49 1.25 1.72 1.82 2.30 1.76 0.76 1.59 2.16 Ovary (Left) Long Diam. 1.13 1.49 1.36 1.60 1.45 1.07 1.29 1.21 1.08 1.14 1.37 1.10 0.44 0.93 1.24 Trans. Diam. 0.54 0.83 0.72 1.01 1.01 0.69 0.41 0.65 0.56 0.91 0.90 0.78 0.32 0.60 0.58 Height Diam. 0.75 1.13 1.34 1.73 1.52 0.69 0.85 0.54.0.57 1.10 1.60 0.93 0.08 0.55 1.22 Wt. 0.52 1.04 1.12 1.58 1.49 0.64 0.78 0.49 0.55 1.05 1.58 0.85 0.07 0.51 1.10 Vol. 1.75 1.96 1.91 1.97 1.79 1.75 2.53 1.74 1.86 1.52 2.07 1.57 0.76 1.38 2.04 Ovary (Right)Long Diam. 1.53 1.45 1.31 1.34 1.17 1.76 1.72 1.10 1.22 1.04 1.47 0.95 0.46 0.90 1.25 Trans. Diam. 1.07 0.82 0.82 0.57 0.53 0.96 0.84 0.83 0.57 0.86 0.79 0.65 0.28 0.69 0.61 Height Diam. 1.72 1.65 1.24 0.97 0.93 1.52 2.12 0.95 0.69 0.79 1.27 0.73 0.07 0.50 1.16 Wt. 1.41 1.61 0.99 0.81 0.90 1.50 1.98 0.91 0.67 0.74 1.23 0.66 0.06 0.45 1.00 Vol. Reproductive Tract+ Uterine Horn (Left) 15.5 19.0 16.5 20.5 25.0 30.0 29.0 10.5 3.5 25.5 49.0 3.0 1.5 3.0 7.5 Long Diam. (3) 6.5 7.0 8.0 12.0 13.0 18.0 15.0 9.5 1.0 11.5 26.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 2.0 Trans. Diam. (4) Uterine Horn (Right) Long Diam. (1) 15.5 20.5 17.5 22.5 13.0 29.5 30.5 21.0 3.5 15.5 44.0 3.5 1.5 3.0 8.5 Trans. Diam. (2) 6.5 8.5 7.5 12.0 n .o 15.0 17.0 37.0 1.0 6.5 26.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 2.5 21.5 21.0 l1.0 4.0 14.5 13.0 15.0 19.0 19.5 20.0 18.0 11.0 21.0 16.0 Vagina Long Diam. (6) Trans. Diam. (7) 2.5 3.0 2.5 2.5 2.0 3.0 3.0 2.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 1.5 1.0 2.5 3.5 Cervix Long Diam. (9) 7.5 7.0 5.0 9.0 9.0 7 5 7.0 5.5 2.5 8.0 9.5 4.0 1.5 5.0 6.0 2.0 3.0 1.5 2.0 2.0 3.0 2.0 1.5 1.0 2.0 3.0 1.0 1.5 1.0 2.0 Trans. Diam. (8) Uterine Body 0.9 1.5 1.0 1.0 2.5 2.5 1.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 True Length (10) Median Septum Length (5) 9.5 12.0 13.5 15.0 11.0 28.0 29.0 23.0 3.5 17.0 38.0 4.0 6.0 4.0 10.0 1880 13140 860 1050 1300 2640 2040 4670 5190 2940 Wt. with Fetus(es) 1705· 6550 23 15 45 ·125 853 .1021 1242 2274 1730 3571 2975 2000 Wt. without Fetus(es) I f-' -..J Y1 .e + * Sears (1955) and Figure 1. Pregnant(Young detectable macroscopically). I"';~ .. 7· -':t., u ';/T �f""'~ -, ,-'~.E ';:;''J Table 4.--Measurements (cm) , fresh weights (g), and volumes (cc) of ovaries and reproductive Date-Age-Wt.Ratio-Item tracts, 1963. Page 2 of 2 109 111 112 115 Collection No. 116 117 118 Collection Date (Month-Day) 7-30 Estimated Age (Year-Month) 3-1 Eviscerated wt./Body Length Ratio .28 8-6 4-2 .30 8-20 4-2 .33 9-18 3-3 .34 9-25 2-3 .37 10-1 0-4 .23 10-8 1-4 .31 10-22 9-4 .33 11-12 0-5 .21 12-10 4-6 .27 12-17 9-6 .32 Ovary (Left) 1.82 1.20 0.61 0.73 0.80 1.80 0.99 1.10 0.94 0.88 1.82 1.24 0.84 1.06 0.96 1.59 1.08 0.59 0.69 0.61 2.08 1.37 0.68 1.16 1.08 2.30 1.40 0.97 1.75 1.71 2.07 1.59 0.76 1.42 1.40 1.87 1.24 0.78 1.05 1.04 2.38 1.55 1.10 2.04 1.99 2.36 1.56 1.16 2.20 2.13 1.76 1.09 0.74 0.68 0.56 1.78 1.05 0.60 0.57 0.47 2.07 1.36 0.89 1.32 1.26 2.05 1.15 0.69 0.95 0.89 2.19 1.37 0.60 1.17 1.14 2.14 1.28 0.81 1.37 1.32 1. 96 1.50 0.74 1.64 1.56 2.10 1.79 1.12 2.40 2.36 2.40 1.00 1.60 2.05 2.03 2.08 0.97 0.90 1.06 1.04 6.5 2.5 6.0 2.0 5.0 2.0 3.0 1.5 3.0 0.9 4.0 1.5 5.0 2.0 3.0 1.0 6.5 2.0 6.5 2.5 6.0 2.0 16.0 3.5 6.0 1.5 5-.5 2.0 16.5 3.5 5.0 2,0 4.5 2.0 19.0 3.5 9.0 2.0 3.5 1.5 14.0 3.0 5.0 1.5 3.5 1.0 l2.5 2.0 5,0 1.5 5.0 1.2 16.0 3.0 4.0 1.5 2.0 1.7 21.0 2.7 6.0 1.3 3.0 1.0 11.0 2.0 4.5 1.0 9.0 2.0 17.0 3,0 5.5 1.5 7.5 3 .. 0 16.5 2.5 6,0 2.0 2.5 2.0 2.0 1.5 1.0 1.0 2.0 1.5 1.0 1.5 6.0 5,5 6.5 4.0 3.5 5.0 5,5 3.5 10.0 124 8.0 104 120 29 Long Diam. 1.68 Trans. Diam. 1.20 Height Diam. 0.59 Wt. 0.87 Vol. 0.72 _ 1.63 Ovary (Right) Long Diam. Trans. Diam. 1.20 Height Diam. 0.59 0.88 Wt. Vol. 0.69 Reproductive Tract+ Uterine Horn (Left) Long Diam. (3) 4.5 Trans. Diam. (4) 1.5 Uterine Horn (Right) Long Diam. (1) 8.0 Trans. Diam. (2) 2.0 Long Diam. (6) 17.0 Vagina Trans. Diam. (7) 4.0 6,0 Long Diam. (9) Cervix 1.2 Trans. Diam. (8) Uterine Body True Length (10) 1.5 Medium Septum Length (5) 7,0 Wt, with Fetus(es) 116 Wt. without Fetus(es) Sears (1955) and Figure 2. + -H- Uterus appeared gravid. - - 108 -85 - 130 -54 -35 -60 120 121 125-1+ 126-H- -- - I I-' . ...:1 O'l I �Table 5.--The reproductive performance of 72 female mule deer, 6 months of age and older, collected from Page 1 of 3 April 13, 1961 to December 17, 1963 and tabulated by month of collection. Current Breeding Season No.-Sex of Past Breeding Seasons No. and Diameter (rom) Prenatal No. and Diameter (rom) Coll. Coll. Est. Age of CorEora Lutea of Pregnancy of Cor~ora Lutea of Pregnanc2 Young Date Total No. Total L. R. T. Left Dia. (Year-Mo.) Left Dia. Right Dia. Dia. Right 33 34 35 82 83 84 1-19-62 1-23-62 1-30-62 1-16-63 1-23-63 1-30-63 3-7 9-7 2-7 '.)-7 9-7 4-7 0 1 2 1 1 1 36 37 38 88 2- 6-62 2-13-62 2-20-62 2-27-63 1-8 4-8 4-8 3-8 0 1 0 2 41 42 90 91 3-20-62 3-22-62 3-13-63 3-20-63 4-9 2-9 9-9 8-9 1 2 1 0 1 2 3 45 46 47 93 95 018 4-13-61 4-20..;61 4-27-61 4-12-62 4-20-62 4-26-62 4- 8-63 4-22-63 4-28-63 1-10 7-10 6-10 5-10 8-10 2-10 8-10 4-10 3-10 2 0 1 0 1 2 0 0 - (4.5) (7.0) (8.5) 1 1 0 1 1 1 (8.0) (5.0) 1 1 2 0 (9.0) (7.0)(7.0) (7.0) 2 0 0 2 0 1 2 2 1 1 2 2 - (8.5) (7.5) (7.0) 1 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 (5.5)(6.0) (6.5) (7.5)(7.0) (8.0)(8.0) (4.5)(8.0) U U U U F - U M F U U U M M U U F F 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 2 2 2 0 0 0 0 --I --- (1.5) 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 2 I I-' j I 3 2 1 2 M M M F F F F 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 2 F M M - 1 2 2 2 1 2 M - M F F M M M M F F F F F F 2 2 1 2 0 0 1 2 2 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 (1.0) (1.0) (1.0) -(1.0) 0 1 1 1 - 0 0 2 0 0 0 1 0 (1.5) (2.0) (1.0) 0 1 2 3 0 1 3 0 1 0 2 0 r'<')' <f <f �f~A .\} (D Table 5.--The reproductive performance of 72 female mule deer, 6 months of age and older collected from April 13, 1961 to December 17, 1963 and tabulated by month of collection. Page 2 of 3 No.-Sex of Past Breeding Seasons Current Breeding Season No. and Diameter (rom) No. and Diameter (rom) Prenatal 'Young of Corpora Lutea of Pregnancy Coll. cerr. Est. Age of Cor~ora Lutea of Pregnancy Dia. Right Dia. Total Dia. Total L. Date (Year-Mo.) Left Dia. Right R. T. Left No. n ' 4 6 7 48 50 51 97 98 5-8- 61 5-23-61 5-30-61 5- 2-62 5-16-62 5-23-62 5- 6-63 5-13-63 3-11 4-ll 3-11 11-11 1-11 0-11 0-11 8-11 1 1 0 2 1 0 0 1 10 56 101 103 6-20-61 6-27-62 6- 5-62 6-19-63 2-0 5-0 4-0 1-0 0 1 1 0 12 13 14 57 58 59 106 107 109 7- 6-61 7-13-61 7-20-61 7- 9-62 7-16-62 7-23-62 7- 9-63 7-16-63 7-30-63 3-1 7-1 2-1 2-1 1-1 3-1 1-1 2-1 3-1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 2 (7.5) (6.0) (8.5) (9.5) (4.0)(3.5) 1 1 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 (8.5) 0 2 (3.5) (8.0) (8.0) (8.5)(7.0) 0 2 0 1 1 0 0 (3.5)(3.0) \ (4.0) 2 2 2 3 1 0 0 1 0 1 2 0 2 2 1 2 0 2 1 0 0 F M M M F M M M M,F - 2 2 2 3 1 F - 0 0 F L L M L L 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 - - 0 0 1 2 0 L L L 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 ·1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (1.5) (2.0) 1 1 2 O. 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 1 1 (1.5) (1.5) (3.5) (3.5) 1 2 2 0 0 0 0 2 1 0 2 0 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 1 1 I f-< -..J co I �Table 5.--The reproductive performance of 72 female mule deer, 6 months of age and older, collected from Page 3 of 3 AEril 13. 1961 to December l7l 1963 and tabulated by month of collection. Past Breeding Seasons Current Breeding Season No. and Diameter (mm) No. and Diameter (mm) No. of Corpora Lutea of Pregnancy Prenatal of CorEora Lutea of Pregnancy Coll. co n, Est. A~ Total Dia. Total Left Dia. Date Dia. Right Young"< Dia. Right No. ~Year-Ho.) Left 0 o L 0 2 (4.0)(3.5) 0 0 17 8-14-61 2 3-2' 0 o L 0 0 18 1 (2.5) 1 (2.5) 2 8-22-61 2-2 0 o L 0 0 (3.0) 1 (3.0) 2 19 1 8-31-61 8-2 0 0 0 0 0 0 61 0 8- 6-62 2-2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 62 8-13-62 1-2 o L 1 2 1 2 64 1 1 8-27-62 2-2 3 o L (2.0) 0 2 (2.0)(1.5) 1 0 0 110 8- 6-63 4-2 1 o L (2.0) 0 1 0 0 0 112 8-20-63 4-2 3 o L 1 2 (8.0)(3.0) 0 0 0 019 8-19-63 3-2 I I-' -...J 9- 6-61 9-12-61 9-11-62 9-18-63 9-25-63 1-3 2-3 3-3 3-3 2-3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 o L 69 10- 4-62 72 10-23-62 118 10- 8-63 120 10-22-63 2-4 3-4 1-4 9-4 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 26 73 75 2-5 9-5 9-5 0 0 0 3 0 1 3 0 2 (8.5)(7.0) (5.5) 1 0 1 0 (9.0) 1 0 2 2 0 2 2 1 2 0 0 0 20 21 66 115 116 11-14-61 11-15- 62 11-28-62 1 0 0 12-6 29 12-13-61 (6.5) 1 9-6 30 12-20-61 0 1-6 31 12-29-61 1 4-6 77 12-12-62 2 9-6 79 12-26-62 0 4-6 125 12-10-63 2 (6.5)(6.5) 9-6 126 12-17-63 "L" refers to a lactating female. * 0 0 o L 0 o L o L o L o L o L o + o+ 0 0 0 1 0 (2.0) 0 1 0 1 0 (1.5) 0 1 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 2 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 3 (1.5)(2.5) (1.5) (2.5) 1.0 I 2 0 0 0 2 1 f~;:! ':;-, ~j; �(r.:J,; 'i.'~ Table 6.--The reproductive history of 72 female mule deer summarized by year classes as sampled by monthly collections, April 13, 1961 - December 17, 1963. Est. Age Class Interval (Nonths) Prenatal Production+ No. Mothers No. Young 6-12 13-24 25-36 37-48 49-60 61-72 73-84 85-96 97-108 109-120 121-132 133-144 145-146 Total Percent of Total Mean Young Per Female + * ** 0 3 3 5 7 2 2 1 3 3 0 1 0 4 6 9 13 4 4 2 5 4 0 3 0 54 _Q_ 30 41. 7 With C. L. of With C. L. of Pregnancy and Pregnancy and Lac tating~':'\'Not Lac t at Lng=w 0 1 4 6 4 0 0 1 1 4 0 0 0 Without C.L. of Pregnancy and Not Lac t at Lngw= Probable Total Pre gnancy= Females 1 0 2 2 3 5 4 0 0 .0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 21 7 12 0 2 29.1 9.7 16.7 2.8 4 9 13 13 12 2 2 2 4 9 0 1 1 72 Percent .of Total 5.6 12.5 18.1 18.1 16.7 2.8 2.8 2.8 5.6 12.5 0 1.3 1.3 100.0 1.80 Young detectable macroscopically. Young not detectable macroscopically but uterine horns were thickened, enlarged, and filled with viscous fluids in mid-December, 1963. Milk visible in bisected mammary gland. I I-' co 0 I �Table 7.--Externa1 body measurements (mm), fresh-fixed weights (g), volumes (cc), and estimated conception dates for 2 embryos and 16 fetuses of 11 mule deer, 1963. Date-Age-Wt. Ratio of Mother Collection No. and Heasurement of Young 82 83 84 88 90 91 Collection Date (Month-Day) 1-16 Estimated Age (Year-Month) 5-7 Eviscerated Wt./Body Length Ratio .31 Uterine Horn (Left~Right) L. R. Sex (Male, Female, Undetermined) Undo Undo Fresh Wt 3.13 3.88 Fixed Wt 3.00 2.10 fresh Vol (cc) 2.90 3.74 Crovm-Rump 39.0 37.8 Forehead-Rump Contour Length Head Length Head Breadth Auricle (Left) Foreleg Length Left Hind Leg Length Left Hind Foot Length Tail Length Scapula (Metacromium to ischium) Chest Circumference 50 Est. Age of Young/(Days)+ Est. Conception Date 11-27-62 (l1onth-Day)+ -- - - 1-23 9-7 L. - - - - - - - . - - 1-30 4-7 .33 R. L. Male 29.05 22.4 28.25 Female Male 28.1 29.7 23.7 25.0 25.9 26.2 93.4 126. 32.4 18.6 6. 35. 34. 23. 10. - 51. - 6663. 11-18-62 .30 R. 94.9 103.0 3-13 9-9 2-27 3-8 .28 R. L. Female Female 164.3 201.2 163.9 161.3 157.7 192.9 Male 310.1 280.9 298.6 L. - 174. 248. 61. 34. 17. 80. 95. 60. 18. 104. 120. 135. 32.2 19.6 7. 35. 34. 23. 144. 33.6 18.5 6. 36. 35. 25 11. 11. 172. 250. 59. 34. 12. 81. 85. 62. 19. 50. 70. 53. 65. 104 120. :30 R. - - - 228. 281. - - 71. 39. 25. 96. 1l2. 75. 25. - - 128. 140. - 73 86 106 11-18-62 12-3-62 11-26-62 3-20 8-9 L. .32 R. Female Female 526 574 520 555 502 548 255 254 - - 358 86 45 40 131 154 102 25 366 88 44 40 130 155 102 28 145 172 152 182 I f-J CD I-' I 110 12-1-62 f~ ~;;::) .:;a;}J �t',,,,t. "-"_' .;" ,,_) :;~'V Table 7.--Externa1 body measurements (rom),fresh-fixed weights (g), volumes (cc), and estimated conception dates for 2 embryos a_I1~i_16 fetuses of 11 mule deer, 1963. (Cont.) Date-Age-Wt. Ratio of Mo t her Collection No. and Heasurement of Young 93 95 018 98 101 Collection Date (Honth-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt./Body Length Ratio Uterine Horn (Left-Right) Sex (HaLe , Female, Undetermined) Fresh Wt Fixed Wt Fresh Vol (cc) Crown-Rump Forehead-Rump Contour Length Head Length Head Breadth Auricle (Left) Foreleg Length Left Hind Leg Length Left Hind Foot Length Tail Length Scapula (:Metacromium to ischium) Chest Circumference Est. Age of Young (Days)+ Est. Conception Date (Month-Day)+ + 4-8 8-10 .30 4-22 4-10 .26 L. Female 1100 1025 1050 R. Female 1115 1070 1057 326 451 102 51 _ 60 180 218 141 40 186 225 320 463 102 53 ,59 176 196 145 45 189 226 129 12-1-62 ------ - -- ---- - L. - - - - - - -- 4-28 3-10 5-13 8-11 .32 R. Female 940 900 848 L. R. Female Female 1050 1160 1005 1085 - 307 446 113 51 57 169 203 134 30 205 - 126 12-17-62 6-5 4-0 .31 L. R. Female 175.3 L. R. Female 3520 Male 3070 - 168 1 3320.0 2880.0 318 462 111.0 52 59 177 213 138 34- 321 470 112 55 63 186 222 144 36 206 212 179. 240. 59 34 19 71 100 60 15 109 104 560 673 143 63 96 300 390 242 80 302 332 531 615 140 .60 110 298 380 238 60 302 3Q8 - .- 137 12-12-62 r - -- - - -- - 95 42-7-63 185 12-12-62 Based on the growth curves of: hind foot length, forehead-rump length, forehead-rump-body weight ratio, and ear auricles as well as the external morphology as described by Hudson and Browman (1959). I I-' CD N I �-183- Table 8.--Fetal sex ratios and litter sizes from 30 mule deer, 1961-62-63. Sex of Young by Uterine Horn Left Right Total Male Female Undetermined Total 11 11 5 27 11 11 5 27 22 22 10 54 No. Females with Litter Size Singleton Twins Triplets Total 7 22 1 30 Estimated conception dates, 1961-62-63.--The estimated conception dates for 30 litters ranged from November 18 to February 7, a span of 88 days (Table 9). About 63 percent of the total dates, however, occurred between November 25 and December 8 or a 14 day span. The February 7 date was derived from one female fetus (Table 7) whose mother was estimated to be about 8 years 11 months of age. AnalYSis , I of Male Material Morphology of testes and prostate gland, 1963.--Measurement, weights, and volumes of testes and the weights of prostate glands are found in Table 10. In mature animals (12 months and older) weights of individual testes ranged from about 8.3g in July to 38.7g in late November. A scatter diagram constructed from the prostate gland and testes weights suggests a rather weak relationship. The physiological implications therein, will be explored when larger sample sizes become available. Chronological summary of testes and prostate gland development, 1961-6263.--Total testes volume, weight, and the mean and standard deviation of 20 seminiferous tubles and prostate gland weights are tabulated by month for 57 males of all ages in Table 11. Also, included therein, are the seasonal development pattern of these structures from deer of l2,months and older expressed in terms of their means at 2 month intervals. In general, maximum testes and prostate gland weights occurred during the latter part of November which coincides with the period of maximum conception described above. The October values may be misleading, however, because all deer sampled during this ~onth were yearlings. Some yearling males approximated the older males in these indices of sexual development but most were well below. There was considerable variability among deer of all age classes in chronological sexual development. Discussion: In general, sample sizes are yet too small to permit any more than tentative interpretations. Elucidating the "relationship of productivity to measured factors of the environment", in particular, must await larger samples. Gestation period ovarian analyses, fetal rates and sex ratios, 1961-6263.--Robinette et al. (1955:117) and Robinette et al. (1957b:9) have summarized a large amount of gestation period data~or-mule deer. �-184- Table 9.--The distribution of conception dates (1961-62-63) estimated from 30 litters by the prenatal young growth curves of Hudson and Browrnan (1959). No. Estimated Weekly Intervals Percent of Conception Dates Between Extreme Dates Total Nov. 18 - Nov. 24 3 10.0 Nov. 25 - Dec. 1 9 30.0 Dec. 2 - Dec. 8 10 33.3 16.7 Dec. 9 - Dec. 15 5 Dec. 16 - Dec. 22 2 6.7 0 0.0 Dec. 23 - Dec. 29 Dec. 30 - Jan. 6 0 0.0 Jan. 7 - Jan. 13 0 0.0 0 0.0 Jan. 14 - Jan. 20 0, 0.0 Jan. 21 - Jan. 27 0.0 0 Jan. 28 - Feb. 3 3.3 1 Feb. 4 - Feb. 7 100.0 30 �Table 10.--Neasnrements (mm), fresh weight (g), volumes (cc), and the mean diameters (microns) of seminiferous t ubu-Le s from the tes.t!i;1~ of 23 mule deer and the fresh weight ~g2 of 22 Erostate glands 2 1963. Date-Age-Wt. RatioCollection No. Testis-Gland 80 81 86 85 87 89 92 96 100 105 108 94 99 102 Collection Date (Nonth-Day) 1-2 '7-2 1-9 2-6 2-13 2-20 3-6 3-27 4-15 4-29 6-12 7-23 5-20 5-27 Estimated Age (Year-Month) 4-7 4-7 2-8 0-8 0-10 0-10 6-11 9-1 1-1 1-8 5-9 1-9 2-11 5-0 Eviscerated Wt./ Body Length Ratio .37 .. 38 .33 .34 .26 .33 .35 .18 .28 .21 .22 .37 .44 .27 .Testis(Left) 3.,88. 2.97 Long Diam 5.03 4.53 4.24 3.95 3.70 3.18 3.40 3.88 3.55 4.19 4.03 3.65 Trans Diam 3.34 2.16 1.63 2.81 2.54 2.31 1.97 1.70 2.26 2.76 2.93 2.48 2.13 3.19 Height Diam 2.31 2.00 2.95 3.38 2.34 1.40 2.32 2.07 1.76 1.88 2.21 2.47 2.72 2.00 Wt 27.05' 26.39 10.73 4.08 15.18 13.08 6.88 9.26 11.88 16.30 13.43 8.25 8.77 5.27 8.12 Vol 3.81 14.60 12.54 8.46 6.67 5.02 8.84 11.31 15.64 12.95 25.91 26.29 10.17 Testis(Right) Long Diam 2.94 3.09 3.92 3.91 3.58 4.94 4.61 2.91 4.20 3.96 3.48 3.87· 4.07 2.63 2.21 2.20 1.66 2.23 1.86 1.80 2.17 2.97 Trans Diam 3.26 2.49 2.55 3.54 2.67 2.69 1.96 2.13 1.58 1.88 2.26 2.53 1.97 Height Diam 2.78 3.68 1..52 2.1~ 6.05 . 4.70 8.62 8.16 9.32 12.14 16.57 12.82 Wt 26.60 26.91 10.75 3.94 14.74 12.87 11.59 15.90 12.39 8.36 Vol 25.52 25.99 9.63 3.71 13.30 12:41 7.85 5.77 4.50 8.97 - Nean DiameterSemi Tubu1es+ 169.7 Standard DeviationSemi Tubules 10.5 124.4 109.2 90.2 108.8 105.6 100.5 108.1 95.3 93.5 112.9 106.0 107.5 96.4 5.4 9.1 7.8 10.2 10.1 10.9 8.2 8.5 7.3 13.5 11.2 7.9 7.6 - 1.59 3.85 5.76 3.69 5.84 2.62 3.01 4.50 4.05 1.49 4.81 Prostate Gland Wt 8.62 5.41 Nean diameter of 10 seminiferous tubules from each testis. + f I-' co V1 f i""~ ·~O' '~n' �1'"'-0 ;,':i) 'j';; Table 10.--Measurements (rom),fresh weight (g), volumes (cc), and the mean diameters (microns) of seminiferous tubules from the testes of 23 mule deer and the fresh weight (g) of 22 prostate glands, 1963. (Cont.) Collection No. Date-Age-Wt. Ratio-Testis-G1and 111 113 114 020 119 122 123 124 127 Collection Date (Honth-Day) 8-13 10-16 9-6 9-10 10-6 11-20 11-26 12-4 12-26 Estimated Age (Year-Month) 1-2 1-3 0-3 1-6 1-6 1-4 0-4 5-5 1-5 Eviscerated Wt./Body Length Ratio .28 .29 .31 .29 .30 .20 .21 .52 .31 Testis(Left) Long Diam 4.37 5.12 1.57 5.35 2.51 5.54 5.15 5.09 4.87 Trans Diam 3.30 1.10 3.44 1.45 3.49 3.00 3.19 2.90 2.37 Height Diam 1.10 1.31 2.26 2.37 2.76 3.15 3.23 2.69 2.19 23.06 20.13 Wt 12.62 23.18 0.81 29.98 2.93 35.94 26.28 Vol 12.05 22.91 0.66 29.17 2.81 34.20 25.31 21.85 19.52 Test is(Right) 5.00 1. 73 4.94 2.36 5.49 5.00 5.15 5.00 4.33 Long Diam 1.53 3.56 2.70 3.07 2.90 1.00 3.41 2.26 3.50 Trans Diam 1.00 3.08 1.25 3.40 2.30 2.27 2.28 2.25 2.52 Height Diam 22.96 19.98 38.73 24.39 0.93 28.71 2.69 11.24 22.28 Wt 2.61 0.83 2B.05 37.07 23.50 22.08 18.68 10.70 21.55 Vol Mean Diameter-Semi Tubu1es+ Standard Deviation-Semi Tubules 111.5 8.8 159.2 9.4 38.6 2.6 185.8 10.9 60.2 6.9 127.9 8.9 155.5 12.2 148.2 7.6 139.3 8.5 Prostate Gland Wt .2.87 3.13 0.58 3.69 1.14 8.91 9.05 8.22 7.80 + Mean diameter of 10 seminiferous tubules from each testis. I •.... Q:) C1\ I �Table ll.--Chronological summary of the testes and prostate gland development from 57 mule deer collected between May 16, 1961 and December 26, 1963, inclusive. Seminiferous Prostate Seasonal Means* ce n , Coll. Est. Age Tubules ~microns) Total Total Gland Semitubu1e Testes Testes Prostate Date SD No. Year-No. Nean Wt. Dia. Vol. Wt. Vol. ~cc2 Wt. ~g) Wt. ~_g2 32 1- 9-62 1-7 149.3 15.5 27.12 28.04 80 1- 2-63 4-7 10.5 51.43 53.65 8.62 .169.7 81 124.4 1- 9-63 5.4 42.28 53.30 4-7 5.41 39 85 86 87 2-27-62 2- 6-63 2-13-63 2-20-63 3-8 2-8 0-8 1.-8 155.4 109.2 90.2 108.8 l2.5 9.1 7.8 10.2 36.54 19.80 7.52 27.90 38.13 21.48 8.02 29.92 40 43 89 ,92 3- 8-62 3-29-62 3- ,6-63 3-27-63 1-9 0-9 5-9 1-9 113.2 90.5 105.6 100.5 9.9 9.7 10.1 10.9 13.39 9.08 24.95 16.31 13.96 9.56 25.95 16.93 4.50 3.01 44 07 94 96 4- 5-62 4-27-62 4-15-63 4-29-63 4-10 0-10 0-10 0-10 116.6 116.0 108.1 95.3 18.2 17.4 8.2 8.5 22.45 12.44 9.52 23.67 10.50 12.93 9.97 1.59 14.1 14.2 10.7 7.3 l3.5 16.00 13.76 12.29 17.81 22.90 17.40 14.21 12.67 18.58 24.02 18.6 14.9 14.2 14.2 23.60 17.71 16.65 19.06 11.3 13.1 11.2 16.65 27.64 31.54 23.90 18.29 17.25 20.48 13.20 17.30 28.81 32.87 - 4.05 1.49 4.81 .- 136.1 5 49 52 99 100 5-16- 61 5- 9-62 5-30-62 5-20-63 5-27-63 5-11 1-11 0-11 2-11 6-11 8 9 11 53 08 54 55 102 6- 6-61 6-13-61 6-27-61 6- 6-62 6-10-62 6-13-62 6-20-62 6-12-63 9-0 12-0 1-0 1-0 1-0 2-0 2-0 5-0 135.4 141.0 135.4 128.2 141.5 123.8 106.0 - - 37.42 5.72 J .,. I-l C)) ...J J 109.0 115.4 110.4 101.0 93.5 l12.9 35.84 19.28 20.13 3.76 2.45 2.08 3.85 5.76 2.16 3.66 4.09 3.69 f",,;,l;' 122.1 20.30 20.53 3.66 '~D <~ �i"'~ }) "'v Table 11.-~Chrono1ogica1 summary of the testes and prostate gland development from 57 mule deer collected be tween May 161 1961 and December 261 19631 inclusive. ~continued) Seminiferous Seasona 1 Means~\" Prostate Coll. Co11. Est. Age Tubules ~microns) Total Total Gland Semi tubule Testes Teste~ Prostate Date Ye a r-Ho , Hean SD No. Vol. ~cc2 Wt. ~g) Vol. Wt. ~g2 Dia. Wt. Wt. 15 60 105 108 7-27-&1 7-30-62 7- 2-63 7-23-63 1-1 5-1 9-1 1-1 116.0 173.2 107.5 96.4 13.2 22.9 7.9 7.6 16.79 31.59 25.34 16.48 17.45 34.13 26.25 16.87 3.70 5.84 2.62 16 63 111 8- 2-61 8-20-62 8-13-63 4-2 1-2 1-2 133.8 152.1 111.5 15.0 9.6 8~8 33.01 35.57 22.75 34.30 36.85 23.86 3.07 2.87 127.2 25.93 27.10 3.62 - 22 65 67 68 113 114 9-27-61 9- 5-62 9-18-62 9-27-62 9- 6-63 9-10-63 0-3 7-3 1-3 1-3 1-3 0-3 54.9 166.5 162.1 170.9 159.2 38.6 7.6 11.4 12.2 12.7 9.4 2.6 5.27 51. 99 28.78 54.20 44.46 1.49 5.53 54.21 30.22 56.17 45.46 1.74 5.95 3.27 3.12 3.13 0.58 01 24 25 70 020 119 10- 2-61 10-11-61 10-18-61 10-10-62 10- 6-63 10-16-63 1-4 0-4 1-4 1-4 1-4 0-4 192.0 58.3 172.6 168.2 185.8 60.2 16.9 7.1 9.8 15.0 10.96.9 61.56 4.90 46.64 61.38 57.22 5.42 63.82 5.22 48.22 63.95 58.69 5.62 4.18 3.69 1.14 I I-' CD OJ I 172.2 50.78 52.59 3.89 �Table 11.--Chrono1ogica1 surnn1aryof the testes and prostate gland development from 57 mule deer collected betHeen Hay 162 1961 and December 262 1963) inclusive. {continued) .Seasonal Means* Seminiferous Prostate Total Total Gland Semitubu1e Testes Testes Prostate Coll. Coll. Est. Age Tubules ~microns) Date SD we , (g) Wt. (g) Year-Ho. Nean Vol. Wt. Wt. No. Vol. Ccc) Dia. 27 05 74 122 123 11-29-61 11-29-61 11-21-62 11-20-63 11-26-63 3-5 2-5 2-5 5-5 1-5 200.9 175.9 154.8 137.9 155.5 17.6 23.1 12.7 8.9 12.2 73.69 71.10 41.16 71.27 48.81 BO.OO 74.04 42.53 74.67 50.67 28 76 78 124 127 12- 6-61 12- 5-62 12-19-62 12- 4-63 12-26-63 0-6 0-6 4-6 1-6 1-6 116.0 83.8 166.5 148.2 139.3 12.7 5.7 12.5 7.6 B.5 9.16 6.86 56.91 43.93 38.20 9.57 7.20 59.16 46.02 40.11 8.40 8.91 9.05 I I-' Q) - \.0 I 8.94 8.22 7.80 ~-------- 157.9 ·k 55.63 - --- 58.40 8.55 Includes only those deer 12 months and older. i·"'" -r ..-:-~ ··-d~ <t~ �-190- The former authors also cite a sex ratio of 111:100 based on 1,169 live fetuses and Robinette (1956:420) reports 114:100 derived from a sample of 2,689 "fetuses and newly born fawns combined." No mention is made of the statistical equality of these ratios, although considerable discussion centers about the preponderance of males normally found in the prenatal young of mule deer. Mid-pregnancy fetal rates in Utah mule deer were reported to be 1.52 per doe (Robinette et al., 1955) while the average fetal rate was 1.50 in 5 western states with-S6-Percent pregnant (Robinette, 1956:418). All of these values, apparently include yearlings or animals conceiving at 16-18 months in (November-December) and sampled during the subsequent gestation period. Although departures in our data from the values cited above are of interest, the small sample sizes now available from the Poudre herd do not yet warrant tests of significance. Insofar as I know, there are no published quantitative data on the seasonal development of the male reproductive tract in mule deer which might serve as an interpretative base. Discrepancy in fetal rates and corpora lutea counts.--Since the 196162-63 fetal rate 1.80 exceeds the 1.58 corpora lutea of pregnancy per doe obtained from deer which had conceived in 1960-61, 1961-62, 1962-63, a question arises as to the validity of these values. It is my guess that the corpora lutea counts are more valid because of the very small sample the fetal rate is based on and there is a definite hint of considerably less fertility from the post-parturition data. LITERATURE CITED Anderson, Allen E. 1958. Deer Productivity studies. Job Completion Report, W-75-R-5. New Mexico Department of Game and Fish, Santa Fe, 27 pp. (mimeo.) 1962. Reproductive studies. 105-R-2. Pp. 301-318 in Quarterly of Game, Fish, and Parks, Denver. Job Completion Report, WP5-J2, WReport, Part 2 Colorado Department 161-339 pp. (processed) Armstrong, Ruth A. 1950. Fetal development deer. Amer. Midland Nat. 43:650-666. of the northern white-tailed Cheatum, E. L. 1949. The use of corpora lutea for determining ovulation incidence and variations in the fertility of white-tailed deer. Cornell Veterinarian 39(3):282-291. Hudson, Paul and Ludvig G. Browman. 1959. Embryonic and fetal development of the mule deer. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 22(3):295-304. Morrison, John A., Charles E. Trainer, and Phillip L. Wright. 1959. Breeding season in elk as estimated from known age embryos. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 23(1):27-34. �-191- Robinette, W. Leslie, J. S. Gashwiler, D. A. Jones, and H. S. Crane. 1955. Fertility of mule deer in Utah. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 19(1):115-136. Robinette, W. Leslie. 1956. Productivity-the annual crop of mule deer. p. 415-29 in The deer of North America. W. P. Taylot, Ed., The Stackpole Co., Harrisburg, Pa. and The Wildlife Mgmt. Institute, Wash., D. C. 668 pp. Robinette, W. Leslie, D. A. Jones, G. Rogers, and J. S. Gashwiler. 1957a. Notes on tooth development and wear for Rocky Mountain mule deer. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 21(2):134-153. Robinette, W. L., J. S. Gashwiler, J. B. Low, and D. A. Jones. 1957b. Differential mortality by sex and age among mule deer. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 21(1):1-16. Robinette, W. Leslie. 1958. Review: Swank, W. G. 1958. The mule deer in Arizona chaparral~ Wildlife Bull. No.3, Arizona Game and Fish Comm., Phoenix, 109 pp. in J. Wildl. Mgmt. 22(4)450-451. Snyder, Walter. 1959. Deer productivity studies. Job Completion Report, W-75-R-6. New Mexico Department of Game and Fish, Santa Fe, 14 pp. Swank, W. G. 1958. The mule deer in Arizona chaparral. Arizona Game and Fish Commission, Phoenix, 109 pp. Prepared by Allen E. Anderson Date J'lnLf. /1'1/. J 9G5 Wildl. Bull. No.3. Approved by __~W~a~Ycn~e~W~._S~a~n~d~f~o~r~t~ _ Chief, Game Research Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �-y APPENDIX:t .. ~---I-~.J--'~-_,.£- SN\U\U. 0i'il' If:S iinfN[ 1U'V[!l\ ~---,.f-IL~ If'il C@IRINU u"iT[IRO '~'+--17 #\lIbO~IAN ii'QJIQ ~ VA R Y ,.p.Jr..~~~"""_""_:'~O -r-~~.....:w:---A-""":;'_'_-___:_..---VA<G . . . ~ ._ . .:~,t~ §V~I?W/~n~ ~ ~ '-. .~ , . n~A Il.AD~tI:R f?J(l~DS \ ~~JILVA ~~~Mh~~-------\~~NUS \ ..,...___;~..;,;_---+- (»V~ UlV ~ ~1r[m !b \U"iT'[fU !! Diagram and directions first used by Swank (1958), Anderson (1958), and Snyder(1959). later by �-193- APPENDIX I COtcr.AOO (Continued) SPORTSMEN I YOU CAN HELP MAKE BETTER HUNTING BY HELPING YOUR GAME AND FISH DEPARTMENT. Through research we are attempting to learn more of the factors influencing deer production. Comparing the age of doe deer with the condition of their re- productive organs is a vital part of this research. When you kill a Doel 1. Remove the lower jaw and bring to the nearest checking station. 2. Remove the reproductive tract, as shown in the sketch; plac~ in plastic bag and bring to checking station, OR after cleaning, leave , ( reproductive tract attache~-to carcass while bringing your kill to the checking station. The sketch shows the location of the needed parts. As you open the animal to clean it, the reproductive tract will be found under the small intestIne, lying along the large intestine. Be ~ to get all of portion marked "reproductive tract," and include the bladder and ovaries. Please cut behind the bladder as it shows in the sketch. Frequently the ovaries are cut off, which ruins the collection - Be sure to cut above the ovaries and behind the bladder. Thanks to each of you for your cooperation. ,COLORADO DEPARTMENT OF .GAME AND FISH OVER - Sketch on other side. , Fe d e ra I Aid Pr c je ob W-I05-R ��Ja'luary, 19b~ COLO DIV WILDLIFE RESEARCH CTR LIB -195111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111 BDOW022697 JOB COMPLETION RESEARCH State of COLORADO ,Project No. W-l05-R-4 PROJECT -----------------------Work Plan 5 -------------------------3 Job No. Period Covered,: Personnel: January, REPORT SEGMENT An Ecological Investigation of the Cache la Poudre Deer Herd, Colorado Physiological Harvest 1963--December, Allen E. Anderson Studies Analysis 1963. and Dean E. Medin ABSTRACT Analyses of Unit 19 hunting pressures, kill and success ratios indicate that since 1959 an estimated 11,639 hunters harvested 6,907 mule deer for an overall success ratio of .59. W11en compared to 1959, hunting pressure in 1963 dropped about 37 percent, kill 64 percent, and the success ratio from .75 to .43. On the basis of conservative quantitative estimates of subunit population and harvest densities it was concluded that in 1963 only abouL18 percent of Unit 19 received substantial harvest and that even on this limited area the harvest probably did not' remove more than 15 percent of. the estimated winter population. Hunter report card returns (1961-62-63) were found to yield reliable estimates of the proportion of males, females, and f awns harvested by hunters only during 1961.' " " ;1 The net productivity index (percent of female yearlings in the adult female yearlings in the adult female sample) increased significantly (P< .05) ,from 1962 to 1963. Chi square analysis of female age structure samples, (196L-62-63) suggest that age class proportions and year of sampling were significantly (P< .001) related and that the 28-30 month and the 112+ month age classes departed the most from the hypothesis of independence which could indicate some type of consistent bias. Progeny-progenitor ratios computed for these age structure samples also suggest some type of unde':' fined bias. The age structure samples also showed a Significant (p<,. 02) increase in the proportion of 28-30 month old males to all bIder males ,.from 1961 to 1962 but a Significant (P< .005) decrease in the proportions of 28-30 month old females during the same period. Since the f awn sex , ratio did not differ significantly (P< .05) from equality (1961-62-63), , these changes 'imply' differential sex ;U:ortality as do the highly significant; change$ in age' class sex ratios of deer 28 months and older with proportionally fewer males in the older age classes. Approximate 90 percent conf L> dence, limits computed about all a ge class sex ratios (1961-62-63) exhibited extreme variability but generally did not ove r La p be t.ween the 4-6, 16-18, �-196- 28-100 and the 112+ month age classes. It is suggested that the female age structures of 1961-62 were indicative of a lightly harvested population but that some effect of successive liberal harvests was shown in 1963. Mean antler beam diameter and length were significantly (P< .05) smaller in 1961 as compared to 1960-62-63, primarily among the 16-18 ;nd 28-30 month age classes. No attempt is made to relate this possible index to the physical condition or nutritional levels of the population since quantitative data are lacking on these factors for the winter of 1960-61 when the presumed dietary changes responsible for the less vigorous antler development of 1961 may have occurred. It is suggested, however, that the presumably inadequate. harvest (bucks-only) of 1960 may have been involved in the 1961 decline. These findings are discussed in relation to their limitations as defined by deficiences in age estimation, sampling error, and sampling bias. A recommendation is made to change the technique of age estimation. Acknowledgements: Mr. Dave Bowden of the C.S.U. Statistics Laboratory tabulated the data and computed the 1962-63 descriptive statistics and significant tests for the antler beam data. He also computed the regression equation for estimating antler weight from antler beam diameter. We would like to thank all individuals who assisted at the check station. Recommendations: The dental cememtum method of age determination of mule deer (Low and Cowan 1963) should be used in all future age structure work. This is, of course, contingent on the availability of qualified personnel and facilities. Objectives: (1) (2) (3) Determine the age and sex structure of the deer herd kill to provide estimates of: (a) net productivity (percent of female yearlings in the kill), and (b) the effects of hunting regulations. Locate the distribution of the kill by subunit to relate the age and sex structure of ~he kill to elevational levels and harvest intensity. Measure relevant physical characteristics of the deer killed to provide an index of herd response to food quality. Procedures: All data were obtained at the regularly operated big game check station froIn October 26 to November 5, 1963, inclusive. The check station which operated 9 days of the 10 day season was located about one mile north of Laporte, Colorado on U.S. Highway 287 (Figure 1). The techniques used in age estimates, antler measurements and hunter interviews are described along with the statistical methodology used in their analyses as follows. Age Estimates Deer of each sex were placed in 7 age classes on the basis of mandibular tooth replacement and wear using the criteria of Robinette et al. (1957a). To facilitate tooth examination, mandibular dentition was exposed by slitting open one lip junction and, if necessary, a specially designed tool was used to open the jaw. All age estimates were made on the spot; lower jaws �-197- were not removed nor were the mandibles of known-age deer employed as a check on our estimates. The authors estimated ages independently but frequently check with each other in an attempt to achieve consistency. The resultant age structure of the female kill is assumed to approximate that existing in the population while the age structure of the male kill is believed to be biased by hunter selection. Most of the statistical analyses, therefore, is concerned with the female component. The data for each sex were described by age class as: raw data, percentages of the total with and without fawns, progeny-progenitor ratios (Gill 1953), and sex ratios in terms of males per 100.females. The chi square test using various contingency tables' as outlined in Croxton and Cowden (1955:686) were used to detect whether the proportions of age classes or components differed signifcantly (P> .05) between years (1961-62-63) and between age classes for each year. In-addition, approximate 90% confidence intervals were computed about all sex ratios, (males per 100 females) to indicate the probable range of variability using the formula cited in Riney (1956). The proportions of male and female fawns were tested for equality by the single classification chi square test at the 5 percent level of significance (Dixon and Massey 1957:222). Antler Measurements Beam diameters.--Both beams were measured about 2.5 cm above the burr at a right angle to the longitudinal axis of the head with a veriner caliper to the nearest rom. (Boone and Crockett Club 1958). If possible, the small protuberances on the beam surface were avoided. Beam spread.--The maximum inside distance between the main beams were measured with a flexible steel tape to the nearest cm (Boone and Crockett Club 1958). Beam length.--Both beams were measured to the nearest cm with a flexible steel tape along the outside surface from the burr to the tip of the main beam. The main beam is that portion of the lowest and most anterior projection (Boone and Crockett Club 1958). Brow tine number.--These by beam. Point number.--Points corded by beam. basal structures were counted and recorded of 2.5 cm in length and over were counted and re- Analyses.--The above measurement data are described statistically for Mean differences in the left and right beam attributes were tested for significance (P_? .05) by the paired, equal "~' test (Dixon and Massey 1957:126). Mean differences between years (1960-61-62-63) were tested for significance (P> .05) by the analysis of variance (Scheffe 1963 (n , x, SD, C.V. (%». 1959).' - Count data (brow tines and antler points) were described simply as tabulated percentages of the total. Between year count data were tested for independence by the chi square test (P~ .05) using contingency tables. �~·'3~O .L.~ .~'T1 -198- Relationship of antler measurements to antler weight.--One of our current job objectives is to, "measure relevent physical characteristics of the deer killed to provide an index of herd response to year-round food quality". Because the detailed experimental work by French et al. (1955) on yearling white-tail~d deer, suggests that winter dietary deficiencies may be reflected in relatively poor antler development, antler measurements have been taken since 1960 in the hope that they might provide this index. However, antler measurements in themselves only provide an index to the biologically more meaningful antler beam weight. The relationship of antler beam measurements to antler weight was therefore tentatively explored by the method of least squares using the antlers of 18 males from 6 months to about 5 years of "age collected from the Poudre drainage 1961-63, inclusive, under Work Plan 5, Job 1, Physical Characteristics. The variables were first considered as 4 single products (X) of beam diameter, length, and number of points as follows (1) diameter x length, (2) diameter x points, (3) length x points and (4) diameter x length x points. They were linearly related to beam weight (Y). The variables were next treated individually and in this case they were nonlinearly related to beam weight, (Y = a + bx + cx2). The relative closeness of X and Y in both linear and nonlinear relationships was measured by the coefficient of determination (r2) Croxton and Cowden 1955:462, 490). Hunter Interview Location of kill.--Successful hunters were asked where they made their kill. An attempt was made to place the kill as closely as possible using roads, drainages, or well-known landmarks. These written notations were separated in the office into the correct subunit as outlined in Figure 1. Hunter effort and date of kill.--The estimated number of hours (to the nearest one-half hour) spent in hunting in Unit 19 and the date of kill were obtained from successful hunters. Because of time limitations, the unsuccessful hunter has not been interviewed since 1960. Collection of doe reproductive tracts.--By soliciting the cooperation of the incoming hunters, and by some preseason publicity, doe reproductive tracts have been collected since 1961. The lower jaw was removed from all does yielding tracts suitable for ovarian analysis. These materials will be reported on in the completion report for Work Plan 5 - Job 2 (Reproductive Studies). Recording of Data All data obtained at the check station (1960-61-62-63) have been recorded on the form in Appendix I and subsequently transferred to IBM cards to facilitate computations. However, some of the measurement and nearly all of the enumeration data have been analyzed using a hand calculator. .( �.50' 40' lOS· 30' 10' ·2.0' 00 checl1ing station I ~'~HH 140" i-' I!t\ ~ I 7N SUB-UNITS OF ~.E MANAGEMENT UNIT 19 ~ I1RINClPAL t, 0: ,,3c:t MERIDIAN ao' f-----I 11 ? , 40· ploru.. aN ~..,z;o:J:!..m Figure 1. Unit 19 sub-units and checking station. /1"',1 ri.' . <.~::) ,~: �-201- HARVEST ANALYSIS Allen E. Anderson Total Harvest Estimated and Check Station Samples .~. The Unit 19 mule deer harvest as.estimated from the hunter report card returns (1959 through 1963) has been tabulated in Table lA and shows a steady decline since 1959 in hunters, kill, and success ratio. As compared to 1959, hunting pressure dropped about 37 percent, kill 64 percent and the success ratio from .75 to .43. The percent difference estimated between the hunter report card estimate and the check station sample (Table 1) has ranged from 26.4 (1962) to 49.7 (1960). It is probable, therefore, that the most reliable samples reported on herein are those obtained in 1961 and 1962. Table lA.--The number of hunters, harvest, and the success ratio on Unit 19 as estimated from hunter report card returns, 1959-63, Lnc Lus Lve v+ Year No. of Hunters 1959 1960~\" 1961 1962 1963 Totals + * 3,139 1,723 2,483 2,308 1,986 11,639 Total Deer Kill 2,356 920 1,526 1,259 846 6,907 Success Ratio .75 .53 .61 .55 .43 .59 Figures from the annual "Deer. kill, number of hunters, success ratio per square mile." A mimeographed, undated release from the Division of Game Management based on license sales and hunter report card returns. Males with antlers only: during all other years, a hunter's choice, one deer per hunter regulation prevailed •. Indices of the Kill from Hunter Report Card Returns Compared to the Check Station Sample The results of chi square analyses of these data are shown in Table 2. Surprisingly, both sample sources indicated similar ratios in 1961, for male per 100 females in 1962, and for fawns per 100 females in 1963. Significantly, perhaps, the largest samples were obtained in 1961. Harvest by Day of Season About 71 percent of the 1963 harvest sample was killed during the first 2 days of the 10 day season. This is lower than in 1962 but much above the 1960-61 percentages, (Table 3). �-202- Table l.--A comparison of the sample obtained at the check station and the total harvest estimated from hunter report card returns, 1960-61-6263. Year Sample Male 1960 Check Station Report Card+ 463 920 1961 Check Station Report Card+ 361 474 484 215 1962 Check Station Report Card+ 321 424 1963 Check Station Report Card+ 207 292 ~~ + Female Fawn Total Percent Difference 463 920 49.7 215 298 1060 1526 30.5 453 641 203 194 927 1259 26.4 190 442 88 112 485* 846 37.6 There were 43 additional carcasses which could not be aged with certainty because of damaged teeth or missing heads. They included 9 males and 34 females. Based on various, undated, mimeographed releases from the Division of Game Management. Resident and non-resident kills are combined. Table 2.--Chi square analysis of male: female:fawn kill ratios obtained at the check station with those estimated from hunter report card returns, 1961-62-63. Ratios Per 100 Females Ratios Per Sample Significantly Different at P< .05 100 Fernales From G.M. Fawn Fawn Male Maie Unit 19 Year 1961 Check Station Report Card 75 63 44 40 No No 1962 Check Station Report Card 71 66 45 30 No Yes* 1963 Check Station Report Card 109 66 22 25 Yes~~ No * Significant at P~ .001 level. Age Structure, 1961-62-63 Net productivity index.--The 1963 sample of the harvest with fawns included is presented in Table 4, and without fawns in Table 5, and summarized for 1961-62-63 in Table 6 (females) and for 1960-61-62-63 in Table 7 (males). Excluding fawns, yearlings made up 30.0 percent (net productivity index) of the female component in 1963. This is a significant (P< .05) increase over the 1962 (22.4 percent) net productivity index. The proportion of 28-30 month old females which indicated a highly significant decrease in 1962 �Table 3.--The Unit 19 mule deer harvest by day 'of season as sampled at the check station, 1960-61-62-63. Day of Season No. Checked 1 2 3 4 -5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 160 118 18 14 6 3 8 39 33 2 0 0 7· 3 28 24 463 15 16 + -++ * ** *+ 1960+ Percentage of Total Season: Oct. Season: Oct. Season:. Oct. Season: Oct. Check station 34.6 25.5 3.,9 3.0 1.3 0.7 1.7 8.4 7.1 0.4 0.0 0.0 1.5 0.7 6.2 5.0 100.0 . 1961++ Percentage No. Checked of Total 491 92 28 26 20 19 16 127 157 11 32 23 1042 47.1 8.8 2.7 2.5 1.9 1.8 1.5 12.2 15.1 1.1 3.1 2.2 100.0 No. Checked 505 248 18 16 22 0 0 98 70 - 927 1962* Percentage of Total 51. 7 25.4 1.8 1.6 2.3 0.0 0.0 10.0 7.2 *+ 100.0 - 1963** No. Percentage Checked of Total 258 115 19 6 6 7 5 51 61 - 528 48.9 21. 8 3.6 L1 1.1 1.3 0.9 9.7 11. 6 *+ 100.0' - I N 0 VJ I 22-Nov. 6 inclusive; bucks only, fawns excluded. 28-Nov. 8 inclusive; hunters' choice, 1 deer per hunter~ 27-Nov. 5 inclusive; hunters' choice, 1 deer per hunter. 26-Nov. 4 inclusive; hunters' choice, 1 deer per hunter. not in operation last day of season. ~\J -'.;;) , '1 ·'f.~71 �i(';) '.'::;,) fl· .... }~lJ Table 4.--Age structure and kill ratios of 485 mule deer sampled from Unit 19, fawns included, 1963. Age Male Female Sexes Combined Kill Ratio Class No. Percentage No. Percentage Percentages Males Per Classified Classified (Months) of Total of Total of Total 100 Females 4-6 16-18 28-30 40-52 64-76 88-100 112+ 47 123 30 33 10 11 0 254 18.5 48.4 11.8 12.9 3.9 4.3 0.0 100.0 41 57 24 51 25 21 12 231 l7 .8 24.7 10.4 22.0 10.8 9.1 5.2 100.0 18.1 37.1 11.1 17.3 7.2 6.6 2.5 100.0 115 216 125 64 40 52 0 110 Table 5.--Age structure and kill ratios of 397 mule deer sampled from Unit 19, fawns excluded, 1963. Age Female Sexes Combined Kill Ratio Male Percentage Percentage Males Per Class No. No. Percentage of Total of Total 100 Females Classified Classified of Total (Months) 16-18 28-30 40-52 64-76 88-100 112+ 123 30 33 10 11 0 207 59.4 14.5 15.9 4.8 5.3 0.0 100.0 57 24 51 25 21 12 190 30.0 12.6 26.8 13.2 11.1 6.3 100.0 45.3 13.6 21.2 8.8 8.1 3.0 100.0 216 125 65 40 52 0 109 I N 0 .cI �?(i~~ ";;.;: -205- Table 6.--The age structure of 1,314 female mule deer from Unit 19 as sampled at the check station, 1961-62-63. Est. Age 1961 1962 1963 (Months) No. .% % No. No. % 4-6 16-18 28-30 40-52 64-76 88-100 112+ 94 116 100 128 56 42 42 578 16.3 20.0 17.3 22.1 9.7 7.3 7.3 100.0 94 92 52 119 42 42 64 505 18.6 18.2 10.3 23.6 8.3 8.3 12.7 100.0 41 57 24 51 25 21 12 231 17.8 24.7 10.4 22.0 10.8 9.1 5.2 100.0 57 24 51 25 . 21 --12 190 30.0 12.6 26.8 13.2 11.1 6.3 100.0 Fawns Excluded 16-18 28-30 40-52 64-76 88-100 112+ 116 100 128 56 42 42 484 24.0 20.6 26.0 11.6 8.7 8.7 100.0 92 52 119 42 42 64 411 22.4 12.7 28.9 10.2 10.2 15.6 100.0 Table 7.--The age structure of 1,603 male mule deer from Unit 19 as sampled at the check station, 1960-61-62-63. 1963 Est. Age 1962 1960 1961 % (Months) % No. % No. % No. No. 4-6 16-18 28-30 40-52 64-76 88-100 112+ - + - + 208 46.6 21.3 95 84 18.6 41 9.2 15 3.4 0.9 4 447 100.0 121 191 60 67 25 13 5 482 25.1 39.6 12.4 13.9 5.2 2.7 1.1 100.0 109 173 66 47 9 11 5 420 26.0 41.2 15.7 11.2 2.1 2.6 1.2 100.0 47 123 30 33 10 11 0 254 18.5 48.4 11.8 12.9 3.9 4.3 0.0 100.0 55.6 21.2 15.1 2.9 3.5 1.6 100.0 123 30 33 10 11 0 207 59.4 14..5 15.9 4.8 5.3 0.0 100.0 Fawns Excluded 16-18 28-30 40-52 64-76 88-100 112+ + 208 95 84 41 15 4 447 46.6 21.3 18.6 9.2 3.4 0.9 100.0 Fawns illegal in 1960. 191 60 67 25 13 5 361 52.9 16.6 18.6 6.9 3.6 1.4 100.0 173 66 47 9 11 5 311 "- ... '.)" �-206- remained low and did not change significantly in 1963. An analysis of the proportion of females 16-52 months of age to those 64 months and older (1961-62-63), moreover, suggested a larger proportion of young females in the 1962 sample but their proportions over the 3 years were not significantly different at the 5 percent level (Table 8). Table 8.--The proportions of young to old female mule deer sampled at the check station during 1961-62-63. Number 16-52 Year 1961 1962 1963 Total ~'\ in Age Component 344 263 132 739 Significant difference (Months) 64-112+ Total Ratio~'c (Old/Young) 140 148 58 346 484 411 190 1,085 .406 .562 .439 .468 at the 10 percent level. Progeny-progenitor ratios.--Gill (1953) has suggested that, theoretically, bias in female age structure can be detected by the progeny:progenitor ratio, i.e. dividing the number of young by the number which produced those young. According to this author a small but steady increase in ratio size from the younger to the older classes would occur if these were no bias involved. Examination of Table 9 shows some type of undefined bias occurred in the 1961-1962- and 1963 samples. Observed and expected number of females, 1961-62-63.--Another approach to identify possible bias among specific age classes is to examine the individual cell values contributing to the total contingency chi square (Table 10). Therein, the largest chi values which contributed to the significant (P< .005) chi square occurred in the following cells; 16-18 months in 1963, 28-30 months in 1961-62-63, and 112+ months in 1961-62-63. While these do not necessarily indicate bias they do ,show that these age classes departed the most from the hypotl:resis of independence; i.e. that age classes and years of sampling are independent, (Simpson et a1. 1960: 318). The consistent pattern of maximum departure from independence exhibited by the 2 latter classes may be indicative of bias. Harvest Sex Ratios, 1961-62-63 Fawn sex ratios.--Because Of the 'various sources of known and probable bias in hunter-sampled sex ratios (Anderson 1962:325), the fawn age class may be unique in that the sample obtained by hunters should closely approximate the population sex ratio. A sunnnary of fawn sex ratios involving 506 Unit 19 mule deer is given in Table 11. Males per 100 females range from 115 (1963) to 129 (1961) and in no year did they differ significantly from equality at the 5 percent level. The 121:100 sex ratio of the total sample, however, does differ significantly (P~ .05) from equality. �Table 9.--Age structure of the female mule deer kill sample expressed as percentages of the total sample and progeny-progenitor ratios, 1961-62-63. Age 1962 1961 1963 Class Percent of Pro8eny-Progenitor Percent of Pro8eny-Progenitor Percent of Progeny-Progenitor (Months) Total Ratio'~ Total Ratio* Total Ratio* - 4-6 16-18 28-30 40-52 64-76 88-100 112+ Total 16.3 20.0 17.3 22.1 9.7 7.3 7.3 100.0 Total Sample 578 * 18.6 18.2 10.3 23.6 8.3 8.3 12.7 100.0 .19 .32 .37 .91 .67 1.00 - .23 .29 .19 .80 .40 .66 17 .8 24.7 10.4 22.0 10.8 9.1 5.2 100.0 - .22 .43 .22 .88 .76 1.75 231 505 I N (Gill 1953) Includes the number of females of each age class divided by the number of females from all older age classes. c -..j I Table 10.--0bserved and expected numbers of female mule deer by age class as sampled at the check station during 1961-62-63.* Age SamE1e by Year 1963 Class 1961 1962 Observed Expected Chi Totals Observed Expected Chi (Months) Observed Expected Chi 4-6 16-18 28-30 40-52 64-76 88-100 112+ Totals * 94 116 100 128 56 42 42 578 100.7 116.6 77.1 131.1 54.1 46.2 51. 9 577.7 .45 .003 6.80 .07 .07 .38 1.89 94 92 52 119 42 42 64 505 88.0 101.4 67.6 114.5 47.1 40.4 45.4 504.4 The computed chi square value (31.39) was significant .41 .87 3.60 .18 .55 .06 7.62 41 57 24 51 25 21 12 231 40.3 46.6 30.9 52.4 21. 6 18.5 20.7 231. a .01 2.32 1.54 .04 .54 .34 3.66 229 265 176 298 123 105 118 1,314 (P< .005) at 12 degrees of freedom. ~~\J ~1'1~...-\ '.~"I <~ �-2UG- Table ll.--fawn sex ratios as. sampled at the check station, 1961-62-63 a chi square single classification test of equality. Year Number Males Females Total Males Per 100 Females Computed Chi Square 1961 1962 1963 Total 121 109 47 --277 215 203 88 506 129 116 115 121 3.39 1.11 .41 4.56 + 94 94 41 229 with Level of Significance+ P< P< P< P< .10 .30 .50 .05 1 degree of freedom. Adult sex ratios, 28 months and older.--There were significant differences between age class sex'ratios in adults of 28 months and older at the folloWing confidence levels at 4 degrees of freedom: 1961, P< .01; 1962 P< .005; and 1963 P< .005. In general, the proportion of males tended to decrease with increasing age (Tables 6 and 7). The 1962 and 1963 samples, however, reflected a slight (but non~significant P< .05) increase in the proportion of males from about 76 to 100 months of-age (Table 12). Confidence limits about sex ratios, all age classes.--In order to infer the probable range of sex ratio variability from our sample data, approximate 90 percent confidence limits were computed for each sex ratio expressed as males per 100 females (Table 12). Except for the 28-30 month age class, all confidence limits overlapped when specific age classes are compared by sample year. Generally, confidence limits did not overlap between the 4-6, 16-18, 28-100, and 112+ month age classes. A notable exception is the overlap in the 1961, 4-6 and 16-18 month age classes. The larger variability of the relatively small sample obtained in 1963 is reflected in all age classes and particularly by the overall sex ratio wherein the confidence limits envelop both the 1961 and 1962 limits. Subunit sex ratios.--In 1963, individual subunit sex ratios (Table 13) ranged from 500:100 (subunit 1) to 74:100 (subunit 2) and generally a somewhat higher proportion of males were taken in all subunits as compared to 1961 and 1962 (Table 13). However, only subunits 4 and 5 received a substantial harvest in 1963 and small sample sizes from the other 6 subunits probably invalidate annual comparison of other subunits. Statistical analyses have not yet been made of these data. Harvest Indices by Subunit, 1960-61-62-63 Other subunit harvest indices are also shown in Table 13. Harvest density dropped about one half in 1963. Maximum harvest densities have been consistently maintained in subunits 3, 4, and 5 and minimum densities in subunits 2, 6, 7, and 8. These values reflect hunting pressure, accessibility topography, cover, and perhaps population density and check station location. The mean number of hours hunted by successful hunters are also influenced by the foregoing. They are seen to have increased slightly in 1963 and, in general males have consistently required slightly more hunting effort than females. Again, these data await statistical analyses. �Table 12.--Age class sex ratios of the 1961-6i-63 harvests as sampled at the check station with approximate 90/0 confidence limits.~'; Age Class (Months) 1961 Number Males/IOO Females Males Females with Conf. Limit 1962 Number Males/IOO Females Males Females with Conf. Limit 1963 Number Males/IOO Females Males Females with Conf. Limit 3-5 121 94 129 (99.9 - 158.1) 109 94 116 (89.2 - 142.8) 47 41 115 (74.7 - 155.3) 16-18 191 116 165 (133.1 - 196.9) 173 92 188 (148.1 - 227.9) 123 57 216 (159.1 - 272.9) 28-30 . 60 100 60 (43.9 - 76.1) 66 52 127 (88.3 - 165.7) 30 24 125 (68.7 - .181.3) 40-52 67 128 52 (39.0 - 64.9) 47 119 39 (27.8 - 50.2) 33 51 64 (40.2 - 87.8) 64-76 25 56 44 (26.3-61.7) 9 42 21 (8.0 - 33.9) 10 25 40 (15.4 - 64.6) 88-100 13 42 31 (14.8 - 47.2) 11 42 26 (11.4 - 40. 6) 11 21 52 (19.9 - 84.1) 112+ 5 42 12 (2.7 - 21.3) 5 64 8 (2.0'- 13.9) 0 12 Total 482 578 83 (74.6 - 91.4) 505 83 (73.9 - 92.0) i( ---420 ---254 231 I N 0 \..0 I 110 (58.0 - 161.9) (Riney 1956) (-d '-:.') '~f) �-210- Table l3.--Subunit indices of the Unit 19 mule deer harvest as sampled at the check station, 1960-61-62-63. Kill Per Sexes Females* 100 Combined Males* Kill Per Mean Hours Kill Per Mean Hours Females Kill Per Year Subunit Sq. Mile Hunted++ Sq. Mile Hunted++ Male Fawn Sq. Mile** 1960 1 1.7 6.1 2 0.2 4.4 3 1.0 6.0 4 3.3 6.5 5 2.5 7.8 6 0.3 6.5 0.4 8.1 7 8 0.1 11.3 Overall Mean or Ratio -----1~.l 7.0 ------------------~--------78 47 1961 4.2 3.7 1 5.5 2.0 1.7 60 24 1.0 0.6 6.3 2 0.4 7.3 10 75 4.5 2.1 5.4 3 6.4 2.4 54 46 5.6 9.2 5.5 4 3.7 7.5 104 46 5.1 6.•8 6.9 2.4 2.7 5 67 24 0.7 0.4 5.7 6 0.3 6.4 0.6 90 40 8.1 0.3 0.2 11.5 7 83 50 11.4 _Q_d_ 0.1 7.0 0.1 8 Overall Mean 2.0 76 44 7.1 1.1 6.0 or Ratio -----0.9 -----------------------------74 45 2.7 4.9 1.6 5.3 1962 1 1.1 50 30 .9 4.9 .6 7.8 2 0.3 123 62 2.1 3.1 .9 6.3 3 1.2 63 48 9.2 6.1 5.2 5.2 4 4.0 4.7 66 49 6.7 2.6 7.8 5 2.1 97 37 .7 10.3 .4 9.5 6.. .3 110 45 .6 9.7 .3 4.7 7 .3 40 120 _._1_ 7.6 _._1_ __hL 8 .04 Overall Mean 1.8 71 44 6.6 1.0 6.4 or Ratio -----0.8 . 1.1 162 23 3.9 .4 10.0 1963 1 0.7 74 48 0.7 6.4 .4 6.6 0.3 2 1.6 164 18 6.5 .6 7.2 1.0 3 4.4 89 28 6.3 2.3 5.5 2.1 4 2.3 94 24 6.8 1.2 6.5 1.1 5 0.7 94 47 7.9 .4 7.9 6 0.4 115 60 0.3 11.3 .2 14.5 0.2 7 0.06 500 100 3.6 b.01 1.5 8 0.05 Overall Mean 1.0 109 46 7.1 0.5 7.8 or Ratio-----0.5 --------------~------~--- * "k"k Includes fawns, + Includes deer 16 months and older, ++ Based on interviews of successful hunter to nearest half-hour. Based on an estimated 528 square miles within Game Mgmt. Unit 19. The square mf.Le:in each subunit are; 1-31, 2-61, 3-18, 4-42, 5-53, 6-98, 7-126, 8-99. �-211- Antler Measurements, 1960-61-62-63 Descriptive statistics.--Beam measurements are described statistically by age class in Table 14 (diameter), Table 15 (length) and Table 16 (spread). Table l4.--Statistical description of 407 Unit 19 antler beam diameters by age class as sampled at the check station, 1963. Age Class No. Mean Coef. of Beam (Months) Measured (nun) SD Variation (%) Left 16-18 28-30 40-52 64-76 88-100 112+ 122 29 31 10 11 0 18.02 25.62 28.26 35.80 34.73 2.58 3.53 5.14 3.12 2.33 14.3 13.8 18.2 8.7 6.7 Right 16-18 28-30 40-52 64-76 88-100 112+ 121 29 33 10 11 0 18.23 24.93 28.67 35.30 36.00 2.79 2.95 5.10 2.87 2.53 15.3 11.8 17.8 8.1 7.0 Table l5.--Statistical description of 404 Unit 19 antler beam lengths by age class as sampled at the check station, 1963 •. Coef. of Age Class No. Mean SD Variation (%) Beam Measured (Months) (em) Left 16-18 28-30 40-52 64-76 88-100 112+ 121 30 32 10 11 0 23.48 26.48 43.09 ' 47.30 49.36 5.46 4.66 4.60 7.72 5.92 23.26 12.79 10.66 16.32 11.99 Right 16-18 28-30 40-52 64-76 88-100 112+ 120 28 31 10 11 0 23.95 36.07 43.16 '49.30 48.64 4.91 7.16 4.93 3.89 4.41 20.51 19.86 11.43 7.89 9.07 �-212- Table 16.--Statistical description of 189 Unit 19 inside antler spread measurements by age class as sampled at the check station, 1963. Age Class No. Mean Coef. of (Months) Measured (em) SD Variation (%) 16-18 28-30 40-52 64-76 88-100 112+ 113 25 30 10 11 0 23.12 37.36 41.34 46.50 50.27 4.89 5.31 7.82 4.60 6.12 21.1 14.2 18.9 9.9 12.2 Number of antler points.--Antler point data expressed on a percentage basis by age class are listed by symmetrical and non-symmetrical categories in Table 17. There were 26 non-symmetrical point categories in 1960, 23 in 1961, 15 in 1962, and 14 in 1963. The total number of points, excluding brow tines and on "normal antlers," ranged from 2-19 (1960), 2-13 (1961), 2-15 (1962) and 2-12 (1963). Thus there appears to be a trend to a more symmetrical antler development but with fewer points. This could be the result of progressively decreasing sample size. Incidence of brow tines.--As in previous years, the incidence of brow tines (Table 18) increased with age. Although based on progressively decreasing sample sizes (Table 6), brow tines were present on 38.8 (1960), 27.2 (1961), 28.6 (1962), and 27.0 (1963) percent of the antlers examined and these proportions were significantly (P~ .001) different. A single class~ ification chi square test of equality indicated that the brow tines were equally divided between left and right beams. Moreover the proportion of brow tines occurring singly on left or right beams to those occurring on both ,beams during 1960-61-62-63 did not differ significantly. Left and Right Antler Beam Attribute 1960-61-62-63. Means Compared, In 1963, there was one significant (P~ .05) difference (Table 19) when the left and right beams were compared. The right mean diameter of the 88-100 month age class was significantly (P< .10) larger in 1963 than the left mean beam diameter. In 1962, the left mean beam length was significantly (P< .001) larger in the 64-76 month age class. In 1960, the left mean beam-diameter was significantly larger in the 16-18 month age class. Similar significance tests over the 4 year period indicated non-significant differences for all other age classes (Table 19). �-213- Table l7.--The percentage of .202 Unit 19 males by age class in symmetrical and non-symmetrical antler point categories as sampled at the check station, 1963. No. Antler Age Class (Months) Grand Points 16-18 28-30 40-52 64-76 88-100 Total Left Right No. Examined-- 119 30 33 10 10 No. Percent 1 1 2 2 3 3 s.o 4 4 O 5 6 5 6 o o 9.2 64.7+ Total Percentages * + 0 0 0 0 11 16.7 9.1 0 0 85 22 126.7 12.1 30.0 10.0 ~.~30~.~04~S~.~4 __ ~5~0~.0~ __ 4~0~.~0 33 0 3.0 0 10.0 2 0 3.0 0 0 1 5.4 42.1 10.9 16.3 0.9 0.5 78.9 73.4 72.6 80.0 60.0 o o o o o o o o o o o o o 6 12 10.0 10.0 5 ---"2.5 4 o 1 1.9 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.9 0.5 1 2 5.9 2 O~~ o 2 2 3 3 1 3 2 4 3.4 3.4 + 7.6 4 3 0.8 4 4 4 5 5 6 7 S 6 7 4 6 4 4 o o o o o o o o 3.3 3.3 3.3 6.7 10.0 o o o o o o o 3.0 o 3.0 6.1 3.0 10.0 o o o o 10.0 3.0 6.1 3.0 o o o o o o o o o 154 76.2 7 1 5 3.5 0.5 2.5 2.9 5.9 1 o o o 1 2 1 1 1 48 o.s ___Q_d 202 100.0 Total Percentages 21.1 26.6 27.2 20.0 10.0 10.0 40.0 Grand Total 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 23.7 Abnormal development. Maximum percentages are underlined. Between-Year Comparison of Beam Diameter Means, 1960-61-62-63. The 1961 sample yielded significantly smaller means than did the 1960, 1962, and 1963 samples of the 16-18 and the 28-30 month age class (Table 20). There was a similar but inconsistent pattern in the older age classes. However, the 1961-63 means were similar in the 28-30 month age class. Between-Year Comparisons of Beam Length Means 1960-61-62-63. As shown in Table 21, the same general relationships holds for beam length means, except that significantly smaller 1961 means are generally confined to the 16-18 month age class. The 1960 sample yielded significantly larger means in the older age components. �.(\) .t.·~~~ ~ Table 18.--The 1963 Unit 19 incidence of antler brow tines from 207 mule deer summarized by age class. Brow Tines Present by Beam Brow Tines Age Class Left Right Both L. and R. Total Absent Grand (Hont h) Percent Percent No. No. Percent No. No. Percent No. Percent Total 16-18 2S-30 40-52 64-76 SS-100 ll2+ Total 0 6 0 2 1 0 9 Percentage of Grand Total 4.3 0 66.7 0 22.2 ll.l 0 100.0 4 3 4 0 1 0 12 5.S 33.3 25.0 33.3 0 S.3 0 100.0 1 3 19 5 7 0 35 16.9 2.9 S.6 54.3 14.3 20.0 0 100.0 5 12 23 7 9 0 56 27.1 4.1 40.0 69.7 70.0 S1.S 0 llS IS 10 3 2 _Q_ 151 72.9 95.9 60.0 30.3 30.0 lS.2 0 123 30 33 10 II 0 207 100.0 I f'J f-' , .c- �Table 19.--Significance tests of left and right antler attribute means by age class, 1960-61-62-63. Age Antler Means By Year Si~nificance Test + Beam C1ass++ 1960 1961 1962 1963 (P_$.05) Left Right Left Right (Honths) Attribute Left Right Left Right 1960 1961 1962 1963 16-18 28-30 40-52 64-76 88-100 Dia. (mm) 18.24 Length (em) 23.36 No. Points - 18.05 23.57 Dia. (mm) 24.87 Length (em) 36.78 No. Points - 24.78 36.21 - - Dia. (mm) 29.30 Length (em) 43.86 No. Points - 29.27 44.27 2.8.09 40.39 Dia. (mm) 37.83 Length (em) 51.45 No. Points - 38.-12 51.20 Dia. (mm) 38.60 Length (em) 50.27 No. Points 38.93 49.00 - + ++ "';'( - - - 16.63 21.43 - 23.08 33.81 - 34.87 45.48 - 17.00 21.82 - 23.05 33.77 - 27.79 41.43 18.09 23.93 18.12 24.02 18.02 23.48 18.23 23.95 S NS - - - - 24.64 36.68 24.95 36.53 25.62 36.48 24.93 36.07 - - - - 30.52 43.70 30.51 43.53 28.26 43.09 28.67 43.16 - - 33.92 44.67 33.25 48.25 - - - - 36.64 49.55 - - - - NS NS NS NS NS NS NS NS NS - NS NS NS NS NS NS NS NS NS NS NS NS - NS NS NS -- - NS NS - - - 33.89 46.00 35.80 47.30 35.30 49.30 - - - - 37.00 50.00 34.73 49.36 36.00 48.64 NS - - - - - - - NS - NS NS NS S** NS NS' . NS NS NS NS I f\) l-' \Jl I S* NS' NS Paired "!" test 1960, 1962, 1963 and an invalid test used in 1961 for beam dia. and length. Chi square used for no. points for each year except 1960. Deer of 9 years and older are omitted because of small sample sizes. Significant at P_$ .10 level, ~'(*Significant at P_$ .001 level. 5(\.) \..,)iJ ;.jl· �;1,\)-oJ." •• :-,}" \,.:j~ Table 20.--Ana1ysis of variance and between-year mean comparisons of the right antler beam diameter (rom) by age class, 1960-61-62-63.+ Age Class (Honths) Year N Nean 1961 1961 1961 1961 1961 189 189 189 189 189 17.00 17.00 17.00 17.00 17.00 1960 1962 1963 1960 1960 204 167 121 204 204 18.05 18.12 18.23 18.05 18.05 1961 1961 1961 1961 1961 60 60 60 60 60 23.05 23.05 23.05 23.05 23.05 1960 1962 1963 1960 1960 95 65 29 95 95 24.78 24.95 24.93 24.78 24.78 1961 1961 1961 1961 1961 67 67 67 67 67 27.79 27.79, 27.79 27.79 27.79 1960 1962 1963 1960 1960 83 47 33 83 83 29.27 30.51 28.67 29.27 29.27 1961 24 1961 24 1961 24 1960 41 41 1960 (Scheffe 1959) 33.92 33.92 33.92 38.12 38.12 1960 1962 1963 1961 1961 41 9 10 24 24 38.12 30.51 35.30 33.92 33.92 16-18 28-30 40-52 64-76 - + ComEarisonl SamE1e Size! and Mean (rom) VS Year N Nean + Year N Nean + 1962 1962 1962 1962 1962 1962 1962 1962 167 167 65 65 47 47 9 9 18.12 18.12 24.95 24.95 30.51 30.51 30.51 30.51 Year 1963 1963 1963 1963 N 121 29 33 10 Mean Significance Test (P< .05) 18.23 S S S NS S 24.93 S S NS NS S 28.67 NS S NS S NS 35.30 S NS NS S NS I N I-' OJ I �Table 21.--Ana1ysis of variance and between-year mean comparison of the right antler beam length (em) by age class, 1960-61-62-63.+ Significance ComEarisonl SamE1e Sizel and Mean (rom) Age Class N (Horit hs ) Year N Mean VS Year N Mean + Year N Mean + Year Mean Test (P~ .05) 16-18 28-30 40-52 64-76 + 1961 1961 1961 1961 1961 185 185 185 185 185 21.82 21. 82 21. 82 21. 82 21. 82 1960 1962 1963 1960 1960 201 163 120 201 201 23.57 24.02 23.95 23.57 23.57 1961 1961 1961 1961 1961 61 61 61 61 61 33.77 33.77 33.77 33.77 33.77 1960 1962 1963 1960 1960 95 64 28 95 95 36.21 36.53 36.07 36.21 36.21 1961 1961 1961 1961 1961 67 67 67 67 67 41.43 41.43 41.43 41.43 41.43 1960 1962 1963 1960 1960 81 47 31 81 81 44.27 43.53 43.16 44.27 44.27 1961 1961 1961 1961 1961 24 24 ·24 24 24 44.67 44.67 44.67 44.67 44.67 1960 1962 1963 1960 1960 40 9 10 40 40 51.20 46.00 49.30 51.20 51.20 1962 1962 1962 1962 1962. 1962 1962 1962 163 163 64 64 47 47 9 9 24.02 24.02 36.53 36.53 43.53 43.53 46.00 46.00 1963 1963 1963 1963 120 28 31 10 23.95 S S S NS S 36.07 NS NS NS NS S 43.16 S S NS NS S 49.30 S NS NS NS NS I c,,-,!--" .....:J I (Scheffe 1959) ~\ ;.",1\. "'\} �-21iJ- Relationship of Antler Measurements to Antler Weight The raw data, a summary of the coefficients of determination (r2) computed for each variable or combination thereof, and the prediction equation are given in Table 22. Although this is 'an exploratory analysis, it would appear that a combination of attributes offers no real advantage and that the beam diameter alone may be the best predictor of antler weight. A larger sample and computation of standard errors, confidence limits, and the significance of the difference between correlation coefficients will be necessary to substantiate these conclusions. It is evident, however, that present antler measurements will accurately reflect changes in mean antler weight. Discussion: Harvest Decline The declining mule deer harvest in Un.it 19 is probably associated in part with the declining number of hunters. Another obvious factor is the restriction of hunters by 4 large landowners in subunits l.and 3. Since 1962, these individuals have greatly restricted hunting on their lands and partially or completely closed hunter access roads to the National Forest. These subunits comprise what had been excellent and relatively accessible deer range. No reason can be postulated for the apparent decrease in hunting pressure beyond the speculation that former Unit 19 hunters have gradually found more accessible and easier hunting in adjoining units. Kill Indices from Check Station and Hunter Report Card Returns Where sample sizes are large hunter report card returns may .ield the correct proportion of males, females, and fawns. The validity of this concept should be tested on other.management units. Age Structure The significant increase in yearlin.g (16-18 month) females in 1963 might first be interpretated as a response to successive harvests of females; i.e. an increase in net productivity associated with the lower population levels induced by increased mortality of females thus reducing recruitment with subsequently decreased competition for food and space. Another interpretation is that adult (28 months and older) females have been subjected to a disproportionate amount of mortality, thus increasing the relative proportion of young females. However, as mentioned above, the proportion of 16-52 month old females to those 64 months and older were similar at the 5 percent level of significance over the 3 year period of either-sex harvests so this probably did not occur. Another facet of the female age structure is the high percentage of females exceeding about 88 months of age in the �Table 22.--Measurements (cm), number of points, and weights (g) of 36 mule deer antlers and the relationship of antler beam wt. (X) to linear me~surements and number of points (Y).+ Est. Age Beam Dia. Beam Length Call. No. Points Weight (Year-Month) Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right No. 25 27 32 39 65 67 68 70 74 76 78 80 81 020 122 123 124' 127 1-4 3-4 1-7 3-8 7-3 1-3 1-3 1-4 2-6 0-6 4-6 4-7 4-7 1~4 5-5 1-5 1-6 1-6 Simple r2* Variable (X) .802 Dia. x Length .767 Dia. x Points .701 Length x Points .829 Dia. x Length x Points + * 1.50 3.00 1. 50 2.70 3.90 2.00 1.28 2.00 2.24 1.20 2.80 3.75 3.19 1.48 2.96 1. 50 2.03 1. 78 1. 80 2.90 1. 50 2.70 4.10 2.10 1. 39 1.79 2.37 1.50 2.78 3.45 3.17 1.54 3.15 1.50 2.06 2.05 20.0 39.0 15.5 40.0 55.0 23.0 18.5 26.0 32.0 2.0 39.0 51.0 49.0 22.0 51.0 21. 0 24.0 30.0 Variable (X) Diameter Length Points 22.0 39.0 18.0 43.0 51.0 17.0 20.0 26.0 37.0 1.5 39.0 55.0 46.0 24.0 48.0 19.5 21.0 21.0 Multiple r2* .931 .716 .608 2 2 4 4 1 1 3 2 4 4 2 1 2 3 1 4 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 1 3 4 3 2 4 4 2 2 2 .2 2 1 41 500 31 292 1,630 63 35 103 222 47 510 38 288 1,715 45 50 92 230 3 3 310 725 570 72 564 57 103 94 300 780 555 59 535 49 106 51 I r,J f-' \.D I Prediction Equation B = 782.7 - 887.1X + 263.8X2 Where: 1\ ' B = Wt. of antler beam in grams X = Beam dia. in cm . 1\ Antlers in velvet are not included; data from Work Plan 5, Job 1. Physical Characteristics, 1961-62-63. The coefficient of determination in Croxton and Cowden (1955:462,491). I\..\'1 ,; >~~ ;[~ �-220- samples. The implication here is that the alternate hunter's choice, bucksonly "management" plan in effect on Unit 19 prior to 1961 has resulted in an underharvested herd as reflected in the female age structure of the 1961 and 1962 samples. The 1963 significant increase in net productivity may indicate some population response to successive, hunter's-choice, harvests. A pessimistic view of our age structure data is that, in effect, it is almost uninterpretable because of the incompletely known effects of the following sources of sampling error and bias. (1) Hunter selection of the certain sex and age classes.--It is believed that most hunters will select bucks over does and adults over fawns and this combined with the theoretical preponderance of yearlings among all male year classes probably provides the preponderance of yearling males and the relatively small proportion of fawns (Tables 6 and 7). Logically, where population densities are high hunters will tend to be more selective to males and larger animals of each sex. This probably involves, also, the density of hunters at any given time and locality. (2) Vulnerability of sex and age classes.--That age classes may be differentially vulnerable has been pOinted out above and may be a factor in the high hunting mortality of yearling males. Maguire and Severinghaus (1954) however, concluded that differential vulnerability, in effect, did not exist except that most hunters avoided shooting fawns in New York white-tailed deer. No references have yet been found on similar studies of a migratory mule deer populations'. Analysis of our age structure samples by each day or group of days may yield some information on this point in the future. (3) Differential mortality between sex and age classes.--Our data (Tables 6 and 7) suggest quite different hunting mortality rates between the sexes and the significantly larger (P> .02) proportion (92 percent) of 28-30 month old males in 1962 and the significantly (P> .005) smaller proportion of 28-30 month old females in 1962 subs_tantiate this hypothesis. (4) Effects of various levels of harvest.--Quick (1960:7:18), in an interesting analysis of age structure data from a completely exterminated herd of Danish roe deer (Andersen 1953), states, that under a 25 percent level of exploitation the sample; "did not exploit age classes in proportion to their actual occurrence in the total population, -- did not disclose animals older than 8 years of age, -- and the kill curve indicated excessive vulnerability of -- the 2-year age class -- in comparison with other age classes." Thus, if applicable to mule deer, the various levels of inferred harvest (Table lA) which the Unit 19 herd has been subjected to in conjunction with an assumed state of population flux could lead to the many incongruities discussed above. (5) Error in assigning deer to age classes.--There is considerable difficulty in distinguishing some 28-30 month old animals from those of 40 months and older on the basis of tooth wear. I am fairly certain that there is considerable error between at least these 2 age classes and that these errors tend to be cumulative. The magnitude of error made in assigning �-221- ages to mule deer of 28 months and older is not less than ±2 years (P = .05) using measurement criteria (Robinette et ~., 1957a) so that age estimates based solely on subjective judgement of wear must also be quite inaccurate. This is borne out by the only published test known to me wherein an error or about 43 percent was made by 14 experienced biologists examining the dentition of 50 manidibles from deer of known age (Brown 1961:22). Harvest Sex Ratios Robinette et a1., (1957b) cited a 114:100 sex ratio of (Odocoileus hemionus ssp.) for 13,046 hunter-killed fawns from several western states. The confidence limits (p = .05) were 112-116:100 for this sample. I computed a single classification chi square test on their data which indicated a significant (P< .001) departure from equality. Additional computation of sex ratios for each of the 11 subsamples, however, revealed a range of 90-178: 100. Thus, our fawn sex ratios are within the confidence limits of the above large sample in 2 of 4 years but do not show the extremes reported in the literature. Because of various sources of sampl{ng error and bias discussed above, sex ratios of hunter-killed samples may tend to confuse, rather than clarify, inferences on mule deer differential mortality by sex and class. The significant differences in age _class sex ratios and the successively decreasing proportion of males with increasing age, however, agrees ,-lithRobinette et a1., (1957b: 14) conclusion that in Utah mule deer, males suffer disproportionately heavy losses. Harvest Indices by Subunit It is apparent that a relatively small portion (subunits 1, 3, 4 and 5) of Unit 19 receive a substantial harvest and this harvest is probably moderate even on subunits 4 and 5. Population estimates based on pellet group counts on representative portions of the winter range suggested midwinter and spring densities of 33-41 deer per square mile during 1962-63 (Anderson 1964). Thus, hunting mortality probably did not account for more than 15 percent of the pre-season population on these subunits alone if the minimum harvest was 1.6-4.4 deer per square mile, subunits 4 and 5, respectively (Table 13). Further, these subunits total only 95 square miles or about 18 percent of the total area of Unit 19_ Thus, we have only a small portion of the entire unit receiving any kind of harvest, and this harvest can only be regarded as light in terms of a net productivity index of 30 percent (Table 5). It is probable, however, that pre-season population levels are well below those for the entire winter. Antler Measurements The data on antlers to date offer quantitative descriptive data on antler morphology by age class. The value of these measurements in interpretating annual fluctuations in the nutritional levels of males has yet to be determined. Unfortunately, no quantitative data are available on other indices of physical condition or climatic-forage supply interactions during the winter of 1960-61 when the presumably low nutritional levels occurred which �-222- resulted in the significantly lower mean antler beam diameters and lengths of 1961 (Taber 1958). The presumably inadequate harvest during the 1960 . bucks-only season may have increased environmental stress to the pOint where the level of physical condition was lowered and reflected in the 1961 sample. LITERATURE CITED Andersen, Joh. 1953. Analysis of a Danish roe-deer population based upon the extermination of the total stock. Danish Review of Game Biology 2:127-155. Anderson. A. E. 1962. Harvest analysis. Work Plan 5 - Job 3 Completion Report. pp. 317-339. in Quarterly Report, Part 2, P-R Project W-l05-R. Colo~ado Game, Fish, and Parks Dept., Denver, 160-339 pp. (processed). 1963. Harvest analysis. Work Plan 5 - Job 3 Completion Report. P-R Project W-l05-R. Colorado Game, Fish, and Parks Dept. (processed). 1964. Physical characteristics. Work Plan 5 - Job 1 Completion Report. P-R Project W-l05-R. Colorado Game, Fish, and Parks Dept. (processed) . Boone and Crockett Club. 1958. Webb, Chmn. Holt Publishing Records of North American Co., N. Y. 264 pp. big game. Brown, E. R. 1961. The black-tailed deer of western Washington. Bull. No. 13. Washington State Game Dept., Olympia 124 pp. S. B. BioI. Croxton, F. E. and D. J. Cowden. 1955. Applied general statistics. Ed. Prentice-Hall, Inc. Englewood Cliffs, N. Y. 843 pp. 2nd tiixon, W. J. and F. J. Massey, Jr. 1957. Introduction to statistical analysis. 2nd Ed. McGraw-Hill Book Co ,, Inc. 'New York, Toronto, London. 488 pp. French, C. E., L. C. McEwen, N. D. Magruder, R. H. Ingram, and R. W. Swift. 1955. Nutritional requirements of white-tailed deer for growth and antler development. Bull. 600. Pa, State Univ., ColI. of Agric. Expt. Sta. University Park, Pa. 50 pp. Gill, J. 1953. Remarks on the kill curves of female deer. 9th Northeast Section Wildl. Conf., Bretton Woods, N. H. 12 pp. (mimeo.). Low, W. A. and I. Mct. Cowan. 1963. Age determination of·deer by annular structure of dental cementum, J. Wild1. Mgmt. 27(3):466-471. Maguire, H. F. and C. W. Severinghaus. 1954. Wariness as an influence on age composition of deer killed by hunters. New York Fish and Game.J. 1(1):98-109. �-223Quick, H. F. 1960. Animal ~opulation analysis. pp. 7.1-7.35 in Manual of game investigational techniques. H. S. Mosby, Ed. The Wildlife Society and Edwards Brothers, Inc., Ann Arbor, Mich. Riney, T. 1956. Differences in proportion of fawns to hinds in red deer (Cervus elaphus) from several New Zealand environments. Nature 177:488-489. Robinette, W. L., D. A. Jones, G. Rogers, and J. S. Gashwiler. 1957a. Notes on tooth development and wear for Rocky Mountain mule deer; J. Wildl. Mgmt. 21(2):134-153. Robinette, W. L., J. S. Gashwiler, J. B. Low, and D. A. Jones. 1957b. Differential mortality by sex and age among mule deer. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 21(1): 1-16. Scheffe, H. 449pp. 1959. The analysis of variance. John Wiley and Sons, N.Y. Simpson, G. G., A. Roe, R. C. Lewontin. 1960. Quantitative zoology. Revised Ed. Harcourt, Brace and Co. N.Y. 440pp. Taber, R. D. 1958. Development of the cervid antler as an index of late winter physical condition. Proc. Montana Acad. Sciences 18:27-28. Prepared by: Allen E. Anderson Date: January, 1965 ------ Approved by: Laurence E. Riordan Asst. Director, Research F. C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �",~ ~~< APPENDIX I ~;{~ DEER ECOLOGY INVESTIGATIONS CHECK STATION 1964 Measured by Recorder --------------~----------------Date of Kill I , , S i Age Class E X " W-I05-R Date~ Antler Data No.IPts. IBeam Dia. Beam Length Brow Tine Spread :R. Yes 1 No L. I R. L. R. L. _ Interview Location of Kill Est.Hrs. Hunted I i ~ I! l i I -, j j , Reprod. Tract No. I I I ; , i f I I i I i ! I , ! ! i i ! .s:- I' II i i ! Ii : ! ! i j I N N I I I ; , i i , I I I I i i ! I ! ! ; i ! , I ! . I i I I , "'.J ~':'.d I . �-225- 920G4~7 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT 'State of COLORADO ---------------------------- Project No. An Ecological Investigation of the Cache 1a Poudre Deer Herd, Colorado W-105-R-4 Work Plan No. 5 ----~----------------- Job No. 4 Personnel: Physiological Studies Effect of Essential Oils of Big Sagebrush in Mule Deer Rumen Metabolism Julius G. Nagy Period Covered: January, 1963 - December, 1963 ABSTRACT ·Investigations were conducted on the effect of essential oils of big sage·brush: (Artemisia tridentata) on growth and metabolism of bacteria, including rumen microorganisms of mule deer (Odocoileus hemionus), and the effects of the sagebrush feeding on appetite, rumen function, and rumen bacterial function of a fistulated steer. The essential oils showed inhibitory action onseveral gram-positive and gram-negative bacteria, using the disc assay method •. The addition of 0.05-ml amounts of essential oils of sagebrush inhibited the growth of deer rumen microorganisms in 9 ml amounts of agar media. The'rate of cellulose digestion was decreased when 0 002 ml amounts of oils were added to 6 ml of cellulose broth and was apparently inhibited by 0.04 ml of oils. The addition of 0.1 ml amounts of oils added to 41 m1 of deer rumen contents (sagebrush as substrate) decreased the rate of gas production and volobile fatty acid production (VFA) concentrations. Appetite aridrumen movements cea~ed completely following the introduction of 21 pounds of >l3agebrushin 7-pound daily portions through the rumen fistula of a steer. 0 ...' ,'.. . ·Work was continued in 1963 on separation and culture of deer rumen microorganisms. Study begai10n two additional species of sagebrush (A. nova and A. frigida). Coilection of !:_. tridentata, restricted so far to one site in North-Eastern Colorado has been carried further to other regions of the State. . . ~ _'.; . 'Two female'f:"awnswere. acquired with the objective that they will be fistulated and.the action of essential oils directly studied in the rumen. Both died in hepatitis (causative agent "hemobartonella-like blood parasites") in December, > 1963 •. .'Recortnneridations:The findings suggest a need for further evaluation of the .nutritional values of sagebrush. Conventional methods of preparation of -sagebrush rations (drying of clipped material, grinding, pelleting) for �-22b- digestion trials destroy almost all of the essential oil content of the sample and cannot be used for the purpose. Immediate freezing of the sample seems to preserve the oil content. The study should be extended to other regions of Colorado, the essential oil content of the collected plants examined, and the effects of the oils studied first in vitro and after the screening tests in vivo. It is very likely that taxonomically similar sagebrush species would-Po~s different essential oil content, might differ therefore in their antibacterial action and consequently in their action on overall digestion. This factor alone could influence carrying capacity evaluations considerably. The establishment of deer pens and experimental herd of deer and antelope on the premises of the Game and Fish Research Center, Fort Collins, would be highly recommended. At present, our knowledge is very limited on relatively simple practical problems connected with wild ruminants such as fistulation, etc. We have to rely completely on findings with domestic ruminants. Obviously, these findings do not necessarily have to be true in the wild ruminant species. Objectives: General: To determine the effect of essential oils of big sagebrush (Artemisia tridentata) in mule deer rumen metabolism. Specific: (1) Investigate and establish specific procedures and techniques for the chemical, metabolic, and bacteriological phases of the investigation; (2) Determine numbers and possibly general types of microorganisms present in the rumen during the digestion of different substrates; (3) Determine the effect of big sagrbrush oils on (a) rate of metabolism, (b) end products of fermentation, and (c) rumen micro-flora. Techniques Used: Current annual growth of big sagebrush was collected in late winter and early fall. Site of collection was a southern slope in the Sevenmile Creek region of Colorado. Samples were air-dried for a week and the essential oils were separated by steam distillation. The remaining sagebrush brew was sterilized and also examined for possible antibacterial action. Collection of Rumen Contents.--Deer rumen contents were obtained from wild mule deer in the Cache la Poudre River region of north-central Colorado. Deer were killed by rifle shot, and, minutes after death, the rumen wall was opened and the contents were placed in a steiile container for bacterial cultures. For artificial rumen studies contents of the rumen were strained through four layers of cheesecloth into a thermos bottle. Preliminary studies indicated that keeping rumen fluid at lower temperatures for short periods of time did not affect bacterial fermentation (Nagy et al. 1962). The elapsed time between killing the animal and arrival of the liquid in the laboratory was approximately 2 hours. Tests for Inhibitory Substances in Sagebrush.--Eight standard laboratory cultures of bacteria were cultured in Nutrient broth (Difco) for 24 hours, and broth (1 ml) containing the rapidly growing bacteria was transferred to sterile flat-bottom petri dishes. When agar (Difco) was used to culture Bacillus subtilis, and Plate Count Agar (Difco) was used for other organisms. Approximately 12 ml of sterile medium was added to each dish and mixed uniformly. As soon as the inoculated agar solidified, sterile discs (7 mm diameter, Difco) were dipped into the materials to be tested and placed on the surface of the agar. The following materials were tested for antibacterial properties: (1) boiled �-22'/- and sterilized sagebrush broth from which the essential oils had been removed by steam distillation; (2) boiled and sterilized alfalfa hay broth; (3) pure, commercial grade olive oil; (4) discs containing 2.5 units of penicillin; (5) essential oils of sagebrush obtained by steam distillation; (6) pure, commercial grade essential oils of orange. Plates were incubated for 48 hours at 35 C. Duplicate plates were used throughout the experiments. Tested substances diffused through the agar from the discs during the incubation period. If the sample contained any antibacterial substances, microorganisms were prevented from growing. After the incubation period, plates were seeded with visible growing colonies of bacteria except where inhibition occurred. The diameters of these clear, bacterial-free zones were measured and recorded. Effects of Essential Oils of Sagebrush on Deer Rumen Bacterial Cultures.--Preparation of the medium for culturing deer rumen microorganisms and methods were according to Bryant and Robinson (1961:1447-1448). Tenfold dilutions were made up to 10-8 and l-m1 amounts of the dilutions (10-4 to 10-8) were transferred to tubes containing 9-ml amounts of melted but cooled medium. To test the inhibitory effects of sagebrush oils on rumen bacteria of de~r, three sets of triplicate tubes were treated as follows: (1) no essential oils added, (2) 0.05 ml of esserltial oils added, and (3) 0.1 ml of essential oils added. After inoculation, tubes were closed and rolled rapidly under cold tap water. Incubation was carried out at 39 C for 96 hours. Cellulose broth was prepared according to Bryant and Burkey (1953:206-208). Ten grams of rumen contents were blended with 90 ml of diluting solution for 1 minute in a Waring Blendor. One ml of this mixture was transferred to 9 ml of diluting solution, shaken 30 times, and 0.1 ml transferred to tubes containing 6 ml of cellulose broth. Essential oils of sagebrush were added to duplicate tubes containing cellulose broth in the following amounts: 0;000, 0.002, 0.006, 0.01, 0.02, 0.03, and 0.04 ml of oils. Tubes were incubated and shaken periodically because the oils stayed on top of the suspension. Every day for a week, tubes were examined for the amounts of cellulose digested. Effects of Essential Oils of Sagebrush on Deer Rumen Bacterial Activity as Measured by In Vitro Gas and VFA Production.--The plant material described above was air-dried and ground through a Wiley Mill to pass a 2...,mm screen. The airdried material contained approximately 2 percent essential oils and, after milling, only 0.6 to 0.7 percent oils. The following substrates were used: (1) ground sagebrush; (2) the dried portion of ground sagebrush remaining after distillation; (3) 'same as 2 but with 0.1 gram of essential oils added per gram of substrate; (4) same as 2 but with 0.2 gram of essential oils added per gram of substrate; and (5) no substrate (control). Rumen fluid (25 ml) was measured into fermentation flasks (125-ml Erlenmeyer) which contained 1 gram of the substrate to be tested and 15 ml of standard phosphate buffer solution (pH 6.65). After the addition of rumen fluid, each flask was closed with a rubber stopper provided with a burette. The burettes were made airtight with agar plugs 2 cm long. These manometric devices provided a direct reading of the gas produced. The displacement of the agar plug was observed with an accuracy of + 0.2 ml �-22e- as indicated by standardizatiQn trials conducted previously for the purpose of determining the range of accuracy. The flasks were transferred to a water bath with a continuous stirrer and maintained at a constant temperature of 39 C ± 1. The fermentation period was 6 hours with a reading every hour. Every 2 hours triplicate samples were removed, mixed, the residue strained through cheesecloth, and prepared for VFA determinations. Two ml of 25 percent meta phosphoric acid was added to 10 ml of strained rumen fluid. Samples were frozen and later centrifuged at 16,000 rpm in a Serval SS-l centrifuge for 45 minutes. The concentration of VFA (acetic, propionic and isobutyric, butyric, iso-valeric and valeric) were determined by gas chromatography with an Aerograph 600 B Hi-Fi with hydrogen flame detector. Effects of Sagebrush-Feeding on a Fistulated Steer.--In absence of fistulated deer, a Brown Swiss steer with a permanent rumen fistula was used to study the effects of sagebrush on appetite and rumen metabolism. Two days before and each day during the trial, rumen fluid samples were taken from the anterior ventral part of the rumen by means of a plastic tube. Approximately 1 liter of rumen fluid was collected in a thermos bottle, processed, and analyzed as described above for deer rumen fluid. Each day for 4 days, approximately 10 pounds of rumen contents were removed from the rumen through the fistula, then sagebrush (2 percent essential oil content), in 7-pound daily amounts, was introduced into the rumen of the animal. Daily observations were made on color of rumen contents, smell, rumen motility, appetite of the animal, and appearance of feces. �-22':;1- EFFECT OF ESSENTIAL OILS OF BIG SAGEBRUSH Julius G. Nagy Findings: The results of six months work during 1963 (January-July) has been reported. in detail in the 1962 report which was prepared in July, 1963. The reason for including the six months period was to give a complete report on the subject. Findings on this material have been published in the Journal of Wildlife Management (see Publications). Two female fawns were acquired during the summer of 1963 with the objective that they will be fistulated and used in digestion trials. Both of the animals died within a week in December. Clinical diagnosis: Focal hepatitis plus hemobartonella-like blood parasites. The animals were completely tame, trained to browse while attached with a rope to a tree. Up until September, 1963, sagebrush has been collected only from one site in North-Western Colorado. Through the partial support of the National Science Foundation collections were extended to other regions of Colorado, as well as to two other Artemisia species (A. nova and A. frigida). Collections have been made in North Park, Craig, and Elk Springs regions of Colorado. PUBLICATIONS Nagy, Julius G., Gyorgy Vidacs and Gerald M. Ward. 1964. Separation of the essential oils of Artemisia ~. by gas-chomatography and the effects of the oils on bacteria. (Abstr.). 35th Ann. Meeting Colo. Wyo. Acad. of Sci. May 1964. Nagy, Julius G., Harold W. Steinhoff, and Gerald M. Ward. 1964. Effects of essential oils of sagebrush on deer rumen mi crobdal function. Journal Wildl. Mgmt. 28:785-790. Prepared by__~J~u~l~i_u~s~G~.~N_a~g~y_ Approved by Date~ ~,~J~a~n~u~a~r~y~,~1~9~6~5~ _ Wayne W. Sandfort Chief, Game Research ��L'J' • .".11. b, 111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111 BDOW022699 January; 1965 !~~.};'" JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT State of . COLORADO '~------~~~~------------AriEcological Inve~tfgation.of the Cache la PoudreDeer Pro ject No •. --,..--_W -.;:.1..;..05;;__R....;.-_4..;.._ _ Work Plan No. 6 Behavior and Movement Studies ----~~--------------Seasonal Movements of the Cache Job No •..... Personnel: Herd,Colorado -=2~ : fa Poudre, Deer Herd Roger J. Siglin Period Covered: January, 1963 - December, 1963 A study of the seasonal movements of mule deer in the Cache la:Poudre River drainage was initiated in January, 1963 ~ . The primary objective is to determine the seasonal movement patterns of the herd. Eig]:lty-four"automatic tagging devices" were set out on the winter range in March, 1963, and 38 were set out on the summer range in July and August. Nine deer were possibly tagged on the winter range and four on the summer range. Thirty-two sets were broken by deer without them being collared. Modifications of the collar snap mechanism were made in the fall of.1963 to improve these results. This method of tagging deer will be used again in 1964. An attempt was l.Il8;de to box-trap deer for marking on the summer range, but this was not successful because deer could not be baited into the traps. The Palmer Cap-Chur gun was used to capture deer for marldrig purposes, but very i limited success was obtained. Sev.en fawns were captured by hand and tagged on the summer' range •. Reconnnendations: The accomplishment of the objective requires a large number 'of marked deer (300 to 500). For this reason it is recommended that 1000 tagging devices be constructed for use in 1964. Student l.aborshould'be provided to help with the tagging program. Objective: Determine the seasonal movement patterns and associated behavior of mule deer in the Poudre River drainage as .related to certain environmental·· factors~ . �-232- Techniques Used or Proposed: Automatic tagging devices were used in marking deer on the winter and summer ranges. Two box traps were used in an attempt to capture deer on the summer range. Additional traps were constructed for use on the winter range in 1964. Sight records of marked deer have been and will continue to be recorded by personnel. of the Unit, Game, Fish and Parks Department, U. S. Forest Service, as well as other competent individuals during the migration periods and on winter and summer ranges. In addition to the above methods, as many box-trapped deer as possible will be equipped with radio transmitters in 1964, to facilitate the tracing of seasonal movements. An attempt was made to capture deer for marking purposes using the Palmer Cap-Chur gun with nicotine salicylate loaded darts. , • �-23:3- SEASONAL MOVEMENTS Roger J. Siglin Findings: Movements.--Deer marked on summer and winter ranges have been seen in the immediate vicinity where they were marked, but no seasona l movements of marked deer have been noted. Until more deer are marked it cannot be expected that much data on seasonal movements would be obtained. Automatic Tagging Devices.--A total of 84 tagging devices were set out in three different locations on the winter range. They were similar to the type described by Verme (1962), the major modification was the use ·of a different type of snap. The tagging devices were set out between March 1-20 and removed 10 to 14 weeks later. The results were as follows: Undisturbed and intact -- 39 Sets not relocated -- 12 Collars found laying in the trail near where they were set -- 11 Collars missing -- 9 Sets non-functional for various reasons -- 13 The 12 sets which could not be iocated may involve some 'deer successfully tagged. Because of the difficulty of describing accurately the locations of some of the sets, however, it is probable that some were overlooked at the time of removal. Of the 9 collars that were missing, it is assumed that they are on deer since a diligent search was made of the areas where they were set. In the case of the 13 non-functional sets, some had been pushed aside, presumably by deer; some had broken where the wire attached to the collar was filed, likely due to movement by wind; .some were not securely set in the correct position; and one showed evidence of human tam~ering. Of the 11 collars found laying in the trail near where they were set, all were unsnapped and the wire was still attached to the tree or bush. The tagging devices were set in various habitat types and no relationship was noted between habitat type and the number of missing collars. No.8 sheep bells were attached to 16 of the tagging devices and of the 9 collars missing, three had bells attached. Two tagged deer were seen on the winter range near where they were marked, by Game, Fish and Parks personnel, but positive identification of the tag numbers was not made. �-234- Automatic tagging devices were. used experimentally on the summer range. Cattle undoubtedly destroyed some of the devices. A calf was seen wearing one of the collars, but was later captured and the collar removed. A buck wearing a collar was collected by Game, Fish and Parks Department personnel 200-300 yards from the tagging site. Two other bucks wearing collars ~ere reported by construction personnel working on a new road in the area where the tagging devices were set out. Seven sets were made with a 2 to 3 foot diameter loop in the snare. The loop was drawn tight by a strip of inner-tube when a trip wire was touched. by an animal walking into the snare. It was hoped the larger snare would increase the success of the tagging device. Five of these sets were found sprung, but intact, and two of the collars were found unsnapped near the set. Results below: obtained with / 38 tagging devices on the summer range are summarized Undisturbed and intact -- 7 Collars found in the trail adjacent to the set -- 16 Collars missing -- 5 (two positively, and two tentatively Snares with large loops, sprung but intact 5 Sets non-functional for various reas.ons -- 5 accounted for) Verme (1962) reported that out of 694 devices set in Michigan, 367 collars were unaccounted for. This is a nruch higher success rate than obtained in this study. However, deer are not heavily concentrated on the Poudre winter range and their movements are not restricted to runways as they are in northern Michigan. It is doubtful if success rates above 30 per cent could ever be obtained on the Poudre drainage. Verme (1962) reported that the reliability of the tagging devices ran as high as 69 per cent in one instance. In other wprds, two out of every three deer that entered sets tagged themselves. This is compared, to 45 per cent relia- . bility with the snares tested on the winter range in this study. It is apparent that the tagging devices ~ust' be improved and this will be attempted next year. It does not appear that the tagging devices will be suitable for large scale use on the summer range. The area where they were tested last summer is unusual in that' it supports a relatively heavy concentration of deer. However, over most of the summer range deer are thinly distributed. Cattle. also pose problem -: on the summer range and if a calf were collared and not found for some time it could choke as its neck size increased. Box Trapping.--An attempt was made to trap deer on the summer range using two box traps. Salt blocks were used at bait and deer were observed licking the salt inside th~ traps. Before an attempt could be made to lure deer completely inside the traps, cattlemen put out salt for livestock and the deer no longer went near the traps. Alfalfa hay and pellets were also tried Mithout success. �-235- Drug Capture.--Two deer were captured during the summer using the Palmer Cap-Chur gun loaded with nicotine salicylate darts. The first deer shot, a yearling doe, was collared and ear-tagged and later observed feeding in the same meadow. The other deer, an adult doe with two fawns, injured herself in a fall while under the effects of the drug and died. A necropsy disclosed a ruptured liver, hemorrhaging of the lungs, and a possible broken neck. Several ot.her deer were hit with the syringe, but either disappeared before the drug took effect, or the powder charge in the syringe failed to go off and inject the drug. Use of the Cap-Chur gun is limited on the summer range primarily because of the abundance of dense cover. Deer which are hit cannot be kept in sight until the drug takes effect. Fawn Capture and Marking.--Seven fawns were captured on the summer range and marked with ear streamers and ear tags. If they are found in the same area next summer it will give additional supporting evidence for the theory that most migratory mule deer return annually to the area in which they were born. Radio Tracking.--A'radio transmitter with a one-year operating life was designed in the fall of 1963. A pulsed signal is emitted from a 3-foot whip antenna and the expected receiving range is 5 to 10 miles from an airplane and up to two miles on level terrain with a ground receiver. A radio receiver has been purchased for use in aircraft or ground vehicles and two small portable receivers will be purchased early next year. As many deer as possible will be equipped with transmitters next year in hopes that they can be tracked from the winter to the summer range. LITERATURE CITED Verme, L. J. 1962. 26:387-392 • Prepared by: Date: An automatic tagging device for de~r. Roger J. Siglin ~J~a=n~u=a=r~V~,_=1~9~6~5 Approved by: _ J. Wildl. Mgmt. Wayne W. Sandfort Chief, Game Research Ferd C. K1einschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator � https://cpw.cvlcollections.org/files/original/ff983b562e42e2ed58adf1a5e9ef8565.pdf 83b528c4daf7e61892f3f9f5314e39a2 PDF Text Text JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of Colorado ------~~~~~---------- Project No. 10 Job No. Period W-40-R-5 Covered: April Antelope Investigations Review of Literature 1, 1963 through March 31, 1964. ABSTRACT This job was not completed during the past segment. Many references pertaining to population determination, census, and behavior of big game animals have been read and abstracted, but additional time is needed to continue reviewing the available literature and preparing a suitable sunnnary in report form. ��- 249 References Ackerly, W. F. and Vernon Regier. 1955. California's 1955 antelope census. Calif. Dept. Fish and Game, Game Man. Br., 3 p. Ackerly, W. F. and Vernon Regter. 1956. Northeastern California antelope studies. Calif. Dept. Fish and Game, Game Man. Br., 44 p. Adams, Lowell. 1951. Confidence limits for the Peterson or Lincoln index used in animal population studies. J. Wild 1. Mgmt. 15(1): 12-19. Adams, William H., Jr. 1960. Population ecology of white-tailed deer in northeastern Alabama. Ecology 41(4): 706-715. Alexander, Maurice M. 1958. The place of aging in wildlife management. Amer. Scientist 46 (2): 123-137. ,Allen, Grover M. 1942. Extinct and vanishing mammals of western hemisphere. Pub. No. 11. Amer. Comm. for International Wildl. Protection. Allen, Rex M., and Kay S. Samson. 1960. Further observations on Thysanosma actinioides in the American pronghorn. I. Parasitol. 46(5): 671. Allred, Warren J. 1943. Wyoming antelope - history and wartime management. Transactions of the 8th N. Amer. Wildl. Conf. Anderson, Chester C. 1959. The elk of Jackson Hole - a review of Jackson Hole elk studies. Wyo. Game & Fish Comm., Bul. No. 10:1-184. Anderson, H. T. 1934. The pronghorn antelope in Los Angeles County. Calif. Fish and Game 20(1): 91-92. Anonymous. 1935. Morning versus evening deer count. Digest, Jan., p.18. Anonymous. 1939. 4(2): 27. The antelope census. Anonymous. 1941. Antelope. Anonymous. 1942. Rehabilitating the pronghorn. Forest Research California Conservationist Calif. Cons. 6(7): 8. Wyo. Wildl. 7(6): 1-3, 17. Anonymous. 1943. Wyoming has large pronghorn antelope population. Wyo. Wildl. 8(6): 1-3, 10-15. June. Anonymous. 1946. Wyoming antelope. Wyo. Wild1. 10(5) :4-6. May. Anonymous. 1948. Field crews complete 1948 antelope census, Wyo. Wild1. 12(4): 18-25, 35, 37. Anonymous. 1950. Big game inventory of the U.S. in 1948. Leaflet 321. U.S. Dept. of Interior. Fish & Wildl. Service. Washington, D.C. �- 250 - Anonymous. 1951. Phantoms of the grassland and sagebrush trapped and transplanted. S·.Dak , Cons. Dig. 18(1): 2-5. Anonymous. 1954. A symposium on cycles in animal populations. J. Wildl. Mgt. 18(1): 1-112. Anonymous (various authors). 1955. Lectures on population dynamics. Scripps lnst. Oceanography, LaJolla, Calif. 66 p. Anonymous. 1956. populations. Symposium. A discussion on the dynamics of natural Proc. Roy.Soc.) Sere B, Biolo. SCi., 145(920):291-364. Anonymous. The pronghorn antelope. 1958. Outdoor Calif. 19(12): 10-12. Arrington, O. N. and Alfred E. Edwards. 1951. Predator control as a factor in antelope management. Trans. N. A. Wildl. Conf. 16: 179-190. Bach, Roy N. 1945. Annual antelope census completed September, 1945. N. Dak. Outdoors, 8(4): 8. Banfield, A. W. F., D. R. Flook, J. P. Kelsall, and A. G. Loughrey. 1955. An aerial survey technique for northern big game. Trans. N. Amer. Wildl. Conf. 20:519-532. Baker, Rollin H. and Hilbert R. Siegler. 1943. Use of bag records of big game to determine sex ratios and population densities. Jour. Wildl. Mgmt. 7(1): 11-13. Baker, Theodore C. 1953. Antelope movement and migration studies. Wyo. Wildl. 17(10): 30-36. Baker, Theodore C. 1953. Food habits study of game animals. Wildl. 17(11): 24-31. Wyo. Baker, Theodore C. 18(1): 22-23. 1954. Pronghorn Winter-kill. Wyo. Wildl. Barick, Frank. 1960. Twelve years of deer hunting records. N. C. 24(3): 8-10. Wildl. in Barker, Elliot S. 1941. Removing surpluses of wildlife from the standpoint of state administration. Trans. N. A. Wildi. Conf. 6:362-367. Barker, Elliott S. 1948. Antelope comeback. 26-27, 121-123. Field and Stream 53(4): Beer, James. 1944. Distribution and status of pronghorn antelope in Montana. J. Mammal. 25(1): 43-46. Benson, W. Arthur. 1957. A general view of the antelope in Saskatchewan. Can. Wildl. Serv., Wildl. Mgmt. papers. Delivered at 20th Fed-Prov. Wildl. Conf., 1956. p. 23-34. �- 251 - Bergeson, W. R. and W. K. Thompson. 1946. Aerial census of Montana's antelope. Monta"na Fish & Game Dept. Typewritten report, 23 pp. Berner, Lester M. 1954. Antelope seasons past and present. Cons. Digest 21 (8): 2-3. S. Dak. Berner, Lester M. 1953. Ant"e1ope age ratio study by aerial transects in 1952. Pittman - Robertson Proj. l2-R-10. S. D. Bever, Wendell. Cons. Dig. 1951. What about South Dakota's sagebrush? 18(1): 12-13. S. Dak. Bever, Wendell. 1955. History of antelope in South Dakota. Cons. Digest 22(8): 2-3. S. Dak. Birch, L. C. 1958. The role of weather in determining the distribution and abundance of animals. In Cold Spring Harber Symposia on Quant. BioI. 22: 203-215. Blackith, R. E. 1958. Nearest - Neighbor distance measurements for the estimation of animal populations. Ecology 39(1): 147-150. Blunt, Floyd M. 1950. Wyoming's 1950 antelope census. 14(4): 8-13, 36-37. Wyo. Wild Life Bowman, Robert I. 1955. Aerial reconnaissance of moose in summer. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 19(3): 382-387. Branch of Wildlife Research. Big game inventory for 1956. Wildl. Leafl. 395. 3 p. March 1958. u.S. F&WS, Branch of Wildlife Research. 1958. F&WS, Wildl. Leafl. 399. 3 p. Big game inventory for 1957. U.S. Branch of Wildlife Research. 1959. F&WS, Wi1dl. Leafl. 411. Big game inventory for 1958. u.S. Branch of Wildlife Research. 1961. F&WS, Wild1. Leafl. 440. Big game inventory for 1960. U.S. Bridge, Max. 1949. Brockley, Harry J. Notes on the pronghorn. Wyo. Wild Life. 1949. Antelope in the snow. Wyo. 7(11): 20-22,23. Wild Life 13(4):27-30. Brown, Don L. 1955. Census and management of central Montana antelope. Proc. Annual Conf. West. Ass'n. St. Game and Fish Comm., 34:211-215. Brunett, Louis E. 1959. The Tensas deer herd. Ass'n. Game & Fish Comm., 213-224. Proc. 12 Annual Conf. S.E. Bryant, H. C. 1915. Present status of pronghorn antelope. & Game, Vol. 1, No.2, p 77. Calif. Fish �- 252 Buck, Paul. 1947. The biology of the antelope in Montana. Mont. State College. WR59--l2. Buechner, Helmut K. western Texas. M.S. thesis, 1947. Range use of the pronghorned antelope in Trans. N. A. Wildl. Conf. 12:185-191. Buechner, Helmut K. 1948. 6(5): 5,12,17-18. The antelope situation. Texas Game & Fish Buechner, H. K. 1950. Life history, ecology, and range use of pronghorn antelope in Trans-Pecos, Texas. Amer. Midland Naturalist. 43(2):257-354. Buechner, Helmut K. 1950. Use of the helicopter in wildlife work. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 14(4): 472-473. Buechner, Helmut K. 1950. Range ecology of the pronghorn on the Wichita Mountains Wildlife Refuge. Trans. N. Amer. Wildlife Conf. 15:627-644. Buechner, Helmut K., Irven O. Buss, and Homer F. Bryan. 1951. Censusing elk by airplane in the Blue Mountains of Washington. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 15(1): 81-87. Calhoun, John B. 1952. The social aspects of population dynamics. J. Mamm. 33(2): 139-159. Campbell, H. and R. E. Tomlinson. 1962. Jour. Wildl. Mgmt. 26(4): 407-409. Chapman, D. G. 1954. Math. Statistics Lens weights in chuckar partridges. The estimation of biological populations. 25(1): 1-15. Ann. Chapman, Douglas G. 1958. Problems of estimation of wildlife mortality rates. Biometrics. 13(4): 548-549. Chattin, John E. and Carlton M. Herman. 1944. A parasite from antelope in California. Trans. Am. Micros. Soc. 63(1): 27-29. Chattin, John E. and Robert Lassen. 1950. California antelope reproductive potentials. Calif. Fish & Game. 36 (3): 328-329. Cheney, E. S. 1929. Prong-horned antelope in California. & Game, Vol. 15(2): 175. Calif. Fish Christian, John J., Vagn Flyger, and David E. Davis. 1960. Factors in the mass mortality of a herd of sitka deer, Cervus nippon. Chesapeake Sci. 1(2): 79-95. Cole, Glen F. 1956. The pronghorn antelope. Its range use and food habits in central Montana with special reference to alfalfa. Bull. Montana Agric. Expt. Sta. 516 3-62. �- 253 Cole, Glen F. and Bruce T. Wilkins. 1958. The pronghorn antelope - its range use and food habits in central Montana with special reference to wheat. Mont. Fish & Game Dept., Tech. Bul. No. 2:1-39. Cole, LaMont C. 1954. Some features J. Wildl. Mgmt., l8(1):2-24. of random population Cole, LaMont C. 1954. The population consequences phenomena. Quart. Rev. BioI., 29(2):103-l37. cycles. of life history Covey, Faye M. 1951. Big game census techniques in Montana. Conf. Western Assoc. St. Game & Fish Comm ,, 31: 153-157. Proc. Ann. Covey, Faye M. 1946. Antelope Mgmt., 10(4):367. J. Wildl. foods in southwestern Cragg, J. B. and N. W. Pirie, editors. animals. 1955. Craighead, John J. and Dwight S. Stackstad. J. Wildl. Mgmt., 24(4):435-438. Montana. The numbers Color marker of man and for big game. Crow, J. F. 1954. Breeding structure of populations. II Effective population number. p. 543-556 in Statistics and Mathematics in Biology, by Oscar Kempthorne and others. Iowa State ColI. Press. Crump, William I. 1962. Aerial marking of antelope for migration and distribution studies. Proc. 41st Conf. W. Assoc. State Game & Fish Comm., p. 93-98. Darwin, J. H. 1953. Population differences between species growing according to simple birth and death processes. Biometrika, 40:370-382. Dasmann, Raymond F. and Richard D. Taber. 1956. in Columbian black-tailed deer populations. Determining structure J. Wildl. Mgmt., 20(1):78-83. Dasmann, R. F. and R. D. Taber. 1956. Behavior deer with reference to population ecology. of Columbian black-tailed J. Mamm., 37 (2):143-l64. Davis, David E. 1956. Collection and use of data for population analysis. Proc. NE Sections Wildl. Soc. et al 1-9 p., mimeo., May 1956. Davis, David E. 1960. A chart for estimation J. Wildl. Mgmt., 24(3):344-348. of life expectancy. Dasmann, Raymond F. and Archie S. Mossman. 1962. Road strip counts for estimating numbers of African ungulates. J. Wildl. Mgmt., 26(1):101-104. Davenport, L. A. 1948. Game counts can be made from the air. Mich. Con s ,, l7(1):7, 14. Davis, Wayne and Donald Putnam. 1951. An aerial coyote - antelope observation. J. Wildl. Mgmt., 15(3):330. Deevey, Edward J., Jr. 1947. Life tables for natural populations animals. ~uart. Rev. BioI., 22(4):283-3l4. of �- 254· Denney, Richard N. 1961. Check station survey. Report, Colorado~ p. 21. Federal Aid. Quarterly Denniston, Rollin H. 1956. Ecology, behavior and population dynamics of the Wyoming Rocky Mountain moose, Alces alces shirasi. Zoological 41(3): 105-U8. Dice, Lee R. 1941. Methods for estimating populations J. Wildl. Mgmt. 5(4): 398-407. of mammals. Dice, Lee R. 1952. Measure of the spacing between individuals within a population. Contr. Lab.'Vertebrate BioI. Univ. Michigan 55: 1-23. Diem, Kenneth L. 1959. Field and farm resources: some aspects of wildlife population dynamics, their interpretation and role in game management. Trans. N. Amer. Wildl. Conf. 24:304-312. Dow, Sumner A. 1952. Antelope ageing studies in Montana. Proc. 32nd. Ann. Conf. Western Ass'n. State Game & Fish Comm., Glacier Nat. Park, Mont., June 15-17, 1952. p. 220-224. 1953. Dow, S. A. 1955. An evaluation of some criteria for age determination the pronghorn (Antilocapra americana Ord). Unpub. M.S. thesis, Mont. State Univ. of Dow, Sumner A., Jr., and Philip L. Wright. 1962. Changes in mandibular dentition associated with age in pronghorn antelope. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 26(1): 1-18. Edson, Marshall C. 1951. Game population trend census techniques. Proc. Annual Conf. Western Ass'n. State Game & Fish Comm., 31:147-150. Edson, Marshall. 1960. Rev. 13(2): 3-5. The pronghorn antelope in Idaho. Idaho Wildl. Edwards, R. Y., and C. David Fowle. Trans. 20th N. A. Wildl. Conf. 1955. The concept of carrying capacity. p. 589-602. Einarsen, Arthur S. 1939. Oregon's N. A. Wildl. Conf. 4:216-220. open season on antelope Einarsen, Arthur S. 1938. Life history and management Oregon. Trans. N. A. Wildl. Conf. 3:381-387. Einarsen, Arthur S. 1948. The pronghorn Wildl. Mgmt. 1st. 238 p. Elliott, Robert R. 1948. Antelope Comments 10(5): 3-4, 22. in 1938. of antelope Trans. in antelope and its management. restoration in Colorado. Colo. Cons. Errington, Paul L. 1942. On the analysis of productivity in populations of higher vertebrates. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 6(2): 165-181. �- 255 Errington, Paul L. 1956. Factors limiting higher vertebrate populations. Science 124(3216):304-307. Etheredge, O. F. and W. C. Glazener. 1947. Texas Game and Fish. 5(6):12-13. The 1946 antelope hunt. Ferrel, Carol M. and Howard R. Leach. 1950. Food habits of the prong-horn antelope of California. Calif. Fish & Game 36(1):21-26. Ferrel, Carol M. and Howard R. Leach. 1952. The prong-horn antelope of California with special reference to food habits. Calif. Fish & Game 38(3):285-293. Fisher, C. O. 1929. 15(4):349-350. The antelope of Lassen County. Calif. Fish & Game Fisher, Lee W. 1942. 6(3):231-236. Live trapping Texas antelopes. J. Wi1d1. Mgmt. Forbes, Stanley E. 1959. The Pennsylvania deer story--1959. Pa. Game News 30(11):13-17. Gabrielson, Ira N. 1935. The antelope situation. Am. Game 24(4):54-59. Gilbert, Paul F. and Jack R.Grieb. 1957. Comparison of air and ground deer counts in Colorado. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 21(1):33-37. Gilbert, Paul F. and Albert G. Hahn. 1959. The practical use of aerial photographs in game and fish management. Proc. Ann. W. Assoc. State Game & Fish Comm. 39:223. Gilmore, Roy E. and Rex W. Allan. 1960. Helminth parasites of pronghorn antelope (Anti1ocapra americana) in New Mexico with new host records. Proc. Helmintho1. Soc., Washington 27(1): 69-73 0 Glasgow, J. P. 1953. The extermination of animal populations by artificial predation and the estimation of populations. J. Anim. Eco10. 22(1):32-45. Glazener, W. C. 10(1):2-5. 1951. Conducted antelope hunts •••why? Tex. Game & Fish Goldsby, Alice I. and D. F. Eveleth. 1954. Internal parasites in North Dakota antelope. J. Parasite 40(6):637-648. Good, I.J. 1953. The population frequencies of species and the estimation of population parameters. Biometrika 40:237-264. Goodman, L. A. 1953. Population growth of the sexes. Goodwin, Harry. 1960. The deer of New Jersey. Biometrics 9(2):212-225. N. J. Outdoors 10(7):4-9. Gregg, Peter Alan. (Cornell Univ., Ithaca, N.Y.). 1955. Summer habits of Wyoming antelope. Dissertation Absts. 15(12):2374. �- 256 Grzimek, Michael, and Bernhard Grzimek. 1960. Census of plains animals in the Serengeti National Park, Tanganyika. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 24(1): 27-37. Halloran, Arthur F. Wildl-Sportsman 1954. The dwarf antelope 25(4): 26-28. Halloran, Arthur F. 1956. Wichita antelope Game & Fish News 12(12): 6-7. Halloran, Arthur F. 38 (3): 423. Harn, Joseph H. California. p. 220-223. 1957. of the Yuma Flats. on comeback trail. A note on the sonoran pronghorn. Ariz. Okla. J. Mamm. 1961. Natality and mortality of Roosevelt elk in northern Proc. 40th Ann. Conf. W. Assoc. State Game & Fish Comm. Harris, John T. 1959. Total mule deer population estimates from pellet counts. Proc. 39th Ann. Conf. W. Assoc. State Game & Fish Comm. p.237-247. Hart, Ray D. 1958. Evaluation of deer pellet group census method. M.S. thesis, Colo. State Univ. Hatter, J., and P. W. Martin. 1961. Management of moose in Rritish Columbia. Proc. 40th Ann. Conf. W. Assoc. State Game & Fish Comm. p. 205-210. Hayne, Don W. 1949. An examination of the strip census method for estimating animal populations. J. Wildl. Mgmt., 13(2):145-157. Hickey, Joseph J. 1954. Mean intervals J. Wildl. Mgmt. 18(1): 90-106. in indices of wildlife populations. Hinman, Robert A. 1960. Problems in antelope management in Utah. Pr oc , 39th Ann. Conf. W. Assoc. State Game & Fish Comm. p. 201-207. Hlavachick, William, D. 1962. Distribution of antelope. Kansas Forestry Fish & Game Commission, Pittman-Robertson Project W-23-R-l, Job No. E-l. Howell, Joseph C. 1951. The roadside census as a method of measuring bird populations. Auk 68(3): 334-357. Hudson, Paul. 1959. 23(2): 234-235. Fetal recoveries in mule deer. J. Wildl. Mgmt. Huizinga, Henery. 1942. Eimera Antelocaprae, a new Coccidium J. Parasitology 28(2): 167-168. American antelope. Hunter, Gilbert N. 1945. and range conditions. from the Methods of determining trends in big game numbers Trans. N. Amer. Wildl. Conf., 10:234-241. Hunter, Gilbert N. 1944. Air census techniques and trend studies in relation to big game. Proc. Annual Conf. W. Assoc. State Game & Fish Comm., 24:37-47. �- 257 Jahn, Laurence R. 1959. Highway mortality as an index of deer-population change. J. Wildie Mgmt. 23(2): 187-197. Jewett, Stanley G. 26 p. 1939. Hart Mountain Johnson, F. W. 1931. Antelope & Game 17(2): 167-168. Jones, Paul V. 18-28. 1949. antelope refuge. USDA, Misc. Pub. 355. on the Shasta National Forest. Antelope management. Calif. Fish Texas Game & Fish Jones, Paul V., Jr. 1949. Experimental management Fish & Oyster Cornrn.,F.A. Rep. Sere 3. 31 pp. 7(12): 4-5, of antelope. Texas Game, Kautz, Lorin G. 1942. Survey of 1941-42 - life history, census, habitat. Colo. Game & Fish Dept., Antelope Surv. Vol. 2. x + 36 p. Kelker, George Hills. 1943. Sex-ratio equations and formulas for determining wildlife populations. Utah Acad. of Sci., Arts and Letters, 20:189-198. Kelker, George Hills. 1950. Sex and age class ratios among vertebrate populations. Proc. Utah Acad. Sci. Arts and Letters. 27:12-21. 1949-1950. Kittams, Walter H. 10(2): 30-39. 1959. Future of the yellowstone wapiti. Naturalist Klein, David R. 1959. Saint Mathew Island reindeer range study. F&WS Spec. Sci. Rep.--Wildlife No. 43. Klein, David R. 1959. Track differentiation J. Wildl. Mgmt. 23(3): 361-363. U.S. for censusing bear populations. Klein, David R. and Sigurd T. Olson. 1960. Natural mortality patterns deer in southeast Alaska. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 24(1): 80-88. of Kolenosky, George Ben, and Richard S. Miller. 1962. Growth of the lens of the pronghorn antelope. J. Wild1. Mgmt. 26(1): 112-113. Knipe, Theodore. 1944. The status of the antelope herds of northern Arizona. Ariz. Game & Fish Cornrn. 40 p. Krebs, Charles J. 1961. Population dynamics herd; 1938-58. Arctic 14(2): 91-100. Lack, David. 1954. Cyclic mortality. of the Mackenzie J. Hild1. Mgmt. Delta reindeer 18 (1): 25-37. 1954. The natural regulation Lack, David. 343 pp. U. Press. of animal numbers. Oxford Lack, David. Letter to the editor. J. Animal Ecology 23(2): 381. 1961. Wi1d1. in N. C. Larimer, 1954. Edward J. How many fawns? 25(9): 4-6. �- 258 Lauckhart, J. B. 1950. Determining the big game population Trans , N. Amer. Wild 1. Conf. 15:644- 65 o. from the kill. Leedy, Daniel F. 1948. Aerial photographs, suggested uses in wildlife management. their interpretation and J. Wild1. Mgmt. 12(2): 191-209. Longhurst, Wm. M. 1956. Population 10(7): 9-10, 12, 14. of deer. dynamics Calif. Agr. Lord, Rexford D., Jr. 1959. The lens as an indicator of age in cottontail rabbits. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 23(3): 358-360. Lord, Rexford D., Jr. 1961. The lens as an indicator of age in the gray fox. J. Mamm. 42(1): 109-111. Loveless, Charles M. 1959. The Everglades deer herd. Life history and management. Fla. Game & Fresh Water Fish Comm., Tech. Bul. No.6. Lucker, John T. and G. Dikmans. 1945. The distribution of Pseudostertagia bullosa and some new records of nematodes from pronghorn antelope (Antilocapra americana). Proc. Helminth. Soc. Wash. 12(1): 2-4. Mabery, Chuck. 1952. 23 (9): 34-48. Pronghorn in Arizona. Ariz. Wildl. - Sportsman MacArthur, Robert H. 1955. The causes of fluctuations in animal populations, and a measure of community stability. Ecology 36(3): 533-536. Mace, Robert V. 1954. Comm. 1-26. Oregon's pronghorn antelope. Oreg. State Game Mace, Robert V. Commission. Oregon's pronghorn antelope. Oregon State Game 1954. Macias, A. Lvis. 1948. Wildlife Wildl. Conf. 13: 6-10. Mason, Ellis. 1947. 2(6): 1,4,7. conditions Oregon antelope. in Mexico. Trans. N. A. Oregon State Game Comm. Bul. Mason, Ellis. 1952. Food habits of the Hart Mountain antelope herd. Proc. 32nd. Ann. Conf. Western Assoc. State Game & Fish Comm., Glacier Nat'l. Park, Mont., June 15-17, p. 95-97. 1953. Mason, Ellis. 1952. J. Wildl. Mgmt. Mathisen, John. 1960. Food habits and measurements 16(3): 387-389. How many? Outdoor Nebr. of Hart Mountain antelope. 38(8): 18-19. Matteson, Clyde P. 1950. An evaluation report of airplane use in North America game and fish management. Colo. Game & Fish Dept., Current Report No. 27, 41 pp. McKenzie, J. V. 1960. Antelope census. N. D. State Game & Fish Dept., Pittman - Robertson Div., proj. No. W-37-R-6, Job No.4. �- 259 McKenzie, James V. 1961. Big Game Investigations 1959. Antelope census. N. Dakota State Game & Fish Dept., Pittman - Robertson Div., Proj. No. W-37-R-7, Job No~ 3. McKenzie, James V. 1962. 1961 pronghorn census. Pittman - Robertson 4 pp. N. Dakota State Game & Fish Dept. Proj. No. W-67-R-2. McKinley, Daniel. 1960. The question of the pronghorn J. Mamm. 41(4): 503-505. McLean, Donald D. 1940. Counting our game. McLean, Donald D. 1944. The' prong-horned Fish & Game, 30(4): 221-241. McKean, William. 14(7): 17. 1952. in pioneer Missouri. Calif. Cons. antelope An te Lop e season research. Div., 5(1): 18, 23. in California. Calif. N. Dak , Outdoors, ,McLucas, Jim. 1956. Montana f s big game transplanting Wildl. 6(1): 22-24. program. Mont. Mitchell, Glenn E. 1941. The determination of carrying capacity on wildlife areas. Trans. N. A. Wildl. Conf. 6:140-148. , Moisan, Gaston. 1:201-207. 1958. The caribou of Gaspe. Trans. NE Wildl. Conf. Moran, P.A.P. 1950. Some remarks on animal population Biometrics 6(3):250-258. Moran, P.A.P. lations. 1954. The logic of the mathematical J. Wildl. Mgmt. 18(1):60-66. theory of animal popu- Morris, R. F. 1957. The interpretation of mortality population dynamics. Canadian Ent. 89(2):49-69. data in studies on Nelson, E. W. 1925a. Distribution of the prong-horned California. Calif. Fish & Game 11(4):154-157. Nelson, E. \-1. 1925,. Status of pronghorn Bull. 1346:25-27. antelope, dynamics. antelope 1922-1924. in U.S.D.A., Neyman, Jerzy, and Elizabeth L. Scott. 1959. Stochastic models of population dynamics. A few simple chance mechanisms may combine to reproduce many manifestations of complex phenomena. Science 130(3371):303-308. Nichol, A. A. 1942. Gathering, transplanting, J. Wild1. Mgmt. 6(4):281-286. and care of young antelopes. Nicholson, A. J. 1954. An outline of the dynamics Australian Jour. Zool. 2(1):9-65. of animal populations. Noble, Glenn A. 1953. An intestinal amoeba from the prong-horned Trans. Amer. Microsc. Soc. 72(3):248-252. antelope. Noble, Robert E. 1962. Progress report on white-tailed deer productivity studies in Mississippi. Proc. 14th Ann. Conf. SE Assoc. Game & Fish Comms. p. 53-60. �- 260 Norberg, Elmer R. 1956. Idaho's experience with winter elk inventory via Proc. Ann. Conf. Wildl. Assoc. State Game & Fish Comm., helicopter. 36:173-177 . Wildl. Rev. 87, 1957. Ogilvie, Stanley. 36(1):146. 1955. Chokecherry toxic to an antelope. J. Mamm., Oregon State Game Commission. N.D. Oregon's pronghorn antelope. Oregon State Game Comm., 10 unnumbered pp., illus. WR 69:25. Owens, Dwight and Paul Gilbert. Colo. Outdoors, Colo. Game 1958. Deer, elk and whirlybirds. & Fish Dept., 7(1):26-28. Owens, Dwight E. 1959. The use of helicopters in game management. Proc. 39th Ann. Conf. W. Assoc. of State Game & Fish Comm., 39:229-232. Pearson, Oliver P. 1960. A mechanical dynamics. Ecology, 41(3):494-580. model for the study of population Pengelly, William Leslie. 1961. Factors influencing production of whitetailed deer on the Coeur D'Alene National Forest, Idaho. Ph.D. Thesis, Utah State Univ., 205 pp. (Dis. abstr. 22(6)). Petrides, George A. 1953. Aerial deer counts. J. Wildl. Mgmt., Picton, Harold D. 1961. Differental hunter harvest herds. J. Wildl. Mgmt., 25(4):415-421. 17(1):97-98. of elk in two Montana Pimlott, Douglas Humphreys. 1959. Reproduction, productivity and harvests of Newfoundland moose. Ph.D. Thesis, U. of Wisc., 130 pp. (from long abstract in dissertation abstracts 19(12)). Quick, Horace F. 1958. Estimating the effects of exploitation tables. Trans. 23rd. N. Amer. Wildl. Conf., 426-442. Ramsey, Robert R. 1956. Kill more does--have Fish, 14(5) :4-5, 26-27. more bucks. by life Texas Game & Rand, A. L. 1947 .. The 1945 status of the pronghorn antelope, Antilocapra americana (ord) , in Canada. Nat'l. Mus. Can. Bul. No. 106., 34 pp. Rasmussen, D. I. and Everett R. Doman. 1943. Census method and their application in the management of mule deer. Trans. N. Amer. Wildl. Conf., 8:369-380. Reynolds, Temple A., Jr. 1960. The mule deer - its history, life history and management in Utah. Utah State Dept. Fish & Game, Dept. Inf. Bul. No. 60-4., 32 pp. Ricker, W. E. 1954. Effects of compensatory mortality J. Wild1. Mgmt., 18(1):45-51. abundance. upon population �- 261 Riordan, Laurence E. 1948. The sexing of deer and elk by airplane Colorado. Trans. N. Amer. Wildl. Conf., 13:409-431. in Robertson, Fred R. and Robert G. Wingard. 1959. Let's talk about deer management. Extension Service, Pa. State U., U. Ed. 9-526. 4 pp. 1958. Problems Trans. 23rd. Robinette, W. L., R. B. Ferguson and J. S. Gasbwi1er. involved in the use of deer pellet group counts. N. Amer. Wildl. Conf., pp. 411-425. Rogers, Glenn, Odell Julander, and Leslie Robinette. 1958. Pellet-group counts for deer census and range-use index. ' J. Wildl. Mgmt., 22(2):193-199. April, 1958. Rouse, Charles H. 1941. Notes on winter foraging habits of antelopes Oklahoma. J. Mammal., 22(1):57-60. Rouse, C. H. 1954. Antelope and sheep fences. Preliminary Report, mimeo. 20 pp. Fish in & Wildl. Service. Rubl, H. D. 1932. Methods of appraising tbe abundance of game species over large areas. Trans. Amer. Game Conf., 19:442-450. Russell, Paul. 1937. 15(6):32-33. Antelope transplanting is success. N. Mex. Russell, Paul. 1951. Crises of antelope management. Proc. 31st. Ann. Conf. Western Assoc. State Game & Fish Comm., pp. 112-116. Russell, Paul. 1951. 15(6) :4-9, 34. Crises of antelope management. Wyoming Wildlife, Sakakur a , Katsuhiko. 1949. On the "degree of r esemb Lance " in statistical studies. Jour. Geol. Soc. Japan, 55(644/645):49-52. Sanderson, Glen C. 1961. The lens as an indicator The Amer. Midland Nat., 65(2):481-485. of age in the racoon. Saugstad, Stanley. 1942. Aerial census of big game in North Dakota. Trans. N. Amer. Wildl. Conf., 7:343-356. Scheffer, Victor B. 1955. Body size with relation in mammals. Jour. Mamm., 36(4) :493-515. to population density Scott, Robert F. 1954. Population growth and game management. Trans. 19th. N. Amer. Wildl. Conf., pp. 480-502. 1957. Calculating the percentage Selleck, David M. and Chester M. Hart. Calif. Fish & Game, 43(4):309-316. of kill from sex and age ratios. Semyonoff, B. T. 1956. Numerical census of European elk (moose) by survey of tracks from the air. Translation by J. M. MacLennan, Can. Wildl. Serv., 22 pp. �- 262 Seneca, Ernest D. 1961. Deer distribution, usage and population on the Broad Run Management Area, Craig County, Virginia. M. S. Thesis, Va. Poly. Inst. 173 pp. Sever inghaus , C. W. 1959. Conf., 1:358-364. Results of deer management. Trans. NE Wildl. Severinghaus, C. W. 1961. A method for determining the frequency of winter-killed deer per square mile. N. Y. Fish & Game J., 8(1):61-63. Shelford, V. E. J. Mammal., 1954. The antelope population 35(4):533-538. and solar radiation. Skellman, J. G. 1955. The mathematical approach to population dynamics. 31-46 pp. In the numbers of man and animals, J. B. Cragg and N. W. Pirie. Slobokin, L. Basil. 513-519. 1953. Slobodkin, L. Basil. 1955. Ecol., 36(3):530-533. An algebra of population Conditions growth. for population Smith, Dwight R. 1952. Aerial and ground counts. P-R Proj. 99-R-2, Idaho Fish and Game Dept. Ecol., 34(3): equalibrium. Job Completion Rept., Smith, Dwight R. 1953. Census of existing populations and establishment of trend count areas. Job Completion Rept., P-R Proj. 99-R-2, Idaho Fish and Game Dept. Smith, Frederick E. 1952. Experimental a critique. Ecol., 33(4):441-450. methods in population dynamics: Solomon, M. E. and G. C. Varley, 1958. Meaning of density - dependence and related terms in population dynamics. Nature, 18(4626):1178-1781. Southwick, Charles H. 1956. The logistic theory of population past and present attitudes. Turtox News, 34(7):131-132. growth, Springer, Leonard M. 1950. Aerial census of interstate antelope herds of California, Idaho, Nevada, and Oregon. J. Wildl. Mgmt., 14(3): 295-298. Stokes, James D. 1952. Antelope management in California. Proc. 32nd. Ann. Conf. Western Assoc. State Game & Fish Comm., Glacier Nat'l. Park, Montana. pp. 99-101. 1953. Stuart, Russel W. 1947. North Dakota antelope census for 1946. N. Dak. Outdoors, 9:13-14. Taber, Richard D. 1956. Deer nutrition and population dynamics in the North Coast Range of California. Trans. 21st N. Amer. Wildl. Conf., pp. 159-172. Taber, Richard D. and Raymond F. Dasman n , 1957. The dynamics of three natural populations of the deer Odocoileus hemionus columbianus. Ecology, 38(2):233-246. �- 263 Taylor, Walter P. 1936. The prong-horned antelope Proc. N. Amer. Wildl. Conf., pp. 652-655. Terwilliger, Charles S., Jr. Colo. Cons., 2(5):24-25. Thompson, K. 380-381. 1947. 1953. Air-herding in the southwest. Antelope: a range asset. the pronghorn. Am. Forests, on antelope. J. Wildl. Mgmt., Thompson, W. K. 1949. 13 (3) :313-314. Predation Throckmorton, Michael. 14, 23-24. 1945." The pronghorn. Texas Game 53(8):348-349, & Fish, 4(1): Till, C. E. 1956. Antelope management in Colorado: history and technique. Proc. Ann. Conf. Wildl. Assoc. State Game & Fish Comm., 36:153-160. Wild. Rev. 87, 1957. Trotter, R. H. 1959. Aerial census of moose in Ontario. Conf ., 1:233. (WR 91 pp. 67). Trans. NE Wildl. Trueblood, M. S. and George Post. 1959. Vibriosis as a factor in the reproduction of antelope (Antilocapra americana). Jour. Amer. Vet. Med. Assoc., 134(12):562-564. (bio. abs.2l8l5, 1960). Tyson, Edwin L. 1959. A deer drive vs track census. N. Amer. Wildl. Conf., pp. 457-464. Udy, Jay R. 1949. Antelope: & Game Bul., 8(4):1-3. the status of Utah's Trans. 24th antelope. Utah Fish Udy, Jay R. 1954. Effects of predator control on antelope populations. Fed. Aid Div. Utah Dept. Fish & Game, Publ. No.5, 1-48 pp. WR 76:49-50. Wallace, Herbert S. 1940. State-wide Colo. Game & Fish Dept., Antelope reconnaissance, July - August, Surv. Vol. 1. ii + 33 pp. 1939. Wangersky, P. J. and W. J. Cunningham. 1957. Time lag in population models. Cold Spring Symposia on Quantitative BioI., 22:329-338. White, Robert W. 1958. Elk survey systems. Proc. 38th Ann. Conf. W. Assoc. State Game & Fish Comm., 227-230 pp. White, Keith L. 1960. Notes on use of clover one-shot deer marker. J. Wildl. Mgmt., 24(1):102. Wright, Charles W. 1960. Population census of deer in New Jersey in 1959. Proc. NE Sect. Wildi. Soc., Ann. Conf., Providence, R. I. 1961. Wright, Philip L. and Sumner A. Dow, Jr. 1962. Minimum breeding pronghorn antelope. J. Wild1. Mgmt., 26(1):100-101. age in �- 26!~Yanushko, P. A. 1958. Population dynamics of Cervus elaphus Brauner: (Scharlemagne). Zool. Zh., 37(8):1128-1235.(J. Mamm. 40(2)). Yoakum, James D. 1957. Factors affecting the mortality of pronghorn M.S. Thesis, Oregon State Coll. 112 pp. antelope in Oregon. Yoakum, James. 1959. Proceedings of the 1958 annual interstate antelope conference, September 17, 18, 1958, Sheldon National Wildlife Refuge, Nevada. Wildl. Rev. 95:62, May 1959. Yoakum, James. 1959. 1959 Transactions - interstate antelope Yoakum James. 1960. 1960 Tr'ansactions - interstate antelope conference. conference. Yule, G. V. 1925. The growth of population and factors which control it. J. Royal Statis. Soc. 88(pt.1):1-62. Zippin, Calvin. 1956. An evaluation Biometrics, animal populations. Prepared Date by George D. Bear Student Assistant J~a_n_u_a_r~y~,~1~._9_b_5 _ of the removal method of estimating 12(2):163-189. Approved by Richard N. Denney Project Leader Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �- 265 Selected References for Job 14 w-40-R Edgar J. Prenzlow Adams, L. 1951. Confidence limits for the Petersen or Lincoln index used in animal population studies. J. Wildl. Mgmt., 15(1):13-19. 1955. A punch-card bibliography J. Wildl. Mgmt., 19(4):472-476. Aldous, C. M. 1945. 9 (1):145-151. A winter 'study of mule deer in Nevada. Allee, W. C., et a1. 1949. Phila.,-Pa-.-837 pp. Allred, file for vertebrate Principles of animal ecology. ecologists. J. Wildl. Mgmt., W. B. Saunders, W. J. 1943. Wyoming antelope - history and wartime management. Trans. N. Amer. Wildl. Conf., 8:117. Altmann, Margaret 1951. Patterns of herd structures in free-ranging Paper presented at the Phil. meeting of the Am. Soc. of Zool. Abstr. Anat. Record, 3(3):74. 1952. Social behavior of elk, Cervus canadensis nelsoni, the Jackson Hole area of Wyoming. Behavior, 4(2):116-143. 1953. 56(3):66-72. Social graces in elk society. elk. in Animal Kingdom, 1956. Patterns of social behavior in big game of the United States and Europe. Trans. N. Amer. Wildl. Conf., 21:538-545. 1956. Patterns of herd behavior Wyoming. Zoologica, 41(8):65-71. in free-ranging 1958. Social intergration 3(3):155-159. of the moose calf. 1958. The flight distance J. Wildl. Mgmt., 22(2):207-209. in free-ranging elk in Animal Behavior, big game. 1959. Group dynamics in Wyoming moose during season. J. Mammal., 40(3):420-424. the rutting 1960. The role of juvenile elk and moose in the social dynamics of their species. Zoologica, 45(1):35-39. Altmann, S. A. 1959. Field observations J. Mammal., 40(3):317-330. on a howling monkey society. �- 266 Anderson, H. T. Jr. 1932. Game, 18(3):258-259. The pronghorn antelope. 1934. The pronghorn antelope Fish and Game, 20(1):91-92. Anthony, H. E. 1927. 30(4) :83-112. Calif. Div. Fish and in Los Angeles County. Calif. Div. What is an antelope? New York Zool. Soc. Bul., Arrington, O. N. and P. Wells. 1945. Fawn decimation and Fish Dept., P. R. Quart., 5(4):132. study. Arizona Game Banfield, A. W. F. 1951. The barren ground caribou. Resources and Development. 52 pp. Canada Dept. of 1954. Preliminary investigations of the barren ground caribou. Dept. Northern Affairs and Nat',Resources, Wild. Mgmt. Bul., Series I, Nos. 10 A, B. Ottawa, Onto 191 pp. Bartholomew, G. A. 1953. Behavioral factors affecting social structure the Alaska fur seal. Trans. N. Amer. Wildl. Conf., 18:481-500. Beach, F. A. 1945. 79:523-541. behavior Current concepts of play in animals. Amer. Nat., and J. Jaynes. 1954. Effects of early experience upon the of animals. Psychol. Bul., 51:239-263. Bearth, O. A. 1942. Biological significance Game and Fish, Bul. No.1. of mineral licks. Beer, J. 1944. Distribution and status of pronghorn J. Mammal., 25(1):43-46. Bierens de Haan, J. A. 1947. Animal psychology behavior. Behavior, 1(1):71-80. antelope Borror, D. J. 1961. 2(3):17-18. Bray, J. R. 1962. dispersion. Methodology in bio-acoustics. 1957. Observation 38(2):247-253. Brown, C. E. 1936. Rearing wild animals J. Mammal., 17(1):10-13. A. 1954. Play in domestic in Montana. Canad. Bio-Acoustic Use of non-area analytic data to determine Ecol., 43(2):328-333. Browman, L. G. and P. Hudson. mule deer. J. Mammal., Wyoming and the science of animal Blood, D. A. 1963. Some aspects of behavior of bighorn herd. Field Nat., 77(2):77-94. Brownlee, in Bul., species on the behavior of penned in captivity and gestation periods. cattle. Brit. Vet. J., 110:48-68. �- 267 Bryant, H. C. 1915. Present status of pronghorn Fish and Game, 1(2):77. antelope. Buck, P. 1947. The biology of the antelope in Montana. Montana State College, Bozeman. 70 pp. 1947. Range use of pronghorn antelope Trans. N. Amer. Wildl. Conf., 12:185-192. Calif. Div. M. S. Thesis. in western Texas. Buechner, H. K. 1950. Life history, ecology, and range use of the pronghorn antelope in Trans - Pecos, Texas. Amer. Midl. Nat., 43(2):257-354. 1950. Range ecology of the pronghorns on the Wichita Mountains Wildlife Refuge. Trans. N. Amer. Wildl. Conf., 15:627-643. and C. C. Swanson. 1955. Increased natality resulting from lowered population density among elk in southeastern Washington. Trans. N. Amer. Wildl. Conf., 20:560-567. 1961. 698-699. Territorial behavior in Uganda Kob. Science, l33(3454): 1961. Territorial and reproductive behavior in Uganda Kob. Dept. Zoology. Washington State University, Pullman, WaEh. Burt, W. H. 1943. Territoriality and home range concepts as applied mammals. J. Mammal., 24(3):346-352. Cahalane, V. H. 1947. 1947. A deer-coyote Mammals episode. of North America. J. Mammal., MacMillan Calhoun, J. B. 1948. The social aspects of population J. Mammal., 33(2):139-l59. to 28(1):36-39. Co., New York. 622 pp. dynamics. Cary, M. 1911. A biological survey of Colorado. N. Amer. Fauna. No. 33, U. S. Dept. Agric., Bureau Biol. Surv., Washington, D. C. p. 58-60. Castle, M. E., A. S. Foot, and R. J. Halley. 1950. Some observations behavior of dairy cattle with particular reference to grazing. J. Dairy Research, l7(3):2l5-230. Caton, J. D. 1877. The antelope and deer of America. Pub. Co., New York. pp. 17-426. on the Forest and Stream Chattin, J. E. and R. Lassen. 1950. California antelope reproductive potentials. Calif. Dept. Fish and Game, 36(3):328-329. Cheney, E. S. 1929. Pronghorned and Game, 15(2):175. 1930. Camera hunting antelope in California. the pronghorn. Calif. Dept. Fish Amer. Forests, 36(8):487-490. �- 268 Cole, G. F. 1956. The pronghorn antelope - its range use and food habits in central Montana with special reference to alfalfa. Montana State College Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 513. 63 pp . ., and B. T. Wilkins. 1958. The pronghorn antelope _ its range ----use and food habits in central Montana with special reference to wheat. Montana Fish and Game Dept., Technical Bull. No. 2:6-32. Collias, N. E. 1944. Aggressive Physio. Zool., 17:83-123. behavior among vertebrate animals. 1951. Problems and principles of animal sociology. In C. P. Stones Comparative Psychology. Prentice Hall, N. Y. p. 388-422. 1956. The analysis of socialization Eco1., 37(2):228-239. in sheep and goats. Compton, H. O. 1958. The effects of predation on pronghorn antelope numbers in southcentra1 Oregon. M. S. Thesis, Oregon State College, Corvallis. 139 pp. Cook, A. H. 1943. A technique for marking mammals. Couey, F. M. Mgmt., 1946. Antelope 10(4):367. J. Mammal., foods in southeastern Montana. Craighead, J. J., and D. S. Stockstad. J. Wi1d1. Mgmt., 24(4):435-438. 1960. 24(1):45-47. J. Wi1d1. Color marker for big game. Crawford, H. 1957. A study of some factors in the fawning complex of the white-tailed deer. M. S. Thesis, Univ. of Michigan. 67 pp. Darling, F. F. 1937. 1952. A herd of red deer. Oxford Univ. Press, London. 215 pp. Social behavior and survival. Dasmann, R. F., and R. D. Taber. 1956. deer with reference to population Auk, 69(2):183-191. Behavior of Columbian black-tailed ecology. J. Mammal., 37(2):143-164. " and A. S. Massman. 1962. Population studies of impala in ----southern Rhodesia. J. Mammal., 43(3):375-395. Rhodesia. 1962. J. Mammal., Reproduction in some ungulates 43(4) :533-537. in southern Delap, P. 1957. Some notes on the special habits of the British deer. Proc. Zool. Soc. of London, 128(4):608-612. DeLury, R. E. 1930. Sunspots and living things. Con f ., 17: 211- 212 . Deming, O. V. 1959. Climate, range, and antelope. Antelope Conf., pp. 37-64. Trans. N. Amer. Wildl. Trans. Interstate �- 269 Deming, O. V. 1960. pp. 131-136. Antelope cycles. Trans. Interstate Antelope Denniston II, R. H. 1956. Ecology, behavior, and population Wyoming or Rocky Mountain moose, Alces alces shirasi. 41(14):105-118. de Vos, A. 1956. 21:510-525. Suwner studies of moose. 1958. Summer observations 39 (1) :128-139. Con f ,, dynamics in the Zoologica, Trans. N. Amer. Wi1dl. Conf., on moose in Ontario. J. Mammal., 1960. Behavior of barren-ground caribou on their calving grounds. J. Wildl. Mgmt., 24(3):250-258. Dice, L. R. 1931a. The relation of mammalian types. Sci. Monthly, 33:312-317. 1931b. Methods of indicating J. Mammal., 12(4):376. distribution the abundance to vegetative of mammals. Dinges, W. R. 1958. Techniques in marking pronghorn antelope for field identification. M. S. Thesis .. Oregon State College, Corvallis. 139 pp. Dirsch1, H. J. 1961. Antelope population trend survey in Saskatchewan, July, 1961. Saskatchewan Dept. Nat. Resources. 9 pp. mimeo. 1963. Food habits of the pronghorn J. Wildl. Mgmt., 27(1):81-92. Dodds, D. G. moose. 1958. Observations of pre-rutting J. Mammal., 39(3):412-416. in Saskatchewan. behavior Dow, S. A. Jr., and P. L. Wright. 1962. Changes associated with age in pronghorn antelope. Edwards, R. Y. 1954. Fire and the decline J. Wi1d1. Mgmt., 18(4):521-526 • ., and R. W. Ritchey. 1956. ----J. Mammal., 37(4):486-494. Egerton, Penelope. n.d. Eib1-Eibesfelt, I. 1961. 205(6):112-122. in mandibular dentition J. Wildl. Mgmt., 26(1):1-18. of a mountain The migration Bison behavior. in Newfoundland caribou herd. of a moose herd. Amer. Zool., 2(3):400. The fighting behavior of animals. Einarsen, A. S. 1938. Life history and management Trans. N. Amer. Wildl. Conf., 3:381-387. Sci. Amer., of antelope 1948. The pronghorn antelope and its management. Co. and Wi1dl. Mgmt. Inst. 256 pp. in Oregon. The Stackpole �- 270 - Eustis, G. P. 1961. Some behavioral 33 pp. typewritten. Fashingbauer, deer. Ferrel, B. A. 1962. Expanding plastic J. Wild 1. Mgmt., 26 (2) :211-213. collar and aluminum collar for C. M., and H. R. Leach. 1950. Food habits of the pronghorn of California. Calif. Dept. Fish and Game, 36(1):21-26. reference Fisher, aspects of bighorn sheep. antelope 1952. The pronghorn antelope of California with special to food habits. Calif. Dept. Fish and Game, 38(3):285-293. C. O. 1929. The antelope Game, 15(4):349-350. of Lassen County. Calif. Dept. Fish and Flook, D. R. 1959. Moose using water as refuge from flies. J. Mammal., 40(3):455. Folker, R. V. 1956. A preliminary study of an antelope herd in Owyhee 102 pp. County, Idaho. M. S. rhesis. Univ. of Idaho, Moscow. Ford, C. S., and F. A. Beach. 1951. Harper, New York. 307 pp. Patterns of sexual behavior. Foree, W. W. 1962. Nevada antelope studies,Progress Trans. Interstate Antelope Conf., p. 33. Report. 1940. The orientation Fraenkel, G. S., and D. L. Gunn. 318 pp. Clarendon Press, Oxford. of animals. Fuller, J. L., and J. P. Scott. 1954. Heredity and learning ability infrahuman mammals. Eugenics Quart., 1(1):28-43. in Fuller, W. A. 1960. Behavior and social organization of the wild bison of Wood Buffalo National Park, Canada. Artic, 13(1): 3-19. Geist, V. 1960. Feral goats in British Columbia. Murrelet, 41(3):1-6. 1963. On the behavior of the North American moose in British Columbia. Behavior, 20: 377 -416. Gilbert, C. S., and J. W. Hamilton. 1963. livers. J. Animal Sci., 22(3):858 Copper and molybdenum in antelope 0 Golley, F. B. 1957. Gestation period, breeding, and fawning behavior of Columbian black-tailed deer. J. Mammal., 38(1):116-120. Gregg, P. A. 1955. Summer habits of Wyoming antelope. Ph.D. Thesis. Cornell Univ., Ithaca, N. Y. Dissertation abst., 15(12):2374. Griffith, C. 1962. 29(4) :22-25. Where do the deer and antelope play? So. Dak. Cons., Griffith, G. K. 1962. Guide lines for antelope management. Antelope Conf., p. 102-114. Trans. Interstate �- 271 Grinnell, G. B. 1929. Hall, C. S. 1941. 38:909-943. Pronghorn Temperament: antelope. J. Mammal., 10(2):135-141. a survey of animal studies. Psychol. Bull., Halloran, A. F. 1956. Wichita antelope on comeback trail, Oklahoma. Game and Fish News, 12(2):6-7. 1957. A note on the Sonoran pronghorn. J. Mammal., Hamilton, R. 1962. An expansible collar for male white-tailed J. Wildl. Mgmt., 26(1):114-115. 38(3):423. deer. Hansen, E. L. 1955. Survival of the pronghorn antelope in southcentral Oregon during 1953 and 1954. M. S. Thesis. Oregon State College, Corvallis. 112 pp. Harper, J. A. 1962. Daytime feeding habits of Roosevelt elk on Boyes Prairie, California. J. Wildl: Mgmt., 26(1):97-100. Hatt, R. T. 1937. Call of the white-tail fawn. J. Mammal., 18(1):105. Haugen, A. 0., and D. W. Speake. 1957a. Parturition and early reactions white-tail deer fawns. J. Mammal., 38(3):420-421. Hayne, D. W. 1949. Heape, W. 1931. Cambridge. Calculation Emigration, 369 pp. of size of home range. migration, and nomadism. J. Mammal., 1958. Imprinting 1959. Imprinting. in animals. Sci. Amer., 30(1):1-18. W. Heffer and Son Ltd., Heath, R. G. 1961. A theoretical analysis of an audio-index. Cons. Game Div. Rept. 2273. 38 pp. Hess, E. H. of Mich. Dept. 198(3):81-90. Science, 130:133-141. Hinman, R. A. 1959. Problems in antelope management in Utah. Proc. Ann. Conf. W. Assoc. State Game and Fish Comm. 39 pp. (In Press). Holst, E., and V. von Saint Paul. Sci. Amer., 206(3):50-59. 1962. Electrically controlled behavior. Honess, R. F., and N. M. Frost. 1942. A Wyoming bighorn sheep study. wyo. Fish and Game Dept. Bull. No.1. 127 pp. Howell, A. B. 1944. Speed in animals. Univ. Chicago Press, Chicago. 270 pp. Hunter, G. N. 1944. Air census technique and trend studies in relation to big game. Proc. Ann. Conf. W. Assoc. State Game and Fish Comm., 24:37-47. 1945. conditions. Methods of determining trends in big game numbers and range Trans. N. Amer. Wildl. Conf., 10:234-241. �- 272 - Johnson, D. E. 1951. The biology of the elk calf, Cervus canadensis J. Wildl. Mgmt., 15(4):396-410. Jones, p. V. Jr. 1947. Experimental management of antelope. Fish and Oyster Comm. p. R. Quart., 7(4):264. 1949. Experimental management of antelope. and Oyster Comm. p. R. Quart., 9(1):89. nelsoni. Texas Game, Texas Game, Fish Kaufman, J. H., and A. Kaufman. 1963. Some comments on the relationship between field and laboratory studies of behavior with special reference to coatis. Animal Behavior, 11(4):464-470. Kavanau, J. L. mammals. 1962. Precise monitoring of drinking behavior J. Mammal., 43(3):345-351. 1962. Automatic multi-channel behavior. Ecol., 43(1):138-139. Kel1og, sensing and recording p. p. 1961. Problems of storing natural Acoustic Bull., 1(1):1-4. Kendeigh, C. S. 1961. Animal ecology. Hills, N. J. 468 PP. King, J. J. 1959. 128-140. Klopfer, p. H. Social behavior 1959. Imprinting. 1962. Behavioral Englewood Hills, N. J. Prentice-Hall Science, of animal sounds on tape. of prairie dogs. Bio- Inc., Engelwood Sci. Amer., 20(4): Prentice-Hall Inc., 130:730. aspects of ecology. 173 pp. Knipe, T. 1942. Summer of 1942 antelope Game and Fish Dept. p. R. Quart., in small survey in northern Arizona. 3(3):111-112. Arizona 1944. The status of the antelope herds of northern Arizona. p. R. Quart.; 40 pp. Knowlton, F. F. 1960. Food habits, movements, and populations of moose in the Gravelly Mountains, Montana. J. Wild1. Mgmt., 24(2):162-170. Koford, C. B. 1957. The vicuna and the puna. Ecol. Monogr., 27(2):153-219. Kolenosky, G. B., and R. S. Miller. 1962. Growth of the lens of the pronghorn antelope. J. Wildl. Mgmt., 26(1):112-113. Lauckhart, J. B. 1962. Wildlife Wildl. Conf., 27:233-242. population fundamentals. Lehti, R. W. 1947. The golden eagle attacking 11(4):348-349. Leopold, A. 1933. 481 pp. Game management. antelope. Charles Scribner's Trans. N. Amer. J. Wildl. Mgmt., Sons. New York. �- 273 - Leopold, A. S., T. Riney, R. McCain, and L. Tevis Jr. 1951. The Jawbone deer herd. Calif. Dept. Fish and Game. Game Bull. No.4. 139 pp. Levine, S., and G. W. Lewis. 1959. Critical period for effects of infantile experience on maturation of stress response. Science, 129:42-43. Linsdale, J. M. 1938. Environmental responses of vertebrates Basin. Amer. Mid. Nat., 19(1):1-206, il1us . ., and P. Q. Tomich. 1953. ----..",Press, Berkeley. 567 pp. Lydekker, R. 1896. A geographical Cambridge. p. 367-368. A herd of mule deer. history of mammals. in the Great Univ. of Calif. The Univ. Press, McAtee, W. L. 1932. Effectiveness in nature of the so-called protective adaptations in the animal kingdom, etc. Smithsonian lnst. Pub. 3125, Washington, D. C. March 15, 1932. McHugh, T. 1958. 43(1):1-40. Social behavior of the American McLean, D. D. 1944. The pronghorned Fish and Game, 30(4):221-241. antelope buffalo. Zoologica, in California. Calif. Dept. McMillan, J. F. 1954. Some observations. on moose in Yellowstone Amer. Mid. Nat., 52(2):392-399. Mack, R. W. 1954. 25 pp. Oregon's pronghorn Marker, Characteristics P. 1955. antelope. Park. Oregon State Game Comm., of some animal calls. Nature, 176(4470):6-8. Marsden, H. M., and C. H. Conaway. 1963. Behavior and the reproduction cycle in the cottontail. J. Wi1d1. Mgmt., 27(2):161-170. Mason, E. 1952. Food habits and measurements J. Wi1dl. Mgmt., 16(3):387-389. Montagu, A. 1950. Social instincts. ScL of Hart Mountain antelope. Amer., 182(4) :54-56. Montgomery, G. G. 1963. Nocturnal movements and activity rhythms of whitetailed deer. J. Wildl. Mgmt., 27(3):422-427. Morrison, D. I. 1952. A deer behavior study with particular the prefawning period on the George Reserve, Michigan. Univ. of Michigan, Ann Arbor. 76 pp. reference to M. F. Thesis. Murie, A. 1944. The wolves of Mount McKinley. Nat. Park Servo Fauna Series No.5. U. S. Gov't. Printing Off., Washington, D. C. 238 pp. Murie, O. J. 1951. The elk of North America. Mgmt. lnst. 376 pp. Nalbandov, A. V. 1958. Reproductive San Francisco. 271 pp. The Stackpole Co. and Wild1. physiology. W. H. Freeman and Co., �- 274 Nelson, E. W. 1925. Status of the pronghorn U.S.D.A. Bull. No. 1346:1-64. Nice, M. M. 1941. 26:441-487. The role of territory in bird life. Nichols, L. Jr. 1960. Island, Hawaii. 1922 _ 1924. Amer. Mid. Nat., The history of the antelope introduction on Lanai Trans. Interstate Antelope Conf., p. 101-104. 1962. Big game management Conf., 27:4l3~423. Neilson, A. E. Antelope antelope, in Hawaii. Trans. N. Amer. Wildl. 1962. Brief history of antelope in Idaho. Conf., p. 64-70. Trans. Interstate Parry, C. F. 1937. The pronghorn antelope in Utah. Utah State Agric. College, Logan. 29 pp. B. S. Thesis. Peck, J. M. 1962. Studies of moose in the Gravelly Montana. J. Wildl. Mgmt., 26(4):360-365. and Snowcrest Mountains, Peterson, R. L. Toronto. 1955. North American moose. 280 pp. Pogue, R. Wildlife 1953. Pollack, E. M. 1951. 32(3):356-358. and the weather. Observations Mo. Wildl., 15(2):4-5, 8. on New England bobcats. Popowski, B. 1959. Hunting pronghorn Harrisburg, Pa. 225 pp. Portmann, A. 1961. 249 pp. Univ. of Toronto Press, antelope. Animals as social beings. J. Mammal., The Stackpole Co., The Viking Press, N. Y. Pruitt, W. O. 1960. Behavior of the barre~ ground caribou. of the Univ. of Alaska. No.3. 44 pp. BioI. papers Queal, L. M. 1962. Behavior of white-tailed deer and factors affecting social organization of the species. M. S. Thesis. Univ. of Michigan Ann Arbor. 140 pp. Richter, C. P. 1947. 40:129-l34. Biology of drives. J. Compo and Physiol. Psychol., Richter, W. C. 1955. A technique for night identification J. Wild1. Mgmt., 19(1):159-160. of animals. Riess, B. F. 1956. The behavior and social relations of the gibbon, Hylobates lar, observed under restricted free-range conditions. Zoologica,~(12):89-99. Rouse, C. H. 1941. Notes on winter foraging habits of antelope Oklahoma. J. Mammal., 22(1):57-60. in �- 275 Rouse, C. H. 1962. Antelope Conf., p. 45-47. and sheep fences. 1934. The behavior of animals. 184 pp. London. Ru sse 1, E . S. Russel, P. 1951. Trans. Iriterstate Antelope Edward Arnold and Co., Crisis of antelope management. Wyo. Wildl., Saunders, J. K. Jr. 1963. Movements and activities land. J. Wildl.' Mgmt., 27(3):390-400. 15(6):4-9. of the lynx in Newfound- Scarvie, 0., and J. Amey. 1957. Food habits of pronghorn antelope, Antilocapra americana, in October, in northern Colorado. Colo. State Univ., Ft. Collins. 9 pp. typewritten. Schaller, G. B. 1962. The ecology and behavior of the mountain gorilla. Ph.D. Thesis. Univ. of Wisc., Madison. 761 pp. Dissertation abst., 23(3)WR108:47. Schneirla, T. C. 1950. The relationship between observation and experimentation in the field study of behavior. In Methodology and techniques for the study of animal societies. Ann. ~ Y. Acad , Sci., 51 (6):1022-1042. Scott, J. P. 1942. Social organization Rec., 84:480-481. (abst.). and leadership among sheep. 1945. Social behavior, organization and leadership of domestic sheep. Compo Psychol. Monogr., 18(4):1-29. 1946. 94:380-390. Dominance reactions Anat. in a small flock in a small flock of goats. Anat. Rec., 1950. The social behavior of dogs and wolves. In Methodology and techniques for the study of animal societies. Ann-.-N.Y. Acad. Sci., 5(6):1009-l02l. (ed.), 1950. Methodology and techniques for the study of animal societies. Ann. N.Y. Acad. Sci., 51(6):1001-1122. . 1956. The analysis of social organization in animals. ----Ecol., 37(2):2l~-220. 1958. Animal behavior. 1962. Critical periods l38(3544):945-958. Shaw, W. M. 1962. Idaho antelope Antelope Conf. p. 23-29. Univ. of Chicago Press, Chicago. in behavioral investigation. development. 281 pp. Science, Trans. Interstate Shelford, V. E. 1937. Animal communities in temperate North America. Univ. of Chicago Press, Chicago. 368 pp. 1954. 35(4):533. Antelope populations and solar radiation. J. Manwal., �- 276 - Shillinger, J. E. 1937. Relationship of domestic Trans. N. Amer. Wildl. Conf., 2:298-302. Skinner, M. P. 1922. The pronghorn. stock and wildlife. J. Marrunal.,3(2):82-105. Southern, H. N., J. S. Watson, and D. Chitty. 1946. Watching nocturnal animals by infra-red radiation. J. Animal Ecol., 15(2):198-202. Illus. Sowls, L. K. and P. S. Minnarmon. 1963. Glass beads for marking home ranges of mamma Ls , J. Wildl. Mgmt., 27(2):299-302. Spencer, C. C. 1943. Notes on the life history of the Rocky Mountain bighorn sheep in the Tarryall Mountains of Colorado. J. Marrunal.,24(11):1-11. Springer, L. M. 1950. Aerial census of interstate antelope herds of California, Idaho, Nevada, and Oregon. J. Wildl. Mgmt., 14(3):295-298. Stewart, J. C., and J. P. Scott. 1947. Lack of correlation between leadership and dominance relationships in a herd·of goats. J. Compo and Physiol. Psychol., 40:255-264. Stokes, J. D. 1952. Antelope management in California. W. Assoc. State Game and Fish COlnm., 32:99-101. Proc. Ann. Conf. Talbot, L. M., and Martha H. Talbot. 1961. Preliminary observations population dynamics of the wildebeest Narok District, Kenya. E. Afr. Agric. For. J., 27(2):108-116. Wildl. Monogr. 1963. The wildebeest September. 88 pp. in western Masailand, Taylor, W. P. 1956. The deer of North America. Wildl. Mgmt. Inst. pp. 668. Thompson, W. K. 1949. Predation on antelope. The Stackpole East Africa. Co. and J. Wildl. Mgmt., 13(3):313-314. Thorpe, W. H. 1951. The definition of terms used in animal behavior Bull. Animal Behavior, 9:34-40. ----.,.....-,- " and O. L. Zangwill. (eds.). behavior. Univ. Press, Cambridge, Throckmorton, M. 1948. The pronghorn. on the 1961. Current problems London. studies. in animal Texas Game and Fish, 4(1):14, 23-24. Tinbergen, N. 1952. Derived activities: their causation, biological significance, origin, and emancipation during evolution. Quart. Rev. Biol., 27 (1): 1-32. 1953. 150 pp. Social behavior of animals. Methuen and Co. Ltd., London. 1959. Social behavior New York. 150 pp. in animals. John Wiley and Sons, Inc., �- 277 Togner, H. 1951. The roe deer. The Batchworth Press, London. Trainer, D. o. 1962. The rearing of white-tailed J. Wildl. Mgmt., 26(3):340-341. Troyer, W. A. 1960. 24(1):15-21. Roosevelt elk on Afognak 176 pp. deer fawns in captivity. Island. J. Wildl. Mgmt., Udy, J. R. 1953. Effects of predator control on antelope populations. Utah Dept. Game and Fish. Publ. No.5. 48 pp. Verme, L. J. 1962. An automa~ic 26(4):387-392. Warren, E. R. 1910. 300 pp. tagging device for deer. The mammals of Colorado. J. Wildl. Mgmt., G. P. Putman's Sons, New York. Watson, G. W., and R. F. Scott. 1956. Aerial censusing of the Nelchina caribou herd. Trans. N. Amer. Wildl.Conf., 21:499-510. Webb, W. L. 1950. 14(1):83. A method for filing field observations. Wood, W. F. Jr. 1961. Illumination Ecol., 42(4):821-822. J. Wildl. Mgmt., control for twilight studies. Wright, P. L., and S. A. Dow, Jr. 1962. Minimum breeding antelope. J. Wildl. Mgmt., 26(1):100-101. age in pronghorn Yoakum, J. D. 1957. Factors affecting the mortality of pronghorn in Oregon. M. S. Thesis, Oregon State College, Corvallis. needs. 1962. The Interstate Antelope Range, its research Trans. Interstate Antelope Conf. p. 52-58. antelope 112 pp. and management ��Januar';y', 1965 - 279 JOB COMPLETION RESEARCH PROJECT REPORT SEGMENT State of COLORADO ----~~~~~--------- Project No. ~W_-~4~O_-~R~-~5_ Job No. 11 --------~~-------- Period Covered: April Antelope Investigations Sex and Age Composition 1, 1963 through March of the Herd 31, 1964 ABSTRACT Antelope study areas were lo'cated in the shortgrass pral.rl.eregion in Larimer County and in the shrubby v~getative type in Moffat County, Colorado . .Techniques used for determining deer and elk populations from pre-season counts, post-season counts, and hunter harvest figures appear to be inadequate for estimating antelope populations. The known wounding loss on the Moffat County study area was 15 percent of the total number of permits issued for the area. No crippled or dead antelope were observed on the Larimer County area following the hunting season. The antelope herds on the study areas appear to be stable. The mean age for antelope brought through the 1963 Antelope Check Stations was approximately 2.5 years old. There was a relatively high correlation between the age of a buck antelope and its horn length; also between age and eye lens weight for both bucks and does. These relationships were much stronger for the younger age classes. Objectives: 1. 2. 3. To obtain sex and age counts for at least two major herds in the State. Evaluate and interpret data obtained in this appraisal, including natural losses and hunting mortality. Infer potential herd production in the light of findings in Objectives 1 and 2. Recommendations: 1. 2. 3. 4. Sound recommendations pertaining to management techniques cannot be made at this stage of the study. To continue studying the antelope herds to determine the overall productivity of the herds and attempt to find a technique for estimating population sizes. To continue investigating aging techniques in an effort to find suitable methods for determining the age of antelope. Mark as many fawns as possible so as to have known-aged animals, which will aid in the investigation of aging techniques. �- 280 Procedure: Population Estimates. -- Young-to-adult ratios were obtained from aerial and ground counts conducted in the study areas during August, when the fawns were running with the does, but the fawns were still noticeably smaller than adult animals. Sex ratio counts were taken during census work at other times of the year. Age distribution was plotted and potential growth predicted for each herd from ag~ng data and population counts. Hunter Harvest Surveys. -- Check stations were established near each of the two study areas during the antelope huriting season to facilitate collection of information. The eyes and lower jaw were collected from each animal as aids in age classi~ication. Tooth eruption and wear in the lower jaw was used to determine the age of the animal. Sex and the location of kills were recorded. Hunting information (wounded antelope observed, abandoned antelope observed, number of hours hunted, and the number of animals observed) was recorded for each hunter checked. Eyes were tagged and preserved in b~ffered formalin until the lenses could be removed, dried, weighed, and compared to the age of the antelope. Kolenosky and Miller's (1962) techniques for drying antelope eye lens were followed. The lenses were dried at 600C for 72 hours. Results: Study areas were established in Larimer and Moffat counties where major antelope concentrations exist in two different vegetative types. The Larimer County study area is located north of Fort Collins, adjacent to the Colorado-Wyoming state line. The area is approximately 88 square miles in size. The terrain is gently rolling and the vegetation primarily blue grama, buffalo grass, and other vegetation typical of shortgrass prairie regions. Shrubs such as four-wing saltbrush and winter fat are common only in the bottom lands in the southern portion of the study area. The Moffat County study area is in the sandhills area immediately south of Maybell. It consists of a single pasture approximately 30 square miles in size, which is enclosed by sheep-tight fencing. The area has a rolling terrain. Shrubs such as bitterbrush, sagebrush, and rabbitbrush are the dominant vegetative species on the area; bitterbrush is the most important of the three shrubs listed. Cheatgrass is the most abundant understory vegetation. The antelope on this study area are confined within the area by the sheep-fences; whereas on the Larimer County study area there appears to be a limited amount of movement between the study area and adjacent areas. Population Estimates. -- Estimate of the population on the study areas was made by using Kelker's (1945) method. The following information was used: �- 281 - BHS Bucks: Does, Fawns,:: 'I'o't a l ~ Ddles/Buck Bucks/Doe Fawns/Doe NOTE: Moffat County Kill 106 273 213 592 2.6 0.4 0.8 49 181 13 243 AHS BHS --- 68 145 104 317 2.1 0.5 0.7 Larimer County Kill 60 120 96 276 2.0 0.5 0.80 49 18 7 74 BHS - Aerial count before hunting season AHS - Aerial count after hunting season Kelker's symbols and formulas: B - Number of bucks after hunting season D - Number of does after hunting season F - Number of fawns after hunting season B+KB Number of bucks before hunting season db (B+KB) - Number of does after hunting season daB - Number of does before hunting season db - Number of does per buck before hunting season da - Number of does per buck after hunting season bb - Number of bucks per doe before hunting season ba - Number of bucks per doe after hunting season Fb - Number of fawns per doe before hunting season Fa - Number of fawns per doe after hunting season - Number of bucks killed ~ Ku - Number of does killed KF - Number of fawns killed Moffat County db KB - Ku B D da - db B (2.6) (49) 2.1 - 2.6 B 108 - 181 D (0.4) (181) - 49 0.5 - 0.4 D 230 fb KF - Ku F f a - fb F ~0.8) ~l32 - 181 0.7 - 0.8 F 1,710 Bucks 108 Does 230 Fawns 1 710 Total 2,048 AHS --40 63 52 155 1.6 0.6 0.83 �- ~~82- B _ (0.2) (L~9) - 18 - 1T=--T.CJ--- D (0.5) (18) 0.6 - 0.5 -400 B -200 D F (0.8) (0.7) - 18 0.83 - 0.80 Population F -40 - 49 Bucks -200 Does -400 Fawns - 40 --- Total -640 Dr. Lee Eberhardt outlined a formula for estimating animal populations in a lecture he presented at the Western Association of State Game and Fish Commissioners, Elk Committee, at Meeker, Colorado, on January 29, 1963. The formula applied to the antelope study areas is as follows: Moffat County Percent buck kill was of the total legal kill Buck kill Does/buck before hunting season Fawns/doe before hunting season buck kill (Percent buck kill) (buck population) (0.20) (Buck population) = 49 Buck population = 245 (Does/buck) (buck population) (2.6) (245) = 637 number of does (Fawns/doe) (doe popu~:::.ti()"~' (0.8) (637) = 518 Population Kill -49 AHS -- Bucks BHS 2{:5 Does 637 181 456 Fawns 505 l3 ~-,-------. 518 --~-.-.---.--"------.- TOTAL 1,400 243 196 1,157 20% 49 2.6 0.8 �,.; 283 Larimer County Percent buck kill was of the total legal kill Buck kill Does/buck before hunting season Fawns/doe before hunting season (Percent buck kill) (buck population) (0.66) (buck population) = 49 Buck population = 74 66% 49 2.0 0.8 buck kill (Does/buck) (buck population) (2.0) (74) = 148 number of does (Fawns/doe) (doe population) (0.80) (148) = 118 number of fawns POEulation BHS 74 Kill Bucks ""49 AHS 25 Does 148 18 130 Fawns 118 7 111 340 74 266 TOTAL The wounding loss on the Moffat County study area was 36 antelope or 15 percent of the number of antelope permits issued for the area. Many of the dead antelope were located from an airplane. The dead antelope were more easily seen during mid-day than during early morning or late afternoon. No dead or crippled antelope were found on the Larimer County study area following the hunting season. Natural mortality appeared to be negligible on either area. Golden eagles were very abundant on both areas, but the buffer species, rabbits, were also common and were one of the major food items for the eagles. Coyotes were common only on the Larimer County area. One antelope, a yearling doe, was apparently killed by a coyote on the Moffat County area during July. One doe-fawn on the Larimer County area was observed to have deep wounds on her back during February. The wounds may have been caused by an eagle. She appeared to be in good health a few days later and apparently recovered. Antelope brought through the check stations were apparently free from parasites. Autopsy of three antelope found on the Moffat County area revealed only a few round worms in the small intestine of a buck. Autopsy of two doe antelope, which died during trapping operations on the Larimer County study area, revealed a tapeworm cyst in the muscles of the hind leg of one animal. Hunter Harvest Surveys. The sex ratio of the antelope kill, as determined by the hunter report card returns and check station data are listed in Table 1. �- 284 Table 1. -- SEX RATIO OF THE 1963 ANTELOPE KILL ON THE ANTELOPE STUDY AREAS, BASED UPON HUNTER REPORT CARDS AND CHECK STATION DATA* Bucks Number Unit % Does Number % 44 32 23 58 114 14 60 26 49 62 20 71 181 18 75 21 Fawns Number % Total 31 9 16 16 189 13 5 7 8 243 87 Check Station 2A 5 55 Report Cards 2A 5 * There were 250 permits issued for Unit 2A (200 doe, 50 buck) and 130 either-sex permits for Unit 5. The total 1963 antelope kill in the study area was 243 for Unit 2A, and ·87 for Unit 5. These figures are based on the hunter report card returns. Of the total antelope killed on Unit 2A, 76 percent were aged by research personnel at the check station; and 57 percent of the antelope killed on Unit 5 were aged at the check stations. Table 2 shows the distribution of the age classes of the antelope killed. There was a large percentage of yearling animals in the kill from Unit 2A; and 96.7 percent of the animals were less than five years old. There was a large percentage of yearling and two-year old animals in the kill from Unit 5; and 92 percent of the animals were less than five years of age. The mean age for the antelope checked from Unit 2A and Unit 5 were 2.3 years old and 2.5 years old, respectively. There was not a significant difference in the mean ages due to sex. Most of the antelope harvested were shot the first day of the hunting season (Table 3). Percentage of the harvest made on the first day was: Unit 2A, 96 percent; Unit 4, 83 percent; and Unit 5, 64 percent. Hunter success ratios for these management units were: 97.2 percent, 81.4 percent, and 66.9 percent, respectively. There was heavy ground fog and rain in the latter two areas during the first day of the season. The number of wounded and abandoned antelope observed by hunters was very high in Unit 2A, whereas such observations were negligible in Units 4 and 5. Horn length was recorded for buck antelope checked through the check stations. There was not a significant difference (95 percent level) between the length of the left and right horn of the bucks. A correlation coefficient value (r) was computed for comparing age to horn length on bucks. Age was determined by using the tooth eruption an~ wear technique. Correlation coefficients computed were: Unit 2A, 0.75; Unit 4, 0.80; and Unit 5, 0.85. There was little overlap in the ranges for the horn length of antelope 2~ years old and younger, but there was less difference between the mean horn lengths, and more overlap in the ranges, among the older age classes (Table 4). The eye lens from a single antelope were invariably but neither the left or right lens was consistently different in weight, the heavier lens. �- 285 Table 2. -- AGE AND SEX OF THE ANTELOPE CHECKED THROUGH THE CHECK STATIONS . '! Age Class (Years) Unit 2A Fawn 1 . Bucks Number 3 4 5+ 5 16 12 8 6 2 Total Mean Age 49 2.5 2 Unit 4 Fawn 1 2 3 4 5+ Total Mean Age 3 9 5 5 4 1 % 10.2 32.7 24.5 16.3 12.2 . 4.1 Does Number 26 54 13 18 20 4 % 19.3 40.0 9.6 l3.3 14.8 3.0 135 2.3 11.1 - 33.3 18.5 18.5 14.9 3.7 27 2.5 2 3 1 1 0 3 Total Number 31 70 25 26 26 6 % 16.9 38.0 13.6 14.1 14.1 3.3 184 2.3 20.0 30.0 10.0 10.0 30.0 10 2.8 5 12 6 6 4 4 13.5 32.5 16.2 16.2 10.8 10.8 37 2.7 Unit 5 Fawn 1 2 3 4 5+ 6 11 9 1 6 3 Total Mean Age 36 2.5 16.7 30.5 25.0 2.8 16.7 8.3 3 4 3 1 2 1 14 2.4 21.4 28.6 21.4 7.1 14.4 7.1 9 15 12 2 8 4 50 2.5 18.0 30.0 24.0 4.0 16.0 8.0 �- 286 Table 3. -- MISCELLANEOUS HUNTER INFORMATION CHECK STATIONS COLLECTED AT THE ANTELOPE 2A Unit 4 47 42 2 4 24 15 135 15 11 5 8 5 182 7 57 12 35 20 Buck Hunters Number of hunters checked Antelope observed/hunter Hours hunted/hunter Antelope observed/hunter/hour Bucks observed/100 does 49 92 1.3 71 25 64 48 1.8 27 18 67 12 4.7 3 25 Doe Hunters Number of hunters checked Antelope observed/hunter Hours hunted/hunter Antelope observed/hunter/hour Bucks observed/100 does 140 104 2.0 52 31 50 16 2.6 6 22 26 19 4.5 4 19 Buck and Doe Hunters Number of hunters Antelope observed/hunter Hours hunted/hunter Antelope observed/hunter/hour Bucks observed/100 does Wounded antelope observed* Abandoned antelope observed* 189 30 1.6 63 29 68 54 114 34. 2.2 16 19 3 93 14 4.6 3 22 2 3 Category 5 Kill Bucks First day Second day Does First day Second day Both Sexes First day Second day .Hunter Observations * May include duplications. �-287 Table 4. -- RELATIONSHIP ANTELOPE Age Class (Years) k2 llz 2lz 3~ 4lz 5lz+ BETWEEN Number in Sample THE HORN LENGTH AND AGE FOR 103 BUCK Mean Horn Length (Inches) 1.9 7.8 11.8 13.4 13.9 13.3 10 33 25 17 13 5 There was not a significant two lenses. difference (95 percent Range (Inches) 1.0 7.5 9.5 10.0 12.0 11.0 level) between - 2.5 - 12.0 - 13.0 - 14.5 - 15.5 - 15.5 the The correlation coefficient (r) for comparing the age of the animal to the eye lens weight for III antelope was 0.835 after 72 hours of drying and 0.842 after 182 hours of drying. Twenty lenses were dried longer than 72 hours to determine the amount of weight which would be lost under additional drying. The lenses continued to lose weight, but it was less than one percent of the weight of the lens after 96 hours (Table 6). Mean weights of antelope eye lenses for the respective age classes are shown in Table 5. The mean weights of the lenses increased with the age of the animal, except between the 3lz year old and 4lz year old class. The mean weight increase was very rapid up to the 3lz year old class, then growth slowed down. The ranges of each age class overlap considerably; this was most pronounced in the higher age classes. Table 5. Age Class (Years) k2 llz 2lz 3lz 4lz 5lz 5lz+ -- RELATIONSHIP OF EYE LENS WEIGHT AND AGE FOR III ANTELOPE Number in Sample Mean Lens Weight (mg) 21 36 22 9 14 5 4 344.6 566.2 663.7 762.7 761.4 790.5 792.9 Range (mg) 326.0 496.8 572.5 700.0 611.5 754.5 695.6 - 358.8 - 658.2 - 745.0 - 837.9 - 898.2 - 818.9 - 935.1 �Table 6. -- WEIGHT OF ANTELOPE EYE LENSES WHEN DRIED AT 60 DEGREES CENTIGRADE Weight Lost 120 Hours Lens Wei~ht (mg) Weight 144 Hours Lost Number 72 Hours 96 Hours 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Total 594.9 597.2 561.3 516.9 327.2 327.8 582.8 586.0 611. 9 694.4 625.0 573.6 758.7 360.8 676.8 590.6 577,7 517.5 509.2 614.6 11204.9 6.4 588.5 12.1 585.1 7.6 553.7 4.5 512.4 323.5· 3.7 2.4 325.4 8.7 574.1 8.8 577 .2 1.7 610.2 10.9 683.5 10.7 614.3 571. 2 2.4 8.1 750.6 3.7 357.1 10.3 666.5 1.7 588.9 10.0 567.7 1.7 515.8 1.8 507.4 4.1 610.5 121.3 11083,6 579.3 576.9 547.3 510.5 320.3 321.9 561.9 567.5 610.0 674.9 605.5 570.1 745.7 353.6 658.4 588.8 558.8 515.8 506.8 608.2 10982.2 9.2 8.2 6.4 1.9 3.2 3,5 12.2 9.7 0.2 8.6 8,8 1.1 4.9 3.5 8,1 0.1 8,9 0.0 0.6 2,3 101.4 573.3 572.2 543.5 509.2 318.4 319.3 551.7 559.3 609.6 670.3 600.3 569.3 742.9 348.3 653.4 587.9 552.9 515,0 506.0 606.6 10909.4 Mean 560.2 6.1 549.1 5.1 545.5 Percent Decrease 554.2 1.1 0,9 Weight Lost 168 Hours Weight Lost 192 Hours Weight Lost 6.0 4.7 3.8 1.3 1.9 2.6 10.2 8.2 0.4 4.6 5.2 0.8 2.8 5,3 5.0 0.9 5.9 0.8 0.8 1.6 5.0 3.6 2.9 1.1 1.6 2.0 7.8 5.9 0.5 3.5 4.5 0.6 1.5 4.8 3.4 0.5 4.7 0.3 0.5 1.2 72.8 568.3 568.6 540.6 508.1 316.8 317.3 543.9 553.4 609,.1 666.8 595.8 568,7 ,741.4 343.5 650.0 587.4 548.2 514.7 505.5 605.4 10853.5 55,9 562.7 565.0 538.2 507.9 315.1 315.4 538.1 548.3 608.6 663.5 591.9 568.5 741. 3 340.0 646.5 586.8 543.2 514.7 505.5 604.7 10805.9 5.6 3.6 2.4 0.2 1.7 1.9 5.8 5.1 0.5 3.3 3.9 0.2 0.1 3.5 3.5 0.6 5.0 0.0 0.0 0.7 47.6 3.6 542,7 2.8 540.3 2.4 0.7 0.5 0.4 ro CP CP �- 289-Discussion: Population Estimates. -- Aerial counts made during the winter months when the antelope were concentrated indicated the populations on the Moffat County and Larimer County study areas were approximately 415 and 200 antelope, respectively. The population estimates made from the pre-season count, post-season count, and hunter harvest varied considerably from these figures. Techniques used for estimating populations of other big game animals appear to be inadequate for estimating antelope population$. Additional research will be necessary to determine a suitable technique for estimating antelope populations from aerial counts and hunter harvest figures. The high wounding loss on the.Moffat County area is likely due to the high concentration of antelope and hunters on the area. The area is approximately 30 square miles in size, had over 650 antelope on it, and 250 hunters were issued permits for the area. Most of the hunters killed their antelope within an hour after the hunting season opened. These factors add up to an extreme amount qf confusion and woun~ed animals. The wounding loss could possibly be reduced if the hunters were spread out over a longer period of .time. Dead antelope on the Moffat County study area were easiest to locate from an airplane during mid-day. The area has a moderate shrub cover; when the sun is directly overhead there are fewer shadows next to the ground, thus the antelope are more easily seen. The antelope were difficult to see unless we passed directly over them. Hunter Harvest Survey. -- The check station data indicated a larger percentage of fawns in the antelope kill than was indicated by the hunter report card returns. Thus, there appeared to be a bias on the part of the hunters in reporting their kill. They apparently reported some fawns as mature does or bucks. The herds on the study areas appear to be stable. The mean age of the antelope killed on the study areas was approximately 2~ years old; indicating moderately young herds. Hanson (1963) defines productivity as the ratio of subadult animals to adult animals. The yearling age class is generally used as an index to the productivity of big game herds. Approximately one-third of the harvest was in the yearling age group; yet there were 14 to 16 percent of the antelope reaching four years old. There was a strong relationship between the age of younger buck antelope harvested and their horn length. Buck antelope make up the larger percentage of the antelope killed in Colorado each year. Therefore, it may be feasible to require hunters who kill a buck to record the horn length of the animal on his hunter report card. This information could be used to determine the percentage of the yearling animals in the kill or productivity of antelope herds. Findings in the aging study, where eye lens weight was correlated to the age of the antelope, where similar to those found in a study conducted by Kolenosky and Miller (1962). Growth of the lens proceeds at a rapid rate �- 290 until the animal is three years old, then it starts tapering off. The differences between the weights for the younger age classes were large with little overlap; whereas differences between weights for age classes older than 3~ years old were smaller with more overlap between groups. Kolenosky and Miller found less overlap and more constant growth rates in the older age classes than were found in the data presented in this report. As pointed out by Kolenosky and Miller (1962), the lens weights were correlated with estimates of age based on tooth eruption and wear, thus are subject to the same sources of error. There is a need for data from known-aged specimens to eliminate any errors which may occur in estimating the age of the antelope. Literature Cited Hanson, W. R. 1963. Calculation of, productivity, survival, and abundance of selected vertebrates from sex and age ratios. Wildl. Monographs No.9, 60 pp. Kelker, G. H. 1945. The use of the sex ratio and doe-fawn rat Lo in counting deer. Proc , Utah Acad. Sci. Arts & Letters, Vol. 19, 189-198. Kolenosky, G. B. and R. S. Miller. 1962. Growth of the lens of the pronghorn antelope. Jour. Wildl. Mgmt. 26(1):112-113. Prepared Date: by: George D. Bear Student Assistant ~J~a~n~u~a~r~y~,~1_9_6~5 _ Approved by: Richard N. Denney Project Leader Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �- 291 JOB COMPLETION RESEARCH REPORT PROJECT SEGMENT State of Colorado Project No. W-40-R-5 Antelope Investigations Job No. 12 Antelope Census Period Covered: April 1, 1963 through March 31, 1964 ABSTRACT Antelope counts were conducted on the two antelope the report for Job 11 of this report • study areas described in .Aerial antelope counts were highest during morning and evening hours. Light conditions had a very decisive effect on the counts; clear skies was the best condition. Bare ground offered the best background for counting antelope. A larger percentage of antelope were observed lying down during the noon flight than in the morning or evening. It is desirable to make fawn counts in late July or August, and population counts in the fall or spring when the antelope are in moderately large herds. A helicopter is a more desirable aircraft than a fix-winged airplane making counts when the antelope are scattered, or when more accurate age ratio counts are desired. The road counts were very unpredictable for sex and and quite variable. Objectives: 1. Determine the abundance of antelope by ground and aerial counts. 2. Compare results in given areas or herd units for the two techniques. Recommendations: 1. To conduct aerial counts during the first few hours of daylight on clear days as much as is possible. 2. Counts should be made in mid-August when good fawn counts can be obtained along with the regular counts. 3. Continue gathered decision this segment of the study so additional information may be pertaining to the factors affecting census work; so a sounder may be made pertaining to the time and conditions for census work. 4. and Tag antelope fawns, so movements may be studied. �- 292 Procedure: Aerial counts with a fix-winged airplane were conducted on each study area once a month to determine seasonal variability in census techniques. Counts were conducted three times a day, early morning, mid-day, and late afternoon, to determine the most suitable time of day for aerial census. The Larimer County area was flown in one mile-wide strips. Permanent land marks were used as boundary markers to prevent overlap. Due to the shrub cover and concentration of antelope it was most desirable to fly the Moffat County area in one-half mile-wide strips. A flying altitude of approximately 100-300 feet was maintained. Other factors recorded on each count were: vegetative cover, relative visibility due to ground cover, cloud cover, wind velocity, distribution of antelope within the herd, approximate location on the study area (strip number and distance along the strip), and activity of the antelope. Ground cover was rated in one of three classes: I - new snow, 100% snow cover; II - 100% snow cover, but old snow with a lot of old tracks; and III - (a) spotty snow cover, (b) bare ground. Light conditions were rated in one of three classes: I - clear skies; II - broken overcast 50 per cent of the time; and III - solid overcast. Air conditions were also rated in bne of three classes: I - good, solid air; II - mild to moderate downdraft and turbulence; and III - severe turbulence and downdrafts. Aerial counts were made with a helicopter in late July and in January or February_ Comparisons were made between helicopter and fix-winged airplane counts. Ground counts, using binoculars and a spotting scope, were conducted from a vehicle while traveling along a permanent transect. These counts were made once a month and three times a day. Census conditions were recorded as for the aerial counts, except road conditions were recorded in one of three classes instead of air conditions. The road transects in general cut a diagonal line across the study areas. The transects were 23 miles and 11 miles long on the Larimer County and Moffat County study areas, respectively. Results: Aerial antelope counts were generally highest in the early morning hours and lowest during mid-day (Tables 5 and 6). The evening counts were between these counts. Light. conditions seemed to be one of the most important factors affecting the counts; whenever the skies were cloudy the antelope were harder to see, thus the counts were lower than what would be expected under good light conditions. Ground cover was also important. Bare ground seemed to be the best background for spotting antelope; the ideal background was when the vegetation was growing and very green. Spotty-snow cover was the poorest background, because the antelope blended into the background. The Moffat County area is a shrubby vegetative type, thus even when there was a couple feet of snow on the ground the shrubs were sticking up through the snow, therefore giving a very mottled background. The air conditions generally had little effect on the total number of antelope counted, but as the air became more turbulent the sex and age ratio counts were subject to more error since the pilot could not fly safely at low enough altitudes for distinguishing the sex or age of the antelope. There wasn't a definite �- 293 TABLE 1. -- Form Used for Antelope Census. W-40-1 ANTELOPE INVESTIGATIONS Aerial Census Form Date Time: ~Aircraft Take-off Land~ Start census. Finish. _ Pilot _ Flight (hrs) _ Total (hrs) Observer(s): _ _ Counting Conditions: (circle applicable in each category). Snow cover - Condition I. New snow cover, count started within two days of new snow. 100% snow cover. Condition II. 100% snow cover, but old snow with tracks too numerous to locate all animals. Light - Air Condition III. Spotty snow cover, bare ground, poor background. Condition I. Clear skies. Condition II. Broken overcast 50% of the time. Condition III. Solid overcast. Condition I. Good, solid air. Condition II. Mild to moderate do~ndraft nnd turbulence. Condition III. Location: Weather and phenological data: of veg.), Severe turbulence and downdraf t s, _ (General for period, specific for day, development _ �TABLE 2. -- Form Used for Antelope Census \\1-40-2 ANTELOPE I~~ESTlGATIONS Aerial Census Form Time Vegetative Type Strip No, Location Males Females Young Unclass. Total Activity and Remarks 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ro \0 .p- 9 10 Date Remarks: LocationL (dispersal and.grouping of herd) Associated species: Species 1. 2. 3. 4, _ (wildlife and livestock) Male Female Young _ Unclass. Total Location Activity �- 295 - W-40-3 TABLE 3. -- Form Used for Antelope Census ANTELOPE INVESTIGATIONS Ground Census Form Date" Time: Driver: Start Mileage: Start Counting Conditions: Observer(s): Fi~ish~ Total (hrs) _ Finish, Total (mi.) _ (circle applicable in each category). Snow cover - Condition t. New snow cover, count started within two days of new snow. 100% snow cover. Condition II. 100% snow cover, but old snow with tracks too numerous to locate all animals. Light - Road - _ Condition III. Spotty snow cover, bare ground, poor background. Condition I. Clear skies. Condition II. Broken overcast 50% of the time. Condition III. Solid overcast. Condition I. Good, easily traveled. Condition II. Fair, oceaoi6nal. places of difficult travel. Condition III. Poor, difficult to travel, requires driver's full attention most of the time. Location: Weather and phenological data: veg.) (General for period, specific for day, development of _ �TABLE 4. -- Form Used for Antelope Census W-40-4 ANTELOPE INVESTIGATIONS Ground Census Form Time Vegetative Type Hileage Accum, Miles Males Females Young Unclass. Total Activitv and Remarks 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 f\) \0 0'\ 9 10 Date Remarks: Locationl (dispersal and grouping of herd) Associated species: Species 1. 2. 3, 4. _ (wildlife and livestock) Male Female Young _ Unclass. Total Location Activity �TABLE 5. -- AERIAL CENSUS WITH A FIX-WINGED AIRPLANE ON THE MOFFAT COUNTY ANTELOPE STUDY AREA Honth Time June Morning Noon Evening III III III I I I I II II 67 36 52 162 78 157 106 28 43 335 115 252 65-100-41 28-100-12 27-100-33 1.30 1.72 1.82 8.1 5.2 5.0 Activitv Lying Standing, Down Moving (%) (%) , 99 58 42 4 96 July Morning Noon Evening III III III I II I I II I 176 40 102 207 71 139 61 75 91 444 186 332 29-100-85 106-100-56 65-100-74 1.02 0.83 0.90 7.8 6.9 6.1 4 19 1 96 81 99 August Morning Noon Evening III III III II II I I II II 193 108 213 1.18 0.88 0.97 11.1 8.1 7.4 1 31 0 99 69 100 September Morning Noon Evening III III III I I I I II II 104 53 96 256 105 554 41-100-75 69 350 173 40-100-62 106 273 592 39-100-78 ANTELOPE HUNTING SEASON 68 317 145 47-100-72 166 82 29 35-100-65 118 62 276 53-100-81 1.10 -- 0.93 4.9 5.7 5.8 3 3 0 97 97 100 October Morning Noon Evening II I III II III III No flight 116 50 236 138 59 28 411 25-100-49 20-100;..36 ~'~231 ~.,15 Unc1ass 0.88 0.72 12.8 21.0 0 0 100 100 November Morning Noon Evening III I No flight No flight I -- 330 80 410 24-100 l.00 22.8 1 99 December Morning Noon Evening II II II I I I -- 311 328 97 67 78 27 378 406 124 22-100 24-100 28-100 0.92 0.95 0.75 47.2 67.7 31.0 0 0 0 100 100 100 I I I -- -- -- 244 263 257 76 78 93 320 341 350 31-100 30-100 36-100 0.80 0.83 0.75 80.0 85.3 87.5 0 0 0 100 100 100 I I --- 240 295 90 85 240 380 37-100 29-100 0.73 110.0 190.0 0 0 100 100 Harch I I III Ante10Ee Counted Fawns Does Bucks Total --- Buck-Doe-Fawn Ratio Census Time (hours) Ave. Herd Size l. No flights January February Census Conditions Ground Light Air I I I Horning Noon Evening I I I Morning Noon Evening I I I I No flight -- ro \D -..l �TABLE 6. -- AERIAL CENSUS WITH A FIX-WINGED AIRPLANE ON THE LARIMER COUNTY ANTELOPE STUDY AREA Honth Time Census Conditions Ground Light Air Ante10Ee Counted Fawns Does Bucks Total Buck-Doe-Fawn Ratio Census Time (hours) Ave. Herd Size Activity Lying Standing, Down Moving (%) (01 -, /0) June Morning Noon Evening III III III II III II I II II 4 3 14 39 45 50 29 39 47 72 87 111 74-100-10 87-100-7 94-100-28 1.33 1.37 1.47 3.7 2.8 4.3 0 11 3 100 89 97 July Morning Noon Evening III III III I II III I II II 66 30 34 109 34 45 50 66 22 225 130 101 46-100-61 194-100-88 49-100-76 1.47 1.07 1.23 4.8 5.7 5.1 0 5 0 100 95 100 August Morning Noon Evening III III III II III II I II II 38 53 43 78 73 57 41 36 46 157 162 146 53-100-49 49-100-73 81-100-75 1.15 1.20 1.37 4.1 6.2 4.9 6 14 0 94 86 100 September Morning Noon Evening III III No flight I II I I 96 90 1.25 1.33 6.7 5.9 8 5 92 95 Morning Noon Evening III I No flight III I 1.20 5.0 1 99 Morning Noon Evening III III III Morning Noon Evening III III January Morning Noon Evening III III III February Morning Noon Evening III Harch Morning Noon Evening III III III October November December II III II No flight III III I II II I 52 120 60 276 50-100-80 108 74 272 69-100-83 ANTELOPE HUNTING SEASON 63 40 155 63-100-83 I 30 68 29 127 43-10Q-44 1.22 6.4 0 100 II II 85 26 62 125 26 80 33 l3 21 243 65 163 26-100-68 50-100-100 26-100-78 1.22 1.10 1.25 15.2 l3.0 16.3 0 0 0 100 100 100 ---- 173 62 49 44 222 106 28-100 67-100 1.18 1.08 44.4 35.3 0 0 100 100 --- 1.05 1.05 1.08 18.0 22.0 30.7 10 24 0 90 76 100 -- 1.l3 32.8 0 100 1.25 1.03 1.22 8.5 14.7 9.8 4 96 100 93 I I I III III II III II No flight No flight I I III I II II ~~234 154 38 25-100 87 30 ~b~154 34-100 149 35 184 25-100 (~'<42 unclassified, 'k*37 unclassified) 159 38 197 24-100 ---- 123 l39 85 64 52 52 187 191 137 52-100 37-100 61-100 0 7 I\) \0 CD �-- 299 pattern in the age or sex ratios due to the census conditioris. The antelope herds were small, approximately 3-11 animals, throughout the summer months until October. Then the animals grouped into large winter herds. High total counts and fawn counts were obtained in lat.e August and early September just before hunting season. By October the fawns were difficult to distinguish from the adult antelope. Large total counts were obtained from November through March when the herds were large. The young bucks were difficult to detect in the larger herds during this period. Variability in the counts due to the time of the day was not as critical during that period, since the large groups were easily seen even during mid-day. Variability in the counts during the winter months was due to the inability of the observer to get an accurate count on the larger herds of 75-200 animals. It took less time to fly the aerial counts on the study areas when the antelope were in their winter herds than during the sun®er months when they were scattered out. Activity of the antelope observed on the aerial counts varied throughout the seasons and during the day. During the summer months more antelope were observed lying down during the noon flights than during the morning or evening flights. During the winter months there was little variation in activity throughout the day; most of the antelope were moving about or feeding. Population estimates were made from partial counts of the total land area. Predetermined strips were selected from the 100 per cent count to make up the 70, 50, or 30 per cent counts. The antelope counted on these strips were used in estimating the population in an effort to determine if partial counts may be used on antelope areas and projected to an estimate equivalent to the 100 per cent count. The results were variable and unpredictable, as indicated in Tables 7 and 8. Helicopter counts were compared to fix-winged airplane counts. The total counts for the helicopters in July were higher (approximately 23%) and more consistent for the morning, noon, and evening flights than the fix-winged counts. The sex and age ratios also were more consistent for the helicopter counts (Table 9). Census time was higher for the helicopter flights. There was very little difference in the winter counts made from helicopters and those made from fix-winged airplanes. The sex ratio was higher for the helicopter census on these winter counts. The winter count on the Larimer County area using a helicopter required a little more time than the fix-winged count. The winter count on the Moffat County area using a helicopter required less time than the fix-winged airplane. The average herd size on the Moffat County and Larimer County study areas were approximately 80 and 30 antelope, respectively. Several types of aircraft were used for the aerial census work, which included a PA18 150 Piper Cub, Cessna 182, DeHaviland Beaver, Hughes helicopter, and a super-charged Bell 47G3B helicopter. The three fix-winged crafts were of the high-wing type, which is recommended for census work. The Beaver and Cessna had side-by-side seating for the pilot and observer. In the Piper Cub the observer is seated behind the pilot. The Piper Cub was better for census work when low altitude and slow speeds were required around large herds, because it could fly much slower and was more maneuverable. The helicopters were better than the fix-winged planes for maneuverability and close work. Visibility was considerably better in the helicopters. Th' fix-winged aircraft �TABLE 7. -- POPULATION ESTIMATES FROM PARTIAL COUNTS OF THE LAND AREA ON THE MOFFAT COUNTY ANTELOPE STUDY AREA. Month Ac tua1 Coun t of 100% of Area Buck-Doe-Fawn Number Ratio Population Estimate From 70% Count Buck-Doe-Fawn Number Ratio Population Estimate From 50% Count Buck-Doe-Fawn Number Ratio Population Estimate From 30% Count Buck-Doe -FmVl1 Number Ratio June 335 65-100-41 423 66-100-40 466 44-100-42 503 25-100-38 July 444 29-100-85 4·00 39-100-65 466 30-100-82 223 10-100-62 August 554 41-100-75 576 52-100-78 356 43-100-95 470 29-100-85 September 317 47-100-72 286 37-100-74 324 36-100-82 297 46-100-82 October 411 25-100-49 474 26-100-48 284 18-100-51 473 18-100-51 November L~10 24-100 263 21-100 346 21-100 560 20-100 December 378 22-100 3L~0 17-100 330 18-100 270 16-100 January No flight February 244 31-100 457 31-100 640 31-100 1067 31-100 March 380 29-100 100 27-100 0 --- 0 w 0 0 �TABLE 8 0 Month -- POPULATION ESTIMATES FROM PARTIAL COUNTS OF THE LAND AREA ON THE LARIMER COUNTY ANTELOPE STUDY AREA. Actual Count of 100% of Area Buck-Doe-Fawn Number Ratio Population Estimate From 70% Count Buck-Doe-Fawn Number Ratio Population Estimate From 50% Coun t Buck-Doe-Fawn Ratio Number Population Estimate From 30% Count Buck-Doe-Fawn Number Ratio June 72 74-100-10 69 76-100-16 90 79-100-8 83 0-100-67 July 225 46-100-61 236 35-100-65 244 36-100-74 213 29-100-77 August 157 53-100-49 192 58-100-42 176 56-100-46 107 47-100-41 September 276 50-100-80 336 53-100-79 248 58-100-75 243 42-100-94 October 155 63-100-83 181 73-100-86 192 74-100-79 243 72-100-79 November 243 26-100-68 177 15-100-57 230 13-100-56 380 14-100-14 December 222 28-100 304 28-100 280 32-100 0 --- co 0 !-' January 234 25-100 184 25-100 88 23-100 107 February 197 24-100 201 22-100 134 18-100 0 March 187 52-100 180 48-100 226 51-100 260 33-100 70-100 �TABLE 9. -- AERIAL CENSUS, COMPARING HELICOPTER AND FIX-WINGED AIRPLANE COUNTS. Locality and Aircraft Census Conditions Light Air Ground Antelope Counted Total Does Fawns Bucks Buck-Doe-Fawn Ratio Census Time (hrs.) Month Time Fix-winged (Beaver) July Morning Noon Evening III III III II III I II II 50 66 22 109 34 45 66 30 34 225 130 101 46-100-61 194-100-88 49-100-76 1.47 1.07 1.23 Helicopter (Hughes) July Morning Noon Evening III III III I II II I II II 92 44 63 120 68 99 76 45 57 288 157 219 77-100-63 65-100-66 64-100-58 Fix-winged (Beaver) February Morning Noon Evening III III No flight No flight II 38 159 -- 197 24-100 2.12 2.00 2.03 1.13 Helicopter (Bell) February Morning Noon Evening III III III I I I I 97 134 123 -- I III 39 59 48 136 193 171 40-100 37-100 39-100 1.32 1.33 1.33 Larimer Co. I -- -- LV 0 ro I Moffat Co. Fix-winged (Cessna 182) July I I II I 61 75 91 207 71 139 176 40 102 444 186 332 29-100-85 106-100-56 65-100-74 1.02 0.83 0,90 Morning Noon Evening III III III I II Helicopter (Bell) July Morning Noon Evening III III III I I I I I I 157 104 123 245 172 274 184 133 191 586 409 588 64-100-75 60-100-77 45-100-70 1.20 1.50 1.50 Fix-winged (Cessna 182) December Morning Noon Evening II II II I I I I III I 67 78 27 311 328 97 ------- 378 406 124 22-100 24-100 28-100 0.92 0.95 0.75 Morning Noon Evening I I I II III I I I 92 78 90 324 254 283 ----- --- 416 332 373 28-100 31-100 32-100 0,63 0,62 0.70 Helicopter (Bell) January I �- 303 have a much faster cru~s~ng speed than the helicopters, but the former type of aircraft is effected more by winds and rough air than the later. The fix-winged airplanes have approximately a six hour fuel supply. The helicopters had approximately a two to two and one-half hour fuel supply, thus requiring a fuel truck to follow it to the census area. Rental costs of the airplanes was $20 per hours, the Hughes was $65 per hour, and the Bell was $80 per hour. The Hughes is very limited in Colorado, because the recommended service ceiling is about 5,000 - 6,000 feet, whereas the Bell has a ceiling of 17,000 feet. Winds of approximately 20 mph hampered the Hughes enough that antelope could nearly out-distance it when running into a head wind. Winds of this velocity had little effect on the Bell. The road counts were variable and unpredictable (Tables 10 and 11). Antelope near the road would run when the vehicle passed by, thus they were not recorded on the other counts during the day. In general the antelope were most easily seen in the morning or evening hours and when the skies were clear. Discussion: Census conditions are best when the skies are clear and the ground is free from snow. Counts should be made during the first few hours of daylight. The sun's rays are hitting the land surface at an angle during the early morning and late afternoon periods, thus illuminating the white sides of a standing antelope making it visible for some distance. The quality of the light in late evening appears to be poorer and ground observations indicate a few antelope are still lying down. Counts were lower at mid-day, possibly because the sun's rays are more nearly perpendicular to the land surface. The dark coloration on the back of the antelope is such that the reflected light is poorer; also more antelope are lying down during the middle of the day. The white sides and underside of an antelope is less visible when an antelope is lying down. Total counts are most easily made when the antelope are grouped up into winter herds. It is desirable to make the counts during late October or March when the average herd size is approximately 15 animals. More accurate total and sex ratio counts may be made before or after the antelope are in the extremely large winter herds. Aerial photographs taken of the large herds, 100-150 antelope, on the Moffat County area were unsuitable, because the size of the herds required the observer to be at a considerable altitude to include all individuals in the picture, then it was difficult to distinguish the antelope from the clumps of shrubs. Moving pictures may be a solution to this problem. It is desirable to make fawn counts in late July and August when they are running with the adults, yet are still noticeab~smaller than the adults. August seems to be a desirable time to make fawn and buck counts, and reasonably accurate population counts may also be obtained at this time. The helicopter is better aircraft than the fix-winged airplane when the antelope are scattered or accurate sex and age ratio counts are wanted. The helicopter is better for close work and obtaining accurate sex and age counts due to the maneuverability and visibility. But the expense of renting a helicopter is considerably higher than the fix-winged craft. If only a total count is desired, the fix-wing count on the winter grounds is as accurate as a count made from a helicopter. �TABLE 10. -- ROAD COUNTS ON THE LARIMER COUNTY ANTELOPE STUDY AREA Census Conditions Road Light Ground Bucks Does -- 4 4 4 Ante10Ee Counted Unc1ass. Fawns Honth Time June Morning Noon Evening III III III III II III II II II --2 July Morning Noon Evening III III III I I II I I I 1 4 1 2 1 7 (no antelope observed) August Morning Noon Evening III III III II I III I I I 11 --- -- -- 7 4 Morning Noon Evening III III III I I I I 4 10 1 20 25 13 12 9 5 September I II 19 1 -- -- -- -- 8 (no counts) November Morning Noon Evening III III III III II I I I I 9 Morning Noon Evening (no counts) I III I III I I (no antelope observed) (no antelope observed) "Morning Noon Evening III III III II I I I I I (no antelope observed) (no antelope observed) (no antelope observed) III III III I I I I 26 5 (no antelope observed) (no antelope observed) January February (no counts) March Morning Noon Evening Buck-Doe-Fawn Ratio 5 4 6 50-100-0 2 8 10 25-100-25 14-100-29 -- 38 4 11 58-100~42 43 44 19 25-100-60 40-100-36 8-100-38 -- -- 4 -7 -- -- 0-100-25 0-100-60 w October December Total 0 .p- II III 5 2 34 26 4 11 8 2 -- 17 23 14 71 62 22 24-100-32 19-100-31 50-100-50 26 57 19-100-0 �TABLE 11. -- ROAD COUNTS ON THE MOFFAT COUNTY ANTELOPE STUDY AREA Total Buck-Doe-Fawn Ratio 121 74 106 32-100-28 33-100-43 18-100-21 --- 170 73 136 65-100-75 36-100-19 47-100-59 55 11 38 24 10 -- 212 65 110 43-100-59 42-100-35 36-100-72 16 8 12 5 2 8 1 -2 29 15 29 44-100-31 63-100-25 58-100-67 -- 20 60-100-40 6 36 11-100-55 17-100-100 Bucks Antelope Counted Unclass. Fawns Does II II II 24 14 14 76 42 76 21 18 16 I II I II II II 46 17 31 71 47 66 53 9 39 III III III III I III I I I 40 13 19 93 31 53 III III III I I I I I I 7 5 7 Census Conditions Road Light Ground Honth Time June Horning Noon Evening III III III I I I July Horning Noon Evening III III III August Morning Noon Evening September Horning Noon Evening -- -- --- 0 Morning Noon Evening III III (no counts) I III I 6 10 4 I 2 18 10 November Horning Noon Evening III III III III I III I II II (no antelope observed) 6 6 1 (no antelope observed) -- 13 December Morning Noon II II I I II II (no antelope observed) --- 58 58 October w January (no counts, roads closed by snow) February (no counts, roads closed by snow) March (no counts, roads closed by snow) \[I �- 306 The road counts were very unpredictable and appear to be inadequate for sound management of antelope. They could be used only as a very general index to population trends on the study areas. An observer could obtain better information pertaining to age and sex ratios by randomly working an area until he had observed an adequate number of antelope. Prepared Date by Approved G~e~o_r~g~e~D~.--B~e-a-r--------Student Assistant J_a_n_u_a_r_y~, __1_9_6_5 _ by __~R~i~c~h~a~r~d~N~.~D~e~n~n~e~y~ _ Project Leader Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �Jahuary, 1965 . - 307 JOB COMPLETION RESEARCH State of REPORT PROJECT SEGMENT Colorado ------------------------- Project No. Job No. Period Covered: W-40-R-5 Antelope Investigations 13 Techniques population for Determining Trends April 1, 1963 through March 31, 1964 ABSTRACT The objective of this job is to determine the most effective procedure for determining antelope population trends on the established study areas, attempting to rate the techniques for different seasons, habitat types, and censusing conditions. An additional year's data will be necessary before trends in population may be determined and rated. Recommendations: Continue this job until additional information may be collected, then the census data for the two-year period will be compiled, graphed, and otherwise analyzed to best depict the basic population trend in each of the two antelope herds under study. Prepared Date by George D. Bear Student Assistant January, 1955 Approved by Richard N. Denney Project Leader Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator ��- 309 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of Colorado ------~~~~-------- Project No. Antelope Investigations W-40-R-5 Activity and Behavior Patterns Job No. 14 Period Covered: March 15, 1963 through March 31, 1964. Abstract There was a total of 13 fawn antelope, 7 males and 6 females, caught and marked during June, 1963. Seven of these animB,ls are thought to be alive and on the study area. The expanding collars did not remain on the animals for more than six weeks. On March 1, 1964, 51 antelope were trapped with the use of an airplane. Thirty-nine animals ","erereleased with collars and eartags. Blood samples were taken from 5 animals. Ten animals died during and after the trapping operation, nine females and one male. A check station was operated on September 21 8_22, 1963. Data on the animals killed on or near the study area can be found tabulated in Job No. 11. Only general statements can be made concerning activity patterns and social behavior of antelope at this point pending further data collection. Recommendations: 1. The prescribed manner of observation and recording of antelope behavior and activity patterns should be continued to determine time of day, duration of time, and frequency of occurrence of the following activities: a. b. c. Feeding Resting Walking d. e. Running Standing f. g. h. Area and distance covered Nocturnal activities Alarm and escape behavior Set up and maintain a more accurately recording •. leather station on the study area to facilitate better correlation of antelope activities to weather phenomena. 20 3. Continue to eA~lore feasibility of automatic tagging devices and design and use an expanding collar for arrteLope f'avns, 4. To detennine sex and age structures of antelope groups and/or herds and dominant subdor.1inantgroups by seasons, sex, and, age. �- 310 - 5, Determine spatial and cover requirements of doe-fawn, doe-buck and lactating doe-antelope group relationships. Ob.lec t.Lvea : 1. Study activity and social patterns of antelope on a selected area and relate these patterns to biological and physical factors. 2. Collect as much weat.he'r data as necessary for correlation purposes. 3. Capture and then mark as many fawns as possible with collars and eartags and explol~ feasib~lity of using aerial techniques or automatic devices to mark adult antelope. 4. Make note on physical pec~ar~ties and characteristics of animals by intensive observations and observe as many antelope as tlinewill permit, seeking information on: a. Sex and age composition of herds b. Herd ore;a.nizationor structure c. Social hehavior - seasonal and daily d. Activity patterns - seasonal and daily 5. Fit all typical activities of antelope into nine general types of adaptive behavior (Scott~ 1958, p. 13). a. b. c. d. e. 6. Ingestive Shel ter-seeld.ng Agonistic Sexual Epimeletic f. Et-eplineletic g. Allelomlinetic h. Elirninative i. Investigative Analyse data by suitable statistical and intuitive methods. Techniaues Used: 1. Observations and recording of the different antelope activity and social behavior patterns were made with the aid of a spotting scope (20X, 30X, and 60x ocular lenses), and a 7x 50 binoculars. Recording of data was on forms or a Norelco transistor tape recorder. Natural observation points and blinds were used wherever possible. 2. Favns we re captured with the a.id of a labrador retriever and a long-handled dip net. Two men "Torking together was the most successful vray of locating and then capturing the fawns (Table 1). 3. The antelope that were trapped in March, 1964 were caught with the aid of a fixed-vQng airplane and a net of the type normally used in trapping operations in Colorado (Table 2). �- 311 - Table 1. Fawns tagged in June, 1963 near Livermore, Colorado, Larimer County. Collar * No. 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 --** --** --** Eartag Nos. Sex ANl,ANl AN2,AN2 AN3,AN3 AN4,AN4 AN5,AN5 AN6,AN6 AN7,AN7 AN8,AN8 AN9,AN9 AN 10, AN 10 AN 11, AN 11 AN 12, AN 12 AN 13, AN 13 MaJ.e MaJ.e *Yellow plastic collars **No collars Female Male Female Female Male Male Male Female Female Female MaJ.e Remarks Recaptured March 1, 1964 Died - Female abandoned Collar returned in Sept. 1963 Died - Found June 22, 1963 Died - Observed from plane Killed - August, 1963 - Coyote Observed July 5, 1963 - Collar o.k. Recaptured March 1, 1964 Observed June 22, 1963 �- 312 - Table II. Antelope trapped and tagged l~rch 1, 1964 near Livermore, Colorado, Larimer County. Collar No. Eartag Nos. 142 143 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 AN 21 AN 21 .lIN 18 AN 14 AN 15 AN 17 AN 17 Al'J22 AN 24 &~ 20 p 57 p 56 AN 25 p 58 p 51 p 52 AN 25 AN2 AN 2 AN 16 None AN 32, AN 83 AN 33, AN 84 AN 41, AN 92 AN 34, AN 85 AN 38, AN 89 AN aa, AN 12* AN 37, AN 88 AN 42, Al'J 93 AN 40, AN 91 AN 35, AN 86 AN 39, AN 90 AN 29, AN 80 AN 30, AN 81 AN 1, AN 1* AN 36, AN 87 AN 31, A..W82 AN 27, AN 27 AN 28, AN 28 AN 29, AN 29 AN 33, AN 33 AN 30, AN 30 AN 32, AN 32 AN 34, AN 34 AN 35, AN 35 AN 36, AN 36 AN 37, AN 37 AN 41, AN 41 AN 1~2, AN 42 AN 43, AN 43 AN 45, Al'l45 AN 46, AN 46 AN 49, AN 49 AN 48, AN 1~8 AN 47, AN 47 P 27, P 48 P 26, P 76 *Recaptures Sex Age MaleMale Female Female Female Male Female Female Female Female Female Male Male Female Male Female Male Female Female Male Male Female Hale Female Male Female Female Female Male :Male Yearling Adult Adult Adult 2 year old Fawn Fawn Adult Adult 2 year old Adult Yearling Adult Fawn Favm Yearling Fawn Adult Fawn Adult Yearling Adult Adult Yearling Fawn Adult Yearling Adult Adult Adult Fema.Le Yearling Female Fawn Female 2 year old Female Adult Female 2 year old Adult Male :F'emale Adult Collar color and Code Yellow plastic collar Yellow plastiC collar Yellow plastic collar Yellow plastic collar Yellow plastiC collar Yellow plastiC collar Yellow plastic collar Yellow p'Lastd.c collar Yellow plastiC collar Yellow plastic collar Yellow plastic collar Yellow plastic collar Yellow plastiC collar Yellow plastic collar Yellow plastic collar Yellow plastiC collar Yellow plastiC collar Red collar with 2 green dots Red collar with 1 green dot Red collar with 3 green squares Red collar with 2 green squares Red collar with 1 green square Red collar with 2 green stripes Red collar with 1 green stripe Green collar with 3 red dots Green collar with 2 red dots Green collar with 1 red dot Green collar ,nth 3 red stripes Green collar with 2 red stripes Green collar with 1 red stripe \.[hi te collar with 2 green dots White collar with 1 green dot Whi te collar with 1 red square I-1hi te collar with 2 red squares vlhite collar with 3 red squares vlhite collar with 1 red stripe 1-1hi te collar "1ith 2 red stripes �- 315 - FindinGs: 1. Females with f'awns seem to mix readily with other antelope while their I'avns are lying down, It was commonto see these females up to a mile or more away from where the f'awns "ere cached. After the f'awns are up grazing with the female, about the first part of July, these doe-sf'avngroups intermingle readily with other doe-f'avn or adult groups. 2. It appears that same lactating females adopt f'awns while other lactating females abandon their fa,ms. It was not uncommonto see fa'Wllsof different sizes nursing one female, however, this can possibly be explained by the differen't rates of development shown I,Ti thin one set of twins. Baby sitting, one or two females i-l'i'th several f'avns, has been noticed especially in the late afternoons during the surmer , 3. About a week to ten days after parturition the f'avns intergrate into a family group, lactating doe-female yearlinc;(s), favm(sL and in about 3-4 weeks the adult and yearling males may also join the group. The yearlings in these family groups are usually females. These females are closely associated with the mother until their first breeding season or for about 16 months. The yenrling males are banned together during; the sunrne r months with the older bucks. The adult female of this family group plays the dominant role throughout most of the summer. Hhen the Lact.atdrig female is ready to cache her fawns between nursing periods, she 'HalkS to the general area, accompanied by the f'axms, but then the fauns go in different directions to lie dovm, It appears that the fawns "choose" the actual hiding place. Hany -0i..1I1es it has been up to 100 yards from where the doe took them originally. As the fawns grov older and become more vagile, they lie closer together and at times have been observed lying side by side. The female mayor may not be within sight of the fmms during these periods, '-Thichmay last up to four hours. 1j.. 5. The yearling females do most of the sentry work of the family groups. In general they tend to stand motio~less for long periods at a time, several minutes, usually on a little higher ground than the rest of the group~ Stag groups are seen quite often during the summermonths. Groups of 15 have been observed on the study area. Mockfighting is observed within these social groups throughout most of the summe r and it increases as the breeding season approaches. Usually the Largest buck is the highest memberof the peck order. 6. Activity periods throughou't the sunmer months are quite definite. In general, early morning hours are spent feeding, late morning and early afternoon is spent resting, and again in the Late a:r-ternoon the animals feed. Just prior to total darl::ness the arrimaf.shave a "play" period. To the best of my knowledge, during the nocturnal hours the animals bed dovn, Activity periods correlate some.... zhat. to "cather conditions. During windy periods, the animals seem to feed more than during the quiet periods. �- 316 - Literature cited: ED.iott, R. R. 48-54. Scott, J. P. 1948 1958. Colo. Gameand Fish, Animal behavior. Fed, Aid Quarterly Report, April. Univ. of Chicago Press. 28l pp. /' Prepared by: Date: E. J. Prenzlow January, 1965 ----------~~----~---------- Approved bY:.~~f~.~'~/~~~!/~'__~/_·_· 'Project Leader Ferd C. Kleinschnitz --~F~'e~deralAid Coordinator ~ �January, 1965 - 317 - JOB COMPLETION RESEARCH State of Project PROJECT REPORT SEGMENT COLORADO No. Bighorn Sheep and Mt. Goat Investigations W-4l-R-14 --~~~~~-------------- Work Plan No. ~2~ Title of Job: Mountain _ Goat Census Job No. 1 and Distribution Studies Period Covered: April 1, 1963 through M3.rch 31, 1964 ABSTRACT During this segment an attempt was made to determine the population and distribution of mountain goats in the Collegiate Range and on Mt. Evans by monthly aerial flights of the areas. All but three flights in the Collegiate Range were successful in observing goats. The goats were in groups ranging from'one to 28 indivicuals. The mountains on wh i.ch goats were observed in the Collegiate Range we re : Mt. Shavano, Mt. Antero, Mt. Grizzly, Mt. Mamma, and Mt. Princeton. No goats were observed in the Mt. Evans being discontinued until spring. area. The flights in this area are Objectives: 1. Determine the population and distribution, in the Collegiate Range and on Mt. Evans. 2. Determine the extent and direction mountain goats on these ranges. 3. Define the general cirteria for winter and summer range for goats in these areas in terms of topography, vegetative type or types, elevation, and snow cover. Techniques 1. by seasons, of seasonal migration of mountain goats or movement of Used: Population and distribution -- Flights in Department owned or rented, airplane or helicopter at approximately monthly intervals. So far as feaSible, the flights will occur at the same period of the day, and on or near the same date each month. The crew wi.Ll, consist of pilot and the project assistant. Helicopter flights to be made in June and in October of each year for classification counts. �- 318 - 2. Migration and movements -- As described in 1. Coverage in all flights will be such as to provide observational opportunity at all elevations holding the possibility of goat occurence. 3. Range requirements -- Record, for each goat concentration or group, at time of observation, the topography, vegetative type or types, position as to timberline, the approximate elevation, and condition of snow cover. Correlate data with numbers of goats by months and seasons. MOUNTAIN GOAT CENSUS AND DISTRIBUTION STUDIES Dale Hibbs Monthly aerial flights were initiated in April of 1963 and will continue through March 31, 1964. The purpose of these flights is to determine the population and distribution of goats in the Collegiate Range and on Mt. Evans. The flights are made such as to provide observational opportunity at all elevations holding the possibility of goat occurrence. All flights were made in a PA-l8, Super Cub or in a Helicopter. In general the area covered in the Collegiate Range was from Mt. Taylor on the south to Mt. Harvard on the north. Mountain goats were observed on Mt. Shavano, Mt. Ant ero , Nt , Grizzly, Mt. Mamma , and Mt. Princeton in groups ranging from one to 28 individuals. All flights with the exception of three were successful in locating goats in the Collegiate Range. Table I gives the results of the flights in the Collegiate Range. To date the flights in the Ht. Evans area have been unsuccessful in finding any goats. The monthly flights of this area have been discontinued until spring, when better flying and observational conditions prevail. �- 319 - Table I.-- Results of aerial mountain goat observations Range, 1963. Date Flight Time (hrs.) April 12 April 14 May 3 Hay 4 May 18 2:00 2:00 1:40 2:00 1:00 June 11 1:00 June 20 2:00 June 27 2:00 July 3 ''''July 10 1:30 2:23 July 23 2:30 Aug. 5 1:30 Aug. 23 1:30 Sept. 9 1:00 Sept. 21 1:30 ,'<-Oct. 10 1:30 in the Collegiate E1ev. Female Kid unct . Total Location 12,500 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 2 0 4 0 6 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 11 0 0 11 0 0 0 11 0 0 0 6 1 0 0 0 (1) 0 0 0 (1) (1) (7) (1) (2) (3) (3) (1) 0 0 (7) 2 (7) 2 2 (2) 19 (7) (4) (8) (2) 2(1) (4) (8) 2 (4) (4) (5) 2 4 (3) (9) 8 4 (1) (3) (4) 1 0 0 0 1 1 7 1 2 3 3 1 7 4 7 10 7 12 11 2 19 7 4 8 2 22 4 8 21 4 4 5 21 4 3 9 14 5 Mt. Antero 10,500 12,500 11,000 11,500 12,000 12,000 11,500 11,000 11,000 12,000 12,000 10,000 12,000 12,000 12,700 12,500 13,000 13,000 12,000 13,000 12,500 12,000 12,000 12,500 12,000 12,500 11,000 11,000 11,000 10,500 12,000 11,000 12,500 12,000 11,500 11,000 12,000 ° 0 0 0 0 3 2 0 4 0 4 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 0 0 8 0 0 0 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 3 4 Mt, Shavano Mt. Antero Mt. Princeton Mt. Antero Mt. Princeton Mt. Princeton Mt. Antero Mt. Grizzly Mt. Shavano Mt. Shavano Mt. Princeton Mt. Shavano Mt. Princeton Mt. Shavano Mt. Shavano Mt. Shavano Mt. Shavano Mt. Princeton Mt. Antero Mt. Princeton Mt. Mamma Mt. Shavano Mt. Antero Mt. Princeton Mt. Shavano Mt. Antero Mt. Princeton Mt. Princeton Mt. Shavano Mt. Shavano Mt. Antero Mt. Princeton Mt. Shavano Mt. Shavano Mt. Grizzly Mt. Antero Mt. Princeton �- 320 - Table 1.-- Results of aerial mountain Range, 1963. (Continued) goat observations in the Collegiate Date Flight Time (hr s , ) Elev. Female Kid Un c L, Total Location Nov. 15 Dec. 14 2:00 2:00 12,000 12,400 0 0 9 0 19 21 28 21 Mt. Shavano Mt. Shavano TOTALS 31 hrs. 3 min. 38 70 148 301 * () In helicopter, all others in PA-18. These are probably male goats. This is based on ground sex ratio counts in these areas. Prepared Date: by: Dale Hibbs January, Approved 1965 by: Richard N. Denney Project Leader Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �- 321 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO Bighorn Sheep and Mountain Goat Investigations W-4l-R-14 Project No. 2 Job No. 2 Work Plan No. Title of Job. Review of Literature. Census and Ecology of the Mt. Goat Period Covered: April 1, 1963 to December 31, 1963. ABSTRACT Negative report, in that this job has not been completed. that it will be completed during the next work segment. It is anticipated Objectives: 1. Determine 2. Ascertain worthwhile procedures, and prevent repetition of methods and approaches previously determined as unsuccessful, in the research proposed in Work Plan 2, Job 1 and Job 3. Techniques and evaluate present recorded knowledge on the mountain goat. Used: To examine, abstract, and make bibliographic to the research described. Prepared by: Dale Hibbs Date: January, reference Approved: 1965 to literature applicable Richard N. Denney Project Leader Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator ��- 323 - JOB COMPLETION RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT COLORADO State of REPORT Bighorn Sheep and Mountain Goat Investigations Project No. W-4l-R-14 Work Plan No. 2 ----------------------------- Title" of Job. Ecology of the Mountain Period Covered: June 10, 1963 to September Job No. 3 Goat 30, 1963. ABSTRACT Monthly flights were initiated in April, 1963, and will continue through March, 1964, to aid in determining numbers and distribution of mountain goats in the Collegiate Range. Field work began in June, 1963 and continued A total of 38 mountain through September, goats were located in the Collegiate 1963. Range during the summer work period. The three main areas of goat concentration were on Mt. Shavano, Mt. Antero, and Mt. Princeton. A very high reproductive nanny:kid rate was observed in the Mt. Shavano herd -- the ratio being 100:150. Fecal samples were collected and analyzed by the Veterinarian Department at Colorado State University, for presence of internal parasites. All samples but one were negative. Very low mortality was observed -- one kid goat disappeared during the summer. Objectives: 1. Determine the mountain goat population in the Collegiate peaks, or other logical territorial divisions. Range by areas, 2. Determine the location and movements to physiographic, vegetative, and climatic factors. 3. of goats as related Gather, so far as opportunity permits, ecological importance in the following information categories: of biological and �- 324 - a. b. c. d. e. f. 4. Population structure -- ratio of males:females:yearlings:kids. Reproductive data. Food habits and feeding behavior. Range condition and requirements (general). Competition with big game and domestic stock. Effects of environmental factors such as weather, predators, accidents, interspecific strife, parasites and diseases, etc., on mountain goats. Development Techniques plan for the goats in the Collegiate Range. Used: Monthly aerial flights of the area supplemented by systematic foot travel of specific areas or localities were used to locate goats. Records of weather, activity, topography, vegetative type, number of animals, age classes, and sex ratios, are systematically recorded for each sighting of goats, while on area coverage. ECOLOGY OF THE MOUNTAIN GOAT Dale Hibbs The Collegiate Range is located approximately 25 miles northwest of Salida, southcentral Colorado, and lies almost entirely in the San Isabel National Fores t. Field work began in June, 1963, and continued through September 30, 1963. Daily trips were made into the Collegiate Range in an attempt to locate and census mountain goats. This was accomplished by foot travel into the area and by monthly aerial flights of the area. A twen t.y-p owe r spotting scope and binoculars were used to observe the goats and areas of possible goat occurrence. During the early part of the surnme r an attempt was made to locate the main areas of goat concentration throughout the range. All of the major mountains in the area were covered both on foot and by airplane. The areas covered were Mt. Taylor, Mt. Shavano, Mt. Antero, Mt. Princeton, Mt. Yale and Ht. Harvard. All leads were traced out with respect to possible sightings of mountain goats throughout the area. During the course of the summer field work a total of 38 mountain goats were observed in the Collegiate Range. The areas and sex ratios of the goats observed are tabulated in Table 1. The three main areas of goat concentration we r e on Mt. Shavano, Mt. Antero, and Mt. Princeton, with the largest goat herd being on Mt. Shavano, Figure 1. The field wor k during the latter part of the summer consisted primarily of s t udy Lng the activities of the Mt. Shavano herd. A base camp was set up from which daily observations of the goats vere made. �- 325 - Table 1. -- The number Collegiate and area of occurrence Range, 1963. of mountain goats in the Unclassified Total Females Kids Males Yearlings Mt. Shavano 8 11 4 2 0 25 Mt. Antero 0 0 4 0 0 4 Mt. Princeton 0 0 5 0 (4) 9 TOTAL 8 11 13 2 4 38 sex ratio counts. Area () Probably males. Based on ground The Mt. Shavano herd was the only herd that contained any female goats, and thus any reproduction. The reproductive rate in this herd was high, the nanny: kid ratio being 100:150. Of the eight adult females present in the herd, four produced twin kids and four produced single kids. This is an extremely high reproductive rate with respect to other goat herds in Idaho, Montana, and South Dakota. It is thought that the high reproductive rate can be partially attributed to relatively mild winter in 1962 and a healthy goat herd. Fecal samples were collected from the three main goat herds and analyzed by the Veterinarian Department at Colorado State University to determine the presence, if any, of internal parasites. All of samples analyzed were negative with the exception of a pooled sample from the Mt. Princeton herd. Two larvae of the family Trichostrongylidae (stomachworm) were found in this sample. This is a very low incidence of parasitism and is not considered to be detrimental to the goat population. The only mortality observed during the field work was the disappearance of one kid goat. It is not known whether the kid was killed by a predator or succumbed to natural causes, as no remains were found. A plant collection was begun of species occurring in the area. It is anticipated that the collection will be completed during the summer of 1964. Prepared Date: by: Dale Hibbs .janua r v , 1~~G5 Approved by: Richard Project N. Denney Leader Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �� https://cpw.cvlcollections.org/files/original/3d17bd3b826ad6e545f17156f07c237a.pdf 17f9888bf91b1758aa28ad8011583731 PDF Text Text - 327 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO ------~~~~~-------------An Ecological Investigation of the Project No. Cache la Poudre Deer Herd, Colorado W-l05-R-5 Work Plan No. 3 Environmental Studies Job No. 1 Climatic Environment Period Covered: Personnel: January, 1964 - December, 1964 Dean E. Medin, Allen E. Anderson, Kenneth A. Porter ABSTRACT Environmental measurement stations have been established on each of five deerrange study areas (lower-winter, middle-winter, upper-winter, transitional, summer) and.have been in continuous operation since December, 1960. Station sites were selected to characterize that portion of the environment on which deer ecology studies are presently being carried out. Each of the five elevational study areas encompasses approximately 500 acres. A small south-easterly exposed ridge within the prevalent browse type was the station site selected for each of the three winter range areas. Transitional and summer range measurement stations were located on similar southeast ridge exposures in the dominant forest type occurring at these elevations. Stations were located approximately midway in a given study area's elevational spread. Data recorded weekly (monthly on the summer range area during the mid-winter period) on each of the five elevation levels include: continuous air temperature and relattve humidity, maximum and minimum soil temperature, average wind velocity, wind direction, precipitation, soil moisture, snow depths on four contrasting expo~ures, snow and crust type classification, and supplementary notes or measurements of wind gust velocity, depth of snow over soil temperature installation, condition of soil surface, and type and extent of cloud cover. Data measured and recorded during the reporting period (1964) have been summarized and are presented in condensed form in Appendices I-V. Recommendations: Continue operation of environmental measurement stations on each of the five elevational study areas. Summarize data obtained in both tabular and IBM pu~ch card form. Prepare monthly and annual summary tables for each station. �- 328 Objective: Determine the local climate on each of five selected study locations believed to be representative of the lower-winter, middle-winter, upperwinter, transitional, and summer ranges of the herd so that data relevant to the biota under study can be adequately interpreted, particularly from the standpoint of elevational relationships. Techniques Used: Installation.--A 24-foo~ by lO-foot barbed-wire exclosure was constructed on each site to protect the installation from domestic stock. Weather shelters were installed and secured by bolting to 4-by-4 inch cross supports and uprights. Wood in contact with the soil was creosoted to prolong its usability. Uprights were drilled to allow raising or lowering of the shelter to compensate for snow depths. Appropriate supports for the precipitation gauge and anemometer were installed within the exclosure. The entire installation was guyed with steel aircraft cable with turnbolt attachments, insuring firmness and instrument stability. Instrumentation.--A Weather Bureau "cotton belt" instrument shelter houses a Bendix-Friez Model 594 hygrothermograph; standard maximum and minimum thermometers mounted on Townsend supports; a sling psychrometer; and a kit-box containing ink, alcohol, oil, and other necessary servicing items. A metal rod was. attached to one side of the shelter to serve as a weighing bar for precip1tation gauge contents. A Kahl hygrothermograph (Model WE-24-0l), equipped with a 3l-day clockwork, is used at the summer range station during the mid-winter period and is read monthly. A three-cup totalizing anemometer, a standard unshielded 8-inch precipitation gauge, and a'metal soil-temperature box were also installed in each exclosure. The soil-temperature box houses Weather Bureau type maximum and minimum thermometers in a me taL tube at a depth between 5 and 7 inches below the soil sur faca ; The soil was removed at the time of installation and packed lightly back into place after the soil-temperature box had been properly positioned. A small vane-type wind direction incrfcator was mounted on each weathar 'Stle!ter. All instruments have been placed approximately 36-inches above the ground surface, considered comparable to "deer height". Methods and procedures used in servicing instruments and maintaining records are essentially those out.Lf.nedby the Institute of Arctic and Alpine Research (1958) and the U. S. Weather Bureau (1955). Soil Moisture.--Soil mo:l:-sture samples from a depth of 5-7 inches are collected weekly from a soil pit adjacent to the station installation. One side of the pit is exposed with a mattock to remove dry material and about one pint of soil is spooned into a polyethylene collection bag. After removing excess air, the bag is sealed, tagged as to date and area, 'and p laced in a canvas bag for protection. In the laboratory the soil is sieved through a 2 mm. screen and percent moisture determined by oven drying. �- 329 - Snow.--Snow stake lines were established on four environmental situations at each measurement station: a southeast-sloping ridgetop, a draw adjacent to the ridge, open south-facing slope, and forested north-facing slope. Ten steel fence posts, equidistantly spaced, comprise each snow stake transect line, yielding a total of 40 snow depth observations at each station. Stakes are calibrated in one-tenth foot intervals. In addition to depth, the snow along each stake line is classified as to specific type and crust characteristics developed by U. S. Forest Service snow studies (Appendix VI). Experience with the classification indicates that a reasonably precise selection of categories can be made. Recording Forms, Summarization, and Servicing Kits.--All stations are serviced weekly (with the exception of the,summer range station which is serviced monthly during the months of Dece~ber-April) and data are recorded on appropriate forms (Appendix VII). D?ta are summarized monthly (Appendix VIII) and annually (Appendices I-V). Three specialized servicing kits have been developed in "back-pac~1 form to assist in servicing the stations, all of which are located varying distances from roads. The kits include all the necessary forms, charts, soil-sample bags, clip boards, spare parts, etc., to properly meet all servicing needs. ��- 331 - CLIMATIC ENVIRONMENT Dean E. Medin Findings: Five environment measurement stations have been installed on each of five deer-range study locations. Station 1 (Hewlett Gulch -- 6,440') represents the lower-winter range area; Station 2 (Kelly Flats -- 7,000') the middle-winter; Station 3 (Sevenmile Creek -- 8,120') the upper-winter; and Stations 4 (Little Beaver Creek -- 9,940') and 5, (Crown Point -- 10,320') the transitional and summer ranges. With the exception of the summer range station (Crown Point), all stations were in operation by January 1, 1961. The summer range station was installed during June of 1961.' All have been in continuous operation since the dates of establishment. Data recorded weekly on each of the five elevational levels include: continuous air temperature and relative humidity, maximum and minimum soil temperature, average wind direction, precipitation, soil moisture, snow depths on four contrasting slope exposures, snow and crust type classification, and supplementary notes regarding wind gust velocity, depth of snow over the soil temperature box, condition of surface soil, and type and extent of cloud cover. Appendices I-V present in condensed form the large mass of raw data collected at each environment measurement station. The factors measured are summarized and presented in tabular form only. The value of the data lies in its eventual use as an interpretive aid as related phases of the deer study become more advanced or completed. The data summarized in the annual sheets should not be interpreted as "regional" or "standard" weather observations i~ the sense of Weather Bureau determinations. The environmental measurement station locations and methods of instrumentation were cho'sen to characterize the environment in which deer exist and on which studies relating to deer ecology are presently being carried out. Results may not necessarily reflect regional climate or be directly comparable to standard weather observations. Data for the years 1961, 1962, and 1963 were reported in Game Research Reports for July, 1962 (Part Two); January, 1964; and January, 1965. Acknowledgements: The Institute of Arctic and Alpine Research, University of Colorado, gave valuable advice concerning the orientation, establishment, and operation of the 'enVironmental measurement stations. Institute' personnel have been generous with both time and counsel. Several student assistants have aided in the weekly reading of the stations. These include: Doyle Markham, William E. Jones, and Randall J. Buhler. Data summarization for 1964 was done by Doyle Markham. �- 332 - LITERATURE CITED Institute of Arctic and Alpine Research. 1958. Servicer's Manual: A summary of the procedures to be used in collecting certain data from environment measuring stations. University of Colorado, Boulder, 8 pp. U. S. Forest Service. 1953. Washington, 146 ~p. Avalanche handbook. U. S. Govt. Printing Office, U. S. Weather Bureau. 1955. Instructions for climatological observers. Circular B, Ed. la, U. S. Govt. Printing Office, Washington, 70 pp. Prepared by: Date: Dean E. Medin Approved by:__~W~a~y~n~e~W~.~S=a=n~d~f~o~r~t~ _ Associate Wildlife Researcher Game Research Chief J_a_n_u~a~r~y~, 1~9_6~5 _ F. C. K1einschniti Federal Aid Coordinator �APPENDIX I Deer Ecology Investigations - Cache la Poudre River Drainage, Colorado - Annual Summary of Environmental Data 1964 6 440' Year Elevation Hewlett Gulch Area Station No. 1 TemEerature SOilz °F.z 5-7 In. DeEth ReI. Hum. z% Soil Moist.,% Dry Wt. TemEerature Airz of. Precip. , 5-7 In. DeEth Mean of Mean of Mean Mean Mean of Mean Mean Inches Weekly Mean of Daily Weekly Weekly Weekly Daily Daily Daily Water Determinations Max. & Min. Month Max. Max. Min. Min. Max. & Min. Max. Max. Min. Min. Max. & Min. 0.00 7.0 45 33 40 20 27 44 30 20 40 3 Jan. 56 0.34 7.4 50 35 27 29 41 26 45 15 2 56 36 Feb. 0.86 9.4 56 38 31 46 26 55 28 0 17 39 62 Mar. 11. 6 2.52 55 50 40 34 59 65 39 29 60 16 68 Apr. 1. 93 10.7 52 59 50 45 77 68 52 41 27 64 82 May 0.78 7.3 54 64 45 53 81 75 59 48 70 34 June 86 0.62 2.9 48 77 68 65 87 86 73 59 51 86 July 93 0.86 3.5 49 72 62 82 58 86 66 39 52 79 Aug. 92 0.31 2.6 51 68 59 77 52 82 59 46 72 28 Sept. 85 0.07 2.9 44 59 50 47 72 68 52 Oct. 38 24 65 79 0.27 4.7 52 46 40 34 53 59 27 38 14 49 67 Nov. 0.17 4.5 47 35 28 42 23 45 32 22 -13 60 42 Dec. 8.73 6.2 50 53 20 45 87 61 46 34 -l3 93 58 Year 8-inch Oven Dry Method Hygrograph Maximum and Minimum Thermometers Thermograph (Bourdon Tube) InstruPrecip. (Hair) (Weather Bureau Type) ments & Gage Methods Snow DeEth z Ft. Wind Draw Rid!ijeTOE South EXEosure North EXEosure Maximum Predominant Mean Total Min. Mean Max. Min. Mean Max. Max. Min. Mean Max. Min. Mean Direction Recorded Gustzmeh. Month Miles Ve1ocit~zmEh. 0.0 0.00 0.01 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.1 0.0 0.1 0.0 0.00 0.0 42 W 4.42 3401 Jan. 0.0 0.02 0.06 0.1 0.0 0.4 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.06 0.2 0.0 26 W 3.41 2291 Feb. 0.0 0.07 0.23 0.4 0.0 0.8 0.0 0.02 0.3 0.24 0.0 0.8 26 s-sw 3.56 Mar. 2735 1.5 0.08 0.0 0.17 0.7 1.4 0.0 0.01 0.0 0.2 0.0 0.24 28 E-SE 3.86 2765 April 0.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 16 Variable 3.91 2902 May 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 24 SW-W 3.18 2295 June 0.0 0.00 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 20 NE 3.08 2222 July 0.0 0.00 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 14 SW 3.28 2504 Aug. 0.0 0.00 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.00 10 W-SW 3.25 2396 Sept. 0.0 0.00 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.0 10 SE 1997 2.~0 Oct. 0.07 0.0 0.08 0.5 0.0 0.09 0.5 0.0 0.07 0.6 0.0 0.4 7 SW-W 3.02 2250 Nov. 0.04 0.0 0.08 0.4 0.0 0.4 0.0 0.01 0.2 0.04 0.0 0.3 24 SW-S 3.49 2495 Dec. 1.5 0.0 0.0 0.7 1.4 0.0 0.6 0.0 42 W-SW 3.45 30253 Year Dwyer Wind Totalizing InstruSnow Stakes Wind Vane Anemometer ments & Meter (3-cw_ Methods - - w w w �APPENDIX II Deer Ecology Investigations - Cache la Poudre River Drainage, Colorado - Annual Summary of Environmental Data Station No. 2 Area Kell:z:Flats Elevation 7 000' . Year 1964 TemEerature Aira OF. TemEerature SOi1z ~F.z 5-7 In. DeEth Re1. Hum. 1% Soil Moist.,% Dry Wt. Mean Mean Mean of Mean Mean Mean of Mean of 5-7 In. DeEth Precip. , Daily Daily Daily Weekly Weekly Weekly Daily Mean of Weekly Inches Month Max. Maxi Min. Min. Max. & Min. Max. Max. Min. Min. Max. & Min. Max.& Min. Determinations Water Jan. 51 37 0 17 27 43 40 16 24 32 49 5.0 0.07 Feb. 52 34 14 - 2 24 43 39 23 24 32 56 5.0 0.20 Mar. 64 39 0 17 28 54 45 23 27 36 58 5.5 0.52 April 67 48 12 27 38 59 52 33 38 45 . 13.6 61 2.45 May 82 62 24 38 50 73 65 42 48 56 56 1.24 8.9 June 84 69 31 45 57 77 71 43 51 61 56 5.9 0.90 July 91 84 47 55 70 84 83 60 64 73 54 3.1 0.65 Aug. 86 76 34 48 62 81 78 54 56 67 55 1.48 5.3 Sept. 81 70 26 42 56 77 73 47 55 64 53 1.31 6.1 Oct. 76 63 21 35 49 70 65 44 47 56 48 4.0 0.03 Nov. 64 46 13 25 36 57 51 32 37 44 53 3.2 0.14 Dec. 56 40 -13 20 30 43 41 24 27 34 53 3.8 0.38 w Year 91 56 -13 32 44 84 w 59 16 42 50 54 5.8 9.37 .j::"" InstruThermograph (Bourdon Tube) Maximum and Minimum Thermometers Hygrograph Oven Dry Method 8-inch ments & (Weather Bureau Type) (Hair) Precip. Methods Gage Wind Snow DeEthz Ft. Total Mean Predominant Maximum North EXEosure South EXEosure Draw Ridge TOE Month Miles Ve1ocitXzmEh. Direction Recorded GustzmEh. Max. Min. Mean Max. Min. Mean Max. Min. Mean Ma~. Min. Mean Jan. 5905 7.68 W-SW 50 0.1 0.0 0.03 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.1 0.0 0.01 0.0 0.0 0.00 Feb. 4357 6.49 SW-W 40 0.3 0.0 0.08 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.1 0.0 0.04 0.0 0.0 0.00 Mar. 4699 6.11 SW 36 0.7 0.0 0.26 0.2 0.0 0.02 0.5 0.0 0.14 0.3 0.0 0.06 April 4293 1.7 0.0 0.40 0.7 0.0 0.10 1.5 0.0 0.24 1.1 0.0 5.91 E-SE 38 0.16 May 3946 5.33 Variable 32 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0'.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 June 3476 4.84 W-SW 40 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 July 3269 4.50 E 23 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 Aug. 3451 4.56 SW-W 30 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 Sept. 3405 4.65 Variable 34 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 Oct. 3093 4.33 NE 32 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 Nov. 4402 5.90 SW-W 46 0.5 0.0 0.08 03 0.0 0.03 0.4 0.0 0.07 0.3 0.0 0.04 Dec. 4278 6.01 Variable 32 0.3 0.0 0.09 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.3 0.0 0.08 0.1 0.0 0.02 Year 1.7 0.0 48574 5.55 1.5 0.0 W-SW 50 0.7 0.0 1.1 0.0 InstruTotalizing Wind Dwyer men t s & Anemometer Vane Wind Snow Stakes Methods C3-cup) Meter - - - �APPENDIX III Deer Ecology Investigations - Cache la Poudre River Drainage, Colorado - Annual Summary of Environmental Data Area Sevenmile Creek 81120' Year Station No. 3 Elevation 1964 oF TemEeraturc Air1 • TemEerature SOi1z °F'I 5-7 In. DeEth ReI. Hum. z% Soil Moist.,% Dry Wt. Mean Mean Mean of Mean P'rec Lp. , Mean Mean of Mean of 5-7 In. DeEth Daily Daily Daily Weekly Weekly Weekly Daily Mean of Weekly Inches Month Max Max. Min. Min. Max. & Min. Max. Max. Min. Min. Max. & Min. Max. & Min. Determinations Water 40 32 14 23 36 15 23 30 52 0.65 Jan. 52 3.2 - 2 0.90 10 40 22 24 29 61 5.0 Feb. 48 31 21 35 - 1 1.24 Mar. 54 42 60 34 0 14 24 22 27 34 7.9 58 60 2.76 April 25 34 56 51 32 37 44 10.3 63 44 9 1.37 46 70 62 37 44 May 77 20 53 55 7.2 58 35 1.28 q8 40 48 64 30 42 73 58 57 5.6 June 78 53 71 67 81 79 60 62 51 0.93 July 80 46 53 2.3 86 1.65 81 76 4.7 71 45 58 50 54 65 53 Aug. 83 34 1.79 74 72 62 42 45 53 52 4.4 Sept. 78 68 28 55 0.03 48 69 64 43 46 55 43 3.2 74 61 21 35 Oct. 0.42 43 2.0 10 57 51 29 36 52 Nov. 62 42 24 33 1.41 57 38 23 27 32 3.6 26 42 Dec. 47 34 3. 18 14.43 40 48 5.0 81 56 15 54 30 41 Year 86 52 - 2 8-inch Maximum and Minimum Thermometers Hygrograph Oven Dry Method Thermograph (Bourdon Tube) InstruPrecip. (Weather Bureau Type) (Hair) ments & Ga e Methods Wind Snow DeEthl Ft. Maximum Draw Ridge TOE Predominant North EX120sure South EXEosure Total Mean Max. Min. Mean Max. Min. Mean Max. Min. Mean Max. Min. Mean Direction Recorded GustzmEh. Month Miles Ve1ocit~zmEh. 07 32 0.6 0.0 0.25 0.7 0.0 0.14 0.4 0.0 0.14 0.4 0.0 0 .. 4515 5.87 SW-W Jan. 0.9 0.0 0.38 0.6 0.0 0.06 0.6 0.0 0.12 0.3 0.0 0.08 W 35 Feb. 3221 4.80 1.6 0.2 0.75 1.2 0.0 0.27 1.0 0.0 0.35 0.6 0.0 0.22 Mar. W 33 4.99 3829 2.9 0.0 1.06 1.9 0.0 0.25 1.4 0.0 0.30 1.4 0.0 0.31 28 4.91 SE-SW April 3570 1.0 0.0 0.03 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 May 28 Variable 2718 3.69 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 16 0.0 3.79 SW June 2745 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 14 3.18 E July 2302 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 20 SW Aug. 2546 3.35 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 23 SW 2544 3.49 Sept. 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 26 SW 2502 3.49 Oct. 0.4 0.0 0.09 0.4 0.0 0.04 0.5 0.0 0.08 0.3 0.0 0.05 36 SW-W 3722 4.99 Nov. 0.6 0.0 0.17 0.5 0.0 0.13 0.6 0.0 0.21 0.4 0.0 0.15 12 W-SW 4234 5.86 Dec. 1.4 0.0 1.4 0.0 1.9 0.0 2.9 0.0 36 W-SW 4.39 Year 38448 Dwyer Wind Totalizing InstruSnow Stakes Wind Vane Anemometer ments & Meter Methods C3-cup) - - - co co \J1 �APPENDIX IV Deer Ecology Investigations - Cache la Poudre River Drainage, Colorado - Annual Summary of Environmental Data 8 940' 1964 4 Area Little Beaver Elevation Year Station No. TemEerature SOilz ~F.z 5-7 In. DeEth ReI. Hum. 2% Soil Moist.,% Dry Wt. TemEerature Airz of. Precip. , Mean of Mean of Mean Mean Mean of Mean Mean 5-7 In. DeEth Daily Daily Daily Daily Weekly Weekly Weekly Mean of Weekly Inches Max.& Min. Determinations Water Month Max. Max. Min. Min. Max. & Min. Max. Max. Min. Min. Max. & Min. 61 4.1 0.62 31 30 21 10 20 15 25 Jan. 50 31 - 5 1.10 20 21 69 3.6 17 31 29 25 Feb. 47 29 6 - 5 1.27 6.7 41 29 65 10 21 32 23 26 58 Mar. 33 - 3 65 20.0 3.17 44 32 34 39 April 43 21 32 54 59 6 1.58 11.2 56 70 61 34 41 51 77 17 45 May 58 33 58· 8.0 0.96 37 45 57 64 40 52 75 69 June 79 24 1.17 4.0 54 79 57 68 44 66 85 56 July 89 80 53 4.5 2.17 63 57 80 75 47 50 71 45 58 Aug. 82 33 1.04 4.8 72 60 75 43 49 55 23 39 58 Sept. 78 66 0.11 40 50 45 61 36 16 31 45 68 73 3 -. 4 Oct. 59 0.58 57 3.5 44 27 32 38 21 31 52 60 42 6 Nov. 1.48 63 4.3 21 24 28 34 32 24 Dec. 48 32 15 - 1 59 6.5 15.25 44 52 15 37 39 85 89 51 27 Year - 5 Oven Dry Method 8-inch Hygrograph Maximum and Minimum Thermometers Thermograph (Bourdon Tube) InstruPrecip. (Weather Bureau Type) (Hair) ments & Gage Methods Snow DeEth 2Ft. Wind Draw Rid~e TOE Predominant Maximum North EXEosure South EXl20sure Mean Total Direction Recorded GustzmEh. Max. Min. Mean Max. Min. Mean. Max. Min. Mean Max. Min. Mean Month Miles Ve1ocit~zmEh. 40 0.4 0.0 0.22 0.5 0.0 0.08 0.4 0.0 0.12 0.5 0.0 0.07 SW-W Jan. 2832 3.69 0.7 0.0 0.41· 0.9 0.0 0.17 1.0 0.0 0.36 0.8 0.0 0.14 12 NW 1550 2.30 Feb. 1.0 0.2 0.69 1.3 0.0 0.30 1.3 0.0 0.39 1.0 0.0 0.20 30 S-SW 2.99 Mar. 2298 0.0 1.02 1.9 0.0 0.38 2.2 0.0 0.48 1.6 0.0 0.34 2.6 9 April 2044 2.85 E-SE 1.0 0.0 0.02 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 12 SW 1758 2.37 May 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 10 SW June 1696 2.33 1.70 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0. 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 8 SE July 1219 1.82 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 14 S-SW Aug. l393 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 10 2.00 W-SW Sept. 1448 1.71 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 10 Oct. SW 1227 0.4 0.0 0.14 0.4 0.0 0.08 0.7 0.0 0.15 0.4 0.0 0.07 14 SW 2.82 2102 Nov. 0.6 0.1 0.28 0.9 0.0 0.20 1.0 0.0 0.30 0.9 0.0 0.16 12 Variable 3.60 Dec. 2598 1.6 0.0 1.9 0.0 2.2 0.0 2.6 0.0 40 SW 2.53 22165 Year Dwyer ~Hnd Totalizing InstruSnow Stakes Wind Vane Anemometer ments & (J-cup) Methods - - w w 0"\. �APPENDIX V Deer Ecology Investigations - Cache 1a Poudre River Drainage, Colorado - Annual Summary of Environmental Data 101320' 1964 Year Elevation Crown Point Area Station No. 5 Soil Moist.,% Dry Wt. TemEerature Soi11 °F'I 5-7 In. DeEth ReI. Hum. % TemEerature Airz of. Precip. , Mean of 5-7 In. DeEth Mean of Mean Mean Mean Mean of Mean Inches Daily Mean of Weekly Weekly Weekly Weekly Daily Daily Daily Water Determinations Max.& Min. Max. Max. Min. Min. Max.& Min. Max. Max. Min. Min. Max.& Min. Month 1.69 11. 6 67 28 26 30 30 26 10 -14 2 40 19 Jan. 1.38 10.2 74 29 28 30 30 28 8 -10 - 2 17 Feb. 35 1.89 14.4 66 30 32 27 27 32 15 5 Mar. 44 26 - 9 2.58 12.6 31 68 30 30 32 32 27 17 4 April 49 36 2.08 18.5 65 40 30 33 36 49 38 13 28 48 66 May 1.34 12.9 66 46 33 38 59 46 ·55 36 71 26 56 June 1.82 10.2 60 58 64 50 51 60 66 42 48 80 71 July 2.04 9.9 64 54 41 47 62 66 51 41 29 73 62 Aug. 1.23 9.7 61 48 42 37 60 55 45 21 35 67 Sept. 55 11.1 0.21 53 40 31 34 46 40 51 29 15 62 50 Oct. 0.96 9.0 72 31 22 27 39 35 25 17 2 33 Nov. 54 2.51 6.9 81 28 31 31 26 26 14 -10 8 20 Dec. 34 11.4 19.73 66 22 34 38 43 66 32 22 41 -14 80 Year 8-inch Oven Dry Method Hygrograph Maximum and Minimum Thermometers Thermograph (Bourdon Tube) InstruPrecip. (Hair) (Weather Bureau Type) ments & Gage Methods Snow DeEth, Ft. Wind Draw Rid~e TOE South EXEosure North EXEosure Maximum Predominant Mean Total Max. Min. Mean Max. Min. Mean Max. Min. Mean Max. Min. Mean Recorded GustzmEh. Direction Month Miles Ve1ocitXzmEh. 2.3 0.4 1.66 1.8 1.4 1.55 1.7 1.2 1.45 3.0 0.6 1.84 " SW-W 10 1719 2.24 Jan. 3.6 0.6 2.36 2.5 2.0 2.14 2.5 1.6 2.03 3.3 1.3 2.61 1. 95 2 SW-NE Feo'. 1313 4.1 0.6 2.94 3.0 2.2 2.64 3.1 2.0 2.62 4.7 1.2 3.24 1.68 3 SE-W 129l Mar. 5.2 1.7 3.67 2.9 2.5 2.72 4.1 3.0 3.39 4.5 1.9 3.47 1. 96 4 SW April 1412 5.2 0.0 2.25 3.3 0.0 1.10 3.9 0.0 1.91 4.4 0.0 1.83 1.35 10 SW 1006 May 2.4 0.0 0.13 0.8 0.0 0.00 2.2 0.0 0.19 2.0 0.0 0.08 1.69 8 SW 1224 June 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.35 8 E 975 July 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 1.59 8 E-SE 1223 Aug. 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 1.44 10 SW 1031 Sept. 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 1.58 8 Variable 1142 Oct. 0.6 0.0 0.32 0.4 0.0 0.28 0.5 0.0 0.30 0.5 0.0 0.29 15 SW 2.03 1512 Nov. 2.6 0.4 2.02 2.3 0.5 2.12 2.4 0.5 1.89 3.3 0.6· 2.23 4 W-SW 2.07 1488 Dec. 4.7 0.0 3.9 0.0 3.3 0.0 5.2 0.0 1. 75 15 W-SW 15336 Year Dwyer Wind Totalizing InstruSnow Stakes Wind Vane Anemometer ments & Meter (3-cup) Methods - - - w w ....;,;)J �- 33~ - APPENDIX VI Standard Snow Terminologyll A. New: Snow falling or freshly fallen. 1. Dry: Fell at temperatures 5 degrees or more below freezing. Either refuses to pack or disintegrates if squeezed in the hand. a. Powder: Crystalline. Similar to whole wheat flour. (1) Fine: (2) Medium: Similar to bran. Similar to corn flakes. (3) Coarse: b. Granular: Irregular non-crystalline, sandy. (1) Fine: Similar to fine sand. (2) Medium: Similar to corn meal. (3) Coarse: Similar to'coarse ground coffee. c. Pellet: Round but irregular and rough finished. (1) Fine: Similar to birdshot. (2) Medium: Similar to BB shot. (3) Coarse: Similar to tapioca. 2. Damp: Fell at temperatures close to freezing - thawing. Packs readily in hand but will shatter. a. Flake: Very sticky. b. Granular: Packs very firmly. c. Hail: Frozen, slick-surfaced, globular. 3. Wet: Fell at temperatures above freezing. Snowball packs firm and becomes wet and slippery on surface. 'Water can be squeezed out with added pressure. a. Flake: Coarse and soggy. b. Granular or sleet: Melts on contact except with other snow. c. Hail: Coarse and soggy. d. Slush: Extreme form of wet snow, melts on contact. B. Old: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Snow which has settled or which has been packed. Old powder: Includes all types of dry snow. Will not form snowball. Old damp or wet: Same test as for new snow. Windpack: Snow made firm by wind, not crusted or slabbed. a. Dry: Brittle. b. Damp: Stiff like cake batter. c. Wet: Slushy on the surface. Corn: Damp or wet. A coarse textured snow similar to rock salt, the product of repeated thawing and freezing. Slush: Drips water when held in hand. SNOW CRUSTS A. Form. 1. Breakable: Will not support weight of 160 lb. man on foot. 2. Unbreakable: Supports weight of 160 lb. man on foot. 3. Variable: Breakable and unbreakable crusts interspersed. �- 339 - APPENDIX VI (Continued) B. Types. 1. Wind crust: 2. 3. 4. 5. 1/ Forms by wind blowing across or against a slope. Rippled, non-reflecting surface. Strong bond to undersurface. Fractures locally. Wind slab: Formed by wind action, particularly on lee slopes. Snow is under tension; has poor bond to undersurface. Fractures readily and extensively. May be soft or hard. Smooth, chalky surface. Sun crust: Light, thin, polished. Formed by strong sun action for a short period followed by freezing. Common crust: Rough, granular surface'. Formed by freezing and thawing. Becomes corn snow eventually •. Slush forms under high temperatures. Icy crust: A slushy surface frozen. Modified from U. S. Forest Service. (1953). �40 APPENDIX VII DEER ECOLOGY INVESTIGATIONS ENVIRONMENTAL DATA RECORD F'OR!1 (Page 1) Installation Station No Week Date Time Observer(s) ---------~Ar--e~a PrevoReade-D-a-t-e------------Current Weather: Temperature Trend___________ Visibility _ Precipitation Clouds (Cover, kind, etco) Additional Remarks, ---_------------------0 • ~--- --------.----------~----------------------------------.--------------------------TEMPERATURE : REL. HUMIDITY: PresoTemp=Min~Thermo OF PresoTemp~Hygroo -'OF Psychr.Wet Bulb 0Fv Dry OF MlneThc OF» Max~Th0 OF Mean Therm e 'I'emp , OF MinoHygrooTempo -OF 9Max• OF Mean HygrooTemp. . OF Pres.Soil Tempo (MinoTherm,,) . OF Soil MinoT OF p Soil Max.T-o---oF Mean Soi 1 Temp --OF Remarks _ Pres.Psychr RoHo. PresoHygrooR.H. Min..Hygro R.H. Remarks 0 0 %(Calc.below) % %~MaxoHygro.R.He__ % 0 0 PRECIPITATION: PrecipoG. Now , lbso Prevo Lbs , Total (wk.) Ibs. Total Inches (wko) Reset Ibs , Remarks oZ o oz •• oz. _ oz. Instantaneous Wind Vel a-Maxo mph '------.------------------------------Instantaneous Wind Velo-Min. mph Anemom.Miles: Now Prev Total Miles (wk~) .__ ___:_ Ave. vsi , (wko) _mph SOIL MOISTURE AND SNOW COVER: Wind Direction~ _ Wind Characteristics & Remarks _ Soil Moisture (5"-7") ~ Condition Soil Sur£ace, _ o _ Depth Snow Over Soil Tub~.~~---------fto Coudi ti on Snow Over SoU Tube. _ CALCULATION SPACE AND REMARKS: Remarks Psychro. Calculations: Trial NO 1 2 3 4 5 6 ~ro WBo' OF DB. OF Final CalcaR.H. % (enter under Pres.Psychr.R.H.underREL.HUMoabove) Servicing Information: _ , _ Q PRECIPe GAGE CALCULATIONS: I: I -------~.~----4_----Lbs , Oz. Reading Now: :.. : Reading Previous: Difference: ~~ ANEMQtI. CALCULATIONS: ~ Miles Read.iugNow: Reading Previous: Difference: (Use Back of Form for Addf.t LonaI Remarks) _ �- 341 APPENDIX VII (Continued) (Page 2) Snow DEER ECOLOGY INVESTIGATIONS ENVIRONMENTAL DATA RECORD FORM Station No. ~Area~ Date Time~ Preliminary Remarks North Stake Number ~--------~--------Week~---------------------Observer(s) _ _ South Draw Ridge 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 a 9 10 Totals Mean Time Read Snow Designation Crust Designation REMARKS North Exposure: ~ _ South Exposure: _ Draw: _ Ridge: ~------------------------------------------------------------------------ �APPENDIX VIII Deer Ecology Investigations - Cache 1a Poudre River Drainage, Colorado - Monthly Summary of Environmental Data Station No. Day Area Temp. Air, 0F. Max. Min. Mean I Elevation Relative Humidity, % Max. Min. Mean 1 2 3 4 5 6 Month Relative Temp. Air~ of. Humidity, % Max. Min. Mean Max. Min. Mean Temp. Soil, of. 5"7 in. Depth Max. Min. Mean (Page 1) Year "---- Precip., Inches Water Soil Moisture % Dry Wt. 5-7 in. Depth I =: 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 I 26 27 I 28 29 30 31 Month Month Mean Instruments & Methods w +=" ro- Thermo- Mean graph of (Bourdor Max. & Tube) Min. Hygrograph (Hair) Mean Thermoof graph Max. 6. (Bourdon Tube} Min. Mean of Hygrograph Daily Means (Hair) Mean I of Daily Means Max. and Min. 8-inch Thermometers Non-re(Weather cording Bureau Type) Prec:iJ>.. Gage Moisture Determination Balance �APPENDIX VIII (Continued) Deer Ecology Investigations - Cache la Poudre River Drainage, Colorado - Monthly Station No. Area Elevation I Wind Mean ~nstant.Instant.!DirecMean Depth, ft. ITotal Vel. Hax , North South Min. I tion i.Miles mph mph mphi Exposure Exposure Draw Day 1 I 2 i 3 4 5 6 7 ! 8 ! Data Month (Page 2) Year ---- Snow I I Summary of Environmental Type Classification North Exposure South Exposure Draw Ridge Snow Crust Snow Crust Snow Crust Snow Crust Ridge I ! i , I' J 9 t 10 I I I 11 12 13 I, 14 15 16 I 17 18 19 I 20 21 22 23 ! 24 25 I 26 27 28 , 29 30 I 31 Month Month Mean Instru- Totalizing ments & Anemometer Methods (3-cup) W +="" W- ! i ! Dwyer Wind Meter Wind Vane Snow Stakes ! U.S.F.S. Avalanche Handbook -- ��January, 1965 - 345 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO --------~~~~--------------------An Ecological Investigation of the Project No. W-105-R-5 Wor k P Ian No. Job No. _ 3 Period Covered: Personnel: --=::3:..- Cache la Poudre Deer Herd, Colorado Environmental Studies Vegetative Analysis January, 1964 - December, 1964. Dean E. Medin, Allen E. Anderson, Kenneth A. Porter. ABSTRACT Phenological development stages were observed and recorded for 27 plant species during the years 1961-1963. Development was observed systematically each week at five elevations (6,120' to 10,400') on contrasting slope exposures. Results have been summarized and are presented in tabular form. Vegetation was quantitatively described on each of five study areas (lower-winter, middle-winter, upper-winter, transitional, and summer ranges) during the summers of 1963 and 1964. The point quadrat method utilizing both aerial (crown) and ground (basal) contacts was used to estimate cover and composition of woody and semi-woody, forb, grass and grass-like, dead woody and semi-woody, and other components of the vegetation from a height of five feet to ground surface by onefoot intervals. Litter, rock, erosion pavement, and bare soil contacts were also recorded. Sample sizes varied from 295 to 366 permanently marked quadrats depending on the study area. Ground cover and vegetative composition by study area, plant group, and plantspecies are summarized and discussed. Mean annual production of three important browse species for the 1962, 1963, and 1964 growing seasons was estimated on each of three winter range study areas using weight estimate and double sampling methods. Yield estimates were made on 366 (lower-winter), 299 (middle-winter), and 295 (upper-winter) permanently marked 100-sq. ft. circular plots distributed systematically throughout the winter range study areas. Oven-dry mean weights of true mountain mahogany (Cercocarpus montanus), antelope bitterbrush (Purshia tridentata), and big sagebrush (Artemisia tridentata) yields with 90% confidence intervals are presented. Utilization of current annual growth by deer of each of the three browse species was estimated for the winters of 1962-63, 1963-64, and 1964-65 for each study area using categorized use percentages (0, 10, 30, 50, 70, 90) on the same permanent plots established to estimate yields. Average utilization percentages (by weight) of each species for each area with 90% confidence intervals are summarized and tabulated. �- 346 - Recommendations: Objectives: None. (1) Record the phenological development of selected range plants on five study locations believed to be representative of the lower-winter, middle-winter, upper-winter, transitional, and summer ranges of the herd. This will further our understanding of the seasonal patterns of forage use by deer at various elevational levels as evaluated by food preference studies (Work Plan 3, Job No.5). (2) Quantitatively describe the vegetation (by vegetative type) of each of the above study locations to: (a) provide basic data on vegetative cover and composition, and to (b) aid in interpretation of deer distribution, food preference, and activity as related to food and cover. (3) Estimate the mean yield and use of important browse species, on the winter range study locations to provide data relative to the effects of various population levels (Work Plan 4, Job No.1) on important seasonal food items. Techniques Used: Phenology.--Plant-development observations were made on 27 important forage or indicator species at five elevations. Plants observed were reasonably close to operational meteorological stations (Work Plan 3, Job No.1) so that general environmental conditions recorded by instruments approximated that influencing the plants. Observations on weather were recorded yearlong while plant phenology data were recorded from the beginning of growth in the spring until the appearance of heavy snows in late fall or early winter. The species observed and the elevations of associated meteorological stations are sho\vu in Table 1. Plant development was recorded on three different exposures (N = north, S = south, NA = no aspect) if the species occurred on more than one exposure. Absence of a species on some exposures or stations was due to its altitudinal or site limitations. Plant development stages recorded are summarized in Table 2. Individual plants of each species were staked along designated routes which were traversed weekly. Staked plants served as guides and reminders for stage entries, but several plants were observed of each species (if present) and a general conclusion as to the plant development stage was entered on prepared forms. Stages were entered on the field form by the numbers representing the various developmental phases. Vegetative description.--The vertical point quadrat method, originated by Levy and Madden (1933), utilizing both crown and basal contacts was used to describe the vegetation on each of the five elevational study areas. The equipment consisted of a tubular 7/8" aluminum conduit horizontal frame mounted on 5/8" steel rod uprights. Thumb screws on the horizontal frame allowed adjustment to a height of 5 feet above the ground surface. Two small 3-inch line levels, facing at right angles, were attached to the frame for leveling the equipment �- 347 - in both the vertical and horizontal planes. Two sleeves with thumbscrew adjustments were welded to the bottom of the vertical uprights. The frame was positioned for reading by driving one 18" x 3/4" angle-iron stake into the ground, placing one sleeve on this stake and orientating the frame on the west side and at a right angle to the transect line of travel. The westerly stake was then driven into the ground through the sleeve and the frame leveled with thumbscrews. After the data for a plot had been recorded the thumbscrews were loosened and the entire frame removed leaving the stakes in permanent position. Ten guide holes 6 inches apart were drilled through the conduit frame for quadrat pin projection. Pins were made of 3/16" carbon-tested drill rod in 6-foot lengths and sharpened to a needle point with a bevel approximately 1 inch long. Clothes pins were used as a brake to hold the quadrat pins at any desired height. Point contacts were recorded in two ways. All hits from a height of 5 feet to ground surface were "crown" contacts and recorded by I-foot height intervals. The same plant or different ones may have been hit once or more than once. After crown contacts were recorded the pin was lowered until it struck a plant base, litter, rock, erosion pavement, or bare soil; this was called a "basal" contact. Definitions of the various categories of contacts are as follows: Ground cover.--The proportion of the ground surface occupied by vertical projection of live plant parts, both basal and aerial, plus that occupied by non-living matter such as litter, rock, and dead plant parts. Crown cover.--The proportion of the ground surface occupied by vertical projection of live aerial plant parts, plus that occupied by non-living matter such as litter, rock, and dead plant parts. Basal cover.--The proportion of the area occupied by live plant parts at the ground surface, or the area defined by the live root crown, plus that occupied by non-living matter such as litter, rock and dead plant parts. The basal area of plants with basal rosettes was understood to be the area defined by the live root crown only; the rest of the live parts were considered crown cover. Litter.--Dead organic material either lying on or projecting above the soil surface. All dead plant parts, with the exception of woody plants which were recorded by species, were considered as litter. Bare soil. --All exposed mineral soil and rock particles up to 1/8" diameter, and well-dispersed rock particles up to 3/4" diameter which did not provide a continuous cover. Rock.--Stones larger than 3/4" diameter appearing at the soil surface. Erosion pavement.--partic1es of rock from 1/8" to 3/4" diameter forming a continuous cover on the soil surface. Individual rock particles 1/8" to 3/4" diameter that did not form a continuous cover were classified as bare soil. �- 348 - Sampling of each study area was systematic. Parallel transects were established at 8-chain intervals oriented against contours with plots spaced at 2-chain intervals along the transects. Point quadrat locations were offset 10 feet in the line direction from permanently marked plots (yellow painted angle-iron stakes) used in other phases of the study (Population Density, Annual Production and Utilization) to avoid disturbed vegetation. Point quadrat stakes (red painted angle-iron) were permanently set for possible future re-reading. Locations of each plot were marked on an enlarged aerial photograph of each study area. Browse yie1d.--Production of current annual growth for the 1964 growing season was estimated for true mountain mahogany (Cercocarpus montanus), antelope bitterbrush (Purshia tridentata), and big sagebrush (Artemisia tridentata) during the months of October-November on each of the three winter range study locations. Reference to "current annual growth" is inaccurate for big sagebrush Where all current growth plus all leaves (which mayor may not have been current) were included. Weight estimate (Pechanec and Pickford, 1937a), double sampling (Wi1m et a1., 1944; Hi1mon, 1959), and regression analysis techniques described by B1ai;(1959) as the "Dry Weight Prediction Method" whereby oven-dry weights of forage are predicted directly from estimated green weights were used to sample actual yields. Green forage weights were estimated, by species, on permanent 100-sq. ft. circular plots established in the design described above for Vegetative Description on each winter range study area. Annual growth on a proportion of the plots, in this case at a chosen ratio of 1:10, was first estimated, then clipped, sacked, oven-dried for at least 24 hours at 100-105 degrees C., and weighed. These clipped plots were the "double sample" plots required of the technique and were used to correct any consistent bias that'may have existed in weight estimation. A linear regression was calculated to define the relationship of actual oven-dry forage weight (Y) to estimated green weight (X) for each species (Blair, 1959). Several days were spent training in the weight estimate method as described by Pechanec and Pickford (1937a) for each species until a 10% precision was obtained before actual sample estimates began. Dietary scales graduated to 2-grams were used during the tr~ining period. There was no further training or checking of estimates once the actual survey began. Double sample (clipped) plots were systematically selected prior to beginning the field survey and were offset a consistent distance and direction from the permanently marked plots by a 20-foot length of light chain. If one offset length did not include any plants of the sampled species the offset process was continued in the same direction until a plant or plants was included in the 100-sq. ft. sample plot area. The clipped plots were not marked. All current growth below a 5-foot height was included in the weight estimates. Mountain mahogany weights were estimated without leaves, bitterbrush and big sagebrush with included leaves. Green weights were estimated to the ,nearest gram on smaller plants, and to the nearest 5 or 10 gram interval on larger plants. Oven-dry weights were recorded to the one-tenth gram. �- 349 - Each plant of the sampled species on the permanent weight estimate plots was tagged with an aluminum strap label for identification during utilization estimates made on the same plots the following spring. Labels were marked with both plot and plant number, e.g., B2-3 identifies the transect line (B), plot number (2), and plant number (3). Records were kept on field forms by the same identification system. Estimates were made on individual plants and summed for the entire plot which was the sampling unit. A categorized estimate of the.degree of utilization on each plant was made prior to estimating current annual growth: H heavy (over 60% utilization), M = moderate (20-60%), L = light (under 20%), N = none. Browse utilization.--Utilization of current annual growth was estimated for each of the three species sampled for yield determination the preceding fall using the ocu1ar-estimate-by-average-of-plants method of Pechanec and Pickford (1937b). Percentage removal by weight for each plant examined was made by "use class" estimates described by Clark (1944). If utilization was not observed the plant was given a rating of zero. If the plant had been utili~ed it was assigned a "use class"; the classes 1 to 5 having mid-range values of 10, 30, 50, 70, and 90 percent respectively. These mid-range values were used to derive the weighted average (weighted by the yield of each plant as estimated the previous fall) utilization of the plot sampling unit. Plots were averaged for an entire study area to give a mean utilization percentage for each species. Utilization estimates were made during the months of late April and May following several days of practice clipping and weighing for each species as recommended by Pechanec and Pickford (1937b). ��- 351 - VEGETATIVE ANALYSIS Dean E. Medin Findings: Plant phenology.--Tentative forage plant or indicator species and phenological phases (stages) were chosen prior to the 1961 growing season, observed on a trial basis for one season, and modified for application during 1962 and 1963. The choice of plant species and developmental phases is presented in Tables 1 and 2. Recording of these data was completed during 1963. Tables 3 through 5 summarize the average phenological activity dates for each species observed. Tabulation is by plant form (woody plants, grasses, forbs), elevational ranges, and slope exposures. Absence of an activity date for a species on some exposures or elevational ranges was due to altitudinal or site limitations of the species on the area observed. Each date entered in the tables is an average date observed over a two or three year period with the exception of the 7960' - 8360' elevational zone which was observed during the 1963 season only. Relationships of activity dates between species, elevational zones, and exposures are readily apparent from the tabulated data. A more sophisticated interpretation of these relationship, however, has not been attempted at the date of writing. Vegetative description.--Vertical point quadrat description of the vegetation, by one-foot intervals from a five-foot height to ground surface, was completed on each of the five study areas during 1964. Two quantitative descriptions of the vegetation, (1) ground cover and (2) vegetative composition, are presented for each area in Tables 6 through 15. Both cover and composition are expressed as ground surface (basal) and aerial (crown) components. Ground cover percentages were calculated by dividing point quadrat contacts, both crown and basal, for the various species or categories of cover by the total number of pin drops (e.g. 3660 for a 366 plot sample). The quotient was multiplied by 100 to give the percentage. Vegetative composition, by plant groups or individual species, was calculated by dividing the total basal or crown contacts for each species or plant group by the total basal or crown contacts for all.vegetation and multiplying by 100 to give the percentage. The three winter range study areas (Hewlett Gulch, Kelly Flats, Sevenmile Creek) show remarkable similarities in ground cover, particularly in the woody plant group. Crown cover for the woody plants, for example, varied only from 20.85% at Hewlett Gulch to 23.53% at Kelly Flats. Crown cover for all vegetation was 34% at Sevenmile Creek, 38% at Kelly Flats and 41% at Hewlett Gulch. The �- 352 - largest differences existed between the grass and forb components. Basal grass cover at Sevenmile Creek was 0.27% as compared to 3.15% at Kelly Flats. The woody plant group was clearly dominant among each of the winter range areas when compared on the basis of crown cover. The transitional (Little Beaver) and summer range (Crown Point) study areas were more variable in plant group relationship although the woody plants again were the most abundant on a crown cover comparison. It is worthy of particular note that the grass and forb cover did not differ greatly on the transitional and summer ranges from that measured on the winter range areas. As one would expect in an elevational comparison, major differences between the five study areas existed in the species composition of the vegetation. On the lower-winter range area (Hewlett Gulch) true mountain mahogany (Cercocarpus montanus), 13.78%, fringed sagebrush (Artemisia frigida), 8.42%, antelope bitterbrush (Purshia tridentata), 6.96%, Rocky Mountain juniper (Juniperus scopulorum), 5.94%, and skunkbush (Rhus trilobata), 4.68%, were the dominant woody plants. Herbaceous sagebrush (Artemisia spp.), 3.61%, sunflower (Helianthus pumilus), 3.01%, cheatgrass (Bromus tectorum), 6.03%, blue grama (Bouteloua gracilis), 4.28%, and needle and thread (Stipa comata), 3.94%, were the abundant forbs and grasses. Dominant woody plants on the middle-winter range (Kelly Flats) were bitterbrush (15.63%), mountain mahogany (11.59%), skunkbush (9.74%), and fringed sagebrush (8.69%). The most common forbs and grasses included hairy goldaster (Chrysops is villosa), 2.02%, herbaceous sagebrush (1.67%), sunflower (1.05%), needle and thread (3.60%), blue grama (3.16%), and mountain muhly (Muhlenbergia montana), 2.37%. A major difference in the vegetative composition is seen on the upper-winter range study area (Sevenmile Creek). Big sagebrush (Artemisia tridentata), 21.07%, bitterbrush (13.62%), Rocky Mountain juniper (5.27%), and ninebark (Physocarpus monogynus), 4.07%, are the abundant woody plants. Cinquefoils (Potentilla spp.), 3.78%, sunflower (1.59%), herbaceous sagebrush (0.99%), sedges (Carex spp.), 2.88%, b1uegrasses (Poa spp.), 1.79%, and spike fescue (Hespero~ kingii), 1.89%, are common forbs and grasses. The transitional elevation study area (Little Beaver) vegetation includes some species common to the winter range areas but many are characteristic of that particular zone. Major woody plants include kinnikinnick (Arctostaphylos uva-ursi) , 16.95%, common juniper (Juniperus communis), 10.51%, bush cinquefoil (Potentilla fruticosa), 3.84%,aspen (Populus tremu1oides), 4.41%, and willows (Salix spp.), 3.05%. Forbs and grasses include thermopsis (Thermopsis d~carpa), 7.68%, dandelion (Taraxacum sp.), 2.37%, cinquefoils (1.36%), yarrow (Achillea lanu1osa), 1.24%, strawberry (Fragaria spp.), 1.02%, sedges (4.97%), b1uebrasses (1.13%) and Parry oatgrass (Danthonia parryi), 1.02%. On the summer range area (Crown Point) blueberry (Vaccinium spp.), 39.25%, willows (8.05%), spruce (Picea engelmanni), 12.31%, and fir (Abies lasiocarpa), �- 353 - 18.92%, are the most abundant woody plants under five feet in height. Arrowleaf groundsel (Senecio triangularis), 2.02%, avens (~ turbinatum), 1.64%, marshmarigold (Caltha leptosepala), 1.40%, heartleaf arnica (Arnica cordifolia), 1.01%, clovers (Trifolium spp.), 1.40%, globeflower (Trolliuslaxus), 1. 21%, sedges (1.45%), tufted hairgrass (Deschampsia caespitosa), 0.97%, and rushes (Juncus spp.), 0.77%, characterize the grass and forb composition. Browse yield.--True mountain mahogany, antelope bitterbrush, and big sagebrush were selected for production and utilization studies on the basis of their abundance and desirability as forage species. Yields of current ~,annual growth were estimated for each of these species for the 1962, 1963 and ,1964 growing seasons on each of the winter range study areas. Results are presented in Table 16. The oven-dry yields per acre listed in Table 16 are averages derived from sampling an entire study area (each approximately 500 acres) consisting of several vegetative types including such non-browse types as coniferous forest and grass meadow. Perhaps the most significant results of the production estimates are two: (1) the surprisingly low total yields, and (2) the extreme decline in yield of mountain mahogany and bitterbrush in 1963 and 1964 as compared with 1962. High browse densities (Medin, 1964), also encompassing all vegetative types, would lead one to expect much greater yields. For example, on the Hewlett Gulch study area there were an estimated 665 mahogany plants per acre and a 1962 average mahogany yield of 14.8 pounds per acre. This gives an average of 0.022 pounds (9.99 grams) of current annual growth yield per individual mahogany plant. It is evident from these results how many producing browse plants are necessary to support a deer population. Mountain mahogany yields on the Hewlett Gulch area dropped from 14.8 lbs/acre in 1962 to 5.6 lbs/acre in 1964; bitterbrush from 29.0 lbs/acre to 5.5 lbs/acre in the same time span. Similar declines were observed for these two species on the other winter range areas. Big sagebrush production did not decline over the same period having yields of 75.8 lbs/acre in 1962, 79.8 lbs/acre in 1963, and 78.2 lbs/acre in 1964. Reasons for the extreme reduction of mahogany and bitterbrush yields can only be speculative although drastic declines in precipitation (Work Plan 3, Job 1, Climatic Environment) also occurred during this period. Bitterbrush mortality was common on each of the three study areas. The consistent yield of big sagebrush despite markedly reduced precipitation may indicate a drought resistant tendency of this species. Confidence intervals listed in Table 16 were calculated using variance equations given by Cochran (1953:282) and Committee of the American Society of Range Management. and the Agricultural Board (1962:249): �- 354 - n n' where, S 2 = z {y _ 51)2 y S 2 = x z {x - x)2 n - .•. R = V- = n'= total number of plots 1 Z (x - x) (y n - 1 Sxy n = number of clipped plots n - 1 51) Zy rx x = estimated green weight of clipped plots Y actual oven-dry weight of clipped plots and, Y Vy- + .!N .[p_ 2 i2 r where, P2 percent plots with species sampled N total number of plots sampled including plots not containing species sampled Vyr variance of plots with species sampled Y mean yield of plots containing species sampled �- 355 - Sample sizes in most cases were too small in 1962 to reach a desired precision of 20% at the 90% confidence level. Increased sample sizes in 1963 and 1964 generally increased precision although greatly reduced yield means were sometimes not accompanied by equal reductions in variance. Browse uti1ization.--Weight utilization of current annual growth was estimated for the three species sampled for yield the preceding fall. Estimates were made during late April and May on each of the three winter range study areas for the winters of 1962-63, 1963-64, and 1964-65. Utilization estimates were of winter deer use only as summer and early fall use of current annual growth by livestock (removed from the area by mid-October) was estimated during yield sampling and subtracted from winter use percentages. No correction for possible rodent use during the winter was attempted. The degree of utilization varied considerably between species, years, and study locations (Table 17). Use of mountain mahogany varied from 3.3% during the winter of 1962-63 on the Hewlett Gulch area to.58.8% at Sevenmile Creek in 1964-65. A general increase in mahogany utilization was observed annually from 1962-63 to 1964-65 on both study areas. Bitterbrush, abundant on all three areas, appeared the most consistently utilized species with a lowest percentage of 6.7% at Sevenmile Creek in 1962-63 and a highest of 24.7% at Kelly Flats during the winter of 1963-64. Big sagebrush, occurring in abundance only on the Sevenmile Creek area, was in general the least utilized of the three species with percentages varying from 4.9% in 1963-64 to 11.9% in 1964-65. A marked increase in utilization of all species was noted at Sevenmi1e Creek in 1964-65. The heavy use of mountain mahogany and the contrastingly light use of sagebrush on this area reflects a tendency of increased utilization when a species occurs as a minor component of the vegetation and a reduced use when occurring as a major or dominant element. Average utilization of the three browse species in general can only be interpreted as relatively light or moderate. The estimates, however, are a sample of the use occurring throughout an entire study area (approximately 500 acres) involving a wide range of sites and many vegetative types.. Use was almost non-existent on a few sites yet extremely heavy on others. Lack of uniformity of utilization was evident regardless of the species or study area. Also, extreme variability was noted in the use of individual plants with some plants being utilized almost in their entirety and others of the same species in close proximity untouched. Availability of current annual growth, as influenced by height above ground, snow cover, exclusion due to individual plant growth form, and to some extent inaccessibility due to terrain, was also involved in use of forage. The complexities of forage utilization by deer, and the factors influencing this use, emphasize the need for more knowledge of deer habitat requirements and the use deer make of their environment. �- 356 Acknowledgements: Drs. Meredith J. Morris and Jacob L. Kovner, Biometricians, Rocky Mountain Forest and Range Experiment Station, Fort Collins, gave helpful advice in the planning and analysis phases of the vegetative studies. Student assistants Doyle Markham, William E. Jones, Randall Buhler, Thomas E. Hakonson, Frank Abelard, Don Minnich, Lewis Nelson, Jr'., and David Stearns aided in gathering and summarizing data. LITERATURE CITED Btair, Robert M. 1959. Weight techniques for sampling browse production on deer ranges. In Techniques and Methods of Measuring Understory Vegetation. Proceedings of a Symposium at Tifton, Georgia, Oct., 1958. Southern Forest Expt. Sta. and Southeastern Forest Expt. Sta., pp. 26-31. Clark, 1. 1944. Field comparisons in 'estimating percentage utilization of range forage plants by direct percentage and by "use class" estimates. Utah Acad. ScL, Arts and Letters 21:7 (Abstract). Cochran, W. G. 330 pp. 1953. Sampling techniques. John Wiley and Sons, New York, Committee of the American Society of Range Management and the Agricultural Board. 1962. Basic problems and techniques in range research. National Academy of Sciences, National Research Council, Publication No. 890, 341 pp. Hilmon, J. B. 1959. Determination of herbage weight by double~sampling: weight estimate and actual weight. In Techniques and Methods of Measuring Understory Vegetation. Proceedings of a Symposium at Tifton, Georgia, Oct., 1958. Southern Forest Expt. Sta. and Southeastern Forest Expt. Sta., pp , 20-25. Levy, E. B. and E. A. Madden. 1933. The point method of pasture analysis. New Zealand Jour. Agr. 46:267-279. Medin, D. E. 1964. Vegetative analysis. In Game Research Report, January, 1964, Work Plan 3, Job 3 Completion Report, Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Dept., Den.ver, Colo., pp. 141-159 (Processed). Pechanec, J. F. and G. D. Pickford. 1937a. A weight estimate method for the determination of range and pastures production. Jour. Amer. Soc. Agron. 29:894-904. �- 357 - Pechanec, J. F. and G. D. Pickford. 1937b. A comparison of some methods used in determining percentage utilization of range grasses. Jour. Agr. Res. 54:753-765. Wilm, H. G., D. F. Costello, and G. E. Klipp1e. 1944. Estimating forage yield by the double-sampling method. Jour. Amer. Soc. Agron. 36:194-203. Prepared by: Date: Dean E. Medin Associate Wildlife Researcher Approved by: 1965 .:-.~~---- January, Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief Ferd c. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �Table l.--Species observed and meteorological station elevations at which plant development data were recorded, Cache la Poudre Canyon, Colora.do, 1961-1963. Plant Species Observed Rocky Mountain Juniper (Juniperus scopulorum) Quaking Aspen (Populus tremuloides) True Mountain mahogany (Cercocarpus montanus) Skunkbush Sumac (Rhus trilobata) Big sagebrush (Ar~sia tridentata) Antelope Bitterbrush (Purshia tridentata) Wax Currant (Ribes cereum) Bearberry (Arctostaphylos uva-ursi) Bush Cinquefoil (Potentilla fruticosa) Willow (Salix bebbiana) ? Russet Buffaloberry (Shepherdia canadensia) Blueberry (Vaccinium scoparium) Fringed Sagebrush (Artemisia frigida) Blue Grama (Bouteloua gracilis) Cheatgrass Brome (Bromus tectorum) Spikefescue (Hesperoch1oa kingii) Needle and Thread (Stipa comata) Tufted Hairgrass (Deschampsia caespitosa) Bluejoint Reedgrass (Calamagrostis canadensis) Sunflower (Helianthus pumi1us) Hairy Goldaster (Chrysopsis vil1osa) Pasqueflower (Pulsatilla ludoviciana) Thermopsis (Thermopsis divaricarpa) Western Yarrow (Archi1lea lanulosa) Heart1eaf Arnica (Arnica cordifo1ia) Arrow1eaf Groundsel (Senecio triangularis) Marshmarigo1d (Caltha 1eptosepala) Station 1 Hewlett Gulch Station 2 Kelly Flats 6,400' 7,000' N S NA.V N S NA N S NA NA N N S S NA NA S N S N S NA NA N N S S NA NA Station 3 Station 4 Severunile Little Beaver Creek Creek 8,120' 8,940' N N S S NA NA N S NA N N N S NA S NA S NA NA NA Station 5 Crown Point 10,320' S S N N N S S S S N S NA NA NA N S N N S NA N N S·NA S NA N NA N N N N S NA N S NA NA NA S S S NA S NA N S N S N S NA N N S NA S NA S NA NA SNA NA NA NA NA N N N S NA N S S 'NA NA N N S S NA N S NA NA NA NA S NA N S NA N N NA N N N S NA S NA S NA N 11 Observations on plant development for a given species were made on three separate exposures NA = no aspect) if the species occurred on more than one exposure. NA S S S NA NA eN = north, S = south, w VI co �Table 2.--Plant development stages recorded, Cache la Poudre Canyon, Colorado, Leaf buds swelling Flower buds swelling Leaf buds bursting Flower buds bursting Leaders elongating Leafing out Full leaf (8) Flowers blooming .(9) Full bloom (10) Bloom over (11) Fruit forming (12) Seed ripe (13) Seed disseminating (14) Leaves drying, changing color (15) Leaves fa lUng (16) Seed dissemination over (17) Leaves dropped (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) Forb Species Grass Species Woody Species (1) Growth starting (2) Flower stalks evident (3). Heads in boot (4) Heads out (5) Flowers in bloom (6) Seed ripening (7) Seed ripe (8) Seed disseminating (9) Seed dissemination,over (10) Plant drying (11) Plant dried 1961-1963. (1) Growth starting Flower buds evident Flowers blooming Full bloom Bloom over Fruit forming Seed ripe (8) Seed disseminating (9) Seed dissemination over (10) Plant drying (11) Plant dried (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) w \J1 \() �Table 3.--Average phenological activity dates of 12 tree and shrub species at 5 e1evationa1 ranges and 3 exposures, Cache 1a Poudre Oanyon, Colorado 1961-1963. Phenological Activit1 Phase fIl Species E1evat iona1 Range Observed (ft) fIl Exposure -e s:: ...........• .0 '''; t1l Q) Q) ~ ..:lUJ JuniEerus scopu1orum POEu1us tremu10ides -e '" ;j 00 ;j fIl .0 00 s:: I-< ..-I ~ ...• o ~ <V ...• Q) •••• r... fIl "'00 ;j .... ;j s:: .0 '''; •••• OJ .... .000 00 s:: I-< .~ Q) •••• (J) UJ t1l I-< Q) ;j ..:ll"l '''; .... ••••::I t1l Q) ~ o I-< ~ r...1"l ~ ...• ...• ::I r... s:: ..-I fIl •••• I-< t1l Q) 00 '"t1l 0s:: Q) •••• ..:l~ 0 fIl I-< '''; Q) S ~ 0 0 0 ...• I"l ...• ...• r...1"l r... 00 s:: o .......• ::I , :> 0 S 0 0 ...• I"l 0 Q) I-< t1l Q) CJ 00 •••• ~ ........ c:4 ..-IQ) 00 •..• ..-1s:: , S s:: I-< Q) '''; Q) fIl fIl '''; 00 t:l s:: S I :>"1-< I-< 0 t:l •..• 0 fIlC) Q) 00 s:: :> •••• OJ s:: e, 'BI-< 0e '"~~5 r...r... ..:l ~C) '" 9/11 9/29 Ind.-3/ Ind. 9/17 10/6 Ind. Ind. 9/14 9/26 Ind. Ind. ~ UJ "' .... '''; Q) t1l Q) UJ '''; s:: :> ft Q)..-I t1l 00 00 t1l •••• Q) Q) t1l ~ .,,;.";..:lr... s:: s:: Q) fIl fIl Q) '''; t:l Q) .... ...• 'g~ fIl Q) '"c:4 <tt Q) 0 I-< Q) :> c:4 Q) 0 UJC) ~t:l Ind. Ind. Ind. Ind. Ind. Ind. 6120 - 6520 South North 1 Drainage-/ 4/10 4/17 4/10 4/13 4/17 4/10 5/1 5/18 5/1 4/24 5/1 4/24 N.o.l.1N.O. 5/18 N.O. N.O. 5/25 N.O. N.O. 5/18 5/2 5/7 5/2 5/4 5/11 5/4 5/11 N.O. 5/11 5/18 5/18 5/18 7/9 7/18 7/9 6760 - 7320 South North Ridgetop 4/18 4/18 4/18 4/13 4/17 4/17 5/1 5/25 5/1 4/21 5/2 5/1 N.O. N.O. N.O. N.O. N.O. N.O. 5/25 6/2 5/25 5/2 5/7 5/7 5/11 N.O. 5/11 N.O. 5/18 N.O. 5/21 5/21 5/18 7/14 9/24 10/21 Ind. Ind. 7/18 9/26 10/21 Ind. - Ind. 7/18 10/61 10/14 Ind. Ind. Ind. Ind. Ind. Ind. Ind. - Ind. 7960 - 8360!J/ South North Drainage 5/1 5/1 5/1 4/10 4/17 4/10 5/11 5/25 5/18 5/4 5/11 5/11 N.O. N.O. N.O. N.O. N.O. N.O. 6/17 6/17 6/17 5/11 5/18 5/18 5/18 5/25 N.O. N.O. 6/17 5/25 5/25 6/24 6/1 7/18 10/25 11/1 7/11 10/25 11/1 8/15 10/25 11/1 Ind. Ind. Ind. 7960 ~ 8360 South North Drainage N.O. 5/4 N.O. 4/1 N.O. 4/1 N.O. 5/11 5/11 4/3 N.O. 4/10 5/11 5/18 5/18 5/18 5/25 5/25 6/3 6/10 6/10 4/18 N.O. 5/1 5/1 N.O. 5/11 5/11 N.O. N.O. N.O. N.O. N.O. 7/1 7/1 7/1 N.O. N.O. N.O. N.O. 9/10· 9/17 N.O. 9/3 9/17 N.O. 9/10 9/17 N.O. 10/25 N.O. 10/25 N.O. 10/25 8600 - 8960 South North Drainage 5/9 5/9 5/9 N.O. N.O. 4/1 5/7 5/4 5/11 4/10 4/24 4/5 5/20 5/20 5/24 6/7 6/4 6/9 6/10 6/12 6/10 4/24 5/4 5/1 N.O. N.O. N.O. 5/11 5/11 5/11 N.O. N.O. N.O. 7/9 7/9 7/26 N.O. N.O. N.O. N.O. 9/14 N.O. 9/5 N.O. 9/8 9/26 9/19 9/19 N.O. 10/18 N.O. 10/10 N.O. 10/16 9960 - 10,400 South North Drainage 5/18 N.O. 6/2 N.O. 6/13 6/26 6/26 N.O. N.O. N.O. N.O. 7/26 N;O. N.O. 9/5 9/21 N.O. 10/10 - - - :.. 1,1 "Drainage" or''Ridgetop''sites had little or no exposure influence. 1.../ N.O. = Not Observed. }j !!;./ t1l Q) S 00 Ind. = Indefinite. Single year observation (1963) at 7960 - 8360 ft e1evationa1 range. Ind. Ind. Ind. Ind. Ind. Ind. Ind. Ind. Ind. w 0'\ 0 �able 3.--Averagephenological of 12 tree and shrub speciesat 5 e1evationa1ranges and 3 exposures,Cache 1a Poudre Canyon, Colorado,1961-~1~9~6~3~. __~~~~~------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------PhenologicalAc~~vityPhase S I Species E1evationa1 Range Observed (ft) CIl '0 CIl '0 Exposure CIl '0 OIl ~ .c .,-1 ;) ::l .c 00 ~ ~ .,-1 ...• ~ ...• 4-1 •••• o Q) '" ...• ~ Q) Q) :J: ...:len Q) •••• iL<en :ercocarpus montanus fuus trilobata CIl '0 OIl ::l ~ .c .,-1 +J 4-1 CIl C\! ~ Q) ::l ...:l>Q ::l .coo ~ ~ ',-1 Q) ~ +J CIl o ~ •.••::l [L,>Q OIl ~ ',-1 4-1 ~ ...:l 4-1 '" Q) ...:l •••• ;i iL< OIl ~ .,-1 CIl+J ~ '" Q)0Il 'O~ S 0 OIl CIl~.... ~ .,-1 Q)S ~/'.).... 0 >Q. ~,3,3,3;i ...:l~ iL<>Q ~ Q) > 0 Q) p., o OIl ~ ...,.,-1 ·,-Ie .,-IQ) +J+J.,-I ~ C\! Q) Q)0Il.... 'O~p., '0 ~o >Q iL<iL<...:l ~,35 ~ 0 S ,3 [L, ~ P:: ~ c:..J en ~ CIl CIl~"" ·,-100 ~ ~ ',-1 '0"" ~~ «l',-I i:'o I~ OIl CIl ~ Q).,-I > •••• Q) CIl CIlQ) .,-1..., ~ Q) •••• 'Op., t=l.,-I .cj ...:liL< en c:..J. 0 CIl c:..J Q) > ~ ~gpgp~-;;: ~5 '0 CIl Q) Q)p., >p., ~8 ...:l~ 6120 - 6520 South North Ridgetop 4/12 5/16 4/24 5/23 5/4 5/13 6/11 5/30 6/6 4/19 5/18 5/3 5/30 5/11 5/23 6/17 6/7 6/12 4/14 5/16 4/26 5/23 5/4 5/20 6/17 6/3 6/9 6/12 6/22 7/14 8/10 8/30 9/4 10/7 11/19 11/18 6/19 7/1 7/21 8/19 8/30 9/4 10/2 11/26 11/18 6/17 6/24 7/18 8/19 8/30 9/6 10/2 11/19 11/18 6760 - 7320 South North Ridgetop 4/19 5/16 4/29 5/25 5/6 5/18 6/17 6/4 6/10 4/26 5/20 5/9 6/2 5/18 6/1 6/19 6/12 6/19 4/19 5/18 5/4 5/28 5/11 5/25 6/19 6/12 6/19 6/21 7/1 6/25 7/1 6/25 7/1 7960 - 8360 South North Drainage 4/17 5/18 5/4 6/1 5/11 6/17 6/17 6/10 6/17 5/1 6/1 5/11 6/17 5/18 6/24 6/17 6/24 6/28 5/1 5/25 5/11 6/1 5/18 6/24 6/24 6/17 6/24 6/24 7/1 8/1 8/29 10/1 9/10 10/1 11/15 11/15 7/1 7/11 7/25 9/17 10/1 9/10 10/1 11/22 11/29 7/1 7/11 8/8 9/17 10/11 8/29 10/11 11/15 11/8 6120 - 6520 South North Ridgetop 4/29 5/9 6760 - 7320 South North Drainage 4/30 5/7 5/13 5/20 5/23 6/17 6/15 5/28 6/2 4/27 5/4 5/11 5/17 5/26 6/7 6/12 5/23 5/28 4/30 5/13 5/16 5/20 5/23 6/15 6/15 5/28 6/10 6/19 7/2 7/15 8/17 8/26 9/3 6/15 6/29 7/10 8/19 8/26 9/3 6/17 7/2 7/15 8/17 8/26 9/3 7960 - 8360 South North Drainage 5/11 5/1 6/17 7/1 7/18 8/27 9/6 7/14 8/29 9/9 7/18 8/29 9/9 9/4 10/2 11/19 11/12 9/4 9/24 11/19 11/8 9/4 9/29 11/19 11/16 W 0'\ !-' 5/13 5/20 5/23 6/4 6/12 5/23 5/30 6/2 6/14 7/11 8/3 8/15 8/25 9/22 Ind. 11/16 4/29 5/13 5/13 5/20 5/23 6/6 6/12 5/28 6/3 6/6 6/17 7/6 8/17 8/25 9/22 Ind. 11/21 5/18 5725 5/28 6/17 6/17 6/1 6/10 8/4 9/19 Ind. 10/25 9/22 Ind. 11/1 9/19 Ind. 10/30 7/11 8/22 8/29 9/3 10/1 Ind. 11/15 - - - - - - - - - - - - 5/11 5/4 5/25 6/1 6/10 6/24 6/17 6/17 6/24 7/1 7/11 7/11 8/29 9/17 9/17 10/25 Ind. 11/29 - �Table 3.--Average phenological Colorado, 1961-1963. activity dates of 12 tree and shrub species at 5 e1evationa1 ~continued2 ranges and 3 exposures, Phenological Species E1evationa1 Range Observed (ft) '::l" Exposure '" s:: ..000 "0 00 Q ::l ..0 •••• '" ....• ""' ....• '" ::l "0 "0 ....• ':3" Q '"000 ..0 •••• 00 s:: "' ....• .u 00 Q ....• Q) ..;I .... .... ""' Ol <1l (1) '" ::l •••••::l ..;ICJ) ..;1"'1 J>.o"'l ..;I J>.o <1l Q) Q) ~ ••••• Q) '" Q) ~ III o '" s:: ....• ""'<1l ..0 00 ~ ....• o ~ .... J>.oCJ) Q) Activity ""'<1l (1) ::l III '" '" 00 <1l "0 s:: <1l 0 00 III Q Q) e '" ....• 5 0 ....• "'I (1) ••••• ~ 0 0 o ....• ....• .... ....• ..;Ir.<! J>.o"'l J>.o Q) ::l Cache 1a Poudre Canyon; Phase , '" 0 Q) > 0 ••••• Q) 00 "'''' Q) Po ....• 5 0 p:: '" 00•••.• <1l Q) Q) '"0 s:: Po "0 "'I '" 0 J>.oJ>.o ..;Ir.<!C) ....• ~~ 5 Q) Q) CJ) e :>.'" Q) "' ....• '5 e Q , , a s:: 0 '" 00 Cl'"•••• ••..• 0 '" OlC) Cl s:: ....• "0'" Q) > ~ C!J OJ) OD Q) 00 Ol s:: Q) ••••• '" '" ••..• '" Q) Cl .... > •...•"0 co r-I Q) <1l Q) s:: Q) S::S:: Q) <1l CJ) ••..• ..;I ••..•••..• ..;I J>.o Q) Po '"0 III Q) Q) Po > Po ~5 j~ 9/10 9/17 9/17 9/10 11/29 9/17 1i/29 9/17 11/29 Ind. Ind. Ind. CJ)C) <1l 0 Artemisia tridentata 7960 - 8360 South North Drainage 5/1 5/4 5/4 6/24 7/1 6/24 5/11 5/18 5/18 8/29 9/3 9/3 5/18 5/25 5/25 6/17 7/18 7/1 6/10 6/10 6/10 9/3 9/17 9/17 9/17 9/24 9/24 10/1 10/1 10/1 10/18 7/11 10/25 11/1 10/25 7/25 11/1 11/1 J.0/25 7/11 11/1 11/1 Purshia tridentata 6120 - 6520 South North Ridgetop 4/5 4/7 4/5 5/8 5/8 5/11 4/12 4/17 4/12 5/18 5/18 5/18 4/22 4/24 4/22 5/13 5/21 5/13 6/9 6/24 6/14 5/25 5/30 5/23 5/30 N.O. 5/30 6/6 6/12 6/6 6/10 6/19 6/19 7/14 7/14 7/14 7/16 7/30 7/20 7/24 9/7 8/5 9/7 7/31 9/7 9/30 9/24 9/30 9/13 9/30 10/2 Ind. Ind. Ind. 6760 - 7320 South North Ridgetop 4/8 4/15 4/10 5/10 5/13 5/10 4/17 4/24 4/20 5/18 5/18 5/21 4/29 5/2 4/29 5/13 5/18 5/18 6/17 6/22 6/22 5/25 5/25 5/30 5/30 6/6 6/6 6/12 6/10 6/10 6/19 6/25 6/22 7/25 7/21 7/18 7/25 7/30 7/30 8/4 9/7 8/10 9/7 8/10 9/7 9/30 9/24 10/2 10/2 9/30 10/4 Ind. Ind. Ind. 7960 - 8360 South North Drainage 4/5 4/18 4/18 5/18 5/25 5/25 4/18 5/1 5/1 5/25 6/10 N.O. 5/11 5/18 5/18 5/25 6/17 6/10 6/10 6/24 6/24 6/1 6/17 6/10 6/10 6/24 6/17 6/17 N.O. 6/24 6/24 7/1 7/1 7/18 7/25 7/25 8/8 8/15 8/8 8/15 8/29 8/22 8/22 8/22 8/29 9/30 10/25 9/30 11/8 9/30 10/25 Ind. Ind. Ind. 8600 - 8960 South North Ridgetop 4/25 5/2 4/20 5/28 6/15 6/4 5/6 5/11 5/6 6/10 6/29 6/10 5/18 5/25 5/18 6/5 6/22 6/10 6/30 7/4 6/30 6/22 7/4 6/22 6/29 7/11 6/29 7/11 7/18 7/11 7/18 7/25 7/18 7/25 8/9 7/18 8/24 8/29 8/22 8/29 9/11 10/7 9/8 9/15 10/7 9/6 9/11 10/7 10/2 10/8 10/19 Ind. Ind. Ind. 6120 - 6520 South North Drainage 3/30 4/2 3/30 4/24 5/3 4/25 4/8 4/10 4/8 5/2 5/11 5/6 4/19 4/24 4/19 5/2 5/3 5/2 6/9 6/9 6/9 5/5 5/18 5/11 5/11 5/25 5/22 5/21 5/30 5/26 5/28 6/5 6/2 6/24 6/24 6/24 7/19 8/1 7/25 7/30 8/15 8/8 8/15 8/4 8/15 8/7 8/31 8/31 11/1 10/21 10/21 Ribes .~ 9/2 9/7 9/7 UJ 0'\ I\) �Table 3.--Average phenological Colorado, 1961-1963. activity dates of 12 tree and shrub species at 5 e1evationa1 ~continued2 Phenological ranges and 3 exposures, Activity Cache 1a Poudre Canyon, Phase I Species E1evationa1 Range Observed (ft) Exposure rn "tleo ;:0 I'l .0 •••• ....• 4-1 ••••• co (j) Potenti11a fruticosa -e rn "tl eo co ... Q) li<Ul ""I:Q •.••• ;:0 li<1:Q ;:0 ...• 4-1 ;:0 .0 eo I'l 1.0 .I'l•.• eo 1.0 .•.• .0;:0 •••• I'l ...• Q) •.••• Q)'" 4-1 ;3 •...• 4-1 rn ;3 rn o 1.0 co 1.0 co o Q) •..• ;3 ;3 eo I'l Q) "" Q) rn •.• "" Q) .... .... 1.0co "tl eo I'l ;:0 Ii< co 0 "' ....• ""~ 6 1.0 I'l 0 Q) eo ....0 1.0 .I'l•.• I:Q Q) r:; ....• ;3 0 ....• o ....• 0 ....• ;:0 6 60 .., ...• ••.• r:; .... ;:0 li<1:Q Ii< I:Q rn a Q) ...... ...•'" ••.•Q) eo I'l I Q) I>:: 1.0 co Q) Q) eo •.••• rn rn .••• eo <=I I'l ...• eo CIl I'l Q) •••• <=I ....• Q) co •..• Q) co Q) Q) -e "tl.o.J Q) Q) Q) Q) Ii< Ii< "" r>~o Ul I'l Ul •••• ~ .,neo Q) I'll'l "" co Q) CIl CIl Q) .•••.o.J Q) "tll'l'" 1.0 co 0 e Q) •••• 0 1.00 , r:; , ;>,1.0 1.00 <=I •.••• 0 CIlC"l > •...•"tl '" ...•...• ""Ii< UlC"l r:; 0 rn (j) "tl Q) c, co > 0 '" Q) 1.0 ""<=I 6760 - 7320 South North Ridgetop 3/30 4/2 4/2 4/24 5/2 5/2 4/10 4/19 4/12 5/2 5/8 5/6 4/19 4/29 4/22 5/5 5/16 5/8 6/6 6/15 6/14 5/7 5/18 5/11 5/16 5/23 5/16 5/23 5/30 5/28 5/30 6/5 6/5 6/24 6/24 6/24 7/13 7/25 7/20 8/2 8/8 8/2 8/17 8/17 8/17 9/17 9/15 9/15 9/15 9/11 9/20 11/13 10/27 11/5 7960 - 8360 South North Drainage 4/3 4/10 4/3 5/4 5/11 5/11 4/17 5/1 4/17 5/11 5/18 5/18 5/1 5/11 5/11 5/25 5/25 5/25 6/10 6/10 6/17 5/18 5/25 5/25 5/25 6/1 6/1 6.'10 6/17 6/10 6/17 6/10 6/17 7/25 7/11 7/11 8/1 8/8 8/15 8/15 8/22 8/22 8/22 8/22 8/22 9/17 9/10 9/17 9/17 9/10 9/17 11/8 11/8 11/8 8600 - 8960 South North Ridgetop 4/10 4/17 4/12 5/26 6/9 5/26 4/20 5/1 4/20 6/1 N.~. N.~. 5/11 5/11 5/11 5/27 6/6 5/27 6/21+ 6/24 6/24 6/2 6/10 6/1 6/12 6/24 6/17 6/24 6/27 6/24 6/29 7/15 7/8 7/18 7/21 7/15 8/17 8/29 8/19 8/26 9/2 8/29 9/4 9/1 8/29 9/24 9/22 9/22 9/7 9/20 9/19 11/1 10/18 11/1 7960 - 8360 South North Drainage 5/11 5/11 4/3 4/3 5/18 6/10 5/1 5/11 6/10 6/17 7/1 7/11 6/24 7/1 5/11 5/25 5/18 6/1 5/25 6/10 6/17 6/17 7/18 8/15 8/22 8/22 9/3 9/3 9/17 10/1 9/17 10/1 Ind. Ind. Ind. Ind. 8600 - 8960 South North Drainage 5/22 5/28 5/22 4/13 4/22 4/13 6/13 6/17 6/17 5/6 5/18 5/11 6/24 6/27 6/27 7/6 7/25 7/15 7/2 7/9 7/6 5/18 5/28 5/18 5/22 6/5 5/22 6/1 6/17 6/10 6/20 6/24 6/24 7/22 .8/30 8/6 9/4 8/13 9/6 9/17 9/25 10/1 9/17 10/2 10/11 9/24 10/2 10/11 Ind. Ind. Ind. Ind. Ind. Ind. 8600 - 8960 South North Drainage 4/30 6/29 5/l3 7/3 5/20 6/19 6/27 7/11 7/18 8/17 8/27 7/26 9/15 10/10 12/2 10/30 ~ ArctostaEhy10s uva-ursi CIl ""Ul Q) ~ rn "tl ;:0 .0 eo I'l 9/22 10/4 w 0\ w �Table 3.--Average phenological activity dates of 12 tree and shrub species at 5 e1evationa1 Colorado, 1961-1963. (continued) ranges and 3 exposures, Phenological E1evationa1 Range Obse rved (ft) Species Salix ~biana 8600 - 8960 ? SheEherdia canadensis Exposure "'OJ 00 ;:l I'l .0 South North Drainage ••.• .0 00 ~ H· ••• <1J •••• ".-I <1J .-I " Ul "'OJ 00 ;:l I'l .0 ••.• .u Ul .0 I "-'(OJ ...• 00 <1J Ul .u "-'(OJ .-I .-I ;:l 00 ~ 10< •••• <1J .u ~ ...• H 10< (OJ <1J 00 "'OJ I'l (OJ 0 <1J.-I o I'« en >-1P'l 1'«P'l >-1 I'« >-1W 5/1 3/22 5/11 4/5 5/25 6/14 5/18 6/10 5/30 6/22 7/4 5/30 7960 - 8360 South North Drainage - (OJ 10< <1J ;:l Activit2 Phase " OJ o H ;:l .-I <1J g 00 I'l "-' South North Drainage South North Drainage Ul "'OJ ;:l .-I "-'.-I (OJ <1J <1J " Hen 9960 - 10400 8600 - 8960 Vaccinium scoparium Ul Ul "'OJ ;:l Cache 1a Poudre Canyon, 00 OJ ~ 10< •••• &o g 0 .-I P'l 10< <1J > 0 00 ~ .u.u S I <1J P. ...• S I :>'10< <1J <1J HO Ul tIl •••• 00 A I'l Ul A.-I 0 00 tIl I'l <1J •••• >.-1 (OJ.-I <1J (OJ tIl <1J •••• .u "Cl J>:: H 0 1'«1'« H (OJ <1J <1J 00.-1 "'OJ~p. (OJ 0 6 <1J •••• 0 >-1WCJ en en •••• <1J ~~ >-1 •••••••• HI'« enCJ <1J P. p. (OJ 0 <1J H >-1 A 6/24 7/1 7/18 7/15 7/22 9/8 9/24 9/3 10/27 7/1 7/6 7/25 N.O. N.O. 9/12 9/27 N.O. 10/27 g .-I .-I ;:l 0 ...• 1'«P'l I'« P'l 6/20 5/10 5/30 7/2 6/13 6/22 0 ...•...• I'l 0 •••• <1J .u •••• ·S e "'OJ <1J <1J .... 'O.u <1J (OJ <1J I'l tIlCJ <1J :> • (OJ 0000 A <1J .-I "'OJ p. <1J <1J 0 e tIl III :> w 4/24 4/24 5/11 5/11 - - 5/18 6/17 4/30 4/30 5/18 5/l3 5/25 - - 6/17 N.O. 5/18 - 6/1 - 6/17 7/1 7/25 8/1 - 9/3 10/1 - 8/22 11/1 6/26 6/27 5/20 5/25 6/4 6/17 7/14 8/3 8/15 9/5 10/1 9/1 10/18 9960 - 10400 South North Drainage 5/25 5/28 6/10 6/13 6/17 7/12 7/10 6/24 6/29 N.O. 7/12 7/18 8/29 9/1Q. 9/15 10/1 9/17 10/18 9960 - 10400 South North Drainage 5/13 6/6 5/17 5/18 6/6 5/22 6/6 6/20 6/2 6/9 6/24 6/17 6/20 6/24 6/20 6/27 7/18 7/6 7/1 7/6 7/6 6/24 6/28 6/28 7/2 7/11 7/8 7/6 7/15 7/11 7/16 7/20 7/20 7/9 7/15 7/15 8/22 8/25 8/27 8/29 8/29 8/29 9/12 9/12 9/12 10/16 10/11 10/16 9/10 9/6 9/10 9/25 9/17 9/20 0\ -!="" �Table 4.--Average phenological activity dates of 6 grass species at 5 e1evationa1 Cache 1a Poudre Canyon, Colorado, 1961-1963. ranges and 3 exposures, Phenological ActivitI Phase I Species E1evational Range Observed (ft) 00 Exposure ..c:: 'r-!r:: .j.).j.) ~ ~ \oj .j.) t.!)tr.l Bouteloua gracil_is .j.) .j.) \oj(J)r:: <Ll~<Ll ~.-4"t:l C1I.r-! .-401.J> 0 (J) 0 o "t:l~ C1I J::.tr.lr.x:/ ~ r:: 'r-! 00 r:: or-! (J) "t:l C1I .j.) <Ll ::l .-4 ~ .-4 0 ::l.-4 .~ =0 J::.~ r:: moo "t:l <Ll <Ll (:l. <Ll'r-! "t:l <Ll <Ll (:l. <Ll 'r-! tr.lt:<:: "t:l(J)r:: <Ll(J)'r-! CU'r-! oI.J tr.l~ C1I 9/4 9/24 9/22 tr.lt:<:: 6120 - 6520 South North Drainage!.! 4/7 4/13 4/9 6/17 7/4 N.0.1/ 6/27 7/11 6/27 7/9 7/25 7/6 7/23 8/2 7/22 7/29 8/10 7/29 8/30 9/15 9/9 6760 ~ 7320 South North Ridgetop 4/7 4/15 4/10 7/6 6/27 7/6 7/117/23 7/21 7/6 7/11 7/25 7/28 7/28 8/2 8/1 8/9 8/9 9/19 9/4 9/19 10/10 9/22 9/7 . s<Ll "t:l(J)\oj <Ll(J)<Ll <Ll'r-!> tr.l~0 00 .j.) r:: r::or-! C1I ~ .-4 \oj 'Il-I~ .j.)"t:l r::.<Ll C1I .r-! .-4 \oj Il-I~ Ind}..! Ind. Ind. 9/24 9/24 9/24 Ind. Ind. Ind. Ind. Ind. Ind. 10/3 10/5 10/3 Ind. Ind. Ind. • LV 7/11 7/18 8/2 8/15 9/17 10/25 10/25 Ind. 7/11 7/18 7/25 8/8 8/22 - Ind. 5/1 7/1 10/1 10/25 Ind~ 10/25 Ind. South North Drainage 10/15 9/26 9/26 5/2 N.O. N.O. 5/5 5/20 5/11 5/11 5/26 5/16 5/30 6/22 6/7 6/9 6/27 6/13 7/1 7/12 7/12 7/17 7/17 7/17 9/27 9/27 9/27 6/26 7/19 7/10 8/2 8/2 8/2 6760 - 7320 South North Ridgetop 10/17 10/17 10/12 5/7 5/18 5/7 5/11 5/25 5/18 5/20 6/6 5/27 6/12 6/22 6/12 6/17 7/2 6/17 7/18 7/20 7/18 7/26 8/1 7/26 9/27 9/27 9/27 7/18 7/25 7/18 8/2 8/7 8/2 7960 - 8360 South North Drainage 3/18 5/18 N.O. 5/25 6/17 6/24 7/25 8/8 10/25 7/25 8/15 5/25 6/1 6/17 6/24 7/25 8/8 11/8 7/25 8/22 South North Drainage 4/18 6120 - 6520 7960 - 836~/ Br~ tectorum ]j 1/ 1/ !i/ - - 3/25 N.O. - - - - "Drainage" or "Ridgetop" sites had little or no exposure influence. N.O. = Not Observed. Ind. = Indefinite. Single year observation (1963) at 7960 - 8360 ft e1evationa1 range. - - - - - - - - - - - - - 0'\ \J1 �Table 4.--Average phenological activity dates of 6 grass species at 5 elevationa1 ranges and 3 exposures, Cache la Poudre Canyon, Colorado, 1961-1963. (continued) Phenological Activity Phase Species Br~ Elevationa1 Range Obse rved (ft) ..c .~~ .IJ .IJ.IJ ~ H oH .IJ C1l c.!lCll Hen~ (J),.!G (J) ~r-l'1;J C1l.~ r-l.IJ:> f't"CIlJ:>;l South North Drainage 4/5 South North Ridgetop 6760 - 7320 7960- Exposure .IJ 0 en 0 '1;Jj:Q C1l (J) ~ I 0.0 en ~ .~ ~ .~ ~ mo.o . s <Ii 0.0 .IJ ~ '0 (J) (J) c, (J) .~ CIl~ '0 (J) (J) p.. (J) .~ CIl~ (J).~ .IJ CIl~ C1l '1;JenH (J)en(J) (J).~:> CIl~O .~ C1l » ::t:o r-l [5 r-l 0 ;:lr-l f't"j:Q 'Oen~ (J)en .~ ::t:.~ '0 C1l .IJ (J) ;:! r-l l-I P.f~ .IJ'1:l ~ (J) C1l'M r-l P.f~ '"' 5/28 6/5 6/13 6/29 7/9 8/1 8/23 11/8 8/13 9/7 4/3 4/6 N.O. 5/4 5/11 5/11 5/18 5/18 6/2 6/2 6/24 6/17 7/11 7/6 8/8 7/27 8/25 8/11 8/20 8/20 11/26 11/26 ~ South North Ridgetop 4/3 4/3 4/6 5/11 5/11 5/14 5/22 5/18 5/22 5/28 5/25 5/25 6/10 6/13 6/2 6/24 6/24 6/24 7/15 7/18 7/15 7/25 7/25 7/25 8/11 8/11 8/30 8/23 8/23 8/23 11/26 11/26 11/26 8360 South North Drainage 4/3 4/18 4/10 5/18 N.O, 5/25 5/25 6/1 N.O, 6/1 6/10 6/1 6/17 6/24 6/17 6/24 7/11 7/11 7/25 7/25 7/25 8/8 8/8 8/8 9/10 9/10 9/10 8/29 8/29 8/29 11/26 11/26 11/26 8600 - 8960 South North Drainage 4/10 5/22 5/28 6/10 6/24 7/5 7/25 8/1 9/1 8/29 11/1 4/17 5/18 6/2 6/20 7/1 7/11 8/1 8/10 9/1 8/29 11/1 South North Drainage .3/30 N.O, 4/3 5/22 N.O. 5/25 5/28 6/24 6/1 6/17 N.O. 6/17 6/20 7/1 6/20 6/27 7/11 6/27 7/6 N.O. 7/6 7/15 7/18 7/15 8/9 8/1 8/9 8/28 8/22 8/28 Ind, Ind, Ind. 8600 - 8960 tectorum HesEerochloa kingii 0.0 6120 - 6520 ~ 0\ Stipa comata 6120 - 6520 �Table 4.--Average phenological activity dates of 6 grass species at 5 e1evationa1 Cache 1a Poudre Canyon, Colorado, 1961-1963. (continued) ranges and 3 exposures, Phenological Activit~ Phase Species E1evationa1 Range Observed (ft) Exposure eo .c: .=.-1 ~~ ~ ~ I-< ~ C,!)tI:l Stipa comata Ca1amagrostis canadensis I-<UJ= <lJ~ <lJ ~ r-! "d 11)•.-1 r-!~> 0 UJ 0 "d~ 11) UJ "d 11) ~ ~tI:l~ = = '.-1 ~6 QJ 5 r-! r-! 0 ;:lr-! "d Q) Q) = '.-1 = Q) p.. '.-1 . I eo ~ = '1"4 "d <lJ <lJ p.. QJ ',-1 ~bO "dUJ= QJ UJ·,-I <lJ'.-I~ e <lJ "dUJI-< <lJ UJQJ <lJ·.-I ~~ tI:l~ tI:l~ tI:l~ 11) tI:l~ 6 eo ~ = = •.-1 ~"d = <lJ r-! r-! 11) :>. I-< 11)'1"4 I-< ~El !il~ 6760 - 7320 South North Ridgetop 4/2 4/6 4/2 6/3 6/9 6/3 6/9 6/15 6/9 6/27 7/6 7/2 7/1 7/10 7/6 7/11 7/15 7/11 7/15 7/18 7/18 7/18 8/2 7/22 8/30 8/30 8/30 9/7 9/7 9/7 Ind. Ind. Ind. 7960 - 8360 South North Drainage N.O. 4/24 N.O. N.O. N.O. N.O. N.O. 7/1 6/24 N.O. 7/11 7/2 7/11 7/18 7/11 7/18 7/25 7/18 8/1 N.O. 8/1 8/8 8/8 8/8 8/30 8/30 8/30 8/30 8/30 8/30 Ind. Ind. Ind. 8600 - 8960 Deschampsia caespitosa ~ 8600 - 8960 8600 - 8960 9960 - 10400 South North Drainage 4/22 South North Drainage 4/24 South North Drainage South North Drainage .. 6/26 7/7 7/20 7/25 - 8/15 8/22 9/8 9/8 Ind. 6/24 7/1 7/11 7/28 8/2 8/29 9/15 10/2 9/17 11/8 4/27 7/7 7/15 7/25 8/2 8/9 9/10 9/20 10/18 9/24 10/25 6/5 7/18 7/25 8/6 8/16 8/27 9/14 9/24 10/25 9/24 10/25 - - - 6/17 - - - - .- w 0\ -.J �Table 5.--Average phenological activity dates of 8 forb and 1 undershrub species at 5 e1evationa1 ranges and 3 exposures, Cache 1a Poudre Canyon, Colorado, 1961-1963. Phenological Activit~ Phase Species Artemisia frigida Helianthus purnilus 1.1 2/ 1/ !if E1evationa1 Range Observed (ft) 00 I:l Exposure ..c:: .o-f .j..J.j..J ~ !-I .j..J !-I tIl I:l (])~(]) &5 o o!-I .j..J co ~r-I'1:I CO·o-f r-I.j..J:> e"tI.l r-I r-I »:"tI.lW »:..t:CI o I 00 tIl I:l !-I .o-f 0 e r-I 0 r-I 0 ;:Ir-I »:..t:CI 5 o (]) !-I r-I :> t:CIO I:l 00 I:l .j..J .o-f .o-f ;:l !-I !-I 0 e .o-f '1:1 (]) @ I:l00 . s 00 .j..J I:l I:l .o-f .j..J~ '1:ItIl!-l (]) tIl (]) (]).o-f :> r-I tI.lOO r-I PolO PolO (]) »:..»:.. (]) .o-f '1:1 tIl (]) tIl .o-f (]) .o-f .j..J tI.lP:: t/) 10/19 10/15 10/15 11/11 11/15 11/11 11/23 11/11 11/30 Ind. Ind. Ind. 10/2 10/2 10/2 Ind. Ind. Ind. Ind. Ind. Ind. 9/23 9/30 9/23 Ind. Ind. Ind. (]) 0.. 0 co co :>.. !-I I:l (]) co .o-f !-I 6120 - 6520 South North Drainag~/ Ind.l/ 5/4 Ind. 5/18 Ind. 5/4 9/5 9/2 8/30 9/15 10/4 9/12 10/4 9/10 10/2 6760 - 7320 South North Ridgetop Ind. Ind. Ind. 5/4 5/25 5/18 8/24 8/24 8/26 9/5 9/5 9/5 9/22 10/4 9/24 10/10 9/22 10/4 11/6 11/12 11/11 ll/20 11/6 11/12 7960 ~ 836tit/ South North Drainage 3/18 5/11 4/186/1 4/1 5/25 8/22 8/22 8/29 8/29 9/17 10/1 8/29 9/17 10/4 9/3 10/1 10/15 11/1 11/8 ll/15 11/29 11/1 11/8 Ind. Ind. Ind. 9/17 10/1 9/17 Ind. Ind. Ind. 8600 - 8960 South North Drainage 4/2 4/10 4/5 5/25 6/10 5/25 8/19 8/22 8/22 8/29 9/4 9/4 9/13 9/17 9/12 10/23 11/8 10/25 ll/16 10/20 11/8 Ind. Ind. Ind. 10/2 10/13 10/2 Ind. Ind. Ind. 6120 - 6520 South North Ridgetop 4/15 5/1 4/19 5/30 6/17 5/30 6/17 6/30 6/22 7/6 7/18 7/6 7/18 7/31 7/24- 8/4 7/18 7/31 8/7 8/12 8/7 8/19 8/27 8/22 9/12 9/17 9/17 8/27 9/2 9/5 10/10 10/15 10/26 6760 - 7320 South North Ridgetop 4/27 5/8 4/27 6/6 6/19 6/9 6/29 7/9 7/6 7/18 7/22 7/18 7/28 8/5 7/28 8/26 9/4 8/26 9/4 9/12 9/6 9/22 10/3 9/22 9/12 9/12 9/12 10/20 10/15 10/12 w "Drainage" or "Ridgetop" sites had little or no exposure influence. N.O. = Not Observed. Ind. = Indefinite Single year observation (1963) at 7960 - 8360 ft elevation. 9/22 9/27 9/22 8/9 8/13 8/9 0'\ CO �Table 5. --Average phenological activity dates of 8 forb and 1 unde~shrub species at 5 eleva tiona 1 ranges and 3 exposures, Cache la Poudre Canyon, Colorado, 1961-1963/' (continued) Phenological Activit~ Phase SpeC!:ies Elevational Range Observed (ft) eo Exposure s:: ..c: •.-4 .u.u ~ 1-1 o1-1 .uco OCf.l .u 1-1 CIl s:: <11~<11 ~..-I"tj co·.-4 ..-I .u > I'<!Cf.)~ I eo CIl s:: 1-1 '.-4 <11 5 ~ 0 .-I ..-I s:: eo ..-I ..-I 50 ::1..-1 I'<!iXI I'<!iXI 5o <11 1-1 '.-4 s:: .u0r-4 '.-4 ~ .-I > iXlO 0 I'<! I'<! e "tj <11 <11 ll.o <11'.-4 Cf.lP=: . e eo ~bO <11 "tj CIl s:: "tj CIl 1-1 <11CIl0r-4 <11 CIl <11 <1I'.-4.u <11'.-4 Cf.)Q co Cf.lQ .u s:: S::0r-4 co ..-I 1-1 Il-IQ » s:: <11 co '.-4 ..-I 1-1 Il-IQ 6 .u"tj Helianthus pumilus 7960 - 8360 South North Ridgetop 4/18 6/17 7/18 8/1 8/15 8/22 9/17 9/22 10/25 10/1 11/8 Chr:lsoESis yi110sa 6120 - 6520 South North Ridgetop 10/23 5/25 6/24 "7/6 7/18 7/26 8/1 8/4 8/26 9/7 11/9 10/23 5/31 6126 7/11 7/20 7/30 8/3 8/6 8/29 9/7 11/13 South North Ridgetop 10/23 11/4 10/25 6/2 6/2 5/28 7/1 7/16 7/20 7/31 8/13 8/27 8/19 9/22 913 7123 8/6 8/20 8/6 8/22 714 7/31 8/14 8/3 10130 9119 9/24 11/16 10/2 .11/16 9/24 11/16 South North Drainage 11/1 11/8 11/8 6/17 6/24 6/17 7/11 7/18 7/18 7125 7125 8/8 8/15 8/15 8/22 7/25 8115 8122 8/29 8/29 9/3 9/3 9/17 10/25 10118 10/25 10/1 10/1 10/1 South North Ridgetop 11/8 11/8 11/8 6/27 7/10 7/2 7/26 7/31 7/28 9/17 9/20 9/20 9/26 9/29 9/29 10/25 11/8 10/25 9/24 9/24 9/26 10112 South North Drainage 4/10 4/2 4/24 4/10 4/29 4/23 6/24 6/20 712 7/15 7/15 8/23 8/23 10/19 10/19 6760 - 7320 7960 - 8360 8600 - 8960 Pulsatilla 1udoviciana 6120 - 6520 813 8124 8/10 9/1 815 8129 9/1 9/7 9/7 519 5/18 5/16 5/30 5/30 5/7 8/27 9117 6/25 l1l29 10118 11/29 10/23 10/23 LV 0\ '-0 �Table 5.--Average phenological activity dates of 8 forb and 1 undershrub species at 5 e1evationa1 ranges and 3 exposures, Cache 1a Poudre Canyon, Colorado, 1961-1963. (continued) Phenological Activit~ Phase Species Pulsatilla 1udoviciana E1evationa1 Range Observed (ft) 00 Exposure I -I.J .j.J ;3: 1-1 o cu 1-1 -I.J c.!l(f.) .j.J 1-1 (J) ~ (1)~(1) ;3:1""'I"CI o CU'M I""'I-I.J:> iJ.<(f.)~ 00 (J) ~ 1-1 'M (1) ;3: 0 o 0 1""'11""'1 iJ.<1=CI e 1""'1 0 ::ll""'l o (1) 1""'1 :> iJ.<1=CI c ..c:: 'M e 1""'1 0 I=CIO 00 >=l .j.J 'M 'M ::l 1-1 1-1 0 iJ.<iJ.< oe 1-1 e ~ 'M . e e "CI (1) (1) 0(1) 'M 1Zlt:r:: (1)00 (1) "CI(J)>=l "CI(J)I-I (1) (J)'M (1)(J)(1) (1)'M .j.J (1)'M :> IZlOcu IZlOO 00 .j.J ~ ~ 'M cu :>. 1""'1 1-1 P,tO .j.J"CI ~(1) cu 'M 1""'1 1-1 P-IO 6760 - 7320 South North Ridgetop 4/6 4/10 4/6 4/10 4/17 4/17 4/18 4/27 4/24 5/5 5/7 5/9 5/20 5/23 5/20 5/30 6/4 6/1 6/14 6/24 6/20 6/20 7/6 7/6 7/11 7/22 7/13 8/23 8/18 8/13 10/13 10/11 10/11 7960 - 8360 South North Drainage 4/18 N.O. N.o.liN.O. 5/1 5/1 5/11 5/4 5/20 5/18 6/1 5/25 6/24 6/24 7/11 6/24 7/18 7/11 8/15 8/8 10/18 10/1 - - 7/31 9/11 - 7/25 9/4 10/8 10/10 8600 - 8960 South North Drainage - 4/18 5/18 5/22 6/2 - 6/16 6/30 4/25 5/9 5/8 5/22 5/28 6/9 7/18 7/9 7/21 7/15 - ThennoEsis divaricarpa 8600 - 8960 South North Drainage 5/2 5/4 5/4 5/11 5/22 5/15 6/5 6/24 6/9 6/24 7/1 6/27 7/1 7/18 7/11 7/6 7/25 7/15 8/13 9/1 9/10 9/7 9/11 9/24 10/6 10/6 10/6 8/20 8/23 8/23 10/20 10/9 10/13 Achillea 1anu1osa 6120 - 6520 South North Drainage 4/3 3/31 6/14 6/9 7/8 7/2 7/18 7/15 8/19 8/7 9/1 8/24 9/22 9/13 9/27 9/27 11/29 11/26 9/8 9/8 10/30 11/12 South North Drainage 3/31 4/17 4/5 6/17 6/20 6/10 7/10 7/10 7/10 7/18 7/15 7/18 8/17 8/17 8/10 9/4 9/4 8/29 9/18 9/18 9/18 9/27 9/27 9/27 10/28 11/26 10/28 9/14 9/8 9/8 10/17 10/15 10/10 6760 - 7320 w --J 0 �Table 5.--Average phenological activity dates of 8 forb and 1 undershrub species at 5 e1evationa1 ranges and 3 exposures, Cache 1a Poudre Canyon, Colorado, 1961-1963. (continued) Phenological Activity Phase Species Achillea 1anu1osa E1evationa1 Range Observed (ft) 00 Exposure ..c •~ .-( oIjolj oIj CIl ~ H Q) ~ 6~ Q) I 00 ~g ~~ oIj •.-( ~ § C!lc:t.l ~c:t.lP<l ~j:Q ;:l~ ~j:Q § H o (I) ~j:QO> ~ ~ H oIj 't) til·.-( ~oIj> ~ 0 ~ .; B H ~~ 0 . ~ ....• 00 CIl ~ H •.-( 't) (I) (I) c:l.. (I) •.-( c:t.lr:t:: ~oo S Q) 00 oIj ~ !=: •.-( 't)CIl~ (I)CIl•.-( (1)•.-(oIj tf.l~ til 'OCIlH (l)CIl(l) (1)•.-( tf.l~O til ~ > ;>.. H Il-I~ oIj't) ~ (I) til •.-( ~ H Il-I~ 7960 - 8360 South North Drainage 4/1 4/18 4/3 6/17 6/17 6/17 7/1 7/11 7/11 7/11 7/18 7/25 8/8 8/15 8/15 8/22 8/22 8/22 9/18 10/1 9/18 10/1 10/1 10/25 11/29 10/8 11/29 9/17 9/3 9/17 11/29 11/1 11/29 8600 - 8960 South North Drainage 4/1 5/4 4/1 6/29 7/6 6/24 7/10 "7/20 7/20 7/28 7/10 7/20 8/25 9/3 9/3 9/5 9/11 9/11 9/29 10/6 9/29 10/9 9/29 10/6 ll/l 10/28 10/25 9/8 9/8 9/8 10/12 10/12 10/12 9960 - 10400 South North Drainage 5/11 7/12 7/31 8/5 8/31 9/10 9/21 iO/9 10/25 9/15 10/12 9960 - 10400 South North Drainage 5/28 6/2 6/24 7/1 7/11 8/8 8/15 8/22 9/4 9/24 9/7 11/1 7/1 7/11 7/25 8/15 8/22 9/1 9/7 9/20 9/7 ll/l South North Drainage 6/1 6/27 7/22 8/2 8/13 8/20 9/1 9/6 10/22 9/4 10/2 South North Drainage 5/28 6/6 6/13 6/29 7/16 7/26 8/17 8/26 9/8 9/8 10/22 w Arnica cordifolia Senecio triangularis Caltha 1eptosepa1a 9960 - 10400 9960 - 10400 - - - - - --:] - - - - - j-J �- 372 - Table 6.--Ground cover percentages, Hewlett Gulch study area, Cache la Poudre Canyon, Colorado. N = 366. July-August, 1963. Species Basal Under I' Woody and Semi-woody Artemisia frigida Cercocarpus montanus Chrysothamnus SPa Eriogonum SPa Gutierrezia sarothrae Jamesia americana Juniperus communis Juniperus scopulorum Opuntia SPa Physocarpus monogynus Pinus ponderosa Prunus americana Prunus virginiana Pseudotsuga taxifolia Purshia tridentata Rhus trilobata Ribes cereum Rubus strigosus Salix sp. Yucca glauca Totals Forbs Achillea 1anulosa Anapha lis sp. Antennaria SPa Aquilegia SPa Arenaria SPa Artemisia SPa Brickellia sp. Chrysopsisvil1osa Cirsium SPa Eriogonum SPa Euphorbia SPa Helianthus pumilus Heuchera SPa Lupinus SPa Oenothera SPa Oxytropis SPa Phacelia SPa Phlox SPa Pseudocymopterus SPa Psora lea tenuf10ra .24 .16 .03 .27 3.39 1.45 .03 .03 .38 .03 .36 .49 .68 .19 .05 .05 .03 .03 .03 .11 .27 .79 .63 .08 .03 .89 .11 9.05 Percentage Cover Crown 1'-2' 2'-3' 3'-4' .05 2.08 .03 .41 .60 .03 .03 1.04 .08 .03 .66 .52 .16 .03 .16 .03 .08 .30 .05 .03 .08 .05 5.83 3.68 1.51 .78 3.44 5.69 .14 .03 .38 .25 .77 2.43 .68 .19 .27 .08 .30 .79 2.83 1.91 .19 .16 .21 .11 20.85 .03 .19 .33 .03 .05 1.48 .22 .03 .05 .05 .03 1.23 .03 .03 .22 .33 .03 .03 .03 .03 .03 .03 .05 .05 .03 .16 .11 .03 .11 .05 .11 .33 .03 .36 .03 .11 .03 .38 .44 .03 .05 .05 .03 .05 1.37 1.69 .05 .05 .08 .08 1.61 .68 .08 .05 .03 .03 .05 4'-5' Total Crown .11 .22 .03 .22 .33 .03 .03 .03 �- 373 Table 6.--Ground cover percentages, Hewlett Gulch study area, Cache la Poudre Canyon, Colorado. N = 366. July-August, 1963./ (continued) Species Basal Under l' Forbs (continued) Pulsatilla 1udoviciana Sedum sp. Stellaria sp. Taraxacum sp. Unident. forb (Annual) Totals .25 Grass and Grasslikes Agropyron sp. .08 Aristida sp. Boute1oua curtipendu1a Boute1oua gracilis .79 Bromus tectorum .14 Ca1amagrostis sp. Carex sp. .05 Carex sp. E1ymus triticoides E1ymus sp. .03 Hesperoch1oa kingii .03 Koe1eria cristata .05 Muh1enbergia sp. .05 Oryzopsis micrantha Poa sp. Stipa comata .49 Stipa robusta Stipa sp. .03 Unident.grass (Perennia1)~~.~1~4 Totals 1.88 Other Lichen Moss Se1agine11a sp. Totals Dead Woody and Semi-woody Artemisia frigida Cercocarpus montanus Jamesia americana Juniperus scopu1orum Pinus ponderosa Prunus americana Prunus virginiana .57 .36 .68 1.61 .03 .03 .14 .05 .05 .03 .76 4.68 Percentage Cover Crown 1'-2' 2'-3' 3'-4' .16 .74 .44 .05 .19 1. 75 2.35 .03 .46 .03 .03 .27 .19 .16 .14 .08 .22 1. 56 .08 .05 ~.2~2~ 8.25 ~~ .43 5.00 .14 .14 5.28 .76 .22 .87 .03 .16 .03 o o 4'-5' Total Crown o .14 .•05 .05 .03 .92 5.42 .03 .52 .05 .19 1. 75 2.46 .03 .46 .03 .03 .43 .22 .16 .14 .08 .25 .11 .16 .03 .03 .05 1.61 .08 ~ 0 ~~ __~~ __~~.~2~2~_ .03 0 8.71 .76 o o .74 .19 .03 .14 .05 .03 .03 .14 .08 .05 .03 o .03 5.76 .14 .14 6.04 .22 1.83 .03 .49 .22 .03 .03 �- 374 - Table 6.--Ground cover percentages, Hewlett Gulch study area, Cache 1a Poudre Canyon, Colorado. N = 366. July-August, 1963. (continued) Species Basal Under l' Dead Woody and Semi-woody ~continued~ Pseudotsuga taxifo1ia .03 Purshia tridentata .27 2.30 ~ trilobata .03 .14 Ribes cereum .05 Rubus strigosus .03 Salix sp , Totals .36 3.86 Total Vegetation LITTER ROCK EROSION PAVEMENT BARE SOIL TOTALS Percentage Cover Crown 1'-2' 2 '-3' 3'-4' .03 .05 4'-5' .03 .05 Total Crown 2.03 .03 .52 .14 .08 .14 3.31 .17 .10 .03 .03 6.63 3.68 1.54 -.J..§. 41.02 .96 .03 .05 4.63 27.26 7.76 40.22 27.98 .33 26.48 66.09 .03 .19 100.00 97.24 9.98 66.28 .03 4.20 1.68 .86 113.96 �- 375- Table 7.--Percentage composition of vegetative cover, Hewlett Gulch study area, Cache 1aPoudre Canyon, Colorado. N = 366. July-August, 1963. Species Basal Under l' Woody and Semi-woody Artemisia frigida Cercocarpus montanus Chrysothamnus sp. Eriogonum sp. Gutierrezia sarothrae Jamesia americana Juniperus communis Juniperus scopu1orum Opuntia sp. Physocarpus monogynus Pinus ponderosa Prunus americana Prunus virginiana Pseudotsuga taxifo1ia Purshia tridentata Rhus trilobata Ribes cereum Rubus strigosus Salix sp. Yucca glauca Totals Forbs Achillea 1anu1osa Anaphalis sp. Antennaria sp. Aquilegia sp. Arenaria sp. Artemisia spp. Brickellia sp. Chrysopsis vi110sa Cirsium sp. Eriogonum sp. Euphorbia sp. He1ianthus pumi1us Heuchera sp. Lupinus sp. Oenothera sp. Oxytropis sp. Phacelia sp. Phlox sp. 5.29 3.53 .59 5.88 8.29 3.54 .07 .07 .94 .07 .87 1.20 1.67 .47 1..18 1.18 .59 .59 .59 .27 .67 1.94 1.54 .20 .07 19.42 .27 22.15 Percentage Composition Crown 1'-2' 2'-3' 3'-4' 4'-5' .13 4.95 .07 1.00 1.47 .27 .07 4.15 .13 .87 .07 .40 .07 1.60 1.27 .40 .07 .40 .07 .20 .27 .13 .27 .74 .13 .20 '.20 3.95 1.67 .20 .13 .07 .27 .07 .94 1.07 .07 .13 .13 14.17 9.03 .13 .07 ~20 .13 3.69 1..94 Total Crown 8.42 13.78 .34 .07 .94 .61 1.87 5.94 1.67 .47 .67 .20 .74 1. 95 6.96 4.68 .47 .40 .53 .27 50.98 .07 .07 .59 .47 .07 1.18 .59 .59 .59 1. 76 .13 3.34 .07 .13 .13 .07 2.54 .07 .54 .80 .07 .07 .27 .54 .47 .47 .07 .13 3.61 .54 .07 .13 .13 .07 3.01 .07 .54 .80 .07 .07 �- 376 Table 7.--Percentage composition of vegetative cover, Hewlett Gulch study area, Cache 1a Poudre Canyon, Colorado. N = 366. July-August, 1963. (continued) Species Basal Under l' Forbs (continued) Pseudocymopterus sp. Psora lea tenuf10ra Pulsatilla ludoviciana Sedum sp. Ste11aria sp. Taraxacum sp. Unident. forb (Annual) Totals Percentage Composition Crown 1'-2' 2'-3' 3'-4' 4'-5' .07 .07 5.30 .33 .13 .13 .07 1.87 11.10 .40 1. 82 o Grass and Grasslikes Agropyron sp , Aristida sp. Bouteloua curtipendu1a Boute1oua gracilis Bromus tectorum Ca1amagrostis sp. Carex sp. Carex sp. ~~ triticoides E1ymus sp. Hesperoch1oa kingii Koeleria cristata Muh1enbergia sp. Oryzopsis micrantha Poa sp. Stipa comata Stipa robusta Stipa sp. Unident. grass (Perennial) Totals 2.94 40.60 .54 20.21 Other Lichen Moss Selagine11a sp. Totals 12.35 7.65 14.71 34.71 12.24 .33 .33 12.90 1.87 o TOTALS 100.03 66.36 18.94 9.03 1. 76 17~06 2.94 1.18 .59 .59 1.18 1.18 10.59 1.07 .13 .47 4.28 5.75 .07 1.14 .07 .07 .67 .47 .40 .33 .20 .54 3.81 .20 .13 o o Total Crown .07 .07 .33 .13 .13 .07 2.27 12.92 1.27 .13 .47 4.28 6.03 .07 1.14 .07 .07 1.07 .54 .40 .33 .20 .61 3.94 .20 .07 .28 .40 .07 .07 .13 .59 1.08 o o .54 21.36 o o 14.11 .33 .33 14.77 4.03 1.94 100.30 .07 1.87 �- 377- Table 8.--Ground cover percentages, Kelly Flats study area, Cache la Poudre Canyon, Colorado. N = 299. July-August, 1963. Species Wood~ and Semi-wood~ Artemisia frigida Cercocarpus montanus Gutierrezia sarothrae Jamesia americana Juniperus scopulorum Leptodact~lon pungens Opuntia sp. Physocarpus monogynus Pinus ponderosa Pseudotsuga taxifo1ia Purshia tridentata Rhus trilobata Ribes cereum Ribes sp. Rosa sp. sp. SY!!!Ehoricarx~os Totals Forbs Achillea 1anu1osa Allium sp. Antennaria sp. Artemisia sp. Aster sp. Astragalus sp. Chr~soEsis vi110sa Cirsium sp. Draba sp. Erigeron sp. Eriogonum sp. Geranium sp. Grindelia sp. He1ianthus pumi1us Heuchera sp. Lesguere11a sp. Microsteris humi1us O~tropis sp. Penstemon sp. Phace1ia heteroph~11a Potentilla sp. Basal .37 .03 .03 .17 .03 .13 Percentage Cover Crown Under l' 1'-2' 2'-3' 3'-4' 3.31 1.57 .33 .03 .54 .27 .60 .13 .47 4.05 1.47 .20 .20 .03 1.77 .84 4'-5' .20 .03 .17 .07 .30 .27 .17 .10 .13 .07 .27 1.77 1.87 .67 '.03 .10 .17 6.85 .07 .27 .03 .13 .37 .43 .54 13.20 .03 .07 .03 .13 .64 .10 .17 .77 .07 .03 .13 .64 .10 .17 .77 .07 .23 .07 .03 .40 .03 .10 .03 .10 .10 .07 .17 .07 .23 .07 .03 .40 .03 .10 .03 .10 .10 .07 .17 .03 .03 .03 .17 .07 .03 .03 .70 3.31 4.41 .33 .13 .24 .54 .27 .80 1.04 .94 5.95 3.71 1.33 .23 .13 .17 23.53 .76 .20 .03 2.24 .03 Total Crown �- 378 Table 8.--Ground cover percentages, Kelly Flats study area, Cache la Poudre Canyon, Colorado. N = 299. July-August, 1963. (continued) Species Basal Under l' Forbs (continued) Pseudocyrnopterus montanus Scutellaria sp. Sedum stenopetalum Senecio sp. Unident. forb Totals .03 .03 .71 Percentage Cover Crown 1'-2' 2'-3' 3'-4' 4'-5' Total Crown .03 .03 .03 .03 .03 3.46 .03 .03 .03 .03 .03 3.46 .67 .03 .07 .03 1.20 .20 .57 .03 .03 .67 .03 .07 .03 1.20 .20 .57 .03 .03 .23 .17 .03 .90 .07 .07 1.37 .20 .10 .23 .17 .17 .90 .07 .07 1. 37 .20 .10 Grass and Grasslikes Agropyron sp. Agrostis alba Aristida longiseta Bouteloua curtipendula Bouteloua gracilis BroolUS tectorum Carex sp. Elyrnus triticoides Elyrnus sp. Festuca ovina Hesperochloa kingii Koeleria cristata Muhlenbergia filiculmis Muhlenbergia montana Poa sp. Sitanion hystrix Stipa comata Stipa scribneri Stipa sp. Unident. grass (Perennial) Totals .03 3.15 .13 6.24 .13 6.24 Other Lichen Moss Se 1agine 11a sp. Fungi Totals 1.04 .40 1. 87 .03 3.34 4.41 4.41 .33 .03 4.77 .33 .03 4.77 Total Vegetation 7.96 27.67 38.00 .20 .03 .77 .10 .. 17 .03 .13 .17 .80 .13 .03 .40 .13 .17 �- 379 - Table 8.--Ground .cover percentages, Kelly Flats study area, Cache 1a Poudre Canyon, Colorado. N = 299. July-August, 1963. (continued) Species Basal Dead WoodI and Semi-woodI Cercocarpus montanus Jamesia americana Juniperus scopu1orum PhIsocarpus monogynus Pinus ponderosa Pseudotsuga taxifo1ia Purshia tridentata Rhus trilobata Ribes cereum Totals LITTER ROCK EROSION PAVEMENT BARE SOIL TOTALS Percentage Cover Crown Under I' 1'-2' 2'-3' 3'-4' .84 .03 .10 .03 .37 .03 1.91 .64 .61 4.19 .03 .54 .20 .13 1.34 51. 91 13.88 .64 25.52 13.61 .03 .03 99.94 45.50 8.22 .03 4'-5' .03 .07 .03 .03 .03 .03 .07 .10 .06 .03 Total Crown 1.27 .03 .10 .10 .03 .09 2.52 .84 .74 5.72 13.64 .03 2.34 .76 .57 57.39 �- 380 - .Table 9.--Percentage composition of vegetative cover, Kelly Flats study area, Cache 1a Poudre Canyon, Colorado. N = 299. July-August, 1963. Species Woody and Semi-woody Artemisia frigida Cercocarpus montanus Gutierrezia sarothrae Jamesia americana Junieerus scoeu1orum Leetodactylon eungens °euntia sp. Physocareus monogynus Pinus eonderosa Pseudotsuga taxifolia Purshia tridentata Rhus tri10bata Ribes cereum Ribes sp. Rosa sp. SY!!!Ehoricareossp. Totals Forbs Achillea 1anu1osa Allium sp. Antennaria sp. Artemisia spp. Aster sp. Astragalus sp. Chrysopsis vi110sa Cirsium sp. Draba sp. Erigeron sp. Eriogonum sp. Geranium sp. Grindelia sp. He1ianthus eumi1us Heuchera sp. Lesquerella sp. Microsteris humilus Oxytroeis sp. Penstemon sp. .Phacelia heteroehy11a Potentilla sp. Basal 4.58 .42 .42 2.08 .42 1.67 Percentage Comeosition Crown Under l' 1'-2' 2'-3' 3'-4' 8.69 4.l3 .88 .09 1.40 .70 1.58 .35 1.23 10.62 3.86 .53 .53 .09 4.65 2.19 4' -5' .53 .09 .44 .18 .79 .70 .44 .26 .35 .18 .70 4.65 4.92 1.76 .09 .26 .44 18.00 .18 .70 .09 .36 .96 1.14 1.85 1.41 8.69 11.59 .88 .35 .62 1.40 .70 2.11 2.72 2.45 15.63 9.74 3.52 .62 ..35 .44 61.82 9.59 34.68 .42 .18 .09 .35 1.67 .26 .44 2.02 .18 .09 .35 1.67 .26 .44 2.02 .18 .61 .18 .09 1.05 .09 .26 .09 .26 .26 .18 .44 .18 .61 .18 .09 1.05 .09 .26 .09 .26 .26 .18 .44 2.50 .42 .42 .42 .42 2.08 .83 .42 .42 5.88 .09 Total Crown �- 381 - 'Table 9.--Percentage composition of vegetative cover, Kelly Flats study area, Cache 1a Poudre Canyon, Colorado. N = 299. July-August, 1963. (Continued) Species Basal Forbs (Continued) Pseudocymopterus montanus Scute11aria sp. Sedum stenopeta1um .42 Senecio sp. Unident. forb .42 Totals 9.19 Grass and Grass1ikes 2.50 Agropyron sp. Agrostis alba .42 Aristida longiseta Boute1oua curtipendu1a Boute1oua gracilis 9.58 1.25 Bromus tectorum 2.08 Carex sp. E1ymus triticoides E1ymus sp. .42 Festuca ovina -- kingii 1.67 Hesperoch1oa 2.08 Koe1eria cristata .42 Muh1enbergia fi1icu1mis 10.00 Muhlenbergia montana 1.67 Poa sp. .42 Sitanion hystrix 5.00 Stipa comata 1.67 Stipa scribneri Stipa sp. Unident. grass .42 (Perennial) 39.60 Totals Percentage Composition Crown Under I' 1'-2' 2'-3' 3'-4' 4'-5' Total Crown .09 .09 .09 .09 .09 9.15 .09 .09 .09 .09 .09 9.15 1. 76 1. 76 .09 .18 .09 3.16 .53 1.49 .09 .09 .09 .18 .09 3.16 .53 1.49 .09 .09 .61 .44 .44 2.37 .18 .18 3.60 .53 .26 .61 .44 .44 2.37 .18 .18 3.60 .53 .26 .35 16.44 .35 16.44 Other Lichen Moss Se 1agine 11a sp. Fungi Totals 12.92 5.00 23.33 .42 41.67 11.59 11.59 .88 .09 12.56 .88 .09 12.56 TOTALS 100.05 72.83 18.00 5.88 1.85 1.41 99.97 �- 382 - Table lO.--Ground cover percentages" Sevenmile Creek study area, Cache la Poudre Canyon, Colorado. N = 295. June-July, 1964. Species Wood~ and Semi-wood~ Acer glabrum Artemisia frigida Artemisia tridentata ArctostaQh~los uva-ursi Berberis reEens Cercocarpus montanus Chr~sothamnus sp. Clematis sp. Jamesia americana JuniEerus communis JuniEerus scoEulorum LeEtodact~lon Eungens PhysocarEus monogynus Pinus flexilis Pinus Eonderosa Picea Eungens POEulus sp. Prunus virginiana Pseudotsuga taxifolia Purshia tridentata Ri.be s sp. Ribes cereum Rhus tri10bata Rosa sp. Rubus de1iciosus SheEherdia canadensis Symphoricaq~os sp. Totals Forbs Achillea 1anu1osa Allium sp. Anemone sp. Antenna ria sp. Arnica cordi folia Artemisia sp. Astragalus sp. Castilleja sp. Cerastium sp. Chr~sopsis villosa Cirsium sp. Basal .03 .24 .03 Percentage Cover Crown Under l' 1'-2' 2'-3' 3'-4' .07 1.12 3.32 .03 .20 .20 .11 .10 .17 .24 .17 .24 1.0.5 .03 .07 .07 .03 .07 .10 3.25 .37 .14 .03 .14 .14 .27 .10 11.39 .27 .03 .14 .03 .03 .10 .07 .34 .14 .07 .07 .14 .07 .03 .07 3.36 .44 .07 .28 .03 .20 .03 .14 .10 .14 .03 4'-5' .10 .54 .51 .44 .07 .10 .17 .10 .44 .03 .10 .14 1.25 .10 .51 .20 .14 .27 .27 .34 .03 .03 .10 .03 .03 6.82 2.05 .34 1.15 1.35 Total Crown .34 1.12 7.19 .03 .20 .71 .14 .10 .34 .34 1.80 .24 1.39 .13 .78 .07 .06 .17 .98 4.64 .10 1.02 .03 .17 .27 .27 .13 22.76 .14 .03 .03 .10 .07 .34 .14 .07 .07 .14 �- 383 - Table 10.--Ground cover percentages, Sevenmi1e C~eek study area, Cache la Poudre Canyon, Colorado. N = 295. June-July, 1964. (continued) Species 'Basal Percentage Cover Crown Under l' 1'-2' 2'-3' 3'-4' Forbs (continued) Erodium cicutarium Erigeron sp. Eriogonum sp. .03 Fragaria .sp , Gaillardia sp. Geranium sp. Glyceria sp. Helianthus pumi1us Heuchera sp. Hydrophyluni sp. Lesquerella sp. Lupinus sp. Mentha sp. Mertensia sp. Microsteris humi1us Oenothera sp. Opuntia sp. .17 Osmorhiza sp. Penstemon sp. Phacelia sp. Jotentil1a spp. .03 Pseudocymopterus montanus Pulsatilla ludoviciana Scutellaria sp. Sedum sp. Smilacina sp. Solidago sp. Swertia sp. Taraxacum sp. Thermopsis divaricarpa Unident. forb Totals 0.53 .03 .07 .27 .07 .03 .27 .10 .51 .03 .07 .03 .03 .03 .03 .03 .10 .17 .10 .14 .03 1.29 .07 .07 .10 .03 .07 .03 .03 .17 .07 .10 5.30 Grass and Grasslikes Agropyron sp. Agropyron spicatum Bouteloua gracilis Bromus sp. Carex sp. Elymus triticoides Festuca ovina .17 .07 .37 .03 .98 .14 .03 .17 .03 .03 .03 4'-5' Total Crown .03 .07 .27 .07 .03 .27 .10 .54 .03 .07 .03 .03 .03 .03 .03 .10 .17 .10 .14 .03 1.29 .07 .07 .10 .03 ,.07 .03 .03 .17 .07 .10 5.33 .17 .07 .37 .03 .98 .14 .03 �- 384 - �- 385 - Table ll.--Percentage composition of vegetative cover, Sevenmile Creek study area, Cache la Poudre Canyon, Colorado. N = 295. June-July, 1964. Species Woody and Semi-woody Artemisia frigida Acer glabrum Artemisia tridentata Arctostaphylos uva-ursi Berberis repens Cerocarpus montanus Chrysothamnus sp. Clematis sp. Jamesia americana Juniperus communis Juniperus scopulorum Leptodactylon pungens Physocarpus monogynus Pinus flexilis Pinus ponderosa Picea pungens Populus sp. Prunus virginiana Pseudotsuga taxi folia Purshia tridentata Ribes sp. Ribes cereum Rhus trilobata Rosa sp. ~s deliciosus Shepherdia canadensis Symphoricarpos sp. Totals Forbs Achillea lanulosa Allium sp . Anemone sp. Antennaria sp. Arnica cordi folia Artemisia sp. Astragalus sp. Castilleja sp. Cerastium sp. Chrysopsis villosa Cirsium sp. Basal 1.79 12.50 1.79 Percentage Composition Crown Under l' 1'-2' 2'-3' 3'-4' 3.28 .20 9.74 .10 .60' .60 .30 .30 .50 .70 .50 .70 3.08 .10 3.57 .20 .10 .20 .30 9.54 19.65 .40 .10 .40 .40 .80 .30 33.44 14.29 1.79 .40 .10 .10 .30 .20 .99 .40 .20 .20 .40 .20 9.84 .10 1.29 .20 .20 .80 .10 .60 .10 .40 .30 .40 .10 4'-5' .30 1.59 . 1.49 1.29 .20 .30 .50 .30 1.29 .10 .30 .40 3.68 .30 1.49 .60 .40 .80 .80 .99 .10 .99 .10 .30 .10 .10 20.00 6.07 3.39 3.98 Total Crown 3.28 1.00 21.07 .10 .60 2.10 .40 .30 1.00 1.00 5.27 .70 4.07 .40 2.29 .20 .20 .50 2.90 13.62 .30 2.98 .10 .50 .80 .80 ".40 66.88 .40 .10 .10 .30 .20 .99 .40 .20 .20 .40 �- 386 - .Table ll.--Percentage composition of vegetative cover, Sevenmile Creek study area, Cache la Poudre Canyon, Colorado. N = 295. June-July, 1964. (Continued) Species Basal Percentage Composition Crown Under l' 1'-2' 2'-3' 3'-4' Forbs ~Continued) Erodium cicutarium Erigeron sp. 1.79 Eriogonum sp. Fragaria sp • Gaillardia sp • Geranium sp. Glyceria sp. Helianthus pumilus Heuchera sp. Hydrophylum sp. Lesguerella sp. LUEinus sp , Mentha sp. Mertensia sp . Microsteris humilis Oenothera sp , 8.93 °Euntia sp. Osmorhiza sp. Penstemon sp. Phacelia sp , 1. 79 Potentilla spp. PseudocymEoterus montanus Pulsatilla ludoviciana Scutellaria sp . Sedum sp. Smilacina sp. Solidago sp , Swertia sp. Taraxacum sp. ThermoEsis divaricaq~a Unident. forb 28.59 Totals .10 .20 .80 .20 .10· .80 .30 1.49 .10 .20 .10 .10 .10 .10 .10 .30 .50 .30 .40 .10 3.78 .20 .20 .30 .10 .20 .10 .10 .50 .20 .30 15.66 Grass and Grasslikes AgroEyron sp , AgroEyron sEicatum Bouteloua gracilis Bromus sp . Carex sp , Elymus triticoides Festuca ovina HesEerochloa kingii Juncus sp. .50 .20 1.09 .10 2.88 .40 .10 1.89 .10 8.93 1.79 3.57 .10 0.10 4'-5' Total Crown .10 .20 .80 .20 .10 .80 .30 1.59 .10 .20 .10 .10 .10 .10 .10 ..30 .50 .30 .40 .10 3.78 .20 ··.20 .30 .10 .20 .10 .10 .50 .20 .30 15.76 .50 .20 1.09 .10 2.88 .40 .10 1.89 .10 �- 387 - Table ll.--Percentage composition of vegetative cover, Sevenmile Creek study area, Cache la Poudre Canyon, Colorado. N = 295. June-July, 1964. (Continued) Species Basal Percentage Composition Crown Under l' 1'-2' 2'-3' 3'-4' Grass and Grass1ikes (Continued) Koeleria cristata Muhlenbergia fi1iculmis Poa sp. Stipa comata Stipa sp. Totals 14.29 .10 .10 1.79 .30 .10· 9.65 Other Fungi Se1aginel1a sp. Moss Lichen Totals 3.57 23.20 10.70 37.47 7.75 7.75 .10 .10 TOTALS 100.00 66.50 20.20 4'-5' Total Crown .10 .10 1.79 .30 .10 9.65 7.85 7.85 6.07 3.39 3.98 100.14 �- 388 - Table 12.--Ground cover percentages, Little Beaver Creek study area, Cache 1a Poudre Canyon, Colorado. N = 301. June-July, 1964. Species Woody and Semi-woody Abies lasiocaq~a Alnus tenuifolia Artemisia frigida ArtostaEhylos uva-ursi Betula glandulosa Jamesia americana JuniEerus communis Pinus contorta Pinus flexilus Pinus Eonderosa Potenti11a fruticosa POEulus tremuloides Pseudotsuga taxifolia Purshia tridentata Ribes sp. Rosa sp. Salix sp. SheEherdia canadensis Vaccinium spp. Totals Forbs Achillea lanulosa Agoseris sp. Androsace sp. Antennaria sp. Aguilegia caerulea Arnica cordifolia Arnica fulgens Artemisia sp. Astragalus sp. CamEanula rotundifolia ChrysoEsis villosa Circium sp. Dodecatheon sp. Draba sp. Erigeron sp. Fragaria sp. Galium sp. Geranium sp_ Geum sp. Basal .07 .10 .03 .07 .26 .10 Percent Cover Crown Under I' 1'-2' 2'-3' 3'-4' 4'-5' .10 .03 .07 .33 .23 .53 .83 .13 .33 .07 .03 .07 .03 .03 .07 .07 .50 .56 .50 .30 .03 .03 .60 .66 .53 .10 .20 . .03 .86 .07 .20 .30 .53 .07 11.16 .03 .30 .23 .20 .03 .07 2.88 1.26 1.22 1.59 .07 .23 4.98 .03 .07 2.59 .10 .07 .03 .03 .63 .03 .03 Total Crown .26 .20 .23 4.98 .13 .07 3.09 2.09 .50 1.16 1.13 1.30 .03 .93 .07 .23 .90 .76 .07 18.13 .36 .03 ··.36 .03 .07 .07 .26 .07 .10 .07 .03 .07 .03 .10 .03 .17 .30 .20 .07 .03 .07 .07 ..26 .07 .10 .07 .03 .07 .03 .10 .03 .17 .30 .20 .07 .03 .03 .03 .03 .10 �- 389 - Table 12.--Ground cover percentages, Little Beaver Creek study area, Cache la Poudre Canyon, Colorado. N = 301. June-July, 1964. (continued) Species Forbs (continued) Gilia calcarea Lesguerella sp. Montia sp. Osmorhiza SPa Oxytropis sp. Pedicu1aris grayi Penstemon sp. Potentilla sp. Senecio sp. Sedum stenopeta1um Solidago sp. Taraxacum sp. Thermopsis divaricarpa Totals Basal .03 .03 Percentage Cover Crown Under l' 1'-2' 2'-3' 3'-4' .03 .03 .03 .10 .07 .10 .10 .03 .07 .58 Total Crown .03 .03 .03 .10 .07 .07 .03 .40 .03 .10 .03 .70 2.26 5.94 .07 .03 .40 .03 .10 .03 .70 1. 96 5.64 Grass and Grasslikes Bromus sp. .13 Ca1amagrostis canadensis .07 .03 Ca1amagrostis purpurescens .10 1.36 Carex sp. .80 Danthonia intermedia .03 .07 Danthonia parryi .13 .26 Deschampsia caespitosa .07 Festuca idahoensis .03 .03 Festuca thurberi .03 .07 G1yceria sp. .03 Hesperoch1oa kingii .07 Hierochloe odorata .03 Juncus sp. .03 .17 Koe1eria cristata .03 .17 Muh1enbergia richardsoni .07 Oryzopsis asperifo1ia .03 .10 Poa spp. .43 .33 Stipa comata ~.~0~3 ~.1~0~ Totals 1.85 2.98 Other Eguisetum sp. Moss Lichen Se1aginella sp. Totals Total Vegetation 4'-5' .30 .30 .13 .07 .10 1.46 .07 .30 .03 .10 .03 .03 .07 .03 .03 .17 .17 .10 .33 ~.=1~0 __ 3.16 ~ .16 .03 .03 2.13 2.13 1.16 .56 .03 1. 75 4.81 2.16 2.16 21.94 3.34 1.26 1.22 1.59 29.39 �- 390 - Table 12.--Ground cover percentages, Little Beaver Creek study area, Cache la Poudre Canyon, Colorado. N = 301. June-July, 1964. (Continued) Species Basal Dead wood~ and Semi-wood~ Alnus tenuifolia ArctostaEh~los uva-ursi Jamesia americana Juniperus communis Pinus contorta Pinus flexilus Pinus ponderosa Potentilla fruticosa POEulus tremuloides Purshia tridentata Shepherdia canadensis Vaccinium sp. Totals Litter Rock Erosion Pavement Bare Soil TOTALS Percentage Cover Crown Under l' 1'-2' 2'-3' 3'-4' .03 .20 .03 .30 .07- 83.12 6.01 .10 5.91 99.95 .03 .10 .03 .07 .03 .10 .03 .36 .09 .16 8.01 .17 .76 .03 .03 .03 .03 31.81 4.46 1.41 1.44 .07 .10 .53 .33 .03 1.69 4'-5' .03 .03 .10 .03 .03 .13 .03 .03 .19 Total Crown .07 .20 .03 .30 .43 .10 .13 .10 .26 .53 .33 .03 2.51 8.84 .23 1.78 40.97 �- 391 - Table l3.--Percentage composition of vegetative cover, Little Beaver Creek study area, Cache la Poudre Canyon, Colorado. N = 30l. June-July, 1964. Species Woody and Semi-woody Abies lasiocarpa Alnus tenuifolia Artemisia frigida Arctostaphylos uva-ursi Betula glandu10sa Jamesia americana Juniperus communis Pinus contorta Pinus flexilus Pinus ponderosa Potenti11a fruticosa Populus tremu10ides Pseudotsuga taxifo1ia Purshia tridentata Ribes sp. Rosa sp. Salix spp. She:eherdia canadensis Vaccinium spp. Totals Forbs Achillea lanulosa Agoseris sp. Androsace sp , Antennaria sp. Aguilegia caeru1ea Arnica cordifolia Arnica fu1gens Artemisia sp. Astragalus sp. Campanula rotundifolia Chrysopsis villosa Circium Dodecatheon sp. Draba sp. Erigeron sp. Fragaria sp. Galium sp. Geranium sp. Geum sp. Gilia calcarea Lesguerella sp. Hontia sp. Basal 1.37 2.05 .68 1.37 5.48 2.05 Percentage Composition Crown Under I' 1'-2' 2'-3 ' 3'-4' .22 .11 .22 .11 .11 .22 .22 1.69 1.92 1.69 1.02 .11 .11 2.03 2.26 1.81 .34 •.68 .11 2.94 .22 .68 1.02 1.81 .22 37.94 .11 1.02 .79 .68 .11 .22 9.80 4.27 4.18 5.39 .22 .79 1,6.95 .11 .22 8.81 .34 .34 .11 .22 1.13 .79 1.81 2.82 .45 1.13 .22 .11 .11 .11 13.00 .68 4'-5' Total Crown .90 .68 .79 16.95 .45 .22 10.51 7.12 1.69 3.95 3.84 4.41 .11 3.16 .22 .79 3.05 2.60 .22 61.66 1.24 .11 1.24 .11 .22 .22 .90 .22 .34 .22 .11 .22 .11 .34 .11 .56 1.02 .68 .22 .11 .11 .11 .11 .22 .22 .90 .22 .34 .22 .11 .22 .11 .34 .11 .56 1.02 .68 .22 .11 .68 .68 .68 2.05 .68 .11 .11 .11 �- 392 Table 13.--Percentage composition of vegetative cover, Little Beaver Creek study area, Cache la Poudre Canyon, Colorado. N = 301. June-July, 1964. (continued) Species Basal Forbs (continued) Osmorhiza sp. Oxytropis sp. Pedicular is grayi Penstemon sp. Potentilla spp. Senecio sp. Sedum stenopeta1um Solidago sp. Taraxacum sp. Thermopsis divaricarpa Totals .68 2.05 2.05 .68 1.37 12.28 Grass and Grass1ikes Bromus sp. Ca1amagrostis canadensis 1.37 Ca1amagrostis purpurescens Carex sp. 16.44 Danthonia intermedia .68 Danthoniaparryi 2.74 1.37 Deschampsia caespitosa Festuca idahoensis .68 Festuca thurberi .68 Glyceria sp. 1.37 lksperochloa kingii Hierochloe odorata Juncus sp. .68 Koeleria cristata .68 Muhlenbergia richardsoni 1.37 Oryzopsis asperifo1ia .68 Poa spp. 8.90 Stipa comata .68 Totals 38.32 Other Eguisetum sp. Lichen Moss Se lagine 11a sp. Totals 11.64 23.97 .68 32.29 TOTALS 99.89 Percentage Composition Crown Under l' 1'-2' 2'-3' 3'-4' .34 .22 .22 .11 .1.36 .11 .34 .11 2.37 6.67 19~13 .45 .11 .34 4.63 .22 .91 4'-5' Total Crown .34 .22 .22 .11 1.36 .11 .34 .11 2.37 7.68 20.14 1.02 1.02 .45 .22 .34 4.97 .22 .1.02 .11 .34 .11 .11 .22 .11 .11 .22 .11 .11 .56 .56 .11 .56 .56 .34 1.13 .34 10.14 .34 1.13 .34 10.70 .56 .11 7.23 .11 7.23 7.34 7.34 74.55 11.38 4.27 4.18 5.39 99.84 �- 393 Table 14.--Ground cover percentages, Crown Point study area, Cache la Poudre Canyon, Colorado. N = 299. July-August, 1964. Species Woody and Semi-woody Abies lasiocarpa Juniperus communis Pinus contorta Ficea engelmanni Pinus flexilis Ribes sp. Salix spp. Vaccinium spp. Totals Forbs Achillea 1anu1osa Anemone sp. Antennaria sp. Arnica cordifolia Arenaria sp , Arenaria obtusiloba Artemisia scopu1orum Aster sp. Astragalus sp.? Cardamine cordifolia Caltha leptosepala Erigeron sp.? Gentiana sp.? Geranium sp. Geum turbinatum Mertensia ciliata Moneses sp. Polygonum bistortoides Polemonium sp. Potentilla sp. Pyrola sp. Saxifraga sp. Saxifraga arguta Senecio triangularis Sibba1dia procumbens Streptopus amplexifolius Taraxacum sp. Trifolium sp , Trollius laxus Umbelliferae Unident. Forb Totals Basal 0.20 0.03 0.17 0.47 0.03 0.03 0.13 1.06 0.03 0.03 0.07 0.13 Percentage Cover Crown Under l' 1'-2' 2'-3' 3'-4' 4'-5' 2.94 0.13 3.21 0.07 2.27 2.78 1.91 0.74 1.97 1.97 0.20 1.71 0.13 2.14 0.20 1.17 20.23 25.41 0.07 2.17 0.03 7.52 1.64 0.43 0.17 5.88 5.12 4.35 0.10 0.20 0.17 0.70 0.03 0.17 0.40 0.20 0.03 0.17 0.97 0.37 0.07 0.03 1.14 0.13 0.07 0.57 0.07 0.20 0.13 0.23 0.64 0.37 0.27 0.07 0.13 0.97 0.77 0.17 1.04 10.58 0.13 0.03 0.03 0.70 0.03 0.33 0.07 0.03 0.99 0.36 Total Crown 13.11 0.20 0.33 8.53 0.27 5.58 20.26 48.28 0.10 0.20 0.17 0.70 0.03 0.17 0.40 0.20 0.03 0.33 0.97 0.37 0.07 0.03 1.14 0.16 0.07 0.57 0.07 0.20 0.13 0.23 0.64 1.40 0.30 0.07 0.13 0.97 0.84 0.17 1.07 11.93 �- 394 - Table 14.--Ground cover percentages, Crown Point study area, Cache la Poudre Canyon, Colorado. N = 299. July August, 1964. (continued) Species Basal Grass and Grasslikes Calamagrostis canadensis Carex spp. Deschampsia caespitosa Juncus sp. Phleum sp.? Poa sp, Luzula sp. Totals Other Lichen Moss Fungi 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.09 1.20 6.79 Percentage Cover Crown Under l' 1'-2' 2'-3' 3'-4' 0.07 1.00 0.67 0.54 0.03 0.23 0.07 2.61 4'-5' Total Crown 0.07 1.00 0.67 0.54 0.03 0.23 0.10 2.64 0.03 0.03 Totals 7.99 3.04 3.21 0.07 6.32 Total Vegetation 9.27 44.92 8.64 6.24 5.12 4.35 69.27 0.33 0.03 0.27 0.03 0.07 0.77 3.14 0.33 0.13 0.37 0.03 0.17 0.13 0.30 0.03 0.27 0.20 0.23 0.03 0.33 0.27 0.27 0.50 0.03 4.64 1.36 0.03 0.69 0.73 0.87 1.43 0.76 1.44 0.12 0.07 1. 30 3.14 0.03 8.29 55.35 0.10 3.01 0.37 0.13 0.10 58.96 0.10 Totals 76.42 8.53 1.04 4.68 90.67 55.45 3.01 0.37 0.13 0,10 59.06 TOTALS 99.94 105.01 13.01 7.30 5.98 5.32 136. 62 Dead Woody and Semi-woody Abies 1asiocarpa Pinus contorta Picea enge1manni Populus tremuloides Ribes sp. Salix sp. Vaccinium spp. Unident. conifer Totals Other LITTER ROCK EROSION PAVEMENT BARE SOIL 3.04 3.31 0.07 6.42 0.10 0.10 �- 395 - Table l5.--Percentage composition of vegetative cover, Crown Point study area, Cache la Poudre Canyon, Colorado. N = 299. July-August, 1964. Species Woody and Semi-woody Abies lasiocarpa Juniperus communis Pinus contorta Picea engelmanni Pinus flexilis Ribes sp. Salix spp. Vaccinium spp. Totals Forbs Achillea lanulosa Anemone sp. Antennaria sp. Arnica cordi folia Arenaria sp. Arenaria obtusiloba Artemisia scopulorum Aster sp , Astragalus sp. ? Cardamine cordi folia Caltha leptosepa1a Erigeron sp. ? Gentiana sp. ? Geranium sp. Geum turbinatum Mertensia ciliata Moneses sp. Polygonum bistortoides Polemonium sp. Potentilla sp. Pyrola sp. Saxifraga sp. Saxifraga arguta Senecio triangularis Sibbaldia procumbens Streptopus amplexifolius Taraxacum sp. Trifolium sp. Trollius laxus Umbe 1li ferae Unident. forb Totals Basal 2.16 0.36 1.80 5.04 0.36 0.36 1.44 11.52 0.36 0.36 0.72 1.44 Percentage Composition Crown Under I' I' -2' 2'-3' 3'-4 I 4' -5' 4.25 0.19 4.63 0.10 3.28 4.01 2.75 1.06 2.85 2.85 0.29 2.46 0.19 3.09 0.29 1.68 29.20 36.67 0.10 3.14 0.05 10.87 2.36 0.63 0.24 8.49 7.39 6.27 0.14 0.29 0.24 1.01 0.05 0.24 0.58 0.29 0.05 0.24 1.40 0.53 0.10 0.05 1.64 0.19 0.10 0.82 0.10 0.29 0.19 0.34 0.92 0.53 0.39 0.10 0.19 1.40 1.11 0.24 1.50 15.26 0.19 0.05 0.05 1.01 0.05 0.48 0.10 0.05 1.45 0.53 Total Crown 18.92 0.29 0.48 12.31 0.39 8.05 39.25 69.69 0.14 0.29 0.24 1.01 0.05 0.24 0.58 0.29 0.05 0.48 1.40 0.53 0.10 0.05 1.64 0.24 0.10 0.82 0.10 0.29 0.19 0.34 0.92 2.02 0.44 0.10 0.19 1.40 1.21 0.24 1.55 17.24 �- 396 - Table lS.--Percentage composition of vegetative cover, Crown Point study area, Cache la Poudre Canyon, Colorado. N = 299. July-August, 1964. (Continued) Species Basal Grass and Grass1ikes Calamagrostis canadensis 0.36 Carex spp. 0.36 Deschampsia caespitosa Juncus sp. Ph1eum sp. ? Poa sp. 0.36 r;;:;z-u1a sp. Totals 1.08 Other Lichen Moss Fungi 12.95 73.02 Percentage Composition Crown Under l' 1'-2' 2'-3' 3'-4' 0.10 1.45 0.97 0.77 0.05 0.34 0.10 3.78 Totals 85.97 4.39 4.63 0.10 9.12 TOTALS 100.01 64.83 4'-5' 0.10 1.45 0.97 0.77 0.05 0.34 0.15 3.83 0.05 0.05 4.39 4.77 0.10 9.26 0.14 0.14 12.51 Total Crown 9.02 7.39 6.27 100.02 �Table l6.--0ven-dry yields per acre of true mountain mahogany, antelope bitterbrush, and big sagebrush on three winter range study areas, Cache la Poudre Canyon, Colorado, 1962-1964. Study Area Hewlett Gulch (Lower-winter) Kelly Flats (Middle-winter) Species Year Mean Oven-dry Yield/Acre (lbs) Confidence Limits at 90% Level Sample Size (100 sq. ft. plots) True mountain mahogany (Cercocarpus montanus) 1962 1963 1964 14.8 10.8 5.6 11.6 - 18.0 9.4 - 12.2 4.2 - 7.0 112 366 366 Antelope bitterbrush (Purshia tridentata) 1962 1963 1964 29.0 12.0 5.6 18.9 - 39.1 8.9 - 15.1 4.2 - 7.0 115 366 366 True mountain mahogany 1962 1963 1964 9.9 3.1 5.2 7.4 - 12.4 2.0 - 4.2 3.5 - 6.9 88 299 299 Antelope bitterbrush 1962 1963 1964 43.6 8.5 13.3 29.9 - 57.3 4.4 - 12.6 11.2 - 15.4 91 299 299 True mountain mahogany 1962 1963 1964 2.9 2.0 0.5 0.7 0.0 0.0 - 5.1 4.2 1.4 53 295 295 Antelope bitterbrush 1962 1963 1964 39.3 19.3 12.4 24.5 - 54.1 14.3 - 24.3 10.1 - 14.7 88 295 295 Big sagebrush (Artemisia tridentata) 1962 1963 1964 75.8 79.8 78.2 55.2 - 96.4 68.5 - 91.1 67.8 - 88.6 88 295 295 w \.0 Sevenmi1e Creek (Upper-winter) -'I �Table l7.--Winter utilization of true mountain mahogany, antelope bitterbrush, and big sagebrush on three winter range study areas, Cache 1a Poudre Canyon, Colorado, 1962-1965. Study Area Hewlett Gulch (Lower-winter) Kelly Flats (Middle-winter) Sevenmile Creek (Upper-winter) Winter Year Mean Utilization (% by weight) Confidence Limits at 90% Level Sample Size (100 sq. ft. plots) True mountain mahogany (Cercocarpus montanus) 1962-63 1963-64 1964-65 3.3 9.0 13.7 1.9 - 4.7 7.0 - 11.0 11.1 - 16.3 112 366 366 Antelope bitterbrush (Purshia tridentata) 1962-63 1963-64 1964-65 7.4 20.0 17.7 5.8 - 9.0 15.9 - 24.1 14.4 - 21.0 115 366 366 True mountain mahogany 1962-63 1963-64 1964-65 13.6 37.0 20.5 9.5 - 17.7 32.6 - 41.4 17.7 - 23.3 88 299 299 Antelope bitterbrush 1962-63 1963-64 1964-65 18.0 24.7 13.3 13.8 - 22.2 21.4 - 28.0 11.3- 15.3 91 299 299 True mountain mahogany 1962-63 1963-64 1964-65 34.6 41. 8 58.8 20.1 - 49.1 35.6 - 48.0 51.6 - 66.0 53 295 295 Antelope bitterbrush 1962-63 1963-64 1964-65 6.7 9.9 21.5 5.1 - 8.3 8.5 - 11.3 19.4 - 23.6 88 295 295 Big sagebrush (ArtemiSia tridentata) 1962-63 1963-64 1964-65 7.0 4.9 11.9 4.6 - 9.4 4.0 - 5.8 10.3 - 13.5 88 295 295 Species w \.() CP �January, - 399 - JOB COMPLETION RESEARCH State of Project C~O~LO~RAD~~O~ REPORT PROJECT _ An Ecological Investigation of the Cache la Poudre Deer Herd, Colorado W-lOS-R-S No. SEGMENT Work Plan No. 3 .Environmental Job No. 5 Food Preference Period Covered: Personnel: January, 1964 - December, Studies 1964. Dean E. Medin and Allen E. Anderson ABSTRACT Stomach content samples from 58 deer collected at elevations ranging from 5,200 to 10,900 feet were taken during the 1964 reporting period. Regularly collected deer accounted for 48 of the samples and 10 were from supplementary sources (road kills, suspected predation, trapping mortality). Collection locations were chosen to obtain wide distribution within the Cache la Poudre drainage and to correspond with seasonal use elevational zones. Winter collections were from wintering elevations (5,200' - 8,500'); some spring 9 and fall collections were made from winter-sununer transitional zones (7,700 9,000'), and were made during the period of seasonal movement to higher (spring) or lower (fall) ranges. Sununer period collections were generally from elevations in excess of 9,000 feet. Four deer per month have been collected regularly since April, 1961 (Work plan 5, Jobs 1 and 2). The 58 stomach samples taken during the reporting period bring the total number collected since the beginning of the study to 213. - All samples have been sorted into component or like parts, packaged, and await identification and quantification. No results are available to date. Reconunendations: None. Objective: Estimate food preference by season for different elevational ranges and vegetative types so that seasonal forage use by deer can be related to the vegetation at each elevational level under study. Techniques Used: Four deer per month were collected to seasonal use areas (Table 1). Winter collections from locations corresponding were from wintering elevations 1965 �- 400 - (5,200' - 8,500'); spring and fall collections from transitional zones (7',700'9,000''); and summer collections generally from elevations in excess of 9,000 feet. The yearlong collection locations were chosen to obtain wide distribution within the Cache la Pbudre River drainage. Advantage was also taken of supplementary sources such as road kills for additional samples. A stomach content sample was obtained after a thorough m~x~ng of the rumen and reticulum contents. ApprOXimately one quart of material was squeezed to eliminate excess moisture, placed in a cardboard carton lined with polyethylene and partially filled with 10% formalin, tagged, and stored for sorting and analysis. Prior to sorting and packaging, the samples were washed through a set of four Tyler screens having progressively smaller mesh sizes down to a minimum 2 nnn. Botanical composition of collected samples will be estimated using methods recommended by Ju1ander (1952), Martin £! a1. (1946), and Dirsch1 (1962). �- 401 - FOOD' PREFERENCE Dean E. Medin Findings: Stomach content samples were taken from 58 deer collected during the reporting period (1964) at elevations ranging from 5,200' - 10,900'. Collection locations were chosen to correspond with seasonal use areas (Table 1). Each sample, approximately one quart, has been washed through screens and sorted into component species or similar plant parts (leaves, stems, fruits), and packaged. Estimation of the botanical composition of the packaged samples has not begun at this date. Total samples collected since the beginning of the study, including those of this reporting period, are now 213. As an aid in estimation and interpretation of range-plant preference, approximately 300 sample plots were established on each elevational study area (lower-winter, middle-winter, upper-winter, transitional, and summer ranges) to record plant composition, cover, annual production, and annual. utilization (as described under Work Plan 3, Job No.3 - Vegetative Analysis). Completed vegetative type maps of each study area, a three-year plant phenology record, and an herberium col.l.ec tion of 921 plant specimens will also be of value in identification and interprettion of stomach content botanical composition. It is anticipated, also, that weather data presently being recorded at each elevational zone (Work Plan 3, Job No. 1 - Climatic Environment) will elucidate forage habits both on a seasonal and short term basis. Snow depths, extent of snow-free and snow-cover periods, and temperature extremes should be helpful in interpretation. LITERATURE CITED Dirschl, H. J. 1962. Sieve mesh size related to analysis of antelope rumen contents. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 26(3):327-328. Julander, Odell. 1952. Forage habits of mule deer during late fall as measured by stomach content analyses. Intermountain Forest and Range Expt. Sta., Res. Note No.2, 5 pp. Martin, A. C., R. H. Gensch, and C. P. Brown. 1946. Alternative methods in upland game-bird food analysis. J. Wild!. Mgmt. 10:8-12. Prepared by: Date: Dean E. Medin Approved by: Wayne W. Sandfort Associate Wildlife Researcher Game Research Chief ~ __ ~ J~nuary, 1965 Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinetor �Table l.--Deer sex and age, date, elevation, seasonal range, and vegetative type from which stomach content samples were collected, Cache la Poudre Canyon, Colorado, 1964. No. Date Sex Estimated!! Age (Year-Month) 022 128 129 130 023 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 024 141 025 026 142 027 028 143 144 145 1-4-64 1-7-64 1-14-64 1-21-64 1-25-64 1-28-64 2-4-64 2., 11-64 2-18-64 2-25-64 3-3-64 3-10-64 3-17-64 3-24-64 4-2-64 4-6-64 4-7-64 4-7-64 4-8-64 4-8-64 4-15-64 4-16-64 4-21-64 4-28-64 5-5-64 Unknown Female Male Female Female Male Male Male Female Male Female Female Male Female Female Male Female Male Unknown Male Male Female Female Male Male Unknown 1-7 0-7 11-7 1-7 4-7 1-8 4-8 9-8 0-8 2-9 1-9 8-9 0-9 0-10 1~10 10-10 0-10 Unknown 7-10 0-10 2-10 3-10 9-10 3-11 7,400 7,600 6,500 8,000 7,100 8,500 6,500 7,000 7,400 7,100 5,900 6,900 8,000 6,000 7,500 8,000 7,600 7,500 8,000 7,900 7,200 7,800 5,600 7,600 5,600 Upper-winter Upper-winter Lower-winter Upper-winter Upper-winter Upper-winter Lower-winter Middle-winter Upper-winter Middle-winter Lower-winter Middle-winter Upper-winter Lower-winter Middle-winter Upper-winter Upper-winter Upper-winter Upper-winter Upper-winter Middle-winter Upper-winter Lower-winter Upper-winter Lower-winter 146 147 5-12-64 5-19-64 Female Male 3-11 4-11 6,400 8,400 Lower-winter Upper-winter Deer Collection Elevation (Ft.) Seasonal Range Vegetative Type Big sagebrush-Bitterbrush Big sagebrush-Bitterbrush Mt. Mahogany Ponderosa pine-Douglas fir-Aspen Big sagebrush-Bitterbrush Ponderosa pine-Douglas fir-Aspen Mt. Mahogany Ponderosa pine-Bitterbrush Big sagebrush-Bitterbrush Bitterbrush Mt. Mahogany Bitterbrush-Mt. Mahogany Big sagebrush-Bitterbrush Mt. Mahogany Bitterbrush-Mt. Mahogany Big sagebrush-Bitterbrush-Juniper Big sagebrush-Bitterbrush . Big sagebrush-Bitterbrush Big sagebrush-Bitterbrush Big sagebrush-Bitterbrush Ponderosa pine-Bitterbrush Big sagebrush-Bitterbrush Ponderosa pine-Mt. Mahogany Ponderosa pine-Bitterbrush Ponderosa pine-Douglas firMt. Mahogany Mt. Mahogany-Juniper Douglas fir-Ponderosa pineBitterbrush g ro �Table l.--Deer sex and age, date, elevation, seasonal range, and vegetative type from which stomach content samples were collected, Cache la Poudre Canyon, Colorado, 1964. (continued) No. Date Sex Es tima ted.1.7 Age (Year-Month) 029 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 030 158 159 160 161 162 031 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 5-20-64 5-26-64 6-2-64 6-9-64 6-16-64 6-23-64 6-30-64 7-7-64 7-13-64 7-20-64 7-28-64 7-29-64 8-4-64 8-11-64 8-17-64 8-25-64 9-9-64 9-10-64 9-15-64 9-21-64 9-29-64 10-5-64 10-12-64 10-20-64 11-4-64 11-10-64 11-17-64 Male Female Male Male Female Female Female Male Female Female Female Male Female Female Male Male Male Female Female Female Male Female Male Male Female Male Male 0-11 1-11 3-0 6-0 9-0 2-0 5-0 10-1 3-1 2-1 2-1 1-1 1-2 5-2 1-2 0-2 1-3 0-3 1-3 1-3 1-3 0-4 2-4 3-4 3-5 2-5 6-5 5,200 8,000 .7,900 9,100 7,200 9,700 10,200 10,000 9,800 10,200 9,300 10,200 10,200 10,100 9,900 9,400 10,200 5,500 10,900 9,000 9,500 7,700 9,400 7,700 6,300 6,900 7,600 Lower-winter Upper-winter Upper-winter Summer Middle-winter Summer Summer Summer Summer Summer Summer Summer Summer Summer Summer Summer Summer Lower-winter Summe r Transitional Summer Transitional Summer Transitional Lower-winter Middle-winter Upper-winter 172 11-23-64 Male 0-5 6,500 Lower-winter Deer Collection Elevation (Ft.) Seasonal Range Vegetative Type Mt. Mahogany Big sagebrush-Bitterbrush Ponderosa pine-Bitterbrush Lodgepole pine-Aspen Ponderosa pine-Bitterbrush Lodgepole pine Spruce-Fir-Lodgepo1e pine Meadow-Lodgepole pine Spruce-Fir-Lodgepole pine Spruce-Fir Riparian Willow-Meadow Spruce-Fir Lodgepole pine-Spruce-Fir Spruce-Fir-Wil1ow Lodgepole pine-Aspen Lodgepole pine-Spruce-Fir Meadow Spruce-Fir Lodgepole pine Lodgepole pine-Aspen Ponderosa pine-Bitterbrush Lodgepole pine-Aspen Ponderosa pine-Douglas fir-Aspen Mt. Mahogany Mt. Mahogany Big sagebrush-BitterbrushMt. Mahogany Bitterbrush-Mt. MahoganyPonderosa pine Ponderosa pine-Mt. Mahogany Mt. Mahogany Mt. Mahogany 6,400 8-6 Female 12-8-64 173 6,900 1-6 Male 12-15-64 174 6,400 2-6 Male 12-23-64 175 ];./A June birth date is assumed for tabulation purposes. Lower-winter Middle-winter Lower-winter g VJ ��- 405 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of ~C~O~LO~RA~DO~ _ Project No. ____ ~W_-~10~5~-~R~-~5 : Work Plan No. ____________ ~4~ : Job No. 1 Period Covered: Personnel: An Ecological Investigation of the Cache la Poudre Deer Herd, Colorado Population Studies Population Density and Structure January, 1964 to December, 1964 Allen E. Anderson and Dean E. Medin ABSTRACT Indices of average mule deer numbers (1962-64) on 5 study areas ranging from about 5,800 to 11,000 feet elevation, were obtained from analyses of pellet group counts on a systematic sample of 1,560, permanent, 100 square foot, circular plots. These analyses yielded the following inferences. (1) On the 3 winter range study areas, maximum pellet group plot means have been associated with the browse habitat and minimum means with the meadow and riparian habitats. (2) On the transition and summer range study areas maximum plot means were associated with the lodgepole pine mixture, lodgepole pine, and aspen habitats and minimum means with grass meadow and alpine-herbaceous habitats, respectively. (3) From the winter of 1962-63 to the winter of 1963-64, there was a significant (P<.OOl) shift in pellet groups counted on the 3 winter range study areas. This shift was associated primarily with a significant (P<.02) 1963-64 decrease in pellet groups counted within the Sevenmile browse habitat; and secondarily with a substantial 1963-64 increase in both the timber and browse habitats at Kelly Flats. (4) During the winter (1963-64), mean indices of deer numbers on the winter range study areas (with 90 percent confidence limits) were: Hewlett Gulch, 21 (19-23); Kelly Flats, 42 (38-46); and Sevenmile 22 (19-25). Projected to density indices these were 28, 52, and 28 deer per square mile, respectively. Similar but more approximate projections for the transition and summer range study areas during the summer of 1964 yielded indices of 9 and 4 deer per square mile, respectively. �- 406 - Two observers obtained two samples (December, 1964 and January, 1965) of mule deer herd structure on 10, all-day, walking routes from about 5,500 to 9,400 feet elevation. Sample sizes were 1,093 deer in December and 1,235 in January. There was a significant (P<.005) difference between observers in the January male:female ratios believed to be associated with a contiguous distribution of mature males. Observer differences in fawn:female ratios were not statistically (P~.05) significant. As compared to the January, 1964 sample, males decreased significantly (P<.02) in January, 1965. Fawn:fema1e ratios did not differ significantly (P~.05) during the same period. A summary of all male:female (n ~ 4,196) and fawn:mother (n ~ 4,252) ratios, 1961-65, and interpretated primarily on the basis of approximate 90 percent confidence limits suggests: (1) a general increase in males until January, 1965 when a drastic decrease occurred; (2) a statistically non-significant but consistent annual trend to fewer fawns; (3) a substantial decrease in males and tendency to fewer fawns from December to January. Similar interpretation of male: female: fawn ratios sampled from three e1evational strata, suggest that more males occurred in the lower elevationa1 strata samples in January, 1964 and January, 1965, but that no distinct relationship occurred between fawn:fema1e ratio samples and elevational strata. Recommendations: Future analyses should incorporate climatic data from the appropriate environmental stations. Other analytical approaches should be investigated and the literature reviewed in preparation for final analyses. Acknowledgements: Mr. D. Bowden of the C.S.U. Statistical Laboratory computed the confidence limits for the pellet group data. R. Buhler, W. Jones, D. Markham and K. Porter assisted in the pellet group counts. Objectives: Techniques (1) Estimated popUlation density on each of five study locations believed to be representative of the lower winter, upper winter, transitional, and summer ranges of the herd to: (a) relate density to changing environmental conditions (Work Plan 3), and (b) elucidate density-elevational relationships, particularly between years. (2) Estimate sex and age structure (composition) of the population to provide basic information on herd dynamics. Used: Estimates of Population Density and Use A systematic sample of permanent, pellet group transects was established on the three winter range study areas (Hewlett Gulch, Kelly Flats, Sevenmile Creek) during the late summer and fall of 1962. Similar samples were established on the transition (Little Beaver) and summer range (Crown Point) study areas during the summer of 1963. On each area, parallel, north-south transects, consisting �- 407 of 100 square foot, circular plots (with their centers marked with numbered, angle-iron stakes at 132 foot intervals) were established at approximately 8chain intervals with a steel tape and compass. The approximate initial point of each transect and the plot locations were first plotted on large-scale aerial photos. The beginning of each transect was marked with a steel fence post. The area of each plot was defined by a light chain of 5.64 foot radius revolving about a metal rod fastened to the plot stake. Plot radius was the distance along the ground surface, no compensation being made for slope. . Each plot was searched twice (clockwise and counterclockwise) by a 2-man crew. The crew exchanged positions (inner and outer) when the search direction changed. Deer pellet groups were counted and either sprayed with paint or completely removed on each plot. Paint sprayers included both tree-marking guns or pump oil cans of one-quart capacity. Various paints and thinners were used including: tree-marking implement and barn of red, yellow, and orang~ colors thinned with either paint thinner or gasoline. A deer pellet group was co~sidered to be five or more fecal pellets of the same general Size, shape, and appearance. Fecal pellets strewn across the plot were counted as a group if about one-half of the total, linear, strewn-out distance fell within the plot; or if its midpoint fell within the plot. When establishing the three winter range study area plots, "new" pellet groups were recorded separately on the basis of the relatively moist, shiny, and uncracked exterior of the individual pellets. Deer pellet groups on the plot periphery were counted if about one-half of the total group area was bisected by the end of the radius chain. Groups missed on one reading but found on the next were included in the first reading totals. On each plot, slope gradient and exposure were measured with an Abney level and Brunton compass and visual estimates made of soil depth and texture categories. These data, obtained for their descriptive and interpretative value, will be presented in subsequent reports. The data were analyzed by assigning the individual plots to strata of previously described physiognomically and floristically similar vegetative types (Medin, 1962). Hereafter, these major vegetative types will be referred to as "habitats." Descriptive statistics were then computed for the mean number of pellet groups per plot for each habitat and for combined habitats within an individual study area, Deer use and numbers were expressed as pellet groups per day per acre and total deer present on the study area, respectively. The following formulae were used: (1) N=~ atd (Ferguson 1955) Where: N = number of deer p number of pellet groups counted a = area sampled A = area censused d = assumed average daily defecation rate of 13 groups per deer day t = number of days between the last or end date of each reading �- 408 - (2) P.G.D.A. = (~)N Where: P.G.D.A. = N = = = A d number of deer pellet groups per deer-day per acre estimated number of deer number of surface acres in area censused assumed average daily defecation rate of 13 deer pe11e~ groups per deer day In addition to the average, daily, defecation rate above, I have made the following assumptions: (1) That the spring counts were made before the migratory deer had left the winter range. (2) That all groups were correctly identified and that a few groups were inevitably missed. (3) That the 100 square foot plot is an efficient sampling unit and valid estimates of sampling error were obtained. (4) That the deer pellet groups per day per acre is a valid index to relative deer use between habitats and study areas. Unfortunately, none of these assumptions have been experimentally verified on this, or any other study. of free-ranging mule deer. Approximate and numbers 90% confidence limits were computed for estimates of both deer use by the following formula (Kendall and Stuart 1961:106). P = ~ + +~ + £ a4/2 4 Where: p = sample number of pellet groups counted on the sample area Tables at 90% confidence is 1.645 a/2 = from Normal The pellet groups counted on the 3 winter range study areas (1962-63) were also tested for independence by chi square. These.tests included: between-study areas, habitats between study areas, and habitats within study areas using contingency tables (Snedecor 1946). Estimates of deer numbers on the three winter range study areas during the summer of 1964 were computed as stated above and extrapolated to very approximate density estimates. �- 409 - Estimates of Herd Structure Herd structure or composition as reported here is the relative proportion of males, female~ and fawns of unknown sex, about 6-9 months of age, sampled on the winter range (approximately 5,500-9,400 feet elevation) during the early winter (November-December) and mid-winter (January) periods. Ten, all-day, walking routes established during October, 1961, sample all major habitats except the dense timber south of the Cache 1a Poudre river. All routes are now run twice each winter (following the hunting season) by the same two observers and average about 9 miles in length. In most cases, deer were classified with either 9 x 35 or 8 x 40 binoculars. Under conditions of exceptional distance, poor light, or deer of atypical appearance, classifications were generally made or verified by the use of 20X spotting scopes. In general, we used the classification criteria given in Table 1 of Dasmann and Taber (1956). In addition, we have found that the relatively smaller size of the white rump patch, the rather distinctive running gait, and the manner of holding the head and neck while running are often useful in distinguishing fawns from adults. Classifications were made on both disturbed and undisturbed singles and groups. A fair proportion of the deer recorded were those driven out of cover by one observer and classified by the other observer. Observers were generally one-quarter to one mile apart and not visible to each other. To help avoid duplication, each classification and its time to the nearest minute were recorded on a prepared form (Appendix 1). The resultant data were summarized by two methods: Summary Method 1 is simply a record of all deer recorded. Summary Method 2 consists of extracting from Method 1 data, all classified deer including solitary animals and only those from groups in which all deer were classified. In addition, the annual fluctuations in net productivity indices (percentages of female yearlings comprising the adult females) are considered by computing an estimate of the number of theoretical mothers from the number of adult females counted. This was done by subtracting the percentage of essentially non-producers (female yearlings, 16-18 months old) in the adult doe kill sample as obtained at the check station during the 1961 (23.9%), 1962 (22.4%), 1963 (30.0%) and the 1964 (26.5%) hunting seasons (Anderson 1965); from the number of adult females observed and summarized by Method 2. This approxirr~tion is here called the fawn:mother ratio. Estimates of Population Density, 1962-64 Deer pellet group plot densities.--These are described statistically for the transition and summer range study areas in Table 1. The 1963-64 Crown Point data are based on only 10 pellet groups. On both study areas maximum pellet group plot densities and frequency indices were associated with the lodgepole pine, lodgepole pine mixture, or aspen habitats. The 1962-63 and 1963-64 winter pellet group densities and frequency indices on the 3 winter range study areas were �Table 1.~-A description by the major habitats of the surface acres, sampling intensity, and the deer pellet group counts made on the transition and summer range study areas during plot establishment, (summer,1963) and about one year later. Study Area and Elevation (Ft.) Little Beaver 8460-9620 (Transition) Crown Point 9640-11000 (Summer) + * Major Habitats Surface Acres % of Total Total Lodgepole 153.7 29.7 92 30.5 0.82 1.23 ·0.41 0.17 0.41 0.16 Ponderosa~ Lodgepole Aspen Mixture Aspen Willow Meadow Grass Meadow 179.8 116.1 41.1 11.4 13.5 34.8 22.4 7.9 2.2 2.6 87 75 25 11 11 28.8 24.8 8.2 3.6 3.6 2.28 0.88 0.92 0.18 0.00 4.33 1.92 1.81 0.41 0.00 0.57 0.45 0.44 0.18 0.00 0.10 0.05 0.24 0.00 0.00 0.43 0.36 0.83 0.00 0.00 0.07 0.03 0.12 0.00 0.00 TOTALS 515.6 100.0 301 100.0 1.21 2.37 0.45 0.12 0.44 0.09 Spruce-Fir Lodgepole-SpruceFir LP ~ SF - Aspen Lodgepole Spruce-Fir-Willow Willow Meadow Alpine Herbaceous 245.4 47.6 133 44.4 0.79 1.38 0.39 0.02 0.12 0.02 114.2 20.2 61.3 23.6 22.4 27.6 22.0 3.9 11.9 4.5 4.3 5.2 69 11 38 14 18 16 22.9 3.6 12.7 4.6 6.0 5.3 1.17 1.64 0.68 0.14 0.33 0.19 2.01 3.04 1.36 0.36 0.59 0.40 0.42 0.36 0.34 0.14 0.28 0.19 0.05 0.04 0.14 0.06 0.00 0.00 0.23 0.21 0.36 0.24 0.00 0.00 0.05 0.04 0.14 0.06 0.00 0.00 TOTALS 514.7 100.0 299 100.0 0.81 1.55 0.36 0.03 0.18 0.03 Number Plots+ % of Total Total - Establishment P:llet GrouEs Per Plot x SD Freg. Index 1963-64* P:llet Grou2s Per Plot x SD Freq. Index Permanent, 100 square feet, circular, laid out in a systematic sample of parallel lines, 8 chains apart. Plot centers are 132 feet apart. The time intervals computed from the end dates were: Little Beaver, 7/23/63 - 8/11/64, 264 days; Crown Point, 9/13/63 - 9/3/64, 188 days. The Little Beaver time interval excludes January to April, inclusive and Crown Point time interval excludes the last 15 days of Dec. and Jan.-May, inclusive. The time intervals represent the best estimate of actual deer use periods. ~ f-' 0 �- 411 - dissimilar (Table 2). These annual differences were primarily an increase on the Kelly Flats study area and a decrease on the Sevenmile study area. Some between year differences within major habitats were; Hewlett Gulch, a decrease within the timber habitat; Kelly Flats, a marked increase within the timber and browse habitats; Sevenmile, a decrease within all major habitats, particularly the browse and riparian. During both Winters, maximum values on each of the 3 study areas were found within the browse habitat. The juniper-browse habitat on the Hewlett Gulch study area had the maximum pellet group plot densities and frequency indices of any habitat on the 3 study areas. Minimum dens Lt Les and frequency values were found within the Hewlett Gulch riparian and meadow habitats. Pellet groups per day per acre, 1962-64.--These indices with approximate 90 percent confidence limits are shown by major habitat for the 3 winter range study areas in Table 3 (winters of 1962-63 and 1963-64) and Table 4 (summer, 1964). The winter data reveal essentially the same pattern of relative pellet group density levels discussed above. However, equating time interval and area differences and providing confidence levels does permit inferences on possibly statistically significant habitat, study area, and annual differences. Thus, mean indices from 1962-63 to 1963-64 have confidence limits which do not overlap when compared as follows: Hewlett Gulch - timber habitat, decrease; Kelly Flats timber and browse habitat, decrease; Sevenmile - browse habitat, decrease. Also, when mean indices for major habitats are compared by study area for 1962-63 confidence limits which do not overlap are; juniper-browse at Hewlett Gulch higher than all other browse habitats; browse at Hewlett Gulch, lower than all other browse habitats. Similarly, for 1963-64; timber at Kelly Flats - higher than all timber habitats; juniper browse at Hewlett Gulch - higher than browse at Sevenmile; browse at Kelly Flats - higher than browse at Hewlett Gulch and Sevenmile. Estimated deer numbers and densities, 1962-64.--Projection of pellet group counts provide the estimates of mean numbers of deer and densities in Tables 5 and 6, respectively. In Table 5, the most meaningful estimates are the totals given for each study area. From 1962-63 to 1963-64, mean winter deer population indices were at a maximum on the Kelly Flats study area being almost twice the estimates at Hewlett Gulch and Sevenmile Creek. During the summer, 1964, maximum mean indices of deer numbers were also found on the Kelly Flats study area. The summer, 1964 indices at Kelly Flats, furthermore, approximated those recorded on both Hewlett Gulch and Sevenmile Creek during the winter of 1963-64. Estimates of mean winter deer densities on the 3 winter range study areas range from 28 (Hewlett Gulch, 1963-64) to 52 (Kelly Flats, 1963-64) deer per square mile. Summer and transition range study area estimates of 4 and 9 deer per square mile, respectively, are inadequate as indices of summer densities since they include a portion of several seasons and the very low pellet group densities recorded thereon suggest the need for much greater sampling intensities. �Table 2.--A description by the major habitats of the surface acres, sampling intensity and the deer pellet group counts made on the 3 winter range study areas during the winters* of 1962-63 and 1963-64. Study Area and Elevation (Ft) Hewlett Gulch 5800-7100 Kelly Flats 6600-7760 Sevenmi1e 7440-8760 Major Habitats Surface Acres % of Total Total Number P1ots+ 1962-63 % of Pellet Groups Per Plot Total Total SD Freq. Index Timber Juniper-Browse Browse Riparian Meadow 113.3 80.4 207.2 8.9 80.3 23.1 16.4 42.2 1.8 16.4 93 58 160 TOTALS 490.1 Timber Browse Meadow x 1963-64 Pellet Groups Per Plot SD Freq. Index x 49 25.4 15.8 43.7 1.6 13.4 0.32 0.81 0.27 0.00 0.08 0.66 1.08 0.67 0.00 0.28 0.23 0.45 0.19 0.00 0.06 0.20 0.74 0.28 0.00 0.00 1.44 0.98 0.62 0.00 0.00 0.16 0.48 0.21 0.00 0.00 100.0 366 100.0 0.34 0.74 0.22 0.29 0.67 0.21 196.1 293.3 19.8 38.4 57.6 3.9 112 37.4 179 . 59.8 8 2.7 0.25 0.58 0.25 0.59 0.85 0.46 0.18 0.40 0.25 0.38 0.64 0.00 0.70 1.02 0.00 0.26 0.37 0.00 TOTALS 509.2 100.0 299 100.0 0.45 0.77 0.31 0.52 0.91 0.32 Timber Browse Riparian 140.3 317.0 37.7 28.2 64.0 7.6 84 192 19 28.5 65.0 6.5 0.20 0.58 0.26 0.49 0.91 0.45 0.17 0.39 0.26 0.14 0.32 0.11 0.44 0.65 0.31 0.12 0.24 0.11 TOTALS 495.0 100.0 295 100.0 0.45 0.81 0.32 0.25 0.58 0.20 6 * The time interval between readings as computed from the following end dates are: Hewlett Gulch 9/19/62 - 4/30/63, 223 days and 10/13/63 - 5/27/64, 227 days; Kelly Flats, 9/12/62 - 5/5/63, 235 days and 10/21/63 - 5/21/64, 213 days; Sevenmile, 9/11/62 - 5/18/63, 249 days and 11/15/63 - 5/27/64, 194 days. ' + Permanent, 100 square feet, circular; laid out in a systematic sample of parallel lines, 8 chains apart. centers are 132 feet apart. Plot +:- I\) �Table 3.--Mean deer pellet groups per day per acre within major habitats on the three winter range study areas during the winter of 1962-63 and 1963-64. Study Area Major Habitats 1962-63 Mean Pellet Groups Approx. 90% Per Day Per Acre Confidence Limits Lm,zer Upper 1963-64 Mean Pellet Groups Approx. 90% Per Day Per Acre Confidence Limits Lower UP:tllU-7: Timber Juniper-Browse Browse 0.63 1.58 0.52 0.52 1.35 0.45 0.79 1.90 0.63 0.39 1.42 0.54 0.31 1.21 0.46 0.53 1.72 0.65 Kelly Flats Timber Browse 0.44 1.00 0.36 0.90 0.56 1.13 0.76 1.29 0.65 1.17 0.93 1.45 Sevenmile Timber Browse 0.38 1.07 0.30 0.96 0.51 1.20 0.32 0.71 0.24 0.62 0.47 0.84 Hew Le t t Gulch .j:::' f..J W Table l~.--Me.andeer pellet groups per day per acre within major habitats on the three winter range study areas during the summer of 1964.* Approx. 90% Confidence Limits Upper Lower Study Area Major Habitats Mean Pellet Groups Per Day Per Acre Hewlett Gulch Timber Juniper-Browse Browse .07 .57 ,33 .04 .42 .26 .19 .87 .45 Kelly Flats Timber Browse .18 .72 .13 .62 .30 .86 Sevenmile Timber Browse .06 .17 .04 .13 .17 .24 * The time intervals as computed from the following end dates are: Hewlett Gulch, 5-27-64 - 10-6-64, 132 days; Kelly Flats, 5-21-64 - 11-5-64, 168 days; Sevenmi1e, 5-27-64 - 11-6-64, 163 days. �Table 5.--The mean numbers of deer present within major habitats on the five study areas during the winters of 1962-63, 1963-64, and the summer of 1964 as estimated from pellet group counts. Study Area Major Habitats x 1962-63* Approx. 90% Confidence Limits Lower Upper x 1963-64* Approx. 90% Confidence Limits Lower Upper Hewlett Gulch Timber Browse Juniper-Browse Total 5.5 8.3 9.8 24.9 4.6 7.1 8.4 - +!- 6.9 10.1 11.8 - +!- 3.4 8.6 8.8 21.1 2.7 7.3 7.5 18.9 4.6 10.4 10.6 23.4 Kelly Flats Timber Browse Total 6.6 22.7 31.8 5.4 20.3 - +!- 8.4 25.5 -+!- 11.5 29.3 41.7 9.8 26.5 38.2 14.0 32.9 45.9 Severunile Timber Browse Total 4.1 26.1 30.5 3.2 23.5 ~ +!- 5.6 29.3 - +!- 3.5 17.4 21.7 2.6 15.1 19.1 5.1 20.4 25.0 Little Beaver** Lodgepole Mixed Conifer Mixed Aspen Aspen Total Crown Point+ All habitats .- * The end dates and time intervals are given in Tables 1, 2, and 4 for all study areas. ** Includes the winter of 1963-64, see Table 1 for dates. + There were too few pellet groups to compute means by major habitats. ++ These values were not computed but will be presented in subsequent reports. x Summer, 1964* Approx. 90% Confidence Limits Lower Upper �Table 6,--Mean deer population densities as estimated from pellet group counts on five study areas. Study Area Winter, 1962-63 Study Area Deer/Sq. Mile Surraner,1963 Study Area Deer/Sq. Mile _____ W~L~·n~t~e~ 1963-64 Study Area Deer/Sq. Mile Surruner"," 1961;. Study Area Deer/Sq. Mile Observed 1962-63 Expected Chi Observed 1963-64 Expected Chi Total Total No. Plots 124 123.75 .0005 107 107.25 ,0006 231 366 Kelly Flats 133 154.82 3.08 156 134.18 3.55 289 299 Severunile 133 111.43 4.,18 -12 96.57 4.82 208 295 Totals 390 728 960 Study Area Hew Le t t Gulch Computed Chi Square = 338 15.62 Significant P <.001 . 2 d , f. �- 416 - Chi-square analyses of deer pellet-group counts, 1962-64.--Between year comparisons of deer pellet groups counted on the 3 winter range study areas are made in the following contingency tables; all habitats between study areas (Table 7), between study areas within individual habitats (Table 8), and between habitats within individual study areas (Table 9). These comparisons reveal that there was a significant (P<.OOl) difference in the pellet groups counted between winters and this was associated primarily with a significant (P<.005) 1963-64 decrease in pellet groups counted within the browse habitat at the Sevenmile study area and secondarily with the 1963-64 increase in counts within the timber and browse habitats at Kelly Flats. Estimates of Herd Structure, 1961-65 Herd structure samples, 1964-65.--Samples of 1964-65 winter herd structure are shown in Tables 10 (Method 1) and 11 (Method 2). By the latter method there were 2,238 mule deer available for analysis of herd structure and group size. As in previous samples, these data reflect the extreme variability between subsamples (routes) in male: female: fawn ratios. Mean group size increased in the total January, 1965 samples but this increase was not significant (P~.05). Previous analyses (Anderson 1965:65) have shown statistically significant differences between observers in the 1963-64 herd structure sample ratios. Similar analyses of the 1964-65 samples (Table 12) revealed non-significant (P<.05) differences in fawn:female ratios. There was, however, a significant difference (P<.005) between observ~rs in the male:female ratios recorded during January, 1965. Empirically, I believe that this may have been due to an observed contiguous distribution of mature males rather than observer error. Herd structure samples, 1963-64-65.--Chi-square analysis of the male:fema1e ratios sampled in January, 1964 and January, 1965 and based on 1,579 deer revealed a significant (P<.02) decrease in males in the January, 1965 sample. Fawn: female ratio differences, however, were not significant during this period. The December, 1963 and the December, 1964 samples did not differ significantly (P~.05) in either male:female or fawn:female proportions. Herd structure samples, 1961-62-63-64-65.--The 8 samples of male: female ratios are based on 4,196 deer and the fawn:mother ratios on 5,252 deer with approximate 90 percent confidence limits computed for each ratio (Table 13). These data indicate substantial increases in males in the November-December samples, 1962-65. The January samples also reflect substantial increases in males, 1962-64, but a drastic decrease from 1964 to 1965. Both the NovemberDecember and January samples of fawn:mother ratios indicate a tendency to fewer fawns but confidence limits overlap. Except for 1964-65, a comparison of the November-December and the January sample ratios indicate substantially fewer males and a tendency to fewer fawns in January. �Table 8.--Contingency table of deer pellet groups counted within similar major habitats between 3 winter range study areas, winters of 1962-63 and 1963-64. Habitat Timber He'\VlettGulch Observed Expected Winter ~ Chi - .-- - z: Observed = Kelly Flats Expected - Chi Observed Sevenmile Expected Chi ! 1962-63 30 23.17 2.01 28 33.11 , I ./ "7Q 12 13.72 .21 1963-64 19 25.82 L80 42 36,89 ,71 17 15,28 .19 +- Total 49 Computed Chi Square Browse = Not Significant P < ,05 f-' --:J 29 2 d, f , 1962-63 43 47.41 . L~l 103 116.92 1.66 111 92.67 3.63 1963-64 45 40.59 .48 114 100,08 1.93 61 79.33 b,.23 Total Computed Chi Square * 5.72~'> 70 88 = 12.34 217 Significant Tabular chi square at P = .05, 2 d.f. is 5.99 P < .005 172 2 d. f. �Table 9.--Contingency tables of deer pellet groups counted within the major habitats on 3 winter range study areas, winters of 1962-63 and 1963-64. Study Area Winter Observed Timber Expected Chi Observed Browse Expected Chi Hewlett Gulch 1962-63 30 26.30 .52 43 47.24 .38 51 50.46 .0058 1963-64 -12 22.70 .60 45 40.76 .44 43 .- 43.54 .0067 Total 49 Computed Chi Square Kelly Flats = 1.96 1962-63 28 1963-64 42 Total P < .05 2 d.f. 31. 95 103 99.05 .49 38.05 .41 = 1.19 -ill .16 117.95 .l3 P < .05 1 d.f. 1962-63 12 17.75 1.86 111 105.25 .31 1963-64 17 11.25 2.93 61 66.75 .49 Total Com.puted Chi Square 29 = 5.60 172 Significant P < .02 +=- I-" 0> 217 Not Significant Chi 94 Not Significant 70 Computed Chi Square Sevenrnile 88 JuniEer-Browse Observed Expected 1 d.f. �- 419 - Table 10.--Summary of herd structure samples which include all deer recorded on 10, all-day, walking routes, Dec., 1964 and Jan., 1965. Route and No. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Washout Gulch Sevenmile Creek Benne tt Creek Kelly Flats Elkhorn Creek Hewlett G. W. Hewlett G. E. Young; Gulch Livermore Mtn. Seaman Res. Totals Date 1964: 12-3 12-4 12-5 12-7 12-9 12-11 12-14 12-10 12-16 12-17 Percentages of Totals 1. Washout Gulch 2. Sevenmi1e Creek 3. Bennett Creek 4. Kelly Flats 5. Elkhorn 6. Hewlett G. W. 7. Hewlett G. E. 8. Youngs Gulch 9. Livermore Mtn. 10. Seaman Res. Total Percentages of Total 1965: 1-13 1-14 1-15 1-16 1-18 1-21 1-23 1-20 1-25 1-27 Numbers Recorded Male Female Fawn Unc1. Total Ratios Per 100 Females Male Fawn 55 33 15 41 35 16 14 10 23 32 274 88 35 22 88 113 35 34 32 78 55 580 51 18 7 55 70 18 19 20 60 42 360 29 9 8 17 36 4 8 15 21 2 149 62 94 68 47 31 46 41 31 29 58 47 58 51 32 63 62 51 56 63 20.1 42.6 26.4 10.9 15 45 14 36 44 10 13 7 37 34 255 84 102 22 129 94 55 44 58 88 42 718 49 52 11 81 56 27 20 27 63 26 412 8 18 6 44 32 12 20 8 34 6 188 18 44 64 28 47 18 30 12 42 81 36 58 51 50 63 60 49 45 47 72 62 57 16.2 45.6 26.2 12.0 223 95 52 201 254 73 75 77 182 131 1,363 77 76 62 100.0 156 217 53 290 226 104 97 100 222 108 1,573 100.0 �- 420 - Table 11. --Sunnnary of herd structure samples which include a1l classified solitary deer and only deer from groups in which all deer were classified on 10 all-day walking routes; Dec., 1964 and Jan., 1965. Route and No. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Date 1964: Washout Gulch 12-3 Sevenmi1e Ck. 12-4 Bennett Ck. 12-5 Kelly Flats 12-7 Elkhorn Creek 12-9 Hewlett G. W. 12-11 Hewlett G. E. 12-14 Youngs Gulch 12-10 Livermore Mtn. 12-16 Seaman Res. 12:-17 Totals Percentages of Total l. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Washout Gulch Sevenmi1e Ck. Bennett Ck. Kelly Flats Elkhorn Creek Hewlett G. W. Hewlett G. E. Youngs Gulch Livermore Mtn. Seaman Res. Totals 1965: 1-13 1-14 1-15 1-16 1-18 1-21 1-23 1-20 1-25 1-27 Percentages of Total Ratios Per Numbers Recorded 100 Females Male Female Fawn Total Male Fawn 43 33 14 36 33 14 9 16 23 31 252 75 34 19 80 96 2,9 23 34 72 55 517 44 18 6 50 61 15 14 18 56 42 324 23.1 47.3 29.6 12 4Q 14 34 35 9 11 3 30 33 227 72 98 22 116 82 49 33 55 71 41 639 41 125 49 193 11 47 72 222 52 169 84, 26 15 59 2.7 85 50 151 26 100 369 1,235 18.4 51.7 29.9 162 85 39 166 190 58 46 68 151 128 1,093 N GrouE Size x SD 57 97 74 45 34 48 39 47 32 56 49 59 53 32 62 64 52 61 53 78 76 63 45 29 14 49 50 22 16 21 35 28 309 3.60 2.93 2.79 3.39 3.80 2.64 2.88 3.24 4.31 4.57 3.54 2.57 2.42 1.85 2.56 2.64 1.40 1.86 2.43 2.89 1.23 2.65 17 47 64 29 43 18 33 5 42 80 36 57 50 50 62 63 53 45 49 70 63 58 27 4.63 40 4.82 12 3.92 56 3.96 47 3.60 25 3.36 15 3.93 29, 2.93 34 4.44 18 5.56 303 4.08 2.75 3.80 3.34 4.31 2.02 1.89 2.92 1.81 2.83 4.78 3.24 100.0 100.0 �Table l2.--Herd structure samples obtained by two observers on 10 all-day, walking routes during December~ 1964 and January, 1965. Observer M Observer A Sampling Periods Dec. 3, 1964 Dec.17, 1964 Jan. 13, 1965 Jan.27, 1965 Male Route 15 Washout 19 Sevenmile Bennett 4 11 Kelly Elkhorn 13 10 Youngs Hewlett W. 6 Hewlett E. 7 17 Livermore Seaman Res. 15 117 Total Female 15 16 1 36 45 22 18 10 53 21 237 Fawn 3 6 0 22 33 10 9 6 41 17 147 Total 33 41 5 69 91 42 33 23 111 Washout Sevenmile Bennett Kelly Elkhorn Hewlett W. Hewlett E. Youngs Gulch Livermore Seaman Res. Total 28 55 9 52 40 25 16 29 27 . 26 307 22 25 4 36 29 15 6 11 23 18 57 98 20 99 85 41 27 41 57 53 578 7 18 7 11 16 1 5 1 7 9 82 189 .2l 501 Ratios Per 100 Females M F 20 100 119 38 0 250 31 61 73 29 46 46 50 33 70 60 77 32 71 81 49 62 25 33 63 21 40 4 31 3 26 35 27 79 45 44 69 73 60 38 38 85 69 62 Male 28 14 10 25 20 6 8 2 6 16 135 Female 60 18 18 44 51 12 11 13 19 34 280 Fawn 41 12 6 28 28 8 6 8 15 25 177 Total 129 44 34 97 99 26 25 23 40 75 592 Ratios Per 100 Females M F 47 68 67 78 33 56 64 57 39 55 67 50 73 55 61 15 79 32 47 74 63 48 5 28 7 23 19 8 6 44 43 13 64 42 24 17 26 44 15 332 19 24 7 36 23 11 9 16 27 8 68 95 27 123 84 43 32 44 94 47 657 11 65 54 36 45 33 35 8 52 160 44 2 23 24 145 180' 43 56 54 56 55 46 53 62 61 53 54 I .j::" I\) I-' �- 422 - Table 13.--Sumrnary of mule deer male:female; fawn:mother ratios sampled on the 10 all-day walking routes, October, 1961 - January, 1965. Sample Numbers Recorded Male Female Ratio+ with Approx. 90% Confidence Limits Oct. 1961 67 135 50 (38-62) 120 103 116 (90-142) Jan. 1962 27 103 26 (17-35) 75 78 96 (70-122) Nov.-Dec. 1962 Jan~-Feb. 1963 Nov.-Dec. 1963 Jan. 1964 138 373 37 (31-43) 295 289 102 (88-116) 134 566 24 (20-28) 399 439 91 (81-101) 96 209 46 (37-55) 154 146 105 (85-125) 226 487 46 (40-52) 270 341 79 (68-90) Dec. 1964 252 517 49 (43-55) 324 380 85 (74-96) Jan. 1965 227 639 36 (32-40) 369 470 79 (70-88) Numbers Recorded* Fawn Mother Ratio+ with Approx. 90% Confidence Limits + Per 100 Females with confidence limits computed according to Riney (1956). * Estimate of potentially productive females obtained by deducting the percentages of female yearlings comprising the mature female kill sample as obtained at the big game check station; (23.9, 1961) (22.4, 1962), (30.0, 1963), (26.5, 1964). �- 423 - Herd structure - elevational relationships, 1962-63-64-65.--The NovemberDecember sample ratios with approximate 90 percent confidence limits are given in Table 14. Except for the 70:100 male: female ratio recorded at 8,350 feet during December 1964, there was overlap in all ma1e:female ratio confidence limits computed for the three elevational strata samples. While the upper elevational (8,350 feet) strata fawn:female ratios tend to be wider, sample sizes were too small in 1962-63 to compute confidence limits. At the two lower elevational strata, fawn:female ratios range from 63:100 to 99:100 but confidence limits overlap within strata for each year. These data are interpretated as being indicative of substantially more males seen at the upper elevational strata in December, 1964, but no distinct relationship between fawn:female ratio samples and elevational strata. The confidence limits overlapped for the January male: female ratios (Table 15) sampled at three elevational strata during 1963-64-65. However, the male:female ratio overlap was very slight in 1964-65 between the 7,350 feet and the 6,400 feet strata. These ratios also narrowed with decreasing elevation at this time. There was also a tendency for fawn:female ratios to narrow with decreasing elevation but their confidence limits overlapped during 1963-64-65. These analyses are interpretated as indicating that there were more males sampled at lower elevational strata in the January 1964-65 sample but no distinct relationship existed between. fawn:female ratio samples andelevational strata. Discussion: Some of the causal factors involved in the deer population density changes on the 3 winter range study areas as suggested by the pellet group counts (1962-64) may perhaps be tentatively identified when related to climatic (WP3 - Jl), vegetative (WP3 - J3), hunting mortality (WP5 - J3), food preference (WP3 - J5) and perhaps condition indices data (WP5 - Jl).Because of the extremely complex interrelationships and the limitations of the available data, however, even tentative identification J;I1ay be restricted. Some of the interpretative difficulties in assessing estimates of deer populations and use based on pellet group counts have been discussed previously (Anderson 1965:69). These difficulties are enhanced by the fact that on all study areas and major habitats, with the exception of the browse habitat at Sevenmile, sample sizes (number of plots) are grossly inadequate (Anderson 1965:56). Limitations of time and manpower prevented an increase in sample size. Because male, females, and fawns were sampled at different proportions in a particular year or within elevational strata, does not necessarily indicate an actual population difference in these components. I believe that sampling bias associated with dynamic, age-specific, social behavior patterns largely related to the breeding cycle and interacting with micro and nacro-climatic, topographic, elevational, and population density influences may mask actual population structure. This hypothesis will be examined in detail in subsequent reports. An attempt will also be made to identify some possible causal factors involved in the changes of herd structure samples described above. �- 424 - Table 14.--Summary of mule deer male:female; fawn:female ratios sampled on 3 e1evationa1 strata during Nov.-Dec., 1962-63-64. Sample Elevation (Ft.) Numbers Recorded Males Females Total Ratios Per 100 Females .Approximate 90% Confidence Limits 8,350 7,350 6,400 11 52 40 18 135 84 29 187 124 61 39 46 (29-49) (31-61) Nov. -Dec , 8,350 1963 7,350 6,400 5 27 46 5 67 89 10 94 135 100 40 52 (25-55) (37-67) Dec. 1964 76 69 54 109 176 127 185 245 181 70 39 43 (53-87) (30-48) (32-54) FaWns Females Total Nov. -Dec , 8,350 7,350 1962 6,400 11 116 73 18 135 84 29 ·251 157 61 86 87 (68-104) (64-110) Nov. -Dec . 8,350 7,350 1963 6,400 1 66 56 5 67 89 6 133 145 20 99 63 (71-127) (45-81) Dec. 1964 62 111 98 109 176 127 171 287 225 57 63 77 (42-72) (50-76) (60-94) Nov. -Dec , 1962 8,350 7,350 6,400 8,350 7,350 6,400 �- 425 - Table 15.--Summary of mule deer ma1e:fema1e; fawn:fema1e ratios sampled on 3 e1evationa1 strata during January, 1963-64-65. Sample Elevation (Ft.)* Num6ers Recoroeo Males Females Total Ratio Per 100 Females Approximate 90% Confidence Limits Jan. 1963 8,350 7,350 6,400 32 47 40 102 165 149 134 212 189 31 28 27 (21-41) (20-36) (19-35) Jan. 1964 8,350 7,350 6,400 34 62 66 109 163 103 143 225 169 31 38 64 (21-41) (29-47) (47-81) Jan. 1965 8,350 7,350 6,400 58 69 63 170 198 112 228 267 175 34 35 56 (25-43) (27-43) (41-71) Fawns Females Total Jan. 1963 8,350 7,350 6,400' 63 125 108 102 165 149 165 290 257 62 76 72 (46-78) (61-91) (57-87) Jan. 1964 8,350 7,350 6,400 49 103 57 109 163 103 158 266 160 45 63 55 (32-58) (50-76) (40-70) Jan. 1965 8,350 7,350 6,400 90 124 76 170 198 112 260 322 188 53 63 68 (41-65) (51-75) (51-85) * The approximate midpoint of the elevational range sampled. The method 2 data were combined from the following routes and elevational ranges: 8,350Washout-Sevenmile, (7,300-9,400). 7,350 - Kelly Flats-Elkhorn Creek, (6,7008,000); and 6,400 Livermore Mtn. -Seaman Res. (5/,400-7,400). �- 426 LITERATURE CITED Anderson, A. E. 1965. Population density and structure. W-l05-R-4. 47-74. In Game Research Report, Jan. 1965, 246 pp. (processed). pp. 1965. Harvest analysis. W-l05-R-5, 1965, Work Plan 5, Job 3 Completion Report. Colorado Dept. Game, Fish and Parks, Denver (processed). Dasmann, R. F. and R. D. 'Taber. 1956. Determining structure in Columbian black-tailed deer populations. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 20(1):78-83. Ferguson, R. B. 1955. The pellet group count method of censusing mule deer in Utah. M.S. Thesis, Utah State Univ., Logan. 94 pp. (processed). Kendall, M. G. and A. Stuart. 1961. The advanced theory of statistics. Vol. 2. Hafner Publ. Co., New York. Medin, D. E. 1962. Vegetative type mapping. W-1-5-R, 1961, Hork Plan 3, Job 2 Completion Report, pp. 187-204. In Federal Aid Quarterly Report, Part 2, July 1962, pp. 161-339. Colorado Dept. of Game, Fish and Parks, Denver (processed). Riney, T. 1956. Differences in proportions of fawns to hinds in red deer (Cervus elaphus) from several New Zealand environments. Nature 177:488-489. Robinette, W. L., R. B. Ferguson, andJ. S. Gashwiler. 1958. Problems involved in the use of deer pellet group counts. Trans. N. Amer. Wildl. Conf. 23:411-425. Snedecor, G. W. 485 pp. Prepared by: 1946. Statistical methods. Iowa State College Press, Ames. Allen E. Anderson Approved by: Dean E. Medin Associate Hildlife Researcher Project Leader J~nuary, 196~ Date: _____________ _ Ferd Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �- 427 APPENDIX I DEER ECOLOGYINVESTIGATIONS HERD COMPOSITION ROUTES Rout e No. __ Route Name Date:...-. Observer(s) Weather 1964-65 Time Started:..-.. Time Finished;...... __ _ Total Time_---,,(hrs .) Notes: ! , i i ! i I I i I II i I Pts. Notes I i ,I iD: F :Uncl.:Total I'B , I I i ! : I , I I i i ! , I II iI I i i I 1 I i , i - i! , I I I ! I I I ., I I , I -- ~ I , I I I: I I I ! GRANDTOTAL , B , I D I I I Totals I I ;1 I , I I I' , _ UNCL•. II F I I I I I ! i II I I I I 1 : TOTAL:....- , _ ��- 429 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of C~O~LO~RAD~~O~ Project No. W-l05-R-5 _ An Ecological Investigation of the Cache la Poudre Deer Herd, Colorado Work Plan No. __-------~5~----~------- Physiological Studies Job No. Physical Characteristics 1 Period Covered: Personnel: January, 1964 - December 1964. Allen E. Anderson and Dean E. Medin. ABSTRACT Over 8,000 values from 56 mule deer collected during 1964 are tabulated chronologically. Sea~onal and annual fluctuations in 4 condition indices of mule deer sampled in 1962-63-64 are described statistically. These descriptions suggest that male condition levels reached a maximum in the summer and fall and a minimum during the spring. Female condition levels were at a maximum in the fall and winter and at a minimum in the summer. Female condition levels apparently declined from 1963 to 1964. This decline, however, could be related to the still-untested possibility of a significant difference in mean age. Stress, as indicated by mean adrenal ascorbic acid levels, did not seem to be relate~ to seasonal fluctuations in mean condition levels. Recommendations: Terminate field collections in June, 1965 and begin review of literature preparatory to final analysis. Objectives: Measure relevant physiological and morphological characteristics of deer collected seasonally so that: (a) the response of the herd to its environment can be more adequately interpreted, (b) establish "physiological norms", and (c) provide basic morphological data as related to sex and age class. Acknowledgments: Miss Florence Fields M.T. (ASCP) M.S. weighed, determined volumes, and measured most of the glands and organs and performed the analysis of blood plasma. Student assistants, R. Buhler, W. J. Jones, D. Markham, and Wildlife Researcher Candidate K.A. Porter assisted in the field and laboratory. The latter tabulated the data in Tables 2 - 11. About one-half of the dissection and gross morphological work was done in the laboratory of the Colorado Cooperative Wildlife Research Unit, Colorado State University, Fort Collins. Wildlife Conservation Officers G. Crawford and S. Palm were �- 430 helpful in obtaining road-killed deer. Techniques Used: These were described in detail in the 1961 report (Anderson, 1962:253-299) and because of their length will not be repeated here. An outline of the laboratory procedures foll~wed with minor modifications by the contracting laboratory is.given in Table 1. During 1964, 24 males and 24 female mule deer (collection numbers 128-175, inclusive) were collected as part of the regular collection. Five additional males and 3 females were obtained from other sources, principally highway mortality. On the latter, such data were collected as the circumstances and condition of the carcass permitted. Their collection numbers are prefixed with an "0". In general, regular collections were made above 8,500 feet elevation (summer range) from June to mid-October and below this elevation (winter range) during the winter months. Most of the deer were shot between 5:00 AM and 9:00 AM and in the lower neck or thoracic-spinal area. Death usually occurred within two minutes and blood samples were aspirated from the heart 3 - 15 minutes later. Laboratory analysis of the carcass usually began in 3 - 5 hours, and blood plasma analysis completed within 24 hours after death. The approximate kill locations for each of the 48 deer collected as part of the regular collection during 1964 ar~ shown in Figure 1. �GO' 40' 105· 30' 10' 20' II i I I i I140 --I~ &' l-' CACHE LA POUDRE DRAINAGE LARIMER COu~TY, COLORADO SIXTH PRINCIPAL w 0 1 ""i'e MERIDIAN ~ 'l--#Mil •• Monofjoment Unit Boundary Approximote Tronsilionol 40· 1-------j30' LEGEND ~ -. . Botwoun Summer And T6N Zona Wintor PoIyconic P':"OJ~d>on North Amoric-n datum Figure 10 Approximate kill locations of 24 male (underlined) and 24 female mule deer, 1964. I Ronges I ��- 433 - PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS Allen E. Anderson Findings: Over 8,000 measurements obtained in whole or part on each of 56 mule deer are tabulated chronologically in Tables 2-11, inclusive. Nine computed indices of physical condition and 4 of bone structure are listed, in whole or part, for each of 29 males (Table 12) and 26 females (Table 13). Statistical descriptions of time-related fluctuations in mule deer body fat indices during 1962-63-64 are given in Table 14 (mean age and seasonal means of 4 condition indices), 'table 15 (annual means of 4 condition indices), and Table 16 (seasonal means of adrenal ascorbic acid). These data suggest seasonally-related, age and sex-specific sampling bias. They also indicate the seasonal pattern of various fat reserves or "condition indices". Generally, mean condition indices of males were at a maximum in the sunnner and fall and a minimum during the spring. Female condition indices were at a maximum during the fall and winter and at a minimum during the summer. Males have shown somewhat wider extremes in condition indices and seasonal losses in condition indices were of a larger magnitude. Females, on the other hand, have shown larger magnitudes of seasonal gain in condition indices. The presumed index of stress, i.e., mean adrenal ascorbic acid levels, also suggests a seasonal pattern quite similar to the sex-specific condition indices described above. There are marked overlaps, however, in 95 percent confidence limits and stress-condition relationships, therefore, are obscure. The 1963-64 mean annual patterns of condition indices, however, exhibit certain sex-specific changes in which 95 percent confidence limits do not overlap. These changes (Table 15) are confined to females and lower 1964 mean values of both percent carcass fat and blood serum protein. Also, mean percent femur marrow fat of females decreased from about 80 percent in 1962 to about 61 percent in 1964. Confidence limits of the 1962 and 1964 samples do not overlap. It should be noted that no comparison has yet been made of the mean age of these annual samples. If this decline in condition indices is not related to the mean age of the sample, one might postulate a decline in the physical condition of females, 1963 to 1964. Discussion: According to a recent estimate, the final analysis will require about one year to plan and program. Because of other project connnitments, no actual planning or computer progrannning is anticipated until 1966. LITERATURE CITED Anderson, A. E. 1962. PhYSical characteristics. pp 253-299. In 1962 Quarterly Report, Part 2. Work Plan 5, Job 1 Completion Report. Colorado Game and Fish Dept., Denver, Colorado. (Processed) �- 434 - Association of Official Agricultural Chemists. analyses. Ninth Ed., Wash., D. C. 832pp. Baird Associates. n.d. Cambridge, Mass. 1960. Flame photometer manual. Official methods of Third Edition, Behnke, A. R. 1961. Comment on the determination of whole body density and a resume of body composition data. pp 118-133. In J. Brozek and A. Henschel, (eds.). Techniques for measuring body composition. Nat'l. Acad. Sciences - Nat'l. Res. Council, Wash., D. C. vi + 300pp. Dann, W. J. and K. A. Evelyn. 1938. Determination of vitamin A with the photoelectric colorimeter. Biochemistry J. 32(6):1008-1017., Gornell, A. G., C. J. Burdawill, and M. M. David. 1949. Determination of serum proteins by means of biuret reaction. J. Biol. Chern. 177(2):751-766. Hepler, O. E. 1958. Manual of clinical laboratory methods. Springfield, Illinois, 387pp. C. C. Thomas, Kitson, R. E. and M ..G. Mellon. 1944. Colorimetric determination of phosphorous as molybdivanadophosphoric acid. Iudust. and Engr. Chemistry, Analytical Ed. 16(6):379-383. Lewis, L. L. and L. M. Melnick. 1960. Determination of calcium and magnesium with (ethylene dinitrilo) tetracetic acid. Analytical Chern. 32(1) :38-42. Maickel, R. P. 1960. A rapid procedure for the determination of adrenal ascorbic acid. Application of the Sullivan and Clarke method to tissues. Analytical Biochemistry 1(6):498-501. Munsell, A. H. 1929-1960. Munsell book of color, pocket edition. Color Co., Inc., Baltimore, Md. Munsell Riney, T. 1955. Evaluating condition of free-ranging red deer Cervus elaphus with special reference to New Zealand. N. Z. J. Science and Tech., Sec. B 36:429-463. Robinette, W. L., D. A. Jones, G. Rogers, J. S. Gashwiler. 1957. Notes on tooth development and wear for Rocky Mountain mule deer. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 21(2):134-153. Prepared by: Allen E. Anderson Associdte WLldlife Researcher Date:__----------~J~a~n~u=a~yl 1965 Approved by: ~D~e~a~n~E~.~M~e~d_i_n _ Project Leader F. C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �Table l.--Outline of procedures used in blood plasma, blood serum, and tissue analyses, 1964.+ Item Procedure Reference Blood Plasma: erythocyte count leukocyte count differential leukocyte count packed cell volume hematocytometer hematocytometer thin smear slides centrifuge - graphic reader (Hepler 1958) (Hepler 1958) (Hepler 1958) none Blood Serum: vitamin A phosphorous potassium protein sodium magnesium calcium colorimetric colorimetric flame photometry colorimetric flame photometry titrimetric EDTA titrimetric EDTA (Baird Assoc., n.d.) -- modified from (Kitson and Mallon 1944) (Baird Assoc., n.d.) (Gornell, et al. 1949) (Baird Assoc., n.d.) -- modified from (Lewis and Melnick 1960) -- modified from (Lewis and Melnick 1960) Tissue Analyses: liver vitamin A and carotene liver carotene adrenal ascorbic acid bone marrow fat and moisture content colorill1etric. colorimetric colorimetric ether extraction, gravimetric (Dann and Evelyn 1938) (Dann and Evelyn 1938) (Maickel 1960) . (Assn. Agric. Chem. 1960) + All 1964 blood serum and tissue analyses were performed by Industrial Laboratories, Denver, Colorado. Blood plasma analyses were performed by Miss Florence Fields, M.T. (ASCP). M. Sc., Game and Fish Research Center Laboratory, Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Dept., Fort Collins. -I="' co \Jl �- 436 Table 2.--Weights (kg) and External Body Measurements Date-Age-Measurements Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Carcass Wt. - Bled (kg) - Eviscerated (kg) - Skinned (kg) Hide Wt. - (kg) Body Length (Not including tail length) Tail Length Head Length Interorbital Width Girth Shoulder Height Neck Circumference (a) (b) Ear Length (Left) (Right) Hind Foot Length (Left) (Right) Hoof Length (Front Le ft) (Front Right) (Rear Left) (Rear Right) Meta-gland Length (Left) (Right) Meta-gland Width (Left) (Right) Tarsal Gland Width (Left) (Right) Scrotum Length Width Height Prepuce Length Antler Beam Diam (Left) (Right) Antler Beam Length (Left) (Right) Antler Point No. (Left) (Right) Antler Inside Spread Tip - to - Tip Spread Antler Wt (g) (Left) (Right) Antler Brow Tine Length (Left) (Right) (cm) .of 25 Male Deer, 1964. Collection No. 129 1-14 0-7 36.2 25.9 23.4 2.5 131 1-28 4-7 88.3 63.7 56.2 5.9 132 2-4 1-8 49.6 36.6 33.0 3.5 133 2-11 4-8 81.0 60.7 53.5 5.9 135 2-25 0-8 32.4 23.6 21.3 2.3 138 3-17 8-9 77 .9 58.0 52.2 5.8 119.0 17.0 24.5 10.5 75 86 28 40 19.0 19.0 43.0 43.0 6.9 7.0 6.7 6.7 14.0 14.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 3.5 5.0 3.5 2.5 9.0 0.90 0.90 4.0 4.0 1 1 7.5 7.5 166.0 17.0 34.1 15.0 101 102 45 59 21.0 21.0 50.3 50.3 7.8 7.7 7.5 7.5 16.5 16.5 5.5 5.0 5.5 5.5 7.5 7.5 5.0 12.0' 3.75 .3.16 55.0 56.0 4 4 51.0 42.0 780 780 137.0 16.0 27.8 12.5 87 91 33 50 20.0 20.0 46.0 46.0 6.9 7.2 6.6 6.8 15.5 15.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 3.0 9.5 157.0 18.0 33.5 15.2 100 103 47 59 21.0 21.0 114.5 14.5 23.8 10.4 69 76 26 34 19.0 19.0 43.1 43.3 6.2 6.2 5.9 5.8 14.0 15.0 5.0 5.0 4.5 4.5 4.0 3.5 2.0 8.5 153.0 16.0 33.2 15.2 101 97 43 52 22.0 22.0 48.7 48.7 7.2 7.4 6.8 6.7 15.5 16.0 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 5.0 5.5 3.0 11.5 0.0 0.0 I 1.67 23.5 49.6 7.5 7.6 7.3 7.2 14.5 15.0 4.5 5.0 5.0 5.0 4.0 5.5 4.0 10.5 3.46 3.38 42.0 Broken 4 2 66 0.0 710 550 5.0 5.5 1 1 6.5 �- 437 Table 2.--Weights (kg) and External Body Measurements 1964. (continued) Collection No. Date-Age-Measurements Pelage Sample Wt (g) Pelage Color Dorsal Rostrum Interorbital Occipital Brisket Outer Thigh Umbilical (anterior) Front Knees Antler Stage Bone Velvet Velvet Shedding Skin Covered (cm) of 25 Male Deer, 129 38.3 131 30.1 132 44.4 133 43.9 135 25.9 138 10 YR 9/1 10 YR 6/1 10 YR 5/1 10 YR 3/1 10 YR 6.5/2 10 YR 7/1 10 YR 8/3 10 YR 9/1 10 YR 3.5/2 10 YR 5/2 10 YR 3/2 10 YR 6/4 10 YR 7/2 10 YR 7/6 10 YR 9/1 10 YR 6/1 10 YR 7/1 10 YR 5/1 10 YR 6.5/2 10 YR 7/1 10 YR 8/3 10 YR 9/1 5 YR 4/2 10 YR 5/4 10 YR 3/2 10 YR 6/4 10 YR 7/2 10 YR 7/8 10 YR 8/2 10 YR 3/2 10 YR 4/3 10 YR 3/1 . 10 YR 6/3 10 YR 7/1 10 YR 8/6 10 YR 9/1 5 YR 4/4 10 YR 4/3 10 YR 4/2 10 YR 7/4 10 YR 7/1 10 YR 7.5/6 X X X X X (Left beam (Right possibly beam shed). broken). X (Antlers recently shed) �Table 2.--Weights (kg) and External Body Measurements (continued) Date-Age-Measurements Collection Date ~onth-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Carcass Wt. - Bled (kg) - Eviscerated (kg) - Skinned (kg) Hide Wt. - (kg) Body Length (Not including tail length) Tail Length Head Length Interorbital Width Girth Shoulder Height Neck Circumference (a) (b) Ear Length (Left) (Right) Hind Foot Length (Left) (Right) Hoof Length (Front Left) (FrontRigh t) (Rear Left) (Rear Right) Meta-gland Length (Left) (Right) Meta-gland Width (Left) (Right) Tarsal Gland Width (Left) (Right) Scrotum Length Width Height Prepuce Length Antler Beam Diam (Left) (Right) Antler Beam Length (Left) (Right) Antler Point No. (Left) (Right) Antler Inside Spread Tip-to-Tip Spread Antler Wt. (g) (Left) (Right) Antler Brow Tine Length (Left) (Right) Pelage Sample Wt. (g) (cm) of 25 Male Deer, 1964. Collection No., 024 4-6 1-10 47.2 142 4-8 7-10 74.3 53.6 49.2 4.4 126.0 17 .0 28.3 12.7 83 88 34 43 20.5 20.5 47.1 47.0 7.3 7.3 6.8 6.7 15.0 15.5 5.5 5.5 5.0 5.0 3.0 4.5 2.0 11.5 158.5 167.5 147.0 162.0 152.0 165.5 16.5 20.5 20.0 18.0 17 .0 19.5 31.6 31.7 34.6 32.3 32.1 34.6 13.8 14.8 12.1 14.1 13.2 14.7 100 99 89 101 90 98 96 102 95 97 94 102 43 40 35 36 34 39 53 51 47 47 52 46 21.5 20.5 22.0 22.5 22.0 23.0 21.5 20.5 22.0 22.5 22.0 23.0 51.5 48.5 50.4 50.0 49.2 49.5 51.5 48.5 50.5 50.0 49.1 49.3 6.8 7.6 7.1 7.5 6.7 7.2 6.8 7.5 7.2 7.3 6.7 7.3 6.3 7.1 6.7 6.9 6.2 7.2 6.4, 7.2 6.8 6.7 6.4 7.0 14.5 18.0 16.0 15.5 16.5 16.5 14.5 18.0 17 .0 16.0 15.5 16.5 4.5 5.0 4.5 5.0 5.0 4.5 4.5 5.0 4.5 5.0 5.0 5.0 4.5 5.5 5.0 5.0 4.5 5.0 4.5 5.5 , 6.0 5.0 4.5 5.0 4.5 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 6.0 5.0 6.0 4.5 5.5 3.0 3.0 4.5 3.0 2.5 3.5 12.0 12.5 12.0 10.5 9.0 11.0 3.50 2.60 3.60 3.14 3.99 3.46 2.60 3.63 2.89 3.98 2.0 3.5 6.0 6.0 19.0 1.5 5.0 8.0 5.5 20.0 144 4-28 9-10 78.9 59.1 53.8 5.3 145 5-5 3-11 64.5 47.6 44.1 3.5 1 1 1 1 1 6.0 8.0 8.5 11.5 28.5 34.9 1 147 5-19 4-11 69.6 49.5 44.9 4.5 149 6-2 3-0 61.1 44.0 40.6 3.3 150 6-9 6-0 81.3 60.6 54.8 5.2 1 1 1 1 1 13.0 13.0 64 69 10.0 36.0 36.0 299 317 24.2 36 35 8.2+ 1 2.5 4.0 9.4+ �- 439 Table 2.--Weights (kg) and External Body Measurements (continued) Date-Age-Measurements Pelage Color Dorsal Rostrum Collection No. 024 Interorbital Occipital Brisket Outer Thigh Umbilical (anterior) Front Knees Antler Stage Bone Velvet Velvet Shedding Skin Covered (cm) of 25 Male Deer, 1964. X + Summer pelage under winter pelage. 142 10 YR 8/2 5YR 3.5/4 10YR 6/4 10 YR 4/2 10 YR 7/3 10 YR 7/2 10 YR 7.5/6 144 10 YR 8/1 5YR 5/4 10 YR 7/3 10 YR 4/2 10 YR 7/3 10 YR 8/1 10 YR 7.5/6 X X {Antler growth beginning) 145 10 YR 9/1 10 YR 6.5/2 10 YR 6.5/2 10 YR 5/2 10 YR 7.5/2 10 YR 7.5/1 10 YR 9/6 X 147 10 YR 9/1 5YR 5/4 5YR 5/4 10 YR 4/2 10 YR 7/4 10 YR 7.5/2 10 YR 8/6 149 10 YR 8/2 5YR 5/4 10 YR 6/4 10 YR 6/4 10 YR 7/4 10 YR 7/2 10 YR 8/6 X (Beam and pedicel lacking division) 150 10 YR 7/4 10 YR 7/6 10 YR 7/8 10 YR 5/4 10 YR 7/4 10 YR 7/1.5 10 YR 7.5/6 X X �- 440 Table 2.--Weights (kg) and External Body Measurements (continued) Date-Age-Measurements Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Carcass Wt. - Bled (kg) - Eviscerated (kg) - Skinned (kg) Hide Wt. - (kg) Body Length (Not including tail length) Tail Length Head Length Interorbital Width Girth Shoulder Height Neck Circumference (a) (b) Ear Length (Left) (Right) Hind Foot Length (Left) (Right) Hoof Length (Front left) (Front right) (Rear left) (Rear right) Meta-gland Length (Left) (Right) Meta-gland Width (Left) (Right) Tarsal Gland Width (Left) (Right) Scrotum Length Width Height Prepuce Length Antler Beam Diam (Left) (Right) Antler Beam Length (Left) (Right) Antler Point No. (Left) (Right) Antler Inside Spread Tip-to-Tip Spread Antler Wt. (g) (Left) (Right) Antler Brow Tine Length (Left) (Right) Pelage Sample Wt (g) (cm) of 25 Male Deer, 1964. Collection No. 154 7-7 10-1 100.0 71.4 64.7 5.0 160 8-17 1-2 61.2 45.0 40.6 4.0 161 8-25 0-2 22.2 17.2 15.7 1.5 162 9-9 1-3 52.2 35.8 32.2 3.4 165 9-29 1-3 52.6 38.9 34.2 4.6 167 10-12 2-4 90.4 66.8 59.8 6.4 166.5 17.5 33.4 15.0 104 105 49 59 16.5 21.0 51.1 51.0 7.8 7.9 7.2 7.1 17.0 17.0 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 6.5 5.0 4.0 12.5 4.55 4.60 36.0 36.0 3 4 53.0 53.0 740 985 143.5 19.5 29.2 12.2 86 90 34 47 19.5 19.5 48.8 48.7 7.2 7..2 7.0 6.9 14.5 14.5 4.5 4.5 5.0 5.0 6.0 5.5 3.5 11.5 2.43 2.69 30.0 28.0 2 2 25.0 21.0 214 183 93.0 16.0 21.7 10.2 59.5 68.0 25 33 18 18 37.0 37~0 5.6 5.7 5.4 5.3 12.0 12.0 4.0 4.0 6.0 6.0 1.0 2.0. 1.5 6.0 133.5 17.5 28.5 12.1 80 87 30 43 19.0 19.0 48.5 48.4 7.2 7.3 7.1 7.1 15.0 15.0 3.5 4.0 4.0 3.5 7.0 6.0 4.0 9.5 1.88 2.13 23.0 26.0 2 2 22.0 20.0 87 120 136.0 19.0 28.5 11.1 84 90 32 45 19.0 19.0 47.0 47.0 7.4 7.4 7.2 7.0 17.0 17 .0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 8.5 4.5 5.5 9.0 1.44 1.53 19.0 19.0 2 2 21.5 20.0 37 43 160.5 13.5 31.5 13.6 105 100 49 61 22.0 22.0 49.7 49.8 7.6 7.8 7.4 7.5 14.5 14.5 5.5 5.0 4.5 4.5 8.5 7.5 5.0 12.5 2.87 2.89 40.0 40.0 4 3 38.0 29.0 324 303 6.5 6.5 2.9+ 11.5 11.6 17 .6~·dc 27.9++ 1.0 27.7++ �- 441 Table 2.--Weights (kg) and External Body Measurements (continued) Date-Age-Measurements Pelage Color Dorsal Rostrum Interorbital Occipital Brisket Outer Thigh Umbilical (anterior) Front Knees Antler Stage Bone Velvet Velvet Shedding Skin Covered + All summer pelage. ** Shedding summer pelage. * Velvet drying. ++ Winter pelage. (cm) of 25 Male Deer, 1964. Collection No. 154 160 161 162 165 167 10 YR 7/6 10 YR 7/4 10 YR 6/4 10 YR 6/2 10 YR 7/6 10 YR 9/4 10 YR 8/6 10 YR 8/5 10 YR 7/8 10 YR 5/4 10 YR 7/6 10 YR 7.5/6 10 YR 8/4 10 YR 8/6 10 YR 9/2 10 YR 6/3 10 YR 6/3 10 YR 7/1 10 YR 7/5 10 YR 7/1 10 YR 9/6 10 YR 7.5/4 10 YR 7/6 10 YR 3/1 10 YR 3/2 10 YR 6/4 10 YR 7/2 10 YR 7.5/8 10 YR 9/1 10 YR 7.5/1 10 YR 5/1 10 YR 3/1 10 YR 7/1.5 10 YR 5.5/1 10 YR 8/5 10 YR 8/2 10 YR 3/2 10 YR 5/4 10 YR 3/2 10 YR 6/4 10 YR 6/2 10 YR 7/6 X X X * * X X �- 442 Table 2.--Weights (kg) and External Body Measurements (cm) of 25 Male Deer, 1964. (continued) .Da te-Age-Measuremen ts Collection Date CMonth-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Carcass Wt. - Bled (kg) -Eviscerated (kg) -Skinned (kg) Hide Wt. - (kg) Body Length (Not including tail length) Tail Length Head Length Interorbital Width Girth Shoulder Height Neck Circumference (a) (b) Ear Length (Left) (Right) Hind Foot Length (Left) (Right) Hoof Length (Front left) (Front right) (Rear left) (Rear right) Meta-gland Length (Left) (Right) Meta-gland Width (Left) (Right) Tarsal Gland Width (Left) (Right) Scrotum Length Width Height Prepuce Length Antler Beam Diam (Left) (Right) Antler Beam Length (Left) (Right) Antler Point No. (Left) (Right) Antler Inside Spread Tip-to-Tip Spread Antler Wt. (g) (Left) (Right) Antler Brow Tine Length (Left) (Right) Pelage Sample Wt. (g) Collection No. 168 10-20 3-4 100.1 75.4 66.8 7.6 170 11-10 2-5 74.8 56.8 49.2 7.2 171 11-17 6-5 91.2 73.8 65.5 7.2 172 11-23 0-5 40.7 29.1 26.1 3.0 174 12-15 1-6 51.9 38.1 34.2 3.7 175 12-23 2-6 74.9 54.6 48.2 6.0 154.5 16.5 32.0 13.8 116 94 58 69 22.5 22.5 47.0 47.0 8.0 8.1 7.5 7.6 16.0 17.0 5.0 5.0 5.5 5.5 8.0 8.0 7.0 9.0 3.66 3.49 48.0 42.0 152.0 19.0 31.5 12.6 98 99 45 63 22.0 22.0 49.0 49.0 7.7 7.7 7.3 7.1 14.0 15.5 4.0 4.0 5.0 5.0 7.0 7.0 4.0 11.0 2.42 2.40 36.0 36.5 156.0 19.0 34.5 15.6 106 104 64 76 22.0 22.0 48.0 48.0 7.7 7.9 7.1 7.0 16.0 16.0 5.0 5.0 6.0 6.0 9.0 8.5 4.0 13.0 3.53 3.50 46.0 48.0 119.0 19.0 24.4 10.7 77 81 31 43 21.0 21.0 43.0 43.0 6.8 6.9 6.6 6.5 15.0 15.0 4.0 5.0 4.0 4.0 3.0 3.0 2.5 8.5 1.30 1.30 2.0 2.0 4 4 137.0 19.0 28.3 12.0 86 89 36 51 19.0 19.0 45.5 46.0 7.2 7.2 6.7 7.3 15.0 15.0 4.0 4.0 5.0. 4.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 10.0 2.07 1.88 28.0 25.5 2 3 154.5 17.5 31.9 14.1 96 98 45 53 20.5 20.5 49.1 49.2 7.0 7.1 6.7 6.5 16.0 16.0 4.0 4.5 4.0 4.0 8.5 8.0 4.0 12.5 2.40 2.35 37.0 35.0 3 3 1 47.0 49.5 530 488 1 2 2 34.0 28.0 202 203 37 16 545 563 2 3 5.5 5.5 22.5 19.5 105 98 33 28 191 182 1.5 2.0 36.9t+ 0.0 0.0 41.3 41.3 33.2 34.8 33.3 �- 443 Table 2.--Weights (kg) and External Body Measurements (continued) ~oIIection No. Date-Age-Measurements Pelage Color Dorsal Rostrum Interorbital Occipital Brisket Outer Thigh Umbilical (anterior) Front Knees Antler Stage Bone Velvet Velvet Shedding Skin Covered ++ Winter Pelage (cm) of 25 Male Deer, 1964. 168 10 YR 10/1 10 YR 4/1 10 YR 5/1 10 YR 2/1 10 YR 7/1.5 10 YR 6/1 10 YR 9/4 170 10 YR 10/1 10 YR 3/1 10 YR 7/1 10 YR 3/1 10 YR 6.5/2 lOYR 6/1 10 YR 7.5/4 171 10 YR 8/1 10 YR 7.5/4 10 YR 7.5/4 10 YR 3/1 10 YR 7/4 10 YR 7/1 10 YR 7.5/6 X X X 172 10 YR 7.5/1 10 YR 4/1.5 10 YR 4/1.5 10 YR 2/1 10 YR 6/3 10 YR 7/1 10 YR 9/6 174 10 YR 9/1 10 YR 5.5/1 10 YR 4/1 10 YR 4.5/1 10 YR 7/3 10 YR 7/1 10 YR 8/5 X X (Tips only) 175 10 YR 9/2 10 YR 4/3 10 YR 4/2 10 YR 4/1 10 YR 6/4 10 YR 6/1 10 YR 7.5/6 X (Both antlers broken) �- 444 Table 3.--Weights (kg) and External Body Measurements (cm) of 26 Female Deer, 19M·. Date:Age-Measurements Collection Date CMonth-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Carcass Ht. -Bled (kg) - Eviscerated (kg) - Skinned (kg) Hide Wt. - (kg) Body Length Tail Length Head Length Interorbital Wid th Girth Shoulder Height Neck Circumference (a) (b) Ear Length Collection No. 128P 1-7 1-7 4·6.9 34.1 30.8 3.3 131.5 15.5 27.5 12.2 81 89 32 40 20.5 20.5 44.5 (Left) (Right) Hind Foot Length (Left) (Right) 44·.6 Hoof Length (Front left) 6.4 (Front right) 6.5 (Rear left) 6.1 (Rear right) 5.8 Meta-gland Length (Left) l3.0 (Right) 15.0 Meta-gland Width (Left) 5.0 (Right) 5.0 Tarsal Gland Width (Left) 4.0 (Right) 4.0 Vu.lva Width 0.7 Length 2.1 Mammary Gland Length 10.0 Width 10.0 1.7 Depth Nipple Length (Front left) 0.8 (Front right) 0.7 1.0 (Rear left) (Rear right) 0.9 Nipple Basal Diam (Front left) 0.5 (Front right) 0.5 (Rear left) 0.6 (Rear right) 0.7 Pelage Sample Wt. (g) 42.6 130P 1-21 11-7 68.1 4-8.3 44.0 4.3 147.0 17.0 31.5 l3.l 96 96 34 50 20.5 20.5 48.1 48.2 6.9 6.9 6.5 6.6 14.0 14.0 5.0 5.0 4.5 4.5 0.8 3.8 11.5 12.0 3.0 1.5 1.5 1.9 1.8 0.9 0.8 0.9 0.8 39.0 2··18 9-8 57.2 40.3 36.3 4.0 136.0 16.0 30.0 12.5 89 89 35 48 18.5 18.5 46.0 46.0 7.2 7.2 7.2 7.2 15.0 15.0 4.0 4.5 3.5 3.5 1.0 4.0 10.5 10.5 3.0 2.1 1.9 2.9 2.8 0.8 1.0 0.9 0.9 51.8 136P 3-3 2-9 51.0 3!+.3 31.0 3.3 14·0.0 16.0 29.3 12.2 80 89 31 40 20.0 20.0 46.0 46.0 6.8 6.8 6.6 6.6 l3.0 13.0 3.5 3.0 3.0 4.0 1.3 3.0 8.0 11.5 4.0 1.3 1.0 1.6 1.5 0.7 0.6 0.7 . 0.6 32.2 137P 3-10 1-9 52.8 39.3 35.6 3.7 140.0 18.0 28.5 11.8 86 90 29 40 20.0 20.0 46.5 47.0 6.7 7.1 6.7 6.6 13.0 13.5 3.5 4.0 4.5 4.5 0.8 1.8 8.0 13.0 3.5 1.1 1.0 1.2 1.2 0.6 0.6 0.8 0.7 46.8 139 3-24 0-9 28.4 20.5 18.5 2.0 107.0 18.0 23.4 10.2 66 74 25 31 18.5 18.5 40.5 40.5 6.0 6.0 5.8 5.6 15.0 lL~.0 4.5 4.5 4.0 4.0 1.0 1.5 9.0 15.0 1.5 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.3 0.3 0.2 0.2 0.2 22.1 �- 445 Table 3.--Weights 1964. (kg) and Ex.terna1 (continued) Body Measurements Date-Age-Measurements Pelage Color Dorsal Rostrum Interorbital Occipital Brisket Outer Thigh Umbilical Front Lactating P = pregnant. (anterior) Knees (cm) of 26 Female Deer, Collec tion No. 128P 130P 134p 136P 137P 139 10 YR 7.5/2 10 YR. 4/2 10 YR. 3/2 10 YR. 5/2 10 YR. 6/4 10 YR. 7/2 10 YR. 7.5/6 10 YR 7.5/2 10 YR. 4/2 10 YR. 4/2 10 YR. 4/1 10 YR. 6/4 10 YR. 6/1 10 YR. 7/6 10 YR 9/1 10 YR. 6/1.5 10 YR. 4/1 10 YR. 3/1 10 YR. 6/3 10 YR. 7.5/1 10 YR 7.5/4 10 YR 8/1.5 10 YR. 7/1.5 10 YR. 7/1.5 10 YR. 4/1.5 10 YR 7/1.5 10 YR. 7/1 10 YR. 7.5/6 10 YR. 7.5/1 10 YR. 6.5/2 10 YR. 6/2 10 YR. 6/1 10 YR. 7.5/3 10 YR. 7/1 10 YR. 8/5 10 YR. 9/1 10 YR. 5/2 10 YR. 4/2 10 YR. 6/1.5 10 YR. 7.5/2 10 YR. 7.5/1 10 YR 7.5/6 �- 446 Table 3.--Weights (kg) and External Body Measurements (cm) of 26 Female Deer, 1964. (continued) Date-Age-Measurements Collection No. 140 l4lP 028P l43P l46P l48P 151 Collection Date (:Month-Day) 4-2 4-7 4-16 4-21 5-12 5-26 6-16 Estimated Age (Year-Month) 0-10 10-10 2-10 3-10 3-11 1-11 9-0 Carcass Wt. - Bled (kg) 61.0 34.4 57.2 49.9 60.6 51.4 57.1 - Eviscerated (kg) 25.0 40.8 40.9 35.0 39.6 35.0 37.5 -Skinned (kg) 22.5 36.8 32.2 36.6 31.9 34.7 Hide Wt. - (kg) 2.5 4.0 2.8 3.0 3.1 2.8 Body Length 122.5 146.0 140.0 134.0 145.0 140.5 145.5 Tail Length 18.5 17.0 17.0 20.0 20.0 18.5 17.5 Head Length 26.1 31.8 29.4 29.0 29.6 28.6 29.4 Interorbital Width 10.8 10.9 12.6 10.8 12.7 11.7 12.5 Girth 73 93 89 82 88 80 85 Shoulder Height 79 93 92 92 88 85 88 Neck Circumference (a) 26 31 33 28 29 29 30 (b) 35 50 40 38 37 38 41 Ear Length (Left) 19.5 22.0 21.0 20.0 20.5 20.5 19.5 (Right) 19.5 22.0 20.0 20.0 20.5 20.5 19.5 Hind Foot Length (Left) 44.7 46.0 49.5 46.7 47.4 46.5 (Right) 44.8 46.0 46.9 49.5 46.6 47.3 46.4 Hoof Length (Front left) 6.2 7.1 6.9 6.8 6.2 6.6 6.1 (Front right) 6.2 7.0 6.8 6.5 6.3 6.7. 6.1 (Rear left) 5.7 6.9 6.3 6.5 6.0 6.4 5.9 (Rear right) 5.6 6.9 6.2 6.5 5.9 6.4 5.9 Meta-gland Length (Left) 16.0 13.0 14.5 13.0 15.5 15.0 15.5 (Right) 16.5 13.0 13.5 15.0 15.0 15.5 15.5 Meta-gland Width (Left) 4.5 3.5 5.5 4.0 4.5 5.5 5.0 (Right) 4.5 3.5 5.5 lj·.5 4.0 5.5 5.0 Tarsal Gland Width (Left) 4.0 4.0 5.0 3.5 4.5 5.0 4.5 (Right) 4.5 lj·.5 4.0 3.5 4.5 5.0 4.5 Vulva Wid th 0.5 1.2 0.8 1.2 Length 2.3 3.3 2.7 3.5 Mammary Gland Length 10.0 10.0 10.5 9.5 10.0 10.5 17.0 Width 9.5 12.5 10.0 10.0 10.5 10.5 15.0 Depth 1.9 3.0 2.5 2.5 4.9 7.8 Nipple Length (Front left) 0.2 1.0 1.1 1.0 1.3 1.4 1.6 (Front right) 0.3 1.0 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.1 1.6 (Rear left) 0.3 1.3 1.1 1.1 1.6 1.6 2.0 (Rear right) 0.2 1.1 1.2 1.0 1.5 1.2 2.0 Nipple Basal Diam (Front left) 0.4 0.3 0.8 0.5 0.9 1.4 0.7 (Front right) 0.3 0.3 1.0 1.3 0.7 0.4 0.6 (Rear left) 0.3 0.5 1.1 1.5 0.7 0.5 0.9 (Rear right) 0.3 0.3 1.0 1.5 0.7 0.5 0.7 Pelage Sample Wt. (g) 43.5~b~ 26.7 19.8+~~ -* 9•9~'~,*8. 6++ �- 447 Table 3.--Weights (kg) and External Body Measurements 1964. (continued) Collection No. Date-Age-Measurements Pelage Color Dorsal Rostrum Interorbital Occipital Brisket Outer Thigh Umbilical (anterior) Front Knees Lactating ~k Pelage shedding. +* Extensive pelage loss. * Pelage loose. + Some summer pelage. ++ Much summer pelage. P = Pregnan t , (cm) of 26 Female Deer, 140 141P 10 YR 8/2 10 YR 4/2 10 YR 5/3 10 YR 3/2 10 YR 6.5/2 10 YR 7/1.5 10 YR 7.5/6 10 YR 7.5/1 10 YR 3.5/1 10 YR 5/3 10 YR 3/1 10 YR 5.5/3 10 YR 7/1.5 10 YR 9/2 028P 143P 146P 148P 151 10 YR 7/1.5 10 YR 5/3 10 YR 5/3 10 YR 5/1 10 YR 7/1.5 10 YR 7/1 10 YR 7.5/4 10 YR 7/2 5YR 3.5/2 10 YR 4/4 10 YR 6.5/2 10 YR 6/4 10 YR 7/2 10 YR 7.5/6 10 YR 7/2 10 YR 6/4 10 YR 6/4 10 YR 6.5/2 10 YR 7/4 10 YR 8/2 10 YR 8/5 10 YR 7.5/2 10 YR 7/4 10 YR 7/6 10 YR 6/1 10 YR 7/2 10 YR 8/2 10 YR 7.5/6 X �- 448 Table 3.--Weights (kg) and External Body Measurements (cm) of 26 Female Deer, 1964. (continued) Date-Age-Measurements Collection No. 152P 6-23 2-0 47.9 31.9 29.3 2.6 134.5 14.5 27.6 11.9 78 84 27 (b) 38 Ear Length (Left) 19.0 (Right) 19.0 Hind Foot Length (Left) 44.6 (Right) 44.5 Hoof Length (Front left) 6.6 (Front right) 6.5 (Rear left) 6.2 (Rear right) 6.2 Meta-gland Length (Left) 13.5 (Right) 13.5 Meta-gland Width (Left) 4.5 (Right) 4.5 Tarsal Gland Width (Left) 4.5 (Right) 4.5 Vulva Width 0.4 Length 2.3 Mammary Gland Length 9.0 Width 9.5 Depth 3.4 1.1 Nipple Length (Front left) 1.1 (Front right) 1.2 (Rear left) 1.3 (Rear right) Nipple Basal Diam (Front left) 0.9 (Front right) 0.8 (Rear left) 0.9 (Rear right) 0 8 Pelage Sample Wt. (g) 9.3+ Collection Date CMonth-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Carcass Wt. - Bled (kg) - Evis cerated (kg) - Skinned (kg) Hide Wt. - (kg) Body Length Tail Length Head Length Interorbital Width Girth Shoulder Height Neck Circumference (a) 0 153 155 6-30 7-13 5-0 3-1 65.3 54.6 49.9 36.8 46.0 34.4 3.9 2.4 148.0 146.5 17.0 15.5 31.0 29.2 12.8 12.2 92 82 93 91 32 26 45 39 21.5 19.5 19.5 21.5 48.0 49.3 48.0 49.2 6.8 7.0 6.9 7.0 6.7 6.9 6.8 6.8 15.5 15.0 16.5 14.5 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 0.5 0.8 3.4 3.5 15.5 16.0 13.5 13.0 7.6 6.4 1.5 1.4 1.4 1.3 1.8 1.8 1.7 1.6 0.9 0.9 0.7 0.9 1.1 1.2 1.1 1.1 8.8.y.\11.7~h'c 156 ·7-20 2-1 49.8 36.6 34.0 2.6 142.5 19.5 28.3 12.5 83 87 29 38 20.0 20.0 45.9 45.9 6.4 6.5 6.2 6.2 14.5 14.5 4.0 4.0 5.0 5.0 0.6 1.7 11.5 9.0 4.1 1.0 1.0 1.4 1.3 0.7 0.7 0.9 0.9 7 .5~\- 157 7-28 2-1 44.2 32.8 30.1 2.7 129.0 20.0 27.7 11.0 ~O 88 27 39.5 20.0 20.0 45.0 45.0 6.7 6.6 6.3 6.3 14.0 14.5 4.0 4.0 3.0 4.0 0.6 3.2 11.0 12.5 1.0 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.3 0.5 0.6 9.0 158 8-4 1-2 37.8 26.8 24.3 2.5 127.5 17 .5 26.3 10.9 74 80 24 30 19.0 19.0 45.1 44.9 6.7 6.6 6.6 6.5 14.5 14.5 4~5 4.5 4.5 4.5 0.4 2.1 8.0 8.0 1.3 0.6 0.6 0.8 0.7 0.5 0.5 0.7 0.6 11.7- �- 449 Table 3.--Weights (kg) and External Body Measurements 1964. (continued) Date-Age-Measurements Pelage Color Dorsal Rostrum Interorbital Occipital Brisket Outer Thigh Umbilical (anterior) Front Knees (cm) of 26 Female Deer, Collection No. 152P 153 155 156 157 158 10 YR 7.5/2 5YR 6/8 5YR 6/8 10 YR 6/2 10 YR. 7/4 10 YR 7/2 10 YR 8/6 10 YR 8/2 10 YR 7/6 10 YR 7/6 10 YR 7.5/1 10 YR 7/2 10 YR 8/5 10 YR 7.5/6 10 YR 8/3 10 YR 7/6 10 YR 3/2 10 YR 7/2 10 YR 7/6 10 YR 7.5/4 10 YR 7.5/6 10 YR 7/5 IOYR 7/7 10 YR 7/6 10 YR 8/2 10 YR 7.5/6 10 YR 7.5/6 10 YR 8/6 IOYR 7/1 10 YR 7/1 5YR 8/6 5YR 8/6 10 YR 7.5/8 10 YR 9/6 10 YR 7.5/8 . 10 YR 7.5/4 10 YR 7/8 10 YR 7/6 10 YR 7.5/8 10 YR 7.5/6 IOYR 8/4 10 YR 8/6 X X Lactating X (Possibly) + Summer pelage prominant under winter pelage. ** Summer pelage forming. * Almost complete su~er pelage. +* Mostly summer pelage. - Complete summer pelage. �- 450 Table 3.--Weights (kg) and External Body Measurements (cm) of 26 Female Deer, 1964. (continued) Date-Age-Measurements 159 Collection Date CMonth-Day) 8-11 Estimated Age (Year-Month) 5-2 Carcass Wt. - Bled (leg) 58.1 - Eviscerated (kg) 37.8 - Skinned (kg) 34.0 Hide Wt. - (kg) 3.8 Body Length 129.0 Tail Length 17.0 Head Length 28.2 Interorbital Width 10.9 Girth 84 Shoulder Height 86 Neck Circumference (a) 33 (b) 42 Ear Length (Left) 19.0 (Right) 19.0 Hind Foot Length (Left) 46.0 (Right) 46.0 Hoof Length (Front left) 7.2 (Front right) 7.3 (Rear left) 6.9 (Rear right) 6.9 Meta-gland Length (Left) 16.0 (Right) 16.0 Meta-gland Wid th (Left) 4.0 (Right) 4.0 Tarsal Gland Width (Left) 5.0 (Right) 5.0 Vulva Width 0.5 Length 3.0 Mammary Gland Length 19.0 Width 16.0 Depth 7.5 Nipple Length (Front left) 1.5 1.5 (Front right) 1.9 (Rear left) 1.7 (Rear right) Nipple Basal Diam (Front left) 0.5 (Front right) 0.7 (Rear left) 0.7 (Rear right) 0.9 Pelage Sample Wt. (g) 8.5 Collection No. 031 9-10 0-3 23.1 16.0 101.0 14.0 21.3 8.5 62 71 21 32 18.5 18.5 38.0 38.0 5.6 5.7 5.2 5.0 13.0 13.0 4.0 3.5 3.5 3.5 0.4 1.1 7.0 5D5 1.5 OD5 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.2 0.2 0.3 0.2 -* 163 164 166 169 173 9-15 9-21 10-5 11-4 12-8 1-3 1-3 0-4 3-5 8-6 53.9 60.8 61.8 32.2 64.2 38.4 43.8 23.8 47.0 44.7 21.0 34.4 41.6 39.6 39.9 4.0 4.2 2.8 5.4 4.8 139.0 142.5 116.0 144.0 146.5 16.0 17 .5 16.0 16.0 20.5 28.3 30.1 24.0 30.8 29.6 12.2 12.2 10.0 12.6 12.9 84 87 70 91 92 87.5 89 79 90 93 29 30 29 36 32 40 38 36 44 41 20.0 21.5 22.0 20.0 20.0 19.5 21.5 22.0 20.0 20.0 41.5 45.5 48.0 46.6 49.5 41.5 45.5 48.0 46.7 49.4 7.0 7.1 6.3 6.9 7.2 7.0 7.0 6.4 6.9 7.1 6.8 6.9 6.1 6.7 7.1 6.6 6.9 6.2 6.7 6.9 15.0 16.0 14.0 14.5 16.5 15.0 16.0 14.0 14.5 16.5 4.0 4.5 4.0 5.5 4.5 4.0 4.5 3.5 5.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 3.5 4.5 5.0 4.5 4.5 3.5 4.5 5.0 1.1 0.5 0.6 0.4 0.7 1.5 1.6 2.5 3.5 3.2 11.0 11.5 7.0 9.0 12.5 11.0 12.0 7.0 8.5 7.5 1.5 1.1 1.5 2.6 4.8 1.1 1.2 1.7 0.7 0.9 1.0 1.3 1.2 0.6 1.5 1.2 1.0 1.7 0.9 2.1 1.1 1.1 1.7 1.7 0.9 0.4 0.7 0.6 0.7 0.9 0.4 0.7 0.6 0.8 0.8 1.0 0.5 0.7 0.6 0.9 0.5 0.7 0.6 0.9 0.8 18.8+ 16.3+ 27.5++ 35.0++ 25.9++ �- 451 Table 3.--Weights (kg) and External Body Measurements 1964. (continued) Date-Age-Measurements Pelage Color Dorsal Rostrum Interorbital Occipital Brisket Outer Thigh Umbilicat' (anterior) Front Knees (em) of 26 Female Deer, Collection No. 159 031 163 164 166 169 173 10 YR 8/2 10 YR 8/7 10 YR 4/1 10 YR 5/2 10 YR 7/7 10 YR 8/5 10 YR 7/6 10 YR 9/1 10 YR 6.5/2 10 YR 6/2 10 YR 7/1 10 YR 7.5/2 10 YR 7/1 10 YR 8/5 10 YR 7.5/2 10 YR 5/1 10 YR 3/1 10 YR 4.5/1 10 YR 6.5/2 10 YR 7.5/1 10 YR 8/5 10 YR 7/2 10 YR 4/2 10 YR 3/2 10 YR 3.5/2 10 YR 7/3 10 YR 8/2 10 YR 7/3 10 YR 9/1 10 YR 5/3 10 YR 3/1.5 10 YR 3/1 10 YR 7/3 10 YR 7.5/3 10 YR 9/5 10 YR 7/4 10 YR 3.5/2 10 YR 3/2 10 YR 2.5/2 10 YR 6/3 lOYR 6/1 10 YR 7.5/6 10 YR 7.5/4 10 YR 3.5/2 10 YR 3.5/2 10 YR 3.5/1 10 YR 6/4 10 YR 8/1 10 YR 8/6 Lactating X * Intermediate summer and winter pelage. + Almost complete winter pelage. ++ Complete winter pelage. X �Table 4.--Blood and Tissue Analyses of 28 Male Deer, 1964. Date-Age-Wt. Ratio-Item 129 Collection Date (Month-Day) 1-14 Estimated Age (Year-Month) 0-7 Eviscerated Wt. Ratio .22 Degree of Blood Serum Hemolysis Slight Erythrocyte Count (million/nun3) 9.49 Packed Cell Volume (%) 47 Hemoglobin (g/100 m1) 19.5 Leucocyte Count (hundreds/nun3) 20.5 Differential Counts (% of 100) Segmented Neutrophi1s 48 Band Neutrophils 0 40 Lymphocytes 6 Monocytes Eosinophils 6 Basophils 0 Blood Salts 185 Na (meq/li ter) 11.9 K (meq/liter) 6.4 Ca (meq/liter) 7.4 P (mg/100 m1) Mg (meq/li ter) 2.2 6.2 Blood Protein (g/lOO m1) 135 Blood Vitamin A (IU/I00 m1) Blood Carotene (IU Provit A/100 m1) tr. 260 Liver Vitamin A (IU/g) 315 Liver Carotene (IU Provit A/g) 1320 Adrenal Ascorbic Acid (ug/g) 75.6 Femur Marrow Fat (%) 20.0 Femur Marrow Moisture (%) Collection No. 131 1-28 4-7 .38 Mod. 9.09 50 17 .1 35.0 132 2-4 1-8 .27 Mod. 7.71 36 12.6 25.0 133 2-11 4-8 .39 Slight 8.50 44 14.9 23.5 135 2-25 0-8 .21 Slight 9.23 44 14.5 47.5 138 3-17 8-9 .38 Slight 9.24 50 19.7 21.0 49 0 46 2 3 0 22 0 60 12 6 0 61 0 30 0 9 0 44 0 47 8 1 0 54 0 42 1 3 0 024 4-6 1-10 025 4-7 0-10 - 027 4-15 0-10 - 142 4-8 7-10 .34 Mod. - - - - - +=- \J1 160 170 190 11.7 10.4 9.6 7.2 7.4 7.0 6.9 7.4 7.6 2.5 2.8 2.7 6.1 4.9 4.9 no 115 150 tr. 0.0 tr. 1050 565 760 405 560 600 1420 1510 780 77 .0 83.8 40.0 20.4 13.9 53.8 190 10.4 7.8 7.0 2.8 5.4 120 0.0 470 220 1455 60.7 35.2 150 9.9 7.2 6.9 2.2 5.5 130 tr. 1000 765 1050 64.2 30.1 - - - - - - - - 440 1000 1150 18.9 74.3 - - - - - 20.9 73.9 f\) 160 10.9 7.4 5.6 2.9 5.9 160 0.0 525 215 420 14.5 79.3 29.2 64.6 �Table 4.--B1ood and Tissue Analyses of 28 Male Deer, 1964. (continued) Date-Age-Wt. Ratio-Item Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt. Ratio Degree of Blood Serum Hemolysis Erythrocyte Count (million/mm3) Packed Cell Volume (%) Hemoglobin (g/100 m1) Leucocyte Count (hundreds/mm3) Differential Counts (% of 100) Segmented Neutrophi1s Band Neutrophils Lymphocytes Monocytes Eos inophils Basophils Blood Salts Na (meq/liter) K (meq/liter) Ca (meq/liter) P (mg/100 m1) Mg (meq/liter) Blood Protein (g/100 m1) Blood Vitamin A (IU/100 m1) Blood Carotene (IU Provit A/lOa ml ) Liver Vitamin A (IU/g) Liver Carotene (IU Provit A/g) Adrenal Ascorbic Acid (ug/g) Femur Marrow Fat (%) Femur Marrow Moisture (%) Collection No. 144 4-28 9-10 .35 Mod. 6.61 45 17.6 23.5 145 5-5 3-11 .32 None 7.37 51 17.6 37.5 147 5-19 4-11 .31 Slight 6.00 47 16.1 17.5 24 2 40 14 11 0 45 4 40 4 7 0 50 0 23 5 22 0 185 11.7 7.9 4.9 3.1 5.0 210 tr. 990 1090 1140 11.3 83.0 175 10.4 7.5 7.1 2.8 5.5 160 0.0 610 1510 1170 12.7 80.7 160 10.1 7.4 7.3 .2.8 4.5 125 0.0 615 200 1160 2.5 92.3 029 5-20 0-11 - - - -- .. .. -29.2 61.1 149 6-2 3-0 .29 None 9.07 44 18.2 31.0 150 6-9 6-0 .37 Slight 8.51 53 18.3 50.0 154 7-7 10-1 .43 Mod. 9.70 58 22.3 34.0 59 4 21 3 13 0 36 6 19 5 33 1 48 0 34 7 12 0 160 9.8 7.6 7.2 2.7 5.1 135 1.4 820 2075 1340 20.1 71.1 175 10.0 7.9 6.8 2.9 5.2 160 0.0 1330 1600 1240 16.8 75.2 190 10.2 8.2 6.4 2.7 5.3 170 2.4 1200 1600 400 84.9 12.9 030 7-29 1-1 - - - -- - - - ..- ..- -- .. .. - - 52.1 40.8 160 8-17 1-2 .31 Severe 7.29 47 17 .6 31.0 22 0 60 12 6 0 145 7.4 8.6 8.2 5.8 5.6 170 tr. 2200 1570 1240 71.3 23.7 +:. \Jl co �Table 4.--B1ood and Tissue Analyses of 28 Male Deer, 1964. (continued) Date-Age-Wt. Ratio-Item 161 Collection Date (Month-Day) 8-25 Estimated Age (Year-Honth) 0-2 Eviscerated Wt. Ratio .18 Degree of Blood Serum Hemolysis Slight Erythrocyte Count (mi11ion/rom3) 7.20 Packed Cell Volume (%) 42 Hemoglobin (g/100 m1) 14.5 Leucocyte Count (hundreds/rom3) 19.5 Differential Counts (% of 100) Segmented Neutrophi1s 32 Band Neutrophils 4 Lymphocytes 48 Monocytes 4 Eosinophils 12 Basophils 0 Blood Salts Na (meq/liter) 135 K (meq/liter) 8.6 Ca (meq/liter) 6.9 P (mg/100 ml) 9.2 Mg (meq/liter) 2.8 Blood Protein (g/100 m1) 4.8 Blood Vitamin A (IU/100 m1) 185 Blood Carotene (IU Provit A/100 m1) tr. Liver Vitamin A (IU/g) 1475 Liver Carotene (IU Provit A/g) 4200 Adrenal Ascorbic Acid (ug/g) 940 Femur Marrow Fat (%) 42.4 Femur Marrow Moisture (%) 49.6 Collection No. 162 9-9 1-3 .27 Slight 9.63 54 20.3 39.0 165 9-29 1-3 .29 0.0 9.13 49 17 .6 16.5 167 10-12 2-4 .42 0.0 8.94 49 19.7 27.5 168 10-20 3-4 .49 Heavy 5.68 30 11. 6 34.0 170 11-10 2-5 .37 Heavy 60 1 ,30 5 2 1 48 0 38 8 6 0 51 2 31 8 7 0 39 0 43 16 2 0 155 8.4 7.3 7.5 3.1 6.6 165 0.0 1620 1585 1100 77.9 17.5 130 7.6 7.0 7.6 2.5 5.9 170 0.0 1380 965 1380 89.2 8.9 150 8.2 7.6 7.3 3.0 6.8 165 0.0 1050 500 1290 84.9 11.9 185 8.7 8.2 6.9 4.7 6.4 160 0.0 1400 420 1180 94.2 4.8 171 11··17 6-5 .47 Mod. 12.06 71 26.0 24.5 172 11-23 0-5 .24 Mod. 7.84 45 17.1 30.5 174 12-15 1-6 .28 Slight 8.03 43 15.7 19.0 175 12-23 2-6 .35 22 0 50 16 10 2 36 0 40 16 24 44 48 12 16 0 26 0 49 17 7 1 160 9.4 7.9 5.8 5.8 6.3 150 tr. 1950 520 1060 88.9 9.1 165 8.6 8.0 5.9 4.7 6.1 145 0.0 1460 465 lll0 90.6 7.9 155 7.6 8.3 7.5 6.0 5.3 155 tr. 140 7.0 7.8 6.1 3.9 6.5 140 0.0 165 7.6 8.4 7.5 5.4 6.2 165 tr. 1120 70.4 24.3 llOO 90.2 8.6 1150 80.1 16.5 - - - 4 4 a 0 36 16 4 0 + + \.J1 �Table 5.--Blood and Tissue Analyses of 26 Female Deer, 1964. Collection No. Dat e-Age-wt . Ratio-Item l28P 1-7 Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) 1-7 .26 Eviscerated Wt. Ratio Slight Degree of Blood Serum Hemolysis Erythrocyte Count (mi1lion/rom3) 11.30 55 Packed Cell Volume (%) 20.3 Hemoglobin (g/100 m1) 25.0 Leukocyte Count (hundreds/rom3) Differential Counts (% of 100) 52 Segmented Neutrophi1s 0 Band Neutrophils 31 Lymphocytes 9 Monocytes 8 Eos inophils 0 Basophils Blood Salts 175 Na (meq/liter) 11.8 K (meq/liter) 6.8 Ca (meq/liter) 7.8 P (mg/100 ml) 2.3 Mg (meq/ liter) 6.0 Blood Protein (g/100 m1) 155 Blood Vitamin A (IU/100 ml) Blood Carotene (IU Provit A/100 m1) tr. 550 Liver Vitamin A (IU/g) 345 Liver Carotene (IU Provit A/g) 1260 Adrenal Ascorbic Acid (ug/g) 84.3 Femur Marrow Fat (%) 13.4 Femur Marrow Moisture (%) l30P 1-21 11-7 .33 Slight 9.62 52 18.0 35.0 l34P 2-18 9-8 .30 Slight 9.00 47 15.3 17 .0 l36P 3-3 2-9 .25 0 7.70 41 14.1 22.7 137P 3-10 1-9 .28 Heavy 7.35 30 11.0 71. 5 139 3-24 0-9 .19 Slight 9.98 49 17.6 20.0 140 4-2 0-10 .20 Slight 8.71 46 16.6 18.0 l41P 4-7 10-10 .28 Slight 7.59 46 18.0 25.0 67 0 26 2 5 0 34 2 30 12 22 0 48 1 35 4 11 1 31 0 64 5 0 0 44 0 38 15 3 0 49 0 40 7 4 0 52 0 41 5 2 0 175 11.3 6.9 7.2 2.3 5.4 130 2.5 820 700 1190 90.1 7.5 165 10.6 7.0 6.7 2.7 4.8 135 0.0 570 420 900 89.9 7.4 185 10.5 8.1 7.8 2.8 5.3 125 0.0 660 850 1140 89.7 8.4 145 9.9 7.8 8.7 2.4 6.4 145 tr. 535 380 980 71.7 22.7 155 10.3 7.3 7.3 2.2 6.3 140 0.0 325 190 790 23.9 68.2 155 10.0 7.6 7.8 2.4 5.2 140 0.0 385 400 1080 19.6 74.2 155 9.8 6.9 5.3 2.6 5.1 150 0.0 600 625 810 91.4 7.0 028 4-16 2-10 .29 143P 4-21 3-10 .26 Mod. 8.32 48 17 .6 15.5 - 40 - 440 6 - 100 +="" - 160 - 10.2 6.7 7.2 2.8 - 1355.3 -0.0 590 - 960 - 1290 47.0 83.7 - \J1 \J1 11.6 48.4 �Table 5.--B1ood and Tissue Analyses of 26 Female Deer, 1964. Date-Age-Wt. Ratio-Item Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt. Ratio Degree of Blood Serum Hemolysis Erythrocyte Count (mi11ion/rnrn3) Packed Cell Volume (%) Hemoglobin (g/100 m1) Leukocyte Count (hundreds/rnrn3) Differential Counts (% of 100) Segmented Neutrophi1s Band Neutrophils Lymphocytes Monocytes Eos inophils Basophils Blood Salts Na (rneq/liter) K (meq/liter) Ca (meq/liter) P (mg/100 m1) Mg (meq/liter) Blood Protein (g/100 m1) Blood Vitamin A (IU/100 m1) Blood Carotene (IU Provit A/100 m1) Liver Viatmin A (IU/g) Liver Carotene (IU Provit A/g) Adrenal Ascorbic Acid (ug/g) Femur Marrow Fat (%) Femur Marrow MOisture (%) (continued) Collection No. 146P 5-12 3-11 .27 Slight 6.36 43 16.6 34.5 l48P 5-26 1-11 .25 0.0 10.5 47 18.3 24 .. 5 151L 6-16 9-0 .26 0.0 5.26 38 13.4 52.5 l52P 6-23 2-0 .24 Slight 8.87 57 21.0 75.0 8.95 61 24.4 28.5 54 0 30 6 12 0 40 0 45 9 6 0 79 0 17 0 4 0 40 0 42 10 8 0 44 0 40 8 8 0 l53L 6-30 5-0 .34 ~ VI 0\ 155 10.4 7.9 7.6 2.6 5.5 145 tr. 740 260 780 35.1 56.5 165 10.2 7.6 8.1 2.8 5.6 130 1.2 600 400 1210 24.2 68.9 185 9.9 7.8 6.1 2.8 4.9 170 0.0 1220 1590 1090 10.9 83.4 170 9.7 6.9 7.8 2.6 5.4 145 1.8 1400 3560 1210 54.8 36.3 1420 1700 1125 78.3 14.5 �Table 5.--B1ood and Tissue Analyses Date-Age-Wt. of 26 Female Deer, 1964. (continued) Ratio-Item Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt. Ratio Degree of Blood Serum Hemolysis Erythrocyte Count (mil1ion/rom3) Packed Cell Volume (%) Hemoglobin (g/100 m1) Leukocyte Count (hundreds/rom3) Differential Counts (% of 100) Segmented Neutrophi1s Band Neutrophils Lymphocytes Monocytes Eosinophils Basophils Blood Salts Na (meq/liter) K (meq/liter) Ca (meq/liter) P (mg/100 ml) Mg (meq/liter) Blood Protein (g/lOO m1) Blood Vitamin A (IU/100 ml) Blood Carotene (IU Provit A/100 ml) Liver Vitamin A (IU/g) Liver Carotene (IU Provit A/g) Adrenal Ascorbic Acid (ug/g) Femur Marrow Fat (%) Femur }~rrow Moisture (%) Collection No. 155L 7-13 3-1 .25 Mod. 7.45 43 16.1 41. 0 156L 7-20 2-1 .26 Slight 6.18 31 11.0 48.5 157 7-28 2-1 .25 Mod. 7.65 42 15.9 21. 5 158 8-4 1-2 .21 Mod. 9.64 50 19.4 32.2 159L 8-11 5-2 .29 Slight 7.25 42 15.3 54.5 39 0 46 5 7 3 44 0 37 4 15 0 44 0 40 4 8 4 46 2 47 2 3 0 34 1 44 4 15 3 185 10.4 7.6 7.6 2.7 4.5 145 1.7 2000 3530 1180 33.6 57.4 205 11.3 7.9 8.9 2.9 5.6 185 1.8 1375 2180 1060 26.6 63.5 130 7.3 7.3 8.6 3.4 5.4 160 tr. 3275 3880 1100 45.9 47.5 120 7.4 7.4 9.0 2.3 5.1 185 0.0 1040 1420 1200 78.2 19.5 195 10.9 7.7 7.2 2.7 5.5 175 2.6 1645 3235 1040* 12.8 77 .9 .j::"" V1 -.l �Table 5.--Blood and Tissue Analyses of 26 Female Deer, 1964. (continued) Date-Age-Ht. Ratio-Item Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt. Ratio Degree of Blood Serum Hemolysis Erythrocyte Count (million/rom3) Packed Cell Volume (%) Hemoglobin (g/lOO ml) Leukocyte Count (hundreds/rom3) Differential Counts (% of 100) Segmented Neutrophi1s Band Neutrophi1s Lymphocytes Monocytes Eos inophils Basophils Blood Salts Na (meq/liter) K (meq/liter) Ca (meq/liter) P (mg/100 ml) Mg (meq/liter) Blood Protein (g/lOO ml) Blood Vitamin A (IU/100 ml) Blood Carotene (IU Provit A/100 ml) Liver Vitamin A (IU/g) Liver Carotene (IU Provit A/g) Adrenal Ascorbic Acid (ug/g) Femur Marrow Fat (%) Femur Marrow Moisture (%) Collection No. 031 9-10 0-3 .16 - - - - - - 61.1 32.3 163 9-15 1-3 .28 Slight 8.06 47 16.6 21. 5 164 9-21 1-3 .31 Slight 7.46 35 14.1 76.0 166 10-5 0-4 .20 Heavy 8.60 48 17.6 19.5 169 11-4 3-5 .33 Mod. 9.21+ 55 19.7 26.0 l73L 12-8 8-6 .31 Slight 7.71 34 12.6 17.0 30 0 52 8 16 0 12 0 54 7 27 0 42 2 40 7 8 0 44 0 40 3 13 0 20 0 52 8 20 0 CP 145 8.5 7.8 7.9 2.7 5.7 180 0.0 1765 1250 990 86.3 11.1 120 7.9 7.2 8.8 2.4 6.2 180 0.0 850 770 1140 78.4 17.3 * Received in poor condition. P-Pregnant. L-Lactating. + Erythrocytes .j::"' \J'I on differential smears of abnormal size and shape. 165 8.4 7.9 7.0 4.8 4.9 165 tr. 1145 1820 1220 74.7 20.5 165 8.6 7.3 6.0 4.2 4.7 165 0.0 1250 450 1080 93.1 5.7 135 7.4 7.7 6.4 4.2 5.1 140 0.0 1200 91.4 6.6 �- 459 - Table 6. Measurements (em), Fresh Weights (g), and Volumes (cc) of Organs from 25 Male Deer, 1964. Collection No. Date-Age-Wt. Ratio-Organ Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt./Body Length Ratio Brain Long Diam Trans Diam Wt Vol Eyeball (Left) Long Diam Trans Diam Wt Vol Eyeball (Right) Long Diam Trans Diam Wt Vol Lung (Left) Wt (Right) Wt Heart Long Diam Trans Diam Wt Vol Liver Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Kidney (Left) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Kfdney (Right) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol 129 1-14 0-7 l3l 1-28 4-7 132 2-4 1-8 l33 2-11 4-8 l35 2-25 0-8 .22 11.5 8.1 189.0 184.3 .38 11.4 9.2 144.4 l39.9 .27 13.3 8.0 179.0 178.6 .39 170.5 163.2 .21 11.1 7.4 157.8 153.6 3.20 3.00 13.82 13.36 3.37 3.37 18.38 17.66 3.08 3.20 15.56 15.11 3.17 3.17 18.35 17.60 3.00 3.00 12.08 11.43 3.10 3.00 l3.73 l3.24 250 390 13.8 9.4 328.1 315.1 26.3 l3.3 5.3 930.0 883.2 3.44 3.44 18.18 17.46 490 660 15.0 12.5 595.5 568.3 35.5 19.3 4.5 1645.0 3.27 3.12 3.19 3.30 19.15 15.66 18.22 15.12 410 380 830 620 15.8 13.3 11.1 10.6 391.5 702.5 694.2 379.0 12.0 28.1 8.1 15.5 5.8 3.5 1020.0 1750.0 968.5 1657.6 3.00 3.00 10.24 9.,69 190* 310* 11. 5 7.6 255.7 247.6 26.2 13.4 4.4 705.0 7.43 4.30 3.52 71. 5 67.9 9.55 5.36 146.6 140.0 8.05 4.67 4.00 91.9 89.5 9.15 4.80 4.20 121.2 115.6 6.40 4.00 3.10 58.1 56.1 7.40 4.17 3.45 67.1 62.9 9.00 5.44 4.45 140.4 l33.8 7.90 4.56 3.82 84.6 82.4 9.05 4.40 4.10 114.5 109.9 7.00 3.76 3.09 58.1 56.7 5.00 �- 460 - Table 6. Measurements (em), Fresh Weights (g), and Volumes (cc) of Organs from 25 Male Deer, 1964. (continued) Date-Age-Wt. Ratio-Organ Spleen Wt Vol Stomach Wt with Contents Rumen-Reticulum Wt with Contents Rumen-Reticulum Contents Wt (wet) Rumen-Reticulum Contents Wt (oven-dry) Percent Moisture (RumenRetic. Contents) ~" Slight damage. Collection No. 129 131 127.0 240.5 121.8 227.5 3510 10,410 132 124.0 118.0 5310 133 206.5 198.0 8590 135 118.7 114.6 3910 3060 9480 4730 7810 3570 2580 8105 4020 6560 3010 1339 506 1241 84.7 79.6 83.2 �- 461 Table 6. .Measuremen ts (cm), Fresh Weights (g), and Volumes (cc) of Organs from 25 Male Deer, 1964. (continued) Date-Age-Wt. Ratio-Organ Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt./Body Length Ratio Brain Long Diam Trans Diam Wt Vol Eyeball (Left) Long Diam Trans Diam Wt Vol Eyeball (Right) Long Diam Trans Diam Wt Vol Lung (Left) Wt (Right) Wt Heart Long Diam Trans Diam Wt Vol Liver Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Kidney (Left) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Kidney (Right) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Collection No. 138 3-17 8-9 024 4-6 1-10 142 4-8 7-10 144 4-28 9-10 145 5-5 3-11 147 -5-19 4-11 .38 12.6 8.6 182.5 178.9 .34 .35 .32 .31 11.9 11.3 11.4 12.1 7.8 8.2 8.8 9.0 224.3 195.8 212.5 222.5 216.3 194.1 210.5 218.5 3.46 3.39 20.42 19.45 3.28 3.28 17.74 17.08 3.40 3.20 19.50 18.77 3.15 3.15 17.35 16.76 3.59 3.40 19.09 18.48 3.42 3.36 3.40 3.15 3.50 3.42 2.95 3.20 3.15 3.47 20.22 18.20 19.80 18.35 19.02 19.27 17 .50 19.11 17.73 18.42 450 400 440 500 650 730 670 960* 16.5 15.4 15.2 15.4 15.5 11.8 11.2 11.8 10.0 12.0 607.2 594.8 588.0 453.0 577 .4 583.6576.6 580.5 444.0 572.5 33.1 27.8 34.9 30.4 29.7 30.2 16.3 15.9 18.1 7.0 15.1 17 .8 3.0 5.9 5.5 4.0 4.9 4.8 1549.0 1380.0 2020.0 1400.0 1470.0 1500.0 1463.6 1365.5 1399.0 1456.9 9.90 5.68 4.29 139.5 136.4 8.28 9.60 9.54 8.55 4.79 5.90 6.33 5.40 ' 3.73 4.80 4.36 3.96 90.0 146.7 152.8 112.4 116.8 142.6 150.0 111.6 113.3 9.56 5.30 3.90 127.6 124.5 8.58 10.70 10.16 9.08 4.48 5.46 6.00 4.96 3.34 4.30 4.76 3.65 80.4 144.8 158.1 111.3 124.2 121.8 140.7 155.3 nO.5 �- 462 Table 6. Measurements (em), Fresh Weights (g), and Volumes (cc) of Organs from 25 Male Deer, 1964. (continued) Date-Age-Wt. Ratio-Organ Spleen Wt Vol Stomach Wt with Contents Rumen-Reticulum Wt with Contents Rumen-Reticulum Contents Wt (wet) Rumen-Reticulum Contents Wt (oven-dry) Percent Moisture (RumenRetic. Contents) * Damaged. Collection No. 138 96.1 89.5 024 142 144 147 145 203.3 173.0 248.0 185.1 196.0 171.4 240.5 179.4 .8810 8830 7500 7030 8190 7820 6790 6260 6970 6560 5690 5045 1314 1101 748 799 86.8 84.2 81.2 83.2 �- 463 Table 6. Measurements (cm), Fresh Weights (g), and Volumes (cc) of Organs from 25 Male Deer, 1964. (continued) Date-Age-Wt. Ratio-Organ Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt./Body Length Ratio Brain Long Diam Trans Diam Wt Vol Eyeball (Left) Long Diam Trans Diam Wt Vol Eyeball (Right) Long Diam Trans Diam Wt Vol Lung (Left) Wt (Right)Wt Heart Long Diam Trans Diam Wt Vol Liver Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Kidney (Lef t) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Kidney (Right) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Collection No. 149 6-2 3-0 150 6-9 6-0 154 7 -7 10-1 160 8-17 1-2 161 8-25 0-2 .29 12.5 9.0 211.5 205.9 .37 12.0 8.8 203.9 199.5 .43 11.9 8.0 182.0 176.5 .31 11.1 8.6 203.5 196.8 .18 11.3 8.3 159.5 155.0 3.41 3.35 , 17.24 16.75 3.47 3.34 19.11 18.37 3.30 3.30 12.45* 18.85 3.29 3.29 17.00 16.68 2.90 2.74 11.35 11.05 3.45 3.41 17 .26 16.95 475 935 15.1 11.3 516.1 498.4 32.1 17.5 5.7 1330.0 3.51 3.36 19.08 18.41 635 900 15.5 14.0 731.0 709.6 32.3 20.3 6.4 1966.2 1905.4 3.30 3.10 3.30 3.10 19.60 16.55 11.60 16.06 430 840** 774 1400** 18.8 16.0 11.0 .8.8 688.5 489.3 664.1 467.3 34.1 32.8 18.4 16.4 5.6 4.3 2180.0 1190.0 2039.4 3.00 2.90 11.95 11.64 138 224 10.8 7.9 224.8 217 .8 23.5 12.7 3.1 626.0 564.8 8.85 5.22 3.28 94.1 90.4 10.05 5.97 4.73 164.4 157.4 10.10 5.78 4.30 178.4 173.4 8.40 5.00 3.90 119.5 115.0 6.90 3.98 2.50 48.7 47.3 8.99 5.40 3.56 93.3 88.4 10.91 5.77 4.89 176.6 171.4 11.30 5.20 5.10 172.0 167.5 9.00 4.70 3.83 122.5 119.3 7.38 3.30 2.50 46.9 44.9 �- 464 Table 6. Measurements (em), Fresh Weights (g), and Volumes (cc) of Organs from 25 Male Deer, 1964. (continued) Date-Age-Wt. Ratio-Organ Spleen Wt Vol Stomach Wt with Contents Rumen-Reticulum Wt with Contents Rumen-Reticulum Contents Wt (wet) Rumen-Reticulum Contents Wt (oven-dry) Percent Moisture (RumenRetic. Contents) * Probably pathological. ** Slight damage. Collection No. 149 190.6 184.4 7550 150 154 276.8 253.9 268.0 240.9 7290 11,230 160 197.5 190.5 7030 161 55.8 53.8 1760 6990 6530 10,220 6380 1510 5785 4960 8310 5120 1220 735 628 1043 631 142 87.3 87.3 87.7 88.4 87.5 �- 465 Table 6. Measurements (em), Fresh Weights (g), and Volumes (cc) of Organs from 25 Male Deer, 1964. (continued) Date-Age-Wt. Ratio-Organ Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt./Body Length Ratio Brain Long Diam Trans Diam Wt Vol Eyeball (Left) Long Diam Trans Diam Wt Vol Eyeball (Right) Long Diam Trans Diam Wt Vol Lung (Left) Wt (Right) Wt Heart Long Diam Trans Diam Wt Vol Liver Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Kidney (Left) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Kidney (Right) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Collection No. 162 9-9 1-3 165 9-29 1-3 167 10-12 2-4 168 10-20 3-4 170 11-10 2-5 .27 10.6 7.7 199.0 194.9 .29 11.5 7.3 177.0 171.8 .42 10.2 7.3 176.0 169.5 .49 12.4 7.5 208.0 200.9 .37 190.2 184.2 3.20 3.20 16.39 15.94 2.86 2.86 15.88 15.08 3.20 3.20 18.15 17.50 3.20 3.20 17.00 16.40 2.98 2.98 16.30 15.65 3.20 3.20 16.13 15.65 348 634 14.9 10.0 410.7 393.4 30.0 18.5 5.0 1274.0 1203.6 3.28 2.86 15.90 15.20 478 656 17.4 9.0 463.0 449.7 28.5 16.2 4.6 1126.0 1064.5 3.20 3.20 3.20 3.20 18.10 17.73 17.65 16.93 582 1076 18.'6 16.1 11.8 9.5 668.0 582.0 642.9 554.5 31.5 32.6 18.2 17 .2 5.3 4.5 1690.0 1588.0 1584.4 2.92 2.92 16.25 15.60 8.20 5.30 3.90 92.6 88.3 8.20 4.96 3.10 86.0 82.6 9.46 4.30 3.90 118.0 111.9 9.30 4.30 3.60 100.0 95.5 7.80 4.50 3.82 95.3 92.0 9.00 4.84 4.00 101.2 97.3 8.30 3.98 3.05 87.5 83.7 9.60 4.38 4.00 118.0 113.0 9.30 4.10 3.68 104.0 99.5 8.00 4.50 3.53 95.0 89.9 606 16.5 9.2 518.0 498.1 27.5 16.0 4.1 1100.0 1034.8 �- 466 Table 6. Measurements (em), Fresh Weights (g), and Volumes (cc) of Organs from 25 Male Deer, 1964. (continued) Date-Age-Wt. Ratio-Organ Spleen Wt· Vol Stomach Wt with Contents Rumen-Reticulum Wt with Contents Rumen-Reticulum Contents Wt (wet) Rumen-Reticulum Contents Wt (oven-dry) Percent Moisture (RumenRetic. Contents) Collection No. 162 133.5 127.5 6730 165 91.0 86.7 5350 167 234.1 221.0 8620 168 220.0 210.5 9070 170 164.5 155.5 6610 6130 4820 7830 8220 5950 5210 4000 6300 6950 5260 812 557 898 1184 1447 84.4 86.1 85.8 83.0 72.5 �- 467 Table 6. Measurements (em), Fresh Weights (g), and Volumes (cc) of Organs from 25 Male. Deer, 1964. (continued) Date-Age-Wt. Ratio-Organ Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt./Body Length Ratio Brain Long Diam Trans Diam Wt Vol Eyeball (Left) Long Diam Trans Diam Wt Vol Eyeball (Right) Long Diam Trans Diam Wt Vol Lung (Left) Wt (Right) Wt Heart Long Diam Trans Diam Wt Vol Liver Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Kidney (Left) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Kidney (Right) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Collection No. 171 11-17 6-5 172 11-23 0-5 174 12-15 1-6 175 12-23 2-6 .47 12.3 8.6 216.0 210.0 .24 11.4 7.4 172.0 165.5 .28 11.3 7.9 189.0 183.5 .35 11.4 7.6 198.0 195.0 3.58 3.16 19.90 19.23 3.06 3.06 14~20 13.69 3.18 3.00 15.12 14.52 3.15 3.15 17 .06 16.27 3.37 3.10 19.28 18.58 3.06 3.06 13.33 13.02 310* 16.2 10.6 643.0 623.0 30.5 17.9 4.8 1694.0 1593.0 12.5 7.5 314.0 302.0 24.9 13.4 4.5 1010.0 3.00 3.00 15.02 14.25 290 468 16.5 9.8 528.0 488.5 28.4 14.5 3.5 1002.0 917.2 3.15 3.15 17 .41 16.64 393 721 16.5 10.7 621.0 597.2 32.0 18.5 4.5 1403.0 1296.0 8.87 4.50 3.68 118.0 113.6 7.99 3.58 3.20 73.0 70.0 7.00 3.70 3.00 74.0 70.5 8.90 4.20 2.90 98.0 94.5 8.70 4.81 4.18 115.0 110.5 8.13 2.90 3.00 74.0 71.0 7.20 4.40 3.20 81.0 77 .5 9.60 4.37 3.05 96.0 93.0 �- 468 Table 6. Measurements (cm), Fresh Weights (g), and Volumes (cc) of Organs from 25 Male Deer, 1964. (continued) Date-Age-Wt. Ratio-Organ Spleen Wt Vol Stomach Wt with Contents Rumen-Reticulum Wt with Contents Rumen-Reticulum Contents Wt (wet) Rumen-Reticulum Contents Wt (oven-dry) Percent Moisture (RumenRetic. Contents) * Slight damage. Collection No. 171 172 264.0 . 230.5 5520 5300 174 169.0 161.6 5180 175 209.0 201.0 7780 4910 4500 4620 6880 4030 3570 3970 5820 485 631 632 977 88.0 82.3 84.1 83.2 �- 469 Table 7. Measurements (em), Fresh Weights (g), and Volumes (ee) of Organs from 26 Femaie Deer, 1964. Date-Age-Wt. Ratio-Organ Collection Date CMonth-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt./Body Length Ratio Brain Long Diam Trans Diam Wt Vol Eyeba Ll. (Left) Long Diam Trans Diam Wt Vol Eyeball (Right) Long Diam Trans Diam Wt Vol Lung (Left) Wt (Right) Wt Heart Long Diam Trans Diam Wt Vol Liver Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Kidney (Left) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Kidney (Right) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Collection No. 128 1-7 1-7 130 1-21 11-7 134 2-18 9-8 136 3-3 2-9 137 3-10 1-9 .26 10.6 7.9 183.0 174.5 .33 10.6 8.0 200.0 193.0 .30 11.9 8.5 206.2 198.7 .25 184.5 181.3 .28 12.0 6.8 213.0 208.1 3.20 3.20 16.25 15.88 3.50 3.30 19.58 19.01 3.20 3.20 18.19 17.70 3.24 3.24 16.88 16.20 3.35 3.19 16.76 16.34 3.20 3.20 16.50 15.88 340 510 13.9 10.9 434.0 416.0 26.0 13.9 5.9 1125.0 1066.0 3.29 3.19 19.06 18.38 390 590 15.4 13.2 659.0 634.5 20.9 14.3 3.2 1190.0 1129.5 3.30 3.24 3.30 3.24 18.14 17 .10 17.68 16.36 320 490 500 1000 13.4 15.4 11.1 10.7 437.1 516.4 422.6 502.7 28.6 27.5 14.4 14.4 3.8 3.0 1120.0 950.0 1058.7 917 .5 3.18 3.18 16.92 16.30 7.74 4.24 3.37 82.0 78.3 8.73 5.00 4.00 106.4 101.0 7.96 4.78 3.67 91.4 86.5 8.00 4.10 3.10 72.3 70.3 7.48 4.86 3.66 87.0 76.4 7.76 4.50 3.14 81.7 8.90 4.50 3.60 103.1 98.6 7.90 4.76 3.67 90.2 89.9 7.79 3.97 3.20 70.6 68.6 7.70 4.81 3.33 90.6 77 .4 77 .4 13.8* 9.8 484.5 . 467.5 23.2 14.4 3.8 870.0 826.9 �- 470 Table 7. Measurements (em), Fresh Weights (g), and Volumes (ee) of Organs from 26 Female Deer, 1964. (continued) Date-Age-Wt. Ratio-Organ. Spleen Wt Vol Stomach Wt with Contents Rumen-Reticulum Wt with Contents Rumen-Reticulum Contents Wt (wet) Rumen-Reticulum Contents Wt (oven-dry) Percent Moisture (RumenRetic. Contents) * Slight damage. Collection No. 128 176.4 166.4 4275 130 258.8 214.5 5830 134 110.9 106.4 5090 136 97.5 95.2 5180 137 120.0 114.0 4400 3725 5200 4410 4540 3910 3145 4410 3710 3900 3310 470 760 633 620 85.1 82.8 82.9 81.3 �- 471 Table 7. Measurements (em), Fresh Weights (g), and Volumes (cc) of Organs from 26 Female Deer, 1964. (continued) Date-Age-Wt. Ratio-Organ Collection Date Q1onth-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt./Body Length Ratio Brain Long Diam Trans Diam Wt Vol Eyeball (Left) Long Diam Trans Diam Wt Vol Eyeball (Right) Long Diam Trans Diam Wt Vol Lung (Left) Wt (Right) Wt Heart Long Diam Trans Diam Wt Vol Liver Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Kidney (Left) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Kidney (Right) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Collection No. 139 3-24 0-9 140 4-2 0-10 141 4-7 10-10 028 4-16 2-10 .19 .20 .28 11.1 14.3 13.2 10.1 8.2 10.0 192.5 179.5 214.0 187.9 175.0 210.0 .29 143 4-21 3-10 146 5-12 3-11 .26 ' .27 10.5* 11.4 8.0 8.8 173.4 217.0 171.4 205.7 3.00 3.00 14.19 13.81 3.50 3.50 14.42 14.22 2.90 2.90 13.91 13.48 290 360 13.6 8.5 255.5 254.5 23.0 12.0 1.9 670.0 639.0 3.10 3.30 3.10 3.30 14.44 19.74 13.79 18.99 210 370 410 870 11.3 14.9 11.1 10.4 309.0 542.7 303.5 528.0 24.9 30.9 12.2 16.6 4.0 6.0 700.0 1330.0 656.5 1280.1 6.46 3.55 2.90 50.7 48.2 7.20 8.20 3.95 5.10 3.10 3.64 62.3 110.4 59.2 109.6 7.79 5.05 3.59 80.3 7.70 4.67 3.20 80.5 79.5 7.68 4.50 3.10 78.3 78.2 6.90 3.60 2.80 49.7 47.2 7.89 8.70 3.50 4.60 3.24 3.57 64.8 111.5 61.5 109.0 7.94 4.85 3.48 77 .1 8.50 4.62 2.90 77 .0 76.0 8.30 4.20 3.00 78.9 78.8 3.40 3.40 20.10 19.10 3.44 3.30 18.60 18.01 3.40 3.40 18.81 18.25 3.50 3.40 3.50 3.10 18.90 18.80 18.15 18.28 345 450 550 570 12.9 15.5 10.1 10.2 426.0 449.7 424.1 445.2 25.5 28.2 13.6 16.3 4.5 4.5 900.01190.0 868.2 1152.3 �- 472 Table 7. Measurements (em), Fresh Weights (g),and from 26 Female Deer, 1964. (continued) Date-Age-Wt. Ratio-Organ Spleen Wt Vol Stomach Wt with Contents Rumen-Reticulum Wt with Contents Rumen-Reticulum Contents Wt (wet) Rumen-Reticulum Contents Wt (oven-dry) Percent Moisture (RumenRetic. Contents) * Sligh t damage. Volumes (cc) of Organs Collection No. 139 98.8 94.4 3480 140 141 028 143 146 100.2 . 121.0 104.0 180.0 94.9 116.8 103.4 177 .3 3810 4480 3850 4530 5600 3120 3350 3960 3385 4050 4940 2720 2890 3210 2815 3360 4260 458 509 535 465 690 596 83.2 82.4 83.3 83.5 80.1 86.0 �- 473 Table 7. Measurements (em), Fresh Weights (g), and Volumes (cc) of Organs from 26 Female Deer, 1964. (continued) Date-Age-Wt. Ratio-Organ Collection Date O1onth-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt./Body Length Ratio Brain Long Diam Trans Diam Wt Vol Eyeball (Left)· Long Diam Trans Diam Wt Vol Eyeball (Right) Long Diam Trans Diam Wt Vol Lung (Left) Wt (Right)Wt .Heart Long Diam Trans Diam Wt Vol Liver Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Kidney (Left) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Kidney (Right) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Collection No. 148 5-26 1-11 151 6-16 9-0 152 6-23 2·-0 153 6-30 5-0 155 7-13 3-1 .25 11.0 8.5 169.1 160.9 .26 9.7 7.6 188.0 187.2 .24 11.9 8.1 170.6 163.4 .34 11.4 8.2 180.7 180.1 .25 13.0 8.6 187.0 181.5 3.37 3.18 16.02 15.46 3.40 3.40 19.55 19.09 3.20 3.20 16.16 15.74 3.30 3.30 18.33 18.32 3.30 3.00 17 .27 16.83 3.27 3.19 15.49 14.95 260 475 13.7 10.0 391.4 375.1 28.7 16.3 5.7 1430.0 1383.0 3.50 3.50 20.21 19.67 2.98 3.50 2.98 3.50 15.23 18.43 14.88 18.40 320 540* 550 620* 10.4 13.0 10.0 9.6 414.8 509.2 387.7 487.4 21.0 20.9 10.3 15.0 3.8 4.6 1070.0 1110.0 948.5 1050.0 3.30 3.10 17.32 16.64 590 750 15.2 11.3 469.4 452.9 33.8 17 .2 4.8 1212.0 .,. 12-.8 10.4 417.7 408.2 1535.0 8.61 4.90 3.30 85.7 82.0 9.70 4.90 4.00 124.2 121.8 7.30 4.30 3.20 70.2 60.2 9.45 4.94 4.40 129.7 125.2 8.59 5.28 4.20 112.0 109.0 9.05 4.64 3.39 86.3 83.9 9.50 4.70 3.90 115.2 113.8 7.50 4.20 2.90 70.1 60.0 8.50 5.20 4.30 121.0 116.5 9.20 4.70 4.00 117 ·5 111.5 �- 474 Table. 7. Measurements (em), Fresh Weights (g), and Volumes (cc) of Organs f'rom 26 Female Deer, 1964. (continued) Date-Age-Wt. Ratio-Organ Spleen Wt Vol Stomach Wt with Contents Rumen-Reticulum Wt with Contents Rumen-Reticulum Contents Wt (wet) Rumen-Reticulum Contents Wt (oven-dry) Percent Moisture (RumenRetic. Contents) * Some damage. Collection No .. 148 114.8 106.3 4650 151 116.6 106.0 7970 152 192.8 179.3 3780 153 184.9 175.1 5595 155 158.5 150.5 8140 4090 7150 3356 4970 7510 3320 5925 2510 3966 6410 564 719 334 536 807 83.0 87.9 86.7 86.5 87.4 �- 475 Table 7. Measurements (em), Fresh Weights (g), and Volumes (cc) of Organs from 26 Female peer, 1964. (continued) Dat'e-Age-Wt. Ratio-Organ Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt/Body Length Ratio Brain Long Diam Trans Diam Wt Vol Eyeball (Left) Long Diam Trans Diam Wt Vol Eyeball (Right) Long Diam Trans Diam Wt Vol Lung (Left) Wt (Right) Wt Hea rt Long Diam Trans Diam Wt Vol Liver Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Kidney (Left) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Kidney (Right) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Collection No. 156 7-20 2-1 157 7-28 2-1 158 8-4 1-2 159 8-11 5-2 031 9-10 0-3 163 9-15 1-3 .26 10.9 7.5 169.5 164.3 .25 .21 .29 .16 .28 12.4 11.0 10.9 12.2 8.9 8.3 8.2 7.2 7.9 183.7 199.8 166.9 121.2 192.0 178.2 190.8 161.4 117.2 187.5 3.30 3.20 17.17 16.87 3.10 3.10 15.40 14.82 3.10 3.10 14.34 13.52 3.46 3.30 17.17 16.78 3.10 3.10 15.45 14.87 12.0 9.2 411.8 394.1 " 32.6 28.4 16.8 15.2 4.5 4.0 1022.0 1002.0 942.3 3.10 3.30 2.63 3.20 2.90 3.30 2.50 3.20 14.34 18.44 10.70 16.69 13.66 17.76 10.65 16.22 580* 398 148 536 326* 619 208 772 11.2 18.2 11.0 13.0 10.1 9.7 7.6 9.8 317 .8 475.9 197.3 418.5 296.4 462.9 189.3 417 .7 27.3 27.3 22.0 32.0 14.8 16.4 12.5 19.1 3.8 3.5 3.5 5.6 874.0 1230.0 544.0 1552.0 821.5 513.4 1444.0 8.80 5.68 3.90 118.5 113.8 7.80 5.00 3.70 95.5 91.2 7.80 4.30 3.50 85.8 74.5 8.18 5.10 3.55 98.2 94.2 6.00 ,8.40 3.60 5.00 2.45 3.80 42.3 103.0 40.0 97.9 8.55 5.50 4.00 117.6 112.9 8.40 5.00 4.00 91.5 87.7 8.65 4.00 3.00 80.8 72.6 8.30 4.60 3.10 93.5 90.1 6.60 3.50 2.60 38.7 37.2 3.20 3.20 18.05 17.30 2.85 2.55 10.11 9.45 3.20* 3.20 15.93 15.40 8.90 4.00 3.50 96.5 92.2 �- 476 Table 7. Measurements (em), Fresh Weights (g), and Volumes (cc) of Organs from 26 Female Deer, 1964. (continued) .Date-Age-Wt. Ratio-Organ Spleen Wt Vol Stomach Wt with Contents Rumen-Reticulum Wt with . Contents Rumen-Reticulum Contents Wt (wet) Rumen-Reticulum Contents Wt (oven-dry) Percent Moisture (RumenRetic. Contents) * Slight damage. Collection No. 156 205.8 196.6 4995 157 158 159 031 163 120.7 83.8 138.6 191.7 202.5 114.0 70.8 132.6 181.1 191.8 5020 4190 10320 3000 5490 4425 4440 3690 8180 2650 4830 3495 3680 2985 6600 2180 3700 336 461 380 795 330 480 90.4 87.5 87.3 88.0 84.9 87.0 �- 477 Table 7. Measurements. (cm) , Fresh Weights (g), and Volumes (cc) of Organs from 26 Female Deer, 1964. (continued) Date-Age-Wt. Ratio-Organ Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt/Body Length Ratio Brain Long Diam Trans Diam Wt Vol Eyeball (Left) Long Diam Trans Diam Wt Vol Eyeball (Right) Long Diam Trans Diam Wt Vol Lung (Left) Wt (Right) Wt Heart Long Diam Trans Diam Wt Vol Liver Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Kidney (Left) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Kidney (Right) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Collection No. 164 9-21 1-3 .31 11.4 8.3 186.0 183.5 166 169 10-5 11-4 0-4 3-5 .20 .33 10. 5~'t 11.1 6.3 7.9 158.0 199.0 154.0 193.0 173 12.8 8-6 .31 11.2 9.7 180.0 177 .2 3.30 3.10 17 .13 16.79 2.90 2.60 12.26 11.81 3.30 3.00 18.01 17.85 3.28 3.28 17.51 16.91 2.60 3.26 2.60 3.10 12.56 18.01 12.09 17.55 182 358 292 578 12.4 16.0 11.1 7.8 313.0 514.6 298.1 492.7 28.0 29.9 13.5 16.0 3.2 4.0 712.0 1091.0 666.5 1022.5 3.28 3.28 17.89 17.23 14.5 12.4 485.0 464.8 28.5 15.5 4.0 1058.0 975.0 8.45 4.30 3.46 95.6 91.0 7.30 3.30 2.80 58.2 57.5 8.28 4.00 3.70 114.0 107.5 8.55 4.60 3.90 112.0 108.5 91.0 86.9 8.86 2.80 2.50 54.3 52.1 8.56 5.00 3.80 106.0 99.5 9.05 4.60 3.80 106.0 102.5 3.40 3.10 17.30 16.60 414 678 17 .2 10.4 481.0 458.9 33.5 17.7 4.2 1395.0 �- 478 Table 7. Measurements (em), Fresh Weights (g), and Volumes (cc) of Organs from 26 Female Deer, 1964. (continued) Date-Age-Wt. Ratio-Organ Spleen Wt Vol Stomach Wt with Contents Rumen-Reticulum Wt with Contents Rumen-Reticulum Contents Wt (wet) Rumen-Reticulum Contents Wt (oven-dry) Percent Moisture (Rumen- . Retic. Contents) * Slight damage. Collection No. 164 230.0 217.9 7590 166 77 .0 72.7 3610 169 173 142.5 143.0 136.0 . 135.6 5560 9500 6900 3210 4970 8750 5790 2550 3970 7680 756 455 611 1082 87.0 82.2 84.6 85.9 �- 479 Table 8. Measurements (em), Fresh Weights (g), and Volumes (cc) , of Endocrine Glands from 25 Male Deer, 1964. Date-Age-Wt. Ratio-Organ Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt/Body Length Ratio Adrenal (Left) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Adrenal (Right) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Thyroid (Left) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Thyroid (Right) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Thymus (Left) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Thymus (Right) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Pituitary Long Diam Trans Diam Wt Vol 'k Diffuse Collection No. 129 1-14 0-7 131 1-28 4-7 132 2-4 1-8 l33 2-11 4-8 135 2-25 0-8 138 3-17 8-9 .22 .38 .27 .39 .21 .38 3.48 1.27 0.70 1.29 1.28 2.99 2.20 0.88 3.34 2.43 1.30 .0.70 1. 90 1.85 2.73 1.69 1.27 3.65 3.23 1.98 1.47 0.80 1.35 2~43 2.20 0.75 2.87 2.47 3.28 1.40 0.75 1.20 1.18 3.32 2.28 0.82 4.05 3.92 2.32 1.78 0.70 1.56 1.51 2.06 1.75 1.29 3.55 3.10 1.96 1.44 0.75 1.43 1.38 2.64 1.50 1.00 2.71 2.35 2.88 1.00 0.64 0.98 0.89 5.28 1.46 0.57 2.25 2.13 4.35 1.37 0.80 2.31 2.14 4.08 1.67 0.67 2.45 2.07 2.85 1.00 0.54 0.72 0.64 6.89 1.20 0.55 2.17 1.98 2.75 1.28 0.57 1.07 0.89 5.14 1.45 0.71 2.68 2.51 3.58 1.43 0.70 1.95 1.77 4.06 1.56 0.60 2.17 2.01 3.28 1.10 0.50 0.75 0.69 5.60 1.42 0.55 2.07 1.77 4.20 Not found 6.00* 0.60 0.55 0.26 0.28 0.83 0.46 0.77 0.41 7.10 0.60 0.20 1.45 1.25 11.17 -Not found 1.20 0.40 1.93 1.92 3.20 Not found 3.401( 0.60 0.43 0.27 0.20 0.73 0.14 0.64 0.12 6.10 0.50 0.10 0.67 0.43 10.30 Not found 0.30 0.20 0.94 0.93 1.10 7.80 0.38 0.17 1.20 1.00 0.66 0.45 1.10 0.96 0.29 0.26 1.30 1.10 0.90 0.70 0.90 0.70 0.12 0.10 1.20 1.05 0.94 0.56 ��- 481 Table 8. Measurements (em), Fresh Weights (g); and Volumes (cc), of Endocrine Glands from 25 Male Deer, 1964. (continued) Date-Age-Wt. Ratio-Organ Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt/Body Length Ratio Adrenal (Left) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Adrenal (Right) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Thyroid (Left) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Thyroid (Right) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Thynrus (Left) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Thymus (Right) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Pituitary Long Diam Trans Diam Wt Vol Collection No. 154 7-7 10-1 160 8-17 1-2 161 8-25 0-2 162 9-9 1-3 165 9-29 1-3 167 10-12 2-4 .43 .31 .18 .27 .29 .42 2.44 2.10 1.00 3.78 3.67 2.87 1.60 0.66 1.89 2.00 1.17 0.47 1.10 1.08 2.52 1.70 0.70 2.37 2.29 2.28 1.20 0.80 1.89 1.88 2.51 1.55 1.02 2.59 2.57 2.08 1.30 3.95 3.67 2.40 1.60 0.85 2.27 2.15 1.90 1.16 0.40 0.93 0.91 2.50 1.10 0.78 2.12 2.03 3.00 1.30 0.70 1.85 1.84 2.46 1.60 1.00 2.88 2.78 4.95 1.60 0.50 2.52 2.38 5.20 1.27 0.50 2.30 2.24 2.74 1.30 0.60 1.18 1.13 5.66 1.03 0.32 1.45 1.35 4.90 .1.86 0.45 2.10 2.03 6.00 1.40 0.67 3.23 2.92 3.98 1.49 0.66 2.64 2.57 5.00 1.70 0.80 2.87 2.83 3.10 1.39 0.55 1.65 1.63 4.14 1.22 0.46 1.61 1.43 3.40 1.40 0.50 1.72 1.70 4.90 1.40 0.60 3.13 3.05 10.90 1.90 0.49 5.20 5.15 11.0 2.88 1.20 15.25 14.35 9.40 1.85 0.70 7.70 7.27 7.40 1.88 0.50 6.35 6.07 7.88 1.17 0.60 4.35 4.15 3.60 0.60 0.20 0.44 0.42 8.90 0.80 0.10 1.10 0.99 8.00 3.35 0.80 10.96 10.36 6.60 1.87 0.60 6.03 5.66 6.20 1.87 0.90 5.70 5.37 4.20 0.40 0.20 0.75 0.35 3.20 0.50 0.20 0.51 0.46 1.40 1.40 1.23 1.04 1.20 1.20 0.60 0.55. 1.10 0.70 0.35 0.31 1.00 0.80 0.41 0.34 1.00 0.70 0.60 0.37 1.00 0.90 0.60 0.59 �- 482 Table 8. Measurements (em), Fresh Weights (g), and Volumes (cc), of Endocrine Glands from 25 Ma Ie Deer, 1964. (continued) Date-Age-Wt. Ratio-Organ Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt/Body Length Ratio Adrenal (Left) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Adrenal (Right) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Thyroid (Left) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Thyroid (Right) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Thymus (Left) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Thymus (Right) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Pituitary Long Diam Trans Diam Wt Vol * Two tissue attachments. Collection No. 168 10-20 3-4 170 11-10 2-5 171 11-17 6-5 172 11-23 0-5 .49 .37 .47 .24 .28 .35 2.55 1.64 0.60 2.92 2.84 2.50 1.30 0.60 2.30 2.05 2.35 1.38 0.95 2.27 2.01 2.56 1.33 0.60 1.40 2.20 1.60 0.69 2.04 1.63 2.30 1.49 0.60 1.85 1.73 3.20 1.40 0.90 2.97 2.93 2.30 1.70 1.00 2.05 1.87 2.70 1.50 0.80 2.52 2.27 2.43 1.31 0.64 1.30 2.70 1.40 0.90 2.45 2.02 2.90* 1.60 0.80 2.05 .1.94 3.60 1.39 0.50 1.50 1.34 3.80 1.30 0.60 1.79 1.64 4.29 1.20 0.30 2.05 1.82 2.90 0.90 0.48 1.17 1.00 4.80 1.60 0.82 3.52 3.09 4.90 1.60 0.51 2.60 2.40 4.00 1.19 0.60 1.90 1.75 4.40 1.30 0.59 2.43 2.28 6.30 1.10 0.20 1.68 1.55 2.99 1.00 0.49 1.00 0.88 3.60 1.70 0.80 3.11 2.65 3.37 1.76 0.65 2.89 2.78 5.47 0.60 0.30 0.75 0.73 6.40 0.70 0.27 1.30 ·1.11 9.40 1.28 0.19 3.40 3.35 5.56 1.30 0.25 1.05 1.01 2.60 0.60 0.20 0.67 0.30 3.30 0.50 0.10 0.27 0.25 2.80 0.50 0.35 0.45 0.43 4.00 0.90 0.27 0.99 0.97 6.22 0.50 0.38 0.91 0.90 4.08 0.90 0.56 1.13 1.12 1.50. 0.50 0.10 0.33 0.18 3.20 0.40 0.18 0.28 0.26 1.20 1.20 1.00 0.90 1.30 0.90 0.60 0.50 1.46 1.00 0.95 0.85 0.99 0.70 0.24 0.23 1.09 0.78 '0.27 0.12 1.32 0.74 0.50 0.33 174 175 12.,.15 12-23 1-6 2-6 �- 483 Table 9. Measurements (em), Fresh Weights (g) and Volumes (cc), of Endocrine Glands from 25 Female Deer, 1964. Date-Age-Wt. Ratio-Organ Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt/Body Length Ratio Adrenal (Left) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Adrenal (Right) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Thyroid (Left) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Thyroid (Right) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Thymus (Left) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Thymus (Right) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Pituitary Long Diam Trans Diam Wt Vol * Pregnant Collection No. 128* 1-7 1-7 130''(0 134* 1-21 2-18 11-7 9-8 136* 3-3 2-9 137* 3-10 1-9 139 3-24 0-9 .26 .33 .30 .25 .28 .19 2.60 1.19 0.81 1.85 1.82 2.60 1.21 0.96 2.14 1.94 2.90 1.40 0.69 2.37 2.36 2.60 1.50 0.55 1.90 1.66 2.30 1.80 0.72 1.66 1.60 2.35 1.20 0.60 1.59 1.41 2.60 1.25 0.94 1.65 1.64 2.87 1.70 0.85 2.19 2.01 2.60 1.99 0.80 2.09 1.98 2.30 1.46 0.60 1.89 1.64 2.32 Not found 1.46 0.80 1.69 1.58 5.55 1.28 0.51 1.50 1.46 5.48 1.37 0.60 3.19 2.99 5.34 1.39 0.67 3.54 3.38 . 5.00 1.29 0.65 1.80 1.76 4.43 1.45 0.55 2.04 1.84 5.00 1.57 0.70 3.64 3.48 4.80 1.26 0.48 1.44 1.34 2.60 1.00 0.40 0.59 0.53 3.60 1.20 0.70 1.87 1.78 4.67 1.33 0.40 1.48 1.47 2.80 0.96 0.40 0.68 0.57 4.75 Not found 9.40 1.20 0.60 0.20 0.40 0.45 2.34 0.41 2.31 5.23 0.65 0.35 0.73 0.47 4.25 1.20 0.35 0.79 0.77 5.20 0.75 0.30 0.78 0.70 3.34 Not found 7.70 1.00 0.89 0.20 0.40 0.60 2.24 0.59 2.22 4.60 0.60 0.20 0.61 0.37 3.00 0.90 0.30 0.58 0.57 5.64 0.47 0.20 0.41 0.33 1.44 1.60 0.74 0.64 0.95 0.80 0.40 0.16 1.80 0.85 0.35 0.34 0.92 0.80 0.36 0.35 1.10 0.74 0.38 0.32 �- 484 - Table 9. Measurements (em), Fresh Weights (g), and Volumes (cc), of Endocrine Glands from 25 Female Deer, 1964. (continued) Date-Age-Wt. Ratio-Organ Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt/Body Length Ratio Adrenal (Left) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Adrenal (Right) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Thyroid (Left) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Thyroid (Right) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Thymus (Left) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Thymus (Right) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Pituitary Long Diam Trans Diam Wt Vol * + Pregnant Lactating Collection No. 140 4-2 0-10 141* .4-7 10-10 143* 4-21 3-10 146* 5-12 3-11 148* 5-26 1-11 151+ 6-16 9-0 .20 .28 .26 .27 .25 .26 2.10 1.28 0.50 1.22 1.13 2.95 1.55 1.05 4.20 3.80 2.63 1.40 0.60 2.02 1.97 2.55 1.96 0.80 3.12 2.87 3.03 1.16 0.70 2.10 1.95 3.14 1.30 0.90 3.45 3.40 2.25 1.32 0.60 2.05 1.85 3.55 2.18 5.08 8.55 7.62 3.10 1.08 0.61 2.00 1.82 2.75 1.60 0.90 3.43 3.18 2.69 1.45 0.71 2.15 2.00 2.96 1.80 1.00 3.69 3.64 2.99 0.96 0.44 .1.05 1.02 4.69 1.10 0.50 1.36 1.26 4.46 1.30 0.50 1.95 1.74 5.48 1.20 . 0.60 1.95 1.82 3.83 1.27 0.77 L85 1.74 3.60 1.64 0.70 2.37 2.35 2.55 1.37 0.50 1.26 1.15 3.70 1.09 0.45 1.16 1.06 3.95 1.40 0.40 1.40 1.20 5.38 1.50 0.64 2.20 2.05 3.02 1.40 0.79 1.86 1.75 3.90 1.30 0.46 2.15 2.13 5.62 0.46 0.24 0.43 0.33 7.30 1.09 0.36 1.52 1.47 9.40 0.50 0.20 0.90 0.66 9.16 1.09 0.69 3.00 2.78 10.50 0.50 0.29 0.95 0.91 3.28 0.40 0.19 0.22 0.21 6.00 0.80 0.30 1.13 1.02 4.00 0.80 0.40 0.83 0.71 7.40 1.85 0.64 3.29 3.02 5.00 0.90 0.10 0.65 0.64 0.76 0.76 0.30 0.29 1.30 1.10 0.75 0.57 1.30 1.29 0.95 ·0.80 0.95 0.88 0.46 0.31 1.40 1.40 1.45 1.31 1.08 0.88 0.40 0.25 �- 485 - Table 9.--Measurements (cm), Fresh Weights (g), and Volumes (cc), of Endocrine Glands from 25 Female Deer, 1964. (continued) Date-Age-Wt. Ratio-Organ Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt/Body Length Ratio Adrenal (Left). Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Adrenal (Right) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Thyroid (Left) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Thyroid (Right) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Thymus (Left) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Thymus (Right) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Pituitary Long Diam Trans Diam Wt Vol ++ Petechiae present. ** Slight damage. Collection No. 152* 6-23 2-0 153+ 6-30 5-0 15S+ 7-13 3-1 156+ 7-20 2-1 157 7-28 2-1 158 8-4 1-2 .24 .34 .25 .26 .25 .21 2.90 1.50 0.80 2.61 2.59 2.88 1.46 0.73 2.36 2.31 3.11 l.90 0.77 3.31 2.77 l.34 0.68 1.68 2.72 1.40 0.68 1.95 1.77 2.40 1.30 0.55 1.67 1.47 2.84 1.63 0.80 2.66 2.58 2.86 1.56 0.80 2.61 2.59 3.27 1.78 0.60 3.37 3.27 2.40 2.00 0.60 1.93 1.89 2.55 1.50 0.70 2.07 1.93 2.30 1.27 0.60 1.42 1.20 6.60 1.50 0.70 4.46 4.40 5.49 1.00 0.34 1.45 1.34 6.40 1.44 0.56 2.85 2.75 4.90 1.40 0.58 2.42 2.38 5.80 1.30 0.68 3.35 3.02 6.38 1.60 0.49 2.25 2.05 5.60 1.60 0.60 3.71 3.68 4.50 1.40 0.40 1.85 l.85 5.65 1.70 0.62 3.03 2.82 4.20 1.60 0.60 2.64 2.52 4.80 1.40 0.60 3.23 2.90 5.00 1.35 0.40 2.05 1.87 11.0 1.90 0.65 10.1 9.59 9.20 1.37 0.40 4.27 4.26 8.19+1- 7.80 1.20 4.20 1.00 0.34 2.87 12.22 2.73 11.71 11.8 2.79 1.50 14.00 13.07 7.90** 0.96 0.75 3.98 3.68 5.75 1.60 0.40 3.89 3.55 4.10 1.10 0.34 1.15 1.14 5.10+1- 7.21 1.14 1.18 0.30 0.66 1.29 6.19 1.21 5.87 10.50 1.70 0.90 10.27 9.59 5.60*~'c' 1.30 1.10 4.50 4.11 0.90 0.90 0.51 0.49 1.30 1.28 0.97 0.96 1.40 1.10 0.75 0.66 1.00 0.90 0.45 0.31 0.79 0.79 0.42 0.25 1.50 1.18 0.92 0.90 �- 486 Table 9. Measurements (em), Fresh Weights (g), and Volumes (cc), of Endocrine Glands from 25 Female Deer, 1964. (continued) Date-Age-Wt. Ratio-Organ Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt/Body Length Ratio Adrenal (Left) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Adrenal (Right) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Thyroid (Left) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Thyroid (Right) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Thymus (Left) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Thymus (Right) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Pituitary Long Diam Trans Diam Wt Vol Collection No. 159+ 8-11 5-2 031 9-10 0-3 163 9-15 1-3 164 9-21 1-3 166 10-5 0-4 169 11-4 3-5 173+ 12-8 8-6 .29 .16 .28 .31 .20 .33 .31 3.19 1.89 0.50 2.90 1.90 1.00 0.50 1.14 1.11 2.60 1.30 0.66 1.68 1.58 2-.84 1.43 0.59 1.76 2.70 1.20 0.40 1.27 1.07 2.60 1.40 0.66 2.30 2.20 2.20 1.30 0.89 2.11 1.95 3.56 1.53 0.87 2.70 2.00 1.00 0.60 1.08 1.05 2.40 1.23 0.70 1.63 1.50 2.40 1.30 0.65 1.87 1.85 2.50 1.10 0.50 1.23 1.08 2.70 1.40 0.92 2.34 2.21 2.28 1.28 0.77 2.03 1.93 6.10 0.90 0.40 2.30 2.16 3.06 0.65 0.40 0.77 0.58 4.40 1.32 0.60 . 2.77 2.62 4.29 1.20 0.50 2.13 1.92 3.80 0.86 0.37 1.16 0.98 5.10 1.00 0.48 1.66 1.53 6.65 1.40 0.50 2.29 2.04 3.07 1.00 0.45 0.88 0.85 4.10 1.40 0.90 3.14 2.68 4.15 1.46 0.45 2.10 1.86 3.50 1.30 0.45 1.37 1.13 3.90 1.40 0.55 2.01 1.71 4.70 1.75 0.70 2.71 2.61 9.00 0.90 0.20 2.49 2.30 8.30 1.50 0.80 5.30 4.81 8.40 1.50 0.65 6.16 5.60 6.95 1.90 1.06 7.44 6.98 7.60 1.40 0.90 5.71 5.24 7.30 1.00 0.28 1.54 1.38 8.80 0.88 0.25 2.31 2.21 5.40 0.30 0.30 1.65 1.50 3.90 1.34 0.60 2.13 1.93 7.50 1.40 1.10 5.43 4.91 4.50 ·2.40 1.10 6.67 6.55 5.70 1.86 0.86 .4.18 3.68 4.17 1.25 0.30 1.37 1.23 2.87 1.40 0.20 0.91 0.86 1.19 0.59 0.47 0.22 0.80 0.60 0.53 0.37 1.00 0.90 0.58 0.54 1.30 0.80 0.44 0.30 0.80 0.50 0.26 0.22 0.90 0.90 0.52 0.47 1.40 1.20 0.72 0.70 �Table 10. Measurements Date-Age-Wt. (rom) of Teeth and Mandibles from 24 Male Deer, 1964. Ratio-Item Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt Ratio Length of Tooth Rows: Maxillary premolar-molar (Left) Maxillary premolar-molar (Right) Maxillary molar only (Left) Maxillary molar only (Right) Mandibular premolar-molar (Left) Mandibular premolar-molar (Right) Mandibular molar only (Left) Mandibular molar only (Right) Length of Left Mandibular Diastema Length of Left Ramus Collection No. 129 1-14 0-7 .22 131 1-28 4-7 .38 132 2-4 1-8 .27 133 2-11 4-8 .39 135 2-25 0-8 .21 138 3-17 8-9 .38 142 4-8 7-10 .34 144 4-28 9-10 .35 145 5-5 3-11 .32 58.0 58.3 18.5 18.5 54.1 53.9 15.1 16.4 62.9 180 83.9 83.7 48.7 48.5 87.3 88.5 53.8 54.0 83.0 245 75.4 74.9 38.9 39.0 85.0 85.3 50.1 49.3 66.7 216 84.3 84.5 49.8 49.7 9l.4 9l.4 56.6 56.9 78.8 241 56.6 56.4 17.5 17.5 58.1 58.6 22.0 22 1 59.1 174 88.7 88.7 52.8 52.8 95.0 94.7 58.0 58.1 75.3 235 82.7 82.4 48.5 48.0 88.8 88.1 56.2 55.3 78.9 235 77.9 81. 9 45.9 46.8 85.9 85.8 52.6 52.8 87.1 242 84.9 85.1 48.7 48.8 90.4 89.7 54.8 55.8 74.3 234 147 5-19 4-11 .31 149 6-2 3-0 .29 150 6-9 6-0 .37 154 7-7 10-1 .43 160 8-17 1-2 .31 161 8-25 0-2 .18 162 9-9 1-3 .27 165 9-29 1-3 .29 167 10-12 2-4 .42 81.7 81.6 47.7 47.7 86.6 87.3 54.4 54.6 74.3 232 85.9 85.9 50.1 50.0 95.4 95.2 59.1 59.0 73.3 235 86.4 86.9 48.5 48.8 90.4 90.9 56.5 56.2 84.8 258 84.0 84.8 48.2 48.2 88.1 88.7 55.6 54.3 74.6 74.9 34.7 35.5 73.8 73.9 36.0 36.1 67.8 212 4l.4 40.7 74.0 74.2 35.8 36.0 72.5 72.0 36.9 37.0 66.8 210 72.4 72.1 45.7 46.3 69.0 68.9 32.5 33.5 64.4 200 82.6 82.6 47.7 47.6 9l.4 9l. 3 55.0 54.7 73.6 234 e. .j::"" Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt Ratio Length of Tooth Rows: Maxillary premolar-molar (Left) Maxillary premolar-molar (Right) Maxillary molar only (Left) Maxillary molar only (Right) Mandibular premolar-molar (Left) Mandibular premolar-molar (Right) Mandibular molar only (Left) Mandibular molar only (Right) Length of Left Mandibular Diastema Length of Left Ramus 243 36.6 36.6 52.0 148 CP -..l �Table 10. Measurements (mm) of Teeth and Mandibles from 24 Male Deer, 1964. Date-Age-Wt. Ratio-Item Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Evisc·erated Wt Ratio Length of Tooth Rows: Maxillary premolar-molar (Left) Maxillary premolar-molar (Right) Maxillary molar only (Left) Maxillary molar only (Right) Mandibular premolar-molar (Left) Mandibular premolar-molar (Right) Mandibular molar only (Left) Mandibular molar only (Right) Length of Left Mandibular Diastema Length of Left Ramus (continued) Collection No. 168 10-20 3-4 .49 89.4 88.8 51.3 51.1 93.2 90.8 58.4 58.1 72.7 234 * Only first molar and portion of second molar present. 170 11-10 2-5 .37 85.4 86.0 49.1 50.1 92.0 91.7 57.0 . 55.0 68.7 225 171* 11-17 6-5 .47 84.0 83.1 48.9 46.3 59.7 89.8 25.2 53.0 81. 5 244 172 11-23 0-5 .24 56.8 56.6 16.8 16.8 54.4 54.6 16.6 17.0 58.9 180 174 12-15 1-6 .28 68.4 68.4 32.4 32.3 72.4 80.1 38.5 32.4 62.4 213 175 12-23 2-6 .35 84.9 85.8 48.4 49.1 93.0 93.1 58.1 58.3 68.4 231 +=" ():) co �Table 11. Measurements (mm) of Teeth and Mandibles from 25 Female Deer, 1964. Date-Age-Wt. Ratio-Item Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt Ratio Length of Tooth Rows: Maxillary premolar-molar (Left) Maxillary premolar-molar (Right) Maxillary molar only (Left) Maxillary molar only (Right) Mandibular premolar-molar (Left) Mandibular premolar-molar (Right) Mandibular molar only (Left) ~~ndibular molar only (Right) Length of Left Mandibular Diastema Length of Left Ramus Collection No. 128 1-7 1-7 .26 130 1-21 11-7 .33 134 2-18 9-8 ..30 136 3-3 2-9 .25 137 3-10 1-9 .28 66.7 72.4 31.2 37.5 72.3 77 .8 38.5 44.8 65.6 202 81. 9 81.8 46.8 46.5 89.0 87.9 53.9 53.9 73.9 232 81. 5 82.3 51.4 51.9 78.4 78.9 45.1 78.1 74.4 218 85.4 85.3 47.6 48.1 92.2 92.1 54.8 55.0 68.0 214 83.5 83.4 47.5 46.3 84.3 84.6 48.6 49.1 68.3 223 139 3-24 0-9 .19 61. 7 140 4-2 0-10 .20 141 4-7 10-10 .28 59.9 60.2 19.0 19.0 60.2 60.4 24.1 23.4 61.3 189 79.3 79.0 45.5 44.0 86.6 87.2 54.4 55.1 70.0 223 -I=" Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt Ratio Length of Tooth Rows: Maxillary premolar-molar (Left) Maxillary premolar-molar (Right) Maxillary molar only (Left) Maxillary molar only (Right) Mandibular premolar-molar (Left) Mandibular premolar-molar (Right) Mandibular molar only (Left) Mandibular molar only (Right) Length of Left Mandibular Diastema Length of Left Ramus 143 4-21 3-10 .26 146 5-12 3-11 .27 148 5-26 1-11 .25 151 6-16 9-0 .26 152 6-232-0 .24 153 6-30 5-0 .34 155 7-13 3-1 .25 156 7-20 2-1 .26 84.8 84.1 48.4 48.4 90.4 90.4 55.4 57.2 73.9 218 83.8 83.4 48.7 48.4 92.5 91.3 59.4 58.6 63.8 220 80.6 80.7 47.6 46.0 90.0 89.5 56.6 56.2 67.9 212 80.5 81. 6 47.0 47.0 87.3 87.2 54.0 54.2 69.7 221 82.0 80.9 48.4 47.3 89.0 89.0 55.3 55.2 60.0 204 80.6 79.8 47.1 46.6 87.8 87.7 54.0 53.9 72.8 230 83.6 83.8 48.4 48.4 93.4 93.8 56.5 56.3 67.8 224 82.2 82.4 46.6 46.8 86.6 86.2 52.5 52.6 68.7 216 (B �Table 11. Measurements Date-Age-Wt. (rom) of Teeth and Mandibles from 25 Female Deer, 1964. Ratio-Item Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt Ratio Length of Tooth Rows: Maxillary premolar-molar (Left) Maxillary premolar-molar (Right) Maxillary molar only (Left) Maxillary molar only (Right) Mandibular premolar-molar (Left) Mandibular premolar-molar (Right) Mandibular molar only (Left) Mandibular molar only (Right) Length of Left Mandibular Diastema Length of Left Ramus (continued) Collection No. 157 7-28 2-1 .25 73.7 73.8 34.0 33.6 74.9 74.9 35.0 35.5 66.9 205 158 8-4 1-2 .21 159 8-11 5-2 .29 69.9 70.0 34.0 33.8 68.7 68.9 33.3 33.3 63.7 198 83.8 83.4 47.7 46.9 89.1 89.0 53.8 52.6 60.8 212 031 9-10 0-3 .16 - - - - 47.5 47.1 12.3 12.4 49.3 152 163 9-15 1-3 .28 70.8 70.7 33.5 33.5 69.6 69.8 37.7 37.7 66.9 210 164 9-21 1-3 .31 75.4 75.1 36.0 36.2 73.4 73.0 36.6 36.5 70.6 212 166 10-5 0-4 .20 52.8 53.7 27.9 28.4 53.4 53.4 15.7 16.3 56.1 172 169 11-4 3-5 .33 83.8 84.0 48.6 48.8 88.7 88.2 55.8 55.1 72.6 230 173 12-8 8-6 .31 84.1 83.8 48.8 47.9 90.7 90.5 57.5 57.3 63.7 224 +=" '8 �Table 12. Indices of Physical Condition and Bone Structure in 29 Male Mule Deer, 1964. Date-Est. Age-Index Collection No. 131 133 135 132 138 129 Collection Date 2-11 2-25 3-17 (Month-Day) 1-14 1-28 2-4 Estimated Age 0-8 8-9 (Year-Month) 1-8 4-8 0-7 4-7 Eviscerated Wt/ .38 .39 .21 Body Length Ratio .22 .38 .27 Total Kidney Fat 6.9 6.5 20.6 4.2 6.2 9.2 (Percent)+ Depth of Back Fat o o o o o o (mm)+ Femur Marrow Fat 64.2 77 .0 60.7 40.0 (Percent)-H83.8 75.6 5R7/10 5R8/10 5R6/10 5R6/8 5R8/10 2.5R7/8 Femur Marrow Co1or* Femur Marrow Texture*Est. Percent Fat, Skinned 4.8 8.9 5.6 6.5 3.2 9.1 Eviscerated Carcass** .58 .33 .35 .27 .66 Condition Ratio A+* .84 1.09 3.71 2.01 2.67 5.52 6.33 Condition Ratio B*+ Right Meta carpal 216 191 210 203 222 185 Length (mm) 19.6 15.9 15.3 19.3 18.3 20.6 Width (nun) 109 116 69 87 124 Fresh Weight (g) 72 59.7 43.7 68.0 48.6 85.9 38.1 Percent of Brain Wt 024 025 142 027 144 4-6 4-7 4-8 4-15 4-28 1-10 0-10 7-10 0-10 9-10 .34 5.7 - .35 4.2 4.1 o 0-0 .j::" 18.9 20.9 14.5 5R5/10 G.W. 29.2 11.3 5R6/10 G.W. 2.0 .08 .12 6.1 .26 .29 215 19.0 224 21.3 141 72.0 III 49.5 + (Riney 1955) -H- (Ass. Agric. Chemists 1960) * Munsell 1929-1960 *- G-ge1atinous, G.W.-gelatinous, watery; F-firm; N.F.-not firm ** (Behnke 1962) +* Product of 0.1 of percentages of kidney fat and skinned, eviscerated carcass fat *+ Product of 0.1 of percentages of kidney fat; skinned, eviscerated carcass fat and femur marrow fat \0 I-' �Table 12. Indices of Physical Condition and Bone Structure in 29 Male Mule Deer, 1964. Date-Est. Age-Index Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt/ Body Length Ratio Total Kidney Fat (Percent) Depth of Back Fat (rom) Femur Marrow Fat (Percent) (continued) Collection No. 145 147 029 149 150 154 030 160 161 162 165 5-5 5-19 5-20 6-2 6-9 7-7 7-29 8-17 8-25 9-9 9-29 3-11 4-11 0-11 3-0 6-0 10-1 1-1 1-2 0-2 1-3 1-3 .32 .31 .29 .37 .43 - .31 .18 .27 .29 6.4 5.9 - 5.7 3.5 11.2 - 15.7 6.7 11.8 37.5 1 0 - 0 0 14 - 7 0 2 17 12.7 2.5 29.2 20.1 16.8 84.9 52.1 71.3 42.4 77.9 89.2 10R7/1O G.W. - 5R7/10 G.W. 5R7/8 G. 5R9/6 F. Femur Marrow Color 5R5/12 Femur Marrow Texture G.W. Est. Percent Fat, Skinned Eviscerated Carcass 3.1 Condition Ratio A .20 Condition Ratio B .25 Right Meta carpal Length (rrrrn) 222 Width (rrrrn) 19.0 Fresh Weight (g) 114 Percent of Brain Wt 53.6 2.8 .17 .04 215 18.7 113 50.8 - - - - - - 2.2 .13 .25 212 17.7 102 48.2 4.8 .17 .28 216 20.4 122 59.8 6.9 .77 6.56 231 21.4 138 75.8 - - - - - 5R6/10 5R3/10 F. G.W. 5R6/10 5R7/4 N.F. F. .j::"" \0 5.3 .83 5.93 212 18.1 108 53.1 6.9 .46 1.96 164 14.3 54 33.9 7.7 .91 7.08 212 16.7 88 44.2 9.2 3.45 30.77 210 16.5 90 50.8 f\) �Table 12. Indices of Physical Condition and Bone Structure in 29 Male Mule Deer, 1964. Date-Est. Age-Index Collection Date (Month-Day) Estima ted Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt/ Body Length Ratio Total Kidney Fat (Percent) Depth of Back Fat (nun) Femur Marrow Fat (Percent) Femur Marrow Color Femur Marrow Texture Est. Percent Fat, Skinned Eviscerated Carcass Condition Ratio A Condition Ratio B Right Meta carpal Length (nun) Width (nun) Fresh Weight (g) Percent of Brain Wt (continued) Collection No. 167 168 170 171 172 174___ 175 10-12 10-20 11-10 11-17 11-23 12-15 12-23 2-4 3-4 2-5 6-5 0~5 1-6 2-6 .42 .49 .37 .47 .24 .28 .35 69.5 123.5 61. 3 43.3 14.3 25.8 12.9 40 39 24 6 0 1 0 84.9 5R9/6 F 94.2 5R10/1 F 88.9 5R7/10 F 90.6 5R8/10 F 70.4 90.2 80.1 5R8/8 5R9/4 5R6/10 F N.F. 11.4 7.92 67.27 24.8 30.63 288.52 . 14.6 8.95 79.56 11.9 5.02 45.51 2.3 .33 2.32 5.7 1.47 13.26 3.9 .50 4.03 213 19.3 115 65.3 204 19.4 110 52.9 222 18.8 111 58.4 211 19.4 113 52.3 192 16.0 80 46.5 205 18.0 95 50.3 227 19.9 116 58.6 - .j::"" (B �Table 13. Indices of Physical Condition and Bone Structure in 26 Female Mule Deer, 1964. Date-Est. Age-Index 128 Collection Date (Month-Day) 1-7 Estimated Age (Year-Month) 1-7 Eviscerated Wt/ Body Length Ratio .26 Total Kidney Fat (Percent)+ 18.2 Depth of Back Fat (rrnn)+ o Femur Marrow Fat (Percent)-f+ 84.3 Femur Marrow Co1or* SR6/10 Femur Marrow Texture*Est. Percent Fat, Skinned Eviscerated Carcass** S.6 1.02 Condition Ratio A+* Condition Ratio B*+ 8.S9 Right Meta carpal Length (rrnn) 203 Width (mm) 17.2 Fresh Weight (g) 84 Percent of Brain Wt 4S.9 + ++ * *** +* *+ Collection No. 130 134 136 137 139 140 141 028 143 146 1-21 2-18 3-3 3-10 3-24 4-2 4-7 4-16 4-21 5-12 11-7 9-8 2-9 1-9 0-9 0-10 10-10 2-10 3-10 3-11 .33 .30 .2S .28 .19 .20 .28 .29 .26 .27 43.8 23.2' 16.2 19.8 8.3 9.0 30.2 9 S o 3 o o 2 29.5 7.9 10.4 o o 90.1 SR9/2 89.9 SR9/4 89.7 SR9/4 71.7 23.9 19.6 91.4 83.7 2.SRS/I0 SR4.S/12 SRS/I0 SR9/4 G. G.W. 47.0 35.1 5R7/8 5R5/10 G. 10.8 4.73 42.62 12.9 2.99 26.91 S.9 .96 8.S7 12.2 2.42 17.32 4.7 .37 1.7S 209 17.8 102 S1.0 203 17.6 88 42.7· 202 16.4 82 44.4 20S 18.0 88 41.3 4.9 .41 .97 179 13.7 S9 30.6 2.9 .26 .SI 202 lS.4 75 41.8 12.1 3.65 33.40 208 17.6 91 42.S (Riney 1955) (Assn. Agric. Chemists 1960) (Munsell 1929-1960) G. - gelatinous; G.W. - gelatinous, watery; F. - firm; N.F. - not firm (Behnke 1962) Product of 0.1 fat percentages of kidneys and the skinned, eviscer~ted carcass. Product of 0.1 fat percentages of kidneys; skinned, eviscerated carcass; and femur marrow. 220 16.4 87 50.2 3.9 .41 1.42 208 16.9 88 40.6 \5 T �Table 13. Indices of Physical Condition and Bone Structure in 26 Female Mule Deer, 1964. Date-Est. Age-Index 148 Collection Date (Month-Day) 5-26 Estimated Age (Year-Month) 1-11 Eviscerated Wt/ Body Length Ratio .25 Total Kidney Fat (Percent) 4.6 Depth of Back Fat 0 Femur Marrow Fat (Percent) 24.2 Femur Marrow Color 5R6/10 Femur Marrow Texture G. Est. Percent Fat, Skinned Eviscerated Carcass 5.6 Condition Ratio A .26 Condition Ratio B .62 Right Meta carpal Length (mm) 209 Width (mm) 17.7 Fresh Weight (g) 89 Percent of Brain Wt 52.6 (continue d) Collection No. 151 152 153 155 156 157 158 159. 031 163 6-16 6-23 6-30 7-13 7-20 7-28 8-4 8-11 9-10 9-15 9-0 2-0 5-0 3-1 2-1 2-1 1-2 5-2 0-3 1-3 .26 .24 .34 .25 .26 .25 .21 .29 .16 .28 5.9 0 13.1 0 6.2 0 5.6 0 8.1 0 3.4 0 5.1 0 9.2 0 7.3 10.9 10R8/8 12.8 5R3/10 33;6 5R3/10 G. 54.8 78.3 5R4/10 5R8/10 N.F. F. G. G. 26.6 45.9 78.2 5R7/10 5R7/10 5R8/6 G. F. 4.5 .27 .29 5.2 .68 3.73 0.0 0.0 0.0 2.6 .21 .71 4.8 .16 .43 203 17.4 88 46.8 199 15.5 71 41. 6 7.7 .48 3.74 211 17.9 98 54.2 221 17.6 100 53.5 203 17.4 83 48.9 196 16.9 80 43.5 4.5 .23 1.05 194 14.4 66 33.0 2.8 .26 2.01 202 16.5 79 47.3 - 40.0 6 61.1 86.3 5R7/7 5R8/4 - - 5.8 2.32 20.02 163 12.4 50 41.3 188 "16.4 82 42.7 -r=\0 V1 �Table 13. Indices of Physical Condition and Bone Structure in 26 Female Mule Deer, 1964. Date-Est. Age-Index Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt/ Body Length Ratio Total Kidney Fat (Percent) Depth of Back Fat Femur Marrow Fat (Percent) Femur Marrow Color Femur Marrow Texture Est. Percent Fat, Skinned Eviscerated Carcass Condition Ratio A Condition Ratio B Right Meta carpal Length (nun) Width (nun) Fresh Weight (g) Percent of Brain Wt (continued) Collection No. 164 166 169 173 9-21 10-5 11-4 12-8 1-3 0-4 3-5 8-6 .31 .20 .33 .31 29.7 6 17.7 0 49.2 19 20.3 1 78.4 5R7/8 F. 74.7 5R7/9 F. 93.1 5R9/4 F. 91.4 5R8/4 F. 3.9 1.16 9.08 7.8 1.3810.31 12.6 6.20 57.71 8.2 1.66 15.21 182 15.7 67 42.4 209 17 .0 88 44.2 220 16.8 97 53.9 204 17.8 99 53.2 .p\0 0\ �- 497 Table 14. Seasonal Fluctuations in Mean Age and Condition Indices of 122 Mule Deer Sampled from June 13, 1962 to December 23, 1964 • .Estimated ages range from 17 days to 139 months. Dec.-Jan.February March-Apri1- June-Ju1y- Sept.-Oct.May August November SD Conf.Limit (P=.05) 16 28.8 19.7 18.3-39.2 11 59.2 38.0 33.7-84.7 13 43.4 38.5 20.2-66.6 17 28.0 8.0 23.9-32.1 Female N X SD Conf.Limit (P=.05) 12 82.8 37.9 58.6-106.9 14 58.8 44.7 33.0-84.6 23 34.3 23.6 24.1-44.5 16 38.4 39.2 17.5-59.3 Male N X SD Conf.Limit (P=.05) 16 6.9 3.1 5.2-8.5 11 5.7 2.4 4.1-7.3 13 8.7 5.3 5.5-11.9 17 13.3 6.4 9.9-16.6 Female N 12 11.5 3.0 9.6-13.4 14 7.5 3.3 5.5-9.4 23 7.4 4.1 5.7-9.2 16 11.5 4.5 9.1-13.8 16 12.2 6.9 8.5-15.9 11 7.0 2.6 5.3-8.7 13 16.4 17.3 5.9-26.9 17 47.9 30.3 32.3-63.5 12 30.7 16.0 20.6-40.9 14 14.1 9.9 8.4-19.8 23 9.2 5.8 6.7-11.7 16 53.4 51. 5 25.9-80.8 16 71.0 15.3 62.9-79.2 11 27.2 25.3 10.2-44.2 13 63.7 27.7 46.9-80.4 17 85.0 34.0 67.5-102.5 12 90.8 2.9 89.9-92.7 14 55.7 30.1 38.4-73.1 23 51.2 26.4 39.8-62.6 16 85.0 11.2 79.0-90.9 Value or Index Sex Statistic Est. Age (Months)~~ Male N Percent Fat, Skinned, Eviscerated Car cass s+ X X SD Conf.Limit (P=.05) Percent Fat, Tota 1 Kidney+ Male N X SD Conf.Limit (P=.05) Female N X SD Conf .Limit (P=.05) Male Percent Fat, Femur Marrow-l+ N X SD Conf.Limit (P=.05) Female N X SD Conf .Limit (P=.05) �- 498 Table 14. Seasonal Fluctuations in Mean Age and Condition Indices of 122 Mule Deer Sampled from June 13, 1962 to December 23, 1964. Estimated ages range from 17 days to 139 months. (continued) . Value or Index Sex Condition Ratio A+* Male Statistic Dec. -Jan.February March-April- June-Ju1y- Sept.-Oct.May August November N 16 11 X SD Conf.Limit (P=.05) Female N X SD Conf .Limit (P=.05) * *+ + ++ +* .79 .47 .53-1.05 .42 .25 .24-.60 12 3.69 2.32 2.22-5.16 14 2.62 3.89 .37-4.87 (Robinette et a1 1957) (Behnke 1962) (Riney 1955) (Assn. Agric. Chern. 1960) Product of 0.1 values of carcass and kidney fat percentages. 13 17 2.03 7.73 3.79 7.74 -.26-4.32 3.7-11.7 23 16 .76 7.47 .89 10.41 .37-1.15 1.93-13.01 �- 499 Table 15. Annual Fluctuations in Four Selected Condition Indices in Mule Deer, 1962-63-64. Index Sex Statistic 1962 1963 1964 Percent Fat, Skinned Eviscerated Carcass Male N Too few in sample 22 7.76 4.0-17.4 3.53 45.5 6.2-9.3 24 7.07 2.0-24.8 5.00 70.8 4.9-9.2 Too few in sample 26 10.12 2.9-19.7 3.97 39.2 8.5-11.7 24 6.33 0.0-12.9 3.52 55.5 4.8-7.8 20 21.19 2.2-71.0 22.73 107.3 10.6-31.8 22 19.26 6.3-97.4 20.30 105.4 10.3-28.3 25 20.90 3.5-123.5 27.86 133.3 9.4-32.4 30 23.09 3.2-69.5 17.09 73.9 16.7-29.5 26 36.02 5.6-209.3 46.19 128.2 17.4-54.7 26 16.99 3.4-49.2 12.96 76.3 11.8-22.2 19 65.64 6.4-94.1 27.70 42.2 52.3-78.9 22 63.33 4.6-94.3 28.29 44.7 50.8-75.9 29 54.98 2.5-94.2 30.84 56.1 43.2-66.7 30 79.99 19.1-97.0 20.09 25.1 72.5-87.5 29 70.79 10.0-95.8 25.74 36.4 61.0-80.6 26 60.64 10.9-93.1 28.72 47.4 49.0-72.2 Not Calculated 22 6.17 5.0-7.4 0.65 10.5 5.9-6.5 24 5.67 4.5-6.8 0.64 11.5 5.4-5.9 X Range SD Coef. Variation (%) Conf. Limit (P=.05) Female N X Range SD Coef. Variation (%) Conf. Limit (P=.05) Percent Fat, Total Kidney Male N X Range SD Coef. Variation (%) Cont. Limit (P=.05) Female N X .Range SD Coef. Variation (%) Conf. Limit (P=.05) Percent Fat, Femur Marrow Male N X Range SD Coef. Variation (%) Conf. Limit (P=.05) Female N X Range SD Coef. Variation (%) Conf. Limit (P=.05) Blood Serum Protein (g/lOO ml) Male N X Range SD Coef. Variation (%) Conf. Limit (P=.05) �- 500 - Table 15. Index Annual Fluctuations in Four Selected Condition Indices in Mule Deer, 1962-63-64. (continued) Sex Statistic 1962 1963 1964 Female N Not Calculated 26 6.01 4.6-7.7 0.82 13.7 5.7-6.3 22 5.39 4.5-6.4 0.51 9.5 5.2-5.6 X Range SD Coef. Variation (%) Conf. Limit (P=.05) �- 501 - Table 16. Statistical Description of Seasonal Fluctuations in Mean Adrenal Ascorbic Acid Levels (ug/g)* from 121 Mule Deer Sampled from April 26, 1962 to . December 23, 1964. Estimated ages+ range from 17 days to 143 months. Sex and Statistic Dec.-Jan. February March-April May June-July August Sept.-Oct. November Male: N X SD Conf .Limit (P=.05) Coef. Variation (%) 16 1043.1 311.6 877.1-1209.1 29.9 12 795.0 342.4 577 .5-1012.5. 43.1 14 820.4 403.3 587.6-1053.2 49.2 16 1045.6 233.4 921.3-1170.0 22.3 12 945.4 356.5 718.9-1171. 9 37.7 18 885.3 253.3 759~3-1011.2 28.6 17 751.5 352.4 570.3-932.7 46.9 16 956.6 337.9 776.5-1136.6 35.3 Female: N X SD Conf.Limit (P=.05) Coef. Variation (%) * + (Maicke1 1960) (Robinette et a1 1957; Haugen and Speake 1958) � https://cpw.cvlcollections.org/files/original/b980ff0eb323edd0745afe10e931b64e.pdf 0b446cce4cff080db3819514e43c14bb PDF Text Text - 503 JOB COMPLETION RESEARCH State of C~O~LO~RAD~~O~ Project No. W-l05-R-5 Work Plan No. PROJECT SEGMENT _ An Ecological Investigation of the Cache la Poudre Deer Herd, Colorado 5 Physiological ----~~------------------- Job No. 3 Period Covered: January, Personnel: REPORT Studies Harvest Analysis 1964 - December, Allen E. Anderson 1964 and Dean E. Medin ABSTRACT The 1964 estimates of Unit 19 hunting pressure, kill, and success ratio extrapolated from hunter report card returns continued the substantial decline which began in 1961. As compared to 1964, -t.he 1959 estimates show that about twice as many hunters harvested about 4 times the number of deer and were about twice as successful. Estimates of the 1964 male:female ratios based on hunter report card returns were similar to check station ratios but there was a significant (P<.02) difference in fawn:female ratios. There were 554, Unit 19 mule deer checked during the 5 day, 1964 season. Chi square analyses of the 1963-64 age structures rev~aled significant (P<.OOl) changes; an increase in 28-30 month-old males and females and a decrease in 16-18 month-old males. Female yearlings comprised 26.5 percent of the adult female sample in 1964 (net productivity index) which did not differ significantly (P<.OS) from the 1963 value of 30.0 percent. During 1961-64, however, there was a significant (P<.OOl) increase in the proportion of 16-52 month-old females which may reflect an unusually high survival of the 1963 yearling age class. There were no significant differences (P<.OS) in either male or female age structures harvested during the first two and the last two days of the 1964 season. The overall (1961-64) harvest sex ratio of fawns was 119:100 which differed significantly (P<.OS) from equality but the annual samples did not, even though males predominated during each of the 4 years. Approximate 90 percent confidence limits computed about harvest sex ratios (1961-64) for all age classes suggest extreme variability in ratio samples. Sex ratios samples from 4 maximum harvest subunits did not differ significantly for the first 4 age classes. �- 504 - Preliminary analyses of hunting effort expressed as the mean number of hours hunted (± the standard deviation) by successful hunters showed that male deer required 5.50 5.19 hours and females, 5.00 5.02 hours of hunting effort. There did not appear to be detectable differences in mean hunting effort between sexes, age classes, or subunits. However, small sample sizes and the extreme variability of this index restrict interpretation to subunits 4 and 5. ± ± The 1964 subunit harvest density indices ranged from .15 deer per square mile (subunit 8) to 4.95 deer per square mile (subunit 4). These values compare closely to those in 1963 and reflect the relative accessibility, amounts of cover, and perhaps population densities of these subunits. The 1964 antler measurements are tabulated and described statistically. The results of all antler data analyses will be described in the 1965 report. Acknowledgements: Mr. David C. Bowden of the Colorado State University Statistics Laboratory supervised or performed most of the analyses and tabulations. 'We would like to thank all individuals who assisted at the check station. Recommendations: Continue this job through 1965, begin planning the final analysis, and review the recent literature in preparation for the final report. Objectives: (1) Determine the age and sex structure of the deer herd kill to provide estimates of: (a) net productivity (percent of female yearlings in the kill), and (b) the effects of hunting regulations. (2) Locate the distribution of the kill by subunit to relate the age and sex structure of the kill to elevationa1 levels and harvest intensity. (3) Measure relevant physical characteristics of the deer killed to provide an index of herd response to food quality. Procedures: All data were obtained at the check station (Fig. 1) by Dean E. Medin and the writer. The check station operated continuously throughout the 5 day season, October 24 - 28, 1964, inclusive. All methodology has been described in detail previously (Anderson 1965:196) and will not be repeated here. �0 M sa :., s IJ) '0 II) ?: ,... a: b.O ~ ~ - 505 $ - -..... - ~g -.--'--- -----------~O~rr_T_----------·------------------~~----------~ If.I O+' Q) III .s::+, o • ~ O· 'M +' III +' If.I ~ Q) 0 :Q 0 .0 "d 0) ~ +' 'g 0) I .g 0'\ r-I +' '8 ~ • Q) r-I M ~ 'M rx. ��- 507 HARVEST ANALYSIS Allen E. Anderson 'Total Harvest Estimates and Check Station Samples.--The Unit 19 mule deer harvests as estimated from the hunter report card returns (1959-64) are presented in Table 1. The number of hunters, deer killed, and hunter success estimate for 1964, all exhibit and extend the annual decline which began in 1961. As compared to 1964, the 1959 estimates show that about twice as many hunters killed about four times as many deer and were about twice as successful. The check station data also reflects this annual decline in harvest level (Tables 2 and 4). Analysis of ma1e:fema1e:fawn ratios (Table 3) show that in 1964, check station and hunter report card ma1e:fema1e ratios were similar but fawn:fema1e ratios differed significantly (P<.02). Harvest by Day of Season In 1964, about 90 percent of the harvest was killed during the first two days of the 5 day season (Table 5). The relatively short season which included only one weekend is believed to be responsible for this relatively high (Table 4) percentage. Male and female deer of all age classes combined were killed in about equal numbers during the first day of the season, females predominated during the second day, and males during the last two days (Table 5). The total check station sample of 554 mule deer consisted of 274 males and 280 females (98:100) which does not differ significantly (P<.05) from equality. Age Structure, 1960-64, Inclusive Tabular sunnnary.--The 1964 sample of the Unit 19 mule deer harvest with fawns included is presented in Table 6 and without fawns in Table 7. Female age structure samples (1961-62-63-64) are summarized in Table 8. Male age structure samples (1960-61-62-63-64) are sunnnarized in Table 9. Net productivity index.--These values (Table 8) have ranged from 22.4 percent (1962) to 30.0 percent (1963) for the only significant (P<.05) difference recorded since 1961. The 26.5 percent recorded in 1964 (Table 7), moreover, does not differ significantly (P<.05) from the 1963 index (Table 10). The significant increase in the 1963 female yearling index, however, may be reflected in the highly significant (P<.OOl) increase in the 28-30 month-old age class comprising the 1964 sample (Table 11). This age class increase in 1964 is probably an important factor in the significantly (P<.OOl) larger proportion of 16-52 month-old females sampled in 1964 (Table 12). Thus, there appears to be a trend to a larger proportion of younger females. Male age structure.--The proportion of 16-18 month-old males decreased significantly (P<.OOl) from 1963 to 1964 (Table 9). The 28-30 month-old class, on the other hand, made a significant (P<.OOl) increase during the"same period. The 16-52 month-old component percentage also increased but significance tests have not been performed on these data. �- 508 - Table 1.--The number of hunters, harvests, and the success ratios on Unit 19 as estimated from hunter report card returns, 1959-64, inclusive. Year 1959 1960* 1961 1962 1963 1964 * No. Hunters 3,129 1,723 2,483 2,308 1,986 1 773 Total Deer Kill 2,356 920 1,526 1,259 846 692 Success Ratio .75 .53 .61 .55 .43 .39 Males with antlers only; during all other years a hunters '-choice, 1 deer per hunter regulation prevailed. Data taken from unauthored, undated, mimeographed releases from the Division of Game Management. Table 2.--A comparison of the samples obtained at the check station and the total harvest estimated from hunter report card returns, 1960-61-62-63-64. Year Sample Male Female Fawn Total 1960 Check station Report card+ 463 920 1961 Check station Report card+ 361 474 484 215 215 298 1,060 1,526 1962 Check station Report card+ 321 424 453 641 203 194 927 1,259 1963 Check statil)n Report card+ 207 292 190 442 88 112 485 846 1964 Check station Report card+ 212 260 228 324 114 108 554 692 Totals Check station Report card+ 1,564 2,370 1,355 1,622 620 712 3,489 5,243 + 463 920 Based on various, undated, mimeographed releases from the Divison of Game Management. �- 509 - Table 3.--Chi square analysis of ma1e:fema1e:fawn ratios obtained at the check station with those estimated from hunter report card returns, 1961-62-63-64. GM. Unit 19 SamI!le Check station Report card Ratios 100 Male 75 63 Per Females Fawn 44 40 1962 Check station Report card 71 66 45 30 no yes* 1963 Check station Report card 109 66 22 55 yes* no 1964 Check station ReI!ort card 93 80 50 33 no yes+ Year 1961 * Significant at P<.OOl + Significant at P<.02 . Ratios Significant1~ Different {P<.05) Fawn Male no no �Table 4.--The unit 19 mule deer harvest by day of season as sampled at the check station, 1960-61-62-63-64.* Day of Season 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1960 1961 Number Percent Number Percent Checked of Total Checked of Total 160 34.6 491 47.1 118 25.5 92 8.8 18 3.9 28 2.7 14 3.0 26 2.5 1.3 1.9 6 20 1.8 3 0.7 19 1.7 1.5 8 16 39 8.4 127 12.2 33 7.1 157 15.1 1.1 2 0.4 11 o 0.0 32 3.1 o 0.0 23 2.2 1.5 7 3 0.7 28 6.2 24 5.0 Totals * Seasons: 463 1960 1961 1962 1963 1964 100.0 Oct. Oct. Oct. Oct. Oct. 1,042 100.0 1962 Number Percent Checked of Total 51.7 505 248 25.4 1.8 18 1.6 16 22 2.3 o 0.0 o 0.0 98 10.0 70 7.2 -- + 1963 Number Percent Checked of Total 258 48.9 115 21.9 19 3.6 6 1.1 6 1.1 7 1.3 5 0.9 51 9.7 61 11.6 -- + 1964 Number Percent Checked of Total 372 67.2 128 23.1 16 2.9 16 2.9 22 3.9 \.n b 927 100.0 528 100.0 554 22--Nov. 6 inclusive; bucks only, fawns excluded, 1 deer per hunter. 28--Nov. 8 inclusive; hunters' choice, 1 deer per hunter. 27--Nov. 5 inclusive; hunters' choice, 1 deer per hunter. 26--Nov. 4 inclusive; hunters' choice, 1 deer per hunter. 24--0ct. 28 inclusive; hunters' choice, 1 deer per hunter. + Check station not in operation during last day of season. 100.0 �- 511 - . Table 5.--The unit 19 mule deer harvest by sex and by day of kill as sampled at the check station, 1964. Date of Kill Oct. 24 Oct. 25 Oct. 26 Oct. 27 Oct. 28 Total Female % of Total 66.1 24.7 3.9 2.1 3.2 100.0 Male No. 187 59 5 10 13 274 % of Total 68.2 21.5 1.8 3.7 4.8 100.0 No. 185 69 11 6 9 280 Total No. 372 128 16 16 22 554 % of Total 67.1 23.1 2.9 2.9 4.0 100.0 Table 6.--Age structure of 535 mule deer sampled at the check station, fawns included, 1964. Age Class ~Months2~( 4-6 16-18 28-30 40-52 64-76 88-100 112+ Total Female Male No. 62 95 77 21 % of Total 23.1 35.4 28.7 7.8 2.6 1.9 .4 100.0 7 5 1 268 % of Total No. 52 57 65 49 14 10 20 267 19.5 21.3 24.3 18.4 5.2 3.7 7.5 100.0 Sexes Combined No. % of Total 21.3 114 28.4 152 26.5 142 13.1 70 3.9 21 2.8 15 3.9 21 100.0 535 + Six male and 13 female deer could not be assigned to age classes because of missing heads or lower jaws. ~(Estimated age according to Robinette et a1. 1957 in this and all other tables. Table 7.--Age structure of 421 mule deer sampled at the check station, fawns excluded, 1964. Age Class ~Months2 16-18 28-30 40-52 64-76 88-100 112+ Total Female Male No. 95 77 21 7 5 1 206 % of Total 46.1 37.3 10.2 3.4 2.4 0.5 100.0 No. 57 65 49 14 10 20 21.5 % of Total 26.5 30.2 22.8 6.5 4.7 9.3 100.0 Sexes Combined % of Total No. 36.1 152 33.7 142 16.6 70 4.9 21 3.6 15 5.0 21 100.0 421 �- 512 - Table 8.--Age structure of 1,581 female mule deer sampled at the check station, 1961-62-63-64. Est. Age {Months} No. % No. % No. % No. % 4-6 94 16.3 94 18.6 41 17.8 52 19.5 16-18 116 20.0 92 18.2 57 24.7 57 21.3 28-30 100 17.3 52 10.3 24 10.4 65 24.3 40 -52 128 22.1 119 23.6 51 22.0 49 18.4 64-76 56 9.7 42 8.3 25 10.8 14 5.2 88-100 42 7.3 42 8.3 21 9.1 10 3.7 112+ 42 7.3 64 12.7 12 5.2 20 7.5 578 100.0 505 100.0 231 100.0 267 100.0 1961 1962 1963 1964 .' Total Fawns Excluded 16-18','( 116 24.0 92 22.4 57 30.0 57 26.5 28-30 100 20.6 52 12.7 24 12.6 65 30.2 40-52 128 26.0 119 28.9 51 26.8 49 22.8 64-76 56 11.6 42 10.2 25 13.2 14 6.5 88-100 42 8.7 42 10.2 21 11.1 10 4.7 112+ 42 8.7 64 15.6 12 6.3 20 9.3 484 100.0 411 100.0 190 100.0 215 100.0 Total * The underlined percentages are regarded as indices of net productivity. �- 513 - Table 9.--Age structure of 1,871 male mule deer sampled at the check station" 1960-61-62-63-64. Est. Age {Months} 1960 No. % 4-6 1961 No. % 1962 No. % 1963 No. % 1964 No. % 121 25.1 109 26.0 47 18.5 62 23.1 16-18 208 46.6 191 39.1 173 41.2 123 48.4 95 35.4 28-30 95 21.3 60 12.4 66 15.7 30 11.8 77 28.7 40-52 84 18.6 67 13.9 47 11.2 33 12.9 21 7.8 64-76 41 9.2 . 25 5.2 9 2.1 10 3.9 7 2.6 88-100 15 3.4 13 2.7 11 2.6 11 4.3 5 1.9 112+ 4 0.9 5 1.1 5 1.2 0 0.0 1 0.4 447 100.0 482 100.0 420 100.0 254 100.0 268 100.0 Total Fawns Excluded 16-18 20g :! ,:.6 191 52.9 173 55.6 123 59.4 95 46.1 28-30 95 21.3 60 16.6 66 21.2 30 14.5 77 37.3 40-52 84 18.6 67 18.6 47 15.1 33 15.9 21 10.2 64-76 41 9.2 25 6.9 9 2.9 10 4.8 7 3.4 88-100 15 3.4 13 3.6 11 3.5 11 5.3 5 2.4 112+ 4 0.9 5 1.4 5 1.6 0 0.0 1 0.5 447 100.0 361 100.0 311 100.0 207 100.0 206 100.0 Total �Table 10.--Qbserved and expected numbers of 16-18 month old female mule deer to all older females, 1963-64.+ Estimated Age (Months) Year 16-18 Observe~pected Chi Observed 28+ Expected Chi Total Percentages of Females 16-18 Months Est. Age 1963 57 53.5 .23 133 136.6 .09 190 30.0 1964 57 60.5 .20 158 154.4 .08 215 26.5 Total 114 291 405 + The computed Chi square (.60) was not significant (P~05) at 1 degree of freedom. \J1 l-' .j::"" Table ll.--0bserved and expected numbers of 28-30 month old female mule deer to all older females, 1963-64.+ Estimated Age (Months) Year 28-30 Observed Expected Chi Observed 40+ Expected Chi Total Percentages of Females 28-30 Months Est. Age 1963 24 38.9 5.73 109 94.1 2.37 133 18.0 1964 65 50.1 4.46 106 120.9 1.84 171 38.0 Total 89 215 304 + The computed Chi square (14.40) was significant (P<.OOl) at 1 degree of freedom. �Table 12.--Observed and expected numbers of young and old female mule deer sampled at the check station, 1961-62-63-64.+ Estimated Age (Months) Year 1961 16-52 Observed Expected 344 338.8 Chi Observed 64+ Expected Chi Total Percentages of Females 16-52 Months Est. Age .08 140 145.2 .02 484 71.1 I 1962 263 287.7 2..12 1963 132 133.0 .008 58 57.0 .02 190 69.5 1964 171 150.5 2.79 44 64.5 6.52 --111 79.5 Total 910 148 123.3 4.95 411 63.9 \J1 l-' \J1 390 + The computed Chi square (16.50) was significant 1,300 (PS.001) at 3 degrees of freedom. �- 516 Age structure related to day of kill, 1964.--Since check station operation over an entire season is expensive and time-consuming, it is of interest to know whether age structure may be reliably sampled in less time. In Table 13, .age structure samples of both sexes are given for each day of kill. Male and female age structures were compared individually by chi square analysis for the first two and the last two days of kill. It was found that there were no significant (P<.05) differences between the two sampling period age structure samples. Similar, and perhaps more detailed analyses, will be performed on the 1961-62-63 age structure samples. Where sample sizes are larger and the season ends on a weekend, significant differences in age structure may occur. Progeny:progenitor ratios.--This method was suggested by Gill (1953) as one method to detect bias in female age structure samples. In Table 14, progeny:progenitor ratios are listed for 1961-62-63-64. Theoretically, a small but steady increase in successive age class ratios would occur if no samp Lf.ng bias existed. On this basis, our age structure samples certainly reflect some type of undefined bias. One source of bias might be the use of 3, I-year age classes and 3, 2-year age classes. I have listed several other possible sources of bias previously (Anderson 1965:220). Harvest Sex Ratios, 1961-64, Inclusive Fawns.--Male:fema1e ratios exhibited a preponderance of males during each of 4 sample years yet none differed significantly from equality at the 5 percent level of significance (Table 15). When the 4 years data were combined, however, the total sample sex ratio of 119:100 based on 620 fawns differed significantly (P<.02) from equality. The preponderance of male fawns harvested by hunters during the late fall has been diseussed by Robinette et at. (1957a) and others. Sex ratio variabi1itY.--The probable range of sex ratio variability may be inferred (Table 16) from approximate 90 percent confidence limits for all age class sex ratios, 1961-64. In all samples, older age classes have successively fewer males and confidence intervals generally do not overlap between the 16-18 month and the 40-52 month age classes. Confidence limits, however, generally overlap for successive age classes during each of the 4 years. Some exceptions are: between the 4-6 and 16-18 month-old age classes in 1962-63,and the 16-18 and 28-30 month-old classes in 1962 and 1964. These confidence limits emphasize the extreme variability of all sex ratio data and the strong influence of sample size on this variability. Subunit Harvest Indices, 1964 Harvest densities.--Indices to harvest density are presented for each sex by subunit in Table 17. Sample sizes are very small for all subunits except 4 and 5 and no interpretations will be made of values from other subunits. Maximum harvest density indices were 4.95 and 3.01 deer per square mile for subunits 4 and 5, respectively. Minimum 1964 harvest density indices were: .15 (subunit �Table 13.--The relationship of the date of kill to the Unit 19 mule deer age structure and harvest sex ratios as sampled at the check station, 1964. Date of Kill Oct. 25 Oct. 24 Age Class Male (Months) No. % Female No. % Males/ 100 Male Total Females No. % Female No. % Oct. 26 Males/ 100 Male Total Females No. % Female No. % MaTes/ 100 Total Females 4-6 38 20.8 32 18.2 70 119 13 22.4 14 20.6 27 93 1 25.0 2 22.2 3 50 16-18 70 38.2 41 23.2 111 171 17 29.3 11 16.2 28 155 1 25.0 3 33.3 4 33 28-30 53 28.9 43 24.4 96 123 19 32.8 20 29.4 39 95 1 25.0 1 11.1 2 100 40-52 14 7.6 36 20.5 50 39 5 8.6 9 13.2 14 56 1 25.0 0 0.0 1 -- 64-76 5 2.7 8 4.5 13 62 1 1.7 3 4.4 4 33 a 0.0 2 22.2 2 88-100 3 1.7 6 3.4 9 50 2 3.4 2 2.9 4 100 0 0.0 1 11.1 1 112+ 0 0.0 10 5.7 10 -- 1 1.7 9 13.2 10 11 0 0.0 a 0.0 a 183 100.0 176 100.0 359 104 58 100.0 68 100.0 126 85 4 100.0 9 100.0 13 Total 44 VI ~ -.J �Table 13.--The relationship of the date of kill to the Unit 19 mule deer age structure and harvest sex ratios as sampled at the check station, 1964--Continued. Date of Kill Oct. 27 Oct. 28 Ma1es/ 100 Male Total Females No. Ma1es/ 100 Total Females Male No. % Female No. % 4-6 6 60.0 1 20.0 7 600 3 23.1 3 33.3 6 100 16-18 1 10.0 1 20.0 2 100 6 46.2 1 11.1 7 600 28-30 1 10.0 1 20.0 2 100 4 30.7 0 0.0 4 40-52 1 10.0 1 20.0 2 100 0 0.0 3 33.3 3 64-76 1 10.0 0 0.0 1 -- 0 0.0 1 11.1 1 88-100 0 0.0 0 0.0 0 0 0 0.0 1 11.1 1 112+ 0 0.0 1 20.0 1 -- 0 0.0 0 0.0 0 0 Total 10 100.0 5 100.0 15 200 13 100.0 9 100.0 22 144 % Female No. % -- \J1 I-' Q) �- 519 - Table 14.--Age structure of the female mule deer kill sample expressed as percentages of the total sample and progeny - progenitor ratios, 1961-62-63-64. Age Class (Months) 1961 P:P % Ratio+ 1962 P:P % RatiO+ 1963 P:P % Ratio+ 1964 P:P % Ratio+ 4-6 16.3 .19 18.6 .23 17.8 .22 19.5 .24 16-18 20.0 .32 18.2 .29 24.7 .43 21.3 .36 28-30 17.3 .37 10.3 .19 10.4 .22 24.3 .70 40-52 22.1 .91 23.6 .80 22.0 .28 18.4 1.11 64-76 9.7 .67 8.3 .40 10.8 .76 5.2 .47 88-100 7.3 1.00 8.3 .66 9.1 1.75 3.7 .50 112+ 7.3 12.7 5.2 7.5 Total 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 Sample Size 578 505 231 267 + (Gill 1953) Obtained by dividing the number of females in each age class by the number of females in all older age classes. �- 520 - Table 15.--Fawn sex ratios as sampled at the check station, 1961-62-63-64. Year Males Number Females Total Males Per 100 Females 1961 121 94 215 129 3.39 P<.10 1962 109 94 203 116 1.11 P<.30 1963 47 41 88 115 .41 1964 62 52 114 119 .88 Total 339 281 620 121 5.42 Computed Level of Chi Square Significance+ P<.50 + Single classification chi square. The hypothesis being tested is that the samples consisted of equal proportions of male and female fawns at the 5 percent level of significance. �Table 16.--Age class sex ratios of the 1961-62-63-64 mule deer harvests as sampled at the check station with appoximate 90% confidence limits* Age Class (Months) Number Males Females 1961 Males/lOO Females With Conf. Limits Number Males Females 1962 Ma1es/100 Females With Conf. Limits 4-6 121 94 129 (100 - 158) 109 94 116 (89 - 143) 16-18 191 116 165 (133 - 197) 173 92 188 (148 - 228) (44 - 76) 66 52 127 (88 - 166) \.Jl ro 28-30 60 100 60 40-52 67 128 52 (39 - 65) 47 119 39 (28 - 50) 64-76 25 56 44 (26 - 62) 9 42 21 (8 - 34) 88-100 13 42 31 (15 - 47) 11 42 26 (11 - 41) 112+ -2. ~ 12 (3 - 21) -2. 64 8 (2 - 14) Total 482 578 83 (75 - 9l) 420 505 83 (74 - 92) I-' �Table l6.--Age class sex ratios of the 1961-62-63-64 mule deer harvests as sampled at the check station with approximate 90% confidence limits*--Continued. Age Class ~Months2 Number Males Females 1963 Males/100 Females With Conf. Limits Number Males Females 1964 Males/100 Females With Conf. Limits 4-6 47 41 115 (75 - 155) 62 52 119 (82 - 156) 16-18 123 57 216 (159 - 273) 95 57 167 (121 - 213) 28-30 30 24 125 (69 - 181) 77 65 118 (85 - 151) 40-52 33 51 64 (40 - 88) 21 49 43 (24,- 62) 64-76 10 25 40 (15 - 65) 7 14 50 (12 - 88) 88-100 11 21 52 (20 - 84) 5 10 50 (5 - 95) 112+ 0 12 -- -- 1 20 5 (0 - 14) Total 254 231 110 ~58 - 1622 268 267 100 ~86 - 1142 \JT I\) I\) I * Riney (1956) �.-- Table 17.--Subunit indices of the Unit 19 mule deer harvest density, hunting effort, and sex ratios, age classes combined, 1964. Subunit Kill per S9. Mile Ma1e* No. Hours Hunted+ Deer x SD Range~'(* Fema1e* Kill Per No. Hours Hunted+ Range~d<, S9. Mile Deer x SD Sexes Combined Kill Per 100 Kill per Females Males Fawns 89' Mile 1 .35 11 5.1 4.71 13.5 .51 16 4.8 5.08 14.5 .87 69 29 2 .22 14 6.2 6.10 21.5 .32 20 5.4 4.04 .14.0 .55 70 53 3 .55 10 5.1 4.63 13.5 .11 2 3.8 .35 0.5 .66 500 300 4 2.38 100 5.5 5.51 27.5 2.57 108 5.2 4.88 20.5 4.95 93 51 5 1.50 80 4.0 4.13 19.5 1.50 80 4.2 4.35 17.5 3.01 100 50 6 .25 25 7.6 6.11 23.5 .15 15 9.0 8.82 32.5 .40 167 36 7 .20 26 6.9 4.34 15.5 .25 32 3.6 3.65 15.5 .46 81 54 8 .08 8 8.3 6.73 19.5 .07 7 8.7 7.19 19.5 .15 114 33 Totals & Means .51 274 5.5 5.19 .53 280 5.0 5.02 1.04 98 50 * All age classes included. + Based on interviews of successful hunters to the nearest one-half hour. ++ Based on an estimated 528 square miles in Game Mgmt. Unit 19. The square miles in each subunit are; 1-31, 2-61, 3-18, 4-42, 5-53, 6-98, 7-126, 8-99. Subunits 2, 6, 7 and 8 are generally less accessible with appreciably heavier cover; 1 and 3 are largely agricultural and privately owned lands, subject to almost complete closure to hunting. ** The difference between minimum and maximum hours hunted. \Jl I\) VJ �- 524 - 8) and .55 (subunit 2) deer per square mile. The overall harvest density index was 1.04 deer per square miles. These indices compare favorably with those from 1963 and since 1960, subunits 4 and 5 have had the maximum harvest densities. This is related to their relative accessibility, amounts of escape cover, and perhaps to population densities. As in 1963, only about 18 percent of the total area of Unit 19 received a substantial harvest (Anderson 1963:221). Hunting effort.--This is expressed as the mean number of hours hunted (± the standard deviation) by successful hunters. These values are listed for each subunit and by sex of deer in Table 17. The overall indices for the 1964 hunting effort are: males, 5.50 + 5.19 hours; and females, 5.00+ 5.02 hours. In terms of subunit comparis;ns, it appears that the variability and small sample sizes available for the majority of the subunits will not permit any interpretation of hunter effort. Examination of Table 18 strengthens this belief. During years of relatively high harvest levels, however, subunits 4 and 5 may have adequate sample sizes for analyses of mean hunting effort when compared to all other subunit samples combined. Sex ratios.--Overall male:female and also fawn:female ratios are listed by subunit in Table 17. Sex ratios sampled from subunits 1, 4, 5, and 7 (Table 18) were compared by chi square analysis for each of the first 4 age classes. There were no significant (P<.05) differences in sex ratios between these subunits. Antler Measurements, 1964 Antler beam measurements are described statistically by age class in Table 19. Antler point and brow tine enumeration data are presented on a percentage basis by age class in Tables 20 and 21, respectively. The results of significance tests comparing all facets of the 1960-64 data will be described in the 1965 report. Discussion: One of the job objectives is to: "measure relevant physical characteristics of the deer killed to provide an index of herd response to food quality." This will not be possible until portions of Work Plan 3, Job No.3 (Vegetative Analysis) and Work Plan 3, Job No.5 (Food Preference), and the 1965 portion of this job have been completed, the data analyzed, and all approaches examined on the antler development-food quality relationship. It is anticipated that this work will be reported in a formal paper during 1966 or 1967. Because the tooth replacement and wear technique (Robinette et al. 1957b) of estimating age of mule deer is believed unsatisfactory for animals with permanent dentition, I rather prematurely recommended (Anderson 1965:196) that we adopt the histological technique of dental cementum developed by Low and Cowan (1963) from known-age material. Miss Florence Fields, of the Game and Fish Research Center Laboratory at Fort Collins, accordingly made studies of this technique. While the results were encouraging, our lack of known-age material handicapped an adequate assessment. It was clear, however, that the large amount of time required made the application of this technique to large samples impractical under the conditions of this study. �Table 18.--Mean hours of hunting by successful hunters related to sex and age structure of the subunit samples, 1964. Subunit No. Age Class (Monthsl 4-6 16-18 28-30 40-52 Statistic 88-100 + 4.0-14.0 9 17 7.55 2.52 5.10 2.80 0.5-10.0 2.0-16.0 20 5 8.05 6.30 6.36 4.46 1.5-12.0 0.5-24.0 4 5.12 3 10.33 32 5.87 6.45 -2.0-15.0 0.)-28.0 19 21 3.50 5.85 2.92 5.47 0.5-18.0 0.5-10.0 7 21 8.57 5.07 4.78 5.56 0.5-18.0 0.5-14.0 9 3.33 2.50 1.0-9.0 10 5.60 4.16 -1.0-14.0 0.5-13.0 4 22 6.12 5.40 -5.46 0.5-21.0 1.5-19.0 12 4.00 2.63 0.5-9.0 1 2.50 -- 6 2.33 1.72 1.0-5.5 0 0.0 0.0 -- 5 7.10 5.30 0.5-18.0 1 -- --- 4 3.87 4.80 0.5-11.0 0 0.0 0.0 3 6.50 1 2 0 -3.25 0.0 --0.0 --0 Statistical description -- -- 1.0-14.0 2 2.75 -- 0.5-5.0 -- 3 6.00 1 SD Range 0.0 0 N 1 1 x N x- 10 6 6.85 4.33 4.97 5.92 1.0-16.0 0.5-14.0 36 24 3.69 3.66 4.32 4.02 0.5-14.0 0.5-20.0 -- 0 0.0 0.0 0 x Female 28 3.69 3.39 0.5-15.0 SD Range N Male 5 2.20 1.35 0.5-3.5 x -x Female 1.0-2.0 2 9.00 N Male 16 20 4.62 5.70 4.04 4.70 0.5-16.0 0.5-12.0 N - . Female -- --- --- 1 0.5-1.5 8 6.87 6.52 1.0-18.0 0 0 2 3.00 1 0 2 1.00 -- -- 0 0 0 -- 0 0.0 0.0 0 1 0 0.0 0.0 0 8 5.25 3.70 0.5-11.5 -- -- 0.0 -- 0.0 SD 4.0-11.0 -0 Range Sample sizes were too small on the other 4 subunits for individual summarization. of 5 and over. -- 6 95 5.08 7.58 5.03 7.95 0.5-21.0 0.5-24.0 57 3.84 4.35 0.5-21.0 16 7.40 6.54 1.0-22.5 78 11 5.81 6.90 ·5; 73 4.15 1.0-12.0 0.5-28.0 65 5.63 5.13 0.5-18.0 4 4.12 0.5-12.0 21 6 5.00 5.75 5.02 6.18 0.5-15.0 0.5-19.0 49 4.76 4.72 0.5-21.0 0 0.0 0.0 4 3.62 0 0.0 -- 0.5-8.0 --- 7 3.50 4.60 1.5-12.0 14 7.03 6.28 0.5-18.0 -- 2 6.50 2.12 2 5.50 4.94 -- -- 5 4.90 2.40 1.5 -8.0 10 4.30 3.37 0.5-11 6 10.41 11.34 . 2.5-33:0 1 20 6.57 7.03 0.5-33:0 -1 --- All Subunits Female Male 52 61 8 4.89 6.18 6.06 4.73 5.04 6.03 0.5-20.0 1.0-20.0 0.5-18.0 Others Female 25 7.18 6.18 1.0-18.0 1.5-5.0 N x SD Range Male Male 8 16 6.06 3.93 3.89 2.66 0.5-12.0 2.0-9.5 2 1.50 SD Range 112+ Female 2 3.25 N x SD Range SD Range 64-76 Male 7 5 4 1 -- -- -- -- -0.0 ._- is confined herein to samples V1 ro V1 �- 526- Table 19.--Statistical description of antler measurements from Unit 19 mule deer as sampled at the check station, 1964. Age Class ~Months2 16-18 93 94 92 88 88 x 18.31 18.21 23.83 24.88 24..01 SD 1.99 2.14 4.00 4.43 4.48 90% Confidence Limits Lower U22er 17.97 18.65 17.85 18.58 23.14 24,51 24.10 25.66 23.22 24.80 Beam Diameter, Left Beam Diameter, Right Beam Length, Left Beam Length, Right Spread, Inside· 78 78 77 76 69 26.56 26.96 37.60 37.58 39.22 2.90 3.09 5.00 5.12 5.58 26.02 26.38 36.66 36.61 38.11 27.11 27.54 38.54 38.55 40.32 40-52 Beam Diameter, Left Beam Diameter, Right Beam Length, Left Beam Length, Right Spread, Inside 21 21 21 21 20 32.43 32.81 44.19 45.05 45.90 5.11 4.50 6.05 5.50 8.07 30.50 31.11 41.91 42.97 42.78 34.36 34.51 46.47 47.12 49.02 64-76 Beam Diameter, Left Beam Diameter, Right Beam Length, Left Beam Length, Right Spread, Inside 7 7 7 7 6 35.29 36.14 50.71 51.43 46.50 5.09 4.34 6.26 5.38 4.32 31.55 32.96 46.12 47.48 42.94 39.02 39.32 55.31 55.37 50.07 88-100 Beam Diameter, Left Beam Diameter, Right Beam Length, Left Beam Length, Right Spread, Inside 5 5 4 5 4 37.60 37.20 49.50 52.60 53.25 4.16 4.21 5.26 4.67 5.38 33.64 33.19 43.32 48.15 46.93 41.56 41. 21 55.68 57.05 59.57 Measurement+ Beam Diameter, Left Beam Diameter, Right Beam Length, Left Beam Length, Right Spread, Inside 28-30 + N Beam diameters in mm, beam length and antler spread in cm. nearest mm and ~ cm, respectively as follows: Measured to the Diameter - Measured about 2.5 cm above burr ata right angle to the longitudinal axis of head with a caliper. Protuberances are avoided if possible. Length - Measured from burr to the tip of the main beam (lowermost) along the outside surface with a flexible steel tape. S2read Inside - Maximum inside distance between main beam measured with a flexible steel tape. �Table 20.--The numbers and percentages of 205 Unit 19 mule deer by age class in symmetrical and non-symmetrical antler point categroies as sampled at the check station, 1964.+ No. Antler Points Left Right 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 Subtotals 16-18 N % 5.4 5 62 66.7 12 12.9 0 0 0 0 79 85.0 28-30 N 0 9 14 27 1 51 % 0 11.5 17.9 34.6 1.3 65.3 Age Class ~Months2 64-76 40-52 N N % % 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 28.5 14.3 3 11 42.9 52.4 3 0 0 0 0 71.4 14 66.7 5 88-100 % o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0 N 112+ N 0 0 0 1 0 1 Totals N % % 0 2.4 5 0 71 34.6 0 31 15.1 100.0 42 20.5. 0.5 0 1 100.0 150 73.1 I 1.1 1.1 0 2.1 2.1 2.1 0 6.5 0 0 0 0 0 . 1 1 1 2 8 2 1 8 10 1 3 8 5 3 1 55 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.9 3.9 0.9 0.5 3.9 4.9 0.5 1.5 3.9 2.4 1.5 0.5 26.8 100.0 205 1 5 100.0 7 100.0 21 100.0 93 100.0 78 100.0 Totals + An antler point is an antler appendage 2.5 cm or greater in length, excluding the brow tines. * Abnormal development. 100.0 0 2* 1 2 1 3 1 2 2 3 2 0* 3 0* 2 3 3 4 4 0* 4 2 4 3 4 5 4 5 2 5 Subtotals 1 1 0 2 2 2 0 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 14 0 0 15.0 0 0 1 0 6 0 1 2 6 1 3 5 0 1 1 27 0 0 1.3 0 7.7 0 1.3 2.6 7.7 1.3 3.8 6.4 0 1.3 1.3 34.7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 3 2 1 0 7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4.7 0 0 14.3 9.5 4.7 0 33.2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 14.3 0 0 0 14.3 0 0 28.6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 2 1 0 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 40.0 0 0 0 40.0 20.0 0 100.0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o· 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100.0 V1 I'J --.J �Table 2l.--The incidence of antler brow tines from 207 Unit 19 mule deer summarized by age class, 1964. Brow Tines Present B~ Beam Both L. & R. Right Percent No. Percent No. 11.8 0.0 0 2 Age Class (Months} 16-18 No. 4 Left Percent 28.6 28-30 4 28.6 10 58.8 25 56.8 40-52 4 28.6 4 23.5 13 64-76 2 14.2 0 0.0 3 Brow Tines Absent Total No. Percent 8.0 6 No. 89 Percent 67.4 Tota1 95 39 52.0 39 29.5 78 29.6 21 28.0 0 0.0 21 6.8 5 6.7 2 1.5 7 1.5 5 \Jl ro CP 88-100 0 0.0 1 5.9 2 4.5 3 4.0 2 112+ 0 0.0 0 0.0 1 2.3 1 1.3 0 0.0 1 Totals 14 100.0 17 100.0 44 100.0 75 100.0 132 100.0 207 Percentages of Total 6.7 8.2 21.2 36.1 63;8 100.0 �- 529 - LITERATURE CITED Anderson, A. E. 1965. Harvest analysis. Work Plan 5, Job 3, Completion report. pp. 195-224. in Game Research Report, Federal Aid, January 1965, P-R Project W-105-R, Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Dept. (processed). Gill, J. 1953. Remarks on the kill curves of female deer. 9th Northeast Section Wildl. Conf., Bretton Woods, N. H., 12 pp. (mimeo.). Low, W. A. and I. Mct. Cowan. 1963. Age determination of deer by annular structure of dental cementum. J. Wild1. Mgmt. 27(3):466-471. Riney, T. 1956. Differences in proportions of fawns to hinds in red deer (cervus elaphus) from several New Zealand environments. Nature 177:488-489. Robinette, W. L., J. S. Gashwiler, J. B. Low, and D. A. Jones. 1957a. Differential mortality by sex and age among mule deer. J. Wild1. Mgmt. 21(1):1-16. Robinette, W. L., D. A. Jones, G. Rogers, and J. S. Gashwiler. 1957b. Notes on tooth development and wear for Rocky Mountain mule deer. Wi1d1. Mgmt. 21(2):134-153. Prepared by Date Allen E. Anderson Associate Wildlife Researcher JanuaEh 1965'-- Approved by _ J. ~D~e~a~n~E~.~M~e~d~i~n~---Project Leader F. c. K1einschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator ��- 531 - State of Project Work JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH SEGMENT PROJECT COLORADO ----------~~~~----------An Ecological No. Cache W-105-R-5 Plan No. ....:::.5 = ......,;;;P;-:;h""y'-"s:;..;l.::.;· o;:..;l::.;o::.Jg~l.=-· c;::.a=l--=-S-=t-=u-=d:.::i-=e:.::s~ _ 2 Job No. .Period Covered: January~ Personnel: E. Anderson Allen Investigation of the la Poudre Deer Herd, Colorado Reproductive 1964 - December, Studies 1964 and Dean E. Hedin ABSTRACT Hunter-donated materials, late October.--Counts of the pigmented corpora . lutea scars of pregnancy on 28 pairs of ovaries from mule deer 28 months and older resulted in a mean of 1.61 scars per doe and 92.9 percent had conceived. A 4 year summary (1961-1964), of similar data from the same age component and based on 204 pairs of ovaries yielded a mean of 1.58 scars per doe, 90.7 percent had conceived, and there was no significant (P 5 .05) between-year difference in the proportions of pigmented corpora lutea scars of pregnancy to the number of females. Yearlong collection material.--Selected measurements on portions of the reproductive tracts of 27 male and 25 female mule deer (2 months to about 11 years of age) and external body measurements, fresh and fixed weights, and fresh body volumes of 18 prenatal young are tabulated chronologically. Of 41 litters examined (1961-64), 70.7 percent consisted of twins and the sex ratio of 93:100 based on 58 prenatal young did not differ significantly (P ~ .05) from equality. As estimated from growth curves of prenatal young mule deer, the 1961-64 conception dates ranged from November 17 to February 7 and about 85 percent occurred from November 18 to December 15. The 1964 ovulation rate, based on 11 breeding age females (16+ months), was 1.73 corpora 1utea per female and the fetal rate was 1.64. Acknowledgementl'l.= Miss Florence Fields M.T. (ASCP) M.S. prepared and sectioned all the 1964 ovarian and testicular material. Miss Fields measured, weighed, and determined volumes on the gonads and made the testicular smears and slides. �- 532 - We would like to thank all the student assistants who assisted in field collections, at the check station and in the laboratory during 1964; especially R. Buhler, W. Jones, O. D. Markham and K. Porter. The latter. (later Wildlife Researcher Candidate) also did much of the data tabulation, herein. Part of the dissection and gross morphological work was done in the laboratory of the Colorado Cooperative Wildlife Research Unit, Colorado State University, Fort Collins, Colorado. Recommendations: None. Objectives: Determine the reproductive pattern of the deer herd to provide data on: (a) morphology of the reproduction organs as related to age and season, and (b) tentatively, the relationship of productivity to measured factors of the environment. �- 533 - REPRODUCTIVE STUDIES Allen E. Anderson Techniques Used: The techniques used are fully described in Anderson (1962: 271-274) and Anderson (1965:165-193). For this reason, only brief mention will be made of a few major techniques. Definitions of specialized terminology are also cited. Feffi81ereproductive tracts were donated by hunters at the check station during the 1964 season and retained for ova r Lan analysis. Deer of both sexes were collected yearlong by shooting on a 4 per month basis. The gross morphology of their reproductive tracts were studied in the laboratory. All deer from ,which reproductive material had been obtained were assigned to age classes on the basis of replacement and wear of the mandibular dentition using the criteria of Robinette et~. (1957) and involving measurements of lingual height and occlusal width (buccal) of the molariform teeth. The ratio of lingual height to buccal width of permanent dentition is regarded as a gross approximation of age because of the small samples and inherent variability of known-age materials used in computing the reference ratios (Table 7 in Robinette et al 1957). Counts of the pigmented corpora lutea of pregnancy were made using the criteria of Cheatum (1949). Gross histological studies of seminiferous tubules and testicular smears will be described in subsequent reports. The follOWing terms are defined and applied according to the accompanying references. (1) fetal rate = ovulation rate = ' age component total prenatal young total females of breeding (Robinette (2) to a specific herein, age et al. 1955) total current corpora lutea of pregnancy total females of breeding age (Robinette et al. 1955) �- 534 - (3) percent loss of ova = 100 - [ total prenatal young ] total current corpora lutea of pregnancy (Robinette et ale 1955) (4) percent conceived total females with pigmented corpora lutea scars or pregnancy 100 ( total females ) (Swank 1958) Findings: During 1964, 24 male and 24 female deer of all age classes were collected for intensive study. In addition, about 60 female reproductive tracts were collected at the check station during the 1964 hunting season. Of these, 37 were suitable for ovarian analysis. In addition to the regular collection, some reproductive data were obtained from 3 males and 1 female (road-kills and other mortality). Analyses of Female Material Hunting season ovarian analysis, 1964.--Counts of the pigmented corpora lutea of pregnancy are tabulated by 7 age classes and an "unknown age" category in Table 1. Because of the very small samples size, these data provide only a poor index to the percent of females conceiving during the 1963-64 breeding season. Hunting season ovarian analysis, 1961-62-63-64.--These data are combined and summarized by age class in Table 2. There were no significant (P ~ .05) between-year differences (Table 2A) in the proportions of pigmented corpora lutea of pregnancy scars to the number of females, 28 months and older. If sample sizes were larger, it might be assumed that the fertility of the population has remained at a relatively constant level. This assumption, however, is untenable at the sampling intensities employed. �Table 1.--Counts of the pi~nented corpora 1utea scars of pregnancy from 37 mule deer sampled at the check station during late Octoberl1964. No. Deer With Pigmented Corpora Lutea of Pregnancy Scars 3 0 1 2 4 Scars Total No. Scars Percent Total Scars Mean Scars Per Deer Percent With Scars 0 0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0 0 0 0.0 0.00 0.0 2 0 0 5 10.4 1.67 100.0 3 8 0 0 19 39.6 1.58 91.7 0 2 1 0 0 4 8.3 1.33 100.0 0 0 2 0 0 4 8.3 2.00 100.0 (Hont hs J» Sample Size 4-6 1 1 0 0 0 16-18 7 7 0 0 28-30 3 0 1 40-52 12 1 64-76 3 88-100 2 Age Class 13 112+ 8 1 2 4 1 0 Unknown Total 1 37 0 10 0 8 0 17 1 2 0 0 3 48 Fawns Excluded 36 9 8 17 2 0 Fawns, Yearlings, Unknowns, Excluded 28 2 8 17 1 0 I 27.1 1.62 87.5 \J1 co \J1 3.00 1.30 100.0 72.9 48 1.33 75.0 45 1.61 92.9 6.2 100.0 3.6 0 7.1 28.6 60.7 28 Percent of Total; Fawns, Yearlings, Unknowns, Excluded "i'~ Ages are those estimated at time of death. Conception occurred about 8-10 months earlier during the 1962-63 breeding season. Fawns are listed to provide a complete record. �Table 2.--Counts of the pigmented corpora 1utea scars of pregnancy from 285 mule deer. Material was obtained at the check station during the late October hunting seasonl 1961-62-63-64. ;". No. Deer With Pigmented Corpora Lutea of Pregnancy Scars 0 1 2 3 4 Scars Age Class (Months)* Sample Size 4-6 28 28 0 0 0 16-18 44 43 0 1 28-30 42 6 29 40-52 85 5 64-76 28 88-100 16 Total No. Scars Percent Total Scars Mean Scars Per Deer Percent With Scars 0 0 0.0 0,00 0.0 0 0 2 0.6 0.05 2.3 6 1 0 44 13.2 1.05 85.7 29 40 9 2 144 43.2 1.69 94.1 3 10 8 3 4 51 153 1.82 89.3 1 6 7 2 0 26 1.62 93.2 7.8 I 112+ 33 4 7 16 5 1 58 17.4 1.76 87.9 Unknown Total 9 285 4 94 3 84 1 79 1 21 0 7 8 333 2.4 100.0 0.89 1.17 .22..:..2 Fawns Excluded 257 66 84 79 . 21 7 333 1.30 74.3 204 19 81 77 20 7 323 1.58 90.7 Fawns, Yearlings, Unknowns, Excluded Percent of 9.3 39.7 37.7 9.8 3.4 Total; Fawns, Yearlings, Unknowns, Excluded are those estimated at time of death (Robinette ~ ~ 1957). * Ages months earlier. Fawns are listed to provide a complete record. 67.0 Conception occurred about 8-10 \J1 VJ 0'\ �- 537 - Table 2A.--Contingency table of the proportions of pigmented corpora lutea scars of pregnancy to the number of females in the 28 months and older age component, sampled at the check station, 1961-62-63-64.* Year 1961 1962 1963 1964 Total * No. Pigmented Corpora Lutea of Pregnancy Scars Expected Chi Observed 130 115 33 45 323 Total Chi-square 127.48 114.61 36.16 44.74 .050 .0013 .276 .0015 .456, not significant No. Females2 Observed 78 72 26 28 204 28 months Expected and Older Chi Total 80.52 72.39 22.84 28.26 .079 .0021 .044 .0023 208 187 59 73 527 (P ~ .05) at 3 degrees of freedom. Regular collection ovarian analyses--fetal rates, 1964.--Counts of pigmented corpora lutea of pregnancy scars, the current corpora lutea, and prenatal young by uterine horn are listed chronologically in Table 3. The ovulation rate, based on 11 breeding age females with 19 current corpora 1utea of pregnancy, was 1.73. The fetal rate was 1.64. There was a 5.3 percent loss of ova. Reproductive tract morphology.--The individual measurements of the ovaries and reproductive tracts from 25 deer collected during 1964 are tabulated in Table 4. No attempt at analysis or interpretation of these data will be made until after field collections are completed and the entire sample can be utilized. Morphology of prenatal young, 1964.--All measurements of prenatal young are presented in Table 5. Their fresh weights ranged from 0.53g to 2,745g from mothers collected between January 7 and June 23, inclusive. Prenatal young sex ratios and litter size, 1961-62-63-64.--0f the 72 young examined; 28 were males, 30 females and 14 were of undetermined sex (Table 6). The latter were an estimated 39-75 days of age and ranged in weight from 0.53g-60g. The sex ratio of the 58 was 93:100 which does not differ significantly (P ~ .05) from equality. About 71 percent of the mothers sampled carried twins. Estimated conception dates, 1961-62-63-64.--The conception dates estimated for 41 litters ranged from November 17 to February 7 (Table 7). About 85 percent of the total, however, occurred between November 18 and December 15. The February 7 date was derived from one female fetus whose mother (collection number 98) was estimated to be about 8 years 11 months of age. The November 17 date was derived from one male fetus and one female fetus whose mother (collection number 141) was estimated to be about 10 years 10 months of age. �Table 3.--Counts of pigmented corpora 1utea of pregnancy scars, the current corpora 1utea of pregnancy, and prenatal young from 26 mule deer collected during 1964. Coll. No. -H128 130 134 136 137 139 140 141 028 143 146 148 151+L 152 153L 155L 156L+* 157 158 159L 031 163 Coll. Date Est. Age Month-Day Year Month 1-7 1-21 2-18 3-3 3-10 3-24 4-2 4-7 4-16 4-21 5-12 5-26 6-16 6-23 6-30 7-13 7-20 7-28 8-4 8-11 9-10 9-15 1 11 9 2 1 0 0 10 2 3 3 1 9 2 5 3 2 2 1 5 0 1 7 7 8 9 9 9 10 10 10 10 11 11 0 0 0 1 1 1 2 2 3 3 Pi~ented C.L. Left Total Right No. Size~': No. Size~', Current C.L. Left Right No. Size~': No. Size* 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 7.0 1 7.5 2 5.5 5.5 1 6.0 1 8.0 0 0 2 5.5 5.0 1 7.5 26.5 6.0 1 7.5 0 0 1 7.5 2 4.5 4.0 2? 2.5 2.5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O? 0 0 1 0 0 2.0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O? 0 0 1 0 0 1 6.5 1 8.0 0 1 6.0 0 0 0 0 1 7.0 0 1 7.0 1 8.5 2 4.5 4.5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Total 2 2 2 2 1 0 0 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 2 2? 0 0 0 0 0 0 Prenatal Young L. R. Total 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 2 2 2 1 0 0 2 2 1 2 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 \J1 LA.> CP �Table 3.--Counts of pigmented corpora lutea of pregnancy scars, the current corpora lutea of pregnancy, and prenatal young from 26 mule d~er collected during 1964. (continued) .:.~. Co11. No.+!- 164 166 169 173L+* Call. Date Est. Honth-Day Year 9-21 10-5 11-4 12-8 1 0 3 8 Annual Total Age Nonth 3 4 5 6 ----- ~igment.~,dC.L. !.eft ,. Right Total No. Si~e* No. Size* ~ l..l. ._ ~ ___ . 0 0 1 1 2 1.5 1.5 0 0 1 1 - 1.0 1.5 3 -----------------~~---~-~-- Current C.L. Left Right No. Size* No. Size* 0 0 2 2 0 0 0 1 5 18 5.0 0 0 0 2 - 10 6.5 7.0 Total 0 0 0 3 Prenatal Young L. R. Total 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 18 - - - 28 8 10 Ovulation Rate 1.75 Fetal Rate 1.64 \J1 co \0 I Note: * + A question mark indicates uncertainty as to correct identification of ovarian structure. Nean diameter in rom of 2 maximum measurements at right angles to each other. Two newborn fawns found nearby; No. 151 wa~ prob~bly the mothet based on condition of uterus. ++ L indicates animal was lactating on collection date. +* Very slight lactation. �- 540 - Ventral View (Bladder Removed) INDEX Measurement 1. Uterine !{orns Left Right 2. Uterine Body Median Septum True 3. Vagina 4. Cervix Figure 1. W.ea surement No. Diumcters Longitudinal Transverse 3 4 1 2 5 10 6 7 9 8 Schematic diagram of female reproductive tract showing measurements being taken as modified from Sears (1955). �Table 4.--Heasurements(cm), fresh weights (g), and volumes (cc), ovaries and reproductive tracts, 1964. P ~Eregnant~l L ~lactating~ animals are indicated. Collection No. Dat e-Age-Nt . Ratio-Item Collection Date (Honth-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Honth) Eviscerated Wt./Body Length Ratio Ovary (Left) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Ovary (Right) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Reproductive Tract+ Uterine Horn (Left) Long Diam (3) Trans Diam (4) Uterine Horn (Right) Long Diam (1) Trans Diam (2) Vagina Long Diam (6) Trans Diam (7) Cervix Long Diam (9) Trans Diam (8) Uterine Body True Length (10) Hedium Septum Length (5) Wt. with Fetus (es) Wt. without Fetus ~es) + Sears (1955) and Figure 1 i: Without bladder. ++ Very slight lactation. 128P 1-7 1-7 .26 BOP 1-21 11-7 .33 134P 2-18 9-8 .30 136P 3-3 2-9 .24 137P 3-10 1-9 .28 139 3-24 0-9 .19 140P 4-2 0-10 .20 141P 4-7 10-10 .28 143P 4-21 3-10 .26 1.70 0.89 0.78 0.75 0.70 1.49 1.13 0.80 0.81 0.75 1.74 1.32 0.97 1.09 0.95 1.83 1.41 0.85 1.19 1.07 1.77 1.40 0.95 1.24 1.13 1.40 1.00 0.64 1.14 1.06 2.40 1.19 0.70 1.15 0.75 1.90 1.18 0.90 1.20 0.80 1.90 1.20 0.80 1.07 1.05 1.00 0.80 0.46 0.32 0.30 1.28 0.85 0.60 0.56 0.33 1.20 0.90 0.50 0.51 0.30 1.79 1.46 0.70 1.54 1.13 1.18 1.40 0.60 0.85 0.51 2.00 1.60 0.70 1.05 0.87 1.80 0.90 0.40 0.40 0.35 8.0 4.5 9.5 5.5 12.5 2.'0 5.5 1.5 17.0 8.5 17.5 9.0 16.0 3.0 7.5 1.5 21. 5 11.0 16.5 10.0 16.0 3.0 6.0 1.5 27.0 14.0 20.0 15.0 16.5 2.0 5.0 1.5 16.0 7.5 21.0 9.0 23.0 2.5 6.0 2.0 4.0 1.0 3.5 1.0 12.0 1.5 2.5 1.0 1.66 1.10 0.70 0.65 0.49 1.70 1.00 0.40 0.64 0.49 ++ 3.5 1.0 3.5 1.0 11.0 2.0 3.5 1.0 25.0 30.0 28.0 28.0 18.0 2.5 6.0 2.0 34.0 12.0 18.0 10.0 20.0 2.0 9.0 2.0 1.5 7.0 268 1.0 11.0 1810 1777 - - - 28.5 3320 2910 27.0 3070 2506 24.0 1970 1787 2.0 2.0 0.5 3.5 - - 23.0 4000 29.0 3760 2394 - 20 25 - V1 +=- ~ �Table 4.--Measurements (cm), fresh weights _____ ...l(..::c;.,:o;,:;n::.:tinued) . (g), and volumes (cc), ovaries and reproductive tracts, 1964. Date-Age-Ht. Ratio-Item Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Ht./Body Length Ratio Ovary (Left) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Ht Vol Ovary (Right) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Reproductive Tract+ Uterine Horn (Left) Long Diam (3) Trans Diam (4) Uterine Horn (Right) Long Diam (1) Trans Diam (2) Vagina Long Diam (6) Trans Diam (7) Cervix Long Diam (9) Trans Diam (B) Uterine Body True Length (10) Medium Septum Length (5) Ht. with Fetus (es) Wt. without Fetus (es) + Sears (1955) and Figure 1. -H- Very slight lactation. Collection No. 146P 5-12 3-11 .27 14BP 5-26 1-11 .25 151L 6-16 9-0 .26 152P 6-23 2-0 .24 153L 6-30 5-0 .34 155L 7-13 3-1 .25 156L 7-20 2-1 .26 157 1.30 1.20 0.90 0.87 0.76 1. 57 1.00 0.35 0.40 0.39 2.00 1.24 1.02 1.25 1.06 2.43 1.47 0.96 1.34 1.24 2.20 1.10 0,50 0,82 2.25 1.50 0,62 1.65 1. 64 2.00 1.48 0.50 1.80 1.34 0,69 1.18 1.17 1.49 1,00 0,49 0,55 0,54 1.50 0.90 0.30 0.37 0.19 1.40 0.70 0,30 0,27 0,25 1.60 0,90 0.60 0.52 0.51 1.60 1.10 0,70 0.82 1. 50 1.04 0.50 0.75 0.59 1. 60 0,90 0,78 0.94 0.67 O,B1 2,10 1.20 0,65 1.03 1,01 LOB 1.06 -H- 2:5 8.0 2.5 21.0 7.0 30.0 21.0 15,5 3,5 7.5 2,5 39.0 7760 4195 32.0 5220 2475 29.0 1B.0 30.0 16.0 1B.0 15,0 6,5 14,0 B,5 16,5 3,5 6,0 5,0 1B,O 12,0 36.0 22,0 19,5 2,0 6.5 2.5 B.5 11,5 510 32.0 5174 2454 13,0 6,5 B.O 0.B1 7-2B 2-1 .25 158 8-4 1-2 .21 1. 30 0.70 0.48 0.45 0.20 1. 30 1.00 O.BO 0.65 0.45 B.5 B,5 3,5 17,0 4,5 3,5 3,0 16,0 3.5 6.0 1.5 6.0 2.0 7.0 2.5 14.5 2.5 6.0 1.5 4,5 11,0 2,0 8.5 1.5 5.5 0.5 3.0 1.0 4.0 93 70 39 B.O 440 3,5 134 4.0 1.0 5.0 12.5 2.5 4.5 1.5 3.0 1.0 3.0 1,0 11,0 2,5 4.5 1.0 O.B \J1 .f=" I\} �Table 4.--Heasuretnents (cm), fresh Heights (continued). Date-Age-Wt. Collection No. Ratio-Item Collection Date (Honth-Day) Estimated Age (Year'-Honth ) Eviscerated Wt./Body Length Ratio Ovary (Left) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Ovary (Right) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Reproductive Tract+ Uterine Horn (Left) Long Diam (3) Trans Diam (4) Uterine Horn (Right) Long Diam (1) Trans Diam (2) Vagina Long Diam (6) Trans Diam (7) Cervix Long Diam (9) Trans Diam (8) Uterine Body True Length (10) Hedium Septum Length (5) Wt. with Fetus (es) Wt. without Fetus (es) + (g), and volumes (cc), ovaries and reproductive tracts, 1964. Sears (1955) and Figure 1. 159L 8-11 5-2 .29 031 9-10 0-3 .16 163 9-15 1-3 .28 164 9-21 1-3 .31 166 10-5 0-4 .21 169 11-4 3-5 .33 173L 12-8 8-6 .31 1.50 1.10 0.57 0.85 0.55 1.30 0.90 0.50 0.54 0.23 1.80 1.10 0.50 1.03 0.73 1.80 1.30 0.60 1.20 0.90 1.89 1.10 0.66 1.04 1.00 1.67 1.30 0.70 1.24 1.20 1.70 1.20 0.60 0.78 0.64 1.98 1.17 1.00 1.03 0.88 1.80 1.10 0.45 0.81 0.76 2.00 1.30 0.60 1.02 0.97 1.19 1.10 0.70 1.00 0.95 1.86 1.45 1.00 1.27 1.20 1. 55 1.45 0.74 1.01 0.98 1. 50 1. 50 0.80 1.21 1.19 5.5 2.0 6.0 2.0 16.0 3.0 7.5 1.5 2.0 0.7 2.5 0.6 11.0 1.5 3.5 1.0 4.5 1.5 5.0 1.5 14.0 2.5 5.0 1.5 4.0 1.5 3.5 1.5 10.0 4.5 4.5 1.0 3.5 1.0 3.0 1.5 12.0 1.7 4.5 1.0 4.5 1.5 5.0 2.0 13.5 3.0 4.5 1.5 6.0 1.5 6.5 1.5 14.5 3.0 6.0 1.5 4.0 6.0 0.2 2.5 1.5 4.0 1.0 4.0 0.8 3.0 1.0 6.5 2.0 8.0 92 21 56 54 28 66 121 \J1 ..j::'" w �Table 5.--Externa1 body measurements (mm), fresh-fixed weights (g), volumes (cc), and estimated conception dates for 4 embryos and 14 fetuses of 11 mule deer, 1964. Date-Age-Wt. Ratio of Mother and Measurements of Young Collection No. 128 1-7 1-7 .26 Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) EVisceratedWt./Body Length Ratio Uterine Horn (Left-Right) Sex (male, female, undetermined) Fresh Wt Fixed Wt Fresh Vol Czown-Rump Forehead-Rump Contour Length Head Length Head Breadth Auricle (Left) Foreleg Length Left Hind Leg Length Left Hind Foot Length Tail Length Scapula (metacromium to ischium) Chest Circumference Est. Age of Young (Days)+ Est. Conception Date (Month-Day)+ L. Undo .53 - 0.4 R. Undo .66 0.5 21. 6 39 11-30-63 130 1-21 11-7 .33 L. Undo 16.49 13.40 15.87 79 R. Undo 16.84 15.00 16.14 79 117 27 17 3 28 30 18 6 42 54 120 28 17 4 30 32 19 10 44 55 60 11-22-63 134 2-18 9-8 .30 136 3-3 2-9 .24 L. Male 193.7 182.1 189.3 R. Male 216.3 194.7 207.7 L. Female 275.5 271.6 268.0 R. Male 289.0 281.4 279.0 184 259 61 34.5 20 85 100 65 15 102 128 188 261 64 35.7 20 90 115 65 17 107 127 202 300 70 37 25 99 ll5 75 25 122 136 200 297 69 39 25 95 ll5 75 23 ll7 139 92 ll-18-63 97 11-26-63 VI .j::"" .j::"" �Table 5.--Externa1 body measurements (rom), fresh-fixed weights (g), volumes (cc), and estimated conception dates for 4 embryos and 14 fetuses of 11 mule deer, 1964. (continued). Date-Age-Wt. Ratio of Mother and Measurements of Young Collection No. Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt./Body Length Ratio Uterine Horn (Left-Right) Sex (male, female, undetermined) Fresh Wt Fixed Wt Fresh Vol Crown-Rump Forehead-Rump Contour Length Head Length Head Breadth Auricle (Left) Foreleg Length Left Hind Leg Length Left Hind Foot Length Tail Length Scapula (metacromium to ischium) Chest Circumference Est. Age of Young (Days)+ Est. Conception Date (Month-Day)+ L. ~ - ~ ~ --- ~ - - - 106 R. Female 382.4 368.3 368.2 L. Female 698.0 660 677 .5 R. Male 772.1 745 749.9 222 322 77 42 31 109 135 85 27 135 142 163 405 107 50 50 143 178 116 32 165 186 163 402 97 51 57 148 183 115 28 176 201 11-25-63 141 11-17-63 143 4-21 3-10 .26 028 4-16 2-10 .29 141 4-7 10-10 .28 137 3-10 1-9 .28 L. R. L. Female 1140 Male 1090 Female 1366.3 R. 1326.6 403 481 111 54 70 184 238. 152 44 210 221 134 12-4-63 334 475 108 54 67 180 220 145 67 192 217 353 511 117 58 71 195 245 164 38 218 240 140 12-3-63 \J1 ~ Vl �Table 5.--Externa1 body measurements (rom), fresh-fixed weights (g), volumes (cc), and estimated conception dates for 4 embryos and 14 fetuses of 11 mule deer, 1964. (continued). Date-Age-Wt. Ratio of Mother and Measurements of Young Collection No. 146 5-12 3-11 .27 Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt./Body Length Ratio Uterine Horn (Left-Right) Sex (male, female, undetermined Fresh Wt Fixed Wt Fresh Vol Crown-Rump Forehead-Rump Contour Length Head Length Head Breadth Auricle (Left) Foreleg Length Left Hind Leg Length Left Hind Foot Length Tail Length Scapula (metacromium to ischium) Chest Circumference Est. Age of Young (Days)+ Est. Conception Date (Month-Day)+ .25 L. R. Female 1610.0 390 577 125 59 73 233 257 189 50 228 271 361 551 121 56 70 220 243 178 47 220 247 150 12-14-63 152 6-23 2-0 .24 i-n Male 1955.0 + Based on the growth curves of: hind foot length, forehead-rump and ear auricles as well as the external morphology 148 5-26 L. R. L. R. Male 2745 Female 2720 403 610 141 65 92 264 297 213 59. 237 303 405 632 130 63 96 282 323 228 68 258 316 -~ .. ~ -~ -~- 160 12-18-63 170 1-5-64 length, forehead-rump-body weight ratio, as described by Hudson and Browman (1959). \Jl ~ 0\ �Table 6.--Prenata1 young sex ratios and litter sizes from 41 mule deer, 1961-62-63-64. Sex & No. of Prenatal YounS b~ Uterine Horn Total Right Left Male Female Undetermined Total 13 15 7 35 15 15 _7 37 Percent of Total 48.6 51.4 Ma1es/100 Females 87 100 28 30 -1i Percent of Total No. Mothers with Litter Size Singleton Twins Triplets Total 38.9 41.7 19.4 11 29 1 41 100.0 26.8 70.7 2.4 100.0 72 93* * This ratio does not differ significantly (P < .05) from equality. \J1 .j::" -..1 Table 7.--The distribution of conception dates (1961-62-63-64) estimated from 41 litters by the prenatal young growth curves of Hudson and Browman (1959). Weekly Interval Dates 1* 11 - Nov. 17 518 - Nov. 24 12 25 - Dec. 1 12 2 - Dec. 8 6 9 - Dec. 15 3 16 - Dec. 22 o 23 - Dec. 29 1 30 - Jan. 5 o 6 - Jan. 12 o 13 - Jan. 19 o 20 - Jan. 26 o 27 - Feb. 3 1+ 4 - Feb. 10 41 Total Extreme Dates were Nov. 17, 1964 and Feb. 7, 1963. Nov. Nov. Nov. Dec. Dec. Dec. Dec. Dec. Jan. Jan. Jan. Jan. Feb. + No. Estimated Conception Dates Percent of Total 2.4 12.2 29.3 29.3 14.6 7.3 0.0 2.4 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 2.4 100.0 �- 548 - Analyses of Male Material The gross morphology of the testes and prostate glands are presented chronologically in Table 8. No attempt at analysis or interpretation of these data will be made until field collections have been completed and the entire sample can be utilized. Discussion: In general, total sample sizes are still too small to permit quantitative interpretation. The small annual samples will not permit between-year comparisons. It is anticipated, however, that the total sample size will eventually permit adequate quantitative comparison of seasonal means by age class. LITERATURE CITED Anderson, A. E. 1962. Reproductive studies. WP5-J2 Completion Report, W~105-R-2. pp. 271-274 in Quarterly Report, Part 2. Colorado Dept. of Game, Fish and Parks, Denver. 161-339 pp. (processed). 1965. Reproductive studies. WP5-J2 Completion Report, W-105-R-4. pp. 165-193 in Game Research Report, January, 1965. Colorado Dept. Game, Fish and Parks, Denver. 246 pp. (processed). Cheatum, E. L. 1949. The use of corpora lutea for determining ovulation incidence and variations in the fertility of white-tailed deer. Cornell Veterinarian. 39(3):282-291. Hudson, P. and L. G. Browman. 1959. Embryonic and fetal development of the mule deer. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 22(3):295-304. Robinette, W. L., J. S. Gashwiler, D. A. Jones, and H. S. Crane. 1955. Fertility of mule deer in Utah. ,J. Wi1d1. Mgmt. 19(1):115-136. Robinette, W. S., D. A. Jones, G. Rogers, and J. S. Gashwiler. 1957. Notes on tooth development and wear for Rocky Mountain mule deer. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 21(2):134-153. �Table 8.--Measurements (rom), fresh wt (g), volumes (cc), and mean diameters (microns) of seminiferous from the testes of 27 mule deer and the fresh wt (g), of prostate glands, 1964. Date-Age-Wt Collection No. Ratio-Testis-G1and Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt/Body Length Ratio Testis (Left) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Testis (Right) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Prostate Gland Wt Mean Diam Semi. Tubu1es+ + 11 measurements tubules 129 1-14 0-7 .22 131 1-28 4-7 .38 132 2-4 1-8 .27 133 2-11 4-8 .39 135 2-25 0-8 .21 138 3-17 8-9 .38 024 4-6 1-10 142 4-8 7-10 .34 027 4-15 0-10 3.28 1.97 1.70 5.98 5.60 4.95 3.38 2.98 30.69 28.54 4.30 2.69 2.20 14.96 14.46 4.68 3.29 2.80 23.39 22.15 2.74 1.56 1.50 4.38 4.17 4.30 2.53 1.90 12.92 12.12 3.38 1.90 1.50 6.20 5.70 3.90 2.10 1.76 8.68 7.97 3.38 1.75 1.27 4.67 4.47 - I \J1 . from each testis. 3.28 1. 87 1.67 6.04 5.73 1.88 112.8 5.00 3.80 3.50 30.70 29.16 6.27 162.6 4.10 2.70 2.10 14.75 14.15 2.16 109.1 4.70 3.30 2.80 . 23.55 23.05 n.76 140.6 2.88 1.70 1.54 4.68 4.41 1.80 92.3 4.20 2.85 1.90 13.12 12.37 5.00 148.1 3.20 2.07 1.60 6.45 - 4.84 77 .3 4.00 2.09 1.53 8.24 7.91 5.19 120.2 3.20 1.80 1.40 4.83 4.59 1.65 64.5 ~ \D �Table 8.--Measurements (rom), fresh wt (g), volumes (cc), and mean diameters (microns) of seminiferous tubules from the testes of 27 mule deer and the fresh wt (g), of prostate glands, 1964. (continued) Collection No. Date-Age-Wt Ratio-Testis Gland Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt/Body Length Ratio Testis (Left) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol 144 4-28 9-10 .35 145 5-5 3-11 .32 147 5-19 4-11 .31 149 6-2 3-0 .29 150 6-9 6-0 .37 154 7-7 10-1 .43 030 7-29 1-1 160 8-17 1-2 .31 161 8-25 0-2 .18 3.60 2.50 1. 60 10.00 9.52 4.00 2.15 1. 70 10.28 9.85 4.19 2.65 2.05 12.70 12.19 4.04 2.35 1.88 9.67 9.21 3.96 2.55 2.02 11.43 10.89 3.90 2.70 1.98 13.45 12.70 4.00 2.42 2.30 14.72 13.93 4.00 2.56 2.35 16.65 15.95 1.50 0.96 0.70 0.75 0.73 V1 V1 Testis (Right) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Prostate Gland Wt Mean Diam Semi. Tubu1es+ + 11 measurements from each testis. o 3.56 2.40 1. 90 9.91 9.42 4.14 113.4 3.64 2.00 1.39 9.58 9.19 3.45 121.2 4.02 2.59 2.17 12.48 12.01 3.74 133.8 3.87 2.39 1. 97 9.31 8.92 3.44 127.5 3.70 2.58 1. 98 10.49 9.94 4.17 120.2 3.60 2.80 2.00 13.65 12.97 5.19 138.8 3.70 2.35 2.20 12.92 12.16 101.2 3.50 2.36 2.36 15.50 15.26 3.30 132.5 1.00 0.78 0.76 0.84 0.73 0.40 29.8 �-c: Table 8.--Measurements (rom), fresh wt (g), volumes (cc), and mean diameters (microns) of seminiferous tubules .from the testes of 27 mule deer and the fresh wt (g), of prostate glands, 1964. (continued) Collection No. Date-Age~wt .Pitf.io-TestisGland ~.;:: .~.-.'.. - .~ ....,.::- Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt/Body Length Ratio Testis (Left) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Testis (Right) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Prostate Gland Wt Mean Diam Semi. Tubu1es+ . + 11 measurements from each testis. * Slight dissection damage. 162 9-9 1-3 .27 165 9-29 1-3 .29 167 10-12 2-4 .42 168 10-20 3-4 .49 170 11-10 2-5 .37 171 11-17 6-5 .47 172 11-23 0-5 .24 174 12-15 1-6 .28 175 12-23 2-6 ,35 4.80 3.00 2.40 21.44 20.68 4.70 2.96 2.60 13.99 12.58 5.60 3.60 3.00 37.83 36.37 5.40 4.10 3.50 43.38 41.08 4.80 3.00 2.50 21. 32 20.37 5.38 3.74 2.60 36.40 35.04 2.30 1.77 1.40 4.75 4.63 4.35 2.98 2.50 21. 72 19.69 4.99 3.10 2.80 27.72 27.35 4.70 2.80 2.40 20.09 19.36 3.22 150.4 5.20 3.70 2.30 23.41 21.99 4.27 132.8 5.40 3.40 2.70 35.75 34.45 4.50 159.8 5.10 3.70 2.90 38.07 36.43 9.05 151. 7 4.90 3.40 2.70 23.85 22.85 7.50* 104.9 5.30 4.00 3.39 36.70 35.30 2.74 1.75 0.90 4.76 4.70 3.20 69.5 4.40 3.17 2.67 21.43 20.32 7.01 140.0 4.80 3.32 2.60 27.40 26.96 9.30 135.2 - 145.9 V1 V1 f-J �- 552 - Sears, H. S. 1955. Certain aspects of the reproductive physiology of the female mule deer. Unpub , Master's Thesis, Montana State Univ., Missoula, 88 pp. (typed copy). Swank, W. G. 1958. The mule deer in Arizona chaparral. Wildl. Bull. No.3. Arizona Game and Fish Dept., Phoenix~ 109 pp. Prepared by: Allen E. Anderson Approved by: Dean E. Medin Associate Wildlife Researcher Project Leader Date: . January 1 1965 Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �- 553 - State of JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH SEGMENT PROJECT COLORADO --------~~~~~--------------An Ecological Investigation of the Cache la Poudre Deer Herd, Colorado W-10S-R-5 Project No. Work Plan No. 5 Physiological Job No. 4 Sagebrush 1964 - December, 1964. Period Covered: Personnel: January, Studies Nutrition Julius G. Nagy ABSTRACT Two adult does and three fawns were acquired during the year. They received alfalfa hay of various quality, meadow hay, and a concentrate ration. Among hays, only excellent quality alfalfa hay was consumed in appreciable amounts, meadow hay was not consumed at all. Deer, both fawns (after a few months of age) and adults, did best on the concentrate ration. Fresh sagebrush, offered occasionally, was not taken. Two adults were rumen fistulated. the other after 6 weeks. One died within hours after the operation, Artemisia tridentata, !. ~ and!. frigida were collected from several locations in Colorado, the essential oils ~istilled off and the oil content calculated on a green and air dry matter basis. Remarks: Certain phases of the study were shifted to laboratory work and preliminary observations due to the lack of adult experimental animals. The work on the essential oil content of the three sagebrush species was also supported by the National Science Foundation. Recommendations: The establishment of deer pens with an experimental deer herd was recommended in 1963. This is again emphasized especially since lack of animals prevented the investigator from carrying out some of the objectives. It takes two years before a tame deer herd can be used in �- 554 experiments. Information is urgently needed, as emphasized in 1963, on rumen fistulation techniques, and other relatively;simple practical problems connected with wild ruminants such as everyday handling. Although data are still being gathered, there is a strong indication that some taxonomically similar sagebrush species differ in their essential oil content and consequently in their antibacterial action and digestibility. More time and effort on this phase of the investigations is strongl~ recommended. Objectives: General.--To deer nutrition. investigate Specific. -- (1) Techniques the status of sagebrush (Artemisia Determine deer feeding habits, particularly to sagebrush, using rumen fistulated deer. spp.) in with respect (2) Determine the effects of feeding different concentrations of the essential oils of sagebrush on rate of digestion using rumen fistulated deer. (3) Investigate (4) Examine the rumen bacterial wild deer. the effects of sudden diet changes on deer. species of domesticated and Used: Experimental animals.--Two female deer, each two years of age, were acquired in the spring of 1964 through the courtesy' of Dr. Robert W. Davis, College of Veterinary Medicine, Colorado State University. The animals, both raised in captivity, differed greatly in their temperament; one being quiet and friendly, the other nervous and docile. They received ad libitum alfalfa hay for a month, and also meadow hay for a few days, afte;-which 1 kg of concentrate was given daily to each animal (Table 1). In Table 2 the chemical analysis of the feed is given. Three fawns were also acquired in July an~ September through the courtesy of Clois E. Till and Glen A. Hinshaw, Colorado Department of Game, Fish and Parks. One fawn, only a few days old at the time of arrival, received cow's colostrum 4 times daily for a week. After that he received, along with the other fawn, ad libitum concentrated milk (Pet milk) diluted ,with equal amount of water 4 times daily during the first month and later twice daily. Milking was continued until December only for training purposes. They were taken from the enclosure occasionally to feed on native vegetation. Freshly cut forbs and twigs of trees and shrubs were given frequently after the first week along with the previously described concentrate ration. Alfalfa hay was always available to the animals. �- 555 - Table l.--Composition of concentrate used as deer feed.l/ Ingredients lbs. per 2 tons Rolled barley , Chopped corn Bran Rolled milo High Vitamin A Supplement Added to this: approximately 1/ 600.0 400.0 200.0 400.0 400.0 4 to 5 percent molasses Formula used by Dr. George R. McCahan, for deer feeding. Table 2.--Analysis of concentrate Jr., Colorado used as deer feed.l/ Percent Component 6.09 93.91 17.58 2.90 6.14 5.09 68.29 Moisture Dry Matter Crude Protein Ether Extract Crude Fiber Ash Nitrogen-Free Extract 17 Analyzed State University, in the Animal Nutrition Laboratory, Colorado State University. Rumen fistulation.--The two adult deer were fistulated by Dr. James T. Ingram at the Veterinary Hospital, Colorado State University. A hard plastic plug (4 cm inside diameter) provided with two hard plastic washers (12 cm outside diameter) was used for both animals. Investigations of Artemisia spp.; selection and location of sampling sites.--Seasonal variations in the essential oil content of Artemisia tridentata, A. ~, and ~. frigida have been investigated. A. tridentata is being collected seasonally at two sampling sites in the Sevenmile Creek region of Larimer County. Besides these permanent sites A. tridentata samples were collected in the fall of 1964 for a survey type of study from the following localities in Colorado: Walden, Hayden, Craig, Elk Springs, Artesia, Meeker, Montrose, Co r t ez , Fort Garland and Sargents �- 556 - (close to Monarch Pass). ~. ~ is being collected seasonally approximately 8 miles northwest of Elk Springs, Colorado. ~. frigida collections are made at two locations in Larimer County . •.. Plant twigs are taken individually with clippers and the annual growth of each twig placed in plastic containers. Flowering shoots are collected separately from twigs and leaves. The filled containers are placed in insulated bags containing dry ice and shipped into the laboratory at Colorado State University. In the laboratory the plant material is cut up further in lengths of about 1 cm, mixed thoroughly in a large container, divided into 100 g portions and kept frozen until distillation. Samples for dry matter determination ate air dried for 2 weeks. Distillation of the plant material is carried out in a round bottom flask, provided with a 24 cm long condenser, for 6 hours. Investigations on deer rumen bacteria.--Methods on this phase of the study were described in detail in 1963 and are presently modified. For these reasons, this phase will be discussed in detail in 1965. �- 557 SAGEBRUSH NUTRITION Julius G. Nagy Results and Discussion: Feeding observations.--The two adult deer, as well as the fa~vns,seemed to be selective regarding the type of hay they accepted. Excellent quality alfalfa hay was consumed well, poor quality only in token amounts, and meadow hay was not taken at all. The adults apparently lost weight on the alfalfa hay diet but this weight loss might be attributed to changes of hay, such as meadow hay, of which appreciable amounts were taken. On the described concentrate diet deer seem to do well, even if no hay is given. Fawns start to nibble on solid food at one week of age. Although fresh sagebrush (~. tridentata) leaves and twigs have been offered several times to all animals, no intake from this plant has been observed. Rumen fistulation.--Both animals died before investigations could be carried out. The previously described docile deer died with hours after the operation without regaining consciousness from anaesthesia. The other animal, found to be pregnant and carrying two fawns, died 6 weeks after the operation. It is believed that pregnancy, time of year (pelage shedding), and the type of plug (hard plastic) all contributed to death. The hard plastic plug seems to irritate the rumen wall, and interfere with normal rumen movements. Investigations on Artemisia spp.--Data is being accumulated and will be presented in detail in 1965. Investigations on deer rumen bacteria.--Will be continued and presented in 1965. Prepared by: Julius G. Nagy Date: January, 1965 Approved by: Dean E. Medin Project Leader ------------ Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator ��Jarll.tary'; - 559 - JOB COMPLETION RESEARCH PROJECT REPORT SEGMENT S ta te of __ ..:;C:..;o:..;l:.:o:.,:r::..;a::;d::;o::.------An Ecological Investigation of the Cache la Poudre Deer Herd, Colorado Pro je ct No. --'-'W_-~lc..:.O.:..S_-.:..R:......:;.S _ Work Plan No. 6 -----~------------- Job No. Period 2 covered: Personnel: Roger January, 1964 through Behavior and Movement Studies Seasonal Movements of Mule Deer in the Cache la Poudre Drainage December, 1964. J. Siglin ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS: This project was sponsored by the Colorado Cooperative Wildlife Research Unit which is supported by the following agencies: The Colorado Game, Fish, and Parks Department; the Bureau of Sport Fisheries and Wildlife; the College of Forestry and Range Management, Colorado State University; and the Wildlife Management Institute. Additional support was obtained from the United States Atomic Energy Commission. I am indebted to Dr. Lee E. Yeager, former Unit Leader and Major professor, who suggested the original basic study and obtained the necessary financial support. Dr. Fred A. Glover, who replaced Dr. Yeager as Unit Leader, served as my major professor during the final phases of the project and his guidance, counsel, and critical review of the manuscript are greatly appreciated. I am indebted to the members of the Graduate Committee: Dr. Harold W. Steinhoff, Professor, Department of Forest Recreation and Wildlife Conservation: Mr. Richard N. Denney, Biologist, Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department; and Dr. David V. Harris, Professor, Department of Geology, for advice concerning the project and for critically reviewing the manuscript. Special thanks are due Mr. Dean E. Medin, and Parks Department, and Leader, Federal Restoration Project, W-lOS-R, who offered several phases of the study. Biologist, Coloardo Game, Fish Aid in Fish and Wildlife advice and assistance in Mr. Michael J. Dorrance, graduate student, Coloardo Cooperative Wildlife Research Unit contributed in numerous ways to the study as well as assisting in capturing and marking deer. 1965 �- 560 - Dr. G. R. McCahan, DVM, Department of Radiology, and advice on drug capture techniques. offered valuable assistance Other personnel who helped in one way or another and deserve thanks include: Leland M. Queal, o. Doyle Markham, William E. Jones, Gary L. Brown, Allen E. Anderson, R. Bruce Gill, Thomas Hakonson, O. Burton Wastcoat, Vincent H. Reid, and Dr. Robert W. Davis. Finally, I am indebted most of all to my wife, Beverly, whose patience, understanding and hard work helped make all of this possible. ABSTRACT: The seasonal movements of mule deer in the Cache la Poudre drainage, west of Fort Collins, Colorado, were studied over a two year period from January, 1963 to December, 1964. The primary objective was to determine the pattern of seasonal movements. Incidental to this was the development of techinques whereby the above objective might be accomplished. In order to mark deer so that their movements could be determined, three capture methods were tried: box-trapping, drug capture, and hand capture of fawns. Of these methods, box-trapping was the most successful. Marking methods consisted of the use of ear streamers, ear tags, collars with no. 8 sheep bells attached, and radio transmitters. Tagging devices which resembled a snare, and automatically collared deer walking into them were used on a large scale to mark deer on both winter and summer ranges. Results with these devices compared favorably with the results obtained through box-trapping. 1. The average distance traveled by deer which migrated miles, with a range of three to 23 miles. was 12.8 2. The major portion of the deer herd moved west and southwest in going from winter to summer range. This was expected since the higher elevations are located in those directions with respect to the bulk of the winter range. 3. Deer occupying any given segment or portion of the winter range did not move to a common summering area, but scattered to different parts of the summer range. It ~as theorized that deer from a given segment of the summer range migrate to separate wintering areas although no conclusive data were obtained to support this theory. �- 561 - 4. The western boundary of the Poudre herd was determined to be the crest of the Medicine Bow Range. The southern boundary is indefinite but it was decided that the majority of deer migrating in that direction remain within the Poudre drainage. The contact of the foothills with the plains was considered the eastern boundary of the Poudre herd. From the standpoint of seasonal movements and practical management, the northern boundary was determined to be the Colorado state line. 5. It was concluded that the Poudre River was not a barrier to the movements of deer, and that deer frequently crossed major divides between drainages, within the general boundaries defined above. Although timing of movements and possible causes were not determined, a general statement on the subject was made, which may apply to the Poudre deer herd. ��- 563 - Seasonal Movements of Mule Deer in the Cache la Poudre Drainage Roger J. Siglin INTRODUCTION Objectives Seasonal movements constitute one of the most interesting aspects of mule deer (Odocoileus hemionus) life history. It is common knowledge that many herds migrate between winter and summer ranges, but details of these movements are often guesses resulting from casual observations. Studies such as those by Russell (1932), Leopold et al. (1951), Ashcraft (1961), Zalunardo (1962), and Gruell and Papez (1963) have added much to the knowledge of seasonal movements of specific deer herds. Knowledge of seasonal movements and their causes could have valuable applications in the management of deer as.well as contributing to the general knowledge of the species. For this purpose, the Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department authorized a project, in 1963, to study seasonal movements of mule deer in the Cache la Poudre River drainage. Deer in this drainage were regarded as having migratory tendencies, but factual data were lacking. The major effort in this investigation was directed towards marking deer on the winter range and then locating them on the summer range. The Problem The primary objective of this study was to determine the pattern of seasonal movements of mule deer in the Cache la Poudre drainage. Incidental to this was the development of techniques whereby the above objective might be accomplished. Problem Analysis . The problem was resolved into the following questions: 1. How far do the deer migrate? 2. In what directions do they migrate? 3. Do segments of the winter herd move to a common summering area? �-564 - 4. What are the general boundaries of the Poudre Herd? 5. What methods are best suited to answer the above questions? Delimitations The delimitations of this investigation were as follows: 1. Study area location - The study area was located west of Fort Collins, Colorado, within the Roosevelt National Forest and consisted of the Cache la Poudre River drainage and that portion of the Laramie River drainage lying south of T12N. 2. Period of study - January, 1963 through December, 1964. Definition of terms For the purposes of this thesis the following terminology was employed: Poudre ~herd - Those deer which normally wintered within that portion of the Poudre drainage which is in the mountains. Seasonal movement - Movement (change of geographic location) which appeared to be a response to change in environmental conditions related to seasonal climatic changes. Pattern of movement Distance and direction individuals moved in relation to movements of other individuals and topographic features. Migratory deer - Those whose summer and winter ranges were not contiguous. Resident ~ identical. ~ - Those whose summer and winter ranges were contiguous or - An automatic tagging device set in a position to collar a deer. �DESCRIPTION OF STUDY AREA Location The study area was located west of Fort Collins, Colorado, in the Front Range of the Southern Rocky Mountains. Generally speaking, the entire portion of Larimer County with in the Front Range can be considered the study area although emphasis was placed on the Cache 1a Poudre River drainage (Fig. 1). Exact boundaries are difficult to define because they must, to some extent, be determined by the seasonal movements of the Poudre deer herd. Topography In overall aspect the topography of the study area could be termed rugged. Maximum relief was approximately 8,300 feet as measured between Hagues Peak (13,560 feet) in Rocky Mountain National Park and the mouth of the Poudre Canyon (5,200 feet). Within Poudre Canyon the relief commonly varied from 1,500 to 2,000 feet from the canyon floor to ridgetops less than one mile distant. The western and southwestern limits of the study area were bounded by mountain ranges with many peaks in excess of 11,000 feet. Two rather extensive areas within the study area provided a striking contrast to the general ruggedness of the area. They were Green Ridge and the area surrounding Red Feather Lakes (Fig. 1), which were pedip1ain remnants representing two separate erosion cycles within the Tertiary Period (Harris, 1963). The top of Green Rtdge forms a relatively flat expanse which is about 18 miles long and varies in width from approximately one to five miles. The pedip1ain remnant surrounding Red Feather Lakes was roughly circular in shape with a diameter of about six miles. It is characterized by an irregular topography formed by many small isolated hills and intervening basins, some of which contain permanent bodies of water. Much of the topography above 8,000 feet is modified by Pleistocene glaciation, and such features as U-shaped valleys, cirques, and moraines were common. Within the Poudre Canyon, Home Moraine form a classic example of a terminal moraine and represented the furtherest extent of Pleistocene glaciation down the Canyon. Geology The following discussion is based on the work of Lovering and Goddard (1950)~ �/',,/ I \ /" I " ( ( '\ \ \ (.., I \ .. \~ Q) 0- \~ Red Feather '1:f Lakes ~ ~ '\0 ,~ \d)<i '<0 \~ \ ~ \J1 ~ Ch""'~_ 0\ 0\ I "1 " )' \ \ ft. Collins L~~~ c•••• I I I I , ~ Loveland l..p/l<e~~ J o 5 10 15 Scale fig. 1. Map of LarLmer County, Colorado. eastern extent of the foothills. Park ,- I I I I Dashed line represents the - �Precambrian granite, gneiss, and schist are the dominant rock types within the study area. They comprise a minimum of 80 per cent of the total rock exposure and consist primarily of the Idaho Springs formation and the Silver Plume granite which are about equally represented. The Idaho Springs formation is metamorphic and consists chiefly of quartzboitite schists and quartz-biotite-sillimanite schists. Quartzite, or quartz schist, occurs along the eastern border of the Precambrian exposure within the study area. The Silver Plume granite is a pinkish gray, medium-grained, slightly porphyritic, biotite granite, composed chiefly of pink and gray feldspars, smoky quartz, and biotite. A dominant geologic feature, although compr1s1ng a small part of the study area, are the hogbacks or ridges of sedimentary rock formations which form the eastern boundary of the study area. These formations are Paleozoic and Mesozoic in age and dip towards the east. Dominant ridge formers are the Ingleside sandstone (Permian) and the Dakota sandstone (Cretaceous). At the heads of the Cache la Poudre and Lar'amf,e Rivers, near Cameron Pass, a series of Miocene lavas rest on erosion surfaces which cut across Precambrian rocks. Specimen Mountain which lies just within the northwest border of Rocky Mountain National Park is a deeply eroded pre-Pleistocene Volcano and is considered the probable source of the lava flows mentioned. Northeast of Cameron Pass there are many dikes and small stocks of Tertiary age, which are expecially abundant in the Manhattan area about 20 miles northeast of the pass. Climate The climate within the study area is extremely varied because of differences in altitude and slope aspect, however, the general climatic pattern is continental in nature (Marr, 1961)., Cool nights and warm sunny days characterize the summer months. The winters are long and cold, but persistant extremes of low temperatures and snow are infrequent except at the higher elevations (Loveless, 1963). The average elevation. annual precipitation varies from 15 to 30+ inches depending on the The wettest periods are April-May and July-August (Robbins, 1910). �- 568 - Vegetation Source of scientific names is Harrington (1954). is Costello in Harrington (1954). Source of common names Because of the extreme topographic relief, several distinct plant communities or zones are found within the study area. As classified by Costello in Harrington (1954) they are: mountain-shrub, ponderosa pine, Douglas-fir, spruce-fir, and alpine. The following description of these zones is based on the works of Costello in Harrington (1954 and Dietz, Udall, and Yeager (1962). The lowest zone found in the study area is the mountain-shrub which is dominated by mountain mahogany (Cercocarpusmontanus Raf.). This zone begins at 5,000 feet and extends up to 7,500 feet in favorable locations. Other common plants of this zone are bitterbrush (Purshia tridentata [Pursh] DC'.), big rabbitbrush (Chrysothamnusnauseosus [Pallus] Britt.), skunkbush (Rhus trilobata Nutt. ex T. and G.), ninebark (Physocarpus spp. Maxim), and various species of Ribes L. Scattered clumps of Rocky Mountain juniper (Juniperus scopulorum Sarg.) and common juniper (Juniperus communis L.) are found on hillsides and in small drainages. Common grasses of this zone are cheat grass (Bromus tectorum L.), blue grama (Bouteloua gracilis [H.B.K.] Lag.), blue grasses (Poa spp. L.), needle grass (Stipa comata Trin. and Rupr. and ~. robusta [Vasey] Scribn.), western wheat grass (Agropyron smithii Rydb.), mountain muhly (Muhlenbergia montana [Nutt.]Hitchc.), and little blue stem (Andropogon scoparious Michx.). The ponderosa pine (Pinus ponderosa Dougl. ex P. Lawson), Douglas-fir (Pseudotsugo taxifolia [Poir] Britt.)l/ zone begins near the 6,000 foot level but only on north-facing slopes. At higher elevations this zone expands to cover ridge tops and pockets of pine-fir occur within the mountainshrub zone wherever moisture conditions are adequate. Within the mountainshrub and ponderosa pine-Douglas-fir zones a streamside community is found with narrow-leaf cottonwood (Populus,angustifolia James), water birch (Betula occidentalis Hook), thinleaf alder (alnus tenufolia Nutt.), and various species of willow (Salix spp. L.) predominating. At elevations above 7,000 feet small stands of aspen (Populus tremuloides Michx.) are occasionally encountered along stream courses. The spruce-fir zone begins near the 8,000 foot level and extends up to the limit of tree growth. The climax trees are Engelmann spruce (Picea engelmanii Parry) and alpine fir (Abies lasiocarpa [Hook.] Nutt.). Extensive stands of aspen and lodgepole pine (Pinus contorta Englem.) 11 Pseudotsuga menziesii of some authors. �occur within this zone. The understory consists primarily of Vaccinium L., Stipa L., Arnica L., and Carex L. Willow and aspen occur along streams draining the region. Moist meadows are connnonwithin the spruce-fir zone· and contain various species of sedges and.rushes, as well as alpine bluegrass (~alpina L.), tufted hairgrass (Deschampsia atropurpurea [Wahl.] Scheele), spike trisetum (Trisetum spicatum [L.] Richt.), and bentrass (Agrostis scabra [Trin.] Swallen). Sagebrush (Artemisia tridentata Nutt.) extensions occur in both the ponderosa pine-Douglas-Fir and spruce-fir zones. The alpine zone begins at the upper limit of tree growth and extends to the highest mountain tops. This zone is characterized by low growing grasses, sedges, and forbs. For a detailed description of the alpine zone as well as others mentioned the reader is referred to Costello in Harrington (1954), and Marr (1961). A transition belt (sub-alpine zone) connnonly occurs where the spruce-fir and alpine zones come in contact. This transition belt is often characterized by decumbent or scrubby trees (krumholz). Within the sub-alpine belt and extending down into the spruce-fir zone a connnunity dominated by several species of willow and the mountain bog birch (Betula glandu10sa Michx.) occurs on wet, marshy soils. This cOtmnunity reaches a height of three to four feet, and constitutes some of the most favorable deer habitat on the upper summer range (above 10,500 ft.). �- 570 - METHODS AND MATERIALS In attempting to answer the questions posed in the problem analysis it was obvious that this could best be accomplished by obtaining data on the movements of individual deer, which required capturing deer and marking them in a manner which allowed identification at a distance. This proved to be difficult and much of the effort in this project was directed towards capture and marking techniques. This chapter describes the methods and materials used in capturing and marking deer and the procedure followed in determining movements. The results obtained with the different methods will be discussed in a later chapter. Capture Methods 1. Box-trapping.--Twenty-four box-traps were constructed at an approximate cost of 42 dollars each. The traps were similar to those described by Riordan (1949), with the following modifications: trap doors were made of 5/8 inch plywood; width was changed to two and one-half feet; and the trigger mechanism was changed. 2. Drug capture.--Two drugs were used to capture deer; nicotine alkaloid and Serny1an. The equipment used to deliver the drug and the nicotine alkaloid (Cap-Chur-So1) was purchased from the Palmer Chemical and Equipment Co., Inc., King Drive, R. R. 4, Douglasville, Georgia. Two types of guns were used, both sold by the Palmer Co. One was a .50 caliber C02 Crosman (Cap-Chur gun) and the other was a 32-gauge, single-shot shotgun (Powder Projector). Syringes used with the guns had a capacity of 1 cc of liquid drug. When using the Powder Projector the syringes are seated in a standard 32-gauge shotgun shell loaded with 3-3/4 grains of black powder. 3. Hand capture.--Fawns tured by hand with or without Tagging up to approximately a net. , two weeks old were cap- Methods Verme (1962) devised a modified snare which, when set along a trail, automatically collared and released a deer walking into it. This technique was used in this study to mark deer on both winter and summer ranges. Figs. 2 and 3 show the construction and method 'of setting the snares or "automatic tagging devices" as Verme called them. Table 1 gives the list of materials and cost. The ones used in this study differ from those used by Verme in that a different type of snap was used, changes were made in the method of attachment of the no. 14 wire to the snap, and only one ring was used on the end of the collar opposite the snap. �- 571 - Table 1. List of materials and cost of construction matic tagging device. for a single auto Cost Item 36 inches of l~ inch polyethylene rope. 3/4 inch galvanized ring. • • • • 4 feet of no. 14 galvanized wire. 10 inches of no. 9 galvanized wire. Coiled spring Metal sleeve (Reliable no. 10x12-J-2. Available from Graybar Electric Co., Inc., 104 Wazee Mkt., Denver, Colorado). . • •.•. Labor . . . TOTAL 0 • • • • 0 0 • 0 • • • • 0 • o • 0 0 • 0 0 W 0 • 0 op • 0 • • u 0 • • 0 • 0 •• 0 • . $ 0.075 • • 0.070 0.012 0.003 0.100 0.110 0.750 $ 1.120 Numbered tags (Fig. 4) were attached to the tagging devices to allow individual recognition at a distance and no. 8 sheep bells also were attached to draw attention to marked deer. Deer which were captured in box-traps were marked in a variety of ways (Appendix D). Some were collared with the same polyethylene rope with attached tags and bells as were used with the automatic tagging devices. Others were collared with the type shown in Fig. 6. In addition to the collars, ear tags (Fig. 5) were attached to each ear, in some instances with a plastic streamer fastened to the ear tag. Fawns were marked with ear tags and streamers. Also, collars were placed on fawns at first, but this was discontinued because of the difficulty in keeping a collar on a fawn. One fawn was known to have caught one front leg in a collar. Appendices C, D and E list the automatic tagging devices missing and presumed on deer. Appendix F gives the marking methods used on each of the captured deer. Radio-tracking Radio-transmitters were attached to several box-trapped deer for the purpose of following their seasonal movements. Figs. 7 and 8 show construction details and specifications. Cost, including labor, was 40 dollars each. Receiving equipment consisted of one SX-110 Hallicrafters receiver for use in a vehicle and one Viscount 660 portable receiver modified to receive signals in the 27 megacycle range. Whip and directional loop antennas were used with both receivers. A hand-held frequency calibrator'was constructed to facilitate tuning the receivers to the exact frequencies of the different �- 572 Snap (for details of construction see Fig. 11) »> Galvanized ring Fig. 2. Drawing showing complete automatic tagging device. Fig. 3. Drawing showing method of setting the automatic tagging devices. �- 573 - "TI ~ () OG') rl!O>~ c:"~ zor Vl/Tl (.,-00 0-1 r !=Jo c:::> Fig. 5. Ear tags used on deer (actual size). Fig. 4. Numbered tag attached to deer collars (actual size). Collar and buckle c ::;) ( ) Buckle Fig. 6. Wide plastic collar and buckle which was put on three of the captured deer (approximately one-half actual size). �- 574 - ANT. x (I L2 RI C2 C3 + _ 9V R2 X Citizen's band crystel Ll 20 turns #24 enameled wire on Millen 4500 coil form Cl 5-25 uuf ceramic trimmer nco to resonate 11 to crystal frequency L2 3 turns over Ll at cold end of 11 C2 56 uf, 15 volt electrolytic (tantalum) Rl 500-1000 ohms, ! watt (values of C2 and Rl adjusted to give desired repetition rate) C3 0.01 uf disc ceramic R2 T 2NI051 or 2N2118 germanium transistor 58 K ohms, ! watt Battery source is 24 Mallory RM-3-R mercury batteries connected seriesparallel. Fig. 7Q Schematic diagram and parts list for transmitters used on deer. �- 575 Scale -- Approximately actual size one-half /Antenna _--f---... / (3 foot) Cup filled with silas tic rubber Transmitter .............• (2 rows) L----4uL_Wire leads connecting transmitter to batteries Double collar made from 1~1I plastic strip ~ connecting Counter sunk Vbolt 12 batteries in two rows of six each in two rows of six each Fig. 8. Drawing showing comrylete transmitter unit ready for attachment to deer.--The transmitter and batteries are notted in plastic. The antenna base is soldered into a hole drilled in the end of the bolt which fastens the cup filled with silastic rubber to the collar. �- 576 - transmitters placed on deer. The circuit for the frequency calibrator was identical to the transmitter circuit (Fig. 7) except C2 and the antenna were left out. Location of Marked Deer Sight records of marked deer were recorded by personnel of the Game, Fish, and Parks Department, U. S. Forest Service and National Park Service, as well as other persons working or vacationing in the study area. To publicize the need for data on marked deer, form letters (Appendix H) were sent to persons living in the study area and distributed to Forest Service personnel working in the area. Articles also were printed in local newspapers and given coverage over local radio stations. After receiving reports of marked deer, every effort was made to locate those deer and determine collar colors, tag numbers, and other pertinent data when observer reports did not give such information. �- 577 - RESULTS Capture and Marking Methods Box-trapping The first attempt to capture deer in box-traps was made on the summer range, in 1963, in the vicinity of Long Draw Reservoir, on the northwest boundary of Rocky Mountain National Park. Two traps were set up and salt blocks used as bait. The salt was first placed at both ends of the traps and deer were observed licking it within two days. Before an attempt could be made to lure deer completely inside the traps, catt1ement put out salt for livestock and deer no longer went near the traps. Alfalfa hay and pellets were also tried as bait, but without success. In December, 1963, 24 traps were set on the Poudre winter range. Appendix B shows the locations of these traps. Baiting of the traps began the first week of January. On the 28th of March the first deer was caught in a trap located near Home Morairte (Appendix B). Between March 28 and April 10, 16 deer (including one recapture) were caught in six box-traps (five traps between Roaring Creek and Home Moraine, and first trap below Rustic [Appendix B] ). The first four deer captured were equipped with transmitters. The remainder were collared and ear tagged except for two which were killed by the falling trap door and two which were turned loose without being marked, for la~k of assistance in handling them. The deer that were caught had been lured to the traps using alfalfa hay as bait. Other baits, which were tried without lsuccess, were corn silage, salt, cake block, ground corn, and rolled oats. i One factor which no doubt made it difficult to trap deer was the generally mild winter. Except for the uppermost winter range the southern exposures were free of snow with the exception of three or four periods in February and March when snow remained a day or two. In the summer of 1964, three traps were set in the same general area as during the previous summer. Salt was again used as bait and nine deer were captured, which included three recaptures. One of the deer, a yearling buck, died of undetermined causes while being handled. Three of the deer were equipped with transmitters and ear tags with streamers. The remaining two were tagged with collars and ear tags with streamers. Hand Capture of Fawns Seven fawns were captured and marked between June 21 and July 3, 1963, and four were captured and marked between June 22 and June 24, 1964, in the vicinity of Long Draw Reservoir. �- 578 - Drug Capture Of the capture methods used, drug capture proved the least successful. Two deer were captured on the summer range in 1963, using the Palmer Cap-Chur gun and nicotine alkaloid as the drug. The first deer, a yearling doe, was hit at the top of the right scapula using a 400 mg dose of the drug. Estimated weight of the doe was 75 pounds. After being hit she ran approximately 40 yards,then stopped and began feeding. No reaction to the drug was noted for one minute and 40 seconds, whereupon the doe made a sudden dash and fell down twice before dropping to the ground. When the deer was reached it was apparent that it was having difficulty breathing. Artificial respiration was applied intermittently for approximately 13 minutes after which the doe appeared to breathe normally. Observations were made on the doe for two hours. During this time it would try to rise occasionally and then lie quietly, appearing exhausted. It appeared that nothing more could be done so a collar and ear tags were attached and the deer was left where it had fallen. The next morning it was gone. Twelve days later it was seen feeding in the same area. The second deer, an adult doe, was hit somewhere in the left side with a 450 mg dose. The reaction of this deer was much the same as the first. It ran about 100 feet, then began feeding. After three minutes had elapsed it made a dash down a small hill, then stumbled and somersaulted through the air. It had difficulty breathing for the first eight minutes and artificial respiration was applied. Forty minutes after being shot the deer resumed normal breathing. It was observed for three hours during which time it made no attempt to rnove. At 5:30 A.M. the next morning it was found dead in the position it had been left the previous night. A necropsy disclosed a ruptured liver, hemorrhaging of the lungs, and a possible broken neck. Several other deer were shot using the Cap-Chur gun, but they either disappeared before the drug took effect or the drug was not injected from the syringe. Drug capture was tried next in March, 1964, on the winter range, in an attempt to obtain deer to be equipped with radio transmitters. In preparation for this G.R. McCahan, Jr., DVM, tested two drugs on penned deer in an effort to find something better than nicotine alkaloid. F1axedil was first tried on two deer, both of which died although an antidote (Tensilon) was given. Next, Sernylan (phencyclidine-hydrochloride) was tried with satisfactory results. Thirty-two tests were made, with the following results: Four produced no effect; 23 were successfully immobilized; one deer died. Table 2, prepared by McCahan, summarizes the data on the test with Sernylan. The lowest effective dosage was 1.2 mg per pound of body weight, but dosages �- 579 - up to 1.88 mg were used without any harmful effects. during the remainder of the attempts at drug capture. Sernylan was used Several days in March, 1964, were spent hunting in the study area with the Powder Projector which is considered superior to the Cap-Chur gun because of greater range and accuracy. Six deer were shot at using the Powder Projector with only one known hit. In this case an adult buck was hit in the right hip from a distance of 15 yards. The buck ran a short way,then resumed feeding in an open meadow. It was observed for 30 minutes before it moved out of sight in heavy timber and no effect of the drug was observed during this time. The whole syringe apparently penetrated the flesh, for a blood trail was found where the deer had wandered around in the meadow. It is possible the drug was washed out by the blood. The syringe could not be found. Three deer were captured outside the study area and transported to deer pens in Fort Collins to replace the penned deer killed by Flaxedil. The first deer, an adult doe, was captured March 11. She started moving just as the syringe was fired and it appeared to strike her low on the right hind leg. The drug (200 mg) took effect in about 10 minutes. She became very unsteady in the hind quarters which is the characteristic reaction, and was captured with some difficulty 10 minutes later. She died that night and a necropsy disclosed hemorrhage of the lungs, possibly caused by injuries received as the result of several falls the deer took before it was captured. The second deer, another adult doe, was captured March 12. She was hit in the left hip with a 200 mg dose. The drug took effect in seven minutes and she was captured in another 15 minutes. This deer was transported to the pens where she appeared to be in fair condition. She was unsteady but could hold her head up. The next day she was checked and found walking around the pen, but ignored food and water that was available. The following day she was dead and a necropsy disclosed no internal damage. Her stomach was empty so she apparently had not eaten since being captured. The third deer, an adult buck, was also captured March 12. It was shot in the right hip with a 200 mg dose. The drug took effect in six minutes and the deer laid down in another nine minutes and did not get up again. It was transported to the deer pens where it died the next afternoon without ever regaining its feet. It was also necropsied and showed no signs of internal damage. These results are very puzzling considering the success obtained using Sernylan on penned deer. It is possible that the additional stress of transporting the deer proved too much in combination with the effects of the drug. G.R. McCahan, DVM, who necropsied the deer had no other explanation to offer. �- 580 - Table 2. Results using Sernylan (Cl-395, Parke, Davis & Co.) to immobilize mule deer.* Deer Wt in no. Sex 1bs 1 F 1ft 2 3 F F 4 1ft 5 6 F F 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1H5 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 1127 28 29 '30 31 32 F M M F M F F F F M M M F F F M M F F F F F F M F F M 170 160 150 160 140 140 175 170 120 180 160 80 90 80 190 200 180 160 150 140 190 190 150 160 140 135 140 150 150 160 160 190 Dose mg Mg/ 1b Conc /cc Result 300 200 160 160 225 100 150 200 225 225 225 65 75 75 300 200 225 225 200 200 1.76 1.25 1.06 1.00 1.61 0.71 0.86 1.18 1.88 1.25 1.40 0.81 0.83 0.94 1.58 1.00 1.25 1.40 100 100 100 100 200 200 200 100 100 100 100 200 200 200 100 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 100 100 100 100 100 200 200 100 150 230 230 200 180 160 160 170 170 160 250 160 300 1..33 1.43 1.21 1.21 1.33 1.10 1.15 1.20 1. 20 1.13 1.06 1.55 1.00 1.60 Remarks Immobilized No effect No effect No effect Immobilized Ataxia Immobilized Broken needle on syringe Divided dose " " " " " " " No effect Immobilized Divided dose " " " " 11 11 11 " Slight bloat 11 i1 Ataxia Immobilized Ataxia Immobilized Ataxia Immobilized Death Syringe disconnected In rut Intraperitoneal injection In rut Calculation of success Dose in mb/lb > 0.6 > 0.8 > 1.0 ~ 1.2 ~ 1.4 ~ 1.6 ~ 1.8 Nn. successfully immobiliz'ed 23 Nn.attempted 28 23 27 19 23 14 14 ok Prepared by G. R. McCahan, Jr., DVM, 11/12/64. 1F Not included in calculation of 8uccess. Only intraperitnneal injection. 7 7 3 3 Remainder were intramuscular. 1 1 �- 581 - Automatic Tagging Devices A new type of snap was developed for the tagging device because the one used by Verme (1962) could not be ordered in time for testing on the winter range in the spring of 1963. Eighty-four of the devices using the snap shown in Fig. 9 were set on the winter range between March 1 and 20 and removed 10 to 14 weeks later. The results are shown in Table 3. Table 3. Results with the automatic winter of 1962-63. tagging devices Undisturbed and intact Sets non-functional for various reasons Sets could not be located Collars found lying near where they were set Collars missing during the 39 (46.4%) 13 (15.5%) 12 (14.3%) 11 (13.1%) 9 (lO~7%) The sets which could not be located may involve some deer successfully tagged. However, because of the difficulty of describing accurately the locations of several of the sets there is a remote possibility that some were overlooked at the time of removal. The nine collars missing were assumed on deer because a diligent search was made of the areas where they had been set. In the case of the 13 non-functional sets, some had been pushed aside, presumably by deer; some were not securely set in the correct position and had fallen down; and one showed evidence of human tampering. The tagging devices next were used on the summer range in 1963, with 38 set out. The results are shown in Table 4. Table 4. Results with the automatic summer of 1963. tagging devices Collars found lying near where they were set Undisturbed and intact Collars missing Sets non-functional for various reasons Snares with large loops, sprung but intact during the 16 (42.1%) 7 (18.3%) 5 (13.2%) 5 (13.2%) 5 (13.2%) Cattle undoubtedly broke some of the sets, and a calf was seen wearing one of the collars, but was later captured and the collar removed. Because of this problem with cattle the results for the summer of 1963 are not compared with the results for the other periods in Table 7~ �- 582 - ~NO. 9 galvanized wire Sliding crimp! No. Steel sleeve (hollow) SIDE VIFiN Fig. 9. Snap used during the winter of 1962-63 with the automatic tagging devices (actual size).--The sliding ring enters the snap and the notched no. 14 wire breaks in the ensuing struggle by the deer. Hook in no. 14 wire Hole drilled in hollow sleeve OBLIQUE VIEW" Figo 10. Snap used during the summer of 1963 and winter of 1963-64, with the automatic tagging devices (actual size).--The sliding ring enters the snap and catches under the hook in the no. 14 wire. A continued pull straif,htens the hook and it breaks where it is notched. The no. Ih wire then slins out of the metal sleeve. �- 583 - A buck wearing one of the missing collars was collected by Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department personnel two or three hundred yards, from where tagged. Two other bucks wearing collars were reported by construction personnel working on a new road in the area where the tagging devices had been set. Seven of the sets in Table 4 were made with a two to three foot diameter loop in the snare. The loop was drawn tight by a strip of inner tube when a trip wire was touched by an animal walking into the snare. It was hoped that the larger snare would increase the success of the tagging device. Five of these sets were found sprung, but intact, and two of the collars were found unsnapped near the set. Because of the poor results and the fact that more time was required in construction this method of setting the snares was discontinued. Although results with the taggilLg devices were not as good as hoped for, it was decided to try them on a large scale the winter of 1963-64. The snaps were modified as shown in Fig. 10 and 836 sets were put out on the winter range in January and February. All but 114 of these had no. 8 sheep bells attached to the collar to facilitate location of marked deer on the summer range. Results are shown in Table 5. Table 5. Results with the automatic winter of 1963-64. tagging devices Undisturbed and intact Sets non-functional for various reasons Sets could not be located Collars found lying near where they were set Collars missing during 510 112 87 72 55 the (61.0%) (13.4%) (10.4%) ( 8.6%) ( 6.6%) Assuming the same results were obtained with the tagging devices not found as for those which were found, a possible total of 61 deer were marked. A new method for relocating the 836 snares was used, which proved very successful (89.6 per cent relocated) considering the fact that four different persons set them out and the majority of them were removed three to four months later. Snares were normally set out in a string in suitable areas. A detailed description of the location of the first snare (device) in the string was given, then the remainder were located with respect to the previous one put out. Flagging tape was placed near each snare and the distance and direction from the tape recorded. In the event the first snare or snares in a string could not be located, it was usually possible to locate others in the string and work backwards to those missed. Automatic tagging devices were employed on the summer range in 1964 with changes again made in the snap (Fig. 11) in hopes of increasing the �- 584 - reliability (e.g., the per cent of deer entering snares which are effectively collared). Eighty-three were set out with the results shown in Table 6. Table 6. Results with the automatic summer of 1964. tagging devices during the Undisturbed and intact Sets non-functional for various reasons Collars missing Collars found lying near where they were set 35 21 19 8 (42.2%) (25.3%) (22.9%) ( 9.6%) In one instance a yearling doe was strangled in a snare because the sliding ring entered the snap (Fig. 11) without catching under the wire hook and pulling the spring back. To alleviate problems caused by cattle, as occurred during the previous summer, snares were set in locations generally not frequented by cattle. Cattle may still have broken some of the snares, but none were found with collars. Tagging devices set in the summer of 1964 were sprayed with a flat, black paint and the colored tag covered with black crepe paper. It was hoped this would serve as camouflage and increase the frequency with which deer entered the snares. This technique apparently had little effect because 53 per cent of the snares were pushed aside, bent, or broken in 1964 compared to 66 per cent the summer of 1963 when the devices were not painted. Verme (1962) reported that 694 tagging devices were set in Michigan in one year. Of these,· 367 collars (53 per cent) were found missing and presumed on deer. Verme (op. cit.) also stated that one worker obtained a rate of approximately 66 per cent reliability. That is, two of every three deer that entered sets tagged themselves. Verme gives no figure for the per cent of snares entered by deer, but it must have been above 75 per cent to have marked as many deer as were reported. The per cent of snares entered and the reliability of snaps used in this study are shown in Table 7. Table 7. with the various Per cent of snares entered and reliability. Type of snap Fig. 9 Fig. 10 Fig. 11 Per cent entered Per cent reliability 27.7 45.0 17.4 42.7 32.5 70.4 types �- 585 - Hook ring ./ Coiled spring no. 14 wire Piece of no. 14 wire \ Fig. 11. Snap used during the summer of 1964, with the automatic tagging devices.--The coiled suring nrevents the hook in the no. 14 wire from bending back and nulling out of the sleeve, unless a pull in excess of 200 pounds is exerted. If the sliding ripg enters the snaD correctly it Dushes the spring back, and at the same time bends the '''I'ire hook back, releasing the deer. The piece of no. 14 wire wrapped around the end of the snap prevents the snap from springing ODen when a heavy pull is exerted. �- 586 - As can be seen from the above table the per cent of snares entered falls far below that obtained by Verme (1962); however, he was working primarily with "yarded" deer that used well-defined trails through deep snow. From the above table it is also apparent that the last modification made on the snaps (Fig. 11) greatly increased the reliability of the devices and even exceeded the highest figure reported by Verme (op. cit.). The Chi-square test was used to determine the significance of the differences in reliability using the three types of snaps and no significant difference was noted using the snaps shown in Figs. 9 and 10. However, the reliability using the snap shown in Fig. 11 (Table 7) was significantly different from the reliability using the other two with a probability of .90. When the snares were first tested in 1963 it was thought that the majority of those found broken malfunctioned because the sliding ring jammed on the end of the snap, or that the notched wire (Fig. 9) was breaking too readily. In an attempt to solve these two problems the end of the snap was ground to a sharper point and the wire was attached to the snap in a different way, as shown in Fig. 10. The snares then were tested on penned deer by setting them in the doorways of individual pens and herding the deer through the doorways. The deer ducked under the snares when they were set at normal height. To alleviate this it was necessary to set them so they were five or six inches from the ground and to set them three abreast to completely fill the doorway. Most of the snares were broken without the deer being collared, but the deer moved so fast it was not possible to see what was happening to cause a malfunction. Except for two instances the deer failed to break through the snare when they first hit it. It was noticed that the snare had tightened on the shoulders where the collar circumference (22 inches) was too small to allow it to snap properly. At the time it was thought that this would be a rare occurrence in the field where the snares were set at their proper height. Because the modified snaps used during the winter of 1963-64 (Fig. 10) did not improve the results (Table 7), it is now thought that tightening of the collar on the shoulders of deer was the major problem. Further modification of the snap made in 1964 (Fig. 11) and used on the summer Yange , proved successful in increasing the reliability (Table 7). With the previous modification the snare would break when subjected to an 80 pound pull. In the latest modification the coiled spring (Fig. 11) prevents the hook in the no. 14 wire from bending back unless a pull in excess of 200 pounds is exerted. When the ring slides into the snap it pushes the spring back and the wire hook straightens with approximately a 90 pound pull, releasing the deer. In setting the 836 tagging devices the second winter, two colors of collars were used, white and yellow. In comparing the results between the two �- 587 - colors it was found that deer entered 12.8 per cent of the yellow and 24.9 per cent of the white collars. This difference was significant with a probability of .95 using the Chi-square test. Two possibilities exist which may explain why deer entered more of the devices with white collars: (1) the devices with white collars were set out for a longer period of time, and (2) deer may not notice a white collar as readily as yellow, particularly when snow covers the ground. Cover type was recorded in setting snares during the winter of 1963-64 and a comparison of the results between those set in timber, browse, and a combination of open timber and browse showed no significant difference. Radio-tracking Fourteen transmitters were constructed for use on deer. Tests to determine maximum range indicated two miles with the Hallicrafters and 1% miles with the Viscount recei.ver under line-of-sight conditions. Testing of the transmitter antenna against breakage was done by holding the transmitter upright on a stick and striking the antenna near the base 'with a stick held out the window of a vehicle moving at a speed of 40 miles per hour. In this process the antenna was bent at an approximate o angle of 20 , but no other damage occurred. Seven deer were equipped with transmitters in the field; four on the winter range and three on the summer range. Attempts to locate radio-equipped deer with the receivers met with little success, although the seasonal movements of three transmitter-equipped animals were determined by visual identification as mentioned in the next section on results. Of the four deer equipped with transmitters on the winter range, one transmitter is known to have quit functioning four days after it was attached to a deer. On one occasion signals from two of the other deer were detected, near where marked, with the Hallicrafters receiver after they had first been seen along the Poudre Canyon highway. Other attempts in an airplane were unsuccessful. The Viscount receiver was not available for use at this time. Of the three deer equipped with transmitters on the summer range, two were never seen or located by radio. The other was located by radio twice within the first two days after it was captured, using the portable Viscount receiver. In both cases the signal could not be picked up more than 200 yards away and other than the two occasions mentioned the deer was never seen or heard again. The poor results with the transmitters are puzzling because they performed satisfactorily in tests. Signals from a transmitter attached to a penned �:.. 588 - deer were picked up one mile away although there was a slight rise between the transmitter and receiver. Reception up to two miles was obtained in tests with direct line of,sight between transmitter and receiver. One transmitter was left outside, in operation, for five months and although the signal was very weak, the pulse rate had not changed appreciably. Seasonal Movements Fig. 12 shows the locations of summer sightings of deer marked on the winter range. The approximate tagging locations of eight are shown. Tagging locations for the remainder cannot be given because of insufficient information concerning collar and tag colors. Numbers five, six, seven and eight could represent only two deer. Six and seven were identified as a buck and doe respectively, while five and eight were only heard. Numbers 14 and 15 were almost certainly the same deer. Numbers 9, 10, 11 and 12 were possibly the same deer. Numbers 16 and 17 were heard together several times so two deer were represented in this case. Duplications on the rest of the sightingsawere unlikely because of distances involved, differences in sex, dates heard or seen, or differences in tag or collar color. Eliminating all probable duplicate sightings, a minimum of 18 deer were located during the summer of 1964. All of the deer sighted were marked with bells except number numbers 18 and 20 which were equipped with transmitters. three, and Numbers 15 and 21 were killed by hunters during the fall season and two other marked deer were killed by hunters near where they were tagged. Numerous sightings of additional marked deer were made on the winter range but all were in areas where deer had been tagged and as suchft.he se sightings did not contribute to the data on seasonal movements. Five of the deer marked near Long Draw Reservoir were sighted on a winter range near Estes Park in late September and early October. Fig. 12 shows the movements of these deer. One was marked with an automatic tagging device and the remainder were caught in box traps or captured by hand as fawns. An additional deer marked as a fawn was observed on the Poudre winter range February 1, 1965 (no. 30 in Fig. 12). Of the 14 deer marked on summer and winter ranges for which sufficient data were available to determine distance traveled during migration, the average movement was 12.8 miles with a range of three to 23 miles. The confidence interval for the average distance traveled was 10.34 to 15.26 miles at the 90 per cent confidence level. It has been suggested by various authors (Zalunardo and Maw, 1962; Gruell and Papez, 1963) that the majority of migratory deer return to the same �k -; ~ 0("'\ .•.. '::l ,, •= area of sighting X location where deer was Numbers by circles refer to "" ~ """- , -, <Sl o ~ ~..,.. = " " <, " IS'! " \Jl co '-0 Loveland ROCklj Ndtlondl Fig. 12. Sightings o 5 S c.al e and reports of marked deer, Cache la Poudre herd. 10 "".S �- 590 - winter and summer range year after year. In this study evidence was obtained to support this idea, at least to the extent that the deer returned to the same summer range. Of the seven fawns marked on the summer range in 1963, four were seen the following summer within one-fourth mile of where they had been captured in 1963. There was no expectation of seeing the other three fawns as one stepped through its collar with a front leg and probably did not survive through the winter. The other two were never seen after they were marked. The yearling doe which was captured in 1963 using the Cap-Chur gun was also seen in the same area the following summer. Several deer have been sighted on the winter range nine to 12 months after they were marked, and all were within two miles of where marked. In only one of these cases was the deer known to have migrated between sightings. Because an unknown proportion of the Poudre deer herd appeared to be resident on the winter range throughout the year, it cannot be said with certainty that the remainder of the reports represent deer which have migrated to summer range and returned to the same area of winter range. On the other hand no reports have been received to indicate that any deer have changed their winter range. �- 591 - DISCUSSION Capture Methods In comparing the methods used to capture deer for marking purposes it was apparent that only box-trapping and hand capture of fawns were successful, and these only in a limited sense. Hand Capture Hand capture of fawns was limited in that it could produce results only for a period of about two weeks during the peak of fawning. Even then many man-hours must be spent looking for fawns. Where marked fawns in particular were wanted the meager results may justify the time spent, but if the object was to capture deer of any age, other methods probably would be best. Drug Capture Drug capture was not productive in this study nor does it appear likely to be under conditiins encountered in the Poudre drainage. This technique was largely useless on the summer range because of the abundance of dense cover which allowed an animal to disappear before the drug took effect. If it were not for that factor, drug capture would still be difficult over most of the summer range because deer are not concentrated and access to much of the area is limited to travel by foot. On the winter range escape cover was not a serious problem but it was difficult to obtain shots at deer from the roads in the area because deer tended to frequent areas remote from the roadsides. Hunting on foot with the Cap-Chur gun was tried on both winter and summer ranges, but in order to be reasonably certain of hitting an animal it was necessary to approach within about 30 yards, a difficult procedure unless the deer are reasonably tame. Mortality resulting from the use of the drugs also must be taken into consideration in determining the degree of success in drug capture. In this study mortality was a serious limiting factor since four of five captured deer dies, either from the direct effects of the drug, or injuries sustained while under the influence of the drug. Box-trapping As mentioned previously, the major factor limiting the success with box-traps on the winter range was probably the mild winter with little snow cover. The fact that the only deer caught were on the upper winter range where �- 592 - the snow cover was more persistent and temperatures were lower indicated that this was an important factor relating to the success of trapping. The fact that salt was an effective bait on the summer range and not the winter range could be due to one of two factors. Either deer require more salt in the summer or natural salts might be deficient in the summer diet. Perhaps it is a combination of the two. At any rate, it did not appear that box-trapping was a dependable method for capturing deer on the Poudre winter range and it was even less dependable on the summer range. In the case of the deer trapped near Long Draw Reservoir there were two factors which were considered to have contributed to the results. One of these was the fact that the traps were set in areas where cattle licks had previously been established.. The first summer, s9-1t for cattle was placed near the traps which undoubtedly accounted for the fact that no deer could be caught. The second summer the only salt available was in the traps. Secondly, some of the deer in the Long Draw area were winter residents in Rocky Mountain National Park, as indicated by the data on movements. Deer wintering in the Park were relatively tame and accustomed to the activities and scent of man, and were not exposed to hunting, except during the archery season in August and September. These factors are believed to make them more susceptible to trapping. Automatic Tagging Devices The automatic tagging devices, although not a capture technique, should rightfully be compared with capture methods because of the manner in which deer are marked. In this respect it was apparent that the tagging devices compared favorably with box-trapping. About twice as much time was spent on the tagging devices as on box-trapping. However, a possible total of 91 deer were marked with the tagging devices compared to 16 using the box-traps. The difference could be much less because there was no assurance that all missing collars from tagging devices were on deer. In terms of their contribution to the results and box-trapping contributed about equally. on movements, tagging devices Considering the per cent reliability obtained using the latest snap modification, it seemed that the best results which could be obtained with the tagging devices on the Poudre winter range would be approximately 17 or 18 deer tagged for every 100 devices set out. This figure assumes that deer would enter 25 per cent of the snares if they were carefully set and that 70 per cent of these would successfully mark deer. Verme (1962) mentioned that the snares were checked every two or three days to repair and replace missing collars. This was not done in this study. �- 593 - Of the 836 snares set during the winter of 1963-64 the majority were not checked from the time they were put out in January and February until they were removed in Mayor later. To check the snares would have taken about half as much time as to put them out. Considering that at the time they were removed 68 per cent of the snares were undisturbed, it appeared that if time were available it would be better to spend it setting more snares rather than rechecking those already set. Marking Methods From the number of sightings of marked deer for which no positive identification was made, it was apparent that a more conspicuous method of individual identification would be helpful. It is doubtful if much could be done in this respect, in the case of selftagged deer. Wide collars painted with large colorful numbers or symbols would probably lower the success of the tagging devices both in terms of per cent of snares entered and the reliability. Ear streamers appeared the best marking method for young fawns. The use of collars in conjunction with ear streamers would be desirable if a satisfactory expanding collar could be constructed. The main purpose of the collar would be to serve as identification if the ear streamers were lost. Deer caught in box-traps could have been better marked by using collars four to six inches wide painted with large numbers or symbols, instead of the narrow rope collars and numbered tags which were used. Ear streamers should have been attached to all box-trapped deer. The no. 8 sheep bells which were attached to most of the automatic tagging devices and also put on deer trapped on the winter range undoubtedly increased the number of observations of marked ,deer. Jordan (1958), in a California study on mule deer, reported that belled deer were located and identified 14 times more readily than unbelled deer in open areas and 41 times more readily in dense brush. No evidence was found to suggest that the bells affected the success with the automatic tagging devices. Of 29 snares with bells which were set the summer of 1964, 11 were broken or gone (38 per cent) and of 49 without bells, 16 were broken or gone (30 per cent). Belling apparently had little effect on deer behavior. In one instance a buck captured in a trap was belled and the next day it was seen feeding with a group of deer. Both the belled deer and the others appeared undisturbed by the tinkling of the bell. It is quite likely, however, that other deer would be alerted by the sound of a belled deer which started running or moved suddenly if disturbed. For this reason it might not be advisable �- 594 - to bell deer in a study concerned with social behavior. Although radio-tracking did not prove successful in this study, it is believed that it has the most promising potential in movement studies, if and when reliable transmitters with an adequate transmitting range can be obtained. If a sizeable number of deer, for example 25, could be equipped with good transmitters and their location determined periodically, then it would be possible not only to determine where and how far they moved, but routes traveled, rates of movement, timing of movement, and possible causes as well. Such data could be obtained without using radio equipment, much more difficult and the data would not be as accurate. but it would be Seasonal Movements The following discussion is'an attempt to answer the questions posed in the prblem analysis as well as other questions which should be asked. How Far Do the ~ Migrate? The average distance traveled by deer which migrated was 12.8 miles. This was probably a close approximation to the true average. The confidence interval at the 90 per cent level was 10.34 to 15.26 miles, as mentioned ·earlier. Although the maximum distance any deer moved was 23 miles, a larger sample would probably increase the maximum figure. The shortest movement observed was three miles. In my opinion, this was about the shortest movement that could be considered migratory or seasonal. Any distance less than this would place the animal in the resident category as defined in the Introduction. In What Directions Do the Deer Migrate? It is apparent from Fig. 12 that the major movement from winter to summer range was west and southwest as would be expected since the higher elevations are located in those directions with respect to the bulk of the winter range. There was no reason to believe a larger sample would contradict this conclusion • . Q£ Segments of the Winter Herd ~ove to ~ Common Summer Range? The answer is probably "no", regardless of how "segment" is defined, or for that matter, how "common summering area" is defined. For the sake of discussion and to demonstrate why the answer is "no" to the above question, "segment of the winter herd" is defined as those deer occupying an area �- 595 - of 25 square miles, and the same size limit will apply to summering areas. If the limits were larger the conclusions would be much the same and if they were smaller it would be extremely difficult to separate one "segment" from another. Applying the definitions just given it is apparent that the deer numbered 18, 20, 21 and 23 (Fig. 12) moved from a common wintering area but did not move to a common summer area. The same can be said for numbers 1 and 3, and 11 and 15. It stands to reason that if deer from a given segment of the winter range scatter to separate summering areas, then any segment of the summer range must be populated by deer from several different areas on the winter range. In other words, deer from a common summer area move to different segments of the winter range. The data on movements from summer to winter range (Fig. 12) appeared to contradict this line of reasoning with one exception (no. 30 in Fig. 12), but it is felt that the five deer which moved to the vicinity of Estes Park provide an exce~tion to the general rule or that additional data would confirm the above statement. It is interesting, at this point, to speculate on the possible implications of the tendency of deer to return each year to the same area on summer and winter ranges. Fawns are known to remain with their mothers until they are at least one year old unless separated by circumstances beyond their control. This fact, together with the tendency of individual deer to return to the same summer and winter areas, leads one to the thought that populations inhabiting a common summer or winter area might be made up of "sub-populations" of closely related deer which remain together as separate units or mixed with other sub-populations of closely related deer in the same general area. This suggests the possibility that a majority of deer trapped and marked in a small area may belong to one of these distinct sub-populations. Movement data based on such a sample could show a pattern of movement which was not typical of larger populations. This might explain why five of the deer from Long Draw moved to a common winter area. ~ ~ ~ General Boundaries of the Poudre Herd? The boundaries of the deer herd during the winter were determined by the limits of the Poudre drainage from the definition of the Poudre deer herd. The true question concerns the boundaries of the herd during the summer months. For all practical purposes the western boundary was probably the crest of the Medicine Bow Range. Deer from the Poudre no doubt cross this boundary but they would comprise probably less than five per cent of the total number. �- 596 - To the south the boundary cannot be as well defined, but the majority of deer moving in that direction probably stay within the Poudre drainage; however, there was mixing with deer from the Big Thompson drainage as shown by the movements of deer from near Long Draw Reservoir. The contact of the foothills with the plains could be considered the eastern boundary of the Poudre herd, as very few deer are found east of this line. ' For political management purposes the northern boundary of the Poudre herd is the Colorado state line. From the standpoint of seasonal movements and practical management this should suffice as there is very little if any summer range immediately north of the state line and no appreciable movement in that direction would be expected. In summary, the summer range of the Poudre herd is confined to the Poudre drainage and that portion of the Laramie River drainage which lies in Colorado. Other Aspects of Deer Movements. The Poudre River has been suggested as a barrier to deer movements. The results of this study show that such was not the case as four of the eight deer which were positively identified on the summer range had to have crossed the Poudre River. It also was apparent that the deer did not necessarily parallel drainages in their migration, but often moved across major ridges between drainages. Timing and Causes. Time did not permit the study of timing and causes of the seasonal movements of the Poudre deer herd; however, after reviewing the literature a general statement can be made, which may apply to the Poudre deer; fall movements of deer appear to be a response to weather conditions which cause physical discomfort or to deep snow which makes food unavailable. Several authors (Russell, 1932; Dixort, 1934; Leopold ~ al., 1951) feel that fall movements are closely associated with snowfall; however, deer have been observed to move from summer ranges well in advance of severe storms. Spring movement from winter to summer ranges appeared to be closely correlated with development of new vegetation and only indriectly related to disappearance of snow from summer ranges. �- 597 - LITERATURE CITED Ashcraft, G.C., Jr. 1961. Deer movements of the McCloud Flats herds. California Fish and Game 47(2):193-199. Dietz, D.R., R.H. Udall, and L.E. Yeager. 1962. Chemical composition and disgestibility by mule deer of selected forage species, Cache la Poudre range, Colorado. Colorado Game and Fish Dept., Tech. Pub 1..14. 89 p , Dixon, J.S. 1934. A study of the life history and food habits of mule deer in California. California Fish and Game 20:Part I 181-182, Part II 315-354. Gruell, G., and N.J. Papez. 1963. Movements of mule deer in northeastern Nevada. J. Wild1. Mgmt. 27 :414-422. Harrington, H.D. 1954. Denver. 666 p. Manual of the plants of Colorado. Sage Books, Harris, D.V. 1963. Geomorphology of Larimer County, Colorado. p. 196-204, In Guidebook to the geology of the northern Denver Basin and adjacent uplifts. Rocky Mtn. Assoc. Geologists, Denver, Colorado. Jordan, P.A. 1958. 44(2):183-189. Marking deer with bells. California Fish and Game Leopold, A.S., T. Riney, R. McCain, and L. Tevis, Jr. 1951. The Jawbone deer herd. California Fish and Game, Game Bull. 4. 139 p. Loveless, C.M. 1963. Ecological characteristics of a selected mule deer winter range. Ph.D. Thesis. Colorado State Univ., Fort Collins. 318 p. Lovering, T.S., and E.N., Goddard. 1950. Geology and ore deposits of the Front Range, Colorado. U.S. Geo1. Survey Prof. Paper 223. Marr, J.W. 1961. Ecosystems of the east slope of the Front Range in Colorado. Institute Arctic Alpine Res., Univ. of Colorado, Boulder. 134 p . Riordan, L.E. 1946. Location and extent of seasonal ranges. Colorado Game and Fish Dept., Federal Aid Div., Quart. Prog. Rep., April, 1949:39-82. Robbins, W.W. 1910. Climatology and vegetation in Colorado. Gaz. 49:256-280. Bot. �- 598 - LITERATURE CITED--continued Russell, C.P. 1932. Seasonal migrations of mule deer. Monogr. 2(1):1-46. Verme, L.J. 1962. An automatic tagging device for deer. Mgmt. 26(4):387-392. Ecol. J. Wildl. Zalunardo, R.A. 1962. The range and movements of mule deer in a central Oregon Herd. M.S. Thesis, Oregon State Dniv., Corvallis. , and V. Maw. 1962. Deer movements and distribution. ----------Oregon State Game Corom.Job Completion Rep. 16 p. Prepared by: Roger J. Siglin Date:__~ J_a_n~L_la!Y, 1965 Approved by: Wayne W. Sandfort Chief, Game Research Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �- 599 - APPENDIX A FORM USED IN RECORDING FIELD DATA ON AUTOMATIC TAGGING DEVICEs SET OUT THE WINTER OF 1963-64. Collar co10r Date out _ _ Tag color Da te pulled:...- _ _ Tag no , Butt band no. _ ------ Location. _ Cover type, Size of 100p Remarks _ _ Height of loop bottom~ _ _ �- 600 - �- 601 - �- 602 - APPENDIX C Table 1. Automatic tagging devices missing on the sunnnerrange in 1963 and 1964. Collar color Tag color Tag No. Band No. *11= Blue ~~11= Blue *11= Blue *11= Blue 1J: Yellow 11= Yellow 1J: Yellow 11= Yellow 1J: Yellow 11= Yellow 1J: Yellow 11= Yellow 1J: Yellow 1J: Yellow White White White White Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow 2 39 48 11 242 266 192 223 230 197 244 202 226 247 167 88 92 81 97 163 173 78 128 182 142 141 183 690 694 601 606 681 626 609 618 625 688 1106 535 536 526 538 1110 318 551 494 Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow * Put out the sunnner of 1963. 1J: No bell on collar. Location 1.5 mi. Se of Trap Lake. ~ mi. Ne of Long Draw campground. ~ mi. NE of Long Draw campground. 100 yds. east of Long Draw dam. 100 yds. S of Long Draw campground. 150 yds. NE of Long Draw campground. 200 yds. NE of Long Draw campground. ~ mi. N of Long Draw campground. ~ mi. N of Long Draw campground. ~ mi. N of Long Draw campground. ~ mi. NE of Long Draw dam. ~ mi. NE of Long Draw dam. 200 yds. E of Long Draw dam. ~ mi. E of Long Draw dam. 1 mi. N of Long Draw dam. 1 mi. N of Long Draw dam. 1 mi. N of Long Draw dam. 1~ mi. NNW of Long Draw dam. 2 mi. SE of Trap Lake. 2 mi. SE of Trap Lake. 1~ mi. SE of Trap Lake. 1 mi. SE of Trap Lake. 1 mi. SE of Trap Lake. �- 603 - APPENDIX D Table 1. Automatic tagging devices missing on the winter range during the winter 1962-63. Collar color Tag color Tag No. Band No. Blue Blue 41= Blue 41= Blue Red 41= Red if Red 11= Red if Red if Yellow 41= Yellow 41= Yellow if Yellow if Yellow 4/: Yellow 41= Yellow 41= Yellow if Yellow 4ft Yellow 4/: Yellow 4ft Yellow Red Red Red Red Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow White White White White White White White White White White White White 2 7 9 21 5 11 18 21 22 1 3 6 7 14 21 26 27 28 30 31 32 170 175 177 189 148 154 161 164 165 101 103 106 107 114 121 126 127 128 130 131 132 Location* 10 10 10 10 25 25 25 25 25 3 3 3 3 Remarks Tag laying on ground. Could not find set. Could not find set. Tag laying on ground. Could not find set. Could not find set. 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 if No bell on collar. * Number corresponds with numbers in Appendix B. Could not find set. Could not find set. Could not find set. Could not find set. Could not find set. Could not find set. �- 606 - Table 1. Automatic tagging devices missing the winter 1963-64.--Continued. on the winter range during Collar color Tag color Tag No. Band No. Loc a t Lon+ Remarks White White White White White White White White White White White White White White White White White White White White White White White White White White White White White White White White White White White White White White White White White White White White Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue White White White White White White White White White White White Whi.te White White White White Red Red Red Red Red Red Red Red Red 224 114 187 174 207 229 103 201 121 106 135 132 162 120 236 107 188 192 117 67 125 245 218 291 69 64 65 299 55 53 265 203 242 298 83 53 38 37 173 268 242 166 249 52 1097 443 1014 1041 1077 513 432 1088 438 458 446 460 413 426 1060 440 1037 1032 468 1086 1066 959 905 907 172 875 967 145 933 908 979 991 906 898 962 837 932 930 1044 495 287 857 1059 938 17 17 17 17 17 18 18 18 18 18 18 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 21 21 22 22 22 22 22 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 24 24 24 25 25 25 25 25 25 Could Could Could Could Could Could Could not not not not not not not find find find find find find find set. set. set. set. set. set. set. Could Could Could Could Could Could Could Could Could Could Could not not not not not not not not not not not find find find find find find find find find find find set. set. set. set. set. set. set. set. set. set. set. Could Could Could Could Could Could Could Could Could Could Could Could Could Could Could Could Could Could not not not not not not not not not not not not not not not not not not find find find find find find find find find find find find find find find find find find set. set. set. set. set. set. set. set. set. set. set. set. set. set. set. set. set. set. �- 607 - Table 1. Automatic tagging devices missing on the winter range during the winter 1963-64.--Concluded. Collar color Tag color Tag No. Band No. Location* White White White White White White White White White White White White White White Red Red Red Red Red Red Red Red Red Red Red Red Red Red 70 39 170 50 274 244 273 29 269 255 257 271 270 150 897 944 807 977 965 882 482 838 497 499 1071 483 500 868 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 26 Remarks Could not find set. Could not find set. Could not find set. Could not find set. Could not find set. Could not find set. Could not find set. Could not find set. Could not find set. Could not find set. �APPEN!HX F Table 1. Tagging data on captured deer. Sex Age Method and location of capture Tagging materials F Adult Caught in box trap near Home Moraine Transmitter (27.135 Me.) Blue collar and white tag no. 37 Red ear tags nos. 32 and 33 3/30/64 F Adult Caught in box trap near Home Moraine Transmitter (27.025 Me.) Blue collar and white tag no. 36 Red ear tags nos. 31 and 30 3/28/64 F Adult Caught in box trap near Roaring Creek Transmitter (27.005 Me.) Blue collar and white tag no. 13 Red ear tags nos. 36 and 37 3/31/64 Date 0\ 0 OJ F Adult Caught in box trap near Roaring Creek Transmitter (26.995 Me.) Blue collar and white tag no. 126 Red ear tags nos. 34 and 35 3/31/64 F Adult Caught in box trap near Home Moraine White collar and red tag no. 55 Red ear tags nos. 38 and 39 Bell on collar 4/6/64 F Adult Caught in box trap near Peterson Creek White collar and red tag no. 43 Red ear tags nos. 40 and 41 Bell on collar 4/6/64 M Fawn Caught in box trap near Peterson Creek White collar and red tag no. 56 Red ear tags nos. 42 and 43 Bell on collar 4/6/64 �Table 1. Tagging data on captured deer.--Continued. Sex Age Method and location of capture Tagging materials M Adult Caught in box trap near Peterson Creek White collar and red tag no. 54 Red ear tags nos. 44 and 45 Bellon collar 4/6/64 F Fmvn Caught in first box trap below Rustic White collar and blue tag no. 247 Red ear tags nos. 46 and 47 Bellon collar 4/7/64 F Adult Caught in box trap near Peterson Creek White collar and red tag no. 71 Red ear tags nos. 51 and 52 Bellon collar 4/9/64 F Fawn Caught in first box trap below Rustic White collar and red tag no. 60 Red ear tags nos. 53 and 54 Bell on collar 4/10/64 Fawn Caught by hand 50 yards N. of Long Draw Campground Blue collar and white tag no. 45 6/21/63 F Fawn Caught by hand 400 yards NE of Long Draw Dam Blue collar and white tag no. 49 Ear tags nos. A1560 and A156l Orange streamer in both ears 6/24/63 F Fawn Caught by hand 400 yard~NE Draw Dam Blue collar and white tag no. 50 Ear tags nos. A1574 and A1575 Green streamer in both ears 6/24/63 M Fawn Caught by hand ~ mile N. of Long Draw Campground Blue collar and white tag no. 44 Ear tags nos. A1573 and A1572 Yellow streamer in both ears 6/24/63 of Long Date 0\ o <o �Table 1. Tagging data on captured deer.--Continued. Sex Age Method and location of capture Tagging materials Date M Fawn Caught by hand ~ mile N. of Long Draw Campground Ear tags nos. A1S7l and A1570 Silver streamer in both ears Equipped with transmitter in 1964 6/24/63 M Fawn Caught by hand lSO yards NE of Long Draw Campground Blue collar and white tag no. 24 Ear tags nos. A1569 and A1568 Green streamer in right ear and orange streamer in left ear 6/25/63 M Fawn Caught by hand 300 yards E. of Long Draw Dam Blue collar and white tag no. 47 7/3/63 F Yearling Drugged using Cap-Chur gun 1.S miles SE of Trap'Lake #1 on a white plastic collar Blue ear tag no. 1 7/17/63 M Fawn Caught by hand lSO yards SE of Long Draw Campground Blue ear tags nos. 28 and 29 Yellow streamer in right ear and chartreuse streamer in left ear 6/22/64 F Fawn Caught by hand 300 yards"NE of Long Draw Dam Blue ear tags nos. 30 and 31 Red streamer in right ear and chartreuse streamer in left ear 6/23/64 F Fawn Caught by hand 1S0 yards SW of Long Draw Campground Blue ear tags nos. 32 and 33 Blue streamer in both ears 6/24/64 F Adult Caught in box trap 300 yards SW of Long Draw Campground Transmitter Blue ear tags nos. 35 and 36 Red strean~r in both ears 7/16/64 0\ b �Table 1. Sex Tagging data on captured deer.--Concluded. Age Method and location of capture Tagging materials Date F Yearling Caught in box trap 300 yards SW of Long Draw Campground Transmitter Blue ear tags nos. 44 and 45 Yellow streamer in right ear and silver streamer in left ear 7/23/64 F Adult Caught in box trap 300 yards SW of Long Draw Campground #190 on yellow plastic collar Blue ear tags nos. 42 and 43 Yellow streamer in right ear and red streamer in left ear 8/14/64 F Adult Caught in box trap 300 yards SW of Long Draw Campground #186 on yellow plastic collar Blue ear tags nos. 49 and 50 Chartreuse streamer in both ears 8/27/64 0\ I-' I-' �APPENDIX G Table 1. Sighting data on marked deer. No.* Sex Age Collar Tag color__ cQlor 1 M A White 2 F 3 F A Yellow Tag No. Blue Yellow BelJ Loca t:J.o!l~ller~ sighted Yes ~ mile S. of Seamans Reservoir. Yes Across road from Columbine Lodge. No ~ mile below Fish Creek Campground. White 4 5 Fish Creek Campground. R7OW, T9N, Sec. 33. R71W, TSN, Sec. 1. R73W, TSN, Sec. 36. R73W, T7N, Sec. 1. Yes 2nd road going N. up Bennett Creek road. R73W, TSN, Sec. 11. 0\ 6 M Y Yes Salt Cabin Flat. 7 F A Yes 4.S miles up Bennett Creek road. R73W, TSN, Sec. 16. S Yes Jacks Gulch. 9 Yes Upper end of Little Beaver Creek. R74W, TSN, Sec. 23. No 3 miles down road from top of Bennett Creek road. R74W, TSN, Sec. 22. Yes Same as no. 10. Yes 2nd slash going down road from saddle at Crown Point. R74W, TSN, Sec. 21. 10 F 11 F 12 F * Red Correspond with numbers in Fig. 13. R73W, TSN, Sec. 15. R73W, TSN, Sec. 22. ~ �Table 1. No.* Sex Sighting data on marked deer.--Continued. Age Collar color Tag color Tag No. Bel~l~~L~o~c~a~t~L~'o~n~w~h~e~r~e~s~i~g~h~t~e~d~ _ 13 Yes ~ mile S. of Comanche Reservoir Dam. R74W, T7N, Sec. 13. 14 Yes 1 mile S. of CSU Summer Camp. R73W, T7N, Sec. 29. Yes Stormy Peaks. 16 Yes 1 mile up the Poudre from Kinnikinick. 17 Yes Same as no. 16. No Along river by Sleeping Elephant Mtn. R7SW, T8N, Sec. 1 or 11. Yes Switchback 1-2 miles below Chambers Lake. Sec. 33. No 1 mile down Laramie River road from junction with Cameron Pass road. R7SW, T7N, Sec. 6. Yes 1 mile E. of Canary Lake on the West Branch trail in the Rawah Wild Area. R76W, T8N, Sec. 16. Yes Up West Branch Creek in the Rawah Wild Area, near timberline. R76W, T8N, Sec. lS. Yes 1.S miles W. of junction of Laramie River and McIntyre Creek. R76W, T11N, Sec. 31. lS 18 F Y White Blue 247 Transmitter F 19 R73W, T7N, Sec. 32. Nos. 16 and 17 heard together at night. 20 F A Transmitter 21 M Y White 22 F 23 F 24 F White Yes ~ mile up Seven Mile Creek. 2S F Ear streamers No 1 mile NW of Estes Park. A White Red Red S6 R7SW, T9N, Sec. 36. R7SW, T8N, R73W, T9N, Sec. 32. R73W, TSN, Sec. 23. o-, ~ �Table 1. Sighting data on marked deer.--Continued. No.* Sex Age Collar color Tag color Tag No. Bell LocatiQ!L~h~re sighted 26 F A Yellow Yellow 228 No Beaver Meadows Entrance Station to National Park. R73W, T5N, Sec. 28. 27 F A #186 on yellow plastic No collar. Chartreuse ear streamers. Moraine Park. R73W, T5N, Sec. 32. 28 F A Transmitter. streamers: No Moraine Park. R73W, T5N, Sec. 32. 29 M No Junction of Glacier Creek with the Big Thompson River. R73W, T4N, Sec. 4. Ear streamers Red ear 0\ f-J .f=' 30 M F Yellow streamer in No right ear. Chartreuse streamer in left ear. Curries basin. R72W, T9N, Sec. 25. �Table 1. Sighting data on marked deer.--Continued. No.* Location where tagged. 1 Vicinity of Kelly Flats. Dates seen or heard. R72W, T9N, Sec. 21. 8/31/64 2 3 Curries Basin. R72w, T9N, Sec. 35 or 36. 6/25/64 5 6/17/64, 6/25/64 6 7/7/64 7 7/13/64 8 10/14/64 9 9/8/64 10 ~ mile up Seven Mile Creek~ R73W, T9N, Sec. 32. 9/8/64 7/7/64 12 Heard once in June, 1964 13 6/23/64 14 15 7/15/64, 8/11/64, 8/19/64 10/4/64 4 11 8/7/64,8/13/64 Caught in first box trap below Rustic. R73W, T9N, Sec. 33. 7/4/64, 7/29/64 Killed Oct. 1964 0\ I-' VI �Table 1. Sighting data on marked deer.--Continued. No.* Location whe re tagged. Dates seen or heard. 16 June and July, 1964 17 June and July, 1964 18 Caught in box trap at Home Moraine or Roaring Creek. R74W, T9N, Sec. 30 or 33. 19 7/29/64 Seen once in June, 1964 20 Caught in box trap at Home Moraine or Roaring Creek. R74W, T9N, Sec., 30 or 33. 7/25/64, 9/12/64 21 Caught in box t nap at mouth of Peterson Creek. Sec. 32. 8/19/64, Killed Sept., 1964 R74W, T9N, 22 23 0'\ 9/11/64, 9/12/64 Caught in box trap at Home Moraine or Roaring Creek. R74W, T9N, Sec. 30 or 33. 24 Heard or seen throughout May, June, July, August 9/26/64 25 Within ~ mile of Long Draw Campground. Sec. 1, 2, 11 or 12. 26 Same as no. 25. 10/8/64 27 Caught in box trap 300 yards SW of Long Draw Campground. R75W, T6N, Sec. 11. 9/28/64 R75W, T6N, 10/8/64 ~ �Table 1. Sighting data on marked deer.--Conc1uded. No.* Location where tagaed. Dates seen or heard. 28 Same as no. 27. 9/28/64 29 Within ~ mile of Long Draw Campground .. R75W, T6N, Sec. 1, 2, 11 or 12. 10/3/64 30 Caught by hand 150 yards SW of Long Draw Campground. R75W, T6N, Sec. 11. 2/1/65 0\ f-' -.;j �- 618 - APPENDIX FORM LETTER MAILED TO RESIDENTS FOREST SERVICE PERSONNEL. REQUEST H IN THE STUDY AREA, AND DISTRIBUTED FOR INFORMATION CONCERNING TO MARKED DEER Dear Sir: In order to learn more about the habits of mule deer the Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department and Colorado Cooperative Wildlife Research Unit are conducting a study on the movements of mule deer in the Cache la Poudre River drainage. It is hoped that the information obtained will be useful in more efficient management of the deer herd. To accomplish the purposes of this study a number of deer have been marked with colored plastic collars and numbered tags. Most of the collars have small sheep bells attached to increase the chance of locating the deer. Anyone hearing a bell, seeing a collared deer, or finding a collar is requested to notify: Roger J. Siglin Colo. Coop. Wildl. Res. Unit Colorado State University Fort Collins, Colorado or Dean E. Medin Colo. Game, Fish & Parks Dept. 317 West Prospect Fort Collins, Colorado Deer have been marked with white, yellow, blue or red collars in combination with white, yellow, blue or red numbered tags. It would be helpful if the following ~nformation could be obtained: (1) collar color, (2) tag color and number, (3) presence or absence of abell, (4) location and date where marked deer was seen or heard, or collar was found, and (5) sex of the deer. It may not be possible to determine the collar color or tag color and number, but any bit of information will be very helpful. If a collar is found it is not rtecessary to return it. The above information on a postcard will be sufficient. If anyone obtaining such information would like to know where the deer was marked and how far it has moved, I will be glad to let them know if a return address is furnished. Your cooperation will be sincerely appreciated. Sincerely yours, Roger J. Siglin � https://cpw.cvlcollections.org/files/original/b238bd4475efb994430c0f2258181ee0.pdf 6a8f8980bbbd34175dda0db10fcaadd3 PDF Text Text Co JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJF,cT SEGMEl.'l"T state of Colorado An Ecological Investigation of the Cache la Poudre Deer Herd, Colorado Project No. W-I05-R-5 Work Plan No. 6 Behavior and Movement Studies Job No. 1 Mule Deer Behavior on Seasonal Ranges Period Covered: January, 1964 through December, 1964. PersoD_nel: Michael J. Dorrance. Acknowledgements: This study was sponsored by the Colorado Cooperative Wildlife Research Unit which is supported by the Colorado Game, Fish, fu~dParks Department, the Bureau of Sport Fisheries and Wildlife, the Wildlife Management Institute, and Colorado State University. The study was conducted in the Roosevelt National Forest and Rocky MOWltain National Park. I am grateful for the cooperation extended by the U. S. National Park Service and U. S. Forest Service. Deep appreciation is extended to my Major Professor, Dr. Douglas L. Gilbert Associate ¥:ofessor, Department of Forest Recreation and Wildlife Conservation, who gave valuable guidance and assistance throughout the study, particularly with administrative problems in the early portion of the study and with critical review of this manuscript. Deep appreciation is also extended Dr. Fred A.. Glover, Leader, Colorado Cooperative Wild.life Research Unit, for guidance and encouragement throughout the study. Thanks are extended the members of my graduate co~mittee, ~x. Richard N. DeILney,Assistant Game Manager, Colorado Game, Fish, and Parks Department, Dr. Robert R. Lechleitner, Associate Professor, Department of Zoology, and Dr. Harold W. Steinhoff, Professor, Department of Forest Recreation and Wildlife Conservation, for the critical review of this manuscript. I am deeply L~debted to Mr. Dean E. Medin, Associate Wildlife Researcher, Colorado Game, Fish, and Parks Department and Leader , Fede'ra L Aid. in Fish and Wildlife Restoration Project W-I05-R, who offered valuable advice and assistance throughout the study and never failed to estimulate thought. ~Bny portions of the study were fu~thered by the efforts of Roger J. Siglin, Graduate Student, Colorado Cooperative Wildlife Research Unit. Others aided in portions of the study and their efforts are acknowledged with thanks. These people include: Allen E. Anderson, Gal7 L. Br-own , R. Bruce Gill, Charles M. Loveless, o. Doyle Markham and Vincent H. Reid. / ,- �-2 Abstract: Behavior of Rocky MOQDtain mule deer (Odocoileus hermionus) was studied on summer and winter ranges in the Cache la Poudre Riv'er drainage of northcentral Colorado. Observations were obtained from Jlli~eto September, 1963 and 1964, and from January to March, 1964 a~d 1965. Total observing time was 778 hours in 105 days on summer range and 684 hours in 74 days on winter range. On summer range mule deer fed in parks during mornings and evenings and rested in the timber surrounding the parks during the middle of the day. Bed sites appeared to be concentrated along the edge of the timber. Feeding and resting periods were not as well defined on winter range, but followed the same general pattern as on SUID~errange. No correlation was obtained between any single element of weather and deer activity, on either summer or winter range. Deer tended to use the upper portions of the slopes more than the lower portions of the slopes on winter range. The family group which consisted of a doe and her fawns, comprised the basic social -~it, both on summer and winter range. However, sociality between families varied with the season. The family usually remained solitary on summer range. On winter range two to several families usually banded together to form a feeding or resting group. However, these groups were not stable. Bucks most commofly were observed with groups of does and fawns on winter range. A,dult does returned to the summer range accompanied by their fawns of the previous year. Just prior to fawning, the adult doe drove away her fawns of the previous year. This usually terminated their relationship. Fawns spent much of the first one and one-half months of life alone. As the summer progressed, a greater portion of their time was spent with the doe. Fawns made limited social contact with deer other than their dam throughout the summer, but the primary period of integration probably occurred in the fall after the doe and fawn left the summer range. Bucks dominated does and does dominated fawns. Bucks were dominated by adult does until approximately 12 months of age. Adult does assumed the position of leader in feeding and resting groups on winter range. 'I'he primary method of intraspecific communication of mule deer appeared to be by pose or movement. Mutual grooming was observed throughout the winter. Sparring by bucks probably continued QDtil all bucks lost their antlers. Coyotes had an important effect on the daily activity of mule deer on the Poudre winter range. Besides man, they were the only important predator of mule deer in the area. Mule deer allowed magpies to set on their back and peck in their pelage, apparently feeding on ectoparasites. The activity of mule deer was altered markedly by the presence of man in their habitat, both on summer and winter range. �- 3 - Mule Dee~ Behavior on Seasonal Ranges ~~chael J. Dorrance INTRODUCTION The white-tailed deer (Odocoileus virginianus) in the eastern United States and the mule deer (Odocoileu's~.r.iIomis), in the wes t.ernUnited States are the most widely recognized and-hunted big game animals in North America. Vast sums of money are spent on ha~vesting these creatures and a conside~able amount of time, effort, and money are expended by state and federal agencies for research and management of these species. Few studies, however, have been attempted to gain information on their behavior w~der natural conditions. Noteable exceptions for mule deer are those conducted by Linsdale and Tomich (1953) and DasmaD_~ and Taber (1956a) on the Collrrabianblack-tailed deer (0. h. colQmbianus) and Clark (1953) and Bailey (1960) on the Rocky Mourrta.Lnmule dee'r (0. h. hermionus). This study was initiated to determine the basic individual-and social behavior and daily activities of RocbJ MO"Lu~tainmule deer in Colorado. Tne objectives of this study are: 1. To study the behavior of the Rocky MOlli~tainmule deer on slunmer and winter ranges in the Cache la Poudre River drainage in north-central Colorado. 2. To evaluate deer behavior as related to environmental factors such as weather, topography, vegetation, and deer-population density. The most serious limitation of this study, dd.acount.Lngobserver error and error in interpretation, was the amolliltof time spent in the field. Two summers and two winters are not adequate to obtain the number of observations required to make conclusive statements on many aspects of mule deer behavior lmder natural cond.Lt.Lons . �-4 STUDY AREA Summer Location and description: The summer study area is located in the Long Draw Reservoir -Corral Park region, approximately 36 miles west-southwest of Fort Collins, Colorado, in Rocky Mountain National Park and Roosevelt National Forest) Larimer County, Colorado, TbN, R75W,.,6th P,M. (Fig 1). Most observations were recorded in Long Draw Park just below Long Draw Reservoir. This 220 acre park is approximately 1300 yards long and 300 to 400 yards wide. The remainder of the observations were taken in smaller parks within one mile of the large park. Parks within the study area comprise a total of 410 acres (Fig. 2). Elevation of the area is approximately 10;000 feet. Water supply is plentiful throughout the summer with Long Draw Creek and Corral Creek transecting the study area. Precipitation is such that the parks remain wet until the last half of July. Vegetation: Timber surroundipg the parks was composed of lodgepole pine (Pinus contorta) and Engelmann spruce (Picea engelmanni) with scattered s'ubalpine fir (Abies lasiocarpa). Huckleberry (Vaccinium sp.) dominated the understory. Most of the Parks were set with dense strands ofwillow (Salix sp.) and bog birch (Betula glandulosa) and low growing vegetation dominated bY-sedge (Carex sp.) a'nd marsh-marigold (Caltha leotosepala). The principal species on drier sites in the parks were Festuca spp. and Aqropyron spp. Scientific names are from Harrington (1954) and common-names are from Weber (1953). Weather: Weather was typical of that in the spruce-fir zone. Temperatures were cool and hlli~iditywas high. Mornings were clear; but rain showers frequently occurred in the afternoon. In 1964/ the mean daily maximum temperature from June 25 50 September 16 ranged from 580 to 680 F and the mean daily minimum temperature ranged from 190 to 290 F (Table 1). Maximum daily relative humidity usually was over 90 per cent and mean minimum daily relative humidity ranged from 33 to lj·O per cent in 1964 (Table 1). Wi.nds were usually ca Lmwt th average velocities seldom over four miles per hour in the daytime and less than one mile per hour at night. Short afternoon showers occurred on approximately one-half of the days from the middle of June to the middle of September. By the time deer had reached the area in the early part of JQDe, snow covered less than five per cent of the area but snowdrifts persisted in sheltered sites until July 15, 1963 and July 28; 1964. �- 5 - UTM GRID AND DECLINATION 1962 MAGNETIC NORTH I SCALE 1:24000 1 ~E==3:::=:Ee=====J==3::=:EE======::"C:::=e=====J===r:=::J~=_ ==or==::l?:"-E===================== =::0=============----=--=-<==3MILE lOOOEH=H=:r:::EH30===lOOO:IIi=:==~200il=O==3=OOOE~~==~-i-,300CO===5;og~O=====~60iOO~=~7~' FEET ~E=r:=E3:=3=EF==3·:r::5=E3==r=:JF9==r:::::E~====-============:=======31 KILOMETER CONTOUR DATUM INTERVAL 40 FEET IS MEAN SEA LEVEL Fig. 1. Long Draw Reservoir-Corral Park summer area with primary study area outlined. �- 6 - Corral L.ong Draw Reservoir .1+:'1. Spruce-Fir o Meadow [0J Salt Lick lEa} Observation Post Scale I 1.0" = 300 Yda. Fig. 2. Long Draw Reservoir-Corral Park Bummer stuQy area. �-7Table 1 - Mean daily temperature and relative humidity in Long Draw Park, summer, 1964. ____________ . J~u~n~e~_2~5_-3~0~!~u=1~y_l~-~3~1~ __ ~A~u~,g~.~1~-~3~1~S~e£P~t~.~1~-~1~6 Mean max Lmum daily temperature of 63 68 Mean minimum daily temperature of 26 29 26 Mean minimum daily relative hllilddity~ 33 33 40 ------------------------------------------ 19 -------------------------------------- ~I Per cent. Land Use: Only a few fishermen and campers used the Long Draw Reservoir-Corral Park area prior to August, 1963, as access was possible only by four-wheel drive vehicles. In 1963 a new Forest Service road was completed in the area and since that time many people with passenger cars have gained access. The study area is grazed by cattle from the latter part of July until late September. Winter Location and description: The wInter area is located in the Stevens Gulch and Elkhorn Creek area in the Cache la Poudre River drainage. This area, approximately 20 miles westnorthwest of Fort Collins, is in the Roosevelt National Forest, Larimer County, Colorado, TSN, R72W, and T9N, R72W, 6th P.M. The area is approximately 2.5 square miles or 1,600 acres. Elevations range from 6,480 to 7,596 feet. The terrain is rough and open and offers good visibility from vantage points. Approximately 35 per cent of the area faces west, 31 per cent faces south, 18 per cent faces north, 8 per cent faces east, and only 8 per cent had no aspect (Fig. 3). Vegetation: Vegetation of the area largely is determined by slope, aspect, and gradient. Approximately 20 per cent of the area is covered with timber and the remainder is grass types and browse and grass types. About one-third of the timber is open ponderosa pine located in the northern portion of the study area o~ south-facing slopes of approxLmately 12 per cent gradient (Fig. 3). The remaining timber is composed of ponderosa pine and Douglas-fir (Pseudotsuqa tasifolia) on north-and northwest-facing slopes. Roc~J MOQ~tain juniper (J·.... miperus scopulorum) is scattered throughout the area but is concentrated in gullj_es and draws and on east-facing slopes. �- 8 -- L}F! Timber * 1000 B 0 1000 ~_ H H I F3 2000 3000 -~.73 :1. .5 E3 . -.-- 5000 -- DATUM INTERVAL IS MEAN 1 MILE 6000 ========::===3:::?J 7000 FEET ! 0 ~-=:EE3==C=!t=.--. ============~=====3' CONTOUR Fig .. ). 4000 SEA 40 FEET LEVEL Stevens Gulch winter sr.uoy area , I KILOMETER �-9 West-facing slopes are predominantly browse and grass types and eastfacing slopes are predominantly grass types with scattered browse. Dominant browse species are mountain mahogany (Cercocarpus montanus) and bitterbrush (Purshia tridentata). Less abundant browse species are rabbitbrush (Chrysothamnus spp.) and skunkbrush (Rhus triloba ta) . Grass types are domi.'na ted by blue gra'iii."Et(Boutelaua gracilis-Y:--Other common species are mountain muhly (MUhlenbergia montana), cheatgrass (Bromus tectorum), western wheat-grass (Agropyron smithii), and needle-and-thread (Stipa cometa). Common forbs are s'nakeweed (Gutierrezia sarothrae), pasture sagebrush (Artemisia frigida), prickly-pear (OP1.L'1.t a spp.), i gumweed (G::-indeliasouarrosa), 8....'1.d sunflower (Helianthus pumilus). --Weather: The winters of 1964 and 1965 were mild with few periods of extreme cold. Temperatures gradually decreased from January to March. Mean maximum daily temperature decreased from 380 in January to 290 F in March, 1965· Mean minimum daily temperature decreased from 180 in January to 80 F in March, 1965. Although no weather station was maintained on the area in 1964, data from a weather station on Kelly Flats, two miles west of the study area, were similar to those obtained on the study area in 1965 (Table 2). Winds seldom were calm in 1964-65. L'1.1965 velocities recorded on the study area averaged greater than nine miles per hour 54.8 per cent of the hours from 0700 to 1645 on days during which observations were taken. Winds were westerly. Table 2 -- Mean daily temperature and relative humidity, winter, 1964-65· Kelly Flats, 196L~ Stevens Gulch, 1965 1/6-31 2/1-28 3/1-15 1/6-3 2/1-28 3/1-15 Mean max. daily temperature OF 35 33 31 38 35 29 Mean min. daily temperature OF 17 14 15 18 10 8 Mean max. daily reI. hum. y 64 76 74 74 79 83 Mean min. daily r'e.l.. hum. 33 35 39 43 44 47 ,!/ Relative hUIT~dity in per cent. �- 10 Snow fell during 9 of the 34 days of observation in 1964 and 15 or 40 days of observation in 1965· Snow usually melted in less than one day on south- and west-facing slopes. Maximum snow accumulation during one 24-hour period in 1964 was four inches, and in 1965, eight inches. Snow which persisted in timbered areas did not exceed six inches in depth in 1964 and did not exceed twelve inches in depth in 1965. Land Use: With the exception of the hunting season in late October, people seldom used the area. It has neither roads nor trails. The only people observed in the area dv~ing the two winters of study were two horseback riders and two Colorado Game, Fish, and Parks Department game biologists. The area is grazed by cattle during the fall, winter, and spring. METHODS Al\1D MATERIALS Observations, ~otes and Equipment: The major portions of the SQ~mer st~dy were conducted from June 7 to September 11, 1963 and from June 10 to September 11, 1964. In addition, weekly trips were wBde to the area in the fall of 1963 and 1964 to determine when the deer left the area. Three additional trips were made in the summer of 1965 to look for marked deer. Total observing time was 335 hours in 44 days in 1963 and 443 hours in 61 days in 1964. TDe winter portions of the study were conducted from January 13 to March 12, 1964 and from January 5 to March 15, 1965. Total observing time was 314 hours in 34 days in 1964 and 370 hours in 40 days in 1965. In the SQmIDer of 1964, observations were recorded on a portable tape recorder and in most instances transcribed to a loose-leaf notebook the same day. This procedure was discontinued dur'Lng the winter, 1964, because of the additional time required in transcribing notes and because the tape recorder was non-functional below freezing. Thereafter, notes were taken in a looseleaf notebook with 5~ by ~ inch paper. No more than two days observation notes were carried in the field to protect against loss. The 2400-hour system of recording time was used to avoid confusion between morning and afternoon observations. All observations were recorded in Mo-untain Standard Time and are believed to be in error not greater than plus or minus 10 minutes. During the s~mer, most observations were taken from a parked vehicle with the aid of a 20X spotting scope and 7 x 35 binoculars. Observations in Long Draw Park we.re taken from one of two observation posts to minimize the variation in observation conditions. TDe observation post near the salt lick was used most frequently (Fig. 2). �- 11 - Approximately the same route was traveled each day on the winter range so observations were made in the same area at about the same time. Observations in most cases were from ridge tops and prominent points because a greater area could be observed from one location. Winter observations were made with 7 x 35 binoculars and a spotting scope with 20X, 30X, and 60x eye lens. A weather station was located illLong Draw Park 400 ,yardsbelow the reservoir spillway, 50 yards southeast of Long Draw Creek, and was maintained in the summers of 1963 and 1964. Equipment included in 1963 was a 31-day Kohlsico thermohygrograph ~nd precipitation guage. L~1964 a three-cup anemometer was added to the station. Per cent cloud cover was estimated by ocular methods to the nearest five per cent. A weather station was not mafrrta ined allthe winter area in 1964. However, data were obtained from a station on Kelly Flats, two miles west of the winter study area. In 1965 a weather station was located on the ridge between Elkhorn Creek and Stevens Gulch at 7100 feet elevation (Fig. 3)· The area had no slope and was not sheltered from the wind in any direction. Equipment included was the same as on summer range in 1964 plus a VT-126 mechanical anemograph. Age and Sex Classification of Mule Deer Summer: Deer were classified into the followir~ categories on summer range: pregnant adult does, adult does not pregnant, yearling does, yearling bucks, adult bucks, and fawns. Deer less than 12 months of age were classified as fawns, deer older than 12 months but less than 22 months were classified as yearlings, and deer older than 22 months were classified as adults. Criteria for sex and age classification as outlined by Da smann and Taber (1956b) were applicable on S~Mmer range. Pregnant adult does were separated from does which were not pregnant by the appearance of the abdomen. The abdomen of pregnant does tended to be lateroventrally distended while the abdomen of adult does which alreaQJ had dropped their fawns was not distended. Winter: Deer observed on winter range were classified as adult bucks, adult does, and fawns. I was not able to separate adult does and yearling does from January to March. It was possible to distinguish yearling bucks from adult bucks before the antler drop but not aftel>mrd. Therefore, yearling bucks were classified as adults throughout the study. Fawns could not be classified as to sex. �- 12 The first observation of an antlerless buck occurred on February 10, 1964 and January 22, 1965· After these dates adults were classified to sex only after close scrutiny, since errors in sex determination could lead to erroneous conclusions on behavior. A.lthough there are several differences in behavior, color, and body conformity between bucks and does, it was impossible to determine sex at a distance unless the antlers or peduncle were observed. Positive identification of sex was possible only after studying each animal several minutes to determine the presence or absence of peduncles. If animals shifted positions rapidly, effort made in previous identifications was worthless. ~rapping and Tagging In 1963-64, a total of 33 deer was marked for individual identification in the summer study area or in areas adjacent to it. An additional five deer were marked for individual identification on the winter range in 1964-65. Trapping and tagging techniques and the descriptions of the individual deer were treated in detail by Siglin (1965). The following capture techniques and the results from each are as follows: 1. Hand capture: Seven fawns were captured in 1963 and four fawns were captured in 1964 by hand when only a few days old with or without the aid of a large dip net. 2. Drug capture: with a Cap-Chur gun. One yearling doe was captured on summer range in 1963 3· Automatic tagging devices: Approximately 100 automatic tagging devices, developed by Verme (1962) and modified by Siglin (1965), were set on the winter study area in January, 1964 An additional 100 devices were set on the summer study area or within one and one-half mile of it in July, 1964. One adult doe and one fawn were marked on the winter study area in 1964 and two adult does and one fawn were marked on the area in 1965. Nineteen deer were believed to have been tagged on the su~er range in 1965 although only three tagged adult does were observed. 4. Modified Stephenson box traps: Three modified Stephenson box traps were placed on the summer study area in 1963 and 1964 and six were placed on the winter study area in 1965. Three adult does and one yearling doe were captured on the summer area in 1964 but none were captured on winter range area. All deer, except those marked with automatic tagging devices, were marked with ear tags and six-inch ear streamers tied with a jesse knot. These were placed in a proximal position on the dorsal portion of the ear. Different color combinations of ear streamers were used on each deer for easy identification. Collars made of .25 inch diameter polyethylene rope were placed on six fawns. These proved undesirable because at least two fawns lost their collars and a third stepped through its collar with both front feet. In addition, three adult does and one yearling doe were marked with a 1.25 inch wide alathon strap collar. �- 13 RESD~TS JL~ DISCUSSION Summer ,Population and composition: 'rhere existed an altitudinal stratification by sex and age class on the summer range. L~ the study area almost the entire population was composed of adult does, fawns, and yearlings as evidenced by data presented in ~ble 3. Only five observations of adult bucks were recorded in 1963 and only 19 observations of adult bucks were recorded in 1964. It appears that many adult bucks spend the summer above or close to timberline which is approximately 11,300 feet elevation in this area. T!.:lis stratification is not absolute because adult bucks and does were observed at all elevations. Table 3 - Number of observations on each sex and age class of mule deer L~ the Long Draw Reservoir-Corral Park study area. Year 1963 1964 Number of Days Observed Adult Does Adu'l.t bucks Yearlings Fawns ~·O 14~· 275 5 19 73 262 42 61 81 An atte~Ft was made to estimate the minimum number of deer using the study area. However, the effort was abondoned because any estimate would have been completely arbitrary. Daily Activity Feeding activity: Deer fed in an illlhurriedmanner. They browsed on one clump of willow for one or two minutes before ambling from two to six steps to another clump of willow. Feeding during the summer was frequently interrupted by periods when they raised their heads. They often groomed themselves by licking or scratching and walked several steps before resQming feeding activity. Deer did not purposefully look up and SCffi~ the area for intruders. They usually did not look from side to side after raising their heads. However, like most wild animals, they were constantly "in tillle"with their environment and readily detected anything out of the ordinary. Dur Lng. the summer deer frequently flicked their tails and ears either singly or together without disrupti~g their feeding. Much of the tail and ear flicking and grooming activity which occur-red during the summer was probably in response to insect attacks. T.l'1e incidence of grooming and tail and ear flicking was much reduced on the winter range. �- 14 There were two major feeding periods during daylight hours (Fig. 4 and 5). Feeding commenced at daylight (sunrise 0435-0540) or just prior to daylight and continued until between 0600 and 0800. During the day deer moved into the timber. The evening feeding period commenced between 1600 and 1800 and continued until after dark (sunset 1935-1816). Deer were not observed feeding in Long Draw Park (approximately 220-acres in size) or in parks of comparable size or large during the middle of the day, but occasionally were observed feeding in parks less than one-acre in size during the middle of the day. From June to the latter part of July deer were in the parks during much of the evening feeding period. However, each deer stayed only a short time, so individuals continually were entering and leaving. Individual feeding periods were highly variable. In 1964 individual feeding periods ranged from 1 to 167 minutes dur-Ing the evening and 1 to 126 minutes during the morning. The duration of feeding periods varied considerably within each class. Frequently one standard deviation from the mean was almost as great as the mean itself (Table 4). No significant difference (at five per cent level) was obtained between the average feeding period for pregnant does, does accompanied by fawns, does not accompanied by fawns, and yearlings. No significant difference was obtained between the average feeding period from one part of the summer to the next (Table 4). Table 4 - Duration of feeding periods of mule deer, Long Draw ReservoirCorral Park, 1964. Number Observed Ave. Feeding Period in Minutes Range in Minutes S.D·Y Date Time 6/16-30 AM Preg. does~/ Does, not preg. Yearlings 7 6 22 33·0 20·7 31.0 7- 53 7-35 7- 53 17·1 12·3 14.6 PM Preg. does Does, not preg. Yearlings 21 18 35 40.0 27·0 45.2 12-122 1- 89 3-167 29·0 20.6 41.5 AM Does W/O fawns 3/ Does W fawns Yearlings 7 0 18 20.0 2- 58 19·4 22.6 1- 75 18·5 Does W/O fawns Does W fawns Yearlings 22 2 22 25·6 4.0 30.4 1- 85 3- 5 1- 65 16·9 18.0 Does W/O fawns Does W fawns Yearlings 8 0 2 36.4 1-126 44.4 63.5 1-126 7/1-15 PM 7/16-31 AM Class v , ' �- 15 Table 4 - Duration of feeding periods of mule deer, Long Draw ReservoirCorral Park, 1964, Continued. Date rp' _lme 7/16-31 PM 8/1-15 9/1-11 Mlriut.e s Range in Minutes Ave. Feeding Period in S.D.y' Does wlo fawns Does W fawns Yearlings 19 2 10 18.8 7·5 21.4 1- 84 5- 10 1- 67 26.1 Does wlo fawns Does W fawns Yearlings 3 2 6 3·7 3·5 3·8 111- 8 6 8 3·2 Does wlo fawns Does W fawns Yearlings 10 5 10 35·4 8.4 28.7 4- 88 2- 17 5- 59 25·5 AM Does wlo fawns Does W fawns Yearlings 3 3 1 1.0 18.0 20.0 PM Does wlo fawns Does W fawns Yearlings 8 1 6 16.6 6.0 17·0 8- 21 8.2 8- 20 12·5 AM Does wlo f'awns Does W fawns Yearlings 2 26·5 11- 42 PM Does wlo fawns Does W fawns Yearlings 1 1 1 14.0 4.0 14.0 AM PM 8/16-31 Class Number Observed 11 Standard deviation Y Pregnant does 31 Does not accompanied by fawns ~I Does accompanied by fawns 19·8 32.0 �2000 LIIIp 1800 f..;·······3 1::;:;:;:;:1 1600 Ql 1-1 ::s ~ 1400 ~ ....• .~ 1200 E-t I-' 0\ 1000, 0800 I 0600 . I 0400 I lill] .M] £,:,:,:,:,1 G:W:I:l:iI t·:;:;:;:·:, ,f! D~erFeeding't?! ii' 1 Fig. 4. 2 3 4 , mrl:wlllil 111:1 , i , , , i , • £ , , i ii' : J , tZZ3 it' 8 9 10 11 1511 22 23 24 26 31 1 14 15 19 20 22 26 21 28 29 2 July August Observed daylight feeding of mule deer in Long Draw Park, 1963. , , , i , i I 3 4 5 9 10 11 September �II:t.!i:J 2000 1800 1600 [J] m:m === II) f.I g 1400 :x:: ...-1 c:::s::::J = 1200 ,·······;·3 ~ E-t f-' -.:t 1000 0800 ;II] 0600 Deer Fee 0400 II Fig. 5. tr~=I m:m Will ~ qm = 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 28 29 30 1 June c:::::::::I 2 3 l!:ZZ3 7 8 ! ~ E=::l 9 10 13 14 15 16 17 2) July Observed daylight feedine of mule deer in Long Draw Park, 1964. G"\J.J \), �2000 t·········3 . E::::::·:·:l 1800 1600 E:;:;:;:;:;J ;~i ~ . m::q~ . mm ~ a:c:::lI ~ -== a:am .~ ~ III g 1400 :z: ..-I~ ! 1200 e-. f-' CD 1000 0800 0600 0400 ~ ~ EJ E] lliill c::::::::::J (:·:·::::::3 . 1;:::;:;:;:;) r!::::J UTIUQ1i La.· ~ •..•..•.. , ~::::::::::t;:;i:J mJfill c=:J ~ 21 23 28 30 5 6 10 11 12 13 14 17 19 20 21 24 25 26 27 31 1 2 3 4 9 10 11 . July August September Fig. 5. Observed daylight feeding of mule deer in Long Draw Park, 1964, cont. �- 19 The greatest number Qf deer per observation period was recorded in June (1able 5). Use of the parks during daylight hours gradually diminished throughout the summer, both during the evening feeding periods and during the morning feeding periods. In 1964 the number of does observed per evening decreased from 5.0 dl~ing the last half of June to 1.4 per evening dlrring the last half of August. Does observed feeding in the morning decreased from 2.6 in JlLDe to .4 during the first half of September. The number of yearlings observed per morning and evening also decreased significantly throughout the summer. The number observed per evening decreased from 5.4 the last half of June to .4 the first half of September. The number observed per morning decreased from an average of 4.9 the last half of June to .2 the first half of September. The nurnber of yearlings and does observed in 1963 were added together to increase the sample size. The average number of deer observed per evening decreased significantly (at five per cent level) from 4.6 during the first half of July to 1.1 during the first half of September (Table 6). Evidence from irregular observations indicated that much of the feeding in the parks occurred at night during August and September, with many of the deer entering the parks immediately after dark. Several times during these two months only one or two deer were observed during the period from 1600 to darkness between 1930 and 2000. Less thffi115 minutes after it was too dark to observe it was often possible, with the aid of a spotlight, to see 6 to 12 deer feeding in the park. In addition to the switch from diurnal to nocturnal feeding, the reduction in numbers observed can be explained, in part, by an actual reduction in the number of yearlings using the area. During 1964, a pair of yearling does (49 and 50) were observed feeding in Long Draw Park on 16 different evenings from June 21 to A.ugust 31. The time the yearli~gs entered the park to feed was irregular (Fig. 6) and had no apparent relationship to per cent cloud cover, minimu~ humidity, maximum or minimum temperature, or moon phase. 'rbeirentrance into the park ranged from 1410 on July 2 to 2015 on July 27. A. possible explanation for the irregularity may be that the deer feed in the timber prior to their entrance into the park and this masks ~Dy influence that weather conditions may have. A.spreviously stated, deer continually were entering and leaving the meadows during the feeding periods so that only a few were using the parks at any time. Since deer characteristically are less social during the summer than at other times of the year, this possibly could aid in reducing the incidence of conflict among individuals. �- 20 Table 5 - Number of mule deer observed in Long Draw Park during morning and evening feeding periods, 1964 A.ve. No. of Deer ObservedLDay Does ,Yearlings AM PM AM PM Date No. of Days Observed AM PM 6/16-30 7 14 2.6 5·0 4·9 5.4 7/ 1-15 7 10 1.7 3·9 3·1 2·7 7/16-31 3 5 2·3 3·6 1.7 2.0 8/ 1-15 4 6 1.3 3·2 2·3 1.2 8/16 ... 31 4 8 1.5 1.8 ·5 1.3 9/1 1-15 5 5 .4 1.4 .2 .4 Table 6 - Number of mule deer observed in Long Draw Park during evening feeding periods, 1963. Date No. of Evenings Observed A.ve. No. of Deer* Observed/Evening 7/ 1-15 9 4.6 7/16-31 4 3·3 8/ 1-15 3 1.0 8/16-31 7 1.7 9/ 1-15 6 1.1 * Does not include fawns �2100 •.•.•......•..• 2000 • • \. 1900 / ~18oo. A· / .--' • ./\ fo..t o 1600 ~ \ ,. 0)' ~ E-< 1700 • • .----.\. • ro ~ ' . • 1500 • 21 23 24 25 June Fig. 6. Time of day yearling 28 29 30 1 2 7 13 July mule deer does No. 49 and 50 entered 15 'l7 5 19 August 31 Long Dra1-lPark, 1964. ~' \.1.. "'.:. �- 22 Bedding activity: The major rest period during the day occurred after the deer moved into the timber. This was from between 0600 and 0800 to between 1600 and 1800. Only five observations were recorded of deer bedding in parks during 1963 and only nine observations of deer bedding in parks were recorded during 1964. During the summer of 1964 the timber surrounding the study area was searched for deer beds. Six and seven-tenths hours were spent searching 34 acres of timber 0 to 50 yards from the edge of the parks. Sixteen hours were ~ent searching 225 acres of timber 50 to 600 yards from the edge of parks. The area covered per hour was approximately equal in both types, but a smaller portion was covered in the area greater than 50 yards from the edge than was covered in the area less than 50 yards from the edge. The search less than 50 yards from the edge produced an everage of 17.0 beds located per hour, while only 4.1 beds per hour were located in the timber greater than 50 yards from the edge (Table 7). This appears to be an excellent example of the "edge effect" of habitat use by a wildlife species. Distance from the edge was estimated for beds located in the timber 0 to 50 yards from the edge of parks. This was not possible in the area greater than 50 yards from the edge because of the difficulty of estimating distances in the dense Engelman spruce. Distance from the edge was estimated to the nearest five yards.. Beds were grouped into three categories: Category l--beds 0,5, and 10 yards from the edgej Category 2~- beds 15,20, and 25 yards from the edgej and Category 3--beds 30, 35, and 40 yards from the edge. A significantly greater (at the five per cent level) number of beds were located in CategOry 1 than in either Category 2 or Category 3. However, no significant difference WaS obtained between the number of beds in Category 2 and Category 3 (Table 8). An effort was made to determine whether or not the deer beds had been used more than once. Beds judged to be used only once formed a slight de~ pression on the duff with only slight disturbance. Sometimes the only sign of disturbance was a few crushed stems of Vaccinium sp. Beds judged to have been used more than once were well-formed, oval depressions slightly larger than the body of a deer. Some beds were on bare mineral soil with two to three inches of duff having been displaced from the site. The displacement of duff frequently resulted in a ring of litter around the bed as high as eight inches. Duff tended to be deposited more on the down slope side rather than the up slope side of the bed so as to form a level surface. It appeared that the displacement of the duff resulted more from the movement of the deer in the bed than from scraping with the forefeet before lying down. Deer were never observed scraping with the forefeet before bedding on summer range. Fifty-three per cent of the beds located less than 50 yards from the edge and 45 per cent of the beds located greater than 50 yards from the edge were believed to have been used only once. This difference is not significant at the five per cent level. This would indicate that there was no difference in the ability to locate beds on the two sites. �- 23 Table 7 - Location of mule deer beds in timber surrounding Long Draw Park, 1964. No. beds locatedLhr. 'used more used than once only once No. of hours searched No. of acres searched Distance from edge of timber in yds. Per cent of beds used more than once Per cent of beds used only once 6~7 34 0- 50 47 53 8.0 9·0 16.0 225 51-600 55 45 2·3 1.8 Table 8 - Location of mule deer beds 0-50 yards within the timber surrounding Long Draw Park, 1964. Distance from edge in yards Total no. of beds located Per cent of total Per cent used only once Per cent used more than once 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 33 20 14 7 6 7 6 10 4 5 1 113 29·2 17·7 12.4 6.2 5·3 6.2 5·3 8.8 3·5 4.4 ·9 '100.0 18.6 9·7 1.8 4.4 4.4 2·7 3·5 2,7 '2',7 2·7 0.0 '53·2 10.6 8.0 10·7 1.8 ·9 3·5 1.8 6.1 .8 1.7 ·9 '4b.E Since beds used only once were not recognizable after a short period of time and no method was determined to estimate the number of times other beds were used, it was not possible to compare these two categories. No evidence was obtained to determine whether or not the same deer used the same bed several times. It is believed that beds were used from one year to the next. �- 24 Use of water: The distribution of free water in the study area was such that it apparently had no effect on the distribution of deer. In addition to the two creeks that transected the area, there were numerous springs and seeps. Maximum distance to free water was less than 400 yards. Drinking was observed throughout both summers. Drinking in the parks was concurrent with feeding periods. However, since deer did not have to leave the timber to obtain free water they may have drunk during other periods of the day. Deer frequently were observed crossing the rapids of Long Draw Creek when it was running two to four feet deep, 40 feet wide and a velocity of approximately five feet per second. Only once was a deer observed to hesitate in crossing the creek. On July 31, 1963 a doe and two fawns were observed to approach Long Draw Creek. The doe and one fawn swam across the creek but the remaining fawn refused to do so. After two to three minutes of waiting for the second fawn, the doe and the first fawn swam back across the creek and the three went into the timber. The fawn that swam the creek had no difficulty. At this time the fawns were four to seven weeks old with their spots just distinguishable. Use of Salt: Use of salt licks was concurrent with the feeding periods in the parks. Deer were observed taking salt during each one-half month period from the last half of June to the first half of September (Table 9). Three salt licks were located in the study area (Fig. 2). The East lick on Corral Creek was established in July, 1963 and the West lick was established in June, 1964. The salt lick in Long Draw Park had been used by cattle and deer for many years. Deer did not use the lick established in July, 1963 until cattle had found it and had trampled the earth around it. This lick was established at least two weeks before the cattle moved into the area. An attempt also was made to establish a lick just below Long Draw Reservoir during the last half of July, 1993. Although salt blocks were out for over one month, no use by deer was observed. From these observations it appeared that deer were not able to distinguish a salt block as such until it had been discovered and used by cattle or other animals. However, on June 12, 1964, a five-pound block of salt was dropped in Corral Park where no previous salt had been. Just two days later the block was being used by deer. This indicated that deer are able to find salt without the aid of other animals. Observations indicate that deer have an acute sense of smell and this may aid them in the detection of salt. The ability to find salt in one instance and not in another possibly can be explained by wetter conditions, a gre~ter number of deer, and greater activity in June as compared to periods later in the summer. Although deer are most effective in detecting moving objects, they also are capable of detecting stationary objects which are not commonplace in their environment VIZ. a paper plate, a tin can, a man sitting motionless, or a block of sal~ They may be wary of these objects, but usually do not take immediate flight. Frequently they become curious and investigate. This curiosity would aid in the detection of salt. �- 25 The salt lick constitutes an important place for the occurrence of dominance displays. During 1963 and 1964, 40 per cent of the 89 dominance interactions recorded were observed at salt licks. Table 9 - Number- of mule deer observed at salt lick in Long Draw Park during mornings and evenings, 1964. Date No. of Days Observed AM PM Ave. No. of Deer ObservedLDay Does Yearlings AM PM AM PM 6/16-30 7 14 .1 .1 .4 1.3 7/ 1-15 7 10 ·3 1.2 .4 .6 7/16-31 3 5 ·7 1.4 1.3 .8 8/ 1-15 4 6 .2 1.5 .8 .8 8/16-31 4 8 .2 ·5 .2 .2 9/ 1-15 5 5 .2 .2 .2 Influence of weather and other environmental factors on deer activity: During '1964, twin yearling does were observed in Long Draw Park on 14 different afternoons. The time that these yearlings first entered the parks (Fig. 6) was correlated with maximum daily temperature, minimum daily temperature, minimum daily relative h~midity, per cent cloud cover at the time of entrance into the park, and moon phase for the prior evening. L~ addition, the time the first deer, regardless of sex or age, entered Long Draw Park in the evenings and the time the last deer left in the mornings were correlated with the factors mentioned above. All correlation coefficients were non-significant at the five per cent level. Precipitation had no apparent effect upon activity. Deer were observed feeding in fog, mist, light rain, down-pours, and snowstorms just as they were on bright, sunny days. Discomfort was not apparent during any of these conditions although deer occasionally were obse.rved shaking water from their bodies during wet conditions. Condition of the shadows had no obvious effect on deer activ'ity. Deer made no attempt to stay within the shadows of the timber. Wind was recorded during the summer of 1964, but no significant correlations with activity were obtained. However, this was expected because the extremes in wind velocity were narrow. Only 11 days from July 7 to September 11, 1964 were recorded with an average velocity greater than 5 miles per hour. �- 26 Home range: It appears that adult does returned to the same summer area each year accompanied by their fawns of the previous year. In 1963, seven fawns were tagged in the summer study area. Two were never seen again and one suffered a fatal accident. The remaining four returned to the same area with mature does in 1964. In addition, two adult does marked in 1964 returned to the same summer area in 1965· Migratory deer moving to the same summer and winter range year after year also were reported by Leopold, et ~l. (1951). At least some of the yearlings return to the same summer area as twoyear-olds. One yearling doe marked in 1963 was observed in the same area throughout the summer in 1964 and one marked in 1964 was observed in the same area in 1965· Both two-year-olds were observed with fawns. Two bucks marked as fawns in 1963 were observed in the same area in 1964 and again on June 24, 1965 (Fig. 7 and 8). One of these bucks (No. A1573) was killed by an archer on August 2, 1965,2.7 miles from the point of capture and out of the study area (Fig. 9). I believe this indicated a movement away from the home range occupied as a yearling. This buck was not observed during the previous two years within 2.5 miles of the point of kill. This is further substantiated by the fact that bucks other than yearlings were not observed in the study area after July 2, 1963 and not after June 30, 1964, with the exception of one adult buck observed on August 8, 1964. These marked bucks may have left the summer area the latter half of 1964 when they were yearlings. Yearling buck No. A1573 was not observed after July 9 and yearling buck No. A1571 was not observed after July 11, 1964. Table 10 presents the number of yearlings observed during each one-half month in the summer of 1964. If these data give a true index to sex ratio, there was a marked reduction in the number of yearling bucks as compared to yearling does. From June 15 to July 31 the male: female yearling ratio was 42·9:100 while from August 1 to September 15 the male: female yearling ratio was only.10:100. A possible explanation is that a greater per cent of the yearling bucks left the area than did yearling does, if yearling does leave at all. No evidence was obtained to indicate that yearling does left the study area. Dasmann and Taber (1956a) stated that indirect evidence suggested that young deer may disperse to new areas although many settle close to where they were reared. Dasmann and Taber (1956a) defined home range as the area normally occupied by a deer in feeding, resting, and escape activities. Theyatated that maps of home range must be general, for a home range consists of a series of small feeding, bedding, watering, and escape areas connected by travel lanes. Observations on home range were limited to the open parks with very few observations on marked deer in the timber. However, if the data on the location of beds are indicative of the area used in the timber, the area within 100 yards of the timber1s edge is contained within the primary area of use by most deer. �- 27 - Corrol Spruce-Fir Long Draw Reservoir Meadow Salt Lick Observation Post 1963 Observation 1964 Observation 1965 Observation Fig. 7. Location of 1963-65 observations of mule deer buck No. A1571 (born 1963). �- 28 - Cor r al I1J Spruce-Fir Meadow Long Draw I/le:servoir Salt Lick Observation Post 1963 Observation 1964 Observation 196,5 Observation' = 300 Yds. Fig. ;B..lLocation (born Jt96J) • '()if It9Gj·-oS .obaer-vatd.ons of mule deer buck No. A1573 �- 29 - fH o <D +' .r-! eo 'U I=l '" ~ M -g ;r~~;r11ll~~~~~-t~-:~~~~~~~ ~ '" r ~ ~ ~ ,~ I=l ww , .r-! u, .;( / ./ ... ~ § 0 8 '" • 0 o 8 ~ '" § 0 M § N o-• �- 30 - Table 10 - NQmber of yearling mule deer bucks and yearling mule deer does observed on the Long Draw Reservoir-Corral Park summer study area, 1964. Numbe r of Yearlings Observed 'Males Females Date Number of lfBlesLlOO Females 6/16-30 42 108 38·9 7/ 1-15 15 33 45·5 7/16-31 10 15 66·7 8/ 1-15 3 20 15·0 8/16-31 0 14 0.0 9/ 1-15 1 6 16·7 The locations of, observations of marked deer on the summer- ranges are shown in Fig. 7 to 14. Home ranges appeared to coincide closely in successive years. Only two marked adult does were observed a sufficient nuniber of times to obtain information on home range size. lfJaximumobserved home range diameter for adult doe No. 1 was 2030 yar-ds and adult doe No. 197 was 1650 yards. Maximum observed home range diameter for a yearling doe was 1100 yards and for a yearling buck, 750 yards (Ta:ole11). Home range of the fawn probably coincides with that of the doe. This also was reported by Dasmann and Taber (1956a). Daily movement of the fawn, however, appeared to be less than that of the doe, so that a smaller portion of the home range ~s utilized by the fawn than by the doe during any given period of time. The yearli!lg is at least as mobile as the adult doe and prooa-blj-has a home range of comparable size. Table 11 - Maxi~Qffiobserved home r nge diameter of mule deer on summer- range. IIJ'1;miber+ of lfaximum Diameter Tag No. Age and Sex Observatio!ls in Yards 49 & 50 47 A1571 A1573 16 197 1 Female fawn Female yearlings Male fawn lfJalefawn Male yearling IYfB.le fawn lfJaleyearling Female yearling Adult doe Two-year-old doe 9 3C 10 2 8 5 1') c. 5 4 5 900 1100 1000 360 450 750 750 840 1650 2030 �- 31 - Corral 6D Spruce-Fir Meadow Salt Lick Long Draw Reservoir Observation Post 1963 Observation 1964 Observation 1965 Observation = 300 Yds. Fig. 10. Location of 1963 observations of mule deer buck fawn No. 47. �- 32 - Cor r o! Ell Spruce-Fir ··0 Meadow Long Draw 101 Salt Lick Reservoir lEal Observation Post I~I 1963 Observation ~ ~ 1964 Observation 1965 Observation 1.0" = 300 Yds. Fig .• 11. Location of 1963-64 observations and 50 (born 1963). of mule deer does No. 49 �- 33 - Corral 1+;1 Spruce-Fir D Meadow Long Draw [Q] Salt Lick Rese,.voir ~ IE] Observation Post 1963 Observation @] 1964 Observation 1.0" - [f1 1965 Observation 300 Yds. Fig •.12. .Location of 1964-65 obser vations of mule .deer- doe No. 16 (born 1963) •. �- 3~ - 1 ~ I ~3 ~ ~. 1000 a::::::ELH 0 =r:::::::L_ ::-.:::L:_ 1000 2000 f.=--- ~ . ::=r.:=-====:J:-:- .5 t I E3 0 t-:--"3000 ._ 0 :F:::r:=J=::I::::::::E3::=t." .."--CONTOUR INTERVAL 40 FEET .Fig. 13. Location of 1963-64 observations of mule deer doe No.1 (born 1962). �- 35 - Cor r ot ElJ Spruce-Fir Meadow Salt Lick L.ong Draw Reservoir Observation Post 1963 Observation 1964 Observation 1965 Observation 1.0" Fig.· lb. = 300 Yds. Location of 196h observ.ations of adult nru1e deer doe No. 197. �- 36 Social behavior: Sociality: Sociality is defined as the tendency in individuals to join toget'her in groups and associate with each other. After reviewing the literature, it appears that the deer of North ~merica can be arranged in the following order from most to least social: barren-ground caribou (Ranqifer arcticus), elk (Cervus canadensis), mule deer, white-tailed deer and moose 'CAlces alces) Dasmann and Taber (1956a) stated that deer which characteristically inhabit dense cover usually form small groups or are solitary. Herds are typical of species that inhabit open areas of grassland or tundra. The mule deer is basically a social animal. The family group, which consists of a doe and her fawns, comprises the basic social unit. However, the sociality between family groups does differ markedly between summer and winter ranges as the basic function of the animal's life varies with the seasons. During the summer the primary objective of the family group is that of rearing the young, while the primary objective durL~g the winter is survival. The pregnant does returned to the summer range accompanied by their fawns of the previous year. Data on tagged animals were presented in the section on home ra..l1ge.Adult does exhibited greater sociality before parturition than after parturition (Table 12). In 1963, 63.6 per cent of the pregnant does observed were accompanied by yearlings or other pregnant does. In 1964, 79.2 per cent of the pregnant does observed were accompanied by yearlings or other pregnant does. After parturition, only 15.2 per cent of the does observed were accompanied by yearlings or other does in 1963. Only 17.1 per cent of the does observed were accompanied by yearlings or other does in 1964. Adult does may be even less social after parturition than these figures indicate. Several times two adult does or an adult doe and yearling were observed entering a park and leaving together. I had no choice but to place these animals in the same social unit although in some cases it was believed that they just happened to enter and leave together and had no social bond. I believe that the apparent reduction in sociality of the adult doe from pre-fawning to pos t=f'awn.Lngwas compensated for by the maternal care directed at the newborn fawn. Although the time in association with other adult does and yearlings was reduced, the adu l.tdoes spent considerable time in association with their fawns. Shortly before fawning, probably Leas than five days and in some cases possibly less than one day prior to fawning, the pregnant does drove off their fawns of the previous year. This was accomplished by repeated threats and attacks as the yearlings, in most cases, were reluctant to leave. Adult does were observed to chase yearlings as far as 200 yards. The distance which would provoke an attack was variable. Sometimes does allowed yearlings to approach within two or three feet before threatening them, while other times does were observed to go out of their way as much as 75 yards to threaten yearlings. The following excerpt from field notes serves as an example: �,-37 - 6/19/64 1848 T'nepregnant doe mentioned at 1'748 moved into the willows west of the salt lick and was feeding. She was joined by a yearling doe and they fed about 30 yards apart. '1.':.le pregnant doe turned and ran at the yearling and chased her about 30 yards. The pr-egnant; doe stopped and the yearling st opped , Both looked at each other for about five seconds and the pregnant doe agair:.chased the yearling another 30 yards before stopping. The yearling stopped just on the edge of the timber. The pregnant doe again gave chase fo~ about 20 yards and caught the yearli:::~g illthe timber. The pregnant doe at.ruck with both front feet but. made no corrtact and then chased the yea:r'lingin a circle. The yearling disappeared into the timber. The pregnant doe walked back into the meadow and ~esill~edfeeding. Table 12 - Sociality of mule deer on summer' range . Per Gent of Number of Observations Observations Social Unit. 1964 1963 19.64 1963 Pre-parturition Solitary does Does with yrLngs T-wo does Three does Four does 30.4 47·8 13·2 4.3 4·3 100-:0 8 6 3 0 0 , 17 21 33 9 3 3 69 100.0 73 38 4 6 1 122 139 21 27 3 0 1'90' 59·9 31.1 3·3 0.8 10C).0' Solitary y~:"J_~gs• 'l'woyr-Lngs . 11 21 2 Four yrlngs. does, Yrlngs. w-..!.th pre!lartu::.~i tion Yr Lnga . wit}:), does, post-partv_rit i.on Yrlngs. with ad-:::.1t bucks 0 23·9 45·8 4.3 0.0 32.1 'Ihr-ee yr Ings . 55 47 4 1 6 33 4 2 .* Post-parhE~i tion Solitary does Does with fawns Does .lith yrlngs. Two does Tnree does -"'4b ,----- * Yearlings 47·1 35·3 rr .6 0.0 or',.u L~. 9 'I'otalNumbe r Observed 196'4" 1963 8 8 6 0 0 '22 73·2 73 44 11.0 6 14.2 1.0r E: 0.0 3 100-:'0' -I]8 21 41 18 9 12 101 36 .L~ 27·2 0.0 0.0 100.0 6 0 2.2 ('")17 C-j 1'93' 100.0 c'r )) 2.4 0.6 94 12 4 13·0 19·3 12 27 8·7 15·8 / c 4 4·3 100.0 2·3 100:0 171 36.4 52·9 31.9 4.3 8·7 139 21 124,:;, 6 0 27·5 Per Cent of 'llotal 1963 i9b4 20.8 40.6 17·8 8·9 ~1.2. 100.0 72.0 10·9 14.0 3·1 0.0 100.0 14.1 53·8 20 .l~ 34.8 '(.'{ 4·7 0.0 1.5 62 15·4 23·0 38 6.4 14.1 c: 4 '715 2b9' 2.6 100.0 1.5 100.0 ,.., �- 38 It appears that pregnant does sometimes accompany other pregnant does after they have driven away their own yearlings. This association may last until only a short time prior to fawning. Some yearlings that had been driven away by their dam were observed to JOln other pregnant does until they again were driven away. These data were obtained from observations on marked individuals. Even though the doe and fawn(s) are essentially a solitary unit, they were occasionally observed in the company of other does and yearlings. On June 21, 1963, two does were observed with three fawnsj on June 25, 1963, three does were observed with three fawnsj and on July 17, 1963, two does were observed with two fawns and one yearling buck. There was no obvious antagonism in the groups mentioned above and they definitely were feeding and moving as a single group. The sociality of the yearling mule deer changed significantly during the summer, primarily as a result of the break with their dam just prior to the fawning period. For the purpose of analyzing the social structure of the yearling population, the summer of 1964 was divided into a pre-fawning period from June 10 to June 25 and a post-fawning period from June 26 to September 11. The summer was divided as such because the last pregnant doe was observed on June 25, 1964. The number of yearlings observed with adult does decreased from 56.0 per cent of the total number of yearlings observed in the pre-fawning period to only 21.2 per cent of the total number observed in the post-fawning period in 1964. This decrease was offset by an increase in the number of solitary yearlings and paired yearlings. Solitary yearlings increased from 11.4 per cent of the total in the pre-fawning period to 28.1 per cent during the postfawning period and paired yearlings increased from 26.0 per cent of the total number observed in the pre-fawning period to 42.5 per cent of the total observed in the post-fawning period (Table 13). From these statistics it appears that the close bond between mother and young ends, for most mule deer, at approximately one year of age. This is in contrast to the red deer (Cervus elaphus) (Darling, 1937), moose (Altmann, 1958 and 1960), and elk (Altmann, 1960) where the adult doe continues to affect the behavior of the yearling after they are one year old. lfzy observations differ from those made on the Columbian black-tailed deer by Dasmann and Taber (1956a). They found that the yearlings again were accepted by the adult doe in June and July after fawns were born in May. In some groups antagonism of the doe toward male yearlings persisted, but in other groups male yearlings were accepted as readily as the female yearlings. Male yearlings commonly left the family group during the winter and female yearlings commonly left the group between mid-winter and spring. Some male fawns left during the winter but most remained with their mother during the second year of life. My observations indicated that the relationship between adult does and yearlings essentially dissolved during the summer. The yearlings may have joined their dams in the fall when they migrated back to the winter range, although this seems improbable. �- 39 - Table 13 - Sociality of yearling mule deer on summer range, 1964. Social Unit Total Number Observed bZ2b-9Z11 bZlO-25 Per Cent of Total bZ2b-9Z11 b!10-25 14 14 11.4 28.1 62 0 50·3 0.0 7 31 5·7 21.2 Two yrlngs. 32 62 26.0 42.5 Three yrlngs. 0 12 0.0 8.2 Four yrlngs. 4 0 3·3 0.0 4 123 0 11+b 3·3 100.0 0.0 100.0 Solitary yrlngs. Yrlngs, with :pregnant does Yrlngs, with does not :pregnant Yrlngs with adult bucks Yearling black-tailed deer commonly are observed in :pairs. Cowan (1956) :presented data which indicated that the members of these :pairs may not be limited strictly to twins. He stated that by fawn counts it was determined that there were many more :pairs of yearlings than there had been twin fawns the :previous year. Data obtained in this study do not u:phold this observation. It a:p:pearstbat :paired yearling associates were com:posed :primarily of twins, and single fawns remained solitary the following summer. The number of observations of solitary yearlings and single yearlings in association with adult does increased from 41.9 :per cent of the observations of yearlings during the :pre-fawning :period to 53·1 :per cent of the observations during the :post-fawning :period in 1964. Paired yearlings and yearlings in association witb adult does decreased from 54.1 :per cent of tbe observations of yearlings during tbe :pre-fawning :period to 42·7 :per cent of the total observations of yearlings during the :post-fawning :period (Table 14). Neither of these changes are significant (at tbe five :per cent level). This suggests that single yearlings do not form associations witb other yearlings. This was further substantiated by observations of marked yearlings. The :possible exce:ption to this occurred during the :period wben adult does drove away tbeir fawns of tbe :previous year and tbey joined tem:porarily with other :pregnant does that still were accom:panied by tbeir yearlings. A significant difference was observed between tbe :pro:portionsof several social units observed in 1963 as com:pared witb tbe :pro:portionsobserved in 1964. These included solitary does - :pre-:parturition, solitary does - :post:parturition, does with fawns, does with yearlings - :post-:parturition, solitary yearlings, :paired yearlings, and yearlings witb does - :post-:parturition (Table 12). I can tbink of no satisfactory ex:planation for tbis variation �- 40 with the exception of the category does with fawns. In 1963, 31.9 per cent of the adult does observed after parturition were accompanied by fawns, while in 1964 only 10·9 per cent of the does observed after parturition were accompanied by fawns. It is believed that the decrease resulted from increased human disturbance in 1964. Dasmann and Taber (1956a) stated that the deer in their study area were adapted to living on the outskirts of human settlement and their behavior was adjusted to the occasional presence of man and his domestic animals. The presence of observers created no unusual disturbance and did not modify the normal behavior of deer. They found that 48 per cent of the groups observed during June and July were classified as an adult doe with a family. This included 64 per cent of all the groups in which does were observed. While these figures are not directly comparable with those obtained in this study, they do indicate the flexibility in the behavior of the species. Table 14 - Observations of yearling mule deer associating with other yearling mule deer.* Social Unit Single yrlngs Paired yr Ings Three yrlngs. Four yrlngs. Number of Observations 6/10-25/64 6/26-9/11/64 Per Cent of Observations 6/10-25/64 6/26-9/11/64 31 51 41.9 53·1 40 41 54.1 42·7 1 4 1.3 4.2 0 2·7 100.0 0.0 100.0 2 '71+ 9b * Regardless of association with or without does. Pre-fawning behavior: Pregnant does were identified by their distended abdomens. They appeared to be more sedate before fawning than at any other time during the summer. Does were capable of a fast trot and occasionally were observed bounding away after being frightened. Does appeared to grow more wary as the summer progressed, although no significant difference (at the five per cent level) was observed between the average length of feeding period for pregnant does and for does that already had fawns (Table 4). Fawning behavior: No data on behavior at parturition were obtained nor were any observations obtained concerning the place for giving birth or the time of day of births. No observations were made of animals which indicated that they were near term other than the general observations in the preceding section. Several authors have described fawning behavior and the events immediately before and after. Haugen and Davenport (1950) and Severinghaus �- 41 and Cheatum (1956) witnessed the birth process in captive white-tailed deer, and Michael (1964) described the behavior of white-tailed deer. during birth under natural conditions in Texas, although he did not actually witness the birth. Golley (1957) described the fawning behavior of penned Columbian black-tailed deer and VJiller (1965) gave an excellent detailed account; of the birth of a Columbian black-tailed deer in Oregon under natural conditions. Based upon observations of pregnant does, fawns, and does with fawns, the peak fawning period was estimated to be from June 12 to June 25 in 1963 and 1964. The first observation of a doe believed to have had a fawn was recorded on June 18, 1963 and on JQ~e 15, 1964. The last pregnant doe was observed on June 25 in 1963 and 1964. Post-fawning behavior: Isolation of the fawn. Tne newborn fawns spent the 'first few aBYS of life in isolation except during short periods when they nursed and followed their dam. The newborn fawns spent most of their time lying down. The proportion of time spent in each activity was not determined, but as previously related, it appeared to be dependent upon the degree of human activity in the area. The greater the human activity, the lesser time was spent in the company of the doe. Movement: Fawns were observed to get up and wander ar-ound in the absence of their dam. At 1400 on June 26, 1965, a fawn estimated at less than two weeks of age was observed lying in a clump of willows in a park. At 1500 the fawn got up and wandered around for approximately two minutes before bedding again in another clQmp of willows 10 yards from the original bed site. A set of marked twins, approximately four to six weeks of age, were observed to move about in the absence of the doe. The following is an abbreviated account from field notes: 9/11/63 1535 I observed twin fawns Tag No. 49 and 50 bedded approximately 10 feet apart, 50 feet within the timber. Fawn No. 49 stood up, looked around, and probably saw me but was undisturbed. 1539 Fawn No. 49 turned and walked up to the top of a rise 15 yards to the north, stopped, turned, and looked at me again. 1542 Fawn No. 49 looked aroundj at the ground directly in front of her, to the left, to the right, and in front of her, rather casual and und.Lstur'bed. 1545 Fawn No. 50 stood up. (This fawn has not seen me). 1547 Fawn No. 49 laid down. 1549 Fawn No. 49 stood up and walked o~t of sight. (This fawn was later observed bedded at 1620 approximately 100 yards from its first bed site). �- 42 1552 FaWi1 No. 50 started wanderi.ng around , walked up hill about 10 yards, stopped, and stood there. 1553 Fawn No. 50 defecated and started to wander around again. 1557 The fawn's dam appeared and came to the fawn. As the summer progressed and the fawns grew older, a greater proportion of their time was spent following the doe and wandering around alone or with their twin. During the first part of the summer the fawns stayed close to the doe when in her company. Does were observed to stop briefly and allow their fawns to catch up if they were lagging behind. Fawns occasionally were observed to run ahead of their dam, but most often they followed. The does allowed their fawns to lag farther behind as the season progressed. Escape behavior: The first escape behavior exhibited by the fawn was that of 'dropping to the gro-~YJ.d and remaining motionless (death feigning). Fawns would lie with their neck outstretched and their lower jaw resting on the ground, ears laid back against the neck, and their front legs beneath them in typical fashion, or one or both outstretched in front of them. Fawns were observed in one instance to drop to a completely bare forest floor with no vegetative cover and on another instance to drop into tall grass and lie in approximately one inch of water. Miller (1965) observed a fawn exhibit death feigning when it was less than two hours old and had never seen a human being. Death feigning was exhibited by fawns ll.YJ.til they were apprOXimately two weeks old. The last observation of death feigning occurred on June 27, 1963 and Ju..YJ.e 24, 1964. 1~e first fawn to escape without dropping to the ground was observed on June 27, 1963 and June 26, 1964. The tendency to drop to the ground and remain motionless diminished gradually over a few days. Fawns were observed to drop to the ground when frightened, but then immediately jump up and follow the doe. The stimulus for death feigning appeared to be the sight of a strange animal other tharl their own species or the flight of the doe. However, the possibility of other t;y-pesof communication from doe to fawn should not be ruled out. I capitalized upon death feigning behavior of fawns in an effort to capture and mark as many fawns as possible. Eleven fawns were captured in 1963 and 1964. Ten of these were captuxed after the doe had been frightened and the fawn had dropped to the ground. The remaining fawn was captured after observing it lie down in a meadow. The behavior of the doe and fawn when the fawn was captured is summarized in Table 15. Death feigning was strongest in the smallest, and pos sfbIy the youngest, fawns captured. At no time did they struggle or give voice. They remained in any position in which they were placed, as if they were dead. Older fawns struggled violently and gave voice fir'equentlywhen captured. The does did not attempt to defend their fawns when their fawns were captured by humans. The mothers of the smallest fawns retreated into cover and were not seen again. The dams of the largest fawns approached to within 30 yards, snorted, stamped, and were obviously in a highly agitated condition. The following relates the action of the second largest fawn and its doe during the fawn's captivity: �- 43 Table 15 - Behavior of mule deer doe and fawn when fawn is captured:' ·Weight of Fawn in Lbs . 9·50 11·50 Behavior of Fawn Behavior of Doe Did not struggle nor give voice, acted as if dead. Han into timber, did not return. Same as above (twin to fawn above). Same as above. tI If 10·75 Same as above Ran into timber, did not return, snorted several times. 11.00 Struggled only a few times, gave voice 5 times. Snorted several times, came out of timber to 30 yards, ran back to timber and watched quietly from 50 yards. 12.00 Struggled occasionally, gave voice 6 times, ran when released. Approached to 35 yds., ran back into timber, watched quietly. 12·30 Struggled frequently, gave voice several times, ran when released. Had walked into timber 15 minutes before fawn was captured. 13·50 Struggled occasionally, gave voice 5-7 times, ran to doe when released. Watched quietly from 50 yds., followed fawn into timber as if trying to smell it. 16.25 Struggled violently, gave voice frequently, followed doe when released Ran back and forth at distances of 30-75 yds., snorted, stamped, made great deal of commotion. 17·25 Struggled a few times, gave voice 5 times, ran when released. Same as above, except followed fawn when it was released. �- 44 6/24/63 2045 Fawn No. A1571, male, 16t pounds, was found lying in a grassy area between the willow clumps. The fawn struggled violently, throwing its head, kicking with all four feet, and bleating continually all the time it was in captivity. It did this with such effort that it began panting for breath shortly after it was caught. When this fawn first gave voice, a snort was heard from the south and we could hear something running toward us. We shined the light at the doe and yelled and she st9Pped, watched for a few seconds and then began to run back and forth in arcs of approximately 900 from distances of 30 to 75 yards. She would stop for only a few seconds and then began to quarter back and forth aga In . She frequently snorted. Upon being released the fawn iw~ediately ran LD the direction of its mother and they both ran into the timber. It appears that the attachment of the doe to the fawn grows stronger as the fawn grows older. Similar observations were made on pronghorn (Antilocapra americana) does and fawns by George D. Bear, Wildlife Researcher Candidate, Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department (personal communication). During this study an attempt was made to locate fawns with the aid of a game call as described by Benson (1948) and Diem (1954). Diem used a call which closely imitated the call of a bleating fawn. A doe would quickly leave the area if a call was used when fawns were not in her presence, but if fawns were present the doe would trot away only a short distance or she might even advance toward the caller. A Cree Game Call which closely resembled the voice of a captured fawn was used in this study. Not enough observations were obtained on does to comment farther on Diem's observations. However, some very obvious reactions were noted on fawns. On June 22, 1964 an adult doe, a yearling doe, and a fawn were observed feedi~~ on the edge of a meadow. Tne adult and yearling were frightened ana ran into the timber and the fawn dTopped. .~ search was made for the fawn but it could not be found. The Cree C-ameCall was blown and the fawn immediately jumped up about 15 yards from the caller, ra about 10 yards and dropped. The fawn was captured and marked during which time it neither struggled nor gave voice. After the tagging operation the fawD was left alone for about five minutes. It remained motionless. The Cree Game Call was blown and the fawn immediately jumped up and ran into the timber. On June 23, 1964, another fawn was captured and upon being released, the fawn remained motionless. Tne Cree Game Call was blown and the fawn immediately ju~ped up and ran into the timber. To supplement the above observations it was noted that on four occasions two fawns were observed to drop within 35 yards of each other. Tn two instances, the first fawn was captured but did not give voice and the second fawn was captured shortly thereafter. During the remaining two observations the first fawn gave voice repeatedly after being captured and the second fawn was not located. �It appears that the cry of a fawn in distress or a noise closely resembling it, acted as a stimulus for fawns to break death feigning and retreat. This action couls have definite survival value. If a predator captured one member of a pair of twins and that individual made a great deal of commotion and noise, the second member of the pair could slip away unnoticed while the predator was preoccupied with the first fawn. Cowan (1956) stated that Columbian black-tailed deer does and fawns ran in different directions when flushed. In this study does and fawns ran in the same direction after being flushed in 17 or 18 observations. Of these 17 observations, the fawn followed the doe into the timber 11 times, the doe followed the fawn 4 times, and both ran into the timber at different points but in the same direction the remaining 2 observations. Only once did a doe and fawn flush in different directions. This may be a behavioral difference at the subspecies level. As a general statement, it can be said that mule deer take the shortest route when seeking escape cover. If the habitat is composed of dense timber and open parks, there would be little advantage in a doe and fawn running in opposite directions when both could reach safety by using the shortest route. Voice. The larger fawns frequently gave voice when captured. This can best be described as a loud, high-pitched E-e-e-e-e-e. The distress cry was heard on two occasions other than when a fawn was captured. On June 25, 1963, a fawn was heard bleating in the area just west of the road on Corral Creek. The bleating continued at intervals for 15 minutes. At one time it was believed that the fawn was no more than 50 yards from the observer, but it could not be located. No other deer were observed in the area. The bleating was heard plainly at a distance of 300 yards. On June 26, 1963, a doe was observed feeding in a meadow on the south side of the road to the north of Long Draw Reservoir. A fawn was about 30 yards away in another clearing. The fawn was pursued but soon was lost from sight. About 30 seconds after losing sight of the fawn a shrill E-e-e-e-e-e was heard coming from north of the road. The fawn was again flushed 90 yards from where it was first seen. A doe was observed sneaking away about 75 yards from where the fawn was flushed the second time. It is quite possible that in these cases the fawn was lost and was giving voice as a response to this particular condition. It appeared that the doe associated bleating with a fawn in danger and attempted to seek it out. This may have been a deliberate effort by the fawn to attract its dam or it may have: been simply a response which was stimulated by fear, discomfort, or confusion. It is doubtful that the doe is capable of distinguishing the distress cry of its own fawn from that of other fawns. On June 22, 1964 a fawn was captured in a meadow. The dam of this fawn made a great deal of commotion and frequently approached to within 30 yards of the observer and fawn. After about one minute a second adult doe bounded out of the timber and into the meadow. Upon seeing the observer, she immediately ran back into the timber. Considering the capacity that the adult doe has to escape, it is not surprising that deer have not developed the ability to distinguish the voice of their own fawn from others. There would be relatively little danger involved in answering all distress cries. �- 46 On several occasions it was noted that the doe snorted and then bOLLDded away after being alarmed. The fawn then either exhibited death feigning or .followed the doe. However, it was not determined if the snort alone served as a stimulus to the fawn, as the snort was not observed without immediate flight. It is believed that the snort serves as an important means of longrange communication. If it does not serve as a stimulus for flight by other deer, it does draw their attention and cause them to become alert. In this condition they are better able to observe intruders and the flight of other deer around them, which I believe, is the most important means for the intraspecific corr@LLDicationof danger. Only one incident of a different type of vOcalization was observed: 7/11/63 1557 Fawn Tag 50 was about 15 yards east of me. The fawn perked up its ears, looked to the east, turned, and bounded to the,west. A doe came over the hill to the east. She watched the fa~Q for two to three seconds and ran after the fawn. The doe passed to the south of me about 10 yards. I do not believe the doe was aware of my presence. When she started to run she started to utter a soft, nasal nay-naynay. This noise was made through the nose with a frequency of about one per second. This could be heard for an estimated 15 yards. 1604 The doe came walking back with the fawn trailing about four feet behind. She was still uttering the soft nay-nay-nay. The doe walked straight tnward me and stopped 10 yards from me when she first became aware of my presence. Vocalization of the nature given above may constitute an important means of communication among mule deer. There is little need for communication over long distances, so if it exists, it would be difficult for the human observer to distinguish at distances greater than 100 yards. Doe returning to the fawn. Only two observations were recorded of does returning to their fawns. One of these observations was related in the section on voice. The other is as follows, abbreviated from field notes: 7/9/63 1830-1900 Adult doe was feeding on the south side of Long Draw Creek in the second finger of meadow. 1900 Doe licked her rump on the left side, turned her head and licked rump on the right side, and then raised her right hind leg and licked her udder. The doe looked up suddenly and flicked her tail. A fawn bounded out of the timber to the east about 50 yards away, raced across the meadow, and immediately began nursing. The fawn nursed for about two minutes before the doe stepped over it. Tbe fawn wandered around the meadow and twice attempted to nurse again but was repelled both times. 1912 The fawn wandered into the timber on the west side of the meadow. The doe paid no attention to the fawn. �- 47 1937 The doe grazed over to the east side of the meadow. A fawn jumped up when she was about five yards away and began nursing. The fawn nursed for 1 minute and 40 seconds before the doe broke off the period by stepping over the fawn. The doe resumed feeding and the fawn wandered around the meadow. 1942 The doe moved into the timber on the west and the fawn followed. Linsdale and Tomich (1953) stated that a doe returning to her fawns may signal them from concealment by her presence and her attitude and almost always approached the fawns by walking slowly and hesitantly with her ears "forward and her neck extended horizontally. They stated that strange deer passing the fawns caused no response from them, possibly because of a different manner of movement. Dixon (1934) reported that the doe may call the fawn from concealment by using a low bleat. Linsdale and Tomich (1953) reported that fawns three or four weeks of age may come to a doe when she approaches within 60 to 80 feet of their hiding place and fawns five or six weeks of age may come as far as 150 yards. The age of the fawns in the observation cited above probably was between two and four weeks old and their reaction could probably fit either category. ~edding behavior. Does did not hide their fawns as popularly believed. Rather, fawns hid themselves. After the fawn followed the doe for a period of time and wandered around exploring its environment, it picked a spot and laid down. The doe did not appear to be particularly interested in the activi~ ty of the fawn at that time. She continued feeding as before, and finally left the area. Although the doe did not pick the hiding place for the fawn, she did influence the general site of bedding by her movements while the fawn was following. Fawns assumed the normal resting position of adults when bedded. No preparation of the bed site was observed. Nine observations were made of fawns bedding in the meadows during the day and nine observations were made of fawns bedded in the timber. Considering the differences in observing time (658 hours in the meadows and 120 hours in the timber) and the difficulty of observing in the timber, it is obvious that most bed sites were chosen in the timber. Beds in the meadow ranged from 0 to 100 yards from the edge with an even distribution and beds in the timber ranged from 2 to 100 yards with five of the ten observed less than 20 yards from the edge. Not enough data were obtained regarding the distance twin fawns bed from each other to draw any conclusions. However, Dixon (1934) and Einarsen (1956) stated that a doe with more than one fawn ordinarily did not hide them together. They may be from a few feet to several hundred feet apart. �- 48 NursLng behavior. Ten nursing observations ranged from five seconds to two mlnutes. 11:; appeared that the does determined the frequency and duration of nursing. Eight of the ten nursing observations were terminated by the doe. In seVen observations the doe stepped over the fawn and walked away. In one instance the doe terminated the nursing period by kicking the fawn away gently with on~hind foot. Ln one instance, the fawn attempted to nurse twice thereafter, but each time the doe walked away. Fawns were observed to approach the doe to nurse from all directions, including between the front legs and between the hind legs. Fawns nursed standing except on 2 of the 10 observations. Once a fawn was observed to kneel and nurse and in another Lnstance a fawn was observed to nurse with the front legs stretched out Ln front of its body ~nd its chest only two or three inches from the ground. In six of ten observations the doe licked the fawn around the anal region while the fawn was nursLng and in three other observations the doe smelled the anal region of the fawn. This behavior was reported in domestic sheep and goats by Collias (1956) and in pronghorns by Prenzlow (1965). Possibly this behavior was stimulated by the scent of the fawn and aided in the cleansing of the fawn. This behavior would be particularly important during the period when fawns did not follow their mother for ~ny length of time so that nursing behavior composed a large portion of the time that the doe and fawn spent together. Collias stated that as soon as the you..nglamb or kid was nursin~ it frequently, but not always, wagged its tail and the mother as a rule promptly smelled beneath its tail. He postulated that the wagging of the tail helped waft any scent that may have been present. Mule deer fawns were not observed to wag their tails in any of the ten nursing observations. An unusual nursing observation was recorded on February 15, 1965 on the winter range study area and relates as follows: 2/15/65 1537 An adult doe had just finished urinating. A fawn was about five feet away. The fawn approached her quickly from the front on her left and started to nurse. A second fawn was about 10 feet away and upon seeing the first fawn nursing also quickly approached from in front of and to the left of the doe ~nd began nursing. Both fawns nursed for about 10 seconds before the doe stepped over the fawns and terminated the period. All three began grazing immediately. This was the only nursLng observation recorded during the two wLnters from January to the middle of March. Taking of vegetation. Fawns were first observed to take vegetation on July 11, 1963 and on July 16, 1964. Allen E. Anderson collected a fawn in the Poudre River drainage on Ju..ne·26,1963, which had vegetative fiber and gri t in the rumen. The fawn weighed approx lll!a tely 14·3/4 pounds and was estimated to have been born on June 8, using the criteria for aging whitetailed deer fawns set forth by Haugen and Speake (1958). Cowan (1956) reported observing a 48-hour-old blac~~tailed deer fawn nibbling on grass. Fawns probably start nibbling on vegetation when only a few days old but were not observed to graze intensely until they were an estimated six weeks old. Fawns generally spent more time wandering around and exploring their environment than did adults. Similar observations were reported by DasmaI1.ll and Taber (1956a). �- 49 Social integration of the fawn. Fawns made limited social contact with deer 'other than their dam for short periods throughout the summer although generally the family was solitary. On JQ~e 24, 1963, two adult does and two fawns were observed feeding and moving together, on Jlli~e25, 1963, three adult does and three fawns were observed together, and on July 17, 1963, two does and four fawns were observed feeding and moving together. Seven other observations of similar groups were recorded in 1963 although no observations were recorded in 1964. Although limited social contact was made throughout the summer, it appeared that the primary period of integration occurred after the doe and fawn(s) left the summer range. wpether integration occurred during migration or after reaching the winter range was undetermined. Dominance -- Dominance in mule deer largely was determined by sex and age c'lass. In general, adult does were dominant over yearling does. The second summer of life marks an important change in the social status of bucks. Bucks are dominated by adult does until they are at least one year old. During their second summer a reversal occurs with yearling bucks becoming dominant over most adult does. Only four observations were recorded of social dominance in adD~t bucks but they probably are dominant over all sex,and age classes. Dominance interactions between sex and age classes are summarized in Table 16. Table 16 -- Dominant-subordinate interactions of mule deer on summer range, 1963-64. Dominant Pre~nant does Pregnant does 2 Does, not pregnant Does, not Pregnant Subordinate Yrlng. does Yrlng. bucks Fawns 5 20 Adult bucks 27 9 3 1 1 Yrlng. bucks 6 6 YY'lng. does 4 3 Dominance was exerted in several different forms. Approximately 45 per cent of the interactions involved only a threat. The dominant animal lowered its head so that the neck was parallel with and on the same LeveL as the top of the back; the muzzle was extended and the ears were laid along the neck. Occasionally this threat involved swinging the head at the subordinate animal. Frequently the threat was coupled with a rush at the subordinate. This was most commonly executed at a fast walk or trot. Thirty-seven per cent of the observations involved a threat coupled with a rush. Deer were observed to terminate an attack by striking with one or both front feet. Deer were never observed to strike with the hind feet. Nine per cent of the observations involved striking with one front foot and eight per cent of the observations involved striking with both front feet. However, contact was made only �- 50 in two of the fifteen observations which involved striking. Bucks were not observed to use their antlers when they were in the velvet and still growing. The distance between individuals which wO~ld provoke an attack was variable. Many times individuals were observed feeding or salting within a few feet of each other without any antagonism and other times individuals would attack at distances of up to 75 yards. The longer distances which resulted in attack occurred between adult does and yearlings at the time the adult does were driving away their yearlings. Most commonly, the attacker would stop pur-sufng the subordinate after the subordinate had yielded and started to move away, but adult does were observed to pursue yearlings as far as 200 yards. Of 63 observations of dominant-subordinate interactions recorded in the summer of 1964, none could be attributed to competition for food, salt, bed sites, or water, and only one was recorded as a doe defending a fawn. All except one were recorded as competition for space or as a need by one individual to exert dominance over another. Play. I have used Schaller!s (1963) definition of play to distinguish this activity from other types of behavior. Schaller (1963), p. 249) defined playas ", ..any relatively unstereotyped behavior in which an animal was involved in vigorous actions seemingly withput definite purpose. I! Mule deer do not play often, which I believe is true of most ungulates. All forms of play observed involved locomotion. No observations of play were recorded which resembled sexual behavior or fighting. Play was observed in all sex and age classes with the exception of adult bucks. Fourteen play observations were recorded and categorized into three games: tag, dash, and bucking and bounding. The game of tag was observed twice between two fawns, once between two yearling does, twice between two yearling does and a yearling buck~ and once between a yearling buck and doe and an adult doe. In this game one individual chased another for a short distance and then the roles changed suddenly. The second animal then chased the first. Dash was observed twice in Single fawns and once by a doe and fawn. This game is best ex~mplified by the following excerpt from field notes: 7/11/63 0600 The doe and fawn mentioned above entered the meadow at a walk; the doe being in the lead. They walked along the edge of the timber and the doe started to browse on willow. Suddenly the fawn started running at a gallop as fast as he could, past the doe about 15 yards. He stopped and looked back at the doe. The doe stopped feeding and trotted up to the fawn until they were about three feet apart. She stopped and flicked her tail. The fawn started ruP~ing again and the doe ran after him until the fawn started into a tight circle of less than five yards in diameter around a tree. The fawn stopped next to the doe!s side as if it were to nurse. Both stood for about five seconds. The fawn again ran up hill at top speed for about 15 yards, stopped, and looked ba:ck at the doe. The doe gave a playful bound sideways and bounded up to the fawn. The fawn trotted into the timber and t~ doe followed at a trot. �- 51 Bucking and bounding games showed the greatest individual variation. Bucking and bounding games were observed five times; once each by a lone adult doe, by a lone yearling buck, and by a lone fawn, and once by a yearling buck and doe and an adult doe, and once by two yearling does and a yearlLng buck. This play was characterized by bounding, bucking, and jumping, and frequent changes in direction. Frequently they kicked their hind legs out to the side and bounded about stiff-legged. Prenzlow (1965) also observed this type of play in pronghorns. A variation of this game was observed in a lone fawn. At 0549 on July 17, 1963 a fawn was observed grazing in a meadow. It raised its head and began moving its head and neck in a circumducting motion, and at the same time began bounding up and down on its front legs while keepihgits hind feet in place. The fawn appeared to land stiff-legged. This action continued for 25 seconds and was followed by approximately six minutes of sporadic tag with another fawn. The duration of play periods varied from less than five seconds to seven minutes in length. Six of the observations were recorded during the morning feeding period and eight observations were recorded during the evening period. Territorial behavior. Only a few authors, Darling (1937), Dasmann and Taber (1956a), and Graf (1956), have discussedterritorialism in members of the family Cervidae. Graf (1956 p. 165) defined territory as follows: ....an area or range exclusively occupied by an individual or group of individuals of a species, which is defined and recognized by them as their e~Glusive property or territory. Such a territory may be actively defended against invasion by others outside the territory of the individual group. Where not defended, the territory is nevertheless definitely marked by recognizable 'sign posts' on the territory. Darling (1937) recognized a form of territorial behavior in the red deer (Cervus elaphus) of Scotland. He found that a specific group of stags or a group of hinds and calves occupied an area and all other groups avoided the area, generally. He stated that territories occupied by the grazing herd were bounded by choice and not by jealousy. If circumstances called for it, the territory of another group may be occupied; but this occupation was tolerated. Graf (1956) was of the opinion that the Roosevelt elk (Cervus canadensis roosevelti) exhibited a high order of territorialism in parts of its geographic 'range and that there were indications of territorialism in other members of North American deer. Grafbelieved that antler-rubbing in the black-tailed deer represented the establishment of sign posts used in some way as territorial markers by bucks. Dasman and Taber (1956a) studied the behavior of a non-migratory herd of Columbian black-tailed deer in California. They observed that the centers of activity of adult does with fawns were spaced evenly and were separated by at least 150 yards. They believed that the principal reason for the spacing appeared to be mutual antagonism and that this indicated territorial behavior. �- 52 I found no evidence of territorial behavior within the parks during this study. However, no data were obtained to refute or substqhtiate the concept of territoriality within the timber. There may be some areas within the timber which were exclusively occupied by one adult doe, but this was undetermined. These statements can be made with relevance to territorial behavior: (1) the sociality of the doe was sharply reduced after fawning, but two or more families were observed feeding and moving together on several occasionsj (2) practically all observations of conflict between adult does on the summer range could be classified as conflict for space, but this was also true of all conflict between adult bucks, yearling bucks, and yearling does, and (3) no portion of the parks was used exclusively by adult does, and indeed, home ranges overlapped considerably. With these observations inl mind, I think it best to view Rocky Mountain mule deer as being non-territorial or as having a midofication of territorial behavior which Altmann (1958) observed in moose. She advocated a ring of "sliding territory IIaround the cow and calf which was upheld by the dam. In case of migration or drift this area shifted with the cow~alf group. This type of territoriality was upheld even less rigourously in the mule deer than in the moose. If this concept is applied to mule deer the IIringof territory IImay be at times less than 50 feet in diameter. In the chaparral of California the dispersion of vegetation may be such as to allow territorial behavior to develop but on the summer range in the spruce-fir zone in Colorado, a comparatively large number of deer must use the small area of the parks to feed and thus would reduce the desirability of territoriality. Conflict among deer using the parks undoubtedly was reduced by deer entering and leaving at different times during the feeding periods. During the early part of July it was possible to observe six to eight different times with comparatively little overlap. This also may be the reason, in part, for my inability to correlate deer activity with weather conditions. Migration The Poudre deer herd is composed of two segmentsj the migratory and the non-migratory deer, with the latter remaining on the winter range the year around. Tne migratory deer comprise a large majority of the entire population although the exact proportion in each group is as yet, undetermined. For this reason, the Poudre deer herd is considered to be, and is managed as, a migratory herd. Siglin (1965) stated that the major movement from winter to SUJrunerrange was west and southwest since the higher elevations were located in those directione with respect to the bulk of the winter range. He further discussed movement of individuals marked within the Long Draw Reservoir Corral Park summer study area and the Stevens Gulch winter study area. Five deer from the Long Draw area marked during the summers of 1963 and 1964 migrated southeast to a winter range near Estes Park, Colorado. One buck marked as a fawn in the summer of 1963 was killed in October, 1964 on Storm Mountain in the Big Thompson River drainage east of the summer study area, and one buck fawn marked in the Long Draw study area in June, 1964 was observed several times on the Stevens Gulch winter study area in 1965. In migrating from the summer study area to the winter study area, the fawn traveled 23 air-line miles in a northeasterly direction. This indicated that at least some of the animals observed on the winter range were the same as those observed on the summer range. �r:; 7/ - 53 Two observations were obtained regarding migrations out of the winter study area to summer range. An adult doe marked in the winter of 1963-64 was observed near the Fish Creek Campground in the summer of 1964. Another adult doe marked in the winter of 1964-65 was observed in the Fish Creek Campground in the summer of 1965. Winter Population and composition: The migratory deer had been on the winter range for several weeks before intensive observations commenced in January. The herd continued to remain on the winter range for several weeks after observations ceased in March. Winter populations on the study area had stabilized by January and appeared to remain stable throughout both winters of observation. During 1964 the population of the 2.5 square mile study area was estimated at 21 bucks, 49 does, and 30 fawns or approximately 40 deer per 'square mile. Deer numbers increased from 1964 to 1965. All sex and age classes increased although the greatest increase Qccurred in the fawn category. The 1965 winte~population was estimated to be 27 bucks, 54 does, and 44 fawns or approximately 50 deer per square mile. As previously stated, the number of deer on the study area appeared to be stable from January to March. Loss from diseases, accidents, and star-va-tion probably was negligible. Coyotes (Canis latrans) may take some animals on the winter range although a decrease 'in the'number in any age class was not apparent either year. Coyote predation is discussed further in the section on deer-coyote behavior. Daily activity: Mannerisms Feeding. Feeding behavior was described by Bailey (1960) for t'heRocky Mountain mule deer and Linsdale and Tomich (1953) for the Columbian b'Lack-La.l.Led deer. Observations during this study were in general agreement with their descriptions. Feeding started shortly after deer had risen from their beds. Most commonly, a deer stood up and stretched by humping its back, raising its tail, and extending one or more of its legs. They also were observed to stretch their back by walking forward with the front legs so as to bow the back ventrally. Deer occasionally stretched their neck and yawned. They frequently groomed themselves by scratching with a hind leg or antler or by licking. Feeding usually started within 10 feet of the bed. This general procedure also was described by Bailey (1960). Feeding behavior was best described as casual. Deer seldom fed long in one place. They may feed for one or two minutes on one browse plant, walk one to several steps, feed on another plant for a period of time, and then again move on. As on the summer range, deer apparently did not purposefully look up to see if they could spot danger while they were feeding. Grazing behavior was similar to browsing. They might ,feed in one spot for a few seconds to two or three minutes, feeding to the front and to the left and right. They then would take from one to several steps and again graze for a period of time. �- 54 L~ 20 observations (12 of does, 4 of bucks, and 4 of fawns) of undisturbed browsing on mountain mahogany and bitterbr~sh, the average distance moved in a five minute :period was 8.5 yards and ranged from 2 to 15 yards. Eighty:per cent of the observations were less than 10 yards. McMillan (1953) found that moose in Yellowstone Park moved an average of three yard.s in 241 five-minute observations with a range from one to six yards while feeding undisturbed on willow. He stated that the rate of movement while feeding was characteristic of a :particular s:pecies and that moose were not of a nervous temperament. Therefore, they do not continually move while feeding. Deer on the Poudre s:pend a considerable amount of time grazing although no data were obtained to determine the exact :pro:portionsof time s:pent browsing and grazing. Grazing and browsing activity frequently were intermixed, with deer first browsing for one to several minutes and then grazing. Of 25 observations (17 of does, 4 of bucks, and 4 of fawns) the average distance traveled in five minutes of undisturbed feeding was 9.1 yards with a range from 1 to 50 yards. Seventy-six :per cent of the observations were less than 10 yards. No significant difference (at the five :per cent level) was observed between the distances traveled during browsing and grazing. Snow cover affected feeding behavior markedly. Deer were not observed to :paw throl~h snow to graze so as little as two inches of snow caused deer to switch exclusively to browse. However, snow usually did not stay on southor west-facint slo:pes for longer than one day and frequently melted off in less than one day. Deer have been observed :pawing through snow to feed on lowgrowing :plants on the higher elevations of the Poudre winter range. This behavior also was re:ported in Montana by Bailey (1960). If snow were to stay several days, these deer :probably would start to :paw for lower :plants. Only one observation was recorded of a deer feeding while bedded. On January 13, 1964; a yearling buck with a cri:p:pledfront foot was observed to lie down and feed in a semi-circle in front: of him for 28 minutes. This behavior :probably was a result of his cri:p:pledcondition. RestL~g. Deer never were observed lying with the anterior portion of their body lower than their :posterior :portion. Deer laid on the level, most commonly. On the study area this was accomplished by lying along the contours. Deer always laid facing downslo:pe. The direction deer were facing when lying down a:p:pearedto be random with as many facing one direction as the other. This is in agreement with Linsdale and Tomich (1953). They stated that deer facing L~ different directions :provided a better lookout than a single animal, or several facing the same way. Linsdale and Tomich (1953 p. 359) described the bedded deer as follows: Deeroridinarily rest with the forelegs flexed beneath the chest, with the head u:p and slightly to one side, and with one hind leg exposed along the same side. In the time of resting, however, they may asslune a variety of attitudes by shifting the ears, head, and forelegs, or, less commonly, the entire body. Resting deer are not :purposefully alert to their surroundL~gs, but they rely on the involuntary function of the senses for information. A. deer at rest in the daytime may occasionaloy lay its head back on a flank or hind leg and doze. The eyes are not fully o:penj the lid droo:p more or less, but sometimes suddenly o:pen wide and then gradually close again. This is a:p:parentlyas close to slee:p as deer ever come. �- 55 Deer individually were less alert when lying down. The length of time a deer rested with its eyes closed varied from only a second to several minutes. The longest a deer was observed with its eyes closed was 5 minutes and 15 seconds. However, the situation would be rare if all animals in a group he.dtheir eyes closed at the same time. Therefore, a group was no more vulnerable when lying down than when feeding. Deer commonly ruminated when lying down. Deer rarely rested or ruminated standing, although this behavior was observed. Bailey (1960) reported that mule deer commonly constructed a bed by scraping the site with a front foot before lying down. This action was observed only twice in the two seasons of observation. On March 3, 1964, two animals in a group of eleven were observed to scrape snow from their beds before lying down. On February 8, 1965 five animals in a group of 13 were observed to scrape snow from their beds before lying down. This behavioral difference undoubtedly was the result of a difference in snow cover. Linsdale and Tomich (1953) stated that deer rarely were observed pawing at open, grassy ground. ,Feeding and resting behavior of groups. Mule deer usually feed and rest as a group. If a group was resting and one animal stood up and started feeding, other deer usually were stimulated to do the same. The length of time required for an entire group to get up or lie down was variable and appeared to depend primarily on the length of time the group had been feeding or lying down. If a group had been lying down for a long time, the time required for all members of a group to rise was shorter than if they had been bedded down only a short time. Sixteen observations were recorded of groups of from 5 to 14 animals getting up to feed. The time required for a group to rise averaged 24.5 minutes, ranged from 5 to 52 minutes, and had a standard deviation of 15.3 minutes. Seventeen observations of groups (size 5 to 15) lying down averaged 32.5 minutes, ranged from 13 to 66 minutes, and had a standard deviation of 15.9 minutes. There was no significant difference (at the five per cent level) between the time required to get up and to lie down. The size of the group (up to 15 animals) appeared to have little effect upon the length of time required to lie down or get up. Bailey (1960) reported that adult bucks usually were the first in a group to lie down. Tney tended to lie down earlier and rest longer than does. Does stayed down longer than fawns. He reported that fawns were frequently observed feeding while adults rested. He found this to bepart~cularly noticeable during the latter part of the winter. This was not apparent on the Poudre winter range. Resting or feeding was likely to be initiated by any sex and age class and none was observed resting or feeding consistently longer than others. This behavioral difference may be the result of different climatic and range conditions on the Poudre as opposed to those in Montana. Possibly greater snow depths and colder temperatures caused growing fawns to expend proportionally more energy than did adults and greater energy requirements caused fawns to forage longer than adults. The Poudre has an excellent winter range and weather conditidns caused deer a minimum of hardship. �- 56 - Feed-:::,est-i'eed complex. Ba.LLey (1960) 6bsel'ved that deer- j.n Montana generally t'o.LLowed a set pa tt.e:r"~1. of" f'ee:ii2"lg i':roombefore daylight urrt LL between 0930 and 1130 and then rested. 'ZQeyaga:i.:clfed from be tween 1400 and 1600 until after dark. 7.o.i8 was the gene ra.L })atter'::.::.observed 01:'. the Poudr-e wInter range in 1964 (F::'g. 15, A group was classii':l.ed. as :cesting if half or more of the members were lying down, and feedi':.lg if' ovez- half t.he g:i:'O'J ..lJ were s t.and.lng . In 1964 (leer feel. urrtd L between 18!)U and J/;3,) (B~:.':lJ~'L::e C7c~.~>o6i4), t.hezi :::'ested, and fed aga.ln from between 1200 a~:!.'l1500 p':.ltil dark (sunse t 1649-1806). Only one obserli,rationwas :~e(:ord.ed in 1964 of' a gro?;:p feeding between 1030 and 1200. 'l1J.is patter:.'? was evf.dent , b:::t !lO"~ as o'\J-;;"iO~lS d~..:('L;,g the wir~ter of 1965 Fig, 16) Deer we~('eobse:cved feedi:2g at all hour-s of t.he day. ITl ar; effort to determi::le feedi:::fj pa tte:C:LB, tLe <3.sJ 'IITa,S ,lj..vi,iell Lrrto tLi::ee I)I"'}:'j.od.s:period one - 0700-1015; p2:doo.l 'two ,., 1016,-133('.; arc.J.pE::riod three - 1331-1645. 'Ihe number' of' g:;:'OU}JS f'ees..ing in each :pe:':':~od 'was r'e(~oz"dt.'(l. If' a group was observed feeding before 070:), after 1645~ or :L:. two 8'LJ..c<:;essive :pe:dods~ it was disregarded. The number- of' gr-oups pbse2.'vt:;{lfeea.l::J.g i::2 periods 0~2eaZ1Qthree was si~~ifican'cly greater (at the five pe~~'cerrt level) tt:.an the number- observed in period t·~o il'- 1964 and 1965, .b:.lt E~)s~g::i:t:"i:::.a:CJ.t.(~ii'f'e:r~,~ce 'was observed between pel'lod one and three, el tLcr J3~ .1.96400:' 1965 ('l'atu.e 17) ~ 0 Table 17 -- ]'ijuJlJ.ber of groups o-f: rm:.le (3..e:?~' dJseryed f'eedl.::::lg on wi:atel" ~ r_a_n"",g,-e~,_1964-65.:.~ . . ~~_~_.__ ~ . _~ No. _y_e_a_r____ 0:£' Days Obse~ Pe:do.:l 0:(;8 Pe:docl. Two ~Trog_..::..lg..~5 ,_--2-~,:n6-~ 13)0 30 __ I'eriod hr'ee 1331-16~ 8 42 30 71 Deer were observed rest:f.:c.,~g at all hO;.~l·8 of t.ne cla;y wl·c:J. no signifieant difference 'betwer::'Ll t:te !l'mibe:c'of gnTlls o1:,se::':'\/Ed .. ::'e~:;tir"gin each of the three pez-Lods . However, this wa.s ld.s.sed. by thei:;:· £1.a 1::,it of resting Ln the t.Lmber-. Si..rwe it was much easier to o'bserve deer o:~ open s Lopes the {lata obta lried on the two vegetative t:Tpes cannot, be c;crrlraJ:'ecL De,.:;r6..e:e:L~itelY' rested more in period two thazl L1 J'e::d..od 02~eand tLc(,::~e. ~~r~li:! I;:-':-'imaI'Y' plac:e of rest:Ln was the tirribey'ed nortb.-faci:r:'g slopes 'j:n:-:tswas eYi'l(:jr~::ed hldi:rectly l1Y the general lack of observations in per-Led two :L~l 1964 a::~:1the r-ed:)f·:tiay! i21 number- of groups obser-ved feedillg in ~oeY":Lodtw'o 1.:::: J.90+ and 19650 I can f:L':lcl no satisfactory ex:planat:Lo:c. for the d:Lffer','::::C:'::e :b f'ee(3.ing 8Xl<1 resti:::,g pat.t.erns exhibited in 1964 and 1965. Casua L ob:::',e:~'\TatioU3 ind"i:~ated beds we::oe concerrtz-ated along the edge of the t5_mber as OZl t:b::, S·)jllY!ler' ra:lge and rJ::l the 1;..pper portions of the s l.ope , just as t.he o'bserya';~::1.'):O.s of" feeding we~c'e co::::.c:entra ted on the upper por+Lons of the fllope. 0 �<II: .•.·.·.·.·.1 1700 1600 c::::::J 1500 10 c::=:I c::;z::;:3 s::l ::::~ ~ 1400 ~ to 1300 ~ 1200 oM CZ!;!:::l frij I ~ o :r: c:;z:;:J c::::J ~ Em II ~ c::::::3 \J1 --J <2 s:; ~ 1100 n Cd 1000 c:::::=J ~ 0900 i :1:' I:'~II: •• 0800 k>d Group Feeding 0700 r :: :1 Group Bedded 13 14 15 16 17 20 21 22 23 24 28 29 31 5 6 January Fig. c:::::J ~ 15. Observed mule deer activity 7 10 11 13 14 18 19 2021 24 25 27 2 3 February on winter ran~, 4 9 10 11 12 March 1964. \0 ~ \} �1700 I 1600 ~ ::J::Jflli m 1500 ~II 8 B!I £«ID 1400 CI) 1300 c:.;;m ~ ~ t::::::::l J... ;::$ o ezn ::r::1200 s:: .,.; Iii al ~1100 E-t 1000 VI co EJ = = 0900 0800 m:l [] 0700 ~ EJ Group Feeding S 6 7 Fig. 16. 0 Group Bedded 8 U 12 13 14 19 2122 25 26 28 29 1 2 4 5 8 9 10 U 15 1618 19 2223 25 26. 2 3 January February Observed mule deer activity on winter range, 1965. S 9 101112 l3 15 Uarch �- 59 Effects of topography and vegetati9n on mule deer activity. Slope aspect, with its characteristic vegetation, and vertical position on the slope, were probably the two most important factors in determining the distribution of mule deer on the winter study area. Of 202 observations of groups of deer in 1965, 54.0 per cent were first observed on the upper one-third of the slope, 29·.2 per cent were first observed on the middle one-third of the slope, and only 16:8 per cent were first observed on the lower one-third of the slope. Loveless (1963) obta.lned similar results. He f'ound that the upper portions of the slope tended to be warmer than the lower portions. This may affect the distribution of deer. Also, the additional visibility that a deer obtains from being on the upper portion of the slope may be a factor in determining distribution. Deer were much more difficult to approach from below than from above. As previously stated, deer most frequently rested in the timber on the north-facing slopes. From these timbered sites they moved onto the adjoining slopes to feed on browse, forbs, and grass. It appears that the distribution of cover types used for resting on the winter range study area was more important in determining the distribution of deer than was the distribution of vegetative types used for feeding. A significantly greater number of groups were observed feeding on slopes facing South or West than on slopes facing East or North. However, it must be remembe~ed that these are not strictly comparable because of the heavier vegetation on the north-facing slopes and the corresponding reduction in the ability to observe deer on these slopes. There was a definite preference for the sout.h-and west-facing slopes for feeding and this was a direct reflection of the vegetation. Vegetation on these slopes was primarily grass types or browse and grass typ~s. Infhtence of weather on deer activity . Many authors have attempted to comment on the influence of weather on deer activity. Few, however, have evaluated deer activity quantitatively. An attempt was made during this study to evaluate the influence of weather conditions on deer activity by mathematical methods. The observation day was divided into three periods identical to those used to analyze feeding behavior with period one from 0700-1015, period two from 1016-1330, and period three from 1331-1645. Weather conditions within these periods were compared. Temperat'.lre.Loveless (1964) stated that deer noticeably responded to fluctuations in temperature, particularly sudden and sharp decreases or increases. Further evidence suggested that deer moved from location to location in winter habitat seeking out the most comfortable" temperature zone. He believed this to be about 150 to 450F in the winter. If this were true, then deer should have had little trouble attaining their objective on the study area for approximately 85 per cent of the hours between 0700 and 1645 0 on days which observations were taken in 1965 were between 10 and 500 F. II To analyze the effects of temperature more precisely, the hours of observation in each period was categorized into 100 F ranges (-10-00 F, l-lOoF, 11-200F, etc.). The number of hours of observation in each temperature range was compared wi.th the number of groups observed feeding and resting during each temperature range to obtain a ratio of groups observed per hour during each 100 F temperature range. This ratio should provide an index to the amount of activity at different temperatures. ~1.eresults are s-ummarized in Table 18. �- 60 Table 18 - A comparison of the number of feeding groups and resting groups of mule deer observed per hour at different temperature ranges. Temperature Range of 11-20 21-30'< 31··L!·0 -10-0 0-10 2 19 31 33 2 14 22 1.0 ·74 Resting groups observed 0 Resting groups/hour Period Two 1016-1330 No. hours observed Period One 0700-1015 No. hours observed Feeding groups observed Feeding groups/hour 41-50 51-60 26 21 0 39 22 16 ·71 1.18 .85 ·76 5 7 9 3 4 .0 .26 .23 .27 .16 .19 0 14 23 32 29 21 7 5 1 10 7 7 2 ·35 .04 ·31 .24 ·33 .29 2 5 8 5 3 0 .14 .22 .25 .17 .14 .0 14 18 41 26 26 4 9 13 21 20 11 5 .64 ·72 ·51 ·77 .42 1.25 4 3 4 3 4 0 .29 .16 .10 .11 .15 .0 Feeding groups observed Feeding groups/hour Resting groups observed Resting groups/hour Period Three 1331-1645 No. hours o'oserved Feeding groups observed Feeding groups/hour Resting groups observed Resting groups/hour 0 No significant difference (at the five per cent level) was obtained between the number of0deer observed feeding or resting during any of the 100 temperature 0 ranges from 0 to 60 F. Deer were as likely to be feeding at 500 F as at 00 F. As previously stated~ deer tended to feed on the west- and south-facing slopes from daylight until between 0800 and 1030 and then moved into the timber to bed. It would seem possible that this variation was in some way connected with tem.:-' perature. However, o deer were observed moving into the timber to rest at 00 F on some days, at 20 F on some days> and on other days were observed to stay on the open slopes all day when temperatures registered over 400 F. Possibly a wide range of temperature is required before a pattern becomes evident and this requirement was not met. �- 61 - Loveless (1964) stated that relative humidity is an artificial ratio and, as such, does not exist in the environment. Within a given air mass relative humidity shows an obvious negative correlation with air temperature. Therefore, the inferences drawn from the temperature data should hold for relative humidity as well. Wind. In 1965, the wind velocity averaged more than nine miles per hour for 5~per cent of the hours of observationj five to nine miles per hour for 31.7 per cent of the hours of observationj and less than five miles per hour for 13.5 per cent of the hours of observation. Wind was prevailing westerly with wind direction from the northwest or west 92.4 per cent of the hours when velocity was more than nine miles per hour. The aspect used for feeding and resting was compared when the wind was five miles per hour from any direction, five to nine miles per hour from any direction, and more than nine miles an hour from the northwest or west (Table 19). Wind appeared to have no effect in determining the aspect deer fed on. They tended to concentrate on south- and west-facing slopes regardless of wind speed or direction. This seemed to reflect the distribution of food types more than anything else. Not enough observations were obtained on resting deer to warrant conclusions. Loveless (1964) stated that wind velocity or direction apparently induced little reaction in deer except during very cold weather when the temperature was low (150 F and below) and wind velocity was high (25 miles per hour and above). In these cases deer tended to avoid open slopes and exposed situations. Bailey (1960) was in general agreement. He found no obvious reaction to wind during feeding periods but stated that deer tended to bed in sheltered sites during strong wind. Cloud cover. The number of feeding groups and resting groups observed per hour were compared under different conditions of cloud cover. The hours of observation within each period were classified as having cloud cover of greater than 50 per cent or less than 50 per cent. No significant difference (at the five per cent level) was obtained between the number of groups observed feeding or resting under different conditions of cloud cover (Table 20). Precipitation. Most precipitation from January to the middle of March fell in the form of snow. This seldom stayed on the west-facing and southfacing slopes longer than one day and frequently melted off in less than onehalf day. Snow temporarily affected the feeding habits of deer in that as little as two inches of snow would stop grazing until the snow melted, usually in less than a day. The only incidents of pawing prior to bedding were observed when snow covered the ground. These were previously discussed in the sections on feeding and resting mannerisms. Snow storms had no obvious effect upon deer behavior. Deer seldom were observed during heavy snow storms; but tpis was not unusual since visibility frequently was less than 100 yards. Snow cover had a very obvious effect upon the ability of the observer to see deer and vice versa. White clothing effectively reduced the chances of the observer being seen before spotting groups of deer which were feeding or lying down. �- 62 Table 19 - A comparison of the number(offeedi:qg groups and resting groups of mule deer utilizing different slope aspects at different wind velocities. Aspect Utilized N NE E SE S SW W NW Wind less thwl 5 MPH No. groups observed feeding Per cent of groups observed feed;ng W;tnd 5-9 MPH No. groups observed feeding Per cent of groups observed feeding 0 6 0 18 6 12 9 3 .0 11.1 .0 33·3 11.1 22:.2 16.7 5·6 2 1 0 16 4 9 15 2 4.1 2.0 .0 32·7 8.2 18.4 30.6 4.1 0 6 2 32 7 27 8 20 .0 5·9 2:~.0~31.4 6·9 26·5 7.8 19·6 0 0 0 4 0 0 3 1 .0 .0 .0 50.0 .0 .0 37·5 12·5 0 0 0 6 0 4 5 0 .0 .0 .0 40.0 .0 26·7 33·3 .0 0 0 1 8 2 17 0 5 .0 .0 3·0 24.2 6.1 51.5 .0 15·2 Wind greater than 9 MPH* No. groups obsel~ved feeding Per cent of groups observed feeding Wind less than 5 MPH No. groups observed resting Per cent of groups observed restL~g Wind 5-9 MPH No. groups observed resting Per cent of groups observed resting Wing greater than 9 MPH* No. groups observed resting Per cent of groups observed resting * Wind from W or NW only. �- 63 Table 20 - A comparison of the number of feeding groups and resting groups of mule deer observed per hour under different conditions of cloud cover. Period One 0700-1015 No. hours observed No. feeding groups observed F.ee'ding(i!ir'bU'P1J¢~'4i"')dae-:B'IIed . No. resting groups observed Resting groups/hour Period Two 1016-1330 No. hours observed No. feeding groups observed Feeding groups/hour No. restL~g groups observed Resting groups/hour Period Three 1331-1645 No. hours observed No. feeding groups observed Feeding groups/hour No. resting groups observed Resting groups/hour Per Cent 0-50 Cloud Cover 51-100 81 74 51 41 .80 13 .25 ·91 13 .16 .12 54 15 .28 11 .20 71 46 .65 10 .14 58 33 ·57 11 .19 73 17 .24 9 Discussion. If one believes in the prJinciple of science known as cause and effect~ it must be assumed that something causes the variability in deer activity. Weather undoubtedly has some effect upon this variation, but each factor is so masked by such a number of other variables that no single var-L-. able consistently occurs with a particular facet of deer activity. For this reason, one must be particularly wary of generalizations with regard to one element of the weather. Home ~ange. Three marked individuals frequently were observ~d on the winter study area. Maximum observed home range diameter of fawn No. 207 (Fig. 17) and adult doe No. 264 (Fig. 18) was 1000 yards. The maximum observed home range diameter of fawn No. 215 was 1335 yards (Fig. 19). Since fawns still accompany their dam on winter range, the home range diameter of a fawn also is indicative of the home range diameter of an adult doe. Fawn No. 215 was observed 19 of the 40 days of observations in 1965 and all sightings were concentrated in the center of the winter study area. Since the area around the home range of fawn No. 215 was under continual observation, I believe it can be excluded from the home range. Because of the number of individual sightings of this deer~ I believe that the area delineated ~ by the observations is representative of the home range of fawn No. 215 (Fig. 19). �- 64 - SCALE 1:24000 CONTOUR Fig. 17. Location of observations INTERVAL 40 FEET of mule deer fawn No. 207, 1964. �j I !==c.:=::E -"" E~::=1 1000 0 ELI3"':E1_ I. 0 I ~1ILE ..1,c~~==~=~~=o~,~===~----,--o::·c=,c'O--;:-::=-==:=?7"---=::-~---=~=::CC.3 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 FEU ·--:::·:r=-='C"c=-==cr=~=--=-.::. 1~_~==:-3==--==-====='3:====-=] 5 0 I KILOMETER EC"'~::=L::-J,=r:-':E==I:::"-:=E--3=:1=-==~=:,,::=':::-_-::::::-=----:-·-==-3 CONTOUR Jig. 18. INTERVAL 40 FEET Location of observations of adult mule deer doe No. 264, 1965. �- 66 - 1 :E:=::3 1 >==~=J 1 ~~_oc=_ -- ~u=_~ __-,- ·._-=-_,,==_.,_-- u,-__ 1000 0 1000 _?,()()O EL:ELEl ~=~,""C 1 5 ~r=E,,7L-=~Jc~'?oc=~.-. CONTOIJR 0 3000 4000 5000 t-=-=:.'I- ==--'''"c=L----::::J 0 ------ ---=-==-:.~ INTERVAL 40 '---.-=--~-cc-~,6000 7000 FEO -I KILOMETER __ ,.c~3 FEET Fig. 19. Location of observations of mule deer farm No. 215, 1965. 1 MILE l �- 67 Approximately 68 per cent of the observations of fawn No. 215 were within a 250 yard radius. Within this 250 yard radius was a large patch of Douglasfir and ponderosa pine on a north-facing slope which the fawn and animals accompanying it used consistently for cover and resting during the middle of the day. Several west- and south-facing slopes were used for feeding in the mornings and afternoons. Of 34 observatio~s of fawn No. 215, 62 per cent were on the upper one-third of the slope, 29 per cent were on the middle onethird of the slope, and only 9 per cent were on the lower one-third of the slope. Approximately 88 per cent were withL~ 400 vertical feet of the highest point on the slope. Since deer tended to contour around the slope when moving from feeding sites to resting sites or vice versa, they covered little vertical distance in the ordinary day. No ter~itorial behavior was observed on the winter range. Social behavior: Sociality. Mule deer were more gregarious on winter range than on summer range', although the basic social un.l.t. still was the family group. A family group consisted of an adult doe and o~e or two fawns, and possible one or two yearling does. The status of the bond between yearling does and the family group was not determined. Yearling does traveled with families, but whether or not they remained with their own dam was not determined. The primary group observed on the winter range was from two to several family groups which were banded together to form a feeding or resting group. Eighty of 86 groups classified in 1964 contained does, while 161 of 180 groups classified in 1965 contained does. Of these groups, 72·5 per cent contained fawns in 1964 and 90.7 per cent contained fawns in 1965. Groups composed entirely of fawns were not observed, although groups composed entirely of does were observed. The age structure of these groups could not be determined so it is unknown whether or not they contained yearlings. The average composition of doe -f'awngroups observed in 1964 was 5·7 adults and 1.7 fawns, and in 1965 the average composition was 5·5 adults and 2.4 fawns. Bucks were first observed to lose their antlers about the first part of February in both 1964 and 1965. Because of the antler d~op, an accurate classification of all groups observed was possible only in January. It was possible to classify the smaller groups of less than five adults, but an analysis of these groups only would present a bias of ~mknown dimensions. In 1964, 27 doe-fawn groups classified in January averaged 3·9 does, 1·3 bucks and 1.0 fawns. In 1965) 73 groups classified averaged 4.6 does, .8 bucks, and 2.5 fawns. The average group size and composi t.Londid not vary sLgnLf'Lcarrt.Iy (at the five per cent level) between any of the one-half month periods from January to the first half of March (Table 21) qlthough the size of groups observed within each one-half month period was varuab.Le (Table 22). The most common size of groups observed both in 1964 and 1965 was from 3 to 11 animals. Groups of one or two animals were ill'lCOrnmon. Only one solitary individual was observed in 1964 and seven groups containing two were observed in 1965. The largest group observed in 196L:- consisted of 24 animals while in 1965 the largest group totaled 29 (Table 21). �Table 21 - Sociality of mule deer on winter ran~e. No. of Grou~s Observe~~ Largest Group Observed 19b4 19 5 19b4 19b5 Adults Fawns Total Jan. 1-15 12 35 12 26 5·9 ·7 6.6 2.8 Jan. 16-31 ;1:5 38 17 19 4.6 1.3 5·9 Feb. 1-15 16 34 14 25 5·8 2·7 Feb. 16-29 24 23 24 20 6.2 March 1-15 13 31 15 39 6.2 Date Average Numbe r Per Group 19b4 Y Does not include groups composed only of bucks. ?J Standard deviation from the total. A/._ S. D .. ::' Adults 1905 Fawns Total S. D. 5·9 2·'5 8.4 5·3 3·9 4·9 2.6 7·5 4.4 8·5 ;3·0 6.6 2.4 9·0 5·0 2.1 8·3 5·4 5·7 1.7 7·4 4·7 1.4 7·6 3.6 6·7 2.8 9·5 7·8 0\ co �,!a"ble 22 - Per. cent frequency of myle deer ~roups 1 ----- 2 3T§":-8~} r!l:?g;! durir~~.... ..Eimo:r:j;hlyperiods. Group Size No. of Groups-¥.Observed Date obs!.E..ved on. win~r i2-14-Y5-lJ '~i8-20 21-25 -2b-30 31-35- 1/ 1-15/64 12 0.0 8·3 25·0 41.7 8.3 8.3 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 1/16-31/64 15 6.7 0.0 33·3 26.7 20.0 6.7 6·7 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 2/ 1-15/64 16 0.0 0.0 25·0 50.0 12·5 12·5 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 2/16-29/64 24 4.2 0.0 33·3 20:8 2d.8 12·5 4.2 0.0 4.2 0.0 0.0 3 /-15/64 13 0.0 - ,1:1. 15·4 38·5 23·1 .s.i .ia 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 80 2·5 2·5 27·5 35·0 17·5 10.0 2·5 0.0 2·5 0.0 0.0 35 0.0 0.0 40.0 25·7 14.3 11.4 0.0 2·9 5·7 0.0 0.0 1/16-31/65 38 0.0 5·3 31.6 28·9 13·2 13·2 5·3 2(.6 0.0 0.0 0.0 2/ 1-15/65 34 0.0 2·9 32.4 20.6 23·5 11.8 5·9 ;.2·9, 0.0 0.0 0.0 2/16-28/65 23 0.0 8·7 26.1 30·5 13·0 13·0 0.0 8·7 0.0 0.0 0.0 3/ 1-15/65 31 0.0 ,- 6·5 -- -- -- 22.6 16.1 ,-- 0.0 -- 161 0.0 4.4 31.1 25·5 17·4 13·0 0.0 ,-1.2 Winter, 1964 1/ 1-15/65 Winter, 1965 ~-- * Does not include 0\ --------- - 22.6' 22.6 ~ 3·1 3·1 \.0 3·2 ~ 0.6 0.6 --~. "buck groups. ti" r-, '~' "-..:J �- 70 - Bucks. Social bonds formed by bucks on the winter range were weak. They were observed singly or in groups of from two to five. Most commonly bucks were observed attached to doe~fawn groups, they frequently changed groups. The bonds formed in buck groups appeared to be no stronger than that between bucks and doe-fawn groups. The members of b~ck groups frequently left and the entire group frequently disintegrated. These observations included both yearling bucks and adults. The ties between the dam and the yearling buck appeared to be severed completely by January. Of 86 g~oups classified in 1964, only 6 (7.0 per cent) were composed entirely of bucks. In 1965, only 19 of 180 groups classified (10.5 per cent) were composed of bucks. In 1964, 49 per cent of the doe-fawn groups classified contained bucks. L1 19657 34 per cent of the doe-fawn groups contained bucks. The greatest number of bucks classified in one group was recorded on March 3, 1965, when a group of 18 antlerless adults, 4 fawns, and 6 bucks was observed. Frequency of group size of bucks observed in 1964-65 is shown in Table 23. A.gain, it should be noted that solitary individuals were QDCOmmon. ~~~ - Frequency of mule deer buck groups observed on winter range, 1964-65. Group Size 1 2 3 4 5 Groups observed 4 10 4 4 3 Group stability. A.lthough several family groups commonly banded together to feed and rest, these groups were not stable as evidenced by observations on marked deer (Table 24j 25, and 26). The composition of each group frequently changed several tLmes in one day, with one to several families leaving or joining the group. Although the members of groups frequently changed there was a certain amOQDt of cohesion within the group. Doe-fawn groups retreated from disturbance as one group in an orderly fashion. Numerous times during the study groups were observed to walk or feed through one another without loss or gain of members. j In the areas of North Park and Middle Park, Colorado, it is not uncommon to observe groups of 50 to 100 deer feeding or resting as a group during the winter. TI1ese ranges generally have poorer browse and more severe weather conditions than the Poudre River area. One to three feet of snow is not uncommon. Possible the smaller group sizes and the consistency in observing each group can be attributed to the mild winters of 1964 and 1965 and the relatively uniform weather conditions from January to March in those years. �- 71 Table 24 - Composition of the groups of mule deer accompanying mule deer fawn No. 207· Date Group with Fawn No. 207 Antle:rless Adults Bucks Does Fawns 29, 1964 o 3 1 February 6, 1964 2 7 4 February 10., 1964 1 3 1 Januar-y February 20, 1964 7 5 4 February 21, 1964 5 4 2 o February 24;>1964 February 27, 1964 7 o 4 4 1 Table 25 - Composition of the groups of mule deer accompanying adult mule deer doe No. 264. Date Grou~ with Adult Doe No. 264 Antlerless Adults Bucks Does Fawns January 6, 1965 5 4 3 January 11, 1965 3 2 2 January 13, 1965 0 2 2 February 4, 1965 0 13 3 February 5, 1965 0 5 2 February 8.:1965 0 9 3 February 8, 1965 1 9 3 February 9, 1965 10 February 18, 1965 9 1 1 February 22, 1965 7 1 1 February 25,.1965 March 15, 1965 3 1 10 6 0 3 �- 72 Table 26 - Composition of the groups of mule deer accompanying mule deer Fawn No. 215. Date January lJ.C)1965 January 12, 1965 January 14.,1965 January 14" 1965 January 25, 1965 January 25, 1965 Januar-y 25, 1965 January 26, 1965 January 26, 1965 January 267 1965 January 28, 1965 February 5, 1965 February 8, 1965 February 9, 1965 February 10s 1965 February 22, 1965 Februar-y 25, 1965 FebrQary 26, 1965 March 3, 1965 March 5, 1965 March 10, 1965 March 11, 1965 March 11, 1965 March 12, 1965 March 15, 1965 March 15, 1965 Group with Fawn No. '215 Antlerless Adults Bucks Does 14 6 11 9 7 9 4 0 0 4 2 1 3 0 0 0 0 2 1 0 5 1 0 4 9 2 4 9 4 9 7 8 14 9 9 9 5 6 5 6 10 Fawns 1 3 5 4 3 3 5 4 7 4 3 3 2 4 5 2 0 2 2 4 3 4 2 3 4 3 Leadership. L"1 an organized movement from one location to another (from a feeding site to a bedding site, when retreating from a source of danger), deer always were observed moving single file. The rate of movement was dependent upon the situation. If a group had just been frightened, they first would move away from the stimulus in a bounding gait, then a trot, and finally a walk. Groups walking single file over the crest of a ridge frequently broke into a trot. This may result from the inherent social tendency of mule deer to accompany other members of their species. If the preceding individual in a file disappeared from sight over the crest of a ridge, the animal following hurried ahead too. The gait varied from a fast walk to a slow walk (frequently interrupted by short stops by individuals where several bites of vegetation were taken) when a group was moving from a feeding site to a resting site or vice versa. Movement, interrupted by short stops, was more prevalent when moving from bed site to feeding site than from feeding site to bed site. �- 73 Observations on group leadership recorded after February 5, 1965 were not subjected to detailed analysis because of the possibility of inaccurate sex identification. From January 5 to February 5, 1965,=34)observations were recorded of a doe-fawn group moving in an organized retreat. In all cases observed a doe was the leader of the group. A buck or fawn never was observed to lead a doe-fawn group during the entire study. Similar observations were recorded i~ mule deer by Bailey (1960), Columbian black-tailed deer by Linsdale and Tomich (1953), elk by Altmann (1956)J and red deer by Darling (1937). A.ll members of the Cervidae do not~ however, have the matriarchal social system in which the female provides the leadership. Darling (1937) found that roe deer (Capreolus capreolus) groups in Scotland were led by a male member. Bailey (1960) reported that a doe without fawns never was observed to be a leader. This generally appeared to be true. A fawn usually walked just in front of or just behind its mother, and most commonly walked behind its mother. A. f~wn was second in line in 24 of 32 observations of doe-fawn groups moving single file and was in third place five of the eight times. A doe was in second place for seven of the remaining eight observations. Clark (1953) stated that one individual in each group of mule deer in the Tucson Mountains of Arizona acted as rear guard. While other members of the group fed or moved, this deer was more interested in watching in the direction in which they had come. If a group moved over a ridge, the sentinel stood for as long as five minutes watching the trail over which they had just traveled. No other author reported this behavior for mule deer although similar behavior was observed in red deer by Darling (1937). I did not observe anything comparable to this during the study. Deer never were observed to look purposefully for danger and primarily were concerned only with the direction in which they were moving. In 32 incidents of doe-fawn groups moving single file:;;. a doe was last 13 times, a fawn was last 14 times, and a buck was last 5 times. In 12 observations of bucks accompanying doe groups, a buck was last seven times; a fawn was last four times, and a doe was last only once. Considering the ratio of bucks, does, and fawns, it appears that there was a greater tendency for fawns and bucks to bring up the rear than for does to be the last member of a group. A change in the lead animal of a file of deer was observed only three times during the entire study. The position within a file usually did not change during a single movement although this behavior was observed. From observations of marked deer it appeared that there was no set position within a column where individuals repeatedly traveled. Marked deer were observed at times towa~d the front of a column and at other times in the rear. Leadership was not readily apparent when a group actively was feeding although there may have been some guidance from within. First one individual of any sex or age would walk ahead 5-15 feet and feed in one location, and then another would walk ahead and feed for a period. �~. 74 The change of activity from bedding or feeding to movement in single file had a characteristic pattern. A group of deer would be feeding. A doe would stop feeding and walk away from the group from 15 to 75 feet. Frequently the doe would stop and wait. Sometimes she would look ba®k at the feeding group. All members wou.Ld stop feeding and walk toward the doe, t'ormfng a single file. As soon as the other deer would start to move in the direction of the doe,C-Bhe would proceed on her chosen route. No information was obtained to determine whether or not the same individuals always led. However, it ap~eared that each adult doe was a potential leader. ~~ere may have been a hierarchy of leadership. Whether or not a doe was a leader or a follower appeared to be dependent upon the individuals in her company. Not enough observations were recorded of leadership in male groups to warrant any conclusions other than to say that they employ a single file during a retreat which indicated some degree of leadership. Dominance. Dorrinance did not change from summer to winter range. MY observa'tions on dominance were in general agreement with those made by Browman and Hudson (1957) and Bailey (1960). Bucks were dominant over does and does were domin~~t over fawns. Dominance among bucks was determined largely by size, with the largest being the most dominant. Bucks that had shed their antlers we:re domfna ted by bucks that still retained their antlers. Observations of the participants in dominant-subordinate inter-actions are summarized in Table 27. Conflict was most prevalent wIthin the same sex and age class. A high incidence of conflict between sex and age class probably was not necessary because of the clear distinction in hierarchy. L~dividuals readily reco&~ized dominants of ~ther sexes and ages and moved away from them or avoided them. Bailey (1960) stated that adult bucF~ never were observed to drive fawns away from food or resting places. Faw-~s received p~~ishment only from does and yOQng bucks. Althou~h this observation appeared to be true in general, adult bucks were observed to drive fawns from food and bed sites. Table 27 - Participants in dominant-subordinate interactions of mule deer on wil1ter range. Subordinate Dominant Bucks Does Fawns Antlerless Adults Bucks Does Fawns Antlerless Adults 15 0 0 0 1 15 4 0 5 7 0 1 2 2 0 10 �- 75 Dominance-subordinate interactions were classified into three categories: feeding conflict, bedding conflict, and space conflict. Of 62 observations in 1964-65, 22.6 per cent involved conflict for food~ 6.5 per cent involved conflict for bed sitess; and 70.9 per cent involved conflict for space (Table 28). Bailey (1960) believed that an increase in feeding conflict resulted from a comparative shortage of food rather than from crowding. He theQrized that survival potential varied directly with social status, so that the lower the animal was in the dominance hierarch, the lower his chances of survival. The incidence of be~ding and feeding conflicts on the Poudre winter range were relatively low; probably resulting from e«cellent range conditions and mild winters. Observations recorded as conflict for space played an important part in the dOmll~ant-subordinate interactions on the Poudre. This conflict did not result strictly from a lack of ~pace, bu~ probably resulted from a need for individuals to exert their domirtance over subordinates. Since competition for food and bed sites was ~nnecessary, the drive was manifested in other outlets. Dominance was exerted by several methods. Bucks would hook with their antlers or simply lower their heads and present their antlers to subordinates. A.fter the antler drop they would use methods employed by all antlerless individuals. Approximately 31 per cent of the dominance interactions involved only a threat. The threat pose was described earlier in the section on dominance in summer and also was described by Dixon (1934), Linsdale and Tomich (1953), Bailey (1960), and Cowan and Geist (1961). Dominance interactions also involved striking with one or both front feet. Contact not always was made Table 28). The one-footed strike was used most frequently in feeding conflict. A. subordinate animal would be browsing. A dominant animal would walk up behind the subordL~te one and strike the subordinate on the side or rump with one front foot without rearing. The subordinate then would leave the browse plant and the dominant animal would take possession. This behavior also was described by Bailey (1960). A. threat did not always accompany the one-footed strike in feeding conflict. FoUr of ten observations involved no threat. Only four observations of conflict for bed sites were recorded. were executed similar to those involving feeding behavior. These The two-footed strike was observed only dLITing conflict for space (Table This was more vicious than the one-footed strike and always was executed with a threat. The dominant animal would rear and strike at the subordinate animal with both front feet. Occasionally, a dominant deer would strike several tL~es with each front foot before dr-opping to the gro~nd. The subordinate deer usually made a rapid retreat. 28). �- 76 Table 28 - Analysis of dominant-st~)ordinate i~teractions of mule deer on winter range. Means of Aggression Threat only w/o threat or kick One-foot strike w/o contact With contact Two-foot st:dke w/o contact With contact Antler threat Dominant Antlered A:.<1tlerless Type of Conflict Feeding Bedding Space 2 0 17 3 3 1 2 0 :2 0 4 0 15 0 10 0 1 0 8 0 2 15 23 1 3 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 5 14 39 14 ~ 14 44 Commw1ication. Communication implies the g1v1ng and rece1v1ng of information, Signals) or messages in some way, intraspecific or interspecific, whether it be by sight, sOlli~d,smell, or other means. Since mule deer are social animals which characteristically live in broken terrain and heavy vegetation, commQ~ication over long distances is not a necessity. Most communication between members of a group need not travel farther than 50 yards. Bailey (1960) stated that the chief form of co~munication in mule deer was the pose, aspect, or posture of other deer. This implies that vision plays the dominant role in commu....~ication. Linsdale and Tomich (1953) reported that motion was not necessary but that it made visual communica.tion more effectillve. Tne threat pose has been described by several authors for several species of Cerviclaej bar-ren-gr-oundcar-fbou by Pruitt (1960), red deer by Dar'Lfng (1937) white-tailed deer by Pruitt (1954) and mule deer by Linsdale and Tomich (1953), Bailey (1960), and Cowan and Geist (1961). Cowan and Geist gave a deta lLed analysis of the aggressive behavior of the genus Odocoileus. L<1all cases the threat pose sez'ved to communicate the animosity o'fone individual toward another. The threat pose also was observed to serve the same purpose in this study. Linsdale and Tomich (1953) and Bailey (1960) reported that the alert position, with head. raised, neck erect and motionless, and ears cupped forward, served to alert other individuals nearby. This behavior was not apparent in this study. Deer do not purposefully look up to scan the surrounding area for danger when resting or actively feeding. However, they are attracted by anything which seems H:pl:tof place It to them. Deer we:;.~e observed to be attracted to something and then sta.i"ld in the alert position for a period of time from a few seconds to several mhlutes before returning to their normal activity. This did not attract the attention of other deer. Duz-Lng the two year study, 21 incidents were recorded in which one member of a group detected the observer and struck the alert position. Only during one observation did it appear that the alert position was used as a means of communication, although even in this observation vocal or olfactory signals could not be ruled out. In the other 20 �- 77 observations the presence of the observer was not communicated to the rest of the group until the deer which had detected the observer made some type of movement, such as jumping to its feet or starting to walk or run away. In some cases the deer simply lost interest and returned to its normal activity without ever alerting the group .. In the section on deer-coyote behavior an excellent example maybe found of the inability of the alert position to convey a message to other members of the group. A coyote passed about 100 yards downslope from a group of five does and three fawns, but only one adult doe saw the coyote due to the conformation of the terrain. The doe struck the alert position and watched the coyote for five mirtttteswithout ever conveying the presence of the intruder to the other members of the group. The coyote moved out of sight and the doe resumed normal activ:Lty. It appeared that the primary means of communicating the presence of danger was the movement or flight reaction of other deer. Deer readily became alerted by one Lndividual or group of deer moving away at a walk or trot and the sight of a bounding deer served as an even stronger stimulus which frequently caused immediate flight. I do not believe there would be a great deal of survival value in the communication of the presence of danger by the alert pose. One deer can evaluate the threat presented by an intruder as readily as the entire group, and deer are capable of initiating a flight reaction so rapidly that there is little need for warning long in advance. Then, too, if all deer were alerted every time an individual stopped to watch something, the time for feeding and bedding would be reduced, resulting in criti.cal situations during hard winters. The above mentioned observations were the o~y means of visual communication noted. However, Linsdale and Tomich (1953) stated that there are possibilities for signaling in tail position, tail switching, ear position, hair bristling, and stance. Little data were obtained concerning auditory and olfactory means of cOIDmQnication. The sound of a bounding deer or the snort of an alarmed deer will alert individuals in the immediate vicinity. Other sounds may be important for communication between individuals only a few yards apart. The sense of smell in mule deer is extremely acute, although olfactory communication is limited by wind velocity and direction. Pruitt (1960) believed that there was an olfactory signal involved in the excitation jump exhibited by cartbou. When frightened the caribou closest to suspected danger frequently performs an excitation jump by raising on its hind legs suddenly and Bounding once or twice before settling into a trot. He believed. that caribou left scent on the ground from the interdigital glands when executing~ the jump, and observed that other caribou that later came by recoiled or assumed the alarm pose when they reached the same spot. On February 11, 1965 I came upon a site where a coyote had jumped a doe fawn while it was feeding. At the site where the fawn started r-unnfng, I smelled the strong~ musky odor characteristic of mule deer. The attack had. occurred just one hour prior to my arrival at the scene but the scent was 1; very obvious. P~ssibly this could be used by other deer in a fashion similar to that described in caribou by Pruitt (1960). �-. 80 - Sparring partners were not always the same size. On January 8, 1965 a large four-point and a small two-poi:'lt, pr'obab.ly a yearling, were observed to spar intermittently for five minutes. 1~e size difference was so great that they had difficulty placing their antJ.ers together. The larger buck easily cou.ld have pushed the smaLl.er-one anywhez-e , but he did not. He would push the smaLl.er-buck backward five to CeEfeet, stop: hold the smaller buck for a period of time} rock back a:;.-:.13.. al1o·w the sma Ll.ez-buck to push him two to three steps backward, stop, and then again push the smaller buck backward. J Tabel~and Dasmann (1958) coneLuded that contests appeared to be a matter of mutual enjoyment and probably had the effect of stimnlating the r..1tting condition of the bucks in the fall. I also am of the opinion that it primarily is engaged Ln for nnrcua L enjoymerrt, pa:.~ticularly after the rclt, aLthough it also may have the effect of (,nitially estabJ.ishing the dominance hierarchy and periodically reinforcing it th:r'oughout the season. Reproductive behavior. Observations of sexual behavior were recorded on January 24, Febr-uar-y5, 20, and 21 Ln 1961:.,and on Februar-y 22, 1965. Twoof the LncLderrts in 1964 and one in 1965 b:iTolved what appeared to be the testing of the uril1.e of a doe by a buck and was similar to that described by Browman and Hudson (1957). In each case a doe had just finished Lu·inating. Tne following obse~~ation wIll serve as an example: 2/21/64 1500 A group of t'our does, one f'awn, and one two-point buck wel~efeeding. One doe s qua+ted and uri:o.ated. About one minute later the buck came walking along, stopped, stuck his muzzle into the vIine~ raised his neck 0 about 30 above the horizontal, extended his muzzle, curled his upper lip, shook his head from side to side three or four times, and then holdL~g the grimace, slowly s~Jng his head first to the left and then to the right. He then lowered his head and walked up behind the doe. She wa.Lkedaway about six feet and continued feeding. The ma Le stopped, tUX'"-'led his head to the right, and licked his flank. In the other observations the buck did not f'o.ll.ow the doe. Tllere wer-e other variations in the behavior of the buck. In one :i.:'2:::ident the buck did not shake his head and in another did not swi:.1ghis head fro(} sLde to side. The angle at which the ne:::kwas raised varied from 300 to 50. The observation recorded in 1965 involved a buck which had lost bot:2 antlers. Twoobservat.Lons recorded in 1961~Lnvo.lveda buck attempting to smell the vulva of a doe. Both does quickly ret;:-eated after becoming aware of the buck. In one incident the buck execut-ed the behavi.or exhibited in the urine test. 'r.lis behavf or- i:0.dicates that t:2e bucks retai:i:l an interest in does long after the normal breeding season. Whether they are still fertile in FebruarJ and March is v~dete~i~ed at present. �- 81 - Interspecii'ic behavior: Deer-coyote. Coyotes played an iI!1porta:1.tpart in the daily activity of mule 'deer on winter range. 'J:lheyare numerous in the Poudre River dra Lnage and aside from mar., az'e the only i;}lportant p:cedB to!' of the deer population. Young and JackSOl'l (1951) stated t~'l8:C -:;:.':2 breeo.i:c.gseason of coyotes began about February 1 and lasted through the mon+hin Montana but was somewhat later in the southern portion of their range. Asdell (1964) reported that the female sexual season began in February and ended i:-: AprLl . An increase in coyote activity which accom-paniedthe onset of the l11needingseason reactilywas apparent on the winter study area. Tnis increase i~ activity res1),lted in an increase in deer-coyote Llte:;.~actions. The number of alerts and flights observed by groups of deer in which the stiml;Ll~_s re,rRLlled.lD.'ldeteTm.ir.ed increased from January to February, 1965. Only fOUT incidents of ~~le~~91ained alerts and flights were recorded in 15 days of observation in ,January, while 17 unexplained incidents were recorded in 16 days of obser-vatrton ill Februar-y. I think this can be more easily ex-plai:c.edas an indirect measure of coyote activity rather than an increase in :'-:.~::,i tabili ty or warir:ess of t1:J.edeer. Tbe behavior of deer var:l.ed cccsid.eral.J~..:t when confronted wIth coyotes and probably was determined by the attitude and actions of the coyotes and the distance at which the cLeerfirst became awaz-e elf their pr-eserice. Izrmedf.a te and unorganized flight :::-es111ted if a coyot.e appear-ed suddenLy at distances of less than 25 ym.~J.sfl.'omthe deer , regarJ_less of t~le attitude of the coyo+e. If the coyote was f:l.:.'st observed 'by deer at distaT..ces greater than 75 yards, the reaction of the deer was not always f.ugcG. A.1. examp.Leof this behavf.or- is related in the following incident; 1/11/65 0805 A g):'O"c!.p of eight does f'ou; f$,-~ms > and three bucks wez-efeeding. Suo_o_e:':l;-y" all of the (leer: stoppccl fec=[li:lg~s t ruck the alert position, and Looked downsLopetdzrto the bully bo+tcm. Several t~i..mes two or three deer t:..•.. :rneo_and trotted upsLope aboirt 10 yards) but the s t Lmu.l'uswas not grea t enough to cause tll.e ent:7..::egl'O:lj? to take flight. Six deer in the lower part of the gl'Ol,lptrotted 'cl-?slopeand joined the rest of the group and all fo:l~meda tight cluster wj_t'J.a (liameter of less than 10 yards. Three coyotes trotted up the bo+tom of' 'c:",egully about 75 yards from the o_eer. '1l::.ecoyotes paid no att2:i.':.tiol1. to the deer. Before the coyotes were out of sight one adult doe sta~ted feeding, although this may have been c1is:placementbehavl.or-. As soon as the coyotes were out of sight all deer started feeding. T.o.reebehavdoz-a.Lresponses of deer appeared to be cl'..aracteristic in instances such as the one related above : (1) a reluctance by the deer' to flee from the coyote, (2) the fonnation of a tight cluster, althoD~h this was not always observed: and (3) the re'curn to feeo.:L::lgbefore or inunediately after the coyotes were O'L1.J~ of sight. Murie (194~")also reported that Dall sheep (Ovis ·~lli) were observed to form a tight cIus te r after sighting wolves (Cani'a-tuiiis) . 'Ibis may be a protective behav.loz-a.Lresponse afforded by the group 'since soli tal'Y an:Lmalsgenerally ar-e believed to be more vulnerable to predation. An excellent example of the ttLrd poL'!.t was observed on February 8, 1965 and relates as follows~ �- 82 - 1501 A group of 10 does and 3 fawns were bedded in the basin. 1513 ~De entire group got to its feet and watched northeast upslope in the alert position. 1548 Tne deer started watching to the north. past them about 150 yards upslope. A coyote walked 1552 ~1e coyote stopped, sat down, and looked at the deer over a rock about 12 inches high. The coyote laid down behind the rock and out of sight of the deer. All deer lost interest and started feeding. 1557 The coyote stood up and trotted west and all deer immediately stopped feeding and struck the alert pose. 1602 The coyote went out of sight over a saddle of a hill. 1603 All deer were feeding. The failure of one deer to communicate the presence of a coyote to other members of a group was indicated in an observation which occurred concurrently with the incident related above. 2/8/65 1557 The coyote passed about 100 yards downslope from a group of five does and three fawns, but only one adult doe saw the coyote due to the conformation of the terrain. The doe struck the alert position and watched the coyotej the rest of the group continued feeding. 1602 The coyote moved out of sight and the doe returned to feeding. I believe that the reluctance of deer to run from coyotes and their flout of sight, out of mind" attitude toward coyotes exhibited in all of the above observations have a definite advantage for the survival of the species. Although many individuals may be lost to predators, the drain on the entire population may be reduced by decreasing the total energy expended by flight reactions and nervous agitation. Several authors (Dixon, 1934j Murie, 1940j Linsdale and Tomich, 1953; Bailey, 1960) have reported observing deer chase coyotes. I also observed this type of action on January 25, 1964 and again on February 12, 1965. This behavior appeared to be dependent upon the lack of interest in the deer by the coyote and the observation of the coyote by the deer at a distance sufficient to quell the flight reaction. The following observation relates the agonistic behavior of deer toward coyotes: �? (l / - 83 - 2/25/64 1455 I was walking along the west edge of the timber adjacent to a clearing about 250 yards across. A group of eight does and four fawns walked single file from the timber about 75 yards from me. They were still in the scattered trees along the edge when they stopped, struck the alert position, and looked straight ahead across the clearing. A coyote was walking across the clearing, directly towards the deer. The deer watched for about one minute and then the lead doe started walking slowly towards the coyote when they were about 50 yards apart. The rest followed. The coyote did not see the deer until they were about 20 yards apart. When the coyote stopped, the deer stopped. The lead doe again started walking toward the coyote. When she was about 10 yards from the coyote, she rushed him and the coyote immediately turned and ran. The rush stopped in about five yards and the coyote immediately stopped and turned to face the doe. When the lead doe again started walking toward the coyote, it turned and started walking back across the meadow with the doe following at about 10 yards. Every few steps the coyote looked back over its shoulder at the deer. The doe followed the coyote for about 100 yards, stopped, and watched until the coyote was out of sight. All deer immediately started feeding at 1503. Three observations were recorded of coyotes chasing deer. 11, 1965, the following observation was recorded: On February 0845 A group of seven ~nterless adults, one antlerless buck, and two fawns were feeding in a saddle. 0852 The group suddenly burst into unorganized flight and ran east. A coyote waS about 20 yards behind the group. In about 100 yards the group of deer fanned out and split into four groupsj four in one group, three in another, an adult and fawn in a third, and a lone antlerless adult in the fourth. In another 100 yards it was apparent that the coyote had singled out the lone adult. The first two groups mentioned ran north about 50 yards and stopped, the adult and fawn ran northeast, and the adult and coyote went east and out of sight. The coyote had not gained on the deer in the 300 yard chase. The adult and fawn went out of sight to the northeast. The first two groups mentioned stopped and watched until the coyote and deer went out of sight and then trotted about 200 yards higher upslope and formed a tight cluster and watched again. The adult was observed bounding over another low ridge, but the boyote was not following. 0858 The adult and fawn came back into sight at a trot and joined the tight group. 0902 The lone adult trotted back and joined the group. 0905 All deer had lost interest in coyotes. Two were feeding, five were lying down, and the other three were standing and ruminating. �- 84 The major points exemplified in the above observation are: (1) the lack of defense behavior as a group, (2) the cessation of flight immediately after the stimulus had ceased, and (3) the rapid return of the deer tb normal daily routine. Similar behavior was observed in caribou-wolf interaction by Murie (1944) . .An observation of a coyote kill was recorded in conjunction with the incident above. The adult deer and coyote had just ran out of sight at 0853. I heard a cry that sounded as if a man was being strangled and was yelling for help. In the next one minute I heard four more such screams. It was later determined that they were audible for at least 950 yards. At 0855 the coyote that had chased the adult deer out of sight came running back over the hill toward the direction of the cries. One minute later two more coyotes followed the first. I followed the coyote tracks and found where a doe fawn had been killed. Although the actual kill was not observed, the sequence of events was remarkably clear and easy to interpret in the eight inches of fresh, powdery snow that had fallen earlier in the morning. The kill took place on a slope with a gradient estimated at 75 per cent. The slope was a series of rock ledges that were scattered with Rocky Mountain juniper, mountain mahogany, and bitterbrush. The fawn was feeding with a group of deer and was the lowest animal on the slope. A coyote had walked undetected to within 15 yards of the fawn. The group of deer ran straight up the slope and the fawn ran around the hill on about a seven per cent increase in gradient. As soon as I came upon the spot where the fawn had been jumped, I detected the strong musky odor of mule deer. L~ approximately 15 yards, bits of hair and flecks of blood were scattered along the fawn IS path. L~ another 60 yards the fawn was put at bay, only momentarily, as the fawn turned around once or twice and ran on. It appeared that the coyote had been running immediately behind or along the downslope side of the fawn. 1~e fawn ran another 15 yards, slipped and fell, immediately gained her feet and ran on. She ran another six yards and was put at bay on a ledge about 10 yards across. The snow was trampled in a circle about three feet in radius. In the very center was a circle about seven inches in radius completely filled with fawn tracks pointing in all directions, indicating tha.t the fawn was turning around and around in one spot and the coyote was rWL~L~g around the fawn. Blood was splattered over a radius of approximately four feet although not heavily. I found only five small tufts of hair at this site. The fawn made another retreat for about 12 yards and was again placed at bay, although not for as long a time as at the last site. Again blood was splattered over a radius of four feet. Nine large tufts of hair were found here. The fawn made a final attempt to escape and was trapped on a pinnacle after moving only six yards. She was killed shortly thereafter as evidenced by the lack of blood splattered around. �- 85 An autopsy of the carcass revealed the following: Left side - the side facing upslope in her escape attempt and the side on which she dropped. 1. A two inch slash, not completely through the hide, over the third from the most posterior rib. 2. Five slashes on the flank, not completely through the hide but deep enough to bruise the muscle. 3. Two holes about the size of a pencil in the same region as the wOQnd above, through the external and internal oblique but not through the transverse abdominus muscle. 4. No marks on the ham. 5· No marks on the Achilles tendon. Right side. 1- No marks in front of the last rib. 2. No marks on the Achilles tendon. The fawn must have been killed by ripping a hole in the abdomen on the right side and pulling out the intestines. This would cause a rapid death resulting from massive bleeding from the large veins and arteries in this region. This probably occurred after the fawn:fell the last time. The coyote (s) made no attempt to hamstring the fawn, nor did they attack the front half of its body. It appeared that most of the attack was concentrated on one side of the body. The impact of coyote predation on the Poudre deer herd was difficult to evaluate. In 1964 one adult buck, estimated at five to six years of age, and two fawns were found which had been eaten by coyotes shortly after death. In 1965 two fawns and two other deer were found which had been eaten by coyotes shortly after death. In only one case could the death be positively attributed to coyote predation but the low incidence of disease and starvation throws strong suspicion on predatlon by coyotes. It is probable that many more deer were eaten by coyotes than were found. Deer carcasses were picked clean of muscle and soft tissue within two days, and magpies, crows, and eagles abandon the remains within three or four days. An excellent example of the speed at which carcasses are disposed was noted on March 5, 1965, when I found where a deer had been eaten in the bottom of a gully. TDe incident must have occurred less than four days prior to the discovery of the remains because the site had been visited at that time. All that remained was the scattered rumen contents, some hair, and spattered fresh blood. Everything else had been eaten or carried away. A thorough search was conducted in the area around the site but nothing was found. �- 86 No decrease in deer numbers or in the proportions in any sex or age class was apparent either year. Bailey (1960) believed coyote predation accounted for almost half the fawns on the winter range on his Montana winter area. Doefawn ratios decreased from 1:0.5 at the beginning of the winter to 1:0.33 at the end of the winter. Deer-cattle. Cattle paid no attention to deer but deer appeared to be frightened by cattle on the winter range. On two occasions a single cow was observed approaching a salt lick which was being used by deer. In both observations the deer struck the alert position and watched until the cow approached to within about 75 yards. The deer then retreated at a trot in the opposite direction. Only one other incident of deer-cattle relations was observed. On March 15, 1965 a group of 10 deer were observed feeding slowly upslope when the leading doe caught sight of six cows feeding about 100 yards above them. She whirled around and bounded once, stopped and turned toward the cows, and then watched them for about 20 seconds. She then proceeded on, but altered her course so as to go downslope from the cows. The group slowly fed across the slope below the cows. Once a cow started to feed toward a doe and the doe quickly turned and walked away. Possibly the fear displayed by deer toward cattle resulted from the difference in size between the two species. It seems unlikely that deer would encoQnter many opportunities to learn to fear cattle by direct conflict. However, the incident of interaction between cattle and deer is probably low even on heavily stocked ranges. Deer-magpie. Magpies (Pica pica) frequently were observed to light on the backs of deer and peck in their pelage, presumable for ectoparasites. The most common place on a deer for magpies to perch was from the rump to just in front of the shoulders, although in one case a magpie was observed sitting between the ears of a fawn. The magpies worked on the pelage half way down the sides of a deer and in some cases moved so far down that their bodies were almost horizontal with the ground. They also sat on the shoulders and worked as far down the neck as possible. Magpies were observed to hop from the back onto the ground and walk between the feet of a deer and then hop on the deer's back again. Magpies also worked over deer that were lying down by walking around them and pecking at their belly, rwmp, and neck. Ln one observation, a magpie walked underneath the head and neck of a buck that was lying down and hopped up, pecked at his muzzle, and dropped to the ground. This action was repeated several times and the buck paid no attention. Observations did indicate, however, that deer did not allow magpies to peck in their ears or on their anus. The longest observation of a rr~gpie working on one deer was nine minutes; however, one magpie may fly from one deer to another and visit as many as two to five deer in one group. These observations are similar to those reported by Riney (1951), Browman and Hudson (1957)~ and Bailey (1960). They also were of the opinion that magpies fed on the ectoparasites of deer. Riney (1951) also reported that magpies acted as a sentry for a group of deer and caused them to become alert to intruders. �- 87 - Deer usually were tolerant of magpies and even seemed to enjoy having them around, although sometimes the magpie startled the deer into running three or four steps before stopping. If a deer were feeding and a magpie lit on its back, the deer usually stopped feeding and stood still. During one observation a deer turned its head toward a magpie to allow the magpie to peck the side of its face. Deer were observed to be intolerant of magpies at times. Once a magpie lit on the back of a fawn that was lying down. This appeared to annoy the fawn and it stood up and the magpie hopped onto its rump. The fawn tried to touch the magpie with its nose but could not reach the bird. The deer quickly turned its head to the other side of its body and tried to reach the magpie but again the deer was unsuccessful. The fawn then shook itself and the magpie flew away. In another instance a resting doe was observed to swing its head at a magpie that was pecking at its side, and in still another observation a fawn switched its tail frantically to rid itself of a magpie sitting on its rump. Intolerance of deer toward magpies appears to be uncommon with only 4 of 29 deer involved acting as if they were annoyed by the magpies. The relationship of deer and magpies appears to mutualism; each species benefits the other. Deer-man. The presence of man markedly affected the behavior and activity of mule deer both on summer and winter range. If a deer or group of deer were frightened from the same area for two or three days in succession, the deer would move to another part of their home range for a period of time. This was particularly noticeable on the summer range where the area had been isolated from human disturbance until the latter part of 1963. For this reason it was necessary to cause as little disturbance as possible in the area. Deer never became habituated to my presence. �- 88 - LITERATURE CITED Asdell, S. A. 1964. Patterns of mammalian reproduction. Cornell Univ. Press, Ithaca. 670 p. 2nd ed. Altmann, Margaret. 1956. Patterns of social behavior in big game. N. Am. Wildl. Conf., Trans. 21:538-544 . . 1958. ----.,.6-: =-=15=5'--1' 59 . Social integration of the moose calf. Anim. Behav. . 1960. The role of juvenile elk and moose in the social ---d-yn-a-nu-..,...·cs of their species. Zoologica 45:35-39. Bailey, E. D. 1960. Behavior of the Rattlesnake mule deer on their winter range. M. S. Thes~s. Montana State Univ., Missoula. 110 p. Benson, S. B. 1948. Decoying coyotes and deer. J. Mammal. 29:406-409. Browman, L. G., and P. Hudson. 1957. Observations on the behavior of penned mule deer. J. Mammal. 38:247~253. Clark, E. D. 1953. A study of the behavior and movements of the Tucson Mountain mule deer. M. S. Thesis. Univ. Arizona, Tucson. 111 p. Collias, N. E. 1956. The analysis of socialization in sheep and goats. Ecology 37:228-239. Cowan, I. M. 1956. Life and times of the Co~st black-tailed deer, p. 523-617· In W. P. Taylor (ed.) The deer of North America. Wildlife Management Institute, Washington, D. C., and Stackpole Co., Harrisburg, Pa . ., and V. Geist. 1961. Aggressive behavior in deer of the genus: --....,O::-:d=-o-c-o.."..il·eus . J. Mammal. 42: 522 -526 . Darling, F. F. 1937· 215 p. A herd of red deer. Oxford Univ. Press, London. Dasmann, R. F., and R. D. Taber. 1956a. Behavior of Columbian blacktailed deer with reference to popUlation ecology. J. Mammal. 37:143-164 . --~,.-..".- ., and 1956b. Determining structure in Columbian black-tailed deer popUlations. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 20:78-83. Diem, K. L. fawns. 1954. Use of a deer call as a means of locating deer J. Wildl. Mgmt. 18:537-538. Dixon, J. S. 1934. A study of the life history and food habits of mule deer in California. Calif. Fish and Game. 20:182-282, 315-354. �- 89 Einarsen, A. s. 1956. Life of the mule deer, p. 363-390. In w. P. Taylor (ed . ) The deer of North America. Wildlife Management'fusti tute, Washington, D. C., and Stackpole Co ., Harrisburg, Pa . Golley, F. B. 1957. Gestation period, breeding and fawning behavior of Columbian black-tailed deer. J. Mammal. 38:116-120. Graf, W. 1956. ~erritorialism in deer. J. lf~mmal. 37:165-170. Garrington, H. D. 1954. Manual of the plants of Colorado. Denver, Colo. 666 p. Sage Books, Haugen, A,. 0., and L. A. Davenport. 1950. Breeding records of white-tail deer in the Upper Peninsula of Michigan. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 14:290-295 . ., and D. W. Speake. 1958. Determining age of young fawn white-tailed --- deer. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 22:319-321. Leopold, A. S., T. Riney, R. McCain, and L. Tevis, Jr. 1951. The Jawbone dee'rherd. Calif. Game lfJgmt.Branch, Game Bull. 4. 139 p. Linsdale, J. M., and P. Q. Tomich. 1953. California Press, Berkeley. 567 p. A herd of mule deer. Univ. Loveless, C. M. 1963. Ecological characteristics of a selected mule deer winter range. Ph. D. Thesis. Colorado State Univ., Fort Collins. 318 P . . 1964. Some relationships between wintering mule deer and the environment. N. Am. Wildl. Conf' . , Trans. 29:415-431. '--physical McMillan, J. F. 1953. Some feeding habits of moose in Yellowstone Park. Ecology 34:102-110. Michael, E. D. 1964. Birth of white-tailed deer fawns. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 28:171-173· Miller, F. L. 1965. Behavior associated with parturition in blacktailed deer. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 29:629-631. Murie, A. 1940. Ecology of the coyote in the Yellowstone. Serv., Fauna Ser. 4. 206 p . . 1944. The wolves of Mount McKinley. --- Fauna Ser. 5. 238 p. U. S. Nat. Park U. S. Nat. Park Serv., Prenzlow, E. J. 1965. Social groups and activity patterns of prong-horns in northcentral Colorado. M. S. Thesis. Colorado State Univ., Fort Collins. 87:p. Pruitt, W.O., Jr. 1954. Rutting behavior of the whitetail deer (Odocoileus virginianus). J. Mammal. 35:129-130. �- 90 1960. Behavior of the barren-ground caribou. Biol. Papers 3. 44 p. Riney, T. 1960. Univ. Alaska, Relationships between birds and deer. Russell, C. P.1932. 2:1-46. Condor 53:178-185. Seasonal migrations of mule deer. Ecol. Monogr. Schaller, G. B. 1963. The mountain gorilla; ecology and behavior. Chicago Press, Chicago. 431 p. Univ. Severinghaus, C. W., and E. L. Cheatum. 1956. Life and times of the whitetailed deer, p. 57-186. In W. P. Taylor (ed.) The deer of North America. Wildlife Management Institute, Wasnington, D. C., and Stackpole Co., Harrisburg, Pa. Siglin, R. J. 1965. Seasonal movements of mule deer in the Cache la Poudre drainage. M. S. Thesis. Colorado State Univ., Fort Collins. 71 p. Taber, R. D. and R. F. Dasmann. 1958. The black-tailed deer of the chaparral; its life history and management in the north coast range of California. Calif. Fish and Game Bull. 8. 163 p. Verme, L. J. 1962. 26:387-392. An automatic tagging device for deer. J. Wildl. Mgmt. Weber, W. A. 1953. Handbook of plants of the Colorado front range. Univ. Colorado Press, Boulder. 232 p. Young, S. P., and H. H. T. Jackson. 1951. The clever coyote. Wildlife Management Institute, Washington, D. C., and Stackpole Co., Harrisburg, Pa. 411 p. Prepared by: Michael J. Dorrance Date: ~J~a~n~u~a~ry~,~1~9~66~_ Approved by: ,Wayne W. Sandfort Chief, Game Research Ferd C. Kleinschni tz Federal Aid Coordinator � https://cpw.cvlcollections.org/files/original/1e382800b71a71ecc3e33784e8c88c2f.pdf bcdab5475e08734684fdf826d13c1442 PDF Text Text - 1- JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO --------~~~~~-------------- Project No. Game Bird Survey W-37-R-18 Work Plan No. 1 Job No. 12 Summarization and Publication of Pheasant Research Findings Period Covered: April 1, 1964 through March 31, 1965. Personnel: Wayne W. Sandfort and Harold M. Swope. ABSTRACT No progress was made on this publication. however, steps have be,entaken to rectify the situation. Objectives: (1) To summarize all work done on the species in Colorado. (2) To publish results of pheasant studies, and other available information on pheasants. Findings: The constant press of unanticipated assignments prevented progress on this manuscript. Personnel reassignments have been made in an effort to allow devotion of more time to this job. This has been explained on page 28 of the W-37-R-19 P.S.& E. Prepared by: Date: Harold M. Swope Associate Wildlife Researcher April, 1965 Approved by: Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief Ferd C. K1einschnitz Fed. Aid Coordinator ��- 3 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESESRCH PROJECT-SEGMENT State of COLORADO --------~~~~----------Game Bird Survey--Effects of Hen Pro j ect No. Pheasant Harvest W:.:...-....;3~7:_-..::R.:...-..::l;..;::8 _ _.,.--- Work Plan No. l~ _ Job No. ___ ~ ~1~4~c~~ _ Period Covered: Measurement of Environmental Factors April 1, 1964 through March 31, 1965. Personnel: Harold M. Swope, William Carpenter, Mike Sterling and Fran Waugh ABSTRACT Cover type mapping was completed on 306 sections--161 in the Experimental area and 145 in the Control area. N.tnety-one percent of the Experimental. township and 87 percent of the Control township were found to be devoted to the production of wheat and other cereal grains (rye, oats, barley). The period from April 1, 1964 to March 31, 1965 had a 6.16" precipitation deficiency compared with the 68 year average. The eight precipitation guages(located at each corner of the two study townships) assigned to resident landowners for record keeping yielded some information as to the differences in precipitation within a relatively small area. The northern (Experimental) area did appear to receive more moisture, however, the conscientiousness of each farmer keeping the records is a factor that must be reckoned with. The most widespread hailstorms to strike northeastern Colorado in at least 15 years did considerable vegetative damage in the Control area. The Experimental area escaped almost unscathed. The sto~s struck while the pheasant hatch was near its peak and may have severely curtailed production. The vegetative destruction, followed by extremely dry summer and fall weather, left this sector low on winter cover, and nesting habitat for the following spring. �- 4 - Vegetative growth measurements were continued on 16 transects. Growth rates were similar in the two areas, however, the previously mentioned hailstorms reduced stubble and weed overstory heights in the Control area as compared with those in the Experimental area. The effect the hailstorms had on the reduction in vegetative density may have been more serious than the curtailment of height growth. Stubble mulching occurred later in 1964 than it did in 1963. This work that was nearly completed by May 9 in 1963 was about two thirds done in the Experimental area, and only half finished in the Control area, on a corresponding date in 1964. Photo hub establishment was extended to the Control area where 12 camera points have now been selected. These are in addition to the 14 photo hubs located in the Experimental area a year ago. Recommendations: The results of these routine surveys to measure environmental factors should be carefully weighed to assess the responsibilities for pheasant population fluctuations within the two study areas. It now appears that a measure of vegetative density may be equally as important as growth rate and height measurements. Objectives: To determine differences in vegetation, precipitation and other environmental factors between the study and control areas. Such differences can be related to pheasant population variations as an aid in interpreting the effects of hen pheasant shooting. Techniques Used: Recent aerial photographs of study sections to be cover type mapped were located in the appropriate Soil Conservation Service office. Details of each section (field boundaries, roads, farm lots, etc.) were then transposed from the photo to graph paper on which each small square represented 1.6 acre. By visiting the "mapped" section on the ground the various cover types were easily identified and a code description inserted within the proper field boundaries on the graph paper. It was then an office procedure to compute acreages by cover types for each section. Using this procedure time consuming chaining and pacing were held toa minimum. Precipitation guages were mounted on steel posts'inoccupied farm lots ,nearest the corners of the two study townships. The eight farmers " receiving these appeared quite willing to keep precipitation records throughout the year. Each guage station recorder was given a clipboard and a supply of precipitation record forms. Contacts were made several times during the year with these cooperators ,to pick up precipitation data and leave additional forms. �- 5 - Transects for measuring vegetative vigor were established in two small grain fields at each corner of the study and control townships. These ,'extended into the fields at a 450 angle from either field edge. Fifty vegetative height measurements, one pace apart, were made along each transect during the period of vegetative growth. Final measurements were made late in the summer to record stubble heights, an~ residual weed growth, following wheat harvest. Findings: Cover type mapping.--Cover type mapping was completed on 306 sections-161 in the Experimental area and 145 in the Control area. Sections that have been completed are delineated in Figure 1. The mapped areas, approximately 190,000 acres, represent over 40 percent of the ground to be covered. Acreage figures for the two townships selected for more intensive study were computed separately from the surrounding buffer buffer zone areas. These two sets of data are presented in Tables 1 and 2. It is worthy of note that land devoted to wheat and other cereal grain production composed about 91 percent of the Experimental and 87 percent of the Control area. Climatic data.--The period from April 1, 1964 to March 31, 1965 was exceptionally dry with a 6.16 inch deficiency from the 68 year average Table 3. Plans to obtain precipitation records from the four corners of each study township finally materialized in September of 1964, with the cooperation of eight resident farmers. As would be expected some of these participants were more zealous in their recordkeepirlg duties than others but the results should give a pretty good indication of the precipitation differences between and within the two study areas. Table 4 summarizes the precipitation records for the eight rain guage stations. Data from this Table indicate that the Control area did not receive as much moisture as the Experimental area during the corresponding period. Major discrepancies within the areas probably reflect individua1.interest in maintaining accurate records rather than actual precipitation fluctuations. �- 6 I'''. Figure 1.-- Exper iraent.a L hen pheasant harvest study areas in which cover- type mapping has been com~)leted, 196~.• �- 7 .. Table 1.--Cover type data, Experimental Summer, 1964. Ground Cover and Control area townships, Experimental Township Acreage % of Total Control Township Acreage % of Total Crop ,Types Green wheat and other cereal grains Fallow wheat and other cereal grail\S Corn, sorghum, millet Pasture 9,816 42.6 9,590 41.9 11,221 48.7 2.0 933 4.0 ·10,305 485 1,538 45.0 466 132 138 20, .6 .6 .1 186 143 .8 .6 2.1 6.7 Cultural Features 11 Farmhouses, lots, and work roads Section roads Highways Cemetaries o o 3 Wild Areas & Special Coverts Draws and other low, uncultivated areas Tree p1antings Roadside cover Fence row cover 106 47 146 .5 469 .2 .6 25 31 .1 TOTALS 23,056 100.00% 106 43 22,893 2.1 .1 .1 .2 100.00% 11 Twenty occupied and four unoccupied farmhouses in the Experiment township, compared with 17 occupied and 10 unoccupied in the Control township. �- 8 - Table 2.--Cover type data, Experimental and Control areas, exclusive of study townships, Summer, 1964. Ground Cover Crop Types Green wheat and other cereal grains Fallow wheat and other cereal grains Corn, sorghum, millet Pasture Alfalfa Cultural Features 1/ Farmhouses, lots and work roads Section roads Highways Railroad Towns Cemetaries Wild Areas & Special Coverts Draws and other low, uncultivated areas Tree p1antings Roadside cover Fencerow cover TOTALS 1/ Experimental Area Acreage % of Total Control Area Acreage % of Total 35,308 45.2 25,095 39.9 35,304 2,227 2,478 141 45.2 2.9 3.2 .2 24,746 5,691 4,155 39.3 9.1 6.6 419 455 67 13 75 2 .5 .6 .1 .8 .5 ~1 .1 477 330 67 7 298 623 139 673 98 .8 .2 .9 .1 1,406 87 489 62 2.2 .1 .8 .1 78,022 100% Jj 62,910 100% .5 Sixty-four occupied and 22 unoccupied farmhouses 'in the Experimental area, compared with 74 occupied and 23 unoccupied in the Control area. 1/ There were 5880 acres of sandhi11s area mapped along the east tier of sections. These were not included because the sandhi11s actually form the east boundary of the control area. �- 9 - Table 3.--*Month1y precipitation .to March 31, 1965. Month Rainfall Recorded **Norma1 Rainfall Departure from Normal 2.53 1.69 4.26 .91 .32 ,37 .22 .04 .03 .28 .64 .36 11.65 1.91 3.19 3.37 2.46 2.00 1.48 .92 .44 .39 .31 .35 .99 17.81 + .62 April May June July August September October November December January February March Totals * ** recorded at Holyoke from April 1, 1964 -1.50 + .89 -1.55 -1.68 -1.11 .70 .40 .36 .03 + .29 .63 -6.16 --- U.S: Weather Bureau Data Based on 68 years of records Table 4.--Precipitation records from eight rain guage stations in the Experimental and Control townships, September 1964, through March 1965. Month E~erimenta1 SE NE September October November December January February March .75 Totals .75 T Location of Station Control Townshil! Townshil! SW NW SE NE NW SW .33 .13 .30 .14 .60 .25 .20 .35 T .56 .13 T 1.81 .81 1.13 .54 .15 .07 T .67 .58 .45 .26 .38 .17 .23 .40 .82 .50 2.50 2.76 .37 .22 .10 .03 .32 .73 .46 .44 .36 2.23 .66 0.66 �Table 5.--Average vegetative measurements made on sixteen transects, 1964 growing season. April 10 April 25 Type of Vegetation Measured 1 AVERAGE HEIGHT GROWTH IN INCHES Experimental Area Transects Control Area Transects 234 5 6 7 10 8 9 11 12 13 14 Green wheat 2.41 2.28 2.02 2.26 1.69 2.31 2.93 2.32 3.11 1.81 2.21 2.48 2.68 Green wheat 5.98 5.58 3.61 6.82 3.97 5.65 5.54 5.99 6.87 4.45 4.89 5.66 4.80 13.28 12.20 10.66 14.40 10.22 12.62 12.30 13.48 11.56 7.61 May 9 15 16 2.95 2.28 1.94 5.72 5.47 4.70 9.31 12.25 12.39 12.48 10.30 8.36 I May 19 June 1 *June 14 Sept. 5 Sept. 5 * Green wheat 19.20 14.76 15.30 19.38 17.64 18.40 16.60 21.28 ·16.32 19.18 18.94 21.63 19.66 19.78 21.45 14.65 Green wheat 22.61 15.62 24.61 28.72 22.11 27.47 21.33 25.67 28.67 23.12 24.20 26.60 21.81 26.41 20!86 18.33 Green wheat 25.19 24.59 24.11 26.37 16.13 26.53 17.63 23.87 22.40 16.51 18.10 20.41 18.34 24.12 20.19 17.99 Stubble height 10.08 10.57 6.28 Weed overs tory 4.90 9.40 5.78 11.04 24.97 26.37 10.59 5.55 7.49 5.90 -- 21.98 -- 12.22 8.34 6.52 9,08 10.34 Height decreases were the result of hail in some instances and due to the drooping of plants in others. 5.61 -- 5.61 b �- 11 - Three very unusual June hailstorms, almost entirely confined to the Control area, did severe damage to the vegetation and may have played havoc with pheasant reproduction. These sotrms were described as "unusual" because of the bast area they covered. Most hailstorms in eastern Colorado are confined to narrow strips or small, isolated blocks. These storms almost completely covered the entire Control area, with vegetative damage especially intense within scattered tracts. The coverage made by these storms is plotted in Figure 2. For the past 15 years management and research personnel have evaluated the damage done to pheasants by hailstorms in eastern CoLonado , In almost every instance this damage has not been found to be as severe as appearances indicate. The 1964 storms, however, coincided with an important period of the pheasant hatch and may have done more harm than normally encountered. The dry conditions that prevented recovery of the hail damaged vegetation were expected to further reduce pheasant survival. Vegetative growth measurements.--Once again measurements were made on the 16 vegetative vigor transects established near the corners of each study area in wheat or other cereel grain. Vegetative growth progress was measured seven times from April to September--with the last measurements recording stubble and weed overstory height. These data are presented in Table 5. Due to the June hailstorms vegetative cover density was very poor.on all of the Control area transects. The height measurements do not adequately reflect the sparsity of cover. This severe hail damage, coupled with the dearth of late summer and fall precipitation, resulted in extremely poor cover conditions in the Control area. Period of stubble mulching.--Undisturbed nesting cover is so vital to pheasants that transects were again run to ascertain when the wheat stubble was turned. In 1963 approximately 85 percent of all the stubble had been mulched by April 26, and this work was about 97 percent complete by May 9 in both study areas. In 1964, however, stubble mulching was accomplished much later and the rate of progress varied a little more between the Experimental and Control areas. Table 6 details the pertinent information relative to stubble mulching in 1964. �- 12 - Fi::;i.lre 2.-- B~~:)(;riYileDtal hen pheasant harvest study area severely damaged hJ hail dur i.n.; peak of phea~3cmthatch, 1964. �- 13 - Table 6.--Seasona1 progress of stubble mulching, Experimental and Control areas, 1964. Percent Stubble Mulching Completed by April 24-25 Study Area Percent Stubble Mulching Completed by May 10-11 Percent Stubble Mulching Completed by May 18-19 Experimental 20 66 85 Control 17· 48 79 Photo hubs.--Additional photo hubs were established in the Control area to compare with those previously selected in the Experimental area. It is hoped that these hubs·will produce a pictoral record of vegetative cover conditions during the hunting season each year. This may not only answer some questions pertaining to pheasant harvest but also should give a pretty good idea of winter and nesting cover that will be available for the next six months. Photo.hub locations are as follows: Experimental Area Hub 1t 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 T9N, R46W, Section 36 T9N, R46W, Section 35 TlON, R45W, Section 17 TlON, R45W, Section 18 TlON, R44W, Section 29 TlON, R44W, Section 29 TllN, R43W, Section 9 TllN, R43W, Section 8 TlON, R43W, Section 34 TlON, R43W, Section 33 T8N, R43W, Section 21 T8N, R43W, Section 29 T8N, R44W, Section 16 T8N, R44W, Section 17 �- 14 - Control Area Hub If 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Prepared by: Date: T7N, R45W, Section 31 T7N, R46W, Section 25 T6N, R46W, Section 7 T6N, R46W, Section 18 T5N, R46W, Section 3 T5N, R46W, Section 9 T5N, R47W, Section 31 T5N, R48W, Section 25 T6N, R48W, Section 36 T6N, R48W, Section 36 T7N, R48W, Section 36 T7N, R48W, Section 35 Harold M. Swope Assoc. Wildl. Researcher A~p~r_i_1~, __1~9~65 _ Approved by: Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �April, 1965 - 15 - State of JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH SEGMENT PROJECT COLORADO --------~~~~~--------- Project No. W-37-R-18 Game Bird Survey Work Plan No. 1 Effects Job No. l4d Population Period Covered: April Personnel: 1, 1964 through March Harold M. Swope, William of Hen Pheasant Harvest Studies 31, 1965 Carpenter and Mike Sterling ABSTRACT Crowing courtt data indicated that spring rooster pheasant populations were up 47 and 26 percent over 1963 in the Experimental and Control areas. It was also estimated that the cock population was 24 percent higher in the Experimental area--compared with the control area. Spring harem counts showed a slight increase in the hen per cock ratio over 1963, to 2.23 and 2.12 hens per cock in the Experimental and Control areas respectively. The production of young was down from 1963 with little difference noted between the two study areas in the number of young per hen. A 2.53 average number of young per hen was recorded in the Experimental area, compared with 2.64 in the Control. Birds observations were much more frequent in the Experimental area, however. The peak of pheasant hatch was found to have occurred during the third and fourth weeks of June. Two thirds of the hatch took place between the second week in June and the first week in August. This was approximately two weeks later than production occurred in 1963. Population indices, based on a compilation of the three pheasant surveys (crowing, sex ratio and brood counts) indicated a 21 percent greater population in the Experimental area compared with the Control area. In 1963 this differential was 16 percent. Recommendations: basic population No changes are recommended for the collection data in the two study areas. of this �- 16 - Objectives: (1) To determine pre-treatment within the study areas. pheasant (2) To determine hen pheasant (3) To determine causes of pheasant other than hunting. changes in pheasant shooting. population populations mortality levels following from causes Techniques Used: The Kimball crowing-count method, as revised in Colorado in 1953, was used on three ten stop routes in each study area. Following each crowing count a random roadside harem survey was made to determine spring sex ratios. Birds were flushed and counted when observation uncertainties indicated this should be done. Harem counts were made until vegetative growth rendered observations too difficult for accuracy. The Colorado method of making roadside brood counts was employed during production inventories. The crow-count routes were used in each study area. Three additional brood count routes were also established in each area to provide a larger sample. Attempts were made to flush all birds if total numbers were in doubt.· An estimated age was recorded for each clearly observed brood. Special efforts were made to observe and record broodless hens. Pheasant population indices were computed for the Experimental and Control areas by applying the formula p = C + CH for spring. populations and P = C + CH + CHY to derive fall indices. In these formulas C relates to the average cock calls per two minute period, H is the average number of hens per cock derived from sex ratio counts, and Y is the average number of young observed per hen. Findings: Crowing counts.--Spring breeding populations were found to be up 47 percent in the Experimental area and 26 percent in the Control area over '1963, based on crowing counts. This disproportionate gain in the Experimental area places that estimated spring cock population about 24 percent higher than it is in the Control area. Table 7 summarizes the 1964 crowing counts in both study areas while Table 8 compares the 1963-64 crowing count data. Spring Harem Counts (Sex Ratio).--Once again the spring harem counts had to be relied upon entirely for sex ratio information. Winter snowfall was inadequate to concentrate and expose pheasants for accurate census work, ,but it is still believed that spring harem counts produce more reliable sex ratio data than the winter surveys. The latter inventories tend to give an exceptionally high number of hens per cock but under the right conditions fairly reliable total population estimates may be possible. The ratio of hens to cocks increased in both study areas from about 1.7 in 1963 to approximately 2.2 in 1964. Birds observed per mile driven increased �- 17 - Table 7. count indfces and counting dates for six study area - Crowing routes, 1964. Date of Count April 14 16 18 22 29 May 5 7 11 13 14 15 16 18 19 21 28 31 Crowi~ Count Indices Control Area EXEerimental Area East Township West Township West 16.9 18.7 39.2 60.1 42.9 38.0 58.3 46.5 57.7 75.3 37.4 68.8 52.8 60.5 46.5 46.5 47.3 50.1 44.5 *Average 64.7 Total Average 48.3 60.5 1 3 11 12 June East 32.7 44.1 43.0 28.4 20.4 75.3 71.6 70.5 62.1 58.7 49.2 56.7 * Based on the highest count for each station. significantly, with more observations made in the Control area than in the Experimental area. This is in direct conflict with the population indices obtained from crowing counts and points out the erratic effect cover conditions may have on roadside counts. Spring harem count data for the two study areas in 1963 and 1964 are tabulated in Table 9. Brood Counts.--Pheasant production was down in both study areas in 1964 compared with 1963. This was evident from the decline in the young per hen figure as well as a drop in bird observations per mile and per minute. There was very little difference in brood sizes (young per hen) between the Experimental and Control areas in 1964, and as was the situation in 1963 pheasants were much more readily observed in the Experimental area. Table 10 sununarizes the production data in the two study areas for the past two years. �- 18 - Table 8. - Comparative 1963-64 crowing count data in the Experimental and Control areas. Area of Count *Crowin~ Count Indices 1963 1964 Experimental West Township East 38.0 43.3 62.9 64.7 75.3 71.6 48.07 70.5 42.2 50.8 42.0 45.00 62.1 58.7 49.2 56.7 Average Control West Township East Average * Based on the highest count for each station. Table 9. - Spring harem count data for Experimental and Control areas, 1963 and 1964. Comparisons Experimental Area 1963 1964 Control Area 1963 1964 Cocks observed Hens observed Total observations Hens/Cock Miles driven Birds observed/mile Minutes counted Birds/minute 319 550 869 1.72 516 1.69 1620 .54 140 236 376 1.69 224 1.68 697 .54 180 402 i~592 2.23 207 2.86 738 .81 217 460 677 2.12 184 3.68 735 .92 * Total broods plus broodless hens. Hatching chronology projected from estimated brood ages, is graphed in Figure 3. The peak of the hatch which came during the first two weeks in June in 1963 was delayed by a later spring warming period in 1964 to the third and fourth weeks in June. �30 Experimental Area 25 Control Area o W I u I- 20 « I I I if) o o I I 15 ~/ ~I ~ I CO LL o I 10 I I I I- Z I W U 0:: I-' -o I } 5 7 W / CL 1 2 3 4 MAY APPROXIMATE 1 2 3 JUNE 4 1 2 3 JULY WEEKLY PERIOD OF 4 1 2 3 4 AUGUST HATCH Figure 3. Weekly hatching dates of pheasant broods, Experimental and Control areas, 1963-1964. �- 20 - Table 10. - Pheasant production data, Experimental and Control areas, 1963 and 1964. Comparisons Experimental Area 1963 1964 Control Area 1963 1964 No. of counts *Hen index Young birds Total birds Young/hen Birds/mile 19 167 696 976 4.17 2.22 20 112 409 570 3.65 1.23 34 430 1088 1784 2.53 2.11 30 123 325 517 2.64 .21 * Total broods plus brood1ess hens. Population indices.--Using the formulas p = C + CH and P = C + CH + CHY the spring and fall pheasant population indices were calculated for the two study areas. These calculations indicate that the much improved spring breeding .situation in 1964 more than compensated for the decrease in production. The pheasant population increase (if such actually occurred) appeared to be greater in the Experimental area than in the Control. Population indices comparisons ~re made in Table 11. Table 11. - Spring and fall pheasant population indices in the Experimental and Control areas, 1963-64. Crow- No. of Young Spring Fall % Difference Study Area ing Hens per per Population Population Between Areas and Year Index Cock Hen Indices Indices Spring/Fall Experimental 1963 1964 48.1 70.5 1.72 2.23 4.17 2.53 130.83 227.72 475.81 625.49 + 22 + 8 + 16 + 21 Control 1963 .1964 45.0 56.7 1.69 2.12 3.65 2.64 121.05 176.90 398.63 494.23 8 - 22 - 16 - 21 Mortality determination.--The hailstorms discussed in a preceding portion of this report covered much too large an area to permit intensive mortality determination (about 300 square miles). No adult pheasant mortality was observed, however, reports of this were received from farmers. The hail did coincide with the peak of pheasant hatch and the loss of tiny chicks may have been high. This, coupled with the severe battering of vegetation (in some areas), may have resulted in severe mortality. Subsequent population checks should give us a pretty good idea of the damage done to the pheasant populations in the Control area as a result of this hail storm. �- 21 - Prepared by: Date: Harold M. Swope Assoc. Wildl. Researcher April, 1965 Approved by: ,Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief Ferd C. KJ_einschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator ��April, 1965 - 23 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT COLORADO State of W-37-R-lS Project No. of Hen 1 Work Plan No. Formulation of Hunting Regulations and Harvest Survey l4e Job No. Period Covered: Personnel: Game Bird Survey--Effects Pheasant Harvest November 14, 1964 to January 1, 1965. Norman L. Hughes, Wayne W. Sandfort and Harold M. Swope ABSTRACT The mechanics of establishing and conducting the experimental hen pheasant season were developed for the cancelled 1963 season. These regulations, hunter control, and harvest survey plans will be used when the experimental season is held. The adverse publicity and political pressures remaining from a year ago--added to the decline in pheasant production--made it appear unwise to push recommendations in 1964. Aerial hunter pressure counts were conducted in the same manner as they were in 1963. Hunting pressure was 16 percent greater in the Experimental area and down 8 percent in the Control area from 1963. There were 24 percent more hunters in the Experimental area than in the Control area on the opening day. Land posting surveys showed 72 percent of the Experimental area to be unposted, 25 percent posted hunting by permission only and three percent posted no hunting or trespassing. Recommendations: Just as soon as pheasant populations display a definite trend upwards an all out effort should be made to obtain an experimental hen season. These efforts should follow the guidelines presented in this report for Segment 17. �- 24 - Objectives: (1) To establish the exact number of hen permits to be issued within the Experimental area, and to issue these permits. (2) To submit recommendations for the general hunting regulations within the Experimental and Control areas, including bag limits, length of season and shooting hours. (3) To collect harvest data on hens and cocks from within the study areas. Techriiques Used: Since no experimental hen season was held in 1964 there was no need to establish the number of permits and issue same. General hunting regulations were recommended in 1963 and these will again be submitted when the hen season appears to be a reality. In lieu of collecting harvest data, in the absence of a hen season, aerial hunter pressure checks were again made on the opening afternoon of the season in the Experimental and Control areas. Cars were counted in 174 square miles in each study area in' the manner described in last segments' report. Land posting surveys were made by automobile in the same manner as in 1963. Findings: With the onset of extremely dry weather and a poor no reconnnendations were made for an experimental hen pheasant 1964. These considerations, coupled with the still prevalent pressures that forced cancellation of the season in 1963, and discontent of local farmers resulting from another poor wheat discretion seem the better part of valor. Population data was available for establishing permits but this proved unnecessary. the number pheasant hatch season in political the growing crop, made of reconnnended hen Aerial hunter pressure checks were flown on the opening afternoon of the season in both study years. As was done a year ago all cars in a 174 square mile sector of each area were counted. Based on these automobile observations hunting pressure in the Experimental area was 24 percent greater than it was in the Control area. This represents a gain in hunting pressure for the Experimental area of about 16 percent and a decline of eight percent in the Control area compared with 1963. This information is summarized in Table 12. There was some question in 1963 as to what affect a hen season would have on the closure of land to hunting and how this in turn might influence the pheasant harvest. Road-side transects were run in 1963 and again in 1964 to ascertain just what the extent of land closure might be. When a hen season is held comparable land posting data should be interesting and valuable. There was very little difference evident from the results of these surveys during the past two years--as may be seen in Table 13. Publi~ contacts were continued throughout the year to help in eventually implementing the experimental hen harvest. �- 25 - Table 12.--Aeria1 transect car-count data and relative hunting pressure, Experimental and Control areas, 1963-1964. Number EXI!erimenta1 Control 1963 1964 1963 1964 Comparisons Cars parked at farmhouses 71 93 82 80 Cars par~ed,away from farmhouses 92 89 83 64 Moving cars 34 46 34 40 Total cars observed 197 228 199 184 *Projected number of hunters 59l 684 597 552 Experimental area, 1963':'1964. Table 13.--Land closure by posting. Year Percent not Posted Percent Posted (Hunting with Permission) Percent Posted (No Hunting or Trespassing) 1963 73 23 4 1964 72 25 3 Prepared by: Date: Harold M. Swol!e Assoc. Wi1d1. Researcher Approved by: Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief Ferd C. K1einschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator ��- 27 - JOB COMPLETION RESEARCH State of Project SEGMENT ~C::.::O:..:::LO::::.=:RA:::..:.:::.DO:::_ No. W-37-R-18 Work Plan No. Job No. Period PROJECT REPORT Game Bird Survey 1 ~14~f Covered: Personnel: January Pheasants : Analysis 1, 1965 through March of Data and Results 31, 1965 Harold M. Swope Objectives: To evaluate data obtained under all preceding sub-jobs under Job.14, particularly that obtained under sub-jobs l4c, l4d, and l4e, and determination of the effects of removal of a given proportion of the hens from a'pheasant population. Procedure: I. Data will be arranged in an orderly, chronological manner for each study area and searched for correlations. Particular attention will be given to pre-treatment population levels, environmental variation between study areas, and to population levels following hen removal. II. Statistical tests will be applied to determine bility of data, prior to conclusions. significance and relia- Findings: Since we were unable to hold a hen pheasant season, it was impossible this phase of the study; consequently, no analysis and interpretation has been possible under this segment. Prepared Date: by: Harold M. Swope Associate Wildlife Researcher April, 1965 Approved by: to complete of data Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Fed. Aid Coordinator ��Ap:r'il, 19b5 - 29 - JOB COMPLETION RESEARCH State of Project PROJECT SEGMENT .....;C::..:O:.:L=..::O:.:RA=D:..::O~ _ No. Game Bird Survey W-37-R-18 Work Plan No. 1 Job No. 16 Period REPORT Covered: Personnel: April Pheasant 1, 1964 to March Harold M. Swope, Laurence Nest Site Selection Study 31, 1965. A. Webster, and David C. Bowden. ABSTRACT Plot size and design was developed vegetative plots randomly chosen. and the distribution of each of 48 Following meetings with State Highway Department personnel, and range and extension service specialists, the vegetative species to be tested for pheasant nesting suitability were selected. Fence construction was not completed accomplished during the segment. Objectives: by April 1, 1965, so no planting was (1) To establish plot plantings of selected species at the experimental nursery and wildlife research facility for future intensive studies. (2) To place pheasants in the experimental enclosure. Techniques Used: Forty-eight vegetative plots will be established as diagramed in Figures 1 and 2. Once the various grass and legume species appear to furnish adequa t e nesting cover ten hen and two rooster pheasants will be pinioned and placed in each quadrat. Periodic searches will then determine the plots actually being used by nesting hens. Nests will be "robbed" to stimulate renesting. �- 30 ~740'~ Plot Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 Species to be Planted Winter wheat (Triticum) Alfalfa (Medicago sativa rhizoma or [adak}, Sand Iovegrass (Eragrostis tri ch ode s}, Sand dropseed (SporoboIus cryptandrus) Crested wheatgrass (Agropyron cri statum-Fairway), Western Whcatgrass (Agropyron smi thi i) Hairy vetch (Astragalus-madison strain), Little bIuestem (Andropogon scoparius) White sweet clover (Meli lotus al ba) Alfalfa, Crested wheat.grass, Sand dropseed, Sand lovegrass, Ryegrass (Lolium multi ll orum), Swi tchgrass (Panicum virgatum) Diagramatic Arrangement of the Vegetative Study. Work Plan 1, Job 16. Plots in the Four Quadrats for the Pheasant Nest Site Selection �- 31 370' . 7/ ~," ""~ . 12' 12' 12' Detailed Arrangcmen ts of Indi vidual Quadrat, Pheasant Selection Study, Work Plan 1, Job 16 Nest Site �- 32 - Findings: The detailed plans for nesting plot arrangement by vegetative species are given in Figures 1 and 2. Delay in fence construction prevented the early spring planting of these plots as anticipated but late summer (1965) planting is now expected. If vegetative growth is satisfactory ten pheasant hens and two roosters will be placed in each fenced quadrat in March 1966. The vegetative species selected are largely those recommended for borrow pit planting by the State Highway Department. Most of these species and strains have been tested at the Akron Experiment Station by Colorado State University extension specialists. Sweet clover is not an approved roadside cover but this plant is being recommended for nesting site plantings by a farm group in northeast Colorado. The results of this study should help us to sustain or refute this recommendation. Wheat was included in the test plots to ascertain the relative attraction of grain stubble to nesting pheasants. If stubble does have a decidedly greater appeal to nesting hens that the other vegetative species then very little can be done in northeastern Colorado to pull hens away from these frequently disturbed fields. In this situation an intensive borrow pit planting program would be a misguided venture. Efforts have been made to combine early season plants with later varieties so cover will be available during the entire nesting season, with some green vegetative material present in most instances. Prepared Date: by: Harold M. Swope Assoc. Wildl. Researcher April, 1965 Approved by: Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �- 33 - JOB COMPLETION RESEARCH REPORT PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO Project No. W-37-R-18 Game Bird Survey Work Plan No. 1 Evaluation Job No. 17 Game, Fish and Parks Cooperative Habitat Period covered: Personnel: of the Landowner-Colorado May 15, 1964 to September Improvement Program. 1, 1964. Harold M. Swope and Lloyd W. Triplet. ABSTRACT Seventy-three farmers in Logan, Phillips, Sedgwick and Washington Counties volunteered to plant 621.5 acres of land for pheasant nesting cover with grass and legume seed furnished by the Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department. Forty-six of these sites, representing 368~ acres, were checked whether the seed was planted and extent of the cover produced. to determine Due to extremely dry fall and summer weather much of the seed was not planted. These unplanted sites represented 48 percent of those checked. None of the planted seed was found to have produced a stand that would provide nesting cover. Only three of the 24 planted sites checked showed evidence of any plant survival and these were very poor. Site locations, preparations in many instances. and planting methods left much to be desired It was not feasible to evaluate the use of any of the sites by pheasants since no cover was provided for their use. Recommendations: The failure of this program can largely be blamed on severe drought conditions, however, there were indications that many cooperators were not very sincere in their efforts to provide pheasant nesting cover. It is recommended that the program be continued until desirable growing conditions have been received so that a fair evaluation of its worth can be made. �- 34 - Objectives: (1) To ascertain the number, acreage and species composition of pheasant nesting plots planted by landowners in 1964 in Logan, Phillips, Sedgwick and Washington Counties. (2) To determine the contribution pheasant production. (3) To determine the winter use of these plots by pheasants. (4) To ascertain hunters. the availability of the cover plots to of these plots to pheasant Techniques Used: All seed dispersal and planting agreement records for ,Logan, Phillips, Sedgwick and Washington Counties were obtained from the Northeast Region office. Field surveys, to check on the use of the seed and the establishment of vegetation, were begun in late May in Logan County. The negative results prompted delay of these surveys until late summer. An attempt was made to contact each cooperator and question him regarding use of the seed provided him. If the seed was planted then the site was visited and a record of vegetative survival and density made. Since none of the'plots produced usable pheasant cover, winter use evaluation and nest search techniques were not employed; nor was it logical to check on the availability of these plots to hunters. Findings: Initial cover plot surveys were made in Logan County near the end of May but no results were apparent and checks were delayed until the end of the summer. Table 1 summarizes the number of plantings contracted for and the acreages involved in the four participating counties. Since this cooperative program supposedly came about as a compromise to the cancelled experimental hen pheasant season most emphasis was placed on checking cooperators in Phillips and Sedgwick Counties. Thirty-nine of the 42 participants in these two counties, with 3l2~ of the 3l7~ pledged acreage, were contacted. When it became apparent that results were almost completely negative in Phillips and Sedgwick Counties, additional contacts in southern Logan County and in Washington County (where drought conditions were even worse) were not made. The cooperators who did plant the seed stated that moisture conditions at planting time were adequate but they would not anticipate the ensuing dry weather. This places some doubt on the sincerity of many who 'claimed they did not plant because it was too dry. The grass and legume seeds should have been planted four to six weeks prior to the onset of the drought condition. , �- 35 - Table 1. - Agreements signed by landowners in Northeastern Colorado for development of pheasant cover, 1964. County Number of Plantings Acres in Plantings Logan 23 278. Phillips 8 97. Sedgwick 34 220.5 Washington 8 26 TOTALS 73 621.5 Much of the seed was broadcast over unprepared sites--in some instances on grass sod. In several cases seed was scattered under existing tree plantings. A few sites were obviously selected because of the difficulty of growing a crop on them. As many checks as possible were made in the company of Wildlife Conservation Officer, Lloyd Triplet. During the course of his other duties he contacted landowners that we were unable to locate during our joint survey of planting sites. The results of planting site surveys are listed in Table 2. �- 36 - ,Table 2. - Results of planting site surveys, northeastern Colorado, 1964. Date Inspected Name of Acreage Status of Seed Checked By Cooperator Donated Given Cooperator Logan Countl 5/27 Swope Edgar M. Meier 2 Under trees. No evidence of planting at site. 5/27 Swope K. E. Anderson 8 Site was pasture--1and in middle of country club estates--between homes. No evidence of planting. 5/27 Swope Carl W. Reker 7 Site a bald, clay, gravelly knob. Not planted. 5/27 Swope Dean J. Hecker 8 Broadcast on sod and disked. No sign of new growth. 5/27 Swope Roger Long 4 Nothing evident if planted. 5/27 Swope John Grauberger 20 Nothing evident if planted. 8/6 Swope & Triplet Charles Meakins 7 Planted in patch of switchgrass. No new plants noticeable. Total Acreage for County 56 �- 37 - Table 2. - Results of planting site surveys, northeastern Colorado, 1964. (continued) Date Inspected Name of Acreage Status of Seed Checked By Cooperator Donated Given Cooperator Phillips County 8/6 Swope & Triplet Harry Hassler 5 Planted--nothing up. Swope & Triplet Phill ip Schul tz 5 Not planted. Swope & Triplet Oscar Michael 40 Not planted. Late August Triplet Elmer Hansen 3 P1anted--no stand. Late August Triplet Dale Wood 40 P1anted--weeds took over. Late August Triplet Robert Derby 1 P1anted--nothing there. Late August Triplet Rex Edwards 1 P1anted--nothing there. 8/6 8/6 Total Acreage for County 95 Sedgwick County Swope & 8/5 Triplet Carl Meline 10 Planted--germinated and died. Swope & Triplet Lloyd Hedges 20 Did not plant. Swope & Triplet Albert Stretesky 7 Did not plant. Swope & Triplet Marvin Marquard t 2 Did not plant. Swope & Triplet Herman Marquardt 3 Did not plant. Swope & Triplet Arthur Schuler 15 Did not plant. Swope & Triplet Gary Schuler 15 Did not plant. 8/5 8/5 8/5 8/5 8/5 8/5 �- 38 - Table 2. - Results of planting site surveys, northeastern Colorado, 1964. (continued) Date Inspected Name of Acreage Status of Seed Checked By Cooperator Donated, Given Cooperator Sedgwick County (continued) 8/5 Swope & Triplet Howard Peterson 14 Planted in trees-Nothing up. Swope & Triplet I. N. Johnson 4 Planted and plowed up. Swope & Triplet Wayne Hiatt 7~ A little coze up. No clover or alfalfa. Swope & Triplet A. J. Kaschke 10 Did not plant. Swope & Triplet J. W. Johnson 3 Planted and plowed up. Swope & Triplet Bertha Best 3 Planted in trees. Nothing up. Swope & Triplet Lynn Kinnie 5 Did not plant. Swope & Triplet Dewey Green 2 Did not plant. Swope & Triplet Herman Tatum l~ Thin stand of grass and clover. Swope & Triplet Wayne Duerr 2 Did not plant. Late August Triplet Everett Eichele 2 Planted. grew. Very little Late August Triplet Martin Sorensen 10 Planted. Nothing grew. Late August Triplet Robert Harold 3 Planted. Nothing grew. Late August Triplet Dale Williamson 15 Planted. Nothing grew. Late August Triplet Herman Eckhard t 7 Planted. Nothing grew. 8/5 8/5 8/5 8/5 8/5 8/6 8/6 8/6 8/6 �- 39 - Table 2. - Results of planting site surveys, northeastern Colorado, 1964. (continued) Date Inspected Name of Acreage Status of Seed Checked By Cooperator Donated Given Cooperator Sedgwick County (continued) Late August Triplet James Stretesky 2 Planted. Nothing grew. Nothing grew. Late August Triplet Pat Donnelly 2 Planted. Late August Triplet Samuel McKellips 2 Did not plant. Late August Triplet Richard Sittner 8 Did not plant. Late August Triplet George Camelin Late August Triplet L. Dooley Toyne Late August Triplet Late August Planted. Nothing grew. 7 Planted. Nothing grew. John Roberts 2 Planted. Nothing grew. Triplet Gail Anderson 25 Planted. Nothing grew. Late August Triplet Charles Boehmer 4 Did not plan t; Late August Triplet Herbert Fliethrnan 4 Did not plant. Total Acreage in County Prepared by: Date: Harold M. Swope Associate Wildlife Researcher April 1965 2l7~ Approved by: Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator ��- 41 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of ~C~O=L~ORA~D~O~ Project No. W-37-R-18 Work Plan No. 4 Job No. 12 Period Covered: Personnel: _ Game Bird Survey Summarization and Publication of Chukar Partridge Research Findings April 1, 1964 through March 31, 1965 Wayne W. Sandfort Objectives: (1) To summarize all past work on the species in Colorado. (2) To publish the results of Chukar Partridge studies. Procedures: This procedure in the preparation of this publication has called for compilation and summarization of all findings obtained under Work Plan 4, Jobs 1 through 11, W-37-R, data from Chukar Partridge investigations conducted by other projects or organizations, and miscellaneous information pertinent to chukar research and management in Colorado (see P.S. & E. segment 18). Findings: Continuous assignments in the position of game research chief and additional duties relating to game management have prevented substantial progress on the preparation of this manuscript. Minor work has been accomplished on filing pertinent information and assembling current information on chukar releases and population checks in Colorado. It is hoped and anticipated that improved organization and delegation of a portion of .my duties will result in the preparation of this important publication in the ensuing months. Prepared Date: by: Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief April, 1965 Approved by: Laurence E. Riordan Assistant Director, Research Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator ��- 43 - State of COLORADO Project No. W-37-R-18 Work Plan No. 6 Title of Job: Experimental Period Covered: JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT Game Bird Survey Job No. Improvement Habitat June 8, 1964 through March 1 For Scaled Quail 31, 1965 ABSTRACT Part I. Windmill Cover Development Study Little growth or change was observed on the cover development plantings because of the continued below normal precipitation during 1964. No resident scaled quail coveys were in evidence on the study areas. Part II. Old Homestead Development Study Scaled quail populations during. the summer of 1964 were above those of previous years; however, sharp population declines were recorded on the study areas during the fall period. Light to moderate harvest was recorded during the hunting season. Wintering area resident coveys were only a remnant of the summer numbers. Two camera recording devices were employed at guzzler entrances to determine utilization of the provided water. Data collected through the summer, fall, and early winter indicated considerable use of guzzlers by quail and other wildlife. Final study analysis of the collected study information progressed to near completion. Part III. Brush Shelter Development Study Vegetative cover on the brush shelter development areas was sampled during the summer of 1964. Recorded information was correlated with mean scaled quail occurrence on the areas in an effort to detect possible relationships. Summer census of the development areas revealed the highest occurrence of scaled quail yet recorded, but movements from the areas during the fall resulted in almost a total void of quail on the areas during the winter months. �- 44 - Part IV. Technical assistance in upland game bird habitat development A comparison of the Glover-Schnaufer block development guzzler sites with and without supplemental feed during the late summer and fall of 1964 revealed significantly greater scaled quail utilization of sites containing the feeders. Recommendations: Field research should be terminated and the collected information should be analyzed, prepared in final report form, and distributed for management and public use. Objectives: Techniques I. II. (1) To determine the value of water and cover developments increasing the range and numbers of scaled quail. in (2) To cooperate with U.S. Forest Service personnel of the Carrizo District in the selection and technical advice in the development of surplus grazing tracts for upland game bird habitat. Used: Windmill Cover Development Study. A. Study plot development B. Summer and winter census of the study areas. C. Cover mapping and measurement of vegetation. Old Homestead Development Study. Census of the study areas by summer, prehunting season, and winter counts. B. Hunter checks to determine pressure, success and harvest. C. Banding of quail to determine movement, survival and other factors. D. Determination of values of the development work (by statistical and other comparative methods) in: 1. Increasing present populations. 2. Securing improved harvest of game bird populations. 3. Both (1) and (2) above. A. III. Brush Shelter Development Study. A. Mapping study areas and localities by detail, vegetative cover, improvements and water. B. Compile data records of conditions and change. C. Determine existing quail populations by census. D. Determine the value of development work (by statistical and other comparative methods) in: 1. Increasing present populations. 2. Maintaining populations for improved harvest. 3. Both (1) and (2) above. �- 45 - IV. Technical assistance in upland game bird habitat development. A. Coordinate planning and advise in the selection of suitable upland game bird development areas. B. Advise and assist in initial habitat improvement work on the development areas. ��- 47 - EXPERIMENTAL HABITAT IMPROVEMENT FOR SCALED QUAIL Acknowledgements Thanks are extended to Mr. Elmer Miller and Mr. Jim Hollenback of the U.S. Forest Service for their cooperation and assistance in the study. Part I. Windmill Cover Development Study Little observable change was noted in the fenced development plots. Growth of the surviving trees and shrubs was not great due to the continued dry climatic conditions existing through the year. Brief checks of the areas during the late summer and early winter reveal any established scaled quail coveys on ,the areas. Part II. Old Homestead Development did not Study Census.--Census of the study areas consumed a major part of the time devoted to this study. Procedures of census followed those of previous years (Snyder, 1962). The results of the summer counts of scaled quail were higher than during the previous summer periods, but the decline in area populations through the fall was dramatic. Summer, prehunting season, and winter census data are presented in Tables 1 through 6. A comparison of the mean numbers of scaled quail per development and control area through the period of the study is presented in Figure 1. The sharp decline in scaled quail on the areas and other rangeland locations during the fall of 1964 was believed to be caused by the continued below average precipitation. Resultant reduced vegetative growth combined with continued livestock grazing created poor food conditions. Concentrations of scaled quail at farmyards were observably and reportedly higher than during preceding years. Therefore, the increased study area declines can be partially attributed to movement of the coveys from the range to such locations. Utilization of Water.--Use of the guzzler water by wildlife was recorded at homestead development areas 1 and 3. Camera recording unit #1 on area 1 provided considerable information after malfunctions in operation were corrected during the summer. The second unit at area 3 provided nearly continuous data through the late summer, fall and early winter periods. A summation of the collected information is provided in tables 7 through 12 for the second unit. Pheasants resided on area 3 through the period, but their use of the provided water was not recorded. Scaled quail were the only consistent occupants of area 1 and the only important consumers of the provided water. �Figul~ ly 0-co.1<2d.qt~a.il popu'Lat.Loneper section on t.he old homestead study ar-eas , 60 1, I I ~ iJ i ct" ~." ~ :) \•.. Development J d ? I I .~ l' I L~O I I S t u ~ \ I I· '\ j.'" ! ,. 1 , r a 40 o 1! . ,,1 lid. f I, . ! I - ".!l'~ ' ' . /// ' . -c ••,_ iJ ' ~' ..' , '\.", ~'.~ ' ,....; J \. ., <, ./ ",,::;'~l.: I '>'\ 'e \ I Control-----\ .J ' l , '0 ·; . '' ' ~ \ B '\ I 3 \ ! , \ J \ , \ I \ " \ I \ J \ I \ ' 'I ,.. .... •• +=co \ I ", ,\ " .. \ I . A \ I "f,/....\ \ I. 30 '11 t e \ \ \ \ \ \ ~I V , • \ . "u I ~ \ ~ \ , '\ \ V, ~ i i i .- ~- Surr.mel'" Fall 1..-------·(Ii it,~ -1: P, r .1.9f:.l H:L7).t~r Summer- Fall 1962 Winter Summer 1963 Fa.ll ~'>finter Summer 1964 Fall Winter �- 49 - Table 1.--Summer census of the old homestead development study areas. Summer, 1964 Area 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Birds Observed A - B A - B A - B 8-6 23 1(14 0 2(13 0 0 8-17 4(21 2(4 0 22 0 0 9-2 31 0 0 8-10 20(11 0 11 0 4 0 8-19 47 2 2 0 0 0 9-1 39 20 8-10 13 12 3 8-19 31 5 7 Study area Total A - B 21 20 0 9-24 60 12 0 0 0 0 72 22 0 Scaled Quail Bobwhite Pheasants 1 0 0 0 9-22 18(1 0 21 0 0 0 63 21 4 Scaled Quail Bobwhite Pheasants 0 0 0 9-1 14 -13 3 0 0 0 9-21 14 20 6 0 0 0 31 20 7 Scaled Quail Bobwhite Pheasants 0 8-19 38(15 0 0 0 0 0 9-4 50 0 0 0 0 0 9-21 39 0 3 0 0 0 53 0 3 Scaled Quail Bobwhite Pheasants 8-11 0 25 0 0 0 0 8-20 2 23 0 0 0 0 9-4 9 0 0 23 0 0 9-20 13 34 0 0 1 0 47 0 1 Scaled Quail Bobwhite Pheasant 8-11 0 0 0 8-20 0 14 0 0 0 0 9-4 0 0 0 10 0 0 9-20 0 0 0 14 0 0 Scaled Quail Bobwhite Pheasants Census Totals 280 63 15 Scaled Quail Bobwhite Pheasants Total Birds Counted 358 8-10 3(8 0 0 0 0 0 0 o. 0 0 0 5 0 0 �- 50 - Table 2.--Summer census of the old homestead Summer, Area A - B l. 2. 3. 8-7 51 0 0 5. 6. 8-17 48 0 9-2 42 0 0 1 8-17 0 0 0 3 0 1 9-2 14 0 0 0 0 0 8-17 35 4(10 0 0 a 0 9-2 51 0 0 0 8 0 0 8-18 0 0 0 8-10 2 0 0 0 0 0 8-10 33 0 0 0 0 0 8-7 0 0 0 8-7 24 0 0 0 1 5 0 8-7 1964 Birds Observed A - B 0 0 0 a 4. A - B control study areas. 0 0 0 Study area Total A - B 9-19 91 0 0 0 0 0 91 0 1 Scaled Quail Bobwhite Pheasant a 9-19 17 25 0 0 0 a 42 0 2 Sea led Quail Bobwhite Pheasants 0 0 0 0 9-22 33 11 0 0 0 0 51 0 0 Scaled Quail Bobwhite Pheasants 5 0 0 9-2 9 0 0 20 0 0 8-18 0 0 0 2 0 0 9-3 0 0 0 8-19 46 0 0 0 0 0 9-3 31 0 0 a a a 0 9-22 17 0 0 34 0 0 51 0 a Scaled Quail Bobwhite Pheasants 0 0 0 9-19 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Scaled Quail Bobwhite Pheasants 0 0 0 9-20 16 0 0 0 0 0 46 0 0 Scaled Quail Bobwhite Pheasants Census Totals 281 0 3 Scaled Quail Bobwhite Pheasants Total Birds Counted 284 �- 51 - Table 3.--Prehunting season census of the old homestead study areas. development Fall, 1964 A - B 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Study Area Total Birds Observed A - B A - B Area 10-27 2S 46 0 0 0 0 11-4 20 21 0 0 0 0 11-9 21 17 0 0 0 0 71 0 0 Scaled Quail Bobwhite Pheasants 10-28 0 44 0 0 0 0 11-4 41 0 0 11-7 38 0 0 0 0 0 44 0 0 Scaled Quail Bobwhite Pheasants 10-30 0 0 0 19 0 3 11-4 0 7 12 0 0 11-12 21 + 0 8 0 0 21 19 12 Scaled Quail Bobwhite Pheasants 10-30 0 56 0 0 0 0 11-5 50 0 0 0 0 0 11-12 0 55 0 0 0 0 56 0 0 Scaled Quail Bobwhite Pheasants 11-2 31 16 0 0 0 0 11-7 32 0 0 0 0 0 11-11 0 41 0 0 0 0 47 0 0 Scaled Quail Bobwhite Pheasants 11-2 0 0 0 0 0 11-7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 11-11 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Scaled Quail Bobwhite Pheasants Census Totals 239 19 12 Scaled Quail Bobwhite Pheasants Total Birds Counted 270 0 0 0 + �- 52 - Table 4. --Prehunting areas. Area A - B 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. season census of the old homestead control Fall, 1964 Birds Observed A - B A - B Study Area Total 10-28 31 0 0 0 0 0 11-4 56 24 0 0 0 0 11-9 55 23 0 0 0 0 80 0 0 Scaled Quail Bobwhite Pheasants 10-28 18 0 0 0 0 0 11-4 0 0 0 0 0 0 11-9 0 0 0 0 0 0 18 0 0 Scaled Quail Bobwhite Pheasants 10-30 24 12 0 0 0 0 11-4 19 0 0 0 0 0 11-9 14 0 0 0 0 0 36 0 0 Scaled Quail Bobwhite Pheasants 10-30 0 0 0 0 0 0 11-5 0 0 0 0 0 0 11-11 0 3 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 Scaled Quail Bobwhite Pheasants 10-30 0 0 0 0 0 0 11-5 0 0 0 0 0 0 11-11 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Scaled Quail Bobwhite Pheasant 10-30 14 0 0 0 0 0 11-5 0 0 0 0 0 0 11-11 0 0 0 0 0 0 14 0 0 Scaled Quail Bobwhite Pheasants 151 0 0 Scaled Quail Bobwhite Pheasant Census Totals study �- 53 - Table 5.--Winter census of the old homestead development areas. Winter, 1964-65 Area 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. A - B A - B Birds Observed A - B 12-11 13 7 0 0 0 0 12-23 8 0 0 0 0 0 1-5 13 0 0 12-14 5 0 0 0 0 0 12-23 5 0 0 0 0 0 1-5 0 0 0 0 0 12-11 7 0 12 0 3 0 12-23 3 0 12 0 3 0 1-7 0 21 1 12-15 0 0 0 0 0 0 12-22 14 0 0 0 0 0 12-15 32 0 0 0 0 0 12-15 0 0 0 0 0 0 + 13 0 0 A - B 1-18 20 0 0 Study Area Total 0 0 0 26 0 0 Scaled Quail Bobwhite Pheasants + 0 1-20 0 0 0 0 5 0 0 Scaled Quail Bobwhite Pheasants 0 0 0 1-20 0 13 3 0 0 0 7 21 3 Scaled Quail Bobwhite Pheasants 1-5 14 0 0 0 0 0 1-19 14 0 0 0 0 0 14 0 0 Scaled Quail Bobwhite Pheasants 12-21 30 0 0 0 0 0 1-8 30 0 0 3 0 0 1-19 11 0 0 0 0 0 33 0 0 Scaled Quail Bobwhite Pheasants 12-21 0 0 0 0 0 0 1-8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1-19 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Scaled Quail Bobwhite Pheasants Census Totals 85 21 3 Scaled Quail Bobwhite Pheasants Total Birds Counted 109 �- 54 - Table 6.--Winter census of the old homestead Winter, Area 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. control study areas. 1964-65 A - B A - B Birds Observed A - B 12-14 16 0 1 0 0 0 12-22 9 0 0 0 0 0 1-4 9 1 0 0 0 0 12-14 0 0 0 0 0 0 12-22 0 0 0 0 0 0 1-5 0 0 0 12-14 0 0 0 0 0 0 12-22 0 0 0 0 0 0 1-7 0 0 0 12-15 0 0 0 0 0 0 12-22 0 0 0 0 0 0 1-7 12-15 0 0 0 0 0 0 12-15 0 0 0 0 0 0 A - B Study Area Total 1-18 + 0 6 0 0 0 16 1 6 Scaled Quail Bobwhite Pheasants 0 0 0 1-18 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Scaled Quail Bobwhite Pheasants 0 0 0 1-20 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Scaled Quail Bobwhite Pheasants 0 0 20 0 0 1-20 17 0 0 0 0 0 20 0 0 Scaled Quail Bobwhite Pheasants 12-21 0 0 0 0 0 0 1-5 0 0 0 0 0 0 1-20 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Scaled Quail Bobwhite Pheasants 12-21 0 0 0 0 0 0 1-5 0 0 0 0 0 0 1-20 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Scaled Quail Bobwhite Pheasants Census Tota Is 36 1 6 Scaled Quail Bobwhite Pheasants Total Birds Counted 43 + �- 55 - Table 7.--Activity per day during periods of continuous camera recorder operation at the guzzler entrance on old homestead development area 413. Date Days of checked operation Number of activations Activity per day Precipitation Amount Date 0.15" 0.07 0.70 8-4 8-5 8-8 0.10 9-11 0.15 0.29 0.11 9-15 9-21 9-24 0.04 10-12 0.07 0.68 0.15 0.10 0.08 0.18 11-3 11-16 11-17 11-18 11-19 12-3 8-3 8-6 8-14 8-17 8-19 7-29 to 8-19 5 3 8 3 2 473 211 310 143 172 94.60 97.00 38.75 47.67 86.00 21 1389 66.14 8-28 4 363 90.75 9-8 6 880 146.67 9-13 9-14 3 1 125 188 41.67 188.00 9-24 9-25 9-29 10-3 3 1 4 4 219 77 486 706 73.00 77.00 121.50 176.50 9-21 to 10-3 12 1488 124.00 10-16 3 1039 346.33 10-30 2 896 448.00 Camera recorder removed during hunting season 12-16 5 106 21.2 12-28 5 1331 266.2 1-4 4 1888 472.0 1-11 4 1377 344.25 1-16 3 1-20 4 1-22 2 1-13 to 1-22 9 1127 1320 619 3066 375.67 330.00 309.50 340.68 �- 56 - Table 8.--A percentage index of wildlife occurrence at the guzzler entrance on old homestead development area #3 during summer, fall, and winter periods of 1964-65. Species Period 9-21 to 10-1 7-29 to 8-19 1-1 to 1-22 Scaled quail Bobwhite Cottontail Sparrow Mourning dove Mockingbird Meadowlark 28.80~'" 22.42" 28.13 2.58 15.90 1.49 0.68 0.46 93.02 4.66 1.86 87.04 0.59 12.37 Night Activity 39.17+ 40.28 9.71 * Percent of the recorded daylight pictures per period. + Percent of the total recorded camera activations per period. I Table 9.--Wildlife occurrence at the guzzler entrance on old homestead development area #3. Species Scaled quail Bobwhite Cottontail Mourning dove Sparrow Mockingbird Meadowlark Wood rat Badger ok + 7-l0~'" to 8~6 8-6 to 8-24 Period 8-24 to 10-1 11+ 6 21 18 19 11 6 45 27 1 58 41 40 2 3 10-6 to 11-5 12-11 to 1-11 15 Species left area 48 21 16 15 66 69 5 1 2 1 1 Month and day. Presence of more than one of a species at the same time was tallied as one occurrence. �- 57 - Table 10.--Hours of bobwhite quail occurrence at the guzzler entrance on old homestead development area #3. Period 5~\- 6 1+ 8-6 to 8-24 8-24 to 10-1 7 2 8 9 10 Hours 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 10 9 8 2 1 9 10 1 1 1 1 3 1 2 5 14 3 6 1 1 1 3 12-11 to 1-11 5 Occurrences between 5:00 and 5:59 A.M. + Presence of a covey is considered as one occurrence. 1 10-6 to 11-5 4 1 4 2 2 7~ Table 11.--Hours of scaled quail o,ccurrence at the guzzler entrance on old homestead development area #3. 5'\-6 7 8 9 Hours 10 11 12 1 1+ 2 2 1 1 1 2 9 7 13 4 6 1 Period 8-6 to 8-24 2 3 3 1 3 5 3 10-6 to 11-5 Occurrences between 5:00 and 5:59 A.M. + Presence of a covey is considered as one occurrence. 3 1 2 4 5 2 2 6 1 4 8-24 to 10-1 4 -;'( Table 12.--Hours of cottontail occurrence at the guzzler entrance on old homestead development area if3. 9 Hours 10 11 12 1 3 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 2 4 1 2 1 Period 5,'( 6 7 8 8-6 to 8-24 2 7 7 8-24 to 10-1 2 8 1 10-6 to 11-5 12-11 to 1-11 2 3 1 1 3 4 5 6 5 4 7 6 5 4 5 5 1 1 2 4 2 1 5 2 �- 58 - Hunting Season: The 1964 hunting season began on November 14 and continued to the end of the month. High winds created poor hunting conditions at the start of the season. Hunting pressure, therefore, was light, but continued through the season with greater persistence than in preceding seasons. Moderate harvest of scaled quail was tallied or indicated on several of the study areas, but a majority of the birds were believed to have left the areas and moved elsewhere because of the persistent hunting. In the Campo region 54 hunters were contacted who had hunted 161 hours with a resultant bag of 144 scaled quail, 14 bobwhite, and 1 pheasant. The scaled quail bagged per hunter ratio was 2.67 : 1, and 0.89 : 1 per hour. These figures are below those of the two previous years, but cannot be considered significantly lower because of the small sample size and inherit sampling errors. The young to adult ratio for scaled quail was 143 : 68 or 2.1 to 1. Data Analysis: The final condensation, analysis, and evaluation of the four years of collected information neared completion during this project segment. Comparison of the development and control area census information was statistically tested for the prehunting season periods, winter periods, and for changes in area popUlations from summer to prehunting season, and prehunting season to winter census periods. Population trends were graphically illustrated. Mean occurrence of scaled quail on the development and control sites was computed and illustrated. Occurrence of phea sant;s and bobwhite was determined per census period. Comparative occurrence of the three species by area was tallied and illustrated. This and additional information will be presented in a final (technical bulletin) report. Part III. Brush Shelter Development Study Vegetation sampling on the brush shelter development areas was completed in June and July of 1964. Sampling procedures followed those used on the old homestead and windmill areas (Snyder, 1964). Tables 13 through 18 provide a condensed summation of the findings. The brush shelter development areas all occur within the sandsage cover type, and do not vary greatly in general habitat condition. Since habitat manipulation was the same for all areas, a comparison was made, which attempted to determine why some areas received much higher scaled quail use than others. The total mean scaled quail occurrence per area for the combined census periods was computed, and used as an index of their value for scaled quail. This was then graphically plotted in comparison with certain ground cover groupings (obtained by vegetation sampling) to determine if amounts of forbs, grasses, and other cover conditions were related to mean scaled quail residence on the study areas. If the plotted figures �- 59 - Table 13.--Forb species hit occurrences on the brush shelter development study areas. Summer, 1964. Section l-D 3 4 Total 9 8 57 124 40 23 36 29 128 Purslane 21 1 14 7 43 Red Root 17 2 23 42 Sunflower 20 4 27 51 Species 1 2 Russian thistle 50 Lamb's quarter Milk Purslane 1 1 1 3 7 9 1 ,21 Ma1vaceae spp. 3 1 2 6 Texas croton 1 1 2 4 Buffalo burr 2 2 Psora lea 1 1 Sphaeralcea sp. 4 Spiderwort Morning glory 1 Western ragweed 1 4 10 12 1 1 1 1 2 Evening starflower 1 Hoffmanseggia sp. 1 1 Opuntia spp. 1 1 Clammy weed 1 Verbain 1 4 2 1 Total 3 2 Bundleweed Unidentified 5 2 2 6 2 6 1 15 162 60 80 169 471 �- 60 Table l4.--Forb species hit occurrences on the brush shelter development study areas - Section 2-D. Summer, 1964. Species 1 2 3 4 Total Russian thistle 8 53 43 49 153 Lamb's quarter 9 20 34 21 84 Purslane 20 5 11 33 69 6 13 12 31 Red root Sunflower 1 2 21 15 39 Milk Purslane 6 2 6 8 22 Sphaera1cea sp. 2 3 4 2 11 Globe mallow 3 9 2 8 22 1 1 Texas croton Few-flowered psora lea Spiderwort 3 Morning glory 1 2 2 1 4 2 Western ragweed 4 Evening starfloWer 2 Opuntia sp. I 1 5 4 9 3 5 1 Gourd 1 Bund1eweed Horseweed 2 1 1 1 3 3 Kochia 2 2 Phlox 4 4 Lupine 1 1 Senecio 1 1 Snakeweed 14 Daisy spp. 14 1 1 Unidentified 13 9 1 3 26 Total 69 125 154 163 512 �- 61 Table l5.--Forb species hit occurrences on the brush shelter development study areas - Section 3-D. Sunnner, 1964. Area Species 1 2 3 4 Total Russian thistle 58 56 27 30 171 Lamb's quarter 9 31 31 19 90 Purslane 11 44 13 42 110 Red root 6 2 3 11 Sunflower 12 14 4 30 Milk Purslane 2 6 5 7 20 Sphaeralcea sp. 2 1 1 5 9 Malvaceae spp. 2 2 2 Texas Croton 1 1 Few-flowered psora1ea 1 3 1 5 Spiderwort 1 4 1 6 Evening starflower 1 2 Hoffmanseggia sp. 3 3 6 Opuntia 1 1 2 1 1 Verba in 1 1 Bundleweed 1 1 1 1 Senecio Bull thistle 1 1 C1annnyweed Kochia 3 1 1 1 1 Milk weed Unidentified 8 1 4 5 18 Total 92 167 113 121 493 �- 62 Table l6.--A comparative index of forb species cover on the brush shelter areas in section I-D. June, 1964. Species Percent Cover per Area 1 2 3 4 Russian thistle 6.50 .90 .45 8.00 29.54 Lamb's quarter 5.45 1.85 3.90 2.35 25.26 Purslane 2.00 .05 1.15 .45 6.80 Pigweed 1.60 .10 2.60 8.01 Sunflower 2.80 .70 3.90 13.79 Milk Purslane Section Percentage .10 .05 .05 .37 1.10 .85 .10 4.85 Globe Mallow .30 .05 .35 1.30 Croton .05 .05 .15 .47 Buffalo Burr .10 .20 Psora lea sp. .05 .15 Sphaeralcea sp. .55 Sand lily Morning glory .05 Western ragweed .05 .56 2.15 4.38 .05 .09 .09 .05 .19 E. starf10wer .20 Hoffmanseggia sp. .05 .09 Opuntia sp. .15 .28 Clammy weed .05 Verba in .10 .30 .25 .05 Total % of area .56 .28 Bund1eweed Unidentified .93 .10 .19 .50 .15 .35 .05 1.96 19.65 5.90 7.25 20.85 100.00 �- 63 - Table 17.--A comparative index of forb species cover on the brush shelter areas in section 2-D. June, 1964. Percent Cover per Area Section Percentage Species 1 2 3 4 Russian thistle .95 8.75 5.40 8.30 35.94 Lamb's quarter .80 2.30 3.25 2.20 13.13 2.25 .45 3.45 10.60 .70 .75 1.75 5.07 6.76 Purslane Pigweed Sunflower .05 .25 2.50 .85 1.60 Milk Purs lane .45 .15 .35 .45 2.15 Sphaera1cea sp. .25 .50 .45 .40 2.46 Globe Mallow .30 1.35 .25 .90 4.30 .10 .15 Croton Psora1ea sp. Sand lily Morning glory .25 .20 .31 .05 .46 3.76 .15 1.90 Western ragweed , .30 .35 E. starf10wer .40 .40 .20 .65 Hoffmanseggia sp. Opuntia sp. .00 1.23 .80 Gourd .90 Bundleweed Horseweed .05 1.38 .10 .25 Kochia .99 1.92 .38 Phlox .30 1.10 .46 1.69 Lupine .20 .31 Senecio sp. .05 .08 Gaillardia .10 Arnica .75 .15 1.15 Daisy .55 .85 Snakeweed Unidentified 1.10 1.15 Total % of Area 7.05 18.90 .05 .15 .30 .23 3.99 16.65 22.50 100.00 �- 64 - Table l8.--A comparative index of forb species cover on the brush shelter areas in section 3-D. June, 1964. Species Percent Cover per Area 123 4 Russian thistle 5.95 7.10 2.85 3.25 39.48 Lamb's quarter .70 2.60 2.65 1.45 15.26 Purslane .85 4.10 1.25 3.70 20.41 Pigweed .45 .20 .20 1. 75 Sunflower .80 1. 75 .45 6.19 .55 2.47 Milk Purslane .10 .30 .25 Sphaeralcea sp. .20 .10 .05 Globe Mallow .15 Section Percentage .72 .30 .93 Croton .05 .05 Psoralea sp. ..05 .20 Sand lily .05 Morning glory .20 1.10 starflower .05 .40 Hoffmanseggia sp. .30 .50 1.65 Opuntia sp. .05 .80 1. 75 E. Clanrrnyweed .05 .10 2.89 .93 .41 .10 Bundleweed .62 .10 .20 Verbain Kochia .20 .20 .05 .10 .05 .10 Milkweed .10 .20 Senecio .10 .20 Bull thistle .05 .10 Unidentified .80 .05 .30 .45 3.30 Total % of Area 8.70 16.35 11.65 11.80 100.00 �- 65 - Table 19.--Vegetative cover percentage indicies, mean occurrence of scaled quail per area, and correlation coefficient relations on the brush shelter development areas. Area Bare Ground Litter Mid Grass Short Grass Forbs Half Shrubs Mean quail use 1-D-1 2. 53.45 66.25 11.20 10.25 4.80 6.50 1.75 7.25 19.65 5.90 9.15 3.85 3. 60.75 12.15 6.00 8.35 7.25 5.50 9.86 2.54 1.50 4. 60.35 6.55 4.05 .30 20.85 7.90 8.14 2-D-1. 56.15 14.50 10.30 5.60 7.05 6.40 5.41 2. 44.60 12.50 .30 18.90 11.45 5.14 3. 52.10 7.95 12.25 1.90 5.15 16.65 16.25 10.95 4. 49.20 10.90 5.80 .85 22.50 10.75 3.91 3-D-1. 58.55 1.80 5.60 9.45 8.70 5.90 0 2. 54.15 13.95 . 6.10 16.35 4.70 4.09 3. 42.55 22.30 9.90 4.75 1.50 11.65 12.10 0 4. 58.85 12.35 4.55 6.95 11.80 5.50 0 • Lr J - - .86 -Cr = .58 r = - .65 r = - .74 �- 66 - indicated a possible relationship existed~ the correlation coefficient Irl was statistically computed. Table 19 provides the quail use and its Ir' relation with several of the ground cover groupings. None of the correlation coefficients were significantly high to provide substantial confidence of ground cover influence on area scaled quail use, but the combined data coupled with other information yield evidence that indicate such a relationship probably does exist. This data will be covered thoroughly in the final report. Census: Scaled quail populations on the study areas were higher during the summer of 1964 than in 1963, but fall declines were much greater (Figure 2). Tables 20 and 21 provide census data for the summer and fall periods. By hunting season only a few coveys remained available to the hunter. A covey of approximately 25 birds, which was using areas l-D-l and 3, was hunted more than once during the season, however, bird removal was unknown. The remaining scaled quail apparently were too scared to continue use of the shelters and moved elsewhere to winter. Therefore, only area 2-D-2 retained a small covey of 5 or 6 quail through the winter. The sharp population declines on the brush shelter development areas paralleled declines throughout the rangelands (Figure 2). The information indicates provided resting cover was not adequate for retaining scaled quail where another environmental deficiency or combination of limitations existed. IV. Technical Assistance in Upland Game Bird Habitat Development A brief study was enacted on the Glover-Schnaufer block development, which attempted to determine the capacity of artifical feeders to retain scaled quail. Grain sorghum was placed in the six feeders within the fifteen guzzler unit group at the end of July, 1964 and maintained through the fall period. Regrettably, some of the feeders ran empty for a brief period in mid-October. Grain had not been consistently provided in the feeders during the summer and fall period of 1963. However, the Forest Service personnel maintained census checks of the study group through that period in both 1963 and 1964. Mean scaled quail Occurrence per guzzler unit was obtained for both years and the amount of change in use between years was computed (Table 22). A comparison of the difference in use at guzzler units with and without feeders between the two years was statistically tested. The results (Table 22) show a significantly greater amount of use was received at the units containing feeders in 1964. This possibly indicates that food shortage was an important limitation to scaled quail during the fall of 1964 and therefore was the reason accentuated population declines on the study area groups and other rangeland locations occurred. More years of comparison are needed, however, to determine the influence of weather and range conditions, and to obtain the long-term economics of feeding. �Figure Scaled quail populations per brush shelter study area 2. 13 B i r 12 11 d s p e r 10 9 8 s t u d y a r e a Development I 7 0'\ -..J 6 5 4 " •. 3 ,""' Winter ,, " " ", ",,' 1 o ,'"' ," " 2 " ,, Control ", '\. .m. __ Summer 1962 Fall Winter Summer Fall 1963 Winter Sununer Fall 1964 .-a Wint er �- 68 - Table 20.--Summer checks of the brush shelter Section-Area l-D Scaled Quail Observed 8-6 1 8-14 5(6 8-28 2. 3. o 7 1 o 16 7 4. 4 1. developments o o - 1964. High Count 9-15 14 8 14 16 o 4 7 + 4 9-23 6-8 12 41 2-D 1. 2. 3. 4. 8-3 2 2(8 2(10-27 2(21 8-18 6 20 37 1(8 8-28 11-14 7 0 8-3 8-14 8-28 9-21 o o 25 20 39 23 0 107 3-D 1. 2. 3. 4. o o o o o o o + o o o o o + o 7 + 7 o o 7 Total Scaled Quail Counted 155 + = Shelter use evident. -23 Birds found within 5(6 Adu1ts(Young Table 21.--Fal1 Section-Area census of the brush shelter Quail Observed 10-16 1-D 2-D 3-D No quail flushed. the area but not at the shelter. 11-4 25 1. + 2. 6 o 3. 8 4. o + study areas - 1964. Section-Area Quail Observed 1-C 10-14 10-27 No quail or sign found 2-C 11-28 10-14 No quail or sign found 3-C 10-9 11-19 No quail or sign found 1 10-14 11-6 1. o o 2. 12 11 3. o 4. + o o 10-9 11-21 Sign found at #2 & 4 No sign at #1 & 3 �- 69 - . Table 22.--A comparison of the Glover-Schnaufer block development guzzler units with and without supplemental feed. Areas without feeders 1963 1964 Change Areas with feeders 1963 1964 Change 1. 14.80* 6.22 -8.58 5.89 5.22 2. 8.67 1.73 8.56 - .11 0.67 1.33 11.88 10.55 -1.29 1.78 9.67 17 .00 33.22 20.77 23.55 3.77 8.80 37.11 28.31 7.57 21.66 14.09 3. 4. 9.07 .44 10.85 5. 12.92 9.63 6. 7. 3.83 .00 5.71 1.11 -3.29 1.88 1.11 8. 10.08 2.66 -7.42 9. 5.00 .44 -4.56 Sum -20.48 85.49 Mean - 2.275 14.25 1.7125 16.31 sx t ~'< 4.56 with 13 d.f. t.05 = 1.771 Mean scaled quail occurrence through the summer and fall period. �= 70 - REFERENCES Snyder, W. D. 1962. Experimental habitat improvement for scaled quail. p. 49-70. Colo. Dept. of Game, Fish and Parks. Quart. Rept. July (Part 1), 1962. 1964. Experimental habitat improvement for scaled quail. p. 181-215. Colo. Dept. of Game, Fish and Parks. Research Rept. April (Part 2), 1964. Prepared by: Date: Warren D. Snyder Approved by: Laurence E. Riordan Wild!. Researcher Candidate Assist. Director, Research April, 1965 Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief �April, 1965 - 71 - State of JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH SEGMENT PROJECT COLORADO ------------~--~--------- Project No. W-37-R-18 Game Bird Survey Work Plan No. 6 Development Job No. 3 Period Covered: April Personnel: of census techniques for scaled quail. 1, 1964 to March 31, 1965. Area Supervisors D. F. Bogart and E. T. Knight; Wildlife Conservation Officers J. F. Cordova, M. E. Graham, A. J. Heins, H. J. Hood, W. L. Kent, C. Leonard, C. Sealing, C. M. Scott, and J. Stevenson; Mr. D. C. Bowden. ABSTRACT Summer population through replicate levels of scaled quail during 1964 were determined countS on established trend routes. Procedures for Statistical Services Laboratory analysis of scaled quail census data were completed in 1963. Averages of all suitable counts made were utilized in 1964 as in 1963. Wildlife Conservation Officers counted a total of 878 scaled quail (617 young, 220 adults, and 41 unclassified) and 71 broods in two morning and one evening counts each along 14 trend routes during 1964. This activity required approximately 66 hours of time and 941.5 miles of travel during the actual counting. Statewide scaled quail populations were found to be somewhat lower in 1964 compared with 1963 on a birds per mile basis (0.93 birds/mile in.1964 compared with 1.20 birds/mile in 1963). This difference was not, however, statistically significant at the .20 level. ��- 73 - DEVELOPMENT OF CENSUS TECHNIQUES FOR SCALED QUAIL Donald M. Hoffman A comprehensive final report covering all past work on inventory has been completed. studies Participating Wildlife Conservation Officers utilized approximately 66 hours of time and drove 941.5 miles in securing the 1964 scaled quail trend-route counts. Two morning and one evening count were made on each of 14 trend routes. Trend-route count data are summarized for the various individual census units (Table 1), individual management areas (Tables 2 through 5) and regional (Table 6). Overall scaled quail populations were found to be lower during 1964 than in 1963; however, three new trend routes not previously run were counted in 1964. Populations in management areas 1, 2, and 3 comprl.Sl.ngthe entire scaled quail range north of highway U. S. 160 are still very low although young to adult ratios showed improvement in all these areas. Populations in management area 4 comprising the range south of U. S. 160 in Baca and southeastern Las Animas counties continue to be much better than the remainder of the range with 2.31 birds counted per mile. A young to adult ratio of 4.60 to 1.00 and an average brood size of 10.03 young indicate good reproductive success for this area. Many of the broods observed within the various management areas were of very young birds indicating a number of late hatches occurred in 1964. Procedures for the Colorado State University Statistical Services Laboratory analysis of scaled quail census data were completed in 1963. This has greatly speeded the work of analysis of field data and has resulted in additional needed comparisons. . It has been determined from a statistical analysis of preliminary data by D. C. Bowden that by dividing the individual routes into one-mile strips, the number of mile-unit observations necessary to determine a change in population levels of 25 percent or greater would be 30 observations or more. Some adjustment of route lengths was made based upon this finding. Changes in populations if present may be detected using a paired "t" test according to D. C. Bowden. The mean number of birds observed in each mile are paired with the mean number of birds seen in corresponding miles of last year and similarly for several years averages. In comparing the scaled quail populations within the southeast region in 1964 with populations in 1963 (Table 7), no significant difference was found at the .20 level, although fewer birds per mile were counted. Population comparisons between scaled quail management areas are of greater importance than comparisons between individual routes. The 14 routes in existence in 1964 (Figure 1) are located in two Area Supervisor districts, four scaled quail management areas, and nine Wildlife Conservation Officer districts. �- 74 - Climatic data for the 1964 nesting and brood rearing periods for key stations within scaled quail range including Canon City, Lamar, Las Animas, Pueblo, and Rocky Ford are shown in Tables 8 and 9 courtesy U. S. Department of Commerce, Weather Bureau. The months of April, June, August, and September were generally cooler and drier than normal while May was generally warmer and wetter than normal and July was generally warmer and drier than normal. �Table 1. - The individual Gcaled quail trend routes as run during 1964. Census Unit No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Name Apis.hapa Sandsa~@ Campo Sandsage Carrizo Hountain C.F. & I. Ditch Fowler Mesa Hanover Holly Sandsage La JuntaHigbee Lake Setchfie1d Rule Creek Wetmore Hill Apishapa Hgmt. Area Bessemer Ditch Seven Lakes Hanagement Area Supervisor Area 3 Ave s No , Birds Observed Young Adults Unc1ass. Total Young Brood Birds Hile 0 6 4~00 0.11 29 4 176 10.21 2.84 236 50 35 321 10.26 3.38 0 0 3 0 3 0.00 0.04 269 2 12 6 0 18 6.00 0.27 85.0 370 5 46 32 2 80 9.20 0.94 H. Graham 71.1 248 0 0 3 0 3 0.00 0.04 7 C. Leonard 68.3 265 5 34 12 0 46 6.80 0.68 3 7 A. Heins 58.1 222 8 62 22 0 84 7.75 1.45 3 7 A. Heins 69.8 251 4 22 11 0 33 5.50 0.47 2 6 W. Kent 50.4 272 2 18 16 0 34 9.00 0.68 2 6 J. Cordova 60.9 235 1 7 2 0 9 7.00 0.15 2 6 C. Sealing 39.1 320 6 33 32 0 65 5.50 1.66 2 6 C. Scott 82.4 300 0 0 0 0 0 0.00 0.00 941.5 3,962 71 617 220 41 878 8.69 0.93 W.C.O. Total Hiles Total Hin. Total Broods 7 C. Leonard 55.0 245 1 4 2 4 7 H. Hood 62.1 267 14 143 4 7 H. Hood 95.4 353 23 2 6 W. Kent 78.0 345 4 7 H. Hood 65.9 1 6 J. Stevenson 3 7 3 Totals Averages Average length of routes -- 22.4 miles. Average time for running routes -- 94.3 minutes. Average mph £or all routes -- 14.3 mph. -.:J \J1 �Table 2. - Summer scaled quail population trend data, Management Area 1, 1964. Data For Percent Change (1964) Type of Data 1964 1963 3-Year Ave. From 1963 From 3-Year Ave. Average No. Young/brood 9.20 4.00 7.00 -I- 130.0 -I- 31.4 Birds/mile 0.94 0.22 0.23 .j. 332.1 -I- 318.3 Broods/mile 0.06 0.01 0,01 -I- 494.1 -/-370.6 Birds/min. 0.22 0.06 0.06 I- 273.5 -I- 275.4 Young/adults 1.44 0.22 0.64 -I- 546.9 ..;.. 125.9 Table 3. - Su~~er scaled quail population trend data, Management Area 2, 1964. Data For Percent Change ~1964) Type of Data 1964 1963 3-Year Ave. From 1963 From 3-Year Ave. Average No. Young/brood 6.44 9.00 10.00 0.0 - 10.0 Birds/mile 0.36 0.37 1.53 - 21.5 Broods /mile 0.03 0.01 0.07 ...;.. 18.8 - 81.1 - 78.7 Birds/min. 0.08 0.07 0.31 - 14.3 Young/ adul ts 1.09 0.47 2.29 I- 100.0 - 80.8 - 50.6 0\ �Table 4. - Summer scaled quail population trend data, Management Area 3, 1964. Percent Change (1964) Data For From 3-Year Ave. From 1963 3-Year Ave. 1963 1964 Type of Data - 7.3 - 4.1 0.05 - 31.4 - 20.3 0.19 0.14 ~ 26.7 -/- 0.7 2.28 1.88 +- 7.2 -/- 30.1 Average No. Young/brood 6.78 7.19 7.31 Birds/mile 0.53 0.78 0.56 Broods /mile 0.06 0.07 Birds/min. 0.14 Young/adults 2.44 - 5.8 -I- 18.4 ~ Table 5. - Summer scaled quail population trend data, Management Area 4, 1964. Percent Change (1964~ From 3-Year Ave. From 1963 Type of Data 1964 Data For 3-Year Ave. 1963 Average No. Young/brood 10.03 8.33 7.86 -/- 20.3 + 27.6 Birds /mile 2.31 2.47 2.22 - 6.4 -/- Broods /mile 0.17 0.16 0.13 -I- 8.4 -I- 32.8 Birds/min. 0.58 0.59 0.53 - 2.1 -/- Young/adults 4.60 2.29 2.03 -I- 101.2 3.8 9.1 -I- 126.7 �Table 6. - Summer scaled quail population trend data, Southeast Region, 1964. Type of Data 1964 Data For 1963 3-Year Ave. Average No. Young/brood 8.69 7.83 7.95 Percent Change (1964) From 1963 From 3-Year Ave. -I- 15.1 -I- 13.5 --.J Birds/mile 0.93 1.20 1.16 - 11.9 - 8.8 Broods /mile 0.08 0.09 0.07 - 2.8 -/-. 15.1 Birds/min. 0.22 0.29 0.28 - 10.1 - 7.2 Young/adults 2.80 2.04 1.96 -I- 51.8 -I- 58.4 CO �Table 7. - A comparison of the me,n numbers of scaled quail counted per mile along eleven trend routes during 1963 and 1964.1 Census Hean birds per mile Student "t" Degrees Significant at 1963 Unit 1964 Value Freedom .20 level? 1 0.10 0.11 - 0.22 36 No 2 3.99 2.93 2.07 40 Yes 3 2.17 3.47 - 5.33 60 Yes 4 0.50 0.04 3.58 50 Yes 5 0.38 0.27 1.30 41 No I 6 0.22 0.95 - 4.19 51 Yes 7 0.10 0.04 1.38 46 Yes 8 1.49 0.67 3.88 47 Yes 9 1.39 1.47 - 0.27 38 No 10 0.48 0.41 0.57 45 No 11 0.29 0.71 - 1.95 28 No Southeast Region 1.064 1.066 - 0.09 502 No --J \0 I 1/ Computations by D. C. Bowden and CSU Statistical Services Laboratory. �Table 8. - Climatic data, Key stations within April scaled quail range, April through June, S ta tion AVe. Dept. Norm. Total Dept. Norm. May Temp. Pp t . Dept. Dept. Ave. Norm. Total Norm. Canon City Lamar Las Animas Pueblo Rocky Ford 51.6 51.6 51.7 49.5 50.6 - 0.1 - 1.2 - 2.5 - 1.2 - 1.7 0.48 1.07 1.17 0.03 0.46 - 1.28 - 0.23 - 0.03 - 1.15 - 0.99 62.3 65.0 64.3 61.3 62.8 :r eJIlp , Table 9. - Climatic Pp t , data, key stations within July Station Canon City Larttaf' tas Animas Puebio R6eky F6td - - tnf6rmatien 1.44 0.77 0.02 0.l3 0.18 scaled quail range, July through September, 1964.!/ 0.03 4.57 2.57 0.08 - 0.17 Total Dept. Norm. August Temp. Ppt. Dept. Dept. Ave. Norm. Total Norm. 78.4 82.2 81.4 78.8 19.2 1.73 0.32 0.95 0.73 1. 22 0.24 - 1.53 - 0.88 - 1.09 - 0.52 73.0 76.0 75.7 73.4 73.7 -- 2.6 3.1 2.3 2.3 2..4 Pp t , - 1.3 - 1.4 - 1.5 - 1.2 - 1.2 0.19 0.42 1.10 2.70 1.01 - 1.58 - 1.65 - 0.60 0.85 - 0.69 ...•.•-'- .•..-.-,..-~.-~.,.... eeuttesy u. S. Department June Temp. P~t. Dept. Dept. Ave. Norm. Total Norm. - 1.3 - 1.1 - 2.6 - 1.7 - 0.7 2.10 6.97 4.84 1.88 1.85 Temp. Dept. Ave. Norm. .... -.- ".-._.. ..•..--~----.,~.•... .. ,....•....- ... 1/ 1.7 2.1 - 0.1 0.7 1.1 U 1964 ... of Commerce, Weather Bureau. 68.8 72.4 72.0 69.4 71.2 0.32 - 1.30 - 1.43 - 1.09 - 1;08 g> September Pp t , Temp. Dept. Dept. Ave. Norm. Total Norm. 65.7 66.8 - 1.3 - 1.8 0.25 0.96 - 0.65 - 0.12 67.1 66.2 0.5 - 0.5 1.11 0.41 0.27 - 0.66 �r>T ORADO -- I:1M"'"' --------j' . I ",.~ -, -- ~j'<KSON -.<, ---,- ...., "'~I' ,.~..., •••• ".:_;i ••• I -- r ._ _~ oK6vlimp ~,,, '\ - '.~. '_._. 1, "n OJI/.!O PWI'()hIO . ~ FIrm!,"; ''--wis7iiNar .. _ . ----ry;;UMA .'4, os . oM '. H _ ---1'\., ,11,,",01 0 , 1i~l.tX{ I J. p,,'''' ,,~,t Y,,,n:J' 0 0 081 A~ I o"••/~' . i -' , --'.. _ I.L {;HliLlPS 0 II , ._, ! _._' .~ ,-,. ~N •• 06ro . op,,1z I ----.-,.;&T-- ,. --'---=-="' r-/'---~--ou" $""-~'R J, ---------rscMV{/CL..,~ ---'LOGAN --- I \ ".,,,,,. <r •• 0 W I ~, I I I '. """I ¥o"?, '<'5'~'" oJ"'" I I OC""o~~ ~.-.-.-. ""~:rbondol. --- KIOWA - o"•.••.• ~c.'l •MeSA QM'(>/u"" ~~ 0",," .,...-_,,"'/' I . OCL TA ' IT ./ "~;~' ~f' oE~Ir" ./ Q/(J,"n i ._._"W -~ r , ~ J _ c'~_1 ~ ' 'if'm 0· •• 10 oVl. 1. OUNA1<J. _"" I !sAb{.lAC'Hr ' __ . i . ~u". .-' _l~,- / ••• "" »a ~'" ' ,-,- ~~'V, ",,;;;,_, \ .\.0#"',. 'f-, •• " • "....., t,_,.".. - I' ._,,- I:U-oii I!f\ I ;'G'~';-:"""r /~I' / ",y- ",. ~>-" _. •• _" _. error 0""'1' f r-'. .N,., , _ -j ""~f",,,,,,,,, "'" P.>< •••• N.. (tb<>J/Q'(Q/" \ -.-.-.~ , Aor!.n I Ih-j~N'(j{.lFL '-'--'-' ,-- ,._~ oc-...•r~ J' oV"s,·m C ••" "'-:::.'--j I ----,-j I' '-7.~ , I ' ••-- ~ONr(1os£ , 4UHUNQrQN O'4~v~ I I .._.' __ ----~-.-.7PIrXIN .~,- ~ L..- _ :::::::._ .~",, ,.,.,. .••. _ 5 Figure 1. c1 I .__ . units 1vith~n 0teen sea e rIdLocation of :ou~ ur management areas. quail census "i _ _ l,. 'I \ '" .1 _ ')!.,,- lJ ! -..f::.~_~ _. Mol"''', ..l"'J -1- "~ _ _j ".' , -- ! �- 82 - Prepared by: Date: Donald M. Hoffman Assoc. Wildl. Researcher April, 1965 Approved by: Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �- 83 - JOB CO}~LETION RESEARCH S ta te of Project REPORT PROJECT SEGNENT .:..CO.:..L=..O:..,:RA=D:..,:O=-_ No. H-37-R-18 9 Game Bird Survey Hork Plan No. Blue Grouse Title of Job: Summarization Period Covered: April 4 Job No. of Blue Grouse Studies 1, 1964, through Harch 31, 1965 ABSTRACT The manuscript entitled, The Blue Grouse in Colorado, has been re-editecl and delivered to the Department editor. Probable date of publication can not be estimated, but hopefully w Ll L occur dur Lng segment 19 of Federal Aid Project W-37-R, or before March 31, 1966. Recommendations: Objectives: Techniques Prepared Date: None To complete Used: by: and publish results of blue grouse studies. (1) Proof and revise blue grouse manuscripts. (2) Attend workshops, policy on grouse. Glenn E. Rogers Assistant Wildlife Researcher J\pr:Ll, 19(i'5 answer que s t Lonna Lr c s , and Approved by: Lo rmu Ln t c l",urence E. As s Ls t ant; lUonl;]n Df.r cc t o r , Rc s c.i r ch Ferd C. Klc'inschn:itz Federal Aid Coord inn tor ��- 85 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO ------~~~==~-------------Game Bird Survey W-37-R-18 Project No. Work Plan No. --~~------------------10 Study of Hungarian Adaptability Job No. 1 Period Covered: April 1, 1964 to March 31, 1965. Personnel: Partridge Harold M. Swope, Ted D. McKinney, Harry Dobbs, Corrin Davidson, Charlie Brown, Gurney Crawford and local ranchers. ABSTRACT Following the February and March Hungarian partridge releases in 1964 (135 in Douglas Lake area north of Fort Collins and 40 at Round Bottom site southwest of Craig) nearly all of the birds disappeared until late summer. Several verified broods were observed in both areas during August and September. On March 23, 1965, an additional shipment of 130 pen raised Huns was received from Oregon. The 124 survivors were released at the Round Bottom site. Recommendations: Additional flocks of Hungarian partridges should be released in these two trial areas as soon as they can be raised at the experimental nursery--now under construction. Objectives: (1) To release Hungarian (2) To determine partridges in the State. success of intrd,duction. Techniques Used: It was re.1dily found that standard roadside census techniques were of little use in observing Huns. The intensive search of large areas of cover on foot produced very few observations. Most birds were seen by accident while observers were working or passing through the area. Local ranchers were again interviewed. �- 86 - Release techniques were similar to those used a year ago. About half the birds were held in a small pen for several days while the remainder were released in the same area. Feed was scattered around the release area until the snow disappeared. A graduate student from Colorado State University was assigned to a study of the Hungarian partridge in the Douglas Lake area. His work included the compilation of basic life history data. A publication in the special report series is planned as a result of his work. Findings: No recorded Hungarian partridge observations were made from March 31, 1964 until July 30, 1964, when 15 young and one adult were flushed by S,vope near the Douglas Lake release site. The young were about two-thirds grown. During August and September at least three brood observations were made in the Douglas Lake area. Conservation officer Gurney Crawford saw a covey of 16 Huns, ten of which were young birds nearly grown, on September 3, 1964. Several ranchers reported rare to frequent observations of these birds ranging from one to 300. Some of these reports were surely valid but others are questionable. Graduate Student Ted McKinney observed a covey of six Huns near Douglas Lake on January 9, 1965. In the Round Bottom area southwest of Craig even better reproductive success was reported. Conservation officer Charles Brown saw about 15 Huns, mostly young, while checking deer hunters on August 22. About the same time a rancher (Charles Counts) combining wheat in the area flushed approximately 30 Huns from his grain field. He said most of these birds were young ones The Craig area experienced one of the severest winters on record, from the standpoint of snow depth, in 1964-65. Snow depths of from two to five feet persisted over most of the area for at least three months. The effect of these deep, persistent snows on the Huns has been undetermined, but heavy losses or total annihilation are feared. In contrast the Douglas Lake area experienced a very mild winter. On Harch 23, 1965, 130 Huns (six of these died in transit) were received from the Oregon State Game Commission. These were immediately transported to the Round Bottom site and about half of them released. The remainder were held for several days and also released. This plant was delayed six weeks from initial arrangements because of the deep snow persisting in the area. Even on the release data there was still two feet of snow covering much of the ground but the south facing slopes were bare. Food was scattered around the release site until the snow melted, however, heavy, wet snows continued well into April and may have been detrimental to these pen raised birds. As happened after the 1964 releases the birds just seemed to disappear. �- 87 -. Ted McKinney asked sixteen states and Canadian provinces for information on Hun.partridge census methods. None of them reported a specific method for observing and counting the birds. Several reported that they count Huns while making surveys for other upland game species. Searching for Huns in the vast release site areas certainly gives the field worker the feeling he is hunting for the proverbial needle in the haystack. Prepared Date: by: Harold M. Swope Assoc. Wildl. Researcher April, 1965 Approved by: Wayne W. Sand fort Game Research Chief Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator ��- 89 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO ------~~~~~-------------- Project No. W-37-R-IS Work Plan No. 10 Job No. 2 Period Covered: ~ Personnel: Game Bird Survey Experimental Partridges Breeding of Hungarian April 1, 1964 to March 31, 1965. Harold M. Swope and Willis G. Mansfield ABSTRACT Pen construction at the experimental nursery and research facility northeast of Fort Collins was not completed in time to initiate this study. Temporary pens had to be constructed to hold the twelve breeders on hand. Arrangements have been made to obtain additional experimental stock when pen construction has been completed. Recommendations: Fifty pen raised Hungarian partridge should be obtained from Oregon to insure plenty of experimental stock when we are cleared to go ahead with the project. Even after construction has been completed some special runways and pens will have to be improvised to allow pairing off in the unique fashion of the Hun. Objective: To develop breeding techniques to obtain trial flocks of Huns for introduction into previously selected areas. Techniques Used: None of the procedures were put into use because no facilities were available for conducting the study. Findings: It now appears that pen construction will be completed about September 1, 1965. This will allow scheduled breeding experiments to commence in the spring of 1966. �- 90 - Temporary pens were constructed to hold the twelve Huns transferred to the Fort Collins nursery with the closure of the Rocky Ford Experimental Bird Farms. These pens were adequate for holding but were nowhere sufficient for conducting the breeding experiments contemplated. Arrangements have been made to obtain additional when the Fort Collins pens have been completed. pen raised stock from Oregon Information from others engaged in propagating Hu~garian partridge advises that the birds must be free to select their own mates. Reportedly the female picks out the male of her choice and herds him to an isolated area. This requires a special enclosure consisting of a runway with small pens opening from it. As the hen directs her mate from the runway into one of the small pens a door is closed and a pair that should mate and produce young is "captured". Forced mating apparently results in little or no reproduction. In view of this unique mating situation some special improvisions will be necessary before the breeding experiments can actually be started. Prepared Date: by: Harold M. Swope Assoc. Wildl. Researcher April, 1965 Approved by: Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �- 91 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH SEGMENT PROJECT State of C=-O::.;L=.;O:..:RA=D:...;O=--_ Project No. W-37-R-18 Game Bird Survey Work Plan No. 12 Job No. 10 Relationships of the Productivity and Distribution of Wild Turkeys on the Uncompahgre Plateau to the Environment 1, 1964 to April 1, 1965. Period Covered: Personnel: April Glenn Rogers and Roger Wilson conducted brood counts, sampled vegetation and helped test telemetry equipment. Richard DeHaven and Don Hoffman also helped test telemetry gear and trapped turkeys. To these people, and to Wildlife Conservation Officers and Biologists who devoted time to this study, I express my sincere appreciation. ABSTRACT Feed stations were established during the winter to concentrate turkeys. Two hundred and eighty-two birds, one hundred and ninty-six less than last year, were seen inthe vicinity of feed stations. The decrease in the winter count was probably a result of mild weather. Apparently some birds were not forced into the areas normally frequented by turkeys during winter. Sixty-one wild turkeys were trapped, marked, and released in six areas on the Uncompahgre Plateau. Most birds were marked with wing markers, "Jiffy" wing bands, and leg bands. Movements were primarily determined by observing the travel of marked birds; some of which moved 7, 11, 15, 18, and 24 air miles from sites where the birds were marked and released. At least three turkeys from wintering areas on one side of the plateau crossed to the opposite side of the plateau to winter in 1964-65. Estimates of the sex and age ratio of the turkey kill were obtained by finding confidence limits from the check station sample of the kill. During 1964 turkey seasons, between 13 and 52 of the birds killed were toms, from 31 to 89 hens, and 109 to 168 poults were killed. �- 92 - Productivity was estimated using a method similar to the Lincoln Index. The accuracy of this method depends upon the fulfillment of a number of assumptions, some. of which may not be true. Even though assumption may not be fulfilled, checks based on the actual number of turkeys counted during the winter of 1963-64, expected nesting sucess, and the likelihood that there are more toms present in the population than estimates predicted, indicate that the estimates of the turkey population derived from the use of various ratios are conservative. Nesting success was probably better than 30 per cent. The population before hunting contained over 1,107 turkeys, 27 broods average 7 young per hen with brood, and no more than 20 per cent of the total population was harvested. Climatological data has been collected for several months from three weather stations consisting of a maximum-minimum thermometer, a hygrothermograph, an anemometer, and a rain guage. Vegetative types within the summer and winter ranges of the wild turkey were obtained from field observation and Forest Service vegetative type maps. The area of each type in the Love Mesa and Pickett Corral areas was determined. Species composition of the understories within each type has been determined for about half of the types to be sampled. Radio telemetry equipment is being tested to enable the recording of turkey activity for correlation with events in the environment and to determine the sources of mortality. The radio equipment will also be used to locate turkey nests and determine nesting success. Other information incidental to the study was gathered. Recommendations: If less than 20 per cent of the turkey population is being harvested, birds are probably. going to waste. This wasted surplus might be salvaged if turkeys could be concentrated during the turkey seasons. Hunters might then be directed to the turkey concentrations making it possible to achieve the desired harvest. Food plots should be established to see if turkeys can be concentrated by this method. Objectives: (1) To determine the size, distribution, and productivity wild turkey population on the Uncompahgre Plateau. of the (2) Record movements of wild turkeys and determine how environmental factors affect these movements. (3) Determine the sex and age structure of the turkey kill on the Uncompahgre Plateau to provide estimates of total harvest and size of the turkey population. (4) Determine the vegetative types present on the wild turkey summer and winter range and the species composition and abundance of food producing species within each type. Also determine the elevation, describe topography, and record certain climatic factors on part of the better turkey summer and winter range. �- 93 - Techniques Used: Environmental studies are sometimes thought of as basic research often having no immediate practical application in management, yet management strives to harvest the game crop to maintain a balance between the species and its environment. This goal cannot be achieved without a reasonable accurate estimate of productivity and an understanding of the environment. Another job of management is control of limiting factors. But before a limiting factor can be controlled, it must be recognized. Recognition of limiting factors is almost impossible without a thorough knowledge of the environment. The primary objective of this study is to increase our understanding of the turkey and its environment. Census.--The size of turkey population was determined by counting turkeys in the vicinity of established feed stations consisting of baled oat hay and while oats in wintering areas on the Uncompahgre Plateau. The number of turkeys seen in the vicinity of the feed stations by Department personnel and other reliable persons was recorded. Visits were made to other winter areas where turkeys were reported and birds were counted where possible. Counts were made from December to May. Distribution and Movement.--Techniques used to determine distribution involved field observations, reports from reliable sources, and location of kills made by hunters contacted during the hunting season. Movements were determined by the location of turkeys which were trapped, marked, and released in wintering areas and with the aid of telemetry equipment. Standard slat-type turkey traps were used to capture birds in Big Dominguez Canyon, Spring Creek Canyon, Hill Ranch, and at the Pickett Corral. Turkeys were trapped with the cannon net at the Hill Ranch, and near the San Miguel River between Norwood and Hiway 90. Turkeys were sexed and aged according to methods described by Keizer and Kozicky (1943). Most birds were marked with National "Jiffy" wing bands, aluminum leg bands, and wing markers similar to those described by Knowlton, Michael, and Glazner (1964). Effects of Environmental Factors Upon Movement.--Radio-tracking equipment was obtained and tested. New and better equipment will be used to locate turkeys in order to determine the effect of environmental factors on movement and to determine nesting success. Sex and Age Structure of the Kill.--The sex and age structure of the turkey kill was obtDined by conducting hunter checks during the turkey seasons. The Uncompahgre Plateau was divided into five areas which were patrolled by one or two men on October 3-4 and November 21-22. Check stations were established on the roads most often traveled in each area. Additional hunter checks were conducted during the remainder of the October and November seasons. During the first two days of the spring turkey season (May 2 and 3) hunters were checked on the north end of the Divide Road, in the vicinity of Pickett Corral in Escalante Canyon, on nn d around 25 He sa , and near the Hill Ranch on Colorado Highway 90. Acld i.ti onn I hunter checks we rc made in various parts of the study area throughout the spring scn son . �- 94 - Productivity.--Productivity method involved: the winter was calculated populations by two methods. 1. Censusing 2. Determining the average number of young per hen with brood by conducting brood counts during July, August, and September from vehicle and on foot. 3. Increasing the turkey harvest by liberalizing the bag limit in an effort to reduce the winter population below the probably carrying capacity to insure suitable habitat for all birds surviving the hunting season and making it possible to assume that all surplus turkeys were harvested (if mortality is transferable). 4. Estimating the size of the pre-hunting season turkey population (less predation, crippling loss, etc.) by adding the number of birds killed by hunters to the number of birds counted the following winter. 5. Estimating the number of poults in the population by subtracting number of birds counted the previous winter from the pre-hunting season population. 6. Estimating the number of successful nesting hens in the population by dividing the average number of young per hen with brood into the number of poults in the population. The second method used to determine lowing ratios and equations. 1. Number of adults A No. Adults 2. Number in the population required before hunting before hunting C = A+B (C): the the use of the fol- (A): Birds in Population Birds Killed Adult Population No. Adults Killed Total turkey population described. before hunting No. Marked No. Marked B No. Poults Killed 3. productivity in the population Killed of poults as previously The first (B): �- 95 - 4. Number of hens in the population D No. Marked No. Marked No. Hens Killed 5. Number of successful E 6. Nesting success F = 7. before nesting (D): Birds in Population Birds Killed hens in population (E): No. Poults in Population No. Young/Hen with Brood (B) (F): No. Successful Nesting No. Hens in Population Per cent of total population harvested Kill G = ----------~~~---------Turkey Confidence limits Bailey (1951). hunting for many Population Before of the ratios were Hens (D) (E) (G): _ Hunting found with a formula used by Vegetative Types Present.--Vegetative types were determined from vegetative type maps obtained from the Forest Service. Each vegetative type was planimetered to determine area. Species composition of the understory was found for 12 vegetative type by sampling the various understories. The coverage of the understory was determined by stretching a 10 meter string in a straight line perpendicular to the drainage. A square hoop containing an area of 0.1 meter was placed at the first meter mark and the coverage of each plant species within the hoop estimated. The hoop was placed at each of the 10 one meter marks on the string and coverage estimated. One transect consisted of ten 0.1 meter coverage estimates. One hundred and fifty-four transects were run. Abundance of Food Producing Species.--Abundance of food producing species will be determined by comparison of coverage information with crop contents. Crop contents from turkeys were collected during the hunting seasons in the study area and are being examined by U. S. Fish and Wildlife Service personnel. Physical Factors.--Climatological data was collected from three weather stations consisting of a maximum - minimum thermometer, a hygrothermograph (housed in standard weather shelters) an anemometer, and a rain guage. One station was located about one-half mile inside the Uncompahgre National Forest boundary west of the Pickett Corral road. Another station was at Pickett Corral. The third station was situated on the lower part of Love Mesa. ��- 97 - RELATIONSHIPS OF THE PRODUCTIVITY AND DISTRIBUTION OF Wn.D TURKEYS ON THE UNCOMPAHGRE PIATEAU TO THE ENVIRONMENT Gary T. Myers Census Turkeys in the study area have been counted by various methods during the winter Only 282 turkeys were seen last winter (Figure 1) for the past three years. counted in 1962-63 and the 478 turkeys seen in compared to the 485 birds 1963-64. Conclusion.--Adding the kill, 218 birds, to the population after hunting, 282 turkeys, indicates that there were 500 birds in the pre-hunting season population (assuming no mortality and that most birds in winter areas were count ed ) . This population figure is not realistic as 478 birds were counted the previous winter and 190 poults on the plateau were counted. If all broods were counted during the summer and' if most adults were censused in the winter, there could have been a 24 per cent loss among adult and young birds and the population would have been 502 turkeys prior to the hunting season. Obviously the winter census for 1962-63 was not complete probably because of mild winter temperatures. Green grass was 'present in part of the winter range in early February. Movements and Distribution Figure 2 shows the location of banding sites, the general distribution, and minimum distance of movement of banded birds from these sites. Sixteen marked birds were killed during the 1964 hunting seasons (Appendix A). Eleven of the birdsjkilled were marked at Pickett Corral. A tom, tagged in February, 1963, was shot during the May season on Love Mesa seven miles from Pickett Corral. Three hens ma rke d in April, 1964 were killed. One was shot at the upper end of the Love Mesa Road in October. The other two were killed 14 miles apart on November 22. One was killed at the Templeton Ranch, 18 miles from Pickett Corral. The other was harvested near the lower end of the road to Houser Cow Camp, about 15 miles from Pickett Corral. Another hen from Pickett Corral, marked in February 1964, was killed at the upper end of the Love Mesa Road in October 1964. Other birds from Pickett Corral we re killed within three miles of the banding site. �- 98 - (12) ••• (6) (7) :.JL11?1 (6 ) • RIDGEWAY • (16) Figure L--Distribution of 282 wild turkeys on the Uncompahgre Plateau during the winter of 1964-65e The number of turk8ys counted in each area appears in parenthesis. �- 99 - • NATURITA :.." • I ? 1J Figure 2.--Location of all banding sites in 'tine :study area, general direction and minimum distance of movement of bandedlbli.rrdsfrom these areas 9 �- 100 - A turkey marked in March 1964 near Ridgway, Colorado, was killed during November, 1964 in Hanks Valley. This bird was wintering 18 air miles from the site where it was marked. . Two birds tagged in Dominguez Canyon in March 1963 and January 1964 were killed in November a few hundred yards from the capture site. Similarly, two birds marked at the Hill Ranch in January, 1964 were killed in the vicinity of the banding site in November, 1964. Additional marked birds were observed in the study area. A tom wearing Turquoise back tag number six was seen in the San Miguel river bottom about five miles above Highway 90 on March 5, 1965. The bird was banded on February 15, 1964 a few miles southwest of Montrose, Colorado, in Spring Creek Canyon. Minimum movement was 24 miles. Another bird marked on Log Hill Mesa was seen at Government Springs by a Government Trapper during the summer. This bird had moved seven miles. One hen from Pickett Corral was seen at the upper end of the road to Calhoun Cow Camp on September 11, 1964. The hen was eleven miles from Pickett Corral. Glenn Rogers saw two tagged toms on August 5, 1964, which may have been wearing white back tags, on the Divide Road three miles north of T-Bone Spring Camp Ground. Birds with white back tags were marked in March, 1963 near Trails End Ranch on 25 Mesa. Numerous other marked birds were seen near banding sites during the winter of 1964-65. The winter distribution of wild turkeys is seen in Figure 1. Nearly all winter concentrations were in the Pinyon Juniper forest type. Turkeys began leaving the wintering areas shortly after April 8, 1964, when turkeys were captured at Pickett Corral. By May 2, when the spring turkey season opened, a majority of the birds were in or on their way to t he summer range. During the latter part of July and all of August, reliable counts on 27 broods were obtained. Brood rearing areas appear in Figure 3. Most broods were reported in the Aspen and Pond~rosa forest types. Turkeys remained primarily in the Ponderosa and Aspen types until the acorn'crop began to fall, in early September. During the October turkey season, hunters killed five birds in the Oak Brush forest type, three in the Ponderosa Pine, and two in the Aspen type. In November, twenty-seven birds were killed in the Pinyon Juniper forest type and four in the Aspen and Ponderosa forest types. Most birds were in the wintering areas by the November season and remained there until about the middle of April. Effect of Environmental Factors Upon Movements The activities of wild turkeys must be continuously recorded to successfully correlate activity with events in the environment. Radio tracking devices promise to provide the means of determining the activity of wild turkeys in their natural habitat with minimum disturbance. Telemetry equipment may also enable the location of turkey nests to determine nesting success. �- 101- Figure 3~--Known brood rearing areas during the suwner of 1964. �- 102 - Attempts were made on the ground, during the last of May and the first of June, to locate turkeys instrumented with transmitters in April, 1964. The Channel Maste~ Receiver with the 7FM Antenna and the Eddystone Receiver with the Scala 2CA-S antenna was used in an effort to locate birds wearing transmitters. The area from Pickett Corral to the top of the Love Mesa Road and a portion of both canyons on either side of Love Mesa was covered. No signals were heard. On June 10, 1964 the area was flown in an effort to locate the instrumented birds. The Channel Master Receiver and the Mark Mobile 7FM Antenna were employed. The receiving equipment was first tested by placing a transmitter in open flat terrain. Signals from the transmitter were received about one mile away at an elevation of 1,000 feet above the transmitter. Since the equipment worked satisfactorily, strips about one-half mile apart were flown over all areas where turkeys fromPickett Corral were expected to be. No transmitters were located so additional tests were run. A transmitter was placed under a tree on the side of a small draw. The signal was not received through the side of the draw, but was heard about a mile away on other open side of the hill with the Channel Master and the 7FM Antenna from a plane about 1,000 feet above the transmitter. As an additional test, Roger Wilson hid a transmitter on the upper end of Love Mesa in the Ponderosa and Aspen forest types where some turkeys nest. Terrain in the area was rolling and the vegetation relatively dense. The receiver operator and pilot were told that the transmitter operated somewhere between 98 and 100 megacycles and was located within a ten mile area. As before, strips one-half mile wide were flown over Love Mesa. The transmitter was heard on the first pass made within a half mile of the transmitter. The predicted location of the transmitter from the air was within one-quarter mile of the actual location. Additional strips one-half mile wide, both parallel and perpendicular to drainages were flown. An area of about 125 square miles was covered in four hours of flying. No signals from transmitters were heard. One of the hens instrumented at Pickett Corral on April 8, 1964 was seen at Pf.ckett Corral on April 15, 1965. She was feeding in an open field. The hen had a transmitter on her back and a band on her leg. No other identifying markers could be seen. She had carried 5-6 ounces of radio equipment for one year. An attempt to regain the transmitter and timer failed. A miniature radio was attached to a hen in Spring Creek Canyon on January 21, 1965. The hen was marked with black and orange wing marker number 31, "Jiffy" wing band number 90, and leg band number T-556. The last joint of her right middle toe was missing making it possible to distinguish her tracks in the snow. A transmitter without timer, was attached to the turkey as described in a previous job completion report. Upon release, the hen acted as if her neck was rung. She was caught by har£d, the transmitter removed and replaced using �- 103 - plastic tape. The bird was released again. She ran about thirty yards and hid in a hole in a nearby stream bank. Personnel left the area and returned about an hour later. The hen ran from the hole and hid elsewhere in the creek bottom. Signals from the transmitter were monitored for a short time that evening. Attempts to follow the movements of this hen were made again the following day using the Eddystone Receiver with the Scala 2CA-S and the Channel Master Receiver with a home-made loop antenna and the 7FM Antenna. Signals were easily picked up but the turkeys exact location could not be determined. The loop antenna used with the Channel Master Receiver was not directional enough and should be replaced. The 7FM Antenna also is not directional. In addition, signals from the transmitter approached line of sight causing the bird to be lost behind hills and canyon walls. Signals from the transmitter were followed for about six hours. Then the turkey flew from the side of the canyon wall and the signal was not received again. The area was checked later and no signals could be heard, the bird was not seen, and her track could not be found in the snow. Apparently she was either dead or had left the canyon since all other birds in the area were seen. Transmitters operating at 94.6 mc were attached to the backs of two hen turkeys at Pickett Corral on April 8, 1965. One of the transmitters, equipped with a timer, was expected to operate morning and evening from 7:00 until 11:00 for about 20 days. The other operated continuously and had an expected life of six days. Results, summarized in Table 1, were better than expected. Both of the transmitters attached to turkeys were pulsed. Signals were emitted from two to four seconds apart. The slow pulsing made it difficult to determine signal variations due to changes in the activity of instrumented birds. And, because of the long interval' between pulses, difficulty was also encountered during aerial location attempts (until exact frequencies of the transmitters was determined). One transmitter operated continuously for 'at least 8~ days. During this period, 0.48 inches of moisture fell in the form of hail, sleet, and snow. Temperatures ranged from 20-60 degrees Fahrenheit. Range of the transmitters varied depending upon terrain. Ground to ground reception in rough country was sometimes less than one-quarter mile. In other areas, signals were received three-quarters mile away with the Channel Master Receiver. Greater range was achieved from the air. Under ideal conditions, signals can be heard eight miles away. One mile range, air to ground, can be expected in the roughest terrain, while two mile reception seems to be about normal in most canyons on the Uncompahgre Plateau. A transmitter powered by a small, rechargeable battery and a solar cell was tested for several days during the first part of April. The transmitter operated during daylight hours (except on extremely cloudy days). Theoretical life of the transmitter is more than one year. Its range is slightly less than �Table l.--Summary of radio tracking experiments with wild turkeys on the Uncompahgre Plateau during April, 1965. Attempt No. Date Time Transmission Equipment 1 4-8 10:30-11: 30 a.m. Ground to Ground Channel Master Loop Antenna General location of birds determined Turkeys leaving Escalante Canyon via Dry Mesa, 2 4-10 6:00-6:16 a.m. Ground to Ground Channel Master Loop Antenna General location of birds determined. Turkey near roost tree. 3 4-10 6:30-12:00 Ground to Ground Marconi-Eddystone Scala Antenna General location of birds determined. Turkeys traveling from roost to trap site (~mi.). Birds left area at . 12:00 a.m. to evade hunters. 1:00-1:30 p.m. Air to Ground Marconi-Eddystone Diapole Antenna No signal heard. a m, i L. 4-12 Results 5 4":13 3:30-7:30 p.m. Ground to Ground Channel Master Loop Antenna General and exact location of birds determined. Birds feeding and loafing. Toms with hens strutting. Hunter shot at tom (.22 hornet-missed). Birds left area to evade hunter. Birds picked up again near roost. Toms gobbling in roost. 6 4-14 6:-12:00 a.m. Ground to Ground Channel Master Loop Antenna No signal heard. 7 4-15 2:30-8:00 p.m. Ground to Ground Channel Master Loop Antenna General and exact location of birds determined. Turkeys feeding and loafing. Toms strutting. Birds travel to roost. Toms strutting beneath roost and gobbling in roost. I-' o -I=" �Table 1.--Summary af radio tracking expe.rfrne nt s with wild turkeys on the Uncompahgre Plateau during April,1,965. (continued) Attempt No. Date Time 8 4-15 3:00-5:00 p.m. TransmiS's'ion A ir: to' G.round Equipment Marconi-Eddystone Diapole Antenna Results Exact location of birds determined. Turkeys loafing and feeding. Exact location of two hidden transmitters also determined. 9 4-16 4:00-7:00 p.m. Ground,t.o Ground Channel Master Loop Antenna General and exact location of turkeys determined. Birds feeding and evading hunters. Birds did not go to usual roost site. 10 4-17 5:30-7:30 Groum1 to Ground Channel Master Loop Antenna No signal heard. Gro;und tn,Ground Channel Master Loop Antenna No signal heard. e .m, 11 4-20 1:00-7:00 p.m. b V1 �- 106 - that of the transmitters tested on turkeys but greater than the range of the transmitters used in 1964. The weight of this transmitter with batteries, solar cell, and harness will probably be about four ounces. Preliminary tests were so promising that I removed the components from the test board and packaged them for use on a turkey. The package operated for a few hours one evening but stopped working the next day after being left in the rain. Evidently, the components got wet. If well protected, this power package may eliminate the need for a timer. Conclusions.--Receiving systems are still not accurate enough to make positive locations. Tests early this year showed that the loop antenna was not adequately directional. A new loop antenna and a signal strength meter is being built for the Channel Master Receiver by Heist and Madden. The Scala antenna is reasonably directional, but better results might be obtained if a signal strength meter were built for the Eddystone. Tests indicate that the receiving system used in the airplane is satisfactory. On April 15, four transmitters, in unknown areas, were located from the air (two on turkeys and two hidden at Pickett Corral). In each case, the estimated location was within a couple of hundred yards of the actual location. Transmitters were located by signal strength rather than direction. Timers used are unsatisfactory for use on wild turkeys. Transmitters are durable. Their range is adequate, and they are small enough for radio tracking wild turkeys. Battery life can possibly be extended to more than a year by the use of solar cells. As a last resort, additional batteries can be added to increase transmitter life to 25 days or more. Productivity The wild turkey has a potential of producing at almost a 600% rate of increase and 300% rates of increase are often attained (Mosby, 1959). For example, in Montana, 18 turkeys released during the winter of 1954-55 increased to approximately 700 birds in only three years (Eng, 1959). Rates of increase were 361%, 269%, and 400%. Similarly, 28 Merriam's turkeys released in Nebraska boomed to three thousand birds in four years (Suetsugus and Menzel, 1962). Turkeys have had 18 years to build up on the Uncompahgre. Birds were first released on the Plateau in 1946 and were not hunted until 1954, eight years later. A conservative estimate of the turkey population in 1963 indicates that there was at least one turkey for every 970 acres of habitat. This density compares to one bird per 380 acres in Virginia and one bird per 1,024 acres of turkey range in Missouri (Trippensee, 1948). Apparently, turkeys on the Plateau have reached or are nearing saturation, in most areas. �- 107 - Assuming that the turkey population in this area is saturated, management should concentrate on harvesting as much of the turkey population as it will biologically stand. Before this can be done, we must determine how much of the population can be removed without seriously decreasing productivity. Last year, slightly under 30% of the estimated turkey population was killed on the Uncompahgre Plateau. But Florida, in their good areas, can kill 60% of their turkeys (Powell, 1959). Nebraska killed less than 12% (Suetsugu and Menzel, 1962), while Pennsylvania has killed upwards of 75% of the pre-hunting season population by the use of a s t ock Lng program (Roberts, 1959). Considering that the turkey population on the Plateau has a potential to increase to almost 3,000 birds in one year and that only 941 turkeys have been killed on the Plateau since 1954, one wonders if turkeys are not going to waste. Although an increase from 485 to 2,900 birds will probably never be realized, increases to almost 2,000 birds can be expected during good years. If the range will only carry 500 turkeys, and there is evidence that this is true, the population could withstand a 75% reduction. Then again, if the hatch is poor and brood survival low, the population might increase to only 800 birds. In this case, the population could be reduced by only 37%. In 1962, 160 turkeys were killed on the Plateau. Kill the next year increased by 84 birds, yet the base population and hunter success remained constant (Table 2). This increase in the kill without a decrease in the population might indicate that we are underharvesting and that the birds we fail to kill die anyway. Or the increased kill could have been a result of better reproduction in 1963. Hunter success was the same both years. Suppose that we increased the bag limit until the winter population of 480 birds is reduced considerably. This would tell us that no birds were wasted. By adding the number of birds killed by hunters to the number of birds counted during the winter, we would arrive at the total number of birds in the turkey population prior to the hunting season. There would be error in this estimate due to predation, crippling loss, etc. But this error is unimportant, as you will see later. Table 2.--Turkey kill, winter population counts, and hunter success on the Uncompahgre Plateau during 1962, 1963, and 1964. Year Reported Kill Winter Population after hunting Hunter Success (%) 1962 1963 1964 160 244 218 485 478 282 44 45 (Unknown) �- 108 - Suppose there are 500 turkeys in the winter population on the Uncompahgre Plateau and that brood counts the following summer average five young per hen with brood. If 600 turkeys are killed during the season and later, counts show only 400 turkeys on the winter range following the season, the pre-hunting season population must have been about 1,000 turkeys (plus wounding loss, etc.). If the range will carry five hundred turkeys, we know that most birds surviving the hunting season reached the winter grounds. KnOWing that 500 (less birds were adults, there must have been 500 poults in the population. If there were five young per hen with brood, there had to have been about 100 successful nesting hens. Dividing the number of successful ne~ting hens (100) by the total winter population of 500 birds, we find that 20% of the winter population consisted of successful nesting hens. Although this value may change from year to year, it is still a better figure than no figure at all. The bag limit was increased from two to three birds in 1964 in the study area in an attempt to overharvest the turkey population. Only 218 turkeys were killed in 1964 as compared to 244 in 1963. Brood counts indicated that the population prior to the hunting season might have been slightly lower in 1964. Hunter pressure was greater in 1964 than 1963. According to winter counts, only 282 turkeys survived the hunting season. Adding the kill to the population after hunting indicates that there were 500 birds in the pre-hunting season population (assuming no mortality). There were 478 adults in the population the previous winter. Subtracting 478 turkeys from the 500 bird population leaves a population of 22 poults, an impossibility since 28 poults killed by hunters during 1964 were examined at check stations. If there were only 28 poults in the population and broods averaged seven young per hen with poults, which they did, there would have been only 4 successful hens in the population. T>venty-seven different hens with 190 poults were seen in the study area. Apparently the winter census this year was incomplete; so no reliable estimate of the turkey population can be made using the method just outlined. Another method must be employed. Numerous mathematical ratios have been used to estimate the size of animal populations. A simple ratio similar to the "Lincoln Index" can be used to estimate the size of the turkey population on the Uncompahgre Plateau once the sex and age ratio of the kill has been determined. Sex and Age Structure of Kill.--Three turkey seasons were held on the Uncompahgre Plateau during 1964. The first season was held May 2-12. One bearded turkey could be killed with shotguns no larger than 10-guage and no smaller than 20-guage between sunrise and sunset. A longbow capable of casting a hunting arrow at least 130 yards could also be used by hunters. The two other turkey seasons in the study area were held October 3-11, and November 21-29. �~ 109 - Hunters that were unsuccessful during the first season could kill three birds during the second and third seasons combined. Hunters that were successful during the spring season could only kill two birds during the last two seasons (one bird in October and one in November or two in October and none in November or two in November and none in October). No one was permitted to legally kill more than three turkeys during 1964. Weapons and hours were the same during October and November as in the May season. Forty-seven turkeys killed during the three seasons were examined at check stations (Table 3). Of this number, two were of undetermined sex and age. Basing sex and age ratios of the kill on ages of the 45 birds of known sex and age, the kill consisted of 13 per cent toms, 25 per cent hens, and 62 per cent poults. Yet kill figures based on hunter report cards indicate that the kill was comprised of 40 per cent toms, 37 per cent hens, and 23 per cent poults (Figure 4). The relationship between kill figures based on hunter checks and kill figures from hunter report card returns was tested with statistics. The ratio of toms and poults in the reported kill differed significantly from the ratios obtained by use of the check station sample. This difference is due to the hunters inability to sex and age turkeys. Table 3.--Sex and age structure of turkey kill examined by Biologists in the study area in 1964. No birds were checked during spring season. October No. Killed Toms Hens Poults Total 1 2 10 13 Season Per Cent of Kill 8 15 77 100 November No. Killed Season Per Cent of Kill 5 9 18 32 16 28 56 100 Both Seasons Combined No. Per Cent Killed of Kill 6 11 28 45 13 25 62 100 At check stations hunters were asked whether they had killed a tom, hen, or poult. One-third or 12 of 36 turkeys were incorrectly called toms or hens. This small sample indicated (with 20 to 1 odds of being correct) that hunters on the plateau incorrectly sexed or aged somewhere between 44 and 122 turkeys. Since most hunters report the sex and age of kills based on their own judgement, the sex and age composition of the reported kill is inaccurate. Best estimates of the sex and age ratio of the turkey kill can be obtained by determining confidence limits from check station data. The odds are 20 to 1 that somewhere between 13 and 52 toms were killed, 31 to 89 hens were harvested, and 109 to 168 poults were bagged (Figure 5). �r-- ~ ~ ,.- ~ Cd I:%j :;d 0 r- t:j I-- ... .-- r-- t-3 c:: ~ r-- ~ J<l Cf.l :;:: J-f ~ t"I I:'"' I:%j t::; t-- r-~ I- I- ~ lU) .j.J U) CI.l I':l ~ o <l.l H ::r:: 1961 1960 ~ ~ 0 ~ 1962 Figure 4. Composition returns. 1964 1963 KILLED YEAR of the turkey kill on the Uncompahgre Plateau based on hunter report card f-J f-J 0 �- III - Figure 5.--Comparison of sampled, reported, and predicted kill during the 1964 turkey seasons on the Uncompahgre Plateau. The actual kill probably lies somewhere within the black area in the estimated kill columns. 175 n 150 I- '"~..•... UJ :>:. ~ Q) 100 - H ;j E-< r-- c.-. 0 ,....-., 75 l- 50 f- H Q) .D § z ~ ~ I I I II I f ........•....•. ..-- 25 •... '--- ,.-- o n Sarnp1e of Ki11 Hoported Kill Estimated Kill �- 112- The ratio which can be used to estimate the size of the total adult turkey population before hunting assumes that the total adult turkey population prior to hunting is to number of adult birds killed as the number of marked birds in the population is to the number of marked birds killed. Additional assumptions must also be fulfilled in order for the population estimate to be accurate. The assumptions are that: 1. The total kill, based on hunter report card returns is accurate. (Some people question the reliability of kill data based on hunter report card returns. Yet no better method for determining total kill has been developed. If, the kill figures are accurate, 218 turkeys were killed on the plateau in 1964). 2. The sex and age ratio of the total kill is the same as the sex and age ratio of the sampled kill. (This assumption is not unreasonable since 21 per cent of the total kill was checked. If 13,3 per cent of the birds killed were toms, 24.5 per cent hens, and 62.2 per cent poults; the kill consisted of 29 toms, 53 hens, and 136 poults. If 136 poults were killed, the remaining 82 birds killed were adults), 3, There is no movement of turkeys into or out of the study area. (Some movement into and out of the study area probably occurs on the north and south ends of the plateau. However, no marked birds have been seen outside the study area to indicate that this movement occurs.) 4. Marked birds are evenly distributed in the population. (Tagged turkeys have been seen as far as 33 miles from banding sites. In addition birds marked on one side of the plateau have been killed on the opposite side of the plateau leading one to conclude that tagged birds are evenly distributed.) 5. Natural mortality and mortality due to hunting is the same among marked and unmarked birds. (Mortality due to hunting is probably the same among marked and unmarked birds because most hunters do not realize they have killed a marked bird until they pick it up. Natural mortality may be greater among marked birds than unmarked birds since they might be easier to see.) 6. Hunters report all marked birds killed. killed by hunters are not reported.) 7. The life span of wild turkeys is great enough to permit the lumping of trapping data, (Birds trapped and marked three years ago are assumed to be as much alive as birds marked in 1964. This may not be the case.) 8. Birds have not lost their markers,' of markers were used on each bird, loose all three markers.) (Probably some marked birds (In most instances, three types It is unlikely that a bird would �- 113 - 9. Adults are killed in proportion to their occurrence in the turkey population. (Hunters generally shoot the first turkey they get a chance to kill; however, toms may be more adapt at evading hunters than hens are.) If assumptions estimated: are fulfilled the adult population prior to hunting A No. Adults Killed No. Birds Marked No. Marked Birds Killed A 29 Toms (A) can be 107 Marked Birds 16 Marked Birds Killed = + 53 Hens A = 548 According to the preceding ratio, 548 adult turkeys were present in the population before the turkey season. Confidence limits (95%) can be computed for the number of adults in the population by use of Bailey's (1951) formula S. E. = M2n (n-m) where: m3 S.E. M n m S.E. Standard error = Total marked birds in population Adult birds killed Adult marked birds killed (107)2 x 82 (82 - 16) = 39 163 If the necessary assumptions are true, the chances are 95 out of 100 that there were from 425 to 671 adult turkeys in the study area prioL to the hunting seasons. This estimate might be conservative since 478 turkeys were counted in winter areas a few months earlier. If there were 671 adult turkeys in the total population, all but 193, or 71 per cent, were included in the winter census. This number of birds could have easily been overlooked. Number of Poults Before Hunting.--The number of poults in the pre-hunting season populations (B) can be estimated if poults and adults are killed in proportion to their occurrence in the population. �- 114 - B Adult Population No. Adults Killed = No. Poults Killed B 542 Adults in Population 82 Adults Killed 136 Poults Killed B 909 Confidence limits were determined by the use of Bailey's formula as before. Again, if assumptions are fulfilled, one is 95 per cent certain that somewhere between 684 and 1,134 poults were present in the study area before hunting. A similar figure can be obtained (assuming that hens, toms, and poults are killed in proportion to their occurrence in the population) by: x = ? = Total Population Y = 548 = No. Adults in Population Z = 37.8 = Per Cent of Adults in Population = Per Cent Adults in Kill x = Y. = 548 Z 1,450 37.8 The number of young in the population is found by subtracting the number of adults from the total population. There were 902 young in the population according to this estimate. Total Turkey Population Before Hunting.--The total population before hunting (C) is found by adding the number of poults to the number of adults. C = A + B = 548 + 909 = 1,457 The total population (C) can also be estimated C Total Kill C 218 by use of the ratio: No. Marked No. Marked 107 16 Birds in Population Birds Killed C = 1,458 Bailey's formula can be used to obtain confidence intervals for this estimate. If assumptions are correct, the odds are 95 out of 100 that the turkey population before hunting on the Uncompahgre Plateau lies between 1,107 and 1,809 birds. �- 115 - Number of Hens Before Hunting.--The number of hens in the population was found using the same method used for determining the number of adults in the population. According to the estimate, there were 354 hens present in the area before hunting. The chances are 20 to 1 that there were from 280 to 428 hens before hunting, provided that assumptions are correct. Brood Counts.--A total of 27 broods of wild turkeys were seen or reported during July, August, and September of 1964. The average number of young per hen with brood was 7.0. Broods varied in number from 3 to 10. Hatching dates were determined by the method used by Lewis (1964). Poults the size of quail were considered to be 3 weeks old. Birds the size of chicks were probably 9 weeks old. Larger birds were not classified according to age. Hatching dates were estimated within 15 days based on the size of the poults (Figure 6). Nesting Success.--Assuming that there were between 684 and 1,134 poults in the population and that there were seven young per hen with brood, there would have been from 98 to 162 successful nesting hens in the turkey population. If there were 280 to 428 hens in the total population, nesting success was somewhere between 28 per cent and 58 per cent. Substituting means in place of confidence limits, there were 130 successful hens, 354 hens in the total population, and nesting success was 37 per cent. Harvest.--As mentioned earlier, management should strive to harvest as much of the population as it will biologically stand. If estimates are correct, from 12 per cent to 20 per cent of the turkey population was harvested last year. This would have left from 889 to 1,591 turkeys in the population. Assuming a 20 per cent loss of turkeys due to wounding, predation, and poaching, from 711 to 1,273 birds should have overwintered. Unless this number of birds is carried over to the next year, additional birds should be harvested. Conclusions.--The winter census was incomplete; so productivity was calculated using a method similar to the "Lincoln Index". The accuracy of this method depends on the fulfillment of a number of assumptions, some of which may not be true. The population estimates indicate that there were from 1,107 to 1,809 turkeys in the population before hunting. From 425 to 678 of these birds were adults, 280 to 428 hens, and 684 to 1,134 birds were poults. The lower estimate of each sex and age class is conservative. For example, 478 turkeys were counted during the winter of 1964-65. All surviving birds would be adults by the October 1965 hunting season. The lower adult population estimate showed only 425 adults present prior to hunting. This would only have been possible if all birds in the population were counted during the previous winter, and if 53 birds or 11 per cent of the population died before being hunted. Although an 11 per cent loss is likely, it is doubtful that all or even 80 per cent of the tota 1 populat ion was counted during the winter. Similarly, if 58 per cent of the 478 turkeys counted were females, there would have been 277 hens in the population. Again all birds were not counted. �Fi[;ure 6. --Date of hatching for 10 broods of ,-lild turkeys on the Uncompahgre Plateau during 1964. 5 .., ,I, I-' "-' ~ 2 1 o 16 - 30 1 - 15 J U N E 16 - 31 1 - 15 J U L Y �- 117 - Probably the largest error is due to the toms ability to evade hunters. If toms are not killed in proportion to their occurrence in the population, the estimate of adult birds and total population is low because there are actually more toms present. The lower estimate of nesting success is probably too low because the estimated number of hens in the popUlation seems to be too conservative. In reality, nesting success probably is above 30 per cent. In Virginia, Q·3 per cent of the hens incubating eggs in 40 nests were successful (Mosby, 1941). If nesting success is similar in Colorado, the estimate of 23 per cent success among nesting hens is very low which supports the belief that the lower population estimates are conservative. Even though assumptions may not be fulfilled, checks based on the actual number of turkeys counted in the study area, expected nesting success, and the probability that there are more toms present in the population than predicted, indicate that estimates of the turkey population derived from the use of ratios is conservative. Nesting success was probably greater than 30 per cent. The population before hunting contained over 1,107 turkeys, and no more than 20 per cent of the total population was harvested. Trapping and Banding Operations Turkeys have been trapped, banded, and released during the winter on the Uncompahgre Plateau since 1961-62. If all birds retained their bands and the~e was no unknown mortality, 107 marked turkeys would have been present in the turkey population at the start of the 1964 turkey seasons. Sixteen marked birds were killed during the turkey seasons in 1964 (Appendix A), leaving a maximum of 91 marked birds on the Uncompahgre Plateau in December 1964 (Appendix B). Sixty-one turkeys, five of which were recaptures, were trapped, banded, and released this winter on the Uncompahgre Plateau (Appendix C). Birds were captured in six different areas (Figure 7). Wing markers of various colors; "Jiffy" wing bands, and leg bands were used to mark most birds in each area (Table 4). Five hen turkeys were recaptured after wearing tags for nine months or more (Table 5). Table 4.--Wild turkeys trapped, marked, the winter of 1964-65. Adults Males 5 2 1 4 2 0 Sub. Adults and released in the study area during Color of Wing Females Males Females Total Markers 6 0 0 3 5 0 0 1 0 7 12 2 21 22 2 Yellow Yellow & Blue Orange & Black Red Pink & White Blue 0 10 7 0 2 6 0 0 2 Employed Location Where Trapped, Marked, and Released Dominguez Canyon Divide Rd.-No. End Spring Cr. Canyon Hill Ranch San Miguel River Pickett Corral �- 118 - ITEWAY • • C ALE NATURITA RIDGEWAY 1. Divide Road, North End 2. Big Dominguez ') J. Pickett Corral 4. Sprinc Creek 5. Hill Ranch 6. San Miguel River Figure 7o--The location of sites where turkeys were trapped, b~nded, and released during the winter of 196Ll·-65. The n umber of turkeys banded in each area appears in parenthesis. �Table 5.~~Information concerning wild turkeys recaptured on the Uncompahgre Plateau during the winter of 1964-65. Color 1st release Recapture 2nd release Orange Orange Orange No. Wing Band No. 6 6 6 107 Leg Band No. T-35 T-574 Sex Age F F A A A F Weight (pounds) Date Captured Place Captured 9~ 9Jz; 1/28/64 1/29/65 1/29/65 Hill Ranch Hill Ranch Hill Ranch - ----~-----------------------~--~~------~---------------~-----------------------------------------------~~ 7Jz; 1st release Turquoise 5 5 T-45 F Y 2/15/64 Spring Creek Recapture 2nd release Turquoise Turquoise 5 5 5 5 - T-91 F F A A 8~ - 1/21/65 1/21/65 Spring Creek Spring Creek ------------------------------~-------------------------------~-----------------------------------------1st release Turquoise 1 1 F T-41 A 2/15/64 9~ Spring Creek Recapture 2nd release Turquoise Turquoise 1 1 1 1 T-41 T-41 F F A A 10 - 1/21/65 1/21/65 10.1 1/21/65 1/21/65 Spring Creek Spring Creek ------------------------------------~-----------------~--------------------------------~-~--------------8Jz; 1st release Turquoise 7 F 7 T-46 Y 2/15/64 Spring Creek Recapture 2nd release Turquoise Turquoise 7 7 7 7 T-46 T-46 F F A A ~ Spring Creek Spring Creek ~-------------------------------------------------------------------------------~-----------------------~ 1st release Yellow 15 F A T-3l 1/23/64 Dominguez 9~ Recapture 2nd release Yellow Yellow 15 15 -69 T-31 T-31 F F A A 9.2 - 1/14/64 1/14/64 Dominguez Dominguez -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------~ 1st release M 92 A Recapture 2nd release ---- - - - 92 92 T-559 T-559 T-559 M M A A 15.8 16.4 - 2/2/65 3/29/65 3/29/65 Hill Ranch Hill Ranch Hill Ranch ~ ~ \0 �- 120 - Environmental Factors Vegetative Data.--A 26,148 acre area, located primarily below the Divide Road between the East and Middle forks of Escalante Creek, was selected for intensive study (Figure 8). This area comprises most of the summer and winter range for turkeys wintering in the Pickett Corral locality. Aspen, Oak Brush, Ponderosa Pine, and Pinyon Juniper are the forest types which occupy most of the area (Table 6). Forest types are being sampled in proportion to the amount of area they occupy to determine composition and frequency of occurrence of plants within the understories (Appendix D). Plants encountered in the study area are listed in Appendix F. Percentage mean estimates of floristic composition and average frequency of occurrence of plants in the various understories within the study area appear in Appendix G. Hypothetical specifications for ideal turkey habitat in Virginia were outlined by Mosby and Handley (1943). Obviously turkey habitat in Colorado differs from turkey range in Virginia, but still something can be learned by comparing the two areas as done in Table 7. ' Turkey habitat in the Love Mesa area differs from the specifications for ideal range primarily because it lacks an adequate number of grassy forest openings and because green vegetation is generally unavailable during most of the winter. Mast Production.--Six transects were established in the Oak Brush to measure mast production (Table 8). Plants of various sizes were included in each transect. Averages can not be projected to determine total production because of the wide variation in production between transects. But differences in the number of acorns counted in each transect from year to year may provide an index to determine increases or decreases in mast production. Climatological in Appendix H. Data.--Data collected Incidental from three weather stations appears Information Questionnaires were sent to 101 people who purchased turkey licenses in this area last spring. The questionnaire was similar to the one used in Arizona and described by R.H. Smith (1963). Answers were received from 87 hunters (86% return). Hunter reaction to the first spring turkey season in Colorado was generally favorable. For t y-nhree per cent of the hunters described the season as good, 25 per cent said it was bad, and 32 per cent were undecided. A majority of the undecided hunters favored the season if it was not harmful to productivity or if toms were edible during the spring. �- 121 - • e A •• IE . I 0 I ..... ,,, Fi[~ure 8. --Location of intensive study area if; shown in black. ~ �- 122 - Table 6.--Acreages and per cent of total area occupied by various forest types in intensive study area, 1964. Forest Type Area in Acres Per Cent 12,487 4,709 3,603 2,354 1,835 1,040 83 37 26,148 47.8 18.0 13.8 9.0 7.0 4.0 0.3 0.1 100.0 Aspen Oak Brush Ponderosa Pine Pinyon, Juniper Engelman Spruce Non Forest Douglas Fir Other TOTAL Table 7.--Comparison of turkey habitat in the Love Mesa area with some of the hypothetical speci~ications for ideal turkey habitat in Virginia as outlined by Mosby and Handley (1943). Specifications For.Ideal Habitat Characteristics of Habitat on Love Mesa 1. Size-15,000 to 50,000 acres 1. Size-26,148 acres 2. Composition-50 to 90% forest 10 to 50 per cent openings 2. Composition-95.9% forest (including Oak Brush), 4.1% openings 3. Forest and openings well interspersed 3. Forest and openings reasonably well interspersed 4. Forest types well mixed 4. Forest types well mixed except for one 9,927 acre area of Aspen and a 3,652 acre patch of Oak Brush. 5. 25% of forested area in hardwoods, preferably oaks 5. 18% of forested area in Oak Brush, 67% of area in Oak Brush and Aspen 6. Mast, seed, and berries reasonably abundant and well distributed 6. Mast, seed, and berries reasonably abundant and adequately distributed 7. Openings in forest cover to encourage production of grasses 7. Few openings in forest cover to increase grass production 8. Green vegetation available far into winter and early spring 8. Little green vegetation normally available far into winter. Some green vegetation available early in spring �- 123 - Table 8.--Comparison of the number of acorns counted in six Oak Brush transects on the Uncompahgre Plateau, 1964. Transect Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 No. Acorns Counted Per Tree Minimum Maximum 0 0 0 0 8 0 301 127 164 6 372 337 No. Acorns Counted Total Average 685 223 369 7 1,577 482 68.5 22.3 36.9 0.7 157.7 48.2 The effects of a spring season on productivity are difficult to determine because of the secrecy exhibited by turkeys during the nesting season ~nd because of their widespread distribution during the brood rearing period; however, 17 broods counted in 1963 before the first spring season contained an average of 8.5 young. In 1964 following the spring season, 27 broods contained an average of 7.0 poults. Statistics indicate that there was no significant difference between brood sizes in 1963 and 1964. Thus one is not justified in saying that the spring season caused a detectable change in the average brood size. Evidently, a majority of the turkeys are edible during the spring. According to hunters, three out of four toms killed during the season were fat and in good condition, while one was very poor and probably not edible. (There are also a few birds killed in November that are not good to eat). Only 6 per cent of the hunters were successful probably because turkeys were distributed over a large area (1,230 square miles). Birds were found from the bottom of the wf nt er range to the top of the summe r range during the May 2-12, 1964 spring season. The primary reason the season was held in May was to permit birds to breed and hens to begin nesting before hunters invaded their privacy_ If hens were on their nests, hunters would be less likely to see and shoot them for toms. And hunting would not interfere with breeding as most hens are already bred. Thirty-four per cent of those who went hunting saw turkeys, 20 per cent saw toms, 14 per cent saw hens, and 5 per cent saw birds of unknown sex. There are more hens and poults in the turkey population than adult toms, yet more hunters saw toms than hens (most poults would also have been called hens by a majority of the hunters) probably because the hens were nesting. Other evidence exists showing that hens were starting to nest at this time. For �- 124 - instance, a brood containing 12 poults was seen on June 14. The poults were less than a week old. Working backwards, the hen probably began laying around April 28, and incubation must have started about May 10. Another brood was reported on June 16 indicating that some hens were laying or incubating eggs during the spring season. Hatching dates were estimated for eight other broods based on the size of the poults when seen during the summer. Four of the hens probably began incubating eggs the last half of May and the other four in the first half of June. Whether the hens started earlier nests that were destroyed is anyones guess. Another argument for having the season in May was that in April hunters might interfere with calving. Following the season, I talked to a rancher in an area where cattlemen were concerned for their calves. He said that there were so few hunters in the area that he hardly knew we had a season. There are some who believe the May season was a mistake for three reasons: 1. A majority of the turkeys were in or on their way to the summer range when the season opened. The summer range consists of about 1,230 square miles of habitat. There was probably no more than one tom for every 3,150 acres of range. And a large portion of this area Was inaccessible to hunters because of poor roads and deep snow. 2. According to several authorities, nesting hens are easily disturbed during the period of egg laying and incubation. There probably were not enough hunters to disturb very many nesting hens. But hunters are more apt to cause nest desertion than they are apt to interrupt breeding to the extent that some hens go unbred. 3. The primary purpose of a spring gobbler season should be to harvest excess toms at a time when they are vulnerable. They are probably more vulnerable during the breeding season than during the nesting season. Several things were learned from the first spring season; 1. Toms are usually as in the fall. fat and are probably as palitable 2. Hunting average 3. A majority 4. There are not enough turkey hunters to interfere with calving regardless of when the season is held. 5. Few toms were killed because a majority of the birds were in or on their way to the summer range which was inaccessible to most hunters in early May. in early May did not cause a detectible brood size. of the turkey hunters during the spring decrease in the favor a spring season. �- 125 - Usefulness of Food Plots in Affecting an Increase in The Turkey Kill On The Uncompahgre Plateau.--At least 500 turkeys winter in different areas on the Uncompahgre Plateau. These turkeys have a potential to increase to almost 3,000 birds in one year. Yet only 1,159 turkeys have been harvested in this area since hunting was first permitted in 1954. Winter census indicates that the unharvested surplus probably is not carried over from one year to the next. Apparently turkeys are being wasted because this bird population is inadequately harvested. Yet an adequate harvest is difficult to obtain. A liberal bag limit in conjunction with a spring, fall, and winter turkey season probably bribed more hunters into the field in 1964 than in past years. But many of these new turkey hunters gave up the sport because they were unable to locate turkeys to hunt. Turkeys were difficult to locate not because of scarcity but because the birds were scattered. The gobblers were distributed over about 1,230 square miles or range during the spring season. If this same area were occupied by 3,000 turkeys during the October season, when there might be 15 or more turkeys to a flock, there would probably be one flock of birds to every 4,000 acres of habitat. During November, birds are usually concentrated in smaller areas and larger groups, but by then many of the hunters have given up. The wasted surplus of turkeys might be salvaged if these birds could be concentrated during the turkey season. Some biologist believe that strategically located smal~ grain fields would attract turkeys during both the October and November turkey seasons. If so, hunters could be directed to turkey concentrations making it possible to achieve the desired harvest. Others doubt that turkeys can be concentrated by this means during October; but all agree that we should find out. A Method of Sexing Turkeys.--A number of techniques have been used to sex turkeys in the study area. One method, which may prove useful at check stations, involves the measurement of the combined length of the tarsus and middle toe. The middle toe was extended parallel to the tarsus and the length along the forward edge of the tarsus from the featherline to the tip of the toenail was measured. The average combined length of the tarsus and middle toe of 67 male birds averaged 256 millimeters and ranged from 236 to 282 millimeters. This same length was measured on 142 female birds. Measurements ranged from 190 to 236 millimeters. The average length among hens was 212 millimeters (Table 9). Band Retention.--Eight back tags were recovered from birds killed during the turkey seasons. Five back tags worn by recaptured birds were also examined. The tags were made of six different materials all of which shm~ed little wear after weathering from three to twelve months. Twelve of the back tags were secured with 3/8 inch nylon elastic. The nylon elastic showed no wear on eight tags, was worn one millimeter through the edge of two tags, and. two millimeters through the edge of one tag. Rayon elastic, securing one tag to a bird, was worn one millimeter through the edge. �- 126 - Table 9.--Measurements of the combined length of the tarsus and middle toe of turkeys on the Uncompahgre Plateau taken between October and May. MA No. Birds in Sample Adult L E Young Both Adult 40 27 67 83 59 142 240 236 236 187 190 187 256 256 256 211 212 211 271 282 282 227 236 236 FEMALE Young Both Minimum Measurement (nun) Average Measurement (nun) Maximum Measurement (nun) Five hen turkeys were recaptured after wearing tags for nine months or more. Two of the five hens lost leg bands, while all other markers were retained. Most bands were also retained by marked birds that were killed by hunters (Table 10). �- 127 - Table 10.--Band retention among marked turkeys killed or recaptured on the Uncompahgre Plateau in 1964. Jiffy Wing Band Back Tag Sex Age Retained F F F F F F F F F F F F A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X M M M M Lost Retained Lost (none) (none) (none) X X X (unknown) X (unknown) X X X X (none) (none) (unknown) Leg Band Months Retained Lost Retained X X X X X (unknown) X X X X X X X X X X X 20 10 10 8 7 6 7 7 7 6 8 9 10 10 10 2 Literature Cited Bailey, N. T. J. 1951. On estimating the size of mobile populations from recapture data. Biometrika 38:293-306. Eng, R. L. 1959. Statues of the turkey in Montana, p. 19-20. In Forest Game Committee, Proceedings of the first national wild turkey management symposium. 200 p. Harrington, H. D. 1954. Manual of the plants of Colorado. Denver. 666 p. Sage Books, Keiser, L. P., and E. L. Kozicky. 1943. Sex and age determination of wild turkeys. Pa. Game News 14(8):10-11, 26. Knowlton, F. F., E. D. Michael, and W. C. Glazener. 1964. A marking technique for field recognition of individual turkeys and deer. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 28(1):167-170. �- 128 - Lewis, J. B. 1964. Statewide wild turkey population studies. Job Completion Report, Missouri Project 13-R-18, Work Plan No.3, Job No.5, 8 p. Mosby, H. s. 1959. Discussion, p. 41. In Forest Game Committee, Proceedings of the first national wild turkey management symposium. 200 p. Powell, J. A. 1959. Discussion, p. 39. In Forest Game Committee, Proceedings of the first national wild turkey management symposium. 200 p. Roberts, H. A. 1959. Aspects of harvest and hunting pressure in Pennsylvania's wild turkey range, p. 31-35. In Forest Game Committee, Proceedings of the first national wild turkey management symposium. 200 p. Smith, R. H. 1963. Arizona Game and Fish Department hunt questionnaire1962, p. 1-6. In Arizona big game investigations 1962-63. Project W53R13 Job Completion Reports. Suetsugu, H. Y. and K. E. Menzel. 1962. Recent wild turkey introductions in Nebraska. 24th Ann. Midwest Wildl. Conf., De Moines. 10 p. Trippensee, R. E.· 1948. Wildlife management, upland game and general principles. McGraw-Hill Book Co., Inc. New York. 479 p. �APPENDIX A Information concerning marked turkeys killed on the Uncompahgre Plateau during the 1964 turkey seasons, (F.D. indicates field dressed weight). Back Tag Color No. Jiffy Wing Band No. 1st release Killed Ye l.l ow -- 5 -- -- 1st release Killed .Ye 11 mv Yellow 10 10 -- Leg Band No. Sex Age Weight (pounds) Date Captured T-22 T-22 F F A A 9 3/4 7~ F.D. 3-23-63 11-28-64 Dominguez Canyon Dominguez Canyon T-29 T-29 F F A 10 7~ F.D. 1-8-64 11-28-64 Dominguez Canyon Dominguez Canyon A Place Captured ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1st release Killed Orange Orange T-34 T-34 5 5 F F A A 10 7 1/28-64 11-22-64 Hill Ranch Hill Ranch ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1st release 3rd release Killed Blue Blue Blue 8 31 31 34 34 T-533 T-533 A A 17 2-5-63 Pickett Corral M M A 17 11-21-64 Pickett Corral M -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1st release Killed Blue Blue T-527 T-527 26 26 M M A A 18 16.3 1-21-64 11-21-64 Pickett Corral Pickett Corral -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1st release Killed Blue Blue 45 45 22 22 T-59 T-59 F F A 9 A 8.6 3-1-64 11-23-64 Pickett Corral Pickett Corral ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1st release Killed Blue Blue 48 48 25 25 T-62 T-62 F F A A 8~ 8~ 4-8-64 11-23-64 Pickett Corral Pickett Corral -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- I\) \0 �APPENDIX A -- Continued 1st release Killed Back Tag Color No. Jiffy Wing Band No. Orange Orange 13 13 -- -- Leg Band No. Sex Age Weight (pounds) Date Captured T-536 T-536 M M A A l8~ 15.9 F.D. 1-28-64 11-21-64 Place Captured Hill Ranch Hill Ranch ------------------------------------------------------------------~------------------------------------------1st release Killed Green Green 6 6 42 42 T-69 T-69 F F y 6~ A ? 3-11-64 11-28-64 Pleasant Valley Hanks Valley -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1st release Killed Blue Blue 44 44 21 T-58 ? ? F F A A 9~ 4-8-64 10-64 Pickett Corral ~ mi. above Delta Camp Ground -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1st release Killed Blue Blue 33 33 10 10 T-49 T-49 F F y A n 10 F.D. 2-16-64 11-26-64 Pickett Corral Pickett Corral -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------~ 1st release Killed Blue Blue 46 46 23 23 T-60 T-60 F F A A 9 7~ F.D. 4-8-64 11-22-64 Pickett Corral 25 Mesa & Houser Rd. --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1st release Killed Blue Blue 41 41 18 ? T-55 T-55 F F A A 9~ 10 4-8-64 11-22-64 Pickett Corral Templeton Ranch -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1st release Killed Blue Blue 36 36 13 13 T-50 T-50 F A F A 9~ 10 2-25-64 10-64 Pickett Corral Divide Rd. & Love Mesa Sign ----------------------------------------------~--------------------------------------------------------------~ 1st release Killed Blue Blue 38 38 15 T-52 T-52 F F A A 10~ ll~ 4-8-64 10-64 Pickett Corral Divide Rd. & Love Mesa Sign ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------~---- ~ LA) o �APPENDIX A -- Continued Back 1st release 2nd release Killed TaB Color No. Blue Blue Blue 16 50 50 Jiffy Wing Band No. -27 ? I-' w Leg Band No. Sex Age T-5l8 T-539 T-539 M M M A A A Weight (pounds) Date Captured Place Captured l7~ 2-5-63 3-1-64 5-1-64 Pickett Corral Pickett Corral Love Mesa ? ? I-' �APPENDIX B Banding information concerning turkeys which might still be alive on the Uncompahgre Plateau following the 1964 turkey seasons. Back Tag Neck Tag Wing Band Leg Band Color No. Color No. No. No. Sex Orange Orange Orange Orange Orange Orange Orange x x x x ------- 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 T-32 T-534 T-33 T-35 T-36 T-37 T-38 T-39 T-40 T-535 502 503 504 T-508 T-511 T-513 T-5l4 T-5l5 T-5l6 T-520 F F Orange Orange Orange Orange Orange Orange Orange Orange Orange Orange Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue 2 3 4 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 6 9 11 12 13 14 18 --------------- ------- Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue x x x ---- -----"" --x x x 6 9 11 12 13 14 18 ------- ------- ----- ----- ----------- ----- ----- ------- --- --- Weight Date Place Age (pounds) Captured Captured A A 11 11 9 10~ 8 10 10 10 3/4 12 3/4 10 9~ 8~ 9 3/4 10 8~ 9~ 14 l7~ 17 19 19 16 3/4 16 2-22-62 2-22-62 2-22-62 2-22-62 2-22-62 2-22-62 2-22-62 1-28-64 1-28-64 1-28-64 1-28-64 1-28-64 1-28-64 1-28-64 1-28-64 1-28-64 1-28-64 3-8-62 3-8-62 3-8-62 2-5-63 2-5-63 2-5-63 2-5-63 2-5-63 2-5-63 2-5-63 M Y F F F F F A A A A A M Y F F F F F F F A A A A A A A M M M M M M M M M M M A A A A A A A A A A Y --- l6~ l6~ l7~ Hill Ranch Hill Ranch Hill Ranch Hill Ranch Hill Ranch Hill Ranch Hill Ranch Hill Ranch Hill Ranch Hill Ranch Hill Ranch Hill Ranch Hill Ranch Hill Ranch Hill Ranch Hill Ranch Hill Ranch Pickett Corral Pickett Corral Pickett Corral Pickett Corral Pickett Corral Pickett Corral Pickett Corral Pickett Corral Pickett Corral Pickett Corral I--' co ro �APPENDIX B -- Continued Back Tag Neck Tag Wing Band Leg Band Color No. Color No. No. No. Sex Age (pounds) Captured Captured Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue 20 22 23 24 25 Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue 20 22 23 24 25 --- Blue Blue 27 28 Blue 27 T-12 T-14 T-524 T-525 T-526 T-51 T-529 T-530 T-531 T-532 T-48 T-538 T-53 T-54 T-56 T-57 T-6l T-63 T-540 T-541 T-81 T-11 T-13 T-15 T-52l T-522 T-17 T-18 T-16 T-19 T-23 T-26 F F M M M F M M M M F M F F F F F F A A Y A A A A A A A A A A A Y A Y A A A A A A A A A Y A A A A A 10 11 l4~ 17~ 17 8 3/4 17~ 2-19-63 2-19-63 2-25-64 3-1-64 3-1-64 4-8-64 3-1-64 3-1-64 1-21-64 3-1-64 2-25-64 4-8-64 4-8-64 4-8-64 4-8-64 4-8-64 4-8-64 4-8-64 3-1-64 3-1-64 4-8-64 4-8-64 4-8-64 3-16-63 3-16-63 3-16-63 3-22-63 3-22-63 3-21-63 3-23-63 3-30-63 1-8-64 Pickett Corral Pickett Corral Pickett Corral Pickett Corral Pickett Corral Pickett Corral Pickett Corral Pickett Corral Pickett Corral Pickett Corral Pickett Corral Pickett Corral Pickett Corral Pickett Corral Pickett Corral Pickett Corral Pickett Corral Pickett Corral ·Pickett Corral Pickett Corral Pickett Corral Pickett Corral Pickett Corral 25 Mesa 25 Mesa 25 Mesa 25 Mesa 25 Mesa Dominguez Canyon Dominguez Canyon Dominguez Canyon Dominguez Canyon Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue 30 32 34 39 40 42 43 47 49 52 53 54 Hhite White Hhite White White Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 6 3 --- --- --- ------. --- ------------Blue White White White White White Yellow Yellow Yellow --- -- ------------21 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 6 -- --12 29 33 14 31 35 36 9 11 16 17 19 20 24 26 28 32 56 55 57 ----------------- --- Weight M M F F F F M M F F F F F F --- 16 15~ 8~ 12 3/4 9~ 9~ 8~ 10~ 8 3/4 9~ 16 18 8~ 9~ 9~ 10~ 15~ 15~ 8 10 10~ 10~ 10 3/4 9 Place I-' w w �APPENDIX B -- Continued Back Tag Neck Tag Wing Band Leg Band Color No. Color No. No. No. Sex Ye Ll.ow 4 8 --- ---- --- 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 37 38 39 40 41 43 44 45 T-2l T-24 T-25 T-27 T-28 T-30 T-31 T-41 T-42 T-43 T-44 T-45 T-537 T-46 T-47 T-64 T-65 T-66 T-67 T-68 T-70 T-71 T-72 F F F F F F F F F F F 47 Yello,y YellO\v Yellow Yello~y Yellow Turquoise Turquoise Turquoise Turquoise Turquoise Turquoise Turquoise Turquoise Green Green Green Green Green Green Green Green Blue-White Dots Blue-White Dots Blue-White Dots Blue-White Dots --- --- 11 12 14 15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 ----- 1 --- --------------- -- --- -------- --- -- --- --- ------- ------- 3 ----- 4 --- 2 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -------- Weight Date Place Age (pounds) Captured Captured F F F F F F F F F F A Y Y A Y Y A A A A Y Y Y Y Y A A Y A A A Y A 10 9 9 3/4 10 9 3/4 8 3/4 9~ 9~ 9~ 8 3/4 7~ 7~ 10 3/4 8~ 7~ 8~ 7 3/4 6~ 10~ 9~ 9 3/4 6 3/4 10 1-8-64 1-8-64 1-8-64 1-8-64 1-8-64 1-23-64 1-23-64 2-15-64 2-15-64 2-15-64 2-15-64 2-15-64 2-15-64 2-15-64 2-15-64 3-11-64 3-11-64 3-11-64 3-11-64 3-11-64 3-11-64 3-11-64 3-11-64 Dominguez Canyon Dominguez Canyon Dominguez Canyon Dominguez Canyon Dominguez Canyon Dominguez Canyon Dominguez Canyon Spring Creek Spring Creek Spring Creek Spring Creek Spring Creek Spring Creek Spring Creek Spring Creek Pleasant Valley Pleasant Valley Pleasant Valley Pleasant Valley Pleasant Valley Pleasant Valley Pleasant Valley Pleasant Valley T-73 F Y 8 3/4 3-26-64 Log Hill 46 T-542 H Y 18 3/4 3-26-64 Log Hill 48 T-74 H A 9~ 3-26-64 Log Hill 49 T-75 F A ll~ 3-26-64 Log Hill ----- ----- --I F H f-J LA) +=- �APPENDIX B -- Continued Date Place Age ~l2ounds) CaEtured CaEtured F A l23z 3-26-64 Log Hill T-77 F Y 83z 3-26-64 Log Hill 52 T-78 F Y 8t 3-26-64 Log Hill - - 53 T-79 F Y 8 3-26-64 Log Hill - - 54 T-80 F Y 103z 3-26-64 Log Hill Wing Band Color No. No. No. Sex - - 50 T-76 6 ----- -- 51 7 - - - - - 8 - - - 9 - - - Tag Neck Color No. Blue-+fuite Dots , Blue-White Dots Blue-~fuite Dots Blue-White Dots Blue-White Dots Weight Leg Band Tag Back 5 --- .- ---_ _- .. f-' w V1 �APPENDIX C Information concerning turkeys banded and released on the Uncompahgre Plateau during the winter of 1964-65. Hing Harker Color No. Ye11m, Ye11m, Ye11m, Ye11m, Ye11m, Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow Ye11m, Yellow 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Ye 11ow & Blue Ye l.l.ow & Blue Black & Orange Black & Orange Black & Orange Black & Orange 12 13 14 15 16 17 Black & Orange Black & Orange 18 19 Black & Orange 20 Black & Orange Black & Orange Black & Orange Black & Orange Black & Orange 21 22 23 24 25 Wing Band No. Leg Band No. 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 7 76 77 5 78 1 79 80 81 82 83 T-543 T-544 T-545 T-546 T-547 T-82 T-83 T-84 T-85 T-86 T-87 T-31 T-458 T-549 T-550 T-88 T-89 T-90 T-46 T-551 T-552 T-91 T-92 T-41 T-93 T-94 T-95 T-554 T-96 Sex Age Weight ~Eounds ) Date CaEtured H H A A A A A A A A Y A A A A A Y Y A A A A Y A A A Y Y Y Y Y 18.4 15.2 14.6 16.1 16.1 10.3 8.8 10.0 6.2 8.7 9.7 9.2 14.7 16.0 11.8 8.2 10.8 10.7 10.1 16.6 12.2 8.5 9.4 10.0 6.7 7.7 8.2 11.5 8.8 1-14-65 1-14-65 1-14-65 1-14-65 1-14-65 1-14-65 1-14-65 1-14-65 1-14-65 1-14-65 1-14-65 1-14-65 1-20-65 1-20-65 1-21-65 1-21-65 1-21-65 1-21-65 1-21-65 1-21-65 1-21-65 1-21-65 1-21-65 1-21-65 1-21-65 1-21-65 1-21-65 1-21-65 1-21-65 M M M F F F F F F F M M M F F F F M H F F F F F F M F I-' co 0\ �APPENDIX C -- Continued Hing Harker Color No. Black & Orange Black & Orange Black & Orange Black & Orange Black & Orange Black & Orange Red Red Red Red Red Red Red Red Red Red Red Red Red Red Red Red Red 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 Red Red Red Red Pink & White Pink & White Blue Blue 49 50 53 54 51 52 55 56 Wing Band No. Leg Band No. 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 9293 T-97 T-98 T-99 T-100 T-55 T-556 T-557 T-558 T-559 T-560 T-561 T-562 T-563 T-564 T-565 T-566 F-567 T-568 T-569 T-570 T-571 T-572 T-573 T-574 T-575 T-576 T-579 T-380 T-578 T-577 T-581 T-582 % 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 112 114 110 111 115 116 Sex Age F F F F F F F Y Weight (Eounds 2 M Y Y Y Y 8.8 8.9 10.5 9.1 9.8 9.1 10.1 16.2 15.8 8.7 6.4 7.4 8.2 8.9 F A - M M Y Y Y 11.1 10.1 6.5 10.7 9.8 7.6 7.2 10.0 9.4 10.4 7.9 18.2 16.0 16.7 15.7 7.8 9.2 M M F F M F F F F F F F F A A Y A A A A A A A A Y Y A A F Y Y M M M M A A A A F F A A M - Date CaEtured 1-21-65 1-21-65 1-21-65 1-21-65 1-21-65 1-21-65 1-29-65 1-29-65 1-29-65 1-29-65 1-29-65 1-29-65 1-29-65 1-29-65 2-2-65 2-2-65 2-2-65 2-2-65 2-2-65 2-2-65 2-2-65 2-2-65 2-2-65 2-2-65 2-2-65 2-2-65 3-29-65 3-29-65 3-28-65 3-28:065 4-8-65 4-8-65 I-' VJ --.J �- 138 APPENDIX D Below is a detailed list of the forest types occurring within the 26,148 acre intensive study area. The acres of each forest type, the per cent of total area covered, the number of transects completed, and the total number of transects to be run in each type is also given. The meaning of forest type symbols appears in the following appendix. Acres Covered By Forest Txpe Per Cent of Total Area No. Transects Completed Total Transects To Be Done A7 843 3.2 6 10 A8 10,945 41.9 29 125 A9A 687 2.6 3 8 A9AWM 12 T o DSM 23 0.1 o D9AMP 42 0.2 1 D9AWP 18 0.1 o NC 4,709 lS.0 54 54 NF 1,040 4.0 2 12 NO 37 0.1 NPJ 2,354 9.0 P9AMM 4 T P9AMP 1,983 7.6 15 23 P9APP 768 2.9 4 9 P9BMM 186 0.7 2 2 P9BMP 626 2.4 7 7 P9BPP 36 0.1 1 1 Forest Type Symbol o 27 27 o �- 139 - APPENDIX D -- Continued Acres Covered By Forest Type Per Cent of Total Area SF6 15 0.1 0 SF8M 36 0.1 0 SF8W 385 1.5 5 SF9 33 0.1 0 SF9AMM 101 0.4 1 SF9AMP 252 1.0 SF9AW 69 0.3 1 SF9AWD 12 T 0 SF9AWM 386 1.5 5 SF9AWP 546 2.1 TOTAL 26,148 Forest Type Symbol 100 No. Transects Completed 2 Total Transects To Be Done 3 2 6 154 300 �- 140 - APPENDIX Meanings The ~ymbols E of the forst type symbols used in this report appear below. and meanings are in general accord with U.S. Forest Forest Type Symbol A Aspen D Douglas Fir NC Oak Brush NF Grass, Rock, Cultivated NO Others NPJ Pinyon, P Ponderosa Pine SF Engelman Spruce Land Juniper Stand Size Class Symbol 6 Non Stocked 7 Seedling, 8 Pole 5.0" to 10.9" d.b.h. 9A Small Sawtimber 11.0" to 20.9" 9B Large Sawtimber 21.0" Symbol Service usage. or Deforested Sapling, (burns, c1earcuts, 0" to 4.9" d.b.h. d.b.h. and over d.b.h. Crown Density P Poor 10% to 39% M Medium 40% to 69% W Well 70% to 100% etc.) �- 141 - APPENDIX Plants encountered are in general agreement in the study area are listed below. with Harrington Grasses Symbol F (1954). and Grass-like Scientific Scientific Name Plants Connnon Name Agin Agropyron inermi Beardless Wheatgrass AGR Agropyron spp. Beardless Wheatgrass Agre Agropyron repens Quackgrass Agsc Agrostis scabra Agsm Agropyron smithii Western Wheatgrass Agsp Agropyron spicatum Bluebunch Agtr Agropyron trachycaulum Slender Wheatgrass Arlo Aristida longiseta Red Three-awn Bltr Blepharoneuron Bogr Bouteloua Bran Bromus anomalis Brca Bromus carinatus Mountain Brin Bromus inermis Smooth Brome BRO Bromus spp. Brpo Bromus polyanthus Brte Bromus Caeg Aarex egglestone Cafe Carex festivella Cake Carex kelloggii CAR Carex spp. Dain Danthonia tricolepis gracilis tectorum intermedia Wheatgrass Pine Dropseed Blue Grama Brome Cheatgrass names �- 142 APPENDIX Symbol F -- Continued Scientific Name Common Name Dapa Danthonia Deca Deschampsia Elca Elymus canadensis Canada Wild-rye Elgl Elymus glaucus Blue Wild-rye ELY Elymus spp. Feov Festuca ovina FES Festuca spp. Feth Festuca thurberi Hija Hilaria jamesii Galleta Hoju Hordeum jubatum Foxtail Juco Juncus confusus JUN Juncus spp. Rush Kocr Koeleria Junegrass Mesp Melica Orhy Oryzopsis Phal Phleum alpinum Alpine Timothy POA Poa spp. Bluegrass Pofe Poa fendlerinana Mutton Grass Popr Poa pratensis Kentucky Sihy Sitanion Bottlebrush Stcol Stipa columbiana Stcom Stipa comata Needle-and-thread Stl Stipa spp. Needlegrass Stle Stipa lettermani parryi caespitosa cristata spectabilis hymenoides hystrix Tufted Hairgrass Sheep Fescue Barley Me lie Indian Ricegrass Bluegrass Squirreltail �- 143 - APPENDIX F -- Continued Symbol Stvi Scientific Name Stipa viridula UNGR Common Name Green Needlegrass Unidentified Grass Forbs Symbol Scientific Name Common Name Acla Achillea lanulosa Western Yarrow Anpa Antennaria parvifolia Pussytoes Anro Antennaria rosea Pussy toes Anse Androsace septentrionalis Androsace ANT Antennaria spp. Pussy toes Aqca Aquilegia caerulea Star-flowered Columbine AQU Aguilegia spp. Columbine Arco Arenaria congesta Sandwort Ardr Artemisia dracunculus Green Sagebrush Arfr Artemisia frigida ARN Arnica spp. Arnica Asam Astragalus amphioxys Locoweed AST Astragalus spp. Locoweed Barh Balsamorhiza sagittata Arrowleaf Balsamroot Cagu Calochortus gunnisonii Mariposa-lily Cali Castilleja linariaefolia Narrow-leaved Paintbrush Caro Campanula rotundifolia Bluebell Chal Chenopodium album Lambsquarters Chvi Chrysopsis villosa l~iry Golden-aster CIR Cirsium spp. Thistle �- 144 APPENDIX F -- Continued Symbol Scientific Name Common Name CUi Clematis ligusticifolia Western Virgins Bower CRY Crvptograma spp. Rockbrake CRYF Cryptantha spp. Cryptantha DAU Daucus spp. Carrot Eppa Epilobium panicultatum Fireweed EQU Equisetum spp_ Horsetail Erci Erodium cicutarium Filaree Erco Erigeron coulteri Coulter Daisy Ergr Erythronium grandiflorum Snowlily ERI Erigeron spp. Daisy ERIO Eriogonum spp. Snowlily Erra Eriogonum racemosum Eriogonum Ersp Erigeron speciosus Aspen Daisy Erum Eriogonum umbellatum Sulphur Flower EUP Euphorbia spp. Spurge Faes Fagopyrum esculentum Buckwheat FRA Fragaria spp. Wild Strawberry Gabo Galium boreale Bedstraw Ger Geranium spp. Geri Geranium richardsonii Wild White Geranium Giag Gilia aggregata Fairy Trumpet GIL Gilia spp. Gilia Grsq Grindelia sguarrosa Curly cup gumweed GUT Gutierrezia spp. Snakeweed Heho Helenium hoopesii Orange Sneezeweed �- 145 APPENDIX F -- Continued Symbol Scientific Name Common Name Pofo Polemonium foliosissimum Leafy Polemonium Popu Potentilla pulcherrima Beauty Cinquefoil Psmo Pseudocymopterus montanus Wild Yellow Parsley Pulu Pulsatilla ludoviciana American Pasqueflower Raal Ranunculus alismae folius Caltha-flowered Buttercup Secy Senecio cymbalarioides Groundsel SED Sedum spp. Stonecrop Sede Senecio debilis Groundsel SEN Senecio spp. Smra Smilacina racemosa False-Solomonseal Smst Smilacina stellata Starry Solomonplume SOL Solidago spp. Somi Solidago missouriensis Goldenrod Sope Solidago petradoria Flat-topped Goldenrod Spco Sphaeralcea coccinea Scarlet Globemallow TAR Taraxicum spp. Dandelion ThaI Thlaspi alpestre Pennycress Thfe Thalictrum fendleri Fendler Meadowrue Thmo Thermopsis montana Golden Banner TRI Trifolium spp. Clover Sore UNFO Unidentified Forb Veca Veratrum californicum Skunkcabbage Viad Viola adunca --- Hook Violet Viam Vicia americana Vetch �- 146 APPENDIX Symbol F -- Continued Scientific Name Common Name Vied Wyar Wyethia YUC Yucca spp. arizonica Yucca Shrubs and Trees Symbol Scientific Name Common Name Abla Abies ACE Acer spp. Maple Acgl Acer glabrum Rocky Mountain Amal Amelanchier Arpa Arctos Artr Artemisia Aruv Arctostaphylos Atca ~triplex canescens Fourwing Saltbush Befe Berberis fendleri Colorado Barberry BET Betula spp. Cemo Cercocarpus Ceoc Celtis Ceve Ceanothus Chna Chrysothamnus Coco Corylus Coso lasiocarpa Subalpine alnifolia taphylos patula tridentata uva-ursi Fir Maple Serviceberry Greenleaf Manzanita Big Sagebrush Bearberry Birch montanus • occidental is velutinus nauseosus cornuta True Mountain Mahogany Hackberry Snowbrush Ceanothus Rubber Rabbitbrush Filbert (Hazel) Cornus stolonifera Redosier Dogwood CRA Crataegus spp. Hawthorn Elan Elaeagnus angusti folia Russian Olive �- 147 APPENDIX Symbol F -- Continued Scientific Name Common Name Feru Fendlesa rupicola Jucom Juniperus communis Jusc Juniperus scopulorum Rocky Mountain Juut Juniperus utahensis Utah Juniper Mare Mahonia Pera Peraphyllum Pied Pinus edulis Colorado Pinyon Pien Picea engelmanni Engelmann Spruce Pipo Pinus ponderosa Ponderosa Pine Pipu Picea pungens Colorado Blue Spruce Pofr Potentilla Bush Cinquefoil Potr Populus Prvi Prunus virginiana Psta Pseudotsuga Quga Quercus Rhtr Rhus trilobata Skunk bush Sumac RUB Rubus spp. Raspberry Rila Ribes lacustre ROS Rosa spp. Rowo Rosa woodsii SAL Salix spp. Willow SAM Sambucus Elder Syoc Symphoricarpos repens Cliff Fendlerbush Juniper Creeping Mahonia ramosissimum fruticosa tremuloides Squawapple Quaking Aspen Common Chokecherry taxifolia gambellii Gambel Oak Rose spp. occidentalis Snowberry �- 148 APPENDIX G Percentage mean estimates of floristic composition and average frequency of occurrence of plants in the various forest types within the study area are listed below. Plant symbols appear with common and scientific names in Appendix F. Forest type symbols and meanings are given in Appendix D. Percentages are carried to the nearest 1%. Coverages and frequencies of less than 0.5% are called trace amounts and are represented by the letter "T". Plant Symbol Per Cent Floristic Composition A-7 UnderstorY,/Six Transects Per Cent Composition Per Cent Frequency Acgl T T Ac1a T 1 AGR T 8 Amal I 8 ARN T 3 ASl' 3 36 Bare Ground! 1 8 BET T 1 B:1ialill T T BRO 1 2 CAR 4 50 CHi 3 18 Coso; T 8 DAT:J 3 20 ERI T 5 FRA T ]@i �- 149 APPENDIX G -- Continued Plant Symbol Per Cent Composition Per Cent Frequency GER T 1 HEL 1 2 Litter 65 69 LUP 1 8 Osob 5 40 Pofr T 1 POA T 3 Potr 1 5 Prvi T 5 Guga 2 10 Rowo 1 10 SAL T 3 Smst 1 15 Stcom 1 3 Syoc 2 40 TAR 1 2 Thfe 1 1 UNFO 3 61 TOTAL 100 :.-----) A-7 Overstory, Six Transects Plant Symbol Per Cent Composition Per Cent Frequency Amal 4 5 BET 3 5 �- 150 ~ APPENDIX G -- Continued Plant Symbol Per Cent Composition Per Cent Frequency Ceoc 3 5 Clli 2 8 Coso 3 10 Potr 22 35 Prvi T 3 Guga 10 14 Rowo 9 25 SAL 3 3 Smst T 3 Syoc 7 23 Thfe T 3 TOTAL 66 A-8 Understory, Twenty-Nine Transects Plant Symbol Per Cent Composition Per Cent Frequency Ac1a 4 58 Agin T T AGR T 2 Agre T 2 Agtr T 10 Amal T 1 Anro T 2 Aqca T 9 AQU T 2 �- 151 - APPENDIX G -- Continued Plant Symbol Per Cent Composition Per Cent Frequency Arco T 9 Aruv 1 9 Bare Ground 5 23 Bran T 4 Brin T 4 BRO T 2 Cali T 1 CAR 4 53 Chvi 1 8 CIR 1 9 Dape T T E1ca 1 11 Ergr T 1 Erra T T Ersp 2 26 EUP T 3 Feru T 1 Feth T 10 FAA 1 14 Gabo 1 28 Juco T 1 Kocr T 11 Litter 55 LUP T 3 Mare T 3 �- 152 - APPENDIX G -- Continued Plant Symbol Per Cent Composition Per Cent Frequency POA 2 Potr 10 10 Psmo 2 28 Rila T T Rowo 1 10 Sore T 5 St1e T 11 Syoc 1 3 TAR 2 15 Thfe 1 19 Thmo 1 11 UNFO T Veca T 2 Viad T 1 Viam 4 53 Vied T 5 TOTAL 100 A-8 Overstory, Twenty-Nine Transects Plant Symbol Per Cent Composition Per Cent Frequency Abla 4 6 Ama1 1 1 Jucom T 1 Pipu T T Potr 42 68 �- 153 APPENDIX G -- Continued Plant Symbol Per Cent Composition Per Cent Frequency Prvi T T Psmo T 1 Psta 3 3 Rila T T Rowo T 1 Syoc 3 13 UNFO T 1 TOTAL 53 A9A Understory, Three Transects Per Cent Composition Per Cent Frequency Ac1a 1 13 ANT 2 7 ARN 3 20 AST T 7 Bare Ground T 7 Brca 1 13 Brin T 3 CAR 2 27 Clli T 3 Elca 4 37 ERI 12 47 EUP T 3 FRA T 10 Plant Symbol �- 154 APPENDIX G -- Continued Plant Symbol Per Cent Composition Per Cent Frequency Gabo T 10 Geri 7 47 Litter 44 90 LUP 1 7 Mare T 3 PEN T 3 POA 3 10 \Potr T 7 Psmo T 10 Quga T 3 Rila 1 7 SAL T 10 SAM 1 3 STI T 3 TAR 3 23 Thfe T 10 UNFO· 13 Viam 2 30 Vied T 3 TOTAL 100 A9A Overstory, Three Transects Plant S;ymbo1 ACE Per Cent Composition 14 Per Cent Frequency 20 �- 155 APPENDIX G -- Continued Plant Symbol Per Cent Composition Per Cent Frequency Ama1 T 3 Pien 1 3 Potr 30 43 Prvi 1 3 Quga T 7 Rila 3 10 SAM 2 3 Syoc T 3 TaIAL 51 NC Understory, Fifty-Four Transects Per Cent Composition Per Cent Frequency Ac1a 1 22 Agin T T AGR T 4 Agsm T 5 Agsp T T Ama1 T 2 ANT T 3 Ardr T T ARN T 8 Artr T 5 Aruv T T Asam T 9 Plant Symbol �- 156 APPENDIX G -- Continued Plant Symbol Per Cent Composition Per Cent Frequency Bare Ground 26 53 Barh 1 3 Bogr T 1 Bran T T Brin T T BRO T 5 Brte T 2 Cagu T T CAR 7 49 Cerno T T Cha1 T T Chiv T 1 CIR T T Clli T T CRYP T 2 DAU T 1 ELY T 1 ERI T 5 ERIO T 2 FES T 4 Gabo T T GIL T 1 GUT T T HEL T T Hyac T 1 �- 157 APPENDIX G Plant Symbol Continued Per Cent Composition Per Cent Frequency Kocr 1 15 LAC T T Lili T 1 Litter 55 94 LUP T 4 Mare T 2 Orhy T 1 PEN T 1 Popr 3 29 Prvi T 1 Quga 2 15 ROS T 3 SED T 2 SEN T T Srnst T T SOL T T Stco1 T T Stcom T 4 St1e T T STI 1 5 Syoc 1 8 TAR T 1 Thfe T 1 UNFO 2 Viarn T T �- 158 APPENDIX G -- Continued Plant Symbol Per Cent Composition YUC T TOTAL 100 Per Cent Frequency T NC Overstory, Fifty-Four Transects Plant Symbol Per Cent Composition Per Cent Frequency Amal 2 3 Artr T 2 CAR T T Cemo T T Chvi T T ERI T T Juut 1 1 Pera T 1 Pied 1 1 Pipo 1 2 Popr T T Prvi T T Quga 23 39 Rowo T T Syoc 1 3 TOTAL 29 NF Understory, Two Transects Plant Symbol Artr Per Cent Composition 8 Per Cent Frequency 30 �- 159 APPENDIX G -- Continued Plant Symbol Per Cent Composition Per Cent Freguency Bare Ground 59 90 Litter 33 100 OPU T 5 Stcom T 10 UNFO T 20 TOTAL 100 NPJ Understory, Twenty-Seven Transects Plant Symbol Per Cent Composition Per Cent Freguency AGR T T Ama1 T 1 ANT T 2 Arfr T 1 Artr 1 4 AST T 5 ASTE T 1 Bare Ground 54 80 Bogr T 3 CAR 1 5 Cemo T 1 Chvi 1 1 CIR T T Clle T 1 Elan T T �- 160 APPENDIX G -- Continued Plant Symbol Per Cent Composition Per Cent Frequency ERI T 1 ERIO T 1 Erra T 2 Feov T 4 GUT T T HIL 1 6 Juut T 1 Kocr T 1 LEP T 1 Liin T T Litter 40 89 OPU T 3 Orhy T T PEN T 1 Pera T 1 PHI.. T 3 Pied T 1 POA 1 10 Pofe T 1 Pinyon Flower T 1 Quga 1 6 ROS T 1 SAL T 1 Sihy T 2 Sope T 5 �- 161 - APPENDIX G -- Continued Plant Symbol Per Cent Composition Per Cent Frequency Spco T 5 Stcom T 5 STI T 5 Stvi T 3 Thmo T 1 TRI T 1 UNFO T UNGR T T YUC T 1 TOTAL 100 NPJ 'Overstory, Twenty-Seven Transects Plant Symbol Per Cent Composition Per -Cent Frequency AMAL 1 3 Arfr T T Artr 1 2 Cemo 1 2 Chvi T 1 Elan 1 1 Juut 8 12 Pera 1 4 Pied 13 17 Quga 4 6 Rhtr 1 1 �- 162 APPENDIX G -- Continued Plant Symbol Per Cent Composition Per Cent Frequency Rowo T T SAL 2 2 TOTAL 33 P9AMP Understory, Fifteen Transects Plant Symbol Per Cent Composition Per Cent Frequency Acla 1 30 AGR T 7 Amal T 5 ANT T 7 Aruv 2 19 Asam 2 11 Bare Ground 3 13 BRO 1 9 CAR 7 79 EUP T 1 Feth T 4 FRA T 8 GIL T 1 Hido T 1 JUN T 3 Kocr T 7 Litter 76 99 Mare 1 7 Pipo T 1 �- 163 APPENDIX G -- Continued Plant Symbol Per Cent Composition Per Cent Frequency Popr T 14 Prvi T 1 Quga 1 14 Rowo 1 9 SED T 1 SOL T 2 St1e T 1 Syoc 2 30 TAR T 1 Thmo 1 27 UNFO 2 TOTAL 100 P9AMP ·Overstory, Fifteen Transects Plant Symbol Per Cent Composition Per Cent Frequency Ama1 T 2 Pipo 33 47 Potr T 2 Quga 3 21 Syoc 1 8 TOTAL 37 P9APP Understory, Four Transects Plant Symbol AGR Per Cent Composition T Per Cent Frequency 15 �- 164 APPENDIX G -- Continued Plant Symbol Per Cent Composition Per Cent Frequency Artr T 3 Asam T 15 Bare Ground 14 33 Bran T 3 CAR 5 50 Chvi T 5 ERI T 3 Erra 1 5 Feth 1 5 Kocr 2 17 Litter 68 95 Mare 1 15 Popr 1 23 Prvi T 3 Quga 2 5 Rowo 1 5 Syoc 2 13 Thfe T 5 UNFO 2 TOTAL 100 P9APP Overstory, Four Transects Plant Symbol Per Cent Composition Per Cent Frequency Amal 2 5 eEA 1 3 �- 165 - APPENDIX G -- Continued Plant Symbol Per Cent Composition Per Cent Frequency Pipo 27 40 Potr 1 5 Quga 23 48 Rowo T 3 Syoc 1 3 TOTAL 55 P9BMM Understory, Two Transects Plant Symbol Per Cent Composition Per Cent Frequency Acla 2 35 AGR 1 20 ANN 2 10 Aruv T 5 AST 3 45 Bare Ground 17 80 Cagu T 10 CAR 4 60 CIR T 5 ERI 1 15 Kocr T 5 Litter 67 100 Mare T 10 Pecr 2 35 Pipo T 5 �- 166 APPENDIX G -- Continued Plant Symbol Per Cent Composition Per Cent Frequency POA T 5 Potr T 5 SED T 10 Syoc T 5 Thmo 1 30 TOTAL 100 P9BMM Overstory, Two Transects Plant Symbol Per Cent Composition Per Cent Frequency Jucmo 6 10 Pipo 17 25 Syco 2 5 TOTAL 25 P9BMP Understory, Seven Transects Plant Symbol Per Cent Composition Per Cent Frequency Acla 1 33 AGR T 14 Amal 1 9 ARN 1 1 Aruv T 1 AST T 1 Bare Ground 8 26 B1tr T 1 �- 167 APPENDIX G -'-Continued \ Plant Symbol Per Cent Compos ition Per Cent Frequency Bran T 1 BRO T 1 CAR 6 56 ERI T 10 Feth T 10 FRA T 4 HEL T 6 Hido T 1 Hili T 7 Hoju T 1 J1JN T 6 Kocr T 7 Litter 72 100 LUP T 6 Mare 1 9 Pecr T 1 Pipo T 4 POA 1 11 Quga 4 26 ROS T 1 SED T 4 SOL T 1 Syoc 3 19 Thfe T 4 UNFO 1 �- 168 - APPENDIX G -- Continued Plant Symbol Per Cent Composition Per Cent Frequency UNGR T 1 Viam 1 20 TOTAL 100 P9BMP Overstory, Seven Transects Plant Symbol Per Cent Composition Per Cent Frequency Ama! 2 4 Pipo 31 53 Quga 7 21 Syoc 3 11 TOTAL 43 P9BPP Understory, One Transect Plant Symbol Per Cent Composition Per Cent Frequency Acla T 10 Amal 2 10 AST 1 40 Bare Ground 3 30 Bran 1 10 CAR 12 80 Feth 1 10 Litter 76 100 POA T 10 Syoc 1 10 �- 169 APPENDIX G -- Continued Plant Symbol Per Cent Composition Per Cent Frequency Thfe 1 30 UNFO 2 TOTAL 100 P9BPP Overstory, One Transect Plant Symbol Per Cent Composition Per Cent Frequency Amal 6 40 Pipo 38 50 Quga 27 70 Syoc 6 40 TOTAL 77 SF9AMP Understory, Two Transects Plant Symbol Per Cent Composition Per Cent Frequency Aruv T 10 Bare Ground 2 10 CAR 13 65 Clli T 5 EUQ T 5 Kocr T 5 Litter 58 100 Mare 11 65 Pien 3 5 Prvi T 5 �- 170 - APPENDIX G -- Continued Plant Symbol Per Cent Composition Per Cent Frequency Quga 2 20 Smra 1 5 TAR 1 10 Thfe 2 15 UNFO 7 Viam T TOTAL 100 SF9AMP Overstory, Two Transects Plant Symbol Per Cent Compos ition Per Cent Frequency Pien 43 50 Prvi 24 40 Psta T 5 Quga 5 20 Rila 1 5 Rowo 2 15 Syoc 9 35 TOTAL 84 SF9AWP Understory, Two Transects Plant Symbol Per ·Cent Composition Per Cent Frequency Acla 3 40 Bare Ground 3 20 Brin T 15 �- 171 - APPENDIX G -- Continued Plant Symbol Per Cent Composition Per Cent Frequency CAR 3 65 E1ca 1 10 EUP T 5 FRA 1 35 Kocr T 5 Litter 58 100 Psmo 5 65 St1e T 15 Thfe 2 10 UNFO 19 Viam 5 55 Vied T 20 TOTAL 100 SF9AWP Overstory, Two Transects Plant Symbol Per Cent Composition Per Cent Frequency Ab1a 29 35 Pipu 10 10 Potr 46 60 Syoc 2 15 TOTAL 87 �APPENDIX H Climatological data gathered from three weather stations on the Uncompahgre Plateau between July 1, 1964, and March 31, 1965, is summarized below. Data Collected at Station No. 1 July Aug. Sept. Oct. Nov. Dec. Jan. Feb. Mar. Max. Temp. (OF) Min. Temp. (OF) Ave. Max Temp. (OF) Ave. Min. Temp. (OF) Ave. Mean Temp. (OF) Max. Re1. Hum. (%) Min. Re1. Hum. (%) Ave. Max. Re1. Hum. (%) Ave. Hin. ReI. Hum. (%) Ave. Mean Re1. Hum. (%) Total Precip. (In.) Ave. Wind Vel. (m.p.h.) 100 54 89 60 75 100 16 82 32 57 1. 67 3.3 90 41 81 54 68 100 8 82 28 55 2.14 2.5 85 36 74 45 59 100 11 81 30 56 1.38 4.5 78 29 70 36 53 88 10 59 24 47 0.00 3.5 63 12 44 24 36 100 11 86 41 65 0.99 2.8 54 5 38 20 29 100 21 88 44 66 1.44 2.7 53 2 41 18 30 100 30 87 44 65 0.75 2.5 56 -2 46 19 33 100 15 85 31 58 0.38 3.2 64 5 45 24 35 100 10 80 30 54 0.88 3.2 95 49 88 54 71 100 19 90 31 61 2.50 2.4 89 38 79 50 65 100 13 90 36 63 3.26 2.2 82 32 72 42 57 100 12 88 32 59 2.17 4.0 77 24 68 33 51 100 14 57 24 45 0.06 2.2 61 8 42 20 32 100 12 89 41 65 1.20 2.5 52 -4 35 18 27 100 12 87 44 66 1.47 2.5 49 -1 39 17 29 100 29 90 45 67 1.13 2.4 51 -6 43 18 32 100 18 85 31 58 0.24 2.8 62 0 43 21 32 100 14 85 33 58 0.94 3.4 Data Collected at Station No. 2 Max. Temp. (oF) Min. Temp. (OF) Ave. Max. Temp. (OF) Ave. Min. Temp. (OF) Ave. Mean Temp. (OF) Max. ReI. Hum. (%) Min. ReI. Hum. (%) Ave. Max. ReI. Hum. (%) Ave. Min. Re1. Hum. (%) Ave. Mean ReI. Hum. (%) Total Precip. (In.) Ave. Wind Vel. (m.p.h.) f-J ~ �APPENDIX H -- Continued Data Collected at Station No. 3 July Aug. Sept. Max. Temp. (OF) Min. Temp. (OF) Ave. Max. Temp. (OF) Ave. Min. Temp. (OF) Ave. Mean Temp. (OF) Max. Rel. Hum. (%) Min. Rel. Hum. (%) Ave. Max. ReJ.. Hum. (%) Ave. Min. Rel. Hum. (%) Ave. Mean Rel, Hum. (%) Total Precip. (In.) Ave. Wind Ve 1. (m.p.h ,) 84 43 78 48 64 100 17 93 35 64 1.47 0.8 79 31 70 44 57 100 22 96 39 68 2.38 2.2 74 31 68 43 55 100 5 80 28 54 1.17 2.1 Oct. Nov. Dec. Jan. Feb. Mar. --- --- -- =- -- -- =- -- --.;, I-' c:3 �- 174 - Prepared by: Date: Gary T. MYers Assist. Wildl. Researcher April, 1965 Approved by: Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief Ferd Co Kleinschnitz Fed.eralAid Coordinator � https://cpw.cvlcollections.org/files/original/64d880bd61648a0dfc9519a8f595f677.pdf 078c086d5ea0234973a0a3bd962526ce PDF Text Text April, 1965 - 175 - State of Project JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH SEGMENT ...::C::..:O:..::L:.:O~RA:::::::D.:::.O _ Game Bird Survey \.J-37-R-lS No. Work Plan No. 12 Job No. 12 Period PROJECT Covered: April Wild Turkey 1, 1964 to March Roost Study 31, 1965. Personnel: ABSTRACT A total of 116 trees in six permanent fall-winter roosting sites, 17 trees in two permanent spring-summer roosting sites, and 10 trees in four temporary ~vinter roosting sites were measured. Permanent fall-winter roosting sites consisted of groves of unevenaged, over-mature ponderosa pines with round open, flat open, or dead crowns. Older Douglas fir and white fir were utilized to a lesser extent. Permanent spring-summer roosting sites consisted of groves over-mature ponderosa pines within the summer ranges. Narrowleaf of 1963-64 cottonwood and pinon pine trees were utilized as temporary winter roosts. of unevenaged, late in the winter Times which wild turkeys entered the Sarcillo Canyon roost were recorded at weekly intervals in-so-far as possible and compared to official sunset times for fall, winter, and early spring periods. During the fall of 1964, twelve observations indicated the turkeys began entering the roost an average of 2% minutes prior to official sunset compared to an average of 2 minutes prior to official sunset during the fall periods of 1962 and 1963. The extremes in readings were, however, greater during the fall of 1964. �- 176 - During the winter of 1964-65, ten weekly observations indicated the birds began entering the roost an average of 4~ minutes prior to official sunset compared to an average of 1 minute after official sunset during the winter of 1962-63. During the early spring of 1965, three weekly observations indicated the birds began entering the roost an average of 19 minutes prior to official sunset compared to an average of 3 minutes after official sunset for the early spring of 1963. A comparison of roosting times with weather conditions indicates that weather affects roosting behavior to a great extent. The birds began entering the roost trees much earlier than average times on evenings when it stormed (snow or rain) and the sky was completely overcast.' Birds began entering the roost trees much later than average times during evenings of very high wind and cool or cold temperatures. The interval between the time the first bird was observed to fly into a roost tree and the time when the last bird was observed to fly into a roost tree varied from 5 to 25 minutes during this period of observations. These intervals appeared to vary more by the lateness or earliness of the hour in comparison to approaching darkness rather than the numbers of birds using the roosting area. Flocks were normally in the vicinity of the roosting area from twenty minutes to one-half hour prior to the time they began flying into the roost trees. Recommendations: In order to secure as large a sample as possible, additional permanent fall-winter and spring-summer roosting sites should be located and measured, photographic records should be made for selected representative sites, data should be summarized, compiled, and analyzed, and a final report on findings should be completed. The protection of selected groves of over-mature ponderosa pines with a history of use as roosting sites within wild turkey winter ranges should be a prime consideration in future Merriamrs turkey management. Objectives: (1) To determine the physical mountain type range. characteristics of roosting sites within (2) To determine use of roosts by wild turkeys and their importance management of the species. a in the �- 177 - Techniques (1) Physical a) b) c) d) e) f) g) (2) Used~ characteristics b) c) by: Approximate sizes of roosting sites--distances were paced and numbers of trees utilized were counted. Heights of trees--measuring tapes and Abney level were used. Diameters of trees (d.b.h.)--diameter tape was used. Ages of trees--ring counts were made on stumps in the vicinity the various roosts and/or increment borings were taken. Age classes--Dunning's classification for unevenaged ponderosa pine was used. Exposure--the position of the sun was observed. Slope--measuring tapes and Abney level were used. Use characteristics a) were measured were measured of by: Times of entering the Sarcillo Canyon roost--observations were made from a vantage point at weekly intervals in-so-far as possible during fall,'winter, and early spring periods, Duration of use of roosts--rputine inspections were made of known roosting sites. Numbers of birds using roosts--late afternoon and evening counts were made in the vicinity of known roosting sites. ��- 179 - WILD TURKEY ROOST STUDY Donald M. Hoffman INTRODUCTION Investigations were continued on this study to secure factual information on roosting site preferences, physical characteristics, and use within a mountain type range to better manage this resource. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS Wildlife Conservation Officer E. Bechaver assisted with counts of wild turkeys in the vicinity of known roosts and located a new roosting site. Ranchers Andreoli brothers, J. Bailey, J. Cordova, G. Duzenack, L. Magnino, McDonald brothers, Reitzus brothers, A. Sebella, and S. Sporleder permitted use of their lands for the study and contributed information on populations. Special thanks are due rancher J. Sakariason for the use of his land for intensive studies and assistance with the collection of field data. Findings: A total of 116 trees in six permanent fall-winter roosting sites, 17 trees in two permanent spring-sunnner roosting sites, and 10 trees in four temporary winter roosting sites were measured during the report period. All sites are located within historical Merriam's turkey ranges within the Spanish Peaks and Sangre de Cristo Range areas. All roosting sites located to date have three characteristics in common: (1) all are located in areas possessing all the necessary range requirements for survival (food, water, and cover), (2) all sites afford fair to excellent protection from prevailing westerly winds, and (3) all are located in sites with either a nearby rocky ledge or open ridge affording ease in entering the roost trees. Table 1 lists general information pertaining to all active roosting sites located to date. Exposures of roosts varied but none faced directly west. Slopes varied from 10 percent within the relatively flat canyon bottoms to 25 percent where located on steep slopes or in steep rocky canyons. The largest site measured to date is approximately 4~ acres in size with 30 trees showing use, while the smallest is less than 1/8 acre with 2 trees showing use. As many as 44 trees were utilized in one large roost location on Abbotts Creek in Las Animas County. Populations of wild turkeys in the vicinity of known roosts and sex-ratio counts which were listed in the earlier segment Job Completion Report (April, 1964) are presented for this segment under Work Plan 12, Job 13 and are not repeated herewith. �- 180 - Physical characteristics.--Table 2 summarizes measurements of 116 trees in six permanent fall-winter roosting sites. Tall, over-mature ponderosa pines are preferred during this period. Preferences for particular trees within a roosting site and particular portions of roosting areas were clearly indicated, although measurements did not clearly reveal why. As many as ten turkeys have been observed roosting in some trees while others show only occasional use. The average d.b.h. for all trees measured was 21.3 inches, while the average height was 71.6 feet. The largest tree measured was a ponderosa pine 101 feet in height and 39~ inches d.b.h. The age of this tree was estimated to be at least 230 years, while the average age of all trees measured was estimated to be 170~ years. Figures 1 and 3 are photographs of portions of permanent fall-winter roosting sites. Figure 5 shows the location of all roosting sites. Table 3 summarizes the measurements of 17 trees in two permanent springsummer sites. Here, as with the permanent fall-winter sites, large overmature ponderosa pines were utilized extensively. It is believed, however, that most Merriam's turkey roosting sites during these periods are of a more temporary nature than the two measured. During the spring and summer periods, the birds are normally found in smaller flocks than during the wintering period, and they are on the move much of the time. Indications of wild turkeys using groves of aspen, limber pine, and spruce have been found. Figure 2 is a photograph of a permanent spring-summer roosting site. Table 4 summarizes the measurements of 10 trees in four temporary winter sites. The use of narrowleaf cottonwood and pinon pine trees have been observed during periods when flocks. are forced to range lower than normal due to periods of heavy snows. The use of these roosts is normally heavy for a short period only, with flocks drifting to higher areas as soon as the weather permits. Figure 4 is a view of a temporary winter roosting site. Routine interviews of landowners have indicated that in one instance a permanent fall-winter roosting site in upper Sarcillo Canyon was cut during logging operations, resulting in flocks of wild turkeys now seldom being observed. A change in cultivation practices has also occurred, however, which may have had an effect in this respect. Fortunately, most landowners within wild turkey ranges have recognized the importance of leaving roosting sites unlogged and undisturbed. The protection of groves of unevenaged, over-mature ponderosa pines showLng a history of utilization as ~vinter period roosting sites should be one of the prime considerations in Merriam's turkey management in Colorado. Use characteristics.--Due to a wide variance in the times of entering the Sarcillo Canyon roost in the late evenings compared to official sunset times found during 1962-63, this series of weekly observations was repeated during the fall, winter, and early spring periods of 1964-65. Table 5 shows a summary of these data. In twelve weekly observations during the fall of 1964, the flocks began roosting an ave~age of 2~ minutes prior to �- 181 - official sunset with a range of -25 minutes to t 23 minutes. This averages very close to the average of 2 minutes prior to official sunset found in the earlier series of observations but the extremes were greater during the fall of 1964. In ten weekly observations during the winter period of 1964-65, the flocks began entering this roost an average of 4:!z minutes prior to official sunset compared to an average of 1 minute after official sunset in the winter of 1962-63. In three observations during the early spring of 1965, the flocks began entering this roosting site an average of 19 minutes prior to official sunset compared to an average of 3 minutes after official sunset in 1963. A difference in weather conditions probably caused this difference in average times between the two years. A comparison of roosting times with weather conditions indicates that weather affects roosting behavior to a great extent. The birds began entering the roost trees much earlier than average times on evenings when it stormed (snow or rain) and the sky was completely overcast .. Birds began entering the roost trees much later than average during the evenings of very high wind and very cool or cold temperatures. The interval between the time the first bird was observed to fly into a roost tree and the time when the last bird was observed to fly into a roost tree varied from 5 to 25 minutes during the period of observation. These intervals varied more by the lateness or earliness of the hour in comparison to approaching darkness rather than the numbers of birds using the roosting area. Flocks were estimated to be in the vicinity of the roosting area usually from twenty minutes to one-half hour prior to the time they began flying into the roost trees. During the few evenings when the birds were very late going to roost, they did not tarry before flying into the trees. �Table 1.--Information relating to Merriam's turkey roosting sites. Exposure (%) Approx. Size Acres S 15 3/4 NW 25 E 21 1/2 16 20 E 10 3/4 4 11 S 15 1 l3 10-12 0 4/9/64 E 25 4 1/2 30 16-92 29-107 4/2/64 & 4/14/64 Slope Type Name and County Permanent fall-winter. Abbotts Creek, Las Animas Bear Creek Mesa, Huerfano Mavricio Canyon, Las Animas Santa Clara Cr., Huerfano Sarci110 Canyon # 1, Las Animas Sarci110 Canyon # 2, Las Animas Permanent spring-summer. North Fork, Las Animas Spring Creek, Huerfano Temporary winter. E. Indian Creek, Huerfano Huerfano River, Huerfano Middle Creek # 1, Huerfano Middle Creek # 2, Huerfano 2 No. trees Utilized 1963-64 No. birds during 1963-64 No. birds during 1964-65 44 50-60 62 9 11 0 4/16/64 & 4/24/64 4/28/64 36 4/13/64 Dates Measured 5/15/64 I-' NE 16 1/2 6 12-15 -- 5/8/64 SE 23 1/2 11 12-15 ~- 8/5/64 N 10 1/8 2 3-6 0 4/10/64 N 10 1/8 3 10 0 4/10/64 SW 15 1/8 2 8 0 8/14/64 NE 10 1/8 3 12 0 5/14/64 R? �Table 2.--Summary of measurements--116 trees utilized as roosts within 6 permanent fall-winter Age Class d.b.h. (in. ) Height (ft.) Est. % Crown Est .Age (yrs.) Shape Top 34 Pp 1 D 33 OM 741.75T 21. 82 M 15~-39~ R 2532.0 T 74.5 M 50-101 R 2l30.0 T 64.5 M 30-90 R 23 22 Pp 1 Df 4 D 19 OM 475.75 T 20.68 M 10-31 R 1596.0 T 69.4 M 45-93 R 1298.0 T 68.1 M 40-86 R 22 18 Pp 4 Df 1 D 20 OM 1 1'1 477.25 T 21. 69 M 13}z;-30~R 1622.0 T 73.7 M 45-95 R 1520.0 T 72.4 M 25-95 R 3049.0 T 169.1 M 111-230 R 17 A 2211. 0 T l70.1 M 130-225 R 13A 2144.0 T 164.9 M 132-225 R 13A 2825.0 T 154.4 M 125-210 R 17 A 10229.0 T 170.5 M 111-230 R 60 A 16 D 14 RO 3 FO 1 P 8 D 11 RO 3 FO 1 P 7 D 14 RO 1 FO Use Class No. in Sample Species V. Heavy 34 Heavy 1'1oderate Light 37 32 Pp 3 Df 2 Wf 2 D 35 OM 776.75T 20.96 M 12 3/4-36~R 2555.0 T 70.0 M 43-92 R 2335.0 T 68.7 M 30-95 R Combined 116 106 Pp 8 Df 2 Wf 8 D 107 OM 1 M 2471.50 T 21. 31 M 10-39~ R 8305.0 T 71.6 M 43-101 R 7283.0 T 62.8 M 25-95 R 12 D 16 RO 7 FO 2 P 43 D 55 RO 14 FO 4 P sites. No. Trunks Fire Scarred 7 11 2 6 26 Key to abbrev.: D - Dead Pp - Pond. pine OM - Overmature Df - Doug. M - Mature fir Wf - White TM - Thrifty, mature fir Nc - Narrowleaf Cottonwood Pinon-Pinon pine T - Total M - Mean R - Range A - No. Aged D - Dead RO - Round, open FO - Flat, open P - Pointed i-' CX> w �- 186 - ; --, , ..~ Figure 1. Central portion of permanent fall-winter Merriam's turkey roosting site known to have been used each winter since 1949. Thirty over-mature and dead Ponderosa pine and Douglas fir were used for roost trees during the 1963-64 wintering period by flocks varying from 16 to 92 birds. Located on John Sakariason Ranch, Sarcillo Canyon, Las Animas County. �- 187 - Figure 2. Central portion of a grove of eleven over-mature Ponderosa pines used as permanent spring-summer wild turkey roosting site since 1951. Located on Spring Creek, San Isabel National Forest, Huerfano County. �- 188 - Figure 3. Portion of a grove of forty-four unevenaged over-mature Ponderosa pines which were used heavily as roosting trees by flocks totaling 50 to 60 birds during the 1963-64 wintering period. Located on Bar N-I Ranch, Abbotts Creek, Las Animas County. �- 189 - Figure 4. Grove of narrowleaf cottonwoods used as temporary winter roosting site early in 1964 by ten Merriam's turkeys. Located on Huerfano River State Management Area, Huerfano County. �Table 5. - Summary of times Merriam's turkeys entered Sarcillo Canyon roost in evenings compared to official sunset times for area. Period Fall, 1964 No. Weekly Observations Time Using Official Sunset Time as Base Time Interval Between First and Last Bird 12 - 2.5 min. (M) - 25 to .;. 23 min. (R) 9.6 min. (M) 5 to 15 min. (R) 29 to 104 No. Birds Using Roost ~.Jin ter, 1964-65 10 - 4.5 min. (M) - 64 to .;. 14 min. (R) 12.3 min. (M) 7 to 25 min. (R) 31 Early Spring, 1965 -3 -19.0 min. (M) 42 to lI min. (R) 9.3 min. (M) 8 to 10 min. (R) 14 to 45 Key to abbreviations: (-) Refers to times birds entered roost before official sunset time for area. Refers to times birds entered roost after official sunset time for area. (M) Mean (R) Range (.j.) I-' '8 to 107 �191 - '0' '0' .325. N 00' T 34 S Key: e Permanent fall-vrinter roostinr: site. ~ o Temporarywinter roosting site. PeI'r.1anentspring-summerroosting site. Figure 5.. Sparri.sh Peaks study area showingapproximate locations of roosting sH,es. ••GI'O SH2J\ �- 192 - Prepared Date: by: Donald M. Hoffman Assoc. Wildl. Researcher April, 1965 Approved by; Wayne W. Sandfort 'Game Re searc h:----'C:::Ch:--::-"i e-f-=--- Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Ai'dCoordina tor �April, 1965 - 193 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH SEGMENT PROJECT State of COLORADO Project No. W-37 -R-18 Game Bird Survey Work Plan No. 12 Experimental Job No. 13 Period Covered: April Personnel: habitat improvement for wild turkeys. 1, 1964 to March 31, 1965. E. J. Bechaver and J. F. Cordova, Wildlife Conservation Officers, and Donald M. Hoffman, Associate Wildlife Researcher and Project Leader. ABSTRACT Wintering period population comparisons for the 1963-64 and 1964-65 periods show an increase in developmental area populations in 1964-65 compared to 1963-64 (131 to 95) and an increase in control area populations (110 to 98), A total of 309 wild turkeys was counted in 19 flocks during the 1963-64 wintering period and a total of 379 wild turkeys was counted in 15 flocks during the 1964-65 wintering period within the extensive study area. Sex-ratio counts show 50 males : 100 females in 1963-64 based upon a sample of 105 birds compared to 43 males : 100 females in 1964-65 based upon a sample of 210 birds. Brood counts and reports secured during the su~~er of 1964 indicated a good hatch occurred with 43 broods averaging 6.0 young per brood. Eight broods each were recorded for the developmental and control study areas; however, the control area broods averaged smaller numbers of poults per hen. A good crop of berries, mast, and other wild turkey foods during 1964 combined with a relatively mild, open winter in 1964-65 resulted in less use of experimental wintering areas than probably wou Ld have been the case with less natural food and/or a harder winter. Wild turkeys utilized five of the six experimental wintering areas during the 1964-65 wintering period for various periods of time. All six of these areas had wi.n t er Lng flocks of wild turkeys during the preceeding winter. A total of five wild turkeys was known to have been killed wi thi.n the various study areas by 19 hunters checked during the May, 196L~ season and �- 194 - ten additional wild turkeys were known to have been killed by 18 hunters during the early October, 1964 season. In comparison, Game Management Division information shows a total of 44 wild turkeys killed by 127 hunters during the 1964 seasons in Unit 85. A very light kill and very light hunting pressure are evident from these figures, considering the size of the turkey population. Wild turkey flocks were observed to be under conditions of extreme stress within the various study areas during the late winter of 1963-64 due to a lack of natural food and extreme weather conditions (heavy snows and high winds) from late January through mid-March of 1964. These conditions resulted in most of the known wintering flocks breaking up into small groups of two to eight birds and to range lower than normal, in the vicinity of ranch corrals in some instances. The late winter moisture was, however, beneficial by improving natural food production in 1964. In contrast, a combination of good natural food production in 1964 and mild, open weather during the 1964-65 wintering period resulted in many flocks leaving established feedgrounds for extended periods of time. Objective: To determine the value of development of wintering grounds through the use of supplemental feed on wild turkey numbers, distribution, and harves t. Procedures: (1) Collect and record background information. (2) Map study areas. (3) Determine annual population (4) Determine annual reproductive (5) Determine seasonal distribution. (6) Determine turkey kill and hunting pressures. (7) Provide supplemental effects. levels. success. feed in selected areas and study �- 195 - EXP~RIMENTAL HABITAT IMPROVEMENT FOR WILD WRKEYS Donald M. Hoffman Introduction: This report covers the first year of developmental work from April 1, 1964 to March 31, 1965 and information collected during the predeve10pmental period from April 1, 1963 to March 31, 1964 under a companion study (Work Plan 12, Job 12). Collection and recording of background information: A start was made during this report period in the gathering of background information pertaining to early history, populations, and land-use practices through a search of literature and interviews of various persons. Information is fragmentary and incomplete at this time but will be gathered throughout the life of the study. Mapping of study area: An area of approximately 1224 square miles in size with boundaries of Colorado Highway #69 on the north, U. S. Highway #85-87 on the east, Colorado Highway #12 on the south, and the top of the Sangre de Cristo Range on the west comprises the extensive study area. Within this extensive study area, five developmental intensive study areas consisting of Middle Creek, East Indian Creek, Cucharas River, and Wahatoya Canyon-Bear Creek Mesa in Huerfano County and North Trujillo Creek-Mavricio Canyon in Las Animas County; five control intensive study areas consisting of Huerfano River and Pass Creek in Huerfano County, and Abbotts Creek-Duling Creek, Wilkins Creek-Whiskey Creek, and North Fork of the Purgatoire River in Las Animas County have been selected. In addition, population data are being gathered within all other known wintering areas within the extensive study area. A U. S. Forest Service map of the San Isabel National Forest, scale onefourth inch per mile, was reduced photographically by a commercial firm to provide work maps for this study. Figure 1 shows approximate elevations with'in the extensive study area. The area between the 7,000 and 11,000 feet contours measures approximately 900 square miles in size and constitutes the year around Merriam's turkey range. The area between the 9,000 and 11,000 feet contours (235 square miles) is almost entirely summer range. The area between the 7,000 and 9,000 feet contours (665 square miles) is primarily winter range but many wild turkeys summer within this belt as well. Figure 2 shows precipitation patterns within the extensive adapted from a map prepared by the Colorado State Planning information from U. S. Weather Bureau. study area as Division with Annual population levels: Annual population levels have been determined through flock and sex-ratio counts of birds on wintering grounds. Wintering populations which appeared to be more or less stabilized were used for �- 196 - population comparisons rather than maximum numbers of birds counted since some flocks are' thought to move between different wintering areas from time to time. Locations of flocks observed and reported along with numbers of birds for the 1963-64 predevelopmental period are shown in Figure 3. Table 1 lists maximum numbers of wild turkeys and wintering population levels for all developmental, control, and other study areas. A total of 95 birds in seven flocks was recorded for the five developmental intensive study areas and 98 birds in seven flocks were recorded for the five control intensive study areas in the 1963-64 period. In addition, -116 birds in five flocks were recorded in other wintering areas within the extensive study area. Locations of all flocks observed and reported along with numbers of birds for the 1964-65 developmental period are shown in Figure 4. Table 2 lists maximum numbers of wild turkeys and wintering population levels for all developmental, control, and other study areas. A total of 131 birds in six flocks was recorded for the five developmental intensive study areas and 110 birds in five flocks were recorded for the five control intensive study areas in the 1964-65 period. One developmental and one control area had no known wintering birds during this first year of the experimental developmental work. In addition, 138 birds in four flocks were recorded in other wintering areas within the extensive study area. The indicated increase in all classifications of study areas reflects the effects of good reproductive success more than any other factor since supplemental feed was not provided until the late fall of 1964. Table 3 lists sex-ratio information for two wintering periods. A sex ratio of 50 males : 100 females was recorded for the 1963-64 wintering period based upon a sample of 105 wild turkeys observed at close range. A sex ratio of 43 males 100 females was recorded for the 1964-65 wintering period based upon a sample of 210 wild turkeys observed at close range. Brood counts: Reproductive success has been determined through counts of broods within the various study areas and securing reports of broods from individuals considered to be reliable. A good hatch was indicated within the extensive study area with 43 broods averaging 6.0 young per brood (Table 4). Eight broods each were recorded within the developmental intensive study areas and control intensive study areas. Broods averaged fewer numbers of young per brood within the control study areas; however, the sample size was small. Seasonal distribution: Late fall - winter distribution for the 1963-64 and 1964-65 periods are shown in Figures 3 and 4. During the spring of 1964, the progressive movement of wild turkeys presumed to have wintered on East Indian Creek were recorded at five locations from the wintering site to the top of the Sangre de Cristo Range. Elevations for these locations will be measured with an altimeter during 1965. �- 197 - A series of field notes pertaining to life history and movements during the spring of 1963 through the winter of 1964-65 periods has been c6llected. Analysis of data has not as yet been completed since the necessary elevational readings have not been secured. Evidence of wild turkeys nesting and ranging in areas at elevations at or above 10,500 feet was found during the summer of 1964. The proposed future marking of birds from various wintering sites with different colored tags should help determine movement patterns. Kill and hunting pressure: A very light kill and very light hunting pressure are indicated both by random hunter checks within the various developmental, control, and other study areas and Game Management Division kill information from hunter report cards. Nineteen hunters were checked during the May 2-12, 1964 season and five birds are known to have been killed. Eighteen hunters were checked during the October 3-11, 1964 season and ten birds are known to have been killed. An indicated success ratio of 40.5 percent was calculated from these hunter checks. Game Management Division information shows 44 birds killed by 127 hunters in Game Management Unit #85, comprising all of the extensive study area except for the area north of U. S. Highway #160 with two control intensive study areas As indicated success ratio of 34.6 percent was calculated from these figures. o Developmental work: Developmental work has consisted of the provision of supplemental feed in the form of baled straw and whole grain (oats) within selected study areas and regular field surveys of both developmental and control intensive study areas to determine populations, distribution, periods of use, and collect information on factors such as predation, disease, crippling incidence, and poaching activity. Developmental intensive study areas have been located in isolated areas where possible to keep the flocks away from human activity and possible poaching activity. Most of these areas have been accessible only on foot or with the use of snowshoes during most of the past two wintering periods. The purchase of a Ski-doo snow vehicle should speed the collection of field data and allow for more time to be spent within the intensive study areas o Table 5 lists the amounts and costs of supplemental feed used within the five developmental intensive study areas and within the Sarcillo Canyon area for roost studies conducted under Hork Plan 12, Job 12. Table 6 lists information on the periods of use, times of movement to wintering areas, and times of spring dispersal for the first year of the developmental work. Environmental factors: Heather.--The weather during the 1963-64 period was relatively mild and open for the period from late fall of 1963 through mid-January, 1964. The period from late January, 1964 through mid-March, 1964 was characterized �- 198 - by periodic heavy snows and high winds resulting in most of the known wintering flocks of wild turkeys breaking up into small groups of two to eight birds and ranging lower than usual. Although many of the wild turkey flocks appeared to be under conditions of extreme stress during this period, the weather cha.nged for the better during late March, 1964 and spring dispersal began in early April. The weather during the late fall-winter of 1964-65 must be summarized as relatively mild and open with most snows falling during the early and late wintering periods. This was in sharp contrast to the heavier than normal snows over many of the other mountain areas of Colorado, particularly on the Western Slope. Green grass was observed starting in all wintering areas checked late in January of 1965, almost two weeks earlier than usual. Spring dispersal began during late March, 1965. Two sets of weather recording instruments arrived too late in the winter to be set up in the desired locations. Total snowfall amounts in inches recorded during the late fall - winter of 1964-65 were: La Veta 80, East Indian Creek 111, North Trujillo Creek 81, and Sarcillo Canyon 56. Natural food production.--Extensive food production surveys were made along six selected routes within the various study areas during August and September of 1964. Results indicated heavier than normal production of acorns, pine nuts, berries, and other wild turkey food in all areas checked. This food production was thought to result from the good moisture conditions of the late winter period, fair amounts of moisture through the spring and summer periods, and few late frosts. Population limiting factors: Predation.--One instance of a predator killing a wild turkey on a wintering ground on Middle Creek was recorded Tracks of a bobcat in the vicinity were found and feathers were scattered over a wide area. o An instance of eagle activity causing a wintering flock to abandon a feedground in Sarcillo Canyon late in the winter was also recorded. No evidence of eagle kills was found o Disease.--One hen in the Sarcillo Canyon area was observed to be somewhat droopy in appearance on one occasion during the winter period of 196465. It is not known whether this bird died or recovered since it was seen only the one time. All other birds, other than those listed under "crippling incidence" appeared to be healthy. Crippling incidence.--A total of eight wild turkeys was observed or reported following the close of the regular fall open season and one additional bird was reportedly crippled during the May season. Of these, one crippled hen and two crippled mature toms were crippled to the extent that they probably died. The largest number of crippled birds was obsezwed in the Sarcillo Canyon area whcr e five crippled birds were countedtl!1<1l flock of 98 wild turkeys on November 12, 1964. �- 199 - Illegal kills.--No evidence of poaching activity was found and none was reported during the report period. Table 1. - Populations of Merriam's turkeys during period October, 1963 _ March, 1964. Type of Area Area Maximum Number During Period Number Birds Date Source Developmental Middle Creek 20 E. Indian Cr. 70 Cucharas R. 14 Wahatoya Can.Bear Cr. Mesa 11 N.Truji110 Cr.Mavricio Can. 50 Sub-Totals 165 Control Huerfano R. Pass Cr. Abbotts Cr.Duling Cr. Wilkins Cr.Whiskey Cr. North Fork Sub-Totals Wintering Population Number Number Birds Flocks Source Jan., 64 1/24/64 3/6/64 FC FC FC 20 30 14 2 1 FC FC FC 4/1/64 FC 11 1 FC 3/17/64 FC,RR 20 95 2 FC 1 7 16 14 Jan., 64 Fall, 63 FC,RR RR 10 4 1 1 FC RR 50 Mar., 64 FC,RR 50 1 FC,RR 17 17 114 Mar., 64 Mar., 64 RR RR 17 17 2 2 RR RR 98 7 Sarcillo Can. 92 Burro Can. 14 Del Aqua Can •.!.! 62 Apishapa R. 13 Santa Clara Cr. 11 192 Sub-Totals Nov., 63 Winter Winter Winter Winter 16 14 62 13 1 11 1 116 5 309 19 Other Totals 471 FC RR RR RR RR 1 1 1 FC RR RR RR RR 1/ Ten birds live-trapped by Game Management Division and transported to North Dakota. Key: FC - Flock count. RR - Rancher report. �- 200 - Table 2. Populations of Merriam's turkeys during period October, 1964 - March, 1965. Type of Area Area Maximum Number During Period Number Birds Date Source Developmental Middle Cr. E.lndian Cr. Cucharas R. Wahatoya Can.Bear Cr. Me sa N.Truji11o Cr.Mavricio Can. Sub!-Totals 147 Control Huerfano R. Pass Cr. Abbotts Cr.Duling Cr. Wilkins Cr.Whiskey Cr. North Fork Wintering Population Number Number Birds Flocks Source 21 62 19 3/16/65 12/14/64 3/6/65 FC FC RR 13 60 13 1 1 1 FC FC FC 9 1/15/65 RR 9 1 RR 36 1/13/65 FC 36 2 FC 131 6 27 20 2/25/65 Jan. , 65 RR RR 18 20 2 1 FC 70 Jan •• 65 RR 62 1 RR 10 0 127 2/2/65 :till RR 10 0 110 -- 1 0 5 - RR 107 0 13 8 10 1/14/65 Burro Can. Del Aqua Can. Apishapa R. Santa Clara Cr. 107 0 13 8 10 1 0 1 1 1 FC Sub-Totals 138 138 4 Totals 412 379 15 Sub-Totals -- RR RR Other Sar cf l l,o Can. 2/25/65 Winter Winter Key: FC - Flock count. Rancher or other report. RR- FC RR RR RR FC RR RR RR FC �Table 3. - Sex-ratio counts of Merriam's turkeys. Juv. &: Mature Juv. Mat. Period Area Toms Toms Hens - Oct.! 1963 to Mar.! 1964 Hidd1e Cr. Cucharas R. Truj i110 Cr.Havricio Can, Huerfano R. Abbotts Cr.Duling Cr. Sar cLlLo Can. Sub-Totals Unc1ass. Total Date of Best Count 0 2 1 0 17 12 2 0 20 14 3/19/64 3/6/64 12 2 0 1 4 6 4 1 20 10 3/17 /64 3/12/64 5 9 2 1 18 13 0 0 25 23 3/13/64 3/10/64 30 -5 -70 -7 112 Indicated Sex-ratio 50 males : 100 females J\) 0 I-' Oct., 1964 to AEr., 1965 Hidd1e Cr. E.Indian Cr. N.Truji110 Cr.Havricio Can. Huerfano R. Sar cLl l,o Can. Sub-Totals 0 6 4 9 12 44 5 0 21 59 3/22/65 2/24/65 13 4 6 10 0 11 13 0 78 0 14 12 36 18 107 1/13/65 2/25/65 2/3/65 29 34 147 31 241 43 males : 100 females �- 202 - Table 4. - Sunnnary of brood count information, 1964. Type of Area Hens Poults Average Brood Size Developmental 8 56 7.0 Control 8 32 4.0 Other 27 168 6.2 Totals 43 256 Average Table 5. 6.0 - Amounts of feed utilized and costs, 1964-65. Item Middle Creek Developmental Acres E.Indian Cucharas Bear Cr. Creek River Mesa N. Trujillo Creek Other Area Sarcillo Canyon Whole oats (Lbs , ) 650 1,100 300 100 600 1,850 Straw (bales) 8 12 7 5 13 9 Number turkeys wintered 13 60 13 0 36 107 Cost of feed $22.85 $37.90 $12.20 $5.40 $23.90 $58.15 Total cost of feed (all areas) $160.40 Total number of birds wintered 229 Cost per bird $ 0.70 �Table 6. - Information on use of experimental wintering areas, 1964-65).1 Time of movement Wintering Period to wintering Periods of light Periods of heavy Summer, 1964 ot no utilization utilization Population area Area Type of Area Developmental Middle Creek Time of spring dispersal None Dec.14, 1964 Nov.4-Dec.13, 1964 Dec.14-15, 1964 Late Mar., 1965 Dec.16-3l, 1964 Jan.1-20, 1965 Jan.2l-Feb.ll,1965 Feb.12-late Mar. (no util.) 1965 E. Indian Creek 1 brood Oct.10, 1964 Jan.15-Feb.5,1965 (no util.) Nov.4,1964-Jan. 14, 1965 Feb.6-late Mar., 1965 Late Mar., 1965 Cucharas River 1 brood Flock wintered lower but returned in spring. Nov.4,1964-late Mar., 1965 (no util.) Late Mar.,1965 Early Apr.,1965 Late Mar., 1965 Bear Creek Mesa None Flock wintered elsewhere (School Cr. 1) Nov.,1964-late Mar., 1965 None Unknown 2 broods few toms Early Oc t , , 1964 Nov.4-27, 1964 (no util.) Dec.4,1964-Jan.2, 1965; Jan.16-late Mar.,1965 (v. light util.) Nov.28-Dec.3, 1964 Jan.3-l5, 1965 Unknown Several broods & few toms Early Oct., 1964 Nov.4,1964 Late Mar.,1965 Late Mar., 1965 N. Trujillo Creek & Other Sarcillo Canyon 1/ Dates are approximate and were determined by regular checks of areas. ro o w �- 204 '0' R.73W. "I ..... ,-. .", . H.6BWNEW IO~"OO' i:'; "-'1 1 _ ( I LJ.: Cd'_l.~'~A[)O ,.. MeXICO r, I .I 1 1 RE'7W Figure 1. Apr)roxim::,te elevations rrit hi.n stndy area n,s adapted prepared by GeoLord.caL Survey, ';fashinrr,ton, D.C. - 19S9. R 66W 'I I \ R G5W '0' from topographical R64W nta.1>""'" �- 205 - Figure 2. Distribution of: precipitation within study area as adapted from a map prepared by Colorado State Planning Division. Data from U.S. Weather Bureau. �- 206 Figure 3, Approximate Locatd.ons and numbers of birds during Jate fall-'winter of ·19'63.-b4. peri6ct""'" �- 207 - 00' ",' R.13W. ,c' R.72W. ~ft71 W. .32S. N '0 T 335 T.34 S "( t~',t .• _....C({L~·Jt:!10., ~.... -;.. _ R.70W. R.I'i9 W '0' Figure 4. Approxi.mabe of 1964~.5. locations R.68WNE.W '0:0,"00' MU<ICQ r.nd number-s of b l.rds R.67W. R 66w R.6SW 00' during late fall-'Vlinter R 64 W period �- 208 - Prepared by: Da te : Donald M. Hoff WEn Assoc. Wildlife Researcher April ~_1-,9::....6--=5=-- _ Approved by: Wayne W. Sandfort --::0--Game Research Chief Ferd. C, Kl.e Lns chrrl t.z Federal Aid Goord'""i~n-a-t:-o-r- �April, 1965 - 209 - .JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH SEGMENT PROJECT State of COLORADO Project No. W-37-R-lB Work Plan No. 13 Sharp-tailed Job No. 3 Breeding Grouse Period Covered: April Game Bird Survey 1, 1964, through March Grouse Season Studies, Sharp-tailed 31, 1965. Personnel: ABSTRACT The search for sharp-tailed grouse dancing grounds was continued through this segment. Work was limited to seven areas in nine counties. Only three new grounds were located, but more emphasis was placed on recounts of old grounds in an attempt to determine optimum hours and dates for counting. Weather conditions counting grounds. all areas. for April,. May, and June were unfavorable for locating or Bird activity was decreased and bird numbers were down for Findings: Location of Dancing Grounds.--The major portion of time was spent in Routt and Moffat with specific trips.to Gunnison, Mesa, Montrose, Ouray, Phillips, San Miguel, and Yuma counties. One new dancing ground location was located equa-distant between two old grounds (Elk Mountain Nos. 1 and 2) in the Elk Mountain area northwest of Steamboat Springs. As one of the old grounds, Elk Mountain No. I, had sporadic use this year, this new ground may be the result of movement. �- 210 - Two new grounds were located on the Annan Ranch off Twenty-mile Road southeast of Hayden. One of these grounds was so located that no count of males was obtainep. It was completely surrounded by oakbrush 10 to 20 feet high and the birds flushed from the small clearing in such a manner that none were seen. In two other areas, Thornburg Mountain south of Craig and the Cow Creek drainage south of Steamboat Springs, male sharp-tailed grouse were observed, but as singles or, at least, without definite patterns associated with dancing ground locations. Other areas visited where birds had been reported for the past year included: Big Creek drainage south of Collbran; Black Sage Pass east of Gunnison; Cow Creek drainage northeast of Ridgeway; Dallas Divide west of Ridgeway; Highway 90 west of Montrose; and the Sandhill region between Yuma and Holyoke. Weather conditions ranged from marginal to extremely stormy for all trips to these areas and no birds were seen or heard. Counting of Dancing Grounds.--Two dancing grounds, Elk Mountain Nos. 1 and 2, were selected as representative grounds for repeat counting through the courtship period. Both grounds are accessible and are less than three miles apart, which allows observation of each during optimum hours in a single morning. The two grounds have been reasonably consistent in number of males present for the past two years. Elk Mountain No.1 has varied between 7 and 11 birds for the past years; while the Elk Mountain No.2 counts have ranged from 17 to 23 active males. A schedule was established to allow for weekly visits to these grounds commencing on April 10 and continuing to the m~ddle of June. While original planning called for seven-day intervals, weather conditions and a spring turkey season resulted in actual intervals of 10, 4, 4, 18, 2, and 20 days. Four Elk Mountain No. I birds were present and active one morning out of the seven while birds 't••ere present at Elk Mountain No. 2 four mornings out of the seven. However, on four of the seven mornings, the weather, although clear at counting time, had been or became stormy just preceding or just following my checks. The high and only count on Elk Mountain No.1 was four males. These birds had moved approximately 100 yards south of their regular location for the past two years and performed only at infrequent intervals. High counts of males on Elk Mountain No. 2 were 11, 13, 11, and 12 on April 10, 20, 28, and May 16, respectively. The degree of activity was never high and time spent on the ground by the males was limited. For example, on April 10, birds did not arrive until 6:20 a.m. and all left by 6:46 a.m. On April 20, 2 arrived at 5:03 a.m., 11 at 5:06, 4 left at 5:11 a.m. On April 28, 5 birds arrived at 4:46, 5 more at 4:56, one at 5:11. Silent periods, with no sound or dancing, of 9 minutes were recorded this morning. Three evening trips, 5:00 to 7:00 p.m., were made to these grounds, but no birds were observed. Activity was high at only one ground and then for 32 minutes. Also, this was the only morning that females were seen on a ground. �- 211 - Other dancing grounds, Cold Springs, Dry Gulch, Elk River Cemetary, Gillilunds, Hayden Divide, High Mesa (Winfrey's), Pelly's, Rock Springs Gulch, Schneiders, and Yellow Jacket, with birds present in previous years were checked and found vacate. At two other grounds, McKinney and Salt Creek, birds were present in reduced numbers. Evaluation Factors.--A dry, mild winter was followed by a wet, stormy spring. The Steamboat Springs weather station recorded storms 12 days in April, 10 days in May, and 13 days in June. There were two nights above freezing in April, one in May, and 23 in June. Hayden in the west center of the sharptai1 range recorded 14 stormy days in April, 9 in May, and 16 in June. On April 10, there was from one to three feet of snow on the Elk Mountain dancing grounds. Although there was bare ground on some south slopes, growth of green feed had not begun. Even on days that it did not storm, fog was often present until one hour after sunrise. The ground remained wet for the mountain areas through June. A trip to Phillips and Yuma counties in eastern Colorado was interrupted one day by a rain storm and the second day with a dust storm. This area looks favorable as to vegetation and topography, but only one hybrid (sharptail and prairie chicken) has been reported in spring and summer populations. Wintering birds, possibly migrates from Nebraska, are frequently observed. From observations this spring there would appear to be a direct relationship between weather conditions and courtship activity. Observations on related species, blue and sage grouse, however, showed a similar decrease in numbers. This might indicate that the reduction in bird populations occurred before the breeding season with little relationship to weather conditions. A dead male grouse weighing 775 grams was found in the road near the Elk Mountain No. 1 dancing ground on May 16. Reason for death could not be determined from visual inspection. A few feathers had been dislodged indicating a possibility of collision with the telephone or electric wires at this location. Prepared Date: by: Glenn E. Rogers Assist. Wildl. Researcher April, 1965 Approved by: Laurence E. Riordan Assistant Director, Research Ferd C. K1einschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator ��- 213 - JOB COMPLETION RESEARCH State of REPORT PROJECT SEGMENT COLORADO ----------~~~----------- Project No. W-37-R-18 Game Bird Survey Work Plan No. 13 ---------------------- Sharp-tailed Grouse Sharp-tailed grouse hunter checks Job No. 5 Period Covered: April 1, 1964, through March 31, 1965. Personnel: ABSTRACT A\ un Lfiorm. three-day season was held September 12 to 14 for all major sharptailed; grouse areas in contrast to the split season (Moffat and western Routt counties opening in August with the rest of the state opening in September) for the past three years. Work was confined to field checks and' ERe operation' on a single roadblock on the Uncompahgre Plateau. Only one shatrtp-tailed gr.ou.se- wa'1); ehec ke d and hunter :ii.R.'fte'l1wliew$ (fi:s.e]0sed tile l harvest of three more naan- ~Qne~; 8plFings. Recommendations: The extremely light hunting pressure and harvest apparently precludes obtaining sufficient data and the project should be discontinued. Objectives: (1) To determine (2) To collect various include: a) b) c) d) e) f) g) success of hunters during the open season. data on sharp-tailed Crops for food habitat analysis; Weights; Incidence of parasitism; Molting characteristics; Sex and age ratios; Hunting pressure; and Hunting methods. grouse, which may �- 214 - Techniques Used: The sharp-tailed grouse range on the Uncompahgre Plateau was patrolled between daylight and 11:00 a.m. and a roadblock was operated at the north terminus of the Uncompahgre Plateau road from 2:00 p.m. to 8:00 p.m. for the first two days of the open season. All hunters were stopped and interviewed to determine number of hunters, hours hunted, and number of birds killed. Findings: The early-August season for sage and sharp-tailed grouse in Moffat and western Routt counties of the past several years was deleted with the entire state opening on September 12 and closing on September 15 except for all of Rio Blanco and the southwest corner of Moffat County, which remained open through September 20. Howeve r , there are very few sharp-tailed grouse in the area where the season was extended. On September 12 and 13 (Saturday and Sunday), sharp-tailed grouse hunters on the north end of the Uncompahgre Plateau were contacted and interviewed. Those with dogs were encouraged to hunt specific areas where sharp-tailed grouse had been observed in previous years in the hope that enough birds would be killed to give an adequate sample. On opening day, five hunting parties (total of 11 hunters) were persuaded to try for sharptails in two limited areas of about three square miles. Of these, only one hunting party consisting of one man and two dogs, and the third party to work one area, flushed and killed a single bird. The bird was an adult male weighing 724 grams. A roadblock was set up at the north end of the Uncompahgre Plateau Divide road between the hours of 2:00 and 8:00 p.m. for the first two days of the season. Each hunter was stopped and interviewed, but no sharp-tailed grouse were checked. Howeve r , the interviews did disclose that three sharptails had been killed, out of 15 flushed, approximately one mile north of T-Bone Springs. This area is a steep, west-facing slope with a very dense mixed brush cover and has never been considered as sharp-tailed grouse habitat. Prepared Date: by: Glenn E. Rogers Assist. Wildl. Researcher April, 196:; Approved by: Laurence E. Riordan Assistant Director, Research Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �April, 1965 - 215 - State of REPORT RESEARCH SEGMENT PROJECT COLORADO --------~~~~~--------Game Bird Survey W-37-R-18 Project No. Work Plan No. ~1~3~ _ Covered: April Sharp-tailed Grouse Summarization of Sharp-tailed Grouse Studies 6 Job No. Period JOB COMPLETION 1, 1964, through March 31, 1965 Personnel: ABSTRACT The 1963-64 completion reports along with additional illustrative materials including maps, charts, and photographs will be utilized as bases for a technical publication. Data suggesting that sharp-tailed grouse have inhabited high mountainous areas of the eastern slope were obtained through the Denver Museum of Natural History. Sufficient information regarding breeding, production, and harvest has not been attained. Weather permitting, another spring should provide minimum trend data for breeding survey, but several years of intensive work would be necessary to obtain sufficient production and harvest data. Recommendations: Final compilation should await completion season study so that this data can be included. Objectives: (1) To complete studies. and publish results of 1965 breeding of sharp-tailed grouse Techniques Used: The results of all study to date have been compiled and references reviewed. Local departmental meetings were attended and personnel were interviewed regarding occurrence of sharp-tailed grouse. �- 216 - A routine visit to the Denver Museum of Natural History to obtain sharptailed grouse study skins for a television show confirmed a previously discounted report of sharptail distribution above timberline on the eastern slope of Colorado. Two study skins in the museum's collection had been taken in September 1954 above timberline on the east slope of Buffalo Peaks. PreVious reports of sharp-tailed grouse above timberline near Georgia Pass and above the town of Georgetown had been discounted as unreliable. Findings: Materials including maps, charts, and photographs for the proposed manuscript have been prepared. A comprehenSive preliminary write-up using many of these materials was included in the 1963 segment report. Some new information has been collected as reported under specific jobs for this year. The preliminary drafts reveal definite deficiencies in breeding, production, and harvest information. Present evidence indicates that different study procedures and several years of intensive work would be necessary to obtain adequate production and harvest data. However, if normal or milder weather conditions should prevail this coming spring, the minimum required breeding season data for a final report and adequate census trends should be attainable. Work will continue on collecting and editing information for a technical publication. The present backlog of articles awaiting final editing and lay-out precludes publication before early 1966. Prepared by: Glenn E. Rogers Assistant Wildlife Researcher Date: April, 1965 Approved by: Laurence E. Riordan Assistant Director, Research Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �April, 1965 - 217 - State of JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT COLORADO --------~~~~---------- Project No. Game Bird Survey W-37-R-lS Work Plan No. 15 Mountain Quail Job No. 1 Appraisal of Mountain Period Covered: December Quail Habitat 28, 1964, to March 31, 1965. Personnel: ABSTRACT The state of Colorado has long been interesteq in extending their populations of upland game birds by introducing exotics or transplanting native species. A limited study on the suitability of Colorado habitat for the introduction of California mountain quail has been completed. Data gathered from food habit studies from Washington, personal examination of terrain in southern and central California, and a temperature correlation for parts of Colorado and selected areas of California indicate good possibilities for a successful mountain quail introduction into selected areas of Colorado. Recommendations: Selected areas of Colorado appear to have suitable food, terrain, and climatic conditions for California mountain quail. The initial plant should be made in the Indian Creek drainage of the Uncompahgre National Forest. Objectives: (1) Techniques Used: To determine possibilities quail in Colorado. for adaptation of the mountain (1) Native habitat of the species in California was compared with habitat in Colorado to determine if areas exist where this species may survive. Specific areas were selected where successful establishment of this species would be most likely. (2) Recommendations pertaining to the introduction species into the State were prepared. of this ��- 219 - APPRAISAL OF MOUNTAIN QUAIL HABITAT Glenn E. Rogers There is an extremely large area of mountainous land in Colorado presently void of game birds or only occasionally or partially occupied by blue grouse, sharp-tailed grouse, or turkey. This land encompasses an area between 5,000 and 9,000 feet in elevation primarily covered with mixed brush, pinon-juniper, conifers, and aspen. On the western slope of the Continental Divide, a large portion of this land is under public ownership; but the reverse holds true for the eastern slope. For some time, the Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department has been interested in securing species of game birds adapted to this habitat in hopes of increasing the hunting potential in Colorado. Three species of exotic birds have been introduced and of these the chukar partridge appears to have successfully filled a small niche; the Spanish-redlegged partridge was a failure; and the Hungarian partridge introduction is still too new to evaluate. A species presently under consideration for introduction is the California mountain quail (Oreortyx picta picta, Q. E. palmeri, Q. E. eremophila). This quail ranges throughout the mountains of California from the Mexican border to Oregon and in parts of Idaho, Nevada, Oregon, and Washington. The range of the subspecies (Mclean, no date) varies from the desert mountains of the south, where it is found with or just above the California valley quail (Lophortyx~. californica) and the chukar partridge, to the colder mountains of the north where it ranges with or above the valley quail, the sage grouse (Centrocercus urophasianus), the ruffed grouse (Bonasa umbellus), and the blue grouse (Dendragapus obscurus). Climalogical Requirements Very little research has been done on the mountain quail so that its requirements for food, water, and cover are little known. Judging from the range types that they inhabit, these factors should not restrict their establishment in Colorado. Southern range examined around Los Angeles was primarily heavy brush, sage, and chamise, with very little understory but with small fire-opened parks of cheat grass and weeds. Habitat areas in the southcentral part of the state were primarily a ponderosa pine, manzanita-type with a mixed grass and weed understory. Few food habit studies have been reported on mountain quail. One study limited to November and early December was reported by Yocom and Harris (1953) for southeastern Washington. The following table gives their analysis for 33 mountain quail. �- 220 - Table l.--Crop and Gizzard Analysis of 33 Mountain (Yocom and Harris, 1953). 27 Gizzards No. Species Grit Chaff Coccinellidae Unidentified insect Agropyron spicatum Bromus sp. Bromus tectorum Triticum aestivum Alnus sp. Celtis douglasii Polygonum avicu1are Rumex sp. Amaranthus retroflexus Stellaria media Crataegus sp. Melilotus alba Medicago 1upulina Robina pseudo-acacia Trifolium agrarium Vicia villosa Erodium cicutarium Rhus glabra Rhus toxicodendron Solanum nigrum Sambucus glauca Symphoricarpos sp. Helianthus annuus Lactuca scariola of Occ. 27 21 Qbail 26 Crops Per cent of of total Vol. Occ. No. 1.6 9 11 6 2.8 1.8 2 3.0 4 4 4 5 8 6 6 9 4 4 3 4 3 .7 6 5 2.9 .9 5.5 .9 Trace 1.2 6 7.2 3 3 2.8 3.7 8.1 4 9 10 7 4 18 11 5.8 .7 22.7 4 2.5 6 4 2.9 Trace 2 5 13 13 6 Oregon (Masson and Mace, 1962) lists a general diet of fruits, seeds, vegetable matter, and insects by both young and adults. In all areas of southern and central California visited, brush of various species formed a dense ground cover. In one area a varied stand of ponderosa pine (Pinus ponderosa) was also present. Yocom and Harris (1953, Washington) lists rabbitbrush (Chrysothamnus spp.), sage (Artemisia spp.), serviceberry Amelanchier florida), rock spirea (Holodiscus dicolor), ninebark (Physocarpus malvaceus), skunk bush (illiusglabra), currant" (Ribes aureum), and snowberry (Symphoricarpos rivualris), among others, as present on mountain quail range. Mountain quail habitat examined in southern and central California consisted of mountainous areas with a heavy ground cover of brush and/or trees. Terrain inhabited varied from valley bottoms to steep slopes with slopes preferred. Yocom and Harris (1953) mention that mountain quail were found in stream drainages flowing through canyons. �- 221 - Table 2.--Summarization of Climacurve Data on Mountain Quail for Selected Locations in Colorado. Stations Months Jan. Feb. Mar. Apr. May June July Aug. Sept. Oct. Nov. Dec. Canon City Collbran X Colorado Springs X 0 X 0 X X X 0 0 0 0 X X X X X 0 X 0 Cortez X X 0 Craig X X X X X 0 Del Norte X X X X X 0 Delta Durango 0 X X X X X X Eagle X X 0 X Fort Collins X X X X Glenwood Springs X Grand Junction X X 0 Julesburg X 0 X X X X X 0 X Longmont X Meeker X X X Monte Vista X 0 Montrose X Norwood 0 Pagosa Springs Paradox 0 Rifle 0 Rocky Ford X X 0 0 X X X 0 X X X X X 0 X X X X X X 0 X X X 0 X 0 0 0 X X X X X X X 0 X X X 0 X 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 X 0 X X X 0 0 0 0 X X 0 0 X X X X X X Springfield Sterling X X X Salida Steamboat Sprgs. X X X 0 0 X X 0 X 0 0 0 Gunnison Hayden X X 0 X X 0 0 X �- 222 - Table 2.--Summarization of Climacurve Data on Mountain Locations in Colorado. (continued) Quail for Selected Months Apr. May June July Aug. Sept. Oct. Nov. Dec. Jan. Feb. Mar. Stations Trinidad X Wray X 0 Yuma X Falls within o Is within the climacurve 5 degrees 0 0 0 X X range of 6 California of the mountain mountain quail climacurve quail stations. range. Climacurve data from 6 California weather stations near or within mountain quail range were plotted by Wayne W. Sandfort, Game Research Chief. These stations were McCloud and Alturas in Shasta and Modoc counties of northern California and Bodie, Ellery Lake, South Lake, and Summerdale in Mono, Inyo, and Mariposa counties of central California. These stations range from 3,270 (McCloud) to 8,200 feet (Bodie) in elevation; from a yearly average precipitation of 12.69 (Alturas) to 54.55 inches (Summerdale), all with a light to 20-inch snow cover on the ground from December to May. The mountain quail are considered migratory tending to move down out of the heavier snows in the winter and back up to higher elevations for the summer months. Climacurve data for 31 Colorado stations (Evans and Sandfort, 1960) were compared with the California information and the results analyzed (Table 2). In general, a 11 stations in Colorado showed a correlation w i t h California temperatures for the spring and fall months and all stations in Colorado showed higher temperatures for the months of August than any California station. While only three stations (Durango, Glenwood Springs, and Grand Junction) fell within the climacurve range for the month of January, only 10 stations (Collbran, Craig, Del Norte, Eagle, Gunnison, Hayden, Meeker, Pagosa Springs, and Steamboat Springs) had colder temperatures. From this data it would appear that any mountainous area with summer temperatures comparable to Del Norte, Eagle, or Steamboat Springs and winter temperatures equal to or warmer than Durango, Glenwood Springs, Montrose, Salida, or Trinidad would be climalogically suitable for the mountain quail. Data from special weather stations on the Uncompahgre Plateau indicate the top of Love Mesa has comparable summer temperatures, but the birds would need to descend 1,000 feet in elevation to Escalante Forks area for suitable winter temperatures. The low correlation for summer and winter months between the two climacurves is due to a difference in the precipitation pattern between the two states. California receives most of its moisture during the winter months while July and August are extremely dry. In Colorado, July and August are fairly high in moisture received while December and January are comparatively low. �- 223 - Fig. 1. A heavy brush cover with small open parks is typical of mountain quail winter range in southern California. Fig. 2. This photograph shows the density, height, and lack of understory in the brush cover of the southern California mountain quail winter range. �- 224 - Fig. 3. The mountain quail of east-central California range from the juniper-covered mountains in the background during the winter months to higher timbered areas concealed by the cloud cover of this photograph. Fig. 4. Several flocks of California ponderosa pine and manzanita summer range. mountain quail utilize the primarily ground cover in this photograph for �- 225 - Considering temperature. alone, all stations in Colorado, except the ten previously listed as being colder, would appear to be within the cold limits of the California areas. All mountainous stations above 7,000 feet would appear to be within the warmer limits for summer months. Therefore, if vegetation and terrain requirements can be met and snow depths are within reason, the mountain quail should adapt to a large part of the mountainous area of Colorado. LITERATURE CITED Evans, R. L. and W. W. Sandfort. 1960. Ecological appraisal of Hungarian partridge habitat with reference to adaptation of this species in Colorado. Colorado Game and Fish Dept., Denver, Colo. 38 p. Masson, W. V. and R. U. Mace. Oregon G~me Commission. Mclean, D. D. No date. Sacramento, Calif. 1962. 44 p. Upland 39 p. Upland game birds. game of California. Wildl. Bull. No.5, Dept. of Fish and Game, . 1953. Food habl.·tsof mountain quail Y Gcom, C ..F and S ..W Harrl.·s picta) in eastern Washington. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 17(2) 204-207. Prepared Date: by: Glenn E. Rogers Assist. Wildl. Researcher April 1965 Approved _ (Oreortyx by: Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator ��- 227 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO Project No. W-37-R-18 Game Bird Survey Work Plan No. 16 Water Resources Job No. 2 Period Covered: April 15, 1964 to March 31, 1965. Development Curecanti Reservoir Studies Project Personnel: ABSTRACT The Curecanti Reservoir Project will inundate approximately 8,000 acres of upland game range. Sage grouse will lose the most habitat. Part of this area is also summer habitat for doves and blue grouse. Additional acreage will be lost through road, campground, and horne construction. The National Parks Service will control the reservoir and an additional 10,000 acres in a narrow belt surrounding the lake. The Bureau of Land Management will control approximately 45 percent of the adjacent land area closely followed by private ownership with 28 percent. All organizations, including the United States Forest Service and the Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department, except for the Bureau of Land Management are planning recreational development for land under their control. Recommendations to alleviate damage to the upland game resource include: an immediate moratorium on all brush-eradication projects within the upper Gunnison River drainage; a revision in land-management practices to assure proper grazing of all types of vegetation to maintain a balanced brush, weed, and grass composition; the elimination of unnecessary access roads; and a trial introduction of sharp-tailed grouse. To avoid conflict between hunters and recreationists, state management of the reservoir would be preferred; management of other lands should remain with present federal agencies. Recommendations: At the present time, Development Study reports are made by several people as specialists in their field. A great deal of contradiction can arise as management factors favorable to fish, pheasants, or sage grouse might be unfavorable to waterfowl, deer, or sharp-tailed grouse. As each report is completed, a draft should be submitted to the Water Resource Specialist and to the resident regional Game, Fish and Parks manager for comments and concurrence. All reports should then be consolidated into a single report for publication. �- 228 - Objectives: (1) (2) Techniques Investigate the possible following effects of the project: a. Loss of range areas. b. A~teration c. Restricted game bird movement because of reservoirs, canals, roads, fences, human activities, etc. d. Loss of birds through drowning, hazards, etc. in proportions of available range types o increased traffic Investigate possible effects of project on hunters and hunting occasioned by: a. Effect of reservoir b. Conflict ists. on access by roads and boats. of interests between hunters and recreation- (3) Investigate possibilities for State control of U. S. Government lands within the project area as concerns the management and welfare of blue and sage grouse and hunters. (4) Investigate whether means of mitigating losses to and/or enhancing upland game bird values exist and suggest what these might be. Used: I. Bureau of Reclamation project plans will be studied to learn the nature and extent of the physical features of the project. Existing information which agencies such as the Colorado Department of Game, Fish and Parks, U. S. Forest Service, and Bureau of Land Management have concerning blue and sage grouse numbers, ranges, and movement will be assembled, evaluated, and used together with Bureau of Reclamation plans to serve as the basis of judgements as to the effects of the project on these species. II. On-the-site required. investigations will include range and game surveys as �- 229 - WATER RESOURCES DEVELOPMENT STUDIES CURECANTI RESERVOIR PROJECT UPLAND GAME Glenn E. Rogers The Curecanti Reservoir Project includes the building of three dams (Blue Mesa, Morrow Point, and Crystal) and the flooding of approximately 10,000 acres. The project will extend west from an upper limit about 6 miles west of the city of Gunnison downstream for 35 miles (Figure 1). In general, the two lower reservoirs are confined to canyon sites with minimum interference to wildlife populations. However, the upper reservoir (Blue Mesa) will flood about 9,000 acres of upland game habitat. Previous surveys, principally River Basin studies, have dealt with project effects on wildlife and are reported in various Bureau of Interior publications. This study was not initiated to add or subtract from earlier findings, but to expand all available information into firm recommendations for management application. Methods: The 1960 Bureau of Interior report, Curecanti Unit Colorado River Storage Project, was abstracted; field personnel of the Bureau of Reclamation and the Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department were interviewed; and numerous personal searches were conducted within the project area. Results: River Basin Studies (1960: 85-88) emphasized the sage grouse and mourning dove habitat losses with a slight compensation in an increased habitat for waterfowl. Although extremely small, there will be some loss in habitat for blue grouse, particularly in the Soap Creek drainage. The major loss (Bureau uses figure of 8,200 acres) to all upland game birds will be in spring, summer, and fall habitat. The Bureau did not attempt to estimate what effect the eradication of part of the range would have on the whole population. How essential the hay meadows and adjoining sagebrush flats are to the ecological requirements of grouse are unknown. The final effect can only be determined through continued observation. TI1e reservoir area was traversed by foot and by vehicle at varying periods through the fall and winter of 1964-65. Grouse were not found utilizing the project area during the winter months. Interviews of local federal and state personnel and a review of strutting ground and brood count figures indicate a definite downtrend in population numbers throughout the county. Considering a total area of 9 by 20 miles, 4~ miles on each side of the reservoir center line, the project will directly influence 115,000 acres of land. The National Park Service will control 17 per cent of this area including the reservoir acreage. The Bureau of Land Management will control the major portion, approximately 45 per cent; followed by private operators with 28 per cent; the Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department with 6 per cent; and the U. S. Forest Service with 4 per cent. Excluding the private land from consideration, the Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department can hope to influence the land, game, and people management of 72 per cent of the area. �- 234 - made on the state property near Elk Creek. If this plant is successful, additional introductions should be planned for the area; and (5) additional access roads should not be built until hunter-impact effect is clearly understood. Prepared Date: by: Glenn E. Rogers Assistant Wildlife Researcher April 1965 Approved by: Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �- 235 - JOB CO~~LETION RESEARCH State of C~O~L~O~RA~D~O~ Project No. W-37-R-IB 16 Job No. 3 April SEGMENT _ Game Bird Survey Work Plan No. Period Covered: PROJECT REPORT Water Resources Development Narrows Reservoir Project Studies-- 15, 1964 to March 31, 1965. The obligations of this investigation were fulfilled by the Federal Aid Job Completion Report for W-BB-R-10, WP 5, Job 1, entitled: Evaluation of the Impact of the Narrows Project on Migratory Birds and Hunting Opportunities in the South Platte Valley. Migratory bird and upland game information derived from these two jobs was combined to formulate one report. Prepared Date: by: Harold M. Swope Assoc. Wildl. Researcher April, 1965 Approved by: Wayne W. Sand fort Game Research Chief Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �� https://cpw.cvlcollections.org/files/original/46f94bbe189d7dcbf69aa63abca76fb7.pdf 6d8b5f904c9d030864a014a40b7d1992 PDF Text Text July, 1965 - 1 - .State of Project No. REPORT RESEARCH SEGMENT PROJECT COLORADO W-38-R-18 ------~----------------- Work Plan No. 1 ----------------------- Job No. Period JOB COMPLETION 5 Covered: April Deer-Elk Investigations Migration Ranges Between Experimental Techniques 1, 1963, through March Summer and Winter Trapping and Marking 31, 1964. ABSTRACT Tagging and Neck Banding.--There was a total of 82 elk tagged and neckbanded in Federal Aid traps during the past segment. An additional eight elk were tagged and banded with the aid of a helicopter and a Cap-Chur gun. One fatality occurred during banding operations the past segment. There were 13 tagged and banded elk killed during the 1963 big game season. Neck band sightings only tended to confirm previous years sighting data which indicate that elk in the Gunnison area move about 35 miles to the southeast to winter and the elk on the South Fork of the White River move up to 35 miles to winter. Immobilization and Tranquilization Studies on Colorado Deer and Elk.--A total of 28 animals was injected by means of the Cap-Chur gun, using Sernylan and succinylcholine chloride as immobilizing agents. Of this number, six deer and six elk were injected with Sernylan, indicating effective dosages of 1 mg. per pound body weight for both species. Succinylcholine chloride was used on one mule deer fatally, and on ten elk, successfully immobilizing six, of which one died. The effective dosage for elk appears to be 0.040-0.050 mg. per pound body weight. Tranvet was used to tranquilize deer being hauled by truck, apparently successfully. Recommendations: Tagging and Neck Banding 1. Regular systematic aerial flights in the various trapping and banding areas should be continued in order to determine movements of banded animals and to determine areas of concentration at different periods of the year. �- 2 - 2. Keep an up-to-date map, by years, of eBch trapping areB, with a cumulative record of all sightings and tag returns from hunter or winter-killed animals. These mapped locations are to be used in helpin~ set big game seasons within local areas. 3. Concentrate a trapping crew in an area for a week or 10 days, then move to another site for a s~milar period. This should help reduce the number of recatchesby allowing new bands of elk to move into the trapping areas while there is no disturbance from Sno-Cats, horses, etc. 4. Assist Regional Game Management personnel in selecting sites for new traps and oct as consultant in the construction and operation of the new traps. All of the ear tags and neck bands will be ordered by the Federal Aid Research staff, even though the various regions will pay the cost of the materials. This should be done in order to keep numbers and colors from being duplicated. Also the 8ig Game Research staff will aat as a clearing house for all band sightings, tag returns, etc., for the same reasons stated above. 5. Determine the feasibility of tagging and banding elk by using the helicopter and Cap-Chur gun to capture the elk. This type of catching to be done in areas where it is not feasible to group trap elk because of accessibility, etc. Immobilization and Tranguiliz~tion Studies on Color6d~ Deer and Elk Further investigation and refinement of Sernylan and succinylcholine chloride dosages should be made, as well as trying Flaxedil with the double antidote (Prostigmine and Atrapine). Objectives: 1. To develmp new types of gates that will allow big game animals to enter a group trap after it has Qeen sprung. 2. To develop an efficient, gates. 3. To develop a safe, efficient 4. To develop a net catching of trapped deer or elk. 5. To determine what types and colors of materials are best suited for collars or ribbons used to mark big game animals. 6. To observe movements inexpensive portable electric trip for the trap group trap. device that will allow safer handling of marked deer and elk throughout the year. �- 2a - 7. To dye deer or elk from aircraft just prior to big game season to observe mass movements caused by hunter pressure. 8. To determine 9. To weigh live deer and elk at vatious times of the year to get weight loss during the wintering period. 10. To build up a collection Techniques dosages of various drugs. of known-age jaws based upon tag returns. used: 1. The one-way type of gate now being used will be modified and further refined so as to allow elk to enter the trap after it has been sprung without allowing those within the trap to escape. 2. The solenoid trip for the trap gate now being used will continue to be modified and refined, plus the possible incorporation of an electronic device which will allow the gate to trip only after a specified number of elk have entered the trap and broken the light beam, similar to an electric eye. 3. While various types of traps are called "portable," they leave a lot to be desired. Modification of existing types to make them truly portable, o~ more e§sily assembled and disassembled, will be attempted. Use of the eight-foot "snow-f~nce" type of game fencing made by the Department for haystack protection will be tried, and located in various areas of winter elk concentration as the situation demands. 4. The cargo net modification for handling and exam1n1ng the animals after group trapping is required for greater efficiency. It is felt that the net should be made frnm white nylon so as to blend with the snow background and thereby. induce the elk to jump out more ~eadilv. The opening out of the trap above the net may have to be altered to induce jumping also. 5. several types of materials .are being investig~ted, and will be obtained and tried on captive deer and elk at Fort Collins to observe the durability and visibility in the field before mass production is attempted. The weblon and safety Flag material used the past two years have proven unsatisfactory, and a similar high visibility material (Armor-tite) will be tried to determine its durability. �- 2b - 6. Observations of marked deer or elk will be located on maps of each trapping area, kill locations of tagged animals will also be marked on these same maps. These observations will come from Game,and Fish Department personnel, Forest service and Bureau of Land Management personnel, and hunters in the field. Information from hunters will be solicited at check stations. Regular flights in the trapping areas will give month-to-month movements, and all band sightings during the pre and post-season helicopter counts will be located on the maps. 7. Elk will be sprayed with paint or aniline dyes just prior to big game season from a helicopter. Th~ paint or dye will be put on the animals from an air pressure gun that has been designed by the helicopter people for us. 8. Incidental with handling the animals in the group traps, or as the occasion to handle, treat, or move an animal arises, new muscle relaxants will be utilized in varying dosages to make handling the animals easier. 9. A sling or suspension device is needed to enable weighing live elk in the handling net. Recatches will be reweighed to determine the weight loss during the interval, or the total gain between years if recaught the next year. This will involve a four-point suspension, or similar modification, of the net from the supporting frame in such a manner that the animals may be weighed. 10. After a period of years of tagging calf elk~ the collection of known-age jaws from hunter harvested elk will be possible. These jaws will be utilized to fill in gaps in our present elk jawboards used at our check stations and for future reference. Findings: No work was accomplished on further modifications of the one-way gate dur{ng the past segment. As the project was originally planned, M. C. Coghill was to be assigned to this project during the winter trapping season for the express purpose of further refining his trap and gates. luhen the time came for trapping to begin, we could not obtain a release from the Region for Mr. Coghill to work on this job. He was able, however, to scrape enough time from his Regional duties to trap 49 elk at the Ellgin trap using existing equipment . .Further refining of the electric solenoid gate trip was not accomplished for the same reasons listed above. �- ;3 A complete IV "portable" group trap was designed and one was constructed during the project year. The corral portion of the trap was made from plywood sheets, 5/8 inch thick, 4 x 8 feet, with a 1 x 12 board added to the short end. The whole panel is edged with 1 x 2 lumber for edge strength. The corral is set up by wiring the panels together and using the one-way gates and jump frame and net already developed. Working plans are now being drawn up for submission to th~ Journal of Wildlife Management. No additional work was done on the net catching device for the same reasons listed above. However, it is felt that the net and its frame are worked up to the point that we can make a set of specifications and plans for this piece of equipment and submit them to the Journal of Wildlife Management. Periodic reviews of the literature regarding trapping and marking of game animals or birds did not reveal any new techniques of trapping or marking that would help us here in Colorado. The western Saddle Company of Denver, Colorado lists a heavy cotton webbing, 1/8 inch thick, which is used in the manufacture of pack saddles and breeching. This webbing was used the past segment as a base for the plastic used for color banding the animals. Reports of banded elk and neck band returns from the 1963 hunting season indicate that the rolling and fraying 6f the edges of the collars has been solved by sewing the"plastic to the webbing. The collars that we are now using are four inches wide, 36 inches long, and sewed with a two-inch overlap. The edge@ are stitched and and the body of the collar is cross-stiched. OrIon thread is used instead of nylon as in the past. This collar can be made up, using "Armor-tite" plastic material for the colored plastic, for $1.23 each.. Six colors now seem feasible: white, pink, red, light blue, light green and orange. Modification of the air pressure tank and spray nozzle were not accomplished for two reasons. One, Mr. Coghill was not available to the project to work with the helicopter people, and the helicopter service was extremely busy most of the year on other jobs and could not tie up one of their aircraft for the time necessary to work on the pump, etc. It is hoped that more work can be done on this phase of marking animals in the future. No known-age jaws were collected during the 1963 big game season. Several jaws were collected from tagged elk, but none of them were of an exact known age class. Jaws should become more available in future years as more calves are tagged. �- 4 The winter of 1963-64 was a light one from the standpoint of snow depth in the various trapping areas. There were considerable periods of time that extreme cold was experienced, but snow did not accumulate to a great enough extent to make movement difficult for the deer or elk. In spite of the poor trapping weather a total bf 49 elk were trapped on the Sapinero Game Management Area, 19 elk were trapped on the South Fork of the White River, and 14 elk were trapped and banded on Goose Creek in the Rio Grande area. The elk trapped on the Rio Grande were caught by Regional personnel'in a trap built to specifications developed in this job. There were six elk killed during the 1963 big game season in the Gunnison areB that had been tagged and banded on the Sapinero Game Management Area and seven elk were killed in the White River area. None of the tag returns in either of the trapping areas indicated new areas of movement and served only to strengthen the tag returns from previous years. On the basis of information now on hand for the White Riv~r Elk Study Area,most of the elk that are tagged at Hill Creek on the South Fork of the white River move up the South Fork and summer in the Flat Tops Wilderness Area at the head of Park and Lost Solar creeks, near Fowler Peak and the Johnson Park area. These same elk winter from Hill Creek north to the Sleepy Cat area at the head of Lost Creek and"Lost Park, with enough neck band sightings on the Williams Fork side to indicate a natural cross-over of the elk from the Williams Fork into the North and South Fork drainages of the White River. All of the tag returns from the Gunnison area indicate that the elk that are. caught at either the Ellgin or the Corral Gulch traps on the Sapinero Game Man3gement Area summer in the area north and west of the trapping sites at the head of Soap Creek, the Smith Fork, and Coal Creek. Many of these elk are seen or killed in Game Management unit 53 which is completely within the North Fork of the Gunnison drainage. These elk, then, move between 30 and 40 miles to winter ranges where they are trapped. Immobilization and Tranqui}ization Studi~~~.Colorado Deer and Elk Determine the efficiency of available drugs, and their optimum dosages, in immobilizing and/or tranquilizing deer and elk. �_ 5 Techniques Used: Tagging and Nepk Banding 1. The review of literature will be a continuing program of reading in the Journal of Wildlife Management and other pUblications regarding trapping and marking of big game animals that might fit our situation here in Colorado. 2. Bait deer and elk into the group traps with alfalfa hay, salt and other types of bait. Tag and neck bans all animals caught, induce the animals to jump into the net catching device for easier handling during the tagging operation. Weigh the animals while they are in the net to get an idea of the size of the· animals during the winter period. 3. Any reports of handed or tagged animals will be checked out to get the following information: distance traveled, ease of identification, summer range vs. winter range, map all recoveries and sightings; such information to be used for management purposes. 4. Using a helicopter and a Cap-Chur gun, tag and qand elk in areas that do not lend themselves to the regular group trap because of accessibility. Immobilization and Tranquilization Studies on Colorado Deer and Elk C~p-Chur equipment mantifactur~d by the Palmer Chemical and Equipment Company of Douglasville, Georgia, was used to determine the effectiveness of such immobilizing agents as succinytcholine chloride and Sernylon and the tranquilizing agent Tranvet on Colorado deer and elk in confinement, and in the wild through the use of a Bell 47-G38 helicopter. In some instances domestic animals were used, otherwise, the wild animals were in group traps or in pens, except those on Long Ridge of the Rio Grande elk study area. Here the animals were shot from the helicopte~, and biologists and W.C.O~'s acted as "baby sitters" (Fig. 4) with each downed elk to ensure their recovery without accident. The ground crew was transported on a Tucker Sno-Cat, (Fig. 1) and communication between it and the helicopter was maintained by means of civilian band two-way portable radios. The in~ection site was treated with Furacin, and each animal was given two cc of 400,000 unit penicillin and one cc of stearane to help combat infection and the stress of the activity. �- 6 - Table 1.--E1k trapped and tagged at the Ellgin trap, Gunnison National Forest Colorado, Winter 1963-64. Date Sex Age 3/1 3/3 3/3 3/3 Male Female Female Female 3/3 3/3 Tag No. Remarks Calf Mature Calf Yearling 8-165 8-165 8-166 8-166 8-167 8-167 8-168 8-168 Female Female Mature Yearling 8-169 8-169 S-170 8-170 3/3 3/3 3/3 3/11 3/11 3/11 3/11 3/11 3/11 3/11 3/13 3/13 3/13 3/13 3/13 3/14 3/14 3/14 3/14 3/14 3/14 3/15 3/15 3/15 3/15 3/16 3/16 3/16 3/20 3/20 3/20 Male Female Female Female Female Male Female Female Female Female Female Female Female Female Female Female Female Male Female Female Female Female Calf Yearling Mature Mature Mature Calf Mature Calf Calf Mature Mature Mature Mature Yearling Mature Mature Mature Calf Mature Mature Mature Old Female Female Female Female Female Female Female Female Calf Calf Yearling Calf Mature Mature Mature Mature 8-171 8-171 8-172 8-172 8-173 8-173 8-174 8-174 8-175 8-175 8-177 8-177 8-178 8-178 8-179 8-179 8-180 8-180 8-181 8-181 8-182 8-182 8-183 8-183 8-184 8-184 8-185 8-185 8-187 8-187 8-188 8-188 8-189 8-189 8-190 8-190 8-191 8-191 8-192 8-192 8-193 8-193 8-194 8-194 8-195 8-195 8-196 8-196 8-197 8-197· 8-198 8-198 8-199 8-199 8-200 8-200 8-201 8-201 8-202 8-202 8-203 8-203 3/20 3/26 Female Female Mature Mature 8-204 8-204 8-205 8-205 White plastic collar, lost red tag White plastic collar White plastic collar White plastic collar, four permanent incisors White plastic collar White plastic collar, three permanent incisors White plastic collar White plastic collar White plastic collar White plastic collar White plastic collar White plastic collar White plastic collar White plastic collar White plastic collar White plastic collar, lost silver tag White plastic collar White plastic collar White plastic collar White plastic collar White plastic collar White plastic collar White plastic collar White plastic collar White plastic collar White plastic collar White plastic collar White plastic collar White plastic collar White plastic collar White plastic collar White plastic collar White plastic collar White plastic collar White plastic collar White plastic collar White plastic collar, uterus turned inside out on this cow White plastic collar White plastic collar �- 7 Table l.--Elk trapped and tagged at the Ellgin trap, Gunnison National Forest Colorado, Winter .1963-64. (Continued) Date Sex Age Tag No. Remarks 3/28 3/28 3/28 3/28 4/1 4/1 4/1 4/1 4/1 4/1 Female Female Female Female Female Female Female Female Male Yearling Mature Calf Mature Mature Mature Mature Mature Mature Calf S-206 S-206 S-207 S-207 S-208 S-208 S-209 8-209 8-210 S-210 8-211 s-zn 8-212 S-212 8-213 8-213 8-214 8-214 8-215 8-215 White White White White White White plastic plastic plastic plastic plastic plastic collar collar collar collar collar collar Table 2.--E1k trapped and tagged at the Hill Creek trap, White River National Forest, Colorado, Winter 1963-64. Date Sex Age Tag No. Remarks 1/23 1/24 1/27 1/28 1/28 2/1 2/1 2/1 2/1 2/1 2/5 2/5 2/5 2/10 2/11 2/11 2/17 3/10 3/19 Female Female Female Female Female Female Female Female Male Female Female Female Male Female Fenia1e Female Female Male Female Calf Yearling Yearling Mature Mature' Mature Calf Mature Yearling Calf Mature Calf Calf Mature Mature Mature Calf . Calf Mature W-69 W-69 W-70 W-70 W-71 W-71 W-72 W-72 W-73- W-73 W-74 W-74 W-75 W-75 W-76 W-76 W-77 W-77 W-78 W-78 W-79 W-79 W-80 W-80 W-81 W-8l W-82 W-82 W-83 W-83 W-84 W-84 W-85 W-85 W-86 W-.86 W-87 W-87 White plastic collar White plastic collar White plastic collar White plastic collar White plastic collar White plastic collar White plastic collar White plastic collar No collar " spike bull when tagged White collar White plastic collar White plastic collar White plastic collar White plastic collar White plastic collar White plastic collar White plastic collar White plastic collar No collar �- 8 Table 3.--Weights of elk trapped on Hill Creek, White River National Forest, Colorado, Winter 1963-64. Date Sex Age Tag. No. Weight Remarks 1/23 Female Calf W-69 260 1bs. White collar 1/28 Female Mature W-72 525 1bs. White collar 1/28 Female Mature W-73 White collar 580 1bs. 2/1 Female Mature W-74 White collar 425 1bs. 2/1 Female Mature W-76 455 Lbs , White collar 2/1 Male Yearling W-77 485 1bs. No collar, Female 2/1 Calf W-78 White collar 200 1bs. 2/5 Female Mature W-79 White collar 545 1bs. 2/5 Female Calf W-80 White collar 255 lbs. 2/10 Female Mature W-82 475 1bs. White collar 2/11 Female Mature W-83 White collar 515 1bs. 2/11 Female Mature W-84 515 lbs. White collar 2/17 Female Calf W-85 265 lbs. White collar 3/10 Male Calf W-86 White collar 235 lbs. 3/10 Female Mature W-87 498 lbs. No collar Table 4.--Elk trapped and tagged at the Goose Creek trap, Rio Grande National Forest, Colorado, Winter 1963-64. Date Sex Age Tag No. Remarks 3/10 3/10 3/10 3/10 3/13 3/13 3/13 3/13 3/13 3/26 3/28 3/28 3/28 4/10 Male Female Female Female Female Female Female Female Female Male Female Female Male Male Calf Calf Mature Mature Mature Mature Mature Mature Mature Calf Mature Mature Calf Yearling RG-1 .RG-l RG-2 RG-2 RG-3 RG-3 RG-4 RG-4 RG-5 RG-5 RG-6 RG-6 RG-7 RG-7 RG-8 RG-8 RG-9 RG-9 RG-10 RG-10 RG-11 RG-ll RG-12 RG-12' RG-13 RG-13 RG-14 RG-14 White plastic White plastic White plastic White plastic White plastic White plastic White plastic White plastic White plastic White plastic White plastic White plastic White plastic White plastic inflammed collar collar collar collar collar collar collar collar collar collar collar collar collar collar, right eye �- '3 - Table 5.--Elk marked and tagged on Long Ridge, Rio Grande National Forest, Colorado, Winter 1963-64, using Cap-Chur gun and helicopter. Remarks Date Sex Age Tag No. Blaze orange plastic collar Female Mature 3/17 RG-100 RG-100 Blaze orange plastic collar Female Mature 3/17 RG-99 RG-99 Mature Blaze orange plastic collar 3/17 Female RG-98 RG-98 Blaze orange plastic collar 3/17 Female Mature RG-97 RG-97 Blaze orange plastic collar Female Mature 3/17 RG-96 RG-96 Blaze orange plastic collar Female Mature 3/17 RG-95 RG-95 Blaze orange plastic collar 3/18 Female Mature RG-94 RG-94 Blaze orange plastic collar Mature Female 3/18 RG-93 RG-93 Table 6.--E1k caught during the winter of 1963-64 that were tagged in previous years, Gunnison National Forest, Colorado. Where Where Date Tag Remarks Date Caught Tagged Tagged No. Old collar worn out, re3/14/64 E11gin Trap E11gin Trap 3/4/62 S-139 placed with new type white collar Table 7.--Deer trapped and banded at the E11gin trap, Sapinero Game Management Area, Gunnison, Colorado, Winter 1963-64. Remarks Age Tag No. Date Sex 3/13/64 Male Yearling S-186 S-186 This deer was ear tagged only �Table 8.--Tag returns from elk killed during the 1963 big game season, Gunnison National Forest, Colorado. Date Date Where Where Killed Tagged Tagged Killed Remarks 10/64 2/25/62 Corral Gulch 8-24 Powderhorn--10 miles 8E of store Elk had spike antlers, was a cow 10/21/63 3/9/62 Corral Gulch 8-28 West Elk Creek Cow elk in good shape, had moved about 6 miles west of trap site 10/20/63 3/9/63 Corral Gulch 8-29 Haystack Mountain Had lost collar - six point bull 10/29/63 3/13/62 Corral Gulch 8-31 West Fork 80ap Creek Mature cow in good shape, had moved about 12 miles northwest I-' o 10/19/63 3/15/63 Ellgin 8-161 Kaufman Ridge 10/28/63 3/15/63 Ellgin 8-162 Poison Gulch I 8pike bull, antlers 12-14 inches long �Table 9.--Tag returns from elk killed during the 1963 big game season, White River National Forest, Colorado. Date Where Date Where Killed Tagged Tagged Killed Remarks 4/16/63 2/15/61 Hill Creek W-12 YZ Ranch South Fork Had to be killed, crippled from hunting season 10/63 3/5/61 Hill Creek W-23 Marvine Creek between Lakes Neck band was missing 10/19/63 1/16/63 Hill Creek W-37 Head of Lost Solar by Bear Cr. Spike bull when killed 10/23/63 2/4/63 Hill Creek W-52 2 mi. up Hill Creek from trap Neck band intact I-' I-' 10/22/63 3/2/63 Hill Creek W-56 2nd ridge South of Peltier Lake Neck band still intact; winter kill 10/19/63 3/11/63 Hill Creek W-62 Blair Lake 5-point bull when killed 10/19/63 3/19/63 Hill Creek W-68 Lost Solar by Bear Creek Spike bull, still had collar �- 12 None of the tag returns in either of the trapping areas indicated new areas of movement and served only to strengthen the tag returns from previous years. On the basis of information now on hand for the White River Elk Study Area, most of the elk that are tagged at Hill Creek on the South Fork of the White River move up the South Fork and summer in the Flat Tops Wilderness Area at the head of Park and Lost Solar. Creeks, near Fowler Peak and the Johnson Park area. These same elk winter from Hill Creek north to the Sleepy Cat area at the head of lost Creek and Lost Park, with enough neck band sightings on the Williams Fork side to indicate a natural cross-over of the elk from the Williams Fork into the North and South Fork drainages of the White River. All of the tag returns from the Gunnison area indicate that the elk that are caught at either the Ellgin or the Corral Gulch traps on the Sapinero Game Management Area summer in the area north and west of the trapping sites at the head of Soap Creek, the Smith Fork and Coal Creek. Many of these elk are seen or killed in Game Management Unit 53 which is completely within the North Fork of the Gunnison drainage. These elk, then, move between 30 and 40 miles to winter ranges where they are trapped. Immobilization and Tranquilization Studies on Colorado Deer and Elk In November, 1963, I was sent to Douglasville, Georgia, to the Palmer Chemical and Equipment Company's plant to learn assembly, disassembly, repair and operation of the Cap-Chur equipment,and to work with various dosages of Sernylan on different species of animals held in captivity there. Mr. Harold C. "Red" Palmer proved to be a very interesting and knowledgeable man, as well asa wonderful host for the ,five-day stay there. While I was at the plant, we shot a green monkey, which had escaped his cage, with a 1.363 mg. dose of Sernylan in the right wrist. In ten minutes he was completely immobilized, showing classic Sernylan symptoms as predicted by Mr. Palmer. These symptoms will be discussed in more detail in a later paragraph. Two goats and two Hereford steers were also shot with Sernylan while there, with reliable success. In addition to these animals, a guanaco, two mouflon, a karakul, two other species of monkey, a genet, badger, white-tailed deer, and horses were present at Douglasville. Dosages recommended for various species by Mr. Palmer for Sernylan are shown in Table 10. Sernylan is the trade name for a compound (phencyclidine hydrochloride) not yet available commercially, manufactured by Parke, Davis and Co. of Ann Arbor, Michigan. Serylan causes salivation, and a certain amount of horizontal mystagmus. Heavier doses cause head thrashing to some extent, and a paddling motion of the feet when lying on the side, and may cause some bloat. Optimum doses immobilize from the anterior end until the animal goes down and then it remains on its brisket with the head up. Sernylan acts much like succinylcholine chloride, apparently, in depolorizing the motor end-plates of the nerves, but is not neutralized quite as rapidly. There is no known antidote, and animals killed by overdosage are not as yet considered safely edible for humans. �- 13 - Table 10.--Sernylan dosages recommended by the Palmer Chemical and Equipment Company. Species Serny1an Dosage Bovine Equine Swine Deer Canine Primates 0.3-0.6 mg./1b. 0.75-1.25 mg./1b. 1-2 mg./1b. 0.75 (penned)-1.5 (wild) mg./1b. 1-2 mg./1b. 1-2 mg./1b. Table 11 presents data on animals shot by the Cap-Chur gun with Serny1an during this segment of the project. From these meager results it appears that around one mg. per pound body weight is the appropriate dosage for elk, and very nearly that for mule deer. All of the deer and elk reported on in Table 11 were wild-caught captive animals held in various sized enclosures up to four acres. Considerable literature exists on the pharmoco10gy of succinylcholine chloride and the results of its use on various big game animals, so only a brief summary is presented here. It is an immobilizing agent, as is Serny1an, and not a tranquilizer or an anesthetic. It reacts upon the motor-end plates of skeletal musc1es,depo1arizing them and causing relaxation from the head, shoulders, limbs, abdomen and intercostal muscles to the diaphragm, in that order. It is rapidly hydrolyzed by pseudocholinesterase, and recovery proceeds in the reverse order of the affected parts. Animals killed by overdoses are safely edible and fit for human consumption. In heavy doses the diaphragm sometimes becomes paralyzed, and artificial respiration by pushing rythmica11y on the rib cage for up to ten minutes is necessary. Succinylcholine chloride in the forms of the 20 mg. per cc Sucostrin solution and the powder form of Anectine were used. The latter does not lose potency as commercial solutions do, and can be mixed with physiological saline solution to any desired concentration on the site. Only one deer was injected with Sucostrin during this segment. A mule deer fawn was injected during a training session, using the Cap-Chur gun, with a dosage of 0.820 mg. per pound. It dropped in 54 seconds, and was dead in two minutes despite artificial respiration attempts. The dosage should have been around 0.12 mg. per pound, based on earlier experiences. On March 17 and 18, 1964, a test on the use of Serny1an and succinylcholine chloride was run on elk for ear-tagging and neckbanding purposes in the Long Ridge area of the Rio Grande. Shots out of the helicopter, using both the C02 and powder rifles, ranged from ten to 30 yards (Fig. 2). Data on the drugs, dosages and individual animals are presented in Table 12. �- 14 - A total of four elk, all cows, was injected with a standard dosage of 500 mg. of Sernylan, with reliable effect. The latent period averaged approximately 12 minutes, and the recovery time was approximately two hours. All of them remained upright on their briskets with their heads up during the period of immobilization. Two cc of Penicillin and one cc of Stearane were injected by hand syringe into each elk, and the injection sites were treated with Furacin to reduce chances of infection. Each animal was eartagged in both ears, and 30 inch circumference, four inch wide, blaze orange neck bands were applied. All animals captured with Sernylan were obtained the first day, and had moved approximately eight miles overnight by the second day. Succinylcholine chloride in the form of powdered Anectine was mixed to a 50 mg. per cc solution with saline solution. A total of ten animals was injected with succinyl during the two day operation. Of these, only six were immobilized, including one mortality. I made the error of not beginning with a conservative dosage and working up, but started with the dosage recommended by Idaho as having been highly successful on their elk. This was 30 mg. total dose per adult animal. The cow injected with this reacted well, going down in 5.8 minutes, and remaining on her brisket. Breathing became labored however, and she failed to respond to artificial respiration for ten minutes. Recent conversation with Mr. Palmer seemed to indicate that possibly stress and shock may have been the immediate cause of death, rather than the drug alone. The dosage was subsequently reduced on consecutive animals until no apparent effect was obtained, then a more efficient dose was determined, which appears to be around 22.5 mg. per adult cow. This seems to vary considerably by individuals and the route of administration. Both Sernylan and succinylcholine chloride have desirable attributes, as well as undesirable ones. Sernylan appears to have a wider margin of safety, that is, elk seem to have a greater tolerance for it than for succinyl. It is somewhat slower acting, and is not metabolized as rapidly as succinyl, resulting in a longer period of immobilization. This did not adversely affect the test animals, however, as all have been accounted for in subsequent aerial and ground neckband sightings. The efficiency of succinyl seems to vary considerably from one individual to another, possibly due to condition, and amount of stress at the time. In addition, the route and site of injection have a great affect on the rapidity of assimilation of the drug. For example, shots into the lumbar and sacral regions, where there is a considerable amount of fat deposit, either get plugged needles from the tallow and don't receive the full load, or if injected, the assimilation or circulation is so slow that the small amounts getting into the blood stream are hydrolyzed almost as rapidly as they are available. In.such cases, if no ataxia was evident after 15 minutes, a second syringe with a reduced charge of drug was injected, usually half the original dose, depending upon the circumstances. The heavily muscled areas well supplied with blood and circulation are the preferred injection sites, namely the hindquarters (Fig. 3), and sometimes the shoulders. Interperitoneal injections are not advised, due to the possibility of puncturing internal organs. Subcutaneous injections are usually not very effective, but sometimes produce discernible ataxia. �Table ll.--Species of animals subjected to Sernylan, with dosages and results! November, 1963, through March! 1964. Total First Latent Duration of Age Weight Dose Injection Ataxia Period Immobilization (Yrs.) (Lbs.) (mg.) Mg. /Lb . Site (Min.) (Min.) (Min. ) Comments Species Sex Green Monkey Male ~ 11.0 15 1.363 Right Wrist 6.0 10.0 67.0 Escaped from cage, Douglasville, Ga. Dom. Goat Male Mature 100.0 200 2.000 IP, flank 20.0 - - Subcutaneous, went down. Dom. Goat Female 1 58.0 100 1.724 Loin 4.0 4.5 155.0 Bloated considerably. Bovine (Hereford) l.l:a 375.0 200 100 0.533 0.267 Tail IM,hdq tr , 20.0 Steer 2.5 90.0 Second injection half hr. after first, stayed on brisket never Bovine (Hereford) Steer l.l:a 350.0 175 0.500 IM,hdqtr •. 7.5 10.0 105.0 Stayed on brisket, head up. Mule Deer Male Mature 300.0 300 1.000 IM,hdqtr. 1.5 5.75 165.0 Had locked antlers with larger, tired buck. Elk Female l.l:a 400.0 200 0.500 IM,hdqtr. 3.5 - - Never went down, staggered, nystagmus, salivation. Mule Deer Male l.l:a 200.0 200 1.000 IM,hdqtr. 5.0 20.0 16.0 Still staggering after up. Bovine (Angus) Steer l.l:a 650.0 200 0.308 IM,hdqtr. 6.0 - - Handled in 15 min., never went down (Bill Hart ranch. !-' U1 �Table ll.--Species of animals subjected to Sernylan, with dosages and results, November, 1963, through March, 1964. ~Continued~ Total First Latent Duration of Age Weight Dose Injection Ataxia Period Immobilization Species Sex (Yrs.) (Lbs.) (mg.) Mg. ns, Site (Min.) (Min.) (Min.) Comments 1, Mule Deer Male 55.0 80 2 1.454 IM,hdqtr. 3.0 5.4 64.0 Poor condition. Male J:i 65.0 65 1.000 IM,hdqtr. 3.5 7.5 90.0 Little Hills Exp. Sta. Mule Deer Female J:i 70.0 75 1.071 IM,hdqtr. 4.5 8.0 80.0 Little Hills Exp. Sta. Mule Deer Male 1, 75.0 75 1.000 IP,high 3.8 6.5 Fatal Death not directly attributed to the drug, Little Hills. Elk Female 1, 225.0 200 0.889 IM,hdqtr. 5.0 10.5 120.0 Horseshoe Park trap, poor condition. 2 2 •.... en Mule Deer �Table l2.--Comparison of Sernylan and succinylcholine chloride for immobilizing cow elk on Long Ridge, Rio Grande drainage, Colorado, March 17-18, 1964. Animal Total First. Latent Duration of Est. Wt. Age Dose Injection Ataxia Period Immob iliza tion Drug (Mg.) Mg. n», ~Lbs~ Site (Min. ) (Min.) (Min.) Comments* Succinyl 500 4-5 30 0.060 IM, hdqtr. 3.5 5.8 Fatal Death not attributed to drug, contained approx. 10# 0 fetus. " 500 5-6 20 0.040 IM,hdqtr. 4.5 7.5 20.0 Tag No. 100, blaze orange neckband. " 400 15+ 17 .5 0.044 IM,hdqtr. 3.0 4.25 62.0 Tag No. 99, very old, poor condition, blaze orange neckband. " 500 Mature 15.0 0.030 IP,flank - - - Some ataxia, not down in 20 ~in., escaped into heavy timber. j , l:i- " 500 Mature 20.0 0.040 - IM,sacrum IM,hdqtr. 3.0 5.0 2.0 Second shot 15 min. after fili"st, not tagged, blaze orange neckband. Sernylan 500 3~ 500 1.000 IM,hdqtr. 10.5 15.0 125.0 Tag No. 98, blaze orange neckband. " 500 lOt 500 1.000 IM,hdqtr. 5.5 9.5 150.0 Tag No. 97, blaze orange neckband. " " 500 Mature 500 1.000 IM,loin 11.0 15.0 122.0 Tag ~o. 96, blaze orange neckband. 500 Mature 500 1.000 IM,hdqtr. 4.5 9.0 120.0 Tag No. 95, blaze orange neckband. Succinyl 500 5-6 20 12.5 0.040 0.025 IM,lumbar IM,shoulder 7.0 2.0 10.5 3.5 Up again 55.0 Tag No. 94, blaze orange neckband. second shot 20 min. after first. " 500 Mature 20 0.040 IM,hdqtr. 10.0 - - Never went down, escaped into heavy timber. •... ~ �Table 12.--Comparison of Sernylan and succinylcholine chloride for immobilizing cow elk on Long Ridge, Rio Grande drainage, Colorado, March 17-18, 1964. (Continued) Duration of First Latent Animal Total Immobil ization Comments* Injection Ataxia Period Est. Wt. Age Dose (Min.) Comments* (Mg.) Site (Min.) (Min.) Mg. /Lb. (Lb s .) Drug Succinyl 500 Mature 20 0.040 IM, lumbar - Never went down, some ataxia, escaped into heavy timber. II 500 Mature 20 0.040 IM,sacrum - Never went down, some ataxia, escaped into heavy timber. II 500 Mature 22.5 0.045 IM,hdqtr. 5.5 * All animals immobilized were treated with 2cc 7.0 10.0 Tag No. 93, blaze orange neckband. Penicillin, lcc Stearane, and Furacin. I-' OJ �- 19 - One advantage to succinylcholine chloride is the rapid recovery, thus ensuring that the animal is not down too long. We were trying to develop a standard dose for both drugs for adult cow elk, and while we feel that we have useable dosages, they need some refinement. It appears that Sernylan is the more dependable and predictable of the two. The tranquilizer Tranvet was tried on a mule deer which had been captured with Sernylan at our Little Hills Experiment Station near Meeker, Colorado, and was subsequently used on 11 deer sent to Georgia. Two cc of Tranvet .were injected into each deer with a hand syringe while they were in weighing arid handling boxes. The effect seemed to be a general quieting and calming, which improved their chances of surviving their long trip. Tagging and Neck Banding Report Prepared by: Raymond J. Boyd Principal Game Biologist Immobilization and Tranquilization Studies on Colorado Deer and Elk Prepared by: Richard N. Denney Date: Project Leader Approved by: ~J_u~1~y~, __1_9_6_5 Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief _ �-, \ Figure 1. Jessee Williams Photo The crew working the Long Ridge area of the Rio Grande on a comparison of Sernylan and succinylcholine chloride on immobilizing adult elk, showing the Tucker Sno-Cat and the Bell 47-G3B helicopter used on the study. �~ .4 ~ Figure 2. Claude White Photo The helicopter, in the center of the upper right quarter of the photo, bears down on an adult cow elk for a shot with the Cap-Chur gun. This animal was down in four and a quarter minutes from the time of injection. �Figure 3. Figure 4. Jesse Williams Photo The three cc syringe is visible in this cow elk just to the left of her tail. The hindquarters are the preferred injection site. Jesse Williams Photo One of the biologists "baby-sitting" with an immobilized cow elk which has been ear tagged and neckbanded, and is about to recover use of her limbs. �July, 1965 - 23 - JOB COMPLETION RESEARCH State of PROJECT SEGMENT Colorado ------~~~~~------ Project No. __ ...;.W_-...::3:..;;8_-...;.R_-.;..18~ __ Name Deer-Elk lnvestigat ions Work Plan No. ________ 2 Job No. REPORT 7 ----------~----------- Period Covered: April Name Population Surveys Name White River Elk Study I, 1963 through March 31, 1964 ABSTRACT The elk winter range In the Yampa RiVer drainage area of the elk study area was s~rveyed with 492 transects that sampled something more than 389,569 acres. Browse composition, density and vigor, soil condition, and amount of elk use, by pellet counts, was determined on each transect. Pre and post-season classification counts of the elk on the study area were taken by the hel icopter and recordi ng the data on a portab Ie tape recorder. A pre-season ratio of 51 bulls per 100 cows and 69 calves per 100 cows was determined, while the post-season classifications indicated a ratio of II bulls per 100 cows and 72 calves per 100 cows. The ·total elk k lII in the eight game management units within the study area, as determ Ined by report card. surveys..,was 2,205 el k and was composed of 1,783 bulls, 377 cows and 45 calves. Aging of 848 elk at the special check stations indicated that 93.2% of the kiJI was in the portion of the elk herd under 5& years old. The success ratio of the resident hunters was 22.2% while non-resident hunters enjoyed a success ratio of 33.9%. An elk population on the study area, after the 1963 hunting season, of 7,376 elk was projected using the sex and age data. Recommendat Ions I. Gather all data relative to the research studies on this elk herd and publish the results in a final report. Included in this final report should be recommendations to management relative to proper harvest, ideal sex and age ratios, and range conditions. Object ives To evolve a sound management plan for the Wh1te River Elk Herd, based upon factual biological data gathered In the area itself. Acknowledgements Many people -- students, professional wi Idllfe men, Forest Service and Bureau of Land Management personnel -- have had a hand in conducting this study. The complete list of people who contributed to the conduct of the study during the past segment would be too lengthy to enumerate here, but several people should be specifically mentioned for their help. �- 24 Personnel of the Routt National Forest, upon which much of the present year's range analysis was run, particularly Mr. John Miller, Forest Supervisor, Mr. Bob Lewis, Resource Staff Assistant, and Mr.,AI Crozier, Yampa District Ranger. Personnel of the White River National Forest, Mr. Ken Sholz, Forest Supervisor, Mr. John C. Smith, Resource Staff Assistant in charge of Range and Wildlife, and particularly Mr. Jack Arney, Wildlife Staff, who was in the field the entire summer field season and who helped in the plotting and mapping on the Kall Plotter. Various District Rangers were called in for training on the Kail Plotter and they did large amounts of work on the mapping for this study. Mr. Victor Barnes, a summer student assistant, mapped and plantmetered of the 1963 field data durIng the past segment. much Personnel of the Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department, particularly Chuck Roberts, Bill Roland, Harold Wixon and R'[char-d N. Denney, helped immeasurably during the field portion of the study. Techniques Used: Phase A - Range Surveys: The standard Interagency Big Game Range Analysis techniques will be used to sample the winter range in the study areao A complete copy of the procedures are already on file in the Regional Office of the Fish and Wildlife Service in Albuquerque, New Mexico. For that reason not al I of the range procedures will be repeated here. However, in order to more completely understand the terms that are included in this report, particularly in the section on range surveys, a few definitions wil I be given here. Browse Condition Class Scoreboard COMPOSITION High: Desirable and intermediate species (must be two or more) making up at least 75% or more of the composition, with desirables at least 45% of the composition. Medium: Desirable and intermediate species making up 50% or more of the composition .•with desirables at least 15% of the, composition. Low: Desirable and intermediate species making up at least 50% of the composition. DENSITY Very Dense: High Medium : Low 66% plus 36% to 65% 16% to 35% 15% minus VIGOR High: Hedging on key species mostly light or moderate with less than 16% of the plants heavily hedged, and decadent minus young less than 15% of the total number of plants. �- 25 - Medium; Hedging on key species mostly moderate, not more than 35% heavily hedged and decadent minus young not more than 35%. Low: More than 35% of the plants of the key species heavily hedged or decadent minus young more than 35%. Soil Stabil ity Condition Class Scorecard High: Soil movement sl ight or none, usually rocks. Medium: Low: So ll movement moderate, usually 65 or more hits on ground cover and 35 - 65 hits on ground cover and rocks. Soil movement advanced, usually less than 35 hits on ground cover and rocks. Phase B - Population Analysis: step I - Sex and Age Class Composition The elk herd sex and age structure will be determ ined from pre and postseason sex ratio counts and the age composition of the kill. The pre and postseason ratios wi II be obtained by using a helicopter to locate and classify the elk. All classifications wi II be put on tape and later extracted. The age structure of the kil I wi)1 be determined by setting up three special check stations along with the one regular station at Rifle, and looking at each elk as it is brought out of the hunting area. Age wi I) be determined by tooth wear and replacement according to the technique devised by Quimby and Gabb. 1957. Step 2 - Pre and Post-Season Population Estimates The population estimate of the total elk herd in the study area wil I be determined by mathematical projection of the pre and post-season sex and age ratio data. This projection wil I be based upon a formula found in Rasmussen and Doman (1943). step 3 - Abundance and Distribution on Summer and Winter Ranges The distribution of the elk as they are counted with the helicopter wi II be mapped and compared. both pre and post-season, in order to get an idea of how much hunting pressure moves the elk around within the study area. Regular bi-monthly fl ights with a fixed-wing aircraft, along permanently established transects, will be flown in order to establish distribution patterns of the elk throughout the year. Step 4 - Physical Characteristics Two elk per month, throughout the entire year (24 elk total), will be collected in order to get the fol lowing data: a. b. c. Food habits from stomach analysis Ovar ian ana Iys is to get add itiona I informat ion on herd increment Standard body measurements, weights, size. volume and weight of internal organs, correlation of eye lens weights with age, and range conditions �- 26 - d. e. f. g. h. Analysis of bones and tissues for atomic fallout accumulations Blood samples and standard analysis of such samples Incidence and kind of parasites Endocrine gland analysis Kidney fat index of each animal collected Phase C - Hunter Harvest Surveys Most of the hunter harvest data wil I be obtained through post mortem examinations of the animals at special check stations in the study area and from hunter report card returns. The elk aging technique, based upon tooth replacement and wear, worked out by Quimby and Gabb (1957), will be used for determining the age composition of the kill. The age pyramid method of analysis will be used to aid in interpreting these data. An effort will be made to determine the influence of present management practices, hunting pressure and distribution, hunter selectivity, weather, etc. on the success ratio and sex and age structure of the kill. Findings: Phase A - Range Surveys: During the summer field season of 1963, within the White River Elk Study Area, the s tudenr crews ran a tota I of 481 transects that samp Ied something more than 389,569 acres of elk winter range in the Yampa River drainage area of the study area (Figure I). The vegetation surveyed consisted of seven separate types according to the Interagency Big Game Range Analysis classification of range types. Within the Seven types there Were 15 sub-types. Table I shows the various types and subtypes and their associated acreages. For the purposes of this report, only general statements wil I be given for browse condItion, density and vigor, soil stabilIty, and amount of elk use as determined by pellet group counts on the transects. A complete, detailed summary has been worked out for the 1963 field surveys, but it wil I not be included here. When all of the winter ranges in the study area have been surveyed, mapped, and planimetered, all corrections worked up, and the three years data (field seasons for 1961, 1962 and 1963) summarized together, a complete report wil I be prepared to cover all three summers work on the range phase of this job. �27 N ~.~:.\ • Figure 1 - T,tJhi te River Elk Study Area - Elk Winter Rango in 1963. AREA LEGEND GAME Tha t ltJas Transected STUDY MANAGEMENT UNIT BOUNDARY HlGHWAY ~ SECONDARY RIVERCftUK __ ROAO ---- -L::""~ �- 28 - Table I - Vegetative Types and Acreages in Each - White River Elk Study Area, Colorado, 1963 Type Acres Aspen (IO-A) -----might be Poplar (IO-Pop) _ _ I• 2. Cottonwood, 48,566 4,458 886 5,598 113 2,465 3. Pinon-Juniper with Mountain Mahogany understory (9-PJ-Cemo) _ Juniper with Sagebrush understory (9-J-Artr) ~-------5. Conifer, Juniper with Mountain Mahogany understory (9-J-Cemo) __ mixed (6-Mixed) --6. _ 7. Mountain Browse consisting of Oakbrush (5-QUE) __ ~ 164,442 8. Mountain Browse consisting of Serviceberry (5-AME) _ 27,210 9. Mountain Browse consisting of Mountain Mahogany (5-Cemo) _ 2,698 _ 10. Mountain Browse consisting of Snowberry (5-SYM) J,104 J J • Mountain Browse consisting of Chokecherry (5-Prvi) _ 67 _ 12. Sagebrush (4-Artr) -----126,505 _ 13. Sagebrush (4-Arca) ------4,243 Sagebrush (4-Arno) -------_ 14. 754 _ 15. Sagebrush with Serviceberry aspect (4-AME-Artr) 274 4. Unidentified type ------------------------------------------Unidentified, burned -----------------------------------_____ 43 152 ----389,569 General J y the cond ition of the var ious types are as follows: Table 2 - Summary of Browse Composition, Density and Vigor as Determined by 276 Transects in the Yampa River Drainage, Colorado, 1963 Vegetat ive Type 9-PJ 9-J-Artr 9-J-Cemo 5-QUE 5-AME 5-Cemo 5-SYM 4-Artr 4-Arno 4-AME-Artr Total % Compos i t i00* Denslty* Low Med. High I I 2 4 2 5 I 4 Low I 33 6 2 55 66 22 3 32 23 9 8 I I 17 2 Med. High Low Med. High 2 2 I 3 4 I 48 20 10 70 17 65 1 7 I 5 20 9 3 25 37 25 IJ I I 102 36 Vigor* 128 46 * Total number of transects I I 46 17 • 30 17 151 1/ 77 17 3 2 27 I 95 34 73 26 74 27 129 47 in these conditions It can be seen from the above table that approximately 143,750 acres of the area surveyed had a low composition (see procedures for definition), while 180,760 acres are in medium composition and 65,058 acres are in a high composition category. Density of browse species within the winter range areas surveyed �- 29 indicates that 42,073 acres are in low condition, 213,094 acres are medium in density and 134,401 acres are in the high density rating class. Vigor of browse species in the surveyed area shows that 102,846 acres are low in vigor, whi Ie 104,404 acres are medium and 182,318 acres are high in vigor. Table 3 - Summary of 5011 Conditions on Elk Winter Range as Determined by 276 transects in the Yampa River Ora Inage, Colorado, 1963 5011 Condition Vegetat ive Type Low 9-PJ 9-J-Artr 9-J-Cemo 5-QUE 5-AME 5-Cemo 5-SYM 4-Artr 4-Arno 4-Arca 4-AME-Artr Medium High 78 21 6 I 4 31 12 10 I 1 I 28 31 30 17 I 3 I Total 66 % 24 79 29 131 47 Information gained from the above table on soi I ratings shows that 93,106 acres.are in a low soil condition, while 111,416 acres are medium in soil stabilityand 185,045 acres are in a high"soil rating. The amount of elk use on the winter range area, as determined group counts on each transect are shown below: by pellet Table 4 - Summary of Elk Pellet Group Counts on 492 Transects in the Yampa River Drainage, Colorado, 1963 �- 30 Table 4 shows that while most of the elk use on the winter range is in the winter, there are smal I numbers of elk on these same ranges the year-around as evidenced by the number of summer pel let groups found on the transects. Phase B - Population Analysis: I. Sex and Age-Class Composition of the White River Elk Herd. The 1963 pre-season sex and age-ratio counts of the White River Elk Herd were made from September 24 through September 27. The counts are tabulated as follows: Bull s Spikes Calves Total I I 2 57 38 110 59 121 8 8 7 5 28 18 6 3 13 63 8 8 36 39 29 12 7 I 7 6 52 15 4 35 36 25 70 22 78 31 25 71 32 110 25 I I 6 9 6 "9 46 4 I 7 15 5 2 17 7 I 103 " 3 18 5 23 IQ 27 15 39 6 14 2 12 410 285 45 904 31 100 4 5 106 12 76 427 21 8 7 I "43 Tota I Percent Cows Locat ion Dry Sweetwater South Fork Park Creek Lost Solar Creek South Fork Campground, down Derby Creek and Bear River Turret Creek Marvine Peak Marvi ne Creek Trappers Lake Drainage Wi IIiams Fork Canyon Creek Burro Mounta i n Sand Peak South Fork Wi IIiams Fork SI eepy Cat Ute Creek Patterson & Wagonwheel Creeks A total of 904 elk were classified resulting in a ratio of 51 bulls (including spikes) per 100 cows and 69 calves per 100 cows. �- 31 - N p:.~-\ • STUDY AREA LEGEND Figure 2 _ White River Elk Study Area - Permanent Flight GAME MANAGEMENT UNIT BOUNDARY ----- Strips Flown at Bi-Monthly Intervals For Elk HiGHWAY ~ SECONDARY ROAO ---- Distribution Data. RIVERCR!:!:K~ P£AK ~.c. LAK£ _ �- 32 The 1963 post-season sex and age-ratio counts of the White River Elk Herd were made from November 19 through November 20. The counts are as foilowsl Bulls Spikes Cows Calves 15 12 7 2 5 159 94 41 49 39 6 17 25 23 1 7 23 8 128 III I 2 I I 2 I 4 3 3 Total Percent 26 2 4 4 2 43 3 IJ 7 638 54 6424 30 31 7 16 IJ 15 1 3 14 9 J09 9 5 459 39 Total Locat Ion 297 South Fork to Campground 166 Campground to Buford 67 Big Beaver 86 Coa I Creek 71 MI IIer Creek 14 . East Fork of Elk Creek 33 No Name Creek 39 sweetwater Creek 42 Turret Creek 2 Dry Sweetwater Creek 10 No Name Creek 37 Marvine Creek 17 Lost Creel( 244 South Fork WI J I lams Fork 27 East Fork WI IIlams Fork 14 Red Dirt Creek 1,166 100 A total of 1,166 elk were classified resulting In a ratio of four (4) mature bulls per '00 cows, II bulls (including spikes) per 100 cows and 72 calves per 100 cows. The classification counts In 1963 averaged well within the ranges found In prevIous years In thIs study. The pre-season ratIos are practically the same as those found since the study began, and the post-season ratios are virtually the same as the ones found in 1962. Post-season cow-calf ~tios during the first five years work on this project were much too high, and after close scrutiny of the data the errors in classification counts at this time of year were corrected and a lower cow-calf ratio resulted, which fits the known data much better than the counts previously. All of the pre and post-season are tabulated below for comparative classification purposes. counts since the study began Table 5 - Pre-Season Classification Counts, 1957 thru 1963, White RIver Elk Herd, Colorado Year 1957 1958 1959 1960 1961 1962 1963 Total Bu IIs 100* 87* 146* 91 135 118 103 780 Spikes 127 145 121 106 499 Cows 226 164317 325 623 491 410 2,556 Calves 123 117 205 209 461 315 285 1.715 * Spikes Included wIth bulls In these counts Ratio Total 449 368 668 752 ',3641,045 904 5,550 Bu IIs Cows Calves 44 53 46 67 47 49 51 50 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 54 71 646474 646467 �- 33 ..; Table 6 - Post-Season Cfassification Counts, 1957 thru 1963, White River Elk Herd, Colorado Year au IIs 1957 1958 1959 1960 1961 1962 1963 50* 93* 81* 30 50 51 26 Total 431 lie SpIkes Spikes Cows Calves Total 63 115 135 43 356 278 356 238 451 881 764 638 3,606 279 320 222 409 818 561 459 3,068 607 769 541 953 1,862 1,511 1,166 7,409 Ratio Bulls Cows Calves 18 25 34 21 19 24 .11 21 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 90 93 91 93 73 72 85 Included with bulls In these counts The 1963 total elk kill In the eight game management units within the study area was determined by the Game Management Division to be 2,205 animals. These kltl figures are based upon hunter report card returns and statistical projections of the results of the report card returns. During the 1963 big game season we had only three special check stations on the study area (Meeker~ Deep Creek and Newcastle). The regular Game Management stations at Rifle and Idaho Springs also checked and aged elk from the study area. Table 7 - Age and Sex of the Elk Kilt Checked through Three Special Stations and Two Regular Check stations during the 1963 Big Game Season Age Calves I~ 2~ 3~ 4! 5b: ti 7~ ~ 9+ Total Bull s Cows 19 20 462 26 117 32 22 13 10 16 7 6 3 4 .0 3 0 8 684 164 Total Percent 39 4.6 488 57.5 149 17.6 44 36 80 9.4 35 4.1 26 3.1 13 1.5 7 3 9 848 93.2% Population Results Estimate of Classification Pre-season Kt" Post-season Counts and Hunter Harvest on the Study Area: Bul Is Cows Calves Tota! Cows and Calves 209 1,783 69 410 377 638 285 45 459 904 2,205 1,166 695 422 1,097 Ra tios and K iII Pre-season Kill Post-season Bulls Cows Calves Total 51 1,783 100 377 100 69 45 72 2,205 II Bulls to Unantlered t 3.32 15.90 �- 34 - Population Projection x '" number of cows in fall before hunting season .51 x • number of bulls In fall before huntIng season x - 377 • number of cows after hunting season .51 x - 1,783 ~ number of bulls after hunting season .11 • (x - 377) also • number of bulls after hunting thus: season ~51x - 1,783 = .11 • (x - 377) •5 Ix I,783 = • IIx - 41 .51x - .llx ~ 1,783 - 41 .40x '" 1,742 x ~ 4,355 cows in the fall before hunting season .51x ~ 2,221 bulls in the fall before hunting .69>< • 3,005 calves Total fall population • 9,581 less total kill -2,205 Tota I post-season pop. 7,376 . %II InfalJ before hunting Composed of: season season Bulls 436 ( 5.9%) Cows 4,034 (54.7%) Calves 2,906 (39.4%) 7,376 step 4 - Physical Characteristics During the past segment 19 elk were collec,ted for complete necropsy examinations. Most of the el k were col J ected by usi ng the hel icopter to locate them and then shooting the elk from ·the copter with a Cap-Chur gun, loaded with a lethal dose of Sucostrin. This method of collection reduced the possibility of destroyIng organs and glands needed for study. Because of expense, some elk were collected with a rifle during the winter when they were concentrated In the river bottoms of the South Fork. A Sno-Cat was used in these cases to transport the elk to a pickup by which it was hauled to the Rifle Falls Fish Hatchery where the necropsies were run. Figure 4 notes the collection past segment. locations of the 19 elk collected during the Table 8 lists a partial summary of the necropsy data that has been col Iectad on the 19 elk mentioned above. �- 35 N LEGEND F'IGURE 3 LOCATI ON 0 F 788 ELK KILLED DURI NG THE FI RST NI NE DAYS GAME MANAGEMENT UNIT BOUNDARY II_V Of THE 1963 BIG GAME SEASON DATA FROM FOUR ~ SECONDARY IlIVEII- CHECK STATIONS CII~£IC~ PEAK ~i:; LAK~ •• ROAO ---- �- 36 - N o 9TUOY Figure 4 - White River Elk Study Area = Locations of 19 Elk Collected For Physiological Studies. AREA LEGEND GAME MANAGEMENT BOUNDAII"I' UNIT -=="" HIGHWAY GECOHllARV RIVI!R - CIII!£K ~:: PEAK ~,~ LAKE ••• ROAD ---_ _ �- 37 - N ~ • STUOY AREA Figure 5 - Locations of Banded Elk Sightings and Tagged LEGEND Elk Kill Locations, 1961, 1962 and 1963 • Trap Site • Tagged Elk Kill -Y~ GAME MANAGEMENT II£CONDAIIY •• M•• - l( Band Sighting IJIIIT BOUNDARY e•• nlC~ LAICI _ IIOAO - --- �- 38 - Table 8 - Partial Summary of Elk Physiology Studies, White River Elk Study, Colorado Elk No.: 4 Da te Co I J ec ted 5/14 6/4 1963-64, 5 6 7 7/9 7/9 8/7 5 4 540 436 -----------------------------------------------------------------.--------------Age 10 5 6 --._---------------------------------------------------------------------------Total Body Weight 494 627 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------Dressing Percentage 70.34 86.84 330 57.56 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Total Body Length 94" 83" 75" 81.5" 83.25" 81.0" ---------------------~--------~--------~--------~---------~----------~--------~- Kidney Fat Index 11.6 6.67 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------Heart Vo Iume 1,531 1,621.5 972.5 1,312.9 1,697.4 1,232.5 1,085.3 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------Brain Volume 380.7 402.3 344.6 .333.1 341.4 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------Hemoglobin 26 13 16.2 18 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------Erythrocytes 6.00 . -------------------------------------------------------------------------------Hematocrit 46% 35% 45% 47% . 51% -------------------------------------------------------------------------------Lucocytes 5,500 3,250 1,700 7,700 6,650 3,000 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------Polymorphs 28 49 36 32 27 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------~-Lymphocytes 40 72 66 50 30 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------Monocytes g o 5 2 3 4 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------Eos j noph lIs 6 . 4 1/ Blood clotted g; Male elk shot by mistake 6 12 20 35 �- 39 - Table 8 - Partial Summary of Elk Physiology Studies, 1963-64, White River Elk Study, Colorado (continu~d) Elk No~: Date Collected 8 9 10 II, 12 13 14 9/27 9/27· 11/23 11/23 12/12 12/12 1/14 -----------------~---------------------------------------------------------------6 4 2 calf 9 15+ ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Age Total Body Weight 575 414 452 534.5 ---------------------------------------------------------~-----------------------Dressing Percentage 67.46 66.13 57.90 72.37 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------Total Body I,.ength 84" 92" 86.25" 84.75" 66.5" ---------------------~---------~-----------~-------~-------------------~--------~Kidney Fat lndex 15.2 13.1 1,626.9 1,882.1 16.0 . 13.6 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------Heart Volume 1,354.4 944.5 1,928.0 1,256.2 1,496.6 ~;;i~-~~~:;~-------;~:6-----;8~:~-----;;9:9---~88:6-----;~8:~-----;88:9----::-i ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------17. , 18 19.7. 20.3. ----------~----------------------------------------------------------------------Erythrocytes 9.09 8.73' 8.23 7.42 7.26 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------Hema tocr i t 50'/0 50'f0 57% 54% 49'/0 . 46% 43% ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------3,600 2,300 2,360 2,500 3,500 5,000 2,200 Lucocytes ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------Polymorphs 24 42 32 34 28 46 55 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------Lymphocytes 58 48 50 54 54 50 43 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------8 4 10 9 2 4 Monocytes ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------10 8 Hemoglob In Eosinophils 14 11 Shot in head, brain destroyed 4 �- 40 Table 8 - Partial Summary of Elk Physiology Studies, 1963-64, White River Elk Study, Colorado (continued) Elk No.: Date Collected 15 16 17 18 19 1/14 2/5 2/5 3/12 3/12 577 465 -------------------------------------------------------------4 12 10 4 calf --------------------------------------~----------------------Total Body Age Weight 494 -------------------------------------------------------------- Dressing Percentage 63.)7 62.14 -------------------------------------------------------------- Total Body Length 87" 87" 89.15" --------~------------~---------~-----------~---~----~--------~ Kidney Fat Index 2.0 16.6 -------------------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------------------------Erythroc yt es -------------------------------------------------------------Hematocrit 35% -------------------------------------------------------------Lucocytes 2,250 4,650 2,800 -------------------------------------------------------------Polymorphs 38 46 38 -------------------------------------------------------------Lymphocytes 52 -------------------------------------------------------------Monocytes /8 8 6 -------------------------------------------------------------Eoslnophils 2 5 6 1/ Blood clotted Shot in head, brain destroyed Blood clotted g; 21 Phase C - Hunter Harvest Surveys: The sex ratio of the /963elk kll I from the study area, as determined by the report cards and the check station data, are listed in tables 9 and 10. �- 41 Table 9 - Sex Ratio of the 1963 Elk Kill on the White River Elk Study Area - Based upon Hunter Report Card Returns and Projections Unit Bulls 12 13 23 210 232 297 515 125 108 173 123 24 2526 33 34 % Cows % Total 2 1.0 2.5 3.1 4.8 1.5 1.3 45 2.1 .·210 232 420 '682 163 145 201 152 2,205 Calves o 100.0 100.0 70.7 75.5 76.7 74.5 86.1 80.9 Total Table % o o o 119 143 33 30 25 27 28.3 22.0 20.2 20.7 12.4 17.8 377 17.0 4 24 5 7 3 10 - Sex Ratio of the 1963 Elk Kill on the White River Elk Study Area Based upon Data from Five Check Stations Unit Bul Is % 12 13 23 54 Cows 33 65 34 66 100.0 80.0 67.9 74.6 78.2 66.7 76.5 90.4 Total 823 76.4, 4 106 434 86 24 25 26 8 % .Calves , o o o 7 17 6 27.6 22.5 17.3 25.0 20.0 8.2 219 20.3 35 43 . J 31 19 3 17 % 5 I 3 I Total 54 20.0 4.5 2.9 4.5 8.3 3.5 1.4 5 156 582 110 12 85 13 1,077 The yearling kil I figures, based upon the hunter report card returns, is concerned only with the bull kill, whi Ie the check station data includes both bulls and cows. In the 488 yearling elk checked through the stations, there were 26 yearl ing cows. Table II - Yearling Kill, 1963 Big Game Season, White River Elk study Area, Colorado Check Station Data Card Projection Unit 12 13 23 24 25 26 33 34 Total Number 92 62 134 236 38 16 61 46 685 %1I Number %S! 44.23 26.96 45.33 45.88 30.65 15.38 35.63 37.70 38.)+2 208 (Meeker station) 103 (Deep Creek statton) 96 (Newcastle station) 39 (Rifle station) 42 (Idaho Springs station) 61.0 50.2 58.5 57.4 60.0 488 57.5 11 These figures are based upon bull elk only g/ These figures are based upon all elk that were aged �- 42 - TabJe 12 - Yearling Bull Ant l sr- Point Count, 1963 Big Game Season - White River Elk Study Area, Colorado Number of Number of EJ k Points I-I 1-2 1-3 1-4 2-2 2-3 2-4' 3-3 3-4 4-4 4-5 271 53 4 I 86 23 3 2 2 1 13 The above table shows that out of 459 yearlIng bulls that were checked at the ctleck stations 188 of them, or 41%, had more points than the "typical" spike formatIon (I - I). The most common antler formation in yearlings after the "typlcal~ spike was 2-2, 1-2 and 2-3. that Table 13 shows the antler point count' for all bulls were aged by tooth wear and replacement at the five Table 13 - Antler White Points River by Age Class of Male Elk Elk Study Area, 1963 Big Age CI ass (by Number of Points 2~ 1- I 2 - 2 2 - 3 3 - 3 3 -4 4-4 4 - 5 5 - 5 5 - 6 6 - 6 6 - 7 7 - 7 7 - 8 Unit 12 13 23 24 25 33 34 26 Total Area Number of Perm its Ki lied on the Game Season dentition) ~ 7'21 ~ I I 3 5 23 19 49 12 J I 4 2 22 4 9 J 10 3 8 2 I 5 2 5 1 I I The success ratto of hunters game season in the study listed below in Table 14. 14- 4'21 than yearlings stations. I 2 1963 big Table 3~ other check Total Elk that had hunters choice area, based upon report KII I on Hunters Choice elk permits for card projections, Permits, Success Of Ratio Permits Bull s Cows Calves Total 10 18 119 143 4 24 I IJ I 6 4 7 46 25 27 52 377 3 2 11 45 133 185 13 34 33 70 468 An i maI sKi the is 1963 I I ed on Permits Total Ki" None None E E '500 63.6 X X X 100 80.0 150 750 46.7 62.4 W 420 682 54 201 152 254 1,763 �- 43 The success ratio of alJ elk hunters on the study area in 1963 is shown below tn Table 15. 15 - Total Hunters, Total Elk Kill and Success of All Hunters, 1963 Table - White River Elk St~dy Area Number of Hunters Success Ratio 25 26 33 34. 954 977 1,771 2,292 770 583 970 618 22% 2l.J% 2l.J% 30% 21% 25% 25% 25% Total 8,935 Unit 12 13 23 24- Ani ma IsKi 1Ied .BulIs COWs 210 232 297 515 125 108 173 J 23 119 143 33 30 25 27 1,783 377 Calves Total 2 210 232 420 682 163 145 201 152 45 2,205 4 24- 5 7 3 The total elk ki", number of hunters and success of the non-resident hunters Is shown in Table .6. Table elk 16 - Number of Non-Resident Hunters, Total Elk Kt II and Success Ratio, 1963 Big Game Season - White River Elk Study Area Unit 12 13 23 2425 26 33 34 Total Number of Hunters 224218 415 477 119 66 220 III 1,850 Bulls 61 60 109 137 31 15 66 35 Cows 23 41 13 10 13 7 107 Calves Total 3 61 60 132 181 Lt4 4 29 79 42 7 628 Success Ratio 27.2% 27.5% 31.8% 37.9% 37.0% 43.9% 35.9% 37.8% The total elk kill, number of resident hunters and their success during the 1963 big game season on the study area Is shown in Table 17. �- 44 Table 17 - Number of Resident Hunters, Total Elk KII I and Success, 1963 Big Game Season - White River Elk Study Area Number of Hunters Unit 12 13 23 24 25 26 730 759 1,356 '~815 651 517 750 507 7,085 33 34 Total Elk Kill Cows 149 172 188 378 94 93 107 88 ),269 96 102 20 20 12 20 270 Ca Ives: Total 149 172 288 501 4 21 5 3 3 2 38 It9 116 122 110 1,577 Success Ratto 20.410 22.7% 21.2% 27.6% 18.3% 22.4% 16.3% 21.7% The total hunter pressure, by both resident and non-resident hunters, on the study area since the study was started in 1957 ;s shown below in Table 18. Table 18 - Total Number of Hunters, Kill and Success since 1957 on the ,White River Elk Study Area, Colorado (8 Management Units) Year Item 1957 Pressure Ki I 1 Success 4,368 1,003 22.96% 755 227 30.07% 5,123 1,230 24.01% 1958 Pressure Ki 1 I Success 1959 K iJ J 4,324 1,095 25.32% 4,266 I, J 81 27.68% 4,322 1,440 33.32% 5,765 1,571 27.25% 6,533 1,553 23.77% 7,085 1,577 22.26% 750 327 43.60% 702 274 39.03% 877 379 43.22% 1,249 393 31047% 1,317 353 26.80% 1,850 628 33.94% 5,074 1,422 28.02% 4,968 1,455 5,199 1,819 34.99% 7,014 1,964 28.00% 7,850 1,906 24.28% 8,935 2,205 24.68% 36,663 9,420 7.500 2.581 34.41% 44,163 12,001 27.17% Pressure Success Pressure 1960 K ill Success Pressure 1961 K ill Success 1962 Pressure Ki 1 J Success 1963 Pressure Ki II Success Tota I Pressure K i IJ Success Resident Hunters 25.69"/0 Non-Resident Hunters Total 29.29"/0 �- 45 During the 1963 big game season non-resident hunters came from 37 states. A breakdown of the hunting pressure, by unit, by state of residence, is shown below In Table 19. Table 19 - Hunting Pressure by Unit, by State of Residence, during the 1963 Big Game Season - White River Elk Study Area, Colorado Unit: state: Alabama Arizona Arkansas Cal ifornla Florida Illinois Indiana Iowa Kansas Kentucky Louisiana Maryland Massachusetts Michigan Minnesota Mississippi Missouri Nebraska Nevada New Hampshire New Jersey New Mexico New York North Carol ina North Dakota Ohio Oklahoma Oregon Pennsylvania South Dakota Tennessee Texas Utah Virginia Wash ington Wlscons In Wyom lng Canada Unknown Non-Res Ident Total 12 3 75 2 5 9 16 3 3 2 42 6 13 23 3 3 73 3 IJ 3 2 17 3 6 17 3 3 3 6 9 173 22 9 6 22 6 3 3 14 3 5 40 5 "23 24 25 26 33 34 5 30 170 5 36 20 It 19 28 6 3 14 2 6 9 17 3 33 6 9 3 8 59 3 II II 3 3 - 2 8 a 3 22 2 3 3 25 3 "3 1'1 3 6 3 2 25 8 3 3 5 2 19 II 16 6 14 6 2 25 44 3 II 3 224 218 415 3 42 6 5 IJ IJ 17 II 44 3 3 74 9 25 3 7 233 8 8 3 38 3 3 5 36 2 39 II 3 3 2 2 477 22 12 3 3 40 34 10 185 31 26 2 6 20 2 6 3 5 6 13 3 2 8 5 3 6 68 36 53 III 1J 3 17 12 53 628 119· 66 220 33.9% II 3 3 13 % 6 6 8 3 8 3 Total III 1,850 6.0'/0 10.0'/0 4.0'/0 12.6% �- 46 Resident hunters in 1963 came from 48 counties to hunt in the study area. Table 20 shows the county of residence and unit hunted for the resident hunters. Table 20 - Hunting Pressure by Unit, by County of Residence, during the 1963 Big Game Season - White River Elk Study Area, Colorado Unit: County: Adams Arapahoe Baca Bent Boulder Chaffee Cheyenne Clear Creek Crowley Custer Del ta Denver Douglas Eagle E lber t EI Paso Fremont Gad i eld GJlpin Grrmd Gunnison Huerfano Jefferson Ki t Carson Lake La Plata Larimer Las An imas Lincol n Logan Mesa .Moffat Montezuma Montrose Morgan Otero Park Phillips Prowers Pueblo Rio Blanco Routt San Miguel Summit Teller Washington We Id Yuma Total 12 13 23 24 25 26 33 34 Total % 53 25 28 71 99 90 146 152 38 41. 28 68 40 44 6 155 3 15 19 34 3 44 34 21 3 19 3 3 448 543 7 16 441 6 21 10 13 3 18 1,766 48 58 22 329 31 369 6 31 6 3 708 25 47 3 182 6 51 74 382 285 3 6 51 31 10 18 18 71 300 292 3 16 25 18 216 49 7,085 6.3% 7.7% 10 84 37 62 4 6 4 7 3 156 18 3 13 18 12 40 3 214 3 12 6 3 3 3 62 3 295 6 3 10 106 6 15 4 3 137 9 3 25 40 158 , 3 6 3 3 46 37 3 3 6 417 3 3 90 10 47 3 3 65 52 3 22 28 97 25 6 10 3 196 12. 6 12 J 18 4 3 252 34 28 28 3 9 3 187 10 9 15 3 47 22 37 127 37 6 16 186 15 12 15 3 16 730 16 3 759 6 43 6 143 119 6 6 22 115 3 3 71 68 56 16 6 3 3 6 28 6 4 3 3 9 3 3 87 3 10 3 3 10 9 6 6 87 10 10 6 10 6 19 130 12 6 6 3 3 19 3 47 9 1,815 28 3 3 43 3 16 6 9 40 9 1,356 127 3 25 3 65) 12 3 517 35 22 750 3 25 507 24.9% 10.0% �- 47 - Information relattveto thedat of kil" .by sex, Is shown below in Table 21. Table 21 - Day of Kil', by Sex - 1963 Big Game Season - White River Elk Study Area Day of KJ II Item Meeker Bul J Cow Calf Total 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 136 26 32 12 65 17 23 14 28 12 12 2 10 2 4 I I I I 162 .45 83 38 41 14 12 4 31 5 39 8 17 7 5 6 2 5 3 3 37 h7 24 12 2 9 3 85 24 2 ,6 7 26 JO JJ J 2 3 3 5 3 2 III 23 37 14 9 2 5 Total 9 -------------------------------------------------------------------Deep Creek Bu IJ Cow Calf Total 118 22 4 J44- I I I -------------------------------------------------------------------New Castle Bull Cow Calf Total I 310 85 4 399 220 51 7 278 .48 51 4 203 J R-----~-------------------------------------------------------------IfJ e Bull Cow Calf Total 27 II 6 2 13 4 3 3 4 6 4 J I 39 9 17 26 5 16 8 10 31 24 -------------------------------------------------------------------Idaho Springs Bul J Cow Calf Total " 4 " 153 40 2 195 I 4 4 76 21 15 7 5 4 98 65 31 44 25 4 73 19 3 18 5 14 2 22 24 807 228 18 1,053 4 2 I I -------------------------------------------------------------------TOTAL Bul'l Cow Calf Total 392 88 7 487 (tem Bull Cow Calf Total 101 34 3 138 I 97 I 16 Day of Kill by Percentage 1 49 39 39 46 2 13 15 17 13 3 19 17 " 19 53 20 2 75 4 8 14 6 9 5 6 2 II I 22 7 2 5 7 2 2 5 2 8 2 I 2 9 �- 48 Figure 5 shows the locations of neck bank stghtings and tagged elk kill locations in the study area since this study was begun. Discussion No section on a discussion of the findings reported herein will be included as a major publication on this entire study is planned for next segment. Prepared by: Raymond J. Boyd, Associate Wildlife Eugene E. Green~dlife Approved by: Richard N. Denney Project Leader Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief Date: July, 1965 ----------~~~------------ Researcher Re~earch Candidate �Photo by Ray Boyd Figure 6 - Cow Elk Shot With Cap-Chur Gun From Helicopter - Lethal Dose of Sucostrin - Picture Shows Typical Ataxia Reaction to the Drug. �Photo by Ray Boyd Figure 7 - Cow Elk Killed With Cap-Chur Gun and Lethal Dose of Sucostrin Being tied to the Copter to be Transported to a Waiting Pickup �Photo by Ray Boyd Figure 8 - Cow Elk Being Transported By Helicopter to Necropsy Site �Photo by Don Dominick Figure 9 - Taking Standard Measurements of Cow Elk Collected With The Helicopter and Cap-Chur Gun �Photo by Don Dominick Figure 10 - Removing Thyroid Glands From Cow Elk. �Pages 54 through 58 have been omitted to correct an error �July, 1965 - 59 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH SEGMENT PROJECT State of COLORADO --~~~==~------------~--Deer-Elk Investigations Project No. W-38-R-18 ------~~--------------Mortality Factors Affecting Deer Work Plan No. 4 --------~------------and Elk Herds Job No. Period Covered: Study of Diseases 3a April 1, 1963, through March and Parasites 31, 1964. ABSTRACT During this segment of the job 135 deer blood samples and 71 elk blood samples tested for brucellosis and leptospirosis were all found to be negative, as were·40 antelope samples. LUl!g tissue samples from 25 elk proved to be negative for evidences of lungworm eggs or larvae. Five mountain goat pellet groups were negative for evidences of parasitism. The bony growth on an elk forelimb was found to be the. result of a previous injury to the periosteum. A total of 517 deer, 163 elk, and 40 antelope blood samples tested the past three years have all been found negative for brucellosis and leptospirosis, thus refuting stockmen's allegations that these big game species serve as reservoir hosts for these diseases. Objectives: This job was set up to assist in the collection of necessary blood, organ, tissue and digestive tract content samples as required for specific cooperative studies and analysis of diseases, parasites and associated ailments with the School of Veterinary Medicine at Colorado State University and the State Veterinarian. Procedures: During the performance of routine live-trapping operations for elk in the Moraine Park area of Rocky Mountain National Park blood samples were collected by members of the School of Veterinary Medicine at Fort Collins. These were analyzed in their laboratory for evidences of leptospriosis and brucellosis by standard, accepted procedures. In addition, blood samples were secured from deer, elk and antelope carcasses during the first few days of hunting seasons in the fall of 1963. These were sent to the Cooperative Brucellosis Laboratory in Denver for brucellosis and leptospirosis tests. They furnished us with franked mailing cartons, �- 60 - each containing 40 blood tubes. As much blood as possible was secured from the body-cavity of freshly killed animals, and the tubes were kept refrigerated until mailed to the Laboratory. Lung samples were collected from carcasses of elk killed during the January and February pre-season on elk around "t he Rocky Mountain National Park area, and fixed in buffered formalin until Dr. George R. McCahan could section them, mount them on glass slides, and stain them with hematoxylin and eosin. The slides were then examined for evidence of lungworm eggs or immature larval forms. During the field work on the mountain goat study (W-41-R), Dale Hibbs picked up five pellet groups believed to be from mountain goats, which were turned over to the Veterinary Hospital for a parasitism check. They were checked by Dr. John Cheney by flotation, the Stoll method, and sedimentation. These pellet groups were from the Squaw-Creek Basin area of the Collegiate Range. A bull elk was brought through the Del Norte check station in October, 1963, which had a greatly enlarged foreleg above the pasturn. Claude White obtained the leg as a specimen and it was submitted to the School of Veterinary Medicine at CSU for analysis by Dr. Gordon C. Solomon. Findings: A total of 42 blood specimens obtained from the M0raine Park elk trap proved to be negative for Leptospirea pomona and icterohemorrhagia, and for brucellosis. During the 1963 antelope season, ,. 40 blood samples were obtained on the Alex Urie ranch and found to be negative for brucellosis by the Cooperative Brucellosis Laboratory in Denver. During the 1963 deer and elk check stations, as follows: deer and 16 elk; New Castle, these samples were tested at and found to be negative. season, 164 blood samples were obtained at the Del Norte, eight deer and seven elk; Meeker, 94 20 deer and six elk; and Rifle, 14 deer. All of the Cooperative Brucellosis Laboratory in Denver Two elk lung samples from Cold Springs Mountain in northwestern Colorado, and 23 from the Estes Park area, were examined by Dr. George R. McCahan for lungworm eggs or immature larval forms and found to be negative. The five mountain goat pellet groups submitted to the CSU School of Veterinary Medicine for evidences of internal parasites were all found to be negative by the three methods tested by Dr. John Cheney. The elk forelimb from the Del Norte check station was sectioned by Dr. Gordon C. Solomon (Figures 1 and 2). Radiographs and gross examination suggested a chronic proliferating periostitic as a result of a previous injury to the periosteum. Discussion: During the past three years blood samples have been obtained from a total of 517 deer, 163 elk, and 40 antelope. The majority of these have been tested for leptospirosis and brucellosis by the Cooperative Brucellosis Laboratory in Denver, and the remainder have been tested by the CSU College �- 51 - of Veterinary Medicine. In all cases they have been found to be negative for these two diseases. In addition, 12 deer samples were tested for anaplasmosis, of which seven were found to be negative, and five were suspects. This was determined by the C-F test which was set up for bovine serum, and there are questions relative to the validity of its application to other species, the foremost of which is the possible non-specific reactions due to species differentiation. I understand that the Wildlife Laboratory of the Wyoming Game and Fish Department, at Laramie, is currently working on an anaplasmosis test specifically for big game animals. The main objective of conducting tests for brucellosis and leptospirosis during these past few years has been to determine to what extent they exist in our important big game herds of the state. Many stockmen, and some veterinarians, have implied that these two serious livestock diseases are transmitted from big game to domestic animals. The findings in this study pretty well give our big game a clean slate from this standpoint, refuting allegations that they are reservoirs for these diseases. Recommendations: Now that the Research Center in Fort Collins has a laboratory and personnel to conduct analyses and studies on parasites and diseases of wildlife, I recommend that this job not be continued as a part of the Deer-Elk Investigations. Prepared by: Date Richard N. Denney Project Leader ~J~L~I~1~V~,~1~9~65~· Approved by: _ Wayne W. Sand fort Game Research Chief �Figure 1. Figure 2. Gordon Solomon Photo Gross picture of the bony growth on the posterior of a bull elk forelimb, just above the fetlock. Gordon Solomon Photo A section through the chronic proliferating periostitic shown grossly in Figure 1. �Duly, 1965 - 63 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO ----~~~~~------------- Pro j ect No. __~W_--=3..;:8_-=..:R:....--=1.::.8 _ Deer-Elk Investigations Work Plan No. 4 ----------~--------- Job No. 3c Period Covered: Mortality Factors Affecting Deer and Elk Herds Evaluation of Deer-Highway Crossing Safety Measures April 1, 1963, through March 31, 1964. ABSTRACT No deer used the tubes placed under the relocated U. S. Highway 50 near Sapinero during the past segment .• There were 68 deer killed by automobiles in the study section east of Grand Valley during the past segment. This compares with 63 killed during the segment ending March 31, 1962, and indicates that the new large crossing signs placed in the area by the Colorado Department of Highways do not materially affect the deer-auto accidents. Correspondence with manufacturers indicate that the "deer-mirrors" can be purchased for $1.35 per pair, and it will take a maximum of 160 mirrors per mile of highway to adequately protect the public and the game. No deer used the crossings under Highway 13 near Rio Blanco. Recommendations: 1. Continue to tally tracks of deer using the tubes under Highway 50 near Sapinero. If the deer do not seem to use the tubes, try and bait them through the tubes by using alfalfa hay inside the tubes. 2. Construct two miles of "deer-mirrors" east of Grand Valley on U. S. Highway 6 & 24 to determine if these devices can reduce the deerauto loss in this area. 3. Continue to count tracks of deer using the small creeks near Rio Blanco to cross under the highway. �- 64 - 4. Meet with the Colorado Department of Highways and the Colorado State Patrol concerning the problems of deer-auto accidents and the evaluation of the various devices used to lessen this toll. Objectives: (1) (2) (3) To evaluate the effectiveness of the deer crossing tubes placed under U. S. Highway 50 near Sapinero, Colorado, in reducing or eliminating the mortality of deer in this area. To evaluate the effectiveness of new types of highway warning signs and "scare" devices in reducing the mortality of deer on U. S. Highway 6 & 24 near Grand Valley, Colorado. To evaluate the effectiveness of wing-type fences to induce migrating deer to cross under Colorado Highway 13 near Rio Blanco, Colorado. Techniques Used: The standard field form (Boyd, 1961) for reporting deeraccidents was used in only the three areas listed in the objectives above. The local W.C.O. in each of the three study areas was to continue filling out the forms whenever deer killed by automobiles were encountered. At the end of each month, the forms were to be sent to the biologist in charge of the study for compilation. Letters were written to various companies, State Game Departments and State Highway Departments for information on the deer-mirrors to determine costs and problems involved in their installation, maintenance and' effectiveness. Tracks of deer using near Rio Blanco were structures. the tubes near Sapinero or crossing under the bridges tallied to get the incidence of deer use of these Findings: The winter of 1963-64 in the Sapinero study area was very light until the first of March, 1964. For all practical purposes there were no deer down along the wintering areas adjacent to U. S. Highway 50 where the deer-crossing tubes have been constructed. No deer crossed completely under the highway through the tubes, although tracks were observed nearly one-half of the way through the tube that is in the highway fill on East Elk Creek. The deer, a large buck by the size of the tracks, had gone almost half way through the tube and then turned and retraced his steps to come out the way he came in. The tracks showed no evidence of haste so we can assume that he walked in and walked out. Until the weather puts the deer down along the highway for a period of time, we will not know how effective these tubes will be in helping the deer cross the highway. In the long run we will still probably have to construct wingfences to channel the deer into the tubes and then bait them through. The new larger deer crossing signs on U. S. Highway 6 & 24 were in place during the entire project year, so it was possible to compare the highway kill in this area with the kill the previous year when the signs were not in place. There were 68 deer reported killed during the 1963 project segment in the study area. During the 1962 study segment, there were 63 deer reported killed. This would indicate that the signs do not materially highway mortality of deer in this area. help in reducing the �- 65 - Of the 68 deer killed by automobiles in the study section of the highway, 77.9 percent were adult deer and 22.1 percent were fawns. Females made up 60.29 percent and males made up 38.24 percent of the kill by sex. There was one fawn killed and no sex was listed for it. The highway loss by month job is as follows: April May June July August September 4 2 0 0 1 1 in the study section \ for the 1963 segment October November December January February March of this 1 5 21 15 7 11 It is obvious from the above table that the six winter months through April are the most dangerous in this area. from November While the data gathered on the cost of accidents in this area is limited for the past segment, a total of $18,550.00 worth of vehicles .were damaged, and minor injuries were sustained by three people. Figure 1 shows the location of 238 reported deer-auto kills in the study area for the period 1961, 1962 and 1963. The area proposed for the deer-mirror study is also shown east of Grand Valley. Correspondence with various manufacturers, State Highway Departments and other State Game and Fish Departments has resulted in the gathering of considerable information relative to the experimental use of the "deer-mirrors" on highway rights-of-way. A general bibliography is included at the end of this report for the information that might be obtained by writing the various authors of the letters that are in the files of the biologist in charge of this study. The mirrors can be obtained from the General Engineering Corporation of Logansport, Indiana at a cost of $1.35 for each pair of mirrors. It will take 160 mirrors to adequately post a mile of highway. It is possible that the open country in our study area will not require as many mirrors as is suggested in the letters we how have on file. A meeting was held during the past segment with Mr. Ernie Green of the Grand Junction Division of the Colorado Department of Highways concerning the proposed study and requesting their cooperation. They were very enthusiastic about the program and offered any help that we might need. When the mirrors arrive another meeting is planned in order to square away any problems and to determine what each Department will do or furnish in the study area. No money was set up in this job for the purchase of the mirrors, as the Management Division of the Colorado Department of Game, Fish, and Parks indicated that they would furnish the mirrors for this study. Apart from selecting the two miles of Highway 6 & 24 where the mirrors are to be set up, nothing else was accomplished on this portion of the job. �- ti6 - Press of other duties did not allow much work to be done on counting tracks of migrating deer that might be using the bridges on Highway 13 near Rio Blanco to cross under the highway. Limited observations by the biologist in charge of this job, while traveling through this area during the past segment on other work, did not show any deer using the under-highway crossings. It would seem that wing-type fences might have to be constructed in this area to force the deer to cross under the highway. LITERATURE CITED Boyd, Raymond J. 1961. Study of deer losses on Colorado Highways. Job Compl. Rpt., F. A., Colo. Game and Fish Dept., April, 1961. pp. 75-79. Fehsenfeld, E. W. 1963. (Copy of letter to New Mexico State Highway Commission), State of California, Department of Public Works, Box 1499, Sacramento 7, California. Grottendorst, Pieter. 1962. The road crossing by game animals is no longer a problem. Translation of the article from the Dutch magazine "De Spiegel". Grottendorst, Pieter. 1963. Personal Communication. Kennedy, J. A. 1963. (Copy of a letter to E. M.Lang, New Mexico Department of Game and Fish), New Mexico State Highway Commission, Box 1641, Santa Fe, New Mexico 87501. Nelson, Kenneth A. 1964. (Copy of a letter to R. N. Denney, Colorado Game, Fish, and Parks Department), General Engineering Corporation, Van de Ree Deer Mirror Division, 832 Mayfair Drive, Logansport, Indiana. Wijma, G. and N. V. Zonen. 1963. Personal Communication. Prepared by: Raymond J. Boyd Approved by: Principal Game Biologist Date: Jldy, 1965 Richard N. Denney Project Leader �". .,..- .• , I .A.J r , l ~.1 t j \,..,..,,1 « ,..,.,.. .•, / t. r ". -4 (', ) ) ) "",.~41 N~ ( ,,II! •••••• , 1 t:.'~'::." ,l "< ~ f...j ~~~·lllhcr." FIGlRE 1. SPECIAL STUDY SECTION OF U.S. HIGHWAY 6 & 24,26 MILES IN LENGTH, GARFIELD COUNTY, Ca..ORADO. 238 REPORTEDDEER AUTO ACCIDENTS ARE SHoWN BY THE DOTS. PROPOSEDAREA WHERETHE "DEER...MIRRORS" ARE TO BE SET UP I S ALSO SHOv-N. DATA SHOWN IS FROM 1961, 1962 anti 1963 PROJECT DATA. ��July, 1965 - 69 - State of Project JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH SEGMENT PROJECT COLORADO No. Deer-Elk W-38-R-18 Investigations Work Plan No. 6 Damage Studies J~ 11 Methods of Evaluating Deer and Elk Use on Alfalfa Under Summer-Long Grazing ~. Period Covered: April 1, 1963, through March 31, 1964. ABSTRACT All of the 14 study plots on the field had to be relocated because the corner marking posts had been pulled by Mr. Clark's hired hand. The hay weight data could not be compared to previous years data because the plots were not the same as they were in 1962. Soil moisture readings were started on the study plots, but late in the project year a letter was received from the S.C.S. which indicated that our soil moisture resistance blocks might be defective. At report time, nothing had been heard from the Bendix Corporation concerning this report. Recommendations: 1. No recommendations of the study. for management purposes can be made at this stage 2. Hang the woven wire on the lO-foot steel posts around the study plots. 3. Harvest and weigh the hay produced from all 14 plots, and compare the yield from the fenced plots with the yield from the unfenced plots. This harvest should be on both first and second cuttings. 4. Take weekly soil-moisture readings and calibrate the soil type on the study field according to the instructions that are included with the Coleman Meter and the fiberglas resistance blocks. If the resistance blocks do prove to be defective, replace them and start over on the moisture readings. that are in place �- 70 - Objectives: (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) To establish test plots, both open to grazing and fenced, on a random basis. ' To determine the soil-moisture content of the soil on the study field during the growing season. To determine the meteorological data, air temperatures and relative humidity, within the study area. To determine the number of deer and time of greatest grazing use on the study field. To determine the cor r aLat Lon between the actual amount of use by deer on the test plots, with changes in production, so that estimates of game use may be converted to a change in pounds of hay produced. Procedure: Test plots.--Permanently mark all plots that are not to be fenced with six-foot steel posts at each corner. Construct a 10-foot high woven wire fence around each plot that is to be protected from grazing by the deer. The random design is already worked out and is to be found in the Quarterly Report for this project for 1961. Soil-moisture determinations.--The relation between the soil moisture content of the soil and the soil-unit resistance block must be determined for each soil in which the soil-unit is to be used. Since there is no available information on the relationship at West Rifle Creek it will be necessary to calibrate the soil~units after they are in place in the study plots. This will be'accomplished in the follqwing manner: (a) Soil moisture samples are taken in the immediate vicinity "stack" at each depth where soil-units are placed. of each (b) Take these samples frequently enough (weekly at least) to insure adequate coverage of the soil moisture range, and to minimize the variation in the samples. (c) These samples soil-unit. (d) As each soil-moisture reading is taken a soil sample is also taken from the same depth after the soil-moisture is determined from each soil sample, it is compared with the reading taken from the meter. After a series of these readings are collected, it will be possible to set up a calibration curve for the soil type on the study area. (Complete detailed instructions are printed in '~anual of Instructions for use of the Fiberblas Soil Moisture Instrument," Revised Edition, April, 1950, prepared by the California Forest and Range Experiment Station, U. S. Forest Service). are not to be taken less than six inches from each Weather observations.--Air temperatures and relative humidity readings will be recorded by the Hygrothermograph which will be set up at the south end of the study field. These readings may be dispensed with if the statistical analysis of the previous two-years data indicate a sufficiently high correlation with Government Weather Bureau readings at the Rifle, Colorado station. �- 71 - Deer counts.--Nightly counts of the deer using the study field will be made with the aid of the portable counting tower and spotlight. The light will be used for counts after dark and binoculars will be used on all counts. These counts will be graphed to show the best hours to count deer on the fields in future years if it is necessary. Hay production data.--All haying on the study field will be done by the Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department, using Department machinery. All hay produced in the various plots will be weighed after it is baled. Statistical analysis (Analysis of Covariance) of these hay weights will help determine if there is any significant difference between the amount of hay produced from the grazed plots and the ungrazed plots. These weights will be correlated with the soil-moisture readings to get data to be used in that phase of the study. . Hay weights will be taken on the plots on both first and second cuttings of alfalfa. Findings: The study received a series of serious setbacks during the 1963 segment of this project. For these reasons it has become necessary to start the study completely over. Test plots.--Mr. Charles Clark, owner of the land where 'the study is being run, hired a laborer to do much of his spring farming. During the course of his work he was to mark or corrugate the alfalfa field where the study plots are located. Evidently Mr. Clark did not make clear to him the reasons for the posts in the field, and to make it easier for him to run a tractor through the field, he pulled most of the corner posts before I happened to come by and get it stopped. Enough posts had been pulled, however, to make location of the plot impossible as far as the exact location was concerned. Therefore, we have hay weight data from only six plots on first cutting. Approximately the same problem occured during the second cutting of alfalfa on the study field. Another hired hand of Mr. Clark's, was helping mow the field one day trying to get the hay down before it rained, and he pulled up several corner posts to make it faster to mow. This allowed us to get hay weight data from only four plots from second cutting. The alfalfa hay was cut, raked and baled twice during the 1963 growing season. The first cutting was started on June 25, 1963 and was completed on July 5, 1963. The second cutting was started on August 21, 1963 and was completed on August 29, 1963. The weights of hay produced from the plots is shown in Table 1. Soil moisture determinations.--Thirteen soil-moisture resistance readings were made on the study field before a letter was received from the S.C.S. informing us that there was a definite possibility that the fiberglas resistance blocks that we had purchased with the Coleman Meter were defective. The serial numbers on our blocks was L-39 and the letter stated that all blocks in the 30 series were defective. We immediately wrote to the Bendix Corporation for information regarding this possibility. When no reply was received from the �- 72 - Table l.--Weights of alfalfa hay produced Rifle Creek. Plot 1st Cutting 6/25 to 7/5 Number Pounds of Hay 1 2 3 4 312 5 6 7 8 561 9 682 10 11 12 305 13 573 14 474 TOTAL 2,907 from study plots in 1963, West 2nd Cutting 8/21 to 8/29 Pounds of Hay 462 591 654 469 2,176 company in a reasonable length of time, the information was turned over to the Attorney General of Colorado and he was to contact the Company for the required information. At report time we have heard nothing concerning this action by the Attorney General's office, and do not know the status of the blocks at the present time. Weather observations.--Since we could find no significant correlation between the minimum air temperatures at the study field and the U. S. Weather Bureau Station at Rifle, Colorado, we had to keep the weather station in operation at the study field. Daily maximum and minimum air temperatures and relative humidity readings were recorded by the Hygrothermograph, and the charts were changed weekly from April 3, 1963, through September 24, 1963. The maximum air temperatures averaged 770 F. during the study period, with a range from 940 F. to 470 F., while the minimum air temperatures averaged 410 F. and ranged from 610 F. to 230 F. Deer counts.--Press of other duties did not allow any time for deer counts on the study field this past segment. However, Mr. Furman Dunham, the local W.C.O. in the study area, ran periodic counts of the deer on the study field for Game Management purposes, and his counts of deer using the field are made a permanent part of the records for this study. Discussion: There does not seem to be any real reason for any lengthy discussion on the past segment. So many problems came up that it has become necessary to, for all practical purposes, start the study completely over. �- 73 - If the soil-moisture resistance blocks prove defective, more than a full year will have been lost when we consider the time involved in making up the "stacks", installing them in the study plots, and the subsequent readings with the Coleman Meter. All of the posts have been hammered into the ground around the plots that are to be fenced, and the wire will be hung on them during the spring of 1964. It is hoped that the problems experienced during 1963 will not be repeated during the next segment. Prepared by: Raymond J. Boyd Date: July, 1965 Approved by: Richard N. Denney ��July, 1965 - 75 - JOB COMPLETION RESEARCH State of REPORT PROJECT SEGMENT COLORADO --~~~~~---------------- Deer-Elk Pro jec t No. _.:.;W_-.:::3.:::8_-=.:R~-=-1::;.8 _ Work Plan No. · ~9~ Job No. Period 2 Covered: April _ Investigations Study of Census Techniques Comparison of Air and Ground and Elk Counts 1, 1963, through March Deer 31, 1964. ABSTRACT The winter of 1963-64 was very dry in the area where the comparative counts were to be made. The lack of snow did not allow us to do any work on this job. Elk and deer did not come down into the study areas, therefore, a we1lcontrolled ground drIve was not possible. A new sno-sled was purchased during the past segment, which would have been used if it were possible to hold the ground drive with machinery as planned. Recommendations: get the necessary Ob jectives: (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) This job should be carried on for several years in order to data on elk counts that we now have on deer counts. To determine factors required to correct air counts for different snow, light and flight conditions, and to work out an easily recognized set of standards to permit an accurate selection of the proper correction factors by the aerial observer. To determine whether air-to-ground deer ratios will remain the same from one vegetative type or type of terrain to another. To determine whether air counts will consistently tally the same percentage. of elk as are present on the ground from time to time and from area to area. To make similar air-ground correlation counts using a helicopter. To determine if "over-snow" machinery can just as efficiently count big game on the ground as a ground drive by manpower. Procedures: 1. Select deer and elk areas representative of aerial population-trend areas on which deer or elk are counted annually. Such sites must �- 76 - possess features of terrain which make it possible to obtain a potentially total ground count of the deer and/or elk present. 2. Aerial division personnel will count the area as many times as possible and practical (without disturbing the herds) prior ~o each ground drive. Information thus obtained will be analyzed statistically (Chi-square test) to determi~e the consistency of ratios. Also, data on ground conditions (snow cover, light, air) will be tabulated to determine the effect of various conditions on the counts made. 3. Annual aerial-ground counts will be continued whenever combinations of counting factors Occur which are needed to complete the range of factors needed for analysis on the Cedar Ridge deer-wintering area and on the Sapinero elk-wintering area. These counts will probably be made in February. 4. A Bell 47-G3B helicopter will be used to test for efficiency in counting on both the deer and elk wintering areas. 5. The following types of "over-snow" machinery will be used to try a "machinery" count in the Sapinero elk-wintering area: Tucker snocat, Bombardier ski-doo (two types), Bombardier Muskeg Snow Tractor and any other types that may become available before the count is made in February. These vehicles will spread out to drive deer or elk which will be counted as they break through the line of vehicles. This count will take place at the Sapinero elk study area. 6. The population data obtained from the ground counts will be used for comparison with other population data which would apply to the same area or herd. Findings: Proper weather and snow conditions did not occur during the past segment, so no work was accomplished on this job. Prepared by: Raymond J. Boyd Date: July, 1965 Approved by: Richard N. Denney Project Leader �July, 1965 - 77 - RESEARCH REPORT State of COLORADO ----~~~~~-----------Deer-Elk Investigations Project No. W-38-R-18 --~~~~---------Work Plan No. --=.1.=.1 _ Specific Herd ,Studies Rocky Mountain Cooperative Elk Study INTRODUCTION Following is a Preliminary Report on the Rocky Mountain Cooperative Elk Study, prepared by Neal Guse of the National Park Service, Ben Rice and Lee Carr of the For~st Service, and Richard Denney of the Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department, representing the Technical Committee of the study. ' While individual jobs were written up for Federal Aid requirements in the Deer-Elk Investigations project; the organization and presentation of the 1962-63 work in this Preliminary Report present such a completely integrated picture that it isn't broken up into the specific jobs as written in the project. Instead, the Report will be left intact, but the jobs will be listed, with their objectives and status as a part of this introduction. The page numbering has been changed to follow the sequence contained in this publication, varying therefore from the original report. Job 1. Historical and Research Background. Objectives: (1) Determine the historical background data on the elk and range in the Estes Park area. (2) Determine the research background data on the Estes Park elk and range. Status: Discussed in the Preliminary 21, 34 through 39. Report on pages 13 through Job 2. Winter Range Delimitation. Objectives: (1) Delimit and map the primary elk winter range. (2) Delimit and map the intermediate elk winter range. Status: Discussed in the Report on pages 22 and 24, with key areas mapped on page 23. �- 78 Job 3. Basic Range Inventory. Objectives: (1) (2) Status: Job Discussed Determine the area; species composition, density and vigor; and soil movement and erosion on the elk winter range. Determine the condition and trend of the winter range components. on pages 20 through 28 of the Preliminary Report. 4. Seasonal Movements. Objectives: (1) (2) Status: Determine the normal seasona l movements and migration routes of herds and individuals. Determine the correlation, if any, between meteorological and phenological phenomena with individual and herd behavior. Discussed on pages 31 through 34, with map of concentration areas and tentative routes on page 33. The second objective as yet, has not been thoroughly investigated except as indicated by weather, pages 31-32. Job 5. Population Components. Objectives: (1) Determine (2) Determine (3) Determine Status: the sex ratio. the cow-calf ratio. the age class composition Discussed to Borne extent in the Preliminary pages 34 through 39. of this herd. Report on Job 6. Management Recommendations. Object ives: (1) Determine all aspects of the study as they pertain to this herd's management. (2) Publish and report findings. (3) Recommend the herd management indicated by the findings of preceeding jobs. Status: This is the first complete Preliminary Report to be presented since the study's inception. The overall management plan will not be formulated until more data has been gathered, analyzed and evaluated, although some very pertinent facts are pointed out on pages 39-43. Appreciation is expressed erating agencies' reports to Neal Guse who assembled and edited the coopin this Preliminary Report. �- 79 - ROCKY MOUNTAIN COOPERATIVE ELK STUDIES Preliminary Report 1962 - 1963 ABSTRACT The area of this study is located in the north central section of Colorado amidst the Front Range. All of Rocky Mountain National Park and the Estes Park District of Roosevelt National Forest are included. In some 900 square miles of diversified terrain, elevations vary from slightly over 5,000 feet to an average along the Continental Divide of above 12,000 feet; soils are derived mostly from metamorphic and igneous rocks; five major vegetation zones are represented; and typical mountain climate prevails. Meat and sport hunters almost completely extirpated native wildlife populations in this region during the late 1800's. Elk, in particular, were much sought after for food due to their larger size and gregarious behavior. Their demise prompted re-introduction by interested citizens in cooperation with the Forest Service from the Yellowstone National Park-Jackson Hole area. Beginning in 1913, with two local releases of 49 animals, and perhaps a small remnant of native stock, this species was successfully re-estab1ished. The establishment of Rocky Mountain National Park in 1915 allowed the incipient elk herd to increase under almost complete protection. The later creation of the Colorado State Game Refuge in 1919 along the east boundaries of the Park gave further assistance to the increasing herds. Also, the gradual drift of animals into this region from areas of other early transplants, particularly to the south where expanding settlement limited wintering sites, added to the rapid buildup of elk numbers. Progressive herd growth is reflected in the following official Park estimates; 1915--30, 1920--100, 1930--330, and 1940--1,200 animals. Accelerated human habitation and development in the Estes Park region were largely responsible for the blocking of historic migration routes and winter ranges in the foothills and eastward. Direct competition of elk with livestock for wintering areas then in private ownership in the Park only contributed to severe range damage beginning in 1930. As the vegetation continued to deteriorate under the increasing population, the elk gradually began drifting outside to the Forest in winter. Here, they caused damage to summer cattle allotments and private property during the early 1940's. �- 80 - The awareness of overabundance of elk prompted detailed range and animal studies by Park employees and wildlife technicians assigned to the CCC program. General appraisals of range conditions were also made by other agencies. All of these study results showed a steady decline of vegetation beginning in 1931. Minor erosion was noted in certain areas where the forage plants had deteriorated or disappeared. From these studies a program of controlling elk numbers was recommended. At first, an alternate system of extension of Park boundaries eastward and purchase of private lands within the boundaries was tried, which added approximately 12,000 acres of essential winter range. However, due to protection from hunting, this failed to solve the range problem and it was necessary to turn to more positive measures. Reduction programs were begun in the Park during the winter of 1942-43. They continued through 1962, except for the years of 1946-1948, in an effort to curtail the damage to vegetation and soil resources. From these programs, nearly 1,500 animals were removed from critical areas. During the same period when the Park initiated elk control programs, the Forest began a speeded-up program of range adjustments on cattle allotments. Public harvest on the Forest was begun in 1939 with the opening of the State Game Refuge. However, efforts to harvest animals outside Park boundaries have proved ineffective due to premature seasons and the unavailability of animals. In the Park, elk are confined to winter on approximately 18,000 acres of semi-open forest and valley bottoms in the east central portion. Other smaller areas support a limited number of animals. Winter populations in the Park have averaged 400-600 elk in the past which is above carrying capacities. On the Forest, the number of wintering elk fluctuates considerably, depending on weather conditions as affecting the Park ranges. Under certain conditions, upwards of 600 animals have been counted, well scattered over the entire area. Since many of these elk remain within the Park until after the regularly scheduled hunting seasons, adequate harvest is not Possible. In June of 1962, the Rocky Mountain Cooperative Elk Studies were begun jOintly with the Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department, Roosevelt National Forest, and Rocky Mountain National Park. In part, these studies are deSigned to develop a satisfactory solution to the surplus elk problem in the Park and adjoining Forest using public hunters. Of equal importance, will be the basic knowledge of elk derived from specific studies. Detailed range inventories and surveys on the Park and Forest, animal migrations, distribution, population densities, and other ecological information were considered important investigative areas by the study group. Specific data collected during the previous Park reduction programs are being compiled and will supplement the more recent information. �- 81 - Of primary importance is the elk live-trapping and marking program begun in the winter of 1962-63. Follow-up observations of marked animals indicate an extensive summer distribution covering the northern half of the Park. In addition, many animals apparently summer west of the Park, approximately 30 airline miles from the trap site. Movements across the Continental Divide take place in mid-May and again in late November. The majority of the elk winter east of the Divide and many do not leave the Park until January. The special pre-season held in January and February of 1963 was highly successful i~ reducing nearly 500 of these migrating animals. INTRODUCTION This report presents results from work covering the period of June 1962 through December 1963. Results from studies by previous workers and pertinent data from several other sources have been included for comparative purposes, or to maintain continuity of records for reference. The report is concerned with the Rocky Mountain elk herd which inhabits the region of Estes Park, Colorado. Participation of Roosevelt National Forest Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department and Rocky Mountain National Park is included as contributions tq the total report rather than presentation of individual agency efforts.!! Defining the Problems Through the ensuing years, since reintroduction into the Estes Park area in the early 1900's, the management of elk has become a major concern to many persons. Elk numbers, particularly in the past twenty years, have increased to concentrations in excess of winter range capacities. Beginning summer range problems from animal concentrations, although minor, are also noticeable in a few remote alpine sections. Historically, the Forest served as intermediate range to the migrating elk, but progressive settlement and development have interfered with animal habits. The result was to confine these animals to a relatively restricted winter range area within the Park. More recently, however, the Forest has acted as an overflow for the migrating elk which summer in the Park but move outside because of crowding and resultant deteriorated range conditions on the latter. In addition, the Forest' supports a rather limited residual elk population which periodically requires close attention. In the few years prior to 1962, large numbers of elk wintering on the Forest ranges created alarm among the Government and private land managers. It was then realized that the habitat could not support this number of elk in 1/ Hereafter referred to in this report as the "Forest", "Department" and "Park" respectively. �- 82 - winter, as well as permitted livestock during the'summer. Although no longer supporting livestock and other preemptive activities, similar concern was expressed by National Park officials over the increasing concentrations of elk. Past hunting during the regular and post seasons has proved unsatisfactory as a means of regulating elk numbers, except possibly those few summer residents on the Forest. This was'largely due to inaccessible or limited numbers of elk during the fall hunts; the animals remained within the Park or sought the more remote parts of the Forest. Direct animal reduction programs by Park rangers were initiated during the early 1940's because of the growing seriousness of the situation. Although on an annual maintenance basis since 1949, these have failed to achieve a satisfactory solution due to several objectional limitations. The Cooperative Approach It was with the above complicated ~eritage that the problems of a migratory elk population, involving different land use agencies, each with distinct responsibilities and authorities, prompted the cooperative approach as a means of solution. In June of 1962, discussions were begun on a mutual agreement between the Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department, Roosevelt National Forest and Rocky Mountain National Park. Entered into in December of the same year, a '~emorandum of Understanding" provided the framework for a program of extensive research to find the answers. Organization of Study Plans for future studies pertaining to or affecting the welfare of the Rocky Mountain elk herd are coordinated through and by two committees functioning under authority of the Memorandum of Understanding. These two committees carryon and are responsible for the program known as the "Rocky Mountain Cooperative Elk Studies.1f The "Advisory Council" is composed of administrators of the three participating agencies. Representation consists of the Director of the Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department, the Supervisor of the Roosevelt National Forest, and the Superintendent of the Rocky Mountain National Park. Each of the above agency administrators, or designated representatives, has one vote relative to pertinent matters considered by the Council. The HTechnical Committee" is composed of delegated technicians from the Agencies on the Advisory Council, and is represented as follows: Two wildlife biologists from the Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department, two members from the National Park Service, and two members from the Forest Service. Additional technicians may be invited to participate on the Technical Committee by unanimous approval of the Advisory Council. �- 83 - As presented in the Memorandum of Understanding, the purposes of the Advisory Council are to: 1. Maintain a clear definition of Agency responsibilities and jurisdiction. 2. Establish such policies as may be required for conducting the IIRockyMountain Cooperative Elk Studies." 3. Provide an interagency exchange for budgetary planning, work load plans and limitations, and short range and long range study objectives. 4. Keep Technical Committee informed of above items and act in consultation or advisory capacity to them in matters of administration and policy. 5. Act as the official representative of the Technical Committee, and approve and invite additional representatives on the Technical Committee as previously provided for in the Memorandum. 6. Provide for dissemination of public information or news items arising from activities of the Advisory Councilor Technical Committee. 7. Provide for administrative coordination with any other agency or group not a member of this agreement. As presented in the Memorandum of Understanding, the purposes of the Technical Committee are to: 1. Provide for free exchange of ideas in developing plans, programs, techniques and methods for management studies and management recommendations. 2. Coordinate the programming of the conduct of field studies and the possible exchange of personnel assistance in field operations. 3. Maintain a free and complete exchange of progress information and results, written or otherwise, of all studies by participating agencies and others. 4. Delineate and promote additional needed studies, particularly of research nature, which may be outside the current programs of participating agencies. Offer guidance in coordinating such studies into the needs for long range management of this elk herd and its habitat. �- 84 - 5. Recommend to the Advisory Council the need for and source of consUlting advice or other assistance from technical people not members of this Committee. The chairmanship of both the Advisory Council and Technical Committee rests with one Agency during each period of July 1 through June 30, and rotates successively among the Agencies. In 1962, the Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department chaired activities of the Cooperative Studies. At present, the charimanship rests with the Forest Service, to be vested with the National Park Service in July of 1964. This arrangement will continue in force as long as a useful purpose for the Studies is served. Objectives of Study In part, these studies are designed to develop mutually satisfactory solutions to the surplus elk problem in the Park and on adjoining Forest lands. Activities of the Advisory Council will provide achievement of the overall goal of long term management of the Rocky Mountain elk herd through implementation of desirable programs derived from sCientifically directed endeavors of the Technical Committee. Of equal importance will be the basic knowledge of elk habits derived from the specific studies, primarily of which, management plans can be fornulated, but in addition, will aid in the accumulation of fundamental life history information on the species. This may be of benefit to numerous other situations. Agency Involvement I In general, participation of each Agency in this study is governed by exacting provisions of policy and regulation, and to the extent no greater than funds are available for this purpose. The Forest's part in this cooperative effort has been to more completely identify and analyze its range resources to better evaluate elk impact upon the vegetation and Soil. Additional personnel assistance and limited funding were provided for the study where needed. Participation of the Park during this reporting period may be categorized as follows: 1. Elk migration and distribution studies through an accelerated live trapping and marking program. 2. Range inventory and evaluation studies. �- 85 - 3. Studies relating range relationships, associated data. to the population dynamics, food habits and relationships with other wildlife species, and 4. Compilation and analysis other significant historical of past elk reduction information. program data and Many of the Department's study activities follow similarly to those being conducted in the Park except that all effort is directed on the Forest. In addition, the Department furnishes periodic aerial coverage for elk observations, both in the Park and Forest. They have provided certain supplies, materials, and personnel assistance used in the trapping programs. In general, there is no direct exchange of funds or personnel; each Agency is responsible for its own activities. However, it should be recognized that each Agency has cooperated very closely without exaggerated regard for boundaries and responsibilities, all in an effort to accomplish the job in the shortest possible time consistent with the objectives. THE ENVIRONMENT Location and Topography The area of this study is located in the north central section of Colorado amidst the Front Range. It is roughly rectangular in shape, extending from the foothills west of Fort Collins and Longmont to the Never Summer Mountains, south from Commanche Peak and Buckhorn Creek to the Middle St. Vrain Creek. Some 900 square miles of diversified terrain are included. All of Rocky Mountain National Park and the Estes Park District of Roosevelt National Forest lies within this area. (Figure 1.) Elevations vary considerably throughout, from slightly over 5,000 feet in altitude at the base of the foothil1s~ to an average elevation along the Continental Divide of above 12,000 feet. Several formidable mountains of which many exceed 13,000 feet are also included. As the focal point, the village of Estes Park is approximately 7,622 feet. Towering peaks, flowered tundra meadows, alpine cirque-lakes, rolling peneplains, sculptured mountain valleys, rugged glacial gorges, and plunging streams describe the western section of the study area. Within the eastern half, rising abruptly from the Great Plains, a series of hogbacks and extended ridges, traversed by steep, narrow canyons with sizeable streams, parallel the steeper peaks and form the foothills section. Interspersed throughout are several large open parks and meadows. �- 86 - ROOSEVELT NORlH T ----------------------1 ROCKY MOUNTAIN NATIONAL PARK '---------Figure 1. Study area location of Rocky Mountain Cooperative Elk Studies. Estes Park District //0 o FOREST �- 87 - The" topography in general is rough. The more gentle slopes lie above 8,000 feet and the steeper slopes and the canyons lie generally below this elevation. The northern part of the area lies in the drainage of the Big Thompson River. The south part drains into the North St. Vrain River. Those portions west of the Continental Divide drain into the North Fork of the Colorado River. Geology and Soils The soils in this area are derived mostly from metamorphic and igneous rocks. Granite forms the bedrock over most of the Front Range and bands of gneiss and schist are now revealed in Big Thompson Canyon. All traces of former thick sedimentary beds are gone from the mountains, although deposits of shale and limestone can be found near the edge of the foothills. In brief mention of broad soil groups occurring in the study, those in the uplands have developed directly from the hard bedrock. Those in the lowlands (valleys and pockets) have developed from alluvial and colluvial materials eroded from the uplands and accumulated in lower positions. These soils strongly reflect characteristics of the mantle rocks from which they have developed and of the climate and vegetation which has brought about the changes from rock to soil. Generally, soils can be classified as being derived either from schist, granite-schist mixtures or granite alone. Incomplete knowledge of soil evolution and composition in the volcanic area in the northwest corner precludes discussion at this time. Areas of solid rock or where rocks are so numerous they completely dominate the aspect roughly cover about one-quarter of the total area. Commonly, such areas are more evident on south-facing slopes where continued erosion appears to remove the sandy materials. The north-facing slopes have more favorable conditions and exhibit the characteristic dense tree cover. Weather Summer weather in the higher mountains is short and cool, with very pleasant clear, sunny days; the nights tend to be cold and damp. Afternoon thunderstorms are common, usually of short duration, but occasionally causing cold and rainy weather that may last for several days. In contrast, summers in the lower eleva~ions are warm and dry. At Estes Park, mean maximum temperatures are in the mid-seventies, with mean minimums in the mid-forties. Along the Western Slope, comparable temperatures are somewhat lower in summer. �- 88 - The winter weather, although frequently rigorous, is relatively mild for the region's altitude. Almost three times as much snow falls along the west side of the Continental Divide, whereas the eastern is often milder with only about 55 inches of snowfall at Estes Park. This is due to the protection afforded by the mountains. Strong winds are common in winter, causing deep accumulation of snow on the higher peaks, but usually having a scouring effect in the lower, east side open sections. Mean maximum temperatures· on the tundra are about 20 degrees cooler than at Estes Park and minimums only about 10 degrees lower. There is considerable less variable range of daily temperatures at higher altitudes than in the lower sections. Due particularly to the accumulated heavy snow cover along the Western Slope, most wildlife is generally restricted to winter range areas east of the Divide. Annual mean precipitation at Estes Park for the past 34 years is 15.74 inches. Two-thirds of this average falls as rain during the summer months. Annual amounts of precipitation vary conSiderably along the eastern slope, from a low in 1939 of 9.43 inches to a high in 1946 of 32.47 inches. The duration of below average yearly amounts is often lengthy, as in 1952 through 1960, except for 1957, whereas above normal precipitation periods are only two to three years long. Therefore, drought conditions occasionally affect the growth of plants on the eastern side. Although it receives nearly three times as much snowfall, annual mean precipitation at Grand Lake is only about four to five inches greater than at Estes Park. Vegetative Zones Due to the wide range of altitude, of from 5,300 to over 14,000 feet, within a relatively short east-west distance, several vegetative zones may be described. The various zones encountered in this study are briefly described as follows: Near the edge of the foothills, vegetation is transitional between the plains and the foothills, but mostly grassland with a scattering of ponderosa pine, and with shrubs on the north slopes. The Foothills or mountain-shrub zone of 6,000 to 8,000 feet have such dominant species as mountain mahogany at the lower limits, with bitterbrush and other shrub species where various conditions prevail. Ponderosa pine is at the upper limits intermixed with several grassland areas. Douglas-fir is found on north-facing ravines and canyons. Thickets of broad leaf trees and still other shrubs are apparent along the stream borders. Various rushes and sedges are common on the more moist streamside sites. �- 89 - At elevations in excess of 8,000 to 10,000 feet, the Montane or open pondersoa pine forest zone, with Douglas-fir intermixed is characteristic. It includes moist and dry aspen groves, lodgepo1e-Doug1as-fir forest on north slopes, open meadows and barren, rocky ridges. Big sagebrush and bitterbrush comprise most of the shrub components although several other species may be abundant. Scattered clumps of juniper can be dominant on the dryer hills and rocky canyon walls of small drainages. At the upper limits, extensive stands of even-aged lodgepole pine and aspen are encountered. Above the previously described zones, lies the Subalpine or Engelmann spruce-subalpine fir zone, a conifer cover supporting luxuriant vegetation. The forests are interspersed with numerous moist meadows, ponds~ and bogs, commonly very rich in wildflowers and containing various species of sedges and rushes, as well as many grasses. Dense stands of lodgepole pine are conspicuous on large fire disturbed ~ites in lower areas. At the upper limit of this zone is treeline, at approximately 11,500 feet. Above treeline, the Alpine or tundra zone, consists mostly of deep-rooted mat- and cushion-plants, dwarf willows, grasses and sedges. Grasslands, moist meadows and rock fields provide the aspect. The zones listed above overlap and telescope into each other considerably. One zone will often be present on a south slope, and another will be found across the valley on the n9rth slope at the same altitude. The zones merge into each other on the margins, and the plants which are characteristically found in one zone are sometimes found in favorable sites in the neighboring zone above or below. Occasionally, because of peculiarities of slope or exposure, the zones may be found in exactly the reverse position from that expected. HISTORICAL Aboriginal BACKGROUND Occupation Although the evidence of very early occupation of the area is meager and inconclusive, there is a possibility that man was here between 10,000 and 15,000 years ago. Early artifacts suggest that early hunters were using Trail Ridge and other passes to cross the Continental Divide at this time. The evidence also indicates intermittent rather than continuous occupation. Travel back and forth across the Continental Divide was the primary reason why Indians entered these mountains. This is evidenced by the concentration of artifacts at specific passes. Small camps elsewhere indicate seasonal hunting in the valleys and on the slopes and ridges. Since the archeological material in this area has its closest relation �- 90 - with the Plains cultures, it is reasonable to assume that the Indians were in pursuit of animals migrating from the plains to the mountains. If similar animal habits follow those of today--with larger numbers along the western slope in summer, then the reason is apparent for the Indians having to cross the Continental Divide. This is verified as a result of a 1914 pack trip with Arapaho Indians who had lived in this region during youth, about 50 years prior to white explorers (Toll, 1962). Apparently the Indians had, for all practical purposes, abandoned this area Some 40 years prior to settlement, and it was necessary to bring these individuals in from Wyoming. In recording this trip, Toll (1962) mentions that Arapaho geographic names reflected Arapaho life; the names being from characteristics of the country or with reference to animals that had been found in a place. Many prominent features in this area once bore Arapaho names with special reference to wildlife. In particular, Horseshoe Park was called "In-Lodge" because it was an enclosed park and the home of large quantities of game. In the case of smaller parks and meadows, the Indians called them "Game Bags", because of similar animal concentrations within them, particularly buffalo. The following statement from this publication (Toll, 1962) SUmmarizes the importance of this area to the Indians: "After the Arapa,hos left this region, going north to follow the buffalo which had been driven off by the advance of the white man, the Utes came in, so that many settlers regarded the region as having been permanently occupied by the Utes; while in fact before the white ~n came, Estes Park was regarded by the Arapahos as their own territory, and held by them against all other tribes. They regarded it as a huge game preserve, and it is the same question which was the principle (sic) one in Indian life here. It occasioned their wars with other tribes, as they wished to keep the game entirely to themselves. It also determined their migrations from winter to Summer, as they followed the game up into the mountains in Summer and back to the plains in wintertime." Recent Settlement From his narrative, there is reason to believe that Rufus Sage might have set foot in the now Allenspark and Wild Basin area of the present Park in 1943 (Sage, 1857). Joel Estes and his son have been credited with "discovery" while on a hunting trip, when they topped Park Hill on October 15, 1859, and surveyed what is now Estes Park (Estes, 1939). In the next year, he brought his family to settle on the eastern end of the vast open meadow, mostly for hunting and prospecting purposes. Here the Esteses remained until shortly after the severe winter of 1865-66, when they decided to sellout and move to warmer climates. For the five years during their stay, hunters, tourists, trappers and homeseekers came and went. But in 1867, when the Estes' family claim was acquired by Griff Evans, the first permanent settlement was founded. �- 91 - Evans' land rights were later transferred to a British nobleman, the Earl of Dunraven, who set about immediately acquiring the whole of Estes Park as a private game preserve. Although he claimed to have secured about 15,000 acres, the greater portion being contested by several pioneers as fraudulent, his influence on the region was, perhaps, more beneficial than his antagonists would have admitted. Many enterprises that would have seriously marred the scenic landscape were kept out of his feudal regime for later generations. The trouble concerning land titles, the rapid slaughter of game by both tourists and settlers and other reasons finally led Lord Dunraven in 1883 to give up the game preserve idea. By this time, however, a number of famous writers and artists had visited, giving much favorable publicity to the region~ So as early as 1877, the possibility of Estes Park becoming a tourist resort was evident, with the opening of several hotels and lodges. Somewhat earlier, most all ariable lands had been settled and various ranching enterprises developed. By 1900, the village of Estes Park began to develop into a small community. A decade later, the public utilities and civic improvements were modernized to care for the ever increasing summer population. The establishment of automobile stage lines between Estes Park and the valley towns was probably the most important contribution towards this end. Depletion and Restoration of Elk From all indications, the last of the native elk herds disappeared from the Estes Park area during the period, 1870-75, which corresponds closely to the time of increased settlement. Some "old timers", however, can recall seeing a few individual animals as late as the early 1890's. Meat and sports hunters from the time of the Esteses almost completely extirpated native wildlife populations in filling the demands for regional settlement. Early accounts tell of taking game out of this area "by the wagon load" to nearby alley markets to be sold for a few cents a pound. Since this was the time of the mining boom in several mountain areas throughout Colorado, the demand on elk and other species must have been of considerable magnitude. Early settlers also had almost complete dependence on game for food, clothing, and occasionally shelter. Elk were reintroduced into the Colorado (Roosevelt) National Forest from Yellowstone National Park and Jackson Hole National Elk Refuge following their near extinction. Official Forest Service reports show that two shipments of 49 elk were brought into the vicinity of Estes �- 92 - Park. On March 5, 1913, 25 (20 cows and five bulls), and On April 2, 1914, 24 (apparently all two-year-old cows) were shipped by rail to the Burlingame terminal at Lyons and transported to Estes Park in makeshift cages aboard trucks. The first load was unloaded and retained at the Elkhorn Lodge Corral west of Estes Park until early summer. Later 12 head (13 died during shipment?) were driven by men on horseback to Horseshoe Park and freed. Details on the handling of the second shipment are, in general, lacking, but some accounts indicate a similar scheme was'followed. However, these elk apparently broke from confinement and escaped to the Park on their own. Early Forest Service photographs also show the latter band being "dipped" before leaving Lyons, apparently for scabies. The Forest Service paid for the shipment of these elk from the Yellowstone-Jackson Hole region to the rail terminal at Lyons, and popular subscription made Possible the rest of the journey. These two specific shipments were only part of a statewide elk restoration program on the Forest Service. Two other releases of some 72 animals were also made in the Nederland-Rollinsville area and there is a possibility of these animals later jOining the incipient Estes Park herd. From the 36 survivors of two local releases and perhaps a small remnant of native today. stock, elk have subsequently increased to their abundance of Establishment and Land Agencies The early Territorial Assemblies recognized the need to protect fish and game by enacting several prohibition measures prior to Colorado's attaining statehood in 1876. However, it was not until 1897 that the Legislature created a department concerned primarily with game and fish but with the added responsibility of forestry. Two years later, the Legislature made the "Department of Game and Fish" that We know today. In July of 1963, the responsibility for State Parks was added as a function of the Department. In 1902 and 1903, the General Land Office ordered the withdrawal from settlement of lands for the proposed Medicine Bow Forest Reserve. This Reserve (reclassified as National Forest in 1907) was established in 1904 and included portions of both Colorado and Wyoming. In the year following, the area was divided and the original name applied to the Wyoming section. The remainder was designated the Colorado National Forest, which in 1932, was renamed to the present day, Roosevelt. From the original gross acreage of Colorado National Forest in 1908, 1,142,789 acres, the present size is approximately 1,085,155 acres within exterior boundaries. Only 780,809 acres are in Federal ownership. The �- '33 - history of land entry of the Forest is as varied as its topography. In the northern part, alternate sections of railroad land are dominant; in the southern section, small mining strips are scattered throughout; and predominantly in the mid-portion but also widely scattered throughout the Forest are homestead entries of various sized tracts. In 1917, considerable acreage was added along the eastern boundaries of the Colorado National Forest. Out of this addition, nearly all of the present Estes Park District was created along with the extension of portions of other Districts within the Forest. On January 26, 1915, the Park was established, partially from lands within the Colorado National Forest. This was the culmination of many incidents which had their origin some six years earlier with the prominent pioneer, Enos Mills. For his untiring efforts, today he is credited as being the "father" of the Park. He was first stirred toward setting aside the area as a game preserve but later put his efforts into establishing a national park. The concepts behind this Park as well as other earlier National Parks were mainly oriented toward providing a sanctuary for wildlife, with their scenic and scientific attractions being of almost secondary importance. With the increased attendance of Estes Park as a tourist resort, Mills' later efforts for a national park were more readily accepted not only in Colorado but nationwide. In contrast to the Forest, due to the rough terrain, the Park did not experience heavy settlement prior to its establishment. Only the larger meadows and open parks were developed, principally for livestock activities. Later, resort enterprises and limited summer home sites replaced the ranches. Since its being set aSide, the Park has undergone several boundary changes--some, additions, other, deletions. From the original acreage of 229,062 in 1915, the Park has grown to its present size of approximately 410 square miles, or a total of 260,Q18 acres. The Park is also one of the most accessible of the western National Parks, being comparatively close to large centers of population in the East and Middle West. For this reason, increasing visitation has grown steadily to the high of 1,860,000 persons in 1963. Early Elk and Habitat Management Elk increased under almost complete protection when the Park was established in 1915. The later creation of the Colorado State Game Refuge in 1919 along the Park's north, east, and south boundaries, all within the Forest, greatly increased the amount of protective area available to the increasing wildlife populations. An active predatory animal control program within the Park (1917-1924), and unrestricted trapping and shooting of predators in the Game Refuge also contributed to the increase. Progressive elk-herd growth is reflected in the following official Park estimates: 1915-30, 1920--100, 1930--330, and 1940--1,200. �- 94 - The area that was added to the Forest in 1917 was one where early day settlement had been relatively intensive considering the rough topography. A major portion of it had been logged, burned and heavily grazed for many years. Most arable land was under cultivation or used for ranching activities. As a resul t, .the forest, forage and soil resources were generally in a depleted condition. In an effort to stop further depletion and to restore the watershed, forage and other values, the Forest Service initiated a program to manage grazing, timber cutting and other uses at the time the land was acquired. The first sign of excessive elk numbers in the Park was extensive aspen "barking" in the spring of 1930. Progressive human habitation and development was attributed largely responsible for the blocking of historic migration routes to winter ranges in the foothills. However, perhaps the elk introduced in 1913-14 and their descendents never developed the more extensive winter migration pattern that was noted in presettlement times. Also contributing to other serious range abuses in certain sections was the fact that the elk herd was in direct competition with domestic livestock interests on the larger meadows. These areas were all under private ownership until the mid-1930's with the exception of Moraine Park which was not acquired until 1962. The early awareness of too many elk prompted detailed range and animal studies by Park employees and wildlife technicians assigned to the ccc program. General appraisals of range conditions were also made by other agencies, chiefly Presnall of the Fish and Wildlife Service. During 1933-34, 12 small exclosures were established in several locations as a part of a comprehensive study of range conditions in areas on the eastern side of the Park where animal concentrations are heaviest. Additional data were gathered on the natural history requirements of the elk. All of these study results showed a steady decline of vegetation beginning about 1931, with an increasing number of less desirable species coming into the composition of range forage. Measurements of annual growth on Some browse species indicated utilization as high as 75 to 90 percent. Minor erosion was noted in certain areas where the vegetation had deteriorated. It became apparent during the latter part of the 1930's that range management practices on the Forest to that time had not stopped the deterioration of the watersheds and grazing values and brought about the desirable restoration. Therefore, a speeded-up program of range adjustments was affected about 1940. In the Park, the earlier abandonment of predator control and the later extensive land acquisition program where methods used to thwart continuing range damage after it was recognized that the elk herd was �- 95 - firmly established. Extension of Park boundaries eastward and purchase of private lands within the boundaries added approximately 12,000 acres of essential winter range. However, due to rigid protection from hunting, these attempts failed to solve the range problem and it was necessary to turn toward more positive measures. Outside the Park, public hunting was permitted in 1939 after numerous ranchers were beginning to complain of elk damage to crops. These depredations were originally encouraged by the ranchers at a time when the area's elk population was at a low ebb, but now the animals were becoming more of a nuisance. Resource managers with the Forest also encouraged harvest to eliminate range damage. A program of wildlife management through direct animal reduction was first attempted by the Park during the winter of 1943-44. However, it lacked general public support and was abandoned without mu~h success. However, because of the necessity of protecting vegetation and soil values and generally unsuccessful public harvest, an accelerated control program was initiated the following winter and 301 elk were removed. Continuing range studies provided information that prompted another control program in 1949-50, further reducing the Park elk herd by 340. Since that time, annual reductions were made on a maintenance basis following cautious, but encouraging reports of minor range improvements. During the period 1950 through 1959, an average of 50 animals were eliminated from the Park each winter. In 1960, to hasten slow recovery conditions, a quota was set for 200 elk, but only 143 animals were taken pending the completion of a new long range research and management plan. In 1949, the National Forest Advisory Council studied the condition and uses of the Forest and recognized the need for improvement. Their report called for a reduction in permitted livestock numbers and also a proportionate reduction in big game populations. After an intensive range-watershed study and other political pressures, the rate of livestock adjustment since 1950 has tapered off. However, it is still felt, by those resource managers closely associated with the Estes Park area, that additional reduction in livestock use is needed. The new approach developed for the Park in late 1960 placed emphasis upon the results of reliable research before any major management of species was considered. Preliminary findings pointed toward a continued surplus of elk but were inconclusive as to the desired herd level to be maintained. The control program for 1961-62 was begun with a goal of 100 animals but only 62 elk were eliminated after unusual weather conditions forced the majority of the herd to winter outside �- 96 - the Park. A special January-February preseason in 1963 took into consideration that portion of the herd which migrates from the Park annually, usually after the regularly scheduled hunting seasons had ended. This season effectively removed not only some of the normal winter range residents outside at the time because of severe weather, but animals from other sections of the Park where summer range damage is becoming evident. For the first time in approximately 20 years, desirable winter elk herd numbers were achieved. In June of 1962, the Rocky Mountain Cooperative Elk Studies were begun jointly with the Park, State and Forest. In part, these studies are designed to develop a satisfactory solution to the surplus elk problem in the Park and adjoining Forest. Of equal importance will be the basic knowledge of elk derived from the specific studies. RANGE STUDIES Methods of Study During the 1930's, the Forest Service undertook the first range inventory on National Forest ranges. The procedure consisted of gridding the landscape on systematic lines, delineating major vegetative types, and rating the vegetation on general condition. Since this was done prior to the advent of aerial photography, it can generally be said that net grazing acreages indicated by this survey were grossly overexaggerated. During this period, game, particularly elk, were of such insignificant numbers that their impact was not considered by the survey. In the early 1950's another range inventory was completed on National Forest lands. Here with the use of aerial photography, accurate type maps were available for the first time. During this survey individual types were rated on the reconnaissance method of vegetative survey. Again, as in previous surveys, the primary emphasis was to evaluate the range for domestic livestock stocking rates; wildlife habitat analysis was not considered as part of the survey. The assumption made at this time was that game used areas on the steeper slopes or isolated parks that were not used by livestock. This was later proved incotrect, particularly in regard to winter elk use on the Forest. In 1959, another vegetative survey was completed with emphasis on livestock ranges on the Forest. The vegetation was evaluated on its composition with respect to the expected ecological climax. Game habitat was again neglected as a separate integral. In areas where both livestock and game were involved, game habitat was included, however no differentiation between each class of use was indicated. Analysis of game range specifically, and in this instance, elk on the Forest, was by means of a standardized procedure (Big Game Range Analysis) jointly devised through several interagency meetings and discussions in 1959. The principal Colorado agencies involved in the �- 97 - evolution of this method were the Game, Fish and Parks Department, Bureau of Land Management, and Forest Service. Basically, this procedure involves (1) delineating game ranges by seasonal use, (2) typing and mapping the vegetation, (3) selection of appropriate key plant through a series of procedural steps outlined in handbook form, with various coded symbols and analysis criteria. By using the interagency technique, field analysis of the Forest's game range was completed by a cooperative Department-Forest crew in 1963. The most prominent result of this inventory was the determination of key areas. This determination was based primarily upon past use as indicated by browse hedging and pellet groups. Typing on two-inch to the mile township maps from aerial photos and field data sheets is in progress now. Range studies in the Park follow similarly to the above but with somewhat more intensive direction toward determining the maintaining balances rather than production and harvest of a particular wildlife species. The same procedures as above are followed for short term analysis but more reliance is placed on long range study of fenced exclosures. Within the exclosures and check plots established in the vicinity, vegetative changes are recorded by periodic, detailed charting of several permanent square-meter plots. Although designed to disclose the same basic end result of resource management, differences in methodology lie in intensity; the latter being somewhat more comprehensive in relation to the total environmental picture. Extensive range investigations were begun under the 1960 long range management and research plan and later incorporated into the Cooperative Elk Studies at its inception in 1962. Prior to this, only occasional range appraisals were made, mostly at a few select locations, although during the 1930's, detailed studies were a part of the total program. Existing exclosures, being inadequate by size (20 by 20 feet) and time of establishment (1933-34), necessitated construction of additional study plots to relate vegetative trends and influences of animals. In 1962, one three-acre exclosure was erected in Beaver Meadows, covering a variety of vegetation types. In late 1963, four one-acre exclosures were established containing the following types: Moraine Park--willow; Beaver Meadows--mixed grass; Deer Mountain--sage and bitterbrush; and Horseshoe Park--aspen. The primary consideration in this study phase was to map the winter range area in order to delineate major vegetation and grazing types and determine acreages of the various types. Information was obtained from enlarged aerial and other photographs and field reconnaissance surveys. At this writing, this is approximately 85 percent complete, with final inking and acreage determinations remaining. �- 98 - Resource Inventory With many of the historic migration routes to winter ranges outside the Park blocked by man-made developments, the elk have been forced to winter in a relatively restricted area until spring thaws permit their return to the higher summer range areas. The major winter range in the Park includes approximately 16,000 to 19,000 acres in the east central part. It consists of steep lower mountain slopes, hillsides, "open parks", and relatively flat valley bottoms, at elevations varying from 7,800 to 10,000 feet. The winter range is covered with a typical open stand of ponderosa pine intersp~rsed with grassland parks, meadow bottomlands, and groups of aspen. The ponderosa pine soon gives way to a dense belt of lodgepole pine at approximately 9,000 feet. Drought conditions occasionally effect the growth of plants in this area where the annual precipitation is approximately 16 inches. About one-third of the total area reflects critical or deteriorated vegetative conditions due to past animal concentrations and preemptive uses. Out of a total of approximately 244,000 acres of Forest lands within Game Management Unit 20, less than two percent or only 4,245 acres are conSidered as key winter elk range. Analysis of the 4,245 acres indicates that approximately 53 percent has a grass-type understory. Fortyfour percent has a browse-type understory with densities of browse plants less than 15 percent. In both types, grass and browse, a low density of overs tory ponderosa pine is associated. Comparison of livestock use with the game range map indicates that the bulk of key winter elk range is also key summer livestock range. Table l.--Key area types, acreages and conditions, Forest, 1962. Type Condition l-Agsm-Kocr 6-PP-POA 6-PP-Mumo-Pu tr 6-PP-Cemo 6-PP-Putr 6-PP-Putr 6-PP-Putr 6LP-DF * MLM1( M Roosevelt National Acreage 187 1,493 552 HLL M 1,102 MLM H 256 MLL H L1M H 370 150 135 TOTAL ALL TYPES 4,245 Based on H for high, M for medium, and L for low conditions for comPosition, density and vigor over the soil condition rating. �- YJ - NORTH T --- - L-..I------ ROCKY MOUNTAIN NATIONAL NATIONAL PARK FOREST Figure 2. Key winter elk ranges, Rocky Mountain Cooperative Elk Studies �- 100 - Forage Utilization The pattern of elk use on Forest ranges can be attributed to the existence of the Park. The Park serves as a refuge and provides the bulk of the winter feed. However, increasing numbers of elk are migrating to the Forest and particularly so when feed is short or when precipitated by persistent inclement weather condi.tions. It is during these latter periods when large numbers leave the Park that overutilization is apparent on the Forest. This overgrazing due to elk has occurred during the past 10-15 years. The forest initiated animal-days-use-per_acre studies on some of the key elk winter areas in the mid-1950's. These studies were based upon animal pellet group counts for the various classes of game and in Some instances included cattle. Forage utilization studies either by occular estimate or hurdle plots were not incorporated within these studies. Utilization by each class was usually so excessive that it was determined unnecessary to measure the use. The bulk of the forage on these study areas is grass and forbs. With such low densities of browse within these pellet group study areas, production-utilization measurements on browse were felt to be impertinent and therefore were not initiated. These pellet group studies have proven effective animal numbers with consideration of weather. trend indicators of To determine utilization of browse species for which elk show some preference in the Park, production-utilization measurements were made on two species within established line transects. Condition-age-form classes were observed within the same transects and at random locations over the winter range. Since elk show preference for these species during severe weather periods, they serve as an indicator of use under various winter conditions in certain areas. Condition and Trend Exclosure studies have been established in two of the Forest key areas---Storm Mountain and Pole Hill. At each exclosure, vegetation is studied on the basis of (1) total exclusion of elk and cattle, (2) open to elk use but excluding cattle, and (3) an outside study area open to both elk and cattle use. Within each exclosure, Parker three-step transects have been established to measure vegetative composition and trend. To date, these areas have not been reread due to the short time since establishment. As a result of many of the earlier studies having emphasis on livestock, stocking rates were gradually reduced as more vegetation condition information was gathered. In part, they were reduced to allow for increased elk numbers. Figure 3 shows this adjustment in the number of cattle months use since 1930. �- 101 - Actual Use (J) Permitted Use 9 8 ~ "1:l s:: 7 C\I (J) ::l 0 ~ "'" 6 5 (J) .c .w s:: 0 ~ Q) 4 3 ,...... .w .w C\I 2 U 1 I 1 1 .1 I I 0 II') C"") 0 ...:t ...:t 0 C"") II') II') II') 0'\ 0'\ 0'\ 0'\ 0'\ 0'\ ,...... ,...... ,...... II') ,...... ,...... I ,, ,...... I 0 <o 0'\ ,...... Year Figure 3. Cattle months use, Estes Park District, Forest. Roosevelt National �- 102 - Table 2.--Classification and utilization of preferred browse of elk, Rocky Mountain National Park. Species S Aspen Willow 18 6 Age-Form-Past Use Composition, 1962 Percent Occurrence Age Classl/ Form Class~7 Past Use27 Y M D 1 2 3 4 0 L M D 52 29 1 21 32 41 6 16 18 21 45 12 68 14 4 26 57 13 1 15 20 64 Production-Utilization Measurements, 1962-63 Number Total Ave. Growth Percent Species Measurements Growth Growth Removed Utilization Aspen 1007 6174" 6.1" 2655" 43 Willow 252 2659" 10.6" 19l4" 72 1/ Age Classes 2/ Form Classes 3/ Past Use S - Seedling 1 - Available, little or no o - 0 or none Y - Young Plant hedging L - Light M - Mature 2 Available, moderate hedM Moderate D - Decadent ging H - Heavy 3 Partly available, moderate hedging 4 Mostly unavailable The 1962 Range Analysis Survey indicated that an approximate total of 72,000 acres on the Estes Park District, only 6,200 acres or nine percent was considered usable for livestock grazing. Of the 6,200 usable acres, 69 percent is rated as in poor vegetative condition, 28 percent is rated fair, and only three percent is rated good. Responsibility for the majority of these undesirable vegetative conditions does not entirely rest with livestock; in the past 10-15 years, elk have had considerable impact upon Forest ranges. Condition and trend plots were established in the Park with the completion of the one three-acre and four one-acre exclosures. These fenced areas exclude both deer and elk. In addition to the several permanently charted square-meter plots within each exclosure, the entire area is also mapped by plane-table survey of distinctive vegetative boundaries and prominent species. The exclosures are read and compared at five-year intervals. �Table 3.--Key area elk days use Eer acrel Estes Park Districtl Subunit Period/Days/Acre Type Subunit Sullivan Park Grama Meadow South Sullivan Park Grass Aspen True Gulch Meadow Aspen 1958-59 1959-60 1960-61 1961-62 1962-63 1958-59 1959-60 1960-61 1961-62 1962-63 1958-59 1959-60 1960-61 1961-62 1958-59 1959-60 1960-61 1961-62 1962-63 1958-59 1959-60 1960-61 1961-62 1962-63 1958-59 1959-60 1960-61 1961-62 1962-63 56 -- Roosevelt National Forest. Type Period/Days/Acre East Crosier Ridge 78 -54 54 -- Coulson Gulch (West of NW Corner, Sec. 14, T3N, R71W) 131 -92 42 Silo Gulch -39 -68 Big Hollow -90 --- 42 Dunraven Ridge -- 39 Gal10uchi Meadow -- 47 68 90 Miller Fork 6-PP-Grass 1960-61 1961-62 1962-63 1957-58 1958-59 1959-60 1960-61 1961-62 1962-63 1957-58 1958-59 1959-60 1960-61 1961-62 1958-59 1959-60 1960-61 1961-62 1962-63 1961-62 1962-63 1960-61 1961-62 1962-63 1962-63 42 17 17 46 27 12 34 17 48 6 4 17 30 24 12 13 3 32 49 13 I-' 0 VJ �ELK HISTORY STUDIES Specific information has been collected during the course of several Park annual elk control programs in the past. These data have included live and field-dressed weights, paunch samples, general physical measurements and conditions, age class and sex structures, and fertility and breeding potentials. Time has not permitted an exhaustive analysis of these data and for the purpose of this paper, only preliminary findings are reported. Physical Characters Weights were obtained from nearly 300 animals during the reduction programs of 1944-45, and 1949-50 through 1954-55. The period of collection was during December through March in most instances. From this information, average weights of different age classes can be determined, as shown in Table 4. Table 4.--Live and field-dressed weights of elk, December through March, 1944-45 and 1949-50 through 1954-55, Rocky Mountaiq National Park (Weight in pounds). Live Weight Largest Smallest Dressed Weight Largest Smallest Age and Sex No. Calf, Female Calf, Male 25 15 320 363 219 234 216 227 143 175 253 270 175 186 Yearling, Female 14 Yearling, Male 22 417 474 375 340 296 346 196 237 377 419 253 296 Average Live Dressed 2-4 years, Female 2-4 years, Male 42 20 545 612 336 417 414 437 267 300 458 539 319 366 Mature, Female Mature, Male 95 51 650 910 505 500 466 640 300 365 527 683 356 469 TOTAL 284 A check station survey by Hunter (1953) found that the six-year average of mature elk in Colorado was approximately 658 pounds, while a mature cow was approximately 489 pounds. Comparison of this information with the above table indicates that for the Park, the mature bull was approximately 25 pounds heavier, and the mature cow approximately 38 pounds heavier than the average for other Colorado areas. �- 105 - Antler development of bulls in relation to age follows closely with other studies of Colorado elk, notably Hunter (1953). However, due to protection from hunting afforded by the Park, many unusual variations from the normal pattern are more common, particularly in the older individuals. Condition classes have been noted in nearly all of the animals taken in the control program. Due to the absence of universally accepted criteria, this information is not included here. However, there were very few animals which were found to be in extremely poor physical condition. The majority of these were reported from the earlier control programs when the population was more numerous. In general, these animals showed conditions of poor health other than from malnutrition. Collections for internal parasites during several past control programs have all been with negative results. With the exception of winter ticks (Dermacentor albipictus), in some cases of severe concentrations, and an occasional unidentified type of louse, external parasites are also lacking. Blood samples were obtained from 23 bulls and 37 cows during the 1963 preseason hunt, which were analyzed by the Cooperative Brucellosis Laboratory in Denver. None of these animals were positive reactors, or even suspect, using the procedure for cattle testing. In addition, 20 lung tissue specimens proved to be negative for the presence of lung worm eggs or larvae. On December 12, 1949, a 4-5 year old cow was collected with plural canines on both sides of the upper jaw. Extraction showed that the teeth were not joined at the root. Review of the literature indicates this abnormality to be previously unreported. Forage Habits No recent efforts have been made to determine the seasonal amount and variety of forage consumed by elk. Earlier data taken from a year-long study by Gray in 1942-43, supplemented by collections during several control programs, give a general picture of forage utilization by elk in this area. From the graph (Figure 4), it is apparent that the majority of elk forage is composed of herbaceous materials. Based on an annual average by forage class consumed, the following percentages of total diet are found: grass and grass-like--76.8 percent, forbs--9.4 percent, and browse (including shrubs and trees)--13.8 percent. �- lOG - 13 6 5 Number Sampled 4 7 5 4 7 25 42 3 D J F % v o 1 u m e A Figure 4. M J J A S o N M Month Forage utilization by elk from paunch analysis, Rocky Mountain National Park. March 1942-February 1943, December 1944-January 1945, November 1951-Apri1 1952, and February 1954. �- 107 - Analysis of the dominant species found for each forage class indicates something of preference particularly when these species are of low densities on the range. In order of percentage of occurrence for grasses found in the diet of elk in this area are: Agropyron, Bouteloua, Bromus, Munlenbergia and Koeleria. These species occurred more frequently in spring, corresponding closely with the more succulent vegetative growth. Elk use of the grass and grass-like class Carex and Juncus indicated an annual seasonal average of 14 and 13 percent respectively. No single forb species occupied more than one percent of any one month's total. For browse, Populus and Salix were dominant throughout the annual elk's diet, particularly during the summer and fall months. Migration and Distribution Estes (1939), in recalling early conditions in this region stated, "Winter drove all the game down to the foothills, except the elk, over the range or mountains". This suggests that with increasing settlement, the elk were excluded from their former winter range which is now occupied by the town of Estes Park, Lake Estes and surrounding ranches. This further implies that if the elk never migrated to the Plains, they must have sought the protection of the later Park, which was not extensively developed. The blockage of historic winter range and/or migration routes, and the protection afforded by the Park and Game Refuge, were principal factors which allowed the elk population to increase beyond normal numbers. Information is available from past observations to indicate certain patterns of seasonal elk movements and various habitat use, particularly delineation of summer, winter and intermediate ranges. For the Park, the general summer elk range includes most of the tundra area north of Trail Ridge Road and the Never Summer Mountains. Other smaller areas are scattered throughout the Park. There are little definitive transitional zones due to the absence of diversified habitats and topographic barriers. Tree line elevations are used more for diurnal activities by elk summering on the tundra than as spring and fall habitats, and likewise to some degree by animals on the winter range. The winter range is that portion of the east central part of the Park below 10,000 feet. The lower meadows and open parks are used quite extensively in winter by elk for feed, with the lodgepole pine belt serving as cover and bedding. On the tundra, usually the more moist sites attract the elk for forage which they utilize during darkness, returning to the dense forests for protection. Although dependent upon weather conditions, normal migrations from winter to summer ranges begin in mid-April and continue through May. Downward movements usually do not take place until the first inclement weather occasionally in November but more commonly in late December. �- 108 - The summer resident elk herd on the Forest, which normally numbers 75 to 100 animals, are considerably scattered throughout in small bunches. However, the main area is located between Highways 34 and 66, centering on the Pole Hill area. In certain areas of common boundaries with the Park, Some drift back and forth is not uncommon in summer, particularly in the Signal-Crystal Mountains area. Ranges of the several individual groups are not precisely known at this time. Within recent years, about one-half to two-thirds of the summer elk population migrate outside the Park following the first severe winter storms. These animals become scattered throughout the Forest in small bunches, mainly to those areas shown in Figure 2. To obtain more specific information of seasonal elk distribution and movements, a live-trapping program was developed in the winter of 196263 to mark animals for future identification. On the Forest, a site in Cedar Park was selected on the basis of a small band of elk frequenting the area. In the Park, Moraine Park was chosen since it was known that a large herd (nearly 250) were present in this area all winter. Capture was by means of a portable, wooden panel corral into which the animals were baited with alfalfa hay and block salt. The method of handling differed somewhat for both traps, although a net was used in each. In the Forest trap, the animals were induced to jump upon a Suspended net, whereas in the Park trap, a net was raised beneath the animals to a height where they were immobilized. While ~n the restraining net, the animals were tagged in both ears, neckbanded, and information taken on age, sex, and other observations. Considered to be highly successful for the first year of the live trapping and marking program, a total of 96 animals were tagged and neckbanded. Two of these animals were taken in the Cedar Park trap and 94 were marked in the Moraine Park trap. In the Park, of the 94 animals marked, 21 were recaptured two or more times, with one female calf in the trap seven times. Eleven animals were not tagged due to accidental escape and the loss of three individuals due to exhaustion. Interesting observations of marked animals during the summer and fall of 1963 provided Some new information on elk movements not previously known or even regarded significant. One particular fact of noteworthy significance, is that a high percentage of marked animals, and correspondingly of total population numbers, summer west of the Continental Divide and a significant proportion west of the Park. A few banded animals were seen on the East Fork of Troublesome Creek, approximately 30 airline miles west of the trapsite. Another fact, based on observations of marked elk is that these animals move across the Divide in mid-April, and again in late November and December, at a time when heavy snow accumulation blocks many of the mountain passes. �tI/llJ NORTII f-' o VJ "'''\ '"" \ ~~ ~ ''''""'\ I/!JJ l , Figure 5. Approximate seasonal ranges and migration routes of elk. Scale Summer Range - ~ Winter Range - ~ Routes 1" = 5 miles c=> ~ .; \ GJ �- uo - Two mature female elk ear-tagged and neckbanded during the 1962-63 livetrapping program in Moraine Park were killed in the 1963 preseason hunt on Pole Ridge by hunters. One other cow elk was killed which was tagged as a calf in Horseshoe or Moraine Parks in about 1959. During the regular 1963 season of October 19 to November 7, two males were taken in the vicinity of Grand Lake. An accelerated trapping program will continue to be of major importance in future elk studies since much of the management is directly concerned with animal movement patterns. Two operational traps were in use in the Park for the 1963-64 trapping season, one again in Moraine Park. The latter was not functional until February and therefore of little value in marking Some of the animals that leave the Park from this area. Future plans call for expanded physiological and other studies of live animals at hand, and individually identifiable elk for specific movement data. Popu la Hon Dynamics After the elk were reintroduced into this region during the 1910's, they soon became scattered throughout the foothills. It is r.eport.ed that the animals released in the Rollinsville area increased much more rapidly than in other areas. So much in fact that they were beginning to cause crop damage as early as 1924. This damage was the result of many of the patented lands being.used as winter stock pastures to the exclusion of elk. This situation necessitated the first open season in 1929. By 1935, the limited winter range, accompanied with poaching, was reported as noticeably restricting elk increases in this area. However, this decline may have been more a result of a gradual drift northward that was apparent in 1939. By 1922, elk were beginning to drift out of the Park where many summered to the north and east in bands of two and three. Apparently elk in the Estes Park area had also increased significantly for during November of 1923, the Game Commission made the first claim settlement in this area for hay damage. However, this may have been due only to early severe weather conditions of that year. Heavy poaching was reported in the Estes Park District during the late 1920's and 1930's although designated as part of the Colorado State Game Refuge. Despite this influence, steady increases were observed and about 1940, the first concern was expressed over elk numbers on the Forest. By 1946, this problem of damage to pasture and hay crops and conflict with cattle grazing was defined as acute. It is possible that the sudden impact was stimulated by the earlier control programs in the Park which may have encouraged animals to migrate to the Forest. �! " NORTH i & &. OJ ,rn \. m \ \ $ & []l '\ \ iIT,,,\ --:.u ~ A; r',Il.r liS A "\ '\ & & & & o Figure 6, 1963 summer observations of marked Moraine Park Trap Site Cedar Park Trap Site Visual Observation Aerial Observation Hunter Harvest Scale 1" = 5 miles ) (j) and fall elk. - ~ - ~ - ~ - [] - () '''',~ r------I [[] .I . t ~ \ c9 �- 112 - An estnnate of elk numbers for the Forest is incomplete. However, actual winter trend counts of the number of animals in the Park have been nearly continuous over the past forty years. These give a fairly representative picture of the elk population for the region. Information on elk reproduction was one of the principal areas where much data was collected from past control programs. Compilation of these data gives a general picture of breeding potential for the elk herds in this area. Analysis of the following tables indicate these major points: (1) A high conception rate, particularly among those animals of prime reproductive age, (2) A high conception rate for the female yearling age class as compared with segments of the Yellowstone-Jackson Hole herds, and (3) A fetal sex ratio of 126 males per 100 females. Table 5.--Productivity of known age classes of female elk, Rocky Mountain National Park. Age Class No. Examined No. Pregnant % Pregnant 1~ 48 4 8 2~ 19 14 74 3~--4~ 98 86 88 5~--6~ 58 51 88 7~--8~ 38 34 89 9~ 19 11 58 10~--12+ 23 17 74 Table 6.--Incidence of pregnancy and fetal sex of elk, .Rocky Mountain Nationa1·Park. No. No. No. % No. Fetal Sex Period Cows Preg. Barren Preg. Yearl. M F Uncl. 1942-43 (Nov-May) 10 7 3 54 2 3 4 0 1943-44 (Jan) 10 9 1 90 0 5 4 0 1944-45 (Dec-Jan) 125 93 31 75 4 43 45 5 1949-50 (Nov-Feb) 93 79 18 85 14 43 32 4 1950-51 (Nov-Apr) 44 36 8 86 4 16 15 5 �f'. 750 z ~ t::I :;0 1001 600 ,/ 0 ~ / ,- / > Z ~ I-' I-' VJ / 450 / / t-< ,- / en / (") / 0 ~ ~ ,- / 300 t::I 2.3\ 150 ~ ~ I ~ ~ 0' ~ 0' ~ I co ~ 0' ~ ~ ~ I ~ ~ 0' ~ 0' ~ I co I ~ 0' ~ ~ ~ I ~ ~ 0' ~ 0' ~ I co ~ 0' ~ WINTER USE PERIOD Figure 7. Highest actual winter range elk counts, Rocky Mountain National Park. �- 114 - Table 6.--Incidence of pregnancy and fetal sex of elk, Rocky Mountain National Park. (Continued) Period : 1951-52 (Nov-Apr) 1952-53 (Nov-Apr) 1953-54 (Nov-Apr) 1954-55 (Nov-Feb) 1955-56 (Nov-Mar) 1956-57 (Nov-Jan) 1957-58 (Dec-Feb) 1958-59 (Dee-Mar) 1959-60 (Nov-Jan) 1960-61 (Jan-Apr) 1961-62 (Oct-Dec) TOTALS Excluding Yearlings No. Cows No. Preg. No. Barren % Preg. No. Yearl. M 44 24 22 11 16 7 5 23 17 93 28 572 40 18 18 9 12 6 4 17 17 75 20 460 4 6 4 2 4 1 1 6 0 18 8 115 91 75 82 82 80 86 80 79 100 80 71 80 2 3 0 1 1 1 1 6 0 8 1 48 16 10 6 2 11 5 2 1 9 2 4 2 3 1 9 8 4 8 42 33 1 0 217 172 14 10 2 6 1 0 0 0 5 0 19 71 524 456 III 87 214 71 Fetal Sex F Une!. 171 The elk rutting season in the Park usually begins the first part of September and continues into mid-November. This is based on past observations of grouping behavior and limited information from fetal measurements. Generally, the harems average 12-15 cows, with much larger groups observed earlier in the season. Younger males, including yearlings, two- and three-year olds, play an important role during this period of sexual activity although taking no part in the struggles' for harem dominance. These age groups have been observed mounting cows amid the confusion caused by combat between two older bulls or in the larger uncontrolled bands of cows. Recent observations of these age groups also mounting younger cows as late as mid-January may point to the reason for some of the variation in reported fetus sizes. However, it is not known whether these acts may be successful in so far as influencing breeding potentials. There has been some evidence to indicate that cow elk Who failed to conceive during the first estrus were successfully bred at a later period. FetUses examined during the 1949-50 reduction revealed variations in size and weights which tend to indicate later conception dates. Weights of nine fetuses collected on January 22, 1950, ranged from 3-3/8 ounces (female) to 48~ ounces (male), averaging 27~ ounces. More recently, a total of 21 fetuses were secured from pregnant cow elk killed during the 1963 preseason hunt. They ranged from 84 to 2372 grams in weight (2.8 to 125 ounces, or from 0.3 to 7.8 pounds, averaging 3.4 Pounds). Fitting these data into a crown-rump length �- 115 - curve based on Morrison, et. a1. (1959), an average age of 125 days was calculated for these fetuses, ranging from 85 to 150 days. The average date of kill on the cows was established at January 30, 1963. Backdating then, we find that the peak of conception for elk in the Estes Park area was approximately September 26, but ranged from September 2 to November 6, 1962. Two of these fetuses were taken from cows which would have had these calves on their second birthday, having conceived as long-yearlings. One of these was 3.0 pounds, and the other was 4.7 pounds. Many investigators feel that the young or yearlings of any species that are capable of reproducing at an early age bear smaller progeny. Recall that the average weight of those fetuses sampled was 3.4 pounds. This small sample, however, does not necessarily refute this theory. Of these 21 fetuses sampled, 12 were male, and 9 were females. All appeared to be normal, perfectly formed specimens. Data on crown-rump length, contour length, foreleg and hind leg length, head length and width, and tail length were recorded, along with weights. There were two possible instances of twins reported during the preseason, although they were not verified by technician examination. There has been only one occasion of collecting fully developed twin fetuses in the Park. These were found during the 1960-61 control program in a 2-4 year old cow. In this instance, both sexes were present. Of 524 cows examined in the Park, exclusive of yearlings, the incidence of twinning in elk is slightly less than two-tenths of one percent (0.2%) which is similar to that reported from the Northern Yellowstone Herd. The heads of 70 elk were also collected during the 1963 preseason which were aged by dentition and wear. The eyeballs were preserved for later analysis and correlation of weight with age, and possibly range conditions. Sex and age of this sample were as follows: 24 percent males and 76 percent females; 29 percent calves, 19 percent yearlings, nine percent two-year olds, 10 percent three-year olds, seven percent four-year olds, 24 percent five years old and older, of which 10 percent were ten years old or older. Sex and age classifications can be obtained from several sources, although each by itself may not be entirely representative of actual conditions. Table 7 and 8 reveal this variation by source. �Table 9.--Hunter harvest of elk, Game Management Unit 2ol/ Year 1939 1940 No, of Hunters Percent Success Regular Valid. Season. Typell Harvest Bulls Cows Calves Total Period~7 4 % Year1.-/ A.a. A.O. Oct. 11-20 (10) 34 34 Oct. 4-20 (17) Nov. 15-30 (16) 90 90 1941 400 26 100 AO, 300 AL Nov. 28-Dec. 9 (12) 22 7597 1942 A.a., 100 A.L. Oct. 3-18 (16) 25 - 75100 1943 A.a., 100 A.L. Oct. 9-Nov. 15 (40) 59 63 122 1944 A.a., 200 A.L. Oct. 7-Nov. 5 (30) 44 64 108 1945 A.a. Oct. 13-28 (16) 20 20 1946 A.a. Oct. 12-27 (16) 24 24 1947 A.a. Oct. 11-26 (16) 78 78 1948 E.S. Oct. 15-24"(fO) 50 88 22 160 1949 E.S. Oc~. 15-30 {16) 76 40 21 137 E.S. Dec. 3-31 (29) 31 49 8 88 1950 E. S • Oc t. 20-:n---cr2j 20 12 5 37 1951 E.S. Oct. 20-31-(12) 57 55 21 133 1952 A.a. Oct. 20-3[112) 24 24 1953 8 A.a., 125 H.C. Oct. 2l;-Nov.9-(17} 31 10 1 42 1954 254 27 16 A.a., 125 H.C. Oct. 20-31-(12) 49 17 3 69 1955 281 23 11 A.a., 125 H.C. Oct. 20-31----c12) 50 8 6 64 1956 363 40 A.a. Oct. 20-=-:r1(12) 65 80 2 147 55 150 H.C. Oct. 20-Dec. 31 (73) 1957104 -:31 ,j,j A.a., 150 H. C. Oct. 20-31 ([2) 9-Z--436 141 1958 506 2929 A.a., 150 H.C. Oct. 20-Nov. 2 (14) 105 34 10 149 1959 771 24 36 A.a., 150 H.C. Oct. 20-Nov. 1 (13) 134 52 2 188 1960 653 28 A.a. Oct. 22-Nov. 5 (16) 82 82 47 150 H.C. Oct. 22-Dec. 31 (71) 27 64 7 98 1961 879 16 A.a. Oct. 28-Nov. 8--r12) 82 82 32 150 H.C. Dec. 2-31 (30) 7 42 7 56 1962 736 12 A.a • Oct. 27-Nov , 7 (12) -48 - -------z;s 28 150 H.C. Dec. 1-31 (31) 2 36 5 43 1963 3170 10 H.C. Jan. 26-Feb. 17(29) 96 2q:9 80 425 -A...•n - ..., 150 H.C. Oct. 26-Nov. 3 (9) 48 52 _ 100 ..• •... -... -~-~.1/ 1939-1945, Roosevelt National Forest totals; 1~4b, UnL~ ~J ~o~als; 1~4/-1~4~, Unit 17 totals; to present, Unit 20 totals. 2/ A.O.--Ant1ered Only, A.L.--Ant1er Less, E.S.--Either Sex, and H.C.--Hunter's Choice. 3/ Figure in parenthesis is number of days. 4/ Figure in parenthesis is number of yearlings. ,- .. .•..•. "'. .... 47 31 40 41 20 20 21 36 (2j) 33 (49) 32 (45 34 (51) 31 (57) 25 (45) 45 (62) 35 (32) 28 (147) and 1950 f-' f-' co �- 119 during the summer is taken by cattle and that nearly all utilization at other seasons is by elk. There was evidence of very light use by deer and rodents. Cattle ate over two-thirds of the forage consumed on the area where they were allowed to graze and elk accounted for most of the remaining one-third. Total consumption by both cattle and elk ranged from 50 to 75 percent of bluegrass production. Elk use was greatest each year where the most grass was left after the cattle were removed from the range. When reviewing utilization over the Forest, it is quite apparent that 'the bulk of the key elk winter range is also key summer livestock range. There is a portion of the key elk range on slopes where cattle grazing is of minor importance, however, but by and large key elk range and key livestock range are synonymous. Therefore, with some merit of truth, livestock and elk do compete for forage in the Estes Park area even though this competition is at a different season of the year. Recently, several people have advanced the theory that the continued high elk population has seriously affected the status of bighorn sheep in the Park. The first such evidence comes from the early 1920's when the elk increase was almost explosive and a corresponding serious decline of bighorn numbers was observed. In recent years, while the elk population has continued to increase, the sheep population has remained stable. Although quite suggestive as to the reason for suppressed bighorn numbers, there is little scientific fact available to attempt any conclusions at this time. This condition warrants additional field study in connection with determining future management plans for the elk herd. �- 120 - REFERENCES CITED 1. Estes, Milton. 1939. Bull. No.6. 2. Gierisch, Ralph K. 1960. Utilization of bluegrass by cattle and elk at the Pole Hill study plot. Unpublished, U.S. Forest Service. 3. Hunter, Gilbert N. 1953. Deer-elk-bear seasons in Colorado, 19481953. Colo. Game and Fish Dept., 64pp. 4. Husted, Wilfred M. 1962. A proposed archeological chronology for Rocky Mountain National Park based on projectile points and pottery. M.A. Thesis, Univ. of Colo., Anthropology Dept., Boulder, 190pp. Morrison, John A., C. E. Trainer, and P. L. Wright. 1959. Breeding season in elk as determined from known-age embryos. J. Wi1dl. Mgmt. 23(1):27-34. 5. The memoirs of Estes Park. 6. Sage, Rufus B. Boston. 1857. 7. Toll, Oliver W. 1962. Arapaho names and trails. Prepared by: Date: Colo. St. ColI. Rocky Mountain life. Westworth and Co., Neal Guse Ben Rice Lee Carr Richard Denney July, 1965 ----------~~-------- Approved: 43pp. Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief �Jull}, 1965 - 121 - ANNUAL PROJECT REPORT State of COLORADO Project No. W-3S-R-1S Deer-Elk Investigations Work Plan No. lla Rocky Mountain Cooperative Elk Study Job No. 7 Physiological Studies Period Covered: April) 1963, through March 31, 1964. ABSTRACT Electrocardiographic data were obtained on 39 live elk, but the analysis is not completed. Cardiac ratio data were obtained on six elk, but haven't been analyzed as yet. Blood protein analysis is not complete as yet. All elk were negative on hemagglutination tests for leptospirosis and brucellosis. Objectives: Determine the normal physiological data on Rocky Mountain elk according to the following categories: 1. Electrophysiology of the heart: a. PR interval b. QRS interval c. QT interval d. Heart rate 2. Myocardial ratios: a. Myocardial weight b. Ventricular-septal total weight relations 3. Respiratory rate 4. Body temperature 5. Hematological values: a. Hematocrit (PCV) b. Hemoglobin c. Leucocytes d. Sedimentation rate e. Blood proteins f. Serum (1) Sodium (2) Potassium (3) Calcium �- 122 - 5. Hematological values g. Blood sugar 6. Age 7• Weight 8. Sex (cont'd); Pro~edure: Most of the data were obtained from 39 live-trapped elk incidental to the tagging and banding portion, Job 4, of the study. In addition, specimens were collected from elk harvested in the study area by hunters whenever possible. 1. While live-trapping, each elk was restrained in a squeeze chute and an electrocardiograph was connected to the elk by means of three standard limb leads (bi-polar) and three uni-polar leads to record an electrocardiogram (Figure 2). 2. The weight of hearts collected from dead elk of assigned ages will be determined by total weight and myocardial weight, and the relationship of the ventricles and septum will be calculated by dividing the weight of the myocardium into the right ventricle, left ventricle and septum weights, respectively. 3. The respiratory minute. 4. The body temperature of each live elk was taken rectally of an electronic thermometer. 5. Blood samples of approximately 50 cc were taken from the live elk while in the squeeze chute (Figure 1) and the following hematological values determined through 3tandard laboratory procedures: hematocrit, hemoglobin, white blood cells, sedimentation rate, serum calcium, serum sodium, serum potassium, clotting time, and differential white cell count. 6. The age of all live-trapped and harvested dentition development and wear. 7. The weights of all live-trapped elk were recorded combination scales and squeeze-chute incorporated chute design. rate was determined by observational counts per by means elk was determined through by means of the into the trap and Results: The electrocardiographic and cardiac ratio analysis on 39 elk has not been completed as of this date. A report on this phase of the project will be rendered as soon as sufficient hearts have been weighed and EKGs analyzed. The blood protein analysis is also incomplete at this time but should be complete by the next reporting period. Thrombocytes were not counted due to the difficulty of doing so under field conditions. Delayed counts are highly inaccurate and of no diagnostic use. Hemagglutination tests of the blood of all elk were negative for leptospirasis and brucellosis. �- 123 - The results obtained on the rest of the measurements are presented in Tables 1 and 2. Table l.--Hematologic data on Rocky Mountain elk, 1963-64. Parameter Stand. Error Stand. Dev. (N) Mean 95% Confidence Interval 2 hr. Sed. rate (12) 13.2 nun/hr. + 9.9 rom 2.85 nun 7 - 19 nun Hematocrit (31) 46.3% ± 2.12% 0.381% 45.5% - 47.1% Hemoglobin (grams)(3l) 18.3 grams ±. 0.808 grams 0.145 grams l8.0g - l8.6g Blood glucose mg/100 ml 146.4 mg/ (32) 100 m1 t 46.69 mg/100 m1 8.254 mg/100 m1 129.6 - 163.2 mg/100 ml Clotting time (34) 14.2 min. + 4.27 min. 0.732 min. 12.7 - 15.7 min. White blood cell count (32) 5,559 /cm3 t 1,902 /cm3 336 /cm3 4874 - 6244 /crn3 Sodium (36) 148.2 meq/L t 8.62 meq/L 1.436 meq/L 145.3 - 151.1 meq/L Potassium (34) 5.48 meq/L t 0.646 meq/L 0.110 meq/L 5.26 - 5.70 meq/L t 0.44 mg/100 m1 0.0708 mg/100 ml 9.26 - 9.54 mg/ 100 ml Calcium (39) 9.4 mg/100 m1 Differential blood cells Neutrophils (40) Lymphocytes (40) Eos inophils (23) 61% + 16% 2.48 56% - 66% 36% + 13% 2.12 32% - 40% 15% + 4% 0.80 13% - 17% Discussion: From this study some interesting comparisons can be made between the hematologic values obtained in elk and those previously obtained in some of their domestic counterparts, Le. the cow, sheep and horse. One of the most outstanding values noticed was the clotting time of elk blood. It was �- 124 Table 2.--Physio1ogic data on Rocky Mountain elk, 1963-64. Weight Resp. Rate Temp. Elk No. Age Lbs , : Per Minute of. 1 calf 350 32 105.2 2 yearling 465 42 109.5 3 calf 350 62 108.6 4 calf 265 28 106.8 5 calf 200 92 109.1 6 calf 325 54 109.2 7 calf 370 78 109.3 8 calf 290 28 106.9 9 calf 340 66 108.0 lO 4 yrs. 485 48 lO6.8 11 adult 480 24 105.8 12 adult 555 44 109.0 13 4 yrs , 500 22 106.6 14 adult 420 44 106.0 15 adult 475 32 107.8 16 calf 290 40 105.8 17 3-4 yrs. 485 30 104.2 18 calf 280 107.0 19 6-7 yrs. 475 36 104.4 20 adult 565 44 107.2 21 calf 300 44 110.4 22 yearling 3lO 36 104.8 23 calf 275 32 104.7 24 4-5 yrs. 435 36 105.2 25 3 yrs , 335 36 lO4.9 26 calf 175 40 106.8 27 calf 240 50 107.1 28 calf 215 28 106.3 29 calf 190 42 107.4 30 adult 450 84 109.2 31 calf 255 102 110.6 32 calf 280 96 110.8 33 3-4 yrs. 455 62 111.2 34 adult 435 86 108.5 35 yearling 345 60 108.0 36 yearling 295 110 109.2 37 yearling 345 76 110.4 38 yearling 260 70 109.6 39 adult 475 76 111.0 X = 53 X = 107.7 SD =+ 24 SD = 2.02 ± Sex F F F M F F M M M F F F F F F F F F F F M F F F F F F M M F M M F F F F F F F �- 125 - found to be 14.2 minutes which is considerably longer than any of our domestic species. The horse has a clotting time of 11 minutes which is the longest of the latter group. Another value that; differs significantly from domestic animals is the WBC which in the elk was found to be 5,559/cu. ml. The lowes t WBC in our domestic animals is?,OOO/cu. ml. in the sheep. . The hemoglobin value in elk of 18.3 g./lOOml. is much higher than the highest values in our domestic animals, 13.5 g./lOO ml. in the dog and 12.5 g./lOO ml. in the horse. The differential count in elk corresponds most closely with that of the horse. Both show a predominance of neutrophils (61 percent in elk, 55 percent in horse) with almost 33-1/3 percent lymphocytes. The elk in this study showed a pronounced increase in eosinophils 15 percent which wasprobably due to the heavy infestation of wood ticks found on them. The highest normal eosinophil count in our domestic animals is five percent. The blood glucose level in elk (146.4 mg. percent) is much higher than in the horse (80 mg. percent) or cow (50 mg. percent). It is fairly close to the value found in the pig (140 mg. percent). The calcium value in the elk (9.4 mg. percent) is slightly lower than the cow (10 mg. percent). The sodium value corresponds very well with values found in most domestic animals. The hematocrit (46.3 percent is very close to that of the dog and horse (43 percent). The sedimentation rate l3.2 nnn/hr. compares favorably with the rates of the domestic animals. ,1~ ." . It 'should be pointed out that although these animals had been in the trap for several days they were still very excited. The handling process to get them into the squeeze chute added to -this excitedness. The values obt.aLned therefore have to be considered with this in mind. Pr epar edby: Reginald A . Herin, M. S ., D .V .M. and _-=:R~i..;.c~h~a.::r...;;d~N:::.~D..:.e~n. ---:, Associate Professor of Physiology Wildlife Researcher College of Veterinary Medicine Project Leader, W-38-R Colorado State University Colorado Game, Fish and Fort Collins, Colorado Parks Dept. Approved: Date: July, ·1965 Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief �Fig. 1. Obtaining the 50 cc blood sample from the jugular vein of an elk restrained in the combination squeeze chute and sca1es o Fig. 2. The electrocardiograph in position next to the squeeze chute, showing bi-po1ar leads in place. on a table the uni- and � https://cpw.cvlcollections.org/files/original/b6905f3514945b4a9c9d964bbd44ff27.pdf fe80b2435e26af6c9448619959553e05 PDF Text Text July, 1955 - 127.~ JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of~ __-=CO~L=O~RAD==~O~ - Project No., _ ~W_-~I~O~1~-R~-_6~ Work Plan No. 1 '----~------------------ Game Range Investigations Job No. Title:__~M_e~s_a~V_e~r_d_e __C~l~i~p __P~l~o~t~S~t~u_d~y Period Covered: I ~ _ January 1, 1964, to April 15, 1964 Objectives: For sound winter game range management, it is necessary to know the percentage of current annual growth game may be permitted to remove yearly from key browse plants without injury to the plants. Also, it is important to know the effect of different intensities of use on the forage produced. The Mesa Verde Clip Plot Study is a long-term clipping experiment simulating different intensities of game use on five key species of browse plants: big sagebrush, antelope bitterbrush, mountain mahogany, serviceberry, and gambel oak. The purpose of the study is to attempt to learn how the yearly removal of certain percentages of the current annual growth stems and of old stems affects the plants and their forage production. Procedure and Findings: All field work outlined for the study has been completed according to plan. During previous segments, field data were compiled and chi-square, correlation, and regression analyses made of most of the data. An outline of the final report was made, and a first draft of the Introduction, Description of the Study Area, and Methods was prepared. In beginningw~k on the Results section, it became apparent that additional analyses were desirable, in particular, a regression analysis comparing final total mean yields between treatments. During the present segment, data for this regression analysis were compiled and the analysis was completed. The final report outline was submitted to the Editorial Committee for comment and criticism. In interpreting some statistical analyses previously made, several errors were found which necessitated checking data used for the tests against original data and making corrections and reruns of some of the tests. Some corrections still remain to be made. Additional tabular material and graphs have been prepared and comparisons and interpretations of the data made. Upon completion of the checking and correction of tests, the Results section of the final report will be finished, �- 1~8- and the entire report reviewed, rewritten, and submitted to the Editorial Committee for comment and suggestion. Upon receiving its comments, a final draft will be prepared incorporating any suggested revisions, and the manuscript will be submitted for publication. . Prepared by: Harold R. Shepherd Date: ~J~u_l~y~, _1_9_6_5 Approved by: _ Richard N. Denney Project Leader Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief �July, 1955 - 129 - JOB COMPLETION RESEARCH State of REPORT PROJECT SEGMENT COLORADO ----~~~~---------------- Project No. Game Range Investigations W-10l-R-6 .Iob No. 2 Work Plan No. 1 Title of Job: A Detailed Study of Range Forage by Use of Fenced April 31, 1964. Period Covered: 1, 1963 to March Exclosures ABSTRACT No vegetation inventories nor comparison studies were done in the period. No requests were received for the latter, and a proposed new South Park exclosure was not constructed eliminating the need for any base year surveys. However, as scheduled, pellet group counts on entire study treatments were again repeated at exclosures to obtain stocking rates inside of partiaily protected exclosure parts for big game animals and for big game and livestock on adjacent open range. Deer stocking in the winter of 1962-63 varied from none in Saguache Park, moderate at Bar D Mesa, heavy at Irish Canyon, to excessively heavy at Calloway and Dry Basin.- Open range stocking by cattle was very light at Bar D and Saguache Park (drop-fence) exclosures. Sheep were found to have been detrimental in occupation of open range at Dry Basin. Elk stock plots lightly at the total exclosure and moderately at the drop-fence in Saguache Park the winter of 1962-63. Tables that summarize five years of studies are presented and discussed for the Bar D, Calloway and Irish Canyon Exclosures. Recommendations: After five years of stocking rate studies at the Bar D Exclosure and in conformance with general objectives, I recommend that scheduled observations be ended at that exclosure. Cattle stocking has been reduced to what appears to be a desirable level. Despite probable future fluctuations of deer herd numbers, sufficient competent local personnel are in contact to help prevent overpopulations from occurring. Five years of pellet counts for stocking rates were also completed in 1963 at the Irish Canyon and Calloway Exclosures in Browns Park. Annual report recommendations for corresponding game unit #2 there have been for maximum liberality in deer seasons because studies showed consistently excessive winter stocking rates at both locations. I will also repeat previously made pleas to have local livestock operators reach their senses in use of these ranges, on both private lands and Public Domain. �- 130 - Rates of stocking by deer over the winter season of 1962-63 at the Dry Basin Deer-Livestock Exclosure continued to be very high. Puddling of soil as snow melted was conspicuous and was done mostly by sheep with ,considerable help from deer. This type of use is no doubt highly detrimental to the soil and vegetation and leaves considerable room for improvement in the management of the Basin. Recommendations are hereby repeated for reduction of both deer numbers and wintering sheep in this locality. As has been reported in the past, no recommendations are feasible for Saguache Park. Stocking rate investigations should be continued, however, until Forest Service allotment management plans are stabilized. Also, no apparent urgency is needed since stocking by elk has,been erratic and averaging very light, and cattle stocking has not been more than moderate on the average. �- 131 A DETAILED STUDY OF RANGE FORAGE BY USE OF FENCED EXCLOSURES Bertram D. Baker INTRODUCTION All stocking rate studies were accomplished that were planned for at exc10sures in 1963-64. Results will be reported on by exc10sure and will include five-year progress summaries and analyses of investigations at the Bar D, Calloway, and Irish Canyon Exc10sures. Expected vegetation inventory work at new exclosures in South Park did not materialize because they were not built (a joint Department Southeast Region - Forest Service project). BAR D DEER-CATTLE EXCLOSURE Pellet Group Counts - Current and Five-Year For Indicated Rates of Stocking Objectives: (1) (2) (3) Summary To determine the indicated rates of stocking by deer on treatments accessible to them in the fall-winter-spring season of 1962-63. To determine the indicated rates of stocking by cattle for the fall season of 1962 and spring season of 1963 on the one-acre open range treatment. To summarize and analyze the results of five years of pellet group counting for stocking rates of game and livestock. Procedures: On April 24, 1963, the two accessible one-acre study treatments were examined in their entireties for deer pellet groups deposited the previous winter. As pellet groups were counted on the open range plot, a tally of unmarked cattle droppings was also kept. Paint was applied to the latter to cancel them from following counts, the next of which was made September 17, 1963, for cattle stocking only. Because the 1963 studies are the last in as-year series, techniques of pellet group counting will be reviewed briefly. First, a chalkline string was laid out between I-acre plot corner stakes on the 21B-foot side of the plot. A second string was then laid out parallel to the first about 25 feet toward the inside of the plot. Ordinarily, two observers, walking slowly on parallel courses between strings from one plot boundary line to the opposite, tallied deer and/or cattle pellet groups on Veeder counters. After the first section was counted, the outside string was lifted over the inside string and so placed to delineate another 25-foot sector for counting. This procedure was repeated until the whole I-acre area was examined. Paint sprayed from commercial pressure cans was employed to mark cattle fecal droppings. There was no need to mark deer pellet groups since the animals were absent every year from about May 15 to November 10. Summer rains rapidly weathered and scattered winter depositions causing littl~ confusion as to age of pellets during spring observations. �- 132 - Findings: The count on the treatments in April yielded indicated rates of stocking by deer of 8.3 and 1.9 acres per deer-month respectively on I-acre plots inside of the livestock part and on open range. Cattle occupied the open range treatment at an indicated rate of 72 acres per animal month in the fall of 1962. The September 1963 count showed that cattle had not been present in the spring of 1963. The summary of five years of stocking rate findings is presented in Table 1. It is given to serve as reference with the discussion to follow. Table l.--Summary of five years of animal stocking rate determinations on treatments at the Bar D Deer-Cattle Exclosure, 1958-1963. Area Class of Applicable Period Indicated Rate Sampled Animal of Use of Stocking Livestock Part Deer F-W-Sp, 1958-59 2.3 acres/deer-month Open Range Deer F-W-Sp, 1958-59 1.2 acres/deer-month Open Range Cattle F, 1958 + SP, 1959 16.6 acres/animal month Livestock Part Deer F-W-Sp, 1959-60 3.0 acres/deer-month Open Range Deer F-W-Sp, 1959-60 1.0 acres/deer-month Open Range Cattle Fall, 1959 125.0 acres/animal month Open Range Cattle Spring, 1960 15.1 acres/animal month Livestock Part Deer F-W-Sp, 1950-61 3.5 acres/deer-month Open Range Deer F-W-Sp, 1960-61 1.7 acres/deer-month Open Range Cattle Fall, 1960 91.0 acres/animal month Open Range Cattle Spring, 1961 40.0 acres/animal month Livestock Part Deer F-W-Sp, 1961-62 8.3 acres/deer-month Open Range Deer F-W-Sp, 1961-62 3.6 acres/deer-month Open Range Cattle Fall, 1961 100.0 acres/animal month Open Range Cattle Spring, 1962 333.0 acres/animal month Livestock Part Deer F-W-Sp, 1962-63 8.3 acres/deer-month Open Range Deer F-W-Sp, 1962-63 1.9 acres/deer-month Open Range Cattle Fall, 1962 72.0 acres/animal month Open Range Cattle Spring, 1963 No stocking indicated Discussion: An examination of Table 1 would show that deer stocking in the beginning of the period was quite high, decreasing to medium or moderate in recent years. Recommendations for reduction of the deer herd were made soon after the exclosure was built. It is hoped that they were responsible, at least in a small way, for the improvement in the herd-range balance now in effect. Highly differential use of accessible treatments has been made by deer. Vegetative composition, densities, and condition of the treatments were very nearly similar (Baker 1960), so forage should not be an important factor influencing deer here. There just does not seem to be a plausible reason why the deer have been reluctant to cross the livestock fence. This situation, though, is not new, having been experienced on studies at many exclosures that have been or are being checked in a .like manner. Unrestrained deer or elk use of fenced and adjacent open ranges rarely has approached being equal. �- 133 Cattle stocking near the start of the period was greater than the 20 acres per animal month preference that had been established by the B.L.M. Furthermore, it was felt then that a 20-acre rate was too high for good of the range. The lease on the property changed hands in 1962, and with it has come further reduction in stocking. Continued light use of the Square S ranges by cattle and moderate stocking by deer are imperative in order that this land not deteriorate any more rapidly. CALLOWAY DEER-LIVESTOCK EXCLOSURE Pellet Group Counts - Current and Five-Year Indicated Rates of Stocking Objectives: (1) (2) (3) Summary for To determine the indicated rate of stocking by deer and sheep in occupancy of the one-acre study treatment outside of the exclosure south of the drift fence for the fallwinter-spring season of 1962-63. To determine the indicated rate of stocking by deer and horses on the one-acre study treatment outside of the exclosure north of the drift fence for the same 1962-63 winter season. To summarize and analyze the results of five years of pellet group counting for stocking rates of game and livestock. Procedures: Pellet group counts were made in total on the one-acre study treatments north and south of the drift fence on April 25, 1963. The technique employed was the same as that explained in detail previously herein for the Bar D Deer-Cattle Exclosure. Also, as had been done on all counts before at this exclosure, no attempt was made to distinguish between deer and sheep pellet groups on the plot south of the drift fence. Findings: The open range one-acre study treatment north of the drift fence received an indicated rate of stocking of 0.77 acre per deer-month for the fall-winter-spring season of 1962-63. Use by horses of the same treatment over the same season amounted to 45.0 acres per animal month. Utilization of spiny hopsage (Grayia spinosa) and big sagebrush (Artemisia tridentata) was judged as severe. South of the drift fence, deer and sheep combined to produce an indicated rate of stocking of 0.83 acre per deer-sheep-month. All signs pointed to sheep being responsible for the major part of the use. Utilization of spiny hopsage and big sagebrush was estimated to be in the moderate to heavy range. The five-year summary of stocking rate studies is presented cludes current results for comparative purposes. in Table 2 and in- �- 134 - Table 2.--Summary of five years of animal stocking rate determinations on treatments at the Calloway Deer-Livestock Exclosure, 1958-1963. Area Class of Applicable Period Indicated Rate Sampled Animal of Use of Stocking N. of Drift F. Deer F-W-Sp, 1958-59 0.8 acres/deer-month S. of Drift F. Deer-Sheep* F-W-Sp, 1958-59 2.8 acres/deer- sheep-mo •. N. of Drift F. Deer F-W-Sp, 1959-60 0.8 acres/deer-month S. of Drift F. Deer-Sheep F-W-Sp, 1959-60 3.0 acres/deer-sheep-mo. N. of Drift F. Deer F-W-Sp, 1960-61 0.7 acres/deer-month S. of Drift F. Deer~"-Sheep F-W-Sp, 1960-61 2.2 acres/deer-sheep-mo. N. of Drift F. Deer F-W-Sp, 1961-62 0.8 acres/deer-month N. of Drift F. Horse F-W-Sp, 1961-62 50.0 acres/horse-month S. of Drift F. Deer*-Sheep F-W-Sp, 1961-62 2.1 acres/deer-sheep-mo. N. of Drift F. Deer F-W-Sp, 1962-63 0.8 acres per deer-month N. of Drift F. Horse F-W-Sp, 1962-63 45.0 acres/horse-month S. of Drift F. Deer -Sheepw F-W-Sp, 1962-63 0.8 acres/deer-sheep-mo. ~" Animal estimated to be responsible for bulk of stocking. Discussion: A remarkable consistency in the stocking of treatments has been experienced at the Calloway Exclosure. The consistency has been in both the pattern and degree of stocking which, though not particularly desirable in view of the detrimental high rates of use, is desirable from the standpoint,of factor constancy. First, the pattern of the first four years, as is shown in Table 2, was that stocking of the open range plot south of the drift fence has approximated about 1/3 of that on the plot north of the drift fence. (Figures have been rounded off in the Table.) It has been concluded and stated in previous reports that the cause of the differential use was that deer have an aversion for coinhabiting ranges with sheep. This factor has important future management implications in that ordinary stock fencing can be done to divide wintering areas of sheep and deer. A big advantage would go to the deer, of course, since their movements over the whole area would not be impaired materially even by sheep-tight barriers. The high rate of stocking of the open range by deer north of the drift fence has been cause for comment each year. Also, for five years the rate has been about 0.8 acre per deer-month consistently. Despite probable changes in deer populations over the period, the stocking rate has held unexplainably high. Horse use has also been recorded on this plot, and although it has' been light, it has contributed to the continued poor condition of the vegetation. Sheep as well as deer have occupied the area south of the drift fence. However, because of difficulty in distinguishing their pellets when the two classes of animals are together, the stocking rates have been credited jointly to both with an arbitrary annual assignment as to which animal probabLy used the plot in the greater amount. It is interesting to note from Table 2 that proportionate use by animals has varied from year to year but probably balances out for the period as a whole. �- 135 - DRY BASIN DEER-LIVESTOCK EXCLOSURE Pellet Group Counts for Indicated Objectives: (1) (2) Rates of Stocking To determine the indicated rate of stocking by deer for the fa11-winter-spring season of 1962-63 on the one-acre study plot inside of the livestock part of the exc1osure. To determine the indicated rate of stocking by deer and sheep combined for the same season on the open range treatment. Procedures: Total count techniques were used on the one-acre treatments to obtain stocking rates with field work being accOmplished on May 3, 1963. Please refer to the section of this report on the Bar D Exc10sure if more detail on methodology is desired. Findings: Deer occupied the livestock exc10sure part treatment in the winter of 1962-63 at an indicated rate of stocking of 0.70 acre per deer-month. Deer and sheep combined on the open range treatment to stock it at an indicated rate of 0.70 acre per deer-sheep-month applicable to the same season as above. Also, no horse pellet groups were noted on the outside open range plot. Utilization of big sagebrush on the partially continued to rate from severe to destructive. protected and open treatments There was considerable evidence of sheep having trailed around fences earlier in the spring when the ground was wet. Because of this, and trampling by deer, it was difficult to age and differentiate pellet groups, and thus obtain an estimate of what proportion of groups were deer and what were sheep. It was thought, however, that there were comparatively few typical sheep droppings on the open range plot, and sheep activity might have been confined mostly to trailing. The latter, of course, must be considered as much or more a detrimental factor on spring ranges as would be conservative herd grazing coverage at a time other than during snow-melt and run-off. IRISH CANYON DEER-LIVESTOCK EXCLOSURE Pellet Group Counts - Current and Five-Year For Indicated Rates of Stocking Objectives: (1) (2) (3) Summary To determine the indicated rate of stocking by deer on the one-acre study treatments inside of the livestock part of the exclosure and open range for the fa11-winter-spring season of 1962-63. To determine the indicated rate of stocking by cattle and horses on the one-acre open range treatment for the period of April 1962 to April 1963. To summarize and analyze the results of five years of pellet group counting for stocking rates of deer and livestock. �- 136 - Procedures: The total-plot coverage count technique as has been described for Bar P Exclosure was used to obtain stocking rate indices here at Irish Canyon, also. Counts were made of the one-acre treatments on April 25, 1963. All cattle and horse fecal groups were cancelled out with red paint applied from commercial spray-type cans as the count was made. Findings: Indicated rates of stocking by deer for the fall-winter-spring season of 1962-63 were 1.23 and 1.56 respectively on the inside and outside treatments. Cattle and horses (four horse pellet groups in a total of 44) combined to stock the outside open range treatment for the l2-month period at the rate of 8.3 acres per animal month. There was some very light evidence of sheep being present on the outside range, although most pellet groups were probably from deer, and all were credited to deer. Observations of current utilization yielded severe use in the two treatments (livestock part and open range) on big sagebrush, spiny hopsage, and fourwing saltbush (Atriplex canescens). Table 3 presents the summary of 5 years stocking rate determinations at the exclosure. Table 3.--Summary of five years of animal stocking rate determinations on treatments at the Irish Canyon Deer-Livestock Exclosure, 1958-63. Area Class of Applicable Period Indicated Rate Sampled Animal of Use of Stocking Livestock Part Deer F-W-Sp, 1958-59 3.1 acres/deer-month Open Range Deer F-W-Sp, 1958-59 2.9 acres/deer-month Open Range Cattle June 1958 to May 1959 40.0 acres/animal month Livestock Part Deer F-W-Sp, 1959-60 0.7 acre/deer-month Open Range Deer F-W-Sp, 1959-60 1.0 acre/deer-month Cattle.!.! Open Range May 1959 to May 1960 9.1 acres/animal month Livestock Part Deer F-W-Sp, 1960-61 1.5 acres/deer-month Open Range Deer F-W-Sp, 1960-61 1.2 acres/deer-month C and H'!:..I Open Range May 1960 to April 1961 12.5 acres/animal month Livestock Part Deer F-W-Sp, 1961-62 0.7 acres/deer-month Open Range Deer F-W-Sp, 1961-62 1.3 acres/deer-month Open Range C and H~/ April 1961 to April 1962 7.7 acres/animal month Livestock Part Deer F-W-Sp, 1962-63 1.2 acres/deer-month Open Range Deer F-W-Sp, 1962-63 1.6 acres/deer-month C and H!!.I Open Range April 1962 to April 1963 8.3 acres/animal month II Horse droppings common but not counted nor included in rate. 2/ "Few" horse droppings included with cow fecal groups. 3/ Includes 2 horse pellet groups. 4/ Includes 4 horse pellet groups. �- 137 Discussion: Deer have been consistently heavy users of the ranges in the vicinity of the Irish Canyon plot. This occurrence is not too difficult to understand, since like for livestock, there is not much other space thereabouts for the animals to occupy. Average winters yield snows too deep for deer to remain at higher elevations on Cold Springs Mountain, and intermediate pinon-juniper slopes are lacking for high quantity and quality browse. Thus, concentrated use areas seem to be inevitable on the desert shrub and sagebrush in Browns Park. Reports from the exc10sure stocking rate investigations annually have requested reductions in deer herds by more liberal hunting. Also, pleas have been made for more prudent stocking by livestock permittees. Some slight progress has been made on deer herd control by our Department, although the B.L.M. and stockmen continue to keep their heads in the sand for their part. There has been one exception to the pattern of excessive use by livestock and that is on the outside open range study area. Despite lack of proof, evidence through the years indicates that herders have made a conscious effort to keep sheep away from the exc1osure, probably to avoid self indictment. If sheep stocking had been as comparably sparse elsewhere nearby, there would have been much less need to even establish.a study here in the first place. Year-around use by cattle and horses has also been a detrimental factor considering the less than 1% total herbaceous cover (Baker.1959). SAGUACHE PARK EXCLOSURE Pellet Group Counts for Indicated Rates of Stocking Objectives: (1) To determine the indicated rate of stocking by elk and deer on the outside ~-acre study area for the fall-winterspring season of 1962-63. (2) To determine the indicated rate of stocking by cattle on the outside treatment for the summer grazing season of 1963. Procedures: The outside ~-acre study treatment was checked for game pellet groups on April 29, 1963. A repeat visit was paid the area on October 14, 1963, when all cattle fecal groups were counted and cancelled by paint applications. Findings: Elk were found to have stocked the outside ~-acre study treatment at a light indicated rate of 38 acres per elk-month for the 1962-63 winter season. Cattle stocking in the summer of 1963 was determined to be at the indicated rate of 7.7 acres per animal month. A 7.7 acres rate here is heavier than that which the Forest Service had been aiming towards. It is my opinion that somewhere between 15 and 20 acres would be more realistic. �- 138 - SAGUACHE PARK CATTLE EXCLOSURE Pellet Group Counts for Indicated Rates of Stocking Objectives: (1) (2) To determine the indicated rates of stocking by deer and elk on the two one-acre treatments for the fall-winterspring season of 1962-63. To determine the indicated rate of stocking by cattle on the outside one-acre study area for the summer season of 1963. Procedures: Counts of elk and deer pellet groups were made on the two oneacre study treatments on April 29, 1963. Cattle droppings were counted on October 14, 1964, on the outside treatment. On the latter date, the fourstrand barbed wire fence was laid on the ground and secured to prevent animals entangling in it. This has been the procedure since construction, and dropping the fence in fall allows elk free access to vegetation protected from cattle in summer. Findings: No deer pellet groups were found that could be credited to deposition in the fa1l-winter-spring season of 1962-63. The April count did yield a total of 19 and 61 elk pellet groups, or stocking rates,· respectively of 20 and 6.2 acres per elk-month on the outside and inside plots. An indicated rate of stocking of 100 acres per animal-month was found for cattle for the summer season of 1963 on the outside ·study treatment. REFERENCES CITED Baker, B. D. 1959. Federal Aid Quarterly Report. April, Part II, p. 218. Colo. Game and Fish Dept., 1960. Federal Aid Quarterly Report, Colorado Game and Fish Dept., April, pp. 4-10. Prepared by: Date: B. D. Baker Principal Game Biologist July, 1965 Approved by: Richard N. Denney Project Leader Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief �July, 1965 - 139 - State of JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH SEGMENT PROJECT OOLORADO ---------------------------- Project No. Game Range Investigations W-10l-R-6 1 Work Plan No. Job No. 3 Title of Job: Forage Plant Utilization by Elk on Controversial Period Covered: April 31, 1964. Personnel: 1, 1963 to March Ranges Rio Grande National Forest Staff Assistant Bob Pizel and District Ranger Bob Tice. Bertram D. Baker, biologist. ABSTRACT The final phase of the two-year Cat Creek Park forage utilization study was completed in 1963 with the clipping (in May) and weighing of forage production (in October) from previously selected cage protected and unprotected paired plots. Stocking rate indices of fall-winter-spring use in 1962-63 by deer and elk were obtained by pellet group counts on circular plot transects. Utilization of total plants by elk was found to average 22.5 percent park-wide, a slight increase over the 1962 figure of 19.3 percent. The stocking rate index for elk also was higher the past season of 1962-63 with 9.8 elk-days use per acre compared to 5.4 elk-days use per acre in 1961-62. Despite the comparatively light forage utilization which has been indicated for elk both winters of the study, arguments are presented why an increased harvest of elk should be effected. Recommendations: 1. Previously reported results of work on summer cattle stocking and forage utilization in Cat Creek Park have not been repeated in this report. However, for sake of record, a recommendation has been made that cattle numbers permitted in this Forest Service allotment be reduced by 50 percent. 2. Because of the apparent detrimental spring use of desirable native bunchgrasses and substantial build-up in populations, it is recommended that the harvest of local elk be increased. Particularly, more cows should be removed from 'the herd. �- 3. llfiJ - Due to inherent weaknesses in methodology of clipping paired plots to determine forage utilization, it is recommended that employment of the technique on similar future studies be given judiciOUS consideration. In the main, objectives of this Cat Creek P~rk study as well as studies elsewhere on Cold Springs Mountain and Blue Ridge have been met satisfactorily. Neverless, where predetermined acceptable precision in results along basic research lines is desired, other techniques for studying utilization might be better. �- ll,l - FORAGE PLANT UTILIZATION BY ELK ON CONTROVERSIAL RANGES Bertram D. Baker INTRODUCTION The Cat Creek Park study was initiated in May 1961 when ten double-paired plot locations were selected and cages were set. Forage was clipped from one pair of each set in October 1961 to obtain forage utilization by cattle for the summer season of 1961. Results of that work have been reported (Baker 1962). Forage was then clipped in May 1962 from the second pair of the original ten sets of plots to obtain the utilization by elk over the winter of 1961-62. Results of the latter work and the reselection of plot locations for another ten double pairs of plots, resetting of cages, and clipping of forage in October 1962 to find out the amount of utilization by cattle in the summer of 1962 have been submitted for reproduction in the Game Research Report. The present report concerns the results of clipping forage from the second paired plots of the second and current series to determine the utilization of forage by elk in the winter of 1962-63. An attempt will also be made to tie the results of both series together, analyze them as far as is possible and make recommendations on management of both elk and cattle in occupancy of the range. Objectives: (1) (2) To obtain an indication of utilization by elk of browse and forbs combined and grasses on pounds per acre and percentage bases for the.winter season of 1962-63. To determine indices of the rate of stocking by deer and elk for the same season of use. Procedures: The study area is located between approximately the 9,300 and 10,000 foot elevation levels on Rio Grande National Fores6 lands in all or portions of Section 21 through Section 28, Township 37 North, Range 6 East, New Mexico Principal Meridan. The Park is on the southern edge of Rio Grande County in Deer Creek drainage, an upper main tributary of Cat Creek. Forage Production-Utilization The clipping of plant production was accomplished on May 22 and 23, 1963, by Alamosa District Ranger Bob Tice, Wildlife Staff Assistant Bob Pizel, and myself. A total of eight pairs of plots were clipped which is two pairs less than were established. Cages were disturbed in the summer of 1962, presumably by cattle, thus reducing the number of usable plots. Site locations of the plots have been described elsewhere (Baker 1964). Removed from the plots and placed in paper sacks were total above-ground parts of grasses and forbs as well as total current annual browse production which was comb Lne d with the forbs. A 9.6 square foot circular plot of �- 142 each pair had been protected by a conical cage for the full year from May 1962. The other plot had been protected from cattle utilization by a cage through the summer of 1962 and was uncovered in October 1962 to allow for use by deer and elk until May 1963. Clippings were stored and dried in open sacks until October 1, 1963 when they were weighed in grams on an Ohaus triple beam balance. Vegetative production of a plot in grams times ten equals the yield on a pounds per acre basis, although this has not been used in reporting the results. Winter utilization of forage by elk in percent was computed by subtracting the production of the plot caged in the summer of 1962 and left open in the winter of 1962-63 from the production of the plot cage-protected all year, then dividing the difference by the latter. As is indicated from pellet group counts, some small part of the utilization could be attributed to deer on the area. Forage consumption by deer, however, was assumed to be negligible because of the very small amounts of browse on the plots. Animal Stocking Rates A pellet group transect that consisted of ten 0.01 acre circular plots was read at each of the eight sites. Groups of recently deposited winter droppings were tallied, totals were computed, and results were converted to days use figures rounded to the nearest whole number. Findings: Results of the study of utilization in 1962-63 in Cat Creek Park are summarized in Table 1. This is the final phase of a two-year study of elk and cattle forage consumption. Over-all utilization was up slightly last winter compared with the first (22.5 percent - 1963 to 19.3 percent - 1962). This could have been expected considering that the milder winter allowed the elk longer access to the range. Pellet group count indices of occupancy showed almost a doubling in the elk stocking rate (9.8 elk-days use/A - 1963 to 5.4 elk-days use/A - 1962). There is one noticeable reversal in the results between years. From Table 1 it is evident that average utilization from the lower Park plots is greater than perimeter plots, 32.9 percent versus 22.5 percent. Pellet group stocking indices, however, show slightly heavier average stocking on perimet;er sites. It has been suggested in previous progress reports that errors are highly possible on bunchgrass vegetation due to difficulties of choosing plots of equal value. Because of that factor, plus inherent weaknesses in pellet group counts, all findings must be carefully weighed. One thing was apparent with this second year of study that had not been as obvious in 1962. Utilized plants of rabbitbrushes (Chrysothamnus spp.) and bunchgrasses were quite common in the spring of 1963, especially on perimeter slope areas. Many instances of utilization were observed on the. clip plots. A primary reason for doing a study in Cat Creek Park was that spring utilization by elk had been noticed on bunchgrasses, mainly Parry oatgrass (Danthonia parryi) and Arizona fescue (Festuca arizonica). There has been strong evidence accumulated from range research that cropping of plants as they start �- 143 - Table 2.--Checklist of plants present on elk forage utilization plots, Cat Creek Park, Rio Grande County, 1963 (U = Ungrazed Plot; G = Grazed Plot; X = Plant is present). Set Number - Paired Plots 41=18 11=19 #20 1f16 1f17 41=13 4F15 #14 Plant U G U G U G U G U G U G U G U G Symbol* ConnnonName Big Rabbitbrush Little Rabbitbrush Squirreltail Needlegrass Needle and Thread Parry Oatgrass Western Wheat grass Arizona Fescue Sedges Mountain Muhly Mat Muhly Bluegrass Blue Grama Rush Junegrass Pine Dropseed Cinquefoil Knotweed Lambsquarter Herbaceous Sage Lupine Fringed Sage Aster Beardtongue Buckwheat Mountain Dandelion Chna Chvd Sihy STI Stco Dapa Agsm Fear CAR Mumo Muri POA Bogr JUN Kocr Bltr POT POG CRE ART LUP Arfr ASR PEN ERO AGO X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X *Forest Service designations for species or genera. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X �Table 1.--Sumrnary of results of clipping paired plots for production and utilization and pellet group counts for animal stocking rate indices, Cat Creek Park, Rio Grande County - May 1963 - Utilization plot size of 9.6 s9. ft'l circu1arj Ten 0.01 acre E10t transects for Ee11et grouEs. ~Wts. net air-dr~ in grams2. Production - UnErotected Plot Production Total Numbe-r Days Use Browse & Forbs Grasses Protected Plot Plot Wt. % Wt. % % Wt. Per Acre 2L Browse & Set Elk Deer Ut. Wt. Ut. Ut. Wt. Ut. Ut. Wt. Ut. Forbs Grasses Total 1L 1F13 ifF14 ifF15 ifF16 1F17 1F18 {f19 iffr20 Average All Plots Average Nos. 13 - 15 Average Nos. 16 - 20 1./ 1.1 6.0 0.0 0.0 5.3 14.0 0.4 5.4 9.0 54.5 79.6 80.0 70.6 53.6 103.2 105.8 120.9 60.5 79.6 80.0 75.9 67.6 103.6 111.2 129.9 0.0 1.0 0.4 21.5 0.9 0.0 0.0 14.3 6.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 13.1 0.0 0.0 0.0 100.0 34.2 0.0 56.0 0.0 58.2 0.0 54.4 93.5 69.9 0.0 60.9 0.0 104.6 0.0 71.1 20.3 23.6 21.8 16.2 0.0 42.3 1.2 49.8 37.2 34.2 29.7 57.0 27.3 58.6 23.1 75.9 0.0 70.8 41.0 60.9 1.1 104.6 41.1 85.4 15 7 6 3 13 8 18 9 a a 5.0 83.5 88.5 4.8 1.6 24.2 63.7 21. 9 25.1 68.4 -20.5 22.5 9.8 1.5 2.0 71.4 73.4 0.5 2.0 33.3 49.5 21. 9 31.4 49.9 23.4 32.9 9.3 2.0 6.8 90.8 97.6 7.3 2.6 18.7 72.2 21. 9 21.3 79.5 18.8 16.3 10.2 1.2 26.3 22.6 21.4 0.0 0.0 42.7 6.6 44.5 43.5 28.4 26.8 0.0 0.0 41.2 5.9 34.3 1 2 3 5 1 0 Set Nos. 13 - 15, level portions used more heavily by cattle. Nos. 16 - 20, Park perimeter slopes used predominantly by game animals. Sets 1F1l and 1F12 were not usable because cages were disturbed in 1962, probably by cattle. For winter-spring season of 1962-63. Current recent winter season pellet groups in best judgement of observers. I-' +"" +"" �- 145 - the surge of new growth is detrimental to them. Therefore, despite low numerical findings of grass utilization for the two winters of study (in which 31.4 percent was the highest average for any group of plots), considerable importance is attached to its occurrence in spring. Available information on numbers and trends of the local elk population is poor. Cat Creek Park is part of the Alamosa River portion of the Department's Conejos aerial trend area. Aerial counts there have not been recorded separately by drainage through the years. To further compound the confusion, Cat Creek Park is a comparatively small section on the south edge of game unit 80 which is a large unit extending to northwest of South Fork. Thus, kill trends for unit 80 probably would have questionable application in evaluations of population trends of the Cat Creek drainage. The 1963 Conejos trend count produced a total of 560 elk which was an increase of 45.8 percent over an average of 384 for the previous five years. So if the assumption is made that the aerial trend can be at least partially relied upon to reflect population changes in Cat Creek, it must be concluded that the herd that uses Cat Creek Park is gaining substantially in size. Considering the foregoing statements on populations, and utilization and stocking rate findings, it would appear logical that an increased harvest of elk should be attempted from this herd. In particular, more cows should be removed annually until evidences point to lower herd levels than are now present. REFERENCES CITED Baker, B. D. 1962. Federal Aid Quarterly April, pp. 25-35. 1964. p. 20. Prepared Date: by: Game Research Report. Colo. Game and Fish Dept., Colo. Game, Fish and Parks Dept., Jan., Bertram D. Baker Principal Game Biologist July, 19G5 Report. _ Approved by: Richard N. Denney Project Leader Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief ��July, 1965 - 147 - State of JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH SEGMENT PROJECT COLORADO ---------------------------- Project No. Period Covered: Job No. 1 Work Plan No. Title of Job: Game Range Investigations W-lOl-R-6 Paddock Studies on Effects of Varying 4 Intensities of Deer Use April 1, 1963 to March 31, 1964. ABSTRACT Based upon line transect data, there were no significant differences between paddocks in the following respects: total browse combined, key browse species combined, bareground and erosion pavement combined, and litter. There were differences in grass and weed populations. Concerning age and condition class of browse, there were nine different items in which significant differences between paddocks appeared. These involved snowberry, serviceberry and mahogany. When key species were combined there were no significant differences. An analysis of variance test of browse production for the 1962 growing showed no significant differences between or within the paddocks. season The stem length method of utilization measurement showed a gradual decrease in use of key species from 59 percent in Paddock One to 39 percent in Paddock Six. Mahogany was taken almost as heavily in lightly stocked as in heavily stocked ones. It might be considered as nearly twice as palatable as serviceberry or bitterbrush. Preliminary correlation tests were made to determine the relationship between utilization as shown by a few tagged branches as opposed to a total bush. For the most part the use of four branches, regardless of species, accounted for about one third or less of the variation of the total bush. Ocular estimates of use of key species by the paddock deer agreed with stem length measurement results quite closely. Estimates made of use on other species were quite variable. Pinon pine was browsed in all paddocks. �A "Use Index" was developed by multiplying annual growth by utilization cent. The figure seemed to parallel the utilization quite closely. Paddock stocking was complicated quate for the most part. per- by injuries and death of deer, but was ade- All deer lost weight but not in relation to the stocking rates. peratures averaged 106 degrees. No Brucellosis or Leptospirosis in sixteen samples taken in 1964. Rectal temwere found For 1963, a total count was made of pellet groups deposited in each paddock. Groups per deer per day ranged from 13.3 to 16.5, and averaged 14.9. Stomach samples taken from twenty paddock deer indicated of Pinon pine and Utah juniper in all paddocks. Forage production acre (dry weight) No condition Rodent extremely heavy use estimates by paddock ranged from an average 231 pounds per downward to 65, with an average of l50~ and trend survey was attempted control removed six cottontail in 1963. rabbits. Paddock Line Transect Study Base data concerning density and composition were included in the report for the last segment. These data were presented to the C.S.U. Statistical Laboratory during the year. The calculations and tabulations are on file but are too numerous to justify reporting here. The following discussion, in outline form, constitutes the basic findings thus far. Initial Density 1. There were no significant respects: a. b. c. d. and Composition differences Measurements between paddocks in the following Total browse (individual species not analysed). Key browse species (serviceberry, mountain mahogany, brush combined). Bareground and erosion pavement combined. Litter 2. Total grass was highly significantly other paddocks except Paddock Four. 3. Total weeds were significantly greater (F value 2.22 at 95 percent level). and bitter- greater in Paddock Seven than in all (F value 6.07 at 99 percent level). in P~ddockFour than in Paddock Separate analysis of individual species differences were not made. can be done if, in time, it appears to be worth while. Two This �- 149 - Age and Condition Class Measurements 1. In regard to total browse, Paddock Four contained significantly more mature browse plants than Paddock One. (F value 2.42 at 95 percent level). This included the very abundant snowberry. 2. Concerning serviceberry alone, Paddock Six contained a significantly greater number of mature plants than Paddock One. (F value 2.49 at 95 percent). 3. Paddock Six contains significantly greater amounts of dead serviceberry than Paddock One. (F value 2.34 at 95 percent). 4. Paddock Six had a significantly greater quantity of total serviceberry plants, of all age and condition classes, than Paddock One. (F value 2.34 at 95 percent level). 5. Concerning mahogany, Paddock Two contained highly significantly more mature plants than Paddocks Four and Five. (F value 3.19 at 99 percent level). 6. Paddock Two contained highly significantly more decadent serviceberry plants than Paddocks One, Three, Four, Five, or Six. (F value 3.70 at 99 percent). 7. Paddock Two contained significantly more dead mahogany plants than Paddocks One, Three, Four, Five, and Six. (F value 2.59 at 95 percent level). 8. Paddock Two contained highly significantly more total mahogany, of all age and condition classes, than Paddocks Three, Four, and Five. (F value 3.51 at 99 percent level). 9. No separate analysis of bitterbrush was made since the numbers of observations were too low for a meaningful analysis. 10. In regard to key browse species combined, there were no significant differences in any of the age or condition categories: seedlings, young, mature, decadent, dead, reproduction~ or total key species. Small Scale Aerial Photography After consultation with specialists on aerial photography and helicopter pilots it was decided not to attempt this job. The over-story density was judged to be too great to permit the browse plants, in which we are primarily interested, to be visible. Stem Length Measurement Data (Fall Production--1962) An analysis of variance of the base data concerning stem lengths of key browse plants indicates that there were no significant differences between or within the paddocks. �- 150 - Table 1.--0ne way analysis of variance of stem lengths of key browse species between and wi thin paddocks, 1962. Species Source SS DF MS F Bitterbrush Source Total Between Within SS 17799.4700 2959.3600 14840.1100 Paddock Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Paddock Mean 67.960 65.102 59.553 67.129 47.490 64.757 62.632 Total Between Within 18095.6600' 2135.7900 15959.8700 Paddock Number 1 2 3. 4 5 6 7 Paddock Mean 82.328 72.487 64.409 71.246 69.418 70.023 64.939 Total Between Within 3847.1420 405.1000 3442.0420 Paddock Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Paddock Mean 20.661 19.111 21.838 25.524 22.870 25.567 25.364 DF 69 6 63 MS F 2.0938 493.2266 235.5573 Number Bushes (N) 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 Mountain Mahogany 69 6 63 355.9650 253.3312 1.4051 67.5166 54.6355 1.2357 Number Bushes (N) 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 Serviceberry 69 6 63 Number Bushes (N) 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 �- 151 - Utilization--Stem Length Measurement Stem length measurements were made of total annual growth of ten plants of each key species (!MountainMahogany, Serviceberry, and Bitterbrush) in each paddock following the winter grazing period. These measurements were subtracted from pre-stocking measurements made in the fall of 1962 to determine total utilization of each specLes • Data are shown in Table 2., No great differences appeared between paddocks in the utilization of the three key species. But the'gradual decrease in use with decreasing stocking is evident. Differences between species are quite evident, with mahogany being much more heavily used than either of the other species. Serviceberry was less heavily taken than bitterbrush in Paddocks One and Two but more used in Paddocks Three, Five, and Six. This situation may be due to differences in serviceberry abundance--not yet clearly understood or to availability due to snow. Table 2.--Average percent utilization per paddock on key species during January 1963 as determined ,by the stem length method. Average 6 7 3 5 2 1 Paddock No.ll Mountain Mahogany Bitterbrush Serviceberry Average 74.4 58.1 45.3 59.3 67.5 49.0 33.1 49.9 73.6 37.3 43.4 51.4 63.1 17 .2 42.4 40.9 61.1 25.6 29..7 38.8 70.3 55.3 35.0 53.5 68.3 40.4 38.2 49.0 1/ Deer days per acre by paddock are: 1-60; 2-40; 3-30; 5-20; 6-10; Paddock Four is a fenced control and Seven an unfenced control. Utilization--Tagged Stems vs Total Bush Interagency big game range analysis procedures in Colorado provide for the selection of one branch from each key species bush in a series of bushes along a transect. Annual growth measurements are made on this one tagged branch before and after browsing. There is a question on the relationship. between measurements of such a single branch and the total bush. An opportunity to check this question is afforded, in part at least, by the stem length utilization studies in the paddocks. Separate measurements of annual growth were kept for each of four tagged branches on a bush (Figure 1). Then the remaining annual growth was measured to give a total. This was done on each of ten bushes in each paddock for each of three key browse species. Table 3 shows the simple correlation coefficients of the tagged stems on four sides of a bush versus the total bush for the three key browse species. The values are all quite low, the highest being .2655 for east branch on serviceberry. In other words by knowing the amount of bush included by east branch, the variance of the total bush is reduced by only 26.5 percent. An attempted multiple correlation of all four tagged stems with the total bush is shown in Table 4. Also given are the coefficients by age and, condition �Fig. 1 Identical mountain mahogany bush after two browsing periods at 60 days per acre. Note tags on four sides of bush for utilization measurements Q �- 153 Table 3.--Correlation Tagged Stems of total bush vs tagged stems, paddock r r2 study, 1962. ~ Z(l_rZ) Bitterbrush East West North South Variance Standard .3657 .4408 .3444 .3006 of total bush--2617.l deviation--5l.l6 Variance Standard .3717 .4863 .3403 .1359 of total bush--7013.5 deviation--83.75 2267.2 2152.0 2306.7 2118.8 Mahogany .1382 .2365 .1158 .1847 6044.2 5354.8 6201. 3 5718.1 =:;:.. 2 Mountain East West North South .1337 .1943 .1186 .0904 = Jl.2 Serviceberry East West North South Variance Standard .5153 .4725 .3127 .4292 of total bush--2444.5 deviation--49.44 .2655 .2233 .0978 .1842 = 1795.5 1898.6 1985.4 1994.2 p.. 2 classes. For instance, without knowing the age or the condition of plants, the correlation for bitterbrush of total bush versus the four tagged stems is .2262. Or by using all four tagged stems to predict total bush, only 22.62 percent of variation in total bush is accounted for. For the most part, using all four branches most only about one-third of the variation combined, regardless of species, at of the total bush is accounted for. Also for bitterbrush the west branch alone accounts for 19.4 percent of the variation as compared to 22.6 percent for all four. Hence, all four are little better than west alone in this case, and it alone accounts for a fifth of the variation. For this reason combination tests of two and three tagged branches against the total were not run, since their correlations could not be as good as the correlation of all four, and perhaps-not as good as a single branch alone. Utilization--Ocular Estimates Some effort was thought necessary to determine degrees of use on all browse plants in addition to the stem length measurements on the key species. Accordingly, an ocular estimate system was developed. A paced transect criss- �- 154 Table 4.--Multiple correlation of all tagged stems vs total bush by age and condition classes and combined, by species, paddocks, 1962. Number Variance of Age and Class Observations Total Bush ~ 2(1_R2) Mature-2 Mature-3 Decadent-2 Combined Mature-2 Mature-3 Decadent-2 Combined Mature-2 Mature-3 Decadent-2 Decadent-3 Combined 1/ 2/ 38 28 4 Bitterbrush .3008 .2379 2155.9 3170.4 1507.4 2416.2 2617.1 2025.1 Mountain Mahogany 1/ 5 59 .2005 / 2 6 .7120_ .2979 6917 .2 6340.4 7013.5 5530.3 1826.0 4924.2 Serviceberry .4260 .36951/ 1523.2 2508.3 874.4 1581.5 2444.5 1605.1 11 .2262 18 48 1 3 '1/ .3434 Insufficient number of observations. The small number of observations accounts for the high R2 and it is not significantly different from zero. crossing the center acre many times was chosen. A m~n~mum of 100 hits per paddock were taken, these being spaced by previously selected random numbers. Forbs and grass were not considered since they were not available during the stocking time. Rodent use was kept separate. Considering the results as they relate to key species averaged, the estimates appear to be about as might be expected in relation to treatment (Table 5). The less abundant browse species gave erratic results because of low sample numbers. As a check on accuracy of the ocular estimates as made, the usepercentages as determined by annual growth measurement is repeated below (Table 6). The very favorable comparison is evident. Pinon pine was consumed very noticeably in all paddocks and in the heavy use paddocks a distinct browse line was very evident even at the end of the first year. Use Index There is a need for a method of relating utilization figures to production figures derived during the preceding growing season. An attempt to do this has been made, using the paddock stem length data before and after browsing 1962-63. A "use index" was attempted by multiplying the average twig length �- 155 - Table 5.--Percent utilization on all species in paddocks determined by ocular estimate Spring 1963. Paddocks ·6 Species 1 2 3 5 7 91.4 81.4 Mahogany 64.6 85.0 85.0 90.0 (5.0)1/ Serviceberry 13.4 26.5 35.9 19.7 19.7 5.8 (25.0)1:./ (30.0)1/ (S.O))) (23.4)1/ 31.2 Bitterbrush 18.8 60.4 69.0 10.0 Big Sage 67.8 40.0 95.0 1.3 (33.9)1..1 2.6 7.0 (48.0)1:../(42.0).!i 0.0 2.9 (20.0)1/ 0.0 0.5 (23.4)1/ 0.0 (28.2).!i Pine 42.0 15.0 16.5 17.6 17.5 15.0 Juniper 61.6 5.0 33.0 2.5 0.0 15.0 Snowberry Oregon Grape Little Rabbitbrush 85.0 4.7 75.0 Average 46.5 64.6 18.3 12.2 26.4 35.1 Key Species Average 62.5 51.1 38.2 43.2 38.2 53.9 1/ Indicates use by rodents. Table 6.--Paddock key species percent utilization determined by annual growth measurement, Spring 1963. Paddocks 7 6 2 5 3 Species 1 Mahogany 74.4 67.5 73.6 63.1 61.1 70.3 Serviceberry 45.3 33.1 43.4 42.4 29.7 35.0 Bitterbrush 58.1 49.0 37.3 17 .2 25.6 55.3 Average 59.3 49.9 51.4 40.9 38.8 53.5 before browsing by the average utilization percentage as indicated by stem length data. Results are tabulated (Table 7) and graphed (Figure 2) by species and paddock. The known deer days use are presented. Against·this the "use index" and the straight utilization figure are compared. �- 156 Table 7.--Paddock key species production, utilization, and "use index". (AxB).Y (A) (B) Utilization Percent Paddock Mean Annual Growth 1962 "Use Index" Bitterbrush 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 67.13 60.43 59.10 65.84 45.87 61.59 60.03 58.1 49.0 37.3 39 30 22 17.2 25.6 55.3 8 16 33 74.4 67.5 73.6 60 49 46 63.1 61.1 / 70.3 44 43 45 45.3 33.1 43.1 10 6 10 42.4 29.7 35.0 10 7 9 Mahogany 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 80.65 72.50 63.23 70.26 70.45 69.87 64.08 Serviceberry 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1/ 21.08 19.34 23.29 24.76 22.85 25.04 25.03 Product rounded off to first two significant figures. Assuming that the type of graphic presentation in Figure 1 is valid, it would appear that the height of the respective bars should indicate agreement or lack of it. Bitterbrush shows the closest agreement between the stocking rates and the use index. Mahogany and serviceberry seem not to vary greatly from one treatment to another either in percent utilization or the use index. Paddock Stocking In preparation for stocking the new paddock system, d~r were placed in the holding pen adjacent to the pens until the proper number were captured. As in the previous year, supplemental feeding was required due to the small size of the holding pen. Key browse species from the surrounding area were cut and stockpiled, then fed periodically during the holding period. All paddocks were stocked with the required number of deer on January 14, 1964. During the stocki,ngperiod, five animals died in the paddock system. Three of these animals died of apparent malnutrition in Paddock One which is the heavy �- 157 - Bitterbrush Deer Days Use Utilization Percent 80 Use Index 60 40 20 o Mountain Mahogany 80 60 40 20 o 1 2 3 5 6 7 6 7 Serviceberry 80 60 40 20 o 1 2 3 5 Paddocks Figure 2. Relationship between deer days use, utilization, and "use index". �- 158 - use paddock of 60 deer days use per acre. One animal died in each of Paddocks Two and Six from back injuries incurred from fighting the enclosure fence. All animals were immediately replaced in each paddock to maintain the approximate stocking rate. The removal of the deer took place on February 4, 1964, after a twenty day stocking period. The only exception was the deer in Paddock Six which were not removed until two days later in order to compensate for a stocking shortage. All deer were reweighed and blood samples and tel]~peratureswere taken from each animal (Figure 3). Blood sample data was analysed by Department personnel in the Fort Collins Research Laboratory and proved negative in all cases for both Brucellosis and Leptospirosis. A breakdown of the paddock stocking data can be found in Table 8. Injuries to the deer in handling before stocking constitute a variable which is going to be hard to determine. Some of these injuries have not been evident at the time of stocking. Others that seemed minor may have been of great influence on the browsing habits of the deer. Further effort will be expended to reduce these injuries. Results on the weights this year are very erratic because of the deaths and injuries. Deer that had to be stocked late in the period, to replace dead ones, were not weighed. This cut the sample sizes down drastically. The average weight losses per paddock were as follows~ One (three deer) 6.6 lb.; Two (three deer) 1.6 lb.; Three (three deer) 8.3 lb.; Five (two deer) 12.5 lb., Six (one deer) 5 lb. Average temperatures 1963 (104 degrees). in this respect. in 1964 (106 degrees) were two degrees higher than in There were no significant differences between paddocks Pellet Counts --Paddocks All pellets deposited in 1962 were sprayed with paint or obliterated before stocking began. After the termination of the stocking period and the snow was melted from the paddock area, a total count was made of all pellet groups in each paddock. Data was kept separate for the middle study acre, and the surrounding acre adjacent to the fence, in an attempt to determine the effect of the fence in contrast to the total area. Data is shown in Table 9. In most cases, very little difference occurred between the outside and the inside acre. Paddock Six, which had a predomi.nance of pellets in the outside acre, is a four acre enclosure with three times the amount of outside area. The remainder of the paddocks have an equal amount of area both inside and out. Paddock Seven is an unfenced control, thus no outside acre exists. Paddock Four is the fenced control and no stocking was per~itted. It would appear that the figure of 15 pellet groups per deer per day for mixed browse types might be more nearly correct. This~s the fi.rst time a total count has been attempted on any sizable area. �Fig. 3. Taking blood sample from paddock deer for disease and nutritional study, January 1964 �Table 8.--Litt1e Paddock Sex No. Doe 1 Buck 1 Doe 1 Doe 1 Doe 1 Buck 1 Doe 1 Doe 1 Doe 2 Doe 2 Doe 2 Doe 2 Doe 2 Doe 3 Doe 3 Doe 3 Doe 5 Doe 5 Doe 6 Buck 6 Doe 6 Hills paddock stocking record, January 1964. Date Weight Out In After Before Tag Numbers 1-14-64 2- 4-64 115 125 Ll72 L173 2- 4 140 1-14 145 Ll45 L146 2- 4 120 1-14 A21 125 A22 2- 4 145 2- 2 L205 L206 2- 4 130 1-28 324 325 1-14 2- 3 L132 105 L131 1-27 1-14 145 L64 L63 23 1-14 110 No tags 1-21 1-14 130 L141 L142 2- 4 1-14 105 110 Ll39 L140 24 120 1-14 120 Ll19 L120 1-14 24 135 135 No tags 24 1-21 130 B14 B13 24 125 1-14 135 Ll29 L130 2- 4 1-14 135 135 Ll43 Ll44 2- 4 1-14 100 115 R55 R56 2- 4 1-14 130 145 A64 A63 2- 4 1-14 105 115 A992 2- 6 1-14 95 100 292 291 1-20 1-14 140 L135 L136 26 120 1-24 336 Blood No. 4 3 1 2 5 Temp. Out 106.1 102.8 104.6 106.8 106.1 Died Died Died Died 7 9 8 6 10 11 14 13 12 15 105.0 106.5 107.0 106.7 106.1 108.2 101.2 109.4 107.2 (Malnutrition) (Ma1nu tri tion) (Malnutrition) (Broken Back) I-' (J'I 0 Very Poor Condition Died (Broken Back) 16 �Table 9.--Total pellet counts for each paddock both inside and outside the one-acre study plots, together with stocking rates calculated, 1963. Calculated Number Actual Stocking Rate Groups Per Deer Per Day Pellet Groups Animals Paddock Stocking Per Acre Total Outside Inside Total Outside Inside Stocked DD/Acre Number 68.8417 59. 67'J] 14.9 7.33 7.57 881 1,790 909 6 60 (2A) 1 2 40 4 749 570 1,319 9.35 7.13 16.5 50.75 43.40 3 30 3 477 372 849 7.95 6.20 14.1 32.70 28.30 4 Fenced Control 0 000 000 000 5 20 2 316 327 643 7.90 8.18 16.1 24.80 21.43 6 10 (4A) 2 204 327 531 5.10 8.18 13.3 10.23 8.85 7 Unfenced Control ? 429 -- 429 -- -- 33.00 28.60 I-' 1/ 2/ (J"\ I-' Using 13 pellet groups per deer per day. Using 15 pellet groups per deer per day. �- 162 - Stomach Analysis--Paddocks A total of 18 deer used in stocking the paddock system, and two from outside, were sacrificed and the stomach samples from each were analysed. This analysis was done by standard volumetric procedures, with samples dry when estimates were made. Data obtained from these samples are shown in Tables 10 and 11 and Figure 4. Table 10.--Volumetric percentages of plants eaten by twenty deer, Jan. 8-28, 1963, by paddock, Little Hills Experiment Station.* Species Mtn. Mahogany Bitterbrush Serviceberry Pinon Pine Juniper Snowberry Bluebell Grass Spp. Big Sagebrush Unid. Weeds * No. Deer 1 6 2 4 5.80 1.25 4.67 77.17 23.67 1.00 1.00 0.50 1.00 1.00 5.50 83.75 6.00 1.00 3.67 T 1.00 Paddock Number 3 5 3 3 1.33 5.67 69.67 9.00 12.33 1.00 T 2.00 1.00 6 2 7 (out2 side) 0.67 T 8.67 46.67 36.67 6.33 T 5.00 12.50 37.50 30.00 7.00 T 1.00 2.00 5.00 10.00 65.00 12.50 3.00 1.00 0.67 5.00 5.00 15.00 Also found were weed seeds, two wood ticks, and 11 inches of tagging ribbon. The apparent lack of bitterbrush, grass and weeds in the stomach samples may have been due to the fact that approximately eight to ten inches of snow covered the area during the stocking period and these plants were almost entirely covered. However, utilization percentages by stem length measurement indicated usage from 58.1 to 17.2 percent for bitterbrush. The abundance of pinon and juniper, which consisted largely of needles, was probably due in part to the low digestibility rate of these species. But observation in the area did show a definite heavy use of these two species in all paddocks. They were the most abundant plants available. Key browse species were quite variable in volume. More serviceberry was consumed than mahogany because it is more abundant. An attempt was made to identify browse items eaten as to age, annual or older. The great majority of those identified were tallied as annual growth. This was true regardless of species or paddock. Relationships between these observations and the amount and kinds of plants available will be discussed more fully in a later report. �Table 11. Species Frequency percentages of plants eaten by twenty deer, January 8 - 28, 1963, by paddock Little Hills Experiment Station.* 1 2 No. of Deer--(6) (4) Mtn. Mahogany Bitterbrush Serviceberry Pinon Pine Juniper Snowberry Big Sage Bluebell Grass IlnLd , Weed * ** *** 5 4 - 83.3 66.6 6 - 100.0 6 - 100.0 6 - 100.0 3.., 50.0 1 2 1 - 16.6 33.3 16.6 50.0 2 - 50.0 4 - 100.0 4 - 100.0 4 - 100.0 3 - 75.0 1 - 25.0 3 - 75.0 1 - 25.0 2 - Paddock Number 3_ 4 (3) Control 3 - 100.0 3 - 100.0 3 - 100.0 3 - 100.0 3 - 100.0 2 1 1 1 - 66.6 33.3 33.3 33.3 6 (2) 5 (3)** 66.6 33.3 3 - 100.0 3 - 100.0 3 - 100.0 3 - 100.0 1 - 33.3 1 - 33.3 2 - 100.0 2 - 100.0 2 - 100.0 2 - 100.0 2 - 100.0 1 - 50.0 1 - 50.0 2 - 100.0 3 - 100.0 1 - 2 1 - 7 (2)*** 1 - 50.0 1 - 50.0 2 - 100.0 2 - 100.0 2 - 100.0 1 - 50.0 1 - 50.0 50.0 Figures in Parentheses are number of deer. Paddock 5 uses two deer. Three samples were obtained when one died half way through stocking period and had to be replaced with another animal. Paddock 7 is an unfenced control, two deer taken from outside, January 28, 1963. I-' (J) IN �N°· PADDOCK N°·3 ~.-t- -4-- 1 I ,/ ~ ,.,., T~.~ __ ~ MTN. MAHOG~NY i ~IG ~AG£ SERVitf:BERRY - 1% 97. I 3% 1 Ft< I ~~I I - b7. ir. 1I~.if ,-1I 7% II ~ «: L-. 7'!. .-r- - 2% SERVICEBERRY PIWON PINE M•.,-rENSIA I MLlTENSIA BIG SAGE MTN. MAHOGAN) Sf. 5% 5% JUNIPER [3,TTERBRU5H 107. 107- I ~ Fig. 4. . JUNIPER I 2.% I SNOIVBt.RIlY - 1/. BIG SAGf-- 1% 12 % II )r i I 'WEEDS I JUNIPER ~N~IV~<~ - 1% 'WEEDS JUNIPER 2% 15~" MTN MAHOGANY I 37. I I~ SERVICEB£R ,5;' 'WEEDS l.--..~ 57. SNOIVB[RRY 57. ---+ SERVICEBERRY /87. Stomach content samples from one deer from each paddock showing decreasing use of pine in the light and moderately stocked paddocks and increasing use of browse plants. �- 165 - Production In an effort to determine the approximate amount of feed of all types in the paddock system, a series of randomly located mi1acre plots were set out in each paddock. A total of ten such plots were set out in each paddock using a table of random numbers in conjunction with the existing randomly located line transect origins. Each plot was then placed ten feet from the transect origin; the flip of a coin determining the direction. During July, after considerable practice at estimating annual production in grams (Pechanec and Pickford), the total annual production of all species of grass or weeds was estimated and recorded. Samples of each species were collected and oven dried to determine conversion factors for calculating dry weight of production estimated. In November, after the leaves had fallen off and the browse plants had reached their natural dry state, estimates of annual production were made in the same plots on all browse species. All data was then combined and converted to pounds per acre in dry weight (Table 12). Table 12.--Tota1 estimated production by paddock in pounds per acre, dry weight, 1963. Paddock Number 1 2 Average 3 6 4 5 7 Browse Grass Weeds 156.1 25.4 17 .5 156.8 12.2 30.8 101.3 25.3 35.6 21.4 36.6 6.6 54.3 50.1 11.6 55.3 8.9 11.8 137.5 87.7 6.6 97.5 35.1 17 .8 Total 199.0 199.8 162.2 64.4 116.0 76.0 231.8 149.9 The 1963 growing season was unusually dry and very little annual growth occurred. The apparent lack of homogeneity between paddocks, however, is largely due to the sample size used. Data obtained from the stem length measurements and line transects indicate insignificant difference in density and reproduction between the paddocks for the most part. Sample size tests run on grass and weed data indicated that in order to be statistically accurate, a total of 46 such plots should be used for grass and 134 for weeds. This was felt to be a practical impossibility from the standpoint of manpower and time necessary, in addition to space limitations within the one acre sample area. Human error in this difficult field task produced part of the variability. Condition and Trend General inspection of the paddocks indicated that a standard condition and trend survey would not reveal any appreciable change at the end of the first year's stocking, so this job was not done. �- 166 Control of Rodents Only a half dozen cottontail rabbits were known to have been removed from the paddocks by trapping, poisoning, and shooting. Other smaller rodents probably were unaffected. Feeding freshly cut browse to the deer in the holding pen, waiting to be stocked, tended to attract rabbits. Bias in treatment was difficult to avoid. Prepared by: William T. Mc Kean Principal Game Biologist Approved by Richard N. Denney Project Leader Harold E. Burdick Game Biologist Date: July, 196~ Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief �July, 1965 - 167 - State of JOB COMPLETION REPORT INVESTIGATIONS PROJECTS COLORADO ----~~~~~--------------- Project No. Work Plan No. Game Range Investigations W-lOl-R-6 Job No. 2 Title of Job: Little Hills Grazing Study Period Covered: April 1, 1963 to March 1 30, 1964. ABSTRACT Improved trapping techniques resulted in a total deer catch of 208 head including 24 recatches from other years. Sixty-five deer were placed in the pastures and 143 were either tagged and released or used in other experimental work. Breakdown by sex and age included: yearling and adult bucks- 13.0 percent; yearling and adult does- 40.4 percent; fawns- 46.6 percent. The usual difficulties in removing deer from the pastures continued and die-offs confused the results somewhat. Wild cattle caused some delays in maintaining the spring schedule. Overstocking in Pastures Two and Eight were corrected in the fall to give the proper annual rate, if not the seasonal one. Some cattle refused to be weighed; this caused variability in the data for two of the pastures. Utilization estimates were made from paced transects in all pastures shortly after the animals were removed. Deer use was quite consistent with stocking. This ranged downward from a mean of 45.7 percent in Pasture Four to 9.6 percent in Pasture Seven. Livestock and deer both utilized old growth on browse since almost no new growth was produced. For the most part utilization by livestock was fairly well in line with stocking rates. In all pastures it exceeded the 1962 figures for all classes of forage. This was believed due to the drouth. Use figures on serviceberry as developed from P-U transects in each pasture exceeded the standard estimate figures greatly because the transects fell in the most heavily used parts of each pasture. Condition and trend transects, similar to the Standard Big Game Range Analysis ones, were established in all livestock pastures. �- HiO - We re-read 112 Canfield line intercept transects in all livestock pastures in 1963 to complete the first five year period since their establishment in 1957. Data is compiled but not completely analysed. Indian Ricegrass and Low Phlox each showed greater vigor in 1961 than in 1963. Elevation differences, influencing precipitation, may have had greater effects on vigor than the pasture treatments. Graphs and tables are at hand but further tests of significance are needed. Precipitation for the calendar year 1963 was only 8.85 inches -- the least in a l7-year record. Fifteen parties totaling the Station staff. 204 persons Pasture Stocking heard expLanations - Dear of project work by (1963-64) Deer trapping started on October 22, 1963. Due to extremely heavy hunting pressure in the area, large numbers of deer were driven into the closed areas and the group traps and gulches proved very effective in the filling of the pasture system. Very dry weather also forced many of these deer to water at our wells and springs, around,which our traps are located. A new group trap constructed around the existing alfalfa field in front of Pasture Seven contributed heavily to the trapping in Corral Gluch which facilitated easier removal of deer trapped in the gulch. These new additions coupled with existing traps proved very effective early in the season and all pastures were filled to the desired stocking rate by November 12. Twenty-three box traps were initiated into the trapping program on November 28. These traps were attended daily throughout tre trapping season. Because the pasture system was previously filled, all deer were tagged and released except for 20 head used in the paddock system. The entire trapping program was stopped on March 20 due to lack of good trapping weather. A total of 208 deer were captured of which 65 were placed in the experimental pastures (Table 1). Of the remaining 143, twenty were used in the paddock study (WP-l, J-4), eight were donated to the U. S. Bureau of Sport Fisheries and Wildlife in Denver for experimental purposes. Two were donated to Colorado State University for the same purpose, and 113 were released after tagging. The deer were caught in respect to the various methods as follows: Group Traps 86; Wing Traps 3; Box Traps 119. In addition to the new deer captured, a total of 24 recatches were made from previous years. Of these, ten were placed in the experimental pastures, five were placed in the paddocks and the remainder were released. No record was kept on the numerous day to day repeats which occurred during the trapping season. Of the total 65 deer put in the pastures, only five were fawns or 7.70 percent. It is hoped that lower mortality rates will result from fewer fawns �- 169 - Table 1.--1963-64 deer stocking in pastures. Calculated Deer Approximate Deer Pasture No. Days Desired Days Achieved 3 2,427 2,873 1,281 1,484 907 4 5 6 7 Deviation Over Under 418 2,843 2 716 1,282 1 528 900 157 1 44 7 being used. These fawns entered the pastures through holes in the fence during periods of trapping in group traps. No fawns were purposely stocked. Table 2 shows the breakdown of sex and age groups for deer trapped this year. Due to the heavy mortality rates which have occurred during the past two years in Pasture Four, it was felt that a continuation of this heavy stocking rate, to determine the effects on the available food supply, was no longer necessary. As a result, the stocking rate will be cut by 50 percent, thus requiring only 20 deer if stocked at the proper time on November 1. Table 2.--Results of trapping and tagging work, winter 1963-64. Unknown Bucks Does (J) !Il ~ m ~ Un tagged Deer put 1 into Pastures Tagged Deer put 2 into Pastures Tagged Deer 54 Released !Il eo ,.....{ l-I l-I ;::l .u (J) ,.....{ !Il m .u eo ,.....{ l-I l-I ;::l .u ,.....{ m .u (J) !Il (J) ,.....{ l-I ;::l .u ,.....{ m >< ~ 0 E-I m ~ ~ >< ~ E-I !Il m eo ,.....{ l-I m .u !Il !Il eo ,.....{ l-I ;::l .u l-I m m .u >< ~ E-I ~ ~ 0 0 6 6 2 0 0 2 3 1 7 11 5 0 4 35 39 0 0 0 0 2 5 37 44 76 38 2 37 77 0 0 0 0 92 11 50 153 >< ~ E-I 0 ~ m ~ 1 1 3 1 2 9 13 m !Il Total m 0 0 97 17 94 208* 38 6 78 122 2 0 0 2 57 11 16 34 TOTAL . * Totals do not 1nclude 24 recatches from prev10us years. See text . 13.0% Total Bucks (Yrlgs & Adults) ---------------------------- 27 40.4% Total Does (Yrlgs & Adults) ----------------------------- 84 46.6% Total Fawns --------------------------------------------- 97 0.0% Unknown Sex --------------------------------------------0 Deer Removals Earlier catches of deer resulted in fewer deer needed to stock the pasture system. Many problems, however, were encountered in the removal of the animals from the pastures. Heavy snow existed during the removal period and the deer were reluctant to move. Due to their large size and rough terrain, Pastures Three and Four were not emptied until early June. Thus the removal period extended intermittently from March 24 to June 10 as weather conditions permitted. Aside from permanent personnel, three laborers were hired to assist in the drives. �- 170 - In early December one deer entered Pasture Six by crawling under the fence and resulted in a slight overage in the desired stocking'rate. During this same period, one deer escaped from Pasture Four by jumping the fence. Also, seven out of the 20 deer stocked in Pasture Four winter killed. This 35 percent mortality rate plus the escape of one deer, caused a definite shortage in the annual stocking. A total of eight deer are known to have died of natural causes within the pastures. This resulted in 12.3 percent mortality rate which is very reasonable considering the severe winter conditions during early spring. Pasture Stocking - Livestock -- (1963) Cattle.--The annual stocking of cattle in the pastures started on May 1, 1963, and terminated on June 24, 1963. The fall stocking was initiated on October 1, 1963, and ended on November 15. The animals used in the stocking were wilder than usual and considerable trouble was encountered in moving and weighing them. Only on one occasion were all twelve cows actually weighed. On May 25 one cow died in Pasture Eight. An autopsy made by the local veterinarian indicated the animal died of some form of septicenia. This was considered a natural loss by the owner and the Department was not required to pay for the animal. On June 8 one cow gave birth to a calf and was not removed from the pasture until 10 days after the removal date. This overage in stocking was deducted from the fall period. Sheep.--The spring stocking of sheep was initiated on April 30 and terminated on July 1. One ewe died of natural causes in Pasture One and one was killed by coyotes in Pasture Nine. The owner was reimbursed for the one killed by coyotes. The fall stocking 1963. No mishaps achieved. period was started on October 2 and ended on November were encountered and the desired stocking rates were Both sheep and cattle were weighed before and after entering breakdown of these weights may be found in Table 4. 27, each pasture. A A wide individual weight range existed among the cattle used in stocking the pastures. The fact that all cattle were not weighed at the beginning and end of each period caused a wide variability in the data. When two extremely light animals were not weighed, the average weight was considerably higher and, conversely, when two extremely heavy animals were not weighed the average was much smaller. These factors were in part the reason for the large decrease in weight in Pasture Two in the fall and also the large decrease in Pasture Eight. The large increase in the fall in Pasture Three was also a result of the same circumstances. The remainder of the figures are accurate, in-so-far as the mechanics of the operation are concerned. �Table 3.--Stocking records, 1963. Spring Pasture Animal Stocked Removed Fall Stocked Removed Acres 34 35 69 Total Days 833.0 700.0 1533.0 ADM 27.77 23.33 51.00 A/ADM 2.75 3.27 1.50 Season Spring Fall Season Number 1 Sheep May 23 June 17 Nov. 7 Nov. 27 76.37 2 Cattle May 1 May 23 Oct. 12 Nov. 4 166.25 Spring Fall Season 12 12 24 252.0 246.0 498.0 8.40 8.20 16.60 19.79 20.27 10.00 3 Cattle June 11 June 24 Oct. 1 Oct. 11 161.81 Spring Fall Season 10 12 22 125.0 120.0 245.0 4.17 4.00 8.17 38.80 40.45 19.81 Oct. 23 Nov. 12 Mar. 30 June 6 Winter 18 2843.0 94.8 1.71 Deer I-' -...J 4 5 Deer Deer Sheep 6 7 June 17 July 1 Deer Deer I-' Oct. 23 Nov. 5 Mar. 24 May 1 Nov. 5 Nov. 7 Apr. 1 Oct. 2 Oct. 14 85.42 Oct. 29 Nov. 5 Apr. 6 Apr. 7 Oct. 24 Oct. 29 143.64 Winter 20 2716.0 90.5 1.59 85.42 Winter Spring Fall Season 1282.0 9 33 429.0 35 . 420.0 68 849.0 42.7 14.3 14.0 28.3 2.00 5.97 6.10 3.02 98.93 Winter 11 1528.0 50.9 1.9? Mar. 26 May 23 90.67 Winter Spring 7 11 900.0164.0 30.0 5.47 3.02 37.56 Fall Season 12 23 150.0 314.0 5.0 10.47 41.09 19.62 Spring Fall Season 35 35 70 770.0 787.5 1557.5 25.67 26.25 51. 92 6.06 5.93 3.00 8 Cattle May 24 June 10 Nov. 5 Nov. 15 205.43 9 Sheep Apr. 30 May 22 Oct. 14 Nov. 6 155.55 �- 172 - In the future, each animal will be marked and individual weights will be recorded. In this manner, gain or loss of individual animals will be noted and extremely heavy or light animals will not alter the data. In addition, arrangements have been made to obtain livestock that are accustomed to handling. This should eliminate the problem of weighing all of the animals after each period. Table 4.--Livestock weights before and after stocking, Pasture No. Spring Average Weight Before After 9 1 5 1963. Fall Average Weight Before After Sheep 98.0 104.0 107.6 104.0 107.6 111.7 125.0 126.9 132.1 126.9 123.2 125.0 762.0 735.8 730.4 735.8 721.3 762.0 Cattle 2 8 3 553.8 548.1 565.6 548.1 565.6 612.2 Utilization Estimates--Deer (1962-63) We continued the paced transect system for obtaining utilization estimates. The work was done in the spring after all deer had been removed. Averages appear to run about,as might be desired (Table 5). Production was good to fair in 1962. This is the last year for Pasture Four to be stocked at the heavy rate. The browse has reached such a state of deterioration that 18 percent of the deer stocked died of malnutrition in 1962-63. There is no point in continuing at this rate. The rate for this pasture beginning in 1964 will be one 'half what it has been or 20 deer days per acre. Utilization Estimates--Livestock (1963) This year was one with very low production of all forage. Annual precipitation was only 8.85 inches (3.83 below normal). This is the least precipitation since our records began. Browse production was limited to spur shoots on almost all key species, except serviceberry. Accordingly the utilization estimates shown on browse in Tables 6, 7, and 8 are for growth two and even three years back. Under heavy stocking rates both sheep and cattle did a great deal of browsing. For the most part plants appear to have been taken about in proportion to the stocking rates shown. Rodent use was erratic but generally seemed to be less than in the last two grazing seasons. All forage was utilized more heavily than in 1962. �- 173 - Table 5.--Average percent utilization 63, by pasture. of browse plants by deer, winter Pasture il3 Moderate No. % Hits Utile Pasture i/4 Heavy No. % Hits Utile Serviceberry Mtn. Mahogany Bitterbrush Big Sage Big Rabbitbrush Little Rabbitbrush Horsebrush Snowberry Pine Juniper Oak Morman Tea Lanceleaf Rabbitbrush Skunkbush Winterfat Oregon Grape Ribes 55 54 11 17 6.5 33.3 10.0 l3.4 5 5 31 7 6 10 3 9.0 17.0 0.1 2.4 0.2 1.3 3.3 43 26.1 51 73.9 7 63.6 16 24.6 5 74.0 11 24.2 6 32.5 14 2.2 6 70.0 4 3.8 7 29.6 1 100.0 24 15 10 26 7 5 7 5 6 4 2 2 15.8 23.9 34.0 5.9 18.6 28.0 0.7 0.0 10.5 0.0 0.0 1.0 12 4 1 96.3 23.5 2.0 1 95.0 1 4 0.0 2.8 Average 209 12.9 188 45.7 114 14.6 Browse Species Pasture il5 Moderate No. % Hits Utile Pasture il6 Moderate No. % Hits Utile 27 28 5 32 4 11 6 7 5 2 1 128 1.5 27.6 20.8 14.6 51.3 16.8 0.0 0.1 12.6 0.0 0.0 14.5 1962- Pasture in Light No. % Hits Utile 36 20 23 9 0.8 21. 9 20.7 14.8 1 1 8 6 5 3 1 20.0 0.0 0.0 0.2 0.0 0.0 0.0 2 2.5 115 9.6 Pastures One and Two, like Pasture Four, have deteriorated to the point that there is danger of starvation of the livestock in the fall. Average fall weight losses during the 20 day period were: 26.2 pounds for cattle and 3.7 pounds for sheep. Accordingly the rates of stocking will be reduced one half in 1964, or down to 20 acres per cow per month and three acres per sheep per month. Standard P-U Transects During the 1961-62 year, standard P-U transects were established in the deer pastures. This year similar transects were set out in the livestock pastures. It was found, however, that there was no measureab1e growth on mahogany. Only a comparison concerning serviceberry is possible this year. Again, as reported last year, our estimates averaged much lower than the P-U transects because the latter are placed only across "key" areas (Table 9). Deer days use as determined by pellet counts in the above pastures were: 3-11.5; 4-16.9; 5-13.8; 6-14.6; 7-3.0; and 10-15.1. Comparable livestock days use as read from the P-U transects were: 1-16.9; 2-13.3; 3-0.0; 5-28.5; 8-5.8; 9-6.9. We overlooked checking Pasture Ten for utilization did count the pellets as shown above. in the spri.ng of 1964 but �Table 6.--Livestock utilization estimates after spring grazing, by pasture, 1963. Pasture 1ft 1-H Sheep 2-H Cattle 3-M Ca t t Lew 5-M Sheep* 8-M Cattle Hits Hits Hits % % Hits % Hits % % 9-M Sheep Hits % Grass Browse Weeds 194 193 194 * 95 95 85 28.2 24.8 10.8 186 189 188 14.9 11.7 5.5 182 192 185 16.7 5.0 6.4 113 113 113 10.6 12.9 13.5 170 170 170 13.9 3.9 5.0 Stocked in winter with deer. Table 7.--Livestock utilization estimates after fall grazing by pasture, 1963. Pasture 1ft 1-H Sheep 2-H Cattle 3-M Catt1e* 5-M Sheep* 8-M Cattle Hits Hits % Hits % Hits Hits % % % 41.2 Grass 95 190 22.4 196 20.7 110 15.0 170 18.5 Browse 92 18.4 189 18.4 192 110 3.8 7.5 170 2.6 Weeds 97 12.2 189 12.1 182 108 4.1 9.4 170 4.3 * 18.0 10.1 9.5 I-' -...J .c- 9-M Sheep Hits % 194 195 187 21.0 8.3 10.3 Stocked in winter with deer. Table 8.--Livestock utilization estimates totaled after spring and fall grazing by pasture, 1963. Pasture 1ft 1-H Sheep 2-H Cattle 3-M Ca t t Lew 5-M She epw 8-M Cattle 9-M Sheep Grass 69.4 37.3 37.4 25.6 32.4 39.0 Browse 43.2 30.1 8.8 20.4 6.5 18.4 Weeds 23.0 17 .6 10.5 22.9 9.3 19.8 * Stocked in winter with deer. �Fig. 1. Fawn mule deer trapped in box trap, tagged in leading edge of each ear with large, round, yellow, aluminum tags, and marked for sight records with bright red fluorescent, vinyl-covered nylon ribbons tied to ear tags with a bleeder knot. Fig. 2.--Inside view of box trap showing trip wire, two headless nails. ring, and �Fig. 3 Sheep entering Pasture One from truck, spring 1963. Fig. 4. Ewe sheep in water gap of Pasture Nine spring 1963. �Fig. 5. Fence line contrast in Pasture Four showing dead sagebrush (right) outside an exclosure and live sage inside. Note grass of about equal density on both sides of fence. Fig. 6. View from inside an exclosure in Pasture Four showing dead sagebrush outside (background) and live sagebrush inside. Exclosure is over 10 years old. �Fig. 7. Pinon pine and mountain mahogany heavily browsed in Pas ture Four. Compare to Fig. 8 be Low taken nearby but inside an exclosure. Fig. 8. Unbrowsed mahogany Pasture Four. and pinon pine inside an exclosure in �Fig. 9. Sheep in Pasture One (heavy use) grazing along north fence. Note preference for grass over sagebrush nearby. Also note low grass density even on a favorable north facing slope. Picture taken November 14, 1963. Fig. 10. Sheep grazing on a ridge in Pinon-Juniper with heavily used serviceberry and mahogany nearby. Note sparse grass and weed cover. Picture taken November 14, 1963 in Pasture One. �Fig. 11. A fence line contrast in Pasture One showing dense grass and weed cover inside the exclosure (right) in a bottom in comparison to sparse growth outside. Sagebrush inside is dying out due to competition with rank grass. Fig. 12. View inside the same exclosure as Fig. 11 within Pasture One. Site is unfavorable for herbaceous vegetation. After over ten years total protection almost nothing has grown. Both pictures taken November 14, 1963. �- 181 Table 9.--Utilization based on standard P-U transects as compared to ocular estimates o~ serviceberry, by pasture, 1963-1964. Estimates Transects Season Stocking Rate Grazed By Pasture No. 1 2 3 3 4 5 5 6 7 8 9 * Sheep Cattle Cattle Deer Deer Sheep Deer Deer Deer Cattle Sheep Spring Spring Spring Winter Winter Spring Winter Winter Winter Spring Spring Moderate Moderate Moderate Moderate Moderate Moderate Moderate Moderate Light Moderate Moderate Estimated by Wm. T. McKean ** 2.6 20.7 18.3 65.2 51.4 21.5 51.2 77 .2 59.2 5.5 4.5 6.7* 3.6* 1.4* 19.6** 7.9** 2.4* l4.9'1'C* 13.5** 16.4** 0.6* 6.8* Estimated by Harold E. Burdick Pastures One and Two were heavily stocked up until the spring of 1964 when they were changed to moderate rates. Pasture Four was reduced to a moderate rate during the winter of 1963-64. Condition and Trend Condition and trend transects, similar to the Interagency Big Game Range Analysis ones, were placed in all livestock pastures during the summer of 1963. These transects, designed to show the condition of the overall range, will be rerun at five year intervals. The data collected will indicate the general trend of each area as a.whole. Each transect was designed to run diagonally across each pasture so that a good cross section of each type would be included. Comparable transects of this type were located in the deer pastures during the summer of 1961. Re-Reading Line Transects--1963 During the summer a three-man student crew completed the job of reading approximately 112 line transects in the livestock pastures. This occurred after the fifth year of grazing and browsing since E. W. Mustard established them in 1957. Data from the 1962 readings in the deer pastures are repeated in Table 10 gether with the 1963 figures. There remains to be obtained the information from Pasture Ten (control), which was established in 1961. Changes in heavy use pastures are quite evident in all categories, as are the increased densities of grass and weeds in the deer pastures. The significance of these changes is being analysed but the work is , not yet complete. Six pages of tables concerning counts made of browse plants within plots, their age classes, origin, and hedging condition, are at hand. There has been no time to compile this material further and to analyse it. This will be done during the next segment, or sooner. �Table 10.--Comparison of summation values for 192 line transects as measured in summer of 1957 and remeasured summers of 1962 (deer) and 1963 (livestock). Pas ture Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Item Year Sheep H Cattle H Cattle M Deer H Sheep M Deer M~eer L Cattle M Sheep M Average Deer M Deer M Bare Ground & Erosion Pavement 1957!! 1962 & 63 Percent Change 48.48 62.68 29.08 49.27 60.66 23.12 40.18 45.61 13.51 51.14 56.79 11.05 Litter 1957 1962 & 63 Percent Change 33.32 13.21 -60.35 26.45 12.69 -52.02 36.44 31.33 -14.02 Browse 1957 1962 & 63 Percent Change 14.22 22.56 60.90 22.92 25.46 11.08 Grass & Weeds 1957 1962 & 63 Percent Change 3.98 1.55 -66.58 Overs tory 1957 1962 & 63 Percent Change 16.99 20.40 20.07 17 48.31 59.34 22.83 46.58 53.05 13.89 34.07 43.47 27.59 44.75 54.86 22.59 25.78 28.03 20.55 15.61 -20.29 -44.31 38.14 31.90 26.32 20.71 19.00 15.24 -45.70 -40.44 -42.10 41.75 28.22 -32.41 32.01 19.62 -38.71 22.06 21.55 2.31 21.50 19.62 - 8.74 22 51 22.82 1.38 24.80 18.76 26.14 17.72 5.02 - 5.54 26.14 29.11 11.36 23.12 26.36 14.01 21.79 23.51 7.94 1.36 1.18 -13.24 1.32 1.51 14.39 1.65 3.05 84.85 -1.15 .98 .60 .97 2.23 . 2.80 1.46 2.61 93.91 185.71 143.33 169.07 1.05 1.98 88.57 1.45 2.02 39.31 9.59 13.52 40.98 12.48 18.78 50.48 7.44 9.88 32.80 .8.51 lO.81 27.03 16.65 23.26 39.70 11.10 14.48 30.45 r 35.99 50.42 40.09 48.74 61.82 26.84 9.4411.61 12.34 12.55 30.72 8.10 7.19 8.81 22.53 The first two figures represent the mean measurement or percent for the item riamed. The third figure is merely the difference expressed as a positive or negative percent of the 1957 figure. f-' GJ N �- 183 - 7 500 6.56"-) 6 5 400 4 Exc10sure Average tIl H Q) ~ Q) 3 300 .~ S .--4 .--4 Pasture Average .~ S I=l ~ ..c: 2 ~ eo s:: Q) Q) .--4 eo en ~ tIl 0 0 ;::l .--4 .--4 >c: >c: u H :> H tIl ;::l Q) Q) Q) H 200 u Q) Q) 0 0 Z 1 Z 150 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Pasture Number 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Ppt. Jan. to June Exclosure Number Figure 13. Vigor of Indian Ricegrass in pastures as compared to exc1osures, 1961. inside �- 184 - 500 7 6 400 5 4 Exclosure Average CI) H Q) -1..1 ~ 3.01" ~ 300 3 • ...4 .-I .-I Pasture Average • ...4 S ~ • ...4 ..c: -1..1 2 eo s:: Q) .-I Q) Q) eo C\l H Q) H ;:l H ;:l CI) CI) 0 0 .-I Q) ;> 200 <e: .-I o u ~ 1 CI) Q) Q) 0 0 Z Z 150 1 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 Pasture Number Figure 14. Vigor of Indian Ricegrass exclosures, 1963. 4 5 6 7 Exclosure in pastures 8 9 10 Pp t , Jan. to June Number as compared to inside �7 6.56'~ 6 150 5 100 Exc10sure Average Pasture Average 4 3 2 50 1 o 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Pasture Number Figure 15. 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Exc10sure Vigor of Low Phlox in pastures exc1osures, 1961. 9 10 Number as compared to inside Pp t , Jan. to June �7 6 150 5 Average 100 4 U) ~ Q) .j..I Q) e .,-l .-l .-l .,-l e ~ 50 .,-l ~ Q) .j..I Q) Q) eC\! Q) -e U) ~ ::l H ::l .,-l U) 0 0 .-l o >: o .-l Q) eo ~ C\! 1 Q) Q) H 0 Q) z 0 :> z <t: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Pasture Number Figure 16. 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Exc10sure Number Vigor of Low Phlox in pastures as compared to inside exc1osures, 1963. Ppt. Jan. to June �- 18.7 - Vigor Survey--196l and 1963 Compared We continued the check of vigor of one grass and one weed in the pastures. As explained in the last segment each pasture mean is weighed against the mean for eight exclosures combined (Tables 11, 12 and 13). The precipitation for the first six months of each year probably has a great effect on this type of data. There was twice the precipitation in 1961 that there was in 1963. Mean vigor figures for all pastures combined were quite close for both Indian Ricegrass and Low Phlox. But there is an elevational difference upward from Pasture One to Nine of around five hundred feet and accordingly pasture differences in precipitation, unmeasured. The gradual increase in vigor due to this situation is more evident in the figures and tables than are individual pasture differences. More study is needed to interpret this field data. Table ll.--Vigor ratings for Indian Ricegrass as determined by maximum leaf length measurements, 1961 and 1963. % of Exc10sure Average Exc Losur esw Pastures* 1963 1961 1963 1961 1961 1963 Pasture 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 . Average * ** 226.7 276.1 331.4 222.9 475.8 327.5 none 388.8 384.6 none 329.2 276 330 393 362 339 324 none 355 3777 none 344.0 227.6 230.6 260.2 268.6 252.0 264.4 309.3 312.9 330.6 293.0 274.9 246 181 270 298 302 291 262 282 332 374 283.8 69.b~ 70.0 79.0 81.6 76.5 80.3 94.0 95.0 100.4 89.0. 72 53 78 87 88 84 76 82 96 109 Length in millimeters. 227.6 t 329.2 ~ 69.1% Weather--1963 The outstanding thing about the weather during the calendar year 1963, from our point of view, was the low precipitation, especially during the first five months of the year when only 3.01 inches fell. Total was 8.85 inches-the lowest since records have been kept. The effect of this dryness is still evident well into 1964 when we find some reliable Dry Fork springs not running and all others running much below normal. Demonstrations and Publications--1963-l964 Fifteen parties visited the station and heard talks by Burdick and McKean, and saw the experiments to varying extents. Others were contacted for talks in neighboring areas. Some talks concerned only special parts of the work here--such as deer trapping and tagging. �- 1813 Table 12.--Vigor ratings for Low Phlox (Phlox caespitosa) as determined by crown diameter measurements, 1961 and 1963. Exc10sure Pastures % of Exc10sure Average Pasture 1961 1963 1961 1961 1963 1963 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Average 86.0 142.4 88.3 84.4 91.4 69.9 none 103.3 101.1 none 95.8 87 145 124 97 74 100 none 99 129 none 107.0 46.8 66.8 79.8 57.7 97.5 91.7 89.8 78.5 77 .3 72.4 75.8 58 58 68 63 72 84 81 95 87 87 75.3 48.9 69.7 83.3 60.2 101.8 95.7 93.7 81.9 75.7 75.7 54 54 64 59 68 78 76 89 82 82 Table 13.--Vigor ratings of Indian Ricegrass and Low Phlox as related to the amount and type of use, 1961 and 1963. Grass Vigor2:./ Forb Vigor2) Pasture No. 1961 1963 1961 1963 Usell 1 9 2 Heavy Use - Sheep 72 69.1 48.9 54 Moderate Use - Sheep 82 100.4 96 75.7 Heavy Use - Cattle 70.0 53 69.7 54 81.9 8 Moderate Use - Cattle 82 95.0 89 81.6 4 Heavy Use - Deer 87 60.2 59 6 Moderate Use - Deer 84 78 80.3 95.7 7 Light Use - Deer 94.0 76 93.7 76 101.8 5 Moderate Use - Sheep and Deer 76.5 88 68 3 Moderate Use - Cattle and Deer 79.0 78 83.3 64 1/ Stocking rate and species stocked. 21 The vigor rating of ricegrass and low phlox in the pastures expressed as a percent of the average exc10sure measurements. As usual from one to a dozen hunting parties every day during the open season were assisted and briefly visited concerning the station work. Harold E. Burdick prepared an article concerning deer trapping and tagging for the Colorado Outdoors September-October 1963 issue. A partial list of contacts by date and identification for the 1963-64 year included: �- 189 No. of Persons Month Group April 3-12, 1963 April 11-13, 1963 May 8, 1963 May 16, 1963 July 19-20, 1963 July, 1963 Meadow Count Groups C.S.U. Seniors Rangely Jr. High Students S.C.S. personnel . Meeker Boy Scouts G & F and BLM personnel on deer preference lists Colo. Range Society BLM Wildlife personnel African game officials Rangely Archery Club Non-resident (Arkansas) hunters Colo. Archery Assoc. Pres. Utah S.U. graduate student N.P.S. officials Cap-Chur Gun officials, Georgia August 30-31, 1963 September 10, 1963 October 22, 1963 November, 1963 November, 1963 November, 1963 December 27, 1963 January 27-28, 1964 February 4, 1964 Total Prepared by 15 25 67 2 10 10 25 1 12 25 2 1 1 4 4 204 William T. McKean Principal Game Biologist Approved by ~R=i~c~h=a~r=d-=N~.~D~e_n_n~e~y _ Project Leader Harold E. Burdick Game Biologist Da te: ~J=u=1;...,:y...!,:......:1::..:9:..6:..:J::..h _ Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief ��July, 1965 - 181 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO --~~~~~----------------Game Range Investigations W-lOl-R-6 Project No. Work Plan No. 2 Job No. Title of Job: Rodent Effects on Deer Winter Range Period Covered: April 1, 1963 through March 3 31, 1964 Objectives: Study how rodents affect the composition, ground cover, and reproduction of vegetation in a pinon-juniper type deer range, with particular emphasis on browse plants. Procedure: in previous following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. General procedures for the continuing study have been published reports. Work scheduled for the 1963-64 segment was the Make reference slides of food items. Prepare slides from stomachs on hand. Identify and estimate percent content of food items each slide. Compile food habits data by species, season, age-class. Make statistical analysis of 1961 and 1962 transect data. Compute rodent population density from home-range and trapline data on hand. Conduct the 3-day census. Maintain fences. Keep rodents under control in the Exclosure by maintaining poison stations and trapping for a week in spring and in fall, if needed. Findings: A total of 244 rodent stomachs have been collected. Food samples from these were taken and 199 microscope slides prepared for food habits determination. Items of possible rodent foods were collected from the study area and preserved for the making of reference slides for the identification of food items in stomach sample slides. Conferences were held with biologists experienced in rodent food-habits research, and the literature was studied to learn proper techniques of rodent stomach content analysis. Home-range data collected during the study were compiled, and these in conjunction with census data were used to estimate population densities for the years of the study. �- 192 - The annual 3-day census was taken. The fences around the Exclosure and Control plots were kept in repair. The rodent Exclosure was saturated with traps for a period in the spring and fall, and poison stations were maintained to kill any rodents which may have gained entrance. Since the study will be terminated with the field work in 1964 and a final report, it seems advisable to forego reporting the results of this segment of the study until they can be combined and compared with similar information for prior years in the final report. Prepared Date: by: Harold R. Shepherd Principal Game Biologist July, 1955 Approved by: Richard N. Denney Project Leader Wayne W. Sand fort Game Research Chief �July, 1965 - lS3 - FINAL REPORT RESEARCH State of COLORADO Project No. W-lOl-R-6 PROJECT Game Range Investigations Job No. Work Plan No. 3 Title of Job: Value of Internode Period Covered: SEGMENT Counts April 1, 1963 to March 2 in Determining Browse Utilization 31, 1964 ABSTRACT Results of investigating the possibility of estimating the amount of utilization of oakbrush (Quercus gambellii) browse by counting the number of internodes left uneaten are described. Current annual twigs were collected over a 3-year period fram plants growing in various exposures. The percentage of total twig length represented by each internode and combination of internodes was determined and tested for equality between plants, between plants growing in different exposures, and between plants in different years. Strong correlations were found between internode combinations and total twig length. However, the variations in the percentage of total twig length for specific internode combinations induced by differences in plants, exposures, and years do not permit precise estimates bf utilization. Figures for the mean percent of utilization indicated by internodes left uneaten are presented for possible use in making very rough estimates of utilization. Objectives: Explore the possibility of determining an index-of-utilization for oakbrush current annual twig growth by a comparison of the number of internodes left uneaten with a number typical for the species. �- 1915 - Table 1.--Lengths of internode combinations and total stem length compared for all p1~nts and locations. Degrees Mean Mean Mean Percent of Number Length Total Stem Length Internode r F Freedom Internodes (nun) Upper Combination Lower Mean * ** 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 16.2 33.7 53.2 69.8 80.6 88.2 92.7 95.0 17.5 35.5 55.3 71.6 82.2 89.4 93.6 95.7 18.9 37.5 57.4 73.6 83.8 90.6 94.5 96.4 YEAR 1957 3.0 7.3 12.7 17.2 19.9 21.5 22.3 22.6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9.7 22.1 38.2 54.9 67.6 77 .9 85.5 90.6 10.6 23.5 40.0 56.8 69.3 79.5 86.7 91.6 11.6 25.1 41.9 58.9 71.2 81.1 88.1 92.6 YEAR 1958 2.6 7.7 15.6 23.9 30.2 34.8 37.8 39.5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 12.4 23.8 38.6 53.1 64.9 74.6 81.3 86.7 14.1 26.1 41.3 55.9 67.6 77 .1 83.6 88.7 16.3 28.9 44.4 59.0 70.6 79.8 86.0 90.8 YEAR 1961 4.5 11.7 21.9 31.7 39.2 44.9 48.4 61.0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 13.0 26.5 43.0 58.8 70.5 79.9 86.3 90.8 13.8 27.5 44.3 60.1 71.7 80.8 87.1 91.5 ALL YEARS COMBINED 6.27 3.1 14.6 8.2 28.7 15.3 45.6 61.4 22.2 27.1 72.9 81.9 30.5 32.6 88.0 33.9 92.2 Significan t at .05 level Significant at .01 level 5.23 1.57* 1.75** 2.46** 4.38** 4.84** .6.05** 7.46** 7.11** 0.660 0.771 0.864 0.926 0.958 0.980 0.989 0.993 7.09** 7.98** 9.86** 11.38** 12.57** 11.73** 10.67** 10.83** 0.608 0.741 0.830 0.893 0.936 0.961 0.977 0.988 4.10** 6.51** 5.58** 7.54** 8~33** 6.25** 8.17** 7.16** 0.624 0.756 0.847 0.902 0.935 0.956 . 0.969 0.979 104 & 2074 6.00** 7.77** " 8.68** " 10.90** "If 12.03** 10.72** " 11.55** " 0.611 0.741 0.834 0.898 0.937 0.961 0.976 0.986 29 & 923 II " " " " If " 7.04 39 & 828 " " " " " " " 7.20 24 & 323 " " " If If " If " 10.7(jn'-k �~ 198 - Current annual twigs are easily recognized from twig growth of the previous year to which they are attached. A ring of terminal-bud scale scars marks the junction between growth of the 2 years. A twig node was arbitrarily considered to be located at the base of axillary buds. The portion of a current annual twig between the ring of terminal-bud scale scars and the base of the first axillary bud, between the bases of 2 adjacent axillary buds, and between the base of the terminal bud or bud cluster and the base of the axillary bud nest adjacent was, for purposes of this study, called an internode. Internodes on a current annual twig were numbered consecutively from the budscale-scar ring toward the twig tip (Fig. 1). The following data were tabulated for each twig~ number of internodes, length of each internode in millimeters, and total twig length in millimeters. Analyzing the Data.--It was assumed that the equation Yj = bi xi + c i expresses the length of any current annual twig where y. = total length of current annual twig j, x· = length of twig from temiJal bud-scale scars to distal end of ~ intern~de, ci ; random growth factor, and bi = constant for the ith internode. In a linear regression analysis the relationship was determined between the lengths of the first internode and the entire twig, the first plus the second internode and the entire twig, and so on, combining succeeding internode lengths and expressing their sum as a percentage of the entire twig length. The percentage of total twig length represented by each internode combination from 1 through 8 was tested for equality between plants, between plants growing in different exposures, and between plants in different years. Because internodes 1 through 8 comprised approximately 90 percent of total twig length, other internodes were arbitrarily ignored. Correlation coefficients (r) testing the strength of the relationship between internode combinations and total twig length were determined, and confidence intervals for the mean percentage of total stem length represented by each internode combination were established. RESULTS The mean percentage that each internode combination is of total twig length was significantly different between plants growing in the same site, between plants growing in different sites, and between plants from different years. Table 1 shows the pooled data by year for all plants. Mean twig length varied more, proportionately, than did mean number of internodes: mean length increasing by approximately 170 percent while mean number of internodes increased by approximately 38 percent. Approximately 90 percent of the length of an average oakbrush twig in this study was contained within its first 8 internodes. Correlation between mean lengths of internode combinations and total twig length was strong for all combinations, becoming progressively stronger with the inclusion of additional internodes. The number of twigs required per plant to detect 75 percent of the time a 10 percent change in the internode proportions, using a test at the 90 percent level, is shown in Table 3. �- 192 - _____ TERMINAL LEAF BUD SCAR- --- INTERNODE 2 INTERNODE I OLD-GROWTH Figure l.--Current annual twig of oakbrush. STEM �- 19B - Table 2.--Percentage of utilization represented left uneaten. Internode 3-Year Mean Remaining Percent 1 2 3 by mean number of internodes Range (Extremes any Year) 7 87 73 56 40 28 19 13 81-90 63-78 43-62 26-47 16-35 9-25 6-19 8 9 4- 9 4 5 6 Table 3.--Twig Twigs Per Plant sample size required per plant. 1957 1958 14 17 1961 Combined 57 22 DISCUSSION Although strong correlations were found between internode combinations and total twig length, the variations occurring between plants, sLt es , and 'years in the percentage of total twig length for specific internode combinations do not permit precise estimates of utilization. Because of these plant and exposure induced differences, ideally, twig samples collected for estimating utilization should be collected from several plants in each exposure represented in the site, and in proportion to the area represented by exposures. The fact that the percentage of total twig length contained in a specific internode combination varies between plants, exposures, and years does not, per se, invalidate use of internode counts in estimating utilization. If the extremes of the possible variations are not too different from mean values, internode counts might provide an acceptable method, at least for rough estimates. Table 2, based on combination of all data for 3 years, shows the mean percent of utilization indicated for the internode remaining; also, the extremes of variation for any of the 3 years shown. The data on which the mean percent of utilization figures are based are probably as diverse as would ordinarily be encountered, because they are from years of near extremes in precipitation. For example, during the 14-year period of 1948-61, precipitation was highest (30.81 inches) in 1957, at a near low (13.94 inches) in 1958, and near the average (16.98 inches) in 1961. During the 3 data years, tabular values for utilization should have estimated utilization to within approximately 13 percent of the true values. In use, a source of error in estimating utilization would result from portions of internodes uneaten. This might be overcome by interpolating for portions of internodes. Errors of estimate would tend to be compensating over a large number of measurements. �- 199 - Because of the sources of variation and error pointed out, use of internode counts in estimating utilization of oakbrush browse would result in only rough approximations of the true percent of utilization. But the method might prove useful as an aid in making and checking ocular estimates of oakbursh utilization. Sample size required to.estimate utilization was not investigated. It would be dependent upon conditions prevailing from year to year, such as the degree, uniformity, and manner· of browsing. It seems likely that utilization could be estimated by internode counts for other browse species. Antelope bitterbrush and ~ountain mahogany, with their long, slender twigs, would seem especially suited. Of course, meanpercentage-of-total-twig-length-per-internode data would have to be calculated for each species. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS Thanks are due Jack R. Grieb and Dave Bowden for statistical assistance. LITERATURE CITED Aldous, S. E. 1940. A deer browse survey method. J. Mammal. Hoskins, L. W., and P. D. Dalke. 1955. game range in south-eastern Idaho. 25:130-136. Winter browse on the Pocatello big J. Wildl. Mgmt. 19:215-225. Julander, O. 1937. Utilization of browse by wildlife. Conf. 2:276-287. Trans. N. Am. Wildl. Shafer, Elwood L. Jr. 1963. The twig-count method for measuring hardwood deer browse. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 27:428-437. Varner, I. M., R. E. Latimore, D. M. Gauton, E. R. Doman, and D. I. Rasmussen. 1954. Big game range analysis, U. S. Forest Service, Intermountain Region, Ogden, Utah. 52 p. (mimeo.). Prepared by: Date: Harold R. Shepherd Principal Game Biologist July, 1955 Approved by: Richard N. Denney Project Leader Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief ��July, 1965 - 201 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO --~~~~~---------------Game Range Investigations W-lOl-R-6 Project No. Work Plan No. Job No. 3 3 Title of Job: Browse Transect Analysis and Application Period Covered: April 1, 1963 to March 31, 1964. Personnel: Richard N. Denney, HaroldR. Shepherd, and Bertram D. Baker, biologists. Dave Anderson, Victor Barnes, Olin Bray, Jack Capp, Roger Olson, and Bob Shanks,. student assistants. Cooperating Agency: U. S. Forest Service., ABSTRACT For the third summer on the Grande Mesa-Uncompahgre National Forest, and second on the Rio Grande and San Juan Forests, joint Department-Forest Service crews surveyed and analyzed big game winter ranges. A total of approximately 355,000 acres was examined through air photo type mapping and ground reconnaissance procedures. The San Juan crew spent 222 man-days afield in reading 221 browse transects and preparing 202 non-transected type write-ups. Acreage that was newly type mapped totalled nearly 135,000 acres. Wide distribution and heavy importance 'of the Mixed Browse vegetative type are discussed. Browse transect rating results generally showed low browse vigor, high browse densities, and high soil stability. The great abundance and wide distribution of oakbrush are noted as are the presence and 'relative abundance of other shrub species. Certain species have been chosen to be key most often for each game unit, either singly or in various combinations. Bitterbrush dominates by having been selected most consistently throughout. About 127,000 acres of winter ranges were type mapped on the Rio Grande National Forest in approximately 322 man-days of effort. Thirty-five browse condition and 67 paced condition (Parker) transects were read along with 242 general data write-ups that were prepared. Game units analyzed were 68, 76, 80, 81, and 82, with the major portion of the effort expended in unit 80. Browse ratings were generally low in all categories when all transect results �- 202 - were averaged together. Oakbrush distribution and importance in units 68 and 82 are discussed. Paced Parker transects produced higher ratings than in 1962 due probably to types being mostly on more favorable north and east exposures rather than the generally south and west sites visited in 1963. Excluding mapping that was redone in two game units, about 93,000 acres of winter ranges were type mapped by the 1963 Grand Mesa-Uncompahgre crew. Lack of territory considered to be key caused the establishment of only 24 browse condition transects. A total of 104 field man-days was used to accomplish type mapping and transect work. Recommendations: 1. It is recommended that the ~-inch and 2~inch scale maps be prepared. Those maps are prescribed for in the inter-agency procedures and are to be included in binder file folders by management unit. 2. Vegetative cover summaries and forage-game herd relationship briefs by unit should be prepared for unit folders. 3. The inter-agency big game range analysis committee should be reactivated to consider browse plant desirability rating changes and other possible revisions in procedures as are needed. �- 203 - BROWSE TRANSECT ANALYSIS AND APPLICATION Bertram D. Baker This report presents results of the third year of cooperative DepartmentU. S. Forest Service surveys that are being conducted in southwestern Colorado. Work on field phases in 1963 on three National Forests was continued where it had been interrupted in 1962. Field activities on the Gunnison National Forest had been completed in 1962. Little was accomplished as planned in 1963 on the office phase of map preparation. Finished vegetative type maps that were to have been supplied by the Forest Service were not completed and available by the end of the project segment. Transect data from Gunnison surveys have been summarized (Baker 1964) to the extent possible short of final report stages where co-ordination with mapwork is a necessity. Objectives: Of immediate concern is the direct evaluation of big game winter ranges in the San Juan, Rio Grande, and Grand Mesa-Uncompahgre National Forests. More specifically the following goals were pursued in 1963-64. 1. To determine the quantity and quality of big game winter ranges in the above mentioned National Forests and the state-controlled Billy Creek Management Area and vicinity. Coincidental with the survey will be the determination of key areas used by deer and elk. 2. To meet with regional and district field personnel in order to explain and demonstrate winter range analysis procedures and help increase the value and use of data from present surveys. Also, to instruct and assist these same people in browse production-utilization procedures in order to better assess annual impact of big game upon the land and vegetation. Interdepartmental Liaison: In keeping with a main job objective, a lecture was given to Conservation Officers and Aides and Staff Officers of the Southwest Region on aims, accomplishments, and procedures of cooperative big game range analysis surveys. Occasion of the talk was the Regional in-service school in Montrose on April 9, 1963. Mimeographed copies of the lecture outline were distributed through efforts by Region Manager C. E. Till. Field contacts were made with 'Southwest Region Officers and Aides at various times within the work period in connection with searches for information on or verification of big game winter distribution, in assisting our officers and cooperating agency personnel in determining pre- and post-use browse production and utilization, and in relaying current pertinent observations such as mortality and animal numbers from foot and vehicle reconnaissance. I also participated during one day (March 24, 1963) of a 2-day review session held by Ralph Hill for Southeast Region Area Supervisors and Staffmen~ Location of the discussions and demonstrations was Buena Vista. Additional gains there included the several suggestions of procedure changes which were recorded for future inter-agency consideration. Surveys Organization and Training: Planning for the summer field season was accomplished through informal short conferences with National Forest Wildlife Project Staff Assistants Chet Anderson, Ladd Frary, and Bob Pize1 of the �- 204 - San Juan, Grand Mesa-Uncompahgre, and Rio Grande Forests, respectively. Since this was the second year of surveys on two of the Forests, and third on the other, minimum effort was required to coordinate plans for activities. Initial training of student assistants hired for summer assignments was accomplished the week of June 10-14, 1963, by'Region 2 Forest Staffman Morley Brandborg, Milt Wright, and Ralph Gierisch. As was the case in 1962, training was done at White River Surveys Base Camp which, for this session, was on Trout Creek near the town of Oak Creek. Range Analyst Bob Wagner and Wildlife Staff Assistant Jack Arney of the Whi~e River National Forest, plus Department Biologists Ray Boyd and I, assisted the Staffmen with instruction and field practice and demonstrations that first week. In addition to schooling in vegetative type mapping, plant identification, and transect procedures given at Oak Creek, Student Assistants Dave Anderson and Jack Capp on assignment to the San Juan National Forest crew, Olin Bray and Victor Barnes on the Rio Grande National Forest survey, and Roger Olson who started on the Grand Mesa-Uncompahgre National Forest survey and ended up on the Rio Grande, all received critiques at various times by me as field work progressed in the summer. Crew-chiefs for cooperative surveys on the three Forests were Messrs. Anderson, Frary, and Pize1, who also received mention previously in the planning phase. Supervisory arid advisory aid by Department Biologist Harold Shepherd relative to San Juan and Grand Mesa-Uncompahgre crew personnel is gratefully acknowledged, as well as the time Hal spent on various office activities. Techniques Used: Inter-agency, agreed-upon procedures that were employed in 1962 were again used in 1963. Please refer to sections of reports on procedures by Denney (1962) and Baker (1964) for details if they are desired. The instructions are not repeated here because of the verbiage involved. Most frequently heard criticisms of procedures by crew-chiefs in 1963 were ones concerning shrub desirability ratings. In particular, a few of the more important species were believed to be rated too low. A good example of that was big sagebrush (Artemisia tridentata) where it Occurs in San Juan and Grand Mesa-Uncompahgre ranges in mixtures or pure stands. Generally the sage is adjacent to P-J types with or without forage and in amounts and mixtures that make it highly desirable. Rigidity in ratings was never 'intended by inter-agency committees since most ratings had been arrived at originally through considerable compromise. Perhaps the time has arrived when new thinking is desirable and indicates a need for reactivation of the aforementioned committee to include men with recent college training coupled with field experience. Findings: San Juan National Forest To begin with, a correction is in order in the 1962 total and game unit acreages (Baker 1964). An additional approximate 9,500 unreported acres were type mapped on air photos in unit 74 in 1962, bringing the totals covered for the unit to 114,000 acres and Forest to approximately 605,000 acres that year. �Table 1.--Summary of 221 browse condition transect ratings, San Juan National Forest winter ranges - Summer 1963. No. of Type Composition Density Vigor Soil Vegetative Transects Species Rating No. % No. % No. % No. % Associated Species Type Game Unit P,J,PP,Artr, Low 10 83 4 34 7 58 7 58 4 Chna,Chde,QUE, Ned. 2 17 7 58 2 17 4 34 Pera,TET 12 Sagebrush AME,Putr,Atca High 0 0 1 8 3 25 1 8 P,J,PP,A,Chde, Low 26 53 1 2 23 47 2 4 5 PRU,QUE,AME,SYM, Ned. 14 29 11 22 15 31 21 43 ROS,MAH,Pera,CHY, 49 Nixed Browse Artr.Putr,Cemo High 9 1837 76 11 22 26 53 CEA,Chna,Save 71 Low 0 0 0 0 7 50 0 0 6 Dolores PP,WF,QUE,SYM, Ned. 11 79 7 50 3 21 4 29 MAH,CEA,PRU,ROS, 14 Conifer Putr.AME,Artr High 3 21 7 50 4 29 10 71 Chna,Chde,Pera P,J,PP,Artr, Low 2 17 3 25 11 92 1 8 9 Cemo,QUE,Putr, Ned. 6 50 2 17 1 8 5 42 SYM,ROS,Chde 12 Pinon-Juniper Pera,ANE High 4 33 7 58 0 0 6 50 5 Nixed Browse 9 6 74 Hermosa Conifer 14 PP ,POP,QUE, SYM,AME,PRU, Cemo.ROS,Cefe PP,A,DF,WF, QUE,AME,ROS, MAH.SYM,CEA 9 Pinon-Juniper 4 Sagebrush 2 4 5 75 Animas River Nixed Browse 21 6 Conifer 10 P,J,PP,QUE, Cemo Low Ned. High Low Ned. High Low Ned. High Low Artr,Chna Med. High PP,P,J,QUE,AME, Low Putr,Artr,SYM, Med. Cemo.ROS.PRU High Low PP,QUE,Putr, Ned. Cemo ,MAR,SYM High 4 4 1 3 10 1 0 2 0 44 45 11 21 72 7 0 100 0 0 0 9 0 4 10 0 1 1 4 0 0 100 0 0 29 29 42 20 60 20 3 1 0 0 2 19 2 5 3 6 6 9 2 6 2 o o 0 1 3 5 1 7 6 2 11 33 56 7 50 43 ~OO 50 50 o o 0 0 75 25 4 100 4 o 0 0 o 100 0 o 0 Chde,Atca,SOL,ANT, AGR 3 15 37 48 Rhtr,Pera,MAH,Chna, Chde .CEA.POA.AGR.CAR o 100 o 28 72 o o o 9 91 20 50 30 o 16 4 1 7 1 2 76 19 5 70 10 20 o 9 o o 0 14 0 100 o 0 o 2 8 10 N 0 MAH,CHY,POA,CAR 100 PRU,Cemo,POA,CAR - 0 MAH,Rhtr,CEA 100 o 0 2 8 20 AME,Artr,PER,CEA 80 o \..." �Table 1.--Summary of 221 browse condition transect ratings, San Juan National Forest winter ranges _ Summer 1963. (Continued) Vegetative No. of Type CO!!!Eosition Density Vigor Soil Game Unit Type Transects Species Rating No. % No. % No. % No. % Associated Species 75 Animas 9 Low 1 12 5 63 8 100 4 50 River Pinon-Juniper 8 P,J,PP,QUE, Med. 4 50 1 12 0 0 3 38 Putr ,AME,MAH (Cont.) Artr,Cemo,SYM High 3 38 2 25 0 0 1 12 77 Piedra 5 Mixed Browse 19 PP,P,J,QUE,SYM, AMEzPutr 6 Conifer 25 9 Pinon-Juniper 22 PP,P,J,QUE,SYM, AME,Putr Low Med. High Low Med. High 3 1 15 1 3 21 16 5 79 4 12 84 0 5 14 5 17 3 0 26 74 20 68 12 12 3 4 21 3 1 63 16 21 84 12 4 4 6 9 1 8 16 21 32 47 4 32 64 P,J,PP,QUE,AME, Putr, Cemo ,Artr Low Med. High 1 8 13 5 36 59 6 13 3 27 59 14 20 2 0 91 9 0 9 10 3 41 45 14 PRU,ROS,MAH,Cemo, CEA,Rhtr,CRA,Sihy, CAR Cemo,PRU,Artr,CEA, Chde,MAH, Rhtr,PAH, Ferp, Bocu,Mumo, CAR, POA Sihy SYM,MAH,Atca,Ferp, Agsm,Kocr,MUH N 0 0) �- 207 - A field crew of three student assistants for the summer headed by San Juan Forest Wildlifer Chet Anderson spent 226 man-days in 1963 type mapping approximately 134,800 acres in game unit 71. Department ~io10gist Shepherd lent assistance and coordinated our interests by seeing to payroll time reports, expense accounts, and so forth, for Student Assistants Anderson and Capp in our employment. Student Assistant Larry Mullen was employed by the National Forest. Besides type mapping, the San Juan crew established and read a total of 221 browse condition transects. Eighty-seven transects were set-up in unit 71 in conjunction with other phases of the survey there. Air photo work from 1962 for units 74, 75, and 77 was checked for accuracy concurrently as 25, 43, and 66 transects were established, respectively, in the units. The Mixed Browse vegetative type (Type 5) apparently was the most frequently occurring game forage producing type on San Juan winter ranges (98 transects, Table 1). Thus, Type 5 undoubtedly is the key to big game herd maintenance in the'San Juan Basin. Coniferous aspects with browse forage in the understory (Type 6) had 63 transects read, ranking them 2nd to Type 5 in importance. Type 9 or Pinon-Juniper, and Sagebrush, Type 4, apparently are of secondary importance to Types 5 and 6, although a reminder must be made that until acreages are computed, a really firm basis for conclusions cannot be realized. The analysis of 135 transects from 1962 showed similar results in that vegetative types ranked the same in order of relative abundance and importance (Baker 1964). Table 2 sunnnarizes the ratings of the 221 transects. In it three figures are dominant. First, 63 percent of transects had low browse vigor ratings which is counterbalanced somewhat by the 116 or 53 percent high browse density ratings (the second dominant figure). The third conspicuous figure is the 115 or 52 percent high soil stability ratings which, coincides with what was found in 1962 and treated in some detail (Baker 1964). It would seem logical that, in general, improvement of browse vigor should be a primary goal of big game management in the San Juan area. In reality a less lofty objective would be more desirable because, in dealing with vigor, we could not be concerned with a more abstract portion of an, at times, quite nebulous subject. Table 2.--Summary of browse condition and soil stability ratings from 221 browse condition transects, all types and game units, San Juan National Forest winter ranges - Summer 1963. Rating High Medium Low % of Tot. Trans. No. No. Trans. % of Tot. No. Trans. % of Tot. CategorI 37 81 35 77 28 Browse Composition 63 53 116 34 76 13 29 Browse Density 17 37 20 44 63 140 Browse Vigor 52 115 32 71 16 35 Soil Stability �- 208 - A total of 202 non-transected type write-ups was preapred in game units 71, 74, 75, and 77 (Table 3). Most were for unit 71 where 121 forms were written. Approximately 25 each were prepared for types in the remaining three units. With time limitations preventing full use of browse condition transect procedures, considerable information was obtained from the survey by using the non-transected type form. Pellet group counts were made fairly consistently as types were checked and other observations were collected. Oakbrush (Quercus spp.) again was found to be the single most important shrub on game winter ranges in the San Juan-Dolores Basin. Oak is found so widely, in fact, that Types 1 (Grassland) and 4 were the only types where the plant was not used in type designations, and even that was not true in all cases of Type 4 areas. Shrubs variously associated with oak in major abundance are big sagebrush, serviceberry (Amelanchier spp.), bitterbrush (Purshia tridentata), fourwing saltbush (Atriplex canescens), snowberry (Symphoricarpos spp.), mountain mahogany (Cercocarpus montanus), chokecherry (Prunus spp.), squawapple (Peraphyllum ramosissimum), rose (Ros~ spp.), Fendler ceanothus (Ceanothus fendleri), Oregongrape (Mahonia repens), skunkbush (Rhus trilobata), greasewood (Sarcobatus vermiculatus), and hig and low rabbitbrushes (Chrysothamnus nauseosus, f. depressus). Some of the shrub species found in minor abundance in browse mixtures are smooth horsebrush (Tetradymia canescens), pachistima (Pachistima myrsinites), hawthorn (Crataegus spp.), Fendlerbrush (Fendlera rupicola), willow (Salix spp.). alder (Alnus spp.), joint fir (Ephedra spp.), currant (Ribes spp.), and little rabbitbrush (f. vicidiflorus) . Coniferous vegetative types (Types 6 and 9) containing understory browse forage occur quite frequently and have such tree species as ponderosa pine (Pinus ponderosa), pinon pine (Pinus edulis), junipers (Juniperus spp.), white fir (Abies concolor), and Douglas fir (Pseudotsuga menziesii) with ponderosa pine being the single most important species in abundance. Principally, the Broad-leaf Type (Type 10) has aspen (Populus tremuloides) as the dominant, but cottonwoods (Populus spp.) are found extensively on stream bottom sites. Aspen and the conifers are recorded in all types except in 1 or Grassland. Table 4 presents the frequency that shrub species happen to have been used as key species in evaluating the 221 browse condition transects. Striking patterns are evident immediately in that certain species seem to be representative for each game unit. Relative to this, unit 71 has big sagebrush and bitterbrush, unit 74 has oakbrush, unit 75 has almost equally the three species that are in 71 and 74 and mountain mahogany, and unit 77 has bitterbrush in very high key species occurrence. When type acreage analyses by unit become available, it might be interesting to run correlations between deer and/or elk herd production and shrub key species. Game kill figures could be used to represent production and acreages involving species could be enlarged to represent species in the correlation computations. �- 209 - Table 3.--Summary of non-transected type write-ups, San Juan National Forest winter ranges - Summer 1963. Number of Assoc. Species Type Species Write-ups Vegetative Type Game Unit Artr,Save,Agcr, BRO Artr,Chde,Chna, Atca,Save PP ,POP ,:P,J,QUE, AME,Putr,Cemo, SYM,Artr,Rhtr, Atca,Save 1 - Grassland 2 4 - Sagebrush 6 5 - Mixed Browse 35 6 - Conifer 45 PP,POP,QUE,SYM, Putr,AME,Cemo, Artr,Chde 9 - Pinon-Juniper 27 10 - Broad-leaf 5 UN-5 - Mixed Browse* 1 P,J,Cemo,Pera, QUE,Putr,SYM, AME,Artr,POA, YUC POP, SYM,AME, QUE,Feth Cemo,QUE,AME 5 - Mixed Browse 6 6 - Conifer 8 10 - Broad-leaf 14 5 - Mixed Browse 14 6 - Conifer 11 9 - Pinon-Juniper 4 10 - Broad-leaf 1 - Grass land 5 - Mixed Browse 2 1 71 Dolores 74 Hermosa 75 Animas River 77 10 6 - Conifer 9 9 - Pinon-Juniper 2 Piedra * PP,QUE,AME,SYM, Cemo,ROS PP,A,P,J,QUE, PRU, Cemo ,SYM, CEA A,PP,WF,DF,SYM, QUE,PRU,Feth Chde,Chna,POA QUE,TET,Gusa, SOL,Agsm,OPU ROS,MAH,POT,PRU, Chde,EPH,SLX, THA,ALN,SOL,Agsm, Agcr,Stco,Kocr, POA,Sihy,ANT,WYE, Basa,ERI,YUC ROS ,MAH,PRU, Chna, ACH, CEA ,WYE ,Basa , ERI,CAR,POA,Kocr, Sihy Rhtr,Chna,Chde, EPH,Ferp,SOL, Kocr,CAR,OPU ROS ,MAH,POA, Fear,CAR Cusa,Ferp PRU ,Rhtr ,Acla, Feth,POA AME ,MAH,ROS ,RIB, LAT, CAR,Agsrn, POA AME,POT,ROS,Juco, RUB,ERI,CAR,FES, POA PRU,Putr,Chde, Cemo, POA ,LUP PP,QUE,Artr, SYM,AME,Rhtr, MAH,ROS Putr ,Artr ,MAH, PP,P,J,DF,WF, ERO,ERI,POA,AGR, QUE ,AME ,SYM, Sihy,OPU Cemo,Cefe SYM,AME ,MAH,FES P,J,PP,Cerno, Artr,QUE AME,ROS,SYM,FES A,DF,QUE,SYM Agtr,HYM AGR,Artr Cemo,MAH,ROS,EPH, PP,P,J,QUE, CEA,Orhy,Kocr SYM,AME,Putr PP,P,J,QUE, SYM, AME,Cemo,MAH,PRU, CEA, Chvd ,CAR Putr SYM P,J,PP,QUE, Putr Cerno A type within a key area that receives such consistently prevent use. heavy snow cover to �- 210 - Table 4.--Frequency of shrubs designated as key species on 221 browse condition transects, by big game unit, San Juan National Forest winter ranges - Summer 1963. Ke~ SEecies Artr Mill Game Unit QUE Putr Cemo 7l-Dolores 74-Hermosa 75-Animas River 77-Piedra 10 22 13 4 30 0 10 51 4 3 9 8 38 0 9 3 49 91 24 Totals Chde Save Totals 3 0 2 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 87 25 43 66 50 5 1 1 221 Rio Grande National Forest The Rio Grande cooperative crew was led by Bob Pizel, National Forest Wildlife Staffman, and consisted of two student assistants for the full summer, another one for most of the summer, and a fourth for approximately the last half of the summer, Assistants Olin Bray and Vic Barnes, crew members the entire summer, and Roger Olson, on duty for the second half, were employed by the Department. Assistant Don Tomberlin was in Forest Service employment until September. District Rangers, Assistant District Rangers, and Forest Staff Assistants made variable short-term appearances on the field crew. I coordinated Department interests and spent several days type mapping and performing survey duties with crew members. In 1963 approximately 322 man-days were spent afield and in field-office work type mapping 127,000 acres of winter ranges. Excluded from the latter total are about 3 sections in unit 82 that were done by me. Game units involved were numbers 68, 76, 80, 81, and 82. A total of 35 browse condition and 67 paced condition (Parker) transects were established and read. Frequently used were the non-transected type write-up procedure and form, with 242 of the latter being prepared. Browse condition transects were established and read most frequently in Mixed Browse types which is a change from what had occurred in 1962 surveys (Baker 1964). Actually, the foregoing happenstance does not materially change the picture for the Rio Grande winter ranges when interpreted on the whole. As can be seen in Table 5, highly desirable browse species were found to be lacking. That jibes with 1962 findings as does the fact that browse composition, density, and vigor ratings (Table 6), though not fitting closely, still are preponderantly low. Except for the northeastern part of unit 68, and northern portion of unit 82, the San Luis Valley winter ranges must be considered to have extremely low capacity for deer, and until we learn more of their requirements, very possibly for elk, too. The most important finding in 1963 was the recording of distribution of oakbrush in unit 68 and 82 winter ranges. Despite classification as an intermediate species in desirability, having poor growth characteristics over much of its distribution, and of relatively limited distribution in units �Table 5.--Surnmary of 35 browse condition transect ratings, Rio Grande National Forest winter ranges - Summer 1963. Soil Vigor Com:eosition Density Type Vegetative No. of % Associated Species No. % % No. No. % No. Rating Species Transects Type Game Unit 0 0 1 100 0 0 100 1 Low 4 Chvd,CHY* 100 1 0 0 100 1 0 0 Med. Artr,Mumo,Fear 1 Sagebrush 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 High 0 0 67 2 0 0 100 3 Low 5 SYM,ROS,Rhtr,Cemo, 33 1 0 0 67 2 0 0 Med. QUE, CHY~'<' ,Mumo, 3 Mixed Browse 68 67 Chvd 33 2 1 33 1 0 0 High CAR Saguache 0 0 0 0 100 2 100 Low 2 2 6 SYM,Chvd,Juco 50 1 50 1 0 0 0 a Med. DF,PP,Artr,QUE 2 Conifer 50 1 50 1 0 0 0 0 High 0 0 100 1 100 1 100 1 Low 5 Chpa,Teca 100 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 Med. RIB,Rhtr,Chvd 1 Mixed Browse 76 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 High Creede 16 2 84 10 58 7 50 6 Low DF,ROS,Cemo,RIB, 5 84 Chvd, HOL,MAH, PRU, 8 10 1 42 5 42 5 SYM,CHY*,AME,POT, Med. 12 Mixed Browse 0 Aruv 0 8 1 0 0 8 1 High Mufi,Bogr,ORY, Mumo 80 S. Fork Rio Grande 6 Conifer 9 Pinon-Juniper 81 Conejos 3 2 PP,Cemo,RIB Fear P,J,Cemo,Bogr, Fear 5 Mixed Browse 2 PP,Cemo,RIB, SYMIAgsmlBogr 6 Conifer 2 DF,WF,PP,Cemo ORY 1 P ,J ,Cemo ,CHY~'<' 9 Pinon-Juniper 5 QUE,Cemo,SYM, 6 Mixed Browse 82 CHY;'~ ,Bogr Sand Dunes "i'< CRY = Various mixtures of Chrysothamnus. Low Med. High Low Med. High Low Med. High Low Med. High Low Med. High Low Med. High 0 3 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 5 1 0 0 100 0 50 50 0 50 50 0 50 50 0 0 100 0 84 16 0 3 0 0 2 0 0 0 2 0 2 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 4 100 0 0 100 0 0 0 100 0 100 0 0 100 0 0 16 16 68 3 0 0 2 0 0 1 1 0 0 2 0 1 0 0 1 3 2 100 0 C 100 0 0 50 50 0 0 100 0 100 0 0 16 50 34 0 2 1 1 0 1 0 2 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 2 3 0 67 Befe,SYM,ROS 33 50 0 CHY*,SYM,RIB,Rhtr 50 0 100 AME,Chvd,ROS,CHY* 0 0 50 Aruv,Juco,Chvd,RIB 50 0 100 Chvd,RIB 0 16 34 Chvd,Hodu,ROS,Chna 50 ]" ; . N l-' l-' �- 212 - Paced condition transects and ratings are summarized in Tables 8 and 9 with Grassland types again correctly receiving the lion's share of transects. A scattered few transects were read in Types 2, 4, 5, 6, and 9, too. Ratings averaged higher than those found in 1962, due probably to the factor of exposure. Field work in 1962 was mostly on drier south and west exposures compared with more moist north and east orientated areas surveyed in 1963. Non-transected type write-up forms were used to describe several different types on many occasions. With rare exception, pellet group count transects were read, and data were recorded on the aforementioned forms. A total of 134 forms were prepared for Type 6, or conifer, areas making them the predominant recipient of reconnaissance techniques. Write-ups were made less frequently in Aspen, Pinon-Juniper, Mixed Browse, Rabbitbrush, Grassland, and Meadow types (Table 10). Aside from recording oakbrush distribution, in part, and recogn1z1ng the plant's importance in units 68 and 82, salient findings are few from the 1963 surveys. Detailed unit analyses of type acreages will have to wait until maps are made available by the Forest Service. Key area delineations also are in need of final action on all Rio Grande Forest areas. Thus, much remains still to be done on this Forest, such as on the other Forests in southwestern Colorado, in order that the job can be considered to be at all near completion. Table 8.--Summary of vegetation condition and soil stability ratings from 67 paced transects, all types and game units, Rio Grande National Forest winter ranges - Summer 1963. Rating Very Poor Poor Fair Good Excellent No. of % of No. of % of No. of % of No. of % of No. of % of Category Trans. Tot. Trans. Tot. Trans. Tot. Trans. Tot. Trans. Tot. Forage Density and Composition Veg. Condition Soil Stability 13 15 10 20 22 15 22 20 22 Grand Mesa-Uncompahgre 32 30 32 16 16 20 24 24 30 National Forest 8 8 9 12 12 13 8 8 6 12 12 10 Total acreage that was surveyed on adjacent to lands of the Grand MesaUncompahgre National Forest approximated 93,500. Subtotals by unit are 18,500 acres in 42, 10,000 in 61, 48,000 in 65, 7,500 in 66, and 9,500 in 70. Included in the subtotals are portions of units 61 and 65 that were redone either because of lack of air photos and/or time for adequate investigation in 1962. Crew composition was Student Assistant Robert Shanks for the summer season, Student Assistant Roger Olson for one and one-half months, Forest Wildlife Staffman Ladd Frary as full-time crew boss, and Harold Shepherd as coordinating �- 213 - Table 6.--Suromary of browse condition and soil stability ratings from 35 browse condition transects, all types and game units, Rio Grande National Forest winter ranges - Summer 1963. Ratin High Medium Low % of Tot. Trans. No. '/~ of Tot. Trans. of Tot. No. % Trans. No. Category Browse 3 1 37 13 60 21 Composition 14 32 5 11 54 19 Browse Density 14 5 23 8 63 22 Browse Vigor 26 63 9 22 11 4 Soil Stability 68 and 82, oakbrush containing ranges there must be rated so much better than any other place for deer in the San Luis Valley that the contrast is most appreciated by having been in on field surveys. Deer kill records in recent past years substantiate the value of oak to those ranges in comparison with the remainder of the Rio Grande drainage in Colorado. In fact, no other San Luis Valley district has been able to support post- or pre-season deer hunts such as the upper valley has done. Table 7 shows oakbrush being recorded as a key species second in frequency of occurrence only to mountain mahogany on browse condition transects. Of interest from the Table, also, is the appearance of snowberry as a key species on three occasions and big sagebrush twice. Poor composition more than anything raised snowberry's value and influenced the use of it by deer •. Limited sagebrush distribution near Poncha Pass perhaps deserves some mention in that the species lends variety albeit serving as a target of Federal shrub control projects and possible eventual relegation to insignificance. Table 7.--Frequency of shrubs designated as key species on 35 browse condition transects, by game unit, Rio Grande National Forest winter ranges - Sunnner 1963. Key SEecies Totals AME PRU Artr SYM Chvd QUE Cemo Game Unit 6 0 0 2 0 0 3 1 68-Saguache I 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 76-Creede 80-S. Fork 17 1 1 0 3 0 0 12 Rio Grande 5 0 0 0 0 1 0 4 81-Conejos 6 0 0 0 0 1 4 1 82-Sand Dunes Totals 18 7 3 3 2 I I 35 �Table 9.--Summar~ of results of 67 Eaced condition transectsz Rio Grande National Forest winter ranBes - Summer 1963. Number Forage Density Vegetative Soil Vegetative of Type and ComEosition Condition Stability Type Game Unit Transects Species Rating No. Percent No. Percent No. Percent Associated Species 68 Saguache 76 Creede 80 S. Fork Rio Grande 1 Grassland CHY'*,MuH, Kocr,Fear, Mumo 3 4 Rabbitbrush 1 1 Grassland 16 5 Mixed Browse 1 1 Grassland 25 Poor 1 Poor!0 Fair 0 Fair!1 Good0 Excellent 1 CHY'*,Mumo Poor0 Poor!Fear 1 Chpa,CHY*, V. Poor 1 SYM,Fear, Poor 0 Poor!Mufi,Mumo 1 Stco,Agsm, Fair3 Fair!Feth,CAR, 3 FES**,Pofr, Good2 MUH*** Good 0 Good+ 1 Excellent 4 Exce llent+ 1 SYM,RIB, Poor 1 CHY'* Fair 0 A,CHY*, V. Poor 5 V. Poor!- 1 RIB ,Mumo , Fear,Kocr, Poor2 Bogr,CAR, Poor 3 Mufi,MUH***, Poor!2 Dapa Fair0 Fair 5 Fa Lr+ 2 Good0 Good 3 Good+ 1 Excellent 1 33 0 0 34 0 33 0 100 6 0 6 19 19 13 0 6 25 6 100 0 20 4 8 12 8 0 20 8 0 12 4 4 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 3 3 2 0 1 4 1 1 0 5 1 2 3 2 0 5 2 0 3 1 1 33 0 0 34 0 33 0 100 6 0 6 19 19 13 0 6 25 6 100 0 20 4 8 12 8 0 20 8 0 12 4 4 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 5 1 1 2 5 0 0 1 3 1 3 6 2 1 5 1 2 1 0 0 0 33 34 0 33 0 100 0 0 6 6 0 32 6 6 CAR,JUN ,STI ,ANT Artr,B1tr Arfr,ROS,ANT,LUP, Bogr,Dapa,STI,JUN, Mufi 13 31 0 0 100 12 4 12 24 8 4 20 4 8 4 0 0 Argr,Agsm Chvd,ROS,SYM,POT, ARE,Agsm,Arfr,ERI, JUN, STI ,POA (\J I-' .l:"" �Table 9.--Summary of results of 67 paced condition transects, Rio Grande National Forest winter ranges - Summer 1963. ~Continued2 Soil Vegetative Forage Density Number Stabilit:y Condition and ComEosition Type of Vegetative No. Percent No. Percent Associated Species Percent No. Rating Species Type Transects Game Unit TRI,Ac1a 100 1 100 1 100 1 Excellent Pofr,POA, 1 2 CAR JUN Meadow 37 4 46 5 46 5 P ,J,CHY~\-, V. Poor 9 1 9 1 9 1 PoorRIB, CAR, 9 1 9 1 9 1 Poor Agsm,Fear, Chvd,Eu1a,Kocr, 0 0 9 1 9 1 Poor+ Bogr,YUC 11 4 80 Mumo,POA,Arfr,ERO 9 1 0 0 0 0 FairRabbitbrush S. Fork 27 3 9 1 9 1 Fair Rio Grande 9 1 9 1 9 1 Fair+ 0 0 9 1 9 1 Good+ Chvd,Agsm,YUC 0 0 100 2 100 2 V. Poor P,J,CHY*, 2 9 100 2 0 0 0 0 Poor Bogr Pinon-Juniper 50 2 50 2 50 2 PoorCHY*,Pofr, 0 0 25 1 25 1 Poor Agsm,CAR Chvd,Taof, Bogr, 0 0 25 1 25 1 Poor+ 4 1 Fear,STI,POA 25 1 0 0 0 0 Fair Grassland 81 25 1 0 0 0 0 GoodConej os Chvd, CAR 100 2 50 1 50 1 CHY~\,Bogr , V. Poor 2 4 0 0 50 1 50 1 PoorAgsin Rabbitbrush Arfr,Fear 0 0 100 1 100 1 PoorPP,CHY*, 1 6 100 1 0 0 0 0 Poor Bogr Conifer CRY = Various mixtures of Chrysothamnus. * FES = Fear and Feth in association. ** *** MUH = Various mixtures of Mufi and Mumo. N I-' \.J1 �- 216 - Table 10.--Summary of non-transected type write-ups, Rio Grande National Forest winter ranges - Summer 1963. Number of Game Unit Vegetative Type Write-ups Type Species Assoc. Species 68 Saguache 76 Creede 6 - Conifer 8 10 - Broad-leaf 2 - Meadow 5 - Mixed Browse 2 1 4 6 - Conifer 7 10 - Broad-leaf 10 1 - Grassland 4 4 - Rabbitbrush 2 5 - Mixed Browse 8 6 - Conifer 92 9 - Pinon-Juniper 23 10 - Broad-leaf 33 80 S. Fork Rio Grande DF,PP,A,QUE, WF,LP,ROS,RIB Juco A,DF,Aruv,BRO LP,ROS,Juco CHY* ,Pofr ,Mufi , SYM,RIB BS,SYM,RIB, DF,PP,ROS,Chpa, Fear Rhtr,CHY*,Chvd, Bogr,Mumo BS,A,DF,BP,RIB, LP,ES,WF,ROS Juco,SYM,Shca, Mumo Fear A,ES,BS,BP,SYM, DF,CHY*,Dapa, THE,Aruv,Juco SLX Shca,Feth,BRO, Fear BP,A,CHY*,RIB, J,ES,PP,DF,POT JUN,CAR,Dapa Agsm,Mumo,Fear CHY~"', SYM, CAR, TET,Fear,POA, Agsin,Bogr Dapa P,J,SYM.,Cemo, DF,PP,ROS,Cefe, RIB, C®'" ,PRU , HOL Agsm,Bogr,Fear DF,A,PP,WF,ES, P,J,BP,BS,CHY*, LbP,Juco,Cemo Cefe, LUP ,Acgl THE,Aruv,HOL, SYM.,RIB,ROS,MAH, AME,BLE,POA, Dapa,Kocr,MUH***, VAC,Thmo,Fear, Mumo Shca PP,DF,A,Atca, P,J,Chvd,Cemo, CHY~'" ,SYM, RIB, Eula,CAR,OPU Agsin,MUH)~'*,YUC, Bogr,Mumo,Fear A,BS,DF,ES,BP, LbP,WF,PP,J, Juco,THE,ROS,MAH, RIB,PRU,Acla, A ruv ,SYM,Mumo , POA Bran,Feth,Fear, FES~h'" ,LUP ,BRO, Thmo,Shca �- 217 - Table 10.--Summary of non-transected type write-ups, Rio Grande National Forest winter ranges - Summer 1963. (continued) Vegetative Game Unit 81 Type Number of Write-ups ** CRY FES MUH Species A,DF,RIB,Chvd, Arfr,Sihy 5 CRY* ,Agsm,Fear POA,CAR,Bogr 5 - Mixed Browse 6 - Conifer 1 22 J,HOL RIB,SYM,Agsm PP,A,DF,WF,Cemo,' BS,ES,LbP,J, Juco,RIB,Agsm, ROS,CRY*,Aruv, Fear MAH,SYM,Shca, Artr,BER,THE 9 - Pinon-Juniper 3 10 - Broad-leaf 12 6 - Conifer 5 TOTAL * Assoc. 4 - Rabbitbrush Conejos 82 Sand Dunes Type Species = Various mixtures P,J,PP,CRY*, Bogr A,ES,WF,BS,PP, DF ,Juco,Aruv, Shca,SYM,Cemo, THE, BRO, FES~"*, Fear CAR DF,LbP,WF,A DF,HOL,OPU, Fear BP,Chna ES,Juco,Acgl, Cemo,RIB,HOL 242 of Chrysothamnus. = Fear and Feth in association. = Mumo and Mufi in association. Department Biologist. A total of 104 man-days were spent on field phases ofsurveys. Bob Shanks also worked in the Forest Supervisor's Office in Delta for 10 days on maps and mapping. Of 24 browse condition transects established and read in units 61, 62, 65, and 70, five were in Sagebrush, seven were in Mixed Browse, 11 were in PinonJuniper, and one was in Conifer (Table 11). As had been the case in 1962, transects were distributed over such a wide geographical differential that rating summaries perhaps do not have much meaning. Table 12 does make an attempt to categorize the Forest winter ranges, however, in the broadest of terms. Actually, the big job was in verifying the lack of key areas on Forest lands, something previously suspected. Big sagebrush was used as a key species frequently enough to reaffirm its primary forage plant position on deer and elk winter ranges (Table 13). Big sagebrush-appeared as key on nine of 19 transects in unit 65. Results for the other units perhaps are not very conclusive since transects were located, generally, for purposes of filling gaps in previous field work. �Table 11.--Summary of 24 browse condition transec~s, Grand Mesa-Uncompahgre National Forest winter ranges - Summer 1963. Soil Density Vigor Type ComEosition No. of Vegetative % No. % No. % No. No. % Associated Species .Rat Lng Species Transects Type Game Unit 5 Mixed Browse 61 W. Side Uncompahgre 6 Conifer 2 QUE,Artr,SYM 1 PP,Cemo 1 QUE,Artr 62 5 Mixed Browse E. Side Uncompahgre 4 Sagebrush 5 P,J,Artr,AME CHY 65 Alpine 5 Mixed Browse 3 AME,Artr,Cemo 9 Pinon-Juniper 11 P ,J,QUE,AME, Artr,Cemo 70 5 San Miguel Mixed Browse 1 P,J,QUE Low Med. High Low Med. High Low Med. Hf.gh Low Med. High Low Med. High Low Med. High Low Med. High 2 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 2 3 0 0 0 3 3 2 6 0 0 1 100 0 0 0 100 0 100 0 0 40 60 0 0 0 100 27 18 55 0 0 100 0 2 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 4 0 0 3 0 7 4 0 0 1 0 0 100 0 100 0 0 100 0 0 20 80 0 0 100 0 64 36 0 0 100 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 4 1 0 3 0 0 11 0 0 1 0 0 50 50 0 100 0 0 100 0 0 80 20 0 100 0 0 100 0 0 100 0 0 0 2 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 2 3 0 0 3 0 2 8 1 0 1 0 0 100 CHY,Cemo, ROS,MAH 0 0 100 QUE,MAH 0 0 100 AME,SYM 0 40 60 SYM,Cemo,PER 0 0 100 QUE,SYM,Ferp 0 18 73 CHY,Atco,SYM,PER, 9 Eu1a,Ferp 0 100 AME,Artr 0 N I-' 0.1 �Fig. 5. Un sprayed rabbitbrush foliage. plant having 100 percent Fig. 6. Root system of unsprayed rabbitbrush plant having 100 percent foliage showing upper limit of live lateral roots (opposite pencil) as being four inches below ground surface. �- 219 - Table 12.--Summary of browse condition and soil stability ratings from 24 browse condition transects, all types and game units, Grand MesaUncompahgre National Forest winter ranges - Summer 1963. Ratin Low Medium High Category NO'.Trans. % of Tot. No. Trans. % of Tot. No. Trans. % of Tot. Browse Composition Browse Density Browse Vigor Soil Stability 8 10 .22 4 33 42 92 17 6 14 25 58 2 8 o o 19 79 1 10 42 o o 4 Table l3.--Frequency of shrubs being designated as key species on 24 browse condition transects, by game unit, Grand Mesa-Uncompahgre National Forest winter ranges - Summer 1963. Game Unit 61 - W. Side Uncompahgre 62 - E. Side Uncompahgre 65 - Alpine 70 - San Miguel Total Artr Cemo QUE S ecies AME 1 1 1 0 o 9 0 10 4 ·Atca Total 0 o 3 1 0 o 1 5 1 19 1 o o 0 o 1 6 2 5 1 24 REFERENCES CITED Baker, Bertram D. 1964. Jan., pp. 87-106. Game Research R~pt., Colo Game, Fish and Parks Dept., Denney, Richard N. 1962. Federal Aid Quarterly Report. Dept., April, pp. 52-96. Prepared by: Bertram D. Baker Prin. Game Biologist Date: July, 1965 Approved by: Colo. Game & Fish Richard N, Denney Project Leader �Fig. 7. Rabbitbrush plant treated with 2,4-D having 50 percent foliage recovery. 3 3 2 G Fig. 8. Root system of rabbitbrush plant having 50 percent foliage recovery showing lateral roots were killed by 2,4-D to a l2-inch depth. Live lateral roots were found below pencil. �Fig. 9. Rabbitbrush plant treated with 2,4-D having 25 percent foliage recovery. 2 Fig. 10. Root system of rabbitbrush plant having 25 percent foliage recovery showing lateral roots were killed by 2,4-D to a l7-inch depth (opposite pencil). �Fig. 11. Rabbitbrush plant treated with 2,4-D having ten percent foliage recovery. Fig. 12. Root system of rabbitbrush plant having ten percent foliage recovery showing lateral roots were killed by 2,4-D to a 24-inch depth (opposite pencil). ��July, 1965 - 225 - JOB COMPLETION RESEARCH S ta te of 4 ----------~----------- Title of Job: Chemical Covered: SEGMENT Game Range Investigations Experimental Range Revegetation and Developmen t W-lOl-R-6 Work plan No. Period PROJECT COLORADO Project No. REPORT Job No. 5 control of rabbitbrush. June 1, 1963 through March 31, 1964. ABSTRACT A study was initiated in 1962 to determine which factors were most important in killing rubber rabbitbrush when sprayed with 2,4-D. The factors studied were: air temperature, soil temperature, relative humidity, soil moisture, carbohydrate content of rabbitbrush roots, rate of carbohydrate translocation, twig length, and rate of twig elongation. The results of one treatment of 2,4-D indicate that only two factors, carbohydrate content and rate of carbohydrate translocation, have a significant influence upon the susceptibility of rabbitbrush to 2,4-D. Additional factors found to be important were soil moisture and twig length. Although the combined effect of all factors upon rabbitbrush mortality was statistically significant, they accounted for only 33 percent of the variation in mortality. This indicates that additional factors were responsible for killing rabbitbrush. The highest average kill of rabbitbrush was obtained on July 17 which coincided with a seasonal increase of carbohydrates in the roots. The relationship between each factor and rabbitbrush mortality at each date of spraying is presented in the text, as well as other observations made during the study. Objective: To determine the effect of certain environmental, physiological, and phenological factors on the susceptibility of rubber rabbitbrush to 2,4-D. Techniques 1. Used: Field procedures were described in the Colorado Game Research Report, Jan. 1964, pp. 107-111. A soil analysis is presented in the current report. �- 226 - 2. Survival counts were conducted in 1963 to determine the number of rabbitbrush plants killed and to observe the response of live plants to 2,4-D. Live plants were resprayed in 1963 to compare the effects of the same environmental, physiological, and phenological factors on rabbitbrush mortality when treated two consecutive years. 3. Statistical analyses were made on th8 data collected of study and are presented in this report. from one year 4. The review of literature was completed and submitted ado Game, Fish, and Parks Department for publication report. to the Coloras a special 5. Two additional study areas were established to compare the effect of different herbicides and rates of application upon rubber rabbitbrush. The herbicides used on these areas were Tordon, Kuron (Silvex), 2,4-D and 2,4-DP. Recommendations: Field work and analyses of data will be completed this year so that recommendations can be made as to the most effective time to spray rabbitbrush in Colorado. This knowledge should be incorporated in future efforts to control rubber rabbitbrush with 2,4-D. The experiment, comparing different herbicides, should be continued to determine which is the most effective on rabbitbrush. �- 227 CHEMICAL - CONTROL OF RABBITBRUSH Donald G. Smith Introduction The Colorado Game, Fish, and Parks Department is interested in the revegetation of certain rangeland in northwestern Colorado in order 'to provide more desirable forage for the White River deer herd. Over-utilization of this range in the past has resulted in the invasion of undesirable vegetation, particularly rabbitbrush (Chrysothamnus spp.), which provides little forage value to the deer. Rabbitbrush is a difficult shrub to eradicate because of its resprouting habit and control efforts have usually been confined to trail-and-error methods. Experiments in Oregon by Hyder, et ale (1962), have shown that rabbitbrush can be effectively controlled by ~4-D only when certain environmental, physiological, and phenological conditions are favorable. This study was set up to find the quantitative effect of certain factors on rabbitbrush mortality when sprayed with 2,4-D, and to determine if additional factors were working. Separate studies were made to determine the response of rubber rabbitbrush (Chrysothamnus nauseosus (Pallas Nutt.) to different herbicides applied at various rates in order to find the most effective herbicide. This report is divided into three parts: (1) The effect of factors on the susceptibility of rabbitbrush to 2,4-D, (2) follow-up studies during 1963, and (3) comparison of the response of rabbitbrush to different herbicides and herbicidal rates. Part I. The effect of factors on the susceptibility of rabbitbrush to 2,4-D. This section reports on the results of spraying 2,4-D (2,4-dichlorophenoxyacetic acid) on rubber rabbitbrush in 1962. The study area is located 29 miles southwest of Meeker, Colorado, in Section 9, TIS, R 98 W, 6th P.M. Spraying was done on 10 different dates on 90 plots and environmental, physiological, and phenological factors measured at each treatment. Survival counts were made in 1963 to determine rabbitbrush mortality. These procedures were described in the previous job completion report. The factors measured included: air temperature; relative humidity; soil temperature; soil moisture within one, two, and three foot depths; carbohydrate content of lateral roots; and twig length. Two additional factors, computed from specific measurements, were relative rate of carbohydrate translocation, and relative rate of twig elongation. Data collected were transferred from field forms to two separate summary sheets, one to record average values for each treatment date and the other to record individual values for each plot. Average values for each factor on the treatment dates are presented in Table 1. These data were used to construct graphs (Figures 1-4) by plotting mortality and factor values against date of spraying. Although these graphs fail to provide an adequate test, they do show the relationship between the factors and rabbitbrush mortality. Fairly definite seasonal patterns are exhibited by soil temperature, soil moisture, twig length, and carbohydrate content of lateral roots. The highest average rabbitbrush kills were obtained on July 17. �Table 1.--Environmenta1, physiological, and phenological factor averages, and mortality, by treatment date. Time Rate Rate of Twig Trans1oof of ReI. Soil Soil Soil Soil ClIO Air Spraying Treatment Mortality Temp. Humid. Temp. Moist.1 Moist.2 Moist.3 Content Length Growth cation X9 XI0 Date X8 Y X7 X5 X6 X3 X4 Xl X2 May 3 52.34 78 38 43 6.31 5.83 4.55 9.2 O. .0 -.076-}J 1-2 p.m. May 17 63.27 45 45 38~ 6.06 5.03 4.39 8.1 O. .0 -.0762 6:30-7:30 a.m. June 2 63.06 69 45 49 4.76 4.75 4.23 7.1 1.36 .1045 -.0646 6-9 a.m. June 15 64.61 48 40 50 4.46 4.92 3.94 7.0 2.32 .0736 -.0090 5-8 a.m. July 2 64.46 42 32 58 4.65 4.62 4.50 7 •1 4.73 .1420 .0072 11 a.m.1:40 p.m. July 17-18 80.28 71 36 58 2.69 3.50 3.67 7.0 6.21 .0987 -.0096 6-7 p.m. and 7-9 a.m . August 1 64.53 87 40 56 3.25 3.85 3.74 8.0 10.45 .2826 .0683 7 :45-10 a.m. August 16 54.76 71 40 57 2.60 3.23 3.80 10.5 10.74 .0193 •1667 6-9:40 a.m . August 31 49.12 68 44 54 2.72 2.92 3.46 10.7 11.75 .0667 .0142 6:30-12:30 a.m. Sept. 15 39.04 74 25 53 2.81 3.18 3.85 13.1 16.62 .3249 .1578 8 a.m.-1 p.m. 1/ Assumed rate between April 17-May 3 from projection ba,ck. N i'~ co �- 229 - In order to obtain a more reliable analysis, the data from the general summary sheet were analyzed statistically by the following methods: (1) simple regression, (2) simple correlation, and (3) multiple regression and correlation. Many of these analyses were made by Mr. David Bowden, graduate student, Department of Mathematics and Statistics, Colorado State University, on the IBM 1620 Computer. Simple Regression Analysis Simple regression analysis is designed to examine the relationship between variable Y (rabbitbrush mortality) and variable X (individual factors). Before choosing the most appropriate statistical test, it was necessary to determine the shape of the relationship between these variables. This was done by plotting each factor value against mortality on individual graphs. The relationship between individual factors and mortality was computed from the following regression equation: Y = a + bX + e Where: rabbitbrush mortality Y a = Y intercept or value of Y where X = 0 b = slope of the regression line or amount each unit change in X X = value of the factor chosen e = a random variable with mean zero the line changes for The values for the regression coefficients (a and b) were computed and the predicted values of Y determined. Then the estimated line of regression was drawn through the points on the graph to show the shape and direction of the relationship. Each factor had a linear or straight line relationship with mortality although the scatter of points around line varied considerably. The scatter of points about the line indicates the dependence of mortality on the factor involved, e.g., if the dependence is great, the points lie close to the line. According to this test, rabbitbrush mortality was most dependent upon carbohydrate content of lateral roots and twig length. Simple Correlation Analysis Simple correlation analysis provides a means of describing this dependence as a numerical value which is called the correlation coefficient (r). As the correlation coefficient approaches -lor +1, it indicates a higher correlation between variables. A negative or inverse correlation indicates that one variable decreases as the other increases. Table 2 shows the correlation coefficients for each variable which indicates that five of the factors are inversely correlated with mortality. Only four factors were found to be significantly correlated with rabbitbrush mortality at the assigned five percent level. These were: (1) carbohydrate content of lateral roots, (2) twig length, (3) soil moisture in the first foot of soil, and (4), soil moisture in the second foot of soil. �Table 2.--Correlations factors. between individual factors and mortality and significant Correlation Coefficients (r) Individual Factors Xl = Air temperature (0 F) interactions between Significant* Independent Factor Interactions -.124 -XS, +XS X2 = Relative humidity (%) .114 -X7. -XS. -X9 X3 = Soil temperature (0 F) .123 -X4. -XS' -X6. +XS. +XlO X4 = Soil moisture 0 - 12 inches .231* -X3. +XS, +X6• -X7• -XS' -X10 Xs = Soil moisture 12 - 24 inches ,210* -Xl. -X3. +X4• +X6' -X7. -XS' -X1O X6 = Soil moisture 24 - 36 inches .16S -X3' +X4• +XS [\J I.JJ a X7 = Carbohydrate roots (%) content of lateral I -. 402~'c* -X2' -X4' -XS' +XS' +X9• +X10 Xs = Twig length (inches) -.36Sirlc +Xl• -X2. +X3• -X4' -XS' +X7• +X9' +X10 X9 = Relative rate of twig elongation (inches per day) -.137 -X2' +X7' +XS' +X10 X10= Relative rate of carbohydrate translocation (percent per day) - .137 +X3' -X4' -XS' +X7. +XS' +X9 ** * Significant Significant at the one percent level. at the five percent level. + Direct relationship Inverse relationship �- 231 - In any biological study, it may be assumed that few factors are independent and that individual factors usually reflect the influence of other factors. With this in mind, the correlations between the factors studied were determined in order to find which factors were interacting. Significant interactions are presented in Table 2. The minus signs refer to an inverse relationship. This table shows that each factor has at least two interactions with other factors and that the four factors having the highest correlation with rabbitbrush mortality also have the highest number of interactions. These interactions may be masking the true relationship between rabbitbrush mortality and the individual factors. Therefore, the data were subjected to further analysis. Multiple Regression Analysis Multiple regression analysis is an extension of simple regression analysis, but can be used to determine the combined effect of all factors on rabbitbrush mortality. This method has the advantage of considering the effects caused by the interactions resulting in a more reliable evaluation of the relationship between mortality and each factor. First, a relationship between each factor and mortality is set up and the "criterion of least squares" applied. This results in a number of equations, one per variable, which were used to solve for partial regression coefficients and standard errors. The linear multiple regression model used was: Where, Y = rabbitbrush mortality bo= a constant value bl= the partial regression coefficient XI= the independent variable or factor eij= random variables, normally distributed common variance with mean zero and The procedures used to solve for the bls were from the "Stepwise Multiple Linear Regression Analysis for the IBM 1620", a program available at the Statistical Laboratory at Colorado State University. In this method, the relative importance of a particular factor is estimated by the portion of total sum of squares of Y accounted for by the factor after the sums of squares of the previous factors have been discounted. By reducing the sum of squares, the error variance of mortality is reduced. One variable at a time is entered into the regression model until the variable which gives the greatest reduction in sum of squares is determined. This factor is combined with the factor giving the second greatest reduction, these combined with the factor giving the third largest reduction, etc., until all factors have been tested. Therefore, this method not only ranks the factors according to their importance, but identifies the factor with which to begin the analysis. The results of the "stepwise" multiple regression analysis are presented in Table 3. �- 232 - Table 3.--Relative contribution of the factors to variation in rabbitbrush mortality as estimated by multiple regression analysis. Sum of Squares Mean Squares Independent Factor Accounted For of Residual F Value Carbohydrate content of roots Rate of carbohydrate translocation Soil moisture o - 12 inches Soil moisture 12-24 inches Soil moisture 24-36 inches Rate of twig elongation Air temperature Relative humidity Twig length Soil temperature Total sum of squares accounted for Total sum of squares of Y . R = .58 ** .. 6539.02 4390.31 900.91 669.06 275.54 259.99 14.02 4.76 2.93 1.72 13058.27 385.83 339.80 333.27 329.32 329.96 330.81 334.67 338.74 347.26 342.96 16.95** 12.92** 2.71 2.03 .84 .79 .04 .01 .01 .006 . 40491.80 R2 = .33 Significant at the one percent level. The factors are ranked in order of their importance of influence on the susceptibility of rabbitbrush to 2,4-D in Table 3. The mean squares of the residual were obtained by dividing residual sum of squares by the degrees of freedom remaining after the preceding factors had been discounted. The F values were obtained by dividing the sum of squares by the mean squares. Analysis of variance was used to test the significance of factor contributions on rabbitbrush mortality. Only two factors were found to have a significant effect on the susceptibility of rabbitbrush to 2,4-D: carbohydrate content of lateral roots, and relative rate of carbohydrate translocation. Analysis of variance was also used to determine significance of the combined effect of all ten factors upon rabbitbrush mortality and is presented in Table 4. Table 4.--Analysis of variance of the regression of factors on rabbitbrush mortality. Source of Degrees of F Value Sum of Squares Mean Squares Variation Freedom Total Regression 89 9 40491.80 13058.27 1450.92 Deviation 80 27433.53 342.92 1/ Significant at the one percent level. 4.23];/ �- 233 - This overall test of combined effects upon rabbitbrush mortality is highly significant indicating that these ten factors do influence rabbitbrush mortality. Multiple Correlation Analysis Multiple correlation analysis was used to determine the correlation between combined factors and rabbitbrush mortality. The coefficient of mUltiple correlation (R) shown in Table 3 was .57 By squaring this value, the coefficient of multiple determination (R2) is obtained and found to be .33. This means that these ten factors accounted for 33 percent of the variation in rabbitbrush mortality. Apparently, other factors are influencing the remaining 67 percent of the variation. Discussion: Statistical analyses have the advantage of placing a high degree of reliability in the results, but other observations should not be overlooked because they are helpful in the interpretation of these results. Therefore, the factors will be discussed from both viewpoints in the order of their influence on rabbitbrush mortality. Carbohydrate content of lateral roots.--The carbohydrate content of lateral roots was found to affect the susceptibility of rubber rabbitbrush to 2,4-D more than any other factor. This highly significant relationship was found to be negative, indicating that as carbohydrate reserves decreased rabbitbrush mortality increased. A definite seasonal pattern is shown in Figure 1 showing a decline of carbohydrate reserves in May, a leveling-off until mid-July, followed by an increase in the fall. Highest average rabbitbrush kill was obtained just as the seasonal increase of carbohydrate reserves began to increase indicating that 2,4-D was transported to the roots along with the assimilate stream carrying carbohydrates. Hyder, et ale (1962) reported that green rabbitbrush (Chrysothamnus viscidiflorus (Hook.) Nutt.) was also most susceptible to 2,4-D when the carbohydrate contents of lateral roots were beginning their seasonal increase. Studies on other woody plants agree that the most effective time to spray is when root reserves are low (Bohmont, 1954; Beatty, 1953; McIlvain and Savage, 1949). Relative rate of carbohydrate translocation.--The relative rate of carbohydrate translocation was found to have the second highest influence on rabbitbrush mortality. This factor is a measure of the amount of carbohydrate which was translocated between spraying dates and expressed as the rate of carbohydrate percent translocated per day. Although this factor was not correlated with rabbitbrush mortality, it was found to be interacting with factors which were correlated. When these interactions were considered in the final analysis, the strong influence upon rabbitbrush mortality became evident. This is an example of the value of multiple regression analysis in studies involving a complex pattern of interactions. �MORTALITY • CARBOHYDI=<ATE 15r • CONTENT 190 .....-.. / .....-.. ~ 0 •.....•.. • .~ w I- ....... • • <t: n:: • 80 •.....•.. ct- >- 70 l.-J 60 ~0:: 0 50 ~ / • I 40 If) :::J (Y ~5 30 ~ I CO 0 20 cO CO « n:: 0:: « 10 U MAY 3 MAY17 JUN2 JUN15 F'i.gur-e 1. Compari s on of rabbitbrush d~tes of spraying. JUL2 JUL17 AUG1 DATE OF SPRAYI NG mor-t.a'l i.t.y and carbohydrate content AUG16 of lateral AUG31 SEP15 roots on different [\J I..tJ ..f;'- I �- 235 - The seasonal pattern of relative rate of carbohydrate translocation (Figure 2) shows three substantial increases in rates: late July, early August, and early September. Highest rabbitbrush kills were obtained only during the increase in July. The failure of the other increases to affect mortality may be explained by the strong relationship between rate of translocation and carbohydrate content of the roots. Since rabbitbrush plants are most susceptible to 2,4-D when root reserves are low, any increase in the rate of carbohydrate and 2,4-D translocation when these reserves have built up fail to have as much effect on mortality. Other studies have suggested the importance of carbohydrate translocation in controlling rabbitbrush. Robertson and Cords (1957) reported that rubber rabbitbrush was most susceptible to 2,4-D when carbohydrate reserves in the twigs were high but being rapidly depleted. This would indicate that the rate of translocation is faster than normal resulting in a rapid accumulation of carbohydrates and 2,4-D in the roots. Hyder, et ale (1962) found that highest kills of green rabbitbrush coincided with high-Carbohydrate content in the herbage. Soil moisture within the first foot.--Although this factor did not have a significant effect upon rabbitbrush mortality, it came very close to reaching the assigned five percent level of significance. The importance of this factor is indicated by its third place ranking in both correlation analysis and multiple regression analysis. Its influence upon rabbitbrush mortality is also exhibited by the interactions with many other factors such as soil moisture at the lower depths, soil temperature, twig length, rate of carbohydrate translocation, and carbohydrate content of the roots. The seasonal patterns of soil moisture (Figure 3) shows that soil moisture within the first foot of soil decreases faster than soil moisture at the other depths. Highest kills occurred as water content in the upper 12 inches reached a low point and began to level off. Rabbitbrush mortality dropped off after this point was reached indicating that; this 'factor may have regulated the end of the period of rabbitbrush susceptibility to 2,4-D. The fact that soil moisture at deeper levels are dependent upon soil moisture within the upper foot of soil may help to explain why this factor was ranked above them. The influence of soil moisture on the susceptibility of rabbitbrush to 2,4-D has been stressed in studies by Robertson and Cords (1957) and Hyder, et ale (1958). Kissinger, Hull, and Vaughn (1952) reported that small rabbitbrush was most susceptible when soil moisture in the upper six inches was nine percent. Hyder, et ale (1962) believed that the available soil moisture at a depth of 12 inches should be above 30 percent. Highest rabbitbrush kills made in this study were obtained when soil moisture within the upper foot of soil was 2.7 inches or 22 percent. Soil moisture within the second foot.--Soil moisture within the second foot of soil did not have a significant influence on rabbitbrush mortality although it approached the assigned five percent level of significance. Its importance is indicated by its high ranking in both statistical tests and its many interactions with other factors. �20 • • MORTALITY 0 o TWIG LENGTH • TWIG ELONGATION 0- - - -0 CARBOHYDRATE TRANSLOCATION • gJl /'" J5 \ / \ / / \ \ I._I~ -I I ...••... '" \ - \ I • ...-.. ~ cu "'0 90 R /. /.-0 \ ,-- / \ ~ 0 '-" z 0 I / ~ u 0 --1 I (j) Z I- <:» « (9 S f- z JY 5 a~ W ~5 (9 ___ - S t-- ---0"' ...0 »> MAY 3 MAY17 -~~ • / %-0----/--;/ .____0 0 . JUN 2 h0Y \ ($ :"1f / / -: • ~£fU I Ig: w 30 E2 - f- co «. ln:: 20 co 0 co- . I>- 10 ~ • JUN 15 JUL 2 JUL17 AUG 1 AUG16 AUG 31 DATE OF SPRAYING « g n:: « u SEP15 Figure 2. Conlparison of rabbitbrush mortality, twig length, relative rate of twig elongation, and relative rate of carbohydrate translocation on different dates of spraying. . N IJ.J (j\ �• • ("\ 0- - - • MORTALITY SOIL MOISTURE: • I FOOT o2FEET -<>3 FEET r--.. o cf!. '-" >f'-" W 0::: ::J ---c-o- f- __ (j) N IN '--::I ;' -0._ 04 2 / "" - I (j) --0/ .•... -1 o ::J " 0::: ./' "'0 CO ./' f- • (j) /~ • 3 MAY 3 MAY17 JUN 2 JUN15 JUL 2 JUL17 AUG1 DATE OF SPRAYING m 20-CO « 0::: • AUG16 AUG31 SEP15 Figure J. Comparison of rabbitbrush mortality and soil moisture on different dates of spraying. �- 238 - The seasonal pattern (Figure 3) shows that the water content in the second foot of soil was higher than that of soil moisture in the upper foot when highest kills were obtained. This figure also shows a corresponding decline with mortality after that date indicating that as soil moisture at this level causes a decline of rBbbitbrush mortality in the late summer, .This indicates that soil moisture in the second foot of soil may be more important in determining the end of the period of susceptibility of rabbitbrush to 2,4-D than soil moisture in the upper foot of soil. Hyder, et ale (1962) and Frischnecht (1963) suggested that rabbitbrush was more dependent upon soil moisture below 12 inches because of the type of root system. Most of the well-developed lateral roots found in this study were within the second foot of soil indicating the dependence of rubber rabbitbrush on moisture in this depth. This would also account for the fact that rabbitbrush development is slower and susceptibility is later than other shrubs. The highest rabbitbrush kills in this study were obtained when soil moisture in the second foot of soil was 3.5 inches or 29 percent. Kissinger, et ale (1952) found that small rabbitbrush was most susceptible to 2,4-D when soil moisture below 12 inches was 17 to 18 percent. Soil moisture within the third foot.--Although this factor was ranked fifth in importance, it was relatively unimportant as far as rabbitbrush mortality was concerned. It had few interactions, indicating its lack of influence on other factors, The seasonal pattern (Figure 3) shows that soil moisture in the third foot of soil remained fairly constant during the growing season and was completely unrelated to rabbitbrush mortality. Although rabbitbrush plants undoubtedly obtain moisture from this depth, few lateral roots were found in the third foot of soil. Relative rate of twig elongation.--It was suspected that the relative rate of twig elongation might prove useful in determining the most effective time to spray rabbitbrush, but statistical analysis indicated that it had very little influence upon rabbitbrush mortality. This factor is measure of the length of twig elongation between spraying periods and is expressed as inches of elongation per day. The seasonal pattern (Figure 2) shows substantial increases in the rate of twig elongation; late May, late July, and early September. Highest rabbitbrush kills were obtained when the rate began to increase in July, but other increases failed to influence mortality. Since rate of twig elongation was correlated with carbohydrate content in the roots, only that increased rate of elongation which corresponded to low food reserves was able to influence mortality. Air temperature.--Air temperature at time of spraying had little effect upon the susceptibility of rabbitbrush to 2,4-D. The seasonal pattern (Figure 4) shows air temperature was erratic during the early part of the season and unrelated to rabbitbrush mortality. However, highest kills were obtained when air temperature averaged 7loF. Laboratory experiments revealed that air temperature was directly related to the effectiveness of 2,4-D (Kelly, 1949; Marth and Davis, 1945). However, it should be remembered that these conditions were controlled and that temperatures in �,........ l- '--'" >- I- o 100 2: :::> --L e__-....MORTALITY • • • AIR TEMPERATURE • RELATIVE HUMI DITY. .---- ...•SOIL TEMPERATURE ,........ w '--'" ,........ > 70 ~~ '--'" ~ ~ ~ «w W cc ---- 06 ,........ LL - w 0 ::::) - ~- cr:: o <;» cr: - 60 I- cr: 0::::::> 01- - -0150 2. « °--° o ----- IW ~ ~ O~40 o:::w 30 COII-~ ~ roO 20 m <(/) 0:: 0 W (L 2: w l- 0::: 10,- n::: « MAY 3 Fa gur-e 4. MAY 17 JUN 2 JUN 15 JUL 2 JUL 17 AUG 1 DATE OF" SPRAYI NG Corcpar i son of rabbitbrush on different dates of spraying. mortality, air temperature, relative AUG16 ,tUG 31 SEP 15 hwnidity, and soil temperature N lc'<l I.D �- 240 - the field are subject to considerable variation as well as being influenced by other factors. Although most field studies have shown that optimum kills of woody plants were obtained at warmer temperatures (Hamner and Tukey, 1946; Leonard and Crafts, 1956; Ray, 1957), studies on the actual effect of air temperature on the response of woody plants to herbicides have indicated that air temperature has little influence (Offord, 1949; Tschirley and Hull, 1959). Relative humidity.--Relative humidity failed to influence the response of rubber rabbitbrush to 2,4-D. The seasonal pattern (Figure 4)· shows that relative humidity at time of spraying was fairly constant and exhibited little relationship to rabbitbrush mortality. However, it was always above the 20 percent considered necessary for effective brush control by Leonard and Crafts (1956). Studies by Offord (1949) and Tschirley and Hull (1959) also reported that relative humidity failed to influence the susceptibility of woody plants to phenoxy herbicides. Twig length.--Twig length was found to have very little influence on the susceptibility of rabbitbrush to 2,4-D. It was interacting with eight other factors which apparently resulted in a high ranking in the initial analyses. However, when the influence of these other factors were considered in the "stepwisell method, twig length had little effect upon mortality. This is another example of the value of multiple regression analysis. Although twig length, alone, has little effect on mortality, it is important because it reflects the influence of many other factors which do have an effect on mortality. Therefore, it has been used an an index for determining when rabbitbrush susceptibility to 2,4-D begins. Hyder, et al. (1962) reported that green rabbitbrush became susceptible when average-twig length was three inches. The seasonal pattern (Figure 2) shows that rubber rabbitbrush susceptibility began when twig lengths averaged 4 3/4 inches. This difference may be due to the fact that only the most vigorous rubber rabbitbrush plants were measured. Estimated average twig lengths of unmeasured plants was less than those of measured plants. Soil temperature.--Soil temperature at the eight-inch depth had the least effect on rabbitbrush mortality of all factors tested. Although soil temperature shows a definite seasonal pattern, most of the temperatures recorded were between 50 and 60oF. Hyder, et al. (1962) suggested that green rabbitbrush susceptibility to 2,4-D was unrelated to soil temperature because of its late development. However, they reported that this species was most susceptible when temperatures were between 58 and 64°F at the six-inch depth and 53 to 590F at depths of 12 and 18 inches. Highest kills of rubber rabbitbrush in this study were obtained when soil temperature at an eight-inch depth was 58°F. Conclusions: According to statistical analysis, the four most important factors influencing the susceptibility of rubber rabbitbrush to 2,4-D were: (1) carbohydrate content of lateral roots, (2) relative rate of carbohydrate translocation, (3) soil moisture within the first foot of soil, and �- 2~1 - (4) soil moisture in the second foot of soil. The highest average rabbitbrush kills were obtained on July 17 and 18 when carbohydrate reserves were low but just beginning a seasonal increase. Total soil moisture in the first foot of soil was 22 percent and 29 percent in the second foot of soil. Average twig length of the most vigorous plants was six inches and soil temperature at an eight-inch depth was 5So F. The phenological development of associated plants was recorded and is presented in Table 5. This table shows that highest rabbitbrush kills occurred when shallow-rooted grasses, such as beardless wheatgrass (Agropyron inerme (Scribn. & Smith) Rybd.) and Kentucky bluegrass (Poa pratensis L.), were drying and losing color, indicating that soil moisture in the upper surface was being depleted. Rubber rabbit brush susceptibility began when squirreltail (Sitanion hystrix (Nutt.) J. G. Smith) was drying and rabbitbrush twig lengths averaged 4 3/4 inches. Apparently, rabbitbrush susceptibility to 2,4-D was one month later than the studies in Oregon by Hyder, et al. (1962). They reported that the seasonal increase of carbohydrate reserves occurred about six weeks earlier, and that green rabbitbrush susceptibility began when twig lengths averaged three inches, Sandburg bluegrass (Poa secunda Presl.) had developed to anthesis, and squirreltail and Thurber ~dlegrass (Stipa thrubiana Piper) were headed out. Susceptibility decreased when Sandburg bluegrass leaves lost color. These differences indicate the need for more reliable indices for determining the period of rabbitbrush susceptibility to herbicides. The fact that the ten factors tested accounted for only 33 percent of the variation in rabbitbrush mortality, suggests the need for further investigations to determine what other factors are influencing rabbitbrush mortality. Some of the unaccounted variation may be due to light, leaf area, protein content, the response of rabbitbrush to a heavy rate of 2,4-D, plant vigor, or experimental error. Part II. Follow-up studies in 1963. Studies on the Duck Creek experimental area during 1963 included: (1) survival counts, (2) a root study, (3) retreatment of rabbitbrush plants sprayed in 1962, and (4) a soil analysis. Survival counts.--Survival counts were made on rabbitbrush plants sprayed with 2,4-D in 1962 to determine the percent of plants killed on each experimental plot. These counts were made during late June and early July giving ample time for regrowth to occur and plants were considered dead only if no green foliage was present. A total of 58 percent of the plants were killed. Information recorded on the living plants included: percent foliage recovery, position of regrowth (stem or crown), age of plants, length of regrowth, and sprouting from lateral roots. Percent of foliage recovery was an estimate of the amount of regrowth as compared to the original foliage. The age of plants were classified as old, mature, or young, where young plants were defined as those less than one foot in height and stem diameter less than one-half inches. Sprouts from old �Table 5.--Pheno1ogica1 development of rubber rabbitbrush and associated plants. Rabbitbrush Rabbitbrush Stage of Development of Associated P1antsl/ Leaf Length Twig Length Drying Headed Anthesis (Inches) Date (Inches) May 3 May 17 May 23 June 2 June 15 June 18 June 23 July 2 JuJ,y 17 August 1 August 16 August 31 September 15 1./ Acla Agin Brte Cali Cha1 Chna 0 0 1/2 1 1/4 2 1/4 1/4 1/2 3/4 1 Mature Brte Brte Popr E1ci Agin, Sihy 4 3/4 6 1/4 10 1/2 10 3/4 11 3/4 16 1/2 Achillea 1anu1osa Nutt. Agropyron inerme (Scribn. & Smith) Rydb. Bromus tectorum L. Castilleja 1inariaefo1ia Benth Chenopodium album L. Chrysothamnus ~auseosus (Pallas) Britt. Del., Cali, Chvi Popr, Chna, Cha1 Agin, E1ci, Sihy Acla Chvi Del. E1ci Lemo Popr Sihy Brte, Lemo Agin, Popr Cha1, E1ci Chrysothamnus viscidif10rus (Hook.) Nutt. Delphinium spp. L. E1ymus cinereus Scribn. & Merr. Lepidium montanum (Nutt.) T. & G. Poa pratensis L. Sitanion hystrix (Nutt.) J. G. Smith I\J z- ra �stumps or roots were not considered as young plants but as regrowth. Length of regrowth was determined by measuring five stems from each live plant and care was taken not to measure the .shortest or the longest stems. Most of the regrowth occurred from the crowns of rabbitbrush plants. Dead stems were scraped to see if they might be alive, but no green color was observed, indicating that 2,4-D had been absorbed by the twigs. Although young plants comprised only six percent of· the population, they were much more susceptible to 2,4-D. A total of 88 percent of the young plants were killed as compared to 56 percent of the mature plants. No sprouting from lateral roots was observed. Root study.--A root study was made to determine if 2,4-D was carried below the root crowns of rabbitbrush plants. The root systems of 24 plants sprayed in 1962 and of six untreated plants were examined. Treated plants were divided into four categories of six plants each, according to the percent of foliage recovery. The number and length of basal shoots were recorded and the depth to which lateral roots were killed was measured. The results are presented in Table 6. Table 6.--Relationship between Percent Foliage Recovery Number of New Shoots 50 25 10 15 12 7 o o and plant recovery. Depth of Dead Lateral Roots Shoot Length (Inches) (Inches) 2,4-D translocation 7~ 8 6 o 12 15 20 No live roots These data show that 2,4-D was translocated below the root crowns because lateral roots were killed to a depth of 12 inches or more and dead plants had no living lateral roots. It is interesting to note that a decline in foliage recovery and number of new shoots corresponds to a decline in depth to which lateral roots were killed. This relationship did not exist between shoot length and 2,4-D translocation. The average depth to live lateral roots in untreated plants was one-half inch. Therefore, it appears that plant recovery is related to the depth to which 2,4-D is translocated. It is not certain whether this relationship may be the result of plant vigor or other factors. These results are shown pictorially in Figures 5 - 12. Respraying rabbitbrush plants.--Rabbitbrush plants were resprayed in 1963 to determine the effect of environmental, physiological, and phenological factors on the susceptibility of these plants to 2,4-D when treated two consecutive years. Retreatment involved 48 of the original 90 experimental plots on Duck Creek. The formulation used was 2,4-D butyl ester at 3 Ib/acre emulsified in water and applied at the rate of 20 gal/acre. A spreader~ Tween 20, was added to provide better penetration of the formulation by leaves of rabbitbrush. Two hand sprayers were used: a two-gallon and a three-gallon Hudson .model ca able of emitting a flat spray pattern at 4{) psi (pounds per �square inch). Spraying was done on three dates: June 25, July 12, and July 27. These dates were chosen because results in 1962 indicated that rabbitbrush susceptibility to 2,4-D was greatest during this period. Spraying was done between 7 a.m. and 9 a.m. to reduce the possibility of wind drift. A table of random numbers was used to select retreated plots and date of treatment. All factors measured in 1962 were measured again during the follow-up treatment. These included: air temperature, relative humidity, soil temperature, soil moisture at three depths, twig length, and carbohydrate content of lateral roots. The procedures were the same as those used the previous year except for several minor changes. Soil moisture samples were taken from three locations within each plot instead of five. Lateral roots were collected from plants exhibiting the most regrowth because plants with poor regrowth had few live lateral roots. The carbohydrate analysis of roots was done by the Industrial Laboratory of Denver instead of the Colorado Department of Agriculture because the latter was unable to devote the necessary time. This analysis was made according to the "Oklahoma" method commonly used. Survival counts and analysis of data will be made in 1964. Soil analysis.--Soil samples were collected from depths of one, two, and three feet at five different locations in the study area for the purpose of determining bulk density, pH, and soil texture. Bulk density of the soil was used in soil moisture determinations making it possible to convert percent soil moisture by weight to percent by volume and inches of water for easier interpretation. Bulk density was computed for each sample by dividing oven-dried weight by soil volume. Soil volume was computed by the formula: where, V = volume, IT= 3.14, r = radius of the sampling tube, and h = height of soil in the tube. Inches of volume was converted to cubic centimeters of volume by multiplying by 16.387 because 1 cu. inch = 16.387 cc. If rocks were present in the soil sample, their volume was determined by water displacement and subtracted from total soil volume to make accurate comparisons between soils with varying rock content. The average bulk density for the first foot of soil was 1.33; for the second foot, 1.35; and for the third foot,1.38. Percent of soil moisture by volume was obtained for each study plot by multiplying percent of soil volume by weight by bulk density. Inches of moisture were determined by mUltiplying percent by volume by inches of soil represented (12 inches) and divided by 100 (Olson and Hoover, 1954). Soil reaction or pH was determined by the Electrometric method, as described by Reed and Cummings (1945), using glass electrodes and a Beckman pH meter. A 1:5 soil to water mixture was made by adding 12 g of air-dried soil to 60 ml of distilled water. After the solution settled for several minutes, the glass electrodes were inserted in the solution and readings made from the Beckman meter. The average pH value of all 16 samples was 8.2. Soil textures were determined by the "hydrometer" method as explained by Bouyoucos (1951). A well-mixed, oven-dried soil sample was passed through a five mm sieve and a 50 g portion was added to 150 ml of distilled water in a dispersion cup. A dispersing agent, 0.1 N sodium hexametaphosphate �- 245 - (five ml), was added and the solution allowed to settle 15 minutes. Then it was dispersed in a mechanical stirrer for 10 minutes, transferred to a 1,000 m1 cylinder, and distilled water added. This solution was thoroughly mixed by hand, placed on a table, and a thermometer and a hydrometer put in the solution. Temperature and hydrometer readings were made after 40 seconds and used to determine the percent of sand which had settled. Two hours later, readings were again made and the percent of clay still in solution was determined. The percent of silt present was determined by subtracting the values of sand and clay from 100 percent. By reference to a soil texture chart, these samples indicate that the soil texture in the study area is clay loam. Part III. Comparison of the response and herbicidal rates. of rabbitbrush to different herbicides This section is a report on the procedures and evaluation of the response of rabbitbrush to different rates of 2,4-D, 2,4-DP, Kuron, and Tordon in the Meeker area. The first study was conducted along Duck Creek to compare a heavy rate of 2,4-D with a lighter rate. The second study was conducted along Yellow Creek to compare four different herbicides applied at various rates. The third study was conducted on Sulphur Creek to compare 2,4-D and Tordon. In 1962, a study was made to compare the response of rabbitbrush to the heavy rate of 2,4-D used in the Duck Creek experiment and a lighter rate used in other studies. A total of 108 plots, 1/100 acre in size, were established near Duck Creek and plants treated on four different dates; August 1, August 16, August 31, and September 15. One-half of the plots were sprayed with 2,4-D at 31 1b/acre in a 1:1 mixture of diesel oil and water. The other one-half, with 2,4-D at three 1b/acre in a water carrier. Survival counts were made one year after spraying. The results are shown in Tables 7 and 8. Table 7.--Mortality of rubber rabbitbrush water carrier. Number Plants SEra~ed Date SEra~ing using 2,4-D at three lb/acre in a Number Plants Killed Percent Morta1it~ August 1 August 16 August 31 September 15 360 357 529 457 184 139 205 126 51.11 38.94 38.75 27.57 Total 1,703 654 38.40* * Percent mortality is significantly cording to Chi-square test. different at the 5-percent level ac- �- 246 - Table 8.--Mortality of rubber rabbitbrush using 2,4-D at 31 lb/acre mixture of water and diesel oil. Spraying Date August 1 August 16 August 31 September 15 Total * in a 1:1 Number Plants Sprayed Number Plants Killed Percent Mortality 358 378 452 438 231 207 222 171 64.53 54.76 49.12 39.04 1,626 831 51.11* at the 5-percent level ac- Percent mortality is significantly cording to Chi-square test. different These results show that 2,4-D applied at the rate of 31 lb/acre killed 51 percent of the treated plants, while the three lb/acre rate killed only 38 percent. This difference was significant according to a Chi-square test. Therefore, it appears that more effective control is possible by spraying rabbitbrush with a heavy rate of 2,4-D. Klingman (1961) reported that excessive rates of phenoxy herbicides immobilize or kill the living cells which transport the herbicide, thus stopping translocation to underground parts. The heavy rate of 2,4-D used in this study was translocated to the roots of rabbitbrush as indicated by the root study and the fact that plants were killed. Although the heavier rate was more effective, it did not kill enough plants to be considered a successful one-shot application. Since optimum kills apparently require two treatments, it would probably be more economical to use the lighter rate of 2,4-D. However, this study points out the need for additional information of the response of woody species to a wide range of herbicidal rates. A separate study area was established on Yellow Creek to compare the response of rabbitbrush to different herbicides and acid rates. This area is located along the Yellow Creek road about 3/4 miles west of the confluence of Yellow Creek and Pinto Gulch in Section 24; R 98 W; TIN; 6th P.M., and marked on the fence with green streamers. Spraying was done with a three gallon hand sprayer between 6 a.m. and 6:30 a.m. on June 22, 1962. The herbicides included 2,4-D at six lb/acre; 2,4-DP at four lb/acre; and Kuron (commonly called Silvex) at four lb/acre. A mixture of water and diesel oil was used as a carrier at 38 gal/acre on the three plots. The weather at time of spraying was partly cloudy with little wind, the air temperature was between 50-600 F, relative humidity was between 48 and 60 percent, and rabbitbrush twigs averaged four inches in length. Survival counts were made on June 19, 1963, and shown in Table 9. These results show that 2,4-D was far more effective in killing rabbitbrush than 2,4-DP or Kuron. There appeared to be little difference between the latter two herbicides. Although these results point out the superiority of 2,4-D, valid conclusions should not be made because of the simplicity of this experiment. �- 247 - Table 9.--Response Herbicide 2,4-D 2,4-DP Kuron of rabbitbrush to 2,4-D, 2,4-DP, and Kuron. Number Plants Number Plants Sprayed Killed 30 22 29 22 5 6 Percent Mortality 73 23 21 This study area was expanded in 1963 to determine the response of rabbitbrush to three herbicides applied at various rates. Thirteen additional plots were established to compare 2,4-D at three and five Ib/acre; Kuron at one, three, and five lb/acre; and Tordon at one-quarter, one-half, one and two lb/acre. In addition, Tordon pellets were spread on four plots at rates of one, two and one-half, five and ten lb/acre. Tordon is a new chemical put out by Dow Chemical Company which promised to be as good or better than 2,4-D. The liquid formulations were applied in a water carrier at the rate of one gal/plot of 100 gal/acre. A spreader, "Tween 20" was added to permit better absorption. These plots were treated between 11 a.m. and 1 p.m. on June 27, 1963. The weather was warm and clear with gusty winds, rabbitbrush twig lengths averaged six inches, and giant wildrye (Elymus cinereus Scribn. & Merr.) was headed out. Survival counts will be made in 1964 and the results presented in the next job completion report. Tordon and 2,4-D were sprayed on a small patch of rubber rabbitbrush on the Jim Dodo ranch, approximately six miles north of Meeker, Colorado. The area lies on the west side of the road in Section 13; R 94 W; T 2N; 6th P. M. about three miles north of headquarters. This area has been used to feed cattle during the winter resulting in over-utilization as indicated by the presence of rabbitbrush, lambsquarters (Chenopodium spp.), tall larkspur (Delphinium sp.), Canada thistle (Cirsium arvense), and many annual weeds. Spraying was done between 10 a.m. and 11:30 a.m. on June 28, 1963 using two hand sprayers. The area north of the secondary road was sprayed with 2,4-D four lb/acre in two gallons of water. The area south of this road was sprayed with Tordon at two lb/acre in three gallons of water. A spreader was added to the formulation. The weather at time of spraying was clear, hot, and windy. The phenology of the plants appeared to be earlier than that near Yellow Creek although the elevation is higher. Rabbitbrush twig length averaged seven inches and some of the bushes had started to bloom. Larkspur was also sprayed but these plants were in bloom indicating that treatment of these plants was late. This area will be checked in 1964 and results given in the next completion report. LITERATURE Beatty, R. H. 1953. Brush contxol: and Food Chern. 1: 178-181. CITED status of chemical methods. Jour. Agr. �- 240 - Bohmont, D. W. 1954. Expt. Sta. Circ. Chemical sagebrush control: 54. 8 p. good and bad. Wyo. Agr. Bouyoucos, G. J. 1951 .. A recalibration of the hydrometer method for making mechanical analysis .of soils. Agron. Jour. 43:434-438. Frischknecht, N. C. 1963. Contrasting effects of big sagebrush and rubber rabbitbrush on production of crested wheatgrass. Jour. Range Mgmt. 16:70-74. Hamner, C. L., and H. B. Tukey. 1946. Herbicidal action of 2,4-dichlorophenoxyacetic acid on several shrubs, vines, and trees. Botan. Gaz. 107:379-385. Hyder, D. N., F. A. Sneva, and V. H. Freed. 1962. Susceptibility of big sagebrush and green rabbitbrush to 2,4-D as related to certain environmental, phenological, and physiological conditions. Weeds. 10:288-295. Kelly, Sally. 1949. The effect of temperature on the susceptibility of plants to 2,4-D. Plant Physiol. 24:534-536. Kissinger, N. A., Jr., A. C. Hull, Jr., .and W. T. Vaughn. 1952. Chemical control of big sagebrush in central Wyoming. U. S. Rocky Mountain Forest and Range Expt. Sta. Paper 9. 15 p. Klingman, G. C. 1961. Weed control: Inc., New York. 421 p. as a science. Leonard, O. A., and A. S. Crafts. 1956. radioactive 2,4-D by brush species. John Wiley and Sons, III. Uptake and distribution of Hilgardia. 26:366~4l6. Marth, P. C., and F. F. Davis. 1945. Relation of temperature to the selective herbicidal effects of 2,4-dichlorophenoxyacetic acid. Botan. Gaz. 106:463-472. McIlvain, E. H., and D. A. Savage. 1949. Spraying 2,4-D by airplane on sand sagebrush and other plants of the Southern Great Plains. Jour. Range Mgmt. 2:43-52. Offord, H. R. 1949. Effective control of ribes with 2,4-D and 2,4,5-T. Agr. Chern. 4(10):31-35, 71, 77. Olson, D. F., Jr., and M. D. Hoover. 1954. Methods of soil moisture determination under field conditions. U. S. Southeastern Forest Expt. Sta. Paper 38. 28 p. Ray, Hurlon. 1957. New developments in chemical brush control in Arkansas. Jour. Range Mgmt. 10:151-155. �- 2~9 - Reed, G. F., and R. W. Cummings. 1945. Soil reaction: glass electrode and colorimetric methods for determining pH values of soils. Soil Sci. 59:97-104. Robertson, J. H., and H. P. Cords. 1957. Survival of rabbitbrush (Chrysothamnus spp.) following chemical, burning, and mechanical treatments. Jour. Range Mgmt. 10:83-89. Tschir1ey, F. H., and H. M. Hull. 1959. Susceptibility of velvet mesquite to an amine and an ester of 2,4,5-T as related to various biological and meteorological factors. Weeds. 7:427-435. Prepared by: Donald G. Smith Wildlife Researcher Candidate Date: JulV ----------- 1955 Approved by: Richard N. Denney Project Leader Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief �� https://cpw.cvlcollections.org/files/original/8eee73a15cadb088742be15dd743612c.pdf 95697946fa57e5963f558e892fdd5e64 PDF Text Text July, 1965 251 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARGI PROJECT SEGMENT Colorado --------~----------------Name W-38-R-19 ; Project No. ----~~~~~----------. State of Work Plan No. 1 Deer-Elk Investigations Job No. 5 Title of Job: Experimental Trapping and Marking Tec~niques Period Covered: April 1, 1964 through March 31, 1965 Personnel: Raymond J. Boyd, Eugene E. Green, Richard N. Denney all of the Federal Aid Division. M. C. Coghill, Donald Benson, Earl Cochran, William Schultz, Herb Browning, Gene Bassett, Scott Bessire, Wayne Knisley, Allison lfJason,Glen Hinshaw, Bill Fischer and Errol Ryland all personnel of the Southwest Region. Abstract: There was a total of 245 elk tagged and banded in traps and from the helicopter during' the past segment. An additional 57 elk were neck banded but not ear tagged. With the exception of the helicopter banding, all trapping and banding was done by Regional personnel in traps using techniques and equipment developed on this job by Federal Aid personnel. There were 11 ear tag returns from the Gunnison area during the 1964 big game season and five elk were killed on the White River area that were wearing tags. Recommendations: 1. Regular systematic aerial flights in the various trapping and bandi~g areas should be continued in order to determine movements of banded animals and to determine areas of concentration at different periods of the year. 2. Keep an up-to-date map, by years, of each trapping area, with a cumulative record of all sightings and tag returns from hunter or winter-killed animals. These mapped locations are to be used in helping set big game seasons within local areas. 3. Concentrate a trapping crew in an area for a week or 10 days, then move to another site for a similar period. This should help reduce the numberof recatches by allowing new bands of elk to move into the trapping areas wh~le there is no disturbance from Sno-Cats, horses, etc. �252 4. Assist Regional Game Management personnel in selection of sites for new traps and act as consultant in the construction and operation of the new traps. All of the ear tags and neck bands will be ordered by the Federal Aid Research staff, even though the various regions will pay the cost of the materials. This should be done in order to keep numbers and colors from being duplicated. Also, the Big Game Research staff will act as clearing house for all band sightings, tag returns, etc. for the same reasons stated above. 5· Determine the feasibility of tagging and banding elk by using the helicopter and Cap-Chur gun to take the elk. Also, work out techniques for "bulldogging" elk from the helicopter when they are in deep snow. This type of catching to be done in areas where it is not feasible to group trap elk because of accessibility, etc. 6. Assist Regional ,personnel in the location, construction and operation of a "drive-trap" in the Sheep Creek area near Saguache, Colorado. Objectives: Knowledge of the migratory habits of deer and elk are needed before sound management recommendations can be made. These migrations can best be located by marking or otherwise identifying animals that may use these migration routes. 1. ImProve the efficiency of existing traps for big game, or develop new, more efficient, methods of trapping. 2. Determine the best materials and tags to mark big game animals for easy observation. 3· Determine dosages of various drugs that may be used in the Cap-Chur equipment en big game animals. When animals have been immobilized, they may easily be tagged and marked. 4. Determine the feasibility of marking deer or elk from the helicopter either with paint for short-term marking, or use the Cap-Chur equipment to immobilize the animals so that longer lasting marking may be done. 5· Determine the feasibility of radio-tracking and monitoring the bodily processes in wild big game animals. Procedure: 1. Construct portable and permanent group-type traps for big game animals, out of solid plywood panels, out of regular game fencing and out of logs. Redesign the existing electric switch and release to make it stronger. Set up and use the experimental counter on a group trap to see if it is practical for field use in the winter. �253 2. Examine neck bands from hunter-killed deer and elk and from animals retrapped to see how the various materials are holding up under normal animal activity. Try and locate a company that will make an ear tag out of some material that is harder than the aluminum we are now using. 3· Close contact with the College of Veterinary Medicine at Colorado State University will give us leads on new drugs that might be suitable for field use in the Cap-Chur equipment. Dosage rates will be determined on penned deer and elk at Fort Collins. After dosages have been worked out, the drug can be tried in the field to see if it is practical and safe. 4. Modify the present pressure tank and spray gun so that a more solid stream of paint can be shot from the helicopter while it is in forward motion or hovering within "ground-effect". Shoot deer or elk with the Cap-Chur equipment from the helicopter to see if numbers of animals maybe marked in areas where it is not possible to set up a trap. Ground crews will assist in this operation, and close contact will be held with the helicopter by use of two-way radio. 5· Receiving equipment that is presently available has already been proved satisfactory for wildlife telemetry. Purchase of already made-up transmitters or of specially constructed transmitters for wildlife is not too promising at the present time. Personnel at the Martin-Marietta Plant, at Littleton, Colorado, have been approached and have made up two prototype transmitters for our use. If field tests on the battery life and range of these two transmitters prove successful, six more of these will be constructed and implanted in elk. These transmitters will be implanted just forward of the hip, under the back of the animal. This area offers the best position in the body for protection, ease of implantation and later recovery of the instrument. Present plans call for using the entire animal as the antenna rather than have the animal carry a "whip" antenna on its back. ��255 Experimental Trapping and Marking Techniques Raymond J. Boyd No work was accomplished on either the one-way gates or the electric solenoid during the past segment. As the job was originally planned, M. C. Coghill was to be assigned to this project during the winter months for the express purpose of further refining his trap, gates and releases. When the time came for trapping to begin, we could not obtain a release from the Region for Mr. Coghill to work on this job. He was able, however, to scrape enough time from his Regional work load to trap 29 elk and four deer at the Ellgin trap using existing equipment. The neck band that we are now using appears to be completely satisfactory from the standpoint of longevity, visibility and relatively low cost per animal banded. As reported in the last completion report for this job, each collar can be made up for $1.23 each if one solid color is used. We are just starting to make up collars of two or more colors in combinations, and the cost has not yet been worked out. At report time, we have not been able to contact another vendor that can supply us with ear tags made of any stronger material than the alumirrwm alloy that is now supplied us by the Salt Lake Stamp Company of Salt Lake City, Utah. Acting on their own, the personnel of Sky Hook, Inc., the concern that does all of our contract helicopter flying, completely redesigned the air pressure tank and spray gun. The completed spray rig was not completed in time to use during the past segment, so trials of this marking system will have to wait until the fall of 1965 when we plan to mark elk for short termsightings with paint shot on their backs and sides from the helicopter. One known-age jaw was obtained for our reference collection this past hunting season. It was from a three year old bull. The animal had been tagged as a calf at the Ellgin trap. Several other jaws were collected from tagged elk, but none of them were of an exact known age class. Jaws should become more available in future years as more calves are tagged. The winter of 1964-65 was an extremely severe one in Colorado, and the elk and deer were in places that made trapping very easy in most areas. All of the elk and deer that were trapped were caught in traps designed from information obtained from this job. No Federal Aid personnel were actually involved in the trapping as the regions took over the work of running the traps. This type of operation shows how the Research Division can develop techniques and equipment that is of great use and benefit to Management. �All of the elk and deer that are listed in the tables at the end of this report were trapped by Southwest Regional personnel with the exception of' the elk taken by the helicopter and Cap-Chur gun. These animals were taken by Federal Aid personnel assigned to W-38-R. The tag numbers, age and sex of the animals, etc. are included in this report so that the information will be in one specific place and available to anyone who has need for the information. A map of each trapping area is kept in the Montrose Regional Office with a composite picture of band sightings and tag returns. These maps are taken to the big game wBnagement meetings each spring and the information shown on the maps is used by the Regional Game Management personnel in helping set the regular big game seasons. Tagging and Neck Banding Report Prepared by: Raymond J. Boyd Approved by: Associate Wildlife Researcher Richard N. Denney Project Leader Date: ,July. 1965 Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief �257 TABLE 1 - ELK TRAPPED A.ND TA.GGED AT THE GOOSE CREEK TRAP, RIO GRANDE NATIONAL FOREST, COLORA.DO - WINTER 1964-65. DATE SEX: 11/27/64 1/7/65 1/7/65 1/7/65 1/7/65 1/7/65 1/7/65 1/7/65 1/7/65 1/7/65 1/8/65 1/8/65 1/8/65 1/9/65 1/9/65 1/9/65 1/9/65 1/9/65 1/9/65 1/9/65 1/9/65 1/9/65 1/9/65 1/9/65 1/9/65 1/9/65 1/9/65 1/11/65 1/11/65 1/11/65 1/11/65 1/11/65 1/11/65 1/11/65 1/11/65 1/11/65 1/12/65 1/12/65 1/12/65 1/14/65 1/16/65 1/16/65, 1/18/65 Cow Cow Cow Cow Cow Cow Cow Cow Cow Cow Bull Bull Cow Cow Cow Bull Cow Cow Cow Bull Cow Bull Bull Cow Cow Cow Cow Cow Cow Cow Cow Bull Cow Bull Cow Cow Cow Cow Bull Bull Cow AGE TAG NLTj\.ffiERS Calf RG-77 RG-77 Mature Mature Mature Mature Yearling Calf lfJature Mature Mature Mature Calf Yearling Mature Mature Yearling Calf Calf Calf Mature Calf Calf Calf Calf Calf Calf Mature Mature Mature Calf Mature Calf Calf Calf Calf Calf Mature Mature Calf Mature Mature Yearling Matllre RG-18 RG-19 RG-20 RG-21 RG-22 RG-23 RG-24 RG-25 RG-26 RG-27 RG-28 RG-29 RG-30 RG-31 RG-32 RG-33 RG-34 RG-35 RG-36 RG-37 RG-38 RG-39 RG-40 RG-41 RG-42 RG-43 RG-44 RG-45 RG-46 RG-47 RG-48 RG-49 RG-50 RG-51 RG-52 RG-53 RG-54 RG-55 RG-56 RG-57 RG-58 RG-59 RG-18 RG-19 RG-20 RG-21 RG-22 RG-23 RG-24 RG-25 RG-26 RG-27 RG-28 RG-29 RG-30 RG-31 RG-32 RG-33 RG-34 RG-35 RG-36 RG-37 RG-38 RG-39 RG-40 RG-41 RG-42 RG-43 RG-44 RG-45 RG-46 RG-47 RG-48 RG-49 RG-50 RG-51 RG-52 RG-53 RG-54 RG-55 RG-56 RG-57 RG-58 RG-59 REMARKS White neck band, calf fell in powerline hole. White neck band White neck band White neck band Whi te neck band White neck band White neck band White neck band White neck band White neck band White neck band White neck band White neck band White neck band White neck band White neck band White neck band White neck band White neck band White neck band White neck band White neck band White neck band White neck band White neck band White neck band White neck band White neck band Whi te neck band White neck band White neck band Neck collar came off on release White neck band White neck band White neck band White neck band White neck band White White White White White neck band neck band neck band neck band neck band �TA.BLE 1 - Con't. DATE SEX AGE 1/18/65 1/18/65 1/19/65 1/20/65 1/20/65 1/20/65 1/20/65 1/20/65 1/20/65 1/20/65 1/20/65 1/21/65 1/23/65 1/23/65 1/23/65 1/23/65 1/23/65 1/25/65 1/25/65 1/25/65 1/25/65 1/25/65 1/25/65 1/26/65 Cow Cow Cow Cow Cow Cow Bull Bull Bull Cow Cow Cow Cow Cow Bull Bull Bull Cow Cow Cow Cow Bull Bull Cow Mature Calf Mature Calf Mature Calf Calf Calf Calf Calf Calf Mature Calf Calf Calf Calf Calf Mature Mature Mature Mature Calf Calf Yearling RG-60 RG-61 RG-62 RG-63 RG-64 RG-65 RG-66 RG-67 RG-68 RG-69 RG-70 RG-71 RG-72 RG-73 RG-74 RG-75 RG-76 RG-78 RG-79 RG-80 RG-81 RG-82 RG-83 RG-84 RG-60 RG-61 RG-62 RG-63 RG-64 RG-65 RG-66 RG-67 RG-68 RG-69 RG-70 RG-71 RG-72 RG-73 RG-74 RG-75 RG-76 RG-78 RG-79 RG-80 RG-81 RG-82 RG-83 RG-84 1/26/65 Cow Calf RG-85 RG-85 1/26/65 Cow Yearling RG-86 RG-86 1/26/65 Bull Calf RG-87 RG-87 1/27/65 1/27/65 1/27/65 1/28/65 1/28/65 Cow Cow Cow Cow &11 Mature Mature Mature Yearling Calf RG-88 RG-89 RG-90 RG-91 RG-92 RG-88 RG-89 RG-90 RG-91 RG-92 Total No. trapped - 75 TAG NUMBERS REMARKS Whi te neck band White neck band White neck band White neck band White neck band White neck band White neck band White neck band White neck band White neck band White neck band White neck band White neck band White neck band White neck band White neck band Whi te neck band White neck band White neck band White neck band White neck band White neck band White neck band White neck band, taken White neck band, taken White neck band, taken White neck band, taken White neck band Whi te neck band White neck band White neck band White neck band ... blood sample blood sample blood sample blood sample . . . . . �259 TABLE 2 - ELK TRAPPED AND TAGGED AT THE SHAW CREEK TRAP, RIO GRANDE NA.TIONAL FOREST, COLORADO -w:mTER 1964-65. DATE SEX AGE TAG NUMBERS 1/25/65 1/25/65 1/25/65 Cow Cow Bull Calf Mature Calf SL-l SL-l SL'!"'2 SL-2 SJ.,-3 SL-3 1/25/65 Bull Calf SL-4 SL-4 1/25/65 1/27/65 2/4/65 2/4/65 2/4/65 2/4/65 2/4/65 2/4/65 2/4/65 8/4/65 2/4/65 Cow Cow Bull Cow Cow Cow Cow Cow Cow Bull Cow Mature SL-5 SL-6 SL-7 SL-8 SL-9 SL-IO SL-ll SL-12 SL-13 SL-14 SL-15 SL-5 SL-6 SL-7 SL-8 SL-9 SL-IO SL-ll SL-12 SL-13 SL-14 SL-15 Calf Yearling Calf Calf Calf Calf Calf Calf Calf REMARKS Blue neck band Blue neck band Already had blue band, no ear tag, so put on Already had blue band, no ear tag, so put on Blue neck band Blue neck band Blue neck band Blue neck band Blue neck band Already had blue band Blue neck band Blue neck band Blue neck band Already had blue neck pand Blue neck band Total No. trapped - 15 TABLE 3 - ELK TRAPPED AND TAGGED AT THE HOUSE CREEK TRAP, SAN JUAN NATIONAL FOREST, COLORADO - WINTER 1964-65. DATE SEX AGE 1/30/65 1/30/65 1/30/65 1/30/65 Bull Bull Cow Cow Calf Calf Calf Mature D-l D-2 D-3 D-3 D-l D-2 D-3 D-3 2/10/65 2/10/65 2/16/65 2/17/65 2/19/65 2/19/65 2/19/65 2/19/65 Cow Cow Mature Ma_ture caaif Mature Yearling Calf Mature Calf D-4 D-5 D-6 D-7 D-8 D-9 D-IO D-ll D-4 D-5 D-6 D-7 D-8 D-9 D-IO D-ll Cb"i. Cow Cow Cow Cow Bull Total No. trapped - 12 TAG NUMBERS REMARKS White neck band White neck band White neck band Two No. D-3's. This is the way the info. came in. White neck band Lost neck band getting out of net White neck band White neck band Lost neck band getting ·out of net White neck band White neck band White neck band White neck band �260 TABLE 4 - ELK TRAl'PEDAND TAGGED AT THE ELLGINTRAP, COLORADO - WINTER 1964-65. DATE 8EX AGE 2/17 2/17 2/17 2/20 3/3 3/3 3/5 Cow Cow Cow Cow Cow Cow Cow Yearling Yearling Yearling Mature Mature Yearling Yearling 8-216· 8-217 8-218 8-219 8-226 8-227 8-228 8-216 8-217 8-218 8-219 8-226 8-227 8-228 3/7 3/7 3/7 3/8 3/8 3/8 3/8 3/8 3/8 3/9 3/9 3/9 Cow Cow Cow Cow Cow Bull Cow Bull Cow Cow Cow Bull Cow Yearling Mature Mature Mature Mature Yearling Yearling Calf Mature Mature Mature Yearling Mature 8-229 8-230 8-231 8-232 8-233 8-234 8-235 8 ... 236 8-237 8-238 8-239 8-240 8-241 8-229 8-230 8-231 8-232 8-233 8-234 8-235 8-236 8-237 8-238 8-239 8-240 8-241 3/9 3/9 3/10 3/13 3/13 3/15 3/20 3/20 3,-24 Bull Cow Bull Cow Cow Cow Bull? Cow Cow Calf Calf. Calf Yearling Mature Mature Calf Calf Calf 8-242 8-243 8-244 8-245 8-246 8-247 8-248 8-249 8-250 8-242 8-243 8-244 8-245 8-246 8-247 8-248 8-249 8-250 3/9 Total No. trapped - 29 TAG NUMBER GUNNI80N NATIONAL FORE8T, REMARKS White Band with No ..,..-No.--White Band w:j..th White Band with No. --White Band White Band White Band White Band, knot between ankle and.knee White Band White Band White Band White Band, smooth mouth White Band, broken mouth White Band White Band White Band White Band, broken mouth White Band, 8mooth mouth White Band White Band White Band, tag tore out of ear and left ear slit (Red Tag) White Band White Band White Band White Band White Band, smooth mouth White Band, hair off one side White Band White fund, blood sample taken White Band, blood sample taken �261 TABLE 5 - DATE 3/17 3/17 3/17 3/17 DEER TRAPPED AND TA.GGED AT THE ELLGDr TRAP, GUNl'fISONNATIONAL FOREST, COLORADO - WINTER 1964-65. SEX AGE Doe Buck Buck Doe Mature Mature Fawn Mature TAG NtJlYIBER S-36 S-37 S-38 S-39 S-36 S-37 S-38 S-39 REMARKS Took blood sample Took blood sample Took blood .samp.Le Total No. trapped - 4 TABLE 6 - Eh'K TRAPPED AND TAGGED AT THE DEVIL CREEK TRAP, SAN JUAN NATIONAL FOREST, COLORADO - WINTER 1964-65. DATE SEX AGE 12/9/64 Cow Mature P-l P-l Yearling Yearling Mature Mature Mature Mature Calf Mature Yearling Calf Yearling Mature Calf Yearling Calf Calf Mature Mature Mature Mature Mature Mature Mature Calf P-2 P-3 p-4 P-5 p-6 P-7 p-8 P-9 P-IO P-ll P-12 P-13 p-14 P-15 p-16 P-17 p-18 P-19 P-20 P-21 P-22 P-23 p-24 P-25 P-2 P-3 p-4 P-5 p-6 P-7 p-8 P-9 P-IO P-ll P-12 P-13 p-14 P-15 p-16 P-17 p-18 P-19 P-20 P-21 P-22 P-23 p-24 P-25 12/21/64 Bull 12/30/64 Bull 12/30/64 Cow 1/4/65 Cow 1/4/65 Bull Bull 1/4/65 1/11/65 Cow 1/11/65 Cow 1/11/65 Cow 1/11/65 Bull 1/13/65 Bull 1/13/65 Cow 1/13/65 Cow 1/13/65 Cow 1/15/65 Cow 1/17/65 Bull 1/18/65 Cow 1/21/65 Cow 1/21/65 Cow 1/21/65 Cow 1/21/65 Cow 1/21/65 Cow 1/21/65 Cow 1/2')../65Cow TAG NUMBERS REMARKS Green neck band, blind in right eye No neck band, ear tag only Green neck band Green neck band Green neck band Green neck band Green neck band Green neck band Green neck band Green neck band Green neck band Green neck band Green neck band Green neck band Green neck band Green neck band Green neck band Green neck band Green neck band Green neck band Green neck band Green neck band Green neck band Green neck band Green neck band �262 TA.BLE 6 - Con't. . ..... DATE SEX AGE 1/21/65 1/21/65 1/23/65 1/23/65 1/24/65 1/26/65 1/26/65 1/26/65 1/26/65 1/26/65 1/29/65 1/29/65 1/31/65 1/31/65 1/31/65 2/3/65 2/3/65 2/3/65 2/3/65 2/7/65 2/7/65 2/7/65 2/7/65 2/17/65 Cow Cow Cow Cow Cow Cow Cow Bull Bull Cow Cow Bull Cow Bull Bull Cow Cow Bull Cow Cow Cow Cow Cow Cow Calf Mature Mature Mature Mature Mature Mature Mature Yearling Calf Mature Calf Mature Calf Calf Mature Mature Calf Mature Mature Mature Mature Mature Mature p-26 P-27 p-28 P-29 P-30 P-31 P-32 P-33 P-34 P-35 P-,:36 P-37 P-38 P-39 p-40 P-41 P-42 p-43 p-44 p-45 p-46 p-47 p-48 p-49 p-26 P-27 p-28 P-29 P-30 P-31 P-32 P-33 P-34 P-35 P-36 P-37 P-38 P-39 p-40 p-41 P-42 p-43 p-44 p-45 p~46 p-47 p-48 p-49 2/17/65 2/17/65 2/17/65 2/17/65 2/19/65 2/19/65 2/19/65 2/19/65 2/19/65 2/19/65 2/26/65 3/10/65 Cow Cow Bull Cow Cow Cow Cow Bull Cow Cow Cow Cow Mature Mature Calf Calf Mature Mature Mature Calf Mature Mature Mature Yearling P-50 P-51 P-52 P-53 P-54 P-55 P-56 P-57 P-58 P-59 p-60 P-61 P-50 P-51 P-52 P-53 P-54 P-55 P-56 P-57 P-58 P-59 p-60 P-61 Total No. trapped - 60 TAG NUMBERS· REMARKS ........... Green neck band Green neck band Green neck band Green neck band Green neck band Green neck band Green neck band Green neck band Green neck band Green neck band Green neck band Green n~k band Green neck band Green neck band Green neck band Green neck band Green neck band Green neck band Green neck band Green neck band Green neck band Green neck band Green neck band Green neck band, this cow had quite a few ticks Green neck band Green neck band Green neck band Green neck band Green neck band Green neck band Green neck band Green neck band Green neck band Green neck band C,-..ceen neck band Green neck band, blood sample taken �TABLE 7 - ELK TRAPPED AND TAGGED AT THE FALL CREEK TRAP, SAN JUAN NA.TIONAL FOREST, COLORADO - WINTER 1964-65· SEX 1/27/65 Cow Old H-l H-l 1/27/65 1/31/65 2/6/65 2/6/65 2/8/65 2/9/65 2/9/65 2/9/65 2/9/65 2/9/65 2/9/65 Cow Cow Cow Bull Cow Cow Cow Cow Cow Cow Cow Mature Mature Mature Yearling Calf Mature Mature Mature Calf Yearling Yearling H-2 H-3 H-4 H-5 H-6 H"7 H-8 H-9 H-10 H-ll H-12 H-2 H-3 H-4 H-5 H-6 H-7 H-8 H-9 H-10 H-ll H-12 2/9/65 2/19/65 2/27/65 3/2/65 3/11/65 3/13/65 3/22/65 3/22/65 3/23/65 Cow Cow Bull Bull Cow Bull Cow Cow Cow Yearling Old. Yearling Calf Mature Mature Mature Calf Mature H-13 H-17 H-15 H-16 H-18 H-17 H-20 H-21 H-22 H-13 H-17 H-15 H-16 H-18 H-17 H-20 H-21 H-22 3/24/65 Cow Mature H-23 H-23 3/24/65 Cow Mature H-24 H-24 3/25/65 Cow Cow Mature Mature H-25 H-26 H-25 H-26 3/29/65 Cow H-27 H-27 3/30/65 4/6/65 4/9/65 4/11/65 4/11/65 4/12/65 4/14/65 4/17/65 4/22/65 Bull Bull Cow Cow Bull Bull Cow Bull Cow H-28 H-29 H-30 H-31 H-32 H-33 H-34 H-35 H-36 H-28 H-29 H-30 H-31 H-32 H-33 H-34 H-35 H-36 Total AGE TAG NUMBERS DATE Calf Mature Calf Mature Calf Calf Mature Calf Mature No. trapped. - 34 REMA.RKS Blue neck band, this cow old., front teeth nearly gone Blue neck band. Blue neck band. Blue neck band. Blue neck band. Blue neck band Blue neck band. Blue neck band. Blue neck band. Blue neck band Blue neck band. Blue neck band., ear tags placed. this d.ate Blue neck band. Blue neck band. Blue neck band. Blue neck band. Blue neck band. Blue neck band. Blue neck band. Blue neck band.. This is an old. cow. Blue neck band . This is an old. cow, teeth are in pretty good. shape. Blue neck band.. This is an old. cow, lower teeth are bad.. Blue neck band.. Blue neck band.. This is a young cow. Blue neck band.. Did. not d.ie from starvation, but d.id.d.ie. Blue neck band Blue neck band.. 2 years old.. Blue neck band. Blue neck band. Blue neck band. Blue neck band. Blue neck band. Blue neck band. Very small calf. Blue neck band. �264 TABLE 8 - ELK TAC-GED AND BANDED ON THE SOUTH FORK OF THE WILLIAMS FORK, ROUTT NATIONAL FOREST, COLORADO -WINTER 1964-65· * DATE SEX AGE 1(19(65 1(19(65 1(19(65 1(19(65 Cow Cow Cow Cow Mature Mature Mature Mature W-IOI W-I02 W-I03 w-l04 W-IOI W-I02 W-I03 W-I07 1(19(65 Cow Mature w-l04 W-I07 1(19(65 1(19(65 1(19(65 1(19(65 Cow Cow Cow Cow Mature Mature Mature Mature W-I05 w-l06 w-l08 W-IIO W-I05 w-l06 TAG N'"JMBERS v-ios W-IIO REMARKS Pink collar Pink collar Pink collar Pink collar. This cow marked with different tag in each ear. 104 red 107 silver Pink collar. This cow marked with different tag in each ear. 104 silver, 107 red· Pink collar Pink collar Pink collar Pink collar * Elk were tagged with a Cap-Chur gun from a helicopter. TABLE 9 - ELK TA.GGED AND BANDED ON THE EAST FORK OF THE WILLIAMS FORK, ROUTT NATIONAL FOREST, COLORADO - WTIifTER1964-65. * DATE SEX AGE 1(20(65 1(20(65 1(20(65 1(20(65 1(20(65 1(20(65 1(20(65 1(20(65 1(20(65 Cow Cow Cow Cow Cow Cow Cow Cow Cow Mature Mature Mature Mature Mature Mature Mature Mature Calf * TAG NUJl!lBERS W-I09 W-lll W-112 W-113 W-114 W-121 W-123 W-124 W-125 W-I09 W-lll W-112 W-113 W-114 W-121 W-123 W-124 W-125 REMARKS Pink Pink Pink Pink Pink Pink Pink Pink Pink collar collar. Had calf with her. collar. Old collar collar collar collar collar collar 18 elk were tagged with a Cap-Chur Gun from a helicopter. �TABLE 10 - TAG RET"u"RNS FROM ELK KILLED DURING THE 1964 BIG GAME SEASON, GTJ.NNISON NATIONAL FOREST,.COLORADO. DATE KILLED DATE WHERE TAGGEDTAGGE'D WHERE KILLED 10/17/64 3/3/64 Ellgin S-171 Upper Coal Creek Still had band, spike bull when killed 10/18/64 3/14/62 Ellgin S-150 Smith Fork Drainage Not able to obtain jaw 10/18/64 2/1/62 Spring Creek 4-5 point bull when killed Ellgin s-108 & Deadman REMARKS 10/21/64 4/1/64 Ellgin S-211 Kaufman Creek Abandoned, had collar 10/21/64 2/1/62 Ellgin S-105 Spring Creek Res. area 5-point bull when killed, weighed 440 lbs. hog dressed 10/25/64 4/1/64 Ellgin S-215 Head of Soap Creek Still had collar 10/64 3/3/64 Ellgin S-173 West Soap Creek Still had collar 10/64 3/15/64 Ellgin S-195 Kaufman Creek No other information available 10/64 3/15/64 Ellgin S-196 W. Fk. of Soap Creek Collar evidently lost as it was not reported 11/1/64 3/4/62 Ellgin s-141 Cement Cr. area Still had collar but in very poor condition 7/31/64 3/20/64 Ellgin S-203 Dry Creek Winter loss, badly decomposed when· found-wben released it was noted that her uterus was turned inside out and she was bleeding. �266 TABLE 11 - TAG RETURNS FROM ELK KILLED DURING THE 1964 BIG GAME SEASON, WHITE RIVER NATIONAL FOREST, COLORADO. DATE KILLED DATE TAGGED WHERE TAGGED 10/21/64 1/18/62 Hill Creek W-29 S.Derby Creek drainage Had lost collar 10/22/64 3/9/62 Hill Creek W-35 Hill Creek Had lost collar 10/64 3/6/63 Hill Creek w-60 Fowler Peak 4-point bull with collar when killed 10/64 1/28/64 Hill Creek W-73 South Fork No other information below camp gr. 6/4/64 1/23/62 Hill Creek W-32 Hill Creek WHERE KILLED REMARKS Found decomposed 3/4 mile up Hill Gr. from the trap ,, TABLE 12 * DEER TRAPPED AND TAGGED AT THE JDvlMY BEAR RANCH, SOMMERSET, COLORADO - WINTER 1963-64 DATE 11/26 11/27 11/27 11/29 11/29 11/30 12/1 12/2 SEX Female Female Female AGE TAG NUMBER Fawn Doe Fawn Doe Fawn Doe Fawn Fawn A-465 A-466 A-467 A-468i A-469 A-470 A-471 A-472 REMARKS �TABlE 13 -)£; DEER TRAPPED AND TAGGED AT THE JIMMY BEAR RANCH, SOMMERSET, COLORADO - WINTER 1964-65. . . . DATE 12/16 12/17 12/18 12/18 12/18 12/19 12/20 12/21 12/23 1/10 1/16 1/17 1/18 1/19 1/19 1/20 1/21 1/22 1/29 2/5 2/13 2/14 2/14 2/15 SEX M:l.le M:l.le Female Male M:l.1e M:l.le M:l.le M:l.le M:l.le Male Male Male 116 Fema.Le 2/22 2/25 3/1 Yale I) '-. f Female AGE TAG NUMBER Fawn Fawn Fawn Fawn Fawn Buck Buck Fawn Fawn Fawn Fawn Doe Fawn Fawn Bucl\ Buck Buck Buck Buck Buck Buck Buck B:u:ck Fawn Doe Buck Fawn Doe A-474 A-476 A-477 A-478 A-479 A-480 A-481 A-482 A-483 A-484 A-485 A-486 A-487 A-488 A-489 A-490 A-491 A-492 A-493 A-494 A-495 A-496 A-497 A-498 A-499 1477 1478 1479 REMARKS .- , , ~- ��July, 1965 PART 2 Work Plan No. Job No. 1 ---'5~ Title of Job Experimental Trapping and Marking Techniques Period Covered: April 1, 1964 through March 31, 1965. Personnel: _ Ray Boyd, Gene Green, Cliff Coghill, Bob Keiss and Richard Denney. ABSTRACT Neckbanding Elk from a Helicopter. Techniques developed for neckbanding and eartagging elk using a helicopter are of two types: (1) immobilization with ~Qscle relaxants using Cap~Chur equipment; and (2) jumping on the animals in deep snow from the helicopter. One hundred and three elk were neckbanded and eartagged using the helicopter during the period of January 19 to February 23, 1965, in the Williams Fork of the Yampa, Middle Park and the Rio Grande areas. Of these, 64 we~e jumped on from the helicopter. Drugs used for comparative studies were phencyclidine hydrochloride and succinylcholine chloride, both of which have advantages under specific conditions. Optimum dosages for adult cows averaged within 400 to 500 mg for the former, and 16 to 20 mg for the latter. �270 42 *T H E DEN V ER P 0 S T Sunday, Mar. 7,1965 The technique has its limitations. It's ·practical only in deep snow, where the animals can't move quickly, and where the "doggers" have something soft to land on when they miss the target. HE 'copter simply hovers over the floundering animal, Tand the bulldoggers leap out, usually from a height 5 to 10 feet. Once caught, the animal is thrown in the snow, metal tags applied to each ear, and a colored plastic necktie affixed. The biologist, if he's able, then makes his 'way to a spot where he can be picked up. NNN..V. •••••• Denney's new system is especially valuable in remote areas where the big "corral" trap is impractical. He says the operation is easier on animals than trapping, and the cost is about the same. That leaves only one problem. Ray Boyd, who is limping noticeably, wonders if the new methods might impose excessive wear and tear on personnel. Outdoor Empire".... Copters Serve Elk 'Wrestlers' ~.•,.~ ·.•· ·~.•.... .. · . · · ·--.--...ra · .- ·. By Col Queal fearless field men of the Game, Fish and Parks DeTHE partment frequently come to grips with their jobs in the most literal fashion. Most of them have wrestled trapped antelope or deer from time to time, and practically all have had brief personal encounters with skunks, squirrels and assorted small game. Four employes reached a new plateau in hand-to-hand g a m e management the past two weeks during the department's annual elk tagging program. The usual procedure is to trap the animals in large enclosures but Dick penney, chief of big game research, and an imaginative fellow, was struck with the fascinating idea of bulldogging the animals from a helicopter. A strapping 6-3 and over 200 pounds, Denney is the kind of guy who can, with equanimity, get ideas like this. This one worked almost perfectly. Denney and three others - Gene Green, Ray Boyd and Bob Keiss-banded 71 head of elk in two days, using two contract helicopters from Sky Hook, Inc. of Durango. Figure 2. Denver Post newspaper article describing elk jumping. �271 Neckbanding Elk from a Helicopter Richard N. De~~ey In the previous segment! s progress report we described the use of Cap-Chu.:r equipment from the helicopter, a Bell 47G3B, in our first experimental work of this nature on Long Ridge of the Rio Grande elk study area (Denney, 1965). During this segment the work was continued along the same lines to compare the effectiveness of the two compounds, phencyclidine hydrochloride and succ Lny Lcho.lIne chloride, on comparable situations. In this segment the first work was performed in the Williams Fork drainage of the Yampa River, a part of the White River Elk Study area (Game ~~nagement Unit 12). The results of this tagging and neckbanding program are reported on in this segment of the White River Elk Study report by RayBoy~. In addition, 72 elk were neckbanded and eartagged in the Middle Park area in three sites as a part of the Rocky Mountain Cooperative Elk Study, of which 21 were immobilized, and 51 were banded using a new technique that we developed ---jumping 0:::1 elk in deep snow out of the helicopter. The results of this work are reported 0!1 in this segment of the aforementioned study by Dick Denney. Thirteen animal.s were eartagged and neckbanded in the Rio Grande area, of which only one was immobilized and the remainder were jumped on. Tbe results of this work, and the teclmique of jumping, are reported on here for this job of the project. 1'echniques Used: 1. Immobilization of elk from the helicopter using Cap-Chur equipment mad.e by the Palmer Chemical and Equipment Company of Douglasvi.lle, Geo:::'gia.The compounds phencyclidine hydrochloride (Sernylan) and succinylchol.:Lnech.l.or-Lde (Anectine) were used in the automatic-injecting syringes f'Lr-ed from the CapChur gun at ranges approximating 10 yards. Tttehelicopter must maneuver- the elk into open areas where they can be shot and subsequently hazed away from timber) heav brush or steer canyon areas urrtI.L immobilized. After ne ckbandf.ng and eartagging the animals, they were g:Lven injections of approximately 4000,000 units of Penicillin, and one cc of Stearane (a synthetic cortisone compound), and the injection site was treated with Furacin to combat local. infection. L'l some cases of extreme effect when the diaphragm was also paralyzed, artificial respiration by ribcage and diaphragmic manipulation was necessary to revive the elk. Data on drJ.gsand. dosages used, as well as times of latent periods) immobilization and recovery were recorded in each Lnstance . �2. The technique of jumping on the elk from the helicopter was developed this winter as a result of several factors: a. Snowfall was much heavier than usual this winter, resulting in concentration of elk herds in smaller and lower winter ranges where the snow was less deep and more forage was available than in normal winter rangesj and, b. Due to this type of winter the animals were in poorer condition than normal because of bucking deep snows and the scarcity of available forage. Being in poorer condition, the effects of both drugs were erratic and unpredictable, depending on the locality, the condition of the individual animals, and the site of injection. Therefore, to reduce possible mortality, and to prevent the added stress of being down for any period of time, we developed the idea of jumping astride them when in snow from one to three feet deep. This idea stemmed from the fact that while pursuing a bunch with the helicopter we noticed that they would soon tire from the deep snows, and would string out with several stragglers bringing up the rear. These laggers were generally calves, but included yearling bulls and sometimes old cows. The animals would sometimes stop to blow, but when we sat the helicopter down to walk over to them, they would get up and run after the herd on the broken trail through the snow at greater speed than a man could run. So, we began by hovering over a panting animal, and dropping out of the helicopter astraddle of it. This then developed into doing the same thing, but to running animals, and progressed from calves to adults. In a foot or more of snow it is fairly easy for one man to keep the animal down with slight pressure by sitting on it while slipping the neckband over its head, and applying the eartags to each ear. Calves, of course, had to be checked for sex to record in the data. An important factor in this method is to remember that the helicopter, in this case a Bell 47G3B, reacts like a pendulum when the tagger jumps out, that is, it swings over toward him as he leaves it, so it is essential that he jump far enough to the side, and from high enough, so that the helicopter passes over him after he jumps. Our jumps were most efficiently performed from five to ten feet high, and from four to five feet to the side. �273 Results: 1. Lmmobilization. As mentioned previously, the results of the comparative effective~ess of Sernylan and Anecti~e are reported elsewhere on this project for this segment (Work Plan 2, Job 7, White River Elk Study; and Work Plan ll.A.,Jor) 4,. RockyMou..ntainCooperative Elk Study). Of the animals neckbanded and eartagged on the Rio Grande, however, only one was im.rnobilized,using succinylcholine chloride. She was in the Clear Creek area, a two year old cow, and was downed with the pistol using 16 mg total dosage in six minutes. Soon after down she stopped breathing, and only after artificial respiration by ribcage and diaphragm manipulation did she metabolize enough of the drug to regain the use of her diaphragm and begin breathing on her own again in ten to fifteen minutes. She was given an injection of Penicillin, Stearane and treated with Furacin. In checking back in an hour'S time she had regained her feet and moved into a timbered area. This was a very light dose of the drug, hardly enough to immobilize an animal in good condition, although she appeared to be in average or better shape. This again pointed out the fact that the condition of the individual animal is of prime concern in determing dosages of Anectine. One advantage of succinyl, however, is that if the animal iSI1't killed, it overcomes the effects rapidly and is not down for a great period of time. 2. Jumping. Table 1 lists and summarizes the elk neckbanded in the Rio Grande on Feb~~ary 23 and 24, 1965, using rocket red neckbands on 12 and pink on one. Twelve of these elk were banded by the jumping technique, and the one discussed previously by imrn6bilization. Of the 12 jumped on, five were bull calves, four were cow calves , two were of unde t.ermfned sex, and one was an adult cow. Sometimes the calves were able to get away before the last. operat.ion of the method was performed, that of checking the sex of the calf, apparently thus explaining the two of unde+erm.ined sex. They all ran off when released, none the worse for their experience. �TABLE 1 - RIO GRANDE ELK BANDDJG FROM THE HELICOPTER, TAG NO. NECKBAND SL-76 SL-77 SL-78 SL-79 SL-80 SL-81 SL-82 SL-83 SL-84 SL-85 SL-86 No tags SL-87 Rocket Red Rocket Red Rocket Red Rocket Red Rocket fted Rocket Red Rocket Red Rocket Red Rocket Red Rocket Red No collar Rocket Red Pink FEBRUARY 23-24, 1965· LOCATION SEX AGE Clear Creek Clear Creek Clear Creek CQ..earCreek Clear Creek Miners Creek Texas Creek Texas Creek Male Female Calf Calf Calf Calf 2 Calf Calf Calf Calf Calf Calf Mature Calf ? Male Female Male Female Female Female Male Male Female W. Bellows Cr. ? TECHNIQUE Jump Jump Jump Jump 16mg. Succinyl Jump Jump Jump Jump Jump Jump Jump Jump COMMENTS Art. Re spir., survi ved O.K. I\) -.J .j::"" Summary: Calves Adults Sex No. Male Female Undet. Female 5 4 2 2 Total Comments Very successful technique, Jumping from helicopter. 11 2 13 One immob., one jumped on. �275 During the work on. the Rio Grande, Harold C. Palmer, President, Palmer Chemical and Equipment Company, accompanied us and filmed some spectacCllar footage with his 16 mm movie camera of the elk jumping technique In these movies the sideways swing of the helicopter towards the jQmper can be clearly observed. It was this phenomenom, plus jumping from too near the gr ound , that resulted in Ray Boyd pulling a ligament in his knee in the ~liddle Park operation. lli. addi-, tion, Me. Palmer obtained some beautiful color footage on immobilization of elk on the Williams Fork operation in which the syringe can be seen from the gun muzzle to the elk. Dt scussLoru The immobilization of elk from the helicopter is a unique adaptation of tools available to wildlife workers. Under normal conditions it is a fairly practical and efficient manner in which to neckband and eartag elk. It is only economically justified, however, when conditions of herd habits, forage availability and accessibility prevent the use of the group livetraps in an intensive elk study area. When snow or general winter conditions are such that the conditiml of the elk in the area may be below normal winter situations, the use of irnmobilizing agents is not r'ecommended on a large scale, due to the additional stress of being down for indefinite periods, and the unpr-ed.Lc tab Le effect of the drugs. When such is the case, however, the conditions are prime for the use of the elk jumping tecnJlique. One to three feet of snow appear to be ideal, and, add a certain safety feature for the ju.>npersin case of a miss or a high j-ump. Bu.l.Ld.ogg Lng is not recommended, but rather the bareback approach. Elk have long slender necks and may be sub ject to injury when bulldogging, as well as the fact that the jurrr.fler is anterior to the front legs, which one has to wa tch particularly because of the danger or strik.ing. ~Thebareback method keeps the jum er behind those front feet, and on top of the animal, plus the fact that the initial impact of landing he Lps put the elk down on its brisket. 'Ihe snow not only cushions the ju,.'nper, but also the elk, softenL~~g the total impact, and preventirlg injury to the elk. We have fovnd that an athletic supporter adds considerably to tbe self confidence of the jumpeI'when barebacking. The method was originally deve Loped, however, in M.i.ddlePark without the luxury of such equipment. L"1. comparing the two methods, im.mobilization and Jumping, we have fOL:D.dthat the 'bes t possible rate of handling animals by immobilization, without any complications from overdoses, etc., is four elk per hour. In the jumping method this past winter, we were able to do 11 in an hour's time. It is possible that we can better this now that we know more about it, and when snow and herd conditions are optiNum. Figure 2 is a copy of a newspaper col-:.mmappearing in the M:l.rch7, 1965, Denver Post concerning the elk jumping technique of neckbanding. As a result of our experience in developing this method, we advised biologists in New JYT..exico on how to do it, and with the experience of our contract helicopter pilot, they also neckbanded a few elk in this marmer . �276 Recommendations: In the next and following segments of the project the use of drugs should be set up as a distinct job, and various available compounds should be investigated singly and in combination to obtain the most effecient and safe dosages for immobilizing Colorado big game animals. Drugs and dosages should be tested on both deer and elk in experimental enclosures for several replications before being used in the field. References Cited: 1. Denney, Richard N. 1965. Immobilization and tranquilization studies on Colorado deer and elk. Job Completion Report, Federal Aid, Colorado Game, Fish & Parks Department, July, 1965. pp. 12-19. Neckbanding Elk From a Helicopter Report Prepared by: Richard N. Denney Project Leader Date July, 1965 Approved by: Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief �July, 1965 277 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT S~MENT State of Colorado Project No. W-38-R-19 Work Plan No. 2 Title of Job: Period Covered: Name Deer-Elk Investigations Job No. 7 White River Elk Study April 1, 1964 through March 31, 1965. Personnel: Raymond J. Boyd, Eugene E. Green and Richard N. Denney . Other Research Branch personnel operated check stations during the 1964 season, as follows: Deep Creek - Francis Metsger, George Bear, Gary MYers and Dick Hopper; New Castle - Harold Swope, Glenn Rogers, Don Weber and Larry Finnell; Meeker - Wayne Sandfort, Bill Rutherford, Don Smith, Walt Burkhard and Robert Drummond; Rifle - George W. Jones and Eugene Green; and Idaho Springs Robert Tully. Gilbert N. Hunter, State Game Manager; Robert Tully, Principal Game Biologist; and Velma Merkle, Statistical Clerk, compiled much of the information contained in tables 5, 7, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14 and 15. Abstract: All of the field work on the elk winter range analysis is completed. Corrections and planimetering of the various vegetative types are in progress. Personnel of the White River National Forest are inking final ty~e, condition and type boundaries on the final maps. Reproductions of these maps will soon be available. Pre and post-season classification counts of the elk on the study area were taken with the helicopter and recording the data on a portable tape recorder. A pre-season ratio of 30 bulls (including spikes) per 100 cows and 59 calves per 100 cows was determined, while the pos,t-season classifica t.Lons indicated a ratio of 10 bulls (including spikes) per 100 cows and 62 calves per 100 cows. The total elk kill in the eight game management units within the study area, as determLDed by report card surveys, was 3,502 elk and was composed of 2,501 bulls, 881 cows and 120 calves. Aging of 1,000 elk at the special check stations indicated that 97.4% of the kill was in the portion of the elk herd under 5~ years old. The success ratio of the resident hunters was 29·48r;., while non-resident hunters enjoyed a success ratio of 32.27%. An elk population on the study area, after the 1964 hunting season, of 9,911 elk was projected using the sex and age data. �Recommendations: 1. Gather all data relative to the research studies on this elk herd and publish the results in a final major publication. Included in this final report should be recommendations to management relative to proper harvest, ideal sex and age ratios, and range rranagement recomrr~ndations. 2. Drop this job as such, except for the publication segment, and continue sex and age data work and hunter harvest surveys on the study area under another work plan and job number (Work Plan llC, Job No.1 - White River Elk study) until results of special elk hunting recommendations on the study area are known. These recommendations resulted from data gathered by this job. Objectives: To evolve a sound management plan for the White River elk herd, based upon sound, factual biological data. ,Techniques Used: This st.udy1'7illbe carried out in four phases: (1) Range surveys; (2) Population analysis; (3) Hunter harvest surveys; and (4) Range improvement. The White River elk herd study area is located in northwest Colorado within the area bOQnded by the Yampa and Bear River on the north and east, the Colorado River on the east and south, and Colorado Highway 13 on the west. This study comprises eight game management units (12,~13, 23, 24, 25, 26, 33 and 34) which have been set up by the Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department for better management of big game herds. Phase 1 -- Range Surveys: With the exception of a few isolated checks on various areas that could not be surveyed the first year of the range studies, this portion of the job is completed as far as field work is concerned. It is being reincluded in this year's segment in order to give us enough time for statistical analysis, if it can be done, and a complete detailed w~ite-up of this phase of the study. Step 1. :tvapherd unit boundaries and seasonal ranges, map the important vegetative types and subtypes on 2-inch to the mile planimetric maps for the total herd,range. Aerial photos will be used as a basis for mapping the .vegetative types. A system of well-defined types and subtypes will be decided upon in advance. llieexact procedure is outlined in the InterAgency Big C~me Range Analysis whi~ is now being used in the Colorado area by the U .~S.Forest Service and the Game, Fish and Parks Department for managing big game winter ranges. Step 2. Select and map key areas on winter and summer range. Key areas will probably be mapped on a more intensive scale. They will be selected by the field crews during the initial range inventory and condition and trend survey. �279 Step 3· Range condition, composition, density and trend. These factors will be determined by ocular reconnaissance, using three-quarter inch loops on Pilced transects, by the field crews during the initial mapping surveys. Transects and angle guage readings, distributed mechanical~J or at random, will be employed to check the accuracy and to standardize results., Type maps, completed by other agencies, which are of a similar nature and which would have application, will be used where possible. Inter-agency cooperation will be encouraged on all phases'of the study. ,Step 4. Determine the key browse species. Key browse species will be selected on the basis of abundance, past hedging, availability observation, and stomach samples. Step 5· Classify the range with regard to usability, availability, and over-all importance. This classification will be based on information derived from the initial range surveys. The results can be superimposed on one of the range maps for better interpretation. Step 6. Production-utilization analysis. Transects will be employed on key areas to make annual determinations of production and utilization of the key plants, especially on the winter range. Information derived from the first five steps will be used in locating the permanent transects. Information derived from these transects will be correlated with population data in an attempt to relate animal numbers, or elk-days-of-use, with proper range use. The number and location of the transects will vary annually until the optimum sample size and distribution is achieved for an adequate appraisal of range use. Analysis of the transect data will be done on a herd-unit basis. Transects will eventually be turned over to the local field personnel (W.C.O. !sand rangers) for annual reading. Phase 2 -- Population Analysis: Step 1. Sex and age class composition. The elk herd sex and age structure will be determined from pre- and post-season classification counts and the sex and age composition of the kill. The pre- and post-season sex ratios will be obtained using a helicopter, with all ratio counts being recorded on a portable tape recorder for later extraction. Proper time of year (month) to obtain these co-unts, optimum sample size and procedure, and proper analysis and procedure will be important phases of this study. The age sample of the kill will be determined by dentition at check stations aroQnd the study area. Emphasis will be placed on determining a sufficiently accurate sample of the kill, and proper analysis and interpretation of such post-mortem data. �280 Step 2. Pre- and post-season population estimate. This population estimate will be determined by mathematical projection of the pre-and postseason sex and age ratio data. Effort will be made to derive some sort of statistical analysis of the pre- and post-season sampling, making possible a confidence statement regarding the population estimate. step 3. Compilation of life tables. These tables will be compiled from 'the annual sex and age ratio data. There will be considerable effort to properly analyze and interpret the data revealed by this type of presentation of population data. Step 4. Annual herd increment. Herd increase will be determined from annual sex and age ratio classifications, kill-age classifications at check stations, and yearling kill figures from hunter report card returns. Step 5. Abundance and distribution on winter and key areas. Movement, distribution, and abundance will be determined by ground and aerial observation during the spring and fall classification counts, pellet group counts, and range utilization determinations. step 6. Physical characteristics. Two elk per month may be taken within the study area in order to get the following data: a. Food habits from stomach analysis. b. Ovarian analysis to get additional information on herd increment. c. Measurements (body weight, height, correlation of eye lens weight with age and range conditions, etc.) d., Analysis of bones and tissues for fallout accumulation. e. Blood samples and standard analysis of such samples. f. L~cidence and kinds of parasites. g. Endocrine gland analysis. h. Other information as might be required by the Coll~ge of Veterinary Medicine at Colorado State University. �281 Phase 3 -- Hu..n.ter Harvest Surveys: Most hunter harvest data will be obtained thro-ugh post-mortem exam:ination of the animals at special big game check stations around the study area and at the Rifle and Idaho Springs stations, and from the hunter report card returns. All hunter report· card data will be furnished by the Game M:magement Division, C.ilbert N. Hunter, State Game :M:l.nager; Robert Tully, Principal Game Biologist and Velma Merkle, Statistical Clerk. The elk aging technique, based upon tooth replacement and wear (Quimby and Gabb, 1957), will be used for determining the age composition of the kill. The age-pyramid, survival and mortality-curve methods of analysis will be used to aid in the interpretation of these data. Effort will be made to determine the influence of present managemeht practices (validations, type seasonJ opening date, etc ., hunt.Lng pressure and distribution, hunt.er-selectivity, weather, etc. ), on the success ratio and sex and age st.r-uc ture of.the kill . .step 1. Sex ratio of the kill, by unit and herd. Ste~ 2. Age composition of the kill, by unit and herd. ---_. ,Step 3· Analysis of the yearling kill . .Step 4. Analysis of validations - effectiveness, applicationy etc. Step 5· Success ratios - over-all and by validations. Step 6. H~n.ting pressure and distribution - by aerial and ground observation and report card surveys. Step 7· Weather influences on game and hunt.er-s- by field observation and check station inquiryPhase 4 -- Range Irqprovement: Step 1. T1'ltensivelymap key areas on 8-inch to the mile aerial photos. These--key areas are already delimited on maps from Phase 1 of this job. Supplemental information on these w~ps, over and above that already on the 2-inch to the mile planimetric maps, will be height of browse plants (particularly in oakbrush 'types}, sud, tabili ty of terrain for mechanical range improvement methods i.e., caterpillar tractors and chains, blading, etc., and acreages of areas that may be modified by'mechanical means or by burning or spraying. Step 2: These key areas will be looked at in cooperation with the U.S. Forest Service in order to put the multiple-use concept into practice in these areas. Select an area on the South Fork of the White River for an experimental range man.tpu.Lat.Lon project that initially will entail spraying 40 acres of oakbr-ush with 2,4-D or 2,4,5-1' by use of the helicopter. Funds for this experimental work will be furnished by the U.S. Forest Service. �282 step 3. Intensively transect, photograph, and observe use on the spray area, both before and after treatment. The transects to be run yearly to see how fast the oak will resprout and how much forage is produced. Some clip plots may be set up to determine pounds of forage before spraying vs. pounds of forage after spraying. Step 4. Evaluate the effectiveness of the spray program from the standpoint of cost per acre to spray, number of years it takes the brush to resprout and furnish usable amounts of elk forage and if the amount of forage produced is worth the cost of manipulation, . Step 5. On limited areas, see how spraying may effect such browse plants as serviceberry, bitterbrush, chokecherry, and mountain mahogany. If it is possible lightly to spray these plants to encourage resprouting, this could be a definite management too. �White River Elk Study Raymond J. Boyd Phase 1 - Range Surveys: All of the field work concerned with this job is completed. Final corrections of type lines and designations is now being carried out by personnel of the White River National Forest at Glenwood Springs, Colorado. Final copies of the maps with all vegetative types, acreages, browse condition and trend data will be available to the Colorado Department of Game, Fish and Parks in the near future for inclusion in the final management plan for this important elk herd. Phase 2 - Population Analysis: 1. Sex and Age-Class Composition of the White River elk herd. The 1964 pre-season sex and age-ratio counts of the White River elk herd were made from September 16 through September 22. These counts were concentrated in Game Management Units 23, 24, 33 and 34. The COQDtS are tabulated as follows: Bulls Spikes Cows 1 2 5 2 1 10 1 3 17 10 1 9 9 4 1 4 1 1 3 2 2 4 1 1 2 2 4 1 3 9 4 17 19 2 4 1 19 93 32 14 31 31 1 67 17 5 11 31 4 1 12 7 63 58 10 17 45 4·5 117 11.7 525 52.6 Calves Location Total 45 11 4 6 23 1 2 5 6 36 44 4 16 3 34 155 61 23 53 72 1 120 30 9 20 61 8 3 27 19 118 125 17 40 Dry Sweetwater Buck Creek South Fork down to Campground Park Creek Lost Solar Creek South Fork Campgr-ound,to Buford Marvine Creek Boiler Creek Canyon Creek No-Name Creek Greenstreet Creek East Rifle Creek Grizzly Creek Deep Creek Sweetwater-Deep Creek Divide Sweetwater Creek Patterson Creek Sleepy Cat Peak area Sand Peak Pagoda Peak area Head of the Williams Fork 312 31.2 999 100 Total Percent 10 40 17 8 12 22 A total of 999 elk were classified resulting in a ratio of 30 bulls (including spikes) per 100 cows and 59 calves per 100 cows. �284 The 1964 post-season sex and age-ratio counts of the White River elk herd were made from December 1 through December 4. Snow storms and poor visibility prevented us from classifying any of the south side of the study area. The counts are tabulated as follows: ~ture Bulls Young Bulls 2 3 1 2 2 Spikes Cows Calves Total Location 4 1 35 67 7 37 9 27 124 126 106 13 52 54 95 419 48 5 17 51 5 21 7 15 89 80 56 10 40 24 53 251 36 3 59 124 12 66 18 43 225 211 168 24 94 92 159 718 85 8 Head of Coal Creek Milk Creek Oak Ridge Little Beaver Creek Big Beaver Creek Morapos Creek Big Beaver Creek North Fork above Buford Fawn Creek Salt Park North Fork above Fawn Creek Buford Peak area South Fork, Budge's down South Fork, Campground down North Elk Creek East Miller Creek 101 1,224 4.8 58.1 758 36 1 6 2 1 10 5 6 1 1 2 2 4 1 11 9 44 1 8 '0.4 15 0·7 1 1 2,106 Total 100 Percent A total of 2,106 elk were classified resulting in a ratio of 1.8 mature bulls per 100 cows, 10 bulls (all ages) per 100 cows and 62 calves per 100 cows. _,;:!l'h~·C,alves were larger for this time of year than I have ever seen since I have worked on this project. This may be the reason that the calf ratios are lower than they have been in the past. The classification counts in 1964 were lower on the bull ratios than they have ever been since the classification work was started in 1957. The calf ratios were the second lowest since starting this job. All of the pre- and post-season classification counts since the study began are tabulated below for comparative purposes. �Table 1 - Pre.,..Season Classification Counts, 1957 thru 1964 White River Elk Herd, Colorado. Ratio Year Bulls 1957 1958 1959 1960 1961 1962 1963 1964 100* 87* 146* 91 135 118 103 45 Total 825 Spikes Cows Calves Total -------------~--------- Bulls Cows Calves 127 145 121 106 117 226 164 317 325 623 491 410 525 123 117 205 209 461 315 285 312 449 368 668 752 1,364 1,045 904 999 44 53 46 67 47 49 51 30 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 54 71 64 64 74 64 64 59 616 3,081 2.027 6,549 46 100 65 Table 2 - Post-Season Classification Counts, 1957 thru 1964 White River Elk Herd, Colorado. Ratio Year Bulls ·1957 1958 1959 1960 1961 1962 1963 1964 50* 93* 81* 30 50 51 26 23 Total 454 Spikes Cows Calves .Total ----------------------Bulls Cows Calves 63 115 135 43 101 278 356 238 451 881 764 638 1,224 279 320 222 409 818 561 459 758 607 769 541 953 1,862 1,511 1,166 2,106 18 25 34 21 19 24 11 10 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 90 93 91 93 73 72 62 457 4,830 3,826 9,515 18 100 79 * Spikes included with bulls in these counts. �286 The 1964 total elk kill in the eight game management units within the study area was determined to be 3,502 .animals.. These kill figUresa:re based upon hunter report card returns and statistical projections of the results of the report card returns.' During the 1964 big game season, we had three special check stations on the study area (Meeker, Newcastle and Deep Creek). The regular Game Management check stations at Rifle and Idaho Springs also ch~cked and aged alk from the study area. The Meeker check station- checked out 553 elk; Deep Creek, 338elkj Newcastle, 321 elk; Rifle, 137 elk and ,Idaho Springs, 32 elk from the study area. Table 3 - Age and Sex of the 1964 -Elk Kill Checked through Five Checking Stations, White River Area, Colorado. Age Calves l~ 21. Bulls Cows 29 41 602 23 151 23- Total Percent 70 6·9 625 62.1 174 17·3 2 41. 3~ 61. 7~ ~2 9+ 5 2 4- 0 1 0 .-0 7 6 1 0 2 5~ 29 30 - 30 22 7 5 2 59 5·9 52 5·2 12 2 97.4% 2. .Population Estimate: Results of Classification· Counts and Hunter Harvest on the Study Area: Pre-season Kill Post-season Bulls Cows 'Calves Total Cows .and Calves 162 2,501 124 525 881 1,224 312 120 758, 999 3,502 2.106 837 1,001 1,982 Bulls to Unantlered -Ratios and Kill Pre-season Kill Post-season Bulls Cows Calves Total 30 2,501 10 100 881 100 59 120 62 3,502 1 : 5·17 1 15·98 �~opulation~rojection x = number of cows in fall before hunting season .30 x = number of bulls in fall before hunting season x - 881 = number of cows after hunting season ·30 x - 2,501 = number of bulls after hunting season .10 (x - 881) also = number of bulls after hunting season thus: .30 x - 2,501 = .10 . (x - 881) .30 x 2,501 .10 x - 88 .30 x - .10 x = 2,413 .20 x = 2,413 x 12,065 cows in the fall before hunting season .30 x 3,619 bulls in the fall before hunting season 7,118 calves in the fall before hunting season .59 x Total fall population Less total kill Total post-season pop. 22,802 3,502 19,300 Composed of: Bulls 1,139 ( 5.9%) Cows 11,213 (58.1%) Calves 6,948 (36 %) 3· Abundance and Distribution on Summer and Winter Ranges: All field work has been accomplished on this phase of the job. The maps of seasonal distribution will not be included in this report as they are being worked up for the final publication concerning this job. 4. Physical Characteristics: During the past segment five elk were collected for complete necropsy examinations. Most of the elk were collected by using the helicopter to locate the elk and then shooting them from the 'copter with a Cap-Chur gun, loaded with a lethal dose of Sucostrin (60 mg.). This method of collection reduced the possibility of destroying organs and glands needed for study. Because of the expense involved, some elk were collected with a rifle during the winter when they were concentrated in the river bottoms of the South Fork. A Sno-Cat was used in these cases to transport the elk to a pickup by which it was hauled to the Rifle Falls Fish Hatchery where the necropsies were run. Figure 2 notes the collection locations of all 24 elk taken for this section of the job. ]able 4 lists a partial summary of the necropsy data that has been collected on the five elk mentioned above. Phase 3 - Hunter Harvest Surveys The sex ratio of the 1964 elk kill from the study area, as determined by the report cards and check station data, are listed in Tables 5 and 6. �288 TabLe 4 - Partial Summary of Elk Physiology Studies , 1963-64, White River Elk Study, Colorado. Elk Number: 20 21 22 23 24 Date Collected 4/14 4/14 6/16 8/4 . 9/17 ------------------------------------------------------------~~----------------Age 5 3/4 3 3/4 Total Body Weight 462 4241.. 2 Dressing Percentage 2 59·1% 62.5% 81t in. 4· 2 1/2 517 462 --------------------------------------------------------------------~----------Total Body Length 85 in. 83 in. Ki.dney Fat Index 10.63 .'7.03 90 in. '78in. 12.08 40·3 -----------------------~------------~-~---~~---------~------------------------Heart Volume 1,819·5 cc. 1,130.9 cc. 1,033.5 cc. 1,432·5 cc. 1,293.3 cc. Brain Volume .3'71. 5 cc . 123.2 cc. 356.'7cc. • 365.1 cc . i. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 18.6 gm. Hemoglobin 16.1 gm. 19.'7gm. 21.6 gm , ------------------------------------------------------~------~----------~-----Erythrocytes 9·05 9·59 10·9'7 53% 5'7% ---------------------------~---------------------------------------------------- Hematocrit Leucocytes ;~~~~~;~~ 2050 43'75 - - - - - - - -25%- - - - - - - - - -52%- -7 - --- ~- 1800 38% -- - - - -- - - - -- -- - - - - -- - - - - 2_2%- - - - -- ------------------------------------------------------------------------------Lymphocytes 47% Monocytes 11 40% 45% 46% 8 --------------~-----------~-----------------~-~~-----------------------------11 8 Eosinophils 9 �Table 5 - Sex Ratio of the 1964 Elk Kill on the White River Elk Study Area Based Upon Hunter Report Card Returns and Projections Unit Bulls % Cows % Calves % Total 12 13 23 24 25 26 33 34 341 303 407 776 192 119 203 160 90.4 95·9 59·5 65 ·3 71.4 64·3 79·0 70.8 28 13 238 337 66 54 50 55 7·5 4.1 34.8 31.7 24·5 29·2 19.4 24·3 8 2.1 39 35 11 12 4 11 5·7 3·0 4.1 6·5 1.6 4·9 377 316 684 1,188 269 185 257 226 Total 2,501 71.4 881 25·2 120 3·4 3,502 Table 6 - Sex Ratio of the 1964 Elk Kill on the White River Elk Study AreaBased Upon Data From Five Checking Stations Unit Bulls % Cows % 12 13 23 24 25 26 33 34 39 7 137 491 69 5 123 34 84.8 87·5 59·02 67·2 65·7 62·5 75·5 65·4 7 15·2 75 212 30 3 29 14 32·3 29·0 28.6 37·5 17·8 26·9 Total 905 67·3 370 27·5 Calves % 1 20 28 6 12·5 8·7 3·8 5·7 11 4 6·7 7·7 46 8 232 731 105 8 163 52 70 5·2 1,345 Total The yearling kill figures, based upon the hunter report card returns, is concerned only with the bull kill, while the check station data includes both bulls and cows. In the 625 yearling elk checked through the stations, there were 23 yearling cows. �290 Table 7 - Yearling Kill, 1964 Big Game Season, White River Elk Study Area, Colorado. Card Projection Unit Check Station Data --------------------------------------------Number iy Number i?J 12 13 23 __24 25 26 33 34 240 136 369 600 199 45 117 99 65·19 43·17 57·29 52.08 38·37 26.42 46.39 46.05 29 4 110 331 32 2 84 33 74.4 50.0 60.8 63.9 50.8 40.0 64.1 54.1 Total 1,705 48·7 625 62.1 Y These figures are based upon all elk that were aged g; These figures based upon b~ll elk only Table 8 - Antler Points By Age Class of Male Elk Killed During the 1964 Big Game Seasbn, White River Elk Study Area, Colorado. Age 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Range of Points on Left Side Range of Points on Right Side Number of Elk 1 - 7 1 - 5 5 - 6 2 -6 4 - 7 5 - 5 6 J 6 1 -6 1 - 5 5 -6 1 -6 5 -7 5 - 5 6 -6 589 69 20 21 2 1 1 �291 The success ratio of hunters that had hunters choice elk permits for the 1964 big game season in the study area, based upon report card returns, is listed below in Table 9. Table 9 - Total Elk Kill on Hunters Choice Pe,rmits, 1964 Unit 12 13 23 24 25 33 34 26 Number of Permits Success Ratio of Permits Bulls Cows Calves Total 50 142.0 22 41 8 71 693 750 97·3 X X X 150 88.0 w 200 63·0 14 27 2 7 5 8 238 377 22 50 55 98 39 35 4 4 11 19 291 439 28 61 71 125 684 1,188 90 257 226 364 1,150 81.1 85 881 120 1,086 3,502 Area B B E E Total Animals Killed on Permits --------------------------------------Total Kill The success ratio of all hunters on the elk study area in 1964 is shown below in Table 10. Table 10 - Total Hunt.er-s , Total Elk Kill and Success of All Hunters, 1964 - White River Elk Study Area, Colorado. Number Unit An.Lma.LsKilled of Hunters Success Ratio Bulls Cows Calves Total 12 13 23 24 25 26 33 34 1,390 1,116 2,361 3,093 979 674 1,190 839 27% 28% 29% 38% 27% 27% 22% 27% 341 303 407 776 192 119 203 160 28 13 238 377 66 54 50 55 8 39 35 11 12 4 11 377 316 684 1,188 269 185 257 226 Total 11,642 30% 2,501 881 120 3,502 ------------------------------ �292 The total elk kill, number of hunters and success of resident and nonresident hunters are shown below in Tables II and l2. Table II - NQmber of Non-Resident Hunters, Total Elk Kill and Success Ratio, 1964 Big Game Season - White River Elk Study Area. Number of Hunters Success Ratio Bulls l2 l3 23 24 25 26 33 34 327 220 587 674 l49 l04 280 l47 26·3% 28.2% 29·6% 44.l% 34.2% 23.l% 22.l% 32.0% 82 62 ll3 192 29 l6 5l 32 6l 97 22 4 II II Total 2,488 32.2% 577 206 Unit Animals Killed -----------------------------Cows Calves Total 4 4 86 62 l74 297 5l 24 62 47 20 803 8 4 Table l2 - Number of Resident Hunters, Total Elk Kill and Success Ratio, 1964 Big Game Season - White River Elk Study Area. Number of Hunters Success Ratio Bulls Cows Calves Total l2 l3 23 24 25 26 33 34 l,063 896 l,774 2,4l9 830 570 910 692 27.4% 259 24l 28.3% 294 28·7% 36.8% 584 26.3% l63 28.2% l03 2l.4% l52 25.9% ____ l28 28 l3 l77 280 44 50 39 44 4 7 29l 254 510 89l 218 l6l 195 l79 Total 9,l54 29·7% l,924 675 lOO 2,629 Unit Animals Killed ------------------------------ 39 27 II 8 4 �293 The total hunter pressure, by both resident and non-resident hunters, on the study area since the study was started in 1957 is shown below in Table 13. Table 13 - Total Number of Hunters, Kill and Success Ratio since 1957 on the White River Elk Study Area, Colorado (8 :Management units) Year Item 1957 Resident Hunters Non-Resident Hunters Total Pressure Kill Success 4,368 1,003 22·96% 755 227 30.07% 5,123 1,230 24.01% 1958 Pressure Kill Success 4,324 1,095 25.32% 750 327 43.60% 5,074 1,422 28.02% 1959 Pressure Kill Success 4,266 1,181 27.68% 702 274 39.03% 4,968 1,455 29·29% 1960 Pressure Kill Success 4,322 1,440 33.32% 877 379 43.22% 5,199 1,819 3,4.99% 1961 Pressure Fill Success 5,765 1,571 27.25% 1,249 393 31.47% 7,014 1,964 28.00% 1962 Pressure Fill Success 6,533 1,553 23·77% 1,317 353 26.80% 7,850 1,906 24.28% 1963 Pressure Kill Success 7,085 1,577 22.26% 1,850 628 33.94% 8,935 2,205 24.68% 1964 Pressure Kill Success 9,154 2,629 29.70% 2,488 803 32.20% 11,642 3,502 30.00% Total Pressure Kill Success 45,817 12,049 26·30% 9,988 3,384 33.88% 55,805 15,503 27·78% �294 During the 1964 big game season, non-resident hunters came from 34 states. A breakdown of the hunting pressure,by units, by state of residence, is shown below in Table 14. Table 14 - Hunting Pressure by Unit, by State of Residence, during the 1964 Big Game Season - White River Elk Study Area, Colorado. Unit: 12 13 Alabama Arizona Arkansas California Florida Illinois Indiana Iowa Kansas Kentucky Louisiana Massachusetts Michigan Mirmesota Mississippi Missouri Nebraska Nevada New Jersey New Mexico New York North Carolina North Dakota Ohio Oklahoma Permsy1vania South Dakota Termessee Texas Utah Virginia Washington West Virginia Wisconsin Unknown 2 5 3 23 24 25 26 33 34 Total % State: Total 67 5 8 10 9 35 3 42 6 14 5 34 8 3 16 6 53 3 5 3 16 16 5 11 2 2 6 5 8 6 3 48 8 5 6 2 2 24 3 8 29 199 8 21 8 16 5 5 13 13 3 79 13 2 8 3 2 32 24 18 5 46 11 3 43 234 14 19 19 19 66 6 3 19 6 3 53 6 8 3 8 2 22 18 13 3 10 56 8 37 21 8 2 5 8 5 5 3 8 2 3 13 .3 8 327 220 7 6 8 587 674 42 5 3 5 3 5 3 2 2 6 .5 32 8 19 2 5 2 5 40 8 3 5 8 3 8 15 8 5 11 2 5 42 32 2 19 8 2 3 5 8 3 2 21 2 3 5 64 2 24 5 10 14 11 2 149 6 5 3 104 280 147 10 11 77 706 21 83 76 59 186 27 16 6 64 40 6 311 53 34 10 36 15 3 2 78 94 61 18 15 274 29 3 7 3 50 6 2,488 28.4 7·5 12·5 11.0 �295 Resident hunters in 1964 came from 47 counties to hunt"in the study area. Table 15 shows the county of residence and unit hunted for the resident hunters. Table 15- HuMting Pressure by Unlt, by County of Residence, during the 1964 Big Game Season - White River Elk Study Area, Colorado. Unit : 12 Countt: Adams 52 Arapahoe 58 Baca Bent 66 Boulder Chaffee 6 Cheyenne 9 Clear Creek, Crowley Custer Delta 3 Denver 185 Douglas 9 Eagle 6 Elbert 6 EI Paso 38 Fremont Garf ie Id 14 Gi Ipin 3 Grand 4 Gunnison Huerfano Jefferson 67 Ki t Carson Lake Larimer 29 Las Animas Lincoln Logan 3 Mesa 72 Moffat 231 Montrose Morgan 9 otero Ouray Park Phi IIips 3 Prowers Pueblo 14 Rio Blanco 62 Routt 67 Sedgwick 3 Summit Tel Jer Washington 3 Weld 41 Yuma Total 111063 13 23 24 25 26 33 34 Total % 43 69 136 156 38 69 32 72 17 67 131 35 3 23 3 572 821 6 17 637 20 22 17 12 6 20 2,124 39 70 23 525 37 469 17 7 3 3 872 25 65 223 6 43 76 518 337 20 85 26 3 8 23 29 119 426 362 9 17 14 41 298 37 9,154 6.2 9.0 52 81 173 214 ""116 6 14 214 58 8 3 6 9 3 3 5 527 257 12 3 34 12 148 52 17 26 55 3 3 202 6 3 23 3 7 2 9 3 6 397 9 5 J25 6 38 -58 2 20 3 29 75 3 9 165 5 9 49 14 26 84 23 9 29 3 3 58 3 3 -160 3 18 6 181 52 6 3 61 8 191 3 214 6 26 139 8 3 3 275 15 II 70 6 14 41 168 8 8 17 87 78 23 17 12 6 75 5 8 23 67 9 3 6 29 20 15 101 3 9 6 3 6 5 9 -- 9 3 3 8 6 6 252 6 9 29 199 6 3 14 17 35 145 8 3 3 12 52 9 1,774 8 20 96 II 2,422 -3 3 29 6 3 26 3 896 23 8 3 20 17 3 23 II 830 579 903 3 12 8 6 23 684 6.9 23.2 5.7 905 �296 Information relative to the day of kill, by sex, is shown below in Tables 16 and 17Table 16 - Day of Kill, by Sex, by Unit - 1964 Big Game Season, White River Elk Study Area, Colorado_ Day of Kill Item Unit 12 Bull Cow Calf Total Unit 13 Bull Cow Calf Total Unit 23 Bull Cow Calf Total Unit 2 Bull Cow Calf Total Unit 25 Bull Cow Calf Total Unit 2 Bull Cow Calf Total Unit 33 Bull Cow Calf Total Unit 3 Bull Cow Calf Total ----------------------------------------1 2 8 4 6 3 5 7 9 Total 19 1 10 6 3 1 39 1 20 10 6 3 1 40 4 1 2 7 4 1 2 2 E 1 17 2 9 4 3 1 8 98 13 11 122 51 7 3 61 24 6 2 32 12 3 1 16 3 1 12 7 25 6 1 32 15 2 3 20 6 1 1 8 2 1 2 5 2 1 51 10 7 2 1 bE 2 2 4 1 2 3 '5" 60 4 4 68 35 2 5 42 15 1 2 18 3 1 3 1 29 7 2 38 11 6 1 1 8 1 62 17 8 87 39 230 24 11 265 3 5 47 11 13 2 2 7 1 2 4 1 1 1 1 2 4 5 1 9 6 3 4 2 445 61 28 7 2 534 130 28 20 178 114 7 11 132 47 8 4 59 �297 Table 17 - Day of 'Kill, by Sex - 1964 Big Game Season White River Elk Study Area, Colorado. Day of Kill Animal Killed ----------------------------------------- 6 7 8 9 Total Bull Cow Calf Total Percent 430 211 97 40 24 15 12 7 6 49 21 4 26 25 2 9 7 '515 257 '118 54 32 19 50.8 ~25·3 11.6 5·3 3·2 96.2% 6 2 4 5 2 E '9 2" 829 116 69 1,'014 1 2 3 4 5 Discussion: There will be no section discussing the findings presented in this report as the final publication is now in progress. Prepared by: Raymond J. Boyd Associate Wildlife Researcher Approved by: Richard N Denney Project Leader Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief Date July, 1965 ------------~~~~------------------ �N lEE Il1O IlLANCO • FIGURE STUDY 1.- ELK WINTER RANGE THAT -WAS TRANSECTED IN: IDI 1962 - S 1961 - 1963- ~ AREA LEGEND GAME MANAGEMENT UNIT BOUNDARY HIGHWAY -=-::;:;:= SECONDARY RIVER - Clll!EK~ PEAK LAKE _ ROAD ---- �299 N • STUDY FIGURE 2. - WlIITE RIVER ELK STUDY AREA - LOCATIONS OF 24 ELK COLLECTED FOR PHYSIOLOGICAL STUDIES LEGEND GAME MAHAGEMENT BOUNDARY IIGHWAY IlIVER - CREEK ~ LAKE UNIT =---<P SECONDARY 1963 - 1964. AREA _ ROAD ---- �300 N • STUOY AREA Figure 3.- Locations of Banded Elk Sightings Elk Kill Locations, and Tagged 1961, 1962, 1963, 1964. LEGEND GAME MANAGEMENT UNIT BOUNDARY HIGHWAY --:::;= SECONDARY il lC Trap Site • Tagged Elk Kill RIVER - CMEIC ~ Band Sighting LAKE •• ROAD ---- �July, 1965 301 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH 'PROJECT SEGMENT State of Colorado Project No. W-38-R-19 Work Plan No. 4 Job No. ~--~----~----~--~- Title of Job: Evaluation of Deer-Highway,Crossing Period Covered: Personnel: Name Deer~Elk Investigations 3 c Safety Measures April 1, 1964 through .March 31, 1965. Raymond J~ Boyd, Eugene E. Gre~n, George W. Jones, Marion Lowry of the Colorado Game, Fish ano. Parks Department. Glen Brunk, Fred Seiber and E.J. Green of the Colorado Department of Highways, and Lt. Frank Tomsic and Patrollman .Martin Remington of the Colorado State Patrol. Abstract: No deer used the crossing tubes under Hi~hway 50 near Sapinero during the past segment and no deer crossed under Highway 13 near Rio Blanco. Two and one-half miles of the Van de Ree deer mirrors were set up' on U. S. Highway 6 & 24 between Rifle and Grand Valley. Mirrors were set 100 feet apart on each side of th~ highway. The speed of 133 vehicles through the study area was determined and the average speed was 55 mph with a range from 30 mph to 8:2mph . There were only four deer reported killed in the study area from January 1, 1965 through March 31, 1965. Recommendations: 1. Continue to tally tracks of deer usi~g the crossing tubes under U. S. Highway 50 near Sapinero. If the deer do not seem to use the tubes, try and bait them through the tubes by using alfalfa hay inside the tubes. 2. Continue to count tracks of deer using the small creeks near Rio Blanco to cross under Highway 13. 3· Continue to evaluate the effectiveness of the deer-mirrors on U. S. Highway 6 & 24 near Rulison, Colorado according to amount of vandalLsm, maintenance (tightening and polishing mirrors) and numbers of deer killed in the mirror area. 4. Meet with the Colorado Department of Highways and the Colo~do state Patrol periodically concerning the problems of deer-auto accidents and the evaluation of the various devices used to lessen this toll. �302 Objectives: (1) To evaluate the effectiveness of the deer crossing tubes placed Qnaer U. S. Highway 50 near Sapinero,Colorado, in reducing or eliminating mortality of deer in this area from deer-auto collisions. (2) To evaluate the effectiveness of new types of highway warning signs and scare devices (Van de Ree deer mirror:::.) :L1 r-educIng the mortality of deer on U. S. Highway 6 & 24 near Grand Valley, Colorado. (3) To evaluate the effectiveness of wing-type fences to induce migrating deer' to cross under Colorado Highway 13 near Rio Blanco, Colorado. These fences to be placed aro-und natural crossing structures over srr~ll creeks in the area. Procedure: 1. The Bureau of Reclamation has constructed four (4) -ili~der-highway crossing tubes, seven feet in diameter under U. S. Highw-ay 50 near Sapinero, Colorado in conj1lnction with highway relocations that were necessary because of the construction of Blue Mesa Dam which is part of the curecant t Unit of t.heUppe r Colorado River storage Project. Conservation officers or the Experiment Station Manager of the Sapinero C~me Management Area will be reqQested to continue filling out the standard forms that were previously used in this study. Lnformation on the location and occurrence of deer-auto accidents will be noted and compared with the data from the past four years in the same area, prior to the installation of the crossing structures. In addition, deer tracks will be courrt.ed. inside the crossing t.ubes to determine the amount of use the game animals give the tubes. If it is evident that the animals are not using the tubes to any great degree, baiting the deer through the tubes will be tried, and as a last resort, a series of wing fences will be constructed to fvnnel the deer into the tubes and under the highway. 2. Two miles of "Blinker-Flasher" "posts will be built and installed along the shoulders of U. S. Highway 6 24 east of Grand Valley where there is a major crossing from the dry Book Cliff area to the Colorao_o River. New ty-pee. or designs of signs will also 'be developed and displayed in this area. Signs Lnf'crmfng the motoring public of the research study will also be placed. in this area to e~~lain the various devices and warning signs to them. The un Lf'or'm deer-auto accident form "Till cont.Lnue to be used in this area by the local Conservation Officer and one of the biologists assLgned to this project. Tnformation on occ~rrence and location of accidents will be gathered for comparisons of before and after determinations of mortality. & 3. To determine the amoQnt of use that deer give the regular bridges on Highway 13 near Rio Blanco while crossing the higrrway on their regular migrations in the spring and fall. 1~ere are existing bridges over 12, 13 and 14-mile creeks ~'1.derwhich deer tracks will be cOQnted during the migration period to determine use by the animals for safe crossing of the high-speed highway. WL'1.gfences may be constructed with the cooperation of the Colorado Department of High'Nays and the local landowners in an attempt to f'unneL the deer ~~der the highway. Baiting may also be tried in order to establish a pattern of 'use by the deer. Effectiveness of these operations will be determilled by continued use of the standard forms for reportingdeer-a~to accidents after these measures have been taken. �303 Evaluation of Deer-Highway Crossing Safety Measures Raymond J. Boyd From all information available at the present time, no deer used the crossing tubes under U. S. Highway 50 near Sapinero during the past segment. Press of other duties and the r~signation of Eugene Green from the department did not allow any time for counting tracks of deer that might use the bridge underpasses on Highway 13· The Game Management Division of the Colorado Department of Game, Fish and Parks purchased enough of the Van de Ree deer-mirrors for us to set up a two and one-half mile study section on U. S. Highway 6 & 24 west of Rifle, Colorado (Figure 1). The mirrors were mounted on steel posts every 100 feet on each shoulder of the highway. The posts were staggered so that there was a mirror every 50 feet on the highway (Figure 2). The mirrors come complete with a fastening strap that is drilled and tapped for t inch stove bolts. We added a lock nut on the inside of one of the bolts as an added precaution against vandalism (Figure 3)· The only vandalism that has occurred during the past segment to the mirrors was on the evening of January 31, 1965. A local TV show in Grand Junction was aired at 9:15 p.m. with State Patrol Lieutenant Frank Tomsic, Regional Information Officer Jesse Williams and myself. The program dealt with the mirror study area, what we were trying to accomplish and to ask people to leave the mirrors alone. We should just have kept quiet. The next morning a report came in to the Highway Maintenance Supervisor that some of the mirrors and posts were torn up. The final tally was eight posts broken off at ground level, four pulled and one bent over parallel to the groundj three mirrors missing, one bent and not useable, nine mirrors could be used again. There has been some limited vandalism since that time, but none of it occurred during the project year. Only four deer have been reported killed in the study area since the first of January, 1965. While this is encouraging, we feel that at least one full year must go by, and better two years of the mirro:ts,-before we can say how effective the mirrors are in reducing deer-auto accidents. Up to the present time it has not become necessary to polish the mirrors or to chop or cut weeds or other vegetative growth that might be hiding the mirrors from the headlights of vehicles traveling the highway at night. �',""7'. 304 The interest and cooperation of the Colorado Department of Highways and the Colorado state Patrol in this study cannot be overstated. The Highway Department aS$igned two men to help set up the posts along the h;ighway at the start of the study and the regular maintenance men in this sector are reporting any auto-killed deer to the local Conservation Officer. Colorado State Patrolman Martin Remington is keeping a close watch on the mirror study area in hopes of averting vandalism. Total cost of a project of this type cannot be estimated at the present time, as we do not know all of the maintenance problems that might come up over a period ofa year or more. The posts and mirrors cost a total of $2.45 for materials, but no oth~r costs are available at the present time. Bibliography Nettles, Kenneth. 1964. .Mirrors to reduce deer-auto collisions. Trans. Midwest WiJi.dlifeConference Bloomington, Indiana. 8 pp., illus. Prepared by: Raymond J. Boyd Associate Wildlife Researcher Date: July,. 1965 Approved by: Richard N. Denney Project Leader Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief �,.~ RIFLE o ~ r-f STUDY AREA .~ ~ ell .s w o VI • S. Highway 6 & 24----' FIGURE 1.- VICINITY MAP - VAN de REE DEER MIRROR STUDY AREA - COLORADO, 1965 �306 or < Mirror < or < I I I I ) Mirror ) Mirror SEe TION A - Post is located 10 feet from edge of highway mat - mirror set to flash awayfrom line of traffic. I I I I ) Mirror ) Mirror Renection or ) I" Mirror ) or ) Kirr or ) FIGURE 2.- I I I I I I (MiITor <Mirror SEOTION B - Post is located 10 feet from edge of higbvray mat - mirror set to flash across line of traffic. Mirrors set 34 inches above the ground (Mirror Reflection HIGHWAYPLAOEMENTOF VAN de REE DEER MIRRCRS .•• COIDRADO, 1965 �307 Scale: Full Size nT" mON FENCE POST WITH SILVER TOP LOCK NUT INCH STOVE BOLTS DOUBLEMIRROR AND FASTENING STRAP as furnished General by the t Engineering 832 Mayfair Drive Logansport, Indiana Corporation FIGURE 3.- VAN de REE DEER MIRROR ASSEMBLYUSED IN COLORADO, 1965 46941 ��July, 1965 309 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of Colorado Project No. W-38-R-19 Work Plan No. 6 Title of Job: Period Covered: Personnel: Name Deer-Elk Investigations ----~--~~--~----~~-------- Job No. 11 ------------~--------------Methods of Evaluating Deer and Elk Use On Alfalfa Under Summer-Long Grazing April 1, 1964 through March 31, 1965 Raymond J. Boyd and Eugene E. Green Abstract: Harvest of the alfalfa hay from the study plots was accomplished in early July, 1964. The ungrazed plots produced 743 pounds of hay, while the grazed plots produced 946·5 pounds of hay. Measurements of 150 alfalfa plants in the dry portion of the study field indicated an average height of 8.89 inches, while height measurements in a more moist portion of the study field showed an average height of 16·53 inches. These plant heights were taken 32 days after the hay had been cut for first cutting. Not enough hay was produced on the fields to warrant a second cutting in 1964. The soil was so dry in the study plots that when we attempted to take soil samples with an auger, none of the soil would stick to the auger so that a sample could be taken. The soil acted like sugar falling off the soil auger. Seventeen counts of the deer using the study field between J:L."l.e .1and September 30 indicated that an average of 14 deer a night wereiJ.sing t.he field. Recommendations: 1. Terminate this study on West Rifle Creek and prepare the data gathered for the Office of the Attorney General for his staff to use in a court case turning down the claim for damages by deer to the alfalfa crop of Mr. Charles W. Clark of Rifle, Colorado. Objectives: (1) To establish test plots, both open to grazing and fenced, on a random basis on the study field at the Charles Clark ranch on West Rifle Creek, Garfield COQ~ty, Colorado. �310 (2) To determine the soil-moilsture content of the alfalfa field during the growing season. (3) To determine the meteorological factors (air-temperature and relative humidity) at the study field location. (4) To determine the number of deer and the time of greatest grazing use on the study field. (5) To determine the correlation between the actual amount of grazing by deer on the test plots, with changes in production, so that estimates of deer use may be converted to a change in pounds of hay produced, if such a change occurs. Procedure: 1. Test Plots - Permanently mark all plots that are not to be fenced with a six-foot steel post at each corner. Construct a ten-foot high woven wire and steel post fence around each plot that is to be fenced. The random design is already worked out and is to be found in the Quarterly Report for this project for 1961. 2. Soil-moisture Determinations - Much of the trouble experienced by farmers and ranchers in areas of Colorado where complaints of sUllmer-long grazing by deer have been received may be caused by a shortage of water for the field crops rather than from grazing by big game animals, or if the grazing does cause a lessening in production, it may be compounded by the lack of water. The relation between the soil-moisture content of the soil in question and the soil unit resistance must be determined for each soil in which the soil unit is to be used. Since there is no available information on the relationship at the West Rifle Creek study area, it will be necessary to calibrate the soil ~~its after they are in place in the study plots. Detailed instructions are printed in the "Manual of Instructions For Use Of The Fiberglas Soil-moisture Instrument", revised edition, April, 1950, prepared by the California Forest and Range Experiment Station, U. S. Forest Service. 3· Weather Observations - Air temperatures and relative humidity readings will be recorded by the'hygrothermograph which will be set up at the east end of the study field. The weather data will be recorded from the 15th of April through September of each year. 4. Deer Counts - Nightly or per z.ouac count s of the deer using the study field will be made with the aid of the portable counting tower and spotlight. The light will be used for counts after dark and binoculars will be used on all counts for better accuracy. These counts will be graphed to show the best hours to count deer of the field in future years if it is necessary. �311 5. Hay Production Data - All haying on the study field will be done by the Colorado Department of Game, Fish and Parks, using Department machinery. All hay produced in the various plots will be weighed after it is bale<i. Statistical analysis of these hay weights will help determine if there is any significant difference between the amount of hay produced from the grazed plots and the ungrazed plots. ':Phesedata will be analyzed by the "Analysis of Covariance" test. These weights will be correlated with the soil-moisture readings to get data to be used in this phase of the study. Hay weights will be taken on both cuttings of hay at the study field site. ��313 Methods of Evaluating Deer and Elk Use On Alfalfa Under Summer-Long Grazing Raymond J. Boyd 1. Test Plots - All plots were relocated and marked. The ten-foot steel posts were hammered into the ground before frost and the woven wire was hung on the posts to enclose the plots just before growth started on the study field in 1964 Figure 1 shows the outline of the study field, the location of the fenced and unfenced plots, weather station location and the plots that were sampled for soil moisture content by the use of the Coleman Meter. 2. Soil-Moisture Determinations - Readings from the soil resistance blocks were taken with the Coleman Meter starting on July 22, 1964 and continued until October 5, 1964. Readings were taken at weekly intervals. Soil samples were supposed to be taken, but even during the first reading date of July 22, 1964, the soil was so dry that it would not stick to the soil auger, so no soil samples could be taken from the areas surrounding the "stacks" at five locations in the study field (Figure 1). Readings at the four locations in the "north" field on the low scale of the meter (resistance of 50 to 10,000 ohms) were very low at all'depths with the exception of station No. 10 at the six inch depth. The only possible explanation for the high readings (up to 111 in August) is the fact that this station is just below a seep area that is moist most of the summer, in fact it is so moist that alfalfa will not grow in this section of the field, see Figure 1. Tables 1, 2, 3 and 4 shown below list the various Coleman Meter dial readings and the associated per cent of moisture present in the soil at the particular locations (readings found on the low scale). Table 1 - Coleman Meter Dial Readings On The Low Scale At The Six-Inch Depth West Rifle Creek Alfalfa Study Area, Garfield County, Colorado, 1964 Date Stack No.6 Stack No. 5 0/0 Total 0/0 Total Dial Dial Moisture Reading Moistu.re Reading 7-22 7-27 8-3 8-5 8-10 8-19 8-26 8-31 9-7 9-14 9-22 9-28 10-5 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 less than 56% less than 56% " II " 0 0 0 0 " " " " 0 0 0 less than 56% 0 0 0 2 3 0 0 0 0 less than 56% " " " " " " Stack No.9 0/0 Total Dial Reading Moisture 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 less than 56% less than 56% " " " " " " " Stack No. 10 0/0 Total Dial Reading Moisture 44 45 45 60 60 60 44 85 112 105 52 43 33 30 29 60 66 70 69 62 60 57 56 56 �314 Table 2 - Coleman Meter Dial Readings On The Low Scale At The 12-Inch Depth West Rifle Creek Alfalfa Study Area, Garfield County, Colorado, 1964 Date Stack No. 5 Dial Total Reading Moisture % 7-22 7-27 8-3 8-5 8-10 8-19 8-26 8-31 9-7 9-14 9-22 9-28 10-5 3 0 0 less than 56% 0 0 0 0 less than 56% " 0 0 0 0 Stack No. 6 Dial Total Reading Moisture % 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 If 1 II 0 0 0 0 If II ft less than 56% less than 56% " If fI If fI If Stack No. 9 Dial Total Reading Moisture % less than 56% 3 3 2 2 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 1 rr " if " If If If " ff " Stack No. 10 Dial Total Reading Moisture % 48 8 9 61 less than 56% 7 8 7 8 9 6 6 5 5 tr If If If If If If If If Table 3 - Coleman Meter Dial Readings On The Low Scale At The 24-Inch Depth West Rifle Creek Alfalfa Study Area, Garfield County, Colorado, 1964 Date Stack No. 5 Dial % Total Reading Moisture 7-22 7-27 8-3 8-5 8-10 8-19 8-26 8-31 9-7 9-14 9-22 9-28 10-5 0 0 0 less t.han 56% Stack No. 6 Dial Total Reading Moisture % 0 0 0 less than 56% 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 If ft 0 0 0 0 ft ft " If If 0 0 0 0 If If If If If II If If If If If If If Stack No. 9 Dial Total Reading Moisture % 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 2 1 2 0 2 less than 56% Stack No. 10 Dial Total Reading Moisture % 10 3 4 less than 56% 2 4 4 3 5 3 2 3 3 less than 56% If If If If If If If If If If If If If If II If �315 Table 4 - Coleman Meter Dial Readings On The Low Scale At The 30-Inch Depth West Rifle Creek Alfalfa Study Area, Garfield County, Colorado, 1964 Date Stack No. 5 % Total Dial Reading Moisture 7-22 7-27 8-3 8-5 8-10 8-19 8-26 8-31 9-7 9-14 9-22 9-28 10-5 Stack No. 6 % Total Dial Reading Moisture 3 0 0 less than 56% 2 0 0 less than 56% 0 0 0 0 less than 56% 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 less than 56% 0 0 0 0 " " " It " " " " " 1! "II Stack No.9 Dial % Total Reading Moisture 2 2 2 1 2 1 0 1 3 2 2 0 2 less than 56% " " " " " " " II It 1! Stack No. 10 Dial % .Total Reading Moisture 3 2 2 less than 56% 1 3 0 3 3 less than 56% " n C. 2 2 3 " " 11 rr fI Tables 5, 6, 7 and 8 below, show the various Coleman Meter dial readings on the high scale and the associated percentage of moisture present at the time the meter was read. Table 5 - Coleman Meter Dial Readings On The High Scale At The 6-Inch Depth West Rifle Creek Alfalfa Study Area, Garfield County, Colorado, 1964 Date Stack No. 5 Dial % Total Reading Moisture 7-22 7-27 8-3 8-5 8-10 8-19 8-26 8-31 9-7 9-14 9-22 9-28 10-5 Stack No.6 Dial % Total Reading Moisture 11 12 10 27 27 27 5 6 4 26 26 26 10 22 28 28 27 29 31 31 4 31 26 29 26 16 10 8 7 26 31 31 31 31 29 27 27 26 20 12 9 8 29 27 27 27 Stack No. 9 Dial % Total Reading Moisture 5 5 4 3 7 7 7 8 12 10 7 5 6 * dial would not settle down to take a reading 26 26 26 26 26 26 27 27 27 27 26 26 26 Stack No. 10 % Total Dial Reading MoLs t.ur'e 170 175 173 59 60 59 174 59 * * * 184 170 150 145 140 61 59 57 56 56 �316 Table 6 - Coleman Meter Dial Readings On The High Scale At The 12-Inch Depth West Rifle Creek Alfalfa Study Area, Garfield County, Colorado, -1964 . Date 7-22 7-27 8-3 8-5 8-10 8-19 8-26 8-31 9-7 9-14 9~22 9-28 10-5 Stack No. 5 Dial % Total Reading Moisture Stack No.6 Dial % Total Reading Moisture 13 13 12 28 28 27 13 14 11 28 28 27 11 18 20 20 27 29 29 29 16 12 11 11 28 27 27 27 11 23 ·20 19 17 14 12 10 10 27 29 29 29 28 27 27 27 27 . . Stack No. 9 Dial % Total Reading Moisture 32 30 23 22 3 3 2 3 2 3 2 2 4 31 31 29 29 25 25 24 25 24 25 24 24 26 '. - ........ .. Stack No. 10 Dial % Total Reading Moisture 184 84 81 61 44 44 76 75 75 75 75 70 62 62 62 43 42 42 42 42 41 39 39 30 Soil-moisture readings with the Coleman Meter on the study field indicate that the fieidwas very dry and plant growth was inhibited. According to Taylor (1957) "As soil dries out, the plant is placed under increasing stress until the rate that water can move to the plant root and be absorbed is no longer fast enough to prevent retarded growth and decreased vegetative yields." Table 7 - Coleman Meter Dial Readings On The High Scale At The 24~Inch Depth West Rifle Creek Alfalfa Study Area, Garfield County, Colorado, 1964 Date Stack No. 5 Dial %·Total Reading .Moisture 7-22 7-27 8-3 8-5 8-10 8-19 8-26 8-31 9-7 ·9-14 9-22 9-28 10-5 Stack No; 15 Dial 0;0 Total Reading Moisture 9 12 12 27 27 27 6 10 9 26 27 27 12 14 14 15 27 28 28 28 14 13 11 11 28 27 27 27 8 16 10 9 9 7 7 7 7 27 28 27 27 27 26 26 26 26 Stack No.· 9 Dial 0;0 Total Reading. Moisture 12 13 14 13 14 14 13 12 15 15 14 13 12 27 27 28 27 28 28 27 27 28 28 28 27 27 Stack No. 10 Dial % Total Reading .Moisture 94 34 35 46 31 32 35 40 40 37 35 32 g8 27 27 32 34 34 33 32 32 31 31 31 �317 Table 8 - Coleman Meter Dial Readings On The High Scale At The 30-Inch Depth West Rifle Creek Alfalfa Study Area, Garfield County, Colorado, 1964 Date Stack No. 5 0/0 Total Dial Moisture Reading 7-22 7-27 8-3 8-5 8-10 8-19 8-26 8-31 9-7 9-14 9-e2 9-28 10-5 Stack No.6 0/0 Total Dial Reading Moisture 13 10 12 27 27 27 10 9 8 27 27 27 11 12 27 27 27 27 8 12 9 8 7 7 6 6 6 27 27 12 12 12 11 27 :27· less than 26% 27 27 26 26 26 26 26 Stack No. 9 0/0 Total Dial Reading Moisture 30 31 30 30 30 30 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 25 28 26 25 25 23 21 21 19 21 19 18 19 Stack No. 10 0/0 Total Dial Reading Moisture 24 32 24 30 31 30 23 27 27 28 28 26 25 24 24 30 30 30 31 31 30 30 30 30 Table 9 - Coleman M=ter Dial Readings At The 6-Inch Depth - West Rifle Creek Garfield County ,Colorado, 1964 Alfalfa ,Study Area, , Stack No. 13 Date High Scale Low Scale 7-22 7-27 8-3 8-25 8-10 8-19 9-26 8-31 9-14 9-22 9-28 10-5 Dial Reading % Total Moisture Dial Reading % Total Moisture 48 47 50 51 52 111 120 112 67 51 42 36 60 60 61 61 61 70 74 70 63 61 59 57 178 177 182 183 185 61 61 61 61 61 * * * * 184 170 157 61 59 58 * dial vibration, could not get reading on a steady needle �318 Table 10 - Coleman Meter Dial Readings At The 12-Inch Depth - West Rifle Creek Alfalfa Study Area, Garfield COur:t,ty, Colorado, 1964 Date Stack No. 13 Low Scale 7-22 7-27 8-3 8-5 8.-10 8-19 8-26 8-31 9-14 9-22 9-28 10-5 High Scale Dial Reading % Total Moisture Dial Reading % Total Moisture 11 10 11 9 10 126 124 112 16 less than 56% 72 77 78 75 137 * * * 104 69 60 55 41 43 43 42 55 It It 76 76 70 less than 56% 7 7 7 II 49 41 39 37 * dial vibration, could not get a reading from a steady needle Table 11 - Coleman Meter Dial Readings From The 24-Inch Depth - West Rifle Creek Alfalfa Study Area, Garfield County, Colorado, 1964 Date Stack No. 13 Low Scale 7-22 7-27 8-3 8-5 8-10 8-19 8-26 8-3l 9-14 9-22 9-28 10-5 High Scale Dial Reading % Total Moisture Dial Reading % Total Moisture 16 17 16 13 12 110 69 19 4 3 3 4 .less than 56% " " 70 64 less than 56% 110 111 104 98 88 * * 118 46 36 33 32 50 50 49 48 46 " " 52 35 33 32 32 *dial vibration, could not get a reading from a steady needle �319 Table 12 - Coleman Meter Dial Readings From the 30-Inch Depth - West Rifle Creek Alfalfa study Area, Garfield County, Colorado, 1964 Date Stack No. 13 Low Scale 7-22 7... 27 8.;3 8-5 8-10 8-19 8-26 8-31 9-14 9-22 9-28 10-5 High Scale Dial Reading % Total Moisture Dial Reading % Total Moisture 64 48 20 17 17 66 16 8 3 1 2 2 63 61 less than 56% 63 less than 56% 200 187 123 113 119 63 62 53 50 50 II 11 ftr * 110 70 35 29 26 24 50 41 33 31 30 30 * dial vibration, could not get a reading from a steady needle 3. Weather Observations - Data taken from the hygrothermograph on the study field indicated the following climatological factors where present on the study area during the past segment during the growing season. During June on the study area, the average maximum air temperature was 77.750 F, with a range from 62-89°F, while the average minimum air temperatUre was 43.280 F, with a range from 35-520 F. During July the average maximum air temperature was 89.540 F., with a range from 77-960 F., while the average minimum air temperature was 52.100 F., with a range from 44-590 F. No weather data was collected during August, 1964 on the study area. DuriAg September the average maximum air temperature was 74.960 F, with a range from 62-850 F, while the average minimum air temperature was 40.460 F, with a range from 32-500 F. Out of 26 days that air temperature data is available for, 14 days were below 400 F, which is the point below which plant growth stops. �320 4. Deer Counts - Press of other duties did not allow any counts of the deer using the study fields by Federal Aid Research persoll..l1el, but the local W.C.O., Mr. Furman Dunham, counted the deer on the study field 17 different times between June 1 and September 30. His counts are tabulated below: June July Date Number 3 10 18 24 1 8 15 21 29 9 11 6 10 12 15 11 17 25 Aug. Sept. Date Number --- 5 12 21 26 3 9 16 23 28 17 35 24 41 31 32 45 Counts of the deer using the fields after frost and the end of growing season were almost double the counts during the growing season. 5· Hay Production Data - Hay was harvested and weighed on all plots for the first cutting which started on July 2, 1964 and was completed on July 10, 1965· On the 24th of August, 1964, mowing of the field was begun and Mr. Clark asked us to harvest only the hay in the "south" field. The rest of his fields were so dry he could see no profit in spending time, gas and machinery wear on harvest of a field that had such low production. The hay was so short that a mower' would run over the alfalfa instead of cutting it off. He also wanted to know if he could try and grow a crop of alfalfa seed in the upper IInorth" field. Since the fields were so dry and alfalfa production so low that we could not gather enough hay to weigh from any of the plots, we agreed with Mr. Clark's request and did not harvest and weigh any hay from the plots in the "north" field. The "south" field had been partially irrigated after the first cutting, plot 13 (fenced) had been watered so that all of the plot produced a rather good second cutting of alfalfa. Plot 14 (unfenced) had been watered only in the upper 2/3 of its length. Actual measurement of the dry portion of the plot indicated that 37% of the plot was dry and produced no hay as far as harvest was concerned. Mr. Clark admitted to Gene Green that he had watered the plots, but said that he had left the water running on each plot for only one-half day. It was interesting to note that the field adjacent to the fenced plot was watered to the same extent as the plot, while the field on each side of the unfenced plot was also watered to the same extent as the fenced plot. While we cannot prove it, it appeared that an attempt was made to increase the production of alfalfa hay in the ungrazed plot, and to make the production in the gra-zed plot lower and blame the reduced production on grazing by deer. �321 Only 113 bales of hay was produced from the "south" field on the second cutting. These bales averaged 60.19 pounds each for a total production of 6,801.47 pounds of alfalfa hay. Plot No. 13, fenced, produced 545 pounds of hay, while plot No. 14, unfenced, produced 256~ pounds of hay. (See section above concerning irrigation. Table 13 - Weights of Alfalfa Hay Produced From Study Plots in 1964, West Rifle Creek Area, Colorado. Grazed (unfenced) Ungrazed (fenced) Plot No. Pounds of Hay Plot No. 1 3 6 7 14 5·25 349·75 16·50 180.25 394·75 2 4 5 8 13 Total 946·50 Pounds of Hay not enough to weigh 132·50 9·00 203·00 398·50 743·00 The height of alfalfa plants in the "north" fields were measured to the nearest one-quarter inch in both the fenced and unfenced plots on August 26, 1964. Measurements of 150 alfalfa plants in the lower portion of the "north" field indicated an average height of 8.89 inches, with a range of from 3 3/4 inches to 20 inches. This portion of the study field has had no irrigation water on it for at least three years, and the stand is very sparse at best. Plot number two, which is fenced against deer·did not produce enough hay to be weighed on first cutting, much less on seco~d cutting. Measurements of 147 alfalfa plants in the upper portion of the north field indicated an average height of 16.53 inches, with a range of from 3-3/4 inches to 32* inches. This portion of the study field is not nearly as old a stand of alfalfa as the lower portion, and there is some sub-irrigation from seepage in this area. These plant measurements were taken 52 days after the hay had been mowed for first cutting. The short height measurements are also indicative of the poor moisture and lack of irrigation water on the study field as a whole. �322 Discussion~ The data gathered at the West Rifle Creek study area on hay production showed such a wide variation that it is fmpossible to a_alyze the data statistically. However, we can say, that on the average, gr~zing by deer on the study plots did not reduce total alfalfa hay jrroduct.Lonat all. I..11. fact J more hay was produced on the grazed p.l.ot.s t.hanwas produced on the ungrazed plots. This information is consistent with hay weight data gathered on a similar study concerned with grazing by deer in the spring on alfalfa. All other data gathered~ air temperatures and soil moisture only strengthen the argument that the area doesn't have adequate irrigation water for the alfalfa crop and that the low production of alfalfa hay from the study field is not attributable to grazing by deer throughout the growing season . .Bibliography: Bamesberger, J. G. 1955· Preparing lan for efficient irrigation. In Alfred Stefferu.d, Water, the 1955 Yearbook of Agriculture. The UnitedStates Government Printing Office. Washington, D. C. 751 pp illus. Boyd, RaymondJ. 1960. An evaluation of spring grazing on alfalfa by deer in western Colorado. Proc. 40th Conf. Western Association of State Game and Fish Commissioners, pp. 130-147. Colman, E. A. 1950 Manual of instructions for use of the fiberglas soil moisture Lnstrument.. April. California Forest and Range Experiment Station. U. S. Forest Service . Berkeley, Californ.ia. 20pp. illus. Ha Lse , Howard R. 1955· How to measure the moisture in the soil. In Alfred Stefferud, Water, the 1955 Yearbook of Agriculture, The UnitedStates Government Printing Office. Washington, D. C. 751 pp illus. Lyon, T. L.J Harry O. Buckman, Nyle C. Brady. 1956. The nature and property of soils. The MacMillan Company, New Yor-k. 591 pp. J illus. Richards, L. A. 1955· Retention and transmission of water in soil. In Alfred Stefferud, Water, the 1955 Yearbook of Agriculture, The lJnited States Government Printing Office. Washington, D. C. 751 pp illus. Stanberry, C. o. 1955· Irrigation practices for the production of alfalfa. In Alfred Stefferud, Water, the 1955 Year-book of Agriculture, The TJnited States Government Printing Office. Washington, D. C. 751 pp. illus. Taylor, Sterling A. 1957. Use of moisture by plants. In Alfred Stefferud Soil, the 1957 Yearbook of Agriculture. The Utl:itedStates Government Printing Office Washington, D. C 784 pp., i11us. �323 Wadleigh, Cecil H. 1955· Soil moisture in relation to plant growth. In Alfred Stefferud, Water, the 1955 Yearbook of Agriculture. The United States Government Printing Office. Washington, D. C. 751 pp, illus. Prepared by Raymond J. Boyd Associate Wildlife Researcher Date July, 1965 Approved by Richard N. Denney Project Leader Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief �VJ I\) .j:"" 13-------] W I FIGURE 1.- ALFALFA DAMAGESTUDY FIELD - WEST RIFLE CREEK, GARFIELD COUNTY, COLORADO LEGEND 1 - Plot Number x - Fenoed Plot S6 - Soil Moisture "Stack" Location �325 TERMINAL PLATE - COLEMANMETER CONNECTIONS 2 - INCH PIPE GROUNDLEVEL SOIL TAMPED TO SAME DENSITY AS ORIGINAL SOIL FIBERGLASS ELECTRICAL RESISTANCE BLOCKS FIGURE 2. - SOn. MOISTURE "STACK" (DIA9RAMATIC) �HIGH SCALE READINGS - Station # 5 28 Depth Key 6 Inohes12 Inchesl!l 24 InoheslZl 30 InohesD 25 •.. 20 W 1\) 0\ 15 . :17 . . . ~~ . 10· -. :~Il~ LON SCALE READINGS 3 2 1 O'.-Vl! 7/22 .·VI! P-Vl! poV!! 7/27 8/3 8/10 '-V" 8/19 8/26 'OVl! -OVl' -"K" 8/31 9/14 9/22 9/28 10/5 �HIGH SCALE READINGS - Station # 6 )0 Depth Key 6 Inches. 12 InchesI!l 24 InchesIZI 25 . )0 Inches0 tr 20 t-:" t: . 15 w ~J -.;j rr . 10 5 r: . rr ~ . :b il il . oU~~ ~~ :~ . . ~~ ~~ ~~ . i[ LOW SCALE READINGS ~l hmJ .=m .=m .=m L.=m Lv l .=m .=m .=m .=m 1/22 1/21 8/3 8/10 8/19 8/26 8/31 9/7 9/14 9/22 9/28 1:)/5 �·· ·· ·· ·· · ··· ·· ·· ·· · ··· ··· ·· 32 30 25 20 15 0 0 0 . 0/ 0/ 0/ 0/ ./ 10 .~ o~ o~ .~ .~ o~ 5 .1/ o~ °V .1/ 2 ·V oV o ~ oV III HIGH SCALE READI~S - Stat10n # ·· ·· ··· ·· ·· ·· ·· ··· ·· ··· · 0 07'" ./ 0/ ./ 0/ 0/ ./ 0/ ./ ./ ./ 0/ .~ o~ '1/ o~ .~ °V 01/ oV h Ke • r- I!] IZI ,... ·· ·· ·· ··· ·· ··.~ .~ o~ o~ o~ .~ ./ ·V ./ ./ ./ ./ ./ '11 ./ ·11 ./ ./ ./ 0/ '11 ··· ·· ··· ·· o , , · 0 0 07' 0/ '11 ·11 ·11 ·11 ./ ./ oil 0/ oil 0/ '11 ./ 0/ ./ ·11 ./ ·11 0/ r- rrr- V ~ ~ ~ II ~ / ~ ~ ~ V ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ tI~ f7' ~ ~ ~ ~ / r;~ r;~ ~ ~ ~ oil ·V 'V oil oil ~ V ·11 0/ / o~ oV ~ ~ ~ ~ ./ ~ ~ :~ oV oV oV ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ .~ / ~ / ~ / ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~~ ·V .~ .~ '1/ '1/ 7 / / / / ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ 01/ °V oil w ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ V ~ ~ ~ ~ 0/ o~ ·11 oil .~ oV f\) CD ~ ~ ~ ~ / / / / / / ./ ·V o~ LON SCALE HJill Jill .fUJ & Jl ...¢J 1/22 7/21 8/3 8/5 8/10 8/19 RID ...¢J 8/26 8/31 tfll Jl Jl 9/1 9/14 9/22 RID ;00 9/28 10/5 �HIGH SCALE READINGS - Station * Depth Key 6 Inches. 12 Inches III 24 Inches IZI 30 Inches 0 10 200 7 175 150 125 100 ·· ·· -·· ·· ·• ·· ·· ·· ··. · -V w ro \0 '7 75 ./ / / / / 50 25 o 'V 'V 'V 'V 'V ./ ./ 'V ./ ./ 7 ·· -· ·-· ··7 'V -/ ./ ./ ··· r- -- --· -7 -V ./ ./ ./ :V ·V -/ · 1/22 7/27 8/3 ./ / ·· · .• ·-· --- ·V .) -V ./ -'7 :7 ./ ···•· ·'V· ··V .~ -V 'V · 'V r; • 17./ 'V ./ ./ ./ -/ -/ -/ -V -V ./ 8/10 8/19 8/26 ./ .// -,I -,I - 8/31 "; --· ·· •· 'V -,I ./ ./ -,I -,I -,I 9/7 - -- · ··· :~ ~~I 9/14 rr .- r- m·1 -- '7 -r ·· -· ·· - -/ -/ -/ .. -V -/ -/ ·V -/ 9/22 . - -,I -,I / -,I -,I 9/28 '7" .J -/ 10/5 .. �IJepth Key 6 Inches. IJ1II SCALE- Station 12 Inches 24 Inches 30 Inches # 10 I!J IZI 0 125 100 w w o 75 50 25 o 7/22 7/27 8/3 8/10 8/19 8/26 8/31 9/7 9/14 9/22 9/28 10/5 �HIGH SCALE READINGS - Station # 13 Depth Key 6 Inches. 12 Inches I!l 24 Inches IZI 30 Inches 0 200 I 115 150 ~ ·· 125 100 ~ ~ ~ ~ [/: ~ ~ / ..•. V ·v ·v ·v ·v ./ TlI -i> -v •/ -v ./ .v ·lI ·v oll •/ ·lI •'/ ./ .lI ·v .lI •/ / / 15 50 25 ~/./ ..// ./ •/ .'/ •/. .i' •/ 0/ •/ ./ 0/ O••• / V V •/ ./ °/ 0/ 0/ 1/ 1/ ·v ·lI ·v ·v ·v .lI -t- .1/ 1/22 1/26 8/3 V / ./ .) ·lI ./ .lI -t./ -t- ./ ./ • 8/5 • Ii" • 1/ ~ ~ :.~ w W ~ ·V ·v ~ 111 v~ II vV v ./ ./ ./ ./ ./ • / ./ •/ V • . -v ·v vv • / ·lI 8/31 9/1 • 8/19 8/26 , -t-r ·lI ./ ./ / / , • • -i> 0/ 0/ • '/ .. • ·lI V V V v 8/10 I-' IT •/ -t- -t.1/ . . ·1 • ·1 .7'" -t- ./. •••.. -i> ·v .1/ • / ./ ./. -v -i> • / ./ -i> • • II ·lI 9/14 • 9/22 .1 ., ./ . . .~ ·a ,0 .' • .1/ ° 9/28 10/5 I �LOW SCALE READINGS - Station # 13 Depth Key 6 Inches. 12 Inches [!J 24 Inches 121 30 Inches 0 150 125 0 0 0 o~ o~ 100 15 0 01/ 0./ 0./ 0./ 0./ 0./ 0 0 0 0 017 01/ -il -II -v -./ -./ -./ 25 o 1/ v oil 0",./ -ll 0/ 0 1/22 oil 1/21 -~ -v -v 0 ~ ] 8/3 8/5 8/10 oil - -II ov 50 0 0 0 0 -v -/ 8/19 0/ -/ 01,1 01/ -v -v -v -il -v -il -il -il I"" -- 0 - w w 0 0 ro 0 0 --- 0 -- 0 0 :~n -:~ 1n -1./ ~ ~ 8/26 8/31 9/28 10/r; -v -II -/ :17 -1/ 9/14 9/22 �July, 1965 333 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of Colorado ------~~~~~------------- Project No. W-38-R-19 Name Work Plan No. 9 ----~~---------------- Job No. Deer-Elk Investigations 2 Title of Job : Comparison of A.ir and Ground Deer and Elk CO'Lmts Period Covered: Personnel: April 1, 1964 through March 31, 1965 Raymond J. Boyd, Eugene E. Green, M. C. Coghill, Richard N. Denney Abstract The winter of 1964-65 was an extremely severe one in Colorado. Deep snow and bitterly cold weather was the rule for much of the winter. Problem.s caused by large numbers of big game animals moving down into ranching areas and resulting damage to haystacks, caused the Colorado Departm.ent of GameJ Fish and Parks to call for all "oversnow" vehicles to be turned over to the Game Management Division for use in the emergency caused by the severe winter. Snow equipment that was planned for use on this job was not available when proper snow conditions were to be found in the study area. Therefore, no work was accomplished on this job during the past segment. Recommendations Until more personnel are assigned to this project, drop this job in favor of more pressing and important jobs. Objectives (1) To determine factors required to correct air counts for different snow, light and flight conditions, and to work out an easily recognized set of standards to permit an accurate selection of the proper correction factors by the aerial observer. (2) To determine whether air-to-ground deer ratios will remain the same from one vegetative type or type of terrain to another. (3) To determine whether air counts will consistently tally the same percentage of elk as are present on the ground from time to time and from area to area. (4) To make similar air-ground correlation counts using the helicopter. �334 (5) To determine if "over-snow" machinery can just as efficiently count big game on the ground as aground drive by manpower. Procedure 1. Select deer and elk areas representative of aerial-trend areas on which deer or elk are counted annually. Such sites must possess features of terrain which make it possible to obtain a potentially correct total ground count of the big game animals present. 2. Aerial Division personnel will count the area as many times as possible and practical, without disturbing the herds, prior to each ground count. Information thus obtained will be analY2ed statistically to determine the consistency of ratios. Also data on ground conditions (snow cover, light and air density) will be tabulated to determine the effect of various conditions on the counts made from the air. These conditions are: Snow Cover: Condition I. New snow cover, count started within two days of new snow. 100% snow cover. Condition II. 100% snow cover, but old snow with tracks to numerous to locate all animals. Condition III. Bare or spotty snow cover, poor backgr ound . Light: Condition I. Clear skies Condition II. Broken overcast 50% of the time Condition III. Air: Solid overcast Condition :T. Good, solid air Condition II. Mild. to moderate turbulance and downdrafts Condition III. Severe turbulance and downdrafts 3 Annual aerial-ground count correlations will be continued whenever combinations of factors occur which are needed to complete the range of factors needed for complete analysis on the Cedar Ridge deer wintering area and on the Sapinero elk wintering area. These counts will usually be done in February. 4. A Bell 47-G3B helicopter will be used to test its efficiency in counting both deer and elk on the proposed study areas. �335 5· The following types of "over-snow machinery will be used to try a fl "machinery" ground count in the Sapinero elk wintering area: Tucker Sno-Cat, two types of Bombardier Ski~Doos, Bombardier Muskeg Snow Tractor and any other types that may become available before a count is made in February. These vehicles will spread out and drive south on the study area counting all game animals which break through the line. The ground count will be correlated with an aerial count of the same area immediatel~ prior to the drive. 6. The population data obtained from the ground counts will be used in comparisons with other population data which would apply to the same area or herd. �336 Comparison of Air and Ground Deer and Elk Counts Raymond J. Boyd The winter of 1964-65 in Colorado was an unusually severe one from the standpoint of big game in Colorado. Deep snow and severe cold drove the animals into the lower ranching areas in February and much damage to haystacks occurred. 'Ihe situation became so serious that the Director of the Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department was forced to call all "over-snow!! vehicles regardless of original assignment, into the herding and hauling of feed for the deer and elk herds. For this reason no snow equipment was available for the machinery count planned for Sapinero. 'Ihis report, then is negative as far as findings for the past segment. Date July, 1965 Approved by: Richard N. Denney Project Leader Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief �July, 1965 337 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of Colorado Project No. W-3B-R-19 Work Plan No. Title of Job: Job No. 2 11 A Rocky Mountain National Park Co'operative Elk Study Winter Range Delimitation Period Covered: April 1, 1964 through March 31, 1965 Name Deer-Elk Investigations Abstract No additional information was obtained during this segment. Earlier data are reported and mapped in the July, 1965, Federal Aid Job Completion Report by Neal Guse, Ben Rice, Lee Carr and Richard Denney. The final report for the cooperative study will be comprehensive one with all phases of the study combined in one report. Objectives Area of use during winter periods must be determined, so as to know the usual wintering areas, and the total winter range available geographically. (1) Delimit and map the primary elk winter range in the study area, that is, those winter ranges which normally sustain elk use every winter. (2) Delimit and map the secondary elk winter range in the study area, that is, those ranges, sometimes referred to as intermedi.ate or spring-fall ranges, which with the primary winter range represent the total winter range available to the elk herd. Procedure 1. Determine through records, files, publications and field observations the areas of primary concentration in the past, and map these on quarter inch overall study area maps, and more specifically on two-inch to the mile township maps. 2. Fixed-wing airplane flights, augmented occasionally with helicopter flights, will enable us to determine current concentration areas, and keep up with their shifting through bi-weekly flights the next tvro or three years. This will involve approximately 150 hours of fixed-wing flying time. The animals observed on these flights will be located on maps by the observer while actually flying and making observations as to locations, numbers and movements. �338 Elk Winter Range Delimitation RichardN. Denney Nothing additional to the r~nge concentration areas described and mapped in the last segment's report (Guse, Rice, Carr and Denney, 1965) has been found during this segment. During this segment the fixed..,.wing pilot for this region of the State (Northeast) retired, and scheduled flights were not made. The air on this east side of the Continental Divide is extremely turbulent, and even at times that the air was calm enough to fly difficulty from lack of snow cover and the dense timber stands prevented efficient observing. On this cooperative study the data obtained by the National Park Service and the Colorado Game, Fish an,dParks Department are being put on maps by the Forest Service. These maps are almost completed, with copies to be filed with each agency for reference in the other phases of the study. These data will be mapped with the range analysis data on two-inch to the mile township maps. Discussion: Even though work has been completed on this job, the completion report on 'it will be included in the overall comprehensive cooperative study write-up covering all jobs or phases of the study when completed. Recommendations See under Discussion. References Cited: 1. Guse, Neal; Ben Rice; Lee Carr; and Richard Denney. 1965. Rocky Mountain Cooperative Elk Studies, Preliminary Report. Job Compl. Rpt., F.A., Colo. Game, Fish and Parks Dept., July, 1965· pp. 93-99. Approved by: Wayne w. Sandfort Game Research Chief �July, 1965 339 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of Colorado Pr:oject No. W-38-R-19 Work Plan No. 11 A Job No. 3 ------~--~~--~~-------Rocky Mountain National Park Cooperative Elk Study Basic Range Inventory Title of Job: Period Covered: Name Deer-Elk Investigations ------------~----~~--------- April 1, 1964 through March 31, 1965 Abstract No additional field work was performed during this segment, but the vegetative type maps were completed on two-inch to the mile township maps, and are in the process of distribution to the cooperating agencies\l The final report for the cooperative study will be a comprehensive one with all phases of the study combined in one report. Objectives Knowledge of the condition, trend and quality of the winter range is an essential part of the ground work required to make sound management recommendations. 1. Within the winter ranges as delimited previously, determine: (a) Total area in acres. (b) Composition of the forage species. (c) Density of forage species. (d) Vigor of forage species. (e) Soil movement and erosion. 2. Determine the condition and trend of various components of the winter range. �340 Procedure: 1. The composition, density, vigor and soil movement data will be obtained by the Inter-agency Big Game Range Analysis Procedure, currentlyincorporated in the Region II, United States Forest Service, Range Analysis Handbook as Chapter 8. A. copy of this procedure was appended to the P.S.&E. It .involves essentially a combination of the Parker step transect with a newly developed browse transect procedure, based on 100 hits on the ground between browse and overstory species, and 100 hits on woody browse plants, plus observations on soil movement and erosion. On the basis of condition transects run on the western slope of Colorado, one section (640 acres) per manday would indicate good progress, therefore, we had hoped to survey over 50,000 acres of elk range in one summer season if the vegetation had terrain allowed this progress. 2. T,ypemaps will be prepared, based on the range survey data, and through the use of a planimeter, the area in acres of the various types and conditions will be calculated. 3· The condition and trend of the elk winter ranges will be determined through the use of the brushland scorecard developed in conjunction with the Big Game Range Analysis Procedure. �341 Basic Range Inventory Richard N. Denney 1. Range analysis crews, consisting of Department and Forest Service personnel, completed the field work in the study area in 1962 and 1963 field seasons. The details and compilation are given in the April, Part 1, 1964, Federal Aid Game Research Report (Denney, 1964) and in the July, 1965, Report (Guse, Rice, Carr and Denney, 1965). 2. The acreages of the vegetative types have been planimetered from the type maps on two-inch to the mile township maps, and copies are in the process of being prepared for the files and use of each of the cooperating agencies by the Forest Service, Roosevelt National Forest. 3. The condition and trend as determined by each transect location are plotted on the map within the vegetative type; this is the same map referred to above. Discussion: These data have been compiled, tabulated and summarized in the aforementioned reports, and the maps are in the process of distribution at the present time. These data will appear in the logical development of the final report on the cooperative elk study by all three agencies when the final field phases of all the jobs in this work plan have been completed and prepared in one comprehensive report. Recommendations: See under discussion. References Cited: 1. Denney, Richard N. 1964. Basic Range inventory. Job Compl. Rpt., F.A., April, Part 1, 1964. Colo. Game, Fish and Parks Dept. pp. 59-62. 2. Guse, Neal; Ben Rice; Lee Carr; and Richard Denney. 1965· Rocky Mountain Cooperative elk study, preliminary report. Job Compl. Rpt., F.A., July, 1965, Colo. Game, Fish and Parks Dept .. pp. 96-103. Date July, 1965 Approved by: Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief ��July, 1965 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of Colorado Project No. W-38-R-19 Work Plan No. Title of Job: 11 A -Job No. 4 Rocky Mountain National Park Cooperative Elk Study Seasonal Movements Period Covered: April 1, 1964 through March 31, 1965 Name Deer-Elk Investigations. Abstract Since the inception of the neckbanding and eartagging program on this study a total of 257 elk has been marked using the livetraps in Moraine and Horseshoe Parks and including the 72 marked using the helicopter this segment. Work from the helicopter involved immobilization with Cap-Chur equipment and jumping on the elk in deep snow. Observations and hunter kills indicate seasonal movements of 30 airline miles from the trapsites. Objectives Knowledge of the seasonal movements and migration of the sub-units of the elk herd are essential in the setting of logical seasons as to time and place for harvesting any existing surpluses. 1. Determine the normal seasonal movements of the sub-units of the elk herd, and the general migration routes. 2. Determine the movements of individual elk between herds and drainages 3· Determine the co~relation, if any between meterorological ~nd phenological phenomena with individual and herd behavior. Procedure 1. Through field and aerial observation of herd units on seasonal ranges determine the distances and direction of movement from the previous observations made during bi-weekly fixed-wing airplane flights. �344 2. Construct and operate cooperatively with the Park and Forest Service two or more group live traps to neckband as many elk as possible on as many different trapsites as feasible on winter concentration areas in the Rocky Mountain National Park and the adjoining Roosevelt National Forest. Different colored collars will be used at the various trapsites so that the movement and integration of the herd sub-units can be ascertained, based on observations by field personnel in the area, and on aerial ovservations. Each collared elk will also be eartagged with a tag in each ear, serially numbered, so as to be able to identify them when recovered through harvesting or other means if they should have lost their neckband. . 3· Weather station data at the Rocky Mountain National Park headquarters and other·established stations will be compared with observed herd behavior and coincidental phenological observations as to time and rate of development of plants in relation to snow recession and temperatures to see if correla-. tions exist between these various factors. �Elk Seasonal Movements Richard N. Denney As a result of the heavier snows than usual during the winter of 196465 a total of 127 elk were neckbanded and eartagged in the study area by two means, group livetraps and from the helicopter. Of this total, 72 were done from the helicopter. Since the inception of the livetrapping program in the Park in 1962, a total of 328 animals has been trapped, of which 195 were eartagged and 185 neckbanded. There were 86 retrapped animals, and a loss of 47, which includes 23 transplanted animals. Eight tagged or neckbanded animals have been harvested by hunters, and one killed by a mountain lion. Of those harvested, all but two have been in Game Management Unit 18, in Middle Park, during the 1963 and 1964 hunting seasons. The other two were harvested during the special January-February, 1963, season on the east side of the Park. In addition, three of the animals banded in 1965 from helicopter have died or been killed, two by trains in Byers Canyon and at Sulphur Gulch, and one was found in a fence north of Granby, ei~her cleaned up or killed by coyotes. Therefore, by means of trapping and helicopter work, a total of 257 neckbanded animals are in the study area. Through band sightings and hunter harvest of banded animals it is obvious that the study area has been broadened to include the east portion of C~me Management Unit 18, the head of the Colorado River on the west side of the Park. It is for this reason, then that the helicopter was utilized on February 16-18, 1965, in the Middle Park area to band 72 head of elk in three sites. Two methods were used, (1) immobilization from the helicopter by means of Cap-Chur equipment using Sernylan (phencyclidine hydrochloride) and Anectine (succinylcholine chloride), and (2) jumping on the elk in deep snow from the helicopter. In this operation, nine animals were immobilized with Sernylan, 18 were immobilized with Anectine, and 53 were jumped on from the helicopter. Of those injected with muscle relaxants there was one fatality using Sernylan, although the death was not directly attributable to the drug, two mortalities from succinyl, and three were not immobilized with the succinyl. Two calves in very poor condition apparently died from stress when jumped on. Table 1 lists the pertinent data on the animals injected with Cap-Chur equipment, and Table 2 lists the data on the banded animals jumped on from the helicopter. For details and discussion on the newly developed technique of jumping on the elk from the helicopter, see the report in Work Plan 1, Job 5, this issue. Table 3 is a complete listing of the data on animals neckbanded and tagged in the Moraine Park and Horseshoe Park group traps in Rocky MOQntain National Park. �346 When the animals are in poor condition due to a hard winter the effects of the drugs are erratic and unpredictable, It appeared from this winter's work, however, that a range of 400 to 500 mg of Sernylan per.adult cow elk was the proper dosage, and 16 mg of succinyl per adult cow elk was most efficient, This compares with approximately 20 mg dosages of the latter under normal winter conditions, Animals seemed to stay down longer when immobilized in the condition that most of them were in this winter, Therefore, it seems that the welfare of the animals is better, under these conditions, when the jumping technique is used, This proved to be the case in the Rib Grande area particularly (see write-up under Work Plan 1, Job 5), The use of earstreamers of different colors and combinations has worked well on animals livetrapped in the Park, Individuals have been recognized at distances up to 30 airline miles from the banding sites in Moraine and Horseshoe Parks, The main movement of those elk wintering in these sites to spring and summer range tends to be westward and northward up Forest Canyon, Milner Pass and over to Specimen Mountain They appear to cross the divide in late April and early May and drop down into the North Fork of the Colorado River drainages, Some do stay, however, in the Krozier Mountain and Elk Ridge areas on the east, The number of observations in the head of the East Fork of the Troublesome, the head of Willow Creek, and in the Grand Lake area has been surprisingly high, and revealed movements that were unsuspected or unconfirmed previously. �Table 1 - - .;Middle Park Elk Iunnobilization Data, 1965. Tag No. Band Color Location RM2 RM3 RM4 RM5 Red Wolford Mtn. RM6 RM7 RM8 RM9 RM10 RMll RM13 " "•• Red " " " " " Red " " II " " " " ." " •• " . II " " " " RM14 RM15 RM16 RM17 " " " " " " " " " " " II II II " II " " •• " " II " " RM19 White/ Red RM21 " " RM25 White/ Red " " " " RM26 RM43 RM45 " " " " " " " " Suunnary: Drug Serny1an Succiny1 " " Min. Latent Period 8:15 15:30 8:22 15:00 5:15 Date Sex Age Drug 2/16/65 F Mat. .Sernylan· 500 " " •• " " •• " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " Yrlg. Mat. 4 •• " 4-5 2 Mat. 2 Mat. Calf " •• " " " " " Succiny1 2:55 5:10 8:30 11:55 8:30 4:31 15:45 1:24 9:30 " " " " " " F 3-4 Succiny1 16 4:30 " " Mat. Old Mat. " 16 12 16 16 16 1:15 4:10 6:45 2:45 " " 16 16 16 " " " 16 16 16 " " " Mat. II " Serny1an " " Succiny1 Serny1an Succiny1 " II " " " " " " " " " " " " " II " " ." " No. Animals 9 18 27 •• 20 16 500 .500 500 8 240 16 15 16 " " " M " F White/ Parshall Area 2/17/65 Red II Mg. Tot. .Dose " 3 Mat. " Yr1g. Mg. Av. Total Dosage 500 16 " Av. Latent Period 11 min. 4 min. Counnents Died 4 hrs. later, regurgitation • Died. Died. Little effect. 1:15 Art. Respir. Blood sample. No injection •. Blood sample. Didnlt go down. 4:00 4:00 Art. Respir. ? 3: 30 .' Counnents 1 Fatality, not due to drug. 2 Fat., 3 not iunnob. �348 Table 2 -Middle Park Elk Jumped on from Helicopter, 1965. Tag No. Neckband Location White/Red Parshall Area RMl2 RM18 RM20 RM22 RM23 RM24 RM27 RM28 " " If " If If RM29 RM30 RM31 RM32 RM33 RM34 RM35 RM36 RM37 RM38 RM39 RM40 RM41 RM42 RM44 RM46 RM47 RM48 RM49 RM50 RM51 RM52 RM53 RM54 RM55 RM56 RM57 RM59 RM61 RM63 RM65 " Sex Age 2/17/65 M M Calf " If If " " ? F fI fl. " " " " If fI If " If fI If fI If fI " If If F " " II M If F F F !I fI fI If " If II If " " If " If " fI " " " " " If " II " " If " " " fI " fI " " fI " If If " " " " " " " " fI fI II fI " " " fI " " " " " " " " " fI " " " " fI " " " It " " " " " II fI If If " If fI 11 " " " 11 II " " " " " Signal Red 11 Date 11 " 11 " " If " " " " M M M M M M M If If " " " II " " Yrlg. Calf " If fI fI If M M M M M M M M " " " " " " " II " II II " F F F F 11 M !I " " " fI " F 11 " " " fI M If " F If 11 F II F " " 11 3/65, Killed by train Byers Canyon fI F F M M M Comments 3/65, Killed by train Sulphur Gulch �Table 2 - con't - Middle Park Elk Jumped on from Helicopter, i965 Tag No. Neckband Location RM58 Signal Red Willow Creek RM60 " " North Granby RM62 " " " " RM64 " " " " No tag " " " " RM66 " " " " RM67 " RM68 " tI II It II Date Sex Age 2/18/65 F F Calf " " tI " " II II II II Comments " M M M tI F ? " " " " " M 4/17/65, Caught in fence cleaned up by coyotesJ North of Granby RM69 RM70 RM71 II tI II " " II Summary: Calves II II M II II II II F II " .f! II M If Sex M No. " " F II Undet. Yrlgs F 29 19 2 1 Total ,--- 50 1 51 Comments 'very successful technique, appraently little stress on elk. �Table 3 ELK LIVE-TRAPPING RECORDS ROCKY MOUNTAIN NATIONAL PARK TRAPPING LOCATION -- MORA.INE PARK EAR TAG NUMBERS SEX AGE Mat. Mat. M3.t. Calf M3.t. Calf Mat. Mat. Calf 1.1. 2 Calf 1.1. 2 Calf 1~ Calf Mat. 1.1. 2 Calf Calf Calf Calf 1.1. 2 Mat. 2.1. DATE TAGGED EAR TAG SERIES -- NOTIFY COLO. G & F NECK COLLAR M II Calf White 1/29/63 White 1/29/63 1/29/63 Yellow-l0 White 1/29/63 White 2/11/63 White 2/11/63 White 2/11/63 White 2/11/63 White 2/11/63 2/16/63 Yellow White 2/16/63 2/16/63 2/16/63 Yellow #7 White 2/16/63 White 2/18/63 White 2/18/63 White 2/18/63 White 2/18/63 White 2/1$/63 White 2/18/63 White 2/18/63 White 2/18/63 White 2/18/63 White 2/24/62 White 12/10/62 White 11/18/62 F Mat. 11/18/62 E-3,E-3 E-4,E-4 E-5,E-5 E-6,E-6 E-7,E-7 E-8,E-8 E-9,E-9 E-1O,E-I0 E-l1,E-ll E-12,E-12 E-13,E-';l3 E-14,E-14 E-15,E-15 E-16,E-16 E-17,E-17 E-18,E-18 E-19,E-19 E-20,E-20 E-21,E-21 E-22,E-22 E-23,E-23 E-24,E-24 E-25,E-25 E-52,E-52 E-53,E-53 E-54,E-54 F F F F F M F F M M F M F F F F F M M M F F F M M E-55)E-55 White EAR MARKERS L&R-Yel REMARKS Retrap-3/27/64(435#); 2/8,3/15/65; Retrap-2/22/63 L-Y &W Retrap-4/8/64 L&R-Orange Retrap-l/25/65 L-Yel Retrap-3/7/64(235#) L-Yel Retrap-3/7/64(450#) Beaver Mdws Snowfence Trap Retrap-2/22/63 Retrap-2/11/63 One tag found 5/15/65 by Gary Fritz on Mill Cr. near Bowen-Woods Hunter Kill-l/26/63Jnear Ra'tt.Lesnake Res. Lion Kill (4/7/63) . FUE NUMBER 62-49 62-50 62-51 62-52 62-53 62-54 62-55 62-56 62-57 62-58 62-59 62-60 62-61 62-62 62-63 62-64 62-65 62-66 62-6'7 62-68 62-69 62-70 62-71 61-1 62-7 62-1 62-2 co \Jl 0 �Table 3 - Cont. ELK LIVE-TRAPPING RECORDS ROCKY MOUNTAIN NATIONAL PARK TRAPPING LOCATION -- Moraine Park EAR TAG NUMBERS SEX AGE E-56,A2701 E-57,E-57 E-58,E-58 E-59,E-59 E-60,E-60 E-61,E-61 E-62,E-62 E-63,E-63 E-64,E-64 E-65,E-65 E-66,E-66 E-67,E-67 E-68,E-68 E-69,E-69 E-70 ,E-70 E-71,E-71 E-72,E-72 E-73,E-73 F F F M M F F F F F F M F F M M F M E-74,E-74 E-75,E-75 E::-76,E-76 E-78,E-78 E-79,E-79 E-80,E:..80 E-81,E-81 E-82,E-82 E-83~E-83 E-84,E-84 E-85,E-85 E-86,E-86 F M M F F F F F F F F F EAR TAG SERIES -- Notify Colo. G & F NECK COLLAR EAR MARKERS Calf 11/18/62 Mat. 11/18/62 Calf 11/18/62 21.. 11/18/62 2 Calf 12/10/62 Calf ~/10/62 M:lt. 12/10/62 Mat. 12/10/62 Mat. 12/10/62 Mat. 12/10/62 M:lt. 12/10/62 12/10/62 1~ Mat. 12/10/62 Mat. 12/10/62 Calf 12/10/62 Calf 12/10/62 Calf 12/10/62 Calf 12/10/62 White White White White White Yellow #5 Yellow #9 White White White White White White White White White White Yellow L&R-White Calf 12/10/62 11.. 12/10/62 2 Calf 12/10/62 12/17/62 1~ M:lt. 12/10/62 11.. 12/17/62 2 11.. 12/17/62 2 Mat. 1/3/63 1/3/63 1~ Mat. 1/12/63 Calf 1/12/63 Calf 1/12/63 White White White White B'Lue #6 White White Blue #5 Blue #3 White White White DATE TAGGED FILE NUMBER REMARKS Retrap-12/10/62,1/11,2/11,2/16,2/22,3/17/63 Retrap-12/10/62,1/11/63 Hunter Kill-l0/22/63, near Stillwater L&R-Yel L&R-Yel Retrap-l/23,2/8/65 Retrap-2/8/65 Hunter Kill-l/27/63, snake R. L-Orange L-Red Cr. 2 Mi. W. of Rattle- Retrap-l/ll/63 Retrap-2/11/63,3/13/64(345#) Retrap-l/ll,1/29,2/22/63;3/13 3/27/64(310# ) L-Yel R-White L&R-O &, R R-Yel R-Yel L&R-O & R L&R-Red Retrap-2/22/63 Retrap-l/3,1/20/63 Retrap-2/18/63 Retrap-l/14/65 Retrap-l/3/63 Retrap-l/3/63 Retrap-l/14/65 Retrap-3/13/64;1/14/65 L&.R_~lhite Retrap-2/22/63 Retrap-2/11J2/18/63 (280#) 62-3 62-4 62-5 62-6 62-8 62-9 62-10 62-11 62 .• 12 62-13 62-14 62-15 62-16 62-17 62-18 62-19 62-20 62-21 62-22 62-23 62-24 62-26 62-25 62-27 62-28 62-29 62-30 62-31 62-32 62-33 w VI I-' �Table 3 - Con It. ELK LIVE-TRAPPING RECORDS ROCKY MOUNTAIN NATIONAL PARK TRAPPING LOCATION -- Moraine Park EAR TAG NUMBERS SEX AGE E-87,E-87 E-88,E-88 E-89,E~B9 E-90,A506 E-91,E-91 E-92,E-92 E-93,E-93 E-94,E-94 E-95,E-95 E-96,E-96 F F F F Calf Calf Calf Calf Mat. 1~ Mat. 11.. 2 Calf Calf E-97,E-97 E98,A2706 E-99,E-99 E-I00,E-I00 501,502 503,,504 505,506 507,508 509,510 513,514 517,518 519,520 521,522 A508,A509 A510,A511 A512,A513 A514,A521 A522,A523 A524,A525 F M M M F M F M F F F M F M F F M F F 11.. 2 Calf 11.. 2 Calf Calf 1~ Mat. Calf 11.. 2 Calf Mat. Calf Mat. Calf M3.t. 11.. 2 Calf Mat. Calf F F M M F F EAR TAG SERIES -- Notify Colo. G & F DATE TAGGED NECK COLLAR 1/12/63 1/12/63 1/12/63 1/20/63 1/19/63 1/19/63 1/19/63 1/19/63 1/19/63 1/19/63 White White White White YelloW#14 Blue #4 White White White Ye11oW#13 1/20/63 Blue #21 White 1/20/63 White 1/20/63 White 1/20/63 3/16/63 Blue #23 3:/16/63 3./16/63 3/16/63 3/16/63 3/16/63 3/17/63 3/17/63 White 3/17/63 White 2/18/63 White 2/22/63 White 2/22/63 White 2/22/63 White 2/22/63 White 2/22/63 EAR MARKERS L&R-White L&R-Orange L&R-O & R L-Y&W, R-Yel R-O & R L-R,R-Y&W Retrap-2/18/63 Hunter Ki11-10/19/63,Midd1e Retrap-3/15/65 Retrap-l/14/65 Retrap-2/11,2/16/63j2/8/65 Retrap-l/14/65 Retrap-2/16,2/22/63 Retrap-3/13/64(295#)jl/14/65 Formerly #E-77 Formerly #E-2 L-Ye1 FILE NUMBER REMARKS Retrap-3/7/64(365#) Supply Crk. 62-34 62-35 62-36 62-43 62-37 62-38 62-39 62-40 62-41 62-42 62-44 62-45 62-46 62-47 62-82 62-83 62-84 62-85 62-86 62-87 62-88 62-89 62-90 62-72 62-73 62-74 62-75 62-76 62-77 UJ V1 ro �ELK LIVE-TRAPPING RECORDS Table 3 - Con't· ROCKY MOUJ.'iTTA.IN NATIONAL PARK EAR TAG SERIES -- Notify Co Lo G & F TRA.PPING LOCATION -- Moraine Park EAR TAG :NUMBERS SEX M F M F A2715,A2716 A2717,A2718 A2719,A2720 A2721,A2722 AGE DATE TA.GGED NECK COLLAR Calf Calf Calf Calf 2/22/63 2/22/63 2/2F/63 2/2~/63 White White White White EAR MARKERS REMARKS Hunter Kill-l0/18/64,Stillwater Ck. FILE :NUMBER 62-78 62-79 62-80 62-81 EAR TAG SERIES -- Notify NPS (1-200) J2 3/7/64 3/7/64 3/7/64 3/7/64 3/7/64 3/7/64 3/7/64 3/7/64 3/8/64 3/10/64 3/21/64 3/21/64 '3121/64 3/21/64 3/21/64 3/21/64 White White White White YelloW#5 White White Yellow White White Yellow YelloW#6 Yellow White Blue #20 White L-Yel L-Yel L-Yel L-Yel L&R-Yel L-Yel L-Yel L-Orange L-Orange L-Orange L-Orange L&R-Orange L-Orange L-Red L-Red L-Red M3.t. Calf Calf 5-6 Mat. 3/21/64 3/28/64 3/28/64 3/28/64 3/28/64 White Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow L-Red L-R &W L-R & W L-R & W L-R & W 1,1 2,2 3,3 4,4 5,5 6,6 7,7 8,8 9,9 10,10 11,11 12,12 13,13 14,14 15,15 16,16 M F F F F F F F F M M F F F F F Calf 3-4 3-4 5-6 Calf 3":4 5-6 3-4 5-6 Calf Calf Mat. Calf 3-4 11- 17,17 25,25 26,26 27,27 28,28 F M M F F (195#) Retrap~3/13/64(255#) (365#) (375#) (4901/=) (255#) Retrap-3/27/64(435#);2/8/65 (395#) Retrap-3/13/64(455#) (470#) (4501/=) Retrap-4/8/64 (4501/=) (220#) (190#) Retrap-4/8/64 (450#) Retrap-l/23/65 (2801/=) Retrap-4/8/64 (435# ) (345#) Retrap-l/14/65 (2601/=) Predator Kill,7/21/64, S. of Beaver M. (475#) (290#) Retrap-4/8j64 (3401/=) (485#) Retrap-l/14/65 (4801/=) Hunter Kil1,10/17/64 Stillwater Ck. 63-2 63-3 63-4 63-5 63-6 63-7 63-8 63-9 63-10 63-11 63-15 63-16 63-17 63-18 63-19 63-20 63-21 63-22 63-23 63-24 63-25 VJ \Jl VJ �Table 3 - Contt. ELK LIVE':'TRAFPINGRECORDS ROCKY MOUNTAIN NATIONAL PARK TRAPPING LOCATIONS -- Moraine Park EAR TAG NUMBERS 30,30 31,31 32,32 33,33 34,34 35,35 36,36 37,37 38,38 39,39 40,40 41,41 42,42 43,43 44,44 45,45 46,46 47,47 48,48 49~49 50,50 51,xx 52,52 53,53 54,54 55,55 56,56 57,57 58,58 59,59 SEX AGE F F F F F F F F M F F F F M M F M F M F F F F M F F F F F F 3-4 Mat. Mat. Calf 3-4 Calf Mat. Mat. Calf Calf 3-4 Calf Calf Calf 112 Mat. Calf 3-4 Calf Calf 112 Mat. M3.t. Calf Calf M3.t. Mat. 112 Mat. Calf EAR TAG SERIES -- Notify NPS (1-200) DATE TAGGED NECK COLLAR EAR MARKERS 3/28/64 3/28/64 3/28/64 3/28/64 3/28/64 3/28/64 3/28/64 3/28/64 3/28/64 3/28/64 3/28/64 3/28/64 3/28/64 3/28/64 3/29/64 4/8/64 4/8/64 4/8/64 4/8/64 4/8/64 4/8/64 1/14/65 1/14/65 1/14/65 1/14/65 1/14/65 1/14/65 1/14/65 1/14/65 1/14/65 Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow YelloW#12 Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow YelloW#8 Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow Blue #1 Blue #2 Blue #7 Blue #8 ;Blue#9 Blue#lO Blue#ll Blue#12 Blue#13 L-R & W L-R & W L-O & Y L-O & Y L-O&W,R-Yel L-O & Y L-Q & Y L-O & Y L-O ~ Y L-O,:& Y L-W-.R-Red. L&R-Orange L-White L-.White L-R & W L-White L-White L-White L-White L-Y&W L-O & R L&R-O &R L&R-R & Y L&R-R & Y L&R-R & Y L&R-R &::Y L&R-R & Y R-O & W L-O & W REMARKS (500//= ). (420//=) (475#) (290//=) (485#) Retrap-2/8/65 (280//=) (475#) (565#) (300//=) (275#) . (335#) Retrap-2/20/65 Horseshoe Trap (175#) Retrap-l/25/65 (240//=) (215#) Retrap-3/15/65 Retrap-l/25/65 Bell, FILE NUMBER 63-26 63-27 63-28 63-29 63-30 63-31 63-32 63-33 63-34 63-35 63-36 63-37 63-38 63-39 63-40 63-43 63-44 63-45 63-46 63-47 63-48 64-2 64-3 64-4 64-5 64-6 64-7 64-8 64-9 64-10 w \J1 -F' �ELK LIVE-TRAPPING RECORDS Table 3 - Con't. ROCKY MOUNTAIN NATIONAL PARK EAR TAG SERIES -- Notify NPS (1-200) TRAPPING LOCATION -- Moraine Park EAR TAG NUMBERS SEX AGE 60,60 61,61 62,78 63,63 64,64 65,65 66,66 67,67 68,68 69,69 70,70 71,71 72,72 73,73 74,74 75,75 76,76 77,77 78,99 79,79 80,80 81,81 M M F M M F F F F F F M F F F M F M M M F M Calf Calf M3.t. II2 1~ M3.t. M3.t. Calf Calf Calf II2 Calf Calf 2l2 Calf Calf Calf Calf Calf Calf Mat. Calf DATE TAGGED NECK COLLAR 1/14/65 1/14/65 1/14/65 1/14/65 1/14/65 1/14/65 1/14/65 1/14/65 1/23/65 1/23/65 1/23/65 1/23/65 1/23/65 1/23/65 1/23/65 1/23/65 1/23/65 1/23/65 1/25/65 1/25/65 1/25/65 1/25/65 Blue #14 Blue #15 Blue #16 YelloW#l Yel1oW#2 Blue #18 Blue #19 Blue #22 Blue #24 Blue #25 Blue #26 Blue #27 Blue #28 Yel1oW#4 Blue #29 Blue #30 Blue #31 Blue #32 Blue #33 Blue #34 Blue #35 Blue #36 EAR REMARKS MARKERS R-O & W R-O & W L-O & W L-O,R-Y&W L-O,R-Y&W L-O &W L-O & W L-Y & W L&R-Yel L&R-Yel L&R-Yel L&R-Yel L&R-Yel L&R-Yel L&R-Yel L&R-Orange L&R-Orange L&R-Orarige L&R-Orange L&R-Orange L&R-Orange Retrap-l!23/65 Retrap-2/8,2/20,3/11/65 Retrap-l/25/65 Bell - FILE NUMBER 64-11 64-12 64-13 64-14 64-15 64-16 64-17 64-18 64-21 64-22 64-23 64..;24 64-25 64-26 64-27 64-28 64-29 64-30 64-31 64-32 64-33 64-34 w \J1 \J1 �ELK LIVE-TRAPPING RECORDS ROCKY MOUNTAIN NATIONAL PARL Table 3 - Con It. EAR TAG SERIES -- Notify NPS (1-200) TRA.PPING LOCATION -- Moraine Park EAR TAG NUMBERS 82,82 83,83 84,84 85,85 86,86 87,87 88,88 89 90,90 91,91 92,92 93,93 94,94 95,95 96,96 97,97 98,98 100,100 SEX AGE F F F F F F F F F F F F F M M F F F Mat. Mat. Mat. Calf Calf 3-4 5-6 M3..t. M3..t. Mat. Mat 3-4 3-4 Calf Calf Calf 3-4 5-6 DATE TAGGED NECK COLLAR EAR MARKERS 2/8/65 2/8/65 2/8/65 2/10/65 2/10/65 2/23/65 2/23/65 3/11/65 3/11/65 3/11/65 3/15/65 3/15/65 3/15/65 3/15/65 3/15/65 3/15/65 3/15/65 3/15/65 Blue #37 Blue #38 Blue #39 Blue #40 Blue #41 Blue #42 Blue #43 Blue #44 Blue #45 Blue #46 Blue #47 Blue #48 Blue #49 Blue #17 Blue #50 YelloW#16 YelloW#15 Orange #9 L&R-Orange L&R-Yellow L-O&W,R-Y&W Retrap-3/11/65 L&R-Red L&R-Red L&R-Red L&R-Red L-White L&R-White L&R-White L&R-Yellow L&R-Orange L&R-Orange L&R-Red L&RMOrange L&R-Orange L&R-White L&R-White REMARKS FILE NUMBER 64-35 64-36 64-37 64-38 64-39 64-43 64-44 64-45 64-46 64-47 64-48 64-49 64-50 64-51 64-52 64-53 64-54 64-55 w Vl 0\ �ELK LIVE-TRAPPING RECORDS Table 3 - Con It. ROCKY MOUNTAIN NATIONAL PARK EAR TAG SERIES -- Notify NPS (501-700) TRAPPING LOCATION -- Horseshoe Park SEX AGE DATE TAGGED NECK COLLAR EAR MARKERS 501,501 502,502 504,504 506,506 507,507 508,508 509,509 511,511 512,512 513,513 514,514 515,515 516,516 M F F M F F M F F M F M M 6-8 Calf Calf 2~ 3-4 3-4 Mat. Calf M3.t. 1~ 3-4 White Orange Orange R-Yellow L-Orange L-Orange Calf 1/29/64 3/n/64 3/16/64 3/19/64 4/2/64 4/2/64 4/10/64 1/12/65 1/19/65 1/19/65 2/20/65 2/20/65 2/20/65 Orange Orange Orange Orange Orange #1 Orange #2 Orange #3 Orange #4 Orange #5 L-Red L-lfPite L-Y & W L&R-Orange R-Orange L&R-Orange L&R-Red L&R-Red L&R-Red 526,526 .M Calf 5/28/64 EA.R TAG NUMBERS * L-O,R-Y&W REMARKS Retrap-3/1/64 Lost Band Retrap-l/19/65 Gummer Small Size 1-2 Weeks Old FILE NUMBER 63-1 63-12 63-13 63-14 63-41 63-42 63-49 64-1 64-19 64-20 64-40 64-41 64-42 63-50 w \Jl --.l �358 Most of the neckband observations have been ground observations by Park personnel and others, although some aerial locations have been made incidentally while crossing the area on other work. The bi-weekly flights originallyplanned have not been possible, due to turbulent air on the east side of the divide, lack of suitable snow cover, and dense timber cover. Retirement of the regional pilot also contributed to a lack of aerial observation opportunities. No work has been done in the actual correlation of meteDrological and phenological data with movements of the elk to date. Neal Guse, biologist in Rocky Mountain National Park, is keeping track of these data, however. Recommendations: The livetrapping program, and the helicopter work, should be continued for one or two more years to ensure a good sample of the population being marked for observations on seasonal movements and migration. This should then give us a sufficient number on which to base tracing of routes, and times of the year, so that a management plan can be evolved to harvest surpluses when outside the boundaries of the Park. Prepared by: Richard N. Denney Project Leader Date July, 1965 Approved by: Wayne W. Sandfort ,Game Research Chief �July, 1965 359 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJEC T .SEGMENT State of Colorado --------~~--~-----------Name Deer-Elk Investigations Project No. W-38-R-19 Work Plan No. Title of Job: 11 A Job No. 5 Rocky Mountain National Park Cooperative Elk Study Population Components Period Covered: April 1, 1964 through March 31, 1965. Abstract Since regularly scheduled aerial flights have not been possible, the only data on this job have been accumulated by Park Service personnel on ground counts, and are too scattered and insufficient in number to warrant analysis or interpretation to date. Objectives Knowledge of the herd structures by sex and age class, as well as the productivity of a herd, is vital to the formulation of a sorundmanagement plan. (1) Determine the sex-ratio of the elk in this herd. (2) Determine the cow-calf ratio of the elk in this herd. (3) Determine the age-class structure of this herd of elk. Procedure: Through field, fixed-wing airplane and helicopter counts ascertain the ratio of: 1. Bulls to cows by using one observer so as to mlnlmlze the variations inherent in different observers. Enumerate the actual numbers of bulls seen and adult cows observed to base calculations for determining the number of cows per bull, and the number of bulls per 100 cows. It is anticipated that this number will vary considerably amongst the three types of possible herd populations found in the study area, that is (1) sub--Qllitsof the herd which are never outside the boundaries of the Park at any time of year, (2) subunits of the herd which live almost entirely out of the Park at all times of the year, and (3) sub-units of the herd which may spend part of the year wi thin the Park, and be outside during the winter, or possibly during part of the hunting season. �360 2. Calves to cows, usi~g one observer so as to have comparable counts from year to year and area to area. Realizing that this will include some yearling heifers and some dry cows, it nevertheless will indicate the calf production potential of the herd. Calves per 100 cows will be calculated, and then the annual productivity of the herd can be projected. 3- Mature bulls to yearling bulls, again with one observer so as to have standardized counts. From check station data we have found that yearling bulls range from spikes to sometimes four or five points, but the antler form is not the typical tined-formation of the older bulls, nor is it as heavily beamed. This ratio will provide a clue as to the survival from calfhood to the succeeding age-classes. Data from animals taken during control harvesting and special season hunts as to sex and age classes in the harvest will be analyzed in addition. �Population Components Richard N. Denney Since satisfactory flights have not been possible in the fixed-wing, nor have helicopter flights been possible, the only data on this job have been accumulated by Neal Guse on ground observations by him and Park Service personnel within the Park. These data will be analyzed after another year or two have allo~ed further observations and classifications, being too scattered and insufficient at present to warrant analysis or interpretation. Discussion: This is a vital phase of any specific study on wildlife, and efforts will be made in the next segment to obtain helicopter pre-season and post-season classification counts, as well as .mid-winter trend counts, sponsored by each of the three cooperating agencies. This will be correlated with the data available from the ground observations so that the various classifications and ratios may be derived. Date Approved by: Wayne W. Sandfort July, 1965 ----~--~~~~---------------Game Research Chief ��July, 1965 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEA.RCH PROJECT SEGME:NT state of Colorado Project No. W-38-R-19 Work Plan No. 11 A Period Covered: Name Deer-Elk Investigations Job No. 6 April 1, 1964 through March 31, 1965· Abstract: As a result of marked elk observations on this study, the number of cow validations in Game M:magement Unit 18 were increased from 250 in 1963 to 300 in 1964, resulting in a 20.5 per cent increase in validation success ratio, and a 10 per cent increase in overall success, with but a small increase in hunter pressure. The number of validations for the 1965 season was increased to 400, hoping to harvest elk during the regular season by sportsmen before they seek the sanctuary of the Park, and overcrowd the depleted winter ranges. Objectives: After a thorough analysis of the foregoing phases of the study, the results must be reported upon, and management recommendations made based on proven or logical techniques. 1. Determine the overall aspects of the study as they pertain to the management of this specific herd. 2. Publish and report on the findings of the study. 3. Recommend the best possible management for the herd in the study area as indicated from the findings of thepreceeding jobs. �364 Procedure: 1. Bring all the diverse aspects of the study into one comprehensive: picture of this herd situation to enable intensive analysis and evaluation of the data in terms of all the various implications as related to possible management of the herd, and the possible effects of the indicated management on it. 2. Annual completion reports will be submitted in accordance with the Federal Aid requirements, but in addition, special reports in popular form for Colorado Outdoors magazine, and a final comprehensive write-up will be made in a professional manner for technical publications such as the Journal of Wildlife Management, etc. 3. Management recommendations will be formulated wherever possible to correlate known seasons, results and other management manipulations with some or any of the various possible herd characteristics found to be manifested in this study area. If it is found, for example, that the elk most generally come out of the Park in December, it might be prudent to recommend that the normal hunting season not be held in October or November, but rather delayed so that the larger elk popul~tion will be available in December to a specified number of hunters with special permits. It might also be the case that a drift fence in a strategic position might divert the animals to the outside open areas during the regular big game season, thus affording the opportunity for harvesting at that time. �Elk Management Recommendations Richard N. Denney As a result of the observations of neckbanded animals, and the harvest of several, in 1963 in Game Management Unit 18, the season recommendati.ons for that unit included an increase in the number of cow validations for the 1964 hunting season. The idea behind this recommendation was that if some of the animals that winter in the Park, where winter range is limited and somewhat depleted, could be harvested during the regular hunting season while outside the Park boundaries by the sportsmen it would relieve some of the winter range crowding and use. In 1963, 250 cow validations were allowed in this unit, resulting in a 23.2 per cent success by permit holders, or a kill of 5 bulls, 47 cows and 6 calves on validations. When raised to 300 validations in 1964, the success ratio was 43.7 per cent, with a kill of 5 bulls, 98 cows and 28 calves. The number of hunters increased from 945 in 1963 to 970 in 1964 (an increase of only 25), but the overall success ratio increased from 19 to 29 per cent. After the hard winter experienced in 1964-65 in the Middle Park area, and the continued number of observations of Park-banded animals in the unit, the number of validations was recommended, and realized, to increase to 400. The results of such an increase will not be available until after the 1965 hunting season, and the kill reports have been published. It was also recommended that, if the 1965 harvest is not sufficient to reduce winter range numbers in the Park, a special season~y be held in January or February, 1966. This would not be a wide-open season such as held in January-February, 1963, but would be on the basis of a specified number of permits. This is but an example of the application of some of the findings of this study on management. Actually, the final management plan cannot 'be fully developed until all jobs or phases of the study have been cOMpleted and organized into a final, comprehensive report. Date July, 1965 Approved by~: Wayne W. Sandf'oz-t Game Research Chief ��July, 1965 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of Colorado Project No. W-38-R-19 Name Work Plan No. 11 A .. Job No. Period Covered: Deer~Elk Investigations 7 April 1, 1964 through March 31, 1965· Abstract: Data on the electrophysiology of the heart, myocardial ratios, respiratory rates, body temperatures, hematological values, fertility, age and weights on 39 live elk and 21 fetal specimens, where applicable, are presented in tabular form with some discussion. The subject elk were livetrapped in Moraine Park of Rocky Mountain National Park, and the fetuses were from animals harvested by hunters outside the Park boundaries (Units 19 and 20). Objectives: Determine the normal physiological data on Rocky Mountain elk according to the following categories: 1. Electrophysiology of the heart: a. PR interval b. QRS interval c. QT interval d. Heart rate 2. Myocardial ratios: a. Myocardial weight b. Ventricular-septal-total 3. Respiratory rate.· 4. Body temperature weight relations �368 5· Hematological values: a· Hematocrit (PCV) b. Hemoglobin c. Leucocytes d Thrombocytes e. Sedimentation rate f Blood proteins g. Serum (1) Sodium (2) Potassium (3) Calcium h. Blood sugar 6. Fertility. 7· Age. 8. Weight. Procedure: Most of the data were obtained from live-trapped animals incidental to the tagging and banding portion, Job 4, of the study. L~ addition, specimens were collected from animals harvested in the study area by hunters in the January-February, 1963, special season. 1. While livetrapping, each animal was restrained in a squeeze chute and an electrocardiograph was connected to the animal by means of three standard limb leads (bi-polar) and three uni-polar leads to record the electrocardiogram. The electric current for the electrocardiograph was supplied by 110-120 volt outlet from a utility pole placed near the trap for our convenience. The conduction rate of the heart was determined by analyzing the electrocardiogram and determining the PR, QRS and QT intervals. 2. The weights of the hearts collected from dead animals of assigned ages were determined by total weight and myocardial weight, and the relationship of the ventricles and septum were calculated by dividing the weight of the myocardium into the right ventricle, left ventricle and septum weights, respectively. 3· The respiratory rates were determined by observational counts per minute. 4. The body temperature of each live animal was taken rectally by means of an electronic thermometer. 5· Blood samples of approximately 20 cc were taken from the external jugular veins of live-trapped animals in Rocky Mountain National Park through standard laboratory procedures: (electrophoresis) hematocrit, hemoglobin, white blood cells, platelets, sedimentation rate, blood proteins (albumins, globulins, fibrinogen), serum calcium, serum sodium, serum potassium and b'lood sugar. �6. Fertility was investigated as it pertained to fetal weights and measurements, and ages of dams, and backdating to determine range of conception dates and date of highest incidence of conception. 7. The age of all livetrapped and harvested animals were determined through dentition development and wear. 8. The weights of all livetrapped animals were recorded as determined by means of the combination scales and squeeze-chute (Silver King) which was incorporated into the trap and loading chute design. �370 Lead I Lead II 't r:-! . Lead III AVL AVR AVF Figure 1. Examples of the electrophysiological data obtained on the electrocardiograph from Elk No. 39, which is fairly representative of the 22 specimens of readable electrocardiograms. �371 Elk Physiological Studies Richard N. Denney 1. Electrophysiology of the heart. The electrophysiological results are presented in Table 1. The purpose of this job was to obtain some "normal" physiological data on wild elk since there are very little if any on this species in the literature. The data are as close to normal as it is possible to obtain in wild trapped animals. It is realized, however, that due to the excitement of these elk that the electrophysiological data cannot be considered as normal resting values. It is hoped that the inclusion of these data in the literature will be of some value to future researchers working with wild elk. Figure 1 shows an example of the electrophysiological data obtained from the leads on elk speciman No. 39, which are representative of those taken. Since there is no electrocardiographic data in the literature on wild elk, comparisons of the data obtained in the present project with data previously obtained on elk cannot be made Therefore comparisons will be made with data obtained from the domestic herbivorous animals. The P wave in the sheep and goat is double and O.oS millivolts in amplitude whereas in elk it is single and 0.227 mV. high. In the horse it is double and from 0.150.22 mV. In the cow it isdiphasic or triphasic and 0.10-0.30 mV. The P-R interval in elk is 0.124 seconds as compared to a duratiofi of 0.10-0.30 in the cow and 0.35-0.42 in the horse. The QRS interval in the elk is 0.059 seconds while in the cow and horse it is 0.OS-0.12 seconds in duration. The Q-T interval in the elk is 0.255 secs. compared to 0.29-0.44 secs. in the cow and 0.40-0.60 in the horse. The height of the T wave in elk is .0.3S1mV. whereas in the cow it is 0.36-0.44 mV. and in the horse 0 40-0.60 mV. The elk values tend to closely approximate those seen in the cow although the QRS and Q-T intervals are lesser in magnitude than in the cow. Also the P ware in domestic herbivora tends to be either notched or diphasic whereas in the elk it is smooth and monophasic. All elk values were taken from Lead II. �372 Table 1 - Electrocardiographic Data on Rocky Mountain National ParkElk* Leads I II III AVR AVL AVF P-Width 0.051 +0.024 0.080 .:!:O 191 0.072 +0.022 .- 0.068 ~0.017 0.058 +0.021 0.078 .~O.015 P-height 0.122 ~0.069 0.227 .:!:0.093 0.152 ~0.074 0.180 +0.080 0.132 +0.053 0.176 ~0.069 0.102 ~0.045 0.124 ~0.025 0.126 +0.026 0.120 +0.020 0.117 +0.036 0.124 +0.024 0.048 .:!:O .015 0.059 +0.016 .- 0.060 .:!:D 015 0.049 +0.011 - 0.051 .:!:0.019 0.058 +0.012 0.115 +0.044 0.116 ~0.025 0.116 +0.028 0.116 ~0.031 0.128 +0.036 0.119 ~0.027 0.220 ~0.071 0.255 +0.046 0.256 ~0.049 0.238 +0.048 0.249 :::0.032 0.263 +0.040 T-width 0.063 .:!:O .030 0.082 +0.018 0.083 +0.020 0.072 +0.021 0.074 +0.026 0.081 +0.021 T.,.height 0.152 +0.100 o 381 +0.228 0.406 ~0.227 0.220 +0.128 0.268 +0.164 .- 0.348 +0.200 P-R 'interval QRS interval S-T Segment Q-1' Segment *N=22 All times are in seconds + standard deviation All amplitudes are in millivolts + standard deviation �3D 2. Myocardial ratios. Only five elk hearts, three adult and two young adult, were available for weighing. The left ventricular, right ventricular, septal and total weights were determined. The right ventricular, left ventricular and septal to total weight ratios were also determined. The, myocardial weights and ratios are presented in Tables 2 and 3. Tbese values can serve as guides to future investigators in this area. 3. Respiratory rates. The respiratory rates on 38 live elk are presented in Table 4, revealing a mean of 53 per minute. 4. Body temperature. Body temperatures as indicated by the electronic thermometer on 39 live elk are presented in Table 4, with a mean of 107.70 F. 5. Hematological values. Since there apparently aren't any data on elk blood proteins in the literature the analysis of them presented a problem. Nice electrophoretic patterns were obtained and it was fairly easy to determine which were the albumin and globulin fractions, but it could not be determined with certainly what sub-fractions of the globulin protein were represented by the various curves without detailed chemical analysis of the globulin proteins. It was therefore decided to report the albumin content and the globulin content, and in addition, the albumin to globulin ratios. The individual determinations of the alpha, beta and gamma globulin fractions will have to wait for a future, more detailed and sophisticated blood protein analysis. Thrombocyces were not counted due to the difficulty of doing so lli~derfield conditions. Hemagglutination tests of the blood of all elk were negative for leptospirosis and brucellosis. Tables 5 and 6 list the hematologic data obtained. From this study some interesting comparisons can be made between the hematologic values obtained in elk and those previously obtained in some of their domestic counterparts, i.e. the cow, sheep and horse. One of the most outstanding values noticed was the clotting time of elk blood. It was found to be 14.2 minutes, which is considerable longer than any of our domestic species. The horse has a clotting time of 11 minutes, which is the longest of the latter group. Another value that differs significantly from domestic animals is the WEe, which in elk was found to be 5,559!cu.ml. The lowest WEe in our dovestic animals is 8,000!cu.ml. in the sheep. �374 Table 2 - Cardiac Ventricular and Septal Weights in Rocky Mountain National Park Elk Elk No. Left Ventricular Weight (Grams) 1 2 3 4 5 539 514 461 235 328 Right Ventricular Weight ~Grams) 292 324 236 147 178 Septal Weight (Grams) Total Weight (Grams) 282 235 186 124 142 1,113 1,073 883 506 648 Table 3 - Cardiac Ventricular and Septal to Total Weight Ratios in Rocky Mountain National Park Elk Elk No. Lv/T Rv/T siT 1 3 4 5 0.484 o ~470 0·511 0.464 0:506 0.262 0·302 0.267 0.290 0.275 0,.253 0'.219 0.211 0.245 0.219 Mean with Standard Deviation 0.487 +0.021 +- .ois 0.279 0.229 +0.018 2 �375 Table 4 - Physiologic Data on Rocky Mountain National Park Elk, 1963-64. Elk No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 Age Weight Lbs. Resp. Rate Per Minute Temp. of. calf:. yearling calf calf calf calf calf calf calf 4 yrs. adult adult 4 yrs. adult adult calf 3-4 yrs. calf 6-7 yrs. adult calf yearling calf 4-5 yrs. 3 yrs. calf calf calf calf adult calf calf 3-4 yrs. adult yearling yearling yearling yearling adult 350 465 350 265 200 325 370 290 340 485 480 555 500 420 475 290 485 280 475 565 300 310 275 435 335 175 240 215 190 450 255 280 455 435 345 295 345 260 475 32 42 62 28 92 54 78 28 66 48 24 44 22 44 32 40 30 105·2 109·5 108.6 106.8 109·1 109·2 109·3 106·9 108.0 106.8 105·8 109·0 106.6 106.0 107.8 105·8 104.2 107·0 104.4 107·2 110.4 104.8 104·7 105·2 104·9 106.8 107·1 106·3 107·4 109·2 110.6 110.8 111.2 108·5 108.0 109·2 110.4 109·6 111.0 36 44 44 36 32 36 36 40 50 28 42 84 102 96 62 86 60 110 76 70 76 x = 53 SD = + 24 x = 107.7 SD = + 2.02 Sex F F F M F F M M M F F F F F F F F F F F M F F F F F F M M F M M F F F F F F F �376 Table 5 - Blood Proteins in Rocky Mountain National Park Elk Elk No. Total Serum Proteins Grams % Albumin Grams ~ Globulin. Grams % 32 30 36 3 17 4 14 20 23 1 19 16 34 24 22 36 38 31 9 4.1 6·5 6·3 2.6 6.1 1.6 6.8 5·7 8·3 2·5 3·5 7·3 6·5 11.5 7·1 6·3 5·3 6·7 2.2 1.58 2.60 2·30 1.01 2.82 0.61 2·59 2.44 3·48 0·94 1.55 3·10 1.94 4·57 2·98 2·36 2.41 2·71 0.84 2·52 3·90 4.00 1.59 3·28 0·99 4.21 3·26 4.82 1.56 1.95 4.20 4·56 6·93 4.12 3·94 2.89 3·99 1.36 0.63 0.67 0·58 0.64 0.86 0.62 0.62 0·75 0·72 0.60 0·79 0·74 0.43 0.66 0·72 0.60 0.83 0.68 0.62 X 5·6 +2.4 - 2.25 ~0.999 3·39 ~1.45 0.67 .:.0.099 ALG �Table 6 - Hematologic Data on Rocky Mountain National Park Elk, 1963-64. Parameter (N) Mean Stand. Dev. Stand. Error 95% Confidence Interval 2 hr. Sed rate (12) 13.2 mm/hr. ~ 9.9 mm 2.85 mm 7 - 19 mm Hematocrit (31) 46.3% ~ 2.12% 0.381% 45.5% - 17·1% Hemoglobin (grams )(31) 18.3 grams .:.0.808 grams 0.145 grams 18.0g - 18.6g Blood gilucose mg/lOO ml (32 ) 146.4 mg/ 100 ml ~ 46.69 mg/1OO ml 8.254 mg/100 ml 129.6 - 163·2 mg/lOO ml Clotting time (34) 14.2 min. ~ 4.27 min. 0.732 min. 12.7 - 15.7 min. w White blood cell count (32) 5,559 /cm3 ,:!=. Sodium (36) 148.2 meq/L :. 8.62 meq/L 1,902 /cm3 336 /cm3 4874 - 6244 /cm3 1.436 me q/L 145.3 - 151.1 me q/L Potassium (34) 5.48 me q/L ,:!=. 0.646 me q/L 0.110 me q/L Calcium (39) 9.4 mg/100 ml :. 0.44 mg/100 ml 0.0708mg/100 61% .:.16% 2.48 56% - 66% 36% :. 13% 2.12 32% - 40% 15% :. 4% 0.80 13% - 17% Differential blood cells Neutrophils (40) Lymphocytes (40) Eosinophils (23 ) 5.26 - 5.70 meq/L ml 9.26 - 9·54 mg/ 100 ml --:] --:] �378 The hemoglobin value in elk of 18.3 g ./100 ml. is much higher than: the highest values in our domestic animals,13.5 g./100 ml. in the dog and 12.5 g./ml. in the horse. The differential count in elk corres:ponds most closely with that of the horse. Both show a :predominance of neutro:phils (61 :per cent in elk, 55 :per cent in horse) with almost 33 1/3 :per cent . Lymphocyt.es . The elk in this study shewed a pronounced increase in eosino:phils (15 :per cent) which was :probably due to the heavy infestation qf ticks found on them. The highest normal eosino:phil count in our domestic animals is five "per cent. The blood glucose level in elk (146.4 mg. :per cent) is much higher than in the horse (80 mg. :per cent) or cow (50 mg. :per cent). It is fairly close to the value found in the :pig (140 mg. :per cent). The calcium value in the elk (9.4 mg :per cent) is slightly lower than the cow (10 mg. :per cent). The sodium value corres:ponds very well with values found in most domestic animals. The hermatocrit (46.3 :per cent) is very close to that of the dog and horse (43 :per cent). The sedimentation rate is 13.2 mg/hr and com:pares favorably with the rates of the domestic animals. It should be :pointed out that although these animals had been in the tra:p for several days they were still very excited. The handling :process to get them into the squeeze chute added to this excitedness. The values obtained therefore have to be considered with this in mind. 6. Fertility. Recently, a total of 21 fetuses were secured from :pregnant cow elk killed during the 1963 :preseason hunt. They ranged from 84 to 2372 grams in weight (2.8 to 125 ounces, or from 0.3 to 7.8 :pounds,averaging 3.4 :pounds). Fitting these data into a crown-rum:p length curve based on Morrison, et. al. (1959), an average age of 125 days was calculated for these fetuses, ranging from 85 to 150 days. The average date of kill on the cows was established at J~nuary 30, 1963. Backdating then, we find that the :peak of conce:ption for elk in the Estes Park area was a:p:proximatelySe:ptember 26, but ranged fromSe:ptember 2 to November 6, 1962. Two of these fetuses were taken from cows which would have had these calves, on their second birtbday, having conceived as long-yearlings. One of these was 3.0 :pounds, and the other was 4.7 :pounds. Many investigators feel that the young or yearlings of any s:pecies that a~e ca:pable of re:producing at an early age bear smaller :progency. Recall, that the average weight of those fetuses sampLed was 3.4 pounds . This small sample, however, does not necessarily refute this theory. Of these 21 fetuses sampl~d, 12 were male, and 9 were females. All appeared to be normal, pe.rf'ec t'Ly Tormed specimens. Data on crown-rump length, contour length, foreleg and. hindleg length, head length and width, and tail length were recorded, along with weights. �379 There were two possible instances of twins reported during the preseason although they were not verified by technician examination. There has been only one occasion of collecting fully developed twin fetuses in the Park. These were found during the 1960-61 control program in a 2-4 year old cow. In this instance, both sexes were present. Of 524 cows examined in the Park, exclusive of yearlings, the incidence of twinning in elk is slightly less than two-tenths of one percent (0.2%) which is similar to that reported from the Northern Yellowstone Herd. The hematologic, electrocardiogrpahic and other physiologic data obtained in this study should prove of immense reference value to future research on elk. These data are needed in the literature, and will soon appear in a different form in a technical article that Dr. Herin will publis:b. 7. Age. The ages and sex of the 39 live elk are presented in Table 4. 8. Weight. Table 4 lists the weights of the 39 elk as determined on the Silver King combination squeeze chute and scales, ranging from 175 for a female calf to 565 pounds for a mature cow. Acknowledgeme:q.t: This work was only possible through the cooperation of the various agencies involved, namely, the National Park Service, the Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department, and the CSU College of Veterinary Medicine. Dr. Herin stated "it has been an immense pleasure to me to work on elk and especially to receive such wholehearted cooperation from such dedicated wildlife research men as Mr. Dick Denney and Mr. Neal Guse ..Without their efforts this project would have been impossible." References Cited: 1. Dukes, H. H., 1955 Physiology of Domestic Animals, 7th Ed., Comstock Publishing Associates, Ithaca, N. Y., 101, pp. 2. Luisada, A. A., 1953. 294, The Heart Beat. Paul B. Hoeber, Ln.c.,N. Y., N. s . pp. 3· Morrison, John A., C. E. Trainer and P. L. Wright. 1959. Breeding season in elk as determined from known-age embryos. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 23(1): 27-34. Prepared by: Richard.N. Denney Project Deader Reginald A. Herin, M.S., D.V.M. Associate Professor of Physiology College of Veterinary Medicine Fort Collins, Colorado Approved by: Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief ��July, 1965 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH··PROJECT· SEGMENT State of Colorado ----------------------------- Project No. W-38-R-19 Work Plan No. 11 B Name Deer-Elk Investigations Job No. 1 Title of Job: Historical and Research Background, Rio::Grande Elk Study Period Covered: April 1, 1964 through March 31, 1965· Personnel: Raymond J. Boyd, Associate Wildlife Researcher Abstract: No work was accomplished on this job during the past segment. Recommendations: Complete this job during the next segment. Objectives: A better underatanding of current conditions within the proposed Rio Grande elk study area can be attained when factors leading up to these conditions are known. Therefore, the objectives of this job will be: (1) Historical background data on the elk and their ranges in the Rio Grande area, namely, Game Management Units 76, 79 and 80 (also known as validation areas R, R-2 and R-l). (2) Research and management background data from work done on the elk and their ranges by the U. S. Forest Service, Bureau of Land Management and the Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department and other agencies or persons. Procedures: 1. The historical background data on the elk and their rang~s in the Rio Grande area will be obtained wherever possible from existent Forest Service files on livestock allotment work and game population estimates that are required by the respective services, from interviews of long-time residents of the area, old newspapers, journals and books concerning the early exploration and development of the area. �2. Hunter kill records, seasons, bag limits, etc. will be determined from a search of the records of the Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department, both the Management Division and the Federal Aid research records. 3. The U. S. Forest Service has in the past, coincidentally with their regular work, and as part of the biological inventory of the animals, plants, etc. of the Rio Grande Forest, taken various measurements and observations during their administration of the forest area, and these facts and figures can be compared with present conditions as they pertain to the elk. Historical and Research Background Raymond J. Boyd The press of other duties, some of which were not concerned with Federal Aid work, did not allow any time to be spent on this job. Arrangements have been made with personnel of the Rio Grande National Forest to examine files, letters, charts, etc. for the purpose of fulfilling the objectives of this job. Date July, 1965 Approved by _~R:....i...;.c-:h_a_r...,.d~N:"".--c:D_ _ --~~~~~~-------------------Project Leader �July, 1965 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH.·PROJECT SEGMENT State of Colorado --------~-------------------- Project No. W-38-R-19 Work Plan No. 11 B Name Deer-Elk Investigations Job No. 2 Title of Job: Winter and Summer Range Delimitation, Rio Grande Elk Study Period Covered: April 1, 1964 through March 31, 1965· Personnel: Raymond J. Boyd, Associate Wildlife Researcher; Errol Ryland, Game. Management Biologist, Southwest Region; Wayne Russell, Pilot, Southwest Region. Abstract: No work has been done on this job specifically as much of the information needed to complete the objectives is being gathered under Jobs 3 and 4 of this work plan. Job 3 :(Basic Range Inventory), when completed, will show the total winter range of the elk in Game Management Unit 76 (Creede Unit). Mapping of the secondary winter ranges in this area will have to wait until the mapping of the ranges under Job 3 is completed, which should be before the end of the next segment. Work on Job 4 (Seasonal Movements) will also b~ applied to this job as a supplement to the mapping of the vegetation on the winter range. Recommendations: 1. Complete maps of the study area with two overlays showing primary and secondary winter ranges in Game Management Unit 76. 2. Make up overlays showing winter and summer concentration areas that were determined by aerial flights throughout the year. Objectives: Areas of use during the various seasons of the year must be determined so as to know areas where elk concentrate at various times, and to determine the total available range for each season. (1) Delimit and map the primary winter and summer range within the study area. These are ranges that the elk will normally use seven or eight years out of every ten. �384 (2) Delimit and map the secondary elk ranges in the. study area, those areas that are sometimes known as intermediate or spring-fall ranges, which when added to the primary winter range will give the total winter range available to the elk. Procedure: 1. Determine through records, files, publications and field observations, the areas of elk concentration in the past and map these areas. 2. ~elimit and map the present elk concentration areas through use of fixed-wing flights and some helicopter flights on a bi-monthly basis for two years. The study area will be flown on a regular strip series that will be flown the same way each time. Additional information on elk concentrations will be gathered during sex and age classification counts of the elk on the area, and from notes taken on regular aerial trend counts. The animals observed on these flights will be located on maps by the observer while actually flying and making the observations as to locations, numbers and movements. Winter and Summer Range Delimitation Raymond J. Boyd No work was done on this job during the past segment as the information needed for completion of this job is not fully available at the present time. Map~ of the concentration areas during the winter months are on file in the Montrose Regional Office. These maps show concentration areas for the pa9t two winters (1963-64 and 1964-65). The areas of concentration were mapped by Southwest Regional personnel while actually flying the winter trends in the study area. The mapping of the vegetation on the winter ranges and the associated use patterns of the elk as determined by pellet groups counts and utilization estimates on winter browse plants is not yet completed under project W-IOI-R and until this mapping is done, no work can be done on locating the secondary ranges within the study area. It is anticipated that these maps will become available to this project before the end of the next segment so that the objectives of this job can be met on schedule. Date July, 1965 Approved by _=R;::i.:.ch;::;a.:.;,r:..d~J:ij==--_ ....:D:-:e:.:nn=e~y _ ----~~~~~~--------------Project Leader �July, 1965 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of Colorado ------~~~~-------------- Project No. W-38-R-19 Work Plan No. llB Name Deer-Elk Investigations Job No. 3 Title of Job: Basic Range Inventory, Rio Grande Elk Study Period Covered: April 1, 1964 through :M3.rch31,1965. Personnel: Raymong J. Boyd, Associate Wildlife Researcher Abstract: Maps of the different vegetative types within the elk winter range of the Rio Grande are not yet available from Project W-IOI-R. Until they become available, no additional work can be done on this job. Recommendations: 1. When the completed maps of the elk winter range become available, check them to see if they cover the proposed study area, and if they do not, run additional transects so that the entire winter range in the proposed study area has been examined. 2. Make completed copies of the maps available to Management for assistance in setting big game seasons. Procedure: (1) Most of the above range surveys have already been completed under another project (W-IOI-R) and will need only some spot checking to complete this job. Any field work that needs to be done will be baaed upon the interagency Big Game Range Analysis Procedure now being used on Work Plan 2 Job 7 of this project and on Project W-IOI-R. �July, 1965 386 Basic Range Inventory Raymond J. Boyd Vegetative type maps of the elk winter range on the upper Rio Grande area are not yet available from the U. S. Forest Service. Most of the maps have been finished and printed, but some final corrections have yet to be done on several more of the maps before a completed set will become available. All of the planimetering of the types to get acreages has been completed, but some of the information has not yet been put on the master maps. All of this work should be finished in the near future and then the final checking of the maps will be done to see if the mapping has covered all of the area within the proposed elk study area. Prepared by Raymond J. Boyd ----;A-s~s-o-c-:i:-a-t;-e--:W;-;l';""· l~d':;-l:;-;-i-;::f-e--:;::R-e-s-e-a-r-c~h-e-r-- Approved bY_~R:-i_c-:h:-a_r..,.d--=N,-.--=D_e_ru_Yl_e.:t..y _ Project Leader �July, 1965 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of Colorado --------~------------------- Project No. W-38-R-19 Work Plan No. 11 B Name Deer-Elk Investigations Job No. Title of Job: Seasonal Movements, Rio Grande Elk Study Period Covered: April 1, 1964 through March 31, 1965· Personnel: 4 Raymond J. Boyd, Richard N. Denney, Donald V. Benson, Earl Cochran, William G. Schultz, Lloyd Hazzard, John Hobbs and Errol Ryland. Abstract: There were 75 elk tagged and banded at the Goose Creek trap, with white neck bands. Another trap was set up on Shaw Creek where 15 elk were tagged and banded and an additional 27 elk were neck banded only at this same trap. Two tagged and banded elk were killed during the 1964 big game season, both of them in the Squaw Creek area. White banded elk were seen on the San Juan drainage during the September sex-ratio counts which indicates an interchange between the elk of the Rio Grande and the San Juan herds. Recow~endations: 1. Continue to keep track of the neck band sightings and tag recoveries on maps located at the Montrose Regional Office. 2. Continue to assist Regional personnel in the trapping and banding of elk in the study area. 3. Try and mark large numbers of elk in late September with paint shot from a pressure gun carried in a helicopter. 4. If the transmitters become available, instrument several elk in the upper Rio Grande (Pole Creek area probably), to see if it is possible to keep track of wild elk by use of radio signals. �388 Procedures: (1) Assist Southwest Regional personnel in the construction and operation of one or more group traps within the study area. (2) Neck-band and ear-tag all elk caUght in these traps. Scales will also be set up at each trap so that live weights of the elk can be determined. (3) Use different colored neck bands at each trap site so that crossmovements or complete migrations into other herd areas can be determined. (4) Schedule periodic fixed-wing aircraft flights within the study area for the purpose of locating neck bands. Observations of banded elk will also be noted on all other flying within the study area. (5) Using the helicopter, try and mark elk from the air with paint shot from a pressure gun. When large groups of elk are to be found on Long Ridge, use the helicopter and try and mark elk by using Cap-Chur equipment to immobilize the elk, then ear-tag and neck-band them. (6) The bulk of the trapping will be done by Southwest Regional personnel with only sfot checks and assistance in the event of trap difficulties by personnel of this project. �Elk Seasonal Movements Raymond J. Boyd In the two years that this job has been underway there have been 89 elk trapped and banded with white collars on Goose Creek and 23 elk have been tagged and banded with Blaze orange collars on Long Ridge and the area between Creede and Long Ridge. During the past segment there have been 59 sightings of elk banded with white collars, and 14 sightings of elk banded with blaze orange collars. (See Figure 1.) All of the white neck bands were seen within the Goose Creek drainage with the exception of three that were seen just over the divide between Goose Creek and the San J~n River. These sightings indicate that there is some inter-change between ~lk on the Rio Grande and the elk on the San Juan. This possibIlity had been recognized for some time, but these sightings are the first positive proof of such an interchange. For some reason, not yet apparent, we could not locate any of the blaze orange collared elk after May 25, 1964 until the elk were back down on their winter ranges. Two blaze orange banded elk were killed during the 1964 big game season in the Squaw Creek area which is one area that we had not searched for banded elk. More comprehensive flying in the Squaw Creeks is plaaned in the near future. Two tagged and white banded elk were killed on Beautiful Mountain in the Goose Creek drainage during the 1964 big game season. Table 1 - Dates, Numbers of Bands and Location of Banded Elk Sightings Rio Grande Elk Study Area - White Bands Date April 24, 1964 May 3, 1964 Number of Bands 1 1 4 June 23, 1964 July 28, 1964 3 3 Sept. 30, 1964 1 2 1 Oct. 27, 1964 Jan. 28, 1965 Total 1 1 41 ,59 Location 3/4 mile west of Haypress Lake 3/4 mile northwest of Upper Haypress Lake Elliott Creek, ~ mile west of Goose Creek One mile south of Goose Lake Two miles south of Gootie'Lake 3/4 mile southeast of Goose Lake At head of Goose Creek Two.miles south of Goose Lake Two miles southeast of Goose Lake At head of Elk Park (east of Goose Creek) Goose Creek, Humphries Lake down to Rio Grande R. �390 Table 2 - Dates, Numbers of Bands and Location of Banded Elk Sightings Rio Grande Elk Stu,tiyA.rea - Blaze Orange· Bands Number of Bands Date April 24, 1964 :May 4, 1964 :May 25, 1964 Oct. 5, 1964 Jan. 4, 1965 Jan. 28, 1965 Total Prepared by 1 1 1 2 2 2 1 1 3 Location Head of Long Canyon, Stage Station Flats Head of Long Canyon, Stage Station Flats In Long Park, about one mile from above elk Northwest of River Hill, south of Stage Station One mile east of Lost Lake at head of Long Canyon Three miles west of south end of Long Ridge Pool Gulch (east of Montrose 19 miles) Cow Creek and U. S. 550 - near Ridgway One mile south of Wright!s Ranch on Rio Grande R. 14 Raymond J. Boyd Associate Wildlife Researcher Approved by Richard N. Denney Project Leader Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief �~ - PAVED ---- DIRT ~ ----_. LAKE HIGHWAY OR GRAVEL OR -I- MOUNTAIN ,,,,,,.,/ WILDERNESS NOAa RESENVOIR PEAK AREA BOUNDARY LA> \D I-'- FIGURE 1.- NECK BAND SIGHTINGS AND TAG RETURNS - RIO GRANDE ELK STUDY AREA White Band Sighting X White Banded Elk Killed * Blaze Orange Band Sighting _ Blaze Orange Banded Elk Killed ~ ��July, 1965 393 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of Colorado ------~-------------------- Project No. W-38-R-19 Name Work Plan No 11 B Job No Deer-Elk Tnvestigations Title of Job: ~opulation Components, Rio Grande Elk Study Period Covered: April 1, 1964 through JItlarch 31, 1965. Personnel: 5 Raymond J. Boyd and Richard N. Denney. Personnel with Research Branch operated check station, as follows: Del Monte - Bert Baker, Don Hoffman, Harold Shepherd and Warren Snyder; Wolf Creek - Dick Denney, Ray Boyd, Howard Funk and Bob Keiss; Stony Pass and Spring Creek Pass - Jack Greig and Don Horak. Gilbert N. Hunter, State Game Manager, Robert Tully, Principal Game Biologist and Velma Merkle, Sr. Statistical Clerk assembled much of the data contained in this report. Abstract: Pre and post season classification counts of the elk on the study area were taken with the helicopter and recording the data on a portable tape recorder. A pre-season ratio of 39 bulls (including spikes) per 100 cows and 56 calves per 100 cows was detennined, while post-season classifications indicated a ratio of 17 bulls (including spikes) per 100 cows and 56 calves per 100 cows. The total elk kill in the three game management units within the study area, as determined by report card surveys, was 1,402 elk and was composed of 796 bulls, 502 cows and 104 calves. Aging of 371 elk at the special check stations indicated that 89.9% of the kill was in the portion of the elk he~d 4~ years of age and younger. The success ratio of resident hunters was 29.9o/~ while non-resident hunters enjoyed a success ratio of 41.5% lLn elk population on the study area, after the 1964 hQnting season, of 4,900 elk was projected using the sex and age data. Recommendations: 1. ContL~ue the pre and post-season sex and age classification COlli~tSof the elk on the study area, striving to classify at least 1,000 elk on each count. 2. Set up check stations and examine and age every elk killed on the study area and make other physiological collections as needed. 3· Collect data at the check stations on IBM cards for easier analysis. �394 Objectives: Knowledge of the herd structure by sex and age class, as well as the productivity of an elk herd, is vital to the formulation of a sound management plan. 1. Determine the sex-ratio, both pre and post-season, of this elk herd. 2. Determine the cow-calf ratio, both pre and post-season, of this elk herd. 3· Determine the age-class structure of this elk herd during the fall hunting season. Procedure: (1) Using a helicopter, fly the entire area, using one observer, and classify elk according to whether they are bulls or cows. These counts to be put on tape and later extracted so that the observer's eyes never have to leave the elk being classified. Some preliminary work of this type has already been done on this area, so that analysis of the variations in the counts can now be made and the proper sample size can be determined. It would appear from work done on the White River·elk herd that at least 1,000 animals must be classified in order to eliminate the variation found in groups of elk. (2) Using the helicopter, fly the entire area, using one observer, and classify elk as to whether they are cows or calves. This can most easily be done by looking at the head of the elk .. A calf has a short rostrum, and a fuzzy "forehead" as compared to a mature cow. All of these classifications will also be put on tape and later extracted. Again, the proper sample size will be determined from previous data on this herd. (3) Using the helicopter, fly the entire area, using one obs~rver, and classify the male elk in this herd as to whether they are yearlings, young or mature bulls. This ratio will give clues to the survival from calf to adulthood in the male segment of the herd. These classifications will also be done on tape and later extracted. Data from animals taken during the fall hunting seasons as to sex and age classes will be gathered at check stations in and around the study area. (4) Set up and run check stations at Stoney Pass and on Highway 160 at Pass Creek, also place Research Personnel at the Del Norte check station. (5) All data included in this report that is based upon report card returns and projections of report card data will be furnished by the Game Management Division of the Colorado Department of Game, Fish and Parks; Gilbert N. Hunter, State Game Manager, Robert Tully, Principal Game Biologist and Velma Merkle, Statistical Cle~k. �395 Elk Population Components Raymond J. Boyd 1. Sex and Age-Class Composition of the Rio Grande Elk Herd The 1964 pre-season sex and age-ratio counts of the Rio Grande elk herd were made from September 28 through October 1. A.ll of the classifications were done on elk in Unit 76. The counts are tabulated as follows: Bulls Spikes Cows Calves 2 2 3 1 3 4 3 5 8 5 1 1 5 4 16 15 9 3 9 15 9 4 36 17 17 10 36 15 20 9 17 59 38 40 32 132 5 1 17 6 7 33 42 1 23 32 10 13 14 8 9 43 20 2 5 5 21 11 54 80 39 64 29 112 7 34 6 19 20 65 2 2 4 7 3 5 8 11 4 4 6 99 54 15 14 19 175 1 4 6 5 5 3 3 3 18 14 6 8 3 1 1 2 2 2 12 2 8 10 2 2 3 145 12.4 1 12 8 17 9 3 4 3 4 11 1 10 13 598 51.3 334 28.6 3 2 4 14 2 4 13 1 1 Location Total 5 22 28 24 5 5 24 6 19 9 25 1,166 100.0 Embargo Creek Blue Park Miners Creek Bristol Head North of Continental Reservoir Heart lake Lost Trail Creek West Lost Trail Creek Pole Mountain Pole Creek Long Canyon Ute Ridge Quartzite Ute Creek Middle Ute Creek East Ute Creek Rio Grande Weminuche Rio Grande Reservoir Squaw Creek Juniper Creek Trout Creek Middle Creek Red Mountain Creek Fisher Creek Goose Creek Elk Park Leopard Park lake Creek Soda Creek Elk Creek Kitty Creek Hope Creek A.rchuleta Creek Total Percent �396 A total of 1,166 elk were classified resulting in a ratio; of 39 bulls (including spikes) per 100 cows and 56 calves per 100 cows. The 1964 post-season sex and ~ge-ratio counts of the Rio Gra~de elk herd were made from December 8 t.hrough 9 under excellent counting conditions. The bull counts were broken down into mature bulls (massive antlers), young bulls (light antlers) and spikes. The counts are tabulated as follows: M3.ture Young Bulls Bulls Spikes Cows Calves Total 4 17 47 9 28. 30 6 6 4 3 8 3 1 30 3 14 8 3 4 10 4 15 8 46 6 4 15 1 12 30 6 4 21 14 42 54 32 2 1 29 78 38 5 16 48 43 127 17 60 8 1 1 2 3 1 1 1 2 1 4 5 1 1 2 1 5 3 4 14 5 1 10 1 3 1 9 28 66 2·7 136 34 13 6 0.8 2 17 21 6·3 12 2 5 5 3 81. 12 5 93 6 8 12 31 45 220 14 65 18 4 8 57 18 36 2 4 5 606 340 57·8 32,4 1,049 100.0 Location Willow Creek Miners Creek Fir Creek Shallow Creek Seepage Creek Santa Maria Reservoir Long Ridge River Hill Crooked Creek Wright s Ranch Trout Creek Lime Creek Deep Creek Area Farmers Creek Bellows Creek (lOW) Bellows Creek (high) North: Side of Rio Grande Alder Creek Embargo Creek Deep Creek to Goose Creek Goose Creek Rio Grande to Masonic Park Elk Park Sentinel Mountain South Fork of Rio Grande Trout Creek I Total Percent A total of 1,049e-lk were classified, resulting in a ratio of 17 bulls (including spikes) per:lOO cows and 56 calves per 100 cows. �397 All of the pre and post-seaso~ classification counts since this study began are tabulated below·for comparative purposes. Table 1 - Pre-Season C;J,.assificationCounts, 1961 thru 1964 Rio Grande Elk Herd, Colorado. Ratios Year Bulls Spikes Cows Ca.Lves Total ---------------------Bulls Cows Calves 1961 1962 1963 1964 170* 115 131 145 50 82 89 378 562 493 598 254 289 305 334 802 .1,016 1,011 1,166 45 29 43 39 100 100 100 100 67 51 61 56 Total 561 221 2,031 ]',182 3,995 38 100 58 * Spikes inc+u~ed with bulls in this count. Table 2 - Post-Season Classificat:LonCounts, Rio Grande Elk Herd, Colorado. 1961 thru 1964 Ratios Year Bulls Spikes Cows Calves Total ---------------------Bulls Cows Calves 1961· 1962 1963 1964 26 175 29 37 67 115 109 66 542 1,165 818 606 348 517 535 340 983 1,97-2 1,491 1,049 17 24 16 17 100 100 100 100 64 44 65 56 Total 267 357 3,131 1,740 5,495 20 100 55 The 1964 total elk kill in the three game management units within the study area was determined to be 1,402 animals. These kill figures are based upon hunter report card returns and statistical projections of the results of the report card returns. �398 During the 1964 big game season, we hadtwQ special check stations on the study area (Pass Creek and stony Pass) . Theregul:ar Game Management Check station at Del Norte also checked and aged elk from the study area. The Pass Creek station checked out 21 elk, Stony Pass checked out 20 elk and research personnel at the.Del Norte check station handled 504 'elk. Table 3 - Age and Sex of th~ 1964Eik Kill Checked Through Three Checking Stations, Rio Grande Area, 'Colorado. 21.. 3~~ 41.. 26 24 16 14 Age: Calves l~ Bulls Cows 13 20 108 19 75 18 Total Percent 33 8·9 127 34.2 50 30 93 _ 25.·1. 13·5 . 8.1 89.8 2 2 5~ 61.. 6 6 12 T~ 8k-2 9 Total 6 2 3 5 3 2 1 4 257 114 8 8 5 5 371 2 % 2. Population Estimate Results of Classification Counts and Hunter Harvest on the Study Area. Pre-Season Kill. Post-Sjeason Bulls Cows Calves Total Cows and Calves 234 796 103 598 502 606 334 104 340 1,166 1,402 1,049 932 606 946 Ratios and Kill Bulls Pre-Season Kill Post-Season 39 796 17 Bulls. to Unantlered 10Q: . 502 100 56 104 56 . ."',. 1- . 3,9 _ 1,402 1 : 9·1 �399 Population Projection x = number of cows in fall before hunting season .39 x = number of bulls in fall before hunting season x - 502 = number of cows after hunting season .39 x - 796 - number of bulls after hunting season .17 . (x - 502) also = number of bulls after hunting season Thus: .39 x - 796 = .17 . (x- 502) ·39 x - 796 = .17 - 85 ·39 x - .17 x ~ 796 - 85 .22 x 711 x 3,232 cows in the fall before hunting season .39 x 1,260 bulls in the fall before hunting season .56 x 1,810 calves in the fall before hunting season Total Fall Population Less Total Kill 6,302 1,402 Total Post-Season Pop. 4,900 Composed of: Bulls 480 ( 9.8%) Cows 2,B}2 (57.8%) Calves 1,588 (32.4%) 3. ,Hunter Harvest Surveys The sex ratio of the 1964 elk kill from the study area, as determined by the report cards and check station data, are listed in Tables 4 and 5. Table 4 - Sex Ratio of the 1964 Elk Kill on the Rio Grande Elk Study Area Based Upon Hunter Report Card Returns and Projections. Unit Bulls % Cows % Calves % Total 76 79 80 419 81 296 54·9 68.6 56.8 293 31 178 38.4 26·3 34.2 51 6 47 6·7 5·1 9·0 763 118 521 Total 796 56.8 502 35·8 104 7·4 1 402 Table 5 - Sex Ratio of the 1964 Elk Kill on the Rio Grande Elk Study Area Based Upon Data from Three Checking Stations. Unit Bulls % Cows % Calves % Total 76 79 80 199 24 129 61.2 75·0 . 68·3 105 6 50 32·3 18.8 26.4 21 2 10 6.6 6.2 5·3 325 32 189 Total 352 64·5 161 29·5 33 6.0 546 �400 The yearling kill figures, based upon hunter report card returns, is concerned only with the buil kill, while the check station data includes both bulls and cows. In the 127 yearling elk checked through the stations, there were 19 yearling cows. Table 6 - Yearling Kill, 1964 Big Game Season Rio Grande Elk Study Area, Colorado. Card Projection Check Station Data Unit --------------------------------------Number Number % % 2i Ii 76 79 80 116 40 91 27·80 50.00 30.83 67 16 44 52.8 12.6 34.6 Total 247 31.03 127 24·76 !I These figures are based upon bull elk only g; These figures are based upon all e'lkaged Table 7 - Antler Points by Age Class of Male Elk Killed During the 1964 Big Game Season, Rio Grande Elk Study A.rea, Colorado. Range of Points Range of Points Number of Age on Left Side on Right Side Elk 1 2 1 - 3 2 - 5 4 - 5 6 3 4 - 6 5 - 6 5 - 8 6 - 6 5 - 5 3 4. 5 6 7 8 9 1 - 3 2 - 5 1 - 5 6 3 4 - 6 6 - 6 5 - 8 6 - 7 5 - 5 108 75 32 16 7 7 3 3 1 The success ratio of hunters that had hunters choice elk permits for the 1964 big game season in the study area, based upon report card returns, is listed below in Table 8. Table 8 - Total Elk Kill ·on Hunters Choice Permits, 1964. Number 'Success Animals Killed on Permits A.rea Unit of Ratio of -----------------------------_. Permits Permits Bulls Cows Calves Total 76 79 80 Total R R-2 R-l Total Kill 500 100 400 71.60 40.00 58·75 14 3 10 293 31 178 51 6 47 358 40 235 763 118 521 lzOOO, 63·30 27 502 104 633 12,402 �401 The success ratio of all h1.Ulterson the elk study area in 1964 is shown below in Table 9. Table 9 - Total H1.Ulters,Total Elk Kill and Success of all H1.Ulters)1964 Rio Grande Elk Study Area, Colorado. Number Animals Killed Unit of Success -------------------------------------H1.Ulters Ratio Bulls Cows Calves Total 76 79 80 1,911 739 1,674 40 16 31 419 81 296 293 31 178 51 6 47 763 118 521 Total 4,324 32.4 796 502 104 1,402 The total elk kill, numbers of rrwnters and success of resident and nonresident hQDters are shown below in Tables 10 and 11. Table 10 - Number of Non-Resident H1.Ulters,Total Elk Kill and Success Ratio, 1964 Big Game Season - Rio Grande Elk study Area, Colorado. Number Animals Killed Unit of Success -------------------------------------Hunt-er-s Ratio Bulls Cows Calves Total 76 79 80 618 53 284 41.7 37·7 41.5 154 9 51 96 7 51 8 4 16 258 20 118 Total 955 41.5 214 154 28 396 Table 11 - Number of Resident H1.Ulters,Total Elk Kill and Success Ratio, 1964 Big Game Season - Rio Grande Elk Study Area, Colorado. Number Animals Killed Unit of Success -------------------------------------H1.Ulters Ratio Bulls Cows Calves Total 76 79 80 1,293 686 1 390 39.0 14.3 29·0 265 72 245 197 24 127 43 2 31 505 98 403 Total 3,369 29·9 582 348 76 1,006 �402 During the 1964 big game season, non~resident hunters came from 28 states and one foreign country. A breakdown of the hlli~tingpressure, by units, by state of residence, is shown below in Table 12. Table 12 - Hunting Pressure by Unit, by State of Residence, during the 1964 Big Game Season - Rio Grande Elk Study Area, Colorado. Unit: 76 Alabama Arizona Arkansas California Florida Illinois Indiana Iowa Kansas Louisiana Maryland Michigan Vlississippi Missouri Nebraska Nevada New Hampshire ' New Mexico New York Qhio Oklahoma Oregon Pennsylvania South Dakota Tennessee Texas Washington Wisconsin Mexico Unknown 2 13 16 64 79 80 Total % State: Total 16 11 11 18 8 2 3 3 32 7 3 2 21 5 45 5 8 3 3 6 6 13 3 2 72 13 29 2 2 3 269 2 16 11 32 3 13 43 3 3 13 8 77 3 2 3 53 284 2 618 2 34 21 112 5 16 11 11 26 11 5 11 3 38 20 3 2 115 3 13 85 2 5 3 11 359 2 22 2 2 11.7 12.0 8·9 37·6 955 Resident hunters in 1964 came from 46 cOQnties to hunt in the study area. Table 13 indicates the county of residence and unit hunted for the resident hunters. �403 Table 13.~ Hunting Pressure by Unit, By County of Residence, during the 1964 Big Game Season - Rio Grande Elk study Area, Colorado. Un it: County: Adams Alamosa Arapahoe Archuleta Baca Bent Boulder Chaffee Cheyenne Conejos Costilla Crowl ey Custer Denver Douglas E I Paso Fremont Garf iel d Gi Ipin Huerfano Jefferson Kiowa Ki t Carson Lake La Plata Lar imer Las Animas Lincoln Mesa Mineral Montezuma Montrose otero Ouray Park Phillips Prowers Pueblo Rio Blanco Rio Grande Saguache San Juan San Miguel Teller Washington Weld Total 76 79 80 2; 72 90 15 34 32 14 166 32 6 6 14 12 3 12 8 35 6 3 3 139 3 101 23 3 3 29 49 6 17 26 15 12 26 24 145 3 18 41 3 14 29 - 76 23 21 3 3 104 8 98 29 3 5 3 9 33 3 3 12 5 10 20 II 3 3 9 52 20 .3 3 9 101 % 52 272 154 8.1 II II 35 9 29 . 17 Total 89 130 23 21 6 6 145 136 8 1,293 3 686 15 194 3 431 49 3 6 1,390 53 23 78 29 3 21 9 6 3 272 8.1 II 275 75 6 3 38 102 6 9 29 31 30 35 26 27 159 3 18 102 3 14 3 24 384 3 706 208 21 6 6 3 11 3,369 8.2 11.4 20.9 �404 Information relative to the day of kill, by sex, is shown below in Tables 14 and 15. Table 14 - Day of Kill, by Sex, by Unit - 1964 Big Game Season Rio Grande Elk Study Area, Colorado. Day of Kill Item ---------------------------------------Total 1 2 4 6 8 3 5 7 9 Unit 7 Bull 53 18 23 2 2 15 15 0 133 5 Cow 24 14 6 6 2 2 2 0 0 56 Calf 4 6 0 0 1 0 0 21 5 5 Total 81 26 2 17 0 210 37 35 7 5 Unit 79 Bull 4 1 1 0 1 1 0 18 5 5 Cow 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 Calf 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 2 Total 6 6 2 0 1 1 0 24 3 5 Unit 0 Bull 36 14 6 6 31 2 4 0 0 99 Cow 17 4 2 0 1 1 2 1 5 33 Calf 2 2 0 2 0 1 0 0 3 10 ,.., Total 55 21 8 8 38 c: 6 1 142 3 Table 15 - Day of Kill - by Sex - 1964 Big Game Season Rio Grande Elk Study Area, Colorado. Animal Killed -------------------------------------------------------1 2 4 6 8 3 5 7 Bull 22 54 38 21 8 93 11 3 Cow 43 12 8 19 2 c: " 3 3 rv Calf 6 8 6 c 0 2 0 9 'l'otal 142 81 11 8 36 25 59 13 21.5 Percent 6.6 37·8 15·7 9·6 91.2~ Prepared by: 9 0 1 0 1 Raymond J. Boyd Associate Wildlife Researcher Approved by: Date Total ~J~u=1~yL,_=1~96~5~ _ Richard N. Denney Project Leader ,Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief 250 93 33 376 �July, 1965 405 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of Colorado --------~-------------------- Project No. W-38-R-19 Work Plan No. 11 B Name Deer-Elk Inves-::;igations Job No. 6 Title of Job: Physical Characteristics, Rio Grande Elk Study Period Covered: April 1, 1964 through If.arch31, 1965. Personnel: Ra~!llondJ Boyd, Errol Ryland, Robert Keiss, Donald Be~so~, Earl Cochran, William Schultz, Lloyd Hazzard and John Hobbs. Abstract: Blood samples were taken from 13 elk that were trapped in the C-oose Creek trap. No elk were weighed nor were any elk taken for necropsy examination during the past segment. Recommendations: 1. Weigh"c all elk caught in the traps in the study area. 2. Collect two elk per month in the study area for complete food habf, ts and necr-opsy studies. 3· 'Iakeblood samples from trapped elk and send them to the Research Center in Fort Collins for complete analysis. Objectives: To determne if the physical characteristics of the Rio Grande elk herd, which winters on a b~~ch-grass range, is different than the White River elk herd, which winters on a browse wLnter range. �406 Procedures: (1) Collect blood from all elk trapped, and send it to the Research Center in Fort Collins for complete analysis, particularly blood calcium~ phosphorus, sodium and potassium. (2) Weigh all elk caught in the group traps. (3) If it is deemed necessary, take two elk per month in the study area to get the following information: (a) Food habits from stomach analysis (b) Ovarian analysis to get additional information on herd increment (c) Standard measurements, correlation of eye lens weight with age and r&~ge conditions (d) JLnalysis of bones and tissues for fallout accumulation (e) Incidence and kind of endoparasites and ectoparasites (f) Endocrine gland analysis �407 Elk Physical Characteristics Raymond J. Boyd The winter of 1964-65 was an extremely severe one in the Rio Grande elk study area. The local "civilian" population became so concerned for the , welfare of the wintering elk that they began a limited feeding program in the Goose Creek area and in the vicinity of Bristol Mountain. Much controversy evolved over this program, with the Department maintaining that feeding was not healthy for the herd, and in general things were rather "sticky" during late January, February and most of March. As part of the department's program aimed at showing why feeding was not good for big game animals, personnel from the Research Center took blood samples from 13 elk that were on a feed ground, and eight samples from elk that were on natural feed. The samples were taken to the Research Center in Fort Collins and complete clinical tests were made there. Table 1 summarizes the blood analysis of the two groups of elk. No elk were collected within the study area for necropsy examination ~uring the past segment. This phase of this study will be started during the next segment. Approved by: Richard N. De~ney Project Leader �408 Table I.~ Analysis of Blood Samples One on Natural Feed. One on Artificial from Two Groups of Feed - Colorado, - DIFFERENT tAL G R -- ~ 0 U P Z ::l "Oo!- CII -a.. -0 E "0 CII , , , F C A L F E E D N A T u R A L F E E D 8,950,000 8,010,000 12,950,000 8,500,000 5,900,000 8,500,000 9,550,000 6,500,000 Laboratory tween feed. the blood >- 0E U 0 .c E ;: - c 0 a.. 2,750 2,450 2,300 2,500 3,100 2,300 2,900 1,300 1,400 3,500 2,250 2,000 2,250 32 32 36 28 44 40 38 40 34 48 40 40 38 ::l >-::l 0 .cu " 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 0..10 ~ CII c (/) I/) CII .-s:a.. >- 0 CII o!- CII I 9,200,000 2 6,420,000 3 9.400,000 4· 7,420;000 5 6,900,000 8,800,000 6 . 4,800,000' 7 8 6,500,000 9 6,870,000 10 6,900,000 7,210,000 12 7,500,000 13 8,900,000 (/) .c~ +.- a: U) I 0 o 0 Of-......, rn o!- rou 0 .00 0- 10 "Oo!- o c o ::l 10 A R T u- - U co U a.. >- ...J o!- U 0 c 0 ::E OlCII 00.. E CII I/) CII Ol ,z~ o!- 10 CII Ol • ~::E ::J :::c E o!- "0 ~ 10 0 t!) E 0 0 CII .•....•• ClIO o 0 10 c u ~ .-c (/) o 0 +- ~ ......, .-~ ~ 1965. c u CII_ ell U CII .0 E -- Elk. +-0 0- s, a.. ~ CII a.. - 10 I/) E o!- o 56 54 54 58 48 32 44 52 48 44 48 38 50 43 41 48 41 39 41 25 30 30 25 30 37.5 20 50 55 8.3 6.6 8.8 4.4 4.0 7.3 5.0 7. I 8.0 40 41 50 30 20 8.3 6.6 2,650 32 1,150 . 20 1,000 28 2,750 40 1,750 26 1,200 24 3,100 44 3,650 56 56 52 56 40 44 68 34 38 12 28 8 12 6 4 6 4 0 0 8 8 24 4 16 2 19.7 16.6 27.4 17.1 18.6 18.0 18.6 14.5 51 45 75 45 48 47 50 36 15 12.5 25 12.5 12.5 8.6 7.1 10.8 8.8 9.9 27.5 9.0 " .1 indicates that there is fhe elk on natural --17.5 6.0 --- --35 no significant feed and the ::l NEG. NEG. NEG. NEG. NEG. NEG. NEG. NEG. NEG. NEG. NEG. NEG. NEG. 19.2 14.5 19.2 16.6 15.7 18.6 15.7 14.1 15.7 16.6 14.9 15.7 17.1 of 10 ......., 4 10 2 0 0 0 0 0 20 6 0 8 10 chemistry u- <C o 8 6 8 16 0 6 4 12 12 2 8 4 8 analysis 10 o!- CII .- eo '-' 42 o +- I-~ :::c 54. > Co!- .,.. 10 w 56 52 CII CII .- --- difference elk on artificial 0- NEG. NEG. NEG. NEG. NEG. NEG. NEG. NEG. be- �409 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of Colorado --------~~~~~------------ Project No. W-38-R-19 Work Plan No. 11 B Name Deer-Elk Investigations Job No. 7 Title of Job: Management Recommendations, Rio Grande Elk Study .Period Covered: April 1, 1964 though M3:rch 31, 1965 Personnel: Raymond J. Boyd, Associate Wildlife Researcher Abstract: Since this study is only in its first year, there are no specific recommendationsthat can be made to management at the present time that could be applied to this elk herd. Recommendations: Continue to carry this job QDtil sufficient information is available for management recommendations for this elk herd. Procedures: (1) Bring all of the diverse aspects of this study into one comprehensive picture of this herd so that LDtensive analysis and evaluation of the data in terms of all the various implications as related to management of this herd. (2) Analyze, statistically, if possible by multiple correlation analysis all of the data gathered on this herd that might have an effect on management. Select factors that are important, according to the analysis, that management has some control upon, and recommend procedures based upon these factorso (3) Submit annual reports for Federal A.idpurposes, but also write up popular articles for magazines and newspapers, and a final technical report for professional journals. �410 Manage~ent Recommendations Raymond J. Boyd Since this study is just getting underway, and is in its first year there are no data available at the present time that could be given to management as a tool or technique for proper biological management of this elk herd. Approved by Richard N. Denney Project Leader � https://cpw.cvlcollections.org/files/original/a18cbe65a53eeb962043a3e57a294a14.pdf 71659a15ff542c96936a24181be50dd8 PDF Text Text - 411 - JOB COr~I£TION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT. State of COLORADO Project No. W-IOI-R-7 Work Plan No. 1 Game Range Investigations Job No. Title of Job: Mesa Verde Clip Plot Strrdy Period Covered: April 1, 1964 through March 31, 1965. Personnel: 1 Harold R. Shepherd ABSTRACT The Mesa Verde Clip Plot Study is a long-term clipping experiment simulating different intensities of game use on five key species of browse plants. Objective of the study is to learn how the yearly removal of certain percentages of the current annual growth stems and of old stems affects the plants. Field work and data compilation and analysis has been completed. A portion of the first draft of a final report has been written. The only work remaining on the study is the completion and publication of a final report to be entitled Effects of Variable Clipping on Key Browse Species in Southwestern ~olorado .. ��- 413 - MESA VERDE CLIP PLOT STUDY Harold R. Shepherd INTRODUCTION For sound winter game range management it is necessary to know the percentage of current annual growth game may be permitted to remove yearly from key browse plants without injury to the plants. Also, it is important to know the effect of different intensities of use on the forage produced. The Mesa Verde Clip Plot Study is a long-term clipping experiment simulating different intensities of game use on five key species of browse plants: big sagebrush, antelope bitterbrush, mountain mahogany, serviceberry, and gambel oak. The purpose of the study is to attempt to learn how the yearly removal of certain percentages of the current annual growth stems and of old stems affects the plants and their forage production. . PROCEDURE AND FnIDINGS Previous Segments Field work outlined in previous reports has been accomplished. During previous segments, field data were compiled and chi-square, correlation, and regression analyses made of the data. An outline for the final report was made and approved, and a first draft of the Introduction, Description of Study Area, and Methods was prepared. Current Segment During the 1964-65 segment the statistical tests found to be in error were corrected, and it was found desirable to re-design and re-run the test comparing total yields to initial yields. Additional graphs and tables of data descriptive of study results were prepared. A~rangements were made for the removal of plot fences and salvage of materials; mountain mahogany and oakbrush plots were removed. The work remaining to be done on the final report includes making comparisons and interpretations of data and writing the Results section. The completed first draft will be submitted to the Editorial Committee for comment and suggestion. A final draft will then be prepared, incorporating any suggested revisions, and the manuscript will be submitted for publication. Prepared by Date Harold R. Shepherd Project Leader ~J_u;....l::..y,,-, 1.....:9;....6....:;5 Approved by: _ Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief ��J111y; >1965 - 415 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT INVESTIGATIONS PROJECTS State of COLORADO ------~~~~~---------- Project No. W-10l-R-7 Work Plan No. 1 Game Range Investigations Job No. 2 Title of Job: A Detailed Study of Range Forage by Use of Fenced Exclosures. Period Covered: April 1, 1964 to March 31, 1965. Personnel: B. D. Baker, WCOls Bob Mangus, Phil Hawker and Saguache District Forest Staff ABSTRACT Pellet group counts for rates of stocking by game and livestock on experimental .exclosure treatments showed that deer provided heavy use at Dry Basin DeerLivestock Exclosure for the winter of 1963-64. Sheep stocking for the same period was undeterminable, though present, the sheep co-inhabiting the open range with deer. Elk were on the open range treatments at the two Saguache Park exclosures over ,-Tinterin 1963-64 in what might be termed "light-moderate" stocking. Range stocking by cattle was very light at the two-acre let-down exclosure in Saguache Park and heavy at the Park one-acre total exclosure for the summer season in 1964. Stocking rate findings for each exclosure are summarized and discussed covering their long-span investigations. No vegetation inventories were requested nor done within this segment, including what had been scheduled tentatively at a proposed new South Park exclosure that was not built. Recomraendations: Afte.r five years of stocking rate studies ~t the Dry Basin Exclosure, I recommend that, in conformance with one of our stated general objectives, planned observations come to an end. Barring a shift of considerably less competent Department personnel into this area,about as much is being done as can be done to maintain the deer herd in proper numbers. The continual overstocking in Dry Basin is characteristic of many other localities in western Colorado, solutions for which are very difficult to come by. Termination of stocking rate studies is also recommended for the two exclosures in Saguache Park. Those exclosures have had pellet group counts made on the plots accessible to game and/or livestock for six years, one year beyond the original five-year scheduled goal. It has been suggested that the Rio Grande National Forest and Department Area continue to maintain and manipulate exclosure fences, as per past routines, for as many more years as warranted by local conditions. �- 416 - The job of annual exclosure studies under Work Plan 1 formally closes with this report. Future plans call for repeat studies only when specific demand by proper authorities arises and is approvable under Project Amendment. �- 417 A DETAILED STUDY OF RANGE FORAGE BY USE OF FENC~D EXCLOSURES Bertram D. Baker INTRODUCTION Stocking rate studies were done at three exclosures in 1964. Investigations were accomplished through use of pellet group counts and completed a five~year span at the Dry Basin plot and a six-year program at two Saguache Park exclosures. Assistance rendered by WCO's Bob Mangus, Norwood, and Phil Hawker, Saguache, and the U. S. Forest Service Assistant District Rangers Tim Spriggs andWa11y Johnson, Saguache, in performing counts is gratefully acknowledged. No vegetation studies were accomplished within the segment. Plans again were cancelled for construction of a joint Southeast Region-Pike National Forest (Bailey District) two-part exclosure near Kenosha Pass in South Park. Of necessity then, no plant inventory was done there as had been tentatively scheduled. DRY BASIN DEER-LIVESTOCK EXCLOSURE Pellet Group Counts - Current and Five-Year Summary For Indicated Rates Of Stocking Ob jectives: 1. To determine the indicated rates of stocking by deer, and deer and sheep, on treatments accessible to them in the fall-winter-spring season of 1963-64. 2. To summarize and analyze the results of five years of pellet group counting for stocking rates of game and livestock. Procedures: On May 5, 1964, the two accessible one-acre study treatments were examined for deer pellet groups deposited the previous winter. Pellet groups deposited by sheep were also tallied on the outside open range plot but were not kept separate due to difficulties in differentiating between them and pellet groups of deer. Another factor that clouds the analysis of ranges used both by deer and sheep is that the sheep scatter and mix the pellets with soil and/or mud, making obscure characteristics nearly completely unreadable. Throughout this study, if it were possible to assess which animal might have dominated in use of the open range, notes were kept to that effect. Employed in gathering the latter were signs such as wool left on brush, and trails and trailing. Activities in 1964 at Dry Basin terminated the five-year investigation of stocking. Techniques, as described by Baker, 1965, involved total counts of pellet groups. �- 418 - Findings: The counts. of treatments in May yielded indicated rates of stocking by deer of 0.61 acres per deer-month on the plot inside of the livestock part and by deer and sheep of 0.64 acres per deer-sheep-month on the open range treatment. Table 1 surrnnarizes the findings for the five years since 1959. Table l.--Surrnnary of Five Years of Animal Stocking Rate Determinations Treatments, Dry Basin Deer-Livestock Exclosure, 1959-1964. on Area Sam:eled Class (es) of Animal Applicable Period Of Use Indicated Rate Of Stocking 0:een Range Livestock Part 0:een Range Livestock Part 0:een Range Livestock Part 0Een Range Livestock Part 0Een Range Livestock Part i( Probably the Deer2 Shee:e Deer Deer2 Shee:e Deer De erw 2 SheeE Deer Deer2 SheeE Deer Deer2 Shee:e Deer dominant user. F-W-S:e2 1959-60 F-W-S:e 2 1959-60 F-W-S:e2 1960-61 F-W-SE 2 1960-61 F-W-S:e2 1961-62 F-W-SE2 1961-62 F-W-SE2 1962-63 F-W-SE2 1962-63 F-W-S:e2 1963-64 F-W-S:e 2 1963-64 0.8 acres/deer-shee:e-month 1.0 acre :eer deer-month 1.0 acre/deer-sheeE-month 1.2 acres Eer deer-month 0.6 acre/deer-shee:e-month 0.6 acre Eer deer-month 0.7 acre/deer-shee:e-month 0.7 acre :eer deer-month 0.6 acre/deer-sheeE-month 0.6 acre :eer deer-month Discussion: As can be seen on Table 1, stocking by deer of the livestock part plot started heavy and has continued to be very high. In fact, the stocking on study areas at this exclosure is as heavy as any that has been irtvestigated in Colorado. Of the six hunting seasons that have occurred in Unit 70 since the exclosure was constructed, four included liberal post-season. Without attempting analysis of Unit 70 deer population dynamics, very obviously stocking rates at the exclosure have not been materially affected by deer numbers removed by hunters. The foregoing situation at Dry Basin is typical of many western slope deer ranges in that all reasonable means have been tried to reduce deer herds to fit forage supplies, however without being able to reach needed goals. Livestock competition has been used as a crutch by some in attempts to shift responsibility, although that stand can be credited to personnel who probably will never see the light. The only thing that can be suggested is that local Department representatives and Federal agency people maintain imaginative and progressive attitudes if the problems, as presented by individual situations, are to be solved. Stocking by wintering sheep has been difficult to evaluate. Deer and sheep droppings are indistinguishable, but despite that shortcoming, the three-way exclosure is showing that sheep use is undesirable on the range excessively used by deer. �- 419 - SAGUACHE Pellet Group Counts - Current PARK EXCLOSURE and Six-Year Summary For Indicated Rates Of Stocking Ob jectives: 1. To determine the indicated rate of stocking by elk on the open range one-halfacre study area for the fall-winter-spring season of 1963-64~ 2. To determine the indicated rate of stocking by cattle on the open range onehalf-acre plot for the summer grazing season of 1964 0 3. To summarize and evaluate the results for stocking rates of game and livestock. of six years of pellet group counting Procedures: On June 19, 1964, the exclosure was visited and elk pellet .groups we re tallied on the outside one-half-acre study treatment by total tally techniques. Then again on October 15, 1964, the procedure was repeated for cattle droppings and cattle use of the area over the summer season. Findings: Elk use of the open range plot occurred at an indicated rate of stocking of 16.0 acres per elk-month for the winter of 1963-64. Cattle stocked outside treatment in the summer of 1964 at an indicated rate of 3.4 acres per animal-month. the The above rates are included in Table 2, a summary of six years of range occupation investigations at the Saguache Park Exclosure. Table 2.--Summary of Six Years of Animal Stocking Rate Determinations on the One-Ha1f-Acre Open Range Treatment, Saguache Park Exc1osure, 1958-1964. Class of Animal ApElicab1e Cattle Elk Cattle Elk Cattle Elk Cattle Elk Cattle Elk Cattle Elk Cattle SUo (June-Oct.) , 1958 F-W-Sp, 1958-59 SUo (June-Oct.) , 1959 F-W-SE' 1959-60 1960 SUo (June-Oct.) F-W-Sp, 1960-61 SUo (June-Oct.) , 1961 F-W-SE, 1961-62 SUo (June-Oct.), 1962 F-W-Sp, 1962-63 SU. (June-Oct.) , 1963 F-W-SE' 1963-64 SUo (June-Oct.) , 1964 Note: Period Of Use 1 Not included were typical calf-size ing. Indicated Rate of Stocking 3.9 acres per animal-month 50.0 acres per elk-month 14.3 acres per animal-month 25.0 acres Eer elk-month 5.1 acres per animal-month 100.0 acres per elk-month 7.9 acres per animal-month None 4.0 acres Eer animal-month 38.0 acres Eer elk-month 7.7 acres per animal-month 16.0 acres per elk-month 4.3 acres per animal-month chips in the counts for cattle stock- �- 420 - Discussion: Cattle have used the outside open range near the Saguache Park Exclosure consistently heavier than desirable since inception of this study in 1958 (lhe exclosure has been up since 1965). The lightest rate was found for the summer of 1959 (Table 2) when the rate was about 14 acres per animalmonth. All other summers, the rate ranged from about four to eight acres, greater than the ten acres preferred by the Forest Service. Heavy cattle use probably can be expected here regardless of numbers in the pastureJdue to the location at the edge of aspen in close proximity to a water development. Occupation of the open range plot in winters by elk has been extremely erratic, varying from 16 acres per elk-month that occurred in 1963-64 to a low of no use in 1961-62. Furthermore, most winters the rate was in the very light range of 25 'acres plus per elk-month, and generally substantially less (30-100 acres). It is believed that this situation would be fairly representative of grassland types in the Park in relation to patterns of use by the elk, with highly erratic and generally light range influence prevailing. SAGUACHE PARK CATTLE EXCLOSURE Pellet Group Counts - Current and Six-Year Summary For Indicated Rates Of Stocking Objectives: 1. To determine the indicated rates of stocking by deer and elk on the two one-acre treatments for the fall-winter-spring season of 1963-64. 2. To determine the indicated rate of stocking by cattle on the outside one-acre study area for the summer season of 1964. 3. To summarize and evaluate the results of six years of pellet group counting for stocking rates of game ahd livestock. Procedures: Counts of winter deposited elk and deer pellet groups were made on the two treatments June 19, 1964. The lateness of this date probably had little effect on the results here (and at the one-acre total exclosure) since game dispersal from this area always had occurred before about April 1. Cattle droppings were counted October 15, 1964, on the outside open range plot. This count followed immediately the removal of cat t l,e from the Park and yielded a rate of stocking for the June to October summer period. Findings: Indicated rates of stocking by elk were found to be 10.0 and 3.4 acres per elk-month, respectively, on the one-acre treatments outside and inside of the fence. Negligible deer use was registered inside by the single pellet group found there. No deer pellet groups were found on the outside treatment. All foregoing rates are applicable to the fa11-winter-spring season of 1963-64. Cattle were found to have occupied the outside treatment in the summer of 1964 at an indicated rate of stocking of 45.5 acres per animal-month. �- 421 - Discussion: As had occurred at the Saguache Park Exclosure, elk use of the two study treatments at the two-acre drop-fence has been erratic. There has been a noticeable difference, however, when comparing intensities of stocking through the years. The latter setup has yielded higher rates of stocking (Table 3), even though those rates probably have not approached levels great enough to cause concern for effects on the vegetation. Table 3.--Summary of Six Years of Animal Stocking Rate Determinations ments, Saguache Park Cattle Exclosure, 1958-1964. Area SanlEled Class Of Animal Applicable Period Of Use °Een Range 0Een Range Inside 0Een Range 0Een Range Inside 0Een Ranp;e 0Een Range Inside 0Een Range 0Een Range Inside 0Een Range 0Een Range Inside 0Een Range 0Een Range Inside 0Een Range Cattle Elk Elk Cattle Elk Elk Cattle Elk Elk Cattle Elk Elk Cattle Elk Elk Cattle Elk Elk Cattle Suo {June-Oct. 2 z 1958 F-W-SE2 1958-59 F-W-SE 2 1958-59 Suo {June -oc t , 22 1959 F-W-SE2 1959-60 F-W-SEz 1959-60 Sunnner2 1960~', F-W-SE z 1960-61 F-W-SE2 1960-61 Summer 2 1961-1, F-W-SEz 1961-62 F-W-SE2 1961-62 SUo {June -Oc to 2 2 1962 F-W-SE, 1962-63 F-W-SE 2 1962-63 Suo {June -Oc.t , 22 1963 F-W-SEz 1963-64 F-W-SE 2 1963-64 Suo {June-Oct·22 1964 * Area was in portion on Treat- Indicated Rate Of Stocking 10.0 A./anima1-month 1.5 A./e1k-month 1.1 A./e1k-month 33.3 A./ animal-month 50.0 A./elk-month 25.0 A./elk-month None 16.7 A./e1k-month 5.5 A./elk-month None None None 22.7 A./anima1-month 20.0 A./elk-month 6.2 A./e1k-month 100.0 A./animal-month 10.0 A./e1k-month 3.4 A./e1k-month 45.5 A./anima1-month of Park treated with aerial application July 1960, by U. S. Forest Service. of herbicide, Of interest also has been the perceptible preference that elk have had for the plot being protected from cattle. Since the winter of 1960-61 (except 1961-62 when no .use was indicated), the rate of stocking inside for every winter season has been about three times as great as on the outside plot. There is a good possibility that snow cover lllightbe averaging greater depths on the outside causing discrepancy in the use. But I believe that, as vegetative vigor and production increases under protection from the cattle, elk are being attracted to the better forage situation inside. Visual comparison of the two plots indicated some difference in the vegetation, but it is doubtful that the difference is statistically significant. �- 422 - Cattle use has been very light since start of the study. This can be explained by the fact that the exclosure is a considerable distance from water and is located near the hilltop. This situation is highly desirable, and it is hoped that it will continue to be so. Severity of site conditions will be acting to prevent high vegetative development, and just about any use of the area during the summer growing season will quickly be reflected in deterioration of the stand. SOUTH PARK EXCLOSURE (PROPOSED) Again, as in recent years, plans for construction of a new two-part exclosure on elk winter range near Kenosha Pass in South Park did not materialize. Thus, the base year plant inventory that had been tentatively planned was not done. Construction was to have been by the Department's Southeast Region and Bailey District, Pike National Forest. Effective with this project segment, study plans are abandoned. LITERATURE Baker, B. D. 1965. pp. 129-138. Prepared Date: Game Research CITED Rept. Colo. Game, Fish & Parks Dept. July,. Approved by: by; :;:B.;..._D:;.,;..' _Ba::,;::,k:::;e,::.;r;."...=-=~".-__ ~ Ass't. Wildlife Researcher July, 1965 Harold R. Shepherd Project Leader Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief �July, 1965 - 423 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO ------~~~~~---------- Project No. W-IOI-R-7 Work Plan No. 1 Game Range Investigations 4 Title of Job: Pada.ock Studies on Effects of Varying Intensities of Deer Use Period Covered: April 1, 1964 to March 31, 1965 Personnel: Richard N. Denney, William T. McKean, Donald G. Smith, Harold E. Burdick, Julius ,To Klein, Nelson Cain, George W. Crandell, Hugh Black Jr., Gary L. Brown, Roger C. Randolph, Kenneth C. Dillinger, Don Findlay, Wayne E. Tinder, Tom Stewart. Dave Bowden (Statistician), and Robert E. Keiss assisted in off-the-project work. .AJ3STRACT Field work on stem length measurements for 1963-64 were completed and tabulation of data done, but subsequently it was found that these data would need revision. . Accordingly, they will be included with the 1964-65 data in the next job completion report. Ocular estimates of utilization were quite consistent with the 1963 data. They showed increasing use of big sagebrush m1d snowberry in the heavy use paddocks. Use of key species decreased from Paddock One to Paddock Six. Paddocks were stocked on schedule in 1965, but difficulties we re experienced with weights and replacing dead deer. Rectal temperatures of deer removed from the paddocks avera.ged 107.2 degrees. Blood analyses were made but await interpretation. Pellet-group defecation rates averaged 13.2 per day, but considerable variability in the defecation rate occurred in the heavy--use paddocks. Volumetric percentages of pinon p ine in the stomachs of eight deer, which died during 1964 and 1965, were 20 percent greater than for deer autopsied in 1963. Forage production, based upon ocular estimates, almost doubled from 1963 to 1964. The increase was due principally to increased precipitation, but also to improved sampling technique. Pinon pine constituted over half of the total browse in four of the seven paddocks. �- 424 - Twenty-one Rodent marked bushes were re-photographed in 1964. control was continued. RECOMMENDATIONS 1. Discontinue attempting to measure stem lengths on all three browse species unless specific assurance is provided by the Director and Commission that labor and supervisory personnel will be provided to do this laborious task correctly. 2. To expedite the analysis of data, a Wildlife Research Candidate must be employed who is skilled and interested in biometry. In addition, as long-proposed, a full-time statistician should be employed for the benefit of this project and all others as well. OBJECTIVES, Paddock TECHNIQUES, AND FINDINGS Line Transect Measurement No further analysis Stem-Length of these base data was possible Measurement Data (Fall 1963-Spring during this segment. 1964) Fall measurements in 1963 were completed with only a single two-man crew, ,because a great many plants had no annual growth. Re-reading during the spring of 1964was also completed by one two-man crew. When these data were tabulated a considerable number of spring measurements longer than the corresponding fall ones were found. This creates a problem in that they must be removed from the sample, thus making unequal sample numbers. In addition to this difficulty, arithmetic errors and inconsistent analysis between paddocks have appeared at the last moment, due to changing student personnel and insufficient supervision. Because of this, the data are not being included in this report but will be incorporated with the 1964-65 data in the job completion report for the next segment. They will need to be re-tabultated. Correlation tests to determine the relationship between tagged stems and the total bush will also need to be made for this year. Utilization by Ocular Estimates, Spring 1964 Again, a,paced transect was employed to observe the use made of all browse species. Continued heavy use of pine and juniper is evident in the first three paddocks (Table 1). Use of intermediates and less desirable browse plants increased somewhat. Percentages of use of key species remained fairly consistent in relation to stocking rates. �- 425 - Table l.--Percent utilization on all species in paddocks, estimate, Spring 1964. determined by ocular Paddocks S:eecies 1 2 3 5 6 7 Mahogany 76.7 42.5 45.0 20.0 36.4 Serviceberry 41.8 95.0 45.0 11.1 (20.0)* 36.3 Big sagebrush 10.4 (6.0)* 26.5 (10.0)* 33.7 Bitterbrush 35.9 (4.0)* 50.7 24.6 (10.0)* 19.0 88.3 Snowberry Pine 4.8 17.8 5.2 2.8 (45.0)1( (36.7)* (18.2)''( (32.5)* 45.5 1.3 28.2 17.4 Juniper 75.0 15.0 1.7 20.0 2.5 19.0 Average 35.5 37.0 17.5 9.9 10.7 21.9 .Key Species Average 43.4 43.4 21.8 14.2 12.6 37.4 90.0 0.0 65.0 0.8 8.6 (7.3)1( (24.6)* 9.3 13.1 1( - Indicates use by rodents. Paddock Stocking, January, 1965 Introductions and removals generally were accomplished on schedule (Table 2). Again, as in previous years, injuries may have influenced the feeding of these deer somewhat, but not as much as in 1964. Regrettably, three deer died in Paddock One. One of these could, and should, have been replaced by the Station crew. Weights taken were inconsistent; in a group of 6 deer, some gained much weight, while the weight of others remained the same. Apparently, the scales were not properly installed or operated. Average rectal temperature to 109.5 degrees F. was 107.2 degrees F. and ranged from 103.4 degrees F. Blood samples we're obtained by Robert E. Keiss at the time the deer were removed from the paddocks. A tabulation of his findings follows: (Table 3) �Table 2.--Paddock stocking record, January 25 through February 16, 1965. Paddock No. Tag No. Age Sex Weight Before After In Out Temperature After 1 1 1 1 1 1 L546 L572 Al923 1496 L543 L538 Adult Yrling Old Adult Yrling Adult Doe Buck Doe Doe Doe Doe 145 105 120 140 110 140 115 120 Died Died 100 130 1-25 1-25 1-25 1-25 1-25 1-25 2-16 2-16 2-9? 2-15 2-16 2-16 ? 103.4 ? ? 107.4 104.7 2 2 2 2 288 149 L548 L221 2 yrs. Adult Adult Adult Buck Doe Doe Buck 155 135 165 186 155 135 165 125 1-25 1-25 1-25 1-25 2-16 2-16 2-16 2-16 107.2 108.2 108.0 ? 3 3 3 L528 L562 L567 Adult Yrling Adult Doe Buck Doe 120 110 120 125 95 125 1-25 1-25 1-25 2-16 2-16 2-16 109.5 106.0 109.1 5 5 L574 L569 Adult Yrling Buck Buck 160 115 150 90 1-25 1-25 2-16 2-16 106.8 104.6 6 6 L287 A2566 Yrling Adult Buck Doe 110 Escaped 140 135 1-25 1-25 2-16 2-16 109.5 108.9 * Died near end of treatment, not replaced. Date Remarks Died in scales; post-mortem made. Died 2-?-65* Died 2-15-65*, wt.-127.5 1bs. Wounded by buck. Ear split full length. +=I\) Almost dead; post-mortem made. 0\ �- 427 - Table 3.--B1ood analysis data from deer removed from paddocks, February 16, 1965. Differential Count Lymphocyte Monocytes Ear Tag Hemoglobin Hematocrit RBC WEC Polymorph 528 43 17.6 6.68 1350 29 49 20 0 567 47 17.6 9.45 . 1870 31 48 17 2 563 43 15.3 8.80 1550 35 50 7 1 572 48 16.2 8.75 1570 28 52 149 59 20.3 8.65 1750 43 40 14· 0 538 40 16.1 8.25 1750 44 41 7 1 543 44 18.6 7.73 1850 .22 50 24 0 NT5 43 17.3 7.21 1850 29 48 21 2 NT 50 18.5 8.65 1770 33 57 10 0 548 48 17.7 8.30 1670 44 47 6 3 221 44 16.3 7.52 1550 48 46 3 3 256 46 17.7 8.34 1860 47 47 6 0 287 42 18·.4 9.26 1850 38 52 20 1 569 43 18.6 8.42 1750 42 46 12 0 Basophils 1 �- 428 - Pellet Counts The procedure during 1964 and 1965 did not vary except in 1964 most of the pellet counts were made later in the spring than desirable, due to the labor shortage and wet weather. The following paper, "A Total Count of Deer Pellet Groups", was presented at the 10th Annual Summer Conference of the Central Mountains and Plains Section of the Wildlife Society. It summarizes the pellet count portion of the study and results to date. Table 4 of the completion report supplements the paper. �- 429 - A TOTAL COUNT OF DEER PELLET GROUPgl/ Colorado William T. McKean1/ Dept. of Game, Fish and Parks 6060 Broadway Denver, Colorado Almost all counts of pellet groups to sample mule deer populations (penned or wild) have been done, necessarily, on the basis of quite small samples. Such samples have indicated that the range in daily defecation of mule deer is between 13 and 15 groups per day, depending upon forage intake--its quality and quantity. Differences also have been found between age groups of mule deer (Smith-1964). Management personnel have been somewhat dubious, at times, about the reliability of such indices. Because of this doubt, it was thought that a total count of groups produced by deer under completely controlled conditions might be useful. This paper describes preliminary results of such a count. It indicates, by implication, that well designed sample counts are reliable. A project at Little Hills Experiment Station, near Meeker, Colorado, utilizes a series of two-acre paddocks in a browsing intensity study. These P?ddocks are contiguous to one another and cover about 20 acres, including driveways and a holding pen. Yearling and adult mule deer are stocked for a 20 day period in late January and early February. The stocking rates in deer-days per acre, arranged in descending order, are as follows: 60, 40, 30, 20 and 10. A fenced "control" and an unfenced "control" are also maintained. Major objectives of the study concern vegetative changes within these paddocks. Supplemental to the vegetative studies, a total count is made of all pellet groups dropped by 'the deer. The counts are made by two-man crews who search out the pellets in lanes approximately twenty feet wide delineated by twine. Within each paddock separate tallies are made of pellets found inside a center acre area and the remaining peripheral lanes. As the groups are identified they are sprayed with colored paint to prevent duplication in counts from year to year. The study is in the third year of a proposed five year period. The paddocks are located near a ridge top covered with pinon-juniper overstory averaging 10.8 percent density. Browse understory density averages 14.5 percent and is composed largely of mature or decadent plants of serviceberry, mountain mahogany, bitterbrush, and snowberry. Differences between paddocks in availability and abundance of total browse were not appreciable. Other types of forage have been almost totally unavailable during the period of stocking because of deep snow. There have been no appreciable differences between paddocks in snow depths. However, accumulated snow depths have increased each year from 1963 to 1965. l/ Presented at the Tenth Annual Summer Conference of the Central Mountains and Plains Section of the Wildlife Society, University of Wyoming Science Camp, Centennial, Wyoming, August 8-10, 1965. A contribution from Federal Aid Project W-10l-R, Game Range Investigations. 1/ Associate Meeker. Wildlife Biologist and Supt. of Little Hills Experimental Station, �- 430 - Unfortunately, actual measurements of snow were not taken. Snow in 1965 was so deep that it forced the deer to walk in trails. Several of the lower growing shrubs' were completely covered, including the abundant bitterbrush. Comparison Between Years Pellet groups deposited per deer-day have averaged 13.2 for the three year period, without respect to stocking rates or years (Table 1). Considering all stocking rates and all years, the range was quite large, going from 10.1 to 16.5 groups. In anyone year the variation was not so great. During the first year of the study, 1963, the average deposition without respect to stocking rates was 14.9 groups. An abrupt decrease from this rate occurred in 1964 and again in 1965. These lower counts were particularly evident in the paddocks stocked at thirty deer-days per acre or heavier. The amount of decrease from 1963 was 4.1 groups (26.9%) in 1964 and 4.3 (28.1%) in 1965. In these heavily stocked paddocks much utilization of pine and juniper occurred, and droppings were observed to be in the form of large coalesced masses, in several instances, rather than pellets. It would appear that the cumulative effect of over browsing for three years under these conditions resulted in a lower rate of "normal" pellet group d~position. This difference was not so evident in more moderately stocked paddocks. Another thing which accounts for a small, but unknown, amount of these decreases is failure to find all the pellets. The 1964 and 1965 counts, unfortunately, were not, made until some new growth had started in the spring. A third factor which may help account for the rapid drop in pellet groups between 1963 and 1964, especially, was the drouth that drastically reduced browse reproduction in the summer of 1963. Thus there simply was less food available. Table Pad. No. l.--A three-year comparison of total counts of mule deer pellet groups depOsited in paddocks at Little Hills Experiment Station, together with forage density percentages. Stocking Rate in DD/Acre 60 1 40 2 30 3 Control 4 20 5 10 1./ 6 Average 1/ Determined No. Deer 6 4 3 None 2 2 Over- ]j Browse ]) story Density Density 8.3% 8.4% 10.7% 14.3% 11.0% 11.0% 10.8% 17.0% 17.9% 14.1% 14.5% 14.0% 9.5% 14.5% 1963 Count 1964 Count 1965 Count Aver. 14.9 16.5 14.1 10.1 12.9 10.5 10.6 11.3 12.5 13.3 12.0 16.1 13.3 14.9 13.0 11.8 14.0 13.1 12.2 15.0 13.1 13.2 by Canfield Line Transect Method in 1962. Approximately 75 percent of browse density shown was composed of serviceberry, Amelanchier utahensis. £/ Pinon-pine and Utah juniper, pine being almost twice the density of juniper, as determined by angle gauge. '}j All paddocks were two acres in size except No. 2 which was four acres to accomodate two deer at ten acres per deer. �- 431 - Comparison Between Rates Comparison between heavier stocking rates indicates an erratic pattern of pellet group deposition that is difficult to explain. In all three heavy use paddocks forage intake was almost exclusively of coarse material, consisting of second or third year growth on browse plants, plus the previously mentioned pine and juniper needles and twigs. Because of this, one might have expected a higher deposition rate~ The many other factors mentioned previously must have more than offset this. Deer in the two lighter stocked paddocks, where better growth occurred and there was less competition in general, deposited groups at 13.1 and 15.0 per day. Other Comparisons The relationship between either browse density or browse overstory, shown in Table 1, and the pellet group deposition rates is not clear at this stage in the study. It was expected that the deer would walk along the fences in paddocks. this size and deposit a greater proportion of their pellet groups on the outer edges. This did not happen. There were consistently more groups per acre on the inside acre than on the outside acre, including the four acre paddock, Number 6. Conclusion It is evident that in general, the daily pellet group rate in these paddocks will range between 13 and 15 groups. This conforms to published results by Smith (1964), Rogers et a1 (1958), and many others. The study has two more years to run, and perhaps bY-then some of the unexplained questions may be more easily understood and refinements made on the data presented here. Summary 1. The study proposed to produce additional information on mule deer defecation rates by making total pellet counts in paddocks stocked at varying rates over a five-year period at Little Hills Experiment Station. 2. Pellet groups deposited per deer day averaged 13.2 for the three year period without respect to stocking rates. Preliminary results indicated that, for a variety of reasons, mule deer under continued heavy stocking rates had lower defecation rates than those more moderately stocked--averaging 12.6. Deer in moderately stocked paddocks defecated 13 to 15 groups per day. Differences in defecation rates between individual paddock stocking rates were erratic and difficult to explain. 3. Some limitations to the study are: a. unnatural behavior of the deer due to confinement, b. short period of time in which treatment is being conducted, c. individual differences between deer in their reaction to confinement when deer die and are replaced by others. �- 432 - 4. Within limits, the data gathered thus far from these total counts is quite comparable to that obtained and published in numerous other studies in which some sampling technique was used. . LITERATURE CITED Roge rs, G., O. Ju1ander, and W. L. Robinette. 1958. Pellet-group counts for deer census and range-use index. J. Wi1d1. Mgrnt. 22 (2) : 193-199. Smith, A. D. 435-444. 1964. Defecation rates of mule deer. J. Wi1d1. Mgmt. 28 (3) �Table 4.--Total pellet counts for each paddock, both inside and outside the one acre study plot~ together with calculated stocking rates therefrom, 1964 & 1965. Paddock No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Actual Stocking DD/Acre No. of Animals Stocked 60(2A.) 40 30 Fenced Control 20 10(4A.) Unfenced Control 6 4 3 0 627 599 358 583 433 274 1210 1032 632 5.23 7.49 5.97 4.86 5.41 4.57 10.1 12.9 10.5 46.531:/ 39.69 24.31 40.331/ 34.40 21.07 2 2 192 209 341 123 312 315 521 341 4.80 5.23 3.08 7.80 7.9 13.0 - - - 12.15 10.02 26.23 10.53 8.68 22.73 ? Inside Pellet Groups Groups/Deer/Day Outside Total Inside Outside Total 1964 - Calculated Stocking Rate Per Acre I .p- w w 1965 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1/ J:/ 60 (2A.) 40 30 Fenced Control 20 10(4A.) Unfenced Control 6 4 3 0 515 439 372 459 405 304 974 844 676 4.29 5.48 6.20 3.82 5.07 5.06 8.12 10.5 11.3 37.451:) 32.45 26.00 32.451/ 28.15 22.55 2 2 307 156 202 252 366 559 522 202 7.67 3.90 6.30 9.15 14.0 l3 .1 21.50 10.03 7.75 18.65 8.70 6.70 ? - Calculated using 13 pellet groups per deer per day. Calculated using 15 pellet groups per deer per day. - - - �- 434 - Rumen Content Analysis--1964 and 1965 Eight deer died during the second and third years of this experiment. Their rumen contents were analysed and results are presented in Table 5. The use of pinon pine by deer in Paddocks One and Two was about 20 percent greater in 1964 than in 1963. See report for last segment. The deer in Paddock Six, likewise, consumed much more pine in 1964, the consumption increasing from 30 percent in 1963 to 80 percent in 1964. Table 5.--Rumen contents of eight mule deer from·Paddocks 1964 and 1965. Tag Number Paddock No. Year Stocked L63 1 1964 L546 1 1965 SPECIES 97 Pinon pine Serviceberry Bitterbrush Mtn. mahogany Utah juniper Grass Unid. Weed Unid. * 100 T L496 1 1965 A1922 1 1965 No tag 2 1964 PERCENT BY VOLUME 100 100 T 95 5 One, Two and Six, L22l 2 1965 L136* 6 1964 336* 6 1964 100 80 15 5 80 20 2 1 T T T Died of causes other than malnutrition. Production, 1964 Following the procedure explained in the report for the last segment, a survey was again conducted to estimate total forage production for each paddock. Grass and weed data were obtained without difficulty during August. The plan to estimate browse production after leaf fall, and without shrinkage factor correction, ran afoul this year, because the lack of personnel delayed the field work into December. An eighteen inch snow fall had to be removed with brooms and by hand in each of 70 milacre plots before estimates could be made. The help of Don G. Smith in this thankless task is gratefully acknowledged. With his assistance the job was completed. The greatly increased production of browse and forbs, indicated in Table 6, is partically due to increased precipitation but also to more nearly accurate estimates of production resulting from a longer training program given crews in 1964. The 1964 figures are believed to be the more reliable. Sample size tests made again, as in 1963, with the 1964 data indicated that the number of milacre plots needed to be: browse 63, grass 74, weeds 75 at the 20 percent level. We are taking 70 plots (ten per paddock). �Table 7.--Tota1 estimated browse production by species in dry weight pounds per acre, by paddock, 1964. Mtn. mahogany Paddock 1 Paddock 2 Paddock 3 Paddock 4 Paddock 5 Paddock 6 Paddock 7 Total 1bs/acre Total 1bs/acre Total 1bs/acre Total 1bs/acre Total 1bs/acre Total 1bs/acre Total 1bs/acre 1.1 2.2 0.5 45.5 10.0 5.0 0.0 0.0 La 0.2 0.0 0.0 34.0 7.5 Serviceberry 379.5 80.0 130.0 28.7 176.0 38.8 147.5 32.5 148.0 32.6 275.5 60.7 80.6 17.8 Bitterbrush 0.0 0.0 5.0 1.1 8.0 1.8 0.0 0.0 32.0 7.1 17.5 3.9 0.0 0.0 Snowberry 29.5 6.5 13.0 2.9 56.5 12.5 48.5 10.7 84.6 18.6 45.5 10.0 74.0 16.3 Pinon 830.0 182.9 1520.0 335.0 780.0 171.9 25.0 5.5 5.1 1.1 195.0 43.0 1400.0 308.6 1.5 0.3 18.0 4.0 10.0 2.2 44.0 9.7 19.0 4.2 Oregon grape 0,0 0.0 0.0 0.0 I .j::"' Juniper 0.0 0.0 30.0 6.6 15.5 3.4 3.0 0.7 64.0 14.1 0.5 0.1 0.0 0.0 Big sagebrush 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 3.0 0.7 0.0 0.0 3.0 0.7 0.0 0.0 15.a 3.3 384.6 1062.0 234.2 234.0 51.6 381.7 84.1 553.0 121.9 1603.6 353.5 TOTAL 1241.2 269.9 1745.0 w \J1 �- 436 - Fig. 1. Changes in bitterbrush plant after two browsing periods in heavy-u~e paddock. Before browsing (above), after two browsing periods (below). �- 437 - Fig. 2. Changes in mountain mahogany plant after two browsing periods in heavy-use paddock. Before browsing (above), after two browsing periods (below). �- 438 - Fig. 3. Changes in bitterbrush plant after two browsing periods in moderate-use paddock. Before browsing (above), after two browsing periods (below). �- 439 - Fig. 4. Changes in bitterbrush plant after two browsing periods in light-use paddock. Before browsing (above), after two browsing periods (below). �- 440 forage production in dry weight pounds per acre by Table 6.--Tota1estimated paddock, 1963 and 1964. 1 2 3 Paddock No. 4 5 6 7 Average 1963 Browse Grass Weeds 156.1 25.4 17.5 156.8 12.2 30.8 101.3 25.3 35.6 21.4 36.6 6.6 54.3 50.1 11.6 55.3 8.9 11.8 137.5 87.7 6.6 97.5 35.1 17.8 Total 199.0 199~8 162.2 64.6 116.0 76.0 231.8 149.9 I 1964 Browse Grass Weeds 269.9 14.7 35.7 384.6 15.8 41.4 234.2 24.7 39.4 51.6 44.3 36.8 84.1 50.6 41.4 121.9 11.8 34.8 353.5 47.1 37.0 214.3 29.9 38.1 Total 320.3 441.8 298.3 132.7 176.1 168.5 437.6 282.2 Pinon pine comprised over half of 'the total browse production in four of the seven paddocks (Table 7). Mtn. 'mahogany has been very low in production in all paddocks both years. This is partically due to the small sample size comprised in themi1acre plots. Condition and Trend Shown by Photos Twenty-one marked browse plants were rephotographed in 1964. Figures 1 through 4 illustrate some of the more evident changes, or lack of change, depending upon the paddock. Rodent Control A small number of rodents were removed by poisoning and box trapping in each paddock. Since no control is attempted outside of the paddocks, it is di,fficult to avoid bias in this work. Prepared by: Date: William T. McKean Assoc. Wildlife Researcher July, 1965 Approved by: Harold R. Shepherd Project Leader Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief �July, 1965 441 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH. PROJECT SD1ENT State of COLORADO ~------~~~~-------------- Project No. W-IOI-Jt,.7.. Work Plan No. 2 Game Range Investigations Job No. Title of Job: Little Hills Grazing Study Period Covered: April 1, 1964 to March 30, 1965. Personnel: 1 William T. McKean, Donald G. Smith, Harold E. Burdick, Julius J. Klein, Nelson Cain, George W. Crandell, Hugh Black Jr., Gary I.. Brown, Don Findlay, Jim Ridgway, Wayne E. Tinder, Tom stewart, Lawrence E. Hilkey, Clarence L. Peterson, Paul Reddin, Herbert Janes, Ray Gossman, Roger C. Randolph, Kenneth C. Dillinger, and John Corey ABSTRACT Favcrable weather conditions during the 1964-65 winter season resulted in a catch of 258 deer of which 24.5 percent were bucks, 41.1 percent does, and 34.4 percent fawns. Pastures were stocked on schedule, but winter losses and unchecked losses from injuries in stocking resulted in some confusion in the total deer days achieved per pasture. Removals of deer were accomplished in record time. Livestock stocking proceded on schedule. utilization estimates after deer browsing (1963-64) showed about normal percentages of use, but these were largely on old growth, since there was no growth in 1963. By contrast, the 1964 growing season, being a good one, resulted in lower utilization estimates in the livestock pastures. Standard P-u transects and pellet group counts again gave generally lighter utilization figures than did the estimates, because they sample "key areas" within the pastures. A production index, growth index, and a use index are tabulate~ for all years this study has been undertaken. Vigor (leaf length) of Indian ricegrass in the heavy use livestock pastures averaged only about 66 percent of that in the exclosures, whereas, in Pasture Four (heavy deer) it was 100 percent as vigorous. Vigor (diameter) of low phlox was not as severely reduced by the heavy use except in Pasture One (62 percent). The trend continued for vigor to be more closely related to elevation increase, hence precipitation, than to the stocking rate. �- 442 - Photos and a summary paragraph describe changes in vegetation within meter quadrats in the pastures. In general, the changes are not great except in heavy use pastures. A two-way analysis of variance of line transect data, designed to show vegetative changes in the pastures between 1957 and 1962, has progressed considerably. Unfortunately, personnel changes and work assignment changes slowed this work down greatly. Summation tables are presented and discussed, but final analysis and interpretation will have to be delayed again. Ten rumen samples from deer which died in the years 196:3-64-65 in Pasture Four showed a total browse content of 83.6 percent of which 38.4 percent was big sagebrush. Thirteen deer removed from Pastures Three, Four, and Six in the spring months of the same years had 67.4 percent total browse of which 51. 9 percent was young leaves and twigs of snowberry, serviceberry, big sagebrush, and mountain mahogany. Grass content was three times greater in the spring samples than in the winter ones (21.0 and 7.7 percent). Eleven groups of visitors toured the past ures, and.two talks were given away from the Station. A popular-type brochure about the Station was published during the year. RECOMMENDATIONS 1. A greater effort must be expended on analysis and publication of existing data. At the same time, the pasture treatment should be carefully maintained until final results are published. This will take at least another year, probably longer, depending upon results of the soil survey work currently in progress. 2. To expedite the analysis of data, a Wildlife Research Candidate must be employed who is skilled and interested in biometry. In addition, the employment of the long-proposed, full-time statistician by'the Department should be made not only for the benefit of this project but all others as well. 3. Having expended several hundred thousand dollars and almost twenty year's work on this project it would seem most foolish to discontinue it abruptly without having explored all possible effects of these many years of grazing on the range vegetation and soil. Two alternatives are therefore proposed for use of the pastures after the present stocking pattern is discontinued. a. Measure the rate of vegetative recovery after removing all livestock by: (1) Maintaining the fences for approximately five years. (2) Re-reading annually the line transects in sufficient number and detail in each pasture to determine the current status �- 443 - and comparing this information to the 1957 data. When a pasture arrives at a "restored" status discontinue any further study. b. Reverse the stocking patterns by placing livestock in the deer pastures and deer in the livestock pastures for a period of about five years or until a "restored" condition is realized. Re-measure the line transects and compare to the 1957 data. OBJECTIVES, TECHNIQUES, AND FINDINGS Pasture Stocking-Deer {1964-65).--Deer trapping by means of group traps was started during the week of October 20th. By December 15th the pastures were stocked to the desired rates (Table 3). Box trapping started during the last week of November and continued almost daily, except for the Christmas holidays, until February 23, 1965. Generally speaking, trapping conditions were very good, except that in a few periods winds drifted the snow enough to close the roads faster than they could be dug out. Some of the box traps were sprung at such times. A total of 258 deer were captured (Tables 1 and 2). Of these, 69 were placed in the experimental pastures and 17 in the paddocks. Sixty-five deer were tagged and released. In addition, there were 41 recatches from previous years. Finally, 66 head were caught and transported to Oklahoma in an exchange for whitetail deer. The latter were not transported under a Federal Aid Project. No record was kept of the numerous day to day repeats which occurred during the trapping season. In a sample of 201 deer, group traps caught 71 head and box traps, 130. It was not necessary to use the wing traps this year. The trapping complex at the mouth of Corral Gulch is considered as a group trap, though it includes a wing fence. The reduced stocking rate in Pasture Four, referred to in the last segment report, was continued. This resulted in only 21 head being introduced into this pasture for the second year. In spite of this comparatively low number, five head died for a winter loss of 20 percent. Winter losses in the other deer pastures were: No. 3 - 12%, No. 5 - 0%, No. 6 - 0%, No. 7 - 25%. Total precipitation at the Station for the winter period (November through March) was 5.58 inches as compared to 3.32 inches for 1963 and 4.65 for 17 years previous. This.was virtually all snow, of course. Measurement of snow accumulated on the ground was not accomplished. Over the greatest part of each pasture, snow depths would have averaged 18 ~nches and reached a maximum of four feet in lower places. Deer did considerable trailing from one shallow snow area to another,and consequently their browsings were spotted. �- 444 - Table 1.--Sex and age groups of deer trapped at Little Hills, 1964-65. Bucks Does Unknown Total CIl CIl CIl CIl 00 I:l 00 I:l '.-1 ,...., <Il ~ III ~ '"' <Il ;:l III .u '"' ,...., III .u :>4 ~ H ~ III ~ <Il :>4 ~ H ~ III ~ 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 2 1 0 11 9 20 0 3 42 45 20 0 9 29 31 0 5 Tagged Deer Put Into Paddocks 0 4 3 7 0 1 TOTAL 20 16 21 57 31 Recatches 0 2 6 8 0 CIl Untagged Deer Put Into Pastures Tagged Deer Put Into Pastures Tagged Deer Released 0 <Il '"' '"' .u '.-1 <Il III '"' '"' .u <Il :>4 ~ 0 0 36 9 5 1 ,...., CIl Total Bucks (Yearlings and Adults) Total Does (Yearlings and Adults) Total Fawns Total Unknown •.-1 00 I:l III ,...., ,...., 00 I:l 'r-! ,...., <Il C\l ';:l"' .u ,...., III .u <Il :>4 ~ H 1 2 1 4 0 0 14 51 65 0 0 51 0 14 65 . 0 0 0 0 0 12 ·17 1 0 0 1 52 21 78 ~51 0 0 0 0 0 3 38 ·41 CIl ,...., H ~ III ~ 0 1 0 0 0 0 10 0 57 93 32 33 ;:l III III .u 0 CIl ;:l III III .u 0 '"' 0 . . . . · · · · . . . 37 . . 2'4.•5'%, . 62 .... .......... . . . . · · · · . . . 52 0 ···· 41•. 1% .34~4% 0\0% Table 2.--Deer Pasture Stocking {1964-65~. Pasture No. Calculated Deer Days Desired 3 4 5 6 7 2427 2873 1281 1484 907 Approximate Deer Days Achieved 2392 2761 1275 1526 940 Deviation Over 'lmlrdier ~5' ll]2? 6, 42 33 �Table 3.--Summary of stocking records for livestock-grazing Pasture No. Animal Sprin~ Stocked Removed Stocked 1 Sheep May 8 May 19 Oct. "23 Nov. 3 76.37 2 Cattle June 2 June 11 Oct. 1 Oct. 13 166.25 3 Cattle May 22 June 1 Oct. 27 Nov. 6 161. 81 Oct. Dec. Nov. Dec. March 29 April 14 March 14 143.64 Deer 4 5 Deer Sheep May 20 June 1 Deer 6 Deer 7 Deer 8 Cattle May 8 9 Sheep June 2 22 4 5 9 Fall Removed Nov. 4 Nov. 16 Oct. Dec. Oct. Oct. Oct. Dec. March April March March April 29 5 26 29 26 15 11 12 10 11 13 year 1964; and deer grazing year 1964-65. Acres Number Total Days AUM A/AUM Spring Fall Season Spring Fall Season Spring Fall Season 35 35 70 12 12 24 12 12 24 385 385 770 108 144 252 120 120 240 12.8 12.8 25.7 3.6 4.8 8.4 4.0 4.0 8.0 Winter 18 2392 79.7 6.0 6.0 3.0 46.2 34.6 19.8 40.5 40.5 20.2 1.8 Winter 21 2761 92.0 1.6 Spring Fall Season 35 35 70 420 420 840 14.0 14.0 28.0 6.1 6.1 3.1 Winter 8 1275 42.5 2.0 98.93 Winter 11 1526 50.9 1.9 90.67 Winter 8 940 31.3 2.9 Spring Fall Season S~rinK Fall Season 12 12 24 35* 35 70 150 144 294 750 770 1520 5.0 4.8 9.8 25.0 25.7 50.7 41.1 42.8 21.0 6.2 6.1 3.1 85.42 May 21 Oct. 14 Oct. 26 205.43 June 24 Oct. 1 Oct. 22 155.55 * 20 sheep days short, 1 died. Season of Use :g: V1 �- 446 - Deer Remova1s-l965.--The abnormally deep snow rema1n1ng in the pastures seemed to be an assistance in removing deer, because it restricted their movements. In the major drives, groups of deer going out single gates were larger than usual, numbering 17, 12; 7, 7, 5, 4, and a few singles. There remained, as usual, one or two stragglers in each pasture, well into the early summer. Drives began on March 10th and ended on April 14th. In addition to the Station crew of four, two student assistants and four to five laborers were used in the major drives. Pasture Stocking-Livestock-1964.-Cattle.--The annual spring stocking of cattle in the pastures started on May 8, 1964, and terminated on June 11. Fall stocking started on October 1, 1964, and ended November 6, 1964. The 12 two-year-01d heifers obtained were among the most easily handled we have ever had, and no difficulty in herding or weighing occurred. Sheep.--Spring stocking of 35 adult ewes began on May 8, 1964, ,and terminated November 16, 1964. During the spring, one ewe died of some undetermined cause in Pasture Nine. We did not reimburse the owner. Weights.--For the first time since weights have been taken we have obtained consistent results. In Table 4 it may be seen that both cattle and sheep in the heavy use pastures (1 and 2) ~ave lost weight in both spring and fall. Table 4.--Livestock Weights Before and After Stocking, 1964.* Spring Average Weight Fall Average Weight Pasture No. Before After Gain or Loss 1 5 9 87.6 83.0 91.4 83.0 91.4 97.4 -4.6 +7.4 +6.0 8 3 2 662.9 622.1 651.3 622.1 651.3 641.3 -40.8 +29.2 -10.0 'k Pasture No. Sheep (35) 9 1 5 Catt Le (12) 2 8 3 Before After Gain or' Loss 130.1 130.1 125.7 130. O*~'c 125.7 114.5** -0.1 -4.4 -11.2 844.6 826.7 862.9 826.7 862.9 857.5 -17.9 +36.2 -5.4 Arranged by pasture in the order in which they were stocked. ** Wet on weighing because of snow or rain. �- 447 - Utilization Estimates, Deer (1963-64).--The regular spring estimates of deer use, using the paced transect system described in previous segments, was completed during the period from May 12-15, 1964, by Harold E. Burdick. Browse growth in 1963 was very poor. Hence the utilization figures shown in Table 5 may be largely on 1962 growth. With the exception of Pasture Four, they are about the same as for the 1962-63 browsing period. The reduction in stocking rate in Pasture Four from 40 to 20 deer-days per acre brought a reduction in total browse utilization of 64 percent, based on this survey. This seems higher than Ls reasonable. However, the 16 percent average browse use is heavy when it is almost all on second year growth. . Utilization Estimates, Livestock (1964) .--Precipitation from April .through July amounted to 6.47 inches .. This, plus the accumulated normal snow melt, stimulated forage growth greatly. However, the fall months turned dry with only 3.5 inches precipitation from August through October. The.total annual precipitation was 14.01 inches. Our l7-year average is 12.68. The reduction in stocking rates in Pastures One and Two resulted in a consistent reduction in utilization below 1963 in all forage types (Table 6, 6a and 6b). A part of this would also be due to increased production. The moderately stocked pastures likewise showed a reduction in utilization for almost all types of forage and both seasons. Standard P-U Transects.-- It was possible to read these production and utilization transects as planned, except in Pastures Three and Five, where early snows prevented after-fall grazing measurements. They were measured in the spring of 1965 and therefore record the dual use by livestock and deer. The various indices of the Big Game Range Analysis plan have been calculated for all years. Table 7 and Figure 1 were prepared to show the preliminary results. They are not conclusive. The comparison of utilization as determined by P-U transects and by ocular estimates in general indicates a lower figure than the estimates because P-U transects are located in "key areas", whereas the estimates cover the whole pasture (Table 8). Pellet group counts were made to accompany the vegetative data. Apparently, the sample sizes are too small to be valid. At least, they do not compare well with the calculated stocking rates shown in Table 9. On the other hand, winter mortalities of unknown date make the determination of deer-days use only an approximation also. There are large differences between pellet count results , from the two transects in each pasture. These can be partially explained by the large differences in depth of the snow this year and the fact that the serviceberry transects were mostly in areas of deeper snow. �- 448 - Table 5.--Average percent utilization of browse plants by deer, winter 1963-64, by pasture. Pasture 3 Pasture 4 Pasture 5 Pasture 6 Pasture 7 Moderate Heavy Moderate Moderate Light Browse Species No. % Hits Util No. % Hits Util. No. % Hits Util. No. % Hits Util. No. % Hits Uti1. Serviceberry Mtn. mahogany Bitterbrush Big sagebrush Big rabbitbrush Little rabbitbrush Hbrsebrush Snowberry Pine Juniper Oak Mormon tea Lance1eaf rabbitbrush Skunkbush Oregon Grape Ribes Chrysothamnus depressus 55 30 7 34 3 4 61 41 6 15 4 12 5 12 6 3 6 26 19 8 8 15.0 7.4 7.9 21.9 41' 21 5 10 16.4 8.3 20.0 30.5 3 8 8 7 2 0.0 2.6 0.0 22.9 0.0 31 24 3 28 3 10 2 13 10 1 2 9 11 5 2.5 0.6 2.7 0.0 1 0.0 Average 37 14 8 6 1 1. 19.6 20.5 32.3 28.8 31.0 2.5 0.3 0.2 5.4 2.5 0.3 0.0 15.0 3 0.0 6 7.9 7.8 45.0 33.3 7.5 3.9 4.0 0.2 17 .5 3.3 18.7 23.1 4.5 30.0 13.1 20.0 5.2 1.0 0.0 2.9 0.0 I 1 40.0 209 15.0 2 13 2.5 82.3 187 16.1 111 9.7 2 1 2.5 0.0 8 50.0 129 11.1 116 14.6 �Table 6.--Livestock utilization Pasture No. l-H Sheep estimates after sEring grazing, by pasture, 2-H Cattle *3-M Cattle 1964. *5-M'Sheep 8-M Cattle 9-M Sheep Hits % Hits % Hits % Hits % Hits % Hits % GRASS 95 25.0 180 16.6 207 13.2 108 11.6 189 14.8 167 12.1 BROWSE 96 10.3 180 3.1 210 1.4 109 2.3 190 0.5 167 5.1 WEEDS 96 4.1 178 7.8 208 5.9 109 5.9 187 4.7 167 16.1 Table 6a.--Livestock utilization Pasture No. 1-H Sheep estimates after fall grazing, by pasture, 1964. 2-H Cattle *3-M Cattle *5-M Sheep % 8-M Cattle Hits % Hits % Hits % Hits GRASS 96 26.8 180 20.5 106 25.5 1/ BROWSE 96 9.3 180 8.0 104 WEEDS 97 11.9 179 7.3 104 Table 6b.--Livestock utilization estimates totaled after spring and fall grazing by pasture, 1964. Pasture No. 1-H Sheep 2-H Cattle Hits % Hits % 184 15.4 148 21. 9 5.0 184 2.2 148 5.1 4.5 182 3.0 144 10.3 *3-M Cattle *5-M Sheep 8-M Cattle 9-M Sheep % % 38.7 30.2 34.0 11.1 6.4 2.7 10.2 15.1 10.4 7.7 26.4 % % % GRASS 51.8 37.1 BROWSE 19.6 WEEDS 16.0 *- 9-M Sheep Stocked in winter with deer. 1/ -Snow prevented estimates being made in fall. % -!=" -!=" \0 �- 450 Table 7.--Comparative indices of pasture browse production, growth, and use, based on P-U transects, 1961-64. Production Index Pasture No. 1961-62 1962-63 1963-64 1964-65 Total Average 1961-62 1962-63 1963-64 1964-65 Total Average 1 1.9 1.9 1.9 3.3 3.3 3.3 2 3 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.8 1.6 1.1 1.6 6.1 1.5 4.8 4.8 4.8 3.8 2.4 0.0* 3.1 9.3 2.3 4 5 6 7 Serviceberry 1.5 1.9 1.0 2.2 1.4 1.4 1.1 0.9 1.3 1.0 1.1 0.9 1.9 1.8 1.2 0.7 6.8 5.2 5.6 3.7 1.7 1.3 1.4 0.9 Mountain mahogany 3,0 2.3 3.3 3.8 1.9 2.8 2.3 2.5 O.O~••. 0.0* 0.0* 1.3 3.3 2.2 2.2 2.8 9.1 6.4 7.8 10.4 1.6 2.3 2.0 2.6 8 0.6 0.6 0.6 9 1.0 1.0 1.0 10 1.7 1.7 1.7 3.3 3.3 3.3 1.1 1.1 1.1 3.9 3.9 3.9 8 9 10 Ave. 1.7 1.3 1.1 1.4 1.3 3.2 2.4 0.3 3.0 2.7 Growth Index Pasture No. 1961-62 1962-63 1963-64 1964-65 Total Average 1961-62 1962-63 1963-64 1964-65 Total Average Pasture No. 1961-62 1962-63 U63-64 1964-65 Total Average 1961-62 1962-63 1963-64 1964-65 Total Average 1 0.6 0.6 0.6 1.0 1.0 1.0 2 3 0.3 0.3 0.3 1.0 0.9 0.6 0.5 3.0 0.8 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.5 0.9 0.0* 0.6 3.0 0.8 4 5 6 7 Serviceberry 1.3 1.2 1.0 0.9 0.7 0.3 0.6 0.4 0.6 0.4 0.3 0.3 0.9 0.5 0.6 0.2 1.9 3.5 2.1 2.7 0.9 0.5 0.7 0.5 Mountain mahogany 1.4 1.2 1.1 0.8 0.9 0.3 0.7 0.8 0.0* 0.0* O.O~••. 0.1 1.0 0.6 0.4 0.6 1.7 3.3 2.3 2.6 0.8 0.4 0.6 0.7 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.8 0.8 0.8 8 9 10 Ave. 1.1 0.6 0.4 0.5 0.5 1.2 0.7 0.0 0.6 0.6 Use Index --1 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 2 3 0.1 0.1 0.1 1.2 0.6 0.7 0.6 3.1 0.8 1.0 1.0 1.0 3.2 0.8 0.0* 1.2 5.2 1.3 4 5 6 7 Serviceberry 1.5 1.1 0.0 0.5 0.6 0.3 0.1 0.1 0.7 0.5 0.8 0.5 0.5 0.3 0.5 0.0 1.1 1.1 3.3 2.5 0.8 0.3 0.6 0.3 Mountain mahogany 2.7 0.0 2.1 2.7 1.8 0,7 2.4 0.7 0.0* 0.0* 0.0* 0.7 1.1 1.1 2,5 0.5 7.6 2.3 3.9 5.2 1.9 1.0 1.3 0.6 *- Not measured due to lack of annual growth. 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0,0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0,0 0,0 0.0 0.9 0.9 0.9 2.7 2.7 2.7 Ave. 0.9 0.3 0.6 0.3 0.4 2.1 1.3 0.1 1.0 1.0 �- 451 - Figure 1.~-Comparison of production indices by pasture, 1961-64. 5 5 1961 4 1962 \ X / \ (l) 'E3 ><l (l) '0 / "- H ~ '", ..02 0 H ~ I H /A. \ k ~ ,.. \ 0 r.~ 1 ,. • "0 ,," -~ ~ 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Pasture Noo 5 9 10 1 2 5 6 7 3 4 8 Pasture No. 5 1963 1964 1\ 4 ><l (l) (l) 'E3 ]3 I \ h ><l I I, \ "."" J',/ \..0-"\ H H -: \ • • '02 ct P-. /' \._.~,/ ]2 0 H 9 10 1 1 ~ 0 1 2 .... _- ---'I 3 4 5 6 0 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 8 67 9 10 Pasture No. Pasture No" 5 4 - - --1 o~ ~ 1 2 3 ~~ 4 5 6 Pasture lIoc _ 7 8 9 10 - Mtn. Nahogany Serviceberry �- 452 - Table 8.--Uti1ization based upon standard P.U. transects as compared to ocular estimates on serviceberry and mountain mahogany, by pasture, 1964-65. % Utilization Transects Estimates Pasture No. Grazed by Stocking Rate Season Amut Cemo Amut Cemo 1 Sheep Moderate* Fall 0.0 0.0 0.1 17.7 2 Cattle Moderate* Fall 8.9 20.6 0.0 12.6 3 Cattle Moderate Fall 36.6** 38.1** 18.8** 46.9** 3 Deer Moderate Winter 4 Deer Moderate* Winter 24.7 74.6 25.4 36.6 5 Sheep Moderate Fall 19.4** 21.1~\-* 9.8** 36.1** 5 Deer Moderate Winter 6 Deer Moderate Winter 39.2 47.8 23.7 28.8 7 Deer Light Winter 4.0 39.3 6.8 22.3 8 Cattle Moderate Fall 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 9 Sheep Moderate Fall 4.0 0.0 0.0 4.1 heavy use pastures. * Previously Includes both fall livestock use and winter deer use. ** �- 453 - Table 9.--Comparison between calculated deer stocking rates from pellet counts with approximate pasture stocking rates, 1964-65. Pasture No. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Deer Days Per Acre From Pellet Count Approx. (1964-65) Deer Days Per Acre Serviceberry Transect Mahogany Transect 12.3 26.2 6.9 8.5 11.5 12.3 26.9 13.8 25.4 20.7 14.8 19.2 15.1 15.4 10.4 Vigor Survey, 1964.--Another year's measurement of maximum leaf length of Indian ricegrass (Oryzopsis hymenoides) and diameter of low phlox (Phlox caespitosa) was accomplished in hopes of obtaining useful information concerning the comparative vigor of these "typical" forage plants in the pastures. Again, as in 1962 and 1963, there seems to be a closer relationship to elevational changes between pastures than to stocking rates (Tables 10, 11, and 12). The heavy-use pastures are an exception; here, grass vigor is distinctly lower in both sheep and cattle pastures and higher in the deer pastures. The vigor of Phlox caespitosa is lower in sheep pastures than cattle pastures regardless of elevation or stocking rate. The gradual increase in vigor with increasing elevation from Pasture One to Nine is fairly evident also. Some interesting implications are suggested in Table l3,which shows a breakdown of 1964 age classes of Indian ricegrass. This deserves more space for discussion than is here available. Suffice it to say that the protection afforded grass in the eight exclosures has not appreciably increased the amount of seedlings and young plants. Some pasture differences are logical and others are harder to explain at this point. Meter Quadrat Photos.--The task of re-photographing pasture meter quadrats was almost completed during the year. Over 100 black and white, 4 x 5 inch pictures have been taken, to duplicate those taken in 1954, at or near a ten-year interval. Notes of changes in each quadrat were made by comparing the original chart quadrat at the site to the current status. One pair of pictures from each pa~ture is presented in Figures two, three, four, and five. A summary of our notes concerning each pasture is presented below. �- 454 - Table 10.--Vigor ratings for Indian Ricegrass (Oryzopsis hymenoides) as : determined by leaf1ength measurements, 1964. Pasture No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Average Exclosure Pasture 327.4 301.0 407.7 439.5 421.3 414.9 266.3 239.4 270.0 381. 7 356.9 342.5 338.2 320.9 350.7 370.5 323.7 323.3 417.2 381.5 % of Exc10sure Average 69.8 62.8 70.8 100.0 93.6 89.8 88.7 84.1 91.9 97.1 Table 11.--Vigor ratings for low phlox (Phlox caespitosa) as determined by crown diameter measurements, 1964. Pasture No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Average Exc10sure Pasture 72.7 108.8 88.7 86.4 69.0 97.2 59.9 79.0 88.0 73.2 80.0 93.8 86.4 110.2 91.0 79.5 83.9 129.8 91.7 93.0 % of Exclosure Average 62.3 84.9 94.6 78.7 86.0 100.9 92.9 118.5 97.8 85.5 �- 455 - Table 12.--Vigor ratings of Indian ricegrass and low phlox as related to the amount and type of use, 1961, 1963, and 1964. Pasture No. 1. 9. 2. 8. 4. 6. 7. 5. 3. I Stocking Rate & Species Stocked Grass Vigor.!! 1961 1963 1964 Low Ph1ox!! 1961 1963 1964 Heavy - Sheep Moderate - Sheep Heavy - Cattle Moderate - Cattle Heavy - Deer Moderate - Deer Light - Deer Moderate - Sheep and Deer Moderate - Cattle and Deer 69.1 100.4 70.0 95.0 81.6 80.3 94.0 76.5 72 96 53 82 87 84 76 88 69.8 91.9 62.8 84.1 100.0 89.8 88.7 93.6 48.9 75.7 69.7 81.9 60.2 95.7 93.7 101.8 54 82 54 89 59 78 76 68 62.3 97.8 84.9 118.5 78.7 100.9 92.9 86.0 79.0 78 70.8 83.3 64 94.6 .!! The vigor rating of ricegrass and low phlox in the pastures expressed as a percent of the average exclosure measurements. Table 13.--Age and condition classes of Indian ricegrass (Oryzopsis hymenoides) as indicated by paced transect, 1964, and compared to data from eight exc10sures combined. Pasture Seedling No. No. % Young No. % Mature No. % Decadent Hollow Center Clump Edge No. % No. % Total No. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Total Ave. Eight Excls. 10 11 9 3 5 10 3 16 3 7 77 67 82 75 74 79 105 69 61 63 86 761 14 5 7 21 11 5 16 16 17 7 119 113 120 120 114 108 134 116 126 106 110 1167 1 6 3 1 2 2 4 2 0 3 24 0.9 5.0 2.5 0.9 1.9 1.5 3.4 1.6 0.0 2.7 2.1 1 0.7 8.8 9.2 7.5 2.6 4.6 7.5 2.6 12.7 2.8 6.4 6.6 11 8.0 59.3 68.3 62.5 64.9 73.1 78.4 59.5 48.4 59.4 78.2 65.3 68 49.6 12.4 4.2 5.8 18.4 10.2 3.7 13.8 12.7 16.0 6.4 21 16 26 15 11 12 24 31 23 7 186 10.2 20 14.6 18.6 13.3 21.7 13.2 10.2 9.0 20.7 24.6 21.7 6.4 16.0 37 27.0 137 �- 456 - Pasture 1. There are fewer weeds present in almost all of the plots. The grasses appear to be less abundant in those areas where the sheep congregate most frequently, but in other areas they are about as abundant as originally plotted. Browse plants were not abundant to begin with in the quadrats. Those browse plants present were smaller than the originals and less vigorous. Pasture 2. Grass occurrence and density in general are lower than in original chart quadrats. Browse has been trampled or eaten in most of the plots, with resulting lowered density. Weeds have about the same density but there has been some change in species. Pasture 3. Results are erratic and no definite trend is evident; probably this is due to the small sample size. Browse does not seem to be making any definite changes. Pasture 4. Grass density has increased notably in the majority of plots which contained vegetation. Any change in browse condition is difficult to ascertain because of the conspicuous absence of browse plants in the plots to begin with. The few browse plants present show a definite decline in condition. The number of weeds seems not to have changed appreciably in any of the plots. Pasture 5. There does not appear to be much change in the browse, and the grass does not show an over all change. However, there does seem to be a slight change in species composition in a few places, with ricegrass being the decreaser. There are slightly fewer weeds except in the back of the pasture and in the south east corner. Pasture 6. There does not seem to be much change in the browse and the grass. Four of the plots show a decrease in weeds. Pasture 7. The principle change is in the number of weeds, but the situation is unusual in that there are about the same number of plots which show an increase in weeds as there are which show a decrease. The grass and browse do not show much change. Pasture 8. There were no obvious changes in either browse. or herbaceous plants. Many of the plots were nearly barren to begin with. Pasture 9. There seems to be very little change in the browse and grass. Weeds have shown a slight increase. Pasture 10. Weeds have decreased somewhat. The grass shows a slight change in species composition, but the change is not consistent from plot to plot. Browse change is not significant. �- 457 - Pasture One, 1964 Pasture One, 1954 Heavy Sheep Pasture Two, 1964 Pasture Two, 1954 Heavy Cattle Pasture Three, 1954 Moderate Figure 2. Pasture Three, Cow-Deer 1964 Changes in aspect in selected meter quadrats One, Two, and Three, 1954-65. in Pastures �Pasture Four, 1954 Pasture Four, 1964 Heavy Deer Pasture Five, 1954 Pasture Figure Pasture Five, 1964 Moderate Sheep-Deer Moderate Deer Six, 1954 3. Pasture Six, 1964 Changes in aspect in selected meter quadrats Four, Five, and Six, 1954-64. in Pastures �- 459 - Pasture Seven, 1964 Pasture Seven, 1954 Light Deer Pasture Eight, 1964 Pasture Eight, 1954 Moderate Cattle Pasture Nine, 1954 Pasture Nine, 1964 Moderate Sheep Figure 4. Changes in aspect in selected meter quadrats in Pastures Seven, Eight, and Nine, 1954-64. �- 460 - Pasture Ten, 1954 Pasture Ten, 1964 Control Figure 5. Change in aspect Ten, 1954-64. in selected meter quadrat in Pasture �- 461 - Analysis of Canfield Line Transect Data.--In 1957 and 1958, Eldie W. Mustard, Jr. established 192 line intercept transects and 350 plot transects (2 x 25 ft.) in the nine experimental pastures at the Little Hills Experimental Station. These were re-read in 1962 and 1963 to compare changes occurring during the five-year interval. During this segment, data were checked and corrected. Browse data, such as browse density. browse numbers, and browse reproduction, were set up for twoway analysis of variance tests. This same statistical test was made on different types of intercepts (litter, forbs, etc.). Because the statistical analysis and interpretation of results are not complete, they will be reported in the next segment. Line intercept data compiled in 1962~63 are shown in Table 14. This shows line intercept type as well as individual species for each pasture. The mean percent for all nine pastures is shown in the right-hand column. Mustard did not place any transects or plots outside the pastures. In 1961, 19 transects and 19 plots (2 x 50 ft.) were established in Pasture Ten, a control, to compare vegetative composition outside the pastures with that inside. The summation values for these transects are presented in Table 15. It is interesting to note that considerably more browse plants were found inside the pastures than outside (23 percent compared to 9 percent). This may reflect the heavy deer use adjacent to Pasture One. Grasses were more abundant outside the pastures (1.60 percent to O. SS percent) and weeds were fewer (0.90 percent to 1.16 percent). However there was much more bare ground, rock, erosion pavement. and litter outside the pastures (88 percent to 74 percent). Simple arithmetic was used to compare intercept composition found in 1957-58 and 1962-63 (Table 16). This comparison was made from corrected field sheets and will differ slightly from Table 10 presented in last year's report. The difference between years is expressed as the percent the latter figure is of the original (1957) figure. The sign (+ or -) indicates whether the difference has increased or decreased. Although this method implies a greater difference than actually occurs, it serves to emphasize changes. There were 192 transects read the first time and 201 the second reading. A few of the original transects were not located, so others were read to substitute for those lost. Bare ground, rock, and erosion pavement were lumped together, and these showed an increase during the five-year interval in each of nine pastures. The average increase for all nine pastures was 23%. Pasture 6 (moderate deer use) showed the largest increase. Litter decreased in each of the nine pastures, particularly in Pastures One and Two (heavy sheep and heavy cattle use, respectively). The average decrease for all pastures was 39 percent. �Table 14.--Summation values from 201 line transects, of total area). located in pastures one through nine, 1962-63, (Figures are percent Pasture 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Mean Percent Number of transects Erosion pavement and bare ground Bare rock Litter Grass Forbs Moss Browse 26 25 30 25 16 13 12 35 19 201 59.84 2.72 13.21 .53 .65 .17 22.88 57.78 2.88 12.69 .30 .83 .06 25.46 42.59 2.74 31.31 .18 1.09 .24 21. 85 52.10 4.68 20.55 .34 1.84 .87 19.62 55.90 3.44 15.61 1.00 1.07 .15 22.83 48.12 2.39 20.71 .60 1.99 .20 25.99 59.73 2.08 19.00 .29 .89 .27 17.74 50.43 2.71 15.25 .99 1.53 .09 29.00 36.15 7.28 28.22 .71 .57 .71 26.36 51.41 3.44 19.62 .55 1.16 .31 23.52 Serviceberry Mtn. mahogany Snowberry Big sagebrush Gambe1 oak Little rabbitbrush Big rabbitbrush Lance1eaf rabbitbrush Bitterbrush Juniper Pinon pine Winterfat Horsebrush Skunkbush Jointfir or Morman tea Oregon grape Gooseberry (Ribes) Chokecherry Box1ea f myrt 1e Chr~sothmnus depressus 8.91 1. 86 2.27 .74 .42 .08 10.34 3.69 1.01 1.10 1.98 .07 .03 7.95 4.18 2.04 2.10 3.76 .42 .01 6.95 3.08 1.47 1.73 3.50 .96 .17 .09 .27 .14 .12 .64 .04 .24 6,'61 2.05 1.94 4.79 1.12 .85 .13 7.99 4.24 2.99 2.75 3.73 .91 .. 16 .26 1.36 .30 .50 9.41 2.27 1.17 .81 1.62 .22 9.72 5.74 2.54 2.50 2.17 .37 .12 .13 .61 .61 4.17 .005 .09 4.92 1.06 4.00 2.46 .94 .44 .27 .. .. .04 .03 .09. .03 .003 8.09 3.13 2.16 2.11 2.14 .48 .10 .05 .65 .92 3.28 .09 .12 .09 .03 .01 .05 .02 .01 .0004 12.18 2.48 Intercept and Species -.01 2.30 6.24 - .03 .02 -~ -- - -.01 .89 6.09 .001 .01 -.01 -.25 .37 .16 .17 .08 .32 .. 1.14 .83 3.09 .. ...19 .. .05 .17 .01 .. .. .70 -.. -.03 1.54 .22 .17 .. .14 .. .17 ..- - - - - - - - 12.60 .92 15.69 3.56 7.78 2.11 10.68 .12 8.10 4.24 11. 33 2.34 .02 .10 .12 - .02 .03 - -.08 .07 .01 - .63 2.61 8.96 ~ .05 .. .09 .004 .. ~ .. .. 6.87 1.94 19.75 3.51 Percent Of Tot.1 Area Covered By Overstory Pinhon pine Uta juniper 16.78 3.62 .po- Ri- �Table 14.--Summation values from 201 line transects, located in pastures onethrough nine, 1962-63, (Figures are percent of total area~Continued) Pasture 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 .230 .231 .041 .091 .027 .027 .074 .122 .405 .475 .038 .123 .087 .018 .213 .073 ~ - .026 .083 .005 .005 .003 .012 .026 .068 .007 .324 .286 .223 ,DOl .002 .149 .097 .127 ,003 .099 Species GRASSES Beardless wheatgrass Indian ricegrass Litt1eseed ricegrass Squirre1tail Carex spp. Poa spp. Junegrass Western wheatgrass Need1e-and-thread Giant wild-rye FORBS Buckwheat, sulphur fl. Buckwheat, white-flower B1adderpod Wright's sage Fringed sage Low phlox Low daisy Gumweed Pussy toes Snakeweed Cryptantha Hairy rockcress Peppergrass Senecio mu1ti1obatus Bull thistle Globema11ow Low loco. Loco Lupine Tall phlox Ta1l loco Daisy - -.017 .023 .024 .002 .007 ~ ~ .081 .023 .056 .0004 .004 - .019 .035 .016 .013 .005 .036 - - - .013 .023 .003 .036 .008 .002 .016 .072 .106 .010 .060 .025 .144 .004 .036 .008 .319 .078 ~ ~ - .001 .036 .011 = .002 .038 .266 -.015 -.061 -- -.004 -.004 - -.111 .190 .106 .083 -.126 - - .012 .004 - .022 - - .001 .009 .003 .016 -- -.009 .010 .022 .057 .004 .023 .020 .080 .196 .002 .127 .084 .278 .030 .097 .079 .426 .138 .006 .023 .008 .098 .008 .006 .022 - .0004 -- -.007 - .031 .033 .005 .055 .045 .263 .024 .036 - .274 .018 .024 - - .027 -.044 - - -.161 .008 .573 .047 .153 .022 .015 .002 .613 -~ .137 -.003 .029 .034 .062 .075 .001 - -.003 .017 .053 .078 .013 .026 - -. .032 .034 .017 .153 .049 .219 .001 .043 .022 .083 .190 .007 .006 .016 .184 .100 .001 .008 .033 .290 .009 .155 .042 .244 .120 - - -~ ~ - .188 .051 .093 .025 .068 - .003 -.001 .044 .004 .235 - ~ .005 .038 .025 -.004. - .0003 .026 .038 .003 -.019 -.004 - .002 .011 -.003 - - .065 .001 - - Mean Percent .156 .154 .0001 .004 .057 .037 .067 .007 .066 .002 .046 .077 .006 .114 .048 .226 .022 .053 .018 .243 .065 .004 .023 .004 .014 .015 .006 .015 .021 .0003 .0002 .001 +=- <A \..A} �Table l4.--Summation values from 201 line transects, located in pastures one through nine, 1962-63, (Figures are percent of total area). (Continued) Species FORBS (Continued) Spurge Flax Western yarrow Golden smoke Hap10pappus Low penscemon Tall penstemon Workwood Hairy goldenaster White evening primrose Common primrose Beggartick Geranium False dandelion Cactus Sisymbrium Arrowleaf balsamroot Trumpet flower Mertensia Stoneseed Bedstraw Brickellbush Timber vetch Erigeron Fern False yarrow Senecio sp. Tall purple aster Rockjasmine Weed, unidentified Pasture 1 ~ -.004 .133 .007 .004 ~ - -.024 -- 2 -.064 -.003 - .008 .012 - - .004 .004 - .017 .007 - - - .017 .009 -.010 -.001 .001 - -.002 -.0004 ~ 4 - - - 3 -.0004 .035 .011 -.004 -.020 .001 .002 .006 .025 .036 .002 .008 - - -~ - - -.026 .013 - .007 .013 .008 .009 .040 .002 .001 .009 --.•. - - - - 5 ~ -.010 .006 .116 .001 - -.036 -.017 -.008 - - - 6 .001 .001 .006 .006 .045 - ---- - - - 7 - - 8 .005 .001 .205 -.0003 -- -.002 - -.014 -.003 - - - - - .02l - .009 .003 .003 .007 .003 9 -- .002 - .006 - - - -.053 .001 - - .001 -.021 .007 .011 .018 .006 - - All Pastures Mean Percent .0007 .0002 .001 .001 .053 .004 .003 .018 .003 .001 .001 .005 .0002 .0001 .016 .001 .0002 .0007 .003 .008 .003 .003 .001 .002 .002 .001 .0003 .0008 .001 .006 .j::"" 0'\ .j::"" �- 465 Table l5.--Summation values from 19 lines intercept transects in Pasture ten, 1961 (Figures are expressed as percent of total area). Intercept Percent Intercepted Bare ground,rock, litter, and erosion pavement 88.05 Browse 9.45 Grasses 1.60 Forbs .90 Total 100.00 Overstory 5.91 BROWSE 3.53 1.69 1.18 1.12 0.64 0.36 0.08 0.15 0.19 0.05 0.21 0.01 0.54 0.05 Serviceberry Mtn. Mahogany Snowberry Big sagebrush Gambel Oak Little rabbitbrush Big rabbitbrush Bitterbrush Utah juniper Pinyon pine Horsebrush Oregon grape Gooseberry (Ribes) Shadscale Total . . . . . . . . . . . . GRASSES I Beardless wheatgrass Indian ricegrass Squirreltail Carex spp. Poa sp. Junegrass Western wheatgrass Needle-and-thread Giant wildrye Littleseed ricegrass Moptana wheatgrass (Albicans) Smooth brome Cheatgrass Total 9.80 0.79 0.37 0.01 0.02 0.08 0.09 0.01 0.24 0.05 0.01 (trace) 0.02 0.01 (trace) 0.03 . 1.73 �- 466 - Table ls.--Sunnnation values from 19 lines intercept transects in Pasture ten, 1961 (Figures are expressed as percent of total area). (Continued) Intercept Percent Intercepted FORBS Buckwheat, sulphur flower Buckwheat, white flowered Bladderpod Wright's sage Leafy spurge Low phlox Tall phlox Senecio multilobatus Sisymbrium Cryptantha Low daisy Bull thistle Bedstraw Snakeweed Bluebell Pussy toes . Penstemon alatum Wormwood Flax Gumweed Low penstemon Erigeron pulcherimus Blue-eyed mary Tansy mustard Scarlet globe mallow Mallow Total . .10 .02 .01 .02 .01 .37 .01 .01 .001 (trace) .12 .01 .03 .06 .05 .09 .02 .01 .01 .001 (trace) .08 .03 .001 (trace) .001 (trace) .001 (trace) .001 (trace) .001 (trace) 1.067 �Table 16.--Comparison of pasture intercept according to Canfield's line intercept method. 1957; repeated in 1962-63, (Figures are percent of total area). Original work done in 1 2 3 4 5 6 - 7 8 9 Mean Percent Number of transects 1957 1963 13 26 26 25 30 30 25 25 17 16 13 13 12 12 35 35 21 19 192 201 Bare ground, erosion pavement and bare rock. 1957 1963 Difference* 48.48 62.56 +29.04 49.27 60.67 +23.14 40.18 45.33 +12.82 51.14 56.78 +11. 03 48.31 59.34 +22.83 35.99 50.50 +40.32 48.74 61.81 +26.82 46.58 53.14 +14.08 34.07 43.43 +27.47 44.75 54.84 +22.55 33.32 13.21 -60.35 26.45 12.69 -52.02 36.44 31.31 -14.08 25.78 20.55 -20.29 28.03 15.61 -44.31 38.14 20.71 -45.70 31.90 19.00 -40.44 26.32 15.26 -42.02 41. 75 28.22 -32.41 32.01 19.62 -38.71 Pasture Litter 1957 1963 Difference Grass, forbs and moss 1957 1963 Difference +:- 0'. -.:J 3.98 1.35 -66.08 1.36 1.18 -13.24 1.32 1.51 +14.39 1.65 3.05 +84.85 1.15 2.23 +93.91 .98 2.80 +185.71 .60 1.45 +141. 67 .97 2.60 +168.04 1.05 1.99 +89.52 1.45 2.02 +39.31 1957 1963 Difference 14.22 22.88 +60.90 22.92 25.46 +11.08 22.06 21.85 -00.95 21.50 19.62 -8.74 22.51 22.82 +1.38 24.89 25.99 +4.42 18.76 17.74 -5.44 26.14 29.00 +10.94 23.12 26.36 +14.01 21. 79 23.52 +7.94 Overstory of pine and juniper 1957 1963 Difference 16.99 20.40 +20.07 9.59 13.52 +40.98 12.48 19.25 +54.25 7.44 9.90 +33.06 8.51 10.81 +27.03 9.44 12.34 +30.72 11.61 13.67 +17.74 7.19 8.81 +22.53 16.65 23.26 +39.70 11.10 14.66 +32.07 Browse * Difference is expressed as percent of the original (1957) figure. ie: 48.48 14.08 f 48.48 = +29.04 62.56 14.08 �- 468 - Grass, forbs, and moss were combined 'and showed an average increase of 39 percent by combining the nine pastures. These plants increased in all pastures, except Pastures One and Two, the heavy-use pastures for sheep and cattle. The difference in browse plants increased slightly (8 percent) when all pastures were averaged. A slight decrease occurred in Pastures Three (moderate cattle), Four (heavy deer), and Seven (light deer). All other pastures showed an increase, particularly Pasture One (heavy sheep use). The overstory of pinyon pine (Pinus edulis) and Utah juniper (Juniperus utahensis) increased in all pastures and averaged 32 percent. The reason for this is not known. Browse plants were classified as to age group on the 19 plot transects (2 x 50 ft.) established in control Pasture TEm in 1961. Seedlings were further classified according to origin and to grouping. The degree of hedging was not recorded. These data were summarized and are presented in Table 17. They will be compared with similar data obtained from re-reading these transects in 1966. Table l7.--Age classes of browse plants found on 19 plot transects (2 x 50 ft.) in Pasture ten 1961. Species Seed AGE GROUP Young Mature Decadent ORIGIN Total Seed. Sprout Serviceberry Mtn. mahogany Bitterbrush Snowberry Big sagebrush Oregon grape Oakbrush Little rabbitbrush Big rabbit brush Horsebrush Ribes Pinyon pine 6 1 23 3 4 1 1 6 - 10 3 2 66 23 2 25 6 5 1 2 6 2 23 10 1 9 13 8 3 10 1 7 1 5* 14 9 1 2 4 3 4 1 1 21 11 18 19 1 9 4 6 I 3 1 GROUPING Cluster Sf.ng Le 4 2 1 1 4 1 1 6 1 6 13 Total. .25 57 91 39 212 6 13 17 Percent . . .11.8 26.9 42.9 18.4 100% *These five pine were noted as "overstory" but were within the plots. 2 �- 469 - Table 18.--Rumen contents of 10 mule deer dying in winter (Jan.-Mar.) compared to those of 13 tnUle deer dying in spring (Apr.-June) 1963-65~ Little Hil1s~'3stures. Average Percent Content By Volume Winter!! Sprin~/ Big sagebrush 38.4 11.6 Serviceberry 15.1 14.8 Snow berry 3.6 16.9 Pinyon pine 7.2 5.4 Mountain mahogany 1.7 8.6 Utah juniper 5.1 1.9 Gambel oak 1.5 3.1 Oregon grape 1.3 2.5 Little rabbitbrush 2.0 1.7 Big rabbitbrush 2.7 0.0 Bitterbrush 1.5 0.0 Myrtle 0.5 0.5 Horsebrush 0.0 0.2 Unidentified browse 3.0 0.2 Total browse 83.6 67.4 Total grass 7.7 21.0 Sulphur-flowered buckwheat 5.2 5.0 Low phlox 1.2 1.4 Peppergrass 0.5 1.4 Misc. and Unid. forbs 1.8 3.8 Total forbs 1/ 11 8.7 Principally deaths due to malnutrition. Principally deaths by gunshot. 11.6 �- 470 The age-class composition of browse species is as follows: 11.8 percen~ are seedlings, 26.9 percent are young plants, 42.9 percent are mature, and 18.4 percent are decadent in Pasture Ten. Table 17 also shows that twice as many seedlings originate as sprouts than as seeds, and that nearly all seedlings are found singly. Mature pines were listed separately as "overstory" in Pasture Ten, but this differentiation was not made in the experimental pastures during the 1962-63 readings. Deer Stomach Analysis.--At odd times during the past three years, rumen content from pasture deer have been collected and analyzed by standard procedures. Twenty-three of these could be grouped at this time into two categories: those dying from malnutrition and those which had to be shot to remove them from the pastures in the spring. Most of the malnutrition cases came from Pasture Four, while the spring samples came from Pastures Three, Four, and Six. The high browse percentages shown in Table 18 are normal, of course, for winter. The high position of big sagebrush is noteworthy. Other more palatable browses are not available because of the many years of over use. Pinon pine and Utah juniper made up 12 percent of the winter rumen content. I The fact that 67.4 percent of the diet of the deer collected in spring was still browse is significant. A large portion of this occurred as newly ~ developing leaves, especially leaves of snowberry, big sage, serviceberry, and mahogany. Deer took three times as much grass in spring as in winter (21.0 percent and 7.7 percent). This was largely green, but not all. The increase in spring weeds eaten is not as great as usual. Line Transect Data Report Prepared by Donald G. Smith Assistant Wildlife Researcher William T. McKean Associate Wildlife Researcher Date: July, 1965 Approved by Harold R. Shepherd Project Leader Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief �July, 1965 - 471 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT INVESTIGATIONS State of COLORADO Project No. W-lOl-R-7 Work Plan No. 2 PROJECT Game Range Investigations Job No. Title of Job: Rodent Effects on Deer Winter Range Period Covered: April 1, 1964 to April 1, 1965. Personnel: 3 Harold R. Shepherd ABSTRACT Field work has been completed on a study made in southwestern Colorado by the Colorado Department of Game, Fish and Parks to learn how rodents affect deer winter range in a pinon-juniper type. This ninth Job Completion Report on the study presents the data collected in 1964, some data comparisons from previous years, and makes general observations of results. Two 3-acre plots have been established: one a rodent exclosure, the other a control with a dummy fence. Deer have free access to both. The original rodent population in the Exclosure was virtually eliminated by trapping. The few which since have gotten in have been removed by trapping and poisoning. Statistical analyses of all transect data are b~ing made by the Colorado state University Statistical Laboratory. Until these are completed and a final report on the study has been prepa.red, no firm statement of study results can be made. However, a casual examination of the data indicates that elimination of rodents from the Exclosure has had no marked effect on the vegetation. A rodent census taken yearly has demonstrated extreme population largest observed population having been 12 times the smallest. A food habits investigation is a part of the study. presented in a final report. fluctuations, the Results of this phase will be ��- 473 - RODENT EFFECTS ON DEER WINTER RANGE Harold R. Shepherd INTRODUCTION Many winter deer ranges in Colorado are deteriorating. They are often marked by the die-off of woody shrubs and by a scarcity of seedling shrubs. Game biologists have become accustomed to blaming this condition on over-use by big game and .Hve stock" However, there is reason to suspect rodents may be partially responsible, for rodent damaged browse plants have been found in some areas. It is suspected that in some areas rodents may be largely responsible for the scarcity of bitterbrush and mountain mahogany seedlings. In any sound program of game-range management all of the factors contributing to range use and deterioration should be taken into consideration, including the effects of rodents. I A study was needed to learn how rodents affect deer winter range. Such a study was begun in August of 1956 in Mesa Verde National Park. Field work was terminated in September of 1964~ This is the ninth Job Completion Report on the Study. It reports the progress made during the period April l~ 1964 to April 1, 1965 toward accomplishment of the long-term objectives of the study. Previous reports were published in Quarterly I Progress Reports of the Federal Aid Division of the Colorado Department of Game, Fish ~d Parks fot the years 1957 through 1964 0 OBJECTIVES The long-term, over-all objective is to study how rodents affect the composition, ground cover, and reproduction of vegetation in a pinon-juniper type deer range, with particular emphasis on browse plants. The ob~ectives for the period covered by thi.sreport areas follows: 10 Collect plant composition and density data from established line transects. 20 Make photographic records from permanent photo stations. 30 Collect deer pellet~group data from established pellet-group plots. 4. Continue rodent control inside rodent exclosureo 5" Take a rodent census .• �- 474 - 60 Complete laboratory work on food-habits portion of the study. 7$ Compile and statistically analyze all transect data. 80 Prepare a final report on the study for publication. PROCEDURE Line Transects.--Plant composition and density data were collected from 70 permanent line transects, using the Parker-Savage method described in the July, 1958 report. Photographic Records.--Co1or and black and white photographs were taken of vegetation within the Exc10sure and Control from permanent photo stations. Pellet-group Data.--Deer pellet-group data were collected from 70 permanent 1/100 acre plots, as in previous years. I I Rodent Contro1.--To capture any rodents which may have gotten into the Exc[osure during the winter, snap traps were set, spaced about 15 feet apart, over the entire 3-acre area. They were baited with a mixture of equal parts of suet, rais~ns, oatmeal, peanut butter, and paraffin. Trapping was begun April 21 and disbontinued June 3, 1964. Rodent Census.--As in previous years, a rodent census was taken within the1permanent census area in the manner described in the 1959 reporto The standard procedures of the Advisory Committee of the North American Census of Small Mammals were followed. I Food Habits Investigation.--Stomachs from rodents taken in the rodent census were preserved in F.A.A. solution for later use in the food habits portion of the study. Compilation and Analysis of Transect Data.--Transect data for 1964 were co~piled. In addition, an analysis of all data from prior years was begun by Mr. Dav~ Bowden, Statistician with the Colorado State University Statistics Laboratory. I Final Report Preparation.--A final report for publication was begun with the compilation and analysis of all transect data. RESULTS, DISCUSSION, AND CONCLUSIONS Line Transects.--An analysis of variance made of line transect data for the first 3 years of study showed that rodent control had not significantly affected' the amount of total browse, grass, and forb intercept during that period. Complete data analyses are in progress and will be reported on in detail in a final'report. �- 475 - An examination of data for all years of the study (Table 3) shows no variation in density, composition, or number of plants suspected of being caused by rodent activity or the lack of it. The fluctuations which do occur, usually small, do not fall into any clear pattern; they are suspected of being the results of fluctuating precipitation and vagaries of sampling~ The extreme fluctuation in annuals from year to year is one striking difference that has occurred. Annuals in the Exclosure have varied from none in 1959 to an average of over 4 per transect in 1960. These differences are no doubt due to fluctuations in yearly precipitation, the fewest numbers of annuals occurring in years of little precipitation: 1959, 1962 and 1964, (Tables 1, 2, 3 and 4). Visible Effects of Rodent Control.--Photographs do not reveal effects of rodent control. Deer-use of Control and Exclosure.--During the year 1963-64, pellet-group counts indicated 21.1 deer-days use per acre in the Exclosure and 29.2 deer-days use per acre in the Control. However, these differences are not statistically significantly different, and use in the 2 areas may actually be the same (Table 7). In only one year, 1960-61, could use be shown to be different between the 2 plots. Rodent Contro1.--The Exclosure was kept saturated with traps from Apri.l 21 to June 3c However, only 3 mice were caught--2 Peromyscus truei and 1 Peromyscus maniculatus. These, apparently, were the only ones to get in over the winter. Rodent Censuso--In 1964 the census was taken September 2, 3 and 4. Only 23 mice were taken in the traps. Eight of these were Peromyscus maniculatus and 15 were Peromyscus truei (Tables 5 and 6). The population for 1964 was next to the lowest for any year of the study& The totals for the 6 years are as follows: 83 in 1958,112 in 1959, 228 in 1960, 50 in 1961, 19 in 1962, and 23 in 1964. The largest observed population in 1960 was 12 times the smallest observed population in 1962. Sex-age data and breeding condition of rodents caught are shown in tables 5 and 6. Food Habits Investigation@--Results of this phase of the study will be reported in the final report at a later date. Botfly Larvae.--In contrast to previous years, no mice were found parasitized with botfly larvae. No reason for this is known. �table l.--Line Transect Data for Rodent Exclosure, 1964. Spe~ie_s_atldN?asureme_n!=_s____ _ Amelanchier alnifolia (serviceberry) Artemisia tridentata (big sagebrush) Chrysothamnus depressus (rabbitbrush) Chrysothamnus nauseosus (rabbitbrush) Cercocarpus montanus (mountain mahogany) Purshia tridentata (antelope bitterbrush) Symphoricarpos spp. (snowberry) Tetradymia canescens (gray horsebrush) Total Browse _ Agropyron smithii (western wheatgrass) Carex spp. (sedge) Koeleria cristata (june grass) Poa longiligula (longtongue mutton grass) Poa pratensis (Kentucky bluegrass) Stipa comata (needle-and~thread-grass) Sitanion hystrix (squirrel tail grass) Total Grass and Sedge Artemisia gnapha10des Aster rubrotinctus Astragalus scopulorum Antennaria spp. Ba1samorhiza sagittata Chrysopis vi1losa Cirsium plattense Comandra umbe1lata Erigeron divergens cinereus Erigeron divergense divergens Erigeron phi1ade1phicus Erigeron spp. Er~geron-speciosus--Eriogonum suba1pinum Summary of 35 Transects. Total Intercept (cm) 742 1886 1161 Percent Density (cover) 2.12 5.39 3.32 Percent Composition 23 2919 Mean Number Plants 8.46 21.51 13.24 Total Number Plants 12 82 77 .07 8.34 .26 33.29 2 102 .06 2.91 17 6748 .05 19.29 .19 76.95 1 276 .03 7.89 6 .02 .06 5 .14 325 1232 .93 3.52 3.70 14.05 206 375 5.89 10.71 27 68 1658 .08 .19 4.74 .30 .77 18.88 23 617 .23 .66 17.63 1 .002 .01 1 .03 15 17 11 1 .04 .05 .03 .002 .01 .04 .02 .17 .19 .12 .01 .02 .14 .09 3 8 2 .09 .23 .06 .03 .06 .14 .20 __ ._nl __ _._05 .17 2 13 8 - 8 .34 2.34 2.20 5 15 _ .04 1 2 5 7 _ _ 5__ 13 _.14 .37 +:~ �Table l.--Line Transect Data for Rodent Exclosure, 1964. Species and Measurements Summary of 35 Transects. (continued) Total Intercept (em) Eriogonum umbellatum Heleanthus nuttalii Lupinus aduncus Lithospermum angustifo1ium Linum lewisii Lactuca spp. Lomatium simplex }1alvastrum coccineum Opuntia spp. Penstemon comarrhenus Penstemon caespitosus Phace1ia heterophyla Solidago petradoria Senecio spp. Tragopogon spp , Unknown Forb Total Forbs (perrennia1s) Cordy1anthus wrightii Lappu1a spp , Orthocarpus purpureo albus Polygonum sawatchense Total Annuals Percent Percent Total Density Composition - Number (cover) Plants Mean Number Plants 36 .10 .41 11 .31 4 .01 .04 2 .06 2 107 .01 .31 .01 .35 2 121 .02 1 .03 1.22 38 L08 .02 1.38 1 22 .03 .63 .j::"" :j 1.03 4.06 122 3.49 1 .002 .002 .01 .01 1 1 .03 .03 8767 25.06 100.00 1016 29 02 5108 4186 9294 14.59 11.96 26.55 54.96 45.03 100.00 46 32 78 1.31 .91 2.22 360 1 Total Vegetation (Except Trees) Pinus edulis (pinion pine) Juniperus utahensis (Utah juniper) Total Trees - 0 �Table 2.--Line Transect Data for Rodent Control, 1964. Species and Measurements Amelanchier a1nifolia (serviceberry) Artemisia tridentata (big sagebrush) Chrysothamnus depressus (rabbitbrush) Cercocarpus montanus (mountain mahogany) Purshia tridentata (antelope bitterbrush) Symphoricarpos spp. (snowberry) Tetradymia canescens Total Browse Agropyron smithii (western wheatgrass) Carex spp. (sedge) Koe1eria cristata (junegrass) Poa longi1igu1a (longtongue muttongrass) Poa pratensis (Kentucky bluegrass) Stipa comata (need1e-and-thread grass) Sitanion hystrix (squirrel tail grass) Total Grass and Sedge Artemisia gnapha10des Aster rubrotinctus Astragalus scopulorum Antennaria spp. Ba1samorhiza sagittata Calochortus gunnisonii Cirsium plattense Comandra umbel1ata Erigeron divergens cincereus Erigeron divergens divergens Erigeron philadelphicus Erigeron philade1phicus - Erige~on speciosus spec~osus Summary of 35 Transects. Total Intercept _~~mJ_ 1528 1889 1367 107 3027 85 Percent Density (cover) 4.37 5.40 3.91 .31 8.65 .24 Percent Composition 8003 22.88 14 335 1600 Total Number Plants 32 71 79 1 Mean Number Plants .91 2.03 2.26 .06 3.00 .03 75.10 290 8.29 .04 .13 12 .34 .96 4.57 . 3.14 16.02 215 531 6.14 15.17 14.34 17.73 12.83 1.00 28.41 .79 2 105 +:- -..J 9 171 2129 9 22 7 1 1 4 107 1 .03 .49 6.09 .08 1.60 20.97 .03 .06 .02 .08 .20 .06 .01 .31 .03 1.00 2 70 830 .06 2.00 23.71 102 .06 .09 .14 .03 .03 .11 2.91 1 .03 2 3 5 1 1 4 ------.. CP �Table 2a~~Line Transect Data for Rodent Control, 19640 Species and MeuCl~Ur§\ments Summary of 35 Transects. (continued) Total Intercept (cm) Eriogonum subalpinum Eriogonum umbe1latum He1eanthus nutta1ii Lupinus aduncus Lithospermum angustifo1ium Linum lewisii Lactuca spp. Lomatium simplex Malvastrum coccineum Opuntia spp , Penstemon comarrhenus Penstemon caespitosus Phacelia heterophyla Solidago petradoria Senecio spp. Tragopogon spp. Unknown forb Total Forbs (perennials) Percent Density (cover) Percent Composition .02 .01 .06 .03 3 7 .01 .02 .02 .06 4 .03 .03 .11 69 .20 .64 32 .9l 274 .78 2.57 54 1.54 2 .01 1.48 .01 4.76 1 519 221 .03 6.31 10651 30.43 100.00 1341 38.31 5993 17012 12.89 30.01 57.05 42.94 100.00 56 46 102 1.60 1.31 2.91 7 4 Total Number Plants 6 3 1 1 1 Mean Number Plants .17 .09 Total Vegetation (except trees) Pinus edulis (pinion pine) Juniperus utahensis (Utah juniper) Total Trees 4510 10503 ~ \i �Table 3.--Summaries of Transect Data Compared with Respect to Treatment and Years. Year 1964 Per Cent Density Exclosure DU. Control Browse Grass & Sedge Forbs Annuals Total Veg. Total Trees Year 1962 Browse Grass & Sedge Forbs Annuals Total Veg. Total Trees 19.29 4.74 1.03 .002 25.06 26.55 22.88 6.09 1.48 ----- 30.43 30.01 -3.59 -1.35 - .45 + .002 -5.37 -3.46 Hean Number Plants Exc10sure Control Per Cent Composition Exc10sure DU. Control 75.10 20.97 4.76 ----- 100.00 100.00 +1.85 -2.09 - .70 + .01 •.---- 38.31 . 2.91 - .27 - .56 + .10 + .08 7.86 16.71 3.63 ----- 28.29 28.26 -2.68 20.10 3.79 - .68 .94 - .10 .002 + .002 -3.43 24.86 . 27.85 - .41 100.00 100.00 80.25 15.24 3.78 .08 100.00 100.00 Year 1961 Browse Grass & Sedge Forbs Annuals Total Veg. Total Trees 26.10 2.99 1.17 .11 30.37 27.18 21.17 3.18 1.37 .31 26.02 26.87 -4.93 + .19 + .20 + .20 -4.34 - .31 85.94 9.84 3.87 .36 100.00 100.00 81.34 12.22 5.25 1.19 100.00 100.00 -4.60 +2.38 +1.38 + .83 Year 1960 Browse Grass & Sedge Forbs Annuals Total Veg. Total Trees 24.08 4.52 2.10 .39 31.05 28.47 21.56 2.90 1.70 .44 26.60 26.30 -2.52 ~1.62 + .40 + .05 -4.45 -2.17 77 .55 14.56 6.75 1.24 100.00 100.00 81.28 11.00 6.23 1.64 100.00 100.00 +3.73 -3.56 - .52 + .40 22.78 4.47 1.04 ----- -- - ----- 80.52 15.80 3.68 ----- - -- 8.29 23.71 6.31 76.95 18.88 4.06 .01 100.00 100.00 -- --------- ----- ----- 28.20 2.77 Dif. 7.89 17.63 3.49 .03 29.02 2.22 - .40 -6.08 -2.82 + .03 -9.29 - .69 8.14 13.86 3.00 .03 25.03 2.23 + .28 -2.85 + .63 + .03 -3.17 - .54 7.57 13.06 2.23 1.14 24.97 2.43 7.86 13.43 3.00 3.20 27.49 2.30 + .29 + .37 + .77 +2.06 +2.52 - .13 ----- 8.06 15.83 5.43 3.91 33.23 2.83 8.43 13.14 4.00 4.37 29.94 2.34 + .37 -2.69 -1.43 + .46 -3.29 - .49 -- ----- ---------- ----- ----- .j::"" g> �able 3.--Summaries - - -- - Year 1959 Browse Grass & Sedge Forbs Annuals Total Veg. Total Trees Year 1958 Browse Grass & Sedge Forbs Annuals Total Veg. Total Trees - - - of Transect Data Compared with Respect to Treatment and Years. (continued) - -- -- - -- - -- Per Cent Density Exclosure Dif. Control -- - -- - - -- - Per Cent Composition Exclosure Dif. Control 20.44 5.40 1.28 17.96 3.15 1.04 -2.48 .-2.25 - .24 75.36 19.93 4.71 81.04 14.23 4.70 27.15 26.86 22.16 21.53 -4.99 -5.33 100.00 100.00 100.00 100.00 24.40 5.21 2.13 .12 31.86 26.77 20.89 4.22 2.11 .16 28.25 20.62 -3.51 ~ .99 - .02 + .04 -3.61 -6.15 76.40 16.46 6.72 .37 100.00 100.00 73.90 14.92 7.44 .56 100.00 100.00 ------ --- -- - - - - -- - ----- Mean Number Plants Control Exc10sure Dif. +5e68 -5.70 - .01 7.49 17.63 4.34 7.91 13.31 3.20 + .42 -4.32 -1.14 00 29.46 2.49 24.40 2.12 -5.06 - .37 8.48 20.77 7.60 1.17 38.02 2.08 8.26 18.39 5.72 1.65 33e 94 1.82 - .22 -2.38 -1.88 + .48 -4.08 - .26 ____ -----2.5 -1.5 + .72 + .19 --------- .j::"" 0::> I-' Year 1957 Browse Grass & Sedge Forbs Annuals Total Veg. Total Trees 25.65 3.54 2.43 .05 31.86 22.13 21.19 6.14 2.83 .11 30.26 21.05 -4.46 +2.60 + .40 + .06 -1.60 -1.08 80.52 11.12 7.60 .16 100.00 100.00 70.02 20.33 9.33 .37 100.00 100.00 -10.5 +9.21 +1.73 + .21 ----- ----- 9.08 18.69 6.94 .51 35.40 2.02 8.31 16.14 6.23 1.17 31.86 1.85 - .77 -2.55 - .71 + .66 -3.54 - .17 �- 482 - Table 4.--September-August Precipitation for Mesa Verde National Park. 19561957 19571958 19581959 19591960 19601961 19611962 19621963 19p319p4 September .98 .00 .98 1.06 .60 1.72 2.07 1.120 October 1.25 3.43 1.19 2.56 2.62 2.62 2.65 1.78 November .83 2.09 .73 1.01 .82 2.03 1.69 .71 December 1.59 1.06 .04 3.02 2.97 1.22 1.31 .,62 January 2.57 1.25 .42 2.09 .98 .71 1.69 .185 February 1.18 1098 1.85 2.67 .93 2.33 1.38 .170 March 1.10 2.60 .16 1.01 3.81 1.33 .83 3.106 April 1.47 1.08 2.05 1.42 .72 .45 .68 2.I 56 May 1.24 .40 T .62 .29 1.07 .11 1.70 June .79 .26 1.61 .49 .10 .16 .07 ~03 July 2.34 1.04 .39 .76 .55 .37 2.06 1j58 August 2.08 1.39 2.93 .15 2.75 .21 4.36 TOTALS 17.41 16.58 13.35 16.86 17.14 14.22 19.90 2.13 I 16~92 I 1 I I �- 483 Table 5.--Rodent Census Data, 1964. I Date traps first set: September 1 Time of day traps first set: 8:00 a.m.-3:00 p.m. Time of day traps were visited on the following 3 days: First day: 8:30 a.m.-1:00 p.m. Second day: 8:30 a.m.-1:00 p.m. Third day: 7:30 a.m.-12:00p.m. Weather: From time of setting to first visit: Partly cloudy, 82 to 54 degrees F. From first to second visit: Clear, 81 to 53 degrees F. From second to third visit: Clear, 85 to 51 degrees F. Type of trap: Snap trap (Museum Special) Type of bait: Oatmeal, peanut butter, raisens, suet. Species taken: Peromyscus maniculatus and Peromyscus truei September 2 Hind Weight Total Tail Ear Foot Remarks {Length in mm.2 Sex {~2 22 Adult, Test. scrotal 179 25 23.8 85 M 22 Adult, not Lact., not Preg. 172 82 25 26.5 F 22 Adult, not Lact., not Preg. 24 24.2 178 75 F 17 19 Adult, Test. scrotal 61 19.4 143 M 18 20 Adult, not Lact., not Preg. 170 78 23.2 F 21 Adult, Test. abdominal 172 78 21.0 M 18 19 Adult, Test. scrotal 66 156 20.7 M 22 Adult, Test. scrotal 81 22 20.0 169 M 21 Adult, not Lac t , , not Preg. 24 156 78 20.9 F 21 Adult, not Lac t , , not Preg. 25 166 75 21.3 F 17 18 Adult, Test. scrotal 145 66 18.3 M Adult, not Lact., not Preg. 22 25 185 82 29.9 F Sub-adult, not Lact., not Preg. 18 15 l38 55 14.4 F Adult, Test. scrotal 21 26 85 21.6 M Sub-adult, Test. scrotal 19 16 128 45 14.5 M not Adult Lac t , z not Preg. 26 22 90 186 21.5 F z First Day: Capture Species Location P.t. 1-5 P.t. 11-2 P.t. IV-7 IV-12 P.m. IV-16 P.m. P. t , IV-19 V-15 P.m. P.to VI-3 VI-3 P.t. VI-3 P.t. VI-4 P.m. VI-16 P. t , ' VII-2 P.m. VII-5 P.t. VII-8 P.m. P. t , VIII-ll Second Day: Capture Species Location III-19 P. t , P. t , VI-ll VI-17 P.m. VIII-14 P.t. I September 3 Hind Foot Tail Ear Weight Total Remarks {Length in mm. 2 Sex {gm) 22 Adult, Test. abdominal 26 166 82 20.4 M 22 Adult, Testo abdominal 23 85 180 23.0 M 20 Adult, Test. abdominal 18 65 142 13.7 M 21.3 23 Adult, Test. abdominal 90 26 180 M Third Day: Capture Sgecies Location IV-1 P.t. V-15 P.t. VIII-18 P.m. September 4 Hind Tail Ear Foot Weight Total Remarks ~Length in mm.2 Sex ~8!!!2 Test. abdominal Adult, 23 71 25 186 18.3 M Lact., Preg.IR,lL Adult, not 23 25 84 176 25.3 F Test. abdominal sub-adult, 17 17 143 55 16.6 M �- 484 Table 6.--Sex-Age Composition of Rodent Catch by Species and Day, 1964 ICensus First day Second day Third day Total Adult 3 1 0 4 Adult First day 4 Second day 3 Third day 1 Total 8 Sub-adult 1 0 1 2 Peromyscus manicu1atus Juvenile Total Adult Sub-adult 0 1 4 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 6 1 1 Sub-adult 0 0 0 0 Peromyscus truei Juvenile Total Adult 0 4 6 0 0 3 0 1 1 0 8 7 Sub-adult 0 0 0 0 Juvenile 0 Total 2 0 0 0 0 0 2 .Juven I Ie 0 0 0 0 I Total 6 0 1 7 Table 7.--Deer-use in Rodent Exclosure and Control as Indicated by Pellet-Group Counts, 1964. Exclosure IControl 96 2.74 2.87 133 3.80 2.90 .485 1.76 to 3.73 21.1 .490 2.80lto 4.80 , 29.2 Total pellet groups Mean pellet groups per plot ~ -Confidence limits x Deer-days use per acre Prepared by: Harold R. Shepherd Approved by: Associate Wildlife Researcher Wayne W. Sand fo'rt : Game Research Chi~f I I Date: �- 485 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEA..RCHPROJECT SIDMENT State of COLORADO --------~~~~------------- Project No. W-10l-R-7 Work Plan No. 3 Game Range Investigations Job No ..__ ~3~ Title of Job: Browse Transect Analysis and Application Period Covered: April 1, 1964 to March 31, 1965. Personnel: .•.•.....•.... Gary L. Brown, Student Assistant, and Bertram D. Baker, Assistant Wildlife Researcher. Cooperating: Errol Ryland, Southwest Regional Game Biologist; U. S. Forest Service ABSTRACT Most accomplishments for this segment concerned map finishing and data summarizationt Two-inch scale Gunnison National Forest quarter quad vegetative type maps that were prepared for final reproduction included 24 N.E., 25 N.E. and S.W., 26 N.W., 36 S.E., and N.W., and 37 N.E. Field data write-ups were checked prior to and after copying by typists, an(i the forms reproduction involved Units 71, 74, 75, 77, 78 and 82. Surveys data, in part, wer-e tabulated by and for Units 41, 54, 55, 61, 62, 65, 67, 68, 71, and 74 through 82 inclusive. All units involve the four National Forests of San Juan, Gunnison, Grand Mesa-Uncompahgre, and Rio Grande along with the Department in cooperative big game range analysis efforts. Browse condition transect summary tables were completed followdi1g and with foregoing tabulations for Units 53, 54, 55, 67, 71, 74, and 75. Sample tables of both a browse condition transect summary and a deer kill sunnnary are given in the text. Units for which deer (and elk) kill data summarization had been accomplished are 41, 42, 61, 62, 65, 66 and 70. About 16,000 acres of winter range on the western slope of the Sangre de Christo Mounta:i,nsin Unit 82 were type mapped and analyzed. The main effort miS by a full-time crew from the Rio Grande National Forest staff for the summer plus incidental help from Gary Brown ~Ld me. Contributed by us, howeve~ were 14 non-transected type write-ups and seven browse condition transects coincidental with air photo mapping at several locations. Training sessions that were attended and participated in are listed. The field and field-classroom type meetings involved Department as well as BLM and Forest Service personnel who are listed, in part. ��- 487 - BROWSE TRANSECT ANALYSIS AND APPLICATION Bertram D. Baker Data summarization and mapwork characterized the segment's activities, in this, the fourth year of cooperative big game range analysis with four southwestern Colorado National Forests. Summarization and map drafting concerned transforming field data from previous years' surveys into what will be useab1e information for both Regional Management and central Research personnel. Minor time spent on field work consisted mainly of assisting a Rio Grande National Forest crew in evaluating winter ranges along. the western slope of the Sangre de Christo 'Range and with training sessions at various places in both southwestern and northwestern Colorado. I Objectives: 1. To instruct Department field employeesCWi1d1ife Conservation Officers and l Aides , and Regional Land Managers and Game Biologists) in the proper and unifo1rm use of available range analysis methods and techniques. 2.' Tlodetermine the quantity and quality of big game winter ranges in the area within and adjacent to the Rio Grande, Gunnison, San Juan, and Grand MesaUnc09pahgre National Forests. 3. To assemble, organize, and analyze data and prepare maps for collection into file folders of useab1e information. I . Techniques: Methods and procedures that are provided in the interagency big game range analysis instructions have been detailed by Denney (1962). Ear1YI in 1965 I served upon an interagency committee composed of Range Conservationist Ralph Gierisch (Region 2 - U.S.F.S.) and BLM Wildlife Specialist Carl Lind (Colorado State Office) that handled proposed changes in procedures having mainly to do with extensive browse utilization checks. Because the changes are not of immediate importance as survey techniques backing up material relevant to this report, discussion will be omitted. Findings: Map Preparation Gunnison National Forest: Turnover of personnel on this Forest required that I ca~ry the load in checking accuracy of first drafts of 2-inch quarter quad vegetative type maps. Field survey annotated air photos were used for reference.: Errors on them, in some cases, had to be resolved prior to correcting that ,necessarily followed on the maps. Type acreages were also computed and recorded on the maps. Cons~derab1e assistance was received from Errol Ryland, Regional Biologist at Montrose, and Range Analyst Wendell Turner at Gunnison, as well as from �- 11-88 - casual laborer Gary Brown at Fort Collins. 24 N.E. and 37 N.E. Others of us variously 26 N.W.~ and 36 S.E., S.W., and N.W. Ryland worked on quarter quads spent time upon 25 N.E. and S.'W., The U. S. Forest Service Region 2 engineering section has been responsible for and iH doing map drafting. As of preparation of this report, word had been received that finished maps for only Unit 76 are nearing availabilit~. Progress on this phase continues to hinge with people upon whom there is no direct influence. Data Reproduction, Compilation and Summarization Of considernble substance was the effort in editing transect and non-tranJected type write-ups previous to copying by typists. Similarly with mapwork prdblems ~ basic errorn in computations necessitated complete checking of forms. ThJn, follow-up rnview for typing errors was done to assure accuracy of records, one copy of ench of which was given to the Forests. Forms from surveys in Garite Units 71, 71,~ 75, 77 ~ and 78 (San Juan), and 82 (Rio Grande) were concernJd in this Job. . I Survey datil from forms were recorded, in part, on columnar paper after coJpletion of reprodllction by typists. This tabular compilation involved the aforemJntioned Units above plus 41, 61, 62, and 65 from the Grand Mesa-Uncompahgre NatioJal Forest; 5l~, 5.5, and 67 from the Gunnison; and 68, 76, 79, 80, and 81 from the Rio Grando. Forms had been copied for these units in previous segments. I The next job involved preparation of browse condition transect tables of smmmary such as is presented in Table 1. In addition to data for Unit 55, similaf information was also prepared for Units 53, 54, 67, 71, 74, and 75. Plea~e be reminded that the total of products being prepared is given herein only brief attention due to the great bulk which eventually will be retained in at l~ast one copy in repository at the Game Research Center files. I Bonus tablofl have summarize elk and the year 1952 and of kill data that 66. been made up for inclusion in folders for game units. These deer hunter takes and kinds of seasons. The tables statt in end with 1964. Table 2 illustrates the format of presentation was compiled in this segment for Units 41, 42, 61, 62, 61,5, and I Big Game Range AnalysiS Field Survey I Rio Grande Nf.lt.l.onal Forest: Student assistant Gary Brown and I participated in the field work carried on by this Forest on the western slope of the Sangre de Christo Rango i.nUnit 82. Irregular appearances were made in aid to the crew headed by Wildlife Projects Staff Assistant Bob Pizel. We based our actiritieS at and from Salida. Inc luded in 19()/~ ac comp lishments were approximate ly 16,000 acres of winter ranges that were type mapped. Gary and I personally made 14 non-transected typelwrite-ups �Table l.--(SAMPLE) Summary of 23 Browse Condition Transects, Game Unit 55. Soil SEecies Air Photo Number L M Chvd,Chna EAB-8-97 M L M Chvd,TET EAB-S-97 H M H M Mare,AME EAB-9-l55 4-Artr-Putr M M M L Chvd,Chde EAB-9-l55 Dawson Creek 4-Artr-Putr M M L M Chvd,TET EAB-9-l55 M-12-62 Dawson Creek 6-PP-Artr-Putr M M M M SYM,Chvd EAB-9-l57 M-9-62 Almont Triangle 4-Artr-Putr L M L M Chde,Chvd 022-9-137 B-20-62 Almont Triangle 4-Artr-Putr L M L M Putr,Chvd D2Z-9-137 Browse Ra~ings* _ Com,Eosition Density Vigor Tr-ansect Number -Kay and/orStudy Area Vegetative B-2S-62 Dawson Creek 4-Artr-PP·Putr M M B-29-62 Dawson Creek 4-Artr-Putr M S-26-62 Dawson Creek 4';'Artr-Putr S-25~62 Dawson Creek M-1l-62 - - TYEe -I=" 0:> \0 B-21-62 Almont Triangle 4-Artr-Chvd L M L M CHY,TET 022-9-137 B-22-62 Almont Triangle L L L L Putr,TET D2Z-9-137 Almont Triangle 4-Artr-SIM L M L M Chvd,CHY D2Z-l9-39 M-8-62 M-1O-62 Almont Triangle 4-Artr-Chvd L M L M SYM,Putr 022-19-45 Tomichi Dome 4-Artr-Putr L M L M Chvd,Chde EAB-7-l45 B-27-62 Tomichi Dome 4-Artr-Putr M M L M Chvd,SYM EAB-9-l59 S-24-62 Tomichi Dome 4-Artr-Chvd L M M M SYM,Putr EAB-9-l75 S-22-62 Tomichi Dome 4-Artr-Chvd M L L L AME,SYM EAB-9-177 S-23-62 Tepee Gulch 4-Artr-Chvd L M L L SYM,Putr D2Z-l9-37 B-23-62 * L=Low; M=Medium; H=High 9-J-Artr-Chvd . �Table l.--(SAMPLE) Sununary of 23 Browse Condition Transects,' Game Unit 55--Contipued. Transect Number Key and/or Study Area Vegetative TYEe S-21-62 Fisher Gulch 4-Artr-Chvd L M S-20-62 Leaps Gulch 4-Artr-J L B-26-62 Big Gulch 4-Artr-Chvd-Putr B-24-62 Round Mountain B-2S-62 Ory Gulch Browse Ratings* ComEosition Oensity Vigor Soil SEecies Air Photo Number L M Chde,Putr 022-9-137 M L L Chvd,TET 02Z-9-139 M M M M SYM,ROS OZZ-21-10S 4-Artr-Chvd L M L M AME,Chvd 02Z-9-13L 4-Artr-Chvd-Putr M M H M AME,SYM 022-21-199 .j::"' '8 I �- 491 - I Table 2.--(SAMPLE) Summary of Deer Kill, Seasons and Hunting Pressure, Unit 70. Year Hunting IPressure* 1952 1953 No Data Bucks Does Fawns Total 303 136 30 469 ES 10/15 - 10/31 419 223 51 693 ES ES ESM 10/15 - 10/31** 10/15 - 10/31 11/26 l2/5,In Part 10/15 - 10/31 10/15 - 10/31 11/17 - 11/26,In Part 10/15 11/17 12/1 - 12/31,In Part 10/15 - 11/2 12/6 - 12/21,In Part 10/17 - 11/3 12/5 - 12/3l.In Part 10/17 - 11/6 12/3 - 12/11,In Part 10/21 - 11/8 12/2 - 12/10,In Part Hunt and Season I 1954 1359 579 263 65 907 1955 1421 617 255 35 907 1956 ?066 961 482 70 1513 1957 2595 1633 1194 296 3123 1958 4104 1557 1152 408 3117 1959 3757 1605 1455 571 3631 1960 1988 2073 1506 467 4046 1961 p46 1129 827 369 2325 ES ESM ESM 2DM 2DM 1DM 1DM 1DM 2DM 1DM 2DM 3DA 3D 1962 1958 929 850 320 2099 1DM 10/20 - 11/4 j973 926 870 379 2175 2.708 1437 1028 368 2833 1DM 1DM 1DM 10/19 - 11/7 10/17 - 11/5 12/12 - 12/20,In Part I I 1963 1964 I I I I I Base~ upon combined total resident and non-resident license sales and expressed in npmber of licenses. Dates of season changed to 10/24 - 11/9 because of fire danger but not ** comp:1ete1y enforceable due to lateness of regulation. ES = Eith~r sex, one deer. ESM = Either sex multiple (Unlimited licenses and deer per individual.) 2DM = Two deer multiple, either sex (2 licenses and 4 deer per individual.) lDM = One deer multiple, either sex (2 licenses and 2 deer per individual.) 3DA = Three deer, all antlerless 1st and 2nd licenses and 3rd deer coupon with 2nd Ilicense. 3D = Thre.e deer, one each either sex 1st and 2nd licenses and 3rd deer coupon wit~ 2nd license. * �Table 3.--Summary of 11 browse condition transects, Rio Grande National Forest winter ranges - Summer 1964. Game Unit 68 Saguache 79 La Garita 82 Sand Dunes Vegetative TYEe No. of Transects Type Sl2ecies 4 Sagebrush 5 Mixed Browse 1 Artr,CAR 2 Cemo,QUE,Chgr, Mumo,Bogr Rating 9 Pinon-JuniEer 5 Mixed Browse 1 P,J,Cemo,Fear 6 Cemo,Quga,HOL, SYM,Chvd,Mumo, Bogr 9 Pinon-Juniper 1 P,J,Cemo Low Med. Low Med. High Low Med. Low Med. High Low Med. High ComEosition Density No. No. % % Vigor No. % 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 2 3 1 0 1 0 1 0 2 0 0 1 0 6 0 0 0 1 0 100 0 0 50 50 100 0 33 50 17 0 100 0 0 1 0 2 0 1 0 0 5 1 1 0 0 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 0 83 17 100 0 0 100 0 100 0 0 100 0 100 0 0 0 100 0 Soil No. % 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 4 2 0 0 1 0 100 0 50 50 0 100 0 67 33 0 0 100 Associated SEecies CRY, Bogr CRY,SYM,Artr SYM,RIB PRU ,CRY,RIB SYM,RIB I +=\.0 ro- Table 4.--Summary of results of 8 paced condition transects, Rio Grande National Forest winter ranges - Summer 1964. Game Unit 68 - Sagua. Vegetative Type Number of Transects 1 - Grassl. 1 Grassland 3 1 4 3 79 La Garita Sagebrush 82Sand Dunes Grassland Type Species Forage Density Vegetative and ComEosition Condition RCl.tJngNo._ %_~ _ No. % Mumo,Bogr,etc. V. Poor Fear,SYM,RIB V. Poor FairV. Poor PoorCRY,RIB,Bogr, Poor Agsm FairFair Good R-IB-,-S-I-L,-Bogr Poo.r± Fair 3 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 100 100 0 33 33 34 0 0 0 00 0 3 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 10o__ 100 0 33 33 34 0 0 0 100 0 Soil Stability No. % 3 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 Associated S~ecies 100 hAr:f:!"Koc:LSTI 0 Mumo,Stco 100 0 0 Mumo,Stco,Orhy,Eu1a, 0 Atca 33 33 34 O-Mumo ,Arfr 100 �- 493 - Table 5.--Summary of non-transected type write-ups, Rio Grande National Forest winter ranges - Summer 1964. l Vegetative Type Number of Write-ups 5 - Mixed Browse 6 - Conifer 1 2 9 - Pinon-Juniper 2 10 - Broad-leaf 1 I 6 - Conifer 9 - Pinon-Juniper 6 - Conifer 4 - Sagebrush 1 ! 5 - Mixed Browse 5 6 - Conifer 17 I Game Unit 68 Sagua~he I 79 La Ga~ita 81 - Conejos I 2 1 1 812 Sand Dunes 9 - Pinon-Juniper 27 10 - Broad-leaf 5 Total Note: 65 CHY=Various mixtures of Chrysothamnus. Type Species Assoc. Species Cemo,QUE,Mumo PP,DF,Cemo,Arfr, Mumo CAR P,J,Cemo,CHY, Bogr,Fear A,DF,Aruv DF,LbP,RIB,Fear P,J,RIB,Bogr PP,CHY,Bogr CHY,HOL,Orhy A,Cemo,HOL,RIB, SYM,Chna,QUE, CHY,Mumo,Agsm DF,WF,LbP,A,P, J,BP,RIB,Cemo, HOL,SYM,Juco, Bogr,Feth,Fear, Mumo,POA,ASR, SEN P,J,DF,Chpa,RIB, CHY,Cemo,HOL, Mumo ,OPU ,YUC , Bogr,STI RIB,HOL A,QUE,Artr Juco,QUE,SYM PP,ES Juco,Mumo Cemo,SYM J,P RIB,Rupa A,Artr,Cemo,RIB PRU,YUC,Arfr, OPU P,J,A,LbP,ES, RIB,HOL,SYM, ROS,Juco,Aruv, FRA DF,PP,LbP,WF,A, Chna,Quga,Cemo, CHY,RIB,SYM,TET HOL,Chpa,ORY, Bogr,OPU,YUC POP ,LbP ,HOL,DF, SYM RIB Juco �- 494 - in several different areas. Also, seven browse condition transects wereeptablished and read supplementing six already reported for the unit (Baker 1965). Tables 3, 4 and 5 summarize results of 1964 work. Interagency and Intradepartmental Liaison ill keeping with the objective of turning some analysis jobs over to DepartLent field personnel, attendence and participation were made at four training s~ssions. Retired Forester Ralph Hill presided over a three-day session of southwest! Region, Montrose BLM District, and Grand Mesa-Uncompahgre, Gunnison, and San Juan National Forest personnel on April 20-22, 1964, at and in the field near Montrose. Rio Gr~de Forester Bob Pizel and I held a one-day combination conference and raJ.nlng school at Monte Vist in December 1964. It included Southwest Region Sta~~, San Luis Valley Department, and Rio Grande National Forest Staff and District anger personnel. Then on March 22-23, 1965, I assisted Wildlife Projects Staff ~6sistant Ladd Frary and Southwest Region Biologist Ryland in presentation of extiens'Ive browse utilization check procedures to District Rangers, Department Area SFpervisor Terrell ~ick, WCOs, and aBLM representative. Latter sessions occurred ~ the Department Regional Office in Montrose and in the field west of Olathe on finter range of the Uhcompahgre Plateau and also southwest of Norwood. On Marc~ 31, 1965, similar training was offered by Ladd Frary, Northwest Regional Biologists IBurdick and Jones, and I for the Grand Junction BLM District, White River and Grand MesaUncompahgre National Forests, and Northwest Region Department personnel neiar Kannah Creek east of Whitewater. Additional field contacts were made with Southwest Region, BLM, and Natiotial Forest representatives in doing pre- and post~use browse measurements for Etilization determinations and running extensive browse utilization checks. Thes,e field activities were accomplished in the Ward Gulch, Jacks Creek, Spruce Spring, Hodding Creek, and North Tracy Canyon locales near Saguache on April 29, and 30 and October 1·5,1964. I LITERATURE CITED Baker, B. D. 1965. Game Research Report. July, pp. 201-219. Colo. Game, Fish and Parks Dept., Denney, Richard N. 1962. Federal Aid Quart. Rept., Colo. Game and Fish Dept., April, pp. 52-96. Prepared by: Bertram D. Baker Assistant vlildlife Researcher Date: July 1965 ----------~~~---------------------- Approved by: Harold R. Shep~erd Project Leader I �July, 19b) - 495 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEG.ME.NT State of COLORADO Project No. W-IOI-R-7 Work Plan No. 4 Title of Job: Game Range Investigations Job No. 1 Evaluation of Reseeding and Range Development Techniques Period Covered: .April 1, 1964 to March 31, 1965· Personnel: Don G. Smith and Bertram D. Baker, Assistant Wildlife Researchers. Cooperating: U. S. Forest Service and U. S. Bureau of Land Management. ABSTRACT A form was developed for use in recording pertinent information about habitat manipulation projects already in existence. A total of 17 different projects were reviewed employing the form mostly to tes·t its adequacy. Fifteen of the projects had been done in the San Juan National Forest and two in District 2 of the BLM. ��- 497 - EVALUATION OF RESEEDING AND RANGE DEVELOPMENT TECHNIQUES Bertram D. Baker Objective: To inventory and evaluate range manipulation practices in existence in Col<Drado. Proced~es: Southwest Regional Land Manager Claude White of the Montrose office had ma~e a compilation and report of habitat projects in southwestern Colorado. The data collection form used by him was modified to that represented in the Figure sample. 11 In a manner of testing efficiency of the form for obtaining project information and also to determine what could be expected in relation to time that might be required to sift out other agency files, I worked with San Juan National Forest Wildlife Projects Staff Assistant Chet Anderson at Durango part of a day (June 26, 1964) recording 15 Forest Service projects. The projects were filed chronologically, and I began with the oldest. I Also, Don Smith spent one day at the BLM State Office in Denver checking the form out against two District 2 projects and on other lOl-R business. Findings: Already mentioned have been the 17 projects data transferred to our forms. Those data will be included in inventories and analyses now being conducted full seale by Don Smith. I Approved by: Harold R. Shepherd Project Leader Date July, 1965 �Figure 1.--HABITAT MANIPULATION PROJECT RECORD ~ COLORADO National Forest and District --------------------------------------------~------------------------------------------------------------------Private Land Owner and/or Permittee ----------~----------------------------------- BLM District and Unit Area Designation LOCATION: No. Acres Treated Sec.(s) Range Tp. County Game Mgt. Unit Mer. Drainage Range Cover Type Assoc. SpP. TOPOGRAPHY: Elevation Slope RANGE USE: Species and Abundance of Wildlife Present and Aspect Season(s) of use~ ~ _ Kinds and Numbers of Livestock Present and Season(s) of use ---'------ Other Important Uses (i.e. Recreation, etc.) TREATMENT: Type: ~ _ ~-------------Year----Plow ---Disc--Chain----Burn- Spray(Aerial)--(Ground)-Date: Month . Remarks: _ Species Hanted Removed, _ Reseeded? Yes No Method ~ _ Species Used~ _ RESULTS OF TREATMENT: _ SPECIAL MANAGEMENT PROBLEMS : DATE: _ RECORDER(S) _ �- 499 - FINAL REPOHT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO ----------------------------- Project No. W-10l-R-7 \{ork Pl n No. 4 Game Hange Investigations Job No. 5a Title of Job: Factors Affecting the Response of Rabbitbrush to 2, 4-D Period ~overed: April 1, 1964 through March 31, 1965. Personnel: Donald G. Smith ABSTRACT This report covers the second year of study on rabbitbrush and compares the results with those of the first year. One-half of the rabbitbrush plants sprayed in 1962 were resprayed in 1963. The same ten.environmental, physiological, and phenological factors were measured. Tne four most important factors affecting rabbitbrush susceptibility to 2,4-D were found to be (1) carbohydrate content of lateral roots, (2) rate of carbohydrate translocation, (3) twig length, and (4) soil moisture. All ten measure~ factors accounted for less than 40 percent of the variation, indicating that other factors are also responsible for killi~g rabbitbrush. A 95 percent kill was obtained by spraying for two consecutive years. The kill on rabbitbrush regrowth was much higher than on the original plants (an average of 95% compared to 50%). Young plants were also easier to kill than older plants. The hea~ rate of 2,4-D used in this experiment (31 lb/acre) followed by a light application was slightly more effective than the application of two light treatments (3 lb/acre). However, the added cost of the heailf rate would not compen~ sate for the difference in mortality (95% compared to 92%). This stldy showed that rubber rabbitbrush is most susceptible to 2,4-D during the latter half of July. In 1962, the highest average kill was made on July 17· In 1963, the highest average kill on regrowth was made on July 27· The elevation is 6,240 feet. Highest kills on mature plants were obtained when twig lengths averaged six inches, carbohydrate content of the lateral roots was low but beginning to increase, leaves had matured, Giant wild rye was s@eding, and Kentucky bluegrass and beardless wheatgrass were drying up and losing color. Regrowth �- 500 - of rabbitbrush from the root crowns was slower in developing and became. susceptible later. Best kills were made when regrowth from the crown averaged 14 I inches, untreated rabbitbrush plants were beginning to flower, and shallowrooted grass species were drying out. Recommendations: 1. Rabbitbrush should be controlled wildlife interests. only on areas which do not conflict with 2. Chemical control of rubber rabbitbrush (Chrysothamnus nauseosus) should be done with 2,4-D until a better herbicide is developed. The rate of ~pplication should be 5 or 6 lb/acre, acid equivalent, applied in a mixture of diesel oil and water with a surfactant added. A lighter rate (2 or 3 lb/acre) is sufficient to kill regrowth or young plants. More knowledge about the rate of application is needed. I 3. The most effective time to spray rabbitbrush is late in the growing season when leaves are mature and the annual growth of tw Lgs average six inches. As an indication of the proper time to spray, giant wildrye (Elymus condensatus) should be going to seed, and beardless wheatgrass (Agropyron inerme) ana Kentucky bluegrass (Poa pretensis) are drying out. In northwestern Colorado, this normally occurs about the middle of July at an elevation of 6,240 feet. Time of treatment will be earlier where so i Ls are shallow and the elevation is lower. Carbohydrate content of the lateral roots and soil moisture content are more reliable criteria of plant susceptibility but are difficult to obtain. Regrowth appears to be susceptible to 2,4-D later in the season or when the stems average 14 inches and untreated rabbitbrush plants are beginning to flower. 4. Where a good seed bed is desired, mechanical methods of brush control may be necessary. Controlled burning is the most economical method of trash removal, but the adverse effect on the soil should be considered. More expensive cultural practices include plowing with the root plow, the brushland plow, or bulldozing. Trash may be raked into gullies to check gully erosion. Reinfestation of rabbitbrush can be controlled by periodic treatments with 2,4-D. 5. Trials of early maturing grasses and legumes should be made on the Square S property to develop a spring feed for the White River deer herd. Recomkendations should come from those familiar with recent developments of the Agricultural Research Service such as the Colorado Extension Service and the Soil Conservation Service. 6. Methods of making noxious weeds such as rabbitbrush more palatable 0 wildlife and livestock should be investigated. A review of such studies done by other researchers should be made. ' I 7. The study on the chemical control of rabbitbrush should be temporar~ly discontinued so that time can be devoted to more pressing investigations. Also, numerous researchers in the fields of herbicides and plant physiology are more qualified and better equipped to discover the secrets of an effective cFntrol of undesirable plants than is the author. However, new developments in these fields should be reviewed so that we can better manage our lands for theI benefit of wildlife. �- 501 - INTRODUCTION The Colorado Department of Game, Fish and Parks is interested in the revegetation of certain bottom1ands in northwestern Colorado, particularly in the Piceance Creek Basin. The control of rabbitbrush is necessary before these areas can be successfully converted to vegetation of more value to game. It is anticipated that early maturing grasse$ and legumes will be planted to provide spring food for the White River deer herd. This study was initiated in 1962 to determine which factors are most important in killing rahbitbrush with 2,4-D. The results of the first year of work were published in a thesis at Colorado State University (Smith, 1964b). An effective one-shot application of 2,4-D to kill rabbitbrush was not discovered. This report is divided into two parts. (I) The effect of factors on the susceptibility of rabbitbrush to 2,4-D,and (II) Response of rabbitbrush to different rates of 2,4-D application and to different times of spraying. Part I discusses the success of spraying rabbitbrush regrowth and the effects of e1vironmental, physiological, and phenological factors on rabbitbrush susceptibility to 2,4-D. Part II compares two rates of 2,4-D application, different ~ates of spraying, stages of phenological development, and residual effects of 2,4-D. PART I THE EFFECT OF FACTORS ON THE SUSCEPTIBILITY OF RABBITBRUSH TO 2,4-D I Objedtive: To determine the effect of environmental, physiological, on tHe susceptibility of rabbitbrush to 2,4-D. Techniques and phenological factors Used: Study area.--The study area is located in northwestern Colorado approximately 29 miles southwest of Meeker (Figure 1). Sampling was confined to a small area, 34 acres in size, lying in the bottom of a narrow valley in Section 9, TIS, R98W~ 6th P.M., at an elevation of 6,240 feet. Duck Creek meanders through the area and empties into Yellow Creek, a tributary of the White River, about two miles downstream. Establishment of plots.--A total of 90 plots (30 with 3 replications) were established within the study area in 1962 (Figure 2). The procedures diagrams were reported by Smith, 1964a. Only 48 plots were used in 1963, 24 in block I and 24 in block II. The six plots in block I that were sprayed in May, 1962 were used as control plots, because none of the plots in block II were treated that early. and �- 502 - • Denver N COLORADO 1 SCALE: 1 Inch = 10 MILES 5 Figure 1. area. 0 5 MILES nver Gra~ to Junction 10 Hap of northwestern Colorado showing location of the stUdY! �- - -- =-=-=====~=----lliI SAMPLE PLOT R ~ = .=: =. r--.. = =...:" -,LOGATION ""....STUDY OF-E:J .irz: -----::=-=-~- - - - BLOCK 2 1 UNIMPROVED DIRT ROAD \ -, :::: :: ~8EA C~)O -- •.....•......•...........•..... :'\ lji> •••• I I' t::J FENCE II D INTERMITIENT' STREAM rJ5l II II ~ SPRING BLOCK 4 II BL.OC~<~ ~~g \.J1 / ... . ' ~ o w 1 ~~~ ...J '---' .~~ '---' J- ... uUC'KCREE'/ -ll 0 • BLOCK I f2Ef2§2ffi%900 11~16117h8119 t2Q21t22f231241 l 11!213141516171819 ""._0 iI X WEATHER STATION !1oI11112113!141 )( )( )( x )(11 Figure 2. ;Map of the study area in Rio Blanco County, Colorado, sho~ving location of experimental plots. I I I II II I:: �- 504 - Chemical control.--Rabbitbrush regrowth was sprayed with 2,4-D (2,4-dichlorophenoxyacetic acid) butyl ester at 3 lb/acre which was emulsified in water and applied at the rate of 20 gal/acre. A spreader, Tween 20, Iwas added to provide better penetration by the leaves. Two Hudson hand sprayers were used, with capacities of two and three gallons, both capable of emitting a flat spray pattern of 40 psi. Date of spraying.--Spraying in 1963 was done on three dates: June 25, July 12, and July 27. These dates were chosen because results in 1962 indicated that rabbitbrush susceptibility to 2,4-D was greatest during this period. I Spraying was done between 7 A.M. and 9 A.M. to reduce the possibility of wind drift. A table of random numbers was used to select dates of treatmentl Factors measured.--All factors measured in 1962 were measured agail in 1963. These included air temperature, relative humidity, soil temperat6re, soil moisture at three depths, twig length, and carbohydrate content of lateral roots. Two other factors, relative rate of twig elongation by day and elative rate of carbohydrate translocation by day, were computed from data recotded from twig length and carbohydrate content. Recordings were made immediktely after each spraying. . I The procedures were the same as used the previous year (Smith, 1964a) except for the following minor changes: Soil moisture samples were taken fromlonlY three locations within each plot instead of five, because three samples were sufficient. Lateral roots were collected from plants exhibiting the most reI growth, because plants in poor condition had few live lateral roots. The I chemical analysis of carbohydrate was done by Industrial Laboratory of Denver instead of the Colorado Department of Agriculture, because the latter wks unable to devote the necessary time. Twig length of regrowth was taken ftom the root crown, because the stems measured in 1962 were dead. I Survival counts.--The number of dead plants in each of the 48 plotb were counted in order to determine percent of survival. These counts were m~de between July 16 and 21, 1964, one year following treatment. Each tagge~ plant was considered dead if no green growth was present. 'Carbohydrate analysis.--The procedures for extracting total carbohydrates are found in the book by the Association of Official Agricultural Chemists (1960) in sections 22.003 through 22.038. Paul Ochs, chemist for Industrial Laboratories, was asked to determine the total available carbohydrate (TAC) content of the root samples. ~eing fnf~miliar with the "Weinmann method" used by the Colorado Department of Agr1cult,re 1n 1962, Mr. Ochs referred to Morrison (1956) which defines carbohydrate as plant fiber and nitrogen free extract. Moisture, ash, protein, and fat were Idetermined by chemical analysis, added together, and subtracted from 100 percent ~o give "nitrogen free extract". Plant fiber was also chemically determined and added to NFE' to give "total carbohydrate content". I This test does not mean as much as the test for total available carboh~drates, because TAC is composed of those carbohydrates which are available to ,he plant. �- 505 - Nitrogen free extract not only includes TAC but all starches and sugars, some of wh~ch are unavailable to the plant for use as food. The average value of TAC was a90ut 10 percent while that of total carbohydrates was about 75 percent. Industrial Laboratories would have run a TAC analysis on the residues of the root ~amples, but these were discarded before the discrepancy was discovered. Discu~sions were held with three chemists to determine if TAC could be determined from ~he 1963 analysis figures; all agreed that this could not be done. Therefore, the carbohydrate figures from different years could not be combined, and statidtical analyses had to be separated. The chemists interviewed included Paul 9chs, chemist for Industrial Laboratories, Henry Engdahl, chemist for the Colorado Department of Agriculture, and Dr. S.G. Sunderwirth, Carbohydrate Specialist for the Colorado Agriculture Experiment Station at Colorado State University. Analysis of data.--Field forms were used to record factor values. Soil moisture data were converted to inches of moisture according to Olson and Hoover (1954). All values were then transferred from the field forms to a "sunnnary sheet" which was used for a statistical anaiysis. The methods used included simplJ correlation, multiple correlation, multiple regression, and analysis of variance. Average values for each factor were computed for each date of spraying for comparison with rabbitbrush mortality. These values were drawn on graphs for visual comparison with mortality. I Findings: Comparisons of average values.--Factor averages for each of three spray datesl are presented in Table 1. When these values are compared to average rabbitbrush mortality some idea may be obtained as to the importance of these factoks. From Table 1 we can see that rabbitbrush mortality increased as the season progressed. So did air temperature, soil temperature, twig length, and rate of twig elongation. Except for twig length, these values were not great! and may have been quite different if measurements had been taken over a longe~ period. Soil moisture within the first foot steadily decreased as expec1ted, but moisture within the second and .th Ird foot of soil fluctuated. Relat1ive humidity, carbohydrate content of lateral roots, and rate of carbohydrate translocation also fluctuated. I These results are not conclusive, but they do give values which can be . compJred with the expected results. For example, you would expect twigs to cont~nue elongating, which they did. You would expect soil moisture to continuJ downward, which it did in the first foot but not in the other two feet of s~il. Soil temperature should increase which it did, although the range was narr9w. Air temperature and relative humidity were subject to wide variations as indicated by the range in values. I Graphing of factor averages and mo~.tality failed to show any seasonal patterns, becaJse measurements were not taken over a long period. Therefore, these graphs are Jot presented in this report. I Averages are sometime~ misleading because of extreme values recorded. Therefore, to provide more reliable comparisons, statistical analyses were used to test �Table l.--A comparison of factor averages and ranges by spray date. FACTOR y June 25 Rabbitbrush mortality (percent) Factor Averages by Date July 12 July 27 Factor Range 83.42 94.37 99.04 50-100 58 64 65 40-82 X2 Relative humidity (percent) 18 52 40 13-68 X3 Soi~ temperature (degrees F.) 56 59 61 54-64 X4 Soil Moisture-First foot (inches) 3.57 3.13 3.09 1.18-5.50 Xs Soil Moisture-Second foot (inches) 4.27 3.25 3.60 1.27-6.20 X6 Soil Moisture-Third foot (inches) 4.07 3.36 3.55 1.30-6.21 X7 Carbohydrate Content (percent) 74.50 71.70 75.70 67.7-83.5 X8 Twig Length (inches) 6.16 10.42 14.20 2.5-18.5 X9 Rate of twig elongation (inches/day) .247 .248 .253 .000-.540 X10 Rate of carbohydrate translocation (percent/day) .1662 .1651 .2513* .54l2-minus.0133 Xl Air temperature * (degrees F.) '(g\ 0'\ This is a relative value indicating rate of translocation is below (negative) the previous average of the preceding spray date. �'I'abl,e 2~---:;Correla-tions between-rnd-ivi-dud -factors and+r abb r tbr ush mortality and- significant- inte-rac-t-ions between factors. Correlation Coefficients (r) With Rabbitbrush Mortality._ Individual Factors Significant Interations Between Individual Factors X8 Twig length .442** Xl' X2' X3' -XS' X9' X3 Soil temperature .294* X ' ,;,X4,-X ' S 2 X6 Soil moisture (3rd foot) .209 -X2, -X3, X4' Xs Xs Soil moisture (2nd foot) .208 -X2, -X3, X4' X6' -X8 X10 Rate of carbohydrate translocation - .198 -X6' X8, -X10 -X3, -X7, -X8 \J'I .197 Xl, X8 .173 -X3, XS' o -..J X9 Rate of twig elongation X4 Soil moisture X2 Relative humidity .14S X3' -XS' -X6' X8 Xl Air temperature .123 X8' X9 X7 Carbohydrate content ~ .024 -X10 * ** Significant at the five-percent level. Significant at the one-percent level. (1st foot) -X10 X6 �Table 3.--Interactions Variable Xl between independent variables as indicated by correlation X2 X3 XL. .27550 .05814 Xl Air temp. 1 -.22408 X2 Re 1. humidi ty 1 X3 Soil temp. X4 Soil moisture X5 Soil moisture 2 ft. X6 Soil moisture 3 ft. X7 Carbohydrate X8 Twig length X9 Rate of twig elongation Significant Significant X5 X6 X7 X8 X9 -.07769 ..•• 00159 .14769 .35032* .33055* -.22847 -.39475** -.37818** -.27203 .40271** - .13489 -.06791 .03454 .80808** .15568 -.49488** .82424*'1':.56666*~" .00463 - .19764- -.07142 .09909 .71904'1':*.11181 -.32684* -.22277 .04555 -.02612 -.21216 -.03767 .14121 1 .09341 .00891 -.85373** 1 .57520** -.50097** 1 -.01464 -.36858~':'I': -.49798** -.38457** 1 1 ft. 1 1 1 content X10 Rate of carbohydrate ** * .53453** -.27115 CWhen correlation coefficients are above .3684) (When correlation coefficients are above .285) Determined from Snedecor, George W. 1956. Ames, Iowa. Table 7.6.1. Page 174. = 46 X10 1 translocation at the 1% level. at the 5% level. Degrees of freedom coefficients. Statistical Methods. Fifth ed. The Iowa State College Press. Vl 0 0:> �- 509 - I individual factor values. I Statistical cornparisons.--Correlation analyses, both simple and multiple, were ustd to show how rabbitbrush regrowth mortality is influenced by the ten measurer factors. The results of the simple correlation will be discussed first. The str~mgth of the relationship between each factor and rabbitbrush mortality is shown by the correlation coefficients (r) in Table 2. Only the first two factors~ twig length and soil temperature, were found to be significantly correlated with ratbitbrush mortality. Because most individual factors reflect the influence of other factors, the correlation between each factor was also determined (Table 3). Thfse factors having significant (at the 5% level of probability) interactions were picked from Table 3 and shown on the right side of Table 2 for eas.ier interpretatibn. The negative sign refers to an inverse relationship. As susplcted, the two factors having the highest correlation with mortality also exhibit~d the most significant interactions. For example, Twig length (Xs) was signifitantly correlated with six other factors: air temperature, relative humidity, soil temperature, moisture within the second foot of soil, relative rate ofl twig elongation, and relative rate of carbohydrate translocation. This I examPlel shows that the correlation between twig length and rabbitbrush mortality is also influenced by these other factors. As the correlation coefficient values decrease in value, the number of interactions also decrease, indicating that the most important factors may be in the upper portion of this list. correla~ion analysis cannot separate the effect that these interactions so it was necessary to subject the data to further analyses. may have. MUltiPll regression analysis has the advantage 'over correlation analysis of being able tol account for the effects caused by interactions, resulting in a more meaningful analysis of the true relationship between the-independent variables and the depbndent variable (rabbitbrush mortality). The linear multiple regression mode 1 u1sed was: y y bO bl = Xl e ijk = rabbitbrush mortality a constant value partial regression coefficient independent variable random variables, normally distributed and common variance. with mean zero The met!hod used to solve for the bls was from the "stepwise Multiple Linear Regres ion Analysis for the IBM 1620", a program available at the Statistical Laboratory at Colorado State University. This method not only ranks the factors accord~ng to importance, but it is able to identify the factor with which to begin the analysis. This method also prints the standard error of the independent variabre, the Student "t" value, the "F" value, and the values for the parameters (bls) �- 510 - at each step. Individual using the formula: sums of squares have to be computed separately by hand 1. Sum of Squares for Residual 2. Sum of Squares for X8 for bl and b2 = = (rx8y)2 (Sum of Squar~s for Y) The results of this test are shown in Table 4. The factors are ranked in order of importance as they affect rabbitbrush mortality. This importance is related to the amount of sum of squares which each contributes toward the total shm of squares. A high sum of squares indicates a high ranking. "F" values wele computed by analysis of variance and are shown in Table 4. Only the firS l two factors had significant influences upon the susceptibility of rabbitbrush to 2,4-D. These were (1) twig length and (2) moisture within the second foo of soil. Both of these were highly significant, that is, significant at the 1 percent level of probability. None of the remaining eight factors, acting indivi ually, had a significant influence on mortality according to this test. They exbrted their their influence in combination with other factors, as shown by the correl~tion analysis. The factors are discussed in the order of their influence on mbrtality, as follows: I t 1. Twig length was found to influence the mortality of rabbitbrush Eegrowth more than any other factor measured in 1963. This is surprising because tt was ranked eighth the previous year. One explanation might be that the interaction between twig length and carbohydrate content was influenced by the entire y different chemical analyses of carbohydrate content. In 1962, a high correlation (.660) existed between twig length and total available carbohydrate (TAC)I content of lateral roots. In 1963, the correlation between twig length and all crrbohydrates, not just TAC, was only .093. The influence of twig length upon the suscertibility of rabbitbrush to 2,4-D was affected by its interaction with TAC the firsf year because TAC was ranked first. The interaction was so small the second year that twig length was ranked first. The importance of twig length is brought out by the fact that is was highly correlated with rabbitbrush mortality both years according to simple correIa ion analysis. Although this type of analysis may not isolate the true effect of twig length, it does show factors affecting rabbitbrush mortality are exhibited through twig length. Therefore, the use of twig length as a criterion for determining when to spray rabbitbrush is valid. 2. Moisture within the second foot of soil was found to be important the first year although it was not statistically significant. The second yei~' it had a highly significant influence on rabbitbrush mortality. The increased importance of this factor may be explained by the effect of 2,4-D on the root system. Most of the lateral roots within the first foot of soil were killed. Therefore, the collection of lateral roots for carbohydrate analysis in 1963 was dOle from the second foot of soil. 3. Ranked third in importance was carbohydrate content of the late al roots. Although this factor failed to have a significant effect on rabbitbrush mortality, it was twice as important as the next factor, relative rate of carbohydrJte translocation. Carbohydrate content of lateral roots was found to be the most important �- 5ll - Table 4J--Relative contribution of individual factors to variation in rabbitbrush I mortality as estimated by multiple regression analysis. I I Independent Variable X8 Twig length Sum of Squares Accounted For "F" Value 1089.785 1l.147~(* 771.988 9.364** I X5 MoiJture within the second foot of soil X7 Car~ohydrate content 87.034 1.021 Xg Relttive rate of twig elongation 85.802 .759 55.788 0598 51.421 .572 X2 within the first foot of soil I Rel~tive humidity 34.075 .336 X6 Moi~ture within the third foot of soil 9.311 .121 1.785 .010 1.184 .0097 I I • XIO Relat~ve rate of carbohydrate translocation X4 .1 Mo~sture 1 Soil temperature 1 Airltemperature Total Shlrn I 2188.173 of squares accounted for by regression Total smm of squares of Y I R = .62067 *~( Sf.gnd f Lc an t at the I-percent level. I FOl wI 1,46 d.f. = 7.21 FOI wI ~,45 d.f. = 7.225 F05 w] 1,44 d. f. 4.06 •• 5586.920 R2 = .38523 �- 512 - factor the first year. Its failure to be significant this time may be due to two different methods of chemical analyses, resulting in entirely different values. The average value for TAC (Total Available Carbohydrate) the first year was 9.4 percent. Total carbohydrates the second year averaged 73.9 percent. Another reason for this discrepancy was that the first sample of roots was gathered from healthy plants whereas the second sample of rOQts was taken from plants tlreated the previous year and regrowing from the crown of the root. It was the concensus of opinion by chemists that TAC meant more to the analysis than total carbohydrates and that these latter results are misleading. 4. Relative rate of twig elongation was next in importance but had n insignificant effect on mortality. This factor is the rate of twig growth betwe n spray dates and expressed as inches per day. It ranked sixth last year and was ~lso insignificant. We may conclude that the rate of twig elongation has little effect on rabbitbrush mortality. 5. Relative rate of carbohydrate translocation was insignificant ac ording to this analysis. This is the rate of translocation from the leaves to t e lateral roots between spray dates, and it is expressed as percent of carbohydrate content per day. This factor had a highly significant influence the first year wren it ranked second in importance. Its failure to rank higher this year is pro ably due to the insignificance of carbohydrate content with which it is highly correlated. 6. Moisture within the first foot of soil was also insignificant, allthough it ranked third the first year and was considered very important. This d!ifference can be explained by the fact that most lateral roots at this depth were killed by the first application of 2,4-D, so that soil moisture at this depth ha~ little influence on the plant. 7. Relative humidity was listed in seventh place and considered insignificant. The previous analysis listed it in eighth place, and we may conclude that it has little influence on the susceptibility of rabbitbrush to 2,4-D in the field~ 8. Moisture within the third foot of soil was insignificant again this year. It was ranked higher previously (fifth) but was considered relativrly unimportant. The reason for this may be the type of root system on rabbifbrush. Although the tap root grows three feet down and sometimes deeper, few latFral roots were observed, and it is felt that rabbitbrush plants utilize the second foot of soil moisture more than the other depths. 9. Soil temperature alone had little influence on the susceptibilitw of rabbitbrush to 2,4-D although it did rank high in the correlation analysis. Itlldid not do better in this regression analysis, because after the influence of the six interactions were accounted for (particularly twig length), this factor h~d little left to contribute. This is an example of the value of this type of analwsis in revealing the true relationship between the independent and t~e dependent I variables. This factor was ranked tenth last time and therefore is considered unimpo~tant as an individual factor. It may reflect the influence of other factors or rabbitbrush mortality as indicated by the correlation analysis. �- 513 - I 19. Air temperature was found to have less effect then any of the measured factor~ the second year, and it was rated seventh on the previous analysis. Both years it was found to be insignificant according to correlation and regression analyses. Therefore, we must conclude that this factor is relatively unimportant in influencing rabbitbrush susceptibility to 2,4-D. M1tip1e correlation and regression ana1ysis.--Multip1e correlation analysis was used to determine the correlation between all ten factors combined and rabbitbrush mortality. The coefficient of multiple correlation (R) was .621 and when squared gives the coefficient of multiple determination (R2) which is .385. This indicates that the ten factors accounted for nearly 39 percent of the variation in rabbitbrush mortality. The 1962 analysis found this value to be 33 percent. The difference may have been caused by the use of different values. Thus we may conc Lude that at least 60 percent of the variation was not measured either year. Additional factors influencing rabbitbrush mortality may be light, leaf area, carboh drate content of other plant.parts, or other physiological variables. Some 1 variation may be caused by the type of statistical test used and within of this .the error term, Analysis of variance was used to determine if the combined effect· of all ten factors on rabbitbrush mortality was significant. The results are presented in Table 5. Table 5.--Ana1ysis of variance, rabbitbrush mortality on ten environmental, physiological, and phenological factors. Sum of. Squares Total 47 5586.92 Regression 9 2188.17 243.13 Deviations 38 3398.75 89.44 Source of Variation * Mean Squares Degrees of Freedom F Value 2.71* Significant at the five-percent level. I F ,38 d.f. = 2.14 at the 5% level 9 2.91 at the. 1% level This test showed that these ten factors did have a significant influence on the susce~tibi1ity of rabbitbrush to 2,4-D. The results from the previous year were even more Significant, indicating that these factors may be more important when the pLants are first sprayed. I Conc1tisions: This J,tUdYhas shown that the four most important factors influencing rabbitbrush susceptibility to 2,4-D are: (1) carbohydrate content of lateral roots, �- 514 - (2) rate of carbohydrate translocation, (3) twig length, and (4) soil moisture in the upper two feet of soil. The following factors were relatively unifuportant: air temperature, soil temperature, rate of twig elongation, relative humidity, and soil moisture within the third food of soil. .1 The combined effect of these factors was significant, although they accounted for only 40 percent af' the variation in rabbitbrush mortality. Thereforel other factors must be responsible for the remaining 60 percent of the variationi It is suspected that most of these factors are physiological, although light may be very important. I PART II RESPONSE OF RABBITBRUSH TO DIFFERENT RATES OF APPLICATION OF 2,4-D AND TO DIFFERENT TIMES OF SPRAYING Objectives: 1. To determine if a heavy rate of 2,4-D is more effective in killing rabbitbrush than a light rate. 2. To determine the optimum time to spray rabbitbrush. 3. To determine if survival counts made two years after treatment indicate a higher kill than after one year. Techniques Used: Study area.--The study area is described in Part I. Duck Creek in Section 9, T1S, R98W, of the Sixth P.M. It is located on Establishment of p10ts.--P10ts were established and labeled in 1962.1 Of the original 90 plots treated with a heavy rate of 2,4-D, 48 were resprayed in 1963. Of the original 54 plots treated with a light rate of 2,4-D, 24 wete resprayed in 1963. All plots were 1/100 acre in size. 1 Chemical control.--A11 rabbitbrush regrowth treated in 1963 was sprayed with 2,4-D butyl ester at the rate of 3 1b/acre in a water carrier. Tween 20, , a surfactant, was added to aid penetration. Date of spraying.--Spraying July 12, and ,July 27. in 1963 was confined to three dates: Phenological observations.--Observations were kept on the phenological development of rabbitbrush plants, giant wild rye, Kentucky bluegrass, beard1e~s wheatgrass, and various forbs on the study area. Notes were taken at each date of treatment. �- 515 - Survival counts.--Surviva1 counts were made on July 16 and 17, 1964, one year after treatment. Survival counts were also made on all plants not resprayed in 1963, for the purpose of determining if additional ones had died since the original treatment. Findings: Comparing effects of two rates of 2.4-D.--This experiment was made to determine if the application of a heavy rate of 2,4-D followed by a light rate is more effectiv: inlkilling rabbitbrush than when it is treated for two consecutive years with a lLght rate of 2,4-D. Plots 3, 4, 5, 10, 13, 14, 17, 18, 22, 27, 29, 30, 32, 33, 35, 36, 41, 43, 45, 46, 51, 52, 53, and 54 were used for comparison. One-half of these 1/50 acre plots had been treated with 2,4-D at 31 lb/acre in 1962 and are referre1d to as "A" plots. The other one-half had been treated at 3 lb/acre and are referred to as "B" plots. Check plots were 6, 8, 16, 20, 26, and 28. The spraying of 716 rabbitbrush plants with 2,4-D at a heavy rate one year and a light late the next resulted in a 95 percent kill. Of 777 plants sprayed with a light rate of 2,4-D for two consecutive years, only 92.percent were killed. This difference is significant at the .05 level according to a test of Chi-Square (5.1008) using one degree of freedom. These results indicate that a heavy application of 2,4-D followed by a light application is more effective in killing rabbitbrush than two light treatments. The da a from these 24 plots were further analyzed to compare the individual (Tab1e 6). Table 6. --Rabbitbrush killed with two rates of 2,4-D. Rate of 2 ,4-D 1962 No. Plants Plants Number Treated Killed Percent No. Plants Treated 1963 Plants Number Killed Percent "A" Heavy 716 346 48.3 370 332 89.7 liB" 777 321 41.3 456 392 86.0 I Light I I From the results in Table 6 we see that a higher percent of rabbitbrush was killed with tHe heavier rate of 2,4-D in 1962. This difference was highly significant according to a test by Chi-Square. The Chi-Square value was 7.3396 which is more than the Chi-Square value with 1 degree of freedom at the .01 level (6.63). Although all plants were treated at the same rate in 1963, more rabbitbrush regrowth was killed on.the plots treated originally at 31 lb/acre. However, this difference �- 516 - ,I is slight and was not significant according to Chi-Square tests. The value was 2.8916 and would have to be 3.84 to be significant at the .05 level. Tes ling by Chi-Square was chosen because it was felt to be more applicable to values expressed in percent than the Students lit" test. The six check plots were not treated in 1963 although they were treated o~e year before. The survival counts on these revealed that nine of 87 plants had Inatura1ly succumbed the second year. This amounts to nearly 10 percent. The percent of plants killed in 1962 was considerably less than that killed in 1963 (Table 6). One reason for this was ,that the plants were treated lat~ in the 1962 growing season (August and September) after the time spraying is Imost effective. Another reason may be that rabbitbrush regrowth is more suSCep. tib1e to 2,4-D than the mature plant. 1 The cost of treatment is important although this study was not set up to compare the economics. Using 2,4-D at the 31 1b/acre rate, I used 2.69 ga1/acre.i At the '3 1b/acre rate, I used 0.39 gal/acre. Figuring the cost of 2,4-D at $4.00 per gallon and the rate of spray formulation at 38J;z gal/acre, the cost of the I"heavy" rate was $10.78 and the "light" rate was $1.54 per acre. These figures dQ not include the cost of a surfactant or using diesel oil as a carrier. These Icosts could be reduced by using a more efficient sprayer to cut down the amount of formulation required. However, thorough coverage of the plant is necessa~y. Determining the optimum time to spray.--Rabbitbrush regrowth was tre~ted with 2,4-D on three dates in 1963. They were June 25, July 12, and July 27. These dates were chosen because the results from 1962 indicated that rabbitbrush was most susceptible during this period. A total of 72 plots were sprayed, 24 on each date of treatment. Because most people understand dates of treatment better than phenology, Jabbitbrush mortality was tabulated according to dates of treatment. These are discussed first. Table 7.--Comparison of effects of different spray dates on kill of rabbitbrush regrowth. Plants KillJd Number Percent No. of Plots No. of Plants Resprayed ,June 25 24 373 294 78.8 July 12 24 328 306 93.3** July 27 24 361 353 97.8** Total 72 12062 953 Date ** Indicates a highly significant difference at the .01 level. 89•7 (Avg.Kill) 1 �- 517 - From T ble 7 we see that the highest kill of rabbi.tbrushregrowthwas made on July 2~ when almost 98 percent of the plants were killed. July 12 was second best, and June 25 appeared to be too early. The differences between spray dates were t sted by Chi-Square and each was found to have a highly significant difference. The hi~h mortality of rabbitbrush regrowth indicates that it is easily controlled with 2,4-D. However, the results above show that time of application is important, even on regrowth. . The pr~ceding comparison included all plots treated regardless of the original rate of 2,4 D applied. To determine if this original treatment affected the response of plants to a second spraying they were compared separately. Dates of treatment of the 48 plots treated with a heavy rate of 2,4-D are presented in the following table. . Table .--Comparison of the kill of rabbitbrush regrowth according to different spray dates. These plants were originally treated with a heavy application of 2,4-D. Date No. of Plots No. of Plants Treated Number Plants Killed Percent June 25 16 187 156 83.42 July 12 16 213 201 94.37 July 27i 16 208 206 99.04 Total 48 608 563 Avg. 92.60 As suspected, the kill increased as the season progressed and the most effective date of spraying was July 27 when a 99 percent kill was obtained. The kill on these 48 plots was 60 percent in 1962 as compared to the 93 percent of regrowth killed. Again, it must be remembered that in 1962 these plots were sprayed over a much longer period. Now that we have compared the effects of different spray dates on the plants in heavy-rate plots, let's do the same for plants which were first treated with a light rate of 2,4-D. Twenty-four of the original 54 plots were resprayed in 1963. The effect of different spray dates on mortality of rabbitbrush regrowth on these plots is shown in Table 9. Again the best date for spraying was July 27, and the kill increased as the season progressed. However, the rate of 2,4-D originally applied apparently had some effect pn re-treatment because the mortality is consistently lower on the plants treated with a light rate both years. This has been discussed under the section on comparison of 2,4-D rates. �- 518 - Table 9.--Comparison of the kill of rabbitbrush regrowth according to different spray dates. These plants were originally treated with a light application of 2,4-D. No. of Plots Date No. of Plants Treated Plants Killed Number fercent June 25 8 186 138 74.19 July 12 8 115 105 91.30 July 27 8 153 147 96.08 Total 24 454 390 Avg. 185.90 Much space has been devoted to the best date of treatment. However, a more valid criterion for judging the optimum time to treat rabbitbrush is the phenological 'stage of development of vegetation. This varies from year to year depending on environmental changes, physiological condition, and activities of the plaht itself. For instance, the highest average kill made in 1962 was on July 17 but in 1963 it was on July 27. Observations of the vegetative development of rabbitbrush and associated species on each spray date are presented in Table 10. Since July 27 was the most effective date for killing rabbitbrush we should first analyze the development of plants on that date. Table 10.--Phenological development of rabbitb~ush and associated plants in 1963. Stage of Development on June 25 Stage of Development on July 12 Stage of Development on July 27 6 inches 10 inches 14 inches Vegetative Bud stage Poa pretensis Vegetative Flower Bud full - showing color Drying Agropyron inerme Vegetative Flower Drying Elymus cinereus Vegetative Heading Flowering Chenopodium album Vegetative Heading Flowering Achillea lanulosa Vegetative Flower Some drying Castilleja linariaefolia Vegetative Heading Flowering Gilia aggregata Vegetative Heading Flowering - some drying Species Chrysothamnus nauseosus Avg. twig length Flower Development �- 519 On July 27, rabbitbrush twig length, actually an average of the stem from the root crown, was 14 inches and untreated plants were beginning to flower. The shallowrooted earlier developing grasses such as Kentucky'bluegrass (Poa pretensis L.) and beardless wheatgrass (Agropyron inerme (Scribn. & Smith) Rydb.) had gone to seed and were beginning to dry out indicating a lack of soil moisture. Giant wild rye (Elymus cinereus (Scribn. & Merr.) was going to seed and some plants were even starting to dry out. Forbs in blossom were western yarrow (Achillea lanulosa Nutt.) ndian paint brush (Castilleja linariaefolia Benth); and skyrocket gilia (Gilia aggregata (Pursh.) Spreng.). Some of the gilia were drying out, and lambsquarter (Chenopodium album L.) was 6 to 10 inches tall. Rabbitbrush leaves were fully developed on each of the three dates. On July 27 the sedpes were also going to seed. Twig elongation had practically ceased, and stems were branching out by July 27. The elimination of rabbitbrush on these plots released lambsquarters and peppergrass (Lepidium montanum (Nutt.) plants so that by August they were growing very dense (Figure 2). Giant wild rye, formerly protected from cattle use by rabbitbrush, was readily used after the brush had been killed. Few seed heads were left. However, the most discouraging observation was the abundant crop of rabbitbrush seedlings and sprouts which occurred in the opened areas (Figure 3.) Because rabbitbrush is such a prolific seeder, it will be but a few years until these areas are overgrown again. Survival counts were made in the 72 plots not treated in 1963 to determine if additional plants had died the second year after treatment. The reason for this check whs that some rabbitbrush regrowth exhibited signs of residual 2,4-D. The count was separated according to rate of 2,4-D applied in 1962, and the results are presented in Table 11. Table 11.--Mortality of rabbitbrush plants two years after original treatment. Herbicide Rate No. of Plots No. plants Living-1963 31 lb/a I re 42 577 50 8.67 3 lb/acre 30 594 40 6.73 Total 72 1 171 90 7.68 No. Plants Died Since 1963 Percent Mortality These results show that an additional eight percent of the plants found alive one year after treatment died the second year. Usually the dying plants exhibited little foliage recovery in 1963 (from 1 to 10%). However, some of the plants showing poor foliage recovery after the first treatment did much better the second year. This indicates that plant recovery may be associated with vigor. Table 11 shows that a few more plants succumbed the second year when originally treated with a high rate of 2,4-D, but this difference is small. No check on un-treated plants was recorded to determine normal plant die-off. A total of 14 plants considered dead during the first survival count were found to be alive in 1964. This amounted to less than one percent. �- 520 - Figure 3. Plot of dead rabbitbrush showing invasion of peppergrass and lambsquarters. Peppergrass is showing white flower, lambsquarters is in lower right of photograph. F,igure 4. Plot of dead rabbitbrush showing numerous rabbitbrush seedlings invading area. �:.. 521 - Conclusions: A 95 percent kill on rabbitbrush was achieved by spraying 2,4-D for two consecutive years. The application of a heavy rate (31 lb/acre) followed the second year b~ a light rate (3 lb/acre) appeared to be more effective than the applicationof two light rates. Although the difference in kill (95% versus 92%) was statistically significant, it is doubtful that the added cost (7 Umes as much) of applying 2,4-D at the heavy rate would be compensated for by the extra kill. The highest average kill of rabbitbrush regrowth in 1963 was made on July 27. In 1962, it was made on July 17. These findings indicate that rabbitbrush is most susceptible to 2,4-D late in the growing season and that treatment of regrowth may be even more effective later because added growth is necessary before the herbicide can be translocated to the roots. Regrowth stems from the root crowns averaged 14 inches long and were branching from a central stem when the highest kills were made in 1963. Rabbitbrush was showing yellow color. Shal,1ow-rooted grasses were drying out and losing color. Giant wildrye was seeding and some was ·drying out. In 1963, soil moisture in the second foot was 3.6 inches. Approximately eight percent of the plants considered alive after one treatment of 2,4-D died the second year. Usually these plants exhibited poor foliage recovery from tliefirst treatment, indicating poor vigor. Some exhibited residual effects of 2,4-D. Acknowledgments: The field work was conducted from the Little Hills Experiment Station near Meeker, Colorado. Appreciation is extended to Mr. William McKean, Station Superintendent, for use of the facilities. Most of the statistical analyses were done by Mr. David Bowden~ Instructor, Department of Mathematics and Statistics, Colorado State University. LITERATURE CITED Olson, D. F., Jr., and H. D. Hoover. 1954. Methods of soil moisture determination under field conditions. U. S. Southeastern Forest Expt. Sta. Paper 38, 28 p. Association of Official Agricultural Chemists. 1960. Official methods of analysis. 9th ed. The Association. Washington, D. C., 832 p. Morrison, Frank B. 1956. Feeds and feeding, a handbook for the student and stockman. 22nd ed. Morrison Pub. Co., Ithaca, N. Y., 1165 p. Smith, Donald G. 1964a. Game Research Report. and Parks Department. p. 107-121. January. Colorado Game, Fish �- 522 - LITERATURE CITED (continued) Smith, Donald G. 1964b. Factors affecting the response of rubber rabbitbrush to 2,4-D. M.S. Thesis. Colorado State Univ. 8.1 p. Weinmann, H. 1947. Plant Physiol. Prepared by: Date: Determination of total available carbohydrates in plants. 22:279-290. Donald G. Smith Assistant Wildlife Researcher July, 1965 Approved by: Harold R. Shebherd Project Leade~ Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief �July, 1965 - 523 - FINAL REiPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEG:MENT State of COLORADO ------------------~--------- Project No. W-10l-R-7 Work Plan No. 5 Game Range Investigations Job No. Title ~fJob: Navajo Reservoir Study Period Covered: April 15, 1964 to April 1, 1965. Personnel: 1 Harold R. Shepherd, Fred Halls ABSTRACT Navajo Reservoir, a part of the Colorado River Storage Project, lies partially in C016rado along lower reaches of the San Juan and Piedra Rivers. An investigation was conducted to determine how the reservoir would affect big game in Colorado. The reservoir will destroy 2,373 acres of big game range in river bottom and pinyonTjuniper types. The range supports an annua.L deer harvest variously estimated to be worth from 3,112 to 7.525 dollars. Because of the reservoir, game damage to craps is expected to increase; and increased deer losses from drowning and traffic accidents are likely. During periods of high water, hunter access by boat to adjacent range lands will be a possibility; during periods of low water, exposed bare mud flats will hamper access to the same lands. It is likely some hunters will use boats and spot lights to poach deer. will p~obably be more of a problem for New Mexico than Colorado. This Opportunities for mitigating losses or enhancing values for big game are meager, because most adjacent range land is Indian land over which the Colorado Department of Game, Fish and Parks has no control and which it probably cannot buy. Opportunities discus ed. for small lake and pond developments for fish and waterfowl are ....: ��- 525 - NAVAJO RES'RVOIR STUDY Harold. R. Shepherd TRODUCTION This study was undertaken to learn how Navajo Reservoir may affect deer and elk and those who hunt them in Colorado. The Navajo Reservoir is part of the Colorado River Storage Project. The project is designed to provide the long-time regulatory storage needed to permit States in the upper Colorado River Basin to meet their flow obligations at Lee Ferry, as defined in the Colorado River Compact of 1922, and sti;tl use their apportioned water. In addition, the project is expected to control sediment, abate floods, facilitate recreational development, and aid in !ish and wildlife conservation. Navajo feservoir, constructed by the U. S. Bureau of Reclamation, lies partially in Archuleta County of southwestern Colorado and in Rio Arriba County of northwestern New Mexico. This is an arid region of canyons and pinyon and juniper timber. The dam site is located on the San Juan River in New Mexico. Filling of the reservoir began in July of 1962. When full -- possibly by 1967 -- it will have a surface area of 15,610 acres, mostly in New Mexico. The reservoir is fed by the Pine, Piedra, San Juan and Navajo rivers, which head in Colorado. It will have a mini~ operational water surface elevation of 5,990 feet, a normal water surface elevation of 6,085 feet, and a maximum water surface elevation of 6,101.5 feet. The operation of the reservoir has not been firmly established. However, because its primary purpose is the storage of water dllring periods of high runoff for release during dry periods, it will be relatively full during wet periods and low during dry periods. Seasonally, water levels will be highest during and immediately after spring runoff and lowest in the fall. OBJECTIVES To predict the effects of the reservoir on big game and big game hunters in Colora~o it was proposed to do the following: 1. To investigate the effects of the reservoir on: a. Winter and/or summer game range. b. Froportion of available range types. c. dame damage to crops. d. Game movement. e. Doss of deer and elk through dromling, increased traffic, etc. �- 526 - f. Hunter access by roads and boats. g. Poaching. h. Conflicts of interests between hunters and other recreationists. 2. To consider suggestions for State Control of U. S. Government lands within project area for the manage~nt and welfare of big game and big game hunte~s. 3. To investigate what means there may be of mitigating big game wildlife values. losses to and/or the nhancing PROCEDURE Amount of Game Range Destroyed 'Aerial photos taken prior to the clearing of vegetation from the reservoir bottom in 1958-1960 were obtained. By observing the highline.of brush and timber clearing and with the added help of topographic maps, the high-water outline of the reservoir was drawn on the aerial photos. Within the resulting outline, the different kinds of land uses -- cultivated lands, native vegetation, stream-bed, water, etc. -- were indicated by coloring with pencils. The vegetative types present in the reservoir bottom before clearing were determined by comparing vegetation indicated on the photos to vegetation now present outside the cleared area. Acreages devoted to the various kinds of land use and vegetative types were found by planimetering. The proportion of cultivated lands planted to various crops before reserv01r construction was estimated by interviewing a sample of farmers who had once owned and cultivated the lands and by projecting Soil Conservation Servi~e crop acreage percentages for lands adjacent to the reservoir to cultivated lands to be flooded by the reservoir. Game Range Condition and Trend An estimate of range condition and trend for range lands in the reservoir bottom prior to clearing was wanted. It was assumed that range types, game-use, fnd condition and trend inside the reservoir area were nearly comparabl~ to those just outside. So, several standard browse range condition transects were established around the edge of the reservoir (Fig. 6). Data from these ar summarized in Table 4. Deer-use of Reservoir Area before Construction Farmers who had owned land in the reservoir bottom before it was cleared of vegetation were interviewed. They were asked to estimate the number of acres of land customarily devoted to various crops and range and, also, to estimate the number of deer that wintered on their acreages. By means of these data it was possible to form some idea of the deer use in the reservoir bottom before clearing. Admittedly, an estimate of deer numbers based on the interviews is not reliable; �- 527 - \ 10011 �- 528 - however, the interviews do establish that there was considerable use of the reservoir bottom by deer. A more reliable estimate of deer numbers probably would be based on acres of range and carrying capacity, and this was the method adopted. Value of Range Destroyed Dollar value of game range inundated by the reservoir was determined by two methods: 1. Game range area in square miles; times ,deer kill per square mile, times average unit value per deer. 2. Number 'of deer game range will support, times 25 percent (harvestable surplus), times average unit value per deer. Dollar unit value of deer and elk.--Figures for dollar unit values of deer and elk were based on hunter expenditures and kill figures for 1963 (Table 5). RESULTS AND DISCUSSION Topography and Geology The area in the vicinity of the Navajo Reservoir is a part of the high plateau country of southwestern Colorado and adjacent states. The elevation ranges from 5,990 feet, stream-bed elevation at the Colorado-New Mexico border, to 8,169 feet on top of Piedra Peak, near the upper end of the Piedra arm of the reserv?ir. The general aspect of the area is a mesaland dissected by canyons with high, broken, eroded cliffs and rocky slopes ranging upwards to about 1,000 feet above the canyon bottoms. The reservoir in Colorado fills the lower reaches of the 'San Juan River and two of its tributaries, the Piedra River and Sambrito Creek (Fig. 1). Sambrito Creek is the only side canyon tributary to the San Juan and Piedra Rivers in the reservoir area that has a permanent stream of water. I Rocks throughout the region are of Eocene age, belonging to the Wasatch formation. They consist of more or less horizontally bedded reddish, gray, buff, andlyellowish sandstones with local layers of gray shale near the bottoms of the canyons. The shales carry soluble salts that produce local areas of saline clay soil. The sandstones are fairly fine-grained and are quite soft but usually have harder caps that form cliff formations. Soils are predominantly sandy. Climate The climate in the reservoir area is typical of that occurring where the regetation is predominantly pinyon-Juniper. Limited records show that the area is srbject to wide variation in precipitation. Nearby Ignacio, Colorado (elevation b,424 feet) has an average annual precipitation of 14.43 inches, an average temperature of 45.4 degrees F., and a growing season 182 days long. Vegetiltion Sil1t!e',~hereservoir bottom was cleared of vegetation before this study wa~ begun (F'£g~~i), ;tnformation about the vegetation had to be obtained second-hand. Most �Fig. 1. Panorama of Navajo Reservoir site after vegetation removal. Colorado-New Mexico boundary. Looking north from near Vl f\) \D Fig. 2. Panorama of proposed lake site on Sambrito Creek. �- 530 - Fig. 3. Navajo Reservoir site after vegetation removal. Looking south down Piedra River to junction with San Juan River. Reservoir water to reach base of foreground trees. Fig. 4. River-bank vegetation along Piedra arm of Navajo Reservoir. �- 531 - of the following concerning vegetation of the area. is quoted directly or indirectly from Ecological Studies of the Flora and Fauna of Navajo Reservoir Basin, Colorado and New Mexico, by Angus M. Woodbury, et al. Vegetation within the reservoir and vicinity was comprised of river bank or streamside communities, side canyon communities, terrace communities, farmland communities, and hillside communities. Streamside communities.--These included such dominant herbaceous species as baltic rush (Juncus balticus), toad rush (Juncus bufonius), spike rush (Eleocharis palustris), and the Kansas horsetail, (Equisetum kansanum). Numerous species of the lest frequent herbs and grasses varied the composition of the communities from place to place. Some of the dominant species were squirrel tail barley (Hordeum jubatum), salt grass, (Distichlis stricta), American rush (Scirpus americanus), Juncus torreyi, Juncus tenuis dudleyi, smartweed (Polygonum lapathifolium), w i.Ll.owhe rb (Epilobium adenocaulon), Mentha penardi, Veronica anagallis-aquatica, and the cocklebur, (Xanthium saccharatum). . Along t?e river banks grew communities of trees (Fig. 4). The dominant river bank tree was the narrowleaf cottonwood (Populus angustifolia), becoming 35 to 40 feet tall. ~econd in number was the sandbar willow (Salix exigua), occurring in dense clumps ~long ditch banks and small side streams. Other species of willow occurred around f'arml.ands, Here also the alder (Alnus. tenuifolia), dogwood (Cornus stoloni£era), wild rose (Rosa neomexicana), virginia creeper (Porthenocissus inserta), silver buffaloberry (Elaeagnus argentea), and the golden currant (Ribes aureum) occasionally occurred. Wet sit ations around irrigation ditches supported many river bank types and a few submerg~d aquatics. In some places the banks were densely crowded with grasses, sedges, and rushes. Among the cultivated grasses were meadow fescue (Festuca elatior), timothy (Phleum pratense), red top (Agrostis alba), marsh redtop (Agrostis palustris), smooth brome (Bromus inermis), and orchard grass (Dactylis glomerata). The native grasses were generally few in numbers in these situations. Some of the more conspicuous were tall reed (Phragmites communis), American mannagrass (Glyceria grandis), water foxtail (Alopecurus aequatilis), slough grass (Beckmannia syzigachne), Canadian ryegrass (Elymus canadensis), and squirrel tail barley (Hordeum jubatum). Herbs w~re abundant and included smartweed (Polygonum lapathifolium); curly dock (Rumex ~rispus), white sweet clover (Melilotus alba), Dutch clover (Trifolium repens) red clover (Trifolium pratense), and many more. I Terrace communities.--Above the town of Arboles were extensive flood plain terraces, some more or less continuous for more than a mile. Most of these were cultivated and contained intermittent areas of natural vegetation. Three general types of native vegetatiqn occupied the terraces: tree communities of narrowleaf cottonwoods and Fremont poplar, big sagebrush communities with local stands of greasewood or rabbitbrush, and abandoned farmlands dominated by various weeds. Beneath I the large trees in tree communities, shrubs and smaller trees sometimes formed a middle layer. Among. these were small trees such as G.ambeI oak (Quercus gambelii), alder (Alnus tenuifolia), hawthorn (Crataegus rivularis), choke cherry (Prunuslmelanocarp~, and silver buffaloberry (Elaeagnusargentea). The shrubs included important game browse, such as big sagebrush (Artemisia tridentata), rabbitbrushes (Chrysothamnus spp.), skunkbush (Rhus trilobata), Utah serviceberry �- 532 - (Arnelanchier utahensis), wild rose (Rosa neomexicana), squaw apple (Peraphyllum ramosissimum), and golden currant (Ribes aureum). At ground level in treel communities were an abundance of herbs and grasses, such as white and yellow sweet clover, western bluestem bunchgrass (Agropyron smithii), quackgrass (Agropyron repens), and hairy chess (Bromus commutatus). I Singly or in various combinations, there were local dense colonies of rabbitbrushes. These occurred on terraces along the river courses and along the bases of steep hillsides in the bottoms of narrow side canyons. The principal species of rabbitbrush were Chrysothamnus nauseosus, £.. viscidiflorus, and f. linifolius. Greasewood (Sarcobatus vermiculatus) occurred in small or rather large colonies, mainly in areas of saline soil along drainage ways from ravines and in the bottoms of some side canyons where soluble salts were leached from exposures of bedrock. "?" Extensive communities of big sagebrush (Artemisia tridentata) occupied man terraces and bench lands in the wider parts of the valleys from which they extended continuously to the lower slopes of the hillsides, forking irregularly into the pinyon-juniper forests descending from the mesas (Fig. 5). They also occupied broad intervening areas in the forests on the tops of mesas. Hillside communities.~-Plants associated with big sagebrush varied, de ending upon the site. In flood plain aspects could be found false buffalo grass, (Munroa squarrosa), little lupine (Lupinus kingii), western stickseed (La ula occidentalis), little spurge (Euphorbia glyptosperma), scurf pea (Psoraleal lanceolata), spreading fleabane (Erigeron flagellaris), daisy fleabane (~. divergens), and others. In Sagebrush aspects on well-drained bench lands and hillsides the bushes Were usually well spaced, with bare soil or low tufted grasses and herbs occupying the intervening spaces. Frequent or occasional low shrubs included snakeweed, winter fat , horsebrush, bud sagebrush, and various cacti. The dominant grasses were blue grama (Boute loua gracilis), galleta (Hilarila jamesii), Indian ricegrass (Oryzopsis hymenoides), the needle-and-thread grasses (Stipa comata) and lie neomexicana, three-awn (Aristida sp.), squirreltail (Sitation hystrix), and sand dropseed (Sporobolus cryptandrus). Some of the more prominant forbs in sagebrush communities included Allionia linearis, Eriogonurn ovalifolium, Cleome lutea, Sphaeralcea coccinea, and Chrysopsis villosa. Many of the hillsides are extremely rocky with frequent sandstone ledges a d cliffs from which coarse talus and huge blocks of rocks have dislodged and are st ewn down the slopes. On these slopes the pinyon-juniper communities extended ijownward from the mesa tops for variable distances. The dominant species were Utah juniper (Juniperus osteosperma), one-seed juniper monosperma), and pinyon pine (Pinus edulis) • r (r. Dominant grasses in the pinyon-juniper corrununities were Galeta (Hilaria jaj1lesii), and grammagrass (Bouteloua gracilis). Indian ricegrass (Oryzopsis hymenoides) and the needle-and-thread grasses (Stipa spp.) were conspicuous by their taller �- 533 - Fig. 5. Typical big sagebrush type along north edge of Navajo Reservoir. Fig. 7. Mixed browse type including mountain mahogany and antelope bitterbrush along north edge of Navajo Reservoir. �- 534 - growth. Among the outstanding herbs were large-flowered bricke11ia (Bricke11ia grandif10ra), mountain peppergrass (Lepidium mon tanum) , harry golden aster (Chrysopsis vi110sa); there were many others. I It is in the pinyon-juniper community that most of the browse plants on big game winter ranges occur. These included Gambe1 oak (Quercus gambe1ii), mock orange (Philadelphus mlcrophyllus), antelope bitterbrush (Purshia tridentata), bfoad-1eaf mountain mahogany (Cercocarpus montanus) serviceberry (Amelanchier alnifolia), squaw apple (Peraphyllum ramosissimum), and others (Fig. 7). Range condition and trend.--Range condition and trend around the perimeters of the reservoir is summarized in Table 4. In Fig. 6 the locations of the transects are shown from which the data in Table 4 were obtained. By comparing these data, judgments can be made as to the value for game of the range adjacent to the reservoir. Too, it is assumed that condition and trend for similar range type~ in the reservoir bottom before clearing was nearly comparable to that outside. Conditions average medium for soil, medium for browse composition, low for browse de~sity, and low for browse vigor. Pellet counts show that ranges just outside the reservoir bottom are being used by both deer and elk, principally deer. Most bf the deer use occurs in the fall and winter, but there is also some spring and1summer use. Animal days use per acre, for deer, ranges from nine to 46 for an average of 35.6., For elk, animal days use per acre average 2.2, this for fall-wiAter use. No information was obtained to indicate that elk ever made use of the reservoir bottom. Thirteen years of first-hand observat-ion of range conditions in the Piedrl and San Juan drainages, together with current transect data from the vicinity of the reservoir, leads me to conclude that the deer displaced by the reservoir will represent an annual loss, for the range outside is supporting all the animals it can, and there is no place for the displaced deer to go. Land-use in reservoir before clearing.--Within the Colorado portion 0 the reservoir, below high water elevation 6,101.5 ft, are 3,636 acres. Of this total, 1,263 acres were in cultivated crops (Table 2). The remainder was compriged of range suitable for and used by deer. Of course, this is not to say that ~ultivated crops were not also used by the deer, as complaints of farmers and ranche,s will testify. Deer-use of reservoir before clearing.--When ranchers and farmers from whom land had been purchased for the reservoir were interviewed, they were asked to estimate the number of deer that once wintered on their lands. The number of deer that wintered in the reservoir bottom, based on these estimates, was1235. Of course, this is a very unreliable estimate, because many of the same drer, no doubt, were included in the various estimates. However, all those interviewed reported that deer used their lands. Having established that the reservoir bottom was used extensively by deer, a more reliable estimate of the number it probably supported is based on the number of acres of suitable range and its carrying capacity. This has been determined to be 170 deer (Table 6). A base herd of 170 deer will, conservatively, support an annual harvest of 43 deer. Value of deer lost to reservoir.--It was previously shown that the game range in the reservoir area is already supporting more deer than it shou1d--is 1t the limit of its capacity. Any additional deer thrust upon it will die. So, the �Table 4. Transect Hrite-up Number Summary of paced transect data from perimeter of Navajo Reservoir SEecies'" A"e Classes Young Nature Decadent ~, No. ~, No. % No. Light No. % Hedging Classes Noderate Heavy No. % No. % in Colorado. Composition Percent Condition Ratings Browse Browse Browse Soil Come· Density Vigor Animal Use Days/Acre Management ImE lications S-1-65 Putr Cemo Artr Quga Atco 0 0 1 6 0 0 0 2 15 0 7 88 1 100 25 50 30 75 0 0 1 0 24 4 1 12 0 48 10 100 1 0 16 16 1 25 0 32 40 100 1 0 16 19 0 25 0 32 48 0 6 1 18 5 0 75 100 36 12 0 8 1 50 40 1 Low Low Low Low 37 Deer (F-W)*** Reduce deer herd. S-2-65 Putr Cemo Ama1 Artr Quga Ferp 0 0 0 0 1 100 0 0 2 29 0 0 1 100 6 75 0 0 58 73 4 57 3 100 0 2 0 22 1 0 0 25 0 27 14 0 1 0 1 25 3 1 100 0 100 31 43 33 0 0 0 31 3 0 0 0 0 39 43 0 0 8 0 24 1 2 0 100 0 30 14 67 1 8 1 80 7 3 Medium Low Low Low 67 Deer (F-W) 3 Deer (S-S) Reduce deer herd. S-3-65 Putr Cemo Ama1 Quga Artr Chde Sym 0 0 0 8 2 0 5 0 0 0 20 10 0 23 2 100 8 100 3 100 30 75 18 90 5 100 17 77 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 1 3 2 39 18 5 22 50 38 67 98 90 100 0 1 4 1 1 2 0 0 50 50 33 2 10 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 12 0 29 Deer (F-W) 4 Deer (S-S) 0 0 0 2 8 3 40 20 5 22 North-facing slope & little evaporation accounts for relatively good range condition. Management should be based on less favorably situated sites. Cemo Putr Ama1 Quga Artr 1 0 0 2 0 2 0 0 5 0 36 74 1 100 9 82 32 86 2 100 12 0 2 3 0 24 0 8 9 0 4 0 3 23 0 8 0 27 62 0 22 1 6 12 23 0 2 2 2 47 0 19 6 100 49 1 11 37 2 11 Deer (F-W) 4 Deer (S-S) Reduce deer herd. 0 45 100 54 32 0 Ama1 Cemo Putr Artr Pera Ferp Quga 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 50 4 100 11 73 2 40 40 75 17 100 3 75 1 50 0 4 3 13 0 1 0 0 27 60 25 0 25 0 1 1 0 14 17 1 1 25 7 0 26 100 25 50 2 2 1 21 0 1 1 50 13 20 40 0 25 50 1 12 4 18 0 2 0 25 80 80 14 0 50 0 4 15 5 53 17 4 2 6 Deer (F-W) 3 Deer (S-S) 2 Elk (F-W) Low density and vigor probably due to unfavorable site and past heavy use. V1 S-4-65 S-5-65 0 w Medium Medium Medium Low High Medium Medium Low Low High Low Low V1 �Table 4. Summary of paced transect data from perimeter Transect Write-up Number Age Classes Decadent Young Mature No. % No. % No. % Composition Percent 0 0 0 40 4 0 11 65 1 100 3 75 27 56 17 65 4 100 6 0 1 2 8 0 35 0 25 4 31 0 0 1 0 29 1 0 0 100 0 60 4 0 2 0 1 14 1 0 12 0 25 29 4 0 15 0 3 5 24 4 88 0 75 11 92 100 17 1 4 48 26 4 Putr Ferp Cerna Arna1 Artr Quga 1 0 0 0 0 13 3 0 0 0 0 50 14 44 2 67 19 68 1 100 8 80 13 50 17 1 9 0 2 0 53 33 32 0 20 0 2 0 3 0 0 21 5 0 11 0 0 81 10 0 13 1 0 4 32 0 46 100 0 15 20 3 12 0 10 1 63 100 43 0 100 4 Cemo Chde Artr Putr Teca Arnal Per a Quga 0 0 1 100 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 25 14 78 0 0 13 87 31 61 0 0 4 80 1 100 6 75 4 0 2 20 1 1 0 0 22 0 13 39 100 20 0 0 5 1 1 4 1 0 0 7 28 100 7 8 100 0 0 88 8 0 11 20 0 2 1 0 44 0 73 39 0 40 100 0 5 0 3 27 0 3 0 1 17 77 1 5 Putr 0 0 5 23 13 1 65 5 0 0 Cemo 7 35 0 0 4 67 Ferp 1 17 5 83 50 4 100 0 0 2 Quga 2 50 1 2 15 32 1 1 31 67 Artr 0 1 100 0 1 100 0 0 S~ Arnal = Serviceberry (Arnelanchier alnifolia) Artr = Big sagebrush (Artemisia tridentata) Atco =Schadscale saltbush (AtriElex confertifolia) Cemo = True mountain mahogany (Cercocarpus montanus) Chde = Rabbitbrush (Chrysothamnus depressus) Ferp = Cliff fendlerbush (Fendlera rupicola) Data for these condition ratings not collected. "r-tJnmeansFa1.--r-wrn-ter~·'-S-;;-S" means Spr~ng-Summer. 2 10 2 0 7 0 9 50 33 0 15 0 19 9 0 0 39 0 S-8-65 S-9-65 ox"if Hedging Classes Light Moderate Heavy No. No. % % No. % 0 0 0 19 1 0 S-7-65 ** in Colorado. Cemo Ama1 Putr Quga Artr Ferp S-6-65 * SEecies* of Navajo Reservoir (Continued) Soil Condition Ratings Browse Browse Browse ComE' Density Vigor Medium Medium Low 32 3 28 1 10 26 ** High ** 28 0 20 5~ 0 60 0 12 18 1 15 51 1 5 1 8 ** 86 45 0 0 83 0 22 20 6 4 47 1 ** Low Low ** High Animal Use Days/Acre Management ImE licat ions 43 Deer (F-W) 3 Deer (S-S) 4 Elk (F-W) Reduce deer herd. 44 Deer (F-W). 2 Elk (F-W) Reduce deer herd. 27 Deer (F-W) 1 Elk (F-W) Reduce deer herd. 39 Deer (F-W) Reduce deer herd. w Q'\ Low ** Medium Low Pera = Squawapple (PeraEhyllum ramosissimum) Putr = Antelope bitterbrush (Purshia tridentata) Quga = Gambel oak (Quercus gambelii) Sym = Snowberry (SymEhoricarEos spp.) Teca = Gray horsebrush (Tetradymia ca.nescens) V1 �- 537 annual increase of 43 deer supported by the game range destroyed by the reservoir represent the number of deer lost to the project. Based upon hunter expenditures and deer kill for 1963, the average value of a deer to the State of Colorado is $175.00 (Table 5). This does not include cost of licenses. Multiplying this figure by the number of deer lost to the project yields a net annual loss of $7,525.00 (Table 6). Because of depleted range conditions, it might be argued that Colorado is not harves ing all of the deer produced and that, therefore, the above figure is unreal,lstic. A more reliable estimate might be based on the number of deer killed per square mile. Using this approach, the annual value of game range lost to the re ervoir is $3,112.00 (Table 7). Change in proportion of range types.--No additional lands in Colorado will be irriga ed by water from the Navajo Reservoir; and, except for farm lands lost to the reservoir, the reservoir will result in no changes in farm practices in Colora 10. Therefore, the proportion of available range types will not be materislly affected. Gqme damage to crops.--Irrigated crop acreage will decrease by the amount lost to the reservoir. It is likely that deer damage to crops will increase near the reserv1ir because of decreased available range and the greater concentration of deer near t~e edge of the reservoir. Hay, garden, and orchard crops will be most affected. E~fect of reservoir on game movement.--There is a limited movement of deer during fall and spring between the high country to the north of the reservoir area in Colqrado and the lower pinyon-juniper winter ranges in New Mexico. The extent of thi~ movement or seasonal drift is not known, but it is probably not large or signiftcant. The reservoir will interfere with this movement for a time, but it is likely deer accustomed to traveling across the reservoir area will instead go around the south-eastern arm of the reservoir when it is full. There will be no canals in the Colorado portion of the project area to hinder game. Because of the project and consequent recreational facilities and activities, there '4ill be an increased number of roads, homes, fences, and increased traffic and human activities near the reservoir. This should tend to concentrate more deer in areas to the west and north of the reservoir, increasing pressure on the range to some extent. Lqss of deer through drowning, increased traffic hazards, etc.--There are no canals in the Colorado portion of the project to drown deer. However, occasionally. deer may drown when they attempt to cross the reservoir on thin ice. It is ~ikely that through the combination of increased traffic and increased concen~ration of deer there will be an increase in the number of deer killed by automo~iles. E~fect of reservoir on hunter access.--If the reservoir were full or nearly full during the big game season, increased access by boat could be had to about five s~uare miles of deer :ange lying between the San Juan ar~ of,the reservoir and th~ New Mexico State l~ne. However, normally the reservo~r w~ll be at or near lowest stage during big game season. At minimum operational level (5,990 ft) water ,ill extend into Colorado only a half mile above the new Mexico-Colorado boundary. Beyond, there will be several square miles of bare mud flats, difficult or impossible to cross by vehicle. At normal water surface elevation of 6,085 ft, water will extend about six and a half miles above the boundary, providing some access by boat to the country south of the San Juan arm of the reservoir. Since �- 538 - Table 1. Land-use acreages within Colorado portion of Navajo Reservoir b fore clearing (below maximum water surface elevation 6101.5 ft). Land-use Acres Weeds: Russian thistle~ etc. Cultivated crops Big sagebrush, rubber rabbitbrush, etc. Pinyon-juniper River bottom vegetation: Oakbrush, rose, hawthorn, narrowleaf cottonwood, boxelder, chokecherry, rubber rabbitbrush, grasses and forbs Alluviums: Silt, sand, gravel, rock Water (surface of river) Total Table 2. 165 1,263 819 523 515 314 37 3,636 Acres of cultivated crops in Colorado portion of Navajo Reservo"r before clearing (below maximum water surface elevation 6101.5 f~).* I Acres Percent Alfalfa Corn Wheat Beans Potatoes Unspecified 631 164 152 63 13 240 50 13 12 5 1 19 TOTAL: 1,263 100 Crop ·k I Estimate based on sample of crop acreages reported by farmers once owning land purchased for reservoir. I Table 3. Irrigated cropland and pasture acreage in vicinity of Navajo Re~ervoir, 1965.", Crop Percent of Tota11Acreage Alfalfa Mixed hay Pasture Small grains 14.8 8.5 66.1 10.6 ·k Data compiled by U.S. S. C. S. �- 539 - Table 6. Estimated yearly value of game range lost to reservoir, based on deer unit value and range carrying capacity. Game Range Area: (less cultivated land): Range crrrying capacity (acres/deer/7 months): Base herd range capable of supporting: Harvestable surplus (25%) Ave. unit value per deer: Yearly ra1ue of game range lost to reservoir: (43 Q{ $175.00) ,2,373 14* 170 43 $175.00 $7,525.00 * Riordan, Lawrence E. 1957. Differences in range vegetation resulting from grazing by deer, cattle, and sheep. Proc. Soc. Amer. Forest. Table 7. Estimated yearly value of game range lost to reservoir, based on deer unit value and kill per square mile. Total ~eservoir area: Deer kill per square mile unit 77: Deer kill in reservoir area: Ave. u~it value per deer: 5.68 sq. miles 3,636 acres 3.13 17.78 deer $175.00 Yearly value of game range lost to reservoir (17.78 x $175.00): $3,112.00 �Table 5. Dollar unit value of deer and elk based on hunter expenditures and kill of 1963.* Value Value Per Animal Per Animal (licenses) (licenses) (not included) (included) Kind of Hunter Number of Hunters Spent Per Spent Per Total Spent Hunter Hunter (licenses) (Less license) (+l.icel1~e} _~t __in~luded) Total Spent (licenses) (included) Animals Harvested Resident deer Non-resident deer All deer hunters 110,408 52,809 163,217 $ 87.53 306.09 $ 95.03 346.09 $ 9,664,012.24 16,164,306.81 $25·,828,319.05 $10,492,072.24 18,276,666.81 $28,768,739.05 . 75,312 72,536 147,848 $ 128.31 222.84 174.69 $ 139.31 251. 96 194.58 Resident elk Non-resident elk All elk hunters 41,435 9,833 51,268 $ 122.71 401.16 $ 132.71 451.16 $ 5,084,488.85 3,944,606.28 $ 9,029,095.13 $ 5,498,838.85 ·4,436,256.28 $ 9,935,095.13 8,822 3,298 12,120 $ 576.34 1,196.06 744.97 $ 623.30 1,374.30 819.72 * Colorado Department Game, Fish and Parks. 1964. Economic value of hunting and fishing to the people of Colorado. Internal publication. g �- 541 - a firm operational plan has not been established for the reservoir, it is impossible to say how often access by boat to the lands in question will he fe as Lb Le , In the ~olorado portion of the reservoir area it is unlikely that the reservoir will cause the building of new roads that will provide increased hunter access to lands a4jacent to the reservoir. Fencing of the boundary of the government lands around the reservoir could hinder hunter ~ccess to lands adjacent. If the boundary is fenced,a barbed wire and not a woven wire fence should be used. Numerous gates located for the convenience of hunt rs should be provided. If a woven wire fence is used it should be expected that hunters will cut numerous holes through it getting game out to the highway. Effect of reservoir on poaching.--When access to hunting areas adjacent to the reservoir can be had by boat it is likely that there will be deer poaching from boats in both Colorado and New Mexico. Spot lighting from a quietly moving boat in out-of-the-way side canyons will probably be effective and tempting to some hunters. It seems likely that this sort of poaching will be more of a problem for New Mexico than for Colorado. I Conflicts of interests.--It is unlikely there will be serious conflicts of interests between big game hunters and other recreationists. During the big game season few fishermen and tourists should be in the area, and competition for cam~ sites and cabin facilties should be at a minimum. Lan ownership and control.--With the exception of private lands lying along the west side of the Piedra Arm of the reservoir and small parcels of private land adjacent to the reservoir elsewhere, range lands adjacent to the reservoir are Ute tribal l?nds (Fig. 8). Colorado has no control over Indian lands, and it is very doubtful that any of these can be purchased. The only tracts of private lands adjacent to the reservoir large enough to warrant purchase as replacement for range lands lost to the reservoir or as camp ground sites, etc. are the following: 1. John E. Walker: S. 22, T.32N., R.5W. (about 620 acres) 2. Floyd Andrews: S.4 and 9, T.32N. ,R.5W. 3. Oscar Simms (Martha): 4. Aurelio and Issac Sanchez: 5. Robrrt L. Parmenter: (about 100 acres) S. 9 and 10, T.32N., R.5W. (about 90 acres) S. 9 and 10, T.32N., R.5W. (about 60 acres) S. 10, T.32N., R.5W. (about 80 acres) Loss mitigation and value enhancement.--If range lands owned by the Utes adjacent to the reservoir could be purchased, domestic grazing could be controlled and game management practiced. However, it is very unlikely that the Southern Utes would consider sale of range lands. The private lands adjacent to the reservoir wh~ch might be considered for purchase total about 950 acres. �.;: .-: n: o- 1 i .1 h.;~,tT ,"", __ 9..111 ~ •• ::G:I 1,1 I L / 'i) I v" I N 1"001 LO"d I: ,- __ ,-1" 3: I I ~ :HOP'. ~"d All ••.• Sm.'h I I III? ~i' I i \ 1 clo llU ~II; -J.-::J 13 1: Q. <l :.' (t _,J -I 1 ( .ve r •.",' I 19 I ~ �CleOf'Hlt N'tk.r50n, COLORADO NEW MEXICO " 01 90A ~l I i i Rf'gino Cond,lor,o, Mon",I.'O Lopu Juon GolI'Qo, r 33 N I I ~i I 38 87 5 P M P T U 1 I ! t, 153- T 32 N I £:p,tntn,o Q",n'onQ i 84 J __ L DETAIL A I I 1----- I I L----- 21 ---------OWNERSHIP 46 A 8 46 C - Wade Young 93 - Viviano Cand.larlO 100 - Jon •• ! L. Borr,tt 129 - Andrello G.Mou 137 A - Elizabeth 158 A - United 162 A NO$somon School John L Udell, Oistrict No.1I Sr. -FiG. 8 161 - Higinio R Gr.er 168 - Joseph C WIIIQlng ,Bishop Streets identified ,ovenu8$ of Pueblo ond lots no' ore owned by otherwise UNITED DEPARTMENT John E. Wolker or STATES TUE INTERIOR BUREAU OF RECLAMATION REGION 4 COLORADO RIVER STORAGE NAVAJO UNIT-COLORADO-NEW NAVAJO DAM LAND DE AIL OF 140-ARBOLES 200 L--'---'---_---'----SCALE AND PROJECT MEXICO RESERVOIR OWNERSHIP MAP MAP NO. 711-400-34 TOWNSITE 2~--.:500 9 -'-200 __ .--l 400 SCALE JUNE IN FEE.T OF FeET 1958 REv. 10·21-59 R£SEI?VtWi R-O-W BOUNDARY _ ... ADDEO -._ .. _---SH �- 544 Other than the purchase of range lands and retirement of domestic grazinJ, there seems to be little opportunity for the mitigation of losses or enhanceme t of values for big game on the part of the Colorado Department of Game, Fish and Parks. Management suggestions.--As pointed out earlier, the majority of the range lands adjacent to the reservoir are Indian owned and managed. These ranges have been and are presently being too heaVily used, primarily by deer~ The Colorado Department of Game, Fish and Parks should encourage the Indian Service td arrange for the harvest of more deer on their lands. Possible improvements for fish and waterfowl. --Plans for this invesJigation were confined to those concerning only big game. However, possible oppottunities for the building of small lakes and ponds to benefit fish and waterfowl have come to my attention. Just within Colorado along Sambrito Creek (T. 32N., R. 6W.) there is a slough of approximately 18 acres that could easily be converted to a pond for waterfowl food and nesting (Fig. 9). It is just within the resJrvoir high-water line. A water pipe line from Sambrito Creek, owned by the New Mexico Game and Fish Department, crosses the upper end of the slough. I was to]d by a New Mexico Game Department official that Colorado should have no difficulty getting permission to obtain water from this pipe line to keep the pond ~il1ed. New Mexico is building similar ponds on its side of the boundary and plans to keep them filled with Sambrito Creek water from the pipe line. The slough could be converted into a shallow pond by constructing a low dike about 426 yands long on the south side and a low dam about 50 yards long on the east side. At another location on Sambrito Creek, about 25 yards northeast of survey marker, (T. 32N., R. 6W., J;; S. 23 Colo.), a lake of about one fourth square mile area could be formed by building a dam about 250 yards long and about 25 feet high across Sambrito Creek (Fig. 2). During extremely high water in the Navajo Reservoir, the lake would fill. It could be kept filled by the live stream in Sambrito Creek. SUMMARY Navajo Reservoir, a part of the Colorado River Storage Project, lies parJia11y in Colorado along lower reaches of the San Juan and Piedra Rivers. The ~eservoir in Colorado, at high water, will occupy approximately 3,636 acres formerly comprised of small farms and range lands. Big game, principally deer, use range lands which will be inundated by the reservoir. These lands are typical of those bo1dering streams, on stream terraces, steep hillsides, and mesa tops in a climate where the dominant vegetation is pinyon pine and juniper. It is estimated that 2,373 acres of big game range will be lost to the reservoir. Depending upon the method used for estimating, this range supports an an1ua1 deer harvest worth from 3,112 to 7,525 dollars to the State of Colorado. Because ranges in the vicinity of the reservoir are already supporting more deer than they should for the good of both range and animals, deer displaced by the reservoir will be lost. Because of the reservoir, deer damage to crops is expected to increase. The reservoir will have little effect on deer migration. An occasional 1eer may be drowned in the reservoir as it attempts to cross it. Increased vehicle �- 545 - lfig. site 9. Cattail slough along Sambrito Creek, possible of pond for waterfowl. �- 546 - traffic may increase the reservoir. the number of deer killed by accidents along highways near The reservoir is expected to have little effect on hunter access to adjacent range lands. However, it is possible that during some years when the reservoir 's nearly full it will provide a means of access by boat to about five square miles of deer range lying between the San Juan arm of the Reservoir and the New Mexico State line. Conversely, during periods of extreme drawdown, extens~ve areas of bare mud flats will make crossing the reservoir bottom to reach hunting areas beyond difficult or impossible. If the boundary of the reservoir is fenced, barbed wire, not woven wire, s ould be used; and numerous gates should be provided for the convenience of huntJrs. It is likely that both Colorado and New Mexico will have some trouble withldeer hunters who will use spot lights and boats to hunt in remote canyons. Because most of the· remote canyon country of the reservoir area is in New Mexico, Jt is likely New Mexico will have most of the poachers. No serious expected. conflicts of interests between hunters and other recreationists are Excepting a few parcels of land owned by private individuals, lands adjacelt the reservoir in Colorado are owned by the Southern Ute Tribe. Colorado has no control over the Indian of these could be purchased. lands, 'and it is very doubtful Unless private or Indian range lands can be the reservoir, there is little the Colorado can do to mitigate losses or enhance values Department of Game, Fish and Parks is in no the Indian Service, it should encourage the of deer on Indian lands in Unit 77, because being too heavily used. to thai any purchased to replace range los to Department of Game, Fish and Parks I for big game. Although the Colorado position to dictate game manag~ent to Indian Service to increase the harvest the range has been and is pres ntly There appear to be opportunities for the building of a small lake and a pond for the benefit of fish and waterfowl. The sites for these are along sambritolCreek. It seems likely that both could be filled by the reservoir during periods pf extremely high water and kept full at other times with live water from Sambrito Creek. Pre pared Date: by: Haro ld R. She phe rd Associate Wildlife Researcher J~U~1~y~,~1~9~6~D _ App rove d by :__ ~W..::a:.Ly..::n:.::e--=-:W...::.-:::.S. _ Game Research Chief � https://cpw.cvlcollections.org/files/original/e5aa4a0e8e53dcf32ab93ac8e2c81fdc.pdf a818f5ccfca97d08c5084eba88d63d45 PDF Text Text October, ~965 - 1- JOB COMPLETION RESEARCH PROJECT sta e bf COLORADO ----~==~~=--------- Pro'ect No. SEGMENT Migratory W-88-R-10 I worr Plan No. 1 Title of Job: waterfowl Period REPORT covered: Bird Inves~igations 1 Job No. Production Survey April 1, 1964 to June 15, 1964. I Per~onnel: Those cooperating on the 1964 counts were: Ken Baer, Jack I Fro t, Fred Glover, Charles Graham, Charles Hayes, Roe Meyer, and Jack Ran all, U. S. Bureau ~andl George wrakestraw, Doni smith; of Sport Fisheries wyoming and Wildlife; Game and Fish Department; Utah Fish and Game Department; Norm Hughes, Mel Barron, Grirb, Richard Hopper, forD, Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department. Obj, ctives: To determine, techniques, the number Col rado waterfowl through Wayne Russell statistically grounds. Trejo Art Kinski and Howard Funk, Jack and luilliam Ruther- reliable of ducks and geese, by species, breeding Raymond sampling produced on ��- 3 - waterfowl William Production survey H. Rutherford Teqhniques Used: After ten years of intensive study, present breeding pair and production surveys have been consolidated into a breeding pair inventory in late May and a production study in July. One week of the breeding study requires roughly 30 to 40 hours of aircraft use. Al other work is done on the ground, usually in cooperation with local Bu of Sport Fisheries and Wildlife personnel. On the basis of these studies, reports are made, as required, to the 8u·eau of Sport Fisheries and uJildlife, which constitute Colorado's pant in the annual cooperative breeding ground survey. ThJ 1964 breeding-pair surveys were conducted within the period May 11 to June 3. During this time, ground counts were made in the yampa Va ley and Brown's Park, aerial counts were made in the South Platt~ an Cache la Poudre Valleys and in North Park, and intensive aerial co erages combined with air-ground comparison studies were conducted in the San Luis valley. As for the p~st several years, intensive brood surveys were not condu ted thie year due to a lack of time. Thus, this final breeding ground rPIJOrt considers only the bre~ding-pair surveys with last mi~ute notes on weather and water conditions, ~ccompanied by gross obJervations of early nesting success in th8 breeding areas. Al survey methODS and sample areas remained the same as in past ye rs, with the exception of the San Luis Valley, where coverage was mu h more intensive than in former years. Flying was done with a OeHavilland BeavQr airplane in North Park, the Cache la Poudre valley, pa t of the South p12tte Valley, and part of the San Luis valley; with a essna 105 in most of the Son Luis Valley; and with a Piper Supercub in part of the South Platte Valley. AreBS which are sa~pled by blocks or sections were flown with one observer, while areas sampled by tr nsects were flown with two observers. The exception to this was in North Park, whers only one observer wa~ available for the transect fl ing. Thus, this sample is only half the size of other transect samples. �- 4 - Findings: Weather conditions in Colorado during the spring and early summer 'tV'ere considered to be good to excellent for t'latetfot'll nesting a d production, The phenoiogy of the season was retarded, so that nesting was not started as ear ly as normal; but once started, Heather was not a factor in nesting. Hater conditions Here somewhat better than those of last year, but still only fair. Early spring precipitation vastly improved what had started out to be as dry a season as that of a year ago. It appears that sufficient "Tater is available for nesting and broodrearing in all areas of the State except the San Luis Valley, where it is expected that water shortages will be evident before broods are on the wing. TABLE 1. -- Summary of Colorado Duck Breeding Ground Population Estimates, 1964 "lith 1963 and the Ten-year Average for Comparison. Area Total Estinated Breedin~ Pairs 10-year average, 1964 1963 1954-1963 San'Luis Valleyll North Park South Platte Valley Cache la Poudre Valley Yampa Valley Brm·m's .Park 19,063 11,000 10,517 2,381 2,613 115 17 ,377 5,278 10;513 2,276 60 10,721 3,927 3,528 1,721 3,024 110 TOTALS 45,689 38,998 23,031 3,l}94 11 For purposes of comparison, San Luis Valley calculations are made here the same as in previous years. population estimates. See Table 3 for refinements of Examination of the duck breeding-pair estimates by area (Table 1) revJal that the 1964 counts wer e up 17.2 percent from 1963, and 98.4 percent above the 1951~-1963 ten-year average. It appears that Co lorado is co~tinuing to experience a year-to-year upward trend in breeding-pair nu bers. 1 Comparison of individual breeding ground estimates between 1963 and 1 64 showed that the duck population in the San Luis Valley (based on the same coverage as in past years) "las 9.7 percent above last year and 78.6 percent above the ten-year average. In the Yampa Valley, ducks were 25.2 percent be Low last year and 13.6 percent be Low the ten-year average. In North Park and the Cache la Poudre Valley, breeding-pair popu1atioljls were increased both over last year and over the ten-year average, bei?g 108.4 and 180.1; and 4.6 and 33.3 percent, respectively. In the South Platte Valley, populations were the same as last year, but increased 198.1 percent over the long-term average. In Brown's Park, an improvement in habitat fo Ll owdng the completion of construction and initial filling of Flaming Gorge Reservoir accounted for a duck population in crease of 91.7 percent over last year and 4.6 percent over the ten-year average. I �- 5 - TABLE 2. __ Species Composition of the Colorado Breeding Duck Population; 1964, 1963, and the 1954-1963 Ten-year Average. Nuraber of Breeding Fairs 1954-1963 average 1963 I Speclies Ballard Blue-winged Teal Pintail Gadwa Ll, AmeDican Hidgeon Shoveller Cinnamon Teal Gr e en-wf.nged Teal Red~ead Lesser Scaup Ruddy Duck Bufflehead canyasback Ame ican 1 HG!rganser Species Composition, Percent 1954-1963 avera.ge 1963 30,077 31,026 15,185 65.9 79.9 65.9 3,375 3,718 1,315 7.4 9 .l~ 5.7 3,732 2,298 838 1,358 1,386 1,945 8.2 5.0 2.1 3.4 6.0 8.4 8% 76 249 1.8 0.2 1.1 1 ,£~13 363 471 369 652 598 3.1 0.8 1.2 0.9 2.8 2.6 475 242 456 1.0 0.6 2.0 2,558 19£,· 554 2 27 689 335 62 2 21 5.6 0.4 1.4 3.0 1.5 0.3 317 133 0.8 0.8 33,998 23,028 100.0 100.0 11 2 357 T 0.1 T T T 0.1 0.6 . 100.0 1/ ~or purposes of comparison, 1964 species composition calculations for Fhe San Luis Valley, Hhich are included in this Table, are made the same as in previous years. See Table 3 for refinements of species omposition estimates in the San Luis Valley. In bn attempt to refine the sampling technique in the San Luis Valley, aer1ial transect coverage Has doubled and air-~round comparison t r ans ec t s, were established. This permitted a better estimate of the total breedin~ population and a considerably improved estimate of species composition. Table 3 presents these refined data. Sp~cies composition pe rcent age s of the breed i ng duck popu1ntion Here ab~ut the same as those of past years. Pint~il, widgeon, shoveller, anf redhead percentages ucrc up someuhat with other species percenta~es be ng either stable or slightly doun. �- 6 - TABLE 3. -- Species Composition of Duck Breeding Pairs, San Luis Va ley, 1964; Intensive Coverage Compared Hith Coverage Identi():al to Past Years. Species Number of Breeding Pairs Intensive Regular Coverage Coverage Ha Ll.ar d Blue-Hinged Teal Pintail Gadwa Ll American Hidgeon Shoveller Cinnamon Teal Green-winged Teal Redhead Lesser Scaup Ruddy Duck Canvasback American Merganser Ring-necked Duck TOTALS 14,666 912 3,026 2,681 244 1,114 1,857 1,183 1,550 306 74 22 1 27,682 Yampa Craig to Juniper Spgs. Juniper to Cross Mtn. Lily Park YAUP./\. TOTALS J./ Novice 36 l~6 Area Green (BroHn's Park) Litt Le Snake (Lower bridge to State line) Gr~ND TOTALS 13,400 1,199 944 1,597 217 217 36 36 1,272 109 19,063 Species ComEosition~ ~ercent Intensive Regular Coverage Covetage 52.9 3.3 10.9 9.7 0.9 4.0 6.7 4.3 5.6 1.1 0.3 0.1 T 0.2 7013 613 4j9 814 1 1 100.0 100JO Ih 0]2 o 2 6~7 Oj6 -r ;j; I Nesting 2-yr. old!! Estimated=' Total Pairs Pairs No. Goslings ~~·G~!~:~ Birds 20 13 22 55 0 17 11 9 37 11.~ 114 71 105 290 0 25 37 DO 88 137 427 pairs Hhich are potential nesters next year. ~/ This category includes ~oth eggs and goslings counted. no 261 128 195 584 23 51 58 191 319 954 73 9 28 �- 7 Geese Observed, Moffat Total Can8da TABLE 5. ------_. County, Colorado, __ __ ._---_._----------Number Geese Counted .. 1964. ---- Percent 1:J5G-G5 From Change 1,)56-63 From ~~~~===~l==============~~§~=====~~~~=====e~~~~~~=======!~~~=========~~~~~~~== Yampa Rl~cr _ G~een Riisr LIttle s~ake River ~84 51 319 467 15 156 213 551 115-/ + 25 ~ 240 + 105 + T 954 631.3 383 + + TClTALS 174 7 + 177 49 149 ========r=============================================~====================== 1:/ Li ttLr ~~nake ~Uver not included in survey TABLE G. -- Number of Canada Goose Goslings Colorado, 1964 until 1962. Observed, Moffat Percent Number of ~oslings ~rea County, 1964 1963 1956-63 Averaoe 290 11L. 59 0 137 15 427 137 Change From 1953 From 1956-63 ~veraoe 154 Inf. 813 + + 212 + ========-=====================================?=============================== yer varnua ~~ Green 1~1ver I- ittle . -' - - River ~~~~ke I' TOT ilLS 8 + 2~~/ 100 + 320 Inf. + 1612 327 ~=~~==== ====================================================================== II Litt e snake River not included in survey until 1952. T,Il:Jles 4,5 and 6 list the nurnbers, age cornposition, Lnc.rt i cns , and past year::,' comp~riSfns of this breeding goose flock. Brown's P~rk sho~led an increase ovur las year in total number of geese, but no breeding pairs and no production could be found. It is no longer a significant gOOS8 breeding area. The gOO~8 po ul,ltion on the Yarnpa River increased 25 percent ovcr 1963, and 174 purcent pver the 1956-1963 average. The Little Snake River was surveyed for the thir~ year, and showed a population increa~e of 105 percent ovcr last year's level. This gOOS8 flock continues to show a steady and healthy increase, to the point th~t mOBt of the highest-quality nesting habitat is now occupied. There still r emaino '1 cnns i tle r ab Lc arnount of unoccupied ne st i nq hab i t at of sbmanrha t Loue r quality but still capable of good production. ThUS, it is the management ob juc t Lvc to cnrrt i nue the Lncr ense in the Si;~8 of this flock. F~ll Fli~ht ~)rodiction: It is anticipated th~t fall duck flights from Colorado'S 964 PT'C1lJuctionuri Ll bf3 snrneuhat above ;]v,"r"iiB,even t hounh summer ua t ar snor-t> expected ~':!:J8~-_) cJ.l"'i-: in some i:]TC!i.:]E.}. The stlltus of geese cuntinues to irnprove rnarkedly, but hunting restrictions both in C010ll;JlLl ,:,ncl in Cali fornia (~3me i"icHliJ!]Sml!nt uni t 22 ar e still very rnuc h in order, to ~void the original rnistake of overharvesting. The recommended bag and IJOOoeosion lirnit for Moffat County for the 1964 DeBson is one goose. f\pproved by: Fre:)drC~d lJY: I.d 11iam H. F(utherford I~JilrJlir-8 I-Wf38archer 1-!ctniJul'!._~55 [J,)tC! I _ Jack l~. l;I'ieb ��October, 1965 -9 - JOB COHPLETION RESEARCH State of COLORADO Project No. W-88-R-IO Work Plan No. Personnel: April Bird Investigations Job No. Trapping Period Covered: PROJECT SEGMENT Migratory I Title of Job: REPORT 2 and Banding Ducks and Geese 1, 1964 to Har ch 31, 1965 Charles Hayes, Jack Randall, Jack Frost, Bureau of Sport Fisheries and Wildlife, Errol Ryland, Richard McDonald, Gail Boyd, John Pogorelz, Gurney Crawford, Alfred Hemmert, Robert Kitzmiller, Claude Brock, Steve Peterson, William Carp en ter, Howard Funk, William Rutherford, Richard Hopper,. Jack Grieb, Colorado Game, Fish, and Parks Department. Introduction This report summarizes the trapping and banding activities of Project W-88-R-IO for the segment-year April 1, 1964 to March 31, 1965. Since the analysis of band recoveries will be done under a separate job (Work Plan I, Job 3), little interpretation will be made of these data in this report. This report is limited to a tabulation and factual description of number and location of birds banded during the specified period, with comments on trapping techniques and other pertinent information. Objectives: (1) San Luis Valley.-- Trap and band 1,000 mallards during the summer and pre-season in the mountains west of the Valley floor. Trap and band 1,000 mallards pre-season in the Valley proper. (2) North Parle.-- Trap and band 2,000 ducks of all species during the late summer in North Park. (3) South Platte Valley.-- Trap and band 1,000 ducks of all species during the su~ner on molting areas. Report the tabulation of winter banded birds taken on Work Plan III, Job 3. These will be reported in greater detail in 111-3 but will be included in this report for summary purposes. �-10 - (4) Arkansas Valley.--Trap and band 2,000 Canada gees)e on Two Buttes Reservoir and in the Eades Lakes area. Also report the results of the winter duck banding program (Work Plan III, Job 3) for same reasons listed above. (5) Bonny Reservoir.-~ Report the tabulation of the wipter duck banding program (Work Plan III, Job 3) for same reasons listed above. Techniques Used: Banding oper.;ltionswere roughly divided into three phases -- summer, fall, and winter banding. Summer banding was condpcted on Colorado breeding grounds and emphasized the banding of young duc~s, and molting adults which nested in the vicinity of the banding sites!. Late summer and fall activities consisted of pre-season duck banding in the San Luis Valley as part of an intensive study to evaluate the effects of a special early hunting season on local ducks in that area (Work flan I, Job 12). Winter banding of geese was again confined to the Arkansas Valley wirlter goose flock in southeastern Colorado, and was conducted specifically at Two Buttes Reservoir and Upper Queens Lake (Work Plan II, Job 4a). ~he intensive winter duck banding program was continued on the eastern s~ope of Colorado during the winter of 1964-65 as part of an overall invesEigation of wintering mallard populations (Work Plan III, Job 3). Banding efforts were concentrated in four general areas: (1) Cache la Poudre ValleY r (2) South Platte Valley; (3) Arkansas Valley; and (4) Bonny Reservrir. Four methods of capturing ducks and geese were employed during 1964-p5. These methods included (1) drive trapping with the corral trap during portions of the summer duck banding program; (2) the Salt Plains trkp for late summer, fall, and winter bait-trapping; (3) Colorado ramp-traplfor winter bait-trapping; and (4) the cannon-net trap for bait-trapping ducks and geese in the winter. �- 11- TRAPPING AND BANDING DUCKS AND GEESE Richard M. Hopper Ducks T<~ble 1 shows the number of ducks banded by specie.s and location. A total o 9,303 ducks of 13 species was banded during Segment 10. In addition, %1 American coots were banded. Mallards accounted for 7,799, or about 84 percent of the total ducks banded. A]most 5,800 of these mallards were banded as a result of the intensive Wlilnterbanding program on the eastern slope. Most of the remaining m llards (1,9l9) were banded in the San Luis Valley during the late s mmer and fall of 1964. . I Summer Banding on Molting Areas. --Summer banding on molting areas w~.s limited to North Park (Jackson County). Banding on molting areas in t e South Platte Valley has not been accomplished during the past 2 years b cause of the lack of a concentration of molting ducks on areas previously u led. An effort will be made in the next segment to locate molting . concentrations of ducks in the South Platte Valley. AJtotal of 863 ducks, including 7 American coot, was banded in North Park d ring a 4-day period in August. This total was made up largely of the f llowing species listed in order of abundance: green-winged teal, mjllard, pintail, cinnamon or blue-winged teal, American widgeon, and g~ldwall. Young ducks, as well as molting adults, were banded. �'r. "" - 0 1. - - Nurub o r of Du ck ---------------------- s "" nd by s cd CO ci 0" and Lo ca t ion, Cat'1;c--Ta-s-"(mth-------------- ~)pccies Nor th Park 1'1:1 Ll.a r d 134 G:l(JwaJ 1 Aillcrican l-Jidgeon r: I: cen - Hinged Teal Cinnamon or Blue-Hinged Teal Shoveler Pintail Redhead Lesser Scaup Ring-necked Duck Common Herganser Ruddy Duck American Coot: Total 7 LI Poudrc Valley 1'J a t t.o VnlLcy 1964- 65 San 1 - Tptal by Species Bonny Res. Luis Valley 994 1,919 7,799 L.O lJl~ 15 1.35 28] 222 503 118 104 1 260 88 222 2 395 94 17 17 12 18 100 ---------------983 3,769 20 1 133 6 2 6 ----- 1. 2 1 :3 7 863 29 2,708 36 1,005 3,769 994 9,3yf San Luis Valley Cooperative Study. - Colorado was granted an eaJlY experimental duck hunting season in the San IMis Valley in 1964 for ~he second consecutive year. In or clc'r to i'rOPQrly evaluate the effects ~f this season on the local mallard POpuLII:Ion, suunner banding of young, flightless ducks was abandoned in favor of pre-season banding of flying adu1ts and immatures in late August nnd September. A quota of 2,800 ma l.La rd s \",<3S set for the en tire Va J lcy floor, 700 tl f each sex and age cJass. State personnel agreed to band 1,400 in the area to the north of the Ri(: Grande River. Federal p~o;oJlnc_l were _r~'sp()n~ible for the re~aining 1,400:LTl the area south of t.lic r'i vcr , In add i.t Lou , Co Lo rad o pe r sonn ejl ag r oed to band as marry maIl ar d s as possible in the mountains wes t of the Valley floor in or d c r t.o d c Lc r minn t ho ir contribution to the total harvest of birds during the c.rr ly IHII1t:ing season. �- 13 - Cf'lorado personnel used Salt Plains bait-traps in late August and S ptember to capture and band 2,708 ducks of 13 species in the Valley f oor and in the mountains to the west. Mallards accounted for 1,919, i cluding 505 from mountain lakes. Table 1 shows the species composition afd numbers of other ducks banded in the San Luis Valley during the pre-season banding program. A~ditional information can be found in the Job Completion Report covering tre "San Luis Valley Cooperative Mallard Investigation" (Work Plan I, Job 12) . Winter Duck Banding in Eastern Colorado.-- The winter duck banding Pfogram was continued in eastern Colorado during the winter of 1964-65 tp accumulate age, sex, and fluoroscopy data as part of an overall investigation of mallard populations wintering in this area. Banding wks conducted only after the end of the hunting season. No duck banding wfs accomplished in the Arkansas Valley segment of the study due to an early movement of birds into and out of the Valley before the banding ctews could find time to set up operations here. A total of 5,768 mallards were banded as a result of this program during D cember, 1964, and January and February of 1965. Federal personnel cpoperated considerably with this work. A detailed report on this program will appear as a separate Job Completion Report (Work Plan III, Job 3) an11dthus will not be explained further here. Geese Tlble 2 lists the number of Canada geese banded by location. A total ot 1,108 geese were banded during 1964-65 (segment 10). Most of this, tbtal (987) was banded as a result of the winter trapping program in the Atkansas Valley, with 441 banded at Two Buttes Reservoir and 537 banded at ufPer Queens Reservoir. These geese were caught with the cannon-net trap baited with milo maize. Trapping was conducted only after the hhnting season ended. Age, sex, weight, condition ratios, and body shot ihcidence data were collected from trapped birds prior to releasing. Additional information concerning this work will be covered in detail u1der the report for Work Plan II, Job 4a. Tre above total includes 97 Great Basin Canada geese banded and released a~ Valmont Reservoir near Boulder, Colorado, in the South Platte Valley. Trese birds were raised by captive flocks or artificially hatched from wfld eggs and released as goslings to supplement previous releases to irvestigate the re-establishment of wild breeding flocks. Af additional 33 geese of the Great Basin subspecies were trapped, banded, a~d wing-clipped at a lake in the Denver area. They were then transported B nny Reservoir and released for the purpose of augmenting the breeding p pulation established here. to �- 14 - Table 2.-- Number of Canada Geese Banded by Location, 1964-65 Location Number Arkansas Valley South Platte Valley Bonny Reservoir Total Prepared by: Da te: 978 97 33 1,108 Richard M. Hopper Assistant Wildlife Researcher October , _1~96-,,-5 _ Approved by: Jack R. Grieb prOjectlLeader Wayne W. ~andfort Game Reserrch Chief �October, 1965 - 15 - State of JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH SEGMENT PROJECT COLORADO ------------------------------- Proje t No. W-88-R-10 Migratory Work i1an No. I Job No. Title of Job: Analysis Period I Covered: April of Waterfowl Bird Investigations 3 Banding Data 1, 1964 to March 31, 1965 ABSTRACT is of recoveries from birds of the Short Grass Prairie Population banded Texas panhandle, southeast Colorado, Northeast New Mexico, and the ces of Alberta and Saskatchewan indicates that juvenile birds banded the first hunting season had the same first year annual mortality rates as ad Its banded at a similar time (.28 for both). Comparison of mortality rates !by the composite dynamic and composite relative recovery methods indicated close agreement between all bandings done on the wintering areas (range in est1tmated mortality was .26 to .32 all areas and years). Thus, it is estimated that the Short Grass Prairie population has been sustaining an average annua mortality of about .28 during the interval 1950 to present. Pre-season bandi g in Canada revealed that birds-of-the-year experiencing their first hunti g season had a first year mortality rate of about 50 per cen t; and wer e 1.6 t mes as apt to be bagged as adults. Adults banded pre-season had similar ity rates as adults banded post-season. ��- 17 - ANALYSIS OF WATERFO~~ BANDING DATA Jack R. Grieb Intrqduction: Updating of the Canada Goose band recovery IBM deck by the Migr~tory Bird Population Station during this segment has permitted an examinati~n of mortality rates associated with the Short Grass Prairie Canada Goose Population. Since data were also available from birds banded in Texas by Bure~u of Sport Fisheri.es and ~]ild1ife, from New Mexico by the New Mexico Game and 1'IishDepartment,and from Canada by Ce.nadian Wildlife Service and Colorado pers9nnel, these are included in the analysis to give a general picture of mortility of this flock. ObjeJtives: To analyze recoveries from Canada geese banded in southeast Colorado, the Texas panhandle, northeast New Mexico, and staging areas in Alberta and askatchewan. Procedures: Computiatidoncofannuaf onor caLd ty rates was accomplished mainly by composite dynamic type analysis where a good series of band recovery data were avai~able (Hickey, 1952). However, where incomplete series were available part~cu1arly in m9re recent bandings, a system of composite relative recovery rates was used to estimate annual mortality (Geis and Smith, 1963). Sinc~ the majority of banding of the Short Grass Prairie Population was done duri~g the winter after the hunting season, annual mortality will cover the inte~va1 January 15 to January 15. Only in one case where banding was done in Canada during September and October would the interval be different. Here I it w~uld run from October 1 to October 1 each year. Resu~ts: jWinter banding. -- Accurate estimates of annual mortality of the short grass Canada goose population requires that adequate and representative samples be tailkenfrom all wintering components of the population. Thus, we assume that bird banded at Two Buttes are representative of birds which during the banding Interval wintered completely at Two Buttes, or some years, especially recent y, at other lakes in. the Arkansas Valley complex. This problem is not as accute in other wintering areas since during the banding inte~val, most birds in the Texas panhandle were either at Waggoner Ranch or Buffalo Lake National Wildlife Refuge. During the 1964-65 banding season a pOS~ble answer to the question of whether Two Buttes banding was representative of all southeast Colorado wintering birds was initiated by substantial band ngs at both Two Buttes and Eades Lakes, 50 miles to the north. However, it III require two more years of recoveries to provide data for the solution of tiis problem. . General information regarding distribution of wintering goose flocks in the Arka+sas Valley of Colorado and their interchange during the hunting season stro~gly indicate that individual flocks are not stable during the fall and winter period. In fact, there appears to be considerable movement back and �- In forth depending upon a variety of conditions not fully understood at thif time. For the purpose of this analysis, it will be assumed that mortality estimates from Two Buttes are representative of all southeast Colorado a-ease Likewise that this condition is met for all other wintering segments in exas and New Mexico. Comparison of mortality rates from birds banded as juveniles with birds anded as adults at Two Buttes during all banding years (composite dynamic meth d) indicates similar annual mortality (.28 for both adults and juveniles for first year estimates, and .29 and .27 for juveniles and adults respectiv~ly for all years). This is logical since juveniles have experienced the fi~st hunting season by the time they are banded and are no longer more vunerable to the gun than adults. This does not infer that there is not increasedl juvenile vunerability which occurs during the first hunting season since there definitely is, and will be discussed later. Table 1. -- Annual Mortality Area Banding Rates, Years Short Grass Prairie Canada Goose Pop lation. Mortality Rates Second Plus Years First Year Ail Years I Ccu:positc Dynamic I1ethod Two Buttes Haggoner Ranch New Mexico 1951-63 1955-59 1958-62 Composite T~vo Buttes Waggoner 1/ T~"O Bu ttesNew Mexico .30 .26 .30 .37 .24 .22 Relative Recovery .28 1.32 Rate Method 1951-63 .28 .28 1955-59 1955-59 .26 1.31 1958-62 1/ Comparison of annual mortality banding and recovery years. 1.27 between Haggoner and 'I'woButtes during similar Examination of annual mortality estimates be tween areas by the composite dynamic and relative recovery rate methods is given in Table 1. These data indi ate very close agreement between areas and methods ranging from annual mortajity estimates of .27 to .32. If these estimates Here weighted in favor of a eas where the largest population and the greatest banding occurred (at T~\O n t t es and \oJaggonerRanch), we find even closer agreement <.27 and .28 annual m rtality rate range). Thus, it seems safe to assume that the short grass prairie population has an annual mortality rate of about .28 during the c:ars of banding (1951 to present). �- 19 - Tablel2. -- First Year Recovery Rates Sho~t Grass Prairie Pppulation. Bandijg Year 1950-$1 1951'.•~2 1952-53 1953-~4 1954-55 1955-$6 1956-~7 1957-58 1958-~9 1959-~0 . I I ~:~~:~i 1962-63 Colorado Area Waggoner New Mexico 11.8 10.1 9.3 13.2 8.5 11.3 9.1 9.8 7.9 6.0 3.9 10.0 9.3 4.7 3.6 5.4 13 •. 3 4.0 9.4 12.8 6.8 1963-f4 One f~IUlt of this analysis method is that we are dealing with averages, and recen changes in mortality would be confounded in the total analysis. If first year annual mortality estimates are directly correlated with first year recov ry rates, these rates may provide us with a clue to changes in mortality of sub-adults or adults year by year. This in turn may permit gross .evalurtion of the effect of certain regulations on total mortality or aid in evalurtion of the influence of other factors on the harvest. a unforfunately, only three years banding cohorts have sufficient returns to permif reasonable estimates of first year annual mortality upon which to conduct a correlation test. But from these, it appears that first year recovery rates and first year annual mortality estimates exhibit a strong direct corre ation. If ref.overy rates do reflect annual mortality then it is probable that during the t~me of this banding, annual mortality of these birds after their first huntieg season did not increase and in fact may actually have decreased to some extent. This may be correlated with the number of young birds in the populbtion during any given year which would relieve harvest on the older birdsl, which in turn would cause the recovery rate to drop during those years that the per cent of young in the population increased. One i, teresting aspect is that it appears the older the birds become, the lower the annual mortality rate. This is indicated by the fact that 'oleare still recapturing a fair number of birds banded during 1950-52 in our trapping operations at Two Buttes but these are not showing up in hunting recoveries. ~re-season banding. -- During the fall of 1960 and again in 1962 and 1963 a banGing crew from various states cooperated with the Canadian Wildlife Service to band geese in Alberta and Saskatchewan during September and October. �20 Emphasis was placed on small Canada geese of the Short Grass Prairie pop _ lation as they arrived on the staging area. One assumption which must be made in analyzing data accruing from such banding is that usable data m the first hunting season could be obtained. While all the birds wer.enOf banded at the very first of the hunting season in Canada, considering th hunting pressure, and movement of birds into the area from the far north r it seems highly probable, and will hereinafter be assumed that hunting PriOr to completion of banding did not affect the band recovery information. fr , Analysis of band recovery data by both methods described before show thaF mortality is vastly different between adults and juveniles during the first hunting season (Table 3). This strongly reflects the increased vunerabitity of young birds to hunting which during the three years of banding indicated that juveniles were 1.6 times more likely to be bagged than adults durin their first year of hunting. (Table 4). The two mortality estimates ag~ee closely for juveniles but differ sharply for adults. This is a result 0 a bias in the relative recovery rate analysis for adults where the per cenrecovery of the 1963-64 banding was very low coupled with a banded cohorf which was more than the total of the two previous years. This completely dominated the analysis. By eliminating the third year banding and compU~ing mortality rates the estimate is .44 for adults which is comparable with he .49 estimated by composite dynamic method. Use of the first year recov ry rate of .53 for juveniles and .36 for adults indicates that birds of the year have about a 50-50 chance for survival through the first hunting se~son while adults survive at about the same rate as birds banded after season~ Table 3. -- Annual Mortality Rates Short Grass Prairie Population. Calc lated by Composite Dynamic and Relative Recovery Rate Methods -- P eHunting Season Banded Birds. Area Age Banding Years 1st Year Mortality Rates Two plus Years Composite Dynaoic I Alberta and Saskatchewan Juv. 1960-64 .53 .59 Alberta and Saskatchewan Adults 1960-64 .36 .61 Composite Relative Recovery Rate Alberta and Saskatchewan Juv. 1960-6t~ .51 Alberta and Saskatchewan Adults 1960-64 .19 All Year8 += �- 21 - Comparison First Year Recovery Rates. Short Grass Prairie Population. Table, 4. yearl Bande~ Alberta Saskatchewan Alberta and Saskatchewan 1962- 3 1963-64 r Mean Precent First Year Recovery Adult Juvenile Area 1960_ I 61 Pre-Season Banding C~nada I 6.3% 8.5 6.8% 13.7 7.1 13.9 21.9 34.4 7.3 11.5 Juven!iles 1.6 times more likely to be bagged than adults. LITERATURE CITED Geis,1 Ae1red D. and Richard D. Taber. 1963. Measuring hunting and other mortality. In Wildlife Investigational Techniques (Second Edition). I rhe Wildlife Society. Hicke , Joseph J. 1952. Survival studies of banded birds. Spec. Scientific eport: Wildlife No. 15. U.S.D.I., Fish and Wildlife Service. Prepared by· I Date: Jack R. Grieb . Wildlife Researcher ----- October, 196:; Approved by: Wayne Hn Sandfort Game Rescnrch Chief ��October, 1965 - 23 - JOB COMPLETION RESEARCH REPORT PROJECT SEGMENT State of Colorado prOj1ct No. W-88-R-IO Migratory Work Plan No. I: -----~~------------------ Job No. .Ti tIe of Job: waterfowl Bird Investigations 5 Kill Survey ABSTRACT !OUCk seasons were similar to the previous year both in regulation and participation, but well below the average. Number of duck l hunters were up slightly from 1963 but the average seasonal bag was down~reSUlting in a total kill estimate somewhat lower for 1964 than the revious year. Number of ducks held up well throughout the season, but warm sunny days contributed to a lack of movement during dayligh hours which in turn meant generally poor hunting. The west slop~ enjoyed a long successful season with increases noted in average bag ~Sizes over last year. The San Luis Valley experimental season was high y successful both in terms of hunter participation and harvest of m llards. Harvest of Canada Geese in 1964 was the highest ever recorded in C lorado! This was a result of a record number of bird~ distribute on all lakes of the Arkansas valley which spread the hunting pressure and provided better hunting; and, the strong increase in ~oos~ h~rvest in north-cent~al.C?lorado. Larime~ and wel~ counties ln partlcular have become slgnlflcant goose huntlng countles as a result of intensive goose man~gement procedures. Complete statistics covering numbers of duck and goose hunters, and harvest are given i.n the text. �- 24 - Objectives: To estimate the state harvest of waterfowl for the 1964-65 hunting season by species, by county, and by intervals of the season. Methods: Techniques were similar to those used in the past with hunters names drawn in a mechanical random fashion from license stubs. A pre-season contact was not sent because data from last year indicated that it did not significantly increase the accuracy of the informatr~n reported. This made it possible to use current licenses instead of those from the previous year. One follow-up I Ivas sent to non-reporting hunters after an interval of two to three weeks. The questionnaire remained the same in form and context asl last year. Questionnaires were sent to 12,000 randomly selected license buyeri in 1964 and a total of 8,981 responded for a return of 74.8 per cent. Of the 8,981 returns, 477 were unusable for various reasons 4,785 reported hunting, and 3,707 bought a license but did nothun • Most of the hunters in this last category were found to have pur- I chased a combination hunting and fishing license which was used for fishing only. Thus, of the total license sales of 184,163 during I 1964, it is estimated that 103,628 hunters, hunted one or more species of small game. �- 25 - Waterfowl Kill Survey Jack R. Grie.b Resu ts: Colorado duck stamp sales are plotted in Table I revealing that the 1964 sale of 25,282 was significantly larger than the previou~ year. This increase is attributed to a slight relaxation of huntling regulations for the 1964 season, and the experimental San Luis Valley duck season which probably encouraged hunters to participate. 1. -- Duck Stamp Sales for Colorado Yea~ Number of stamps sold Per cent change from previous year 196~ 196 3 1 1962 1961 1960 1959 1958 1957 1956 1955 195 25,282 22,940 17,701 24,854 30~592 31.431 41,897 41,794 36.303 39,107 32,450 + 10.2 + 29.6 - 28.8 - 18.8 2.7 - 24.9 + .02 + 15.1 7.2 + 20.5 + 20.5 1 Tablr 2 classifies Duck Stamp buyers by the type of hunting in which they engaged for the past nine years. Thus, it appears that number of duck hunters luere up significantly from 1963, but still considerably below the average. Also, number of goose hunters were about batk to averrge. There appeared to be an increase in days hunted for both ducks and geese which is a healthy sign that waterfowl hunting is increasing in p'pularity. Duck Harvest Hunt ngstatistics of the 1964 season are tabulated and compared with r·~it years in Table 3. This reveals that total estimated retrieved kill 01 7 ,756 was slightly below that of the previous year. In addition, it ws estimated that 9,099 birds were crippled for a wounding loss of 10.6 per cent permitting an estimated total hunting mortality of 85,855 duck for 1964 in Colorado. spectes composition of the 1964 bag is listed in Table 4 and compared with the average of the nine previous years. These data indicate that �- 26 Table 2. -- Estimated Number of Duck and Goose Huntei-s , Average Number Days Hunted and Season Length, by Year. Year Number of duck hunters Number of goose hunters Average number days hunted for ducks geese Season length (days) ducks geese 1964 1963 1962 1961 1960 1959 1958 1957 1956 1955 1954 19,189 17,989 13,918 22,920 29,480 29,060 38,773 37,166 34,793 37,816 31,834 l3~678 10~841 9,159 11,245 14,107 13,647 14,705 12,057 12,477 17 ,634 12,136 6.30 5.66 401:.1 1/ 7.37 6.64 5.27 4.40 6.05 5.70 5.78 6.52 7.37 8.87 7.64 3511 25!:..1 30 60 50 90 75 75 75 60 75 75 75 60 75 75 60 60 60 60 60 possessi n limit ducks 4-8]) 4-3Y 2_411 3-6 3-6 4-8 4-8 5-10 5-10 5-10 5-10 "-' s, '" 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2-2 2 2 Y Hunting regulations for East Slope. West Slope had a general seasor of 75 days with 4 ducks in bag, and 8 in possession in 1962, and 90 dats, 4 in bag and r, in possession in 1963 and 1964. Two mallards allowed in bag, and four in possession. One mallard allowed in bag, and two in possession. Table 3. -- Duck Harvest Statistics, 1954-1964. Year Slope 1964 East Hest TOTAL East West TOTAL 1963 1962 1961 1960 1959 1958 1957 1956 1955 1954 East West TOTAL Number of hunters Avera8e seasonal bag Total estimated harvest J 6,311 4.0 4.0 4.0 5.1 4.9 65,244 111512 76,756 80,167 8,503 88,670 2.6 3.5 2.8 3.8 5.0 4.2 6.1 6.8 5.9 6.7 5.6 29,507 8,992 38,499 86,408 147,400 122,924 236,515 254,587 185,737 253,367 179,856 21878 19,189 15,627 2,362 17,989 11,349 22569 13,918 22,920 29,480 29,060 38,773 37,166 34,793 37,816 31,834 .hL Wounding loss Percent number 10.6 10.4 10.6 10.7 Tota estimaTed hunti1g mortal Ity 10.6 7,764 12335 9,099 9,636 916 10,552 89, 03 9 ,19 -99,t22 13.5 11.7 13.1 21.4 l3.1 15.5 12.3 14.1 16.3 13.1 14.5 4,603 11187 5,790 23,608 22,257 22,417 33,088 41,679 36,195 38,182 30,396 34,eO 102 79 44,'89 6 169, 57 145, 41 269'r3 296, 66 221, 32 291, ~49 210',52 .s.: 73; 08 122 ~l~7 85,: 55 llO'r I �- 27 Ta Ie 4. -- Species Composition of the Bag. I 1964 Number % of Killed Total SP~cies Ma~lard Pirltai1 GrJen-wing Teal B1 e-wing Teal Ba dPate Ga wall 1 ~~1~:l1er 59,639 2,226 5,603 1,689 921 921 614 537 77 .7 2.9 7.3 2.2 1.2 1.2 .8 .7 Re~head ca~vasback Ot lers and Unknown ---- --- 4,605 6.0 TO~AL 76,756 100.0 10-year average 1954 - 1963 Number % of Killed Total 107,497 5,162 14,354 6,077 1,707 4,662 1,831 1,223 1,411 1,195 14,772 % change 1964 from 10-year Average Harvest 67.3 3.2 9.0 3.8 1.1 2.9 1.1 0.8 0.9 0.7 9.2 - 44.5 - 56.9 - 61.0 - 72.2 - 46.0 - 80.2 - 66.5 - 56.1 159,891 100.0 - 52.0 - 68.8 toJal duck harvest was 52 per cent less than the nine-year average because Of1restricted regulations, reduced number of hunters, and lower average se sonal bag than the past. Comparison of eastern and western slope species composition is made in Table 5 revealing that despite the longer hunting season which began ea lier in the fallon pe the western slope, the mallard made up an even greater I cent of the total harvest there as compared to the east slope. This probably indicates a lack of other species in this area during the entire faJl period so that hunting season, regardless of when set is bound to pi ce pressure on mallards. I Duck kill and hunting pressure by 10-day intervals of the season for b01h east and west slopes is tablulated in Table 6. These data show that ha~est for each area was fairly evenly divided over the season intervals injicating that no one part of the season was better than the other. It is fairly obvious that east slope hunters had to pack their hunting into thl short season allotted them while west elopers could spread their huntine �- 28 Table 5. -- Comparison of Species Composition Duck Harvest. between East and West Slope East SloEe Number % of Killed Total West S10 e Number % of Killed Total Mallard Pintar1 Green-wing Teal Blue-wing Teal Baldpate Gadwall Shoveller Scaup Others 49,063 2,284 5,480 1,566 718 979 587 326 4,241 75.2 3.5 2.4 1.1 1.5 .9 .5 6.5 9,875 173 449 173 161 58 35 81 507 TOTAL 65,244 100.0 11,512 Species 8.l~ 185.8 1.5 3.9 1.5 1.4 .5 .3 .7 4.4 Table 6. -- Ducks Bagged and Hunting Pressure by 10-day Intervals 0 1964 Season. Estimated Birds Bagged No. of % Total Ducks Kill Dates Estimated Hunting Pressure No. of % of Total Hunters Hunters EAST SLOPE Oct. Nov. Dec. Dec. Dec. l-l&U 21-30 1-10 11-20 21-30 11,744 18,464 13,375 12,462 9,199 18.0 28.3 20.5 19.1 14.1 1,810 5,578 4,714 4,110 2,854 1,278 1,254 1,186 1,819 1,658 1,117 1,254 1,071 875 11.1 10.9 10.3 15.8 14.4 9.7 10.9 9.3 7.6 823 754 737 907 1,097 907 1,045 754 581 11 Experimental San Luis Valley Duck Season. Average Bag by Periods I 11.1 34.2 28.9 25.2 17.5 WEST SLOPE Oct. 13-22 Oct. 23-Nov. 1 Nov. 2-11 Nov. 12-21 Nov. 22-Dec. 1 Dec. 2-11 Dec. 12-21 Dec. 22-31 Jan. 1-10 the 61.5 3.3 2.8 3.0 3(2 I 28.6 26.2 25.6 31.5 38.1 31.5 36.3 26.2 20.2 11.6 1.7 11.6 2.0 115 1 2 112 1 4 1 5 �- 29 - °r't over the longer season. In this respect, it is significant that desp i.t;e t e longer season and more liberal bag limits, west slope and east slope hlnters had similar season bag sizes (4.0) for 1964. San Luis Valley Experimental Season. -- This was the second year of an ererimental duck hunting season in the San Luis Valley. Reasons for the s ason and results have been reported in detail elsewhere, and will not be repeated I • However, information gained through this survey on this season w~ll be presented and compared with similar data gathered by the Bureau of sJort Fisheries and Wildlife. ' According to questionnaire data, 1810 hunters bagged an estimated 1 ,744 ducks in the San Luis Valley during the experimental season, October 1 This is compared to an estimated 1,594 hunters and 10,903 for the previous year.. Thus, number of hunters were increa~ed b t because of a slightly smaller experimental season average bag, kill was hat i creased in the same proportion. Residence of hunters participating in the San Luis Valley special son is presented in Table 7. Valley residents accounted for 47.1% of hunters during the pre-season. Response to this season was wide-spread v erous hunters came from the vicinities of Denver, Colorado Springs, and blo, and surprisingly enough some west-slope hunters hunted in the Valley pite the opening of their season On October 13. Goose Harvest Hunting statistics of the goose season presented in Table 8 estimates 13 678 hunters bagged an average of 1.7 geese during the season for a total es-imated harvest of 24,123 birds. In addition, another 5,624 birds were reforted wounded but not retrieved for a wounding loss of 18.9 per cent. Thfs permits a total hunting mortality estimate for Colorado during 1964 of 29,747 geese. �- 30 - Table 7. -- Residence of Hunters Hunting in the San Luis Valley Experimental County Residence of Hunters Hunters 1964 Estimated Adams Alamosa Arapahoe Ar chu Let;a Bent Boulder Chaffee Conejos Costilla Custer Delta Denver EI Paso Fremont Jefferson Lake La Plata La s Animas Mineral Pitkin Pueblo Rio Grande Saguache Held 1-18, 1964. Duck Season, October No. % 1963 Estimated 34 1.9 37 107 52 18 18 18 5.8 22/. 56 2.9 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.9 7.7 1.0 34 139 18 192 226 18 33 18 18 3!~ 18 192 521 69 % 18 130 1 2 8 1 6 9 1 2 III 10.6 12.5 1.8 1.0 1.8 1.0 1.0 1.9 1.0 10.6 28.8 3.8 33 No. 18 18 18 112 1 2 93 518' 186 18 37 n' 7 1 2 2 3 1.2 112 1.2 18 18 18 f 130 317 111 18 8.1 1917 6 9 1.2 I TOTALS 1,310 Species composition 100.0 1,594 of geese killed was similar between all ten . of the survey being 90 per cent or above Canada percentages we re 10010 "other and unknown" geese. I ears The remaining species of geese, and were proba 1y 1 mainly Canada geese which the hunters were not able to correctly iden~ifY' It is known that there were a few snow geese taken in Colorado h'.lntingseason and an even smaller number The 1964 goose hunting food conditions Census figures taken at weekly an above number of white fronts. season was characterized in the Arkansas Valley In the Arkansas in Colorado seemed to be distributet.1 on all water bodies Two Futtea area as in the past. I by good water and fair during the fall and winter per ods , intervals of geese present during this Valley during the season. I indicated Thes rather than concentratin birds in t he �- 31 - T+le 8. -- Goose Harvest Statistics, 1954-1964. I Y~ar Slope Number of hunters 1 164 East Wes! TOTAL 13,295 383 13,678 East West TOTAL 10,462 379 10,841 ~ East 8,828 331 9,159 1.5 1.3 1.5 13,671 11,245 14,107 13,647 14,705 12,057 1l,541 17,364 12,136 1.3 1.1 1.6 1.3 1.2 1.0 1.0 .7 14,056 15,659 21,972 19,704 14,589 11,310 17,711 8,168 1963 z t ~ TOTAL 1 61 1 50 1 59 1~58 1957 1 156 1955 1j54 J Average seasonal bag Total estimated harvest -=.1 1.8 23,931 192 24,:!.23 1.7 1.7 1.6 17,785 114 17,899 Wounding loss Percent Number 19.0 Total est:!.mated hunting mortality 18.9 ° 5,6241/ 05,624 29,555 192 29,747 15.2 3,184 / 20,969 114 21,083 -2_ 01- 17 .8 3,184 13,241 19.5 _0_ 3,2181/ 16,459 __ ~dO 19.1 3,218 16,889 24.5 20.7 17 .8 22.3 23.5 21.6 18.3 22.8 4,568 4,087 4,730 5,655 4,473 3,116 3,884 2,410 18,624 19,746 26,702 25,359 19,062 14,426 21,248 10,578 0.=. 1~30 T1n-year average goose harvest is 15,472 -- 1954-1963 11 No cripples reported on the west slope. Comparison of the 1964 season with past years shows an increasein number 0, hunters and total harvest. Average seasonal bag increased from previous Yjars, indicating that the quality of hunting was equal to the record year of 1~59. I One of the main reasons for increased harvest was the increase a sociated with the flock of Canada geese wintering in Larimer and Weld C unties. Last year goose pcrmit~a six bird season limit, and other srecial regulations were established for Larimer County. A random sample d awn from the 1608 permits issued Judicated that 181 obtained permits but I dtd not use them, 1427 hunters hunted geese one or more times b,agging 504 grese in Larimer County, and 181 birds in Weld County. The goose kill for Larimer County is regarded as a good estimate; however, that for Weld County �- 32 - considers the bag of only those hunters obtaining a Larmier County Permir' Since it was not necessary to have a permit to hunt in Weld County, it i l obvious that an unknown number of birds were taken over and above the estimate given above. Next year it is hoped that our system will be imploved so that we will be able to obtain a better estimate of harvest in both Larimer and Weld Counties. Waterfo'07lHarvest by County The reader is cautioned that inforocation presented in this section s subject to a great deal more error in accuracy than estimates in previouc sections, since the original sample has been broken down to a county basts, thus decreasing the size of samples on which to base estimates. This is probably even more true of geese than ducks, because many more duck hunters. Consequently, there were it is realized that in some count' ~S, both duck and goose kill have been over-estimated, and in others, under- l estimated. However, despite this error, these data represent the most accurate information on this subject possible at the present time. Tables 9 and 10 compare the 1964 duck and goose kill respectively w th average of previous seasons, by county, within each waterfowl region. T ese regional divisions of the State were located on the basis of waterfowl mlgration, location, and topography; and permit a closer evaluation of kill, yearly I changes in kill, and the effect of different types of hunting seasons on various portions of Colorado. Regional recap of the 1964 duck season as summarized at the conClUSj~on of Table 9 shows that the harvest was significantly less in all regions the State compared to the nine-year average. f This was undoubtedly a res lIt of the short seasons and small bag limits, on the eastern slope, but no explanation can be offered for the decrease found on the western slope. �- 33 - T ble 9. -- Duck Kill by Region and County. H terfowl ~egion a~d County 1964 Duck Kill Number Per cent Killed of Total I Estimated 1964 Hunting Pressu:re Number Per cent Hunters of Total Ten-year Averag~ 1954-19h} __ Number Per cent Killed of Total East SloEe N RTHEAST Cheyenne Kit Carson 130 Lincoln 65 Logan 3,197 Morgan 7,8~5 Phillips Sedgwick 2,349 196 IHaShington Yuma 391 NQRTllEAST TOTAL 14,223 -.,--- 1.9 .9 1.5 24.3 603 1,742 1,394 8,390 10,157 270 4,831 2,085 3 25? 32,729 23.7 163 669 245 98 326 163 489 408 604 3 165 1.0 4.1 1.5 .6 2.0 1.0 3.0 2.5 3.7 19.4 1,576 3,468 3,561 765 1,948 1,2~)4 2,101 4,815 3.532 23 060 1.1 2.5 2.6 .6 1.4 .9 1.5 3.5 2~ ___ 16,7 4.6 2.2 5.5 .1 995 359 1,256 33 6.1 2.2 7.7 .2 391 1,305 3,915 12,528 2.6,228 .6 2.0 6.0 19.2 40.•2 82 277 1,028 2 756 6,786 .5 1.7 6.3 111.9 /-1-1.6 8,402 1,446 8,352 114 352 1,151 1,657 12,195 29 927 63,5% 6.1 1.0 6.0 .1 .3 .8 1.2 8.8 21.6 S N LUIS VALLEY i\12mosa 1,240 Conejos 2,871 Costilla 261 Ri.o Grande 8,090 SaguClche - 1,044 .Si}~'; LUIS V.TOTAL 132506 1.9 4.4 .4 12.4 1.6 20.7 522 359 33 1,076 228 22218 3.• 2 2.2 .2 6.6 1.4 13.6 3,917 2,480 609 2.8 1.8 .4 3.5 3.0 1l.S 12;"1 65 16 1,077 2,103 .4 .1 6.6 12;-9 3.6 .3 .6 21.8 310 147 245 3,963 .2 4.4 .7 .7 1.1 1.2 2.1 2.0 4.3 16.7 3,001 1,435 3,588 65 SdUTHEAST BdcCl Bent Crowley Huerfano Kiowa Las Animas Otero 130 2,871 457 457 718 783 1,370 Pr owe r s 1,305 -1..:..B05 Pueblo SgUTHEAS'.rTOTAL 1~896 -I C~NTRAL Aclnms Arapahoe Boulder Doug l a s Elbert El Paso Jefferson Larimer Held C t1TML TOTA L .2 .1 l~.9 4,8/+0 4 179 16 025 .4 1.3 1.0 6.1 7.3 .2 3.5 1.5 2.4 4.5.~=_~ �Table 9. -- Duck Kill by Region and County. (continued) I Waterfowl Region and County HIGH COUNTRY Chaffee Clear Creek Custer Fremont Gilpin Jackson Lake Park Teller HIGH COUNTRY TOTAL =: NORTHWEST Garfield Moffat Rio Blanco Routt NORTHWEST TOT4L WEST CENTRAL Delta Mesa Montrose Ouray W, CENTRA L TOTA L : SOUTHWEST Archuleta Dolores Hinsdale La Plata Mineral Montezuma San Juan San Miguel SOUTHWEST TOTAL : HIGH COUNTRY Eagle Grand Gunnison Pitkin Summit _l!!QHCOUNTRY TOTAL - 1964 Duck Kill Number Per cent Killed of Total 65 _._ ...•. .1 261 .4 .1 - 65- Estimated 1964 Hunting Pressure Number Per cent Hunters of Total 65 .. '.4 --82 16 .5 ''.1 t t 16 .1 391 .6 179 l~1 1- Ten-year Average 1954-19!53 Number P~r c',::n:t' Killed Tot.'1l or I 584 3 368 1,028 219 231 361 61 2!855 West SloEe. 12.2 1.0 5.6 1.1 19.9 291 86 170 118 665 10.1 3.0 5.9 4.1 23.1 1,704 617 806 12°10 42137 3,418 2,959 622 29.7 25.7 5.4 780 443 273 27.1 15.4 9.5 62999 60.8 1,496 52.0 2,812 5,037 2,935 228 112<2.1.2 46 .4 35 1.2 2.3 4.6 35 118 1.2 4.1 115 23 1.0 .2 86 17 3.0 .6 460 507 US 92 69 12243 4.0 4.4 1.0 .8 .6 10.8 .3 .., •I .2 .2 I ' .31 '.t.__ 2,2 ~,- 8.3 3.0 3.9 4.9 0•1 3 13.8 214.7 14.1f It.l 5ft·Q. I 265 530 8,5 t. I 1,404 115 645 127 2,291 979 .4 164 30 20 1,708 132 930 291 10.1 225 32209 118 170 86 35 17 426 4.1 5.9 3.0 1.2 .6 14!8 913 263 599 255 78 22108 .8 .1 .1 8.4 I .6 r:~ 1.1 lj5.,~ - I 5 t· ~.3 2.9 1.2 1.4 1ci>.~_ �- 35 - Table 9. -- Duck Kill by Region and County. Hat rfow1 Re ion and County ~continued) Estimated 1964 Hunting Pressure Number Per cent Hunters of Total 1964 Duck Kill Number Per cent Killed of Total Ten-year AverPbc 1954-1963 Number Per cent: Killed of Total Summary by Region NOR~HEAST SOU~HEAST CEN'llRAL SANJLUIS VALLEY HIG I COUNTRY (E) NOR'11HWEST HES'liCENTRAL SOUlJEHEST HIGH COUNTRY (W) TOTAL OF REG]pNS 14,223 10,896 26,228 13,506 391 2,291 6,999 979 ~1~.2~4~3~ 18.5 14.2 34.2 17.6 .5 3.0 9.1 1.3 ~1~.6~ 3,963 3,165 6,786 2,218 179 665 1,496 291 ~4~2~6 20.7 32,729 20.5 16.5 23,060 14.4 35.3 63,596 40,5 11.6 16,025 10.0 .9 2,855 1.8 3.5 4,137 2.6 7.8 11,012 6.9 1.5 3?209 2.0 ~2~.~2 __ ~2~,=10~8~ __ ~1~_ 76,756 100.0 19,189 100.0 158,731 lCO.O EASTiSLOPE WEST\ SLOPE 65~244 11,512 85.0 15.0 16,311 2,878 85.0 15.0 138,265 20,466 87.1 12.9 Tabl~ 10. -- Goose Kill by Region and County. Hate fowl Reg~on and ounty 1964 Goose Kill Number Per cent Killed of Total Ten-year Average 1954-1963 Number Per cent Killed of Total East Slope NORTlillAST Ch1yenne Ki~ Carson Lincoln I LOran Horgan Phillips Se I get-lick \-In hington YUla NOl',TlEAST TOTAL 2,082 La Animas ro Pr wers Pw_b10 SOUT~1EASTTOTAL 3,278 2,776 838 -598 6,269 168 503 3,182 ___ 8~6~2~ 18,474 OtI Estimated 1964 Hunting Pressure Number Per cent Hunters of Total o o 27 .2 o o o 16 41 o .3 11 .1 8.3 .9 10.9 165 407 l.i. 1,986 40 120 1,448 3 48 48 .2 o o .3 2.7 1.1 71 t .4 .5 .2 123 .8 13.9 89t,- 8.7 40 146 27 1,848 13.7 11.6 3.5 2.5 26.2 .7 2.1 13.3 ~3~.~6 77.2 1,502 1,050 612 266 2,445 120 253 1,476 ~29~2~ 8,016 11.3 5,286 7.9 1,440 4.6 690 2.0 110 18.4 2,704 .9 125 1.9 263 11.1 2,292 ~2~.~2 ~68~ 60.3 12~78 .2 .1 .3 57 34.4 9.4 4.5 ,.7 17.6 .8 1.7 14.9 ~ .. 4 84.[, �- 36 - Table 10. -- Goose Kill by Region and County. I (continued) I Waterfowl Region and County CENTRAL Adams Arapahoe Boulder Douglas Elbert El Paso Jefferson Larimer Weld CENTRAL TOTAL SAN LUIS VALLEY Alamosa Conejos Costilla Rio Grande Saguache SAN LUIS V. TOTAL HIGH COUNTRY (EAST) Chaffee Clear Creek Custer Fremont Gilpin Jackson Lake Park Teller HIGH COUNTRY TOTAL - " 1964 Goose Kill Number Per cent Killed of Total 503 550 120 Estimated 1964 Hunting Pressure Number Per cent Hunters of Total 386 372 186 2.1 2.3 .5 2.') 2.8 1.4 Ten-year +verCJ-g,:'1954-1963 Number Per eerie Killed Tot::>,:, 316 95 54 9 0 335 646 862 3 016 0 1.4 2.7 3.6 12,6 66 160 745 1:197 3 112 .5 1.2 5.6 9.0 23.4 11 140 67 532 1,224 0 335 24 0 1.4 27 199 66 .2 1.5 .5 5 80 129 3 .1 ff I 2.1 .6 .4 . 1 ,- .1 .9 .4 3.5 8,J. ... - .- t .J .8 t 359 1.5 292 2.2 217 1.3 .- 0 0 27 .2 25 .2 3 t .Z- 0 0 27 .2 28 17 46 West Sl£E.E2. NORTHWEST Garfield Moffat Rio Blanco Routt NORTHWEST TOTAL WEST CENTRAL Delta Mesa Montrose Ouray W. CENT~L TOTAL 16"3 44.3 78 40.0 105 27.4 0 78 0 40.0 34 139 36.1+ 63 38 19 38 20.0 10.0 20.0 52 87 52 13.6 22.8 13.6 8 7~7 6 20 19.2. 95 50.0 191 50.0 34 32.7 9.0 ~O:~.:::; 5.B �- 37 - Table 10. -- Goose Kill by Region and County. 1964 Goose Kill Number Killed Per cent of Total (continued) Estimated 1964 Ten-yeu r Averagl'. Hunting Pr.e~~.,!~ _ 1964-1.~.~,_3 _ .._ ... Number Per cent Number Pcr ccn., Hunters of Total Killed of Tot;)l SOUTHWEST --- Arc ru Le t a Dol)ores Hinsdale La ~lata Mineral J:.lonltezuma San Juan Sa Miguel SCUTHHEST TOTAL 0 " 0 .•."-- --~. 9.0 3 2.9 3 2,_~=, 4 3.,g- --"- -"-- HIGH~OUNTRY (West) Ea Le Grand Gun ison Pit in sum~it mGH OUNTRY TOTAL 35 0 .0 35 9.0 '19 10.0 18 4.6 --19 10.0 18 4.6 3.8-- {- e . NORT¥AST SOUT~AST CENTIm.L SAN UIS VALLEY HIGH COUNTRY (E) NORT EST WEST CENTRAL SOUT .JEST HIGH OUNTRY (W) TOTA OF EAST SLOPE WF<:'l' SLOPE 2,082 18,474 3,016 359 0 78 95 0 19 Summary by Region 8.6 1,848 76.6 8,016 12.5 3,112 1.5 292 27 139 .3 .4 191 35 .1 18 13.5 894 58.6 12,978 22.8 1,224 217 2.1 28 .2 63 1.0 1.4 34 3 .3 4 .1 5.8 84.1 7.9 1.!~ .2 • t t 100.0 13,678 100.0 15,445 100.0 23,931 192 99.2 .8 13,295 383 97.2 15,341 104 2.8 S9.4 ---~..£. ..------ Weld Igain the high harvest county. 1964 goose harvest compared to the nine-year average in Table 10 shows that total harvest was well above the average. Also, that the Southeast n accounted for more than 75 per cent of the total goose bag, with KioW" r 24,123 being about 85 per cent in 1964 which is similar to previous years. Th /.. .2 Th~ eastern slope again contributed to the bulk of the duck harvest was .- Bsca, Prowers, and Bent the top harvest countj,~s, in that order. ��- 39 - Tab1i 11. -- Estimated Waterfowl Hunters and Harvest by Management Unit. Nana!gement Unit I Ducks Hunters No. % Bag No. I 11 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Geese % Hunters No. % .nag No. % EAST SLOPE 1,191 1,028 2,626 1,077 82 4,272 228 196 326 587 245 1,044 930 212 2,267 7.3 6.3 16.1 6.6 .5 26.2 1.4 1.2 2.0 3.6 1.5 64 5.7 1.3 13,9 5,480 3,262 9,069 2,936 326 16,507 718 1,174 457 1,501 457 4,371 3,262 1,044 14,680 8.4 5.0 13.9 4.5 .5 25.3 1.1 1.8 .7 2.3 .7 6.7 5.0 1.6 22.S 173 665 1,821 758 40 1,675 13 93 80 2,884 1,941 1,808 838 253 253 1.3 5.0 13.7 5.7 .3 12.6 .1 .7 .6 21.7 14.6 13.6 6.3 1,9 1.9 48 335 1~962 479 .2 1.4 8.2 2.0 1,675 7.0 359 24 8,759 3,661 3,901 1,962 431 335 1.5 .1 36.6 15.3 16.3 8.2 1.8 1.4 16,311 100.0 65,244 100.0 13,295 100.0 23,931 100.0 0 1 TOTA~S I WEST SLOPE -~ '. I 161 GRANjD TOTA,LS 2,878 11,512 383 192 19,189 76,756 13,678 24,123 -,- �- 40 - Other regions showed similar harvest to past years with the exception of the central which had a strong and significant increase in hunting pressure and harvest as explained previously. waterfowl Management Units This year, for the first time, harvest illformation has been qatherrd on the basis of waterfowl management units (Figure 1). Thepurpos~ of this is a better alignment of data to provide information about specific flocks of ducks and geese. For example unit 1 compasses the area utilized by wintering ducks at Jumbo Reservoir, Unit 5 is North Park, and Unit 15 is the San Luis Valley. In many cases duck or goose flock boundaries transcend county lines and it has been difficult to put together county information so t at we could look at the influence of hunting pressure and harvest on the separate flocks. Naturally, we hope that management units will s this problem. Results are tabulated in Table 11 and are offered without further comment at this time. Prepared Date: By: Jack R. Grieb October..L1965 APproved By: I lilt:lyne ld. Sand fort Game Research Chief Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Cpordinator �- 41 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of Colorado Proje t No. w-88-R-10 Work Plan No. 1 Title of Job: Perio Migratory Bird Investigations Job No. 9 Survey of Potential Public Waterfowl Shooting Areas Covere¢l: April 1, 1964 to March 31, 1965. ABSTRACT s of the wetlands. inventory and habitat evaluation of the irrigated porf the western slope reveal that: tion 1. The average land section on the western slope contains 1·94 wetlands (30·9 es), 0.38 miles, of streams and rivers, and 0.21 miles of ditches and canals. 2. al projected numbers of wetlands by category is as follows: lakes and reservoirs, 7; ponds and marshes over five acres, 89; and ponds and marshes less than five acres, 1,237· 3. T tal estimated wetlands amount; to 27,465, with 338 miles of streams and r' ers and 187 miles of ditches and canals. 4. Sureams and rivers and their associated marginal land make up an estimated 8 percent of the total wetland acreage. 5. ~ estimated 86 percent of all wetlands over five acres in size are open tOIpublic hurrting . Leasing of wetlands for hunting by private clubs or i dividuals was not encountered. 6. estimated 19 percent of the wetlands over five acres L'1. size are under pJblic ownership in the irrigated portion of the western slope. I �- 42 - Recommendations: I 1.. WE MUST B~GIN AN A,cTIVEPROGRAM OF LOCATING, EVALUATING, M1J ESTABLISiHING A PRIORITY L.LST OF WETLAND TYPE PUBLIC HUNTING AREAS SUITABLE FOR ACQUISIITION IN THE IRRIGATED PORTION OF THE WESTERl'JSLOPE. An immediate expansion! of our wetlands acquisition program to increase public hunting opportunity islnot needed by our Department on the west.ern slope because of the large amoEt of land open to public hunting and relatively low hunting pressure. HEwever, we should begin evaluating wetlands and acc-wmulating a priority list ~f pot.ential wetland acquisition sites. This procedure would put us in a statF of preparedness and allow the purchase or lease of the best possible wetlands when the public requires additional hunt.ing space in the future. I 2. OUR PRES~JT WETLANDS ACQUISITION PROGRAM ON THE WESTERl-TSLOPE SHOULD CP:NYD.\ru""E IN NORMAL FASH.!...oN UNTIL WE FIND NEED FOR A CHANGE. Two areas r-ecommended for purchase or lease by this Department in the near future include: 1(1) the Angel Ranch at the confluence of the North Fork and GUlli~isonRiver in Delta County; and (2) the Uncompahgre River between Olathe and Montros in Montrose Courrty. Objectives: Only a summary of the objectives given in the 1961 report (G ieb and Sheldon, 1961) will be presented here: (1) To determine the number and amount of wetlands in Colorado, begi~YJ.ingwith the irrigated portion of the eastern slope. (2) To determine the number and amount of wetland areas leased for hunting, fishing, and other recreatiDnal purposes. To set up a method to rate wetland areas in terms of value for as public hunting areas. (4) To establish a priority list of public hlli~tingareas for presentation to the Commission. Procedures: All methods remained the same as explained in the 1961 reporl. Only four areas are of major waterfowl hwnting significance in Colorado at present. These include the irrigated portions of the (1) South Platte Valley, (2) Arkansas Valley, (3) San Luis Valley, and (4) western slope, namely tie Uncompahgre-Gunnison-Colorado River complex in the Montrose, Delta, and Grand Junction areas. This study was limited to these four localities. Work has been completed in past years for the irrigated portions of the first threy areas. Completion reports have been prepared which give results of this work in each area (Hopper 1962, 1963, and 1964). Field work was finished on tfue western slope during August of 1965 and the results are presented in this I report. �- 43 - Coun1ies included in the western slope survey that contain significant amounts of irrigated land are as follows: Delta, Mesa, Montrose, and Ouray. The survey was conducted on a county-by-county basis, with the irrigated portion of e ch county comprising one study area. Stud~ areas for the four counties constituted a total of 890 sections, or 569,800 acres of irrigated land. Location of this acreage is shown in Fig. 1. Two study sections were randomly selected from each township of irrigated land, yielding a total of 49 study sections for the irrigated portion of the western slope. Table 1 shows the number of study sections in each county. Table 1 -- Number of Study Sections in the Irrigated Portion of each of Four Counties on the Western Slope. County Number of Study Sections Percent Delta Mesa Montrose Ouray 19 16 2 38.8 32.6 24·5 4.1 Total 49 100.00 ~ �L 0 3 i3 LOGAN 19 i':;;; :s "••.•.... I3 .•"'Il.Y "" RIO S H IIN G TON 27 !] ';"~" r«: ~ ore '.'. "., '5'''<7'' (':.,_,,. ./ '·L:,, ....•. ...~::SA~ ~~ 8,,_ ..• ~... -.----'~.--.+-". ~:JELTA 18 I c.i~~~: \\ - ,. ~ .: :~ ''\.." ; !"'l.,.w.. .. :.,,_ , ..~.cl , __ . .'.~. .,' ' '.) =:»: G . . '. .p.p- uN . ~ \ 0., R0 sr 0 , ",,;, '-'" 2, ':;;'<::;" ' ·'....;'-),··~·""'J1~~·~ ::;;.~t-~~~:r;;;:::~~ " ..,!.~ Fi?:ur~ 1. --Location 0: the major irrigated ocr-t i on of the western slope. �- 45 - SURVEY OF POTENTIAL PUBLIC WATERFOWL SHOOTING AREAS Richard M. Hopper The r~su1ts presented herein include data gathered from 49 study sections in the irrigated portion of the western slope. Little attempt will be made to I compare results found on the western slope with those obtained in the South P1attb, Arkansas, and San Luis Valleys. Such a comparison will be included in the final job (completion report to be written at a later date. I This eport discusses the fourth and 'last area in Colorado of concern to the "Surv y of Potential Public Waterfowl Shooting Areas". A final job completion reporr is the next and last step in terminating this job. This final report will 'Qmbine all information collected in the four major irrigated areas of Colo~~do and fulfill all objectives set forth as part of the study. Amounk of Wetlands TablelS I-III in the appendix list acres and miles of wetlands found on study sections in individual counties of the western slope. Montrose and Ouray Counties were combined because the latter contained only two study sections. Stud sections revealed that streams and rivers comprised most of the wetland acreage in both Delta and Mesa Counties. Wetlands within this category made up 92.6 percent of the total sample wetland acreage in Delta County and 95·6 perce t in Mesa County. However, in Montrose and Ouray Counties combined, strea and river habitat accounted for only 29.2 percent of the total sample wet1a d acreage, while ponds and marshes over five acres constituted 60.9 perce t. The Uncompahgre River is the only large stream flowing through the irrigated portions of Montrose and Ouray Counties, whereas Delta and Mesa Counties support two or more major streams. The Gunnison, North Fork of the Gunnison, and Uncompahgre Rivers all occur in Delta County, and both the Cblorrdo and Gunnison Rivers run through Mesa County. I e Few ljakesand reservoirs occur in the irrigated portion of the western slope. crawf;ord Reservoir, Fruitgrowers Reservoir, Pettons Lake, Sweitzer Lake, and a fe small, unnamed lakes are the only ones of premanent nature. None of these were encountered on study sections in the four counties. The importance of sDream ~nd river habitat to waterfowl, particularly wintering waterfowl, on t e west~rnslope is indicated by the scarcity of lakes and reservoirs. Tables 2 and 3 show the combined water composition and proportion of total wetlands in each wetland category for all study sections in the irrigated port·on of the western slope. A total of 95 wetland areas, excluding ditches and canals, were encountered on 49 study sections, yielding an average of 1.94 wetlands per section. Total acres of wetlands on these study sections tota ed 1,512.4, or 30.86 acres per square mile. Average miles of running water per square mile equaled 0,.'38for streams and rivers, and 0.21 for ditc es and canals. �- 46 - Ponds and marshes less than five acres acco~~ted for the greatest rrwmbe of wetlands on the western slope, just as they did in the other irrigated reas of Colorado. About 72 percent of the 95 wetlands in the sample fell in this category (Table 3). However, these areas contributed less than five pe~cent of the total wetland acreage. Streams and rivers and their associated barginal land made up 85 percent of the total acres of wetlands, while ponas and marshes over five acres contributed only about 10 percent. Table 4 presents a summary of wetlands composition of 49 study sections and total projected acres and miles of wetlands in the irrigated portion oflthe western slope. A total of 569,600 acres of irrigated land occurs on th western slope. Total average acres of wetlands per study section ranged b~ COUL~tyas fellows: Montrose and Ouray (15.42), Delta (27.86), and Mesa (47.94). The low f"gure for Montrose and Ouray Counties reflects their relatively small amount f stream and river habitat as compared to that in the other two counties. Mesa COUL~ty appears to support almost twice a s much wetland acreage as Delta COUL~tyl. Al.though both counties contain two or more sizeable rivers, Mesa countyl is further downstream where the rivers (Colorado and Gunnison) and their associated marginal lands are larger. The + t.05 standard error value following each average figure indicates I in most-cases, considerable variation among study sections in each county. These variations are undoubtedly the result of relativel y small sample sizes for the individual counties. Generally, with an increase in sample size the st~ndard error value becomes smaller in comparison to the observed mean. When sfmple sizes for all counties were combined in order to determine average acref of wetlands per sample section for the irrigated portion of the San Luis V~lley, a relatively smaller t.05 standard error value was obtained (30.86 + 16.30). This resulted in an total projected wetland acreage of 27,465 ,:.14,507, I or 4.8 ~ 2·5 percent, of the irrigated portion of the western slope. Streams and rivers averaged 0.38 ~ 0.15 miles per study section for alII counties combined, yielding a total estimated figure of 338 2 + 133.5 miles for the irrigated portion of the western slope (Table 4). Average miles of dit hes and canals per sample section for all four counties was 0.21 + 0.13, with a projected figure of 186·9 + 115·7 miles for the irrigated portion of the ves+em slope. ,I Table 4 also lists the average number of wetlands per section and total projected number for each county and for all cOUL~ties combined. Actual co ts Were made of permanent lakes and reservoirs in each county because of t~eir small numbers. Only seven lakes or reservoirs occur in the irrigated pJrtion of the western slope. Table 5 presents a summary of wetland inventory data for the irrigated of the western slope. ortion �Table 2 -- Total Water Composition of 49 study Sections on the Irrigated Portion of the Western Slope Awe Surface Acres Per of Water Section Acres of Ave J:vTarginal Per Land Section Ave Ave Per Per Section Miles Section -------_._--- Wetland Category No. .Ave Per Section Lakes and Reservoirs 0 0 0 0 0; Ponds and J:vTarshes over 5 acres 5 0.10 0 0 154.0 3.14 154.0 10.2 3·14 Ponds and J:vTarshes less than 5 acres :~/ 68 1.39 --- --- --- --- 72.3 4.8 1.48 Streams and Rivers 22 0.45 335·3 6.84 950.8 19.40 1,286.1 85.0 Ditches and Canals -- --- -- --- --- --- -- Totals 95 y 1.94 335-3 6.84 1,104.8 Total Acres % 0 0 0 0 --- 22.55 1,512.4 !! Only total acres of wetland was determined for each of these smaller areas. g! Excluding ditches and canals. .r~/ 100.0 --- --- 26.25 18.91 0.38 --- 10·52 0.21 30.86 29·43 0.60 ..f::""" --:J �Table 3 -- Proportion of Total Wetlands in Each Category for 49 Study Sections in the Irrigated Portion of the Western Slope Surface Acres of Water ojo Acres of Marginal Land ojo Total Acres ojo ojo ,Wetland Category No. ojo Lakes and Reservoirs 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Ponds and Marshes over 5 acres 5 5.3 0 0 154.0 13.9 154.0 10.2 Ponds and Marshes less than 5 acres ,!/ 68 71.6 --- --- --- --- 72.3 4.8 Streams and Rivers 22 21.1 335.3 100.0 950.8 86.1 1,286.1 85·0 18.91 64.3 Ditches and Canals -- -- --- --- --- -- -- --_. 10.52 35.7 Totals 95,?} 100.0 335.3 100.0 1,104.8 100.0 1,512.4 ,?:/ 100.0 29.43 100.0 ,!/ Only total acres of wetland was determined for each of these smaller areas. ,?:/ Excluding Miles - ditches and canals. + OJ �s Go~pos~t~on oy-yne ,-~--~ Total Acres of Wetlands 2/ Total Irrigated Land ~ Acres Sections County Av. Acres/Section in Sample % Total Projected Acres Delta Mesa Montrose and Ouray 356 293 2279840 187,520 27.86 + 23.74 47.94 ~ 41.43 4.4 + 3.7 7,5 ~ 6.5 9,918 + 8,451 14,046 ~ 12,139 241 154,240 15.42 ~ 17.52 2,4 ~ 2.7 3,716 ,~ 4,222 Totals 890 ,,.569,600 30.86 ~ 16,30 4.8 ,~2.5 27,465 ,~ 14,507 1/ Study areas from which sample sections were selected. 2/ Excluding ditches and canals. +:- 1/ ,~t.05 standard errors. '-0 Table 4 -- Summary of Wetlands Composition of the Irrigated Portion of the western Slope (continued) Streams and Rivers Ditches and Canals Total Irrigated Land Av. Mi./Sect'ion Total Projected Av. ML/Section Total Projected in Sample Miles in Sample Miles County Sections Acres Delta Mesa Montrose and Ouray 356 293 227,840 187,520 0.45 + 0.27 0.47+0.27 160.20 + 96.12 137·71 :£ 79·11 0 0·53 ~ 0·35 0 155·29 + 102·55 241 154,240 0.20+ 0.28 48.20 ~ 67.48 0.14 + 0.18 - 33·74 ~43.38 Totals 890 569,600 0.38 + 0.15 338.20 + 133.50 0.21 ~ 0.13 186.90 ~ 115.70 1/ Study areas from which sample sections were selected. g/ ~ t.05 standard errors. �Table 4 ..-_ Summary of Wetlands Composition of the Irrigated County Lakes and Reservoirs Ave. No./Section Total/Ave. in Sample Proj. Nol Portion of the Western Slope Ponds and Marshes over 5 acres No./Section Total in Sample Proj. No. (continued) Ponds and Marshes Less than 5 acres Ave. No./Sectlon Total in Sample Proj. No. Delta o 3 0.05 + 0.11 18 + 39 0.74 :.0.68 263 + 242 Mesa o 1 0.06 :.0.13 18 + 38 2.06 + 1.34 604 + 393 Montrose and Ouray o 3 0.21:.0.32 51 ,:.77 1.50 + 2.13 362 ,:.513 Totals o 7 0.10 + 0.10 89 + 89 1.39 + 0.74 1,237:, 659 Vl Y Actual count of permanent lakes and reservoirs. o �- 51 - Table 5 -- Summary of Wetlands Inventory Data for the Irrigated I Portion of the Western Slope. No. No. IOf Study Sections No. Wetlands/Study Section~ lakes and reservoirs ponds and marshes over 5 acres ponds and marshes less than 5 acres Istreams and rivers Acr s of Wetlands/Study Section~/ lakes and reservoirs ponds and marshes over 5 acres ponds and marshes less than 5 acres streams and rivers Totdl Wetland Percentage/Study 1.94 ~o 0.10 1.39 0.45 30.86 o o 3·14 1.48 26.25 10.2 4·7 85.1 4.8 Sectionti Mil~S of streams and rivers/studY section Mil s of ditches and canals/study section Sections of irrigated land acres of irrigated land / 1 projected no. of lakes and reservoirsg 1 projected no. of pond and marshes over 5 acres 1 projected no. of ponds and marshes less than 5 acres Total projected acres of wetlands !/ Total projected miles of strams and rivers Totallprojected miles of ditches and canals 1/ ELcluding ditches and canals. ;;Ac~ual count of permanent lakes and reservoirs. o 5.2 71.6 23.2 0·38 0.21 890 569,600 7 89 1,237 27,465 338.2 186.9 �- 52 - Recreational Uses A total of 21 wetland areas over five acres in size was rated for recre tional and wildlife values in the irrigated portion of the western slope. Types of recreational use of these wetlands, whether private, public, leased, or Inone, are presented in Table 6 for all study sections in the four counties com.bined. This information is not shown by individual county because of the relatively small number of wetlands involved. Table 7 shows the type of owners_ip of the 21 wetlands. These tables are discussed below. Hunting -- Duck and goose hunting is generally of primary concern where lwater areas occur and any interpretations or conclusions to follow will empha1ize this type of hunting. Of the 21 large wetlands that occurred in study sections, 18, or 85.7 pJrcent were open to public hunting '(,Table6). 'rhisnumber amounts to 93.4 per lent of the total wetland acreage in the study sections, excluding areas les than five acres in size. None of the 21 wetlands were leased for hunting at the time of the survJy. A few gQ~ clubs undoubtedly exist in the irrigated portion of the western slope, but this survey indicates that leased rights presently have little or n effect on public hunting of wetlands in this area. Fishing -- Fifteen, or 71.4 percent, of the 21 large wetland were suita Ie for sport fishing. Of these, 13 were open to the public, fishing was prohibited on one area because of conflicting interests, while another was limitedlto private fishing only. The remaining six wetlands provided no fishing of any type because game-fish populations were restricted due to shallow or intermittent waters (Table 6). Boating -- Lakes and reservoirs of sufficient size for speed-boating an water skiing are scarce in the irrigated portion of the western slope. Water areas suitable for these types of recreation were not encountered on any of t e sample sections. Only Crawford Reservoir, Fru.itgrowers Reservoir, and ~weitzer Lake are large enough to supply recreation of this nature. I Type of Ownership -- Table 7 shows the ty~e of ownership of the 21 sample wetlands over five acres in size. PQblic ownership accounted for nearl* onefifth (19.0 percent) of the 21 water areas. 'l'hisfigure is almost three times greater than those found in the South Platte, Arkansas, and San Luis Valleys. Large acreages of public land aQmipistered by the Bureau of Land Manage~ent on the western slope contributes largely to this difference. �Table 6 =---.Recr_eationalUses of 21 Wetland Areas all Counties Combined Hunting !!in the Irrigated Portion of the Western ~S,,=-l~op~e~, Fishing No. ~ Acres ~ 33.6 2·3 0 0 0 0 61.9 1,105·0 78.2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4·3 7 33·3 275·6 19·5 21 100.0 1,414.2 100.0 100.0 21 100.0 1,414.2 100.0 21 100.0 1,414.2 100.0 No. ~ 33.6 2·3 1 4.8 85·7 1,320.2 93.4 13 0 0 0 0 None 2 9·5 60.4 Totals 21 100.0 1,414.2 ~ Private 1 4.8 Public 18 Leased of Use Acres Boating ~ ~ No. me _ Acres I ~ Excluding Wetlands less than five acres in size and ditches and canals. xn w �- 54 Table 7 -- Type of Ownership of 20 wetland:Areas!/in Portion of the Western Slope. Type of Ownership ~ the Irrigated Number Per Cent Cooperation or Company Private Public 1 16 4 4.8 76.2 19·0 Totals 21 100.0 Excluding wetlands less than five acres in size and ditches and canals. Conclusions and Recommendations: Data collected from study sections reieal that loss of public hunting and fishing rights on private lands is not presently affected by private leasing. The public appears to have little Frouble in getting permission to hunt or fish on private property in the irriga ed portion of the western slope. In addition, public lands are more abundEnt here than in the irrigated portions of the eastern slope. The Bureau 0 Land Management administers a considerable acreage of land, with some riverbpttom tracts included. Our Department owns and manages several important watFrfowl hunting areas, including the Escalante Management A.rea (two units total~ng 1,140 acres) and Sweitzer Lake (207 acres). These factors, coupled with relatively low hunting and fishing pressures, decrease landowner animosity nd competition for space by sportsmen, thereby reducing the demand for lea ing hunting and fishing rights on private land. Waterfowl hunters numbered only about 1,500 in the irrigated portion oflthe western slope in 1964 (Grieb and Hunter, 1965). This figure representea slightly over 50 percent of the total number of people hunting waterfo on the entire western slope of Colorado. The importance of the small irri ated portion to waterfowl hunting on the western slope is apparent. However, considering the relatively low human population of the western slope an its great distance from major population centers, it is doubtful that water owl hunting pressure will increase very rapidly in the next few years. For reasons presented in this and the preceding paragraph, an immediate expansion o~ our wetlands acquisition program is not needed by our Department on the western slope. Our present wetlands acquisition program should not cease on the weste slope, but should continue at its usual pace until we find need for a c ange. We should be prepared to accelerate this program at any time to meet in_reased demands for public shooting area facilities as may result from quality unting seasons or more liberal regulations. p Future needs can be anticipated simply by following the trend in huntin pressure and by contacting a sample of landowners every two or three years to detect any changes in their attitudes regarding leasing and public I hunting. �- 55 - rder to keep the public hunting situation well in hand on the western e, we should begin evaluating wetlands and accumulating a priority of potential wetland acquisition sites. Such a procedure would put us state of preparedness and allow the purchase or lease of the best possible ands when the time comes for expansion of our acquisition program in this A method to rate wetlands in terms of value for acquisition as public ing areas will be prepared. and included at a later date in the final comion report for this job (Work Plan I, Job 9). This rating system should eady for use during the summer of 1966. can start the evaluation of wetlands and establish a complete priority lis potential acquisition sites, I recommend that certain areas be considFred for purchase or lease to continue our present program on the western slope. These areas include: (1) the Angel Ranch at the confluence of the Nor h Fork and Gunnison Rivers in Delta County; and (2) the Unc ompahgre River between Olathe and Montrose in Montrose County. Lit rature Cited: Gribb, J. R., and M. G. Sheldon, 1961. Survey of potential public waterfowl shoioting areas in Colorado. Colorado Game J Fish and Parks Dept . , Fed. Aid Quart. RePr· Jan. pp. 47-66. G. Hunter. 1965. Colorado small game hunter harvest survey -- 1964. Colo. Game, Fish and Parks Dept., Fed. Aid Proj. w-88-R. Unpubl. rept. 23 pp. Hop~er, R. M. 1962. Survey of potential public waterfowl shooting areas in Colorado. Colo. Game, Fish and Parks Dept., Fed. Aid Quart. Rept. Jan. pp. 1 - 29. ._------ . 1963. Survey of potential public waterfowl shooting areas in Colorado. pp. 23-51. Colo. Game, Fish and Parks Dept., Fed. Aid Quart. Rept. July I . 1964. Survey of potential public waterfowl shooting -a-r-e+-~-s-i-n-C-o-l-o-r-a-d-o-.Colo. Game, Fish and Parks Dep t ., Fed. Aid Quart. Rept.., Octl.pp 9-34. prel ared by: Richard M. Hopper Assist. Wildlife Researcher October, 1965 Approved by: Jack R. Grieb Wildlife Researcher Wayne W. Sandfort~ __ Game Research Chief �Table I -- Total Water Composition of 19 study Sections in Delta County. % Ave. Per Section 0 0 0 0.62 11.8 2.2 0.62 -- -- 27.7 5.2 1.46 5.16 391.2 20.59 489.9 92.6 25.78 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 98.7 5.16 403.0 21.21 529.4'?:./100.0 27.86 Surface Acres of Water Ave. Acres of Ave Total Per Marginal Per La.nd Section Acres Section Wetland Category No. Ave. Per Section La.kes and reservoirs 0 0 0 0 0 0 Ponds and marshes over 5 acres 1 0.05 0 0 11.8 Ponds and marshesl/ less than 5 acres- 14 0.74 -- -- Streams and rivers 10 0.53 98.7 Ditches and canals -- -- Totals 25 ,?:./ 1.32 l/ Only total acres of wetland was determined for each of these smaller areas. ,?:./ Excluding ditches and canals. Miles Ave. Per Section 8.64 0.45 0 0 8.64 0.45 Vl CJ\ �Ta~~ - Surface Acres of Water Ave, Acres of Ave, Per YJarginal Per Section Land Section Total Acres % Ave, Per Section 0 0 0 0 10.7 0.67 10,7 1,4 0,67 -- -- 23,2 3.0 1,45 31,92 733.2 95.6 45,82 Wetland Category No. Ave. Per Section Lakes and reservoirs 0 0 0 0 0 Ponds and marshes over 5 acres 1 0,Q6 0 0 Ponds and marSheS!! less than 5 acres' 33 2.06 -- -- Streams and rivers 9 0.50 222.5 13,91 510.7 Miles Ave. Per Section 7.52 0.47 \..n -..:] I Ditches and canals -- Totals 43'?:./ 2.69 -- -- -- -- 222.5 13.91 521,4 -- -- 32,59 767.~/ l/ Only total acres of wetland was determined for each of these smaller areas, ,?:./ Excluding ditches and canals. -- -- 8.49 0.53 100.0 47,94 16.01 1,00 �Table III -- Total Water Composition of 14 Study Sections in Montrose and Ouray Counties. Surface Acres of Water % Ave. Per Section 0 0 0 9.39 131. 5 60.9. 9.39 -- 21.4 9.9 1.53 3.49 63.0 29.2 4.50 Ave. Ave. Acres of Marginal Per Total Per Land Section Acres Section Wetland Category No. Ave. Per Section Lakes and reservoirs 0 0 0 0 0 Ponds and marshes over 5 acres 3 0.21 0 0 131. 5 Ponds and marshes / l less than 5 acres-- 21 1.50 -- -- -- Streams and rivers 3 0.21 14.1 1.01 48.9 0 Miles Ave. Per Section 0 0 2.75 0.20 \Jl OJ I Ditches and canals -- Totals 27?:/ -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 2.03 0.14 1.93 14.1 1.01 180.4 12.88 215.9 100.0 15.42 4.78 0.34 ,!/ Only total acres of wetland was determined for each of these smaller areas. ~/ Excludipg ditches and canals. �October, 1965 - 59 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT . Sta e of Colorado -------------------------------, Project No. I ' WorK Plan No. Tit e of Jop: w-88-R-IO 1 ' Migratory Bitd Investigations Job No. 12 San Luis Valley Cooperative Mallard Investigation ABSTRACT Res Its of the aerial breeding pair transects, corrected by air-ground comparison studies, and stratified on the basis of the Monte Vista National Wildlife Refuge and the Russel Lakes versus the remainder of the Valley, est]mated 30,768 pairs of 10 species of waterfowl (mainly mallards) for the 196~ breeding season. Despite doubling the number of transects the current yea, sampling error remained high (+ 34%) indicating the continuing need to impnove sampling techniques. The Ihigh-country breeding pair survey conducted in the upper Rio Grande dra·nage estimated 2,772 pairs of six species with gadwall and mallards equ lly numerous and other species of only minor impDrtance. Confidence lim·ts were high because of great variation in the distribution of waterfow habitat. On the basis of this survey much of the area will be eliminated fro the sample next year and the remainder stratified between lakes (high con entration areas) and stream-beaver pond type (lower concentration areas) to rovide a more accurate estimate of the breeding population. Col:1rado's part of the pre-season duck banding program resulted in 2,714 ducMs of 12 species banded, of which 1,947 were banded in the San Luis Val ley, and 767 in the upper Rio Grande in the Brown's Lakes area. Col rado state personnel ran two check stations on the Monte Vista National Wil~life Refuge during the 1964 hunting season and made 15 spy-blind checks. Obje!ctives: To evaluate the effect of hunting pressure on a population of mallards. To ~etermine the size of the breeding population in the high altitude area wes~ of the Valley. To assist in gathering harvest information during a special waterfowl hunting season. ��- 61 - SAN LUIS VALLEY COOPERATIVE MALLARD INVESTIGATION Richard M. Hopper IntJfoduction: This is a cooperative study between the Bureau of Sport Fisheries and Wildlife and the Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department. The objectives and phazes reported upon here are those for which the Colorado Department has primary responsibility. The report covering the entire study will be contai ed in an Administrative Report by the Bureau of Sport Fisheries and WildlifJ, Branch of Wildlife Research, Migratory Bird Populations Station. A c~itical look at data relating to the first experimental hunting season in 1963, indicate a definite need for modification and refinement of certain data collecting procedures for use in evalu~ting future seasons. One such need was for improving the accuracy of the aerial breeding population survey of the San Lui Valley floor. The two cooPerating agencies agreed to incorporate the following modifications of procedures for estimating breeding pair numbers into the overall evaluation beginning in the spring of 1964. (1) Approximately double the number of randomly distributed transects to greatly reduce potential sampling error. (2) Sample the Monte Vista National Wildlife Refuge and the Russell Lakes area separately from the remainder of the Valley, since these are areas of very high waterfowl numbers. This will further reduce sampling error through stratification. (3) Initate an air-ground comparison study to permit more accurate correction of air transect data for ducks present but not recorded from the air. Select about 25 randomly distributed, 5-mile long air-ground comparison transects in the low density area and five, 5-mile transects in the high density Monte Vista Refuge and Russell Lakes areas. Fro 1954 to 1963, the duck breeding population of the San Luis Valley was estimated from 27 randomly distributed aErial transects. These east-west tranlsects were each one-fourth mile wide and totaled 574 linear miles. This represented an 11 percent sample. A visibility study conducted in northeast~rn Colorado formed the basis for correcting the total waterfowl estimate for Firds present but not observed. The potential sampling error associated withi this survey amounted to 26 percent with 95 percent confidence. This rela ively high error was ~ttributed to the great variability in the distribution of breeding birds due to the occurrence of islands of high qualitywater~ fowl habitat surrounded by habitat of fair to poor quality. It was felt that this variability could be reduced considerably by (1) increaSing the number of aerial transectsj and (2) sampling high density areas (Monte Vista Refuge and Russell Lakes) separately from the rest of the Valley. By putting these two ~efinements into effect in 1964, we hoped to reduce the potential sampling error associated with the survey to about 15 percent with 95 percent conf·dence. �- 6e - Aerial survey data are subject to considerable bias when used alone to estimate population numbers because we lack sufficient knowledge of the proportion of birds actually present on the ground that are seen from the air by aerial observers. This bias can be corrected and population estimates greatly improved by conducting both air and ground counts on selected transects. Establishment of such transects was considered essential for the improvement of bree ing population estimates in the San Luis Valley. Those assisting in the aerial breeding population survey and air-groun comparison study included: Raymond Buller, Kenard Baer, Charles Hayes, Jackandall, Jack Frost, and Charles Graham, Bureau of Sport Fisheries and Wildlifej Errol Ryland, Lloyd Hazzard, Wayne Russell, Norman Hughes, Jack Grieb, Willi~m Rutherford, Howard Funk, and Richard Hopper, Colorado Game, Fish and P~rks Department. METHODS ,Increase in Number of Aerial Transects: Number of aerial breeding pai~ tran~ sects on the floor of the San Luis Valley was increased from 27 to 50 ~rior to making counts in the spring of 1964. These additional 23 transects were selected in a mechanical random fashion. The resulting 50, one-fourth mile wide, aerial transects amounted to a total of 934 linear miles, or a sampleize of 18.28 percent, excluding those portions which pass through the Monte V·sta Refuge and Russell Lakes area. Transects were numbered from 1 through 50, beginning at the south end of the Valley. The major high production areas in the Valley, Monte Vista Refuge and Jhe Russell Lakes, were removed from the regular Valley survey and flown s9parately. One of the 50 regular transects described above passes through the Monue Vista Refuge. Three additional one-fourth mile wide transects were establisHed on the Refuge early in 1964, making a total of four transects. These foun transects totaled 21 linear miles, producing a sample size of 23.86 percen. Two transects from the regular survey traverse the Russell Lakes area. No~additional transects were established in this area. The Russell Lakes survey con isted of four linear miles of aerial transects, resulting in a sample size of 1 .67 percent. All transects were placed in their proper locations on count~ Highway Maps. These maps were used later as guides for aerial and gr-ound crewd . The breeding population survey was conducted in the same manner as in Jrevious years. Aerial transect routes were flown in an east-west direction ac oss the Valley. All ducks within one-eighth mile to either side of the transe9t line were counted by species. Data were kept separate for Monte Vista Refu~e, Russell Lakes, and the remainder of the Valley so that individual estimates could be made for each of these three areas. I �- 63 - AirlGround Comparison Study: Procedures for conducting the air-groung comparison study on the Valley floor were similar to those used on the Canadian breedinglgrounds by the Bureau of Sport Fisheries and Wildlife. We originally intended to select 30, 5-mile transects (150 miles) throughout the Valley,inclu ing five on the Monte Vista Refuge. However, water conditions in the Valley were rather poor in the spring of 1964, and transects had to be selected where wat~r occurred, without regard to maintaining equal segment lengths. As a result, 30 air-ground comparison transects were established., each one-fourth mile wide and varying in length from two to seven miles. Four of these transect seg1ents (21 miles) were selected on the Monte Vista Refuge. The remaining 26 seglllents(129 miles) were distributed throughout the rest of the Valley as evefly as water conditions would permit. The Russell Lakes area was avoided becfuse of the absence of easily identified land marks which could be followed by air and ground crews. Traisects were laid out in an east-west direction, mostly along improved road.s for easy access by ground crews. It was necessary to establish a few transect segments along fence lines because of the absence of enough roads with adjacent wat~r of sufficient quantity. Each transect segment was placed so that it began and ended at a land mark which could be readily located and identified from thelair. Where possible, air-ground comparison transects were super-imposed on regular air transects to help reduce flylng time. In fact, the entire 21 miles of regular air transects on the Monte Vista Refuge also constituted the tot~l sample for the air-ground comparison study on this area. Tra~sect segments outside the Monte Vista Reguge were designated alphabetically (A through Z), beginning at the south end of the Valley. Those within the Monte Visfa Refuge were labeled lR, 2R, 3R, and AA. to distinguish them from the othfrs. The aerial crew flew the air-ground comparison transects in condunction with the regular breeding-pair transects. Methods of counting birds were similar for both types of transects. Each air-ground comparison transect was flown two I to four times at two different periods of the day. When flying along a giv n air-ground comparison transect, the aerial crew would turn around after rea,hing its end and fly back on the same transect. This represented two covl rages. Such a procedure at two different times of the day yielded. four covfrages. Gromd crews coordinated their work with the air crew to insure that they were notlcovering a given transect at the same time or shortly after another. No morf than three days elapsed between air and g~ound coverages of a given transec The ground crews attempted to make a complete count of the breeding poprlation along the air-ground comparison transects. Birds encountered were tal ied by species according to pairs, lone drak.es, lone females, and grouped birfs not in pairs. Counts were kept separate for flooded meadows, ponds, ope ditches, and closed ditches. r. �- 64 - The regular air survey and the air-ground comparison study were conducted during the week of May 18 to 22, except for the last coverage which was not made until June 1 because of recorder breakdown and bad weather. A Cessna 185 was used for most of the flying. The last flight was made with a DeHaviland Be er. The air crew consisted of two aerial observers in addition to the pilot. GroLL~d COLL~tswere conducted by 10 men, with individual crews composed of two to four men each. RESULTS Air-Ground Comparison Study: Tables 1 and 2 compare air and ground co ts of 'the air-ground comparison transects corrected to estimate breeding pail1is. These revealed that air counts recorded 13.59 percent of the birds observed 0 the ground for the Monte Vista Refuge, while on all areas off the Refuge, air counts accounted for 30.40 percent of the birds" Percentage figures for indi idual species are also shown in Tables 1 and 2. These figures were used to correct regular air transect counts to estimate total breeding pairs in the Valley. Specifically, the correction factor for the Monte Vista Refuge was use to correct Refuge aerial counts only, while other air-grolli~dCOLL~tswere ~sed to correct regular air counts on all other areas including Russell Lakes. An exception to this is that the factor for correcting redhead numbers 0 Russe Ll. Lakes was obtained from the Monte Vista Refuge air-groLL~d COlli~tSbecause unrealistic figures were obtained using correction factors from the area off he Refuge. We originally planned to make all species corrections for the ussell Lakes air counts by using information obtained from the air-grolli~dcomparison study on the Refuge. However, examination of data and the impression of the aerial crew as they flew the two areas indicated that while the Russell Lakes was a heavy concentration area, it was different from the Refuge because of a lack of large groups of birds. The second and fourth air coverages of the air-ground transects were el'minated in the analysis for determining correction factors. The transects were short (two to seven miles long) and it was discovered that turning around imm.diately and flying back on the transects resulted in a lower count than the first coverage. We felt that this introduced a definite bias in these data. �- 65 - Tab1 1 -- Air-ground comparison of ducks cou.ntedon 21 miles of transect on the Monte Vista National Wildlife Refuge~ 1964. Species " I - Malllrd Gad I 11 _ Aller can Widgeon Gree:q.-wingedTeal Blue-winged or Ci namon Teal Shov ler ~!~~l!~ Less r Scaup Rudd Estimated Breeding Pairs Ground Air Pairs Percer:.t Percent Pairs Duck Tota~s Percent Seen From the Air ------ 909 82 4 9 69.0 6.2 0.3 0.7 135.0 10.0 l.0 0.0 75.4 5.6 0.6 0.0 14.85 12.20 25.00 0.00 81 80 127 9 2 14 6.1 6.1 9.6 0.7 0.2 1.1 7.0 l.0 20.5 3.5 l.0 0.0 3.9 0.6 11.4 2.0 0.5 0.0 8.64 l.22 16.14 38.89 50.00 0.00 1,317 100.0 179.0 100.0 13·59 I Tab1 I 2 -- Air-ground comparison of ducks counted on 122 miles of transect off the Monte Vista National Wildlife Refuge, 1964. I Spec es Mall rd Gadwall Allerdan Widgeon Gree_ -winged Teal Blue.-winged or Ci amon Teal Shoviler Pint-il Redh ad Less r Scaup RingJnecked Duck Canv-sback Rudd Duck Tota rS Estimated Breeding Pairs Ground Air Pairs Percent Pairs Percent Percent Seen From the Air 248 52 5 25 49·7 10.4 1.0 5·0 116.5 18.0 3·5 1.5 76·7 11.8 2·3 1.0 46·98 34.62 70000 6.00 54 18 56 33 7 1 0 1 10.8 3.6 11.2 6.6 1.2 0.1 0.0 0.1 2·5 1.5 5,0 3·0 0.0 0.0 0·5 0.0 1.6 1.0 3·3 2.0 0.0 0.0 0·3 0.0 4.63 8·33 8·93 J ~:~: 500 100.0 152.0 100.0 30.40 �- 66 - Aerial Breeding Pair Inventory The San Luis Valley was divided into three general areas to improve samJling efficiency: (1) Monte Vista National Wildlife Refugej (2) Russell Lake~ areaj and (3) remainder of the Valley. Size of each area, sampling intdnsity, and estimated breeding pairs are listed in Table 3. Application of respective correction factors to the three areas resulted in a total estimated bre Iding population of 30,768 pairs for the entire Valley. Species composition or this population is listed in Table 4. Table 3 -- Breeding pairs by density type, as estimated from the San LuJs Valley regular air transects, 1964. I Type Miles Air Transect I Square Miles Habitat Percent Sample Estimated Breeding Pai~s Monte Vista NWR Russell Lakes Remainder of Valley 21 4 934 22 6 1,277 23.86 16.67 18.28 4,904 1,476 24,388 Totals 959 1,305 18.37 30,768 Table 4 -- Species composition of estimated number of breeding pairs, salin Luis Valley, 1964. Estimated Number percent, Species of Breeding Pairs of Total Mallard Gadwell American Widgeon Green-winged Teal Blue-winged or Cinnamon Teal Shoveler Pintail Redhead Canvasback Lesser Scaup Ring-necked Duck Ruddy Duck Common Merganser Totals ] 16,109 1,863 103 308 52.41 6.1 0·3 2,783 1,290 4,838 2,795 9·0 4.2 15·7 9·1 679 30,768 + 10,375 l.0 ] 2.2 100.0 �Table 5 -- Comparison of estimated San Luis Valley a.uck breeding populations between years, as determined from ~Jle.original 27 a~]:'-~~~!1~~~~ ____ Species -- Year ---------------- 1957 1958 1959 1960 1961 1962 1963 ~96~ 7,144 6,236 9,192 8,922 16,074 20,300 30,924 28,356 26,800 856 816 522 3,296 576 2,368 3,238 1,650 350 1,888 890 2,686 1,972 1,372 1,712 1,900 580 3,176 5,908 1,056 3,194 756 226 604 222 2,196 866 344 530 304 250 434 208 2,520* 398 1,806 44 202 72 1954 1955~2256 lv1allard 9,752 9,350 Pintail 890 Gadwall Shoveler Green-winged Teal 202 254 198 116 Blue-winged Teal 338 330 604 300 208 1,146 654 1,390 3,782 2,398 Cinnamon Teal 284 376 604 144 208 392 - 304 52 72 Redhead 202 480 710 628 420 82 216 592 2,383 654 2,544 Lesser Scaup - 300 198 - - - - 652 478 - 218 American Widgeon 174 150 302 116 - - - 186 44 52 434 Common Merganser - - - - - - - - - - 72 13,488 15,008 13,152 9,656 17,440 14,866 21,518 31,134 43,434 34,754 38,126 Totals ----~-----.-~.---,.."'--- -)f Includes all teal species. - 0\ --.1 ----".-.--~---.--~ �- 68 - Table 4 also ahows potential sampling error associated with the total estimated breeding pairs in the Valley (30,768 + 10,375). This error amounted to 34 percent with 95 percent confidence. We had hoped that by almost doubling Ithe sample size (increased from 27 to 50 transects), a reduction in the sampling error would occur. However, a sampling error resulted which is no sma ler than that obtained from the original 27 transects. This suggests that the p oblem of improving the breeding pair estimates in the Valley was not one of increasing the sampling size, but instead, one of further stratifying the sample. Islands of high production still remain which must be considered separa e from the low production areas in order to reduce the amount of variability a ong transects. Ways of reducing the sampling error will be discussed later. Table 5 presents a comparison of breeding population estimates for previous years. In this table, estimated breeding pairs for 1964 were obtained by the same method as past years so that data would be comparable between years. This information strongly suggests that despite drought conditions in t e San Luis Valley, the breeding population in 1964 was very comparable to pas years. Conclusions and Recommendations Based on the foregoing presentation of the breeding pair survey, it seems reasonable that the 1963 experimental duck hunting season in the San Luis alley had no noticeable effect on the 1964 breeding population. It remains 0 be seen if information, not yet available, from other sources will support this conclusion. Considerable progress was made in improving breeding pair estimates in 964 over that of previous years, but after conducting the 1964 survey and a alyzing the data, it was obvious that additional refinements could be made. Listed below are recommendations for further improving the accuracy of estimating breeding pair numbers in the San Luis Valley for 1965. 1. The Valley should be further stratified with respect to high an low production areas in an effort to reduce the amount of variability rom one transect to another. An attempt should be made to obtain comp ete counts on concentration areas such as San Luis Lake, Head Lake, an the Mishak Lakes. Complete counts may be obtained by a ground or air Frew, or with the use of aerial photography. 2. The regular air coverage of the Russell Lakes area should be inl reased by establishing two more 2-mile transects. Such a procedure WOUldFimprove the estimate of breeding pair numbers for this area and reduce the standard error associated with this estimate. 3· Each air-ground comparison transect should be covered at least ~wo times from the air, but that these coverages all be made.at differrnt times of the day. When flying a given transect, the aerlal crew should not turn around after reaching its end and immediately fly back on the same transect because of the bias involved. Prepared by: Richard M. Hopper Assist. Wildlife Researcher Date October, 1965 Approved by: Jack R. Grieb Wildlife Rese'rcher Wayne W. Sandfort Game ResearchlChief �- 69 - BREEDmG POPULATION SURVEY OF THE SAN LUIS VALLEY HIGH-COO1\J""TRY William H. Rutherford Wate fowl breeding pair inventories were initiated this year in the high coun ry on the west side of the San Luis Valley, as a part of the Cooperative M3.ll1rdInvestigation. Generally,the study area encompasses the Rio Grande National For~st and includes all private lands lying within the major forest boundary as well as a scattering of both public and private lands in habitat type I considered to be a part of the high-country area. It is known that this high-country area (that part of the Rio Grande drainage whic~ does not actually lie on the valley floor of the San Luis Valley) supports a co~siderable population of breeding waterfowl and very probably contributes substJ1antiallyto the total waterfowl production of the Valley. Just what this contDibution may be has in the past been a matter of conjecture. Thus, the inve~tigation here described was undertaken in an attempt to express in quantitative terms the waterfowl production of this area. I Pers . nel cooperating on all or part of the sgrvey were: Burea:u of Sport Fisheries and Wildlife: Charles Hayes, and Jack Randall. Color~do Game, Fish and Parks Department: Peter~on, and William Rutherford. I Ken Baer, Jack Frost, Charles Graham, Howard Funk, Jack Grieb, Steve METHODS Ln.itilllY, the general boundary of the study area was established on Forest Servibe planimetric maps, wlth the Continental Divide as the boundary on the north~est, west, and sout4west sides, the Colorado-New Mexico state line as the southern boundary, and a more or less arbitrary eastern boundary. Containea within these boundaries is an area of 2,926.5 square miles. commehsurate with the desired level of sampling intensity and the time and moneylavailable to conduct the survey, an initial selection of 75 sections was m~de. A mechanical random selection was used, where one of the 36 numbered sections of a township was randomly selected; this same numbered section then became the sample section for all other townships. Each of these 75 secti~ns was visited by members of the survey crew during the period of June l5-24 and waterfowl observed thereon were recorded. Ln.addition, field notes were ~ePt on the type and quality of habitat, water areas not shown on the map, Ihd the potential of the section for waterfowl. f �- 70 - Table 6 -- Habitat Types and Waterfowl Observed on 16 Study Sections, West Side San Luis Valley, 1964. Section ID No. 7 10 20 21 22 Habitat T,ype Waterfowl Irrigated hay meadow; slow meandering stream average 20' wide, 3/4 mile long. None 1 pr., 2 m. Same as above, except stream length on section is a full mile. GWT: Mal: Pothole 1/3 acre; part of Rock Lake ( 3 acres) :Mal: If. 2 pr ,2m. Beaver ponds 15 acres total; Spectacle Lake 3 acres. None Beaver ponds 1/5 acres. None Abandoned beaver ponds, partly drained; total about 3 acres. None 39 Beaver ponds 1/2 acre total. Mal: 43 Riverbottom meadow with beaver ponds totaling about 3 acres. :Mal: 1 pro 44 Pothole 1/5 acre. 45 5 small ponds total 1.1 acres; 2 small lakes each .75 acres. 46 1 pro Mal: 1 pro Part of Alberta Lake (25 acres); beaver ponds totaling 2 acres. None Beaver ponds total about 2 acres 60 Slow stream with meadowland, islands, bulrushes and sedges. None 2 beaver ponds total 1/5 acre. None Hermit Lake, approximately 100 acres. Mal: 1 beaver pond, 1/4 acre. If. Mal: 5 pr., 15 m. Gad: 25 pr., 5 m. L. Scaup: 5 pr: Ruddy: 1 pr., 1 f., 2 m. Ringneck: 1 pro GWT: 70 1 None 58 62 GWT: 3 m. None m. �- 71 - RESULTS Only 16 of the 75 study sections were found to contain waterfowl habitat of any indo Data collected from these 16 sections are presented in Table 1, prec~ding. The remaining 59 sections were characterized ei~her by having no wate~ at all or by having only small, steep, fast streams. It i obvious from the data presented in Table 6 that there are several different abitat types represented, and that tremendous variations in waterfowl populati ns occur amont the sections. It thus appears that considerable refinement is n cessary before quantitative data of anything other than the grossest nature can e collected. Tab1 7, following, presents th~ estimates of the waterfowl breeding pair popu ation on the study area, along with confidence limits. These are the best esti~tes we have, based on the available data, and it is felt that they are reas nably accuratej at least, more accurate than the confidence limits would indiqate. lab11 7 -- Waterfowl Breeding Pair Estimates for· San Luis Valley High-Country I Study Area, 1964. Meaninumber of breeding pairs per productive section ted number of productive sections (sections containing waterfowl habitat) Estimated number of breeding pairs for estimating breeding pairs: .90 probability .85 probability .80 probability Spec es composition of estimated number of breeding pairs: lYTallard Gadwall Green-winged teal Lesser scaup Ruddy duck Ringnecked duck Total 4.814 576 2,772 o - 13,100 o - 10,500 o - 12,200 1,044 1,080 . 288 180 144 36 2,772 �- 72 - A direct comparison of Table 6 with Table 7 reveals that a major source of variation in data is the one study section (no. 69) which fell by chance on a lake containing a relatively large number of ducks. The influence of this one section is seen py noting that the estimate of breeding pair number is only 511 when the data from this section are excluded. This, of course also prings the confidence limits much closer together, but serves no useful purpose since it is absolutely necessary to base any estimate on the inclusion of the lake-type habitat. It is interesting to note the species composition of waterfowl listed in Tables 6 and 7, particularly as it applies to obtaining an accurate estimate. Without the lake habitat as represented by section no. 69, species compb~Sition is confined to mallard and green-winged teal. Data from section 6 give an estimate of species composition which shows gadwalls as being m re numerous than mallards on the study area. It is known that species other than those observed on section 69, notably blue-winged and cinnamon tea , pintail, and redhead, also occur on the study area. A proper sampling of the lake habitat, therefore, is required to provide a reasonably accurate estimate of the species composition as well as total duck numbers. RECOMMENDATIONS The major objective in refinement of this study is to eliminate as much unproductive habitat from consideration as possible, so that time and effort can be expended toward gathering data of a positive nature. All sections which obviously contain no waterfowl habitat should be blocked out. The remaining sections will then have possible, potential, or known habitat/. Such sections will not occur evenly distributed, and cannot be randomly sampled in the same way as the initial selection of study sections was made. Rather, each section which has not been eliminated from consideration should be assigned a number, and a certain prescribed number of sections should be randomly selected from this listing. Thus, we will be working with a s~mple consisting entirely of areas upon which waterfowl habitat could conceivably occur. The next objective is to classify habitat types and attempt to inventory th~m in relation to their actual rate of occurrence. Then, data can be stratified according to habitat type and this source of variation eliminated. Three classifications are suggested, as follows: (1) Lakes larger than 50 acres; (2) the valley bottom meadowland complex; and (3) all other habi at not covered under (1) and (2). A reasonably accurate inventory of habitat types will, necessarily, depend upon sample data, since it is virtually impossible to account for all ateas, particularly those involving beaver ponds and meadowland. Furthermors, waterfowl habitat does not occur in the same proportion on all sections~ The section (one square mile) is the smallest sample breakdown used in the study; therefore, it will be necessary to make a projection for the total area of a given habitat type based upon the actual area occuring on the sample sections. �- 73 - ThesJ data may possibly be refined in future years by departing from the conc~pt of square-mile section study areas, and going to a unit area (pro~ably acreag~) in sampling meadowland. In this application, the sample will1consist entirely of meadowland and will not consider adjacent slopes and other non-productive habitat which must necessarily be considered when usin& the square-mile section. TIlisapproach will be explored as further data becomes availablej for the immediate future, however, the square-mile section will continue to be the sampling unit. Fina ly, it is recommended that habitat types which fall under the lake classification be e.amp'Iedby count.Ingan entire lake rather than only that port~on of a lake which happens to lie within a section. This sampling shou d be done independently of the selection of study sections, so that the final data will consist of waterfowl breeding-pair estimates and habitat acreage estimates for the valley bottom meadowland complex, breeding-pair estimates and acreage estimates for the lake-type habitat, and breedingpair estimates and acreage estimates for all other productive habitat. It iJ recommended for the 1965 season that all obviously non-productive sections be eliminated from consideration. Following this, a random selection of 60 study sections (square-mile) should be made from the new listing to a d to the 16 original sections which will be visited again. In addition to ttiis,a r~ndom selection of 10 lakes should be made independently of the study section selection. Prepared by: WilliamH. Rt;t_th~:r_ford Assist. Wildlife Researcher Date October, 1965 Approved by: Jack R. Grieb Wildlife Researcher WaYlle W. Sandfort C~me Research Chief ��- 75 - PRE-SEASON DUCK BANDING, SAN LUIS VALLEY Jack R. Grieb This limportant job provides information which can be used to evaluate the effect of the experimental seaso~ on ducks. The Valley was split into nort ern (north of the Alamosa-Monte Vista Highway) and southern halfs with a quota of 1,800 mallards equally divided by age and sex for each half. The BureJu of Sport Fisheries and Wildlife was responsible for the southern half, and uhe State responsible for the northern half. The following report covers onlY results by Colorado Department banding crews. An attempt to band ducks was 11so made in the High-Country west of the San Luis Valley in the vicinity of C1eede. No quotos were set and every effort was made to band as mapy ducks as possible. persdnnel cooperating in this program were: John Pogorilze, Errol Ryland, Will·am Rutherford, Steve Peterson, Richard Hopper, Howard Funk, and Jack Grieb. METHODS DuckJ were bait-trapped mainly by use of the Salt Plains trap. Some colapsable traps with net tops were tried but proved only moderately successful. Barley was used for bait in all cases. Traps were distributed amongst all duck concent~ation areas in the north half of the San Luis Valley. An attempt was made to band ducks at each area in proportion to the number of birds present on that area lin relation to the rest of the northern half of the Valley. Similar methods were used to band ducks in the Creede area. I RESULTS valle~ TrappLng began the third week of August and continued vntil September 20. A total of 1,947 ducks of 10 species were banded (1,414 mallards) which was close to the quota established for the northern half of the Valley (Table 7). Hi-ColQtry trapping activity began the third week of Angust and continued unti~ September 20. A total of 767 ducks of 10 species were taken on the Brown Lakes, Hermit Lakes, Pearl Lakes, and Road Canyon Reservoir, (Table 7). RECOIYlMENDATIONS Trapping should be continued in the San Luis Valley and the High Country to assis in the evaluation of the Experimental Mallard season in this area. The trapping effort should begin about the third week in August and conclude about September 20 so as not to interfer with the hvnting season. Date October, 1965 Approved by: Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief ��- 77 - F...ARVEST :rnFORMATION Stat~ crews assisted in gathering hunter and harvest data on the Monte Vista Nati+nal Wildlife Refuge by operating Ch~ck Stations No.2 and 5 from October 1 - 11, and October 17 and 18. Ln addition, 15 hunter performfu~ce COlli~tswere made j All data accruing from this work was turned over to the Bureau of Sport Fish ries and Wildlife and combined with similar information which they gathered Thus, no tabulation of hunters or harvest will be presented in this report, Prep red By: _.:::..J;;,:.a.,:c;;,:.k:.....;:,.R;.,.. •......::G.:::..r.:::;i.,:e...:.b Approved By: Date ~------...:....:.-...:....:....:.~-...:.~~-------October, 1965 Wayne W. Sandfort C~me Research Chief Ferd c. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �- 78 - Table 8 -- Number of ducks banded by species and location during pre-seJson in the San Luis Valley, 1964. Species Valley Floor Location High Mountains TotEll Mallard 1,414 505 1,919 Gaa,wal1 37 3 0 American Widgeon 9 6 15 Green-winged Teal 100 128 2~8 Blue-winged or Cinnamon Teal 101 3 1d4 Shoveler 1 0 1 Pintail 250 10 260 Redhead 29 59 88 Lesser Scaup 0 17 17 Ring-necked Duck 0 12 12 Ruddy Duck 1 0 1 America.n Coot 5 24 29 1,947 767 2,714 Totals I �October, 1965 - 79 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT Stat· of Colorado Project No. w-88-R-IO Work Plan No. 2 TitlJ of Job: Migratory Bird Investigations Job No. 2 Experimental Studies on Improving Status of Canada Goose Populations I Peri Id Covered: April 1, 1964 to March 31, 1965. Personnel: Gurney Crawford, Brownlee Guyer,IVilliam Rutherford, Richard Hopper, Howard Funk, and Jack Grieb I ObjeJtives: (1) Development and evaluation of techniques for initial establishment and/or increase of goose populations on all major drainages in the State~ (2) Permanent establishment of resident goose flocks on all large water impoundments and major river systems with suitable habitat. (3) Retention of resident and migrant Great Basin goose flocks within the State for longer periods of time during the migration and wintering season. (4) Increase the size of the Great Basin goose flocks wintering in the State. Proc~dures: Obtain 75 eggs from the Bowles Lake area, Littleton, Colorado, and natch at the Rocky Ford Bird Farm. vfuenthe goslings are about five weeks old move to the Fort Collins Nursery for conditioning prior to releas . Also capture about 100 goslings from Denver City Park and place with othe~ goslings at the Fort Collins Nursery. Release these birds at Valmont Rese1voir at the age of about 10 weeks. Maintain feed stations for these gees during the winter to hold tbem on the Reservoir. Make recommendations to tne Nortbeast Region on location of nesting structures in the northeast partlof the State. . ��- 81 - EXPER!rMENTAL STUDIES ON IMPROVING I STATUS OF CANADA GOOSE POPULATIONS Jack R. Grieb On JU1~ 1, 1964, Gurney Crawford was assigned full-time to W-llO-D, under the superv~sion of Richard Takes, Northeast Region. TI1US, the following report of act~vities and accomplishment will contain much of the same information which rill also be reported in the completion report of W-llO-D. The reason for thts duplication is to preserve continuity in reporting results of the establ'shment of Canada goose flocks initiated under this job. Fort Collins Flock Production.--The size of the breeding goose population associated with this f~ock continued to increase during the spring of 1964. This was expectedl since harvest was curtailed and a considerable number of birds reached breedirg age and nested. A tabulation of the results of the nesting season is givFn in Table 1. Ec~;ults of the nesting season shows 68 nests established, 333 egrs laid, 202 eggs hatched, and 154 geese reached flying stage. Nine nests were destroyed for various reasons, and 48 goslings failed to reach flights. Location and [ate of nests is listed in Table 1. Information on number of birds released in the Fort Collins area, and those raised naturally by this flock is given in Table 2. These data indicate that a subs antial number of young geese will arrive at breeding age during the 1965 s ason. Further, that there should be an increase in the number of nests lestablished next year. If this is not the case, the limiting factors should be sought out and eliminated. H~bitat Improvement.--Lack of nesting sites continues to be the major limitirg factor in the future growth of this,flock. Placement of these structures pn all types of water areas will promote the spread of this flock and greatl enhance its ability to permanently establish itself in this area. During this segment Crawford has about 100 structures on various wetlands of Larimer County. In addition, he has worked out a floating type structure, and onb constructed with surveyed fish hatchery tubs. This latter shows promis of decreasing the total cost and time of structure construction. P otective Measures.--A relaxation in closed area was again made for the 19E4-65 hunting season. This included opening up p ar t of Larimer County north ~f Wellington. Thus, the closed area consisted roughly of the block of Lar mer County west of Highway 87, north of Harmony, and south of Wellington. oyd and Fossel Creek Reservoirs remained closed to goose hunting within one-half mile of the high-water line, and another reservoir - New Windso - was closed in the same manner. Goose nunting regulations were drastically altered for Larimer County during the pa1st season. A special permit was required for all goose hunters in this County\ by Commission Regulation. This permit entitled the hunter to take no more than six birds during the season. Tags were attached to the permit and hunter wer e required to date, sign, and attach these to the bird after each kill. �- 82 - Table l.--Production results, Number Nests Lake Fort Collins Canada goose Number Number Number Nests Young Eggs Destroyed Hatched Anderson Pond 1 Claymore Lake 1 College Lake 22 Dean's Lake 1 Fossil C. Res. 1 Herring Lake 4 Lamb's Pond 1 Lindenmeier Lake 2 Schuelke Lake 1 Terry Lake 21 Watson Lake 12 Weitzel Pond 1 6 4 108 5 4 21 5 11 5 99 61 4 Total 333 1/ 68 Table prepared 0 1 3 0 1 0 0 0 0 2 2 0 -9 flock, sprinJ, 1964}j No. Failed Number to Reach Mature Maturity Birds 5 0 58 4 0 16 4 9 5 62 36 3 1 0 16 0 0 5 2 1 2 11 8 2 4 0 42 4 0 11 2 8 3 51 28 1 202 48 154 by G. I. Crawford. Table 2.--His tory of Fort Collins Canada goose flock establishment No. Birds Raised Approximate Size Year No. Birds Released in Wild of Flock 1957 1958 1959 1960 1961 1962 1963 1964 31 23 48 68 95 101 0 0 0 0 5 14 20 79 100 158 31 54 60 120 210 400 500 600 Questionnaires were sent to a sample of permit holders to estimate t7e size of harvest. This survey is not complete at this time, and will be r1Ported upon in the completion report for Work Plan 1, Job 5, Hunter Harvest Surveys. Generally speaking, goose hunting in Larimer County and the western ~art of Weld County increased significantly this year. Approximately, 1,600 hunters obtained permits and there was a noticeable increase in the amount of hunter activity. This increase over the previous year was not anticipated ~y the Fort Collins Post Office since they ran out of duck stamps at least twice during the fall. Goose hunting has definitely become a recognized part of the Larimer and Weld County waterfowl hunting picture. One reason it has been so avidly accepted is that Canada geese feed out from the reservoirs nearly every day a d usually during legal shooting hours. Thus, they afforded the hunters an opP0rtunity to hunt which the ducks did not do. �- 83 - In the :r~ort of this job last year it was estimated that a flock of this magnilbttd'ecou1dwithstand a harvest of about 400 geese. There are st.r ong indi'catiLonsthat considerably more than this number was taken. It will be int'erbsting to evaluate this harvest in relation to flock size and pr oducItioo in 1965. I ~intering Popu1ations.--Size of the flock wintering in Larimer County contihued to increase the past year. This was due not only to an Lncr ease in resid~nt birds, but also to increases in the size of the wintering migrant f1ockl· Results of the January Inventory conducted January 6, 1965 in this area revealed about 4,287 Canada geese. This is an increase of about 450 geese from the 1964 January Inventory. These data are tabulated in Table 3. TaibJl.e 3.--Effect of closing part of Larimer County to goose hunting on the number of wintering Canada geese. Area Open to Goose Hunting Area <cllos'ed to Goose Hunting Year No. Canada Geesel/ Year No. Canada Geese.!.! l148 1'949 1950 11 51 52 11 1953 1954 10 1.'96'0 o 1961 1962 1963 1964 1965 o o o o o 55 o 1 It56 70 157 1958 o o 1~59 22 660 1,385 1,945 2,686 3,836 4,287 f7 Based on number of geese counted on the January Waterfowl Inventory. Va1mont Reservoir Flock Gosling Release Program.--A total of 97 goslings eight weeks or older were ~eleased on Va1mont Reservoir in July, 1964. These birds were obtained from the following sources. 1. 01 April 23, 1964, 61 eggs were taken from nests in the Bowles Lake area aridflown via state aircraft to the Rocky Ford Bird Farm. This year we did not take eggs from dump nests and hatching success was much better __ 41 out of 61 or about 72 percent. These birds were brought to Fort Collins for conditioning prior to their release. 2. A total of 62 goslings were taken from the Denver City Park on June 12, 1964, and brought to Fort Collins Experimental Nursery for integration with birds b~ought from Rocky Ford, and conditioning before release. The 97 goslings were banded with the following band series prior to release at Va1mont Reservoir -- 508-46101 through 508-46197. �- 84 - Flock Status.--Number of geese from the 1963 release using Valmont varied during the spring and summer. Apparently as many as 50 birds remain~d in the area and used the reservoir occasionally, with a group of about 25 o~ these 50 which stayed on the reservoir most of the time. After the 1964 re1e,se, the number of birds fluctuated throughout the summer, narrowing to about a hundred birds using the area almost constantly. Crawford reported that this number has held steady throughout the winter with the greatest number of bi~ds (300) counted during the migration period in the fall. An automatic feede was maintained during the fall and winter for this flock. Habitat Improvement.--About 15 nesting structures will be built at Va1mont Reservoir during March, 1965. None were constructed in 1964 because of lack of time, money, and personnel. uJs. Protective Measures.--That portion of Boulder County, west of 287 and south of State 119 was closed to goose hunting. In addition, Valmont Reservoir and all Public Service Company lands surrounding the Reservoir were lased to all hunting, fishing and trapping. This appeared to be adequate and will probably be recommended for next year. Bonny Reservoir Flock.--Attempts will be made during the coming year to spread progeny from the captive flock to suitable habitat in the Bon y Reservoir area. In early November, 1964, about 40 adults were taken from Bel Mar Estate because of crowded conditions, wing-clipped, and placed in th Bonny Pen. In addition, last spring 22 eggs were taken from goose nests in the ~en and incubated at the Rocky Ford Bird Farm. Of these, 19 hatched and wer~ subsequently released in the goose pens at three to four weeks of age. I is recommended that eggs again be taken from the nests in the pen, taken to he Fort Collins Experimental Nursery, hatched, and released back at the Bonny Pen. North Park Flock.--Discussions with Earl Downer, Area Supervisor during the past year have indicated that there were Canada geese inhabiting I the North Park area throughout the summer and fall periods. Apparently some of these are a carry-over from the original goose plants made in this a~ea in the 1950's. Earl is positive that some of these are nesting birds a d has been attempting to locate the nesting area in order that protective easures can be applied if needed. Usually, the geese observed occurred on the Lake John Annex and McFarland Reservoir. Counts for the past years are as follows: 1961 - 7; 1962 - 16; 1963 37; and 1964 - 89. These indicate a steadily increasing goose population and may mean the return of the Canada goose to the species of waterfowl Fommonly nesting in North Park. Recommendations: 1. Goose eggs should again be taken from Bowles Lake and hatched at the Fort Collins Experimental Nursery under the direction of Willis Mansf1e1d. 2. Goose eggs should also be taken from the Bonny Reservoir hatched in the same manner as (1). captive flock and �- 85 - 3. G slings hatched from Bowles Lake eggs should be released at Valmont Reservoir, and those hatched from Bonny eggs should be released in the Bonny gtose pens. 4. All goslings taken from the Denver area should be released at Valmont Reservoir. 5. N~sting Collins 6. Rkconunendations for closed areas and seasons will be discussed with all concerned personnel in the Northeast Region. structures area. should at Valmont Reservoir I Jack R. Grieb Project Leader Date: be built ------October, 1965 Approved by: and in the Fort at a meeting Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator ��October, 1965 - 87 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO Proje t No. W-88-R-IO Work Plan No. 2 Vlaterfowl Surveys and Investigations Job No. 4a Title of Job: Investigation of the Arkansas Valley Wintering Goose Flock Period Covered: April 1, 1964 to March 31, 1965. PersonI nel.· Roy Ackley*, Simon Allen*, Don Bogart, Claude Brock*, Wayne Cramer*, Jack Grieb, Harold Hood, O. L. Jackson*, Robert Kitzmiller*, Gene Nugent*, William Piper*, Clyde Rodgers*, William Rutherford, Jesse Walker*. * Temporary employee. ABSTRACT water and weather conditions were generally satisfactory, but food conditions were judged only fair, for the Canada goose flock in the Arkansas Valley of l Color~do during the winter of 1964-65. Aerial census flights over the major wintering areas of this flock indicated that flock status remained excellent, and that numbers of geese wintering in Colorado were up from the year before. Warm land dry weather in Canada delayed the migration of geese until November 20, when the entire flight arrived en masse. A delayed season opening, to deterlmine the possible benefit of allowing geese to establish a feeding pattern unmolested, was unsuccessful because of the late arrival of geese. Hunt~r harvest waS the highest on record in the Valley, showing an increase of 4Z.4 percent over the"ten-year average. Harvest at the Two Buttes Management Area waS about the same as last year. The number of goose hunters in I the ~alley increased over the past three years, and the average season bag per ~unter was by far the highest of the ten-year period. The wounding loss stud~ estimated a loss of 20-22 percent of the total hunting mortality. Inform~tion obtained at the Two Buttes check stations showed a much more even dist ibution of goose feeding flights than was true last year, and consequently a better dispersion of hunter opportunity. Hunter use stayed relatively consTant throughout the season, but hunter success showed a general decrease as tHe season advanced. A total of 978 geese were newly banded, and 1,028 gees were fluoroscoped at Two Buttes Reservoir and Eads Lakes. Data from j these trapped birds reveal that (1) the sex ratio is close to 50-50; (2) the ~uvenile-adult ratio is considerably lower this year than in past years; (3) ~verage weights of geese taken by hunters at Two Buttes are significantly greater than those of geese trapped at Two Buttes, and average weights of gees trapped at Eads Lakes are significantly greater than those of birds �_ 88 _ trapped at Two Buttes. Possible reasons for these differenc.es are dis9 ssed; (4) using fluoroscopy to determine effects of hunting pressure on gee~e, it appears that shot incidence in Arkansas Valley birds is lower this yea~, with shot incidence in juveniles being very low. The relative vulnerability! of juveniles as compared to adults seems to be greater in field hunting tHan in firing-line hunting, and al~o greater during the first half of hunting season. Family group counts continued to show lack of consistency, and are not considered accurate enough for management purposes. Weather effects upon goose flights and hunter harvest seemed to work against many field hunters, Jlthough the overall goose harvest was the highest on record. Recommendations ~or continuing study of the Arkansas Valley goose flock are presented. �- 89 - INVESTIGATIONS OF THE ARKANSAS VALLEY WINTERING GOOSE FLOCK William H. Rutherford Introduction: The wintering goose population in the Arkansas Valley is probarly the most important single waterfowl flock in Colorado in re1ationto hurter use and enjoyment. Before closer management of a specific waterfowl !flock can be attained, the basic knowledge of its numbers, local movements~ and habits must be gained. The expected increase in hunting pressure and the corresponding increased harvest of this flock indicates the need for futur~~·recommendations which will permit the correct harvest of this resource upon sustained yield basis. Objec ives: (1) To determine the fall movement of geese into the Arkansas ValIer and the size of the wintering flock. (2) To determine the hunting presspre and hunter success on geese in the Arkansas Valley and particularly at Twp Buttes Reservoir. (3) To investigate the wounding loss of geese at Two Bpttes Reservoir. (4) To determine the age and sex composition, morta1it~, and percent of birds carrying shot. (5) To investigate the relationship ~etween Canada geese wintering on various lakes in the Arkansas Valley. proce~ures: Periodic aerial counts were made in the Arkansas Valley of Colorado ~nd the panhandle of Texas, and ground counts were conducted at various inter~als at Two Buttes Reservoir, Eads Lakes, and John Martin Reservoir, for the purpose of determining the size and distribution of the wintering goose population. Check stations were operated at the Two Buttes Management Area to determine hunting pressure, harvest, wounding loss, and age ratio of the goose flock. Goose tail feathers were collected from commercial picker.s in the area, as a source of supplemental age ratio data. Trapping, banding, and fluorrscopy of geese at Two Buttes and Eads Lakes was done after the close of hunting season to determine the effect of the hunting season, the status of the flock, and the habits and movements of the birds. Results: ~ater, Food, and Weather Conditions: Water levels in the major reservoirsl of the Arkansas Valley, although lower than normal, were generally good to exlcel1ent for wintering geese. John Martin Reservoir Has completely dry un tillthe second week of January, at which time the gates were closed and storage commenced. Even though dry, this reservoir held some geese along the river channel, and after the gates were closed an immediate population bUil~UP occurred. Two Buttes Reservoir Has drained in the late summer of 1964, due both to demands of irrigators and for necessary repairs to the dischar e gate. Within ten days after draining, however, heavy rains in the wate shed restored the lake to approximately three-fourths of its normal late summ r level. No further irrigation demands were made, and the level remain d stable during the fall and winter. Food conditions were variable, but considered only fair throughout the Valley. The rop was very poor, due to a continuation of the long drought which has plag ed the high plains. The dryland winter wheat crop was almost a complete �- 90 - failure. Spring moisture came in time for germination of milo and othel grain sorghums, but a dry summer prevented grain heads from developing. Many fields of milo were left unharvested because of the low yield, and these offered the best available feed for geese in the Valley during the earlr winter. Later, many of these unharvested milo fields were electric fen ed, and cattle were turned in. The proportion of irrigated cropland in the Valley is constantly increasing, and now offers a substantial contribution to the goose feed potential. No major storms were experienced, and severe cold weather did not devel p at any time during hunting season. This weather pattern was instrumental in holding large numbers of geese in the Valley, in spite of only fair food conditions, and thus offered a positive contribution to hunter success. Migration Movement and Wintering Population: Two aerial censuses were used to determine the movement of Canada geese (Branta canadensis) intoi and wintering populations of, the Arkansas Valley (Table 1). These flights were coordinated with similar ones in the Texas panhandle, and with ground 0 servations by various personnel, so that it was possible to determine the status of the entire flock, rather than just that portion wintering in Colorado. IFlights were completed on schedule, with no cancellations or postponements caused by weather. The schedule of flights has now been worked out to eliminate the ~~:;~b~~t~~u~:~~ ~!~::b:;~seA~a::r~;tD~~::b~~e:~~~u!nc!::t~a!!~Yt~~ midwinter (January) inventory, are deemed sufficient. ~:~I~:r Aerial counts in the Texas panhandle were unsatisfactory, due to a comb nation of poor weather and lack of knowledge of where birds might be found. Aerial I harassment of geese at the Waggoner Ranch had completely dispersed the birds. However, U. S. Game Management Agent Don Krieble was successful in finding these geese, and was able to get an extremely accurate count during thel January inventory period. On the basis of these aerial counts, and gro nd observations by personnel in each area, it appears that the Short Grass Prairie Canada Goose Population is in excellent condition, with numbers continuing to increase. The Arkansas Valley of Colorado held considerably more geese this year than in past years. Again, for the third consecutive year, an extremely warm and dry autumn I in Canada delayed the southward movement of geese. Where normally the fir?t substantial flights of geese reach the Valley about the first week of N~vember, this year no geese were present until November 10, and then only aivery small contingent. The number remained at about 150-200 birds until Nov mber 20, at which time virtually the entire flight arrived en masse. This m vement was apparently triggered by a major storm on the Canadian prairie whichlmoved all but a few stragglers. Slight population buildups were noted throug late November, with all birds having arrived by December 1. Project personnel have long felt that the opening of hunting season before the arrival of geese in the Valley. and particularly at Two Buttes, prevent1d the birds from settling into a definite feeding pattern. The result of this immediate harassment could vary from a reduction of hunter success to a out- �- 91 - Tablell. -- Aerial Canada Goose Counts~ Arkansas Valley, Colorado, by Dates, 1964-1965. Reseryoir I CF & fLakes Mered1-th Lake HenrY/Lake Cherafl Group Arkansas River I John Iartin Reservoir Hasty Lake Veerh,ff Lake Nee Gonda Reservoir Nee Nlshe Reservoir Upper Queens Reservoir Thurston Reservoir Two B~ttes Reservoir Rutherford Lake December 9, 1964 January 6, 1965 85 110 44o!I 55 15 35 8 1,250 12 18 1 ,OOO~/ 18 ,O~~I 6,000 5,05041 10 2;~1 I 13,000 9,000 11,00~ 55 13 ,800~/ 6,000 TOTAL~ 47,475 37,693 1/ 2/ 3/ 8 snow geese. 1 snow goose. 3 snow geese. 11 snow geese. 4/ rightlforcing of a considerable segment of the wintering goose population out the Valley. Accordingly, a delayed hunting season opening in Baca County and the south half of Prowers County was asked for and granted. We hopedl to be able to evaluate the effect of this delayed opening upon the habitf of the geese, but realized, of course, that everything depended upon arriv 1 of birds in early November, as the opening was delayed only until Novem er 15. Geese were not present in huntable numbers until five days afterl the opening of season, and of course the delayed opening had absolutely nOI effect. 0t Compatison of January inventory information for the Arkansas Valley flock, ~:di~rl!:s2~h:~o;~eae:~~::1~~:;~!;gfi~~~l~~!~~;te:no!n~:~~r~~:=i~~o~~o~ata birds an apparent increase over the population size of previous years. The h~gh total count was made on the early December inventory flight and consisted of 128,000 geese. The January inventory showed 103,000 birds, which I compares favorably with the December count when flock diminution as a result of harvest is considered. �- 92 - Table 2. -- January Inventory of Canada Geese, Arkansas Valley, Colora 1948-1965. Year Goose Count Year Goose Count Year 1948 1949 1950 1951 1952 1953 4,798 12,286 13,170 19,320 30,463 20,236 1954 1955 1956 1957 1958 1959 20,280 25,110 24,212 24,617 35,894 44,660 1960 1961 1962 1963 1964 1965 Goose Cou 37,394 31,360 / 40,25~ 35,889 33,750 37,693 1/ Inventory of Feb. 7, 1962, substituted for January, 1962, inventory. Hunter Harvest: The operation of check stations at the Two Buttes Management Area during the 1964-65 hunting season was more thorough than tha of the year before, but still not complete. Manpower to operate all stations during all hours of open hunting was not available; consequently, some Inform, tiorr was missed. This Was not deemed serious, as it was estimated that approximately 95 percent check was obtained. Table 3 presents data obtained Ithrough operation of the check stations, with no attempt made to account for possible missing information. Table 4 compares the current goose harvest in the Arkansas Valley with the ten-year average, indicating that the total harvest during the past yea was up 42.4 percent from the ten-year average. Again, the later than normal arrival of geese in the Valley had no adverse effect upon the harvest;{ather, the distributional pattern after arrival this year was highly conduciv to a heavier kill. There is increasing evidence that geese do not like the wo Buttes area as well as they formerly did, and that while the Valley as a who le is showing a continuing upward trend in wintering geese, there is a great deal more scattering of birds as well as much greater use of the Eads Lakes, John Martin, and Meredith Lake areas. Table 5 lists goose hunting statistics for the past eleven years and shF-Hs that stamp sales for 1964 show a considerable increase over every year rollowing 1960. The increase in number of goose hunters in the Valley also s~ows the same pattern. Apparently, goose hunters are beginning to adapt theEselves to the changes in arrival dates and distribution of geese which have be n evident in the Valley for the past three years, and are showing increasing interest in hunting geese. The average season bag of geese per hunter for 1964-65 shows 8l remarkab e increase for the second consecutive year. The total bag in the Arkansas Valley is the highest ever recorded in the eleven-year period covered by the rhndom survey. The conclusion, based on hunting pressure and gO'O'SE!' harvest fitures, is that goose hunters who participated in the 1964-&5 seaS'lO'I!l' fn the Ark nsas Valley enjoyed the best hunting season on record.. lit is predicted that the next few years will show a sharp rise in hunting, ]!>'l!'essm:e as a resu1 t of the last two years I high average season bag p'er fll:ln'ter. I �- 93 - Table 3. -- Goose Harvest, Wounding Loss, Hunting Pressure, and Hunter Success, Two Buttes Management Area, 1964-65. Item I Goose ~arvest: jdu1t uvenile ota1 Resident 304 157 461 1532/ 107260 457 264 721 Woundilng Loss 143 62 205 323 1.46 138 1.86 461 1.58 1,554 20.8 2,914 1.82 0.30 0.17 442 , 31.2 1,032 2.28 0.58 0.25 1,996 23.1 3,946 1.92 0.36 0.19 Non-Resident Total 1/ succe~SfUl Hunters: umber ve. bag/hunter All Hu ters: umber ota1 hunter days unter days/hunter ve. bag/hunter ve. bag/hunter day 1/ In 1udes one adult white-fronted goose (Anser a1bifrons). 2/ In 1udes one juvenile white-fronted goose:--- Table 4. -- Goose Harvest -in the Arkansas Valley, by County. Ten-Year Average, 1954-63, 1964-65, Based on Results of Random Survey. I Number and Percent of Geese Bagged 10-year average 1964-65 Count Baca Lakes I 1::1 "Tva Prcwer's Bent Otero Las An,imas TOTALSI Two Buttes Eads and Blue Two Buttes and Eads John Martin, Blue and Horsecreek Meredith and Henry Horsecreek, Cheraw group, Dyes, and Holbrook No. % No. % 5,286 2,704 2,292 40.7 20.8 17.6 3,278 6,269 3,182 17~8 34.0 17.2 1,440 690 68 110 11.1 5.3 0.5 0.8 2,776 838 862 598 15.0 4~5 4.7 3.2 263 125 2.2 1.0 503 168 2.7 0.9 12,978 100.0 18,474 . 100 •. 0 �- 94 - Table 5. -- Goose Hunting Season Statistics, 1954-1964. Year Dates of Season Stamp Sales Estimated Goose Hunters 1954 1955 1956 1957 1958 1959 1960 1961 1962 1963 1964 11/1 - 12/30 11/1 - 12/30 11/9 1/7 11/2 - 12/31 11/17 - 1/15 10/26 - 1/8 10/26 - 1/8 11/10 - 1/8 10/31 - 1/13 11/2 1/15 11/2 1/15 32,450 39,107 36,303 41,794 41,897 31,431 30,592 24,854 17,701 22,940 25,282 7,071 9,054 9,833 9,113 10,082 8,888 9,838 7,577 6,021 6,668 8,016 Arkansas Valle;¥: Average Season Esti~ated Bag Kill I 1.04 1.54 1.05 1.39 1.51 1.61 1.39 1.68 1.58 2.17 2.30 7,3t2 13,9V4 10,2r6 12,656 15,2t5 14,3 9 13,6*9 12,7't4 9,495 . I 14,4;4 18,414 ,= Wounding Loss: Wounding loss in the 1964-65 season was estimated byI two methods: (1) The small game hunter random survey indicated a loss of 18.9 percent of the total goose harvest mortality; and (2) check station inf rmation permits calculation of loss on the firing line of a minimum of 22.1 percent. The check station figure is normally lower than the random survey figure, possibly because firing-line hunters have been reluctant to admit woundig geese. This reluctance is not evident this year; in fact, the check staqion estimate is higher than that of the random survey. It is believed that the actual wounding loss in the Arkansas Valley goose flock is in the range df 20-22 percent. Hunter Habits and Characteristics: Table 6 shows the relative goose kill, hunting pressure, and hunter success for weekly intervals on the Two Buttes Management Area. Variations during the season are caused, of course, by the combination of varying hunter use (weather, weekends vs. weekdays, etc.) jnd v~rying hunting conditions (weather, goose population present, changes in daily goose flight patterns, etc.). Feeding flights from the Reservoir were much more dispersed this year thar last year, resulting in a closer ratio in the kill on the two sides of the lak (Table 7). The food plot on the north side was handled the same as in th past; that is, some of the grain was left unharvested in the field. Howe er, geese did not use this field to anywhere near the extent that they did la t year, although feeding flights north of the Reservoir were common. Two possible reasons why this food plot was not fully utilized are: (1) Soil Conservation Service terracing machinery 'vasworking in the field during hunting season, and (2) feed conditions wer e considerably better several miles north of the lake than in the immediate vicinity of the lake, so that; although birds flew out to the north, they often kept going instead of al.ghting near the lake. Feeding flights to the south were more common than la t f I �- 95 - .1 The result was that hunter success and goose kill were more evenly year spreaj instead of being concentrated in a few pits on the north side firing line. Table 6. Weekly Distribution of Goose Kill, Hunting Pressure, and Hunter Success, Two Buttes Management Area, 19;64-1965. Number of Number of Average Bag Week ~nterval Geese Killed Hunter Days Per Hunter Day I . 11/20 11/27 12/4 12/11 12/18 12/25 1/1 1/8 I TOTALS I to n/26 to 12/3 to 12/10 to 12/17 to 12/24 to 12/.311 to 1/7 to 1/15 143 166 79 64 363 775 5'35 413 59' 255 1:£3: 66 31 699 448 45'8 0.39 0.21 0.15 0.15 0.23 0.16 0.14 0.07 721 3\,9'46 0.18 Table 7 shows: ~hat the to'talllil1l'n1tter use and goose kill were greater on the southl side than:on. the u'OTlth sficfeof Two Buttes Reservoir, but that hunter succej3s was Frfgb1!1r on the n'Ortth side. Certainly the food plot on the north side had some iiu,f]Juence, and it is believed that this was the factor responsible fbr higher lituntersuccess. It thus appears that the food plot is continui~g to be a n'e-eessarypart of the operation of the Two Buttes Management Area.i ~pecial Bandimg In~stigation: During the 1964-65 wintering season, trapp1ng, banding~ and fluoroscopy of geese in the Arkansas Valley was done follo~ing the close of hunting season. The trapping site at Two Buttes Reser~oir had been pre-baited for about a week, and on January 16 (the day afterlthe close of hunting season) the first catch, consisting of 201 small Canadj geese, was made~ We were highly successful this year in spreading out the catch of geese, both as toltime and location, rather than having one large catch at one place as was tne case last year. A total of 464 geese, in three different catches, was trapPfd at Two Buttes; and at Eads Lakes a total of 574 birds, in six different cftches, was trapped. Substantially, these catches satisfied the quota of 50? birds at each location which we had previously established. Trapping was terminated following the catch of February 3. The trapping and banding results for the 1964-1965 season are presented in Table 8. �- 96 - Table 7. -- Resident and, Non-Resident Hunter-Days Two Buttes Management Area, 1964-65. South Side Pit Hunter-days Pit Hunter-days No,. Res. Non-res. No. Res. Non-res. Pit No. 1 2 3 4 5 12 1 2 3 4 5 7 6 6 90 99 97 96 97 86 7 73 8 50 32 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 TOTALS 40 59 62 61 54 73 41 36 7 5 15 20 18 16 16 16 11 3 4 20 28 21 22 21 24 14 28 13 41 41 42 24 12 29 38 41 3 2 6 11 3 4 2 2 1 3 3 29 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 Unk. 4 1 45 48 41 32 43 29 3 8 13 5 4 3 8 ~ 32 17 .. 3 11 2 6 13 11 12 7 9 10 4 10 7 20 1 0 1 0 4 1 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 North Side Hunter-days Pit Hunter-days Res. Non-res. No. Res. Nonl-res. 7 13 12 8 20 48 44 63 74 81 96 88 68 82 Ti 26 27 3i; 1 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 4 5 5 6 8 19 33 26 21 33 20 14 18 28 14 20 15 14 12 33 35 49 22 17 21 1. 6 33 6 B 118 7 3 1 3 1 Resident: Non-resident: Total: Goose kill: Bag/hunter-day: Re sLd'en.ti ; 2,.914 Non-resident: 1,032 Total: 3,946 7-21 Goose kill: Bag/hunter-day: 0.182 14 15 1. ]. 3: 1~ 12 28 29 30 31 32 Unk. 3 3~\ 8 1 Resident: 1,666 Non-resident:: 623 To,tc:tll : 2,.289 Goose kill: 379 Bag/hunter-day: 0.166 GRAND TOTAL 7 8 9 of Use by Pit Location, 1,248 409 1,657 342 0.206 6 1. �- 97 - Table 8. Date I 1/16/$5 1/20/~5 1/21/65 1/24/65 1/30/~5 1/31/+5 2/l/6~ 2/2/6 2/3/6 t TOTAL~ Arkansas Valley Banding Results2 1964-65. Number of Location Geese Banded Two Buttes Reservoir 187 Upper Queens Reservoir 44 Two Buttes Reservoir 109 Upper Queens Reservoir 9 Upper Queens Reservoir 62 Two Buttes Reservoir 145 Upper Queens Reservoir 123 Upper Queens Reservoir 125 Upper Queens Reservoir 174 Number of Recaj2tures 14 1 4 3 6 5 10 9 8 Total 201 l~5 113 12 68 150 133 134 60 1,038 978 182 Infor~tion obtained from trapping and banding geese, along with certain informa~ion from check stations and goose pickers, is presented under appropriate sub-headings in the following: Age and Sex Composition: Age determination of all geese trapped was by notched tail-feather method, double checked by cloacal examination. Age I determination of all geese checked through check stations, and collected from goose pickers, was by notched tail-feather method. Tablei9 compares the percentage of young birds between the trapped sample and the check station sample, with the trapped sample separated by location. All birds!trapped at Eads Lakes are not listed in the table, as the two smallest catches were not representative, being made up almost entirely of adult birds. Eithe~ or both samples could still be biased, but it has customarily been considered that check station information may be a more valid measure of age compo ition for the following reasons: Table 19. Age Comparison of the Arkansas Valley Canada Goose Flock, 1964-65, as Estimated by Trapping and Check Station Results. I Trapp~d Sample: ads Lakes wo Buttes Res. Station Sample: wo Buttes Res. Number of Young Percent Young Number of Adults Percent Adults Total Birds 109 21.1 19.2 408 375 78.9 89 BO.B 517 464 264 36.6 457 63.4 721 �- 98 - 1. It is believed that firing-line harvest has less tendency to be selective by age or sex than other harvest methods, and there is better opportunity for an adequate sample of age classes, since all geese pass over the firing line. 2. Trapping was confined to a certain spot along the reservoir shork. Geese were baited to this area, and there is a distinct chance that for a y particular instant in which the net was fired, the area could have been occupied by a population of geese which was not representative of the entrre population. This was, in fact, so obvious in the two cases cited above t at data from the catches were eliminated from the analysis. The validity of the above cited reasons depends upon reasonable accuracy n the aging technique. During past years, spot checks coupled with data on known-age (banded) birds in the hunter's bag revealed a tendency on the prrt of check station operators to call a certain proportion of adult birds jUfeniles. This year, check station operators did not age birds, but simply pulled tail feathers and placed them in envelopes. Thus, all aging of birds from all sources was done by trained personnel. Normally, the percentage of young birds in the check station sample is hi her than in the trapped and banded sample, and this condition held true this rear. However, both percentages, and particularly that of the trapped and bandet sample, were far lower than percentages of young birds from previous year, • These samples constitute our one best source of data for estimating nesti g Success and production in the flock, as the family group counting techniq e shows too many inconsistencies. This may be partly speculation, but indi ations are that the flock experienced a poor production year during 1964. The excellent status of the flock, and the high inventory figures obtained, wbuld seem to belie this assumption; nevertheless, the samples drawn from the p pulation show a very low proportion of juvenile birds. t Information on sex ratios was derived from the trapped sample only. With respect to trapping bias, as outlined in reason 2 in the discussion of age ratios, the sex ratios of the trapped sample could be subject to bias froili the same source; in fact, the same two catches eliminated from the age rahio data are also eliminated from the sex ratio data. However; there is no reason to suspect that the sex composition is out of proportion, since th data from the trapped sample indicate a fairly evenly balanced sex ratio, las shown in Table 10, follo.dng: Table 10. -- Sex Composition of the Arkansas Valley Canada Goose Flock, 1964-65, from Trapped Sample. Number Percent Number Percent Total Location of Males Males of Females Females Biuds I Two Buttes Reservoir 229 49.4 235 50.6 4t4 Eads Lakes 265 51.3 252 48.7 5 7 �- 99 - oose Weights: The mean weights of hunter-harvested birds and of trap led and banded birds are presented in Table 110 A gross examination reve Is that there is considerable difference between weights of hunterbagged birds and trapped and banded birds at Two Buttes~ and also a considerable ~ifference between weights of birds trapped and banded at Two Buttes and at Ea1ds Lakes , Table 110 -- Comparison of Weights of Geese-from Trapped and Check Station Samples, Arkansas Valley, 1964-65 0 Sourc1e Number of Adults Average Number of Average ue, lbs. Juveniles ue, Lbs , Number of Geese Average Wt. lbs. Two Bbttes Check Station 442 5 76 259 5.40 701 5.63 ttes ping 375 5.33 89 5.24 464 5.31 Eads akes Trapping 452 5.73 109 5.45 561 5.68 0 The "~,, test for significance was made on four different groups of birds, as follo¥s: (1) comparison of adult weights between the Two Buttes check station and Two Buttes trapping; (2) comparison of juvenile weights between the same ources; (3) comparison of adult weights between Two Buttes trapping and Efds Lakes trapping; and (4) comparison of juvenile weights between the Same ources. In these four analyses, "tllis equal to 11018, 1 57, 6.63, and 2.66, respectively, where t.05 for the asymmetric test equals 1.645 with infinit~ degrees of freedomo The only analysis not showing a significant difference at the .05 level is the comparison of weights of juvenile birds from he hunter's bag and from trapping at Two Buttes (lit"= le57), and this lit"v lue is significant at the 010 levelo 0 Geese~ particularly adults, taken by hunters were significantly larger than those taken by cannon-net trapping, which is precisely the result obtained from n identical analysis of the data from the 1963-64 wintering season. We cam.only speculate upon the possible reasons why this is so, but the following piints come to mind: (1) It has commonly been accepted that there can be no se ectivity on the part of firing-line shooters~ but these data suggest that *unters may tend to pick a larger bird at which to shoot (2) For precisel1' the same reasons as discussed under age and sex ratios, either or both of th, Two Buttes samples could be biased with respect to weight. Weight varia ,ions within the samples are the result of a combination of changes in age r~tios within the adult class, sub-species composition, sex ratios, andbody onditions, and it is entirely conceivable that these sources of variation ould have tremendous effect upon the data" (3) There also exists the distilct possih:i.litythat weight loss as the result of hunting season stress Q �-100 - could account for the significant difference. The sample of birds takel by hunters was distributed throughout hunting season, while the sample fro cannon-net trapping was taken after the close of hunting season. The significant difference in weights of birds (both adult and juvenile be tween those trapped at Two Buttes and those trapped at Eads Lakes suggests that, in large part, two different segments of the flock, each having , different physical characteristics, winter at these two different 10cat~ons. Color-marking studies in the past have sholm that considerable interchapge between these two segments exists, and many birds banded at Two Buttes rave been recovered in the Eads area; however, it appears that a majority ofl t.he: individuals making up the two different flock segments do not switch wirtering areas. There can be no doubt that, generally speaking, Eads Lakes ~irds are larger than those at Two Butteso Fluoroscopy: The results of the fluoroscopy operation are presented in Table 12. There is, .of course, a high degree of difference between body shot incidence of adults and juveniles, explained by the fact that this is the first year's hunting on juveniles while adults have been subjected to more years of hunting depending upon their age. Data presented in Table 12 are comparable to those of past years with espect to the Two Buttes segment of the flock. This is the first year that w~ have been able to fluoroscope a sizeable catch of birds at Eads Lakes; consequently, we do not have the benefit of past years' data for comparison~ Grossl~, the Eads Lakes birds have a higher shot incidence than do the Two Buttes birds, a condition which was more or less expected. Closer examination revealslthat juvenile birds in the EarlsLakes sample have a very low incidence of body y the shot, and that the higher overall incidence is accounted for entirely adult age class. There is no ready explanation for this, as it is not knolm whether th.i 5 is a common condition or whether it indicates relatively ight hunting pZ'c>ssureduring only the 1964-65 season. If this second conje ture is true, lls effect upon the adult age class could be obscured by a ve,y high shot incidence during preceding years. It is unfortunate that we do n~t have two or more years of fluoroscopy data from birds at Eads Lakes. 1 Table l2~ -- Percent of Geese with Body Shot, by Age and Sex Class, Ariansas Valley, Post-Hunting Season, 1965~ , Percent Total Percent Number Percent Number Location and Geese ?/shot w/shot of Females w/shot of Males Age Class Two Buttes: Adults Juveniles.Y All Geese 189 46 235 49.7 26.1 45.1 196 43 239 42.8 34.9 41.4 385 89 474 Eads Lakes: 237 Adults Juveniles.!/ 50 287 All Geese 1/ Birds-of-the-year. 57.8 18.0 50.9 207 60 267 58.5 16.7 49.1 444 110 554 46•2 30.3 43.2 1 58.1 17.3 50.0 �-101 - Much~effort has been made in the past to determine a method of measuring hunt ng pressure by means of the percentage of birds carrying shot in the popu ation. This may not be a valid criterion, since the percentage carrying shot may, and probably does, depend upon a number of different factors, eachiof which singly or in combination act to change the percentage of all birdr carrying shot independently of the hunting season pressure. Some of thes factors are listed as follows: 1. Age composition of the population: If each age class component of the population is present in the same proportion year after year, then age comppsition will have little effect. However, if breeding success is sporadic with varying size yearling populations entering the population universe year after year, then it is obvious that the percentage of all adults with shot will vary from year to year, and valid yearly comparisons cannot be made. I 2. To eliminate the potential error in number 1, it would be necessary to cpnfine all analyses to birds-of-the-year or juveniles. But here again, the Fize of the annual increment may have important bearing on the percentage carrying shot, since the larger the number of juveniles with a stable hunt ng pressure, the less probability of any individual bird acquiring shot. Thus~ a measure of age composition would seem necessary to make fluoroscopy an areqUatelY workable technique. Distribution of Flock Hunting Pressure: One of the prime motives for I emphasizing the banding and fluoroscopy effort was to establish, if possible~ the leffect of the firing line at Two Buttes on this goose flock. Actually, in cpnsidering the information, it is recognized that it is not possible to sepa~ate the firing line from the surrounding area; thus, inferences made must! include the Two Buttes area in general. Sincr. no trapping was done during hunting season this year, there are no data to s ow the average increase in body shot incidence through the hunting seas n or to estimate the percentage of adult and juvenile birds carrying shot at the time of arrival in the Valley. The catches made at Two Buttes shoved a shot incidence approximately the same as that of last year, and considerably lower than that of previous years. The very 10\\1 incidence in juve ile birds trapped at Eads Lakes has been noted above. Adult birds trap~ed at Eads Lakes showed a body shot incidence of about the same level as t e long-time average for Two Buttes birds. In general, then, posthuntfng season body shot incidence in the Arkansas Valley flock seems to be lower than usual this year. This occurrence follows a hunting season which saw the largest harvest of geese and the highest hunter success ratio on reco d in the Arkansas Valley. Have goose hunters suddenly become more proficient in downing their birds so that fewer geese flyaway carrying shot? This is absurd, especially in view of the fact that the wounding loss in the Iflock is just as high as ever. Rather, the low shot incidence seems to be tre result of sampling error, as it has no other explanation. Data from samples trapped during hunting season in previous years have shown that juvenile birds consistently acquire body shot at a greater rate than that of adults. This differential age-class vulnerability has been attributed �-102 - to field shooting rather than firing-line shooting. In an attempt to le1rn whether juveniles are actually more vulnerable in field shooting, commer!i3l goose pickers in the Arkansas Valley were contacted and asked to coopera e in the study. Cooperators were furnished a supply of envelopes, and wer requested to pull tail feathers from each goose, place them in envelopes, and record on each envelope the date and location of the kill. Age classifi .ation by the notched tail-feather method of the feathers thus collected yielde the data shown in Table 13. with Table 13. -- Age Ratios of Canada Geese Killed in Field Hunting, Compare Age Ratios from Firing-Line Hunting, Arkansas Valley, 1964- 5. Date and Source Adults Number Percent Juveniles Number Percent pf Ratio Juveniles/~dults r= Before December 15: Field Hunting Firing-Line Hunting 63 283 52.9 56 185 47.1 60.5 39.5 0.89 0.65 After December 15: Field Hunting Firing-Line Hunting 41 62.1 68.0 25 101 37.9 0.61 215 32.0 0.471 A gross examination of the data in Table 13 shows that the percentage of juvenile birds killed in field hunting is higher than the percentage kil1led on the firing line throughout the hunting season; and that the percentage of juvenile birds in the bag is higher during the first half of the season than during the second half, for both types of hunting. Chi-square con~ingency tests wer e employed to determine whether these differences are s i.r nificant. The chi-square value for field hunting vs , firing line hunting v-' s 3 34, and for first half vs. second half of hunting season it was 6.17, ,,,ith X2 .05 equal to 3.84 and X2.10 equal to 2.71 \"ith one degree of freedom. The chi-square value for vulnerability of juveniles in tHO different t~les of hunting is significant only at the .10 level, while the chi-square valu for vulnerability by time of season is highly significant. Neither hypothe liS is rejected; however, the statement that juvenile birds are more vulnerabl in field hunting than in firing-line hunting is statistically not quite as sound as the statement that juvenile birds are more vulnerable during the fir t half of hunting season. Differential vulnerability of juveniles according to the time of huntin season was somewhat; unexpected, and gives rise to some interesting conjectures. It may be that an actual "education" process exists, wh er eby I juvenile birds learn through repeated exposures to gunning pressure to ,void such situations. Superimposed upon this, however, may be the effect of the relatively greater rate of decimation of juveniles, since juveniles arel generally more vulnerable than adults under any hunting conditions. Th effect of this is that there ar c relatively f ewe r juveniles to choose £ am �-103 - as t?e hunting season advances; therefore, the relative frequency of juvenile~ in the bag should show a decrease later in the season. i FamilYGroup Counts: Data on sizes of Canada goose fami.ly groups in the rkansas Valley were limited to only three observations duz Lng 196/.-65, as s own in Table 14. These three counts turned out remarkably similar between dates and areas, which may very well be due to the manner in which theyiwere taken and the manner in which observers were trained. Differently traihed observers could conceivably obtain entirely different results. The inherent difficulty in maintaining standardization of method, and the lack of censistency in data, cause this technique to be less than ideal. We continu~ to have reservations, and prefer to use other indices as indicators of production success. Family Group Counts of Canada Geese, Arkansas Valley, 1964-65. No. Birds Average No. No. Activity Present Grp. Size Groups Date Birds Tablr 14. Localtion Turkl,s Pond 12/4 425 110 3.86 16,000 Two uttes Res. Upper Queen's Res. 1/19 1/20 166 575 42 149 3.95 3.86 4,400 18,000 1,166 301 3.87 TOTALS Flying out to feed. On water. On water. Effect of Weather Upon Goose Flights and Hunter Harvest: The use of the laerator was continued at Two Buttes again this year. Although no seriously old weather developed, the water level in the reservoir was low enough tha~ freeze-over occurred. The aerator successfully kept a spot of open water during the time that the rest of the lake was frozen; however, geese I see~ed to do more resting on the ice than usual. We held geese at Two Buttes in ~reater numbers than has been common for several years, but it appears tha~ the aerator had only a minor influence in this respect. The major effect of weather upon goose flights was rather indirect. Feeding flights were generally of long distance, because of the scarcity and scattered 9ature of available feed. On the surface, this would seem to be conducive to ixcellent field hunting, but this did not prove to be the case. Many reports were received of geese using a field for one or two days and then qu Lt t Lng it for several days. Hunters complained that the birds were "decoy shy',. Generally speaking, field hunting was not as good as it should have been. All things considered, warm and dry weather conditions during hunting sea on appear to have a strong detrimental effect upon goose hunting. I . Recqmmendations: I 1. The banding eff or t; in the Arkansas Valley has produced a mass of rlata which now need to be analyzed before any more banding is done. Like- �-104 - wise, the fluoroscopy study need not accumulate any more data. of the banding and fluoroscopy study is thus recommended. Terminat on 2. Emphasis during 1965-66 should be placed upon standardizing cen us techniques so that qualified aerial observers can be developed among the personnel of the Southeast Region. Annual census of this goose flock is of utmost importance. 3n. In the same light, the collection of goose tail feathers by Ch~Ck f stati0 operators at Two Buttes should be continued, to give a measure age ratios in the flock. The check stations will continue as a managemlnt function, of course, as hunter control on the Two Buttes Management Are is a necessity. I 9 4. A delayed hunting season opening is again recommended for Baca County and the south half of Prowers County. The arrival of geese on tfe wintering grounds cannot continue to be late year after year, and if thts arrival should occur in early November, 1965, a delayed opening at Two Buttes could be of great benefit. vIe should be prepared to evaluate the effec s if geese do arrive before hunting season opening. Prepared by: William H. Rutherford Associate Wildlife Researcher Date: October, J 965 Approved by: Jack R. Grieb As sistant Game Mcmager Ferd c. Kle~nschnitz Federal Aid Icoordinato: �, , ",.' .• ' ',,~.) ,;.~ .'~ :oj' - 105 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT , slate of Colorado P oject No, w-88-R-10 Wrrk Plan No, 2 T'tle of Job: Migratory Bird Investigations Job No, 4b Cooperative Lesser Canada Goose Flock Investigation prriod Covered: April 1, 1964 through M3.rch 31, 1965, Personnel: Listed under each section of the report, ABSTRACT A 1 data gathered indicate that 1964 was probably a poorer than average p oduction year for the Short Grass Prairie Canada Goose Flock. Despite I teis, populations remain at a high level after the hunting season (in excess o[ 100,000), and numbers of geese at all wintering areas were consistently hi,gh throughout the season. This may have been due to a decrease in C nadian harvest. No other explanation is plausible. Results of specific cEunts along with recommendations for continued work are given in the text o the report. ,. _~".,. '- ••••. "J~ " ��- 107 - COOPERATIVE LESSER CANADA GOOSE FLOCK INVESTIGATION Jack R. Grieb Introduction I formation contained in this report is composed of data gathered in Cplorado and other areas by several agencies. Thus, credit shall not alone be due Colorado personnel for information presented; rather, this report shall serve as a document to compile all available data relating to this goose flock. Agencies and personnel will be recognized in each section ih which they participated. I Ol:>jectives: (1) P~ocedures: Determine the size of th,; Canada goose flock wintering in western NebrAska, sontheast Colorado, northeast New Mexico, and the penhandle of Texas. (2) Determine flock. age and sex composition (3) Determine harvest and migration areas for geese from each wintering area of the general flock winter range. (1) Conduct periodic, wintering areas. (2) Trap and band geese on the wintering (3) Analyze band recoveries stations. cooperative of this wintering aerial surveys over the grounds. and compare between banding R~sults : I Canada Staging Area Census.--No regular census was conducted in accordance with recommendations from past years. this year I Recommendation for 1965.--It is again recommended that we do not conduct the Canada staging area census duri.ng the coming fall. II Migration and Wintering Counts in the United States.--The persons and agencies cooperated in the migration and wintering this goose flock in the United States. following census of �- 108 - Agency Person Bureau of Sport Fisheries New Mexico Department and Wildlife Robert Brown Don Krieble Ed Wellein of Game and Fish Mr. Goodwin Nebraska Commission Game, Forestation and Parks Colorado Department of Game, Fish and Parks John Sweet Bill Rutherford Wayne Russel Jack Grieb Migration of the flock into wintering areas was delayed again this ye r. Mild weather on the Canadian prairies enticed the birds to stay until midNovember when a major storm froze waters and put down a heavy cover 0 snow. As a result, the main flight was triggered arriving at most places on November 20. Apparently this massive flight included most of the population with only stragglers arriving during late November. All birds were 01 the wintering areas by December 1. The first count schedule for December 2 was again weathered out in Nebraska and Colorado. This storm appeared to take some birds south with it flom Colorado and probably Nebraska. Prior to the storm we were observing higher numbers of geese in southeast Colorado than ever before. Even after, the numbers remained high as you can see from Table 1. Aerial harassment of geese was continued this year at the Waggoner Ranch near Vernon Texas. According to Agent Droll this commenced the first of December and continued throughout the fall and wi.nter . This scattered the birds throughout the entire area with many moving to water areas in Knox CoJnty and that vicinity. This treatment had the effect of greatly improving thJ hunting simply because it made birds avai.lable to the hunters instead of permitting them to stay on the Waggoner Ranch where hunting was restr"cted to only a few people. Comparison of counts between areas indicates that there may have been !some shift in population during the past season. Previously, the Waggoner Ranch area including Knox County and that general vicinity had been holding 40 to 50 percent of the entire population. This year, the number dropped t 25 to 30 percent. Much of this occurred when the birds moved into the wintering grounds since apparently numbers of geese were down from the very firs1t at the Waggoner Ranch according to information received from Agent Droll. C~uld it be that the harassment placed on this flock by the Waggoner Ranch has changed the habits of sOme of these birds? We should watch this closely next ear since this has strong management implications. �Table l.--Migration and Wintering Canada Goose Census of the Short Grass Prairie Canada Goose Population. Number of Canada Geese High Count High Count High Count 1960-61 1962-63 1961-62 Count II Area Count I Dec. 9 High Count 1963-64 Colorado 4.7,475 37,685 23,750 38,911 45,250 31,360 54,320 Buffalo Lake NWR 32,000 30,000 29,120 4,295 10,154 10,000 5,000 Waggoner Ranch and Knox County 40,000 27,050 45,700 69,230 16 ~900.11 55,000 33,000 700 700 950 866 1~800 660 250 Nebraska 4s 192 4,000 9,906 6,226 3,879 4,590 280 New Mexico 4,087 4,000 2,891 3,t~96 2,150 1,745 2,642 Totals 128,454 103,435 112,317 123,024 80,133 103,355 95,492 High Count 1959-60 Texas Muleshoe NWR 1/ Geese scattered by aerial harassment. This count Low , f-' 0 \0 �- 110 - In general, the inventories were satisfactory this year. Wellein and I attempted to count geese both at Buffalo Lake and the eastern panhandle of Texas during the January Inventory, but a combination of poor weather and lack of knowledge of where the birds had spread resulted in an exceptionally poor count. This was overcome due to the fact that Agent Krieble had counted the eastern panhandle with one of the pilots who had been moving the birds off the Waggoner Ranch, thus knew where to look for them. This coupled with Don's knowledge provided us with probab y the best January Inventory of this segment of the flock which we have evJr had since aerial harassment began on the Waggoner Ranch. In additio~, Bob Brown makes ground counts on a weekly interval, counting the bir4s as they fly out to feed. This undoubtedly provides a more accurate inventory of geese than we are able to obtain from the air in the Buffalo Lake area. . All inventories indicate that there was continued increase in the size of this flock for the current year. How long the increase will continuk to occur or where it will carry this flock is still a matter for conjecture. Recommendations for the 1965-66 Migration and Wintering Census.j-This is probably our most important management technique and certainly will be continued from now on. It should consist of two counts as in the pa$t with the first one occurring the first week of December to give us S0me indication of the size and distribution of the wintering population, land the second to indicate size of the returning flight to the breeding frea. Dates of these inventories will be: 1. December 1, 1965. 2. January Inventory intervals Fisheries and Wildlife. as established by the Bureau of Sport Procedures will remain essentially the same as past years with the only exception being the manner in which we handle the Texas Inventories. 1. Nebraska areas. personnel will cover western Nebraska 2. New Mexico personnel will cover northeastern concentration areas. New Mexico 3. Muleshoe National Wildlife Refuge personnel concentrations in the Muleshoe area. will cover all Foose Buff·alo Lake National Wildlife Refuge personnel g'Oose concentrations in the Buffalo Lake area. goose concen ration goose will cover 111 �- 111 - 5. Don Krieble will cover goose concentrations Ranch and Knox County areas. 6. Colorado 7. Information for these Inventories will be forwarded to Jack R. Grieb, Box 567, Fort Collins, Colorado, for compilation and distribution to all interested persons, with copies to Kennard P. Baer, Bureau of Sport Fisheries and Wildlife, Box 1306, Albuquerque, New Mexico. This information will be submitted as soon after the count as possible. personnel will cover southeast in the Waggoner Colorado areas. Canada Banding.--No specific Colorado effort was attempted this past ~ear because of the heavy work load associated with ,the experimental ~llard season in the San Luis Valley. I Recommendations for 1965.--No attempt will be made to band geese on 9anada Staging areas this fall because of the experimental mallard season in the San Luis Valley, and the experimental teal season to be held in the ~lyway. United States Banding.--Three wintering ground. banding crews were active on the 1. Robert Brown, Refuge Manager NWR, Texas panhandle. and crew, banding at Buffalo Lake 2. Don Krieble, Game Agent and crew banding at League Lake, Benjamin, Texas panhandle. 3. Bill Rutherford, Crew Leader, Bob Kitzmiller, Claude Brock, and Jack Grieb, banding at Two Buttes Reservoir and the Eades Lakes in southeast Colorado. [11 crews had a successful season with 879 geese banded in Texas and 987 in southeast Colorado. Birds banded by year and location are presented in I Table 2. Age Composition Inforrnation.--Age composition data are tabulated in Table 3 for all banding areas and the Two Buttes Check Stations. Compari~ons of this information with past years indicate a general and significant aecrease in the percent of young birds in the flock. This varied from a low of 19.4% estimated from Colorado banding to a high of 36.9% estimated at the Two Buttes Check Stations. Estimated composition of young birds at I Buffalo Lake was 29%. Regardless of the differences in these figures, fhey are all considerably below last years estimates thus further implying a decrease in the number of young birds. I This decrease comes in the face of an increase in wintering numbers of I ~irds. The only possible explanation is that the Canadian harvest was pown this past year. �- 112 - Table 2.--Number of Canada Geese Banded and Returns by Areas and Years. I State Area Year No. Birds Banded Band No. Colorado Two Buttes 1951 1952 1953 1954 1956 1957 1958 1959 1960 1961 1962 1963 1964 1965 644 1,278 1,478 41 182 516 529 526 417 194 858 1,301 575 978 240 395 435 10 50 90 94 46 1955 1956 1957 1958 1959 1965 50 140 316 165 721 148 3 18 26 33 32 Buffalo Lake 1961 1962 1963 1964 1965 32 224 659 831 731 La Queva 1958 1959 1960 1961 1962 90 149 355 54 190 1952 1953 1959 1961 55 31 51 2 Texas New Mexico Nebraska 1/ Waggoner Ranch No. Platte River Returns not tabulated at this date. Tota Recov~7.3 30.9 29.4 2~.4 2 .5 l4 1 .8 .7 1/ ~.o l~ 2 .0 .4 1/ 17 25 1/ 1/ 1~.9 1 .8 �- 113 - Ta~le 3.--Age Composition of the Arkansas Valley Canada Goose Flock. I Banding Adult Young % No. No. % State Year Co lorado 1951 1952 1958 1959 1960 1961 1962 1963 1964 1965 344 649 346 214 269 1,171 671 607 360 789 53.3 50.9 66.4 42.2 60.0 62.3 77.7 44.7 57.7 80.6 300 627 175 293 179 710 192 750 264 189 46.7 49.1 33.6 57.8 40.0 37.7 22.3 45.3 42.3 19.4 1959 1960 1961 1962 65 197 27 118 43.6 61.9 69.2 62.1 84 79 12 72 62.6 38.1 30.8 37.9 1962 1963 1965 111 133 522 57.5 42.9 71.0 82 177 214 42.5 57.1 29.0 Ne Mexico Texas I (~uffa10 ake) Check Station Adult Young No. % No. % 356 46.8 404 53.2 929 377 612 527 204 377 442 47.9 36.5 45.5 55.7 48.9 52.1 63.1 1,010 655 732 419 213 346 259 52.1 63.5 54.5 44.3 51.1 47.9 36.9 Southeast Colorado Group Count Information.--Three group counts were ta~en during and after the season in southeast Colorado. These turned out remarked1y similar between dates and areas ranging from 3.86 to 3.95 (Table 4). Paft of this continuity may be due to the manner in which they are taken and th, manner in which the observers were trained. Differently trained observers could conceivably obtain entirely different results. Considering this we cattinue to have reservations regarding this technique. F1uoroscopy.--Tab1e 5 compares percent of adult and young birds with shot between Two Buttes and Eades Lakes and between years. In general, percent oflbirds with shot remained similar to past years in the Two Buttes area with some slight increase found in young birds. Comparison of birds with shot between Two Buttes and Eades during the past season reveals that more adults co~tained shot in the Eades area. This is undoubtedly a reflection of the in reased hunting pressure in that area. No explanation can be given for the sm~ller number of young birds with shot in the Eades area. I �- 114 - Table 4.--Fami1y Group Counts, Southeast Colorado. Location Date Birds Grps. Av. Grp. Size No Birds P esent Turk's Reservoir Two Buttes Queens' Reservoir 12/ 4/64 1/19/65 1/20/65 425 166 575 110 4-2 149 3.86 3.95 3.86 16,000 14,400 18,000 1,166 301 3.87 Total Table 5.--Summary 1965. of Fluoroscopy Results, Two Buttes ReserVOir, Co10radCD 1959- I Year Sample Size % Total With Shot Percent Adults With Shot Percent Young With Shot 1959 1960 1961 1962 1963 1964 1965 19651/ 500 417 568 402 783 593 472 556 49.4 42.7 51. 9 53.0 42.0 38.1 45.8 49.8 65.3 45.9 63.6 37.6 37.i 57.8 34. 26'1 23.9 29.9 15. 1/ Data collected at Queens' Reservoir 58.3 48.5 49.4 58.2 at Eades Lakes north 36·t of Lamar. Recommendations for 1965-66 Banding Season.--We are now in the pro ess of making a preliminary final analysis of our banding effort on this fl ck. IBM cards have been received from Patuxent covering Canada goose bandin s in Texas, New Mexico, Colorado, Nebraska, Alberta, and Saskatchewan, fo all years of the banding effort. Naturally, it will be another year before first year recoveries will be available for the past years' banding, th t is why this analysis is termed preliminary. I �- 115 - IS Unle this analysis tells us otherwise, I believe that we have gone as far as w~ can with our banding program. True, our data is not complete, and cert inly, it would have been far better if birds could have been banded in the laggoner Ranch area during the past three years. However, in order to come out with a management plan within a reasonable length of time we must now ~onsider termination of our banding work. In line with this, Colorado will not banded within the southeast Colorado popuiation next fall unless the analysis reveals a very distinct need. In this case, banding will only be done for one more year at which time it will be definitely terminated. The ~ame recommendations also hold true for Buffalo Lake NWR, and for the waggrner Ranch area. Buffalo Lake NWR, since it is already in business may want to definitely band for one more year. Very definitely, their banding shou d be done after conclusion of the hunting season and not during the season, sinc in-season bandings are most difficult to evaluate. Don Krieble may also wish to band another year in the eastern Texas panhandle. In this case, it is further recommended that all birds be aged and sexed so that age composition estimates can be made. Flock Status and Management Recommendations.--All data gathered indicate thatl1964 was probably a poorer than average production year for the Short Gras, Prairie Canada Goose Flock. Despite this, populations remain at a high level after the hunting season and numbers of geese at all wintering areas were consistently high throughout the season. As previously indicated, this may ~ave been due to a decrease in Canadian harvest. No other explanation is piausib1e. It a~pears rather certain that there was a general westward shift of this goos population on the wintering grounds with greater proportion of geese OCCU!Ying Buffalo Lake and Southeast Colorado than usual. Most of this increase was ue to a decrease in wintering numbers of geese in the Waggoner Ranch - Knox Coun y complex since northeast New Mexico and the Nebraska panhandle held normal numbtrs of wintering birds. This shift could possibly have been due to the contfnued harassment of birds on the Waggoner Ranch to alleviate winter wheat depredations. Certainly this activity scattered the birds normally wintering ther~ and may have caused some to choose other wintering areas. The ~ffect of scattering the Waggoner flock was to provide considerably bettfr hunting in that area. On the January flight into the Texas panhandle Wellein and I noted considerably more blinds, sets of goose decoys and other eVidfnce of hunting. In particular, this was true of the Buffalo Lake area wher~ each small water body in the pothole area north of the Refuge had blinHs. Undoubtedly goose hunting is becoming increasingly popular in the Texak panhandle. �- 116 - This year, for the first time Ray Buller is attempting to separate t~e January Inventory by the various populations of geese, This seems a_~ost logical first step in the improvement of our management of this and other Central Flyway goose flOCkS.' In addition, it is believed that a sUb-lcommittee of the Central Flyway should be formed which can look at the results of all available data each year and corne up with recommendations for the management of this flock, All of this will be outlined in a proposed management plan which will be appended to this report if time permits; or, will be pr sented to the Technical Committee at its summer, 1965 meeting. . Prepared Date: by: Jack R. Grieb Wildlife Researcher Approved I by: Wayne W. Sandfor~ Game Research Chief Ferd C. Kleinsch itz Federal Aid Coor~inator �Oc+ober' j 1965 - 117 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT Sta~e of C.:.,.o_l_o_r_a_d_o _ w-88-R-IO Wor Plan No. Migratory Bird Investigation 3 Job No. 1 . I Tlt e of Job: Review of Duck Literature Relating to Population Dynamics and Banding Analysis Techniques and Findings Per od Covered: April 1, 1964 to March 31, 1965. ABSTRACT The I literature review was initiated during this segment but was not com]pleted. Obj~ctive: To review literature relating to population dynamics and banding analysis techniques and findings. Tecqniques Used: Literature was reviewed at the Game Research Center. to 'ime spent on other project jobs, the.review was not completed. Due Fin4ings: Several abstracts were written concerning banding analysis methods and I findings in various articles and reports. A list of other literature to be eviewed was begun. Pre ,ared by: Howard D. Funk Approved by: . Assistant Wildlife Researcher Jack R . Grieb Project Leader ��october, 1965 - 119 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of Colorado ------~---------------- Wlk Migratory Bird Investigation w-88-R-10 Project No. Plan No. T·tle of Job: Job No. 3 2 Analysis of Mallard Recoveries from Birds Banded in Eastern Colorado Prior to 1962 Period Covered: April 1, 1964 to March 31, 1965. p+sonnel: Jack R. Grieb and Howard D. Funk. ABSTRACT Work on this job was very limited during the segment mainly due to lack of t me because of more pressing work commitments on other jobs. The duplicate djCk of IBM recovery cards pertaining to mallards banded in eastern Colorado Pfior to 1962, which was obtained from the Bird Banding Office, was sorted br waterfowl management unit within which each bird was banded. These cards were stored by management unit in band recovery files. A list of data which n~eds to be extracted from the cards by IBM sorter was compiled so that most efficient use of the machine will be made. O~jective: To determine the amount of usable recovery and mortality informatlionavailable from previous mallard bandings in eastern Colorado. I . Techniques Used: A duplicate deck of IBM cards with recovery information from mhllards banded in eastern Colorado before 1962 was sorted to place recovery c~rds of birds banded in various locations into waterfowl management units d~signated within the State. This was done so that data regarding migration, ~ortality and longevity of the birds could be analyzed and compared between upits. Findings from this investigation will be instrumental in determinfug whether or not we have separate populations of mallards in the State which could be managed separately rather than on an over-all fl~~Y basis hich is now practiced. �- 120 - A list of data needed from these cards for analysis and the order in which the information will be obtained from them by use of an IBM sorting machine was compiled to detennine most efficient use of the machine. Findin&s: Work on other project jobs limited time available for thi~ job. IBM recovery cards have been sorted by waterfowl management un~t and await more detailed separation before analysis of data can be pe 1 formed. Thus, no information is available as yet on migration pattelns or mortality and recovery rates of mallards wintering in eastern Col rado by unit. This will be accomplished during the next segment. Prepared by: Howard D. Funk Assistant Wildlife Researcher Date: O~tober, 1965 Approved by: Jack R. GriJb Project Lea er --------~~--~~--------------------- �October, - 121 - JOB COMPLETION RESEARCH REPORT PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO Proje t No. W-88-R-IO Migratory Bird Investigations Work jlan No. 3 Job No. 3 Title of Job: Winter Duck Banding Perio December Covered: perso!nel: in Eastern Colorado 1, 1964 through February 28, 1965. Jack Grieb, Richard Hopper, William Rutherford, Robert Kitzmiller, William Carpenter, Claude Brock, Charles Hayes, Jack Randall and Howard Funk. ABSTRACT A tot 1 of 5,747 mallards were trapped and banded during the winter of 1964-,5 in eastern Colorado. In addition, 83 mallards already banded were captured and approximately 200 ducks of other species were trapped and banded. All trapping was concentrated in the South Platte River Valley and Bonny I Reservoir. No trapping was accomplished in the Arkansas River Valley because of early northward migration of ducks into the area before the end of February. The period of trapping was from late December to late February. The ~le-female sex ratio of all trapped mallards was 3.24:1 while the ratio of only those trapped with cannon-nets was 1.46:1 males per female. Ground sex rftio count results, which we believe representative of true age compositioy of the flocks, indicated a 1.58:1 male-female ratio. Figures from all trapping results showed an age ratio of 0.47:1 immatures per adult as compated to a 0.79:1 immature-adult ratio from cannon-netting. Fluorlscopy results indicated 6.6 percent of all immature mallards examined had e~bedded shot in their bodies as compared to about 5 percent the previous year. Adult males averaged 19 percent with shot and adult females 13 perce?t as compared to 18 and 14 percent, respectively, during the 1963-64 winter. 1965 �- 122 - Recommendations: This job will be combined with Jobs 4 and 5 and incorporated into Job 6 during the next segment which will cover all objectives. This will eliminate duplicate report writing for much of the data. Procedures will remain similar to those followed in the last two years. New types of traps will be experimented with to make the trapping operation more efficient in both volume and type of data collected. Starting the winter of 1965-66, we will be cooperating with other Central Flyway state in attempt to study the feasibility of establishing mallard management units. Objectives: (1) To band 1,000 mallard ducks at each of the following locations: (a) South Platte Valley Denver to Greeley; (b) South Platte Valley Greeley to Fort Morgan; (c) South Platte Valley Fort Morgan to Sterling; (d) South Platte Valley Sterling to Julesburg; (e) Fort Collins area; (f) Bonny Reservoir area; and (g) the Arkansas Valley area. (2) (3) To determine age and sex ratios of these locations. To determine percent embedded shot. of mallard ducks at eac I of birds, by age and sex, with Procedures: Methods used were similar to those described in the previous I report (Funk 1964). Five more Salt Plains traps were built making a total of nine of this type employed during the segment. First trapping efforts were concentrated at Bonny Reservoir followed by trapping in the South Platte and Cache la Poudre Valleys. We did no trapf,ing in the Arkansas River Valley during the segment because of early northward migration of ducks into this area. We wanted to trap only those birds wintering in Colorado. Arrangements will be made to band in the Arkansas Valley earlier next year so we can be sure of obtaining our samples. Approximately 500 birds were tallied in each ground sex ratio count in 1964-65 instead of 400 as in 1963-64 to gain better sample sizes. TRAPPING AND BANDING Findings: A total of 5,830 mallards were trapped from December 28, 1964 through February 24, 1965. Bands were placed on all birds except 83 whici already carried bands from previous years or from other areas. Approxima ely 200 American widgeon, pintails and green-winged teal were banded in conjunction with the mallard banding program. For some reason, relativei'y f1w ducks other than mallards were caught during the segment. Numbers of mallards by age and sex are displayed in Table 1. I Quotas of 1,000 mallards to be trapped in each area were reached in all e~cept the Fort Morgan-Sterling area where only 766 were captured, and in tme Arkansas Valley where no trapping was accomplished due to early migration] �- 123 - samples by sex, Numbers and percentages of mallards in the banded age and area, eastern Colorado, 1964-65. Table No. Irrnnature Female No. % Tot. % Tot. Adult Totals Captured Area Fort Cillins Denve Gre No. Male % Tot. No. Female % Tot. 998 485 48.6 119 11.9 238 23.8 156 15.6 1,120 609 54.4 128 11.4 241 21.5 142 12.7 973 423 43.5 103 10.6 321 33.0 126 12.9 766 527 68.8 114· 14.9 90 11.7 35 4.6 956 558 58.4 107 11.2 201 21.0 90 9.4 1,017 615 60.5 167 :6.4 148 14.6 87 8.6 5,830 3,217 55.2 738 12.7 1,239 21.3 636 10.9 Greel Sterl Jul Bonny Res rvoir Male I I Total, and Average Per ent About 55 percent of the birds banded were adult males which is similar to 196364 results. Efforts to place about a quarter of the 1,000 bands for each area on bitds of each age and sex (adult males and females and immature males and femal s) failed because of bias introduced by trap types and methods. At times we did not band all adult males captured but kept traps in operation in hopes that we would trap more adult females and young of both sexes. The for releasing some adult males without banding them was that we wan t ed tribute our bands among all ages and sexes and yet did not want to band over ,000 birds in any area. Too many banded birds in a population tends to bias the band reporting rates by hunters. AGE AND SEX COMPOSITION As i~dicated in Table 1, there seemed to be a definite lack of young birds pres~nt in the Bonny Reservoir and Fort Morgan-Sterling areas. The proport·on of adult females to adult males also is shown to be much lower than the roportion of young females to young males. This suggests that possibly adul females are subjected to greater natural mortality than is suspected at t is time. Resu~ts of ground sex ratio counts for 1964-65 are listed in Table 2. Approximate~y 61 percent of all mallards counted were males for a 1.58:1 male-female �- 124 - ratio. This is much lower than the 3.24:1 male-female ratio of birds t1apped by all methods as shown in Table 1. We believe ground count sex ratio data are representative of true sex composition of the various flocks becaus~ of adequate size of samples, care taken in obtaining counts when the flock were well mixed, and consistency of results within and between areas. Table 2. Mallard sex ratio counts by date and area, eastern Colorado, 1964-65.* Date Location Number Ducks Counted Male Females Total FORT COLLINS AREA 1/20/65 Eaton Lake 304 1/21/65 Timnath Reservoir 195 1/26/65 Eaton Lake 392 2/ 8/65 Eaton Lake 280 2/ 8/65 Hollister Lake (Windsor Res.), 307 2/25/65 Boyd Lake 290 Totals 1,768 - 214 134 238 191 200 194 1,171 518 329 630 471 507 484 2,939 - P DENVER-GREELEY AREA 2/ 3/65 Valmont Reservoir 2/25/65 Kammerzell Farm (S.P. River) Totals 547 245 792 222 152 374 769 397 1,166 71.13 ~l.71 67.92 GREELEY -FORT MORGAN AREA 2/19/65 Schaefer's Farm (S.P. River) Totals 303 303 234 234 537 537 56.42 56.42 FORT MORGAN-STERLING AREA 1/31/65 Merino (Fields) 2/17 /65 Merino (Fields) 2/18/65 Merino (Fields) Totals 344 328 300 972 177 217 208 --602 521 545 508 -1,574 66.03 6~.18 5 .06 611.75 STERLING-JULESBURG AREA 2/18/65 Manue1lo Farm (S.P. River) Totals 276 276 173 -173 449 -449 61.47 611.47 BONNY RESERVOIR AREA 12/29/64 Bonny Reservoir 1/8/65 Bonny Reservoir 1/8/65 Bonny Reservoir Totals 245 313 313 871 141 232 224 --597 386 545 537 1,468 .47 .43 .29 .33 4,982 3,151 8,133 .26 TOTALS & AVERAGE PERCENT * No sex ratio counts made in the Arkansas Valley. �- 125 - As n 1963-64, we cap·tured a portion of our sample with cannon-nets and these da.t (Table 3) are in close agr eemen't; with ground coun't sex ratio data (Table 2). Both methods show 'tha;tapproxima'tely 60 percent of 'tihe.samp'l.es were COmposfd of males. The ra't1ta~OIf «nal.esIto \f'emaleswas 1.'4'6:11 (far .camrou-ne t t Lng resu Lt;s and 1.'47:1 forco1ll!!l't·data ohtained in the same areas. Be'caus e of striking simitl.a:riLtybe'tweencounts in all areas, we believe the population of maltards ac:tualllywas composed of 60 percent males. Therefore, cannon-net datf seem to 1!>ecorrec't.. If so, p~ssibly ?an~on-net sample sex. rat~os are .ailsf,rep't"es.en:t€ltiveof the popu l.at Lon and Lnd Lcat;e true age ra t i.os an the arefsa:~ 'slloWl1l 1l1il Table 3. If this can ,be as sum:d, the flock at Bonny Res' l."'VOll:r·was ,composed (.of 'aniy a'b01U:t 20 .per-cent; tmma tur es but about half of the flocks of !l!>ii.trcll:s lP't'<€'sient in tbeother areas were young birds. Possibly the proportion ,.of young in the Fort Morgan-Sterling area was also very low but no cannon-netting was accomplished there to substantiate this belief. FLUOROSCOPY Flu.roscopy data obtained during the segment are shown in Table 4. Approximat ly half of the birds of all ages and sexes were examined for embedded sho. We wanted to fluoroscope at least 100 birds of each sex and age class in 111 work units but fell short in several. Samples of adult males are con idered good in all areas but we did not examine the full quota of immat re males in the Fort Morgan-Sterling area. Number of females examined was short of the 100 bird quota in most areas, mainly because of bias in tra·ping methods. Also, it was difficult to have the fluoroscope available in ~ll areas at one time, especially when several crews were trapping in various locations. TheJe was variation in percentages of birds of all sex and age classes carrying shot between study areas but overall results are quite similar to those obt ined in 1963-64. Approximately 6.6 percent of all immature mallards had sho in their bodies which indicates a slight increase in hunting pressure fro~ a year ago when 5 percent of the young had embedded shot. Adult males wit~ shot also increased a bit from 18 percent to approximately 19 percent with shot but adult females carrying shot decreased from 14 percent to about 13 ~ercent. Percentages of young with shot varied enough by study area and by ~ex that it is difficult to detect a possible difference in hunting pressur, between units by these figures alone. This will be dealt with in the Job 5 report. Per entages of birds with shot in the Fort Collins and Denver-Greeley areas weri again weighted according to numbers of birds associated with each tra~ping site (Table 5). This had little effect on most of the figures. Lit~le difference can be seen in the fluoroscope data between areas. There was some indication that hunting pressure was heavier in the Fort Collins and jDenver-Greeley areas but not as much as we believe there should be. Bonny Reservoir hunting pressure was indicated to be less than other areas. ove~all hunting pressure in eastern Colorado seemed to be quite light again as luggested by data from immature birds carrying shot. �- 126 - Table 3. Comparison of mallard age and sex composition data.between can onnet trapping and ground counts, eastern Colorado, 1964-65. Date of Capture Totals Captured or Counted FORT COLLINS AREA 1/22/65 25 1/24/65 72 1/26/65 80 1/28/65 74 Totals 251 Totals by Method 251 2,939 Method Net Net Net Net Net Ground Count GREELEY-FORT MORGAN AREA 2/15/65 63 Net Totals 63 Totals by Method 63 537 BONNY RESERVOIR AREA 12/30/64 71 1/7/65 33 Totals 104 Totals by Method 104 1,468 Male Adult Immature No. % Tot. No. % Tot. 9 23 23 23 78 - Net Ground Count 4 21 27 16 68 16.0 29.2 33.8 21.6 27.1 6 8 11 9 34 24.0 11.1 13.8 12.2 13.5 -- 2L 6 20 2t·8 19 2 .8 26 ~ 71 2 .3 - 146 58.2% 105 l~1. % 1,768 60.2% 1,171 39.~% 20 20 Net Ground Count Net Net 36.0 31.9 28.8 31.1 31.1 Female I Adult Imma~ure No. % Tot. No. %ITot. 40 18 58 31.8 -31.8 16 16 25.4 25.4 16 25.4 16 25.4 11 11 1V·5 If .5 36 57.1% 27 42.9% 303 56 4% 234 43'1% 56.3 54.6 55.8 0 4 4 5.6 12.1 20 7 28.2 21.2 8 7 ' 7 .. ,.,.., :?C-. (I .:! 7 4 11 Ji 1p.6 66 63.5% 38 36. % 871 59.3% 597 40. % 248 59.3% 170 40. % 2,942 59.5% 2,002 40. % ALL AREAS Totals by Method 418 4,944 Net Ground Count �Table 5. Percentages of mallards carrying embedded shot by sex and age classes, and number of birds present by areas, eastern Colorado, 1964-65. I I January Area Inventory I Adult Male Female Immature Male Female Adult Immature Fort Collins 29,300 21.4* 8.8* 4.4* 11.3* 19.2* 7.1* I Denve,-Gree1ey 47,451 18.8* 8.6* 8.8* 7.1* 17.2* 8.3* Gree1~y-Fort MO,gan 37,000 19.0 17.3 7.2 4.5 18.6 6.4 Fort ~organSt rling 21,100 23.5 18.8 9.1 0.0 22.1 6.3 Ster1:ilngJu~esburg 33,080 15.8 14.8 8.3 5.9 15.6 7.3 BonnYIReservoir 22,700 18.2 10.3 4.1 5.7 15.7 [1.1 "". * Per on basis of number of birds associated with trapping sites �- 128 - REFERENCES Funk, H. l). 1964. Winter duck banding in eastern Colorado. Colorado G me, .Fish andPar'ks Dept. Game Research Report. October. pp. 79-87. Prepared by: Howard D. Funk Approved by: Jack R. Grieb Project Leader Assistant Wildlife Researcher Date: October, 1965~ _ Ferd C. Kleins~hnitz Federal Aid Coordinator I �October, 1965 - 129 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT Sta e of COLORADO Pro "ect No. W-88-R-10 Migratory Bird Investigations wort Plan No. 3 Job No. Titil.eof Job: Wintering Duck Flock Census I . Per"od Covered: Personnel: 4 December 1, 1964 through February 28, 1965 Jack Grieb, Richard Hopper, William Rutherford, Wayne Russ~ll, Norman Hughes, Charles Hjelte, Edward Wellein, Charles Hayes, Jack Randall and Howard Funk. ABSTRACT Aer"al surveys were flown in eastern Colorado in the South Platte and Ark nsas Valleys on December 5 and 9, 1964, respectively, and again during January 5-6, 1965 period. The South Platte Valley, except for Bonny rvoir, was censusedagain on February 8, 1965. The first two counts in areas are considered quite accurate and representative but the February cou twas thought poor because ducks were no longer concentrated. Numbers of tlucks censused during the three periods in the South Platte Valley were 169,237, 190,631 and 56,015, respectively. Ducks present in the two Arkansas Val ey counts numbered 35,990 in December and 18,298 in January. Total birds counted in eastern Colorado during the 1965 January Inventory numbered 208,929 whi h is approximately 100,000 less than the 304,970 total censused during the same period in January, 1964. ies composition during January was estimated at 98 percent mallards with ails, American widgeon, green-winged teal, gadwall, common golden-eye cammon mergansers making up the rest. This estimate is similar to that in 1964. Results of ground sex ratio counts were similar between work units in thE.' Sta~e and similar to 1963-64 figures in that about 61 percent of the ma'll.arus cou ted in 1964-65 were males for a 1.58:1 male-female ratio. Approximately 59 ercent of the mallards counted in 1963-64 were males for a 1.45:1 malefern Le ratio. �- 130 - Recommendations: During the next segment, this job will be consolidated with Jobs 3 and 5 into Job 6 for elimination of duplicate reporting of data collected. Methods of gathering data will remain the same. Objectives: The objectives of this job are as follows: (1) To determine the size of wintering mallard flocks within each ~f the work units: (a) Arkansas Valley, (b) Bonny Reservoir Are, (c) Fort Collins Area, (d) Denver-Greeley Area, (e) GreeleyFort Morgan Area, (f) Fort Morgan-Sterling Area, and (g) the Sterling-Julesburg Area. (2) To determine changes, if any, in size of these flocks throughout the work period. (3) To determine the sex ratio of each wintering mallard flock. Techniques Used: Aerial censuses were again conducted in the South Plat e and ~rkansas Valleys to gain information on numbers and locations of duc s wintering in Colorado by period. Mallard ground sex ratio counts were a so conducted at the various trap sites. Approximately 500 mallards were talJulated at each trap site in the sex ratio investigation instead of 400 as in Segment 9. Procedures in censusing and tabulating data by area and trapping location were similar to those described in the previous segment report (Funk 1964). Findings: The South Platte Valley was censused December 5, 1964, January 5-6, 1965 and February 8, 1965. Bonny Reservoir was not included in the February census. Numbers of ducks present were 169,237, 190,631 and 56,0 5, respectively. Counts in the Arkansas Valley totaled 35,990 on December 9 1964 and 18,298 during the January 5-6 period in 1965. These figures as Lfell as numbers of birds present by specific location and work area are shown n Table 1. Total ducks found in eastern Colorado in the December and January counts numbered about 200,000 birds and both counts are considered quite accurat • The February count, which included only the South Platte Valley, was poor because birds were scattered along the river and not concentrated on the larger reservoirs, a factor which made counting difficult. This post-hun ing shift in birds from reservoirs to the river areas can be seen in Table 1. The 1965 January Inventory indicated that only about 200,000 birds were wintering in eastern Colorado as compared to about 300,000 during January, 1964. During January, 1965, about 16,000 ducks were counted along the So th Platte River from the Colorado state line northeast of Julesburg to Brule, Nebraska, a distance of about 25 miles (Table 1). These birds were inclu ed in the Colorado survey as it is believed they are associated with the Ju Reservoir flock and fly back and forth between Nebraska and Colorado. �- 131 - Aerial duck counts by interval, area and specific location, eastern Colorado, 1964-65.· Number of Ducks Counted by Date December 5, 1964 FORjT COLLINS Te lry Lake LiSdenmaier Lake g Pond ervoir II 9 Re II 11 Re ervoir # 5 (Bee Lake) Re_jervoir/l 2 Drain by II 2 co~b Lake Ne, Windsor Reservoir Ea~n Lake Wi dsor Reservoir Hollister Lake) Ti ath Reservoir Dr in near Timnath si1 Creek Reservoir d Lake eland Lake tory Sloughs (Loveland) Totals DJvER-GREELEY LoJe Tree Reservoir unton R~servoir SWEfde Lake Valmont Reservoir Be~sley Reservoir (NW of Va1mont) Satnt Vrain River De~ver Metropolitan Area so+th Platte River, Denver to Greeley Barr Lake Horsecreek Reservoir Mitton Reservoir Latham Reservoir 500 650 70 2,600 January 5-6, 1965 1,700 500 400 50 800 25 3,140 4,400 4,000 1,200 8,000 6,000 2,800 10,100 2,000 3,300 800 6,540 250 300 4,200 400 900 35,850 29,300 1,200 5,000 4,205 13,300 GREELEY-FORT MORGAN I Riyerside Reservoir Emfire Reservoir Jackson Reservoir So~th Platte River, Greeley-Fort Morgan I Totals 100 560 50 30 1,900 3,300 900 1,000 300 1,900 10,515* 2,000 150 1,000 700 I Totals February 8, 1965* 3,100 651 63 1,225 4,400 1,925 28,000 2,900 5,400 6,600 1,100 19,000 7,100 2,500 40,518 47,451 23,550* 1,718 400 10,750 100 9,000 26,200 2,692 15,160 1,700 37,000 6,400 200 7,000* �- 132 - Table 1. Aerial duck counts by interval, area and specific location, eastern Colorado, 1964-65. (Continued). Number of Ducks Counted bl::Date December 5, 1964 January 5-6, 1965 February 8, 1965* Area FORT MORGAN ••STERLING Prewitt Reservoir Sterling Reservoir South Platte River Fort Morgan-Sterling Totals STERLING-JULESBURG Johnson Lake Jumbo Reservoir South Platte River Sterling-State Line State Line-Brule, Neb. (Believed Jumbo birds) 16,000 2,300 21,100 44 18,344 21,100 21,200 13,000 765 3,960 0 16,120 9,800 9.10* Totals 21,965 33,080 BONNY RESERVOIR Bonny Reservoir Totals 37,400 37,400 22,700 22,700 No cOtljnt 350 10,600 700 6 9 700 5 25 970 No cjnt ARKANSAS VALLEY CF&I Lakes, Pueblo Meredith Lake Cheraw Lakes Horse Creek Reservoir Blue Lake John Martin Reservoir Hasty Lake Veerhoeff Lake Nee Gronda Reservoir Nee Noshe Reservoir Queens Reservoir Thurston Lake Arkansas River Pueblo-Rocky Ford Rocky Ford-Lamar Lamar-State Line Two Buttes Reservoir Turks Pond Totals December 9, 1964 2,000 5,000 6,565 25 7,000 50 200 4,000 8,150 80 No count 3,000 35,990 3,844 255 149 105 500 18,298 �- 133 - Ta~le 1. Aerial duck counts by interval, area and specific location, eastern Colorado, 1964-65. (Continued). Number of Ducks Counted by Date December 5, 1964 January 5-6, 1965 February 8, 1965* TOTALS South Platte Valley and Bonny Arkansas Valley 169,237 35,990 190,631 18,298 56,015 No count Combined 205,227 208,929 56,015 *IPoor count due to scattered birds. ** No Bonny Reservoir count made. It was estimated that 98 percent of the wintering duck population was made up of mallards. The remaining portion was split among pintails, American widgeon, gr en-winged teal, gadwall, common golden-eye and common mergansers. This eSJlimate of species composition is similar to those made in previous years. Re ults of mallard sex ratio counts by work area and trap site location are Ii Ited in Table 2. No trapping was accomplished in the Arkansas Valley during the segment because of early migration of ducks into the area before the end oflFebruary• Therefore no sex ratio counts were conducted in the Arkansas Va]ley area. As indicated in Table 2, sex composition of mallards in most areas in 1964-65 wa very close to 60 percent. The average composition for all areas was ap~roximatelY 61 percent for a 1.58:1 male-female ratio. This is similar to theI figure of 59 percent males found in the same areas in the 1963-64 period wh~ch suggests a 1.45:1 male-female ratio. Ratios for both winters are believed to be quite representative of true age composition of the flocks beca~se of size of samples counted (approximately 400 birds per count in 1963-64 an~ about 500 per count in 1964-65) and also because we conducted the counts wh n the populations at each site were well mixed to keep sex ratio count bias at a minimum. �- 134 - Table 2. Date Mallard sex ratio counts by date and area, eastern Colorado, 1964-65.* Location FORT COLLINS AREA 1/20/65 Eaton Lake 1/21/65 Timnath Reservoir 1/26/65 Eaton Lake 2/ 8/65 Eaton Lake 2/ 8/65 Windsor Reservoir (Hollister Lake) 2/25/65 Boyd Lake Totals DENVER-GREELEY AREA 2/ 3/65 Va1mont Reservoir 2/25/65 Kammerzell Farm (S.P. River) Totals GREELEY-FORT MORGAN AREA 2/19/65 Schaefer's Farm (S.P. River) Totals FORT MORGAN-STERLING AREA 1/31/65 Merino (Fields) 2/17/65 Merino (Fields) 2/18/65 Merino (Fields) Totals STERLING-JULESBURG AREA 2/18/65 Manue1lo Farm (S.P. River) Totals I Number Ducks Counted Male Female Total Percent Maies 304 195 392 280 214 134 238 191 518 329 630 471 58169 59.27 62i22 59 45 307 290 200 194 507 484 60 55 59 92 1,768 1,171 2,939 60 16 547 222 769 71 13 245 152 397 61r71 792 374 1,166 67h2 303 234 537 56!42 303 234 537 56142 344 328 300 177 217 208 521 545 508 66f03 60 18 59.06 972 602 1,574 6Il75 276 276 173 173 449 449 61 47 61147 1 I BONNY RESERVOIR AREA Bonny Reservoir 12/29/64 Bonny Reservoir 1/ 8/65 1/ 8/65 Bonny Reservoir Totals TOTALS AND AVERAGE PERCENT 245 313 313 871 141 232 224 597 386 545 537 1,468 63147 57.43 58 , 29 59133 4,982 3,151 8,133 61[26 * No sex ratio counts made in the Arkansas Valley. �- 135 - REFERENCES Funarlkks' H. D. 1964. Wintering Duck Flock Census. Colorado Game, Fish and Department, Game Research Rept. July. pp. 59-64. P Prepared by: Da~e Howard D. Funk Approved by: Jack R. Grieb Assistant Wildlife Researcher Project Leader O_c_t_ob_e_r~,~1~9-6~5---------- Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator ��- 137 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RES'IDARCHPROJECT SEGMENT St.te of Colorado ------------------------ Pr jectNo. Migratory Bird Investigations w-88-R-IO Wo k Plan No. Tille of Job: Job No. 3 5 Evaluation of Data to Determine the Range and Annual Mortality of Mallard Flocks Wintering in Colorado. Period Covered: December 1, 1963 through September 15, 1965. I Pe sonnel: . Jack R. Grieb and Howard D Funk. ABSTRACT During the post-hunting season period of 1963-64, 4,724 mallards were banded in seven study areas in eastern Colorado. In the hunting season of 1964-65, ab ut 3 percent or 142 of these were recovered, Most of these first-year reloveries came from the Central Flyway. A difference in migration habits be1ween yearling birds and adults seems evident from locations of recoveries, period of time during the fall in which the birds were bagged and from relatile recovery rates by area of recovery. There also were indications that ye1rlings may be more vulnerable to the gun than older birds. Fl oroscopy results were compared with hunter pressure estimates from hunter qu~stionnaires and numbers of birds present by study unit in Colorado. The re ults suggest we will have to find other methods for evaluating fluoroscopy as a valid indicator of relative hunting pressure between study areas. Ag and sex ratios from birds bagged in the study units were collected by metns of wing surveys. These data are presented so that comparison can be ma~e with direct recovery data when they become available to estimate juvenile vulnerability and hunter selectivity by sexes. The wing data indicate a low pr portion of the mallard population in eastern Colorado was made up of youngofrthe-year birds in 1964-65. This is in contrast with results of cannonnetting efforts after season, which is thought to be an unbiased measure of th se ratios. �- 138 - Recommendations: Next segment this job will be combined with Jobs 3 and 4 into Work Plan 3, Job 6 which will then be composed of all work regardin the eastern Colorado mallard study from trapping and banding through analysi of recovery data. This will eliminate duplicate report writing on many of he phases of the study. The study will probably be conducted a minimum of ,hree more years. When the study is terminated, the final report will also be presented as Work Plan 3, Job 6. Obiectives: (1) To determine band recovery rates of mallard flocks by work units described in Job 3. (2) To determine annual mortality rates of mallard flocks ,y work unit. (3) To determine age and sex ratios of mallard flocKs by w rk unit. (4) To determine breeding, migration and wintering ranges 7f mallard flocks by work unit. (5) To determine the effect of hunting regulations and hunhing pressure on mallard flocks by work unit. (6) To compare all information between work units and with other states and flyways. Procedures: Band recovery cards pertaining to dates and locations of ha~vest of mallards banded post-season in Colorado during the 1963-64 winter and recovered during the 1964-65 hunting season were received from the Bird anding Laboratory at Patuxent Wildlife Research Station. In order to facilitat data analysis, the cut off date was set at mid-August. Only a few legitimate recoveries which were late in arriving have not been included in the ana1yses. The recovery cards were sorted by Colorado management units in which the birds were banded. Tabulations were made in which the mallards were further s rted by age at time of banding, sex and location of recovery. Recovery rates Iwere then calculated for birds of each sex and age class by study area and 10 ation of recovery. In most cases, data are merely presented and conclusions f r most results will be drawn at the termination of the study. Locations of all recoveries were plotted on maps of North America areas of nesting and/or fall staging, migration and wintering. Movement of mallards to and within Colorado was also shown by plotting recoveries of birds bagged in Colorado on a state map. Age and sex ratios of mallards bagged in Colorado.were computed from wing surveys conducted by the Department and the Bureau. These were tabulated s~ that comparisons with direct recovery data could be made for estimates on difBerential juvenile vulnerability and hunter selectivity of sexes; which will be do e at a later date. �- 139 - Perce tages of immature birds with shot as determined by fluoroscopy were compared with numbers of hunters and birds present by management unit to deterl ine the validity of fluoroscopy as ameasure of hunting pressure between areas. . No wolk was done on computing annual mortality of the birds occupying Colorado as we have but one year of recovery data with which to work. This phase of the s udy will begin next segment. INTRODUCTION Durin the winter of 1963-64, we began a concentrated effort to band mallards Wintering in eastern Colorado to determine if we could define differential patte ns in nesting, migration and wintering areas for mallards utilizing vario s portions of eastern Colorado (Funk 1964). If flock management is found to be possible, we can manage our separate flocks according to the .condi ion of each flock rather than on a broad flyway basis, which is now being practiced. Thus, if we find an underharvested flock that has had good nesti g success, we can liberalize our seasons to allow more recreation. By the s me token, we can restrict seasons on other flocks if we find they are in tr uble due to poor production and heavy hunting pressure. e In thls study we band mallards after hunting season in Colorado and have now compl~ted two years of banding. This report deals mainly with results of the 1964-65 hunting season on mallards we banded post-season in 1963-64. It should be pO'nted out that bias in recovery data collected is undoubtedly present in some ef the results. Our objective was to band approximately 250 birds of each sex a d age class (adult males and females and immature males and females) in each f seven study or management units, but this was not accomplished in all areas. Also, hunting pressure in 1964-65 was not as heavy as several years ago due tl restrictions imposed on mallard limits. Therefore, numbers of recoveries from agged banded mallards are fairly limited. These limitations, due probably ling errors, should be realized when studying results. Banding and Recovery Data After the hunting season of 1963-64, 4,724 mallards were banded in seven studYl(management) units in eastern Colorado (Funk 1964). The seven units in which banding took place are 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 9 and 10 and 12 combi ed (Fig. 1). Numbers of mallards tagged by unit are displayed in Table 1. One hrndred and fourty-nine birds captured at Bonny Reservoir were not aged and, therefore, recovery data, which are also shown in Table 1, concerning these birds were not utilized in many analyses in this report. �-c :I 0 I -' "0 « '" '"w --l z ~ I I :1 �--- 'l'a-b-l-e l-.----.Numbe-r-.s-o£-mallards banded in eastern Colorado,~963-~ and recovered during the 1964-65 hunting season by age, sex and management unit of banding. Adults lnunatures Female Male Banded Recovered Banded Recovered Area Totals Captured Denver-Greeley 1,022 496 16 70 5 334 8 122 3 Fort Collins 1,026 553 8 144 1 197 12 132 4 Greeley-Fort Morgan 280 99 5 43 1 67 4 71 2 Fort Morgan-Sterling 674 336 12 69 1 194 7 75 2 Sterling-Julesburg 295 91 1 112 7 63 2 Bonny Reservoir 256 86 °2 29 24 2 98 6 48 1 Arkansas Valley 1,022 515 12 105 ° 234 7 168 3 Sub Total Bonny Reservoir 4,575 2,176 55 484 11 1,236 51 679 17 (Una ge d) Total 149 4,7i4 Male Banded Recovered Female Banded Recovered (117 Males Banded and 4 Recovered) ( 32 Females Banded and 4 Recovered) ~ +:~ �- 142 - When banded, all birds had been subjected to at least one hunting season Those which were immature when banded had been through only one season while tlieadults had lived through two or more seasons. For the purpose of analysis, howJver, all recoveries in this report are first-year recoveries because the 1964165 season was the first hunting season the birds were exposed to since bein¥ banded. The term "yearling" will be used considerably in this report and will re1erto the young birds hatched in 1963 which were over one year of age but less than two years old during the 1964-65 period. Nesting, Migration and Wintering Areas Locations of recoveries of all birds of known age and sex banded in 1963 64, except those harvested in Colorado, are presented in Figures 2 and 3 by 1ge, sex and management unit in which they were banded. Recovery locations for birds harvested in Colorado will be displayed later. Figure 2 relates.t mallards banded as young-of-the-year and recovered as yearlings while Figure 3 concerns those banded and recovered as adults. These locations wereplo~ted separately because of the questions in many investigators minds: "Do dU9ks settle into flock flyways similarly to geese, and are age and sex of dUCJS important factors in determining if flock flyways exist?" Therefore, by plotting recoveries of the two age groups separately, it is possible to compare t e two indicated patterns of migration. In fact, locations of direct recoverie of birds banded to the north of Colorado could also be plotted and the sugg sted routes of travel of adult and immature birds could be compared with data in Figures 2 and 3. This will be attempted in the Central Flyway study on determination of mallard management units which will begin during the wi ter of 1965-66. At least one assumption has to be made in trying to determine ,Ihether or not ducks follow flock flyway patterns and that is the set pattern, i· such exists, would be most evident in the adult popUlation. Therefore, adult migration patterns and behavior have to be the basis of our study. On the surface there are many similarities in the migration patterns disJlayed from mallards of the two age groups. Most recoveries came from the Cent~al Flyway. Alberta seemed to be more occupied with yearlings than Saskatch wan whereas recoveries from the adult group seemed common to both provinces. Recovery locations in the United States are fairly scattered but many of yearlings were recovered in the central portion of the Central Flyway. low hunting pressure in portions of Montana and Wyoming somewhat distort overall view on migration routes. Even with lack of recovery data in some area, there is considerable evid that the yearlings "fanned out" eastward in the Central Flyway more than adults during the 1964-65 season, especially in South Dakota, Nebraska a Kansas. This was explored by examining dates of recovery for birds of b th age groups. Some states chose split seasons in 1964-65 and it was possi Ie to compare age and sex composition of the harvest between early and late se as shown in Table 2. Recoveries presented are from bandings in all of e �t; ." ff ~ SPECIES MALLAllD TAB NO. IMMATURE lmEN BAlUlED BAND. LOC. ~LE ~ COMMENTS . -- Locations of recoveries of mallards banded in Colorado as immatures in ~~63-64 and recovered as yearlings in 1964-65. MANAGEMENT UNITS 1. Sterling-Julesburg 2. Fort Morgan.Sterling 3. Greeley-FQrt Morgan 4. Fort Collinse 6. Denver-Greeiey 9. Bonny Reservoir 10. Arkansps Valley �~ }IALLARD ADULT WHeN BANDED }!ALE FEmLE -4- COMMENTS ~ MANAGEMENT UNITS 1. Sterling-Jul~8 2. Fort Morgan-Sterling -.3-.Gr.e.el~t Monsn 4. Fort Collins 6. Denver-Greeley 9. Bonny Reservoir 10. Arkansaa Valley I ~I of recoveries I I ••.., .•. ,- ••. __ ,.....- ,...,... I of mallards banded,~n Colorado as adults :in 1963-64 and recovered :in 1964-65. �- 145 - Table 2 --Recovery locations of yearling and adult mallards banded in eastern Colorado in 1963-64 and harvested in 1964-65 by 10 day intervals and sex.* Bend Recove~ Location Alberta Saskatcl?-ewan Montana Period of Harvest bv 10 Dav Intervals September October November December 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 123 I mmm F MM 1 m mm Mm M m North D kota M m South Dakota f f m Wyoming f M m m M m f mm MM M Nebrask January fff m mm M mm Kansas f F Oklahom Texas m f m Idaho f Utah Minneso a Missour * M A~ult Male F A~ult Female m :farl1ng Male f Yfarling Female M M F M m m m m f M Ar-kansas Louisiap.a M f m , �- 146 Colorado. Recovery areas in the Central Flyway are listed first and in somewhat descending order as they occur from north to south. Other stat s of recovery are listed in like manner below the Central Flyway states. Recoveries in Alberta and Saskatchewan are slightly in favor of yearlin s recovered as opposed to adults (64 percent yearlings). This is also tr~e during the late seasons in most areas (58 percent yearlings) except for Colorado which will be discussed later. However, during the early seasons in October and November in states usually considered main.ly migration areas, about 78 ~ercent of the recoveries were yearlings. All of these percentages probably in icate a smaller proportion of yearlings in the bag than actually occurred bec use there were more adults banded than immatures during the 1963-64 period. There are at least three possible explanations concerning the high portion Of~yearlingS bagged during the early seasons. One is that yearlings migrated from n rthern breeding areas sooner than adults. Sowls (1955 page 37) reported that 'uvenile ducks seem to arrive in Canadian breeding areas after the adults have s t up territories and that if nesting sites are scarce (as was the case in 19.4) the juveniles are forced to search for other areas or not nest at all. Sow s also mentioned (page 152) that he has seen molting areas in Canada in June 0 cupied by many paired birds and he suspected they were unsuccessful nesters wh'ch had moved to molting areas while still paired. This could have been th situation in 1964 and the unsuccessful yearlings could have migrated early with s~e of the adults into the mid-Flyway states by October and early November. This dheory is supported by the fact that sex composition of the yearlings bagged d ring the early seasons was nearly equal (56 percent males). A second reason for the high proportion of yearlings in the early seaso could be simply that many yearlings nested in South Dakota, Nebraska and KansJs and this also could be supported by the nearly equal sex composition of yea lings bagged at that time. Either way, there is indication of differences in patterns and habits between yearlings and adults. Possibly this question can be answered after the 1965-66 season as there was much more nesting habitat availab e in Canada in 1965 than in 1964. A third reason for differences in age composition in the bag during early seasons of 1964 could be that yearlings remain more vulnerable to the g~n than older birds but it does not seem logical that this factor alone would produce the extremely high yearling proportion in only these three states and n~t in Canadi~ and in later seasons. Possibly the reason for distorted age ratios in the early seasons is a combination of the above items. Numbers of recoveries of mallarns banded in Colorado in 1963-64 and per entages of total recoveries from the 1964-65 season are shown in Table 3 by are of recovery and age of the birds. Numbers of recoveries for each age clasI are similar. Colorado is indicated to have been the recovery area of about twothirds of the banded adults recovered and only about one-third of the r coveries from yearlings. The figures in Table 3 again show the general wanderinf pattern of yearlings into the states east of Colorado which was mentioned ear1ifr. The relatively high recovery rates of yearlings in South Dakota, Nebraska and Kansas are of course mainly due to the early seasons. �- 147 Table ~.--Numbers and percentages of mallards banded post-seas~n in 1963-64 and recovered during 1964-65 by age and location of recovery. I I RecovefY Location Albert~ Saskat hewan Mont an;. Wyomin co1orafo New Me ico North pakota South Dakota I Nebrasra Kansas OklahJ Texas Britis Columbia Idaho Utah Minnes ta Arkansfs Missoufi Louisi na Totals Banded as Adults Number Percent 5 3 1 1 41 0 1 0 4 1 1 2 1 2 0 0 1 1 1 66 7.58 4.55 1.52 1.52 62.12 0.00 1.52 0.00 6.06 1.52 1.52 3.03 1.52 3.03 0.00 0.00 1.52 1.52 1.52 100.05 First Year Recoveries Banded as Innnatures Number Percent 10 1 1 2 21 0 1 4 12 4 0 3 0 2 2 1 1 1 2 68 14.71 1.47 1.47 2.94 30.88 0.00 1.47 5.88 17.65 5.88 0.00 4.41 0.00 2.94 2.94 1.47 1.47 1.47 2.94 99.99 All Mallards Number Percent 15 4 2 3 62 0 2 4 16 5 1 5 1 4 2 1 2 2 3 134 11.19 2.99 1.49 2.24 46.27 0.00 1.49 2.99 11.94 3.73 0.75 3.73 0.75 2.99 1.49 0.75 1.49 1.49 2.24 100.01 �- 148 - Differential habits between yearling and adult mallards are also illustra in Table 4. Numbers and percentages of recoveries are compared between location of recovery, age, and also sex. Locations of recoveries of adul s are remarkably similar between sexes even with the difference in numbers f birds recovered (55 males and 11 females). Possibly this is coincidental. A wandering pattern is again shown for yearlings. Locations of Colorado recoveries by management unit for yearling and adUl~ mallards are shown in Figures 4 and 5, respectively. Examination of thes figures and Table 4 reveals that although there is some suggestion of bir s wintering in areas of the State other than the one in which they were ban ed, there seems to be a tendency to return to the same general area that they had been banded in the year before. Table 4.--Comparison of percentages of recoveries of mallards banded in C during post-season, 1963-64 and recovered in hunting season of by location and age and sex of birds. Location of Recovery Number Recovered Same Colo. Unit As Banded Other Units Colorado Total Canada Other States Can. & Other States Total Bagged Percent of Total Percent of Total ADULT MALES No. Banded = 2,176 ADULT FEMALES No. Banded = 484 26 8 34 8 13 21 55 5 2 47.27 14.55 61.82 14.55 23.64 38.18 100.00 YEARLING MALES No. Banded = 1,236 Same Colo. Unit As Banded Other Units Colorado Total Canada Other States Can. & Other States Total Bagged Number Recovered 11 7 18 10 23 33 51 21.57 13.73 35.29 19.61 45.10 64.71 100.00 7 1 3 4 11 45.45 18.18 63.64 9.09 27.27 36.36 100.00 YEARLING FEMALES No. Banded = 679 0 3 3 1 13 14 17 0.00 17 .65 17.65 5.88 76.47 82.35 100.00 �COLORADO MOFFAT LOGAN ROVTT 2 I jQJ SEDGW/CI( 1 @ PHILLIPS YUMA WASHINGTON ill 9 @ RIO BLANCO GARFIELD lOT CARSON LINCOLN MESA CHUENNE 10 ~ \0 MONTROSE r PU * LO 13 I I 121 m KIOWA CROW~CY @ SAGUACHE PROWERS BENT SAN MIGUEL 'HINSDALE DOLORES ALAMOSA BACA MONTEZUMA I MllA TURE MALLARDS Fig. 4 -- Locations of yearling recoveries in Colorado, by sex, 1964-65 seasons. • Male @ Female I1J I.ta Ie ® Female �COLORADO MOFFAT HOVTT lOGAN 2 SEbGWICI( 1 PHILLIPS YUMA 9 [Ql RIO BLANCO CD GAIIF/ELI) IfITCARSON LINCOLN MESA 10 CHUENNE I-' Vl o MONTROSE KIOWA .1~P~UE~8~L~O-----1-3~~IC~R~O~W~/~Y~~1--1-2~1~ nil @ SAGUACHE PROWERS BEN SAN MIGUEl. DOLORES RIO GRANOE MONTEZUMA BACA ADULT MALLARDS Fig. 5 -- Locations of adult recoveries in Colorado, by sex, 1964-65 season. • Male ® Female Gi1 lvla Ie @ Female �·--"unloers ana-pe r cent: agE!S-ofma-thrrd-s-k:tl-:te-d-or-rourrd-de:a-d)hY'l'ana1lBment-un±t--or-other-l oea-tion.dtlri-nfir"l-964-6'§-htlI'l.H-I'I.~se&S-0·· by age and sex, from those banded during post-hunting season in Colorado. 1963-64 Area of Banding Denver-Greeley (6) Fort Collins (4) Greeley-Fort Morgan (3) Fort Morgan-Sterling Sterling-Julesburg (2) (1) Killed in Colorado Other Unit Total Kill No. % No. % Canada No. % Killed out of state Other States Tota 1 Ki11ed No. % No. % Grand Total Rec. Rate Both Ages & Sexes No. % Number Banded Same Unit No. % AM AF SM SF M F 553 144 197 132 750 276 12 2 5 0 17 3 2.17 1.38 2.54 0.00 2.27 1.09 1 2 3 1 4 2 0.18 1.38 1.52 0.76 0.53 0.72 13 4 8 1 21 5 2.35 2.78 4.06 0.76 2.80 1.81 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 3 1 0 2 3 3 0.54 0.69 0.00 1.52 0.40 1.09 3 1 0 2 3 3 0.54 0.69 0.00 1.52 0.42 1.09 16 5 8 3 24 8 2.89 3.47 4.06 2.27 3.20 2.90 AM AF SM SF M F 496 70 334 122 830 192 1 0 4 0 5 0 0.20 0.00 1.20 0.00 0.60 0.00 4 1 1 1 5 2 0.81 1.43 0.30 0.82 0.60 1.04 5 1 5 1 10 2 1.01 1.43 1.50 0.82 1.20 1.04 1 0 2 1 3 1 0.20 0.00 0.60 0.82 0.36 0.52 2 0 5 2 7 2 0.40 0.00 1.50 1.64 0.84 1.04 3 0 7 3 10 3 0.60 0.00 2.10 2.46 1.20 1.56 8 1 12 4 20 5 1.61 1.43 3.59 3.28 2.41 2.60 AM AF SM SF M F 99 43 67 71 166 114 2 0 0 0 2 0 2.02 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.20 0.00 2 0 1 1 3 1 2.02 0.00 1.49 1.41 1.81 0.88 4 0 1 1 5 1 4.04 0.00 1.49 1.41 3.01 0.88 1 1 2 0 3 1 1.01 2.33 2.99 0.00 1.81 0.88 0 0 1 1 1 1 0.00 0.00 1.49 1.41 0.60 0.88 1 1 3 1 4 2 1.01 2.33 4.48 1.41 2.41 1.75 5 1 4 2 9 3 5.05 2.33 5.97 2.82 5.42 2.63 4.23 AM AF SM SF M F 336 69 194 75 530 144 2 0 0 0 2 0 0.60 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.38 0.00 1 0 1 0 2 0 0.30 0.00 0.52 0.00 0.38 0.00 3 0 1 0 4 0 0.89 0.00 0.52 0.00 0.75 0.00 4 0 3 0 7 0 1.19 0.00 1.55 0.00 1.32 0.00 5 1 3 2 8 3 1.49 1.45 1.55 2.67 1.51 2.08 9 1 6 2 15 3 2.68 1.45 3.09 2.67 2.83 2.08 12 1 7 2 19 3 3.57 1.45 3.61 2.67 3.58 2.08 3.21 AM AF SM SF M 91 29 112 63 203 0 1 0 0 0 0.00 3.45 0.00 0.00 0.00 0 0 1 0 1 f1 q? 1 1 _09 a 0.00 0.00 0.89 0.00 0.49 0.00 0 1 1 0 1 1 0.00 3.45 0.89 0.00 0.49 1.09 0 0 1 0 1 0 0.00 0.00 0.89 0.00 0.49 0.00 0 0 5 2 5 2 0.00 0.00 4.46 3.17 2.46 2.17 0 0 6 2 6 2 0.00 0.00 5.36 3.17 2.96 2.17 0 1 7 2 7 3 0.00 3.45 6.25 3.17 3.45 3.26 Age & Sex When Banded 3.01 3.34 3.12 1.59 3.51 2.45 f-' 4.35 4.29 3.35 3.26 0.83 5.14 3.39 \J1 f-' �Table 5.--Numbers and percentages of mallards killed or found dead, by management unit or other location, during 1964-65 hunting season by age and sex, from those banded during post-hunting season in Colorado, 1963-64. (continued) Area of Banding Bonny Reservoir (9) Arkansas Valley (10,12,&13) South Platte Valley (Includes 1,2,3,4,6,&9) Total State (All Units) Age & Sex When Banded Number Banded Same Unit No. % Killed in Colorado Other Unit Total Kill No. No. % % Canada No. % Killed out of state Other States Total Killed No. % No. % Grand Total Rec. Rate Both Ages No. % & Sexes AM AF SM SF UM UF M F 86 24 98 48 117 32 301 104 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0.00 4.17 1.02 0.00 0,00 0.00 0,33 0,96 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.00 0.00 0.00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0.00 4.17 1.02 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,33 0,96 2 0 2 0 1 2 5 2 2.33 0.00 2.04 0,00 0,85 6,25 1.66 1.92 0 1 3 1 3 2 6 4 0.00 4.17 3.06 2.08 2.56 6,25 1.99 3,85 2 1 5 1 4 4 11 6 2.33 4.17 5.10 2.08 3.42 12,50 3.65 5.77 2 2 6 1 4 4 12 7 2.33 8.33 6.12 2.08 3.42 12.50 3.99 6.73 AM AF SM SF M F 515 105 234 168 749 273 9 0 1 0 10 0 1.75 0,00 0,43 0.00 1.34 0,00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0,00 0.00 0,00 0,00 0.00 0,00 9 0 1 0 10 0 1.75 0.00 0,43 0,00 1.34 0,00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.00 0,00 0,00 0.00 0.00 0.00 3 0 6 3 9 3 0.58 0,00 2.56 1,79 1,20 1.10 3 0 6 3 9 3 0.58 0.00 2.56 1.79 1.20 1.10 12 0 7 3 19 3 2.33 0.00 2.99 1.79 2.54 1.10 AM AF SM SF UM UF M F 1,661 379 1,002 511 117 32 2,780 922 17 5 10 0 0 0 27 5 1.02 1.32 1.00 0.00 0.00 0,00 0.97 0.54 8 2 7 3 0 0 15 5 0.48 0,53 0.70 0.59 0.00 0,00 0.54 0,54 25 7 17 3 0 0 42 10 1.51 1.85 1.70 0,59 0,00 0.00 1.51 1.08 8 0,48 1 0.26 10 1.00 1 0,20 1 0.85 2 6,25 19 0.68 4 0,43 10 3 17 10 3 2 30 15 0.60 0.79 1.70 1.96 2.56 6,25 1.08 1.63 18 4 27 11 4 4 49 19 1.08 1.06 2.69 2.15 3.42 12.50 1.76 2.06 43 11 44 14 4 4 91 29 2.59 2.90 4.39 2.74 3.42 12.50 3.27 3.15 AM AF SM SF UM UF M F 2,176 484 1,236 679 117 32 3,529 1,195 26 5 11 0 0 0 37 5 1.19 1.03 0.89 0,00 0.00 0.00 1.05 0,42 8 2 7 3 0 0 15 5 0.37 0,41 0,57 0.44 0.00 0,00 0,43 0,42 34 7 18 3 0 0 52 10 1.56 1.45 1.46 0.44 0.00 0,00 1.47 0,84 8 1 10 1 1 2 19 4 13 3 23 13 3 2 39 18 0.60 0.62 1.86 1.91 2.56 6.25 1.11 1.51 21 4 33 14 4 4 58 22 0.97 0,83 2.67 2.06 3.42 12.50 1.64 1.84 55 11 51 17 4 4 110 32 2.53 2.27 4.13 2.50 3.42 12.50 3.12 2.68 0.37 0.21 0,81 0,15 0,85 6.25 0,54 0,33 3.64 4.79 5.37 4.69 1.94 2.49 t-' \J1 2.15 2.65 3.83 5.37 3.24 2.48 3.55 5.37 3.01 f\) �- 153 - Recovery Rates and Hunting Pressure A step by step breakdown of first-year recovery rates of adult and yearling malla~ds is presented in Table 5. In a way, these data are somewhat repetitive to information in the section on migration. However, the data are more refined becau1 e recovery rates are based on numbers of birds banded in each unit by age afd sex. Limited numbers of recoveries and probably differences in hunting press re by areas combine to make most comparisons of data very difficult. Thus, only broad comparisons will be made and those of finer points will be delayed until more data have been gathered. One o~ the broadest comparisons concerns the overall recovery rates of adult and YFarling birds. The recovery rate for yearlings (3.55 percent) was greater than fhe adult rate (2.48 percent), Much of this probably is due to the effects of thF early seasons on the yearling group as stated before. Yet all units of bandifg show the higher relative recovery rate for yearlings. This suggests year Ijlngs are more vulnerable to the gun than adults. The combined recovery rate or adults and yearlings is 3.01 which is considered very low. None of these rates are corrected for wounding loss, but total hunting mortality would still be a low portion of the population, In Ta Ie 6 recovery data for adult and yearling mallards (sexes combined) are shown by area of banding and general area of recovery. The data presented are similfr to those in Table 5 but are on a more broad basis showing all of Color do combined and all other areas combined. It is suggested from Table 6 either that birds of Units 3, 4 and 6 return to Co~orado in greater proportion than those from other units or that hunting presshre in the former units is greater thari in the latter. Probably the difference is due to greater hunting pressure in Units 3, 4 and 6. The reverse is surgested with out-of-state recoveries. This indicates out-of-state hunting pressure on birds from Units 3, 4 and 6 is less than that on birds from the other units. This can only mean a difference in flyway patterns betwe n birds of Units 3, 4 and 6 as compared to birds from other units in the S ate (Figures 2, 3, 4 and 5), compatison of recovery rates of adults and yearlings in Table 6 shows that in most ~nagement units, the proportion of adult birds returning to Colorado was greater than the proportion of returning yearlings. However, recoveries are few ff.rthis type of comparison. Again, the opposite is true for most units regar?ing out-of-state recovery comparisons between adults and yearlings. It se~ms the yearlings were more apt to be recovered out-of-state than adults. This ~erely repeats suggestions from recovery location observations from Figures 2 through 5 that yearlings have not settled into patterns similar to those exhibited by adult mallards. Much of this is not fully understood at th s time. �- 154- Table 6.--Numbers and first-year recovery rates of mallards banded management units in Colorado in 1963-64 and recovered in Management Unit Of Banding 6 DenverGreeley Age When Banded Adult Innn All 4 Fort Collins Adult Imm All 3 GreeleyFort Morgan Adult Innn All 2 Fort MorganSterling Adult Innn All 1 SterlingJulesburg Adult Imm All 9 Bonny Reservoir Adult Innn Unk All 10 and 12 Arkansas Valley Adult Innn All Number Banded Numbers Recovered and Recove Colorado Other Areas No. Rec. Rate No. Rec. Rate No. 697 329 1,026 17 9 26 2.44 2.74 2.53 4 2 6 0.57 0.61 0.58 21 11 32 3.01 3.34 3.12 556 456 1,022 6 6 12 1.06 1.32 1.17 3 10 13 0.53 2.19 1.27 9 16 25 1.59 3.51 2.45 142 138 280 4 2 6 2.82 1.45 2.14 2 4 6 1.41 2.90 2.14 6 6 12 4.23 4.35 4.29 405 269 674 3 1 4 0.74 0.37 0.59 10 8 18 2.47 2.97 2.67 13 9 22 3.21 3.35 3.26 120 175 295 1 1 2 0.83 0.57 0.68 0 8 8 0.00 4.57 2.71 1 9 10 0.83 5.14 3.39 110 146 149 405 1 1 0 2 0.91 0.70 0.00 0.49 3 6 8 17 2.73 4.11 5.37 4.20 4 7 8 19 3.64 4.79 5.37 4.69 620 402 1,022 9 1 10 1.45 0.25 0.98 3 9 12 ·0.48 2.24 1.17 12 10 22 1.94 2.49 2.15 Rec. Rate �- 155 - Male-'Female recovery ratios between units in Colorado are too sketchy to compare. Even ~hose recovered in all areas are few when compared by management unit but this information is tabulated in Table 7 for adults and yearlings. As can be seen, the ratio of all adult males to adult females is only 1.11:1 compared to 1.~5:l for yearlings. This is opposite to what probably is the true situa ion. With females subject to high mortality during nesting season, as is geperally thought true, older birds should have a relatively high male portion in the kill as compared to females. The relative rate of males to femalbs in yearling birds should be slightly in favor of males but not to the degree indicated. No reason can be given for this seemingly reverse situa ion other than small recovery sample size. empt was made to determine if hunting pressure indications from hunter questionnaire and count data were proportional to results of fluoroscopy studies to determine the validity of fluoroscopy as a measure of relative hunting pressure between units. Numbers of hunters utilizing the various study areas were estimated from a hunter questionnaire survey (Grieb and Hunter 1965)hand numbers of mallards present in these units were obtained from the 1965 anuary Inventory aerial survey (Funk 1965a). It was thought that the ratid of numbers of hunters per number of ducks present by unit would be directly comparable to numbers of mallards with shot per number of mallards examined. The data and results of the test are shown in Table 8. Young-of-the-year mallards were the birds used in the analysis because they carried shot from the je season only. It was realized before the test was made that the young birds undoubtedly obtaibed some of their shot in states other than Colorado and that the hunter and duck numbers were from Colorado only. However, this was thought to be the o~ly way to test the data as we did our fluoroscopy work after hunting seas9n. As shown in Table 8, there seems to be a similar relationship between the two sets of data in all areas (Probability = 0.75). In both, the DenverGreeley area was suggested to have had the most hunting pressure and Bonny Rese~oir the least. This seems logical from observations in the field. Data from the other units varied by unit. However, a test involving comparison of numbers of birds with and without shot by unit disclosed that the percentages of bijrds with shot shown in Table 8 were probably similar bet;ween units (Prooability = 0.74). Another test regarding numbers of hunters per numbers of ducks censused by unit was the opposite and a highly significant difference was Joted between units (Probability = less than 0.001). Thus, the similarity foun~ between the two sets of data in Table 8 seems to be coincidental and fact~rs other than similarity between fluoroscopy data and other hunting pressure estimates in Colorado were responsible for accepting the null hypothesis in I the ~irst test. Possibly high hunting pressure in Units 3, 4 and 6 compensate~ for low pressure out of state on the same group of birds and vice versa for ~irds in other Colorado units so that the test in Table 8 showed similar �- 156 Table 7.--Comparison of relative male-female recovery rates for adult and yearling mallards banded in Colorado in 1963-64 and recovered in all locations in 1964-65. Management Unit of Banding Adults Males Per Female Yearlings All 1 Sterling-Julesburg 0.00 1.97 1.06 2 Fort Morgan-Sterling 2.46 1.35 1.72 3 Greeley-Fort Morgan 2.17 2.12 2.06 4 Fort Collins 1.13 1.09 0.93 6 Denver-Greeley 0.83 1.79 1.10 9 Bonny Reservoir 0.28 2.94 0.59 2.33 1.67 2.31 1.11 1.65 1.16 10 and 12 Arkansas Valley All Units Table 8.--Comparison by Colorado management unit of numbers of hunter~ present in the 1964 season per number of mallards censused in the 1 65 January Inventory with numbers of immature.mallards with em edded shot after the 1964 season as determined b fluorosco * Management Unit Number Hunters Per 100 Birds Censused Number Immatu e Birds With Shot Per 100 Birds Examine i 1 Sterling-Julesburg 3.60 7.34 2 Fort Morgan-Sterling 4.87 6.25 3 Greeley-Fort Morgan 7.10 6.42 4 Fort Collins 3.68 6.67 6 Denver-Greeley 9.00 8.46 9 Bonny Reservoir 1.44 4.68 Chi-square 2.64, 5 d * No fluoroscopy work was performed in the Arkansas Valley in 1964-6~ P 0.75 �- 157 - reI tionships between areas. To get valid comparisons, I suggest we would hav to fluoroscope immature birds in Colorado before hunting season in the ,Stie but after our full complement of wintering mallards had arrived and co are these data, by unit, with fluoroscopy results from after hunting season. We ould then arrive at fluoroscopy data concerning only Colorado relative hunling pressure between units and compare this fluoroscopy data with other est mates on hunting pressure by unit as in Table 8. ThiS.would be practically imp ssible as we would probably end up with a very short hunting season. Ano her possibility for valid comparisons would be to examine young of the yea~ throughout hunting season in Colorado and determine the rate of increase of oung with shot as the season progresses. This would be very difficult to 0 as we would have to sample in all areas at once and would not have . suf icient manpower or equipment. POSSibly there are methods which could be uti,ized to obtain only Colorado hunting pressure indications f.romfluoroscopy dat1 we now have but they are not known at this time. This will be attempted bef~re next year. Probably the best comparison of hunting pressure between uni s is the number of hunters per number of birds present by unit as shown in he first column of Table 8. Wing Surveys We obtained age and sex ratio information on mallards bagged during the 1964 on in the various Colorado management units from the Bureau wing survey also from a similar survey conducted by the Department. The reason these su eys are conducted is to gather data on age and sex in the hunters bag and compare them with direct recovery data from birds banded pre-season for estimates on differential vulnerability of juveniles as opposed to adults and lestimates on hunter selectivity of sexes. We had planned on obtaining 200 wings from mallards in each of the seven study units (1,400 Wings) but our survey fell short of this quota with 739 wings collected. We compared our results with those from the Bureau survey but found we would have to com ine some of our management units because the Bureau survey is conducted on county basis and our study units do not always conform to county bou"2daries. Comparison between the two surveys is shown in Table 9. Results of ~hi-square tests on data in each group varied from an indication of a sig~ificant difference between surveys (Units 1 and 2) to a suggested strong relationship between surveys (Units 3, 4 and 6). As a last resort, to get a set lof data to compare with direct recovery data when they become available, we ·ombined both surveys as shown in Table 10. 1 AH1P oximately 26 percent of birds in the bag were indicated to have been i tures. With this percentage corrected for juvenile vulnerability, if such sti 1 existed in Colorado at the time of our hunting season, the portion of young in the population may have been even less than the indicated 26 percent. AboJt 32 percent of the birds trapped by all methods post-season in 1964-65 �- 158 Table 9.--Age and sex composition of mallards bagged in eastern Color do in the 1964 hunting season from state and federal wing surv ys. Colorado Waterfowl Management Unit 1 and 2 Number Wings Examined Agency Sample Adult Male Percent of SamEle Adult Immature Innnature hi Male Female Female s uare 184 217 State Federal 66.85 52.07 14.67 18.69 4 10.33 14.29 8.15 14.75 P 3, '4 and 6* 410 572 State Federa1* 60.73 56.12 16.34 18.88 11.23 11.71 11.71 13.29 20 51 State Federal 50.00 60.78 20.00 5.88 10.00 21.57 0"Q2** .26 df P 9 I J.69 ~ d'f 20.00 11.76 1 0.,3 .92 .df P - 0.~9 10, 12 .and 13 125 179 State Federal 55.20 40.78 17.60 24.02 11.20 15.64 16.00 19.55 P * ** r· 26 df O.~O Includes all of Morgan County portion of Management Unit 2 Denotes significant difference Table 10.--Age and sex composition of mallards bagged in eastern Col0 ado in the 1964 hunting season from state and federal wing combined. Colorado Waterfowl Management Unit Number Wings Examined 1 and 2 401 58.85 16.96 12.47 11.72 0.32 3.41 1.06 3, 4 and 6-!( 982* 58.04 17.82 12.63 11.51 0.32 3.26 1.10 9 71 57.74 9.86 18.31 14.08 0.48 5.86 1.30 10, 12 and 13 304 46.71 21.38 18.09 13.82 0.47 2.18 1.31 1,758 56.26 17.92 13.77 12.06 0.35 3.14 1.14 Total "J~ Percent of SamEle Adult Adult Immature Immature Female Male Female Male Immature! Adult Ratio Includes all of Morgan County portion of Management Unit 2 from Bu'reau survey �- 159 - were imrnatures but our trapping ratios, from cage-type traps especially, were thought biased to a great degree (Funk 1965b). Some of the birds were captured in~d:mnon-nets and the indication was that about 50 percent of the birds in the Fort Collins and Greeley-Fort Morgan units were immature. Bonny Reservoir sh ;d only about 18 percent immatures. At least another year of·concentrated win collection and trapping in the.management units will be needed in order to f rm any conclusions on actual age ratios of birds present in Colorado durirg hunting season. Relative male-female ratios are also presented in Table 10 by age. In most areas the ratio of adult males to adult females is quite high and averages over 3 males to each female bagged. The average male-female ratio for imrnatures was uggested to be 1.14:1. The latter seems more correct than the adult ratios. Again, it would be difficult to compare these data with trapping data because of the bias in trapping methods. We banded about 4.3 adult males to every adult female but we released a fair number of adult males without banding them so we would not exceed our quotas of 1,000 birds banded in each unitL before we trapped as many immatures and adult females as feasibly possible (Fu~k 1965b). We also banded two immature males per immature female in 196~-65 but released no young birds without banding them. Ratios from cannonnettling revealed quite another set of figures which do seem in order throughout. The average relative ratio of adult males to females in seven catches was only 2.03:1 and the rate for immatures was 1:1 males to females. In addition, the ratio of males to females, ages combined, was 1.46:1 or about 60 percent males. This is almost the exact ratio of males to females found in every study unit duri g the time of banding as determined from sex ratio ground counts. It see~s that valid sex ratio estimates should be obtained through cannon-netting eff~rts but this may not be true for age ratios. More information in the fut~re on all types of age and sex determination surveys will be needed to decOde which methods yield the most valid data. �- 160 - REFERENCES Funk, H.D. 1964. Winter duck banding in eastern Colorado. and Parks Dept. Game Res. Rept. Oct. pp. 79-87. Dept. 1965a. Wintering du~k flock census. Game Res. Rept. Oct .. In press. Colo. Gare, Fish Colo. Game, Fish ahd Parks ______ ~~. 1965b. Winter duck banding in eastern Colorado. and Parks Dept. Game Res. Rept. Oct. In Press. I Colo. Fame, Fish Grieb, J.R. and G.N. Hunter. 1965. Colorado small game hunter harvel t survey--l964. Colo. Game, Fish and Parks Dept. July 1. 23 pp. Sowls, L.K. 1955. Prairie ducks. The Stackpole Co., Harrisburg, Pa. and the Wildlife Mgmt. Institute, Wash., D.C. 193 pp. Prepared by: Howard D. Funk Approved by: Jack R. Grieb Assistant Wildlife Researcher Project Leader Date: October, 1965_ ------_ ..- ~~------- Ferd C. K1einsch itz Federal Aid coor1inator �October, 1965 - 161 - JOB COMPLETION RESEARCH of PROJECT SEGMENT COLORADO ------------------------------ Proj Work Plan No. Titl REPORT of Job: W-88-R-lO Migratory 4 Job No. Trapping Bird Investigation 3 and Banding Doves I Peri d Covered: Pers 'nnel: April 1, 1964 through March 31, 1965. u.S. Game Management Agents Jack Frost and Charles Hayes and Howard Funk, Department of Game, Fish and Parks. ABSTRACT Two-'undred and sixteen flying mourning doves and ten nestlings were banded from July 9-15 in southeastern Colorado. Of these, 166 were captured in weldedwire, bait traps and 50 were caught in mist nets. Thirty-two of the 216 flying birds were adults and 184 were immature doves. Peak of hatching, estimated by use ~f primary feather molt data, was calculated to have occurred between June 3 and June 6. Eigh~y-One bagged doves were examined in southeastern Colorado between September £-10 by U.S. Game Management Agent Frost. Only 19 or about 23 percent of thesk were immature birds. By back-dating from wing primary feather molt examlOnation, peak of hatching of these immature doves was indicated to have been about July 30. The peak of egg laying would have been two weeks prior or arout July 15 which agrees closely with observations of nests made during the trapping period. Virtually all immature doves in the bag sample were secord clutch birds. Indications resulting from data collected this year are as fb1lows: (1) Young doves of the first clutch migrated out of the area earl, (2) Nesting success of the second clutch was poor, (3) There was no infl x of young birds of first hatches into southeastern Colorado through the first ten days of September, and (4) About 95 percent of all doves hatched in southeastern Colorado were on the wing by the September 1 opening season date. Recopmendations: . It is recommended that during the next segment, every effort be made to reach the goal of 2,000 doves banded during the pre-hunting season and that these birds be banded in various areas within Colorado. Also, at least 500 nestling sho ld be banded in one of the most promising areas, probably in the vicinity of Pjritchett, so that these known-age birds can be used in a primary feather mold study when trapped again after fledging. Bagged birds should be examined I �- 162 .by State and Federal officers and biologists in the field during hunting eason for primary feather molt in order to determine age and sex ratios of birds in the bag, validity of the wing method of ageing young birds, and to estimate periods of hatching and ages of young birds in the bag. Wings should be ol1ected when possible and labeled with date and location of collection. I Objectives: (1) To locate areas in Colorado water in sufficient numbers (2) To trap and band as many doves as possible within the allotted time east and west of the Continental Divide for the purpose of obtaining migrJtion, iife history and annua1'morta1ity information, (3) To determine State, and (4) To evaluate the effects of hunting seasons in Colorado on the dove population by age, sex, and period. migration where mourning doves congregate for food and to warrant concentrated trapping efforts routes and wintering areas of doves raised in the and the other areas Procedures: Mourning doves were banded in July in the vicinity of Pritchett, Colorado in Baca County. The pre-season trapping was a cooperative effort between St~te and Federal Game Management Agents to fulfill a quota of 2,000 banded f1y~ng doves. This quota was set by Federal dove biologists at the Migratory Bi~d Population Station in Laurel, Maryland (Wight, 1963). The Pritchett area was chosen because it was considered good nesting territory and numerous aban oned farms offer good trapping sites for congregating doves. Trapping was not attempted in other areas in Colorado by State personnel due to lack of time, but Federal Agent Charles Hayes banded some doves near Longmont in Boulde County in mid-July. . Two types of traps were employed in the Pritchett area; cage-type bait tra sand mist nets. The bait traps were constructed of 1 by 2 inch welded wire, 3 feet square by I foot high. Two small wire tunnel entrances were attached to o~posite sides of each trap near a corner. A door was cut in the top of each trap for easy removal of captured birds. The wire traps were placed on the gro nd in cleared areas near watering sites or in groves of trees inhabited by ro st~ ing doves. Wheat was used for bait. Care was taken to situate the traps out of reach of livestock either by careful selection of sites or by building exclosures al ound the traps. Most of the trap sites were visited twice a day, in morning anr late afternoon, to remove trapped birds. Traps located in sunny sites were also checked during mid-day. . I Mist nets were 6 feet high and approximately 35 feet long with net mesh abput 3/4 inch square. Lightweight pipe was used to hold the nets. The nets were placed in dove flight lanes in groves of trees and also around one stock prud. When possible, doves were driven toward the nets in attempts to make large catches. �- 163 Nestling areas were visited periodically during the trapping period and obser.vat~ons were made on nesting activity. Nestlings about seven days old or older wer~ banded. Legs on doves younger than seven days were considered too small to Hold a band. Tra~ped d~ves were aged and the adults were sexed. Characteristics of immaturity are IsmaIl size of the birds and white tipping of most feathers which are gradually eplaced by adult-type feathers as molt progresses (Fish and WildlifeServic ,1964). Immature doves are not easily sexed without internal examination so he young birds were not sexed. The top and back of the head of an adult mal is bluish-grey and the breast and throat is washed with a pinkish hue. Adu t females have a brown or greyish-brown head while the throat and breast is These characteristics were employed in sexing the trapped adults. Win~s of all captured birds were examined for primary feather mol t which enabled us 0 estimate age of the young doves. The method is also described in the pam hlet by the Fish and Wildlife Service (1964). Studies in Indiana indicate tha wild immature doves'molt their primaries at the following average rate: 1st primary shed at 32 days of age; 2nd at 38 days, 3rd at 45 days; 4th at 54 daY 5th at 63 days; 6th at 72 days; 7th at 85 days; 8th at 102 days; 9th at 127 days and the 10th at 133 days (Allen, 1963). These data were employed in est' ating the period of hatching in this study by back-dating captured young dov s from date of capture to date of hatching. Numbers of doves hatched each day were then plotted on a graph to estimate the rise, peak and decline of hatching activity. $; During the hunting season, Agent Jack Frost collected age and sex ratio data and i.nformation on primary feather molt by examining bagged doves in southeastern Colorado. These data also were studied to estimate age of immature doves in the bag, the value of the wing ageing technique during hunting season, and the percenttge of nestling birds in the population in September. FinJings: Pr t Area - A total of 216 flying mourning doves were trapped and banded nea Pritchett from July 9 through July 15 (Table 1). Of these, 50 were caught in ist nets and 166 in bait traps. Thirty-two (14.8 percent) of the doves were adults and 184 (85.2 percent) were immatures. The preponderance of young birds in the sample was expected as the young birds congregate in areas where food, water and roosting sites are readily available and traps were placed in these areas o Tab1 Date 7/9 I 7/10 7/11 7/12 7/13 7/1.4 7/15 Tota~s 1. ~- Number of doves captured near Pritchett by age, sex and trap type, r: 1964. Trap Type Mist Net Bait Trap 4 12 1 8 23 4 21 18 18 44 2 39 0 50 22 166 Adult Male Female 2 6 1 2 8 2 1 22 1 1 0 3 2 2 1 10 Immature Daily Totals Running Totals 5 26 18 21 57 8 33 19 26 67 41 22 216 8 41 60 86 153 194 216 216 37 20 18/+ �- 164 Trapping in the Pritchett area was less successful than anticipated. Some of the watering places we had counted on for trap sites were dry. Presence of cattle at one of the stock ponds seemed to inhibit trapping success even though a fence was built to keep the cattle away from the traps. A heavy rain ormed many water puddles in the area which in turn decreased trapping success s many of the doves watered at these puddles instead of at the more permanent wttering sites where traps were located. Numbers of doves captured daily in bait traps were not consistent as many of the doves seemed to move to other areas a ter a few days of trapping activity. Consequently new trap sites had to be 10 ated frequently. Often little interest was shown in wheat used for bait even though many birds were present. Best trapping results were obtained by placing traps in clear areas in groves of trees used by resting doves. The technique of drive-trapping doves into mist nets in groves of trees as tried with only fair success. Ideal sites were few in number and the bi~dS often vacated an area after several drives. The reason drives were made instead of merely letting birds fly into the nets in their normal daily ac ivities was that the latter method requires almost constant attention to the net ; time which was not available because bait traps also had to be checked. ThUS by driving the birds toward the net, it is possible to capture a fair numbe of birds at ideal sites, remove and band them, and run other traps during t e interval in which the birds filter back to the mist netting site. Mist ~et.s also were strung around a stock tank frequented by many doves but about ten larks and sparrows were caught for every trapped dove. Time involved in removing these song birds, which became very badly entangled, was too cost~y to continue the metho.d. t Results of the wing primary feather mold survey for the purpose of ageinf immature doves are shown in Table 2. The greatest number of birds had a " " molt. This is partly due to the comparatively long period of approximately 16 ays between fledging and loss of the first primary feather. These birds coutd have been as young as 14 days or as old as about 30 days. Average days betwern successive primary feather molts range in length from only three to nine days for birds between a "1" molt and a "6" molt. Therefore fewer numbers of birds are present in each of these categories than in the "0" molt class for t is period of trapping. Table 2. -- Wing primary feather molt sequence for immature doves, Pritc ett area, 1964. Last Primary Feather Molted Number Captured 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0 1 Date 1 5 7/9 7/10 7/11 7/12 7/13 7/14 7/15 26 18 21 57 37 20 Totals 184 4 8 1 3 23 12 8 4 3 6 1 6 3 5 6 3 3 1 1 1 63 14 47 28· 22 7 3 5 9 3 2 5 2 3 I 6 7 7 13 12 2 1 5 �- 165 There seems to be some discrepancy in Table. 2 regarding number of birds observed with only the first primary molted. Possibly some birds with a "1" molt were recorred as a "0" molt, especially during the first three days of trapping. If so, tris was probably due to hurried examination of wings. Extreme care must be taken in differentiation between the first primary and tenth secondary feathers "in or~er to correctly classify a bird into the "1" molt category. However, the perio between average time it takes for a dove to progress from latter stages of a '0" molt to a "2" molt is comparatively short and therefore the number of birds in this class usually will be smaller than in other classes. Estim tes of progression of mourning dove hatching in the Pritchett area indicat~d that the bulk of first clutch hatching was between about April 26 and July ~ with the peak occurring about June 3 (Figure 1). The actual peak of h.atChrng was possibly somewhat distorted and a few days later because of error in di tinguishing "1" molt birds as stated previously. . . Eight -one bagged doves were examined during hunting season in southeastern Co10r'do by Agent Frost (Table 3). Only 19 (23 percent) of these were immature birds and 62 (77 percent) were classed as adults. The ratio of young to adults (0.31:1) in the bag is considered extremely low. The reason for the skewed ratio is probably due to several things. Table 3. Number, age, sex and wing molt data of mourning doves bagged in southeastern Colorado, 1964. Date Bagge Area 9/5 Bent County 9/5 9/6 Baca County Prowers County Sample Number Age Sex 13 5 4 Ad. Ad. Imm. M F 2 1 2 Ad. Ad. Imm. M F 9 M F 6 Ad. Ad. Imm. 3 1 3 Ad. Ad. Imm. M F 12 8 4 Ad. Ad. Imm. M F 39 23 19 Ad. Ad. Imm. M 8 9/8 9/10 Total Prowers County Bent County ? 0 1 1 2 ? 6 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 4 1 4 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 3 7 8 3 2 1 1 14 20 1 11 6 3 5 1 1 2 1 F 3 1 4 4 3 4 1 1 1 ? ? 6 3 2 ? ? Primary Feather Molt 2 3 4 5 6 Z 8 9 10 �- 166 Young-of-the-year doves can be identified by white tipping of feathers, especially the primary coverts, until the eighth or ninth primaries are molted; usually the ninth but depending on the individual bird and environmental condit ons , As can be seen in Table 3, only 8 of the 81 doves had an "8" molt and none had a higher molt. Thus, not more than 10 percent of the 81 birds could have been misaged and classed as adults when they were actually immatures. Possibly the number of mis-aged and immature birds was negligible because no immature birds were found in the "6" and "7" molt category. We can therefore conclude that virtually all immature doves in the bag were second clutch birds. This points ou~ the possibility that the second hatch of the year was poor which would cont~ibute to the'low percentage of immatures in the bag. Also, the indication th~t probably no first clutch birds were present in the bag supports the theory of early migration of immature doves. Absence of first clutch immatures would aiso contribute greatly to the low ratio of young per adult in the bag. The fadt that the sample size of 81 bagged doves was quite small could have lead to s~me misconception of the collected data. However, it is believed that cause of the poor age ratio in the bag sample was a combination of all the reasons g ven above. The areas in which bag checks were made probably were not those in whic.l immature doves congregate after fledging or the percentage of young in the bag sJmple would have been much higher. This would also rule out the sampled areaJ as being attractive to migrant immatures from other states or other areas within Colorado. For best results in interpreting data on age ratios in the kill, records should be kept on the type of area in which the bag sample was ¢aken; whether the location is considered primarily a nesting area or whether Hood, water and roosting sites are readily available such as in areas usually associated with large gatherings of immature birds. This information is not vailable for the 1964 sample but will be gathered in the future. Wing molt data from bagged immature doves was back-dated to determine a~es and period and peak of hatch of second clutch birds in the study area. Alt~ough the sample of 19 birds is very small, the estimated period of hatching as fairly well defined and fits smoothly with the period of first clutch h~tching (Figure 2). Peak of second clutch hatching is considered to have occur ed near July 30. Peak of egg laying would have taken place two weeks earlier 0 about July 15 which agrees quite well with our observations of nesting activi y during the trapping period. At that time, July 7-15, only ten nestlings seven days old or older were banded. Many nests were checked and most contained only eggs while a few had young dove~, many of which were too small to band. 1 The decline in second clutch hatching can also be examined from the dat~ in Figure 2 and Table 3 and an estimate can be made of the percentage of n stlings present in the population by opening date of hunting season on Septembe 1. From the limited sample of 19 immature birds in the bag, it was estimat d that about 20 percent of second clutch birds hatched between August 6 and Au~ust 24. However, due to the fairly long interim between fledging and loss of fiJistprimary feathers, it is difficult to assign an accurate age to "0" molt doves without consideration of such factors as weight of the birds and length of primary feathers (Hanson and Kossack 1963). This was not attempted thi year. Therefore it is believed that the slope of decline in hatching activity Idips in a manner similar to that which was drawn in Figure 2. This indicates tHat approximately 90 percent of second clutch birds had hatched by two weeki prior to September I or that 90 percent of second clutch birds were on the wing by �- 167 openin~1date of season as it takes from 12 to 14 days for nestlings to leave the ne t , Thus, roughly 95 percent of all first and second clutch birds were flying by September 1. A larger sample of bagged immature doves will be obtained over a longer period during September, 1965 to study this theory more closel • No wort was accomplished this year on determining migration routes and wintering ar~as of doves raised in Colorado. Relatively few doves have been banded in Colbrado to date. Tabulation of recovery data will be delayed until a few years f more concentrated banding has been accomplished and recoveries are report1ed. However, it was shown that first clutch immature birds seem to migratje early as previously described in this report. Effects of hunting seasons in Colorado on the dove population by age, sex and period has yet to be evaluated. A review of numbers of doves harvested annually and nu ber of hunters afield as determined from past small game harvest questionnaires has been initiated. To complete a more comprehensive evaluation of this, hunter success will be sampled in the field. Also, age and sex ratio data and infor~ation on age of immatures from wing molt surveys of bagged birds will add to th~ overall evaluation. The only recent data gathered on the subject of effects of harvest on the dove population concern age and sex ratios in the limited sample of 81 birds bagged in 1964 (Table 3). The age ratio of bagged birds was 0.31:1 immatures per adult. Males in the bag were in greater number than females by a ratio of 1.70:1. Results of data concerning periods of dove migration through Colorado as aclomplished in previous years (Sandfort 1963 and Funk 1964) also can be employed in the study and the job probably should be re-activiated to cover the intensive study period. Indications of the migration study were that about 60 percent of all doves had left Colorado shortly after September 1. Most doves ere found to have gone by the end of September with the majority of fairl~ good hunting terminating two weeks after opening day. Longmont Area -- Agent Hayes banded 48 doves near Longmont in Boulder County from July 18-23, 1964 (Table 4). Of these, 26 (54 percent) were immature birds and 24 (46 percent) were adults. Wing molt data, when back-dated, indicatE1d that about 43 days had elapsed since peak of hatching. Estimated peak of hadching would have then been about June 8 and very similar to the peak near Pritchett. Table 4. Number, age, sex and wing molt data of mourning doves captured near Longmont in Boulder County, 1964. Date I Number Captured Capturled Adult Male Female Immature Primary Feather Molt (Immatures) 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 7/18 7/19 7/20 7/21 7/22 7/23 9 14 9 11 2 3 7 2 2 4 0 2 0 0 3 2 0 0 2 12 4 5 2 1 2 1 Totalsl 48 17 5 26 3 1 8 1 3 3 3 1 1 10 10 2 1 1 1 �- 168 Primary molt was examined on only four immature doves between Longmont a d Denver. Two had molted their 7th primaries and two had lost their 8th p~imary feathers. These were somewhere between 80 to 95 days old and were I obviously first clutch birds. �- 169 - REFERENCES Allen, J. M. 1963. Primary feather molt rate of wild immature doves in Indiana. Indiana Dept. of Cons., Game Research Section Circular No.4., Indianapolis. Aug. 4 pp. Funk] H. D. 1964. Dove migration investigation. Colo. Game, Fish and Parks IDept. Game Research Rept., Fed. Aid Proj. W-88-R. Oct. pp. 89-113 + 13 Fig. Hans n~ H. C. and C. W. Kossack. 1963. The mourning dove in Illinois. IDept. of Cons. Tech. Bull. No.2., Springfield. Feb. 133 pp. Ill. Sandfort, W. W. 1963. Location and census. Colo. Game, Fish and Parks Dept. IGame Research Rept., Fed. Aid Proj. W-37-R. Oct., Part 2. pp. 225-237. u.S. Fish and Wildlife Service. 1964. Field methods for age and sex determination of mourning doves. Bur. of Sport Fisheries & Wildl., Migratory Bird Pop. Sta., Laurel, Md. May. 2 pp. Wigh , H. M. 1963. The role of pre- and post-season banding in mourning dove research. Bur. of Sport Fisheries & Wildl., Migratory Bird Pop. Sta. Admin. Rept. No. 19. Feb. 28. 8 pp + 6 tables. Prepared by: Howard D. Funk Assistant Wildlife Researcher Date: -'O.•.• c;;...::t.ober. 19613 ___ Approved by: Jack R. Grieb ��october, 1965 - 171 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT StJte of Colorado .: ::J~e::a:~O~~~o~.~~W---_-88---R-_-l-:-*-------Migratory Bird Investigations Job No. I Title of Job: Evaluation of the Impact of the Narrows Project on Mlg.ratory Birds and Hunting Opportunities in the South Platte Valley, Pe iod Covered; April 1, 1964 to March 31, 1965. ABSTFACT 1. The Narrows will be located on the South Platte River about 7 miles northwest of Fort Morgan. 2. Under normal operations it will cover about 13,000 acres and eliminate 15 miles of river. 3. Wildlife losses will amount to about 9,000 acres of waterfowl production and wintering habitat and 13,000 acres of mourning dove and upland game production habitat. 4. In addition, all mourning dove, upland game and deer hunting will be eliminated in the reservoir basin, and waterfowl harvest will be reduced over that which previously existed. 5. As mitigation for these losses, we are recommending that 2,500 acres of potential leased land be purchased instead of leased, and an additional 8,500 acres of riverbottom and uplands be purchased. * This report also fulfills federal aid obligations for W-37-R-18, Work Plan 16 Job 3 (Water Resources Development Studies--Narrows Reservoir Project). Migratory bird and upland game information derived from these two jobs was combined to formulate one report. �- 172 - I 6. For enhancement of the wildlife values, we are requesting construcfion of a system of dikes in the upper end of the reservoir to retain w ter when the reservoir is drawn down for irrigation. 7. If our recommendations are followed, we will have 24,000 acres for waterfowl and upland game management in this one unit, excluding tie reservoir. 8. ,On these 24,000 acres, we propose to grow wildlife as the princiPal crop, by instituting a system of share-cropping with local farmers on s~e areas, and complete farming by our own personnel in other areas. 9. This will cost the Department over a million dollars for developmeJt during the next ten years. 10. We recommend that the area be administered by a well-trained and experienced refuge manager with at least 3 full-time assistants, and 3 seasonal assistants. 11. Annual management and maintenance costs alone are estimated to be a minimum of $100,000 annually. 12. As we visualize it, the Narrows will become a significant recreation area for the sportsmen of Colorado. �- 173 EFFECTS OF THE NARROWS UNIT ON THE WILDLIFE RESOURCE INTRODUCTION W~ldlife is an important source of recreation in and along river channels sJbjected to inundation by water development projects. The Narrows Unit, a Bjreau of Reclamation development under the South Platte Division of the M ssouri River Basin Project, is to be established on the South Platte River i .northeastern Colorado. This site is a major migratory bird and upland g~me breeding, wintering, and harvest area. Tge recreational potential of the Narrows area to the people of Colorado l~d the Colorado Game, Fish, and Parks Department into a major fact gathering m~ssion concerning the detrimental and enhancing effects of this project on t~e wildlife resource of the vicinity. These facts enabled us to prepare rjCOmmended wildlife management features proposed for a specific program of m tigation of losses and enhancement of the resource in conjunction with o lerall project plans. The basic objectives of this fact gathering assignment were (1) to determir-e losses in wildlife habitat, production, aridhunting that will result fr~m the installation of the Nar rows Unit; (2) to deter.mine probable wildIi e benefits and problems derived from the Narrows Unit; and (3) to formul te management plans and recommendations which may be incorporated into the Narrows Unit to mitigate and enhance the wildlife resource and public hurting opportunity in the South Platte Valley. woLk began on this study in April, 1964 and continued through January, 1965. Th~ term "migratory birds", as used in this report, refers only to ducks, geise, and mourning doves. Harold M. Swope, Associate Wildlife Researcher, supplied all the information in this report pertaining to upland game. His information was furnished for W-P7-R-18, Work Plan 16, Job 3 (Water Resources Development Studies--Narrows Rebervoir Project). BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF NARROWS UNIT Th Narrows Unit will be built on the South Platte River in northeastern Co~orado, beginning about 7 miles northwest of Fort Morgan and extending apprpximately 20 miles upstream (Fig. 1). This site is located near the midpo~nt of the South Platte River, below all main tributaries that originate !~kt~;e:~untains. Farming and livestock raising form the basic economy of �- 174 Major purposes of this reclamation project include storage of water ~or irrigation, flood prevention, and sediment control. Full flood and sediment control can be achieved only through the control of Bijou Creek. Th~s stream enters the South Platte River a short digt~nce below the Narrows Dam site. The most feasible method of controlling. Bfjou Creek, as proposed hy the construction agency, is to divert it from its natural channel into the ~arrows Reservoir. Diversion of Bijou Creek provides for channelization through Bijou Reservoir No.2, resulting in the abandonment of this reservoiJ. Narrows Dam will control the runoff from about 62 percent of the 24'~30 square miles within the South Platte Basin. The l42-foot high dam w'll be capable of impounding 807,000 acre-feet of water at maximum pool lev 1, resUlting in approximately 21,000 surface acres (top of flood control ~loOl_elevation 4,421 feet). Fig. 1 presents a diagram of Narrows Dam, sh wing pool elevations and capacities. Frequency studies conducted by the onstruction agency indicate that the flood control space will be filleq only once in about 100 years. Further information regarding the operatiort of pool levels from year to year and from season to season was not avaiIable for inclusion in this report. Rights-of-way (take-line) to be purchased at the reservoir site by t e construction agency include 26,150 acres of land and the improvements tqereon (Plate I). This total includes about 8,000 acres of irrigated cropldnd, 6,700 acres of dry cropland, and 11,450 acres not suitable for cropp~ng. Flood easements will be obtained on about 2,500 acres of land lying bove the take-line but within the top of the flood control pool. No buil ings in the flood easement area will be used for human occupancy. Four irrigation reservoirs border the Narrows site (Plate I). Bijou IReservoir No.2 and Jackson Lake Reservoir lie in Morgan County, one to t1e south and one to the north of the Narrows site. Empire Reservoir is located on the south side of the South Platte River in both Morgan and Weld 9ounties. Riverside Reservoir is found on the north side of the river, about 5 miles nor t hwe st;of Empire Reservoir. The latter two bodies of water are 11 cated at the upper end of the Narrows site. A more detailed description of the Narrows Unit may be found in the ~ureau of Reclamation report. WILDLIFE VALUES Without Narrows Unit Detrimental effects of the Narrows Unit on wildlife will be greatest in that area below the top of the joint-use pool (elevation 4,399 feet) beca~se of frequent inundations (Plate I). Losses above this level will probab~y be slight due to infrequent inundations, with the exception of Bijou Reservoir No. 2 which will be abandone~ as ~ resu~t of the ins~allation of the lNarrows Unit. Therefore, the follow1ng d1scuss10n will cons1der only that a~ount of wi ldlife hab Lt at , production, harvest, and hunter-use wh Lch occurs b low the top of the joint-use pool. �Freeboard 6 feet Top of Surcharge - Max WS Surcharge 22 feet (610,000 A.F.) ~f Flood Control Pool-El.4,42l Flood Control Pool 22 feet .(380,000 A.F.) Top of Joint Use Storage-El. 4,399 Top of Active Cgnservatiop Shpraq - E1a 4. <2J * «-.Iv .•..•....... w_ ---"-q- 807,000 A.F. -" > 427,000 A.F. ctive Conservation Storage 42 feet (300,000 A.F.) 352,000 A.F._ l-' --J V1 ~of Iu.ctive Storage - El. 4,35 • Mctive 36 feet (51,700 A.F. ) ~of Dead Storage - We' ~,<.« .Jt ,~ STREAMBED Streambed - El Figure 52,000 A.F. l.--Narrows Dam, showing pool elevations and capacities. �- 176 Only migratory birds and upland game values are discussed in the fOllowrong sections. Big game and fur animal values are considered to be low in t e Narrows area for various reasons. Both mule deer and white-tailed deer inhabit the riverbottom, but their numbers are restricted due to a limited quality and quantity of habitat and to heavy human pressures being brought against them. Several species of fur animals occur in the Narrows areal,but their value is limited because of Low pelt prices. Habitat Migratory birds.--The South Platte Valley occupies a unique position in regard to migratory bird habitat because it provides several important types. Ducks find attractive breeding habitat on ponds, marshes, and riverbot~om seeps and sloughs. Nesting habitat is found adjacent to the above wat r areas and in riverbottom meadows. Large lakes and reservoirs, river cannels, and warm-water seeps and sloughs supply major resting habitat for wint ring ducks and geese throughout the Valley. Numerous harvested corn and sm~llgrain fields furnish wintering waterfm.,l with feeding habitat. Mourning doves find breeding habitat throughout the South Pla~te ValleYj' mostly in the form of farm windbreaks and riverbottoms. Riverbottoms provide resting habitat for doves in the late summer, prior to and during migration. Feeding habitat consists of grain fields, fallow cropland, add I waste areas. The Narrows area, although only a relatively small portion of the enti e South Platte Valley, furnishes all of the various types of migratory bOrd habitat mentioned above. Therefore, it is considered a major segment f the South Platte Valley in regard to importance as migratory bird habitat. Table I ShO~lSacres and miles of migratory bird habitat within the Narrows Reservoir site below the top of the joint-use pool. Total acreage of ~aterf ow I habitat amounts to 8,926.3, of whf ch 6,451.3 acres occur as wetlands. Bijou Reservoir No. 2 is above the top of the joint-use pool but is ind1uded in these figures because it will be destroyed by the Narrows Unit. ThJ 2,475 acres of corn and small grains represent an acreage which producJs waste grain capable of feeding approximately 15,000 ducks during the winter. The entire 13,312 acres below the top of the joint-use pool is conside~ed mourning dove habitat. The areas of high quality are riverbottom timber, waste areas, small-grain fields, and fallow cropland. Upland game.--The majority of pheasant and cottontail rabbit rang, and all of the bobwh i.t e quail habitat in Horgan County, occurs along the i~rigated South Platte Valley. The association of riverbottom timber and orush with small grain and corn fields provides some fine production and suryival cover for these upland game species. Within the area below the top of the joint-use pool, pheasants seek wilter shelter in the woody thickets and heavy herbaceous cover. They nest pfimarily in the small-grain and alfalfa fields and along the numerous ditchb8r.k~. Feeding, loafing, roosting, and brood rearing are found over the entir~ area. �- 177 Table 1.--Acres and miles of migratory bird habitat within the Narrows I Reservoir site below the top of the joint-use pool (elevation 4,399 feet). Acres Miles Value WATERFOl-lL Ponds and Marshes Riverbottom Pasture Riverbottom Timber River Channel Ditches and Canals :Bijou Reservoir-No. 2* High Moderate High High High Moderate 6,451.3 Sub-total (wetlands) Corn Fields Small-Grain Fields MOU 640.6 1,827.4 2,270.1 457.2 340.0 916.0 High High 15.25 28.33 43.58 1,930.0 545.0 Sub-total (uplands) 2,475.0 TOTAL 8,926.3 43.58 ING DOVES Riverbottom Timber Haste Areas Small-Grain Fields Fa lIow Cropland Remainder of Area Below Top of Joint-Use Pool** TOTAL High High High High Lou 2,270.1 95.0 545.0 ,451.0 9,950.9 13,312.0 * I Not within the top of the joint-use pool but it -Hill be abandoned as a ** result of the installation of Narrows Unit. Includes acreage in roads, farmlots, and other croplands. Co~tontail rabbits may be seen anywhere within the area but their population de~sities are greatest in the riverbottom locations. BobHhite quail are norrmally found within or adjacent to the river-channel vegetation, but occasi nally they inhabit the wooded areas associated with farmlots. Ta~le 2 shows the relative value by acres and miles of the various upland ga~e habitats occupying the area that will be inundated by the Narrows Unit. A1~ but 1,827 acres of the riverbottom pasture is considered high to moderat~ value pheasant habitat. Approximately two-thirds of the area below the top,of the joint-use pool is rated moderate to high value habitat for cottonI ta~l rabbits, and about 60 percent of this area has been assessed a comparabte value for bobwh Lt;e quail. �- 178 Table 2.--Acres and miles of upland game habitat within the Narrows Reservoir site below the top of the joint-use pool (elevatio 4,399 feet). Acres Habitat Value PHEASANTS Ponds and Marshes Riverbottom Pasture Riverbottom Timber River Channel Ditches and Canals Corn Fields Small-Grain Fields Fallow Cropland Alfalfa Haste Remainder of Area Be Low Top of Joint-Use Pool* TOTAL High Low High High High High High Moderate High High l10derate to High 640.6 1,827.4 2,270.1 457.2 340.0 1,930.0 545.0 1- 15 .25 2$.33 l~51.0 1,203.0 95.0 3,552.7 13,312.0 COTTONTAIL RABBITS Riverbottom Timber River Channel Ditches and Canals Riverbottom Pasture Corn Fields Small-Grain Fields Alfalfa Haste Areas Remainder of Area Below Top of Joint-Use Pool* High Hi8h High Moderate Moderate l10derate High High Moderate to LmV' 2,270.1 457.2 340.0 1,327.4 1,930.0 545.0 1,203.0 ·95.0 4,644.3 13,312.0 TOTAL 1- 1p.25 2~.33 43.58 BOBHHITE QUAIL Ponds and Marshes Riverbottom Pasture Riverbottom Timber River Channel Ditches and Canals Corn Fields Small-Grain Fields Haste Areas Remainder of Area Below Top of Joint-Use Poo1* Hoderate Hoderate High High l10derate Moderate High High Low TOTAL * Includes acreage in roads,farm1ots 640.6 1,827.4 2,270.1 457.2 340.0 1,930.0 545.0 95.0 5,206.7 13,312.0 and other croplands. 15.25 8.33 l1.53 �- 179 Prqduction Migratory birds.--The waterfowl breeding population of the South Platte Va ley has increased in recent years to an estimated 10,500 pairs of ducks in 1964, making it the third most important breeding grounds in Colorado. Ma lards and blue-winged teals usually constitute over 90 percent of this to al. Breeding Canada geese are found mostly in the area surrounding Deiver. An estimated 248 breeding pairs of ducks utilized the Narrows site as breeding an& nesting habitat in 1964 (Table 3). Mallards accounted for 206 pairs, or about 83 percent of the total. B Lua-wi.nged teals, gadwa l l,s , and COmmon merga~sers constituted the remaining 42 pairs, or 17 percent of the total. Th~se ducks raised an estimated 992 young to the flight stage. An estimated average of 370 breeding pairs of mourning doves have inhabited the area below the top of the joint-use pool each year since 1954. This results in an average annual production of about 1,202 young doves of flying age. Table 3.--Numbers of breeding pairs of migratory birds and estimated ar.nual production of young tvithin the Nar rows Reservoir site below the top of the joint-use pool (elevation 4,399 feet). Spel Les Estimated Number of Breeding Pairs Per Year Percent of Total Estimated Number of Young Raised to Flying Age Per Yezr 206 26 8 8 83.1 10.5 3.2 3.2 824 104 32 32 248 100.0 992 370 100.0 1,202 Mal\ard B lub-tvinged Teal Gadwall Common Merganser I l:TAL (waterfowl) Mou ing Dove I Upland game.--Pheasant spring breeding populations in the Narrows .area havf, been measured by crowing counts and sex ratio surveys since 1955. Normally these inventory techniques are used only to obtain indices to populati0r. fluctuations, however, fairly accurate census determinations can be der~ved from these data. Using the 9 years of data gathered in the BalzacSny~er-Narrows area, we find that during the breeding season there are approeimated 6 cock pheasants per section of land. Voluminous sex ratio data fro the northeastern portion of Colorado establishes that there are normally 3 h ns per rooster going into the breeding season. After 10 years of pheasant brood surveys in the Narrows area, we know that each hen has successfully raised slightly over 4 young to an average of 8 weeks of age. Placing these figures in a simple formula He can make the fo11m-7ing calculations whi h will yield the average annual number of pheasants produced below the top of the joint-use pool. �- 180 P = CHYS Where: P = Average fall pheasant population on area below top of joint-use pool C = Number of cocks per section during spring breeding H = Number of hens per cock entering spring breeding y = Number of young produced to near maturity per hen S = Number of sections below top of jOint-use pool P = 6 cocks X 3 hens/cock X 4 young/hen X 21 sections Fall population = 1,512 pheasants No such population information is available for cottontail rabbits and bobwhite quail, so we will rely completely on harvest data for these spec'es. Migratory Bird Wintering Populations ~I The South Platte Valley is the major duck wintering area in Colorado, ith concentrations of up to 300,000 ·insome years. During recent years th's number has dropped to about 150,000 as a result of low production on t e Canadian breeding grounds. Hintering ducks find an abundant food supply in the form of irrigated corn. Resting places are found on numerous l~kes and reservoirs and on many miles' of riverbottom. At least 95 percent f the duck population is composed of mallards, with green-winged teals, pint ils, and American widgeons constituting most of the remaining percentage. Canada goose concentrations are not as great as those in southeastern Colorado, but numbers have been increasing in the So~th Platte Valley or the past several years. Wintering goose populations now number around 1,000 to 1,500 birds. There are 3 main waterfowl concentration areas in the South Platte Vall~ey: (1) riverbottoms, lakes, and reservoirs, between Denver and Greeley; (~) riverbottoms, lakes, and reservoirs of the Narrows area; and (3) riverEottoms, lakes, and reservoirs between Brush and Julesburg. These areas lie ad'acent to the best corn-producing land in Colorado. The Narrows area generally supports about one-fourth of the total South Platte Valley wintering duck population and about one-third of the can~da goose population. Table 4 shows annual January waterfowl counts in th Narrows area from 1953 to 1965. Birds found on the four nearby irrigatio reservoirs are included in these figures because of their close associati[n with the Narrows riverbottom. These reservoirs simply provide sanctuaries tor waterfowl during the hunting season. Fo Ll.owi.ngthe close of the huntil~g season, most ducks move into the riverbottom where they are usually count d during January inventories. The riverbottom is normally preferred ove reservoirs as wintering habitat because it provides more open water and a greater degree of protection from 10'" temperatures and cold winds. An average annual population of 37,881 ducks and 22l~ Canada geese util ze the Narrows area as wintering habitat. The high duck count of 137,500 in 1.957 is probably the result of 2 factors. All of the reservoirs in th Narrows �- 181 Tablr 4.--Annual January inventories of waterfowl in the Narrows area, 19531965. ear Number of Haterfowl Counted Ducks Geese 953 ~954 ~955 f956 957 958 ~959 960 lL961 £962 963 ~964 65 35,000 41,100 32;,200 24,500 137,500 22,000 42,675 12,570 34,500 20,400 19,200 33,810 37,000 181 110 200 150 373 309 80 517 310 0 0 235 450 AI erage 37,881 224 t r area~ except Riverside, were closed to hunting during the season of 1956-1957 to p ovide safe resting areas, and to hold more ducks in the country. Apparentl this objective was achieved. An expected increase in the duck population due to favorable breeding-ground conditions in 1956 is the other possible l reasin for the high duck count in January of 1957. Mour~ing doves do not winter in the South Platte Valley. Most doves leave northern Colorado by the first or second week in September. I Harv~st and Hunter-Use I Migratory birds.--The South Platte Valley is the most important duck harvest area in Colorado. This is to be expected, since this region supports mor~ wintering ducks than any other area of the State. An average of 66,500 duc~s are harvested annua11Y'in the South Platte Valley, with the following cou~lties contributing to this kill: Adams, Logan, Morgan, Sedgwick, Washington, and l-leld.This harvest amounts to about 40 percent of the State total. Mal~ards make up 90 percent or more of the total bag of ducks. The average num~er of duck hunters is about 9,500 each year. Ducks are hunted around lak~s and reservoirs, and on open ponds and marshes, but most of the harvest occ~rs in the riverbottom during stormy weather. Goo e harvest in the South Platte Valley is not nearly as great as that in sou heastern Colorado, but the kill averages about 1,500 annually in the comities listed above. The number of goose hunters ave rage.s about 2,175 each yea~. Interest in this sport appears to be increasing each year in the South PIa te Valley. Most geese are harvested in fields by experienced hunters. Ann al mourning dove harvest in the 6-county area of the South Platte Valley amo nts to an average of 39,000. This kill is obtained each year by an aveJage of 4,500 hunters. Dove hunting is largely restricted to the first �- .JB2 - week in September because cool weather generally forces the birds south. Hunting takes place near sources of water, in harvested grain fields, rnd on fallol-Jcropland containing sunfLowers , Table 5 shows the contribution that the Narrows area makes t oward the total migratory bird harvest and hunter-use in the South Platte Valley. Duck harvest in the Narrows site averages. about 7,900 annually, or almost 12 percent: of the total South Platte Valley kill. An estimated 1,106 duck hunters visit the Nar-rows area each year. This number represents 11.6 percentl of the South Platte Valley total. Hunters obtain most of their ducks along the river channel and from warm-water sloughs and seep ditches in the riv~rbottom. Field and reservoir hunting is limited except on stormy days .Ioecause the ducks leave the reservoirs, feed in the fields, and return to the reservoirs again prior to and after legal shooting hours. Table 5.--Migratory bird harvest and hunter-use in the Narrows Reservo r site be Low the top of the joint-use pool (elevation 4,399 feet). I Type of Migratory Bird Average Annual Harvest Ducks Geese Mourning Doves 7,897 296 1,721 Percent of South Platte Valley Total 11.9 19.7 4.4 nt of Platte Total Average Annual Number of Hunters 1,106 405 160 Much of the riverbottom is leased for hunting by private individuals a d clubs, and these relatively few people account for a good percentage of the duck harvest in the Narrows area. Some riverbottom Landowner-s allow'p blic hunting, but these areas are usually of lower quality than leased areas. The general public finds most of its hunting in fields and around the shore of Jaclcson Lake Reservoir. For these reasons, it is believed that prLva t e lessees of riverbottom tracts are harvesting more ducks than the generlal public who make up the bulk of the 1,106 duck hunters in the Narrows area. Obviously then, the general public is not presently realizing maximum use of a public resource. Relatively few individuals are obtaining most of he benefits. J Harvest of geese in the Nar rows area amounts to an average of about 3 O birds each year, or nearly 20 percent of the South Platte Valley total. Th~s harvest is obtained by an average of 405 hunters. Most geese are harves~ed in fields and along the shore of Jackson Lake Reservoir, llith only a few Ibirds being taken in the riverbottom. For this reason, the public opportunity for bagging geese is greater than that for ducks. The public can general y obtain permission from landomlers to hunt in fields, and most of Jackson Lake Reservoir is open to public hunting. An average of 160 mourning dove hunters harvest a little over 1,700 d ves annually in the Narrows area. These figures amount to 3.6 percent of Ithe total hunters in the South Platte Valley and 4.4 percent of the harve~t. Hunting pressure and harvest are low here because doves are so wide s~read in Colorado that the large number of hunters who live in the Denver alea find �I ) - 183it unnecessary to travel much farther than their back yards to hunt doves. The public ordinarily has little trouble getting permission to hunt in grain filelds, fallol-1 fields, waste areas, or other such pLaceswher e the best hunting occurs. T~ble 6 shows the economic value of migratory bird hunting in the Narr ows area. nlese figures were obtained from a survey conducted by the Colorado G,me, Fish, and Parks Department in 1963 to determine the economic value of h~nting and fishing to the people of the State of Colorado. Money spent per irldividual, per year, represents revenue received by the businessmen and pJople of Colorado, excluding license fees. AJ estimated $106,389.11 is spent by hunters in quest of migratory birds in t~e Narrowa area each year. Duck hunters contribute most of this amount, lv~th over $71,000, or about 67 percent of the total. Goose hunters spend c ose to $31,500, or approximately one-half as much as duck hunters. Dove h nters spend the Least; amount, 'tvith less than $4,000, or 3.7 percent of the tyta1. Tal. ble 6. --Economic value of migratory bird hunting in the NarrOlvSReservoir site"belm-1 the top of the joint-use pool (elevation 4,399 feet). I True of H nter Average Number of Hunters Per Year Money Spent Per Hunter Per Year* 1,106 405 160 $6l~.26 77.43 24.74 Dhck Goose 10Urning Dove TpTAL Based on figures for 1963, excluding license Total Spent Percent of Total $ 71,071.56 31,359.15 3~958.40 66.8 29.5 3.7 $106,3139.11 100.0 fees. I Upland ga~e.--Based on a pheasant distribution and density classification ~urvey made in 1957, there are approximately 320 square miles of pheasant hab~tat in Morgan County. Most of this lies within the South Platte Valley. Re~erring to the 1963 Colorado small game hunter harvest survey, Morgan County is credited llith 5,129 pheasant hunters per year (8-year average). Thes e unters reportedly bagged an average of 8,561 pheasants each year. 1 total of 5,129 hunters equally spaced over the 320 square-mile hunting area n Horgan County yields a hunter density of 16 per square mile. By further Applying the average kill of 1. 67 birds per hunter, He see that 27 pheasants ~re taken annually (average) per square mile in Morgan County. Projecting the pressure and kill per mile to the 21 square miles to be inundated below the of the joint-use pool, there are 336 pheasant hunters that use the NarrOHS area each year to harvest 561 pheasants (Table 7). Hunter density is greater ~ear the population center of Fort Morgan than on most Horgan County lands) I but no al Lowance Has made for this in the computations. This increased density is partly compensated for by the f ew hunters who pursue pheasants on lands other than the 320 square miles considered to be fair to good pheasant fOP habitat. �- 184· The small game hunter harvest survey indicates that 2,172 cottontail rabbOt hunters annually harvest 10,071 bunnies in Morgan County (4-year average, 19551958). It is conservatively estimated that at least three-fourths of thi rabbit hunting takes place on the riverbottom of the South Platte Valley, and that the Narrows Unit comprises 30 percent of the riverbottom in Morgan County. Using the foregoing estimates, it has been calculated that 489 bbit hunters annually harvest an average of 2,266 cottontails in the Narrows servoir site below the top of the joint-use pool (Table 7). Table. 7.--Upland game harvest and hunter-use in the Narrows Reservoir sit below the top of the joint-use pool (elevation 4,399 feet). I Species Pheasant Cottontail Rabbit Bobwhite Quail = Average Annual Harvest Average Annual Number of Hunters 561 2,266 75 336 489 25 It is difficult to compute the use of the Narrows site by quail hunters b _ cause this area has only been open to bobwhite hunting the past three yea s. Prior to this time, less than 20 percent of the area occupied by quail in Morgan County was open to the hunting of this species. A Wildlife conser~ation Officer in Morgan County estimates that 25 quail hunters pursue thei quarry in the Narrows area. These hunters kill an estimated 75 birds ann ally (Table 7). I The present economic value of pheasant, cottontail rabbit, and bobwhite quail hunting in the Narrows area is shown in Table 8. An estimated $32,482.59 is spent by hunters in quest of these three upland game species each year in the area to be inundated by Narrows Reservoir. Table 8.--Economic value of upland game hunting in the Narrows Reservoir below the top of the jOint-use pool (elevation 4,399 feet). Average Number Money Spent Type of of Hunters Per Hunter Hunter Per Year Per Year'\' Total Spent Pheasant 336 $51.72 $ 17,377.92 Cottontail Rabbit 489 29.53 14,440.17 Bobwhite Quail 25 26.58 664.50 TOTAL * $ 32,482.59 Based on figures for 1963, excluding license fees. nt tal �- 185 Reference to Tables 6 and 8 reveals that an estimated total of $138,871.70 is pr~sent1y spent in the Narrows area by migratory bird and upland game hunters co~bined. It is worthy of note that the money spent by each hunter has st adi1y increased since 1956. With "Narrows Unit ThF discussion presented below concerns the expected wildlife values of the Narrows area following construction of Narrows Dam and Reservoir. These values are those which would result from the installation of the Narrows Unit aSI such, without consideration being given to wildlife management and habitat development. That is, those values which would exist without including the m'tigation of wildlife losses and the enhancement of the resource in the overall project development plans of the Narrows Unit. Habitat Migratory birds.--A total of 13,312 surface acres of water will exist in Narrows Reservoir at the top of the joint-use pool. This acreage will not c eate any critical habitat for migratory birds. Narrows Reservoir will e1imima t e certain types of habitat altogether, and that which is created will generally be of a much lower quality than that which exists in the reservoir s·te prior to inundation. W tie r fowl, breeding habitat will be non-existent because of fluctuating waterlE1velsand the absence of suitable shallow areas with shoreline vegetation. Narrows Reservoir will supply only alternative habitat for wintering waterfowl irlan area where adequate resting habitat of this type already occurs. Empire, Riverside, Jackson Lake, and Bijou reservoirs presently provide sufficient r~sting habitat for large numbers of birds during the winter. NarroHs Reservoir will simply destroy important riverbottom habitat and yield more reservJir habitat which is not needed. However, because of its large size, Nar-rows RJservoir is expected to attract birds from these and other reservoirs in the I South Platte Valley. N1rrows Reservoir will supply no waterfowl feeding habitat. Waterfowl harvest h,bitat will be limited t.othe bays and coves of Narrows Reservoir. Their value will vary from year to year, depending upon the length of time they remAin ice-free during the hunting season. A9solutely no mourning dove habitat of any kind will be present below the top of the joint-use pool. This represents a loss of 13,312 acres of mourning dive habitat. I Upland game.--No upland game habitat of any type l.•ill occur below the top of the joint-use pool in Narrows Reservoir. As with mourning doves, this rfpresents a loss of 13,312 acres of pheasant, cottontail rabbit, and bobwhite quail habitat. Poduction I Migratory birds.--Because of the absence of suitable breeding habitat, Narrows Reservoir is expected to be devoid of waterfowl production, particu1?rly after the first year or two of operation. Some production may occur at �- 186 the upper end of the reservoir as it is being filled for the first tim. This would produce areas of newly flooded land and vegetation that may attr,ct breeding ducks for a year or two, depending upon the rate of filling. ~However, we must consider the reservoir only in the light of its value for prod cing waterfowl on a long-term basis. In the years following initial inundation of the reservoir site, periodic fluctuations in water level will produce Ixtensive mudflats and prevent the establishment of desirable shoreline veg,tation. Cover for nesting and brood rearing would be absento Such conditions ill not be attractive to breeding waterfowl. Mourning dove production will be completely absent below the top of th use pool for obvious reasons. jOint- Upland game.--Production of pheasants, cottontail rabbits, and bObLhite quail will not occur below the top of the joint-use pool because breeding and nesting habitat for these species will be replaced by water and mudflat1s. Migratory Bird Wintering Populations Wintering ducks and geese will find Narrows Reservoir attractive resting habitat, especially during hunting seasons. However, as mentioned previously, this habitat will be alternative and additional to similar reservoir habitat already in existence in the area. It will be up to the ducks and geese to choose the area(s) they prefer. The only foreseeable advantage Narrows Reservoir will have over existing reservoirs is its larger size. Because of this advantage, Narrows Reservoir vlill probably attract birds from Empire, Riverside, Jackson Lake, and other Reservoirs in the South Platte Valley. When this occurs, an estimated annual population of 50,000 to 75,000 ducks and 1,000 to 1,500 geese will utilize the Narrows area in average years. During years of high production, a wintering population of up to 200,000 ducks and 5,000 geese are expected to spend the winter hereo A waterfowl population of this magnitude could cause f serious crop depredations problem on lands lying adjacent to Narrows Reservoir. Harvest and Hunter-use Migratory birds.--Following construction of Narrows Dam and Reserv~ir, wa t e rfowl, harvest is expected to decrease in the area below the top of the joint-use pool to an estimated 5,000 ducks and 200 geese. This represe ts a decrease of about 3,000 ducks and 100 geese from the harvest which presently exists. However, an anticipated increase in hunter-use will accompany Ithis decrease in harvest. Hunter-use will grow to an estimated 1,500 duck hunters and 500 goose hunters, resulting in an increase of about 400 duck hunte sand 100 goose hunters from that which presently exists. This increase will be made up of the general public. Bays and coves will supply suitable hunting spots for the public prior to the time the reservoir freezes over. t Despite the anticipated increase in hunter-use, harvest is expected to ecrease rather than increase below the top of the joint-use pool because, through inundation, Narrows Reservoir will eliminate high quality river ottorn and field hunting and replace it with low quality reservoir hunting. ~unting �- 187 sU1cess is simply much greater on riverbottoms for ~ucks and in fields for ge~se. Also, the bays and coves of Narrows Reservo~r may freeze over early an4 limit further hunting, but water areas in riverbottoms usually remain cl ar of ice all winter. An important pOint is that even though harvest and hunter-success will decrease in the area below the top of the joint-use pool, public hunting opportunity wi 1 increase somewhat. Public hunting opportunity is now limited because muJh of the riverbottom is leased for hunting by private individuals and clubs. Arias adjacent to, but. outside the reservoir site, are expected to derive some hunting benefits from the construction of Narrows Dam and Reservoir. Waterfowl harvest and hunter-use will increase on the riverbottom above and below Narrows Re~ervoir, and on the adjacent cropland, particularly when the waterfow1popu1a~ion begins to increase on the reservoir. The estimated additional waterfo~l harvest in these areas will not exceed 3,000 ducks and 100 geese, bringing thJ total estimated harvest originating from the construction of Narrows Unit tolabout 8,000 ducks and 300 geese, or essentially the same as that which presently occurs (Table 5). An additional 200 duck hunters and 100 goose huJters can be expected to utilize areas adjacent to Narrows Reservoir. Th refore, the construction of the Narrows Unit will attract an estimated 600 mOle duck hunters and 200 more goose hunters to the area, resulting in an esti ated total of about 1,700 and 600, respectively. Itlis anticipated that the"riverbottom will be leased for hunting by private individuals and clubs for a distance of approximately 10 miles above Narrgw8 Re~ervoir and 10 miles below. Such areas will be prime hunting spots, especiAlly during stormy weather when ducks seek the protection of the riverbottom. Mu~h of this bottomland is already leased for hunting purposes. Other clubs wiil be formed and attracted to this area. Individuals and clubs presently leAsing riverbottom land within the reservoir site will undoubtedly move into thJ remaining unoccupied areas above and below the reservoir. Therefore, these letsees will harvest more ducks than the general public following the consttuction of Narrows Dam and Reservoir, just as they do now. Although there will be some increase in public hunting opportunity, the percentage of the total duck harvest taken by the general public is expected to change very little following installation of the Narrows Unit. The public will still be li~ited in its use of a public resource. Movrning dove hunting will be absent in the area below the top of the jointus~ pool following installation of the Narrows Unit. In addition, no dove hu~ting benefits are anticipated on areas adjacent to, but outside the reservoir site. I Upland game.--Hunting of upland game will not exist below the top of the joint-use pool following installation of the Narrows Unit. When you remove th~ habitat, you also remove the hunting. An increase in upland game hunting betefits is not expected on areas adjacent to, but outside the reservoir site. Table 9 shows the estimated economic value of migratory bird and upland game hunting derived from the construction of Narrows Dam and Reservoir. The ecbnomic value of upland game hunting will be zero. Comparison of Tables 6, I �- 188 8 and 9 reveals that even though the economic value of migratory bird unting will increase by about $50,000 following the installation of the Narrows Unit, the overall economic value of all types of hunting will increase by oniy about $17,000. Table 9.--Estimated economic value of migratory bird and upland game hInting derived from the construction of Narrows Dam and Reservoir. Estimated Average Money Spent Type of Number of Hunters Per Hunter ~ercent Hunter Per Year Per Year* Total Spent o f Total Duck 1,700 $64.26 $109,242.00 70.2 Goose 600 17 .43 46,458.00 29.8 Mourning Dove 0 0.00 0.00 o Pheasant 0 0.00 0.00 o Cottontail Rabbit 0 0.00 0.00 o I I Bobwh Lt e Quail 0 0.00 TOTAL * o 0.00 $155 700.00 100.0 Based on figures for 1963, excluding license fees. CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS Losses Resulting From the Installation of Narrows Unit I Wildlife losses and gains resulting from the construction of Narrows D~m and Reservoir wer e compared for the area below the top of the joint-use po 1. In the final analysis, losses far ou twe Lg hed the gains. Net losses that ill be incurred are listed in the Eo lLowi.ng sections. Habitat Wildlife habitat that \'li11be lost b e Low the top of the joint-use pool includes: 1. A total of 8,926 acres of wa t erEowl habitat consisting of: a. 6,451 acres of breeding habitat. nterl.ng b. 4,554 acres of important riverbottom resting habitat for Ii' birds. c. 2,475 acres of \'linterfeeding habitat. d. 8,296 acres of high quality harvest habitat for hunting. 2. A total of 13,312 acres of mourning dove habitat consisting 0 : a. 13,312 acres of breeding habitat. I b. 2,270 acres of important riverbottom timber resting habitft. �- 189 c. d. 3. 1,091 acres of important feeding habitat. 13,312 acres of harvest habitat for hunting. A total of 13,312 acres of upland game (pheasants, cottontail rabbits, and bobwhf.t;e quail) habitat consisting of: 8. 13,312 acres of breeding and feeding habitat. b. 2,270 acres of important riverbottom timber wintering habitat. c. 13,312 acres of harvest habitat for hunting. TOfal loss of habitat for all species of wildlife combined will amount to 13,312 acres, or the entire area below the top of the joint-use pool. I Prs>duction Al wildlife production will cease below the top of the joint-use pool folIo ing inundation by Narrows Reservoir. This represents a loss in production of an estimated: 1. 2. 3. 1,000 ducks. 1,200 mourning doves. 1,500 pheasants, and undetermined numbers of cottontail rabbits and bobwhite qua Ll , Hunter-use and Harvest I All mourning dove and upland game hunting will be eliminated below the top of thk joint-use pool. This represents a loss in hunter-use by an estimated: 1. 2. 3. 4. 160 dove hunters. 336 pheasant hunters. 439 cottontail hunters. 25 bobwh Lt e quail hunters. Hafvest of game animals below the top of the joint-use pool will be affected in the fol Lowi.ng manner: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Decrease in waterfowl harvest by an estimated 3,000 ducks, and 100 geese. Complete loss of mourning dove harvest amounting to an estimated 1,721 doves. Complete loss of pheasant harvest amounting to an estimated 561 birds. Complete loss of cottontail rabbit harvest amounting to an estimated 2,266 animals. Complete loss of bobwhite quail harvest amounting to an estimated 75 quail. Mitigation of Wildlife Losses and Enhancement of the Resource Thl preceding list of ~lildlife losses resulting from the construction of Dam and Reservoir will represent a significant set back in this area's importance to wildlife and to the public who seek recreation here. Compen- Nar-rows �- 190 - I sation should be made for these losses under the terms of Public Law 732-79th Congress, which will restore pre-impoundment values and possibly Inhance the resource and public recreational opportunity in the area. specific program of mitigation of losses and enhancement of the resource in conjunction with overall project plans is outlined in the following sections. It should be noted that regardless of what is received as r~placement for wildlife losses or an enhancement of the resource, it st~ll remains that 13,312 acres of land ldll be taken out of wildlife produotion forever. AI Mitigation of Wildlife Losses To mitigate'wildlife losses resulting from the inundation of the Narrows site, it is mandatory that additional lands surrounding the reservoir be purchased by the sponsoring agency for development and management. Nu~erous developments and intensive land management will be necessary to raise i1dlife populations to a level comparable with that found on the entire area before inundation, particularly with respect to upland game. It is aga~n emphasized that 13,312. acres of land is being totally removed from wil life production and from upland game and mourning dove harvest. Even if it s possible to raise enough additional wildlife by intensive land management to replace that which is lost, we cannot replace the 13,312 acres. Hunf.ers will necessarily have to compete for game on a much smaller unit of 1an~ than they once had. This fact takes on tremendous importance when one !i.s actually faced with the complexities of intensive land, wildlife, and human management. 1 For the replacement of 13,312 acres of ld1d1ife habitat lost below the of the joint-use pool, it is requested that: 1. op Flood easement areas on lands with the following legal descripfions be converted to fee because of their value to migratory birds nd upland game: a. Sections 4, 5, 7, 8, 17, 18, and 19 of T4N, R60W. b. Sections 13, 14, and 24 of T4N, R61t-l. c. Sections 27, 33, and 34 of T5N, R6Ot-l. f I These areas will replace approximately 2,500 acres of the 13,312 acres of wildlife habitat to be destroyed by the Narrows Unit. 2. A minumum of 8,500 acres of riverbottom, and some adjacent uplands. immediately above and below Narrows Reservoir be purchased by ~he Bureau of Reclamation as a migratory bird and upland game production and public shooting area. Plate I shows the location of those areas recommended for purchase. Total habitat replacement under the above tHO items accounts for only about 11,000 acres of the original 13,312 acres, but the COlor,do Game, Fish, and Parks Department is willing to settle for this amount. Losses other than habitat will be mostly reconciled through th I purchase of this land. Investment in this land wou Ld increase th benefit-cost ratio of the Nar rows Unit. �Hater rights be purchased along with all replacement lands listed oilthe preceding page. These water rights should be sufficient to irrigate the replacement lands and to maintain and manipulate water levels in waterfowl habitat developments. Average depth of water in the developments will vary from 6 to 12 inches. Enhan ement of the Hildlife Resource For tJe enhancement of the wildlife resource in the Narrows area, it is requestJd that: 1. The Bureau of Reclamation provide funds in its project budget to construct low dikes with wa t er control structures on section 9, T4N, R60W, for the purpose of retaining surface water on the meadowland at the upper end of the Narr-ows site during periods of Low water levels in the reservoir. A low dike presently f olLows the South Platte River in a semi-circular pattern along the edge of this meadowland. Construction work will involve the extension of this dike away from the river and along a contour-line so as to enclose the meadowland. Smaller contour dikes with water control structures will be required to divide the meadowl and into several units so that various types of habitat can be created. 2. Sufficient water rights be made available to maintain and manipulate wa t er levels in the units of the meadowl.and described above. Average depth of Hater in the units l..rill be about 12 inches. Addit onal Recommendations It is 'further recommended that: • ,.1.11 federally-owned lands in the reservoir area, including those purchased for mitigation of losses, be turned over to the Colorado Game, Fish, and Parks Department for administration as a State wildlife production and public recreational area, excepting those portions as may be reserved by the sponsoring agency for the purposes of safety, efficient operations, or protection of public property. 2. Full use of all improvements and water rights purchased with the above lands be given to the Colorado Game, Fish, and Parks Department f.or the development, management, and maintenance of the wildlife and recreational resources in the area. 3. Leases of unit lands lying outside the State Hanagement Area stipulate the right of public access for the purposes of hunting, fishing, and other uncommercialized recreational uses. Clearing of the reservoir site be limited to that area lying belol..r the top of the joint-use pool. �- 192 - Proposed Plan of Development Following is a general plan for development and land use practices thatI would be instigated on lands placed under the jurisdiction of the Colorado Gkme, Fish, and Parks Department. This plan will be aimed at increasing wil~life production and the public hunting cpportunity in the Narrows area. SPFcific, detailed developments and land use patterns will be placed on a large scale map following a tentative agreement on land jurisdiction. Mourning doves will be considered as upland game in this plan. Basic Land Management Features Uplands.--The farming area bordering Narrows Reservoir on the nor1h will be developed and managed primarily for upland game because the land uSF pattern here currently favors this type of wildlife. The land is broken into small fields by irrigation ditches, fences, and windbreaks. Such an area islmore ~:~;a~!~:~s~~eU~~~:10~~t:h::df:~:!::~Si~a;:~~gO!r!:~~~~sO~ to improve upland game production and hunting on this area. Some watetfowl breeding habitat will be developed consistent with overall farming opeFtions designed to benefit upland game. tvintering waterfowl are expected to ke some use of the larger grain fields in this area for feeding. Farmlands lying adjacent to Narrows Reservoir on the plateau to the sortheast will be managed mainly as winter feeding grounds for wa t erfowl . These lands are made up of large, unbroken fields most preferred by waterfowl. Wa erl fowl seem to avoid small fields bordered by windbreaks or hedgerows. ~uch of this plateau area is irrigated by extensive sprinkler systems. Single fields of corn 600 acres in size are not uncommon and windbreaks and h dgerows are practically non-existent. The land use pattern will not need to be altered to benefit waterfowl; however, it will be necessary to change some farming practices. These changes will also be of value to upland game Bottomlands.--Both upland game and waterfowl will receive major c nsideration in the development and management of the lowlands bordering th South Platte River. Brush and timbered areas will be developed and managed primarily for upland game. Intensive waterfowl habitat development is pI nned for the meadows and bottomland fields. Developments Uplands.--Developments for upland game will consist of: 1. Woody thickets in dr-aws and other low areas (plum, willow, ani cottonwood) • 2. Woody windbreak plantings in areas wher e winter cover is lack Lng (elm, cedar, Russian olive, and plum). 3. I Food plots in areas more than one-half mile from farm grain cfops (corn, sorghums, wheat, barley, and rye). �- 193 4. Nesting plots in the form of permanent herbaceous plantings (experimental work to be done here). 5. Brush piles composed of timber cleared from inundated areas. the use of tile and pipe for permanent rabbit cover. Also De jelopment of habitat for waterfowl in the uplands will involve the: 1. Creation of shallow breeding ponds and marshes through the construction of small dikes or dams across seeps and intermittent streams. Hater depths in these impoundments ,.•• ill be a maximum of 3 feet at the dam. Most of these water areas will be less than 1 acre in size. "later control structures will be installed in the dikes and dams. 2. Introduction of desirable waterfowl food and cover plants, where necessary, in and around existing and future impoundments. 3. Construction of artificial loafing spots (logs, floating platforms, etc.) in impoundments lacking natural sites. Bottom1ands.--The elimination of grazing to release natural vegetation will eventually result in excellent upland game habitat in the bottomlands; ho~ever, there are some developments that will improve the upland game situation. These are as follows: 1. Food plots where there are no adjacent small-grain fields. 2. Extensive areas of heavy cover will be broken up by chemical or mechanical means to open travel lanes and facilitate game harvest. Cover blocks will not exceed 30 yards in width and open travel lanes will be at least 20 feet wide. 3. Brush piles composed of materials from cleared strips above. and tile may also be used. Pipe terfowl development of bottomlands \\1illconsist of creating habitat for b~eeding. feeding, and harvesting purposes. Bottomland fields will be diked aridmanaged to produce waterfowl foods. These areas will be cultivated and p llan t ed like any farmland. lllienthe crops are mature, they \\1illbe flooded t9 a depth of from 1 to 15 inches to make the food available to ducks. Food cvops will consist of corn, millet, milo, and other suitable grains. Water wlill remain in the fields until after wat er Eowl. return north in early spring. Then the fields will be drained and another crop of wa t er fowl. food produced during the summer months. Such areas are expected to attract many ducks in the fall and provide excellent hunting for the public. \oJ Meadowland along the riverbottom will be contour-diked and managed as perm~nent marsh units with mostly stable water levels. These ,.•• ill require wider and higher dikes constructed on land with a slight gradient. Mead 0'\1 a~d wetland vegetation already existing will be flooded to a maximum depth ot 3 feet and water levels maintained to form large areas of shallow-water habitat. Seasonal drawdowns of water levels on these areas may be necessary �- 194.--195- at times to maintain the stage of plant succession best for high waterfo~l utilization. These areas will be managed for waterfowl production. The~ will also serve as important hunting areas. Emergent vegetation, dikes, meadbws, and adjacent uplands will provide adequate nesting sites for ducks. Smalll islands will be constructed on the larger marsh units for nesting geese. Goose nesting platforms will also be built. Farming Operations General operations.--Field size, location, and use will be carefully regulated to supply various wildlife needs and optimum benefits. In areas managed for upland game, large fiel~s will be broken up and/or stripped in the case of small grains where one-half of the land is fallow each year. Fields managed as feeding grounds for wa t er fowl, in the plateau area ll1illbe a minimum of 40 acres in size. Livestock grazing lvill be prohibited on areas managed largely for UP1an~ game and on wa t er Eowl, feeding fields, unless specified by the Game, Fish, an Parks Department in small designated pastures. Grazing, on a controlled basi only, will be a Ll.owed on riverbottom meadows and marshes from about July 1 to the start of the hunting season, and from the end of the hunting season untOI April 1. Grazing of meadows and marshes will probably be an important 001 in controlling rank growths of we t l.andvegetation. I System of cropping.--Croplands in the management area except bottO~land field developed as wa t erfow'lfeeding areas, will be farmed on a share-c op basis, wher-eby local farmers w'ill raise the crops for a percentage of t e yield. This system requires only the possession of the land itself, pI s good supervision. It utilizes the practical knowledge and experience o~ local farmers, fits well with the local economy, and provides good publoc relations. It is often the only method economically sound in areas witij large farming acreages, or where the operating budget is limited. I Production of farm crops.--Farm crops produced on the management a'ea will be those known to be of most benefit to 'tvildlifeas food and cover Since farming 'l1illbe on a share-crop basis, some consideration will be given to crops demanded by the local economy. Farm crops selected as food and cover for upland game \-lillinclude corn, small grains, and alfalfa. Haterfm-ll \-lill derive most benefit from corn, wheat (in both green and ripcetages), srrghurns, and alfalfa. ,. I Share croppers will leave much of the rental portion of grain crops unh rvested. This portion will be leveled wl th appropriate farm machinery t? make the grain readily accessible to wa t er f owl, and upland game. Under the s rare rental system, the unharvested rental portion may be left as individual rows or in strips or blocks. The share on fields less desirable for a givenlwildlife use Hill be exchanged for equal amounts on strategically located fields. The amount of land put into the production of corn and small grains for Haterf owl, food will be based on the maximum number of wa t er fowl. expected to tilize the Nar-rows area during anyone year. Numbers of \-linteringwaterfm-ll a~e expected to reach 200,000 in years of high production following the ins allation of Narrows Reservoir. This number represents approximately 28 mil ion �- 196 waterfololldays of use that wou Id require 14 million pounds (250,000 bushels) of corn and/or small grains for feed. This means that about 3,300 acres of unharJested grain would be needed to carry 200,000 birds through the winter. Because of the potential depredations problem arising from a population of this slize, the State should be prepared to produce one-third of this amount of foo(1. Therefore, about 2,200 acres of the State Hanagement Area will be placedi in corn and small grain production, most of which would occur on the platea~ southeast of Narrows Reservoir. This amount would yield 1,100 acres of unharvested grain after the share croppers took their half. Hinter wheat will b produced on an additional 200 acres of land to provide green forage for lolirteringgeese. Alfalfa fields Hill also support grazing by geese during the Hi ter. Ftrming practices.--Various farming practices Hill be followed to insure maximu benefits to both upland game and waterfowl. Agreements with share croppefs l-lil1stipulate compliance l'liththese practices. These practices are listed be Low, 11 No small-grain stubble will be turned until the spring following the harvest of that crop and then this fallow land will not be worked be tween April 15 and June 30. 2 Maximum stubble heights, which still permit proper crop harvest, shall be retained in small-grain fields (wheat , barley, oats, and rye). No straw will be removed for bailing or other purposes. 3 Corn l-lillnot be harvested for silage., 4 Corn and sorghums will be harvested by at least one week prior to the wa t erfowl, or upland game bird seasons, whichever comes first. Designated rows of corn and sorghums l.,i11be left unharvested. No alfalfa will be cut prior to June 25, with no more than 2 cuttings per year. Cooperators may be required to use a flushing bar. There \vill be no burning, spraying, mowtng , or removal of vegetation, except during permissable crop harvest, without permission from the Game, Fish, and Parks Department. 7.1 Irrigation water will be used ,.here feasible to irrigate wildlife cover plantings. Area Management R adsides.--All roadsides on the management area will be seeded (drilled) with c~ested wheatgrass, brome grass, dwar f alfalfa, and other species to be designated and further determined from investigations underway at our experimentallnursery. There will be an area of undisturbed plant cover a minimum of 50 ~cet wide from the graded surface of the road to the exterior edges of the ro d rights-of-l.ay, unless existing developments (irrigation ditches, fences, buildings) interfere. ' �- 197 Ro dsides will not be mowed, burned, sprayed or have the vegetation removed fr~m them in any manner unless there is a specific problem with noxious weeds, visibility, or drifting snow. lVhere new roads are constructed, the barrow pits l·1111 not be of the deep excavated type that fill up with water. They witl be broad and nearly flat wherever the terrain permits. Fences.--There will be no disturbance of vegetation within 5 feet of any fence except to plant or stimulate the growth of desirable vegetation or in the event 'of a serious noxious. weed problem. Fences may even be added to bi ect large fields in some instances. Ditches. --The vegetation on outside (exterior) d Lt chbar.'» will not be disturbed except to plant or stimulate the growth of desirable vegetation, or in the event of a serious noxious Heed problem. Burning, if necessary to cl an irrigation ditches, ~nll be confined to the ditch and contained in this ar a through the use of narrow cleared strips paralleling the ditch (if such cl~ared strips are needed). Burning dates will be confined to the period bebveen March 1 and May 1. I· ' Upper end of Narrows Reservoir.--No boating or fishing ~vill be allowed wi~hin 100 yards of the shoreline at the upper end of Narrows Reservoir from the beginning of the wa t erfowl hunting season until March 1 to prevent the thr disturbance of resting waterfowl. The entire reservoir will be closed to boating and fishing during the wa t erfow'lhunting season. Hu~ter Management It appears now that all of the State Nanagement Area will be open to public hunting, including the shores of Narrows Reservoir. However , conditions may ar!i.seat any time which may war r ant; the closure of certain areas for various re sons. The great size of Nar-rows Reservoir in itself 'viII act as a natural reruge area for waterfowl during the hunting season without closing specific land or wa t er areas. Th intensity of hunter management wi.Ll, depend largely upon the public use thF area receives. It may eventually be necessary to restrict the number of hunters using the area at any given time or to assign hunters specific areas. Rebervations for the hunting privilege might someday be required. It wou Ld be expected, however, that the problems resulting from intensive hunter use wo~ld not arise until area management has produced wildlife in quantities sUfficient to attract hunters. Th various types of wildlife on the area will create management problems. There is usually conflict bet"JN:l'the fisherman and the wa t er fowl, hunter, and b etween the upland game hun t cr who pr owl.s the shorelines and the duck hurter. Firing lines, and special use areas may eventually need to be established, plainly designated, and rigidly enforced. PalI'kinglots ,·,illbe provided for hunters to prevent blocking of roads by veeicles and to control road hunting. All hunting uill originate from these pal king lots so the Game, Fish, and Parks Department can obtain accurate �- 198 hunter-use and harvest figures at any time through a check-in and check-out system of hunting. Hunters will be allowed to hunt only in areas desi,nated by the lot in wh Lch they park. If they desire to pursue game in another portion of the management area, they must move their vehicle to the parkif!g lot assigned to that area. However, it is anticipated that hunters will b given access to more than one hunting area adjacent to a given parking lot. Development, Management, and Maintenance Costs Total habitat development costs a~eexpected to reach $1 million for w~terfowl and $320,000 for upland game. These expenses 'viIIbe distributed over a 10-year period, resulting in annual development budgets of $100,000 nd $32,000, respectively. A well trained and experienced refuge manager '-lillbe needed to superv~se the development, management, and maintenance of the State Management Area. He will require at least 3 full-time and 3 seasonal assistants to permit roper operation of the area. Annual management and maintenance costs are eSfimated to be a minimum of $100,000. This amount is over and above development costs. Prepared by: Richard H. Hopper Assistant Hild1ife Researcher Date: October, 1965 I Approved by: Jack R. Grieb Hild1ife ResearJ:her Havne l,J. sandfolt Game Research Chief �f---;--l ~ . ,\ ==t:~=====~~==: WELD w. ::.ii ~ COUNTY MORGAN 1l...J T.5N. II'::;;-=- COUNT~ li : " 11•• 0 I i t 'I'\ "t-,. r-:t.; " COLORADO I ~. i ..J~<j , I",fo.·:!I Ii 'j )I(~ I f /' '7 I J ~ rt: t iI; ~ ',;"'" _._.~t.!) i'~ t'\=-l.~ "<, 1:'7::1 .-IiJ. / LOCATION MAP •.... ~ :u ...!.,,~ T.3N. R.60W. R.58W. R.59W. LEGEND _ NARROWS OAM _ RIGHTS-OF-WAY '(TAKE-LlNE) w;, AREA BELOW AREAS RECOMMENOED FOR PURCHASE MITIGATION TOP OF FLOOD CONTROL POOL (MAXIMUM POOL) TOP OF JOINT-USE FOR WILDLIFE NARROWS UNIT POOL LOSSES AS ~ SCALE OF MILES 1 COLORADO Plate I � https://cpw.cvlcollections.org/files/original/efab5c92cba2e82893f0962af9b6c7c3.pdf 23a447983c5151fcf2e135163d71bb59 PDF Text Text January, 1966 - 1- JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of --::.C:,.::O=L.:.;ORAD:..::.:::..:O=--'""Bighorn Sheep and Mountain Goat Investigations W-41-R-15 Project No. Work Plan No. 2 Job No. 1 Period Covered: Personnel: Mountain Goat Studies Mountain Goat Census and Distribution Studies April 1, 1963 to March 31, 1965 Dale Hibbs, Richard N. Denney Objectives: 1. Determine the population and distribution, by seasons, of mountain goats in the Collegiate Range and on Mt. Evans. 2. Determine the extent and direction of seasonal migration or movement of mountain goats on these ranges. 3. Define the general criteria for winter and summer range for goats in these areas in terms of topography, vegetative type or types, elevation, and snow cover. Techniques Used: 1. Population and distribution -- Flights in Department-owned, or rented, airplane or helicopter at approximately monthly intervals. So far as feasible, the flights will occur at the same period of the day, and on or near the same date each month. The crew will consist of pilot and the project assistant. Helicopter flights to be made in May or June and in September or October of each year for classification counts. 2. Migration and movements -- As described in 1. Coverage in all flights will be such as to provide observational opportunity at all elevations holding the possibility of goat occurrence. 3· Range requirements -- Record, for each goat concentration or group, at time of observation, the topography, vegetative type or types, position as to timberline, the approximate elevation, and condition of snow cover. Correlate data with numbers of goats by months and seasons. �- 2 - Findings: 'I'heobjectives of this job were completed during this work period. To avoid duplication, the results of this job are presented under the heading, Pop·ulation and Distribution, in the completion report for Job 3, Ecology of the Mountain Goat. Prepared by __~D_a~l~e~R~_i~b_b_s~ Date January, 1966 _ Approved by. Richard N. Denney Project Leader Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief �January, 1966 - 3 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO --------~~~~-----------Bighorn Sheep and Mountain Goat Investigations Project No. W-41-R-15 Work Plan No. 2 Mountain Goat Studies Job No. 2 Review of Literature Period Covered: Personnel: April 1, 1964 to December 31, 1964 Dale Hibbs, Richard N. Denney Objectives: 1. Determine and evaluate present recorded knowledge on the mountain goat. 2. Ascertain worthwhile procedures, and prev~nt repetition of methods and approaches previously determined as unsuccessful, in the research proposed in Work Plan 2, Job 1 and Job 3· Techniques Used: Examine, abstract, and make bibliographic reference to literature applicable to the research described. Findings: The objectives of this job were completed during the prescribed time period. The results of this job are not given in this report as the Review of Literature will be published as a Special Report under the Game Research Division of the Colorado Game, Fish, and Parks Department. Copies of the Review of Literature are being prepared and should be available in the near future. Prepared by Date Dale Hibbs -------------------------~Jan_·_ua~ry~, __1~96~5~ _ Approved by Richard N. Denney Project Leader Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief ��JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of ~C:::.;O:::.;LO=RAD::.=::.:::O _ Bighorn Sheep and Mountain Goat Investigations w-4l-R-15 Project No. Work Plan No. 2 Mountain Goat Studies Job NOe 3 Ecology of the Mountain Goat Period Covered: Personnel: April 1, 1964 to March 31, 1965 Dale Hibbs, Richard N. Denney ABSTRACT A study conducted, June-September, 1963 and 1964,'sought to determine the status and habitat utilization of a transplanted herd of mountain goats (Oreamnos americanus missoulae) in the Collegiate Range, Colorado. Intensive investigation was confined primarily to Mt. Shavano in the southern end of the Range. The composition and trend in range condition, of the Mt. Shavano area was determined. The population and seasonal distribution of mountain goats with respect to physiographic, vegetative, and climatic factors was determined and summer and winter range boundaries established for most herds. Goats in the Range did not exhibit a true migration. Instead, they moved throughout the Range freely rather than using a particular area during anyone season. The extent and pattern of daily movement was determined for the Mt. Shavano herd of 35 animals. The mean daily movement for this herd was 691 yards. A description of such physical characteristics as pelage and color, age and size, horns, hooves, senses, breeding activities, and development of young, is presented. The summer and winter food habits of mountain goats were ascertained with the conclusion being that grasses and grass-like plants make up the greater part of the diet throughout the year. The high, windswept alpine terrain above timberline appeared to be an important part of the mountain goat's habitat in Colorado. Goats were observed using these areas during all months of the year and the accessibility, availability, and extent of habitat of this type might be a limiting factor during critical winter periods when deep snows cover the grasses above timberline. �-6 - Aerial censusing proved to be the best method for determining the number of goats over a broad area in the Collegiate Range. Air and ground counts on the same areas compared quite closely& Aerial photographs, taken of herds above timberline, were used to obtain accurate total counts and in most cases fairly accurate sex and age classification counts could be made. Aerial needed basis. and ground trend count routes were established' to provide to manage properly the Collegiate Range herd on a maximum Suggested management and legal protection information sustained yield recommendations include a limited permit hunting system for mountain goats as big game animals in Colorado. Objectives: The objectives of this study were to determine the numbers, seasonal distribution, sex and age classes, and the range requirements of the mountain goat popUlations in the Collegiate Range, and the numbers and location of mountain goats on Mt. Evans. These objectives were accomplished through the intensive investigation of the following specific objectives: I. To determine the mountain goat population in the Collegiate Range and on Mt. Evans, by areas, peaks, or other logical territorial divisions. 2. To determine the location and seasonal movements phYSiographic, vegetative, and climatic factors. 3. To gather a. b. c. d$ e. Techniques information of biological and ecological of goats as related importance to on the following: population structure--ratio of males:females:yearlings:kids reproductive data food habits and feeding behavior competition with other big game and domestic livestock effects of environmental factors such as weather, predators, accidents, interspecific strife, parasites, and diseases on mountain goats Used: Selection of Intensive Study Area Field work began in June, 1963, and continued through September 30, 1963, during the first summers field work. Daily trips were made during the early part of the summer into the Collegiate Range in an attempt to locate the main areas of goat concentrations as a necessary prelude to the establishment of a specific study area. At this time it was not knoWll, except for rumors and a few scattered sightings, where or how many goats were in the Collegiate Range. Personal communications with ranchers, Conservation officers, local residents, and many others, were made in an attempt to determine the status and location of mountain goats in the Range. All reports with respect to possible sightings of goats that had been made in the area were traced. Such things as accessibility of the area, number of goats, sex ratio of goats involved, nearness to a good campsite, and area of least human disturbance were considered as prerequisites to the establishment ,of an intensive study areao �-7 Aerial Flights Monthly aerial flights of selected areas were initiated in April of 1963 and continued through March, 1965. The purpose of these flights was to determine the numbers and seasonal distribution of mountain goats in the Collegiate Range and on Mt. Evans. The flights also were used as a check, or comparison of, ground observations that were made throughout the summers of 1963 and 1964. All flights were made on, or near, the same date each month and at approximately the same time during the day, weather conditions permitting. An aerial observation form was devised to systematically record information and also to make the analysis of data more rapid (Appendix C). The counting condition classification, which is part of the overall form, was devised by Dwight Owens for elk census work. The elevation, aspect, sex ratio, number, vegetative type, and the time were recorded for each sighting of goats. Flights were made in a PA-18 140 h.p. Super Cub, or in a Bell 47G-3B helicopter. An attempt was made to establish a standard flight pattern. However, this proved impractical since different weather conditions, light conditions, and areas of goat occurrence prevailed on almost all flights. Therefore, a routine flight pattern was used, except for short deviations to check on likely looking objects or new areas of possible goat occurrence. From the Salida airport, located approximately three miles west of Salida, the flight was made west to Mt. Shavano, which was the first mountain examined. Proceeding north from Mt. Shavano, the following major mountains were surveyed: Mt. Grizzly, Mt. Mamma, Mt. Antero, Mt! Princeton, Mt. Yale, Sheep Mountai~Mt. Harvard, and Mt. Oxford. Advancing southward along the Continental Divide the area was observed as far south as the North Fork of the South Arkansas River. For details of flight strips see Fig. 2. At least two flight strips were made along each major valley and ridge to provide observational opportunity at both high (approximately 14,000 feet) and low (approximately 12,000 feet) elevation or until the pilot and observer agreed that the area had been covered adequately. The flight techniques used in the Mt. Evans area were similar to those used in the Collegiate Range. The flight strips are shown in Fig. 3. Ground Observations Eight months were spent in the field with approximately 1600 hours being devoted to observing mountain goats and evaluating their utilization of habitat during the summers of 1963 and 1964. A base camp was established on Mt. Shavano at 10,500 feet elevation. Daily trips were made from this camp into goat habitat located less than a mile away. In addition, a temporary camp at 11,500 feet elevation was used as a base to observe the goats and to escape the rain and hail storms that occurred almost daily during the summer in the high country. Most observations were made with the aid of 7X35 binoculars and a 30X spotting scope at distances ranging from a few hundred yards to one-half mile. Whenever possible the observations were made so the goats were unaware of the investigator's presence. A field observation form was devised and used in the field to facilitate the recording of observations and also to make the analysis of data more rapid �-8 -- General Flight Pattern Fig. 2. The general flight pattern and areas of frequent mountain goat occurrence in ,the Collegiate Range, Colorado, to March 1 1965. �~ 5ummerRange Boundaries _--~_~_ Winte~ Range Boundaries \0 Fig. 3. The seasonal distribution of mountain goats on Mt. Evans. �- 10 - (Appendix D). The form is self explanatory. Each day was divided into four time intervals as follows: 6:00 to 9:00 A.M., 9:01 to 12:00 A.M., 12:01 to 3:00 P.M., and 3:01 to 6:00 P.M. and designated as intervals One, Two, Three, and Four, respectively. Occasionally, observations were made from daylight until dark to determine any changes in behavior that might occur during the time periods from daylight until 6:00 A.M. in the morning and from 6:00 P.M. until dark in the evening. When recording the duration of activities such as feeding, bedding, and traveling of a group(three or more) of goats, the technique employed was to start timing when 50 per cent or more of the goats in the herd were engaged in the same activity. This appeared to be quite applicable to mountain goats since most of their activities were confined to herd movement rather than each animal acting individually. The activities were highly co-ordinated, thus showing a high degree of allelomimetic social behavior as described by Darling (1937). All movements were estimated to the nearest yard. These distances then were recorded on a map (two inches to the mile) of the area. All detailed observations were made of the Mt. Shavano herd. Detailed notes were kept on all mountain goats observed. This information included the effects of weather, elevation, aspect, topography, slope, and vegetative type as they related to mountain goat activities. Elevations were estimated by referring to topographic maps of the area and by referring to check points verified by altimeter readings when on aerial flights. Goats were grouped into kid, yearling, two-year old, and adult categories whenever possible. An attempt was made to determine the sex of the goats in the field, however, it was extremely difficult to distinguish male from female goats at d i s.tance s greater than one mile with a 30X spotting scope. The sexing technique most commonly used was to note the position taken during urination. The 'female generally assumed a squatting posture similar to that taken by a female dog (Fig. 4), whereas males simply stretched the body with a slight downward arching of the back. This sexing technique was applicable to kids as well as adults. Techniques Used in Determining Food Habits Due to the wide and sparse distribution of mountain goats in the United States and the relatively inaccessible habitat of the animals, there has been limited study on their food habits as compared to other big game species. No previous studies have been made in Colorado. Therefore, an intensive study was designed to determine not only the species taken, but also the relative amount and preference of each species taken. In order to arrive at an accurate evaluation of the food habits of mountain goats, and also for supplementary and comparative purposes, the four techniques were employed. 1. Band trai1ing.--This technique was similar to that described by Hubbard (1952) and involved following behind the grazing animals to note the food species taken. A rough preference index was arrived at by dot tallying the species that had been grazed. This technique was used to determine winter food preferences. �- 11 - 2. Timed observations of feeding anima1s.--This method involved observing feeding goats through powerful optics and recording the amount of time spent by the goats feeding upon a particular type of vegetation. This technique was limited in that plants being grazed could only be separated into grass, forb, and shrub classes. Closer examination of the area afterwards revealed the species of plants grazed. This method also provided a preference index for the plants takene 3. Utilization transects.--By modifying the regular Forest Service range analysis recording form number R2-2200-10, it was possible to record utilization as well as the regular transect hits. For each regular transect hit recorded, the nearest plant to that point that had been grazed was selected and recorded under the utilization column. The transects were conducted in areas of heaviest goat use. These areas were determined by frequent observations of goats in a specific area. A preference rating could be obtained by calculating the average hits per transect on a particular species. The following, arbitrarily selected criteria were used with the above mentioned calculations to arrive at the preference rating; five and above = high, three to five = moderate, and one to three = low. 4. Analysis of stomach contents.--Four mountain goats were killed during the first mountain goat hunting season held in August, 1964. Stomach samples were collected from all of these goats. Each sample consisted of approximately one quart of stomach contents randomly selected from the rumen and reticulum. The samples were washed through a series of graduated screens, dried, and then sorted into separate units with respect to plant species or similar plant parts. The plants were identified by comparing them to known plants collected on the summer range, and in cases of questionable identification, verified by Dr. H. D. Harrington of Colorado State University. The per cent that each plant made up of the total stomach sample was estimated and recorded. By comparing the results of the four techniques used, it was possible to make an estimate of the summer food preferences of mountain goats. These are reported upon later (page 62). Range Survey Techniques Intensive range work was confined to Mt. Shavano. A plant collection of the more common and conspicuous plants occurring throughout the Collegiate Range was completed during this study. A list of the common and scientific names of the plants identified is included in Appendix A. A modification of the Parker Three Step range analysis method (described in detail in Chapter 8 of the Region Two Range Analysis Handbook of the United States Forest Service, 1958) was used to determine the general condition and plant composition of the mountain goat range on Mt. Shavano. This method involved setting up temporary paced transects in the important vegetative types and recording the hits on vegetation, moss, litter, bare soil, and rock, that occurred within a three-quarter inch loop placed at the point of the shoe at each pace along a lOO-pace transect across a vegetative type. �- 12 Ten one hundred point transects were conducted in Angel Gulch and Squaw Creek Gulch, respectively. The transects were placed in areas of heaviest goat use as evidenced by frequent observation of goats in specific areas. For every transect hit recorded, the nearest plant to that point that had been utilized also was recorded. In addition, whenever bare soil, erosion pavement, or rock were recorded as a hit, the nearest plant to that point was recorded under the composition column (Appendix E). Vegetation was tallied by individual plant species and by groups or classes (desirables, intermediates, and least desirables). The Alpine (sheep) scorecard was used in this investigation. It also may be used to estimate the general range condition regardless of the species of animal involved. Aerial photos of the study area were obtained and the vegetative types delineated in pencil before going into the field. Each type then was visited on foot and the boundaries corrected on the aerial photo before the final inked copy was made. The symbolism used on the aerial photos to designate the various vegetative types and general range condition was similar to that described in the United States Forest Service Region Two Range Analysis Handbook (1958). It was difficult to distinguish sharp vegetative types in the sub-alpine and alpine zones. Therefore, only the following types were recognized with respect to goat use; intermittent rock-grass, aspen-spruce-fire, talus, and cliff. Goats occupied these types: 70, 12, 9, and 9 per 'cent of the time, respectively. These types are shown in Fig.'s 5, 6, 7, and 8. Weather Data Collection As mentioned previously, a standard weather station was set up on Mt. Shavano and maintained during the summer of 1964 from July 1 through September 30. It was located on the east side of Mt. Shavano on a southerly exposed slope in Section 5, Township 50 North, Range 7 East, of the New Mexico Principal Meridian at approximately 12,500 feet elevation. This site was selected since mountain goats in the Collegiate Range appeared to use similar areas more frequently throughout the year than any of the other exposures or elevations. The station consisted of a louvered instrument shelter 28 inches long, 18 inches high, and 18 inches wide mounted on a rock base approximately 30 inches above the ground and supported by four turnbuckled guy wires (Fig. 9). The shelter housed a seven-day, Bendix, recording hygrothermograph; a Taylor, maximum-minimum, self-registering thermometer; a sling psychrometer; and servicing supplies. A continuous recording rain gauge and a totalizing anemometer also were located a short distance from the instrument shelter. The door on the shelter opened toward the north so that the direct rays of the sun would not strike the instruments during servicing. The weather station was checked and serviced weekly. Data were recorded on a weather data from devised by Medin and Anderson (1962) and modified for application to this specific project (Appendix F). Continuous records of temperature and relative humidity were obtained by the hygrothermograph. At each servicing the pen settings were checked for accuracy by referring to the minimum thermometer �Fig. 4. Mt. Shavano Goat Herd. Note the five female goats in picture, including one female kid, in typical urinating position. Fig. 5. Cliff-talus type on Mt. Princeton at approximately 13,400 feet elevation. Eighteen per cent of the goats observed during this study were in this type. �Fig. 6. Intermittent rock-grass type on Mt. Shavano at approximately 12,500 feet elevation. Goats used this type extensively during most months. Primary plant species include Kobresia (Kobresia bellardi), wheatgrass (Agropyron scribneri), and Carex (Carex spp.). August, 1964. Fig. 7. Intermittent rock-grass type on Mt. Shavano at approximately 13,300 feet elevation showing variation in types. Primary plants include clover (Trifolium spp.), Kobresia, and alpine avens (Geum turbanatum). July, 1964. �Fig. 8. Spruce-fir type on low (9,000-10,500 feet elevation) southern exposures. This was the primary kidding range for nannies in the Shavano herd during 1963 and 1964. Topography of this type also was utilized as winter range. Fig. 9. Mt. Shavano weather station. Located on south facing slope at approximately 12,500 feet elevation. �- 16 for the temperature correction and to the measurement psychrometric tables (Marvin, 1941), for the relative taken with the sling humidity correction. Wind mileage was recorded with a 10,000 mile, three cup, totalizing anemometer. Wind velocity was determined by dividing the number of hours that had elapsed since the last reading into the total miles of wind that had passed the station since the last reading. This gave the average wind velocity in miles per hour for that time interval. Maximum and minimum gusts as well as the prevailing wind direction were estimated at each visit to the weather station. A standard, weather bureau, continuous recording rain gauge was used to record precipitation. A thin film of transformer oil was applied to the surface of the water to reduce evaporation. Necropsy Techniques The first mountain goat hunting season in Colorado was held in August of 1964. Six permits were allowed on a drawing basis for hunting in the area north of Chalk Creek in the Collegiate Range. Before each hunter went into the field he was contacted and asked to collect samples of the heart, lungs, kidneys, large intestine, small intestine, feces, blood, and complete reproductive tract, from any goat that was killed. All of the hunters were instructed on how to collect the samples and each was given a number of plastic sacs and two vials that had been pre-treated with an anti-coagulant (Heparin) to contain the blood samples. The hunters were cooperative and from the four who were successful it was possible to obtain a complete set of samples from the four goats killed. This material, with the exception of the blood and the reproductive t.ract s , was analyzed by personnel of the College of Veterinary Medicine, at Colorado State University, for the presence of internal parasites. Dr. Seliger, D.V.M., of the School of Veterinary Medicine, performed the microscopic examination of the reproductive tracts. The blood samples were analyzed by personnel of the Colorado Game, Fish, and Parks Department game research laboratory in Fort Collins, Colorado. �- 17 Ecology of the Mountain Goat Dale Hibbs INTRODUCTION The mountain goat Oreamnos americanus (Blainvil1e) is one of many big game animals that has been able to withstand the tremendous exploitation that was imposed upon them by the westward movement of civilization (Seton 1927). Currently the population of mountain goats in the United States appears to be stable and has shown little change with the exception of introduced herds. Studies by Anderson (1940), Casebeer (1948), Klein (1953), Brandborg (1955), and others have been conducted in recent years and have made available much valuable information relative to the ecology of the mountain goat. However, a great deal of information still is needed to insure the perpetuation and proper management of this important big game animal. The mountain goat, although not native to Colorado, has been established successfully in some of Colorado's high mountains. In view of this fact, the Colorado Game, Fish, and Parks Department recognized the need for an intensive study to determine the status of the mountain goat as a necessary prelude to effective management. Thus, in March of 1963, the Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department reactivated the Federal Aid Research Project W-4l-R-14 (Bighorn Sheep and Mountain Goat Investigations). The results of this project are incorporated into this report. DESCRIPTION OF STUDY AREA The following description includes the location, geology, climate, topography, vegetation, and vertebrate fauna of the study area. How these various environmental features affect mountain goats will be discussed later. Location The Collegiate Range, which comprised the general study area, is located approximately 20 miles northwest of Salida in South-central Colorado, and lies almost entirely in the San Isabel National Forest. Roughly, the range lies between 380 30' and 390 00' north latitude and 1060 10' and 1060 50' west longitude. Intensive investigation was conducted on Mt. Shavano in the southern end of the range and included: T50N, R6E, Sec. 5, 6, 7, and 8, and T51N, R6E, Sec. 35 and 36, of the New Mexico Principal Meridian, Chaffee County, Colorado (Fig. 1). Topography The topography of this area is extremely rugged, with a maximum relief of more than 7,000 feet, from the tops of the highest peaks (many of which,such as Shavano, Antero, Princeton, Yale and Harvard, exceed 14,000 feet in elevation) to the southern end of the Arkansas Valley, which is less than 7,000 feet above sea level. The topography of the range is characterized by steep slopes, sheer rock outcroppings, and talus slides that cover a considerable part of the area above timberline. �...,-,,' I-' co -'=.4.tO tu ..c LEGEND ==== ,... •• t~ •••• ~- ----'''''' Q ••••..••••••• -;;':"~ ~ •....• s"- t!5I •••••- n -,!Y!.o: -s Fig. 1. I"':--1 The intensive study' area on Ht. Shavano, Collegiate Colorado. . Rang~, �- 19 Other features, such as cirques, serrated ridges, U-shaped valleys, and moraines, indicate that this area once was occupied by Pleistocene glaciers that greatly increased the ruggedness of the present mature topography. The southern part of the study area is drained by the North Fork of the South Arkansas River and its tributaries, of which Cyclone and Jennings Creeks are the most important. Numerous intermittent streams flow into Squaw Creek, which is the major drainage on the eastern slope of Mt. Shavano. Brown's Creek and its tributaries drain the northern and western parts of the study area. All streams in the study area eventually drain into the Arkansas River, which flows through the front range and into the plains of eastern Colorado. Numerous springs are found in the area. However, most streams are fed by surface waters from the melting, perennial snowbanks. Geology The following discussion of the geologic history and makeup of the Sawatch Range was taken primarily from the works of Crawford (1913), Stark and Barnes (1935), and Dings and Robinson (1957). The Sawatch Range of central Colorado, is an extension of the Continental Divide. It extends almost due north from Monarch Pass, west of Salida, for a distance of approximately 80 miles to where it passes under the synclinal valley of the Eagle River. In general, the Sawatch Range forms a part of the most westerly of two granite belts that cross Colorado. This western belt extends south from Wyoming as the Park Range, then turns southeastward as the Gore Range, and again south, past Leadville~ as the Mosquito Range. The Sawatch Range, which continues on south beneath the San Juans, is an offset to the west from the main axis. The Collegiate Range is an easterly extension of the Sawatch Range. The rocks of the Sawatch Range have been grouped into four general classes: (1) pre-Cambrian crystalline rocks, (2) Paleozoic sediments, (3) Tertiary igneous rocks, and (4) Quarternary deposits. Pre-Cambrian rocks form the bulk of the Sawatch Range and are made up mostly of metamorphosed quartzite and limestone with closely related shists and gneisses of sedimentary origin. During Pleistocene and more recent times, glaciers have been important agents in thephysiographica1 and geological formation of this area. Planing down and leveling irregular surfaces, gouging out rock basins, forming morainal lakes, and high terraces are all examples of glacial modification. Recent changes have been characterized mainly by landslides and running water. A complex series of folding and faulting also has changed the topography of this area. Climate and Weather The following discussion of climate and weather was obtained works of Crawford (1913), Berry (1959), United States Forest data), and information obtained during this study. from a review of the Service (Unpublished �The climate of Colorado is extremely variable, due to the rugged topography. Therefore, few climatic generalizations can be given which are applicable to the entire state. Large variations in climate occur within short distances in the high mountains; however, the climate of Colorado generally is considered to be in the highland continental type, characterized by cool, dry summers and mild winters. The relatively thin atmosphere, which allows for greater penetration of the sun's rays and low humidity, accounts for the pleasant winter weather. Extensive climatological records are lacking for the specific study area, since the weather station on Mt. Shavano was maintained only during the summer of 1964 from July 1 through September 30. Therefore, weather data from the Monarch weather station, which is maintained by the United States Forest Service, were used to supplement the data collected during this investigation. The Monarch weather station is located at the summit of Monarch Pass at 11,325 feet elevation and lies approximately eight miles southeast of the Mt. Shavano weather station. It is thought that the weather data taken at the Monarch station is representative of that taken at the Mt. Shavano station; however, the horizontal and e1evational differences should be taken into consideration whenaomyaring the two areas. During the three months (July, August, and September) that data were collected Rt the Mt. Shavano weather station the mean daily temperatures were rarely above 530 F. The mean daily temperature for the three months was 48.00 F. The highest temperature recorded was on July 19, 1964 when the daily maximum reached 650 F. The mean daily maximum temperatures ranged from 59.90 F. for July to 55.70 and 54.40 F. for August and September, respectively. The minimum temperature recorded during the same three month period was on September 17, when the temperature dropped to 240 F. Mean daily minimum temperatures averaged less than 400 F. for the period with 43.10 F., 40.10 F., and 34.80 F. being recorded for July, August, and September, respectively. Afternoon rain showers, of low intensity, occurred almost daily in the study area during July and August with approximately 3.5 inches of rain being recorded for July. A total of 7.01 inches of precipitation was received in the study area duting the three month study period. Prevailing southwesterly winds blew almost continuously above timberline with the mean velocity for the three months being 5.97 miles per hour. The mean velocities ranged from 4.9 miles per hour during July to 6.87 miles per hour during August. Vegetation Summer range.--The summer range of mountain goats in the Co11eg:h<J.teRange primarily is in the alpine tundra zone above timberline. This zone;b~gins at approximately 11,500 feet and continues to the tops of the highest peaks, some of which exceed 14,000 feet in elevation. This region is char ac ter Lz ed.sby t Low growing grasses, sedges, Eor bs , and long fingers like patches (Krumho Ltia) .)Q)f bristle cone pine (Pinus aristada) that extend into the alpine zone forsshort distances. It has been found that the floristic composition is extreme~yunifo'litffi throughout the alpine zone (Costello, 1954). A partial list of p1ants!£ound in the study area is included in Appendix A. �- 21 - From the range analysis transects (Parker Three-Step) conducted in the Mt. Shavano area, the general condition of the range was found to vary from poor to low good. The location and number of transects are discussed later. The predominant plants in the area were alpine clover (Trifolium dasyphyllum), dwarf clover (1. nanum), Kobresia (Kobresia bellardi), and alpine avens (~ turbanatum). Winter range.--Mountain goats in the Collegiate Range did not seem to have a definite winter range, as such; however, a greater amount of their time was spent in the subalpine zone, from 9,000 to 11,500 feet during the winter months than during the summer months. The typical life form of this zone was the sprucefir evergreen forest of Englemann spruce (picea englemanni), and sub-alpine fir (Abies lasiocarpa). This was interspersed with extensive stands of aspen (Populus tremuloides) and lodgepole pine (Pinus contorta). The rugged rock outcroppings, that typify mountain goat winter range on southern exposures, had a dense interspersion of grasses and shrubs. Various shrubs such as mountain mahogany (Cercocarpus montanus), snowberry (Symphoriocarpos spp.), cliffbush (Jamesia americana), and squaw currant (Ribes cereum) made up the major understory cover. These exposures also were characterized by a large variety of grasses. Of these, Arizona fescue, (Festuca arizonica), mountain muhly (Muhlenbergia montana), and Thurber's fescue (Festuca thurberi) appeared to be the most abundant. Vertebrate Fauna Records were kept of the vertebrate fauna observed on, or in the vicinity of, the study area. A list of the common and scientific names of the vertebrates observed is included in Appendix B. They have not been grouped with respect to the life zones (Canadian, Hudsonian, and Arctic-Alpine) represented in the study area because some animals, such as the mountain goat, used all three zones at various times of the year. The most common mammals observed, other than the mountain goat, were pikas (Ochotona princeps), chipmunks (Eutamias spp.), and red squirrels (Tamiasciurus hudsonicus). Others less common, were mule deer (Odocoileus hemionus), long-tailed weasles (Mustela frenata), and yellow-bellied marmots (Marmota flaviventris). Numerous birds also frequented the study area with blue grouse (Dendragapus obscurus), Clark's nutcracker (Nucifraga columbia), and gray-headed juncos (Junco caniceps) being the most conspicuous. �- 22 - POPULATION AND DISTRIBUTION North America The mountain goat occurs only in western North America: In the United States, goats originally occurred in only four states - Alaska, Washington, Idaho, and Montana (Swift, 1941). Seton (1927) believed that probably one-quarter of their range was in the Rocky Mountains and the remainder in the Cascades, Selkirks, Coast Ridge, and Bitterroots. The genus, Oreamnos, is composed of one species and four sub-species which are separated mainly on the basis of geographic distribution. The distributional range extends from the southern part of Alaska, south to northern Washington, central Idaho, and western Montana. The sub-species Q. ~. americanus exists in western Oregon and Washington and south-eastern British Columbia. This sub-species has been introduced onto Vancouver Island and Olympic National Park. Q.~.missoulae, which is considered to be the smallest of the four sub-species, is found in the mountains of western Montana, Idaho, eastern Oregon, and Washington. Animals of this sub-species have been introduced into South Dakota, Wyoming, and Colorado. O.~. kennedyi seems to be confined to the Copper River of southern Alaska. Q.~. columbiae is found in the southern tip of Alaska, northern British Columbia, and western Yukon Territory (Hall and Kelson, 1959). Legendary distribution included most of the western states; however, fossil remains have been found only in California, Arizona, and New Mexico (Simpson, 1945). This indicates that their original range extended somewhat further south. than it does today. It is thought that heat probably is the greatest barrier to their southern distribution, since the limit of their range is correlated with an average summer temperature of 600 F., or less (Darlington, 1957). Since mountain goats utilize nearly all types of available vegetation, actual vegetative type does not influence their general distribution. They inhabit brush, timber, and alpine country. Typically they inhabit the highest and roughest mountain ranges in North America (Brandborg, 1955). It is thought that there are between 14,000 and 15,000 mountain goats in the United States excluding Alaska (Anonymous, 1961). The state of Alaska probably has the largest population of goats, numbering around 12,000 animals (Klein, 1953). Estimates of mountain goat populations in the other states rank in the following order: Washington, 6,000; Montana, 5,177; Idaho, 2,800; South Dakota, 300; Colorado, 110; Oregon, 20; and Wyoming, 8 (Anonymous, 1961). Canada also supports a sizeable population of mountain goats, however, information on numbers is not available at the present time. Colorado The following discussion on the population and distribution of mountain goats in the Collegiate Range and on Mt. Evans is based on the results of aerial flights of the study areas and on ground field work conducted during the summers of 1963 and 1964. Collegiate range.--After the initial plant of nine mountain goats in 1948 and five in 1952, very little was known about the success or failure of the transplanting �- 23 - operations in the Collegiate Range. Questionable sightings of mountain goats by mountain climbers, hunters, geologists, and others, were reported from time to time. Few authentic sightings were made. Many people confused the mountain sheep with the mountain goat and some even thought that they were the same animal. Other information included sightings of white objects above timberline as being mountain goats. After searching the literature and talking to Wildlife Conservation Officers, miners, local reSidents, and many others, a list was assembled of what was regarded as authentic sight records of mountain goats in the Collegiate Range (Appendix G). This list of names and the areas of observation, although admittedly incomplete, will serve as a general picture of the success and extension of range of mountain goats in the Collegiate Range. Figure 10 is a detailed map depicting the above mentioned sight records, as well as the investigator's sightings before and during this study. A total of 83 mountain goats was located during this investigation in the Collegiate Range. The numbers, sex ratios, and area of occurrence of the mountain goats located are shown in Table 1. The figure of 83 goats is an actual count. No attempt was made to estimate the total population within the Collegiate Range and it is unlikely that all goats in this extensive area were found. The count of 83 goats is considered close to the total herd level at the present time. At this time it does not appear possible to estimate or project a total population figure with the data available. The Sheep Mountain herd constituted the largest single concentration of mountain goats located during this study. The highest single count of 36 individuals probably was low for the herd as a whole, due to the large and diversified habitat this herd occupied. Much of their range was in the spruce-fir forest below timberline, making it likely that some of the goats were not counted when censusing the area. The Sheep Mountain herd probably had the most extensive summer range of any of the herds studied. From Sheep Mountain (the eastern boundary of their range) the herd ranged west along Gladstone Ridge and Jones Mountain to the Continental Divide (Fig. 11). Occasional sightings of lone males, which were thought to be part of the Sheep Mountain herd, were made to the south along the Continental Divide. No winter range boundaries were established for this herd. However, numerous goat tracks in the snow in December of 1964 along the rock outcroppings on the south side of Gladstone Ridge, indicated this area was their probable winter range (Fig. 11). The Mt. Shavano herd, upon which most of the intensive observations were made, had a total of 34 individuals. As can be seen in Figure 12, the Shavano herd roamed over most of the area above timberline. The areas of most frequent use during the summer and fall months (June to October) were: the north side of Squaw Creek at elevations of approximately 13,000 feet, the north side of Angel Gulch at elevations of approximately 13,000 feet, and the center ridge in the head of McCoy Gulch at approximately 13,000 feet elevation. However, most of the intensive activity and behavioral observations of the herd were made in the Squaw Creek drainage on the eastern side of Mt. Shavano (Fig. 13). During the winter and spring months (November to May) the Savano herd frequented the windswept ridges (12,000 to 13,000 feet elevation) above timberline separating. �x Indicates one observation @ Indicates five abservations at this location • . / .•MT. HARVARD 14,414 \ ( ~ P-r' ( .--- - ~ <:> rx: 14,19~ MT YALE r", -, I Vista SAN ,ISABEL x x Xx :x....x .~ , MT, PR'IN·CETON :AJI4,'197't1o\¥. CrellA' G x x X,X@ XX 'X' AX XMT. ANTE'RO \ x 14,269 x '-- --'---., \.. ",------ x . ( '" .•...•.....• x x x S~AVANO PEAK ~ x ~ ,'~~42 x' X ,. \ \ -V-i>>Sf \ \, J I ""a.... ~.'\ FOREST 'J'f"o<.. X 9- •. x x I \.. Fig. 10. Location of authenic sight observations of mountain goats in the Collegiate Range, Co]ora dO, 1950 to March 1965. �- 25 - Table l.--Sexes, ages, and areas of occurrence of mountain goats located in the Collegiate Range, Colorado, March 1, 1963 to March 30, 1965. Males Females Kids Yearlings UnclassHied Total Mt. Shavano 5 9 9 11 0 34 Mt. Antero 4 0 0 0 0 4 Mt. Grizzly 1 0 0 0 0 1 Mt. Princeton 7 0 O· 0 0 7 Mt. Kreutzer 1 0 0 0 0 1 Sheep Mountain 0 10 10 5 11 36 18 19 19 16 11 83 Location Total �»> ~ ,_ Winter Range Boundaries Boundaries I,) 0\ Fig. 110 The seasonal distribution of mountain goats on Sheep Mountain, Collegiate Range, Colorado. �- Zi ... Boundaries --',, __Winter Range Boundaries ~ Ground Trend Count Routes Figo 12. The seasonal distribution of mountain goats on Mt. Shavano and Mt. Antero, Collegiate Range, Colorado. �Fig. 13. Squaw Creek basin which was the primary summer range of the Mt. Shavano goat herd. Most of the intensive goat observations were conducted in this area. Elevations range from about 11,500 feet on the valley floor to 13,600 feet. �- 29 - the major drainages (McCoy Gulch, Squaw Creek, Brown's Creek, Angel Gulch, and Red Gulch) or utilized the sheer rock outcroppings which sloped into the North Fork of the South Arkansas River. The Mt. Antero herd, which comprised five adult male goats, generally ranged throughout the area on the northwest side of the summit of Mt. Antero. The group frequently ranged along the ridge on the east side of Baldwin Creek or in the meadow bordering this ridge on the west at approximately 12,300 feet elevation (Fig. 12). The only other sizeable herd located during this study was the Mt. Princeton herd of seven adult males. This group generally was found together on the west slope of Goat Gulch above timberline. However, they also used the north side of Maxwell Creek at approximately 12,800 feet elevation and the ridge between Cascade Canyon and Grouse Canyon at approximately 12,800 feet elevation (Fig. 14). These goats were observed above timberline during most months of the year. Heavy winter use of vegetation in the rock outcroppings above South Cottonwood Creek indicated that this area was probably their primary winter range. Other goats observed throughout this study were two adult males on the east side of Mt. Mamma and one adult male on the east slope of Mt. Grizzly. The two largest herds (the Shavano herd and the Sheep Mountain herd) were found on the same mountains and within a short distance·of where the original two groups of goats were released in 1948 and 1952. This information should be taken into consideration when transplanting operations are to be conducted in the future. During the monthly aerial surveys from April 12, 1963, to March 12, 1965, a total of 776 goat-observations was made in the Collegiate Range. The details of these flights are shown in Table 2. A total of 68 hours and 53 minutes was flown, with an average of 11.3 goats being sighted per hour of flying time. The highest count made on any single flight in the Collegiate Range was on September 12, 1964, when 59 goats were located. Thirty-six goats were seen on Gladstone Ridge on the same date. This constituted the largest single herd observed during the investigation. The ground counts made during the eight months of field work, correlated well with the aerial counts made in the same areas. A total of 4,651 field observations was of the goats in the Collegiate Range. No attempt was made to determine the number of goats observed per hour of time spent in the field. The mountain goats in the Collegiate Range probably constitute the highest ranging mountain goat population in North America. Also, these goats represent the southernmost extreme range of mountain goats in North America. During the aerial flights in the Collegiate Range goats were observed in areas ranging from approximately 9,500 feet to 13,500 feet -elevation, with the greatest number (58 per cent) being observed in the 12,000 to 13,000 foot zone. Similar results were obtained from ground observations, except that the e1evationa1 range was from approximately 9,400 to 13,900 feet with the greatest number (79 per cent) being observed in the 13,000 to 14,000-foot zone. A comparison of the elevations at which goats were seen during the ground and aerial observations is shown in Fig. 5. Goats were observed at both high and low �Boundaries c;~~ Fig. 14. The seasonal distribution of mountain goats on Mt. Princeton, Collegiate Range, Colorado. �- 31 Table 2.--Resu1ts of aerial observations of mountain goats, Collegiate Range, Colorado, March 1, 1963 to March 30, 1965. Date Flight Time (Hrs.) E1ev. FeMale Kid Unc L, Total Location 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 2 0 4 0 (1) 0 0 0 (1) (1) (7) (1) (2) (3) Mt. Antero 6 2 ,2 (2) 19 (7) (4) (8) (2) (2)1 (4) (8) 2 (4) (4) 1 0 0 0 1 1 7 1 2 3 3 1 7 4 7 10 7 12 11 2 19 7 4 8 2 22 4 8 21 4 4 5 21 4 3 9 1963 April 12 April 14 May 3 May 4 May 18 2:00 2:00 1:_40 2:00 1:00 June 11 1:00 June 20 2:00 June 27 2:00 July 3 *Ju1y 10 1:30 2:23 July 23 2:30 Aug. 5 1:30 Aug. 23 1:30 Sept. 9 1:00 Sept. 21 1:30 12,500 10,500 12,500 11,000 11,500 12,000 12,000 11,500 11,000 11,000 12,000 12,000 10,000 12,000 12,000 12,700 12,500 13,000 13,000, 12,000 13,000 12,500 12,000 12,000 12,500 12,000 12,500 11,000 11,000 11,000 10,500 12,000 11,000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 2 0 4 0 4 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 0 0 8 0 0 0 8 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 11 0 0 11 0 0 0 11 0 0 0 (3) (1) 0 0 (7) 2 (7) (5) 2 4 (3) (9) Mt. Shavano Mt. Antero Mt. Princeton Mt. Antero Mt. Princeton Mt. Princeton Mt. Antero Mt. Grizzly Mt. Shavano Mt. Shavano Mt. Princeton Mt. Shavano Mt. Princeton Mt. Shavano Mt. Shavano Mt. Shavano Mt. Shavano Mt. Princeton Mt. Antero Mt. Princeton Mt. Mannna Mt. Shavano Mt. Antero Mt. Princeton Mt. Shavano Mt. Antero Mt. Princeton Mt. Princeton Mt. Shavano Mt. Shavano Mt. Antero Mt. Princeton Flight made in helicopter, all others made in PA-18 Super Cub. 0 These probably were male goats. This was based on sex ratio counts made from the ground in these areas. * �..•32 Table 2.--Results of aerial observations of mountai~ goats, Collegiate Range, Colorado, March 1, 1963 to March 30, 1965 (continued). Flight Time (Hrs.) Date Elev. FeMale Kid UncI. Total Location 12,500 12,000 11,500 11,000 12,000 12,000 12,400 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 6 1 0 0 0 9 0 8 4 (1) 14 5 (3) 3 4 28 21 Mt. Shavano Mt. Shavano Mt. Grizzly Mt. Antero Mt. Princeton Mt. Shavano Mt. Shavano 13,000 12,000 13,000 10,000 12,400 11,500 ~0,500 9,500 12,500 12,000 11,000 12,000 12,000 10,000 12,000 13,000 11,000 12,000 13,500 12,800 11,500 12,500 11,000 13,000 13,000 13,200 12,500 12,500 12,500 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 3 2 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 2 5 5 24 7 4 (1) 1 12 12 4 **4 *~'(6 9 (1) 1 (3) 3 (4) 4 (4) 4 4 7 24 24 7 **1 4 8 (4) 4 (1) 1 (1) 1 ')b'(J,3 12 *~'(11, 1 29 27 **2,5 27 **10,1 (1) 1 2 (2) 0 2 16 8 (1) 1 Mt. Princeton Mt. Princeton Mt. Shavano Mt. Shavano Mt. Shavano Mt. Shavano Mt. Shavano Mt. Shavano Mt. Shavano Mt. Grizzly Mt. Antero Mt. Princeton Mt. Princeton Mt. Shavano Mt. Shavano Mt. Shavano Mt. Shavano Mt. Princeton Jones Peak Mt. Antero Sheep Mountain Mt. Shavano Sheep Mountain Mt. Shavano Mt. Shavano Mt. Antero Mt. Shavano Mt. Shavano Mt. Kreutzer 1963 *Oct. 10 Nov. 15 Dec. 14 1:30 2:00 2:00 (4) 19 21 1 1964 Jan. 18 Feb. 15 Mar. 17 Apr. 17 2:00 2:00 2:00 2:00 May 9 2:00 June 23 :45 June 26 1:50 June 30 July 13 :45 1:30 Aug. 14 2:00 *Aug. 15 5:00 Sept. 5 2:30 ** Yearling goats 9 10 8 0 0 1 4 0 ° 0 0 0 2 0 3 2 0 0 0 4 8 10 8 0 0 1 4 0 (5) (5) 24 7 2 �- 33 - Table 2.--Resu1ts of aerial observations of mountain goats, Collegiate Range, Colorado, March 1, 1963 to March 30, 1965 (Concluded). Date Flight Time (Hrs.) E1ev. FeMale Kid Unc L, Total Location 12,500 12,000 11,500 12,500 12,000 13,000 13,000 12,600 13,400 12,100 11,600 12,500 10,000 0 1 0 1 0 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 2 0 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 19 0 (1) 33 (1) 20 17 32 6 19 2 1 36 1 30 1 3 1 3 17 32 6 Mt. Shavano Mt. Shavano. Mt. Grizzly Sheep Mountain Mt. Kreutzer Mt. Shavano Mt. Grizzly Mt. Antero Mt. Princeton Mt. Princeton Sheep Mounta in Mt. Shavano Sheep Mountain 12,600 11,000 0 0 0 0 12 33 12 33 Mt. Shavano Sheep Mountain 12,500 0 0 26 26 Mt. Shavano 1964 Sept. 12 2:00 Oct. 25 2:00 Nov. 29 Dec. 29 1:30 2:00 (I) (3) (1) (3) 1965 Jan. 17 2:00 Feb. 13 Mar. 13 2:00 2:00 Total 776 68:53 90 123 379 Average of 11.32 goats sighted per hour of flying time. �- 3~· - 100 If.I s 75 ~ ~ CJ Ground Observations (Total-4265 ) Aerial Observations (Total-774 ) 1% 1% • ..-f ? J.4 Q) .g If.I rQ1 50 -+l 0 +I .to-\ 0 ~ ~ Q) 0 25 J.4 ~ § •• 0\ 1% 1% § •• 0 .-t §.. § •• •• .-t ~ ~ r-I .. ;:{ Average elevation in feet Fig. 15. Average elevations in feet at which mountain goats were observed during monthly aerial flights and ground observations in the Collegiate Range, Colorado, April 12, 1963 to March 1, 1965. �- 35 - elevations throughout the year with apparently However, they remained at the lower elevations winter months. no regard to season of year. for longer periods during the Data on the exposures occupied by the goats were separated into the following categories: north, south, east, and west. Of the 776 observations made from the air, 413 (53 per cent) were observed on southern exposures. Eighty-seven per cent of those observed from the ground were found on southern exposures. This could be attributed in part to the fact that, in general, southern exposures in the Rocky Mountains have the least severe climates. However, goats were observed on all exposures during most months of the year (Fig. 16). Mt. Evans.--No ground observations were made in the Mt. Evans study area. After the goats were released in 1961 few sightings were made and most of these were regarded as questionable. Mr. Walt Paulk, of Denver, Colorado, while hunting mountain sheep in the area, reported seeing eight goats southeast of Abyss Lake on the southern side of Mt. Evans on September 29, 1963 (W. Paulk, oral communication). This area was flown numerous times in an attempt to locate the goats reported by Mr. Paulk, but none were ever seen. Monthly aerial flights were made of the immediate area surrounding Mt. Evans as well as the areas to the north, west, and south.. However, goats were located on only three flights. The first observation was on September 28, 1964, when two adult goats were located in the cliffs on the northwest side of the summit of Mt. Evans at approximately 12,400 elevation (Fig. 3). The sex of these goats was not determined. The second observation was on October 26, 1964: fourteen goats were seen (two females; three kids, including twins; five yearlings; and four unclassified) on the eastern side of Mt. Evans. They were observed in the spruce-fir type along the edge of an area that had burned in 1962. Eleven goats (two adult females; three kids; and seven unclassified adults) were located on January 16, 1965, in the same general area, as the previous observation in October. This indicated that these goats tended to occupy the same general area below timberline during both winter and summer. The locality was characterized by sheer rock outcroppings and forest, similar to the habitat of the Black Hills in South Dakota, from which 11 of the original goats were transplanted. This area was extremely dissected with small valleys and rock outcroppings, in which a number of goats might be overlooked during census flights. However, it can be concluded that the herd on Mt. Evans has become successfully established as evidenced by the kids present in the herd. It is recommended that ground counts be made now that the general area of utilization has been ascertained. �- 36 - 100 87% co s:: 7S 0 oM ~ ~f.4 CJ Q) Vl ,CI 0 'Ci1 Ground Observations .(Total-426S) Aerial Observations (Total-774) So ..,0 .., fH 0 "a Q) C) 2S f.4 If· 12 West North South Aspect Fig. 16. Aspects used by' S,039 mountain goats, as evidenced by' monthly aerial flights and ground observations in the Collegiate Range, Colorado, April l2, 1963 to March 1, 1965. �- 37 LIFE HISTORY Previous studies have been made of mountain goats by Anderson (1940) in Washington, Casebeer (1948) in Montana, Brandborg (1950) in Idaho and Montana, Hanson (1950) in South Dakota, and Klein (1953) in Alaska. These studies have made available valuable information on the life history and ecology of the mountain goat in those states. Due to the limited number of goats (four) that were available as a result of the first hunting season in Colorado, the data on physical characteristics in this study were limited. Therefore, the data collected were supplemented and compared with data presented by researchersin other areas. Description Pelage and color.--The color of the mountain goat varies from white to grayishwhite throughout the year. Animals were discernible from a distance on the high, green slopes of their summer range but blended remarkable well with the spotty snow background of the winter range. The nose, horns, and hooves are black and form a sharp contrast with the white coat. Seton (1927) reported that one third of the goat skins examined in the American Museum of Natural History had a scattering of coarse, dark-brown hairs along the top of the back, rump, and tail region. He also described the skin of a young male from the Cascade Mountains of Washington that had a dorsal mane of brown hairs extending from the neck down the back and ending in a tuft of long dark hairs on the tail. Two of the goats (a yearling and a five-year old male) examined during this study had a similar scattering of dark brown hairs along the neck, back, and tail region. Brandborg (1950) also noted a similar distribution of dark hairs on the coats of a yearling and a day old kid during his study in Idaho. The coat of the mountain goat is shaggy and. is characterized by a dense underfur with long, coarse, guard hairs up to seven inches in length that form heavy mats over the front shoulders and hips, thus contributing to the humped appearance. An erect dorsal mane is present along the neck which, along with the guard hairs on the shoulders and hips, serves to make the animal appear much larger than in actuality. There also is a dense tuft of long, white guard hairs on the chin and along the throat. These characteristics are quite evident on the frontispiece plate of an adult male mountain goat. The dense underfur is fine, wool-like, and of the quality of the finest cashmere (Seton, 1927). Long guard hairs grow to within approximately eight inches of each hoof, stopping abruptly with only the thin underfur extending to the hoof. The coats of most goats become a light gray by April or May. This probably is due to wallowing in the dust during the summer and bedding on damp, muddy ground during the winter. During early May, Brandborg (1950) noted that dark red spots frequently appeared on the coat at the neck and throat region, which, upon close examination, were found to be the result of a heavy infestation of wood ticks (Dermacenter andersoni). The excrement of the ticks formed a stain that spread over the hair. This condition was not observed on any goats during this study; however, most goats were observed at such distances that this condition could have been overlooked. �- 38 It was noted, while skinning two of the goats killed during the hunting season, that the skin on the rump was somewhat thicker and tougher than the skin on the other parts of the body. This may be the result of the peculiar habit of goats of sitting on their haunches, similar to the posture frequently assumed by dogs. Goats often assumed this position during dusting periods and when alerted or just casually inspecting their surroundings. Shedding.--The mountain goat sheds its coat once each year, beginning in mid-May and continuing through August. The process begins in the neck region, which is shed completely before the rest of the body, and progresses along the back to the tail region. It was not uncommon to see long strands of white hair, a foot or more in length, hanging from the front shoulders and hindquarters of goats during early summer. Goats frequently were observed rubbing against rocks and dirt banks in an attempt to free themselves of loose hair (Fig. 17). Adult males generally were the first goats to complete the shedding process. One adult male on Mt. Shavano completed shedding by July 9, whereas the adult females and yearlings shed later and in that order. Kids did not shed their pelage until the second summer after they were born. One adult nanny (assumed to be quite old) did not complete the shedding process until the latter part of September. For a few weeks after the goats shed, the underfur was so short and thin that the goats were extremely vulnerable to biting insects such as horseflies (Tabanus spp.), deerflies (Chrysops spp.), mosquitoes (Culex spp.), and buffalo gnats (Simulium spp.). It was apparent that these insects bothered the goats until the underfur had grown out. Age and size.--There was considerable individual variation in size among goats throughout their lives. Kids of the species O. a. missoulae average around five to six pounds at birth (Seton, 1927; Casebeer ,-1948; Brandborg, 1950). The weights of the four goats taken during the hunting season varied from a 16 month old male weighing approximately 80 pounds to a four year old male weighing nearly 220 pounds. Measurements of the four goats killed by hunters are shown in Table 3. These measurements compared closely to those taken by Brandborg (1950) on goats of similar age classses in Idaho and Montana. Brandborg (1950) found very little difference in the size or weight between males and females to three years of age. Males four years and older were from 10 to 20 per cent larger than the females of the same age group. Average measurements of six females were: total length, 55.5 inches; height at shoulders, 34.4 inches; and weight, 117 pounds. These data were taken from goats in early spring when it was likely that their condition would be the poorest, so the weights might be low compared to those taken in the fall. Dentition.--The dental formula of a normally developed, mature mountain goat Incisors, 0/4; Canines, 0/0; Premolars, 3/3; and Molars, 3/3; for a total of 32 teeth (Brandborg, 1950). Lower jaws were obtained from the four goats shot during the hunting season. However, no measurements nor comparisons were made due to the small sample size. These jaws were cleaned, labeled, and stored at the Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department office in Fort Collins, Colorado. is: Horns.--Mountain goat horns are s~all but effective weapons and are sought by many trophy hunters. The measurements of the horns were taken on all four goats �Fig. 17. Goats frequently were observed rubbing against rocks and dirt banks in an attempt to free themselves of loose hair. Note hair on dirt bank in foreground. Fig. 18. Horn glands located at the posterior base of each horn on four year old male goat, killed in August, 1964. (Photo by J. Branney) �Table 3.--Weights and measurements Range, Colorado. of four mountain goats taken, August-September, Goat No. Age in months Sex Total length Tail length Ear length Hind foot Shoulder height Horn length Horn base Front Hoof l/L x W Hind Foot L x W Approx. live wt. 1 48 M *65.3 7 5 11. 2 41 ** 9.0 5.3 3.3 x 2.7 3.1 x 2.5 200 2 48 M 61.0 6 5 12.2 42 9.4 5.1 3.3 x 2.7 3.0 x 2.6 220 , 1964, in the Collegiate 3 16 M 39.0 3.5 4.3 10.7 28 6.7 4.2 2.4 x 2.0 2.0 x 1.9 85 4 28 M 53.0 3.7 4.7 13.0 39 8.6 5.0 2.6 x 2.7 2.4 x 2.7 140 * ** All measurements given in inches. Longest of two horn measurements. 11 Circumference at base of horn. .j::' 0 �- 4l and ranged from 6 3/8 inches for the 16 month old male to 9 3/8 inches on a four year old male (Table 3). It has been found that aging is possible both by the intermittent growth of the horns, causing the formation of annual rings, and by . the eruption and replacement of the teeth (Mosby, 1960). The details of these aging techniques were given in a review of literature submitted to the Colorado Cooperative Wildlife Research Unit, Colorado State University,Fort Collins, Colorado. G1ands.--The mountain goat is unique in having a musk gland located posteriorly to the base of each horn. Each gland is black, crescent shaped, about one inch in diameter, and extends almost halfway around the base of each horn (Fig. 18). The glands are possessed by both sexes, and, according to Barrett (1960), are most active during the rut when males slash brush with their horns, marking woody scent posts with musk from the glands. This behavior was not observed during the study nor was any odor detected to be emanating from the glands. Goats frequently scratched the area around the horn gland with the hind foot; however, thi~ may have been done simply to ward off biting insects or to alleviate an irritation. Seton (1927) postulated that the function of these glands was to bring the sexes together during the mating season. Hooves.--The characteristic features of the mountain goats' hooves enable them to attain greater mobility on rough, steep terrain than most big game. The lateral edges of each toe are composed of a hard, horny shell that surrounds the cushion-like pad of the inner foot (Fig. 19). Instead of being concave as in deer (Odocoileus hemionus) and elk (Cervus canadensis), the inner part of the goat's foot is convex and actually functions like a suction cup. These unique adaptations enable the goat to traverse the steep cliffs and travel over smooth rock surfaces that constantly confront them in their habitat. Although the track of the mountain goat appears almost square (Fig. 20), the measurements obtained during this investigation showed the hooves to be slightly longer than wide. The hooves of a 16 month old male measured 2.4 by 2.0 inches and 2.0 by 1.9 inches; those of an adult male measured 3.3 by 2.7 inches and 3.1 by 2.5 inches, for the front and hind hooves, respectively (Table 3). All measurements obtained showed the front hooves to be considerably larger than the hind hooves. Sound.--During this investigation goats seldom were heard to make any vocalizations, however, most observations were made at distances such that sounds made by the goats probably could not have been heard. One yearling goat on Mt. Shavano, that temporarily became departed from the main herd, was heard to emit a high pitched bleat similar to that of a domestic sheep. This sound was heard from approximately one quarter of a mile and was repeated a number of times while the yearling frantically searched for the rest of the herd. Kids, upon loosing sight of their mothers, frequently bleated until they located the parents. However, the nanny did not make any sound in response to the kid's bleating. �Fig. 19. Hind feet of four year old male goat. Note horny shell that surrounds the cushion-like pads of the inner foot. (Photo by J. Branney) Fig. 20. square. The track of the mountain goat appears almost �On another occasion, Mr. Richard N. Denney, Assistant Game Manager, Colorado Game, Fish, and Parks Department, noted that as a group of 17 goats passed by him that there seemed to be a continuing sequence of grunts and bleats (R. N. Denney, oral communication). On two occasions, a yearling goat was observed to approach an adult male. The older goat moved slowly away and made a low pitched grunt similar to the sound made by a domestic cow, but of shorter duration. No other sound, such as stomping of the front feet, which was noted by Casebeer (1950), was made by any of the goats observed. Senses Sight.--When describing the seeing ability of another animal, about all a man has to base his conclusions on are the records of various experiences relating actual observations that the animal in question has made. Therefore, a number of attempts were made during this study to determine' the quality of the mountain goat's eyesight. It was noted that goats could be alerted by waving a white handkerchief or by a man walking in the open at distances ranging from approxi-. mately 1/2 to 3/4 of a mile. However, the same objects would not cause any alerting action in the goats as long as the objects did not move. Goats were quicker to respond to moving objects below them, than objects above or on the same level. The only exception to this was that any object, regardless of what it was, attracted immediate attention if it appeared on the skyline either above or below the goats. If the object remained motionless, the goats seemed to ignore it and resumed their normal activities. Goats appeared to be extremely wary of flying birds and generally showed fright when approached suddenly by a bird, even though the bird might be as small as a Clark's nutcracker (Nucifraga columbiana). This could be the result of a conditioned reflex resulting from harassment by eagles (Aquila chrysaetos). It was concluded that goats were able to distinguish moving objects at distances greater than three-fourths of a mile, however, stationary objects, even at close range, often went unnoticed. Smell.--Most authors (Casebeer, 1948; Brandborg, 1950; and Hanson, 1950) agree that the sense of smell is quite highly developed in mountain goats and is relied upon to a high degree. During this investigation, a number of incidences were recorded in which goats detected danger by smelling. On one occasion a group of goats composed of a nanny, kid, and a yearling approached to within ten yards of the author who was hidden in a rockslide, before detecting his scent and becoming alarmed. The goats then ran uphill into a rock slide where they stopped and looked back, trying to locate the danger. They proceeded on up the mountain out of sight with frequent glances back down the valley from which they had come. On numerous occasions females were observed to smell their kids as a possible means of identification and frequently smelled the tail region while their kid was nursing. Hearing.--Hearing seemed to be the sense least used by mountain goats in their daily activities and in the detection of danger. It was noted, however, that goats have a keen sense of hearing, as one goat was observed to have been alerted by the click of a camera shutter at a distance of approximately 60 yards. �- ~ Rocks were often kicked loose by the investigator, while stalking goats; this made a great deal of noise. However, little more than a casual glance was exhibited by the goats. Rock slides were comm~n in the high country and may have been the reason for the lack of interest displayed by the goats in sounds of this type. On two occasions, goats were observed to bolt for a short distance, as a result of a loud clap of thunder in the near vicinity. Sign Probably the most obvious indication that there were mountain goats in an area was the presence of long strands of white hair hanging from bushes and limbs along game trails. Well-worn trails leading to the grassy hillsides between the talus slides and cliffs also were indicators of goat presence (Fig. 21). Tracks of the mountain goat can be distinguished from the tracks of mule deer and mountain sheep that occasionally frequent mountain goat habitat, by their larger size and characteristically square appearance. The mule deer track normally is smaller than the goat track and more pOinted toward the toe. The mountain sheep track also is smaller than the goat tract, but it is wider at the back of the track and tapers anteriorly more than the deer. The fecal pellets of the mountain goat are easy to recognize during most months of the year. Instead of being round or oval shaped, as are those of the mule deer, the goat fecal pellet is flattened anteriorly-posteriorly with a concave dimple on one end and a small teat-like projection on the other. Mountain sheep pellets can be distinguished from the above since they are flattened dorso-ventrally and do not form as round a pellet as those from mountain goat and mule deer. During May and June, when the animals were grazing on young succulent vegetation, the consistency of the feces was such that a conglomerate was formed, making it difficult to distinguish between sheep, deer, and goat. Other typical goat signs were the bedding grounds. These areas usually were located on a southern or eastern exposure above timberline in areas where loose soils were available. (Fig. 22). However, some of these bedding grounds were located on grassy slopes where loose soil was not abundant. These bedding grounds may have been the result of frequent and repeated use of "gophex garden~' by goats for dusting. This was evidenced by the fact that goats were observed on four different occasions to paw and bed on freshly pushed up pocket gopher (Thomomys talpoides) mounds. During hot summer days goats frequented these areas and took dust baths by lying on their sides and pawing the dirt toward their stomachs and over their backs with a front foot. This may have been done for the cooling effect and to rid themselves of flies. Breeding Activities Most authors (Seton, 1927; Casebeer, 1948; and Brandborg, 1950) agreed that the gestation period of the mountain goat is approximately 180 days. With this in mind, �Fig. 21. Well-worn trails leading to grassy hillsides between talus slides and cliffs indicated mountain goat presence in an area. (Photo by J. Branney) Fig. 22. Bedding ground used frequently by goats on Mt. Shavano. Located on a south facing slope at approximately 13,000 feet elevation. �- 46 the mating season of the mountain goats in the Collegiate Range probably reaches its peak during the latter part of November and early December, with the kids being born in late May and early June. The rut takes place about the same time in Idaho and Montana (Brandborg, 1950). It is thought that nannies are bred for the first time when approximately 18 months old and have their first kid when they are two years old. The reproductive tract from an 18 month old male was taken during the hunting season held in August of '1964. The testes of this goat were sectioned and examined microscopically to determine whether or not the goat was capable of reproduction (as indicated by mature sperm present in the seminiferous tubules). The sample was poorly preserved. Nevertheless, it was possible to determine that this particular goat was not capable of fertilizing a mature ovum. All other structures in the testes were developed normally and probably needed only the ,proper hormone to become virile. Brandborg (1950) and Hanson (1950) stated that 18 month old male goats took part in the rutting activities and were seen to follow females around during this period. However, no actual breeding by these animals was observed by either Brandborg or Hanson. A similar analysis was performed on the testes of two adult males over four years old. Mature sperm cells were present in the seminiferous tubules of both these goats, indicating they were fully capable of reproduction at this age. From this information it appeared that some male goats do not reach puberty until after they are two years old. Development of Young The young are born during late May and the first half of June, with the peak being reached during the first week in June. Brandborg (1955) stated that the earliest observation of a new kid was made on June 1 and the latest on June 15. The nannies in the Mt. Shavano herd generally remained in the rough rock outcroppings of their winter range at approximately 10,500 feet elevation to have their kids (Fig. 8). The females started moving up the slopes into the high alpine meadows above timberline during the latter part of June or when the kids were about two weeks old. This was a gradual migration, as the goats were observed during both summers to range just at timberline for one to two for one to two weeks before moving on to the high country above timberline. This probably accounted, in part, for the low mortality rate observed in this herd. The young goats would be less apt to be preyed upon by eagles, coyotes (Canis latrans), and bobcats (Lynx rufus) in this rough, rocky area below timberline. The young goats developed rapidly during their first summer and were difficult to distinguish from the 17 month old goats by late fall. During the first few weeks after birth the young goats nursed from one to three times per hour. These periods ranged up to 70 seconds in length, with a mean of 36.2 seconds per nursing observation for June. The nursing times gradually decreased throughout July, August, and September. By late September the kids nursed infrequently and seldom for periods of more than 15 seconds. As can be seen in Fig. 23, a significant decrease in the mean nursing times occurred between the months of June, �sept" i i:. Ran£:0 of D?tn. f--qJ--; ~: ~-;:-lOo8 ~ (2h) l.ugo .. ~-;( l[oan y 2 s-('C1.nc:G.rd el~J.'Ol'BOn each slcb of \.h0 ncan , • (n) ~ U1.l.iilb3:c of Obscrvat.Lon s , 093 $----"---, 1603 {. 1,,50 t1 (4'9') .~ •. G ~ .~ , .... Ju.ly f r---Ept---21.8 +- --J 1,,98 J~ (52 ) J.mo rl=l J ',,-' --------1 3602 .~ 3030 (h9) -', 15 30 Hill'sine Figo 230 01.)8Cl'V2.tio!1.3 45 ill 60 75 Soconds Dur'at i.on of t.hc ntn'sing t.ct p81'fo:ni~,d by nount afn g02.t kids in th3 R9.l1go, CoLoi-ado , Juno through SGptei!\b8A.~J 1963 and J.96L~o CoHc2:l.2.to �- 48 July, August, and September. The mean nursing times for July, August and September were 21.8, 16.3, and 10.8 seconds, respectively. Throughout August and September, the kids attempted to nurse; however, the nannies usually kept their kids from nursing simply by stepping over them and walking away or by butting them away whenever an attempt to nurse was made. The per cent of unsuccessful attempts to nurse progressively increased throughout the summer from 0 per cent in June to 4, 31, and 41 per cent for July, August, and September, respectively. It appeared that most of the young goats were weaned by the end of September. Kids were observed nursing during most hours of the day, with no particular time of day being the most popular. It was noted that some kids in the herd nursed immediately after the nannies arose from an extended period of bedding. Kids also were observed to nurse when the nanny fed for extensive periods of 40 to 60 minutes. It appeared that a sight stimulus initiated the nursing response in kids during these long feeding periods. In the course of these incidents, the nanny assumed an alert broadside-present posture toward her kid. In most cases the nanny looked at her kid, although, this was not always true. Kids were observed to get up from where they were bedded and run 15 to 20 yard~ to their mother's side to nurse when she assumed the broadside-present posture. Throughout both summers of this investigation young goats were noted to suddenly stop playing and dash to their mother to nurse when the nanny assumed the above mentioned posture. No movement or sound, other than that mentioned was noted to have been made by the nannies that could have stimulated the nursing response in the kids. One yearling goat was observed to nurse throughout the second summer after birth. At this time the young goat was approximately 17 months old. The nanny, which was assumed to be the mother of the yearling, did not have a new kid with her at that time. It was not known whether she was bred and had lost the kid during development or shortly after parturition, or whether she had not conceived. The nursing periods were not as frequent for the yearling as for the kids. However, the duration of these nursing periods was longer (mean 43.0 seconds) for the yearling than for the kids. The yearling followed and bedded near the nanny throughout the summer, and never was chased nor was any intolerance shown by the nanny, as was displayed by the nanny toward all the other yearling goats in the herd. �- 49 - MOVEMENTS IN THE COLLEGIATE Daily Movements Daily movements of the mountain goats primarily were .,;cd hetween the two activities, feeding and bedding. The distances moved, by the goats in the Shavano herd, when feeding and traveling, were recorded in yards. An attempt was made to determine the cruising radius of this herd, however, this was found to be extremely difficult since goats frequently traversed an area when feeding then turned and fed back across the same area, a short distance higher or lower than before. Only data from those days when the goats were under continuous observation for 12 or more hours were used to determine the mean daily movement. A sample of ten days was used which encompassed four days of what was considered to be local drift. From these data it was found that the mean daily movement, excluding the four days of local drift, was 691 yards with a standard error of 82 yards. Including the four days of local drift the mean daily movement was 921 yards with an even larger standard error of 136 yards. Feeding.--The goats usually left their bedding grounds and started feeding shortly after daylight. Feeding continued until mid-morning. The morning feeding was found to be the longest of the daily feeding periods. Mountain goats were observed feeding during all daylight hours for periods of continuous feeding from 10 minutes to two hours and 15 minutes. During most summer days the goats tended to feed uphill in the morning and early afternoon; They in late afternoon and evening they fed downhill toward the valley bottom. This daily movement uphill during the hot part of the day may have been the result of the goats seeking cooler elevations as well as areas of greater air circulation for possible escape from insects~ The Shavano herd fed as a dispersed band with no partiuclar sex or age group assuming leadership. This was indicated by first one, then another, of the goats in the herd foraging ahead. No evidence was found during this study to support Brandborg's (1955) hypothesis that goats fed in different directions and then regrouped later at a common bedding ground. Field data indicated that a significant difference existed between the lengths of feeding times throughout the four time intervals of each day; which were: Interval 1, 6:00 to 9:00 A.M., mean 63 minutes; Interval 2, 9:01 A.M. to 12:00 noon, mean 41 minutes; Interval 3, 12:01 to 3:00 P.M., mean 43 minutes; Interval 4, 3:01 to 6:00 P.M., mean 61 minutes (Fig. 24). From these data it was clear that the goats spent more time feeding during Time Intervals 1 (6:00 to 9:00 A.M.) and 4 (3:01 to 6:00 P.M.), than during Time Intervals 2 (9:01 to 12:00 noon) and 3 (12:01 to 3:00 P.M.). Thus, a daily feeding pattern of two active periods, morning and evening, were separated by minor feeding during the middle of the day. No significant difference occurred, however, between Time Intervals Two and Three, and One and Four. Resting.--Goats were observed to lie down during all periods of the day. Continuous time in the bed ranged from two minutes to one hour and 40 minutes. During bedding periods goats were seen ruminating and dusting. Occasionally they stood up, stretched, pawed their bed with a front foot and then laid down in a different position. Kids bedded close to their mother's back on the uphill side. The kids occasionally were hidden behind their mother's back thus causing erratic counts to occur. �Time Interval I I ~~100 408 (29) ~., It (3 : OJ. to 6: OJ P em 0 ) I <-. Timz Interval 3 (J2:01 to 3:00 p sm s ) ril I I '* Range of Data *~Hean + 2 standard 4209+201 (n) 'E$J 2 (9:01 to J2:0J aomo) on of the mean. Number of Observationso each side (39) Tim:; Interval errors c I \Jl o - 4102 -:-201 (29) Tinle Interval 1 (6:-00 to 9: 00 a.oTilo) I . [--fl I I 62 \)9 ! 304 (19) 20 45 70 Feeding Figo 2L(0 The mean time spent 95 J20 140 t:Ll1es in mtnut cs feeding by mountain goats in the Collegiate Range , Colorado J JllJ1e 1 to September 30, 1963 and 1961J0 �- 51 ,- Yearling goats appeared to be more restless during extended bedding periods than did adults and kids. The yearlings often rose, moved around, and occasionally took a few mouthfuls of vegetation before lying down in a new location. It appeared that adult male goats in most cases prepared a more elaborate bed than did others in the herd. On slopes where loose soil was available, adult males pawed out a large, relatively flat area on which to lie. The nannies, kids, and yearlings, on the other hand, usually pawed the ground only a few times before lying down. Beds of adult male goats measured as large as five feet long with a terrace three feet wide by 14 inches deep on the uphill side. Beds of nannies and yearling goats seldom measured over three feet long and generally did not form a terrace. Goats readily used old beds in the area but always pawed the bed with a front foot before lying down. During hot summer days in July and August, when temperatures reached the high 60's, goats often returned day after day to the same bedding ground to dust; although, they also were observed bedded on talus slopes, grassy hillsides, ridges, and large rocks. No data were obtained which would indicate goats returned to any specific area to bed for the night. Instead, it appeared they bedded wherever they happened to be when darkness occurred. The data were subjected to statistical testing to determine if a significant difference in bedding times occurred between the four time intervals. In order to obtain a sufficiently large sample size that would approach a normal distribution, data were combined for Time Intervals One and Four, and Two and Three. The mathematical calculations are after Bailey, (1959). It was found that d is significant if p (probability that the difference between the two means could occur as the result of change variation within the same population) is greater than 1.96 (Tabular value from Appendix 1, Bailey, 1959). Therefore, since d is equal to 2.05 a significant difference does occur between the mean bedding times. Thus it can be concluded that the goats spent a greater amount of their time bedding through the hottest part of the day than during Time Intervals One and Four, which were the intervals goats mainly spent feeding. Playing.--Adult mountain goats seldom were observed to engage in play activities. Kids and yearlings played at various times throughout the day; although, the tempo of the play increased in late afternoon and evening. The kids tended to band together in groups of from two to eleven individuals to play. Often the kids played alone. On one occasion a group of 30 goats moved into the bottom of a valley. The 11 kids in the group banded together and played in the cliffs and ledges along the edge of the valley. The herd, with the exception of the 11 kids and one adult nanny, were feeding and moved up the valley about 500 yards. The lone nanny, which appeared to be serving as a baby sitter, fed in the vicinity of the cliffs where the kids played about 15 minutes, then she moved up the valley toward the rest of the herd. All the kids then stopped playing and accompanied the lone nanny to where the remainder of the herd was feeding. Such activities and ledges took frequently were As many as five as jumping, running, and chasing each other through the rocks place during these play periods. During these play periods kids observed to mount each each other in si.mulated breeding behavior. kids were observed in the breeding position at the same time. �~. 52 Young goats frequently engaged in mock battles. These battles generally involved only two kids. Each assumed a nose to tail position on the opponent. The kids then moved around in a tight circle while butting each other in the flank and rump. During bedding periods kids occasionally were observed to climb upon their mother's back. In most instances they walked around and jumped on and off her back. One kid actually bedded on its mother for approximately 15 minutes. The nanny did not appear to encourage this activity; although she showed little concern or intolerance toward the kid. Yearling goats were observed playing on occasion but not as frequently as the kids. Once as a group of goats crossed a large snowbank, the kids and yearlings in the herd played in the snow for almost 15 minutes before tiring and moving on. Trave1ing.--Mountain goats spend most of their time throughout the day bedding and feeding in a small area, seldom moving more than a few hundred yards during the course of their daily activities. It was noted on 20 different occasions that the goats started traveling toward a new location. These unprovoked movements, or possibly local drifts, ranged from one quarter to as much as five miles in length. Typically, the distance was covered by a fast, determined walk. However, the goats occasionally would take a mouthful of vegetation as they moved along the way. These movements almost always took place in late afternoon and continued until dark. Under these circumstances the goats would feed throughout the next day in the immediate area until late afternoon and then start traveling again. This same procedure was repeated until the goats reached their desired destination, where they settled down and remained in a small area of five to six acres for three to seven days before moving on. In some cases up to as long as 10 days were spent in these locales. It appeared that the goats followed a grazing pattern as evidenced by the fact that they tended to move freely between five different basins throughout the two summers that they were under observation. Seldom did they remain in anyone basin for periods longer than five to seven days before they moved on to a new location. Goats typically traveled along well-worn trails in single file until reaching their destination, where they fed and bedded in a dispersed band. It appeared that no specific goat cssumed the leadership on these local drifts, for occasionally the goat that had initially assumed leadership of the movement would be replaced by another member of the band. As was mentioned before, the goats appeared to habitually use the same trails on movements to and from various areas. For five consecutive days a group of 30 goats was under continuous observation from daylight until dark. This group moved into the head of Sand Creek and remained there for two days. On the evening of the third day the goats started traveling westward at a moderately fast, deliberate pace toward Squaw Creek Basin. They traveled approximately two miles in two hours to where they were last observed at dark above Shavano Lake in upper Squaw Creek Basin. When observed at daylight the next morning the herd was in about the same location. They remained in the immediate area until late afternoon, then moved over into Angel Gulch, a distance of about one and one-half miles. It took them about one hour to make the trip. They remained in Angel Gulch throughout the day (for about 11 hours) before moving into the McCoy drainage, a distance of about one and one-half miles. They remained in this vicinity for six days bcfore moving again. The total drift covered approximately five miles and was the longest movement of this type observed in the course of the study. Other local drifts were apparent, but they were not as extensive as the one mentioned above. �- 53 Effects of weather.--During the study weather seldom seemed to have any noticeable influence on the daily activities or movements of the mountain goats. However there were exceptions. For example, when a severe hail storm passed over a herd of goats they would seek cover under nearby rocks and cliffs. The few times that this behavior was observed the hail stones ranged in size from 1/16th to 1/2 inch in diameter. The goats showed little concern for less severe storms with hail stones of smaller diameters. Afternoon rain showers occurred almost daily in the study area throughout both summers. The goats normally were feeding at the time of these rain showers and appeared to be unconcerned except for occasionally shaking the water from their coats. When more severe storms occurred the goats sometimes sought shelter under rocks and ledges, and often moved to the leeward side of the mountain to escape the driving rain. On one occasion, under particularly severe storm conditions, the goats moved down into the trees and cliffs on lower Squaw Creek. On cool, (mean daily temperature less than 500 F.) aloudy days, it appeared that the mountain goats remained to feed for longer periods of time throughout the day. They seldom remained in their beds for periods of longer than 20 to 30 minutes during rainy or foggy weather. Usually the goats started to feed after a rain shower passed. On clear, warm days (mean daily temperature over 510 F.) the goats seemed to spend more of their time dusting. \ Prevailing southwesterly winds blew above timberline. However, it appeared that wind had little apparent effect on the habits or behavior of mountain goats. Migration Mountain goats in the Collegiate Range did not exhibit a true migration. Instead, they moved throughout the Range with apparently little regard to the season. Goats were observed at both high and low elevations throughout most months of the year. However~ they tended to remain at the lower elevations for longer periods during the winter nonths than during the summer months. Goats were observed from the air on wind blown slopes above timberline in excess of 13,000 feet. They were observed above timberline on 15 occasions during January, February, and March. Thus it appeared that mountain goats were capable of living above timberline during the most severe winter months. It was thought that these irregular migrations to and from the high country probably were due to local weather changes. In winter, when severe snowstorms covered the vegetation above timberline, goats frequently moved to lower elevations below timberline on southern exposures where food was accessible. Here they remained until the ridges and slopes above timberline were blown free of snow and good weather conditions again prevailed. Then they moved back into the high country. On three occasions the goats pawed through 18 inches of snow to get at feed underneath. Since the areas above timberline where snow depths of less than 18 inches were few and almost entirely confined to the wind-blown slopes and ridges, it appeared that the winter habitat above timberline for goats w~s limited. Goats were observed in all areas between the highest and lowest ranges at times throughout all months of the year, since food was available in varying quantities in intermediate areas. Thus, if habitat requirements are met, goats probably will occupy all intermediate areas between the highest (14,000 feet) and the lowest (9,000 feet) ranges throughout all months of the year. �The one movement that appeared to be regular was the annual change from lower elevations to the high country in the spring by the nannies and their new kids. This movement took place in late June and early July, with the goats arriving on the summer range above timberline around July 4. They were preceeded in this movement by the adult males who moved up approximately the first week in June. This was a gradual movement, and took the goats one to two weeks to move the three to five miles from the kidding grounds at about 10,000 feet elevation to the summer range at approximately 13,000 feet. In the course of the breeding season in November and December it was thought that adult males moved varying distances in search of receptive females. It appeared that part of the Mt. Antero herd of males moved onto Mt. Shavano during the rut. This was supported by the fact that in late November and December, of both 1963 and 1964, the Mt. Antero herd of males decreased by two or three animals, whereas the Mt. Shavano herd increased at the same time by similar numbers. The goats traveled a distance of at least seven miles one way. General Movements In the summer, on warm humid days, goats spent most of the hot part of the day from 10:00 A.M. to 3:00 P.M. dusting. As can be seen by referring to Fig. 26, the most extensive dusting period of the day was from 12:00 noon to 1:00 P.M. Goats dusted infrequently on cool, cloudy days. Generally they returned to a common bedding ground to dust after each feeding period. Dusting behavior was similar for all goats observed. They usually started by pawing a shallow bed in the loose soil with their front hooves and lying down. Then by raising themselves slightly, with one front leg they pawed loose soil up under their stomachs and over their backs with the other front foot. Occasionally a goat got up and shook the loose dirt from its coat, then laid down in a different position, only to repeat the dusting-activity. All goats in the herd, from month-old kids to adults, were observed taking dust baths. It was not determined whether or not any difference existed in the frequency of dusting periods between the various age classes or sexes. It was thought that these dust baths might help keep the goats free from biting insects and also keep them cool. The dusting periods were accompanied by much scratching and rubbing. The neck and head were rubbed on the ground and the area around the ears and horn glands scratched with a hind foot. Most of the springs above timberline became dry in late July and August. This change in habitat seemed to be responsible for the goats making almost daily trips into the lower valleys for water. After drinking they moved back up the slope to the cliffs and rocks bordering the valley to bed down for the night. In spring and early summer, before the springs on the high slopes became dry, the Shavano herd spent most of their time in Squaw Creek Basin. However, in late summer and fall, after the springs were dry, it appeared that the goats spent-a greater amount of their time in McCoy Gulch, where water was closer and more accessible to their feeding grounds. A natural salt lick in Red Gulch was visited frequently by goats during most months of the year. However, the period of heaviest salt use was not determined. Some fecal pellets in the area were examined and found to be composed of almost 100 per cent soil. Brandborg (1955) thought that the propensity for salt was greatest during spring and early summer and that this desire might be the result of insufficient minerals in the new, succulent vegetation. �- 55 - -- Warm Days ---- Cool Days • • So 30 • 10 I -. • ../ ~ 8.. co ----.--- 8.. o-, •__,-e<, ,.... ----.---- ..•. »>" -, .. 8.. 8.. 8.. 8•• 8.. 8.. 8 o r-f ~ ~ r-f C\I C""\ ...:t Time of Day Fig. 26. Observations of mountain goats dusting in the Collegiate Range, Colorado, June 1 to september 1, 1964. �- 56 BEHAVIOR Intraspecific Relationships Group interaction.--The mountain goat is considered to be a gregarious species; however, a great deal of intolerance was displayed by members of any particular band toward each other. As has been mentioned previously, kids and yearlings were frequently seen playing and probably showed the least amount of intolerance toward each other of any age class. Kids and yearlings commonly bedded and fed close to each other. On four occasions they were seen playing together. Although it appeared that mountain goats preferred to live in close groups (bedding, feeding, and traveling together)~ adult goats in the herd appeared to be extremely intolerant of each other. Probably the most intolerant animals within the herd were the adult females with kids. Seldom were other goats, regardless of age class, allowed to approach within about 10 feet of a nanny with a kid. This was most apparent during the early part of the summer when the kids were only a few weeks old. However, intolerance also existed to a lesser degree in nannies wi t hout; kids. This intolerance generally resulted in little more than a short rush-threat of three to four yards by the nanny in an attempt to bluff the intruder. Yearlings, on the other hand, were observed to have been chased by a nanny for distances up to 50 yards. No physical contact was observed during these incidents. Yearling goats in the herd probably were spurned by the nannies more than any of the other age classes. Nannies also were noted to chase adult males and females as well as kids and yearlings. This intolerance was so intense that nannies were observed on 12 d Lf fe're n t occasions to rush or hook at a yearling with their horns, even when being harassed or chased by an airplane or when moving away after having been frightened by a person. Yearling goats frequently were seen to tease adult nannies. In this behavior they made short rush-threats and swipes with the horns at the nannies and occasionally were seen to rear up stiffly on their hind legs. Usually the nanny became tired of this activity after a few minutes and chased the yearling from the vicinity. On occasion adult males joined the nanny-kid-yearling groups for a few days, but they usually selected their bedding sites a short distance away from the main herd. Seldom did they intermingle with the group. The adult males always moved away when appr9ached by one of the other goats. On one occasion a yearling male chased an adult male from his bed which the former promptly occupied. On being approached or when approaching other goats, adult males always assumed a characteristic posture of lowered head, neck outstretched, and presentation of the broadside toward the other goat. They generally sidestepped away or toward the other goat when these meetings occurred. In the incidents cited above the adult male moved away from the yearling male while emitting a low, coarse grunt. Wandering adult males occasionally came in contact with other groups of male goats. These meetings were characterized by the lowered head, outstretched neck, and presentation of the broadside, as described earlier. At this time they walked around each other in a tight nose-to-rump circle, similar to the behavior exhibited by kids. No physical contact occurred during these incidents. This behavior might be closely related to that taken by males when they fight during the breeding season. �- 5'7 On one occasion, in August of 1964, when a lone adult male joined a group of three adult males, some intolerance was shown. When the strange goat appeared, about 30 yards upslope from the group of three, all of the goats including the lone male assumed the present-threat posture described by Geist (1965). This posture includes presenting the broadside toward the other goat, arching the back and belly upward, arching the neck and head downward, and stretching the front and hind legs so that they are straight and stiltlike. The lone male then approached one of the males in the group. The two goats proceeded to walk stiffly around each other in a tight nose-to-rump circle as described earlier. Each goat then moved about four or five yards away from the others. Sitting on their haunches they commenced pawing dirt rapidly up under their stomachs and over their flanks. They then arose and again assumed the nose-to-tail position. This activity continued for about 20 minutes before the lone male moved up the slope out of sight. This same behavior was noted by Geist (1965) who mentioned that during the breeding season adult males frequently dug "rut-beds" during the fervor of the rut. Throughout the two summers of this study, adult males in the Collegiate Range were observed to display a rut-bed type of behavior on six different occasions. This indicated that digging behavior not only occurred during the breeding season, as described by Geist (1965), but probably took place whenever strange adult males came in contact with other males regardless of the season or time of year. This behavior was noted only between males and never was observed between males and females. During the incident mentioned earlier, when the yearling male bluffed the adult male from his bed, the young goat performed the rut-bed activity. Agonistic behavior normally was displayed by adult females toward other adult females when one or the other approached to within the minimum tolerance distance (about 10 feet) of themselves or their kids. Here again no physical contact was observed during these displays which usually resulted in nothing more than a short rush-threat accompanied by a horn-thrust performed by the attacking nanny. The opponent retreated in all cases observed. None of the observations indicated that a particular goat served as leader of the band. Howe ve r , the older adult nannies with kids appeared to demand the greatest amount of respect among the various age groups. The "peck order" within the herd in decreasing amounts of respect was as follows: nannies with kids, nannies without kids, two-year olds, yearlings, kids, and adult males. Grouping.--Goats were observed in groups ranging from one to 36 individuals (Table 4). The average group size was 10.6. It can be seen in Fig. 27 that the herd size gradually increased until the breeding season in November and December. At this time the herds reached their greatest size. Through the winter months the herd size declined until the spring kidding period was reached. The nannies remained on the common winter range or kidding grounds in small groups. It was thought that they sought isolation just prior to and after parturition. Yearlings which had been driven away by the pregnant females were seen commonly in small groups of one to five individuals during the kidding period. About seven days after parturition the nannies and their kids started moving toward the high country. One nanny, which had twin kids, was observed to be followed by six yearling goats during late June. Generally, the yearlings remained with the nannies and kids until the young goats were about two years old. At this time the young males joined the groups of adult males away from the nannies, kids, and two year old females. �- 58 - Table 4.--Herd composition of mountain goats located in the Collegiate Range, Colorado, March 1, 1963 through March 30, 1965. Month Grou:eSize Single 2-9 10-19 20-29 30-39 Total obs. Ave. size Singles 1/ Two or more 2/ January February March April May June July August September October November December 0 0 1 2 4 10 2 6 3 3 0 0 1 1 2 6 6 15 9 15 10 5 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 5 6 3 2 0 0 6 12 5 0 1 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 3 5 1 1 1 0 50 5 54 25 30 112 379 627 242 82 40 16.6 5.0 13.5 4.1 4.2 4.2 15.2 13.9 10.1 7.5 30.0 20.0 0 0 20 25 36 37 8 14 14 27 0 0 100 100 80 75 64 63 92 86 86 73 100 100 Total 31 70 19 29 12 1,706 10.6 19.3 80.7 1/ 1/ 0 0 2 0 0 1 qO Given in percent of total observations. Given in percent of total observations .. �- 59 - Ruttin1 period • 30 25 ~ on (J) Po 20 ~ 0 e C> b,) 15 Kiddin~ period • >-<0 -< -. ."" Cd J.. • ."" /\ 10 • .-8-. 5 • rx. .0 Q) .<0 § >-:I I • • bO +> >-• -< 8 o• Z ~ ~ o Months Fig, 27. Seasonal grouping of mountain goats in the Collegiate Range, Colorado, 1963 and 196L. �- 60 - Adult males normally were found alone or in small isolated groups away from the nannies, kids, and yearlings. They occasionally came in contact with the nannykid-yearling groups but usually did not stay with the herd for more than one to two days except during the breeding season. Probably the most common groups observed during the Summer were those composed of nannies, kids, and yearlings (Fig. 28), and small groups of adult males composed of one to five individuals (Fig. 29). One adult male seemed to prefer a solitary existence and usually could be found within a few hundred yards of a certain promontory on Mt. Grizzly. Occasionally he joined the Antero herd, which ranged approximately three miles away. However, he remained with this herd only three to four days before returning to his chosen isolated area on Mt. Grizzly. Productivity.--The goats in the Collegiate Range appeared to have a higher reproductive rate and lower mortality rate than those studied in Idaho and Montana (Brandborg, 1955). The highest reported production rate in the literature was by Hanson (1950), who reported a nanny:kid ratio of 100:86 on goat ranges in South Dakota. The Mt. Shavano herd was the only herd observed intensively in the present study, therefore the only one on which accurate information on mortality and natality were available. During the 1963 kidding period there were eight adult females, 12 kids, two yearlings, and three adult males in the Mt. Shavano herd. This was a nanny:kid ratio of 100:150, a ratio higher than any reported' in the literature. In the Shavano herd, in the spring of 1963, there were four sets of twins and four single kids born to the eight females. One kid disappeared about two weeks after birth. The cause of its disappearing was not determined. During the spring of 1964, there were nine adult females, nine kids, eleven yearlings, one two year old male, and three adult males in the Shavano herd. One nanny did not have a kid with her. It was not known whether she had lost the kid during development, shortly after parturition, or whether she had not conceived. However, she was observed to be accompanied by a yearling (assumed to be hers) which was allowed to nurse throughout the summer and fall. The nanny:kid ratio, including the nanny that did not have a kid, was 100:100 for the summer of 1964. It was thought that this high reproductive rate could be attributed, in part, to the fact that all the adult females were concentrated into two large herds (Shavano and Sheep Mountain), making it highly improbable that any adult female would go through a breeding season unbred. Over the two year study only two incidents of mortality were recorded in the Shavano herd and these were of kids that disappeared within the first two weeks after birth. This mortality rate was significant in that goat herds in Montana, Idaho, Washington, and South Dakota have a high loss in the kid to yearling age' class. Most investigators (Anderson, 1%0; Hanson, 1950; and Brandborg, 1955) found that seldom more than 50 per cent of the kids lived through the long-yearling age class. The nanny:yearling ratio in the Mt. Shav,sno herd was 100:133, which also is higher than any reported in the literature. The Sheep Mountain herd appeared to have a high reproductive rate also. Only aerial observations were made of this herd. However, the data indicated that the �Fig. 28. Nanny-kid-yearling group showing nanny and her four month old kid and 16 month yearling. Note size graduation. Fig. 29. Males two years old and older generally were found alone or in small groups of two to five individuals. This shows a 28 month old male on Sheep Mountain in spruce-fir type. (Photo by G. Bear) �- 62 nanny:kid ratio was near 100:100. A classification count made by Richard N. Denney, Assistant Game Manager of the Colorado Game, Fish, and Parks Department, from a helicopter on August 15, 1964, revealed ten nannies, ten kids, two yearlings, and five unclassified goats(R. N. Denney, oral communication). At least one set of twins was born in this herd during the spring of 1964. Interspecific Relationships Deer.--Mule deer were found on both the high summer range and the winter range occupied by the mountain goats. The goats generally occupied rougher, steeper terrain than deer. On eight occasions deer and goats were observed within 100 yards of each other. Little attention was shown by either species to the other. On July 29, 1964, a herd of 30 goats was observed to feed within ten yards of five adult male mule deer for 30 minutes on the high summer range in Squaw Creek. A deer or a goat occasionally raised their heads and looked at the other. However, this seemed to be just a casual glance and each resumed feeding without hesitation. The goats and deer then bedded for 35 minutes within 30 yards of each other. No intolerance nor attention was shown by either the deer or goats toward the other. Deer and goats also were observed on the winter range together. Here again they appeared to be indifferent to each other. Although deer and goats fed on some of the same plants in the alpine summer range, little competion apparently existed, due to the abundance of vegetative growth during the summer. Some competition might exist between deer and goats on the winter range for browse although it is thought that winter competition was negligible since deer primarily are browsers and goats grazers. Deer probably acted as competitors for only a short period of time as they migrated from the higher to the lower elevations in the fall. The mountain goats winter range tends to be located at higher elevation and in steeper, rougher terrain than that utilized·as winter range by deer. Elk.--Elk were observed at both high and low elevations throughout most month;-;f the year. These largest of Colorado's big game animals probably came in contact with goats on occasion; but no incidents of strife were observed. Brandborg (1950) reported that some intolerance existed between goats and elk at salt licks. He stated that elk were dominant and used the lick first. In the cocrse of this study, elk were observed feeding on the slopes and in the high basins above tirnberline during the summer and probably competed with goats for grass to a limited extent since both animals are grazers. Elk also were observed feeding during January, February, and March on the high, wind-swept slopes above timberline on Mt. Princeton. Since these wind-swept areas above timberline were limited and the fact that goats and elk both fed on some of the same food items competition probably existed. However, it was not determined to what extent. Further winter food habit studies are needed before any definite comparison or evaluation of competition can be made. Bighorn sheep.--Bighorn sheep are distributed throughout the Collegiate Range. Sheep appeared to be more capable of inhabiting the rough, steep terrain occupied by mountain goats, than any of the other big game species. Also, mountain �- 63 sheep probably came in contact with the goats more frequently than any of the other big game animals. Few observations were made of sheep-goat inter-relationships, but on one occasion in April, 1964, seven goats were located in the cliffs above the North Fork of the South Arkansas River. Seven mountain sheep (six females and one yearling ram) were grazing on the same ridge within 30 yards of the goats. Neither the sheep nor the goats paid any attention to each other. Evidence of intolerance was noted in the same area on April 19, 1964, between goats and sheep. Ten goats were observed feeding in a scattered band across an open hillside. Two adult female sheep came down the slope at a fast walk and approached to within about ten feet of the goats and stopped. All goats in the herd were alerted by the approach of the sheep and stood watching them. One ewe sheep started to wa Lk between two female goats, which were about 15 feet apart. One adult nanny, which had twin kids, made a short rush at the sheep, which bolted down the hillside for about 100 yards before stopping and looking back. The other ewe then detoured up the hillside and around the group of goats before continuing down the slope and joining the other ewe. A similar type of antagonistic behavior between sheep and goats was noted by Klein (1953: 93) in his study in Alaska: "A band of seven sheep, which were grazing, suddenly stopped and stood watching two adult goats approaching them along a well-worn trail. As the goats indifferently approached the band, the sheep turned and quickly climbed several hundred feet up the side of the mountain and out of the way of the goats." He observed this same type of action several times. Apparently goats were indifferent to the presence of sheep, but at times the sheep might become annoyed and leave an area that was inhabited by goats. It was thought that competition for food on the summer range between goats and mountain sheep was small. Mountain sheep in the Collegiate Range appeared to occupy those areas at, and below, timberline at elevations from 9,000 to 11,500 feet. The goats, on the other hand, ranged on the ridges and slopes above timberline at elevations from 12,000 to 14,000 feet during most months. In the winter when deep snows'cover the vegetation above timberline and before the winds have blown the ridges free of snow, mountain goats and mountain sheep were found occupying the same wintering grounds. If the goats and sheep were confined to these areas for extended periods, competition could become a serious factor. However, the goats moved to and from these mutually utilized wintering areas and seldom remained in them for more than a few days. Thus, competition between goats and sheep was minimal. Domestic livestock.--Domestic livestock seldom were found in the rough, precipitous terrain commonly inhabited by mountain goats. It was known that goats ranged Widely throughout the Collegiate Range and in so doing moved through many of the major valleys where domestic livestock were grazed during the summer. Therefore, it was probable that some interspecific relationships existed, but the extent was not ascertained. Humans.--The reaction of mountain goats to man and his activities varied considerably throughout the study. It was found that the goats were wary and se Ldom allowed a man to approach c loser than 300 to 400 yards. ,{hen stalking goats a methodical, slow approach was necessary and the success of the stalk �- 64 - largely depended on the direction of the wind and the ability of the stalker to keep out of sight. Seldom was it possible to approach within one-fourth to onehalf mile of goats, when walking in plain sight, without frightening them. When alarmed, the goats generally did not run but moved at a fast, determined walk into the roughest, most inaccessible terrain in the area. When deliberately stalking goats it frequently was possible for a person to approach within 50 yards. On one occasion the investigator was able to approach within six yards of a two-year old male. This stalk was made in plain sight of the goat at all times, however, movements were made only when the goat was feeding or looking away. The goat occasionally watched the observer for a short period but soon resumed feeding. The last few steps before the goat bolted, were made with the goat looking directly at the investigator. The only action noted, before the goat ran, was a slight squatting posture and raising of the tail. A peculiar reaction was displayed by goats when approached by a man from a distance. In this situation the goats casually would move out of sight over a hill or rise and then rapidly lengthen the distance between themselves and the human. It is thought that the goats probably ran or trotted after moving out of sight. This is evidenced by the fact that one group of goats was observed to have traveled close to three quarters of a mile in about five minutes. This behavior was noted on three different occasions. In one case a group of four adult males was approached to within approximately 200 yards before casually walking over a ridge out of sight. It was assumed that the goats would be just over the ridge. However, when the top of the ridge was reached the goats could not be located. In the short period of time it had taken to reach the crest of the ridge, possibly five minutes, the goats had moved down the other side of the ridge and across a valley approximately one quarter of a mile wide and up into the cliffs on the other side. The herd had covered close to three quarters of a mile from where they were first observed. Brandborg (1955) cited an example of a group of three goats traveling more than three-fourths of a mile in 25 minutes while gaining 1,000 feet in elevation. It appeared that the goats became more apprehensive toward an approaching airplane as the study continued. For example, the goats on Sheep Mountain and Mt. Evans, which were not discovered until the latter part of the study, displayed less fear of the airplane than did the goats on Mt. Shavano, Mt. Antero, and Mt. Princeton, which had been observed and counted from a plane since the initiation of the study. Young goats generally stood close to their mother's side and occasionally scrambled under their mother's stomach when approached by a low flying airplane. Other goats were observed on several occasions to take refuge under large rocks or in cliffs when being pursued or harassed by an airplane (Fig. 30)0 On one census flight a two-year old male pOSitioned himself in a space between two large rocks and refused to be driven from his hiding place although the helicopter approached to within 20 feet of the goat. Other animals.--Numerous small mammals were observed on or near the study area. However, only two observations were made in which small mammals affected the behavior of the goats. These two occasions involved marmots who suddenly appeared close to a goat, causing it and other goats in the herd to bolt for a �Fig. 30. Goats frequently took refuge under ledges and rocks when harassed by a low flying airplane. Note the five goats under ledge on the right side of the rock outcropping. �- 66 short distance. Marmots frequented the area above timberline, but unless they appeared suddenly close to a goat, as described, they were completely ignored. Numerous species of birds (eagles, ravens (Corvus corax), crows (£.. brachyrhynchos), magpies (Pica pica), and others) were observed in the study area. The sudden appearance of a large bird, such as an eagle or raven, regularly attracted the attention of the goats and on one occasion the sudden appearance of a Clark's Nutcracker caused a yearling goat to run for a short distance. Only one incident was recorded of an interaction between mountain goats and coyotes, although coyotes were common in the study area. In this particular case a coyote crossed approximately 100 yards below a herd of 30 goats that "ere bedded on an open hillside. One adult nanny saw the coyote and immediately jumped up and ran about 50 yards uphill before stopping and looking back. The rest of the herd, wh i ch was unaware of the coyote's presence, followed the nanny but at a less rapid pace. All of the goats then proceeded to the top of the,ridge and bedded do,Yil,but remained alert and appeared to be quite nervous as they frequently stood up and scanned the slopes below. The coyote appeared to be disinterested, and, after watching the goats for a few seconds, moved up the slope out of sight. �- 67 ECOLOGY Essential Factors Food.--Studies in other areas have shown the food preferences of mountain goat to be extremely variable. These conclusions were substantiated by this investigation. From studies conducted in Washington by Anderson (1940), it was determined that goats browsed more than they grazed. Anderson also indicated that if bunchgrasses were available on the winter range, they might make up as much as 90 percent of the diet. Cowan (1944) examined the contents of five stomachs collected in the summer on ranges in Canada and found that they contained 63 per cent grasses and sedges, 23 per cent willow, and 14 per cent herbaceous vegetation. It was indicated by Klein (1953) that goats in Alaska primarily were grazers, with grasses and sedges composing the greater amount of their diet. His study. indicated that browsing was done during the winter, but even during this time of year woody plants made up only a small per cent of the diet. Brandborg (1955) analyzed the contents of six stomachs and found that grasses and mountain mahogany provided 96 per cent of the volume of the winter food. He also found that during severe winters a high percentage of pine needles and twigs was taken, apparently as emergency rations. An extensive food habits study was conducted in Montana by Casebeer (1948), who considered grasses and forbs secondary in the summer foods of goats with shrubs of primary importance. Casebeer's analysis showed that grasses made up about 65 per cent of the winter forage with shrub species being of secondary importance. Many of the browse species which had been utilized heavily during the summer were not utilized in the winter. Summer.--The following techniques were used ~o determine the summer food habits of mountain goats in the Collegiate Range: (1) hand trailing, (2) utilization transects, (3) stomach content analysis, and (4) direct observations of the feeding animals. Stomach samples from the four goats killed during the regular hunting season were analyzed. The species of plants utilized and the per cent composition are shown in Table 5. These data show that grasses and grass-like plants made up an average of 83 per cent of the stomach samples. Utilization transects were established and surveyed in the Mt. Shavano area, in Angel Gulch, and Squaw Creek Basin during August of 1964. These transects were located in the areas of greatest goat use. The species of plants utilized and the indicated preference rating for each are shown in Table 6. Species utilized most in the Squaw Creek area were: Kobresia (Kobresia bel!ardi), Scribner wheatgrass (Agropyron scribneri), bluegrass (Poa spp.), and Carex (Carex spp.). �Table 6.--Resu1ts of Parker Three-Step range analysis transects Gulch areas of the Collegiate Range, Colorado, 1964. Squaw Creek Hits per % uti1- Prefer. transect ization index PLANTS Scientific Name Kobresia be11ardi Trifolium spp. Poa spp. Carex spp. Agropyron scribneri Trisetum spicatum Geum turbanatum Eriogonum suba1pinum Erigeron spp. Potentilla fruticosa Arenaria obtusi10ba Huchera bracteata Pseudocymopteris spp. Festuca ovina var. brachyphylla Ha lictotrichon mortonianum Artemisia scopu10rum Luzula spp. Nertensia a1pina Eritrichium argenteum Actinea grandif10ra Circium spp. Antennaria spp. Sedum integrifo1ia Sedum spp. Silene acaulis Cerastium spp. (C) * ~·.·k conducted Cornmon Name Kobresia Clover Bluegrass Carex Scribner's wheatgrass Trisetum Alpine avens Buck\-1heat Daisy Cinquefoil Alpine sand\-1ort Alumroot False carrot 13.5 17.5 3.0 2.0 2.0 1.0 13.0 3.0 2.3 .5 .75 1.0 45 o 10 9 28 6 o o o 1 Mod. None Mod. Mod. High High None None None Low in the Squaw Creek and Angel Angel Gulch Hits per % uti1Prefer. transect ization index~·'~·' Ave. 17.5 46.5 16.5 .0 .0 Mod. 'i~* 15.5* 17.0 1.5 3.0 5.3 1.0 11.0 .0 .0 .0 None Low LO\-1 High LO\-1 None None None .0 .5 Low .3 .0 4.0 8.5 1.0 9.0 5.0 2.0 1.0 2.5 42.5 .5 4.0 2.2 o o None None 3.0 .0 None 1.5 6 High .0 3.5 Mod. .2 .0 .5 2.0 .5 Low None Low .3 1.0 .4 0\ co Alpine fescue Alpine oat Alpine sage Woodrush Alpine bluebell Alpine forget-me-not Actinea Thistle Pussy toes Kings crown Stone crop Moss campion Chickweed Encountered under composition Average hits per transect. Criteria explained in text. not as regular .25 (C) (C) (C) (C) (C) (C) (C) (C) (C) (C) (C) (C) (C) (C) transect hit. .0 1.5 .0 �- 69 Although wheatgrass was present only an average of five per cent per transect, it had the highest preference rating (6.7 per cent) of any of the plants utilized. Wheatgrass appeared to have been sought out by goats and could probably be considered an "ice cream" plant according to Stoddart and Smith (1955). Kobresia, although utilized more than any plant, was the second most abundant plant in the area. It had a much lower preference rating than wheatgrass (Table 6). The utilization transects revealed similar results with respect to plants and per cent utilization, except that sheep fescue (Festuca ovina ~. brachyphylla) had a higher preference rating in the Angel Gulch area than in Squaw Creek. Band trailing and direct observation of feeding animals substantiated the preference rating of certain plants, as determined by utilization transects and stomachcontent analysis. It appeared that Kobresia, Scribner wheatgrass, bluegrass, wood rush (Luzula spp.), and Carex were utilized most. Other plants utilized are shown in Table 7. Limited summer use by goats was noted on redberried elder (Sambucus pubens) and cow parsnip (Heracleum lanatum) in the Red Gulch area, and also on Mt. Princeton. The most extensive use of cow parsnip was of the flowers and seed heads; although some use of the foliage was noted. Jones and White (1955) reported on two adult male goats observed on the west side of Mt. Antero in September of 1954 as having fed extensively throughout the day on alpine bluebells (Mertensia alpina). Upon examination the area showed both old and new utilization of alpine bluebells, indicating frequent use by the goats. Winter.--No utilization transects were conducted on the winter range due to the extremely rugged topography and severe weather conditions. Direct observation of the feeding animals and band trailing were the methods employed to obtain information on winter food habits. It was found that grasses and grass-like plants made up the bulk of the diet, although, moderate browsing of woody plants occurred. When the goats were on the lower extremes of their winter range, at elevations of 9,000 to 10,500 'feet, mountain muh Ly , Arizona fescue, and Thurber's fescue showed the greatest utilization. Serious winter hedging was noted on Thurber's fescue with as much as 95 per cent of the available plant material being removed. When the goats were on the high wind-swept slopes above timberline, they fed on many of the same plants utilized during the summer. Heavy use was noted in some areas on Carex and Poa species. On lower elevation winter range limited use was made of Rocky Mountain maple (Acer glabrum), mountain mahogany, squaw currant, and willow (Salix spp.) Other species of plants utilized on both the low and high winter range are shown in Table 7. Thus, the food habits studies showed that grasses and grass-like plants composed the greater part of the goat's diet throughout the year. However, limited browsing of woody plants occurred during the winter. Kobresia, Schribner wheatgrass, blue grasses, clover, and Carex were the plants preferred on the high summer range. Extensive use also was made of mountain muhly, Arizona fescue, and Thurber's fescue on the low winter range. The predominant plants in the areas of heaviest goat use on Mt. Shavano were alpine clover, dwarf clover, Kobresia, ane! alpine avens (Geum turbanatum), with an average �- 70 Table 7.--Mountain goat food preferences, as determined by direct observation, Collegiate Range, Colorado, 1964-65. Plant species Summer No. obs. % diet Winter No. obs. % diet Importance ======================== ... Grass and grass-likes: Kobresia bellardi Agropyron scribneri Poa spp. Muhlenbergia montana Halictotrichon mortonianum Festuca thurberi Carex spp. Festuca arizonica Luzula spp. Deschampsia caespitosa Trisetum spicatum Ko1eria cristata Stipa robusta Festuca ovina var. brachyphylla 1183 957 532 35.5 28.7 15.9 61 1.8 271 24 30 50 15 8.1 121 85 251 575 5.7 4.0 11. 8 27.1 61 228 495 23.4 47 2.2 2.9 10.8 .7 .9 1.5 .5 Highll High High High Low Low Mod. High Low Low Low Low Low 100 3.0 Low 20 30 .6 Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Low Forbs: Herac1eum 1anatum Trifolium spp. Hap10pappus macronema Mertensia spp. Arenaria fend1eri Eriogonum spp. Potent i11a spp. Senecio spp. Heuchera bracteata 5 10 .9 .2 4 .3 .1 .1 30 .9 5 4 .2 .1 2 LO\-1 Shrubs: Salix spp. Acer glabrum Sambucus pubens Ribes cereum Cercocarpus montanus Total 1/ High Mod. Low 3333 10% 5 to 10% 5% 4.4 Low Low 40 1.4 3.5 1.9 18 .9 2120 100.0 94 30 75 100.0 Low LOIv Lm-1 �- 71 of 17.0 hits per transect for the clovers and 15.5 and 11.0 for Kobresia and alpine avens, respectively (Table 6). The plant density index in these areas averaged 64 hits per transect, with an average of 43.7 hits per transect on desirable and intermediate plants. It appeared that these areas were preferred by the goats. Water.--The availability of water on the summer range probably influenced the local distribution of some herds. Throughout the latter part of July and during August most of the snow banks had melted and the intermittent springs in the high country had become dry, except for those in the deep valleys. At this time the Mt. Shavano herd made daily trips to springs located less than one-half mile from the normal daily range of the herd. The goats then moved back to the cliffs to bed for the night. It was not unusual during spring and early summer before the snow banks had melted, to see goats eating snow. Habitat.--Since the mountain goat is an exotic species to Colorado, only a detailed description of the habitat in which the herds have become successfully established can be given. Goats originally were released in the Collegiate Range in 1948. It is logical to assume that over the period of 17 years since their release, the goats now are occupying areas in the Collegiate Range most suitable to their habitat requirements. Probably the most salient feature of mountain goat habitat was the rugged topography in which these animals were found. Almost 'a I.L locales where goats were observed during this study were characterized by sheer rock outcroppings and talus slides interspersed with steep grassy slopes of 50 per cent or more. Although goats were found in the intermittent rock-grass type (Fig. 31), 70 per cent of the time these areas were bordered by cliffs and talus slides. Goats seldom were found far from such habitat. On the basis of the data collected, it appeared that mountain goats preferred to live on the high wind-swept· southerly and easterly exposures above timberline throughout most of the year. Eighty-six per cent of the goats were observed on southern exposures, of wh i.ch 92 per cent were in the 12,000 to l4,000-foot elevational zone. Another important habitat requirement was the availability of rough, precipitous terrain on low (9,500 to 10,000 feet elevation) southern exposures (Fig. 8). Topography of this type was used extensively by nannies for kidding ground during the spring. These areas also were used as wintering grounds during periods when deep snows covered the grasses above timberline. The high wind-swept alpine terrain above timberline is probably an important part of the mountain goat's habitat in Colorado. Goats were observed using these areas during all months of the year and the accessibility, availability, and extent of habitat of this type in Colorado might be a limiting factor during critical winter periods. Although water was not considered an important factor, it probably influenced the summer distribution of some herds. This was evident from the data on movements which showed that goats seldom were found more than one-half mile from a free water source. �Fig. 31. Goats utilizing the intermittent rock-grabs type on Mt. Shavano during September, 1964. �- 73 Decimating Factors Parasites and diseases.--Seventy-five fecal samples were collected during August, 1963, from the goat herds on Mt. Shavano, Mt. Antero, and Mt. Princeton. These samples were examined by personnel of The College of Veterinary Medicine at Colorado State University for internal parasites. A sedimentation process was used in the examination. All samples were negative with the exception of a pooled sample from the Mt. Princeton herd in which two larvae of the family Trichostrongylidae (stomachworm) were found. A complete set of samples (lungs, heart, liver, kidney, large intestine, fecal sample and blood) was obtained from the four goats killed during the hunting season. This material also was examined by personnel of The College of Veterinary Medicine at Colorado State University. All samples were negative except three of the lung samples. These three samples were infested with brown lungworm (Protostrongylus rufescens), a species common to domestic sheep and goats of North America. No complications were apparent from the moderately heavy lung infestation of these parasites. This infestation of lungworms probably is harmful to the goats only during severe winters when food might be scarce and the mountain goats' resistance low. In addition, cysticerci of the tapeworm (Cysticercus tenuicollis) were found in mesenteries of one adult male goat. Three adult wood ticks (Dermacenter andersoni) were located in the tail region of one goat. Ba sed on these results it was concluded that a low incidence of parasitism existed in the Collegiate Range goat herd and was not considered to be detrimental at this time. Blood samples were analyzed at the Colorado Game, Fish, and Parks Department Laboratory in Fort Collins, Colorado. Because the samples were preserved poorly, only a partial analysis was conducted. The results are shown in Table 8. No blood parasites were found. Predators.--Many potential predators of mountain goats were found within the Collegiate Range, but no incidents of predation were observed during this study. Brandborg (1955) stated that coyotes, mountain lions, bobcats, bears, and golden eagles, occasionally preyed on mountain goats in Idaho and cited a number of supporting examples. He thought that mountain lions and bobcats might be major predators since they were able to travel through the rugged terrain in which the mountain goats lived. Over the two year study only two cases of mortality were recorded and these were of kids that disappeared within the first two weeks after birth. It was not known whether these kids were killed by predators or succumbed to natural causes, as no remains were found. Fifty-five coyote scats were analyzed in the field. Only two (three per cent) contained items which could be identified as mountain goat remains. On the basis of the information collected during this study predation probably was not a major decimating factor, but contributed to the overall mortality of goats. �., 74. - Table 8.--Results of blood analysis from mountain goats killed in the Collegiate Range, Colorado, August - September, 1964. Mountain Goat No. 1 2 3 4 Sex M M M M Age 48 48 16 28 Erythrocytes/cu. mm. *7.26 6.02 6.01 8.10 6.85 Leucocytes/cu. mm. 2500 2100 1700 2300 2150 Neutrophils-Segs/% 19 19 Lymphocytes-% 51 51 Monocytes-% 6 6 Eosinophils-% 13 13 Average Hemoglobin-g/lOO mI. 17.6 16.6 12.3 17.1 15.9 Hematocrit-% 43.5 42.0 35.5 46.0 41.8 11.0 11.0 Nucleated, R.B.C.'s * Given in multiples of a million Unable to analyze due to condition of sample �- 75 - Illegal hunting.--Illegal hunting probably accounted for a limited amount of mortality in goats although it is not known to what extent. There were reports that poachers had operated in the Collegiate Range area, however, this was regarded as circumstantial evidence. Accidents.--Due to the extremely precipitous habitat in which goats live, there could be a high accident mortality rate. According to Brandborg (1955) snow slides and rock slides probably accounted for more deaths than any other factor. A miner, while prospecting in the Mt. Antero area, found the remains of a mountain goat at the bottom of a shallow prospect hole. The goat apparently had fallen into the hole but was unable to climb the steep walls and had starved to death. Another goat, which was discovered by Marvin W. Smith, Wildlife Conservation Officer, was thought to have been killed by lightning. This was a good possibility, since severe lightning storms occur often in the high country during the summer. Fighting, falling, and separation of kids from their mothers also can be regarded as contributing to the accidental death of mountain goats (Brandborg, 1955). �-, 76 ,- MANAGEMENT Census One of the most important yet probably the most expensive and difficult parts of mountain goat management is obtaining an accurate census. When attempting to manage a population as small as the goat herd in the Collegiate Range, it is essential to know the number of goats present and the rate of increase or decrease. Since the mountain goats in the Collegiate Range are found in small, widely scattered herds, it is extremely difficult, if not impossible, to obtain an absolute number or count of the goats in this extensive area. Therefore, an attempt was made to establish a system of aerial and ground trend counts of the key herds to make available population data that could be used for management. Based on experience gained in this study the most efficient way of censusing mountain goats at the present is by means of a slow flying, maneuverable aircraft. Throughout the course of this study several different aircraft were used for the monthly aerial flights. These included a Cessna 180, PA-12 Piper Cruiser, PA-l8 Super Cub, and a Bell 47G-3B helicopter. Of these, the helicopter was the best for censusing goats. However, the high cost of flying the helicopter ($80.00 per hour) far outweighed its advantages over the fixed wing crafts ($15.00 per hour). The PA-18, 140 h.p. Super Cub was considered the most efficient type of plane used, both for economy and for the results obtained. The slow air speed (60-70 m.p.h.) of the Cub enabled the observer to scan the slopes in greater detail than from the Cessna and Piper Cruiser, which had faster cruising speeds. Also, the Cub provided greater observational opportunity at all angles. The Cub was more maneuverable and better able to negotiate steep turns in the deep canyons and valleys. Another advantage of the Cub was its fast rate of climb, which was extremely important when flying 'over rough, precipitous terrain at altitudes of 13,000 to 14,000 feet. Early morning and late evening were the best times to census goats since most of the animals were actively feeding at these times, and thus easier to locate. It was more difficult to obtain accurate air counts for mountain goats than for any of the other big game species observed. When approached by an airplane, goats often sought shelter under large rocks or ledges and refused to be driven from their hiding places. Kids were observed to "crawl" under rocks when harassed by an airplane. One adult nanny stood in front .of a hole in the rocks in which her twin kids had taken refuge. She made no attempt to follow the kids but stood guard at the entrance. Other goats were noted to press tightly against a cliff or in areas where trees were available to press against the trunk of a tree when approached by an airplane. For goats in open areas above timberline, one of the best ways to obtain accurate counts was to take photographs of the herd and then count the goats in the picture at a later date (Fig. 32). This eliminates making a number of flights over the goats in an attempt to obtain accurate counts. It also lessened the chance of injury to the goats that could result from repeated harassment of the herd in rough, precipitous terraino Fairly accurate classification counts could be made in most cases (Fig. 33). �Fig. 32. Photo showing use of aerial photography censusing mountain goats. in Fig. 33. Fairly accurate classification counts could be made from aerial photographs. Note kids, yearlings, and adult goats. �- 78 - There are a number of variables involved in aerial censusing of big game. These include the experience of the pilot and observer, speed of the aircraft, weather conditions, background, and type of terrain. Trend Counts Annual trend counts were established for the key herds on Mt. Shavano and Sheep Mountain. These herds were selected since they contained almost 80 per cent of the goats in the Collegiate Range and were the only herds in which females were present. The best time of the year to obtain accurate classification counts of the herds was during the first two weeks in July. By this time most of the nannies and their new kids had moved to the high slopes above timberline and had joined the yearlings and nannies without kids. The kids, yearlings, and adults could be distinguished easily at this time. The best time to obtain a total count of the goats in an area is during the last two weeks of November. At this time most of the lone males will have joined the herds of nannies, kids, and yearlings. Ground trend counts are hampered by deep snow and coverage during most winters is limited to aerial surveys. Counts on two successive days in the Shavano area 'were necessary to obtain the desired herd coverage. The efficiency of ground counts was increased if the area was flown and the main goat concentration determined before going into the area on foot. The routes of travel and the observation points used when making ground trend counts in the Mt. Shavano area are shown in Fig. 12. Generally, the morning of the first day was spent traveling to the area. The afternoon and evening then were spent attempting to locate goats. From daylight until evening of the next day the prescribed route was walked in an attempt to locate goats. When making ground trend counts in the Sheep Mountain area, it was found that a previous flight was essential to determine where the main goat concentrations were before going into the area on foot. In the event that a plane was not available, the trend count route and areas of frequent goat occurrence shown in Fig. 11 were followed. However, it required three to four days to cover the area. Aerial trend counts should be conducted during the first two weeks in July for productivity information and before and after the mountain goat hunting season in August and September. This can be accomplished in conjunction with the ground trend counts conducted at the same time. Better results were obtained if the trend count routes were flown on two consecutive days thus reducing the chance of missing goats that were not counted the first day. One aerial trend count should be conducted during the breeding season in late November to obtain an estimate of total goats. The aerial trend count routes used are the same as those used for the monthly aerial surveys shown in Fig. 2. The data made available by the annual air and ground trend counts will supply information needed to properly manage the Collegiate Range herd on a maximum sustained yield basis. �- 79 - Trapping and Transplanting In areas where mountain goats have increased, it has been found to be a good management practice to trap surplus goats and introduce them into new areas. Transplanting operations in Montana and Alaska have been successful in establishing new mountain goat populations (Brandborg, 1950, and Klein, 1955). The Mt. Shavano herd offers an ideal situation for future trapping and transplanting operations in Colorado,. The herd is known to frequent the lower Red Gulch area at times and apparently use this area on occasion as a source of minerals and as a migration route to and from their winter range. In the event that the Shavano herd is used as a breeding population in the future, salt blocks should be placed in the area to give additional attraction and to get the goats in the habit of coming to this location. This technique would simplify and benefit trapping operations in the future. A vehicle access road passes within 100 yards of the trail used by the goats as they move through the vicinity. This is unique in mountain goat habitat and would reduce to a minimum the time and effort involved in transporting trap materials and trapped goats to and from the area. A complete account of traps and trapping techniques are included in a review of literature on file in the Colorado Cooperative Wildlife Research Unit office. Hunting The first mountain goat season in the history of Colorado was held during August of 1964. Six permits were allowed on a drawing basis in the area north of Chalk Creek in the Collegiate Range. Since it is extremely difficult to determine the sex of male goats in the field, only goats with horns six inches or more in length were legal. Four of the six hunters killed goats for a hunter success ratio of 67 per cent. In view of the data obtained during this study is appeared that a general open season in the Collegiate Range in 1965, even under a limited permit system would be unwise with respect to sound game management because of the possibility of removing productive females. From censuses conducted in the area it was determined that approximately 20 adult females and 20 adult males were present in the Range, a male: female sex ratio of 100: 100. Since mountain goats are polygamous, a limited season on adult males is feasible, on a permit basis. The 'area should be divided into small units with well defined boundaries and these boundaries enforced. No mountain goat hunting of any kind is recommended for Mt. Shavano or Sheep Mountain since these are the only areas in which female goats were found (Fig. 34). The areas most likely to support limited hunting of adult males are: (1) Mt. Princeton, which would include the area lying between and bordered by South Cottonwood Creek on the north, Chalk Creek on the south, the Continental Divide on the west, and U. S. Highways 24 and 285 on the east, and (2) the north of middle Cottonwood Creek within the San Isabel National Forest (Fig. 34). Three permits could be allowed in each of these areas without seriously harming the goat population in the Collegiate Range. Since the mountain goat is an introduced species in Colorado, there are no statutes, other than the one that provides for a resident mountain goat license, governing the protection of mountain goats. Therefore it is recommended that laws be enacted to insure ~he protection of mountain goats in Colorado. �- 80 - Suggested Areas Closed To Mountain Goat Hunting. -I ISABEL ~ z z r-, ~) u, w MT. PRINCETON "14,197 At. MT ANTERO 14,269 '--. , \I ) / \ " \ Fig. 34. Map of Collegiate Range, Colorado, showing suggested areas closed to mountain goat hunting. �- 81 - SUMMARY 1. This investigation was concerned primarily with determining the status and habitat utilization of mountain goats (Oreamnos americanus missoulae), that had been introduced into the Collegiate Range, Colorado. Eight months were spent in the field with approximately 1600 hours being devoted to observing mountain goats and evaluating their utilization of habitat during the summers of 1963 and 1964. 2. The area involved was located approximately 20 miles northwest of Salida, in south-central Colorado, and lies almost entirely in the San Isabel National Forest. Intensive investigation was confined to Mt. Shavano in T50N, R6E, Sec. 5, 6, 7, and 8; and T5lN, R6E, Sec. 35 and 36, of the New Mexico Principal Meridian, Chaffee County, Colorado. 3. The topography of the study area is rugged, with a maximum relief of more than 7,000 feet, and includes several peaks in excess of 14,000 feet elevation. The bulk of the range includes metamorphosed quartzite and limestone with closely related shists and gneisses of sedimentary origin. 4. Vegetation on the high summer range (11,500 to 14,000 feet elevation) was characterized by low growing grasses, sedges, and forbs, whereas the lower winter range (9,500 to 11,500 feet elevation) was 'typically spruce-fir evergreen forest. 5. A total of 80 goats was located in the Collegiate Range. summer range boundaries were determined for all herds located. Winter and 6. Monthly aerial flights were conducted for gross information on distribution and habitat utilization. Goats were observed in areas ranging from approximately 9,500 feet to 13,500 feet elevation, with the greatest number (61 per cent) being observed in the 12,000 to l3,000-foot zone. Ground observations ranged from approximately 9,400 feet to 13,900 feet elevation, with 81 per cent being observed in the 13,000 to l4,000-foot zone. Goats were observed at both high and low elevations throughout the year. 7. A total of 5,039 field observations were made of the goats in the Collegiate Range of which 4,352 or 86 per cent were observed on southern exposures. 8. A description of such physical characteristics as pelage and color, age and size, horns, senses, and breeding activities; is presented. 9. Daily movements of the mountain goats were divided primarily between two activities, feeding and bedding. Data on these activities were recorded for distance moved in yards when feeding and traveling. A sample of ten days was used which encompassed four days of what might be considered local drift. The mean daily movement, excluding local drift was 691 yards with a standard error of 82 yards. Including local drift the mean daily movement was 921 yards with a standard error of 136 yards. 10. daylight Goats generally left their bedding grounds, start~d feeding shortly after and continued to feed until mid-morning. The morning was the longest of �- 82 the daily feeding periods. Goats spent more time feeding during time intervals One (6:00 to 9:00 A.M., mean 63 minutes) and Four (3:01 to 6:00 P.M., mean 61 minutes), than during time intervals Two (9:01 to 12:00 noon, mean 41 minutes) and Three (12:01 to 3:00 P.M., mean 43 minutes). Thus, a daily feeding pattern of two active periods, morning and evening, were separated by minor feeding during the middle of the day. Time intervals Two and Three mainly were spent bedding or dusting. 11. It appeared that the goats followed a grazing pattern in which they tended to move freely between five different basins. These movements always· took place in late afternoon and evening and the distances ranged from one-quarter mile to as much as five miles. Goats in the Collegiate Range did not exhibit a true migration. Instead, they moved throughout the Range freely rather than using particular areas during anyone season. 12. None of the observation data indicated that a particular goat served as leader of the herd; however, the elder adult nannies with kids appeared to demand the greatest amount of respect from the other sex and age groups. The "peck order" within the herd in decreasing scale of respect was as follows: nannies with kids, nannies without kids, two-year olds, yearlings, kids, and adult males. 13. Goats were observed in groups ranging from one to 36 individuals with an average size of 10.6 animals. The herd gradually increased in size until the breeding season in November, then the group size decreased until the spring kidding period was reached. 14. A high reproductive rate was noted in the Collegiate Range herd, with a nanny:kid ratio of 100:150 and .100:100 for 1963 and 1964, respectively. The nanny:yearling ratio during 1964 was 100:133. 15. Competition between goats and elk, deer, mountain sheep, and domestic livestock was considered to be minimal. However, some competition was noted between goats and mountain sheep during critical winter periods when sheep and goats were concentrated on the lower winter range. 16. Food habits of mountain goats were determined by stomach content analysis, utilization transects, and band trailing. Grasses and grass-like plants made up the bulk of the mountain goat's diet throughout the year with Kobresia (Kobresia bellardi), Scribner wheatgrass (Agropyron scribneri), Carex (Carex spp.), and bluegrasses (Poa spp.) showing the greatest use. Limited use was made of browse on the low elevation winter range. 17. A low incidence of parasitism was not considered to be detrimental. existed in the Collegiate Range herd and 18. The high, wind-swept alpine terrain above timberline appeared to be an important part of the mountain goat's habitat in Colorado. Goats were observed using these areas during all months of the year and the accessibility, availability, and extent of habitat of this type might be a limiting factor during critical winter periods when deep snows cover the grasses above timberline. �- 83 - 19. Aerial censuring proved to be the best method for determining the numbers of goats over a broad area in the Collegiate Range. Air and ground counts on the same areas compared quit~::-closely. When goats were located in open areas above timberline, one of the best ways to obtain accurate counts was to take aerial photographs of the herd and later count the goats from the film. 20. Aerial and ground trend count routes were established to provide information needed to manage properly the Collegiate Range herd on a maximum sustained yield basis. 21. Suggested management recommendations include a limited permit hunting system and legal protection for mountain goats as pig game aminals in Colorado. Prepared by Dale Hibbs Date January, 1966 Approved by Richard N. Denney Project Leader Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief �- 84 - APPENDIX A PARTIAL LIST OF VASCULAR PLANTS OCCURRING ON OR IN THE NEAR VICINITY OF THE Mr. SHAVANO STUDY AREA, T50N, R6E, SEC. 5, 6, 7, AND 8 AND T51N, R6E, SEC. 35 AND 36, OF THE NEW MEXICO PRINCIPAL MERIDIAN, COLLEGIATE RANGE, CHAFFEE COUNTY, COLORADO, 1963-l965.a TREES Abies lasiocarpa (Hook.) Nutt. Picea engelmannii Parry f. pungens Engelm. Pinus contorta Engelm. Pinus aristada (A. Nels.) Gill. f. ponderosa Dougl. f. edulis (Engelm.) Gill. Populus tremuloides Michx. Pseudotsuga menziesii (Mirb) Franco Betula glandulosa Hook. Subalpine fir Engelmann spruce Blue spruce Lodgepole pine Bristle cone pine Ponderosa pine Pinyon pine Quaking aspen Douglas-fir Mountain bog birch SHRUBS AND HALF SHRuBs Acer glabrum Torr. Arctostaphylos uva-ursi (L.) Spreng. Artemisia frigida Nutt. Artemisia scopulorum Nutt. Berberis repens Lindl. Cercocarpus montanus Raf. Dryas octopetala L. Happlopappus macronema A. Gray Jamesia americana T. and G. Juniperus communis L. I. scopulorum (Sarg.) Rydb. Lonicera involucrata (Richards) Potentilla fruticosa L. Physocarpus monogynus (Torr.) Coult. Prunus virginiana L. Ribes cereum Dougl. Rocky mountain maple Kinnikinnick Fringed mountain sage Alpine sage Oregon-grape Mountain mahogany Mountain dryad Goldenweed Cliffbush Common juniper Rocky Mountain juniper Honeysuckle Shrubby cinquefoil Small ninebark Choke cherry Squaw currant a Plants were identified by the investigator incidental to other phases of field work. Those difficult to identify were compared to known specimens in herbarium collections at Colorado State University. Final identification of questionable plants was made by Dr. H. D. Harrington, Department of Botony and Plant Pathology, Colorado State University. Nomenclature based on Hitchcock (1950); Harrington (1954); and Summer Camp Manual (1960). �- 85 APPENDIX A -- Continued Ribes inerme Rydb. Ribes sp. L. ~ Common wild gooseberry Currant Rose Wild red raspberry Willow Red-berried elder Canada buffalo-berry Snowberry Dwarf grouseberry sp , L. Rubus strigosus Michx. Salix sp. L. Sambucus pubens Michx. Shepherdia canadensis (L.) Nutt. Symphoricarpos albus (L.) Blake Vaccinium scoparium Leiberg FORBS Achillea lanulosa Nutt. Actinea grandiflora (T. and G.) Kuntze Allium cernuum Roth Anaphalis subalpina (Gray) Rydb. Anemone zephyra A. Nels. Antennaria sp. Gaertn. Arenaria fendleri A. Gray Arenaria obtusiloba (Rydb.) Fernald Aquilegia caerulea James Aquilegia saximontana Rydb. Arnica cordifolia Hook. Aster sp. L. Calochortus gunnisonii Watson Caltha leptosepala DC. Castilleja occidentalis Torrey Castilleja sp. Mutis Campanula rotundifolia L. Cerastium sp. L. Cirsium scopulorum (Greene) Cockll. Erigeron sp. L. Eritrichium elongatum (Rydb.) Wight Erigonum subalpinum Greene Eriogonum sp. Michx. Epilobium sp. L. Equisetum sp. L. Fragaria ovalis (Lehm.) Rydb. Gentiana prostrata Haenke G. romanzovii Ledeb. Geranium fremontii Torr. Geum turbanatum Tydb. ~hera bracteata (Torr.) Sere Heracleum lanatum Michx. Lathyrus leucanthus Merthensia alpina (Torr.) G. Don M. ciliata (James) G. Don Moneses uniflora (L.) A. Gray Western yarrow Actinea Nodding onion Pearl-everlasting Alpine anemone Pussy toes Fendler sandwort .Alpine sandwort Colorado columbine Dwarf blue columbine Heart-leaf arnica Aster Gunnison mariposa White marsh-marigold Yellow paintbrush Paint brush Mountain hairbell Cerastium Thestle Daisy Alpine forget-me-not Subalpine buckwheat Umbre lla plant Fireweed Horsetail Strawberry Moss gentian Artic gentian Wild pink geranium Alpine avens Bracted alumroot Cow parsnip Aspen peavine Alpine bluebell Mountain bluebell Woodnymph �- 86 APPENDIX A -- Continued Oxyria digyna (L.) Hill' Penstemon sp. Mitchell Phlox caespitosa Nutt. Phacelia sericea (Graham) A. Gray Polemonium delicatum Rydb. P. viscosum Nutt. Polygonum viviparum L. K. bistortoides Pursh. Pseudocymopteris montanus (A. Gray) Coult. and Rose Pulsatilla ludoviciana (Nutt.) Ranunculus adoneus A. Gray Saxifraga rhomboidea Greene Sedum integrifolium (Raf.) A. Nels ~. stenopetalum Pursh Senecio soldanella Gray Senecio sp. L. Sibbaldia procumbens L. Silene acaulis L. Streptopus amplexifolius (L.) DC, and Lam. Thermopsis montana R. Br. Trifolium dasyphyllum T. and G. T. nanum Torr. Thlaspi alpestre L. Trollius laxus Salisb. Urtica dioica (Muhl.) Wedd. --- Mountain sorrel Beardtongue Alpine phlox Purple fringe Jacob's ladder Sky pilot Slender bistort American bistort Pseudocymopteris Pasque flower Snow buttercup Snowball saxifrage Yellow stonecrop Kings crown Alpine senecio Groundsel False strawberry Moss campion Twisted-stalk .Mountain thermopsis Alpine clover Dwarf clover Wild candy tuft Globe flower Nettle GRASSES AND SEDGES Agropyron scribneri Vasey A. trachycaulum (Link) Malte Bromus anomalus Rupr. ~. inermis Leyss. Carex sp. L. Deschampsia caespitosa L. Festuca ovina yare brachyphylla (Schult) Festuca thurberi Vasey F. arizonica Vasey Halictotrichon mortonianum (Scribn.) Henr. Hesperochloa kingii (S. Wats.) Rydb. Juncus balticus Willd. Kobresia bellardi (All.) Degland in Loisel. Koleria cristata (L.) Pers. Luzula spicata (L.) DC. Muhlenbergia montana (Nutt.) Hitchc. Poa alpina L. P. pratensis L. Scribner's wheatgrass Slender wheatgrass Nodding brome Smooth brome Sedge Tufted hairgrass Alpine sheep fescue Thurber's fescue Arizona fescue Alpine oat Spike fescue Ba l.t Lc rush Kobresia Junegrass Woodrush Mountain muhly Alpine bluegrass Kentucky bluegrass �- 87 - APPENDIX A -- Continued P. sp , L. Phleum alpinum L. Sitanion hystrix (Nutt.) J. G. Smith Stipa columbiana Macoun ~. robusta (Vasey) Scribn. Trisetum spicatum L. . Bluegrass Alpine timothy Bottlebrush squirrel-tail Subalpine needlegrass Sleepy grass Spike trisetum �- 88 - APPENDIX B PARTIAL CHECKLIST OF VERTEBRATES OBSERVED ON OR IN THE VICINITY OF THE Mr. SHAVANO STUDY AREA, COLLEGIATE RANGE, CHAFFEE COUNTY, COLORADO, 1963-1965. {Nomenclature based on A.O.U. 1957; and Hall and Kelson, 1959.)a MAMMALS Canis latrans Castor canadensis Cervus canadensis Citellus lateralis Coyote Beaver Elk Golden-mantled ground squirrel Northern red-backed mouse Porcupine Chipmunk Mountain lion Snowshoe hair White-tailed jackrabbit Yellow-bellied marmot ·Martin Vole Bushy tailed woodrat Pika Mule deer Mountain goat Mountain sheep Deer mouse Mountain cottontail Red squirre 1 Badger Northern pocket gopher Black bear Red fox Long-tailed weasel Bobcat Clethrionomys gapperi Erethizon dorastum Eutarnias sp. Felis concolor Lepus americanus Lepus townsendii Marmota flaviventris Martes americana Microtus sp. Neotoma cinerea Ochotoma princeps Odocoileus hernionus Oreamnos americanus rnissoulae (Allen) Ovis canadensis Peromyscus maniculatus Sylvilagus nuttalli Tarniasciurus hudsonicus Taxidea taxus Thomomys talpoides Ursus americanus Vulpes fulva Mustela frenata Lynx rufus BIRDS Accipiter gentilis Aeronautes saxatalis Aquila chrysaetos Goshawk White-throated swift Golden eagle a Based on sight records in the case of birds; and on sight records, tracks, scats, skeletal parts, reports of local residents, and specimens taken in snap traps in the case of mammals. �- 89 - APPENDIX B -- Continued Bubo virginianus Chordeiles minor Cinclus mexicanus Circus cyaneus Colaptes cafer Columba fasciata Corvus corax f. brachyrhynchos Cyanocitta stelleri Dendragapus obscurus Dencrocopos pubescens Falco sparverius Junco caniceps Nucifraga columbiana Parus gambe li Perisoreus canadensis Petrochelidon albifrons ~pica Pinicola enucleator Sialia currucoides Sitta carolinensis Spinus pinus Troglodytes sp. Turdusmigratorius Zenaidura macroura Lagopus lecurus Great horned owl Nighthawk Dipper Marsh hawk Red-shafted flicker Band-tailed pigeon Connnon raven Connnon crow Steller's jay Blue grouse Downy woodpecker Sparrow hawk Gray-headed junco Clark's nutcracker Mountain chickadee Gray jay Cliff swallow Black-billed magpie Pine grosbeak Mountain bluebird 'White-breasted nuthatch Pine siskin Wren Robin Mourning dove White-tailed ptarmigan �- 90 APPENDIX C Mountain Goat Studies Aerial Observation Form Date _________________ Aircraft _____________________ Pilot Time: Take-off Land ---.;. _ Flight (Hrs.) Observer (s): Purpose of Flight: Census ; Trend Distribution ; Classification Seasonal movement _ ----------- Counting Conditions: (Circle applicable in each category). Snow Cover - Condition I. New snow cover, count started within two days of new snow. 100% snow cover. Condition II. 100% snow cover, but old snow with tracks too numerous to locate all animals. Condition III. Bare or spotty ~now cover, poor background. Light - Condition I. Condition II. Condition III. Clear skies. Broken overcast 50% of the time• Solid overcast. Air - Condition I. Condition II. Good, solid air. Mild to moderate downdraft and turbulence. Severe turbulence and downdraft. Condition III. General Area: Weather and Phenological Data: (General for period, specific for day: development of veg. by elevations, degree of snow coverage, etc.). ----------- -----------------------------------------------------------------------------. Flight Technique: (Strips on compass bearings, contouring at specified elevations, distance above ground, position and angle of obs., coverage of potential range, etc.). �Mountain Goat Observations Date Time Elev. Veg. Type Aspect Males Females Young Unclass. Total Activity Location 1. 2. 3. ~ I;:j t:l S 4. ~ 5. n 6. I I n 0 ::l 7. I'"t' 1-'::l 8. --- Remarks: ---- ---- --- ~ (!) '--- 0.. (Relation to timberline, snowbanks, etc.;" dispersal & grouping of herd; other pertinent observations). Associated Species: Wildlife and Livestock. Species Male Female Young ~ Total Location Activity I \0 f-1 �- 92 - APPENDIX D MOUNTAIN GOAT OBSERVATION FORM Form No. Location (First Obser.) Time Interval Date Observer ------etc. ------------------ TIME Elevation Aspect Terrain Ridge Peak Valley Slope % Vegetative Type Rock Slide Talus Slope Alpine Meadow Inter. Rock & Grass Group Male Female Yrlg. Kid Unci. Total Feeding (Min.) Distance (Yds.) Adults Kids Bedding (Min.) Making Bed Rumin. Dusting Resting Traveling Time Distance (Yds.) Sing Le - fHe Grouped Dispersed Tolerance of Nanny to Yrlg. Other Kids Nannies Billies Playing Kids Yrlg. Adult Nurs ing .(Sec.) Weather --------- Location (Last Obser.) Wind. Vel. _ Direction ---Clouds Distance (From Last) NOTES �- 93 - APPENDIX E U. S. DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE - Forest Service PACED TRANSECT RECORD FORM AND SUMMARY 2210 Allotment ~Districto Sample No. ~Photo No. _ Type ~Scorecard ~Exam. _ ----------------------~ Forest Date Transect location ~------------------------------------------------------Tl Item Transect Hits T2 Total Average Item Utilization Hits Tot. Ave. Tl T2 <Ll .-I ,.0 cd -.-I~ (/) <Ll 0 · '"0 ~ <Ll -IJ P H · -.-I~ sn <Ll 0 · H Litter Moss Bare Soil E. Pave. & Rock Other Impt. Spp. Composition Graze d Range T3 T2 Species Tl 41 1 1f: 2 41 3 41 4 41 5 41 6 41 7 41 8 _ Plant Index. __~---------------------_ Ground D. Cover Indexo CONDITION CLASSIFICATION: Forage D. & Compo Rating, _ (Fair-, Poor+, etc.) Vigor Rating, ~----------~---(High, Medium or Low) Vega Condo Class ~---------------(Fair-, Poor+, e t c ,) Soil Stab. Condo Class -----------------(Poor, Fair, etc.) Acres Per A.M. _ 1f: 9 4110 4111 1112 4113 R2-2200-l0 lO/60 SUMMARY: Forage D. Index Remarks: _ �- 94 - APPENDIX F MOUNTAIN GOAT ECOLOGY INVESTIGATIONS WEATHER DATA RECORD FORM Station No. Week" ~Date Time _ Observer(s) Area Prevo Read. Date Current Weather: Temperature Trend Visibility --~--------------------------Precipitation Clouds (Cover, Kind, etc.) Additional Remarks ---------------------- '------- TEMPERATURE: REL. HUMIDITY: Pres. Temp. Min. Therm._____________________ Pres. Psychro.R.H. Pres. Temp. Hygro. ~-----------------~ Pres. Hygro. R.H. Psychr. Wet Bulb of, Dry of Min. Hygro. R.H. Min.Th. of, Max.Th. of Remarks Mean Therm. Temp. of Min. Hygro.Temp. of, Max. of Mean Hygro.Temp. of Remarks -----------------------------------PRECIPITATION: %, (Calc. below) % %, Max.Hygro.R.H.__% --------------------------- Precipe WIND: Instantaneous Wind Vel.-Max. Instantaneous Wind Vel.-Min. Anemom.Miles: Now Prev. Total Miles (wk.) Ave, ve 1. (wk.) Wind direction Wind Characteristics & Remarks Now lbs. Prevo lbs. Total (wk.) ---:---..,----- lbs. Total Inches (wk.) Reset _ Ibs. Remarks ~mph mph _ _ ---.;mph ----------------~------- oz. oz. oz. oz. ---------------------------------~ "-------------------------- _ PRECIP. GAGE CALCULATIONS: Lbs. Oz. Reading Now: Reading Previous: Difference: CALCULATION SPACE AND REMARKS: ANEMOMe CALCULATIONS: Psychro. Calculations: 1 2 3 4 5 6 Depr. WB. of DB. ~ Final Calc.R.H. % (enter under Pres. Psychro R.H. under Rel.Hum. above) Servicing Information: _ Miles Reading Now: Reading Previous: Difference: ADDITIONAL REMARKS: In. �APPENDIX G A partial list of authentic sight records of mountain goats in the Collegiate Range, Colorado, 1950 through March 1965. Observer Sex and Age Classes Date *Unknown Location 1950 1 adult Mt. Harvard D. Hibbs B. Morison Dec. 1953 2 adults Mt. Shavano in McCoy Gulch A. Fitzgerald Aug. 1954 2 females, 1 kid Mt. Antero C. Moser G. Andrews Aug. 1954 2 adult males Mt. Antero S. McCurdy Sept. 1956 2 adult males Mt. Antero Owner, Rainbow Lodge July 1957 2 adult males Mt. Antero, Sec. 18, T51N, R7E Game and Fish Dept. Pilot July 1957 1 male, 5 females, 1 kid Mt. Antero C. Jordan 1957 1 adult Mt. Grizzly, Sec. 28, T51N, R6E C. Jordan 1957 1 adult Rainbow Lake, Sec. 30, T14S, R7E D. Hibbs Aug. 3, 1957 5 unclass. Mt. Shavano, Squaw Creek basin \.0 \J1 *List is not inclusive of aerial observations. See Table 2 for aerial observations. �APPENDIX G -- Continued Observer Date Sex and Age Classes Location Owner, Clear Creek Ranch Dec. 1957 1 adult Clear Creek Ranch, Sec. 20~ T12S~ R80W D. Hibbs A. Hibbs Aug. 1958 1 adult male Mt. Princeton, SW side D. Hibbs A. Hibbs Sept. 1958 4 adult males Mt. Antero, NW side D. Hibbs A. Hibbs Sept. 1958 7 unclass. Mt. Shavano, Squaw Creek Saddle M. Smith June 1959 5 adults, 2 kids Mt. Shavano, McCoy Gulch D. Hibbs A. Hibbs Aug. 1959 12 unclass. Mt. Shavano, McCoy Gulch M. Smith June 1960 11 unclass. Mt. Shavano, overlooking North Fork of South Arkansas River D. Hibbs A. Hibbs Aug. 1960 16 unclass. Mt. Shavano, McCoy Gulch D. Hibbs A. Hibbs Nov. 1960 6 unclass. Mt. Shavano, Angel Gulch M. Smith June 1961 9 adults, 3 kids Mt. Shavano, North Fork D. Hibbs July 1961 4 adults, 1 kid Mt. Shavano, Squaw Creek D. Hibbs A. Hibbs Aug. 1961 9 unclass. Mt. Shavano, Squaw Creek Saddle Mountain sheep hunter Aug. 1961 3 adults Mt. Antero I ~ �APPENDIX G -- Continued Observer Sex and Age Classes Date Location D. Hibbs A. Hibbs Aug. 1961 3 adults Mt. Antero, NW side D. Hibbs A. Hibbs Sept. 1961 1 adult female, 1 kid Mt. Shavano, bottom of McCoy Gulch D. Hibbs A. Hibbs Feb. 1962 1 adult male Mt. Taylor D. Hibbs A. Hibbs June 1962 2 adult males Mt. Princeton, S side M. Smith June 1962 23 unclass., D. Hibbs A. Hibbs June 23, -1962 M. Smith July D. Hibbs A. Hibbs 9 kids Mt. Shavano, McCoy Gulch 6 adults 5 unclass. 1 adult Mt. Shavano, Squaw Creek Mt. Antero Mt. Shavano, bottom of McCoy Gulch 14 unclass. Mt. Shavano July 28, 1962 2 adults, 2 kids, 1 yrlg. 5 unclass. Mt. Shavano, SE face G. Jones Oc t , 3, 1962 3 adults Head of Texas Creek, SW side of Mt. Harvard D. Hibbs A. Hibbs Aug. 1962 7 adult males Mt. Princeton, Goat Gulch Aug. 5, 1962 5 unclass. 1 adult male 6 adult males Mt. Antero Head of Mineral Basin Mt. Princeton, Goat Gulch 7 unclass. Mt. Shavano D. Cady Aug. ? 1962 1962 \0 -J �APPENDIX G -- Continued Observer Date Sex and Age Classes Location D. Hibbs A. Hibbs Aug. 11, 1962 6 unclass., 4 yrlg., 1 kid 6 adult males 5 adult males 1 adult male Mt. Grizzly Mt. Princeton Mt. Antero Mt. Shavano, SE slope D. Hibbs A. Hibbs March 20, 1963 1 adult male 3 adult males Mt. Shavano, Squaw Creek Mt. Princeton, Cliffs on NW side D. Hibbs A. Hibbs May 18, 1963 7 adult males 1 adult male 1 adult male Mt. Princeton, Goat Gulch Mt. Antero, NW side Mt. Shavano, Squaw Creek D. Hibbs A. Hibbs June 11, 1963 1 adult male 3 adult males 2 adult males 3 adult males Mt. Antero, Cliffs on NE side Mt. Antero, NW side Mt. Princeton, N side Mt. Princeton, NW side June 17, 1963 1 adult male Mt. Grizzly June 19, 1963 1 adult male 1 adult male Mt. Antero, Cliffs on NE side Mt. Antero, Cliffs on NW side June 24, 1963 3 adult males Mt. Antero, NW side June 27, 1963 8 females, 12 kids, 2 yrlg. 1 two year old male Mt. Shavano, Red Gulch July 19, 1963 1 adult male Mt. Shavano, Squaw Creek R. Denney July 23, 1963 11 unclass. Mt. Shavano, Squaw Creek D. Hibbs Aug. 2, 1963 1 adult male Mt. Shavano, ridge between Squaw Creek and Angel Gulch Aug. 6, 1963 8 females, 11 kids Mt. Shavano, Squaw Creek D. Hibbs \() OJ �APPENDIX G -- Continued Observer D. Hibbs Sex and Age Classes Aug. 7, 1963 8 females, 11 kids Mt. Shavano, Squaw Creek Aug. 13, 1963 1 female, 2 kids Mt. Shavano, Squaw Creek Aug. 14, 1963 7 females, 9 kids, 2 yrlgs. Mt. Shavano, bottom of Squaw Creek Aug. 21, 1963 8 females, 11 kids, 2 yrlgs.,Mt. Shavano, North side of Squaw Creek 1 two-year old male Aug. 22, 1963 8 females, 11 kids, 2 yrlgs. Mt. Shavano, Sand Creek 1 two-year old male Aug. 23, 1963 " " " " Mt. Shavano, Browns Creek on S side Aug. 24, 1963 " " " " " Aug. 25, 1963 " " " " Mt. Shavano, Squaw Creek Aug. 26, 1963 " II " " Mt. Shavano, Angel Gulch Aug. 27, 1963 " " " " Mt. Shavano, McCoy Gulch Aug. 28, 1963 4 adult males Aug. 29, 1963 8 females, 11 kids, 2 yrlgs. Mt. Shavano, bottom of McCoy Gulch 1 two-year old male " " " " " Mt. Antero, NW side " II " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " II " Sept. 2, 1963 " 1963 " Sept. 3, 1964 " " " Aug. 30, 1963 Sept.3, E. Fowler Location Date 8 unclass. Mt. Princeton, NW side \.0 \.0 �APPENDIX G -- Continued Observer D. Hibbs Date Sex and Age Classes Location Sept. 4, 1963 8 females, 11 kids, 2 yrlgs. Mt. Shavano, McCoy Gulch 1 two-year old male Sept. 5,1963 " Sept. la, 1963 5 adult males Mt. Princeton, Goat Gulch Sept. 12, 1963 3 adult males Mt. Shavano, Sand Creek Sept. 13, 1963 3 adult males 21 unclass. Mt. Shavano, Sand Creek Mt. Shavano, Angel Gulch Sept. 16, 1963 1 female, 1 kid, 1 adult male Mt. Shavano, Angel Gulch Sept. 22, 1963 18 unc las s , Mt. Shavano, Angel Gulch Dec. 20, 1963 20 unclass. Mt. Shavano, Squaw Creek April 18, 1964 7 unclass. Mt. Shavano, North Fork April 19, 1964 7 unclass. Mt. Shavano, North Fork July 1, 1964 29 unclass. Mt. Shavano, Angel Gulch saddle July 2, 1964 6 females, 7 kids, 11 yr1gs., 2 unc1ass. Mt. Shavano, Squaw Creek Geologist, U.S.G.S. July 1964 30 unc1ass. Sheep Mountain D. Hibbs July 5, 1964 4 unc1ass. Mt. Shavano, Squaw Creek Mountain climber July 7, 1964 13 unclass. Mt. Shavano, Angel Gulch " " " Mt. Shavano, Squaw Creek saddle f-J 0 D �APPENDIX G -- Continued Observer D. Hibbs A. Hibbs B. Williams J. Loudenburg Date Location Sex and Age Class July 8, 1964 26 unclass. Mt. Shavano, Squaw Creek July 9, 1964 33 unclass. II " II " July 10, 1964 6 females, 6 kids, 10 yrlgs. 1 two-year old male " " II II July 14, 1964 8 females, 8 kids, 8 yrlgs. 1 two-year old male " II " II July 29, 1964 9 females, 8 kids, 11 yrlgs. 1 two-year old male II " II II July 30, 1964 9 females, 8 kids, 11 yrlgs. 1 two-year old male II II " II Aug. 1, 1964 7 females, 6 kids, 11 yrlgs. 1 two-year old male II " " II Aug. 6, 1964 9 females, 8 kids, 11 yrlgs. " 1 adult and 1 two-year old male " " " Aug. 7, 1964 " " " " " " " " Aug. 8, 1964 " " II " " " " II Aug. 9, 1964 " " " " " " " " Aug. 19, 1964 3 females, 2 kids, 2 yrlgs. II " " II Aug. 20, 1964 12 unclass. Mt. Shavano, Squaw Creek I-' 0 I-' �APPENDIX G -- Concluded Observer Date Sex and Age Class Location Aug. 22, 1964 7 adult males Mt. Princeton, NW side G. Bear D. Hibbs Sept. 3, 1964 1 two-year old male Sheep Mountain, east of summit D. Hibbs Sept. 5, 1964 3 adult males Gladstone Ridge, above Ptarmigan Lake J. Branney D. Hibbs A. Hibbs Sept. 13, 1964 1 three-year old male Emma Burr Mountain D. Uibbs Sept. 16, 1964 2 females, 2 kids, 1 yrlg. Mt. Shavano, Angel Gulch D. Hibbs Sept. 21, 1964 14 unclass. Mt. Shavano, ridge between Red Gulch and Angel Gulch D. Hibbs Sept. 25, 1964 1 female, 1 kid, 1 yrlg. Mt. Shavano, bottom of Angel Gulch S. Branney J. Branney D. Hibbs b I\) �- 103 - LITERATURE CITED American Ornithologists' Union, Committee on Classification and Nomenclature. 1957. Check-list of North American birds. 5th ed. American Ornithologists' Union, Chicago, Ill. 691 p. Anonymous, 1961. Big game inventory Leafl. 446. 10 p. Anderson, N. W. 1940. Bull. 2. 21 p. Mountain for 1961. goat study. U. S. Fish and Wildl. Servo Wash. Dept. of Game Biol. Bailey, N. T. J. 1959. Statistical Sons, Inc., New York. 200 p. methods in biology., Barret, Wayne. 1960. Wild animals Washington, D. C. 400 p , of North America. John Wiley and Natl. Geog. Soc., Berry, J. W. 1959. Climates of the States, U. S. Dept. Com., Weather Washington, D. C. 870 p. Brandborg, S. M. 1950. The life history in Idaho and Montana. M. S. Thesis. Bur. and ecology of the mountain goat Univ.of Idaho, Moscow. 115 p. 1955. Life history and management of the mountain goat in Idaho. Proj. Completion Rept., P-R Proj. 98-R. Idaho Fish and Game Dept. Bull. 2. 142 p. Casebeer, R. L. 1948. A study of the food habits of the mountain goat (Oreamnos americanus missou1ae) in western Montana. M. S. Thesis. Montana State Univ., Missoula. 84 p. Casebeer, R. L., M. J. Rognrud, Mountain Goat in Montana. Dept. Bull. 5. 107 p. and S. M. Brandborg. 1950. The Rocky P-R Proj. 1-R. Montana Fish and Game Costello, D. F. 1954. Vegetation zones in Colorado, p. iii-x. In Sage Books, H. D. Harrington, Manual of the Plants of Colorado. Denver. Cowan, I. Mct. 1944. Report of wildlife studies in Jasper, Banff and Yoho National Parks in 1944 and parasites, diseases, and injuries of game animals in the Rocky Mountain National Parks, 1942-1944. Canadian Wild1. Serv., Dept. of Mines and Res., Ottawa. 83 p. (mimeo) • Crawford, R. D. 1913. Geology and ore deposits of the Monarch and Tomichi districts, Colorado Colorado Geol. Surv. Bull. 4. 317 p. o �- 104 - Culbreath, J. C. 1947. Colorado's exchange of game. Comments 10(4):3-4. Darling, F. F. 215 p. 1937. A herd of red deer. Colorado Conserve Oxford University Press, London. Darlington, P. J., Jr. 1957. Zoogeography: the geographical distribution of animals. John Wiley and Sons, Inc., New York. 675 p. Dings, M. G., and C. S. Robinson. 1957. Geology and ore deposits of the Garfield Quadrangle, Colorado. Geol. Survey Prof. Paper 289. 110 p. Geist, V. 1964. 45:551-568. On the rutting behavior of the mountain goat. J. Mammal. Hall, E. R., and K. R. Kelson. 1959. The mammals of North America,Vol. Ronald Press Co. New York. 1083 p. II. Hanson, W. O. 1950. The mountain goat in South Dakota. of Michigan, Ann Arbor. 101 p. Univ. Harrington, H. D. 1954. Denver. 666 p. Ph.D. Thesis. Manual of the plants of Colorado. Sage Books, Hitchcock, A. S. 1950. Manual of grasses of the United States. U. S. Dept. Agr. Misc. Publ. 200. 1051 p. 2nd ed. Hubbard, W. A. 1952. Following the animal and eye estimation method of measuring the forage consumed by grazing animals. Sixth Intern. Grassland Congr., Proc. 2:1343-1347. Jones, G. W., and C. E. White, Jr. Aid Quart. Rept. 1:51-53. Jones, G. W. 1962. 1950. Colorado Game and Fish, Fed. Colorado Game and Fish, Fed. Aid Quart. Rept. 10:39. Klein, D. R. 1953. A reconnaissance study of the mountain goat in Alaska. M. S. Thesis. Univ. of Alaska. 121 p. Marvin, C. F. 1941. Psychrometric tables for obtaining the vapor pressure, relative humidity, and temperature of the dew point. U. S. Dept. Com., Weather Bur. 87 p. Mosby, H. S. (ed.) 1960. Manual of game investigational techniques. Wildl. Soc., Washington, D. C. 324 p. Moser, C. A. 1955. Colorado Game and Fish, Fed. Aid Quart. Rept. 1:51-53. �- 105 - 12(5):4-5. 1963. Portrait of the mountain goat. Seton, E. T. 1927. Lives of game animals. Garden City, N.Y. 780 p. Vol. II. Colorado Outdoors Doubleday Doran Co., Simpson, G. G. 1945. The principles of classification and a classification of mammals. Am. Museum Nat. Hist. Bull.? New York. 350 p. Smith, M. W. 1963. Colorado's Rocky Mountain goats. Colo. Outdoors 12(5):1-9. Stark, J. T., and F. F. Barnes. 1935. Geology of the Sawatch Range, Colorado: Colo. Sci. Soc., Proc., 13(8):468-479. Steinhoff, H. W. (ed.) 1961. SUmmer camp manual. College of Forestry and Range Management. Colorado State University, Ft. Collins. 76 p. Stoddart, L. A., and A. D. Smith. 1955. Range management. McGraw-Hill Book Co., Inc. N. Y. 443 p. Swift, L. W. Dakota. 2nd ed. 1940. Rocky Mountain goats in the Black Hills of South N. Am. Wildl. Conf., Trans. 5:44l~443. U. S. Forest Service. 1958. Range analysis handbook, Region 2. Albuquerque, N. M. 66 p. Whitney, C., G. B. Grinnel, and O. Wister. 1904. and goat. MacMillan Co., New York. 284 p. Musk-ow, bison, sheep, ��- 107 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO ------------------------------ Project No. W-40-R-6 Work Plan No. 1 Antelope Investigations Job No. 10 Title of Job: Review of Literature (Population Determination) Period Covered: April 1, 1964 through March 31, 1965. Personnel: George D. Bear ABSTRACT This job was not completed during the past segment. A few references pertaining to population determination and census have been read and abstracted, but additional time is needed to continue reviewing the available literature and preparing a suitable summary in report form. Recommendations: Continue this job until it can be completed. Prepared by: George D. Bear Wildlife Researcher Candidate Approved by: Richard N. Denney Project Leader ��January, 196E - 109 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT (Investigations) State of COLORADO Project No. W-40-R-6 Work Plan No. 1 Antelope Investigations Job No. Title of Job: Age and Sex Composition Period Covered: April 1, 1964 through March 31, 1965 Personnel: ~orge 11 D. Bear ABSTRACT Antelope study areas were located in the shortgrass prairie region in Larimer County and in the shrubby vegetative type in Moffat County, Colorado. Additional time is needed for library research pertaining to techniques for estimating antelope populations based on census and hun~er harvest information. The mean age for the antelope brought through the 1964 Antelope Check Stations was approximately 2.0 years old. The known wounding loss on the Moffat County study area was 20 percent of the total number of permits issued for the area· No dead antelope and only one crippled buck was observed on the Larimer County study area following the hunting season. Natural morality was negligible on both study areas. Measurements, such as: eye lens weights, head length and width, mendible measurements, and horn length, were related to the ages of the antelope b~ought through the check stations. These relationships were stronger in the younger age classes. Objectives: 1. Obtain sex and age counts for at least two major herds in the state and test various aging techniques. 2. Obtain information on antelope mortality. 3. Evaluate and interpret date obtained in this appraisal, including natural losses and hunting mortality. �- 110 - Recommendations: 1. Sound recommendations thi's stage of the study. pertaining to management 2. To continue studying of the herds and attempt the antelope herds to determine the overall productivity to find a technique for estimating population sizes. 3. To continue investigation of aging techniques methods for determining the age of antelope. techniques cannot be made at in an effort to find suitable 4. Mark as many fawns as possible so as to have known-aged aid in the investigation of aging techniquesc animals, which will Procedure: Population estimate~.--Additional library research is needed to determine suitable techniques for determining antelope population numbers from census and hunter harvest figures. Hunter harvest surveys.--Check stations were established near each of the two study areas during the antelope hunting season to facilitate collection of information. The eyes and lower jaw were collected from each animal as aids in age classification. Tooth eruption and wear in the lower jaw were used to determine the age of the animal. Sex and the location of kills were recorded. Hunting information (wounded antelope observed, abandoned antelope observed, number of hours hunted, and the number of animals observed) was recorded for each hunter checked. Aging techniques.--Antelope eyes collected at the check stations were tagged and preserved in buffered formalin until the lenses could be removed, dried, ,weighed, and compared to the age of the antelope. Kolenosky and Miller's (1962) technique for drying antelope eye lenses was followed. The lenses were dried at 600 C. for 72 hours. A small sample of eye lenses were ashed and compared to the age of the animal. Small crucibles were weighed to the nearest one-ten thousandth of a gram. The eye lenses were placed in the crucibles and heated in a furnace at 3000 C. for four to six hours' until the lens had started cooking and assumed a black, foamlike consistency. Then the oven heat was increased to 6000 C. When the lenses were cooked to a fine granular ash the crucibles containing the lenses were removed from the oven and placed in a desicator and allowed to cool for approximately one hour. The crucibles and lens-ashes were weighed to the nearest one-ten thousandth of a gram; then the crucible weight was subtracted from the weight of the crucible containing the ashes to determine the weight of the ashes. The ashing technique was to be compared to the drying technique to determine which was a more reliable technique for aging antelope. Measurements measurements were made on the lower jaws collected at the check stations. These were: length of the ramus, length of the diastems, length of the �- III - premolar and molar tooth series, and the length of the molar tooth series. The length of the ramus was measured to the nearest millimeter; measuring the maximum length of the ramus, not including any part of a tooth that extends forward from the anterior end of the bone. Length of the mandibular diastema was measured to the nearest one-tenth of a millimeter with a pair of calipers; measuring from the posterior-most margin of the alveolus of the lower incisor to the anteriormost margin of the first cheek tooth. Length of the premolar and molar tooth series was made with a caliper to the nearest one-tenth of a millimeter; included the alveolar distance from the anterior border of the anterior premolar to the posterior border of the posterior molar. Length of the molar tooth series was made with a caliper to the nearest one-tenth of a millimeter; included the alveolar distance from the anterior border of the anterior molar to the posterior border of the posterior molar. Head length and width were measured and recorded for the antelope brought through the check stations. Head length was measured from the occiput to the incisors; a caliper was used and the measurement recorded to the nearest one-half centimeter. Head width was also measured with a caliper to the nearest one-half centimeter; measured at a point posterior to the orbits and anterior to the ears. Horn-length measurements were recorded for the buck antelope brought through the check stations. This measurement was made to the nearest one-half inch; measured along the center of the outside surface following the curve of the horn from the base to the tip. Age and Sex Composition George D., Bear Hunter harvest surveys.--The sex ratio of the antelope kill, as determined by the hunter report card returns and check stations data are listed in Table 1. The check station data for Unit 2A shows a higher percentage of bucks in the harvest, a lower percentage of does, and a higher percentage of fawns in the harvest than the hunter report cards data. The check station data for Unit 5 indicated a lower percentage of bucks, a lower percentage of does, and a higher percentage of fawns in the harvest than the hunter report cards. The total antelope kill on the study areas in 1964 was 229 for Unit 2A, and 57 for Unit 5. These figures are based on the hunter report card returns. Of the total antelope killed on Unit 2A, 83 percent were aged by research personnel at the check station; and 58 percent of the antelope killed on Unit 5 were aged at the check stations. Tables2, 3, and 4 show the distribution of the age classes of the antelope killed. Fawns comprised approximately one-third of the animals harvested on Unit 2A; whereas the yearling age group was most prominent in the harvest from Unit 4; and the animals from Unit 5 were more evenly distributed throughout from the fawn through the two year old age class. Most of the animals, 85 percent and over, ·from all three units were less than four years old. There was little difference in the mean age due to sex. The mean age of the antelope brought through the check stations from Units 2A, 4, and 5 were: 2.0, 2.0, and 2.1 years, respectively. Most of the antelope harvested were shot the first day of the hunting season (Table 5). Percentage of the harvest made on the first day was: Unit 2A, 87 �- 112 - Table 1.--Sex ratio of the 1964 antelope kill on the antelope study areas, based upon hunter report cards and check station data.* Unit Bucks Number Check Station 2A 50 5 22 Report Cards 2A 48 5 41 * There were 250 permits permits for Unit 5. % 26 67 Does Number 77 2 % Fawns Number 40 6 64 9 % Total 34 27 191 33 21 122 53 58 26 229 72 9 16 7 12 57 issued for Unit 2A (200 doe, 50 buck) and 75 either-sex Table 2.--Age and sex of the antelope harvested in Unit 2A, 1964. Age Class Bucks ~Years Number % Fawn 23 31.5 11:2 14 19.2 21:2 21 28.7 31:2 11 15.1 41:2 4 5.5 51:2- over 0 Does Total Number % Number .% 41 27 20 15 7 8 34.7 22.9 16.9 12.7 5.9 6.7 64 41 33.5 21.5 21.5 13.6 5.8 4.2 41 26 11 8 'fable 3.--Age and sex of the antelope harvested in Unit 4, 1964. Age Class (Years) Bucks Number Fawn 11:2 21:2 31:2 41:2 51+ Total Mean age 4 14 8 0 1 1 28 1.9 % 14.3 50.0 28.5 3.6 3.6 Does Number 5 1 1 1 1 2 11 2.3 % 45.4 9.1 9.1 9.1 9.1 18.2 Total Number 9 15 9 1 2 3 39 2.0 % 23.1 38.4 23.1 2.6 5.1 7.7 �- 113- Table 4. --Age and sex of the antelope harvested in Unit 5, 1964. Age Class (Xears) Fawn l~ 2~ 3~ 4~ 51<+ Total Mean Age Does Bucks Number 5 6 8 3 4 1 27 2.4 % 18.5 22.2 29.7 11.1 14.8 3.7 Number 4 1 1 % 66.8 16.6 16.6 6 0.8 Total Number % 9 27.3 21.2 7 9 27.3 9.1 3 12.1 4 1 3.0 33 2.1 Table 5.--Miscellaneous hunter information collected at the antelope check stations, 1964. Unit 4 5 2A Category Harvest Bucks First Day Second Day Does First Day Second Day Both Sexes First Day Second Day Hunter Observations Buck Hunters Number of hunters checked Antelope observed/hunter Hours hunted/hunter Antelope observed/hunter/hour Bucks observed/lOO does Doe Hunters Number of hunters checked Antelope observed/hunter Hours hunted/hunter Antelope observed/hunter/hour Bucks observed/lOO does Buck and Doe Hunters Number of hunters checked Antelope observed/hunter Hours hunted/hunter Antelope observed/hunter/hour Bucks observed/lOO does Wounded antelope observed Abandoned antelope observed 70 8 27 2 17 11 113 19 5 1 5 1 183 27 32 3 22 12 51 52 3.3 16 31 25 43 4.2 10 18.3 2826 8.0 3 27.9 148 47 4.5 10 75 6 13 803 2 15.9 5 18 808 2 36.2 199 48 4.1 12 60 51 26 31 37 5.0 7 18 3 33 25 8.1 3 29 2 �- 114 - percent; Unit 4, 91 percent; and Unit 5, 65 percent. The hunters from Unit 5 reported seeing fewer antelope per hour and required more time to obtain an antelope than the hunters on ,either Units 2A or 4. The number of wounded and abandoned antelope was very high on Unit 2A, whereas, the wounded and abandoned antelope reported on the other two units was negligible. Hunter wounding loss was determined on the study areas by traveling over the areas by vehicle or aircraft. Aircraft was most suitable for this survey. Dead antelope were most easily located during mid-day. There were 51 dead and crippled antelope found on Unit 2A and one crippled buck was found on Unit 5 (Table 6). Most of the abandoned antelope occurred in the fawn and yearling age classes. The yearling buck class contained more individuals than the other age and sex groups. Table 6.--Wounded and abandoned antelope found on management Unit 2A following the 1964 hunting season. Sex Fawn 1 Age Class {Years2 2< 3 4 Total Bucks Does Total 8 7 15 14 8 22 1 3 4 2 1 3 .29 22 51 4 3 7 Natural mortality was negligible. One fawn was killed by an eagle and another died from some unknown cause, but was not fed upon by predators. Antelope remains were not found at the eagle nest sites on the study areas. Dead antelope found on the study area following the hunting season were free from parasites. Aging technigues.--Mean weights of antelope eye lenses for the respective age classes are shown in Table 7. The mean lens weight increased rapidly from the fawn age class through the 2~ year old class; also the 90 percent confidence intervals indicated a significant difference between the means for these groups. There was not significant difference between the mean lens weights of the older age classeso Table 7.--Relationship of eye lens weight and age for 159 antelope. Age Class ~ears2 Number in SamE Le 39 ~ 38 l~ 39 2~ 18 3~ 15 4~ 10 5~ - over Mean Lens Weight {mg2 340.6 574.8 661.1 734.1 738.0 807.1 Standard Deviation 30.3 48.7 60.3 43.2 56.3 100.1 Range {mg2 239.3 - 411. 7 521.8 - 710.5 519.1 - 776.3 639.7 - 826.3 641.6 - 844.8 720.2 -1029.6 90% Confidence Interval 332.3 - 348.9 561.5 588.1 644.6 - 677.6 716.1 - 752.1 699.3 - 776.7 749.8 - 864.4 �- 115 - Data on the eye lens-ashing technique of determining age is incomplete and not shown in this report. Difficulties were experienced with laboratory equipment, therefore, this portion of the study was not completed. The skull width measurements increased between the fawn and yearling age classes, then remained constant for the following age classes (Table 8). There was little difference in the mean skull-width measurements for the buck and doe groups in the fawn age class, however the mean skull-width measurements for the older bucks was greater than the means for the does in similar age classes. Table 8.--Antelope skull-width measurements hunter check stations. Sex Males Number in Sample Mean Width Range Upper Limit Lower Limit Standard Deviation Females Number in Sample Mean Width Range Upper Limit Lower Limit Standard Deviation Both Sexes Number in Sample Mean Width Range Upper Limit Lower Limit Standard Deviation (centimeters) recorded at the 1964 Age Class {years} 4 3 5+ Fawn 1 2 10 8.6 19 10.7 15 11.2 9.5 7.5 0.7 12.0 8.5 0.8 12.5 10.5 0.8 5 8.4 5 9.6 2 9.5 7.5 0.7 9.0 10.0 0.5 15 8.5 24 10.5 17 10.9 4 10.2 5 10.8 4 10.6 9.5 7.5 0.7 12.0 8.5 0.9 12.5 10.5 1.1 11.5 9.4 1.0 13.5 9.5 1.6 12.5 9.6 1.3 9.0 1 11.5 3 11.7 1 12.5 13.5 10.5 3 9.8 2 9.0 3 9.8 10.0 9.5 10.5 9.4 There was an increase in the mean skull-length from the fawn age class to the yearling class, then the mean skull-length measurements tended to remain at a constant level (Table 9). There was little difference in the mean skull-length due to sex of the animals. Measurements were made on 153 antelope mandibles. The length of the ramus, length of the diastema, length of the molar and premolar tooth series, and �- 116 - Table 9.--Antelope skull-length measurements (centimeters) recorded at the 1964 hunter check stations. Sex Males Number in Sample Mean Length Range Upper Limit Lower Limit Standard Deviation Female Number in Sample Mean Length Range Upper Limit Lower Limit Standard Deviation Both Sexes Number in Sample Mean Length Range Upper Limit Lower Limit Standard Deviation Fawn 1 Age Class {yearsl 2 3 4 5+ 10 23.0 19 27.7 15 28.4 4 29.5 1 30.2 28.0 20.5 1.9 29.0 25.5 0.9 30.5 23.5 1.8 5 21.7 5 28.4 2 28.5 23.0 20.5 0.8 29.5 26.0 1.6 15 22.5 24 27.9 17 28.4 4 29.1 6 29.2 4 29.6 28.0 20.5 1.7 29.5 25.5 1.1 30.5 23.5 1.7 30.0 26.5 1.6 30.0 28.0 0.7 30.0 28.5 0.7 1 29.5 30.0 29.0 0.6 3 28.8 2 28.5 3 29.3 30.0 28.5 30.0 26.5 the length of the molar tooth series increased rapidly up to the 2~ year old age group then leveled·off (Tables 10, 11, 12, and 13). The 90 percent confidence interval indicated the means for the length of the ramus and the measurements on the tooth series in the fawn and yearling age groups were significantly different from the other age classes, but the means for the older age classes were not significantly different. The mean diastema length was significantly different only for the fawn age class. The relationship between horn length and age for 118 buck antelope is shown in Table 14. The horn lengths for the fawn and yearling age groups are very distinctive. The fawns had horns ranging from 1.0 to 2.0 inches in length. One buck in the yearling age class had horns 12.5 inches long, however, most of the yearling bucks had horns approximately 7.5 inches long, which was below the range of the two-year old class. The horn lengths for the age classes two years old and greater tended to overlap, ranging from 9.0 to 15.5 inches in length. �- 117 - Table 10.--Relationship of ramus length and age for 153 antelope mandibles. Sex and Age ~years~ Mean Length Males Fawn l~ 2~ 3~ 4~ 5~ - over 161 207 218 224 220 14 23 18 6 7 158 - 165 204 - 210 215 - 222 220 - 228 214 - 226 Females Fawn 1~ 2~ 3~ 4~ 5~ - over 160 209 215 214 219 23 15 20 11 8 159 - 161 206 -213 212 - 218 210 - 218 214 - 224 160 209 217 218 219 220 37 38 38 17 15 8 158 - 162 207 -211 215 - 219 211 - 225 216 - 222 215 - 225 ~nnn~ Number In SamEle 90% Confidence Interval ~rrun~ ~ . Both Sexes Fawn 1~ 2~ 3~ 4~ 5~ - over �- 118 - Table ll.--Relationship of diastema Sex and Age (years) Mean Length (mm) Number In Sample Males Fawn 1,lz 2,lz 3,lz 4,lz s,lz- over 49.S 69.2 72.1 74.9 72.1 14 23 18 6 7 47.7 67.6 70.6 72.4 69.9 - S1.3 70.8 - 73.6 - 77.4 - 74.3 Females Fawn 1,lz 2,lz 3,lz 4,lz S,lz- over 49.7 69.4 70.3 70.0 72.S 23 IS 20 11 8 48.8 67.1 68.8 68.0 70.7 - SO.6 - 71.1 - 71.8 - 72.0 - 74.3 49.6 69.3 71.4 71.7 72.3 76.1 37 38 38 17 IS 8 48.8 68.0 70.4 69.9 71.1 72.9 - SO.4 - 70 6 - 72.4 - 73.S - 73.S - 79.3 Both Sexes Fawn l,lz 2,lz 3,lz 4,lz S,lz- over length and age for lS3 antelope mandibles. 90% Confidence Interval (mm) 0 �- 119 - Table 12.--Re1ationship of the length of the premolar and molar tooth series and age for 153 antelope mandibles. Sex and Age (years) Mean Length (nun) Number In Sample 90% Confidence Interval (nun) Males Fawn 1~ 2~ 3~ 4~ 5~ - over 46.7 73.4 78.3 77 .2 76.1 14 23 18 6 8 45.5 - 47.9 75.0 71.8 77 .0 - 79.6 79.1 75.3 77 .3 74.9 Females Fawns 1~ 2~ 3~ 4~ 5~ - over 45.7 72.9 76.8 77 .1 76.1 23 15 20 11 8 44.7 - 46.7 71.7 - 74.1 78.1 75.5 75.8 - 78.4 74.9 - 77.3 Both Sexes Fawn 1~ 2~ 3~ 4~ 5~ - over 46.1 73.2 77 .5 77 .2 77 .6 73.3 37 38 38 17 15 8 45.3 - 46.9 72.1 - 74.3 78.4 76.6 78.2 76.2 76.2 - 79.0 74.9 71.1 - -- - �- 120 - Table 13.--Relationship of molar tooth series and age for 153 antelope mandibles. Sex and Age (years) Mean Length (rom) Number In Sample 90% Confidence Interval (rom) 14.5 44.5 49.2 52.2 51.3 14 23 18 6 7 13.9 - 15.1 42.8 - 46.2. 48.1 - 50.3 49.7 - 54.7 49.8 - 52.8 13.9 44.7 50.2 50.3 49.9 23 15 20 11 8 13.9 - 13.9 43.3 46.1 49.5 - 50.9 49.9 - 50.7 47.7 - 52.1 14.1 44.6 49.7 51.0 50.6 50.9 37 38 38 13.9 - 14.3 43.5 - 45.7 48.9 - 50.5 50.1 - 51. 9 49.4 - 51.8 49.3 - 52.5 Males Fawn 1~ 2~ 3~ 4~ 5~ - over Females Fawns 1~ 2~ 3~ 4~ 5~ - over Both Sexes Fawn 1~ 2~ 3~ 4~ 5~ - over 17 15 8 Table 14.--Relationship between the horn length and age for 118 buck antelope, 1964. Age Class (Years) 1: 2 1~ 2~ 3~ 4~ 5~+ Number in Sample 15 40 39 13 8 3 Mean Horn Length (Inches) 1.5 7.6 12.1 14.0 14.4 14.0 Range (Inches) Standard Deviation 1.0-2.0 4.0-12.5 9.0-14.5 12.5-15.5 12.5-16.0 12.5-15.5 0.3 1.4 1.2 1.3 1.1 1.5 �- 121 - Discussion: Hunter harvest survey.--The check station data indicated a larger percentage of fawns in the antelope kill than was indicated by the hunter report card returns. Thus, there appeared to be a bias 'on the part of the hunters in reporting their kill. They apparently reported some fawns as mature does. The check station data from Unit 2A indicated a larger percentage of bucks in the kill than indicated by the report cards. There were some hunters with doe permits who killed yearling bucks. If they reported these as does, the percentage of bucks in the kill as indicated by report card returns would tend to be lower than the actual harvest. The mean age of the antelope harvested on the study areas was approximately two years old, thus, indicati ng very young herds. There were very few animals living to be four years old or older. The high wounding loss on the Moffat County area is likely due to the concentration of animals and vegetative cover. The area is approximately 30 square miles in size and had over 600 antelope on it. With such a heavy concentration of animals many hunters likely tend to be careless in retrieving wounded animals. Also, the shrubby vegetation on this area would make it more difficult to locate a "downed" antelope than in a similar situation in a shortgrass area on the plains. The large number of abandoned animals occurring in the yearling age group may have been contributed to by hunters with doe permits shooting yearling bucks then leaving them. We had several hunters with doe permits bring yearling bucks to the check stations, saying that shadows obscured the cheek patch and since the horns were shorter than the ears they had assumed the animal was a doe. Aging techniques.--There was a strong relationship between the age of the younger antelope and the various measurements (weight of eye lens, head length, head width, length of ramus, length, mandibular diastema, length of molar and premolar tooth series, length of molar tooth series, and horn length). These relationships were strongest in the fawn and yearling age groups. Therefore, these measurements appear to be quibe limited as aging techniques. The yearling age class is generally used as an index to the productivity of big game herds. Since, antelope harvest information in Colorado relies on hunter report cards, any index to the number of yearlings in the harvest must be simple enough in procedure so the hunters can use it. Of the aging techniques examined, buck horn length seems to be one of the most easily used techniques and involves only a measuring tape for equipment. Bucks make up a large portion of the antelope harvest each year, so a technique limited to the buck kill would be usable. It may be feasible to require hunters who kill a buck to record horn length of the animal on his hunter report card. This information could be used to determine the percentage of the yearling animals in the kill or productivity of antelope herds. Prepared by: Date: ______ George D. Bear Wildlife Researcher Candidate J_a~~ar:r.,_,_ ~~66. Approved by: Richard N. Denney Project Leader ��JanuarY, 1966 - 123 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO Project No. W-40-R-6 Work Plan No. Antelope Investigations Job No. 1 Title of Job: Antelope Census Period Covered: April 1, 1964 through March 31, 1965 Personnel: 12 George D. Bear ABSTRACT Aerial antelope counts were highest during early morning and evening hours. Clear skies offered the best light conditions and bare ground the better background. Fawn counts were most easily made in August or September; total counts and sex ratio counts were most easily made in the fall and spring when the antelope were in small groups. A fixed-winged aircraft is suitable for total counts when the antelope are grouped into larger herds, but the helicopter is more desirable for obtaining more accurate sex and age ratio counts. The road counts were very unpredictable and quite variable. Objectives: 1. Determine the abundance of antelope in given areas or herd units by ground and aerial counts. 2. Compare results for the two techniques. Recommendations: 1. To conduct aerial counts during the first few hours of daylight, on clear days, and when the ground is free from snow. �- 124 - 2. Fawn counts should be made in August or September and the total counts should be made in the fall or spring when the antelope are in moderately large herds. 3· Continue this segment of the study so additional information may be gathered pertaining to the factors affecting census work. Procedure: Aerial counts with a fixed-winged airplane were conducted on each study area once a month to determine seasonal variability in census techniques. Counts were conducted three times a day, early morning, mid-day, and late afternoon, to determine the most suitable time of day for aerial census. The Larimer County area was flown in one mile-wide strips. Permanent land marks were used as boundary markers to prevent overlap. Due to the shrub cover and concentration of antelope it was most des LrabLe to fly the Moffat County area in one-half mile-wide strips. A flying altitude of approximately 100-300 feet was maintained. Other factors recorded on each count were: vegetative cover, relative visibility due to ground cover, cloud cover; wind velocity, distribution of antelope within the herd, approximate location on the study area (strip number and distance along the strip), and activity of the antelope. Ground cover was rated in one of three classes: I - new snow, 100% snow cover, II- 100% snow cover, but old snow with a lot of old tracks; and III - (a) spotty snow cover, (b) bare ground. Light conditions were rated in one of three classes: Igood, solid air: II - mild to moderate downdraft and turbulence; and III _ severe turbulence and downdrafts (Tables 1 and 2). Aerial counts were made with a helicopter and compared to fixed-winged airplane counts. Ground counts, using binoculars and a spotting scope, were conducted from a vehicle while traveling along a permanent transect. These counts were made once a month and three times a day. Census conditions were recorded as for the aerial counts, except road conditions were recorded in one of three classes instead of air conditions. The road transects were 23 miles and 11 miles long on the Larimer County and Moffat County study areas, respectively (Tables 3 and 4). '.'1 " �- 125 - Antelope Census George D. Bear Aerial counts were generally highest in the early morning hours and lowest during mid-day (Tables 5 and 6). The evening counts were between these counts. Light conditions seemed to be one of the most important factors affecting the counts; whenever the skies were overcast the antelope were 'more difficult to see, thus the counts were lower than would be expected under good light conditions. A partially overcast sky made counting conditions more difficult than either a clear day or solid overcast skies; while the airplane is moving through alternating patches of sunlight and shadows it is more difficult for the observer to become accustomed to the light conditions. The better ground condition is bare ground; however, a green background formed by growing vegetation is better than a brown colored background formed by dormant vegetation. Spotty-snow cover is the poorest background because the antelope tend to blend in. On the Moffat County study area it requires a very deep snow to cover the shrubs and give a solid white background. Turbulent air conditions would have little effect on the accuracy of the total counts, but would effect the sex ratio counts since the pilot could not fly safely at the low altitudes required for distinguishing the sex or age of the antelope. The antelope'were mcst easily counted when they were grouped in herds of approximately 10-20 animals. The counts were low during the summer months when the antelope were quite dispersed. The counts were higher from September through March when the animals grouped-up. However, accurate sex ratios and total counts were difficult to obtain on very large groups of antelope, approximately 50 antelope or more. August and September seemed to be the better months for cond~cting the fawn counts, when the fawns were running with the adults but were still noticably smaller than the adults. It appeared to take less time to conduct the aerial counts in the winter when the antelope were grouped up than during the summer months when they were dispersed. The helicopter counts on the Larimer County study area are not readily comparable to the fixed-winged airplane counts, since the fixed-winged aircraft was not available during the same period of time. In comparing the December helicopter count with the November fixed-wing count, the helicopter flight yielded a higher count and a higher buck to doe ratio. The March helicopter flight isn't comparable to any particular fixed-wing flight (Table 7). �- 126 - Table l.--Form used for antelope census. W-40-l ANTELOPE INVESTIGATIONS Aerial Census Form Date --------------------------~ Time: Take-o£f Aircraft ~Land Start census Pilot -------------------- Finish -------------------------_ Flight (hrs) Total (hrs) _ Observer(s): --------------------------------------------------------------(circle applicable in each category). Counting Conditions: Snow cover - Condition I. New snow cover, count started within two days of new snow. 100% snow cover. Condition II. 100% snow cover, but old snow with tracks too numerous to locate all animals. Condition III. Light - Condition I. Clear skies. Condition II. Condition III. Air - Spotty snow cover, bare ground, poor background. Broken overcast 50% of the time. Solid overcast. Condition 1. Good, solid air. Condition II. Mild to moderate downdraft and turbulence. Condition III. Severe turbulence and dOlmdrafts. Location: ----------------------------------------------------------------------------Weather and phenological data: of vego) (General for period, specific for day, development _ �W-40-2 Table 2.--Forrn used for antelope census. ANTELOPE Ih~ESTlGATIONS Aerial Census Form Time Vegetative Tvpe Strip No, Location Males Young Females Unclass. Total Activitv and Remarks 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ~ -...J 9 10 Date Remarks: Location 0 2. 3. 4. ~ (dispersal and grouping of herd) Associated species: Species 1. ~ (wildlife and livestock) Male Female Young ~ Unclass. _ _ Total Location Activity �--Form used for uIltelo),census. W.1:0-3 ANTELOPE I~JESTIGATIONS Ground Census Form Date Driver: Observer(s): --------------------------------------------------------------Time: Start Finish Total (hrs) --------------------------------------------------------Mileage: Start Finish Total (mi.) -----------------------------------------------------Counting Conditions: (circle applicable in each category). Snow cover - Condition I. New snow cover, count started within two days of new snow. 100% snow cover. Condition II. 100% Snow cover, but old snow with tracks too numerous to locate all animals. Condition III. Light - Road - Spotty snow cover, bare ground, poor background. Condition I. Condition II. Broken overcast 50% of the time. Clear skies~ Condition III. Solid overcast. Condition I. Good, easily traveled. Condition II. Fair, occasional places of difficult travel. Condition III. Poor difficult to travel, requires driver's fUll attention most of the time. Location: ----------------------------------------------------------~----------~--~--Heather and phenological data: veg.) (General for period, specific for day, development of ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ----------------------------------------------------.------------_ .... __ __ .•....... . --------------.---------------.~.----.--..--.,.--------.----------------------------------_ .._--- ..- �W-40-4 Table 4.--Form used for antelope census. ANTELOPE INVESTIQ~TIONS Ground Census Form Time Vegetative Tvpe Hileage Accum. Miles Males Females Youn~ Unclass. Total Activity and Remarks 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 l\; \.0 9 10 Date Remarks: Locationl (dispersal and grouping of herd) Associated species: Species 1. 2. 3. 4. _ (wildlife and livestock) Male Female Young _ Unclass. Total Location Activity �Table 5.--Aeria1 census with a fixed-winged airE1ane on the Moffat Count~ ante10Ee stud~ area. Census Conditions Ground Light Air Ante10Ee Counted Fawns Does Bucks Total Month Time July Morning Noon Evening III III I I 137 147 104 II I 50 69 66 (no flight due to weather) August Morning Noon Evening III III I I I 124 137 153 III 51 58 73 (no flight due to weather) Buck-Doe-Fawn Ratio Census Time (hours) Ave. Herd Size 388 185 71-100-93 96-100-72 0.88 0.68 7.2 6.6 414 *251 112-100-91 126-100-88 0.93 0.68 6.6 8.7 * 69 unc1ass. ANTELOPE HUNTING SEASON September Morning Noon Evening III III III I I III I II II 59 26 .42 96 23 67 51 32 44 206 81 153 53-100-61 139-100-113 66-100-63 1.20 0.77 0.80 4.5 2.9 4.6 October Morning Noon Evening III III III II I I II - 199 134 203 75 53 74 274 187 277 38-100 40-100 36-100 0.83 0.70 0.73 14.4 15.6 21.3 Morning Noon Evening (note: I I November December II I - I-' - I I 147 49 196 33-100 0.67 I I 158 0.57 (no flight) a large group of approximately 125 antelope moved out of the study area) (no flights) - 98.0 39.5 January Morning Noon Evening I III III (no flight) .(no flight) - 107 53 160 50-100 0.57 160.0 February Morning Noon Evening I I I (no flight) (no flight) - 120 40 160 30-100 0.63 160.0 March Morning Noon Evening III I I (no flight) (no flight) - 83 71 154 86-100 0.83 51.3 w 0 �Table 6.--Aeria1 census with a fixed-winged airE1ane on the Larimer Count~ ante10Ee stud~ area. Honth Time Hay Morning Noon Evening Census Conditions Ground Light Air III III III June July Ante10Ee Counted Fawns Does Bucks Total Census Time (hours) Ave. Herd Size - - 88 53 87 60 52 52 148 105 139 68-100 98-100 60-100 1.25 1.05 1.30 4.1 4.8 3.5 37 39 16 59 56 20 64 27 11 160 122 47 108-100-63 48-100-70 55-100-80 1.15 1.08 1.20 5.9 8.1 5.9 82 72 81 90 116 123 64 40 39 *248 .228 243 * 12 71-100-91 34-100-62 32-100-66 1.32 1.20 1.22 6.4 7.1 7.8 (no flight due to weather) 1.03 III I 106 26 25-100 *209 1.05 II 23 118 I 43 ~';*203 21-100-11 *77 unclassified, *~\'19unclassified 10.6 14.5 II II I II II I (no flights) Morning Noon Evening III III III August III III III III III III (no flights) September Morning Noon Evening III III III I I I I II I ANTELOPE HUNTnW October November Buck-Doe-Fawn . Ratio SEASON (no flights) Morning Noon Evening Note: III III - no other flights were made, the pilot and airplane were not available I-' co I-' ��Table 8.--Road counts on the Moffat County antelope study area. Census Conditions Ground Light Road Nonth Time June :Norning Noon Evening III III III II I II July Morning Noon Evening III III Morning Noon Evening III III September Morning Noon Evening III August October Morning Noon Evening Note: Ante10Ee Counted Fawns Unc1ass. Bucks Does II II II 25 5 28 46 21 50 10 7 3 I I I I 11 56 34 70 I I I I 31 2 I I III I III III III I I I Total Buck-Doe-Fawn Ratio 71 33 81 54-100-22 24-100-33 56-100-06 32 37 4 77 167 32-100-94 80-100-53 56 14 37 11 2 6 126 33 55-100-66 14-100-79 3 1 - - 4 300-100-0 I 6 8 2 4 20 75-100-25 I I I 38 10 24 51 19 32 43 13 34 - 132 42 90 75-100-84 53-100-68 75-100-106 (no count) (no count) (no count) additional counts could not be made due to snowfall on the area,which closed the roads. I-' W w �Table 9.--Road counts on the Larimer County antelope study area. Honth Time Census Conditions Ground Light Road Hay Horning Noon Evening III III III II I I II II II 4 Horning Noon Evening III III III I I I I I I 1 2 (no antelope observed) 1 5 - Morning Noon Evening III III III III II II I I I 9 3 Horning Noon Evening III III III I II III I I I June July August September October November December January February March April Bucks 7 6 4 Ante10Ee Counted Does Fawns Unc1ass. 8 3 10 - - 1 - - 5 - - Total Buck-Doe-Fawn Ratio 13 3 22 70-100 3 50-100· 6 20-100 8 10 10 0-100-40 900-100-0 150-100-0 29 5 14 37-100-44 0-100-25 80-100-40 50-100 5 1 2 - 5 16 4 5 7 1 2 - 3 19 10 13 10 8 5 - - 34 20 25 26-100-53 20-100-80 54-100-38 24 9 39 15 3 12 -2 49 12 70 21-100-63 0-100-33 44-100-31 - 6 50-100:"0 2 1 - (no counts) Horning Noon Evening III III III III III II II II II Horning Noon Evening II III III I I I II II I 17 I I 2 4 (no antelope observed) (no antelope observed) 5 2 7 5 - (no counts) Horning Noon Evening III III III II I I Horning Noon Evening III III III III II II I I - Morning Noon Evening III III I I I I (no antelope observed) (no antelope observed) (no counts) I I (no count) (no antelope observed) (no antelope observed) - - 5 5 I-' w .j::"" �- 135 - The helicopter flights are more comparable to fixed-wing flights for the Moffat County study area. Comparing the October flights, the fixed-w:i.nged aircraft obtained a higher total count, but the helicopter counts varied less in total number due to the time of the day at which the counts were flown. The buck to doe ratios were higher for the helicopter counts. The December .helicopter count was comparable to the January fixed-wing count in total numbers of antelope counted, but the helicopter count yielded a higher buck to doe ratio. The helicopter took longer to fly the counts than the fixed-wing' aircraft. A Bell 47G3B helicopter, Cessna 182, and DeHaviland Beaver were used for the aerial counts. The helicopter was better than the fixed-winged airplanes for manuverability and close work. Visibility was considerably better in the helicopter. The fixed-winged aircraft have a much faster cruising speed, but are effected more by winds and rough air. The fixed-winged aircraft have approximately a six-hour fuel supply, whereas, the helicopter has approximately a two and one-half hour fuel supply. Rental costs for the airplane was $20.00 per hour and it was $80.00 per hour for the helicopter. The road counts were variable and unpredictable (Tables 8 and 9). In general, more antelope were counted during the fall and winter months when the antelope were grouped-up. Prepared by: Date: George D. Bear Wildlife Researcher Candidate January, 1966 Approved by: Richard N. Denney Project Leader ��- 137 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO ------~~~~----------------- Project No. W-40-R-6 Work Plan No. 1 Title of Job: Period Covered: Personnel: Antelope Investigations Job No. 13 Techniques for Determining Population 'rrends April 1, 1964 through March 31, 1965 George D. Bear ABSTRACT Survivorship curves and life tables show a very low survival rate for the antelope on the Moffat County and Larimer County study areas. The mortality rate for each age class increases with age. The population trend on the Moffat County study area has declined rapidly during the two-year period of this study, while the population on the Larimer County study area has remained stable. The fawn to doe ratios increased on both areas during this same period of time. More library research is needed for determining the various techniques for computing and understanding population trends, life tables, and survivorship curves. Objectives: 1. Determine the most effective procedure for determining antelope population tre!lds. 2. Attempt to rate techniques for different seasons, habitat types, and censusing conditions. Procedures: 1. Census data for the two-year period will be compiled, graphed, and otherwise analyzed to best depict the basic population trend in each of the two antelope herds under study. 2. Life tables will be plotted from this information for use in predicting the population potential of each of the two herds. ��- 139 Techniques for Determining Population Trends George D. Bear Survivorship curves drawn from the age structure hunters shows a very steep curve or low survival are harvested at a very young age. The survival lower for the 1964 data than the 1963 data. of the antelope harvested by rate (Figure 1). The animals rate for both study areas was Life tables were constructed from the combined information collected at the 1963 and 1964 check stations (Table 1). As shown in the survivorship curves, the survival rate beyon the young age classes is very low. The mortality rate for each age class increased with age; except in the 3-4 year old class for Unit 5, where the mortality rate decreased. Table l.--Life x tables for antelope, based on the 1963 and 1964 check station data. Frequency by Age Intervals Ix Lx Number Ave. Number surviving indiv. living at beginning between ages of age interval x and x+l Age (years) dx Number dying in age interval, out of 100 born UNIT 2A 0-1 1-2 2-3 3-4 4-5 5+ 253 296 176 139 99 37 1000 747 451 275 136 37- 873.5 599.0 363.0 205.5 86.5 18.5 25.3 39.6 39.0 50.5 72.8 100.0 UNIT 5 0-1 1-2 2-3 3-4 4-5 5+ 217 265 253 60 145 60 1000 783 518 265 205 60 891.5 650.5 391.5 235.0 132.5 30.0 21.7 33.8 48.8 22.6 70.7 100.0 100qx Mortality rate per 100 alive at beginning of age interval Aerial counts on the Moffat County study area (Unit 2A) indicate a decline in the population, while the population on the Larimer County (Unit 5) study area is nearly stable. Aerial counts conducted on Unit 2A during the winter months show a population of approximately 410 antelope in 1963 and 270 antelope in 1964. The aerial counts on Unit 5 show approximately 200 antelope on the area in 1963 and 210 in 1964. The fawn count on Unit 2A in 1963 was approximately 75 fawns per 100 does and 90 fawns per 100 does in 1964. The fawn to doe ratio for Unit 5 �- 140 - 100 196) 1964 \ \ ,..s:: 0 a:l \ 80 \ \ \, 0 0 M ,, ,, ,.. 60 Q) A.. ,.. 40 (I) 0 ~ •.-1 ~ ~ .•.. ..•.. 20 ....•. 0 1 ) 2 4 Age (Years) 5 Antelope Management Unit 2A 100 -196) - -1964 ,..s:: 0 a:l 80 0 0 M ,.. 60 Q) p:; ,.. 40 (I) 0 ~ I 20 0 2 ) 4 Age (Years) Antelope Management Unit 5 1 5 FIGURE 1. SURVIVORSHIP CURVES DRAWN FROM HUNTER HARVEST DATA COLLECTED AT ANTELOPE CHECK STATIONS. �- 141 - was approximately 60 fawns per 100 does and 65 fawns per 100 does for 1963 and 1964,- respectively. Therefore, the Moffat County study area showed a marked decrease in population numbers and a marked increase in the fawn to doe ratio, a slight increase in the fawn to doe ratio. Data needs to be gathered for additional yea~s before the population trends can be fully evaluated, because two-year trend data can be misleading. Much library work is needed for determdng techniques for computing and understanding population trends, life tables, and survivorship curves. Prepared by: Date: George D. Bear Wildlife Researcher Candidate .January, 1Q66 Approved by: Richard N. Denney Project Leader ��" - 143 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT F:mAL REPORT RESEARCH PROJEX:!TSEGMENT State of COLORADO --------~~~~--------------- Project No. W-40-R-6 Work Plan No. 1 Antelope Investigations Job No. Title of Job: Activity and Behavior Patterns Period Covered: June 1, 1963 through June 4, 1965. Personnel: 14 E. j. Prenzlow ABSTRACT Analytical investigations of th~ behavior of animal societies have become popular with biologists in recent years. The primary objectives of this study were to 'determine some of the activi~y and social behavior patterns exhibited by the pronghorn. The field investigation was conducted from JUne to October 1963 and from June to December 1964, on a selected study area in northcentral Colorado. Sixty-four adult, juvenile and kid pronghorns were marked and released to facilitate data collection. A male and female kid were held in captivity to observe their behavioral development at close range. Pronghorn groups, of from 1 to 63 in number, were observed and the behavioral patterns were classified as follows: (1) ingestive, (2) eliminative, (3) investigatory, (4) allelomimetic, (5) epimeletic, (6) et-epimeletic, (7) Sexual, (8) agonistic, and (9) shelter-seeking. Social behaviors were categorized into leadership and dominance, play, sexual, female and kid relationships, and interspecific behavior patterns. Total observing time was 944.25 hours. A period of 12 months field investigation resulted in the following conclusions: marked animals should be used to study social behavior; a critical period (approximately six hours) of socialization exists between a female and her kid(s); pronghorns effect the chemistry and erodibility of the soil by their droppings, trails and feeding habits; because �- 144 of the pronghorn's habit of depositing excreta on the salt grounds of domestic stock, these locations may be possible transmittal areas for disease between pronghorns and domestic animals; pronghorns have a definite schedule of daily activities, but these patterns are altered because of weather conditions, time of year, physiological processes, and inter- and intraspecific relationships; high humidity and temperature affect the degree of activity of pronghorns; flight distances of the different pronghorn social groups are variable; there is no significant difference between nursing time in minutes throughout the summer months; there is a significant difference between the frequency of nursing periods in certain time intervals in one day; leadership in all social groups, except bachelor herds, is assumed by an adult female; males usually are the dominant individuals in all social groups except the female-kid groups. Recommendations: The following are suggestions for future research on the pronghorn: (1) determine early socialization processes of the pronghorn, (2) determine what social processes regulate herd size, (3) determine the role of communication on social life of the pronghorn, (4) determine nocturnal habits of the pronghorn, and (5) compare activity patterns exhibited by the pronghorn to activity patterns of other wild and domestic ungulates. Objective: Determine activity and behavior patterns of antelope on a selected study area and r~late these patterns to census, herd structure, weather, harvest, and topographic-vegetative types. Introduction Shortly after the turn of the Twentieth Century, pronghorn (Antilocapra americana) populations in western North America were low in number and in danger of becoming extinct. The subsequent increase in numbers was due to an aroused public and protective legislation brought about by a change in attitude towards the values of wildlife management (Gregg 1955). Today, pronghorn populations are held at a sustained level on our remaining prairie-lands by proper management procedures carried out by qualified game biologists and management personnel. Griffith (1962), in an article concerning pronghorn management, stated that research is needed in the fields of weather studies, habitat restoration, pronghorn relationships with other species, disease, and food habits. He also stated, greater effort should be taken by every field worker to record all information on pronghorns. Only one study, a Doctoral Dissertation by Gregg (1955), has dealt primarily with the behavior of the pronghorn. Other authors, however, have included in their publications sections or chapters on the behavior of pronghorns. These �- 145 - authors included: Caton (1877), Skinner (1924), Wallace (1940), Rouse (1941), Kautz (1942), McLean (1944), Buechner (1947), Einarsen (1948), Buechner (1950), Cole (1956), Cole and Wilkins (1958), Hoover, Till and Ogilvie (1959), and Fichter and Nielson (1962). In recent years, the ecological significance of social behavior in animals has attracted increasing attention, and in turn, social behavior has received more analytical investigation (Scott 1956). Behavior studies involve the use of techniques and principles of many of the biological and physical sciences, and they are concerned mostly with what does rather than what it is (Scott 1958). My investigation determined the basic activity patterns and social behaviors of the pronghorn on a selected study area. Scot (1958 p. 24) had the following to say concerning this type of study: This kind of systematic study of adaptation needs to be done for a large variety of animal species in order to lay a firm foundation for general conclusions regarding behavior. Relatively few species have ever been studied in more than a superficial manner, and the information is particularly important at the present time because of current interest and progress in the study of social behavior and organization. Each species which is studied in this fashion provides the basic data for understanding the workings .of animal societies. Any intelligent observer with good elementary training in biology and psychology can make a contribution along these lines. It is to be hoped that the description of animal societies and the kinds of behavior on which they rest will soon be as popular with biologists as the description of new species once was. Information on pronghorn behavior, ecology and population dynamics were not included in previous studies in Colorado. The Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department believes, however, that these type of data are needed to manage pronghorn populations more efficiently to attain maximum sustained yields. Sincere appreciation is extended to Mr. Richard N. Denney, Assistant Game Manager, and particularly to Mr. George D. Bear, Wildlife Researcher Candidate, both of the Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department for their unselfish assistance on numerous occasions and for their help in securing equipment during the study. Thanks are also due to personnel who generously gave right-of-way of the Logan, Maxwell and Roberts Ranches, privileges to conduct the field research. Location The study area is located some 25 road miles northwest of Fort Collins, Colorado, Larimer County, on the east side of U.S. Highway 287. The investigation was confined to an area of approximately nine~square miles included in T.ION, R.70 W., �- 146 - of Sections 2-5, 8-11, 14-17, 21-22 and 28. The triangular study area is bounded by U.S. Highway 287 on the west, the Livermore-Buckeye Road on the east, and an unimproved dirt road on property controlled by the Robert's Ranch on the north (Fig. 1). Physiography Geology and Climate The study area is on the western edge of the Colorado Piedmont section of the Great Plains Province which is part of the Front Range of the Southern Rocky Mountains (Harris 1963). Elevation ranges from about 5,945 to 6,400 feet and includes rolling shortgrass prairie interspersed with sandstone mesas, rock outcrops and canyons (Figs. 2,3). The North Fork of the Cache la Poudre River is the major drainage for the area. A tributary of the North Fork, Stonewall Creek, flows.through the western portion of the study area. Limited weather data were collected on the study area during the field investigation. These data were supplemented with data collected by three official weather stations located in Fort Collins, Colorado, and Laramie and Cheyenne, Wyoming. The study area is approximately at the center of a triangle formed by the locations of these three cities (Table 1). Flora and Fauna The rolling short-grass prairie which dominates the study area primarily is composed of blue grama (Bouteloua gracilis) and buffalo grass (Buchloe dactyloides). True mountain mahogany (Cercocarpus montanus) is dominant on the rocky sites. Other common plants on the study area are: needle and thread grass (Stipa comata), green needlegrass (Stipa viridula), blue grass (Poa pratensis), western wheatgrass (Agropyron smithii), threeawn (Aristida spp.), sedges (Carex spp.), cheatgrass (Bromus tectorum), little b1uestem (Andropogon scoparius), june grass (Koeleria cristata), hairy grama (Bouteloua hirsuta), Spanish bayonet (Yucca glauca), fringed sagebrush (Artemisia frigida), snakeweed (Gutierrezia sarothrae), winterfat (Eurotia lanata), Russian thistle (Salsola ka1i), fourwing saltbush (Atriplex canescens), rabbitbrush (Chrysothamnus spp.), prickly pear (Opuntia spp.), larkspur (Delphinium spp.), and gumweed (Grindelia spp.). In addition to the domestic livestock on the study area, the pronghorns commonly occupy the rangeland with mule deer (Odocoileus hemionus), coyotes (Canis latrans), bobcats (Lynx rufus), red foxes (Vulpes fu1va),and golden eagles (Aguila chrysaetos). Other animals observed on the study area included: plains garter snakes (Thamnophis radix), bull snakes (Pituophis catenifer), prairie rattlesnakes (Crotalus virridis), white-tailed deer (Odocoileus virginianus), cottontail rabbits (Sylvilagus spp.), white-tailed jack rabbits (Lepus townsendii), black-tailed jack rabbits (Lepus californicus), deer mice (Peromyscus maniculatus), Mexican woodrats (Neotoma mexicana), Colorado chipmunks (Eutamias quadrivittatus), black-tailed prairie dogs (Cynomys ludovicianus), striped skunks (Mephitis mephitis), �- 147- UVERMORE MOUNTAIN COLQflA[o"lAm"fJt ..!~.~~~R!r.a(~~\ QUADRANGLE co UNITED 8T ATES DEPARTMENT or THE INTERIOR _Q~Qk09!CAt. SURVEY UVEOMORE MIpCM>d.""I..t QUADRANGtE oe:.ts.u....,. ••. dO<Jt>I ••I>.IIbTI".C"O ""."o"",o.c»r1"" Iotlh.~lo"", .•..• ..lolt""ft""tO<P'OC"m ••• tol""I·(;"oo""""_e.,,,. '~.v-,...'""'1••' ••••••••••••• _1~"'-_ .•. ~ ...•.• ""'I••• "I" •• ' ' .••••••.•• ·..,1'1060 _ _ . --_=_I) Q.USIf'<:.r.,1()It ••• , __ lIlMM, ~~ OUII!1.oA1 0-. ,.,.,..0"<~'_192'''''''''_'''''''"'' _ IOCO_Uoo'...-vI IIt.L ~~..:=r""'_"CoIo>o"'_""'-. _11._"'_ 1. '-"'" o.••"""...., •••••.•••••••.••• _ ••••••• ""-~_ ,_.., ••• "-'~ ••••••• ,._.''' •••• INIo( •••••••• ••• ~ •••_<al '"" ...,"'-'t_ •••••••• •••••••••••• f~""""I_"'_hoo("" Fig. 1. The study area is bounded by U.8. Highway 287, the 1i vermoreand the unimproved dirt road on property Buckeye Road (light-duty), controlled by the Robert's Cattle Company, �- 148 - Fig. 2. Interspersion of true mountain mahogany and shortgrass prairie on northern portion of study area. Fig. 3. Southwest corner of study area. background. Stonewall Creek in �- 149 Table 1. Summary of 1963-1964 weather data and weather data collected at Fort Collins, Laramie, Wyoming. ]j Period Mean Temperature OF 1 2 3 4 Avg. Relative Humidity (%) at 7 am & pm 123 collected Colorado, on the study area and Cheyenne and Avg. Wind Velocity M.P.H. 1 2 3 Avg. Pr ecapa-. tation (in.) 123 4 .4 .5 1.2 Jan. 26 17 14 71 55 Feb. 29 33 29 71 -- Mar. 36 32 30 56 -- -- -- -- Apr. -- 46 44 39 -- 60 -- 3 -- -- 2.0 1.7 1.3 May 49 55 56 31 46 62 -- 2 -- .9 2.8 1.1 June 61 64 64 59 32 62 -- 1 -- .9 1.7 2.9 .8 July 66 70 73 66 49 63 55 7 1 10 .7 1.5 Aug. 67 68 68 63 41 65 -- 5 1 -- .6 1.5 2.3 2.0 Sept. 56 60 63 57 -- 67 -- 3 1 -- .~ 1.3 3.3.6 Oct. 46 49 54 50 41 67 -- 3 1 -- .4 1.1 1.0 .9 Nov. 35 36 40 36 70 -- Dec. -- 29 27 24 72 -- Year -- 47 48 43 -- 66 53 y (1) Study area, -- -- 15 .6 .2 .2 -- 1.0 .4.5 .8 .3 .8 1.6 .1 .1 .5 .4 13 .2 --"])~7 J..4. 9 9.4 (2) Colorado Agriculture Exper-Iment; Station, Fort Colorado, (3) Climatological Data - Wyoming Annual Summary, 1963, Cheyenne, and (4) Climatological Data - Wyoming Annual Summary, 1963, Laramie. Collins, .3 �- 150 - badgers (Taxidea taxus), raccoons (Procyon lotor), Turkey Vultures (Cathartes ~), .Red-ta iled Hawks (Buteo jamaicensis), Prairie Falcons (~mexicana), Sparrow Hawks (Falco sparverius), Mourning Doves (Zenaidura macroura), Common Nighthawks (Chordeiles minor), Great Horned Owls (Bubo virginianus), B1ackbilled Magpies (Pica pica), Cliff Swallows (Petroche1idon pyrrhonota), Mountain Bluebirds (Sialia currucoides), and Horned Larks (Eremophi1a alpestris). Nomenclature for the above plant species was taken from Harrington (1954); for the reptiles, Malick (1961); for the mammals, Lechleitner and Weesner-Lech1eitner (n.d.); and for birds, Peterson (1961). Procedures: Field research was conducted from 15 April to 1 October 1963 and from 4 June to 1 December 1964. Observation periods were separated into the following times: (1) 4 am to 10 am, (2) 10 am to 4 pm, (3) 4 pm to 10 pm, and (4) 10 pm to 4 am. During the second half of field research, the first three observation periods were picked at random; one observation period for each observat.ion day. Observations during the fourth period were conducted as time and opportunity permitted, usually on nights when the moon was bright. Total observing time was 944.25 hours. Observations of the different pronghorn activity and social behavior patterns were made with the aid of a Bausch and Lomb telescope (Cat. No. 61-41-33). The telescope could be used with 20x, 30x and 60x ocular lenses. Also, a pair of 7 x 50 military binoculars (M 16) were used for closer observations. Data were recorded on prepared field forms or on a Norelco Continental 100 transistor tape recorder (Model EL3585). Field forms were used primarily except when group social behavior was being observed and then the tape recorder was utilized to save time. The data then were transcribed onto field forms at a later date. Raw data were placed on UnisortAnalysis Cards (Form Y9) for analysis. Travel through the study area was by pickup truck, horseback or walking. The method of travel was dependent upon the type of data to be collected and the terrain. Natural observation points and blinds were used wherever possible. An attempt was made at all times to keep the animal-observer relationship as negligible as possible; therefore, most observations were made at a distance of approximately one-half mile or more. An umbrella tent was used during inclement weather, but was not satisfactory. Numerous repairs had to be made on the tent because of damage from strong winds, and it appeared the constant "flapping" of the tent canvas affected the behavior of pronghorns in the Vicinity. Attempts were made to use a snooper-scope to observe pronghorn behavior patterns at night. The observation distance required and the limited range of the scope made it impossible to obtain relevant data. �- 151 - One weather station was established near the study area. In it were a 3l-day Kahlsico thermohygrograph, a 3-cup anemometer (Sci. Assoc. Inc., Type 323F), and a precipitation gauge (Sci. Assoc. Inc., Type 508). Also included to facilitate instantaneous weather readings were a maximum-minimum thermometer (Taylor, No. 5458), Abbeon reLat ive humidity and temperature indicator (Model M2A4) , and an 8-day Temp\~crib~ temperature recorder (Model 2-M-60). The weather station was located on a southern exposure 200 yards west of the study area in habitat typical of the study area. Also, the weather station was accessible without affecting the behavior of the pronghorns on the study area. Cattle activity and the .possibility of their rubbing on and pushing down the enclosure also were reduced .at this location. Trapping and Tagging Adult and juvenile pronghorns were captured on 1 March 1964 with the aid of a fixed-wing airplane and a net trap as described by Elliott· (1948). Each animal was marked with eartags and with either a 1.25 inch wide yellow alathon strap collar or a 4.00 inch wide canvas-webbed collar. Each alathon collar had identifying black numerals impregnated on it, and the canvas-webbed collars could be identified by the various colored symbols on the red, green or white vinyl plastic that covered the collar. Also the sex and approximate age were recorded for each animal marked. In Jupe 1963, newborn kids were captured, marked with eartags, marking paint, and an expandible collar. In June 1964, the same procedure was used with the ommission of marking paint. Kids were located by observing single or small groups of females, and then waiting until these female(s) approached their offspring to allow the kid(s) to nurse. Kids were captured easiest with the aid of a Labrador retriever and/or a long-handled dip net. The sex of each kid was determined by an inspection of the inguinal region. On the majority of the male kids, especially those that were completely cleaned of the birth fluids and membranes, the mandibular black patch was discernible. This also was used as a criterion to determine the sex of the·animal. Kids that were thought to be less than three days old showed little or no mobility. The approximate age of each kid captured on the study area was determined by the following criteria: (1) general behavior exhibited during capture, (2) overall body condition, and (3) degree of mobility. Captive Kids An orphaned male and female kid were held in captivity at my field headquarters during the summer of 1964. Observations, as time permitted, were made on their feeding habits, development and behavioral characteristics. Each kid was fitted with an expandible collar and kept in a pen for the first three weeks. The behavior patterns exhibited by these kids were compared to the behavior patterns observed· of kids on the study area. �- 152 - Findings and Discussion: Hoover et al. (1959) found the average kidding season on the northern plains of Colorado to be 15 days. From 1952 to 1955, the range of the kidding seasons varied from 7 to 24 days, and the peak parturition date was 6 June. In 1963, the kidding season on the study area was approximately 8 days. In 1964 it was approximately 11 days. The peak of parturition was 9 June for both 1963 'and 1964. Trapping and Tagging Sixty-four adult, juvenile and kid pronghorns were marked and released to facilitate observations on pronghorn behavior patterns. Twenty-seven newborn kids were captured and marked in June 1963 and 1964, and 37 adults and juveniles were trapped, marked and released on 1 March 1964. Kids Although the behavior of each captured kid differed slightly, several typical behavior patterns were exhibited: (1) kids less than three days old would assume leti.stimulation (death feigning position) when approached, (2) kids two days old or over ran when released, (3) if the kids ,ran when released, all exhibited letistimulation after running several hundred yards, and (4) vocalization and struggling were less when the eyes were covered. Sixteen of 27 kids were captured in the late afternoon. This did not indicate, however, that kids were more active at that time. Rather, it indicated that ,young pronghorns were difficult to locate other than by watching the females. Sometimes it required several hours of observation on a single female to locate her kid(s). In Colorado during the years 1947 to 1955, Hoover et a1. (1959) found the sex ratio (M:F) of kids to be 95:100. On the study area, for the years 1963 and 1964, the sex ratio of kids was 125:100 (Table 2). Table 2.--Sex ratios of pronghorn kids captured on study area, 1963-1964. Year Total Kids Males Females Sex ratio (M:100F) 1963 13 7 6 117:100 1964 14 8 6 113:100 Total 27 15 12 125:100 �- 153 - Table 3. Pronghorn kids captured and marked in June 1963 near Livermore, Colorado. Date Approx. Age Collar No. Eartag No. Sex Remarks 6/4 48-60 29 AN6 F Ran when approached, ran 100+yds. when released. 6/4 6-12 31 AN8 MLaid until touched, ran less than 100 yds., cord wet. 6/, 60-12 3,0 .AN 7 M Caught with net, ran when first approached, very agile. 6/6 12-24 32 AN9 M Laid still, hair curly, ran less than 100 yds. when released. 6/7 48-60 33 AN 10 F Ran when approached, difficult to catch. 6/9 60-72 28 AN, F Caught one tHin, but not the other, ran when approached, ran 100+ yds. when released. 6/10 48-60 , 24 ANl M Ran when approached; captured by dog, ran out of sight when released. 6/10 12-24 2, M Laid until captured, Lai.d down when released. 6/10 12-48 ~6 AN 3 F Same as eartag No. AN 2. 6/10 12-24 21 AN4 M Laid until captured. 6/11 48-60 AN 11 F Caught vU th net, ran when released. 6/11 48-60 AN 12 F Same as eartag No. AN 11. 6/11 60-72 AN 13 M Difficult to catch. ]/ Hours 11 �- 154 - Table 4. Pronghorn kids captured and marked in June 1964 near Livermore, -CoIor'ado , Date Approx. Age Collar No. Eartag No. Sex 6/7 4-611. 212 F Laid still trhen first touched, hair matted, twin of collar No. 222, ran 40-60 yds. after release. 6/7 4-6 222 F Same as collar No. 212. Presumed killed by an eagle on Remarks 6/9/64. 6/9 36-48 272 M Laid 1.•hen approached, jumped when touched, hair wavy, t~~n of collar No. 274, ran 100+ yds. 6/9 36-48 274 M Same as collar No. 272. 6/9 48-60 285 F Ra..'1 vlhile photographed approx. 100 yds., had scours, hair wavy. 6/12 24-48 13 M Laid still when first touched, had rvwavy , ran 150 yds., female p 97 collared, han of collar No. 24. .6/13 48-72 24 p 47 F Outran man at 24 hours, caught later with dip net. 6/13 96+ 241 p 75 M Caught by surprise, ran ~+ mile when released, weight ~ 15 Ibs. 6/14 12-48 175 AN 50 F Laid still until touched, hair very l'laVy, ran 60-80 yds., t1tin of collar No. 234. 6/14 12-48 234 AN 50 M Same as collar No. 175. 6/16 36-48 40 p 48 M Laid still untd.L touched, hair wavy, ran 200-300 yds. 6/16 :0..72 210 P 61 M Caught by dog, hair straight, hard to handle, female collared. 6/17 84-96 20 M Captivity, 6/17 84-96 207 F Capti vity, h1iri of collar No. 20. -g Hours twin of collar No. 2070 �- 155 M Lists of numbers of kids captured on the study area in 1963 and 1964 are reported in Tables 3 and 4. The approximate age and condition of each animal are listed in addition to their identification numbers. Adults and Juveniles Fifty-one pronghorns were net-trapped on 29 February 1964. Three animals escaped from the enclosure during the trapping operation when the herd ran into and separated two segments of the fence. The remaining animals were allowed to rest in the enclosure overnight. They were driven into the trap, marked and released on 1 March. Seven females and one male died while being handled; presumably from shock and/or internal injuries incurred when they were in the trap. Within the next two days, two other females were found dead on the study area. Thirty-seven pronghorns were successfully marked and remained on or near the study area (Table 6). The sex and age composition of the 37 pronghorns trapped are summarized in Table 5. A chi-square analysis revealed that the sex ratio is significantly different from 50:50 (X2 = 5.8, d.f.=l,P less than .05). Assuming the sample is unbiased, then the sexes are not equally represented in the trapped sample. Table 5.--Age and sex composition of 37 pronghorns trapped, marked released on the study area, 1 March 1964. Number Sex Kids in age and sex class Adults Juveniles and Total Males 4 3 7 14 Females 4 4 15 23 Total 8 '7 22 37 The reproductive tracts of four females 'killed during the trapping operation were examined in the laboratory (Table 7). Three of the four tracts contained, equally-spaced twins and the remaining one held a single fetus. The females were found to have a bipartite uterus with a syndesmo-chorial placenta (cotyledon shape). Automatic Tagging Devices Eight automatic tagging devices, as described by Verme (1962), were installed on fence crossings of pronghorns. No data were collected from these devices to determine if this was a feasible method to collar pronghorns automatically for identification. �- 156 - Table 6. Identification of adult, juvenile on 1 March 1964 near Livermore, Colorado. Collar No. Eartag Nos. 142 143 1116 None AN 32, Al~ 33, AN 41, AN 34, AN 83 AN 84 P.N 92 AN 85 Ih7 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 AN 21 AN 21 AN. 18 AN 14 Al~ 15 AN 11 AN 17 1m 22 AN 24 AN 20 P 57 p 56 AN 25 P 58 p 51 P 52 AN 25 .AN 2 AN2 AN 16 A.,,\1 38, .AN 89 AN 12, AN 12* AN 37, AN 88 AN 42, AN 93 Al'J 40, AN 91 AN 35, AN 86 . AN 39, AN 90 AN 29, AN 80 AN 30, AN 81 AN 1, AN 1* AN 36, 1IJ~ 87 AN 31, AN 82 Al~ 27, Al.'.J 27 AN 28, AN 28 Al~ 29, AN 29 AN 33, AN 33 AN 30, AN 30 AN 32, P.N 32 AN 34, A,\1 34 AN 35, AN 35 AN 36, AN 36 AN 37, AN 37 AN hI, AN 41 A.,,\1 42, AN h2 AN h3, AN 43 AN 1~5, AN h5 AN 46, AN 46 AN 49, Ju~ 49 AN 48, AN 48 AN 47, AN 47 P 27, P h8 * Recaptures P 26, P 76 Sex Age M M Yearling Adult Adult Adult Adult F F F M F F F F F M M F N F M F F H M F 11 F M F F F M M F F F F F M F Kid Kid Adult Adult Adult Adult Yearling Adult Kid Kid Yearling Kid Adult Kid Adult Yearling Adult Adult Yearling Kid Adult Yearling Adult Adult Adult Yearling Kid Adult Adult Adult Adult Adult and kid pronghorns Collar Color trapped and Code Yellow alathon collar Yello.1 alathon collar YellOl'Talathon collar Yello'lv alathon collar Yellow alathon collar Yello.l alathon collar Yello'\v alathon collar Yellovl alathon collar YeHow alathon collar Yellow alathon collar Yello"T alathon collar YellOlv alathon collar Yellow alathon collar Yellow alathon collar Yello ••alathon collar Ye l.Low alathon collar YelloH alathon collar Red collar '\vi th 2 green dots Red collar ,ri th 1 green dot Red collar "iith 3 green squares Red collar \~'itho .2 green squares Red collar "u th 2 green squares Red collar with 2 green stripes Red collar •.. '1. th 1 green stripe Green collar \vith 3 red dots Green collar Vlith 2 red dots Green collar with 1 red dot Green collar with 3 red stripes Green collar .lith 2 red stripes Green collar \Vith 1 red stripe White collar I·lith 2 green dots Hhi te collar wi th 1 green dot vJhi te collar 'W'i th 1 red square vfuite collar with 2 red squares Wh:L te collar vUth 3 red squares Fi'i:ite coLl.ar' 'Ivi th 1 red stripe vrnite collar with 2 red stripes �- 157 Table 7.--Fetus sex, length and condition reproductive tracts examined. Tract Number Fetus (sex) Crown-rump Length (rom) of the ovaries Ovary Length (rom) of four pronghorn Corpora Lutea (No. ) Cystic Follicles (No.) L R L R L R 1 Female 190 16 12 3 0 1 2 Female 190 17 16 3 2 0 1 Female 188 Female 127 3 1 0 2 Female 127 Female 173 1 2 Male 180 3 4 ~ive 20 23 Kids On 17 June 1964, an approximately 3 to 4 day old male and female kid were placed in my care by Mr. George D. Bear, Biologist, Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department. A holding pen was constructed to facilitate observation of the development and behavior of these pronghorns. Each kid was fitted with an expandible collar similar to the collars placed on kids marked in the field. Also, on 17 June, Mr. Floyd M. Blunt, Director, Sybille Research Unit, Wheatland, Wyoming, was contacted and offered valuable information concerning the care and handling of the young animals. Originally, the kids were captured by a local ranch-hand who kept the kids in a cool, dark shed and fed them only cow's milk. When I received the kids, both were suffering from malnutrition and constipation. Proper feed and medication, as recommended by Blunt (personal communication), were administered and all precautions were taken to keep the kids as clean as possible. After each feeding period, which took approximately one-half hour, the inguinal and muzzle regions of each kid were wiped with a rag soaked in disinfectant and warm water. A liquid formula consisting of one quart whole milk to one ta;!].can of condensed milk was given until 1 August. After that t Ime, the p1i(i),{!l'ortion of condensed mild was reduced to 50 per cent. Each day , O)~6; ce 0'f ABDEC vitam'ins.,.in addition to ~ teaspoon of powdered calcium' ]a;e·1talte~,. were added �- 158 to the formula. Water, besides that available in feeding pans, was given periodically in a feeding bottle. The solid food was a mixture of Gooch's Oprema Fitting Ration and Carnation Calf Manna. Small amounts of dry bone meal were added periodically to the solid food mixture which was fed according to the weight of the kids. A salt block was made available to the animals at all times. Feeding periods varied throughout the summer months. Each kid was fed equal amounts of formula and a mixture of commercially prepared grain. The formula was given in sterilized eight-ounce baby bottles. Holes in the baby bottle nipples were enlarged to permit the formula to flow freely (Table 8). Table 8.--Feeding schedule and food consumption of captive pronghorn kids, summer 1964. Period Ounces per day Feedings per day Amount and proportion of liquid and solid food plus additives 17 June to 30 June 4-4~ 4 1 qt. whole milk to 1 can condensed milk-t tsp. CaLact. & 0.6 cc ABDEC per day. 1 July to 15 July 6-7 4 1 qt. whole milk to 1 can condensed milk- 0.3 cc ABDEC twice daily. 15 July to 5 August 8-9 3 2 qts. whole milk to 1 can condensed milk- 0.3 cc ABDEC twice daily. 5 August to 3 Sept. 12-13 2 2 qts. whole milk to 1 can condensed milk. Liquid Food Solid Food 20 June to 28 June 0.8 oz. Oprema to 0.12 oz. Calf Mamma + bonemea1. Feed always available. 29 June to 20 July 1.0 2 0.5 oz. Oprema to 0.5 oz. Calf Manna, force-fed. 21 July to 3 Sept. 1.5 1 1.5 oz. Oprema to 1.5 oz. Calf Manna, fed by hand or in pan. �- 159 - Behavior of Captive Kids A schedule of events and behavior patterns exhibited by the male and female captive kids during the summer of 1964 is presented in Table 9. The kids were not handled or disturbed except during and shortly after the feeding periods. Wiping of the inguinal region with a warm cloth kept the kids clean and induced both urination and defecation. The procedure, started on 17 June and continued until the first week in August, cured the kids of constipation and within three days they would eliminate with massage. The second day after massaging began, the kids began assuming" the position kids in the wild were observed to take when a dam licked (amatory behavior) their inguinal region after a nursing session. The first five to six days, after the kids had been alone for a few minutes, they would assume a death feigning position when approached. Also, they would by lying up to 50 feet apart. On 22 June, the kids would remain lying down when approached, but in an upright position. Later, they ran to the gate of the holding pen, upon seeing or hearing a human being, and raced up and down the fence, apparently wanting to be fed. After each feeding period, the kids were exercised for approximately 15 minutes in or sometimes out of the holding pen. They seemed to "enjoy" following, running or walking along with the handler and on occasion even with children or dogs. During the first week, the kids laid down after the feeding period, but by 25 June, they remained standing, walking or foraging up to 30 minutes after the handler was out of sight. Also on 25 June, the kids began investigating their surroundings. It appeared that their olfactory senses became more acute, because they began smelling and chewing on both animate and inanimate objects. Throughout the summer, the female always was more curious and wary about people, dogs and cats. The male was much more aggressive during the feeding periods. Both kids allowed the handler to rub or scratch their heads, but neither held still if they were touched on their legs or backs, or restrained in any way. General Description of Pronghorn Behavior During the study period, pronghorns were observed in groups of various sizes from 1 to 63 and in a variety of locations. In general, it was relatively easy to observe the pronghorns and to record the behavior patterns exhibited by the different social groups. Only on 128 occasions were observations over two hours obtained because of the animal's ability to detect disturbances. The rolling terrain found on the study area made it difficult to observe the animals at all times. �- 160 - Table 9. Schedule of events and the behavior patterns male and female captive pronghorn kids, summer 1964. ---.......---===------=-=----_.- .._---_.--::-- exhihited _.... _- Behaviors and Characteristic by the --.-- Dates Events, 17 June Received kids; lacked body coordination and suffering from malnutrit,ion and constipation, began wiping anal areas with warm rag, hard plug emitted from anus; Laid dovm after feeding (shelter-seeking); distress vocalization when hungry, fecling very strong (et-epimeletic); umbilical cords dry but still attached, No. 1 incisor present. 18 June Medication started; elimination forced if '\oriped. began kicking forefeet when being fed (et-epimeletic); Kids laid separately; when approached, death feigning position assumed; some play. 19 June Kids nuzzled and chewed at clothi~g (investigative); rump-patch and mane erected ,\-1henexcited; male more aggressive during feeding periods; began assunring hunched position when being tuped; still weak. 20-22 June Body coordination better; ate grain if mouthed natural vegetat.ion (ingestive); sounds less evident, waited to be fed. 23-24 June Male mounted female kid (sexual); both kids uould lie together when resting (allelor,umetic). 25 June Olfactory senses well developed, vegetation and inanimate objects No. 2 incisor present. 1 July No.3 3 July Began consuming considerable quantities of natural vegetation; rumination occurred While resting. 5-7 July Kids ate grain from hand; body coloration rump-patch more white. 15 July Both kids "Ii th severe 1-3 August Kids released from holding pen; scours no longer present. 22 August, Male missing, assume coyot e predation. 3 September Female missing; and 4 incisor teeth Patterns force-fed and licked salt block; began smelling (investigative); Hastes, present. more distinct, case of scours. found evidence of coyote predation. �- 161 - Reception Pronghorns apparently relied heavily upon their keen sense of eyesight to detect danger. Other authors (Caton 1877; McLean 1944; Einarsen 1948; Mace 1954; and Hoover et al. 1959) have written about the pronghorn and mentioned that this species has excellent eyesight, but little conclusive evidence has been gathered to substantiate the ideas. Without question, these ideas would be difficult to verify without controlled experimental studies and therefore, the following are additional general information: (1) Pronghorns were never observed in localities where their visibility was reduced by the terrain or other natural features for more than a few minutes. (2) It was difficult to approach without being detected by the animals. pronghorns within 100 to 200 yards (3) Any unusual motion or disturbance on the landscape was always investigated by the animals with either a "stare" or approaching the stimulus for a closer inspection. (4) exception Pronghorns were sagacious during all activities of during the birth process and rut. with the possible The olfactory and auditory senses of the pronghorn also appea~ed to be well developed, but not used unless the animal's curiosity could not be satisfled by eyesight alone. If one approached pronghorns within 100 yards and appeared motionless before them, they would not "spook" until they satisfied themselves by trying to pick up a scent. In earlier literature, Wallace (1940) and Einarsen (1948) stated that the pronghorn's curiosity often outweighed the animal's good "judgement" in that they would investigate strange occnr rence s . Unusual sounds (horns, whistles, barks) and similar disturbances aroused the pronghorn's curiosity, but it appeared that sounds alone did not warrant an escape. On eight occasions, animals were drawn closer to an observer by honking a horn (60, 75 and 100 yards), discharging a small caliber pistol (125 and 150 yards), or by making a slight motion of some kind (40, 50 and 100 yards). Irritability Groups of females and kids were more wary and watchful, and exhibited a greater flight distance than the bachelor herds. The flight distance for groups of females and kids was about 300 to 500 yards and about 200 to 300 yards for male groups. Flight distances were variable, however, depending upon type of disturbance (moving vs. stationary objects), type of terrain (large open basins vs. broken landscapes) and weather conditions. Flight distances it appeared were increased during periods of high humidity, especially on days when fog and light rain were prevalent. When pronghorns were approached on five occasions by the observer on foot or horseback, �- 162 - they exhibited a flight distance of over 250 yards during a light rain and/or fog. During three heavy rains, however, pronghorns were approached to within 50 to 150 yards before they took flight. It was possible that the noise created by heavy rains displaced the sounds made by the observer and also impaired the pronghorn's visual and olfactory senses. Strong winds (Beaufort numbers 3-7, 8 to 38 miles per hour) appeared to increase the flight distance of pronghorns. Wind currents and eddies probably allowed the animals to make better use of their olfactory sense, The pronghorn's olfactory sense is an important part of their escape mechanism. On several occaSions, especially during the rutting season, I approached to within 50 yards of a group of pronghorns. If I attained this distance without being detected, and then suddenly made a appearance before the group and remained motionless, they did not run until one or several members of the group circled me and picked up my scent. At that pOint, the entire group left in haste. Durtng twilight conditions, pronghorns also were less reluctant to take flight, probably because of reduced visibility. Comfort Movements Pronghorns, like other animals, exhibited behaviors that were apparently for the purpose of making the animals more comfortable. Numerical data were not collected on this phase of behavior, but the following are ~scriptions of these patterns. Grooming Only on three occasions females were observed to clean themselves by licking their pelage. It was common, however, to observe females licking (amatory behaVior) their offspring after parturition and after a nursing session. According to Hafez and Schein In Hafex (1962), the act of grooming has an apparent adaptive value, since it results in the removal of irritants from the skin. The function of social grooming, however, is less apparent. It is thought that when an animal licks the pelage of another animal, it results in the igestion of required chemical nutrients into the body. At least, Collias (1956) bel~eved this to be the case in domestic sheep and goats when the females licked and ate the bird fluids and membranes from their newborn lambs and kids. Rubbing and scratching by pronghorns were observed on numerous occasions. Horn rubbing by males on vegetation or on a fence post was common throughout the summer and probably a response to a sexual stimulus as described by Darling (1937) for red deer. It did not appear to be an erotic activity for pronghorns, however, at least it was not a form of masturbation accompanied by erection and ejactulation. At time, social horn rubbing (sparring) between females and younger males appeared to be a method to scratch the forehead or horns, rather than a form of agonistic behavior. �- 163 - Pronghorns were observed to scratch themselves, especially while resting in a standing position. This was accomplished by lifting a hind foot forward and scratching parts of the head, neck, shoulders and venter. The hindquarters were scratched by rubbing the particular area with the nose or horns. Pronghorns were observed to yawn during resting periods. This, however, was not a common sight. Other actions that could be classified as comfort movements are the acts of lying down and getting up. Pronghorns lie down and arise in typical ungulate fashion. This behavior was presented in detail by Gregg (1955). After pronghorns arise from lying down, they usually stretch. The positionsassumed by pronghorns to stretch are quite similar to the positions used by domestic dogs when they arise from a nap. Comfort movements also were made by the dam and her kids during a nursing session. Relief from Insects All age and sex classes of pronghorns were molested by insects during spring, summer and fall, especially on days when the wind was calm. The most bothersome insects to pronghorns were the house fly, deer fly and ant. Pronghorns, like most otherartiodactyls, utilized five main body movements for relief: (1) ear wiggle, (2) head shake, (3) tail flip, (4) foot stomp, and (5) flexing the hide. Another method rarely seen was amatory oehavior (e.g., licking the insect from the body). All of the above actions were accomplished, except for the foot stomp, while in a lying position. Unlike the moose (Alces alces), as written about by Flook (1959) and the barren-ground caribou (Rangifer articus), as described by Pruitt (1960), pronghorns never were seen running trom or using water or wallows as a refuge from insects. On several occasions, however, animals were seen to jump or bolt (leerlauf reaction - exaggerated flight at petty things) for no apparent reason. It was possible, however, that the behavior was a response to irritation from insects. Relief from Weather Conditions Pronghorns, unlike domestic stock, were' not observed to move to sheltered environments such as grooves of trees, behind haystacks and large rocks, or in canyons during severe rain storms. Shelter-seeking behavior, however, was observed on 17 occasions. During heavy rains, especially if strong, driving winds also were prevalent, pronghorns laid down in the vicinity of their immediate activity. Under these conditions, the animals always laid facing away from the falling rain drops. Head shaking and ear wiggling were increased during a rain storm. Upon arising after a rain storm, pronghorns shook their bodies and then their heads vigorously probably to remove the moisture from their pelage. No data were collected on pronghorn behavior during a severe snow storm. �- 164 - Daily Cycle of Behavior Daily activity patterns of pronghorns varied throughout the year. Patterns of feeding, resting and movements were dependent upon weather conditions, available forage, relationships to pronghorns and other animals including man, time of day, and the season of the year. Feeding and Resting In an average day, a definite and yet modifiable schedule of activities was exhibited by the pronghorns. In general, pronghorns were occupied by two main behaviors: (1) ingestive, and (2) resting. The activities considered as ingestive behavior for the purpose of analysis were: (1) foraging, (2) movements while foraging, (3) drinking, and (4) the taking of minerals. Activities included as resting behavior were: (1) lying down, and the acts that accompanied this behavior, and (2) standing. Comparisons of mean feeding and resting time in minutes for the three observation periods set up for the investigation are reported in Fig. 4. Pronghorns did not show a significant difference in the amounts of time spent feeding and resting during these periods of the day. When a comparison was made of mean feeding times between crepuscular periods (4 to 7 am and 5 to 8 pm) and the remainder of the daylight hours, a sLgnf fdcant; difference was evident. The mean feeding times for these two periods were 56.3 and 34.9 minutes, respectively. Schein In Hafez (1962) asserted that this is ~ommon in warm-blooded vertebrates, because during the warm parts of a day, animals respond physiologically by reduction of metabolic heat production. Also, utilization of the mechanisms of physiological heat-loss are employed to maximize the evaporation from body surfaces. On the study area, it was evident that these two periods (early morning and evening) were the times when pronghorns actively foraged throughout the year. Kautz (1942), Einarsen (1948) and Buechner (1950) also observed this to be the time when pronghorns concentrated more on feeding than on resting. Movements and Mobility Few data were collected on movements of pronghorns on the study area. Movements of domestic animals could be determined with the use of a rangemeter, but this was impractical for pronghorns. Animal movements were recorded when they were feeding, in approximate yards per hour, but only general statements can be made on movements of pronghorns on the study area. �- 165 .,. 60 (23) r (18 ) r , (27) . , (32) l"- (60) (16) _I -~ ~ I'""'" ~ l- r-- I ri -:I L - ~ . ••••• ••••• ...; ••••• , ••••• ••••• , ioooooo F R o 4-10 am 10-4 pm 4-10 pm TIME INTERVAL Fig. 4. Relationship of time interval to mean feeding and resting times in minutes for the different groups of pronghorns on the study area, May to December, 1963 and 1964. Twice the standard error indicated by solid bar. Sample size is shown in parenthesis. �- 166 - ' When undisturbed, pronghorns moved an average of 113 yards per hour in 272 observation periods which ranged from 6.5 minutes to 6.25 hours. If disturbed, however, the animals moved to another location, sometimes a mile or more away from where they were disturbed. During feeding periods, pronghorns usually moved within an area of approximately one-half-milesquare. Gregg (1955), working in Wyoming, determined that pronghorns remained all day within an area of less than one square mile; Skinner (1924) stated that the daily cruising radius of pronghorns was approximately one-eighth mile; Einarsen (1948), asserted that pronghorn movements were the greatest of any North American game animal. Extensive movements were made by pronghorns, but usually not during a feeding period. These movements, it appeared, took place after the morning's intensive feeding period (approximately 3-4 hours after sunrise). In the spring, prior to and during the kidding season, pregnant females sometimes moved more than a mile to find solitude. During the rutting season, when the pronghorns' activities were at their peak, groups of females,kids and males were observed in localities where pronghorns had never been seen before. The mobility of bachelor herds during the summer it appeared was greater than that of the female-kid groups. Two different female-kid groups spent up to seven weeks in areas less than one-mile-square. Both groups generally could be found in their respective localities, but bachelor herds apparently never spent more than a few days in anyone locality during anyone time. Of the 64 animals marked on the study area, 21 moved more than two miles from the location where they were tagged. The approximate distance traveled by these marked animals are reported in Table 10. Seasonal Cycle of Behavior Pronghorn behavior patterns varied according to the time and season of the year. Herd structures, composition and movements depended upon activities taking place in the life of the pronghorns during anyone season. Sociability and Sociality Soc Labd Lf.t y as used in this thesis, refers to the character or type of group (e.g., bachelor, female), whereas, sociality refers to the tendency to form the different social groups. Table 11 illustrates the composition of the eight different pronghorn groups observed during the course of the study. More animals actually were seen, but only the groups of pronghorns for which accurate herd composition figures were gathered were used in the table. �- 167 - Table 10.--Pronghorns tagged on 1 March 1964 which were observed at distances greater than two miles from the studI area. Collar Sex & Age Date Observed Approx. distance Number 1./ moved (miles) AN 17 F Yearling AN 22 AN 25 F Adult M Adult M Adult M Adult M Adult AN 17 - - :?:.I F Adult M Adult F -F -M Adult M -M -P 51 P 58 AN 15 -- F Kid F Yearling F Adult , 3/21/64 3/21/64 5/23/64 5/23/64 5/23/64 5/23/64 5/23/64 6/15/64 6/15/64 6/15/64 9/16/64 9/16/64 9/16/64 9/16/64 9/21/64 9/21/64 11/6/64 11/6/64 11/6/64 11/6/64 1/15/64 3-4 3-4 10-12 7-8 7-8 7-8 10-12 15-20 4-5 4-5 3-4 4-5 5-6 5-6 6-7 6-7 4-5 4-5 4-5 4-5 10-12 1/ When tagged 1/ Report from rancher Table ll.--Group composition, dates and number of groups of pronghorns observed on the studI area, 1963 and 1964. Group Lone male Bachelor herds Lone female Female groups Male-female groups Female-kid groups Male-fema1e-kid groups Kid' groups Dates Observed 5-7 to 10-20 7-5 to 9-16 6-5 to 8-27 5-7 to 9-23 5-7 to 10-9 6-4 to 9-16 1-1 to 12-31 6-4 to 8-27 Mean Sfzeof Groups Male Female Kid Total 1.0 1.0 5.3 5.3 1.0 1.0 4.2 4.2 1.3 4.5 5.8 2.9 2.2 5.1 1.1 . 4.2 2.7 8.0 2.1 2.1 No. of Groups Observed: 79 56 53 44 53 85 48 13 �- 168 - Gregg (1955) found the following arithmetic means for the different pronghorn groups: (1) bachelors - 5.85, (2) female groups - 3.65, (3) malefemale groups - 2.34 males; 2.43 females, (4) female-kid groups - 2.14 females; 2.34 kids, and (5) male-female-kid groups - 2.60 males; 4.21 females; 2.43 kids. The frequency of each group observed was not listed. In winter, when gregarious behavior was the strongest, pronghorns gathered in groups of from 15 to 63 in number. This sociality behavior appeared conditioned by the inter-relationships of all the age and sex classes during the rutting season. Pronghorns sociality was at its height during the rutting season. It was not determined what factors regulated herd size. According to Knipe (1944), factors such as forage, water, protection, competition with livestock, and the gregarious "instinct" decided the concentration behavior of pronghorns in Arizona. Mace (1954) and Dirschl (1963) determined that pronghorns gathered in large herds in winter and that herd size was dependent upon limited amounts of water and the extent and quality of the winter range. In spring and summer, the groups (e.g., female-kid, bachelor) separated to different localities and maintained stable social structures. Female-kid groups appeared to be formed for the purpose of affiliation or socialization, whereas, the bachelor herds could be classified into groups where aggression, defense, flight and retreat were stabilized to determine dominance relationships among the male members of the population. In the fall, considerable amounts of social disorder were obs.ervedwhen males, previously in bachelor herds, began associating with the female-kid groups. Here the reproductive drive overpowered male to male affiliation behaviors; thus the breeding season was enacted. Migrations Two migration periods existed on the study area in both 1963 and 1964. One, an emigration of females and bachelor herds from the mixed winter social groups to environments separable only by social processes, and two, an imigration of the mixed breeding herds into more favorable wintering areas. A long-term, more detailed investigation on the seasonal movements of marked pronghorns, however, would have to be conducted to determine the basic patterns of movements. In general, female groups began their movements into the prospective kidding areas approximately on 1 May. About the third or fourth week in May, individual females began to seek solitude probably in anticipation of parturition. Often, however, some of the pregnant females remained in groups of from 2 to 6 individuals, except during the actual birth process. Bachelor herds did not form until sometime in July. �- 169 - Limited data were collected on the movements of pronghorns during fall and early winter, but it appeared that groups of pronghorns spent more time in sheltered basins (one mile or more in diameter) than they did during the spring, summer and early fall. Basic Patterns of Behavior Pronghorns exhibited all eight adaptive behavior patterns described by Scott (1958). Ingestive, sexual and eliminative behaviors were important to animals physiologically. Investigatory, allelomimetic, agonistic, epimeletic, play and et-epimeletic behaviors were important to animals psychologically. Ingestive, eliminative, investigatory, allelomimetic, and play were observed throughout the year. In constrast, sexual, agonistic, epimeletic and et-epimeletic were mostly seasonal. Important and common behavior patterns exhibited by pronghorns during the study are listed in Table 12. Ingestive and Eliminative Behavior Pronghorns ate a variety of forage ranging from succulent flowering parts of Spanish bayonet and. Russian thistle to woody stems of true mountain mahogany. In the past considerable work has been done on food habits of the pronghorn, therefore little will be mentioned in this thesis on that phase of investigation. Only what the animals did while feeding will be considered here. Pronghorns primarily fed in a standing position. Pawing the ground with the forefeet was common when pronghorns were feeding on surface vegetation. This behavior was more frequent when the ground was covered with snow or if the animals were feeding on vegetation such as prickly pear and Russian thistle. Eight areas where pawing was observed were inspected, and it appeared that the pronghorns rooted almost the same way as domestic and wild pigs. When taking minerals, pronghorns scratched and pawed at the ground, especially around livestock salting areas. It appeared that the animals preferred to lick minerals off the ground rather than from the stock salt blocks. Of 97 observations of animals taking minerals, only 21 were from salt blocks. The remainder were from areas where the vegetation was sparse or from old unused salting areas for livestock. The female observed giving birth to twins ate the membranes. No other observations of this behavior were made. Group orientation while feeding was observed by Gregg (1955) in Wyoming for pronghorns and in elk by Altmann (1952). Feeding patterns or group orientation existed for pronghorns on the study area, but not for the same reasons suggested by Gregg (1955), who postulated that grazing patterns existed because: (1) pronghorns were vulnerable to attack when feeding and grazing patterns allowed for the detection of danger, and (2) if danger did present itself, all animals would benefit from a warning signal given by one of the members of the group. These are additional benefits possibly, but not reasons. Data from this study indicated that group orientation while feeding was the result of the 1eaderfollower relationship and a11e1omimetic behavior exhibited by pronghorns. �- 170 - Table 12. Basic behavior patterns of pronghorns in northcentral Colorado. Behaviors Characteristic Patterns Ingestive Foragine, ,ruminatine, drinking, mineral licking, chewing inanimate objects, eating membranes. Nursing, ticking forefeet, nudging venter of dam. Shelter-seeking Grouping together in defense of predators, lying and foragine in sheltered basins ffivayfrom wind, kids 1yine down when darn away, standing with rump into storm, lying down dur-ing heavy rains, skin and extremity movements to rid themselves of insects. Investigatory Lifting head, directing ears, eyes and nose when disturbance was near, walking t.owards motionless animate and inanimate objects, peering over ridges into adjacent valleys, smelling other animals. A11e1omimetic Walking, grazing, running and lying down together, following one another, urinating together, defecating together, drinking, running along side vehicles. Agonistic Snort and challenge calls, escape by running in herds, sparring, butting, patzi.ng , horn and cheek rubbing, death feigning of kids. Eliminative Postures assumed by both male and f'emal,e , scratching of the forefeet by the male, concentration of 'excreta on bare ground and near fence crossings. Ep.lme Letd.c Amatory behavior of females with lids, cessation of movement by females to al.Low kids to nurse, position of female during nursing period, baby-sitting. Et-epime1etic Bleating of kids, distress call of kids when hungry, caught or separated. Sexual (l1a1es) Cour-t.sht.p, (Females) Courtship, teasing runs, cessation of movement during mountdrig, amatory behavior towards males. Play f'o'Ll.owi.ng females, approach ,rith head tilted, horn and cheek rubbing, smelling female ul~ne, head extension, herding of females, chasing sub-dominant males, mounting, copulation. Sexual: mounting in kids. Agonistic: butting and sparring. A11e10mimetic: running in formation. Play: kicking hind1egs out to one side of body. �- 171 - Hafez and Schein In Hafez (1962), in their excellent discussion on the behavior of domestic cattle, also regarded feeding patterns of animals as part of the leadership-followers hip phenomenon. Kids were observed to mouth vegetation on the study area within two weeks after the peak of parturition occurred. The two kids held in captivity also were observed mouthing and chewing on vegetation at this age, but it was not until they were three to four weeks old that they consumed vegetation to any degree. Even then, they ate only the top foliage of forbs and grasses. Rumination The act of regurgitation, remastication and reswallowing is known as rumination. According to Hafez and Schein In Hafez (1962), foraging has adaptive significance because it permits the animals to gather maximum amounts of forage with minimum amounts of exposure in open field situations, and rumination allows the animals to finish digesting the gathered forage at their leisure, usually in a less vulnerable environment. Kids began ruminating about the first week in July. Rumination was seen most often when the animals were lying down, but it was not uncommon for pronghorns to chew the bolus while standing in a resting position. Rumination was seen only when the animals were in a state of relaxation. If any ~ind of disturbance occurred, they immediately reswallowed the cud and focused their attention on the disturbance. If they perceived danger, the animals discontinued rumination and investigated their surroundings. Bell (1960) In Hafez (1962), recorded electroencephalographs on unrestrained domestic goats during rumination and found that when the goats became alert, rumination ceased. Data were not recorded on rumination rates of pronghorns on the study area, but Gregg (1955) determined that kids chewed their cuds at a rate of 137 times per minute and adults, both male and female, about 115 to 118 times per minute. In data from 35 adults, he found that swallowing and regurgitation occurred on the average of 41 seconds after chewing commenced. Drinking Water from Stonewall Creek was available to pronghorns on the study area. On 81 occasions pronghorns were observed near water of some type, but only 10 times was it verified that the animals actually drank. Water for drinking was taken from several sources, including: (1) springs, (2) creeks and (3) stagnant pools after a rain. According to Hafez and Schein In Hafez (1962), drinking behavior is controlled by the interaction of interoceptive perceptors (thirst) and exteroceptive stimuli (sight of water). Also, social facilitation may induce some animals to drink. In female-kid groups throughout the summer, an adult female would lead other pronghorns to water, but usually the entire group would drink. It appeared that social facilitation was an important factor in the drinking behavior of pronghorns. �- 172 - The amounts of water drunk by the animals probably were dependent upon several factors, including: (1) weather, (2) condition of the forage they consumed, and (3) physiological phase (lactation, reproduction of the animals). When the pronghorns descended into the creek bottom to drink, they were wary. Usually, unless there were only a few members in the group, the animals went to drink in small groups while the others remained and apparently surveyed the surroundings. The definite drinking times recorded in June and July were: one at 7:30 am; one at 8:30 am; one at 10:55 am; one at 11:28 am; one at 5:35 pm; and two at approximately 6:30 pm. In September and October - three between 6:20 and 7:30 am: On 71 other occasions data were insufficient to make a definite analysis. Nursing Eighty-five observations were made of kids nursing. Several forms of behavior were observed prior to and during these periods. All lactating females tended to exhibit similar behavior patterns. These females, having a physiological need to relieve milk pressure, often ran at a quick gait to the vicinity of their kids. Upon reaching this area, they began walking slowly, in search of their kids, often giving a semantic display of their rump-patch. At this behavior, the kids, licking their muzzles, ran quickly to the dam. The abrupt cessation of movement by the mother was the signal for the kids to nurse. Buechner (1950) reported that a call (et-epimeletic behavior) was heard at clos~ range from a semi-domesticated female as she approached her kids. Calls of this type were not heard by the investigator during this qtudy. Different positions were assumed by the dam when single or twin kids nursed, depending upon the size and age of the kids. The mothers solicited to the nursing kids (2 to 3 weeks old) by arching their backs, thus, making the udders more accessible for suckling. When the kids were older than three weeks, they had to kneel on one or both forelegs to reach the udders. The first few days after parturition, the female allowed the kids to nurse to apparent satiation. Later, until the weaning period which started early in October, the female terminated the nursing period by moving forward a few steps; on occasion even knocking the kid(s) away or down. Striking with the forelegs by the kids was observed during the nursing sessions after the kids were approximately three days old. Gregg (1955) suggested that this striking motion (et-epimeletic behavior) indicated a stronger degree of hunger. Epimeletic behavior ~as demonstrated by the females in turning and licking the posterior portions of the kids (See Behavior of Captive Kids). Gregg (1955) stated that in Wyoming, from 12 June to 5 August, the mean nursing time was 64 seconds, and from 6 August to 29 September, the mean time decreased to 29 seconds. In this study the mean nursing time was 33 seconds from 4 June to 1 August. After August, the mean nursing time was 23 seconds. Mean nursing times for single kids and twins are reported in Table 13. When the mean nursing times were tested at the 5% level, there was no significant difference between the two periods. �- 173 - Table l3.--Comparison of mean nursing times for the periods 4 June 31 July to 1 August - 12 October for single and twin pronghorn kids on the study area, 1963-1964. 1/ Time Period Frequency Mean Nursing Times Mode Median Standard Deviation 4 June 31 July 42 33.2 32 32 l7.S 1 August 12 October 10 23.5 25 24.5 11.9 * 1/ * Time in seconds p(t=0.S6) greater than .05, Tabular t=2.00S, 50 d.f. A Chi-square analysis at the 5% level indicated evidence that there was a significant difference (X2-22.7S, d.f.=7, P less than 0.05) between nursing times during the daylight hours (Table 14). Elimination Different positions were assumed by male and female pronghorns during ~limination (urination and defecation). Males attained a characteristic stance when urinating: the hindlegs were spread apart slightly and then the animal moved forward approximately one foot, keeping the hind1egs in place. The animal's venter was parallel to the ground and urination was accomplished with the penis in the sheath. Defecation almost always immediately followed urination. When urination was terminated, the animal moved the hind legs forward quickly under the body (it appeared almost that the animal jumped forward with only the hindlegs) and assumed a squat position typical of the position attained by females when urinating. Defecation by the females was accomplished while in a normal standing position with the tail held upward or as the animal was walking. With the exception that the females continued walking while defecating pronghorns always interrupted an activity to eliminate. Numerical data were not collected on this phase of behavior (See Gregg 1955). Male pronghorns generally pawed the ground with the forefeet before elimination. Einarsen (194S) and Buechner (1950) also observed this behavior and postulated this to be a secondary sex characteristic of the male which was observed least often in the winter and most often during the breeding season. Gregg (1955) also determined that pawing before elimination in the males was more intense during the breeding season, but that it resulted from increased eliminative behavior during that season. �- 174 - Table l4.--Chi-square analysis of 85 pronghorn nursing periods during daylight hours, 1963-1964. 1/ Time Period Nursing Frequency Observation Time (Hours) Frequency per Hour Nursing Periods Obs ./100 Hou rs 4 am - 6 am 5 47 1: 9.4 10.6 6 am - 8 am 6 64 1:10.6 9.4 8 am -10 am 7 66 1: 9.4 10.6 lOam -12 am 13 77 1: 5.9 16.9 l2am - 2 pm 21 74 1: 3.5 28.6 2 pm - 4 pm. 14 77 1: 5.5 18.2 4 pm - 6 pm 15 110 1: 7.3 13.7 6 pm - 8 pm 4 40 1:10.0 10.0 In this study, elimination was classed as a contagious behavior. It was common to see an entire group of pronghorns eliminate within a matter of a few minutes, usually after arising from a resting period and one of the adult animals had initiated the behavior. This allelomimetic behavior was seen most often from August into the winter months when the larger groups of pronghorns were observed. Pronghorns did not deposit body wastes at random with respect to location. Areas where excreta were concentrated included: (1) fence crossings, (2) unimproved dirt roads, (3) gravel washes, and (4) salt grounds of domestic stock. This concentration of excreta possibly can be explained on the basis that these areas were locations where pronghorns congregated to fulfill other behavioral acts (e.g., movements, licking of minerals), therefore, the excreta would be proportional to the animal's density. It is also possible that the body wastes were more visible in these areas. �- 175 - E2cial Behaviors Leadership and Dominance Leadership was not readily detected in movements of large groups, especially when their primary activity was foraging. Leadership was noticeable, however, in the smaller groups (e.g., female-kid, bachelor) throughout the summer months. In all groups, except the bachelor herds, adult females were observed to lead the other animals. This was true even during the breeding season when a male(s) was the dominant individual in the group. Leadership appeared to be directed from the front of the group during all activities. This, however, was difficult to determine when groups were running at high speeds during an escape movement. When pronghorns were being harassed by a plane or pickup truck, social hierarchy was not noticeable, and/or males and sometimes even kids were observed to lead the group. Two female-kid groups were observed intensively during the summers of 1963 and 1964. The per cent leadership that occurred for each group is listed in Table 15. Table 15.--Per cent leadership occurrence in two female-kid groups of pronghorns on the study area from July to September, 1963-1964. Group Composition Group Leadership Frequency Per cent of leadership of individual females 1 2 3 4 M F K Total 1963 0 3 4 7 12 83 17 0 0 1964 I')', 4 7 12 9 56 33 11 0 ,)" Observed with group 43% of the time. Leadership changed within anyone group and appeared to be dependent upon cooperation. Potential leaders within one group often moved 50 or more yards away from the remainder of the animals and stopped to watch if other animals were going to follow. If the other animals did not follow, they returned to the group or continued feeding a short distance from the other animals. Spatial requirements within the different pronghorn groups varied. In female-kid groups, kids always followed close behind the dam (within 10 feet except when foraging) and if a yearling female(s) also was present in the group, she followed up to 50 or more feet from the mother and her kid(s). When adult females led larger groups that contained all age and sex classes, they were observed up to 100 feet in front of the group. �- 176 - Leadership within bachelor herds, appeared to rest with the male that was largest. Insufficient data were collected on individual males of known age to determine if age was the important factor. Of the 16 leadership occurrences observed for bachelor groups, 13 times (81%) leadership appeared to rest with the male that had the largest horns. Leadership should be distinguished from dominance. Leadership infers that one animal leads another, whereas, in dominance activities, one animal drives another rather than leads it (Scott In Hafez 1962). Leader-follower relationships were strong in pronghorns. This probably results from the fact that newborn kids were able to follow the dam within 30 minutes after parturition. According to Hafez and Schein In Hafez (1962), spacing is the result of two opposing forces: (1) cohesion, and (2) randomness. A combination of both forces allows for approximate equally spacing within one group, and also these two factors are important in group orientation when a group of animals is feeding, resting or moving. Dominance was exhibited by pronghorns in the following ways: (1) butting with the head, (2) spatial requirements, (3) driving other individuals, (4) chasing other individuals, and (5) threats made by dominant males at sub-dominant males during the rutting season. Dominance hierarchies were not determined for individual pronghorn g~oups on,the study area because of insufficient observation time of marked animals. General statements can be made, however, concerning dominance within the different social groups of pronghorns. In bachelor groups, dominance and leadership generally were exhibited by the same individual. In one case, however, a group of seven males was led by a yearling male and it was evident that a larger male was the dominant individual. In female groups, dominance and leadership were difficult to ascertain because it appeared both were variable in the activities that took place. Displacement activities were common between adult and yearling females in all ae t Lv i t Le s • Apparently dominance was based on age within these groups. Ma1!e,-female groups were led by a female but dominance was assumed by one of the larger males. Dominance was expressed by the males by remaining off to one side of the females while feeding, resting or moving. If the male came in close association with the females, it was common to see the females jump or run a short distance to move away from the male. Similar behavior also was observed for the male-female-kid groups. In female-kid groups, dominance and leadership usually were assumed by an adult female with kids. On four occasions, leadership was assumed by a yearling female but she appeared not to be the dominant individual. Dominance was expressed by the parental females by butting sub-dominant females when they approached too near their kids, or when they were about �- 177 - to nurse their kids. During nursing sessions, parental females would either move their kids a short distance away or butt at the yearling females to make them move. Play The term "play" is defined differently by several authors. Scott (1958) described playas immature forms of adult types of adaptation directed toward no particular ends. Carpenter (1934) and Scott (1945) In Hafez (1962) defined playas simulated adult behavior that serves an-;daptive purpose to develop and sharpen motor patterns which may be critically important in later life. Another concept of play was proposed by Schein (1954) also In Hafez (1962 p. 279) who defined playas "an activity engaged in solely for the sake of the activity itself, and not for the normal end result of activity. Thus, play fighting would be engaged in solely for the fight itself and not for the purpose of defeating the other animal." Etkin (1964 p. 204), in his chapter on Theories of Socialization and Communication, interpreted playas "one of the techniques of reiterated stimulus exchange by which social animals maintain their familiarity with each other as individuals. It appears to be an important technique by which young social mammals learn their place in the group and develop appropriate in-group feeling. It is often. conspicuous in maintaining pair relations in social mammals." Play behavior was observed in pronghorns on 89 occasions. It was more conspicuous in kids than in the adults. Play behavior in the adults was not observed as frequently as in the kids, probably because the adults had more firmly established social relations. Fifty-four (61%) play activities were seen during the co~ler, early mornings and evening hours (crepuscular periods) and 17 (19%) were observed before, during and after periods of high humidity (rainy, foggy and cloudy days). The following activities were categorized as play patterns of the pronghorn: 1. Sexual: playful mounting (by either sex); kids "herding" other kids: females bounding (like mule deer) with head held erect; females running in erratic patterns during pre-rut (teasing runs). 2. 3. yearling Agonistic: playful Et-epimeletic: females. sparring assimilated (head to head) and butting. nursing between kids, and kids and 4. Allelomimetic: groups running in zig-zag formation; racing along side vehicles; "bucking" (kicking hind legs out laterally from the body); kids running and jumping in erratic patterns and turning sharply in limited areas; adults and yearlings chasing with the role of the aggressor changing. �- 178 Scott In Hafez (1962 p. 6) asserted that in some species, the "development of behavior patterns is dependent upon the opportunity for play and social contact with others of their kind ••• It also has the function of helping develop muscular strength through exercise." An analysis of the above behavior patterns in pronghorns, revealed that play behavior was channeled into three main categories: (1) locomotion, (2) aggression and defense, and (3) sexual activities. Out of 89 play activities, 52 (58%) exhibited elements of running, 31 (35%) constituted an aggression or defense, and 13 (15%) were concerned with sexual activity. Sexual Breeding Season The majority of the data were collected on breeding behavior during one pronghorn breeding period in the fall of 1964. Pre-rutting behavior started during the.first two weeks in August of 1963 and 1964. The actual rutting period during 1964 was from approximately 30 September to 12 October. Pre-rutting Behavior Adult males were observed to rub their cheek patches and horns on vegetation (e.g., true mountain mahogany, Spanish bayonet, Russian thistle) throughout the summer months (See also Comfort Movements). Gregg (1955) found no ev~dence that this pattern was associated with the sexual behavior of the pronghorn. On the study area, there was a definite increa~e in these activities during September and October as compared to the first part of the summer (Table 16). This may suggest that these activities (horn and jaw rubbing) were associated with a coming of a breeding period o Table l6.--Bi-month1y comparison of horn and jaw rubbing frequencies of male pronghorns, 1963 and 1964. Frequency of activity per period Total Activity May - June July - August September - October Horn rubbing 6 32 32 72 Jaw rubbing 0 10 24 34 Total 6 42 58 106 Insufficient data were collected to determine if this rubbing behavior was associated with the establishment of territories by adult males. It was obvious that the cheek patch enlarged prior to the rutting season. It appeared, from observations in the field, that the cheek patch became larger �- 179 as well as darker in color. During the hunting season, several dead males were examined and I found evidence that a pungent odor was associated with the cheek patches of adult males. The cheek patches of yearling males also smelled of the same odor, but to a lesser degree. Cole (1956) and Cole and Wilkins (1958), working on food preference studies in Montana, mentioned territoriality in pronghorns as have other authors, but little factual information has been obtained on this phase of behavior. Sparring (head to head contact) also was observed to increase as the summer progressed. This agonistic behavior was typical throughout the field investigation, however, as a play interaction between males. In one case, three males were engaged simultaneously in one sparring session. Of the 53 times that sparring was observed, only 3 (5.7%) involved females. Only on one occasion, while making a census flight in an airplane, was a "battle" observed between two adult males and this was in December, after the rutting period. Males showed a definite interest in female wastes and bedding areas during August and September. Males were seen to approach females while they were lying down on 13 occasions. It was not determined if these males made any vocal sounds during the approach, but the females arose quickly and moved from the immediate vicinity. Upon reaching the spot where the fema Le had been lying down, the male investigated by smelling. He then eliminated on the area, usually pawing at the ground vigorously with his forefeet. Males also were observed to eliminate on areas where females and kids had previously el~minated (See also Gregg 1955). Rutting Behavior Chasing of individual females and herding of female-kid groups by sexually mature males became intense on approximately 20 September. Females made what might be termed "teasing runs" to encourage males to chase them. On several occasions, males that were in control of harems of up to 20 or more females and kids, lost their authority to sub-dominant males while absent from the harem chasing individual females. Harems seldom contained more than 15 to 20 individuals during the height of the rut. Males in charge of their harems apparently had difficulty controlling more than 20 females and kids because of the harassment inflicted by yearling and adult males without harems. Up to eight lone males or small groups of males often formed a perimeter around a harem and waited for a chance to run in and chase several of the females away from the group. This behavior was evident during the first 7 to 10 days of the rutting period. Later, single males invaded a herd and attempted to mount a female(s) without separating her from the group. Agonistic behavior between the males was at its peak during the latter part of September. Harem males did not tolerate other males within the group and readily pursued challengers, usually after giving a challenge call. These chases often lasted for several minutes and covered distances of several �- 180 - hundred yards. Approximately the first week in October, when the rut was intense, more than one male was often observed with the harem; however, there was only one dominant male. Actual body contact was rarely observed between these males. It appeared that the ability to threaten or bluff an opponent was most important. It was not determined why these sub-dominant males were allowed within the breeding groups. When male pronghorns approached a female in estrous, they held their heads high, swinging them from side to side. At times, it appeared the males were holding their heads to one side to give a semantic display of their cheek patch. If the female solicited to the approach, she generally stood still, allowing the male to approach perpendicular to her body. The male then held is head over her withers. During three incidents, females were seen to lick or nuzzle the venter of the male. When the male attempted to mount, he approached from the rear of the female. If the female solicited to the act of mounting, her cessation of movement was the stimulus for the male to rise on his hind legs and balance on the female's lower back. Actual coitus was not observed, but 23 attempts by younger males were seen. It appeared females tolerated the yearling males more than they did the older males. On two occasions, yearling males were observed to mount a ferr~le repeatedly; once nine times within five minutes. Older males were presen~ in the group, but the female ran away when they approached her to mount. It' is possible actual copulation mostly occurred at night. Mr. Paul Irvin (personal communication), a Livermore resident, stated t hat; in domestic sheep, a mature ram on a very cold night could service the largest part of a band of ewes. This may be the case in pronghorns, because females in estrous appeared not to allow the sexually mature males to mount during the warm parts of a day. A fact that may substantiate this point was that breeding behavior was more intense during the crepuscular periods than during midday. Female Female and Kid Relationships Behavior In early May, groups of from 2 to 15 females were seen frequently and appeared to utilize selected areas as kidding grounds. The highest number of female groups was observed from the first week in May until the middle of June. Solitary parturient females, however, were not observed until the first week in June. Pregnant females easily were discernible about the middle of May, and a change in their normal behavior was evident. They became more nervous, watching their surroundings very closely. If disturbed they readily took flight, even from other pronghorns. Generally, these females remained in a selected area after �- 181 - separating themselves from a social group of other females. One was observed in an area of less than 100 yards-squa!e, for four days prio~ to parturition. Nine parturient females all had abnormally distended abdomens, were restless and were less agile from 25 May to 6 June. Approximately 12 to 24 hours prior to parturition, their distended abdomens became dilatent laterallyposteriorly signifying that the fetus(es) had dropped into the birth canal. Six females were seen shortly after giving birth and one was observed during the entire birth process. Scott (1956) stated that normal social relations of a species often seem to depend upon normal female-young interactions at, or shortly after, parturition. Regrettably, only one observation was made on the early socialization process of the pronghorn. However, several behavior patterns were exhibited that are worthy of mention. The following statements are only the most significant portions of the original field notes. On 10 June. 1964 a female with a collar was observed lying down on the study area, facing uphill. Observation began at 3:30 pm and continued until 6:27 pm. A spotting scope was used and the observation distance was 400 yards. 1530 to 1602 Fluid-filled fetal membranes hanging from the vaginal opening - intermittently she would flip her tail up and down or hold it in a rigid position. Grooming, especially the muzzle area, was very evident. Very restless ~ laid down and arose seven times within this 32 minute period. 1603 to 1606 Several times laid more over on her side and partially closed her eyes - extended her neck and head anteriorly and at this time contractions of the abdomen could be seen. 1607 In the prone position - kid expelled partially head first and seconds later the female arose quickly and began turning until the motionless kid fell to the ground - immediately she began licking (amatory behavior) the struggling kid and eating the birth membranes. 1611 to 1619 Second fetal membrane observed hanging from the vaginal opening while the female continued to clean the first kid. 1620 Again in the prone position - second kid expelled partially head first and again the female arose - a few seconds later turned around and dropped the kid to the ground. 1623 Twenty-six minutes up after seven attempts, steps. after being born, the first kid stood and within five minutes walked a few �- 182 - 1628 First kid attempted to nurse. Female continued to clean kids. 1725 Female moved kids from area by running a few steps and then waiting (conditioning kid to follow female) - female stayed in general area and foraged until 1827 when she joined a group of five males. Several behavioral responses were exhibited during the event described above that can be compared to the analysis that Collias (1956) made on the early responses to socialization of domestic sheep and goats. He stated that the most consistent and significant event of these animals was the turning of the mother to face the newborn associated with the fresh birth odor. The stimulus causing the female to then lick and eat the birth membranes and fluids from the offspring is probably a specific odor in combination with the physiological response to hunger and thirst. Ewes, particularly, drink considerable amounts of water after parturition and probably eat the membranes to restore essential nutrients to the body. All of these interactions occurred in the above pronghorn birth, except the ingestive behavior of drinking water. In sheep and goats, the effect of dropping the kid to the ground at birth was not mentioned, but this may be a natural shock method to start the breathing of the newborn kid. Many more observations would have to be made on parturition in pronghorns to support definite conclusions, but it may be that the physiological reasons for the above responses are similar in sheep, goats, and pronghorns. Laboratory experiments on penned animals would have to be conducted, howev~r, to prove this. Pronghorn kids made social contacts with adult animals other than the dam within 4 to 7 days after being born. Pronghorns are gregarious animals. This is unlike the more solitary North American moose (Alces alces), where the calf usually makes its first social contact during the rutting season, which is from 3 to 4 months after parturition (Altmann, 1958). Kid Behavior and Activities Between nursing periods, during June and July, the kids were left alone, generally lying down, until they were old enough to forage and accompany the adult animals. Until these kids became more agile, they laid down independently up to 100 yards or more apart. The female did not appear to hide the kids. As their activity increased, they tended to lie closer together and by 1 July, it was rare to see twins separated at any time. This phenomenon of very young kids (1 to 10 days old) hiding independently may serve as a protection from predators. Kids assumed the normal resting position of adults when they laid down. After lying down, it was not uncommon to see kids get up and move a few feet to a different location. When approached by another animal or man, they slowly lowered their heads and ears and became as prone and as motionless as possible (death feigning). At times, they remained in this position even when touched by a net or hand. Einarsen (1948) stated that after the third day, pronghorn �- 183 - kids could outrun a man on foot, however, a kid 49 hours old outran the author. Other kids estimated to be 96 to 120 hours old, were captured with the aid of a long-handled dip net. In some cases a dog was useful. Twenty-four of the 27 kids captured were found on the shortgrass prairie, usually in the vicinity of washouts, taller grass, rocks, or cow droppings. Only three individuals were captured in mountain mahogany stands, and these all were found lying close to the edge of the dense vegetation. The principal activity period for kids was in the late afternoon, approximately 1 to 2 hours before sunset. The lower temperature and higher humidity prevalent at this time may be the factors of major influence. The kids, besides running, chasing, and jumping, butted at one another and attempted to mount each other in sexual play. These activities were not observed, however, until the kids had integrated into larger groups containing three or more kids. Kids were curious (investigative behavior) of adult pronghorns other than their mothers, but approaches usually resulted in being butted away (agonistic behavior), ordinarily by one of the yearling females in the family group. Interspecific Relationships with Birds and other Mammals Forty-nine interactions of pronghorns with another species were observed during the course of investigation. In general, the size of the animal that the pronghorns encountered determined which species was dominant. When pronghorns were within a few hundred yards of domestic $tock, they kept a constant watch on the other animals. Pronghorns were seen to come into close association with cattle or horses on 23 occasions. In all cases, the pronghorns were submissive to these animals. However, nine times pronghorns were seen feeding or moving through a herd of cattle. Unless the cattle or horses made an unexpected movement the pronghorns did not become excited. It appeared that they have become conditioned to the presence of the cattle and horses. One yearling male and a female were seen in almost constant companionship with two different groups of domestic stock. The female was observed with a herd of hereford cattle on 17 December 1963. She was observed with this herd until after the completion of the study. In May of 1964, four other females of unknown age joined her, but they were more wary of the cattle,~ These females left and then returned to the female which was in association with the herd of cattle on several occasions. The original female continued to remain with the cattle even following them from one pasture to another by crossing under fences. All five 'of the females were seen together during the winter of 1965, but the cattle had been moved to another area. On one occasion the first female was seen licking (amatory behavior) the muzzle of a heifer cow. During wintertime, the female even would remain in the herd while the cattle were being fed. She would remain within 10 to 15 yards of a truck and not attempt to run unless the rancher got out of the truck. She then would run only a short distance, approximately 100 yards. �- 184 - Another animal, a male kid, jOined a small herd of horses during the 1963 pronghorn hunti~g season which took place in September. Throughout the winter the pronghorn stayed with the horses at all times, often feeding and lying down within a few yards of the animals. The rancher, Mr. Floyd Coombs (personal communication), remarked that the animal appeared tame and that he could approach it within 20 yards, but that he could not handle it. It still was with the horses and cattle when this study terminated. On two occasions, mule deer and pronghorns were seen within 200 yards of each other. It appeared the pronghorns were submissive to the deer, but it was apparent that the deer had a mutual reaction. In both cases, each species avoided the other and each exhibited a high degree of curiosity for the other. The habitats that were occupied by each species in the daytime on the study area were quite dissimilar. The deer tended to stay in the breaks and ridges that were heavily vegetated and thus, the pronghorns rarely came into contact with them. In the early morning and evening hours, however, the deer often moved from thefrhii]J.itatand crossed the open grasslands and shrub habitat to feed. At this ti~e~ and during the night, the pronghorns and mule deer came into closer relationship with each other. Only on one occasion were pronghorns and a bobcat seen near each other. The bobcat was stalking smaller game within 50 yards of the pronghorns but neither species was aware of the presence of the other. Other than possible predation of kids by eagles, birds were not an important species in the life of the pronghorn. Magpies, at times, were bothersome in that they appeared to irritate pronghorns when resting. The birds appeared to feed on insects that were on or near the pronghorns. Horned larks were seen near pronghorns on numerous occasions, but no interactions were observed. Golden eagles attracted the attention of pronghorns, especially the female with kids. Only one kid was thought to be killed by a golden eagle. Twentyfour hours after kid No. 222 was tagged, a golden eagle was seen feeding on the freshly killed kid. Smaller raptors aroused the curiosity of pronghorns, but no other interactions between pronghorns and these species were observed. Twelve interactions were observed between coyotes and pronghorns. Male pronghorns were not interested in coyotes, but the females, especially the yearlings, often trailed a lone coyote as if to make sure the predator left the area. This "trailing" behavior was observed on four occasions. It was not determined why these females followed the coyotes. Possibly, it was a form of curiosity. Sufficient data could not be collected on hunter-pronghorn relationships to warrant any conclusions. Only during the 1964 pronghorn season was time available to gather data on this segment of the study. Seven hunters hunted on the study area in 1964. Six of the seven hunters killed males during the first two days of the three-day season. Two of the males were animals that I had tagged on I March 1964. �- 185 Limited observations revealed that pronghorn social stability was not affected greatly, partly because at this time the social groups were already unstable with the onset of the breeding season. If hunting at this time of year affected the animals at all it probably aided in the establishment of breeding groups, because of hunter selectivity on the male population. Hunter selectivity and the reduction of superfluous males probably reduces harassment between males during the rutting season. Conclusions: 1. The yellow alathon collars with black numerals were difficult to read unless the observer was within 200 to 300 yards of the animal and using a spotting scope. They also proved unsatisfactory because they removed the hair from the dorsal part of the animal's neck by sliding back and forth when the animal was foraging. 2. The plastic-covered canvas webb collars could be read under good daylight conditions with a spotting scope to one mile. These collars fit the animals more satisfactorily and did not remove the hair from the neck. The red and green colors of these collars, however, faded after several weeks of exposure to the elements. 3. Marked animals should be used, if at all possible, for animal behavior studies. Also, semi-domesticated or penned animals should be used for the purpose of close obs~rvation and tests if they are available. 4. On technique employed during the second period of field research revea led the strong possibility that a critical period does 'exist between the female and her kids. The first summer's tagging operation of kids resulted in the abandonment of at least 3 and possibly 5 of the 13 kids marked. All 5 of these animals, when handled, were only a few hours old since birth fluids still adhered to the pelage. The female had not had time to clean the kids properly, thus, perhaps the female-kid bond had not become established. During the next summer's tagging operation, 14 kids were tagged and no attempt was made to handle these kids until the socialization or "imprinting" period was well under way. This critical period was estimated to be six hours. No abandonment of the kids was observed when this procedure was followed. 5. If animals are to be trapped and handled, the operation should be done in the fall, shortly after the breeding season. Almost suicidal efforts were made by pronghorns to escape handling after they were trapped. The high incidence of death of pregnant females indicated that February was too late to trap pronghorns. Population and Environment 1. Pronghorns affected the soil with their droppings, trails and feeding habits. In areas where pronghorn concentration was high: (1) droppings denuded the vegetation by affecting the chemistry of the soil, (2) vegetation was damaged near fence crossings and deep ruts were cut into the soil by the �- 186 pronghorn's hooves~ and (3) the concentration in overuse of some pastures and rangeland. of pronghorns in winter resulted 2. Pronghorns deposited excreta on dirt roads, salt grounds of cattle, and washout areas. These locations may be possible transmittal areas for disease between pronghorns and domestic stock. 3. Pronghorns and cattle often were on the same rangeland in close association. Because of the aroused curiosity of each, the feeding times of both cattle and pronghorns were reduced. 4. Pronghorns damaged several fences on the study area because of continual crossings. During census flights, pronghorns damaged fences by running into them at high speeds, often causing injury to themselves. 5. The reproductive parts of several of the noxious plants found on the study area were eaten by pronghorns. Male pronghorns denuded leaves from woody vegetation by rubbing their horns vigorously on plants prior to and during the breeding season. S~arp hooves~ one reason why cattlemen dislike sheep, of the pronghorn dug into the soil and caused rapid erosion of surface materials. 6. Because pronghorns are so excitable and run through herds of cattle when they are feeding, they often cause the cattle to run and to bolt. The presence of pronghorns in some areas, however, may serve to divert predation by coyotes, bobcats and eagles from domestic stock. Activity Patterns 1. Pronghorns have a definite schedule of daily activities, but these patterns are altered because of: (1) weather conditions, (2) time of year, (3) physiological responses~ and (4) inter- and. intraspecific relationships. 2. High humidity effects the degree of activity of pronghorns. Activities such as: (1) running, (2) playing, and (3) foraging are more intense during summer months when cloud cover and rain are prevalent. 3. Temperature also effects the activity of pronghorns. Pronghorns are more active during the cooler portions of the day during summer. 4. Flight distances of the different pronghorn groups are variable. Weather conditions~ season of the year, type of disturbance and terrain are the major factors that determine flight distances of the pronghorn. 5. Pronghorns exhibit development of adaptive behavior patterns at an early age. Newborn kid s are capable of following the dam within 30 minutes after parturition. This possibly explains why the gregarious behavior of pronghorns is so strong. �- 187 - 6. Comparative studies of the different domestic and wild ungulates should be conducted to determine specific behavior patterns of each. Although pronghorns spent the majority of their time on the open short-grass pralrle, they were difficult to observe for more than a few hours at anyone time. 7. probably Pronghorns rely heavily on their eyesight to detect danger. This results from living in an environment which is relatively open. 8. There is no significant difference between nursing times in minutes throughout the summer months. There is a significant difference, however, between the frequency of nursing periods at certain time intervals in one day. Social Groups 1. Sociality is strong in the pronghorn. This high degree of gregariousness probably results from the early socialization processes exhibited by the pronghorn. 2. Leadership in all social groups, except bachelor herds, is assumed by an adult female. Males are the dominant individuals in all social groups except the female-kid groups. The dominant individuals in the female-kid groups usually are the older females. 3. the'kids Contrary to popular oplnlon, females do not hide their kids. Rather, select the area where they lie down to rest when the female is away. In conclusion, these data were collected over a relatively short period of time. To provide more complete information, a study of at least five years would have to be conducted. However, the accumulation of these types of data, in conjunction with other forms of research, will provide the information useful for wise management of the pronghorn. LITERATURE CITED Altmann, Margaret. 1952. Social behavior of elk, Cervus canadensis nelsoni, in the Jackson Hole area of Wyoming. Behaviour 4:116-143. Behaviour 1958. 3:155-159. Social integration of the moose calf. Animal Bell, F. R. 1960. The electroencephalogram of goats during somnolence and rumination, p. 310. In E. S. E. Hafez (ed.) The behavior of domestic animals. Williams and Wilkins Company, Baltimore, Maryland. �- 188 - Buechner, H. K. 1947. Range use of the pronghorned antelope in western Texas. N. Am. Wildl. Conf., Trans. 12:185-192. 1950. Life history, ecology, and range use of the pronghorn in Trans-Pecos, Texas. Am. Midland Naturalist 43:257-354. Carpenter, C. R. 1934. A field study of the behavior and social relations of howling monkeys, p. 279. In E. S. E. Hafez (ed.) The behavior of domestic animals. Williams and Wilkins Company, Baltimore, Maryland. Caton, J. D. 1877. The antelope and deer of America. Publishing Company, New York. 426 p. Forest and Stream Cole, G. F. 1956. The pronghorn antelope - its range use and food habits in central Montana with special reference to alfalfa. Montana State ColI. Agr. Expt. Sta. Bull. 516. 63 p. ______________ ., and B. T. Wilkins. 1958. The pronghorn antelope - its range use and food habits in central Montana with special reference to wheat. Montana Fish and Game Dept. Tech. Bull. 2. 39 p. Collias, N. E. 1956. The analysis of socialization in sheep and goats. Ecology 37:228-239. Darling, F. F. . 215 p. 1937. A herd of red deer. Dirschl, H. J. 1963. Mgmt. 27:81-93. Oxford Univ. Press, London • Food habits of the pronghorn in Saskatchewan. J. Wild1. Einarsen, A. S. 1948. The pronghorn antelope and its management. Wildlife Management Institute, Washington, D. C., and the Stackpole Company, Harrisburg, Pennsylvania. 238 p. Elliott, R. R. 1948. The antelope, p. 5-26. In J. V. Tileston, A resume of Colorado big game research projects, 1939-1957. Colorado Game and Fish Dept. Tech. Bull. 9. Etkin, W. (ed.) 1964. Social behavior and organization among vertebrates. Univ. Chicago Press, Chicago. 307 p. Fichter, E., and A. E. Nielson. 1962. Study of pronghorn population. Wildl. Research Quart. Progr. Rept. 8:7-18. Flook, D. R. 40:455. Idaho 1959. Moose using water as refuge from flies. J. Mammal. Gregg, P. A. 1955. Summer habits of Wyoming antelope. Ph. D. Thesis. Cornell Univ., Ithaca, New York. 185 p. (Dissertation abstr. 15:2374). Griffith, G. K. 1962. Guide lines for antelope management. Antelope Conf., Trans. December: 102-114. Interstate �- 189 - Hafez, E. S. E., and M. W. Schein. 1962. The behavior of cattle, p. 247-296. In E. S. E. Hafez (ed.) The behavior of domestic animals. Williams and Wilkins Company, Baltimore, Maryland. Harrington, H. D. 1954. Manual of the plants of Colorado. Books, Denver, Colorado. 666 p. Sage Harris, D. V. 1963. Geomorphology of Larimer County, Colorado, p. 196-204. In Guidebook to the geology of the northern Denver Basin and adjacent uplifts. Rocky Mtn. Assoc. Geologists, Denver, Colorado. Hoover, R. L., C. E. Till, and S. Ogilvie. 1959. The antelope of Colorado - a research and management study. Colo. Game and Fish Dept. Tech. Bull. 4. 110 p. Kautz, L. G. 1942. Antelope survey. Quart.Progr. Rept. 8:1-36. Colorado Wildl. Research Knipe, T. 1944. The status of the antelope herds "f northern Arizona. Arizona Wildl. Research Quart. Progr. Rept. 6:1-40. Lechleitner, R. R., and Frances Weesner-Lechleitner. n.d. A laboratory syllabus for maromalogy.Colorado State Univ., Fort Collins, Colorado. 73 p. Processed. Mace, R. u. 1954. Oregon's pronghorn Corom., Corvallis. 25 p. Malick, D. 1961. Snakes. antelope. Colorado Outdoors McLean, D. D. 1944. The prong-horned antelope California Fish and Game 30:221-241. Oregon State Game 10(5):15-18. in California. Peterson, R. T. 1961. A field guide to western birds. Mifflin Company, Boston, Massachusetts. 366 p. Pruitt, W. O. 1960. Behavior of the barren-ground Alaska, BioI. Papers. 3. 44 p. Houghton caribou. Univ. Rouse, C. H. 1941. Notes on winter foraging habits of antelope Oklahoma. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 22:57-60. in Schein, M. W. 1954. Group behavior patterns in dairy cattle and their effects on production, p. 297. In E. S. E. Hafez (ed.) The behavior of domestic animals. Williams and Wilkins Company, Baltimore, Maryland. �- 190 - Scott, J. P. 1945. Social behavior, organization and leadership in a small flock of domestic sheep, p. 279. In E. S. E. Hafea (ed.) The behavior of domestic animals. Williams and Wilkins Company, Baltimore, Maryla~d. Ecology 1956. The analysis of social organization in animals. 37:213-220. 1958. Animal behavior. Univ. Chicago Press, Chicago. 281 p. 1962. Introduction to animal behavior, p. 3-20. In E. s. E. Hafez (ed.) The behavior of domestic animals. Williams and Wilkins Company, Baltimore, Maryland. Skinner, M. P. 1924. The American antelope in Yellowstone National Park. Roosevelt Wildl. Forest Expt. Sta., Syracuse, New York. 32 p. Verme, L. J. 1962. An automatic tagging device for deer. Mgmt. 26:387-392. J. Wildl. Wallace, H. S. 1940. Preliminary antelope survey. Colorado Game and Fish Comm. and Bur. Bf.o I , Survey (Pittman-Robertson Project, 4-R) vol. 1. 33 p. Prepared by: E. J. Prenzlow Grad. Res. Asst. Date: January, 1966 Approved by: Richard N. Denney Project Leader � https://cpw.cvlcollections.org/files/original/bc3b5e3e9204e1225b6f59fab288599e.pdf f642feca5c93e5827999611e48cb8b73 PDF Text Text January, 1966 - 191 - JOB COMPLETION RESEARCH REPORT PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO ------~~~~~----------------An Ecological Investigation of the Project No. Cache la Poudre Deer Herd, Colorado W-l05-R-6 Work Plan No. 3 Environmental Job No. 1 Climatic Period Covered: Personnel: January, 1965 - December, Studies Environment 1965. Dean E. Medin, Allen E. Anderson, Kenneth A. Porter ABSTRACT Environmental studies were accomplished primarily on five selected areas in the Cache la Poudre River drainage. The areas, each approximately 500 acres, represented the following seasonal deer use elevational 'zones: Hewlett Gulch (lower-winter), Kelly Flats (middle-winter), Sevenmile Creek (upper-winter), Little Beaver Creek (transitional), and Crown?oint (summe r ) , Environmental measurement stations were established on each of the five deer-range study areas and were in continuous operation from December, 1960, until completion of field studies June 1, 1965. Station sites were selected to characterize or calibrate the climatic environment on each area. Data recorded weekly (monthly on the summer range during the mid-winter period) at each of the five elevatiori levels included: continuous air temperature and relative humidity, maximum and minimum soil temperature, average wind velocity, wind direction, precipitation, soil moisture, snow depths on four contrasting exposures, snow and crust type classification, and supplementary notes on measurements. Meteorological data collected at each elevation during the entire period of Tabular annual summaries operation are presently being summarized and analyzed. and data collected in 1965 are presented. Recommendations: Continue summarization and analysis of collected data and explore possible climatic or weather relationship to other study phases, e.g., forage yield and utilization (Work Plan 3, Job 3) ,food habits (Work Plan 3, Job 5), herd structure sampling (Work Plan 4, Job 1), and deer condition and stress (Work Plan 5, Job 1). �- 192 - Objective: Measure the local climate on each of five selected study locations believed to be representative of the lower-winter, middle-winter, upper~winter, transitional, and summer ranges of the herd so that data relevant to the biota und.er study can be adequately interpreted, particularly from the standpoint of elevational relationships. Techniques Used: A more detailed explanation of techniques (1965). A brief summarization is presented here. can be found in Medin Environment station locations in the Cache la Poudre River drainage are illustrated in Figure 1. A southeasterly exposed ridge within the prevalent browse type was the station site selected for each of the three winter range areas. Transitional and summer range stations were located. on similar southeast ridge exposures in the forest type occurring at those elevations. All stations were located approximately midway in a given study area's elevational spread. Instruments installed included a Bendix-Friez Model 594 hygrothermograph, standard maximum and minimum thermometers, sling psychrometer, three-cup totalizing anemometer, a standard 8-inch unshielded precipitation gauge, and a metal soil temperature box housing Weather Bureau type maximum and minumum thermometers. A Kah L thermohygrograph (Model WE-24-0l) equipped with a 31-day clockwork was installed at the summer range station during the mid-winter period. Soil moisture samples were collected weekly from a soil pit adjacent to the station installations. Methods and procedures used in servicing instruments and maintaining records were essentially those outlined by the Institute of Arctic and Alpine Research (1958) and the U. S. Weather Bureau (1955). Snow stake lines were established on four sites at each station: a southeast-sloping ridgetop, a drainage adjacent to the ridge, open south-facing slope, and forested north-facing slope. Ten steel fence posts, equidistantly spaced, comprised each snow stake transect line, yielding a total of 40 snow depth observations at each station. In addition to depth, the snow along each stake line was classified as to specific type and crust characterisitics as applied by U. S. Forest Service snow studies (U. S. Forest Service 1953). �50' 40' R 75W R76W :--. ~+ R74W! zo: 105· 30' 10' i .i f-1 "d ~IS"~----'~~~,' J ••• ,_~ /~~~"'LJI-"l , :- •. _ CB I 7'",~~,,"V-~40 I I I MANAGEMENT DEPT. OF SIXTH 1 t 0 PRINCIPAL 1 UNIT I I 19 GAME AND FISH I I •• 1,0' MERIDIAN sc~e ~Mile~ . LEGEND ~ Manogement Unit Approximate Transitional Between Summer 8oundory And Zone Winter RonQ8S I i i ----------------------------.~---- Figure 1. Location and elevation ----- of environment measuring stations, ~ Cache la Poudre River drainage, >Oiy,,"'O "roJ.dion "k,lrtn AmO'-Icon detum Colorado. I ! 30' ��- 195 - CLU1ATIC ENVIRONMENT Dean E. Medin Findings: Five environment measurement stations were installed on each of five deer-range study areas. Station 1 (Hewlett Gulch -- 6,440 ft) represented the lower-winter range area; Station 2 (Kelly Flats -- 7,000 ft) the middle-winter; Station 3 (Sevenmile Creek -- 8,120 ft) the upper-winter; and Stations 4 (Little Beaver Creek -- 8,940 ft) and 5 (Crown Point -- 10,320 ft) the transitional and summer ranges. With the exception of the summer range station (Crown Point), all stations were in operation by January 1,1961. The summer range station was installed during June of 1961. Data recorded weekly (monthly on the summer range area during the mid-winter period) on each of the five elevational levels included: continuous air temperature and relative humidity, maximum and minimum soil temperatures, average wind velocity, precipitation, soil moisture, snow depths on four contrasting exposures, snow and crust type classification, and supplementary notes regarding wind gust velocity, depth of snow over the soil temperature box, condition of surface soil, and type and extent of cloud cover. Climatic calibration data were collected until completion of field studies on June 1, 1965. Tables 1 through 4 present annual tabulations of data collected from 1961 through 1964. Tables 5-8 summarize 1965 data. These summarizations should not be interpreted as "regional" or "standard" weather observations in the sense of Weather Bureau reports. Although results may closely approximate regional observations, the environment measurement station locations and methods of instrumentation were chosen to best characterize the environment in which deer exist and on which deer-environment relationships were being investigated. Results may not necessarily reflect regional climate or be directly comparable to standard weather observations. Monthly Reports summarizations of data for 1961-1964 were reported in Game Research for July, 1962 (Part Two); January, 1964; and January, 1965. Much remains to be done in analyzing, interpreting, and relating climatic or weather data to other phases of the study. A few of the relationships intended for exploration follow. (1) Forage yield - precipitation relationship, particularly standpoint of pre-growing season precipitation. (2) Snow depths (3) Air and soil temperature (4) Both annual and short-term cover. (5) Distributional (6) Deer-stress relationships fluctuations. and deer use of particular pattern habitats - plant phenology variations of seasonal or areas. associations. in food habits or monthly as influenced from the as related to snow precipitation. by relatively short term weather �- 196 - (7) E1evationa1 food habits. and deer condition variables. (8) Soil moisture and forage yield-phenology relationships. (9) Weather fluctuation influences on sampling problems involved in sampling herd structure. (10) Climatic changes related to e1evationa1 variations. Acknowledgements: The Institute of Arctic and Alpine Research, University of Colorado, gave valuable advice concerning the orientation, establishment, and operation of environmental measurements stations. F. David Stearns assisted in the weekly reading of the stations during the spring of 1965. Doyle Markham tabulated data collected in 1965. LITERATURE CITED Institute of Arctic and Alpine Research. 1958. Servicer's manual: A summary of the procedures to be used in collecting certain data from environment measuring stations. University of Colorado, Boulder, 8 pp. Medin, D. E. 1965. Climatic environment. P-R Project W-105-R, Colorado Dept. of Game, Fish and Parks, Game Research Report, January, 1965 (processed). U. S. Forest Service. 1953. Avalanche handbook. U. S. Gov't. Printing Office, Washington D. C., 146 pp. U. S. Weather Bureau. 1955. Instructions for climatological observers. Circular B, Ed. 10, U. S. Gov't. Printing Office, Washington, D. C., 70 pp. Prepared by: Date: Dean E. Medin Approved by :__ Associate Wildlife Researcher J_an __ua_ry~,L_1~9~6_6 _ ....:.:W~a;.l.y.,;;.n:.::e;.."..;.W;. __ Game Research Chief Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �Table l.--Sununary of 1961 environmental station data, deer ecology investigations, Cache la Poudre Canyon, Colorado. Environmental Factors Environment Station Location, Elevation (ft}L and Dominant Vegetation Sevenmile Cr. Little Beaver Cr. Crown Point Hewlett Gulch Kelly Flats 8,120 8,940 10,320 6,440 7,000 Big SagebrushPonderosa PineEngelmann SpruceTrue Mountain Antelope Lodgepole PineSubalpine FirMahoganyBitterbrush- Antelope Bitterbrush Aspen Lodgepole Pine Antelope True Mountain Bitterbrush Mahogany Temperature Air, of 92 Maximum 58 Mean Maximum -10 Minimum 35 Mean Minimum 45 Mean Temperature Soil, of (5-7 in) 88 Maximum 61 Mean Maximum 26 Minimum 43 Mean Minimum 52 Mean 20.01 Precipitation, Inches Water 56 Relative Humidity,% 11.9 Soil Moisture, % Dry Wt (5-7 in) 26,782 Wind, Total Miles 3.06 Mean Wind Velocity, mph W-SW Predominant Wi~d Direction 34 Maximum Recorded Gust, mph Maximum Snow Depth, ft 1.3 North-facing 1.0 South-facing 1.0 Drainage 1.2 Ridge Top 89 55 -10 33 44 87 52 -11 31 42. 80 49 -17 27 38 82 56 24 42 49 21.78 61 11.8 43,303 4.94 W-SW 52 80 56 23 40 48 28.31 62 9.1 34,453 3.93 SW-SE 36 74 48 13 35 42 28.06 68 12.4 31,803 3.63 W-SW 42 1.4 0.9 0.9 1.0 2.1 1.1 1.0 1.1 2.3 1.8 1.4 1.6 - ~ \D -.J �Table 2.--Summary of 1962 environmental station data, deer ecology investigations, Cache la Poudre Canyon, Colorado. Environmental Factors Environmental Station Location, Elevation (ft), and Dominant Vegetation Hewlett Gulch Kelly Flats Sevenmile Cr. Little Beaver Cr. Crown Point 6,440 7,000 8,120 8,940 10,320 True Mountain Antelope Big Sagebrush Ponderosa PineEngelmann Spruce~ MahoganyBitterbrush- Antelope Lodgepole PineSubalpine FirAntelope True Mountain Bitterbrush Aspen Lodgepole Pine Bitterbrush Mahogany Temperature Air, of Maximum 94 Mean Maximum 59 Minimum -16 Mean Minimum 36 Mean 48 Temperature Soil, of (5-7 in) Maximum 88 Mean Maximum 63 Minimum 27 Mean Minimum 45 Mean 54 Precipitation, Inches Water 15.24 Relative Humidity, % 53 Soil Moisture, % Dry Wt (5-7 in) 9.9 Wind, Total Miles 26,201 Mean Wind Velocity, mph 2.99 Predominant Wind Direction S-SW Maximum Recorded Gust, mph 30 Maximum Snow Depth, ft North-facing 0.8 South-facing 0.5 Drainage 0.9 Ridge Top 0.7 89 58 -18 34 46 87 54 -18" 32 44 86 54 -19 31 42 79 44 -25 26 35 79 54 26 43 49" 15.49 60 7.9 41,663 4.76 W-SW 62 81 57 28 42 49 18.15 58 6.8 32,556 3.77 W-SW 32 80 53 27 39 46 19.27 62 9.1 20,729 2.36 SE-SW 22 59 40 16 34 37 17.51 66 13.2 14,910 1.70 S-SE 12 1.1 0.5 0.8 0.4 1.7 1.0 1.2 0.8 1.6 0.9 1.0 0.7 4.3 3.8 4.1 4.5 I--' \0 co �Table 3.--Summary of 1963 environmental station data, deer ecology investigations, Cache la Poudre Canyon, Colorado. Environmental Factors Environmental Station Location, Elevation (ft), and DOJUinaI1t.Vegetation Hew Le t t Gulch Kelly Flats Sevenmile Cr. Little Beaver Cr. Crown Point 6,440 7,000 8,120 8,940 10,320 True Mountain Antelope Big SagebrushPonderosa PineEngelmann SpruceMahoganyBitterbrush Antelope Lodgepole PineSubalpine FirAntelope True Mountain Bitterbrush Aspen Lodgepole Pine Bitterbrush Mahogany Temperature Air, of Maximum 94 Mean Maximum 61 Minimum -26 Mean Minimum 38 Mean 49 Temperature Soil, of (5-7 in) MaximuiU 89 Mean Maximum 63 Minimum 18 Mean Minimum 46 Mean 54 Precipitation, Inches Water 14.69 Relative Humidity, % 52 Soil MOisture, % Dry Wt (5-7 in) 7.8 Wind, Total Miles 25,603 Mean Wind Velocity, mph 2.92 Predominant Wind Direction SE-SW Maximum Recorded Gust, mph 38 Maximum Snow Depth, ft North-facing 2.6 1.7 South-facing 1.9 Drainage 1.7 Ridge Top 94 59 -30 35 47 88 54 -31' 33 43 88 53 -28 31 42 79 56 15 43 50 14.15 54 6.7 43,581 4.98 SW 50 81 58 19 42 50 19.21 57 6.7 33,554 3.83 SE-SW 36 83 54 22 39 46 21.77 64 7.7 20,245 2.31 SE-SW 20 12.7 13,470 1.54 SE-SW 18 2.0 1.4 1.6 1.4 2.4 2.4 2.4 2.0 2.2 2.9 2.2 1.6 3.8 3.1 3.6, 4.6 80 -30 67 24 - 39 22.32 - I-" \0 \0 �Table 4.--Sumnlary of 1964 environmental station data, deer ecology investigations, Cache la Poudre Canyon, Colorado. Environmental Station Locationl Elevation Sevenmile Cr. Kelly Flats Gulch 8,120 7,000 6,440 Big SagebrushAntelope True Mountain Bitterbrush- Antelope MahoganyBitterbrush True Mountain Antelope Mahogany Bitterbrush HewLe t t Environmental Factors Temperature Air, of 93 Maximum 58 Mean Maximum -13 Hinimum 34 Mean Minimum 46 Mean Temperature Soil, of (5-7 in) 87 Maximum 61 Mean Maximum 20 Minimum 45 Mean Minimum 53 Mean 8.73 Precipitation, Inches Water 50 Relative Humidity, % 6.2 Soil Moisture, % Dry Wt (5-7 in) 30,253 Wind, Total Miles 3.45 Mean Wind Velocity, mph W-SW Predominant Wind Direction 42 Maximum Recorded Gust, mph Maximum Snow Depth, ft 1.4 North-facing 0.6 South-facing 1.5 Drainage 0.7 Ridge Top {ft21 and Dominant Vegetation Crown Point Little Beaver Cr. 10,320 8,940 Engelmann SprucePonderosa PineSubalpine FirLodgepole PineLodgepole Pine Aspen 91 56 -13 32 44 86 52 - 2 30 41 89 51 - 5 27 39 80 41 -14 22 32 84 59 16 42. 50 9.37 54 5.8 48,574 5.55 W-SW 50 81 56 15 40 48 14.43 54 5.0 38,448 4.39 W-SW 36 85 52 15 37 44 15.25 59 6.5 22,165 2.53 SW 40 66 43 22 34 38 19.73 66 11.4 15,336 1.75 W-SW 15 1.7 0.7 1.5 1.1 2.9 1.9 1.4 1.4 2.6 1.9 2.2 1.6 5.2 3.3 3.9 4.7 I\) 0 0 �Table 5.--Deer Ecology Investigations - Cache la Poudre River Drainage, Colorado - Annual Summary of Environmental Data Station No. 1 Area Hewlett Gulch Elevation 6,440' Year 1965 TemEerature Airz of. TemEerature Soilz of. z 5-7 In. DeEth Rel. Hum.% Soil Moist. ,% Dry Wt. Mean Mean Mean of Mean Mean Mean of Mean of 5-7 In. Depth Precip., Daily Daily Daily Weekly Weekly Weekly Daily Mean of Weekly Inches Month Max. Max. Min. Min. Max.& Min. Max. Max. Min. Min. Max.& Min. Max.& Min. Determinations Water Jan. 62 44 8 24 34 46 43 25 30 36 52 4.8 0.65 Feb. 61 41 18 29 48 - 1 44 31 32 38 56 6.6 0.62 Mar. 63 36 -10 13 24 53 49 27 32 41 63 10.3 0.97 Apr. 73 55 25 35 45 68 64 39 43 53 51 10.3 1.82 May 75 60 27 40 50 71 68 42 46, 57 58 12.1 3.24 June 7.30 July Aug. Sept. Oct. Nov. Dec. Year InstruThermograph (Bourdon Tube) Maximum and Minimum Thermometers Hygrograph Oven Dry Method 8-inch ro ments & (Weather Bureau Type) (Hair) Precipe o f-' Methods Gage Wind Snow DeEth z Ft. Total Mean Predominant Maximum North Exposure South EXEosure Draw Ridge TOE Month Miles Velocityzmph. Direction Recorded Gustzmph. Max. Min. Mean Max. Min. Mean Max. Min. Mean Max. Min. Mean Jan. 2672 3.38 SW 26 0.3 0.0 0.07 0.2 0.0 0.03 0.4 0.0 0.10 0.2 0.0 0.05 Feb. 2190 3.36 SW 12 0.5 0.0 0.21 0.2 0.0 0.01 0.6 0.0 0.24 0.4 0.0 0.12 Mar. 2214 2.97 20 SE 0.6 0.0 0.19 0.4 0.0 0.08 0.8 0.0 0.20 0.4 0.0 0.06 April 2655 3.70 SW-SE 30 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 Hay 2738 3.68 10 SE 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0,00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 June July Aug. Sept. Oct. Nov. Dec. Year Totalizing InstruWind Dwyer ments & Anemometer Vane Wind Snow Stakes Methods (3-cup) Meter �Table 6.--Deer Ecology Investigations - Cache la Poudre River Drainage, Colorado - Annual Summary of Environmental Data Station No. 2 Area Kelly Flats Elevation 7 000' Year 1965 TemEerature Air2 of. TemEerature Soi12 °F'2 5-7 In. DeEth Re1. Hum.% Soil Moist.,% Dry Wt. Mean Mean Mean of Mean Mean Mean of Mean of 5-7 In. DeEth Precip. , Daily Daily Daily Weekly Weekly Weekly Daily Mean of Weekly Inches Month Max. Max. Min. Min. Max.& Min. Max. Max. Min. Min. Max.& Min. Max.& Min. Determinations Water 41 Jan. 56 6 22 32 45 40 22 28 34 54 5.4 0.79 56 39 Feb. 16 27 - 2 43 40 11.0 30 30 35 54 0.52 34 -13 Mar. 58 12 23 50 43 31 32 1.34 38 60 12.4 72 23 Apr. 53 32 42 11.9 65 59 36 39 49 49 2.21 74 60 May 27 37 48 67 63 39 43 53 57 12.0 2.44 June 7.30 July Aug. Sept. Oct. Nov. Dec. Year f\) InstruThermograph (Bourdon Tube) Maximum and Minimum Thermometers Hygrograph Oven Dry Method 8-inch o ro ments & (Weather Bureau Type) (Hair) Precipe Methods Gage Month Jan. Feb. Mar. Apr. May June July Aug. Sept. Oct. Nov. Dec. Year Instruments & Methods Total Mean Miles VelocitY2mEh. 5125 6.45 4335 6.65 3510 4.71 4079 5.67, 3694 4.97 Totalizing Anemometer (3-cup) Wind Predominant Maximum Direction Recorded Gust2mEh. W-SW 40 22 NE Variable 12 SW 30 28 SW Wind Vane Dwyer Wind Meter North EXEosure Hax , Min. Mean 0.7 0.0 0.15 1.0 0.0 0.51 1.2 0.0 0.55 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 Snow DeEth2 Ft. South EXEosure Draw Max. Min. Mean Max. Min. Mean 0.2 0.0 0.05 0.3 0.0 0.10 0.2 0.0 0.03 0.6 0.0 0.26 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.7 0.0 0.17 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 Snow Stakes Ridge TOE Hax. Min. Mean 0.3 0.0 0.06 0.2 0.0 0.08 0.2 0.0 0.01 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 �Table 7.--Deer Ecology Investigations - Cache la Poudre River Drainage, Colorado - Annual Summary of Environmental Data Area Sevenmile Creek Elevation 8,1201 Year 1965 Station No. 3 Soil Moist.,% Dry Wt. Temperature Soil, of., 5-7 In. Depth Rel. Hum.% Temperatur~_Air, of. 5-7 In. Depth Precip. , Mean Mean Mean of Mean of Mean Mean Mean of Inches Weekly Weekly Weekly Daily Mean of Weekly Daily Daily Daily Water Determinations Max.& Min. Month Max. Max. Min. Min. Max.& Min. Max. Max. Min. Min. Max.& Min. 2.41 5.6 34 25 27 31 56 28 36 20 36 8 Jan. 52 0.62 10.8 37 27 28 33 53 41 26 17 35 Feb. 53 - 7 11.1 1.65 39 23 30 35 64 46 11 21 32 54 -15 Mar. 2.17 12.0 56 36 37 46 57 40 61 31 49 18 71 Apr. 3.15 8.6 61 38 42 52 61 44 62 34 54 22 69 May 10.00 June July Aug. Sept. Oct. Nov. Dec. Year 8-inch Oven-Dry Method Hygrograph Maximum and Minimum Thermometers Thermograph (Bourdon Tube) Instrurc o Precipe (Hair) (Weather Bureau Type) ments & w Gage Methods Snow Depthl Ft. Wind Draw Ridge Top South EXEosure Maximum North EXEosure Predominant Mean Total Max. Min. Mean Max. Min. Mean Max. Min. Mean Recorded Gust,mph. Max. Min. Mean D'i r e c t Lon Month Miles Velocityzmph. ~ 1.2 1.7 1.5 1.4 0.0 0.26 0.0 0.40 0.0 0.39 0.0 0.41 30 6.01 NW 4615 Jan. 1.5 0.7 0.94 1.7 0.0 0.42 1.6 0.0 0.71 1.5 0.0 0.34 20 SE 3905 5.85 Feb. 30 2.3 0.1 1.23 1.8 0.0 0.22 1.6 0.0 0.55 0.7 0.0 0.22 SW-W 2830 3.80 Mar. 1.7 0.0 0.67 1.2 0.0 0.04 0.4 0.0 0.02 0.2 0.0 0.01 18 w-SW 4.30 3090 Apr. 0.1 0.0 0.01 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.00 15 2640 SE May 3.55 June July Aug. Sept. Oct. Nov. Dec. Year Dwyer Wind Totalizing InstruSnow Stakes Wind Vane Anemometer ments Meter (3-cup) Methods �Table 8.--Deer Ecology Investigations - Cache 1a Poudre River Drainage, Colorado - Annual Summary of Environmental Data Station No. 4 Area Little Beaver Elevation 8,940' Year 1965 Temperature Air, of. Temperature Soil, of., 5-7 In. Depth Re1. Hum.% Soil Moist.;% Dry Wt. Mean Mean Mean of Mean Mean Mean of Mean of 5-7 In. Depth Precip. , Daily Daily Daily Weekly Weekly Weekly Daily Mean of Weekly Inches Month Max. Max. Min. Min. Max.& Min. Max. Max. Min. Min. Max.& Min. Max.& Min. Determinations Water Jan. 52 35 4 18 26 32 31 16 23 27 62 3.9 1.49 Feb. 53 33 -12 12 23 33 32 28 30 31 60 8.6 1.06 Mar. 53 30 -21 7 18 33 32 29 30 31 68 8.7 2.52 Apr. 68 47 15 27 37 54 43 31 32 37 60 15.1 3.44 May 71 55 19 33 44 58 56 34 36 46 62 13.1 2.85 June 11.36 July Aug. Sept. Oct. Nov. Dec. Year InstruThermograph (Bourdon Tube) Maximum and Minimum Thermometers Hygrograph Oven-Dry Method 8-inch I\)ments & o (Weather Bureau Type) (Hair) .j:""" Precip. Methods Gage Wind Snow Depthz Ft. Total Mean Predominant Maximum North Exposure South Exposure Draw Ridge Top Month Miles Ve1ocity,mph. Direction Recorded Gust,mph. Max. Min. Mean Max. Min. Mean Max. Min. Mean Max. Min. Mean Jan. 2948 3.85 SW 20 1.7 0.0 0.50 2.8 0.0 0.36 2.4 0.0 0.41 1.2 0.0 0.21 Feb. 2485 3.71 Variable 10 2.4 0.8 1.16 3.1 0.0 0.99 2.1 0.0 0.97 1.6 0.0 0.50 Mar. 1814 2.43 SW-W 15 2.3 0.1 1.40 3.3 0.0 0.84 3.0 0.0 1.03 2.1 0.0 0.45 Apr. 2097 2.91 SW 10 2.4 0.0 1.08 2.3 0.0 0.33 2.3 0.0 0.51 1.9 0.0 0.38 May 1645 2.21 SE 9 0.9 0.0 0.10 0.3 0.0 0.01 0.3 0.0 0.03 0.5 0.0 0.05 June July Aug. Sept. Oct. Nov. Dec. Year InstruTotalizing Wind Dwyer ments Anemometer Vane Wind Snow Stakes Methods (3-cup) Meter �- 205 - JOB. COMPLETION RESEARCH PROJECT REPORT SEGMENT State of COLORADO --------~~~~~--------------An Ecological Investigation of the Project No. W-l05-R-6 Cache la Poudre Work Plan No. 3 Environmental Job No. 3 Vegetative Period Covered: Personnel: January, 1965 - December Deer Herd, Colorado Studies Analysis 1965. Dean E. Medin, Allen E. Anderson, Kenneth A. Porter ABSTRACT Mean annual yields of three important browse species were estimated for the 1962, 1963, and 1964 growing seasons on each of three winter range study areas. Yield estimates, using weight estimate and double sampling methods, were made in 366 (lower-winter), 299 (middle-winter), and 295 (upper-winter) permanently marked 100-square foot circular plots distributed systematically throughout the winter range study areas. Oven-dry mean yields of true mountain mahogany (Cercocarpus montanus), antelope bitterbrush (Purshia tridentata), and big sagebrush (Artemisia tridentata) with 90% confidence limits are presented. Expressed as a mean for an entire study area, including a wide· variety of sites and vegetative types, current annual growth yields varied from 0.5 1bs/acre for mountain mahogany on the upper-winter range to a big sagebrush yield of 79.8 lbs/acre, also on the upper-winter range. Yields are also summarized and presented by major habitat types. Utilization of current annual growth by deer of each of the three browse species was.estimated for the winters of 1962-63, 1963-64, and 1964-65 on each study area. Estimates of utilization were made by categorized use percentages (0, 10, 30, 50, 70, 90) on the same plots (and plants) established to estimate yields. Average utilization percentages, by weight, of each species for each area are summarized and tabulated with 90% confidence limits. Depending on the year, species, or study area, utilization varied from 3.3 percent on mountain mahogany on the lower-winter range study area to 58.8 percent, also on mountain mahogany, on the upper-winter area. Use percentages by species are also presented for major habitat types. The 1965 spring utilization estimates marked the termination of project field data gathering. Recommendations: None. �- 206 - Objectives: (1) Record the phenological development of selected range plants on five study locations believed to be representative of the lowerwinter, middle-winter, upper-winter, transitional, and summer ranges of the herd. This will further our understanding of the seasonal patterns of forage use by deer at various elevational levels as evaluated by food preference studies (Work Plan 3, Job 5). (2) Quantitatively describe the vegetation (by vegetative type) of each of the above study areas to: (a) provide basic data on vegetative cover and composition, and to (b) aid in interpretation of deer distribution, food preference, and activity as related to food and cover. (3) Estimate the mean yield and use of important browse species on the winter range study areas to provide data relative to the effects of various population levels (Work Plan 4, Job 1) on important seasonal food items. \ . Techniques Used: Current annual growth yields for the 1962, 1963, and 1964 growing seasons were estimated for true mountain mahogany (Cercocarpus montanus), antelope bitterbrush (Purshia tridentata), and big sagebrush (Artemisia tridehtata) during the months of October-November on each of the three winter range study areas. Reference to "current annual growth" is inaccurate for big sagebrush where all . current growth plus all leaves (which mayor may not have been current) were included~ Weight estimate (Pechanec and Pickford 1937a), double s'ampLi.ng (Wilm et al. 1944, H:l1mon 1959) and regression analysis techniques described by Blair (1959) as the "Dry Weight Prediction Method" whereby oven-dry weights of forage predicted directly· from estimated green weights were used to sample Yields. Green forage weights were estimated, by species, on permanent 100-square·foot circular plots. Sampling was systematic. Parallel transects with north-south orientation were established at 8-chain intervals. Plots were spaced at l32-foot intervals a Long transects. Annual growth on a fraction of the plots, in this case at a ratio of 10:1, was first estimated, then clipped, sacked, oven-dried for at least 24 hours at 100-105 C, ' and weighed. The clipped plots were the "double sample" plots required of the technique and. were used to correct any consistent bias that may have existed in weight estimation. A linear regression was calculated to define the re Lat Lonsh Lp of actual oven-dry forage weight (Y) to estimated green weight (X) for each species (Blair 1959). Several days were spent training in the weight estimate method as described by Pechanec and Pickford (1937a) for each species until a 10-percent precision was obtained before actual sample estimates began. Dietary scales graduated to two grams were used during the training period. There was no further training or checking of estimates once the survey began. Double sample (clipped) plots were systematically selected prior to beginning the field survey and. were offset a consistent distance and. direction from the permanently marked. plots by a 20-foot length of light chain. If one offset length did not include any plants of the sampled species the offset process was continued in the �- 207 - same direction until a plant or plants was included plot area. The clipped plots were not marked. in the 100-square foot sample All current growth below a 5-foot height was included in the weight estimates. Mountain mahogany weights were estimated without leaves, bitterbrush including those leaves attached to current twigs, and big sagebrush with all leaves, both those attached to current twigs and those attached to older growth. Green weights were estimated to the nearest gram on smaller plants, and to the nearest 5 or 10-gram interval on larger plants. Oven-dry weights were recorded to the nearest one-tenth gram. Each plant of the sampled species on the permanent weight estimate plots was tagged with an aluminum strap label for identification during utilization estimates made on the same plots and plants the following spring. Labels were marked with both plot and plant number, e.g., B2-3 identifies the transect line (B), plot number (2), and plant number (3). Records were kept on field forms by the same identification system. Estimates were made on individual plants and summed for the entire plot sampling unit. Locations of each plot were marked on an enlarged aerial photograph of each study area. A categorized estimate of the degree of utilization on each plant was made prior to estimating current annual growth: H = heavy (over 60 percent utilization), M = moderate (20-60 percent), L = light (under 20 percent), N = none. Utilization of current annual growth was estimated for each of the three species sampled for yield the preceding autumn using the ocular-estimate-by-average-of-plants method of Pechanec and Pickford (1937b). Percentage removal by weight for each plant examined was made by "use class" estimates described by Clark (1944). If utilization was not observed the plant was given a rating of zero. If the plant had been utilized it was assigned a "use class"; the classes one to five having mid-range values of 10, 30, 50, 70, and 90 percent respectively. These mid-range values were used to derive the weighted plant and plot average (weighted by the yield of each plant and plot the previous autumn) utilization of the plot sampling unit. Plots were averaged for an entire study area or habitat type to give a mean utilization percentage for each species. Utilization estimates several days practice Pechanec and Pickford were made during the months of late April and May following clipping and weighing for each species as recommended by (1937b). ��- 209 - VEGETATIVE ANALYSIS Dean E. Medin Findings: Oven-dry yields per acre for each species and study area are presented in Table 1. The listed yields are averages derived from sampling an entire study area (each approximately 500-acres) consisting of several vegetative types including coniferous forest and meadow. Species yields by major habitats are summarized in Table 3. Perhaps the most significant results of the production estimates are two: (1) the surprisingly low total annual yields, and (2) the decline of mountain mahogany and bitterbrush yields in 1963 and 1964. What appear to be high shrub densities (Medin 1964), also including all vegetative types, lead one to expect much greater yields. For example, on the Hewlett Gulch study area there were an estimated 665 mahogany plants per acre and a 1965 average mahogany yield of 14.8 lbs/acre. This gives an average of 0.022 pounds (9.99 grams) current annual growth yield. per individual mahogany plant. It is evident that large numbers of productive browse plants are required to yield significant amounts of current annual growth. Mountain mahogany yields on the Hewlett Gulch area dropped from 14.8 lbs/acre in 1962 to 5.6 Ibs/acre in 1964; bitterbrush from 29.0 to 5.6 lbs/acre in the same time span. Similar declines were recorded for these species on the other winter range study areas (Table 1). Big sagebrush production did not decline over the same period. Associated with reduced yields of mountain mahogany and bitterbrush was a marked decline in annual precipitation (Medin 1965). The consistent yield of big sagebrush despite reduced precipitation may indicate a greater tolerance to dry conditions. When expressed as averag~s per major habitat type, large variations were observed in browse yields (Table 3). Depending on the year or study area mountain mahogany yields varied from zero in some habitats (meadow) to over 26 lbs/acre in the browse type at Hewlett Gulch. Bitterbrush yield variations followed a similar pattern. Big sagebrush yields were maximum among the three species studied, reaching 116.6 1bs/acre on the Sevenmi1e Creek (upper-winter range) area in 1963. Sample sizes in many cases were too small to derive reliable estimates of average yield in some of the major habitat types. Non-overlapping confidence intervals appear almost as the exception when comparing limits at the 90 percen.t level. When yields were expressed for an entire study area (Table 1), sample sizes in most cases were too limited in 1962 to reach a desired precision of 20 percent at the 90 percent level. Increased sample sizes in 1963 and 1964 generally increased precision although greatly reduced yield means were sometimes not accompanied by equal reductions in variance. Confidence intervals listed in Tables equations given by Cochran (1953:282) Range Management and.the Agricultural 1 and 3 were calculated using variance and Committee of the American Society of Board (1962:249). Weight utilization of current annual growth.by deer varied conSiderably between species, years, and study areas (Table 2). Use of mountain mahogany ranged from 3.3 percent during the winter of 1962-63 on the Hewlett Gulch area to 58.8 percent at Sevenmi1e Creek in 1964-65. Bitterbrush, common on all three winter range study areas, appeared the most consistently utilized species with a lowest of 6.7 percent at Sevenmile Creek in 1962-63 and a highest of 24.7 percent at Kelly Flats during the winter of 1963-64. �- 210 - Big sagebrush, occurring in abundance only on the Sevenmile Creek upper-winter range area, was in general the least utilized with percentages varying from 4.9 in 1963-64 to 11.9 in 1964-65. The inc~ease in utilization of all species at Sevenmile Creek in 1964-65 reflects a large increase in the wintering deer population (Work Plan 4, Job 1). The heavy use of mountain mahogany and the contrastingly light use of big sagebrush on this area indicates a tendency of increased utilization when a desirable forage species occurs as a minor component of the shrub population and a reduced use when occurring as a major or dominant element. Utilization averages, with accompanying 90 percent confidence intervals, are listed by major habitats on each study area in Table 4. Logically, variations in utilization were even greater when partitioned by habitats. Zero utilization was recorded in some habitats sampled with only one or two plots. A maximum utilization of 66.8 percent was recorded for mountain mahogany at Sevenmile Creek, an area having limited mahogany plant density. Lack of uniformity in utilization, whether by site, individual plant, or major habitat, was evident regardless of the species or study area. Acknowledgements: Drs. Meredith J. Morris and Jacob L. Kovner, Biometricians, Rocky Mountain Forest and Range Experiment Station, Fort Collins, gave helpful advice in the planning and analYSis phases of the vegetative studies. Student assistants Doyle Markham, William E. Jones, Randall Buhler, Thomas E. Hakonson, Frank Abelard, Don Minnich, Lewis Nelson, Jr., David Stearns, William Wallace, G. Carlson, B. Baker, and Ken E. Nicolls assisted in gathering and surrnnarizing data. LITERATURE CITED Blair, Robert M. 1959. Weight techniques for sampling browse production on deer ranges. In Techniques and Methods of Measuring Understory Vegetation. Proceedings of a Symposium at Tifton, Georgia, Oct., 1958. Southern Forest Expt. StaG and Southeastern Forest Expt. Sta., pp. 26-31. Clark, 1. 1944. Field comparisons in estimating percentage utilization of range forage plants by direct percentages and by "use class" estimates. Utah Acad. Sci., Arts and Letters 21:7 (abstract). Cochran, W. G. 1953. Sampling techniques. John Wiley and Sons, New York, 330 pp. Committee of the American Society of Range Management and the Agricultural Board. 1962. Basic problems and techniques in range research. National Academy of Sciences, National Research Council, Publ. No. 890, 341 pp. Hilmon, J. G. 1959. Determination of herbage weight by double-sampling:weight estimate and actual weight. In Techniques and Methods of Measuring Understory Vegetation. Proceedings of as)rmposium at Tifton, Georgia, Oct., 1958. Southern Forest Expt. Sta. and Southeastern Forest Expt. Sta., pp. 20-25. �- 211 LITERATURE CITED (continued) Medin, D. E. 1964. Vegetative analysis. P-R Project W-l05-R, Work Plan 3, Job 3 Completion Report, Colo. Game, Fish and Parks Dept., Game Research Report, January, 1964 (processed). ___________ • 1965. Climatic environment. P-R Project W-l05-R, Work Plan 3, Job 1 Completion Report, Colo. Game, Fish and Parks Dept., Game Research Report, January, 1965 (processed). Pechanec, J. F. and G. D. Pickford. 1937a.A weight estimate method for the determination of range and pasture production. Jour. Amer. Soc. Agron. 29:894-904. __________ , and determining percentage • 1937b~ A comparison of some methods used in utilization of range grasses. Jour. Agr. Res. 54:753-765. Wilm, H. G., D. F. Costello, and G. E. Klipple. 1944. Estimating forage yield by the double-sampling method. Jour. Amer. Soc. Agron. 36:194-203. Prepared Date: by: Dean E. Medin Approved by: Associate Wildlife Researcher J_an __ u_a_ry~,__1~9_6_6 _ .::W:.:::a'..l.y.:;;n~e:_:.:l..]" Game Research Chief Ferd C. Kle inschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �Table 1.--Oven-dry yie Lds per acre of true mountain mahogany ;:antelope bitterbrush, and big sagebrush on three winter range study areas, Cache 1a Poudre Canyon, Colorado, 1962-1964. Study Area and Elevation (ft) Hewlett Gulch (lower-winter) 5,800 - 7,100 Kelly Flats (midd1e-winter) 6,600 -.7,760 Species True mountain mahogany (Cercocarpus montanus) Year 1962 1963 1964 Mean Oven-dry Yield (lbs/acre) 14.8 10.8 5.6 Confidence Limits (90% level) 11.6 - 18.0 9.4 - 12.2 4.2 - 7.0 Sample Size (lOO-sq. ft. plots) 112 366 366 Antelope bitterbrush (Purshia tridentata) 1962 1963 1964 29.0 12.0 5.6 18.9 - 39.1 8.9 - 15.1 4.2 - 6.9 115 366 366 True mountain mahogany 1962 1963 1964 9.93.1 5.2 7.4 - 12.4 2.0 - 4.2 3.5 - 6.9 88 299 299- Antelope bitterbrush 1962 1963 1964 43.6 8-.5 13 .3 29.9 - 57.3 4.4 - 12.6 11.2 - 15.4 91 299 299 True mountain mahogany 1962 1963 1964 2.9 2.0 0.5 0.7 0.0 0.0 - 5.1 4.2 1.4 53 295 295 Antelope bitterbrush 1962 1963 1964 39.3 19.3 12.4 24.5- 54.1 14.3 - 24.3 10.1 - 14.7 88 295 295 Big sagebrush (Artemisia tridentata) 1962 1963 1964 75.8 79.8 78.2 55.2 - 96.4 68.5 - 91.1 67.8 - 88.6 88 295 295 ro I-' I\)- Sevenmile Creek (upper-winter) 7,440 - 8,760 �Table 2.--Winter utilization of true mountain mahogany, antelope bitterbrush, range study areas, Cache la Poudre Canyon, Colorado, 1962-1965. Study Area and Elevation (ft} Hewlett Gulch (lower-winter) 5,800 - 7,100 Kelly Flats (middle-winter) 6,600 - 7,760 Severunile Creek (upper-winter) 7,440 ~ 8,760 S}2ecies Year Mean Utilization (winter} (% weight} and big sagebrush on three winter Confidence Limits (90% level) Sample Size (lOO-sg. ft. 21ots} True mountain mahogany (Cercocarpus montanus) 1962-63 1963-64 1964-65 3.3 9.0 13.7 1.9 - 4.7 7.0 - 11.0 11.1 - 16.3 41 137 135 Antelope bitterbrush (Purshia tridentata) 1962-63 1963-64 1964-65 7.4 20.0 17.7 5.8 - 9.0 15.9 - 24.1 14.4 - 21. 0 38 113 113 True mountain mahogany 1962~63 1963-64 1964-65 13 .6 37.0 20.5 9.5 ~ 17.7 32.6 - 41.4 17.7 - 23.3 48 150 151 Antelope bitterbrush 1962-63 1963-64 1964-65 18.0 24.7 13.3 13.8 - 22.2 21.4 - 28.0 11. 3 ~ 15.3 48 158 156 True mountain mahogany 1962.,.63. 1963-64 1964-65 34.6 41.8 58.8 20.1 - 49.1 35.6 - 48.0 51.6 - 66.0 5 29 30 Antelope bitterbrush 1962-63 1963-64 1964-65 6.7 9.9 21.5 5.1 - 8.3 8.5 - 11.3 19.4 - 23.6 61 209 211 Big sagebrush (Artemisi~ tridentata) 1962-63 1963-64 1964-65 7.0 4.9 11. 9 4.6 - 9.4 4.0 - 5.8 10.3 - 13.5 56 186 186 I ro I-' w �Table 3.--oven-dry yields of three browse species by major habitats on three winter range study areas, Cache 1a Poudre Canyon, Colorado, 1962-1964. Study Area and Elevation ~ft2 Hewlett Gulch (lower-winter) 5,800 - 7,100 Sgecies True Mountain Mahogany Antelope Bitterbrush Major Habitats Surface Acres Year Mean Oven-dry Yields ~lbs/acre) Confidence Limits ~90% 1eve 12 Sample )) Size Timber 113.3 1962 1963 1964 3.98 4.58 2.07 0.81 2.96 0.00 - 7.15 6.20 4.41 25 93 93 Juniper-Browse 80.4 1962 1963 1964 9.55 8.88 4.69 1.94 - 17.16 5.22 - 12.54 1.74 ~ 7.64 17 58 58 Browse 207.2 1962 1963 1964 26.54 19.01 10.00 20.23 - 32.85 16.33 - 21.69 7.48 - 12.52 51 160 160 Riparian 8.9 1962 1963 1964 6.60 3.64 '3.23 -- 3 6 6 Meadow 80.3 1962 1963 1964 1.18 0.60 0.12 0.00 0.00 0.00 - 3.36 1.48 1.19 24 49 49 Timber 113.3 1962 1963 1964 1.87 0.97 0.00 0.00 - 4.41 2.21 93 93 Juniper-Browse 80.4 1962 1963 1964 60.46 35.17 15.05 28.49 - 92.23 24.44 - 45.90 10.53 - 19.57 20 58 58 Browse 207.2 1962 1963 1964 42.45 13.64 6.75 24.40 - 60.50 8.32 - 18.96 ' 4.47 ~ 9.03 50 160 160 1/ Permanent 100-sq. ft. circular plots. C\) I-' .{::"' �Table 3.--Continued. Sample Size Meadow 80.3 1962 1963 1964 0.07 0.32 0.00 0.00 - 1.73 1.17 49 49 - --- - - --- --------- - -- ------ -- -- ------ --- ---------- -------Kelly Flats (middle-winter) 6,600 - 7,760 True Mountain Mahogany Antelope. Bitterbrush Timber 196.1 1962 1963 1964 6.43 1.95 3.03 3.33 0.47 0.40 - 9.53 3.43 5.66 38 112 112 Browse 293.3 1962 1963 1964 13.27 ·3.89 6.75 9.31 - 17.23 2.96 - 4.82 4.55 - 8.95 47 179 179 Meadow 19.8 1962 1963 1964 Timber 196.1 1962 1963 1964 12.68 4.20 3.95 0.00 - 26.11 0.00 - 8.69 1.89 - 6.01 41 112 112 Browse 293.3 1962 1963 1964 65.97 11.50 19.71 45.59 - 86.35 5.70 - 17.30 16.73 - 22.69 52 179 179 Meadow 19.8 1962 1963 1964 0.59 0.12 -- 8 8 ------------------------------------------------------- f\) I-' VI" �Table 3.--Continued. Study Area and Elevation ~ft2 Sevenmile Creek (upper-winter) 7,440 - 8,760 SEecies True Mountain Mahogany Antelope Bitterbrush Big Sagebrush Major Habitats Timber Surface Acres 140.3 Year Mean Oven-dry Yields ~lbs/acre2 1962 1963 1964 1.40 0.40 0.39 0.00 - 2.41 1.63 84 84 Confidence Limits ~90% leve1~ Sample Size Browse 317.0 1962 1963 1964 2.86 2.24 Oe58 0.61 ~ 1.30 0.00 ~ 5.11 3.18 1.32 53 192 192 Riparian 37.7 1962 1963 1964 2.83 0.63 0.00 - 5.94 0.00 - 4.04 19 19 1962 1963 1964 25.07 10.97 7.88 2.89 - 47.25 3.91 - 18.03 4.69 - 11.07 27 84 84 30.14 -70.00 18.25 - 31 .• 15 12.36 ~ 18.20 55 192 192 Timber 140.3 Browse 317.0 1962 1963 1964 50.07 24.70 15.28 Riparian 37.7 1962 1963 1964 4.39 . 4.67 3.59 -- - 10 19 19 Timber 140.3 1962 1963 1964 12.47 12.46 8.54 0.00 - 41.06 0.00 - 25.16 0.00 - 19.99 22 84 84 Browse 317.0 1962 1963 1964 105.88 116.60 116.12 78.79 -132.97 101.73 -131.47 102.27 -129.97· 60 192 192 Riparian 37.7 1962 1963 1964 5.61 5.21 3.70 - - - 8 19 19 I\) ~ �Table 4.--Winter utilization of three browse species by major habitats on three winter range study areas, Cache La Poudre Canyon, Colorado, 1962-1965. Study Area and Elevation ~ft~ Hewlett Gulch (lower-winter) 5,800 - 7,100 SEecies True Mountain Mahogany Year ~winter2 Mean Utilization ~% weight2 Confidence Limits {90% leve1~ Timber 1l3.3 1962-63 1963-64 1964-65 7.0 22.6 28.7 0.0 - 18.2 16.2 - 29.0 15.9 - 41.5 9 34 33 Juniper~Browse 80.4 1962-63 1963-64 1964-65 1.2 15.3 24.9 0.0 - 4.2 10.1 - 20.5 17.5 - 32.3 4 14 13 Browse 207.2 1962-63 1963-64 1964-65 3.2 6.0 10.4 1.6 - 4.8 4.1 - 7.9 8.1 - 12.7 26 85 85 8.9 1962-63 1963-64 1964-65 0.0 0.0 7.0 1962-63 1963-64 1964-65 8.0 8.1 0.7 1962-63 1963-64 1964-65 0.0 0.5 --- Riparian· Meadow Antelope Bitterbrush ITPe-rmanent Sample 1/ Size Surface Acres Major Habitats Timber 80.3 113.3 - -- ~ 1 2 2 1 2 2 0 2 2 Juniper-Browse 80.4 1962-63 1963-64 1964-65 8.9 30.4 22.4 ·6.9 - 10.9 24.8 - 36.0 15.7 - 29.1 13 36 35 Browse 207.2 1962-63 1963-64 1964-65 6.5 12.4 15.5 4.2 - 8.8 9.3 - 15.5 12.4 - 18.6 25 74 75 100-sq. ft. circular plots. I'.> p -.J: �Table 4.--Continued. Study Area and Elevation (ft) Species Major Habitats Riparian Meadow Surface Acres 8.9 80.3 Year Mean Utilization (winter) (% weight) . Confidence Limits (90% level) o o 1962-63 1963-64 1964-65 1962-63 1963-64 1964-65 Sample Size o o 10.0 10.0 1 1 --~~- -------- --~-~---------~------Kelly Flats (middle-winter) 6,600 - 7,760 True Mountain Mahogany Timber 196.1 1962-63 1963-64 1964-65 21.2 28.0 28.0 9.3 ~ 33.1 17.9 - 38.1 12.6 ~ 43.4 20 59 59 Browse 293.3 1962-63 1963-64 1964-65 10.7 39.9 21.4 8.0 - 13.4 35.0 - 44.8 18.7 - 24.1 24 91 92 Meadow Sevenmi1e Creek (upper-winter) 7,440 - 8,760 19.8 o 1962-63 1963-64 1964-65 - o o Antelope Timber Bitterbrush 196.1 1962-63 1963-64 1964-65 27.6 20.9 17.3 13.8 - 41.4 14.6 - 27.2 12.7 - 21.9 12 33 32 Browse 293.3 1962-63 1963-64 1964-65 16.5 25.6 12.8 11.9 - 21.1 21.8 - 29.4 10.8 - 14.8 36 123 122 Meadow 19.8 1962-63 1963-64 1964-65 7.1 35.0 1962-63 1963-64 1964-65 39.3 37.0 True Mountain Mahogany Timber 140.3 o 2 2 o 15.6 - 63.0 23.2 - 50.8 8 7 J\} Of-' co �Table 4.--Continued. Study Area and Elevation (ft) SEecies Antelope Bitterbrush Big Sagebrush Surface Acres Year {winter2 Mean Utilization {% weight} Confidence Limits {90% 1eve12 Sample Size Browse 317.0 1962-63 1963-64 1964-65 34.6 45.5 66.8 20.1 - 49.1 38.8 - 52.2 58.0 - 75.6 5 18 20 Riparian 37.7 1962-63 1963-64 1964-65 18.1 37.9 Major Habitats d d d - 0 3 3 Timber 140.3 1962-63 1963-64 1964-65 3.9 8.8 15.7 1.8 ~ 6.0 5.4 - 12.2 13.5 - 17.9 14 44 45 Browse 317.0 1962-63 1963-64 1964-65 7.3 10.1 23.2 5.5 - 9.1 8.5 - 11.7 20.7 - 25.7 45 161 162 I\) I-' \0 I Riparian 37.7 1962-63 1963-64 1964-65 10.0 7.7 7.0 ~ -- 2 4 4 Timber 140.3 1962-631963-64 1964-65 7.8 5.2 14.4 0.0 - 16.6 1.3 - 9.1 8.9 - 19.9 9 33 33 Browse 317.0 1962-63 1963-64 1964-65 7.0 5.0 11.8 4.4 ~ 9.6 4.0 - 6.0 10.7 - 12.9 45 148 148 Riparian 37.7 1962-63 1963-64 1964-65 1.0 1.1 5.2 -~ 2 5 5 ��-221 - JOB COMPLETION RESEARCH REPORT PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO ---------~~~~~----------------An Ecological Investigation Project No. of the Cache la Poudre Deer Herd, Colorado W-105-R-6 Work Plan No. 3 Environmental Job No. 5 Food Preference Period Covered: Personnel: January, 1965 - December, Studies 1965. Dean E. Medin and Allen E. Anderson ABSTRACT Stomach content samples from 19 deer collected at elevations ranging from 6,100 feet to 7,900 feet were taken during the 1965 reporting period. Regularly collected deer accounted for 17 of the samples and two,were from supplementary sources. Systematic collection of deer (at a rate of four per month), begun April 13, 1961, was terminated April 27, 1965. Collection locations were chosen to obtain wide distribution within the Cache la Poudre drainage and to correspond with seasona1 use elevational zone s , Winter co Ll.ec t Lons were made from wintering elevations (5,200 - 8,500 feet). Spring and fall collections were made from winter-summer transitional zones (7,700 - 9,000 feet) during the period of seasonal movement to higher (spring) or lower (fall) ranges. Summer period collections were generally from elevations over 9,000 feet.· The 19 stomach samples taken during the reporting period bring the total number collected since the beginning of the study to 232. All samples have been sorted into component or like parts and packaged. A start was made in identifying botanical composition of the samples during the latter part of the re'Porting period. Recommendations: Continue identification of botanical composition and begin quantifying components. Record results on prepared forms and on punch cards for computer analysis. Objective: Estimate food preference by season for different elevational ranges and vegetative types so that seasonal forage use by deer can be related to the vegetation at each elevational level under study. • I I �- 222 - Techniques Used: Four deer per month were collected from locations cor.responding to seasonal use areas (Table 1). Regular collections, begun April 13, 1961, were completed April 27, 1965. Winter collections were from wintering elevations (5,200 - 8,500 feet); spring and fall collections from transitional zones (7,700 9,000 feet); and sununer collections generally from elevations over 9,000 feet. The yearlong collection locations were chosen to obtain wide distribution within the Cache 1a Poudre River drainage. Advantage was taken of supplementary sources such as road kills for additional samples. A stomach content sample was obtained after a thorough ml.xl.ngof the rumen and reticulum contents. Approximately one quart of material was squeezed to eliminate excess moisture, placed in a cardboard carton lined with polyethylene and partially filled with 10 percent formalin, tagged, and stored for sorting and analysis. Prior to sorting and packaging, the samples were washed through a set of four Tyler screens having progressively smaller mesh sizes down to a minimum 2 mmo Washed materials were placed on large cardboard blotters for drying prior to sorting. Rough sorting and packaging of similar components Y?'asdone by student assistants regularly as samples were collected. A refined separation process and identification of component parts by the.writer and a qualified student assistant is now in progress. �- 223 - FOOD PREFERENCE Dean E. Medin Findings: Stomach content samples were taken from 19 deer during the 1965 reporting period. Total samples collected since the beginning of the study, including those of this reporting period, are now 232. Each sample has been washed through screens, segregated into component species or similar plant parts (leaves, stems, fruits), and packaged. Refined segregation and identification of the component materials has begun. Results are not in the reporting stage at this date. After quantifying the identified components (by weight and possibly by volume), the results will be recorded on prepared forms and punched on cards for computer analysis at the Statistical Laboratory, Colorado State University. Seasonal and elevational variations in food habits are among the relationships intended for exploration. Vegetative analyses (Work Plan 3, Job 3) and weather data (Work Plan 3, Job 1) wil1 be of aid in Lnt arp re t Lng botanical composition of stomach contents. REFERENCES l>irschl, H. J. 1962. Sieve mesh size related to analysis of antelope rumen contents. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 26(3) :327-328. Julander, Odell.. 1952. Forage habits of mule d.eer during late fal1 as measured by stomach content analyses. Intermountain Forest and Range Expt. Sta., Res. Note No.2, 5 pp. Martin, A. C., R. H. Gensch, and C. P. Brown. 1946. Alternative methods in upland game-bird food analyses. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 10:8-12. Prepared by: Date: Dean E. Medin Approved by :__ Associate Wildlife Researcher ~J~an~u.:.:a~ry~~,~1~9~6~6~ _ .:.:W.::a:.l...y.::n:.::e:.....:.: Game Research Chief Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coord.inator �Table l.--Deer sex and age, date, elevation, seasonal range, and vegetative type from which stomach content samples were collected, Cache la Poudre Canyon, Colorado, 1965. Deer Collection No. 176 177 178 179 180 181 032 182 183 184 Date 1-5-65 1-12-65 1-19-65 1-26-65 2-3-65 2-10-65 2-11-65 2-17-65 2-24-65 3-3-65 Sex Male Female Male Female Female Female Female Male Female Female 185 186 3 -11-65 3-17-65 187 033 1/ Estimated 1/ Age ~year-month} 1-7 0-7 8-7 0-7 1-8 6-8 0-8 0-8 1-9 Elevation {ft} 7,500 7,100 6,100 7,700 6,900 7,500 6,900 6,900 6,900 7,600 Seasonal Range Upper-winter Middle-winter Lower-winter Upper-winter Middle-winter Upper-winter Middle-winter Middle-winter Middle-winter Upper-winter Male Female 6-9 7-9 6,900 7,400 Middle-winter Upper-winte~ 3-24-65 3-25-65 Male Female 4-9 8-9 7,900 6,500 Upper-winter Lower-winter 188 189 190 191 3-31-65 4-6-65 4-13-65 4-20-65 Male Female Female Female 0-9 0-10 2-10 4-10 6,800 6,900 6,200 6,500 Middle-winter Middle-winter Lower-winter Lower-winter 192 4-27-65 Female 3-10 7,400 Upper-winter 8< A June birth date is assumed for tabulation purposes. Vegetative TYEe Big sagebrush - Bitterbrush Bitterbrush Mt. Mahogany - Juniper Big sagebrush - Bitterbrush Bitterbrush - Mt. Mahogany Big sagebrush - Bitterbrush Mt. Mahogany - Juniper Bitterbrush - Mt. Mahogany Bitterbrush - Mt. Mahogany - Skunkbush Big sagebrush - Bitterbrush Skunkbush Mt. Mahogany - Juniper Big sagebrush - Mt. Mahogariy roro.f="" Skunkbush Big sagebrush - Bitterbrush Mt. Mahogany - Ponderosa pine Douglas fir Bitterbrush - Mt. Mahogany Bitterbrush - Mt. Mahogany Mt. Mahogany Ponderosa pine - Douglas fir Mt. Mahogany Big sagebrush - Bitterbrush Mt. Mahogany �January; 1966 1 I· - 225 - JOB COMPLETION RESEARCH State of COLORADO Project No. W-105-R-6 REPORT PROJECT SEGMENT An Ecological Investigation of the Cache la Poudre Deer Herd, Colorado Work Plan No. 4 Population Studies Job No. 1 Population Density Period Covered: Personnel: January, 1965 to December, Allen E. Anderson, and Structure 1965 Dean E. MeQ.in, Kenneth A. Porter ABSTRACT " Since both the 1964-65 herd structure samples and the pellet group counts on the transition and summer range study areas have been presented previously, this report describes only the pellet group counts on the 3 winter range study areas of approximately 500 acres each, 1962-65. As an aid to final analyses, the frequency distributions of all pellet group counts are !?ummarized by major habitats for the 3 study areas. During the "winter" period, 64.8 to 80.0 percent of the 100 square foot, circular plots were devoid of pellet groups and 84.3 to 95.3 percent during the "summer" period. During the "winter" period which ranged in length from 189 to 235 days (Sept. - May), mean (± standard deviation) pellet group densities ranged from 108.9 + 252.6 to 252.6 + 413.8 pellet groups per acre. Both estimates occurred on the upper (Sevenmile Creek) winter range study area during 1963-64 and 1964-65, over a period of 194 and 202 days, respectively. Similar extremes, both obtained during the "summer" of 1964 were 21.8 + 91.5 (Sevenmile Creek) and 87.6 + 228.3 (Kelly Flats). Within major habitats, mean pellet groups per acre duri;-g the "winter" (1962-65) ranged from 0.0 (riparian and meadow habitats on each study area) to 435.6 + 505.3 (juniper-browse habftat, Hewlett Gulch, 1964-65). Pellet group count deri-;ed estimates of average deer population densities during the "winter" period (1962-65) ranged from 28 (1963-64, Hewlett Gulch) to 61 (1964-65, Sevenmile Creek) deer per square mile. "Summer" period estimates were calculated as 6 (1964, Sevenmile Creek) to 25 (1964, Kelly Flats) deer per square mile, respectively. A review of the available literature on mean pellet group and population densities of migratory mule deer on winter range is presented. Recommendations: Inv~stigate the distribution characteristics of all pellet group data and analytical methods appropriate to these distributions. Investigate the relationship of other measured environmental variables, particularly certain climatic, physiographic and vegetative characteristics to herd structure and pellet group counts. �- 226 Acknowledgements: The following student assistants participated in the pellet group counts; F. Abelard, B. Baker, R. Buhler, G. Carlson, T. Hakonson, W. Jones, O. D. Markham, D. Minnich, L. Nelson, Jr., K. Nicolls, D. Stearns, and W. F. Wallace. O. C. Wallmo, Wildlife Research Biologist, Rocky Mountain Forest and Range Experiment Station, Fort Collins, furnished the materials from Arizona cited herein. Objectives: (1) Estimate population density on each of 5 study locations believed to be representative of the lower winter, middle winter, upper winter, transitional, and summer ranges of the herd to: (a) relate density to changing environmental conditions (Work Plan 3) and, (b) elucidate density-elevational relationships, particularly between years. (2) Estimate sex and age structure (composition) of the population to provide basic information on herd dynamics. Techniques Used: These have been described in detail by (Anderson 1965:49) and (Anderson 1966) so only the more pertinent aspects will be described herein. Sampling of mule deer pellet groups was systematic on parallel transects spaced at 528 foot intervals. Plot centers were 132 feet apart and marked by 18 inch, numbered, angle-iron stakes. Pellet groups were counted and removed on 100 square foot (.0023 acre) circular plots by two observers. The area of search was defined by a light metal chain 5.64 feet in length revolving, about a metal rod fastened to the angle-iron stake. Each plot was searched twice, (clockwise' and counterclockwise) with the observers exchanging positions (inner and outer) with the change in search direction. Plots were occasionally read by one man and he expended ,the same amount of relative effort as two men by searching each plot four times. A pellet group was considered to be 5 or more fecal pellets of the same general size, shape and appearance. Fecal pellets strewn across the plot were counted as a group if about one-half of the total, linear, strewn-out, distance or its midpoint, fell within the plot. Groups occurring on the periphery of the plot were counted if about one-half of its total area fell within the plot. The data were analyzed by assigning individual plots to major habitats of known area and qualitative floristic Similarity (Medin 1962). The frequency distribution of the pellet groups were tabulated for each count and mean plot values described statistically. The latter were converted to a mean pellet group per acre value by mUltiplying the mean and its standard deviation by 435.6. Indices of average deer populations on'each study area were obtained by applying the pellet group count total and other data to the following formula (Ferguson 1955) as follows: N pA atd Where: N P a A d t = average number of deer on study area number of pellet groups counted surface acres sampled (total area of all plots) surface acres censused assumed average, daily defecation rate, yearlong, of 13 pellet groups per deer day number of days between the end dates of readings �- 227 - Average deer numbers thus estimated on each study area were projected to an average deer per square mile acre estimate (x) by solving a simple proportion equation. Another index of deer abundance which does not require the assumption of an average daily defecation rate but does include the variables of time and area was obtained as follows: x P.G. (435.6) NA x:D X P.G.D.A. Where: x P.G.D.A. x P.G. = = 435.6 NA D = = mean number of pellet groups per day per acre mean number of pellet groups per plot constant for 100 square foot plot number of acres censused number of days between end dates of readings Population structure was sampled on 10, all-day walking routes for the last time during January, 1965. These data and the 1963-64 pellet group counts on the transition and summer range study areas were summarized in the Segment 5 report (Anderson 1966) and are not included herein. Results: Population Density Allen E. Anderson Sampling intensities on winter range study areas.--These are described (Table 1) in terms of the percentages of total acres and plots within major habitats. On this basis sampling intensity was quite uniform between major winter range habitats. In terms of the percentage of surface acres sampled to the surface acres censused on each study area, sampling intensities amount to .171, .136, and .137 percent for Hewlett Gulch, Kelly Flats, and Sevenmi1e Creek, respectively. Tests of sample size adequacy based on the 1962-63 pellet group counts have shown that these sampling intensities are grossly inadequate at the chosen level of prec1s10n (20 percent of the mean at the 90 percent confidence level) Anderson (1965:56). Freguency distribution of pellet groups, 1962-65.--A preliminary review of the literature has shown that there is no satisfactory statistical rationale in regards to pellet group counts. As an aid in eventually developing this rationale. frequency distributions are given for all pellet group counts on the 3 winter range study areas by major habitat during the "winter" (Table 2) and "summer" (Table 3) periods. �- 228 - Table 1.--A description by the major habitats of the surface acres and sampling intensities employed on the 3 winter range study areas during the winters of 1962-63, 1963-64, and 1964-65. Study Area and Elevation Hewlett Gulch 5,800 - 7,100 Kelly Flats 6,600 - 7,760 Sevenmile 7,440 ~ 8,760 Timber Juniper-Browse Browse Riparian Meadow Surface Acres"'( % of Total Total 113.3 23.1 80.4 16.4 207.2 42.2 8.9 1.8 80.3 16.4 TOTALS 490.1 100.0 366 100.0 Timber Browse Meadow 196.1 293.3 19.8 38.4 57.6 3.9 112 179 8 37.4 59.8 2.7 TOTALS 509.2 100.0 299 100.0 Timber Browse Riparian 140.3 317 .0 37.7 28.2 64.0 7.6 84 192 19 28.5 65.0 6.5 TOTALS 495.0 100.0 295 100.0 Number P1ots+ % of Total Total 93 25.4 58 15.8 160 43.7 1.6 6 49 13.4 * A Kelsh Stereo Plotter was used in the acreage determinations. + Permanent, 100 square feet, circular; laid out in a systematic sample of parallel lines, 8 chains apart. Plot centers are 132 feet apart. �Table 2.--The frequency distribution of mule deer pellet groups counted on the major habitats of 3 winter range study areas during the winters of 1962-63, 1963-64, and 1964-65. Study Area Uajor Habitat Timber Browse Jusc-Browse Meadow Riparian Total Plots or Groups Hewlett Gulch Timber Browse Meadow Total Plots or Groups Timber Browse Riparian Total Plots or Groups Total Plots Freq. With P.G. Index 1 93 160 58 49 6 72 130 32 45 6 13 22 12 4 0 7 5 8 0 0 1 1 5 0 0 0 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 30 43 47 4 0 21 30 26 4 0 366 285 51 20 7 3 0 0 124 81 1.9 77 .9 13.9 5.5 (Days)+ 9/19/62 - 4/30/63 0.0 0.8 (223) 0.0 1 .23 .19 .45 .06 0 78 126 30 49 6 13 26 18 0 0 1 5 7 0 .22 289 57 Total Plots Freq. With P.G. Index 0 0 3 1 0 0 1 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 19 45 43 0 0 15 34 28 0 0 .16 .21 :48 0 0 13 4 3 0 0 107 77 .21 1.1 0.8 3.6 78.9 15.6 (227) 10/13/63 - 5/27/64 0.0 0.0 11 15 0 1 8 0 0 4 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 42 114 o 29 67 0 .26 f\) .37 ~ 0 26 9 4 1 0 156 96 .32 0.3 0.0 92 108 6 13 47 2 6 18 0 1 4 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 28 103 2 20 71 2 .18 .40 .25 83 112 8 17 39 0 299 206 62 24 5 2 0 0 133 93 .31 203 56 0.7 (235) 0.7 0.0 1.7 68.9 20.7 8.0 (Days)+ 9/12/62 - 5/5/63 1963-64 Total No. Plots With P. G. 6 P.G. 4 5 2 3 0 112 179 8 Percent of Total Dates and Time Interval Sevenmi1e Creek Total P.G. 0 Percent of Total Dates and Time Interval Kelly Flats 1962-63 No. Plots With P.G. 6 4 5 2 3 Total Plots* 1.3 3.0 8.7 67.9 18.7 (213) 10/21/63 - 5/21/64 84 192 19 70 118 14 11 49 5 3 18 0 0 4 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 17 111 5 14 74 5 .17 .39 .26 74 145 17 9 37 2 0 7 0 1 2 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 12 61 2 10 47 2 .12 .24 .11 295 202 65 21 4 2 0 1 133 93 .32 236 48 7 3 1 0 0 75 59 .20 0.0 0.0 1.4 68.5 22.0 7.1 Percent of Total Dates and Time Interval ~Da~s2+ 9/11/62 - 5/18/63 'I< Permanent, 100 square foot, circular. + Computed from the last day of each reading. 0.0 0.7 ~2492 0.3 1.0 0.3 2.4 80.0 16.3 11/15/63 - 5/27/64 ~1942 �Table 2.--The frequency distribution of mule deer pellet groups counted on the major habitats of 3 winter range study areas during the winters of 1962-63, 1963-64, and 1964-65, continued. 1964-65 Study Area Major Habitat Total P1ots* 0 1 93 160 58 49 6 80 120 27 46 5 10 33 15 3 0 3 5 6 0 1 0 1 9 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 366 278 61 15 10 2 Percent of Total Dates and Time Interval (Days)+ 76.0 10/6/64 - 5/17/65 16.7 4.1 (223) 2.7 Hewlett Gulch Timber Browse Jusc-Browse Meadow Riparian Total Plots or Groups No. Plots With P.G. 2 3 4 5 Total P.G. Total Plots With P.G. Freq. Index 0 16 50 58 3 2 13 40 31 3 1 .14 .25 .53 .06 .16 0 0 129 88 .24 0.5 0.0 0.0 6 I Kelly Flats Timber Browse Meadmv 112 179 8 86 '101 7 19 53 0 5 15 1 1 9 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 38 116 2 26 78 1 .23 .44 .12 299 194 72 21 10 0 0 2 156 105 .35 Percent of Total Dates and Time Interval (Days)+ 64.9 11/5/64 - 5/13/65 24.1 7.0 (189) 3.3 0.0 0.0 0.7 Total Plots or Groups Sevenmi1e Creek Timber Browse Riparian Total Plots or Groups 84 192 19 70 102 19 11 48 0 2 29 0 0 10 0 0 1 0 1 2 0 0 0 0 20 150 0 14 90 0 .17 .47 0 295 191 59 31 10 1 3 0 170 104 .35 3.4 0.3 1.0 0.0 Percent of Total 64.8 Dates and Time Interval {Days2+ 11/6/64 - 5/27/65 * Permanent, 100 square foot, circular. + Computed from the last day of each reading. 20.0 10.5 ~2022 ro w 0 �Table 3.--The frequency distribution of 1963 and 1964. Study Area and Elevation ~FtI of mule deer pellet groups counted on the major habitats of 3 winter range study areas during the summers 1964 1963 Major Habitat Total Plots No. Plots With P. G. 0 1 2 3 1 0 1 93 91 Timber 0 2 160 152 5 Browse 1 4 4 49 Jusc-Browse 58 0 0 47 2 49 Meadow 0 1 0 6 5 Riparian 13 3 366 344 5 Total Plots or Groups 1.4 0.8 93.9 3.6 Percent of Total (166) Dates and Time Interval (Days) 4/30/63 - 10/13/63 Hewlett Gulch 5,800 - 7,100 4 0 1 0 0 0 1 0.3 Total P.G. 3 15 15 2 1 36 Total Plots Freq. With P.G. Index 2 8 9 2 1 22 .02 .05 .16 .04 .16 .06 No. Plots With P. G. 0 2 1 3 90 0 3 150 4 6 49 1 8 0 49 0 0 0 6 344 15 7 1.9 4.1 93.9 5/27/64 - 10/6/64 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0 0.0 (132) Total Total Plots Freq. P.G. With P.G. Index 3 16 10 0 0 29 3 10 9 0 0 22 .03 .06 .16 0 0 .06 I I\) 0 0 105 7 0 160 16 3 0 0 0 8 0 23 3 273 1.0 91.3 0.0 7.7 (169) 5/5/63 - 10/21/63 0 0 0 0 0.0 7 22 0 29 7 19 0 26 .06 .11 0 .09 1 105 7 30 7 141 0 0 8 254 37 8 2.7 84.3 12.4 5/21/64 - 11/5/64 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0.3 0.3 (168) 9 51 0 60 8 39 0 47 .07 .22 0 .16 0 2 0 84 82 Timber Sevenmile 13 1 1 177 192 Browse Creek 0 0 19 0 19 Riparian 7,440 - 8,760 1 1 278 15 295 Total Plots or Groups 0.3 5.1 0.3 94.2 Percent of Total {181} Dates and Time Interval (Days) 5/18/63 - 11/15/63 0 0 0 0 0.0 2 18 0 20 2 15 0 17 .02 .08 0 .06 0 82 2 180 12 0 0 19 0 14 0 281 4.7 0.0 95.3 5/27/64 - 11/6/64 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0 0.0 ~1632 2 12 0 14 2 12 0 14 .02 .06 0 .05 Timber Browse Meadow Total Plots or'Groups Percent of Total Dates and Time Interval 112 179 8 299 Kelly Flats 6,600 - 7,760 (Days) w I-' �- 232 - Pellet group and deer densities, winter range study areas, 1962-65.--These estimates are presented in terms of plot means and standard deviations in Table 4. The plot means and the number of pellet groups counted are projected to estimates of mean numbers of pellet groups per acre and deer per square mile in Table 5. Mean "winter" estimates ranged from 108.9 to 252.6 pellet groups per acre and 28 to 61 deer per square mile. Both extremes occurred on the Sevenmile Creek study area. Mean "summer" estimates ranged from 21.8 to 87.6 pellet groups per acre and from 6 to 25 deer per square mile for the Sevenmile Creek and Kelly Flats study areas, respectively. Within major habitats, mean "winter" estimates ranged from 0.0 for the meadow and riparian habitats to 435.6 ± 505.3 groups per acre in the juniper-browse habitat at Hewlett Gulch during 1964-65. Pellet group count summary, 1962-65.--The total pellet groups counted, their deposition rate on an average daily and area basis, and the cumulative estimate of mean pellet groups per acre deposited on the winter range study areas since 1962; are shown in Table 6. The average pellet groups per day per acre estimate is probably the most satisfactory comparative index of yearlong deer usage. Over the period involved, deer use thus calculated was greatest at Kelly Flats and least at Hewlett Gulch. This is in contrast to the pellet groups counted on plot establishment in 1962. Based on plot means, maximum deer use prior to 1962 occurred at Hewlett Gulch and minimum use at Sevenmile Creek (Anderson 1965-52). " Discussion: The pellet group deposition rates and patterns described above have some interesting but tenuous implications in terms of past deer population levels and pellet group longevity. Thus, if the population levels prior to establishment were similar to those during the study period, it would have taken about 13.3, 7.5, and 5.6 years to deposit the number of pellet groups counted on plot establishment at Hewlett Gulch, Kelly Flats, ~nd Sevenmile Creek, respectively. However, a differential in pellet group longevity rates may exist between study areas associated with their differing kinds and abundance of vegetative cover. Since cheatgrass Bromus tectorum appears to be an excellent retainer of pellet groups and is most abundant at Hewlett Gulch (Medin 1966), the higher average number of pellet groups per plot counted thereon during plot establishment suggests possibly greater pellet group longevity on this study area. Moreover, Kufeld (1960:37) described a seemingly rapid rate of disappearance of mule deer pellet groups from a southerly exposure at Sevenmile Creek. He found that 8 pellet groups of 40 (20.0 percent), 74 of 639 (11.6 percent), and 5 of 35 (14.4 percent) had disappeared over periods of approximately 12, 9, and 7 months~ respectively. Thus, counts of pellet groups which exceed about 6 months of age on the Severu'nile Creek area may be quite conservative. It is concluded that: (1) inferences of possible elevational differences in long !term deer use of Cache la Poudre winter range study areas based on pellet group counts may be invalid and, (2) deer population densities were probably higher on the winter range study areas prior to 1962. The average winter deer population densities estimated from pellet group counts appear entirely reasonable on the basis of field observations during the three winter periods. There is some observational evidence that indicates the marked fluctuation in winter deer densities,particularly at Sevenmile Creek,may be influenced by relative severities of climate rather than any overall population change. Similarly, the relatively high summer deer densities at Kelly Flats may be due to an inexplicable delay in spring movement. Possible relationships with �Table 4.--Mu1e deer pellet group densities on the major habitats of 3 winter range study areas during the winters of 1962-63, 1963-64, and 1964-65. study Area and Ft) Elevation Hewlett Gulch 5,800 - 7,100 No. P10ts* Timber Juniper-Browse Browse Riparian Meadow Totals Dates and Time Interval (Days)+ Kelly Flats 6,600 - 7,760 Timber Browse Meadow Totals Dates and Time Interval (Days)+ Sevenmi1e 7,440 - 8,760 1962-63 Pellet GrouEs Per Plot SD Fre • Index x Timber Browse Riparian Totals Dates and Time Interval (Days)+ 0.32 0.81 0.27 0.00 0.08 93 58 160 6 ...!t2. 366 0.66 1.08 0.67 0.00 0.28 0.74 0.34 9/19/62 - 4/30/63 112 179 _8 299 84 192 .l:2. 295 * Permanent, 100 square foot circular. + Computed from the last day of each reading. 0.23 0.45 0.19 0.00 0.06 0.22 (223) 0.59 0.85 0.46 0.18 0.40 0.25 0.77 0.45 9/12/62 - 5/5/63 0.31 (235) 0.49 0.91 0.45 0.17 0.39 0.26 0.25 0.58 0.25 0.20 0.58 0.26 0.81 0.45 9/11/62 - 5/18/63 0.32 (249) 1963-64 Pellet GrouEs Per Plot SD Fre • Index x 0.20 0.74 0.28 0.00 0.00 1.44 0.98 0.62 0.00 0.00 0.67 0.29 10/13/63 - 5/27/64 0.38 0.64 0.00 0.70 1.02 0.00 0.91 0.52 10/21/63 - 5/21/64 0.14 0.32 0.11 0.44 0.65 0.31 0.58 0.25 11/15/63 - 5/27/64 0.16 0.48 0.21 0.00 0.00 0.21 (227) 0.26 0.37 0.00 0.32 (213) 0.12 0.24 0.11 0.20 (194) 1964-65 Pellet GrouEs Per Plot SD Fre • Index x 0.17 1.00 0 •.31 0.33 0.06 0.46 1.16 0.63 0.82 0.24 0.74 0.35 10/6/64 - 5/17/65 0.34 0.65 0.25 0.80 0.93 0.71 0.89 0.52 11/5/64 - 5/13/65 0.24 0.78 0.00 0.69 1.03 0.00 0.95 0.58· . 11/6/64 - 5/27/65 0.14 0.53 0.25 0.16 0.06 0.24 (223) 0.23 0.44 0.12 0.35 (189) 0.17 0.47 0.00 0.35 (202) f\) w w �- 234 - Table 5.--Estimates of mean pellet group and population densities of mule deer on 3 winter range study areas, 1962-65. Time Pellet Groups Study Area & Interval Per Acre Deer Per ~E=l~e=v=a~t~~'o~n~(~F~td)========~D~a~t~e~s~========~(~D~a~y~s~)====:dxk:======dS~D~==~S~gguga Hewlett Gulch 5,800 - 7,100 Kelly Flats 6,600 - 7,760 Sevenmile Creek 7,440 - 8,760 + 9-19-62 4-30-63 10-13-63 5-27-64 10-6-64 4-30-63 10-13-63 5-27-64 10-6-64 5-17-65 223 166 227 132 223 148.1 42.7 126.3 34.4 152.5 322.3 194.3 291.9 144.6 322.3 33 13 28 12 34 9-12-62 5.,.5-63 10-21-63 5-21-64 11-5-64 5-5-63 10-21-63 5-21-64 11-5-64 5-13-65 235 169 213 168 189 196.0 42.3 226.5 87.6 226.5 335.4 142.9 396.4 228.3 387.7 40 12 52 25 59 9-11-62 5-18-63 11-15-63 5-27-64 11-6-64 5-18-63 11-15-63 5-27-64 11-6-64 5-27-65 249 181 194 163 202 1'96.0 29.6 108.9 21.8 252.6 352.8 130.7 252.6 91.5 413.8 39 8 28 6 61 Computed from pellet group counts using 13 as the average number of pellet groups deposited per deer day. Table 6.--Summary of mule deer pellet group counts on 3 winter range study areas~ 1962-65. Time Interval {Days2 Total Pellet GrouEs Pellet Groups /Day Mean Pellet Groups/Day /Acre Mean No. Pellet GrouEs/Acre 5-17-65 971 425 .•44 .00106 505.3 9-12-62 5-13-65 974 531 .55 .00156 775.4 9-11-62 5-27-65 989 412 .42 .00125 611.1 Study Area Surface Acres Hewlett Gulch 490.1 9-19-62 Kelly Flats 509.2 Sevenmi1e Creek 495.0 Dates �Table 7.--Some documented estimates of average pellet group and population densities of migratory mule deer on winter range. Pellet group plots are circular in shape unless otherwise noted. A dash (--) indicates the value was not cited and could not be calculated from the available data. Deer density estimates are rounded to the nearest whole number. Sampling intensities and population densities were calculated by the writer in nearly all cases. State Colo. Calif; Surface Acres Sample Census Area Area Sample Period Sampling Intensity (%) No. Pellet Groups/Acre Herd or Area Method or sample plot size (Acre) Cedar Ridge ground count Cedar Ridge .0023 .01 L03 4.46 4,544 4,544 .023 .098 12-20-57 12-31-58 5-20-58 5-20-59 160 150 165.5 161.0 Cedar Ridge .0023 1.03 4,544 .023 12-10-59 5-20-60 160 209.1 Cache 1a Poudre observation 1-13-64 1-5-65 3-12-64 3-15-65 58 69 Cache 1a Poudre .0023 5-27-64 5-21-65 5-27-65 223 189 194 C1avey Cherry C1avey "Key" " LassenWashoe .005,strip & R. .001 R. R. " area " " " 0.1 strip Sampling 1,600 .84 .69 .68 490. 509., 495.( .171 .136 .137 9-19-62 9-12.-62 9-11-62 -- 11,844 5,232 800+ 800+ 800+ -- Early Dec. '48 ---- -- ----- 228,400 228,400 228,400 228,400 -- -- -- ---- -- -- " " " " (Davs ) x Comments Reference 98 97 113 Large crew on drives (Gilbert & Grieb 1957) 339.8 198.0 56 80 Pop. densi(Harris 1959:240) ties from ground counts 431.2 41 (Harris 1960:88) 40 50 314 hrs.obs. (Dorrance 370 hrs. obs , 1965:75) SD 1 1 1 1-15-55 2-12-55 3-5-55 4,544 -- Dates " " " " " '46 '47 '48 Mean No. Deer Sq .Mile 126.3 196.0 108.9 291. 9 335.4 252.6 28 40 39 This study All cited values are the minimums over 3 yrs. See Table 5. Early May'49 150 " " " 150 " '47 150 " " '48 150 " " '49 150 " 480 409 ,476 ,087 673 -- 232 207 492 376 229 Winter loss est. 60% -- 261 276 438 236 1949-50 1950-51 1951-52 1952-53 --- -- -- -- -- -- -- ---- ----- I\) w VI 1, (Leopold ~ 1951:104,11 )' ( 1951:103,110 (Dasmann & Blaisdell 1954:221) �Table 7.--Some documented estimates of average pellet group and population densities of migratory mule deer on winter range. Pellet group plots are circular in shape unless otherwise noted. A d.ash (--) indicates the value was not cited and could not be calculated from the available data. Deer density estimates are rounded to the nearest whole number. Sampling intensities and population densities were calculated by the writer in nearly all cases, (continued). State CaUf. Herd or Area Method or sample plot size lAcre) Surface Acres Sample Census Area Area Devils Garden 0.1 strip 18.3 38.4 Devils Garden Utah .0054 .0114 ----- ._--- .- ---- SIiIIlp ling 11-1-47 10-25-48 Dates Sample Period (Days) 5-10-48 4-27-49 192 184 -- 1950-51 1951-52 1952-53 No. Pellet GrouEs/Acre -x -222 --- 309 221 132 Meadow Ck. .01 2.85 2,182 .130 12-1-48 4-20-49 141 685 S. Oak Ck. .01 3.11 7,864 .040 11-28-48 4-20-49 144 276 Heaston .01 1.47 2,907 .051 12-1-48 4-3-49 124 288 Oak Ck , Ariz.+* 0.1 strip 338,000 338,000 Sampling Intensity (%) Kaibab N. Sowats -- -- -- .01 -- -- .01 -- -- .01 -- 11,290*'1 ---- .01 -- 11,290*' .01 -- 11,290*'1 .01 .0023 .574 20 2.9 " --- " -- 1946-47 -- -- 1947-48 -- -- --- 1948-49 -- -- -- 319 1946-49 (3 year average) " " Oct.,l963 - May, 1964 1,094*+ 572*+ 274*+ SD -(196-248)* Mean No. Deer ts« •Mile --------- 142 -- -- ----282 102 --- --- -- 124 ---- Comments 38 55 154 126 -- Reference (Inters tat. Deer Herd 1951:243,: >mm., Only "key" area sampled (InterstatE Deer Herd 1954:240) nm., Winter loss e s t ,, 26% Winter loss est. , 9% Winter loss est. ,42% (Robinette al, 1952:292,2 -)- JuniperCliffroseSagebrush CliffroseSagebrush JuniperSagebrush All vegetative types All vegetative types All vegetative types (Ju1ander & Robinette "Pushed" pinyonjuniper (McCulloch 1965:206) ) II> LA> 0'. See end of DLs cu s s Lon section. 50) �Table 7.--Some docUmented estimates of average pellet group and population densities of migratory mule deer on winter range. Pellet group plots are circular in shape unless otherwise noted. A dash (--) indicates the value was not cited and could not be calculated from the available data. Deer density estimates are rounded to the nearest whole number. Sampling intensities and population densities were calculated by the writer in nearly all cases, (continued). State Ariz.+* Herd or Area Kaibab N. Sowats Method or sample plot size (Acre) Sample Period Sampling Intensity Surface Acres Sample Census Area Area (~O Sampling Dates (Davs ) SD Mean No. Deer I/Sq.Mile -- No. Pellet GrouEs/Acre -x .0023 .574 20 2.9 Oct.,1963 - May, 1964 -- 319 .0023 .574 20 2.9 Oct.,1962 - May, 1964 -- 314 -- --- .0023 .574 20 2.9 Oct.,1962 - May, 1964 -- 339 -- -- -- .0023 .574 20 2.9 Oct.,l96l - 5-24-62 -- 355 47++ .0023 .574 20 2.9 Oct.,1961 - 5-24-62 -- 385 86++ -- .0023 .574 20 2.9 Oct.,1962 May, 1963 -- 268 -- -- .0023 .574 20 2.9 Oct.,1962 May, 1963 -- 256 -- -- Kaibab .01 5.00 320 1.6 Oct.,1962 - May, 1963 -- 276 -- -- Anita Allot. .01 5.00 320 1.6 Oct.,1962 - May, 1963 -- 288 -- -- - Comments Reference Untreated pinyonjuniper "Pushed" pinyonjuniper, ave. of 2 winters Untreated pinyonjuniper, ave. of 2 winters ro W --J "Pushed" juniperpinyon Untreated juniperpinyon (McCulloch 1962:Tab1e "Pushed" pinyonjuniper Untreated pinyonjuniper (McCulloch 1964:133) "Pushed" pinyonjuniper Untreated pinyonjuniper (McCulloch 1964:120,13~ 8 �TabLe 7.--Some documented estimates of average pellet group and population densities of migratory mule deer on winter range. Pellet group plots are circular in shape unless otherwise noted. A dash (--) indicates the value was not cited and could not be calculated from the available data. Deer density estimates are rounded to the nearest whole number. Sampling intensities and population densities were calculated by the writer in nearly all cases, (continued). State Herd or Area Method or sample plot size (Acre) Ariz.+* Kaibab N. .0023 Montana White Pockets .0023 Rattlesnake observation observation .0023 .0023 Surface Acres Sample Census Area Area .574 20 .574 20 appr ox, approx. 2,240 2,240 .597 .597 1,200 1,200 Sampling Intensity (%) 2.9 2.9 Dates Sample Period (Days) - 5-24-62 -- 124 - 5-24-62 -- 110 Sampling Oct.,196l Oct.,196l No. Pellet GrouEs/Acre -x SD Mean No. Deer /Sq.Mile 10++ -- 26++ 1958-59 1959-60 .049 .049 12-20-60 12-20-60 - -36 33 3-25-61 3-25-61 95 95 ---- --- + Approximate acreage from Figure 58, page 103. 95'7,confidence interval. Not clear whether density estimates are for 1 winter or an average of 3 winters. Very approximate acreage. +* Dates are inferred from other sources and all mean density estimates, except. Anita allotment, ++ Standard error. * *+ ** are an average of 5 means •. 74 107 Comments Reference "Pushed" juniperpinyon Untreated juniperpinyon (McCulloch 1962:Table 2,000 hrs. of obs. (Bailey 1960 8) 1\). wco (Klebenow 1962:23,58) �- 239 measured environmental variables will be investigated in the future. A review of the available literature on mean pellet groups per acre and population density estimates of migratory mule deer on winter range is presented for comparative purposes in Table 7. Comparison of these data with that from the Cache 1a Poudre is handicapped by the frequent lack of published information on sampling, intensity, size of census area, and dates of sampling. Generally, however, Cache 1a Poudre values are in the lower range of values with a longer time interval than reported elsewhere. In general, areas of 800 acres or less have yielded the maximum population densities, up to 492 deer per square mile. On areas of from 800-12,000 acres, density estimates have ranged from 33-282 deer per square mile. Pellet group derived estimates of population densities on areas exceeding 12,000 acres are apparently rare and the one documented effort yielded an estimate of 38-55 deer per square mile. Similarly, pellet group densities have been estimated as 109-1,476 groups per acre on ranges of 800 acres or less, 161-685 groups per acre on areas 800-12,000 acres, and 222 groups per acre on areas of 12,000 acres and over. In west-central Utah, Ju1ander' and Robinette (1958:19) empirically set 200 pellet groups per acre as one indicator of heavy deer use. Heavy winter mortality of mule deer has been associat'ed with minimum densities of 288 pellet groups per acre. Yet, Robinette ~ a1. (1958:419) .imply that 300-600 groups per acre were connnon on 2,900-7,300 acre study areas in Utah and Nevada. Since quantitative data on the habitat are seldom presented, interpretation of these estimates in relation to deer mortality or habitat damage is impossible. Finally, a check on the values in Table 7 revealed an important oversight. The values cited for the Oak Creek area of Utah are 124-154 deer per square mile. These relatively high estimates may, or may not be, associated with the 375 pellet groups per acre calculated as a 9 year average of 7 transects consisting of 336, .01 acre circular plots Robinette et a1. (1958:421, Table 4). In another portion (Table 3, page 419) of this same pape;:- sampling design at Oak Creek is stated to consist of 17 transects of .01 acre circular plots. In neither case is the acreage of the censused area cited. LITERATURE CITED Anderson, A. E. 1965. Population density and structure. pp. 47-74. In Game Research Report, January. F.A. Project W-105-R-4. Colorado Dept. of Game, Fish and Parks, Denver, 248pp. (processed) • 1966. Population density and structure. F.A. Project W-105-R-5. -~---:~--:--Colorado Dept. Game, Fish and Parks, Denver, 22pp. (typewritten) Bailey, E. D. 1960. Behavior of the Rattlesnake mule deer on their winter M. S. Thesis, Montana State University, Missoula, 110pp. (processed) range. Dasmann, W. P. and J. A. Blaisdell. 1954. Deer and forage relationship on the Lassen-Washoe interstate winter deer range. Calif. Fish and Game 40(3):215-234. �- 240 - LITERATURE CITED (continued) Dorrance, M. J. 1965. Behavior of Rocky Mountain mule deer on winter and summer ranges. M. S. Thesis. Colorado State Univ., Fort Collins, 136pp. (typewritten) Ferguson, R. B. 1955. The pellet count method of censusing mule deer in Utah. M. S. Thesis, Utah State Univ., Logan, 94pp. (processed) Gilbert, P. F. and J. R. Grieb. 1957. Comparison of air and ground counts in Colorado. J. Wild1. Mgmt. 21(1):35-37. Harris, J. T. 1959. Total mule deer population estimates from pellet counts. Ann. Conf. Western Assoc. State Game and Fish Commissioners, Proc. 39:237-247. --- • 1960. The pellet group count. technique, pp. 87-91. In Quarterly Report, July, F.A. Project W-38-R. Colorado Dept. Game and Fish, Denver, 110pp. (processed) Interstate Deer Herd Committee. 1951. The Devils Garden deer herd. Fifth progress report of the interstate deer herd and its range, including a summation of work to date. Calif. Fish and Game 37(3):233-272. ----- ~----. 1954. Eighth progress report on the cooperative study of the Devils Garden interstate deer herd and its range. Calif. Fish and Game 40(3):235-266. Julander, O. and W. L. Robinette. 1950. Deer a:ndcattle relationships on Oak Creek range in Utah. J. Forestry 48:410-415. Julander, O. 1958. Techniques in studying competition between big game and livestock. J. Range Mgmt. 11(1):18-21. Klebenow, D. A. 1962. Ecology and productivity of a montane forest winter deer range, western Montana, M. S. Thesis. Montana State Univ., Missoula, 93pp. (processed) Kufeld, R. C. 1960. Evaluation of paint as an agent for marking deer-pellet groups. M. S. Thesis. Colorado State Univ., Fort Collins, 98pp. (typewritten) Leopold, A. S., T. Riney, R. McCain, and L. Tevis, Jr. 1951. The Jawbone deer herd. Game Bull. No.4. California Div. of Fish and Game, Sacramento. l39pp. McCulloch, C. Y. 1962. The influence of pinon-juniper eradication upon wildlife species. F.A. Project W-78-R-7. In Wildlife research in Arizona, 1962. Arizona Game and Fish Dep t , , Phoenix, unpaged. (processed) • 1964. The influence of pinon-juniper eradication upon wildlife ---------------species. F.A. Project W-78-R-8 pp. 117-142. In Wildlife research in Arizona, 1963. Arizona Game and Fish Dept., Phoenix, 264pp. (processed) • 1965. Pinyon-juniper eradication. F.A. Project W-78-R-9. pp. 189-220. ----------~In Wildlife research in Arizona, 1964. Arizona Game and Fish Dept., Phoenix, 251pp. (processed) �- 241 - LITERATURE CITED (continued) Medin, D. E. 1962. Vegetative type mapping. pp. 187-210. In Quarterly Report, July, Part 2. F.A. Project W-105-R-2. Colorado Dept.-Oame and Fish, Denver, pp. 161-339. (processed) ______ • 1966. Vegetative analysis. F.A. Project W-105-R-5 Colorado Dept. Game, Fish and Parks, Denver. (typewritten) Robinette, W. L., O. Julander, J. S. Gashwiler, and J. G. Smith. 1952. Winter mortality of mule deer in Utah in relation to range condition. J. Wildlife Mgmt. 16(3):289-299. ______________ , R. B. Ferguson, J. S. Gashwiler. 1958. Problems involved in the use of deer pellet group counts. Trans. N. American Wildl. Conf. 23:411-425. Prepared by:__~A~l~l~e~n~E~.~An~d~e~r~s~o~n~ _ Approved by: Wildlife Researcher Date: ~J~a~n~ua~ry~,~1~9~6~6 _ ~D~e~a~n~E~.~M~e~d~i~n~ _ Project Leader Ferd Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator ��- 243 - JOB COMPLETION RESEARCH State of REPORT PROJECT SEGMENT COLORADO ----~~~~~------------------An Ecological Investigation of the Cache la Poudre Deer Herd, Colorado Pro j ec t No. _.:.:W_-..:.1..:.O.::,.5...,;-R:;::.-.-;;:,.6 __ --:_ Work Plan No. 5 --------~------------------ Job No. Period Physical 1 Covered: Personnel: January, Physiological Studies Characteristics 1965 - December,1965 Allen E. Anderson and Dean E. Medin ABSTRACT About 3,800 measurements of selected hematological, physiological, and morphological ·characteristics of 6 male and .13 female mule deer collected on a 4 per month basis through April, 1965 are tabulated chronologically. The 1965 collections complete the series begun on April 13, 1961. This series includes 192 regular collections and 33 additional deer (primarily highway kills) on which only partial data were obtained. Seasonal fluctuations in mean total kidney fat (perinephric) and femur marrow fat percentages computed from 194 mule deer are presented with 90, 95, and 99 percent confidence intervals. These indices of relative fatness or physical condition show the same general seasonal patterns. In males, maximum means occurred during the fall and minimum means during the spring. Winter and summer means were intermediate with overlapping confidence intervals. In females, maximum means occurred during the fall and winter (with overlapping confidence intervals) and minimum means during the summer with distinctly intermediate values in the spring. Both indices show that significantly higher mean values occurred in females during the winter and spring. While means of both indices of males exceeded those of females during the summer and fall their confidence intervals overlapped. These patterns are compared to those reported in the literature. Estimates of percent carcass fat on 18, skinned, eviscerated mule deer carcasses derived by densitometry and by ether extract analysis are presented. The mean values are within 0.3· percent but the densitometric estimates exhibit twice the variability of ether-extract estimates. Plans for final ana lysis of data are briefly described. �- 244 - Acknowledgements: Miss Florence Fields, Medical Technologist, (ASCP) M.S. weighed, determined volumes, measured most of the glands and organs and performed the blood plasma analyses. Robert L. Keiss, Head of the Game and Fish Laboratory performed analyses on two of the blood samples. Student Assistant D. F. Stearns and K. A. Porter (now resigned,formerly Wildlife Researcher Candidate) assisted in the field and laboratory. Wildlife Researcher Candidate G. D. Bear and U. S. Forest Service District Ranger J. Cameron assisted on one deer collection each. Student Assistant O. Doyle Markham, weighed, determined volumes, and measured glands and organs on two deer. Recommendations: Begin planning the final analysis of all data and complete continuing review of literature in preparation for the final reports. the Objectives: Measure relevant physiological and morphological characteristics of deer collected seasonally so that: (a) the response of the herd to its environment can be more adequately interpreted, (b) establish "physiological norms", and (c) provide basic morphological data as related to sex and age class. P'roce du re s z These were described in detail (Anderson 1962: 254) and because of their length will not be repeated here. An outline of the laboratory procedures followed with minor modifications by the contracting laboratory and by the Game and Fish Laboratory at Fort Collins is given in Table L During 1965, 6 male and 11 female mule deer (collections numbers 176-192) were shot as part of the regular collections which terminated April 27, 1965. This completed the series of deer collected on a 4 per month basis since April 13, 1961. Two additional females ("0" series) were obtained from other sources and ~artial data obtained. The 1965 regular collections were made on winter range within the Cache la Poudre drainage from about 6,100 to 7,900 feet in elevation and their approximate locations are shown in Figure 1. An attempt was made to sample equal proportions of each sex and major age components. Deer were generally shot through the spine in the lower neck or thoracic portion. Time of shooting ranged from about 5:00 AM to 1:00 PM and death usually occurred within two minutes of shooting. Blood samples were aspirated from the left portion of the heart and completed for individual deer within the following average number and range of minutes from time of death; males, 9.5 (6-17) and females, 7.5 (1-18). Laboratory analysis of the carcass usually began within 3 hours and completed within 8 hours of death. Blood plasma analyses were generally completed within 24 hours of death. The age of each collected deer was estimated by the tooth replacement and molar wear ratio criteria of Robinette et a1 (1957). �Table l.--Outline of procedures used in blood plasma, blood serum, and tissue analyses, 1965.+ Item Procedure Reference Blood Plasma: erythocyte count leukocyte count differential leukocyte count packed cell volume hematocytometer hematocytometer thin smear slides centrifuge - graphic reader (Hepler 1958) (Hepler 1958) (Hepler 1958) none Blood Serum: vitamin A phosphorous potassium protein sodium magnesium calcium colorimetric colorimetric flame photometry colorimetric flame photometry titrimetric EDTA t Lt r Lme t r Lc EDTA (Baird As soc ,, n d,) --modified from (Kitson and Mallon 1944) (Baird Assoc., n.d.) (Gornell, et al. 1949) (Baird As soc ,, n d.,) -- modified from (Lewis and Melnick 1960) -- modified from (Lewis and Melnick 1960) colorimetric colorimetric colorimetric ether extraction, gravimetric (Dann and.Evelyn 1938) (Dann and Evelyn 1938) (Maickel 1960) (Assn. Agric. Chern. 1960) gas chromatography (Rogozinski 1964~ M~()x_e __eJ:_a1. 1964) Tissue Analyses: liver vitamin A and carotene liver carotene adrenal ascorbic acid femur marrow fat and moisture content fatty acid methyl esters of femur marrow fat s s + All 1965 blood. serum and. tissue analyses were performed by Industrial Laboratories, Denver, Colorado. Blood plasma analyses were performed by Miss Florence Fields, M.T. (ASCP). M. Sc., Game and Fish Research Center Laboratory, Colorado Game, Fish and.Parks Dept., Fort Collins. I\) .j::"" \J1 �50' 40' 105' 30' 2.0' 10' (\:1 ~.;. ro- -+=- 0'\. ~H GAME MANAGEMENT DEPT. OF SIXTH 1 t 0 PRINCIPAL 1 Sc~e UNIT 140 19 GAME AND FISH I MERIDIAN 3 4 s Miles j I J40' 30' 1 LEGEND ~ Management Unit Approximate Transitionol Setween Summer TeN Boundary And Zone Wintar Ronoes Po~on.ic DrQilKtion North Am.ricen datum Figure 1. Approximate kill locations of 6 male and 11 female mule deer collected during 1965. male deer. Underlined numbers are I I �- 247 Physical Characteristics Allen E. Anderson Findings: About 3,800 measurements obtained in whole or part from 19 mule deer collected during 1965 are tabulated chronologically in Tables 2-9. Various indices of relative fatness or "physical condition" are presented for males (Table 10) and females (Table 11). I have summarized the seasonal fluctuations in both kidney fat (perinephric) and femur marrow fat percentages for each sex (1961.,65) in Table 12. Analyses of fatty acid methyl esters of femur marrow fat from 6 mature mule deer are listed in Table 13. The data in Table 12 depict seasonal fluctuations in indices of relative fatness during a period of what appears to have been relatively mild winters with increasingly less total annual precipitation (Med.in1962, 1964, 1965, 1966). Under these conditions mule deer total kidney fat and femur marrow fat percentages show very similar seasonal fluctuations. Maximum means occurred in the fall (mq1es) and in the fall and winter (females). Minimum means occurred in the spring (males) and sunnner (females). As interpreted from 90 percent confidenc~ intervals, male winter and summer kidney fat means were distinctly different. In females, kidney fat winter-summer and spring-stJnnnermeans were also distinctly different although this difference was less between spring and sunnner. Winter and fall kidney fat means were similar in females. Similar confidence intervals computed. about the male femur marrow fat means suggest substantial differences between winter, spring and fall but similarity between winter and sunnner. In females, the winter, spring, and summer femur marrow fat mean percentages were markedly different and winter-fall values were similar. It is readily apparent that, for both indices, females had. substantially higher levels of fat durJng the winter and spring periods. During the sunnner and fall however, male means exceeded. female means but their respective confidence intervals greatly overlapped. Maximum variability in kidney fat percentages occurred for both sexes in the fall and minimum in the spring. For both sexes, maximum femur marrow fat percentage variability occurred in the sunnnerand minimum variability during the fall. The physiological implications of the fatty acid methyl esters (Table 13) will be examined in subsequent reports. The literature on this subject is voluminous and.complex. The validity of the densitometric technique (Anderson 1964:190) was tested by subjecting 18 skinned, eviscerated mule deer carcasses on which densitometric estimates of percent carcass fat had been made to chemical analysis by the Industrial Laboratories, Denver, Colorado. After densitometry, these carcasses were frozen, then cut to suitable size with a band saw for grinding. The whole sample was mixed in an 80 quart capacity mixer and a 5 pound representative sample was reground through a 1/16 inch plate, mixed, and percent fat determined by ether-extract. The results are shown in Table 14. Means are seen to differ by only 0.3 percent but the densitometric estimates exhibit twice the variability of the ether-extract estimates. It is concluded that the mean values of percent carcass fat obtained by densitometry are adequate to describe average seasonal trends. Individual densitometric estimates, however, may be subject to gross .errors. �- 248 - Discussion: The various confidence intervals, herein, are a good method of comparing mean trends of seasonal samples. If the samples are randomly selected (possibly not here) it may be stated that similar samples from this population would yield means and confidence intervals which will fall within the population confidence intervals 90 percent of the time. Thus, if confidence intervals do not overlap it is unlikely that the true population means are similar. Overlapping confidence intervals, however, sugge-Mt:that the true population means are similar. The effect of a possibly biased selection of deer on these inductions is unknown. Levels of relative fatness or "physical condition" in mule deer have been previouslystudied by Cook ~ al (1949:270), Bischoff (1954:205), Taber and Dasmann (1958:42,114), Taber et al (n.d.), and Browning and Lauppe (1964:141). Cook et al (1949) reported on seasonal changes in body weights and relative amounts of carcass fat of "young and older" male black-tailed and mule deer. Each subspecies was collected at the rate of 5 deer per month for 14 months. Maximum means were obtained during June and July for black-tailed deer and during August and September for mule deer. Minimum means for both subspecies occurred durLng January and February. However, in black-tailed deer a low mean also occurred during October and November. Bischoff (1954) investigated femur marrow fat in 141 "mature" female mule deer from northeastern California but did not quantify seasonal trends. In another California s t udy ; Taber and Dasmann (1958) used "field" weights corrected for skeletal size and reproduction in 64 male and 129 female black-tailed deer also collected yearlong. They concluded (page 121) that; "In general the condition level of the deer followed the protein level of the forage, being high in spring and summer, declining through fall and reaching a low point in late winter". Their graphic depiction of mean monthly weights (Figure 21, page 42) suggest somewhat. similar seasonal patterns between male and· females with females reaching a peak in July and males in early August. Low values for males occurred during January and February. Low values for females occurred during December and January. Taber et al (n.d.) investigated the annual condition cycle of Montana mule deer using the live weight ratio, kidney fat index, blood serum protein, and adrenal weight ratio in 25 males and 27 females collected yearlong. I computed seasonal means from the raw data cited for the kidney fat index. Within the limitation of this small sample size, the seasonal pattern appears to resemble that of the Poudre population sample described above. Browning and Lauppe (1964) noted some increase in fat during December but concluded, apparently on the basis of body weights, that there were no significant changes in seasonal condition levels in 51 black-tailed deer (mostly females) sampled yearlong from redwood-fir habitat in northern California. Thus, small sample sizes, different analytical techniques, and relatively little published data, almost invalidate comparisons of the poudre herd with other mule deer populations. Experimental evidence, however, suggests that seasonal changes in relative fatness may be closely related to a reproductive cycle--seasonal temperature interaction which may be reasonably inferred from our data. Thus, penned male black-tailed deer on adequate diet lost weight after the onset of the breeding season as did mothers following birth (Brown 1961:12). Also, "_- deer being fed on overabundance of the best native browse species available were unable to maintain their body weight during the winter months. Good quality alfalfa, supplemented by grain, was the only diet on which deer were able to maintain or gain weight during the winter Brown (1961:14)". �- 249 Table 2.--Weights (kg) and external body measurements (cm) of 6 male mule deer, 1965. Date-Age-Measurements 176 178 Collection No. 182 185 Collection Date (Month-Day) 1-5 1-19 2-17 Estimated Age (Year-Month) 1-7 8-7 0-8 Carcass Wt. - Bled 49.5 86.5 36.9 - Eviscerated 34.6 62.6 26.6 31.0 - Skinned 55.8 24.1 Hide Wt. 3.4 5.5 2.5 Body Length (excluding tail length) 133.5 121.5 164.0 Tail Length 19.5 20.0 16.5 Head Length 29.8 33.7 25.6 Interorbital Width 11.1 13.6 12.1 Girth 83.0 106.0 75.0 Shoulder Height 87.0 .97.0 80.0 Neck Circumference (a) 36.0 46.0 29.0 (b) 50.0 58.0 38.0 E~r Length (Left) 20.5 22.5 19.5 (Right) 20.5 22.5 19.5 51.0 Hind Foot Length (Left) 45.0 43.2 51.0 (Right) 45.5 43.0 Hoof Length (Front Left) 6.8 7.9 6.2 (Front Right) 7.1 7.7 6.2 (Rear Left) 6.6 7.5 5.8 (Rear Right) 6.5 7.1 5.9 Metatarsal Gland Length (Left) 13.0 16.0 12.0 (Right) 14.0 16.0 12.0 Metatarsal Gland Width (Left) 4.0 4.0 5.0 (Right) 4.0 4.0 5.0 Tarsal Gland (Left) 4.0 3.5 3.5 (Right) 4.0 4.5 3.5 Scrotum Length 6.0 6.0 5.5 Width 6.0 6.0 4.0 Height 4.0 6.0 2.0 11.0 Prepuce Length 9.0 8.0 Antler Beam Diam (Left) 2.10 3.69 1.69 (Right) 3.52 Antler Beam Length (Left) 25.0 49.0 2.5 (Right) 26.5 2.5 Antler Point No. (Left) 3 4 1 (Right) 2 1 Antler Spread (Inside) 25.0 48.0 (Tip-to-Tip) 28.0 Antler Wt. (g) (Left) 90 720 (Right) 89 600 Antler Brow Tine Length (Left) o 3.5, 3.5 (Right) o 3.0,3.0,1.5 3-11 6-9 84.6 61.2 55.4 5.8 164.0 22.0 35.3 15.3 106.0 106.0 40.0 54.0 22.5 22.5 53.0 53.0 7.5 7.6 7.6 7.3 18.0 17.0 5.5 5.5 4.0 4.0 6.0 5.5 5.5 12.0 187 188 3-24 4-9 63.6 3-31 0-9 31.1 22.5 20.3 2.2 4'7.4 42.4 5.0 151.0 20.0 32.8 13.8 95.0 93.0 42.0 49.0 20.5 20.5 50.0 50.0 7.4 7.6 7.1 7.3 17.0 17.0 5.0 5.0 4.5 5.0 6.0 5.0 4.0 12.0 125.5 15.5 26.1 11.4 73.0 82.0 26.0 33.0 19.5 19.5 43.2 43.1 6.3 6.3 5.9 5.8 15.0 14.5 5.0 5.0 4.0 4.0 3.0 3.5 2.0 9.0 1.5 1.5 1 1 7.0 7.0 �- 250 - Table 2.--Weights (kg) and external body measurements deer, 1965. (continued) Date-Age-Measurements Antler Stage - Bone - Velvet - Velvet Shed.ding - Skin Covered Pelage Sample Wt. (g) Pelage Color (Munsell 1960) Dorsal Rostrum 176 178 X X . "\.'. Collection No. 185 187 188 X+ X* X i 16.7 10 YR 9/1 Interorbital 10 YR 3/2 Occipital 10 YR 4/2 Brisket 10 YR 3/2 Outer Thigh 10 YR 6/3 Umbilical (Anterior) 10 YR 6.5/2 Front Knees 10 YR 7.5/6 ++ Slight bone protuberance + No antler growth * Antlers beginning growth 182 (cm) of 6 ma Le mule 28.7 X++ 31.5 44.0 30.5 26.0 10 YR 9/1 10·YR '5/4 10 YR 5/2 10 YR . 4/1 10 YR 6/4 10 YR 6/1 10 YR 7.5/6 10 YR 7/2 10 YR 5/4 10 YR 4.5/4 1.0YR 6/2 10 YR .7/5 10 YR 7/1 10 YR 7.5/6 10 YR 10/1 10 YR 4.•5/2 10 YR 6/2 10 YR 2/2 10 YR 7.5/4 10 YR 7.5/1 .10 YR 9/6 10 YR 10/1 10 YR 4/3 10 YR 5.5/1 10 YR 3/1 10 YR 7/3 10 YR 7/1 10 YR 7.5/6 ·10 YR 8/1.5 10 YR 7/4 10 YR 6/4 10 YR 5/2 10 YR 7/3 10 YR 8/1 10 YR 8/6 I �- 251 - Table 3.--Weights (kg) and external body measurements deer, 1965. Date-Age-MeasurementsRe~roductive Status 177 Collection Date (Month-Day) 1-12 Estimated Age (Year-Month) 0-7 Carcass Wt. - Bled 35.4 - Eviscerated 25.0 - Skinned 22.6 Hide Wt. 2.4 Body Length (excluding tail length) 120.0 Tail Length 13.0 Head Length 25.2 11.4 Interorbital Width Girth 75.0 Shoulder Height 77.0 Neck Circumference (a) 28.0 35.0 (b) Ear Length (Left) 20.0 20.0 (Right) Hind Foot Length (Left) 39.6 (Right) 39.5 (Front 'Left) 6.2 Hoof Length (Front Right) 6.2 (Rear Left) 5.8 5.9 (Rear Right) Metatarsal Gland Length (Left) '13.5 (Right) 14.5 Metatarsal G1and'Width (Left) 4.5 (Right) 4.5 Tarsal Gland Width (Left) 3.5 (Right) 3.5 Vulva Width 0.3 1.8 Length 10.0 Mammary Gland Length Width 10.5 1.1 Depth Nipple Length ~ront Left) 0.4 0.4 O?ront Right) 0.5 (Rear Left) (Rear Right) 0.4 Nipple Basam Diam (Front Left) 0.4 (Front Right) 0.4 (Rear Left) 0.5 (Rear Right) 0.5 31.6 Pelage Sample Wt. (g) (em) of 12 female mule 179 1-26 0-7 32.6 23.2 20.5 2.7 Collection No. 180 181 2-3 2-10 1-8 6-8 50.0 57.3 37.5 38.9 34.2 35.4 3.3 3.5 183 2-24 8-8 67.2 47.6 42.7 4.9 184 3-3 1-9 46.6 33.6 30.8 2.8 118.0 16.0 25.2 10.3 '72.0 80.0 28.0 40.0 18.5 18.5 42.0 42.0 6.3 6.3 6.4 6.3 11.0 12.5 4.0 4.0 3.5 3.5 0.3 2.0 5.5 5.5 1.0 0.6 0.7 0.6 0.8 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.2 31.2 140.0 14.0 28.9 12.1 84.0 89.0 31.0 39.0 20.0 20.0 ,45.2 45.6 6.2 6.2 6.1 6.1 15.5 15.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 5.0 0.5 1.3 11.5 11.0 2.1 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.9 0.5 0.5 0.6 0.7 29.3 149.0 18.0 31.8 11.6 94.0 94.0 34.0 49.0 19.5 19.5 46.5 47.0 7.1 7.2 6.8 6.8 14.0 16.0 4.0 4.0 5.0 5.0 1.5 4.0 10.0 12.0 4.5 1.2 1.8 1.4 1.5 1.0 0.8 0.7 0.8 33.6 131.0 17 .0 27.9 12.3 83.0 84.0 30.0 37.0 21.0 21.0 47.4 47.3 6.9 6.8 6.7 6.8 16.0 17 .0 5.0 5.0 4.0 4.0 0.5 2.6 9.0 11.0 I 0.7 0.6 0.6 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.6 0.8 0.9 33.3 140.0 14.0 31.2 11.5 93.0 91.0 30.0 40.0 21.0 21.0 46.0 46.0 6.9 6.9 6.8 6.6 14.0 13.5 5.0 5.0 4.0 4.0 1.0 2.8 10.0 10.5 4.0 1.5 1.8 2.0 1.9 0.8 0.6 0.7 0.7 37.8 �- 252 - Table 3.--Weights (kg) and external body measurements deer, 1965. (continued) Date-Age-MeasurementsReI!roductive Status, Pelage Color (Munsell 1960) Dorsal Rostrum Interorbital Occipital Brisket Outer Thigh Umbilical (Ant~rior) Front Knees Reproductive Status Pregnant Lactating Quiescent 177 179 10 YR 8/2 10 YR 4/3 10 YR 4/2 10 YR 4/1 10 YR 7/4 10 YR 6/1 10 YR 7/6 10YR 7/1 10 YR 5/1 10 YR 4/1 10 YR 3/1 10 YR 6/1.5 10 YR 7/1 10 YR 7.5/4 X X (cm) of 12 female mule Collection No. 180 181 183 184 10 YR 8/2 10 YR 4/2 10 YR 4/2 10 YR 3/2 10 YR 6/4 10 YR 7/1 l{)YR 8/6 10 YR 9/1 10 YR 3·.5/1 10 YR 3.5/1 10 YR 2/1 10 YR 6.5/2 10 YR 7/1 10 YR 7.5/6 10 YR 7.5/1 10 YR 5/1.5 10 YR 4/1.5 10 YR 4/1 10 YR 6/2 10 YR 7/1 10 YR 7.5/6 10 YR S/l 10 YR 4/2 10 YR 3.5/2 10 YR 5/2 10 YR 7/4 10 YR 7/1 10 YR 8/6 X X X X �- 253 Table 3.--Weights (kg) and external body measurements deer, 1965. (continued) Date-Age-MeasurementsReEroductive Status (em) of 12 female mule Collection No. 189 190 186 - 033 Collection Date (Month-Day) 3-17 Estimated Age (Year-Month) 7-9 51.5 Carcass Wt. - Bled - Eviscerated 34.3 31.0 - Skinned Hide Wt. 3.3 BodY"Length (excluding Tail length) 140.5 Tail Length 14.5 Head Length 29.8 Interorbital Width 13.3 Girth 86.0 Shoulder Height 85.0 Neck Circumference (a) 29.0 (b) 38.0 Ear Length (Left) 20.0 (Right) 20.0 Hind Foot Length (Left) 44.5 (Right) 44.2 Hoof Length (Front Left) 6.6 (Front Right) 6.7 (Rear Left) 6.4 (Rear Right) 6.2 Metatarsal Gland Length (Left) 15.0 (Right) 15.0 Metatarsal Gland Width (Left) 5.0 (Right) 5.0 Tarsal Gland Width (Left) 5.5 (Right) 5.0 Vulva Width 0.6 Length 2.6 Mammary Gland Length 9.5 11.0 Width 1.9 Depth 1.6 Nipple Lergth (Front Left) 1.2 (Front Right) 1.7 (Rear Left) 1.5 (Rear Right) Nipple Basal Diam (Front Left) 0.8 (Front Right) 0.8 (Rear Left) 0.8 (Rear Righ t) 0.9 Pelage Sample,Wt. (g) 26.9 3-25 8-9 63.8 46.0 4-6 0-10 28.2 21.3 19.3 2.0 153.0 16.0 32.6 13.6 '93.0 95.0 34.0 46.0 20.5 20.5 48.2 48.3 7.1 7.2 7.0 7.0 17 .0 17.0 5.0 4.5 5.5 5.5 0.8 3.2 12.0 11.5 2.2 1.4 1.1 1.5 1.4 1.0 0.9 1.0 1.0 24.7 110.0 12.0 25.7 10.9 71.0 76.0 31.0 38.0 18.0 18.0 '41.5 41.5 5.8 5.9 5.9 6.0 11.5 11.5 3.5 4.0 4.5 4.0 0.6 1.5 5.0 6.0 0.4 0.4 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.2 29.2 191 192 4-13 2-10 50.9 33.8 30.6 3.2 4-20 4-10 56.8 39.9 35.4 4.5 4-27 3-10 60.2 43.0 39.1 3.9 143.0 20.0 29.6 12.8 84.0 85.0 29.0 41.0 19.5 19.5 45.4 45.2" 6.7 6.5 6.1 6.2 16.5 16.5 4.5 4.0 4.0 4.0 0.7 2.9 10.5 11.0 1.4 1.1 1.1 1.4 1.4 0.8 0.8 1.0 1.0 31.4 134.0 16.0 30.1 12.7 92.0 90.0 33.0 45.0 20.0 20.5 45.0 45.0 6.6 6.7 6.3 6.4 14.5 15.0 5.0 5.0 4.0 4.0 0.9 3.0 10.0 11.0 3.0 0.8 1.4 1.1 1.5 0.7 0.6 0.7 0.6 35.2 145.0 16.0 30.1 12.5 91.0 89.0 30.0 39.0 20.5 20.5 48.2 48.2 7.1 7.2 7.1 7.0 18.0 17.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.0 0.4 2.8 10.0 11.0 2.8 1.3 1.2 1.6 1.5 0.7 0.8 0.8 0.9 25.2 �- 254 Table 3.--Weights (kg) and external body measurements deer, 1965. (continued) Date-Age-MeasurementsReEroductive Status Pelage Color (Munsell 1960) Dorsal Rostrum Interorbital Occipital Brisket Outer Thigh Umbilical (anterior) Front Knees Reprod.uctive Status Pregnant Lactating Quiescent (em) of 12 female mule 186 033 Collection No. 189 190 191 192 10 YR 8/1 10 YR 4/2 10 YR 4/3 10 YR 3/2 10 YR 7/4 10 YR 7/1 10 YR 8/6 10 YR 7.5/1 10 YR 6/1.5 10 YR 4/1 10 YR 2.5/1 10YR 5'.5/1 10 YR 6/1 10 YR 7.5/1 10 YR 8/1 10 YR 5/3 10 YR 5/1.5 10 YR 4/1 10 YR 6/3 10 YR 7/1 10 YR 9/6 10 YR 8/2 to YR 4/2 10 YR 5/2 10 YR 5/1 10 YR 6/3 10 YR 7/1 10 YR 7.5/6 10 YR 8/1 10 YR 5/1 10 YR 5.5/2 10 YR 5/1 10 YR 6.5/2 10 YR 7.5/1 10 YR 9/6 10 YR 8/2 10 'YR 4.5/2 10 YR 5/2 10 YR 5/1 10 YR 7/3 10 YR 8/1 10 YR 8/6 X X X X X X �i/ Table 4.--B1ood and tissue analyses of 6 male mule deer, 1965. Date-Est. Age-Wt. Ratio-Item Collection Date (!Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) EvisceratedWt/Body Length Ratio Degree of Blood Serum Hemolysis Erythrocyte Count (mi11ion/mrn3) Packed Cell Volume (%) Hemoglobin (g/100 m1) Leukocyte Counts (hundreds/mrn3) Differential Count (% of 100) Segmented Neutrophi1s Band Neutrophils Lymphocytes Monocytes Eosinophils Basophils Blood Salts Na (meq/liter) K (meq/liter) Ca (meq/liter) P (mg/l00 m1) Mg (meq/li ter) Blood Protein (g/100 ml) Blood Vitamin A (IU/100 m1) Blood Carotene (IU Provit A/100 m1) Liver Vitamin A (IU/g) Liver Carotene (IU/g) Adrenal Ascorbic Acid (ug/g) Femur Marrow Fat (%) Femur Marrow Moisture (%) Collection 182 2-17 0-8 .22 Slight 9.80 51 15.5 18.0 176 1-5 1-7 .26 Slight 8.71 46 16.6 33.0 178 1-19 8-7 .38 Severe 8.10 44 16.6 23.5 40 0 44 4 12 0 38 0 28 10 24 0 37 0 47 5 11 0 145 8.2 7.8 7.6 3.9 6.5 135 .•.. 0 450 420 1,310 92.1 8.7 160 7.9 8.2 7.2 5.9 6.7 145 Trace 800 390 950 66.7 29.9 140 7.5 7.7 8.9 3.8 5.3 145 0 520 770 1,040 81.1 14.7 No. 185 3-11 6-9 .37 Mod. 8.44 40 14.5 9.5 187 3-24 4-9 .31 Slight 7.89 ·41 16.6 12.0 188 3-31 0-9 .18 Mod. 10.00 64 44 0 46 4 6 0 25 0 85 15 0 0 42 0 36 20 2 0 155 7.9 6.8 6.0 4.6 3.3 . 145 Trace 750 800 835 48.9 46.1 140 130 7.2 7.9 7.7 7.9 8.1 10.4 2.4 3.7 4.5 5.0 140 145 Trace Trace 400 620 470 480 790 1,230 79.3 45.1 47.9 20.2 17.5 I\) \Jl \Jl �Table 5.--B1ood and tissue analyses of 13 female mule deer, 1965. Date-Est. Age- Wt. Ratio-Item 177 1-12 Collection Date (Month-Day) 0-7 Estimated Age (Year-Month) .21 Eviscerated Wt/Body Length Ratio Slight Degree of Blood Serum Hemo1ysi~ 8.50 Erythrocyte Count (mi11ions/mm ) 43 Packed Cell Volume (%) 15.3 Hemoglobin (g/lOO ml) 3 26.5 Leukocyte Counts (hundreds/mm ) Differential Counts (% of 100) 36 Segmented Neutrophils 0 Band Neutrophils 42 Lymphocytes 13 Monocytes 9 Eosinophils 0 Basophils Blood Salts 160 Na (meq/liter) 7.8 K (meq/liter) 7.9 Ca (Meq/liter) 9.0 P (mg/100 m1) 4.0 Mg (meq/liter) 5.1 Blood Protein (g/lOO m1) 135 Blood Vitamin A (IU/100 m1) Blood Carotene (IU Provit A/100 m1) 0 745 Liver Vitamin A (IU/g) 300 Liver Carotene (IU Provit A/g) 1,290 Adrenal Ascorbic Acid (ug/g) 68.6 Femur Marrow Fat (%) 26.1 Femur Marrow Moisture (%) 179 180 181 1-26 0-7 .20 Slight 8.20 46 17.1 25.5 2-3 1-8 .27 Mod. 8.80 50 17.6 31.5 2-10 6-8 .28 Mod. 9.25 57 21.0 26.0 40 5 37 14 1 0 38 1 40 9 12 0 49 0 35 6 10 0 150 155 165 7.6 7.9 8.4 8.0 8.1 7.6 5.9 7.6 6.7 4.9 5.1 3.7 6.9 6.1 5.9 165 170 145 Tract 0 Trace 990 1,020 900 600 400 380 1,140 980 890 84.1 88.6 66.3 9.7 9.2 27.3 Collection No. 183 032 2-11 0-8 - -~ - - - 71.8 24.9 184 186 033 189 2-24 8-8 .32 Trace 9.50 51 18.6 15.0 3-3 1-9 .26 Mod. 10.09 68 25.2 27.0 3-17 7-9 .24 None 9.83 49 22.3 20.0 3-25 8-9 .30 31.5 4-6 0-10 .19 Trace 9.25 45 15.7 l3 .5 19 0 49 14 18 0 24 1 60 5 10 0 20 56 16 4 4 29 0 50 11 8 2 24 2 42 24 8 0 135 7.5 7.8 9.2 3.6 7.1 145 0 680 830 815 91.7 6.9 135 7.8 7.6 6.8 4.5 5.9 130 Trace 450 910 1,070 86.8 11.5 160 7.7 7.4 7.3 2.8 6.3 150 Trace 550 320 990 87.6 11.3 0 8.50 48 - - - 740 970 550 90.7 7.5 140 7.4 8.4 8.8 2.9 5.0 140 Trace 380 570 965 64.7 29.5 ro \Jl 0'\ �Table 5.--Blood and tissue analyses of 13 female mule deer, 1965. (Continued) Date-Est. Age-Wt. Ratio-Item 190 Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt/Body Length Ratio Degree of Blood Serum Hemolysis Erythrocyte Count (millions/mm3) Packed Cell Volume (%) Hemoglobin (g/lOO ml) Leukocyte Counts (hundreds/mm3) Differential Counts (% of 100) Segmented Neutrophils Band Neutrophils Lymphocytes Monocytes Eosinophils Basophils Blood Salts Na (meq/liter) K (meq/liter) Ca (meq/liter) P (mg/100 ml) Mg (meq/liter) Blood Protein (g/lOO ml) Blood Vitamin A (IU/100 ml) Blood Carotene (IU Provit A/100 m1) Liver Vitamin A (IU/g) Liver Carotene (IU Provit A/g) Adrenal Ascorbic Acid (ug/g) Femur Marrow Fat (%) Femur Marrow Moisture (%) Collection No. 191 192 4-13 2-10 .24 Slight 8.95 48 17.6 23.0 4-20 4-10 .30 Mod.. 6.05 30 12.0 16.5 4-27 3-10 .30 Slight 11.25 63 21.6 23.5 44 24 40 o 46 6 4 o 140 7.6 6.5 7.3 2.9 5.8 155 Trace 420 430 705 79.6 18.7 o o 28 22 26 38 12 10 O· o 165 8.5 5.6 6.2 4.6 6.1 135 170 8.2 6.1 6.6 2.9 5.6 150 o 460 720 860 88.5 10.1 o 450 610 1,250 87.2 11.0 I\) \J1 -.;J �- 258 - Table 6.--Measurements (em), fresh weights (g), and volumes (cc), of organs and stomach content weights (g) of 6 male mule deer, 1965. Date-Age-Measurements 176 1-5 1-7 178 1-19 8-7 Collection No. 182 185 187 2-17 3-11 3-24 0-8 6-9 4-9 188 3-31 0-9 Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt/Body Length Ratio .26 .22 .38 .37 .31 .18 11.3 Brain Long. Dia. 12.1 11.0 10.6 12.4 12.4 Transverse Dia. 8.9 7.9 7.6 9.2 7.8 7.2 184 Wt 226 184 243 242 154 Vol. 220 152 181 236 240 152 3.10 2.90 Eyeball Long Dia. 3.27 3.26 3.36 3.10 2.90 (Left) Transverse Dia. 3.19 3.10 3.36 20.95 16.49 Wt 15.47 20.32 15.58 Vol. 20.34 15.12 15.79 19.35 15.11 3.34 Eyeball Long. Dia. 3.30 3.15 3.50 3.40 3.10 3.30 3.34 2.80 2.98 3.05 3.26 (Right)Transverse Dia. 21.64 15.27 19.39 19.22 15.72 Wt 14.25 21.01 Vol. 19.00 13 .67 14.96 18.74 15.25 508 472 461 324 256 Lung (Left) Wt 800 592 568 478 358 Lung (Right) Wt 10.8 18.1 17.5 16.2 16.2 12.5 Heart Long. Dia. 7.6 13.5 9.2 12.4 9.2 10.0 Transverse Dia. 350 662 562 248 550 414 Wt 556 240 347 642 530 401 Vo1~ 23.5 24.5 34.2 29.5 30.1 30.1 Liver Long. Dia. 15.4 16.7 15.0 18.5 18.7 17.5 Transverse Dia. 2.8 5.0 3.6 4.9 4.9 3.8 Height 1,498 668 1,348 826 1,570 1,172 Wt Vol. 1,414 624 785 1,367 1,255 1,116 6.60 9.46 8.50 9.00 7.26 8.30 Kidney Long. Dia. 4.30 3.35 3.40 5.50 4.50 4.30 (Left) Transverse Dia. 3.20 2.50 4.14 3.20 3.68 3.60 Height 140.0 112.0 56.4 124.0 62.0 100.0 Wt Vol. 136.0 108.0 53.4 60.0 118.9 97.0 6.80 7.00 8.70 8.38 9.75 8.45 Kidney Long. Dia. 3.30 3.60 5.25 5.10 4.46 4.70 (Right)Transverse Dia. 2.56 4.30 3.46 2.70 3.30 3.52 Height 124.0 58.2 138.0 120.0 82.0 94.0 Wt 91.6 120.0 57.2 Vol. 133.5 80.0 115.9 175 212 252 169 98 173 Spleen Wt 171 202 Vol. 241 163 95 168 4,070 6,710 4,150 10,310 7,560 10,340 Stomach Wt with Contents Rumen-Reticulum Wt with 7,170 9,420 3,760 9,450 5,940 3,720 Contents Rumen-Reticulum Contents 6,350 8,210 3,230 8,350 4,900 3,240 Wt (Wet) Rumen-Reticulum Contents 1,237 1,698 514 1,759 867 588 Wt (Oven-dry) Percent Moisture (Rumen+ 80.5 79.3 84.1 78.9 82.3 81.9 Reticulum Contents) �- 259 Table 7.--Measurements (em), fresh weights (g), and volumes (cc) of organs and stomach content weights (g) of 12 female mule deer, 1965. Oate-Age-Measurements 177 1-12 0-7 179 1-26 0-7 Collection No. 180 181 2-3 2-10 1-8 6-8 183 184 Collection Date (Month-Day) 2-24 3-3 Estimated Age (Year-Month) 8-8 1-9 Eviscerated Wt/Body Length Ratio .21 .20 .27 .28 .32 .26 Brain Long. Oia. 11.0 10.6 10.9 12.1 11.0 12.1 Transverse Dia. 7.3 7.3 6.9 6.1 6.7 8.2 Wt 175 198 200 188 242 200 Vol. 172 194 195 184 237 194 Eyeball Long. Oia. 2.90 2.80 3.28 3.46 3.40 3.10 (Left) Transverse Dia. 2.90 2.80 2.99 3.10 3.20 3.10 Wt 14.72 13.40 16.38 18.81 19.25 16.90 Vol. 14.18 13.03 15.79 18.18 18.47 16.22 Eyeball Long. Dia. 3.10 3.00 3.20 3.19 3.20 3.10 (Right)Transverse Oia. 2.99 2.70 3.20 3.19 3.20 3.10 Wt 14.50 13.05 16.32 17.42 18.95 17.05 Vol. 13.95 12.60 15.70 16.77 18.27 16.37 Lung (Left) Wt 314 292 309 393 324 Lung (Right) Wt 380 570 435 634 575 Heart Long. Oia. 11.1 12.4 12.5 15.9 15.5 14.2 Transverse Dia. 9.0 11.4 8.0 9.4 10.5 9.2 Wt 290 280 381 494 486 390 Vol. 280 272 310 474 473 375 Liver Long. Oia. 23.5 23.4 27.6 24.8 28.5 28.9 Transverse Oia. 13.8 12.4 15.6 16.7 16.1 10.9 Height 3.5 3.1 3.8 4.0 4.5 5.0 Wt 728 780 980 1,330 1,264 1,198 Vol. 691 726 909 1,269 1,219 1,128 Kidney Long. Dia. 6.95 7.13 7.50 7.40 8.50 7.25 (Left) Transverse Oia. 3.70 3.37 3.50 4.70 3.85 3.70 Height 2.96 2.60 3.00 4.10 2.98 3.30 Wt 71.0 70.0 64.0 116.0 86.0 89.0 Vol. 62.5 68.8 69.5 114.8 85.8 84.0 Kidney Long. Oia. 6.70 7.08 7.54 9.14 8.10 8.05 (Right)Transverse Dia. 4.10 3.09 2.70 4.40 3.60 3.50 Height 2.40 2.70 2.69 3.66 3.20 3.50 Wt 63.0 69.0 72.0 120.0 93.0 84.0 Vol. 59.5 66.0 70.3 112.0 179.8 92.7 Spleen Wt 224+ 116 129 262 161 132 Vol. 212 112 126 248 154 125 Stomach Wt with Contents 3,510 4,390 4,340 6,430 6,030 4,460 Rumen-Reticulum Wt IContents 3,090 4,080 3,960 5,870 5,350 3,910 Rumen-Reticulum Contents Wt (Wet) 2,550 3,610 3,300 5,160 4,460 3,290 Rumen-Reticulum Contents Wt (Oven-dry) 439 563 594 860 676 457 Percent Moisture (RumenReticulum Contents) 82.8 84.4 82.0 83.3 84.8 86.1 + Thick, large, blood engorged, spleen. �- 260 - Table 70 --Measurements (em), fresh weights (g), and.volumes (cc) of organs and stomach content weights (g) of 12 female mule deer, 1965. (continued) Date-Age-Measurements Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt/Body Length Ratio Brain Long. Dia. Transverse Diao Wt Vol. Eyeball Long. Dia. (Left) Transverse Dia. Wt Vol. Eyeball Long. Dia. (Right)Transverse Dia. Wt Vol. Lung (Left) wt. Lung (Right) Wto Heart Long Dia. Transverse Dia. Wt 186 3-17 7-9 033 3-25 8-9 Collection No. 189 190 4-6 4-13 0-10 2-10 191 4-20 4-10 192 4-27 3-10 .30 .30 .24 .19 .30 .24 11.3 11.3 11.0 11.7 11.2 11.2 7.0 7.8 8.2 7.9 8.2 7.8 207 191 202 188 219 200 200 188 197 183 215 194 3.36 3.30 3.32 3.09 3.30 3.30 -3.36 3.10 3.29 2.90 3.30 3.30 20.72 18.75 17.51 14.86 22.06 21.85 20.09 18.15 17 .03 21.42 21.09 14.35 3.30 3.25 3.35 2.80 3.50 3.25 3.30 3.00 3.35 2.80 3.50 3.25 20.32 18.95 17 .91 21.80 15.05 22.66 19.64 17.45 17.25 14.52 21.07 22.07 268 142 384 400 416 260 551 587 16.9 16.9 12.4 10.6 16.9 17.1 11.3 9.7 10.2 7.9 9.4 10.7 489 543 390 267 588 468 468 503 377 258 470 452 Vol. 28.9 25.7 29.5 25.5 28.0 29.5 Liver Long. Dia. 14.0 12.4 12.3 10.9 17.2 16.1 Transverse Dia. 5.1 5.8 4.2 2.9 405 5.0 Height 1,318 1,043 1,064 500 1,070 1,240 Wt 1,251 985 1,020 470 1,019 1,183 Vol. 7.90 7.35 7.86 6.00 8.30 7.87 Kidney Long. Dia. 4.55 4.60 4.28 2.65 4.80 4.10 (Left) Transverse Dia. 3.80 3.55 3.16 2.40 3.21 3.20 Height 86.0 90.0 41.0 87.0 100.0 135.0 wt 84.2 84.2 131.0 40.5 95.8 Vol. 8.44 7.90 7.99 6.40 8.46 7.86 Kidney Long. Dia. 4.88 4.60 5.70 2.67 4.40 4.30 (Right)Transverse Dia. 3.50 3.45 3.66 2.20 3.06 3.60 Height 88.0 96.0 88.0 45.0 100.0 130.0 Wt 86.2 85.2 .44.5 95.8 126.5 Vol. 162 251 168 75 159 136 Spleen Wt 154 219 166 74 152 131 Vol. 4,560 4,960 4,570 3,070 6,130 Stomach Wt with Contents 6,170 4,100 4,430 3,910 2,740 5,410 Rumen-Reticulum Wt IContents5,620 Rumen-Reticulum Contents 3,270 3,530 3,290 2,330 4,560 Wt (Wet) 4,820 Rumen-Reticulum Contents Wt 388 462 567 371 982 (Oven-dry) 779 Percent Moisture (Rumen88.1 86.9 82.8 84.1 78.5 Reticulum Contents) 83.8 �- 261 - Table 8.--Measurements (em), weight (g), and volumes (cc) of endocrine glands from 6 male mule deer, 1965. Date-Age-Measurements Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt/Body Length Ratio Adrenal Long. Dia. (Left) Transverse Dia. Height Dia. Wt Vol. Adrenal Long. Dia. (Right)Transverse Dia. Height Dia. Wt Vol. Thyroid Long. Dia. (Left) Transverse Dia. Height Dia. Wt Vol. Thyroid Long. Dia. (Right)Transverse Dia. Height Dia. Wt Vol. Thymus Long. Dia. (Left) Transverse Dia. Height Dia. Wt Vol. Thymus Long. Dia. (Right)Transverse Df.a, Height Dia. Wt Vol. Pituitary Long. Dia. Transverse Dia. Wt Vol. 176 1-5 1-7 178 1-19 8-7 Collection No. 182 185 2-17 3-11 0-8 6-9 187 3-24 4-9 188 3-31 0-9 .26 .31 .22 .37 .18 .38 2.40 3.20 2.60 2.60 3.19 2.02 1.40 1.30 1.70 1.40 1.35 1.55 0.40 0.49 0.70 0.70 0.40 0.65 1.48 1.67 3.57 3.37 2.66 2.13 1.46 1.98 1.60 3.32 2.63 3.12 2.10 3.00 2.20 2.00 2.60 2.70 1.16 1.35 1.70 1.60 1.55 1. 75 0.70 0.50 0.80 0.55 0.78 0.54 1.36 1.95 1.40 4.07 2.65 3.50 1.35 1. 79 1.37 3.94 2.57 3.30 3.45 4.09 3.14 5.65 4.20 4.81 1.67 1.00 1.33 0.90 1.80 0.80 0.38 0.50 0.30 0.61 0.47 0.50 1.02 1.58 3.47 0.82 4.74 2.00 1.85 1.38 0.99 3.13 0.81 4.44 2.99 3.80 2.64 4.36 3.70 7.89 1.21 1.40 1.00 2.01 0.90 2.05 0.30 0.67 0.25 0.49 0.40 0.46 1.87 1.96 0.80 3.47 0.96 3.46 1.81 0.78 3.32 0.95 3.07 1.65 11.90+ 3.18 5.30+ 6.70 - ++ 5.80 0.40 0.89 0.86 0.99 0.37 0.10 0.33 0.09 0.20 0.21 1.06 1.17 1.16 1.07 0.86 1.00 1.06 0.84 1.00 0.95 1.87 2.54 5.78 0.60 0.40 0.70 0.23 0.30 0.18 0.60 0.55 0.23 0.58 0.54 0.21 1.10 1.20 1.46 1.14 1.00 0.80 0.64 0.85 0.60 0.90 0.90 0.63 0.33 0.73 0.27 0.69 0.77 0.85 0.31 0.70 0.18 0.68 0.71 0.76 + Left and right portions of the gland could not be distinguished so the values given presumably incJude both portions. ++ Gland damaged by bul1et. �- 262 - Table 9.--Measurements (cm), weights (g), and volumes (cc) of endocrine glands from 12 female mule deer, 1965. Date-Age-MeasurementsReproductive Status 177 179 180 .Collection No. 181 183 184 2-24 3-3 2-10 2-3 1-26 1-12 Collection Date (Month-Day) 1-9 8-8 6-8 1-8 0-7 0-7 Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt/Body Length .26 .32 .28 .20 .27 .21 Ratio 3.00 3.40 2.90 3.89 2.60 2.55 Adrenal Long. Dia. 1.10 1.37 1.00 1.10 1.30 1.30 (Left) Transverse Dia. 0.46 0.60 0.58 0.49 0.49 0.48 Height Dia. 1.72 1.69 1.56 1.45 3.10 2.43 Wt 1.57 1.46 1.57 1.35 2.85 2.34 Vol. 2.65 2.90 2.86 2.68 2.20 2.30+ Adrenal Long. Dia. 1.35 1.70 1.40 1.10 1.15 1.20 (Right)Transverse Dia. 0.56 0.90 0.80 0.58 0.50 0.50 Height Dia. 1.83 1.72 1.37 1.35 3.86 2.48 Wt 1.55 1.60 1.32 3.53 2.40 1.25 Vol. 4.60 5.00 3.40 3.60 3.06 3.20 Thyroid Long.Dia. 1.12 1.40 1.40 1.50 0.80 0.85 (Left) Transverse Dia. 0.50 0.60 0.58 0.48 0.32 0.30 Height Dia. 1. 73 1. 98 2.46 1.02 2.52 0.90 Wt 1.44 1.72 2.23 2.45 0.89 0.97 Vol. 3.50 3.75 3.25 3.72 3.10 4.20 Thyroid Long. Dia. 1.36 1. 96 1.66 1.30 1.00 0.85 (Right)Transverse Dia. 0.40 0.49 0.60 0.40 0.40 0.44 Height Dia. 1.53 1.40 2.04 1.10 2.22 0.98 Wt 1.46 1.83 1.34 2.01 0.98 0.92 Vol. 6.78 4.70 -1+ 8.25 4.80 7.10 Thymus Long. Dia. 0.35 0.75 0.60 0.70 0.80 (Left) Transverse Dia. 0.20 0.20 0.21 0.20 0.30 Height Dia. 0.50 1.06 0.76 0.80 2.01 Wt 0.35 0.56 0.99 1.80 0.67 Vol. 6.50 4.05 1.30 5.30 4.80 Thymus Long. Dia. 0.50 0.72 0.63 0.62 0.90 (Right)Transverse Dia. 0.20 0.15 0.30 0.26 0.30 Height Dia. 0.49 0.58 0.65 1.77 0.33 Wt 0.32 0.54 0.58 1.72 0.27 Vol. 1.08 1.40 1.10 1.18 0.59 0.90 Pituitary Long Dia. 0.50 0.90 0.70 0.66 0.40 0.50 Transverse Dia. 0.31 0.76 0.41 0.42 0.28 0.39 Wt 0.25 0.72 0.40 0.39 0.23 0.32 Vol. Reproductive Status Pregnant X X X X Lactating Quiescent X X + A discrete tissue body, 1.1 x 0.6 x 0.4 cm, possibly a lymph node in close proximity. -1+ Gland damaged by bullet. �- 263 - Table 9.--Measurements (cm), weights (g), and volumes (cc) of endocrine glands from 12 female mule deer, 1965. (continued) Date-Age-MeasurementsReproductive Status Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt/Body Length Ratio Adrenal Long. Dia. (Left) Transverse Dia. Height Dia. Wt Vol. Adrenal Long. Dia. (Right)Transverse Dia. Height Dia. Wt Vol. Thyroid Long. Dia. (Left) Transverse Dia. Height Dia. Wt Vol. Thyroid Long. Dia. (Righ.t)Transverse Dia. Height Dia. Wt Vol. Thymus Long. Dia. (Left) Transverse Dia. Height Dia. Wt Vol. Thymus Long. Dia. (Right)Transverse Dia. Height Dia. Wt Vol. Pituitary Long. Dia. Transverse Dia. Wt Vol. Reproductive Status Pregnant Lactating Quiescent 186 033 CoHection No. 189 190 191 192 3-17 7-9 3-25 8-9 4-6 0-10 4-13 2-10 4-20 4-10 4-27 3-10 .24 2.80 1.37 0.70 2.44 2.16 2.56 1.50 0.79 2.45 2.29 5.20 1.10 0.40 1.85 1.51 4.40 1.46 0.50 2.02 1.92 4.50 0.70 0.16 0.76 0.63 3.30 0.65 0.45 0.56 0.46 1.06 1.06 0.68 0.49 .30 2.90 1.30 0.55 2.90 2.85 2.80 1.40 0.70 2.95 2.79 3.45 1.40 0.40 1.95 1.88 3.10 1.50 0.58 1.97 1.91 8.50 0.57 0.15 1.01 0.99 7 .50 1.40 0.20 2.35 2.31 1.20 1.10 0.90 0.89 .19 2.20 1.10 0.56 1.20 1.18 2.00 0.98 0.70 1.20 1.13 3.35 0.90 0.40 1.01 1.00 2.36 0.99 0.40 0.85 0.84 3.50 0.50 0.20 0.53 0.52 3.00 0.80 0.20 0.74 0.73 0.78 0.69 0.27 0.25 .24 2.80 1.53 0.67 2.16 2.06 2.33 1.39 0.92 2.09 1.94 5.20 1.00 0.40 1.27 1.12 4.60 1.30 0.60 1.53 1.38 7.23 0.35 0.13 0.42 0.36 6.05 0.55 0.15 0.72 0.59 0.92 0.83 0.34 0.32 .30 2.64 1.50 0.70 2.75 2.65 2.46 1.51 1.00 2.67 2.62 4.45 0.99 0.30 1.20 1.03 4.22 1.30 0.40 1.50 1.41 6.60 1.10 0.30 0.88 0.74 5.20 0.78 0.20 0.81 0.69 1.00 0.80 0.56 0.55 .30 3.34 1.14 0.60 3.20 3.00 3.50 1.34 0.36 2.77 2.74 4.10 1.10 0.40 1.53 1.41 4.30 0.84 0.35 1.27' 1.26 9.08 0.70 0.25 1.11 1.07 4.00 0.55 0.40 0.85 0.83 1.12 0.96 0.67 0.66 x x x x x x �- 264 Table 10.--Measurements deer, 1965. (rom)of teeth and mandibles from 6 male and 12 female mule Sex-Date-Age-Measurement 176 178 C.o11ection No. 182 185 187 188 1-5 1-7 1-19 8-7 2-17 0-8 3-11 6-9 3-24 4-9 3-31 0-9 Length of Tooth Rows: Maxillary premolar-molar (Left) 69.4 Maxillary premolar-molar (Right) 69.0 Maxillary molar only (Left) 33.1 Maxillary molar only (Right) 32.9 Mandibular premolar-molar (Left) 84.7 Mandibular premolar-molar (Right) 84.2 Mandibular molar only (Left) 52.1 51.8 Mandibular molar only (Right) Length of Left Mandibular Diastema 69.4 Length of Left Ramus 216 80.5 80.0 45.2 45.2 87.7 86.9 53.3 53.6 77.8 247 55.0 55.1 16.8 16.9 53.2 53.8 16.2 16.4 88.8 89.2 50.8 51.2 96.0 93.7 60.0 58.3 76.2 252 87.0 86.8 50.9 50.7 95.3 94.9 60.8 61.0 72.6 241 57.7 57.6 17 .4 17.6 53.0 52.6 16.8 16.6 61.9 189 Female: 177 179 180 181 183 184 Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (year-Month) 1.,.12 0-7 1-26 0-7 2-3 1-8 2-10 6-8 2-24 8-8 3-3· 1-9 Length of Tooth Rows: Maxillary premolar-molar (Left) 57.0 Maxillary premolar-molar (Right) 57.4 Maxillary molar only (Left) 17.5 Maxillary molar only (Right) 17.6 Mandibular premolar-molar (Left) 55.4 Mandibular premolar-molar (Right) 55.4 Mandibular molar only (Left) 17.0 17.1 Mandibular molar only (Right) Length of Left Mandibular Diastema 59.4 188 Length of Left Ramus 55.5 55.8 16.5 16.3 53.8 54.4 15.1 16.3 65.1 187 70.5 70.9 33.2 33.3 85.7 85.3 48.8 48.8 62.3 216 77.9 78.3 44.9 44.8 82.4 82.8 50.0 50.7 72.0 230 82.5 82.2 46.9 46.5 90.1 92.3 55.3 56.9 74.3 229 69.6 69.5 33.7 33.8 80.4 81.6 48.6 48.0 63.7 211 Female: 186 033 189 190 191 192 Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) 3-17 7-9 3-25 8-9 4-6 0-10 4-13 2-10 4-20 4-10 4-27 3-10 82.3 82.3 84.2 84.2 58.0 58.0 85.8 85.7 82.8 84.2 85.9 85.6 Male: Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Length of Tooth Rows: Maxillary premolar-molar Maxillary premolar-molar + Jaw broken in transport. (Left) (Right) -+ -+ �- 265 - Table 10.--Measurements (mm) of teeth and mandibles from 6 male and 12 female mule deer, 1965. (continued) Sex-Date-Age-Measurement 186 033 Co llection No. 189 190 191 192 Maxillary molar only (Left) 46.4 Maxillary molar only (Right) 47.2 Mandibular premolar-molar (Left) 88.0 Mandibular premolar-molar (Right) 88.9 Mandibular molar only (Left) 55.2 Mandibular molar only (Right) 55.2 Length of Left Mandibular Diastema 67.0 Length of Left 222 , Ramus 47.7 48.1 90.5 89.8 55.8 56.0 75.8 235 17.9 18.1 55.1 54.3 16.9 17.3 62.4 187 47.8 48.7 88.6 89.5 53.9 55.9 69.8 229 51.5 51.3 92.4 94.3 59.8 59.9 66.6 223 Female: (continued) 49.8 49.3 93.9 93.5 58.8 58.6 62.9 223 �- 266 - Table l1.--Indices of relative fatness and bone structure in 6 male, and 12 female mule deer, 1965. Sex-Date-Age-Index 176 178 1-5 1-7 .26 6.2 1-19 8-7 .38 13.9 'Collection No. 182 185 187 188 3-11 6-9 .37 10.8 3-24 4-9 .31 8.5 3-31 0-9 .18 6.5 o 0 Male: Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt/Body Length Ratio Total Kidney Fat Index (%)+ Depth of Back Fat (rom)+ Femur Marrow Fat (%)++ Femur Marrow Co1or* Femur Marrow Texture*Percent Fat, Skinned, Evisc. Carcass** Condition Ratio A+~'<' Condition Ratio Bi<+ Metacarpal Length (rom) Width (rom) Fresh Wt. (g) Percent of Brain Wt. Female: Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt. /Body Length Ratio Total Kidney Fat Index (%)+ + Depth of Back Fat (rom) Femur Marrow Fat (%)-++ Femur Marrow Co1or* Femur Marrow Texture*Percent Fat, Skinned, Evisc. carcasss= Condition Ratio A+* Condition Ratio B*+ Metacarpal Length (rom) Width (rom) Fresh Wt. (g) Percent of Brain Wt. 2-17 0-8 .22 20.9 o o o 92.1 5R7/10 66.7 5R8/10 81.1 5R6/10 3 2 3 4.0 .25 2.30 206 18.0 93 50.5 5.7 .79 5.27 233 20.0 124 54.9 6.4 1.34 10.87 194 16.6 73 39.7 177 179 180 1-12 0-7 .21 13.4 0 68.6 5R6/12 3 1-26 0-7 .20 19.4 0 66.3 5R6/12 2-10 2-24 3-3 2-3 6-8 1-9 1-8 8-8 .32 .26 .27 .28 12.1 20.3 34.1 44.0 0 1 5 5 91.7 86.8 84.1 88.6 5R7/8 5R9/4 5R7/10 5R9/4 3 3 3 3 5.7 .76 5.21 185 15.3 68 38.9 6.6 1.28 8.49 190 15.8 71 35.9 6.9 3.04 26.93 211 17.4 92 46.0 o 48.9 79.3 5R5.5/10 5R10/1 2 2 45.1 5R4/10 3.4 .37 1.81 227 20.3 122 50.2 1.3 .11 .87 220 19.1 112 46.3 3.1 .20 .90 194 15.3 73 47.4 181 183 184 6.2 1.26 10.60 207 16.2 86 45.7 6.9 2.35 21.55 216 18.3 103 42.6 o 9.0 1.09 9.46 213 16.7 83 41.5 �- 267 - Table l1.--Indices of relative fatness and bone structure in 6 male, and 12 female mule deer, 1965. (continued) 186 033 Collection No. 189 190 191 192 3-17 7-9 ~24 10.6 3 87.6 5R9/6 3-25 8-9 .30 31.0 4-6 0-10 .19 12.7 4-13 2-10 .24 18.8 4-20 4-10 .30 11.3 2 o 0 88.5 5R9/2 4-27 3-10 .30 14.9 1 87.2 5R8/6 3 3 205 17 .3 85 44.5 4.3 .64 5.58 210 17.6 99 47.8 Sex-Date-Age-Index Female: (continued) Collection Date (Month-day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt/Body Length Ratio Total Kid.ney Fat Index (%)+ Depth of Back Fat (rom)+ Femur Marrow Fat (%)++ Femur Marrow Co1or* Femur Marrow Texture*Percent Fat, Skinned, Evisc. Carcass** Condition Ratio A+* Condition Ration B~\"+ Metacarpal Length (rom) Width (rom) Fresh Wt. (g) Percent of Brain Wt. 90.7 3 9.6 1.02 8.94 199 16.5 76 38.0 64.7 79.6 5R4.5/10 5R6/10 1 3 1.7 .22 211 17.8 98 44.7 1.42 190 14.7 62 33.0 3.5 .66 5.25 205 17.2 78 38.6 o + Modified from Riney (1955). ++ (Assn. Agric. Chern. 1960). * (Munsell 1929-60). *_ 0 _ gelatinous; 1 - slightly greasy; 2 - soft greasy but not waxy; 3 - firm and waxy modified from Riney (1955). ** (Behnke 1962). +* Product of 0.1 fat percentages of total kidney and skinned, eviscerated carcass. *+ Product of 0.1 fat percentages of total kidney, skinned, eviscerated carcass, and femur marrow. �- 268 - Table 12.--Seasonal flucuations in total kidney and femur marrow fat percentages sampled from mule deer of all ages, Cache la Poudre drainage, 1961-65. Percent Fat2 Total Kidne:y+ Season Sex No. in SamEle Dec.-Jan. Feb. Male Female 22 26 13.1 35.0 4.2 - 28.2 8.4 - 91.4 10.4 - 15.7 28.3 -41.8 9.8 - 16.3 26.9 - 43.1 8.7 - 17.4 24.0 - 46.0 Mar.-Apr. May Male Female 22 34 6.5 14.0 1.5 - 13.7 2.9 - 37.7 5.5 - 7.5 11.5 16.6 - 5.3 - 7.7 10.9 - 17.2 4.9 - 8.2 9.9 - 18.2 June-July August Male Female 20 30 16.6 9.8 1.0 - 71.1 3.2 - 28.7 9.1 - 24.2 7.9 - 11.7 7.5 - 25.7 7.5 - 12.1 4.2 - 29.1 6.7 - 12.9 Sept. -Oct. Male Nov. Female 21 19 49.2 39.9 11.8 -123.7 7.3 -107.8 36.4 - 61.9 29.2 - 50.7 33.8 - 64.6 26.9 - 53.0 28.2 - 70.2 22.1 - 57.8 Mean Range 90% Confidence Interval 95% 99% Percent Fat 2 Femur Marrow*' Dec.-Jan. Feb. Male Female 22 27 74.0 89.1 40.0 - 92.1 66.3 97.0 68.6 - 79.5 91.7 86.5 67.5 - 80.6 85.9 92.2 65.1 - 83.0 84.8 .: 93.4 Mar.-Apr. May Male Female 23 33 33.2 69.9 2.5 - 79.3 10.0 - 93.5 24.4 - 41. 9 62.6 - 77.3 22.6 - 43.7 61.1 - 78.8 18.8 - 46.5 58.1 - 81.8 June-July August Male Female 15 25 60.2 52.9 16.8 - 94.1 10.9 - 89.1 47.4 - 72.9 43.9 - 61.8 44.7 - 75.6 42.1 - 63.6 38.6 - 81.6 38.2 - 67.5 Sept. -Oct. Male Nov. Female 18 17 85.3 83.6 51.7 - 94.3 48.8 - 94.3 81.0 - 89.7 78.4 - 88.8 80.1 - 90.6 77.3 - 89.9 78.2 - 92.5 74.9 - 92.3 + Riney 1955:433 modified * Ether extract - gravimetric �- 269 - Table 13.--Fatty acid methyl esters of femur marrow fat from 3 male and 3 female mule deer. Date-Sex-Age-Variate Collection Date Sex Estimated Age (Year-Month) Percent by Weight:* Laurate Myristate Myristo1eate Palmitate Pa1mitoleate Stearate Oleate Lino1eate Lino1enate Percent Femur Marrow Fat+ Percent Femur Marrow Moisture+ 169 11-4-64 F 3-5 170 11-10-64 M 2-5 Collection No. 173 175 187 192 12-8-64 12-23-64 3-24-65 4-27-65 F M M F 8-6 2-6 4-9 3-10 0.4 2.1 0.5 36.0 0.4 2.2 0.5 38.5 0.4 2.2 0.6 41.6 0.4 1.9 0.4 35.7 0.4 2.1 0.4 31.4 0.4 2.0 0.5 39.4 0.8 32.5 25.2 0.6 0.3 0.8 31.2 24.2 0.5 0.2 0.8 29.0 23.6 0.5 0.3 0.8 21.2 37.2 0.7 0.2 0.6 25.6 38.0 0.5 0.2 0.8 30.7 24.3 0.6 0.3 93.1 5.7' 88.9 9.1 91.4 6.6 80.1 16.5 79.3 20.2 87.2 11.0 * Prepared from pure fatty acids (Rogozinski 1964); each value is an average of 3 samples and calculated. according to (Moore et al 1964). + (Assn. Agric. Chemists 1960). ------- �- 270 - Table 14.'--Percent fat of 18 skinned, eviscerated mule deer carcasses as estimated by chemical analysis and densitometry. Call. No. 174 Call. Date 12-15-64 Sex 175 12-23-64 M 6.0 3.9 -2.1 176 1-5-65 M 5.7 4.0 -1.7 178 1-19-65 M 4.8 5.7 182 2-17-65 M 4.9 6.4 0.9 1.5 185 3-11-65 M 5.2 3.4 -1.8 187 3-24-65 M 3.3 1.3 -2.0 188 3-31-65 M 3.4 3.1 -0.3 177 1-12-65 F 5.6 5.7 0.1 179 1-26-65 F 5.7 6.6 0.9 180 2-3-65 F 7.1 6.9 -0.2 181 2-10-65 F 6.2 6.2 0.0 183 2-24-65 F 7.6 6.9 -0.7 184 3-5-65 F 5.8 9.0 3.2 186 3-17-65 F 5.8 9.6 3.8 189 4-6-65 F 3.6 1.7 -1.9 190 4-13-65 F 6.8 3.5 -3.3 192 4-27-65 F 6.0 4.3 -1.7 -x 5.54 5.22 0.32 SD 1.19 2.26 c.v. (%) 21.4 43.2 M Percent Carcass Fat Ether-Extract+ Densitometry 6.2 5.7 95% Confidence Limits Lower 4.34 Upper 6.74 + Each value is the result of one analysis. 2.94 7.50 Difference -0.5 �- 271 - About 39,400 measurements of selected hematological, physiologicai, and morphological characteristics of 225 mule d.eer have been made and tabulated during the course of this study. It is planned that the continuing review of literature begun in 1960 on mammalian physiology and morphology will be intensified and brought up to date so that these data may be adequately analyzed and interpreted. Specific analytical procedures have not yet been adopted. In general terms, however, histograms and scatter diagrams will be used initially to investigate relationships and some of the more obvious values described statistically. The analysis of variance and covariance, time series, and mUltiple regression will be employed on appropriate portions of the final analyses. It is estimated that the final review of literature will take about 6 months and programming of the data for computer analysis, another 10-12 months. LITERATURE CITED Anderson,A. E. 1962. Physical characteristics. pp. 253-299. In 1962 Quarterly Report, Part 2. Work Plan 5, Job 1 Completion Report. W-105-R. Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Dept., Denver, Colorado. (processed) Anderson, A. E. 1964. Physical characteristics. pp. 189-238. In 1964 Quarterly Report. Work Plan 5, Job 1 Completion Report. W-l05-R. Colorado Game, Fish, and Parks Dept., Denver, Colorado. (processed) Association of Official Agricultural Chemists. 1960. Official methods of analyses. Ninth Ed., Wash. D. C. 832 pp. Baird Associates. n. d. Flame photometer manual. Third Ed., Chambridge, Mass. Behnke, A. R. 1961. Conment on the determination of whole body density and a resume of body composition data. pp. 118-133. In J. Brozek and A. Henschel, (Eds.) Techniques for measuring body composition. Nat'l. Acad. Sciences Nat'l. Res. Council, Wash. D. C. vi + 300 pp. Brown, E. R. 1961. The black-tailed deer of western Washington. No. 13. Washington State Game Dept., Olympia, 124 pp. Biol. Bull Browning, B. M. and E. M. Lauppe. 1964. Deer study in a redwood-Douglas .forest. Calif. Fish and Game 50(3):132-147. fir Bischoff, A. 1. 1954. Limitations on the bone marrow technique in d.etermining malnutrition in deer. Proc. Annual Conference, Western Assn. Game and Fish Commissioners 34:205-210. Cook, B. B., L. E. Witham, M. Olmstead, and A. F. Morgan. 1949. The influence of seasonal and other factors on the acceptability and food value of the meat of two subspecius of California d.eer and of antelope. Hilgardia 19(8):265-284. Dann, W. J. and K. A. Evelyn. 1938. Determination of vitamin A with the photoelectric colorimeter. Biochemistry J. 32(6):1008-1017. �- 272 - LITERATURE CITED (continued) Gornell, A. G., C. J. Burdawill and M. M. David. 1949. Determination of serum proteins by means of buiret reaction. J. BioI. Chern. 177(2):751-766. Hepler, o. E. 1958. Manual of clinical laboratory methods. C. C. Thomas, Springfield, Illinois, 387 pp. Kitson, R. E. and M. G. Mellon. 1944. Colorimetric determination of phosphorous as molybdivanadophosphoric acid. Indust. and Engr. Chemistry, Analytical Ed. 16(6):379-383. Lewis, L. L. and L. M. Melnick. 1960. Determination of calcium and magnesium wi th (ethylene dinitrilo) tetracetic acid. Analytical Chern. 32 (1):38-42. Maickel, R. P. 1960. A rapid procedure for the determination of adrenal ascorbic acid. Application of the Sullivan.and Clarke method to tissues. Analytical Biochemistry 1(6):498-501. Medin, D. E. 1962. Climatic environment. pp. l69-l85~ In 1962 Quarterly Report, Part 2. Work Plan 3, Job 1, Completion Report. W-l05-R. Colorado Game, Fish, and Parks Dept., Denver. (processed) • 1964. Climatic environment. pp. 131-145. In 1964 Game Research -----Report, January, Work Plan 3, Job 1 Completion Report. W-l05-R. Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Dept., Denver. (processed) 1965. Climatic environment. pp. 1-15. In 1965 Game Research Report, January, Work Plan 3, Job 1, Completion Report. W-l05-R. Colorado Game, Fish, and Parks Dept., Denver. (processed) . __________ 0 _________ • 1966. Climatic environment. In 1966 Game Research Report, January, Work Plan 3, Job 1, Completion Report. W-l05-R. Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Dept., Denver. (processed) Moore, J. L., T. Richardson, and C. H. Amundson. 1964. Relative response of flame ionization detector to short and long chain fatty acid methyl esters. J. Gas Chromatography October, 318-319. Munsell, A. H. 1929, 1960. Munsell book of color~ pocket edition. Munsell Color Co., Inc., Baltimore, Md. Riney, T. 1955. Evaluating condition of free-ranging red deer (Cervus elaphus) with special reference to New Zealand. N. Z. J. Science and Tech., Sec. B. 36:429-463. Robinette, W. L., D. A. Jones, G. Rogers, J. S. Gashwiler. 1957. Notes on tooth development and wear for Rocky Mountain mule deer. J. wildl. Mgmt. 21 (2):134-153. �- 273 LITERATURE CITED (continued) Rogozinski, M. 1964. A rapid quantitative esterification acids. J. Gas Chromatography April:136-l37. . technique for carboxylic Taber, R. D. and R. F. Dasmann. 1958. The black-tailed deer of the chaparral, its life history and management in the north coast range of California. Game Bull. No.8. California Dept. Fish and Game, Sacramento, 163 pp. Taber, R. D., K. L. White, N. S. Smith, n.d. The annual cycle of condition in the Rattlesnake, Montana mule deer. Pr oc , Montana Acad. Sci. 19:72-79. Prepared by: Date: Allen E. Anderson Associate Wildlife Researcher ~J~an~u~a~ry~,~1~9~6~6 _ Approved by :__ -=:;D.::e.::a:.:.:n:....=E:..:..-Z _ Project Leader Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator ��- 275 - JOB COMPLETION RESEARCH State of REPORT PROJECT SEGMENT COLORADO ------~~~~~----------------An Ecological Investigation of the Cache la Poudre Deer Herd, Colorado Project No. W-l05-R-6 Work Plan No. Physiological 5 --------~------------~ Studies Reproductive Studies Job No. 2 Period Covered: Personnel: January, 1965 - December, Allen E. Anderson 1965 and Dean E. Medin ABSTRACT Selected measurements, weights, and volumes of portions of the reproductive tracts of 6 male and 12 female mule deer and external body measurements, fresh and fixed weights 'and fresh volumes of 14 prenatal young collected through April, 1965 are tabulated chronologically. The 1964 ovulation and fetal rates based on 9 breeding age females were 1.67 and 1.56, respectively. There was a 6.7 percent loss of ova. As estimated from the approximate growth curves of prenatal young, the conception dates (1960-64) of 50 litters ranged from November 17 to February 7. Twenty-nine (58 percent) of these conception dates occurred between November 25 and December 8. The 50 litters yielded 43 prenatal young from each uterine horn. Sex could not be determined on 15 and the male:female ratio of the remaining 71 was 103:100 which does not differ significantly (P-s....05) from equality. Of the 50 litters, 30 percent consisted of singletons, 68 percent twins, and 2 percent triplets. The status of the laboratory work is described. Comparative data on breeding season dates of other migratory mule deer herds are presented. Acknowledgements: Miss Florence Fields, Medical Technologist (ASCP) M.S. weighed, determined volumes, and measured most of the gonads. Student Assistant Doyle Markham performed these duties on two deer. Miss Fields also prepared the gonads for both macroscopic and microscopic examination. Mr. K. A. Porter assisted in the field and laboratory on most of the 1965 deer collections. Wildlife Researcher Candidate G. D. Bear and U. S. Forest Service District Ranger J. Cameron assisted on one deer collection each. �- 276 - Recommendations: Complete reproductive data. the laboratory work and begin the final analyses of all Objectives: Determine the reproductive pattern of the deer herd to provide data on: (a) morphology of the reproductive organs as related to age and season, and (b) tentatively, the relationship of productivity to measured factors of the environment. These are fully described in Anderson (1962:-271-274) and Anderson Only brief mention, therefore, will be made of major procedures but specialized terminology will be defined. Procedures: (1965:165-193). From January 7 to April 27, 1965, 6 males and 12 females were shot at approximate weekly intervals. This included one special collection (033) on which all reproductive data were obtained. All deer were assigned to age classes on the basis of tooth replacement and molar wear criteria (Robinette ~~. 1957) and by assuming a June birth date. The gross morphology of portions of their fresh reproductive tracts were studied in the laboratory. Female reproductive tracts were measured according to Sears (1955) as depicted schematically in Figure 1. Following measurement, reproductive tracts of each sex were fixed in AFA and preserved in 80 percent alcohol for further study. Ovaries were embedded in celloidin and sliced longitudinally by hand at 1 mm intervals for macroscopic counts of corpora lutea according to the criteria of Cheatum (1949). Testicular tissue was cut from one end of each testis and prepared for histological study. Mean diameters of 11 seminiferous tubules from each testis were measured microscopically with a calibrated ocular micrometer. The following (1) terms are defined fetal rate (2) ovulation (3) percent = according to Robinette total prenatal young total females of breeding rate ~~. (1955). age = total current corpora lutea of pregnancy total females of breeding age loss of ova pregnancy The ages of prenatal young were estimated in days from the growth curves of hind foot length, forehead-rump length, forehead-rump/body weight ratio, and ear auricles as developed by Hudson and Browman (1959). The midpoint of the extreme values was chosen as the best estimate of age. Conception dates were estimated by back-dating this number of days from the collection date. Because of greatly reduced hunting pressure and kill, it has not been possible to secure adequate samples of female reproductive tracts (for counts of corpora luteal during the big game season. Therefore, no attempt was made in 1965 to obtain hunter-donated tracts. Counts of corpora lutea from this soutce (1961-64) have been summarized previously (Anderson 1966). �." 277 - Ven~ral Vlew (Bladder Removed) 1f--_7 _ 6 INDEX Measurement 1. uterine Horns Left Right 2. Uterlne 'Body Median Septum True 3. Vagina 4. Cervix Measurement No. Diameters, Lpngitudlnal Transversi 3 4 1 2 5 10 6 9 7 8 Figure 1. Sch,ematic diagram of female reproductIve tract showin9 measurements being taken as modified from Sears (1955). ��- 279 - REPRODUCTIVE STUDIES Allen E. Anderson Findings: Analyses of Female Material Counts of corpora 1utea, 1965.--These values and the numbers of prenatal young of 12 mule deer are presented chronologically in Table 1. The chief value of this assemblage lies in its inc 1usion with similar data from about 91 other females obtained since April 13, 1961. Small sample sizes will not permit valid comparisons of annual corpora 1utea or fetal counts. In 1965, the 9 females of reproductive age were all pregnant yielding an ovulation rate of 1.67 and a fetal rate of 1.56. Reproductive tract morphology, 1965.--The individual measurements of the ovaries and reproductive tracts from 12 deer are shown chronologically in Table 2. Again, the chief value of these data will be its inclusion with the total sample. Morphology of prenatal young, 1965.--Individua1 measurements of 14 prenatal young resulting from the 1964 breeding season are given in Table 3. Fresh weights of young ranged from 7.2 g to 1,462 g and estimated ages from 58 to 146 days. Prenatal young sex ratios and litter sizes, 1960-65.--There were 86 young examined from 50 litters (Table 4). Chi square analysis indicated the sex ratio (103:100) of 71 prenatal young did not differ significantly (P~.05) from equality. The remaining 15 were not sufficiently developed for positive sex determination. Singletons comprised 30 percent, twins 68 percent, and triplets 2 percent of the 50 litters. Estimated conception dates, 1960-64.--These ranged from November 17 to February 7 (Table 5). Within this range, 96 percent of the conception dates occurred between November 17 and December 22, and 58 percent between November 25 and December 8. Analyses of Male Material Measurements, weights, and volumes of fresh testes and prostate gland weights of 6 mule deer are given in Table 6. These data will be incorporated with that from about 83 additional males and presented on a monthly and seasonal basis in future reports. Discussion: The gross histology of the seminiferous tubules from the 1964-65 material has not yet been described. Some laboratory work, however, has been completed or is in progress. Mrs. Catherine Short, a graduate student at Stephen F. Austin State College, Nacogdoches, Texas has completed the laboratory work on a morphological study of fetal development involving both hard and soft tissues using the 86 prenatal young collected, weighed, measured, and preserved �Table 1.--Counts of pigmented corpora 1utea scars of pregnancy, the current corpora 1utea of pregnancy, and prenatal young from 12 mule deer collected during 1965. ce.n , cci i , Date No. Month Day Est. Age Year Month Pigmented CQrEora Lutea+ Left Right No. Diam"~ No. Df am= Total 177 179 180 181 1 1 2 2 12 26 3 10 0 0 1 6 7 7 8 8 0 0 0 0 183 184 186 033 2 3 3 3 24 3 17 25 8 1 7 8 8 9 9 9 1 0 0 1 189 190 191 4 4 4 6 13 20 0 2 4 10 10 10 0 0 1 192 4 27 3· 10 0 Totals 3 -- ---1.57 --1.57 -- 0 0 0 2 1 0 1 1 ---1.57 2.0? 1.0? -1.57 1.0? Current CQr20ra Lutea Left Right No. Diam''( No. Dd arrr= Total 0 0 1 2 2 0 1 2 1 0 1 0 -8.0 8.0 -- 0 1 2 7.5 1 -1.5 ? 0 0 0 --- O· -- I 0 1 0 ~- 0 -- 0 1 8 7 5 -- 0 0 0 2 0 -- 7.5 7.0 8.5 6.5 -- -- -- 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 2 -- 0 0 Prenatal Young L Total R 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 2 1 0 0 1 2 1 1 2 --- 2 6.0 6.5 2 1 7.5 8.0 2 1 1 1 1 0 2 2 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 2 2 2 0 1 1 15 8 6 14 -- -- 7.0 6.0 7.5 7.0 8 Ovulation Rate 1.67 current corpora 1utea of pregnancy per breeding age female. Fetal Rate 1.56 prenatal young per current corpora 1utea of pregnancy. I I Note: A question mark indicates uncertainty as to correct identification of ovarian structure. + The corpora a1bicantia of some authors; Davis and Golley (1963) and Na1bandov (1964). * Average diameter in mm of 2 maximum measurements at right angles to each other. ro CO 0 �Table 2.--Measurements (cm), fresh weights 12 mule deer, 1965. (g), and volumes (cc), of ovaries and reproductive Date-Age- Wt Ratio-Item Collection No. 180 181 177 179 Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt/Body Length Ratio 1-12 0-7 .21 1-26 0-7 .20 2-3 1-8 .27 Ovary (Left) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Ovary (Right)Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt 'Vo1 Reproductive Tract+ Uterine Horn (Left) Long Diam (3) Trans Diam (4) Uterine Horn (Right)Long Diam (1) Trans Diam (2) Vagina Long Diam (6) Trans Diam (7) Cervix Long Diam (9) Trans Diam (8) Uterine Body True Length (10) Median Septum Length (5) Wt with Prenatal Youn~( Wt without Prenatal Young* 1.86 1.14 0.80 0.86 0.73 1.90 1.20 0.50 1.15 0.96 1.40 0.63 0.40 0.49 0.37 1.56 0.81 0.40 0.53 0.38 3.5 1.0 3.5 1.0 11.0 2.5 3.0 1.0 + Sears (1955) and Figure 1. * Wt without bladder. tracts of 183 184 2-10 6-8 .28 2-24 8-8 .32 3-3 1-9 .26 1.40 1.20 0.90 0.97 0.96 1.30 1.00 0.50 0.52 0.39 2.29 1.48 0.65 2.24 2.04 1.60 1.60 0.60 1.26 1.07 2.70 1.80 0.75 2.49 2.33 2.60 1.63 0.90 2.50 2.40 1.20 0.90 0.30 0.33 0.27 1.68 1.05 0.70 0.73 0.72 3.0 0.8 2.5 1.0 11.0 2.0 3.5 1.0 13 .5 8.0 9.5 5.5 l3.5 2.5 5.5 1.5 21.0 10.5 21.0 11.0 18.0 2.5 5.5 2.0 26.5 13.0 23.0 12.0 21.0 3~0 8.0 2.0 15.5 10.0 10.5 6.0 14.0 2.0 5.5 1.5 1.0 2.5 0.7 3.0 36 22 1.5 10.5 610 603 5.0 8.0 2.5 25.0 12.0 16.5 1,320 2,420 3,530 3,110 1,222 2,206 ro 0:> I-' �Table 2.--Measurements (cm), fresh weights (g), and volumes (cc), of ovaries and reproductive 12 mule deer, 1965, (continued). Date-Age-Wt Ratio-Item Collection No. 189 190 186 033 Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt/Body Length Ratio 3-17 7-9 .24 3-25 8-9 .30 4-6 0-10 .19 Ovary (Left) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol Ovary (Right)Long Diam Trans, Diam Height Diam Wt "Vol Reproductive Tract+ Uterine Horn (Left) Lung Diam (3) Trans Diam (4) Uterine Horn (Right)Long Diam (1) Trans Diam (2) Vagina Long Diam (6) Trans Diam (7) Cervix Long Diam (9) Trans Diam (8) Uterine Body True Length (10) Median Septum Length (5) Wt with Prenatal Young* Wt without Prenatal Young* 1.80 1.40 0.60 1.32 1.20 1.40 0.90 0.40 0.71 0.54 2.05 1.10 0.66 1.66 1.65 1.60 1.10 0.40 0.55 0.54 18.0 13.0 7.5 2.5 14.0 2.0 5.5 1.5 2.5 12.0 1,750 1,440 + Sears (1955) and Figure 1. * Wt without bladder. tracts of 191 192 4-13 2-10 .24 4-20 4-10 .30 4-27 3-10 .30 1.10 0.80 0.50 0.34 0.33 1.09 0.80 0.36 0.33 0.31 2.69 1.38 0.86 1.19 1.13 1. 93 1.44 0.92 1.44 1.34 2.05 1.27 0.30 1.74 1.64 2.00 1.40 0.90 1.70 1.69 1.70 0.97 0.80 0.98 0.96 1.70 1.08 0.70 0.88 0.87 17.0 30.0 21.0 "31.5 16.0 2.0 7.0 2.0 3.0 1.0 3.0 0.5 14.0 1.5 3.0 1.0 23.0 18.0 21.0 15.0 17.0 2.5 6.0 2.0 30.0 18.0 17.0 15.0 17.0 4".0 7.5 2.0 19.0 9.0 23.0 21.0 14.0 2.5 6.0 1.5 3.5 23.5 3,870 2,992 0.5 3.0 25 7.0 4.0 4.0 27.0 16.0 16.0 4,860 3,650 3,280 2,337 1,818 3,012 ro g> �Table 3.--Externa1 body measurements (mm), fresh-fixed weights (g), volumes (cc), and estimated conception dates of 1 embryo and 13 fetuses of 9 mule. deer, 1965. Collection No. 183 Date-Age-Wt Ratio of Mother and Age and Measurements of Young 180 181 Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt/Body Length Ratio 2-3 1-8 .27 2-10 6-8 •28 Uterine Horn (Left-Right) Sex (male, female, undetermined) Fresh Wt Fixed Wt Fresh Vol Forehead-Rump Contour Length Head Length Head Breadth Auricle (Left) Foreleg Length Left Hind Leg Length Left Hind Foot Length Tail Length Scapula (metacromium to ischium) Chest Circumference Est. Age of Young (Days) Est. Conception Date (1964) L UND. 7.23 4.30 7.06 54 85 19 8 .- 17 17 12 5 - 40 58 12-7 L F 102.8 84.0 94.1 154 210 51 30 14 63 76 47 15 74 96 R M 111.0 81.0 109.7 156 222 53 30 15 64 76 47 17 76 112 85 11-17 2-24 8-8 .32. R M 214.0 181.4 207.8 194 276 64 33 20 85 101 62 19 106 121 L M 206.0 189.0 199.8 193 269 63 33 20 86 101 62 17 106 125 97 11-19 184 186 3-3 1-9 .26 3-17 7 -9 .24 L F 98.0 82.7 95.5 146 203 46 27 13 58 61 43 13. 77 101 84 12-9 L F 310.0 305.0 299.0 211 306 75 38 31 102 119 78 26 114 147 109 11-29 ro fJ1 �Table 3.--Externa1 body measurements (mm), fresh-fixed weights (g), volumes (cc), and estimated conception dates of 1 embryo and 13 fetuses of 9 mule. deer, 1965, (continued). Date-Age-Wt Ratio of Mother and Age and Measurements of Young Collection No. 1 033 190 191 192 Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (year-Month) Eviscerated Wt/Body Length Ratio 3-25 8-9 .30 4-13 2-10 .24 4-20 4-10 .30 4-27 3-10 ~30 Uterine Horn (Left-Right) Sex (male, female, undetermined) Fresh Wt Fixed Wt Fresh Vol Forehead -Rump Contour Length Head Length Head Breadth· Auricle (Left) Foreleg Length Left Hind Leg Length Left Hind Foot Length Tail Length Scapula (metacromium to ischium) Chest Circumference Est. Age of Young (Days) Est. Conception Date (1964) R L M F 439.0 439.0 430.0 430.0 418.8 418.8 247 244 332 338 81 81 44 43 36. 45 119 121 145 144 94 94 19 17 148 151 159 160 114 12-1 R M 886 875 849 306 446 102 51 54 162 175 125 44 175 197 L M 962 950 925 311 443 103 52 58 166 182 127 44 180 202 132 12-3 L F 578 570 537 253 388 94 49 51 142 167 109 26 166 175 R R M M 735 1,462 710 1,440 686 1,395 279 342 500 394 115 96 51 56 51 75 196 144 237 175 114 159 26 . 51 207 169 191 250 146 119 12-22 12-3 I I\) ~ �Table 4.--Prenatal young sex ratios and litter sizes from 50 mule deer, 1961-65, inclusive. Sex & No. of Prenatal Young by Uterine Horn Left Right Total Percent of Total Male Female Undetermined Total 16 19 8 43 20 16 7 43 41.9 40.7 17.4 100.0 15 34 1 50 Percent of Total 50.0 50.0 100.0 30.0 68.0 2.0 100.0 36 35 .l2. 86 Singleton No. Mothers with Litter Sizes Twins Triplets Total 84--'> Males/lOO Females 125* 103* * These ratios do not differ significantly (P~.05), from equality. Table 5.--The distribution of mule deer conception dates (1960-64) estimated from 50 litters by the prenatal young growth curves of Hudson and Browman (1959). ro CP VI Weekl~ Interval Date Nov. 11 - Nov. 17 Nov. 18 - Nov. 24 Nov. 25 - Dec. 1 Dec. 2 - Dec. 8 Dec. 9 - Dec. 15 Dec. 16 - Dec. 22 Dec. 23 - Dec. 29 Dec. 30 - Jan. 5 Jan. 6 - Jan. 12 Jan. 13 - Jan. 19 Jan. 20 - Jan. 26 Jan. 27 - Feb. 3 Feb. 4 - Feb. 10 Total No. Estimated Conception Dates 2 6 14 15 7 4 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 50 Percent of Total 4.0 12.0 28.0 30.0 . 14.0 8.0 0.0 2.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 2.0 100.0 �Table 6.--Testicu1ar measurements (em), fresh wt (g), volumes (cc), and mean diameters (microns) of seminiferous tubules of 6 mule deer and the fresh weights .(g) of their prostate glands, 1965. Date-Age-Wt Ratio-Testis-G1and [76 178 Collection No. 18-2-185 187 188 Collection Date (Month-Day) Estimated Age (Year-Month) Eviscerated Wt/BodyLength Ratio 1-5 1-7 .26 1-19 8-7 .38 2-17 0-8 .22 3-11 6-9 .37 3-24 4-9 .31 3-31 0-9 .18 Testis (Left) Long Diam Trans Diam Height Diam Wt Vol 4.50 2.55 2.08 15.85 15.08 4.30 2.90 2.40 22.14 21.29 3.10 2.00 1.70 7.27 7.21 4.48 2.67 2.10 14.68 13.98 4.60 2.00 1.90 14.47 13.83 2.06 1.20 1.00 2.91 2.85 I\) c» 0'\ Testis (Right) Long Diam . Trans Diam Wt Vol. 4.30 2.05 1.86 15.37 14.67 4.75 3.10 2.60 23.65 22.80 3.20 1.80 1.60 6.80 6.76 4.37 2.40 2.15 16.60 15.85 4.30 2.00 1.80 14.24 13.63 0.90 2.33 2.28 Prostate Gland Wt Diam Semi. Tubules: Mean+ Standard Deviation + Based on 22 measurements, 11 from each testis. 3.87 8.85 3.06 7.26 4.30 1.39 146.04 5.28 142.65 7.95 103.75 7.25 101.01 7.57 108.91 6.60 80.84 8.58 2.05 1.30 �- 287 - Table 7.--Comparative breeding season dates estimated for some migratory mule deer populations. Dates Sample Extremes Maximum Ac tivit:2: Size Herd State Interstate Calif. 11-15 to 1- 3 11-15 to 12- 6 Statewide Utah 11-15 to 12-30+ Central portion Utah 11-14 to 1-30+ Method Reference 43 Forehead -rump growth curve of white-tailed deer embryos developed by Cheatum and Morton (1946) • (Chattin 1948) 11-29 to 12-10+ ·43 Forehead-rump growth curve of white-tailed deer embryos developed by Cheatum and Morton (1946). (Robinette et a1, 1950) 11-2Q to 12-2 232 From captured fawns; "By determining the birth dates, using the average gestation period,and calculating (Robinette et a1, 1950) back+-Rob Lne t t e (et a1, 1950: 459)" Yosemite Calif. 12-10 to 1-27 Jawbone Calif. 11-1 to 12-31 "mid -Dec." (p , 57) Field observation of "rutting activity". "early Nov." "end of Jan." 11-23 to 12-15 (p. 83) As above. " Examination of female genitals. " "Nov. thru Jan." Observation of copulation over a period of several years. Dec. (p. 85) 57 (Dixon 1934:85) (Leopold !:! a1, 1951) �- 288 - Table 7.--Comparative breeding season dates estimated for some migratory mule deer populations (continued). Herd Cache 1a Poudre +Dates State Colo. Extremes Dates Maximum Activity SamPle Size 11-6 to 1-31 mid-Dec. (p. 84) 11-17 to 2-7 11-25 to 12-8 inferred from Figure 1, page 458. Method Inferred from graph based on above data. 50 Reference " Midpoint of This study. extreme dates from 4 growth curves of prenatal young developed by Hudson and Browman (1959). �- 289 - by this project. Mr. Ture Schoultz, a graduate student at the University of Colorado, Boulder, has begun a histological study of about 342 sets of ovaries also collected, prepared, and analyzed macroscopically by project personnel. Both individuals will use this material as the basis .for a Masters' thesis problem. It is anticipated that each will eventually publish appropriate portions. A partial review of the published literature has indicated that the Poudre herd may have a slightly longer and later breeding season than previously reported (Table 7) for other migratory deer herds. Periods of presumably maximum breeding activity, however, are remarkably similar regardless of the sample size or methodology. While this may leave a comforable feeling of certitude, the following .are believed to be important qualifying considerations. First, although Chattin (1948:28) believes that the probable accuracy of his hind foot growth curve in conception date estimation is 5 days, no supporting data are offered. Moreover, there does not appear to be a satisfactory way to assess the precision of estimating conception data by growth curves of prenatal young. Secondly, since only 5, known-age, prenatal young are included in the growth curves of Hudson and Browman (1959); the estimated conception dates herein may be quite approximate. Extreme copulation dates observed on the Poudre mule deer herd were November 19 (1960) to January 14 (1965). ± LITERATURE CITED Anderson, A. E. 1962. Reproductive studies. WP5 - J2 Completion Report, W-105-R-2, pp. 271-274 In Quarterly Report, Part 2 • Colorado Dept. of Game, Fish and Parks, Denve;;:"(processed) _____ ___ "...."--:=-.,,... 1965. Reproductive studies. WP5 - J2 Completion Report, W-105-R-4, pp. 165-193 In Game Research Report, January, 1965, Colorado Dept. Game, Fish, and Parks, Denver. (processed) ~_--::_. 1966. Reproductive studies. WP5 - J2 Completion Report, W-105-R-5, Colorado Dept. Game, Fish and Parks. (typewritten) Chattin, J. E. 1948. Breeding season and productivity in the Interstate deer herd. California Fish and Game 34(1) :25-31. Cheatum, E. L. and G. H. Morton. 1946. Breeding season of white-tailed deer in New York. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 10(3):249-263. Cheatum, E. L. 1949. The use of corpora lutea for determining ovulation incidence and variations in fertility of white-tailed deer. Cornell Veterinarian 39 (3):282-291. Davis, D. E. and F. B. Golley. 1963. Principles of manunalogy. Reinhold Publishing Corp. N. Y. 335 pp. �- 290 LITERATURE CITED (continued) Dixon, J. s. 1934. A study of the life history and food habits of mule deer in California. California Fish and Game 20(3 and 4):1-146. Hudson, P. and L. G. Browman. 1959. Embryonic and fetal development deer. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 19(1):115-136. of the mule Leopold, A. S., T. Riney, R. McCain, and L. Tevis Jr. 1951. The Jawbone deer herd. Game Bull. No.4. Calif. Div. of Fish and Game, Sacramento, 139 pp. Nalbandov, A. v. 1964. Reproductive physiology; comparative reproductive physiology of domestic animals, laboratory animals, and man. 2nd Ed. W. M. Freeman Co., San Francisco', 316 pp" Robinette, W. L. and J. S. Gashwiler. 1950. Breeding season, productivity, and fawning period of the mule deer in utah. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 14(4):457-469. Robinette, W. L., J. S. Gashwiler, D. A. Jones, and H. S. Crane. 1955. Fertility of mule deer in Utah. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 19(1):115-136. Robinette, W. L., O. A. Jones, G. Rogers, and J. S. Gashwiler. 1957. Notes on tooth development and wear for Rocky Mountain mule deer. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 21(2) :134-153. Sears, H. s. 1955. Certain aspects of the reproductive physiology of the female mule deer. M. S. Thesis, Montana State Univ., Missoula, 88pp. (typewritten) Prepared by: Date: Allen E. Anderson Associate Wildlife Researcher January, 1966 Approved by: Dean E. Medin ------~~~~~~----Project Leader Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �Ja.nuary, 19t~b - 291 - JOB COMPLETION RESEARCH PROJECT State of COLORADO Project No. W-l05-R-6, Work Plan No. ----------~~-------------------- Job No. Period Covered: Personnel: REPORT SEGMENT An Ecological Investigation of the Cache la Poudre Deer Herd, Colorado 5 Physiological 3 Harvest Analysis January, 1965 - December, Allen E. Anderson Studies 1965 and Dean E. Medin ABSTRACT The 1965 estimates of Unit 19 hunting pressure, kill, and success ratio estimated from hunter report card returns continued the substantial decline which began in 1961. As compared to 1965, the 1959 estimates show that about twice as many hunters harvested about 4 times the number of deer and were about twice as successful. The reasons for the decline in hunters are not known but this decline,plus closure of' extensive areas of private lands adjacent to public lands and a series of relatively mild weather conditions are believed to be largely responsible for the decrease in kill and hunter success. Since 1961 there has been no demonstrable relationship between the estimates of harvest and population density. There were 417, Unit 19 mule deer checked during the 7 day, 1965 season. In terms of percentages the check station sample revealed substantially more males,_ fewer females, and about the same number of fawns as estimated from hunter report card returns. The 1965 net productivity index (percent of female yearlings in the adult female sample) was similar to that obtained in 1964 and chi square analysis revealed that this index has been relatively stable since 1961. Similar analyses of the samples of 28-30 month old females, however, reveal significant (P<.OOl) fluctuations and increases suggesting an increased survival of yearling females in 1964 and 1965. When the 16-52 month old female component samples a.re compared for the same period, sLgn Lf Lc an t (P<.OOl) fluctuations occurred but the 1961 and 1965 percentages are similar. These data suggest that there may have been compensatory, age specific, mortality within the 40-52 month old female age component. Some of the limitations of the age structure samples are discussed. �- 292 - The overall (1961-65) harvest sex ratio of 683 fawns with approximate 90 percent confidence limits was 125:100 (109-141) which differed significantly (P<.005) from equality. The 1965 harvest sex ratio of fawns was 174:100 (99-249) and is the only annual sample which differed significantly (P<.05) from equality. Preliminary analyses of hunting effort in 1965 expressed as the mean number of hours hunted (+ the standard deviation) by successful hunters. showed that male deer of all ag; classes required 5.8 + 6.4 hours and females 6~7 + 8.1 hours of hunting effort. As in 1964, there-did not appear to be detecta-ble differences in mean hunting effort between sexes, age classes, or subunits.· As in 1964, however, small sample sizes and the extreme variability of this index restrict interpretation to subunits of maximum harvest such as 4 and 5. The 1965 subunit harvest density indices ranged from 0.0 deer per· square mile (subunit 8) to 3.90 deer per square mile (subunit 4). The overall harvest density of .78 deer per square mile is a minimum value but it is doubtful if the actual harvest density exceeded about 1 deer per square mile. The pattern of harvest .distribution sampled in 1965 resembles those of previous years with about 18 percent of the total Unit 19 area receiving about 66 percent of the total minimum kill. The 1965 antler measurements are described statistically. harvest data are underway at the Colorado State University Final analysis of all Statistical Laboratory. Acknowledgements: Mr. David C. Bowden of the Colorado State University Statistical Laboratory supervised the IBM card punching and programming. Student Assistants O. Doyle Markham and Robert L. Williams recorded data at the check stations. Recommendations: Continue this job to cumplete final analyses of the 1960-65 data. Review the recent literature in preparation for writing the final, formal manuscripts. Objectives: (1) Determine the age and sex structure of deer herd kill to provide estimates of: (a) net productivity (percent of female yearlings in the kill) and (b) the effects of hunting regulations. (2) Locate the distribution of the kill by subunit to relate the age and sex structure of the kill to elevational levels and harvest intensity. (3) Measure relevant physical characteristics of the deer killed to provide an index of herd response to food quality. Procedures: Unlike 1960-64, when one check station was in continuous operation throughout all, or most of the entire season, the 1965 data were obtained at two temporary check stations located at different but perhaps more strategic points (Figure 1). The stations were in operation from about 8:00 AM to about 8:00 PM each day during the 7 day big game season (October 25-31). The 1965 season also differed from previous seasons by opening on a Monday rather than Saturday. All other methodology has been described in detail preViously (Anderson 1965:196). All data were obtained at the two check stations by Dean E. Medin and the writer. �50' R75W 40' 2.0' 105' 30' 10' R 75W 50 ro ~~- I eek Sfation 1960-p4 I OF SUB-UNITS GAME MANAGEMENT .... ~-, ~~l .- ,j / ; ~ 1:~% ' \'?-, ....tJ.,', ..... ~-d-.r~,_~ ~ ~.·L: ~'=§,~~ . II,j -" j J Ef I l /[ i t I I'z,V;""!, 'l,...."I--T-( I ';rt~~V'"T.¥1(,"~COLORADO UNIT 19 9.•.•.• I L I ,\11 '(g t il"" •.. < J I '? ~ .' DEPT. OF GAME AND FISH . SIXTH Ib:g, PRINCIPAL Sc~e MERIDIAN .3__ .0\ f-----~1g:1 5 Milos T6N Polyeonic Pf:"Ojeciion North Amaricen dmum Figure 1. Subunits and check station locations, 1960-65. ��- 295 - HARVEST ANALYSIS Allen E. Anderson Harvest Trends, 1959-65, Inclusive Total harvest estimates and check station samples.--The Unit 19 mule deer harvests as estimated from the hunter report card returns (1959-65) are presented in Table 1. Table l.--The number of hunters, mule deer kill, and hunter success ratios on Unit 19 as estimated from hunter report card returns, 1959-65, inclusive.+ Year No. Hunters Total Deer Kill Success Ratio 1959 1960~( 1961 1962 1963 1964 1965 3,129 1,723 2,483 2,308 1,986 1,773 1 640 2,356 920 1,526 1,259 846 692 651 .75 .53 .61 .55 .43 .39 .40 15,042 8,250 .55 Totals ~( Males with antlers only; during all other years a hunters' regulation prevailed. + Data taken from unauthored, undated, mimeographed releases Game Management. choice, 1 deer per hunter from the Division of The sampling procedures employed do not permit computation of confidence limits about these estimates of harvest and success. Nevertheless, the number of hunters, deer killed, and hunter success ratios for 1965 continue the annual, declining trend which began in 1961. As compared to the 1964 and 1965 estimates, the 1959 estimates show that about twice as many hunters killed about four times as many deer and were about twice as successful. The reasons for the decline in hunters are not known. However, reduced hunting pressure, partial or complete closure of excellent deer range on private land which also restricts hunter access to adjacent public lands, and relatively mild hunting season weather are believed to be important factors in the decrease in kill and hunter success. All available data suggest that these trends are independent of annual population levels (Anderson 1966a and 1966b). Another trend of interest is the annual percentage of males, females, and fawns recorded at the check station and as estimated from hunter report card returns -(Table 2). Both sources suggest an increase in the percentage of males, perhaps a decrease in female percentages, and stability in fawn percentages, 1961-65, �Table 2.--A comparison of check station samples and the total harvest estimated from hunter report card returns, 1960-65, inclusive. Male Percentages of Total With 99 Percent Confidence Intervals+ Female Percentages of Total With 99 Percent Confidence Intervals+ Fawn Percentages of Total With 99 Percent Confidence Intervals+ Sample G.M. Unit 19 No. 1960 Check Station Report Card* 463 920 1961 Check Station 361 Report Card~'< 474 34.1 31.1 (30-38) (27-35) 484 754 45.7 49.4 (42-50) (45-53) 215 298 20.2 19.5 (17-23) (17-23) 1,060 1,526 1962 Check Station Report Card* 311 424 33.6 33.7 (30-38) (30-38) 411 641 44.4 50.9 (40-48) (47-54) 203 194 22.0 15.4 (19-26) (12-18) 925 1,259 1963 Check Station Report Card* 207 292 42.7 (35-52) 34.5 ·(30-38) 190 442 39.2 52.2 (31-47) (48-56) 88 112 18.1 13.2 (12-25) (10-16) 485 846 1964 Check Station Report Card~( 206 260 38.5 37.6 (31-47) (34-42) 215 324 40.2 46.8 (32-48) (43-51) 114 108 21.3 15.6 (15-28) (13-19) 535 692 1965 Check Station Report Card* 197 277 50.0 42.5 (42-58) (38-46) 134 275 34.0 42.2 (26-42) (38-46) 63 99 16.0 15.2 (10-23) (12-18) 394 651 Year * + No. No. Total 463 920 Data taken from unauthored, undated, mimeographed releases from the Division of Game Management. Confidence intervals from Table 1.1 in Snedecor (1946:5). I\) \0 0\ �- 297 - inclusive. Percentages from both sources were similar only in 1961 when maximum sample sizes were obtained. In general, there has been a tendency for check station percentages to be consistently higher in fawns and inconsistently higher in males and lower in females than those estimated from hunter report card returns. Harvest by day of season.--From 1961 to 1964, inclusive, 55.9 to 90.1 percent of the check station sample of deer have been killed during the first two d.ays of the big game season (Table 3). The Monday opening and the weekend ending of the 1965 season resulted in about 42 percent of the total kill taken during the first two and 42 percent during the last two days. Males predominated in the kill samples during these periods and the total harvest sex ratio based on 417 deer was 138:100 (Table 4)'. This ratio differs significantly (P<.OOl) from equality and continues the trend to a larger proportion of antlered males in the check station sample (Table 2). Age Structure, 1960-65 Tabular summary.--The 1965 sample of the Unit 19 mule deer harvest is presented in Table 5 (fawns included) and in Table 6 (fawns excluded). The age structure samples of 1,738 female deer and 2,108 male deer are summarized by year in Tables and 8, respectively. 7 Net productivity indices.--These values (Table 7) presented in the form of a contingency table (Table 9), have ranged from 22.4 (1962) to 30.0 (1963) percent for the only significant (P<.05) difference recorded during the 5 year period. The 26.9 percent obtained in 1965 is similar to the 1964 index. Moreover, the nonsignificant (P<.05) chi square obtained suggests that annual net productivity indices have remained at a fairly constant level. A similar presentation (Table 10) of the proportion of 28-30 month old females to all older females, however, reveal highly significant (P<.OOl) annual changes. The most conspicuous feature therein is the significant (P<.OOl) decline in the 28-30 month old age class from 1961 to 1962-63 and the two-fold increase in 1964 which remained at a similar level in the 1965 sample. These fluctuations may reflect differences in the annual survival rate of female yearlings. Since the 28-30 month old age class is included in the 16-52 month old age component the highly significant (P<.OOl) annual changes (Table 11) are not unexpected. Unexpected however are the large differences between the 1961-65, 28-30 month samples and the similarity between the 1961 and 1965, 16-52 month old age component samples. Thus, it might be inferred that 5 years of low density, either-sex harvests in consecutive years have had a negligible effect on net productivity but may have improved the female yearling survival rate with perhaps compensatory mortality in the 40-52 month age class. This inference will be further considered and qualified under the Discussion section. Progeny-progenitor, ratios.--When compared to 1961-64 (Table 12) the 1965 age class sequence of sample ratios appears similar to the 1961 and 1964 samples. Sampling bias apparently occurred during each of the 5 years, if the theoretical concept of a small, progressive increase in ratios in successive age classes is actually �Table 3.--The Unit 19 mule deer h.rvest by day of season as sampled at the check stations, 1960-65.* Day of Season N % N % N % N % N % N % 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 160 118 18 14 6 3 8 39 33 2 0 0 7 3 28 24 34.6 25.5 3.9 3.0 1.3 0.7 1.7 8.4 7.1 0.4 0.0 0.0 1.5 0.7 6.2 5.0 491 92 28 26 20 19 16 127 157 11 32 23 47.1 8.8 2.7 2.5 1.9 1.8 1.5 12.2 15.1 1.1 3.1 2.2 505 248 18 16 22 0 0 98 70 51.7 25.4 1.8 1.6 2.3 0.0 0.0 10.0 7.2 258 115 19 6 6 7 5 51 61 48.9 21.9 3.6 1.1 1.1 1.3 0.9 9.7 11.6 372 128 16 16 22 67.2 23.1 2.9 2.9 3.9 140 33 19 25 24 88 88 33.6 7.9 4.5 6.0 5.8 21.1 21.1 Totals 463 100.0 1,042-++ 1960 * Seasons: 1961 1962 - 1963 -+ - 1964 1965** 0 -+ ro \0 CP 100.0 927 100.0 528 100.0 554 100.0 1960 Oct. 22 -- Nov. 6 inclusive; bucks-only, fawns excluded, 1 deer per hunter. 1961 Octe 28 -- Nov. 8 inclusive; hunters' choice, 1 deer per hunter. 1962 Oct. 27 -- Nov. 5 inclusive; hunters' choice, 1 deer per hunter. 1963 Oct. 26 -- Nov. 4 inclusive; hunters' choice, 1 deer per hunter. 1964 Oct. 24 -- Oct. 28 inclusive; hunters' choice, 1 deer per hunter. 1965 Oct. 25 -- Oct. 31 inclusive; hunters' choice, 1 de er per hunter. + Check station not in operation during last day of season. ** Two part-time stations at different locations than in 1960-64, inclusive (See Figure 1). +t 18 additional deer were checked (5 males, 13 females) on which the day of kill was not obtained. 417 100.0 �Table 4.--The Unit 19 mule deer harvest by sex and date of kill as sampled at two check stations, 1965. Date of Kill Oct. 25 Oct. 26 Oct. 27 Oct. 28 Oct. 29 Oct. 30 Oct. 31 Totals Male Female % of Total No. 90 15 14 11 16 53 43 242 37.2 6.2 5.8 4.5 6.6 21.9 17.8 100.0 Total % of Total No. 50 18 5 14 8 35 45 175 28.6 10.3 2.9 8.0 4.5 21.1 25.7 100.0 No. 140 33 19 25 24 88 88 417 % of Total 33.6 7.9 4.5 6.0 5.8 21.1 21.1 100.0 Table 5.--Age structure of 394 mule deer sampled at two check stations, fawns included, 1965+. Age Sexes Combined Class Male Female (Montll.s)* No. % of Total No. % of Total No. % of Total 16.0 4-6 40 16.9 23 14.7 63 25.9 16-18 66 27.8. .36 22.9 102 20.8 28-30 45 19.0 37 23.5 82 21.3 40-52 56 23.6 28 17.8 84 8.4 64-76 20 8.4 13 8.3 33 4.3. 88-100 6 2.5 11 7~0 17 3.3 112+ 4 1.7 9 5.7 13 100.0 Totals 237 100.0 157 100.0 394 + Five male and 18 females could not be assigned to age classes because of missing heads or lower jaws. * Estimated age according to Robinette ~~. 1957 in this and all other tables. Table 6.--Age structure of 331 mule deer sampled at two check stations, fawns excluded, 1965. Age Class ~Months~ 16-18 28-30 40-52 64-76 88-100 112+ Totals No. 66 45 56 20 6 4 197 Sexes Combined Females Males % of Total 33.5 22.8 28.4 10.2 '3.1 2•. 0 100.0 No. 36 37 28 13 11 9 134 % of Total 26.9 27.6 20.9 9.7 8.2 6.7 100.0 No. 102 82 84 33 17 13 331 '70 of Total 30.8 24.8 25.4 10.0 5.1 3.9 100.0 ro \0 \0 �- 300 - Table 7.--Age structure of 1,738 female mule deer sampled at the check station, 1961-65, inclusive. 1961 No. % 1962 No. % 1963 No. % No. % 1965 No. % 16.3 94 18.6 41 17.8 52 19.5 23 14.7 116 20.0 92 18.2 57 24.7 57 21.3 36 22.9 100 17.3 52 10.3 24 10.4 65 24.3 37 23.5 40-52 128 22.1 . 119 23.6 51 22.0 49 18.4 28 17.8 64-76 56 . 9.7 42 8.3 25 10.8 14 5.2 13 8.3 88-100 42 7.3 42 8.3 21 9.1 10 3.7 11 7.0 112+ 42 7.3 64 12.7 12 5.2 20 7.5 9 5.7 578 100.0 505 100.0 231 100.0 267 100.0 157 100.0 4-6 16-18 28-30 Total 94 1964 Fawns Excluded 16-18* 116 24.0 92 22.4 57 30.0 57 26.5 36 26.9 28-30 100 20.6 52 12.7 24 12.6 65 30.2 37 27.6 40-52 128 26.0 119 28.9 51 26.8 49 22.8 28 20.9 64-76 56 11.6 42 10.2 25 13.2 14 6.5 13 9.7 88-100 42 8.7 42 10.2 21 11.1 10 4.7 11 8.2 112+ 42 8.7 64 15.6 12 6.3 20 9.3 9 6.7 484 100.0 411 100.0 190 ,100.0 215 100.0 134 100.0 Total * The underlined percentages are regarded as indices of net productivity. �- 301 - Table 8.--Age structure of 2,108 male mule deer sampled at the check station, 1960-65, inclusive. Est. Age (Months~ 1962 1961 1960 No. % 4-6 No. % No. % No. 121 25.1 109 26.0 47 1963 '7; 1964 1965 No. % No. % 18.5 62 23.1 40 16.9 16-18 208 46.6 191 39.1 173 41..2 123 48.4 95 35.4 66 27.8 28-30 95 21.3 60 12.4 66 1S.7 30 11.8 77 28.7 45 19.0 40-52 84 18.6 67 13.9 47 11.2 33 12.9 21 7.8 56 23.6 64-76 41 9.2 25 5.2 9 2.1 10 3.9 7 2.6 20 8.4 88-100 15 3.4 13 2.7 11 2.6 11 4.3 5 1.9 6 2.5 112+ 4 0.9 5 1.1 5 1.2 0 0.0 1 0.4 4 1.7 447 100.0 482 100.0 420 100.0 254 100.0 268 100.0 237 100.0 Total Fawns Excluded 16-18 208 46.6 191 52.9 173 55.6 123 59.4 95 46.1 66 33.5 28-30 95 21.3 60 16.6 66 21.2 30 14.5 77 37.,3 45 22.8 40-52 84 18.6 67 18.6 47 15.1 33 15.9 21 10.2 56 28.4 64-76 41 9.2 25 6.9 9 2.9' 10 4.8 7 3.4 20 10.2 88-100 15 3.4 13 3.6 11 3.5 11 5.3 5 2.4 6 3.1 112+ 4 0.9 5 1.4 5 1.6 0 0.0 1 0.5 4 2.0 447 100.0 361 100.0 311 100.0 207 100.0 206 100.0 197 100.0 Total �" Table 9.--0bserved and expected numbers of 16-18 month old fema Ie mule deer and all older females as sampled at the check station, 1961-65; inclusive.+ The annual 16-18 month old percentages and their 95% confidence intervals are also listed. Estimated Age {Months 2 Percentages of Females 16-18 months of age With Confidence Interva1s* Year Observed 16-18 Expected 1961 116 120.83 .193 1962 92 102.61 1.097 319 308.39 .365 411 22.4 (17-28) 1963 57 47.43 1.931 133 142.57 .642 190 30.0 (24~36) 1964 57 53.67 .207 158 161.33 .069 215 26.5 (20-32) 1965 36 33.45 .194 98 100.55 .065 -.lli. 26.9 (21-33) Totals 358 Chi Observed 28+ EX12ected Chi Total 368 363.17 .064 484 24.0 (19-30) 1,076 1,434 + The computed chi square value (4.83) was not significant (P<.·05) at 4 degrees of freedom. * Confidence intervals from Table 1.1 in Snedecor (1946:4). - w 0 ro �Table 10.--Observed and expected numbers of 28-30 month female mule deer and all older female deer as sampled at the check station, 1961-65, inclusive.+ The annual 28-30 month old female percentages with their 95% confidence intervals are also listed. Estimated Age ~Months2 Observed 40+ Expected Chi Total Percentages of Females 28-30 Months of Age With Confidence Intervals* Year Observed 28-30 Expected 1961 100 95.08 .255 268 272.92 .089 368 27.2 (21-33) 1962 52 82.42 11.228 . 267 236.58 3.911 319 16.3 (11-21) Chi I IN 0 IN 1963 24 34.36 3.124 109 98.64 1.088, 133 18.0 (13-23) 1964 65 40.82 14.323 93 117.18 4.990 158 41.1 (35-47) 1965 37 25.32 5.388 61 72.68 1.877 98 37.8 (32-44) Totals 278 + The computed chi square (46.27) was significant * Confidence intervals from Table 1.1 in Snedecor 798 (P<.OOl) at 4 degrees of freedom. (1946:4). 1,076 -." �Table 11.--Observed and expected numbers of 16-52 month old female mule deer and all older female deer as sampled at the check station, 1961-65, inclusive. The annual, 16-52 month old female percentages with their 95% confidence intervals are also listed. Estimated Age ~Months~ Year Observed 1961 344 341. 23 .022 140 142.77 .054 484 71.1 (65-77) 1962 263 289.76 2.471 148 121.24 5.906 411 63.1 (57~69) 1963 132 133.95 .028 58 56.05 .068 190 69.5 (64-76) 1964 171 151.58 2.488 44 63.42 5.947 215 79.5 (74-85) 1965 101 94.47 .451 --11 39.53 1.079 134 75.4 (65-83) Chi Observed 64+ Expected Chi Total Percentages of Females 16-52 Months of Age With Confidence Interva1* 16-52 Expected lA>0 +:- Totals 1,011 423 + The computed chi square (18.47) was significant (P~OOl) at 4 degrees of freedom. * Confidence intervals from Table 1.1 in Snedecor (1946:4). 1,434 �- 305 - Table l2.--Age structure of the female mule deer kill sampie expressed as percentages of the total sample and progeny - progenitor ratios, 1961-65, inclusive. 1961 1962 1963 1964 1965 Age Class (Months) % Ratio+ % Ratio+ % Ratio+ % Ratio+ % Ratio+ 4-6 16.3 .19 18.6 .23 17.8 .22 19.5 .24 14.7 .17 16-18 20.0 .32 18.2 .29 24.7 .43 21.3 .36 22.9 .37 28-30 17.3 .37 10.3 .19 10.4 .22 24.3 .70 23.5 .61 40-52 22.1 .91 23.6 .80 22.0 .28 18.4 1.11 17.8 .85 64-76 9.7 .67 8.3 .40 10.8 .76 5.2 .47 8.3 .65 88-100 7.3 1.00 8.3 .66 9.1 1.75 3.7 .50 7.0 1.22 112+ 7.3 12.7 5.2 7.5 5.7 Total 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 505 231 267 157 P:P Sample Size 578 P:P P:P P:P P:P + (Gill 1953) Obtained by dividing the number of females in each age class by the number of females in all older age classes. �- 306 - an indicator of an unbiased sample (Gill 1953). This progressive increase in ratios included the 40-52 month class in 1965, 1964, and 1965 but only the 16-18 month old age class in 1962 and 1963. The magnitude of between-year change in ratios was least in the 4-6 month age class and greatest in the 88-100 age class. Harvest Sex Ratios, 1961-65, Inclusive Fawns.--Male:female ratio samples showed a preponderance of males during each of 5 years yet none except 1965 differed significantly from equality at the 5 percent level of significance (Table 13). When the 5 years data were combined, however, the total sample ratio of 125:100 and based on 683 fawns differed significantly (P<.005) from equality. The approximate 90 percent confidence limits computed about these sample ratios overlap in all cases. This suggests that confidence limits about proportions may be even more sensitive to sample size than the single classification chi square test of equality. It is probable that most annual samples of fawn harvest sex ratios would have shown a statistically significant preponderance of males if larger numbers of fawns had been obtained. Adults.--Samples of age class sex ratios (1961-64, inclusive) have been presented previously (Anderson 1966). The 1965 adult harvest sex ratios will be presented in subsequent reports. Subunit Harvest Indices, 1965 Harvest densities.--Indices of harvest density are presented for each sex by subunit in Table 14. As in previous years, subunits 4 and 5 which comprise about 18 percent of the total Unit 19 area received about 66 percent of the sample kill amounting to minimum indices of 3.9 and 2.1 deer per square mile, respectively. The overall minimum harvest density index was .78'deer per square mile. While these are minimum values it is unlikely that the total Unit 19, 1965 harvest exceeded about 1.0 deer per square mile. Hunting effort.--This is expressed as the mean number of hours hunted (± standard deviation) by successful hunters and is cited by sex and age class in Table 15 for subunits 1, 4, 5, and 7. Females of all age classes required somewhat greater average and more variable hunting effort than did males. This relationship was present in most age classes. Because of small sample sizes" however, no inferences can be made on possible subunit differences in average hunting effort of successful hunters. There is a suggestion of minimum average effort in subunits of maximum harvest density and maximum effort on subunits of minimum harvest density. �- 307 - Table l3.--Mule deer fawn sex ratios as sampled at check stations, 1961-65, inclusive. Year Males Number Females Total Males Per 100 Females Level of With Approx. 90% Signif Lcance= Confidence Limits+ 1961 121 94 215 129 (100-158) P<.10 1962 109 94 203 116 (89-143) P<.30 1963 47 41 88 115 (75-155) P<.50 1964 62 52 114 119 (82-156) P<.50 1965 40 .-n. 63 174 (99-249) P<.05 Total 379 304 683 125 (109-141) P<.005 +(Riney 1956) * The hypothesis being tested is that the sample consisted on equal proportions of male· and female fawns at the 5 percent. level of significance. �Table l4.--Subunit indices of the Unit 19 mule deer harvest density, hunting effort, and sex ratios; age classes combined, 1965. Kill per Subunit Sq. Mile++ Male No. Deer x Hours Hunted+ SD Range Kill per Sq. Mile++ Female No. Hours Hunted+ Deer ~ SD Range Kill per Sq. Mile++ Sexes Combined Kill Per 100 Females Males Fawns 1 .38 12 5.20 4.79 16.5 .19 6 5.16 5.33 11.50 .58 200 75 2 .13 8 6.37 3.74 11.0 .11 7 4.00 4.67 12.50 .24 114 86 3 .66 12 5.00 4.61 13.5 .44 8 5.87 2.83 7.50 1.11 150 12 4 2.19 92 4.60 5.87 34.5 1.71 72 5.15 4.19 17.50 3.90 128 33 5 1.15 61 6.00 6.29 34.5 .96 51 7.00 7.43 31.50 2.11 120 31 6 .22 22 7.54 8.22 35.5 .18 18 11.30 12.50 47.0 .40 122 50 7 .27 35 8.07 8.23 32.5 .10 13 10.26 15.88 59.0 .38 269 110 8 o o o o o o o o o o o o o Total .46 242 5.75* 6.45'1'( 0.5-36.0* .33 175 6.66* .78 139 47 + ++ * 8.10* 0.5-60.0* Based on interviews of successful hunters; time estimated to the nearest one-half hour. Based on an estimated 528 square miles in Game Mgmt. Unit 19. The square miles in each subunit are; 1-31, 2-61, 3-18,4-42, 5-53, 6-98, 7-126, 8-99. Subunits 2,6,7, and 8 are generally less accessible with appreciably heavier cover, land 3 are largely agricultural and privately-owned lands subject to arbitrary closure to hunting. Subunits 4 and 5 are relatively accessible public lands in closer proximity to paved highways and population centers. Based on 237 male and 157 female mule deer. 0 w o co- �Table 15.--Mean hours of hunting by successful hunters related to sex and age structure of the subunit mule deer samples, 1965. Age Class (Months2 4-6 16-18 Subunit No. Statistic Male Female N x SD Range -- 1 2 7.2 2.0 2.5-12.0 N 5 7.5 6.4 0.5-17.0 1 x 4 2.2 1 SD Range 1.0-5.0 0.5 x SD Range 28-30 40-52 N 88-100 - - SD Range 13 3.5 5.2 0.5-15.0 8 7.1 4.3 2.5-14.5 8 5.9 5.3 0.5-16.0 6 5.9 6.6 0.5-16.0 8 9.2 9.3 0.5-30.0 26 4.8 5.3 0.5-16.0 19 5.9 5.0 0.5-15.0 17. 6.4 4.3 1.0-15.0 9 5.2 3.4 0.5-12.0 6 5.3 4.7 0.5-12.0 17 3.8 4.0 0.5-16.0 16 4.2 3.3 0.5-12.0 9 3.7 3.0 0.5-9.0 13 7.0 9.0 0.5-32.0 10 6.2 4.8 0.5-14.0 12.0 -- 5 3.7 4.7 0.5-12.0 5 6.0 3.5 1.0-10.0 10 3.8 3.6 0.5-12.5 6 8.5 11.8 1.0-32.0 0 6.0 0 0 0 ·0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 - 1 3 3.3 3 7.2 2 10.0 1 14.0 2.0-4.0 0.5-11.0 8.0-12.0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0.5 3 7.8 1 3.5-11.0 SD Range x Male 9 6.4 6.7 0.5-20.0 1 N Female 7 9.1 9.1 0.5-28.0 N SD Range Male 10 7.0 10.2 1.0-35.0 8.0 N Female 10 3.7 3.1 0.5-10.0 SD Range x Male 28 5.5 7.7 0.5-35.0 1 x 112+ 2.0 1 N it 64-76 - - 7 5 4 1 -- - - - 0.5-0.5 - - Female 3 2.3 - 1.0-5.0 2 34.0 - 8.0-60.0 2 6.5 - 4.0-9.0 2 13.5 - 7.0-20.0 Others Male Female 10 4 7.1 6.4 0 5.9 1.5-21. 0 1.0-14.0 All Subunits Female Male 23 40 6.2 5.8 5.2 6.4 0.5-16'.0 0.5-30.0 12 9.4 9.6 1.0-36.0 5 9.5 8.3 2.5-24.0 66 6.3 6.2 0.5-36.0 36 7.7 10.3 0.5-60.0 5 2.5 2.2 0.5-6.0 5 11.6 7.1 7.0-24.0 45 4.0 3.8 0.5-14.0 37 6.2 6.7 0.5-32.0 8 6.4 7.8 0.5-25.0 56 6.1 7.5 0.5-35.0 28 6.8 7.1 0.5-28.0 20 4.1 4.0 0.5-12.5 13 6.7 8.1 1.0-32.0 8 6.2 4.9 0.5-14.0 1 4 4.9 1 1.5 0.5-12.0 4.5 1 1 -6.0 5 33.0 -1.0 .90 0.65 0.5-2.0 6 12.4 11.1 0.5-33.0 11 3.2 3.7 0.5-12.0 - 4 2.1 0 0 0 0 1 0 2 25.5 4 9.0 30.0 0.5-6.0 0 0 5.0 3.0-48.0 0.5-30.0 9 9.2 15.0 0.5-48.0 - - - - - -- - -- - - - - - - - w 0 \0 �Table l5.--Mean hours of hunting by successful hunters related Age Class ~Months2 to sex and age structure of the subunit mule deer samples, 1965 (Continued). Subunit No. 4 1 Statistic Male Female Male 7 5 Female Male Female Male Others Female Male Female Male All Subunits Female w All Age Classes+ b N x SD Range + 12 5.2 4.8 0.5-17.0 5 5.8 5.7 2.0-12.0 Includes deer which were not assigned 92 4.6 5.9 0.5-35.0 64 5.3 4.0 0.5-15.0 to age classes. 58 6.0 6.4 0.5-35.0 47 6.7 7.7 0.5-32 34 7.6 7.8 0.5-30.0 11 10.7 17.3 1.0-60.0 41 6.6 6.7 0.5~36.0 30 8.2 10.2 0.5-48.0 237 5.8 6.4 0.5-36.0 157 6.7 8.1 0.5-60.0 �- 311 - Antler Beam Data 1965.':'-Antler beam measurements are described statistically by age class in Table 16. Antler point and brow tine enumeration data are presented on a percentage basis by age class in Tables 17 and 18, respectively •. 1960-65, inclusive.--The results of significance tests comparing various facets of the antler data to selected environmental variables will be described in subsequent reports. The possible influence of relative antler size on hunter selectivity will also be explored. Discussion: Because of the large amount of error made on the chi square portion of the 1960-64 Harvest Analysis data by the Colorado State University Statistics Laboratory, and a somewhat modified analytical approach; final analyses will probably be delayed until late this year. There are two major factors which greatly inhibit the analyses and interpretation of most check station age structure data obtained under the conditions of this study. The first factor is the small sample from which inferences relative to the population must be based. The second factor is the unknown importance of sampling bias on these inferences. Sampling bias can be reasonably expected from these areas: (1) hunter selectivity, (2) behavior-climatic interactions, (3) differential vulnerability of age and sex classes to hunting, (4) assigning deer to age classes on the basis of subjective estimates of tooth replacement and wear, and (5) various levels of kill density both within years on specific areas and between-years on the total management area. Some indication o_f the existance of sampling bias is suggested by conflicting data on samples of males derived from kill samples as discussed herein and samples of males obtained on January herd structure routes. Thus, as compared to 1964, the 1965 kill sample revealed more males and the 1965 herd structure sample fewer males (Anderson 1966b). It is obvious that our age structure samples and perhaps herd structure samples are only gross approximations of population dynamics. Empirically, the proportion of female yearlings to all older females is probably the most reliable.index of population change. Population dynamics of mule deer will remain a subject of conjecture until aging techniques are employed which permit accurate placement of the kill sample in year-classes. The technique of Low and Cowan (1963) may be the method of choice. In order to provide adequate numbers within each year-class, however, it is probable that a total sample size of about 1,500 deer of each sex will be necessary. In addition, fairly constant levels of hunting pressure and harvest may be essential to obtain reliable data on female mortality rates and mean life expectancy. Hunter selectivity may prevent such population inferences from male kill samples. �- 312 ~ Table 16.--Statistica1 description of antler measurements from Unit 19 mule deer as sampled at the check stations, 1965. Age Class ~Months} Measurement+ N x - SD 90% Confidence Limits Lower Upper 16-18 Baam Diameter, Left Beam Diameter, Right Beam Length, Left Beam Length, Right Spread, Inside 62 62 61 61 54 18.13 17.84 23.41 23.36 23.72 2.14 2.33 3.91 4.21 4.23 17.68 17.35 22.58 22.47 22.77 18.58 18.33 24.24 24.25 24.67 28-30 Beam Diameter, Left Beam Diameter, Right Beam Length, Left Beam Length, Right Spread, Inside 45 45 45 45 41 25.89 25.96 36.29 36.9l 39.07 2.72 2.66 5.21 4.81 5.51 25.22 25.30 35.01 35.73 37.65 26.56 26.61 37.57 38.09 40.49 40-52 Beam Diameter, Left Beam Diameter, Right Beam Length, Left Beam Length, Right Spread, Inside 56 56 56 56 56 30.63 30.70 44.57 44.84 44.09 2.83 3.17 5.01 4.47 6.26 30.00 30.00 43.47 43.85 42.71 31.25 31.40 45.67 45.82 45.47 64-76 Beam Diameter, Left Beam Diameter, Right Beam Length, Left Beam Length, Right Spread, Inside 20 20 20 20 20 37.05 37.55 50.00 49.85 49.45 2.19 3.97 6.45 4.30 6.91 36.21 36.02 47.51 48.19 46.78 37.90 39.08 52.49 51.51 52.12 88-100 Beam Diameter, Left Beam Diameter, Right Beam Length, Left Beam Length, Right Spread, Inside 6 6 6 6 6 38.67 39.67 53.67 54.67 58.00 3.78 2.50 5.32 3.67 7.46 35.55 37.60 49.28 51.64 51.85 41. 78 41. 73 58.05 57.69 64.15 112+ Beam Diameter, Left Beam Diameter, Right Beam Length, Left Beam Length, Right Spread, Inside 4 4 4 4 3 39.25 37.00 54.25 51.75 . 53.67 3.59 2.58 4.11 1.50 6.66 35.03 33.97 49.42 49.99 42.44 43.47 40.03 59.08 53.51 64.89 + Beam diameters measured to the nearest'rom; beam lengths, antler spread to nearest ~ cm. �Table 17. --The numbers and percentages of 189 Unit 19 mule deer by age class in'symmetrical and non-synnnetrical antler point categories as sampled at the cheek station, 1965.+ N 0 0 6 39 1 0 46 Age C 1ass (Months 2 64-76 N % % 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10.7 13 69.6 65.0 1.8 10.0 2 0 0 0 82.1 15 75.0 N 0 0 1 1 1 0 3 % 0 0 16.7 16.7 16.7 0 50.1 N 0 0 0 1 0 1 2 % 0 0 0 25.0 0 25.0 50.0 .0 0 1 0 4 0 2 1 2 0 0 10 0 0 1.8 0 7.1 0 3.6 1.8 3.6 0 0 17.9 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 16.7 16.7 0 0 16.7 50.1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 10.0 15.0 0 0 0 25.0 O· 2 1 2 0 0 0 0 12 0 0 11.1 4.4 4.4 2.2 4.4 0 0 0 0 26.5 45 100.0 56 100.0 20 100.0 6 100.0 No. Antler Points Left Right 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 Subtotals N 8 36 3 0 0 0 47 % 13.8 62.1 5.2 0 0 0 81.1 N 0 8 17 8 0 0 33 % 0 17.8 37.8 17.8 0 0 73.4 1 2 1 2 2 3 2 3 3 4 2 .4 4 3 4 5 4 5 7 5 7 9 Subtotals 3 2 2 3 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 11 5.2 3.4 3.4 5.2 1.7 0 0 0 0 0 0 18.9 0 0 5 Total 58 100.0 + 28-30 16-18 2 40-52 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 3 0 88-100 112+ An antler point is an antler appendage 2.5 em or greater in length, excluding the brow tines. Totals N 8 44 27 62 4 1 146 % 4.2 23.3 14.3 32.8 2.1 0.5 77 .2 l' 1 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 25.0 25.0 0 50.0 1 7 5 3 1 1 43 1.6 1.1 4.2 2.6 3.7 0.5 3.7 2.6 1.6 0.5 0.5 22.6 4 100.0 189 100.0 0 0 3 2 8 5 7 co •.... w �Table 18.--The incidence of antler brow tines from 195 Unit 19 mule deer summarized by age class, 1965. Age Class (Months) Brow Tines Present By Beam Left Right Both L & R Percent Percent No. No. No. Percent 16-18 1 7.1 3 17.6 3 28-30 7 50.0 7 41.2 40-52 4 28.6 6 64-76 2 14.3 1 Brow Tines Absent Total No. Percent No. Percent Total 4.2 7 6.8 57 62.0 64 11 15.3 25 24.3 20 21. 7 45 35.3 34 47.2 44 42.7 12 l3.0 56 5.9 16 22.2 19 18.4 1 1.1 20 88-100 0 0 0 0 4 5.6 4 3.9 2 2.2 6 112+ 0 0 0 0 4 5.6 4 3.9 0 0.0 4 Totals 14 100.0 17 100.0 72 100.0 103 100.0 92 100.0 195 Percentages of Total 7.2 . w f...J. +=I 8.7 36.9 ·52.8 47.2 100.0 �- 315 LITERATURE CITED Anderson, A. E. 1965. Harvest analysis. Work Plan 5 - Job 3 Completion Report, pp. 195-223. In Game Research Report, January, 1965. P-R Project W-105-R. Colorado Game, Fish, and Parks Dept., Denver, 246 pp. (processed). Anderson, A. E. 1966a. Harvest analysis. Work Plan 5 - Job 3 Completion Report. P-R Project W-105-R, Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Dept., Denver. 21 pp , (typewritten manuscript). Anderson, A. E. 1966b. Population density and structure. Work Plan 4 - Job 1 Completion Report. P-R Project W-105-R, Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Dept., Denver, 24 pp. (typewritten manuscript). Gill, J. 1953. Remarks on the kill curves of female deer. 9th Northeast Wild1. Conf ,, Bretton Wood, N. H. 12 pp. (mimeo). Low, W. A. and 1. Met. Cowan. 1963. Age determination of deer by annular structure of dental cementum. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 27 (3):466-471. Robinette, W. L., D. A. Jones, G. Rogers, and J. S. Gashwiler. 1957. Notes on tooth development and wear for Rocky Mountain mule deer. J. Wild1. Mgmt. 21(1):1-16. Riney, T. 1956. Differences in proportion of fawns to hinds in red deer (Cervus elaphus) from several New Zealand environments. Nature 177:488-489. Snedecor, G. W. 1946. Statistical methods applied to experiments in agriculture and biology. 4th Ed. Iowa State College Press, Ames, 485 pp. Prepared by: Date: Allen E. Anderson Approved by:__ Associate Wildlife Researcher ~J~an~u~a~ry~,_=1~9~6~6 _ ~D:.:::e:.:::a:::n:-:=E:..: •.....!;.;M:;:::e:.:::d:.:; _ Project Leader Ferd Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator ��Januazy, 1966 - 317 - FINAL JOB COMPLETION RESEARCH State of Project No. 5 Job No. 4~ Covered: Personnel: SEGMENT . ....;C::;.;O;.,:L::,::O:..:::RA=D.;::.O _ An Ecological Investigation of the Cache la Poudre Deer Herd, Colorado W-105-R-6 Work Plan No. Period PROJECT REPORT January, Physiological _ 1965 - December, Sagebrush Studies Nutrition 1965. Julius G. Nagy SUMMARY The volatile oils were obtained from current annual growth of leaves and twigs, flowers and shoots of three species of Artemisia, A. tridentata, A. nova, and A. frigida. In general, the highest oil content was found in A. tridentata leaves and twigs (approximately 2 to 5 per cent on a dry matter basis), followed by A. nova (1 to 2 per cent). Flowers usually contained less oils than leaves and twigs. The oil content varied during the seasons, being lowest in the early summer and highest in the late summer. Variations in the oil content also were observed by localities especially in A. tridentata. The volatile oils consist of approximately 10 to 15 individual components depending on the species, plant part, season, and locality. Camphor and cineole have been positively identified in most of the samples. Camphor usually constitutes the highest amount present among the oils. Other compounds have been only tentatively identified by gas chromatographic tracings. The oil constituents show diurnal variations and variations according to species, seasons, and localities. The use of the essential oils in chemotaxonomic studies appears promising. The antibacterial action of the oils of A. tridentata have been investigated on aerobic bacterial species as well as on rumen bacteria obtained from wild and domestic deer. Bacterial response varies significantly according to species of bacteria. Statistically significant differences were obtained when the response to the oils of wild deer rumen microorganism were compared with captive deer. There is an indication that sage grouse prefer for feeding a type of A. tridentata which contains the least essential oils of the taxonomically similar species found in a particular region. �- 318 - ACKNOWLEOOEMEa'ilTS The following report covers research work mainly accomplished under a National Science Foundation research grant. Certain phases of the work in this report, however, were supported by other agencies. Results of work executed under these phases are included in this report because it was felt that they have enlarged the scope of the research and contribute to the over-all understanding of the results. The Colorado Department of Game, Fish and Parks supported the work on deer rumen bacterial studies (Federal Aid Project W-I05-R). Mr. Dean E. Medin, Project Leader, and Mr. Allen E. Anderson, Senior Game Biologist, cooperated during this phase extensively. Another phase, survey work on the essential oil content of sagebrush utilized by sage grouse in the Walden, Colorado area, was made possible through the Colorado State University Cooperative Wildlife Research Unit, thhough the cooperation of Mr. Bruce Gill, Research Assistant. �- 319 - INTRODUCTION This report covers a two year study supported by a grant from the National Science Foundation, GB 1507. Together with this final report, a project proposal is being submitted for continuation of certain phases of this research. A literature review is attached to the proposal. For this reason, the literature review is omitted here, and the reader is referred to the appropriate section of the project propos-al. Three species of Artemisia, Artemisia tridentata, Artemisia nova, and Artemisia frigida were under study. A. tridentata is by far the most abundant of the sagebrush species in Colorado. It is usually found at. elevations ranging from 5,000 to 7,000 feet. Several subspecies have been recognized such as ~ tridentata subsp. tridentata. ~ tridentata subsp. vaseyana. Crossing is also frequent among the species; 1. e., A. tr-identata X ~ nova, ~ tridentata X A. arbuscula (Beetle, 1960). -The height of the plants can vary from 20 to 300 cm. ~ ~ is very restricted in its growth range in Colorado. It is found only in isolated stands in Gunnison, Mesa, Montrose, Moffat, Delta and La Plata Counties (Beetle, 1960). The plants are low growing (10 to 50 em, high), and for this reason they are usually covered with snow from November until April. They yield very little annual growth which consists mostly of flowering shoots and leaves. ~. frigida is a herbaceous, low growing (10 to 40 ern. ) plant found throughout Colorado at varying elevations and many times in association with A. tridentata. During preliminary studies, attempts were made to collect plant materials from soils of varying pH values. The attempt, however, has been abandoned because the plants seem to be restricted by pH. ~ tridentata has been found to grow in soils with pH values ranging from 6. 6 to 7.5, while ~ nova and~ frigida grow at pH 6.6 to 7. O. Taxonomic identification of the collected plant materials was done by .Dr-, H. D. Harrington of Colorado State University and Dr. A. A. Beetle and A. L. Young of the University of Wyoming. Harrington treats A. nova as a S'lr species of A. tridentata, while Beetle refers to it as a 'separate species. The A. tridenWa samples collected in this study could be divided into A. tridentata tridentata and A. tridentata vaseyana, according to Beetle. �- 320 - Since this work is concerned with plant taxonomy only for identification of the plants; the names ~ tridentata and ~ nova \fill be used throughout the text. However, special references will be made to A. tridentata tridentata and ~ tridentata vaseyana at appropriate places.. EXPERIMENT AL PROCEDURES Selection and location of sampling sites Seasonal variations in essential oil content and ratios of the individual oil components have been studied on A .. tr identata, ~ nova, and~. frigida. The reasons for selecting the sites were accessibility during winter, differences in slope. and s oil characteristics such as deep or shallow soil. ~ tridentata has been collected seasonally at two sampling sites at the Seven Mile Creek region, approximately 40 miles northwest of Fort Collins. One site was a gentle. s outh-Taci.ng slope with deep soil (Site 1); the other. approximately 500 yards from the first site, a steep slope facing north on shallow, rocky soil (Site 2). Besides these permanent sampling sites, A. tridentata samples were collected in the fall of 1964 for a survey study from the follow ing localities in Colorado: Walden. Hayden. Elk Springs, Montrose, Cortez, Fort Garland, and Sargent. A. tridentata tridenf:ata as wen as A. tridenlata vaseyana were collected. Several trials were also set up to study diurnal variations in the essential oil content and composition of ~ tridentata. However, none of these trials could be carried out successfully because of weather changes during the morning hours. In only one trial could collections be carried out until noon. In this trial, plants were collected parallel to the Seven Mile Creek (close to Site 1 and 2) in May, 1965. The first collection was made at 5:00 a. m. Air temperature at plant level was 0 C.. The sun started to shine on the plants at 6:05 a. m. Two other collections were made at 8:00 a. m. and at 12:00 a. m. with air temperatures of 7 C and 25 C respectively. Further procedures on handling and processing the plant materials will be described later. Current annual growth of leaves and twigs of A. tridentata were also collected in the North Park (Walden) area of Colorado. Sage grouse ecology .:::l studie-d in this project. Mr. Gills observed that the birds utilize for food d. short sagebrush found on and near to the top of the hills of this gently rolling \fv �- 321 - Figure 1. Collection of the cur-r-ent annual growth of A. tridentata (above) and A. nova (below). �- 322 terrain. For cover and roosting the birds preferred a higher type of sagebrush which was found at or near the bottom of the hiJls and gulches. Two collections, July and August, were made on several sites. and the oil content and composition investigated in a manner described later,' A, ~ has been collected seasonally approximately 8 miles northwest of Elk Springs, Colorado, on a genUe slope facing southeast (Site 1) and approximately two miles east of Laramie, Wyoming, on a flat range (Site 2). The two s Ite s are approximately 250 miles apart:. ~ frigjda collections were made at the junction of Buckhorn Road and Highway 14 in Poudre Canyon on a slope facing southwest (SHe 1) and in the Seven MUe Creek region around the drainage channel of the creek {Site 2). Collections were made in January. March, the forenoon hours and only in dry weather. May, August, and October in Col le ction of plant: materiaJ Collection started approximately the top of the slope in a nearly straight 50 yards parallel to the first collection plant s was collected. 30 yards from the road working toward line. coming down again appr oxirnate ly line. Usually material from 200 to 400 Plant twigs were taken i.ndiv i.dual ly with clippers (Figure 1), and the annual growth of each twig collected in plastic containers. Fl.ower.ing shoots w e r e collected separately from leaves and twigs. The filled containers were pJaced immediately in insulated bags containing dry ice and shipped to the laboratory. In the laboratory the plant: material was cut, up further in lengths of about cm., mixed thor-oughly in a large container, divided into 100 g. portions and kept frozen unt.iI distillation. Samples for dry mailer determinafion were air dried for 2 weeks to prevent excessive evaporation of the essential oils which occurs in a drying oven. Distillation Plant material (100 g) was taken from the freezer and pla ce d in a round om di s t i ll at ron flask 15 liter capacity) provided with a c alIb r at e d oil trap and d. 24 em. long condenser. The flask was I'ilIe d slightly less than half fun with w at e r and borle d for' 6 hours w ith an electric heating mantle. The 6 hours �- 323 distillation time was established in preliminary trials which indicated that 98 per cent of the oils were obtained during this period. At the end of the distillation period. oils were drained into a separate water trap» allowed to stand for 15 minutes. then drained into glass vials. weighed. and stored in a refrigerator. Gas -chromatography The nature of the research necessitated the use of two gas-chromatographs. For analytical determinations of the essential oil components present in various s am pl.es , an Aerograph HY-'Fy 600 .. with hydrogen flame detector was used. This instrument allowed the use of small (1 micro-liter) sample size. . To calculate the actual amount of the various constituents present in a particular essential oil sample was not possible during this research because preliminary work indicated that the recorder response (peak area) and the amount of a particular constituent present is not always a linear relationship. Y Peak areas were calculated by measuring the total peak height and the width of the peak (at half of peak height). and the two values were multiplied by each other. From each sample. 5 such determinations were made, the average counts for each peak calculated and converted to percentages. The calculated percentages obtained. therefore, do not necessarily represent actual relationships between the actual amounts of the constituents present in a particular sample. These percentages, however, are of value in relative comparisons of the differences in the amounts of the oil constituents present in various samples. It should be said that rough comparisons between the amounts present are possible. Peaks were numbered according to corresponding resolution times from 1 to 16. For this reason a peak number, although suggestive, does not necessarily mean the same compound. To separate and collect the individual oil constituents, an AerographAutoprep Model A-7003./ with thermal conductivity cell was used. Since the essential oil samples consisted of 10 to 15 individual oil components, two operations were necessary to separate them. According to preliminary gaschromatograms. peaks were divided into 4 major portions. Then. 200 microlit.er amounts were inject.ed directly on the column; and; using isothermal ~/ Nitrogen as carrier, gas flow 20/20 ml. per minute; 10" x 1/8" analyt.ic al column with 20 per cent Degs on 60/80 HMDS; programmed temperature from 115 to 180 C; Land M Spedomax H recorder. ~/ Helium as carrier, gas flow 200 ml. per minute; 20" x 3/8" preparative c o lurnn with 20 per cent Degs on 60/80 AW Chromo W; Land M Speedomat H recorder. �324 temperature at 180 C, each of these 4 portions containing several components of the oils were collected into a separate collecting bottle. The collecting bottles were immersed in alcohol containing liberal amounts of dry ice. After this preliminary s epa r atf.on, the collected separates were' injected again to obtain complete separation of the individual components. Only the essential oils of ~ tridentata were studied this way. Identification of the essential oil components Tentative identification of the separated compounds was attempted by injecting the separates with known reference compounds.}) Problems have been encountered with these reference compounds because of impurities present. For this reason, the reference compounds were also separated by preparatory gas -chromatography. The reference compound was mixed with the particular separate, and using programmed temperature (115 to 180 c) one micro-liter of the sample was injected into the Aerograph HY"'Fy 600. If the resolution time of the reference compound and the unknown separate corresponded, the compound was assumed to be identified tentatively. Positive identifications were carried out on five separates elemental analysis. molecular weight, and infra-red spectra. Aerobic bacteriological using techniques To obtain information on the bacteriostatic and bacter ic ida'l effects of the essential oils, the follow ing aerobic organisms were selected: Bacillus subtnis (Gram + rod, s por-efor-mer-)., Escherichia coli (Gram .- rod). Neisseria sicca (Gram - cocc i}, and Staphylococc~aurens (Gramt- cocci). Two essential oils, the oils of A. tridentata (Seven Mile region, fall collection) and that of A. nova (Elk Spring-;:- fall collection), were tested on these organisms. Nutrient broth containing O. 05 per cent of Tween 80 (previously shown not to be antibacterial) was divided into 9 ml. amounts in screw capped vials (12. 5 x 1. 5 cm.), sterilized, and cooled. To each tube one of the following ];..1 Obtained from K and K Laboratories, Eastman Organic Chemicals, Rochester. Plainview, New York. New York, and �- 325 amounts of essential oils were added: 0. 2, 4, etc., up to 20 micro~ liters. Then with an autopipett.e , 1 m l.. of actively growing (24 hours incubation in nutrient broth) and appropriately diluted bacterial suspension was added to each tube. The dilutions were made to have approximate1y 104 to 105 bacteria per m l, of broth at the start of the incubation period. Tubes were incubated 0 at 37 C for 24 hours. shaken vigorously every two hours for the first 14 hours to obtain uniform contact of oils with the bacteria, and then appropriately diluted, and plated out using Tryptone Glucose Yeast Extract Agar (Difco) to obtain the numbers of Hving bacteria. Plates were incubated for 24 hours, and those containing between 30 to 300 colonies counted with the aid of a Quebec Colony Counter. The method selected for statistical analysis of the data was to calculate t -values for differences between oil levels and also between different oils within different experiments with the same bacterial species. These were then pooled to test the significance of the differences between oils. The probability of obtaining a t -value greater than the observed t+va lue for each t-test performed was obtained. Since under the null hypothesis of no difference between the action of the oils of A. tridentat.a and ~ ~ these probabilities have a uniform distribution, a chi -square variable could be performed; that is, - 2 log rPtt> t observedTI is distributed as chi -'square with 2 degrees of freedom. L Not all of the data were used in these tests since variation between duplicate samples .must exist for at least one of the means in the t-test. This eliminated cases where both means were recorded as less than one and where one observation was mi.ssf.ng, In cases where one value of less than one existed, It was assumed to be zero. Anaerobic rume!l bacteriological techniques In general, anaerobic techniques followed the procedures of Hungate and Bryant and Burkey (1953). The composition of the various media used for culturing deer rumen organisms followed Bryant and Burkey (I953) and Bryant. and Robinson (1961) with some modifications in the percentage composition of the ingredients. (1950) Rumen contents of mule deer were obtained in three different series of experiments. In t.he first, wild deer from the Cache La Poudre River drainage were shot during late March and early April, taken to the Colorado Department of Game. Fish, and Parks research laboratory. Here the rumen cont ents were taken approximately 4 to 6 hours after death. An of the c es s ed rumen contents contained sagebrush (A. tridentata) leaves and twigs. �- 326 For the second type of trial, deer rumen contents were obtained from the Walden, Colorado, area deer herd (Figure 2). This herd is known to winter almost exclusively on a range consisting largely of a dwarf type (10 to 30 cm high) ~ tridentata. Although the rumen contents showed a fair amount of sagebrush, other plants and fresh grass have made up the bulk. The reason was probably that snow was already disappearing and the animals were moving up to their summer range where they could find a variety of plants besides sagebrush. In the third type of trial, the rumen contents of a yearling male and female were used. These animals were raised from a few days of age in captivity, receiving a diet of ad libitum concentrate and alfalfa hay. During the trial, the animals were confined to a cage (approximately 8 x 4 ft. ) and received the same diet twice a day. Both consumed 800 to 900 grams of concentrate but ate only occasionally from the alfalfa hay. Rumen samples were obtained by stomach tube (1 cm inside diameter) with the aid of a vacuum pump. In order to facilitate the removal of the rumen contents, the concentrate was run through a Wiley Mill. Figure 2. Collection of deer rumen contents. The purpose of these trials was also to investigate how rumen microorganisms from animals on different diets would react to the essential oils. Therefore, in every trial, bacteria were grown on media containing a high �- 327 percentage of the same rumen fluid from which the bacteria were obtained. In preliminary tr ia Is , it was found that rumen bacteria from wild deer somev times do not grow well on media containing a differ~nt rumen fluid. The composition of the anaerobic solution used to dilute rumen contents prior inocculat.ion was the same as described by Bryant and. Burkey (1953). Throughout the experiments , the following three types of media were used: Rumen Fluid Nutrient Brot.h (RFNB)>>Rumen Fluid Cellulose Broth (RFCB). and Rumen Fluid Agar Medium (RFAM). Composition of each medium is given in Tables 1, 2, and 3, respectively. Rumen fluid for an media was prepared by pressing it through four layers of cheesecloth, centrifuging for 5 minutes at 10,000 RPM with a Serval SS-3 automatic superspeed centrifuge. Then the supernatant was poured off and centrifuged again for 1 hour at 17 000 RPM. After that, the supernatant was collected and appropriate amounts were transferred to round bottom (500 ml) flasks containing the ingredients for the particular medium. The media were sterilized, appropriate amounts of cysteine HCl and sodium p Table 1. Composition of Rumen Fluid Nutrient Broth (RFNB). Ingr-edients per 100 ml. of broth Glucose 0.05 g Cellobiose 0.05 g Soluble Starch 0.05 g Resazurin O. 1 ml. Tween 80 0.05 ml. Mineral Solution No. 1 3. 0 ml. (Bryant and Robinson, 1952) Mineral Solution No. 2 3. 0 ml. (Bryant and Robinson; 1952) Distilled 30.0 m1. 60.0 ml. Cyst e ine nc: 2. 0 ml. (3% solution) Sodium Carbonate 5. 0 ml. (6% solution) (0.1% solution) i Wafe r Centrifuged rumen fluid AHf'r Sterilization: �- 328 .:. carbonate solutions added and 9 ml of media transferred to tubes. For RFNB and RFCB, 12.5 x 1. 2 cm. test tubes and for RFAM, 14.8 x 1. 5 ern tubes with appropriate rubber stoppers were used, Cellulose suspension was prepared by making up 2 per cent suspension withWhatman No, 1 filter paper. breaking up the paper for 10 minutes with a Waring blender, then transferring it to' a beaker and stirrlng for 72 hours with a magnetic stirrer. , Cellulose broth was transferred into the test tubes while constantly stirring with a magnetic stirrer ~ the magnet being added to the flask before sterilization. Final pH of the media was 6.5. Table 2. Composition of Rumen Fluid Cellulose Ingredients per 100 ml. of broth Broth (RFCB). Peptone (Difc o) 0.05 g Cellobiose 0.05 g Resazurin O. l ml. (0. 1% solution) ml. (Bryant and Robinson, 1952) Mineral Solution No. 1 3.0 Mineral Solution No. 2 3. 0 ml. Tween 80 (Bryant and Robinson, 1952) 0.05 m l, Distilled Water 24.0 Cellulose Suspension 5. 0 ml. (2% suspension) Centrifuged Rumen Fluid ml. 58.0 ml. After Sterilization: Cysteine HCI Sodium Carbonate 2. 0 ml. (3% solution) 5. 0 ml. (6% solution) �- 329 - Table 3. Composition of Rumen Fluid Agar Medium (RFAM)~ Ingredients per 100 ml. of Medium Glucose 0.05 g Cellobiose 0.05 g Soluble starch 0.05 g Resazurin O. 1 Agar 2.0 g ml. (0. 1 % solution) Mineral Solution No. 1 3. 0 m l, (Bryant and Robinson. 1952) Mineral Solution No. 2 3. 0 m I, (Bryant and Robinson, 1952) DisUlled Water 27. 0 ml. Centrifuged 58.0 ml. Rumen Fluid After Sterilization: Cysteine HC1 Sodium Carbonate 2.0 ml. 5.0 ml. From the strained fluid, 10 ml. was taken and placed in a refrigerator until the media were ready for inoculation. At this time, dilutions were made up to 10-4 with the anaerobic diluting solution. Then, with an autopipette, 1 ml. amounts were transferred to tubes containing 9 ml amounts of RFNB and RFCB to which tubes O. 2. 4. etc .• up to 20 micro--liters of the essential oils of A. tridentata (Seven Mile Creek sample) were added previously. After inoculating these series, further dilutions were made from the bottle containing 10-4 dilution up to 10-7, 10 -:-~and appropriate dilutions were inoculated into tubes of RF AM which had been melted previously and ma'inta ine d at 4,)° C in a water bath. The inoculated tubes of agar were rotated under the r'( 1-:..1 water tap to form roll tube cultures. The cultures were incubated at 400 C for 3 days, and then colony counts were determined from average counts of two to four roll tubes. Usually, cultures from which counts were made contained �- 330 between 10 to 80 colonies. RFNB was incubated for 24 hours; after which appropriate dilutions were made from each tube" l , 0 ml and O. 1 ml amounts transferred to roll tubes, prepared as previously described, and after 3 days counted. RFCB was incubated for one week and the disappearance of cellulose observed daily and recorded. Lactic acid determinations were also made after one week of incubation. The method used was according to Barker and Summerson (1941). Statistical analysis of data obtained on rumen bacterial survivors wa.s performed essentially in the same manner as with data obtained on aerobic bacterial survivors. RESULTS AND DISCUSSION Volatile oil content of Artemisia spp. In general, the highest oil content was found in !2:.. . tr identata, followed by ~ nova, and by ~ frigida (Tables 4, 5, 6, 7, and Figure 3.). Current annual growth of leaves and twigs contained higher amounts of the o i ls than flowers and shoots. The only exception is the August collection of ~ frigida in which flowers contained more oils than the leaves. Variations according to seasons definitely occur in the leaves and twigs and also in the flowers and shoots. This variation is especially clear in the case of ~ tridentata (Table 4, Figure 3). The oil content of leaves and twigs is nearly constant during winter. Around May, when abundant moisture is available and the plants begin to grow. the oil content drops to the lowest level. At the end of the growing season, the oils seem to have accumulated con- . siderably in the leaves and twigs and also in the flowers and flowering shoots. Values obtained on the essential oil content of A. tridentata are in line with earlier reports. Kinney et a1. (1941) reportedfue presence of 1 to 2 per cent of essential oils in ~ tridentata during fall collection. These workers, however, collected flowers and flowering shoots. while for this study leaves and flowers were collected separately. Values obtained on flowers alone seem to agree with the va lue s reported by Kinney and his coworkers. The same seasonal pattern change might occur in A. nova; but from the presented data, this cannot be established (Figure 3): The essential oil content of ~ frigida leaves does not seem to vary greatly according to seasons (Figure 3). on content of flowers, however, exceeds that of leaves jn \tlgllSt. �Table 4·. Seasonal ._______ variation2 of the volatile oil content of A. ~ridentata at two sites and during ~.~L~~E§: Grams of oils Eer 100. grams dry matter Year of Collection Month of Collection 1 1 1 1 1964 1964 1964 1964 1964 1 1 1 1 1 xli s Twigs st .'05 x January March May August October 2.93 2.61 2.10 3.51 3.00 0.04 0.10 0.04 0.12 0.06 0.11 0.32 0$13 0.39 0.18 1965 1965 1965 1965 1965 January March May August October 2.65 2.68 2.00 3064 2.97 0.03 0.08 0.06 0.29 0.06 0.09 0.25 0.20 0.89 0.19 2 2 2 2 2 1964 1964 1964 1964 1964 January March May August October 3.06 3.26 2017 3.55 3.18 0.10 0.16 0.12 0.06 0.06 0.31 0.51 0.38 0.19 0.18 0.89 0.39 0.04 0.01 0.11 0.02 1.62 1.26 0.10 0.21 .0.30 0.64 2 2 2 2 2 1965 1965 1965 1965 1965 January March May August October 2.95 2.97 2.10 3.39 3.23 0.05 0.10 0.07 0.02 0.04 0.15 0.30 0.23 0.08 0.12 0.89 0.42 0.07 0.04 0.20 0.13 1.66 1.10 0.04 0.07 0.11 0.22 Site _. 1 Y n = 3 x = mean _.__ Le~~~and Flowers and Shoots xy s 0.71 0.41 0.04 0.02 0.13 0.07 1.55 1.03 0.04 0.03 0.13 0.09 0.66 0.35 0.04 0.04 0.12 0.12 1.72 1.01 0.19 0.05 0.57 0.14 $_ t.OS x co w I-' �Table 5. Seasonal variations of the volatile oil content of .!2. ~ 'at two sites and during two years Grams of oils per 100 gramE dry matter Site {ear of Ccllection Month of Collection Leaves and Twigs x- 1/ s t •05s-x ,Flowers and Shoots -1/ x -~ t •05 E_ Elk Elk Elk Elk Springs Springs Springs Springs 1964 1964 1964 .1964 January March July September 1.53 0.13 0,39 0.29 0.06 0.19 2.10 1.92 0.14 0,q3 0.42 0.08 1.04 0.80 0.07 0.02 0.22 0.05 Elk Elk Elk Elk Springs Springs Springs Springs 1965 1965 1965 1965 January March July September 1.47 0.05 0.20 0.32 0.07 0.20 1.04 1.95 0.04 0.03 0.11 0.11 1.04 0.72 0.04 0.08 0.11 0.24 Laramie Laramie Laramie Laramie 1964 1964 1964 1964 January March July September 1.17 0.12 0.36 0.23 0.03 0.08 1.79 1.45 0.16 0.08 0.49 0.24 1).57 0.04 0.11 Laramie Laramie Laramie Laramie 1965 1965 1965 1965 January March July September 1.20 0.10 0.29 0.25 0.04 0.12 2.05 1.48 0.26 0.08 0.78 0.25 0.58 0.36 0.11 1/ n = 3, x = mean X w co ro �Table 6, .-----.~ Seasonal variat~ons of the volatile oil content of A. frigida at two sites and during two years Grams of oils Eer 100 grams dry matter Site ':ear of Collection Month of Collection Leaves and Twigs x-1/ s t~05 Flowers and Shoots Sx x-1:/ s 0,,28 0,,29 0.02 0.04 0.08 .0.12 1,,26 0.57 0.03 0.05 0.09 0.16 0,,23 0,,30 0,,04 0.01 0.14 0.05 1,,23 0.45 0,,09 0.02 0.28 0.06 0.24 0.20 0.03 0.05 0.11 0.16 1.17 0.48 0,,10_ 0.05 -O 0-31 0.14 0,,27 0.24 0.03 -0.03 0.10 0.+1 1,,21 0.54 0.06 0,,04 0.20 0.13 1 1 1 1 1 1964 1964 1964 1964 1964 January March May August October 1,,08 0.50 0.82 0.45 0.52 0.08 0.01 0.07 0.05 0.02 0.24 0,,05 0.22 0.17 Oe07 1 1 1 1 1 1965 1965 1965 1965 1965 January March May August October 1.07 0.55 0.81 0.55 0.44 0.14 0.05 0.10 0.05 0.04 0.42 0.13 0,,31 0.16 0.13 2 1964 1964 1964 1964 1964 January March May August October 0,,88 0.40 0.62 0.25 0.54 0.05 0,,02 0.04 0.05 0.10 0.17 0.07 0.12 0.15 0,,36 1965 1965 1965 1965 1965 January March May August October 0.98 0.43 0.52 0 34 0 47 0 10 0.02 0.06 0.03 0.05 0,,32 0.07 0.17 0.09 0.17 t.05 Sx lAJ lAJ lAJ I 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1:/ n = 3 I - = mean X 0 0 0 �Table 7, Va~iations of the volatile oil content from several localities of various ~~ tridentata in Colorado 1/ Local.ity Subspecies in September. species 1964 Grams of oils per 100 grams dry matter GrowthForm Leaves and Twigs xV s t ,05 Flowers s- x and Shoots xV s t ,05 sx Montrose tridentata M 4,,14 0.06 0 .• 19 1.53 0.08 0,,23 Sargent vaseyana M 3.72 0.03 0.10 2 .. 00 0 .. 09 0 .. 28 Elk Springs tridentata H 4.05 0.07 0,21 1..67 0",06 0,,19 Cortez tridentata M 4.. 01 0.11 0.33 2,,56 0 .. 03 0,,10 Fort Garland tridentata S 4 67 0.09 0.. 28 2.38 0,,04 0.12 Walden vaseyana M 3.04 0",13 0 39 2.39 0.08 0.23 Walden vaseyana M 5.34 0.13 0.39 1..27 0.03 0.10 Hayden vaseyana H 4",19 0.15 0,,45 1.54 0.. 03- 0.09 11 S = less than 20 cmo high, V n = 3 , x = mean M Q = 20 to 100 cm., H ~ higher 0 than 100 crno w w .po- �- 335- 4.0 3.0 -------------------- a ---- ...I CI) 0 ...I c ... 2.0 Z SITE I SITE 2 11/ en en 11/ 1.0 ~ b 0 MAY AUG OCT JAN MAR MONTHS A. TRIDENTATA. a. leaves and twigs, b. flowers and shoots. 3.0 ...I CI) 0 ...I 2.0 ----- -- -- ... ~ Z 11/ CI) en 11/ 1.0 ------ ....._-- SITE i SITE 2 --- a ---- ~ 0 MAY JULY SEPT JAN MAR MONTHS A. ...I CI) NOVA. a. leaves and twigs, 2.0 b. and shoots. -- SITE t, Itaves a twiv. --- SITE 2, Ita •• 8 twivi SITE I, flowe,. 8 .hoot • SITE 2, flowe,. a .hoot • 0 _._. ...I flowers C ~ z 1.0 11/ CI) co III ~ .•. --------- ------- --O+---~----~--~-----r----~--~----~--~ __--~--~ ....;::.;:::.;::;.:;:~:;.:;:~:::.::::.:: . :.:.:~::;.:.:;;::::.::=.~~ MAY AUG OCT JAN MAR MONTHS A. FRIGIDA. Figure 3 Seasonal variations In the volati Ie oil content A. novo and A. frigida. Average values obtained of A:. tridentata, during two years of study. �- 336 The oil content of flowers reaches its peak in August during flowering in all three species. After that D.S seeds develop and the flowering shoots dry up, the oil content declines gradually (Figure 3). Statistically, significant differences can be shown in some cases between the oil contents of the same species collected at two sites. Diurnal variations in microclimatic conditions, however, might bring about such changes • .A. tridentata was -col lected at several locations in Colorado between the 15th and 22nd of September. Weather conditions were constant (cloudless skies and dry, warm days) before and during the collection. The oil content varied considerably in both subspecies of A. tridentata tridentata and !2.:.. tridentata vaseyana (Table 7). This species also varies in height from 20 ern to above 3 meters. Genetic crossing is also frequent among the species; i. e. A. tridentata X A. nova, A. tridentata X A. arbuscula (Beetle, 1960). -Recently, Balbo and Mozingo (1965) atte;;pted to characterize several members of the Section Tridentatae of Artemisia by paper chromatography using nucleic proteins. According to their results, A. tridentata can be dtvidednot only into two but into three subspecies. They also mention crossing of~. tridentata with ~ n~. I L I Table 8 shows data obtained on the volatile oil composition of leaves and twigs of two types of sagebrush obtained during summer in the North Park area. Since only two observations were made on each site at one time, both of the obtained values are presented. Low growing sagebrush undoubtedly contains less oils than the high growing sagebrush. Furthermore, data suggest that the low growing. low oil containing sagebrush is utilized in every case, except one, by sage grouse for feeding purposes; whi lethe high growing, high oil containing sagebrush is utilized for cover and roosting purposes. Identification of the essential oils Figures 4, 5, and 6 show some of the gas -chromatograms obtained from the essential oils of the leaves and twigs, flowers and shoots of the three 'species of Artemisia. Peaks are numbered according to corresponding resolution times in all species. Not all peaks are present in all species" and the presence or absence of a particular peak also depends on the locality - where the sample was obtained. time of year" and whethe rfhe oil was obtained from leaves or from flowers. A corresponding resolution time does not mean' absolute indication of a compound. �- 337 - Table 8. Variations of the volatile oil content of low growing and high growing types of A. tr-identata from North Park Area. Low growing type High growing type Uti.Hzed by birds for feeding or roosting Site No. Time of Collection Utilized by birds for feeding or 0/0 ofl s roosting Site No. Time of Collection 7 July 1. 16280 1. 10140 Feed. A July . 2.31610 2.22832 Roost. 2 July 1. 38840 1040200 Feedl B July 2.46221 2.56572 Roost. 3 July 1063191 1. 55542 Feed, 4 July 1. 06280 1. 16741 Roost41 1 Aug. 10 20014 1. 22530 Feed. A Aug. 2.47228 2.46565 Roost. 2 Aug. 1. 30171 1. 27143 Feed. B Aug. 2.30252 2.34550 Roost. 3 Aug. 1. 40277 1. 30122 Feed, 4 Aug. 1020757 1. 19279 Roost. 0/0 ofls �- 338 - Identification work was conducted only on theofls of ~ tridentata because this species supplies adequate amounts of oils and collection of plant material is relatively fast. Further work on the identification of the individual oil components is continuing on a limited bas ia, Tentative identification using known reference compounds has been hindered by . impurities in the reference compounds; the number of compounds present in a particular ofl, and the mechanical limitations of the present gas -cbr-omatographic equipment. A list of compounds which have been identified tentatively by reference compounds is listed below. '{he numbers correspond to the numbers used in Figures 4~ 5, and 6. 1 0\ -pinene 2 unknown 3 ,8-pinene 4 unknown 5 dipentene 6 cineole 7 cymene 8 unknown 9 turpenine 10 unknown 11 unknown 12 unknown 13 d-camphor 14 unknown 15 unknown 16 pullegon �- 339- A === 90 9 II 80 ® w en Z 0 60 0.. en 13 w 0:: ® ® 40 0:: W 0 0:: 0 0 w 0:: 20 @) @) <V @) 8x 4x 0 5 10 (min.) TIME CD 8 90 0 == 80 w en ® 6 60 2, 0' @ 0.. en ® w 0:: 40 0:: W 0 0:: 0 0 W 0:: 20 @ 4x 16x 20 FIGURE 4. ~x 10 15 T I ME 0 5 (min.) Chromatogram of the essential oils of A. tridentata. (A) leaves and twigs, (8) flowers and shoots. �0 - 340 - A == 90 80 13 6 60 w z (/) 0 n. (/) w Q: 40 ® 0:: W 0 Q: 0 20 u W 0:: 16x 20 4x -4x_16x~ 15 5 TI ME (min.) 0 90 6 Jl 80 w z 0 a, (/) 60 13 (/) w Q: Q: 4 40 w 0 Q: 0 u w Q: ® 20 ® o 4x -4X-;-8x;"16x_ 15 TIME FIGURE 5. I~ 5 (min.) Chromatogram of the essential oils of A. nova. (A) and shoots. leaves and twigs, (8) flowers "i0 �90 A - 341 - . = 80 ® <1> 60 w f/) z 0 o, U) w a:: @) 40 2 0:: ® @ au CD 0 a:: 0 0 W 20 0:: @ @ 16x 0 15 20 TI ME ( min) 8 - 90 0 2 80 <1> 11.1 60 (1.1, 2: 0: n.l ® f/) w a:: 40 a:: w 0 @) cr 0 0 20 w 0:: o 16x 15 TIME FIGURE 6. Chromatogram (min.) of the essential oils of A. -..::..-frigida. (A) leaves and twigs\) (8) flowers and shoots. �- 342' The compound which was present in all on samples and Is the most abundant single compound present is d+carnphor- (C H 0) (Peak 13, 10 I6 Separate 13). Large amounts have also been obtained from 1-8 cineole (Peak 6, Separate 6). They have been positi.vely identified by elemental analysis, molecular weight determinations, and infra'~red spectrum. Three other constituents have been separated by preparatory gaschromatography. These are represented by Peak NO.9» i i, 12. Data , resume of carbon and hydrogen data and oxygen by difference» molecular weight (found); and empirical formulae are presented i.n Table 9. The empiriCal formulae were arrived at by considering elemental analyses and the molecular weights observed. These data coordinated with structure leads derived from infra-red spectra were employed to postulate the following sets of possible structures for the unidentified materials: I ,,/ 0 -, f/ /I""~ I I I/""/~ , I 0 IT' o ~""',/ 0 �- 343 - Table 9. Analytical Data Obtained on Four Essential Found in A. tridentata. Oil Separates Item Sep. 6 Sep. 9 Sep. 11 Sep.. 12 Sep, 13 C 78. 15 77.01 77.55 74.29 77.74 H 10.86 10.44 10.34 9.76 10.40 0 10.99 12.55 12.11 15.95 11.86 Mol. wt. found 168 179 198 151 156 Empirical formulae C 10 11 12 9 10 H 18 18 19 14 16 0 1 2 2 2 1 154 182 195 154 152 Calc. Mol. wt. Relative percentage composition of the essential oil constituents As indicated earlier, recorder response and the amount of a particular constituent was not always related in linear fashion. For this r-eason, the reader should focus his attention on the relative percentage changes of the oil constituents among the samples due to species, subspecies, season, and locations. A rough estimate of the actual amounts present is, however', possible • .Data on diurnal variations of the essential oil components are not complete (Table 10). Collections should have been started earlier and continued throughout the day to evaluate the effect of presence or absence of solar radiation on variations in composition. However, the data suggest that diurnal changes occur', and statistically significant differences were present in the percentages �Tabl e 10, Variations of the essential oil components of A. tridentata leaves and twigs, collected during one day in May from the same plants. Sample size = 5. --. ------- _.- PEAK 1 Time of Collection 5:00 AM 2011ection 5:00 AM ~o11ection J! 2 5 6 Areas under the curve NUMBER 7 10 9 11 13 12 (p,ercentages of total area under the curves) 15 16 A CLY 2- 9.43 (0.85) 4.68 14.28 18.39 (0.44) (0.97) (0.39) B M + CL - 9.40 (0.36) 4.45 14.63 18.37 1.12 2.34 1.57 10.42 2.46 26.25 7.35 1.58 (0.32) (0.85 ) (0.77) (0.18) (0.62 ) (0.19) (0.61) (0.33) (2.32) (0.83) (0.38) A M CL 2- 9.21 (0.72) 2.93 13.90 17.57 1.37 12.82 (0.11) (0.35) (0.59) (0.08) (0.62) 8:00 AM ;:ollection B M + CL - 9.35 (0.92) 2.90 13.86 17078 1.49 12.50 1.10 14.08 1.48 17059 6.23 1.58 (0.25) (0.56) (0.55) (0.18) (0.46) (0.15) (0.43 ) (0.16) (0.50) (0.72) (0.17 ) 12 :00 AM 2ol1ection M A CL ! 5.30 2.02 15.37 18083 1.31 9.30 1016 12.24 1.41 23.27 6.73 2.89 (0.36) (0.24) (0.36) (0.42 ) (0026) (0.38) (0021) (0.61) (0.28 ) (0•25). (6 .40) (0.13 ) B M CL 2- 5.63 (0.22) + . 8:00 AM 2011ection 12:00 AM 2ollection 11M = mean , 1.21 2.10 1.61 2~18 27.06 9.9~' 7.35 1.66 (0.33) (0.27) (0.10) (0.36) (0.27) (1.43 ) (1.02) (0.24) 2.23 15.32 18.69 1.24 (0.37) (0.74) (0.38) (0 15) CL - = conf~dence 0 . . l~m~t 95% 1.17 14.58 1.47 17.13 6.35 1.45 (0.28) (0.22) (0.12) (1.00) (0.81 ) (0.09) 9.15 1.34 12.22 1.38 23.29 6.65 2.74 (0.33) (0.20) (0.56) (0.12) (0.30) (0.26) (0.28) w ~ ~ �- 345 under Peak Numbers 2~ 5» 9~ 11,. 12, and 13. These data also suggest that restraint should be exerc:ised in interpreting changes in the percentage como' position of the oil constituents between two sites or even seasons. It is possible that under dry soil condittons in late summer. faIl, or winter these changes are not as pronounced as 'in early summer when soil moisture is abundant because of differences in rate of metabolic activity. In Tables 11 and 12 seasonal variations in the relative percentage composition of the oil components of A. tridentata collected at Site 1 and Site 2 are presented. Changes due to seasons are obvious. Plant metabolic activity is at its lowest point during winter.· This is reflected in the stable composition of the oil constituents from plants at both sites (January and March col.lecHons). During summer and fall when plants were metabolically active, . variations are pronounced. Percentage variations between the oil constituents due to locality would be most accurately investigated, therefore, during the winter months when the rate of metabolism is lowest. Although statistically significant differences in the percentage distribution of the oil components can be found between the two sites, the over-vafl pattern shows close similarities. It would be of interest to determine how many of these differences are due to local genetic characterisUcs of the plants. to micr-ocltmatic, and to soil conditions. Statistically signi.ficant differences also prevail in the percentage composition between flowers and shoots and leaves and twigs. Data obtained on the percentage composition of the oil constituents of A. tridentata samples collected from different localities in Colorado do not show a clear pattern of differentiation between subspecies of tridentata and vaseyana (Table 13). Most of the components, as reflected by identical . resolution time, were present in almost every sample. In a few cases cornponents were missing or additional components showed up. Although altrtudinal differences can only be estimated now, it seems that No.· 13 Peak (representing d-c amphor) increases at hi.gher elevations (samples from Sargent, Montrose» and Ft. Garland}. As suggested above. winter would probably be a more adequate time to investigate differences in the percentage composition of the oils among localities. Since this species is noted for frequent genettc crossings, such an investigation might reveal genetic differentiations. This finding has important implications in the West for ecologists as well as animal nutritionists. Data collected on the percentage compositi.on of t.he essential oil com .• ponents of A. nova show a close resemblance between the two sites (Elk Springs andL~ie), although the two sites were approximately 250 miles apart (Table 14). This might indicate that, at least in this species, genetic characteristics are the dominant factors in determining the orl composition. Differences due to seasons and plant par-ts are obvious. �Table 11. Seasonal variations of the essential oil components of ~. tridentatata flowers and shoots at Site 1 (7 mile creek). Sample size = 5• leaves and twigs, _-- . Type and Time PEAK 1 2 5 6 7 Areas under the curves -NUMBER 9 (percentages 10 11 12 13 15 16 of total areas under the curves) Leaves & twigs January March M 1/ 4.02 5.25 9.16 14.27 1.54 6007 0.35 22.07 0 .. 50 29.90 4.-62 2.15 CL 2,: (0024) (0.33) (0.89) (0.34) (0.11) (0.52) (0.05) (0.52) (0.04) (0.34) (0.26) (0.09) M + CL - 2080 5.22 9.42 14.33 1.90 4.20 0.34 26;58 0.32 28.56 4.84 1.44 (0.37) (0.32) (0.45) (0.52) (0.32) (0.47) (0.08) (D.57) (0.05) (0.32) (0.33) (0.36) C~ (~:;~) May August ~ M CL': October M CL + (~:;~) (~:~i)~~:~~)(~:~:)~~:!~)' (~:~:) ~~:~~) {~:~!) ~~:;!)(~:~~) (~:~~) 8 95 4.43 13042 20.69 0.63 12042 0.82 4.50 (0 17) (0.26) (0.60) (0.86) (0~07) (0.47) (0.15) (0.50) 0 0 0 (0) 30 85 3.25 (1.30) (0.26) 0 0 CO) .8.64 5028 8.18 17.37 0.63 19.55 0.65 13.83 0.20 19.85 3.36 2~41 (1.14) (1.01) (1 84) (3.11) (0.21) (3.53) (0.04) (3.09) (0.14) (6.09) (0.85) (0.76) 0 Flowers & Shoots August M + CL - 10 = mean ~ CL ± = confidence 7.42 7.26 8.97 14.64 0 37 (0 61) (0.48) (0.42) (0034) (0.05) 0 0 limit 95% o (0 ) 0.44 8.13 1.58 47.08 4.06 (0.07) (0 37) (0.33) (1.44) (0.20) 0 o (0 ) W .J::0'\ �Table 12. Seasonal variations flowers and shoots '. & January 1 Twiss 2 Areas 5 under y M 2/+ 5.7.9, 8.35 ·4.04 CL - -(O.2S) ~(Oe51){~044) . \1arch '1ay 6 curves the 11 area 12 under 13 15 the curve) 16 15 81 (0.50) 1.73 (0~26) 4.85 (0 .•38) 0.32 (0 04) ·19~O9 (0.30) 0035 (0.05) 36.17 (0.82) 2 64 (0.14, 0.81 (0.08) 0 0 0 4.24 (0.51) 15 77 (0.72) 1.78 (0.50) 4.31 (0 56) 0 39 (0.08) 21.19 (0.85 ) 0.38 (0.09) 35~91 (3 .•40) 2.72 (0.47) 0.91 (0.28) M 4 ..64 (0 52) 8.05 (0 93 ) 7.99 20.96 (0.42 ) (0.56) 1 02 (0.13 ) 0 (0 ) 0.31 (0.01) 9.01 (0076) 0023 41.15 (0.01 ) (1~75) 5 31 (0. 48) 1.28 (0.11 ) 5000 (0.41) 4.88 (0.38) 5079 (0 31) 18 80 (2 06) 0.69 (0.03) 3044 (0026) 0 21 (0.06) 29064 (1074) 0 (0 ) 27.86 (2026) 3.65 (0 24) 0 (0 ) 4 82 (0 54) 6.37 (0057) 3 84 (0.84) 22~62 (1.30) 1026 (0~06) 0 (0) 0.24 (0002) 19.19 (1.20) 0.,44 36.75 (0.09 ) (2071) 3 61 (0 ..39) 0 81 (0 13) 6014 (0088) 7~32 (0023) 4062 (0 47) 20.96 (0 44) 0:079 (0 15) 1032 (0.07) 0 16 (0 05) 9.24 (0.25) 0.95 43032 to ~15) (0 84) 5.12 (0.41) 0 (0) limit 95% +. 0 + M + CL & PEAR NUMBER 7 9 10 (percentages of total 8.91 (0085) CL- nowers suq us t, and twigs, 3043 (0.81) M )etober leaves M+ CL - CL\ugust oil components of A. tridentata creek) ~ Sample size = 5. < Type and Time Leaves of th·~··,~sentia1 at Site 2 (7 mile 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o Shoots M CL ~ = mean £ICL ± = confidence 11M 0 e 0 0 0 0 w .j::'" --.J �Table 13, Variations of the essential oil components of Ao tridentata during September, 1964 at different loca1aties of Colorado. PEAK NUMBER Locality and 1 subspp. 6 2 5 Areas under the curve M 11 0.49 0011 1.39 5.49 CL.v ~ (0.05 ) (0.11 ) (0.02) (0.31) Hayden ~. leaves and twigs, collected Sample size = 5. 7 9 (percentages 0.43 (0.11 ) 0 (0) 13 15 10 11 12 of total area under the curves) 0 (0) 16 78.54 0.06 7.02 1.49 4.93 (2.34) (0.01) (0.52) (0.,16) (0.40 ) 5.82 6.38 17.07 19.18 1.84 0.20 14.04 15.94 0.59 7.90 4.48 (0.22) (0.03) (0.57) (0.46) (0.13 ) (0.27) (0.67) (1.27) (0.52) (0.62) (0"20) Walden M CL :t 3.23 (0.19) Walden M CL ~ 0.65 0.23 0.42 7.43 0.22 (0.03) (0.04) (0.24) (0.09) (0 03) ~. M CL ~ 0 12 1.81 8.09 (0.21) (0.47) (0 01) Montrose trid. M CL 10.06 7.98 19.90 3.71 (0 08) (0.53) (1.00) (1 82) Elk Springs trid. M + CL - 1,.42 43.94 5.31 0.08 3.07 2.• 25 0.92 (0.02) (0.08) (0.34) (0,,40) (1.31) (0.26) (0.15) (Pk. 8) (Pk. 14) 2081 13.20 4044 20.62 3.93,6.41 4.51 1.54 12 05 2.90 3.02 15.35 2.66 (0.16) (0.31) (0045) (0.26) (0 61) (0045 ) (0"16) (0.48) (0 50) (l.39X0 47XO.57XO.19) Cortez trid. M + CL - 2023 (0 31) Ft. Garland trid. M + CL - ~. ~. Sargent 1/ M = mean, ! 0 0 0 9.58 (0064) 0 0 0 (0) 0 09 0.54 (0.10 ) (0.02) 0 0 21 77.67 3.09 7.50 (0.51) (0.01) (0.11 ) (0.12) 2.12 0.10 (0.,08) (0 01) 0 0 (0) 0.71 (0 20) e 0.67 (0 06) 0 0 73 83 2~84 1.66 (4.56) (0.18) (0.10 ) 0 1.20 (0 14) w .j::"'" co 0 0 8.66 0 2/ CL ~ = confidence 15029 3 81 4071 19.18 (0.51) (0.46) (0.41 ) (0 28) 0 0 0 64 6 92 0.47 (0.02) (0.03 ) (0 11) 0 0 0 limit 95% 0 0 0 (Pk. :14) 2088 0.72 30.85 1.60,3.23 3.17 , (0,,25) (0,,07) (O.83XO .• 13XO.2210.34) 0 14 (0 02) 0 0 0 19 43 58 (0.,03) (1 31) 0 0 0 4.10 1.62 (0.26) (0.07) �['able 14. Seasonal variations of the essential oil components of A. ~ leaves and twigs, flowers and shoots from Elk Spring and Laramie sites. Sample size = 50 ------- .- -~-.. Location Type 1 and Time n~2nri~ ~eaves & Twi s Tanuary M 1 '12028 .- 7 3ept. 2 3 4 6 5 Areas under the curves 7 (percentages 8 11 13 14 15 16 of total area under the curve) cr2I ~ (0 43) 12 34 (0.30) 0.55 (0004) 0.65 (0.07) 1 02 (0.08) 3.52 (0011) 9.66 (0022) 0.25 (0004) 0.46 (0.03) 54~50 (0.54) 0.29 (0.03) 4.15 (0.12) 0.26 (0 .•05) M 15.49 CL .! (1.80) 9063 (1 .26) 1046 (0.27) 1.74 (0.47) 1.58 (0023) 9.48 (1.35) 6.95 (D. 49) 0 (0) 0.93 (0.19) 44.34 (2.78) 1.75 (0.56) 5.44 (0.84 ) 1.15 (0 25) 1.83 (0.48) 2 06 (0.34) 1.69 (0.38) 4.55 (0.48) 7.99 (0055) 0 (0) 0.22 (0011) 46,,41 (2.98) 0.52 (0.06) 3.87 (0.79) 0.57 (0.37) 0 Tuly PEAK NUMBER < x CL.! 17.34 (1048) 0 12.89 (1.82 ) 0 0 0 I nowers 3ept. co .j::'" M + 14 65 CL - (0.19) 9082 (0.17) 0.62 (0006) 8.17 (0025) 0066 (0.07) 7.62 (0016) 7.91 (0033) 1.34 (0.18) 1.44 (0.35) 41049 (1.,54) 2.46 (0023) 3.48 (0.16) 0.28 (0.10) 1.17 13 87 (0067) 1.54 (0029) 0 79 (0019) 2093 (0038) 7.21 (2030) 12091 (1.32) 0 (0) 0059 (0 09) 40.52 (5.44) 0.62 (0007) 3010 (0037) 0 (0 ) Tuly M 11.10 CL ~ (0055) 11.08 (0.42 ) 0.72 (0012) 0.26 (0003) 1025 (0.10) 8050 (0029 ) 9096 (0.70) 0.31 (0.05) 0 43 (0005) 51.81 (1022) 0.21 (0.03) 4.11 (0.21) 0.22 (0.03) 'ept. M 12049 CL .! (1054) 11.19 (1.15) 1087 (0.26) 0.75 (0021) 0.83 (0.12) 11005 11.91 (0040 ) (0.63 ) 0 (0 ) 0 (0 ) 46 74 (2.74) 0.21 (0.04) 2.91 (0.20 ) 0 (0) 7083 (0.26) 0 55 (0.03) 9.14 (0019) 0.62 (0.05) 15.07 (0018) 0007 (0.01) 2098 (0.12) 38029 (0.38) 3.29 (0024) 2 58 C~ .! 1~ :~~ (0.16) 0008 (0.04) y' M = mean Y CL = confldence '1' , lmlt 95% 0 .ar arni.e .eaves & Twigs ranuary M 15.88 CL ~ nowers 3ept. c 0 0 8043 (0 34) 0 0 0 0 0 \0 u �- 350."; The percentage composition of the oil constituents of ~. frigida also show seasonal changes (Tables 15 and 16). . Statistically significant differences can be seen in the percentage qistribution between samples from the two sites. These differences might be attributed to microclimatic differences between the two sites. If data obtained on the three species are com par-ad, the presence or absence of certain peaks seems to be characteristic for the particular species. Thus peaks present in A. tridentata 'are usually present in all A. tridentata samples although they may not be in the same proportion. This undoubtedly indicates genetic differences among the species. Certain peaks, such as Peak 13 (d'-camphor}, are characteristic for all species concerned. Of special interest are the data obtained in the Walden area (Tables 17 and 18). Here not only the growth form of A. tridentata but also the utilization pattern of the plants differed by the species of birds (sage grouse) investigated. In all cases except one, which according to Mr. Gill was a controversial site, a low growing type of sagebrush contained less oils (Table 17) and showed a characteristic pattern of percentage composition of the oil constituents. , The same holds true for samples obtained from the high growing, high oil containing sagebrush. Whether this data suggest differences due to soil characteristics or genetic changes or whether the birds utilize the low growing sagebrush for food and the high growing for shelter because of oil content and composition warrants further investigations. �Table IS. Seasonal variations of the essential oil components of A~ frigida leaves and twigs, flowers and shoots at Site 2 (7 mile creek) .• Sample size = 5 .. Type and Time - 1 2 3 5 4 Areas under the curves PEAK NUMBER 13 14 11 15 6 7 10 (percentages of total area under the curves) ~7 Leaves and 'IWigs Jan", M 3 34 8.53 CL 2/2"(0~54) (0.82) 1.11 (0 15) 0.64 (0.. 12) 0 (0) 1 .. 05 8 .• 80 7 .• 54 (0.. 52) (0.. 83) (0.17) 44.26 0.64 (0.17) (3.• 96) 0.52 15 .. 59 (0.12) (1.• 63) M CL : 3 47 7.70 (0.63) (1.02) 1.,05 0~61 (0 13 ) (0,,27) 0 (0) 8.04 7 .• 58 (0.94) (1.• 08) 0 .• 95 44.55 (0.. 36) (7 79) 16.82 7.63 0.54 (0.06) (1.86) (0.90) M + CL - 6 .. 34 (1.. 03) Mar. May 17 0 0 7,,73 (0.57) e- G 2.90 0 .. 90 0 .. 72 8.23 (0,,49) (0,,13) (0,,08) (0.• 28) 0 .• 99 (0.. 06) 3.20 0.53 (0.18) (0.• 15) e- 7 .. 92 (0.70) 0.68 45 .. 54 2.03 14.98 6.13 (0.. 08) (3.74) (0.17) (1~21) (O,A4) I co Aug. M CL:t Flowers Aug" 2.85 3.79 (0.33) (0.37) 1.02 (0.. 12) 8 33 0.56 0 .. 45 (0.13) (0.. 10) (0.• 45) 4 5.49 (0.33) 16.56 0.17 26 .. 56 31.93 0.26 1.97 (0.03) (1.91) (2.00) (0.07) (0.72) (0.23 ) & Shoots M + CL - 5",03 (0.. 34) Y M = mean r 5 .. 59 (0.• 65) 2.86 0.60 0 .. 48 (0.59) (0.17) (0 06) 21 CL ! = confidence 0 limit 95% 8.34 2.• 35 (0.41) (0.57) 0 (0) 30.51 0 .. 31 14.34 27.99 17) 0.. 35) (2.74) (4.76) (0.. 0.52 (0.31) \Jl I-' �Table 16" Seasonal variations of the essential oil components of A. frigida flowers and shoots at Site 2 (Poudre Canyon) ~ Sample size = 5. Type and Time leaves and twigs, PEAK NUMBER 1 2 3 4 5 Areas under the curves 6 7 (percentages 10 11 13 14 15 17 of total area under the curve) Leaves & Twigs Jan~ M 11 2.52 CL Yi: 0 58 7.52 0.97 1.03 0.28 0.54 0.15 0 0 6.76 0.77 4&32 0.66 0 .• 40 0.11 0.39 0.12 44 .. 58 2.37 0.35 0.06 26.65 2.39 4.88 0.34 0 Mar" M + CL - 3.10 0.77 7.84 1.30 0$75 0 .• 17 0.42 0 .• 08 0 0 7.08 0.82 4 .• 48 0.73 0.39 0.10 0.47 0.19 44,.95 6.• 18 0.• 38 0.44 25.97 3.28 4.16 0.65 May M + CL - 3.69 11 .• 17 0.,79 0.76 1.34 0.22 1 .• 23 0.09 0 .• 35 0.02 8.94 1.78 1 .. 39 0.12 '0 .. 25 0.02 0.36 0.12 52.83 2.• 91 1.23 0.16 14.69 1.30 2.50 0.33 M + 4.96 0.37 1.29 0.11 0.,74 0.14 0.29 0.04 8 .• 96 0.64 3.93 0.. 28 0.21 0.10 0.58 0.11 44.16 2.22 0 0 18.96 0.58 7.03 0 .. 34 July CLAug. M + CL - 5.09 0.50 8.82 0.24 w 11.18 0.87 0.54 0.10 0.29 0.10 0.,31 10.08 0,,08 0.27 4.87 0 .• 31 0.21 0.06 0 0' 45.02 4.• 00 0.14 0.03 18.50 0.96 3.70 0.23 10.25 0.27 1.46 0.20 0.26 0.03 0.21 0.,05 2.78 0 .• 32 0 0 0 0 51.11 7.15 0 0 17.15 1.87 3.12 0.25 1/ M = mean, lICL ~ = confidence limit 95% Flowers & Shoots Aug. M CL i: 5.. 79 0.98 7.81 0.65 \J1 I\) I �l'ab Le 17. \;;uiations of the essential oil components of leaves and twigs from low growing Sample size' = 3. A, tridentata samples collected in the North Park area. -.----.,. ..,-~--. ~.~-~ r- ____ ._ Time and Site 1 5 2 6 Areas under the curve 7 9 (percentages 10 11 12 13 15 16 of total area under the curves) July 1 M 11 3.52 CL 2/!(0.31) July 2 M + CL - 2.04 4.09 6.83 3 .. 79 31.93 0.06 0.69 0.43 11 .. 77 30.93 4.41 2.97 (0.42 ) (0.34) 79) (2.11) (0.44 ) (0.58) (0.08) (2,,03) (1.61 ) (0.34) (0.21) (0.78) (0.. July 3 M CL 1.22 4 .• 02 31.33 5.86 0.05 1.14 11.35 31<>28 0.58 4.44 4.27 67) (3.29) (0.38) 21) (0.48) (0.22) (1.47) (0.• 65) (3.. (1.02) (0.62) (0.08) (1.• July 4 M + CL - ! 3.34 (O.60) 4.22 3.93 74) (0.78) (0.• 3,,63 32.77 5 73 0.50 .0.82 31.39 0 43 12.43 (0.97) (4.01) (0.01) (1•57) (13.57 ) (0.17 ) (0 21 ) (0.26) 0 0 0 31 .• 41 0.68 0.,36 12.56 (0.07) (0.88) (2.27) (0.08) 1.29 (D.• 82) 4.08 (0.48) 4.22 (0.69) 3.68 31.92 0.97 0,,26 3.71 6.22 (0.08) (1,,14) (1.30) (5.71) (0.04) {0.56} August 1 2.13 3.75 29.79 3.85 8.30 25.,76 0.44 0 .• 72 16.12 3 16 0.44 5 .. 46 M CL :: (0.28) (0.,18) (0 12 ) (0,,78) (1.78) (0.12) (0.19) (0.,61) (0.38) (2.73) (0.61) (0.37) August 2 M + CL - 33.12 1.84 5.22 3.21 0.39 6 .. 77 25.78 0 .• 64 13.46 0 50 3.95 5.05 (0.50 ) (5~1l) (0.27) (0.96 ) (1.13) (0.10) (0.14 ) (5.,47) (0.20) (0 91) (0.41 ) (1.39) August 3 M + CL - 0,,56 0 .. 23 5•• 82 28.64 0,,69 14.32 4.,23 5 .. 58 (0.12) (1.• 0 6) 13 ) 07) (0,,72) (2,,24) (0.. (0.96) (0.,64) (0•. August 4 M + CL - 4 32 (0 31) 0 0 0 c- 0 0 15 04 30 .. 09 0.18 3 .. 08 78) 76) (2.• (0.. 13) (0.08) (0.. 0 -11 M = mean I lIcL ~ = confidence limit 95% 0 .• 22 (0.. 10) 2 .. 54 31.68 (0,.90) (7 28) 4.21 1.43 (0.. 23) (1.18) 27.08 8.33 4.92 0.89 37) 52) (0.92) (3.. (0.33) (1.. 3.96 1 .. 80 (0.18) (0.07 ) 0 w w \J1 �Table 18. Variations of the essential oil components of leaves and twigs from high growing tridentata samples collected in the North Park area. Sample size = 3. ~ ~c .-9-., Time and Site 1 July A M 11 3 58 14.25 CL Y! (0.86) (3.20) July M + B CL - August A CL- August M + 3 - 6 Area under the curve M + CL- I 11 12 13 14 15 16 0 (0) 0.93 (0.24) 0 (0) 6.17 1.43 (0.87) (0 18) 44.35 2.74 4.44 (6.38) (0.46) (0.62) 0 (0) 12.61 1.67 18.61 1.07 (3.29) (0.31) (2.23) (0.33) 0 (0) 10 54 0.47 42.26 2.08 4 99 (2.07) (0.51) (2.84) (0.78) (1.04) (0 ) 0 (0) 4.36 1 34 49.32 0.60 3 69 (1.34) (0.37) (3.38) (0.47) (0.87 ) 0 (0) 0 0 9 (percentage of total under the curves) 2.01 22.94 1.45 (0.38) (1.66) (0.27 ) 1.50 5.01 11.72 21.65 (0.39) (3 79 ) (0.28) (4.21) 5.71 (0 86) 7 0 (0) 0 B .!1M = mean 2 3.39 12.33 1.38 22.40 (1.10 ) (1.23) (0.17) (0 65) CL ~ = confidence 0 limit 95% 1.15 (0.35) 1.23 50.21 1.12 3.16 (0.10 ) (5.75) (0.44) (0.97) 0 0 0 0 0 0 (0) 0 w \Jl +=" �- 355 AnUbacteri~l effects of the essential oils on aerobic bacteria Results obtained on plate counts of bacterial survivors after 24 hours of incubation with the oils of !b. tridentata and ~ nova are presented inF:igures 7, 8, 9, 10. 11 and 12. Figures 7. 8, 9 and 10 represent the action of the oils of ~ tridentata and ~ nova on single tested bacterial species and compares the action of the two oils during the administration of increasing amounts of oils. . Low concentration of the oils. depending on the type of bacteria, permits increase in numbers during the incubation period with the oils. This is followed by a zone of inhibition where growth has been slowed down. At higher concentrations. bactericidal effects take over. In general, low and high concentrations of the oils seem to have about t.he same effect. In the middle region, howeve r, the rnagnitude of the antibacterial action seems to differ between oils , Statistical analysis of the data showed sIgnificant differences between the action of ~ trident:at:~ and ~ ~ on ~ coli, ~ aureus, and B. subtilis. No significant difference has been found between the action of the ofls on Neisseria spp. There is no clear cut tendency. however, for either oil to be a stronger antibacterial agent than the other. ~ coli shows a definitely higher sensitivity to the oils of ~ tr-Iderrtata, ~ aur eus , and Neisseria spp. to ~ ~ ofls while the response of ~ subtilis is inconsistent. These small diffe renc es , aEhough statistically significant in three cases. point to the possibHity that the antibacterial agent or agents are identical compounds in both species of sagebrush and only their concentration vades according to species. Examtnation of Figures 11 and 12 reveals obvious differences in the sensitivity among the bacterial species to the oils. ~ coli is the most r-esis tant foEowed by Neisseria s pp, The i.noccul.a used for ~ sub_tnjs was somewhat lower than the rest of the inoccula used in the expe r-Iments , therefore; interpretations on the first half of the curve should be handled with caution. The last part of the curve shows a leveling off tendency. This is due probably to the spore forming nature of ~ subtU.is and shows that spores are probably resistant to the action of the ofls , However, further investigations would be necessary to decide this with certainty. The high sensitivity of~ au~ to i.he essential ofIs is of interest. Staphylococci species are common inhabitants of mucous membranes and skin and are known to cause various ailments and infections. The acquired resistance of Staphylococci to chemotherapeutic agents is well known. A r e+examtnation of some of the volatile 01.1sfor use in preventing or combating these infections might be of importance in human medicine. Infe ct ioris of such nature might be controlled in animals who eat essential oil containing plants. Chemotherapeutic properties of these oils warrants further inve st lgation. It also appears that Gram-rpos itive organisms (S. aur-eus , B. subtfl i s) are more s ensltive to the oils than Gram-·negative bacteria {~i~eria s pp.• E. c ol.i), Esser:;;ia] of.Is are known to be hydrophobic and lipophyli.c in nature. �- 356 - ~ INOCCULUM A. TRIOENTATA VS. E. COLI .~ MEAN Of A. TRIO. VS. E. COLI + A. NOVA VS. E. COLI -- MEAN Of A. NOVA VS. [. COLI l( -=1:.----, l( en L en ••• ""' •••• - I-~.~_* ·-;~. 7 10 J! H 1......• ·..... ·..... l -.... ':;:+ •..... . ., -.... Z a: (!) ~ o :t.. ..,-----!... ••• ••• t- ••.•.. _-- *" " -,I r-.., 106 .'. , . .. ,,' t\ \q Z H \ \ > H -l L... II '. . (!) l( 10" '. , \ o en ~ w ~ \. \. \ CD L :::J 1IC Z \ ', \, '. • ,, , , , \'. '\ Ii = '. l( , '. J( 'R 1 0 2 8 6 MICROLITERS AQ TRIO., 10 12 Of ESSENTIAL A. NOVA Figure 1'+ 16 18 OILS VS. Ee COLI 7 Antibacterial action of the eaaenttal ofls of A. tridentata and A. nova against E. coli. - -- 20 �- 357 - 1010 e INOCCULUM A. TRIOENTATA VS. S. AUREUS MEAN Of A. TRIO. VS. S. AUREUS + A. NOVA VS. S. AUREUS -- MEAN Of A. NOVA VS. S. AUREUS I( 109 8~ ~~ 108 (J) L (J') 107 H \, \, \ Z CC C!l ~ 106 \ CJ ,.,'. C!l z H > \\ IDS ,\ H .J LCJ ,\ '.'\ ID" , .'. (J') ~ W CD 3 10 \ \ ., \ :::J Z \ \ L \ 102 \ .'I. J( II '., \ '1" • + ~-~ 101 .~ • J( "........ - '+ <,+" + - 2 .•• + 8 10 6 MICROLITERS A~ TRIO., II!. __ + 1 0 J( .~I( iii ., 1I( I( .-._.~ --,.,---- • ---. ~~. + ~---~-+ •••• • ---W\o,., •.••••• 12 lLf 16 Of ESSENTIAL 18 OILS Ac NOVA VS· SQ AUREUS Figure Antibacterial action of the essential against ~ aur eus, 8 oils of A. tridentata and A. ~ 20 �- 358 - ~ INOCCULUM . " A. TRIOENTATA VS. NEISSERIA SP • ••-cJ MEAN Of A. TRIO. VS. NEISSERIA SP. • A. NOVA VS. NEISSERIA SP. -- MEAN Of A. NOVA VS. NEISSERIA SPo 1010 108 108 (J) x:: en 107 H Z a: C!) ~ 10' CJ C!) Z H 105 > H .J u, 10" CJ en ~ W CD 103 x:: ::J Z 10e 101 1 0 2 6 MICROLITERS 8 10 16 12 Of ESSENTIAL 18 20 OILS A. TRIO., A. NOVA VS· NEISSERIA Figure 9 Antibacterial action of the essential oils of A. tridentata and A. ~ against Neisseria sp, SP· �- 359 - 1010 e INOCCULUM A. TRIOENTATA VS. B· SUBTILIS _0-<:1 MEAN Of A. TRIO. VS. B. SUBTILIS A. NOVA VS. B· SUBTILIS -- MEAN Of A. NOVA VS. 8. SUBTILIS IC 108 oQ. 108 en L [J) 107 H Z a: C!l Cl! 106 a C!l z > H 105 H .J Lt- 10" a [J) Cl! W OJ L 103 Z 10e :::J 101 1 0 2 6 MICROLITERS 8 10 12 Of ESSENTIAL Figure 16 18 OILS 10 Antibacterial action of the essential oils of A. tridentata and A. ~ against B. subtilis. 20 �- 360 - E. COLI ~ S. AUREUS -- B. SUBTILIS .•••• " NEISSERIA Sf . _0-0 ......... «- .... .-.~~.. ...,. ·0 e•• , ••• •Doo-. en E U) .~. 10' H Z o '. ....~ 106 -.. ilia. l\.. H -l 10" ~. " ., ., 0,\ \ \',,~ \ '" ,~ \ ,~ > o .--U~. .•~ C!l Z H u, "--0.... 8. a:: C!l 0:: _ Q ·0 \ U) 0:: \ \ \\ \ ~.• "" : ' ..... : \ ~ W ·CC E . ~ \. ~---\. •....... --- --""'-.. ... -----. ::J Z \ -...,........ ....•... •••• 00 005 .~-- __ oh.. ----- -- •..•\-,-'\ ·0 " •••• ., ...... '."•• 1 0 2 6 MICROLITERS 8 10 12 OF ESSENTIAL 1'+ 16 18 • If 20 OILS Ao TRIDENTATA VSQ E~ COLI, So AUREUS) Bo SUBTILIS, NEISSERIA SP~ Figure 11 Comparison of the action of the essential oils of A. tridentata against the four tested bacterial species. �- 361 - --0 Eo COLI -<> S -. AUREUS -- B ° SUBTILIS •••••NEISSERIA SP • •••• ••••••• •••••• """tr •••• -- ....•.•..... .~ •.•..........•. . ~ (J) ~ (J) ~ 10' 106 --._.-a.~. "'000.._ •••• _ ,, \ \ , \• C!l Z \• \• H > \ • \ ,, ~ • \ • H ...J ~ ---. ~ ~ a: o ~ .'.00"..., ~~ Z ~ ., ~ H C!l .t\,.. • • \ 10" • o • . .\ ., .\ ..•._- •... \ \ ~ ~ " ......•....-_...--.... \ \ (J) ~ W CD ~ ~ '.... l . ::J ~ e. \ .••..••...•. _ •••• ... ... Z """---.... - ••••••••_ eac.. ~ -- ., ... •••••• •••• ••• .....•.__ -0- __ ...00........ .... ••• ae.. IC 1(... ••• r • fa ••• 1 0 2 6 MICROLITERS 10 8 12 Of ESSENTIAL Pf- 16 18 OILS NOVA VS. E. COLI, S· AUREUS, SUBTILIS, NEISSERIA SP. Figure 12 Comparison of the action of the essential oils of..!.. ~ four tested bacterial species. against the 20 �- 362 Since Gram"'positive organisms contain greater amounts of Ii.pi ds in their cell wall than Gram'-negative bacteria, the higher lethality might be explained on the basis that the oils have greater affinity for cell wan constituents high in lipid. Antibacterial action of the essential microorganisms oils of A. tridentata on deer rumen Microscopic examination of wet mounts and Gram stained preparations of rumen contents from wHd and tame deer revealed some differences in microflora and fauna. The most obvious difference was the larger number of ciliate protozoa. probably EntodinJum spp., in the rumen contents of tame deer. This difference could be attributed to differences in diet since Entodinium spp. increase in numbers on diets high in starch. The highconcentrate diet of the tame deer certainly contained higher percentages of starch than the high-roughage diet of wild animals. Entodin:lum spp. in wild deer rumen contents have been observed by Pearson (1965) who states that the number of these organisms decreases in winter when the diet is high in roughage. Various bacterial species reported by researchers engaged in rumen bacterial work on domestic animals seem to be well represented in deer rumen contents also. Colony counts on wild as well as tame deer rumen contents showed the presence of one to ten billion of culturable bacteria per ml. of rumen contents. At the beginning of the incubation period. the inocculated RFNB contained 10 to 100 thousand culturable bacteria per ml. of the broth. Results of colony counts of the bacterial survivors after 24 hours of incubation with the oils of ~ tridentata are pres ented in Table 19 and in Figure 13. In Table 19 the averages of these observations are presented according to the locality of the animals. Statistical analysis showed no significant differences between the colony counts from the rumen contents of wild deer obtained from the Cache La Poudre River drainage and the Walden area and between captive male and female deer. However-, statistically significant differences were obtained when the averages of all the wild deer rumen bacterial colony counts were compared with the averages of the captive deer. In Figure 13 the average number of bacterial survivors from all the wild deer and also from all the captive deer are plotted for comparison. In general, the response of microorganisms from wild as well as captive deer to the action of the oils is similar. However-, microorganisms from the captive IIEer seem to be somewhat more sensitive. The number of surviving bacteria from the captive deer drops consf der-ably at 6 micro-liters of ofls per 10 ml �Table 19. .-O__ -_~ _______ Colony count averages of rumen bacteria after 24 hours of incubation with increasing amoun t s of the essential oils of 12 • .:!:.~identata ... ___________________________ Micro-liters ._-,--~.----.. ._______ ._____ ~,y.~!:.~~_~~!!!2er _Qf_Ba<;:.!:~i9.1_Surv ivor s Obta ined From! of ~_o oils .--.,_, __ Poudre Deer Walden Deer 0 4.71 x 109 4,.86x 109 3.00 x 109 2 3,,28x 109 3.10 x 109 4 3,50 x 109 2,00 x 109 6 2.06 x 109 3.07 x 10 8 2.21 x 109 10 2.20 x 109 12 -ij CaE,tive Deer Male Female x Wild x Captive 5.84 x 109 4.78 x 109 4.42 x 109 2.47 x 109 4.00 x 109 3.17 x 109 3.37 x 109 2080 x 10 9 2.94 x 109 9 2.75 x 10 9 2.87 x 10 1.07 x 10 9 1.49 x 109 2.56 x 109 1.28 x 109 3.10 x 109 5.75 x 108 5.10 x 108 2.65 x 109 5 42 x 108 2.67 x 10 9 2.72 x 108 3.98 x 108 2.43 x 109 3.35 x 108 1.42 x 109 1.13 x 109 1045 x 10 8 1.41 x 108 1.27 x 109 1.43 x 108 14 1.26 x 109 9 1.45 x 10 7.78 x 10 7 8.45 x 107 1.35 x 109 7 8.11 x 10 16 7.15 x 10 9 7 3005 x 10 7 1040 x 10 . 8 8.57 x 10 7 2.22 x 10 18 8.36 x 10 8 4 5.77 x 10 20 6.14 x 10 1/ = mean 8 8 1.00 x 10 5 16 x 10 9 8 0 2 3 30 x 10 0 2 4 6039 x 10 4 55 x 10 0 2 4 5.15 x 10 6.76 x 10 2 8.96 x 10 . 4072 x 10 2 0 6075 x 10 2 co 0\ co �- 364 - .....-...~. ~-.-..-.---.-... ~....•..•.._._..-. '~, --a.... ~, " oa........ __ . "\ . .... =-; \ " '0... ' .•.. .... <, " Ul L: \ 0 0\ " .. . \ \ \ \ Ul H Z \ a:: \\ \. \ \ \ . Cl ~ CJ Cl \ \ Z H H \\\ . -l 10" \\\" \\ CJ Ul \ ~ W OJ L: :::J Z \ \. \ > u, \. - WILD DEER --0 CAPTIVE DEER 1 ~0~~2~---'~--~6~--~8--~1~0~'---12~--1-~----16----1MICROLITERS Of ESSENTIAL Figure OILS 13 Antibacterial action of the essential oils of A. tridentata rumen microorganisms of wild and captive deer. against the �- 365 of RFNB, while ther-e is very lii;!Je decrease in numbers of bacteria obtained from wi.Id deer at this level. Above 16 m ic r-o+Hter-s per 10 ml RFNBI both populations decrease pr-ectpttous Iy, the curve resembling that obtained with E. coli. The type of C'GTVemight explain the ability of r-urn inant s to consume sagebrush species when the range c ontai.ns a variety of other pl.ants , Rumen microorganisms seem to tolerate the essential oils up to a certain point. It also explains why deer, fed only sagebrush during dige s t ion t rLals , consume very lEU.e sagebrush. Dietz, et: aL (1962) found that when sagebrush was offered with alf'alf'a hay the di.ge st ibfl.Ity of sagebrush increased. Ron tube colony counts of RFNB c ontained 10 to 100 thousand bacteria per ml., of fIuid at the start of the incubation period. The aC~;',;al nurnbe r- of bacteria present in RFNB, however, was higher because undoub+e dly not all the bacteria pr es err; i n the rumen will. grow on the agar me dlum. After 24 hours of incubation. RFNB without the essential oi.l.s contained 1 to 10 b i.Ilion bacteria per rn l, according to co Iony counts. This would correspond to the concentration of c ultur-able bacteria present in the original r'urne n contents. A short chain (3·-4 organisms). Grarn+ne gative st reptococct seemed to grow best on the agar medium. They formed red, lense shaped (3··4 mm diameter) colonies on agar medium if the inoculum was obtained from wild deer. In the case of captive deer, apparently the same organisms were present but without. the red pigment. Cond ii.iorrs probably favored +hes e organisms because approximately 60 - 80 per cent of the c ol.oni e s which grew on agar medium were of this type in the case of wild as well as captive deer. When some of these colonies were exam.ined under microscope using wet mounts and Gram stain, a variety of bacteria were usually Io-rnd grow.! ng together with the streptococci, although the streptococci predominated. Gram-negative and Gram··positive, small and large rods were found frequently i n f hi s manner along w ith some spirochites .. The rest of the colonies Found on agar medium included mostJy Gram ..-ne garive , Iarge and sma1l micrococci. and various bacilli. Colonies of i.he large Gram-negative s t reptoc occus dominated the agar tubes up to 16 m icr o-Ti te r s of essential oils in the tubes. At higher concentrations of o i l s , t.hey disappeared and the s ur-v ivo r s consisted almost. ex" clusively of small Gram-negative rn i c r-oc oc c i, Cellulose digestion ------...Cellulose d.lgestion was not apparent during the first i.w o di1YS of incubation. Tllrbidlly,ind.icaUng growth of microorganisms) was observed in t hr- tubes w n h i n 24 hours. Rapid disappearance of the f ilt e r pcl.rpr could be obs e r vcd on Illf' r+i i rd day, and digestion of cellulose WdS c orn pl e te d on the �- 366 4th day in tubes containing 0 and 2 micro-liters of the oils. Digestion was somewhat retarded, although usually completed on the 4th or 5th day in tubes to which 4 and 6 micro-liters of the oils were added. In cases where tubes showed digestion with 8 micro-liters of the oils, digestion was completed on the 5th day: No further digestion was observed beyond the fifth day (Figure 14). II I, II' Figure 14. d! 'I I t" I II The appearance of the cellulose digestion tubes after five days of incubation with the essential oils of A. tridentata. Complete digestion of cellulose occurred in tubes containing 0 to 8 micro-liters of the essential oils. There is a remarkable consistency in the end point of cellulose digestion in all wild deer samples. In all tubes, except one, 8 micro-liters of oils per 10 ml of RFCB is the highest concentration of oils which allows successful cellulose digestion (Figure 15). In the case of the captive deer fed a high concentrate diet, the tolerance is somewhat lower and probably around 6 micro-liters of oil per 10 ml of RFCB is the limit for successful cellulose digestion. There are two possible explanations for the difference between wild and captive deer. Rumen microflora of wild deer might have developed tolerance or resistance to the oils, since they probably had been exposed to the oils while the tame deer had not. �Miel-oorganisms ~: Poudre Series I Series 2 Deer No. I Seri es I Deer No. 2 Series 2 Ser ies I Deer No. 3 Walden Deer Capt ive Male Captive Female Series 2 Series I Series 2 Series I Series 2 Series I Series 2 6 024 micro-liters 8 10 of essential 12 14 16 18 20 oils • Figure 15. Result of cellulose amounts digestion of sagebrush digested after essential cellulose, shaded 5 days of incubation with oils. Unshaded area area undigested cl:1 lulose varying represents �- 368 On the other hand, differences might be due to differences in the diet of wild and tame deer and. consequently, to differences in the composition of microflora and fauna. Wild deer were on a diet high in fiber and c e Ilu loa e and low in easily digestible carbohydrates and starch, while just the opposite holds true for the two tame deer. In this case, one deals really not with adaptation of the microflora of wild deer, but rather with higher susceptability of the microflora of tame deer. The rumen contents of freshly killed deer contain 1. 46 to 2. 46 (range of with a mean of 1. 83) milligrams of lactic acid per 100 ml of strained and centrifuged rumen fluid. Table 20 shows the amount of lactic acid present in the RFCB after one week of incubation with 0 to 20 micro-liters of essential oils of A. tridentata. 8 values Table 20. Amounts of lactic acid present in RFCB after one week of incubation with increasing amounts of essential oils of A. tridentata Micro-liters of oils Milligrams of lactic acid 100 ml of RFCB o 1. 14 2 1. 94 4 1. 82 6 1. 91 8 2.05 10 2. 37 12 2. 48 14 2. 55 16 3. 78 18 4. 38 20 9.86 per �It is known that lactic acid can accumulate in the rumen of dom e stfc animals when the diet is high in starch and low in cellulose. In this case, lactic acid producing bacteria increase greatly in number while cellulose digesters decrease. Under normal conditions, the lactic acid pr-oduced is broken down to propionic acid via pyruvic, oxaloacetic, and succinic acids. However, when lactic acid is produced in large quantities, the pH of the rumen contents falls below pH 5.0 and so called "acid indigestion" oc cur-s , It is possible that lactic acid producers outgrew the slow growing ceUulose digesters because the cellulose di.gesters were retarded by the essential o iIs and lactic acid and bacteria were not. However, cellulose digestion was completely inhibited at 10 micro-liters of the oils per 10 ml of the oi.ls per 10 of RFCB which corresponds to 2. 37 milligrams of lactic acid/100 ml of RFCB. Refprring to the lactic acid values obtained on deer rumen contents, the maximum value was 2. 46 milligrams / 100 ml of rumen fluid. pH values found in the tubes containing 9 to 20 micro-liters of essential oils never fell below 6.00. Rumen contents of healthy wild deer can be as low as pH 5. 50. These facts indicate that the main reason for the complete inhibition of cellulose was probably not the accumulation of lactic acid in the RFCB. In 1956 Elsden, et a1., described a large Gram-negative coccus present in the rumen. This organism has been shown (Anni s on and Lewis, 1959) to produce propionic acid from Jactic acid via the acrylate pathway. Microscopic examination of RFNB, RF AM and RFCB r ev ea Ie d that a large Gram-negative coccus resembling the description of Els dan, et ~, 1956, was pr'e s ent in large numbers in tubes containing less than 12 to 14 mic ro- l ite r s of essential oils. Tubes containing higher amounts of oils than that, however, showed that this organism was completely missing. The data suggests the possibility of two independent actions of the essential oils. Ten micro-liters 0: the oils per 10 ml of the broth inhibited cellulose drges tion while 14 ml'2:o-jitprs of the oils per 10 m l of the broth inhibited the organisms responsible for the breakdown of lactic acid. The sudden increase of lactic acid from 2.55 milligrarrs in tubes containing 14 micro-liters of oils to 3, 78 m i l l i g r a m s in tubes containing 16 micro-liters of oils supports this cone Ius ion. �- 370 CONCLUSIONS Data indicate that the volatile oil content and also composition of the individual oils present in a sample are subject to species, diurnal, seasonal, and local variations. The greatest variations according to locality occurred in ~ tridentata samples suggesting genetic influence on the total amount as well as the amount of individual constituents of the essential oi ls , Since crossings among the Section Tridentatae have been described (Beetle. 1960), this stands to reason. At the same time, these data suggesl that a comprehensive examination of the essential oil composition of the s pec res might prove to be an important supplemental tool to cla s s if'y the Section Tridentatae. The best time for coDecting plant material to study such va r iat.ion is probably during winter when plants do not metabolize actively. At this time, diurnal variations and variations due to microclimatic and macrocHmatic conditions in the volatile oil composition might be at a minimum. Although the ant ib ac t e r-f aI action of the oils has been established, individual compounds should be separated and investigated in this manner.. Gas--chromatography seems to be an exceHent tool for the s epa r atton of the components. Investigating all the oil components together, one might speculate on the presence of adda t iv e , synergistic, and ever. antagonistic effects. Because of the antibacterial pr ope rt ie s of the oils, A rtpmisid species probably use the orIs as a defense mechanism against the com pet ilion of other plants such as prevention of germination of seeds, or against animals. Herbivorous animals for proper digestion of food materials are dependent either on rumen microorganisms (cattle, sheep, deer, antelope) or on caecal microorganisms (rabbits, horse). Some of the essential oil c orist i.tuent.s such as camphor have been mentioned (McGuigan, 1940) as stimulants for the central nervous system and also respiratory centers and heart muscles. They are also known to be beneficial in respiratory as well as digestive ailments. The deworming capacity of certain essential oils has also been mentioned <Hagen-Sm n h, 1948). It is possible that animals utilize these properties of sagebrush also. The differential ut il i zati on of sagebrush by sage grouse might be important for animal ecologis ts also. The birds might utilize the low growing sagebrush because of less total oil content or more favorable drst ribuu.on of the mdivi dua l on constituents present (1. e., camphor). �- 371 - The variations in the oil composition of A. tridentata might be an important consideration in view of the present eradication programs of sagebrush carried out be various government agencies. Animal nutritionists concerned with range animals should investigate this aspect thoroughly. It seems possible that taxonomically the same species of sagebrush might differ greatly in quality as animal food. Prepared by: Julius G. Nagy Date: January, 1966 Approved by: Dean E. Medin Project Leader Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �- 372 - Literature Annison, E. F. and D. Lewis. and Co. Ltd., London, ! Cited 1959. Metabolism in the Rumen. Methuen and John Wiley and Sons, Inc., New York Barker, S. B. of lactic and W. H. Summerson. 1941. acid in biological materials. The colorimetric J. Bio l. Chern. Beetle, A. A. 1960. A study of sagebrush: the Section Artemisia. Univ. of Wyo. Agr. Exper. Sta. BuI. Bryant, M. P. and L. A. Burkey. 1953. Cultural istics of some of the more numerous groups rumen. J. Dairy Sci. 36: 205-217 determination 138: 535-554 Tridentatae 368, 83 p. of methods and some characterof bacteria in the bovine and 1. M. Robinson. 1961. An improved non- selective culture medium for ruminal bacteria and its use in determining diurnal variation in numbers of bacteria in the rumen. J. Dairy Sci. 44: 1446-1456 Dietz, D. R., R. H. Udall, and L. E. Yeager. and digestibility by mule deer of selected range, Colorado. Colorado Department 14, 89 pp. 1962. Chemical composition forage species, Cache la Poudre of Game and Fish Tech. Publ. Elsden, S. R., B. E. Volcani, F. C. Gilchrist, of a fatty acid forming organism isolated J. Bact. 72: 6al-689 and D. Lewis. from the rumen 1956. Properties ?f sheep. Haagen-Smith, A. J. 1948. The chemistry, or ig in. and function of essential oils in plant life. .l.Q. E. Guenther, The Essential Oils. D. Van Nostrand Co., Inc., New York. 427 pp. Holbo, H. R. and H. N. Mozingo. 1965. The chromatographic characterization Artemisia, Section Tridentatae. Am. J. Bot. 52: 970-978 Hungate, R. E. 1950. Rev. 14: 1-49 Kinney, The anaerobic Corliss R., Taylor 1941. Oil of Artemisia 6:612-625 McGuigan, H. A. 1940. Missouri. 914 pp. Pearson, H. A. J. Wildl. 1965. Mgmt. mesophilic W. Jackson, tridentata Applied Louis E. (American Pharmacology. Rumen organisms 29: 493 -496 cellulolitic bacteria. of Bact. DeMytt, and Arnold H. Harris. Sagebrush). J. Org. Chern., The C. V. Mosby in white -tailed deer from Co., St. Louis, South Texas. � https://cpw.cvlcollections.org/files/original/4b2dbe039164fbd6757b2ca411b3bcd3.pdf 79896fd27971153cd8460cbf65000400 PDF Text Text April, 1966 - 1 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State Colorado W-37-R-19, W-38-R-2O, Project No.W-88-R-11 W-1O1-R-8 Composite Report* Work Plan No. 18 13 6 6 Job No. 1 1 1 1 Period Covered: April 1, 1965 through March 31, 1966 Personnel: Review of Literature Indexing Colorado Federal Aid Game Research Reports A. E. Anderson, Chariman of the Indexing Committee; G.D. Bear; R, J. Boyd; R. B, Gill; D. M. Hoffman; R. M. Hopper; G. T. Meyers; K. A. Porter; W. H. Rutherford; W, W, Sandfort; H. R. Shepherd; W. D, Snyder. Objectives: 1, To prepare author-title and subject indexes, and a bibliography for all Federal Aid game research reports processed by the Colorado Department of Game, Fish and Parks from 1938 through the present. 2. To develop a standard format and procedure for indexing Departmental research reports. 3, To reproduce and bind a minimum of twenty complete sets of Colorado Federal Aid game research reports and accompanying indexes. Techniques Used: An inter-project committee chaired by Allen Anderson was assigned on January 18, 1965 to fulfill the objectives stated above. The first meeting of the Committee was held on February 23, 1966 to develope uniform procedures and review progress to date (See APPENDIX A). Shortly after this meeting, Ken Porter was hired on a full-time basis to assemble the master set of reports, edit work done by the Committee, and act as liaison between the Department and the Denver Public Library Conservation Center which presently is attempting to index all processed unpublished research reports frorr, all the states. * This composite report is submitted to fulfill reporting requirements for the project jobs listed. Since all of these jobs pertain to the same subject, we felt that this would be the most effective reporting procedure. �- 2 - Several meetings were held with the Denver Public Library staff, and it appeared that the index they were constructing might be adequate for Department use. The Indexing Committee was made inactive on April 20, 1966 while this was being determined. Work done by members of the Committee while it was active is reported under Findings. Sandfort and Porter concluded that the index as presently conceived by the Library may not be adaptable for Department use for the following reasons: 1. Due to the size and complexity of the task, the Denver Public Library probably would not be able to complete indexing Colorado reports for a year or moreo 2. The Denver Public Library index will consist of subject words only, with no modifications to give the index the precision necessary for efficient use by biologists, field men, and administrators within the Department. 3. The references in the Library index may be to jobs only, with no page numbers given. This system may not be adequate for use with the bound volumes the Department anticipates having made. 4. No indication can be given at this time by Library personnel what the final form of their index will be. It is possible that equipment such as card sorting machines will be necessary for using the index. Sandfort and Porter further concluded that Porter should assume the responsibility for preparing a plan for an index designed for Department use and convenience should the Denver Public Library index not be suitable, and for having the master set of reports reproduced and bound. This plan is presented under Recommendations. At the time of this writing, the suitability of the Library index for Department use has not been determined. Findings: Findings reported in this section consist of work accomplished by members of the Indexing Committee. Hours 20 A. E. Anderson, W-105-R: General planning and organization. G. D. Bear, W-40-R: General planning and organization. R. J. Boyd, W-38-R: Bibliographic reference cards were completed for all W-38-R jobs (650) for the period 1947 through 1965. 8 No specific time accounting D. M. Hoffman, W-37-R: Job Completion Reports for the period July, 1949 through October, 1952 were reviewed and bibliographic reference cards were prepared for all upland game bird species reports except those pertaining to Merriam's turkey. Bibliographic reference cards were also prepared for upland game bird habitat development reports. February, 1966 March, 1966 R. M. Hopper, W-88-R: General planning and organization. G. T. Meyers and assistant, W-37-R: A list of Federal Aid Reports in the Southwest Regional Office was compiled to assist the Committee in assembling a complete set of reports. A list of possible subject headings for use in indexing wild turkey reports was compiled from the ten-year indexes to the Journal of Wildlife Management. 20 8 8 99.5 �- 3 H. R. Shepherd, W-101-R: General planning and organization. Approximate time spent on this activity 10 173.5 Recommendations: This section·contains a outline of a plan for indexing and binding Colorado Federal Aid research reports. I. Contents of Bound Volumes A. Pre-1947 Reports Pre-1947 game research reports will be bound in three volumes. All big game reports including those for antelope, bear, bighorn sheep, and deer elk will be bound in the order given in Volume 1. All reports by species will be in chronological order as determined by the date of the report. All fur resources reports, those designated beaver and fur resources, will be bound in Volume 2. The third and last volume of pre-1947 reports will contain all game and migratory bird reports including those designated migratory birds, sage grouse, turkey, and upland birds. A title page showing the type of publication and credit lines, and a table of contents will precede the reports in each bound volume. Subject and author-title indexes will follow the reports. See the discussion under Format of Bound Volumes for further details. B. 1947-Present Reports Reports for part of a year, or one or more years will be bound in one volume, depending on the amount of material for the various years. Attention will be given to making the volumes as nearly the same thickness as possible for optimum appearance and economy in binding. The first volume of 1947-present reports will be Volume 4. Included in each volume in the order given will be all regular research development, deviation, and special investigation reports which have been bound between covers quarterly (Jan., April, July, Oct.); and separate research reports with and without covers. Only those development reports which supplement research reports will be included. Reports which have been bound between covers quarterly will remain in the order in which they were bound. Separate reports will be included in the volumes chronologically, at the back of each bound volume. A title page, table of contents, and subject and author-title indexes will be included as for pre-1947 reports. II. Format of Bound Volumes A•. Pre-1947 Reports A master set ofnall Colorado Federal Aid research reports has been assembled in Fort Collins. From this master set, reproduced sets will be made and bound. �- 4 The volumes will be bound in hard covers such as those used by the Colorado State University Libra:ty for journals pel'.'iodicals and theses. Cover color will be dark green. · Printed on the spines of the volumes, in appropriate gold letters, will b-e t following information: ,JY' ~ · · · .. I FEDERAL A ID . ! .. · COLORADO · · COLORADO COLORADO FEDERAL AID FEDERAL AID l?UR RESOURCES GAME AND MIGRATORY BIRD . I . · ··. BIG GANE SURVEY SURVEY. REPORTS ·.REPORTS 1938 D 1946 : ! l I 1938 - 1946 l__ l . REPORTS .t 1938 - 1946 : l SURVEY 3 . . . . .: . . A title page and a table of contents listing complete bibliographic reference citations for each :teport included will be found at the beginning of each.•volumt;. Subject and author-title indexes will follow the reports. The following example illustrates the Table of Contents for the big game volume. TABLE OF CONTENTS ANTELOPE (lj)carhart, A H., and H. s. Wallace. 1940. Preliminary antelope survey. · State-wide reconnaissance, July - August, 1939. VoL L Colo. Game and Fish comm. Fed. Aid Proj. W-4-R. 33 p. Multigraph • • • • • . I 0 (18)carhart, A. H., and L. G. Kautz. 1942. Report of the antelope survey. Survey of 1941-42, life history, census, habitat. Vol: 2. Colo. "' Game and Fish Comm. Fed. Aid Proj. W-4-R. 36 p. Mu 1gr;,ph • • • iI etc. �- 5 BEAR ( 28 )Gilbert, P. F. 1946. Bear studies. Colo. Game and Fish Dept. Fed. Aid Proj. W-4-R, Quart. Prog. Rept,, Sept, 4 p. Mimeo • • • • • III etc. BIGHORN SHEEP etc., etc. Numbers in parentheses preceding the authors' names are code numbers assigned to reports in chronological order which will be used for reference in the index. Roman numerals indicate the order of the report in the volume. Volumes 2 and 3 will have similar tables of contet1ts for their respective subject matters. Reproduced reports will be bound into the volumes without heavycovers, However, covers will be reproduced on lighter weight, white stoC.k and will be preceded by a blue page which will serve to separate and identify reports. This blue identification page will have the same complete bibliographic reference.citation on it listed in the table of contents and will appear as in Figure 1. B. 1947-Present Reports The general format of bound volumes for 1947-present reports will be the same as for pre-1947 reports. Covers and printing style will be identical. Printing on the volume spines will appear as follows; COLORADO COLORADO FEDERAL AID COLORADO FEDERAL AID QUARTERLY QUARTERLY GAME PROGRESS REPORTS REPORTS RESEARCH 1947 - 1948 1957 1963 4 9 15 1947 - 1956 1957 - 1962 FEDERAL AID REPORTS 1963 .. fresent �- 6 - (l 3 )carhart, A. H,, and H. S. Wallace. 1950, Preliminary antelope survey. State-wide reconnaissance, July - August, 1939, Vol, 1. Colo, Game and Fish Comm, Fed, Aid Proj. W-4-R. 33 p. Multigraph. Figure 1, �- 7 - Because of the difference in report formats, the table of contents for 1947-present reports will necessarily be different than that used for pre-1947 reports. Starting in 1948, research, development, deviation, and special investigation reports regularly bound between covers quarterly have their own tables of contents which will be maintained in the bound volumes. Quarterly reports for 1947 will be provided with tables of contents corresponding to those which are included with reports from 1948 through the present. In addition, these, or modified, tables of contents will be reproduced and placed at the beginning of the bound volumes preceding all reports. Color-coded covers will be identified with their respective quarters (January - gray, April - blue, July - yellow, and October - red). Separate reports will then be listed in Chronological order. Reports regularly bound quarterly will be bound in the volumes with their colored covers reproduced on a lighter weight stock. Separate reports with covers will be bound with covers reproduced on a lighter weight, white stock and preceded by a blue identification page as were pre-1947 reports. Separate reports without covers will also be preceded by a blue identification page. Subject and author-title indexes will follow the reports. III. Format of Indexes In addition to the indexes in each bound volume, two cumulative indexes will be constructed covering reports for the periods 1938-1946 and 1947-1966. In the future, annual indexes will be constructed for each year's output of reports and five-year or ten-year cumulative indexes to bring the material together periodically. Indexes will be bound in the same covers used for binding reports. Color and printing style will be identical. Printing on the index volume spines will be as follows: COLORADO FEDERAL AID COLORADO FEDERAL AID GAME SURVEY REPORTS QUARTERLY PROGRESS QUARTERLY, ANl GAME RESEARCH REPORTS 1938 - 1946 (1-3) 1947 - 1966 (4-?) INDEX INDEX �- 8 There will be a title page and forward (to be written) at the beginning of each index volume. The forward will serve to introduce the plan, explain the rationale, and give directions for using the index. Next in the index volume arranged alphabetically by authors and chronologically by dates on reports, will be complete bibliographies of job titles and other reference units referred to in the subject index. An assigned code number to be used for reference in the subject index will be found in parentheses in front of each bibliographic reference in the chronologic bibliography and after them in the alphabetical bibliography. An asterisk will be placed before references to final job reports to distinguish them from job completion reports or so-called job progress reports. The next section of each index will be a detailed alphabetical subject index in entry a line style, See Indexing Procedure for details about the subject index and subject indexing, Details of format and punctuation will closely follow the Ten-year Index !52. the Journal of Wildlife Volumes 11-20, Inclusive, 1947-1956. IV, Indexing Procedure Before beginning actual subject indexing, the standard references on indexing will be studies (See BIBLIOGRAPHY). Principles of indexing will be assimilated and experience gained by practice in indexing actual reports. A thesaurus or master list of subject headings will be assembled for each game species studied in Colorado. A thesaurus for mule deer is appended to this report (APPENDIX ]:!) • These terms will be gathered from the Q.,_Jh Fish and Wildlifc, S!!rvice Thesaurus, Wildlife Abstracts, the Ten-year Index to the Journal of Wildlife Manar,ement, and other sources pertinent to the task at hand. New headings will be added as needed. Much of the Colorado Federal Aid research relates directly to species of animals. Further, most users of this index will be interested in subject references as they apply to a particular species of animal. For these reasons, specific subject references will be indexed only once under the species to which they apply, e.g., Deer, Mule, It is possible, however, that subjects such as range and habitat will have to be given status equal to animal species due to the numerous animal species dealt with in this type of research. This can be determined as the indexing proceeds. Specific subject references will consist of subheads with qualifying modifications as follows: Deer Mule (Odocoileus h. hemionus) census aerial counts,-(1):23 carcass counts on Blue Ridge, (5):18 pellet counts on White River National Forest, (3):10 etc~ The number in parenthesis is the bibliographic reference code number; the number following it is the page of the report where the indexed item is first found. The index will go into enough detail to insure that material of interest to fieldmen, biologists, and administrators can be readily found. Cross �- 9 - references of the "see" and "see also" types will be used to refer to related headings and thus avoid lengthy repetition. Page references cited will be the pages where the indexed items are first found in the report. BIBLIOGRAPHY American Standards Association, 1963. Final report of subcommittee on indexing Z39. American Standards Association, New York. Carey, G. V. 1951. Collison, R. L. Making an. index. 1959. Cambridge Univ •. Press, Cambridge. Indexes and indexing, 1962. Indexing books. De Graff, Inc,, New York. 96 p. 200 p. Ernest Benn Ltd., London, A manual of basic principles, John Conference of Biological Editors, Committee on Form and Style. 1964, Style manual for biological journals, Second edition, American Institute of Biological Sciences, Washington, D, C, 117 p. Walsh, J. W. T. 1931. The indexing of books and periodicals, Bowker, 1 118 Wheeler, M. T. 1957. New York State Library indexing principles, rules, and examples. Fifth edition, Univ, of the State of New York Press, Albany, N, Y. 78 p. Prepared by: Kenneth A. Porter Research Assistant Date: April, 1966 Approved by: Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief p, �- 10 - APPENDIX A MINUTES FIRST MEETING - COMMITTEE ON INDEXING FEDERAL AID REPORTS ON GAME SPECIES Game Research Center, Fort Collins February 23, 1966 Committee Personnel a111L Their Specific Responsibilities: A. E. Anderson - Chairman G. Bear - Antelope, bighorn sheep, mountain goat R. Boyd - Deer, elk, bear D. Hoffman - Upland game birds except turkey D. Hopper - Waterfowl and migratory birds H. Shepherd - Range investigations G. Myers - Turkey W. Rutherford, Bruce Gill and Warren Snyder - Fur resources (recent assignment) K. Porter - Assistant W, Sandfort - Game Research Chief Other Personnel Attending and Their Affiliation: F. Kleinschnitz - Federal Aid Coordinator D. Medin - Associate Wildlife Researcher D. Oehlert& - C. S. U, Libraries Objectives: The major objectives of this meeting were to develop a uniform indexing format and to review progress to date, All indexers will consider all projects, including seprate , which relate to species as indicated. Upon assembly of the complete set of materials, all projects, separate reports and specific indexing responsibilities will be listed and clarified. �- 11 - Ken Porter, who has been recently employed part time on this project, outlined the progress he had made to date on assembling a basic, complete, and verified set of Federal Aid reports, 1938-65, inclusive. Porter stated that he had prepared a list of all materials now assembled in the Game Research Center, which is incomplete, Moreover, we still lack an authoritative list of all Federal Aid Reports. Anderson stated that a letter had been written to the Fish and • Wildlife Service at Albuquerque, New Mexico, requesting such a list but no reply had yet been received. In the afternoon Sandfort and Porter talked to Mr, K. Schriener of that office and was assured that such a list would be compiled (this list is now on hand). It was reiterated throughout the day that until such a basic set has been assembled no significant indexing progress can be made. Committee members reviewed progress on their respective assignments. Boyd had begun an author index and Myers had developed a detailed format modeled after the Journal of Wildlife Management. No progress was reported by other committee members. Committee members reported the following approximate number of days had been allotted to the indexing assignment, Segment G. Bear R. Boyd D. Hoffman D. Hopper G. Myers'~ H. Shepherd 1965-66 20 30 15 15 7 87 1966-67 15 10 12 10 47 *Uncertain Considerable discussion centered about the problems of assembling the Federal Aid reports into usable bound volumes. This evolved into the following conclusions: (1) All materials for each year of writing (as identified by the cover date in recent years to the date of preparation in older materials) will comprise the basic volume. (2) Each volume should have its own index. (3) Five major types of materials or pieces will be included in the volumes: (a) the old Federal Aid Reports prepared under the direction of Art Carhart, (b) Quarterly Progress Reports, (c) Quarterly Reports, (d) Game Research Reports, and (e) all materials not identified by the above, which will be listed as "Separates" (See appended bibliographic reference models). (4) An explanation of the index system should accompany each volume (5) The Montrose office, Don Hoffman, Warren Snyder and the Game Research Center should be furnished with a complete verified set of materials to facilitate the indexing job. (6) Perhaps 80-100, 28 volume sets each with a cumulative index may be necessary on completion of the indexing job. Another long period of discussion involved the mechanics of index procedure and fonnat. Anderson suggested that because of the diverse and confusing formats previously employed, a coding system should be considered. There were many objections to this suggestion, primarily revolving around the ideas that coding �- 12 - reduce the usefulness to other agencies and individuals who had received Federal Aid Reports in the past and would also tend to obscure material to many personnel within the Department. Mr. Kleinschnitz reported that approximately 180 individuals or institutions regularly received Colorado Federal Aid reports and about 100 of these were outside the Department. Further discussion of index procedure and format resolved into the following concepts, many of which are tnetative in nature: (1) The basic bibliographic reference unit of Federal Aid reporting is the so-called Job Completion Report and all indexing concepts should be based on this unit. (2) The author, designated generally at the end of the report under "Prepared by" should not be confused with the Project Leader whose name may be more conspicuous, (3) Every effort should be made to list all authors, from names listed within the body of the report, whenever it is clear that these individuals prepared the report or made a major contribution to the report. Good examples are the members of the "crews" who gathered the data under A. Carhart. They should be included as junior authors (See bibliographic reference Model No, 1). (4) Reports simply stating "no work accomplished" or the equivalent will not be included in the index, (5) Final reports, those which contain complete information and as differing from progress reports, should be prefaced with an asterisk in the index and bibliography citations. (6) Bibliographicl citations should follow the A. I. B. S. Style Manual, 2nd Edition. Bibliographic reference models are appended. (7) The specific index believed most adaptable to our specific problem will relate to an arbitrary numbering of jobs or similar pieces of research such as "special investigation" or "deviations" in numberical order (1 through 1,000, for example) as they appear in pieces of material within each volume. The arrangement in volumes will be based on time of printing or issuance. From the arbitrary numbering of jobs in numerical sequence as related to time, the bibliography can be developed. In cases where authors worked in various areas or sections of the state under a Project Leader (example - July and January, 1950), the individual actually working on the job should be listed as the senior, and only author, in most cases. The section(s) of the state should be added to the job title to make the title citation clear (See bibliographic references Model No. 3). Similarly, where several individuals worked on one job, but in different sections or areas of the state, and under a Project Leader, the sub-job (Scope) should become the basic unit of reference and each will be included in the arbitrary numbering sequence. Append the sub-job (Scope) to the job title to make the citation clear (See bibliographic reference Model No. 4). Where several small issues occur for a specific month (October, 1950 and January, 1951) and where all issues start with page l, a slightly modified bibliographic reference is suggested. Give the name, date and title - follow this by (Deer-Elk Issue) or the issue as appropriate - then complete in the same manner as for other citations (See bibliographic reference Model No. 5). It can be anticipated that various combinations of the foregoing bibliographic reference examples will be encountered where judgement will be required. References submitted by committee members will be edited in Fort Collins. The actual subject index will consist of the system as shown in "Wildlife Abstracts" which show a three-level subject sequence, such as: �- 13 Deer, mule Census Aerial (not more than four words) We will add a fourth level which will include four basic parts as follows: Year, month, p. 31 (1) (page number where the subject first appears) The number in parenthesis will relate in all cases to the numberical list of bibliographical references for each unit of work (this as explained previously will be the job, including "special studies" and "deviations" or in some cases the sub-job). In addition to the numerical list of references, which will not be in alphabetical sequence, but rather in sequence related to time, the completed index will include a bibliography (probably at the end) which will show authors alphabetically. Pending completion of the basic set of materials, all members of the index committee can begin preparing their bibliographies for jobs or comparable work units.* Numbers for these references will be added at the Research Center upon completion of the basic set of materials. Important - Prior to any subject indexing the basic numbered set of references will be provided and the numerical bibliographic reference will be edited and provided for your use. A list of subject headings as contained in Wildlife Abstracts will be sent to all indexing committee members shortly; modifications or additions to these headings should be made where necessary, Please contact us if there are any questions on this rough but important indexing job. Allen E. Anderson Chairman, Indexing Committee Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief * Use 3" x 5 11 cards, l for each job or comparable work unit. �- 14 Bibliogr,sphic Reference Models: 1. Wallace, H. s., J.M. Coutts, L. M. Dargan, H. Means, and W. M. Nemanic. 1939, Report of the deer-elk survey. Vol, 1. July. 103 p. Bibliographic references for pre-1947 Federal Aid Reports will be prepared in Fort Collins due to the lack of uniformity in their format. Quarterly Progress Reports (1947 - Jan. 1957) 2. Gilbert, D. 1953. Jan.: 59. 3. Searle, L. W. 1950. Migration between summer and winter ranges, Northwestern and North Central Colorado. Quart. Prog. Rep. Jan: 33, 4. Swope, H. M. 1952. Brood survey, Northeastern Colorado. Rept. Oct.: 42-45. 5. Till, C. E. 1951. Selection and survey of transplant sites (Antelope Investigations Issue). Quart. Prog. Rept. Jan.: 1-6. Extent of bear ranges in Colorado. Quart. Prog. Rep. Quart. Prog. Quarterly Reports (April 1957 - 1962) 6. Grieb, J. R. 1957, Waterfowl habitat improvement studies. July: 183-190. Quart. Rept. Gcmm Rc,serirch Reports (1963 - present) 7. Anderson, A. E, 75-1963. 1965. 8. Burget, M. L. 9. Hunter, G. N. 1949. The personal interview method of obtaining information on game and fish resources. Current Rept. 24 (Sep. Rept.). Aug. 56 p. 1957. Physical characteristics. Game Res. Rept. Jan.: The wild turkey in Colorado (Sep. Rept.). Jan. 68 p. �- l5 - APPENDIX]! Tentative Thesaurus for Mule Deer Abnormalities Accidents Activity Periods Age Determination Age Ratios Anatomy/Morphology Antlered females Anterless bucks Antlers Behavior Bibliographies Captivity Census Census/Survey Methods Check Stations Condition Control Damage Dentition Diseases/Parasites Distribution Ecology (See Environment, Factors In) Economics Enemies Environment, Factors In Food Habits/Feeding Growth/Development Habitat Handling Methods Harvest/Hunting Statistics Hematology History Home Range Hunting Identification Injuries Life History Longevity Management Measurements/Size Mortality Movements Natural History/Biology Nutrition Physiology Policies/Programs Population Density Population Dynamics Population Fluctuations Range Condition Range Management Range Relationship Range Survey Reproduction/Production Seasonal Activities Sex Determination Sex Ratios Starvation Study Methods Survival Taxonomy Territory Tracking Trapping Water Requirements Weight Young ��- 17 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO Project No. W-37-R-19 Work Plan No. 1 Title of Job: Game Bird Surveys Job No. 12 Summarization and Publication of Pheasant Research Findings Period Covered: April 1, 1965 through M:trch 31, 1966 Personnel: Wayne w. Sandfort and Harold M. Swope The constant press of other assignments again prevented anticipated progress on this manuscript. Objectives: (1) To summarize all work done on the species in Colorado. (2) To publish results of pheasant studies, and other available information on pheasants. Techniques Used: Materials pertaining to pheasant history, management and research are being compiled for inclusion in the final manuscript. A general outline which has been prepared will be expanded under each specific category to provide a detailed manuscript guide for use in preparation of this publication. Prepared by: Harold M. Swope Wildlife Researcher Date: April, 1966 Approved by: Wayne w. Sandfort Game Research Chief Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator ��April, 1966 - 19 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COIDRADO ____..;;_===-"------ Project No. W-37-R-19 Work Plan No. 1 Title of Job: Game Bird Surveys Job No. 14c Measurement of Environmental Factors, Hen Harvest Period Covered: April 1, 1965 through !ib,rch 31, 1966 Personnel: Harold M. Swope, J. Stephen Iange, Warren D. Snyder. ABSTRACT Moisture conditions were extremely dry during the first four months of 1965, but excessive precipitation was received in the Mly - July period. Adequate moisture was recorded during the fall and winter of 1965-66. Snow cover existed from January 15, 1966 through February. Vegetative growth measurements indicated poor wheat growth and development in 1965. Many fields in the control area were destroyed prior to harvest and the ground was replanted to millet. Other fields could not be properly harvested due to excess summer rainfall and weed growth. Work on cover type mapping, photos of vegetative vigor, and the period of spring stubble mulching were continued. ��- 21 Measurement of Environmental Factors Warren D, Snyder Cover Ty:pe Mapping: Considerable work on this phase of the study was completed during the work segment. Soil Conservation Service aerial photos were used to obtain section boundaries, field boundaries, building sites and other detail which were transposed to graph paper. Cover types were then obtained through field inspection and the graph paper readily served as a grid for easy calculation of acreages. Climatic Data: .An extremely dry winter and early spring followed by an abundantly wet summer characterized 1965. Data collected at or near the central township corners in the experimental and control areas serve as illustration (Table 1). The eight cooperating farmers provided good rainfall records, but snowfall was often overlooked and frequently not recorded. Good fall moisture was available for wheat planting and snow cover protected the crop through much of the winter. Although moisture was above normal from June, 1965 through the .winter in both study areas, the experimental area received a greater amount of both rain and snow. Vegatative Growth Measurements: Table 2 shows the average height of wheat, wheat stubble and weed overstory collected on sixteen vegetative vigor transects in 1965. Two transects were located at each corner of the intensive study townships. Several of the transect fields in the control study township were plowed under in May and June, 1965 because of the severe drought that had plagued the region. In late summer approximate acreages of remaining wheat fields were calculated in the control study township. Only about 12 percent of the total land area still remained in wheat. Many of the destroyed wheat fields were planted to millet, which did not provide nesting cover, brood cover, or winter cover to pheasants. Many pheasant nests were possibly destroyed in the process. In contrast, there was little if any destruction of wheat prior to harvest in the experimental area. Summer rains delayed harvest of the remaining wheat fields and weeds grew profusely. Parts or all of many fields remained uncut because of these factors, and served as excellent winter cover. Nearly all sloughs and other low areas were filled with standing water through the summer and early fall periods. Period of Stubble Mulching: Turning under Qf small grain stubble was slightly more than half completed on the April 28, 1965 date of survey (Table 3). Initial tilling of stubble fields probably was more important in reducing pheasant nesting cover than in destroying nests since the extreme weather delayed nesting. Photo Hubs: As in previous years, vegetative vigor was pictorally illustrated at eight photo hub sites in the two study areas. These data were collected during the hunting season f'or use in year to year comparison. �- 22 - Table 1. Inches of precipitation recorded on the experimental and control study areas -- 1965-1966. Township Corner N.W. S.E, s. w. April · 0.64 Ex;per:bnental .TownshiE 0.27 0.30 0.82 May 3.73 7.30 5.74 1.64 Month 1965 June July August September 0.02 4.20 5.25 7.26 5.11 1.58 2.93 5.40 7.06 4.06 1.28 N.E. 1.55 1.00 o.n 1.39 0.67 0.75* January February March Total 1. 55 0.18 0.70 26.52 1.50 0.20* . 0.80 27.84 1.50* 0.20* 0.90 23.79 1. 50~\' 1965 April May · 0.31 June· July August September October November necember 1966 January February March Total 0.51 3.65 8.43 4.09 1.89 0.57 1.85 October November December 1966 Average 4. 51 7.51 4.75 1.60 1.51 2.53 2.15 0.01 0.90 0.05 0. 20'>'~ 0. 75~'< 25.61 1.51 0.20 0.79 26.19 Control Townshi;e 3.20 5.93 2. 91 1.20 2.55 1.48 0.30* 2.55* 1.40 2.57 0.35 O. 30~\- 0.35 4.14 5.62 5.70 1.63 3.59 1.40 0.02 0.31 3.93 4.60 4.04 0.95 3.67 5.39 6.16 1.00 l.66 0.40 0.50 0.40* 0.25* o.so 0.15 0.70* 19,13 0.2..5* o. 70* 0.25 0.75 19.47 22.10 24.26 o. 70* * Estimated precipitation received. o. 17 0.45 0.22 o. 71 21.18 3.73 5.39 4.70 1.19 2.82 1.48 0.01 0.31 Actual amount not recorded. �- 23 Table 2, Average vegetative measurements collected on sixteen transects during the 1965 growing season. Transect Green Wheat Measurement Stubble , Weed Over story •. Height May 29 August 25-27 April 18 April 29 5.50 4.50 8 3.00 2.75 3.50 3.75 3.00 3,00 4.50 3.50 1.15 8.00 4.00 4.00 8.00 7.75 May 10 May 19 Control Area Transects 7.75 12.00 15.50 10,15 7. 50 .Od 9. 75 14.50 iil.50 10;75 1.6.00 19.00 6.75 11.75 6.50 --** 11,75 15.75 18.75 8,25 18.00 15.25 Mean 3.50 6.25 8,50 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 3.25 4.50 3,25 3.25 6.50 4.25 3.25 4.00 8.00 7.75 6.75 5.25 7.00 7.00 6.25 6.75 Mean 4.00 6.75 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 15,30* ;,:;,. :, w~ 12.98 ;;;;,:;, l\ '''""' 'k'-k 13.60* 28.99 10.40 10.00 12.52 30.88 17.50 12.30 26.34 Experimental Area Transects 21.25 12.00 15.75 18.50 29.75 13.00 17. 75 9,75 12.75 16.50 9.50 11. 75 18.75 13.00 9.50 17.75 15.50 9.50 8.00 14.50 8,00 17.00 6,75 5.50 20.00 9.25 25.50* 9.00 10.45 15.25 11.80 12.00 14.36 12.49 40.69 25.85 17.95 22.00 17.54 18.40 19.00 14.16 21.16 --** 9.75 13.75 13,75 Measurement taken on uncut wheat field * ** Wheat field destroyed prior to harvest �- 24 - Table 3. Progress of stubble mulching on the experimental and control study areas -- April 28, 1965. Under Tillage Tilled stubble Standing stubble Area Experimental 44% * 12% 44% Control 45% 8% 47% *Information collected from roadside tallies of fields Prepared by: Warren D. Snyder Wildlife Researcher Date: April 1966 Approved by Harold M. Swope Wildlife Researcher Ferd c. Kleinscbnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �April, 1966 - 25 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO ------------- Project No. W-37-R-19 Work Plan No. 1 Title of Job: Period Covered: Personnel: Game Bird Surveys Job No. Population Studies, Hen Harvest April 1, 1965 through Ma.rch 31, 1966 Harold M. Swope, J. Stephen Iange, Warren D. Snyder ABSTRACT In the spring and summer of 1965, pheasant crowing count indices averaged 35-9; there were 2.24 hens per cock, and 3.83 young per hen yielding a fall population index of 434.25 on the experimental study area. Respectively, the crowing index was 20.5; there were 1.90 hens per cock, and 3.46 young per hen on the control study area. The fall population index there was 194.22. These data indicate that the population density differential between the two study areas was possibly increased because of poorer hatching success on the control. In the winter of 1965-66 7.50 birds per mile were observed on the experimental area while 4.47 birds per mile were recorded on the control. Pheasant sex ratios approximated 3.5 hens per cock at large concentration sites in a sample of 3945 birds while a 2.1 hen per cock ratio was found in a small concentration sample of 509 birds during the winter period. Winter sex ratios were nearly equal on the two study areas. �- 26 - Objectives: (1) To determine pre-treatment pheasant population levels within the study areas. (2) To determine changes in pheasant populations following hen pheasant shooting. (3) To determine causes of pheasant mortality from factors other than hunting. Procedures: Reference is made to the R-19 job descriptions for an outline of procedures used in this phase of the study. �- 27 Population Studies Warren D. Snyder Crowing Counts: The 1965 crowing count indices varied widely between the experimental and control area pheasant populations (Table 4). Indices on the experimental area averaged 72 percent greater than those on the control. In both areas populations were down from past years. Table 4. Pheasant crowing count indices on the six routes in the hen pheasant harvest study region, Spring, 1965. Crowing Routes Control Area Experimental Area East Central Central West East 29.1* 31.0 46.4 47.6 32.8 23.2 30.1 43. 7 35.3 20.2 20.0 21.6 38.0 35-5** 34.1, 18.8 17.3 20.8 19.8 West 16.2 19.7 22.6 25.3 23.9 37.7 20.6 20.1 20.9 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------29.4 23.9 48.1 25.0 * ** *** Mean number of pheasant calls per station. Mean number of pheasant calls per station from above data. Mean number of calls per station taken from high count per station data. Spring Sex Ratio Counts: These counts lend evidence that roosters which were more numerous on the experimental area than on the control also possessed larger harems. Table 5 illustrates the approximate 18 percent higher sex ratio on the experimental area. This information was collected in late April and early May. �- 28 - Tuble 5 - Spring sex ratio data collected on the hen pheasant harvest study areas -- 1965. Experimental Area Cocks Observed Hens Observed Total Control Area 82 127 284 156 411 238 2.24 Hens per Cock Miles Driven Birds per Mile 1.90 291.8 284.1 1.45 0.82 Individual Rooster Observations: Observations continued to verify the relationship of crowing interval to harem size. The information presented in Table 6 indicates a lower sex ratio would cause a greater amount of crowing per rooster. Table 6 - Pheasant crowing interval in relation to harem size -- Spring, 1965. Average Call Interval Nuniber of Calls Hens per Cock (Minutes) 0 2:19 1 2 3:13 4: 11 3 6:35 Average Call Interval 3:18 ===-··=-=== ===== 59 37 15 20 Total Calls 131 �- 29 - Brood Counts: The dry spring and wet summer, which indirectly influenced pheasants through vegetative development and wheat destruction, directly affected reproduction. Normally the peak hatch occurs in early June, but in 1965 the hatch wss almost a month late. Hatching dstes were obtained by estimating brood ages at the time brood counts were made and projecting the data back through the summer months. Figure 1 illustrates the pro,jected pattern of hatching, which in 1965 continued into late August. Abundant weed growth and the late hatch made brood counting difficult. Counts conducted in September averaged well above those completed in August. Table 7 shows the condensed brood count information for the fourteen routes. The young per hen ratio of 3.83 on the experimental routes wss approximately 10 percent higher than the 3.46 ratio on the control area. Over twice as many birds were observed per mile on the experimental area (Table 7). The Spring and Fall indices which were respectively derived from the formulas p = C + CH and P= C + CHY are presented in Table 8. Here they serve to illustrate the difference between the two study area populations prior to and following reproduction and provide an additional basis for year to year comparison. Winter Sex Ratio Counts: Several inches to a foot of snow remained on the ground from mid-January through most of February. During the period sex ratio counts were conducted in cooperation with Lloyd Triplet, Wildlife Conservation Officer. Most of the counts.were made on pheasant concentrations at farmyard windbreaks and shelterbelts within established management winter sex ratio areas. In compiling the data in Table 9 the few counts that could not be classed as completely within the experimental or control study areas were discarded. Past records revealed that winter sex ratios were consistently higher than spring sex ratios. The hypothesis that roosters did not join the large concentrations at farmyard windbreaks as readily as hens did was substantiated by additional checks of small covert areas. In a sample of 509 birds (classified as to sex) the sex ratio averaged 1 rooster to 2.1 hens. This sex ratio closely approximated that of the spring harem counts. �- 30 - 24 2? 20 t p h G a: s a n 18 - ,.- 10 t 14 B r , ..... 0 12 0 I d s 10 "' "", I ' ' II 9 8 8 '' I ' .,_ ____ _ .., .. _;,, ; ,~ A \ \ \ I , \ 1...:·--Control 0 b \ I \ \ ! 4' \ 2 0 3 9 16 June 23 31 L I 7 14 . ~ -LM'"''"_J 21 28 Weekly In tc:::-v:.:ll T.:idpoint July 4 •• I 11 I 18 25 l .4.. t:t~us t Fie. l. Pheasant hatching d~tes projected fro~ brood sec esti~utGs in l9b5. �- 31 Table 7, brood count data collected on the experimental and cont~ol -- Pheasant study areas -- Summer, 1965. Route Miles Hens Young Total Birds E-1 E-2 E-3 E-4 E-5 E-6 E-7 C-1 C-2 C-3 C-4 C-5 C-6 C-7 93.7 ExEerimental GrouE . 263 172 31 115 153 51 181 264 24 191 89 20 104 135 14 144 59 18 62 88 725.9 204 N. Brd. E. Crow. 107. 1~~ SE Brd. Cent. Brd. Cent. Crow. 117.6 W. Brd. W. Crow. E. Brd. E. Crow. N. Brd, Cent. Brd. Cent. Crow. w. Brd. w. Crow. 96.4. 104.0 91.0 115.5 113.8 91.1 127.9 114. 6 94.7 124.0 90.3 46 782 1238 Control GrouE 49 80 26 61 9 72 57 9 26 43 10 47 63 39 142 186 13 65 103 14 25 119 412 * Four replicates were made on each route. 756.4 608 Young Per Hen Birds Per . Mile Birds Per Minute 3.74 2.44 3. 71 3.55 3. 71 5.20 1.06 0.68 0.43 2.24 0.64 0.49 4.21 3.44 1.83 1.48 1.25 o. 94 3.83 1. 72 0.47 3.50 1.04 6.33 2.89 0.70 0.67 0.56 o.38 0.67 0.21 0.20 0.19 4.70 0.40 0.37 0.26 0.11 0.22 3.64 5.00 1.14 0.44. 0.35 3.46 0.80 0.25 1.50 Table 8. -- Spring and Fall pheasant population indices in the experimental and control areas -- 1965. Average Crowing Index Hens Per Cock Young Per Hen Spring Population Indices 34.4 5.20 3. 71 111.46 35.5 37.7 2.24 2.24 2.24 Total Exp, 35.9 Control Township Rte. East Rte. West Rte, Total Control 20.1 20.6 20.9 20.5 Area Experimental Township Rte. East Rte. West Rte. Fall Population Indices 3.44 115,02 122.15 512.12 410.04 412.66 2.24 3.83 116.32 434.25 1.90 1. 90 1.90 1.90 4.70 1.04 5.00 3.46 58.29 237.78 100.45 259.16 59.74 60.61 59.45 194.22 �... 32 - Table 9 -- Pheasant inventory and sex ratio counts in the experimental and control areas during the winter of 1965-66. Birds Birds Total Hens Hens Uncl. Cocks Miles Minutes Area Per Per Per Birds Minute Mile Cock Ex:per. 382 1325 574 1987 303 2864 - 3.46 7.50 2.16 242 935 237 840 4 1081 3.54 4.47 1.16 Area Control Area Pheasant Mortality: Hail storms swept a large part of the study region in 1965, Although Jnodera te crop dal.llElge was inflicted in some areas the storms were not believed to have caused any significant pheasant mortality. Some hardship was placed on pheasants by the prolonged severe cold and snow cover in January and February, 1966, however, mortality was not detected then or following a severe M3.rch blizzard. Mammalian predators were numerically low during the period. Prepared. by: Warren D. Snyder Research Candidate Date: April, 1966 Approved by: Harold M. Swope Wildlife Researcher Ferd c. Kleinschnitz ·Federal Aid Coordinator Wayne w. Sandfort Chief, Game Researcber �April, 1966 - 33 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO --------------- Project No. W-37-R-19 Work Plan No. 1 Title of Job: Game Bird Surveyc Job No. 14e Formulation of Hunting Regulations and Harvest Survey Period Covered: April 1, 1965 through March 31, 1966 Personnel: Harold M. Swope, Wayne L. Russell, Francis L. Waugh, Warren D. Snyder ABSTRACT Aerial surveys conducted in the experimental and control study areas on the opening day of the 1965 hunting season showed hunting pressure was nearly equal on the two areas and was also comparable with that of' previous years. Observations made on the ground showed hunting pressure was greatly reduced on successive weekends and very little hunting occurred on weekdays. Land posting surveys on 137 miles in the experimental area indicated that approxi mately 88 percent of the roadside was unposted; 10 percent of the land was posted "Hunting by Permission"; and 2 percent of the land was posted with "No Hunting" signs. �- 34 - Objectives: (1) To establish the exact number of hen permits to be issued within the experimental area and to issue these permits. (2) To submit recommendations for the general hunting regulations within the experimental and control areas, including bag limits, length of season, and shooting hours. (3) To collect harvest data on hens and cocks from hunters within the study areas. Procedures: Reference is made to the W-37-R-19 Job Descriptions for an outline of procedures used in this phase of study. �- 35 - Formulation of Hunting Regulations and Harvest Survey Warren D. Snyder A majority of work in this phase of the study cannot be conducted until a hen pheasant season is enacted. Items that were accomplished during the year are summarized as follows: Hunting Pressure Surveys: In the study region the 1965 pheasant season opened at noon on November 14th and continued through the end of the month. Aerial hunting pressure surveys covering 174 square miles in each study area, completed on the opening afternoon as in previous years, showed hunting pressure to be nearly equal to that of previous years (Table 10). The two study areas were quite closely matched as to hunting pressure. Table 10 -- Hunting pressure on the opening day of season in the experimental hen harvest study areas - 1963 - 1965. Percent Change from Cars Observed Year Previous Year Experimental Area 1963 1964 1965 Along Road In farmyards Moving 197 221 Up 12% 207 Down 6% 199 184 Down 8% 196 Up 6% 74 93 40 Control Area 1963 1964 1965 Along Road In farmyards Moving 84 74 38 - --- - �- 36 - Huntinz; pressure in the study areas was observed through the remainder of the season while conducting other field work. During 39.5 weekday hours of travel and observation only 13 hunting vehicles or hunting parties were tallied. Six of this number were recorded ona warm, calm evening in the first week of season, Only one vehicle per day was observed on four of the six days afield. During weekend observations 23 hunting parties were recorded in 17 hours. This information illustr0,tes the light to very light hunting pressure on pheasants following the opening weekend of season. land Posting Surveys: land posting information was collected during the 1965 hunting season and compared with similar data collected in previous years. This information (Table 11) indicates less land was posted in 1966 than in :previous years on the study areas. Table 11 posting along 13 7 miles of established transect in the -- land experimental hen harvest study area 2 1963-65, Year Unposted. Land Status Hunting by Permission 1963 73% 72% 23% 25% 1964 1965 Prepared by: 88% Warren D. Snyder •wildlife Candidate Date: Ap:r:U, 1966 10% Approved by: No Hunting 4% 3% 2°/o Harold M. SwoJ)e Wildlife Researcher Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid. Coordinator Wayne w. Sandfort Chief, Game Researcher �April, 1966 - 37 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO Project No, W-37-R-19 Work Plan No. 1 Title of Job: Pheasant Nest Site Selection Study Period Covered: Personnel: Game Bird Survey Job No, April 1, 1965 to !113.rch 31, 1966 Lawrence A. Webster, Robert L. Scbmidt, Warren D. Snyder and Harold M. Swope ABSTRACT Fencing and ground preparation were completed during this segment. The previously selected grasses and legumes were seeded in the 48 test plots. Attempts to trap pheasants to stock these plots were abandoned when it became apparent that vegetative growth would not be sufficient for meaningful experimentation by pheasant nesting season. �- 38 - Objectives: (1) To establish plot plantings of-selected species at the experimental nursery and wildlife research facility for future intensive studies. (2) To place pheasants in the experimental enclosure. Techniques Used: Reference is made to the R-19 job descriptions for an outline of procedures used in this phase of the study. �- 39 - Pheasant Nest Site Selection Stu~y Harold M. Swope L'<wrence Webster and Robert Schmidt expended consid,erable effort on ground preparation and weed control readying the 48 experimental plots for planting. By hard work and much initiative they developed techniques for subdividing the study area and planting seeds of various sizes and shapes. All plots were seeded according to the statistical design presented in the April, 1965, Game Research Report. Efforts were initiated to trap wild pheasants in northeastern Colorado to stock these experimental pens. Warren Snyder captured five hens with the cannon net, but before trapping progressed further it became apparent the vegetation would not be adequate by the start of nesting season to conduct the nest site selection experiment. Actually fine stands were obtained from all the seeds planted except little bluestem and sand lovegrass. Rapid growth followed aerial irrigation but the absence of any residual vegetation from previous growing seasons accounted for the cover deficiency. These plots should be in excellent condition for continuation of the study in the spring of 1967. Prepared by: Harold M. Swope WildlH'e Researcher Date: April 1966 Approved by: Wayne w. Sandfort Game Research Cl'lief Ferd c. Kleinschnitz I''edoral Aid Goorclinator ��April, 1966 - 41 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEA.RCH PRO,TECT SEGMENT State of - - - ~COLORADO ===~-----Project No. W-37-R-19 Work Plan No. 1 Title of Job: Game Bird Survey Job No. 17 Evaluation of the Landowner - Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Cooperative Habitat Dnprovement Program Period Covered: April 1, 1965 to !larch 31, 1966 Personnel: Warren D. Snyder and Lloyd w. Triplet Objectives: (1) To ascertain the number, acreage, and species composition of pheasant nesting plots planted by landowners in 1964 in Logan, Phillips, Sedgwick and Washington Counties. (2) To determine the contribution of the cover plots to pheasant production. (3) To determine the winter use of these plots by pheasants. (4) To ascertain the availability of these plots to pheasant hunters. Techniques Used: (1) Seed dispersal records and planting agreements will be obtained from the Northeast Region Office and summarized by county to compile: (a) Total number of plots committed for planting, (b) Total acreage in these plots, (c) Nuniber of plots and acreage by vegetative species composition, (d) Location of each plot on county highway maps inch to the mile). (½ (2) Field surveys will be made with Wildlife Conservation Officers to each planting site to ascertain: (a) total number of plots actually planted, (b) total acreage in plots actually planted, (c) general appearance of vegetative establishment (height and density). �- 42 - Evaluation of the Landowner - Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Cooperative Habitat Improvement Program One farmer acquired and planted legume and grass seed in Northern Sedgwick County in June, 1965. This apparently was the only accomplishment of the Department's Cooperative Habitat Development Project for the year. Clyde Richards, the participating farmer, obtained sweet clover and switch grass seed from the Department and planted it in combination with side-oats grama, blue grama, and western wheat grass on approximately 15 acres of marginal irrigation land. The acreage comprised three plots which were separated by two small leveled, cultivated fields. Approximately 12 acres of the seeded land could be flooded from an adjoining irrigation ditch. A dense stand of clover was established on the site in 1965. It in combination with existing weedy vegetation furnished poor winter cover to pheasants, but should supply fair nesting cover in 1966. A fair stand of grasses was in evidence, however, more time is needed before an accurate evaluation of the grass seeding effort can be made. Approximately 20 additional acres of marginal dryland (containing poor soil) were to be sown to a similar grass - legume mixture in the spring of 1966. Hopefully, the site will produce fair pheasant cover for a few years. Mr. Richards plans to graze these acreages once the grasses have become suitably established. Prepared by: Warren D. Snyder Wildlife Researcher Date: April, 1966 Approved by: Harold M. Swope Wildlife Researcher Ferd c. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �April, 1966 - 43 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO -------------- Project No. W-37-R-10 Work Plan No. 3 Game Bird Survey Job No. 8a Title of Job: Effects of Sagebrush Spraying on Abundance, Distribution and Movements of Sage Grouse in North Park, Colorado Period Covered: Personnel: April 1, 1965 to March 31, 1966 B. Gill, B. Poley, D. Gore, F. Glover and H. Carr. c. Weatherill, w. Russle, H. Swope, ABSTRACT In March 1963, Mr. R. B. Gill initiated the pre-spraying phase of a study to determine the effects of sagebrush control on sage grouse in North Park, Colorado. The post-spraying phase commenced on June 2, 1965 when the Bureau of Land Management began aerial application of 2-4-D to about- 4,ooo acres of sagebrush. Patterns and areas to be sprayed were designated by Gill. Collection of data on population level, brood production, nesting, and movements of sage grouse has continued. It is hoped that eventually these data will indicate some effects of sagebrush spraying on sage grouse abundance, distribution and movements. Seventy sage grouse were trapped, marked and released during the spring of 1965. Six reobservations were made on five birds by June 30, 1965. The 1965 strutting ground census (conducted prior to 2-4-D application) indicated a severe population decline. Since 1964, three strutting grounds were abandoned, and the number of birds decreased from 337 to 166. Brood route data suggested that brood production also decreased from 1964, although relative brood size increased from 2.9 to 3.4. The number of brood observations decreased from 40 to 24, and the number of young from 116 to 78. Average brood size was 5.6 in 1965 (obtained from broods on which complete counts were made). Twenty-three nests of the year were found on 60 five-acre nest-search plots. Five (21.7%) of the nests were successful. To determine the effects of sagebrush control on sage grouse nesting, 27 of the plots were established in sprayed areas and 33 in unsprayed areas. Most nesting in 1965 was completed when the 2-4-D was applied. Four sage grouse were equipped with radio transmitters to aid in movement studies. Little success was had in tracking the birds by this technique. �- 44 Recommendations: 1. Intensive strutting ground census and production census should be continued. 2. Broods should be flushed whenever possible to ensure complete counts. 3. Established nest-search plots should be searched again in following years. 4. Intensive movement and distribution studies in relation to the sprayed areas should be continued. Radio telemetry should be extremely helpful once adequate equipment is acquired, and satisfactory techniques developed (a special receiver and antenna have been purchased for use in 1966). 5. Trapping and marking should be continued, but a more satisfactory marking method should be developed. Objectives: (1) To determine the distribution and movements of sage grouse after sagebrush has been treated with a herbicide. (2) To determine sage grouse numbers and to classify them by sex and age, after herbicide treatment of sagebrush. (3).To determine vegetative and edaphic factors caused by the treatment of sagebrush with a herbicide. (4) To recommend patterns and methods of treating sagebrush with a herbicide for future studies, and for ultimate broadscale management on public lands. Techniques Used: 1. Sage grouse were trapped by using.the spot-lighting technique (June, 1960), stationary cannon-nets, and a mobile cannon-net similar to the one described by Lacker and Lacher (1964). The birds were marked with naugahyde pancho tags which were fastened with an elastic harness (Carr 1965). 2. Strutting ground census was conducted from a vehicle. Strutting grounds on the area had been located previously (Rogers 1964). 3. Production census was done by censusing each of five brood routes (Gill, 1965) about once a week. Each census was conducted by driving along the route at 10 to 20 miles per hour during the last two to three hours before dark. Meadows along the route were scanned thoroughly through binoculars, and whenever possible, broods were flushed to ensure complete counts. 4. The nest search was conducted systematically by two men walking back and forth across each plot. The searchers ,strung a 14 foot rope between them to help keep the proper distance apart. (Each man walked the same line twice so that the plots were searched doubly.) �- 45 - The 60 five-acre plots (27 in sprayed areas and 33 in unsprayed areas) were stratified acvording to distance from the nearest strutting ground, and placed wherever possible, in what Gill (1965) found to be favorable nesting cover. Each plot was surveyed. with a conrpass, permanently located with a steel corner stake, and recorded on a map. The plots were paced off either 155 yards square, 220 x 110 years, or 50 x 484 yards, the shape depending on the particular site. Nests of the year were differentiated from older nests by general appearance. Shell fragments in nests of 1965 usually were large and colored, whereas shell fragments in older nests usually were small and bleached. Old nest craters often were filled with dirt and debris and had vegetation growing in them. Feathers found in old nests were extremely weathered compared with those in nests of 1965. Successfully hatched nests were recognized by the circular manner in which the large end of the egg was pipped off. If the egg had been crushed, the shell membrane indicated whether or not the egg had been successfully pipped. 5, Four sage grouse were equipped with radio transmitters purchased from Sidney L. Markusen, Cloquet, Minnesota. An Eddystone communications receiver (Model 770 R) and a yagi antenna mounted on a truck were used in tracking the birds. Introduction: In March 1963, Mr. R, Bruce Gill began a detailed study of sage grouse J.n relation to habitat in the Lake John area of North Park, Colorado. His work, which was completed on June 2, 1965, constituted the pre-spraying phase of this study. The post-spraying phase commenced on June 2, 1965 when the Bureau of Land M3.nagement began aerial application of 2-4-D herbicide to kill sagebrush. About 4,000 acres were treated in patterns (Figure 1) recommended by Gill. ��- 47 - Effects of Sagebrush Spraying on Abundance, Distribution and Movements of Sage Grouse in North Park, Colorado Harold D, Carr In order to detect any change in movements and distribution of sage grouse as a result of the sagebrush treatment, the traJ?ping and marking program instigated. by Gill was continued, Sixty-four birds were marked and released on the strutting grounds during the spring of 1965. Six birds were marked and released away from the strutting grounds. The classification and tagging location of all grouse captured during the spring of 1965 is shown in Table 1. Three of the males had been banded previously, two in 1964 and one in 1963. Each was retrapped on the strutting ground where originally marked. Only broods observed between June 1 and Au.gust 15 were comparable and were included in these comparisons. !n botli years, the peak period for brood observation was July 15 to July 31. Because many brood counts were incomplete, the figures in Table 3 probably indicate relative brood size in 1964 and 1965, but not average brood size in any one year. Relative brood size increased from 2.9 to 3;4, To determine average brood size, the counts do not have to be taken only from brood routes. Table 4 presents a record of' all broods observed during 1965 that were counted. completely. Average brood size from these figures was 5.6 chicks. Of these complete counts, only one was less than five., and it w1::1.s three. I believe that this is a more accurate estimate of average brood size. Table 4 -- Complete brood counts made in l965 Period July June 1-15 1630 No. of broods No. of young Ave. brood size Range 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1-15 1-15 Sept Total 2 13 August 16-3i 1-15 4 2 2 22 12 5.5 3-7 6 14 7 5-9 0 16-31 3 15 5 10 5 0 0 73 5.6 3-9 �- 48 - ¾: -ffi) " --~@ -- " " 1<l 1<l :a. ::.. A. A, ~ 'ii '-I - ..__ <>) ::::- ~"-_:_ , ---- --..., ------- ----==-~---- .:,:::. '-' \\:::::::::::::i'1 -- - n ,t: X J: )f I I( .K )l;tJt)(~Jip. '>) 0 <;£::, '>::--::::_ ,;:: ::, 0 ~ -- I '' ) - ' l mi. (approx.) Fig. l. Patterns and areas of sagebrush ·sprayed with 2-4-D, �- 49 - Nest Search Table 5 shows the observational design and the number of nests found. One nest per 11.25 acres was fmmd in the sprayed areas, and one nest per 15 acres was found in the unsprayed areas. Unfort1ma tely, these figures cannot be compared. Although I attempted to locate plots in favorable nesting cover, the variability between plots was too great and the sample too small to permit direct comparison of sprayed and areas. Furtbermo:re, because of limited time, there was no way to accurately determine the proportion of fa-vorable nesting cover in each stratification. Table 5 Nest search data 1965 UNSPRAYED SPRA"'tTm No, Plots Nests of Year Suecessful Nests 1 7 0 0 0 9 13 3 1 0 0 0 9 0 12 1 0 4 33 11 0 25 Nearest Strutting Ground (miles) No. Plots Nests of Year 1/4 3 7 9 1 1 1 5 4 2 7 6 8 3 1/2 1 3/4 1-1/4 0 TOTAL 27 -:::;::::::~===;;:;:;;:::::-:::::;~-:::;:;:~::;;;:~:;;::=~;;:;,,"' 12 Total Nests Suecessful Nests Total Nests 1 1 5 4 18 4 5 ~======:;::;=.,.__,_,_::::-:::;:;:;:::;=:: ~,,,,_,~,-,,,"~~'' ' ,c.,:;;;-;,.,,,.,,,,,,,,,c,,~""'";=:::-;;;::::;:;:==;::;:;;::;::=:;:;:;::::::';;:':::;:::::;:::::;:;:=::: .. ====-- ~-~-==- ~~ �- 50 - A resume of brood route data from the last three years is presented in Table 3. Unfortunately, the number of broods and young observed in 1964 and 1965 are not comparable with the number observed in 1963, because the 1963 counts were not made on the same routes. From 1964 to 1965, the observations of broods and young decreased from 40 to 24 and 116 to 78 respectively. The number of miles per brood increased from 24.5 to 38.9. These figures reflect the decreased population indicated by the strutting ground census (Table 2), Table 3. Comparison of sage grouse production data from 1963 to 1965. Period Year No, of Broods June 1-15 1963 1/ 6 18 1964 }/ l 5 1965 l 2 1963 4 18 1964 6 1965 0 31 0 1963 20 1964 1965 2 June 16-30 July 1-15 July 16-31 August 1-15 August 16-31 Sept. 1-15 Total 9 No. of Young Brood Size Hiles/Brood Range 68 11 32 Relative Brood Size 3 5 0 43.1 2 4.5 5,2 0 0 0 3.4 1-7 25.4 5,5 3.5 22,l 4.2 2.1 2.6 38 1963 1964 1965 9 23 48 11 29 1963 13 1964 1965 8 3 49 21 15 1-9 71.0 5 2 8 3-5 106.8 4 1965 2 10 0 52.9 5 1963 191 52 116 40 28(24) Jj 96(78) ]j 1-9 1963 1964 1965 1-6 3.8 2.6 1963 1964 1964 1965 1/ Gill (1965). ];_/ Totals as of August 15, 1965 in parentheses. 3.7 2.9 24.5 44,8(38.9) ])3.4 �- 51 Table 1. -- Age and sex of sage grouse trapped from April to July 1965. LOCATION TAG ·COLOR SG SG 2 Lavender Lt~ Green Red Yellow ADULTS TOTAL -~- SG 9 SG 4 Off Strutting Grounds White Total % of Total 16-J~~'c 3 1 1 8 1 12 0 14 l 3 3 0 4 2 45 63.4 7 9~9 25 0 1 1 6 0 16 18 0 6 23.9 2 71 2.8 100 ==========-=··· < .·' ::::::·····:..:;;;··-=»-::.:··-=·======:::::::===================== ~'r: Strutting ground designations used by Gill (1965) *~": One adult male died before it was released. As of June 30., 1965, six reobse:tvations had been made on five adult rnales. Four of these sightings were made. on the strutting ground where the bird was marked (7 to 19 days after ma:tking). Another bird was reobse:rved, 35 days after marking, 2.5 miles northeast of the tagging site (SG 2). A bird tagged on SG 9 was killed 2.3 miles south of its tagging site, presumably by an avian predator~ One other marked grouse was presumed dead, because a tag was found at the tagging site 20 days after it was attached to a bird. The tag had been torn loose and was lying beside a sage grouse wing. Strutting Ground Census The number of males on the strutting grounds decreased from 337 in 1964 to 166 in 1965 (Table 2). Three previously active strutting grounds were abandoned in 1965, and the re1naini:t1g four grounds all had decreased populations. 'this decrease occurred before the 2-4-D application. Table 2e -- Comparison of strutting ground censuses on the study area from 1963 to 1965. ___ No. Active 1963 20 1964 7 7 1965 4 Year ,_ Grounds SG z~t Maximum Number of Males Per Strutting . Ground SG 11 Total SG 6 SG 9 SG 10 SG 4 SG 5 26 216 120 17 65 9 53 52 9 3 0 . 377. 17 11 7 0 0 166 85 19 99 52 337 *S.trutting ground designations used by Gill (1965). Production Census Twenty-eight broods were observed in 1,255~2 miles of travel on the brood routes, an average of one brood per lf4. 8 miles. Average. brood size (as determined from these: observations) was 3.4 young and ranged from one to nine. �- 52 - Forty-three nests were found within the plots, and 23 were nests of the year. Five of these 23 (21.7%) were successful, and all five were found on sprayed areas. When all nests of the year that were found (not just those in plots) were included, seven of 29 (27.6%) were successful. These figures are even lower than the 30 percent success observed by Gill (1965). Throughout the summer, 146 female sage grouse were observed, and 44 (30.1%) of them had broods. Although this method of determining nesting success was questionable, it indicated that nesting success was low. These data do not indicate any difference due to the spraying, because most nesting was completed when the herbicide was applied. The same plots will be searched in 1966, and should then indicate any change in nesting use of the sprayed areas. The plots in unsprayed areas will act as a control. Radio Telemetry I had little success in tracking birds with radio telemetric methods. Three females and one male were equipped with transmitters. Signals were received from the male until 41 days after release, but the bird never was visually located. Maximum reception distance under test conditions was about 2/3 of a mile, and directionality was poor. LITERATURE CITED Carr, H. D. 1965. Effects of sagebrush spraying on abc:ndance, distribution and movements of sage grouse in North Park, Colorado. Colo. Coop. Wildl. Res. Unit Quart. Rept. 18(4):22-26. Gill, R. B. 1965. Effects of sagebrush control on distribution and abundance of sage grouse. Colo. Game, Fish and Parks Dept., Job Completion Rept. Proj. W-37-R-17, Work Plan 3, Job 8. 185p. June, J. W. 1960. Western States sage grouse workshop; methodology. and Fish Comm. 17p. Wyo. Game Lacher, J. R. and Dorothy D. Lacher. Manage. 28:595-597. J. Wildl. 1964. A mobile cannon-net trap. Rogers, G. E. 1964. Sage grouse investigations in Colorado, and Parks Dept. Tech. Pub. 16. 132p. Prepared by: Harold D. Carr Date: April, 1966 Approved by: Colo. Game, Fish Hcirold M. Swope Wildlife Researcher Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �- 53 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLO RA.DO ------'---'-----'-"--'-------- Pro,iect No. W-37-R-19 Work Plan No. 4 Game Bird Survey 12 Job No. Title of Job: Summarization and Publication of Chukar Partridge Research Findings Period Covered: Personnel: April 1, 1965 through Ma.rch 31, 1966 Wayne w. Sandfort Constant assignments on other activities have prevented anticipated progress on development of this manuscript. Attempts are being made to have administrators allot necessary time to enable this manuscript to be successfully prepared and published. Objectives: (1) To summarize and publish results of all past work done on this species in Colorado. Techniques Used: Findings obtained under Work Plan 4, Jobs 1 through 11, W-37-R, data from chukar partridge investigations conducted by othcrr projects or organizations; and miscellaneous information pertinent to chukar management and research in Colorado are being compiled, summarized and published. Prepared by: Wayne W. Sandfor.t Game Research Chief Date: April, 1966 Approved by: Ferd c. Kleinscru1itz Federal. Aid Coordinator Laurence E. Riordan Assistant Director, Research ��April, 1966 - 55 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO ----~-~------ Project No. W-37-R-19 Work Plan No. 6 Game Bird Survey Job No. 4 Title of Job: Summarization of Experimental Habitat Improvement Studies Period Covered: Personnel: April 1, 1965 to March 31, 1966 Warren D. Snyder ABSTRACT Technical bulletin and technical journal manuscripts summarizing experimental habitat improvement studies for scaled quail were prepared for publication. A popularized writing stressing study findings was compiled and published. �- 56 - Objectives: To publish research findings on past experimental habitat im- provement for scaled quail studies (Work Plan 6, Job 1). Procedures: Compile, summarize, and prepare information for publication in the following forms: a. Technical Bulletin Publication. A thorough summarization of the objectives, conditions, procedures, results, conclusions, and recommendations covering parts 1 through 4 of Work Plan 6, Job 1. b. Technical Journal Publication. A manuscript to include pertinent technical information obtained with emphasis on procedures, findings, and conclusions. c. Semi-popular Publication. A summarization of study findings, conclusions, and recommendations for management to be aimed for public consumption. �- 57 - Summarization of Experimental Habitat Improvement Studies Warren D. Snyder The three manuscripts listed above were completed during the project segment. The following Table of Contents illustrates the content of the technical bulletin publication which at present awaits publication. A second more condensed report was submitted to the editorial staff of the Journal of Wildlife Management for review. The third semi-popular edition of the scaled quail study was published in the November - December, 1965 Colorado Outdoors, official magazine of the Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department. Sincere thanks are extended to Donals M, Hoffman and Wayne w. Sandfort for their critical review and recommendations in preparing the manuscripts and to Virginia Cole and the Fort Collins Secretarial Staff for typing assistance. EXPERIMENTAL HABITAT IMPROVEMENT FOR SCALED QUAIL AN EVALUATION STUDY Table of Contents Chapter I. INTRODUCTION II. III. IV. Page 11 • THE SITUATION History Vegetation . • A climate of Extremes Associated Species •• Sea led Quail • • • • • Study Limitations and Assets • . . TREE AND SHRUB PLANTING EFFORTS Windmill Sites , • , • , Forest Service Planting Cooperative Efforts THE OLD HOMESTEAD STUDY History ..•.•..• Site Selection, Development, and Study Initiation Census of the Study Areas Banding 14 14 14 . •••••••••• Census Results - Scaled Quail Summer Census . . • • • • Population Changes to Prehunting Season The Influence of Hunting Season • Winter Census Results • Census Results - Bobwhite Census Results - Pheasants 15 • • 17 20 21 • 24 24 • 28 • • 30 30 30 33 36 39 39 27 42 46 54 60 60 �- 58 :l'able of' Contents Cont. Chapter V. Page THE BRUSH SHELTER DEVELOPMENT STUDY Census Procedures Harvest ., ., ...... Population Changes • • • • • • • Quail - Vegetation Correlations VI. VII. 63 64 66 68 70 • ADDITIONAL DEVELOPMENT AND STUDY The Block Development • • • • • Census and £upu.cacion Changes Trapping, Banding, and Back-tagging Supplemental Feeding ••• Wildlife Use of the Provided Water Camera Recorders • 73 73 • • • ...... ,, .... " 81 81 83 84 ~ The 1964 Fall Movement • Feeding Wild Quail •• Placement of Developments Draw Bottcms Windmill Plots • Old Homestead Sites Other Locations •• • Blowouts ,, ........ Intensity of Habitat Development . Human Aspects of Habitat Development ' Scaled Quail Versus Livestock Interests Increase or Attraction • • • • • • Development of Private Lands • • • Econcmics of Habitat Manipulation . VIII, CONCLUSIONS 76 78 79 MANAGEMENT RECOMMENDATIONS AND ECONOMIC CONSIDERATIONS Establishment of Natural Cover Artificial Resting Cover Fencing • . • ••• Water 74 76 85 88 89 90 92 92 93 94 . • • 95 95 96 98 99 100 100 103 • LITERAIURE CITED 107 APPENDIX A APPENDIX B APPENDIX C 109 112 113 Prepared by Warren D. Snyder Wildlife Researcher Date: April, 1966 Approved by Donald M. Hoffman Wildlife Researcher Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �April, 1966 - 59 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO Project No. W-37-R-19 Work Plan 9 Title of Job: Summarization of Blue Grouse Studies Period Covered: Personnel: Game Bird Survey 4 Job No. April 1, 1965 to March 31, 1966 Glenn E. Rogers ABSTRACT A manuscript was completed and a rough draft mailed to the regional office of the Bureau of Sports Fisheries and Wildlife for concurrence. The manuscript was returned w:i.th suggestions for revisions. Objective: To publish information on past blue grouse studies. Procedures: 1. Revise and rewrite manuscript titled "The Blue Grouse in Colorado" as deemed necessary. 2. Edit proofs and cooperate with editors toward publication. Prepared by: Date Glenn'E. Rogers Wildlife Researcher April, 1966 ------'-'"'---'-"~=------ Approved by: Donald M. Hoffman Wildlife Researcher Ferd c. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator ��April, 1966 - 61 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO -------------- Project No. W-37-R-19 Work Plan 10 Game Bird Survey Job No. Title of Job: Study of Hungarian Partridge Adaptability Period Covered: April 1, 1965 to March 31, 1966 Personnel: 1 Harold M. Swope, Ted McKinney, Harry Dobbs, Corrin Davidson, Charlie Brown, Gurney Crawford, and local ranchers. ABSTRACT Hungarian partridge appeared to completely disappear in the Douglas Lake area north of Fort Collins. Field and roadside searches and interviews of persons living and working in the area failed to locate a bird. On March 23, 1965, 124 Huns were released in the Roundbottom area Southwest of Craig. Some of these birds were occasionally sighted during the ensuing spring in the release area. These birds also seemed to disappear during the summer months. One unverified report of a brood sighting was received from a local rancher. �- 62 - Objectives: (1) To release Hungarian partridges in the State. (2) To determine success of introduction. Techniques Used: Roads_ide census· methods, and searches of release site vicinities on foot, proved ineffective. Interviews of local residents, and observations by resident Game, Fish and Parks Department personnel, were also made without success. �- 63 - Study of Hungarian Partridge Adaptability Harold M. Swope No Huns have been released in the Douglas I.ake vicinity since March, 1964. There were no reported sightings of these birds during the period covered by Segment 19, Numerous roadside checks and walking searchers were made within a three mile circle of the release site. Tracks were observed in fresh snow approximately two miles north of the release site that could have been made by Hungarian partridges, but no verification was possible. Discussions with several persons who live and work in the area failed to yield evidence of Hun survival. Following the Ml.rch, 1965, release of 124 Huns in the Craig area feed was scattered around the release site and checked every few days by local conservation officers. They reported occasional sightings of these birds very close to the release site until June. No other authenticated observations were made, however, a rancher did report a brood he thought to be Huns, sighted during wheat harvest operations in August. Because of the relatively small number of Huns released in such a vast area of homogeneous habitat, with no know concentration area, intensive searches were not attempted. Recommendations: Large flocks (200 - 400) of Hungarian partridges should be released in these two trial areas as soon as they can be raised at the experimental nursery. Once these plants have been made follow-up efforts to relocate them should be intensified. Prepared by: Harold M. Swope Wildlife Researcher Date: April 1966 Approved by: Wayne w. Sandfort Game Research Chief Ferd c. Kleinschnitz ]'ederal Aid Coordinator ��April, 1966 - 65 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO Project No, W-37-R-19 Work Plan 10 ------------ Title of Job: Period Covered: Personnel: Game Bird Survey Job No, 2 Experimental Breeding of Hungarian Partridges April 1, 1965 to M3.rch 31, 1966 Willis G. J\'13.nsfield, Robert L. Schmidt, and Harold M, Swope ABSTRACT Holding and propagation facilities were not completed in time to permit breeding experimentation during the period covered by this segment. Fifty-one Hungarian partridge were received from Oregon on October 6, 1965. These birds, plus seven others being held at the experimental bird farm, will be used to conduct breeding investigations during the spring and summer of 1966. Willis J\'13.nsfield and Robert Schmidt constructed special mating pens to assure proper· pairing of the birds. �- 66 .. ' .• ', <.,. Objectives: (1) To determine the effects of a high protein diet on fertile egg production. (2) To ascertain if stimulighting increases fertile egg production. (3) To compare fertile egg production resulting from several mating procedures. (4) To compare the fertile egg production resulting from isolated pairing with visual contact pairing. Techniques Used: experimentation. Birds merely placed in community pens awaiting breeding �- 67 - Experimental Breeding of Hungarian Partridges Harold M, Swope Brooder houses and rearing pens were finally completed late in 1965, Due to the unique mating habits of the bird, where the female selects her mate from a group of males and herds him to an isolated area, special "pairing pens" had to be constructed. Willis Mansfield and Robert Schmidt completed this construction work just in time to instigate mating procedures at the start of Segment 20. Fifty-eight Huns were on hand at the end of Segment 19 for breeding experimentation. Fifty-one of these were received from Oregon on October 6, 1965, and the other seven were survivors from an earlier shipment. Everything appeared to be in readiness to initiate the investigative portion of this job at the end of Segment 19. Recommendations: Breeding experimentation should proceed in 1966 as outlined in the Segment 19 and 20 job descriptions. Prepared by: Harold M, Swope Wildlife Researcher Date: Apri1, 1966 Approved by Wayne w. Ssndfort Game Research Chief Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator ��April, 1966 - 69 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLOR/\DO -------------- Project No. W-3'7-R-19 Work Plan No. 12 Game Bird Survey Job No. 10 Title of Job: Relationships of the Productivity and Distribution of Wild Turkeys on the Uncompahgre Plateau to the Environment Period Covered: April 1, 1965 to March 31, 1966 Personnel: Wildlife Conservation Officers Harvey Cox, Bob Mangus, Brick Mink, and Tom Sherrill assisted with brood counts, gathered kill data, and provided information regarding distribution. Research Biologists Ray Boyd, Dave Gordon, Don Hoffman, Dean Medin, and Glenn Rogers ran check stations during the turkey seasons. To these people, I express my sincere appreciation. ABSTRACT Feed stations were established during the winter to concentrate turkeys. One hundred and forty-six birds, one hundred and thirty-six less than last year and 52% less than the three year average, were seen in the vicinity of feed stations. The decrease in the winter count was mainly due to a decline in the turkey population and partly due to better than normal food conditions. Twenty-five wild turkeys were trapped, marked, and released in six areas on the Uncompahgre Plateau. Most birds were marked with wing markers, "Jiffy" wing bands, and leg bands. Movements were determined by observing the travel of marked birds; some of which moved 3, 5, 9, and 10 air line miles from sites where the birds were marked and released. Due to a population decline and the resulting small kill, reliable estimates of the productivity and of the sex and age ratio of the turkey kill could not be calculated. Climatological data has been collected for several months from two weather stations consisting of a maximum - minimum thermometer, a hygrothermograph, an anemometer, and a rain guage. Transects have been run to measure yearly trends in mast production. Minature transmitters operating on a solar cell were obtained to enable the recording of turkey activity for correlation with events in the environment and to determine sources of mortality. The radio equipment will also be used to locate turkey nests and to determine nesting success. Other information incidental to the study was gathered. �- 70 Recommendations: accol11J'.)lished, The following objectives of this study have not been 1. Determine how environmental factors affect movements. 2. Determine the size of the turkey population from the sex and age structure of the turkey kill. 3. Determine the productivity of the wild turkey population on the Uncompahgre Plateau. The first objective has not been determined because of our inability to obtain or develop a telemetry system that suits our needs in this type of terrain. The other objectives cannot be determined until the turkey population in the study area increases to the point that it becomes possible to adequately sample brood size, kill, and other factors that determine productivity. It is also essential that large flocks are available for marking on the winter range. Since the present turkey population is below the desired level, I recommend that the study be discontinued upon completion of the vegetative analysis in September, 1967. Present results should be written up for publication during this segment. The remaining portion of the study can be accomplished when the population increases and when adequate telemetry equipment becomes available on the market. Techniques Used: Census -- The size of turkey population was determined by counting turkeys in the vicinity of established feed stations consisting of baled oat hay and whole oats in wintering areas on the Uncompahgre Plateau. The number of turkeys seen in the vicinity of the feed stations by Department personnel and other reliable persons was recorded. Visits were made to other winter areas where turkeys were reported and birds were counted where possible. Counts were made from December to May. Distribution and Movement -- Techniques used to determine distribution involved field observations, reports from reliable sources, and location of kills made by hunters contacted during the hunting season. Movements were determined by the location of turkeys which were trapped, marked, and released in wintering areas and with the aid of telemetry equipment. Turkeys were trapped with the cannon net at the Hill Ranch, and in Dominguez Canyon. Turkeys were sexed and aged according to methods described by Keizer and Kozicky (1943). Most birds were marked with National "Jiffy" wing bands, aluminium leg bands, and wing markers similar to those described by Knowlton, Michael, and Glazner (1964). Effects of Environmental Factors Upon Movement -- Radio transmitters operating on a solar cell were obtained to enable the location of turkeys in order to determine the effect of environmental factors on movement and to determine nesting success. �- 71 - Sex and Age Structure of the Kill -- The sex and age structure of the turkey kill could not be calculated due to the small sample of the kill which was obtained by conducting hunter checks during the turkey seasons, In addition, check stations were established on the roads most often traveled in each area, During the first two days of the spring season (May 2 and 3) hunters were checked on the north end of the Divide Road, in the vicinity of Pickett Corral in Escalante Canyon, and near the Hill Ranch on Colorado Highway 90, Additional hunter checks were made in various parts of the study area throughout the spring season~ Productivity Productivity could not be calculated due to the small number of marked birds killed and because of the small kill, Physical Factors -- Climatological data was collected from two weather stations consisting of a maximum - minimum thermometer, a hygrothermograph (housed in standard weather shelters) an anemometer, and a rain guage. One station was located about one-half mile inside the Uncompahgre National Forest boundary west of the Pickett Corral road. The other station was at Pickett Co=al. ��- 73 Relationships of the Productivity and Distribution of Wild Turkeys on the Uncompahgre Plateau to the Environment Gary T. l,fyers Environmental studies are sometimes thought of as basic research often having no immediate practical application in management, yet management strives to harvest the game crop to maintain a.balance between the species and its environment. This goal cannot be achieved without a reasonably accurate estimate of productivity and an understanding of the environment. Another job of management is.control of limiting factors. But before a limiting factor can be controlled, it must be recognized. Recognition of limiting factors is almost impossible without a thorough knowledge of the environment. The primary objective of this study is to increase our understanding of the turkey and its environment. Census Turkeys in the study area have been counted by various methods during the past four winters. Only 146 turkeys were seen last winter (Figure 1) compared to 282 counted in the winter of 1964-65. 13ased on this information, the winter turkey population on the Uncompahgre Plateau declined 48% during the past year. The present population is 52% below the three year average winter count of 415 birds (Figure 2). Discussion -- The winter turkey population may not have decreased quite as much as counts indicate. Turkeys in certain parts of the study area may have wintered higher than normal and not been included in the census. Evidence of this was seen in the lower part of Spring Creek Canyon where 21 turkeys were trapped in January, 1965. This year, turkeys did not reach this area until the last of March and stayed on their normal winter range less than two weeks. If similar movement occurred in other areas, this winter's census is somewhat lower than it should have been. Still there are probably fewer turkeys on the Uncompahgre Plateau npw than since before 1959. �lm::::L· I ¥ :lL# Figure !,--Distribution of the winter of 1965-66, in parenthesise 146 wild l·u,· The number of on the Uncompahgre Plateau dur-ing counted in each area appears �500 400 I 300 !?tl ~ 0 "':l I 200 a 0 I !00 1963 .. 1964 1965-1966 ·. · . YEAR OF WI NTER CENSUS.• F lgure 2.-...NUmber of turkey counted in the $hldy area during the past foUr winters. ......J \J1 �- 76 Movement and Distrilmtion Figure 3 shows the location of banding sites and minimum distance of movement of banded birds from these sites. Four birds marked in the study area were killed during the 1965 hunting season (Table 1). Two of the birds were killed at Pickett Corral. A tom, tagged there in January, 1964, was shot during the April season at the banding site. A hen, marked at Pickett Corral in February, 1964, was killed on the south bench of Love Mesa, about three miles away, on November 20, 1965. Another marked hen, released on Log Hill in March, 1964, was harvested on the Moon Ranch in November, 1965, five miles from the banding site. A bird from the Hill Ranch, located on Cottonwood Creek, was harvested near the mouth of Clay Creek. A fifth turkey, marked in Spring Creek Canyon, was seen about nine miles from the capture site near the head of the South Fork of Spring Creek during the fall. The winter distribution of wild turkeys is seen in Figure 1. Nearly all winter concentrations were in the Pinyon Juniper forest type. Turkeys began leaving the winter areas during the last of March. By April 3, a majority of the birds were in or on their way to the summer range. In the latter part of July and all of August and September, only one turkey brood was reported; so no information is available regarding brood rearing habitat. Check station personnel examined only three turkeys killed during the October turkey season. Two birds were harvested in the Ponderosa Pine forest type, the other in a mixture of Ponderosa Pine and Oak Brush. In the November turkey season, two birds were killed in the Oak Brush, one in the Ponderosa Pine, and five turkeys were harvested where both Ponderosa Pine and Oak Brush occurred. One bird, not examined by Department personnel, was reportedly killed in an area where Oak Brush and Ponderosa Pine occurred. Effect of Environmental Factors Upon Movements The activities of wild turkeys must be continuously recorded to successfully correlate activity with events in the environment. Radio Tracking devices promise to provide the means of determining the activity of wild turkeys in their natural habitat with minimum disturbance. Telemetry equipment may also enable the location of turkey nests to determine nesting success. A transmitter, powered by a small, rechargeable battery and a solar cell was obtained in December, 1965. The transmitter cost $110 and weighed 2.2 ounces. It was 3 3/8 inches long, 2 inches wide, and l 1/2 inches thick. The whip antenna was 11 1/2 inches long. The transmitter, with harness, weighed less than 4 1/2 ounces. The radio was tied to a post and left outside from December 18, 1965, (off and on) until February 14, 1966. The transmitter was subjected to rain, snow, and sub-zero weather. It functioned well so long as adequte light was available to operate the solar cell. Additional transmitters were obtained and attempts were made during the last of March and the first of April, to trap turkeys to instrument with transmitters. No birds were captured; so telemetry equipment was not attached to turkeys in the study area this year. �- 77 - • ' NATURITA Banding Site ' Figure 3,--Location of all banding sites in the study area, general direction and minimum distance of movement of banded birds from these areas, �____________________ Table 1. -- Information concerning marked turkeys killed on the Uncompahgre Plateau during the 1964 "'--"'------- , Back ~ f i l " L . Color No. =-··-·--~· 4 Blue~White Dots l,c Blue-White Dots --------1st release Killed Jiffy Wing. Band Leg Band No. No. 49 T-75 1st re.lease Recapture 2nd release Killed Blue Blue 1st release Recapture 2nd release Killed Blue Blue Blue Blue 30 30 30 30 1st release Red Red 4-1 4.1 Sex - -- ",_,....,,....,,, .. 37 14 37 14 14 14 (Radio) -===-·-·· 49 """'""""-~-""=",__._,,...,.__.,.,,.,_~ T-51 T=Sl We.i.ght (pounds) F Age A 11 ~ F A 8 F~Do A A 8 3/4 A 8 3/4 8 3/L~ . * Date Captured 3~26-64 Log Hill J.l .. ?-65 Moon Ranch 2-25-64 4.-8-64 4-8-6L1. P:Lckett Corral Pickett Corral Pickett Corral Love Mesa Place Captured '"'" F F F F T-51 seasonsn A 8 3/4 11-20-65 "-"""'"'"""'"""'"'="""'""'"'""11'-"cl T-532 36 15 % 15 ½; 15 t T-532 M M A A T-532 M A M A ll1, ~ F.D. 36 1-,21-M. Pickett Corral 3-1-64 3-1-·64 4-1.5-·65 Pickett Corral Pickett Corral Pickett Corral 2··2-65 11-29-65 Hill Ranch Clay Creek ~--'ffi Killed 99 T·-'566 M y 1 ? T-566 M A ? 1 =======================-=·=-=-=·-==··=· ·=="-=~-~1'fl!TmG2~.,,,," ~· ""~""""""""'""..;.~llib----"'~~==="""'=aa=====·='==-"' * F. D. indicates field dressed weight. =·=· ~ �- 79 Climatological Data -- Climatological data was from two weather stations. One station was located about~ mile inside the Uncompahgre National Forest boundary west of the road to Pickett Corral. The other station was at Pickett Corral. Information collected from these stations is summarized in Table 2. Productivity A number of mathematical ratios were used to estimate the size of the turkey population last year. These ratios can not be used unless sex and age ratios of the kill are known. This year only 19 turkeys (33% of the total kill) were sexed and aged by reliable people during the fall turkey seasons(Table 3). Fourteen of the birds were adults. Statistics indicate (at the 95% confidence interval) that the total kill consisted of from 39% to 84% adult birds and contained between 16% and 62% poults. In other words, the sample of the kill is too small to accurately determine the age ratio of the kill. Similarly, estimates of the sex ratio of the kill determined from this sample are not accurate. Thus it is impossible to estimate productivity with any reliability. Some idea of productivity can be gained by comparing the annual kill figures for the study area. Only 58 turkeys were killed by 239 hunters on the Uncompahgre Plateau last year. This was the smallest kill since 1959 when 66 hunters took 51 birds (Figure 4). This information leads one to conclude that the turkey population during the 1965 hunting season was probably at its lowest level since before 1959. This conclusion is supported by the lack of broods seen in the study area prior to the fall hunting seasons and by the unusually small number of birds counted the foll.owing winter. Trapping and Banding Operations Turkeys have been trapped, banded, and released during the winter on the Uncompahgre Plateau since 1961-62. Twenty-five turkeys, including five recaptures (Table 4), were trapped, banded, and released this winter in the study area (Table 5). Twenty-one of the birds were marked at the Hill Ranch west of Nucla, Colorado on Highway 90 next to the forest boundary: One of these birds died prior to release. The remaining five turkeys were trapped on Big Dominguez Creek about ~ mile outside the forest boundary. Wing markers of different colors were used to mark the birds (Table 6). Mast Production -- Eight transects were established in the Oak Brush to measure mast production. Plants of various sizes were included in each transect. Averages can not be projected to determine total production because of the wide variation in production between transects. But differences in the number of acorns counted on the same transect from year to year provides an index to determine increases or decreases in mast production (Table 7). In 1964, the two transects above 9,000 feet elevation produced 2,059 acorns. Not one acorn was produced by these same plants in 1965. However, the plants sampled below 9,000 feet elevation produced almost five times more acorns in 1965 than in 1964. Since acorns occurring at lower elevations are available to turkeys for a longer period of time. The acorn crop in 1965 probably produced more turkey food than the crop in 1964. �400 PRESSURE 300 200 100 0 L=,,,__ "''"< &«ML=,-=_ _..,,.,t___,,_ _J,_,-~-==-•=-_,_,,~,m-L,,_w,-1-......,.,,,_,_mo_,,J.....,/1,,==---="""" 1959 1960 1961 1962 1963 1964 YEAR Figure 4.--Number of hunters and kil I on the Uncompahg,e Plateau, 1959-1965. 1965 �Table 2. -- Climatological data gathered from two weather stations on the Uncompahgre Plateau between April 1, 1965, and February 28, 1966, is summarized below, Data Collected at Station No, 1 Max .. Temp, (F) Min. Temp, (F) (F) Ave. Max., Ave. Min., Temp., (F) Aveo Mean Temp, (F) Max.., Rel, Hum. (%) Min. Rel, Hum., (%) Ave, Max$ Rel. Hum., (%) Ave. Min. Rel, Hum, (%) Ave. Mean Rel. Hum, (%) Total Precip. (in.) Ave, Wind Vel, (mph) Data Collected at Station No0 2 Max,, Temp. (F) Min, Temp. (F) Ave, Max. Temp, (F) Ave. Min, Temp. (F) Ave. Mean Temp, (F) Max., Rel. Hum, (%) Min,, Rel, Hum. (%) Ave. Max,, Rel. Hum, (%) Ave"' Min~ Rel. Hum,. (%) Ave, Mean Rel. Hum., Tota 1 l?recip. (in.) Ave, Wind Vel. (mph) April May June Sept. Oct 0 Novo Dec. Jan .. Feb, 75 79 29 64 39 83 81 30 80 29 66 38 53 100 18 81 64 9 48 53 3 38 20 29 100 35 91 58 73 0,46 1,2 49 23 43 - 2 36 15 25 100 20 87 49 68 1,55 1,0 45 68 0,46 2,4 23 78 33 44 100 5 100 4 78 78 27 26 52 0,79 4,3 53 2,30 3,6 52 37 74 46 6.0 100 12 73 25 49 0,59 3,8 67 42 55 100 18 91 36 63 3,60 3,2 37 61 1.03 3.2 29 38 100 28 93 49 71 1,72 2,7 - 3 36 16 26 100 92 0:, ,_., 74 23 56 31 44 100 7 85 29 56 2.30 3,6 76 26 62 37 49 100 6 82 30 56 1.01 4.8 83 32 73 42 81 27 65 58 37 51 100 15 84 28 56 0,58 3,6 100 17 95 36 65 3.37 2,6 78 27 65 34 49 100 19 87 36 62 1.10 2,5 49 60 8 47 26 37 100 26 94 - 6 37 8 51Dl 71 1.96 2.1 45 - 9 36 0,46 100 25 91 49 70 9, 39 22 100 29 94 45 70 �- 82 Table 3,. .,_ Sex and age structure of the turkey kill examined by field personnel in 1965 .. Also included is one hen killed illegally during the spring, two birds killed with bands that were returned, and a poult harvested by Dave Harbor 0 Spring Season Toms Number pf Birds .Killed October Season 1 1 Hens Poults Total November Season All Seasons Combined 1 2 9 5 12 0 0 2 2 2 4 15 21 7 ""'"'~"""'"'"*' Table 4. -- Information concerning wild turkeys recaptured on the Uncompahgre Plateau during the winter of 1965-:-66e Back Tag or Wing Marker Color No. Wing Leg Band Band No. No. T-32 T-32 T-32 .F T-565 T-565 T-565 T-564 F F F Weight Sex Age (pounds) Date Captured Place Captured 10 3/4 1-28-64 1-28-66 1-28-66 Hill Ranch 1-29-65 1-28-66 Hill Ranch Hill Ranch 1.;.28~66 Hill Ranch Hill Ranch Hill Ranch Hill Ranch .Hill Ranch Hi 11 Rane J:l Hill Ranch Hill Ranch Hill Ranch 1st. release Recapture 2nd release Orange Red 74 134 1st release Recapture 2nd release 1st release Recapture. 2nd release 1st release Recapture 2nd release Red 40 40 40 98 98 98 39 39 97 39 97 Red Red 36 Red 36 94 94 94 T-561 T-561 T-561 F F F F F F Red 47 47 105 105 1'-572 T-572 F F 1st release Recapture Died Red Red Red Red Red Red 2 36 97 F F A A 10.7 A A 9.8 A 9c8 A y 8.9 A 9.,3 A y 6.4 A A 8.1 y A 7.2 9.5 1-29-65 1-28-66 1-28-66 1-29-65 1-28-66 1-28-66 2-2-65 1-28-66 Hill Ranch Hill Ranch �- 83 - -- Table 5, Information concerning turkeys Plateau during the winter of 1965-66, Wing Marker Wing Color No. Yellow Yellow Yellow 57 Ye 60 61 62 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 94 124 125 58 59 Yellow Red Red 63 36 64 Red Red Red Red Red Red Red Red Red Red Red 65 Red Red Red 77 Red 78 583 584 585 M 587 588 589 M A A A A A y M M M F F 1'.;' ,I. F M F F F 592 593 594 595 596 128 71 Red Red Age 590 561 591 126 127 70 Red Sex 97 39 66 67 68 69 72 73 74 75 40 76 Leg Band No. 129 130 131 132 133 597 134 32 17 ,C F F F F F F 598 600 135 F 565 98 and releas·ed on the Uncompahgre F F F F 136 138 We,ight (pounds) Date Captured l4t. 6 17e5 1-24-66 1-24~66 15.5 1-2.4-66 1-24-66 1-24-66 1-28-66 1-28~66 /A A y y A A A y A A A A y A A A A y y 15.3 15,0 s.o 10~6 8,1 8~0 1L8 9 9.,3 9,6 7o7 10.7 9.2 Q ") ./o- 9~1 7,7 10.8 10.l 9,8 5 8.9 7.5 1-28~66 1-28~66 1-28-66 1-28-66 1-28-66 1-28-66 1-28-66 1-28-66 1-28-66 1-28-66 1-28-66 1-28~66 1-28-66 1-28-66 1-28-66 66 1-28-66 1-28-66 Table 6. -- Wild turkeys trapped, marked~ and released in the study area du.ring the winter of 1965-66. Adults Females Males Color of Wing Location Where Trapped, Marked, Total Markers Employed and Released Sub. .Adults Males Females 5 0 0 0 5 Yellow Dominguez Canyon 0 13 1 6 20 Red Hill Ranch �- 84 Table 7. -- Comparison of the number of acorn c~unted in eight Oak Brush transects during the summers of 1964 and 1965 on the Uncompahgre Plateau. Approximate Elevation of Transect . No~ Acorn Counted Per Clump of Oak +ir;:,.;1.... 1s...h....___ _ Range Average .. 1964 1965 1964 1965 9,550 9,150 8,420 8,200 83000 7,979 7,930 7,500 8-372 0-0 0-337 0-13 0-127 0-0 2-54 0-301 0-164 0-64 0-6 0-1,228 0-1,649 0-509 23-331 0-186 157.7 48.2 3.9 22.3 68~5 36.9 13.3 0.7 0.,,0 o.o 18.5 226.3 172.1 109.,5 14908 42.7 Total _As,cir~s I1 toduci'!d 3.515,,0 ""~~~-- 7ffl89 Incidental Information Questionnaires were sent to 74 people who purchased turkey licenses in this area last· spring~ The questionnaire was similar to the one used in Arizona and described by R. H. Smith (1963). Answers were received from 64 hunters (86o/~ return). Hunter reaction to the second spring turkey season in Colorado was generally favorable. Sixty-two percent of the hunters described the season as good .. The remaining hunters disliked the season because of bad weather or scarcity of turkeys~ Only 4% of the hunters were successful. Th,enty-seven percent of those who iNeht hunting saw turkeys,12% saw toms~ 20% saw hens, and 10% saw birds of unknown sex~ Fifty-nine hunters spent 521 hours (8.8 hours per man) hunting. A total of 290 turkeys, including 21 toms, 164 hens, and 105 birds of unknown sex, were seen by hunters • . L~terautre Cited Keiser, L. P., and E. L. Kozicky. 1943. Sex and age determination of wild turkeyse Pa. Game News 14(8):10-11,26. Knowlton, Fe F., E$ D. Michael, and W. C. Glazener. 1964. for field recognition of individual turkeys and deer. 28(1): 167-170., Prepared by: Gary T. Myers Asst. Wildl. Researcher Date: April, 1966 Approved by: A marking technique J. Wildl. Mgmt,. H:n:old ~.~~ Swope Game Leader Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief �- 85 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORA.DO ------------- Project No .. W-37-R-19 Work Plan No, 12 Game Bird Survey Job No. Title of Job: Wild Turkey Roost Study Period Covered: April 1, 1965 to M:l.rch 13, 1966 Personnel: . 12 Donald M. Hoffman Acknowledgements In addition ot those persons listed under the April) 1965 Job Completion Report 1 ranchers F. Baker, o. Benson, C, ITotrrington., H, Logan and c. Nicoli assisted with the study by permitting the use of their lands and contribut:ing information on populations, ABSTRACT Based upon the measurement of physical characteristics of eight winter roosting sites in the Spanish Peaks area, a preferred site for this period of the year consists of an unevenaged stand of tall, overmature ponderosa pines in a cheltered location within the winter range. Sites measured varied in elevation from 7800 to 8250 feet and contained from 4 to 44 roost trees. The average age of 70 ponderosa pines sampled was thought to approximate 165 years. Based upon the measurement of physical characteristics of five summer roosting sites in the Spanish Peaks area, a preferred site for this period of the year consists of an unevenaged stand of tall, overmature ponderosa.pines in a sheltered location within the summer range. Sites measured varied in elevation from 8100 to 9200 feet and contained from 2 to 11 roost trees. Tne average age of 26 ponderosa pines sampled was thought to approximate 157 years, although trees averaged larger both in d.b.h. and height in comparison with winter roost trees. Better site conditions within the higher summer ranges probably results in faster growth rates for trees, The largest ponderosa pine roost tree measured to date is 35½ inches in d.b.h. and 103 feet tall. It is located at the edge of a grassy clearing in Tracy Canyon within the San Isabel Nationa·l Forest at an elevation of approximately 8600 feet. A statistical analysis of d.b.h.s and heights of 118 ponderosa pines in the eight winter roosting sites by indicated degrees of use was made. It was found that the d.b.h.s and heights of trees showing various degrees of use did not differ significantly. The number of samples secured. for each use class was., however, smaller than required. From the data collected to date, it appears that groups of trees showing heaviest use are most probably due to factors which cannot be directly measured, �- 86 - Recommendations: Additional roosting sites should be located, additional known roosting sites measured, photographic records completed, final analysis of data completed, and the results of the study written-up for publication. Objectives: 1. To determine the physical characteristics of roosting sites within a mountain type range. 2. To determine use of roosts by wild turkeys and their importance in the management of the species. Techniques Used: 1. Physical characteristics were measured by: a. Approximate sizes of roosting sites -- distances were paced and numbers of trees utilized were counted. b. Exposure of roosting sites -- the position of the sun was observed and/or compass readings were taken. c. Slope of roosting sites -- Abney level and measuring tape were used. d. Elevation of roosting sites -- altimeter readings were taken. e. Heights of trees -- Abney level and measuring tape were used. f. Diameters (d.b.h.s) of trees diameter tape was used. g. Ages of trees -- ring counts on stumps in the vicinity of the various roosting sites were made and/or increment borings were taken. h. Age classes of trees Dunning 's classification for unevenaged ponderosa pine was used as a guide. 2. Use Characteristics were measured by: a. Times of entering (evenings) and leaving (mornings) roosting sites -observations were made at the Sarcillo Canyon roost from vantage points at weekly intervals in-so-far as possible during the fall, winter, and early spring periods. b. Duration of use of roosting sites -- routine inspections were made of known roosting sites. c. Numbers of birds using roosting sites -- late afternoon and evening counts were made in the vicinity of known roosting sites. d. Indicated degree of use of individual trees -- amounts of accumulated droppings inspected following winter period. �- 87 Wild Turkey Roost Study Donald M. Hoffman Introduction Investigations were continued on this study to secure factual information on basic range requirements as pertains to roosting site preferences, physical characteristics, and use within a mountain type range to better manage this resource. Roosting sites have been classified as winter, temporary winter, and summer sites. Winter sites are normally utilized from late fall through the late winter period. Summer sites are normally utilized from the very early spring period through early fall, although sites located have been used for relatively short periods only. A total of 139 individual trees in eight winter sites, 29 individual trees in five summer sites, and 7 individual trees in three temporary winter sites have been measured to date. These sites plus several roosting sites located but not measured are shown in Figure 1. Table 1 lists general information pertaining to the various winter and summer roosting sites. Physical Characteristics: Winter roosting sites: Table 2 lists information pertaining to the eight measured winter roosting sites. Based upon these sites measured, preferred roosting sites for this period consist of unevenaged, overmature stands of ponderosa pines. Some sites had Douglas fir, white fir, or aspen intermixed with ponderosa pine but most were pure stands of ponderosa pines. The sites included various exposures but none faced directly west, slopes averaged 19.5 percent (range 10 to 35%), elevations averaged approximately 8000 feet (range - 7800 to 8250 feet), sizes of the areas averaged 1.5 acres (range - ½ to 4½ acres), and numbers of trees showing use averaged 17 trees (range - 4 to 44 trees). There is usually an open ridge or rocky ledge nearby for ease of access. On the basis of measuring 139 individual trees used by wild turkeys as winter roosts, including 118 ponderosa pines, 8 Douglas firs, 8 white firs, and 5 aspen, an imaginary average roost tree for this period is an overmature ponderosa pine of 21.6 inches d.b.h. and 71.7 feet tall. The crown is 62.3 percent of the total height and the top is shaped rounded and open. It is approximately 165 years old. A statistical analyrds of d.b.h.s and heights by indicated degree of use of 118 ponderosa pines utilized as roosts wtthin Pight winter sites was made. The differences in d.b.ll.s and heirzhts was not found to be ic,anc at the 95% degree level, however, the .. number of samples secured for each use class did not meet the n1.1mbcr rr.:qu.trr:ri. Differen('es in mean (Lb~h~s and heights between the f'our use classes were t·ound to be small. 'I'his would indicate that factors such as ease of accescs or individual preferences of birds rather than factors which can be measured may determine the degree of use. �- 88 - Figure 1. Locations of known roost:ini; sites, Key: Winter roostini;.site Temporary winter roostini; site Srunmer roosting site �Table L Type -- Information relating to Merriam's turkey roosting sites. ship Exposure (%) Size (Acres) Private 8200 s 15 3/4 lt4 (1963-64) Private 8200 mv 25 2 9 ( 1963-64) Private 8250 E 10 H 13 (1964-65) Private 7800 E 21 1/2 16 (1963-64) 5/10/64 & 5/25/65 4/13/64 Private 7800 NW 35 3/4 9 ( 1964-65) 5/10/65 Private 8000 E 10 3/4 4 (1963-64) 5/15/64 Private 7800 s 15 1 13 (1963··64) 4/9/64 State 7900 E 25 4~ 31 (1963-64) 4/2/64 & 4/14/64 North Fork$ Las Animas Oak Creek, Huerfano Spring Creek #1, Huerfano Spring Creek #2, Huerfano City 8800 NE 16 1/2 6 (1964) 5/8/64 Private 8100 E 7 1/8 2 (1965) 10/13/65 Federal 8850 SE 23 1/2 11 (1964) 8/5/64 Federal 9200 s 23 3/4 7 (1965) 6/17/65 Tracy Canyon, Federal 8600 s 10 1/8 3 (1965) 5/26/65 Drainage & County Slope Number trees used and period Elev. (Ft.) Dates measured WINTER Abbotts Creek, Las Animas Bear Creek Mesa Huerfano Copper King Gulch~ Heurfano Mavricio Canyon, Las Animas Na Trujillo Creek, Las Animas Santa Clara Cr., Huerfano . Sarcillo Canyon #1, Las Animas Sarcillo Canyon #2~ Las Animas 4/16/64 & 4/24/64 4/28/64 (0- SU11MER Huerfano \,Q �Table 2 .. -- Summary of measurements-~ 139 trees used for roosts within 8 winter sites,. Use Class Number in Sample V,. Heavy 40 Age d.,b.,h., height Species Class (in.) (ft.) 38 Pp. l D 37 OM 823,.0 T 21,.7 M 14-39\ R 2800.0 T Heavy 29 25 Pp. 4 D 21 OM 3 Wf. Moderate 27 1 Df. 22 Pp., Light 43 33 Pp. 2 Wf,. 45-95 R 85 5 T 26.5 M 24%-34\ R 18 5 M 490~0 T 22,.3 M 13\-30\ R 225.0 T 75 0 M 70-85 R 58.0 M 1625.,0.T 73.,9 M 45-95 R 256 T 85.3 M 70-93 R 70 .. 0 M 1504 T 71.6 M 25-88 R 29.5 M 85.5 T 21,.4 M 18--25\ B. 703.0 T 70.0 M 270.0 T 67.,5 M 50-80 R 2295.0 T 69.5 M 90,.0 M 319 T 79.7. M 66-95 R 2085 T 67.2 M 30-85 R 0 l Wf. 4 Df .. 1 D 31-0M lM 50-100 R 23\-29\ R 529,.5 T 21.2 M 10-31 R 0 1 D 20 OM lM 73.7 M 2367 T 64~0 M 30-90 R 184 T 92.0 M 91-93 R 1395 T 66,.4 M 40-86 R 53.,0 T 26,.5 M 2. Wf., Percent Crown 21.,3 M 13-36% R 46.0 T 23.,0 M 15\-30\ R 3 Df., 56.,0 T 5 As. 18,.7 M 15~-22 R 42.5 T 88 5 M R 8-9 145.0 T 72.5 M 70-75 R 1735.,0 T 69.4 M 0 45 .. 90 R 130 •.0 T 65.,0 M 65-65 R 190.,0 T 6.3.3 M 50-70 R 2450 0 T 4i9.0 M 40-55 R 0 165 T 82.,5 M 70-95 R 151 T 75.5 M 66-85 R .. .. Est. Number trunks scarred Age Shape top 3434 T 163.5 M 111-230 R 21 A 16 D 14 RO 7 F0 1 PO 7 2 D 0 7D 12 RO 5 FO 1 PO 1 D 2 RO 12 1 D 3 D 18 RO 1 F0 1 PO l PO 1 4 2481 T 165.4 M 120-225 R 15 A 2599 T 162.4 M 125-225 R 16 A 4 D .3000 T 166.6 M 125-210 R 18 A 7 D 7 RO· 2 '8 0 0 6 17 F0 2 PO 2 D 0 3 D 0 0 �Table 2. -- Summa.ry of measurements -- 139 trees used for roosts within 8 winter sites Class Number in Sample Combined 139 Use Age d.b.,h., height Species Class (in.,) (ft.,) 118 Pp. 7 D 109 OM 2545,.5 T 8455.0 T 21.,6 M 71.7 M 2 M 10-39~ R 214,.0T 26.8M 15\-34i:R 8 Wf. 8 Df. 5 As. 160.,0 T 20.,0· M 15\~25~ R 42.5 T 8.5 -M 8-9 R (Continued) 0 Percent Crown Age Shape top 45-100 R 7351 T 62.3 M 25-90 R 11514 T 164.SM 111-230R 33 D 51 RO 30 FO 70 A 570,.0 T 540 5 PO 8 D 71.3 M 67.,SM 65-85 R 520,.0 T 65.,0 M 50-80 R 245.0 .T 66-95 R 695 T 86.9M 70-95 R Est,. T 5 D 2 RO R T - Total M - Mean R - Range A - Number aged 1 2 0 Key to abbrev.: Pp. - Ponderosa pine Wf. - White fir Df. - Douglas fir As., - Aspen Ne. NarrowLeaf cottonwood Pn. - Pinon D - Dead OM Over-mature M - Mature 29 1 PO 49.,0 M 40-55 Number trunks scarred RO Rounded, open FO - Flat, open PO - Pointed 11 open �Table 3. -~ SUll1ll1,:n:y of measurements =- 29 trees used for roosts within 5 summer sites., l/ _________ ------·-·---- -----Est. Number in Height (ft Percent Crown 1753 T 70.1 M 12-Y:·· 35~R 1905@0 T 73.,3 M 50-105 R li.0-90 R 24,,0 M 70.,0 M 69.,5 T 130.,0 T 34 .. 8 M 32-37~R 65 .. 0 M 65-65 R d b .. h,, 0 _sa_m_p_l_e___s_p_e~l:~s Pp,, 26 "~--\!--~) 575~5 T 22.,l M 1 Wf~ 2 Ne .. 1/ 0 ) Most trees showed heavy use for limited periods onlys See Table 2 for key to abbreviationso Note: Number Age (yrs~) Shape Top Trunks Scarred 4079 T 2 D 19 RO 3 FO 2 PO 5 93.,0 M 1 PO 0 190©0 T 95.0 M 95-95 R 2 RO 0 , 156s9 M 95®230 R 26 A �- 93 Table 4o -- Summary of Spanish Peaks wintering popvlations by periods$ j/ . Type Wintering Period Area County 1963-64 1964-65 1965-66 Middle Creek E.. Indian Creek Cucharas River Bear Creek Mesa Wahatoya Canyon Ne 'l'ruj illo CreekMavricio Canyon Subtotals Huerfano Huerfano 20 30 13 60 20 Huerfano 14 0 0 Huerfano 11 9 45 Las Animas 20 95 31 113 -1! Huerfano River- Huerfano 10 18 14 Huerfano Huerfano 4. 11 0 7 10 0 La.s Animas Las Animas 17 10 0 17 __Q 59 38 . 28 Las Animas 50 62 63 Las Animas Las Animas Las Animas 16 14 62 107 0 0 0 13 120 Las Animas Las Animas 0 13 0 8 10 0 35 35 40 _Q ill 407 Developmental 70 146 Control Mosca Pass Pass Creek Santa Clara Creek Wilkins Creek Whiskey Creek North Fork Subtotals 1 Other Abbotts Creek Duling Creek Sarcillo Canyon Burro Canyon Del Aqua Canyon Wet Canyon Apishapa River Lower Santa Clara Cr.Gonzales Canyon School Creek Huerfano Huerfano Subtotals 190 \ _Q 225 TOTALS 344 376 0 1/ Wintering population l0:velt1 which appeared. to be more or less i~tabili.zcid used rather than maximum numbers of birds counted. Temporary winter roosting sites: Groves of narrow leaf cottonwoods and pinon pine were used by wild turkeys late in the winter of 1963-64 as temporary winter roosting sites -when small flocks were forced to range lower than normal due to extreme -weather conditions. These conditions have not occurred since so further inforrration has not been gathered, �- 94Summer roosting sites: Based upon the five summer roosting sites measured, preferred sites for this period consist of unevenaged, overmature stands of ponderosa pines located within summer ranges. Exposures included mainly south or southeasterly facing slopes averaging 15.8 percent slope (range - 7 to 23%), located at approximately 8700 feet elevation (range - 8100 to 9200 feet), size of area is approximately one-half acre(range - 1/8 to 3/4 acre), and contains about 6 roost trees (range - 2 to 11 trees). There is an open ridge nearby for ease in access. Table 3 lists additional data. On the basis of measuring 29 individual trees used by wild turkeys as summer roosts, including 26 ponderosa pines, 1 white fir, and 2 narrow leaf cottonwoods, an imaginary average roost tree for this period is an overmature ponderosa pine of 22.1 inches d.b.h. and 73.3 feet tall. The crown is 70.1 percent of the total height and the top is shaped rounded and open. It is approximately 157 years old. Better site conditions within the higher summer ranges probably results in faster growth rates for trees in comparison with trees located in the winter ranges. Use Characteristics: In order to secure as many roosting site and roost tree measurements as possible during the reporting period, this phase of the study received minor emphasis only. Times of entering and leaving the Sarcillo Canyon roost have been recorded under previous segments. Populations of wild turkeys in the vicinity of known roosting sites were determined during the present reporting period and are shown in Table 4. The predominance of tall, overmature ponderosa pines utilized as roost trees in both winter and summer roosting sites indicates that these are important in providing a basic range requirement of the species. This class of ponderosa pine is also important to the lumber industry in providing a major source of sawlogs. · The preservation of groves of tall overmature ponderosa pines in sites having a history of use as roosts would therefore appear to be a prime'consideration in wild turkey management. Prepared by: Donald M, Hoffman Wildlife Researcher Date: April, 1966 Approved by: Wayne w. Sandfort Chief Game Researcher Ferd C, Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �April, 1966 - 95 JOJ3 COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO -----"---===---------- Project No. W-37-R-19 Work Plan No. 12 Game J3ird Survey Job No. 13 Title of Job: Experimental Habitat Improvement for Wild Turkeys Period Covered: Personnel: April 1, 1965 to March 31, 1966 Donald M. Hoffman ABSTRACT This study was designed and started following several years of poor natural food production and a declining Merriam's turkey population thought to have resulted from poor reproductive success. During the two years that the study has been in progress, weather conditions have been more favorable, resulting in improved natural food production and better reproductive success. Evidence of supplemental feeding practices within one control study area has made it necessary to substitute the Santa Clara Greek area for the Abbotts Creek-Duling Greek area for this purpose. This has also made it necessary to rework the data collected both within the present and previous segments. Wintering period population comparisons for the 1963-64 predevelopmental period and the 1964-65 and 1965-66 developmental periods show an increase in developmental study area populations and overall populations within the extensive study area of 900 square miles of range but a decreasing wintering population within the control study areas. Sex-ratio counts show 37 males: upon a sample of 185 birds. 100 females during the 1965-66 period based Brood counts made and reports of broods received during the summer of 1965 indicate a fair hatch occurred with 21 broods averaging 5.7 young per brood. Difficult counting conditions resulting from heaview than normal moisture during the spring and summer of 1965 undoubtedly affected the results obtained. �- 96 A good crop of natural foods during 1965 combined with a,mild, open winter in 1965-66 resulted in only two of the, five developmental areas being used regularly, two being used intermittently, and one used during the early fall but not during the winter period. In comparison, three of the five controls had small wintering flocks intermittently and two had no wintering flocks. Winter period field checks showed no wintering flocks other than those within known wintering areas, although some flocks did not come to the wintering grounds until late fall. Considering the mild, open winter during 1965-66 and the above normal natural food production during 1965, it is probable that flocks of from 10 to 12 birds, which appear to be usual present-day wintering populations under natural conditions, could have wintered in most known wintering areas within the extensive study area without supplemental feed. It is also probable that the larger wintering concentrations such as wintered on East Indian Creek, Bear Creek Mesa, Del Aqua Canyon, and Abbotts Creek-DuJ_ing Creek could: not have been held within the desired areas without the use of supplemental feed, Periodic spring period checks of the East Indian Creek study area during 1964 and 1965 indicated that wild turkeys probably from the Copper King Gulch wintering grounds (elevation - 8 1 150 feet) reached the top of the Sangre de Cristo Range (summer habitat, elevation - 9,400 feet) during the latter part of May both years. The 1966 spring dispersal of most wintering concentrations occurred during late Metrch. Green grass was available in most wintering areas by late February, 1965. Only two turkeys were known to have been killed by 19 hunters during the April 10-18 spring, gobbler season within the extensive study area and 20 additionsl turkeys were known to have been killed by 55 hunters during the October 2-10 regular, fall season. In comparison, Game Management Division information shows a total of 40 turkeys killed by 109 hunters during both 1965 seasons in Game Management Unit #85. A very light kill and very light hunting pressure are indicated from these figures, considering the size of the wild turkey population. �- 97 - Recommendations: The study should be continued to include periods which are less favorable for wild turkey survival and increase. The collection of data during winters of heavier than normal snowfall, periods of poor natural f'ood production, and/or periods of poor reproductive success should yield needed information to better manage this resource. Intena:tve ,.,tudies within established units of wild turkey range, even when 900 square miles in size, are yielding population information thought to be ~ar more accurate than that secured in past years. Objective: To determine the value of development of wintering grounds through the use of supplemental feed on wild turkey numbers, distribution, and harvest. Procedures: 1. Collect and record background information. 2. :Map study area. 3, Determine annual population levels. 4. Determine annual reproductive success. 5. Determine seasonal distribution. 6. Determine turkey kill and hunting pressure. 7. Provide supplemental feed within selected areas and study effects. ��- 99 - EXPERIMENTAL HABITAT IMPROVEMENT FOR WILD TURKEYS Donald M. Hoffman Introduction This study has been in progress for a two year developmental period following a predevelopmental study period where data were collected under a companion study, Work Plan 12, Job 12. As with the previous segment, most of the information gathered is presented in tabular form, The Santa Clara Creek area was substituted for the Abbotts Creek-Duling Creek study area as a control during this segment due to evidence of supplemental winter feeding practices by personnel of the Bar N-I Resort, With this change, populations, brood counts, and other data has been reworked and are presented within this report. The Federal Aid purchase of the 1520 acre John Sakariason property in upper Sarcillo Canyon in Las Animas County and a pending land-use agreement with the McDonald Brothers for an additional 7,600 acres for use in experimental turkey management will allow for the experimental habitat development of a preferred wintering area with control of land-use practices. This property has been named the Spanish Peaks Management Area. Collection of background information In interviewing various persons for the gathering of background information for the study, one correlation appears to be consistent for most of the preferred wintering areas -- populations of Merriam's turkeys have usually been highest in areas during periods when the cultivation of small grains was carried on and/ or supplemental feed was provided. One recent example of how changes in land-use practices have been followed by a reduction in wintering Merriam's turkey populations is found in the Santa Clara Creek area. This is only one instance but the correlation appears to be the same for many of the other preferred wintering areas within the extensive study area, During the period from 1949 through the early 1950' s, 'landowners on the upper Santa Clara Creek drainage planted cultivated oats for hay crops and populations of from 50 to over 100 turkeys wintered on waste grain and natural foods in the vicinity of the cultivated fields. Since this period, three former landowners have sold their properties to individuals who no longer plant small grains but instead pasture these old fields which are now in permanent grasses for the most part. Wintering populations have declined with small flocks of from 10 to 12 ranging in the area intermittently only during the past three winter periods. Mapping of study area Based upon elevational checks completed uu,.cn" this segment with an altimeter and knowledge of range requirements of the species, the extent of the summer, winter, and yearround ranges were modified a~ shown in Figure 2. Revised maps were planimetered to determine square miles of range. �- 100 - The extensive study area composed of yearround range constitutes the area the 7,000 and 11,000 feet contours (or between the 7,000 feet contour and the top of the Sangre de Cristo Range where the latter is less than 11,000 feet) and approximates 900 square miles, The area between the 8,600 and the 11,000 feet contours (or between the 600 feet contour and the top of the Sangre de Cristo Range where the latter is less than 11,000 feet) is considered to be summer range and approximates 340 square miles of range, The area between the 7,000 and the 8,600 feet contours is considered to be pri"" marily winter range but many wild turkeys spend the summer within this elevational belt as well, This range approximates 560 square miles, Annual population levels Annual population levels have been determined through flock and sex-ratio counts of birds on wintering grounds, Wintering popularion which appeared to be more or less stabilized were used for population comparisons rather than maximum numbers of birds counted since some flocks are thought to move between the different wintering areas from time to time. Locations of flocks observed and reported for the 1965-66 wintering period are shown in Table 3. Because of the substitution of the Santa Clara Creek area for the Abbotts Creek-Duling Creek area for reasons explained earlier, wintering populations for the 1963-64 predevelopmental period and the 1964-65 developmental period are included in Tables 1 and 2. Population trends shown for the first two years of the study are shown in Figure 1, Locations of all flocks observed and reported along with numbers of birds for the 1965-66 period are shown in 3. total of 146 birds in 4 flocks was recorded for the five developmental study areas and 28 birds in 3 flocks were recorded for the five control study areas during the 1965-66 period, In addition, 233 birds in 4 flocks were recorded in other miscellaneous wintering areas within the extensive study area of approximately 900 square miles of range. A Of the five developmental study areas, two had consistently heavy use of es tab"" lished feedgrounds, two had intermittently heavy use, and one had no winter period use, although a flock ranged in the area during the early fall period (Table 10). The apparent increases in populations of the developmental and extensive study areas during the study to date reflects the fair to good reproductive success in 1964 and 1965, a relatively light winter during 1964-65, and good natural food production during 1964 and 1965, The reason for the indicated decrease in control study area populations during the period is not as annare,nt, Table 4 lists sex-ratio information for the 1965-66 wintering period. A sexratio of 37 males: 100 females was calculated based upon a sample of 185 Merriam's turkeys observed at close range, �- 101 All are 0 ' f .. J.50 i . ·--~-~ ...' "~· m 'd - ~ - 1n..~, .~,,.,, •• 2 ... I .,..,H - ·I - p::i H © p s :::i _L .. 0 ! L I - ' - z lSO ~ ';I" ' Development areaia :~. I I, I 50 I , . Control'areas ' 1963-64 (Pre-developmental) ., • . i.. - A.,.......,, .. "'- ...: 1964-65 ( Developmental) ____............ . -, 1965-66 �- 102 - r2es , rol1f9 >lllVt(-t'\ ,u~s, ·:i;<'t~rn (If.,,~,~~, Figure 2 • Extent of 1!erriam1 a turkey range vrith:in extensive study area. Key: Winter and yearround range. - FEfB l:tl:l:l 1.000 feet tq 8,6oo feet 560 square l!U. les, Summer range -- 8600 feot to 11,000 feet elevations - 340 square miles. �- 103 ht;-.;. ~ -\""- N ~ ~ Fir,ure 3. Apnroximate loCDtion8 of 11 wintering flocks during 1965-66 period with rnunbers of birds indicated. �- 104 - Table 1. -- Wintering populations of Merriam's turkeys during pre-developmental period -- October, 1963 - March, 1964. Type of Area A:rea Developmental 1, Middle Creek 2. E. Indian Creek 3. Cucharas River 4, Wahatoya CanyonBear Creek Mesa 5. N, illo CreekMavricio Canyon Subtotals Maximum Number During Period Number Birds Date Source Wintering Population'" Number Number Birds Flocks Source FC FC FC 20 30 2 14 Jan. ,64 1/24/64 64 1 l FC FC FC 11 1/64 FC 11 1 FC 29. 3/17/64 2 FC 16 Jan. ,64 FC, RR 10 1 FC 14 Fall,63 Winter RR RR 4 I 11 1 RR RR Mar., 64 Mar. ,64 RR 17 RR RR -1l 2 2 7 20 70 FC, RR 165 7 Control 1, z. 4. 5, Huerfano River}bsca Pass Pass Creek Santa Clara Creek Wilkin CreekWhiskey Creek North Fork Subtotals 11 17 59 RR Other,h",: 1. 2. 3. 4, 5. 6. 7. Sarcillo Canyon Burro Canyon Del Aqua Ca·nvon shh'< Apishapa Canyon Abbotts CreekDuling Creek Wet Canyon Lower Santa Clara Cr.Gonzales Canyon Subtotals TOTALS Birds per sq. mile of range 1 l 1 FC RR 14 62 13 1 RR FC, RR RR 50 0 0 RR RR FC RR 13 Nov. ,63 Winter Winter Winter 50 Mar.,64 92 14 62 RR 0 RR Winter 16 l ' ...12. 190 1 266 506 344 20 study = RR RR RR 6 38 ·:k: Wintering population levels which appeared to be more or less stabilized used rather than maximum numbers of birds counted because of apparent movement of flocks. ·kf< Supplemental feed provided by landowners or others :i.n areas Nos,:, 1, 3, 4, nnd 5., ·k~'d,: Ten birds live-trapped by Game Management Division and transportr.;.ri r:o North Note: Dakota. FC Flock count RR -- Rancher or other report. �- 105 - Table 2. -- Wintering populations of Merriam's turkeys during the first year of study October, 1964 - March, 1965. Type of Area Area Developmental 1. Middle Creek 2. E. Indian Creek 3. Cucharas River 4. Wahatoya CanyonBear Creek Mesa 5. N. Truijillo CreekMavricio Canyon Subtotals Maximum Number During Period Number Birds Date Source 21 Wintering Population* Number Number Birds Flocks Source FC FC RR 13 1 19 3/16/65 12/14/64 3/6/65 60 0 1 0 FC FC FC 9 1/15/65 RR 9 l RR 36 1/13/65 FC 2 FC 62 147 113 5 RR RR FC 18 2 0 RR RR 10 1 0 Q 38 4 Control 1. Huerfano RiverMosca Pass Pass Creek Santa Clara Creek Wilkins CreekWhiskey Creek North Fork Subtotals 2. 3. 4. 5. Other?\-* 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Sarcillo Canyon Burro Canyon Del Aqua Canyon Apishapa Canyon Abbotts CreekDuling Creek Wet Canyon Lower Santa Clara Cr.Gonzales Canyon Subtotals TOTALS 2/25/65 Jan.,65 27 20 10 Winter 10 2/2/ 65 0 67 1/4/65 0 10 1 107 1 0 13 0 2/25/65 Winter FC RR RR RR 8 1 70 0 Jan.,65 RR 62 1 RR 0 0 35 Winter RR -1.2. 107 0 13 8 233 447 l FC RR FC RR RR FC RR RR RR RR RR 1 225 5 376 14 Birds per sq. mile of range (ext. study area)~ 0.42 .,, Wintering population levels which app oared to be more or less stabilized used rather than maximum numbers of birds counted because of apparent movement of flocks. ic-k Supplemental feed provided by landowners or others in areas Nos. 1, 3, 4 & 5. Note: See Table 1 footnote. �- 106 - Table 3. of study Type of Area Wintering populations of Merriam's turkeys during the second year October, 1965 - March, 1966. Area Developmental 1. Middle Creek 2. E. Indian Creek 3. Cucharas River 4. Wahatoya CanyonBear Creek Mesa 5. N. Trujillo CreekMavricio Canyon Subtotals Control 1. Huerfano RiverMosca Pass Pass Creek Santa Clara Creek Wilkins CreekWhiskey Creek North Fork Subtotals 2. 3. 4. 5. Maximum Number During Period Wintering Population* Ntllllber Number Ntllllber Birds Date Source Birds Flocks Source FC FC 20 70 l 1 20 12/21/65 1/3/66 10/14/65 RR 0 0 FC FC FC 45 2/1/66 FC 45 1 FC 11 166 1/4/66 FC ..J1. ..! FC 14 Dec., 65 1/7 /66 Fall,65 RR 14 FC 7 1 1 RR 7 16 RR 0 0 5 _7 12/13/65 Nov.,65 RR RR 0 0 _7 ! 20 70 146 49 28 4 FC FC RR RR 3 Other*'" 2. 3. 4. s. 6. 7. 8. Sarcillo Canyon Burro Canyon Del Aqua Canyon Apishapa River Abbotts CreekDuling Creek Wet Canyon Lower Santa Clara Cr.Gonzales Canyon School Creek Subtotals TOTALS 60 11/17/65 FC, RR 1/6/66 RR RR RR 0 0 120 1 0 0 RR RR RR 63 1 1 RR RR 40 1 RR 0 0 FC 308 233 4 523 407 11 120 0 70 10 Nov.,65 Jan.,66 RR RR 40 Feb.,66 Dec., 65 RR RR 8 Birds per sq. mile of range (ext. study area) * FC, RR 0 0 0 10 0.45 Wintering population levels which appeared to be more or less stabilized used rather than maximum numbers of birds counted because of apparent movement of flocks. ** Supplemental feed provided by landowners or others in areas Nos. 3 & 5. Note: See Table l footnote. �- 107 - Table 4 .. -- Sex~ratio counts of Merriam's turkeys -- 1965-66 .. Area Mature Juv. Toms Toms Middle Creek E. Indian Creek 10 N. Trujillo Creek 0 0 Bear Creek Mesa Sarcillo Canyon 8 13 -1.. TOTALS 0 6 6 Juv. & Mat., Hens Unclass. 10 4 44 10 Total Date of Best Count 20 70 12/21/65 12/21/65 & 2/1/66 25 0 8 24 49 3 0 0 25 135 17 11 45 -22. 1/4/66 2/1/66 3/23/66 202 Indicated sex-ratio - 37 males:100 females based upon sample of 185 birds., Brood Counts Brood counts to detennine reproductive success were continued within the various study areas and reports of broods were secured from individuals considered to be reliable. Table 5 shows the results of the 1965 brood countso Fewer broods (21 in 1965 compared to 38 in 1964) were recorded and broods averaged sma.ller in size (5., 7 young per hen in 1965 compared to 6 7 young per hen in 1964) 0 Table 5. -- Sunmiary of brood count information~- 1965. Type of Area Hens Poults Developmental (5 areas) Controls (S areas) Others 7 2 48 12 21 59 120 TOTALS AVERAGE Average Brood Size 13 5., 7 Heavier than normal moisture during the spring and summer of 1965 resulted in dense, high ground vegetation. This combined with ample foods probably resulted in broods remaining higher than usual and undoubtedly affected the results obtained. Some broods almost fully grown were observed late in the summer period after the close of the brood counts. It, therefore, appears that a fair hatch occurred during 1965. The various control study areas could not be worked as thoroughly as the developmenta 1 study areas due to time limitations. For this reason, overall r•v,.,rages are though to be of more significance than the break-down of broods by developmental and control areas® �- 108 - $easonol distribution Table 6 lists the observed times of movements from one wintering area (Copper King Gulch) toward the summer range based upon the observation of birds or field sign~ Elevations of key checkpoints were recorded with an altimeter., During the springs of 1964 and 1965, Merriam's turkeys had ranged to the top of the Sangre de Cristo Range by late May even though the wintering flocks dispersed later in 1964 than in 1965., A start was made in recording elevations with an altimeter for all spring and summer observations secured during the study$ This information is not complete as yet but will be presented within a future segment., Table 6., -- Times of movement toward sunnner range -- East Indian Creek Study Area.,,'- Year Checkpoint 1~ · Steven's Ranch hdq., 2. Sulfur Springs Resort 3 Magnino Ranch Cowcamp 0 4e Trail 1300 F$S* Sign & Ea Indian Cr,. Flats Approximate Vegetative Elevation Type 7600 Pinon-juniperoakbrush 7850 Ponderosa pineoakbrush Ponderosa pine8150 oakbrush 8600 Mtn,, meadows w/ ponderosa pineoakbrush Mtn., meadows w/ 8600 ponderosa pineoakbrush 9050 5. Middle Tracy Canyon Springs 6~ Rocky dike along E. Indian Cr® Road Clearing along E., Indian Cr. Road (1 mile below Divide) Top of E-W Indian Cr. Divide 7a 8~ ir: Apr., 10 1965 late Mar., Apr~ 17 Mar., 31 Apr., 17 Apr,. s May 2 May 4 1'1ay 2 May 4 1964 May 4 9250 Aspen-oakbrush May 7 May 4 9400 Aspen-limber pineponderosa pine w/ clearings May 21 May 18 As. i:n.dicated by presence ·of birds or field signs. Kill and hunt_1.n.g p:cessure Table 7 summarizes the Merriam's turkey kill and indicated hunting pressure within Game Management Unit 4N35, comprising all of the extensive study area except for the Huerfano River - :Mosca Pass area and the Pass Creek area controls., These controls are known to receive very little hunting pressure, probably due to low populations of wild turkeyse The kill and indicated hunting pressure continue . to be :very light as indicated by the information gathered .. �- l09 - Table 7. -- Merriam's turkey kill and indicated hunting pressure within Game Management Unit #35. Year 1964 1965 Open season dates Game Mgmt. Div. Kill Data,'c Field Cb.eeks Number Number turkeys Number Number turkeys killed Hunters killed Hunters 5 10 19 Oct. 3-11 Subtotals 15 52 44 127 Apr. 10-18 Oct. 2-10 2 20 Subtotals 22 19 55 74 40 109 May 2-12 33 Tab le 8 lists the locations of all known kills during the 1964 and 1965 open seasons. No known kills have been recorded from any of the five control study areas. Elevational checks of known kill sites are not complete but those that have been recorded are presented. Developmental work Developmental work consisted of the providing supplemental feed in the form of baled oat hay and whole oats within selected developmental study areas and regular field checks of both developmental and control study areas to determine populations, distribution, periods of use, and record information on factors such as predation, disease, crippling incidence, and poaching activity. Table 9 lists the amounts and costs of supplemental feed used during the wintering period of 1965-66. Table 10 lists information on the periods of use, times of movement to wintering areas, and times of sr,ring dispersal for the second year of the developmental work. Environmental factors Weather Continuous weather information was collected at two stations during the period early May, 1965 through March, 1966 with the results summarized in Tables 11 and 12. One weather station is located within the Copper King Gulch wintering ground, northwest of the Spanish Peaks, at an elevation of 8,000 feet and the other is located within the Sarcillo Canyon wintering ground, southeast of the Spanish Peaks, at an elevation of 7,900 feet. The weather du.ring the 1965-66 winter period was characterized by far less than normal snowfall resulting in a mild, open winter for the most part. Total snowfall amounts recorded for the period September, 1965 through March, 1966 were La Veta: 30 inches and Copper King Gu.lch: S4 inches. Natural food production Good spring and summer moisture within the extensive study area benefitted grasses, for:bs, mast, and fruits, although there was not the bumper crop of �Table 8 ... ~- Locations of known kills .. Area Year Open · Number Seas-on Turkeys May 2-12 1 Drainage E.. Indian Cr .. Specific Tyye of . Approximate Area Elevat.ion Middle Tracy Canyon . San Isabel Nat. For .. ·o 1 1 ·Middle Cr.,· M:tddlemist Ran.ch c,. Nicoli Ranch D l Sarcillo C:an.. . GuajatG>11a.. Cr. J~i Sakariason Ranch 0 Goem:tner Sawmill 0 Reitzu.s Bros .. Ranch· J.. Sakarias-on Ranch D -s .. 'fruj.ilto Cr~ · Subtotal 1 ~ Oct. 3.. 11 4· N,. Truj.i11o- Cr •. :sarc:lllo Canyon 6 8600 0 () 7800 7800 78:00 10 15 . . TOTAL 1965 Apr.·10-18 Subtotal Oct,. 2-10 1 Key: D .. Developmental Middle Cr,. Mfddlemist Ranch 2 3 E .. 'Indian er .. 1 N... Trujillo er. Sarcillo- Canyon Cucharas R,. 6 TOTAL M:Lddlemist Rauch J ~- Sakariason RMch D 8100. 0 78:00 D D :8200- D . D :_ 0 .0 . 9200 ,7800 · 7800 2 tlel _Aqua Canyon 7 Subtotal Sa;rcillo Canyon: Middle Cr .. · l l Avery Ranch Spring Creek .• San Isabel !mt:. For .. Re;ttzus Bros •. Ranch .J. Sakar:iason• Ranch · F. Zelle Ranch 8200 20 22 C ... Control · 0 - Other . ..,_.,,... �Table 9~ -- Amounts of supple.mental feed used and costs -- 1965-66. Developmental Areas Item Whole Oats (lbs~) Oat Ray (bales) Straw (bales) Other N. Trujillo Creek Middle E,. Indian Creek Creek Cucharas River 875 1425 ·200 1325 300 200 s· 13 2 13 5 2 Bear Creek Mesa Sa.rcillo Canyon 0 7 3 0 0 0 Cost of feed $32.,50 $52.90 $7 .60 $50.10 $13.40 $7,60 Number of turkeys wintered 20 70 0 45 11 0 Summary: Total number turkeys wintered $164 .. 10 146 Average cost per bird $ Total cost of feed (all areas) 1.05 I-' I-' I-' �Table 10, -- Information on use of experimental wintering areas -- 1965-66,* Time of movement to area Periods of Light Utilization Heavy Utilization late Nov, , 65early Jan,, 66 mid Jan.late Mar. ,66 late Mar, ,66 early Nov.,late Nov,, 65 early Dec, ,65mid Mar. ,66 mid Mar, ,66 Time of spring dispersal Type of Area Area Developmental Middle Creek late Nov. , 65 E, Indian Cr, early Oct, ,65 Cucharas River mid Oct, ,65 mid Nov. ,65mid Mar,,66 Bear Cr. Mesa mid Dec, ,65 early Nov.early Dec. ,65 mid Dec,,65late Mar. , 66 late Mar, , 66 N. Trujillo Cr, early Dec, ,65 early Nov.late Dec, ,65; mid Jan,-Mar,,66 early Dec. ,65early Jan, ,66 Unknown Sarcil lo Canyon early Oct,,65 No Utilization early Nov.mid Nov. ,65; early Jan, ,66; mid Feb,,66 mid Oct.early Nov, ,65 Unknown Other * ** ** ** Dates are approximate and were determined by regular checks of areas. ** mid Mar. , 66*** Supplemental feeding not done in area since there was a great deal of waste grain in fields, Flock of 42 turkeys left area late in Nov., 65 and presumably wintered in Deal Aqua Canyon, A few returned in mid Mar,, 66, A flock of 10 toms ranged in area intermittently during winter, *** Based upon time of return of birds in this instance, �Table 11. -- Annual summary of climatological data. -- . East Indian Creek Study Area Station No • .!, Site _Copper King ~ , Elevation lL,000 feet, Year 196~. Year Month Max. Mean Weekly Max. IslamJ;lsu:: ati.u:: s: ~ Ai:c .Qf Mean We,;'ckly Min. Min. 74.0 16 26 40 24.S 34.0 42.2 38~3 Ji§l. lium.,t Mean of Mean.of Week Precip. -~ IncJie Max. &. Min. Max.&Min., Water Wind ·Total Mean Miles Vel. mph. 1965 April no data May June July . 78 81 84 August September 82 October 76 November December 63 77 .2 83.0 80.5 73,.3 69.8 58.0 68 56.0 75 37 23 22 7 ~ 7 26.5 23,8 17 .s 5.0 l}8 .6 46.,6 55.6 62.6 59.8 49.6 48.9 58.0 58.1 50.4 39.5 4.51 1.85 ;2.03 1.62 40.,0 0.54 2,874.0 3,413.8 32 .• 5 0.81 2,504$5 47.5 37.6 30.4 1.16 3.04 3,356.5 2,463.7 l,893.l+ 1,545.1 2,104.9 4.7 3.7 2.4 2.3 3,.0 3.4 4.9 3.1 1-' ~ I 1966 January February March 53 55 67 Average (llmo,.) 71. 1 Year (11 mo.) Instruments 47.0 .. 2 o.o 48.0 --13 --6~8 59~5 --10 4.3 66.0 12.6 19.0 23.5 20.6 31.9 42~5 31.,4 0.71 31 .. 8 32.0 0.86 0.20 42.,7 Maximum, minimum thermometers Hygrothermo- 17 .33 Perc.ip. & hygrothermograph graph guage 2,788.8 2,959.5 2,595.8 4.0 4.6 2,590,.9 3.6 Totalizing, anemometer 3-cup, 3.6 �Table 12,. -· AnnuaLsumma.:cy of . climatological data__ -- Sarcillo. Canyon Stµdy Ar:~ Station No .• 2, _Site seanish Peak_! __ Mana,gement Area., Elevation· 7 2900 ft.;; Year 1965~66.. . . ·- . ·-··· . . .. -...- / . - Air Of Mean Min. 22 26.7 51.6 41.3 30.S 55~~--- 52;;5 62.0 5:3~1· 52;,3 Weekly _ Year -.-M¢rtth -• Max~.-· ge\, HUm,% Mean., · Weekly Min •. Mean -of weekly Mean of W~ekiy MaJi::.&Min. Max.&Min. Wind Preeip., Inches-· Tcitat·. Water_ Mi.lea 1.,50 5.11 2~1f{ 0,942.4 1.4 0,830~3 Ot467 ~O 0;595.S-· 1.,2 0.6 0~9 1,-048.0 0,808.2 0.9 1,274~9 1,409.2 1~7 Me~tlVel. mph. 1965 April no data May·-.· 7_9. 76.5 88 81..,2 86~5 Ju!tle July . _ 86.·· _Aug11st .. _ Sept::ember 87 80. dctober November December TB. 69 61 26 81:.8 7,7.,8 71 .. 2 64.3 66.3 44 39 . 44~5. 41.J ~. 25 zn5 8 24~.218.0 8.. 5 23. -10 . 7 . ·•· 65:.s· 53;:6 s-0•:.a·· 4t_3· 37.4 3.3()-· 2..-rt1 52;9: 50.3 45 .. 9·. 0,.:03 38,.5 0.24 0,.69 1.S 2~0 1966 January 61 Fel>riiary 61 March 72 Average (llmo.) 74.7 55.0 ... 7 54~2 67,;S·· ... 8 2 .. 3 -2.S - 2 · 8.3 71,.2 14.S Year (ll mo" ) Instruments . Maximum, minimum thermometers ·_ ·_ ._ & hygrothermog:raphs _ _.. 21 .• p 28.3 · 25 .. 9 •. 37;8 46 ... 4 48.0 0 •.61 -.45,.8-• - 0:,.62 43.,9 0..-11 47,.7 1,061.1 1,222,;0 1,~42.9 _1 .. 5 .· 1.7 912 .. 0 1.4 1.9. 17 .04 Hygrothermo- Precip. totalizing, 3-cup, graph anemometer guage �- 115 - acorns and ponderosa pine nuts during 1965 compared with 1964. The overall natural food production was thought to be somewhat higher in 1965 than in 1964 based upon a series of extensive food production trends completed. In considering both weather factors and natural food production, it is probable that small flocks of Merriam's turkeys could have wintered in almost any of the known wintering areas. Wintering flocks were, however, absent in many historical wintering areas. Good natural food conditions probably resulted in less use of the established feed stations than would have been the case with a shortage of natural feed and/or a heavier winter. Population limiting factors Predation No instances of predator kills were observed during this segment. One instance of a blue darter hawk harassing a lone wild turkey which had separated from the main flock of 20 on Middle Creek was observed on December 21, 1965. This turkey was in low cover beneath an evergreen tree and ran off without any apparent injury when I approached. The hawk also left the area when I approached. Disease One rancher, Mr. Dick Kreutzer, in Mavricio Canyon reported finding two hen turkey carcasses during the summer of 1965. These had not been eaten by predators and may have been caused by disease. The carcasses were no longer fresh when the report was received so this could not be confirmed. This is an area with possible diseese problems in earlier years. Crippling incidence. One badly crippled tom was reported by rancher John Serra on the second day of the regular fall season in upper Sarcillo Canyon. This was probably crippled to the extent it died from the report received. Other instances of crippled birds were not recorded. The usual number of crippled birds within wintering flocks was not observed during this segment, even though 185 Merriam's turkeys were observed at close enough range to determine sex ratios~ Illegal kills. A report of three birds being illegally killed in upper Sarcillo Canyon during the late fall was received. This may possibly have been a factor in this flock moving to Del Aqua Canyon to winter, if true. Prepared by: Donald M. Hoffman Assoc. Wildl. Researcher Date: _ _ _ _A_.p_r_i_l~,_J_.9_.6_6_ _ _ _ _ __ Approved by: Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief Ferd c. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator ��- 117 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO ------------- Project No. W-37-R-19 Work Plan No. 13 Title .of Job: Period Covered: Personnel: Game Bird Survey Job No. 3 Breeding Season Studies, Sharp-tailed Grouse April 1, 1965 to M3.rch 31, 1966 Glenn E. Rogers ABSTRACT Eight counts were made on each of the three Elk Mountain dancing grounds from April 20 to June 3, 1965. The highest number of males were observed during the first two weeks in M:a.y. The only date when hens were seen on the grounds was May 4. Except for two trips during the latter part of May to Montrose, Ouray, and San Miguel counties, searches for new dancing grounds were confined to eastern Moffat and western Routt counties. Two new grounds were located i.n southeastern Moffat County. �- 118 - Recommendations: Maps showing location of dancing grounds with forms on the reverse side should be prepared and distributed to management for implementation of yearly counts. Objectives: (1) To locate and map as many sharp-tailed grouse dancing grounds as possible. (2) To count all located dancing grounds and determine optimum hours, days, and periods for counting. (3) To transfer collected information, along with counting, recording, and evaluating responsibilities to management. Techniques Used: I. Locate and map grounds A. Interview personnel of the Game, Fish and Parks Department, Forest Service, Bureau of Land Management, Fish and Wildlife Service, Denver Museum of Natural History, ranchers, and sportsmen throughout Colorado regarding sharp-tailed grouse occurrence. II. B. Traverse sharp-tailed grouse range by foot and vehicle with stops to look and listen for dancing activity. C. Record location of each dancing ground by major physical features, direction and distance of travel from nearest town, and the_best point and method for observing and counting ground. D. Prepare outline maps with written travel directions for each ground from aerial photographs$ Census Grounds A. Record date, time, number, and sex of_, birds observed at each dancing ground. B. Make repeat morning and evening trips to selected dancing grounds. Record at weekly intervals the number and sex of birds present for the duration of daily activity. C Evaluate counts by time and date according to size, elevation, and latitude of selected dancing grounds and selected times and dates for trend counts. 0 III. Transfer to Management A. Compile and edit all collected information. B. Prepare forms and record books for systematic recording of information. c. Establish computer code for collected counts and process initial data to provide working samplese D. Instruct Department field and office personnel in standard methods of counting dancing grounds and for evaluating and disseminating census data. E. Transfer sharp-tailed grouse census books and responsibilities to management$ �- 119 - BREEDING SEASON STUDIES, SHARP-TAILED GROUSE Glenn E. Rogers Efforts during this segment were concentrated on making repeat counts on the Elk Mountain dancing grounds in Routt County and in searching for new dancing grounds. Checks were made on some additional dancing grounds to determine trend and to study behavior. A complete record of all counts made during the spring of 1965 are included in Table 1. Consistency of counts: Repeat counts were made on the Elk Mountain Nos. 1, 2, and 3 dancing grounds in 1965. Extremely heavy snows during the winter prevented access to these grounds until April 20. Even on this date, snow from one to three feet deep covered the entire dancing ground. Morning counts were made on all three grounds on April 20 and 27, May 4, 18, and 25, and June 3. Evening counts were made on April 27 and May 18. Good weather prevailed for all counts. Birds were not observed on the Elk Mountain No. 1 dancing ground during 1965. Use of this ground ceased during the 1964 season shortly prior to the first observations of Elk Mountain No. 3. I believe that birds from No. 1 moved to the No~ 3 location, reasons unknown$ Counts of males on the Elk Mountain No. 2 dancing ground.remained relatively consistent, with the final count on June 3 exactly half the high count of April 27. May 4 was the only date hens were observed on the ground. The Elk Mountain No. 3 dancing ground continued to show an increase in use since its discovery last year. The high count on this ground was recorded on May 18, but terrain and vegetative conditions on this ground make accurate counting of males difficult. From the two year's work on the Elk Mountain dancing grounds it would appear that relatively consistent counts of males could be obtained at this elevation from April 15 to May 15. With the shorter duration of dancing activity on smaller grounds and for grounds located in the central and southern part of the state, recommendations for management use should limit counting to the period between April 15 and May S. However, most of these grounds (Glade, Pinon Mesa, and Uncompahgre Plateau areas) will only be accessible one year out of five. Location of new dancing grounds: Most of my efforts in searching for dancing grounds were concentrated in the area southwest of Steamboat Springs, northwest of Hayden (both in Routt County), and southwest of Hamilton in Moffat County. Two trips were made to the south end of the Uncompahgre Plateau covering the area from just west of Montrose to Norwood in Montrose and San Miguel counties. There were two new dancing grounds located in 1965, both in Moffat County. The number of males found on the Morapos Gas Field ground was small, while the Iles Dome Field ground was about average for this area (Table 1). The Iles Dome Location, south of Craig, is now the western-most dancing ground that has been recorded in northwestern Colorado. There are no reasons, vegetative, climatical, or topographic, why sharp-tailed grouse habitat should not continue another 50 miles to the west. We know that sharp-tails inhabit an area northwest of Craig, but no grounds have been located. �- 120 - Table 1 .. -- Sharp-tailed grouse dancing ground counts for 1965$ Date Time Name of Ground Males Total 4-20-65 .4-20 5:10 am 5:40 am River Cemeta:ey Elk Mountain No" 1 Elk Mountain No. 2 Elk Mountain No. 3 0 0 11 0 0 11 11 11 0 0 0 0 0 0 4-20 6:00 am .4.. 20 6:02 am 4-21 5:05 am 5:40 am 5:49 am 6:14 a.m 4-21 4-21 4~21 4-21 4-22 4-22 ·6:54 am 4-27 4-27 5:20 am 7:00 am 5:12 am 5:19 a~ 27 5:33 am 4 .. 27 5:30 pm 6:00 pm 6:04 pm 5:03 am 5:20 am 27 4-27 4~28 4-28 4-29 5-4 5-4 5~4 5-18 5-18 5-18 5-18 5.,.13 5-18 5-18 5-19 5-19 5:13 am 5:18 am 5:27 am 5:56 am 4:28 am 4:54 am 5:02 am 5:23 am 5:30 am 5:30 pm S:40 pm 5:34 am 5:45 am 5:40 pm 5-20 5-21 4:28 am 5-25 5-25 5:07 am 6:10 am 6-1 7:00 pm 4: L,,5 am 6:35 am 6:46 am 5:00 .gm 5:02 am 6:12 am 6-2 6-2 6-2 6-3 6~3 6-.3 Hayden Divide Smith Rock Creek Elkhead No. 1 Elkhead No,. 2 Schnieders Morapos · Gas Field Elk Mountain No. 2 Elk Mountain No. 3 Elk Mountain No. 1 Elk Mountain No. 1 Elk Mountain No., 2 Elk Mountain No. 3 Rock Creek Wiseman Iles Dome Elk Mountain No" 3 Elk Mountain No. l Elk Mountain No~ 2 Elk Mountain No. 1 Elk Mountain No. 2 Elk Mountain No. 3 Elk River Cemetary Dry Gulch Elk Mountain No. 2 Elk Mount.a in No., l Yellowjacket Yellowjacket No,, 2 Horsefly Horsefly Elk Mountain No~ 2 Salt Creek Yellowjacket No. 2 2 2 0 0 0 0 4 4 10 10 6 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 2 2 t:., -10 ,., 9 10 12 0 11 0 13 0 6 0 0 0 6 13 0 0 l 0 0 13 1 7 2 8 0 0 0 0 9 4 9 4 0 0 .·Mud Springs 13 14 Rock Creek 3 5 3 5 Gilland Blk Mountain No o 2 Elk Mountain No. 3 Hayden Divide 2 6 6 7 7 3 3 �- 121 - Again this year, reports were received of sharp-tails on the ridge between Billy and Cow creeks and in the Dallas Divide area, both in Ouray County. No dancing grounds were found in single trips through these areas. Counting conditions: Snow production was above normal <1u1rin2 the winter of 196465, However, in contrast to 1964, the spring months were cool and clear with only slightly above-normal precipitation, The Elk Mountain dancing grounds were covered with snow ranging between one to three feet in depth when first checked on April 20, On this date, some south slopes and ridge tops were bare, At Elk Mountain No. 2, bare ground was available for use but not used within 100 yards of the dancing ground. Males were more active this spring than in 1964, Silent periods were shorter in duration, but there was little difference in numbers of hens observed on the grounds. Prepared by: Glenn E. Rogers Asst, Wildl, Researcher Date: April, 1966 Approved by: Donald M, Hoffman Wildlife Researcher Ferd C, Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator ��- 123 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT Stctte of COLORADO ------------- Project No. W-37-R-19 Work Plan No. 13 Game Bird Survey Job No. 6 Title of Job: Summarization of Sharp-tailed Grouse Studies Period Covered: April 1, 1965 to March 31, 1966 Personnel: Glenn E. Rogers ABSTRACT All available sharp-tailed grouse information from the study has been assembled in rough draft form. It is hoped that final editing and typing can be completed within six months. Recommendations: An agreement is needed between federal and state agencies as to the type of publication desired. Objectives: Compile, analyze, summarize, and publish all sharp-tailed grouse information in technical bulletin form. Techniques Used: 1. Preparation of publication A. Review and abstract sharp-tailed grouse references as required. B. Draft manuscript under appropriate outline. C. Attend workshops, conferences, and grouse policy meetings to keep current on new methods and information regarding the species. D, Edit proofs and cooperate with editor on manuscript publication. Prepared by: Glenn E. Rogers Wildlife Researcher Date: April 1966 Approved by: Donald M. Hoffman Wildlife Researcher Ferd c. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator ��April, 1966 - 125 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of -----"'===::.:c._ COLORADO ____ Project No. W-37-R-19 Work Plan No. 15 Game Bird Survey Job No. Title of Job: Study of Mountain Quail Adaptability Period Covered: April 1, 1965 to March 31, 1966 Personnel: 2 Glenn E. Rogers ABSTRACT A cooperative agreement covering an exchange of mountain quail (Oreortyx spp.) for wild turkey (Meleagris gallopavo merriami) was arranged in 1965 between the game departments of California and Colorado. In August and September, personnel of the California department trapped 161 mountain quail in the Coso-Argus mountains of Inyo County. These birds were shipped in cardboard containers to Grand Junction, Colorado by commercial air freight. Two birds died during the shipment and 16 were transhipped to the Fort Collins bird farm. The 143 remaining birds were planted in Mesa County at the junction of Indian and Cow Creeks within the Uncompahgre National Forest. Only one indefinite report of the mountain quail has been received since their release. �- 126 - Recommendations: This study should be continued until success or failure of the mountain quail introduction can be determined. Objectives: (1) To release mountain quail in selected areas. (2) To determine success of introduction. Techniques Used: I. Release of Quail: Obtained wild mountain quail from California in accordance with trade agreement involving ~rriam's turkeys from Colorado; released birds in areas determined to,be most suitable under Work Plan 15, Job 1. II. Success: Informed people in the vicinity of the releases of descriptions and habits of mountain quail through educational media available; requested that sightings be reported to Game, Fish and Parks Department personnel; contacted ranchers, sportsmen, and personnel of Federal and State agencies regarding numbers and locations of birds observed; secured personal observations of birds where possible; and recorded reports and observations in tables and on maps in order to evaluate the degree of success in establishing the species. �- 127 - Study of Mountain Quail Adaptability Glenn E, Rogers On August 19, 1965, the first shipment of 50 wild mountain quail was received from California. These birds were trapped by California Game and Fish personnel in the Coso-Argus mountains of southwestern Inyo County. On August 25, an additional shipment consisting of 111 mountain quail arrived in Grand Junction, Colorado. In 1964, the Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department was contacted by Mr, R, D. Teague, California Wildlife Extension ~ent, in regard to the possibility of acquiring wild turkeys for transplanting in California. A prelimj_nary study was then initiated by Colorado to determine the climate, food, and cover requirements for mountain quail, From this study (Work Plan Job 1), it was decided that mountain quail inhabiting the higher elevations of the mountains of central and northern California would have a reasonable chance of adapting to several areas in Colorado. Further correspondence with Mr. Teague and with H, T. Harper, Game Management Supervisor for the California Department, resulted in a cooperative agreement between tbe two states. Discussion: Mountain quail were trapped as they came to water and were held in pens until shipment numbers were attained, The birds were transported by vehicle to Los Angeles and placed on United Airlines Flight 872. This flight departs from Los Angeles at 8:10 am and arrives in Grand Junction at 12:34 pm. The mountain quail were shipped in cardboard cartons approximately. three feet square by six inches in height (figure 1), The number of birds placed in each crate varied from 12 to 19. All birds, except two, arrived in good condition. Two birds in the first shipment (bands 58528 and 58529) were dead on arrival (Table 1). �- 128 - Table 1, ~- Band information for Mountain Quail trapped in Inyo County, California, and released in Mesa County, Colorado, 1965, Banlil Numbers 58"'101-58427 58423-58429 58430-58450 58451-58474 58475 58476-58494 58495 58496-58502 58503 58504-58512 58513 58514-58525 58526 58527-58529 58530 58531-58536 58537 58538-58546 58547 58548-58552 58553 58554-58558 58559 58560-58561 TOTALS 1.1 Date 8-19-65 Release l/ Site Sec 27,R17W,T51N II II II II " " II II 8-25-65 II " " II II " II . II II II II II II " II II II II II II " " " " II II II " II "II II II II " II II Condition Good Dead Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Young Adult Total 28 2 24 0 20 24 0 1 l 19 0 19 1 7 0 1 7 0 0 1 l 9 0 0 9 1 12 0 1 12 0 1 1 3 0 0 3 t 1 6 0 6 0 ]! o, l 9 0 1 1 5 0 5 0 5 0 2 1 1 0 5 9 1 1 0 2 101 10 A total of 16 birds, band numbers unknown, were retained at the state bird farm, Air freight costs for the ten crates of.livs quail in two shipments totaled $18.95, This includes the slight additional cost of transhipping one crate from Grand Junction to Denver. Both shipments of mountain quail were picked up at the airport by G. W. Jones, Game Biologist, The crates were loaded onto a pickup for the three to four hour trip to the release site on the Uncompahgre Plateau, The first group of birds was released at 4:30 pm with the second group being released an hour earlier,I! Oni'.l!!!'.ai:tltJwg the release site, the crates were placed on the ground near the edge off: trl!e· road; the tops were removed simultaneously; and the quail walked or flew fr,;::m, the. crates (Figs. 2, 3, and 4), Dark clouds and strong winds prevailed at the. :t1elease area and hard showers fell intermittently throughout the afternoon. The m-jp:dty of the quail at the first release (8-19-65) walked or flew to the valley,north of the road, Several birds began feeding within a few feet of the crat:e&,, Many started calling and despite the inclement weather at the time, a large flock was observed feeding near a rocky point at the junction of eow and Indian creeks, �- 129 - Fig. l. Each container was divided into h compartments. have already left the box. Fig. 2. George Jones, biologist, setting out mountain quail container prior to release. The bird moved to the brush hillside in the background. Some quail �- 130 - -- -Photo by Jesse Williams Fig. 3. Errol Ryland and George Jones examining one of the mountain quail before release. �- 131 - Fig. 4. A close-up view of a mountain quail in the August release. Notice the straight top imot feathers, which distinguish it readily from the Gambel•s quail. �- 132 - Quail in the second release (8-25-65) tended to fly in all directions; and even through G. W. Jones thought he could hear birds in the original release calling, he could not determine any specific concentration site. Weather at the time of the second release was clear and calm, The legal description for the release site is Section 27, Range 17 West, Township 51 North of the Uncompahgre National Forest in Mesa County, Colorado. The area is one of steep slopes, ranging from 9,000 feet at its highest elevation to just below 5,000 feet within a distance of five miles, The quail were released within one mile of the highest point at an elevation of 6,800 feet, The higher slopes are covered with a good stand of grass and forbs with a dense shrub cover of manzanita (Arctostaphylos patula) and oak (Quercus gambelli). The range type is classified primarily as ponderosa pine (Pinus ponderosa), but there are large areas of aspen (Populus tremuloides) and small stands of Douglas fir (Pseudotsuga taxifolia). From the release area downstream, the vegetation is primarily shrubs and pinon (Pinus adulis) and juniper (Juniperus). Besides manzanita and oak, mountain mahogany (Cercocat·pus montanus), serviceberry (Amelanchier spp.), bitterbrush (Purshia tridentata), sagebrush~:.=~~~ spp,), snowberry (Symphoricarpos spp.), and rabbitbrush (Chrysothamus spp. solid or mixed communities, Cow Creek flows year-round but Indian Creek is frequently dry above the junction of the two streams, Springs and stock ponds, interspersed throughout the area, furnish additional sources of water, Soils are mainly of sedimentary (shales and sandstones) origin with some igneous (granite) exposure in the valley bottom, After release of the birds, uranium mine operators, road maintenance crews, the mine inspector, ranchers, Game, Fish and Parks employees, and forest service personnel were contacted and informed of the introduction, On August 29, Jesse Williams, Senior Information Representative, presented a 15 minute television show on the mountain quail and their release. The local newspapers and radio stations also carried spot announcements on the days following each release, In all contacts and news releases, people were requested to inform department personnel of any quail sightings in the Uncompahgre area, Results: On October 8, T, Gary Myers, Assistant Wildlife Researcher, and I with Myers I two hunting dogs walked out the release area, A mountain quail wing was found at the junction of the two creeks •. Also, some droppings that were believed to be those of quail were found about one mile north of the release site on the dry, shrub-covered, east-facing slope of the Cow Creek drainage, No quail nor quail tracks were seen, Between November 18 and 22, I talked to Mr, High, the state mine inspector; Mr, Shumacher, county road maintenance employee; the Foster brothers, uranium mine operators; Don Schmidt, district forest ranger; and numerous turkey hunters, None of these people had seen or heard the mountain quail but all were cognizant of the release and had been watching for them, On December 10, Wildlife Conservation Officer S, J, Gerrans talked to a Mr. William Walker of Friant, California, at a roadblock, Mr, Walker stated that he �- 133 had seen 14 quail while hunting on the Uncompahgre Plateau. However, 'Mr. Walker could not state the exact area of his observation nor was he positive that the birds seen were mountain quail. Prepared by: Glenn E. Rogers Asst. Wildl. Researcher Date: April, 1966 Approved by: Donald M. Hoffman Wildlife Researcher Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator ��- l35 JOB COMPLETION REPORT BESEA.RCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO ---------'------- Project No, W-37-R-l9 Work Plan No. 16 G8Jlle Bird Survey Job No, 4 Title of Job: Pueblo Reservoir, Frying Pan-Arkansas Project Period Covered: April 1, 1965 to Ml.rch 31, 1966 Personnel: Warren D. Snyder Findings: Studies of Bureau of ReclaJllation project plans have been conducted along with on-site game and range surveys at the proposed Pueblo-Reservoir site. Information on existing scaled quail and pheasant populations on the proposed site have been obtained. A comprehensive report covering the possible effects of the reservoir on scaled quail, pheasants, and waterfowl; State control of the project 1and; and means of mitigating losses of wildlife ,ri.ll be forthcoming in the following year. Prepared by: Warren D. Snyder Wildlife Researcher. Date: April 1966 Approved by: Harold M, Swope Wildlife Researcher Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �- 136 - Objectives: (1) To investigate the possible effects of the project on: a. Loss of scaled quail and/or pheasant range. b. Alteration in proportions of available range types. c. Restriction of game bird movement because of reservoir, canals, roads, fences, human activities, etc. d. Loss of birds through drowning, increased traffic hazzards, etc. e. Hunter access and hunting. f. Possible conflicts of interest between hunter and recreationists. (2) To investigate the possibility of State control of lands within the project area as concerns the management and welfare of scaled quail and pheasants. (3) To investigate whether means of mitigating losses to and/or enhancing upland game bird values exist and suggest what.these might be. Procedures: I. Investigate Effects of Project A. Bureau: of Reclamation project plans will be studied to learn the nature and extent of the physical features of the project. Existing information which the Colorado Department of Game, Fish and Parks has concerning scaled quail and pheasant numbers, ranges, and movements will be asse,nibled, evaluated and used together with Bureau of Reclamation plans to serve as the basis of judgements as to the effects of the project on these species and hunters. B, On-the-site investigations will include range and game surveys as required. C, Reporting responsibility for this job rests with Project W-37-R, II, Possibility of State Control A, See I-A and I-B above. III, Enhancement and Mitigation A. See I-A and I-B above. �A:f,rii, 1966 - 137 ~ JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO ------------- Project No. W-37-R-19 ---'----"'-'---c.;__-"------ Work Plan No. 16 Gaine Bird Survey Job No. Title of Job: Costilla Project, Eastdale Reservoir Period Covered: April 1, 1965 to Ma.rch 31, 1966 Personnel: 5 Donald M. Hoffman ABSTRACT Reporting responsibility for this job has been assigned to w-88-R. A preliminary report dealing primarily with the possible effects of this project on various upland game bird species and cottontail rabbits has been submitted to Project W-88-R personnel for use in the final report. Proposed plans by the Bureau of Reclamation to enlarge Eastdale Reservoir No. 1 from 240 acres to 359 acres would result in the loss of approximately 119 acres of fair to good cottontail rabbit range and the same amount of potential sage grouse range. The loss of both pheasant and quail ranges would be negligible since these species have seldom if ever utilized the area to be inundated as range. Pheasant populations should be aided in the Eastdale Community area if more irrigation water is made available through increasing the storage capacity of the reservoir. �- 138 Objectives; l. To investigate the possible effects of the project on: a, Loss of pheasant or quail ranges. b. Alteration in proportion of available range types. c. Restriction of game bird movement because of reservoir, canals, roads, fences, human activities, etc. d. Loss of birds through drowning, increased traffic hazzards, etc, e, Hunter access and hunting. f, Possible conflicts of interest between hunters and recreationists. 2, To investigate the possibility for State control of lands within the project area as concerns the management and welfare of pheasants and quail. 3, To investigate whether means·of mitigating losses to and/or enhancing upland game bird values exist and suggest what these might be, Procedures: 1, Study project plans and available information on numbers, ranges and movements of pheasants and quail. 2. Conduct range and game surveys as required, Prepared by: Approved by:k Wayne W, Sandfort Donald M. Hoffman Game Research Chief Assoc, Wildl. Researcher Date: April, 1966 Ferd C, Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �April, 1966 - 139 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO ----------------- Project No. W-37-R-19 Work Plan No. 16 Game Bird Survey Job No. Title of Job Battlement Project Period Covered: April 1, 1965 to March 31, 1966 Personnel: 6 Glenn Rogers ABSTRACT Reporting responsibility for this job has been assigned to W-38-R. A preliminary report dealing primarily with the possible effects of this project on sage grouse and wild turkeys has been submitted to Project W-38-R personnel for use in the final report. �- 140 - Objectives: 1. To investigate the possible e,ffects of the project on: a. Loss of sage grouse and wild turkey ranges b. Alteration in proportion of available range types c. Restriction of game bird movement because of reservoir, canals, roads, fences, human activities, etc. d. Loss of birds through drowning, increased traffic hazzards, etc. 3. Hunter access and hunting. f. Possible conflicts of interest between hunters and recreationists. 2. To investigate the possibility for Stste control of lands within the project area as concerns the management and welfare of sage grouse and wild turkeys. 3. To investigate whether means of mitigating losses to and/or enhancing upland game bird values exist and suggest what these might be. Procedures: 1. Bureau of Reclamation plans were studied to learn the nature and extent of the physical features of the project. Range surveys by federal agencies including the U.S. Forest Service, Bureau of Land Management, Soil Conservation Service, and Bureau of Reclamation were used to determine vegetative cover, totography, soil conditions, access roads, and land ownership within the project area. Records of the Game, Fish and Parks Department were reviewed to determine game numbers and game harvests. Local residents including technical-personnel of federal and state agencies were int,;,rviewed to collect all possible information on present game populations, movements, and harvests. 2. On-the-site investigations included range and game surveys as required. Prepared by: Glenn E. Rogers Wildlife Researcher Date: April 1966 Approved by: Donald M. Hoffman Wildlife Researcher Ferd c. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �April, 1966 - 141 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO ------------'-'---------- Project No. W-37-R-19* Work Plan No. 16 Grune Bird Survey Job No. Title of Job: Grand Mesa Project Period Covered: June 28, 1965 through June 28, 1966. Personnel: Max Torres, Dave Lemons, Art DeGuelle, and Norman Roy helped to determine the surface area, average depth, and possible construction costs for three dams which would create lake sites suitable for waterfowl habitat development. Darrel Bingham collected and tested water samples from the three sites. Richard Hopper wrote the sections of this report relating to waterfowl, mourning dove, and band-tailed pigeons and prepared a development plan for waterfowl. Merle Hodges provided information regarding the distribution of wildlife in the project area. To these people, and to other Wildlife Conservation Officers and Biologists who offered helpful advice, I express my sincere appreciation. ABSTRACT The proposed Grand Mesa Project, located in Delta County between the south rim of Grand Mesa and the Gunnison River, is designed to provide irrigation for 14,540 acres of previously uncultivated land and supplemental water for 17,160 acres of land already in cultivation. Tbe project includes two reservoirs, capable of storing 48,500 acre feet of water, and 93.7 miles of canal. The project will have little effect on the 400 elk that winter in the project area, provided that canals do not restrict the movement of these animals. About 11,400 acres of deer winter range will be cleared to raise cultivated crops which will necessitate a 25% reduction in the deer herd. Tbe segment of the herd which will be lost is valued at $162,255. A portion of the cotton;tail rabbit resource worth $1,016, will also be destroyed. Annual gains valued at $3,500 for migratory birds, $2,700 for pheasants, and $250 for turkeys are overshadowed by deer and rabbit resource losses. In the overall analysis, the Grand Mesa Project will result in a net annual loss to the wildlife resoill"ce in the area amounting to $156,821. * Tbis report also fulfills Federal Aid obligations for W-88-R-ll. Upland game and migratory bird information was combined to formulate this report. �- 142 Recommendations: Annual wildlife losses valued at $156,821 will occur as a result of the Grand Mesa Project. Assruning that the project has a life of 50 years, total losses will amount to $7,841,050. It is the responsibility of the Grand Mesa Project to compensate for this loss by providing funds in the above amount with which to improve and develop wildlife habitat in the area. Wildlife improvements and development, in addition to those paid for by the $7,841,050 supplied by the project, will be enhancement features eligible for cost-sharing under Public law 89-72. Therefore, in order to realize the full potential of wiJ.dlife in the Grand Mesa Project area, we recommend that: 1. The conservation and development of wildlife be included among the purposes for which the project is authorized. 2. The project provide the sum of $7,841,050 for the improvement and development of wildlife habitat in the area. 3. The Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department be given the responsibility for managing wildlife and recreational activities on all project lands, and for improving and developing wildlife habitat thereon. 4. The Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department participate in the cost-sharing program available under Public law 89-72 for financing wildlife enhancement in the project area, 5. Adequate public access roads be provided to Gorsuch and Electric Mountain Reservoirs. 6. Necessary measures be taken to prevent important deer and elk losses due to canals, if such losses occur. 7. Moneys available for the improvement and development of wildlife habitat might be used to acquire additional water for the Cedaredge Batchery, to develop waterfowl habitat, to improve fish habitat on Grand Mesa, to purchase water to increase the size of the minimum pools in Gorsuch and Electric Mountain Reservoirs, and to fence orchards (if necessary) to prevent deer damage. �- 143 Objectives: (1) To investigate the possible effects of the project on: a. Loss of blue grouse, wild turkey, pheasant, and Gambel's quail range. b. Alteration in proportions of available range types. c. Restriction of game bird movement because of reservoirs, canals, roads, fences, human activities, etc. d. Loss of birds through drowning, increased traffic hazzards, etc. e. Hunter access and hunting. f. Possible conflicts of interest between hunters and recreationists. (2) To investigate the possibility for State control of lands within the project area as concerns the management and welfare of blue grouse, wild turkey, pheasant, and Gambel's quail. (3) To determine whether means of mitigating losses to and/or enhancing upland game bird values exist and, suggest what these might be. Through an oversight, no one was assigned the job of determining the effect of the Grand Mesa Project on the deer, elk, chukar partridge, and cottontail resources. As a result, the present study was expanded to provide this information. Also included is the material provided by Dick Hopper evaluating the effects of the proposed Grand Mesa project on the migratory bird resource. and a waterfowl development plan which he prepared. Procedure: Bureau of Reclamation project plans were studied to learn the nature and extent of the physical features of the project. Existing information concerning wildlife in the area was examined and evaluated, together with project plans, to judge the effect of the project on various game animals. Local landowners were interviewed and field checks conducted to determine the abundance and kind of game present in the project area. Various aspects of the project were discussed at a meeting attended by all Game, Fish and Parks field personnel involved. The opinions of these people served as a basis for some of the conclusions reached in this report. ��- 145 - Grand Mesa Project Gary T, ]'eyers Richard M, Hopper The objective of this study is to determine whether the proposed Grand Mesa Project will create or destroy game habitat. This project is located in westcentral Colorado in the Gunnison River Basin, Project lands lie in Delta County between the south rim of Grand Mesa and the Gunnison River (Figure 1). A portion of the water supply for the project originates in Gunnison·County. Cedaredge, having a population of 549 people in 1960, lies within the project boundaries. The project is designed to supply water to irrigate 14,540 acres, most of which is virgin land. In addition, supplemental water will be provided to 17,160 acres of land now irrigated. Two reservoirs will store and regulate water for the project. Electric Mountain Reservoir on West Muddy Creek is to provide primary water storage, Planned total capacity of the reservoir is 26,000 acre feet. Surface area, at total capacity, will be 440 acres. At inactive capacity of 1,000 acre feet, water will cover 37 acres. The maximum height of the dam wlll be 200 feet above the streambed which lies at 8,330 feet elevation. l'lictximum drawdown will be 140 feet •. Hubbard, Willow, and Cow Creek Feeder Canals will convey water from neighboring streams to supplement the natural water supply to Electric Mountain Reservoir. Releases from the reservoir will be augumented by excess flows from Hubbard, Terror, Roatcap, Jay, and Leroux Creeks. This water will be conveyed by the (}rand Mesa Canal to project lands below the canal, to Leroux, Currant, and Surface Creeks for use in existing ditches from those creeks, and to a tributary of Currant Creek for storage in Gorsuch Reservoir. �CmterJl(/lf!Cj' Ex/slin!J R,uert1t1ir:t fblenfit1I /rec$rvo,r.f E,d.f/1119 Cunals fbte11t1«I Co11a/J' Culliv«letl fQMt( Af"ler M"Jeot I Figure i. -- Location of land which wi 11 be affected by the proposed Grand l,\esa Project. �- 147 Gorsuch Reservoir will store 22,500 acre feet of water, have a total surface area of 560 acres when filled, and contain 1,500 acre feet of water at maximum drawdown at which time the surface a.rea will be 80 acres, The dam will be 147 feet high, Maximum drawdown will be 70 feet, Elevation of the streambed at the dam site is about 6,110 feet, Surplus flows from Dirty George, Ward, Cottonwood, Kiser, Youngs, and Surface Creeks will be diverted into Gorsuch Reservoir by the Tongue Creek Feeder Canal, Gorsuch Canal will carry water from Gorsuch Reservoir to project lands in the vicinity of Tongue and Currant Creeks and to existing ditches serving Redlands Mesa, There are 93.7 miles of canal associated with the Grand Mesa Project, The longest of these canals, t.he 56 mile Grand Mesa Canal, will consist of 29 miles of open earth canal, 3.3 miles of bench flume or conduit, and 0,5 miles of siphon, This canal will carry 200 second feet of water from its head to Leroux Creek, 400 second feet from Leroux Creek to Dry Creek, and 90 second feet of water from dry creek to its end. The upper half of the canal will wind through aspen, grass, and oakbrush types. The lower half of the canal will cut across sagebrush and pinyon-juniper types. The 8,6 mile Gorsuch Canal will be comprised of 7 miles of open earth canal, 1.3 miles of concrete bench flume and lined canal, and 0.3 miles of siphon. The canal will carry 100 second-feet of water through sagebrush and pinyonjuniper from 2 miles west of Cedaredge to Gorsuch Reservoir. Cow Creek Feeder Canal will be capable of carrying 200 second-feet of water 1,6 miles from Cow Creek to Electric Mountain Reservoir, This canal will consist of 1.5 miles of lined earth canal and 0,1 miles of conduit. Tongue Creek Feeder Canal will be 18 miles long and carry about 60 secondfeet of water. At least 8 miles of this canal will require lining, About 1,5 miles of the canal will include flumes, bridges, crossing culverts, and overshots. The remaining portion of the canal will porbabiy be unlined. Hubbard Creek Feeder Canal, 2,8 miles in length, will have an initial capacity of 30 second-feet and a terminal capacity of 100 second-feet. This canal will carry water from Hubbard Creek to a small tributary of Cow Creek, About 1,5 miles of the canal will be earth lined. Willow Creek Feeder Canal will carry water 6,7 miles from Willow Creek to West Muddy Creek through 3.4 miles of earth lined canal, Additional details regarding the Grand Mesa Project can be found in the Grand Mesa Project Reconnaissance Report (1962), where most of the preceeding information was obtained, WILDLIFE AFFECTED BY THE PROJECT A large deer population ranges on lands which will be affected by the Grand Mesa Project. Elk occupy the area near Electric Mountain Reservoir site. Gambel's quail are plentiful below 6,500 feet elevation; while cottontails occur in fluctuating numbers throughout the area, Pheasants, in moderate to low numbers, are found on or near cultivated land within the project area. Chukar partridge occur primarily below project lands, Blue grouse and wild �- l48 - turkey occupy habitat which is, for the most part, above the project. Mourning doves are abundant during the summer and early fall while band tailed pigeons, although presently scarce during the summer and fall, were once numerous. Attractb,c waterfowl habitat is rather limited within the boundaries of the propose~ project. The possible effects of the Grand Mesa Project on each game species is treated separately, Big Game Elk -- According to Ray Boyd, about 50 elk were counted at the head of Terror Creek during the winter of 1963-64. At the same time, 296 elk wintered on West Muddy Creek. Elk numbers in this area have been increasing since 1963, This year at least 400 elk probably wintered on Terror Creek, Hubbard Creek, and West Muddy Creek. These animals 1;-eldom venture below the junction of the Grand Mesa Canal with Hubbard and Terror Creeks, But elk do range back and forth across the area which will be bisected by the upper five miles of the Grand Mesa Canal where it parallels Muddy Creek. Additional elk may also cross this area to and from Hubbard Creek and Ragged Mountain. Hubbard Creek and Cow Creek Feeder Canals will also cut through elk winter range. Movement of these 400 elk will not be adversely affected by the presence of the three canals if they are empty between November 10 and April 5 when elk usually occupy this winter range (provided that they can be easily crossed). Electric Mountain Reservoir, although located near the middle of the winter range on West Muddy Creek, will inundate an area that is not heavily used by elk. Thus a negligible amount of elk winter range will be lost. Mule Deer -- Large numbers of mule deer inhabit the project area. A majority of the land affected by the Grand Mesa Project lies within the boundaries of Big Game Management Unit 52 (Figure 2). Approximately 93,265 acres of deer winter range occurs in Unit 52 between 6,000 and 7,500 feet elevation where most deer in this area are said to spend the winter (Figure 3). An unpublished study by Glenn Rogers showed that two acres of winter range in experimental pastures at Little Hills, property owned by the Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department, could support one deer for a month without overuse. If this holds true in Unit 52, eight acres of winter range can probably provide enough food to get one deer through the average winter without overusing the range. In other words, winter range in Unit 52 might support a deer population of 11,658 animals, provided that deer are properly distributed and that the range is available for use ( not covered by snow). Productivity -- There is no simple way to determine the number of deer occupying the project area. Apparently the most reliable estimates must be found by use of life equation values. These values appear in The Deer of North America (1956) and are based on work done in Colorado by Hunter and Tolman on the Piceance-White River Deer Herd and on work done by Robinette on the Fishlake Deer Herd. The Piceance-White River Deer Herd contained 13.1% bucks, 41.6% does, and 45.3% fawns on January 1, 1950. Three per cent of the bucks, 3% of the does, and 19% of the fawns died during the winter. The following spring, an average of 1.38 fawns were produced by each doe two years old or older. Eleven per cent of the new~born fawns died before the hunting season. During the fall, hunters harvested 17% of the base herd (deer population on January 1) and �D Le9end Uni/ 52 I IAbfional forest Boundary· I ·!Coan& Line Deer Miller Range Betweer; 6,000' and 1,5001 · ' llotcAiiss I Lozeal' nd L,cation of deer Unit winter Figure 3,. -·- Game ,\\anagement 52, range b e t ween 6 ,OOO a 7,500 feet elevati ,n in Big �le9end Unit 52 l!latlonal mn'Jl 8ottndo,y COt1nty Line !JELTA 11/olional foreJ'I CO{J/VTY /lotclikiss Figure 2., L,.Jcat ion v f B ·,o- Game Management Unit 52. �- 151 - crippled 8% of the legal kilL Another 0.1% of the base herd was taken by illegal means .. The Piceance-White River Base Herd increased 21% under these conditions. The Fishlake Deer Herd was more heavily harvested and less productive than the deer herd in Colorado .. According to average figures based on a four year period, 1940-1943 inclusive, the Fishlake Base Herd consisted of 14.5% bucks, 45.3% does, and 40®2% fawns® Winter losses, amount to 5% of the bucks, 6% of the does, and 19% of the fawns~ In the springi 0.006 fawns per yearling doe and 1. 38 fawns pet· two year old doe and older. were added to the herd. During the summer, 23% of these fawns and 2% of the base herd died,, The following fall, hunters killed 33% of the base herd, crippled 17% of the legal kill, and took 1% of the base herd illegally~ The Fishlake Base Herd was reduced by an average of 6%. Obviously winter mortality, crippling loss, illegal kill, fawn survival, sex and age ratios, and other factors vary frorrt herd to herd depending upon the type of hunting season, range condition, weather 1 and numerous other factors.. Yet most of the equation values fo:r the North Fork Deer Herd ( the deer that occupy Unit 52) are unknown. Values computed for other herds can give a more reliable estimate of deer productivity in Unit 52 than can values pulled out of thin air. Hence, the lower of the two life equation values listed for either the Piceance-White River Deer Herd or the Fishlake Deer Herd were used to arrive at what probably amounts to a conservative estimate of deer productivity in the North Fork Deer Herd. The base herd in Unit 52 was assumed to contain 7,888 animals on January 1, 1965. The following estimates were obtained: a. b. Buck pop., Jan. 1, 1965 = 7~888 x .182 = • • • • • • • • • • 1,436 Doe pop., Jan~ 1, 1965 = 7,888 x .416 = ••• * • • 3,281 Fawn pop., Jan~ 1, 1965:.: 7,888 x .. 402'"' ,, .... ,. • ~ " • ~ " 3,171 Buck pop. after winter= 1,436 - (1,436 x .05) = ~ ® 1,364 Doe pop. after winter = 3,281 - (3,281 x .06) = • "' ., 3,084 Fawn pop. after winter= 3,171 - (3,17lx .19) = •••••• 2,569 Total deer pop. after winter= (d+e+f) = • • • • • • ~ • • e 7,017 Fawns born = 3,084 x L38 = . • • • • • , •• ., • ~ ... ., • 4,255 }'awn pop., Oct. l, 1965 = 4;255 - (4,255 :x .23) = • ., • ,. • 3,276 Buck pop OctQ 1, 1965 ~ 1,364 + 256~ ,888 x .02 X .25)=2,608 $ Q e. 0 • @ • ® ., • G ~ 2 Doe pops, Oct. 1, 1965 = 3~08l~ + 2569 - (7,888 x .02 X .,75) =4,251 2 Total deer pop~, Oct. l, 1965 = (i + j + = * " • • • • *10,135 Actual legal kill based on hunter report card returns, 1965; Bucks Killed= • . • . • • • a • • • • • • • " • • • • • • • l, 753 ." . Does Killed Fawns Killed = n. m " 1,498 " " Q 456 3,707 Per Cent of pope legally harvested (disregarding wounding losses): Per cent of buck pop. killed== 1,753 == ••• 2,608 Per cent of doe pop. killed= 1,49~; ~ . 4,251 Per cent of fawn pop. killed =~22. = s • e ~·"a .. ~,. 67.2% 3,276 Additional lorises: Crippling loss= 3,707 x .17 = II Kill= 7,888 x .01 =. . . 630 78 �- 152 - p. q. r, Deer pop., Unit 52, Jan. 1, 1966 = 10,135 - (3,707+630+79+)= 5,719 Per cent base herd change= 5 719 - 7 888 =. • • • • • • • -27% 7,888 Number of live deer left in pop. per buck killed= 5 1 719 = 3.26 1,756 According to hunter report card returns (hunter, 1965), 112 antlerless deer were killed for every 100 antlered deer harvested in Unit 52 in 1965, Life equation estimates indicate that 67% (excluding wounding loss, and 79% including wounding loss) of the bucks in the North Fork Herd were killed in 1965. The reliability of this estimate can be measured by comparing it with data obtained in 1942 by Robinette for the Fishlake Deer Herd when 127 antlerless deer were killed for every 100 antlered animals taken. When this occurred, 58% of the buck population was harvested (wounding loss included). It seems likely that a greater percentage of the buck population was removed from the North Fork Herd since the antlerless to antlered ratio of the kill was higher in the Fishlake Herd. Apparently bucks became less available in the Fishlake Herd than in the North Fork Herd (provided that the seasons were similar). In all likelihood, less than 58% of the bucks in Unit 52 were killed in 1965'(including wounding loss). If this is the case, there must have been at least 3,000 bucks in the North Fork deer population before the 1965 hunting season (3,022 x .58 = 1,753). The estimate of 3,26 live deer left per legal buck killed in the North Fork population following the 1965 deer season can also be checked by comparison with a similar figure obtained for the Fishlake Deer Herd, Robinette found 4.5 live deer left per legal buck taken from the Fishlake Herd following the 1942 deer season, If a larger percentage of bucks were killed in the Fishlake Herd, as the antlered to antlerless ratio indicated, the number of live deer left per legal buck taken would be less in the North Fork Herd. Evidently there were at least 4,5 live deer remaining in the North Fork Herd for each buck legally killed in 1965, If so, the North Fork Deer Herd numbered at least 7,800 animals following the 1965 deer season instead of 5,719 deer as the estimate indicated, The larger figure is supported by Robinette's statement that a minimum of 6.24 deer are usually left per legal buck taken in most herds under normal circumstances. Another estimate, that the base herd in Unit 52 was reduced 27% in 1965, can also be checked, The Fishlake Herd was reduced 15,2% in 1942 when the antlered to antlerless ratio of the kill should have been higher than 1,00 to 1.27. Instead, the ratio was lower (1,00 to 1.12). Apparently the estimated 27% reduction is high. In all probability, the North Fork Herd was reduced less than 16% in 1965 indicating that there were at least 9,150 deer (1,262 more than the assumed value) in the North Fork Herd on January 1, 1965, This last value approaches the computed carrying capacity of 11,658 animals mentioned earlier in this paper. The computed values probably are not accurate, but they do give a better indication of deer productivity in Unit 52 than any other means available. These values, which are probably conservative, serve as the best basis for determining the impact of the Grand Mesa Project on the deer herd in the project area. Present Value -- According to Hunter (1960-1964), the North Fork Deer Herd provided recreation for an average of 1,570 hunters annually from 1960 to �- 153 - 1964 inclusive (Table 1). During 1962, 1963, and 1964, the income to the Game, fish and Parks Department from the sale of deer licenses to sportsmen hunting in Unit 52 averaged about $3r,600 a year (Table 2). In addition to this amount, Coloradoans received over $243~000 annually from these hunters (Table 3). Pressure and kill will increase in Unit 52 in the years that follow. Pressure in Unit 52 will exceed an average of 3~000 hunters annually in the next 20 years. If the herd is managed in the future as it has been for the past five years, Unit 52 can support kill of at least 2,500 deer a year with increased hunting pressuree License income should approach an annual average of $62,000 and Coloradoans will probably receive about $275,000 annually from those who hunt in Unit 52 in the next 20 years. These predictions are not unrealistic considering that 4,188 deer hunters in Unit 52 paid $94,425 for deer licenses in 1965. These same hunters killed 3,707 deer and spent an additional $603,412 for their hunte Table 1. -- Hunting pressure and deer kill in Big Game Management Unit 52 from 1960 through 1964 based on hunter report card data compiled by Hunter. No~ of Deer Hunters Year 1964 1963 1962 1961 1960 Total Five year Average Deer Resident Non-Resident Total Kill 1,123 1,044 1,269 1,205 868 5,509 1,102 676 622 462 1,799 1,666 1,731 1,515 1,137 7,848 1,570 1,460 1,443 1,625 2,022 1,020 7,570 1,514 310 269 2,339 468 Table 2. -- Income to the Game, Fish and Parks Department from the sale of deer licenses to people hunting in Big Game Management Unit 52 based on data provided by Hunter. 1961 1960 Income From Licenses Sold To Residents Non-Residents 1st Deer 2nd Deer 1st Deer 2nd Deer License License License License $21,040.00· $4,740.00 $8,422.,50 $1,470.00 4,117.50 7,830.00 1,245~00 24,880.00 2,842.50 2,405.00 18,480.00 9,517 .so No Data No Data 12,400,.00 9,037.50 No Data No Data 10,760.00 6,510 .. 00 Total $41,317.50 Year 1964 1963 1962 $5,120.00 $93,560.,00 $11,700.00 Total $41,672.50 38,072.,50 33,245.00 $112,900.00 �Table 3. -- Average revenue received by citizens of Colorado from people who hunted deer and elk in Big Game Management Unit 52 based on average: hunting pressure from 1960 through 1964. Amount spent per individual was derived from a survey made for the 1964 hunting season by Hunter,. -Type of Ave,. No. Amount Spent Total Hunter Hunters Per. Indiv., · Spent -------·---------------·---········--------··"-""'" Resident Deer 1,102 $ 88.,76 $ 97,813,.52 ___ Non-Resident Deer '.Resident Elk Non~Resident Elk 468 559 166 310e38 124.43 406.77 145,257.84 69,556.37 67,523~82 - . Total 2,295 $380,151.,55 Sometimes overlooked is the value of the deer ,.;,hich are killed,. Last year~ if the deer harvested in Unit 52 averaged 75 pounds each when dressed, 278,025 pounds of meat was produced. This meat probably replaced at least $111,210 worth of beef~ pork, mutton, or fish in someones diet .. Effec.t. o;f Project on Mule Deer. -- The Grand Mesa Project will reduce the deer winter range between 6,000 and 7,5000 feet elevation by 11,422 acres or 12.25%. If eight acres of winter range can support one deer, theoretically 1,428 deer will have to be removed from the base herd in order to utilize range at the present rate .. This reduction will bring about a 20 .. 6% loss in the huntable deer population. In additions about 5% of the base herd will have to be removed to curb deer damage to orchards and other cultivated crops that will replace existing deer winter range. At the present time, there are about 4,860 acres of orchards in the 'area. According to a Bureau of Reclamation survey, these orchards will increase 6,237 acres (128.4%) to 11,095 acres upon completion of the Grand Mesa Project (Table 4). Table 4. -- Use estimates for cultivated land affected by and resulting from the Grand Mesa Project prepared by the Bureau of Reclamation in October, 1964. Crop Alfalfa Pasture Small Grain Corn Sugar Beets Fruit Total Land Use Without Proiect Redlands and ~ Cedaredge Cedar Mesa Area ·------Acres Percent Acres Percent 30 35 4,770 441 18 30 2,862 378 15 252 20 2,385 795 5 101 8 318 2 0 0 30 88 7 4.,770 100 100 15,900 1,260 Total Land Use With _ __,;;;:.P,,:cr"'"oj"~J- Acres 6,974 6$023 3,170 Percent 22 19 10 2ll'536 8 1,902 11,095 6 35 31,700 100 �- 155 Game Damage, which amounted to $7,230 in the Cedaredge area during the winter of 1964-65 (Coleman, 1965), will probably increase in proportion to the increase i.n the orchard acreage., In other words, damage after the project will probably be 128.4% higher than at the present time (even after d.eer numbers are reduced in the problem areas). This means that the Game, Fish and Parks Department can expect to pay $16,485 a year for damage done to orchards in the Cedaredge area after completion of the project. Aga this estimate is not unreasonable. According to Dean Coleman, orchard g:tQ1;vers in the Cedar .. edge area submitted damage claims amounting to more than $18,000 during the mild winter of 1965-66$ Some field personnel doubt that the 93.7 miles of canal resulting from the project will affect deer movement or cause deer losses,. Others believe that losses will occur0 Disregarding losses resulting from canals and loss of habitat outside of Game Management Unit 52, the following annual losses to the deer resource can be expected as a result of the Grand Mesa Project: 1. Loss in license revenues= 25% x $62,000 = • • • • * • $15,500 2. Loss in income to people of Colorado~ 25% x $275~000 = $118,750 3. Revenue lost as a result of increased deer damage to crops"" $16.485 - $7,230 ~ O o O O o 0 • • 0 ~ C • o O • .. • e $ 9,255 4. Loss of meat produced= 46,875 lbs~ x $.40/lbc =" ~ 218,750 TOTAL VALUE OF ANNUAL LOSSES • c ~ ., ., ., ., ~ • ., ., • ~ e $162,255 0 $ ® ., Upland Game Pheasant -- The revised long range pheasant :management plan, prepared by Hal Swope (1965), classifies pheasant range according to the size of the spring breeding population indexo Based on this index, pheasant range in the Cedaredge area is less productive than pheasant range found elsewhere in Colorado (Table 5)~ Table Se -- Square miles and per cent of total pheasant range obtained from data gathered by Sandfort in 1955 and 1957 as compiled by Swope in the long range pheasant management plan., Spring Breeding Class Pop. Index 240-up 1 121-240 2 3 61-120 4 31-60 16-30 5 6 0-15 "''' Total Indicated Hunting Potential ...,,, Statewide Square Per Cent Miles Excellent 0 Very Good Good Fair Poor Very Poor 554 1,050 2,838 4~503 .1-,•I',~'··"·" 14,061 23,006 0 2 .. 4 4~6 12.3 19.6 61~1 100,.0 Pheasant RanO'e · Delta County Project Area Per Square Square Per Cent Miles Cent Miles 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 60 16.2 6 703 127 183 370 34~3 49.5 100.0 25 51 30.,5 62 .. 2 82 100~0 0 0 0 0 · · « """"""'"" A map showing the distribution of pheasant habitat in Colorado was planirnetered to determine the area occupied by pheasants in the vicinity of the Grand Mesa Project., There are approximately 83 square miles of pheasant �- 156 habitat in the area which will be affected by the project. About 7,3% (3,877 acres) of the range has fair hunting potential, 30.5% (16,202 acres) has poor hunting potential, and the remaining 62,2% (33,051 acres) has very poor hunting potential, The better range in this area consists of corn and small grain fields interspersed with waste areas containing a variety of vegetation, depending upon site, Some of the dominant plants occupying the different sites in waste areas include greasewood, rabbitbrush, sagebrush, cattails, narrowleaf cottonwood, tamerisk, and willow, Land having poor hunting potential is comprised of irrigated fields and orchards surrounded by pinyon-juniper or sagebrush types and are located at higher elevations, The very poor pheasant areas occur where there is little or no farm land. Cheatgrass or greasewood usually dominates uncultivated sites in these areas. Value -- Income from pheasant hunting in Delta County amounted to $96,824 in 1964 (Hunter and Grieb, 1964). Since approximately 22% of the pheasant habitat in Delta County occurs in the project area, pheasant hunters there probably contributed about $21,785 of this total county income, This estimate is probably high, because pheasant hunting in the Cedaredge area is not as good as pheasant hunting elsewhere in Delta County, Effect of Project on Pheasants -- Land use estimates indicate that an additional 533 acres of small grains and 1,640 acres of corn will be grown after the project (Table 4). Some of the land included in the project is already considered as pheasant habitat, Still, an additional 12,250 acres of new pheasant range will be created by the project, Nearly all of this increase will occur in areas now having poor or very poor hunting potential, Since food will probably be unavailable during periods of adverse winter weather, the pheasant population will not increase in proportion to the amount of habitat created. At best, the 22,8% increase in habitat will result in a 12,4% rise in the pheasant population. The income to the area resulting from pheasant hunting may be expected to increase by about the same amount. In other words, the Grand Mesa Project will probably create new pheasant hunting which will result in an annual increase of $2,700 in the income derived by residents of Delta County from pheasant hunting. The movement of pheasants will not be restricted by the project canals. Adequate cover will remain in the numerous areas unsuitable for irrigation. Hunter access will not change since nearly all of the land affected by the project is already privately owned, Hunting pressure will porbably increase as the economy of the area grows. Chukar Partridge -- Chukar Partridge occur in semi-desert habitat, most of which lies below areas that will be farmed as a result of the Grand Mesa Project, Thus, the Grand Mesa Project is not expected to effect these birds adversely. Gambel's Quail -- Gambel's Quail occur in the project area below 6,500 feet elevation where brushy hill sides, farmland, creek bottoms and thickets are found in desirable combination, The cleaning of brushy areas for farmland and the water backed up by Gorsuch Dam will decrease quail habitat, But the creation of farmland in certain areas will compensate for lost habitat. The quail population, quail movement, and hunter access as a whole, will probably remain unaffected by the project, Wild Turkey As previously mentioned, a few wild turkeys inhabit a portion of the project area, Appro~imately ten birds usually winter on Leroux Creek �- 157 at about 7,000 feet elevation, by poaching. The size of this flock is said to be limited Hunter access will be improved by the ditch rider's road along the 56 mile Grand Mesa canal, This canal will transport water through a considerable area, Since turkeys are said to nest within 0,5 miles of free water, nesting habitat will benefit, The project will have no direct effect on hunting pressure as this is determined primarily by the abundance of turkeys. Upon completion of the project, areas adjacent to suitable roost sites located above 6,400 feet elevation on Youngs Creek, Surface Creek, Currant Creek, and Dry Creek should be examined, Turkeys should be planted in these areas if small grains are grown adjacent to adequate cover and if the fields are within two miles of suitable roost sites, Since no one knows forcertain what crops will be raised in these areas at this time, it is difficult to say how much the project will benefit wild turkeys, Turkey hunting probably contributes less than $250 to the county income in Unit 52, Only three turkeys have been legally killed in this area in recent years, If the income is doubled as a result of the project, which is doubtful, the county income derived from turkey hunters might increase by $250. Blue Grouse -- Blue grouse occur above project lands and in the vicinity of the Electric Mountain Reservoir site, An insignificant amount of habitat will be lost as a result of the project, The grouse population, movement, and hunter pressure will remain unaffected, As with turkeys, hunter access may be improved by the ditch rider's road along the Grand Mesa Canal, Cottontail Rabbit -- Cottontails occupy the entile project area. These animals are said to thrive where cropland, grassland, woodland, and brushland is well mixed and equally plentiful (Trippensee, 1948). At the present time, Redlands Mesa and Cedar Mesa consist of small fields, orchards, and pastures mixed with sagebrush and pinyon-juniper. These combinations approach the desirable mixtures, Following the Grand Mesa Project, there will be close to 6,000 acres of pasture, about 13,600 acres of cropland (which includes almost 7,000 acres of alfalfa that might better be included as pasture), and nearly 11,100 acres of orchards, Almost all brushland and pinyon-juniper will be removed from cultivated areas. This mixture of vegetation will provide less desirable habitat for cottontails than existing habitat. Probably close to 20% of the rabbit hunters in Delta County hunted in the project area, If so, there were 106 rabbit hunters in the area in 1962. If about 100 people hunt rabbits in this area each year, the cottontail resource contributes $3,048 to the economy of the county each year. If 1/3 of the hunters in the project area quit hunting as a result of the lower rabbit population due to the Grand Mesa Project, $1,016 of the county income from the rabbit hunting will be lost. Most of the project land is privately owned so hunter access will not be affected. Migratory Birds Areas of interest in evaluating the effects of the proposed Grand Mesa Project on the migratory bird resource include: (1) Gorsuch Reservoir site; �(2) Electric Mountain Reservoir site; (3) land presently in agricultural production; and (4) land to be put into agricultural production, Comparisons with and without the project will be made only for these four areas, Other areas within the proposed project not be affected, Habitat and Migratory Bird Populations Without the Project Waterfowl -- Waterfowl habitat is quite extensive and varied in the Grand Mesa area, Grand Mesa itself, with its numerous lakes and ponds, forms the north boundary of the proposed project area, These lakes and ponds provide good breeding habitat for ducks, It is believed that production here contributes significantly to the population of ducks that winter in the lower Uncompahgre-Gunnison-Colorado River. area of Colorado, The Gunnison River above Delta, including the North Fork of the Gunnison River, marks the southern limit of the proposed Grand Mesa project. This stretch of river is one of the most important winter resting areas for waterfowl on the entire western slope of Colorado, with as many as 10,000 ducks represented, These ducks, mostly mallards, seek refuge in the inaccessible Black Canyon during the hunting season, but frequent other portions of the Gunnison River and even move to the Uncompahgre River following the hunting season 0 Wintering ducks feed in corn and small-grain fields mostly south of the project area near Delta, Olathe, and Montrose, Feeding flights occur in the early morning and late evening hours, particularly during the hunting season., Breeding geese do not presently occupy the Grand Mesa area, The nearest breeding population occurs on the Colorado River west of Grand Junction, Few geese are observed in the Grand Mesa .area during the fall and winter, probably because it is outside their normal migration pattern. Most northern geese follow the Colorado River into Arizona and southern Colorado, Attractive waterfowl habitat is rather limited within the boundaries of the proposed Grand Mesa Project area. Streams draining the south slopes of Grand Mesa yield some duck breeding habitat where beaver ponds occur and where they meander through meadows, but for the most part the gradient is too steep and the water too swift for them to be attractive waterfowl habitat, Fruitgrowers Reservoir, located just north of Austin, is the only sizeable body of water within the proposed project area, It has little value as a waterfowl breeding area because of fluctuating water levels, but is does supply some resting habitat for migrating and wi.nc~r ducks. However, Fruitgrowers Reservoir is not presently an important resting area, probably because it is situated at some distance from major grain-producing areas and away from the normal flight pattern of ducks resting on the Gunnison River. This reservoir freezes-over regularly and wintering numbers of ducks using it rarely exceed about 500, A few ponds are located at the southern base of Redlands Mesa, These provide a small amount of breeding and re~cing habitat for ducks, Corn and small-grain fields on Redlands Mesa and in the Cedaredge area receive some use by feeding ducks during the fall and winter. �- 159 Waterfowl habitat presently associated with Gorsuch and Electric Mountain Reservoir sites amounts to a total of about 150 acres,. This is composed of (1) 30 acres of willow-covered creek bottom (Currant Creek) at the Gors'llch Reservoir site; (2) 60 acres 0£ corn and small-grain crops at.the Gorsuch Reservoir site; and (.3) 60 acres of meadow and creek bottom (West Muddy Creek) at the Electric Mountain Reservoir site • .A total of 3,533 acres of corn and small grains is presently being produced in the project area, including 60 acres at the Gorsuch Reservoir site (Table 6). Table 6. --,Comparison of Migratory ijird Habitat With and Without the Proposed Grand Mesa Projectm Acres of l:Iab:i.tat Habitat Area Waterfowl Gorsuch Reservoir site Electric Mountain Reservoir site Agricultural Lands Corn Small grain TOTALS Mourni.ng Doves Gorsuch Reservoir site Electric Mountain Reservoir site Pinon-Juniper~Sagebrush Agricultural Lands Small grains Fruit orchards Sub-totals Allowance for high quality habitat of fruit orchards TOTALS Without Project 90 ll 60 With Project 542 457 Di££$ + + 452 397 2,536 3,170 + 1,610 6~705 + 3,082 100 21 0 100 0 0 0 .:..14,540 866 2,607 3,623 14,540 2,607 0 3;,170 11,095 14,265 6,237 22,105 20,502 4,858 22,105 + 563 0 + 563 + 6,237 - 7,840 + 6,237 - 1,603 Mourning Doves -- The western slope of Colorado, with its typical pinyonjuniper-sagebrush range in conjunction with its agricultural economy of fruit and small-grain production, is one of the best habitat areas for mourning doves in the State,, The area encompassed by the proposed Grand Mesa Project is no exception. Doves find good breeding habitat in the pinion--junipersagebrush type and in the fruit orchards@ During late summer~ doves concentrate near grain fields where they feed before migrating south·in late August and September. Dove habitat presently in the areas of concern includes: (1) 14,610 acres of pinon-juniper .. sagebrush, of which 10 acres occurs at the Gorsuch Reservoir site; (2) !.i-,858 acres of fruit orchards; and (3) 2,637 acres of small grains~ including about 30 acres at the Gorsuch Reservoir site (Table 6). �- 160 - Band-tailed Pige2!!& -- Small populations, of band-tailed pigeons occur in the Grand Mesa area, but their status is generally unknown. The only population within the proposed project area is located at the southeast edge near PaoniaQ They apparently breed at elevations above the pinon-juniper type~ but venture to lower areas later in the summer and become associated with orchards" The areas of specific interest in evaluating the proposed project are outside the present range of the band-tailed pigeon., R$'t'vest an4 Hunter-Use Withoµt the Project Waterfowl .... Interest in the sport: 6£ waterfowl hunting is relatively low on the western slope at this tim.e,probably because the birds rest in inaccessible areas during the hunting s~ason and a.re not available to the hunters@ Most ducks resting in the Black Canyon, for example, conduct their feeding flights before and after legal shooting hoursm Thus, the western slope duck population is harvested rather lightly$ Annual harvest of ducks in Delta County has averaged 2,126 during the past five years (1960-1964) (Grieb and Hunter, 1965)., An average of 413 duck hunters accounted for this kill each year$ Most of the kill and hunting pressure occurs on the Gunnison River, Uncompahgre River, Sweitzer Lake, and other areas outside the proposed Grand Mesa Project@ Only an estimated 10% of this harvest and hunting pressure presently takes place within the project boundaries~ This yields an estimated annual kill of about 212 ducks by 41 hunters in the project area., About 250 man-days of recreation are involved,; with an estimated annual value of $2,800 (Table 7). · Table 7. --- Comparison of Migratory Bird Harvest and Hunter-Use With and Without·the Proposed Grand Mesa Project,. Without Project With Project Difference Annual Annual Man.. tJays Annual Man-Days Annual Man.. Days Annual of Use 'Value of Use Value of Use Value· 250 550 $6,300 +300 +$3,500 $2,800 Annual Species Ducks Geese Mourning Doves Band-tailed TOTALS 50 $ 250 0 0 0 50 0 300 $3,050 600 0 0 250 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 $6,550 +300 +$3,500 0 $ • ttarvest within. the proposed project a:rea o~cu:rs :mai11.lY at. Fruitg:r:o-wers Re .. se:rvoir,. along creek bottO'ills, ·. and in grain fields,. Gorsuch Reservoir site provides a snia11 and insignificant amount 0£ duck harvest. Little, or no . duck harvest . occurs at . the. Electric Mountain Reservoir site •. · Very few geese are harvested in Delta County because of the absence of a significant wintering population of these birds,. It appears that no goose harvest or hunting pressure presently occurs ts1ithin the proposed project area .. �- 161 - Band-tailed Pigeons -- There is not presently an open hunting season for the taking of band-tailed pigeons in Colorado, Such a season is not likely until we learn more about their present status within the State. Habitat and Migratory Bird Populations With the Project Waterfowl -- Table 6 compares amount of habitat with and without the proposed Grand Mesa Project in the areas affected by the project. Waterfowl habitat in these locations will almost double as a result of the project, with an increase of 3,082 acres over that now in existence. Most of this. increase (2,233 acres) will be in the form of fall and winter feeding habitat, consisting of corn and small-.grain fields, · Waterfowl habitat at Gorsuch and Electric Mountain Reservoir sites will increase greatly with the project. Gorsuch Reservoir will inundate a small amount of breeding and feeding habitat, while creating 542 acres of primarily resting habitat, The breeding population of ducks will remain low at this site, largely because of unattractive habitat conditions (fluctuating water levels) and human disturbances (fish and boating activities); However, significant increases are expected to occur in utilization by migrating and wintering ducks, particularly with the production of over 2,000 additional acres of corn and small grains nearby, Use of this area by geese is not expected to change significantly with the project, Electric Mountain Reservoir will create 457 acres of fair breeding and resting habitat. This represents an increase of about 400 acres over that in present existence, The breeding population of ducks will probably increase, but not to a significant degree, Fluctuating water levels will also be a limiting factor here, but human disturbances should not be as great as at Gorsuch Reservoir, Electric Mountain Reservoir will no doubt attract moderate numbers of migrating ducks during late summer and early fall, Ducks will not winter here because of the high altitude and absence of a winter food supply. Geese are not expected to use this area, Seepage and irrigation runoff will undoubtedly increase with the project in areas such as that below Redlands Mesa, However, this additional water will not create more waterfowl habitat unless made to do so through a development program$ Mourning Doves -- Amount of dove habitat with and without the project is listed in Table 6 for those areas involved, Gorsuch Reservoir will cover 70 acres of pinon-juniper-sagebrush breeding habitat and 30 acres of feeding habitat in the form of small grains. This proposed reservoir will provide no replacement habitat for doves, Electric Mountain Reservoir will neither destroy nor create any mourning dove habitat. About 14,540 acres of land now supporting a pinon-juniper-sagebrush vegetative type and representing good dove breeding habitat will be cleared and put into cultivation of agricultural crops, Crops beneficial to doves will be raised on 6,800 acres of this land. These crops include 563 acres of feeding habitat (small grains) and 6,237 acres of breeding habitat (fruit orchards). This yields an apparent loss of 7,840 acres of dove breeding habitat as a result of the proposed Grand Mesa Project, However, on an acre for acre basis, fruit orchards are known to be better dove production acres �- 162 - than the pino,n-ittnj_pEir-sagebrush type. Information available from dove population trend counts on the western slope of Colorado indicates that orchards support about twice as many breeding doves per acre as pinon-junipersagebrush. This means that the 6,237 acres of fruit orchards to be planted as a result of the project will be equivalent to about 12,474 acres of pinon-juniper-sagebrush. Thus, the net loss of dove habitat resulting from the project will be an estimated 1,603 acres, rather than 7,840 acres. Band-tailed Pigeons -- The proposed Grand Mesa Project will not eliminate or create band-tailed pigeon habitat. As indicated earlier, specific areas of the project of major concern to the migratory bird resource are outside the present range of this species. Harvest and Hunter-Use With the Project Waterfowl -- Duck harvest and hunter-use are expected to increase with the project because of improved habitat conditions brought about by the project. This increase will amount to an estimated 300 man-days of hunting, with an annual value of $3,500 (Table 7). The larger acreage of corn and small grains should attract more ducks to the project area. This situation is expected to make Fruitgrowers Reservoir a more popular duck resting area. Gorsuch Reservoir will provide an additional winter resting site and will help hold more birds in the project area during the hunting season. These three factors will no doubt help distribute ducks wintering in the inaccessible Black Canyon and make them more available to a greater number of hunters, Little, if any, goose harvest and hunting pressure are expected to occur with the project. The project will attract an insignificant number of geese. Mourning Doves -- Dove harvest and hunter-use are not expect to change significantly with the project (Table 7). The loss of 1,603 acres of breeding habitat will reduce dove production somewhat, but the increased acreage of grain crops should distribute the birds better and make them more available to the hunters. As a result, the number of birds bagged is expected to remain about the same, even with fewer birds in the area during the hunting season .. Band-tailed Pigeons -- It is doubtful that the proposed Grand Mesa Project will influence the establishment of an open season for the hunting of bandtailed pigeons in Colorado. Even if a season existed, harvest and hunteruse would be expected to be the same with or without the project. CONCLUSIONS At least 400 elk winter in the project area. A negligable amount of elk winter range will be inundated by Electric Mountain Reservoir. The effect of the project on elk will be minor, provided that canals do not restrict movement of elk between November 10 and Aprils. Estimates indicate that more than 10,000 deer probably occur in the project area prior to the hunting season. Animals surviving the hunting season usually winter from 6,000 - 7,500 feet elevation on 93,265 acres of deer winter range. The Grand Mesa Project will reduce the deer winter range in Unit �- 163 - 52 by 11,422 acres which will necessitate at least a 20% reduction in the deer population, An additional 5% of the base herd will probably have to be removed to curb deer damage to orchards and other cultivated crops. As a result of herd reduction, $15,500 in license revenues, $118,750 income to the people of Colorado, and $18,750 worth of meat will be lost, In addition, close to $9,255 deer damage to crops will result. Total loss to the deer resource will amount to $162,255. There are approximately 83 square miles of pheasant habitat in the vicinity of the Grand Mesa Project, A majority of this area has poor hunting potential, Although some of the land which will be put into cultivation is already classified as pheasant habitat, 12,250 acres of new habitat will be created by the project, Nearly all of this increase will occur in areas now having poor or very poor hunting potential, At best, the 22,8% increase in habitat will result in a 12.4% rise in the pheasant population because food will probably be unavailable during periods of adverse winter weather. Assuming that hunters take advantage of this increase, additional pheasant hunting created by the Grand Mesa Project will result in an annual increase of $2,700 in the income derived by residents of Delta County from pheasant hunting, Chukar Partridge, Gambel's Quail, and Blue Grouse populations will probably not be affected by the project, Grain fields, if established at elevations above 6,400 feet, could improve turkey habitat as will the canals carrying water through nesting habitat. The maximum value of the increased habitat is not likely to result in any more than $250 additional income to residents of Delta County, Cottontail Rabbit habitat will suffer. Following the Grand Mesa Project, there will be close to 6,000 acres of pasture, about 13,600 acres of cropland (which includes almost 7,000 acres of alfalfa that might better be included as pasture), and nearly 11,000 acres of orchards. Almost all brushland and pinyon-juniper will be removed from cultivated areas, This mixture of vegetation will furnish less desirable habitat for cottontails than existing habitat. If 1/3 of the rabbit hunters in the area quit hunting as a result of the decreased rabbit population, $1,016 of the county income from rabbit hunting will be lost, Mourning dove production will also be harmed by the project, The loss of 1,603 acres of pinyon-juniper-sagebrush vegetation will result in reduced breeding habitat for mourning doves, This loss of habitat will not bring about a decrease in the value of dove hunting because doves are presently underharvested in this area. Migratory bird gains that will result from the installation of the proposed Grand Mesa Project include a gain of 3,082 acres of waterfowl feeding and resting habitat and an increase of 300 man-days of duck hunting annually, yielding an annual increase in value of $3,500. Annual gains valued at $3,500 for migratory birds, $2,700 for pheasants, and $250 for wild turkeys are overshadowed by deer and rabbit resource losses amounting to $163,271. Thus in the overall analysis, the Grand Mesa Project will result in a net annual loss to the wildlife resource of the area amounting to $156,821. These losses will come to $7,841,051 if the life of the project is 50 years. �- 164 - PROPOSED PLAN OF DEVELOPMENT FOR WILDLIFE Funds should be obtainable from two sources for improving and developing wildlife habitat in the Grand Mesa Project area. These include funds furnished by the project to compensate for wildlife losses due to the project; and (2) funds available under Public Law 89-72, involving a cost-sharing program between the Federal Government and the Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department. It is proposed that these funds be used to acquire land and improve and develop waterfowl habitat in the area between Redlands Mesa and the Gunnison River. The purpose of such an undertaking would be to enhance waterfowl populations and increase waterfowl hunting opportunity, success, and harvest in the Grand Mesa area, This locality is a potential Canada goose production and harvest area, A resident population of breeding geese could be established which would eventually provide a source of high quality recreation, Ducks are not presently being harvested to the extent that they could be, largely because they concentrate in inaccessible areas where hunters cannot get to them, As a result, hunter interest is low, A habitat development program aimed at improving the distribution of wintering ducks and attracting them into accessible areas would do much to increase hunter participation and harvest. Approximately 6,500 acres of land is recommended for purchase, Location of this land is shown in Figure 4, This land provides three features important in enhancing the waterfowl resource and in increasing hunting opportunity: (1) seepage areas below Redlands Mesa; (2) dam sites for lake construction; and (3) frontage along the Gunnison River, Cost of land purchase is estimated at $162,500, or an average of about $25 per acre, even though most of this land is accessed at only $2.50 per acre. Lands have a way of increasing in value when the State or Federal Government becomes interested in acquiring them. Figure 4 shows the location of three proposed dam sites south of Highway 92 on the lands recommended for purchase. These sites would create two lakes of about 200 surface acres each and one lake of about 250 surface acres, Permanent water supplies are now running through these lake sites and these supplies are expected to increase with the Grand Mesa Project. Cost of dam construction and water control structures for all three lakes would be an estimated $250,000 (Table 8). Seep areas north of Highway 92 directly below Redlands Mesa would be developed into desirable waterfowl habitat by constructing a series of small, shallow impoundments along each drainage with water, Amount of water in this area will no doubt increase with more intensive irrigation resulting from the Grand Mesa Project. Construction costs here would be an estimated $100,000, The proposed development site would be managed for waterfowl production and for public shooting. The lakes would serve as initial Canada goose release sites for starting a resident population of breeding birds. Such an area is known as "home base", with dispersal of paired birds to other breeding �·-....... \ " " ' <:'.... \. • " " ! .. r \\ ) -~ "! ;'~, · ~- II ~ \II \ • \' w •• \ ' \\ '• \\ \ II ~ \ I II \ > . " \~" II \. \, ' ( • " F. i gure 4, \ • " " \" Land suitable for waterfowl habitat development end recommended for purchase is enclosed by hatch marks, Bow-tie-I ike symbols Indicate dam sites, " �- 166 Table 8, -- Cost and Benefit Analysis of Proposed Waterfowl Development Plan in the Grand Mesa Project Area, Item COSTS Amount Development Cost Estimates Land Acquisition (6,500 acres) Lake Construction (3) Shallow Pond Construction (several Fencing (10 miles) Signs Parking Lot Facilities (4) Construction of Access Roads Goose Nesting Structures (250) TOTAL $ 162,500 250,000 100,000 10,000 1,000 4,000 10,000 7 500 $ 545,000 Source of Development ~'tmds Grand Mesa Project Federal Cost-Sharing Program (P. L. 89-72) Federal Share State Share TOTAL $ 545,000 $ 545,000 Annual Operation and Maintenance Cost Estimates Personnel Operation and Repair of Equipment Road Maintenance - culverts, gravel etc, Tools and Miscellaneous Maintenance Supplies Goose Nesting Structure Maintenance Materials Goose Feed Miscellaneous TOTAL $ $ Total Cost of Development Program Over a 50-Year Period Development Costs Annual O & M (times 50) TOTAL BENEFITS Duck Hunting (500 man-days annually - times 50) Goose Hunting (2,000 man-days annually - times 40) TOTAL BENEFIT - COST RATIO (Over a SO-Year Period) Benefits= $1,620,000 = 1.38 Costs 1,170,000 1 5,000 2,500 2,500 1,000 500 500 500 12,500 $ 545,000 625,000 $1,170,000 $ 340,000 1,280,000 $1,620,000 �- 167 - habitat occurring from here when overcrowding becomes a problem. Hopefully, they would eventually extend their breeding range to unoccupied habitat along the Gunnison River downstream to Grand Junction, and along the Uncompahgre River from Delta to Montrose. Nesting structures would be erected at the lakes. Green forage, such as alfalfa or barley, would be grown on areas adjacent to the lakes for summer goose feed. Livestock grazing would be eliminated from all areas to maintain nesting and brood cover for ducks. After development, this area should provide good waterfowl hunting with its variety of habitat (lakes, ponds, and river). It is close to the flight path of ducks resting in the Black Canyon. One of the three lakes should be closed to hunting to encourage both ducks and geese to stay in the management area and supply hunting to the other two lakes, the ponds, and the river. The proposed development site itself would supply an estimated 500 man-days of additional duck hunting annually to the Grand Mesa area. Goose hunting would not be allowed at the development site or in other portions of the Grand Mesa area until the local goose population reached sufficient size to warrant this type of recreation. Nesting geese should occupy a sizeable portion of the Grand Mesa area 10 years after initial release at the development site. Goose production following this period of time would yield an estimated 2,000 man-days of hunting in the Grand Mesa area, a situation that would be attributed to the development of the area between Redlands Mesa and the Gunnison River. Table 8 summarizes costs and benefits associated with the proposed plan of development for waterfowl. The plan would yield a desirable benefit-cost ratio of 1.38: lover a 50-year period. LITERATURE CITED Bureau of Reclamation, Region 4. 1962. naissance report. 65p. Coleman, A. D. 1965. Grand Mesa project Colorado, recon- Game damage report 1964-65. Unpublished. n.p. Grieb, J. R., and G. N. Hunter. 1965. Colorado small game hunter harvest survey -- 1964. Unpublished. 23p. Hunter, G. N. 1960-1964. Economic value of hunting and fishing to the people of the State of Colorado. Loose leaf. Unpublished. n.p. , and J. R. Grieb. 1964. County income from pheasants, ducks, - - -geese, - - -antelope, and turkey. Loose lea Unpublished. n.p. Hunter, G. N. 1965. 1965 grand total deer kill (by game management unit). Loose leaf. Unpublished. n.p. Robinette, W. L. 1956. Productivity - the annual crop of mule deer, p. 415429. In W. P. Taylor, The deer of North America, The Stackpole Co., Harrisburg. �- 168 - Swope, H. M. 1965. A Colorado pheasant management plan. Unpublished, 54 p. Trippinsee, R. E. 1948. Wildlife management upland game and general principles. McGraw-Hill Book Co., Toe,, New York. 479 p. Prepared by: G. T. Myers and R. M. Hopper Asst. Wildlife Researchers Date: April 1966 Approved by: Wayne w. Sandfort Game Research Chief Ferd c. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �April, 1966 - 169 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO ----====----- Project No. Grune Bird Survey W-37-R-19 Work Plan No. 16 ----------- Title of Job: Two Forks Reservoir Period Covered: April 1, 1965 to March 31, 1966 Personnel: Job No. 8 Harold M. Swope ABSTRACT Destructive flooding of the South Platte River during the spring and summer of 1965 diverted attention from the Two Forks site to a downstream reservoir proposal called the Chatfield project. The Two Forks Reservoir, if built, will have almost no direct effect upon upland game birds. Long range plans, however, call for a companion storage facility by vastly enlarging the downstream Hudson Reservoir. This could have a profound effect upon upland game and waterfowl. �- 170 - Objectives: (1) To investigate the possible effects of the project on: a. Loss of pheasant range. b. Alteration in proportions of available range types. c. Restriction of game bird movement because of reservoir, canals, roads, fences, human activities, etc. d.• Loss of birds through drowning, increased traffic hazzards, etc. e. Hunter access and hunting. f. Possible conflicts of interest between hunters and recreationists. (2) To investigate the possibility for State control of lands within the project area as concerns the management and welfare of pheasants, (3) To investigate whether means of migating losses to and/or enhancing upland game bird values exist and suggest what these might be. Techniques Used: General reservoir site reconnaissance and review of available reports and plans. �- 171 Two Forks Reservoir Harold M, Swope Millions of dollars in property damage resulting from the 1965 flooding of the South Platte River diverted attention from the Two Forks Reservoir to the Chatfield project. The Chatfield site is located closer to Denver and would catch water from Plum Creek, which was responsible for much of the flood damage. It is quite likely that both dams may eventually be constructed. this assumption both sites were located and cursorily examined. Based on The Two Forks Reservoir would cover steep, dry mountain slopes and have no significant effect upon upland game. The Chatfield Dam would inundate some fair quality upland game range but offers little for future hunting development. '['he site is within a few minutes drive of over a million people and would more logically be developed as a park area. Approximate upland game losses will be computed when this project becomes a certainty. The greatest impact on upland game will result if plans to build a storage dam near Hudson materialize. This apparently is to be included as a portion of the Two Fork project but little mention has been made of it. The Hudson site is located in one of the most heavily hunted upland game areas in Colorado. The locality currently produces fair to good populations of pheasants and rabbits. With additional water available, and possible management control of land surrounding the reservoir, the upland game potential of the area could be considerably enhanced. It will be a major task to evaluate wildlife losses and formulate a development plan but it is important this be done as soon as the project has been assured. Recommendations: Upon receipt of some assurance that the Hudson storage facility will be constructed a complete evaluation of its potential effects upon upland game should be made. Prepared by: Harold M. Swope Wildlife Researcher Date: April 1966 Approved by: Wayne W, Sandfort Game Research Chief Ferd c. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator ��- 173 JOB COMPLETION BEFORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMEl'r.I: State of COLORADO Project No. W-37-R-19 Work Plan No. 17 Game Bird Survey Job No. Title of Job: Inventory of Ptarmigan Populations Period Covered: April 1, 1965 to March 31, 1966 Personnel: 1 1 Glenn E. Rogers ABSTRACT There are approximately 7,000 square miles of land area in Colorado above 11,000 feet elevation. Ptarmigan were not found in all areas above 11,000 feet. Even inhabited areas varied greatly in degrees of use. Controlling factors in SUllllller habitats are varied. Ptarmigan were found at elevations below 9,000 feet during the winter months in Gunnison and Saguache counties. The availability of willow buds and twigs appears to be a controlling factor in ptarmigan movements. Ptarmigan were still paired in late June and early July. SUllllller plumage variations would appear to allow ready differentiation between males and females. An additional 7 ptarmigan w2re tagged in the Independence Pass area where Jensen had banded 28 in 1964. Split hunting seasons, each 9 days in length, . were held in September and October. There were 14 hunters checked on Independence Pass during the first 2 days of the early season. They hunted 32 hours and killed 25 birds, 4 of which were tagged. �- 174 Reconnnendations: This study should be continued to gain an idea of population densities so estimates can be made of the statewide population. Objectives: 1. To gather and record background information pertaining to range, distribution, density, and census methods for ptarmigan. 2. To map ptarmigan range in Colorado. 3. To determine methods for ascertaining annual changes in ptarmigan populations. Procedures: I. Background information A. Reviewed and abstracted available literature. II. III. Map Range A. Determined perimeter of ptarmigan range by county through interviews of Departmental personnel, Federal land-use agency personnel, museum personnel, ranchers, and/or sportsmen; inspected habitat capable of supporting ptarmigan; and personal observations. B. Determineddensity of ptarmigan populations by observing and counting populations per unit of range. C. Planimetered various units of range to determine square miles of different types of ranges and total range for each county and statewide. D. Prepared distribution map of ptarmigan range. Population Inventories A. Established trial trend areas or routes within ptarmigan range. Location to be determined by researcher and/or other qualified personnel. Areas or routes to be mapped and described in sufficient detail to definitely and permanently delineate their location. Size of areas or length of routes to be determined by local circumstances. B. Completed counts in trend areas or along routes during various seasons of the year and periods of the day. Recorded birds observed, specific location, time of observation, mileage, weather conditions, and other factors. C. Recorded all miscellaneous observations of ptarmigan according to numbers of birds, courtship behavior, brood size, specific location, vegetative cover type, range condition, elevation, topography, and weather factors. D. Recorded harvest information according to hunting pressure and harvest success .. �- 175 - INVENTORY OF PTARMIGAN POPULATIONS Glenn Rogers This study was initiated to determine the basic ptarmigan inventory for Colorado and to ascertain if census trends could or should be established for management use. Work during 1965 consisted of studying references, making field observations in as many habitats as time allowed, checking hunters. and recording physical measurements of live and dead ptarmigan. Except for Lewis's(l904) article on nesting habits and Quick's (1947) winter food study, references to the southern white-tailed ptarmigan prior to 1960 dealt with either occurrence or hunting seasons. Since 1960, Choate's work (1963) on habitat requirements and population dynamics for white-tailed ptarmigan in Montana and Aldrich (1963) on geographic orientation of ptarmigan by species and subspecies have been published. Starting in 1964, students and professors of the Aspen Institute of Field Biology, including R. A. Ryder, Lamont Jensen, and Eldon Grimm, began an ecology study of the southern white-tailed ptarmigan inhabiting the Independence Pass area near Aspen. Many intensive studies have been done in Europe and North America on rock and willow ptarmigan. Less work has been done on the northern subspecies of whitetailed ptarmigan. DISTRIBUTION While contacting United States Forest Service, Bureau of Land Management, and Colorado Game, Fish and Parks personnel in 1961 regarding distribution of blue grouse, I recorded on maps all possible information relating to game bird populations, ptarmigan included. Numbers and locations of ptarmigan seen by federal and state personnel appeared to be interspersed through and to be correlated with the amount of habitat available. In 1964 while formulating long-range management plans for grouse species, land areas of Colorado above 000 feet were plotted on U. s. Geological Survey maps and were then planimetered to determine the square miles of possible ptarmigan habitat (Fig. 1). Land area above 11,000 feet elevation totaled 7,007 square miles principally in the southwestern, central, and north-central pcrtions of the state. Evidence of ptarmigan use was not found on many large areas above 11,000 feet. However, seasonal occupancy by ptarmigan was found to extend as low as 8,000 feet. The next questions to arise are: to what extent do ptarmigan range belcw 11,000 feet; and what proportion of the range above 11,000 feet is utilized by ptarmigan? lt is hoped that this study will give us some answers to these questions. At the present time, only areas of tall vegetation without interspersed rocks and steep rocky areas without vegetation appear to be void of ptarmigan. Habitat: Ptarmigan in Colorado are considered primarily residents of the alpine zone. With a few exceptions, this statement holds true for the period from May �L 0 ' RIO MOFFAT BLANCO Pre-study estimate of ptarmigan distribution in Colorado, 1963. 3 �- l77 - to November. Occupancy during the remaining months is influenced by several factors including snow depth, wind velocity, and the height of willows, which control the availability of willow buds, The limited summer and winter periods when access was feasible to ptarmigan range and the difficulty in seeing the birds due to their natural camouflage made it necessary to also use tracks, droppings, and molted feathers as indicators of occupancy by habitat types, Winter: Dick L. Lichtenberg and Robert K, Rosette, wildlife conservation officers in the Gunnison district, have done the most work studying winter ptarmigan habitat. In this area, snow depths are great enough to cover willows growing at the higher elevations. Ptarmigan, therefore, can commonly be found, from January to March, using the willows along the various streams at elevations between 8,000 and 9,000 feet, In actual flight distance, these wintering areas could range from one to 15 miles of ptarmigan summer range, Reports had been received and infrequent sightings had been made of ptarmigan in the Slate River drainage both above and below the town of Crested Butte, On February 28, 1965, the first trip was made by Dick Lichtenberg under this study. Approximately 35 ptarmigan were seen in the one-half mile area on both sides from the Brush Creek bridge, The altitude is about 8,800 feet. The snow averaged about 4 feet in depth although many drifts were over 10 feet. The same area was revisited on March 4, 16, 20, 28, April 11 and 15. Ptarmigan, ranging in number from 2 to over 59, were seen on every trip except the last. Even though the snow was heavily crusted on the final trip and it was difficult to distinguish old from fresh trakcs, Dick believed the birds had left the area. Besides the birds on Slate River, ptarmigan were seen on the Tomichi River above White Pine. Reports were received of ptarmigan wintering near Sargents, on Canyon Creek, on Washington Gulch, below Las Pinos Pass, near Cebolla, and on Ohio Creek. ' All ptarmigan observed appeared to be living on a diet of willow buds and twigs. A ptarmigan crop collected in late January contained only these items, Photographs taken at higher elevations suggested that some birds may feed on conifers during this period. Willows may afford some measure of cover directly or in preventing the snow from crusting as hard as in the open areas. At least, most snow burrows for roosts were located on the lee side of willows or of large snow drifts. On two different occasions ptarmigan were observed to fly to and perch in trees when flushed. In the first instance, three birds flew across the Slate River road alighting in an aspen tree. Later, Dick Lichtenberg, Bob Rosette, and George Means flushed a ptarmigan at White Pine that flew to and landed in the conifers there, Most of these mountain valleys are narrow and excape routes short unless birds do use the timbered slopes, Summer: The first check for ptarmigan on the summer range was made on June 17. The first birds were observed June 29 on Independence Pass, At this time most (Fig. 2) of the ground was still covered by snow. From that date the first of October when trips to the field were ended due to pressures of other hunting seasons, ptarmigan we!'e present on their snrmner range .. �178 - Most of the ptannigan observed this past summer were above 12,000 feet in elevation. Perhaps this is partially due to more time being spent by the observer above this elevation and partially due to the lesser vegetative height at that elevation allowing the ptarmigan to be easier seen. Droppings and molted feathers were frequently seen, particularly in or near patches of alpine willows, at lower elevations (Figs. 3 and 4). Most of the use in these areas appeared to have occurred during early spring or late fall. The lowest elevation at which birds were observed this summer was 11,500 feet. Previous personal observations and reported observations by technical personnel have placed the birds as inhabiting open range areas below 11,000 feet. Ptarmigan observed on Independence Pass in the period from June 29 to July 14 tended to be paired up with little sign that nesting had begun. Of the 13 males observed in approximately one square mile on Independence Pass, 8 had females at their side at time of observation. Males in late June gave some evidence of breeding display while all birds observed in July, although paired, were silent and not particularly agressive. Males in late July (Fig. 5) only had a few white feathers showing on their back and sides while females appeared to have completed their molts. The eye comb of these males was often inflated and a brilliant red in color. The most common sounds were a high-pitched scream, a scolding kut-kut-kut, and a drawn-out shir-rup, the last two sounds were similar to those given by the dancing sharptailed grouse. All male and female ptarmigan observed were in areas where rocks, ranging from a few inches to several feet in diameter, formed a major component of the ground cover (Figs. 6 and 7). By mid-summer, males were most frequently found within a short distance of a snowbank where their plumage seemed to blend with the browner vegetation (Fig. 8). Females with broods occupied areas with taller and greener vegetation (Fig. 9). Characteristics: The plumage of the two sexes appears readily distinguishable in the summer. The male retains a greater proportion of white in the under-body area; the venniculation of the feachers is finer in the male; and there are very few black feathers on the back and sides of the male compared with a female (Fig. 10). The wing primary feathers remained white through the summer months on both male and female. The plumage of ptarmigan chicks is mottled brown, black, gray, and white (Fig. 11). By hunting season, young ptarmigan are similar to adults in plumage coloration except that the underparts are more gray than white. Methods in Location of l?ta:rmigan: Reports stating location and numbers of ptarmigan seen had been :received from interested persons for the pastten years. These reports and information collected from interviewing federal and state personnel were used as a bases for beginning our searches for ptannigan. Du:ring the first winter, after checking areas reported to contain birds, roads were driven in mountainous areas and the willow areas were examined for tracks. The area was then traversed until birds were found. �- 179 - Fig. ii:. A view of ptarmigan habitat north of Independence Pass in late June 1965. Fig. 3. ptarmigan roost droppings are generally deposited just below a rock ouii-cropping. These droppings are one of the best indicators of ptarmigan occupancy. �- 18o - Fig. 4. Moulted white feathers are good indicators of spring occupancy by ptarmigan. Fig. 5. A male ptarmigan in spring plumage may select a large rock from where he can oversee his territo:l:iy. �- 181 - Fig. 6. Excellent ptarmigan habitat near Trail. Ridge Road in Rocky Mountain National Park. The photograph was taken from a snowbank and shows 8 males of the over 20 present. Fig. 7. There were 3 male ptarmigan trapped in late June on the north side of Independence Pass covered by this photo. Note that large rocks are dominant in this area. �- 182 - Fig. 8. Male ptarmigan were most often found just above or below a snowbank where the vegetation was still brownish, matching their plUlllage. Fig. 9. A female ptarmigan and 3 of her 6 young are attempting to hide. Hens choose areas with taller and denser vegetation than males. �Fig.10. The swnmer plumage of the male and female varies in pigmentation and vermiculation. The female is in the right foreground while the other 2 birds are males. Fig. A ptarmigan chick showing how it blends with the rock background. �- 184 - Locating and counting of ptarmigan on their SU!l!lller and fall range in the Aspen area was started by Robert R. Terrell, Wildlife Conservation Officer in that district. In 1964, Lamont Jensen, a student at the Aspen Institute of Field Biology, aided by several of the professors began a ptarmigan ecology study on Independence Pa~s. Ptarmigan are located by walking over specific areas, either singly or in crews, until birds are sighted. The birds blend so well with their habitat, stay motionless even under close approach that walking and looking must be done slowly and thoroughly. Even then, birds within ten feet of an observer are sometimes passed by. To give one example, 12 students of the Institute and I were walking about ten feet apart along the southwest side of Independence Pass. We all passed by a ptarmigan male that later was flushed by the flowing robes of a nun catching up to the group. Dogs, one trained bird dog and a family pet belonging to Wildlife Conservation Officer James Houston (Fig. 12), were used in our search for ptarmigan in the Mesa Seco area near Lake City, With these dogs, more ptarmigan, particularly broods, were seen per distance of travel than at any other time. The dogs did not seem to spook the birds to the point of wildly flushing, but they did cause the birds to move enough that they could be seen. Adult ptarmigan would allow the dogs to approach within three feet of them before moving. Then, they would run or fly a short distance, stop and freeze watchfully. Chicks flushed at greater distances and tended to fly farther. From plumage and behavior characteristics, males rather than females were caring for two o.f the broods flushed. Number of Ptarmigan: After birds start gathering in the late summer, flocks containing from 10 to 50 birds are not uncommon. The largest group personally seen was a fall flock of 46 birds in the Taylor Pass area. It is difficult to gain an idea of bird densities applicable for large areas from isolated observations,. Jensen (1964) used a long-handled net to catch 28 ptarmigan which were leg-banded with aluminum Fish and Wildlife bands (Tab:l,e 1). Most of thes.e birds were weighed, aged, sexed, and color marked with dyes. In addition, the date and place of capture was recorded along with elevation. Blood samples were collected for later analysis (Jensen 1964). In 1965, another student, Eldon Grimm, continued this study and helped with the capturing and leg-banding of seven additional ptarmigan (Figs. 13, 14, 15, 16 and 17). These birds were banded with gold-colored Game, Fish and Parks Department bands. Also, one adult female was tagged near Corona Pass. From these observations, it would appear that much of the area above timberline receives no use or only transitory use. For a square mile on top of Independence Pass, the majority of which is ecologically suitable for ptarmigan, the breeding density was a minimum of 20 birds. This same area had a fall population estimated by Lincoln Index of 42 birds in 1965. A slightly larger area, but less than two square miles, estimated by Lincoln Index in 1964 indicated a population of 117 birds, The kill both years only varied slightly, 21 in 1964 and 18 in 1965, However, the number of birds tagged in 1965 was one-fourth of 1964. Harvest: The 1965 ptarmigan hunting season opened on September 11 (Saturday) and ran through the 19th, was closed for two weeks, then reopened on October 2 �- 185 - Fig. 12. A -well-trained bird dog :improves your chance of locating ptarmigan. Here, James Houston and his dog are working t:niical habitat on l/fesa Seco near Lake City. Fig. 13. There were 2 male ptarmigan trapped in late June on the south side of Independence Pass covered by this photo. Note the short vegetation, small rocks, and the contouring sheep trails. �- 186 - Fig. J.4. Trapping success :i.B increased with 2 or more persons present to keep the ptarmigan from running. Fig. 1.$. The net used is attached to a 10-foot bamboo or wooden pole. �- 187 - Fig. 16. The ptarmigan are taken from the net and tagged with a Size 8 leg band by Eldon Grimm and his wife. Fig. 17. A closeup view of a male ptarmigan after banding in late June. This bird was killed in mid-September within 100 feet of where it was tagged. ��- 189 - Table 1. -- White-tailed ptarmigan banded on Independence Pass, Pitkin County, Colorado. Fish & Wildlife Service Age No. Band Number 1/ & Sex 1 2 3 4 5 595-27462 463 464 465 A-F 466 A-F 6 467 7 468 469 470 8 9 A-M A-F A-M A.:;M, A-F A-M Date Banded 6-20-64 6-20 6-26 6-27 7-3 7-6 7-6 7-6 471 472 473 A-M I-M I-M I-M 474 I-M 475 476 I-F 7-6 7-16 7-16 7-16 7-16 7-16 I-M 7-17 16 477 17 478 479 480 I-I!' I-M A-M A-M I-M 7-17 7-20 7-20 7-20 7-20 7-20 7-20 7-21 7-22 7-23 7-23 7-23 7-24 10 n 12 13 14 15 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1/ 481 484 485 486 487 488 I-F I-M I-F I-M A-M A-M 489 490 I-F 491 A-M Colo. Game, Fish & Parks Band Number Jesse Knodfol:.A-F I-M 1 201 A-M 202 A-M A-M 203 204 I-F A-M 205 By Lamont Jensen Weight Grams Blood Sample None R-wbt 377 365 367 416 1 390 365 381 370 360 2 3 4 5 6 366 7 358 8 348 363 370 375 9 10 350 11 382 389 381 12 13 14 370 15 380 360 16 357 17 18 370 348 3.,75 380 Color :?:.I Marking 19 20 21 Y-wt ~-lb R-wt None R-wbt Y-wbt Y-wbt Y-wt LYw-Rr LYw-Rr LYw-Rr Y-wbt Y-wbt Y-wbt Y-wbt Y-wbt Y-wbt Y~wbt Y-wbt R-wt R-wt R-wt R-wt R-wt R-wt Elevation 12,095 12,500 13,000 12,700 12,050 12,800 13,300 13,300 13,400 13,500 13,550 13,100 13,100 13,100 13,450 13,450 13,300 13,300 13,300 13,300 13,300 13,300 13,350 13,300 13,300 13,650 13,300 13,700 Tail Length 6-25-65 7-9 7-9 7-12 7-12 93 nnn. 335 365 93 nnn. 305 97 mm. 7-14 410 105 mm~ 81 mm. 7-14 415 96 mm. 11 Y-yellow; R-red; w-wings; b-back; t-tail; 1-left; Rr-red right. 12,300 12,400 12,300 12,600 12,400 12,300 12,300 �0 04 - 190 () ~ \! \ \ \ I ' '> ( '\ ') --- ! I LEGEND t( (~~·;;;;c::=i,;;;a!i!,!;i:=:,~!(2=-::'::=I'!'!-=l!!!!!!!C:::I Scale I•24000 Fig. 18 • Male ptarmigan ibreed:i.nf, terri'tm-ful!ll! ,on Independence Pass during the spriing ,or L;,65. �- 191 and continued through the 10th. The season had an aggregate bag and possession limit with blue grouse of three and six. Legal hours for hunting were from sunrise to sunset. The daylight hours for the first two days of the open season were spent on top of Independence Pass. Several light snows fell the week prior to opening day and a heavy snow fell on September 14, 15, and 16 and throughout the October season. Trips were also made to the area on September 13, 14, and 17, but no hunters were observed. From my vantage point on top of the pass, it was possible to observe and contact all hunters that entered or left the area. Hunters could be watched as they moved over the area, except for those on the southwest part, and I could see the location of each kill. On the opening Saturday, only two hunters, each with a gun-bearer, in separate parties were in the field and both groups hunted the area north of the main road. The first group walked approximately one mile by the east ridge to the top of the second bench (13,000 feet). On this bench, they flushed six birds, killing one and wounding another that they failed to retrieve. The second group went up the west ridge about the same distance, but did not see a bird. On Sunday, 12 hunters entered the area, hunted 24 hours, and killed 21 birds. Only two hunters, female, working the north side, failed to see any ptarmigan. Another single hunter on the northside flushed four birds, killing two, about in the same location as those on Saturday. The other nine hunters worked south of the road, six on the ridge, two on the east bench, and one on Mountain Boy. 2l:le six hunters on the ridge killed 15 adult males within 100 yards of territories two and four (Figure 18). Only two female ptarmigan were killed, both on the south side. An adult female and two young males were killed on the west bench while the other female was taken below the weather station on the west side. Except for one group of two hunters, all hunters walked more than one mile probably averaging between two and three miles. One young lady spent two hours walking through five inches of wet snow in low-cut tennis shoes. Only one group was known to have previously hunted ptarmigan. ilie rest were there because they had seen the Department television show on ptarmigan hunting. �- 192 Literature Cited Aldrich, J. W. 1963. Geographic orientation of American tetraonidae. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 24 (4):528-545. Choate, T. S. 1963. Habitat and population dynamics of white-tailed ptarmigan in Montana. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 27 (4):684-699. 36th Colo-Wyo. Acad. Sci., mimeo. Jensen, L. and R. A. Ryder. 1965. ptarmigan near Aspen, Colorado. Breeding behavior of the white-tailed Mimeo. Lewis, E. 1904. The nesting habits of the white-tailed ptarmigan in Colo. Birdlore 6(4):117-121. Quick, H.F. 1947. Winter food of white-tailed ptarmigan in Colorado. Condor 49:233-235, Prepared by Glenn E. Rogers Wildlife Researcher Date: April, 1966 Approved by Donald M.~Hoffman Wildlife Researcher Ferd C, Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator � https://cpw.cvlcollections.org/files/original/2f02e7abd5b7a04964cfeb51fb5aebf9.pdf ecd11fdbf26a8fd2f487b4703cd64cca PDF Text Text July, 1966 - 1- JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO ------------------------------- Project No. W-10l-R-B Work Plan No. 1 Title of Job: Period Covered: Personnel: Game Range Investigations Job No. 1 Mesa Verde Clip Plot Study April 1, 1965 through March 31, 1966 Harold R. Shepherd ABSTRACT The Mesa Verde Clip Plot Study is a long-term clipping experiment simulating different intensities of game use on five important species of browse plants. Objective of the study is to learn how the yearly removal of certain percentages of the current annual growth stems and of old stems affects the plants. Field work, data compilation, analysis, graphs, and tables have been completed, and a portion of the first draft of a final report has been written. All plot fences have been removed. The completion and publication of a final report to be entitled "Effects of Variable Clipping on Key Browse Species in Southwestern Colorado" is the only work remaining to be done on the study. This is sch~duled for the next project segment. ��- 3 MESA VERDE CLIP PLOT STUDY Harold R. Shepherd Introduction For sound winter game range management it is necessary to know the percentage of current annual growth game may be permitted to remove yearly from browse plants without injuring them. Also, it is important to know the effect of different intensities of use on the amount of forage produced. The Mesa Verde Clip Plot Study is a long-term clipping experiment simulating different intensities of game use on the important species of browse plants: big sageb~ush, antelope bitterbrush, mountain mahogany, serviceberry, and Gambel oak. The purpose of the study is to attempt to learn how the yearly removal of certain percentages of the current annual growth stems and of old stems affects the plants and their forage production. Procedure and Findings Previous Segments. -- Field work outlined in previous segments has been accomplished. Field data were compiled and chi-square, correlation, and regression analyses made of the data. An outline for a final report was made and approved, graphs and tables were made in final form, and a first draft of the IIIntroduction","Description of Study Area", and "Methods" was prepared. Fences surrounding some of the plots were torn down and salvaged. Current Segment. -- During the 1965-66 segment, all remaining plot fences were removed and salvaged. I assumed the duties of Project Leader and moved from Mancos to Fort Collins. Because of delays occasioned by change of headquarters, and the increased work and responsibilities of Project Leader, I was unable to finish writing the final report as planned. The work remaining to be done on the final report includes making comparisons and interpretations of data and writing the "Results" section. The completed first draft will be submitted to the Editorial Committee for comments and suggestions. A final draft will then be prepared, incorporating any suggested revisions, and the manuscript will be submitted for publication. Prepared by: Harold R. Shepherd Wildlife Researcher Date: July, 1966 Approved by: Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator ��July, 1966 - 5 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORA.DO Project No. W-10l-R-S Work Plan No. 1 Title of Job: Game Range Investigations Job No. 4 Paddock Studies on Effects of V::rying Intensities of Deer Use Period Covered: April 1, 1965 to March 31, 1966 Personnel: William T. McKean, Donald G. Smith, John F. Corey, Julius J. Klein, Nelson Cain, Michael L. Head, Donald E. Speers, Roger C. Randolph, Kenneth C. Dillinger, Robert B. White, Daniel D. Sorensen, Jerry Burt King, Wayne E. Tinder, and Harold R. Shepherd, Project Leader ABSTRACT Paddock stocking dates varied in 1966 due to poor trapping condition, but each paddock ultimately received its proper stocking. Five deer, including one fawn, were obtained from Sapinero. The average weight loss ranged from S.O pounds in Paddock Six, the lightest used paddock, to 15.4 pounds in Paddock One, the heaviest used paddock. Compilation of the blood analysis data is being delayed until completion of the study. Utilization of the key browse species, based on stem length measurements, during the 1964 and 1965 winter stocking periods showed a general decrease with decreased stocking. Bitterbrush had the highest utilization in 1964. Only serviceberry was measured in 1965, due to a deficient labor force. Utilization of this plant decreased in all paddocks in 1965 from 1964 levels. A partial analysis of the correlation between tagged stems and the total bush for 1963-64 for serviceberry showed homogeneity among directions. The correlation values ranged from r= .714 for the south branch to r= .762 for the north branch. The 1965 ocular estimates, not previously reported, show the continued decreaSing utilization trend from heavy to lightly - stocked paddocks for key species, as well as for pinon pine. Use of the key species was lighter than in 1964. �-6 - Ocular estimates of utilization made during the spring of 1966 revealed continued high use of mountain mahogany in all paddocks, extremely light use of pinon pine, and a compensating increased use..of bitterbrush. Changes in availability, due to snow and changes in personnel making the observations, probably account for the variations. statistical analyses were completed on the stem length measurement data for the 1963 fall production of the three key browse species. Highly significant differences were found between paddocks for both bitterbrush and mountain mahogany, in contrast with results for 1962. Production of all forage types, excluding annual grasses and weeds, ranged from 114.7 pounds per acre to 322.0 pounds (dry weight). Serviceberry and pinon pine accounted for about two thirds of the total browse production. A complete count of pellet groups was made in 1966; there was an average of 11.5 groups per deer per day, with less variability between paddocks then previously, and a range from 11.1 to 12.3 groups per deer per day. Rumen contents from five deer which died in the paddocks were analysed; these continued to show high percentages of pinon pine, in spite of less severe winter conditions. �-7 PADDOCK STUDIES ON EFFECTS OF VARYING INTENSITIES OF DEER USE William T. McKean In this fourth year of treatment in the paddocks the various activities were carried out as planned. Some difficulty was experienced in stocking the paddocks concurrently because of a shortage of deer, but the desired deerdays-use was ultimately accomplished in each. Analysis of the data is progressing more satisfactorily with the availability of qualified student personnel. Paddocks stocked at 30 deer-days per acre, or heavier, show general vegetative deterioration as contracted with those stocked at 20 deer-days per acre or less. Vegetation differences between individual paddocks within these groups are difficult to detect by casual observation. One more year of stocking remains in this project if the original plan is followed. OBJECTIVES Long Range Objectives 1. To determine the total effect of deer on winter range under varied intensities of use, on key species, associated plant species, production and utilization, age and condition class, vigor, reproduction, trampling, and ecological development. 2. To determine the effect of these stocking rates upon the physiological condition of the deer. �- 8 - Objectives for 1. To obtain stem length measurements mine changes in production and utilization 2. To obtain ocular estimates species and herbaceous species. 3. To determine changing conditions 1965-66 on key browse species and deterof those species. of production the physiological within the various and use of the other browse effects on the stocked deer caused by paddocks. 4. To obtain data on the effects of different stocking rates on the number of pellet groups deposited per deer-day and to compare calculated deerdays per acre with actual use. 5. To compile, evaluate, and analyze data obtained. TECENIQUES 1. The six paddocks were maintained and stocked with adult mule deer, as described in the first segment of the P.S.& E. 2. Production and utilization length measurements. of key browse species was obtained by stem- 3. utilization of other browse species was determined by ocular estimate using the paced transect and point observation system of Reid and Pickford, previously described. 4. Production of herbaceous vegetation and total browse was obtained by ocular estimate in milacre plots following the method of Pechanec and Pickford. 5. Weights of deer before and after stocking, ing, and notes on general condition were obtained. 6. Total pellet were removed. blood samples after stock- counts were again made in each paddock 7. Stem length measurements were analysed correlation tests. Other counts and estimates metic and tabulations. after the deer by analysis of variance and were evaluated by simple arith- FINDINGS Paddock Stocking Because of poor trapping conditions during the winter of 1965-66, each paddock was stocked as sufficient deer became available; this resulted in d.issimilar stocking and. removal dates for most paddocks. Consequently, some deer were kept in the holding pen for varying periods of time and fed alfalfa. Five deer, including one fawn, were obtained from Sapinero to fulfill the stocking requirements. Entry dates varied from February 15 to February 27, �- 9 and removal dates from March 7 to March 19 (Table 1). Two deer died in Paddock Three and were replaced to maintain the desired stocking rate. All paddocks ultimately received their proper deer-days use. All deer were weighed before and after being placed in the paddocks. The average weight loss was 15.4 Ibs., 14.0 Ibs., 11.0 Ibs., 22.0 Ibs., and 8.0 Ibs. for Paddocks One, Two, Three, Five, and Six, respectively. The significance of these figures is reduced by the small sample sizes (one to five) and variability contributed by differences in sex and age of the animals. Blood samples were obtained by Robert E. Keiss at the time deer were removed from the paddocks. Further compilation of these data are being delayed Qntil completion of the study. Rectal temperatures were not taken this year. utilization Stem-Length Measurements Stem length measurements of total annual growth produced were made on each of ten plants of each key species (mountain mahogany, bitterbrush, and serviceberry) in each paddock prior to the winter stocking period. Measurements were repeated on the same bushes after deer were removed. Results of this procedure for 1963-64 and 1964-65 are shown in Table 2. The 1965-66 data have yet to be analyzed. The decreasing degree of utilization with decreased stocking is evident for most species. In 1964, bitterbrush was utilized the most and mountain mahogany the least. This is the reverse of what happened in 1963; then mountain mahogany received the greatest utilization. The reason for this difference is probably partially related to production and availability. Serviceberry was utilized less in 1965 than in 1964 in all paddocks. Presumably, thls occurred because the extremely deep snow ln 1965 completely covered up greater portions of the bushes than in 1964. The decreased utilization was especially noticeable in the "remainder" portions of the bushes (55.8 percent in 1964 contrasted with 14.8 percent in 1965). Tagged Stems Versus Total Bush, 1963-64 The reasons and procedures for this portion of the study are explained in Part Two of the Game Research Report for July, 1965. The statistical analysis of the 1963-64 data is still only partially complete. Table 3 give the simple correlations for each directional branch with the total bush for serviceberry. The production of mountain mahogany and bitterbrush was so poor in 1963 that it did not afford data warranting statistical analysis, particularly on a single-branch directional basis. The correlations for serviceberry in 1964 are considerably higher than those for the previous year. A.lso, the results are more homogeneous than before, indicating that utilization sampled .from one side of a bush is a-bout as accurate asfr,omanyother. �Table 1 -- Paddock stocking record, 1966. Paddock Number Sex Tag Numbers 1 1 1 1 1 1 Doe Doe Doe Doe Buck Doe L71 L72 A1913 A1914 L705 L706 no tags L282 L283 L542 L543 132 135 132 138 145 116 2 2 2 2 Doe Doe Doe Buck L324 A2947 L362 A2628 L325 A2948 L363 A2629 3 ,~/ 3 3 3 3 Buck Buck Buck Buck Doe A2636 A2638 A2644 L727 A21 A2637 A2639 A2645 L728 A22 5 5 Buck Buck A2640 A2642 6 6 Doe Buck L672 L725 Weight Before After Date Blood Sample Before After In Out 115 120 125 125 120 115 2-15 2-15 2-15 2-15 2-15 2-15 3-7 3-7 3-7 3-7 3-7 3-7 no no no no no no yes yes yes yes yes yes 137 161 137 146 125 145 123 132 2-18 2-18 2-18 2-18 3-10 3.-10 3-10 3-10 no no no no yes yes yes yes 169 158 III - Remarks Died after release Last scale reading in doubt Died after release I-' - - 2-27 2-27 2-27 3-9 3-9 A2641 A2643 194 179 177 152 2-27 2-27 3-19 3-19 no no yes yes L673 L726. 135 157 131 145 2-15 2-15 3-7 3-7 yes yes yes yes 69 - 3-18 3-11 2-27 3-18 3-18 no no no no no no no Sapinero deer Sapinero deer, died 3-11-66 Sapinero deer, died 2-27-66 Replaced dead deer Replaced dead deer Sapinero deer Sapinero deer yes - ========================================================================================================== 1/ Two deer out of Paddock Two were placed in Paddock Three on March 15, 1966, to catch up on a deficiency in total deer days. No records were kept for these two deer. 0 �- 11 - Table 2 -- Average percent utilization of key browse species in the paddocks during the winters of 1964 and 1965 as determined by stem ,length measurements. Year Species 1 2 1964 Mtn. mahogany Bitterbrush Serviceberry 60·3 88.7 61.6 Average 75.8 Mtn. mahogany 2/ Bitterbrush 2/Serviceberry- Paddock Number ~/ 3 5 6 7 37·7 62.4 65.1 40·7 48.6 42.8 36.3 52.2 41.1 23.6 53 ·9 28.4 27·2 34.2 65.0 63.3 43·8 45.3 30.1 58·5 18.8 21.8 22·7 31.9 =========~================================================================ .~/Deer-days use per acre by paddock are: 1-60, 2-40, 3-30, 5-20, 6-10. Paddock Four is a fenced control, and Seven an unfenced control ~/ No measurements were made on these species because of a shortage of labor. Table 3 -- Correlation of utilization on tagged stems versus utilization on total bush for serviceberry, 1963-64. Independent Variable (tagged stems) East West North South Correlation With Dependent Variable (tota 1 bush) .747 ·737 .762 .714 ========================================================================== .ocular Estimates Spring of 1965 and 1966 Ocular estimates of browse utilization were made in 1965 and 1966. were obtained along paced transects as in previous years. Data The main difference noted in 1965 as compared with 1964 is the lighter use made the latter year of the key species and the slightly higher use of pinon pine (Table 4). The decreasing utilization trend, from the heavy to the light-use paddocks, is especially evident in the combined key species average. �- 12The most noticeable deviation in 1966 is the extremely light use of pinon pine and juniper (Table 5). This may partially be a result of scant snow cover present in 1966. Use of the low-growing bitterbrush increased greatly in three of the paddocks, suggesting greater availability. However, observer difference is likewise a factor here. This is the first year that a different crew was used on this job. A final factor in this drop could also be the operation of chance in the random-paced transects. Browse Production stem-Length Measurement Data for Fall Production, 1963 . A one-way analysis of variance was run an the 1963 average stem length data of the three key browse species. Highly significant differences between paddocks resulted for both bitterbrush and mountain mahogany (Table 6). These results differ from those of a similar analysis made on the 1962 stem length data which showed no significant difference for any species. A statistical analysis of the 1964 and 1965 stem length data has yet to be made, as well as data on spur counts. Pellet Counts -- Paddocks A.llpellet groups on the inside and outside acres of each paddock were counted and sprayed with paint after all deer had been removed. Counting conditions were good. The variability in the average number of pellet groups deposited per deer per day in each paddock was not as great as in previous years. Table 9 shows that the range this year was from 11.1 to 12.3 groups per day. The overall average of 11.5 groups per day is the third highest average recorded any of the four years. The downward trend in average groups per deer per day from 1963 (14.9) is still continuing: 1964-10.8, 1965-10.8, 1966-11.5. Rumen Content Analysis, 1964 and 1966 The rumen contents of five deer that died during their confinement in the paddocks were analysed. The results are presented in Table 10. Pinon pine was heavily used in 1966, but it was not as heavily used as in previous years. The snow cover in 1966 waS lighter than in any previous year and may have had some influence on this. Paddocks One, Two, and Three are the most heavily stocked. Consequently, malnutrition was one of the main contributing causes of death in each of thes~ paddocks. Rodent Control Rodent control was continued by means of strychnine water placed in and around the paddock system during the dry summer months. No attempt was made to evaluate its effect. �- 13 Table 4 -- Percent utilization of all browse species in the paddocks as determined by ocular estimate, spring, 1965. ..Paddock Number J:..! 6 1 2 Species 3 5 7 11.3 Mahogany 0.0 74.4 18.3 2·5 35·0 (0.3) 17.6 17·3 Pinon Pine Juniper 5·0 0.0 0.0 (7·7) 56·5 50.0 Average Key Species Average Serviceberry Bitterbrush Big Sagebrush Snowberry 2.2 0.0 2.4 (6.3) 35·0 5·0 22.2 (1.6) 0.0 0.0 0.0 (7.4) 35.4 90.0 0.0 85·0 5·9 (3.2) 27.4 45.0 29·1 13·8 22·7 25·0 3·9 13·2 32·3 18.2 11.2 4.0 4.8 12.2 9·4 9·1 (0.2) 5·3 0.0 (0.2) 5·0 18.2 0.0 0.0 1.9 (3.3) 14.6 0.0 ========================================================================== () !/ Indicates use by rodents of the species immediately above. Deer-days use per paddock are: 1-60, 2-40,3-30, 5-20, 6-10. Four is a fenced control, and Seven an unfenced control Paddock Table 5 -- Percent utilization of all browse species in the paddocks as determined by ocular estimate, spring, 1966. Paddock Number J:..! Species 1 2 6 3 5 7 'Mahogany 60.8 41.7 40.0 48.8 56.5 15·0 1.5 1.5 9.6 1.9 Serviceberry 14.0 9.6 Bitterbrush Big sagebrusy Snowberry (2.6) 16.0 0.2 (0.2) 1.3 Pinon Pine .Iun Lpe.r Oregon Grape 0.0 Little RabbitbrushO.O Average 12.4 Key Species Average 19·3 2.0 1.0 (0.6) 4.2 1.7 0.0 (0.1) 72·9 50.0 0·9 «1.3) ,0.0 0.0 0.0 14.8 15·3 36.0 50.0 0.4 (0.2) 0.0 0.0 0.0 5·5 (1.2) 2.1 0.0 (0.8) 1.7 0.0 0.0 3·1 24.1 (0.3) 0.0 2·5 0·5 (0.7) 20.0 2.1 3.6 ========================================================================== ( ) ,!/ Indicates use by rodents of the species immediately above. Deer-days use per paddock are: 1-60, 2-40, 3-30, 5-30, 6-10. Four is a fenced control, and Seven an unfenced control. Paddock �- 14 - Table 6 -- One-way analysis of variance of average stem lengths of key browse species in the paddocks, 1963. Species Bitterbrush Source Total Mean Corrected total Treatments Residual Paddock No. 1 2 3 5 6 7 Mtn. mahogany Total Mean Corrected total Treatments Residual Paddock No. 1 2 3 5 6 7 Serviceberry Total Mean Corrected total Treatments Residual Paddock No. 1 2 3 5 6 7 SS 49997.87410 28435.53860 21562.33550 8478.11083 13084.22467 Paddock Mean 47.16800 21·34200 19.78700 17·51100 10.80700 14.00400 17567.58970 9910.69128 7656.89842 1878.19695 5778.70147 Paddock Mean 20.17300 16.60200 5.67300 11·93400 16.99400 5.73700 25134·77610 22441.74920 2693.02690 282.39625 2410.63065 Paddock Mean 22.17500 18.41400 18.68300 20.46300 20.87500 15.42900 DF MS F 60 1 59 5 1695.62217 54 242.30046 6.99801** No. of Bushes (N) 10 10 10 10 10 10 60 1 59 5 54 275.63939 107.01299 3·51022** No. of Bushes (N) 10 10 10 10 10 10 60 1 59 5 54 56.47925 44.64131 1.26518 No. of Bushes (N) 10 10 10 10 10 10 ============================================================================ ** Highly significant �- 15 - Table 7 -- Estimated vegetation production in pounds per acre, dry weight, in the paddocks, 1965 u. Vegetation Class Paddock Number ,~! 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Browse Grass Weeds 257.8 19·3 36.6 248.5 12.6 60.9 190.8 29·3 36.8 41.2 45·1 28.4 138.4 61.1 37.8 146.6 15.6 25·2 231·5 57·9 18.1 Totals 313·7 322.0 256·9 114.7 237·3 187.4 307·5 ============================================================================ ~!Annual grasses and weeds are excluded. ,~! Deer-days use per paddock are: 1-60, 2-40, 3-30, 5-20, 6-10. Paddock Four is a fenced control, and Seven an unfenced control. Table 8 -- Estimated browse production in pounds per acre, dry weight, in the paddocks, 1965. Paddock Number ~ Species 1 2 3, Mtn. mahogany Serviceberry Bitterbrush Snowberry Pinon pine ?:...! Oregon grape Juniper Big sagebrush 9·0 142.0 39·9 38.4 1.5 13·9 144.0 1.8 9·0 7·5 82.0 2.6 29·8 58.7 4.2 4.'9 26.0 78·5 2.0 0·3 4 20·5 16.8 0.8 2.6 '0.5 5 6 3·7 58.6 17.4 19·4 0.2 19·2 19·9 58.2 22·5 22·9 24.0 19·0 1.1 7 32.8 30.4 31.7 132.0 Trace 4.6 41.2 138.4 257.8 190.8 146.6 248·5 231·5 ============================~=============================================== ~!Deer-days use per paddock are: 1-60, 2-40, 3-30, 5-20, 6-10. Paddock Totals Four is a fenced control, and Seven an unfenced control. ~!All available needles are included in the production figures along with the available current annual growth. �- 16 Table 9. Results of total pellet group counts on the inside and outside acre of the paddocks, 1966. Total Calculated Paddock Deer-Days No. Pellet Groups ~G~r~o~u~p~s~P~e~r~D~e~e~r~P~e~r~D~a~y_ Deer-Days No. Per Acre In Out Total In Out Mean Per Acre 1 (2 acres) 60 773 701 1,474 12.9 11.7 12.3 56.7 17 49.1 11 2 (2 acres) 40 554 357 911 13.9 8~9 11.4 35.0 30.4 743 1./ 3 (2 acres) 27~ 398 345 4 Fenced control 11.1 20 443 17.0 14.8 5 (2 acres) 198 245 12.3 9.9 11.1 6 (4 acres) 10 107 335 442 10.7 11.2 8.5 7.4 60 60 7 Unfenced 4.6 4.0 control 1/ Calculated using 13 pellet groups per deer per day. 1/ Calculated using 15 pellet groups per deer per day. 1./ No calculations were made for Paddock Three because of unavoidable inconsistencies in the stocking rate and the use of one fawn. Table 10. Rumen contents of five mule deer from Paddocks One, Two, and Three, 1964 and 1966. Tag Number No. Tags Paddock No. 1 Year Stocked 1964 Species Pinon pine Serviceberry Mtn. mahogany Utah juniper Snowberry Oregon grape Grass (unidentified) Weed (unidentified) L132 1 1964 72 15 1 10 1 1 Prepared by: William T. McKean Wildlife Researcher Date: July, 1966 L71 A2638 A2947 1 3 2 1966 1966 1966 Percent Composition 80 48 90 10 50 5 1 1 2 6 1 1 2 1 1 1 Approved by: 65 20 1 1 10 2 1 Harold R. Shepherd Project Leader Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief Ferd C. K1einschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �July, 1966 - 17 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO Project No. W-10l-R-8 Work Plan No. 2 Title of Job: Period Covered: Game Range Investigations Job No. 1 Little Hills Grazing Study April 1, 1965 to M3.rch31, 1966 Personnel: William T. McKean, Donald G. Smith, John F. Corey, Julius J. Klein, Nelson Cain, Michael L. Head, Donald E. Speers, Roger C. Randolph, Kenneth C. Dillinger, Robert B. White, Daniel D. Sorensen, Jerry Burt King, Wayne E. Tinder, and Harold R. Shepherd, Project Leader ABSTRACT The desired livestock stocking for .1965 was obtained for both sheep and cattle in both spring and fall, but losses of sheep to predators delayed the stocking schedule about ten days in the spring and caused greater expense in handling them. Favorable range conditions resulted in at least moderate weight gains in all pastures, except in the fall. Over-hunting left a very small local winter population of deer. This and a mild, open winter combined to depress the total catch of deer to only 70 head, including re-catches from previous years. As a result, no deer were stocked in Pasture Four, and Pastures Three and Six were under-stocked. Belated efforts to catch and transport deer from other areas were unsuccessful. Removal of deer from the pastures was purposely delayed; but when begun, it was accomplished without difficulty. A.new summary of results of deer trapping and tagging at Little Hills Station from 1948 through 1965 was made. A total of 1,728 deer have been tagged, not counting re-catches from previous years or repeats within any one year. Of these, 679 were bucks and 1,046 were does; fawns numbered 799 and mature deer 926. Hunters reported killing 194 tagged deer, or 11·5 percent of the total number tagged. Information received from hunters about where they shot tagged deer shows that some deer were shot where they were tagged, while other had traveled as far as 92 miles from the tagging site. The average distance deer haq.traveled from the tagging site was 15 miles. About 63 percent of the deer had been killed within 15 miles of the Station. Since 1960, the distances that ribbon-marked deer have been seen from the tagging sites during spring, summer, and early fall have averaged 35 air miles. Most of these deer were seen north and east of Meeker. �- 18 - Estimates of forage utilization by deer in the deer pastures, during the winter of 1964-65, averaged slightly higher than in previous years for all pastures. The increased use resulted from the severe conditions that winter. A soil, survey of the ten pastures, comprlslng 1,307.7 acres, was completed during the summer of 1965. Seventeen soil types were described, mapped, and acreages of each p Iarrlme'te red by pasture. Field work was supervised by Mr. J. L. Nielsen, soil scientist for the Soil Conservation Service, with assistance from the project personnel: Descriptions of soils.one and fifteen are included in this report, together with the accompanying soil test performed by the C. S. U. Soils L3.boratory. An analysis of variance to compare a number of vegetative characteristics between pastures and between the years 1957 and 1962 has been completed by Don G. Smith. Tables have been ~repared to depict changes in browse density for: all species, k~yspecies, and individual species. Comparable tables are at hand to show d;ifferences in number of browse plants and in number of seedlings and young plants. An initial attempt to show differences in the number of browse plants, young plants, and seedlings caused by :thE!grazing of cattle, sheep, and deer is presented. Results are somewhat erratic, but it is hoped that more time spent in analysis and interpretation of data will make more sense of it. Of browse seedlings occurring within plots in 1957, 67 percent were single, while by 1962 the percent single plants had been reduced to 60 percent. The amount of browse reproduction was significantly higher in deer pastures than in sheep pastures. But the number of key browse species of all ages was lowest in deer pastur-es., In 1962, considering single browse seedlings versus multiple seedlings,all pastures except Pasture One had more single seedlings, with the average being 89.5 percent single versus 10·5 percent multiple. Large diff~rences between years in the origin of serviceberry reproductions were found. In 1957, 98 percent of them were from root sprouts versus only 30.6 percent in 1962. Observer bias is suspected to have caused the difference. With respect to age classes of browse plants, large pasture differences were found. Many could not be explained on the basis of pasture stocking. Over-all, an increase in older age classes and a decrease in younger classes W3S evident. Many other tests are needed on these data, including the stratification by soil types. A greater variety and number of public contacts was afforded this year than previously to explain the project work. �-19 - LITTLE HILLS GRAZING STUDY William T. McKean The pasture stocking with livestock and deer was continued in this seventeenth year of the study. In the hope of better interpretion of the field data, a soil survey of the pastures was accomplished through the cooperation of the Soil Conservation Service. This work included soil description, maps, 3nd soil tests. In the continued absence of an assistant biologist, no appreciable analysis of the older data was possible. However, considerable progress was made in analysis of the 1957-1962 line transect data by Donald G. Smith who was temporarily assigned to the project. OBJECTIVES 1. To determine the amounts and kinds of forage used by cattle, sheep, and deer, in enclosures and under various intensities of grazing. 2. To measure and record the plant succession occurring under these treatments. 3. To analyze, interpret and publish results of this study. TECHNIQUES 1. The series of pastures were maintained as described in the first segment of the P. S. & E. for W-I01-R, and. as modified in the seventh segment, which reduced stocking rates in the "heavy use" pastures. 2. The soil analysis was performed as described in the eighth segment of the PoS.& E. for W-IOI-R. No other field work on vegetative changes was done during this segment, except that a few photos were taken of meter quadrats and general views for pasture comparisons. 3. An analysis of variance, using orthogonal comparisons, was completed for the pasture line transect data. This analysis was designed to indicate changes in vegetative characteristics between the years 1957 and 1962. 4. Correlation tests to relate numbers of browse plants occurring in plots to browse reproduction were begun but not completed for all pastures. �- 20 - FDIDINGS Pasture Stocking of Livestock (1965) Spring in 1965 arrived late. Consequently, stocking of pastures was delayed eLeven days until May 11. Seven head of sheep were killed by predators during the spring period. This delayed completion of the over-all stocking period until July 6, because the desired sheep days had to be obtained with fewer animals. The harassment of the sheep by predators finally necessitated hiring a special laborer to try to protect the remaining sheep and secure a better distribution of grazing over each pasture. Fall grazing was accomplished on schedule and without difficulty (Table 1). Cattle On May 10, in taking initial weights of the wild, two-year-old heifers, one animal escaped. Rather than del{3.ythe stocking schedule until it could be caught, only eleven head were used in the first pasture. It was caught, but its escape delayed the over-all spring schedule by one day. Other than this, the spring and fall stocking proceeded on schedule -- May 10 to June 14, and October 1 to November 4. Weights All stock weights were obtained on schedule. The greater than normal amount of food in all pastures, resulting from abundant moisture, produced at least moderate weight gains in almost all pastures, regardless of stocking (Table 2). As usual, most weight losses occurred in the fall. It is believed that the availability of water for the cattle may be affecting these wei.ghts somewhat. Water is present, of course, but occasionally the cattle have trouble finding it because of the rough terrain. �- 21 - Pasture Stocking - Deer (1965-66) Deer trapping started on about October 23,1965, with the setting of the group traps adjacent to Pastures Seven and Three. Virtually no deer had entered Dry Fork at this time in spite of very heavy hunting all around the closed area. It was obvious that the local deer population was at an all-time low. The weather was mild but moist enough that the few deer that were around were not attracted to the water and green feed in the group'trap areas. Because of these condi t.Lons , none were caught until November 12. From this date on, only one or two deer per day, often none, were taken. The entire winter was milder than usual. By mid~December, it was obvious that not nearly enough deer would be caught at Little Hills Station to stock the pastures and paddocks. Accordingly, an effort was made to secure deer from other parts of the state. Two men spent almost three weeks in preparation, travel, and operating box traps at Mesa Verde National Park, without success. In other effort, one man spent a week or more on the state~.ownedBasalt property with a group trap constructed by the Northwest Region. One deer was caught. Finally, a belated assist from personnel of ~roject W-38-R at Sapinero Management Area resulted in five deer being delivered to Little Hills Station on February 26, 1966. This was quite probably the worst trapping year in the 19 years of project work. As a result of ,this unfortunate situation, the pasture stocking in all pastures, except Pastures Seven and Five, was much below the desired amount (Table 3). No deer were put into Pasture Four. Ten fawns were used in Pasture Six -- contrary to accepted plan. Nine deer were driven out of Pasture Five into Pasture Six on March 8 to help catch up on deer days in the latter. Five deer from the paddock study were stocked in Pasture Seven. All of this activity required many extra rr~n-hours of work by the Station crew. Forty-seven new deer were caught of which 25 were put in the pastures (Table 4). Eleven of these deer were put in the paddocks, and eleven others were reLeased , In addition to the new deer captured, 23 recatches of deer from previous years were made. Of these, 16 were placed in the experimental pastures, and seven were placed in the paddocks. None were released.. The five deer from Sapinero were first used in the paddocks; two died in the paddocks, and the remaining three were put into Pasture Seven. They are not included in the 25 listed as stocked in Table 4. 1ney are included in the totals shown in Tables 1 and 3. In a sample of 57 deer, group traps caught only 25 (43.9 percent), while box traps took 32 (56.1 percent). No deer were caught in the wing traps. �Table 1 -- Summary of stocking records for livestock grazing 1965, and deer grazing 1965-66. Pasture Animal Stocked Removed Stocked Removed Acres ,-- Season Number Head Total Days AUM A/AUM 1 Sheep June 22 July 6 Oct. 7 Oct. 17 76.37 Spring Fall Season 27 to 35 35 70 410 350 760 13·7 11.7 25.3 5·5 6.5 3·0 2 Cattle May 22 June 1 Oct. 25 Nov. 4 166.25 Spring Fall Season 12 12 24 120 120 240 4.0 4.0 8.0 41.6 41.6 20.8 3 Cattle May 10 May 21 Oct. 15 Oct. 25 161.81 Spring Fall Season 11 12 23 121 120 241 4.0 4.0 8.0 40.4 40.4 20.2 Winter 14 1,918 63.9 2·5 Deer 4 Deer 5 Sheep Nov.12-Jan. 7 Apr.28-May 10 May 11 May 24 -- None None 143.64 Winter None 0 0.0 0.0 Oct. 18 Oct. 31 85·42 Spring Fall Season 30 to 35 35 70 383 455 838 12·7 15.1 27·8 6.7 5.6 3·1 Winter 12 1,311 43.7 2.0 Deer Nov.12-Nov.22 Mar.8-May 5 6 Deer Nov.23-Mar.8 Apr.18-May: 5 98·93 Winter 10 to 19 832 27·7 3.6 7 Deer Nov.l-Mar.19 Apr.19-May 12 90.67 Winter 8 to 15 890 29·7 3·1 8 Cows June 2 June 14 Oct. 1 Oct. 14 205·43 Spring Fall Season 12 12 24 150 162 312 5·0 5.4 10.4 41.1 38.0 19.8 9 Sheep May 25 June 21 Nov. 1 Nov. 22 155·55 Spring Fall Season 30 35 65 795 735 1,530 26·5 24.5 51.0 5·9 6.3 3·1 =================~=======~============================================================================== [\) ro �- 23 Table 2 -- Seasonal weight gains and losses of livestock by pasture, 1965 ..:!:.! Fall Average Weight Spring Average Weight Before After Pounds Gain or Loss 1 122.4 116.6 - 5.8 +16.1 5 116.6 118.4 + 2.2 + 0.1 9 118.4 120.7 + 2·3 823.6 843.3 +19·7 Pounds Gain or Loss Pasture Number Pasture Number Before After 5 (35 head) 105·0 (29 head) 111.6 + 6.6 9 (29 head) 111.6 (30 head) 127·7 1 (30 head) 127·7 (27 head) 127·8 (11 head) 3 (11 head) 637 ·3 617·7 -19.6 8 2 (12 head) 610.4 (12 head) 634.2 +23.8 3 Sheep ·(35) Catt.le (12) (12 head) (12 head) 843.3 840.0 2 - 3·3 +42·9 677.1 834.2 ==========================================================================.==== 8 .~!Arranged by pasture in the order .Ln which they were stocked. Table 3 Deer stocking in pastures, 1965-66. Pasture No. Calculated Deer Days Desired Approximate Deer Days Achieved 3 4 5 6 7 2,427 2,873 1,281 1,484 907 1,918 Deviation Over Under 509 2,873 none 1,311 832 890 30 =============================================================================== 652 17 �-24 - Table 4 -- Sex and age groups of deer trapped at Little Hills Station, 1965-66. Bucks Fn Ylg Mat Total Does Fn Ylg Mat Total Total Fn Ylg Mat Total None None None Untagged deer put into pastures Tagged deer put into pastures 6 Tagged deer released 9 1 Tagged deer put into paddocks Recatches 15 1 1 1 3 10 4 1 10 1 3 3 7 2 23 4 5 11 15 10 1 10 8 8 19 19 24 19 Total bucks (yearling and adult ) 8 17.0% Total does (yearling and adult) 19 40.4% Total fawns 20 ,42.6% 47 100.0% 20 1 1 1 1 14 25 1 11 11 11 26 21 47 ~I 23 ============================================================================ ,~I Does not include five deer from Sapinero used in paddocks and pastures. Deer Removals, 1966 Because almost all pastures were under-stocked, it was necessary to delay removals until later than usual, except in Pasture Five. The total chore was not so difficult because there were fewer deer involved and because of unplanned assistance from ten inmates from the new neighboring Reformatory Honor Camp. Further help was provided by Colorado State University senior students who drove almost all deer from Pasture Three on April 28. Ten or twelve deer were hauled to the Research Center for use in Project W-38-R. Winter losses in the pastures were only two: Pastures Five and Six. one animal each in �- 25 Deer Trapping and Tagging Deer have been trapped and tagged at Little Hills Experiment Station for the past 18 years. Through this program we are gaining knowledge concerning the migration of the White River deer herd. Trapping was originally started to obtain deer for stocking the experimental p3stures and, later, the paddocks. Excess deer were tagged and released. To date, 1,728 deer have been ear tagged at Little Hills (Table 5). Table 5 -- Number of Deer trapped and ear tagged at Little Hills Experiment Station, 1948-1966. y Year Number Trapped Bucks Does Fawns Mature 19 22 19 3 1948-49 3 44 90 38 96 134 1949-50 20 11 23 32 43 1950-51 68 24 53 1951-52 92 39 15 20 13 5 1952-53 7 15 17 13 19 2 1953-54 3 2/ 26 18 43 6235 1954-55 40 34 29 69 35 1955-56 66 68 81 83 149 1956-57 14 12 6 20 26 1957-58 86 66 152 77 75 1958-59 136 63 73 1959-60 77 59 86 183 85 98 1960-61 97 46 58 70 1961-62 34 104 3/ 47 47 58 36 1962-63 95 86 117 127 96 1963-64 213 / 98 50 1964-65 93 55 149~/ 24 20 47 _ 27 23 1956-66 =====~:======================================================~============= 1,046 926 Totals 1,728 679 799 ========================================================================== 1/ Does not include recatches. 2/ Includes one deer unspecified as to sex and age. '"3/ Includes one fawn unspecified as to sex. '"il/ Does not include three deer trapped at Sapinero and released at Li.t t.Le Hills. Since 1952, hunters have returned 194 tags for an 11.5 percent return (Table 6). Tag return distances range from 0 to 92 miles, the average being 15 miles. About 63 percent of the returns came from within 15 miles of the Station (Fig. 1). Most of those beyond this distance (30 percent) came from an easterly direction; two-thirds originating north of the North Fork of the Wnite River, and one-third south of the river. Only 5 percent came from the south, 2 percent from the west, and none from the north. �- 26 - N ,, ,, ,, , ,/ ,, / 2% / IF ""il. ""JiiJs Little. HII~ / / / / / / / / / / /9% / t No~t;' / / !-lills / / 14% Lit.tle / -frDM / / / , W / 0% / Fa"./< 24% Wh;te Rive". / 1$% $% 5 ,, E (2 % BeYOnd) Wh;~e.R,'"e; ~ ,, 9% ,, ,, ,, Toto/ Retvrl1!.= 194- Figure 1. -- Directional percentages of deer hunter tag returns at Little Hills Experiment Station, 1952-1965. �- 27 starting with the 1960-61 trapping season, colored ribbons made of nylon impregnated vinyl were used along with the metal eartags in an effort to learn more about the summer distribution of the deer through sight records. Since that time, sightings have been recorded for 39 deer, 15 of which are considered summer observations. Most remaining observations occurred during the hunting season. Summer sight records range from 14 to 50 miles distance from Little Hills, the average being 35 miles. Nearly all deer were seen north of the North Fork of the White River. Observations under ten miles distance from the Station are not recorded because they are considered commonplace. Table 6 -- Number of deer tag returns by hunters at Little Hills Experiment Station, 1952-65. Year Number of Returns 1952 1953 1954 1955 1956 1957 1958 1959 1960 1961 1962 1963 1964 1965 10 6 6 2 4 14 5 7 23 5~ 15 12 24 14 Bucks Does Percent of Total Tagged (accumulative) 0 4 2 2 3 10 2 4 0 1 3 3 2 5 21 5 4 11 7 3.4 5·1 6.4 5·9 5·9 6.7 7·2 6.7 8.2 11.5 11.8 11.8 11.7 11.5 II 2 5 18 31 10 8 13 7 Ave. Dist. Traveled (miles) 9·1 27·0 9·8 17·0 40.5 19·1 16.8 15·9 12.0 ll.O 20·7 18.4 15·5 16.2 ========================================================================== Totals 194 116 78 11.5 14.8 ========================================================================== utilization Estimates - Deer (1964-65) The report for the last segment included a table comparing production utilization transect measurements with the ocular estimates of use for mountain mahogany and serviceberry. It did not include ocular estimates of use on other species. Accordingly, these data are included. The work was done in May and June, 1965. These estimates followed one of the most severe winters on record. Precipitation for the five month period, Nov. - March, was 5.58 inches. Accumulated snow depths would have averaged 18 inches or more over most of the pasture area. Consequently, utilization estimates averaged slightly higher than for most other years (Table 7). Under the present plan this is the last such field estimate to be made in the pastures before termination of the study. �Table 8. Acreage of soil types in the Little Hills experimental pastures. 1/ Pasture 1.1 Soil Type 1-D 1-E 2-E 2-F 4-E 5-D 5-E X5-E 6-D 6-E 6-F X6-D X6-E X6-F 7-D 7-E 7-F 7-G 8-F 8-G 9-E 9-F X9-F 12-D 12-E 13-E 13-F X13-E X13-F X13-G 1 1.3 0.3 2 3 4 5 6 3.6 2.5 22.0 9.5 3.2 4.9 8.6 3.8 39.4 7.9 7.5 16.8 9.8 2.1 2.7 5.0 5.1 2.3 1.7 1.3 0.5 1.2 2.9 3.5 12.9 6.8 1.5 4.3 37.5 3.3 3.1 35.0 31.8 7.4 1.7 8.0 1.8 15.6 13.9 1.7 6.8 19.6 13.4 3.2 14.6 9.8 21. 6 1.2 9.7 16.1 4.8 28.3 2.7 12.1 0.5 33.0 7 6.7 8 4.0 2.2 9 1.2 20.3 19.3 3.1 6.8 15.2 33.1 10.3 9.1 2.7 0.8 2.5 0.7 3.0 24.7 5.0 0.2 2.8 25.4 11.6 4.0 17.6 3.0 8.7 7.6 2.6 1.8 7.1 3.0 30.9 2.2 20.2 24.1 39.6 5.9 14.6 14.7 11.0 22.5 2.6 1.0 29.4 0.3 1.1 4.9 1.9 9.7 4.2 0.1 5.7 3.2 4.7 10.8 7.8 14.2 13.8 10 6.4 8.8 11.3 9.2 20.7 15.0 1.4 7.7 42.3 Total 18.4 44.5 7.9 74.5 66.3 84.0 1.3 0.5 4.8 99.2 137.2 11.6 21.4 67.4 1.8 19.5 62.2 22.0 253.2 1.2 39.6 54.0 47.7 0.3 1.1 20.5 26.5 12.5 28.2 13.8 ro \0 �Table 8. (continued). Acreage of soil types in the Little Hills experimental pastures. 11 Pasture 9 Soil Type 1 2 3 4 16-E 16-F 16-G 17-G 1.2 1.8 1.4 RL 2.9 11 6 2.4 0.6 RG Totals 5 7 8 4.7 1.4 167.3 10 4.4 4.6 0.5 5.8 0.8 13.6 2.3 1.3 77.4 9 6.0 2.6 5.1 1.2 Total 8.5 8.8 0.8 19.6 24.4 2.5 162.8 144.6 86.4 99.9 90.7 206.4 156.6 115.6 1,307.7 Survey made in May, 1965, by J. L. Nielsen, Soil Scientist, Soil Conservation Service, Glenwood Springs, Colorado. 11 Small differences between surveyed and p1animetered acreages, caused by aerial photo scale changes, are distributed proportionately among the soil types within each pasture. w o �- 31 were furnished by the State Game, Fish and Parks Department, to do the field mapping. This is an unusually large scale, and the mapping consequently is very detailed. The soils occurring in the area mapped did not fit any known soil series. Because of this, each different kind of soil was given a number. Each kind of soil found in the pastures was delineated by solid black lines on the field sheet. A soil number for each kind of soil was placed in the delineation where it occurred. Where soils occurred in bodies too small to map out separately they were combined as a complex and shown with a number preceded by a capital "x." Steepness of slope was shown by groups, described by letters D, E, F, and G. The range in percent grade is as follows: D E F G 6 - 12 percent 12 - 15 percent 25 - 65 percent 65 percent or more A narrative description that discusses soil and site characteristics, followed by a detailed profile description, was prepared for each different soil. Erosion was not shown on the maps, but is discussed in the narrative descriptions for each individual soil. For convenience, the soil survey was reduced to a scale of 500 feet to the inch and traced onto a plastic paper base map. At this scale, the survey fits a 36 x 36-inch sheet. During the course of the survey, pits were dug and samples were taken for These were sent to Colorado State University Soils each kind of soil mapped. Copies of the laboratory data are attached to the Laboratory for analysis. soil write-ups. Where soils occurred in complex association, numbers preceded by "X" were used to show the soils in these delineations. The following complexes were used: X5, X6, X9, and X13. The soil complexes are very much like the individual soils, except they usually include a high percentage (40 to 50 percent) of much shallower soils. The following mapping units which are made up of the soil number followed by the slope group, occur on the Soils Map: 1 - D 1 - E 2 - E 2 - F 4 - D 4 - E 5 - D 5 - E D 6 6 - E 6 - F X6 - D X6 - E X6 - F 7 - D 7 - E 7 - F 7 - G 8 - F ,.. 8 - u 9 - E 9 - F X9 - F 12 - D 12 - E 13 - E 13- F X13 - E X13 - F X13 - G 16 - E F 16 16 - G 17 - G RL RG �- 32 Representative Soil Description Soil One is a coarse-textured, alluvial soil occurring in narrow drainageways bordered by steeply sloping mountainsides that are topped by rolling mesa lands. Where the drainageways break .out into the mesa lands, because of more effective moisture conditions, Soil One is replaced by Soil Four. Soil One parent material consists of a mixture of sandy loam material and chip fragments of Green River and Bridger origin that have washed from the soils and geologic formations adjacent to the drainageways. The Green River formation is characterized by strongly calcareous siltstone and very fine-grained sandstone. The Bridger formation is mainly sandstone with medium-sized sand particles. It is also strongly calcareous. In the area mapped, the Green River and Bridger formations are interbedded. Thin strata 10 to 50 feet thick of Bridger sandstone occurs between the much thicker Green River beds. The Green River formation is dominant. Soil One reflects this condition by having a high content of Green River chips and flat rock fragments. Soil One is a semi-desert type or an Entisol, according to standards of Approximation Seven. It is intergradi~g toward the mollisol order. It supports a moderate stand of big sagebrush with a sparse growth of grass in the open spaces. Soil One has a moderately low water-holding capacity due to the high content of inert shale chips and rock fragments. It is loose, with many visible voids. Permeability is moderate to rapid. Surface water intake rate is moderate. Gully erosion is characteristic of Soil One. The main channel, which runs the length of each delineated area, is always trenched and channel walls are actively eroding. Side gullies are common. Because of the narrow valley position which Soil One occupies, considerable soil material from the adjacent sideslopes is washed down and deposited on the surface. No doubt this was the manner in which it was formed. Now that the area is gullied, much of the washed-in sediment is carried away and deposited on fans downstream. Near the mouth of the canyons where Soil One enters larger valley areas, recent alluvial materials are deposited every time the streams run water. There are no detrimental conditions, such as salt, alkali or water table that affect plant growth. Even though lime content is high, it is not injurious to plant growth. Phosphate content is ample for range plant growth. Organic matter content is above average for this precipitation zone. Soil One, like all alluvial soils, varies widely in profile characteristics. Texture varies from gravelly sandy loam with a gravel content of about 40 percent, which is normal for the soil, to very gravelly sandy loam with over 50 percent gravel content. Small bodies of almost gravel free loam soil occur on the more nearly level areas. Stratification is pronounced. Soil development varies from almost none to weakly developed subsoil horizons. Topsoil varies from brown to dark grayish brown, and in thickness from two to five inches. Slopes vary in grade from six to 20 percent, and are nearly smooth to strongly undulating. Soil One and Soil 15 have been combined and placed under Number One. A typical profile of Soil One was described at the mouth of an unnamed gulch in Pasture One: 13 percent slope. �- 33 - AlIOto 2~ inches Very dark grayish brown (lOYR 3/2 moist) gravelly, sandy loam; loose when dry, very friable when moist; weak, fine, granular structure; calcareous, pH 8.2; clear, smooth boundary; 32 percent small, flat gravels of Green River shale origin. A12 2~ to 7~ inches Dark, grayish brown (lOYR 4/2 moist) very gravelly, sandy loam; loose when dry, very friable when moist; weak, fine granular structure; calcareous, pH 8.2; clear, smooth boundary; 52 percent small, flat gravels of Green River shale origin. Cl 7~ to 11 inches Same as above, except it has 22 percent Green River origin; pH is 8.6. small, flat chips of C2 11 to 19 inches Dark, grayish brown (lOYR 4/2 moist) very gravelly loam; loose when dry, very friable when moist; massive structure; calcareous, pH 8.6; gradual wavy boundary; 51 percent small, flat gravels of Green River shale origin. C3 19 to 26 inches Same as above, except color is brown gravel is 30. C4 C5 C6 26 to 33 inches Same as above, except the percent 33 to 40 inches Same as above, except percent grayish brown. (4/3 moist) of gravel of gravel and percent of is 35, and pH is 8.7. is 40, and color is dark, 40 to 60 inches Grayish brown to brown (lOYR 5/3 moist) very gravelly loam; massive structure; violently calcareous; 51 percent small, flat gravels of Green River origin. Many of the soil samples were quite low in available phosphorus, especially in the lower soil horizons. Potash was also frequently low in the sub-surface samples. Incidental to the soil survey work, quantitative descriptions of the vegetation around each pit and of the root distribution within the pits were made. From these data, and the soils data, a very general range site classification was given for each stop, based on the S. C. S. system of classification. There were ten such sites listed as follows: Rolling Loam, Loamy Slope, Mountain Valley, Mountain Loam, Shaly Foothill, Shallow Foothill, Raw Shale Hills, Deep Loam, Deep Loam (Loess), and Woodland. No attempt at mapping or determining acreages of these sites was made, and further checking with range specialists in the Soil Conservation Service will be necessary if correlations of our data are to be made with it. �- 34 - Meter Quadrat Photographs Twelve black and white photos of meter quadrats in Pastures Two and Four were taken by Student Assistant Roger Randolph, using a 4 x 5 Graflex. The photos were only fair to poor. This was done to complete the re-photo series begun in 1964. Some quadrats could not be located. Notes made about vegetative changes since 1954 were incorporated in the last segment, which was not written until after this field work was done. Line Transect Studies Donald G. Smith, temporarily assigned during the past segment to assist with Little Hills Station work, spent many weeks analyzing line transect data. In addition to the narrative report which he has prepared below, there are 28 tables to support the analysis of variance and Chi-square tests made. He also made a correlation analysis of browse density and browse reproduction for Pasture One. He did not have time to complete the analysis for the other nine pastures, but has the procedure outlined. The data is tabulated to test individual pastures in regard to plant composition. This includes: litter, moss, browse, grass, forbs, bare ground, and rock. Before further testing is done, personnel of the C. S. D. Statistical Laboratory should be consulted for their suggestions as to what tests should be used. After the tests have been run, the results will be interpreted and published. In 1957, Eldie Mustard began a study to determine the effects of different kinds and degrees of use by deer and livestock on browse density, composition, and reproduction. His results and conclusions are published in his thesis (Mustard, 1958) as well as in a special report (Mustard, 1959). This study was repeated five years later (1962, 1963) to determine any changes. Most of the transects and plots used by Mustard were used for this later study. The analysis was done during 1964 by Don Smith, using the same statistical methods Mustard used for the sake of comparison. Better statistical tests are available now than eight years ago. Browse Density Browse density for all species. -- The results of the analysis of variance tests were similar for both experiments. Although a highly significant difference was found between exposures, no difference was found between pastures or even between the interaction of pastures times exposures. This indicates that pasture differences are small and normally one would not continue further. However, Mustard made orthogonal comparisons of individual pastures and found that Pasture One was significantly lower (14.2 percent) than the other pastures in total browse density (Table 11). Results showed that Pasture Seven was highly significantly lower (17.7 percent) and Pasture Four was significantly lower (19.6 percent) than the other pasture means. Our results show that total browse density in Pasture One was 22.9 percent, considerably higher than what Mustard found. We also took twice as many samples in this pasture. However, Pasture Seven did not vary much, being only one percent higher in 1962. This pasture did approach significance in 1957. The average browse density, when data for all pastures were combined, increased slightly (from 21.8 percent to 23.9 percent); this was caused by density increases in Pastures One, Eight, and Nine. �- 35 - Table 9. Soil analysis results. II Date June 24, 1965 Grower I S County Rio Blanco Name _..::L;.:i:..::t..::t..::l.;::;e_H=i.::.l.::.l s=-..:E::.:x:.:.lp;;..:.!.......:S~t:..;;a;..::t;..;:i:..;;o:..: _ Sample Sent in by J. L. Nielsen Lab. No. Col. No. Particle Total Sand 5799 5800 5801 5802 5803 5804 StoE 1 1:/ o - 2~ 2~ - 7~ 7~ - 11 11 - 19 26 - 33 40 - 60 65 67 60 70 67 69 EH Saturated Paste Lab. No. 5799 5800 5801 5802 5803 5804 8.2 8.3 Note: 24 18 25 18 22 20 Organic Matter 1:5 8.2 8.2 8.6 8.6 % 3.6 2.1 1.8 0.8 Green River chips percent 11 Table is condensed Lbs. P205 30 6 9 3 5,800 11 15 15 12 11 11 S. Loam S. Loam S. Loam S. Loam S. Loam S. Loam Electrical Conductivity 1.1 CaC03 Equivalent 6.8 9.4 13.8 9.6 9.5 9.6 0.3 0.2 0.3 0.2 = 0.2 soil test report form of Colorado State Service to show only the pertinent data Stop 1 is also Soil One. 11 Ec x 103 Millimhos L Acre K20 565 340 200 120 organic matter from original University Cooperative Extension from the soil analysis. 11 Size Distribution ~in mm~ ~Eercent~ Textural Clay Silt Class <' O. 002 .05 - .002 per Cm. at 250 C. �- 36 - Table 10. Date Soil analysis results. 1/ June 24, 1965 Grower's Name ~L~i~t~t~l~e~H~l~·l~l~s~E~xp~.~S~t~a~t~i~o~n~ County Rio Blanco Sample Sent in by J. L. Nielsen Lab. No. Col. No. Particle Size Distribution ~in rnm2 ~Eercent2 Total Silt Clay Textural Sand .05 - .002 c 0.002 Class 5759 5760 5761 5762 5763 5764 StoE 15 1/ o - 7 7 - 14 14 - 19 19 - 27 27 - 58 58 - 65 62 64 62 63 62 63 Lab. No. pH Saturated Paste 5759 5760 5761 5762 5763 5764 22 23 23 21 22 23 Organic Matter 1:5 % 8.2 8.3 8.4 1.5 1.4 1.1 Lbs. L Acre P205 K20 19 690 7 520 8 465 16 13 15 16 16 14 S. Loam S. Loam S. Loam S. Loam S. Loam S. Loam Electrical Conduct3j ivity - CaC03 Equivalent 1.0 1.1 1.2 5.0 7.9 8.1 0.3 0.2 0.2 1/ Table is condensed from original soil test report form of Colorado State University Cooperative Extension Service to show only the pertinent data from the soil analysis. 1/ Stop 15 is also Soil 15. 1/ EC x 103 Mi11imhos per Cm. at 250 C. �Table 11. A comparison pastures. of two browse surveys, 1957 and 1963, showing significant 4 5 differences between Pastures Browse 2 1 Classification 3 density, all species Lower* Browse density, 4 key species Lower~h\, Higher~h\, Browse dens ity, serviceberry Browse density, mountain Browse density, sagebrush Browse density, oakbrush Browse numbers, all species lower,\'"le Browse numbers, 4 key species Lower"lc,\' Browse reproduction, all species Lower* Browse reproduction, 4 key species Lower* Browse reproduction, serviceberry Browse reproduction, mountain Browse reproduction, sagebrush Browse reproduction, oakbrush 8 7 9 Low"'h'e Low"'\' Browse Higher*'\' High''rlc or Low** Higher** or Low* High* High'\,*or Low** Higher'\' mahogany High'\' LowoJc~\' w ~ Lower* Low** High,h\, or Lowe r""\, low** Lower* Lower"c High** High~~ High~~ High'\'Higher~\' mahogany Higher~~ (not underlined), Higher~\' Higher~\' Mustard's 1957 results (underlined) , showing upon orthogonal comparisons. 1963 results 6 showing ** Significant at the 1-percent level. * Significant at the 5-percent level. if pasture if pasture means mean is higher are higher or lower than other pasture or lower than other pasture means means. based �- 38 Browse density - four key species. -- Mustard found highly significant differences in browse density between pastures, exposures, and the interaction according to analysis of variance. We found highly significant differences in browse density, but he found only a significant difference between pastures and no difference with the interaction, indicating less differences between pastures. The four key species were serviceberry, mountain mahogany, oakbrush, and big sagebrush. The average density of all four key species in 1962 was 15.7 percent, or nearly two-thirds of the total browse density average. Mustard found that Pasture Eight was highly significantly higher (20.7 percent), that Pasture Two was significantly higher (20.6 percent), and that Pasture Two was highly significantly lower (10.4 percent) in browse density of four key species. Our results were similar, in that Pasture Eight was highly significantly higher (20.1 percent) and Pasture One was lower. Pasture One was not significantly different at the 5 percent level, missing it by .02. Here is where the problem of interpretation begins. In orthogonal comparisons, a pasture is dropped at each step. In other words, Pasture One is compared to eight other pastures; Pasture Two is compared to seven pastures; Pasture Six is compared to three others, etc. Finally, Pasture Eight is compared to Pasture Nine. A highly significant difference was found between Pastures Eight and Nine, and that is all that can be said, really. It is not certain that Pasture Eight is significantly different (higher) from the others, or that Pasture Nine is significantly lower, or that each is not significant. So when it is said we say (or Mustard says) that either of these pastures is different from the others, it is strictly an interpretation. There is no proof. This was bothersome because it happened six times and one could not say which pasture was different. After consultation with Dave Bowden, C. S. u. Biometrician, it was decided to attempt Schaffe's method for making multiple comparisons. By this method it was hoped the difference could be attributed to one pasture. We made 12 tests between Pastures Eight and Nine, none of which indicated a difference at the five-percent level. Most were not even significantly different at the 10-percent level. This is very discouraging because we are sure a difference does exist, but Schaffe's method was not sensitive enough to pick it up. Mr. Jake Kovner, Statistician, U. S. Forest and Range Experiment Station, could offer no easy solution except to recommend a different analysis. Bowden suggested using Duncan's test, if time and funds are available. This is a multiple "F" test. Various other methods are available now which were not available to Mustard. Browse density of five key species. -- A fifth key species, bitterbrush, was added in 1962 because it was felt that it was sufficiently abundant and palatable to justify its inclusion. But analysis of the combined data did not indicate that bitterbrush could be considered a key species. The results of comparing pastures having five key species was very similar to the results for four key species. Analysis of variance "F" values were nearly the same. Again the interaction was insignificant, and this is good because it shows that much of the variation was accounted for by exposure and by pasture. �- 39 - Browse density of five key species was only slightly higher than that for four key species (16.4 percent compared to 15.7 percent), revealing the scarcity of bitterbrush in the pastures. This is not surprising and is probably why Mustard did not consider it a key species. Again, Pasture Eight was highly significantly higher (20.7 percent) in browse density of five key species. The addition of bitterbrush did change the figures enough to make Pasture One significantly lower (11.9 percent) than the other pastures. The mean of Pasture Nine (10.0 percenq is even lower, indicating that this pasture would be significantly lower in browse density, also. But Schaffe's test did not confirm this. Browse density of serviceberry. -- Mustard found a highly significant difference between pastures and between exposures according to analysis of variance. Smith found only a difference between exposures. Mustard found that Pasture Eight was highly significantly higher (11.3 percent) and pasture Two was significantly higher (11.1 percent) in browse density of serviceberry. Our results are similar in that Pasture Eight was significantly higher (9.7 percent) than Pasture Nine and that Pasture Two was higher than the other ( and had a stronger "F" value) although it was not significantly higher at the five-percent level. Again, what can be said? Is Pasture Eight higher than the others, or is Pasture Nine lower, or are both statements true? Schaffe's test indicated that neither was significantly different from the other eight pastures. Browse density of serviceberry averaged 8.9 percent over all pastures. Browse density of mountain mahogany. -- Mustard's analysis of variance did not find a difference between pastures or exposure, and he did not continue further on an individual basis. Strangely enough, our analysis picked up a significant difference between pastures but not between exposures or interactions. In comparing the pastures individually, we found that Pasture Eight was highly significantly higher (5.7 percent) in density of mountain mahogany than Pasture Nine (1.1 percent). Schaffe's test indicated that neither pasture was different from the other eight. Again there is the same problem of using two entirely different methods for testing differences. We found that the average density of mountain mahogany was 3.2 percent. Browse density of s.?gebruEh. -- Mustard did not find a significant difference between pastures or exposures with analysis of variance and did not test them individually (which is correct according to an unwritten rule). Our analysis of variance agreed with Mustard's except that we did not even find a difference between the interaction. Nevertheless, we compared them individually and found that Pasture Five was significantly higher (4.8 percent) than the other pastures in density of sagebrush. However, as indicated by the analysis of variance test, this significance was not very strong. Browse density of oakbrush. -- Again, Mustard found no significant differences between pastures or between exposures and continued no further. He did find a slight difference between the interactions; we did not. In testing each pasture individually, none of them exhibited a significant difference in density of oakbrush. This was expected. Average density was 0.9 percent. �- 40 Browse density of bitterbrush. -- Our analysis of variance test showed a significant difference between pastures and between interactions, indicating differences in bitterbrush distribution. We found an average density of 0.7 percent with Pastures One, Two, and Four being significantly lower (.Ol, .01, and .27 percent respectively) and Pasture Seven being significantly higher (1.54 percent) in density of bitterbrush. Browse Numbers Browse numbers for all species. -- Browse plants were counted and classified in 2 x 25 foot plots on each transect line. We found an average of 12.5 browse plants per plot as compared to Mustard's 10.4 plants. This appears promising from the deer's viewpoint. According to analysis of variance, both Mustard and we found a significant difference between pastures and between exposure. However, we did not find a difference between the interaction. Mustard found that this difference occurred in Pastures One and Six, Pasture One being highly significantly lower (5.8) and Pasture Six being significantly lower (7.0) in total browse numbers. We agreed with his findings on Pasture Six (highly significantly lower -8.8). Browse numbers in Pasture One appeared to have doubled, yet Pasture One was not significantly different. Doubling the number of samples in Pasture One may have accounted for the difference in results. Our results also showed that Pasture Four was highly significantly lower (7.5) in total browse plants, which does not agree with Mustard's findings (10.2). Mustard found Pasture Eight to be significantly higher at the ten percent level. We found no significant difference. Browse numbers for four key species. -- We found that the four key species averaged 7.0 per plot; or slightly more than one-half of all browse plants were composed of these four species. Our analysis of variance agreed with Mustard's in showing a highly significant difference existing between pastures and between exposures. However, we did not pick up the interaction which he did. Mustard found that this highly significant difference between pastures was due to differences in Pastures One and Nine, both of which had lower (3.5 and 4.0) means than the other pastures. Our results showed that this difference was in Pasture Eight or Pasture Nine or both. Pasture Eight was highly significantly higher than Pasture Nine (8.9 versus 3.9) or vice versa. Again, Schaffe's test did not find a significant difference between the mean of these pastures and the means of the other eight. As far as Pasture One is concerned, we found almost three times as many key species plants in this pasture as Mustard found, and this may be due to the difference in sampling. Browse numbers for five key species. -- The addition of bitterbrush did not change the results to any extent. The "F" value for pastures was decreased slightly but enough to make a difference in significance. The average number per plot was increased from 7 0 to 7.1. The results of the orthogonal comparison were the same as for the four key species. Pasture Eight was highly significantly higher than Pasture Nine (9.0 versus 4.1), or Pasture Nine was significantly lower than Pasture Eight. Schaffe's method again failed to denote a difference. 0 �- 41 - Browse Reproduction Browse reproduction for all species. -- Plants classified as seedlings and young were considered reproduction on the plots. Mustard found an average of five plants per plot when all pastures were combined. We found an average of 3.7 plants. Mustard's analysis of variance test indicated a significant difference between pastures and highly significant differences between exposures and the interaction. The only significance we found was between exposures. Mustard found that this difference was caused by difference between Pastures One and Nine, both of which were highly significantly lower (2.5 and 3.2) in total reproduction than the other pastures. He did not state that Pasture Eight was significantly higher, but his data indicate it. There were no significant differences between individual pastures, according to our results, especially not between Pastures Eight and Nine. Browse reproduction of four key species. -- Our analysis of variance test agrees with Mustard's, except that we found no significant difference between interactions. Both pasture and exposure were highly significant. We found an average of 2.15 reproductions of key species, with Pastures Three and Seven being highly significantly higher (3.4 and 4.4 respectively) than the other pastures. Mustard found no pasture higher than any other in reproduction. He found Pastures One and Nine highly significantly lower (1.7 and 1.7) than other pastures. Pasture Three did approach the desired level of significance. In our results, Pasture One and Nine did have low means but were far from being significantly different. Browse reproduction of five key species. -- The addition of bitterbrush to the data did not change the findings from that for four key species. Pastures Three and Seven were highly significantly higher in browse reproduction of key species. Browse reproduction of serviceberry. -- Chi-square analysis, based on the presence or absence of reproduction of individual key species, was used to test differences between pastures. Mustard found that Pasture Eight contained a higher number of serviceberry reproductions than expected. Pasture Five and Nine were also high but not significant. Our results agreed with his only as far as finding a significant difference in the total chi-square. We found Pasture Three had a highly significant higher number of serviceberry reproductions and that Pasture Seven was significantly higher. Pastures Five, Eight, and Nine did not approach significance. These results may have been influenced by the fewer serviceberry reproductions on our plots. Mustard found serviceberry reproduction on 165 of 350 plots (47 percent), whereas we found it on 130 of 402 plots (32 percent). Browse reproduction of mountain mahogany. Our chi-square results agree with Mustard's. Neither he nor we found a significant difference in total chi-square, indicating that reproduction of mountain mahogany was similar in each pasture. None of the pastures exhibited a significant difference, although Mustard found mountain mahogany on twice as many plots as we did (17 �- 42 - percent versus 8 percent). In both studies, Pasture Four appeared more mahogany than the others. to have Browse reproduction of sagebrush. -- Our results do not agree for this species. Mustard found a highly significant difference in his total chi-square; this was caused by differences in Pastures Five and Six. Pasture Five was highly significantly higher, and Pasture Six was significantly higher in reproduction of s?gebrush. We found no significant difference between pastures according to total chi-square and no significant difference between pastures. Pasture Six was higher than the others, but not Pasture Five. We found sagebrush in nine percent of our plots, Mustard found it in 13 percent. Browse reproduction of oakbrush. -- These results were similar. Neither Mustard nor we found a significant difference in total chi-square. However, Mustard picked up a significant difference in Pasture Eight which had a higher number of oakbrush reproductions than expected. We found no significant differences between pastures, especially in Pasture Eight. In both of the studies, oakbrush reproduction was found on 10 percent of the plots. Browse reproduction of bitterbrush. -- No bitterbrush reproduction was found on any pastures except Pasture Six. As a result, the total chi-square was highly significant, and Pasture Six had a highly significant higher number of bitterbrush reproductions in it than expected. Actually, it was found on only four of 22 plots in Pasture Six; this may be the reason why the addition of bitterbrush as a key species did not change the results appreciably. Effects of Stocked Animals Heavily and moderately-used pastures for each of three animal species were compared for the purpose of determining animal effects on browse numbers and reproduction. P-astures used in this analysis included One and Nine (sheep); Four and Six (deer); and Two and Eight (cattle). We did not combine the pastures in our analysis of variance tests, as Mustard did, in the hopes of getting a little better information as to the differences between pastures. However, we did combine pastures according to species stocked for individual comparison. Effects of stocked animals on browse numbers for all species. -- Mustard's analysis of variance found a highly significant difference between exposure and between interaction. He also found a significant difference between species stocked. We found a highly significant difference between exposure but none between the interaction. We did find a significant difference between pastures, although it was not strong (Table 12). Mustard found that there was a highly significant higher number of browse numbers in the cattle pastures. We found slightly more plants in the cattle pastures, but the difference was not significant. However, we found that browse numbers in the deer pastures were highly significantly lower than for the other pastures. At least, there was a highly significant difference between the deer pastures and the sheep pastures. The mean number of browse plants for each species was cattle 14.9, sheep 14.6, and deer 7.9, in our study. Effects of stocked animals on browse numbers for four key species. -- Both analysis of variance tests indicated highly significant differences between pastures and exposures. We did not find a difference between interaction, although Mustard did. �Table 12. A comparison of two browse surveys, 1957 and 1963, showing significant differences between three stocked species. Browse Classification Cattle Browse numbers, all species Higher** Browse numbers, 4 key species Higher** Browse reproduction, Higher* all species Browse reproduction, 4 key species Higher* Sheep Deer Low** High** Lower*i( Low*'<'< Lower* High* Mustard's 1957 results (underlined) showing if pasture means for some pastures are Higher or Lower than for other pastures. 1963 results showing if pasture means for some pastures are Higher or Lower than for other pastures. ** Significant at the l-percent level. * Significant at the 5-percent level. + lAJ �- 44 - Mustard found that both cattle and deer pastures were highly significantly higher (8.7 and 7.2, respectively) than sheep pastures. Our results agree with his for the cattle pastures (mean of 8.9), which was highly significantly higher. But we found that the deer pastures were highly significantly lower (4.8) than the others in number of four key species. We found mean of 8.9 for cattle, 6.9 for sheep, and 4.8 for deer. Does this apparent discrepancy between deer pastures reflect the heavy use by deer? Effects of stocked animals on browse numbers for five key species. -- The addition of bitterbrush as a key species did not change the results of the analysis of variance tests. However, it did change the results of the orthogonal comparisons. The only difference we found between species was that the deer pastures were highly significantly lower in five key species. There was no significant difference between cattle pastures and the others in this instance. Perhaps the use of bitterbrush in Pasture Six and dropping Pastures Three, Five, and Seven accounted for this difference. Effects of stocked animals on browse reproduction for all species. -- According to the analysis of variance test, Mustard found a highly significant difference between exposures and between the interaction. He found a significant difference between species stocked. The only difference found was the one between exposures. Mustard found that the cattle pastures were significantly higher (5.6) in browse reproduction than the others. We did not find a significant difference between any species stocked. We found means of 3.2 for cattle, 3.4 for deer, and 3.2 for sheep. This indicates that the deer pastures were slightly higher in reproduction, although we found that they were lowest in browse numbers. Perhaps reproduction is coming back in the deer pastures and is covered by snow during the period of use. Effects of stocked animals on browse reproduction for four key species. Mustard's analysis of variance found significant differences between species stocked, exposures, and the interaction. Our analysis of variance found only a difference between exposures. In comparing individual species, Mustard found that cattle pastures were significantly higher and that sheep pastures were significantly lower in reproduction of key species. We did not find that cattle pastures were higher, but we found that sheep pastures were significantly latver. We found means of 1.9 for cattle, 2.2 for deer, and 1.1 for sheep. Or we could say that the deer pastures were significantly higher in reproduction than the sheep pastures. This is interesting because we found that the deer pastures were lowest in numbers of key species. Perhaps reproduction is better in the deer pastures. Effects of stocked animals on browse reproduction of five key species. The addition of bitterbrush to the data did not change the results from those for four key species. The only thing it did was strengthen the difference between the deer pastures and the sheep pastures. Presumably, Pasture Six with its bitterbrush was responsible. �- 45 - Age - Group Comparisons This is strictly a mathematical comparison of the age-group of browse plants in the nine pastures during the two studies. Browse plants were classified in the plots as seedlings, young, mature, and decadent. Grouping of Seedlings. -- Mustard found that 67 percent of the browse seedlings were found singly. We found that 60 percent of the seedlings were single (Table 13). This difference is not great enough to substantiate any theories that range conditions are improving, because seedlings were found in multiples more often in 1962. It is interesting that we found about 90 percent of seedlings occurring singly in pasture Ten (control). Origin of seedlings for serviceberry. -- Mustard found that 98 percent of the seedlings were from root sprouts of serviceberry plants, whereas we found only 30.6 percent of the serviceberry seedlings originated from this source (Table 14). This large difference may be due to interpretation of different observers, which is understandable. If it is a true difference, it would indicate that more true seedlings are becoming established in the pastures because of more favorable conditions. Pasture Ten serviceberry seedlings were all from root sprouts. It is interesting to compare the number of seedlings found during the two studies. Mustard found 182 seedlings compared to our 85, which does not indicate range' improvement. This will be discussed later. Comparing age classes browse plants than Mustard One. of all browse species. -- We classified 1,503 more by running 52 more plots, principally in Pasture The 1962-63 survey showed a decrease in reproduction and an increase in decadent plants (Table 15). There was a nine-percent decrease in seedlings, an II-percent decrease in young, a one-percent increase in mature plants, and a 19-percent increase in decadent plants. Seedlings decreased in all pastures except Pasture One Perhaps the extra sampling in this pasture accounted for this difference. Young plants decreased in all pastures except Three, Six, and Seven. None of these are stocked heavily and all contain deer which might benefit young plants. A better explanation is desired. However, the decreases were particularly noticable in the livestock pastures One, Two, Five, and Eight. i No appreciable change in the percent of mature plants occured when all pastures were combined. Sizeable decreases in pastures Six, Seven, and Nine were balanced by increases in pastures Three, Four, and Eight. A sizeable increase in decadent plants was found in all pastures, icularly pastures Two, Five, Eight, and Nine. part- �- 46 - Table 13. Grouping of plants classified as seedlings, single versus multiple occurrence, by number and percent, 1963. Number Pasture Percent Single Single Multiple 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 22 30 15 11 22 7 10 33 13 23 23 9 2 4 6 2 29 10 48.9 56.6 62.5 84.6 84.6 53.8 83.3 53.2 56.5 51.1 43.4 37.5 15.4 15.4 46.2 16.7 46.8 43.5 Total number Average Pasture Ten (Control) 163 18 108 12 60.1 39.9 17 2 89.5 10.5 Table 14. Pasture Multiple Classification of serviceberry seedlings occurring on plot transects as to origin, true seedlings versus root sprouts, 1963. Number Root Sprouts True Seedlings 1 8 2 6 3 6 4 0 5 2 6 1 7 0 8 3 9 0 ---~. Total number 26 Average 3 Pasture Ten (Control) 6 Percent Root Sprouts True Seedlings 11 14 16 2 0 0 5 10 1 59 7 42.1 30.0 27.3 0.0 100.0 100.0 0.0 23.1 0.0 57.9 70.0 72.7 100.0 0.0 0.0 100.0 76.9 100.0 30.6 69.4 0 100.0 �- 47 - Table 15. Comparison of age classes of browse plants after a five-year interval, 1957-62, using percent of total plants counted in twofoot by twenty-five-foot plots. Percent of Total Browse Pasture Year Total Number of Plants 1 1957 1962 2 Seedlings Young Mature Decadent 747 J:./ 138 4.4 6.0 32.6 14.7 53.6 52.5 9.4 26.8 1957 1962 443 655 16.9 8.1 33.6 15.0 44.0 47.0 5.4 29.9 3 1957 1962 688 681 20.0 3.5 35.2 35.8 40.4 47.6 4.4 13.1 4 1957 1962 468 374 11.1 3.5 45.4 34.2 39.3 45.2 41.1 17.1 5 1957 1962 346 492 9.0 5.3 34.1 15.4 49.1 49.0 7.8 30.3 6 1957 1962 165 229 9.1 5.7 35.8 45.4 48.5 32.7 6.7 16.2 7 1957 1962 251 254 10.4 4.7 31.5 46.5 55.0 31.1 3.2 17.7 8 1957 1962 784 1,132 18.1 5.5 30.1 14.7 45.5 53.8 6.3 26.0 9 1957 1962 349 571 9.4 4.0 25.5 19.1 57.0 40.3 8.1 36.6 All 1957 Pastures 1962 3,632 5,135 14.3 5.3 33.9 22.5 46.1 47.2 5.8 25.0 Change +1,503 -9.0 -11.4 +1.1 +19.2 212 11.8 26.9 42.9 18.4 Pasture Ten 1961 (Control) 1/ In Pasture One there were 26 more plots read in 1962 than in 1957. �- 48 - DEMONSTRATIONS AND PUBLICATIONS RESULTING FROM RESEARCH AT LITTLE HILLS EXPERIMENT STATION Fifteen groups of visitors totaling 77 individuals were toured about the Station and talked to concerning project work. These included C. S. U. senior Wildlife Management students (29); S. C. S. range and soils men (3); Routt County 4-H Conservation Club (8); National Park Service Biologists (2); citizens (11) of Tanzania, East Africa; sponsors from B. L. M. and the University of Nebraska (5); Denver staff officers (3); Commissioners and staff of the Arkansas Game and Fish Department (6); and representatives of KLZ Radio - TV (2). During the hunting season, 108 parties compr1s1ng 295 individuals were given information at the Station. Very little of this pertained to research work, but rather, to local and regional management. A paper entitled "A total Count of Deer Pellet Groups" was presented to the Central Mountains and Plains Section of the Wildlife Society in August, 1965. A talk to the Boulder Kiwanis Club entitled "Research Work at Little Hills Experiment Station" was presented in March, 1966. Illustrated newspaper articles explaining the deer tagging and trapping program, and urging returns of the tags and sight records, were submitted to and printed in Meeker, Craig, and Rifle newspapers. LITERATURE CITED Mustard, Eldie W. Jr. April, 1959. Study of browse reproduction in relation to controlled grazing in experimental pastures. Quarterly Pitman - Robertson Report, Colo. Game and Fish Dept. p. 9-34. Jan., 1959. Study of browse reproduction in relation to controlled grazing in experimental pastures. Colo. Game and Fish Dept. Fed. Aid in Wildlife Restoration Completion Report, Project W-lOl-R-l, Game Range Investigations, Work Plan 2, Job No.4. 4lp. 1958. Browse differences in experimental pastures under controlled stocking with cattle, sheep and mule deer in north-west Colorado. Master's thesis. Colorado State University. 105p. Prepared by: William T. McKean Wildlife Researcher Approved by: Donald G. Smith Assistant Wlldlife Researcher Date J_u_l~y~, __1~9_66 _ Harold R. Shepherd Project Leader Wayne W. Sand fort Game Research Chief Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �3uly, 1966 - 49 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO --------~~~~----------- Project No. W-10l-R-8 Work Plan No. 2 Title of Job: Period Covered: Personnel: Game Range Investigations Job No. 3 Rodent Effects on Deer Winter Range April 1, 1965 through March 31, 1966 Harold R. Shepherd, Dave Bowden ABSTRACT Field work has been completed on a study made in southwestern Colorado by the Colorado Department of Game, Fish and Parks to learn how rodents affect deer winter range in a pinon-juniper type. During this, the tenth year of study, a statistical analysis of transect data for all years of the study was complete. Other long-term objectives scheduled for completion during the current segment were not accomplished. ��- 51 - RODENT EFFECTS ON DEER WINTER RANGE Harold R. Shepherd Introduction Many winter deer ranges in Colorado are deteriorating. They are often marked by the die-off of woody shrubs and by a scarcity of seedling shrubs. Game biologists have become accustomed to blaming this condition on over-use by big game and livestock. However, there is reason to suspect rodents may be partially responsible, for rodent damaged browse plants have been found in some areas. It is suspected that in some areas rodents may be largely responsible for the scarcity of bitterbrush and mountain mahogany seedlings. In any sound program of game-range management all of the factors contributing to range use and deterioration should be taken into consideration, including the effects of rodents. A study was needed to learn how rodents affect deer winter range. Such a study was begun in August of 1956 in Mesa Verde National Park. Field work was terminated in September of 1964. This is the tenth Job Completion Report on the study. It reports the progress made during the period April 1, 1965 through March 31, 1966, toward accomplishment of the long-term objectives of the study. Previous reports were published in Game Research Reports of the Federal Aid nivision of the Colorado Department of Game, Fish and Parks for the years 1957 through 1965. Objectives The long-term, over-all objective is to study how rodents affect the composition, ground cover, and reproduction of vegetation in a pinon-juniper type deer range, with particular emphasis on browse plants. The objectives for the period covered by this report are as follows: 1. To complete study. laboratory work on the food-habits portion of the 2. To complete the compilation, summarization, and statistical analysis of food habits, transect, and census data. 3. To prepare a final report on the results 4. To publish Management the results of the study in the Journal or the Journal of Mammalogy. of the study. of Wildlife �- 52 - Results A final statistical analysis of transect data for all years of the study was completed. This was the only objective of the study accomplished this segment. My assignment as Project Leader, involving new and added duties and responsibilities and a move to new headquarters, did not leave enough time to complete the study as planned. Prepared Date: by: Harold R. Shepherd Wildlife Researcher July, 1966 Approved by: Wayne W. Sand fort Game Research Chief Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �July, - 53 - JOB COMPLETION RESEARCH Sta te of Project PROJECT 1966 REPORT SEGMENT .::;C.=.O=LO=.;RA:::..:.:DO::..:::... _ Game Range Investigations W-10l-R-8 No. Work Plan No. Job NQ. 3 Title of Job: Period Covered: Personnel: 3 Browse Transect April 1, 1965 to March Analysis and Application 31, 1966. Kenneth C. Dillinger, Student Assistant; Bertram D. Baker, Assistant Wildlife Researcher. Cooperating: Carl Lind, former Colorado State Wildlife Specialist, Denver; Neil McCleery, Assistant District Manager, Craig; Stan Colby, Area Manager, Meeker; and Range Aids (Student Assistants) Michael Dole and Pete Scorup, all of Bureau of Land Management; U. S. Forest Service Region 2 Staff Officer Milt Wright, and Rio Grande National Forest Range and Wildlife Staff Officer Ron Schulz. ABSTRACT Preparation of two-inch scale quarter quad and township plat vegetative type maps for final reproduction was continued from surveys on the gunnison and Rio Grande National Forests. Map proofing was done on quarter quads 23 N.E., 25 N.E. and N.W., 37 N.W., and 38 N.E. and S.E. of Gunnison big game range analysis in Game Units 52-55, 63, and 65-67. Also, eleven township plats involving Unit 76 on the Rio Grande were reviewed and proofed. Summaries of browse range condition transect results from Grande MesaUncompahgre surveys were prepared for Units 61 and 62. Paced Parker range condition transects were summarized for Rio Grande Units 68, 76, and 79-82. Non-transected type write-ups were summarized for Units 71, 77, and 78 from San Juan National Forest surveys. Copies of all summaries were made in adequate quantity to fill needs of Management when the summaries, maps, and other data are finally combined within Game Unit file folders. About 149,900 acres of winter range in Game Unit 22 were type mapped and analyzed. A three-man crew of student assistants provided the main effort in this joint BLM-Department summer 1965 field survey. With occasional help from supervisors of both agencies, 140 browse range condition transects were established and read, and 108 non-transected type write-ups were prepared. �- 54 - Tables are presented that give cursory analyses of results of transects. Despite drawbacks of making conclusions before the Unit 22 survey is complete, information now indicates that browse qualities and quantities are medium or fair, and vigor is low or poor. Soil stability ratings were found to be mostly in the medium category. Also, browse range condition transect data indicate that serviceberry, big sagebrush, and true mountain mahogany, in that order of importance, are carrying the load of forage supply for wintering deer on the Little Hills Triangle portion of Unit 22. �- 55 - BROWSE TRANSECT ANALYSIS AND APPLICATION Bertram D. Baker Summarization of transect data nd map proofing and review was continued in this, the fifth year of cooperative big game range analysis with four southwestern Colorado National Forests. Because of transfers of all key personnel from Forest staffs, much of the job of proofing first drafts of range vegetation type maps was assumed by the Department. Included in the mapwork were the computations of type acreages, either initially or in check of what had been done, to conform with revised objectives of presenting acreages by landownership categories of National Forest and private lands. A cooperative field survey of Game Unit 22 was initiated with the Bureau of Land Management in 1965. In this first year, about 75 percent of the Little Hills Triangle portion of Unit 22 was covered. OBJECTIVES 1. To prepare for final reproduction two-inch scale range vegetation type maps of big game winter ranges from cooperative Gunnison, Grand MesaUncompahgre, Rio Grande, and San Juan National Forest surveys. 2. To summarize big game range surveys transect data for inclusion in Game Unit binder file folders. 3. To perform cooperative big game winter range analysis survey with the Bureau of Land Management on the Little Hills Triangle portion of Game Unit 22. TECHNIQUES Methodology that was employed in the Unit 22 survey has been detailed in the interagency approved big game range analysis instructions and presented by Denney (1962). The only significant diversion was in the non-transected type write-up form (Baker 1964) that had been an addition used in National Forest surveys. This form was further changed to include space for recording pellet group count data (See Figure 1). . �- 56 Figure 1 BIG GAME RANGE ANALYSIS Record for Non-Transected Management Unit Key Area B.L.M. Dist. and Unit DatI" ------------------------------- _____________ Record Identification Types Type Designation _ Aerial Photo Number ------------------ Examiners _ on Photo or Map (Letter Alphabetically by Photo--A,B,C,ETC.) Area Location and Description _ Plant Species/Present; (Overs tory, Shrubs, Ground Plants) Hedging on Available Br ows a by Species: Barking of Aspen; (Light, Moderate, Heavy; designate if current or old) Not Browse Transected Because* Remarks PELLET GROUP COUNT Plot 1 2 Elk Slope Aspect Summer Spring Plot Size Deer Winter Fa11 Sumrner Spring ----- __ Other (~~pf!cif~) Summer Win::er Spring Fall -.-- Hinter Fall 3 I '+ .-- 5 6 7 -- 8 9 10 ! ; To"tals I PG/A . i~'< Ord inar Ll.y thLs form and procedure are used for aspen ana, COIl1.£er types hav ing little or no understory browse. Note: Under remarks, indicate the relative value of the area with regard to cover, spring range, calving area, proximity of iraportant feed (Key Areas) Etc. .- �- 57 - In 1965 and 1966, I served and am serving on the Sub-committee on Big Game Range Analysis Procedures. This Sub-committee is within the organization of Department, Bureau of Land Management, U. S. Forest Service, Bureau of Sport Fisheries and Wildlife, and Soil Conservation Service personnel known as the "Interagency Committee on Wildlife Ecology". Sub-committee activities had dealt mainly with changes in extensive browse utilization check procedures but were expanded in 1965, and early 1966, to include possible approaches to standardization of forms for recording and summarizing results of big game range analysis surveys. Figures 2-6 are samples of tentative forms which are undergoing testing for possible inclusion in the analysis instructions. FINDINGS Map Preparation Gunnison National Forest.--The proofing of two-inch scale quarter quad maps was continued from the 1964-65 segment (Baker 1966). Quarter quad vegetation type maps that had type line accuracy reviewed and type acreage computations made and recorded include 23 N.E., 25 N.E. and N.W., 37 N.W., and 38 N.E. and S.E. These quarter quads were returned to Gunnison National Forest personnel who, in turn, submitted them to the Region 2 Map Section in Denver for final processing. National Forest portions of Game Units 52-55, 63, and 65-67 are involved in these game winter range analyses. Grand Mesa-Uncompahgre National Forest.--Finished copies of two-inch scale three-color township plats from surveys accomplished on this Forest have been received. If these plats are accurate, the summarlzlng of type acreage and transect data for the 1966-67 job segment can begin. Rio Grande National Forest.--Several copies of three-color township plat maps of 11 townships were received in the 1965-66 segment. The townships involve Game Unit 76, exclusive of portions acquired from Unit 80 in 1965 boundary changes. Due to errors in these maps, a complete review has been made, and maps will be held until means can be found to rerun acceptable final reproductions. Compilation of vegetative type acreages by landownership was done as proofwork progressed. However, because of boundary changes for Units 76 and 80, these data will not be complete until maps for additional townships have been obtained. Because of wildlife staff vacancies, the Rio Grande National Forest people have not been able to proof township plats before final maps are printed. For an accurate job, plats must be proofed even though the final report will be delayed. If the work is ever to be completed, apparently, I will have to finish the proofing and correcting. San Juan National Forest.--The transfer of air photo information to two-inch quarter quads is being done by National Forest personnel at Durango. This job is about three-fourths done. Plans call for Region 2 Map Section personnel to finish processing data on three-color township plats. �- 58 Figure 2 U. S. DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE FOREST SERVICE 2600 SUMMARY OF ACREAGE OF BIG GAME WINTER RANGE BY VEGETATIVE TYPES AND OWNERSHIP Management Unit Vegetat ion Type Totals R2-2600-8 1/66 Gross Area of ~Management Unit ~ FS BlM Winter Range - Acreage by Ownership State Private Total _ ! I �Figure 3 U. S. DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE FOREST SERVICE 2600 HORK SHEET FOR SUMMARIZING AGE AND HEDGING CLASSES FROM PACED TRANSECTS Unit No. Transect Write-up Number Key Area *Species Young No. ofo AGE CLASSES Mature Decadent No. % No. ofo HEDGING CLASSES Light Mod • Heavy No. % No. ofo No. ~ % MANAGEMENT IMPLICATIONS Compo -- '01 \0 - *List R2-2600-9 1/66 only those species desirable for proper management. �Figure 4 U. S. DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE 2600 Forest Service ACREAGE SUMMARIZATION WORK SHEET BROWSE CONDITION AND TREND TRANSECT DATA UNIT NO. _ Soil Medium Low ~rite-Up No. Acres % Total Acres % Total High Acres KEY AREA;..,;,. ' Low % Total Acres % Total Composition Medium % Acres Total High Acres _ Low % Total Acres % Total Density Medium High % % Acres To- Acres Total' tal 0\. o R2-2600-11 1/66 �- 61 Figure 5 U. S. DEPARTMENTOF AGRICULTURE FOREST SERVICE 2600 SUMMARIZATIONFOR AGE & HEDGING CLASSES BY KEY AREA Management Unit Species ~2-2600-1 1/66 No. of !rranse~ts No. ~ AGE CLASSES Mature Decadent Young .'I> No. No. No. ~ ~- .Key Area ~ ~--- HEDGING CLASSES Light Moderate Heavy No. No. No. % ~ ~ �2600 TREND IN CONDITION - BIG GAME RANGE Management Unit Type Key Area. Acreage Transect Location _ _ Year and Writeup Number Composition Density RiVigor Soil Stability '''Cummulative Pellet Groups Remarks: (Condition indications, improvement & management suggestions, etc.) Continue on back. *Show number and size of plots. R2-2600-12 1/66 �- 63 - Data Reproduction, Compilation and Summarizatiori Gunnison National Forest.--The further processing of big game winter range analysis transect data must await the delivery of finished maps, due for distribution in 1966. Now complete are up-dated elk and deer season and kill summaries that include information for the year 1964. These summaries were prepared originally in quadruplicate for all game units of the Gunnison area surveys, as well as for units involving the other three National Forests (Baker 1966). Grand Mesa-Uncompahgre National Forest.--Summaries of 73 and 21 browse range condition transects were prepared, respectively, for Game Units 61 and 62. Single Xerox copies of these summaries will be supplied to the National Forest. Rio Grande National Forest.--Paced Parker range condition transect summaries were prepared and typed in quintuplicate for Units 68, 76, and 79-82. Xerox copies of these summaries and browse range condition transect summaries that were completed in previous segments were sent to the National Forest. At that tUne, transect data from Unit 80 to Unit 76 records were transferred in accord with 1965 boundary changes between the units, mentioned previously. San Juan National Forest.--Summaries of non-transected type write-ups were prepared for Game Units 71, 77, and 78. Processing of these included checking computations and typing final drafts; single copies of summaries were forwarded to Bob Ridings, Range and Wildlife Staff Officer, in Durango. Cooperative Big Game Range Analysis Field Survey White River Resource Area - Bureau of Land Management.--Renewed cooperation on big game winter range analysis with the Bureau of Land Management was initiated in 1965. Using standard procedures (see paragraphs on Techniques), a survey of big game winter ranges on the Little Hills Triangle portion of Game Unit 22 (Piceance Creek) got under way with a field training session June 8-11, 1965, at the Little Hills Game Experiment Station. Field work continued until September 10. Assistants Dillinger, Dole, and Scorup, worked full-time. Dave Morris and Craig Ludwig contributed able, short-term help in the field work. Craig District Manager Keith Norris, Assistant District Manager Neil McCleery, and White River Resource Area Manager Stan Colby of Meeker served in supervisory capacities for BLM crew-members. McCleery assumed most of the supervisory load. Former BLM State Wildlife Specialist Carl Lind and I conducted the training; and along with McCleery, we made individual and/or �- 64 - joint periodic follow-up field inspections and progress checks. A house trailer was furnished by each agency for living and field-office quarters. The trailers were used at Little Hills Station and as field headquarters at the Thomas Cow Camp location, later on in the sunnner. At the start, it was apparent that all game-used winter ranges within the Piceance Creek basin could be classified as "key" areas. However, to help locate transects, an arbitrary division of the Little Hills Triangle was made according to geographic features. Therefore, four key areas were established, described as follows: Rattlesnake Key Area,--bounded by State Highway 64 on the north, Piceance Creek on the west, Dry Fork of Piceance on the south, and Hay-VT Gulches on the east; Greasewood Key Area,--bounded by Dry Fork on the north, Piceance Creek on the west and south, 'and Collins-Little Corral Gulches on the east; Thirteen-mile Key Area,--bounded by Dry Fork-Timber Gulches on the north, Collins-Little Corral Gulches on the west, Piceance Creek on the south, and State Highway 13 on the east; and Segar Mountain Key Area,--bounded by State Highway 64 on the north, Hay-VT Gulches on the west, Dry Fork-Timber Gulches on the south, and State Highway 13 on the east. Student Assistant Ken Dillinger was assigned the task of periodically transferring notations made on 1:20,000 scale air photos to two-inch scale air photo mosaics, and thence to velum overlays. Thus, a vegetative type map of the area surveyed was ready soon after field work ended. Multiple copies of a finished and refined map will be made when contemplated 1966 survey work is completed in Unit 22. A total of approximately 149,900 acres was surveyed in the 1965 field season. Also, 140 browse range condition transects were established and read, and 108 non-~ransected type write-ups were made. This output was highly satisfactory and will yield very useful information hitherto unavailable on vegetative types, areas of heavy use by game, and extent and importance of browse species. Although information is not yet complete, some generalities can be made and presented: Types 5 and 9 (Tables 1 and 2), having a wide variety of species, dominate the vegetative cover. The high-value browse species present on this area have been known, but these records further emphasize the presence of the better species such as true mountainmahogany (Cercocarpus montanus), serviceberry (Amelanchier spp.), antelope bitterbrush (Purshia tridentata), and the highly important supporting intermediate species, big sagebrush (Artemisia tridentata), Douglas and dwarf rabbitbrushes (Chrysothamnus viscidflorus, ~. depressus), Gambel oak (Quercus gambeli), and fourwing saltbush (Atriplex canescens). Pinon pine (Pinus edulis) and junipers (Juniperus sPP.) are abundant and widely distributed. Because valuable browse is associated with these trees, extra benefit to game results wherever cover and forage types are combined. �- 65 - Table l.--Summary of 140 browse range condition transects, Little Hills Triangle deer winter ranges, Game Unit 22, Summer, 1965. Vegetative Type Number and Name Number of Transects Associated Species** Type Species* P,J,Artr,Save,AME, SYM,Atco,Putr,Teca,Gusa, 37 Eula,Chde Chna,Quga,Chvd, 4 - Sagebrush or Rabbitbrush Agsm, Stco,AGR***, Bogr SYM,PER,Chna,Chde,Teca P,J,AME,Artr,Cemo, 56 Putr,Quga,Chvd,Stco, 5 - Browse A sm CAR PRU 6 - Conifer 1 DF,J,SYM,AME,Quga 9 - Pinon-Juniper 44 P,J,DF,AME,Artr,Cemo, Quga,Atco,Chna,Chde,Arno, Putr,SYM,Chvd,AGR*** Teca,Eula,Mare 13 - Saltbush Artr,SYM 1 Atco,Chvd,Agsm Chvd 1 Save Artr 14 - Greasewood Total 140 * Species used only in type designations but also listed variously as associated species from compositions arrived at by transecting. ** Species never used in type designations but recorded in compositions by transecting. *** Various mixtures of Agsm and Agin or other Agropyron. Table 2.--Summary of 108 non-transected type write-ups, Little Hills Triangle deer winter ranges, Game Unit 22, Summer, 1965. Vegetative Type Number and Name Number of Write-ups 4 - Sagebrush or Rabbitbrush 27 5 - Browse 25 9 - Pinon-Juniper 55 14 - Greasewood Total 1 108 Type Species* P,J,Artr,AME,Atco, Chvd,Eula,Save,Quga, AGR, Stco,Agsm,Orhy, Brte P,J,DF,AME,Artr,Cemo, Putr,Quga,Agsm,Stco, CAR P,J,DF,AME,Artr,Cemo, SYM,Quga,Stco,AGR Save,Artr Associated Species** Chna,SYM,Atca,Teca,Putr Chna,Chvd,SYM,PRU,RIB Atco,Chna,Chvd,EPH,Putr, Teca,Orhy,Saka,Sihy Agsm,Sihy *Species used only in type designations but also listed variously as associated species by occurrence. **Species never used in type designations but recorded only as occurring. �- 66 - Table 3 presents a composite of ratings from the 140 browse range condition transects. Note the preponderance of medium and high composition ratings obtained. This is further evidence of the generally good quality of browse on the Triangle portion of Unit 22. Table 3.--Summary of ratings for browse and soil, 140 browse range condition transects, Little Hills Triangle deer winter ranges, Game Unit 22, Sunnner, 1965. Item Browse Composition No. of Transects % of Total Browse Density No. of Transects % of Total Browse Vigor No. of Transects % of Total Soil Stability No. of Transects % of Total * Low Rating Medium High Total 29 21 71 51 40 28 140 100 45 32 88 63 7 5 140 100 105 75 24 17 11 8 140 100 7 5 120 86 13 9 140 100 Overall or Average Rating* 2.08 1.73 1.32 2.04 Computed on basis of Low=l, Medium=2, and High=3. Browse density ratings averaged low-medium with most falling within the medium category. Vigor ratings averaged only low; this is important. Evidentally, browse has not yet recovered from damage received in former years, from drouth and heavy utilization by deer and livestock. Although ratings data have not received complete analysis, it is of interest that of 11 transects (Table 3) that were rated high in vigor, six were rated high on the basis of big sagebrush singly and three on the basis of having big sagebrush co-rated with other species. Nearly pure stands of big sagebrush growing in drainage bottoms or on uplands, frequently yield tall plants. For some undetermined reason, deer do not prefer forage produced on these larger plants. Because they are browsed less or because of inherent plant differences, plants on such sites grow vigorously, and vigor ratings arrived at on the basis of big sagebrush might lead to erroneous conclusions. Consequently, each transect (or group, if more than one) by individual vegetative type, must receive careful examination. This approach will be followed, if possible, in future big game winter range analysis summarization, despite broad-based conclusions that have been given here and in previous reports. �- 67 - Table 4. -- Frequency of shrubs listed as key species from vigor ratings on 140 browse range condition transects, Game Unit 22 winter ranges, 1965. Key Species Chvd Chna PRU AME Putr Quga Artr Cemo 1 1 2 Frequency* 70 48 4 87 7 * Vigor computations are made and scored for all species designated as being key on a transect. With the rating for browse vigor for the transect being provided by the lowest rated key species (sing.), or species (plu.), the latter happening frequently, the total of frequencies added across does not equal 140. Table 4 lists the relative frequency with which shrub species occurred as key species in transect ratings for vigor. This does not present exactly the true picture, because some species such as mountainmahogany (Cemo) and bitterbrush (Putr) invariably were low in vigor. With the lowest one(s) on each transect providing the rating, occasionally such species as big sagebrush (Artr) and serviceberry (AME) did not receive recognition in this complitation because they were rated higher. Regardless of inadequacies in this analysis, brush, and mountainmahogany furnish, in that order, most of the forage for wintering deer on Little Hills Triangle ranges. LITERATURE CITED Baker, Bertram D. 1964. Browse transect analysis and application, p. 90. Research Report, Jan., 1964. Colo. Dept. Game, Fish and Parks. Game ____~------~~-~. 1966. Browse transect analysis and application. Game Research Report (Report in preparation). Colo. Dept. Game, Fish and Parks. Denney, Richard N. 1962. Browse transect analysis and application, p. 51-96. Game Research Report, April, 1962. Colorado Dept. Game, Fish and Parks. Prepared by: Bertram D. Baker Approved by: Assistant Wildlife Researcher Harold R. Shepherd Project Leader Date: July, 1966 Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator ��July, 1966 - 69 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO ------~~~~~----------- Project No. W-10l-R-8 Work Plan No. 4 Title of Job: Game Range Investigations Job No. la Inventory of Range Manipulation Projects in Colorado Period Covered: April 1, 1965 to March 31, 1966 Personnel: The author wishes to acknowledge the assistance of all members of the Interagency Committee on Wildlife Habitat. Further, he appreciates the help of Glenn Rogers and personnel in the Southwest and Northwest Regional offices of the Game, Fish and Parks Department. Forest Service personnel participating in this job included Tom Lewis, Bill Conklin, Jim Lee, and Jackie McCraken of the Gunnison; Ladd Frary of the Grand Mesa-Uncompahgre, Bob Ridings of the San Juan, and Bob Pizel of the Rio Grande. Bureau of Land Management personnel included Robert Vecchia, Dan Rathbun, and Charles Janecek of Montrose; Dwain Tabb of Denver, Dwaine Hillberry of Craig, O. B. Herrick of Durango, and Ed Dobrinz of Grand Junction. ABSTRACT A field form was devised to record detailed information about each revegetation project done in Colorado. This form was studied and approved by the members of the Interagency Committee on Wildlife Habitat Studies. Project information was collected from six National Forests and seven B.L.M. Districts. Twenty-six project sites were visited and photographed. ��- 71 - INVENTORY OF RANGE MANIPULATION PROJECTS IN COLORADO Dona 1d G. Smith Introduction The manipulation of western range vegetation has become so widespread as to cause grave concern among wildlife people. This concern is primarily due to extensive conversion of brush1ands to grasslands. The resulting effect upon wildlife is not always apparent and has led to considerable controversy. Attempts to solve this controversy by intensive research of habitat requirements of wildlife are being made throughout the country. However, a more immediate need of our land managers is to determine which revegetation practices are best for mUltiple use. The purpose of this study is to locate each range revegetation project affecting wildlife habitat in Colorado. Certain of these will be chosen for intensive study to determine wildlife reactions to the ecological change created by the revegetation practices. The remainder will be given a general evaluation and recorded for future reference. Certain information will be transferred to data processing forms for rapid compilation by participating agencies. Because this job requires the cooperative effort of Federal and State agencies, the Interagency Committee on Wildlife Habitat Studies was formed to provide general guidance. Agencies represented are the U. S. Forest Service, U. S. Bureau of Land Management, U. S. Bureau of Sport Fisheries and Wildlife, U. S. Soil Conservation Service, Rocky Mountain Forest and Range Experiment Station (USFS), and the Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department. Objectives 1. To compile information on range manipulation projects which have modified game ranges in Colorado. 2. To develop a data processing system for summarizing this information. Procedures 1. Compilation of iriformation a. Devise a field form to record data. �- 72 - b. Visit Federal and State offices throughout Colorado to obtain the information from project files. c. Interview persons familiar with the projects to obtain data on range use, success of project, effect on animals, etc. d. If necessary, visit the project sites with personnel familiar with them and obtain fair appraisals. e. Photograph the areas from a described photo-hub so that they can be re-photographed later for comparison. f. Map the areas on aerial photographs and on planimetric base maps for reference~ Record location of photo-hubs and vegetative transects on these maps and photos. 2. g. Prepare a filing system at the G.F.&P. Research Center in Fort Collins. This requires individual folders, for each project, tb hold the field form, aerial photograph, ground photographs, and any other pertinent information. Copies should be made and sent to the respective Game, Fish and Parks Regional Offices. h. Prepare an index for this filing system for rapid location of project files. Data processing a. Determine the best method of data processing by interviewing persons familiar with this field. Check existing systems as well as new ones. b. Devise a code to permit the conversion of the English language on the field forms to machine language for processing. c. Transfer the information from the field forms to the selected data processing form. d. File the data processing forms at the G.F.&P. Research Center in Fort Collins. The statistical laboratory at Colorado State University is available for the processing. Findings Compilation of Information Field forms.--A field form was devised to record information about the revegetation projects. This form was studied and approved by the Interagency Committee on Wildlife Habitat Studies. A sample is submitted (Figure 1). �- 73 Figure 1. Field fo;m used to record data on habitat manipulation projects GFP ifo2 Page 1 I HABITAT MANIPULATION PROJECTS IN COLORADO Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department PROJECT DESIGNATION 1. Project Number II Project Name LAND STATUS III ~ _ ---------------------------_ _ _ LOCATION 8. Game Mgmt. Unit No. _ ~~------------P •M. _ 7. G.F.&P. Region~ W.C.O.District9. County 10. Drainage~ Township Range Sec t Lons IV Allotment District or Unit 2. National Forest~. 3. B.L.M. District 4. State Agency 5. Private (Name & Address) 6. S.c. S. Distr.ic t. SITE DESCRIPTION II. VegetaUve Type- Dominant Species, _ 12. Elevation~ 13, Topography, _ 14. Percent Slope_________ 15. Exposure. 17. Erosion Condition~ 16. Soil Type _ Range Condition~ 18. Forage Production(Lb./Acre) Shrubs Herbaceous Plants Determined by: 19. Vegetative Density Litter Bare Ground Date ~Agency _ _ _ _ Remarks: V CLIMATIC DATA 20. Avg. Annual Precipitation~ Seasonal Distribution~ _ 21. Avg. Annual Temperature Length of Growing Season~ _ Station Reportin.&- _ 23. Season of Use. Grazing System!- _ _ Avg. Snow Depth on Area VI RANGE USE (Before Treatment) 22. Class of Livestock~ 24. ·Carrying Capacity Remarks: ------------------------------------------------------- 25. Kind of Hildlife. Determined by: Remarks: Season of Use Amount of Use. ~ Date _ Agency _ _ �To RQ.1Ijelj <~~ <, J~ .. ~ »: \~\ ~ ~ ~,\ ~ .f' • , \ '0 YELlO'w ~~o='-T.I ~ ---~ .- '\\ j 'I -;.:: ~~-:---; 71'1/ '- 1/ ., '\ \h:"','''''''on \'V , ~ ~~~.~-~ ~o l·tHe. I--ll.,l1..S ~ \ft--I)) v,~J:' ~I.IY ..? ~.pd ~~ \,.t 6:C"k Creek ~ !ij \ __ ~ ~/ r-..::::=»: R w," ~ c- /. i---- ---11"'","'-- ~.-.-- /1'.'''' r>: 'f": U ff(<C \\ ';)ROle To ~ " ~ N v.Z /\ .: ~ ../': l~'/;~ . i( \ • O_~l L----:::-_c'J f---=-c::r:...._,_ ;~..»c: SCClIQ ~! - _i I·nch:::22mi! .... .J.~ Figure 1. ~C'~'3 r 1/ MEE<EtL/ ../'./ '" To ~~. V@1/ ~~ : t ~'-" ~ V {f/' G,~l(;h.,''':.'.::-::-J,< ~'( ~ t Sketch of area near Meeker, Colorado showing locations cf study areas. 1- �- 75 - It is divided into eight categories to include (1) project designation, (2) land status, (3) location, (4) site description, (5) climatic data, (6) range use, (7) treatment, and (8) effect of treatment. There are 42 questions which will require 78 punched holes in an IBM card. Additional space is provided for remarks, more detailed information, and reference material. Office visits.--An attempt to record all Forest Service projects from the Regional Office in Denver proved unsatisfactory because no 9ne was familiar with project details. A visit was made to the G.F.&P. Southwest Region office to coordinate this job with work this office has done in the past. Some information on most of the projects in the Southwest Region was obtained from a record of "Vegetation Removal By Land Use Agencies" compl.led by Claude White, Regional Biologist. Evaluation of range revegetation in this region is now the responsibility of Erro11 Ryland, Senior Game Biologist. Information was gathered from the following National Forests during the summer of 1965: Grand Mesa-Uncompahgre, Gunnison, Rio Grande, Routt, San Juan, and the White River. Brief visits were made to the Roosevelt and Arapaho National Forests to test the revised field form on several of their projects. The B.L.M. offices visited included Denver (District 2), Montrose (District 3), Durango (District 4), Craig (District 6), and Grand Junction (District 7). Project information from Meeker (District 1) and San Luis Valley (District 8) in Canyon City was obtained from the Craig B.L.M. office and the Southwest Region G.F.&P. office, respectively. Formal visits to Meeker and Canyon City were not made. The procedure for collection of data was similar in each office. The supervisor was contacted and the job explained. He would provide office space and small scale ~aps, grant permission to use the files, and introduce me to the person responsible for revegetation files. This person produced the desired files and answered questions relative to the projects. Information was then transferred from project records to the field forms. Most of this information was about site descriptions, maps of the areas, and sometimes brief evaluations of the projects. Aerial photos, vegetative analyses, and livestock data are usually kept in separate files which were not studied. At first, an attempt was made to record only projects affecting deer winter range. This proved unsatisfactory because it took too much time, and persons familiar with the projects were seldom available. Also, the definition of deer winter range remains controversial. I feel that deer winter range should include the intermediate range which is used by deer most winters. Also, I believe that no range manipulations detrimental to big game should be done on critical winter range. Because of these difficulties, each project affecting wildUfe was recorded for further work and priorities will be given after the data have been evaluated. The time required for each office visit was usually two or three days. �- 76 - Interviews.--The field form (Figure 1) provides space for an evaluation of the project area and use by animals before and after treatment. Persons from offices of the Gunnison National Forest and the Montrose B.L.M. were interviewed to evaluate the projects. Sometimes these persons were unfamiliar with the project area prior to treatment. A major problem was that this inventory was being done during the summer when most of the personnel familiar with the projects were in the field and unavailable for consultation. Therefore, no further attempt was made to interview persons during the visits to the other offices. I planned to interview them during the winter when they would more likely be available. Field visits.--Field visits were made to project sites where wildlife habitat had been destroyed or browse plantings made. If possible, a wildlife staff assistant would accompany me. Notes were taken of the apparent success of the project and possible effect upon wildlife. Several proposed project sites were visited on the Gunnison and the Uncompahgre National Forests. Projects visited were the Chicken Brush spraying and the Alkali Lake seeding in North Park (District 2), the Garrison Chaining west of Montrose (District 3), Grade and Hindmarsh chainings west of Durango (District 4), Villa Grove and Poncha Pass sprayings in the San Luis Valley (District 5). Forest Service projects included Kannah Creek chaining and browse planting, Land's End and Anderson's sprayings (Grand Mesa); Mudholes, Smith POint, Campbell POint, and Dominquez sprayings (Uncompahgre); Cabin Creek, Flat Top, and Red Mountain sprayings (Gunnison); Triangle, Cat Creek, Fox Creek, Bighorn, and Little Kerber Creek sprayings (Rio Grande), Little Rock Creek and Blacktail Creek sprayings (Routt); Spring Creek spraying (San Juan); Cottonwood Pass and Gypsum Creek sprayings on the White River. Photographs.--Photographs of some areas were taken although no photo-hubs were established. These photographs will be placed in the project files. Photo-hubs have been established on recent Forest Service projects, and copies of this photo coverage can be obtained. Projects without this coverage will have to be photographed later. Mapping.--Projects were outlined and identified on small scale (~' = 1 mile) maps donated by the Forests and Districts. These help in locating the areas. Detailed mapping on larger scaled township or allotment maps remains to be done. Filing system.--A Research Center. Filing index.--No filing system has not been set up at the Fort Collins filing index has been devised. �- 77 - Data Processing Method.--The method of processing the data has not been decided. The B.L.M. uses transcript cards (IBM) to process their data, and these have been satisfactory. The advantages of these cards are: They are durable, nonerasible, easily interpreted, and familiar to most everyone. The disadvantages are: they are limited to 80 holes, require an intermediate step (keypunching), the process is relatively slow and relatively expensive ($1.00 to $2.00 per thousand cards). The chief objection to use of the cards by our project is that they can not record enough information. Miss Marilyn Doig, Supervisor of the C.S.U. Statistical Laboratory, and Mr. Donald W. Campbell, Instructor for the Department of Business at C.S.U., were interviewed to help decide the best method. They were not satisfied with the "mark sense" cards because of the limited space they provided and other problems. They suggested the Optical "mark page" Reader would be simple to use and provide more space. This form (8~" x 11") can be fed directly into the computor or back into the IBM system, if desired. Colorado State University has the facilities to process this system. Richard Denney is using this form on his elk check station study. One of the latest developments is the O.C.R. (Optical Character Read) which uses letters instead of marks or holes, thereby eliminating the necessity of converting to machine language. This requires special equipment which is not now available at C.S.U. The possible use of tapes for this survey was not investigated. Code.--No code has been devised. The B.L.M. does have a code to process their projects and this should be studied before a new one is devised. Filing system.--No filing system for storing data processing forms has been set up at the Fort Collins Research Center. Prepared by: Donald G. Smith Assistant Wildlife Researcher Date: July, 1966 Approved by: Harold R. Shepherd Project Leader Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator ��- 79 - July, 1966 FJNAL REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of --.:::C..::O=LO::.:.RA:.=.::OO::.::.... _ Game Range Investigations Project No. W-10l-R •.• 8 Work Plan No. 4 Title of Job: Chemical Control of Rabbitbrush Period Covered: April 1, 1962 through March 31, 1966 Personnel: Job No. Donald G. Smith ABSTRACT Various herbicides were tested in northwestern Colorado to determine which one was most effective tn killing rubber rabbitbrush (Chrysothamnus nauseosus (Pallas) Britt.). Plants were treated in 1962, 1963, and 1964. The experiment on Yellow Creek showed that Tordon was superior to 2,4-DP were ineffective on rabbitbrush. The experiment on Sulphur Creek was a failure because no rabbitbrush plants were killed. Time of application still remains the secret of effective control of re-sprouting species. ��- 81 Chemical Control of Rabbitbrush Donald G. Smf t h : Introduction Effective control of rabbitbrush continues to plague the range manager even with the many herbicides on the market today. According to most studies, best results have been obtained with 2,4-D. However, many attempts to control rabbit brush in Colorado have met with failure. One reason is that plant susceptibility to 2,4-D is dependent upon a favorable combination of environmental, phenological, and physiological factors (Hyder, Sneva, and Freed, 1962). Therefore, time of application is very crucial to the success of this herbicide. The purpose of this study was to discover a herbicide which would kill rabbitbrush without being dependent upon so many unpredictable factors. Study Area The study was done on two sites, approximately 35 miles apart, in Rio Blanco County in northwestern Colorado. The Yellow Creek study area is located 29 miles west of Meeker in Section 24, TIN, R98W, 6th P.M. Sampling was confined to a field of almost pure rubber rabbitbrush (Chrysothamnus nauseosus (Pallas) Britt.}l located about 3/4 mile south of the confluence of Pinto Gulch and Yellow Creek (Figure I). The elevation is 6100 feet, and the average annual precipitation 12.8 inches. An understory of Giant wild rye (Elymus cinereus Scribn. & Merr.) and western wheatgrass (Agropyron smithii Rybd.} was present on the valley bottom. Climax species, pinon pine (Pinus edulis Engelm.) and Utah juniper (Juniperus utahensis Engelm.), cover the surrounding hills. This field is part of an abandoned homestead which has been invaded by rabbitbrush. It has been burned several times causing the brush to become very thick. The land now belongs to the Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department and is leased to the BurkeI;.J Brothers to .supplement their cattle o~eration. The Sulphur Creek study area is located approximately 7~ miles north of Meeker in Section 13, T2N, R94W, 6th P.M. This is on deeded land belonging to Jim Dodo. Sampling was confined to a small area, lying on the west side of the road, about l~ miles north of Dodo's headquarters (Figure 2). The area is used as a winter feed ground for cattle and is overgrown with rubber rabbitbrush, big sagebrush (Artemisia tridentata Nutt.), tall larkspur (Delphinium sp.), lambsquarters (Chenopodium album L.), Canada thistle (Cirsium arvense (L.) Rob.) and other annual weeds. The elevation of this area is 7200 feet, and the average annual precipitation is approximately 16 inches. The surrounding hills are covered with pinon pine and Utah juniper with a sparse understory of grasses. 1/ Taxonomic nomenclature is according to Harrington, H. D. Manual of the plants of Colorado. 1954. Sage Books, Denver, Colorado. �R:'~l~ ~~ }it .,,~y'. 0/ ~ " ~ d \ o 1 2 4 (, :10 Scale i inch=2imik2S Figure 1. Sketch of area near Meeker, Colorado showing locations of study areas. �- 83 - STUDY AREA Hcooooorters Jim Dodo Sulphur Cr<2<2k ~ N Figure 2 . Sketch of the Sulphur Creek study area �- 84 - 2,4-D at 6 lb/acre 8 2,4-DP at 4 lb/acre G 2,4,5-TP at 4 lb/acre G Tordon at 2 lb/acre GJ Tordon at 1 lb/acre Tordon at ~ lb/acre Tordon at t lb/acre Q x Q Q Tordon pellets at 1 lb/acre Q Tordon pellets at 2~ lb/acre GJ Tordon pellets at 5 lb/acre GJx Tordon pellets at 10 lb/acre GJ Kuron at 1 lb/acre Kuron at 5 lb/acre Kuron at 3 lb/acre 2,4-D at 5 lb/acre 2,4-D at 3 lb/acre Dacamine at 4 lb/acre x ~ o x X GJ G X GJ Yellow Creek Roa\\ GJ Figure 3 . Location of plots on the Yellow Creek Rabbitbrush Study Area. �- 85 - Procedure A total of 17 experimental plots were established on the Yellow Creek area: three in 1962, thirteen in 1963, and one in 1964 (Figure 3). These plots were 1/100 acre in size (21 x 21 ft.) and lay parallel to the fence. Corners were marked by electric fence poles on the west side and by green plastic ribbons attached to the fence on the east side. Boundaries were delineated by string lines. A 20-foot buffer zone was left between plots to eliminate spray drift. A long green plastic ribbon was placed on a tall corner fence post to identify the northern boundary of the area. Treatment descriptions were penciled on wooden tags attached to the top strand of the barbed wire fence. No plots were delineated on the Sulphur Creek area although the two treatments were separated by the trail leading west from the secondary road. Two gallons of 2,4-D were sprayed on approximately 1/20 acre north of this trail. Three gallons of Tordon were sprayed on a slightly larger area south of the trail. The first experiment was done on the Yellow Creek area June 22, 1962. Rabbitbrush was sprayed with three herbicides: 2,4-D at 6 1b/acre (acid equivalent); 2,4-DP at 4 1b/acre; and Kuron (2,4,5-TP) at 4 1b/acre. The time of spraying was between 6:00 and 6:30 a.m. The weather was cool (500600 F.) and clear with the humidity ranging from 48 to 60 percent. Rabbitbrush twigs averaged four inches in length. A 1:1 mixture of water and diesel oil was used as a carrier for the herbicides. A one gallon hand sprayer was used to apply the formulation at the rate of 150 gallons per acre. Survival counts were made one year later on July 19, 1963. Only those plants with no green foliage were considered dead. The second experiment on this area June 27, 1963, involved four herbicides applied at different rates. Rabbitbrush was treated with liquid Tordon at the rates of ~, ~, 1 and 2 1b/acre; with Tordon pellets at the rates of 1, 2~, 5 and 10 1b/acre; with Kuron at 1, 3 and 5 1b/acre; and 2,4-D at the rates of 3 and 5 1b/acre. Water was used as the carrier with a wetting agent, Tween 20, added for better penetration. Two Hudson garden variety hand sprayers were used to apply the formulation at the rate of 100 gal/acre. The pellets were broadcast by hand at the base of the plants. Spraying was done between the hours of 11:00 a.m. and 1:00 p.m. The weather was warm and clear, with gusty winds. Rabbitbrush twig length averaged six inches, and giant wild rye was headed out. Survival counts were made July 16, 1964. The third experiment was done on Sulphur Creek June 28, 1963, above the Dodo ranch headquarters. Rubber rabbitbrush was treated with 2,4-D at 4 1b/ acre. The carrier was water with a wetting agent added. Hand sprayers were used to apply the formulation at the rate of 100 gal/acre. The time of spraying was between 10:00 and 11:30 a.m., and the weather was hot, clear and windy. Rabbitbrush twig length averaged seven inches, and the larkspur was blooming. Survival counts were made July 23, 1964. �Figure 4. A view of the Yellow denseness of the rabbitbrush. Creek study area. Figure 5. Tordon, applied at the rate of 2 lb/acre, 30 percent of the rabbitbrush on this plot. Note the killed �Figure 6. This field of rabbitbrush was burned in 1965 by the lessee. The vegetative aspect was changed to giant wild rye. Figure 7. A new fence line was built through the study area on Yellow Creek and the final experiment destroyed. �- 90 - Acknowledgements The author is indebted to Dr. Donald F. Hervey, Associate Director, Colorado Agricultural Experiment Station, to Dr. Bruno Klinger, Associate Professor, and to Mr. Merrill Ross, Plant Physiologist, Department of Botany and Plant Pathology, Colorado State University, for supplying the wetting agent and all herbicides except 2,4-D. Gratitude is also extended to Mr. William McKean, Superintendent of the Little Hills Experiment Station, for the use of station facilities. Literature Cited Hyder, D. N., F. A. Sneva, and V. H. Freed. 1962. Susceptibility of big sagebrush and green rabbitbrush to 2,4-D as related to certain environmental, phenological, and physiological conditions. Weeds 10:288-295. ________________ , , D. O. Chilcote, and W. R. Furtick. 1958. Chemical control of rabbitbrush with emphasis upon simultaneous control of big sagebrush. Weeds 6:289-297. Robertson, J. H., and H. P. Cords. 1957. Survival of rabbit brush (Chrysothamnus spp.) following chemical, burning, and mechanical treatments. Jour. Range Mgmt. 10:83-89. Tingey, D. C., and M. E. Robinson. 1952. Chemical control of rabbitbrush (Chrysothamnus nauseosus var. consimilis). Res. Progr. Rept., Western Weed Control Conference 13:61-62. Prepared Date: by: Donald G. Smith Assistant Wildlife Researcher July, 1966 Approved by: Harold R. Shepherd Project Leader Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �July, - 91 - JOB COMPLETION RESEARCH State of Project C~O~LO~RA~D~O~ REPORT SEGMENT _ Game Range Investigations W-10l-R-8 No. PROJECT JOb No. Work Plan No. 5 Title San Miguel Pro,ject Period of' Jop: Covered: Personnel: April 1966 1, 1965 through March Harold R. Shepherd, ~2~ _ 31, 1966 Bertram D. Baker, Donald G. Smith Findings: Preliminary work on the investigation was begun with the procurement of topographic and other maps and project plans. Baker and Smith began work on the field phase by talking to personnel of the Durango office of the Bureau of Reclamation about the project and by interviewing South-west Regional Game, Fish and Parks personnel. Also, a cursory inspection was made of the reservoir site. They learned from State personnel that an investigation, such as planned under this job, had already been done and reported by Principal Game Biologist Claude E. White. In conversations with Water Resources and South-west Regional personnel it was decided that additional investigations would be a duplication of effort. Consequently, no further work was done, and maps, plans and other information collected was turned over to the ''Water Resources Division" of the Colorado Department of Game, Fish and Parks. Prepared Date: by: Harold R. Shepherd Wildlife Researcher July, 1966 Approved by: Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �- 92 - Objectives: The San Miguel San Miguel River. 1. Investigate Project is a proposed water development how the project may influence of big game winter project on the the following: a. Area and quality b. Big game movements because of barriers fences, canals, etc. such as reservoirs, c. Incidence of big game animal drownings and canals. because of reservoirs 2. Consider means of mitigating them. 3. Prepare and summer range. roads, losses to big game values or enhancing a report of findings. Procedures: 1. a. Using aerial photographs and project plans and maps, map the range types within the "take" line. Planimeter the areas of these types and determine the areas of different range types to be lost to big game by inundation. b. Determine the extent of big game migration or seasonal drift through the project area, to be occupied by reservoirs and canals, by means of direct observation and by questioning local residents and knowledgeable State and Federal game management people. Draw conclusions based on personal experience and the experience and opinions of State and Federal game experts as to how the project is likely to affect big game migrations. c. From a knowledge of game migration patterns prior to project construction, draw conclusions as to whether the project may result in important game losses through drownings in canals and reservoirs. 2. Based on previously described investigations and interviews, suggest means of mitigating losses to big game wildlife values or enhancing them, if such are shown to exist by this investigation. 3. Prepare a final report on the investigation game management personnel. for distribution to State �- 93 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO --------~~~~---------W-10l-R-8 Project No. Work Plan No. 6 ------~------------- Game Range Investigations Job No. 1 ------~--------------------- Title of Job: Indexing Game Research Reports for Game Range Investigative Literature Period Covered: Personnel: April 1, 1965 through March 31, 1966 Harold R. Shepherd Objectives: 1. To prepare an index for all Game Research Reports published by the Colorado Department of Game, Fish and Parks, listing game range investigative literature. 2. To arrange the index to conform to a standard format that will accomodate all other categories of investigative literature published in Game Research Reports. 3. To make the index available for incorporation in a composite index for Game Research Reports. Findings: See composite report contained in April, 1966, Part 1 issue of the Game Research Report, covering all indexing activities planned under this .project and Federal Aid Projects W-37-R, W-38-R, W-40-R, and w-88-R. Prepared by: Harold R. Shepherd Project Leader Date July, 1966 Approved by: Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator ��July, 1966 . 95 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO --------~==~~-------Deer-Elk Investigations W-38-R-20 Project No. Work Plan No. 1 --------~------------- Title of Job:" 5 ------------~~------------- Experimental Trapping and Marking Techniques Period Covered: Personnel: Job No. April 1, 1965 through March 31, 1966 Raymond J. Boyd, M. C. Coghill, Harvey Bray, Don Minnich, Clarence Gore, Richard N. Denney, Errol Ryland and personnel of the Southwest Region. ABSTRACT No new developments on traps, gates or triggers occurred during the past segment. A complete list of materials, specifications and plans are included in this. report for a portable trap that was developed by personnel on this job. Southwest Regional personnel in the Chimney Rock area trapped and banded 20 elk; four elk were trapped and banded at the Fish Creek Point trap; five elk were tagged and banded at the Falls Creek trap; and four elk were caught in the Mill Creek trap. Nine elk were banded and ear tagged either by jumping or by Cap-Chur gun in the Rio Grande area. Neck band sightings in all trapping areas tended to confirm previous work, in that elk in the Gunnison move about 22 miles north-northwest of the trapping site to summer. Elk on the White River from' the Hill Creek trap tend to move up the South Fork to summer, while elk from the Miller Creek trap tend to move east into the South Fork area while some have moved as far east as Grizzley Creek. Elk in the San Juan move straight north to summer, but a substantial number of these elk cross' into the Rio.Grande drainage, with a few remaining to winter between Creede and South Fork. �- 96 Recommendations: (1) Turn all work on this job over to M. C. Coghill be done to complete this job. so that intensive work can (2) Instruct portable (3) Assist in the construction and operation of an experimental trap" in the Saguache area on Sheep Creek. (4) Using the improved spray gun and pressure tank, try and mark elk with paint shot from the spray gun from a helicopter. Regional personnel in the operation and construction of the traps, and turn over to the Regions all regular trapping. "drive- Objectives: Knowledge of the migratory habits of deer and elk are needed before sound management recommendations can be made. These migrations can best be located by marking or otherwise identifying animals that may use these different migration routes. (1) Improve the efficiency of existing traps for big game animals and develop new, more efficient, methods of trapping. (2) Determine vation. best materials and tags to mark big game animals (3) Determine paint. the feasibility of marking 'deer or elk from the helicopter for easy obser- with Procedures: (1) Evaluate portable and permanent group-type traps for big game animals •. a. Redesign the existing electric gates to make it stronger. switch and release on the one-way b. Set up and incorporate the electric counter on a group trap at Sa pinero to see if it is practical for field use. (2) Examine neck bands from hunter-killed deer and elk and from animals tha t are recaptured to see how the various materials are holding up under normal animal behavior. Try and locate a company that will make an ear tag out of some metal that is harder than the aluminum we are now using. (3) Modify the present pressure tank and spray gun so that a more solid stream of paint can be shot from the helicopter while it is in forward motion or hovering wi thin "ground-effec t"., �- 97 - EXPERIMENTAL TRAPPING AND MARKING TECHNIQUES Raymond J. Boyd No new developments came out of the trapping program during the past segment: Southwest Regional personnel ran elk traps in five locations in the Southwest Region. Four elk were trapped at the Fish Creek Point trap on the Dolores River, five elk were trapped in the Falls Creek trap north of Durange, 20 elk were trapped and banded at the Devil Creek trap near Pagosa Springs, four elk were trapped at the Mill Creek trap east of Pagosa Springs, nine elk were tagged and banded in the Rio Grande drainage by use of Cap-Chur equipment or by jumping on the elk from a helicopter. Since sizes using color this job was initiated, many different types of materials, colors and of neck bands have been tried. For the past four years, we have been a collar that appears completely satisfactory as far as wearability, fastness and expense. Specifications for this collar follow: Big Game Neckband Specifications Backing for the Colored plastic Material - Four (4) inch wide double 0 heavy duty back band cotton webbing (Saddle suppliers list this material as back band or "Breeching" material) Colored Plastic Material - (To be stitched on the cotton webbing) - Four (4) inch wide vinyl-coated nylon fabric (13 or 16 oz./sq. yd.) Specify "ArmorTite" or Signal Flag material and color. Sewing Specifications - Stitch with No. 12 Or Lon thread along both edges and diamond-stitch diagonally across the band. The finished circumference is to be~ inches, with a two- inch (2) overlap where the ends are sewn together. *We recommend 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. the following sizes for the indicated species: Adult cow elk - 30 inch finished circumference Calf elk - Sew a single stitching of cotton thread two (2) inches up from one end of the band, thus allowing the calf to keep the band on. The cotton thread rots away in time to fit the animal as it becomes a yearling and needs the full 30 inches. Bull elk - A 32 inch circumference, or a 34 inch long open collar to be fastened with tubular rivets or hogrings is required for bull elk. (Antlers, of course, have to be sawed off) Doe antelope - 22 to 23 inch finished circumference, same size for antelope bucks, except open because of the horns. Mule deer does - 20 to 22 inch finished circumference~ Mule deer bucks - 24 to 26 inch finished circumference, except it must be open if they still have antlers. Costs listed below are those quoted to the Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department by the Denver Tent and Awning Company, 1408 West Colfax Avenue, Denver, Colorado: 30-32 inch, 13 oz./sq. yd. - $1.22; 30-32 inch, 16 oz./sq. yd. - $1.27. �A one-inch wide stripe of a different color sewn through the middle of the band costs ten cents (10¢) additional per collar. Price quotes on collars for animals other than elk will have to be obtained from the Denver Tent and Awning C~mpany. Colors that are available are as follows: Signal Flag Colors Armor-Tite Colors* Saturn Yellow Yellow Blaze Orange Red Rocket Red Bright Green Signal Green Pool Blue White Pink Orange White 15650 for 16 oz. *VN 13159 for 13 oz. We recommend that Armor-Tite be used, as the Safe Flag material does fade when exposed to weather, and it can cause errors in band observations as to the exact color. Armor-Tite does not fade, but their colors are not as bright as Safe Flag. Note: Armor-Tite bright green is quite dark. Group Trap Specifications For the past four segments of this project, we have been working with a portable big game group trap that was developed by personnel of this project. From evidence now on hand, we feel that the trap is sufficiently "bug-free" and for this reason, we are listing a complete set of plans and specifications for this type of trap. LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS PORTABLE GROUP TRAP FOR BIG GAME The following list of materials, building specifications, etc. are all that is required to construct one portable big game group trap 50 feet in diameter, with all of the required gates, triggers, nets, etc. Catch Pen (Corral) - 50 Feet in Diameter Panels - 4' x 9' x 5/8" - need 36 a. Marine Plywood - 4' x 8' x 5/8" - need 36 b. Native Lumber - 1" x 12" x 4' - need 36 c. Native Lumber - 1" x 3" x 9' - need 144 d. Native Lumber - 1" x 3" x 42" - need 72 e. Cement Coat Nails Building Specificat ions - Each plywood sheet should be edged with six pieces of 1" x 4" native lumber. The 1" x 12" x 4' piece of native is fastened to the plywood sheet by the edging material. No edging material is used on the 1" x 12" bottom board. Each panel is drilled with a 3/8 inch bit, 12 inches down and l~ inches in from each corner so that they may be fastened together with bailing wire. When the panels are set up in the trap, the native lumber portion is set on the ground (See Figure 1). �FIGURE 1 - INSIDE OF CATCH PEN - DETAILS OF PANEL CONSTRUCTION SHOWN. Panels are set so that the native lumber portion is on the ground. This makes the panels last longer as the snow and water does not harm the lumber as it would the plywood. Note the method JumE Gate - a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. of fastening the panels together with baling wire. Marine Plywood - 3' x 5' x 5/8" - need 1 Native Lumber need 2 2" x 4" X 12' need 4 Native Lumber - 1" x 6" X 9' Native Lumber - 2" x 4n x 44n - need 4 Native Lumber - 2" x 6" X 44" - need 1 need 1 Native Lumber - 2" x 4" X 3" Native Lumber - 1" x 3" X 3' - need 5 Cement Coat Nails 2-inch pulley 100 feet 5/16 inch nylon rope - - - - Building SEecifications - The slide channels for the plywood gate are made by nailing a 11l x 6" X 9' board to each side of a 2" x 4" X 12' board. This leaves a channel 1 3/4 inches wide and 2 inches deep for the gate to slide in. The top of the gate frame is made from two 2n x 4" X 44" lumber nailed to each side of the slide channels. The bottom is constructed the same way. �A 2" x 6" x 44" board is nailed across the frame just under the end of the nine foot 1" x 6", a 2" x 4" X 3' piece is nailed to the 2" x 6" piece making a stop for the sliding gate. The five 1" x 3" X 3' boards are nailed inside the bottom of the frame and outside the 2" x 6" piece. This makes the grill that the elk jumps over. The plywood gate has a ~ inch hole drilled in the center, 2 inches from the bottom. The nylon rope is threaded through the hole and knotted so that it cannot slip through; the rope is then threaded through the pulley which is attached to the outside of the top of the frame. By pulling on the rope, the gate can be raised to let animals jump out, and dropped as soon as one gets into the net outside the gate (See Figure 2). FIGURE 2 - JUMP GATE IN PORTABLE GIG GAME GROUP TRAP - DETAILS OF CONSTRUCTION SHOWN. Method of incorporating the gate into the trap walls shown. �Net "Backstop" - Panels - need three a. 2" x 4" X 10' - Native Lumber - need 3 b. Native Lumber - 2" x 4" X 8' - need 3 c. Native, Lumber - 1" x 4" x 30" - need 30 d. Cement Coat Nails e. Nylon Rope - 5/16 inch, 18 feet, cut into 2-foot long pieces Building Specifications - Nail the 1" x 4" X 30" pieces to the 8 foot 2" x 4", equally spacing them. Then place the 10 foot 2" x 4" so that there is a onefoot overlap at each end, and nail the 30 inch pieces to it. The short pieces of nylon rope are used to tie the panel to the top bar of the net holding frame, and one of the ropes is used to tie the panel to the net frame (See Figure 3). -- --FIGURE 3 - NET "BACKSTOP" FOR PORTABLE CONSTRUCTION SHOWN. BIG GAME GROUP TRAP - DETAILS Method of tieing to the net holding also shown. One-Way OF PANEL frame and to the net frame is Gate a. b. Black Pipe - H;" x 7' - need 2-------------------, , ----Outside Black Pipe - VZ;" x 3' - need 2 -f Frame �c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. 1. m. n. - - Black Pipe l~" x 6' need 4 ----- -----, Black Pipe - n;" x 15" - need 4 ----------: ----Middle Gates Black Pipe 1" x 69~" - need 6 Black Pipe - l.lt;" x 3' - need 1 ---------------Gate Stop Flat Iron Stock - l.lt;" x .It;'' x 3~" need 4 -----Hinges l.lt;" x .It;'' Flat Iron Stock X 2~" need 4-" -----Gate Stop Ends l.lt;" Flat Iron Stock z, x 1-" x 12" - need 2 -----Spring Straps 1.lt;1t Flat Iron Stock x 1-" <, X 2" need 2 -----To keep gate from opening too far Flat Iron Stock - 1" x 1/8" x 36" - need 1 ----Bar to hold gate open Iron Shafting - 3/41t x 3/4" - need 4 ----------Hinge pins, see Figure 5 Bolts - ~,. x l~" - need 8 ----------_ Screen Door Springs - need 2 ---------_ - ----------, - Building Specifications - The outside frame is made by cutting the two 7 foot o pieces and the two 3 foot pieces at a 45 angle at the ends and welding them together. The bottom hinge is welded to the inside of the frame, 6 inches above the ground. The hinge is made by drilling a 9/16 inch hole, l.lt; inches from one end of the hinge (See Figure 15). The inside gates are constructed by welding the 6 foot pieces of pipe to the 15 inch pipes to make an outside frame 6' x 15". The 1 inch pipes 69~ inches long are welded inside the frame to complete the swinging gates (See Figure 4). FIGURE 4 - ONE-WAY GATE FOR PORTABLE BIG GAME GROUP TRAP All construction are shown. details �The hinge pins are welded 2~ inches from the outside edge of the gates (See Figure 5). The pins are made by taking a piece of 3/4 inch iron shafting and turning it down on a lathe to make a ~ inch shaft with a 3/4 inch head (See Figure 16). This ~ inch shaft slips into the hole drilled into the hinge. The top hinges are not welded into place until the middle gates are set in place; once the hinges are welded on the outside frame, the gates cannot be removed. FIGURE 5 - DETAIL OF HINGE, HINGE PIN AND GATE STOP BLOCK ON ONE-WAY GATE FOR A PORTABLE BIG GAME GROUP TRAP. The gate stop is welded to the outside frame 14 inches down from the top of the frame. It is set 1~ inches out from the frame by welding each end to the gate stop ends (See Figure 13). A ~ inch hole is drilled and tapped into the top of the gate stop, 6 inches from each end. A ~ inch bolt is screwed into this hole to act as a guide for the springs. The spring straps are welded to the top of the gate stop at each end, facing the outside of the gate (See Figure 4). Each one of the middle gates should have a ~ inch hole drilled and tapped 2 inches from the end away from the �hinge so that a bolt can be threaded into the hole to hold the spring to the gate (See Figure 14). The small block to keep the gates from opening too wide are welded onto the outside frame just above the bottom hinges (See Figure 5). These blocks are welded into place while the gates are set open 36-inches. The completed gate is wired to two 4 inch posts that are set 3 feet deep into the ground. The trap ?anels are wired to the posts also. In Figure 3, the gate can be seen in the background, and its attachment to the posts can be determined from the picture. Net Holding Frame a. Black Pipe - 2" x 9' - need 2 b. Black Pipe - 2" x 7' - need 2 c. Black Pipe - l~" x 6" - need 16 d. Black Pipe - 1" x 9' - Cleed 8 e. Chain - ~-inch by 12' need 4 pieces, each 3' long f. "Finger-Link" - need 4 (Used on ea::h corner of the net frame to release the net) g. Bolts - lz" x 2" - need 16 Building Specifications - The two 7 foot sections of 2 inch pipe each have four pieces of l~ inch by 6 inch pipe welded 6 inches from each end. These 6 inch pieces are welded at right angles to each other ( See Figure 6 and Figure 7). FIGURE 6 - DETAIL OF PLACEMENT AND WELDING OF PIPE HOLDERS AND SET SCREW ~~GEMENT ON NET HOLDING FRAME FOR A PORTABLE BIG GAME GROUP TRAP. �FIGURE 7 - PORTIONS Details OF NET HOLDING of welding FRAME FOR A PORTABLE pipe holders BIG GAME GROUP TRAP. and set screws are shown. The two 9 foot sections each have two of the 6 inch pieces welded at right angles to each other 6 inches up from the bottom and one 6 inch piece welded 6 inches down from the top. The remaining 6 inch piece is welded 6 feet up from the bottom (See Figure 7). Each of the small pieces has a 9/16 inch hole drilled in the top and a }z" nut is welded over the hole. A 2" x }Z" bolt can then be used as a set screw to hold the 1 inch pipes inside the }z" short pieces welded to the heavier up-right pipes (See Figure 6). The completed frame stands inunediately in front of the jump gate with the 9 foot pipes centered against the gate slide (See Figure 8). The net "backstop" (See Figure 8). is tied to the upper pipe of the frame with the nylon rope �FIGURE 8 - NET HOLDING FRAME FOR PORTABLE BIG GAME GROUP TRAP. Details of attachment to jump gate, method of fastening net "backstop" to frame and attachment of chains and "finger-linksll to the net frame are shown. Each one of the 2 inch upright pipes has a 9/16 inch hole drilled completely th:rough the pipe five and one-half feet above the ground. A four inch bolt is placed through a link of the chain and is bolted to the pipe. The end of the chain is welded to a "Finger-link" to make the completed release assembly for the net and net frame (Figure 8). Net Frame a. Black Pipe - I%:" x. 8 ' - need 4 b. Black Pipe - 1%:" x 16" - need 4 (Cut 450, 16" on long side) c. Cold Rolled Steel - ~" x 12" - need 4 (Bent into 4" ring) d. Cold Rolled Steel - ~" x 6" - need 4 (Bent into 2" ring) e. Nylon Rope - 7/16" x 225 feet - need 1 (Hand tied net) f. Manila Rope - 3/4" x 40' - need 1 (Tie net to frame) Building Specifications - The four eight-foot pieces of pipe are welded together at the corners to make a frame eight-feet square (See Figure 9). The 16 inch long pieces are cut on a 450 angle and welded into the corners of the frame to square it up and to make it stronger (See Figure 10). �• .•, FIGURE 9 - COMPLETE EIGHT FOOT SQUARE NET FRh'1E SHOWING ANGLE BRACES Ai'IDDOUBLE RINGS AT EACH CO~NER • FIGURE 10 - DETAIL OF CORNER OF NET FRAME SHOWING ANGLE BRACE AND DOUBLE RINGS. �The 12 inch pieces of cold rolled steel are heated and bent into 4 inch rings and welded, the 6 inch pieces of cold rolled steel are slipped through the 4 inch rings, heated and welded together. This gives a double ring at each corner (See Figure 10). The "finger-links" are slipped through the small ring and hold the net frame suspended about 4 feet above the ground (See Figure 8). The nylon rope is hand tied into a net about 7 feet square with mesh that measures 6 inches on the square. The net is tied with standard knots that can be obtained from reading any good books on knots. The net is then tied to the net frame with the manila rope (See Figure 11). FIGURE 11 - GENERAL VIEW OF NET FRAME WITH NET TIED TO THE FRAME WITH MANILA ROPE - "FINGER-LINK" CAN BE SEEN IN THE TOP LEFT OF THE PHOTO ATTACHED TO THE DOUBLE RING. �Solenoid Release and Trigger a. Solenoid from the starter of an automobile - need 1 b. Flat iron stock - H;" x ~" X 411 - need 2 c. l2-volt heavy-duty battery - need 1 d. Rubber Covered 12/2 electric wire 50 feet - need 1 e. Rubber Covered Single Strand Wire # 12 12' - need 1 f. Battery Clamps - need 2 g. Alligator Clamp - need 1 h. Brass Welding Rod - need 2 (One end threaded) i. Flat Iron Stock 1" x 1/8" x 36" need 1 (Drill a 5/16" hole 2 inches from each end) j. Native Lumber - 211x 4" x 36" - need 2 k. Native Lumber - 211x 6" X 1211 - need 1 Building Specifications - The l~" x ~II X 4" flat iron stock is welded to the swinging gate of the completed one-way gate assembly (See Figure 4) to make a bracket to hold the solenoid. The solenoid is bolted to the bracket so that the pin that moves back and forth sticks out through a one-half inch hole drilled in the frame of the swinging gate. The solenoid has to be mounted so that the pin sticks completely through the frame of the swinging gate when it is completely extended. The gate holding bar is slipped over the end of the pin to hold the gate open (See Figure 12). FIGURE 12 - SOLENOID RELEASE SET-UP FOR A ONE-WAY GATE ON A PORTABLE BIG GAME GROUP TRAP. Details of fastening th~ solenoid to the swinging gate and the release assembly for the gate holding bare are shown. Details shown are from an older model trap using rubber bands instead of springs. �- -110 - Frame 1f---l}{11 ---I- I IE---Gate Stop Bar \ Gate Stan End FIGURE 13 - DErrAIL OF GArEE STOP END ASE)111BLY SHOWING PLACEMENT OF SPRING PIN AND DISTANCE THE GATE STOP IS SET OUT FROM THE: FRAME. 'S ~---Spring Strap Screen Door Springs FIGUID"; Il,- - DIAGH./I.l'1NrIC SKETCH OF 'ERE SPRING STRAP ASSEMBLY AND THE PLACJi:MJ<-;N'r OF THE SPlHNG PINS AND ~m"-; SPRINGS , CLOSE TIlE GATES l"AS1'EH 'rEAN GRAVITY. TO �- ill - T l;i." FIGURE 15 - FULL SIZE DHAWING OF 'l'HE HINGES USED ON THl':: ONE-WAY GATES ON A POHTABLE BIG GAlvfE GROUP TRAP. FIGURE 16 - FULL SIZE DRIl,14ING OF THE HINGE PINS USED ON THE ON~-;-WAYGA'rES ON A POR'fABLE BIG GA~1}i_: tmoup TRAP. �The trigger assembly is constructed by nailing the two pieces of 2" x 4" lumber to the 2" x 6" lumber. A pair of holes 1/8" in diameter are drilled through the 2" x 6" piece and the brass welding rods are slipped through the holes. Th welding rods are fastened so that they are 1/8 inch apart throughout their enti length. When the rods are touched together it completes the circuit and the solenoid pin is jerked back and the gate holding bar is dropped and the gates swing closed (See Figures 17 and 18). The wiring of the trigger and gate release assembly is done so that when the gates swing closed, the wire that is held by the alligator clamp pulls free and opens the circuit. This prevents the welding rods from being mashed together and draining the battery as would be the case if the wiring system were not mad with a break or safety device (See Figure 18). FIGURE 17 - TRIGGER ASSEMBLY USED ON THE SOLENOID RELEASE ON A PORTABLE BIG GAME GROUP TRAP. Details of the welding rod placement trigger box are shown. ON THE ONE-WAY and construction Additional Materials and Supplies Needed for Construction a. 12 gallons of white outside paint b. 12 gallons of boiled linseed oil c. Four (4) Chati110n Spring Scales, 500 lb. capacity d. One (1) 2 inch clothes line pulley e. Creosote treated posts - 4 f. 6-foot steel posts - 20 of the GATE �FIGURE 19 - VIEW OF COMPLETED TRAP, SET UP AND IN OPERATION FIGURE 20 - RELEASING THE NET AFTER AN ELK IS TAGGED AND BANDED Net backstop is raised at front of the net frame �- 114 - SOLENOID # 12 Electric Wire l2-volt ba.ttery (Trigger Assembly) FIGURE 18 - SCHEMf,TIC DIAGRAH OF TRIGGER, AND ALLIGATOR CLAMP m:LEASE S~'!ITCH, BA'r'l'ERY, FOR ONE-I:JAY SOLENOID GATE CLOSING Sy,s'l'EM FOR A l)ORTABLE BIG GM1E GROUP TRAP. �- llS - Costs of follows: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. 1. m. n. a complete trap, painted and able to weigh One group trapOne jump gate _ One one-way gate One net holding frame One net frame One nylon net 100 feet 5/16" nylon rope One l2-volt battery White paint Linseed Oil Chatillon Scales @ $31.00 Electric wire and solenoid Creosote treated posts Steel posts ~ 6 foot TOTAL COST Setting Up and Operating the elk in the net is as $307.00 69.00 70.20 27.00 42.75 5.70 22.75 34.08 20.40 124.00 14.49 12.00 22.00 $771.37 the Trap After the site for the trap is located, the location of the entrance gate should be determined, as this determines the position of the other parts of the trap. Two holes should be dug, 2~ feet to 3 feet deep, and 3 feet apart. The one-way gate is wired between these posts, so that the gates can swing in. Two of the panels are then set up and another hole dug. The jump gate is placed nest to this post and another hole dug and post set so that the jump gate can be fastened solidly between them. The rest of the panels can then be set up around the circumference of a circle 50 feet in diameter. A 6 foot steel post should be pounded into the ground" at every other panel junction. The panels should be wired to the posts as they are wired together. This makes the trap walls straighter and helps hold the whole trap up until all of the panels are in place. The net holding frame is assembled by inserting the one inch by 9 foot pipes into the pipe holders and setting it up against the jump gate and making sure that it is centered. The shorter end of the frame can be set up and lined up with the one next to the trap and after inserting the small pipes into the holders all of the set screws can be tightened and the frame will then stand by itself. The net frame can then be fastened to the frame by the bolts and chains on the "finger-links". The net back-stops are tied to the small pipes around the top of the net holding frame and then tied to the net frame. After the rope is tied through the bottom of the sliding gate, it is slipped over the pulley at the top outside of the jump gate and coiled ready to be used to raise the sliding gate. The trigger assembly is placed at the back of the trap with several handfuls of good, bright alfalfa hay under and over the brass welding rod trigger. A couple of bales of hay scattered inside the trap and a couple scattered outside should �- 116.- Table 1.--Elk Tagged and Banded at the Devil Creek Property, Colorado, Winter 1965-66. Date Sex Age Tag Number 1/18 1/18 1/20 1/23 1/23 1/23 1/27 1/27 1/27 1/31 2/6 2/11 2/11 2/12 2/14 2/17 2/17 2/19 2/19 2/21 Female Female Male Female Male Female Female Female Female Female Female Mature Yearling Calf Mature Calf Calf Mature Mature Mature Mature Calf Calf Calf Calf Yearling Mature Mature Mature Calf Mature P-62 p-62 P-63 P-63 P-64 P-64 p-65 P-65 P-66 P-66 P-67 P-67 P-68 p-68 p-69 p-69 P-70 P-70 P-71 P-71 P-72 P-72 P-73 P-73 P-74 P-74 P-75 P-75 P-76 P-76 P-77 P-77 P-78 P-100 P-79 P-79 P-80 P-80 P-8l P-8l Female Female Female Female Female Female Female Female Remarks Dark Green Collar - 495 Lbs. Dark Green Collar - 460 Lbs. Dark Green Collar - 185 Lbs. Dark Green Collar Dark Green Collar Dark Green Collar - 160 Lbs. Dark Green Collar - 420 Lbs. Dark Green Collar - 450 Lbs. Dark Green Collar - 410 Lbs. Dark Green Collar - 445 Lbs , Dark Green Collar - 195 Lbs. Dark Green Collar - 165 Lbs. Dark Green Collar - 185 Lbs. Dark Green Collar - 170 Lbs . Dark Green Collar - 350 Lbs , Dark Green Collar - 450 Lbs. Dark Green Collar Dark Green Collar - 430 Lbs. Dark Green Collar Dark Green Collar - 485 Lbs , Table 2.--Elk Tagged and Banded at the Fish Creek Point Trap - Dolores River Drainage, Colorado, Winter 1965-66. Date Sex Age Tag Number 2/17 2/11 2/17 2/11 Female Female Female Yearling Yearling Mature Yearling D-22 D-22 D-23 D-23 D-24 D-24 D-25 D-25 Remarks Green Collar Green Collar Green Collar Green Collar Table 3.--Elk Tagged and Banded at the Falls Creek Trap, Animas River Drainage, Coloradoz Winter 1965-66. Date Sex Age Tag Number Remarks 12/16/66 12/16/66 12/16/66 12/16/66 12/17/66 Female Female Female Male Female Mature Mature Calf Calf Mature H-37 H-37 H-38 H-38 H-39 H-39 H-40 H-40 H-41 H-4l Blue Collar - 380 Lbs. Blue Collar - 360 Lb s , Blue Collar - 205 Lbs. Blue Collar - 210 Lbs. Blue Collar - 545 Lbs. �- 117 Table 4.--Elk Tagged and Banded at the Mill Creek Trap - San Juan River Drainagez Coloradoz Winter 1965-66. Date Sex Tag Number Age 2/1/66 2/1/66 2/1/66 2/1/66 Female Female Female Female P-20l P-202 P-203 P-204 P-20l P-202 P-203 P-204 Calf Mature Calf Calf Remarks Red Red Red Red Collar - 193 ·Lbs. Collar Collar - 188 Lbs. Collar - 231 Lbs. Table 5.--Elk Tagged and Banded in the Rio Grande Area by Cap-Chur Guns or by Jumping From a Helicopter - Rio Grande River Drainage, Colorado, Winter 1965-66. Date Sex 2/7 /66 2/9/66 2/9/66 2/9/66 2/10/66 3/2/66 3/2/66 2/10/66 2/10/66 make Female Female Male Female Female Male Male Tag Number Age SL-16 SL-17 SL-18 SL-19 SL-20 SL-26 SL-27 SL-22 SL-23 SL-16 SL-17 SL-18 SL-19 S1.-20 SL-26 SL-27 SL-22 SL-23 Mature Calf Calf Mature Mature Calf Calf Calf Calf Remarks Blaze Blaze Blaze Blaze Blaze Blaze Blaze Blaze Blaze orange Orange Orange Orange Orange Orange Orange Orange Orange collar collar collar collar collar collar collar collar collar - Elk Park - Long Ridge - Long Ridge - Above Wright's - Ski Tow - Long Ridge - Shallow Cr. - Road Canyon Res. - Deep Cr. the trap ready for operation. It is a good idea to wire the gates open for a few nights to get the elk used to the trap and used to going inside to get the hay. When they are freely going in and out of the trap, it can be set to make a catch. The jumping of the elk into the net and the subsequent handling of them does not seem to scare them very much as we have caught the same elk several times each winter and sometimes three or four times a week. In fact, recatches become so frequent that we sometimes have to shut down the whole trapping operation to allow some new elk to move into the area. There have been a couple of modifications of parts of the trap, but they have not been tested enough to include them in this report. As they are tested and prove out, they will be included in future reports. Prepared Date: by: Raymond J. Boyd Wildlife Researcher J_U_l~y~, __19_6_6 Approvedby: _ ~R~i~c~h~a~r~d~N~._D~e~n~n~e~y _ Project Leader Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief �� https://cpw.cvlcollections.org/files/original/d5cdfe589e243611ff38d4485ea2810f.pdf 8605f343aaa52c0434a73a1de96fe0b1 PDF Text Text July, 1966 - 119 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO --------~~~~~--------Deer-Elk Investigations W-38-R-20 Project No. Work Plan No. Job No.· 1 6 ----------------------------- Title of Job: Experimental Immobilization Techniques Period Covered: April 1, 1965 to Much Personnel: 31,1966• Richard.N. Denney, Raymond J. Boyd, David Gordon, R. Bruce Gill. ABSTRACT An annotated bibliography was prepared containing approximately 150 references and a table by species, drugs, dosages, times, sources and comments. Eight elk livetrapped and put in the pens at the Research Center had one fatality and three surviving calves. All were immobilized for neckbanding and other treatments with standard drugs used previously, but facilities prevented intensive experimentation with the proposed drug mixtures. The building complex in connection with the pens is to be completed during the summer of 1966, at which time additional work will be performed on immobilization. Twelve dee~ were also added to the pens from the Little Hills Experiment Station paddocks and pastures. They were suffering from malnutrition, resulting in three mortalities, and the two adult does had one set of surviving twin fawns. The condition of the deer precluded any possibility of immobilization work at the time. Attempts were made to euthanize deer and elk in the wild with two types of drug-injecting arrows, but these attempts failed, either because of misses, or not being able to get a shot. These two types of arrows were the plastic pod behind a broadhead, and the hypo-arrow (Palmer's). Objectives: 1. Review the literature pertaining to immobilization and tranquilization of big game animals. 2. Determine the most efficient immobilizing and tranquilizing agents and dosages for Colorado big game species, particularly mule deer and elk. 3. Compare the euthanization qualities of succinylcholine ch19ride injected with two types of arrows. �- 120 Procedures: 1. Make a thorough search of professional journals and articles pertaining to drug immobilization of large animals, as well as text books dealing with anesthesia and pharmacology. Journals which may contain pertinent information include: Journal of Wildlife Management; the Veterinary Record; Transactions of the North American Wildlife Conferences; Canadian Journal of Comparative Medicine and Veterinary Science; Journal of Pharmacology and Experimental Therapeutics; Annals of the New York Academy of Science; Veterinary Medicine; Anesthesiology; Journal of South African Medical Association; Journal of Biological Chemistry; Journal of the American Veterinary Medicine Association; Proceedings of the Southeastern Game and Fish Commissioners Association; American Journal of Public Health; Medical Journal of Australia; and Federal Aid reports by various states. Prepare an annotated bibliography of available references. 2. Plans and engineer's estimates are currently being prepared for a series of four pens, three stalls, and a small work room to be constructed behind the Fort Collins Game, Fish and Parks Research Center in which to hold deer and elk for immobilization and tranquilization studies. When completed, several animals of each species (deer and elk) will be captured and used here for this study. The immobilizing agents will be injected by means of automatic syringes fired by the Cap-Chur pistol, gas rifle and powder gun. These projectors are already in our possession, although additional syringes of various sizes will have to be purchased. Enough work was done previously in W-38-R, Work Plan 1, Job 5, to indicate useable dosages of succinylcholine chloride and phencyclidine hydrochloride on deer and elk, but further refinement is necessary. It has appeared from past experience that nicot1ne alkaloids are usually fatal to mule deer and elk. Gallamine triethiodide has been used on elk, as reported in the literature, but there is strong reason to try a double antidote of prostigmine and atropine instead of Tensilon. In summary then, we plan to determine which of the following compounds is useable and most efficient, and develop~, the proper dosages for them on deer and elk: a. b. c. d. Nicotine alkaloid Succinylcholine chloride Phencyclidine hydrochloride Gallamine triethiodide We propose, also, to experiment with mixtures of such drugs as b. and c. above, hoping that they are complementary, and the desired assets of each will contribute to a dosage that will be fast-acting with a wide safety margin for the animal. New drugs which show merit will also be used when and if available. At least two deer and two elk will be injected each time for at least ten repetitions of each drug and dosage, and efforts will be made to run a similar series during periods when mean daily temperature ranges are from 0-32, 33-65 and 66-90 degrees F. �- 121 - Figure 1 lists data to be collected for each injection. In addition, the effects and qualities of such available tranquilizers as Tranvet and Tranimul will be studied on these penned deer and elk, using the Cap-Chur equipment and hand syringes. 3. There are two methods of introducing the euthanization agent, succinylcholine chloride through the use of bows and arrows in archery deer hunting. One of the these involves a syringe adaptor for Cap-Chur gun syringes that fit the point of an arrow, forming a hypo-arrow. The other is a plastic pod, covered with the neck of a toy balloon, the pod being filled with powdered succinylcholine chloride, from which the rubber neck of the balloon peels or rolls back upon entry of the broadhead into the animal. These two types of arrows will be compared for changes in trajectory and impact from standard arrows on tragets, and then used on at least two penned animals other than those used in Objective 2, and later on at least six free-roaming deer in open archery hunting areas or in deer damage areas where some must be removed anyway for control work. The efficiency of the two types will be evaluated, comparing effectiveness, penetration and general practicality, when using lethal dosages of succinylcholine chloride. Results: 1. An annotated bibliography follows, with approximately 150 references on mammal immobilization, and including a table of species, drugs, dosages, times, sources and comments. While this is not absolutely complete, it probably represents the most comprehensive accumulation of these data to date. Assistance by Dave Gordon and Bruce Gillon some of the references and abstracting is gratefully acknowledged. 2. The holding pens were constructed in back of the Fort Collins Research Center during the summer of 1965, but because of a deficient budget the work room, stalls, feed storage, weather shelter, scales, dipping vat and watering facilities were not included. Figures 2 through 3 show the type of pole and channel construction that was patterned after the Sybille type of fence. A temporary runway was constructed by project personnel in the area where the building is to go so that animals could be shifted from pen to pen without necessitating going through each pen. The building complex is scheduled to be completed during the summer of 1966. Eight elk were live trapped in the Moraine Park trap and transported to the pens in early March. Later in March 12 deer used in both the paddocks and the pastures at Little Hills were put in the pens. The elk were so excitable that little immobilization work was performed on them, other than immobilizing them with succinylcholine chloride to neckband them. It is noteworthy here, however, that it only required 10 to 12 milligrams to immobilize them in the pens, while it takes from 15 to 20, under normal conditions, to immobilize them when shooting from the helicopter. Apparently the differences in stresses, and possibly body conditions, account for the differential dosages required when chasing wild animals as opposed to working with penned animals. One of the elk cows sloughed her fetus in late March after she lost her water for unknown reasons, but four other cows calved in normal fashion during the last week of May and the �- 122DRUG DATA FORM Investigator Location Date _ Species ----------------------------------------------------------Sex -------------------- Age --------------- Weight: Estimated , Actual General Body Condition _ ---------------------------------------------- Animal Activity when Injected _ Manner of Injection (Check Applicable Cap-Chur Gas Pistol Cap-Chur Gas Rifle Cap-Chur Powder Rifle Hand Syringe Range (Yards) Weather Data: Drug Data: Air Temperature Cloud Cover Items): _ Syringe Size: _ 1 cc _ 2 cc 3 cc 5 cc _ 10 cc Condition ----------- OF, Wind ------------Ground Snow ---------------- Compound (Check Applicable Items); Brand Name (Circle One): Nicotine Alkaloid Cap-Chur Sol, Other Succinylcholine Chloride Sucostrin, Anectine, Phencyclidine Hydrochloride Serny1an, Ga11imine Triethiodide Flaxedile, Concentration Used: Total Dosage Mg/Pound Body Wt. -----Mg/cc ------- Mg Time Injection _ First Ataxia --------Immobilized ------Recovery _ Injection Site: Elapsed Time Post-Immobilization Treatment Comments: Neckband Color Figure Data form to be used in experimental 1. Symptoms (Antidotes, Antiseptics, Penicillin, , Eartag Numbers: Right immobilization Etc.): , Left studies. _ _ �- 123 - first two weeks of June. The first of these was apparently killed by the stampeding herd when spooked by outsiders and general commotion around the pens. The three cows whose calves still survive were put in separate pens prior to calving. It is, therefore,evident that immobilization has no known deleterious effect on the pregnant cows. The deer were in such emaciated condition when received that it was felt prudent to build up their body condition before any experimental immobilization was attempted. Even so, three of them died. Of the two adult does remaining, one sloughed her fetus at almost-term, and the other fawned twins, a male and a female, which still survive. Four antelope fawns were held in the pens temporarily, and prior to shipping them to Georgia, the two buck fawns were injected with 140 mg of Tranvet on two successive days. They were estimated to weigh around 70 pounds each, resulting in a dosage of 0.5 mg/lb. This was evidently a sub-effective dose, as they lost very little, if any, of their wildness. The two doe fawns had been hand-raised, and were not too excitable, therefore, they were not injected. Two of the elk were also injected with 225.0 and 237.5 milligrams of Tranvet, with no apparent effect. However, when injected with 200 milligrams of Sernylan the following morning (normal dosage is 400 to 500 milligrams for an adult elk), both animals went down in approximately five minutes, and stayed down for approximately six hours. Evidently the effect of the phencyclidine hydrochloride was emphasized by the prior and lingering predisposition afforded by the Tranvet. Elk immobilized on the Rio Grande during February and March were downed with 15 to 20 milligrams, and two of them were given injections of Pentazol, a respiratory stimulant. This drug, as evidenced by the Tranvet, kept the animals immobilized for almost twice as long, or more, than succinylcholine chloride nonnally does (10 to 30 minutes). The use of Pentazol was discontinued after these two initial attempts, since it was undesirable to keep the animals down for extended periods in the snow at freezing and below temperatures. 3. Bear Archery has made an experimental pod out of plastic that fits around the shank of an arrow immediately behind the broadhead point, which is filled with powdered succinylcholine chloride and covered with the neck of a toy balloon, which, upon penetration into an animal's body, is rolled back, allowing the drug to go directly into the wound. During July, 1965, Dr. Fred Glover and I went into a deer damage area around private fields in the Cold Springs Mountain area of Moffat County, Colorado, and attempted to euthanize a mule deer with it. Dr. Glover, a proficient archer, failed to hit two deer with this innovation, however. During the archery elk season held in the San Luis Valley, both Dr. Glover and I attempted to inject elk, he with Bear's pod, and I with a hypo-arrow, containing one cc(50 mg) of succinylcholine chloride solution. We were unable to get close enough for a shot at any elk in the area, however. Plansare to try it again during the 1966 archery deer and elk seasons in September. �- 124 - Figure 2. Distant view of the pen complex behind the Fort Collins Research Center, built for immobilization experiments. Figure 3. View looking down the row of wide gates at the east end of the pen division fences, which will allow passage of vehicles. �- 125 - Figure 4. The loading chute with it hinged ramp built to accommodate truck bed heights from pick-ups to semi-trailers. The trajectory of the arrow with Bear's pod behind the broadhead is virtually unchanged from the normal hunting arrow. The hypo-arrow, fitted with a syringe adaptor and one cc barrel, weighing 225 grains filled, as opposed to 125-150 grains for the unadorned hunting arrow, flew truely on target work up to 30 or 35 yards. Beyond this range", however, it dropped rapidly. Personally, I prefer the hypo-arrow thesis, since an animal hit almost anywhere would probably be injected and be recovered by the hunter, whereas with the pod some loss of powder, and slower assimilation in th~ body could be expected, as well as the possibility of the drug being washed out by the hemorrhaging. Recommendations: Continue the job as orginally planned, with specific work on mixtures compounds, and further investigations of the euthanization phases. Prepared Date: by: Richard N. Denney Approved Wildlife Research Leader July. 1966 by: of drug Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief Ferd C. K1einschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �- 126 - AN ANNOTATED BIBLIOGRAPHY ON MAMMAL IMMOBILIZATION WITH DRUGS Richard N. Denney Anonymous. 1959. Cap-Chur equipment. Palmer Chemical and EqUipment Co., lnc. Atlanta, Georgia. Specifications pamphlet, l5pp. Description and specifications of Cap-Chur equipment: long and short-range projectors, automatic-injecting syringe projectiles, spare parts, drugs and dosages for white-tailed deer, dogs and cattle. C02 powered, but since have produced a powder projector rifle. Anonymous. 1962. R. V. C. East African Expedition. 1962. The use of thiambutene/phencyclidine/hyoscine mixture for the immobilization of the topi and the hippopotamus. The Vet. Record, 75(24). Cap-Chur equipment was used to immobilize hippopotami and topi. Each ml of drug contained 330 mg of thiambutene, 23 mg phencyclidine, and 11 mg hyoscine. Nalorphine was used as an antognist to thiambutene. Two hippos were immobilized and three topis. Hippos were immobilized with ranging from 30 m1 (first hippo - wt. approx. 2750#, drug administered in two shots). First hippo went down 1 hr. and 57 minutes. after the first injection anq died 3 hours and 42 minutes later •. The second hippo went down 1 hour and 19 minutes after the initial injection and recovered 4 hours and 29 minutes later. First topi was given .008 ml/lb. body weight of TPH and went down 30 minutes after injection. It was given an additional 200 mg of phencyclidine intramuscularly. It recovered 5 hours and 40 minutes after the initial injection. The second topi was given .007 ml/1b of TPH. It went down 39 minutes after injection at which time it was given 0.5 additional ml of TPH. Prior to recovery it was given 200 mg of Nalorphene intramuscularly and was on its feet again 3 hours and 35 minutes after the initial injection. The third topi was given .004 m1/lb of TPH and later was given an additional 0.4 mI. It went down in 1 hour and 30 minutes following the initial injection. It was then administered 400 mg of Nalorphene intramuscularly and recovered 2 hours and 1 minute. after the initial injection. Anonymous. 1963. A preliminary report on the. program to eliminate Brucellosis in Utah buffalo. Coop. Agencies: Utah Fish and Game Department; Utah State Department Agr., U. S. D. A., B. L. M. Mimeo. rept., 14 pp. Reports on the largely unsuccessful efforts to capture bison calves with Sernylan in southeastern Utah, using Cap-Chur equipment from the helicopter. Three losses stemmed mainly from falling injuries and exhaustion. Immobilization data scanty and inconclusive, 12 calves were immobilized with approximately 0.3 mg. per pound body weight. Anonymous. 1963b. Tranquilize or anaesthetize. Paxarms, Ltd., Timaru, New Zealand. Advertising brochure, foldout, 16 pp. Description and specifications of Paxarms equipment: rifle, syringes, carrying case, trajectory, drugs and variable graduated velocity control. Powered by special cartridges, five held in clip. Loading and injection of syringes unreliable. Anderson, Carl F. 202-203. 1961. Anesthetizing deer by arrow. J. Wildl. Mgmt., 25(2): �- 127 Cap-Chur equipment proved unsatisfactory in the coast area of Oregon because deer were not immobilized before they could hide , drown or . injure themselves; the effective range was approximately 39 yards; and the syringes were too expensive. An arrow syringe was made by silver soldering a 12 gauge needled into the primer pocket of a .357 maghum revolver shell, with a barb soldered on the needle so as to confirm a hit. The plunger was the 11/32-inch arrow shaft with a rubber disc cut from an innertube using the .357 shell as a bit. Cost of syringe materials was about 25¢ and of arrow about 50¢. Most frequent range was 40 yards. Hydraulic action of the drug absorbed the impact of the arrow and prevented penetration deeper than the needle even with a 55-pound bow. Injection was immediate and effect began within a few seconds. Arnold, Oren. 1959. The "sleepy gunll that brings 'em back alive. The reader's Digest, 75(450):31, 32, 34. Narration of the development of Cap-Chur equipment and its uses in immobilizing cattle, antelope, gazelles, horses, dogs, monkeys and zoo animals, and its use in medicating cattle for shipping fever. Balser, Donald S. 1965. Tranquilizer tabs for capturing wild carnivores. I J. Wildl. Mgmt., 29(3):438-442. A tranquilizer trap-tab using the drug diazepam has shown utility in reducing injuries to carnivores caught in steel traps and in preventing their escape. The tab consists of a cloth tablet wired to the trap jaw and containing one gram of diazepam for coyotes, and 500 milligrams for foxes. Animals chew the tab and ingest the drug. Ataxia follows in approximately 10-30 minutes, with the effects lasting 24-48 hours. Baner, E. A. 1958. Catching deer with darts. Pop. Mech., 110(4):96-97. Barnard, P. J. and K. Van der Walt. 1961. Translocation of the bontebok (Damaliseus pygargus) from Bredasdrop to Swellendam. Koedoe, 4:105-109. Animals were trapped in a drive trap and then were administered a dose of a five percent solution of chlorpromazine hydrochloride (Largactil). The dosage used for full-grown bontebok rams (ave. wt. 120 lbs.) was 150 mg. Relaxation occurred in approximately four minutes and the animals went down in approximately 10 minutes. The recovery period was from six to 24 hours depending upon age and condition. Eightyfour animals were captured, sixty-nine survived. Those animals which succumbed were generally in poor condition. Barnes, V. G., Jr. 1965. Activities of black bears in Yellowstone National Park. Colo. Coop. Wildl. Res. Unit Quarterly Rept. 19(2):8-20. Succinylcholine chloride injected in black bears with Cap-Chur equipment or hand syringes on a stick at a dosage rate of 0.2 mg/pound. Sernylan administered at 0.75 mg/lb. In determining body weight of bears only the flesh weight was estimated. Behrend, Donald F. 1965. Notes on field immobilization of white-tailed deer with nicotine. J. Wildl. Mgmt., 29(L~):889-890. Thirty-seven white-tailed deer were hit with automatic-injecting syringes with Cap-Chur equipment, of which 26 were recovered, and eight died, using 3.6 to 3.8 mg/pound of nicotine alkaloid. �- 128 Belling, T. H., and N. H. Booth. 1955. Studies on the pharmacodynamics of succinyl-choline chloride in the horse. J. Am. Vet. Med. Assoc., 126 (934):37. Dosages ranged from .03 to .09 mg/pound intravenously of succinylcholine chloride. Artificial respiration prevents death if a slightly heavy dose is given. there is no direct effect on the blood pressure. Bergerud, A. T., A. Butt, H. L. Russell, H. Whalen. 1964. Inrrnobilization of Newfoundland caribou and moose with succinylcholine chloride and' CapChur equipment. J. Wildl. Mgmt., 28(1):49-53. Dosages on 112 caribou ranged from .045 to .065 for wild, and .025 to .040 mg/pound for captive; and from .020 to .030 for wild, and .025 to .035 mg/pound for captive, on 31 moose (males), with succinylcholine chloride. Bjerre, Jens. 1960. The medicine man in action. In Jens Bjerre, Kalahari. Hill and Waug, New York, N. Y. pp. 116-125. The poisons used by the Bushmen on their arrows come from several sources. (1) The larvae of the Giampfidi.a lucusta beetle, dried and ground to powder and mixed with the juice of a certain root, The larvae are usually found at the root of a sInall bush, the Adenium bkoemicnum. The action is to paralyze the animal, with small animals dying in a few minutes, and larger animals within an hour or two, The meat is edible, although the localized area of poison is cut away. (2) Other vegetable poisons. (3) Venom frmn puff adder and yellow cobra; and from certain scorpions. (4) They sometimes poison waterho1es with branches from the plant Eupforbial candelabra. (5) It is claimed that they can extract poison from carcaner. They have some knowledge of antidotes. Black, H. C, 1958. Black bear research in New York. Trans. N. Am. Wildl. Conf., 23:443-460. Ether was sprayed into culvert-type traps on 130 bears, succinyl was used on 13 bears; and 75 bears were treated with pentobarbital sodium, for a total of 208 bears handled with drugs. Ether (1.2 pounds/ bear) sprayed in trap for nine minutes, held under for 20 to 30 minutes. Pentobarbital sodium used at 60 mg/5~ pounds giving anesthesia lasting one to several hours. Anectine dose averaged 27 mg/lOO pounds, latent period three minutes, given intramuscularly in hindquarter. Black, H. C., O. H. Hewitt, and C. W. Severinghaus. 1959. Use of drugs in handling black bears. N. Y. Fish and Game Jour., 6(3):179-203. From 1956-58, 297 black bears were trapped and handled, with retrapped bears totalled 383. 223 were anesthetized with ether and pentobarbital sodium, 126 anaesthetized with pentobarbital sodium alone, 21 with succinylcholine and pentaobarbital, four with chloroform. Ruminants five times more susceptible to succinylcholine than non-ruminants. Pedal reflexes are the best index for deeper planes of surgical anaesthesia, succinylcholine chloride used as initial immobilizer for trapped bears. In cases of respiratory failure artificial respiration and respiratory stimulants were used with succinylcholine chloride immobilization. Bovet, D. F., F. Bovet-Nitti, S. Guarino, V. G. Longo, and M. Marotto. 19Lf9. Pharmacodynamical property of certain derivatives of succinylcholine with �- 129 curare-like action: esters of trialkylethanolamine of dicarboxylic aliphatic acids. R. C. Inst. Superiore di Sanita, 12:106. Boyd, Raymond J. 1962. Succinylcholine chloride for immobilization of Colorado mule deer. J. Wildl. Mgmt., 26(3):332,333. Succinylcholine chloride in the form of Anectine solution of 20 mg/ cc introduced intrathoracically effectively at rates of .078 for fawns and .052 for adults, and intravenously at rates of .067 for fawns and .036 for adults, in mg/pound body weight. Fawns were less susceptible than adults, but paralysis lasted longer. Brodie, B. B., and C. A. M. Hogben. 1957. Some physico-chemical factors in drug action. J. Pharm. and Pharmacol., 9(6):345-380. Buck, N., P. Fry, C. Green, R. Gwynn, p. Keen, D. Pout, D. Presslond, and H. Suddes. 1962. The use of thiambutene/phencyclidine/hyoscine mixture for the immobilization of the topi and the hippopotamus. Vet. Rec., 75(24):630-633. Each mI. of mixture contained 330 mg of thiambutene, 23 mg. of phencyclidine, and 11 mg hyoscine. Nalorphene was used as an antagonist to the thiambutene. Two hippopotami and four topi were immobilized. Hippo #1 weighed an estimated 2,750 pounds and was administered 30 ml of TPH (in three separate injections) by means of the Palmer Cap-Chur gun. It went down in 1 hour and 57 minutes and died after 3 hours and 42 minutes because no antagonist was available. Hippo #2 weighed an estimated 300~fo pounds and received 20 ml of TPH (in two separate injections) after which it went down in 1 hour and 19 minutes. Six hundred mg of Na10tphetle were administered, and the hippo recovered within 4 hours and 29 minutes after the first injection. The four topi were given from 0.5-0.9 ml/lOO pounds body weight and from 200-500 mg of Nalorphene. Immobilization time Varied from 30 minutes to 1 hour and 30 minutes. Recovery varied from 2 hours and I minute to 8 hours and 9 minutes. Buechner, Helmut K., A. M. Harthoorn, and John A. Lock. 1960a. Control of African wild animals. Nature, 185(4705):47-48. Immobilization studies justified because African wiid game is in danger of extinction, i.e., only 200 Rothschilds giraffes remain in the world. Species immobilized were: Adenota kob thomasi, Giraffa camelopardalis rothschildi, Eguus greyui, Kobus defassa ugandae, Alcelaphus buse1aphus le1wel, and Dicetas bicoruis bicarnis. Dosages of succinylcholine chloride varied from .13 mg/kg for a female Diceras to .35 mg/ kg for Adenota, and Kobus. Buechner, Helmut K., A. M.Harthoorn, and John A. Lock. 1960b. Immobilizing Uganda kob with succinylcholine chloride. Canadian Jour. of Compo Med. and Vet. Sci., 24(11):317-325. Fifty kob were immobilized, 46 with succinylcholine chloride and four with alkaloidal nicotine. Shooting was done from a vehicle by the driver. Reaction of animal varied from running from 30 to 500 yards after injection. Proper dosage allowed handling within a minute after falling. Eyes, eyelids and tail were unaffected. Nicotine alkaloid immobilization took longer, and there was a startled reaction when the ears were tagged, equilibrium was slowly regained. Succinyl immobilization caused no convulsions or catalepsy, gave quick and positive paralysis, a period �- 130 - of complete to handler. immobilization, is quickly hydrolyzed, and is not dangerous. Buechner, Helmut K., A. M. Harthoorn, and John A. Lock. 1960c. Recent advances in field immobilization of large mammals with drugs. Trans. N. Amer. Wildl. Conf., 25:415-422. Uganda kob were immobilized with nicotine alkaloid at 4 mg/kg and with succinylcholine at .35 mg/kg. Rothschildi giraffe, Jackson Wartebeast, waterbuck and rhinoceros were ,immobilized with succinyl successfully. Buffalo and wildebeast were uncertain with succinyl. Flaxedil shows promise for buffalo and giraffe. Succinylcholine chloride successful on grizzly, nicotine alkaloid unsuccessful on elk. Burris, Oliver E. 1965. Alaska Fish and Game Dept., Fairbanks. Personal connnunication to Richard N. Denney, Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Dept .; Fort Collins, January 19 and February 9, 1965. Immobilization of Dall sheep with the helicopter andCap-Chur gun required 5-15 minutes to maneuver the animals for a shot, after they were well exhausted. A high mortality rate from Cap-Chur Sol and succinylcholine chloride was experienced, even in sub-immobilization doses. The animals succumbed to apnea or respiratory arrest 25-30 minutes after injection. Carter, B. 1960. Rhinoceros capture. Typed reports, Ref. GA/CAP/3. Kenya Game Dept., Nairobi, Kenya. Cary, Lucian. 1959. Look what's happened to airguns. True Mag., General history of airguns and drug capture in particular. An interesting use of Cap-Chur equipment is innoculation of range cattle against shipping fever. A man can treat 20 to 30 cows riding in a jeep in an hour. The same job by hand might take two or three days. Anthrax also can be treated by remotely injected serum. Casteel, David A. and William R. Edwards. 1965. Surgical anesthesia for cottontails. J. Wildl. Mgmt., 29(1):196-198. Intravenous injection of 30-50 mg/kg of pentobarbital sodium into the medial auricular vein of the ear anesthetized cottontails of various ages. Intraperitoneal injections were not satisfactory. Sernylan is not an anesthetic, but was used for immobilization. Ether was not satisfactory because of the lack of adequate equipment. Castillo, J. C. and E. J. de Beer. 1950. The neuromuscular blocking action of succinylcholine (diacetylcholine). J. Pharmacol. and Exper. Therap., 99:458-464. The effectiveness of succinylcholine decamethonium bromide (CIO) and d-tubocurarine chloride was compared on cats, rabbits, and mice where the drugs were administered intravenously, Succinylcholine was observed to have strong neuro-muscular blocking action in cats, rabbits, and mice, but the paralysis was of shorter duration than d-tubocurarine. The paralysis induced by succinylcholine was prolonged by the use of an anticholinesterase such as phytostigmine. Chen, G., C. R. Ensor, D. Russell, and Barbara Bohner. cology of l-(l-Phenylcyclohexyl) piperidine, HCl. Ther., 127(3):241-250. 1959. The pharmaJ. Pharm. and Exper. �- 131 - A pharmacological report on Sernylan (phencyclidine hydrochloride) . on rats, mice, pigeons, guinea pigs, hamsters, rabbits, cats, dogs, monkeys, frogs and fish. It acts principally on the central nervous system either by stimulation or depression. Central depression manifested by loss of muscle coordination of the limbs, causing local anesthetic activity. It doesn't block actions of skeletal muscles, and respiration and blood pressure are not markedly suppressed, at anethetic levels. Conley, Clare. 1963. Hypo-arrow archery. Field and Stream, 68(2):43-45, 84, 86, 129, 131, 133. This is a report on a special hunt for white-tails in Alabama conducted by the Southeastern Cooperative Wildlife Disease Study and Alabama Conservation Department. One cc of 50 mg/cc succinyleholine chloride solution used in syringe-fitted arrows, lethal within 15-45 seconds. Use half-inch long needle, aim for hindquarters, arrow drops out. Arrow weighs 211 grains. Hit deer moved from a few steps to 50 yards after injection. This type of hunting precludes crippling, causing clean, painless kill or a recovery. Meat is edible, said to taste better than any other type of kill. Cowan, I. McT., A. J. Wood, and H. C. Nordan. 1962. Studies in the tranquilization and immobilization of deer (Odocoileus). Can. J. Compo Med. and Vet. Sci., 26(3):57-61. Accuracy in administration of a precise dosage would be aided by the use of a more dilute solution, such as 10 mg/cc. Succinylcholine chloride affects only the motornerves, and not the sensory nerves. Recommended dosages of .04 to .06 mg/kg. Craighead, Frank and John Craighead. 1960. Knocking out grizzly bears for their own good. Nat. Geo. Mag., 118(2):276-291. Grizzlies studied to learn movem~nts, size and character of range, population structure and numbers, breeding age, frequency of breeding, litter size at birth, and infant mortality, conditions during hibernation, and determination of average life span. Plastic streamers held well and weren't minded by other bears. Sucostrin dosage was 1 mg/3 pounds of body weight, acts in one to four minutes. Craighead, J. J., M. Hornocker, W. Woodgard, and F. C. Craighead, Jr. 1960. Trapping, immobilizing and color-marking grizzly bears. Trans. N. Amer. Wi1d1. and Nat. Res. Conf., 25:347-363. Trapping in the Yellowstone Park study area done with culvert traps, immobilization with succinylcholine chloride, 1 mg/3.l pounds body weight. Eyelids fluttered first, head lowered until muzzle rested on chest, then sat on haunches or rolled directly on side, relaxed jaws first, then forearms and finally hind legs. Intercostal muscles and then diaphragm affected lastly. Breathing regular and quiet with proper dosage. Reaction of recovered bears ranged from aggressive to submissive. Shots made in neck from vehicle or afoot. Older bears required smaller doses, fatter bears required smaller dose. Twenty seven grizzlies were marked and released, yielding 160 observations. Crockford, Jack A., Frank A. Hayes, James H. Jenkins, 1957a. Nicotine salicylate for capturing deer. 213-220. and Seldon D. Feurt. J. Wildl. Mgmt., 21(2): �- 132 - Experimental study begun in 1955 using drugs of curariform action. Flaxedil tested on deer and felt undesirable. Strychnine salts were tested and found too lethal. Nicotine salicylate found satisfactory, delivered to animal with modified Crosman CO2 gun and a dart made of a low carbon drill bit with plastic on rear and metal tubing pOint, with the drug molded with honey to the shank of the. dart. One hundred trials with goats successful, and 17 deer were captured. Range of 25 yards, 300 milligrams of nicotine recommended for white-tails. Nine criteria set up for ideal drug: (1) effective dose not too large for dart, (2) stability, (3) rapid absorption into system's circulation, (4) rapid immobilization, (5) wide margin of safety, (6) no antidote required, (7) rapid elimination from circulatory system, (8) no drastic effect on gestation, and (9) no permanent effect or damage to the animal. Crockford, Jack A., Frank A. Hayes, James H. Jenkins, and Seldon D. Feurt. 1957b. Field application of nicotine salicylate for capturing deer. Trans. N. Amer. Wildl. Conf., 22:579-583. Nicotine salicylate meets the nine requirements mentioned in previous reference. Gun used made by Palmer Chemical and Equipment Company. Dosages of 300 to 400 mg/deer (white-tails), depending on size and maturity of animal. Pentobarbital sodium advantageous and safe when used with nicotine. Animals followed six minutes a f t.e.rinjection, searched for after eight minutes. One to 30 minutes required for recovery. Immobilized 141 deer with 9.2 per cent mortality, experienced some transitory excitement at onset of paralysis. Subcutaneous or intraperitoneal injection builds up tolerance to the drug, wearing off in 24 hours. Crockford, J. A., F. A. Hayes, J. H. Jenkins, and S. D. Feurt. 1958. An automa.tic projectile ty"pe syringe. Vet. Med., 53(2):115-119. More than 100 likely compounds were considered before settling on nicotine. The induction of the drug in paste form was too slow. Automatic syringe injected fluid into animal on impact by effervescent action of tablet and water. Species worked on were 27 goats, 61 white-tailed deer, 38 cattle, and one of two individuals of eight other species, deliverying up to five cc's. Dalrymple, B. W. 1960. Knockout drops. Outdo'Jr Life, 125(1):56-59. Harold ("Red") Palmer's Cap-Chur equipment was used to capture surplus exotic deer on ranch in Texas. The CO2 rifle was used to propel the syringes which were loaded with nicotine and other experimental drugs. Gas pressure forced the drugs from the syringes into the animals upon impact of the syringes. No dosages nor specific drugs were given. Davis, D. A., F. C. Ellis, N. O. Reese, and D. C. Grosskreutz. 1955. Prolonged effects of succinylcholine and some possible explanations for these phenomena. Anesthesiology, 16:333-342. Experiments with dogs indicated under conditions of hyperopia when accompanied by the administration of succinylcholine there was nearly three times the delay in time required to resume spontaneous respiratory activity and the development of the necessary muscular power to adequately ventilate the dogs. Apparently the intercostal muscles were affected more severely than the diaphragm. Increased carbon dioxide levels did not significantly depress plasma cholinesterase levels. The authors �- 133 - believed that succinylcholine produced an effect on the respiratory muscles, and especially the intercostal muscles, which was different from the effect on other muscles. Experiments suggested that the intercostal muscles were affected more both in duration and degree. It was postulated that carbon dioxide excess was primarily responsible for the prolonged effects of succinylcholine. Day, Gerald I. 1964. Capturing and marking techniques. Job compl. Rept., W-78-R-8, Arizona Game and Fish Dept. The following dosages were found effective for the indicated species: succinylcholine chloride - .10 mg/pound for mule deer, .056 mg/ pound for white-tailed deer, .10 mg/pound for antelope, and .30-.35 mg/ pound for black bear; Sernylan - 1.2 - 2.0 mg/pound fatal for mule deer, and 1.0 - 2.0 for javelina. Used Ambu resuscitator for overdoses of succinyl. Denney, Richard N •• 1963. Cap-Chur notes. Colo. Game, Fish and Parks Dept., Denver. Mimeo, Rept., 3 pp. The history, equipment, development and uses of Cap-Chur equipment, with brief description of various drugs and recommended dosages by species, derived from literature and personal experience. Succinylcholine chloride dosages: .05 - .14 mg/pound for mule deer, 15 - 20 mg/adult cow elk; Sernylan dosages - .75 - 1.5 mg/pound for mule deer, 1.0 mg/ pound for elk. Denney, Richard N. 1964a. Immobilization and tranquilization studies on Colorado deer and elk. Job Compl. Rept., W-38-R-18. Colo. Game, Fish and Parks Dept., Part I, July, 1965. pp 5-22. Twenty eight animals were injected with the Cap-Chur gun with Sernylan and Sucostrin. Six deer and six elk were injected with Sernylan with effective dosages of 1 mg/pound. Sucostrin was used on one mule deer fatally, and on 10 elk, immobilizing six, of which one died. Effective doses for elk were .04 - .05 mg/pound. Tranvet was used on 11 deer in transporting by truck, at the rate of 5 cc/head, with successful results. Denney, Richard N. 1964b. Cap-Chur them alive. Colo. Outdoors, 13(4):40-41. Photographs and description of Cap-Chur equipment, including the C02 pistol and rifle, automatic injecting syringes and drugs. The uses in big game research in Colorado are discussed. Denney, Richard N. 1964c. Whirlybird tagging. Colo. Outdoors, 13(5):24-26. Photographs and description of immobilization of elk with the CapChur equipment from the helicopter for neckbanding purposes, using succinylcholine chloride and phencyclidine hydrochloride (Sernylan). Denney, Richard N. 1965a. Neckbanding elk from a helicopter. Job Compl. Rept., W-38-R-19. Colo. Game, Fish and Parks Dept., Part III, July, 1965. pp. 269-276. Immobilization of elk from the helicopter employed the use of muscle relaxants injected with Cap-Chur equipment. Of the 103 elk neckbanded in the Williams Fork of the Yampa, Middle Park and the Rio Grande areas, 39 were immobilized. Drugs used for comparative studies were phencyclidine hydrochloride and succinylcholine chloride, with effective dosages �- 134 of 400-500 mg/head of adult elk and 16-20 mg/head, respectively. drug had specific advantages under particular conditions. Each Denney, Richard N~ 1965b. Wanted! Information leading to the location of 515 "banded" cow elk. Colo. Outdoors, 14(5):10-11. Description of group live-trapping, immobilizing elk from the helicopter, and jumping on elk in deep snow from the helicopter.Immobilization with succinylcholine chloride and Sernylan. During 1964-65 winter, 515 elk were neckbanded, of which 102 we~e done from the helicopter, and of these, 72 were jumped upon. Denney, Richard N. 1966. Neckbanding techniques with the helicopter. Trans. W. Assoc. Game and Fish Comm., 46. Description of development and procedures of neckbanding elk from the helicopter by (1) immobilization with succinylcholine chloride (37 immobilized, 11 injected and not recovered, four fatalities -- 15-20 mg/ adult cow) and phencyclidine hydrochloride (24 immobilized, no non-captures, one fatality not attributed to the drug -- 400-500 mg/head of adult elk with Sernylan); and (2) 78 elk were jumped upon in the deep snow from the helicopter. All were neckbanded and eartagged. Jumping most efficient, yielded II/hour, while best yield with immobilization was 3/hour. Devenport, Fred. 1961. Syringe projection experiments on Wind Cave bison. Wind Cave Nat'l. Park, Memo., typed, 5 pp. Use of Sucostrin and nicotine on three adult and 34 calf bison, and Cap-Chur Solon six bison, in Wind Cave National Park, South Dakota. Effective dosages of Sucostrin were nine mg/head, and of nicotine were from 400-675 mg/head. Ditman, Keith S. 1964. Drug immobilization of wild animals. atry in General Practice, 2(4):103-113. Mind-Psychi- Dodge, Wendell. 1964. Oral communication, Denver Federal Center, U. S. F. and W. S., February, 1964. Reported effective dosage of ;05 mg/pound of body weight with succinylcholine chloride on Columbian black-tailed deer. Ebeds, H. 1962. Practical experience in the use of the Cap-Chur gun. Afr. Vet. Med. Ass., 33(1):87-91. J. S. Eckerling, B., J. A. Goldman, and B. Gans. 1959. The combined intravenous use of Pethidine, Phenergan and Lorfan for analgesia in obstetrics. Obstetrics and Gynecology, 14(3):331-336. Ellis, C. H., S. Norton, and W. V. Morgan. 1952. Central depression by drugs which block neuromuscular transmission. Federation Proc., 11:42. Drugs which were used as myoneural blocking agents such as: syncurine, d-tubocurarine, and diacetylcholine exhibited evidence of central depression as well as peripheral depression. This was evidenced by a definite lag in the return of spontaneous respiratory movements after the diaphragm had again become responsive to electrical stimulation of the phrenic nerve. �- 135 Erickson, A. W. 1957. Techniques for live-trapping and handling black bears. N. Am. Wildl. Conf. Trans., 22:520-543. A total of 96 black bears were handled 109 times on the Upper Peninsula of Michigan. Culvert and steel traps were used, and then the bears were anesthetized with ether or Halatal (pentobarbital sodium). One pound of ether was sprayed into sealed culvert traps, taking an average of seven minutes to anesthetize. An ether cone was used on steel-trapped bears, or an inguinal injection of Halatal was given at a rate of one grain per five pounds body weight, requiring 11 minutes for sedation. Evans, F. T., P. W. S. Gray, H. Lehman, and E. Silk. 1952. Sensitivity to succinylcholine in relation to serum-cholinesterase~ Lancet, 262:122930. The blood of humans cont~ins two cholinesterases: one in the serum is called "pseudo" - acetylcholinesterase and the other in .the red blood cells is the true acetylcholinesterase. Two enzymes of each kind were tested, one with a high and one with a low activity. Succinylcholine evidently acts by inhibiting the true acetylcholinesterase at the neuromuscular junction and the effects of succinylcholine are removed by the "pseudo" - actylcholinesterase of the serum. Patients with low levels of the serum-esterase were most severely affected by succinylcholine. Feurt, S. D., J. H. Jenkins, F. A. Hayes, and J. A. Crockford. 1958. Pharmacology and toxicology of nicotine with special reference to species variation. Science, 127(3305):1054-1055. Species varied as to minimum lethal dose of nicotine by intravenous injection as follows: cats, 2.0 mg/ke; dogs, 5.0 mg/kg; mice, 7.1 mg/ kg; rabbits, 3.3 times; mice, 4.6 times; and cats, 10 times. On.whitetailed deer, 205 showed a minimum effective dose of 3.0 mg/kg, and approximate lethal dose of 9.0 mg/kg. Flook, D. R., J. R. Robertson, O. R. Hermanrude, H. K. Buechner. 1962. Succinylcholine chloride for immobilization of North American elk. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 26(3):334-336. This experiment from intramuscular injection, with lower hip favored target because of large area, depth of muscle, and small amount of subcutaneous fat. Broad range between effective dose and lethal dose, although both were lower in late winter and early spring than at other times. Within the limits of effectiveness and lethal doses, a larger dose did not speed immobilization. Effective dosages ranged from .04 to .167 mg per pound body weight. Foldes, F. F., T. S. Maehai, R. D. Hunt, P. G. McNall, 1952. Synthetic muscle relaxants in anesthesia. 150:1559. and P. C. Carberry. J. Am. Med. Assoc., Foldes, F. F., A. P. Monte, H. M. Brunn, Jr., and B. Wolfson. 1961. Studies with muscle relaxants in unanesthetized subjects. Anesthesiology, 22(2): 230-236. Neuromuscular activity of three nondepolarizing (d-tubocurarine chloride, taxiferine chloride, gallimine triethiodide) and two depolarizing relaxants (decamethonium bromide, succinylcholine chloride) was investigated on ten unanestheized adult humans. Grip strength and vital capacity were measured at specified intervals. All compounds affected �- 136 - grip strength more than vital capacity. Relative respiration sparing was greater with non-depolarizing than with depolarizing relaxants. Recovery was delayed more with nondepolarizing agents. Flyger, Vogn. 1961. Handling wild animals with a new tranquilizer. Trans. N. Amer. Wild1. Conf., 26:230-233. Chlordiazepoxide was used to tranquilize animals. It was given orally in capsule form at the dosage of 30-40 mg/kg of body weight. Ten mg/kg will noticeably pacify the animal. Over 40 mg/kg was too strong and likely to produce ataxia. Tranquilization lasted 24-36 hours normally, and up to four or five days for overdoses. Animals vary in reaction, the milder produc1ng less contrasting response than the vicious or aggressive animals. Flyger, V., M. S. R. Smith, R. L. Damm, and R. S. Peterson. 1965. Effects of three irnnobilizing drugs on Weddell seals. J. Mamm., 46(2):345-347. Sleeping seals were injected in gluteal region with 10cc in hand syringe with three-inch l5-gauge needle. Nicotine alkaloid (1.7 _ 3.9 mg/kg) caused convulsions in 14 minutes, out for 63 minutes. Sernylan (.5 mg/kg), 18 minute latent period, out for nine hours. Succinyl (.52.0 mg/kg), nine minute latent period, out for 34 minutes. Nicotine least satisfactory drug. Galliziolli, S. and Jerry Day. 1965. The syringe gun. The Wildl. News, Ariz. G. and F. Dept., 12(5):9-13. Gives a brief description of the gas rifle and automatic syringe. Description of a typical deer imnlobilization and javelina immobilization operation are given, in which the resuscitator must be used on the over-dosed deer. Deer are eartagged and streamers put in the ears, jave1inas are marked similarly, plus a harness with a triangular plastic, numbered patch over each shoulder. Georgia Game and Fish Cornnission. 1959. They hunt deer with a needle. Georgia Game and Fish, 8(2):18, 19, 23. A popular report on the Cooperative Deer Disease Study, with pictures of the Cap-Chur equipment and immobilized deer. Georgia Game and Fish Commission. 1960. Did you ever sit up with a sick deer? Georgia Game and Fish, 9(2):16, 17. White-tailed deer are captured for study by remote delivery of a drug with Cap-Chur equipment. Glick, D. ase. 1941. Some additional observations on specificity of cholinesterJ. BioI. Chem., 137:357-362. "The - bromoethyl and choline bromide esters of va1eric, caproic, heptoic, succinic, and maleic acids were prepared, as well as the chloroplatinates of the choline esters. From previous data plus those presented in this paper, it follows that enzymatic scission of ~ - acetylcholine esters increases with lengthening of the hydrocarbon chain to the butryl compound and thereafter. The esters of the dicarboxylic acids are split relatively slowly; the succinyl compound was hydrolyzed at a slower rate than maleycholine." Geotz, R. H. 1955. Curare "spiked" bullet in giraffe. Time, 66(11):65 0 �- 137 The problem of studying the mechanics or hydraulics of the arterial. and venous system of a giraffe's neck while the animal was alive was solved by immobilizing one with a bullet coated with curare and powdered sugar shot into the hindquarters. Immobilization took 45 minutes. Blood travels 19 feet when giraffe drinking, the heart weighs 25 pounds, and the jugular vein is one-inch in diameter, with a complicated valve system. Blood pressure when the head erect was 200 mm of mercury, when the head was lowered it was 175 mm of mercury. Gordon, Dave. 1966. A brief history of drug capture. Game Fact Sheet No. 36, Colo. Game, Fish and Parks Dept., 4 pp. A summary of the history, descriptions of the projectors, projectiles, and drugs, with some dosages for Colorado big game animals for succinylcholine chloride and phencyclidine hydrochloride, with a diagram of the original dart, and one of the current automatic injecting syringe. Green, Houston. 1963. New technique for using the Cap-Chur gun. J. Wildl. Mgmt., 27(2):292-296. Cap-Chur gun and automatic syringes used to immobilize 75 whitetails in four months. None of 95 Cap-Chur Charges used failed to fire. Cap-Chur Sol used in one cc syringes, with a standard dose for all deer from 60 to 130 pounds (1 cc of drug at 350 mg/cc). Variation in reactionobtained by varying location of injection: hindquarters on smaller deer (60 to 100 pounds), thoracic area on larger deer. Chest hits resulted in more rapid immobilization, and more rapid recovery. Immobilized animals were laid on left side to prevent strangulation from rumen seepage. Artificial respiration given for two to three minutes or until animal relaxed and breathing normally. Used 3/4 inch needles for chest shots to prevent puncture of lungs. Hall, T. C., E. V. Taft, W. H. Baker, and J. E. Aub. 1953. A preliminary report of the use of Flaxedil to produce paralysis in the white-tailed deer. J. Wildl. Mgmt., 17(4):516-520. Drugs used in the experiment were: paraldehyde, curare and Flaxedil. Neostigmine and Tensilon were antidotes for the latter two. Paraldehyde of 50 to 55 cc necessary to immobilize 100 to 105 pound deer, but slow and incomplete, and one third of the deer died. Curare was used successfully, but margin of safety too narrow without satisfactory antidote. Flaxedil was used successfully by shooting a dart with a known weight of the powdered drug on the tip, using a Crosman CO2 rifle. Tensilon is an excellent antidote. Flaxedil dosage was 2.2 - 3.0 mg/lO pounds of body weight, effective in 20 to 40 minutes. Respiratory paralysis controlled by injection of Tensilon, but artificial respiration often a satisfactory antidote. Hanson, C. H. 1956. Succinylcholine iodide as a muscular relaxant in veterinary surgery. J. Am. Vet. Med. Assoc., 128:287-91. Succinylcholine iodide (Celocurin) was tested as a possible alternative to the classical method of casting in clinical animal restraint. Succinylcholine iodide has the pharmacological effect of blocking neuromuscular transmission by depolarizing the muscle end-plates. Doses for horses were 0.18 mg/kg of body weight for thoroughbreds and 0.13 mg/kg for draft horses. Minimum doses for dogs were 0.067 mg/kg. In cattle �- 138 0.02 mg/kg was necessary to cast the animals. The author recommended using Celocurin only with a sedative agent such as Nembutal or a narcotic such as thiopental-trichloroethylene. Hamilton, R. 1960. Capture of deer in Indiana with nicotine Proc. Midwest Wildl. Conf., 22:8 pp. salicylate. Harper, James A. 1964. Succinylcholine chloride for immobilization of Roosevelt elk in southwestern Oregon. Oregon St. Game Comm., Mimeo., 17 pp. Out of 219 hits with Cap-Chur equipment, 154 elk of all ages and both sexes were immobilized with 8-30 mg/head (average 11.-16 mg/head), with only 10 mortalities, by the use of succinylcholine chloride. Harper, James A. 1965. Immobilization of Roosevelt elk by succinylcholine chloride. J. Wildl. Mgmt., 29(2):339-345. From January, 1963, to February, 1964, 219 Roosevelt elk were immobilized with succinylcholine chloride. Hits in the hip, shoulder or back muscles gave the most consistent results. The latent period and duration of paralysis were not affected by sex, size or age. Average length of latent period was six minutes. The duration of paralysis varied with physical condition. Harrington, Fred A. 1960. Deer immobilization experiments. Job Compl. Rept., W-75--R-7, New Mex. F. A., Mimeo., 13 pp. Nicotine salicylate was injected in 12 mule deer, suffering two fatalities. No standard doses were recommended: 400 mg/head on does resulted in immobilization of one, death in another, and no reaction in two others. Doses ranged from one to four mg/pound body weight with variable reactions. Hart, Ray D. 1960. Bison immobilization research. Job Compl. Rept., W-75R-3. South Dakota Game, Fish and Parks Dept., May 1, 1961, 11 pp. Fourteen bison were immobilized in Wind Cave National Park and Custer State Park experimenting with succinylcholine chloride, Cap-Chur Sol and Cap-Chur Gem. One three-year old bull died. Dosages for succinyl ranged from .023 - .027 mg/pound, .98 - 1.68 mg/pound for Cap-Chur Sol, and 8 mg/pound for Cap-Chur Gem. Harthoorn, A. M. 1962a. The capture and relocation of the white rhinoceros at the Umfolozi Game Reserve. J. Nat'l Parks, 2(2). Harthoorn, A. M. 1962b. Capture of the white (Square-lipped) rhinoceros Ceratotherium simum (Burchell) with the use of drug immobilization technique. Can. J. Compo Med. and Vet. Sci., 26(9):203-208. Combinations of five drugs were used to immobilize ~nd trans locate white rhinos. These drugs were: (1) Sernyl [l-(lphencyclohexyl) piperdine monohydrochlorid~l, (2) morphine hydrochloride, (3) hyoscine hydrobromide, (4) Largactil (Chlorpromazine hydrochloride), and (5) Themalon (diethylthiambutene hydrochloride). Eight of the instances of white rhino immobilization involved combinations of Sernyl, morphine, and hyoscine. Three instances of immobilization involved combinations of Sernyl, Themalon, and hyoscine. One instance of immobilization involved combinations of Largactil, morphine, and hyoscine. Nalorphine was administered as an antidote to the immobilizing drugs. Low doses were considered to be 0.04 �- 139 mg/lb body weight of Sernyl mixed with 0.11 mg/lb of morphine and 1.3 mg/lb of hyoscine or 0.07 mg/lb of Sernyl with 1.11 mg/lb of Themalon and 2.2 mg of hyoscine. Immobilization time with the first mixture was about 60 minutes and with the second was about 15-20 minutes. Moderate doses w~re 0.13 mg/lb of Sernyl with 0.47 mg/lb of morphine and 4.0 mg/ lb of hyoscine. Immobilization was 12 minutes. A high dose was considered to be 0.23 mg/lb of Sernyl with 0.83 mg/lb of morphine and 1.0 mg/ lb of hyoscine. Immobilization occured within 8 minutes. All 12 rhinos which were immobilized recovered. Themalon appeared to have an advantage over morphine in that it was more soluble, less toxic, and possesses an action which was more easily reversed. Harthoorn, A. M. 1962c. Producing "twilight sleep" in large wild mammals. J. Am. Vet. Med. Assoc., 141(12):1473. Twilight sleep has been produced in ma~ by injection of a mixture of morphine and scopolamine. Similar condition has been induced in large wild mammals by injection of mixture of Sernylan, Themalon, and scopolamine. The injection was by Cap-Chur equipment. Dosage: 10 mg Sernylan, 120 mg Themalon, and 5 mg Scopolamine per 100 pounds of body weight. Used successfully with 100 per cent recovery on: white (square-lipped) rhinoceros, black rhinoceros (Diceros bicornis) and wildebeests (Connochaetes taurinus). Animals become tractable while maintaining powers of locomotion, can be easily crated for translocation. If animal goes down, an injection of Lethidrone rapidly lightens narcosis enabling the subject to rise. A tranquilizer can be used with it. Harthoorn, A. M. 1965. Application of pharmacological and physiological principles in restraint of wild animals. J. Wildl. Mgmt., Wildl. Mono. No. 14, 78 pp. The object and intent of this study were to evolve drug mixtures that have wider margin of safety and which should reduce mortality, and to make the problems of judging weight and body condition easier, and to attempt to present the principles of drug administration and the physiological reactions of the animals so that the knowledge is available to non-specialists. The recommendations are based on three years of work on the special requirements of African wild mammals. Data are given on drugs, physiology, immobilization of rhinoceros, hippopotamus, antelope, giraffe, zebra, Felidae, elephant, etc. Harthoorn, A. M., J. A. Lock, and J. Mackeand. 1960. Translocation of wild animals as a means of game control. Nature, 187 (4736):518. The pregnant females of Adenota kob thomasi possibly more susceptible to succinylcholine chlvride than other sexes and ages. The addition of atropine cut the mortality rate to zero. Harthoorn, A. M. and J. A. Lock. 1961. Advances in the use of muscle relaxing drugs for immobilization and handling of larger land animals. J. Small Anim. Pract., 2:163-169. Twenty-three hippopotami were immobilized with succinylcholine using a dose of 0.8 mg/lb estimated body weight. Two did not recover from the immobilization dose due to over-estimations of weight. Two hippos were immobilized with gallamine triethiodide with doses of 1.8 mg/lb. Succinylcholine required less drug and acted faster but was not as safe as gallamine triethiodide. Six buffalo were immobilized with gallamine triethiodide without a loss and four were immobilized with d-tubercurarine with loss of the first. Addition of atropine to the d-tubercurarine �solution it was believed would have prevented the loss; The dose of gallamine triethiodide was 1.2 - 1.3 mg/lb and put the animals down in about 11 minutes. Eight giraffe were immobilized with gallamine triethiodide without a loss. Optimum doses were believed to be 1.7 mg/lb body weight. Ten rhinocerus were immobilized with gallamine triethiodide, two did not recover. Effective doses were 0.8 - 0.9 mg/lb. There was some evidence to indicate that centrally acting drugs would act better on rhinos than muscle relaxants. Seven elephants were immoblized with gallamine triethiodide, one did not recover. Doses of 1.2 - 1.3 mg/lb were effective. The one elephant which did not recover. received 1. 6 mg/lb. Harthoorn, A. M. and C. D. Luck. 1962. The handling and marking of wild East African elephant (Loxodonta africana) with the drug immobilization technique, second preliminary report, British Vet. J., 118:526-530. Combinations of Flaxedil (zallamine triethiodide) and Scopolamine (hyoscine hydrobromide) were used to immobilize three African elephants. Sernyl 1-(1-phenylcyc10hexyl) piperdine monohydrochloride was used as a potentiating drug on two of the elephants. Doses of the immobilizing drug contained 0.8-0,9 mg/lb of Flaxedi1 and .05 mg/lb of Scopolamine. Sernyl was administered in doses of 0,05 - 0.07 mg/lb. Immobilization time varied from 18-30 rninutes. Two of the elephants were administered Prostigmine (neostigmine methylsulphate) to reverse the action of Flaxedi1. Hatch, R. D., D. H. Ferris, R. P. Link, and Jack Calhoun. 1959. Unsatisfactory results with nicotine immobilization of a deer and Brahma crossbred cattle -- two case reports. J. Am. Vet. Med. As soc ,, 135(2):92-93. Deer of undetermined species was hit in the neck with no effect. A second dose was injected in the thigh. The deer died in 12 hours. Three Br ahma crossbred calves we re shot with a dart too sma Ll., but with hopes of quieting them. One had little effect in 30 minutes, the second with twice the dosage caused excitement and incoordination, but was not tranquilized. The third received more than twice the first dosage and showed tremendous excitement. The first and second were paralyzed three hours after injection. The first recovered, the second died 12 hours after injection. Hayes, Frank A., James H. Jenkins, Seldon D. Feurt, and Jack A. Crockford. 1957. Observations on the use of nicotine for immobilizing semiwild goats. J. Am. Vet. Med. Assoc., 130(11):479-482. Powde red nicotine was mixed w i t h honey, put on the dart, and dried with granular CaC12. The hydroscopic property of the loaded darts made it necessary to keep them in the CaC12 until shortly before use. Four salts of nicotine were used: alkaloid, sulfate, tartrate and salicylate. The alkaloid and salicylate were best, with the latter best of all. Animals showed marked resistance to drug from subcutaneous or intraperitoneal injections, but normal threshold reached again in 24 hours. Hayes, F. A., J. H. Jenkins, S. D. Feurt, and J. A. Crockford, 1959, The propulsive administration of nicotine as a new approach for capturing and restraining cattle. J. Am. Vet. Med. Assoc., 134(6):283-286. Improvements on the Cap-Chur equipment included: needle made to screw into cylinder like the tail piece, and the gun barrel was rifled. �- 141 Onset of drug reaction usually within two to six minutes. Respiratory rate and depth increased, followed by profuse salivation and tendency to urinate and defecate, muscular tremors, hind quarters swayed, stumbled and fell. Nictitating membrane reflex function impaired so that eye only 'partially covered. Intramuscular injection best method. Heuschele, Werner P. 1961a. Immobilization of captive wild animals. Vet. Med., 56(E):348-35l. In the San Diego zoo 17 species of animals were immobilized with succinylcholine chloride. Doses and variations between species and individuals are tabulated. The species represented were: Sika deer (Cervus nippus), mule deer (Odocoileus hemionus), .1 - .15 mg/pound with 1.5 to six minute immobilization time, nilgai (Boselaphus tragocamelus), African lion (Felis leo), California sea lion (Zalophus calipraianus), Sumatran tiger (Panthera tigre sumatrae), Springbok (Antidorcus marsupialis), Black bear (Ursus americanus), aoudad (Ammatragus lervia), Alaskan brown bear (Ursus middendorffi), spotted hyena (Crocuta crocuta), Beisa oryx (Oryxbeisa annesteus), sloth bear (Melurius ursinus), Axis deer (Cerous axis), Himalayan bear (Ursus tibetanus), fallow deer (Dama dama), and North American elk (Cervus canadensis). Heuschele, Werner P. 1961b. Chlordiazepoxide for calming zoo animals. J. Am. Vet. Med. Assoc., 139(9):996-998. Various animals were administered chlordizaepoxide (mostly orally) in order to eliminate aggressive or frightened behavior so that they could be handled more easily for medical or other treatment. Effective doses for the various animals were as follows: European lynx - 6 mg/kg body weight, dingo - 3 mg/kg, Guinea baboon - 13 mg/kg, California sea lion - 7 mg/kg, Burmese macaque - 5 mg/kg, red kangaroo - 11 mg/kg, mule deer - 2.2 mg/kg (intravenous injection), white bearded gnu4 mg/kg (intramuscular injection), gerenuk - 5 mg/kg (intramuscular injection), golden marmoset - 15 mg/kg. Animals which did not respond to the drug were: klipspringer, South American tapir, Hensel's cat, and Sumatran tiger. Hines, William W. and Carl W. Smity, 1962. Trees and deer. Oregon State Game Comm. Bull., 17(9):3-8. The report deals with the relationship of black~tailed deer to the propagation of Douglas-fir seedlings in Oregon. Included are five photographs and captions dealing with deer immobilized with Cap-Chur equipment. No drug or dosage data are given in this article. Hornocker, M. G., John J. Craighead, and E. W. Pfeiffer. 1965. Immobilizing mountain lions with succinylcholine chloride and pentobarbital sodium. J. Wildl. Mgmt., 29(4):880-883. Succinylcholine chloride averaged on 19 mountain lions 1 mg/l7.4 pounds of body weight. The average dosage on 13 adults was 1 mg/13.l pounds of body weight. Fatalities stemmed from falls from trees or being caught in crotches or limbs of trees. Hunt, C. C. and S. W. Kuffler. 1950. Pharmacology of the neuro-muscular tion. J. Pharmacol. and Exper. Therap., 98:96. junc- Hunt, R. and R. de M. Taveau. 1960. On physiological action of certain choline derivatives and new methods of detecting choline. British Med. J., 2: 1788. �Jenkins. J. H., S. D. Feurt, F. A. Hayes, and J. A. Crockford. 1955. A preliminary report on the use of drugs for capturing deer. Trans. S. E. Assoc. Game and Fish Comm., 9:41-43. The necessity of capturing deer fro translocations instigated this study. Deer in southern Georgia are not easily trapped, Flaxedil was tried initially, but was not satisfactory. The first guns were powered with heavy rubber bands or a modified Crosman air rifle with .30 caliber barrel, effective up to 40 yards. Strychnine salts subsequently tried, with pentobarbital sodium as an antidote. Paralysis relatively rapid with negligible mortality on antidoted animals. The following strychnine salts were tried: sulfate, hyposulfate, arsenate, camphorate, and levulinate. Arsenate best one. Dead animals not dangerous to other wild animals if eaten. Jenkins, James H., Frank A. Hayes, Seldon D. Feurt, and Jack A. Crockford. 1961. A new method for the live capture of canines with application to rabies control. Am. J. of Pub. Health, 51(6):902-908. The capture of wild and semiwild dogs as a rabies control was af~ fected with the Cap-Chur gun. The syringe was modified only in that the needle was barbed and the cylinder shorter. Nicotine alkaloid used on 60 dogs from three months to 12 years of age, various breeds, and average of 29 pounds body weight. Each of three groups wa s shot from 30 yards with 2.0, 3.0 and 4.0 mg/pound, respectively. Intraperitoneal injection inrrnobilization time, 10 to 60 seconds; intramuscular time, .5 to 2.0 minutes, and subcutaneous injection, 2.0 to 6.0 minutes. Jewell, P. A. and E. A. Smith. 1965. Immobilization of grey seals. J. WildL Mgmt., 29(2):316-318. Six cows were immobilized with suxamethonium (a methyl derivative of succinylcholine). Doses of 300, 150, 120, 110, and 100 mg were tried. Only the 120 mg dose was satisfactory when used on a medium sized cow. Suxethonium (an ethyl derivative of succinylcholine) was tried next. It was used satisfactorily on a 400 pound cow with a dose of 200 mg (0.5 mg/lb). The drug took effect in 9~ minutes and full recovery was affected within 40 minutes. Keukoff, B. A. and A. C. Smith. 1937. Notes on the botanical components of curare. Bull. Torrey Bot. Club, 64:401-409. The plants and the procedures used by the Tecuna and Java Indians of the Amazon in the preparation of curare were described. Principal plant species used by the Tecuna Indians include: Strychnos castelnaei, Chondodendrum polyanthum, Anomospermum reticulatum, Piper spp., Aristolochia arcuata, Petiveria alliacea, Dieffenbachia seguina, and Annona ambotay. Principal plant species used by the Java Indians include: Strychnos spp., Piper spp., Capparis sola, Raupala adiantifolia, Duguetia spp., Protium sp., Claviija peoppigii, Iponoea sp., and Capsicum sp. Kinloch, Bruce G. 1962. Orphans of the wild, Nat. Georgraphic, 122(5):682699. An account of the beginning of the Entebbe Animal Refuge in Uganda, Africa, and its present state of growth. Dr. A. M. Harthoorn used syringe fired with crossbow, as well as Cap-Chur equipment and gun on cape buffalo. �- 143 Kroll, W. R. 1962. Experience Zoo Yearbook, 4:131-141. with Sernylan in zoo animals. Internatl. Kurzon, G. M. 1962. Parke, Davis and Company, Research Laboratories, Ann Arbor, Michigan. Personal communication to Richard N. Denney, Colo. Game, Fish and Parks Dept., Fort Collins, Colorado. Availability, pharmacology, recommended doses, and investigation forms in the experimental use of phencyclidine hydrochloride (Sernylan). Lamprey, H. F. 1960. Summary of immobilization results obtained by the Tanganyika Game Department up to June 9, 1960. Game Dept., Dar es Salaam, Tanganyika. 2 pp. (Typewritten tables). Lamprey, H. F. and P. Whitehead. 1960. A technique for handling large animals. J. Am. Vet. Med. Assoc., 142(10):1126-1129. Effective dose of succinylcholine chloride on Grant's zebra varied from 10 to 28 mg/head, effective in seven minutes. Immobilization of an oryx occurred in 40 minutes. Flaxedil injected in eight white-tailed gnus, four were immobilized or weakened, and four were minimumal1y or inapparent1y effected. The use of promazine hydrochloride and perphenazine as tranquilizers is discussed. Animals successfully immobilized with succinylcholine chloride were: greater kudu, hartebeest, oryx, roan antelope, onager, Damara zebra, Grevy's zebra and Grant's zebra. Larson, Joseph S. 15(7): 6-7. 1961. Introducing the hypo-arrow. The Nat1. Bowhunter, Li, T. H., B. R. Jacobs, D. M. Aviado, Jr •., and C. F. Schmidt. 1952. Early respiratory depression by Curare and curare-potassium antagonism. J. Pharmacol. and Exper. Therap., 104:149-161. The authors concluded that early thoracic respiratory depression can occur in mammals with chloralose anesthesia but not with other anesthetics following a small dose of curare. The mechanism on which curare works was found not to be central, but a peripheral effect on the intercostal muscles. The respiratory depression induced by curare was found to be antagonized by injections of eserine (phytostigmine) and potassium chloride (a source of K+ ions). The depression of thoracic respiratory movements was found to occur even before there was a decrease in response of the leg muscle to single stimuli. Ling, J. K. and D. G. Nicholls. 1963. Immobilization of elephant seals using succinylcholine chloride. Nature, 200(4910):1021-1022. Experiments were conducted on the immobilization of elephant seals (Mirounga leonina) with succinylcholine chloride. The most effective dose was found to be 0.91 mg/lb of body weight. Paralysis occurred from 0.5 to 1.0 minutes after injection. Seals recovered within 45 minutes after injection. Lock, J. A. and A. M. Harthoorn. 1959a. A note on the use of suxamethonium chloride (succinylcholine chloride) for restraint of zebra. Vet. Rec., 71(13):334. Succinylcholine chloride dose for Grevy's zebra (Eguus grevyi) was .2 mg/kg. Paralysis occurred without a struggle, and no signs of fear or unpleasant experience evident either at onset of paralysis or at recovery. Recovery was rapid and complete. �Lock, J. A. and A. M. Harthoorn. 1959b. The use of succinylcholine chloride (suxamethonium chloride) for the control and management of wild animals. Vet. Rec., 71(43):919-920. Drug immobilization has wonderful uses in the protection and preservation of game in Africa through pennitting study of habits, in translocation work, and immobilization in order to vaccinate against diseases. Logsdon, H. S. 1965. Drug schedule of effective dosages of Roosevelt elk in the Prairie Creek Redwoods State Park Region, California. Table 1, Mimeo., 1 p. Succinylcholine chloride was injected in 85 Roosevelt elk from calves to adults in the spring and early summer, and in the fall and winter in California. Average dosages for calves was 11.0 mg/head, taking seven to immobilize in 5.5 minutes for 25.2 minutes. Adults ranged in dosage from 17.6 (December) to 20.5 mg/head, taking 6.5 to 19.0 minutes for inunobilization for periods of from 17.1 to 3l~.1 minutes. Lord, William. 1958. The historical development of an instrument for live capture of animals. Southeast Vet., 9:147-148, 155. The capture of animals alive is as old as man, but only recently has a simple method of capture by immobilization become perfected. In 1954 the owners of Ossa bow Island off the Georgia coast had too many deer, and offered the Georgia Game and Fish Department the opportunity to trap and transplant them. Federal Aid Coordinator Jack Crockford had experience in Michigan, but the Georgia deer wouldn't take the bait and be trapped. He invented a bazooka affair, powered with rubber bands, to shoot curare-laden darts, but soon evolved to a Crosman air rifle to shoot the dart, but it proved too lethal. Strychnine was used successfully, but required an antidote to prevent fatalities. Dr. Jenkins, Dr. Feurt and Dr. Hager from the University of Georgia compiled a Imt of drugs, and reduced it to 25 compounds that were tried, with nicotine alkaloid being the most satisfactory. Harold C. Palmer suggested the inertia trigger and an improved syringe for gun operated injection. Lucas, B. G. B. and S. Miles. 1955. Anticholinesterases Brit. Med. J., 1955(4913):579-580. and muscle relaxants. Lumb, William V. 1963. Small animal anesthesia. Lee and Febiger, Philadelphia, Penn., 420 pp. The Cap-Chur gun and summary of findings of other investigators is discussed, along with species and dosages of several drugs, on pages 300310, with selected references. Pages 224 to 226 describe the effects and uses of succinylcholine chloride, and page 229 discusses gallamine triethiodide (Flaxedil), a nondepolarizing drug, and the use of edrophonium as an antidote. Mayrhofer, D. K. 1952. Self-experiments with succinylcholine chloride. new ultra-short-acting muscle relaxant. Brit. Med. J., 1:1332. Miner, R. W. (ed.). 1951. Sci., 54:297-530. Curare and anti-curare Montgomery, G. C. 1961. A modification J. Wildl. Mgmt., 25(1):101-102. agents. of the nicotine A Ann. N. Y. Acad. dart capture method. �- 145 Coffimerically available projector and dart not satisfactory because of low range. A small inexpensive dart of superior flight characteristics was devised and used. Flaxedil not suited for field use and strychnine not satisfactory. Antidotes necessary and fatalities common. Nicotine salicylate satisfactory in paste form. The dart was made of 3/8-inch tubing 1 3/4-inches long, with two alternating notches (~-inch), ~-inch head built of acid-core solder on end, yarn tail twisted into back and clipped square at ~-inch length. Could be used in .20 caliber Sheridan air gun or .22 Crosman gas-powered rifle, with range of 75 yards, and four-inch group at 50 to 60 yards. Total of 44 deer captured by dart and seven by trap and dart with eight fatalities. Murray, R. E. and Dan Dennett. 1963. A preliminary report on the use of tranquilizing compounds in handling wildlife. S. E. Assoc. Game and Fish Comm., 7:1-8. Oleaginous Tranimal (Tranimul) injected by hand into white-tailed deer: 150 mg/80 pounder, 150 mg/110 pounder, and 175 mg/125 pounder. Murray, R. E. and Dan Dennett. 1964. Informal report of tranquilizer demonstration, January 21, 1964. La. Wildl. and Fish Comm., P-R Project W-20R, Mimeo., 10 pp. White-tailed deer in Louisiana were feed Tranimul mixed with feed in troughs at rate of approximately 10 mg/pound body weight. Most deer could be caught and handled after approximately 30 minutes or the next morning after night feeding. Nichols, Lyman. 1962. Personal communication to H. W. Steinhoff, Colo. State Univ., Fort Collins, Colo. State of Hawaii, Dept. of Land and Natural Res., Honokaa, Hawaii. Axis deer do not hold when in the spotlight, and Cap-Chur gun's rifled barrel made for accuracy up to 40 yards. Cap-Chur Sol has no antidote, but an intramuscular injection of hydrocortisone acetate helps overcome shock, and artificial respiration helps. Cap-Chur Sol not effective on pigs, and the safety margin is too narrow, but a mixture of CapChur Sol and Cap-Chur Gem at the rate of 2:5 was effective on pigs. Dosage of 2 cc/25-40 pounds puts them down in less than two minutes, for several hours. Dosage for deer 2 cc/lOO pounds. Cap-Chur Barb too slow for immobilization, but is a good anesthetic. O'Steen, W. Keith and E. J. Mussaro. 1960. A comparative study of the effects of succinylcholine on vertebrates. Tex. Repts. BioI. and Med., 18(2): 260-270. Comparisons were made of the effects of succinylcholine chloride on mice, White Rock chicks, American chameleon, leopard frogs, and common spotted newts. The comparative doses were as follows: mouse - 1.50 mg/ kg, chick - 0.38 mg/kg, lizzard - 0.75 mg/kg, frog - 1.50 mg/kg, and newt 9.0 mg/kg. The results were: mice were relaxed by succinylcholine for less than 10 minutes, chicks responded with spastic paralysis and had a recovery period from 24 minutes to 2 hours, lizzards also responded with spastic paralysis with a recovery period from 103 minutes to 18 hours. Lizzards were able to tolerate doses ranging from 3.0 mg/kg to 64.0 mg/ kg and underwent a short period of overall rigidity for approximately 30 seconds, followed by a longer period of relaxation proportional to the dose. The axial musculature was relaxed as in general anesthesia �- 146 while the limb musculature seemed to retain its normal tone. Frogs underwent spastic paralysis of the !orelimbs and flaccid paralysis of the hindlimbs. Recovery was within l~ to 2 hours. No effects were observed with 1. a mg/kg and death resulted from 3.0 mg/kg. Newts developed complete spastic paralysis within 5 minutes following injection and recovered within 2 hours. Newts exhibited a high degree of resistance to succinylcholine chloride and were able to withstand up to 160 mg/kg at which dosage they developed extreme edema. Orr, D. J. C., and S. M. Moore-Gilbert. 1964. wildebeest with succinylcholine chloride. Orton, R. H. 1952. A short-acting Med. J. Australia, 1:817. Field immobilization of young E. Afr. Wildl. J., 2:60-66. muscle relaxant, succinylcholine chloride. Palmer, Harold C. 1963. Sernyl dosage data. Personal communication to Richard N. Denney, Colo. Game, Fish and Parks Dept., Fort Collins, Colo. Palmer Chemical and Equipment Co., Inc., Douglasville, Georgia. Sernyl dosages as follows for species indicated: horses, 1 mg/pound; cattle, .3 - .5 mg/pound; penned antelope, 1 mg/pound; wild antelope, 2 mg/pound; swine, 2 - 3 mg/pound. Results on horses are better when using Sparine with Sernyl. Pearson, Henry A., Arthur D. Smity, and Philip J. Urness. 1963. Effects of succinylcholine chloride on mule deer. J. Hildl. Mgmt., 27(2):297-299. Succinylcholine chloride was injected into captive mule deer with hand syringes and with Cap-Chur equipment (collared needle and Cap-Chur Charge). Thirty two injections on 13 deer by hand iloo1obi1izedwith doses varying from .012 - .056 mg/pound, in 2-15 minutes, lasting from 4-37 minutes. One died from overdose, two died from apparent overdoses. CapChur gun injections took average dose of .045 mg/pound. Higher doses attributed to loss of drug from bounce-out. Most animals not excited, although urination and defecation rates increased before immobilization. Artificial respiration affected by raising the forelegs and pressing the abdomen. Peterson, Richard S. 1965. Drugs for handling fur .se a ls J. Wild!. Mgmt., 29(4):688-693. Four drugs affecting the central nervous system were used on fur seals: Cap-Chur Barb, Sernylan, Tranvet and insulin. Three peripheral nerve site drugs were also used: Nicotine, succinylcholine chloride, and Flaxedil. Used primarily on sleeping bulls, and injected with hand syringes on a pole, or by Cap-Chur gun. Succinyl proved most effective and rapid, allowing quick recovery, at dosages of .30-.37 mg/kg. Sernylan effective at .10-.20 mg/kg. Pienaar, U. DeV., and J. W. Van Niekerk. 1963. The capture and translocation of three species of wild ungulates in the Eastern Transvaal with special reference to Ro5-2307/B-5F (Roche) as a tranquilizer in game animals. Koedoe, 6:83-90. Oribi, steenbuck and grey rhebuck were caught with a flaxen net in a drive in the Eastern Transvaal, and translocated to the Kruger National Park and Badplaas. They were tranquilized with Tranimul at the rates of 1.6-1.B mg/pound in oribi, and 1.1-1.4 mg/pound in steenb~ck and grey rhebuck. The effect lasted five to eight hours. �- 147 Piperno, Elliot. 1965. Effects of various paralyzers, tranquilizers and anesthetics on white-tailed deer. Trans. Midwest Game and Fish Comm. Coni., Lasning, Mich. 6 pp., Mimeo. The muscle paralyzer succinylcholine chloride was 95 per cent effective at .07 mg/kg intramuscularly. The muscle paralyzer decamethonium bromide had a narrower margin of safety than succiny1 and was much longer acting. The barbiturates thiopental, hexobarbital and pentobarbital were all effective anesthetics when administered intravenously. Of all the tranquilizers used, the phenothiazines fluphenazine and trifluoperazine were the most potent, offering trqnuilization to the degree that a venepuncture could be made without exerting restraint. Undersirable features included long onset and duration of effect, high degree of variability in response, and inability of the drug to produce a truly tractable deer. Pistey, Warren R. and James F. Wright. 1959. Immobilization of captive wild animals. Vet. Med., 54(10):446-q.49. Succinylcholine in the form of Anectine, which is readily soluble in sterile water, was used on white-tailed deer at the rate of 3 mg/lOO pounds regardless of age. Paralytic doses varied in a given animal from day to day. Intramuscular injection displayed latent period of 3-7 minutes. Ruminants should be kept on their brisket to prevent regurgitation of rumen contents and consequent involuntary choking while paralyzed. Post, George. 1959. The use of curare and curare-like drugs on elk (wapiti). J. Wildl. Mgmt., 23(3):364-366. This study performed in 1952-53, but was not thought significant till the use of nicotine alkaloid was tried on elk. Preliminary. results with nicotine were unsatisfactory (in seven trails there was no satisfactory paralysis, and one death). Metuline iodide was too slow in paralyzing and too long acting. Flaxedil paralyzed in 3% - 9 minutes, lasting from 14-37 minutes at a dose of 20 mg/90 (+_ 20)pounds. This is a safe and effective dose, with the undesirable effect of suffocation due to paralysis of respiratory muscles. It is desirable because it is quick acting, has no hyperexcitable effect, and has quick renal elimination of the drug. Randall, L. 0., G. A. Heise, W. Scha1lek, R. E. Bagdon, R. Banziger, A. Boris, R. A. Moe, and W. B. Abrams. 1961. Pharmacological and clinical studies on Valium (T.M.) as new psychotherapeutic agent of the benzodiazepine class. Current Therap. Research, 3(9):405-425. Valium is a new psychotherapeutic agent which is more potent than Librium on central nervous system activity. It is more potent as a muscle relaxant in mice and cats. The taming effect in monkeys was similar for both drugs. Both Valium and Librium are well tolerated in rats, dogs, monkeys and man. Valium is five times as potent as Librium as a tranquilizer and muscle relaxant and then times as strong as an anticonvulsant. Ataxia was produced in mice with 25 mg/kg. Ratcliffe, H. L. 1962. Diazepam (Tranimul) as a tranquilizer Rept. Penrose Res. Lab., Zool. Soc. Phila., pp. 10-13. Rausch, Robert A. and Ralph W. Ritchey. J. Wildl. Mgmt., 25(3):326-328. 1961. Narcosis for zoo animals. of moose with nicotine, �- 148 Nicotine and the Palmer Cap-Chur equipment were tested on moose in two independent field trails in Alaska and British Columbia. In the British Columbia tests, where the moose were under stress, the mortality rate was excessive. Moose that are under stress or fatigued apparently have a lower tolerance to nicotine than do moose that are injected under natural conditions. The carbon-dioxide operated equipment did not function satisfactorily in extremely cold weather. Ten moose were successfully paralyzed, eight were partially immobilized, and five were unsuccessful. Average effective dosage was 3.9 mg/pound. Six of the immobilized moose were known mortalities, in British Columbia, while no fatalities were experienced in Alaska. Rohwer, Rolf D. 1966. Immobilization of waterbuck and puku (Kobus defassa and K. vardoni) with M99. Personal communication to Richard N. Denney, Colo. Game, and Fish Dept., Fort Collins, Colo. Zambia Game Dept., Ngoma, Kafue Natl. Park, Zambia. February 22, 1966. The synthetic morphine, M99, was used to immobilize 12 adult waterbuck in Kafue National Park. Their weight ranged from 300-450 pounds. M99 was used with the tranquilizer acetylpromazine (Boots Pure Drug CO., United Kingdom), and M285 (Rickett and Sons, Hull, England) was used as the antagonist. Waterbuck doses were 2 mg M99, 10 mg acetylpromazine, 7 mg M285. It took an average of 6.5 minutes to go down, and they got up 5-8 minutes after the antidote was injected. When an animal was kept down for any period, hyosine hydrobromide was given to alleviate salivation and respiratory depression, however it dilates the pupils and the animal is nearly blind for a few hours. Roncalli, R. 1964. Tranimul data. Personal communication to Richard N. Denney, Colo. Game, Fish and Parks Dept., Fort Collins, Colorado. HoffmannLa Roche Inc., Research Div., Nutley, N. J. Tranimul exerts three primary actions: (1) sedative, (2) mus cu La r relaxant, and (3) anticonvulsant. The drug is characterized by a broad safety margin, and has been administered intramuscularly to deer, wild goats, zebra, opossum, cottontails, Ethiopian ass, skunk, aoudad, sea lion and tiger. The onset of the action is rapid, 7-10 minutes, .and the duration of the action is from 7-18 hours. An effective dosage is 1 _ 2.5 mg/pound for tranquilizing action. Sedative action elicited with 2.5 - 5 mg/pound, lasting more than 15 hours. Antidoted with Ampehtamine sulfate at .5 mg/pound subcutaneously, or sodium benzoate at 5 mg/pound. Deer immobilized with 2-5 mg/pound by intramuscular injection or 10 mg/ pound by oral admi.nistration. Schiffrin, M. J., M. S. Sadove, and A. G. Anderson. 1958. Narcotic analgesics as adjuncts to dental practice. J. Am. Dental Assoc., 57:71-78. The use of the narcotic alphaprodine (Nisentil) in dental analgesia tests showed that a dose of 20 milligrams in humans gave maximum analgesic intensity, was of moderate or short duration sedative effect, and was most effective when administered intramuscularly. Nalorphine (Nalline) hydrochloride and levallorphan (Lorfan) tartrate are two narcotic antagonists crnrrmercially available in this country. They overcome all the depressant effects of the narcotic analgesics, particularly respiratory depression. Severinghaus, C. W. 1950. Vet., 49(3):276-281. Anesthetization of white-tailed deer. Cornell �- 149 Experiments were conducted in which sodium phenobarbital and chloral hydrate were tested on deer in pill, powder, capsule, and liquid form. When attempts were made to administer the drugs orally through the food or drinking water they were unsuccessful because the deer were suspicious of the strange tastes and/or smells produced by the drugs. Intraparietal injections of Nembutal (sodium phenobarbital) were successful but required large doses (1 cc per 3 to 5 pounds body weight requiring 15 to 20 minutes for complete anesthesia). Intravenous injections with Nembutal were most successful using doses of 1 cc per 6 to 7 pounds body weight for fawns and 1 cc per 3% to 5 pounds body weight for yearlings or adults. Complete anesthesia occurred within 1-2 minutes for fawns and 3-5 minutes for adults. Simon, J. K. 1962. A note on the use of Cap-Chur in Musth. Kerala Vet., 1(3). gun on an unruly elephant Sollman, Torald. 1957. A manual of pharmacology and its application to therapeutics and toxicology. W. B. Saunders Co., Phila. 8th edition, 1535 pp. The book presents a rather complete coverage of pharmaceutical methods, preparations, prescriptions, weights and measures, solubilities, incompatabilities, etc., in addition to providing a guide to the actions and uses of various drugs. Stewart, Robert H. 1959. Deer immobilization experiments. W-75-R-6, N. M. Dept. Game and Fish, Santa Fe. Mimeo., Job Compl. Rept., pp. Stoliker, H. E. 1966. Parke, Davis and Co., Research Lab., Ann Arbor, Mich. Personal communication to Richard N. Denney, Colo. Game, Fish and Parks Dept., Fort Collins, Colorado. January 19, 1966. Phencyclidine hydrochloride (Serny1an) has not been approved by the Pure Food and Drug Administration as yet for commercial distribution. Appreciation was expressed for experimental work performed in Colorado which helped in evaluating Serny1an usage on animals. Stowe, C. M. 1955. The curariform effect of succinylcholine in the equine and bovine species, a preliminary report. Cornell Vet., 45:193-197. Experiments were conducted on horses (with a high serum cholinesterase level) and cattle (with a low serum cholinesterase level) using succinylcholine. Horses were immobilized with intravenous injections of 0.15 mg/kg and remained immobile for 2.5 to 8 minutes. Toxic doses were 0.5 to 1.0 mg/kg. Similar experiments with cattle indicated that the effective doses were about 1/10 those used on horses with a narrow margin of safety between the relaxant dose and the fatal dose. The author concluded that the plasma cholinesterase activity of a species determines its susceptilibity to the drug. Talbot, L. M. 1960a. Field immobilization of large mammals. E. Afr. Vet. Res. Organization, Muguga, Kikuyu, Denya. 22 pp., Mimeo. Talbot, L. M. 1960b. Field immobilization of some East African wild animals and cattle. E. Afr. Agr. and For. J., 26(2). The use of the carbon dioxide pistol to inject wildebeest from a Land Rover at speeds up to 50 miles per hours, using Flaxedi1 at the dosage of 1.0 - 1.6 mg/pound. An antidote must be used with this drug. �- 150 - Report on field experiments with Palmer Cap-Chur equipTalbot, L. M. 1960c. Royal National Parks of Kenya, Nairobi, Kenya. 7 pp., ment and drugs. Mimeo. Talbot, L. M. and H. F. Lamprey. 1961. Immobilization of free-ranging East African ungulates with succinylcholine chloride. J. Wildl. Mgmt., 25(3): 300-310. Work for 16 months for suitable immobilization drugs centered mostly on succinylcholine chloride. Used successfully on grizzly and black bear and caribou in North America. In East Africa it has been successfully used on Uganda kob, Jackson's hartebeest, zebra, and waterbuck. It has also been used less successfully on Rothschild's giraffe, black rhinoceros, hippopotamus, and cape buffalo. Animals injected with Cap-Chur equipment from moving vehicle. Uganda kob have wide tolerance, collapse in 3-7 minutes, quick and complete recovery in 40 minutes. Wildebeest is difficult to determine dosage, exhibiting inconsistent reactions, with 25 per cent incompletely immobilized. Topi are unsatisfactory subjects with narrow tolerance range, and weights must be estimated within four per cent. Thomson's gazelle is good subject, as is Grant's gazelle, Burchell's zebra, and impala. Advantages are that immobilization is rapid with proper dosage, paralysis lasts only approximately 30 minutes there is no excitory stage, no antidote is required, and the meat is edible. Flaxedil is better for topi and wildebeests. Talbot, Lee M. and Martha H. Talbot. 1962. Flaxedil and other drugs in field immobilization and translocation of large mammals in East Africa. J. Mamm., 43(1):76-88. Immobilization is important in gathering data on large mammals hitherto difficult or impossible to handle. Drugs used were: Sernyl, CapChur Barb, nicotine, Curare, Flaxedil and succinylcholine chloride. Flaxedil most effective in this study. Contains complete tables of drugs, symptoms, antidotes (if any), species, dosages, etc. Thomas, W. D. 1961. Chemical immobilization of wild animals. J. Am. Vet. Med. Assoc., 138(5):263-265. Succinylcholine chloride tolerance varies greatly with different species; is an excellent drug when used with care, small difference in dosage causes great variation in response. Dosage for Sika deer (Cervus nippon): two adult bucks (170 pounds), 7 mg/head, inunobilized in seven minutes, period of paralysis 14 minutes. Four adult does (130 pounds), 7 mg/head, Lmmob i Li.zed in seven minutes, period of paralysis lL,minutes. Thomas, J. H. and R. G. Marburger. 1964. Mortality in deer shot in the thoracic area with the Cap-Chur gun. J. Wilen. Mgmt., 28(1):173-175. Nicotine salicylate was injected into 20 white-tailed deer bucks with one cubic centimeter syringes from the Cap-Chur gun using 350-425 milligrams. Seven were killed by thoracic shots penetrating the lungs, causing massive nemorrhage or heart damage. Tors, Ivan. 1966. Personal communication to Richard N. Denney, Colo. Game, Fish and Parks Dept., Fort Collins, Colo. Ivan Tors Films, Inc., 10202 Washington Blvd., Culver City, Calif., May 3, 1966. �- 151 - Correspondence relative to the drug M99 and the Daktari television show. "Safest innnobilizer in existence and has a perfect antidote." "2 cc's of this morphine analog is enough to stop a 12,000 pound elephant." Dr. Harthoorn developed the dosage for them to use on animals innnobilized in the filming sequences. They include lion, leopard, elephant, cape buffalo and man. Troyer, Willard A., Richard J. Hensel, and Kenneth E. Durely. 1962. Live trapping and handling of brown bears. J. Wildl. Mgmt., 26(3):330-331. Kodiak bears (Ursus middendorffi) were captured by the means of traps and snares, and were then innnobilized by an injection of succinylcholine chloride into the hind leg muscle by Cap-Chur equipment or a plastic syringe on a 10-30 foot pole, or pentobarbital sodium, in dosages proportionately the same as Erickson (1951) and Black (1958). Tucker, J. H. 1963. Recent research in chemicals and equipment. Paper, Jt. Conf. Am. Lns t , Park Exec., Am. Assoc. Zool. Parks and Agr., Natl. Conf. on State Parks, Sept. 22-26, 1963, Washington, D. C. 16 pp., typed. A history of the development and modifications of Cap-Chur equipment, a sunnnary of drugs and antidotes, and a list of 23 references on the subject. Van Niekerk, J. W. and U. de V. Pienaar. 1962. Adaptations of the innnobilizing technique to the capture, marking and translocation of game animals in the Kruger National Park. Koedoe, 5:137-143. Scoline (succinylcholine chloride) was used to innnobilize blue wildebeest using a crossbow with a syringe mounted on the arrow tip. Fifteen wildebeest were injected with the drug, six died. Effective doses ranged from .034 to .035 mg/lb. Total time from injection to recovery ranged from 26 to 45 minutes. Lethal doses were .045 to .203 mg/lb. Impala were successfully innnobilized with Scoline using 0.16 mg/lb. Flaxedil were used safely for adult impala rams using from 60 - 150 mg total dose. Prostigmine was administered as an antidote to Flaxedil given intravenously at the rate of 1 mg/lOO lbs. Hippopotami were immobilized using both Scoline and Flaxedil, but Scoline had too narrow a safety margin for use when estimated weights were necessary. The most successful immobilizing agent for hippos consisted of 0.5 mg. morphine hydrochloride, 50 mg hyoscine hydrobromide, and 250 mg. Chlorpromazine per 1000 lbs. body weight. Using this combination of drugs it was possible to handle hippos only after l~ to 2 hours had elapsed. Nalorphine hydrobromide was administered as an antidote. Van Niekerk, J. W. and U. de V. Pienaar. 1963. A report on some innnobilizing drugs used in the capture of wild animals in Kruger National Park. Koedoe, 6: 126-133. Three drugs: Sernyl, Flaxedil, Omnopon, were tried on various animals. Giraffes were innnobilized with Sernyl. Doses of 0.55 mg/lb. were fatal. One animal received 0.25 mg/lb which put it down in 21 minutes and kept it innnobilized for 2~ hours. Complete recovery occurred in 4 hours. The animals sustained a concussion in the process of struggling so a mixture of Sernyl and a tranquilizer, Trilafon (perhenazine), was tried on succeeding animals. Doses of 0.3 mg/lb of Sernyl and 0.4 mg/lb of Trilafon proved fatal. Next, mixtures of Sernyl and Flaxedil were tried at doses of 0.25 mg/lb both of Sernyl and Flaxedil which also proved fatal. Suc- �- 152 - cessful immobilizaticn occurred when combinations of Sernyl (0.15 mg/lb), Flaxedil (0.4 mg/lb), and Trilafon (.125 mg/lb were administered). Successful iunnobilization of another giraffe occurred when mixtures of Sernyl and Trilafon at 0.15 mg/lb and 0.06 mg/lb, respectively, were used. Ataxia occurred in nine minutes, the animal was down. in 36 minutes, and remained down for 76 minutes. Complete recovery was affected in 90 minutes. Impala were successfully immobilized with 0.215 mg/lb of Sernyl. Ataxia occurred in seven minutes, the animal was down in 30 minutes, and fully recovered in 90 minutes. Mixtures of Sernyl (0.076 mg/lb), Trilafon (.077 mg/lb), and Omnopon (Roche) (0.38 mg/lb); mixtures of Sernyl (0.16 mg/lb) and Trilafon (0.083 mg/1b); and mixtures of Sernyl (0.125 mg/lb) and Largactil (0.4 mg/lb) all were used successfully on three respective hippopotami. In all three cases ataxia occurred within 9-10 minutes and they remained immobilized for a period of 6-8 hours. A male baboon was successfully imnobilized with a mixutre of Sernyl (2.4 mg!lb) and Largactil (0.82 mg!lb). Ataxia occurred within l~ minutes and the animal was down in five minutes. Complete recovery occurred in 13 hours. F1axedil proved successful in the immobi1i.zation of wildebeest and buffalo with doses of 0,8 mg/lb when combined with 5 mg/lOO lbs. of Atropine. Omnopon (Roche) was used to replace morphine in combinations of morphine hydrochloride, Largactil, and Scopolamine because it had a lesser depressant effect upon the respiratory center. Van Niekerk, J. W., D. de V. Pienaar, and N. Fairall. 1963. A preliminary note on the use of Quiloflex (benzodioxane hydrochloride) in the immobilization of game. Koedoe, 6:109-114. A new drug, Quiloflex (benzodioxane hydrochloride), was used to immobilize impalas. Quiloflex had a very wide safety margin when used on impalas. Doses of 2-25 mg/lb were used safely with satisfactory results and ataxia occurred within 1-3 minutes. Recovery time varied from 3 to 6~ hours. The drug has a sedative action which was believed to be invaluable in transporting and transplanting animals. Whittaker, V. P. and S. Wijesundera. 1952. The hydrolysis of succinylcholine by cholinesterase. Biochem. J., 52: 475. Copy of Summary: "I. The hydrolysis of succinylcholine by horse serum cholinesterase has been studied kinetically and by paper chromatography of the hydrolysis products. 2. A solvent system has been found which will affect the separation on filter paper of all four of the constituents of succinylcholine hydrolysates, i.e. the di-and monocho1ine esters of succinic acid, free succinic acid, and choline. 3. Succinylmonocholine has been identified as a constituent of the reaction mixture. Succinic acid does not make its appearance in detectable amounts before 50% hydrolysis. 4. It is concluded that succinyldicholine is hydrolysed enzymatically via succinylmonocholine. This is confirmed by the diphasic character of the hydrolysis curve and by kinetic studies. 5. The kinetics of such two-stage enzymatic reactions is analyzed mathematically.1l Wright, J. F. 1959. Treatment of captive wild animals using an automatic projectile type syringe. Vet. Med., 54(1):32-33. �- 153 - Remote delivery of drug loaded syringe has the unique and efficient property of allowing treatment of captive wild animals with "medicine". The method drastically cuts down on manpower and discomfort to the animals. The reaction upon being hit with the dart was less than anticipated, being most commonly a forward movement of a few steps and a short grunt. Syringes would penetrate an elephant's hide. Work should be conducted on a disposable, loaded syringe. Wright, J. F. 1963. Chemical restraint of exotic animals in a disease regulatory program. Can. J. Compo Med. and Vet. Sci., 27(1):13-16. Elands, zebras, and individuals of a few other species (nilghai, blackbuck, camel, and giraffe) were immobilized with succinylcholine chloride at two different periods of the year, October-November, 1960, and February-March, 1961. The effective doses for the first period (Oct. Nov.) were: elands - 12 mg. and zebras - 40.3 mg. The respective latent periods were seven minutes for elands and 4.8 minutes for zebras. Increased doses were needed for all species and in all instances during the second period (Feb. - Mar.). These were: elands - 14 mg and zebras - 55 mg. The respective latent periods were seven minutes and 3.8 minutes. The fact that almost all species were in the breeding season during February and March may explain the necessity for increased doses at that time. Wright, .• and .• Hall. 1961. Veterinary anesthesia. William and Wilkins Co., pp. 110-111. Thiambutene (Themalon) is marketed in 50 mg tablets, dissolved in water for 25 to 100 mg/cc solutions. Recommended for use only with dogs where it has analgesic and hypnotic properties similar to morphine. Dosages were 10 mg/pound for subcutaneous injection, and 21 mg/pound for intravenous injection. It causes increased salivation and defecation. Anesthesia after use of Themalon may result in respiratory failure. Zurowski, W. and M. Sakowica. 1965. Effects of succinylcholine chloride on wild boars. J. Wildl. Mgmt., 29(3):626-629. Intramuscular injections of succinylcholine chloride to 27 wild boars yielded immobilization doses of .27 - 1.34 mg/kg. Boars showed high tolerance, and the average dosage was .6 mg/kg. Intramuscular injections of tranquiline showed desired effect with .35 mg/kg. �- 154 - List of Species 1. Bear, Black Brown Grizzly 2. Bison 3. Bontebok 4. Bu f fa Io , Cape 5. Canines, Domestic Coyote Dingo Fox 6. Caribou 7. Cattle, Domestic Nilgai 8. Cottontail rabbits 9. Deer, Axis Barasingha Fallow Mule Red Roe Sika White-tailed 10. Eland 11. Elephant, African 12. Elk (Wapiti) 13. Fe lines, Domestic African lion European lynx Mountain lion 14. Gazelles, Grant's Thomson's 15. Geren-uK 1:6. (i;i1!'affe, Masai Rot FN5,C lll'i r €II " s 17. Coaits, D'omestic Talk 18. Hartebeest 19. Hippopotamus for Immobilization 20. 21. 22. 23. Data Horses Hyaena Impala Kangaroo, Grey Red 24. Kob, Uganda 25. Mice 26. Moose 27. Oribi 28. Oryx 29. Primates, General Baboon, Guinea Macaque, Burmese Marmoset, Golden Monkey, Spider 30. Pronghorn 31. Rhebuck, Grey 32. Rhinoceros, Black White 33. Sea Lions 34. Seals, Elephant Fur Grey Weddell 35. Sheep, Domestic Aoudad Bighorn 36. Steenbuck 37. Swine, Domestic Bushpig Boar Javelina 38. Topi 3'9'. Wallaby, 'Fa>sm'a1trl! an 4(1. Waterbuck 41. Wildebeest 42. Zebra, Burchell's Grant's Grevy's �DRUG IMMOBILIZATION - Species Live Wt., Pounds Drug DATA - Inj. to Immob. Paral. Recov. Time, Period, Time, DosaBe Min. Min. Mg/Head Min. Mg!4t 0.2 0.27 0.30-.35 0.25 1-2 . .,Phencyclidine hydrochloride 0.75 Pentobarbital sodium 10.9 13.0 Nicotine alkaloid 3.3 Bear, Brown (Ursus middendorffi) Succinylcholine chloride 0.27 Bear, Grizzly (Ursus horribilis) Succinylcholine chloride 0.33 Succinylcholine chloride .026-.028 .023-.027 Bear, Black (Euarctos americanus) 300 120 Bison (Bison bison) 300-1000 Succinylcholine chloride 10 Barnes (1965). Black (1958). Day (1964). Pistey and Wright (1959). 2-5 30 Barnes (1965). 11 60 up Black (1958). Erickson (1957). 180 6 16 3 400 Comments Source Ingalls (1966). Oral communication Troyer, Hensel and Durely (1962). Craighead and Craighead (1960). 1-4 9-10 9 18 25 7 10 400-675 9 14 120 300-500 Nicotine alkaloid 1.6-1. 8 0.98-1. 68 250-350 Phencyclidine hydrochloride 0.3 20 Gallamine triethiodide 0.5-0.75. 5-15 30 Devenport (1961). Hart (1960). 'I'homss(1961). Three bison, one died. 20 Devenport (1961). Hart (1960). Eight bison. Anonymous (1963). Ca1fhood vaccination program in Utah. 30-40 Palmer (1959). Penned bison. t-' V1 V1 �~ f-' \Jl 0\ DRUG IMMOBILIZATION Species Live Wt., Pounds Drug Cap-Chur Gem Bontebok (Dama liseus pygargus) 120 840-1250 Gallamine triethiodide Succinylcholine chloride Canines, Domestic (Canis ~.) Coyotes (Canis latrans) (Cont.) Inj. to Inrrnob.Paral. Recov. Dosage Time, Period, Time, Mg/1t Mg/Head Min. Min. Min. Source Comments Hart n.9bO). 8.0 Largactil . SMS Buffalo, Cape (Syncerus caffer) DATA 150 10 See Comments 360 up Barnard (1961). Harthoorn 1.2-1. 3 1-1. 6 1.2-1.3 11 5-15 (1965). .10 Sernylan, .002 M99 .05 scopolamine (mg/lb) Harthoorn and Lock (1961). Palmer (1959). Thomas (1961). .0375 Paxarms 2.3 (1963). 2-4 2-10 Antidote: .02 mg/# proFeurt,Jenkins,Hayes and Crockford (1958) stigmine, 0.1 mg/# atropine simultaneously . Hydrocortisone acetate, Palmer (1959). ,50 mg min. and 50 mg/lOO Ibs. Amphetamine, 1 cc min., 1 cc/lOO Ibs; for respir. depr. Gallamine triethiodide 0.5-1.0 5-15 Palmer Phencyclidine hydrochloride 1-2 Nicotine alkaloid diazepam (1959). Feurt, Jenkins, Hayes and Crockford (1958). 1,000 Balser (1965). Oral administration. �DRUG IMMOBILIZATION Live Wt" Pounds Species Drug Mg/ift DATA (Cont.) Inj. to Paral. Reeov. IJl1IIlob. Dosage Time, Period, Time, }fg/Head }fin. }fin. Min. 500 Balser (1965). Fox (Vulpes fulva) diazepam Dingo chlordiazepoxide 1,36 Heuschele Caribou, Newfoundland (Rangifer tarandus caribou) Succinylcholine chloride .025-.065 Cattle, Domestic (~~.) Oral administration, (1961). .05 9-12 Bergerud, Butt, Russell and Whalen (1964), Pistey and Wright (1959). Nicotine alkaloid 1-2 1,5 2-10 Palmer (1959), Gallamine triethiodide 1-1. 4 5-15 Palmer (1959). Phencyclidine hydrochloride 0,3-0.6 Succinylcholine chloride .003-.009 Nilgai (Boselaphus t ra gocame Ius) Succinylcholine chloride Cottontail Pentobarbita 1 sodium rabbits Comments Source Palmer (1959). 9-12 Pistey and Wright (1959). Heuschele (1961). 13.6-22.7 Casteel and Edwards (1965). 2 cc/lOOif Nichols 2 parts Cap-Chur Sol to 5 parts Cap-Chur Gem. Nicotine alkaloid Deer, Axis Cap-Chur Sol: Cap-Chur Gem (1962). 1-'. \Jl --J �I--' \.Jl co DRUG IMMOBILIZATION Species Live Wt., Pounds Drug 120 SuccinyIcnoHne chloride Deer, Barasingha 325-450 (Cervus dubauceli) Deer, Fallow (Dama dama) 140 95 135 Deer, Mule (Odocoileus hemionus) 280 Deer, Red (Cervus e1aphus)260 Inj. to Immob. Paral. Recov. Dosage Time, Period, Time, Mg/1t Mg/Head Min. Min. Min. Source --------- --7-------8=10:- T7-l9 Thomas (1%1). 6-13 Succinylcholine chloride 9 . 20 Conunents Thomas (1961). Paxarms (1963). 'Gallamine triethiodide 0.55 Nicotine alkaloid 3.3 Succinylcholine chloride .03 Succinylcholine chloride .052-.078 (IT) .09-.14 .05-.14 (TI1) .05 .012-.045 0.1-0.15 .036-.067 (IV) Phencyclidine hydrochloride DATA (Cont.) Paxarms (1963). 400 10 9-12 11.5 Pistey and Wright Thomas (1961). 13 50 2-15 4-37 1.5-6 Boyd (1962). Day (1964). Denney (1963). Columbian black-tailed Dodge (1964) . Pearson, Smity and Urness (1963) . deer. Denney (1963). .75-1.5 Nicotine alkaloid 1-4 Harrington (1960). Chlordiazepoxide 1.0 Heusche1e (1961). Succinylcholine chloride 0;095 15 7.5 16 (1959) . Paxarms (1963). Thomas (1961). �DRUG I}~OBILIZATION Species Live Wt., Pounds Ng!1f Drug DATA (Cont.) Inj. to Paral. Recov. IIlIDlob. Dosage Time, Period, Time, Ng/Head Nin. Nin. Nin. Comments Source Nicotine alkaloid 2.3 750 Nicotine alkaloid 3.0 350 130-170 Deer, Sika (Cervus nippon) Succinylcholine chloride 7 Deer, White-tailed (Odocoileus virginianus) Succinylcholine chlordie .04-.06 0.065 0.032 Cowan, Wood and Nordan Paxarms (1963). Piperno (1965). Nicotine alkaloid 3.6-3.8 .056 3.3 Behrend (1965). Day (1964) • Paxarms (1963). Deer, Red (Cont.) Deer, Roe 120 180 Phencyclidine hydrochloride Paxarms 7 14 Thomas (1961). 600 300-400 6-10 1-30 7-40 0.75-1.5 Chlordiazepoxide 60-130 Nicotine 14402160 13.6-18.1 alkaloid 20-40 :22-.30 (1962). Crockford, Hayes, Jenkins and Feurt (1957). Palmer (1959). F1yger (1961). Oral administration Green (1963). Thomas and Narburger (1964). Palmer (1959). Peurt, Jenkins, Hayes and Crockford (1958). 350 350-425 3-4 1.36-3.1 Gallamine triethiodide (1963). Hall, Taft, Baker and Aub (1953). f-' 80-110 Tranimul 150 Nurry and Dennett (1963). Hand injection \J1 \0 �!-' 0\ o DRUG IMMOBILIZATION Species Live ve .; Pounds Drug Tranimul Deer, White-tailed (Cont. ) Sodium Phenobarbital Eland (Taurotragus oryx) 250 Hg/it (Cont.) Inj. to Immob. Paral. Recov. Dosage Time, Period, Time, Hin. Min. Mg/Head Hin. Comments Source 10 Murray&Dennett 2-5 Ronca11i (1964). .2-.3cc (IP) .14-. 16cc(IV) 6 12-14 Succinylcholine chloride Elephant, African Gallamine (Loxodonta 6000-7000 triethiodide africana) 4000-7000 oripavine (M99) ~ Severinghaus 15-20 1-5 9 7 \P164). Oral administration feed. (1950) . Thomas (1961). Wright (1963). 14 Harthoorn & Lock (1961). Paxarms (1963). 1.2-1. 3 0.9 Harthoorn 1cc (1965). 0.8 F1axedil, .006 Harthoorn (1965). See 18-30 Sernylan (mg/1b). Comments --------------------_#-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ---- ~- 25-40 ~- ,- ,. ....... Kange rrom pennea I: 0 15-30 Denney (1963). 10 10-25 0.2-.05 Succinylcholine Elk, (Wapiti) from helicopter. chloride (Cervus Flook, Robinson, 3-25 7-158 (46) .04-.167 210-750 canadensis) Hermanrude & Buechner (1962). (10.5) Harper (1965). 6 11-16 Logsdon(1965). 17.1-34.1 11-20.5 6 Paxarms (1963). 0.05 250-950 Thomas (1961). 6 7.5 20 15-23 450-1100 Denney (1963). Total dosage for adult 1.0 400-500 Phencyclidine cows. hydrochloride Felines Flaxedil-Sernylan 1.0 Gallamine triethiodide .18-.28 Nicotine alkaloid 0.9 1-2 3-9 2-10 14-37 Post (1959). Feurt, Jenkins, Hayes and Crockford (1958). Palmer (1959). in �DRUG I}lliOBILIZATION DATA (Cont.) .'~~. _~~n~'f:'~\"'''''''-'''''''','';;''''''~' .•. Live Wt., Pounds Species Felines (Cont.) Mountain Lion (Felis cougar) African lion (Panthera leo) 275 Drug Inj. to Immob. Paral. Recov. .. Dosage Time, Period, Time, Mg/1f Mg!1reaa M~R. Mtn. Min. Source Comments Pencyclidine hydrochloride 0.3-6.0 0.5-0.76 Harthoorn (1962). Palmer (1959). Chlorpromazine sernylan See Comments Harthoorn (1962). .005 Sernylan, .05 scoplamine (mg/lb). chlordiazepoxide 2.7 Heuschele (1961). European Lynx. Succinylcholine chloride .076 Hornocker, Craighead and Pfeiffer (1965). Succinylcholine chloride 60-120 2.5-6.5 60 Thomas (1961). ~--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Succinylcholine 0.13 Talbot and Talbot (1962). Gazelle, Grant's 160 (Gazella grantii) chloride Gallamine triethiodide 1.5 0.5 Succinylcholine chloride 0.25 Talbot and Talbot (1962). Gallamine triethiodide 0.5 Talbot and Talbot (1962). Gerenuk chlordiazepoxide 2.27 Heuschele Giraffe, Masai 1500 (Giraffa cameloEardalis trippelskirchi) Gallamine triethiodide 1.3 Talbot and Talbot (1962). .08-.09 Talbot and Talbot (1962). Gazelle, Thomson's 50 (Gazella thomsonii) Giraffe, Rothschild's 1500- Succinylcholine (Giraffa camelo2000 chloride pardal~s rothschildi) 5-15 Palmer (1959). Talbot and Talbot (1962). (1961). I-' 0\ f-' �I-' 0\ ro DRUG UfMOBILIZATION Giraffe, Rothschild's Drug """""0 Mg/# Gallamine triethiodide 1.7 1-1. 6 5-15 Harthoorn & Lock (1961). Palmer (1959). 45 Geotz (1955). Pound rUUllU.,s (Cont.) ··ljl" Phencyclidine hydrochloride Nicotine alkaloid 21 0.25 15-70 Succinylcholine chloride Corsments Source --<;>1----- Curare Goats, Domestic 50-110 (Capra prisca) (Cont.) Inj. to Immob. Paral. Recov. Dosage Time, Period, Time, Mg/Head Min. Min. Min. Live Wt., Species ~ 2-5 150 240 Bullet coated with curare & powdered sugar shot into hindquarters. Van Niekerk & Pienaar (1963) . 6.5-14 15-60 Thomas (1961). 2-10 Palmer (1959). Tahr (Himalayan 80-350 goat) 115-165 (Hemitragus jem1aicus) Succinylcholine chloride Hartebeest, Jackson's 350 (Alce1aphus buse1aphus le1we1 Succinylcholine chloride 0.14 Talbot and Talbot (1962). SMS See Comments Harthoorn Succinylcholine chloride 0.06 .08 0.05 •08 175 10 TPH See Comments 20cc 79 Hippopotamus (Hippopotamus amphibius) 2300 3000-3260 2760-3000 15-17.5 6 20-21.5 Paxarms (1963). Thomas (1961). (1965). .10 Serny1an, .002 M99 .05 scopolamine (mg/lb). Harthoorn (1965). Harthoorn & Lock (1961) . Talbot and Talbot (1962). Thomas (1961) . 269 Buck, Fry, Green, Gwynn, 1 ml. = 330 mg thiKeen, Pout, Presslond and ambutene, 23 mg pheneyclidine, 11 Soudes (1962). mg. hyoscine. 600 mg Nalorphene antidote. �DRUG I}lliOBILIZATION DATA (Cont.) Species Hippopotamus Live Wt., Pounds (Cont.) Drug Mg/# Source Cormnents SHS See Comments Harthoorn Gallamine triethiodide 1.8 Thomas (1961). 'morphine hydrochloride, hyoscine hydrobromide, chlorpromazine Horses Inj. to Immob. Paral. Recov. Dosage Time, Period, Time, Mg/Head Min. Min. Min. See Comments 90-120 (1965). .10 Sernylan, .002 M99 .05 scopolamine(mg/1b) Van Nieker & Pienaar .0005 morphine hydro(1962) . chloride, .05 hyoscine hydrobromide, .25 chlorpromazine (mg/lb). Succinylcholine iodide .082 Nicotine alkaloid 2-3 Phencyclidine hydrochloride 0.75-1.25 Palmer (1959). Succinylcholine chloride .03-.09 .03-.09 Belling & Booth (1955). Pistey & Wright (1959). Hyaena, Spotted 123 (Crocuta crocuta) Gallamine triethiodide 1.0 Talbot andTalbot (1962). Impa La Succinylcholine chloride 0.18 0.16 Talbot and Talbot (1962). Van Nieker & Pienaar (1962). SMS See Comments Harthoorn Gallamine triethiodide Hanson(1956). 2-10 60-150 Palmer (1959). (1965). Van Niekerk Intravenous .10 Sernylan, .002 M99 .05 scopolamine (mg/lb) & Pienaar (1962). I-'- o-, W I �1-' 0'\ +DRUG Ul110BILIZATION DATA (Cont ,) Species Live Wt" Pounds Kangaroo, Grey Kangaroo, Red Koo, Uganada (Adenota kob .thomasi) Inj. to Imrnob. Paral. Recov. Dosage Time, Period, Time, Mg/Head Min. Min. Min. Source Drug Mg/# 27-34 Succinylcholine chloride 0.125 Paxarms (1963). 160-210 Succinylcholine chloride 0.28 Paxarms (1963). Chlordiazepoxide 5 Heuschele Succinylcholine chloride 0.16 Buechner, Harthoorn & Lock (1960). Talbot and Talbot (1962). 140-200 0.16 Nicotine Mice Nicotine alkaloid (1961). Buechner, Harthoorn & Lock (1960). Atropine cuts marta lity Talbot and Talbot (1962). Feurt, Jenkins, Hayes and Crockford (1958). 1.8 2.0 3.22 Cormnents 400 0.68 Succinylcholine chloride 0.2-.035 Bergerud, Butt, Russell, and Whalen (1964). Nicotine alkaloid 3.9 Rausch and Ritchey (1961). Oribi Tranimul 1.6-1.8 Oryx (Oryx 375 beisa callotis) Gallamine triethiodide 1.4 Moose (Alces americana) Succinylcholine chloride 10 o Steen, Keith & Hussaro Succinylcholine chloride I (1960) . 300-480 Pienaar and Van Niekerk (1963). Talbot and Talbot (1962). 40 Lanphear (1963). �~ Species Primates, Live Wt., Pounds General 5 Drug Mg/tt Succinylcholine chloride IMMOBILIZATION DATA (Cont.) Inj. to Immob. Paral. Recov. Dosage Time, Period, Time, Mg/Head Min. Min. Min. 5-20 Source .5-4;-5 20-45 Thomas (1961). 2-10 Palmer (1959). Comments Spider monkey Nicotine alkaloid 2-4 'Phencyclidine hydrochloride 1-2 Palmer (1959). Guinea baboon chlordiazepoxide 5.9 Heuschele (1961). Golden mannoset chlordiazepoxide 6.81 Heuschele (1961). Bunnese macaque chlordiazepoxide 2.27 Heuschele (1961). Rhinoceros, Black (Diceras bicornis bicornis) M99 Succinylcholine chloride Harthoorn (1965). 0.06 Harthoorn (1962). .10 Sernylan~ 1.2 Themalon, 195 Scopolamine (mg/lb). Harthoorn (1962). .07 Sernylan, 1.11 Themalon, 212 hyoscine (mg/ lb). Harthoorn (1962). .13 Serny1an, .47 morphine, 4.0 hyoscine (mg/ lb). Harthoorn (1962). .10 Sernylan, 1.2 Themalon, .05 Scopolamine (mg/lb) . 1 STS See Comments Rhinoceros, White 1500-5000 STH (Ceratotherium ~) See Comments 15-20 SMH See Comments 60 STS See Comments 12 I--' 0\ ,~ I �f-' 0'\ 0'\ DRUG IMHOBILIZATION Species Live Wt., Pounds Drug DATA (Cont.) Inj. to Immob. Paral. Recov. Dosage Time, Period, Time, Hg/tt Ng/Head Min. Min. Min. Corrnnents Source Rhinoceros, White (Cont.) Gallamine triethiodide 0.8-0,9 Harthoorn and Lock (1961). Sea lion, California (Eumetopias jubata) Chlordiazepoxide 3.18 Heuschele Seals, elephant (mirounga leonina) 'Succinylcholine chloride 0.91 Seals, Fur (Callorhinus alascanus) Succinylcholine chloride .13- .17 Seals, Grey Suxamethonium 400 Seals, Weddell Sheep, Aoudad 200 (Barbary sheep) (Ammotragus lervia) Sheep, Bighorn (Ovis canadensis) 0.5-1. 0 30.5 .77-1.77 14 63 Phencyclidine hydrochloride .228 18 540 Succinylcholine chloride .228-.91 9 34 15 7 Nicotine alkaloid (1963). Jewell and Smith (1965) .. 9.5 0.5 Ling and Nicholls Peterson (1965), 120 Suxethonium Succinylcholine chloride 45 (1961). 200 20 40 Jewell and Smith (1965). Flyger, Smith, Damm and Peterson (1965). Thomas (1961). �DRUG IMMOBILIZATION Live ve .; Pounds Species Sheep, Domestic Drug Ng/1t DATA (Cont.) Inj. to Immob. Pa ra L, Recov •. Dosage Time, Period, Time, Ng/Head Nin. Min. Min. Source Corrnnents Nicotine alkaloid 2-4 2-10 Succinylcholine chloride 0.35 6 Steenbuck .Tranimul 1.1-1.4 Swine, Domestic Phencyclidine hydrochloride 1-3 Cap-Chur Sol: Cap-Chur Gem 2 cc/25-40if Javelina Phencyclidine hydrochloride 1.0-2. 0 Day (1964). European boar Succinylcholine chloride .122-.61 Zurowsky and Sakowica (1965). Bushpig 125 (Potamochoerus porcus daemonis) Succinylcholine chloride 0.5 Talbot and ra1bot (1962). Gallamine triethiodide 4.0 Talbot and Talbot (1962). 250-277 Gallamine korigum topi) triethiodide 1.2 Talbot and Talbot (1962). (~~.) Topi (Damaliscus TPH (see hippos) .05-.09 SMS See Corrnnents Palmer (1959). 40 Day (1964). 300-480 Pienaar and Van Niekerk (1963). Palmer (1962). 2 30-90 120 up 121489 Nichols (1962). 2 parts Cap-Chur Sol to 5 parts Cap-Chur Gem Buck, Fry, Green, Gwynn, Keen, Pout, Presslond & Suddes (1962). Harthoorn (1965). 200-500 mg. Nalorphene antidote. .10 Sernylan, .002 M99 .05 scopolamine (mg/1b). I I-' 0\ --.J I �f-' 0\ 0:> DRUG IMMOBILIZATION Species Live Wt .• Pounds Drug Mg/# DATA (Cont.) Inj. to Immob. Paral. Recov. Dosage Time, Period, Time, Mg/Head Min. Min. Min. Comments Source Wallaby, Tasmanian 24-30 Sucr.inylcholine chloride 0.18 Paxarms Waterbuck (Kobus defassa u~e) 350 Succinylcholine chloride 0.16 Buechner, Harthoorn & Lock (1960). Talbot and Talbot (1962). 300-450 NAM See Comments Gallamine triethiodide l. 3-1. 7 1.0-1. 6 Talbot and Talbot (1962). Talbot (1960). STS See Harthoorn (1962). Chlordiazepoxide 1.81 Heuschele (1961). Succinylcholine chloride Succinylcholine chloride .034-.035 360-460 Ihldebeest (Connochaetus taurinus albojubatus) Zebra, Burchell's (Equus burche1li Zebra, Grant's (Equus granti) 550-600 bohmi) SMS Succinylcholine chloride M99 5.8 26-45 Rohwer (1966). 2 mg/M99, 10 mg acetylpromazine, 7 mg/M285. ;10 Serny1an, 1.2 Themalon, .05 Scopolamine (mg/lb). Van Niekerk and Pienaar (1962) . 0.36 Talbot and Talbot (1962). See Comments Harthoorn (1965). Lanphear (1963). 10-28 Succinylcholine chloride Zebra, Grevy's (Eguus zrevyi) 6.5 (1963). .10 Sernylan, .002 M99 .05 scopolamine (mg/lb) Lock and Harthoorn (1959). Talbot and Talbot (1962). 0.2 0.09 1 Harthoorn (1965). �July, 1966 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO --------~==~~--------Deer-Elk Investigations Project No. W-38-R-20 Work Plan No. 1 Title of Job: Experimental Period Covered: April 1, 1965 through June 30, 1966. Personnel: Job No. 7 Telemetering Devices Richard N. Denney, Raymond J. Boyd, Bruce Gill, Dave Gordon, Dale Hibbs and George Bear. ABSTRACT Approximately 35 references have been abstracted for the annotated bibliography on wildlife telemetry, with about 100 remaining to be annotated. Six transistorized radio transmitters were obtained from Sidney L. Markusen at $65.00 each, and a 12-channel receiver costing approximately $500.00. Four of the whip or modified whip antenna models were installed on live elk, two in the Research Center pens for testing purposes, and two in the field in the upper Rio Grande elk study area. Line-of-sight ranges in the field were up to 15 miles from the ground to the helicopter, with an expected battery life of one year. A neon blinker for deer indicated a battery life of approximately eight months and a range of observability at night up to one quarter mile with binoculars. �- 170 - Objectives: (1) Review the literature pertaining to schematics, costs and effectiveness of various transmitters and receivers developed and used for radio tracking. (2) Determine the most suitable transmitters and receivers to use on deer and elk. (3) Develop, and test the use of, visual blinkers on deer. Procedures: (1) Search the various professional journals and books for articles and specifications on radio-tracking wildlife, and prepare an annotated bibliography. Sources of articles include: Medical, Electronic and Biological Engineering Magazine; Minnesota Museum of Natural History Reports, Journal of Wildlife Management; Transactions of the North American Wildlife Conference; Proceedings of the National Telemetering Conference; New Scientist; Bio Telemetry; Science; and other technical journals. (2) Transmitters of the desired qualities will be constructed or purchased and tested on penned deer and elk at the pens being planned for construction behind the Fort Collins Research Center. In addition, a receiver or receivers will be built or purchased, as indicated by the review of literature and conferences with radio specialists, that will most closely fill our requirements. These will be tested in conjunction with the transmitters on the penned animals referred to above. One source of commercially available wildlife transmitters is Sidney L. Markusen of Electronic Specialties, Cloquet, Minnesota. VHF tracking models is in the 150 Mc range, weighing around 20 grams, complete with battery and harness, designed for game birds is available at $40.00. A larger version for big game birds is being constructed, but as yet hasn't been priced. When available, one of these may be purchased for trials •. A VHF tracking receiver in.the 150 Mc range, with 12 preset channels is also manufactured.by the company mentioned above. The receiver sells for $486.00. It weighs 5 1/5 pounds with batteries and is fully transistorized. Those which could be made by project personnel include the diagram designed by William W. Cochran in the 26.550 to 26.650 Mc range. A Model C-lO portable directional receiver, described by Tester, Warner and Cochran, could also be built or purchased from them, as could the Model D-Tl receiver. Components for construction of transmitters and receivers by project personnel are available from Lafayette Radio and Electronics, International Crystal Manufacturing Company, Allied Radio and Electronics, Sprague Products Company, and other electronic and radio supply houses. Leather and cotton belting will be tested as collars on which to mount the loop antenna and transmitter package. �- 171 - Tests to be run on transmitters include: simplicity, cost of construction or purchase, weight, longevity of power pack, line of sight and field ranges, and antenna efficiency. Receivers will be tested or compared on: cost, portability, directional sensitivity and channel selections. When experiments under controlled conditions have been successful, evaluation of these devices in the field, on free-roaming animals, will be conducted. (3) Dr. Kenneth Hungerford of the University of Idaho has made a neon blinker system for deer, using standard, readily available components. By changing the size of the capacitor the length and frequency of the blink can be determined. We would build several of these, fashion a collar out of leather or cotton belting or other means of fastening on deer, and test them on penned deer at the Research Center for visibility, battery life and durability. Some shielding device would be developed to protect the bulb from breakage and scratching on fences and woody plants. The base of the bulb, capacitor and condenser would be potted in resin or fiberglass for protection from the elements. Results: (1) The present status of the annotated bibliography on wildlife telemetry is that approximately 35 references have been abstracted, wi t h around 100 remaining to be summarized. This will be completed during the next segment of the job, and presented in final form at that time. (2) Correspondence with Signey L. Markusen resulted in construction by him of six transistorized transmitters, containing eight mercury batteries, for an expected life of approximately one year. The transmitters and batteries are enclosed in an aluminum cover, bolted on the elk neckbands that we usually use for visual observations of migrations and seasonal movements. These neckbands are four-inch wide heavy duty cotton backband material, with vinyl-coated nylon fabric edge- and diamond-stitched on the belting with orIon or dacron thread; the entire collar is 30 inches in circumference and will easily slip on over the head of an anterless elk. The transmitters operate in the 150 Mc frequency, and have been tested in the field up to a IS-mile line-of-sight range from the helicopter to the ground. The transmitters cost $65.00 each, two of them had whip antenna, and four had a modified whip antenna which was stitched down around the exterior surface of the collar and covered with plastic material. The receiver was likewise obtained from Markusen, with 12 preset channels and directional yagi-type antenna. The receiver weighs around five pounds is battery-powered, and has a strength meter as well as pitch BFO, sensitivity, meter gain and vernier tuning controls, with one sharp and two broad .band selections. Its cost was approximately $500.00. Two of the elk in the pens at the Fort Collins Research Center were immobilized with succinylcholine chloride and instrumented with one standard whip and one modified whip antenna for a comparative study on range, �- 172 - fastening, battery life and adaptation of the animals to the transmitters. The receiver is located in the office at the Laboratory, and receives the signals well from inside at approximately 200 yards from the animals, through several walls and amongst several power lines. The collars and transmitters have apparently no effect on the instrumented elk, or on their acceptance by the remainder of the herd in captivity. On June 22, 1966, two cow elk were immobilized on the upper Rio Grande area with Cap-Chur equipment using 20 mg of succinylcholine chloride from the helicopter. One of these cows, Figures 1 through 4, was instrumented on Pole Mountain, and was relocated several times with the receiver in the helicopter that same day to check on her health and the transmissions. She was tracked from four miles in very rough terrain. The next day we were unable to pick up any signal from her or relocate her at all. A second cow was instrumented on upper Ute Creek, and was subsequently relocated the same day. The tone of the signal changed perceptively when she stood, walked or ran from a few yards to approximately one half mile away. She was subsequently relocated the next morning in very heavy timber about two miles below the instrumenting site. A cow elk, apparently her, has been observed frolu other department aircraft approximately six miles south of the banding site, on two different occasions since her banding. Plans are to obtain a directional antenna suitable for mounting on a fixedwing aircraft and fly weekly or bi-weekly flights in the upper Rio Grande area for approximately one year to track the two elk and test the battery life under field conditions. When the batteries have expired, the animals may be retaken with Cap-Chur equipment and reinstrumented. We inscribed "Game Research Center, Box 567, Fort Collins, Colorado. Please Return." on the aluminum cover on the transmitters in the event the elk are harvested by hunters or are found dead. Each has duplicately numbered ear tags in each ear. The instrumentation of two cow elk in the Rocky Mountain Cooperative Elk study area is planned for September, 1966, when pre-season sex ratio counts are made. (3) One of the neon blinkers was constructed in the lab to test battery longevity on the shelf. It lasted eight months, then diminished to the point of non-detection. They are visible at night up to one quarter-mile with binoculars. Plans are to construct several and install on deer in the pens to test fastening devices, bulb protection and battery life in the elements. �- 173 Recommendations: Continue the job as planned, but try to obtain pulsed signal-type transmitters instead of continuous tone presently on hand. The continuous signal is difficult to ascertain when in an aircraft as compared to a pulsed signal. Prepared by: Richard N. Denney Wildlife Research Leader Date: July, 1966 Approved by: Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research'Chief .~ �- 174 - Figure 1. A four to five year old cow elk immobilized on Pole Mountain with transmitter equiped neckband installed. B. Gill Photo. Figure 2. Checking transmitter signal and reception prior to her recovery from the muscle-relaxant. B. Gill photo. �- 175 - Figure 3. Cow just prior to recovery in the alpine area of Pole Mountain. Radio equiped with whip antenna. R. B. Gill photo. Figure 4. Bell 47G-3Bl helicopter used in immobilizing the elk, with right door removed to facilitate relocation with directional antenna and portable receiver with earphones. D. Denney photo. �July, 1966 - 177 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO ------~~~~~-------- Project No. W-38-R-20 Work Plan No. 2 Deer-Elk Investigations Job No. 7a Title of Job: White River Elk Study, Publication of Results Period Covered: April 1, 1965 through March 31, 1966. Personnel: Raymond J. Boyd ABSTRACT Specifications on type of cover paper and page paper were obtained from the publication division. The historical background chapter is on hand from Mr. Donald Smith who was assigned the job of working up the background on this elk herd. All information relative to the present research is on hand and filed by date. Information from the Game Management Division on hunter harvest data on the study units is on hand and filed by year. A partial list of photos needed for the report is drawn up, and slides and negatives pertaining to the study are filed by subject. No actual writing on the publication was done during the past segment. �- 178 - Recommendations: Gather all data relative to the research studies on this elk herd and publish the results in a final major publication. Included in this final report should be recommendations to Management relative to the proper harvest, ideal sex and age ratios, and range management recommendations. Objectives: To publish gations project. all of the research findings resulting from this investi- Procedure: (1) Bring the review of pertinent report. literature up to date for inclusion (2) List and completely define all procedures, methods the conduct of the various phases of the study. (3) Compile and analyze statistically all data pertaining population data and hunter harvest surveys. (4) Formulate and make a part of the publication the recommendations to management for the proper harvest make-up of the elk herd, recommendations for range management practices, and surveys that should be carried out in the future so that vital information on the herd structure can continue to be gathered. and materials in the used in to the range surveys, Findings: All data needed to write up the final publication is on file by year or by subject, negatives and colored slides are on file by subject and the historical background data is on hand. All specifications on cover paper and page paper have been worked out with the publication division of the Department and the tentative costs and numbers of bulletins to be printed has been worked out. Except for the gathering of data needed to write the report, no actual writing was accomplished during the past segment. Prepared Date: by: Raymond J. Boyd Associate Wildlife Researcher J~ly 1966 Approved by:__~R~i~c~h~a~r~d~N~._D~e~n~n~e~y _ Project Leader �July, 1966 - 179 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJEC T SEGMENT State of COLORADO -------------------------- Project No. W-38-R-20 Work Plan No. 4 Deer-Elk Investigations Job No. 3c Title of Job Evaluation of Dee'r-Highway Crossing Safety Measures Period Covered: April 1, 1965 through March 31, 1966. Personnel: David F. Gordon, Raymond J. Boyd, Furman W. Dunham, Marion C. Coghill, and Frank Kozicky. ABSTRACT No data on the use of the streams under Colorado Highway 13-789 north of Rio Blanco was available for this segment. The tubes under U.S. Highway 50 near Sapinero, Colorado, were not used by deer and the road kill was heavier than last winter. The average speed of vehicles through the Van de Ree mirror section of U.S. Highway 6-24 east of Grand Valley, Colorado, was 57.4 mph, 2·7 mph higher than before the mirrors were installed. Maintenance of the mirrors 'consisted of removing vegetation around each mirror assembly, polishing the mirrors twice a year, and repairing and replacing damaged and destroyed assemblies. During this segment, ten posts and 14 mirrors were destroyed or taken at a material cost of $30.60. Damage was caused by normal, highwaymaintenance hazards and vandals. Fifty-t,vo deer were killed bebween Grand Valley and Rifle during the 1965 calendar year. Of these, ten were in the mirror section. This is an increase over the 1964 kill of five animals for the entire study area and two for the mirror section. �- 180 - Reconunendations: (1) Continue the mirror study as it is set up for two more years, then switch the deflection of the mirrors to direct the headlight beams across the highway in the eastern half of the mirror section and off the shoulder in the western half. (2) Try to induce deer to use the highway underpasses along both the Sapinero and Rio Blanco sections of highway by baiting with alfalfa and salt. (3) Make arrangements to have the wildlife conservation officer from Meeker complete Deer-Auto Accident Report forms for the deer killed on Colorado Highway 13-789 north of Rio Blanco and send them to the researcher in charge of the study. (4) Continue the underpass study for at least two more years in order to test the feasibility of baiting and fencing as a means of inducing deer to use the underpasses. Objectives: (1) To evaluate the effectiveness of the deer-crossing tubes placed under U.S. Highway 50 near Sapinero, Colorado, in reducing or eliminating highway deer-kill in the area. (2) To evaluate the effectiveness of new types of highway warning signs and scare devices in reducing the highway deer-kill on U.S. Highway 6-24 near Grand Valley, 'Colorado. (3) To evaluate the effectiveness of wing-type fences to induce migrating de€r to cross under Colorado Highway 13-789 near Rio Blanco, Colorado. These fences are to be placed at existing bridges over small creeks in the area. Procedure: (1) The Bureau of Reclamation has constructed U. S. Highway 50 near Sapinero, Colorado. a. b. c. (2) four, 7-foot-diameter tubes under Tracks of deer us ing the 'tubes were counted. Information on deer-auto collisions was compiled from Deer-Auto Accident Report forms completed by the local wildlife conservation officer. These data were compared with similar data from the previous four years in the same area. TWQ, and one-half miles of Van de Ree mirrors (Fig. 1) have been installed along U. S. Highway 6-24, 5.5 miles east of Grand Valley, Colorado. These mirror assemblies are placed 100 feet apart along each shoulder, alternating, sides of the road at 50-foot intervals (Fig. 2). In. ,the eastern mile and one-quarter, beams of headlights are deflected at ~ right angle off the shoulder. The western mile and one-quarter of mir~0~s deflect headlights at a right angle across the highway. �- 181 - Mirror face 1/4 Inch stove I I I I bolt iron fence with silver I' II II _------1- , -',1" - -1-----'II II, I 1,1 'II III III III '-------4- -:~- -1----- ...• II II I, II Figure 1. The Van de Ree mirror assembly as used in Colorado. post Iop �- 182 - J~,\y'1i~\1 \ \111 \ ( / def'eC'2 ~ II \I. \ \ II I Off shoulde-r .. J l' 1I II \\ \1 o 10 \ o ·0 Across roadway deflection I II' \ I\ ~J -----£It- Figure 2. A diagram of the deflection of the headlights by the Van de Ree mirrors and their placement along the highway. �- 183 - (3) a. Speeds of vehicles traveling both east and west were clocked through 2 miles of the mirror section including one curve. An observer was stationed at each end of the 2-mile stretch with a 2-way, radio pack-set. With the aid of these radios, one stopwatch was used to time the speed of the vehicles between the two stations. b. Maintenance consisted of removing the weeds around each mirror assembly, polishing the mirrors, and readjusting or replacing damaged or destroyed assemblies. Weeds were cut with a hand-operated, reciprocating-blade-type, motor mowing machine. Subsequently they were sprayed with weed killer. Mirrors were polished twice a year with Windex and paper towels. Damaged assemblies were repaired and reused when possible. c. Information of deer-auto collisions was compiled from Deer-Auto Accident Report forms completed by the local wildlife conservation officer. d. These data were compared years in the same area. with similar data from the previous four There are bridges on Colorado Highway 13-789 over Twelve Mile, Thirteen Mile, and Fourteen Mile creeks north of Rio Blanco, Colorado. a. Tracks of deer following these streams under the highway the spring and fall migrations were counted. during b. Information on deer-auto collisions was compiled from Deer-Auto Accident Report forms completed by the local wildlife conservation officer. c. These data were compared with similar data from the previous years in the same area. four �- 185 - EVALUATION OF DEER-HIGHWAY SAFETY MEASURES CROSSING David F. Gordon Introduction Most of the work for this segment was done on the Van de Ree mirror study, therefore, the findings from the highway underpass study will be treated first. Highway Underpasses Introduction: The effectiveness of highway underpasses, as a method of reducing deer mortality on Colorado highways, was studied along state highway 13-789 north of Rio Blanco and UoS. Highway 50 near Sapinero. There are existing bridges across Colorado Highway 13-789 high enough to permit deer to pass under and 7foot-diameter tubes have been installed under U.So Highway 50. Acknowledgements: Grateful acknowledgement is given to Wildlife Conservation Officer Cliff Coghill for his work in gathering data for the Sapinero section of the study. Bridges: No data for the bridge underpasses are available. Eugene Green resigned on April 1, 1965 and no one was hired to fill this vacancy until June 1, 1965. Press of duties since then prevented counting the tracks of deer under the bridges during fall migration. Road-kill data has not been received for this section of the highway so no comparison can be made. Tubes: Data for the Sa pinero section ShOH that no deer have used the underpasses. The road-kill was heavier this past winter as would be expected since the tubes under the new, high-speed highway were not used to cross the road. No baiting was tried during this segment. Van de Ree Mirrors Introduction: Highway deer-kill data collected from 1961 - 1964 indicated that U.S. Highway 6-24 between Grand Valley and Rifle, Colorado, had the highest kill of any similar stretch in the state. Two and one-half miles of Van de Ree mirrors were installed 5.5 miles east of Grand Valley, where the road-kill was concentrated, in January, 1965. The recommended method of installation is to have the mirrors direct the beam of headlights at a right angle across the roadway (Nettles 1964). In this study, the method has been modified at the request of the Colorado Highway Patrol to minimize annoyance to drivers at night. In the western half, the mirrors deflect the beams of light across the highway. In the eastern half, the light is directed at a right angle off the shoulder. Acknowledgements: Special thanks is given to the Colorado State Hd.ghwa y Department's maintenance crew who has faithfully reported road-killed deer to the wildlife conservation officer and taken care to miss the mirror assemblies when cutting weeds, blading the shoulders, and plowing snow. Wildlife Conservation Officer Furman Dunham is to be highly commended for his cooperation in completing a Deer-Auto Accident Report form for each kill and for carrying out other requests connected with the study. �- 186 'Vehicle Speeds: Eighty-nine vehicles traveling both directions were timed through the mirror section. Of these, 36 were clocked from 8:45 - 10:20 AM MDT, 26 from 5:00 - 6:25 PM MDT, and 27 from 8:35 - 10:30 PM MDT. The speeds averaged 57.4 mph with a range of 38.3 - 79.1 mph (Fig. 3). This is significantly faster than the 1964 average of 54.7 mph before ;the mirrors and warning signs were installed. (Calculated t = 2.45. Tabular t at the 5 percent level with infinite degrees of freedom = 1.96). This in~rease in speed tends to indicate that the mirrors and signs do not act as a deterrent to high speeds. From personal observation, knowing the location of the mirrors, their flashes at night were almost unnoticeable. Interviews with several night motorists, who have not known the location of the mirrors, show that the flashes are not at all conspicuous. Maintenance: Maintenance of the mirror assemblies consisted of clearing weeds from around the posts, polishing the mirrors, and repairing and replacing damaged and destroyed assemblies. The Colorado Department of Highways maintenance crew cut and sprayed the weeds along the highway, but vegetation immediately around each post had to be cut by hand. It was necessary to polish the mirrors twice a year. One man can complete the job in eight hours of steady work. Windex and paper towels will remove any highway film and bird droppings and restore a good polish. However, after a year, the mirrors facing the oncoming traffic are noti~eable pitted and scratched. Damage to and destruction of the assemblies have been caused by normal hazards such as blading the shoulders, plowing snow, and auto accidents; and by vandalism such as theft of and shooting at the posts and mirrors (Fig. 4). The loss of posts and mirrors and their material cost, since installation, is summarized in Table 1. Twelve mirrors were knocked to the ground in the eastern half and only three in the western half. Marks indicated that most of the 12 mirrors, which projected into the path of the road grader (Fig. 5), had been knocked loose by its blade. The mirrors in the western half project away from the road and are out of the path of the grader. The first time the snowplow cleared the road there were 20 assemblies bent or pulled out. Only two of these had to be replaced completely. The rest were straightened and reused. After the next snow storm there was far less damage. This tended to be true also for successive maintenance runs by the grader. In September, 1965, U.S. Highway 6-24 between DeBeque Canyon and Rifle was resurfaced. During these operations, several posts were bent, but only one assembly was destroyed completely. Auto accidents and careless driving None of these were beyond repair. accounted for damage to three assemblies. Vandalism caused complete loss of 17 posts and loss or destruction to 12 mirrors since installation. The first instance occurred between the last of January and the first of February, 1965, when 13 posts were broken or removed and four mirrors taken or destroyed. This was during segment 19. Since then, ten mirrors were used as targets. Three of these were damaged beyond use. �1964 I 30.4 ~ 52.5 _, eas 56.9 54:7 1965 To I ' 79.1 55i59.6 38.3 I-' OJ -..J 57.4 30 40 . . 50 60 Miles Per 70 . 80 Hour Range 95 % Confidence v Figure 3. Interval Mean A comparison of the means, 95 per cent confidence intervals, and ranges of the speeds of vehicles timed through two miles of high,my.before and after installation of the Van deRee mirrors. �- 188 - Figure 4. Two types of mirror damage: Lef t - hit Right - shot by hunters. by road grader; �Table l.--l;umbers, percents, and material Posts Project Year Total Destroyed by Vandalism cost of posts and Van de Ree mirrors (;; ~)1.10 lost Mi.rror-s Destroyed Normal Hazards by I\'Iate rial Cost Total Destroyed by Vandalism in the @ Colorado study. ~;;l.L~O Destroyed lTormal Hazards by Eaterial Cost I I-' lTumber Percent Number T:umber Percent Percent Number co Percent \0 I 1964 13 13 100 0 0 $11+.30 4 4 100 0 0 1965 10 4 40 6 60 ~p11.00 14 8 57 6 43 " 5 • 60 ;;> t~19.60 �- 190 - f II ~ E;igure 5. A diagram showing the wings of the Van de Ree mirrors projecting into and away from the path of the road grader. �- 191 - Deer-Kills: Road-killed deer were noted by highway maintenance men and Wildlife Conservation Officer Furman Dunham and reported. The .kill by month is summarized in Figure 6. The months of heaviest kill are the winter months from October-November through March-April. The numbers of road-killed deer on the game crossings west and east of Grand Valley were compared (Table 2). These ratios varied between 1961 and 1965, but there was no significant difference. (Calculated chi-square = 0.44. Tabular chi-square at the 5 percent level with one degree of freedom = 3.84.) Therefore, the kill data for the section of highway west of Grand Valley will be ignored hereafter in the study. Table 2. --Numbers and ratios of road-killed deer in the game crossings east of Grand Va lley Colorado for 1961 - 1965. Number of deer killed Year West of Grand Valley East of Grand Valley 1961 1962 1963 1964 1965 21 33 22 31 22 62 75 29 47 52 west and Ratio 1 1 1 1 1 3.0 2.3 1.3 1.5 2.4 Road-kill data for the study area (Fig. 7) between Grand Valley and Rifle, which contains the mirror assemblies, is summarized in Table 3. From 1961 - 1963 the kill was quite high in the mirror section. The road-kill in the study area in 1964 was higher than in 1963, but the 1964 kill in the mirror section dropped significantly. Several reasons for this decline come to mind: The hunter-harvest of deer in 1964 might have decreased the herd. The hunter deer-kill in unit 32, which includes the study area, does not bear this out, however, since it did not vary appreciably between 1963 and 1965. Weather conditions might have had some effect, but this is not definite, either. A more plausible explanation might be that fewer deer crossed the highway through the mirror section, though crossings in the rest of the study area remained the same or increased. In any case, the road-kill has been consistently higher in the eastern half of the mirror section and there appears to be a specific deer-crossing at the curve about 8.5 miles west of Rifle. The 1965 kill in the mirror section is significantly lower than the average for the previous four years. (Calculated chi-square = 5.81. Tabular chi-square at the 5 percent level with one degree of freedom = 3.84.) However, this analysis does not lead us to conclude that the mirrors have had this effect on the kill. Insufficient data (only one year) are available to reach any conclusion at this time. More important, there was no significant difference between the 1964 kill, before installation of the mirrors, and the 1965 kill after installation. (Calculated chi-square = 0.08. Tabular chi-square at the 5 percent level with one �- 192 16 . •.. Q) Q) a o 1965 Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dee Jan Feb Mar Month Figure 6. A graph of the number of road-killed deer by month for the 1965 project year. 1966 �N ,.. ...•..•. r " (' r ..J.J ... {' ~~ ~"J. "' .•..." j '"4, 1 /" ,.••. /I ( J ,I'''' f' J J ( l' r"'''?' f-' \0 l."" W " ..r~ "- •••'11 .# # ". r Mirror 1 * sect/on Deer crossing Figure 7. A map of the Van de Ree mirror study area between Grand Valley and Rifle, Colorado. �- 194 degree of freedom = 3.84.) The road-kill the mirror section has been five animals. from January 1 to March 31, 1966 in Table 3.--Numbers of road-killed deer in the study area east of Grand Valley, Colorado for 1961 - 1965. Mirrors Present Year Mirrors Absent Western Half e] Eastern Half bl Total Total 1961 1962 1963 1964 1965 39 45 15 39 42 8 10 5 2 2 15 20 9 6 8 23 30 14 8 10 62 75 29 47 52 al Beams of headlights bl Beams of headlights Literature deflected deflected across highway at a right angle. off highway at a right angle. Cited: Nettles, K. 1964. Mirrors to reduce deer-auto collisions. Trans. Midwest Wild 1. Conf. Bloomington, Indiana. 7 p. I 1 illus. (Type-written paper) Prepared Date: by: David F. Gordon Wildlife Researcher ~A~p~r~i~lL,_1~9~6~6~ Approved by; Richard N. Denney Candidate _ Wayne W. Sand fort Game Research Chief �July, 1966 - 195 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT state of COLORADO --------~~~~--------- Project No. W-38-R-20 Work Plan No. 6 Deer-Elk Investigations Job No. 10 Title of Job: Methods of Evaluating Elk Use on Native Pasture During the Spring Period Covered: .Personnel: April 1, 1965 through October 15, 1965 . David F. Gordon, Raymond J. Boyd, Bertram D. Baker, and Frank Kozicky. ABSTRACT During this segment, 13 pairs of production-utilization plots were established to be clipped in the spring. Recommendations: (1) Simplify the procedures as follows: a. Determine the food preference of elk by analysis of stomach samples of elk taken on the study area. b. Determine the number of elk using the study area during the spring by establishing pellet-group transects to be read every two weeks until the elk leave the range. c. Determine the amount of grasses eaten by elk by establishing paired production-utilization plots on pastures used by elk in the spring. (2) Continue this study for at least three years. �- 196 . . ". . . . . - . . Objectives: (1) To determine the amount and kind of pasture or meadow grasses eaten by elk in the spring, both on private land and national forest land. (2) To determine the effects upon native pasture or meadow grasses of grazing by both elk and cattle in the spring on private land and national forest land. (3) To determine the effects of spring elk use and summer cattle use on vegetative cover and composition of native pastures, both on private land and national forest land. Procedures: (1) Conduct a complete review of literature relative to the food habits of elk during the pp.:r~!(0~'f;:;:f the year that the use occurs. Preference of p.larrcsa.";:s::r£:::eble in the area will be determined by visual observation and analysis of stomach samples of seven elk taken at weekly intervals within the area in question. (2) Four study plots will be set up in the following manner: a. Stake out four 5-acre plots on as uniform an area as possible. b. Fence one of the plots with a 40-inch barbed-wire fence that will exclude cattle, but will allow elk to enter. c. Fence one of the plots with an 8-foot woven-wire and steel-post fence that will exclude elk and cattle. d. Fence one of the plots with an elk-proof, lay-down fence that will exclude spring elk use, but can be taken down to allow summer cattle use. e. Stake the remaining plot only at the corners so that estimates of total, dual use can be measured. (3) Establish 50 1/100-acre pellet-group and cow-chip plots in each study plot. These plots are to be marked permanently at the centers, counted twice a year, and the pellets and chips removed from the plots each time. �- 197 - r--.• ~ ~ ~ "" f€ ~ "" .•. ,\ ~ \\ CD 0::: II 'I II (f) (Y\ ~ •. ..:::t . 0 (]) (f) •••....... ~ ctl (]) H ctl l>, ] (fJ (]) M ctl S ctl "d (]) H E (fJ \\ ctl 0.. \\ (]) :> .r! +' ctl ~ ..c (]) +' Ct-i 0 0.. ctl s .& .r! ~ .r! 0 .r! :> ..-i~ <D H ;::1 eo .r! IZ. �- 198 .... .. ("" i' '. " "" " /1 : " N •• , II ••••••• II """ : .. /..... ,. ; 11 11 d '" l ~* ,," ~"" , ,/411' I," ............. , @" ~"" ....... " ,," "It " .•.••.• ..•..•. ". II If 'I I, '( ..... e" ,~ II " S" ...... .,' ," , :" .. ' .. ' .' " .' : / / -.......... " .... ..... .: '. ,,' . .... ,' �- 199 - Findings: Due to a lack of manpower, no work was done on this job until fall. At that time, 13 pairs of production-utilization plots were set out on land belonging to Mr. Oris Albertson on upper Poison Creek (Sec. 4, T3S, R86w, NMPM). These pairs consist of one plot unprotected and staked at the center and one plot staked at the center and covered by a conical cage. In the spring after the elk have left the area and before the cattle have arrived, a plot covered by a cylindrical cage and staked at the center is to be added to each pair. All plots are to be clipped in the fall and the grass weighed. Prepared by: David F. Gordon Wildlife Researcher Date: July, 1966 Approved by: Richard N. Denney Project Leader Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief �July, 1966 - 201 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT state of COLORADO ----------------------- Project No. W-3B-R-20 Work Plan No. 6 Deer-Elk Investigations Job No. 11 Title of Job: Evaluation of Deer Use on Alfalfa under Different Irrigation Rates Period Covered: Persolmel: April 1, 1965 through March 31, 1966 Raymond J. Boyd, David F. Gordon and Frank Kozicky Eight and one-half pairs of 9.6 square foot plots were clipped and the resulting alfalfa weighed to determine if grazing by deer in the spring had any adverse effect on the production of alfalfa hay. No statistically significant differences could be detected between the plots at the .05 level. Samples size calculations indicated that 51 plots would be needed to achieve 90% accuracy. �- 203 - Table 1 below lists the plots and weights plots. of the alfalfa clipped from the 17 Table 1. -- Weights of Alfalfa Samples From Nine Pairs of 9.6 sq. ft. plots Little Hills Game Experiment Station, Colorado, 1965. Plot Number Protected From Deer Grazing 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 590.2 612.9 1,180.4 703.7 499.4 522.1 476.7 703.7 522.1 5,811.2 TOTAL * Unprotected From Deer Grazing 431.3 454.0 476.7 522.1 295.1 522.1 476.7 681.0 gm. gm. gm, gm. gm. gm, gm. gm, gm, gm, gm, gm, gm, gm, gm, gm. gm, gm. "/e 3,859.0 gm, Plot could not be located as center marker has disappeared. Statistical analysis of the alfalfa hay weight data above showed that no significant difference could be detected at the 95% level of confidence using Student's "T" test. Further analysis of the data indicated that in order to achieve 95% accuracy a total of 205 pairs of plots would be needed, and to attain 90% accuracy, 51 pairs of plots would be needed. Press of other duties did not allow enough time to make counts of the deer using the study field. However, personnel at the Little Hills Game Experiment Station reported that during the annual meadow count in this area that the deer numbers were at the lowest point since records have been kept, which would indicate that very few if any deer used the study field during the period being tested. This was also borne out by the fact that very few pellet groups were noticed during the time we were in the field doing the clipping. Weather data at the study field site was not taken during the past segment as a working hygrothermograph could not be located. Data on the weather in the general area can be obtained from records kept at the headquarters of the Little Hills Game Experiment Station, about five miles west of the study field. Data gathered from the clipping study and personal observation in the area, plus the feelings of local men in the area seem to indicate that deer numbers are down in this area, and not enough grazing pressure is being applied to the study field to warrant much more time being spent on this study in this particular area. Prepared Date: by: Raymond J. Boyd Wildlife Researcher .Iu Ly 1966 Approved By: Richard N. Denney Project Leader Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �- 204 - Figure 1 - Alfalfa Plot Inside Wire Cage - Alfalfa Growth Almost Completely Hides the Cage Five Feet High). (Cage is Little Hills Game Experiment Station, Colorado, 1965. �- 205 - Figure 2 - Center Marker in Alfalfa Plot Not Protected From Deer Grazing in the Spring - Stake is Four Feet High - Little Hills Game Experiment Station, Colorado, 1965. �- 206 - Figure 3 - Plot of Alfalfa Clipped, Sacked and Labeled Plot Center Marker Shows - Little Hills Game Experiment Station, Colorado, 196~o �July, 1966 - 207 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO --------~~~~~------------Deer-Elk Investigations Project No. W-3B-R-20 Work Plan No. 6 Title of Job: Methods of Determining the Effects of Spring Grazing by Deer on Crested Wheatgrass Pastures Period Covered: Personnel: Job No. 12 April 1, 1965 through March 31, 1966 Raymond J. Boyd, David F. Gordon and Frank Kozicky. Abstract: Nine pairs of plots, one of each pair protected with a wire cage, and one plot not protected from grazing, were clipped to determine if grazing by deer had any adverse effect upon the production of Crested Wheatgrass pastures. No significant difference could be detected between the plots at the .05 level by a "T" test. Sample size calculations indicated that 142 plots would be needed for 90% accuracy. �- 208 - Recommendations: 1. Continue this study for one more year at the present site. 2. Locate another site where Crested Wheatgrass is being grazed by deer in the spring, and set up a similar study where more grazing pressure is being put on the Crested Wheatgrass by deer. Objectives: 1. To establish a series of plots in fields of Crested Wheatgrass that are of two age classes. 2. To maintain a weather station at the study area. 3· To make counts of the deer that use the study fields in the spring. 4. To determine the production of the study plots whether grazed or ungrazed. Procedures: 1. Obtain aerial photos of the fields in question and determine the acreages in each. Randomly select six pairs of plots in each field, one plot of each pair to be selected to be fenced against grazing by deer with a 9.6 square foot cage. Effort will be made to insure that each of the paired plots has a similar number of grass bunches. 2. A recording hygrothermograph, or at least a maximum-m~n~mum thermometer will be set up at the study field and daily records kept of the air temperatures from April 1, through May 31. 3· Using the portable counting tower and the spotlight, nightly counts of the deer using the fields will be maintained from April 1 until the bulk of the deer leave the study area, about May 15: Counting will begin at 4:00 p.m. and counts will be made every half hour until 8:00 p.m. thereafterJ counts will be made at hourly intervals until midnight. Counts from mi~Dight until 6:00 a.m. will be made every two hours. 4. The amount of forage produced by the fenced and unfenced plots will be determined by weighing the grass after it has been cut. Statistical analysis of the hay weight data will be patterned after paired plot analysis. �- 209 - Methods of Determining the Effects of Spring Grazing by Deer on Crested Wheatgrass Pastures Ra;Ylrlond J. Boyd The nine pairs of plots were clipped on July 13, 1965, and the clipped samples placed in paper sacks for drying. The sacks were stored in the mouse-proof grain storage building at the Little Hills Game Experiment. Station ~ntil Yarch 24, 1966, when they were hauled to the Southwest Regional Head quar+er-s 1:1Montrose, where the sacks were laid out in numerical order for further drying. The clipped samples were weighed to the nearest 1/10 gram on V~y 25, 1966. Table 1 below lists the plots and the weights of the Crested Wheatgrass samples that were clipped from the nine pairs of plots. Table 1 -- Weights of Crested Wheatgrass Samples From Nine Pairs of 9.6 Sq. Ft. Plots Little Hills Game Experiment Station, Colorado, 1965. Unprotected From Deer Grazing Plot Number Protected From Deer Grazing 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 146.1 gm. 336.5 gm. 563.0 gm. 320.0 gm. 344.2 gm. 235·7 gm. 239·0 gm. 286.1 gm. 240.8 gm. 231.8 gm , 142.0 gm. 406.7 gm. 191.6 gm. 634.7 gm. 122.1 gm. 197·3 gm. 306·9 gm. 227.6 gm. Total 2,711.4 gm. 2,460.7 gm. ===================================================== �- 210 - A statistical analysis of the clip-plot data by Student's liT"Test showed no significant differences between the series of plots at the .05 level. Further analysis of the data indicated that we would have to set up 625 plots to detect differences at the .05 level or that 142 plots would be needed to detect differences at the .10 level. Press of other duties did not allow any time for counts of deer using the study field. However, personnel at the Little Hills Game Experiment Station found, on the regular sprLDg meadow counts, that numbers of deer in this area were at the lowest point since records have been kept. This would indicate that not a great number of deer were using the study fieldo This was bore out by the fact that very few pellet groups were found on the study field. ~~e weather station could not be set up as a working hygrothermograph could not be located in time. Prepared by: Raymond J. Boyd Associate Researcher Date: July, 1966 Approved by: Richard N. De~~ey Project Leader Ferd C.'Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator I',. �July, 1966 - 211 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMEJ.'ifT State of COLORADO --------~~~~~-------- Project No. W-38-R-20 Work Plan No. 6 Deer-Elk Investigations Job No. 13 Title of Job: Evaluation of the Effects of Deer and Rodent Use on Pinto Bean Production Period Covered: .Personnel: April 1, 1965 through September 30, 1965 • David F. Gordon, Raymond J. Boyd, Patrick G. Waters, and Frank Kozicky. ABSTRACT A pinto bean field on the farm of Wilmer Dicken, Egnar, San Miguel County, Colorado was selected and fenced into quarters to study the relative effects of deer use and rabbit and porcupine use on bean production. A census to determine the species of small mammals present around the field revealed the following species: Peromyscus maniculatus, Eutamias spp., Microtus longicaudus, Citellus spilosoma, and Thomomys bottae. Dicken's domestic stock entered the study field on two occasions. Only two sets of deer tracks were seen in the study area all summer. Rabbit pellets in varying amounts were found in the difference quarters. No porcupine pellets were found in the field. A good measure of bean production could not be obtained because of a killing feeeze just prior to harvest. �- 212 - Recommendations: (1) Modify the design so that only one field, divided into quarters, is used. Each quarter will have four plots, total exclosure, deer use only, rodent use only, and total use. (2) To locate the deer-use-only plots that they are on the outside of the quarters, or at least not completely surrounded by other plots. (3) Take large enough samples to detect a variation of 20 per cent from the mean at the 90 per cent confidence level. (4) Continue this study for at least three more years. Objectives: (1) To determine the effects of grazing by mule deer on pinto bean production. (2) To determine the effects of grazing by mule deer and various species of rodents on pinto bean production. (3) To determine the correlation between grazing use and available soilmoisture on pinto bean production. Procedures: (1) Randomly locate plots in pinto bean fields. a. Mark half of the plots at the corners with 6 foot high, wovenwire fence. b. Enclose the other half of the plo~s with a 10 foot high, wovenwire fence. c. Weigh the bean production of each plot and determine the difference between fenced and unfenced plots by analysis of variance. (2) Establish a series of paired plots, the number of which will be determined after consultation with the farmer as to fields available and farming practices used. a. Fence on plot of each pair with a rodent-proof, deer-proof fence as follows: 1) Enclose the plot with a 10 foot, woven-wire fence to exclude deer. 2) Bury a 3 foot width of heardware cloth 18 inches deep along the bottom of the fence to exclude rodents. 3) Fasten a 10 inch strip of sheet metal above the hardware cloth to prevent rodents from climbing over. 4) Place traps and poison in each plot to insure that no rodents remain in the plot. b. Fence the other plot of each pair with a 3 foot, woven-wire fence which is rodent-proofed as outlined above. This will permit deer to enter the plot. (3) Install a stack of soil-moisture resistance blocks in the center of each plot and take readings with the Coleman meter at weekly intervals. �- 213 - EVALUATION OF THE EFFECTS OF DEER AND RODENT USE ON PINTO BEAN PRODUCTION David F. Gordon Introduction This study was conducted on a la-acre, pinto bean field belonging to Wilmer W. Dicken, located in the SW~ of Section 34, T43N, R19W, N.M.P.M., northwest of Egnar, San Miguel County, Colorado (Fig. 1). Certified San Juan Pinto Bean seed was planted in the field. The study this year determined the most feasible design and sample size to use on the area available. It employed a modification of the "Procedures" above. Only one field was used and it was fenced into quarters (Fig. 2); one to exclude deer (Odocoileus hemionus) and permit entrance to rabbits (Lepus sp_ and Sylvilagus sp.) and porcupines (Erethizon dorsatum); one to exclude rabbits and porcupines and permit entrance to deer; one to exclude deer, rabbits, and porcupines; and one to permit entrance to deer, rabbits, and porcupines. The soil-moisture stacks were not installed. Acknowledgements The cooperation of Wilmer Dicken is greatly appreciated. He has very willingly accomodated his schedule to ours, put up with the inconvenience of fences in and around his field, and helped to check the hygrothermograph when our personnel could not be present at the beginning of the month. The help of Wildlife Conservation Officer Pat Waters in building fences is also gratefully acknowledged. Findings Maintenance: Approximately four times during the growing season the east-west, center fence was removed to allow for cultivation. Following cultivation it was replaced. Just prior to harvest, the fence, including the posts, was removed from the field and not replaced. Whenever the field was visited, a check of the condition of the fences was made and any damage repaired. When rabbits and procupines were seen in the exclosures they were shot. Each month from July through September, the hygrothermograph was changed. �- 214 - RI9W 34 33 " 35 ~ T43N Dicken - To Slick Rock (6 miles) \ 36 T43N ) Farm • r!J 2 3 4 I l)~ I II 10 9 12 T42N T42N r ~ Egnar 14 15 16 13 ~ RI9W To Dove Figure 1. Creek p (9 miles) Vicinity map of the pinto bean damage study area on the Wilmer Dicken farm, Egnar, San Miguel County, Colorado. �- 215 - N Total Exclosure -r : •••..•.• .•.. -- ..• .•..•••.• I ,. -; ....-Weather 0 ,,~.... Station "" ~" ,." _- ...• "',"" ,./ Rodent ",\' Use Only " ,\ ,\' " ,\ \' Figure 2. A map of the pinto bean damage Dicken farm, Egnar, San Miguel study field on the Wilmer County, Colorado. �- 216 Small Mammal Census: A species inventory of small mammals in the area was conducted using the North American Census of Small Mammals method. Four trap lines were run, two each in pinyon (Pinus edulis) type and sagebrush (Artemesia tridentata) type. In the former, three species were trapped as follows: Long-tailed deer mouse - Peromyscus maniculatus Chipmunk - Etuamias spp. Long-tailed vole - Microtus longicaudus In the latter, three species were trapped as follows: Long-tailed deer mouse - Peromyscus manicu1atus Chipmunk - Eutamias spp. Spotted ground squirrel - Citellus spilosoma In addition, the skull of a specimen of the valley pocket gopher (Thomomys bottae) was found in the sagebrush type. Factors Affecting Bean Production: The pasture for the Dicken's domestic stock half surrounded the study fi~ld. On September 1, 1965, the cattle were seen in the field, driven out, and the fences repaired. Dicken reported that they had been in the field at least once the week before. They had entered all four quarters, but had been in the total-use quarter most. Following the invasion, Dicken surrounded the entire field with one strand of electri.c fence. This successfully excluded the cattle. ~ere was an above average amount of rain this past season. From May through October, 1965, a total of 15 inches of rain fell, averaging 2.50 inches per month and ranging from 1.30 - 3.90 inches. The rains caused washing of the field. The rodent-use-only (SW) quarter was the most severely affected. The total-exc10sure (NW) quarter was moderately affected. The eastern half of the field was only slightly washed. Hygrothermograph records from the weather station at the study field are summarized in Table 1. The freeze on the night of September 25 ruined most of the bean crop in the area. After the beans were harvested they were sampled, including both frozen and unfrozen beans. Table l.--A summary of the monthly hygrothermograph records from the weather station located at the pinto bean damage study field on the Wilmer Dicken farm, Egnar, San Miguel County, Colorado. Temperature (F) Relative Humidity (%) Month Average Minimum Maximum Average Minimum Maximum July 66.2 49 85 51.5 22 86 August 64.5 45 86 40.8 16 85 September 52.6 25 78 47.7 16 86 �- 217 Whenever the study field was visited, the perimeter was checked for deer tracks. The interior of each quarter was checked for rabbit and porcupine pellets. During the entire season, the tracks of only two deer, apparently a doe and a fawn, were found. These tracks crossed the total-use (SE) quarter and entered the deer-use-only (NE) quarter. One possible reason the deer did not bother the beans was an abundance of natural browse due to plentiful rainfall. Some rabbit pellets were observed in all quarters. No porcupine pellets were ever seen in any of the field, though barking of the pinyon trees by porcupine was observed adjacent to the field. The animal sign in each quarter is summarized as follows: 1. Total Exclosure (NW) - Only one rabbit pellet found in the entire quarter. (This was not a fresh pellet). No deer sign seen. No porcupine pellets found. Some cattle sign present. 2. Deer Use Only (NE) - One fresh rabbit pellet found. (Several rabbit pellets were seen along the east-west fence as though washed there by rain run-off.) Two sets of deer tracks seen. No porcupine pellets found. Some cattle sign present. 3. Rodent Use Only (SW) - Rabbit pellets profuse. No deer sign seen. porcupine pellets found. Some cattle sign present. No 4. Total Use (SE) - Rabbit pellets profuse. (These were apparently cupine pellets found. Two sets of deer tracks seen. the same two seen in the NE quarter.) No porMuch cattle sign present. Bean Production: The relative production among the four quarters (Table 2) was determined by randomly selecting two, IO-foot samples from each windrow of beans. (A windrow consisted of eight rows of beans combined into one.) The beans were subsequently stripped from the vines and weighed. Table 2.--A summary of pinto bean production on a 10-acre, pinto-bean the Wilmer Dicken farm, Egnar, San Miguel County, Colorado Quarter Number of Samples Total Weight (g) NE NW SE SW 18 20 18 18 8791. 3 13035.4 5725.6 6737.1 Average Weight/Sample (g) 488.4 651.8 318.1 37lJ·.3 field on Range (g) 1110.6 1240.4 826.0 1482.9 - 67.4 - 0.0 - 0.0 - 0.0 �- 218 - The data thus obtained were analyzed to determine the proper sample size to detect a 10 percent and a 20 percent deviation from the mean at both the 90 and 95 percent confidence levels. Due to the limited size of the field available, it will be possible to determine only a 20 percent variation at the 90 percent level. Prepared by: David F. Gordon Wildlife Researcher Date: July, 1966 Approved by: Richard N. Denney Project Leader Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief �July, 1966 - 219 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO Project No. W-38-R-20 Work Plan No. 11 Deer-Elk Investigations Job No. 4 Title of Job: Elk Seasonal Movements, Rocky Mountain National Park Period Covered: April 1, 1965 t.hr ough lfJarch31, 1966. Personnel: Richard N. Denney, Edmund Bucknall, Walter Schuett and R. Bruce Gill. ABSTRACT Elk banding operations conducted in Rocky Mountain National Park from the winter of 1962-63 through 1965-66 have resulted in 196 banded elk in the field including the subtraction of animals which were known either to have been harvested by hunters, died of natural causes, or lost their bands. A significant percentag'2 (31.4 percent) of the reported observations of banded elk were from locations outside Rocky Mountain National Park, with the majority being seen on the west side of the Park. The migration of elk to summer ranges apparently began at a later date in 1966 than in previous years. As late as May 15, up to 300 elk were still being counted in areas of winter concentrations. Periodic checks of summer ranges and spring migration routes indicated that elk were only just arriving on summer ranges by May 31 even though snow accumulation on summer ranges was abnormally low this year. �- 220 - Objectives: 1. Determine the normal seasonal movements of the sub-units of the elk herd, and the general migration routes. 2. Determine the movements of individual elk between herds and drainages. 3. Determine the correlation, if any, between meterological and phenological phenomena with individual and herd behavior. Procedures: 1. Through field and aerial observation of herd units on seasonal ranges determine the distances and direction of movements from the previous observations made duringbi-weekly fixed-wing airplane flights. 2. Construct and operate cooperatively with the Park and Forest Service two or more group live traps to neckband as many elk as possible on as many different trapsites as feasible on winter concentration areas in Rocky Mountain National Park and adjoining National Forests. Different colored collars will be used at the various trapsites so that the movement and integration of herd sub-units can be ascertained, based on observations by field personnel in the area, and on aerial observations. Each collared elk also will be eartagged with a tag in each ear, serially numbered, so as to be able to identify them when recovered through harvesting or other means if they should have lost their neckband. B. Weather station data at the Rocky Mountain National Park headquarters and other established stations will be compared with observed herd behavior and coincidental phenological observations, as to the time and rate of development of plants in relation to snow recession and temperatures to see if correlations exist between these various factors. �- 221 - Elk Seasonal Movements R. Bruce Gill Trappins and Bandins As of April 1, 1965 there were 185 neckbanded elk presumed to be in the field as the result of trapping and banding efforts in Rocky Mountain National Park through the period 1962-1965. Eighty of these 185 banded elk had white bands, 43 had lime-green bands, 50 had blue bands, and 12 had orange bands. The white bands were used at the Moraine Park group live trap in the winter of 1962-63, the lime-green bands in 1963-64, and the blue bands in 1964-65. The orange bands were used at the Horseshoe Park group live trap in the winters of 1963-64 and 1964-65. During the period April 1, 1965 through March 31, 1966 an additional eight banded elk were removed as a result of hunter harvest, loss of neck bands, or natural mortality. Three of these were white banded elk, two were lime-green banded elk, two were blue banded elk, and one was an orange banded elk. During the 1965-66 winter trapping period 19 elk were neckbanded, bringing the total of 196 banded elk in the field as of March 31, 1966. Eight of these 19 were banded with orange collars and 11 were banded with white collars with a green center stripe. Table 1 shows the sex and age of elk banded during the 1965-66 t r-app i.ng period. No banding was done in Middle Park this past winter (1965-66) as had been done the previous year since snow accumulation was not sufficient to concentrate elk on normal winter range areas. Band Observations The intensive trapping and banding program in Rocky Mountain National Park has resulted in a re-evaluation of the extent to which elk move to areas outside of Rocky Mountain National Park. In 1963, 27 of 66 total reported observations of banded elk (40.9 percent) were seen outside the Park boundaries. Five of these were harvested by hunters, three of which were taken in the 1963 January preseason. About one-half of these elk were reported from areas east of the eastern boundary of the Park, and the other one-half were seen west of the western Park boundary. The maximum distance any banded elk was observed to have traveled from the trapsite was 30.0 airline miles (Guse, 1965). In 1964 five of 39 total reported observations (12.8 percent) were observed outside the Park boundaries. Three of these were banded elk harvested during the 1964 big game hunting season. The maximum observed dispersal from trapsite areas was 20.0 airline miles (Fig. 1). In 1965, 21 of 67 total reported observations of banded elk (31.3 percent) were observed outside of the Park boundaries (Fig. 2). Seven of these were harvested during the 1965 big game season and all we re taken from areas west or north of Rocky Mountain National Park (Fig. 3). During the three year periods, 1963-1965, 31.4 percent of all reported observations of banded elk have been from areas outside the Park boundaries. By far the majority of all reports received have come during the summer-fall periods and from areas west of the western Park boundary. �- 222 Table 1.--Sex and age of elk trapped in Rocky Mountain National Park, 1965-66. Ear Tag No. Ri/iiht Left Strap Round 517 517 No. 1 Trae Site Moraine Park Neckband Color Orange 2 Moraine Park Orange Strap 518 3 Moraine Park White/green center stripe 4 Moraine Park 5 Sex F A~e 2!z Date 1/17/66 Round 518 F calf 1/17/66 Round 519 Strap 519 F Mat. 2/2/66 I White/green center stripe Round 520 Strap 520 F 1~ 2/2/66 Moraine Park White/ green center stripe Round 521 Strap 521 M 1!z 2/2/66 6 Moraine Park White/ green center stripe Round 522 Strap 522 F Mat. 2/2/66 7 Moraine Park White /green center stripe Round 523 Strap 523 F 1!z 2/2/66 8 Moraine Park White/green center stripe Round 524 Strap 524 F Mat. 2/2/66 9 Moraine Park White/green center stripe Round 525 Strap 525 F Mat. 2/2/66 10 Moraine Park White/ green center stripe Round 528 Strap 528 F Mat. 2/2/66 11 Moraine Park White/green center stripe Round 529 Strap 529 M calf 2/2/66 12 Horseshoe Park None Round 101 Strap 101 M 5-6 1/14/66 13 Horseshoe Park Orange Strap 102 Round 102 F Mat. 1/18/66 14 Horseshoe Park None Round 103 Strap 103 M 2~ 2/2/66 15 Horseshoe Park Orange Round 104 Strap 104 M 2~ 2/3/66 16 Horseshoe Park Orange Round 106 Strap 106 M 1~ 2/24/66 17 Horseshoe Park Orange Round 107 Strap 107 M 2!z 3/1/66 �~ .t HORSESHOE PARK TRAPSITE o NORAINE PARK TRAP SITE • 11 • ELK BANDED AT MORAINE PARK TRAPSITE ELK BANDED AT HORSESHOE PARK TRAPSITE HUl'J'TER KILL OF ROCKY M.oUNTAIN PARK BANDED ELK, 1964 N 1 • (1/64) rbro Figure 1•. DISTRIBUTION OF ROCKY MOUNTAIN NATIONAL PARK BANDED ELK, SlWJfJERAND FALL - 1964 W �~ o • • A HORSESHOE TRAPSITE MORAINE PARK TRAP SITE ELK BANDED AT MORAINE PARK TRAP SITE ELK BANDED AT HORSESHOE PARK TRAPSITE ELK BANDED IN MIDDLE PARK FROl"l HELIC.OPTER N I\> I\> oj:""" Figure 2. TRIBUTION OF ROCKY MOUNTAI NATIONAL PARK BANDED ELK, SUIVJ;lERAND FALL - 1965 �N \ • HS , "' ! \. H~~ HK \. ! /' . ROCKY NOUNTAIN NATIONAL PARK _ HK HS .....-. r: \.". + \.. t . CO.NTINENTAL"))~·~. '\ H~' ._~/ HK;,. ""\...mC::; HS'/ .,;f,JO H~' ", ---- _ ~1-::::::::::=':: '. I i~~~s ,BJ I/! \ HK~' , HS HM~S H~lt i' ~-..- .~) I\) I\) \Jl . .1 ( ItS~HK.. Ittl « "'\ I '. • KRFJvlHLING HOT SULPHUR SPRINGS ~I-:; .. LEGEND :i , "Ii, HUNTER KILL OF BANDED ELK 7lUNTER SIGHTING OF BANDED ELK . o HELICOPTER BANDING SITE, ~NTELOPE SPRINGS . Figure J. Rocky Mountain Cooperative Elk Study, hunter kills and neckband sightings reported during the 1965 hunting season. ~ HELICOPTER BAN~ING SITE, HOT SULPHUR SPRINGS o GRANBY HELICCFTERBANDING SITE, <t �- 226 Table l.--Sex and age of elk trapped in Rocky Mountain continued. Ear Tag No. Right Left No. Trag Site 18 Horseshoe Park Orange Round 108 Horseshoe Park Orange Round 109 19 Neckband Color National Park, 1965-66, Sex Age Date Round 108 F calf 3/8/66 Round 109 M l~ 3/10/66 Movements of Park elk out to the east of the Park do occur but probably are not significant except during winters of heavier than normal snowfall. For example on March 23, 1966 four areas to the east of the Park were covered rather intensively with a helicopter including: (1) Crosier Mountain, (2) Storm Mountain, (3) Cedar Park, (4) Big Elk Park. One hundred seventy three elk were observed in these areas including only one Park banded elk observed in Big Elk Park. The winter of 1965-66 was very mild and, presumably, most of the Park herd wintered within the Park boundaries. Migration to Summer Ranges Apparently the migration from winter to summer ranges was initiated quite late this year as compared to previous years. Guse (1965) stated that these migrations normally begin in mid-April and continue through May. However, as late as May 9, 1966 park visitors were reporting up to 300 elk still present in Horseshoe Park and Beaver Meadows. A series of meadow counts were conducted during the period May 17-19, 1966 to ascertain the numbers of elk still on winter range areas. On May 17, 158 elk were seen in Beaver Meadows and Horseshoe Park, 69 of which were bulls (43.7 percent). On May 18, 116 elk were observed in Hallowell Park, Beaver Meadows, and Horseshoe Park, 39 of which were bulls (33.6 percent). On May 19, 136 elk were seen and 62 were bulls (45.7 percent). It appeared that during this period the migration of elk back up to the summer range areas had only just begun, and most of those elk already migrating were cows and yearlings. Checks of the tundra areas at this time revealed little fresh elk sign and no elk. An aerial flight conducted on March 31, 1966 revealed only 27 elk in areas considered to be summer range area while the remaining 69 elk were observed in areas intermediate between summer and winter ranges and were assumed to be in the process of returning to summer ranges. Recommendations Aerial coverage of the Park and surrounding areas should be intensified so that a more accurate estimate can be obtained of the numbers of Park banded elk utilizing areas outside the Park boundaries. Attempts should be made to fly these areas at least once each month. Prepared Date: by: R. Bruce Gill Wildlife Researcher Candidate ~J~u~l~y~,~1~9~6~6 _ Approved bY:__~R~i~c~h~a~r~d~N~.~D7e~n~n~eY4_ Project Leader Ferd Kleinschnitz Fed. Aid Coordinator �July, 1966 - 227 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO --------~~~~--------- Project No. W-38-R-20 Work Plan No. 11 Deer-Elk Investigations Job No. 5 Title of Job: Elk Population Components, Rocky Mountain National Park Period Covered: April 1, 1965 through March 31, 1966. Personnel: Richard N. Denney, Edmund Bucknall, Walter Schuett and R. Bruce Gill ABSTRACT Fall (pre-season) and ,vinter (post-season) classifications were conducted in Rocky Mountain National Park during the period April 1, 1965 - March 31, 1966. Pre-season counts conducted in late August yielded ratios of 33 calves per 100 cows and 62 bulls per 100 cows (bull figure includes spikes). Post-season counts conducted in March revealed ratios of 35 calves per 100 cows and 19 bulls per 100 cows and included winter range areas both within and without the Park boundaries. These figures are comparable to ratios recorded from Yellowstone National Park prior to the intensive reduction program of the Northern Yellowstone herd in the winter of 1961-62, indicating that perhaps the Rocky Mountain National Park herd is in excess of the carrying capacities of available winter ranges. �- 228 - Objectives: 1. Determine the sex-ratio of the elk in this herd. 2. Determine the cow-calf ratio of the elk in this herd. 3. Determine the age class structure of this elk herd. Procedures: Through field, fixed-wing airplane, and helicopter counts ascertain the ratio of: 1. Bulls to cows using one observer so as to mlnlmlze the variations inherent in different observers. Enumerate the actual numbers of bulls seen and adult cows observed to base calculations for determining the number of cows per bull, and the number of bulls per 100 cows. It is anticipated that this number will vary considerably amongst tbe three types of possible herd populations found in the study area, that is: (a) sub-units of the herd which are never outside the boundaries of the Park at any time of the year, (b) sub-units of the herd which live almost entirely out of the Park at all times of the year, and (c) sub-units of the herd which may spend part of the year within the Park, and be outside during the winter, or possibly during part of the hunting season. 2. Calves to cows, using one observer so as to have comparable counts from year to year and area to area. Realizing that this will include some yearling heifers and some dry cows, it nevertheless will indicate the calf production potential of the herd. Calves per 100 cows will be calculated, and then the annual productivity of the herd can be projected. 3. Mature bulls to yearling bulls, again with one observer so as to have standardized counts. From check station data we have found that yearling bulls range from s:pikes to sometimes f011.ror five points, but the antler form is not the typical-tined formation of the older bulls, nor is it as heavily beamed. This ratio will :provide a clue as to the survival from calfhood to tae .succeeding age-classes. Data from animals taken during control iluarvesting and s'pecial season hunts as to sex and age classes !i:ll tt::he harvest will fbeanalyzed in addition. �- 229 - Population R. Components Bruce Gill Discussion During the last of August, Mr. Neal Guse, Park Biologist, conducted seven helicopter flights over Rocky Mountain National Park in order to determine the sex and age composition of the Park herd. He counted and classified 403 elk during these flights of which 31.8 percent (128) were bulls, 51.1 percent (206) were cows (including long yearlings) and 17.7 percent were calves. The resulting ratios of bulls per 100 cows and calves per 100 cows were 62:100 and 33:100, respectively (Table 1). Table l.--Summary of fall (pre-season) classification Mountain National Park, August, 1965. Cows counts of elk, Rocky Calves Bulls Total Numbers Counted 206 69 128 403 Percent of Total 51.1% 17.1% 31.8% 100.0% 100:100 33:100 62:100 Ratios In comparison the pre-season classification counts from the White River herd for the period 1957-64 average 65 calves per 100 cows and 46 bulls (including spikes) per 100 cows , and those of the Rio Grande herd for the period 1961-64 average 58 calves per 100 cows and 38 bulls per 100 cows (Boyd, 1965). Three classification counts of the Park herd were conducted in March, 1966. The first was conducted on March 16, 1966 at which time 97 elk were classified from a four-wheel drive vehicle. The resulting ratios were: 40 calves per 100 cows and 36 bulls per 100 cows (Table 2). The second classification, conducted on March 20, 1966 from the ground, revealed: 72 calves per 100 cows and 48 bulls per 100 cows but only 55 elk were classified on this occasion and undoubtedly respresents a poor sample of the entire Park herd (Table 2). The third classification was conducted on March 23, and was done from a helicopter. Areas of known winter range both inside the Park boundaries and to the east of the eastern Park boundary were searched. The ratios of the 157 elk classified within the Park were: 37 calves per 100 cows and 29 bulls per 100 cows. The ratios of the 107 classified outside the Park were: 32 calves per 100 cows and 6 bulls per 100 cows (Table 3). The ratios of the combined totals of both areas were: 35 calves per 100 cows and 19 bulls per 100 cows. As a means of comparison, the winter classification ratios for the White River herd during the period 1957-64 were: 79 calves per 100 cows and 18 bulls per 100 cows. Classification counts of the Rio Grande herd for the winters of 1961-64 were: 55 calves per 100 cows and 20 bulls per 100 cows. �- 230 Table 2.--Summary of ground winter classification counts of the Rocky Mountain National Park elk herd, March, 1966. Cows Calves Bulls Total Numbers Counted Percent of Total Ratios per 100 Cows March 162 1966 55 56.7% 100 22 22.7% 40 20 20.6% 36 97 100.0% Numbers Counted Percent of Total Ratios per 100 Cows March 202 1966 25 45.4% 100 18 32.7% 72 12 21.8% 48 55 100.0% Table 3.--Summary of aerial winter classification counts of the Rocky Mountain National Park elk herd, March, 1966. Numbers Counted Percent of Total Ratios per 100 Cows Calves Cows Inside Park Boundaries 35 94 22.3% 59.9% 37 100 Bulls Total 28 16.8% 29 157 100.0% Numbers Counted Percent of Total Ratios per 100 Cows East of Park 77 72.0% 100 25 23.3% 32 5 4.7% 6 Numbers Counted Percent of Total Ratios per 100 Cows Combined Totals 171 64.8% 100 60 27.7% 35 33 12.5% 19 264 100.0% These data indicate that the calf production and/or survival of the Park herd is considerably below that of both the White River and the Rio Grande elk herds. One major reason for this depressed calf to cow ratio could be an over-populated herd. Evidence in support of this premise can be found in the records of the Northern Yellowstone Park herd. Prior to the large reduction of 1961-62 the ratio of calves per 100 cows was as low as 23:100 in 1957. This herd was suspected of being nearly twice as large as winter range areas could support. Consequently in the winter of 1961-62 the herd was reduced by nearly one-half, to a level very near to the estimated carrying capacity of approximately 5,000 elk. Subsequent classification counts revealed an almost immediate increase in calf production. In the winter of 1962-63 the ratio was 42 calves per 100 cows and in the winter of 1963-64 it had increased to 49 calves per 100 cows (Ellis~ 1965). �- 231 The ratio of 35 calves per 100 cows in the Rocky Mountain National Park herd could be an indication that optimum conditions for elk production and survival probably do not now exist in this area. Part of the problem most likely stems from overused winter ranges and in some vicinities where there are large concentrations of elk on specific summer ranges these, too, may be in an abused condition. Recommendations Better samples of the true ratios of calves and bulls per 100 cows in the population of Rocky Mountain National Park elk are needed. It is recommended that a larger sample of the total herd should be classified to give more reliable figures. This will necessitate the allocation of increased helicopter flight time and possibly the use of aerial photography techniques to increase the proportion of animals classified to the total herd size. Prepared Date: by: R. Bruce Gill Wildlife Researcher Candidate ~J~u~lLy4,_1~9~6~6~> _ Approved by:__~R~i~c~h~a~r~d~N~o~D~e~n~n~e4Y _ Project Leader Ferd Kleinschnitz Fed Aid Coordinator 9 �July, 1966 - 233 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO --------~~~~------- Project No: W-38-R-20' Work Plan No. 11 Deer-Elk Investigations Job No. Title of Job: Management Recommendations Period Covered: April 1, 1965 to Much Personnel: 6 31, 1966. Richard N. Denney This job is dependent upon the results of the previous jobs (Work Plan 11) and therefore should be in the final segment. This is the reason the job has been deleted from the current segment. Richard N. Denney ��July, 1966 - 235 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT COLORADO state of Deer-E~k Investigations Project No. Work Plan No. 1m Job No. 1 Title of Job: Historical and Research Background, Rio Grande Elk Period Covered: April 1, 1965 through ~~rch 31, 1966 Personnel: Raymond J. Boyd and David F. Gordon. Bob Pizel and Ron Schulz of the Rio Grande National Forest made files available for background information on livestock numbers and annual game reports by the District Rangers from 1910 until 1937· ABSTRACT Before the period of exploration and during the early efforts at settlement, the elk were common and free to roam over the entire Rio Grande drainage. But nan altered this, by taking up the valleys for farms and by unregulated and persistent hunting, reduced the herds, and caused the survivors to retreat to the protection of the higher rougher mountains. Mining expansion brought thousands of people to the mountain areas, so during the heyday of Creede there was hardly a part of the Rio Grande area that was not subjected to scrutiny by prospectors or promotors. Associated with this was the market hunter who was unhindered by game laws and was encouraged by a belief that there was an inexhaustible supply of game for all. By the time the rush of development had "diminished and the people of the State had more time to inventory the wildlife, some species had been nearly exterminated. Thus even as late as 1907 there was good reason to suspect the eventual extermination of the elk in the Rio Grande drainage. The once numerous elk of the San Luis Valley were deprived of their good ranges as the land was taken up for settlement. Most of the elk were killed, but small groups retreated to the upper reaches of Saguache Creek and the Rio Grande drainage proper. The Rio Grande herd proper, fow1d asylum in the Goose Creek area to the south of Wagon Wheel Gap. Estimated at less than 100 in 1907, the elk have made a steady comeback and for the Rio Grande Forest the estimate in 1945 was about 1,400 animals. �- 236 - Recomrnendations:lncorporate Rio Grande Elk Study. this report into the final report on. the complete Objectives: A better understanding of current conditions within the proposed Rio Grande elk study area can be attained when factors leading up to those conditions are known. Therefore the objectives of this job will be: (1) Search out the historical background data on the elk and their ranges in the Rio Grande area, namely, Game Management Unit 76, 79 and 80 (also known as validation area "R", "R-2" and "R-l"). (2) Search out the research and management background data from work done on the elk and their ranges by the U. S. Forest Service, Bureau of Land Management, Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department and other agencies and persons. Procedures: (1) The historical background data on the elk and their ranges in the Rio Grande area will be obtained wherever possible from existant Forest Service files on livestock allotment work and game population estimates that are required by the representative services, from interviews of long-time residents of the area, old newspapers, journals and books concerning the early exploration and development of the area. (2) Hunter kill records, seasons, bag limits, etc., will be determined from a search of the records of the Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department, both the Management Division and the Federal Aid research records. The U. S. Forest Service has in the past, coincidentally with their regular work, and as a part of the biological inventory of the animals, plants, etc., of the Rio Grande Forest, taken various measurements and observations during their administration of the forest area, and these facts and figures can be compared with present conditions as they pertain to the elk. �- 237 - Historical and Research Background Rio Grande Elk Raymond J. Boyd The first written records concerning the presence of elk in the Rio Grande River drainage were in 1803 when it was reported that there were "••.thousands of antelope and some buffalo in the San Luis Valley, while deer and elk were plentiful in the nearby mountains. If The mountain man Bill Williams, was called "Lone Elk" by the ute Indians of the San Luis Valley, and according to their legends, he was supposed to return to life after death as an elk bull. Williams guided the Fremont expedition into the San Luis Valley during the winter of 1848-1849, where the party was almost completely wiped out by the severe winter weather (this was in the vicinity of the present town of Creede). One of the members of the expedition, Richard J. Kern, kept a complete diary, some of the entries of which follow: Saturday, December 9, 1848 "..•plenty of elk signs" Sunday, December 10, 1949 "•.•Godeyand five others went out after elk brought in two •.." Monday, December 25, 1848 "Had elk stew and pies ..." Tuesday, January ly, 1849 ".•.near the old elk camp" Mr. Henry M. Bennett, a Cornishman, was hired by General Palmer, when he built the Rio Grande railroad into Colorado, as a meat hunter for the tie crews. Bennett hunted elk in Blue Park around Wagon Wheel Gap in 1871 and he reported that elk were plentiful in this area. After the gold strike at Creede in 1889 a Mr. A. H. Major had a store located at Crestone where he sold elk meat to travelers and miners. Miners evidently accounted for their fair share of the big game killed in the Rio Grande area during the latter portions of the 1800's as one report from 1891 mentions that" ...killed one elk while hunting near the mines." (This was in Saguache Park). In 1904 a rancher, Emmett Dabney, came into the Clear Creek area with a cattle d.rive. He homesteaded shortly thereafter in this area and he mentions that very few if any elk were seen in his area, but that a few could be seen down by South Fork. At about this time the Federal Government was setting up the National Forest system and included in the various National Forest areas was the area that is now known as the Rio Grande National Forest. This area was officially set up on July 1, 1908, by proclamation of President ~~eodore Roosevelt. The area, as originally set up, included portions of the present San Juan and Gunnison National Forests. As an indication of factors that might have affected elk numbers, movements, starvation losses and range conditions j.twould. be well to examine, briefly, the history and trend of numbers of permitted livestock on the Forest area that are frequented by the elk at the present time. �- 238 - Livestock of all types have been permitted to graze on the Forest from 1910 to the present time. The general trend in permitted livestock numbers has been down, with the peak year for cattle and horse numbers being 1919, while the peak year for sheep and goats was 1918. The approximate number of cattle and horses on the Forest in 1910 was 13,000 while in 1941 there were approximately 12,200. Sheep and goats on the Forest in 1910 numbered approximately 164,000 while in 1941 there were about 116,000. Permitted livestock use on the Forest since 1941 has varied from a low of 12,200 cattle and horses in 1941 and 1942 to a high of 16,700 in 1946 and 16,000 head in 1964. In 1964, the permitted use was 16,000 cattle and horses, but only 15,900 actually grazed on the Forest. Sheep and goat numbers varied from 119,100 in 1942 to a high of 132,400 in 1943 and down to a low of 46,900 in 1964. While the permitted use for sheep and goats in 1964 was 46,900 head, actually only 46,000 animals grazed upon the Forest. Reductions in the numbers of livestock using the Forest in the past twenty years has been in the form of a shorter grazing season rather than an actual reduction in numbers of animals grazing on the Forest. Information on game, principally by the State Fish Commissioner. elk, is noticeably lacking in early reports A report by Gordon Land, Fish Commissioner, in 1895 mentions, "I would favor an absolute prohibition against the dealing in or traffic in game hides, tanned or untanned ..." "In event of our State passing a protective law on elk or deer for a term of years, as our neighboring state of Utah has done, it will be interesting to know how the alleged Indian rights are regarded." Later in the report this statement is made: "Indians and skin hunters and those who still persist in killing for the profits which the market affords, continue to create a demand for game law enforcement. The methods of game destruction now employed by the Indians are such as to result in the entire extermination of our deer and elk in a very few years if they are permitted to pursue them." In 1897, J. S. Swan, State Fish Commissioner stated: "The protected large game of Colorado is composed principally of elk, deer, antelope and mountain sheep ... The principal range of the most numerous species of game, protected and otherwise, is to be found throughout that part of the state principally lying west of the main range dividing the Atlantic from the Pacific slope. The most highly prized game that falls victim to tte rifle of the hunter ... if we except the grizzly bear, is the elk." In 1901 Commissioner Charles W. Harris stated that "Elk are not holding own. Favor a closed season for at least five years." their Commissioner John M. Woodward in 1903 stated that "Elk are NOT increasing. They are disappearing and never can increase, so long as an order known as the 'Elks' Lodge' is paying a premium for the destruction of these animals, by offering a price for their teeth. Hundreds of elk are killed in Colorado and Wyoming just for their teeth." It was at this time, 1903, that the hunting of elk in the entire state of Colorado was stopped, not to be legal again until 1930. �- 239 - The first hunting licenses were also established this same year, 1903, and cost a resident $1.00 for a year and $25.00 for a non-resident year-long hunting license. By 1907 the elk on the Rio Grande River were estimated at less than 100 head and had found asylum in the Goose Creek area south of Wagon Wheel Gap. Starting in 1910, the Forest Supervisor on the Rio Grande began requiring an Annual Game Report; the following information is taken from these reports: Letter dated October 5, 1910, to W. J. Morril, Supervisor, from F. E. Joy: " .•• the game in this particular section (Creede) is rather scarce, not because of its being slaughtered out of season, but that there is more or less people always in the hills closeby all of the summer months, game has naturally hunted more secluded areas on which to feed. "Probably the most abundant game found in this locality is grouse, 1 have noticed 10 coveys between Fir and Shallow Creeks, 3 coveys between Shallow and Miners Creek, 2 coveys at the head of East Willow, and 2 coveys at the head of Dry Gulch. "Deer follow next, having seen 8 between Fir and Shallow Creeks," 6 between Rat and Miners Creeks, and 4 at head of Dry Gulch, and two between East and West Willow Creeks." "There is a few Mountain Sheep on Bristol Head Mountain, Mr. Larson, Geologist, U. S. Geological Survey having counted 14 at the head of Boulder Creek in the latter part of June. There is also a few ptarmigan on Bristol Plateau, Mr. Bowers and 1 having noticed 9 October first ••• " Letter dated October 20, 1910, to Mr. Morrill from George C. Widman: "... 1 have not got much of a variety of game a few Deer and a few Elk few Mountain Sheep .••Elk use the Heigh range in the summer time. The highest portions of Twp. 38 2E and Twps. 39 & 40 2E (head of Goose and Leopar? Creeks). Winter range the lower portions of these Twps." (Elk Creek area) Letter dated October 13, 1910, to Mr. Morrill from Rod S. Day: " •.. 1 find sign of few deer scattered over this entire district but they are most plentiful on Soda Creeks, Pierce Creek, Caldwell Creek and McKinney Gulch both summer and winter. During the summer months there are a few elk at the heads of Soda and Leopard Creeks, but they range mostly on Elk Creek in Dis tric t 11." These letters were evidently incorporated into the First Annual Game Report for the Rio Grande National Forest, but no copy of the report as such could be located. The Second Annual Game Report, 1911, states, in part: "During 1909, 63 head of elk were counted on the area •••and during 1910, 80 head we r e actually counted. During the summer they have a large area over which they range, oftentimes drifting across the Continental Divide and down into the San Juan Forest. In the report of last winter mention was made of the possibility of pur ch as'Lng the Haney ranch as a winter feeding point for these elk." �- 2~"O - Rio Grande National Forest Game Report~ November 27, 1912: Ii •••it is apparent that the Rio Grande Forest cannot be classified as a game country. The only two species of big game which abound, to any extent, are the elk and several different kinds of bear." In a November, 1912, report, Forest personnel reported on a trip of investigation that was made into the elk country in April, on the north side of Soda Creek and Elk Creek. There were 108 elk counted on this trip. The next day, ranchers in the area reported an additional 90 head on Roaring Fork Creek, and it was decided that these could not be elk that had been counted the day before, so that they estimated that there were at least 200 elk in the area. The report goes on to state: "Fifteen or twenty years head of elk left in this sary that a part of this it would be unreasonable ago, old-timers state that there were but 15 or 20 vicinity. If there are now 200 head it is necesnumber came from other parts of the country since to expect such an increase in this period. "It is thought that probably a bunch which one time used the Johnson's Fork of the Vallecito on the Durango Forest, have drifted over and mingled with the original bunch on Elk Creek. It is also possible that some Df those from even farther west have become mingled with the Elk Creek bunch during past summers and followed them into winter quarters. It is known that during the past summer elk from this winter range drifted to the head of Pine River where two were seen; on the head of Ute Creek where three or four were seen; to the Conejos River near Platoro where one was seen; to the head of Raton Park where there were two seen, and it is reported that there were about 15 or 18 head seen on the Cochetopa Forest. This is a wider distribution than has ever been known by any of the local residents, and it is questionable whether or not all of them will return to the Soda and Elk Creek ranges for the winter. It is reported that in one band seen on Decker Creek during the past summer, there were 22 calves. This report is not authentic although it is quite reliable •••lt is believed that the vitality of the entire band and the ratio of increase will be materially advanced if a carload of young bulls could be shipped in from Wyoming and put with this bunch." Annual Game Report, October 27, 1913: "An estimate of the numbers of game animals on the Forest at the present time is 285 elk, 125 Mountain Sheep and 550 deer. There has been no importation of elk made into this Forest, either inter-forest or interstate, unless, as suggested in the report for 1912, some from the Durange Forest may have mingled with those from this forest during the summer and followed the"Rio Grande elk to their winter quarters. I think it would assist materially in building up a strong grade of stock to have at least one, or, if possible, two carloads of bulls shipped in from the Wyoming ranges and unloaded at Phillips Spur, from which point they could be drifted up Elk Creek and turned on to the winter range in the early spring before the others have left 'for the summer ranges." During the search of the literature for material to complete this historical background of the Rio Grande elk herd, we learned that Mr. Marshall Darley, U. S. Forest Service, Ret. was still living in Hon t e Vista, Colorado. Mr. Darley was District Ranger in the upper Rio Grande area from 1912 to 1914 and again from 1920 until his retirement. We were able to interview Mr. Darley and found that his memory was excellent in spite of his advanced age. Much useable, interesting information was gained from several conversations with him. �- 241 - In 1913, Mr. Darley saw six elk between Park and Beaver Creeks just south of Grouse Mountain; no one would believe his story when he reported seeing the elk. He mentioned that there was one bull in the herd and that it died the next winter. In the Annual Game Report for 1914 the estimated number of game animals on the Forest was 325 elk, 70 Mountain Sheep, 825 deer and 650 beaver. Returning again to the memories of Marshall Darley, " •••In 1914 I bet Sweitzer (Forest Supervisor) 5 pounds of candy against a quart of whisky that I could show him some elk in the forest around Archuleta Lake. I took him to the divide (above the lake??) and saw nine elk, two bulls in the bunch were 'sparring' (this was in spring).1t The same year he reported seeing one bull and four cows on Trout Creek. He was transferred out of the Rio Grande Forest ferred back in 1920. about this time and was trans- The Annual Game Report for 1915 dated November 24 states in part: " ...During the past winter it appeared for a time that it would be necessary, on account of the extremely severe weather conditions and deep snows, to feed the elk. An attempt was made to entice them to feed yards in Elk Park by scattering hay along trails which had been broken through the snow with horses. The elk followed these trails almost to the feed yards and ate the hay scattered along the trails but when they came to the open park surrounding the yards it appeared that they were too timid to venture farther. The storm was so severe and the snow so deep that for a short time quite a number of these animals were forced to bottomlands along the river and upon two or three occasions were so numerous along the D & R G Railroad that it was necessary to stop the train until they got away ...They were in poor condition, however, when spring arrived and the loss of one through starvation was reported. As these animals increase it will perhaps be necessary at some future time for the Government to provide winter feed for them other than the natural growth of forage on the range." Annual Game Report, November 24, 1917: "The numerous antlers found allover the Forest and piled up at ranch houses is evidence that this animal (elk) used most every portion of the Forest, and it is said by old-timers that they were fairly abundant during the early settlement of the country. Soon after the Forest was established, or in 1906, only one herd of 12 or 15 of these animals was found. They had migrated to other parts or had been exterminated. This herd was found on Goose Creek in the vicinity of Wagon Wheel Gap. It is now estimated that the increase from this herd will now number 350 head. During this season signs of elk were seen as far west as Ute Creek and two bands wintered north of the Rio Grande River south and east of Blue Creek Park." Annual Game Report, December 7, 1918: "The principal range of the larger bands is along the Western drainage of the South Fork and the entire drainage of Goose Creek. However, there are a few scattering bands found during the summer as far west as the head of Ute Creek and as far south along the Continental Divide as Summitt Peak �- 242 - near the headwaters of the East Fork of the San Juan. A few were also found during the sunnner period this year on the north side of the Rio Grande on the Alder watershed where they remained during the entire season. They also crossed the Continental Divide south into the San Juan Forest and were found as far south as the ranches on the West Fork of the San Juan. During the winter they practically all return to a small region south of the Rio ' Grande between Wagon Wheel Gap and South Fork." Annual Game Report, November 17, 1919: "Only one band of elk could be located at this time and they were ranging on the Elk Creek and Soda Creek watersheds in the vicinity of Wagon Wheel Gap •.•and it is now estimated that there are about 400 of these animals. "Two areas have been closed from the grazing of domestic stock for several years for the prqtection of elk, one being their winter range which comprises the watersheds of Elk Creek and Soda Creek on Elk Mountain and covers an area of about 4,000 acres. The other is their summer range, being located at the head of Goose Creek and covers an area of about 5,000 acres." Annual Game Report, November 11, 1920: "The gradual drift of elk westward along the Continental Divide Trail from Trout Creek toward the head of the Rio Grande seems to be continuing as elk were reported seen on the Ute Creek watershed this year.H Returning again to the reminices of Marshall Darley, in 1920 he remembers seeing 7-11 head of elk on the Lake Fork of the Conejos. One bull was killed that fall, but no one saw the man bring it out. The next spring Mr. Darley was on a trip into the same area and found where the man had to cut some trees to get the animal out. On the point where the two branches of the Conejos join he reported seeing many elk tracks. Annual Game Report, 1922: "In the spring of 1922 an attempt was made by the residents of Antonito, Colorado, to transplant about 25 head of elk to the Conejos River territory from the band on the Rio Grande River. The band on the Rio Grande River should be reduced and the Conejos country is ideal. No success due to lack of cooperation on the part of the State. The request will be renewed during 1923 and the undertaking is a laudable one." Annual Game Report, November 28, 1923: "During the past a transplant of elk from the Rio Grande watershed to the Conejos River was recommended. Further consideration of this action warrants withdrawal of the recommendations. When one gives due consideration to the apparent growth of Elk in the original herd, the necessity for enlarging their refuge on two occasions and the general principal of maintaining but a proper balance between game and domestic stock, the idea of creating new nuclei is questionable. "The present herd is more than sufficient for the maintenance of Elk life on the Forest and there is danger of growing more than we can properly handle. "Should the Goose Creek Game Refuge Bill be passed, the area thus included is sufficient for all purposes of protection. Complete migration from the �- 243 - Refuge is not likely to take place and the time will soon come when open seasons outside of the Refuge will be necessary to hold the herd down to the capacity of the Refuge with other game considered as well as restricted domestic stock under present policies." Annual Game Report, December The report for this year contained interest to this narration: Table Year 1920 1921 1922 1923 1924 24, 1924: only the following table that would be of 1. --Cumulative Census of Game Animals Killed by Man on the Rio Grande National Forestz Colorado. Number of Black Brown Hunters Bear Deer Elk Bear 6 75 2 77 8 1 11 134 2 2 8 89 9 20 1 1.42 2 Annual Game Report, November 2, 1925 (Creede District): "It is quite generally believed both deer and elk are increasing for the following reasons; an average of only five deer are being killed by hunters during the open season, and the Biological Survey have exterminated a large number of predatory animals during the past few years. Winter conditions have been unusually favorable for the past four years, and very few violations of the game laws. It is believed elk are increasing much more rapidly of late years due possibly to the fact that they are not so congested on one range. They are now found on almost every part of the district." Annual Game Report, November, 1926: South Fork Ranger District .:.. "Would also recommend that a closed season (for deer) for a five-year period be brought about as there are not many left and if protected they would become more tame and it would be possible to see one once in a while." Alder Ranger District - "Very few elk have been seen on the Alder District the past season. A band of bulls and cows were seen on October 16 by the trail crew and on October 20 I saw two bulls on Ea~t Alder Creek. Sign has been seen in all parts of the District, but the game itself is quite shy. A number of Elk winter in the vicinity of the Alder Ranger Station and also on Bear Creek. No loss has been observed, none reported." Annual Game Report, October, 1927: Alder District - "Numerous elk have been seen the past season on the Alder District. The latter part of July a band of 11 cows and bulls and 4 calves were seen in the park west of Divide Park, near the head of Difficult Creek. During the summer elk have been seen quite often. In the spring and early summer, elk were seen nearly every day in the vicinity of the Ranger Station pasture. No losses have been reported or seen, the past season." �- 244 - Annual Game Report, October, 1928: Pyramid District - "It will be noted that the estimated number of elk on the Pyramid District has been increased by 40 head. These animals ~ere scattered this season from the Eastern boundary of the District to Bear Creek, in one week in August, 51 head were seen by me between Big Squaw Creek and Red Mountain Creek. It was noted that in the elk seen that both bulls and calves were numerous. This would indicate that the elk are surely on the increase." Annual Game Report, October, 1929: South Fork Ranger District - "Elk appear to be numerous on this District as tracks and other signs are found in all parts. During the summer I saw one small elk on the Lake Fork Basin trail and three large elk on Metroz Mountain. This fall I heard a number of them bugling especially in the vicinity of Trout Creek." Annual Game Report, October, 1930: South Fork District - "Elk are quite plentiful on the South Fork District Last spring a rancher saw at least 20 in one band on Park Creek." Annual Game Report, November, 1934: . Creede District - "Elk are increasing right along and gradually using more territory, five years ago there were no elk to speak of north of the Rio Grande River but now they use, more or less, all of the Creede District." South Fork District - "As near as I can tell the number of big game animals on this District are about the same as 5 years ago." Pyramid District - "Elk are increasing due to an abundance of summer range, lack of predatory animals, no open seasons and light winters." Alder District - "Game animals seem to be holding their own; no noticeable increase or decrease has been seen. The severe winter of 1931-32 was hard on the elk since the deep snow covered their feed up more or less. The spring following, 19 carcasses were seen in Elk Creek, and in other portions of the District, carcasses were seen but in fewer numbers. There is some illegal killing of elk.". Table 2.--Census of Game Animals on Forest Land, 1934 Black and Brown Mule Mountain Bear Deer Sheep Elk District 10 750 250 115 Pyramid 30 250 40 300 Creede 10 75 200 South Fork 60 5 150 Alder 25 100 20 Del Norte 15 200 25 Conejos Total 945 155 1,435 95 Silvertip 1 2 3 �- 245 Memo to the Forest Supervisor, October, 1935: Creede District - lilt is my opinion that the past estimates of big game, particularly elk in this District have been far too high. It is planned to have an elk count this .winter when weather conditions are right, should funds be available. No conclusive evidence to justify an estimate of 300 head of elk in this District was seen on inspection trips during the past season. " Annual Game Report, October 31, 1936: Alder District - "Elk appear to be we1l distributed over the District. Tracks .are very abundant and groups of from two to twelve animals were observed on almost every field trip from June to November. From about the middle of September the bulls have been bugling and this sound is not at all unconunon in the woods up to the present time." Pyramid District - "There were signs of elk in a1l conifer timbered portions of the District this year during the sununer so they are evidently on the increase. It was noticed that those on the north side of the District probably 50 head come in from the Gunnison Forest in spring and return there in the fall, while those on the south side of the District from Bear Creek south and east come from the Creede District and some from the San Juan Forest via Weminuche Pass and they also return that way in the fall. There is probably 60 head that winter on lower Texas Creek, the balance going lower on the Forest." Creede District - the following report evidently was a special one that was concerned with the number of acres in the District and the amount used by game and livestock, along with a special reconunendation for a game preserve: Table 3.--Number of Big Game Animals National Forest 1936. Acreage Acreage Acreage on the Creede District, Rio Grande Species Number Elk Mountain Sheep Mule Deer Black Bear 300 30 250 20 of the Creede District used by domestic stock used by Big Game 1. Used by game exclusively, summer 2. Used by game and domestic stock, sununer 3. Total used by game, summer 4. Used by game exclusively, hard winter 5 Used by game and domestic stock, hard winter 6. Total used by game, hard winter 250,000 208,381 219,952 acres acres acres 8,863 208,381 217,244 2,708 25,723 27,431 acres acres acres acres acres acres �- 246 - Acreages of winter game range needed in addition to present winter ranges inside the National Forest: 1. 2. Private Land Forest Land 3,660 acres 21,340 acres It is recommended that a game preserve be created with the following boundaries and no dom.estic stock of any kind be permitted in it: north boundary, Rio Grande River and south boundary, the Continental Divide, east boundary, Goose Creek, west boundary Rio Grande River." Pyramid District - July 30, 1936 "Table.--Number of Big Game Animals on the Pyramid District, Rio Grande National Forest 1936. Species Elk Mountain Sheep Mule Deer Acreage in the Pyramid District Acreage used by domestic stock, summer Acreage used by big game 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Used by game exclusively, summer Used by game and stock, summer Total used by game, summer Used by game exclusively, winter Used by game and stock, winter Total used by game, winter Number 200 ll5 30 270,539 acres 229,300 acres 132,720 acres 44,800 acres 87,920 acres 132,720 acres 7,580 acres none 7,580 acres" Annual Game Report, November, 1937: "The game count made last winter shows that elk and deer have been making better gains than reported by the rangers. This count shows 1,400 elk and 2,000 deer. Of these numbers were 420 bulls and 440 bucks. "We found 31 head of elk in 'the Goose Creek country last spring (1937) that had died from ticks and starvation. Of this number, three were short yearlings." "One skinned out elk weighed 475 pounds, 6 points on antlers, age not determined." "Elk are plentiful enough in the Goose Creek drainage for trapping and transplanting, but funds would be needed to construct the corral or traps. An open season on elk during 1938 in an area later described will likely be the cheapest solution to our problems." �247 - "It is recommended for the 1938 season that we have the following described area open to elk hunting. An area within the boundaries of State Highway 160 from South Fork up the river to Creede, thence from Creede up the highway to Seven Mile Bridge, thence up the Mineral County road to the mouth of Trout Creek, thence up Trout Creek to the Continental Divide, thence along the Divide to Wolf Creek Pass, thence down Wolf Creek Highway to South Fork. Elk are too numerous within this area and one seasons shooting should thin them out and help us to scatter them to other portions of the Forest." The next ten years are an almost complete blank as far as information on elk numbers in the Rio Grande area. This was the period that started the development of the Pittman-Robertson program for wildlife research and, of course, the period also encompassed World War II. The next information available to us for thi~ narrative starts in 1947. In 1947 Mr. C. D. Tolman of the Colorado Game and Fish Department was assigned to duties in the Gunnison River and Rio Grande River drainages under PittmanRobertson Project Colorado 4-R, entitled Deer-Elk Studies. All of the following information is abstracted from his Quarterly reports concerning the elk of the Rio Grande River area. In the January, 1948 report, he states that the migration of elk to the lower ranges was still in progress in late November in Cat Creek, Rock Creek, Meyers Creek, South Fork of the Rio Grande, Goose Creek above Humphries, lower Goose Creek, the upper Rio Grande and Los Pinos Creek. Most of the elk were found on the leeward side of the ridges and a partial segregation of mature bulls at an elevation of 10,800 feet was noted. The elk were wintering between 8,600 and 9,500 feet, but no large concentrations were found. An aerial count of elk, Los Pinos Creek to the South Fork of the Rio Grande, totaled 259 animals, while 486 elk were counted in the Goose Creek drainage. From November 4-13, 1947, an aerial sex-ratio survey was taken of the elk of the Rio Grande using a fixed-wing aircraft. Table 1 below shows the information gathered on the flights: Table 5.--Aerial 1947. Sex-Ratio Location Survey, Rio Grande National Bulls Cows Forest, November Calves 4-13, Total Lower Goose Creek Upper Rio Grande Pinos Creek S. Fork of Rio Grande Goose Creek above Humphries Cat Creek - Rock Creek Meyers Creek 19 1 6 34 17 14 4 148* 8* 42* 38 94 54 14 17 56 26 6 48 89 167 94 24 Total 95 398 105 598 *no separation of cows and calves 167 9 �- 248 (My comments) The 598 elk classified on these counts give the following ratios that can be compared to present day data from the same area: One bull per 5.3 antlerless animals or 1 : 5.3. Figuring the bull-cow-calf ratios on the information that is broken down in this manner gives the following ratios: 34 bulls per 100 cows and 52 calves per 100 cows. Present day ratios on a post-season classification (1965) show the following: 13 bulls per 100 cows and 52 calves per 100 cows. In 1947 the big game season opened on October 11 and this season in the Rio Grande and Saguache area (these were combined for this season) was an either sex hunt. When the check station kill reached 75% of the desired kill, the season would be shut down as provided by state law on two-days notice. The area was subsequently closed on October 23, three days early and no problems arose from the closure. Check Stations at Del Norte (Rio Grande area check primarily) and on House Log Creek (Saguache area primarily) checked the following ;numbers of elk: Del Norte 271 elk and House Log Creek 362 elk, a total removal, by check station data of 633 elk from the two herds. The July 1948 Pittman-Robertson report mentions that the utilization on all browse species in the McKinney Gulch, Caldwell Creek and Pierce Creek areas was severe to destructive during an inspection trip in April. A range survey trip into the Roaring Fork Creek area on June 4, 1948, showed light to moderate use on most browse, with proper to severe use on Mountain Mahogany (Cercocarpus montanus). Use on aspen in all of these areas west of Goose Creek was very heavy. A total of 24 elk were found dead on these two trips, evidently from starvation or disease. Big game project personnel made a pack trip into the upper Goose Creek area in July and August, 1948, and the elk were found at 8,600 feet to well above timberline, with the greatest concentrations found around South River Peak. An inspection of tracks indicated that the elk were crossing back and forth to the San Juan side, and that this movement is most common in July and August. No fresh elk sign was seen in Roaring Fork or Leopard Park during this trip but there was an abundance of fresh sign in Fisher Creek. The April, 1949, report stated that there was destructive utilization on all browse species by the elk in the Goose Creek drainage. The elk concentrations began to break up about March 1, 1949, in this area, but the elk appeared to be in very poor condition. Further information concerning this elk herd after 1949 will be found in sections of the final report dealing with harvest data, seasons and bag limits and range conditions and trends. �- 249 BIBLIOGRAPHY Carver, Jack, Jerry Vondergeest, Dallas Boyd and Tom Pade. 1959. legend. Caravon Press, Denver, Colorado. 200 p. illus. Darley, Marshall. 1966. Land of Personal communication. Every, Dale V. 1961. Forth to the Wilderness. York, xii, 369 p. William Morrow and Co ,, New Grant, Blanche C. 1934. When Old Trails Were New. Chicago, Ill., 344 p. The Rio Grande Press, Inc., Lavender, David. 1964. The First in the Wilderness •. Doubleday and Co. Garaen City, New York., xiv, 490 p. 'Lawrence, John. 1835-1908. The John Lawrence Diaries, 1867-1907. Copied from· the original manuscript. Boulder, Univ. of Colo., 1955 - 7 vol. - in 1 box (unpaged). Riggenbach, Mrs. Joe. 1966. Personal communication. Rockwell, Wilson. 1956. The Utes - a forgotten people. Colo. 307 p., illus. Spence, Frank C. 1925. Alamosa, Colorado. Colorado. Sage Books. The Story of the San Luis Valley. 1930. Colorado's Story. 249 p., illus. Alamosa Journal., The World Press, Inc., Denver, Swift, Lloyd W. 1945. A Partial History of the Elk Herds of Colorado. Mamm. 26(2): 114-119. Taylor, Ralph C. 1963. Colorado. 561 p. Denver, Colorado, South of the Border. Jour. Sage Books, Denver, Tolman, Carwin D. 1947. Deer-elk Studies, Rio Grande Drainage. Quarterly Progress Report. Colorado Game and Fish Department. Denver, Colo. Tolman, Carwin D. 1948. Deer-elk Studies, Rio Grande Drainage, South-central Colorado. Quarterly Progress Report. Colorado Game and Fish Department., Denver, Colorado. 1949. Deer-elk Studies, Rio Grande Drainage, South-central Colorado. Quarterly Progress Report. Colorado Game and Fish Department., Denver, Colorado. U. S. Forest Service. Anon. 1910-1937. Annual Game Reports, Rio Grande National Forest, Colorado. Official Files of the Rio Grande Forest in storage at Omaha, Nebraska. �- 250 - Prepared by: Raymond J. Boyd Wildlife Researcher Date: July, 1966 Approved by: Richard N. Denney Project Leader Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief �July, 1966 - 251 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO --------~--~~--------- Project No. W-38-R-20 Work Plan No. llB Deer-Elk Investigations Job No. 2 Title of Job: Winter and Summer Range DelimLtation, Rio Grande Elk Period Covered: April 1, 1965 through March 31, 1966 Personnel: Raymond J. Boyd ABSTRACT No work has been completed on this job this segment as all of the maps needed to locate the various winter and summer ranges are not yet completed. Personnel of Region 2 of the U. S. Forest Service are working on the maps on a cooperative basis, but personnel shifts in their organization have not allowed anough time to be spent on the mapping. The maps that are completed are at the Research Center at Fort Collins where corrections are being worked out by Mr. Bert .Baker under Project S-lOl-R. �- 252 - Recommendations: (1) Complete the maps of the study area with two overlays showing primary and secondary winter ranges in Game Management Unit 76. (2) Make up overlays showing winter and summer concentration areas that were determined by aerial flights throughout the year. Objectives: Areas of use during the various seasons of the year must be determined so as to know areas where elk concentrate at various times, and to determine the total available range for each season. (1) Delimit and map the primary winter and summer range within the study area. These are ranges that the elk will normally use seven or eight years out of every ten. (2) Delimit and map the secondary elk ranges in the study area, those areas that are sometimes known as intermediate or spring-fall ranges, which when added to the primary winter range will give the total winter range available to the elk. Procedure: (1) Determine through records, files, pUblications and field observations, the areas of elk concentration in the past and map these areas. (2) Delimit and map the present elk concentration areas through use of fixed-wing flights and some helicopter flights on a bi-monthly basis for two years. The study area will be flown on a regular strip basis that will be flown the same way each time. Additional information on elk concentrations will be gathered during sex and age classification counts of the elk on the area, and from notes taken on regular aerial trend counts. The animals observed on these flights will be located on maps by the observer while actually flying and making the observations as to location, numbers and movements. (3) Use the maps needed for Job 3 under this work plan to supplement the aerial sightings of elk concentrations. �- 253 - Findings: No work was accomplished on this job during the past segment as the information needed for completion is not fully available at the present time. Maps of the concentration areas during the winter months are on file in the Southwest Regional Office at Montrose, Colorado. These maps show concentration areas for the past three winters (1963-64, 1964-65, and 1965-66). The areas of concentration were mapped by Southwest Regional personnel while actually flying the winter trends in the study area. The mapping of the vegetation on the winter ranges, and the associated use patterns of the elk as determined by pellet group counts and utilization estima;tes on winter browse plants, is not yet completed under Project W-IOI-R and until this mapping is done, no work can be done on locating the secondary ranges with the study area. Personnel from Region 2 of the United States Forest Service are doing the actual plotting on the maps, and shifts in their personnel have not allowed enough time to complete the whole survey area. It is anticipated that these maps will become available to this project before the end of the next segment so that the objectives of this job can be met on schedule. Prepared by: Raymond,J. Boyd Wildlife Researcher Date: July, 1966 Approved by: Richard N. Denney Project Leader Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief ��july, 1966 - 255 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO -------------------------------- Project No. W-38-R-20 Work Plan No. llB Deer-Elk Investigations Job No. 3 Title of Job: Basic Range Inventory, Rio Grande Elk Period Covered: April 1, 1965 through M:Lrch 31, 1966.· Personnel: Raymon~ J. Boyd ABSTRACT Complete, corrected maps of the big game range analysis that was done in Game Management Unit 76 are not yet available from Project W-lOl-R. Delays in the drafting of the maps by the U. S. Forest Service has not allowed the personnel of W-lOl-R to complete the corrections and summaries of the transect data. Therefore, no work was accomplished on this job by W-38-R personnel. �- 256 Recommendations: (1) When the completed maps become available, check them to see if they cover the entire study area, and if they do not, run additional transects, according to the Interagency Big Game Range Analysis techniques, so that the entire winter range in the study area has been examined. (2) Summarize the field data so that the number of acres of vegetative types are known, condition of browse plants and their vigor, soil stability and the species composition of the vegetation on the area is in a form that can easily be examined by Management and Research personnel for their recommendations. (3) Make completed copies of the maps and summaries available to Management for assistance in setting big game seasons. Objectives: Knowledge of the condition, trend and quality of the winter range of the elk is an essential part of the ground work required to make sound management recommendations on the huntability of the herd. (1) Within the winter range that was delimited previously (Job 2), determine: (a) Total area in acres of the various vegetative types. (b) Composition of the various forage species. (c) Density of forage species. (d) Vigor of the forage species. (e) Soil movement and erosion. (2) Determine the condition and trend of various components of the winter range. (3) In company with the District Ranger and local W. C. O. make inspections of the elk summer range in the Squaw Creek, ute Creek and Pole Creek areas to determine if spring and summer use by the elk is excessive . on their summer ranges. Procedure: (1) Most of the range surveys needed to satisfy the objectives have already been completed under another project (Colorado W-10l-R). The maps and field forms will have to be only spot checked to see if these data are complete. These maps and forms are on file in the Rio Grande National Forest Supervisor's office in Monte Vista, Colorado, and a set is in the permanent files of the Research Center in Fort Collins and are available at both places for inspection. (2) If the data under Objective 1 are not complete, field surveys will be carried out according to the Interagency Big Game Range Analysis Procedure which has been used on both W-38-R and W-10l-R and is on file at the Office of the Bureau of Sport Fisheries and Wildlife in Albuquerque, New Mexico. (3) Field inspection of the three areas in question will have to be carried out by horseback trips into the area. Forage species used by the elk will be noted, trampling of the moist soil will be observed and pellet group counts will be taken on random transects across the contours of the area. �- 257 - Findings: Vegetative type maps of the elk winter range on the upper Rio Grande area are not yet available from the U. S. Forest Service who is doing the drafting from the aerial photos onto the 2-inch quarter quad maps. Most of the maps have been finished and printed, but some final corrections have yet to be done on several more of the maps before a completed set will become available. All of the planimetering of the types to get acreages has been completed, but some of the information has not yet been put on the master maps. All of this work should be finished in the near future and then the final checking of the maps will be done to see if the mapping has covered all of the areas within the study area. Prepared by: Raymond J. Boyd Wildlife Researcher Date: July, 1966 Approved by: Richard N. Denney Project Leader Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief ��- 259 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO ------~~~~~----~---- Project No. W-38-R-20 Work.Plan No. llE Title of Job: Period Covered: Personnel: Deer-Elk Investigations Job No. 4 Elk Seasonal Movements April 1, 1965 through March 31, 1966 Richard N. Denney, Raymond J. Boyd, David F. Gordon, R. Bruce Gill, Donald Benson, Earl Cochran, Ed Bechaver, Jim Houston, Herb Browning, Tom Lynch, Bob :Pizel and Ron Schultz. All of the hunters, pool riders and sheep herders that reported banded elk to us, and to Errol Ryland of the Southwest Region who sighted many banded elk on aerial trend counts and reported them to us. Abstract: No elk were trapped in the study area during the pal\>tsegment because the winter was so open that elk would not come to the traps. Nine elk were tagged and banded by use of the Cap-Chur gun and by jQmping. Eight tagged and banded elk were killed during the 1965 big game season on the study area. White banded elk were again seen on the San Juan drainage during December and green banded elk were seen on the Rio Grande study area several times during the big game season and during the post-season classification counts which gives us a greater indication of the amount of interchange between the elk of the Rio Grande and the San Juan herds. �Recommendations: 1. Continue to keep track of the neck band sightings and tag recoveries on maps loeated at the Montrose Regional Office. 2. Continue to assist Regional of elk in the study area. personnel in the trapping and banding 3. Try to mark large numbers of elk in late September with paint shot from a pressure g~D carried in a helicopter. 4. If the transmitters become available, instrument several elk in the upper Rio Grande (Pole Creek area appears best suited to this), to see if it is possible to keep track of wild elk by the use of radio tracking techniques. Procedures: 1. Assist Southwest Regional personnel in the construction tion of one or more group traps within the study area. and opera- 2. Neck-band and ear-tag all elk caught in these traps. Scales will also be set up at each trap so that live weights of the elk can be determined. 3· Use different colored neck-bands at each trap site so that crossmovements or complete migrations into other herd areas can be determined. 4. Schedule periodic fixed-wing aircraft flights within the study area for the purpose of locating neck bands. Observations of banded elk will also be noted on all other flying within the study area. 5· Using the helicopter, try and mark elk from the air with paint shot from a pressure gun. When large groups of elk are to be found on Long Ridge, use the helicopter and try and mark elk by using Cap-Chur equipment to immobilize the elk, then ear-tag and neck-band them. If snow conditions are proper, use the new jumping technique to tag and band elk anywhere there are concentrations within the study area. 6. The bulk of the trapping will be done by Southwest Regional personnel with only spot checks and assistance in the event of trap difficulties by perso~Del of this project. �- 261 - Elk Seasonal Raym.ondJ MoveI:'J.ents 0 Boyd Tn the three years that this jo"b has been underway J t.her-e have been 89 elk trapped and banded w:;.th wbJ.-:;eplasti.c collars on Goose Creek and 32 elk have been tagged ar.d ba~lc..e<i wU:h 'blaze orange collars 'between Goose Creek and. Long E:".c.ge J and hL;;.e col lar-s have been placed on 56 elk O!}the Shaw Creek dr'a::L:~lage All of the blaze or-ange co lLar-s have been placed on elk by us ing t.Le he:l.~.coj:te::,and. e:·:.the~~,jiDTp:Lng or :Lmmob:Uiz:l.ngthe elk 5.n order to band 0 them.') Dur-LngU~e past: year there have been 98 sight:i.ngs of white banded elk r-epcr+ed to the pr-o.ject, 18 sightLngs of blaze orange collars,' 34 sightings of b.Lue collars and 6 si.ght:ings of green collars All of these sightl.ngs were iT:. the study ar-ea pr-oper0 0 :N·ine-l:y-o::.e(91) of ttl.e white ·ba~la.edelk were seen Ln the Goose Creek d'raIr.age , ThTee w:::::ite'bands on the Coller lYiB.nagement Area~ two wh.l.t.ebands 1.:.,Elk Pa:r':k:!two wLI.tebarcds on A'IAa Ramon Wloi.:mtai.!J.~ one wh:i:.teband on Iv] C!:'eeY; and one Red jViOl;:~ta1.Q Creek. (s ee Eigu.re 1) on. 0 Of the .l.8bla.ze ora{Age collars that wer"e:reported to the project, one was at the head of South Clea'Y' CreekJ five on Long Ridge, two on Lime Creek, one:.n the 'Fd.oG'rrandeCanyon? one on Seepage Creek, one on Fazrner-s Creek, fOUT' OI"lthe R2.o C'rar:d.e Ei.verbelow Wright 1 s Ranch? two bands at Lost lake and. one was !:'epocted. on the lower end of ·~·te Ri.dge (see E'i.gure ~:) 0 Of' tl"~e3).;·bl.·Je co.ll.ar-s reported. to the project d.ur~.I"lgthe past segment, t:t~'ee wer-e 0:':1 :Pa:.>:'K C::'eek) 12 on Shaw Creek'.) eight OIl t.he Hio Grande River where Shaw Cc:'eek e:~.lters, one band at Poague L8.ke~ one on Palrrt Creek, one a t the head of Scb.rade:r-Creek.9 one at the head. and one on the lower end of Wi.llow C::'eek, one 'hand at Beaver C:!:'eekReservoi:;c'.9two bands near Church Creek} one band. on Coal CI'eek on the San -J:.:;anside, and one b Iue band was reported to us 'by the :NewIv:fex:l.co Game and F5.sh De:partment on the Carson :!~rational For-ea t Ln '~To~,t"te"rn '~"'ew Mex'j" '" ..:. 'F'i" gLLe 3) .r: _. c 0 I,.'s e·~ '.L 1 ~~ _.. ' _". ".~. . ".'y' 0 Of' t.he six g:cee:'1 co ll.ar-s r-epor-t-ed.to us dur-Lng the past year, one was seen on. Bear C:.>:'eek on tl::'.eupper Rio':,":2ande, one near Carson City, one at the mout.h of Texas C:~"eel<.:J OEe in :Elk :Park and. one band was seen on lower Dee:p Creek sot.t.h of Creede (see Y1.€:->.:v:'e 4) 0 The s:Lesht:i.EgSof the greer. bar.ded elk on the Rio Grande s+ady a:rea, onIy strengthens the id.ea of a g:reater or lesser exchange between the, elk of' the San Juan and t.Le ELc Grand.e, as the green bands wez-e rp.Laced on elk trapped. on Devil Creek west of' Pagosa Spr:ings in the San ,~;uan:~ational Forest. 'Ihls possibility has been recognized fur som.e time, but these green band sig~t.j'_ngs and the wh:1.teband s Ight-Lngs on the San J·u.an last year are posLt.Lve pr-oof of s·u.ch an exchange, �- 262 Eight tagged, and./or banded elk were reported killed by hunters dur-Ing the 1965 big game season. Ta'ble 1 below lists the tagged kills and their locations. Table 1 Locat:ion of Tagged Elk Killed Dur-Ing the 1965 Big Game Season, RIo Graride Elk Study Area, Colorado. -~~------------------------------ --------------Date Killed Tag ::VuIriber Sex Kill Location SL-78 ,~/ cow Benn.ett Creek had lost collar, moved 11 miles southeast of trap 10/16/65 RG-26 '5/ cow Roaring Fork Creek still had collar, moved 7 miles south-southwest of trap 10/18/65 no tag ];./ cow Schrader Creek had collar, animal had moved 7 miles southeast of trap 10/18/65 no tag bull Paint Creek spike bull haC.rr;oved14 southwest~ had collar W/21/65 P-34 'l/ bull Texas Cre~k still had collar, elk had moved 45 airline miles northnortheast of the Devil Creek trap 10/22/65 no tag ,~/ bull Mill Creek 3 pt. bull still had collar, moved 7 miles southwest 11/3/65 no tag !/ bull Shaw Creek 3 pt. bull still had collar, moved 6 miles south 11/5/65 SL-3 !/ bull Cattle Mt. spike bull with collar, dressed out and abandoned, moved 10 miles south-southwest. 10/24/65 P-30 ,i/ cow Tumble Cr-eek still had collar, animal had moved 61 miles north completely aeross the study area into tt.e G~nison drainage. ,Y Remarks ~----------------- 1/ SL tags a:tJ.d elk with only collars were trapped on Shaw Creek '2/ Ro.tags were on elk trapped on Goose Creek 3/ P - tags were on elk trapped on Devil Creek about 17 miles west of Pagosa Springs Figure 5 shows the locations of 335 elk killed. on the stud.yarea during the 1965 big game season. Prepared by: Haymond J-. Boyd Associate Researcher Date: July, 1966 '-------- Approved by: Richard ;~'.Den:r~ey Project Leader Ferd C. Klei::1schni t.z Federal Aid Coord.inator �.!:ill!!!2. - PAVED -- DIRT HIGHWAY. OR GRAVEL ••• LAKE OR -I- MOUNTAIN ,~~/ WILDERNESS ROAD RESERVOIR PEAK AREA BOUNDARY ro 0'1 LA> FIGURE 1 - LOCATIONS OF 98 \-JHITE NECK BANDS SIGHTED DURING ELK STUDY AREA 1965 - RIO GRANDE �~ - PAV£D -- OIRT _ LAKE HIGHWAY 011 GRAVEL OR ROAD RESERVOIR -IIIVU >--CRUK -I'--'" MOUNTAIN PUK WILDERNESS ARU BOUNDARY L I\>0\.. .j:::- •.. FIGURE 2 - LOCATIONS OF 18 BLAZE ORANGE NECK BANDS SIGHTED DURING 1965 - RIO GRANDE ELK STUDY AREA �.!::.ill!iQ. - PAVED -- HIGHWAY 'DIRT OR •• ~AKE ..,...,. fillY!" .>---. GRAVEL OR ROAD RESERVOIR CREEK +' .IIOUNTA'N '--" W'~DERNESS PEAK AREA BOUNDARY [\J' 0'\,. \Jt FIGURE 3 - LOCATIONS OF 34 BLUE NECK BAND SIGHTINGS - 1965, RIO GRANDE ELK STUDY AREA �~ - PAVED ---- OIRT HIGHWAY OR GRAVEL ., LAKE OR -i- MOUNTAIN --" WILDERNESS ROAD RESERVOIR PEAK AREA BOUNDARY -t ro- 0\.. 0\.. FIGURE 4 - LOCATIONS OF 7 GREEN NECK BANDS SIGHTED DURING 1965 - RIO GRANDE ELK STUDY AREA �~ - PAVED ---- ,, DIRT HIGHWAY OR GRAVEL ••• CAKE OR + "'OUNTAIN ,- •./ WICOERNESS ROAD RESERVOIR PEAK AREA BOUNOARY roCJ\.. -.J: FIGURE 5: RIO GRANDE ELK STUDY AREA KILL LOCATIONS OF 335 ELK - 1965 BIG Unit 76 - 194 kills Unit 79 - 32 kills Unit 80 - 109 kills 335 kills GANE SEASON �July, 1966 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO --------~~~~-------------Deer-Elk Investigations Project No. W-38-R-20 Work Plan No. llb Title of Job: Population Components (Rio Grande Elk) Period. Covered: Personnel: Job No. 5 April 1, 1965 through M3.rch31, 1966 Richard N. Denney, Raymond J. Boyd., Robert Keiss, Howard. Funk, Donald Horak, Jack Griep, Don Smith, Don Hoffman, Darrel Bingham and Harold Shepherd. Abstract: Pre- and Post-season classification counts of the elk on the study area were taken with the helicopter and recording the data on a portable tape recorder. A pre-season ratio of 35 bulls (Lncluding spikes) per 100 cows and 56 calves per 100 cows was determined, while post-season classifications indicated. a ratio of 13 bulls (including spikes) per 100 cows and 52 calves per 100 cows. The total elk kill in the three C-ameM3.nagement units within the study area, (76, 79 and.80), as determined by hunter report card surveys, was 970 elk composed ~ 607 bulls, 317 cows and 46 calves. Aging of 271 elk at the check stations indicated that 84.9% of the kill was less than 4~years of age. The success ratio of resident hunters was 23.13%, while non-resident hunters enjoyed a success ratio of 29.60%. ~n elk population on the study area, after the 1965 big game season, of 3,942 elk was projected using the sex andp;ge data. �- 270 - Recommendations: 1. Continue the pre- and post-season sex and age classification counts of the elk on the study area, striving to classify at least 1,000 elk on each count. 2. Set up personnel to work at the regular Game Management check station at Del Norte to examine and age every elk killed on the study area, and make other' physiological collections as needed. 3. Continue the regular monthly collections of two mature cow elk in the study area until the collection series are completed (24 elk total). 4. Transfer data collected at the check station onto "Mark-Page Reader" forms for easier analysis on the IBM Computer at Colorado State University. Objectives: Knowledge of the herd structure by sex and age class, as well as the productivity of an elk herd, is vital to the formulation of a s01L."ld management plan. 1. Determine the sex-ratio, both pre- and post-season, of this elk herd. 2. Determine the cow-calf ratio, both pre- and post-season, of this elk herd. 3· Determine the age-class structure of this elk herd during the fall hunting season. Procedure: 1. Using a helicopter, one observer, classified elk according to whether they were bulls or cows. These counts were put on tape and later extracted thus insuring that the observer could watch the elk continuously. From work of this type already done on the White River elk herd, at least 1,000 animals need to be classified in order to eliminate the variation found in individual groups of elk. 2. Using the helicopter, one observer, classified elk as to whether they were cows or calves. This is most easily done by looking at the head conformation of the elk. A calf has a short "rostrum" and a "fuzzy" appearance to its forehead and neck as compared to a mature cow. All of these classifications were also put on tape and later extracted. 3· Personnel were assigned to the regular Game Management check station at Del Norte to examine and age every elk killed in the study area. Aging of the elk was done by tooth wear and eruption according to criteria developed by Quimby and Gabb (1957). Information also was gathered regarding date and location of kill, lactating or not, antler point count and diameters, blood samples and whether the elk was banded or tagged. �- 271 Population Components (Rio Grande Elk) Raymond J. Boyd Sex and Age-Class Composition of the Rio Grande Elk Herd The 1965 pre-season sex and age-ratio classifications of the Rio Grande elk herd were made September 27 through September 30. Early September snow storms had driven the elk down from their usual haunts above timberline, into the heavy dark timber just below timberline and classification of elk was extremely difficult. ~~ny elk could be found in the timber, but accurate classifications could not be made, so the sample size on the pre-season count was so low as to be almost unusable',but the counts that were obtained will be included here to give, at least, an indication of the 'sex and age structure of the elk herd before the 1965 big game season. Table 1 below lists the classifications. Table 1 -- Pre-Season Sex and Age-Class Classifications of the Rio Grande Elk Herd, Colorado, 1965. Bulls 4 3 Young Bulls 2 6 1 Calves Total Location 19 12 8 7 2 7 6 19 9 10 6 11 21 4 4 11 7 6 3 5 12 Miners Creek Rito Hondo Creek Buck Creek Ruby Creek Lost Lakes Area Pole Mountain Pole Creek Little Squaw Bear Creek Red Mountain Creek Goose Creek Trqut Creek 7 3.06 120 52.40 67 29.26 35 30 1 13 11 37 17 18 10 17 40 1 229 100 Spikes 2 2 2 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 18 7.86 3 1 1 3 1 17 7·42 Cows Total Percent =========================================================================== A total of 229 elk were classified, resulting in a ratio of 35 bulls (including spikes) per 100 cows and 56 calves per 100 cows. The 1965 post-season sex and age-ratio counts of the Rio Grande elk herd were made from December 14 through 15 under excellent counting conditions. As in the pre-season counts, the bull classifications were broken down into three categories, mature bulls (massive antlers), young bulls (light beam antlers) and spike bulls (yearlings). The post-season counts are listed ~n Table 2. �- 272 - A total of 1,035 elk were classified, resulting in a ratio of 52 calves per 100 cows and 13·bulls (including spikes) per 100 cows. All of the pre- and post-season classification c ourrt s since this 's tudy began are tabulated below for comparative pur~oses. Table 2 Post-Season Sex and Age-Class Classifications of the Rio Grande Elk Herd, ColoradoJ 1965. 1l&3.ture Young Bulls Bulls Spikes 1 4 7 6 1 1 3 15 195 19 Rat Creek Shallow Creek Long Ridge North Clear Creek South Clear Creek Texas Creek JlfLiddle Creek Lime Creek Lime Creek to Deep Creek Deep Creek Ski Tow Area Ski Tow Area to Goose Creek Goose Creek Drainage Caldwell Creek Pierce Creek Goose Creek (upper) Elliott Creek Leopard Creek Soda Creek Goose Creek (lower) Rio Grande River to Coller Farmers Creek W. Fk ,, Bellows Creek Flats between Coller and Elk Park Elk Park Area Sentinel Mountain Trout Creek 3 9 122 13 3 56 2 6 3 1 4 5 5 78 III 3 28 2 22 62 52 52 27 82 24 80 26 8 8 15 4 42 11 12 , 5 28 8 14 2 2 2 12 20 33 1 2 17 16 17 37 7 27 56 30 32 15 625 60.4 9 25 7 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 .L 3 4 1 3 1 4 1.4 Location 6 4 15 'l'otal 28 3 4 Calves 1 2 1 Cows 30 2·9 3 5 5 6 15 8 329 31.8 ~7 5 l2 l3 23 II 44 14 )+2 47 58 30 1,035 100 Total Percent =================~===== ====================================================== �- 273 - Table 3 -- Pre-Season Classification Counts, 1961 through 1965, Rio Grande Elk Herd, Colorado. Year Bulls 1961 1962 1963 1964 1965 170* 115 131 145 35 Total 596 Spikes 50 82 89 7 228 Cows Calves 378 562 493 598 120 254 289 305 334 67 2,151 1,249 Ratios Total Bulls Cows Calves 802 1,016 1,011 1,166 229 1/ 45 29 43 39 35 100 100 100 100 100 67 51 61 56 56 4,224 38 100 58 * Spikes included with bulls in these counts liVery poor counting conditions Table 4· -- Year Post-Season Classification Counts, 1961 through 1965 Rio Grande Elk Herd, Colorado Bulls Spikes Cows Calves Total Ratios Bulls Cows Calves 1961 1962 1963 1964 1965 26 175 29 37 45 67 115 109 66 36 542 1,165 818 606 625 348 517 535 340 329 983 1,972 1,491 1,049 1,035 17 24 16 17 13 100 100 100 100 100 64 44 65 56 56 Total 312 393 3,756 2,069 6,530 18 100 55 The 1965 total elk kill in the three Game Management units within the study area was determined to be 970 animals. These kill figures are based upon hunter report card returns and statistical projections of the results of the report card returns. Table 5 shows the total elk kill by unit and by sex according to the report card returns. �- 274 - Table 5 -- Sex Ratio of the 1965 Elk Kill on the Rio Grande Elk Study Area, Based "Jpon Hunter Report Card Returns and Projections. ,Unit Bulls 1; Cows % Calves % Total 76 79 80 276 85 246 58.1 70.8 65.5 179 27 111 37·7 22·5 29.6 20 8 18 4.2 6.7 4.8 475 120 375 l'otal 607 62.6 317 32·7 46 4.7 970 ===:::::==:':::=====::::====:===========:.::=============::..~=:::::':::==:.::;==.:=========:=::=======:.::::========= Table 6 -- Sex Ratio of the 1965 Elk Kill on the Rio Grande Elk Study Area, Based Upon Data From Three Check Stations. 1Jn::Lt Bulls % Cows % Calves % ~otal 76 79 80 97 18 63 64.7 60.0 69·2 43 7 21 28·7 23·3 23·1 10 5 7 6.6 16.7 7·{ 150 30 91 178 26.2 65.7 71 22 8.1 271 ==========================.:==========================~===========:::::=========== Total During the 1965 big game season we had three special check stations on the study area (Pass Creek, Stoney Pass '}ndSpring Creek Pass). The regular Game Management check station at Del Norte also checked and aged elk from the study area. Table 7 shows the age and sex of the kill checked through the stat.Lons . �- 275 - 'ra-ble7- Age and Sex of the 1965 Elk Kill Checked Through Four Checking Stations, Rio Grande, Area, Colorado. -~-.-, .•. Age: Calves >-----2l.. 1 -1 .1."2 3"2 2 Bulls Cows 12 10 43 12 85 16 Total Percent 22 55 20·3 101 37·3 84,9 % .......•. 8.1 4l.. 6l.. 7! ~2 9+ Total 10 3 1 h 2 7 190 81 8 2·9 13 4.8 1 0.4 9 3,3 271 2 5! 16 16 12 8 5 5 4 32 11.8 20 7·4 lO 3·7 2 ~~===============================================~============================ Population Estimate Results of Classification Counts and Hunter Harvest on the Study Area Pre-Season Kill Post-Season Bull Cows Calves Total Cows and Calves 42 607 81 120 317 625 67 46 329 229 970 1,035 187 363 954 Ratios and Kill Bulls Cows Calves 35 607 13 100 317 100 56 46 52 Total Bulls to Unantlered ---Pre-Season Kill Post-Season 1 4.45 1 11.78 970 �- 276 - Population Projection x = number of cows in fall before hunting season .35 x - number of bulls in fall before hunting season x - 317 = number of cows after hunting season .35 x - 607 = number of bulls after hunting season .13 (x - 317) also - number of bulls after hunting season Thus: .13 x - 41 .35 x - 607 .35 x .35 x - 607 = .13' (X - 317) .13 x = 607 - 41 .22 x = 566 x =2,572 cows in fall before hunting season ,900bulls in fall before hunting season .56 x = 1,440 calves in fall before hunting season Total fall population - 4,912 elk Less Total Kill Total Post-Season Pop. 970 elk 3,942 elk Composed of: Bulls 307 ( 7.810) Cows 2,380 (60.410) Calves 1,255 (31.810) Hunter Harvest Surveys Tables 6 and 7 show the sex ratio of the 1965 elk kill) as determined by the report card data and the check stations. The yearling kill figures, based upon hunter report card returns, 1.s concerned only with the bull kill, while the check station data includes both bulls and cows. In the 55 yearling elk aged through the stations, there were 12 yearling cows. �- 277 - Table 8 -- Yearling Kill, 1965 Big Game Season Rio Grande Elk Study Area, Colorado. Unit Card.Projection Check Station Data Number 10 ,!i Number 10 ,?j 76 79 80 47 18 57 ,17·32 22.22 23.36 30 12 13 20.0 40.0 14.3 Total 122 20.09 55 20·3 ,g These figures are based upon bull elk only ,?j These figures are based upon all elk aged ========================================================= Table 9 -- Antler Points by Age Class of Male Elk Killed During the 1965 Big Game Season, Rio Grande Elk Study Area, Colorado. Range of Points Range of Points Number of on Left Side on Right Side Elk 1 -3 2 - 5 3 - 5 4 -6 4 -6 5 -6 5 -6 1 -3 2 - 5 3 - 5 4 -6 5 -6 5 -6 5 -6 43 84 16 12 5 4 10 5 -6 5 -6 1 Age 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9+ The success ratio of hunters that had antlerless elk permits for the 1965 big game season in the study area, based upon report card returns, is listed in Table 10. The success ratio of all hunters on the elk study area in 1965 is shown in Table 11. �- 278 - Table 10 -- Total Elk KilIan ~Jnit '76 79 80 Total Area R R-2 R-l ... Antlerless Permits, 1965 - - Number of Permits Success Ratio of Permits Bulls Cows Calves Total Total Kill 400 100 300 55·2 42.0 49·3 22 7 19 179 27 111 20 8 18 221 42 148 475 120 375 800 51.3 48 317 46 411 970 Animals Killed on Permits ============================================================================ Table 11 -- Total Hunters, Total Elk Kill and Success of All Hunters 1965 Rio Grande Elk Study Area, Colorado. Number of Hunters Success Ratio Bulls Cows Calves Total 76 79 80 1,764 719 1,442 26·9 16.7 26.0 276 85 246 179 27 111 20 8 18 475 120 375 Total 3,925 24·7 607 317 46 970 Unit Animals Killed ============================================================================ The total elk kill, numbers of hunters and success of resident and non-resident hunters are shown in Tables 12 and 13. , �- 281 - 'lable 15 --.Hunting Pressure by Unit, By C01h~ty of Residence, During the 1965 Big Game Season - Rio Grande Elk Study Area Colorado. Unit: 76 79 80 31 65 77 16 22 16 25 12 3 13 25 34 3 3 24 143 18 Total 10 County: Adams Alamosa Arapahoe Archuleta Baca Bent Bov.lder Chaffee Conejos Costilla Crowley Denver Douglas Elbert El Paso Fremont Huerfano j-efferson Kiowa Kit Carson Lake La Plata Larimer La.S Animas Lincoln Mesa ~!ii.neral Montezuma Montrose Otero PhilUps Prowers Pueb Lo Rio Grande Saguache Teller Weld Yu.rna Tjnknown Total ------------- 3 154 9 84 24 13 74 22 30 3 77 22 18 6 3 3 12 28 9 34 7 6 56 3 108 46 3 18 7 3 24 33 18 15 12 12 114 3 6 25 3 6 74 145 34 6 6 22 24 6 99 139 87 10 7 13 163 361 31 6 3 3 3 1,164 645 1,153 6 4 68 233 129 19 28 28 75 21 37 7 9 240 12 3 269 92 16 110 6 10 27 33 30 27 16 1~ 120 3 6 71 3 25 336 645 152 22 16 3 3 12 6 6 2.962 -~--- ... ... 7·9 4.4 8.1 9·1 3·7 4.0 11.3 21.8 5·1 �Ircfoy.'rratim: relative Table to the day of kill by un.l t , is shown below in Table 16. 16 -- Day of Kill, by 1jn:l.t - 1965 Big Game Season Rio Grande Elk Study AY."ea,Colorado. Day of Fill 'Cnit 1. 2 3 ~------------. 76 79 80 4 5 6 7 8 9 6 6 1 1 25 3 15 t'-."r 35 5 14 22 1 lh· 138 43 37 54 44 ]809 __ ,~:_~ __ ,.~ . ~o 2~ l~.o 4_ 79 9 50 c:c:: 8 14 9 Total 2 3 1 6 2 198 34 123 4 10 4 355 --------.- ~--------.--------.----~--.------,-------------._------.. Total Percent 0 ~- 89.9 % :::===:::::::';:::::=~-:.;::=.:::=::.======:-=;:.:::=====:.:::::~:=:::~:..:::=::::.:==-=:..-::':..":==:=;=;=:~:::::::::::.:;:.:;;::=:=:.::;:..====:==:..=~-:===========::::=====.::.;:===::=:= JC':1.r:<.g the 1965 'DIg game seaso:.::., i:r:.:~>o:r'~l18.T,io~l was obte.Lned from successful elk hunt.er-s on lactating cond.l,tioYl of the CO'.{S harvested. 'Iab Le 17 below summar-Lz ee these Ci t.a , -----.---------~--.-,-----------,---,-"'--~-.---.~-~...----- ..._----76 80 ~Cotal 79 __ ·a ' . .-.-..._~· •.• _~ Iactati~(lg 1\'02:"~-la c t.a t iIJ.g -"'z_~. ..__..._ 10 ••.••.•.. .._.........,~_=__=__ ~_....__ , •.•..••••.•. 1 ,-, z, . _ 9 20 10 '~-------.-.-.-'~---.•...-.. ...----------- ..~----.---------~ -- 35 19 55 23 ..••..... , i~ot.a.l 33 3 :i>cl-u.o.es o::::.~.:{ f'ema Le ell';: t.vo-year-s of' age or older. �- 283 - Discussion: Analysis of the variation between groups of elk on the study area by personnel of the Computing Center at Colorado state University indicates that if we want to be 95% confident that we are within 10% of the true mean of the cow-calf ratios, we have to classify 587 cows and calves. Since we have been averaging between 700 and 900 cows and calves on the pre-season counts, we are exceeding the accuracy stated above. However, we are not classifying enough cows and calves to have 95% confidence that we are within 5% of the true mean of the cow-calf ratio, because further analysis of the group variation indicates that we must classify 2,350 cows and calves to approach this accuracy. From data collected on this elk herd since 1961, we can never classify enough cows and calves to get 5% accuracy at the 95% level as far as cow-calf ratios. From information supplied by the Computing Center on bull-spike ratios we have to classify 360 bulls in order to be within 20% of the true mean 95% of the time. Since we classify about 230 bulls in each pre-season count, it appears that we might be able to reach this level of accuracy if we were able to increase our sample size another 400 to 500 elk. This could probably be accomplished. if we enlarge our c01.L1'1ting area to include much of the high country in unit 80. If conditions lend themselves to this proposition, we will probably try to classify elk in this area to increase our sample size. Prepared by: Raymond Jo Boyd Associate Researcher Date: July, 1966 Approved by: Richard N. De~1'1ey Project Leader Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coord.:i.nator �- 284 - Figure 1 - Special Research Check Station on Spring Creek Pass - Rio Grande Elk Study Area, 1965. �July, 1966 - 285 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO --------~--------------------- Project No. W-38-R-20 Work Plan No. llb Title of Job: Period Covered: Personnel: Deer-Elk Investigations Job No. 6 Physical Characteristics (Elk) April 1, 1965 through March 31, 1966 Richard N. De~Dey, Raymond J. Boyd, David F. Gordon, R. Bru~e Gill, Jesse E. Williams, Errol E. Ryland, Donald Benson, Earl Cochran, Ed Bechaver, Dale Hibbs, George Bear, Walt Hawkins, Bob Keiss, Darrell Bingham and Florence Fields. Abstract: A total of 20 mature cow elk were collected during the segment with the Cap-Chur gun and a helicopter. Whole weight, standard measurements, blood chemistry and counts, organ measurements and volumes and kidney-fat indexes were taken on all collected animals. Further determinations for food habits, radioactive isotope accumulations and fetal measurements were taken. �- 286 - Recommendations: 1. Continue the collections until two mature cow elk have been collected during each month of the year (24 elk total). 2. After summaries of all data collected are complete) enlist the aid of the College of Veterinary Medicine at Colorado state University for the proper interpretation of the various findings. 3. Compare the physical characteristics of the Rio Grande elk herd with the physical makeup of the White River elk herd) and publish the results in the Journal of Wildlife Management. Objectives: To determine if the physical characteristics of the Rio Grande elk herd) which winters on bunch-grass ranges) are different from the White River elk herd) which winters on a browse range area. Procedure: Blood samples were collected from all elk trapped in the study area and sent to the Research Center in Fort Collins) Colorado, for complete chemical analysis and counts. Items particularly looked for included blood calci-wm, phosphorous, sodiu~ and potassiu~. A.ll elk trapped in the study area were weighed. Two elk per month were collected to get the following information: food habits from stomach analysis) ovarian analysis to get additional information on herd increment, correlation of eye lens weights with age and range conditions, analysis of bones and glands and tissues for atomic fallout accumulations, endocrine gland analysis, incidence and kind of endoparasites and ectoparasites, standard measurements) weights and volumes of all organs. �- 287 - Physical Characteristics Raymond J. Boyd During the segment 20 mature cow elk were collected for complete necropsy examinations. All of the elk were collected by using a helicopter to locate the elk and then shooting the elk from the helicopter with a Cap-Chur gun. The automatic syringe was loaded with a lethal dose of Succinyl-choline Chloride (Sucostrin or Anectine). Figure 1 notes the collections locations of the 20 elk collected during the past segment. Table 1 lists a partial summary of the necropsy data that has been collected on the 20 elk mentioned above. Discussion: The complete series of collections over the year are not yet complete. A final publication is proposed for all the data gathered in this job. Prepared by: Raymond J. Boyd Associate Researcher Date: July, 1966 Approved by: Richard N. Denney Project Leader Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �- 288 Table I - Partial Summary of Elk Physiology Studies, Rio Grande Elk Study Area, Colorado. 1965-66, -----------------------~---.---~----Elk No.: .. Date Collected 25 26 27 28 5/6 5/6 6/2 6/2 7/7 30 31 7/7 8/3 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ Age 4 15 450 455 7 4 7 9 6 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------Total Body Wei ght 575 355 0.104 0.169 406 532 0.185 0.282 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------Mg. of Drug 60 120 60 60 75 150 75 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------Mg. per Pound To Ki II 0.133 0.264 0.150 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------Time Required For Dea th (sec.) 60 180 180 120 90 60 120 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ Dressing Percentage 51.1 46.2 58.8 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ Total Body length 78-1;4. 83-1/8 87 82 86-1;4. 71-1/2 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ Kidney Fat Index no fat no fat 6.0 1.8 23.5 85 14.0 ------------------------------------------------~---------------------------Heart Volume 979.9 1,125.3 1,311.3 1,208.1 1,633.7 1,445.9 1,559' -----------------------------------------------------------------------------346.7 366.3 341.0 375.3 339.0 358.1 376.2 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ Brain Volume Hemoglobin 17.5 14 16.5 23.3 17.6 20.0 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------8.10 10.12 10.23 6.28 8.29 I 1.50 Erythrocytes -----------------------------------------------------------------------------53% -----------------------------------------------------------------------------leukocytes 1,650 4,000 3,250 2,750 4,900 6,750 9,800 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------Polymorphs 8 20 28 36 32 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------lymphocytes 28 32 48 44 32 37 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------Monocytes 28 28 32 II 32 8 5 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------Hematocrit Eosinophi Is o 16 4 4 27 20 21 �- 289 - Table Partial Summary of Elk Physiology Studies, 1965-66, Rio Grande Elk Study Area, Colorado (Continued). ---------------~~---.-.---.---~--.--Elk No.: 32 35 36 37 Date Col I ected 8/3 9/29 9/29 11/16 Age 2 10 3 3 450 427 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ Total Body Wei ght 370 530 ----------------------------------------~-------------------------------------.~ 150 150 150 150 Mg. of Drug Mg. Per Pound To K i " Time Requ ired For Death (sec.) 0.405 0.283 0.333 0.351 120 120 150 300 54.4 62.0 80hz 77 39.0 71.4 1,579.2 1,231.2 Dressing Percentage 56.9 Total Body length 8014 Kidney Fat Index 33. i Heart Volume 1,047 1,636.4 Brain Volume 316.0 360.5 Hemoglobin 20+ 21.0 Erythrocytes 15.7 Hematocrit 368.1 22.3 10.7 9.37 53% 53% Leukocytes 10,500 4.650 5,000 3,750 Polymorphs 36 8 8 12 lymphocytes 36 6Lt. 68 Monocytes 13 12 8 12 Eosinophi Is 13 16 14 18 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ J./ Helicopters not available for lhe early September collections in 1965 �- 290 Table I - Partial Summary of Elk Physiology Studies, 1965-66, Rio Grande Elk Study Area, Colorado (Continued). Elk No. : Date CoIl ected 38 39 40 41 42 43 11/6 12/16 12/16 1/12 1/12 2/4 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------Age 2 5 9 9 9 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------Total Body We ight 432 452 482 507 8 520 -----------~----------------------------------------------------------------Mg. of Drug 150 150 150 100 100 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------Mg. Per Pound To Ki II 0.332 0.31 I 0.197 0.192 180 420 58.8% 55.4% 79 80-1/8 80-1/4 37.8 42.0 19.8 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------Time Requ lred For Death (sec.) 300 300 ------------------------------------------------------------------~----------Dressing Percentage 61.6% 58.2% 55.6% 72 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------Total Body Length 78-3/8 89-1/2 84 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------Kidney Fat Index 56.0 50.0 40. I -----------------------------------------------------------------------------Heart Volume 1,328.8 1,143.3 1.440.1 1,340.0 1,178-.5 -----------------------------------------------------------"------------------Bra in Vol ume 329.5 366.3 375. I 375.1 320.9 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------Hemoglobin 18.6 17.I 17.I 15.7 ---1/ -----------------------------------------------------------------------------Erythrocytes 10.9 10.05 8.85 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------Hematocr it 53% -----------------------------------------------------------------------------Leukocytes 3,750 4,150 2,100 2,100 4,550 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------Polymorphs 20 8 16 28 34 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------Lymphocytes 60 52 32 44 34 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------Monocytes 8 16 12 16 10 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------Eos i noph l l s 10 40 12 20 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------~ Blood unsatisfactory for counts, serum recovered �- 291 - Table Partial Summary of Elk Physiology Studies, 1965-66, Rio Grande Elk Study Area, Colorado (Continued). Elk No.: Date Collected 2/4 45 46 3/1 3/1 47 48 4/5 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------10+ 8 8 Age 9 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------Total Body We ight 549 510 463 482 500 --------------------------------------~.------------------------------------100 100 100 100 Mg. of Drug ---------------------------------------------------------------------------Mg. Per Pound To Kill 0.196 0.216 0.207 0.200 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------Time Required For Death (sec.) 135 46 60 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------Dressing Percentage 53.Jfo ---------------------------------------------------------------------------Total Body Length 86-1/2 77-3/4 85 89-1/2 85-3/4 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------Kidney Fat Index 24.0 20.5 38.9 39.1 Hematocrit 50% 45% 53% Leukocytes 2,400 2,100 2,000 2,500 Polymorphs 46 34 '7 10 45 40 39.9 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------I ,322.9 1,213.0 1.454.1 1,324.9 1,439.6 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------414.8 Brain Volume 375.1 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------16.1 16.1 13.7 ---)) Hemoglobin 17·1 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------8.80 Erythrocytes ----------------------------------------------------------------------------4Jfo Heart Vo Iume lymphocytes Monocytes 6 8 29 19 Eos inoph iIs 4 14 '9 31 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- !I Blood unsatisfactory for counts, serum recovered �~ - PAVED ---•• LAKE .>--.. RIVER ~ " r>~ f HIGHWAY DIRT DR ORAVEL OR ROAD RESERVOIR CREEK -I- IIOUNTAIN -"./ WILDERNESS PEAK AREA BOUNDARY roro- \.0- FIGURE 1 - LOCATIONS OF 20 ytATURE FE!1ALE ELK COLLECTED FOR PHYSIOLOGICAL STUDIES, 1965-660 RIO GRA~uE ELK STUDY AREA~ �- 293 - FIGURE 2 - TAKING STANDARD MEASU~JENTS ON A MATURE COW ELK LEFT HIND FOOT MEASUREMENT SHOvffl �- 294 - ,.', FIGURE 3 ." .....,;.; '. ", .~ . ."''''''. <.. " • 1. .'.. • TAKING STANDARD MEASUREMENrS OF INTERNAL ORGANS MEASURING THE LENGTH OF A KIDNEY IS SHO\~ �- 295 - FIGURE 4 - TAKING AIR-vJEIGHTS OF INTERNAL ORGANS �- 296 - FIGURE 5 - TAKING WATER-WEIGHTS OF INTERNAL ORGANS �July, 1966 - 297 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO --------~~~~------------W-38-R-20 Project No. Work Plan No. Title of Job: Period Covered: Personnel: llb Deer-Elk Investigations Job No. 7 Management Recommendations (Elk) April 1, 1965 through March 31, 1966 Richard N. Denney and Raymond J. Boyd Abstract: Since this study is only in its second year, there are no specific recommendations that can be made to management at the present time. It would appear from work done on the White River elk herd, that more bull elk could be killed in this area without harming the reproduction of the herd. An increase in the bull kill can be accomplished, at the present time, by the natural increase in hunting pressure in this area. �- 298 - Recommendations: Continue to carry this job until sufficient information is available for management recommendations for this elk herd. Procedures: 1. It is in.tended to bring all of the diverse aspects of this study into one comprehensive picture of this herd so that intensive analysis and evaluation of the data in terms of all the various implications can be undertaken. 2. It is intended to analyze, statistically, if possible, by multiple co~relations analysis, all of the data gathered on this herd that might have an effect on management. A.lso to select factors that are important, according to the analysis, that management has some control upon, and recommend procedures based upon these factors. 3. Annual reports are submitted for Federal Aid purposes. Popular articles are to be written for magazines and newspapers, and a final tecD~ical report for a professional journal. �- 299 - Management Recommendations Raymond J. Boyd Since this study is only in its second year, there is not enough concrete data on hand for any recommendations to management at the present time. From information gained on studies of a similar nature on the White River elk herd~ it would be possible to increase the bull kill to a much greater extent without harming the reproductive potential of this herd. Rather than recommending a longer bull season or other similar management method of increasing the bull kill~ it might be better to l~t the natural increase in hunting pressure take care of an increase in bull kill until such time as the pressure gets so great that measures have to be taken to limit hunters in the Rio Grande area. Prepared by: Raymond J. Boyd Associate Researcher Date: July, 1966 Approved by: Richard N. Denney Project Leader Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator ��July, 1966 - 301 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO ----------------------------Deer-Elk Investigations Project No. W-38-R-20 Work Plan No. llc Title of Job: Population Components (White River Elk) Period Covered: Personnel: Job No. 1 April 1, 1965 through March 31, 1966 Richard N. Denney, Raymond J. Boyd, David F. Gordon, Glenn E. Rogers, Bert Baker, Gar~ MYers, George Bear, Dick Hopper, Harold Swope, Dale Hibbs, Don Weber, Warren Snyder, Wayne Sandfort, William Rutherford, Bob Drummond, Walt Burkhard, Bruce Gill, Dick Klein, Richard Gregory and Larry Finnell. Abstract: Pre- and post-season classification counts of the elk in units 23 and 24 were taken with the helicopter. A pre-season ratio of 33 bulls (including spikes) per 100 cows and 59 calves per 100 cows was determined, while the post-season classifications indicated a ratio of 9 bulls (including spikes) per 100 cows and 66 calves per 100 cows. The total elk kill in the two game management units within the study area, as determined by report card surveys, was 1,268 elk and was composed of 857 bulls, 358 cows and 53 calves. Aging of 605 elk at the special check stations indicated that 96.4% of the kill was in the portion of the elk herd under 4! years old. The success ratio of the resident hunters was 27.15%, while non-resident hunters enjoyed a success ratio of 32.44% making the overall success ratio of 4,431 hunters, 28.62%. An elk population on the study area, after the 1965 big game hQnting season, of 5,330 elk was projected by using the sex and age data. �- 302 - Recommendations: 1. Continue the pre- post-season sex and age ratio counts, using the helicopter, for two more years (endLng December, 1968). 2. Set up and run for 10 days, five special check stations (Meeker, Deep Creek, New Castle, Ripple Creek and Hamilton), during the 1966, 1967 and 1968 big game seasons. These stations to collect data on the sex and age of the elk kill, kill locations banded elk sightings, hunter distribution and public reaction to the specified elk permit type of hunt on the White River. 3. After the 1968 big game season, evaluate the effect of specified permits on the sex-ratio and productivity of this elk herd. Objectives: To evolve a sound management plan for the White River elk herd, based upon sound factual biological data. 1. Determine the sex-ratio, both pre- and post-season of this elk herd. 2. Determine the cow-calf ratio, both pre- and post-season of this elk herd. 3. Determine the age-class structure of the hunter harvest of this elk herd during the fall hunting season. Procedures: 1. Elk were classified as bulls and cows from a helicopter flown in the study area in late September and early December. These classifications are recorded on tape and later extracted. 2. Cow and calf counts were also made by helicopter in late September and early December. This is most easily done by looking at the head conformation of the elk. A calf has a short rostrum, and a "fuzzy" appearance to its forehead. 3. Special check stations were set up around the study area at Meeker, Deep Creek and New Castle. The regular Game Management check station at Rifle also assisted in this portion of the study. All elk killed in the study area were examined at the stations for: sex and age (by tooth wear and eruption), antler point count, lactating or not, day of kill, kill location and whether banded or not. Data gathered were analyzed by the age-pyramid technique of analysis and time-specific life table analysis. Data is also included in population projections according to formulas after Rassmussen and Doman (Rassumussen, D. I. and E. R. Doman. 1953. Census methods and their application in the management of mule deer. Trans. N. A. Wildl. Conf., 8:369-379). �- 303 - Population Components White River Elk Raymond .r.: Boyd Sex and Age'-Class Composition of the White River Elk Herd, The 1965 pre-season sex and age-ratio counts of t.he White River elk herd were made from September 23 to 24 inclusive. 'Ihe se classifications were confined to the elk located in game management units 23 and 240 The classifications are tabulated as follows: Table 1 -- Pre-Season Sex and Age-Ratio Colorado, 19650 Bulls Young Bulls 2 2 3 Spikes Cows 6 18 16 99 4 98 93 14 18 1.;.8 4'7 'j 6 13 3 2 1 ..L 5 6 1 , 47 16 5 .L 1 1 3 6 2 3 9 1 3 2 6 3 4 3 9 1 1 COlL.'1ts,Wrlite River Elk Study Area 24 14 1 4 15 4 Calves Total 7 31 191 Sleepy' Cat Area Lost Park SaIld Poak '7 ;::"01 Long Park 171 Ripple Creek Area 2'(' Lynx CY"eek Big Fish Creek 33 East. Miller Creek 6 80 Bur-ro Mountain Area 12 Patterson Creek 2.90 Sout.h Fork 101 Par-k Creek 48 Lost Solar Creek 50 Bloomfield Bench ]'8w:.~.e:!:~ Cr"eek and Bench 163 46 ute Creek !YiB.:r"vine Creek 3' 69 2 4,1 8 99 53 27 27 29 3 58 31 16 77 60 44 18 8 16 1 _ .L ~- 23 1.7 49 306 161 1109 699 5108 416 3100 Location ..----~....,..-.., IJ348 ,l.GO T(~~,aj. Fercent ==============================================:=:=========::::::=:::=:::.;:::===::::.:==::::==:===:=:.:::.:::::::=::=: l , .../'. A total of 1,3i+8 e Lk were classigied resu.lting in a ratio (including spikes) per 100 cows and 59 ca.ives per IDn C()WS of 33 bul.Ls 0 The 1965 post-season sex and age-ratic count.s of' theWhit;e Ri_ver elk. he:2dwere made on December 20 and 2:';... As iT: the pre-season classifieat:Lons) all flyingw8.s confined to Game lVanagement units 23 and-24,o �- 304 - A total of ~)628 elk were classified resulting in a ratio of 9 bulls (in::Luding spikes) per 100 cows and 66 calves per 100 cows. The 1965 bull ratic was the lowest since the study began in 1957. began All of the pre- and post-season classification ar-e tabulated be Low for comparative purposes. counts since the study The 1965 total elk kill in the two game management units wi thin the study area was determined to be 1,268 elk. These kill figures are based upon hunter report card returns and statistical projections of the results of the report card returns. Table 2 -- Pos t= Sea son Sex and Age Ratio Courrt s , Whi.te River Elk St.udy Area, Col0:r:.<:,-d'~L 196~;.:._._ YC1.mg Bu':.ls 13'J113 Spikes Cows Calves 1 4 23 19 47 1 22. ~~l R 32 38 .1 5 6 1 2 2 17 89 35 7 16 h;;:. r:) 2 2 '?5 l) ,.J 11 13~? 56 38 138 1+·0~::) . '-Yl ,~,'..:.:' -t v-r ..1- ( 102 4·0 tOO ..., ) L 10 48 10h 1 50 19 8 ~:~t3 9 ':"70 115 294 -:1") c. --' t:: Jb 930 57 613 38 100 4 -L :::,08 ~::6 155 70 14 31 4 ~~~j+4 1':1 17 9 59 26 7 12 28 Total '".J 59 C.oS 4· Location Oak Ridge Coal Creek Little Beaver Oak Ri.dge Big Beaver Big Beaver to Fawn Creek Fawn Creek Lost Creek Los t C~eek to Ml s s our-L Cr. Lest C'r-eeL tn'-. MisSC;l)Ci. Cr. Buford. Peak Area Buf'ord Pk, up SOUn'l For-k Lost Solar Creek Bloomfielri Belch Pa.i'1s: Cree?: S ,. Fk , Al)ove WagonwLIf:"f':: 1 S. F'k. Campgr-ound 'EaE; 1::, I'JlIll.er Cl"eek'. �- 305 - '::!able 3 -- Pre -Seasor, Classificat::o~::Courrts ~ 1957 throc:.gh1965 White River Elk. Herd..?Cc.Icrado Ratio .. Year B:.<lls 100 87 * 146 * 91 135 :a8 103 45 72 Total 897 Cows Total ~'~26 164- * 1957 1958 1959 1960 1961 1962 1963 1964 1965 -)E. Spikes 3;::5 6~~3 491 410 525 699 1,·45 l2:1. 106 117 161 77? • , Calves 123 117 205 2(;9 44 53 46 67 ,,'- h'7' ' j 49 51 30 33 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 54 71 64 64 74 64 64 59 59 44 100 64 ......1...1..,_ , ..••.• ~.J ---2~4.43 3,781 j Cows h49 368 668 75:~) ' L.t..L 1~3c+ 3'; ;::; }:045 '--.-" ::::85 904 ~'0 999 L:r, 1.?348 3i7 1'~)7 .-'-,_ .• j Bulls Spikes included wi t.hbu Li,s in these counts 7,897 0 Table 4 -- Pos t.-Bea.s on Classification CO!ZltS, 1957 t.hr-ough1965 Wl!.iteRiver Elk Herd, Colorado _-_ _------ --_--._ .• .. Ratio Year Bulls 1957 1958 1959 1960 1961 1962 1963 1964 1965 50 * 93 or. 81 * 30 50 51 26 23 26 Total 480 63 115 135 43 101 59 r,r, )..L" Cows 278 356 238 451 881 764 638 1,224 93 c) _w~__~_.~...._..-.____ 5,760 '*"-·#._--=---=--_._ ...... Spik.es irlC Luded with b-ul1s in these .r ..•••• '.• * Spikes Ca.Lves Total, 279 320 222 409 818 561 459 758 613 4,h39 --.o-=~.__ Cows Calves 607 769 541 953 1,862 1,511 1~166 2,,106 1,628 18 25 34 21 19 24 11 10 9 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 90 93 91 93 73 72 62 66 11,143 17 100 77 ..,..•.....________ .,.o-_~ ____ C C"L':::; S Bulls 0 �- 306 - :JC.J_::::'Lcgt.ne 1965 big game season, we had three special check stations on +r.e study area (Meeker, New Castle and Deep Creek). The regular Game 1'flanagem.e:J.t check s ta.t.Lons at. Rifle and Idaho Springs also checked and aged elk i:':.:oOIC. +he s t'J.c_y area. '2a.·b:~.(=: 5 _.- Sex and Age of t.he 1965 Elk Kill Checked Through Five Check Sta t.::I.ons , White River Area, Colorado (-r LIll. t s 23 and 24. ~-~.~--. .'--'-""--- .•.. Age 'll 24- 3~ 4l2 5~ 371 27 87 30 16 24 6 14 6 6 3 398 87 14.4 40 606 20 3.3 12 2.0 3 0·5 Calves -'-2 Bu.Li.s 14 C8WS 24 ~':ota~L 38 6.3 l'e~~(!erl.t 6508 z; 6l2 7~ 8l2 9+ ·C"nk. 3 4 69 109 3 0·5 4 0.7 96.4% ==::::=:::::.:::=::::.::=:::.::::::::.===::.:.~;::::.:.::=:=.:==:==========:========================:.::=====::===========::..-:==== 178 �- 307 ,Population Estimate -~.",,--.-------Results of Classification _____ Counts and HLJn.terHarV'est on the Study Area: Bulls Cows Calves Total 233 857 85 699 358 416 53 613 1...,348 1...,268 1,628 Cowsand Calves" 0 ..:'re-season Kill Fost-season 930 1,115 411 1,543 Ratios and Kill Bu.i.Le Cows Calves S::otal 100 358 59 53 1...,268 ~--,----------.-Pre-season Kill 833 )! r',.., Population x :=: numbe r of cows in fall .33 x == number of bulls 1 1 4.7 18.1 Projection before hunting season in fall before hurrtlng season x - 358 = number' of cows after hunt.Lng .33 x - 857 = number of 'bulls after season hunt.Lng .09 . (x - 358) also = number of b~lls after season hunting season .33 x - 857 :::009 0 (x - 358) Tnus: .33 x - 857 Bulls to \Jnantlered: .09 x = 32 .33 x - .09 - 857 - 32 e 24 x ::: 8:::5 x = 3...,~,J7 cows in the fall before hunting season . 33 x - ~2134 halls J.:,1. the fall before hurrting season 059 x '"'?}2'§~7. calves in the fall before hurrting season Total fall population Less total kill Total pos t=season pop 0 6,598 1,268 5...,330 Composedof: B~:,lls Cows Calves 238 ( 4016%) 3...,066 (57.1%) 2,026 (3706%) �- 308 - ~I1J.llterHarvest Surveys Tile sex ratia 0:' the 1965 elk kill from the study area, as determined "by the r-epor-t; cq,rds and check stat:Lon data; are listed in Tables Q and '7, Table 6 -- Sex Ratio of the 1965 Elk Kill on the White RiYer Elk Sk,dy Area Based 'ipon. f['-1nter Report Card Returns and Projections. ----~ Unit 3-;].11s % Cows % Calves % Total 23 24 366 491 68.9 66.6 140 218 26.4 2906 25 28 4·7 3.8 531 737 Total 857 67.6 358 28.2 53 4.2 1;268 !!!=:=:==:=:==========.:============:================================================:::= Table 7 -- Sex Ratio cf the 1965 Elk FilIon the White Rl.ver- Elk Study Area Eased f::po:r:. Data From Five Check Stations. Unit Cows % 66.8 67.1 46 174 27·7 28.2 9 29 5·5 4.7 Total ...~-.-~ 166 617 67.0 22C 28.1 38 4.9 783 Calves % , 23 24 Total 525 :===::::====:::::::::=:'.:;:~-====:":::=::::..:==:===:::::====:::::=:=====================:---===========================:= .. �- 309 - The yearling kill figures, based upon the hunter report card returnsJ is concerned only with the bull kill, while the check station data includes both bulls and cows. In the 398 yearling elk aged and checked through the stat.ions, there were 27 yearling cows. 1able 8 -- Yearling Kill, 1965 Big Game Season White River Elk Study Area, Colorado. Card Projection Check Station Data Unit Number % ?i 61.54 59.46 89 309 66.4 65.6 60.90 398 65.78 Number % ~I 23 24 237 291 Total 528 ~I These figures based upon bull kill only gj These figures are based upon both sexes that were aged 1able 9 -- Antler Points By Age Class of Male Elk Killed in Units 23 and 24 During the 1965 Big C~me Season White River Elk Study Area, Colorado Age Range of Points on Left Side Range of Poings on Right. Side Number of Elk 1 2 3 4 5 1 -3 1 - 5 4 -6 5 -6 5 -6 1 -4 1 -6 4 -6 5 -6 5 -6 370 57 16 6 6 �- 310 - The success ratio of all hunters that had anterless elk permits for the 1965 big game season in the study area, based upon report card returns, is listed below in Table 10. Table 10 -- Total Elk Kill on Antlerless Elk ?erm.its, 1965 White River Elk Study Area, Colorado. Unit 23 24 Area E Number of Permits Success Ratio of Permits Bulls Cows Calves Total Total Kill 73.69% 29 39 140 218 25 28 194 285 531 737 68 358 53 479 1,268 Animals Killed on Permits 650 E Total ============================================================================ 1~e success ratio of all hunters in the elk study area in 1965 is shown below in Table 11. Table 11 -- Total Hunter, 'I'otalElk Kill and Success of All Hunt.er-s , 1965 White River Elk Study Area, Colorado. Number of Hunt.ers Success Ratio Bulls Cows Calves Total 23 24 2,004 2,427 26.50 % 30.37 % 366 491 140 218 25 28 531 737 Total 4,431 28.62 % 847 358 53 1,268 Units Animals Killed ==================================================~====~==================== �- 311 - The total elk kill, nu.. rnber of': hunters and success of resident and nonresident hunters are shown below in Tables 12 and 13. Table 12 -- Nurrilier of Non-Resident Hlli~ters,Total Elk Kill and Success Ratio 1965 Big Game Season - White River Elk Study Area. Number' of Hunters Success Ratio Bulls Animalf3_Killed Cows Calves . Total 23 24 592 638 31.25 % 33.54 % 120 l56 56 52 9 6 185 214 Total 1,230 32.44 % 276 108 15 399 UnH ============================================================================ Table 13 -- Number of Resident Hunters, Total Elk Kill and Success Ratio, 1965 Big Game Season - White River Elk Study Area. Unit Number of Animals Killed Hurrter s Success Ratio Bulls Cows Calves Total 23 24 1,412 1,789 24.50 % 29·23 % 246 335 84 166 16 22 346 523 Total 3,201 27·14 % 581 250 38 869 =========================================================================== During the 1965 big game season, non-resident hunters came from 37 states. A breakdown of the hunting pressure, by unit, by state of residence, is shown in Table 14. �- 312 - Table 14 -- Hunting Pressure by Unit, by state of Residence , during the 1965 Big Game Season White River Elk Study Area, Colorado. Unit: 24 Total 30 38 180 201 68 381 3 3 2 3 10 23 State Arkansas California Connecticut Delaware Florida Georgia Illinois Indiana Iowa Kansas Kentucky 'Louisiana M:lryland Michigan Minnesota Mississippi Missouri Nebraska Nevada New Jers~y New Mexico New York North Carolina Ohio Oklahoma Pennsy.lvanla South Carolina South Dakota Tennessee Texas Utah Washington West Virginia Wisconsin Wyoming Hawaii Canada Total 3 8 6 5 11 19 22 20 39 5 27 _'52 5 38 9 6 3 2 10 14 3 5 5 24 8 3 57 19 54 111 11 30 14 8 14 8 6 5 8 8 3 11 3 3 9 5 11 2 2 19 27 46 27 46 25 3 5 6 71 54 3 3 3 6 68 13 112, 32 3 3 5 11 3 5 16 3 3 10 5 3 7 592 5·77 4.39 11 44 19 9·02 8 6 6 27 4.23 17 3 1,230 ============================================================= �- 313 - Resid.ent hun+er-s in 1965 came from 40 count.Les to hurrt in the study area.0 'l'able15 shows t.he courrty of residence and unit hunted for the resident hcmters Tabl.e 15 -- Hunting Pressure By Unit, 'by Cm.mty of Residence, During the 1965 Big Game Season - White River Elk Study Area, Co.l.or-ad.o 0 Unit: County: Adams Arapahoe Bent Boulder Chaffee Cheyenne Clear Creek Crowley Custer Delta Denver Douglas Eagle Elbert El Pa so F'remont Garfield Gilpin Jefferson Kit Carson Lake La Plata Larimer Li:c.coln Logan Mesa Moffat Montrose Morgan Oterol Park Phillips Prover-s Pueblo Rio Blanco Routt Teller Washington Weld Yuma Total _._--- 23 24- !I'otal 120 11)+ 6 92 129 187 249 30l 6 237 6 4 9 9 3 317 3 68 16 30 3 123 3 12 3 34 13 31 86 19 3 12 3 145 6 3 3 7 12 9 3 9 397 15 3 3 101 3 62 219 3 3 3 6 24 154 15 6 3 37 28 40 6 33 148 27 7 9 3 6 18 6 13 105 19 3 3 46 6 1,4J2 1-, , " 789 9 71415 6 3 169 19 92 3 342 6 15 3 74 19 64 234 46 10 21 6 6 21 12 37 259 34 9 6 83 34 30201 10068 7031 8009 ----------,--- 0 �- 314 - Information relative to the day of kill, is shown below in Table 16. Table 16 -- Day of Kill, by Unit - 1965 Big Game Season White River Elk Study Area, Colorado. Day of Kill Unit Total 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9- 23':' ')24 96 292 23 127 7 4p 22 53 9 43 4 20 2 24 2 15 2 4 167 618 Total Percent 388 49.4 150 19·1 47 5·9 75 9.6 52 6.6 24 26 17 6 785 90.6% =================================~====================================~=~=== Information was also gathered at the check stations during 1965 on the lactating condition of the cow elk. The following data in Table 17 shows the incidence of lactation in fe~le elk from the study area. Table 17 -- Incidence of Lactation, 1965 Big Game Season, White River Elk Study Area, Colorado. y 23 24 Lactating Non-Lactating 11 10 30 48 Total 21 78 Unit Total , 41 58 99 ,~I Includes yearling cows, but not calves. Discussion: The information presented in the section on findings ca~not be compared to data gathered on this study &ince 1957 as the original study encompassed eight Game Ma~gement units (12, l3, 23, 24, 25, 26, 33 and 34), while the present study takes in only units 23 and 24. �- 315 - The reason that the study area has been made smaller is that the sex and age ratio counts show that the bulk of the elk are in the two main White River units (23 and 24)y and,that the check stations can check a greater portion of the elk kill from these unitso The boundaries of these two units are more easily defined for the purposes of hunter information and, location and more control of the hunters and permits is possible in this smaller area. It was felt that the proposed specified permit type of hunt could more easily be set up and controlled in this smaller area also, The ratio of bulls in the post-season herd was down to 9 bulls (including spikes) per 100 cows and the pre-season calf ratio was 59 calves per 100 cows just as it was in 1964. This calf ratio compares to 74 calves per 100 cows Ln 1961, 'Thespecified permit type of hunt is set up to decrease the kill of bulls and increase the kill of cows. In this manner we hope to bring the bUll/COW ratio back to about double what it is now on the post-season count~ and raise the cow/calf ratio back to about 65 calves per 100 cows, If the specified p''CI'!nlt hunt acccmp l.t shes this objective, more cows will have to be removed from the he rd Ln order that the herd does rio t increase over the carrying capac ity of the winter range in the lower White River areas. We have no information relative to the effect of the specified permits on the sex and age makeup of this he rd, The first results of the specified permit hunt will be reported, in 1967. Pr-epar-ed by: Raymond J ° Boyd Associate Researcher Appr-oved by~ Richard N. Denney Pr-o ject Leader Fe rd C. KiE:'Ilscbnltz Fede.ra.L Aid Coordina t.or �- 317 - TWO cmlS AND T\-JO CALVES COW AND CALF - CALF IS NEAREST THE CAMERA FOUR CALVES Photos by Ray Boyd �- 318 - Figure 2 - Classifications Are Virtually Impossible wnen the Elk Get Into the Timber. Photo by Ray Boyd �JulYJ 1966 - 319 - .roe COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO --------~~~~~------------- Project ~10. W-38-R-20 Work F'lan No. 12 Title of Job: Period Covered: Personnel: Deer-Elk Investigations Job No. 1 Battlement Mesa Project ,j'J..Ile 1, 1965 through September 30, 1965 David F. Gordon, Raymond J. Boyd, Walter J. lfuller, and Richard L. Weldon. Abs-cract: The proposed Battlement Mesa Project calls for two reservoirs and 60.1 miles of canals to irrigate about 6,500 acres of land from 5,500 to 8,200 feet elevation. Under project cond.Lt.Lone 4,091 acres or 7.6 percent of the deer wElter range and 6,561 acres or 6.0 percent of the elk winter range would be uaurped . T.:2iswould necessitate a cut in the deer herd of from 700 _ 1,800 animals resulting in a loss to the comrrnmities of from $115,500 $297,000. Canals of the proposed project would possible have some adverse effect 0:::1 d.eer and elk migration i-Q the spring. �- 320 - Recommendations: No recommendations are made with this report. Any recommendations are to be made by the Water Resources Division of the Department of Game, Fish and Parks to whom the findings are to be submitted. Objectives: 1. Determine the location and area of deer and elk range affected by the Battlement Mesa Project. 2. Determine the effect of the inundated area on deer and elk range and seasonal movements. 3. Determine the potential damage by deer and elk to the newly irrigated lands resulting from the impoundment. 4. Recommend means of mitigating losses to the deer and elk resources created by the Battlement Mesa Project. Procedures: 1. The proposed project specifications and areas to be affected were obtained from the Bureau of Reclamation office in Grand Junction, Colorado. 2. Field surveys and interviews of the local conservation officer and other residents were conducted to determine the following: a) Deer and elk winter ranges, b) Hunting information, c) Game damage information, and d) Deer and elk migration information. 3. The data obtained were interpreted and analyzed and a summary written. �- 321 - Battlement Mesa Project David F, GordoL The proposed Battlement Mesa Project is located east and west of Collbran, Mesa Courrty, Colorado, Plans include the pot.entda.L 10,800 acrefoot Buzzard. Creek Reservoir, 25,250 acre-foot Owens Reservof r , and 60,1 miles of canals (Fig. 1), The project is designed to 'bring approximately 6,500 acres of r8.J'2geand dry farm land (Table 1) of 5,500 to 8,200 feet elevation under h'::·j.gatJ.ol"lo Agricult;]..ral production j.s to include hay, pas tur-e , f:cuit, and cash crops Present vegetative cover includes wheatgrass (Agropyron spp 0), sagebrush (Artemisia spp , }, jULiper (,T;l.'1.i-perus spp 0), pinyon ~Pinus edulis).? cottonwood (fOp1.l'IUS-sPp 0) • 0 'ICl'1ese findings will be presented in two sections: upland game birds.? waterfowl,_and turkeysj and deer and. elk. The material for the first section was written for this report by Glenn E. Rogers, Table 1 Acres of Irrigated. I.and on Deer-Elk Winter Range at Present and Und.er Proposed Battlement Mesa Project (Anon;ymous1965). Area Harrison Hightower Brush Creek SUIlIlyS ide Present Acrea 434 352 554 1,594 NewAcres T;y:peRange 1,651 568 251 4,091 Elk Elk ~lk Deer-Elk =================================================================: �.. ,\'" ...,..•.•. fl· " '-..:,,.,., ..zee .. _ ~>1/' ./ ,ff' 1;•.. ,\'t Ur'\.S ,~ ---// -'//~_l it .EXPLANATION C.~ p:un ~ c==J ~~;gJ ~. .. ClouZLond l Cion Lond Map of the Battlement ~sa Y ~. . .. ~~. Clo$S4LOl'ld Cion / 6 Lond Prntl'llly l"i901(d LOl'ld . Figure 1. \ Project area. i // ,.... �- 323 - ~IPLA.J\'1) GAME I. BIRDS, WATERFOWL, A-1'ID TU"RKEYS Investigate the possible effects of the p.E0jec.!~: A. ,Loss of sage grouse_ and ~ turkey range Sage grouse now or in the past ten years have been observed by Glenn Rogers or by other Department personnel in two areas affected by the Battlement Project. In one area.? the Sheep Creek drainage (T. 9 S., R. 92 W.), up to 30 birds were observed by Wildlife Conservation Officer Walter Woodward in the late 1950:s. Started in 1957, a vegetative treatment project has since destroyed most of the sagebrush Ln. this drainage and sage grouse have apparently a-bandoned the area. The second and largest area is that lying north of Molina (T. 9 and 10 S., R. 96 W.) between the Mesa-DeBeque cutoff road and Durant Gulch. Wildlife Conservation Of£icer Woodward has on several occasions seen wintering flocks of sage grouse of up to 50 birds in this area. In 1963, Wildlife Cons er-vat.Lon Officer ,TamesMiller reported a strutting ground of seven males near Anderson Gulch. In the spring of 1965, Rogers observed two strutting males near tbj.s same location and a single strutting male near Shire Gulch. Most of the range in this area is in extremely poor condition. Overuse by both game and livestock and sagebrush eradication projects have combined to eliminate most of the food and cover necessary to sage grouse habitat. Regardless of the above factors, the Battlement Project will eliminate most of the sage grouse now present. Wild turkeys appear to be increasing ~n rrwmbers throughout the project area. Whether the project will be beneficial or detrimental cannot presently be stated. Total loss of game bird ha-bitat through reservoir flooding, canals, roads, and campgrounds may exceed 1,'J00acres. Several ether species of game birds will be affected by this project. Tn Table 2 are listed the estimated past h1LYlter-useon various game bird species and the effect that the project will have on these game bird populations. �- 324 - Table 2 -- Estimated Past Hunter-Use on Various Game Bird Species and Effect of the Project on These Populations Game Bird Hunter Days Use Bird Populations Before Project After Project Sage Grouse 10 Light None Blue Grouse 30 Doves 0 Light Light Light Slight Increase Quail Pheasant 0 None None Light Light Chukars 30 Light Increase Turkey 10 Light Increase Waterfowl 100 Light Increase 0 =========================================================================== B. Alteration in proportion of available range types Exact figures are awaiting range survey maps from the regional office of the Forest Service. In general, between 60 and 80 percent of present sagebrush range will be converted to irrigated croplands. C. Restriction of game bird movement because of reservoirs, roads, fences, human activities, etC-:-Project's effects on game bird movements should be minimal. D. Loss of birds through drowning, increased traffic hazards, etc. Little, if any additional loss should be experienced. E. Hunter access and hunting There could be increased hunting pressures due to an increase in numbers of recreationists and n~mbers of farmers Within the area. The changing of these lands to irrigated farms will include farm homes a_d resident owners. This factor plus the reversion of some public land to homest~ads will decrease public access to these lands. The building of service roads to farms in the area may improve present access roads to National Forest lands. �- 325 - F. Possible conflicts of interest between hunters and recreationists An increase Ln SQmmer home sites, increased fishermen use, and an increased resident population will tend to augment hunting pressures. This should have little effect on game bird popu.la t lons wi th::Lnthe area. The only possibility of conflict would come if waterfowl populations unexpectedly boomed. II. Lnvestigate the possibility for state control of lands within the prdject are~ ~ concerns the management and welfare of upland game b Lr-ds . Htintable populations of pheasants and quail and increased populations of turkeys, chukars, and waterfowl will depend upon the kind of crops produced. in the project area. Annual crops of small grains well distributed throughout the area could furnish increased habi tat for all species mentioned.. Considering the small size of the project, it is doubtful if state ownership and management could materially increase the upland game potential. The only exception would apply to large slough areas without farming values. III. Investigate whether means of mitigating losses to and/or enhancing upland ,game bird values existand suggest what these might be. Several ways of enhancing upland game bird values exist for this area depending on final design of the project. Some of these that might be used are: Small 5- to IO-acre food plots at upper limits of irrigation. These plots planted to small grains or sorghums could enhance pheasant, quail, chukar, and turkey habitat. The retention of all slough areas could furnish nesting cover for waterfowl, quail, and pheasants, Also, these wetlands remaining in public ownership could furnish hunter access and allow for adequate harvests. DEER AND ELK I. Possible effects of the project on: A. ~ and elk winter range The proposed Battlement Mesa Project area includes critical deer and elk winter ranges (Fig. 2). At present, irrigated land imposes an unimportant threat to the available winter range. The Sunnyside district west of Collbran, the most critical winter range area for elk, is mostly unirrigated land. If the project is carried out, it will reduce the total deer-elk range by 4.2 percent (Table 3). �9,';\'" Q..'~'O' ... ~~ <,., "',- ~~!""'.~ ••.r;"••.. r.: \ r ji.' EXPLANATION L:_'OJ I_"'~~: -;j c=J. ~~ --- Figure 2. 2 Land Clou l LoM Clou 4 LOlld CIOU 6 LOl'ld / P,ncnTlyl"iqoltdLolld U",,~ Ii_" 0' .J.er ••el. ..,.,;',1., ,..,ro,. 1-0 ••••.••. 1i••• 1t \IF ee ••. w;nt •.•. ''<In<3C! ___ LQwc" 'Iim" of I!Ik norMal ••••••••• Low". of I!lk erit;.: •• , Clou ., •• " Ili'l"">;t ••t ~ win'e,. .ronq e winter '''Qn9C! IIIIIIIIIID De~r (Ik w"nf.r ranqe win te e rall9.! Map of deer and elk winter ranges in relation to irrigated land under the Battlement Mesa Projeot. .~ e~. '.J ,o- , �- 327 - Table 3 -- Acres of Deer and Elk Winter Range Affected by the Proposed Battlement Mesa Project Present Acres (unirrigated) Future Acres (unirrigated) Percent Decrease 49,675 7.6 Elk 53,766 108,611 102,050 6.0 Total Winter Range * 155,657 145,005 402 Type Range Deer =========================================================================== * Includes 6,720 acres of range used by both deer and elk. The present unirrigated deer winter range covers approximately 53,766 acres (Table 3, Fig. 2). The project proposes to put 7.6 percent of those acres under irrigation. This is the Sunnyside area, a critical winter range used regularly by deer. The local conservation officer reported counting 150 deer along Durant Gulch in January, 1966. At present there are about 108,611 acres of elk winter range within the general project area (Table 3, Fig. 2). Only 6.0 percent of this range, the most critical; is to be irrigated. The winter of 1963-64 presented severe snow conditions, driving the elk down onto the Sunnyside area west of Collbran. During normal winters the elk remain north and east of Collbran. Incidental to the elk range usurped by irrigation are the acres covered by the proposed Buzzard Creek Reservoir and recreation sites around the lake. The proposed Owens Reservoir is located on summer range. B. Income from hunters Reduction of critical winter range would necessitate reducing the herds in order to keep them in balance with their winter food supply. As the herds are reduced, whether by starvation, emigration, or harvest, there will be fewer hunters using this area resulting in a loss of income tothe businessmen and people of the communities. According to a study conducted at Little Hills Game Experiment Station (n.d.), two acres of range will maintain a deer for one month under optimum weather conditions'. Under severe conditions, 0.75 acre is necessary to maintain one deer for a month. Using these figures the proposed project would necessitate a reduction in the deer population of from 700 to 1,800 animals (Table 4). �Table 4 -- Reduction of Deer Herd and Resulting Financial Loss to Communities Under Project Conditions Stock.ing Reduction of Conditions Deer Herd Man-days of Hunting Lost Resident NonResident Financial Loss To Communities Total Resident Non-Resident Total I Optimum (Mild Winter) 700 1400 Maximum (Severe Winter) 1800 3600 700 2100 1800 5400 $ 42,000 $ 70,000 $115,500 w ro OJ $108,000 $180,000 =======~================================================================================================= $297,000 �- 329 - According to a survey made by the local conservation officer, deer hunters spend an average of three days per man on a hunt. Thus, the necessary reduction of the herd eventually would result in a cut of from 2,100 to 5,400 man-days of hunting or a loss of income to the cOrrLrnunities of $115,500 to $297,000 per year. These amounts were calculated. by multiplying the amount spent (by resident and non-resident separately) per hunter per day by the number of hunters and adding them. An average of the past five years for this area shows a ratio of about 2:1 resident to non-resident hlIDters. This ratio is gradually narrowijag in favor of the non-resident. The project will also affect the elk winter range used during severe winters. No specific studies on proper levels of stocking of range are available for elk, therefore no money value can be estimated. The project probably would not appreciably effect the herdls available winter range except during severe winters. During this time, however, the chance of game damage due to elk would be greatly increased. C. Game da.rrage At present damage claims from this section due to deer and elk have not been excessively high. No claims were paid in 1962-63 or 1963-64. L~ 1964-65 claims in the am~Qllt of $653.00 were paid. This is probably due to the scarcity of irrigated land and the type of crops raised. If the project is carried through, the acreage of irrigable land will be more than doubled. Crops to be raised will include pasture, hay, fruit, and cash crops. These all present potential gr-ounds for claims on damage by deer and elk. The present low claim figure conceivably could be quadrupled in normal years. Added to this would be the cost of damage control measures. Do Migration and calving The proposed canals probably would effect adversely deer and elk migrations. Deer moving down from Battlement Mesa onto the Sunnyside area will have to cross the potential Colorado Canal (Fig. 2). Construction specifications for this canal are as follows: Dimensions - Bottom width Water depth Freeboard depth Top width Side slope Capacity Length - - - - - - - 12.0 feet 2.8 feet 4·9 feet - 16·9 feet 1:2 - - 110 cfs - - 19.8 miles :Materials - Wasatch shale lining where possible Concrete bench flumes in potential slide areas Siphons under major drainages �- 330 - This canal could present a major obstacle to deer movements. Fall migration would not be as seriously affected as spring migration because at that time of year the animals are in good condition. However, after a hard winter when the deer are weak from starvation the steep sides of the canal would be impassible for many. Siphons across major drainages might relieve this sLtuat Lon some, but only for the deer using those few drainages. Elk use most Ly the upper sections of the project between the two reservoirs (Fig. 2). These animals presumably come in from north,: east, and south and have been observed to move back and forth across Buzzard Creek west of Hightower MOQDtain. This area is to be supplied by the proposed Owens Reservoir through the potential Harrison, Che;neYJ and Brush Creek canals. The average d.imensions of a 50 cfs canal are as follows: Bottom width - - Water depth Freeboard depth Top width Side slope - - - - - - - 6.0 feet - - - 2.5 feet - - 3.5 feet - - - - - 9.5 feet - - - - - 1:2 The potential Harrison Canal will be 12 miles long with a flow capacity of 55 cfs. The potential Cheney and Brush Creek canals will each have a capacity of 30 cfs, the former being 14 wiles long and the latter 14.3 miles long. J'l.1aterials used in construction are to be the same as those proposed for the Colorado Canal above. In late fall and early winter these canals should not present too great an obstacle to the travels of elk. However, the area in question is reported to be a major calving groQDd. Therefore, in the spring after the ditches are filled they couLd be a real problem to elk calves migrating to summer range. When wet, the Wasatch shale lining becomes Slick, affording very poor footing. Concrete flQmes have vertical sides impossible to climb and difficult for calves to jDlP.p. Few animals have survived being sucked through an irrigation siphon. E. Hunter access At present most of the land along Colorado Highway 330 through the project area is privately owned. T.o.e project should not materially change this. The only possible change in hunter access would be due to changes in the type of farming conducted resulting in landow.o.ersrefusing access through their lands for fear of possible trampling of plowed fields and cash crops. �- 331 - II. Suggested means of reducing losses among deer and elk caused by the project Canals across migration routes of deer and elk present varying degrees of obstruction to their movement s . LTlord.er to alleviate this cause of potential mortality, a safe means of crossing or escaping from the ditches must be installed. Dirt-covered bridges (Fig. 3) can be installed (Gubser 1960), but these are not too effective unless extensive fenci.ng is used to prevent animals from slipping into the c~Tlalwhile getting a drink and to lead them to the bridge. Concrete-liY"ed canals must have sLop Lr.g sides if any escape is to be made possible. Vertical-sided., concrete-bench flumes would thus be negated. A suggested means of affording escape to animals that have entered the canal would be a modified ladder built into the sides of the canals (*Denney, personal communication). If the linLTlg is poured in sections, the forms used wou.l.d have 2 x 4 stz-Lps bolted to the inside surface to create depressions in the canal wall (Figs. 4 and 5). If the lining is poured in a conti.nuous process, redwood. 2 x 4's could be fastened to the smooth canal sides in a similar pattern (Fj.g.6). This design would require a strip of 2 x 4 as a stop at the downstream end. These ladders should be installed at and below specific crossings, on the outside of curves, or continuously in each section through areas of particularly heavy use. Trash racks and a means of egress from the canal should be installed at the mouths of all siphons. The ladder described above or landing mats (Gubser 1960) could possibly provide the means of escape. * R. N. Denney, Wildlife Researcher~ Colorado Department of Game, Fish and Parks, Fort Collins, Colorado. �- 332 - ~igure 3. Drawing of a dirt-covered bridge at a game crossing with wing-fencing to lead animals to it. �- 333 - Depressions rise slightly on downstream end to enable animals to get up and Figure 4. A section of formed and poured canal side showing 2x4 depressions forming a ladder for animals to escape from the canal. �- 334 - 'Canol Figure 5. Diagram showing the form with 2X4 strips bolted on to form depressions in the canal side. �- 335 - Redwood 2X4 strips fastened sides of canal or stud with lead to smooth anchors ---~ gun Figure 6. A section of continuously poured concrete canal side showing redwood 2x4 strips fastened to the smooth side. �- 336 - LITERATURE CITED Anonymous. 1965. Summary statement on Battlement Mesa Project, Colorado. U. S. Dept of the Interior, Bureau of Reclamation. 3p. (Typewritten paper) Gubser, C. E. 1960. An inquiry into the effects of reservoirs and canals on big-game migrations. Proc. Ann. Conf. Western Assn. State Game and Fish Comm. 18 p. - 12 figs. (typewritten paper) Little Hills Game Experiment Station. n.d. Annual stocking records. Dept. Game, Fish and Parks, Denver. 12 p. (lfJ.meo report) Prepared by: David F. Gordon Researcher' Candidate Date: July, 1966 Approved by: Colo. Ricnbrd N. Denney Project Leader Ferd C. KleL~schnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �- 337 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO --------~~~~~------------- Project No. Deer-Elk Investigations W-3B-R-20 12 Work Plan ----------------------------- Title of Job: Period Covered: Job No. 2 Yellow Jacket Project April 1, 1965 through March 31, 1966 Persorillel: Raymond J. Boyd and David F. Gordon Abstract: With the exception of a few interviews, all field work has been accomplished on this job. LD order to fulfill Federal Aid reporting requirements, not enough time was left in the project year to complete the writeup. Therefore a negative report is submitted at this time. �- 338 - Recommendations: 1. Complete interviews, include 1965 big game kill data and write up the final report on the water project. 2. Submit copies of the report to the Water Resources Division in Denver for their files. 1. Determine the location and area of deer and elk range affected by the -.'{ellow Jacket Project. 2. Determine the effect of the innundated area on deer and elk range and seasonal movements. 3. Determine the potential damage by deer and elk to the newly irrigated lands resulting from the impoundment. 4. Recommend means of mitigating losses to the deer and elk resource created by the Yellow Jacket Project. Procedures: 1. Contact and confer with the Bureau of Reclamation and the Department represent.ative, Peter Barrows, assigned to Bureau of Reclamation projects rega'rd.Lng specific sites, specifications and maps of the Yellow Jacket Project. From the study of maps, aerial photos and field surveys of the Site, measure the acres of deer and elk range innundated or otherwise affected by development in t.heform of roads, c~~als and ot.her structures. use of these areas will be determined by transects through them counting pellet groups and estimating the utilizat.ion on browse species present. 2. Contact Department field men in the area, long-time residents of the area and draw from Biologistst knowledge of the area, concerning the probable changes in deer and elk range and seasonal movement patterns resulting from the Lmpoundmerrt and accompanyfng st ruc tur-es , 3. Examine the areas which will be provided with irrigation water from the project to determine current use by deer and elk and estimate potent.ial crop daw~ge which may result. when the project is completed, based on current knowledge of damage in similar areas. 4. m~en all of t.he foregoing data are obtained, analyzed and interpreted, recommend means ofmit.igating the effects of the project on deer and elk. �- 339 - Yellow Jacket Project Raymond J. Boyd contact was made with the Bureau of Reclamation office in Grand Junction, Colorado and they furnished the necessary maps, specifications, costs and other related information on the Yellow Jacket Project. Additional information was received from the Denver Office of the Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department from the Water Resources Division .. Field wo~k in the area affected by the project was accomplished by taking maps of the affected area and driving over the entire project area to get an idea of the magnitude of the project. Several pellet group transects were run.in various areas to get an idea of the areas of game use and the season of use. An intensive elk winter range survey was run in the immediate area in 1961 and all of the information from this survey was gathered from inclusion in the final report. Maps of vegetative types, soil condition, vegetative species present and acreages were also obtained for the affected area. Big game kill data for the area in question is on hand and needs only to be summarized. Information on elk and deer migrations in the project area is on hand from tagging information and band sightings since 1957· Preliminary plans for structures that could be placed in canals to assist big game animals to escape are on hand for inclusion in the final report. All aerial trend counts in the affected area are summarized as well as the kill locations of elk during the 1963, 1964 and 1965 big game seasons. Virtually all of the information necessary to write the final report is on hand and only time is needed to complete the report. Press of other duties and additional assignments outside of the project have precluded finishing this report for this segment. Submission of the final report will be later this year. Prepa~ed by: Raymond J. Boyd Associate Researcher Date: July, 1966 Approved by: Richard N. Denney Project Leader Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator ��July, 1966 - 341 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO --------~~~~--------- Project No. W-38-R-20 Work Plan No. 12 Deer-Elk Investigations Job No. 3 Title of Job: Upper Gunnison Project Period Covered: April 1, 1965 through March 31, 1966 Personnel: Richard N. Denney This project was revised to a lower priority by the Bureau of Reclamation during the segment, and time did not allow sufficient field work to enable a comprehensive report this year. It will be completed during the 21st segment of the project. Prepared by: Richard N. Denney Project Leader Approved by: Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief ��- 343 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO ------~~~~----------- Project No. W-38-R-20 Work Plan No. 13 Title of Job: Deer-Elk Investigations Job No. 1 Indexing Progress and Job Completion Reports For Deer-Elk Investigation Literature Period Covered: April 1, 1965 through March 31, 1966 Personnel: Raymond J. Boyd Objectives: 1. To prepare an index for all Game Research Reports published by the Colorado Department of Game, Fish and Parks, listing deer-elk investigation literature contained in Progress and Completion reports. 2. To arrange the index to conform to a standard format, that will accomodate all other categories of investigative literature published in Quarterly Progress and Game Research Reports~ 3. To make the index available for incorporation in a composite index of Quarterly Progress and Game Research Reports. See composite report contained in the April, 1966, Part One issue of the Game Research Report covering all indexing activities planned under this project and Federal Aid Projects W-37-R, W-40-R, W-88-R and W-lOl-R. Prepared by: Raymond J. Boyd Wildlife Rese~rcher Date: July, 1966 Approved by: Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief � https://cpw.cvlcollections.org/files/original/1d546ac3751a3cc2810ba41e9986d07b.pdf 13a648a6e673acfbed2ae263a486d922 PDF Text Text July, 1966 - 349 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO An Investigation of 2,4-D Application to ------~~~~~-------Sagebrush Within a Mountain Shrub-Conifer Project No. W-114-R-l Work Plan No. 1 Title of Job: Period Covered: Personnel: Complex, Uncompahgre Plateau Job No. 1 Vegetative Studies June 1, 1965 to May 1, 1966 Allen E. Anderson, Doyle Markham, Lewis Nelson Jr. ABSTRACT The composition and cover of perennial plants and air-dry forage yields of sagebrush were sampled within 700 acres of sagebrush distributed in 8 disjunct communities. Measurements were made during 1958-59 (pre-treatment) and 1965-66 (post-treatment). The dynamics described herein may be a combination of treatment and other environmental effects. Lacking controls, cause and effect relationships are tenuous. As derived from 211, permanent loop-frequency transects (21,100 observations), mean indices of sagebrush percent ground cover on all areas decreased about 50 percent while the grass and grasslike component gained about 50 percent during the post-treatment period. Frequency indices (with 95 percent binomial confidence limits) of all recorded plants suggest that this gain was primarily among june grass, Koeleria cristata needle and thread, Stipa comata and the bluegrasses, Poa spp. Post-treatment frequencies of forbs were reduced 3 to 10-fold with the greatest losses in lupine, Lupinus sp. and hairy goldaster, Chrysopsis villosa. Among the forb genera, Eriogonum spp. occurred in maximum frequencies, pre- and post-treatment. Frequencies of total vegetation declined on all areas following treatment. Pre- and post-treatment mean sagebrush air-dry forage yields estimated on combined areas with 90 percent confidence limits were: 427.2 (385.5-469.0) and 244.9 (215.5-274.3) pounds per acre, respectively, on partially treated areas and 295.3 (266.7-323.5) to 158.3 (130.2-i86.3) pounds per acre, respectively, on completely treated areas. On most areas there was a significant (p (.001) decrease in mean crown diameter per plant with a significant (p <.001) increase in mean forage yield per plant during the post-treatment period. However, the 21.1-73.4 percent reduction among area plant densities accounts for the overall post-treatment decrease in mean forage yeilds. Sagebrush percent ground cover, density (plants or clumps per acre) and air-dry forage yields (pounds per acre) estimated on individual areas, showed that maximum pre-treatment means + standard �- 350 - ± ± ± deviations were: 25.4 13.8 percent, 6,819 2,618 plants, 478.7 275.3 pounds, respectively. Minimum post-treatment estimates were 1.9 ± 4.4 percent, 2,008 ±3,657 plants, and 92.5 ± 206.2 pounds, respectively. Based on average measurement times and coefficients of variation obtained.on nested, .001, .0023, and .01 acre, circular plots; mean crown diameters and forage yields of sagebrush were most efficiently estimated on the smaller plots even though their variances were significantly (P <.01) higher. All sizes estimated similar mean forage yields and densities. Reconnnendations: year intervals. The measurements described herein should be repeated at five- Acknowledgements: I thank J. Dodson, G. Hetzel, D. Markham, C. Cruz for field assistance and L. Nelson Jr., K. Nicolls for sunnnarization of data. Most of the sagebrush data were analyzed using a digital computer at the C. S. U. Statistical Laboratory by Ben Duran and Gerald Beck under the supervision of D. C. Bowden. p. Gilbert and L. E. Yeager provided ,administrative aid; L. G. Frary, R.' Gierisch, R. R. Hill, D. J. O'Rourke, H. Meyer, E. H. Reid, E. Rennnenga, R. Schmitt, D. R. Smith and G. T. Turner provided assistance within their specialties. H. D. Harrington verified identification of some plant species. F. W. Whicker drafted Figs. 1 and 2 and Mrs. Judy Hewitt, Figs. 3 and 4. Miss Florence Fields of the Game and Fish Laboratory weighed the 1965 samples of sagebrush forage. Objectives: (1) Obtain indices of plant composition and cover within each of eight, (four sprayed, and four control) sagebrush connnunities for comparison with pre-treatment indices. (2) Estimate mean sagebrush forage production (airdry pounds per acre) within each of eight (four sprayed, four control) sa,gebrush connnunities for comparison with pre-treatment means. Techniques Used: Indices of plant cover and composition Field. -- Since the study was originally designed as a cooperative effort with the U. S. Forest Service, their methodology was employed; both to increase the interpretative value of the data to the Forest Service and to insure re-measuremente A total of 211, permanent, loop-frequency (Parker) transects were used to sample 700 acres of sagebrush existing in 8 disjunct communities. Thirtytwo transects were installed and read from August 14, 1958 to September 8, 1958.,1 and 179 from August 7, 1959 to September 8, 1959. The numbered fecal plot/stakes were used to locate the loop-frequency transects being randomly selected 1 on each sagebrush area and marked with labeled steel fence posts. Each served as a hub for a cluster of 2 or 3 transects located on randomly-selected compass bearings. Initially, a few were located on previously selected cardinal directions. All were placed about 66 or 100 feet from the hub fence post to mollify possible effects on the site by animals attracted to the hub fence post. Transects were installed by tautly stretching a 100-foot steel tape above the vegetation with specially designed and fabricated steel tape-stretchers driven into 1/ "Random selection" means that a table of random numbers was used in selecting plot numbers, compass bearings, etc. �- 351 - . 1/ the ground at each end of the tape. A plumb bob was used to precisely install three, red-painted, angle-iron stakes driven about 14 inches into the ground at .the 0.0, 50.5 and 99.5 foot marks, or as close to these marks as site conditions permitted. Variations from these positions and tape heights above the ground at each stake were recorded. Observations on vegetation, litter and soil were made with a plumb bob and.a 3/4-inch diameter metal loop or micro-plot (.4418 square inches in area) at each foot mark for 100 observations. along the tape. To increase the sensitivity of this sampling technique, each observation point, plot, or "hit" was considered to be two-dimensional and sampled all perennial vegetation from the ground surface to a height of 5 feet. The center of each plot was defined by the plumb bob point. Specific criteria for plot observations are listed in Appendix 1 and the form on which they were recorded is included under Appendix 2. Plant names and·their symbols are given in Appendix 3. Sampling intensity at the chosen level of prec1s10n (20 percent of the mean at the 70 percent confidence level) was estimated with the formula of Snedecor (1946:458) on the basis of the mean and variance of the most variable plant category on a 10 transect sample of each of the 8 sagebrush areas. The categories were: (1) sagebrush, (2) other shrubs and half-shrubs, (3) junegrass, and (4) all perennial grasses and desirable forbs, including junegrass. Sample size requirements were met on all areas except number 5 where an apparent scarcity of junegrass made the required estimate impracticable. All transects within the sagebrush areas were re-measured from August 12, 1965 to October 16, 1965. The tape was set at the measured height used in 1959 and re-aligned over the 0.0 and 99.5 foot stakes with the plumb bob. The 50.5 stake could be used only for alignment on most transects; presumably because of the much heavier tape used in 1965. However, most transects could be returned to the original position taken as within a radius of about one-half inch of the outside apex of the angle at the top of the 0.0 and 99.5 foot stakes. A few transects had one or more stakes either missing or driven below the ground surface. However, on no transect was the probable error in re-measurement deemed of sufficient magnitude to nullify the data. All missing stakes were replaced in 1965. Analyses. -- The loop-frequency transect data were tabulated for each of the 8 areas by four methods. The £irst is the usual tabulation used by Forest Service administration to provide comparable data. This method includes counting as a "hit" the first observation of perennial vegetation within the micro-plot for a maximum of 100 observations per plot. Observations per dominant species (sagebrush, junegrass, etc.) or categories of ecological interest (shrubs, half-shrubs) were summed for each transect and described statistically using the transect as the basic sampling unit. The second method includes tabulating all observations on perennial vegetation occurring within the two-dimensional plots described above. The total number of transects on which a particular plant occurred was divided by the total number of transects within an area. The third method also involved tabulation of all observations of individual plants occurring within 11 Tape-stretchers were designed and Range Experiment Station, by Mr. G. T. Turner, Fort Collins. Rocky Mountain Forest �- 352 - the two-dimensional plots. The total for each plant was divided by the total possible number of observations or plots for each treatment. Thus, all treated areas had 113 transects or 11,300 possible observations; while the "control" areas with 98 transects had 9,800 possible observations. Because of these large sample sizes, it was considered permissible to apply the 95 percent binomial confidence limits to the resultant "frequency indices" as tabulated or interpolated (approximately) from Table 6 in Mainland (et ale 1956). The fourth method involved employing the 27 permanent, 9 squar-;':-foot,photo quadrats with their lists of perennial vegetation as list quadrats. Frequencies of plants recorded on these quadrats are cited primarily for the purpose of providing a complete, permanent record of all vegetative data. All summations on field data sheets (Appendix 2) were checked at least twice. All subsequent tabulations were checked twice or three times prior to computational procedures with a desk calculator. Shrub mortality Field. -- All observations of the living and dead portions of four major shrubs (big sagebrush, rabbitbrush, Gambel oak, snowberry) recorded on the 21,100 microplots of the loop-frequency transects were summed by area and treatment for the pre- (1958-59) and post-treatment (1965) periods. Current annual growth within these plots was ignored. Analyses. -- The data were coverted to "mortality ratios" according to Simpson et ale (1960:321) to facilitate comparisons between areas, treatments, and period~ The ratios were tested for significant (P <.05) differences by chi square contingency tables. Sagebrush studies Field. -- The numbered, fecal plot stakes were used as the center of randomlyselected, .01 acre, circular, plots. Sampling intensity on each area was estimated on the basis of the mean and variance of the total crown diameter per plot measured on an initial sample and a stipulated level of precision (within 20 percent of the mean at the 70 percent confidence level) with the formula of Snedecor (1946:458). The crown-diameter of a sagebrush plant is the average of two measurements taken with a flexible steel tape to the nearest 0.1 foot of the maximum and minimum breadths of the living crown and at right angles to each other. The flowering parts and current annual growth were not included in these measurements. Because of the difficulty of distinguishing individual sagebrush plants in dense stands; clumps, 18 or more inches apart, were measured as separate units. Sagebrush crown diameters were thus measured on 208 plots in 1959 and 204 in 1965. The discrepancy is due to an inadvertent omission of 4 plots in 1965. Of the total number of plots, 140 were randomly selected for the unbiased selection of one sagebrush plant or clump, 1959 and 1965. This plant was the first nearest the center of the plot to be bisected by the radius cord or chain when beginning at, and moving in, a pre-determined position and direction. Its crmvn· diameter was measured and all green foliage, except the flowering parts, was �- 354 - Table l--Regression equation and constants relating the air-dry forage yield (Y) to crown diameter (X) of big sagebrush sampled from two treatments 1959 and 1965.+ These were used to estimate sagebrush forage yield by year and treatment. Y = AX + BX2h B SE r 4.83251 15.06077 12.53 .95 86 17.48095 17.14633 12.47 .94 Control 54 9.05313 15.17427 16.54 .95 Control 54 23.62551 Year Treatment N+ A 1959 2,4-D 86 1965 2,4-D 1959 1965 + 9.96598 19.53 .89 Number of plants on which the crown diameter was measured and all green forage (excluding the flowering parts) clipped, air-dried, and weighed. * There are significant (p( .05) differences between each regression equation. Table 2-Results of Bartlett's test of homogeneity of variance+ of big sagebrush forage yields estimated on permanent, .01 acre, circular plots, 1959 and 1965. Corrected Degrees Chi of Square Freedom Significance Level Year Treatment Comparison 1959 1959 1959 individual control individual 2,4-D combined control, 2,4-D 5.90 3.17 40.85 3 3 7 P < .10 P < .50 P < .001 1965 1965 1965 individual control individual 2,4-D combined control, 2,4-D 4.69 10.25 3.72 3 3 7 P < .20 P< .02 P < .90 + (Snedecor 1946:251) �- 355 - Vegetative Studies Allen E. Anderson Plant cover and composition, 1958-59 and 1965 Transect means. -- Descriptive statistics of categorized data are presented by individual area in Tables 3 and 4. The 1965 sagebrush means were about 50 percent of the 1959 means on most areas. The 95 percent confidence limits computed about the 1958-59 and 1965 sagebrush means do not overlap. Mean sagebrush values computed on area 1 were 24.17 (1958-59) and 1.88 (1965). This was the largest decrease on any of the 8 areas. Indices of potential sagebrush mortality about two months after 2,4-D application were also at a maximum on this area (Anderson 1960:48). Cover indices of shrubs other than sagebrush and half-shrubs were reduced somewhat on all areas but their 95 percent confidence limits overlapped except on area 1. Junegrass Koeleria cristata mean cover indices more than doubled on area 1; increased markedly on area 8, but did not change appreciably on the remaining areas. Perennial, herbaceous vegetation mean cover indices, however, nearly doubled on most areas and their pre- and post-treatment 95 percent confidence limits did not overlap for any area except 5 and 6. Litter (dead organic matter from the previous growing season) mean cover indices-appeared to decrease on most areas and their pre- and post-treatment confidence limits did not overlap. On areas 1 and 8, however, litter means increased but with overlapping confidence limits. The decrease in litter cover may be associated with the presumably lesser amounts of leaves, twigs and other components of sagebrush foliage. The stable or possibly increased litter cover on areas 1 and 8 may have been influenced by the relatively larger increases in junegrass cover as described above. The reduction in the 1965 mean index of perennial vegetative cover (Table 5) may be ascribed to the significant reduction of the dominant sagebrush. Increases in mean cover classified as l:1.vestockforage were somewhat larger on the presumably more effectively treated areas; 1, 3, 5 and 6. Generally, decreases in litter mean cover indices were accompariied by somewhat larger increases in bare soil. Small, and probably ecologically unimportant changes occurred in the indices of mean rock, moss, and erosion pavement cover. However, the small but consistent decrease in the 1965 indices of mean erosion pavement cover could mean either measurement bias or lessened soil erosion as influenced by the larger amounts of forage cover in dicated for 1965. Frequency indices based on 211 transects, 1958-59 and 1965. -- The occurrence of perennial vegetation on individual transects should provide information on large-scale distributional changes of sp~cific genera and species. The following information (Table 6) and narrative summarizes these changes by sagebrush area. Areas 1 and 2 were the only ones on which measurable post-treatment reduction in the distribution of sagebrush was indicated. Moreover, both rabbitbrush and snowberry were also reduced in distribution on area 1. Rabbitbrush, however, may have expanded on areas 3 and 5. Shrubby eriogonum ~s reduced on area 2 but apparently increased on area 4. The 1965 distribution of Gambel oak and the cactus family were at 1958-59 levels on all areas except 2; where there WdS a marked reduction in oak and an increase in cactus. Cactus also 'increased on area 5. Among the grass species, junegrass was most widely distributed in 1958-59, remained so in 1965, but made an appreciable gain only on area 8. �Table 3. -~ Statistical description of vegetative transect data on 4 sagebrush areas partially treated with 2,4-D, June 1960, Britt Point study area, Uncompahgre National Forest. + Attribute Artr Area 1958-59 23 22.52 37.88 26.21 18.83 2 1965 23 11. 30 54.42 13.96 8.64 Area 4 1958-59 1965 16 16 20.25 14.00 29.88 34.71 23.47 16.59 17.03 11.41 Area 7 1958-59 1965 36 36 13.28 7.53 68.90 73.17 16.28 9.33 10.28 5.73 Area 8 1958-59 1965 23 23 25.35 10.52 54.44 79.75 31.32 14.15 19.38 6.89 Upper Lower 23 5.91 57.02 7.36 4.46 23 4.61 80.04 6.20 3.02 16 12.38 86.27 18.07 6.69 16 5.63 100.18 8.63 2.63 36 8.64 109.14 11.72 5.56 36 4.33 129.79 6.17 2.49 23 7.87 88.69 10.88 4.86 23 5.87 95.23 8.29 3.45 Upper Lower 23 5.13 74.85 6.79 3.47 23 5.78 62.46 7.34 4.22 16 5.81 67.99 7.92 3.70 16 6.06 44.06 7.48 4.64 36 3.03 107.59 4.09 1.97 36 4.36 83.49 5.55 3.17 23 4.74 84.39 6.46 3'.02 23 8.48 67.33 10.95 6.01 Upper Lower 23 9.09 49.50 11.04 7.14 23 15.70 39.43 18.37 13.03 16 7.56 60.71 10.01 5.11 16 14.25 42.81 17.50 11.00 36 8.64 53.47 10.15 7.13 36 12.28 50.08 14.29 10.27 23 7.04 59.66 8.87 5.21 23 14.26 39.83 16.71 11.81 Statistic N* X C.V. (%) Conf. Limit~""*: Upper Lower Other Shrubs N* it C. v. (%) Conf. Limit**: Kocr N* X C.V. (%) Conf , Limit**: Kocr & All Perennial Grasses & Desirable Forbs N* X· C.V. (%) Conf. Limit**: Litter N* 23 23 16 16 36 36 23 23 45.43 37.52 36.81 28.00 32.56 21.42 35.04 43.00 C. v. (%) 15.74 45,.00 28.38 29.61 30.22 57.28 32.82 25.35 Conf. Limit**: Upper 48.52 42.12 42.63 34.71 35.77 25.43 40.02 47.71 21.29 Lower 42.34 32.92 30.99 29.35 17.41 30.06 38.29 Portions of all four areas were inadvertently sprayed by the Forest Service contractor in June, 1960. In 1959, portions of Areas 2 and 7 received some wind-drifted 2,4-D and probably sprayed in 1960. it + * Number of permanent loop-frequency transects with 100 observations per transect. ** Computed by + SE (t .05 at n-1 D.F.). w \Jl 0'\ �Table 4. -- Statistical description of vegetative transect data on 4 sagebrush areas treated with 2,4-D, June 8, 1959, Britt Point study area, Uncompahgre National Forest. Statistic Attribute Artr Area 1 1965 1958-59 Area 6 1965 1958-59 Upper Lower 42 1.88 234.04 3.21 .55 25 16.48 44.24 19.49 13.47 25 6.36 93.87 8.82 3.90 28 13.29 68.70 16.84 9.74 28 5.82 76.63 7.55 4.09 18 9.94 72.84 13.55 6.33 18 3.28 67.68 4.38 2.18 Upper Lower 42 6.93 93.65 8.89 4.97 42 2.19 149.77 3.18 1.20 25 7.92 98.99 11.16 4.68 25 4.68 85.90 6.34 3.02 28 6.89 92.89 9.37 4.41 28 4.29 124.01 6.35 2.23 18 5.67 98.41 8.46 2.88 18 4.22 105.21 6.43 2.01 C.v. (%) Conf , Limit~\-: Upper Lower 42 7.12 57.87 8.37 5.87 42 17.50 37.09 19.46 15.54 25 5.44 72.43 7.07 3.81 25 7.04 58.52 8.74 5.34 28 1.82 125.27 2.70 .94 28 1.61 90.06 2.17 1.05 18 5.00 73.80 6.84 3.16 18 5.39 70.69 7.29 3.49 Upper Lower 42 10.45 44.21 1l.84 9.06 42 25.10 25.94 27.07 23.13 25 10.00 46.00 11.90 8.10 25 19.72 37.47 22.77 16.67 28 7.25 54.48 8.79 5.71 28 10.11 44.91 11. 87 8.35 18 1l.89 47.18 14.68 9.10 18 16.72 44.74 20.44 13.00 C.V. (%) Conf , Limit~": Upper Lower 42 39.52 24.14 42.40 36.64 42 54.21 18.34 57.22 51.20 25 42.04 26.59 46.66 37.42 25 30.12 36.35 34.64 25.60 28 33.25 34.44 37.68 28.82 28 17.68 61.20 21. 88 13.48 18 36.11 29.88 41.47 30.75 18 22.50 38.53 26.81 18.19 C.v. (%) Coni. Limit*: Kocr Area 5 1965 1958-59 42 24.17 34.38 26.68 21. 66 N+ X Other Shrubs & Ha lf Shrubs Area 3 1965 1958-59 N+ X C.v. (%) Conf. Limit*: N+ X Kocr & All Perennial Grasses ~ Desirable Forbs N+ Litter· N+ X C.V. (%) Coni. Limit*: X + Number of permanent, loep-frequency transects with 100 observations per transect. * Computed by + SE (t .05 at N-l D.F.). w V1 -.J �Table 5--A comparison of the transect means of selected site variables, prior to, and about 6 years following aerial application of 2,4-D. CONTROL+ 2.4-D+ 2 4 7 8 18 Combined 113 23 16 36 23 Combined 98 31.7 27.2 - 4.5 32.6 30.6 - 2.0 39.9 31.8 - 8.1 44.9 35.7 - 9.2 48.3 39.7 - 8.6 38.8 27.2 -11.6 47.3 34.0 -13.3 43.8 33.8 -10.0 9.0 19.3 +10.3 7.2 10.1 + 2.9 11.6 16.8 + 5.2 9.5 18.0 + 8.5 9.1 15 5 + 6.4 7.5 13.9 + 6.4 8.6 12.1 + 3.5 7.0 14.3 + 7.3 8.2 13.6 + 5.4 39.4 54.1 +14.7 41.2 30.2 -11.0 32.9 17.6 -15.3 36.3 22 5 -13.8 37.7 34.7 - 3.0 45.2 37.9 - 7.3 36.7 28.1 - 8.6 32.6 21.4 -11.2 34.9 43.1 + 8.2 36.8 31.5 - 5.3 1958-59 1965 Diff. 11.4 11.6 + .2 16.9 33.3 +16.4 32.4 52.5 +20.1 29.1 44.9 +15.8 20.6 31.8 +11.2 9.0 25.8 +16.8 7.0 28.4 ±21.4 20.9 42.2 +21.3 14.3 20.0 + 5.7 14.3 30.9 +16 6 1958-59 1965 Diff. 0.4 0.3 - 0.1 0.3 0.4 + 0.1 1.6 1.4 - 0.2 1.3 1.2 - 0.1 0.8 0.1 0.3 + 0.2 4.7 4.8 + 0.1 1.1 - 0.1 0.2 0.3 + 0.1 1.6 + 0.5 2.0 2.2 + 0.2 1958-59 1965 Diff. 0.1 0.5 + 0.4 o 0.4 0.8 + 0.8 + 0.7 0.6 0.8 + 0.2 0.2 0.7 + 0.5 0.1 0.2 + 0.1 0.3 0.2 - 0.1 1.1 0.8 - 0.3 0.1 0.3 + 0.2 0.5 0.6 + 0.1 . 1958-59 1965 Diff. 0.3 0.2 0.1 1.4 0.2 1.2 0.2 0.1 0.1 0.7 0.2 0.5 7.7 0.2 0.9 o 3.3 - 0.5 - 4.4 2.2 1.0 - 1.2 2.6 1.0 0 5 1.9 0.6 - 1.3 1 3 5 6 Variable Year 42 25 28 Perennial Plant Cover Index*' 1958-59 1965 Diff. 48.5 33.3 -15.2 40.2 35.1 - 5.1 Forage Cover Index*' 1958-59 1965 Diff. 10.4 23.9 +13.5 Litter 1958-59 1965 Diff. 0 Q w V1 Bare Soil Rock Moss Erosion Pavement 1.1 1.1 07 0 0 0 - 1. 6 + No. of permanent, 100 observation, loop-frequency transects under the individual area number. * Corresponds to the "Plant Density Index" and "Forage Density Index" of the U. S. Forest Service (Parker 1951); the latter includes only those herbaceous genera believed to be palatable to livestock. CD �Table 6--Frequency indices++ of all perennial plants recorded on 211 loop-frequency transects by treatment and sagebrush area, 1958-59 and 1965. Category Plant 1 ~422 65 58-59 Shrubs & Half Shrubs Artr CliRY GUTI SYMP ERIO Quga ROSA CACT Unk>; Pipo PRUN Pied Cemo Bere PENS Potr Arca Pien Arfr TETR JUNI Spco 1.00 .88 .14 .12 .02 .02 .02 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Kocr Stco POA CARE AGRO Sihy BROM Bogr MUHL SPOR U[1k.* .98 .29 .21 .24 .19 .19 .02 Grasses & Grasslike 0 0 0 .15 .38 .50 .21 .07 .05 0 .02 0 0 0 0 0 0 .02 0 0 0 0 .05 0 0 0 1.00 .69 .29 .19 .38 .69 .07 0 0 0 .26 224-D Areas~'< 5 ~28) 3 ~25) 65 65 58-59 58-59 1.00 1.00 .84 1.00 .43 .25 .80 .64 0 0 0 .12 .04 0 .36 .40 .39 .29 .16 .16 .14 .14 .16 .16 .04 0 0 0 .36 .25 .04 .08 0 .29 .•08 .68 .04 0 0 .04 .04 0 0 .04 .46 .43 .12 .08 .04 .ll 0 .04 .04 0 0 .04 0 0 .12 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 .14 0 .04 0 .07 .07 .04 .04 0 0 0 0 .92 .48 .16 .28 .16 .08 0 .16 .04 0 .52 1.00 1.00 .88 .44 .28 .20 .12 .20 0 0 .44 .75 .57 .32 .14 .18 .71 .ll 0 .07 .04 0 .04 .96 .04 .33 1,00 .44 0 .ll .28 .22 0 .39 0 0 0 .33 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 .17 .17 0 1.00 .74 0 .22 .70 .17 .04 .21 .04 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 .04 0 0 0 1.00 .57 0 .13 .57 .09 .04 .35 0 0 0 0 0 0 .13 0 0 0 .04 .09 0 0 .94 .06 .94 .72 .67 .28 .22 .ll .96 .74 .04 .09 .48 .96 1.00 .78 .09 .52 .22 0 .35 0 0 .35 1.00 .19 0 .38 .19 .06 0 .25 0 0 .19 0 .22 .06 0 0 0 0 .94 .93 0 0 0 0 1.00 .56 0 .06 .33 .22 0 .33 .33 .06 0 .22 0 .06 0 0 0 0 0 0 .17 0 Control Areas'>" 7 ~36) 4 C16) 65 58-59 65 58-59 1.00 1.00 .89 .94 .33 .36 .81 .75 0 .19 .13 .13 .17 .25 .25 .50 .17 .19 .06 .31 .28 .28 .13 .13 0 0 0 0 .ll .14 .13 .19 .03 .56 0 .81 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 .17 0 .19 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 .06 .17 0 .13 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 .06 0 .06 0 .06 0 0 0 0 0 .03 .03 0 0 .03 0 0 0 6 (18) 65 58-59 0 .29 .17 0 1.00 0 0 .39 2 C23) 65 58-59 0 0 .39 .04 0 .04 LOO .63 1.00 .44 .13 .19 .13 .19 0 0 .31 .86 .36 0 .17 .17 .06 0 .64 .03 0 .59 .83 .50 .61 .06 .28 .14 .06 .61 .03 0 .25 8 (23) 65 58-59 1.00 .70 .26 .48 0 0 0 0 .57 0 0 0 0 0 0 .04 .04 0 .09 0 0 0 .91 .70 .09 .39 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 .26 .09 0 0 .13 0 0 .04 .83 .96 .34 .82 .52 .57 .26 .17 .04 .09 0 .39 0 .26 .48 .13 .22 .09 .09 .09 0 .18 �Table 6-- Frequency Indices++ of all perennial plants recorded on 211 loop-frequency transects by treatment and sagebrush area, 1958-59 and 1965. (Continued). Category Forbs & Lichens Plant 1 ~42~ 58-59 65 2 4-D Areas~~ 3 ~25~ 5 ~28~ 58-59 65 58-59 65 6 ~18~ 58-59 65 2 ~23~ 58-59 65 Control Areas* 4 ~16~ 7 ~36~ 58-59 65 58-59 65 8 ~23~ 58-59 65 B1tr FEST STIP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ERIO LUPI Unk. VICI AREN ANTE SEDU POTE TARA ALLI Chvi PENS POLY GILl CAST Lichen VERB GERA ASTE Acla ARTE Basa PARD .93 .43 .31 .21 .31 .19 .19 .17 .05 .05 .05 .07 .04 .05 .02 .02 .02 .02 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 .02 .50 .14 .31 .17 .31 .12 .14 .05 .07 .05 .02 .24 0 0 0 .04 0 0 0 0 .04 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 .39 0 .18 .07 .46 .04 0 0 .12 .04 .04 .07 .46 0 0 .04 0 0 0 0 .14 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 .44 .11 .39 .33 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 .39 .33 .39 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 .61 .22 .26 .75 .31 .19 .25 .13 .44 .44 .19 0 .09 .09 .04 0 0 .04 .04 .04 0 .04 .04 .30 0 0 .30 .13 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 .13 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 .13 .06 0 0 0 0 0 .87 .52 .48 .39 .06 .07 .33 0 0 0 0 0 .32 .07 .04 0 0 0 0 .11 .21 .36 0 0 0 0 0 0 .72 .06 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 .57 .32 .48 .12 .20 .04 0 0 0 0 .44 .12 .52 .08 0 0 0 0 0 0 .48 0 0 .08 .08 .02 .05 0 0 .04 .76 .12 .16 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 .38 .06 0 .13 .25 0 0 0 .04 0 0 0 0 .19 .19 0 0 0 0 0 .06 .63 .19 .69 0 .19 .63 .25 .06 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 .19 0 0 .25 0 0 0 .06 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 .44 .17 .39 0 .25 .33 .69 .06 0 0 .53 0 0 .03 .06 0 0 0 .08 0 0 .03 0 .31 .03 .33 .33 .17 .31 .58 0 0 .03 .25 .03 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 .08 .03 0 .43 .48 .48 .04 .26 .30 .22 .17 .04 .13 .30 .13 .35 .09 .09 0 .13 .26 .17 0 .17 0 .09 .04 .04 0 0 0 0 0 .09 .09 0 .09 .04 0 .09 .17 0 0 .04 .26 0 0 .04 0 ++ The number of transects on which each plant was recorded divided by the number of transects. * The number in parenthesis beside each area number is the number of permanent 100 observation, loop-frequency transects located within that area. + Probably primarily Chrysothamnus sp. during 1958-59. Plants were about 2 inches in height. �- 361 - Conversely, needle and thread, which was not widely distributed on any area during the pre-treatment period; gained remarkably on all areas, especially 1, 3, and 7. Sedges also increased, particularly on areas 2, 4, and 5. The wheatgrasses made distributional gains on all areas; particularly 1, 3, 5, 6, and 8. Blue grama appeared to be somewhat static on all areas. Herbaceous Eriogonum spp., lupine, hairy goldaster, and stonecrop were reduced on most areas. Frequency indices based on 9,800 micro-plots, 1958-59 and 1965. -- This array (Table 7) provides more interpretable information on the dynamics of individual genera or species than the transect-based frequency indices. Bearing in mind that these data are from areas partially treated with 2,4-D in 1960; big sagebrush, rabbitbrush, Gambel oak and snowberry retain their dominant but considerably reduced frequency. Among the three dominant grasses, junegrass and needle and thread made the most substantial gains and the bluegrasses moved from seventh to second rank. Conversely, frequencies of the three dominant forbs (eriogonum, stonecrop, and hairy goldaster and most minor genera) were much reduced during the post-treatment period. The only notable exception was the increase in western yarrow. As compared to pre-treatment frequencies, the shrub, half-shrub and forb post-treatment frequencies indicated significant losses while the grass and grass-like category, significant gains. Probably under the conditions of a significant reduction in woody plants, the competitive status of the already dominant grass and grass-like component was enhanced resulting in an actual reduction of forbs. A significant post-treatment decrease in total perennial vegetative 1i-equency occurred, presumably as a result of 2,4-D application. Obviously, this was due primarily to the reduced frequencies of the shrub and forb components. Frequency indices based on 11,300 micro-plots, 1958-59 and 1965. -- The sun~ation in Table 8 involves those areas completely treated with 2,4-D on June 8, 1959. Pre-treatment, the dominant shrubs were big sagebrush, rabbitbrush, Gambel oak, and pinyon pine. In 1965, all except pinyon pine were significantly reduced from pre-treatment levels. Pinyon pine moved from fourth to third rank; and minor shrub genera were at, or below pre-treatment levels. Interspecific changes in the relative rankings of gr as s or grass-like species are particularly striking compared to the parially sprayed areas. Of the identified grasses, junegrass, blue grama, and needle and thread occurred in maximum frequencies in that order, prior to treatment. Post-treatment, the ranked order was junegrass, needle and thread, blue grama, bluegrass and wheatgrass. Of the identified pretreatment forb genera; eriogonum, lupine, stonecrop, and pussy toes were ranked in order of descending frequency. A 3 to 10-fold post-treatment reduction in forb frequency was accompanied by a change in the dominant ranking to eriogonum, sto~ecrop, pussy toes, and sandwort. Lupine moved from a pre-treatment position of second to ninth, post-treatment. As on the partially treated areas, the post-treatment total plant category frequencies show significant redtltions in shrubs, half-shrubs, and forbs and significant increases in the grass and grass-like components. There was also a significant, post-treatment reduction in the total vegetative frequency. List quadrat frequencies, 1958 and 1965. -- Plants recorded on permanent, 9 sq. - foot, photo-quadrats are shown in Table 9. The only obvious item of interest in this inadequate sample is the possibility that a small number of list quadrats will generally reflect treatment effects on some of the dominant genera. �Tab1e7~requency indices with approximate binomial confidence limits+ of perennial vegetation ,occurring within 9,800, 3/4 inch diameter circular plots on 4 "control" sagebrush areas; 1958-59 and 1965. Category Plant Symbol No. Obs. Trees, Shrubs, Half-Shrubs Artr CHRY Quga Unk.* SYMP ERIO Pied GUT I CACT· Potr ROSA Arfr JUNI Arca Mare TETR Spco Pien Total Grasses & Grasslike Kocr Bogr Stco GARE Unk. AGRO POA MUHL Sihy BROM STIP B1tr Total 1,929 297 219 194 115 83 26 37 17 10 6 3 2 2 Freq. Index 1958-59 95% Confo Limits Lower Upper 1965 No. Obs. Freq. Index 95% Conf! Limits Lower Upper .1040 .0176 .0081 .000003 ~0064 .0073 .0021 .0002 .0021 .0006 .00006 .0006 .00006 0 0 ~00002 000002 1000003 .1615 ,,0110 .0042 .0013 .0042 .0021 .0009 .0020 .0009 ,,0004 .0004 ,,0007 00007 10006 .1765 .0652 .0128 .0176 .0046 .0037 .0064 .0270 .0001 .0021 .0004 .00002 100006 .1549 .0751 .0174 .0227 .0077 .0066 .0099 .0333 .0010 .0042 .0017 .0007 !0009 01693 0 0 0 2,941 01968 .0303 .0223 .0198 .0117 .0085 .0027 .0038 .0017 00010 .0006 .0003 .0002 00002 .0001 0 0 0 03001 01893 .0270 .0176 .0176 .0081 .0064 .0021 .0029 .0013 .0005 .0002 .00006 000002 .00002 .000003 0 0 0 .29l0 .2080 .0333 .0227 .0227 .0122 .0099 .0042 .0054 .0030 00019 .0013 ,,0009 .0007 .0007 .0006 .0004 .0004 .0004 .3090 0 0 2 2" 1 1,660 .1081 .0232 .0106 .0001 .0084 .0088 .0033 .0006 .0030 .0012 .0003 ,,0011 ,,0003 0 0 ,,0002 00002 iOOOl 01694 627 157 106 70 53 35 17 10 8 2 0 0 1,085 .0640 .0160 .0108 .0070 .0054 .0036 .0017 00010 .0008 .0002 0 0 .1107 .00555 .0137 .0081 .0055 .0037 00029 .0013 .0005 .0004 .00002 0 0 .1040 .0648 00184 00122 .0088 .0066 .0054 00030 .0019 .0016 .0007 .0004 0004 01163 706 148 229 60 44 77 275 4 27 9 2 3 1,584 00720 .0151 .0234 .0061 .0045 .0079 .0281 .0004 00028 .0009 .0002 .0003 .1616 1 1,059 227 104 1 82 86 32 6 29 12 3 11 3 .1163 .0227 .0122 .0006 .Oq99 LV 0\ ro �Table 7. __ Frequency indices with approximate binomial confidence 1imits+ of perennial vegetation occurring within 9,800, 3/4 inch diameter circular plots on 4 "control" sagebrush areas; 1958-59 and 1965. (Continued) Category Forbs Plant Symbol ERIO SEDU Chvi ANTE LUPI Unk , AREN ASTE POTE CAST GILl ARTE Basa VICI Ada ALLI PENS GERA TARA PARO SOLI POLY ERIG ASTE Total Tota I-All Plants a1. No. Obs. Freq. Index 236 199 108 94 91 66 54 31 20 16 15 12 II 10 9 5 4 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 983 5,009 .0241 .0203 .0110 •0096 .0093 .0067 .0055 .0032 .0020 .0016 .0015 .0012 .0011 .0010 .0009 .0005 .0004 .0001 .0001 0 0 0 0 0 .1003 .5107 1958-59 95% Conf. Limits Upper Lower .0214 .0176 .0081 .0081 . .0081 .0055 .0046 .0021 .0013 .0013 .0013 .0006 .0006 .0005 .0004 .0002 .0001 .000003 .000003 0 0 0 0 0 .09419 .4886 .0269 .0227 .0122 .0122 .0122 .0088 .0077 .0042 .0030 .0030 .0030 .0021 .0020 .0019 .0017 .0012 .0010 .0006 .0006 .0004 .0004 .0004 .0004 .0004 .1060 .5513 1956) + (Mainland ~ * Probably Chrysothamnus sp., plants were about 2 inches in height. No. Obs. Freq. Index 147 106 23 77 11 .46 21 18 1 0 0 4 4 0 8 2 4 0 7 2 1 1 18 4 505 3,749 .0150 .0108 .0023 .0079 .001l .0047 .0021 .0018 .0001 0 0 .0004 .0004 0 .0008 .0002 .0004 0 .0007 .0002 .0001 .0001 .0018 .0004 .0515 .3826 1965 95% Conf. Limits Upper Lower .0118 .0081 .0013 .0064 .0006 .0038 .0013 .0013 .000003 0 0 .0001 .0001 0 .0004 .00002 .0001 0 .0006 .00002 .000003 .000003 .0011 .0001 .0477 .3735 .0174 .0122 .0030 .0099 .0020 .0067 .0030 .0030 .0006 .0004 .0004 .0010 .0010 .0004 .0016 .0007 .0010 .0004 .0020 .0007 .0006 .0006 .0028 .0010 .0565 .3926 w 0\ w �Table 8-Frequency indices with approximate binomial confidence limits of perennial vegetation 11,30.0. 3/4 inch diameter circular plots on 4 sprayed sagebrush areas; 1958-59 and 1965. Category Plant Symbol No. Dbs. Trees, Shrubs, Half-Shrubs Artr CHRY Quga Pied TETR ERIE> GUTI SYMP JUNI CAOT Pipo Cemo PRUN PENS ROSA 1,996 398 136 118 88 49 48 46 32 19 17 Mare EulC'\ Unk. Arfr Grasses & Grasslike Kocr Bogr Unk. Stco CARE POA AGRO Sihy BRGM MUH!. SPOR STIP FEST Freq. Index 1958-59 95% Conf. Limits Lower Upper 1965 No. Dbs. Freq. Index 95% Confs Limits Lower Upper .0.364 .0.176 .0.0.55 .0.125 .0.0.0.4 .0.0.37 .0.0.21 .0.0.21 .0.0.21 .0.0.13 .0.0.0.3 .0.0.0.0.0.2 .0.0.0.0.2 .0.0.0.0.1 .0.0.0.0.1 .0.0.0.0.2 0. .0.0.0.0.0.2 .0.0.0.0.2 .2882 .0.544 .0.277 .0.0.88 .0.176 .0.0.16 .0.0.66 .0.0.42 .0.0.42 .D~42 .0.0.30. .0.0.0.9 .0.0.0.5 .0.0.0.4 ••0.0.0.9 .0.0.0.9 .0.0.0.4 .0.0.0.3 .0.0.0.5 sDDD4 .30.63 .0.942 .0.270. .0.0.37 .0.270. .0.0.37 .0.148 .0.0.60. .0.0.42 .0.0.0.4 0. .10.60. .0.333 .0.0.66 .0.333 .0.0.66 .0.196 .0.0.95 .0.0.70. .0.0.16 .0.0.0.3 .0.0.0.3 .0.0.0.4 .0.0.0.8 .590.3 3 1 0. 0. 2,971 .1766 .0.352 .0.120. ,,0.10.4 ••0.0.78 .0.0.43 .0.0.42 ••0.0.41 .0.0.28 .0.0.17 .0.0.15 .0.0.0.8 ••0.0.0.7 0. .0.0.0.3 .0.0.0.3 ••0.0.0.1 0. 0. .5726 .1725 .0.333 .0.0.81 .0.0.81 .0.0.64 .0.0.29 .0.0.29 .0.0.29 .0.0.21 .0.0.13 .0.0.13 .0.0.0.3 .0.0.0.3 0. .0.0.0.0.5 .0.0.00.5 .0.0.0.0.0.2 0. 0. .5631 .1876 .0.364 .0.125 .0.125 .0.0.99 .0.0.54 .0.0.54 ••0.0.54 .0.0.42 ••0.0.30. .0.0.30. ••0.0.15 ••0.0.14 .0.0.0.3 .0.0.0.8 .0.0.0.8 .0.0.0.5 .0.0.0.3 0.0.0.3 .5825 1 2 4 4 2 0. 1 2 1,168 .0.450. .0.186 .0.0.74 .0.136 .0.0.0.9 .0.0.51 .0.0.28 .0.0.27 .0.0.29 .0.0.24 .0.0.0.5 .0.0.0.1 .0.0.0.2 ••0.0.0.4 .0.0.0.4 .0.0.0.2 0. .0.0.0.1 20.0.0.2 .2972 733 275 79 77 57 39 25 13 8 1 1 0. 0. 1,30.8 .0.649 .0.243 .0.0.70. .0.0.68 .0.0.50. .0.0.35 .0.0.22 .0.0.12 .0.0.0.7 .0.0.0.1 .0.0.0.1 0. 0. .2521 .0.593 .0.214 .0.0.55 .0.0.55 .0.0.37 .0.0.25 .0.0.13 .0.0.0.6 .0.0.0.3 .0.0.0.0.0.2 .0.0.0.0.0.2 0. 0. .2435 .0.699 .0.269 .0.0.88 ••0.0.88 .0.066 .0.0.48 .0.0.30. .0.0.20. .0.0.14 .0.0.0.5 .0.0.0.5 .0.0.0.3 00.0.0.3 .260.7 1,140. 318 56 360. 52 195 86 61 10. 0. 0. 2 3 2,283 .10.0.9 .0.281 .0.0.50. .0.319 .0.0.46 .0.173 .0.0.76 .0.0.54 .0.0.0.9 0. 0. .0.0.0.2 .0.0.0.3 .580.9 9 8 0. 3 occurring within 50.8 210. 84 154 10. 58 32 3D 33 27 6 a .0.0.0.0.2 .0.0.0.0.0.5 .5712 w 0'\ .j:;"" �Table SFrequency indices with approximate binomial confidence 'limits of perennial vegetation occurring within 11,300 3/4 inch diameter circular plots on 4 sprayed spagebrush areas; 1958-59 and 1965 (Continued). 0 Category Forbs Plant Symbol ERIG LUPI SEDU ANTE AREN Chvi Unk. VICI ASTE POTE TARA ALLI PENS) GILl PGl1Y CAST Lichen VERB ' GERA ARTE Ac1a 1958-59 95% Confl Limits Upper Lower No. Obs. Freqo Index 367 104 100 76 70 50 47 35 12 11 10 7 6 5 3 3 1 1 1 1 0 910 5,189 00325 .0092 .0088 ,,0067 .Q062 .0044 .0042 .0031 ,,0011 .0010 00009 .0006 .0005 00004 ,.0003 .003 00001 .0001 .0001 .0001 0 .1754 .4594 00270 ,,0073 ,,0073 .0055 .0046 .0029 .0029 .0021 .0006 .00049 .0004 ~00025 .00019 .00001 .000005 .000005 0000002 .000002 .000002 .000002 0 .1680 .4496 .0333 0110 .0110 .0088 00077 00054 00054 .0042 .0018 .0017 ,,0016 00013 00012 .0009 0008 .0008 .0005 .0005 .0005 .0005 0003 .1830 04692 0 0 No. Obs. Freq. Index 119 9 75 69 56 21 59 11 28 3 4 2 3 0 12 0 0 0 0 7 1 479 3,930 .0105 .0008 .0066 .0061 .0050 .0019 .0052 .0001 .0025 .0003 .0004 .0002 .0003 0 00011 0 0 0 0 .0006 .0001 .1219 .3482 1965 95% Confl Limits Lower Upper .0081 .0003 .0046 ~0046 .0037 .0012 .0039 .00049 .0017 .000005 .00001 .00002 .000005 0 .0006 0 0 0 0 .00025 1000002 .1156 .3388 .0122 .0015 .0077 .0077 .0066 00023 .0068 .0017 .0035 .0008 .0009 .0004 ,,0008 00003 .0018 .0003 .0003 .0003 00003 .0013 .0005 .1284 .3576 co ~ \Jl �- 366 - Table 9--Frequency of plants recorded on 27, permanent, 9 square foot photo quadrats by treatment, 1958 and 1965. Category Shrubs & Half-Shrubs Grasses & .Grasslike Forbs, Mosses, & Lichens 224-D 1958 No. Plots With Plant N = 19 1965 No. Plots With Plant 14 6 0 1 5 3 0 1 6 13 2 3 5 0 2 0 1 0 1 0 0 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 AGRO Bogr CARE Kocr POA Sihy Stco Unk. 1 4 2 13 7 1 0 4 2 5 2 18 11 6 15 0 2 0 1 7 1 0 0 1 7 4 1 5 0 Ac1a ANTE AREN ASTE CERA Chvi ERIO IRIS Lichen LUPI MOSS OENO ORTH PENS POLY POTE SEDU Unk. 0 3 0 1 2 0 5 0 1 1 5 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 4 1 0 5 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 4 1 1 1 0 0 1 3 0 1 4 1 1 0 2 0 0 1 4 Plant Artr Artr Arfr CACT CHRY ERIO ERIO GUTI PENS SYMP TETR (L)~~ (D)~'( (L) (D) (D) 3 1 0 3 3 8 0 0 4 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 13 1 0 6 0 1 1 2 10 * . L -indicates living plants; D -dead p1ants o Control N = 8 1958 1965 No. Plots No. Plots With With Plant Plant 6 3 3 5 0 0 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 2 1 3 �Shrub and mortality ratios Sagebrush. -- This index of the proportion of dead to living plant material recorded on the micro-plots of the loop-frequency transects suggests pre-treatment ratios ranged from 23 to 43 percent and from 54 to 89 percent, post-treatment (Table 10). The overall post-treatment mortality index was 64 percent for completely, and 61 percent for partially sprayed, sagebrush. However, a more realistic index of mortality might be considered as the difference between preand post-treatment ratios. Viewed in this way, the completely treated sagebrush exhibited about twice the mortality as the partially treated sagebrush. Rabbitbrush, Gambel oak, snowberry. The values obtained for some individual areas and genera are based on too few observations to have any useful interpretative value (Table 10). When areas are combined, however, rabbitbrush mortality indices changed from about 2 (pre-treatment) to 12 percent (post-treatment) on completely sprayed areas and from about 4 (pre-treatment) to 10 percent (post-treatment) on partially sprayed areas. The results of similar comparison, of Gambel oak mortality indices on completely sprayed areas (24 to 47 percent) and partially sprayed areas (24 to 57) may be due, in part, to the relatively low number of observations on this species. Snowberry mortality indices com.pared in the same were: 27 to 33 percent on completely, and 5 to 27 percent on partially treated, sagebrush areas. Tests of significance, sagebrush, rabbitbrush, Gambe1 oak, snowberry. -- In general, mortality ratios of these shrubs differed significantly between individual areas for both the pre- and post-treatment periods (Table 11). Notable exceptions were: Gambel oak, both treatments and periods; sagebrush within the partial "control" treated areas, pre-treatment period; and snowberry within the completely and partially treated areas, pre- and post-treatment. Pre- and post-treatment mortality ratios of each of the four shrubs were similar between the combined completely ~. partially treated areas, except for snowberry, pre-treatment. Pre-treatment vs. post-treatment comparisons of individual shrub mortality ratios, however, differed significantly (P(.05) for all species, again, with the exception of snowberry. The pre- and post-treatment mortality ratios of this genus were similar within the completely treated sagebrush areas. Studies of sagebrush Relative frequencies of crown diameters. -- Generally, both pre- and post-treatment curves developed from plants sampled within the partially treated (control) (Figure 3) or completely treated (Figure 4) reflect the same pattern of a preponderance of sagebrush plants or clumps at, or below, 9 inches in crown diameter. Treatment and other unidentified effects on these populations, however, are reflected in an increased proportion of smaller plants about one-half foot in diameter and a trend toward relatively fewer large plants during the post-treatment period. Curves derived from area 1, which had the maximum indices of treatment effect (Tables 4 and 10), exhibit this tendency to a relatively higher degree. Samples from the completely treated areas generally show larger post-treatment differences than the partially-treated areas. Mean crown diameter and air-dry forage yields per plant, 1959 and 1965. -- These estimates are described statistically for each area in Figs. 3 and 4. The difference between the 1959 and 1965 means with 95 percent confidence limits and �Table 10-Mortality ratios of big sagebrush, rabbitrush, Gambel oak, and snowberry based on examination of 11,300 (2,4-D treated areas) and 9,800 (control areas) 3/4 inch diameter, circular plots, 1958-59 and 1965. Year 1958-59 1965 Shrub Artr Artr Statistic Dead Alive Total Mortality Ratio Dead Alive Total Mortality Ratio No. of Observations B~ Area 1 314 1s026 1,340 2 4-D Treated 3 5 179 178 414 383 593 561 Control 7 208 489 697 8 Total 232 527 759 4 161 333 494 271 591 862 872 1s940 2,812 6 Total 2 136 182 318 807 2s005 2,812 .2343 .3019 .3173 .4277 .2870 .3057 .3259 .2984 .3144 .3101 704 91 795 415 167 582 297 191 488 224 67 291 1,640 516 2,156 -1J.1. 497 774 272 229 501 402 300 702 467 261 728 1,638 ls067 2,705 .8855 .7131 .6086 .7698 .7607 .6421 .5429 .5726 .6415 .6055 w 0\ ex> I 1958-59 1965 CHRY CHRY Dead Alive Total Mortality Ratio Dead Alive Total Mortality Ratio 3 298 301 3 58 61 0 18 18 2 22 24 8 396 404 1 62 63 1 81 82 2 58 60 9 96 105 13 297 310 .0010 .0492 0 .0833 .0198 .0159 .0122 .0333 .0857 .0419 7 85 92 19 73 92 2 26 28 1 26 27 29 210 239 8 30 38 1 35 36 3 39 42 16 125 141 28 229 257 .0761 .2065 .0714 .0370 .1213 .2l05 .0278 .0714 .1135 .1089 . �Table 10-Morta1ity ratios of big sagebrush, rabbitrush, Gambe1 oak, and snowberry based on examination of 11,300 (2,4-D treated areas) and 9,800 (control areas) 3/4 inch diameter, circular plots, 1958-59 and 1965. (Continued). Year Shrub Statistic No. of Observations B2 Area 1 1958-59 1965 Quga Quga Dead Alive Total Mortality Ratio Dead Alive Total Mortality Ratio 0 1 1 2 4-D Treated 3 5 29 22 67 72 96 94 2 6 41 47 Total 57 181 238 5 15 20 49 118 167 Control 7 27 125 t52 6 4 8 0 0 0 Total 81 258 339 0 .3021 .2340 .1277 .2395 .2500 .2934 .1776 0 .2389 0 0 0 25 18 43 26 41 67 24 26 50 75 85 160 10 6 16 51 28 79 79 73 152 0 0 0 140 107 247 0 05814 .3881 .4800 .4688 .6250 .6456 .5197 0 05668 w 0'\ \.0 I 1958-59 1965 SYMP SYMP Dead Alive Total Mortality Ratio 0 9 9 8 36 44 4 0 4 0 .1818 10000 Dead Alive Total Mortality Ratio 1 5 6 11 15 26 .1666 .04231 5 7 17 47 64 1 12 13 1 31 32 3 42 45 1 31 32 6 116 -122 7143 .2656 .0833 .0312 .0666 .•0312 .0492 3 4 7 0 6 6 15 30 45 7 11 18 14 17 31 9 30 39 0 24 24 30 -- 82 112 .4286 0 .3333 .3889 .4516 .2308 0 .2679 2 0 �Table 11--The results of chi square significance tests of pre (1958-59) and post (1965) treatment mortality ratios of 4 selected shrubs based on examination of 11,300 (sprayed areas) and 9,800 (control areas) 3/4 inch diameter, circular plots. Degrees of Freedom Artr 1958-59 1965 3 3 + 52.03+ 137.17 * 8.19 10.49** 5.62 3.96 23.12 4.98 1958-59 1965 3 3 1.24+ 19.88 8.OO~.,. 38.56+ 5.89 3.58 1.07++ 15.70 Comparison Between 4 treated areas: Shrub & ComEuted Chi Sguare Value CHRY Quga SYMP + Between 4 control areas: w .....;J 0 Combined treated vs. combined control areas: 1958-59 1965 1 1 0.36 1.31 3.01 0.19 0.002 3.75 18.15+ 0~67 treated control 1 1 10.96+ 4. 85~'" + 28.55++ 9.41 + 22.69+ 44.95 0.58+ 21.45 Combined 1958-59 vs. combined 1965 observations: Difference: + * ++ iri( Significant Significant Significant Singificant at P < .001 at P < .05 at p< .005 at P < .02 �AREA 1959 X N 1965 SO ""--=t --*--* -""-- ..•. 1959 >- N Crown Diameter (ft) Air- Dry Forage Yield Per Plant (0) z w SO -----.,...--..---- - ------'-----------. '" '---, .•.. Co) X N 723 0.59 0.51 723 20.89 28.57 2723 0.97 0.72 2723 26.75 39.53 Crown Diameter (f t) Air-Dry Forage Yield Per Plant (0) I 2165 2165 X ~ SO X N 0.84 0.58 19.7525.69 SO 1426 0.67 0.52 142624.18 29.1:3 ;:) o w a:: LL w AREA > 5 1959 t- ~ X N ...J Crown Diameter (ft) Air-Dry Forage Yield Per Plant (0) W a:: 1965 SO N co X -...J SO f-' 887 0.55 0.41 887- 17.65 21.09 1322 0.67 0.51 1322 14.01 19.09 A REA 6 1965 1959 N 586 586 Crown Diameter( ft) Air-Dry Forage Yield Per Plant (0) 0) <t- ~ 0) O) v. I 0 0 It) (\I 0) <t- ,... I 0 0 It). 0) O) Ol I 0 ,... It) 0) v (\I ...• I 0 0 0 - MEAN 0) 0) 0) 'I:t: "": I 0 It) (\I. v 0) 0) ~ I 0 0 ~ I 0 It) I'-: CROWN 0) v (\I. (\I I 0 0 o. (\I 0) 0) v t\i I 0 It) 0) v ,... t\i 0) (1) 0) t\i SO 0) v (\I 0) 0) v 0 0 0 It) I'-: N t\i (\I ~ INTERVALS I/') '" ro 0) 0) 0) v ,... ~ v I I I It) I/') It) ,... 0 0 0 (\I It) ~ ro ~ ~ ~ (ft ) I I 0 0 0 0) v If') 0 0 I 0) 0') ~ 0 SO 379 0.70 0.49 379 24.8 6 26.96 v ,... roO I It) 0) X N 0.75 0.49 15.70 18.39 I (\I DIAMETER X (\I 0 v ~ ~ I + 8 ,...0 It) ~ Figure 3. __ Relative frequency of the crown diameters of individual sagebrush plants or clumps and their air-dry forage 1960. yields estimated from the crown diameter-forage yield relationship on 4 areas partially treated with 2,4-D in June, The broken lines represent the 1959 sample; the solid lines, 1965. �AREA 1959 " -, " ..•. ••••••• '----" l~ _ _ ~-- X N AREA 3 1959 z Crown Diameter (f t) Air-Dry Forage Yield Per Plant (g) au ::::) SO 723 0.59 0.51 723 20.89 28.57 ---t__ .•. __ ..-=•.e-- .•----*-- ~--- >- o e ; 1965 N X SO 2723 0.97 0.72 2723 26.75 3$.53 Crown Diameter (ft) Air-Dry Forage Yield Per Plant (g) I X N 2165 2165 1965 SO X N 0.84 0.58 19.7525.69 SO 1426 0.67 0.52 142624.18 29.13 o au a: LL. au > AREA5 ~ /965 ~ < ..J au N X SO 1322 0.67 0.51 1322 14.01 19.09 Crown Diameter (ft) Air-Dry Forage Yield Per Plant (g) a: N X SO 887 0.55 0.41 887- 17.65 21.09 w -..J ro A REA 6 -X 1959 N Crown Diameter( ft) Air-Dry Forage Yield Per Plant (g) (1) v . (1) (1) N ~ I I 0 0 It) '" (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) v (1) v ,..... (1) (1) 0} v v I I 0 0 0 ~ It) ,.... -' '" I 0 0 o:t: - "': ~ I I I 0 0 0 0 It) - "'. Q MEAN ~ It) "'-: CROWN en en (1), v ,.... 586 586 (1) (1) en en v 1965 SO (1) (1) en v ,.... X N 0.75 0.49 15.70 18.39 SO 379 0.70 0.49 379 24.8 6 26.96 (1) (1) (1) v en (1) (1) v ,.... ~ "'. 'it: C\i N rt)' ,,; rt'i I I I I '" v If') I V 0 0 0 0 0 0 I I I It) 0 0 I '" ~ I It) 0 0 10 8 ,.... ~ '"~ 10 rt) ~ 'Ii '" 0'" 0 0 O. 0 It) r-: 10 '" '" '" N INTERVALS DIAMETER It) C\i If') "I It) It) If') (1) 0 r-: v 0 I + 0 It) (ft ) Figure 4. -- Relative frequency of the crown diameters of individual sagebrush plants or clumps and their air-dry forage yields estimated from the crown diameter-forage yield relationship on 4 areas completely treated with 2,4-D in June, 1959. The broken lines represent the 1959 sample; the solid lines, 1965. �- 373 - a test of significance are given by area in Table llA. Mean crown diameters of individual sagebrush plants or clumps showed significant (P (.001) decreases in 1965 on all areas except 6 (completely treated) and 4 (partially treated).. Conversely, mean air-dry forage yield increased significantly (P .001) on completely treated areas 3, 5, and 6 and partially treated areas 2 and 4. Significant (P (.001) decreases occurred on areas 1 (completely treated) and areas 7, 8 (partially treated). Area 8 had the largest magnitude of significant decrease in forage yield and area 6, the largest significant increase. < Pre-treatment and post-treatment densities. -- As shown in Figs. 3 and 4, far fewer sagebrush plants or clumps were measured on the permanent, .01 acre plots, 5-6 years after 2,4-D application. The percentage plant reductions on completely treated areas 1, 3, 5, and 6 were 73.4, 34.1, 32.9 and 35.3 percent, respectively. Percentage plant reductions on partially treated areas 2, 4, 7, and 8 were 44.9, 21.1, 24.2 and 32.4, respectively. Tentatively, 2,4-D application resulted in reduced crown diameters and densities but increased mean forage yields per plant 5-6 years following treatment. Unfortunately, the lack of control plots and the conflicting results on some areas preclude firm conclusions. Air-dry forage yields and densities by area, 1959 and 1965. -- The regression equation estimates of forage yield based on crown diameter measurements of individual plants are summed by plot and projected to a pounds per acre and plant or clump per acre basis in Table 12. Mean air-dry sagebrush forage yields estimated by individual area ranged from 177.5 (area 5) to 478.7 (area 8) pounds per acre in 1959 and from 92.5 (area 1) to 436.5 (area 4) pounds per acre in 1965. The 1959 estimates of mean sagebrush density ranged from 4,508 (area 6) to 8,457 (area 2) plants or clumps per acre. In 1965, these estimates were 2,008 (area 1) to 5,914 (area 7) sagebrush plants or clumps per acre. Among the 1959 and 1965 estimates of mean forage yield, 90 percent confidence limits overlapped on all areas except area 1 and 8. Similar confidence limits about the 1959 and 1965 mean densities overlapped on all areas except, 1, 3, 7, and 8. Air-dry forage yield and densities by treatment, 1959 and 1965. -- The individual areas are combined into two treatment categories; areas 1, 3, 5 and 6 (completely treated) and areas 2, 4, 7 and 8 (partially treated, originally designated as controls). An interesting and contrasting feature of these data is the complete lack of overlap in the 90 percent confidence limits computed about the 1959 and 1965 forage yield and density means (Table 13). These figures imply biologically significant differences in pre- and post-treatment mean estimates and, as previously shown, large between-area differences in treatment effectiveness. Noteworthy, also is the large pre-treatment difference be twee n the combined "con-· trol" and treated mean forage yields. Mean differences between the 1959 and 1965 forage yields by individual plot. -This approach to the problem of assessing change supplements the conclusions reached in the usual method above. The combined "control" and treated sagebrush areas having greatly different pre-treatment forage yield means showed about the same magnitude of change. Mean reductions in control and treated forage yields projected from the 1959 and 1965 estimates on individual plots with 90 percent confidence limits were 181.3 (148.8-213.8) and 140.9 (103.2-178.7) air-dry pounds per acre, respectively (Table 14). Among the individual "control" or partially treated areas maximum and minimum mean reductions were from 0 (area 4) to 244.8 �Table llA. -- Crown-diameter and forage yields of 21,669 sagebrush plants or clumps 1959 and 1965, compared by the difference between their mean values with 95 percent confidence limits, and a test of significance ..Statistical methods follow Bailey (1959:36). Variable Crown Diameter (ft.) 1 Treated Areas 3 5 6 2 "Control" Areas 4 7 8 .38 .17 .12 .05 .08 -.01 .21 .33 .33-.43 .13-.21 .08-.16 -.01-.11 a -.16 -.07-.09 .17-.25 .30-.36 D D D D D I d Value 16.17 9.04 6.06 1. 55 2.03 Level of Signif. (P) <.001 <.001 <.001 NSi( <.05 Statistic X Diff. with 95% C.L. Trend+ D D .24 10.24 20.49 NS* (.001 (.001 w -:J. Air-dry Forage Yield (g) 5.86 -4.43 -3.64 -9.16 -3.32 -8.02 2.72 9.27 . 3.30-8.42 2.57-6.29 1.91-5.37 6.06-12.26 -.49-7.13 3.84-12.20 .67-4.77 7.51-11.03 D I I I I I D D d Value 4.49 -4.67 -4.13 -5.80 -1. 7. -3.76 2.60 10.31 Level of Signif. (P) (.001 <.001 <.001 <.001 <. 001 <.01 (.001 X Diff. with 95% C.L. Trend * Not significant at P ~ .05 + I - increase and D - decrease in means from 1959 to 1965. NS~'( �- :375 - Tab1e12--Forage yield and density of big sagebrush estimated on permanent .01 acre, circular plots by individual 2,4-D treated and "ldontrol" sagebrush areas, 1959 'and 1965 0 Estimated .Variable Forage Yie 1d . (air-dry 1b./ acre) Numbers of Plants or Plant Clumps (per acre) No. Plots Mean SD 90% Conf. Limits Lower Upper 36 36 446.1 92.5 155.4 206.2 403.4 35.8 488.9 149.2 3 35 34 269.3 223.6 142.4 151.4. 229.5 180.7 309.0 266.4- 5 5 23 21 177 .5 164.4 111. 7 106.0 137.4 124.4 217.5 204.4 6 6 13 13 156.0 159.7 121.0 163.7 96.3 78.9 215.8 240.6 Control 2,4-D, 1960 2 2 7 7 453.3 283.7 164.5 115.8 332.6 198.7 573.9 368.6 1959 1965 Control Control 4 4 7 7 420.9 436.5 139.8 176.6 318.4 307.0 523.4 566.0 1959 1965 Control .2,4-D, 1960 7 7 30 30' 324.8 219.2 225.4 139.9 254.9 175.8 394 8 262.7 1959 1965 Control 2,4-D, 1960 8 8 57 56 478.7 229 8 275.3 190.7 418.5 187.8 538.9 271.9 1959 1965 2,4-D 1 1 36 36 7,564 2,008 3,338 3,6.57 6,646 1,003 8,482 , 3,014 1959 1965 2,4-D 3 3 35 34 6,186 4,194 2,851 2,931 5,391 3,365 6,981 5,023 1959 1965 2,4-D 5 5 23 21 5,748 4,224 3,105 3,002 4,634 3,090 6,862 5,357 1959 1965 2,4-D 6 6 13 13 4,508 2,9l5 2,356 2,753 3,344 1,557 5,671 . 4,274 1959 1965 Control 2,4-D, 1960 2 2 7 7 8,457 4,657 2,797 2,171 6,406 3,065 10,508 6,249 1959 1965 Control Control 4 4 7 7 7,500 5,914 2,063 2,235 5,987 4,276 9,013 7,553 1959 1965 Control 2,4-D, 1960 7 7 30 30 5,930 4,493 3,599 2,603 4,813 3,685 7,047 5,301 1959 1965 Control 2,4-D, 1960 8 8 57 56 6,819 4,620 2,618 3,692 6,247 3,806 7,391 5,434 Year Treatment Area 1959 1965 2,4-D 1 1959 1965 2,4-D 1959 1965 2,4-D 1959 1965 2,4-D 1959 1965 1 3 0 0 �- 376 - (area 8) pounds per acre~ Completely treated mean reductions ranged from 0 (areas 5 and 6) to 359.8 pounds per acre on area 1. Mean differences between the 1959 and 1965 total crown diameters by individual plot. Pursua1 of Table 13 shows that, like mean forage yields; total crown diameters on the combined partially and combined completely treated areas differed greatly and perhaps significantly prior to treatment. The same general pattern of mean reduction between the 1959 and 1965 estimates on specific areas (Table 14). On the combined completely treated and combined partially treated plots, mean reductions with 90 percent confidence limits were 3,087.4 (2,707~'43,467.5), and 3,240.6 (2,759.5-3,72l.6) feet per acre, respectively • -'fet Mean ground'cover, forage yield and density estimates, 1959 and 1965. Even though indices of mean ground cover were not estimated on the same plots as forage yield and density, it seems worthwhile to examine these values in terms of relative change among their area means and their standard deviations (Table 15). Generally, the same trend is indicated by all three criteria. As compared to forage yields, ground cover estimates indicated by the loop-frequency transects show a much larger magnitude of change and density estimates are poorly correlated with the other two criteria. Maximum sagebrush ground cover averaged 25.4 percent with an average air-dry forage yield of 479 pounds per acre. Minimum sagebrush ground cover was about 1.9 percent with an average air-dry forage yield of 92.5 pounds per acre. Associated densities of sagebrush plants or clumps averaged 6,819 and 2,008 per acre, respectively} •. ,.: ! <) Net Relative efficiencies of three plot sizes, 1965. -- Because the number of sagebrush on which crown diameters were measured is directly related to time of measurement, numbers of plants or clumps measured on each size plot are described statistically in Table 16. Similar data, obtained for the .01 acre plot in 1959, are included for comparison. The primary features of the 1959 and 1965 arrays are the changes in frequency distributions and increase in variances, 6 years after treatment. It is apparent that all plot sizes reflect the fact that exceptionally high numbers of sagebrush plants occurred on a few plots before and after treatment. Such plots tend to raise the average measurement time. Thus, comparisons of the net relative e.fficiencies of the plot sizes tested here with similar studies on other sagebrush communities should include this information. The values presented in Table 17 show that smaller plots are relatively more efficient in measurement of crown diameters. While the smaller plots yielded more variable data, this was more than offset by the relatively small average time spent in their measurement. The similar coefficients of variation obtained on plot forage yields suggest that the same relationship would also hold for this variable. The significance of the difference between two sample estimates of crown-diameter variance were tested with the F test for the .001~ •• 01, control and spray; .001 vs .• 0023, control and spray; and the .0023~ •• 01, control and spray, acre plots. In all tests, variances of the smallest plot were significantly (P .01) higher than those from the largest plot. < Forage yields and densities of sagebrush estimates on the three plot sizes are showri in Table 18. All three plot: sizes yielded similar means since their 90 percent confidence limits overlap. Without exception, the completely treated areas yielded more variable data. This is related to the reduced densities and the few p Lotgwith large numbers of plants as discussed above. �- 377 - Table 13-Forage yield, density, and total crown diameter of big sagebrush estimated on permanent: .01 acre, circular plots by combined "control" and 2,4-D treated sagebrush areas. Estimated Variable Forage Yield (air-dry 1b./ acre) Year 1959 Treatment Control No. Plots 101 Mean 427.2 SD 254.3, 90% Con£. Limits Lower Upper 385.5 469.0 1965 Contro1* 100 244.9 178.0 215.5 274.3 1959 2,4-D 107 295.3 179.1 266.7 323.5 1965 2,4-D 104 158.3 173.3 130.2 186.3 Control 101 6,716 2,961 6,230 7,202 Cont r o Lw 100 4,675 3,204 4,146 5,204 1959 2,4-D 107 6,351 3,150 5,849 6,854 1965 2,4-D 104 3,284 3,312 2,748 3,820 1959 Control 101 6,264.11 3,074.15 5,759.39 6,768.83 1965 Contro1* 100 3,177.85 2,189.35 2,816.61 3,539.09 1959 2,4-D 107 5,379.21 2,615.11 4,962.07 5,796.34 1965 2,4-D 104 2,060.19 2,137.23 1,714.40 2,405.99 Numbers of 1959 Plants or Plant clumps {per acre)1965 Crown Dia. (ft./acre) + Because of the difficulty of distinguishing individual plants, discrete foliage clumps 18 inches or more apart were measured as separate plants. * Accidental aerial application of 2,4-D on an unknown proportion of the 700.21 acres of sagebrush under study. �- 378 - Table l4-Statistica1 description of the mean difference (1959 minus 1965) between individual plots in forage yield and crown diameter estimates of big sagebrush by individual area and treatment. Estimated Variable Treatment Forage Yield Control (air-dry 1b./acre) 2,4-0 Crown Oia. (ft./acre) Control 2,4-0 7 7 29 Mean 169.6 -15.6* 109.1 244.8 SO 80.4 84.4 141.7 211.6 90%'Conf. Limits Lower Upper 110.6 228.5 -77 .5 46.2 64.3 153.8 291.4 198.1 Combined 99 181.3 195.8 148.8 213.8 1 3 5 6 36 34 23 13 359.8 53.9 8.9* 3.7* 224.7 163.6 135.5 96.2 297.9 7.7 -39.7 -51.2 421.6 100.2 57.5 43.8 Combined 106 140.9 235.4 103.2 178.7 2 4 7 8 7 7 29 56 3,637.1 1,337.1 2,269.3 3,661.2 1,313.1 _638.8 1,747.8 2,540.5 2,674.3 868.8 1,717.6 3,101. 0 4,599.9 1,805.5 2,821.1 4,221.3 Combined r 99 3,087.4 2,291 8 2,707.4 3,467.5 1 3 5 6 36 34 23 13 5,844.1 2,456.9 1,409.4 1,319.6 2,839.9 2,145.8 2,097.6 1,446.0 5,063.3 . 1,849.7 657.1 605.8 6,625.3 3,064.1 2,161. 6 2,033.5 Combined 106 3,240.6 3,001. 8 2,759.5 3,721.6 Area 2 4 7 8 N+ ~ 0 + Permanent, •01 acre, circular plots • * Implies either a slight increase or no detectable change. decrease from 1959 to 1965. Other values indicate a marked �- 379 - Table 15--A.comparison of estimates of mean ground cover, forage yield, and density of big sagebrush under two treatments, 1959 and 1965. Loop Frequency Transect N+ Mean SD N* Forage Yie1d** Mean SD Density*'+ '~ean SD 23 23 22.52 11.30 8.53 6.15 7 7 453.3 283.7 164.5 115.8 8,457 4,657 2,797 2,171 4 4 l!6 16 20.25 14.00 6.05 4.86 7 7 420.9 436.5 139.8 176.6 7,500 5,914 2,063 2,235 7 7 36 36 l3.28 7.53 9.15 5.51 30 30 324.8 219.2 225.4 139.9 5,930 4,493 3,599 2,603 Year Treatment Area 1959 1965 Control 2,4-D, 1960 2 1959 1965 Control 1959 1965 Control 2,4-D, 1960 2 \ 1959 1965 Control 2,4-D, 1960 8 8 23 23 25.35 10.52 13.80 8.39 57 56 478.7 229.8 275.3 190.7 6,819 4,620 2,618 , 3,692 1959 1965 2,4-D 1 1 42 42 24.17 1.88 8.31 4.40 36 36 446.1 92.5 155.4 206.2 7,564 2,008 3,338 3,657 1959 1965 2,4-D 3 3 25 25 16.48 6.36 7.29 5.97 35 34 269.3 223.6 142.4 151.4 6,186 4,194 2,851 2,931 1959 1965 2,4-D 5 5 28 28 13.29 5.82 9.l3 4.46 23 21 177 .5 164.4 111.7 106.0 5,748 4,224 3,105 3,002 1959 1965 2,4-D 6 6 18 18 9.94 3.28 7.24 2.22 l3 l3 156.0 159.7 121.0 163.7 4,508 2,915 2,356 2,753 + Number of permanent, 100 observation, loop-frequency transects. * Number of permanent, .01 acre, circular plots on which forage yield and density were estimated. ** Air-dry lb. per acre; includes all green plant material (except the flowering parts) estimated by regression equations of mean crown diameter (X) vs. air-dry green material (Y). *+ Number of plants or plant clumps per acre. A clump is a discrete body of foliage separated from other clumps by 18 or more inches. �Table l6-Statistical description and frequency distribution of big sagebrush plants or plant clumps counted on 3 sizes of circular plots, 1959 and 1965. Plot Size+ (Acre) Statistic No. Plants or Plant Clumps 1959 Control Rel. No. Plots Freq. 1965 Control Rel. No. Plots Freq. 101 67.15 29.61 100 46.75 32.04 1959 214-D Rel. No. Freq. Plots 1965 214-D Rel. No. Plots Freq. r .01 N X SD 0 .., 1 11 21 31 41 51 61 71 81 91 101 III 121 131 141 151 161 171 .0023 --- ----- --------- --- --- --- ------- --------- --- 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 1 4 2 5 5 5 17 17 15 16 5 2 1 3 1 1 1 0 0 .0099 .0396 .0198 .0495 .0495 .0495 .1683 .1683 .1485 .1584 .0495 .0198 .0099 .0297 .0099 .0099 .0099 0 0 2 12 8 11 12 19 8 9 5 4 3 2 3 1 0 0 1 0 0 107 63.51 31.49 .0200 .1200 .0800 .1100 .1200 .1900 .0800 .0900 00500 .0400 .0300 .0200 .0300 .0100 0 0 .0100 0 0 X SD 0 1 - 10 11 - 20 21 - 30 31 - 40 41 - 50 8 42 32 14 3 1 0 .0190 .0470 .0470 .1400 .1210 .1030 .1590 .1120 .0750 .0470 .0370 .0370 .0190 .0190 .0090 0 0 .0090 0 32 13 19 7 9 8 5 3 2 0 2 0 1 2 0 0 0 1 0 .3080 .1250 .1830 .0670 .0860 .0770 .0480 .0290 .0190 0 .0190 0 .0100 .0190 0 0 0 .0100 104 7.95 10.54 100 11.88 9.12 N 0 2 5 5 15 13 11 17 12 8 5 4 4 2 2 1 0 0 1 104 32.83 33.12 .0800 .4200 .3200 .1400 .0300 .0100 16 .62 18 5 1 0 .1540 .5960 .1730 ·.0480 .0100 0 w co 0 �Table l6-Statistical description and frequency distribution of big sagebrush plants or plant clumps counted on 3 sizes of circular plots, 1959 and 1965. (Continued). Plot Size+ (Acre) Statistic No. Plants or Plant Clumps 51 - 60 61 - 70 .001 1959 Control No. ReI. Plots Freq. 1965 Control ReI. No. Plots Freq. 0 0 N 0 0 1965 2~4-D ReI. No. Plots Freq. 1 1 100 5.19 4.43 X SD 0 1 - 10 11 - 20 21 - 30 + 1959 2~4-D ReI. No. Plots Freq. Nested plots with a common center. 17 73 9 1 .0100 .0100 104 3.59 4 54 0 .1700 .7300 .0900 .0100 Only the .01 acre plots were counted in 1959. 28 71 4 1 .2690 .6830 .0380 .0100 w CP I-' �- 382 Table l7-A comparison of the net relative efficiency of 3 sizes of nested, circular plots in measuring mean crown diameter of big sagebrush plants, 1965. Plants or Plant Clumps Measured Plot Sizes Per:Plot (acre) X SD Measurement Crown Dia. Net Time/Plot Coef. of ReI. {min.2 Variation Ef.+ X SD (%) % 98 .001 vs , .0023 5.19 11.88 4.43 9.13 2.00 4.79 1.16 2.53 84.6 79.7 213 .001 213% more efficient than .0023 98 .001 vs. .01 5.19 46.75 4.43 32.04 2.00 15.16 1.16 7.88 84.6 68.9 503 .001 503% more efficient than .01 98 .0023 vs. .01 11.88 46.75 9.13 32.04 4.79 15.16 2.53 7.88 79.7 68.9 237 .0023 237% more efficient than .01 102 .001 vs. .0023 3.63 8.13 4.55 10.66 1.65 3.75 1.18 2.37 123.3 146.4 320 .001 320% ~ore efficient than .0023 101 .001 vs. .01 3.63 32.83 4.55 33.12 1.65 11.46 1.18 7.48 123.3 103.7 491 .001 491% more efficient than .01 102 .0023 vs , .01 8.13 32.83 10.66 33.12 3.75 11.46 ,2.37 7.48 146.4 103.7 153 .0023 153% more efficient than .01 No. Treatment Plots Control 2,4-D + Conclusion (Ehrenreich 1959:137) Table 18 -- A comparison of estimated forage yields and densities of big sagebrush sampled On 3 sizes of nested, circular plots, 1965. Estimated Variable Forage Yield (air-dry lb./acre) Numbers of Plants or Plant Clumps + PI'ot Size+ (Acre) Treatment N Mean SD 90% Conf. Limit Coef. of Lower Upper Variation (%) .001 .0023 .01 Control Control Control 100 100 100 250.9 257.7 244.9 217.2 214.6 178.0 215.0 222.3 215.5 286.7 293.1 274.3 86.6 83.3 72.7 .001 .0023 .01 2,4-D 2,4-D 2,4-D 104 104 104 165.1 178.9 158.3 208.9 291.7 178.3 131.3 131.7 130.2 198.9 226.1 186.3 126.5 163.1 109.5 .001 .0023 .01 Control Control Control 100 100 100 5190 5175 4675 4430 3977 3204 4460 4522 4146 5920 5828 5204 85.4 76.9 68.5 .001 .0023 .01 2,4-D 2,4-D 2,4-D 104 104 104 3630 3541 3284 4550 4644 3312 2890 2792 2748 4360 4295 3820 125.3 131.1 100.9 Nested plots with a common center. �Discussion: Parker (1950) reported that the loop-frequency transect tends to overrate cover. Thus, the values herein are probably exaggerated estimates of the percent ground cover occupied by the species encountered. Based mostly on intensive sampling studies of synthetic plant populations, Hutchings and Holmgren (1959:676) recommended a change in the method of recording observations. They believed a "closer approximation of percent plant area" could be obtained; by recording number of plants or parts of plants found in each plot rather than mere presence." Unfortunately, all pre-treatment field work had been completed by the time this recommendation had been published. Pre- and post-treatment oblique photographs of 9 square-foot quadrats and overall views taken from permanent points on 27 transects located on 7 of the 8 sagebrush areas, are omitted herein. Selected portions of this work will be presented in subsequent reports. Also omitted, are the indices of plant oover and composition and accompanying photographs from the 1958 and 1966 readings of 12 transects within the oak-snowberry-sagebrush vegetative type. These will also be presented in future reports. W,pile the percent of ground cover occupied by sagebrush could have been calculated directly from the crown diameter, the extremely irregular shape of many sagebrush plant crowns was believed to negate the value of this estimate. Also, the overall reduction of crown diameter size recorded and the larger proportion of plants less than one-half foot in crown diameter (Figure$3 and 4) may have been a serious source of bias in the loop-frequency transect estimates of posttreatment change in the percent ground cover of sagebrush (Hutchings and Holmgren 1959:676). An important factor in assessing the estimates of sagebrush forage yield on areas 1, 3, 5, and 6 is recognizing that the 1959 estimates were unavoidably based on clippings of forage which had been treated with 2,4-D about one to two months prior to sampling. Analysis of covariance of treated and untreated sagebrush clippings showed that treated forage would yield significantly (P (.01) lower estimates than those derived from untreated forage (Anderson 1960:53,71). Specific identification of plants was not stressed in this study because of ignorance, the phenological stage. and close cropping by herbivores often restricted identification criteria to vegetative characteristics. In the case of Artemisia spp., the concepts of Harrington (1954:580-585) have been employed but no attempt was made to record subspecies of~. tridentata as ~. !. ~ or ~. !. tridentata. Probably most of the sagebrush population on the study area consists of the latter form. Occasionally diffusive communities of both subspecies were sampled. Where these populations had been treated with 2,4-D, those plants tenatively identified as ~. !. ~ often appeared to be less affected than~. !. tridentata. The indicated interactions of recorded plant genera in response to 2,4-D application are complex and at this point not easily explained. The major interpretative effort in subsequent reports will involve this area. A literature review of the autecology and synecology of the major genera with emphasis on herbicidal effects is now underway. �- 384 - LITERATURE CITED Anderson, A. E. 1960. Effects of sagebrush eradication by chemical means on deer and related wildlife. Project W-38-R, Work Plan 7, Job No.1 completion report. Colo. Game, Fish and Parks Dept., Denver. 73 p. (processed) Bailey, N. T. J. 1959. Statistical methods in biology. Press Ltd., London. 200 p. The English Univ. Costello, D. F. 1954. Vegetation zones in Colorado. p. iii to x In Harrington, H. D. Manual of the plants of Colorado. Sage Books, Denver. 666 p. Ehrenreich, J. H. 1959. Some statistical considerations involved in sampling plant cover and composition. p. 133 to 138. In Techniques and methods of measuring vegetation, Proc. Symp. at Tifton, Ga., October, 1958. Southern Forest Exp. Sta. and Southeastern Forest Exp. Sta., U. S. Forest Service, 174 p. (processed) Harrington, H. D .. 1954. 666 p. Manual of the plants of Colorado .. Sage Books, Denver. Hitchcock, A. S. 1950. Manual of the grasses of the United States. 2nd Ed. Dept. Agr. Misc. Publ. No. 200, 1,051 p. Hutchings, S. S. and R. C. Holmgren. 1959. Interpretation of loop-frequency data as a measure of plant cover. Ecology 40(4):668-677. Kelsey, H. P. and W. A. Dayton. 1942. Co., Harrisburg, Pa. 675 p. Standardized plant names. J. McFarland Mainland, D., L. Herrera, and M. I. $utcliffe. 1956. Tables for use with binomial samples. Dept. Medical Statistics New York University College of Medicine, 83 p. (processed) Parker, K. W. 1950. Report on 3-step method for measuring condition and trend of forest ranges. U. S. Forest Service, Washington, D. C. 68 p. (processed) 1951. A method for measuring trend in range condition on national forest ranges. U. S. Forest Service, Washington, D. C. 26 p. (processed) Simpson, G. G., A. Roe, and R. C. Lewontin. 1960. vised Ed., Harcourt, Brace and Co., New York. Quantitative zoology. 440 p. Re- Snedecor, G. W. 1946. Statistical methods applied to experiments in agriculture and biology. 4th Ed., Iowa State College Press, Ames. 485 p. Prepared by: Allen E. Anderson Project Leader Date: July, ,1966 Approved by: Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �APPENDIX Methods and Criteria I Used Reading the L,op Frequency 1965-66 1 Transects, 1958-59 and 1. Observations were made on the same side of the tape that the stakes are; the right side when facing the 100 foot stake from the 0.0 stake. 2. Observations 1/ were recorded as follows: a. Perennial herbaceous vegetation (grass, grass-like, forbs). When the live root crown or portion thereof fell within the 3/4 inch diameter plot at the point of measurement, these observations were recorded by specie's symbol. If more t han -one spec Le s coccur re.d within the plot, they were recorded for thatohservation. ' b. Shrubs, half-shrubs or woody-based forbs, when the point fell within the circumference of the live perennial crown (current annual growth on the periphery was ignored), even though the 3/4 inch diameter plot was directly over or under an interspace. Observations on dead portions of plants were encircled. What occurred underneath either live or dead shrubs was recorded. c. Litter, when over half the plot was covered by dead organic material lying on the ground surface. The current years production of foliage was not considered as litter even though lying on ~he ground surface; i.e. forb leaves, aspen leaves, etc., did not count as litter if produced during the current year or were of transient nature. d. Erosion pavement, when over half the plot is covered by small pebbles, l/S inch to 3/4 inch in siz~. Paraphrased from the Region Denver, Colorado. 2, Range Analysis Handbook, U. S. Forest Service, �G MANAGEMENT Range Analysis - 386 - Form 144-R2 Appendix II lIarch, 1958 RECORD OF PER1L\NENT LIM"O;TRANSECT Cluster No. A 11' Allotment Distriot Forest Aerial Photo.lio. Transect. No. B C fr A B Date Transect Examiner Bearing C A Course and Distance to Witness Points B C A 1 26 51 76 2 27 52 77 3 28 53 78 4 29 54 79 5 30 55 80 6 31 56 81 7 32 57 82 8 33 58 83 9 34 59 84 10 35 60 85 11 36 61 86 12 37 62 87 13 38 63 88 14 39 64 89 15 40 65 90 16 41 66 91 17 42 67 92 18 43 68 93 19 44 69 94 20 45 70 95 21 46 71 96 22 47 72 97 23 48 73 98 24 49 74 99 25 50 75 Species Name ;;pecles Symbol B C 100 T Hits D TRAl'iSECTS m~MARY Item P ------------------------------------~--------+_------------------------_r----~I Bare Soil Erosien Pavement Rook(larger than loop) M -I------------------------------------~-------+--------------------------t-----;I !.loss Litter ------------------------------------~~------+_------------~----------_r----~I Plant Density Index Forage Density Index ---------------------------------t--------r-----------------------t----il Re_rks: R L Total LD --------------------------r---~------.----------_1--~=T~~~~~======= A - Overstory snruos B - Desirable and Intermediates C - All other Transeot Hits D - Desirable Speoies I - Intermediate Speoies LD - Least Desirable Species. �- 387 Vigor ~easurements Speoles Plant No •• Desoription ot Location ot Tran.eot, 1 2 3 • 5 6 7 8 9 10 Total A~erg. •Indioate whether hat or leed ltalt _s.ured • .... -------- Date taken De.orlption (lilt predominant Location~ and _------ ~~~_r.~~~~~~~~~~~~~,_-(Takin troll!oyer 0.0 .talte OJ' 99.6 •tiki ) k., Tegetatton ob.erTed in plot), Photo or General View, Date taken ---------------- r. --, ,', ~ .. . ', GPO 8842., '. �- 388 APPENDIX III Plant SymbGls and Names!1 .,: Category, Symbol Scient ifie Common Trees, Shrubs, and Half-Shrubs Artr CHRY Quga Pied SYMP TETR ERIO GUTI CACT JUNI' Arfr Area Pipo Cemo Potr Mare ROSA Eula Pien PENS Spco PRUN Artemisia tridentata Chrysothamnus spp.* Quercu~ gambellii Pinus edulis Symphoricarpos sp. Tetradymia sp. Eriogonum sp.* Gutierrezia sp.* Cactaceae ___ Juniperus sp.* Artemisia frigida Artemisia cana Pinus ponderosa Cercocarpus montanUG Populus tremuloides M,lhonia repens+ Rosa sp. Eurotia lanata Picea engelmanni Penstemon sp. Sphaeralcea coccinea Prunus sp , big sagebrush rabbitbrush Gambel oak Colorado pinyon pine snowberry horsebrush shrubby eriogonum snakeweed ,~2ctus family juniper fringed sage silver sage ponderosa pine true mountain mahogany quaking aspen Oregongrape rose common winterfat Engelmann spruce penstemon Grasses & Grasslike Kocr Bogr Stco CARE AGRO ,POA MUHL Sihy BROM STIP Bltr "SPOR FEST Koeleria cristata prairie Junegrass Bouteloua gracilis blue grama Stipa comata needle and thread Carex spp.~'( sedge Agropyronspp. wheatgrass l'oaspp. ' bluegrass _Nuhlertbergia spp , muhly Sitanion hystrix squirreltail Bromus spp. brome Stipa spp. needlegrass Blepharoneuron tricholepis hairy dropseed Sporobolus sp. drop seed Festuca spp. fescue Forbs ERIO SEDU Chvi' ANTE LUPI AREN' ASTE Eriogonum 'spp , * Sedum sp. Chtysopsis villosa Antennaria sp. Lupinus sp. Arenaria sp, Aster spp. Vicia Potent'illa'~pp. .• vrcr POTE," ,ap. * -- chokecherry eriogonum stonecrop hairy goldaster pussy toes .lupine sandwort ast er vetchc:lnquif'oil -'.~; .:!. .. ':r I �APPENDIX"III (continued} Plant Symbols and Names Category 1./ II Symbol Scientific CAST GILl TARA ARTE Basa Ac1a ALLI PENS POLY GERA PARO SOLI ERIG VERB IRIS Castille ja sp , Gilia sp. Taraxacum sp. Artemisia sp. Ba1samorhiza sagittata Achillea 1~nu1osa Allium spp. Penstemon spp. Po1ygonum spp. Geranium sp. Paronychia sp. Solidago spp.~~ Erigeron spp. Verbascum sp. Iris missouriensis Common paintedcup gilia dandelion wormwood arrow1eaf ba1samroot western yarrow onion penstemon knotweed geranium nail wort goldenrod fleabane mullein iris Nomenclature based on (Kelsey and Dayton 1942; Hitchcock 1950; Harrington 1954). Plants are listed in the same approximate order as given in Tables 7 and 8. * Genera with specific names identified from the sagebrush communities include the following: Chrysothamnus parryi parryi, Eriogonum microthecum, Gutierrezia sarothrae, Juniperus utahensis, Carex e1eocharis, Carex geyeri, Eriogonum f1avum, Eriogonum racemosum, Potenti11a rubricau1is, Solidago petradoria. + Berberis repens according this report. to Harrington (1954:252) has also been used in ��July, 1966 / - 391 : .. JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of An Investigation of 2,4-D Application to COLORADO --------~~~~~--------Sagebrush Within a Mountain Shrub-Conifer W-114-R-l Project No. Complex, Uncompahgre Plateau Job No. Work Plan No. 1 Title of Job: Animal and Bird Population Studies Period Covered: Personnel: ' 2 June 1, 1965 through May 31, 1966 Allen E. Anderson, Doyle Markham, Joseph Potts ABSTRACT Indices of the yearlong' use made by mule deer, cattle, rabbits; and grouse of 5 broad vegetat'ive types, 7,900 to 8.570 feet elevation, were obtained by counting their fecal material on a systematic sample of 1,687 permanent, .001 acre, circular plots. About 395 acres of disjunct sagebrush communities within a 2,884 acre study area were aerially sprayed with 2,4-D in June 1959· During June, 1960, 305 additional acres comprising the control areas were inadvertantly and partially treated with 2,4-D. The fecal plots were counted in 1958-59 and 1965-66. As inferred from these counts on 10,122 plot;.;(six readings) the folfowing post-treatment changes in animal and bird use cccurred within the major, vegetative types. Deer: A significant (p z.005) decrease occurred (1959-66) within the treated sagebrush accompanied by a significant increase (p <.001) within the oak-snowberry-sagebrush. As compared to 1958-59, there was a 4 to 10-fold decrease on all vegetative typep during 1965-66. When adjusted for size of area, maximum pre- (1958~59) and post-treatment (1965-66) use occurred within the oak-snowberry-sagebrush and conifer-sagebrush-oak types and minimum use within the treated and untreated sagebrush. Cattle: A significant (p (.001). decrease (1959-66) in use occurred within the conifer-sagebrush-oak and a significant (p <.05) increase within the treated sagebrush. As compared to 195859 there was a 2 to 4-fold decrease on the study area during 1965-66• When adjusted for size of area, maximum pre-treatment (1958-59) use occurred within the conifer-sage brush-oak, oak-snowberry-sagebrush, and treated sagebrush while post-treated (1965-66) maxima were within the oak-snowberry-sagebrush and treated sagebrush. Minimal values, pre- and post-treatment, were within the sagebrushoak and untreated sagebrush. Rabbits: MUch higher use occurred on all vegetative types during the post-treatment period until 1965. During 1965-66, a twofold decrease occurred within the treated sagebrush. Grouse: A two-fold increase in grouse use occurred on the study area during the post-treatment (1959-65) period. After 1965, post-treatment use decreased to pre-treatment (1958-59) levels. This inferred increase and leveling off occurred almost entirely within, �- 392 or adjacent to, a treated sagebrush area known to comprise spring, summer, and possibly winter range, of sage grouse. Rodents: Pre-treatment data are lacking but assessment of population indices obtained about two-months after 2 ,4~D treatment (1959) and analysis of age structures inferred from the body weight distribution of Peromyscus sp. suggest a possible treatment effect on the reproduction and survival of Peromyscus SPa More Microtus sPa (2 in 1959, 16 in 1965) and twice as many rodents were sampled in 1965. This may be related to the large increases in grass cover which occurred on the two treated sagebrush areas thus sampledo Recommendations: In view of the apparent importance of the oak-dominated vegetative types to mule deer, eradication of Gambel oak on ranges of broad ecologic similarity should not be attempted. Judgements on the advisability of control of Gambel oak, pinyon-juniper, and sagebrush on these ranges should be based on quantitative data of animal and bird use and a cost analysis of the expected, long-term net returns to the livestock, timber, and recreational segnents of the public. Acknowledgements: I thank student assistants J. Dodson, G. Hetzel, H. Bray and Department personnel of W-38-R; P.Gilbert, J. Harris, D. Medin, and D. Smith who assisted in a portion of the 1958-59 field work and student assistants D. Markham and J. Potts who assisted in the 1965-66 field work. J. Potts also assembled, tabulated, and constructed all frequency dist:dbutions and computed most of the descriptive statistics. During 1958-60, p. Gilbert then Project Leader, W-38-R, also handled the administrative detail assisted by L. E. Yeager, then Leader, Colorado Cooperative Wildlife Research Unit, Colorado State University, Fort Collins. C. R. Gutermuth, Wildlife Management Institute, through the offices of L. E. Yeager arranged for a stipend for me during the 1959-60 academic year. Department Biologist G. Rogers verified the existance of sage grouse strutting grounds on the study area and W. Sandfort loaned equipment. District Ranger· . D. J. O'Rourke furnished information, maps and photos during 1958-59, and District: Ranger R. Schmitt furnished information on cattle stocking rates during 1965-66. D. Cook of the Uncompahgre National Forest staff assisted in the rodent sampling during 1965. Objectives: 1. Obtain indices of deer, cattle, rabbits, sage grouse, sharp-tailed grouse, and blue grouse use within and between plant communities for comparison with pre-treatment indices. 2. Obtain indices of small rodent populatio~ treated sagebrush communities. levels within trepted and un- Techniques Used: Plant communities were mapped on aerial photographs. A total of 65 discrete populations or vegetative units of gross qualitative physiognomic and floristic similarity were delineated on the basis of field inspection. These were combined into 5 major vegetative types; (1) conifer-sagebrush-oak, (2) sagebrush, (3) oak-snowberry-sagebrush, (4) sagebrush-oak, and (5) aspen. (Figure 2). Their acreages were determined .by Continenta 1 Engineers, Inc. of Denver, Colorado using a Kelsh Stereo Plotter and averaging three planimeter readings of each vegetative unit (Table 1). Indices of the ~elative distribution and use of mule deer, cattle, rabbits, and grouse within and between the 5 major vegetative types were obtained by counting their fecal groups (deer and cattle) or recording the presence or absence �- 393 of fecal droppings (rabbits and grouse) on a systematic sample of 1,687, permanent, .001 acre, circular plots. Plot centers, marked by numbered surveyors stakes, were a paced, 100 feet apart along 23 approximately parallel transects a paced 1,056 feet apart. The positions of transects 1 and 4 (Figure 2), however, ,were randomly selected using a table of random numbers. Transects were established with a hand compass on a bearing which would place most plots along a line at approximately right angles to the slope contours. Each plot was assigned to one of the 5 vegetative types for analysis. Because of the diffusive nature of the transition area between vegetative types; particularly oak-snowberry-sagebrush and sagebrush-oak, the decision of assignment was often difficult. The difference in plot numbers within vegetative types in Anderson (1960a) and Anderson (1960b) and those finally assigned in Table 1 reflects this difficulty. Therein, it is seen that sampling intensity among the 4 major vegetative types ranged from .035 percent (untreated sagebrush) to .082 percent (sagebrush-oak) and that plots were fairly well distributed among the vegetative types. Fecal material was recorded by species and vegetative type on prepared forms and removed or painted. The area of search was defined by a light cord or chain 3.72 feet in length revolving about the plot stake or with a flexible steel tape. Each plot was searched twice by two men or four times by one man. In a two-man crew, a change in search direction (clockwise to counter-clockwise) was accompanied by a change in observer position (inner to outer). A mule deer or elk pellet group was considered to be 5 or more fecal pellets of the same general size, shape, firmness, and appearance. Fecal pellets strewn across the plot were counted as a group if about one-half of the total, linear, strewn-out distance, or its midpoint, fell within the plot. Groups occurring on the plot edge were counted if about one-half of their total area fell within the plot. A cattle fecal dropping was recorded if one-half or more of any size fecal dropping occurred within the plot. These criteria: for "strewn-out" and "plot edge" groups also applied to cattle droppings. Rabbit, grouse, and turkey fecal droppings were counted if one-half or more of an individual dropping fell within the plot boundary. No attempt was made to count individual droppings of rabbit, grouse, and turkey but their presence or absence on individual plots was recorded. Rabbit Sylvilagus sp. droppings were not distinguished from the hares (Lepus townsendi L. americanus). Unfortunately, no attempt was made to distinguish "spring" from "winter" droppings of sage grouse or, the droppings of the three grouse (blue, sharp-tailed, or sage) known to be present on the study area. All fecal plots were read six times and the end dates were: (1) 7-29-58 (plot establishment); (2) 7-29-58 to 9-4-58; (3) 9-4-58 to 6-29-59; (4) 6-29-59 to 9-11-59; (5) 9-11-59 to 7-25-65; and (6) 7-25-65 to 7-15-66. For analysis, fecal count data were summed for each species and vegetative type into four periods. (1) 7-29-58 (plot establishment) comprising an unknown period of at least several years prior to 2,4-D treatment. (2) 6-29-59 to 7-15-66 comprising 2,938 days following 2,4-D treatment; (3) 7-29-58 to 6-29-59 comprising 335 days prior to 2,4-D treatment; and (4) 7-25-65 to 7-15-66 comprising 355 days about 7 years following treatment. Comparisons are made herein between (1) and (2) and between (3) and (4) called "long-term" and "short-term", respectively. Since aerial application of 2,4-D took place on June 8, 1959 on 4 randomly selected sagebrush areas of 395 acres, and wholly or in p<1rt on the 4 sagebrush areas totaling 305 acres designated as controls during .J':'1e, 1960; the latter do not actually constitute "controls" and the term "pre-treatment" for (2) and (3) is not strictly correct. However, the 20 days of post-treatment involved is decreased to be a negligible source of error. Since the time interval of ~ecal materia~ depo~ition prior to plot esta~li~hment is unknown and the pe r Lod of compa r i.son (0.·29-58 to 7-15-66) comp r i.ses 2,938 �- 394- - Table 1. -- The distribution and sampling intensity of 1,687, permanent, .001 acre, circular plots among 5 vegetative types and 8 sagebrush areas, Britt Point study area, Uncompahgre National Forest. Vegetative Number of Vegetat1+e Units Type Conifer-Sage brush-Oak Sampling Intens,ity Surface Acres No.+ Percent Plots No. Percent 8 937.15 32.5 547 32.4 .058 1.0 0.• 9 4.7 3.7 16 19 98 76 5.8 4.5 .053 .058 .072 .072 (%)* Sagebrush: Control Areas 2 7 1 1 1 8 1 30.23 32.69 136.24 105.90 Subtotal 4 305.06 10.5 209 12.3 .069 Treated Areas 1 3 5 1 1 1 6 1 179.76 122.46 48.04 44.89 6.2 4.2 1.7 1.6 125 66. 46 42 7.4 3.9 2.7 2.5 -.070 .054 .096 .094 Subtotal 4 395.15 13.7 279 16.5 .071 Subtotal Total 10 18 235.11 935.32 8.2 32.4 82 570 33.8 .035 .061 5 735.86 25.5 351 20.8 .048 Sagebrush-Oak 25 259.00 9.0 213 12.6 .082 Aspen 9 17.04 0.6 6 0.4 .035 65 2,884.37 100.0 1687 100.0 .058 4 Remainder Oak-Sn~wberry-Sagebrush Total 1.1 1.1 ~ ++ Discrete + Compiled from aerial photographs using a Kelsh Stereo Plotter. is the average of 3 planimeter readings. * populations of gross physiognomic and floristic similarity. Each value Computed by dividing the total sample (plot) area by the census (vegetative type) area. The sample is systematic with plot centers a paced 100 ft. apart along 23 parallel transects.a paced 1,056 ft. apart. See Figure 2. �- 395 - days, comparisons of use indices within a specific vegetative type are not feasible. Yet, these data should have relevance in terms of the relative use between major vegetative types and are so treated in this project. Indices of small rodent populations were obtained on a effectively treated sagebrush area, an ineffectively treated sagebrush (originally designated as a control), and a selected portion of an adjacent oak-snowberry sagebrush type during September, 1959 and September, 1965. Snap traps were employed on permanent stations laid out in the Calhoun Type A. design (Calhoun 1956) on each of the three habitats (Figure 2). Each habitat was sampled with a total of 360 trapnights. Traps were mainly Museum Specials baited with an approximately equal mixture of peanut butter, raisins, oats, raw hamburger, and raw liver. Standard body measurements (to the nearest mm) and body weights (to the nearest 0.1 g) were obtained from all intact rodents. Generic or specific indentifications were made with the keys in Warren (1942) and Hansen (1957). �Table 2. -- Statistical description by vegetative type of mule deer pellet glDupS counted on plot establishment and about 7 years following treatment of sagebrush areas with 2,4-D. Treatment Dates & or Time VegeInterval tati+e No. (Days) Type Plots* Co 7-29-58 (Unk. ) Tr S CSO 5 Frequency Distribution** 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 o o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o o o o o o o o o o 0.5 1 0.5 3 1.1 1 0.4 o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o 4 4.9 3 3.7 1 1.2 o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o 163 29.8 56 10.2 18 3,3 5 0.9 1 0.2 1 0.2 1 0.2 0 0.0 0 0.0 0 0 o o o o o o 151 43.0 97 27.6 55 15.7 23 6.6 15 4.3 5 1.4 4 1.1 1 0.3 0 0.0 0 0.0 0 0 o o o o % 108 50.7 52 24.4 27 12.7 19 8.9 2 0.9 3 1.4 0 0 1 0.5 0 0 1 0.5 0 0 o o 64110 66.7 0 o o o o o o 16.7 o o o 16.7 o o o % o 951 56.4 456 27.0 165 9.8 71 4.2 25 1.5 10 0.6 5 0.3 3 0.2 0 0 1 0.1 148 70.8 41 19.6 12 5.7 5 2.4 1 0.5 020 o 1.0 0 o o 194 69.5 60 21,S 12 4.3 7 2.5 3 1.1 1 0.4 1 0.4 1 0.4 0 0 61 74.4 13 15.9 1 1.2 1 1.2 2 2.4 2 2.4 2 2.4 0 0 o o 1 209 % 142 67.9 53 25.4 279 % 183 65.6 82 % 547 % OSS 351 % So 213 A Total 1687 % 6-29-59 7-15-66 Co (2,938) Tr 209 % 279 % 82 S % 7 3 5 4 1 3.3 2.4 77 27.6 15 5.4 61 74.4 13 15.9 302 55.2 2 o o 91 100.0 67 0.44 0.78 0.32 o 0 o o o o 0 0 120 100.0 96 0.43 0.68 0.34 o o o o o o 0 0 34 100.0 21 0.41 0.85 0.26 o o o o o o o o 0 0 367 100.0 245 0.67 0.95 0.45 o o o o o o o o o o 0 0 392 100.0 200 1.12 1.36 0.57 o o o o o o o o o 0 0 202 100.0 105 0.95 1.33 0.49 o o o o o o o o o o o o o 003 o 0 100.0 0 0 o o o o o o o o o o o o o 0 0 1209 100.0 736 0.72 1.07 0.44 o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o 0 0 96 100.0 61 0.46 0.93 0.29 o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o 0 0 135 100.0 85 0.48 0.97 0.30 o o o o o(i) g 8 8 8 8. 8 10'o~0 21 0.59 1.37 0.26 o o o o o o o o o o 0 Total Plots Pellet Grou~t Total With Freq. P.G. P.G. ~ SD Index 2 �Table 2. __ Statistical description by vegetative of sagebrush areas with. 2,4-D. (Continued). type of mule deer pellet groups counted on plot establishment and about 7 years following treatment -Dates & Time Interval (Days) Treatment or Vegetative No. Type+ Plots* 1 2 3 4 5 Distribution** 10 11 8 9 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 1 0.2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 537 100.0 247 0.98 1. 62 0.45 GrouEsLPlot Freq. SD Index CSO 547 % 300 54.8 118 21.6 66 12.1 27 4.9 13 2.4 10 1.8 2 0.4 5 0.9 2 0.4 2 0.4 1 0.2 0 0 0 0 OSS 351 % 119 33.9 68 19.4 37 10.5 37 10.5 22 6.3 15 4.3 16 4.6 12 3.4 4 1.1 9 2.6 2 0.6 4 1.1 2 0.6 1 0.3 1 0.3 1 0.3 0 0 0 0 1 0.3 857 100.0 232 2.44 3.03 0.66 213 99 46.5 41 19.2 29 13.6 13 6.1 7 3.3 9 4.2 6 2.8 1 0.5 1 0.5 0 0 3 1.4 0 0 0 0 3 1.4 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0.5 0 0 348 100.0 114 1.63 2.63 0.54 6 4 66.7 0 0 1 16.7 1 16.7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 100.0 2 % 1687 % 925 54.8 341 20.2 158 9.4 91 5.4 48 2.8 37 2.2 29 1.7 19 1.1 7 0.4 11 0.7 6 0.4 4 0.2 2 0.1 5 0.3 1 0.1 1 0.1 0 0 1 0.1 1 0.1 2,026 100.0 762 1.20 2.13 0.45 SO % A Total + 0 Fre9uenc~ 6 7 Total Plots Pellet Total With P.G. X P.G. Co _ 4 sagebrush areas totaling 305.06 acres designated as controls but inadvertently aerially sprayed with 2,4-D in 1960; Tr - 4 sagebrush areas totaling 395.15 areas aerially sprayed with 2.4-D, June, 1959; S - sagebrush; CSO - conifer-sagebrush-oak; OSS - oak-snowberry-sagebrushi SO - sagebrush-oak; A - aspen. * Permanent, .001 acre, circular. ** The number of plots with 0, 1, 2, 3, ------------ \ \ pellet ~roups. �Table 2A. -- Chi square analyses of the proportion of mule deer fecal groups sampled within "control" and 2,4-D treated sagebrush areas and 3 major vegetative types, prior to, and bout 7 years after 2,4-D treatment of sagebrush. Vegetative Type+ Period Fecal GrouEs B~ Vegetative Type Observed Expected Chi % of Total Total Fecal GrouEs Observed Expected Chi Computed Chi Square Co Prior 1959-66 91 96 71.04 115.97 5.61 3.44 7.5 &.7 1,209 2,026 1,228.96 2,006.03 .32 .20 9.57 (P<.005) Tr Estab. 1959-66 120 135 97.11 157.90 5.39 3.32 9.9 6.7 1,209 2,026 1,231.89 2,003.10 .43 .26 9.40 (p <.005) CSO Estab. 1959-66 367 537- 344.21 559.78 1.51 .92 30.3 26.5 1,209 2,026 1,231. 79 2,003.22 .42 .26 3.11 (P< .10) OSS Estab. 1959-66 392 857 445.96 803.06 6.53 3.62 32.4 42.3 1,209 2,026 1,155.04 2,079.94 2.52 1.40 14.07 (P (.001) SO Estab. 1959-66 202 348 205.03 344.97 .04 .03 16.7 17.2 1,209 2,026 1,205.97 2,029.03 .007 .005 .082 (p 80) + w \0 CD I See Tables 1 and 2 for acreages, sampling intensities, and symbols. <. �Table 3. __ Statistical description by vegetative type of mule deer pellet groups counted which accumulated over two periods of about one year each; prior to, and about 6 years after treatment of sagebrush areas with 2,4-D. Dates & Treatment Time or Interval Vegetative No. (Days) Type+ P1ots* 7-29-58 6-29-59 Co (335) Tr 0.60 0.97 0.40 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 165 100.0 114 0.59 0.88 0.41 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 45 100.0 25 0.55 1.08 0.30 2 0.4 1 0.2 3 0.5 0 0 0 0 1 0.2 474 100.0 269 0.87 1.20 0.49 15 4.3 15 4.3 5 1.4 4 1.1 5 1.4 0 0 0 0 554 100.0 225 1.58 1.78 0.64 17 8.0 14 6.6 4 1.9 2 0.9 1 0.5 0 0 0 0 2 0.9 271 100.0 116 1.27 1.70 0.54 1 16.7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 100.0 2 420 24.9 222 13.2 98 5.8 46 2.7 23 1.4 8 0.5 9 0.5 5 0.3 0 0 3 0.2 1638 100.0 834 0.97 1.39 0.49 10 4.8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 100.0 10 0.05 0.22 0.05 3 1.4 0 0 0 0 1 0.5 165 59.1 79 28,3 24 8.6 7 2.5 3 1.1 1 0.4 0 0 57 69.5 16 19.5 3 3.7 2 2.4 3 3.7 1 1.2 278 50.8 144 26.3 79 14.4 31 5.7 8 1.5 126 35.9 76 21.7 70 19.9 35 10.0 97 45.5 47 22.1 29 13.6 6 4 66.7 1 16.7 1687 853 50.6 199 95.2 279 82 547 351 213 A % '70 Co 83 6 2.9 % 7-25-65 7-15-66 126 100.0 16 7.7 % Total 0 0 57 27,3 % SO 0 0 126 60.3 % OSS 0 0 2 % CSO 10 1 % S 9 0 209 209 % Total Pellet GrouEs Per Plot Freq. Plots Index SD With P.G. X Total P.G. Freguenc~ Distribution** 6 5 4 3 0 8 7 �Table 3. -- Statistical description by vegetative type of mule deer pellet groups counted which accumulated over two periods of about one year each; prior to, and about 6 years after treatment of sagebrush areas with 2,4-D. (Continued). Dates & Treatment Time or Interval Vegeta~ive No. (Days) Type Plots* (355) Tr 0 1 2 Freguenc~ Distribution~w( 3 4 5 6 263 94.3 13 4.6 3 1.1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 81 98.7 1 1.2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 483 88.3 53 9.7 8 1.5 2 0.4 1 0.2 0 0 248 70.7 68 19.4 25 7.1 6 1.7 3 0.8 170 79.8 28 13.1 10 4.7 3 1.4 6 5 83.3 1 16.7 0 0 1687 1449 85.9 174 10.3 46 2.7 279 % S 82 % CSO 547 % OSS 351 % SO 213 % A % Total % + 9 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 19 100.0 16 0.07 0.92 0.06 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 100.0 1 0.01 0.11 0.01 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 79 100.0 64 0.14 0.44 0.12 0 0 0 0 1 0,3 0 0 0 0 0 0 155 100.0 103 0.44 0.85 0.29 0 0 2 0.9 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 67 100.0 43 0.31 0.76 0.20 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 100.0 1 11 0.7 4 0.2 2 0.1 0 0 1 0.1 0 0 0 0 0 0 332 100.0 238 0.20 0.57 0.14 7 8 Co - 4 sagebrush areas totaling 305.06 acres designated as controls but inadvertently aerially sprayed with 2,4-D in 1960; Tr - 4 sagebrush areas totaling 395.15 acres aerially sprayed with 2,4-D, June, 1959. S - sagebrush; CSO - conifer-sagebrush-oak; OSS - oak-snowberry-sagebrush; SO - sagebrush-oak; A - aspen. ~, Permanent, .001 acre, circular. ~'("i'( Total Pellet GrouEs Per Plot Plots Freq. With P.G. X SD Index Total P.G. The number of plots with 0, 1, 2, 3, ------ pellet groups. �Table 3A. -- Ranked mean estimates of mule deer pellet group densities by treatment and vegetative type. Groups accumulated over two periods of about one year each, prior to, and about 7 years following treatment of sagebrush areas with aerially-applied 2,4-D. 7-29-58 to 6-29-59 Treatment Treatment or Per Acre or Per T:i:Ee Veg. Type* Mean 2 SE Veg. Type* Total 2 SE ass OSS 1580 190 1,162,659 139,813 so eso 1270 234 815,321 97,464 eso SO 870 104 328,930 60,606 eo 600 Tr 134 233,139 41,096 Tr Co 590 104 183,036 40,878 S S 550 238 129,311 55,956 ~c 7-25-65 to 7-15-66 Treatment Treatment or Per Acre or Per T:lEe Veg. Type~c Mean 2 SE Veg. Type* Total 2 SE OSS ass 440 90 323,778 66,227 so eso 310 104 131,201 35,612 eso so 140 38 80,290 26,936 Tr 70 110 Tr 27,661 43,467 Co 50 30 Co 15,253 9,152 S 10 24 S 2,351 5,643 See Tables 1 and 2 for acreages, sampling intensities, and symbols. I-t-' 0 f-' �- 404 - Rabbit Long-term. -- The presence and absence of fecal droppings expressed as percentage of plots with droppings present + approximate 95% binomial confidence limits are shown by vegetative type in T.able 6. If we regard this percentage measure as an index of relative use, rabbit use doubled 1959-65 with similar of use between vegetative types. Pre- and post-treatment maximum· use occurred within the conifer-sagebrush-oak and minimal use within the aspen .type. However, there was little difference in use among the other vegetative types. Short-term. -- Approximate 95% confidence limits computed about the percentage of plots with droppings present on the study area are: pre-treatment 35.7 (33.7-38.4) and post-treatment 29.6 (27.8-32.3) suggesting a substantial . decline in rabbit use during 1965-66. Percentages of droppings present on plots within the major vegetative types were similar during the pre- and posttreatments periods except for the control and treated sagebrush areas. These reflect substantial reduction in rabbit use during 1965-66. There does not seem to be a practical way to adjust these data for area. However, the conifer-sagebrush-oak type represents both the largest area and maximum use and its status as the most heavily used rabbit habitat is clear. Grouse Long-term. -- The concept of the percentage of plots with dropping present with 95% binomial confidence limits as 'an index of relative use, as discussed above for rabbits, is also assumed for grouse. Plot percentages with grouse droppings present increased from 2.4 (1.8-3.3) during the pre-treatment period to 5.5 (4.5-6.7), post-treatment (Table 6). This presumed increase in use was associated with similar trends within the treated and non-treated sagebrush and sagebrush-oak. Chi square analysis indicated that this post-treatment increase (1959-65) was significant (p .( .025). �Table 4. __ Statistical description by vegetative type of cattle fecal droppings counted on plot establishment and about 7 years following treatment of sagebrush areas with 2,4-D. Dates & Treatment or Time Interval Vegetative No. (Days) Types+ P1ots* 0 Co Tr 1 0.5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 129 100.0 105 0.62 0.72 0.50 124 44.4 128 45.9 23 8.2 2 0.7 2 0.7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 188 100.0 155 0.67 0.72 0.56: 65 79.3 15 18.3 2 2.4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 19 100.0 17 0.23 0.48 0.21 374 68.4 153 28.0 15 2.7 2 0.4 3 0.5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 201 100.0 173 0.37 0.61 0.32 223 63.5 109 31.1 16 4.6 2 0.6 1 0.3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 151 100.0 128 0.43 0.64 0.36 130 61.0 59 27.7 17 8.0 5 2.3 2 0.9 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 116 100.0 83 0.54 0.82 0.39 6 5 83.3 1 16.7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 100.0 1 1687 1025 60.8 550 32.6 90 5.3 13 0.8 9 0.5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 805 100.0 662 0.48 0.69 0.39 0 63 30.1 42 20.1 13 6.2 5 2.4 1 0.5 0 0 0 0 1 0.5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 219 100.0 125 1.05 1.17 84 40~:2 0.60 279 82 547 351 213 % % Co Total Feces 2 1.0 A 6.-29-58 7-15-66 13 17 8.1 % Total 12 85 40.7 % SO 11 104 49.8 209 % OSS 10 3 % CSO 9 2 % S 8 1 % 7-29-58 (Unk.) Freguenc~ Distribution** 7 6 5 4 Total Plots Fecal GrouEs Per Plot Freq. With SD Index X Feces 209 % �Table 4. -- Statistical description by vegetative type of cattle fecal droppings counted on plot establishment treatment of sagebrush areas with 2,4-D. (Continued). and about 7 years following Dates & Treatment Time or Interval Vegeta~ive No. (Days) Types P1ots* 0 Total Plots Fecal GrouEs Per Plot With Freq. Feces SD X Index (2,938) Tr 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Total Feces 112 40.1 90 32.3 43 15.4 19 6.8 8 2.9 5 1.8 1 0.4 1 0.4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 303 100.0 167 1.09 1.26 0.60 64 78.0 17 20.7 0 0 0 0 1 1.2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 21 100.0 18 0.26 0.58 0.22 444 81.2 71 13.0 22 4.0 5 0.9 3 0.5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0.4 168 100.0 103 0.31 0.99 0.19 230 65.5 78 22.2 20 5.7 15 4.3 3 0.9 4 1.1 1 0.3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 201 100.0 121 0.57 1.02 0.34 146 68.5 35 16.4 21 9.9 4 1.9 2 0.9 3 1.4 1 0.5 1 0.5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 125 100.0 67 0.59 1.14 0.31 6 5 83.3 0 0 0 0 1 16.7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 100.0 1 1687 1085 64.3 354 21.0 148 8.8 57 3.4 22 1.3 13 0.8 3 0.2 2 0.1 1 0.1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0.1 1040 100.0 602 0.62 1.12 0.36 279 % S 82 % eso 547 % OSS 351 % SO 213 % A % Total - 1 % + eo - 4 sagebrush areas totaling about 305.06 acres designated as controls but inadvertently aerial sprayed with 2,4-D in 1960; Tr - 4 sagebrush areas totaling 395.15 acres aerially sprayed with 2.4-D, June, 1959; eso - conifer-sagebrush-oak; OSS - oak-snowberry-sagebrush; SO - sagebrush-oak; A - aspen • •'r Permanent, •h'< The number of plots with 0, 1, 2, 3, ------feca1 droppings. .001 acre, circular • �Table 4A. -- Chi square analyses of the proportion of cattle fecal droppings sampled within "controf'and 2,4-D treated areas and 3 major vegetative types on plot establishment and about 7 years after 2,4-D treatment of sagebrush. Vegetative Type* Co Period Estab. 1959-66 Fecal DroEEings B~ Vegetative TYEe % of Total Observed Expected Chi 129 219 148.22 199.79 16.0 21.1 805 1040 785.78 1059.21 Chi Computed Chi Square .47 .35 5.16 (P <.025) 2.06 1.52 23.4 29.1 805 1040 784.28 1060.71 .55 .40 4.53 (P <.05) 167.67 201.34 6.63 5.52 24.9 16.2 805 1040 838.33 1006.66 1.33, 1.10 14.58 (P <.001) 151 201 153.17 198.83 .03 .02 18.8 19.3 805 1040 802.83 1042: 17 .006 .005 .061 (P <".50) 116 125 106.40 134.59 .87 .68 14.4 12.0 805 1040 814.60 1030.41 .11 .09 1.75 (P < .20) Tr Estab. " 1959-66 188 303 208.72 282.29 CSO Estab. 1959-66 201 168 OSS Estab. 1959-66 SO Estab. 1959-66 * 2.49 1.85 Total Fecal GrouEs Expected Observed > See Tables 1 and 2 for acreages, sampling intensities, and symbols. - + c: �Table 5. -- Statistical description by vegetative type of cattle fecal droppings counted which accumulated one year each; prior to., and about 6 years after treatment af sagebrush areas with 2,4-D. Dates & Time Interval (Days) 7-29-58 6-29-59 Treatment or Vegetative Types Co No. Plots* 209 % Tr 4 1 0.5 279 % 115 41.2 120 43.0 36 12.9 5 1.8 S 82 % 61 74.4 17 20.7 4 4.9 CSO 547 % 352 64.4 157 28.7 OSS 351 % 206 58.7 SO 213 % Fec~l GrouEs Eer Plot Freq. SD X Index 0.80 0.91 0.56 1 0.5 Total Feces 167 100.0 Total Plots With Feces 118 3 1.1 0 0 219 100.0 164 0.78 0.82 0.59 0 0 0 0 0 0 25 100.0 21 0.30 0.56 0.26 27 4.9 7 1.3 4 0.7 0 0 248 100.0 195 0.45 0.72 0.36 115 32.8 21 6.0 6 1.7 3 0.9 0 0 187 100.0 145 0.53 0.76 0.41 126 59.2 61 28.6 18 8.5 6 2.8 2 0.9 0 0 123 100.0 87 0.58 0.84 0.41 6 5 83.3 1 16.7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 100.0 1 % Total 1687 % 956 56.7 556 32.9 126 7.5 35 2.1 13 0.8 1 0.1 970 100.0 731 0.57 0.79 0.43 7-25-65 7-15-66 Co 209 % 139 66.5 50 23.9 17 8.1 2 1.0 1 0.5 0 0 94 100.0 70 0.44 0.73 0.33 (355) Tr 279 % 205 73.5 54 19.4 14 5.0 4 1.4 1 0.4 1 0.4 103 100.0 74 0.37 0.73 0.27 (335) 91 43.5 Freguenc~ Distribution** 1 2 3 85 20 11 40.7 9.6 5.3 over two periods of about A 0 5 - �Table 5. __ Statistical description by vegetative type of cattle fecal droppings counted which accumulated over two periods of about one year each; prior to, and about 6 years after treatment of sagebrush areas with 2,4-D~ (Continued). Dates & Time Interval (Days) Treatment or Vegetative Types+ S 0 0 1 1.2 0 0 0 0 11 100.0 9 0.13 0.44 0.11 506 92.5 32 5.8 6 1.1 1 0.2 1 0.2 1 0.2 56 100.0 41 0.09 0.43 C.07 280 79.8 54 15.4 14 4.0 3 0.9 0 0 0 0 91 100.0 71 0.26 0.57 0.20 180 84.5 22 10.3 7 3.3 4 1.9 0 0 0 0 48 100.0 33 0.23 0.60 0.15 6 5 83.3 0 0 1 16.7 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 100.0 1 1687 1388 82.3 220 13.0 59 3.5 15 0.9 3 0.2 2 .0.1 405 100.0 299 0.24 0.59 0.18 547 351 213 % A % Total - 8 9.8 % SO Fecal GrouEs Per Plot Freq. Index SD X 73 89.0 82 % OSS Total Plots With Feces 0 No. Plots* % CSO Total Feces Freguencx Distribution** 3 2 1 % 5 4 + Co _ 4 sagebrush areas totaling 305.06 acres designated as controls but inadvertently aerially sprayed with 2,4-D in 1960; Tr - 4 sagebrush areas totaling 395.15 acres aerially sprayed with 2,4-D, June, 1959; S - sagebrush: CSO - conifer-sagebrush-oak: OSS - oaksnowberry-sagebrush: SO - sagebrush-oak; A - aspen. * Permanent, .001 acre, circular. ** The number of plots with 0, 1, 2, 3, ---------fecal droppings. �Table 5A. -- Ranked mean estimates of cattle fecal dropping densities by treatment and vegetative type. Droppings accumulated over two periods of about one year each, prior to, and about 7 years following treatment of sagebrush areas with aerially-applied 2,4-D. Mean 7-29-58 to 6-29-58 Per Type Treatment or Veg. 2 SE Type* Total 2 SE 800 780 580 530 450 300 126 98 116 82 62 124 58,103 60,341 38,725 38,348 30,044 29,154 Mean 7-25-65 to 7-15-66 Per Type Treatment or Veg. 2 SE Type* Mean 2 SE 440 370 260 230 130 90 100 88 60 82 98 36 Per Acre Treatment or Veg. Type* Co Tr so ass CSO S * CSO ass Tr Co so S 421,718 390,006 308,217 244,048 150,220 70,533 Per Acre Treatment or Veg. Type* Co Tr ass so S CSO See Tables 1 and 2 for acreages, sampling intensities, and symbols. ass Tr Co CSO so S 191,324 146,206 134,226 84,344 59,570 30,564 44,152 34,773 30,506 33,737 21,238 23,041 .j::'" f-' 0 �- 411 - Short-term. -- Pre- and post-treatment indices of grouse use were similar (Table 7) suggesting that the long-term increase described above 'in 1965 and grouse use during 1965-66 returned to pre-treatment levels. Maximum pre- and posttreatment use indices occurred within the treated sagebrush areas. Examination of plot data by individual, treated sagebrush area shows that these inferred changes in grouse use occurred within, or on the sagebrush and sagebrush-oak types adjacent to area 1. This most effectively treated area is known to be used by sage grouse in the spring, summer and perhaps the winter period. It also contains the only known sage grouse strutting ground within the study area. Therefore, the implied increase. in grouse use on the study area and on sagebrush area 1 and adjacent types may be ascribed to sage grouse. Elk and Turkey Neither elk pellet groups or turkey droppings were encountered during the 195859 plot readings. However, both were recorded in small numbe~during 1965 (26 elk pellet groups, 6 plots with turkey droppings) and 1966 (22 elk pellet g.'roups and 1 plot with turkey droppings). Elk pellet groups were rather evenly distributed among the major vegetative types and treatments in 1965. In 1966, how"" ever, about one-half of elk pellet groups occured within the conifer-sagebrushoak type. These data suggest that elk were making increasing use of the entire study area while turkey were occasionally present in specific habitats. Small Rodents, Excluding Pocket Gophers Genera and numbers caught. -- Four genera including 244 rodents of which 88 percent were Peromyscus sp. were captured in 2,160 trap-nights on three habitats, during September, 1959 and 1965 (Table 8). Shrews Sorex sp. did not appear in the 1965 sample. Sixteen meadow voles Microtus sp. were caught in 1965 compared to two in 1959. The 1965 rodent catch was almost double that in 1959 because of the larger sa~ples within the heavily and lightly treated sagebrush areas (Table 9). During both years, the oak-snowberry-sagebrush sample yielded the same number. Weight distribution of deer mice. -- Rodent body weights may be regarded as "roughly proportional to age Davis (1956:22)," and may therefore indicate the gross age structure and provide an index to reproduction and survival. The 1959 and 1965 relative frequencies of Peromyscus sp. body weights are thus arranged by habitat and described statistically in Table 10. Since the 1959 samples were obtained about two months after 2,4-D application to area ~ this population is of immediate interest. As compared to the other habitats, less than half as many deer mice were trapped on this area in 1959 and there were probably no very young mice. Also, analysis of variance indicated that mean deer mice body weights were significantly (P <.05) heavier and therefore probably comprised of mice of higher average age than those from the untreated habitats. These facts suggest immediate direct or indirect effects of 2,4-D treatment on reproduction and survival of deer mice. Keith et al., (1959) reported a decline in pocket gopher populations one year after 2:4-D application and suspected both direct and indirect effects of this application as'casual factors. Whatever the immediate treatment effects, the 1965 catch implies rather similar population levels among the three habitats with perhaps somewhat higher productivity or survival within the oak-snowberry-sagebrush type. Also, if a minimum weight of 20 g is �Table 6. -- Statistical description of rabbit, sage and blue grouse droppings present on plot establishment treatment of sagebrush areas .lith 2,4-D. Dates & Time Interval Treatment or Vegetative Type+ (Days) 7-29-58 Co and about 7 years following No. P1ots~'< Rabbit Dro~~in~s Absent Present 95% Conf. Limits** Lower Upper Grouse Droppings Absent Present 95% Conf. Limits** Lower Upper 209 % 114 54.5 95 45.5 38.95 53.17 206 98.6 3 1.4 0.12 3.25 279 % 140 50.2 139 49.8 44.20 55.80 248 88.9 31 11.1 7.71 15.08 82 % 53 64.6 29 35.4 24.67 46.48 79 96.3 3 3.7 0.78 10.58 547 % 133 24.3 414 75.7 72.18 79.52 547 100.0 0 0 0 0.69 351 % 225 64.1 126 35.9 30.92 41.31 348 99.1 3 0.9 0.19 2.60 213 % 128 60.1 85 39.9 33.15 47.14 212 99.5 1 0.5 .013 2.76 6 % 5 83.3 1 16.7 0.42 64.17 6 100.0 0 0 0 45.92 1687 % 798 47.3 889 52.7 50.57 55.42 1646 97.6 41 2.4 1.78 3.30 209 % 10 4.8 199 95.2 91.08 97.54 205 98.1 4 1.9 0.55 5.04 279 % 18 6.5 261 93.5 89.93 96.07 229 82.1 50 17.9 14.50 24.20 (Unk.) Tr S CSO OSS SO A Total 6-29-59 7-15-66 Co (2,938) Tr �Table 6. -- Statistical description of rabbit, sage and blue grouse droppings present on plot establishment and about 7 years following treatment of sagebrush areas with 2,4-D. (Continued). Dates & Time Interval Treatment or No. (Days) Vegetative Type+ P1ots* S CSO ass so 95% Cou£. Limit$'~* Lower Upper Grouse Dropp"iugs Absent Present 95%.CGnf. Limits** Lower Upper 82 % 12 14.6 70 85.4 75.82 92.18 68 82.9 14 17.1 9.91 27.61 547 % 14 2.6 533 97.4 95.57 98.68 542 99.1 5 0.9 0.30 2.21 351 % 27 7.7 324 92.3 89.24 94.83 344 98.0 7 2.0 0.84 4.27 213 % 20 9.4 193 90.6 86.26 94.18 201 94.4 12 5.6 3.14 10.25 3 3 % 50.0 50.0 11.82 88.19 6 100.0 0 0 0 45.92 1687 104 6.2 1583 93.8 92.56 94.90 1595 94.5 92 5.5 4.46 6.70 6 A Total Rabbit Droppings Absent Present % + Co - 4 sagebrush areas totaling 305.06 acres designated as controls but inadvertently aerially sprayed with 2,4-D in 1960; Tr - .4 sagebrush areas totaling 395.15 acres aerially sprayed with 2,4-D, June, 1959; S - sagebrush; CSO - conifer-sagebrush-oak; OSS - oak-snowberry-sagebr~~hi SO - sagebrush-oak; A - aspen. * Permanent, .001 acre, circular. ** (Mainland ~ al. 1956). �Table 7. -- Statistical description of rabbit, sage And blue grouse droppings present which accumulated year each; prior to, and about 6 years after treatment of sagebrush areas with 2,4-D. Dates & Time Interval Treatment or No. Vegetative Type+ P1ots* (Days) 7-29-58 6-29-59 Co (335) Tr S CSO OSS SO 7-25-65 7-15-66 Co (355) Tr 95% Conf. Limits** Lower Upper Grouse DroEEin~s Absent Present 95% Conf •.Limits** Lower Upper 209 % 121 57.9 88 42.1 35.08 49.16 207 99.0 2 1.0 0.12 3.49 279 % 190 68.1 89 31.9 26.55 37.84 247 88.5 32 11.5 8.44 16.39 82 % 70 85.4 12 14.6 8.00 24.74 76 92.7 6 7.3 2.75 15.28 547 % 276 50.5 271 49.5 45.71 54.29 544 99.5 3 0.5 0.12 1.66 351 % 273 77 .8 78 22.2 17.76 26.73 350 99.7 1 0.3 .0076 1.66 213 % 159 74.6 54 25.4 19.20 31.55 210 98.6 3 1.4 0.30 4.13 6 % 5 83.3 1 16.7 0.42 64.17 6 100.0 0 0 0 45.92 1687 % 1094 64.8 593 35.7 33,69 38.36 1640 97.2 47 2.8 2.29 3,88 209 % 172 82.3 37 17.7 13.06 23.89 206 98,6 3 1.4 0.30 4.20 279 % 217 77 .8 62 22,2 17.28 27.33 257 92,1 22 7.9 5,13 11.83 A Total Rabbit DroEEings Absent Present over two periods of about one �Table 7. -- Statistical description of rabbit, sage and blue grouse droppings present which accumulated over two periods of about one year each; prior to, and about 6 years after treatment of sagebrush areas with 2,4-D. (Continued). Dates & Time Interval Treatment or No. (Days) Vegetative Type+ Plots* S CSO OSS SO 95%.Conf. Limit sm'< Upper Lower Grouse Droppi~gs Absent Present 95% Conf. Limits** Lower Upper 82 % 70 85.4 12 14.6 8.01 24.60 75 91.5 7 8.5 3.51 16.84 547 % 267 48.8 280 51.2 46.91 55.48 544 99.5 3 0.5 0.115 1.66 351 % 276 78.6 75 21.4 16.84 25.67 348 99.2 3 0.8 0.208 2.56 213 % 179 84.0 34 16.0 11.34 21.64 209 98.1 4 1.9 0.53 4.82 6 % 6 100.0 0 0 0 45.92 6 100.0 0 0 0 45.92 1687 % 1187 70.3 500 29.6 27.80 32.27 1645 97.5 42 2.5 1.80 3.31 A Total Rabbit DroEEings Present Absent + Co - 4 sagebrush areas totaling 305.06 acres designated as controls but inadvertently aerially sprayed with 2,4-D in 1960; Tr - 4 sagebrush areas totaling 395.15 acres aerially sprayed with 2,4-D, June, 1959; S - sagebrush; CSO - conifer-sagebrush-oak; OSS - oaksnowberry-sagebrush; SO - sagebrush-oak; A - aspen. * Permanent, .001 acre, circular. ** (Mainland et ale 1956). �~x· Tab1e8--Sununary of rodents captured by snap-traps on two sagebrush areas and an adjacent oak-snowberry-sagebrush area using permanent stations laid out in the Calhoun Type A design. A total of 1,080 trap-nights were employed for each year, 1959 and 1965. Sample Day Dates Genera* 1 9-8-59 Eutamias sp. Microtus sp. Perom~scus sp. Sorex sp. 9-27-65 Sasebrush Area TraE1ines Control (Area 8) 2,4-D (Area 1) 3';'2 3-1 1-1 1-2 OSS Area Tra~lines 2-1 2-2 TOTAL 0 0 14 0 14 2 0 11 0 13- 2 2 60 0 64 Total 0 1 13 0 14 0 1 6 0 7 0 0 8 0 8 0 0 8 0 8 Total 0 0 15 0 15 0 0 12 0 12 0 1 6 1 8 0 1 8 0 9 0 3 3 0 6 0 1 12 1 14 0 6 56 2 64 0 0 1 ....Q 0 0 0 ....Q 0 9 0 0 3 0 3 1 1 1 0 1 -.-Q 2 0 0 9 ....Q Total 0 0 2 -.-Q 2 Total 0 1 6 1 8 0 2 4 1 7 0 1 11 1 13 0 0 10 0 10 . 0 1 7 1 9 0 2 7 1 10 0 7 45 5 57 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 6 0 6 0 0 6 0 6 0 3 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 Eutamias sp_ Microtus sp. Perom~scus sp. Sorex sp. , " .f::'" f-' 0'\ I 2 9-9-59 9-28-65 3 9-10-59 Eutamias sp. Microtus sp , Perom~scus sp. Sorex sp , Eutamias sp. Microtus sp, Perom~scus sp. Sorex sp. Eutamias sp. Microtus sp. Perom~scus sp. Sorex sp. a Total 9-29-65 Eutamias sp. Ricrotus sp. 0 16 ~ 17 a 16 0 16 a 3 �Table 8--Summary of rodents captured by snap-traps on two sagebrush areas and an adjacent,oak-snowberry-sagebrush area using permanent stations laid out in the Calhoun Type A design. A total of 1,080 trap-nights were employed for each year, 1959 and 1965. (Continued). Sample Day Sageb~usb A~ea I~apliDes Dates Total Control 3-1 3 0 3 Total 0 1 18 0 19 Genera~'~ Peromyscus sp. Sorex sp. 1959 Summary 1965 Summary Eutamias sp_ Microtus sp_ Peromyscus sp_ Sorex sp. Eutamias sp_ Microtus sp_ Peromyscus sp. Sorex sp , , 0 1 24 ...1 Total 26 (Area 8) 3-2 1 0 1 0 1 2,4-D (Area 1) 1':2 1-1 3 4 1 0 5 4 0 0 8 8 0 9 0 8 1 0 9 0 10 0 2 17 1 20 0 3 20 3 26 0 1 22 0 23 * Tentative species identification; E. guadrivittatus, ~. longicaudus, R. manicu1atus. not identified. .QSS 8~ea I~aplines 2-1 6 0 7 2-2 '5 0 6 TOTAL 22 1 26 0 0 29 0 29 2 0 20 0 22 :3 2 92 0 97 0 5 16 1 22 0 4 24 0 16 123 .2 30 ~ 147 The species of shrew (Sorex) was ~ i-' -..J �- 418 - Table 9--Rodents captured per 100 trap-nights with approximate binomial confidence limits on two sagebrush areas and an adjacent oak-snowberry-sagebrush area using snaptraps on permanent stations laid out in the Calhoun Type A design. There were 360 trap-nights employed on each area during September, 1959 and 1965. Sagebrush Areas Control (8) 2,4-D (1) O. S. S. Total 1959 95% c. L. 5.0 3.0 - 7.8 7.8 5.3 - 10.6 14.2 10.7 - 18.3 9.0 7.3 - 10.9 1965 95% C. L. 12.8 9.5 - 16.8 13.6 10.2 - 16.5 14.4 10.9 - 18.5 13.6 11.6 - 15.9 Year (Mainland et a1., 1956: Table 6) Table lO-The relative frequencies and statistical description of 2m deer mice Peromyscus sp.body weights (g) sampled from two sagebrush areas and an adjacent.oak-snowberrysagebrush area during September, 1959 and 1965. Sagebrush Areas Control (8) 2,4-D (1) 1959 1965 1959 1965 Class Interval 5.0 - 9.9 10.0 - 14.9 15.0 - 19.9 20.0 - 24.9 25.0 - 29.9 30.0 - 34.9 Total S. 1959 1965 .062 .333 .521 .083 .051 .333 .436 .102 o .720 .240 .040 .025 .300 .625 .050 .176 .470 .353 .024 .341 .390 .220 o o o o o o .on o .999 .024 .999 .999 .999 o 6 O. S. o o 1.00 1.00 o ~ Statistic 25 40 17 41 48 39 No. Mice+ Mean 14.30 14.78 17.64 17 .03 15.64 16.30 SD 2.54 2.47 3.31 14.19 3.17 4.72 Conf. Limits (P = .05) Lower Upper 13.25 15.35 14 .. 78 16.36 15.94 19.34 12.55 21.51 14.74 16.54 14. rt N + Only intact carcasses are Lnc Ludad , a few were partially eaten. 17.83 �- 419 regarded as the division between mature mice and those of relatively advanced age the same magnitude of implied survival occurred in the 1959 and 1965 samples. This magnitude, in order of decreasing survival was area 1, oak-snowberrysagebrush and area 8. The interesting possibility of population controls peculiar to each habitat and independent of treatment effects is suggested. Discussion: The number of fecal pellets, fecal groups, or the frequency of fecal material on plots have all been used as indicators of habitat use by deer and cattle (Bramble and Byrnes 1958; Julander 1958) and rabbits (Vorhies and Taylor 1933; Adams 1959) •. Apparently, however, there is no experimental verification that the technique yields reliable estimates of relative use nor is there a satisfactory statistical rationale to make the most efficient use of the data. The primary reason for including the frequency distributions of the fecal group counts was to facilitate formulation of a satisfactory rationale. Furthermore, the frequency of fecal droppings on plots could yield misleading information in certain habitats. Thus, in the case of sagebrush control; a reduction in sagebrush density and average crown diameter may require a similar or smaller post-~reatment wintering population of sage grouse to use a larger area to meet its cover and energy requirements. The conclusion, based on the increased frequency of plots with droppings, might be that the population had increased due to treatment. As a matter of conjecture, the much higher posttreatment values within the treated sagebrush and largely adjacent sagebrushoak and untreated sagebrush areas could have been associated with this presumed phenomena. The indicated drastic decrease :indeer use during 1965-66 may, or may not be, related to habitat manipulation on, or near the study area. The lower portions of the study area are believed to constitute the upper limits of winter range. Thus, interacting population densities and winter climatic factors may be a source of highly variable winter deer population densities. There are no reliable annual data on deer population densities and no winter climatic data for this portion of the Uncompahgre Plateau. Therefore, no e'Xplanation can . be offered for this presumed decrease in deer use of the study area. The shifts in cattle use to treated sagebrush areas perhaps may be explained by the much larger amounts of grass available during the post-treatment period. The increas'e in meadow voles Microtus sp , may also be associated with the more abundant grass. However, the inferred shift of deer use from the 'treated sagebrush areas which have relatively high forage yields of sagebrush and whose pre-treatment use by deer was apparently relatively light is difficult to explain. Perhaps a consideration of post-treatment plant composition and cover indices may offer some clues. It is apparent, if we accept the fecal count data as a reliable index of use, that Gambel oak and its associated vegetative complex constitute important deer habitat on the stu4y area. Herbicidaleradication of oak now being tested on the Uncompahgre National Forest would certainly be unwise on habitats ecologically similar to the study area. Literature Cited Adams, L. 1959. An analysis of snowshoe hares in northwestern NontanA. Monog., 29(2):141-170. Eco L, �- 420 - Anderson,A. E. 1960a. Distribution and abundance indices of selected biota in western Colorado before and two after 2,4-D application. M. S. Thesis. Colorado State Univ. Fort Collins, 130 pp. Anderson, A. E. 1960b. Effects of sagebrush eradication by chemical means on deer and related wildlife. W-38-R. Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Dept., Denver, Colo., 73 pp. (mimeo.). Bramble, W. C. and W. R. Byrnes. 1958. game after chemical brush control. Use of a power line right-of-way by Pa. Game News 29(2):17-25. Calhoun, J. B. Ed. 1956. Population dynamics of vertebrates, compilation of research data, Release No.5: 1951 Annual Report -- North American Census of Small Mammals. U. S.Dept. Health, Natl. Inst. Mental Health, Bethesda, Md. 164 pp. (processed). . Davis, D. E. 1956. Manual for the analysis of rodent populations. Bros., Inc., Ann Arbor, Mich., 82 pp. (processed). Hansen, R. M. 1957. Key to the mammals of Colorado. State Univ., Fort Collins, 18 pp. (mimeo.). Edwards Agr. Exp. Sta. Colorado Julander, O. 1958. Techniques in studying competition between big game and livestock. J. Range Mgmt., 11(1):18-21. Ked.th, J. 0.,. R. M. Hansen, and A. L. Ward. 1959. Effect of 2,4-D on abundance and foods of pocket gophers. J. Wildl. Mgmt., 23(2):137-145. Mainland, D. R., L. E. Herrera, and M. I. Sutcliffe. 1956. Tables for use with binomial samples. Dept. Medical St~tistics, New York Univ. College of Medicine, N. Y., 83 pp. (processed). Vorhies, C. T. and W. P. Taylor. 1933. The life histories and ecology of jack rabbits, Lepus alIeni and Lepus ca1.ifornl.cusspp. in relation to grazing in Arizona. Univ. Ariz. ColI. Agr. and Exp. Sta. Tech. Bull. 49. 587 pp. Warren, E. R. 330 pp. 1942. The mammals of Colorado. Submitted by: Allen E. Anderson Project Leader Date: July, 196.6 Univ. Oklahoma Press, Norman, Approved by: W. W. Sandfort Game Research Chief • F. C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator � https://cpw.cvlcollections.org/files/original/546240b78fa1e111301e9c38138b8160.pdf 5be5169a3c1c22013eac8fec0360a779 PDF Text Text OctobeT, 1966 - 1- JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO Project No. w-88-R-ll Work Plan No. 1 JIf.d.gTatory Bird Il1vestigatim:s Job No. Title of Job: Wa.terfowl PToduction Survey Period Covered: April 1, 1965 to June 15, 1966. 1 Personnel: Those cooperating on the 1965 CO~Dts were: Ken Baer, Ray Buller, Jack Frost~ Fred Glover, Charles Graham, Charles Hayes, Jack Randall, Mitchell Sheldon, and Cecil Williams, U. S. Bureau of Sport FisheTies and Wildlife; George Wrakestraw, Wyoming Game,and Fish Department; John Nagel and Don Smith, Utah Fish and Game Department; and Howard ~J~nk, Jack Grieb, Richard Hopper, Wally Powell, Wayne Russell, and William Rutherford, Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department. ��- 3 WATERFOWL PRODUCTION SURVEY William H. Rutherford Techniques Used: Present breeding-pair and production surveys have been consolidated into a breeding-pair inventory in late May and early June. One week of the inventory requires roughly 30 to 40 hours of aircraft llse. All other work is done on the ground, usually in cooperation with local Bureau of Sport Fisheries and Wildlife personnel. On the basis of these studies, reports are made, as required, to the Bureau of Sport Fisheries and Wildlife, which constitutes Colorado's part in the annua.L cooperative breeding ground survey. The 1965 surveys were conducted within the period May 10 to June 15. During this time, ground counts were made in the Yampa Valley and Brown's Park, aerial counts were made in the South Platte an~ Cache la Poudre Valleys a~d in North Park, and intensive aerial coverages combined with air-ground comparison studies were conducted in the San Luis Valley. In addition, a follow-up trip was made to tbe Yampa Valley in June, in an attempt to determine nesting success in the Canada goose flock. This trip was unsuccessful, due to extreme high water. As for the past several years, intensive brood surveys were not conducted this year due to a lack of time. Thus, this final breeding ground report considers only the breeding-pair surveys with last minute notes on weather and water conditions, accompanied by gross observations of early nesting success in the breeding areas. All survey methods and sample areas remained the same as in past years, with the previously mentioned intensive inventory in the San Luis Valley being continued for the second year. Flying was done with a Cessna 185 airplane in the San Luis Valley, and with a Cessna 180 in North Park, the South Platte Valley, and the Cache la Poudre Valley. Areas which are sampled by blocks or sections were f:;Lownwith one observer, while areas sampled by transects were flown with two observers. Findings: Weather conditions in Colorado during the spring and early summer' were variable and probably not altogether favorable for waterfowl nesting. TJ:::.e high mountain snowpack was very heavy in all areas, and the spring season was generally cold and wet. Runoff waS retarded, but once it started many streams reached flood proportions. Coupled with this was a continuation of heavy precipitation, with cloudbursts ~uring June contributing to already heavy runoff. Breeding-pair surveys were conducted before streams began to rise appreciably. The unusual quantities of water in the South Platte Valley have probably adversely affected nest establishment, hatching success, and brood survival. In the Yampa Valley, it is believed that goose nesting was completed successfully before river and pond areas were flooded. In areas of the state other than the South Platte Valley, waterfowl production has probably not suffered from flooding. It appears that water will be present in ab1;mdance in all areas of the state thrcmgb.out the summer, and that broods surviving the flood have an excellent chance of surviving to the fall flight. �-4 - Examination of the duck breeding-pair estimates by area (Table 1) reveal that the 1965 counts were up 1.0 percent from 1964 and 32.0 percent above the 1954-1964 eleven-year average. It is obvious that Colorado is continuing to experience a year-to-year upward trend in breeding-pair numbers. Comparison of individual breeding grO'lmd estimates between 1964 and 1965 showed the changes noted in Table 1. San Luis Valley breeding-pai:!:' estimates for years prior to 1964 are not compaz-ab.Lewith those of the last two years; therefore no comparison with the long-term average will be made. North Park and the San Luis Valley are the only areas showing decreases from 1964. All other breeding grounds showed increases in the number of -breeding-pairs over 1964, and all areas showed increases over the longterm average. Species composition percentages of the breeding duck population were about the same as those of past years. Blue-winged teal, green-winged teal, gad-, wall, shoveller, and merganser percentages were up somewhat, with other species percentages being either stable or slightly down. Table 1 -- Summary of Colorado Duck Breeding Ground Population Estimates, 1965 with 1964 and the Eleven-year ,for Comparison Total Estimated Breeding Pairs Ll.-yr.avo Area 1965 1964 1954-1964 Percent Change From From 11 yr. 1964 Average San Luis Valley North Park South Platte Valley Cache la Poudre Valley Yampa Valley Brown'S Park 26,682 28,755 9,044 11,000 11,155 10,517 5,057 2,381 3,838 2,613 115 157 28,7551/ 4,570 4,163 1,781 2,987 110 7·2 17·8 + 6.7 + 112.4 + 46.9 + 36·5 TOTALS 55,933 55,381 42,366 + Y 1/ + 97.9 + 16'7.9 + 183·9 + 28·5 + 42.'7 1.0 + 32.0 San Luis Valley estimates are based on r-esu.l.t.s of 1964 and 1965 coverage only. The much less intensive coverage of previous years is not included in the calculations. �- 5 Table 2 -- Species Composition of the Colorado Breeding Duck Population, 1965, 1964, and the 1954-1964 Eleven-year Average Species Composition, Percent Number of Breeding Pairs 1965 1954-1964 1964 1/ Average 1/ Species 1965 1964 1/ 1954-1964 Average 1/ IV.allard Blue-winged or Cinnamon Teal Pintail Gadwall American Widgeon Shoveller Green-winged Teal Redhead Lesser Scaup Ruddy Duck Bufflehead Canvasback Ringneck American Merganser 30,083 31,976 27,233 53·78 57·74 7,314 2,358 5,501 5,377 5,931 3,450 ;3,627 2,923 3,394 13.08 4.22 9.83 9·71 10·71 6.23 1,200 2,964 880 2,359 500 1,313 2.15 5·30 1.59 4.26 1.18 3·10 3,890 1,732 276 27 14 1,656 2,891 399 78 11 919 1,445 555 102 4 6·95 3·10 0.49 0.05 0.02 2·99 5·22 0·72 0.14 0.02 2 27 44 30 76 0.05 0.08 2.17 3.41 1.31 0.24 0.01 0.07 0.18 547 327 245 TOTALS 55,933 T 64.28 0·59 100.00 100.00 100.00 ============================================================================= !I Revised San Luis Valley estimates are included in these fig~es. In 1965, the western slope Canada goose breeding area showed a decrease in number of geese and total gosling production from the all-time high of 1964, but still substantially above the nine-year average. Approximately half of the indicated gosling production (Table 5) was in the form of incubating eggs; thus, the actual number of goslings produced will be somewhat lower. All nests were hatched before extreme high water occurred, and no nests are known to have been lost by flooding. Tables 3, 4, and 5 list the numbers, age composition, location, and past years' comparisons of this breeding goose flock)' Examination of these data by area shows that the Yampa and Little Snake Rivers contribute most of the volume of production and total geese observed, and that the decrease this year is primarily due to decreases in these areas. The Green River appears to be making a recovery as regards goose nesting habitat, as no production at all could be determined last year while four broods totaling 19 goslings were found in 1965. This year's production on the Green River nearly equals the nine-year average, but it .should be pointed out that the average includes at least three years of little or no production, during the construction and initial filling of Flaming Gorge Reservoir. �-6 - Table 3 -- Number of Canada Geese by BreedL~g Classification, Moffat COUi~ty, Colorado 1965 Nesting Pairs Area 2-yr.old 1/ Pairs - ?J No. Birds Estimated No. Goslings In Groups Total Birds Yampa-Craig to Juniper Springs ,Juniper to Cross MOlmtain Lily Park 11 25 69 188 12 10 14 10 64 49 144 185 YAMPA TOTALS 33 Green (Brown!s Park) 4 6 19 Little Snake (lower bridge to state line) 12 10 59 171 GRAND TOTALS 260 517 8 168 244 732 ============================================================================= !I Novice pairs which are potential nesters next year. Y This category includes both eggs and goslings counted. Table 4 -- Total Canada Geese Observed, Moffat County, Colorado, 1965 Area No. Geese Counted 1956-64 Ave .. 1965 1964 Yampa River Green River Little Snake River 517 ll7 168 584 51 319 254 55 183 TOTALS 732 954 492 Y Percent Change From 195b-:64 From 1964 Ave. 11 8 47 + 104 15 8 23 + 49 =================~==============================================~============ Y Little Snake River not included in survey QQtil 1962. The current surveys indicate a moderately successful production year and a continuation of the excellent status of the Canada goose flock in Moffat County. Most of the highest-quality nesting habitat is now occtlpiedJ hu.t there still remains a considerable amount of unoccupied nesting habitat of somewhat lower quality but still capable of good production. Thus, it is the management objective to continue the increase in the size of this flock. �-7- Table 5 -- Number of Canada Goose Goslip~s Observed, Moffat County, Colorado, 1965. Percent Change From 1956-64 Number of Goslings 1956-64 Area 1965 1964 Ave. Yampa River Green River Little Snake River 182 19 59 290 0 137 94 20 51 Y TOTALS 260 427 165 From 1964 Ave. 37 + 94 57 + 16 39 -I- rnr. 5 57 ============================================================================ Y Little Snake River not included in survey ~n.til 1962. Fall Flight Prediction: It is anticipated that fall duck flights from Colorado's 1965 production will be considerably above average. No summer water shortages are expected to develop, and broods should have excellent survival rates. Populations and production of Canada Geese have leveled off this year, and probably will not show the remarkable year-to-year increases which have been exhibited during the previous two years. Hunting restrictions both in Colorado and in California Game Management Unit 22 are still very much in order, to avoid the original mistake of overharvesting. The recommended. bag and possession limit for Moffat County for the 1965 season is one goose. Prepared by: William H. Rutherford Wildlife Researcher Date October, 1966 -------------------~~----------------- Approved by: Jack R. Grieb Project Leader Ferd c. Kleinsc~n.itz Federal Aid Coordinator ��October, 1966 - 9 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO --------~----------------- Project No. W-88-R-ll Work Plan No. 1 Migratory Bird Investigations Job No. Title of Job: Trapping and Banding Ducks and Geese Period Covered: April 1, 1965 to March 31, 1966 Personnel: 2 Charles Hayes, Jack Randall, Jack Frost, Fenard Baer, Don Kreible, Bureau of Sport Fisheries and Wildlife; Gail Boyd, Claude Brock, Gurney Crawford, Brownlee Guyer, Pat Hatch, Alfred Hemmert, Donald Jepson, Robert Kitzmiller, Phil Mason, Richard McDonald, Tom Morrow, Robert Reynolds, Charles Roberts, Errol Ryland, Wayne Sandfort, Tom Sherrill, Mark Strong, Howard Funk, Jack Grieb, William Rutherford, Richard Hopper, Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department. INTRODUCTION The trapping and banding activities of Project w-88-R-ll are summarized in this report for the segment-year April, 1965 to March 31, 1966. The analysis of band recoveries is carried under a separate job (Work Plan 1, Job 3); thus, no attempt is made to interpret banding data in this report. This report is limited to a tabulation and factual description of numbers and locations of birds banded during the specified segment-yea.r, with comments on trapping techniques and other pertinent information. Objectives: (1) To trap and band ducks and geese for the purpose of accumulating migration, life history, and annual mortality data. (2) To report the species and numbers of ducks and geese banded as part of other w-88-R-ll jobs. Techniques Used: Banding operations were roughly divided into three phases-summer, fall, and winter banding. Summer banding was conducted on Colorado breeding grounds and emphasized the banding of young ducks and geese, and molting adults which nested in the vicinity of the banding sites. �- 10 - Late summer and fall activities consisted of pre-season duck banding in the San Luis Valley as part of the continued intensive study to evaluate the effects of hunting on local ducks in that area (Work Plan I, Job 12). Winter banding of geese was confined to the Fort Collins and Denver areas in north-central Colorado. The intensive winter duck banding program was continued on the eastern slope of Colorado for the third consecutive year as part of an overall investigation of wintering mallard populations (Work Plan III, Job 6). Winter duck-banding efforts were concentrated in four general areas: (1) Cache la Poudre Valley; (2) South Platte Valley; (3) Arkansas Valley; and (4) Bonny Reservoir. Four types of traps were employed to capture ducks and geese during segment 11. These included the (1) corral trap for drive-trapping during portions of the summer duck and goose banding programs; (2) Salt Plains trap for late summer, fall, and winter bait-trapping; (3) Cannon-net trap for bait-trapping ducks and geese in the winter; and (4) Crawford walk-in trap for bait-trapping ducks and geese in the winter. �- 11 - TRAPPING AND BANDING DUCKS AND GEESE Richard M. Hopper Ducks Table 1 shows the number of ducks banded by species and location. A total of 10,834 ducks of 11 species was banded during segment 11. In addition, 48 American coots were banded. Mallards were again the most prominent species in the banded sample during 1965-66, accounting for 9,118, or about 84 percent, of the total ducks banded. Nearly 7,100 of these mallards were banded as part of the intensive investigation of wintering mallard flocks in eastern Colorado. Most of the remaining mallards (1,800) were banded in the San Luis Valley during the late summer and fall of 1965. The mallard is the most abundant duck species in-Colorado and it constitutes the major portion of the hunter's bag. Therefore, both the San Luis Valley and eastern slope studies concentrate on the mallard, which explains their predominance in the banded sample. Summer Banding on Molting Areas.--Summer banding of ducks on molting areas was once again limited to North Park in Jackson County. Banding in the South Platte Valley and Cache la Poudre Valley has not been attempted during the past three summers because of the absence of concentrations of molting ducks on areas previously used. An increase in recreational activities on some of the molting reservoirs during the past few years is a possible explanation for the lack of molting concentrations in these two areas. However, breeding pairs here have increased steadily for the last several years, and the birds must be molting somewhere. Perhaps they have become scattered throughout the river bottom on sloughs to the extent that reservoir concentration areas no longer exist. A thorough check of all lakes and reservoirs in the areas must be made before accepti.ng such a conclusion. Operations in North Park resulted in the banding of 785 ducks, including 23 American coot. This total was made up largely of the following species listed in order of abundance: mallard, pintail, green-winged teal, American widgeon, and cinnamon or blue-winged teal. The American widgeon and gadwall constitute a large segment of the duck population in North Park, but often, they are not caught in proportion to their numbers because of the difficulty in driving molting adults across open water into a corral trap on the shore. Somewhat more success is obtained when driving distances.across open water are reduced and when the trap is placed so that emergent vegetation occurs around and between the leads. A number of years of banding data now exists for North Park. As soon as time permits, recovery data from banded ducks in this area will be analyzed. A management plan for this breeding population can then be outlined using the banding analysis as a basis. The banding analysis work will be part of Work Plan I, Job 3. �Table 1.--Number of Ducks Banded by Species and Location, 1965-66. Species North Park Cache 1a Poudre Valley South Platte Valley Bonny Reservoir Arkansas Valley San Luis Valley Total by Species Mallard 239 1,016 4,144 997 922 1,800 9,118 Gadwall 44 -- -- -- -- 102 146 American Widgeon 101 17 -- 28 12 9 167 Green-winged Teal 106 -- -- -- 72 184 Cinnamon or B1uewi.nged Tea 1 85 -- -- -- -- 66 151 Shoveler 37 -- -- -- -- 5 42 1 6 712 891 6 Pintail 130 38 Redhead 3 -- -- -- 8 82 93 Lesser Scaup -- -- -- -- 1 21 22 Ring-necked Duck 17 -- -- -- 2 1 20 American Coot 23 -- -- -- -- 25 48 TOTALS 785 1,Onl!< 4,154* 1,026* 951* 2,895 10,882 * 4 Post-season winter banding in eastern Colorado. f-' I\) �- 13 - San Luis Valley Cooperative Study. --The San Luis Valley Cooperative Mallard Investigation continued in 1965 with the granting of a third consecutive early experimental hunting season. Pre-season banding remained an important phase in properly evaluating the effects of this season on the local mallard population. Flying adults and immatures were banded from late August through the middle of September. A quota of 4,000 mallards was established for the entire Valley floor, 1,000 of each age and sex class. State personnel and Federal Game Agents were given the responsibility of banding one-half of this quota in the area north of the Rio Grande River. Refuge and other Federal, personnel were aiming for the remaining one-half of the quota in the area south' of the Rio Grande River. Also, a Colorado man was assigned to band as many mallards as possible in the mountains to the west of the Valley floor. High country banding was conducted to determine what contribution the mountains make to the total harvest of birds during the early hunting season. Table 1 shows that 2,895 ducks of 10 species were banded north of the Rio Grande River on the Valley floor and in the mountains to the west. Mallards accounted for 1,800 including 317 from mountain lakes. Pintails made up most of the remaining total with 712; representing a considerable increase in this species over previous years. Additional information can be found in the Job Completion Report covering the "San Luis Valley Cooperative Mallard Investigation" (Work Plan I, Job 12) •. Winter Duck Banding in Eastern Colorado.--Winter banding of ducks was continued in eastern Colorado during the winter of 1965-66. This was the third year of an intensive program aimed at accumulating age, sex, and fluoroscopy data as part of an overall investigation of wintering mallard populations in eastern Colorado. Banding quotas were set at 1,000 mallards in each of seven study areas or management units. Banding was not started until after the end of the duck hunting season. Nearly 7,100 mallards were banded as a result of this program during December, 1965 and January and February, 1966 (Table 1). This is the first time in the three years of this study that quotas have been reached in all seven areas. Few ducks of other species were trapped during the winter banding season. Federal personnel cooperated considerably with the trapping and banding v;ark in the South Platte Valley and Arkansas Valley. A detailed report on this program will appear as a separate Job Completion Report (Work Plan III, Job 6) and thus will not be discussed further here. Geese The number of Canada geese banded in Colorado is listed by location in Table 2. A total of 632 large Canada geese was banded during segment 11 (1965-66). Banding locations were limited to the Cache la Poudre Valley near Fort Collins, . the South Platte Valley near Denver and Boulder, and Bonny Reservoir. Goose banding was not attempted in the Arkansas Valley this segment. Sufficient banding data now exist to make a complete banding analysis and to develop a plan for the management of the Arkansas Valley wintering goose flock. �- 14 - This infonnation will be reported in detail under Work Plan II. Sununer banding of our resident flock of Canada geese was undertaken on two lakes in the Cache la Poudre Valley near Fort Collins. This operation resulted in the banding of 273 locally raised young and molting adults. Forty-one adult geese trapped in the Denver area were transported, banded with aluminum leg bands and plastic neck bands, and released on Reservoir No. 8 northeast of Fort Collins. This was an attempt to relieve overcrowding in the Denver area. An additional 163 local and migrant geese were banded during the winter in the Fort Collins area, making a total of 477 banded in the Cache la Poudre Valley during the segment. A total of 131 Canada geese was hand-reared, banded, and released at Valmont Reservoir in the South Platte Valley near Boulder. These birds were hatched from eggs and trapped as goslings in the Denver area. This procedure is part of the continuing program aimed at increasing the number, and expanding the range of, resident geese in north-central Colorado. In February 1966, nine geese were trapped at Denver City Park, banded with leg'and neck bands, and released at the site of trapping. We had hoped for a much larger sample so that local movements could be detennined. Fifteen eggs were taken from the local Canada goose flock at Bonny Reservoir and hatched along with those collected in the Denver area. Fifteen banded geese were then returned to the goose ponds below Bonny Dam. Table 2.--Number of Canada Geese Banded by Location, 1965-66. Location Cache 1a Poudre Valley South Platte Valley Bonny Reservoir Total Prepared by: Richard M. Hopper Approved by: Assistant Wildlife Researcher Date: October, 1966 Number 477 140 15 632 Jack R. Grieb Project Leader Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief �October, 1966 - 15 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO --------------~-------------Project No. W-88-R-ll Migratory Bird Investigations' ----~--~~~------------Work Plan No. I Job No. 3 --------~--~-------------------------------------------Title of Job: Analysis of Waterfowl Banding Data Period Covered: April 1, 1965 to March 31, 1966 ABSTRACT Analysis of recoveries from birds banded in the Short Grass Prairie Canada goose population was updated to include 1964-65 hunting season returns. Results of mortality calculations, first year recovery rates, and a table showing distribution of recoveries from all years of banding' are reported in segment 11 completion report for Work Plan II, Job 4b. No attempt was made to analyze recoveries of birds banded in North Park because of lack of time. Objectives: (1) Analyze recoveries from Canada geese banded at Two Buttes Reservoir to determine distribution of recoveries between geographic areas between years, by age class, the annual mortality of this goose flock, differences in annual mortality between age classes, and determine movement of birds away from Two Buttes during the hunting season. . (2) Analyze recoveries from all species of waterfowl banded in North Park to determine distribution of recoveries between geographic areas between years by age class, the annual mortality of each waterfowl species, and differences in annual mortality between age classes of the waterfowl species. Procedures: Annual mortality rates were computed by composite dynamic analysis where a good series of band recovery data were available. Where incomplete banding series were used annual mortality was es~imated by use of the composite relative recovery rate system. Distribution'of recoveries was accomplished by simple tabulation of recoveries by degree blocks within states or provinces. Results: Analysis of recoveries from birds banded in the Short Grass Prairie Canada goose population as reported in the previous quarterly report was updated �- 16 - to include the 1964-65 hunting season returns. Results of mortality.ccilculation, first year recovery rates, and a table showing distribution of racove r Les. from all years of banding are reported in completion·report for Wo:rkPlan iI, Job 4b, and will become a part o f/ t he final report for that job. No attempt was made to analyze recoveries of birds banded in North Park because of lack of time. This phaze of the work will be considered during segment 12 of this project. Prepared by: Date: Jack R. Grieb Wildlife Research Leader ~ __o_c_to_b_e_r~J~1~9_6_6 _ Approved by:__~W~a~y~n~e~W~.~S~a~n~d~f~o~r7t~_ Game ,Research Chief �- 17 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO Project No. w-88-R-ll Work Plan No. 1 Migratory Bird Investigations Job Title of Job: Waterfowl Kill Survey Period covered: 1965 No. 5 Objectives: To estimate the State harvest of waterfowl for the 1965-66 hunting season by species, by county, and by intervals of the season. Methods: Techniques were similar to those used in the past with h~Dters' names drawn in a mechanical random fashion from duplicate license stubs of current license sales. One follow-up was sent to non-reporting hunters after an interval of two to three weeks. The questionnaire remained the same in form and context as last year. Questionnaires were sent to 13,025 randomly selected license buyers in 1965 and a total of 10,075 responded for a return of 77·4 per cent. Of the 10,075 returns, 5,313 reported hunting, and 4,762 bought a license but did not hunt. Most of the hunters in this last category were found to have purchased a combination hunting and fishing license which was used for fishing only. Thus, of the total license sales of 172,516 during 1965, it is estimated that 89,257 hunters hunted one or more species of small game. Prepared by: Jack R. Grieb Project Leader Date: October, 1966 Approved by: Wayne W. Sandfort Chief Game Research Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator ��- 19 wATERFOWL KILL Su"RVEY Ja,ck R. Grieb Col.orado duck stamp sales are plotted in Table 1.revealing that the 1965 sale of 20~537 was significantly smaller than the pr-ev Lous year. 'This decrease is at t.r-Lbubedto a restriction of hunting regulations for the 1965 season, tempered to a degree by the experimental San Luis Valley duck season and the experimental teal season which pr-obab Iy encouraged some hu.. nt.er-s to participate 0 Dclc:k Stamp Sales for Colorado Year Numberof Stamps Sold Per Cent Change From Previous Year - 18.8 20,537 1965 + 10.2 1964 257282 + 29·6 22,940 1963 - 28.8 17,701 1962 - 18.8 24,854 1961 2·7 30,592 1960 24·9 31,431 1959 + .02 41,897 1958 + 15·1 41,794 1957 7·2 36,303 1956 + 20·5 39,107 1955 + 20·5 32,450 1954 ========================~================================================ Table 2 classifies Duck Stamp buyers by the tYlle of hunting Ln which they engaged for the past 12 years Thus, it appears that number of duck hunt.er-s were down from 1964, and remain well below the average. Also, number of goose hunt.er-s were below average. There appeared to be a decrease in clays hurrted for both du.cks and. geese which generally d.epicts the decrease in hllllter activity during the 1965-66 season. 0 Duck Har-ves t Hunting statistics of the 1965 season are tabulated and compared with past years in 'lIable 3. Thi.s reveals that total estimated retrieved kill of 75,567 was only slightly below that of the previous year. This 1.S surprising considering decreases Ln number of hunters and hurrt.Lng acti.vi ty. T!::ie reason the har-vest heldu.:p so well was because of an increase in the aver-age bag. Ifhis, in t·e.I'n, was caused by the experimental teal and San Luis seasons which permitted huat.er-s to take more ducks during the seas on. In add.Lt.Lon , it was estimated that 137'751 birds were crippled for a wounding loss of' 18.2 per cent. permitting an estimated total hunting mortality of 89,318 ducks f'or- 1965 in Colorado. �- 20 Table 2 -- Estimated Number of Duck and Goose Hunters, Average Number of Days Hunted and Season Length, by Year. Bag and Number Number Average Number Season Length Possession of Duck of Goose Days Hunted For (days) Limit Year Hunters Hunters Ducks Geese Ducks Geese Ducks Geese 1965 15,374 11,344 5.62 5·53 36 1/ 75 4-5 2/ 1964 19,189 13,678 6·30 7·37 40 II 75 4-8 31 1963 17,989 10,841 5·66 6.64 35 1/ 75 4-8 2/ 1962 13,918 9,159 5·27 25 II 75 2-4 21 1961 22,920 11,245 4.40 60 3-6 .30 1960 29,480 14,107 6.05 60 75 3-6 1959 29,060 13,647 5·70 50 75 4-8 1958 38,773 14,705 60 4-8 5·78 90 1957 37,166 12,057 6·52 60 5-10 75 1956 34,793 12,477 60 5-10 7·37 75 1955 37,816 17,634 8.87 60 5-10 75 1954 31,834 12,136 7.64 60 5-10 ========~================================================================= 2-2 2-2 2-2 2-2 2-2 2-2 2-2 2-2 2-2 2-2 2-2 2-2 ~I Hunting regulations for East Slope. ~I J! West Slope had a general season of 75 days with 4 ducks in bag, and 8 in possession in 1962, and 90 days, 4 in bag and 8 in possession in 1963, 1964 and 1965. One mallard and pintail allowed in bag, and two in possession on East Slope, three mallards or three pintails on West Slope. Two mallards allowed in bag, and four in possession. Table 3 -- Duck Harvest Statistics, 1954 - 1965 Year 1965 Slope East West TOTAL 1964 East West TOTAL 1963 East West TOTAL 1962 East West TOTAL 1961 1960 1959 1958 1957 1956 1955 1954 Number of Hunters Average Seasonal Bag Total Estimated Harvest Wounding Percent Loss Number 12,747 2,627 15,374 Total Estimated Hunting Mortality 5·0 4·3 4·9 64,245 11,322 75,567 18.7 15.4 18.2 12,007 1,744 13,751 76,252 13,066 59,318 16,311 2,878 19,189 4.0 4.0 4.0 65,244 11,512 76,756 10.6 10.4 10.6 7,764 1,335 9,099 73,008 12,847 85,855 15,627 2,362 17,989 5·1 3.6 4·9 80,167 8,503 88,670 10·7 9·7 10.6 9,636 916 10,552 89,803 9,419 99,222 11,349 2,569 13,918 2.6 3·5 2.8 29,507 8,992 38,499 13·5 11.7 13·1 4,603 1,187 5,790 34,110 10,179 44,289 22,920 29,480 29,060 38,773 3.8 5·0 4.2 6.1 6.8 5·9 6.7 5·6 86,408 147,400 122,924 236,515 254,587 185,737 253,367 179,8-56 21.4 13·1 15·5 12·3 14.1 16·3 13·1 14.5 23,608 22,257 22,417 33,088 41,679 36,195 38,182 30,396 110,016 169,657 11~5,341 269,603 296,266 221,932 291,549 210,.252 37 166 j 34,793 37,816 31,834 =================================================: ======================== �- 21 Species composition of the 1965 bag is listed in Table 4 and compared with the average of the ten previous years. These data indicate that total duck harvest was 50 per cent less than the ten-year average because of restricted regulations, reduced number of hunters, and lower average seasonal bag than in the past. Table 4 -- Species Composition of the Bag ll-Year Average 1954 - 1964 1965 Number % of Number % of Total Killed Total Killed Species 67.8 66.2 103,146 50,045 Mallard 4,895 3·2 2,899 3·8 Pintail 8·9 13,558 13·1 Green-wing Teal 9,916 6.6 5,678 3·7 4,958 Blue-wing Teal 1.1 1.3 1,636 960 Baldpate 2..8 4,322 1,715 2·3 Gadwall 1.1 1.2 1,720 922 Shoveller 0.8 0.2 1,161 128 Scaup 0.8 1,283 Redhead 1,086 0·7 Canvasback 13,848 9·1 4,024 others and Unknown 5·3 100.0 100.0 153,333 TOTAL 75,567 % Change 1965 From 11-Year Average Harvest 51.5 40.8 - 26.9 - 12·7 - 41.3 - 60.3 46.4 90.0 - - - - 70·9 - 50.4 =======~============================~=======:============================ Comparison of eastern and western slope species composition is made in Table 5 revealing that despite the longer hunting season which began earlier in the fallon the western slope, the mallard made up an even greater per cent of the total harvest there as compared to the east slope. This probably indicates a lack of other species in this area during the entire fall period so that the hunting season, regardless of when set, is bound to place pressure on mallards. Table 5 -- Comparison of Species Composition Between East and West Slope Duck Harvest West Slope East Slope Number of Number % of % . -.Total Killed Total \ 'killed Species 85.1 9,634 62.9 40,411 Mallard 1.2 136 4.3 2,763 Pintail 600 14.5 5·3 9,316 Green-wing Teal 1.8 204 4,754 7·4 Blue-wing Teal 1.1 1.3 125 835 Baldpate 0.4 2.6 45 1,670 Gadwall 1.4 0.2 23 Shoveller 899 . 0.2 128 Scaup 4.9 555 5·4 Others and Unknown 3,469 100.0 11,322 100.0 64,245 TOTAL \ ========================================================================= �- 22 - Duck kill and hunting pressure bylO-day intervals of the season for both east and west slopes is tabulated in Table 6. These data show that harvest for each area was fairly evenly divided over the season intervals indicating that no one part of the season was better than the other. It is fairly obvious that east slope hunters had to pack their hunting into the short season allotted them while. west slopers could spread their hunting out over the longer season. Ta°ble 6 -- Ducks Bagged and Hunting Pressure by 10-day Intervals of the 1965 Season. Estimated Birds Estimated Hunting Bagged Pressure No. of Total No. of of Total Dates. Ducks Kill Hunters Hunters % % EAST SLOPE Sept. 4-12 1/ Oct. 1-18"2/ Oct. 16-24 Oct. 25-Nov. 2·· Dec. 4-12 Dec. 13-21 5,654 12,078 12,335 9,573 11,114 13,491 8.8 18.8 19·2 14·9 17·3 21.0 1,313 1,453 3,059 2,906 3,429 3,429 10·3 11.4 24.0 22.8 26·9 26·9 460 508 615 705 721 2,424 692 615 337 17·2 19·0 23·0 26.4 27·0 27·0 25·9 23·0 12.6 WEST SLOPE Oct. 12-21 Oct. 22-31 Nov. 1-10 Nov. 11-20 Nov. 21-30 Dec. 1-10 Dec. 11-20 Dec. 21-30 Dec. 31-Jan. 9 1,359 1,166 1,211 1,325 1,494 1,313 1,393 1,393 668 12.0 10·3 10·7 11.7 13·2 11.6 12.3 12·3 5·9 =====~~=====-============================================================= 1/ ~/ Experimental Teal Season -- Eastern Slope Only Experimental San Luis Valley Duck Season ° San Luis Valley Experimental Season -- This was the third year of an experimental duck hunting season in the San Luis Valley. Reasons for the season and results have been reported in detail elsewhere, and will not be repeated. However, information gained through this survey on this season will be presented here. �- 23 According to questionnaire data, 1,453 hunters bagged an estimated 12,078 ducks in the San Luis Valley during the experimental season, October 1-18, 1965. This is compared to an estimated 1,810 hunters and 11,744 retrieved kill for the previous year. The indication that kill was increased in 1965 substantiates observations made during the season. However, number of hunters is rather meaningless since they refer to successful hunters rather than estimating total hunters. Residence of hunters participating in the San Luis Valley special season is presented in Table 7. Valley residents acco-Qlltedfor 33.1% of the hunters during the pre-season. Response to this season was wide..,spread. Numerous hunters came from the vicinities of Denver, Colorado Springs, and Pueblo, and surprisingly enough some west-slope hunted in the Valley despite the opening of their season on October 12. Table 7 County Residence of Hunters Adams Alamosa Arapahoe Arachuleta Bent Boulder Chaffee Clear Creek Conejos Costilla Custer Delta Denver Eagle El Paso Fremont Garfield Jefferson Kit Carson Lake La Plata Larimer Las Animas Mineral Park Pitkin Prowers Pueblo Rio Grande Saguache Residence of Hunters Hunting in the San Luis Valley Experimental Duck Season, October 1-18, 1963, 1964 and 1965. Hunt.er-s 19b3 19b4 19b5 % Estimated No. 7a 34 107·· 52 18 18 18 34 1.9 5.8 2·9 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.9 37 224 56 2·3 13·9 3·5 18 130 1.2 8.1 139 18 7·7 1.0 192 10.6 111 18 18 18 93 6.9 1.2 1.2 1.2 5·8 226 33 12·5 1.8 186 18 11.7 1.2 18 1.0 37 2·3 33 18 1.8 1.0 18 18 1.2 1.2 18 34 1.0 1.9 18 1.2 Estimated No. 7a Estimated No. 52 103 52 3.6 7·1 3·6 28 13 26 92 1.9 0·9 1.8 6.3 13 157 13 196 26 13 92 13 13 52 2 0·9 10.8 0·9 13·5 1.8 0·9 6·3 0·9 0·9 3.6 0.1 26 1.8 18 l.0 2 183 260 26 0.1 12.6 17·9 1.8 192 521 69 10.6 28.8 3·8 130 317 111 18 8.1 19·7 6·9 1.2 1,453 100.0 1,810 100.0 1,594 100.0 Weld TOTALS ========================================================================= �- 24 Goose Harvest Hunting statistics of the goose season presented in Table 8 estimate 11,344 hunters bagged an average of 1.2 geese during the season for a total estimated harvest of 13,658 birds. In addition, another 3,370 birds were reported wounded but not retrieved for a wounding loss of 24.7 per cent. This permits a total hunting mortality estimate for Colorado during 1965 of 17,028 geese. Species composition of geese killed was similar between all ten years of the survey being 98 per cent or.(above Canada geese. The remaining percentages were frotherand unknown" species of geese, and were probably mainly Canada geese which the hunters were not able to correctly identify. It is known that there were a few snow'geese taken in Colorado during this hunting season and an even smaller number of white fronts. The 1965 goose hunting season was characterized by good water and fair food conditions in the Arkansas Valley during the fall and winter periods. Census figures taken at weekly intervals in the Arkansas Valley indicated an above number of geese present in Colorado during the season. These birds seemed to be distributed on all water bodies in the Valley with major concentrations in the Two Buttes area. Table 8 -- Goose Harvest Statistics, 1954-1965. Year 1965 Slope East West TOTAL Number of Hunters 10,941 403 ll,344 1964 East West TOTAL 13,295 383 13,678 1.8 ·5 1.7 23,931 192 24,123 East West TOTAL 10,462 379 10,841 1.7 ·3 1.6 17,785 114 17,899 15·2 East West TOTAL 8,828 331 9,159 1.5 1.3 1.5 13,241 430 13,671 1963 1962 Average Seasonal Bag 1.2 1.0 1.2 Total Estimated Harvest 13,239 419 13,658 1.3 1961 11,245. 14,056 1.1 1960 14,107 15,659 1.6 1959 13,647 21,972 1.3 1958 14,705 19,704 1.2 1957 12,057 14,589 1.0 1956 11,541 11,310 1.0 1955 17,364 17,711 1954 12,136 8,168 ·7 Eleven-year average goose harvest is 15,307 Total Estimated Hunting Mortality 16,496 532 16,028 Wounding Loss Percent Number 24.6 3,257 113 27·0 24.7 3,370 19·0 5,624 1/ 0_ 5,624 29,555 192 29,747 17.8 ° 3,184 1/ 03,184 20,969 114 21,083 19·5 3,218 ° 3,218 16,459 430 16,889 ° 18.9 19·1 ° 4,568 24·5 4,087 20·7 17.8 4,730 22·3 5,655 23·5 4,473 21.6 3.1'116 18.3 3,884 22.8 2z410 1954-1965. 1/ 18,624 19,746 26,702 25,359 19,062 14,426 21,248 10,578 ============;::===========;,"================================================== !I No cripples reported on the west slope. �- 25 - Comparison of the 1965 season with past years shows a decrease in number of hunters and total harvest. Average seasonal bag decreased from the previous year and the combination of all these produced a harvest below last year and slightly below average. During the last two years, goose permits, a six bird season limit, and other special regulations were established for Larimer COTh~ty. A random sample drawn from the 2,335 permits issued indicated that 757 obtained permits but did not use them, 1,578 hunters hunted geese one or more times bagging 665 geese in Larimer County, 144 birds in Weld County and 29 birds in Boulder County. Wa terfowl Har'Vest by COli."lJ.ty The reader is cautioned that information presented in this section is subject to a great deal more error in accuracy than estimates in previous sections, sfncethe original sample has been broken down to a COli."lJ.ty basis, thus decreasing the size of samples on which to base estimates. This is probably even more true of geese than ducks, because there were many more duck hunters. Consequently, it is realized that in some counties, both duck and goose kill have been over-estimated, and in others, underestimated. However, despite this error, these data represent the most accurate information on this subject possible at the present time. Tables 9 and 10 compare the 1965 duck and goose kill respectively with average of previous seasons, by county, within each waterfowl region. These regional divisions of the state were located on the basis of waterfowl migration, location, and topography; and permit a closer evaluation of kill, yearly changes in kill, and the effect of different types of hunting seasons on various portions of Colorado. �- 26 - a ==~================================================================== SOUTHEAST Baca 0.4 1.1 257 115 1,444 0·9 1.8 Bent 1,156 344 3,410 2.6 2·7 Crowley 450 268 2.1 0·7 3,280 2·5 Huerfano 321 0.6 76 0·5 737 0·5 Kiowa 1.4 0.2 1.4 129 178 1,836 Las Animas 1.0 578 127 0·9 1,246 0·9 Otero 1.3 835 1.5 293 2,034 2·3 Prowers 1,478 2·3 383 4,496 3·0 3·5 Pueblo 1,413 2.2 383 3,466 2.6 3·0 SOUTHEAST TOTAL b,617 2,167 10·3 16:-6 17·0 21,949 =========================================.================================ CENTF.AL Adams 3,662 5.6 713 6.0 5·7 7,911 Arapahoe 1.4 280 1.1 899 2.2 1,445 Boulder 3,277 5·1 919 6.0 7·2 7,.919 Douglas 0.4 257 89 0.1 109 .0·7 Elbert 193 38 0·3 320 0.2 0·3 El Paso 450 102 0.8 0·7 1,082 0.8 Jefferson 0.6 1.5 385 191 1,625 1 .c: " Larimer 8,031 12·5 1,709 13.4 11,442 8.8 Weld 11,885 18.5 21.6 20.1 28,345 2,563 CEl~TRAL 'IIOTAL 20,039 51.8 60,198 45.2 6,604 45.8 ========================================================================= SA1!YLUIS VAlLEY Alamosa Conejos Costilla Rio Grande Saguache S. L. V. 'IDTAL 2,763 4·3 3.6 459 2.8 3,673 1.3 1.1 835 140 1.9 2,516 578 0.6 76 0·9 0.4 577 2,120 4.0 510 3·3 4.0 5,135 1,606 2·5 293 3,894 2·3 2·9 11.6 15,795 7,902 1,4'78 12·3 12.0 ===============~============================================~============ �- 27 Table 9 -- Duck Kill by Region and County (continued) Estimated 1965 Waterfowl Hunting Pressure 1965 Duck Kill Region Number Per Cent Number Per Cent and County Killed of Total Hunters of Total IUGH COUNTRY Chaffee 0.0 0.1 13 Clear Creek 0.0 0.0 Custer 0.0 0.2 25 Fremont 0.2 129 89 0·7 Gilpin 0.0 0.0 Jackson 0.0 0.0 Lake 0.0 0.1 13 Park 64 321 0·5 0·5 Teller 0.0 0.2 25 1.8 HIGH COl.iNTRYTOTAL 450 229 0·7 Eleven-year Average .i954~i964 ',, Number Killed Per Cent Of Total . , , , , , 537 3 334 958 0·5 199 210 326 55 2,622 0.1 0.1 0·3 0.2 0.8 2.0 ========================================================================= West Slope NORTHWEST Garfield Moffat Rio Blanco Routt NORTHWEST TOTAL 1,076 238 226 464 2,004 9·5 2.1 2.0 4.1 17·7 362 89 73 89 614 13.8 3.4 2.8 3.4 23.4 1,677 571 791 930 3,969 8·5 2·9 4.0 4.8 20.2 ======================================================================== WEST CENTRAL Delta 3,057 Mesa 2,219 Montrose 827 Ouray 79 W. CENTRAL TOTAL 6,182 27·0 19·6 7·3 0·7 54.6 634 497 168 13 1,312 24.1 18·9 6.4 0·5 49.9 2,867 4,848 2,725 207 10,647 14.6 24·7 13·9 1.0 54.2 ========================================================================= SOUTHWEST Archuleta Dolores Hinsdale La Plata Mineral Montezuma San Juan San Miguel SOUTHWEST TOTAL 45 45 90 805 215 1,200 0.4 0.4 0.8 7·1 0.0 1.9 0.0 0.0 10.6 89 13 29 134 29 13 307 3·4 0·5 1.1 5·1 0.0 1.1 0.0 0·5 11.7 153 27 42 1,601 0.8 0.1 0.2 8.2 120 0.6 856 4.4 204 3,003 1.0 15·3 ========================================================================= HIGH COUNTRY Eagle Grand Gunnison Pitkin Summit H. C. TOTAL 294 747 544 351 1,936 2.6 6.6 4.8 3·1 0.0 17·1 60 184 89 61 394 2·3 7·0 3.4 2·3 0.0 15·0 872 285 555 240 77 2,029 ========================================================================= 4·5 1.4 2.8 1.2 0.4 10·3 , . " �- 28 Table 9 -- Duck Killby Waterfowl Region and County Region and County (continued) Estimated 1965 Hunting Pressure 1965 Duck Kill NU+Jlber Per Cent Number Per Cent of Total Hunters Killed of Total Summary by Region NORTHEAST 20,237 SOlJTHEAST 6,617 CENTRAL 29,039 SrulTLUIS VALLEY 7,902 HIGH COUNTRY (E) 450 NOR'EI{WESI' 2,004 WEST CENTRAL 6,182 SOU'J':'"rlWES T 1,200 HIGH COUNTRY (w) 1,936 TOTAL OF REG IONS 75,567 26.8 8.7 38.5 10.4 0.6 2.6 8.2 1.6 2.6 100.0 2,269 2,167 6,603 1,479 229 614 1,312 307 394 15,3'74 14.8 14.1 42·9 9.6 1.5 4.0 8.6 2.0 2·5 100.0 Eleven-year Average .. .1954':1964.,, Number Killed Per- Cent of Total 31,046 21,949 60,198 15,795 2,622 3,969 10,647 3,006 2,029 151,258 20.6 14·5 40.0 , , , , :10·5 1.7 2.6 6.9 1.9 1.3 100.0 === =======================================================================: EAST SLOPE WEST SLOPE 64,245 11,322 82·9 17·1 12,747 2,627 , , 131,610 19,648 =========================================================================== Table 10 -- Goose Kill by Region and County Estimated 1965 Waterfowl Hunting Pressure 1965 Goose Kill Region Number Per Cent Number Per Cent and County Killed of Total Hunters of Total East Slope NORTHEAST 40 Cheyenne 98 0·3 0·9 Kit Carson 26 0.2 11 0.1 Lincoln 0.0 11 0.1 1.6 Logan 0.6 175 79 Morgan 2.8 371 558 5·1 Phillips 0.0 0.0 Sedgewick 0.0 33 0·3 1.4 1.6 Washington 185 1'75 Yuma 40 0·3 33 0·3 NORTHEAST TOTAL 10.0 5.6 1,094 741 Eleven-year Average 1954-1964 Number Killed 14 37 10 150 550 3 56 69 112 1,001. Per Cent of 'T'otal 0.1 0.2 0.0 1.0 3·5 0.0 0·3 0.4 0·7 6.2 =========================================================================== SOUTHEAST Baca Bent Crowley Huerfano Kiowa Las Animas Otero Prowers Pueblo SOTJT.dEASTTOTAL 17.6 5,103 31.7 1,561 10·5 9·7 4.8 4.4 703 0.6 154 0·9 10.2 3,028 18·9 0.8 129 0·9 1.9 1.7 285 10.1 2,373 14.8 1.1 140 0.8 13,476 83.1 57·'7 ====================================================================~====== 3,337 1,125 503 13 1,947 26 278 1,709 675 9.613 25·2 8·5 3.8 0.1 14·7 0.2 2.1 12·9 5·1 72.6 1,926 1,149 525 65 1,116 98 2G8 1,106 120 6,313 �29 - Table 10 -- Goose Kill by Region and COlh~ty (continued) Estimated 1905 Hurrt Ing Pressure 1965 Goose Kill WaterfmTl Per Cent Number Per Cent Number Region Hunt.er s of Total of Total Killed and County CENTRAL 1.6 Adams 175 0·3 39 1.7 1.9 186 Arapahoe 252 0.1 Boulder 76 13 0·7 0.0 0.0 Douglas 0.0 0.0 Elbert 0.0 El Paso 0·3 33 1.0 Jefferson 109 0·3 39 12.1 1,324 Larimer 7.6 1,007 1,171 Weld 781 ·10·7 5·9 28.1 16.1 3,074 CENTRAL TOTAL 2,131 SAN LUIS VALLEY Alamosa Conejos Costj.lla Rio Grande Saguache SAN L. V. TOTAL HIGH COUNTRY (EAST Chaffee Clear Creek Custer Fremont Gilpin Jackson Lake Park '1'eller HIGH COUNTRY TOTAL 8.b 0.1 3 26 0.1 8.0 32.0 0.0 0.0 40.0 15 49 13·7 44.6 64 58.3 12.0 20.0 4.0 0.0 36.0 10 7 22 9·1 6.4 19·9 39 35.4 79 0.6 66 0.6 66 0·9 0.8 3·5 23 675 , 11 394 0.4 2·5 0.6 0.0 0.1 3.b 0.6 8 10 158 119 562 1,38b 2.1 0.8 0.4 230 44 273 66 79 333 136 60 0.0 0.6 0.8 0.0 0.0 1.4 0.2 4.1 0.8 0.0 0.0 5·1 26 543 106 Eleven-year Average 1954-1964 Number Per Cent Killed of Total O.b 5 103 119 3 West Slope NORTHWEST Garfield Moffat Rio Blanco Routt NORTHHEST TOTAL WEST CEN'l'RAL Delta Mesa Montrose Ouray W. CENTRAL TOTAL 210 210 16 16 0.0 50.1 0.0 0.0 50.1 32 130 0.0 3·8 0.0 0.0 3.8 48 81 16 162 145 =========================================================================== �- 30 - 10 -- Goose Ki:.~~~y Re~gion and County (continued) ----Estimated 1965 Waterfowl 1965 Goose Kill HQDting Pressure Eegion Number Per Cent Nurrilier Per Cent and Courrty Killed of Total Hunters of Total ---"'----SOC'IHVJES'I' Archuleta 48 12.0 Dolores Hinsdale l.a l'lata Mine:::a1. Moatezuma San Juan. San Miguel SOT3I'B.-wES'I' TJ'IAL 'Iable ElBven-year Average 1954-1964 N~mber Per Cent Killed of Total ,-------------------------3 ,--------~-----HLi-E COL)fJ:R{ (West) 0.0 0.0 0.0 16 4.0 46.1 32 8.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 4E).·~1------4g-----12.0- Eagle Grand GQlJ.nison Pitkir:. Summi.t HIGH C. 'I.'O~L NOE1'E.BAS'r SOD""11-IE:AST CENTRAL SAt\)"LUIS VAlJ,Ky HIGH COUNTRY (E) ]'.10F '1JlI'lES T HIJ·:q COJ'J\l.'F.Y (W) 'I0':.'AL OF BK+IONS 4· 4 --§:b 1,094 .9.6 1,001 6.2 6,313 55.7 13,476 83.0 3,074 27.1 1,386 8.6 394 3.5 230 1.4 66 0.6 26 0.4 162 1.4 64 0.2 145 1·3 39 0.2 48 0.4 3 0.0 _193 1.4, 48 0 .4 4 0 .0 1~5Bf-.;----=1-=0-=0 .o -'--1-1, 3h4----165--:-o-------rt;-,-2:....-~9---1-.0-0 0 741 9,613 2,131 675 79 210 16 5.4 70·5 15·7 4.9 0·5 1.5 0.1 :=:=:::::'::=:=:'':::=======::':======================================::::=======================:==== 10,941 13,239 96.4 16,119 99·3 419 110 403 3·6 0·7 =========================================================================== EAS~; SLOPE WES':rSLCI?E Peg i ona.L r-ecap of the 1965 duck season as summarf.z ed at the conc Lus Lon of 'Ia'b1e 9 shows that the harvest "TaS s Ign Lfi.cant.Ly less in. all regions of t.he State compar-ed to th2 eleven-year aver-age. The eas ter'n s Lope again contribut~d to t.he bulk of the duck har-ves t being about 83 per cent. in 1965 which is si.r::.i.l8.2:' to p~.ce'.'"i.ous years , Welc_\-TaSagain the high harvest' courrty . �- 31 The 1965 goose harvest compared to the eleven-year average in Table 10 shows that total harvest was slightly below the average. Also, that the Southeast Region accounted for more than 70 per cent of the total goose bag, with Baca, Kiowa, Prowers, and Bent the top harvest counties, in that order. Waterfowl Management Units Again this year, harvest information has been gathered on the basis of waterfowl management units (Figur'e 1). The purpose of this is a be t.te.r alignment of data to provide information about specific flocks of ducks and geese. For example Unit 1 compasses the area utilized by wintering ducks at Jumbo Reservoi:r, Unit 5 is North Park, and Unit 15 is the San Luis Valley. In many cases duck or goose flock boundaries transcend county lines and it has been difficult to put together cOU-TJ.ty information so that we could look at the influence of hunting pressure and harvest on separate flocks. Natur'ally, we hope that management units will solve this problem. Results are tabulated in Table 11 and are offered without further comment at this time. Table 11 -- Estimated Waterfowl Hunters and Harvest by Management Unit, 1964 Ducks G~ese M3.nagement Bag Bag Hunters Hunters No. '10 Unit No. No. ~ No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 TOTALS % % 816 6.4 599 4·7 2,103 16.5 1,619 12.7 25 0.2 3,098 24·3 191 1.5 306 2.4 204 1.6 382 3.0 191 1.5 714 5.6 548 4.3 217 1.7 1,734 13.6 12,747 100.0 6.0 3,855 2,377 3·7 10,536 16.4 7,902 12·3 64 0.1 16,832 26.2 321 0·5 1,735 2·7 1.3 835 1.3 835 321 0·5 3,661 5·7 1,863 2·9 1.7 1,092 12,014 18·7 64,245 100.0 1.8 3·0 11.1 11.7 0.4 9·2 0.1 0·3 0.8 14·7 24.8 15·2 3·7 26 477 927 821 13 702 0.2 3.6 7·0 6.2 0.1 5·3 1,608 2,713 1,663 405 120 230 10,941 79 2,396 5,162 1,919 516 1.1 26 2.1 172 100.0 13,236 0.6 18.1 39·0 14·5 3·9 0.2 1.3 100.0 403 419 11,344 13,655 197 328 1,214 1,280 44 1,007 11 33 88 WEST SLOPE 16 2,627 GRAND TOTALS 15,374 11,322 :=.::=========================================================================:=::;:::== ��octobel", 1966 - 33 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO Project No. w-88-R-ll Work Plan No. 1 Mibratory Bird Investigations Job No. 12 Title of Job: San Luis Valley Cooperative Mallard Investigation Period Covered: Personnel: April 1, 1965 to March 31, 1966 Raymond Buller, Kenard Baer, Charles Hayes, Jack Frost, Charles Graham, Mitchell Sheldon, Jack Randall and Don Kreible, Bureau of Sport Fisheries and Wildlife; Wayne Russell, Jack Grieb, William Rutherford, Howard Funk, Tom Morrow, Errol Ryland and Richard Hopper, Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department. ABSTRACT Results of the aerial breeding pair survey, corrected by air-ground comparison studies, and stratified on the basis of high and low production areas in the San Luis Valley, estimated 26,682 pairs of ducks (10,510 mallards) for the 1965 breeding season. Despite further refinements in sampling technique in 1965, sampling error remained high (~ 32 percent). The breeding population survey of the high-country estimated 1,727 pairs of 14 species, with mallards contributing 957 pairs. Sampling error was considerably less in 1965 than in 1964, as a result of stratification of high and low concentration area; however, it was still quite large (~ 46 percent). Colorado personnel assisted in banding 2,895 ducks in the pre-season trapping operation, of which 2,418 were banded on the Valley floor and 477 in the mountains west of the valley. Colorado personnel ran two check stations on the Monte Vista National Wildlife Refl~e and made 25 hunter-performance checks. �- 34 - Recommendations: 1. Conduct the San Luis Valley breeding-pair survey and air-ground comparison study in 1966, using the same techniques as in 1965. 2. Continue the high-country production survey in 1966, with the elimination of non-habitat sections from the 1965 sample and substitution of a new selection for the eliminated sections. 3. Continue the pre-season trapping and banding program in 1966 in the San Luis Valley and the high country. This operation should begin about the third week in August and end about September 20. Objectives: of mallards To evaluate the effect of hunting pressure breeding in the San Luis Valley. on the local population Colorado's part of this study will be covered under the following minor objectives: 1. Determine the size of the breeding population in the San Luis Valley. 2. Determine the size of the breeding west of the Valley. population in the high altitude 3. Assist in gathering harvest information during a special waterfowl hunting season if such is continued during this segment. 4. Band 500 mallards of each age and sex class during pre-season north of the Rio Grande River on the Valley floor, and as many as possible in the mountains to the west of the Valley. SAN LUIS VALLEY COOPERATIVE MALLARD area INVESTIGATION This report presents results of the Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department's activities during the second year of the cooperative mallard study with the Bureau of Sport Fisheries and Wildlife in the San Luis Valley. The stated object ives and phases reported herein are those for which the Colorado Department had primary responsibility in 1965. A report covering all facets of the study will appear as an Administrative Report prepared by members of both agencies and distributed by the Bureau of Sport Fisheries and Wildlife, Branch of Wildlife Research, Migratory Bird Populations Station. BREEDING POPULATION SURVEY OF THE VALLEY FLOOR The breeding population survey of the San Luis Valley floor remains an important phase of the overall investigation of the local mallard flock. Steps are continually being taken to improve this survey to insure the best possible evaluation of the experimental hunting seasons. History of the San Luis Valley breeding population and methods for determining breeding-pair numbers prior to 1964 have been discussed in earlier reports (Ballou ~ ~., 1964; Grieb and Ballou, 1963; Grieb·~~., 1965a). �- 35 - Beginning in 1964, following the first experimental duck hunting season in 1963, three basic changes were made in the breeding population survey in the Valley in an effort to improve accuracy of our estimates. First, the number of randomly distributed aerial transects was increased from 27 to 50, in hopes of reducing potential sampling error. Next, Monte Vista National Wildlife Refuge and Russell Lakes were sampled separately from the rest of the Valley because of their higher waterfowl numbers. Our aim was to further reduce sampling error through stratification. Lastly, an air-ground comparison study was initiated to permit a more accurate correction of air transect data for ducks present but not seen from the air. We had hoped that the sampling error would not exceed about 15 percent with 95 percent confidence when these refinements were placed into effect in 1964. Unfortunately, the sampling error associated with the 1964 breeding-pair estimate amounted to 34 percent at the 95 percent confidence level. However, the air-ground comparison study served its purpose by yielding more realistic species composition figures and population projection indices based upon individual visibility rates. The 1964 breeding population survey showed that further refinements could be The following made which should help reduce potential sampling error. recommendations were made (Grieb et ~., 1965a): 1. The Valley should be further stratified with respect to high and low production areas in an attempt to reduce the amount of variability from on transect to another. An attempt should be made to obtain complete counts on concentration areas such as San Luis Lake, Head Lake, and Mishak Lakes. 2. Regular air coverage of the Russell Lakes area should be increased by establishing two more 2-mile transects. 3. Each air-ground comparison transect should be covered at least two times from the air, with each coverage made at a different time of the day. When flying a given transect, the aerial crew should not turn around after reaching its end and Dmffiediately fly back on the same transect because of the bias involved. The above recommendations section. are discussed Techniques further under the "Techniques Used" Used Methods employed in conducting the 1965 breeding population survey remained essentially the same as in 1964 (see Grieb, et ~., 1965a for details). A few refinements, mentioned above, were added to the 1965 survey in an attempt to minimize sample error. These additions are discussed under the appropriate headings below. �- 36 - Regular Air Transects: Breeding pairs of ducks were counted along randomly selected, one-fourth mile wide air transects running in an east-west direction across the Valley. The sample was stratified according to high and low waterfowl concentration areas. High concentration areas included Monte Vista National Wildlife Refuge, Russell Lakes, Mishak Lakes, and San Luis Lake. The remaining and major portion of the Valley comprised the low concentration area. The sample here consisted of 50 air transects equalling 934 linear miles and yielding a sample. size of 18.27 percent. Sampling of high concentration areas was intensified in 1965 to improve the accuracy of our estimates for these locations. The aerial coverages of Monte Vista National Wildlife Refuge and the Russell Lakes were each increased by two air transects, making a total of seven and four, respectively. This increased the sample sizes from 23.8 percent to 45.45 percent for Monte Vista Refuge, and from 16.67 percent to 33.33 percent for Russell Lakes. Total counts were obtained from the air on San Luis Lake and the Mishak Lakes. These two areas were included in the regular survey in 1964. The aerial crew consisted of a pilot and two observers. The two observers counted all ducks by species within one-eighth mile to either side of the center of the transects. Data were kept separate for the various high and low concentration areas so that individual estimates could be made for each area. Air-Ground Comparison Study; Air-ground comparison transects established in 1964 were used again in 1965. Both air and ground counts were made on 30, one-fourth mile wide transects totalling 150 miles. Four transects (21 miles) were covered on Monte Vista Refuge. The remaining 26 transects (129 miles) occurred throughout the rest of the Valley. The aerial crew flew the air-ground comparison transects in conjunction with regular breeding-pair transects. Methods of counting bii-ds were the same for both types of transects. Each air-ground comparison transect was flown two times rather than four times as in 1964. Each coverage of a given transect was conducted on two different days or at two different times on the same day. Ground crews coordinated their wor k with the air crew to insure that they were not counting a given transect at the same tIme or shortly after another. No more than three days elapsed between air and ground coverages of anyone transect. Ground crews attempted to make <I total count of the breeding population along the air-ground comparison transects. Ducks observed were recorded by species according to pairs, lone drakes, lone females, and grouped birds not in pairs. Ground counts were conducted by eight men, with individual crews composed of two to four men each. The regular air survey and the air-ground comparison study were conducted during the week of May 17. A Cessna 185 was used for most of the flying. �- 37 - Findings Air-Ground Comparison Study: Air and ground counts of the air-ground comparison transects are compared in Tables 1 and 2. These were corrected for unidentified ducks in order to estimate breeding pairs by species. Air counts recorded 32.68 percent of the birds observed on the ground for the entire Valley, excluding Monte Vista Refuge. Air counts accounted for only 20.44 percent of the birds on the Refuge. Visibility rates for individual species are also shown in Tables 1 and 2. These figures were used to correct regular air transect counts to estimate total breeding pairs in the Valley. Visibility rates for the area off the Refuge were employed to correct the regular air transects on Russell Lakes. The figures in Tables 1 and 2 differ to varying degrees from those obtained in 1964. They are not expected to remain the same year after year because habitat conditions, which determine visibility rates, are not consistent from one year to the next. Rates of visibility will vary from year to year with changes in quantity of water and amount, type, and condition of vegetation adjacent to water areas. Water was more abundant in the San Luis Valley in 1965 than in 1964. Table 1.--Air-ground Refuge. comparison of ducks counted Estimated Breeding on 129 miles Pairs 247 Mallard 61 Gadwall 2 Am. Widgeon 21 GW.Tea1 BW. or Cinn. Teal 54 40 Shoveler 54 Pintail 4 Redhead 2 Misc. Divers ,;[,OTALS 485 off the Pairs Percent Pairs Percent Percent Seen From The Air 50.9 12.6 0.4 4.3 11.2 8.2 11.2 0.8 0.4 105.0 10.0 2.0 1.5 3.5 13.5 21.5 1.0 0.5 66.3 6.3 1.3 0.9 2.2 8.5 13.6 0.6 0.3 42.51 16.39 100.00 7.14 6.48 33.75 39.81 25.00 25.00 100.0 158.5 100.0 32.68 Air Ground Species of transect �- 38 - Table 2.--Air-ground comparison of ducks counted on 21 miles of transect on the Refuge. Estimated Breeding Pairs Ground Species Pairs Mallard 386 Gadwall 98 Am. Widgeon 11 GW. Teal 32 BW. or Cinn. Teal 97 Shoveler 104 Pintail 103 Redhead 25 Ruddy 5 TOTALS 861 Air Percent Pairs Percent Percent Seen From The Air 44.8 11.4 1.3 3.7 11. 3 12.1 12.0 2.9 0.5 127.5 10.5 1.5 0 8.0 4.5 12.5 11. 5 0 72.4 6.0 0.8 0.0 4.6 2.6 7.1 6.5 0.0 33.03 10.71 13.64 0.00 8.25 4.33 12.14 46.00 0.00 100.0 176.0 100.0 20.44 Aerial Breeding Pair Inventory: Table 3 shows the size, sampling intensity, and estimated breeding pairs for the five areas covered in the breeding pair survey. Application of respective correction factors to these areas resulted in a total estimated breeding population of 26,682 pairs for the entire Valley floor. Species composition for this population is listed in Table 4. Tables 3 and 4 also give 1964 results as a comparison. These 1964 figures have been corrected and represent the latest estimates for that year. Different 1964 figures shown in previous reports should be ignored. The breeding population estimates in 1965 were about 2,000 pairs (-7 percent) less than those in 1964 for all species combined. Mallards made up much of the reduction with a decrease of 3,708 pairs. This was partially compensated for with increases in pairs of gadwalls and the three species of teals. Grieb et~. (1965b) suggested that a movement of mallards from the Valley without a corresponding return may have been a factor contributing to the reduction in this species. This theory is supported by the wide geographical distribution of band recoveries received from the 1964 hunting season. According to band recovery data, adults had a greater tendency to remain associated with the Valley than immatures. The immature/adult ratio of the mallard kill in 1964 was 0.9 based~on the wing collection survey and adjusted for differential vulnerability. This figure reflects the relatively low production in the Valley in 1964 as brought about by poor breeding conditions. Thus, more hunting pressure was brought against the adult segment of the population than would have occurred during a year of greater production. This situation undoubtedly contributed to the decrease in the mallard breeding population in 1965 by reducing numbers of adults which tend to remain associated with the Valley. Low production, plus the probable movement of young birds from the Valley without a corresponding return, resulted in a small addition to the breeding stock by immatures. �· - 39 - Table 3.--Breeding pairs by density type, as estimated regular air trans ects, 1964-65. Percent Samples 22 6 1 2 45.45 33.33 100.00 100.00 2,891 1,476 1,274 18.27 24,388 TOTALS 1,305 18.72 28,755 These lakes not specifically Monte Vista NWR Russell Lakes San Luis Lake Mishak Lakes Remainder of Valley * Estimated 1964 All Species Mallards Sq. Miles Habitat Type Table 4.--Species composition from the San Luis Va lley 1,493 570 Breeding Pairs 1965 All Species Mallards 3,140 1,008 60 187 1,258 303 7 59 12,155 22,287 8,883 14,218 26,682 10,510 of the San Luis Valley breeding population, counted ~'c * * oJ, in 1964. 1964 Species Mallard Cadwa 11 American Widgeon Green-winged Teal Blue-winged or Cinnamon Shoveler -; Pinta il Redhead Misc. Divers Teal TOTALS * Confidence limits == 26,682 1964-65. 1965 No. Pairs % Total No. Pairs % Total 14,218 1,750 103 308 3,835 988 5,148 2,785 620 49.3 6.1 0.4 1.1 9.9 3.4 17.9 ·9.7 2.2 10,510 4,119 218 1,771 6,115 1,391 1,274 1,279 5 39.5 15.4 0.8 6.6 22.9 5.2 4.8 4.8 28,755 100.0 26,682'" 100.0 ± 8,603 (± 32%). Recommendations, The potential sampling error associated with the total estimated breeding pairs in the Valley is shown in Table 4. Despite attempts to refine sampling methods in 1965, potential sampling error remained high at 32 percent (26,682 + 8,603) with 95 percent confidence, as compared to 34 percent in 1964. Even though the major high production areas were sampled separately, considerable variation still occurs among transects in both high and Low production areas. It appears that little more can be done to improve our sampling technique on the Valley floor, at least within the limits of time and manpower. Our procedures for conducting the breeding pair survey in 1966 will remain the same as in 1965, with the hope that variations among tran~ects will decrease with the anticipated improvement in breeding conditions. �- 40 - BREEDING POPULATION SURVEY OF THE SAN LUIS VALLEY HIGH-COm~TRY ----Waterfo,vl breeding pair inventories were continued for the second year in the high-country on the west side of the San Luis Valley, as part of the Cooperative Mallard Investigation. Generally, the study area encompasses the Rio Grande National Forest and includes all private lands lying w i t h Ln the major forest boundary as well as a scattering of both public and private lands in habitat types considered to be a part of the high-country area. It is known that this high-country area (that part of the Rio Grande drainage which does not actually lie' on the Valley floor on the San Luis Valley) supports a population of breeding waterfowl and may contribute substantially to the total waterfowl production of the Valley. Just what this contribution may be has in the past been a matter of conjecture. Thus, the investigation here described was undertaken in an attempt to express in quantitative terms the wa t er f ow l production of this area. Techniques Used Extreme vsriability encountered in the data last year led to a change in sampling technique for the second year. Previously, 75 randomly selected squaremile sections (Section 20 in each township) comprised the sample. Analysis of the data from these gave confidence intervals so wide as to be meaningless; consequently, the area was stratified for the second-year study with samples taken within the 10,,7 density types, while high-density types (larger lakes) were comp\etely counted. The sections from last year's sample which contained waterfowl habitat were retained. Topographic maps and aerial photos we re used to determine what areas could not possibly contain waterfowl habitat, and these areas were eliminated from consideration. The remaining sections, totalling 914, were then classified according to National ~orest Ranger District, and sections were randomly selected from these lists, wh Lch , added to the retained sections from last year, again totalled 75. Total counts from the larger lakes within the s~udy area were added to the projected f i.gure s from the sample sections to give an estimate of the total wa t er fow l p opu La t Lon , Findings Much of the high country within th~ study area, particularly that in the Cumbres Pass area, was still snowbound and inaccessible at the time of the survey (June 1-9) and could not be visited. The actual number of sections which were surveyed was 54, out of the total of 75 sample sections. The effect of reducing the sample to 54 was to arbitrarily assume. that the 21 non-visited sections exhibited the same habitat and waterfowl population characteristics as the 54 which were visited. This mayhjve introduced an unaccountable error into the data, but it was not deemed serious. It is hoped that all sections in the sample can be visited during s~cceeding years. �- 41 - Table 5, following, presents estimates of the wa t er f ow l breeding pair population on the study are~. Last year's estimate of total breeding pairs was acceptable, but the estimate of species composition was far out 6f line. This year, the estimate of total breeding pairs and species composition is believed to be far more accurate than that of last year. Table 5.--Waterfowl Breeding Study Area, 1965. Species Estimated Mallard Green-winged teal Cadwa l I Pintail Bl ue-w i.nge d teal Cinnamon teal Shoveler Am. Merganser Ringnecked duck Ruddy duck Redhead Lesser·scaup Am. widgeon Bufflehead TOTAL *Confidence Pair Estimates limits for San Luis Valley High-Country Number 95% Confidence Interval 957 200 235 31 44 703-1,211 151- 249 16- 454 1646 3256 5 no projection 33 29 38 69 48 25 11 " " " " " " " 2 " 1, 727~'< 926-2,528* 1,727 + 801 (± 46%). The data and the analysis thereof suggest that production from adjacent highmountain country does not contribute as much to the San Luis Valley waterfowl popul~tion as was previously supposed. The best estimate of the breeding pair population in the Valley itself is 26,682 pairs of ducks during the 1965 breeding season. Thus it is seen that potential production from adjacent high-mountain country would add only about 6.5 percent to this figure •. Recommendations Stratification of the study area has shown that variability can be reduced to a reasonable and workable level. No drastic changes in technique are recommended for the 1966 season; in fact, the only change recommended is to eliminate the non-habitat sections from the 1965 sample and to substitute a new selection for the eliminated sections. The choice of 75 square-mile sections as the sample size is largely influenced by the personnel and time available in wh i ch to accomplish the survey. An actual calculation of sample size needed, assuming �- 42 - no change in variability from the present data, gives a ridiculously high figure. 'Thus, the elimination of more non-habitat areas from sampling consideration, as a means of further reducing variability, is deemed necessary before sample size calculations can be expected to yield reasonable figures. It is recommended that the high-country production survey be continued for at least two more years to give us an opportunity to sample the area under various climate and phenology of season conditions. SAN LUIS VALLEY PRE-SEASON DUCK BANnING Pre-season banding continued in 1965 to help evaluate' the effects of the expe r L« mental season on the local duck population. Flying adults and immatures were banded from late August through the middle of September. A quota of 4,000 mallards was established for the entire Valley floor, 1,000 of each age and sex class. State personnel and Federal Game Agents were given the responsibility of banding one-half of this quota in the area north of the Rio Grande River. Refuge and other Federal personnel were aiming for the remaining one-half of the quota in the area south of the Rio Grande River. Also, a Colorado man was assigned to band as many ducks as possible in the mountains west of the Valley floor. The f o Ll.ow i.ng report covers only results by banding crews in the northern one-h~lf of ,the Valley floor and in the high-country. Techniques Used Barley was used to bait-trap ducks, mainly by use of the Salt Plains trap. Co11apsable traps with net tops were used to a limited degree. Traps were distribut~d throughout all duck concentration areas in the northern portion of the Valley floor. An attempt was made to band ducks at each area in proportion to the number present on that area in relation to the rest of the northern one-half of the Valley. Similar methods were employed to band ducks in the high-country near Creede. Findings Slightly over 2,400 ducks of nine species were banded in the northern portion of the Valley floor (Table 6). This total included 1,483 mallards and 703 pintails. A total of 477 ducks (317 mallards) of 11 species was banded in the high-country, specifically on Br own Lakes, Hermit Lakes, Pearl Lakes, and Road Canyon Reservoir. Recommendations Trapping should be continued in the San Luis Valley and the high-country to assist in evaluating the experi~cntal duck season in this area. Trapping operations should start about the third week in August and end about September 20 so as not to interfere with the hunting season. �- 43 - Table 6.--Number of ducks banded by species and location San Luis Valley, 1965. Species Mallard Gadwall American Widgeon Green-winged Teal Blue-winged or Cinn. Teal Shoveler Pintail Redhead Lesser Scaup Ring-necked Duck American Coot TOTALS Valley during pre-season Location High Mountains Floor in the Total 1,483 88 225 52 3 703 47 0 0 15 317 14 7 47 14 2 9 21 1 10 712 82 21 1 25 2,418 477 2,895 1,800 102 9 72 66 5 35 --- HARVEST ~ --- '. .. INFOHNATION State personnel assisted in collecting hunter and harvesc data on the Monte Vista National Wildlife Refuge by operating Check Stations No. 2 and 5 from October 1-10, and October 16 and 17. Also, 25 hunter performance counts were made. All data resulting from this work were turned o ve r to the Bureau of Sport Fisheries and Wildlife -and combined with similar information which they gathered. A report covering all phases of the investigation w i Ll, appear as an Administrative Report prepared by members of both agencies and distributed by the Bureau of Sport Fisheries and Wildlife, Branch of Wildlife Research, }ligratory Bird Populations Station. Thus, no tabulation of hunters or harvest will be presented in this report. LITERATURE CITED Ballou, R.M., J.R. Grieb, and A.D. Geis. 1964. Progress report - experimental hunting season San Luis Valley, 1963. U.S.D.I., Bur. of Sport Fisheries Wildl. Migratory Bird Pop. Sta., Admin. Rpt. No. 49. July 14. 7 pp. and Grieb, J.R. and R.H. Ballou. 1963. An evaluation of a proposed experimental duck hunting season in the San Luis Valley, Colorado. Rpt. to the Central FlYHay Council. Aug. 38 pp. �- 44 - Grieb~ J.R., R.M. Hopper, W.H. Rutherford. 1965a. San Luis Valley cooperative mallard investigation. Colo. Game, Fish and Parks Dep t , , Fed. Aid Game Res. Grieb, J.R., A.D. Geis, and R. Buller. 1965b. Progress report - experimental hunting season in the San Luis ValleYt Colorado - 1964. D.S.D.I., Bur. of Sport Fisheries and Wildl., Migratory Bird Pop. Sta., Admin. Rpt. No. 79. July 16. 20 pp. Prepared by: Richard 11•. HOJ2.Eer Approved by: Assistant Wildlife Researcher William H. Rutherford Associate Wildlife Researcher Date: October, 1966 -----=--~---, ------------ Jack R. Grieb Project Leader Wayne W. Sand fort Game Research Chief �October, 1966 - l~5 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGME:NT State of COLORADO ----------------------------- Project No. w-88-R-ll Work Plan No. 2 Migratory Bird Investigations Job No. 2 Title of Job: ,Experimental Studies on Improving Status of Canada Goose Populations Period Covered: April 1, 1965 to March 31, 1966 Personnel: Gurney Crawford, William Rutherford, Richard Hopper, Howard FmL~, and Jack R. Grieb Objectives: (1) Development and evaluation of teclmiques for initial establishment and/or increase of goose populations on all major drainages in the State. (2) Permanent establishment of resident goose flocks on all large ,vater impoundments aU2 w~jor river systems with suitable habitat. (3) Retention of resident and migrant Great Basin goose flocks l"rinteringin the State. Procedures: As given in past reports of this job. ��- 47 - EXPERIMENTAL STUDIES ON IMPROVING STATUS OF CANADA GOOSE POPULATIONS Jack R. Grieb On July 1, 1964, Gurney Crawford was assigned full-time to W-lIO-D, under the supervision of Richard Takes, Northeast Region. His specific assignment was, and continues to be, the development of breeding Canada goose populations in the Northeast Region. Thus, the following report of activities and accomplishments will contain much of the same information which will also be reported in the completion report of W-1l0-D. The reason for this duplication is to preserve continuity in reporting results of the establishment of Canada goose flocks initiated under this job. Larimer County Flock Production.--The size of the breeding goose popu La t i.o n in Larimer County ~id not increase at the rate expected this past year. Number of nests established in 1965 was only 79,11 more than established the previous/year. Furthermore, 178 young were raised to flight which is only 24 more than the previous year (Table 1). It is probable, therefore, that relaxation of hunting regu Lat.Lons during the fall of 1964 was at least partially responsible for the weak increase in the size of this flock. Perhaps the regulation most at fault was the early opening of the season which permitted hunting pressure to be placed on local geese before arrival of migrants. Table l.--Larimer County Canada goose flock Eroduction No. Birds No. of Birds Raised No. Nests No. Nests of on Area Hatch Year Breeding Age Estab lished 1957 1958 1959 1960 1961 1962 1963 1961J 1965 0 0 2 8 200 53 135 250 430 0 0 1 4 7 23 43 68 79 0 0 1 4 6 21 31 59 60 0 0 5 14 20 79 100 154 178 information. No. Birds Planted Approxima te Size of Flock 31 23 48 68 95 101 0 0 0 31 54 60 120 210 400 500 600 650 Location of production was as expected. While there was some pioneering out to new areas most nests were located in the colony type areas of College Lake, Terry Lake, and Watson Lake (Table 2).· This is probably typical of a newLy established flock but it is hoped that future development and increases will take place away from these concentration areas to build a stronger more stable population. �I' - 48 - !/ Table 2.--Production results Fort Collins2 Canada goose flockz Springz 1965.. Number No. Failed Young Surviving Number to Reach Number Nest Number Maturity to Date Young Failures Eggs Lake Nests Anderson Pond 1 Claymore Lake 2 College Lake 24 Dean's Lake 2 Fosse1 Creek Reservoir 0 Herring Lake 3 Lamb's Pond 2 1 Lindenmeier Lake Schuelke Lake 0 Sterling Pond 1 1 Specht Pond Timnath Reservoir 1 29 Terry Lake Watson Lake 12 '0 Weitzel Lake 5 9 121 9 0 0 8 0 65 7 0 15 9 6 0 5 3 4 125 57 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 5 3 0 0 14 3 5 0 5 0 0 79 43 0 79 368 19 234 Total 4 9 1 0 28 0 3 9 37 7 0 0 0 1 0 0 13 11 0 0 12 3 5 0 4 0 0 66 32 0 56 178 2 o .!/Tab1e prepared by G. I. Crawford. Habitat Improvement.--Approximate1y 50 structures were built in various locations in the Fort Collins area this year. These were placed mainly on areas where geese were observed several or more times. It is desirable that this portion of the program be continued and expanded since now that young from this flock are imprinted to nesting structures, it will be possible to distribute the birds to various water areas simply by construction of structures on these areas. As noted in the past, nesting sites are limited and practically non-exis~ent in this area. Therefore, the continued growth of this population will depend upon construction of nest sites and maintenance of old structures each year. Boulder County Flock Gosling Release Program.--A total of 130 goslings eight weeks or older were released on Va1mont Reservoir in July, 1965. These birds were obtained from the following sources. 1. On April 21, 1965, 75 eggs were taken from Bowles Lake area and brought to the Fort Collins Nursery for hatching. Birds hatched from these eggs were held in the goose conditioning pen until their release. 2. On June 24, 1965, 109 goslings were picked up at Denver City Park and Maddy's and brought to the Fort Collins Nursery and placed in the goose pen. �- 49 - Flock Status.--While numbers of birds using Valmont have varied from time. to time ranging as high as 300 to 400, it is obvious to the critical observer that this population is becomming strongly entrenched in this area. For the first time that anyone can remember geese were hatched and raised at Valmont Reservoir. Six·nests were established, probably from pioneering adults of the Denver Metro flock, 16 young hatched and 11 goslings raised to flight (Table 3). This is only the beginning and it is expected that number of nests will increase each year as released birds come of breeding age. It is believed that this area will be a major breeding and concentration area within the next few years. Table 3.--Boulder County Canada goose flock production information. No. Birds No. of Birds No. Birds Approximate Raised No. Nests No. Nests of Planted Size of Flock on Area Hatch Year Breeding Age Established 86 1963 175 97 1964 300 131 11 6 6 1965 lilt is believed that most of these are adults from the Denver Metropolitan flock. Habitat Improvement.--Fifty structures were errected on Valmont during this project interval. Protective Measures.--Some minor changes were made in areas closed to hunting for the 1965-66 hunting season. 1. Areas around Fossel Creek and Boyd Lakes were closed to roads along section lines instead of a half-mile above the high-water line. This was done so that hunters would have a definite boundary to observe for hunting. The half-mile closure led to considerable controversy since it was not posted by the Department, and sportsmen either had to pace it out themselves or rely on an arbitrary decision as to location of the line. 2. An area three by six miles was closed to goose hunting around New Windsor Reservoir in Weld County in order to attract and hold geese to this area. 3. All other closures remained the same as for the 1964-65 season in Larimer County. 4. In lower Weld and Boulder Counties the closed area was extended to include all areas south of State 66, north of State 128 and west of U. S. 87. Special hunting regulations requiring a permit and limiting harvest to a season bag of six geese were continued in i965-66. Permits were issued free at the Regional Office in Fort Collins. This year the permit area was enlarged to include all areas west of U. S. 85 from the Wyoming line to State 66, and west of U. S. 87 from State 66 to State 128. Number of permits issued this year increased to 2,335. However, from a questionnaire sent to 500 hunters, it was determined that about 32 per cent of the hunters obtaining a permit did not Ilseit, thus it is estimated that total participating hunters numbered 1,578. Additional hunting statistics indicate �- 50 T~ble 4~--January inventory Canada geese northeast region. YEAR 1959 1961 1962 1963 1964 1965 1,150 650 1,013 Original Release Area College Lake Terry Lake Lindenmaier Lake Res. No.5 Res. No. 6 Res. No.8 Res. No. 9 Res. No. 15 Douglas Lake Rocky Ridge Res. Cobb Lake Eaton Res. New Windsor Windsor Res. Warren Lake Timnath Res. Fosse1 Creek Res. Boyd .~L~a_k_e TOTALS 75 82 225 180 450 251 875 506 915 400 37 437 70 1,000 165 867 975 480 1,703 605 406 320 170 7 34 25 20 60 60 25 45 220 41 10 200 292 114 476 100 900 1~'LO~3~9~~_4~8~2~~~1~5~0 __~lL'0~0~0~_ 2,686 3,836 4,287 5,966 12 15 11 80 370 512 ~~ __~~~_~~12~7~~~2~8~8 22 660 1,320 1,945 New Release Area Lone tree Res. Terry (Longmont) Lake Va1mont. Res. Swede Lake Union TOTALS Denver Met. Area 50 15 80 100 15 80 100 15 112 11 392 580 975 615 761 1,888 85 325 500 100 100 100 50 450 81 96 250 20 480 65 15 15 No Count 65 Denver Area No No Count Count 301 Lakes East of Management Area Barr Lake Horse Creek Res. Milton Res. Latham Res. Empire Res. Riverside Res. Jackson Lake Pruitt Res. TOTALS 120 45 110 270 625 1,039 GRAND TOTALS 662 1,764 80 130 120 250 22 45 40 432 355 60 300 10 170 60 300 20 895 300 670 70 475 2,215 2,916 4,151 10 300 1,260 100 100 50 300 50 1,100 462 125 1,514 5,791 6,248 9,948 135 t -IfF" ~rst year La" r~mer Coun-y c 1osed t 0 goose hun t"~ng. ~fAdditional closed area imposed in Boulder County. �- 51 - that average days hunted was 6.5 and average seasonal bag was .5 geese per hunter. This permits an estimated total harvest of 838 birds of which 79% or 665 were taken in Larimer County; 17% or 144 in western Weld County; and 4% or 29 in Boulder County. Considering size of the wintering population and general flock status it is believed that this harvest is about right par~icularly if we retain the objective of increasing the size of the population over the next few years. For this reason it is recommended that we do not drastically alter hunting regulations to increase the size of harvest at least next year and perhaps for several more years. Wintering Populations.--Table 4 tabulates results of the January Inventory by specific lakes within general areas in Larimer, Weld, and Boulder Counties. This information reveals the strong increase in goose numbers in Larimer and parts of Weld County as a result of area closures begun in 1960. Furtper, that numbers of geese in southern Larimer and Weld Counties and in Boulder County increased strongly in number during the fall of 1965 probably as a result of added protection obtained by closing additional area during the 1965-66 hunting season. It appears that both of these increases were a result of holding larger numbers of migrants rather than a general shift in wintering populations between Colorado wintering areas. Recommendations: 1. Goslings should be taken from all possible areas within Denver. be beneficial to this program and would help relieve the depredation in the Denver area. This would potential , 2. Geese obtained Reservoir. from Denver should be released on suitable areas near Va1mont 3. Effort should be continued to construct nesting structures in all suitable places in Larimer, Weld and Boulder Counties to assist in spreading this breeding Canada goose flock wtdely as possible. 4. Specific recommendations a meeting with all concerned Prepared Date: for closed areas and seasons will be discussed personnel in the Northeast Region. by:__~J~a~c~k~R~.~G~r~i~e~b Project Leader _ Oc__to_b_e_r~,~1~9~6_6 _ Approved by: Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief at ��october, 1966 - 53 - JOB COV~LETION RESEARCH State of REPORT PROJECT SEGMENT COLORADO ------~~~~~----------Haterfow1 Surveys and Investigations Project No. W-88-R-ll Work Plan No~ 2 Investigation Job No. 4a Valley Wintering Period Covered: Personnel: April 1, 1965 to March of the Arkansas Goose Flock 31, 1966 0 Permanent Employees - Don Bogart, Robert Clark, Jack Grieb, Leonard Johnson, Hayne Russell, HilHam Rutherford, Bert Widhalm", Temporary Employees - Roy Ackley, Simon Allen, Dave Anderson, Claude Brock, Hayne Cramer, O. L. Jackson, Nat Jones, Robert Kitzmiller, Horace Moorehead, Fred Roth, Andrew Stagner, Jesse Hheeler. ABSTRACT Water, weather, and food conditions during the winter of 1965-66 were judged to be excellent for the Canada goose flock in the Arkansas Valley of Colorado. Aerial census flights over the major wintering areas of this flock indicated that flock status remained excellent, and that numbers of geese wintering in Colorado were at an all-time high. Migration of geese into the Valley occurred earlier than had occurred during the three previous seasons A delayed season opening in the Two Buttes area, established late enough to insure that migration movement would be cornpleted9 was highly successful in holding geese in Colorado, although some cases of crop depredation resultedo Hunter use and goose harvest at the T,vo Buttes 1'1anagementArea increased markedly over last year, but throughout the Valley they were down, resulting in only about half the total goose harvest as during the previous yea-ro The wounding loss study estimated a loss of about 24 percent of the total hunting mortalityo Information obtained at the Two Buttes check stations showed that goose feeding flights were generally to the we s t and southwest, and that hunter success on the firing line was highest at these locationso Hunter use of the area fluctuated considerably, and average bag per hunter day showed a general decrease as the season progressed. Hunter success increased proportionally as the number of days hunted per individual huntero The percentage of juvenile birds in the flock remained lower than average for the second consecutive year. Family f,YOUp counts were limited in number, and showed lack of consistencyo Weight data from hunter-bagged geese showed an unusually close agreement between weights of adults and weights of juveniles. Weather effects upon hunter success were more apparent than usual, the mild weather be ing judged primarily responsible for the low harvest which occurred during a year in which record numbers of geese were presento Recommendations for continuing management techniques in the Arkansas Valley are presentede Q ��- 55 INVESTIGATIONS OF THE ARKANSAS VALLEY WINTERING GOOSE FLOCK William H. Rutherford Introduction: The wintering goose population in the Arkansas Valley is probably the most important single waterfowl flock in Colorado in relation to hunter use and enjoyment. Before closer management of a specific waterfowl flock can be attained, the basic knowledge of its numbers, local movements, and habits must be gained. The expected increase in hunting pressure and the corresponding increased harvest of this flock indicates the need for future recommendations which will permit the correct harvest of this resource upon a sustained yield basis. Objectives: (1) To determine the fall movement of geese into the Arkansas Valley and the size of the wintering flock. (2) To determine the hunting pressure and hunter success on geese in the Arkansas Valley and particularly at Two Buttes Reservoir. (3) To investigate the wounding loss of geese at Two Buttes Reservoir. (4) To determine the age composition of the flock. (5) To investigate the relationship between Canada geese wintering on various. lakes in the Arkansas Valley. Procedures: Periodic aerial counts were made in the Arkansas Valley of Colorado, coupled with both ground and aerial counts made throughout the wintering grounds of the Short Grass Prairie Population by various State and Federal personnel. Ground counts were alsco conducted at various intervals at Two Buttes Reservoir, Turk's Pond, Eads Lakes, John Martin Reservoir, Blue Lake and Meredith Lake. These counts were made for the purpose of determining the size and distribution of the wintering goose population. Check stations were operated at the Two Buttes Management Area to determine hunting pressure, harvest, wounding loss, and age ratio of the goose flock. Results: Hater levels in the reselvoirs of the Arkansas Valley were the highest which have been recorded since the late 1940's. Torrential rains during the spring and early summer of 1965 throughout the entire watershed resulted in floods which filled John Martin Reservoir nearly to capacity, threatened to wash out the dam at Two Buttes, and generally created havoc in many areas along the river. Water storage in most reservoirs which are filled by canals from the river was high. For the most part, the abundance of water in the Valley during the fall and winter was highly favorable to the wintering geese, the exception being John Martin Reservoir. Geese seem to prefer low water levels at John Martin, and this year these birds concentrated instead on small rainfilled depressions which contained water for the first time in many years. Food conditions were excellent throughout the Valley, the direct result of good soil moisture and good seed germination. Winter wheat fields provided the great bulk of goose feed, as planting of mila and other grain sorghums had to be delayed so long because of rain and wet ground that many such plantings did not mature. Only one major snow storm was experienced, and severe cold weather did not develop at any time during hunting season. This weather pattern may have been instrumental in holding hunter success down, but was also probably partly responsible for holding large numbers of geese in the Valley. After the close �- 56 of hunting season, more snow'along with cold weather moved in, and an exodus of geese from the Valley to wintering areas in Texas took place. Migration Movement and Wintering Population: Five separate aerial censuses were used to determine the movement of Canada geese (Branta canadensis parvipes) into. and wintering populations of, the Arkansas Valley. Three of these flights were coordinated with similar ones in the Texas panhandle, and with ground observations in other wintering areas, so that it was possible to determine the status of the entire population, rather than just that portion wintering in Colorado. Flights were completed on schedule, except for the post-season status count which had to be postponed until February 15 due to a combination of weather and airplane availability. Aerial counts in the Arkansas Valley of Colorado were considered to be highly satisfactory, with the exception of the regular mid-winter inventory on January 5. This count was flown under ideal conditions, but resulted in numbers far below those expected. Furthermore, the count could not be reconciled with counts from other areas of the wintering grounds; thus, the mid-winter inventory of the Short Grass rrairie Population was deemed unsatisfactory and a later inventory was made (Table 1). There is some question as to whether a good count was obtained during the December 1 status count in wintering areas other than Colorado, particularly as the February 15 inventory showed a larger number of birds than did the December 1 inventory. It is felt that the final count of the Short Grass Prairie Population on February 15 represents the one valid inventory made for this Population in all wintering areas. The figure of 110,008 birds in the 1966 post-hunting season population shows an increase over such counts from previous years, and indicates that the Short Grass Prairie Canada Goose Population remains in excellent condition with numbers continuing to build up (Table 2). Arrival of birds on the wintering grounds occurred earlier in 1965 than had occurred during the three previous seasons. The main migration took place from November 13 to November 15, and appeared to be triggered by a substantial cold front moving down from Canada which produced snow and freezing weather in Canada and the northern United States. In the Arkansas Valley, geese started arriving on November 13, with movement largely over by November 16. Arrangements were made for an aerial count on November 18, to determine flock status in Colorado as soon as possible after arrival of geese. This flight resulted in the count shown in the first column of Table 1 following: Table 1. -- Aerial Canada Goose Counts, Arkansas Valley, Colorado, By Dates, 1965 - 66. Location Regular Season Opening: CF &: I Lakes Meredith Lake Dyes Lake Henry Lake Holbrook Lake Cheraw Lakes Arkansas River Nov. 18 Nov. 23 Dec. 1 Jan. 5 Feb. 15 3,900 100 35 3,600 1,450 51 530 50 3,600 12 140 14 38 --••.. �- 57 - .:roble1. -- Ae r Lo I Canada Goose Ccunts, l•. rkansas Valley, Col.orndo, By Dates, 1965 - 66. (Continued). Location Nov. 18 Nov. 23 Beeker Pond Blue Lake Potholes SE of Blue Lake Swede Lake & nearby potholes Fort Lyons Pond Veerhoff Pond John Martin Reservoir Nee Gronda Reservoir Upper Queens Reservoir Nee Noshe Reservoir SUBTOTALS Delayed Season Opening: Potholes SE of John Martin Two Buttes Reservoir Turk's Pond ______ ~S~U~BT~0~~~L~S GRAND TOTALS Dec. 1 5,500 1,200 9,300 23,595 Feb. 15 30 1,100 200 1,060 2,500 Jan. 5 3,125 700 11,700 500 350 4,500 60 1,300 620 10,000 21,835 5,800 21,462 400 6,570 9,543 15,000 18,600 3,500 5,500 4,900 22,000 28,000 21,000 500 35 6,500 7,500 13,000 10,000 20.: 000 ... ~3=2~0~0~0~~4=1~0~0~0~ __ =3~89~0~0~~1~0~,~5~0~0 __ ~2~O,035 __ 55,595 62 ,835 60,362 20 ,043 3£1.,635 Table 2. -- Post-Hunting Season Status of Short Grass Prairie Canada Goose Population, 1960-1966, Data Generally From Regular Mid-Winter Inventories. Year 1960 1961 1962 1963 1964 1965 1966 No. of Birds 77,709 103,355 80,133 93,940 81,221 103,435 110 ,4851/ 1/ Inventory of February 15, 1966, substituted for unsatisfactory January inventory. Table 3. -- January Inventory of Canada Geese, Arkansas Valley, ,Colorado, 1948-1966. Goose Count Goose Count Year Year Goose Count Year 31,360 1961 25,110 1955 4,798 1948 40,250 Y 1962 24,212 1956 12,286 1949 1963 35,889 1957 24,617 13,170 1~50 1964 33,750 35,894 1958 19,320 1951 1965 37,693 44,660 1959 30,463 1952 38 ,635 2:/ 1966 1960 37,394 20,236 1953 20,280 1954 .1/ Inventory of Feb. 7, 1962, substituted for January, 1962, inventory. "if Inventory of Feb. 15, 1966, substituted for January, 1966, inventory, �- 58 - Evaluation of Two Buttes Area Delayed Season Opening~ Personnel of the Migratory Bird Project have long felt that the opening of hunting season before the arrival of geese in the Arkansas Valley, and parti.cularly at Two Buttes, prevented the birds from settling into a definite pattern of feeding and roostingo The result of this immediate harassment could vary from a reduction of hunter success to an outri.ght forcing of a considerable segment of the wintering goose population out of the valley to wintering areas in Texaso At the Horicon National Wildlife Refuge in Wisconsin, management of Canada geese has for a number of years included a delayed season opening, ranging up to a full month after arrival of birds, as a necessary requisite to establishing the Refuge as a major goose use and hunting area. It has been eminently successful, in combination with other specific management techniques, as Horicon now holds up to 100,000 Canada geese for a period of over two months before the birds continue their migration to the wintering area in southern Illinois (Hunt et a!. 1962). These authors state that since 1957, when the combined regulations of delayed season opening and restriction of shooting hours were adopted, these were the two principle techniques which resulted in a significant increase in the harvest. In recognizing the potential existing in the Arkansas Valley for manipulation of goose populations, Project personnel recommended an experimental delayed season opening. The Two Buttes area was selected as the area to be opened to hunting at a later time, that is, the test area, because it is the southernmost goose wintering area in the Arkansas Valley of Colorado, it has a good past history of wintering goose use and hunter popularity, and it was considered desirable to attempt to attract birds to the area. The areas to thFnorth and west within the Arkansas Valley then served as the control to be opened to hunting at the regular time. A delayed season opening for the 1964-65 season in Baca and the south half of Prowers Counties accomplished nothing, as the season opening was delayed only until November IS, while.the geese did not arrive until November 20. For the 1965-66 hunting season, a delayed season opening for this same area, plus a portion of eastern Bent County, was again established. This opening was further delayed until November 27, in a calculated attempt to establish a season opening which would occur after the arrival of geese on the wintering grounds, so that a comparative evaluation of the effects of a delayed opening could be made. The fact that the birds arrived earlier this year, combined with the further delayed season opening, resulted in a period of about twelve days during which geese were present, but not subjected to hunting harassment, within the boundaries of this experimental area. The aerial inventories of the Valley on November 18 and November 23 (see TAble 1) we re made for the express purpose of determining the Valley goose population and dist::-ibution during this interim period. In,"addition, observations on the ground were conducted throughout the same period. The results of tbt.~e observations and inventories, and the overall evaluation of the delayed sea·· son opening, are summarized in the following paragraphs 0 In all areas of the Valley, open hunting areas as well as the closed area, no differences in goose behavior could be detected for the first few days following arrival. Generally, the birds were spooky and inclined to stay out for long and erratic periods of time after the morning departure from the reservo Lr s , By November 19, however, birds in the closed area had settled down ir..::o �- 59 - daily feeding flights, and were returning and departing Two Buttes Reservoir ~ masse at about 10:00 AM and 3:30 PM. Birds in the open hunting area were attempting also to establish a routine, and were generally resting on the lakes during mid-day, but their returns and departures were strung out for longer periods of time involving smaller groups of birds •. These feeding flight de- . parture and return patterns were directly the result of the dispersion or lack of dispersion of the groups of feeding birds. In the closed area, the tendency was for the entire Two Buttes goose population to feed as one group; in the open hunting area, hunting pressure and the associated harassment tended to disperse feeding geese. The major effect of the delayed season opening was the noticeable influx of birds into the closed area, and their tendency to remain after the opening of hunting (see Tables 1 and 4). Comparative figures for each hunting season beginning with 1958-59 show that the Two Buttes area (this year's delayed opening area) has consistently fallen off in wintering goose use since 1960 (Table 4). The wintering seasons of 1958-59 and 1959-60 showed heavy goose use in the Two Buttes area; since then it has become increasingly obvious that geese have not liked the Two Buttes area as well as they formerly did, and have wintered in larger numbers at the lakes on the north side of the Arkansas Valley, although some trend back to the Two Buttes ar'eawas noted during the 1963-64 and 1961 65 wintering seasons. Generally, there is not enough variability in feeding conditions throughout the Valley to account for the trend of birds away from Two Buttes since 1960; rather, this trend can be ascribed to the fact that the Two Buttes firing-line embodies the greatest concentration of hunting pressur~ anywhere in the Valley. The barrage of gunfire which has greeted birds arriving at Two Buttes has had an increasingly deterrent effect upon our ability to hold birds in this area. The success of the delayed opening in maintaining a majority of the wintering geese in the Tll70Buttes area for the 1965-66 season, especially when one considers that wintering habitat conditions were just as good in the Meredith-John Martin-Eads Lakes areas, is obvious in Table 4. j.- Table 4. -- Distribution of Wintering Canada Geese, Arkansas Valley, Colorado, by Year. Season 1958-59 .1959-60 1960-61 1961-62 1962-63 1963-64 1964-65 1965-66 Two Buttes Area Percent Ave. wintering of total population 53.3 18,800 61.7 29,270 40.6 12,425 23.1 6,735 27.7 10,350 42.4 12,400 49.1 20,900 61.9 29,385 Arkansas Valley Totals Percent Ave. wintering of total population 46.7 35,275 38.3 47,425 59.4 30,575 76.9 29,185 72~3 37,400 57.6 29,215 50.9 42,585 33.1 47,495 The aerial inventory of November 18 showed that 58 percent of the Valley CO::lcentration was contained in the elosed area; by November 23 the closed area percentage had increased to 65, and had dropped only cne.percentage point to �- 60 64 on December 1. This distribution pattern then remained relatively stable throughout hunting season. ~1ithin the delayed season opening area, the tendency through the hunting season was for birds to gradually diminish in numbers at Two Buttes and to build up in proportion at Turk's Pond, a small wa t er body about 15 miles southeast of Two Buttes Reservoir. This was in no way related to the delayed opening, but was simply a response by the birds to differences in feeding conditions. Hunting pressure at Turk's Pond was considerable, the hunting rights having been leased and put on a commercial basis. The movement of birds away from Two Buttes did have a definite detrimental effect on hunter success at the state-controlled T,vo Buttes Management Area. One obvious, and it might be added predictable, result of the pre-November 27 hunting closure came in the form of landowner complaints of crop depredation. Fortunately, excellent summer and fall soil moisture conditions had brought on a winter wheat growth which was hardy and well-rooted by the time geese began to feed in these fields, so that actual damage to the wheat crop by feeding geese was minimal. However, fall and winter cattle pasturing of winter wheat during years of good plant growth is a valuable added source of income, and this was certainly true this year. The effect of a flock of 20,000 or more geese feeding in one field is immediately apparent when one considers the live~ stock pasture potential of such a field. This depredation was short-lived, however, when the landowners involved began using fireworks and other harassment measures, and by the time hunting season opened in the delayed opening area the birds were fairly well dispersed. Overall crop damage was not great, even though one or two landowners probably did suffer a disproportionate share of the total. The effect of the delayed opening upon the economy of the area is difficult to measure accurately, as it contains both positive and negative elements. Early loss of income, during the interim between the regular season opening and the delayed opening, was apparent to many owners of motels, restaurants, grocery stores, service stations and sporting goods stores located in the Springfield area, and probably to a lesser extent in the Lamar area. However, when hunting season was opened on November 27 in the delayed opening area, hunters descended upon the area in record numbers, and continued to maintain larger than normal numbers for most of the season. The Two Buttes check station figures showed higher total hunter use and goose harvest than had occurred for the past three years, and field hunting was also highly popular. This attractiveness to hunters was directly the result of the record numbers of geese which wintered in the Arkansas Valley, the majority of which wintered in the delayed opening area. Thus, it seems that early depression of businesses which cater to the hunter trade was more than adequately compensated by increased business volume following the delayed opening. In suroma ry ; it appears that the Arkansas Valley held a higher percentage of the Short Grass Prairie Canada Goose Population throughout hunting season than it has held for several years, and that the delayed opening area held a majority of the Arkansas Valley concentration. lVhile recognizing that food and water conditions were excellent in the Valley, and that this was partly responsible for holding birds away from wintering areas in Texas, it is nevertheless apparent that the delayed opening was successful in its purpose. Food and wa t er conditions in the area opened for the regular hunting season were just as good as in the delayed opening area, but the trend of the past several years for birds to forsake the Two Buttes area in favor of the John Martin-Eads Lakes area was reversed this year. �- 61 With the delayed season opening technique showing such a clear-cut reponse by wintering geese, there can be no question of its effectiveness as a management tool. It seems advisable, therefore, to establish a season opening which will allow geese to seek their own distribution patterns within the Valley, as a preferable alternative to continuing their migration flight into the wintering grounds of Texas. It is recommended that the season opening for the entire Arkansas Valley of Colorado be made flexible to the extent that geese can be given one week between the time of arrival and the time of season opening. Hunter Harvest: The operation of check stations at the Two Buttes Management Area during the 1965-66 hunting season resulted in collection of an essentially complete set of data. Table 5 presents data on harvest, wounding loss, hunting pressure, and hunter success. Table 5. -- Goose Harvest, Wounding Loss, Hunting Two Buttes Management Area 1965-66. Item Goose Harvest: Adult Juvenile Unknown Ages Total Percent Adults Percent Juveniles Wounding 435 1/ 276 24 735 61.2 38.8 Success, Total 136 64 5711/ 340 31 7 207 68.0 32.0 941.!l 62.7 37.3 152 All Hunters: Number Percent successful Total hunter days Hunter days/hunter Ave. bag/hunter Ave. Bag/hunter day Includes and Hunter Non-Resident Loss Successful Hunters: Number Ave. Bag/number 1/ Resident Pressure, 505 1041 124 1.67 629 1.56 2,177 23.2 4,285 1.97 0.34 0.17 419 29.6 979 2.34 0.49 0.21 2,596 24.2 5,264 2.03 0.36 0.18 one adult lesser snow goose (Chen hyperborea) Table 6 compares the current goose harvest in the Arkansas Valley with the eleven-year average, indicating that the total harvest during the past year was down 28.7 percent from the eleven-year average. Percentage-wise, all counties of the Arkansas Valley showed about the same degree of harvest as the long-term average, but goose kill was substantially lower in all areas. The fact that this occurred during a year in which record numbers of geese wintered in the Valley is evidence that it takes more than mere numbers of geese present to effect a substantial harvest. Throughout the Valley, the number of hunters was down 20.1 percent from last year even though the Two Buttes area �- 62 - Table 6. Eleven-Year Goose Harvest in the Arkansas Valley, by County. -- Average, 1954-64, Based on Results of Random Survey. County Baca Kiowa Prowers Bent Crowley Pueblo Huerfano Otero Lakes Two Buttes Eads and Blue Two Buttes and Eads John Martin, Blue and Horsecreek }~redith and Henry Number and Percent of Geese Bagged 1965-66 ll-year average % % No. No. 5,103 3,028 2,373 37.9 . 22.5 17.6 3,337 1,947 1,709 34.7 20.3 17.8 1,561 703 140 154 11.6 5.2 1.0 1.1 1,125 503 675 13 11.7 5.2 7.0 0.1 285 129 2.1 1.0 278 26 2.9 0.3 12,978 100.0 18,474 100.0 Horsecreek, Cheraw group, Dyes, and Holbrook Las Animos TOTALS had increased hunter use, and the average season bag per hunter decreased from last year's all-time high of 2~30 to 1.52. Both of these factors in combination, apparently brought about by mild and fair weather throughout hunting season, resulted in an Arkansas Valley goose kill of only about half that of the 1964-65 hunting season. Table 7. -- Goose Hunting Season Statistics, Year Dates of Season Stamp Sales 1954 1955 1956 1957 1958 1959 1960 1961 1962 1963 1964 1965 11/1 - 12/30 11/1 - 12/30 11/9 1/7 11/2 - 11/31 11/17 - 1/15 10/26 - 1/8 10/26 - 1/8 11/10 - 1/8 10/31 - 1/13 1/15 11/2 11/2 1/15 11/2 1/15 32,450 39,107 36,303 41,794 41,897 31,431 30,592 24,854 17,701 22,940 25,282 20,537 1954-65. Arkansas Valley Average Estimated Season Goose Bag Hunters 7,071 9,054 9,833 9,113 10,082 8,888 9,838 7,577 6,021 .6;668 8,016 6,313 1.04 1.54 1.05 1.39 1.51 1.61 1.39 1.68 1.58 2.17 2.30 1.52 Estimated Kill 7,372 13,904 10,276 12,656 15,205 14,309 13,629 11,724 9,495 14,l:+4 18,L,74 9,613 Table 7 lists goose hunting statistics for the past twelve years, and shows that stamp sales for 1965 were the second lowest of any year during the series. Thi~ decrease is due in large part to the restrictive duck season in the Central Flyway, but also must certainly reflect the decrease in goose hunting pressure, as it has been established that duck hunting and goose hunting are largely independent of each other. �- 63 - Wounding Loss: . Wounding loss in the 1965-66 season was estimated by two methods: (1) the small game hunter random survey indicated a loss of 24.7 percent of the total goose harvest mortality; and (2) check station information permits calculation of loss on the firing line of a minimum of 14.0 percent. These two figures do not normally show a discrepancy this wide, although the check station figure is commonly lower than the random survey figure. It is believed that the random survey figure is, in this case, a much more realistic estimate of the actual wounding loss in the flock, because of reluctance of firing-line hunters to admit wounding birds and because of possible incomplete check station data. Hunter Habits and Characteristics: Table 8 shows the relative goose kil1, hunting pressure, and hunter success for weekiy intervals on the Two Buttes Management Area. Variations during the season are caused, of course, by the combination of varying hunter use (weather, weekends, ~. weekdays, etc.) and varying hunting conditions (weather, goose population present, changes in daily goose flight patterns, etc.). Feeding flights from the Reservoir were generally to the south and southwest, resulting in much higher hunting pressure and goose kill on the South side firing line. The water level of Two Buttes Reservoir was maximum, causing the inlet area to be flooded for the first time in many years. Soon after arrival, geese began to exhibit a distinct preference for the inlet area at the extreme west end. Greatest firing line use by hunters, and highest hunter success, therefore, occurred on the southwest side (Table 9). The food plot on the north side received no use by feeding geese, and the only north side pits which showed hunting success were those at the extreme west end. Table 8. -- Hunting Pressure and Goose Harvest by Weekly Intervals, T\oJOButtes Management Area, 1965-66. Week Interval 11/27 to 12/1 12/3 to 12/9 12/10 to 12/16 12/17 to 12/23 12/24 to 12/30 12/31 to 1/6 1/7 to 1/15 Totals Total Number of Hunter Days 1165 610 54i' 923 1049 Sli' 45] 5262~ Number of Successful Hunter Days 305 60 56 170 187 21 29 828 Average Bag Number of Per Hunter Cay Geese_Bagged 0.318 371 0.108 66 0~110 60 0.204 188 0.196 206 0.039 20 0.066 30 0.17-ry941 Check station data were examined this year to determine the influence of repeated trips by hunters upon individual hunter success at the Two Buttes Management Area. These data are presented in Table 10. There is, of course, no question that the hunters who make two or more trips to the Management Area should have a higher rate of success than do the one-trip hunters, but we have not measured this difference before. It is interesting to note from the data in Table 10 that both the success ratio and the average bag per hunter day �- 64 Table 9. -- Resident and Non-Resident Hunter-Days of Use by Pit Location, Two Buttes Management Area, 1965-66. \.. . Pit No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 Hunter-days Pit Res. Non-res. No. 64 7 22 82 3 23 88 3 24 71 12 25 77 6 26 78 13 27 77 15 28 94 22 29 87 16 30 91 17 31 91 21 32 8 26 33 93 14 34 91 22 35 115 13 36 107 31 37 96 40 38 54 11 39 38 13 40 47 9 41 48 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 TOTALS: 80 74 62 41 39· 40 18 19 23 15 7 12 14 2 2 5 7 2 South Side: GRAND TOTAL 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 South Side Hunter-days Pit Res. Non-res. No. 37 17 j 42 38 9 43 37 16 44 34 13 45 31 11 46 33 12 47 50 15 48 24 18 49 27 8 50 48 23 51 58 9 52 51 9 53 64 36 54 47 19 55 60 17 56 45 14 57 66 10 58 50 13 59 50 16 60 8 0 61 18 20 ·11 12 16 18 10 11 9 North Side 7 19 20 9 2 21 1 22 23 4 7 24 0 25 0 26 0 27 Resident: Non-resident: Total: Goose Kill: Bag/hunter-day: Hunter-days Pit Res. Non-res. No. 22 3 62 34 5 63 11 34 64 42 4 65 55 6 66 37 4 67 59 6 68 44 12 69 40 5 70 28 10 71 47 7 72 58 11 73 50 20 74 58 7 75 48 14 76 34 18 77 14 5 78 3, 5 79 12 1 80 12 1 [unk , Hunter-days Res. Non-res. 0 8 5 3 4 0 5 2 3 1 3 2 10 4 4 0 4 2 4 0 2 4 6 2 6 0 15 0 14 4 9 5 9 8 10 2 9 4 23 3 5 1 12 10 7 6 30 13 21 23 25 28 35 50 67 27 4 0 1 0 1 4 0 3 1 1 28 29 30 31 32 33 B unk. 3,333 Nor rb $;d~: Resident: 818 Non-resident: 4,143 Total: 816 Goose Kill: 0.20 Bag/hunter-day: Resident: Non-resident: Total: Goose Kill: Bag/hunter-day: 0 4 11 2 10 18 7 2 952 161 1,113 125 0.11 4,285 979 5,264 941 0.179 --- �- 65 increased progressively as the number of trips increased, up to and including that group of hunters who hunted as many as nine different days. Hunters who hunted more than nine days are so few, and the bag of geese so small, that the figures are meaningless. Table 10. -- Relationship of Number of Individual Hunters, Hunting Success, Two Buttes Management Area, 1965-66. Number of Number of Unsuccessful Days Hunt ed Hunters 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 TOTALS 1,172 540 159 54 22 9 5 4 0 1 0 1 0 1,967 Number of Successful Hunters 165 197 101 68 42 20 11 10 9 3 2 0 1 629 Days Hunted, and Number of ' Average Ratio of Successful/UnGeese Bag Per Successful Hunters Bagged Hunter Day .141 .365 .635 1.259 1.909 2.222 2.200 2.500 Inf. 197 258 143 108 104 ,39 26 26 24 3.000 5' Inf. 8 0 2 941 0.000 Inf. .320 .147 .175 .183 .221 .325 .224 .232 .232 .296 .150 .364 .000 .154 .179 Age Composition of the Flock: With no trapping and banding program in effect during the 1965-66 wintering season, data on age composition of geese are limited to the checked hunter bag at the Two Buttes Management Area check stations, No comparisons can be made, other than to compare the check station figures from previous years. Age determination of the checked bag, by the notched tail-feather method, showed that 37.3 percent of the hunter-bagged geese at Two Buttes were juveniles (data presented Table 5). This percentage is nearly identical to the check station percentage of juvenile birds from the year before; and the juvenile percentages for these two most recent years are considerably lower than like percentages from previous years. Data on sizes of Canada goose family groups in the Arkansas Valley were limited to only two observations at Two Buttes during 1965-66, as shown in Table 11. These counts showed family groups to be somewhat larger this year than those of last year, indicating a possibly larger number of juveniles in the flock. However, we have not in the past, and certainly cannot with only two observations this year, place any degree of reliance upon family group counts. The inherent difficulty in maintaining standardization of method, and the lack of consistency in data, cause this technique to be less than ideal. The data on juvenile birds in the checked bag, combined with information relayed by various people working in Canada, seem to indicate that the Short Grass Prairie Population experienced a relatively poor production year in 1965. In spite of this, however, flock status continues to remain excellent. �- 66 Table 11. -- Family Group Counts of Canada Geese, Arkansas Valley, 1965-66. Location Two Buttes Two Buttes Date Nov. 18 Dec. 9 .TOTALS Number Birds 334 383 Number Average Number birds Groups Group Size Present 74 4.51 22,000 100 3.83 15,000 717 174 Activity On Water On Water 4.12 Goose Weights: Of the 940 Canada geese which were checked through the Two Buttes check stations, useable weight data we re recorded for only 909. The mean weights of these birds are presented by age class in Table 12. These mean weights are somewhat smaller than those of birds checked through the stations last year, and there is very close agreement between weights of adults and weights of juveniles, which is unusual. Weight variations within the sample breakdowns seem to be the result of a combination of changes in age ratios within the adult class, sub-species composition, sex ratios, and body conditions. Table 12. -- Comparison of Weights of Geese According to Age, from Check Station Samples, Two Buttes Management Area, 1965-66. Number Average Weights Pounds Adults 568 5.26 Juveniles 341 5.17 All Geese 909 5.23 Effect of Weather Upon Goose Flights and Hunter Harvest: The air feeder line and perforated tube for the aerator were marked with a buoy and left in place last year. The flood which filled Two Buttes Reservoir submerged the buoy, and repeated efforts to locate it failed. By the time it was realized the equipment could not be salvaged, it was too late to obtain new tubing in time for this year's hunting season. Fortunately, weather cold enough to freeze the lake did not occur until after hunting season had closed, and use of aerator equipment to.maintain open water on the lake was not necessary. Weather throughout hunting season was mild, and although Two Buttes Reservoir consistently held large numbers of geese, particularly during the early part of hunting season, many "bluebird" days resulted in poor hunting on the firing line. Field hunting in the Arkansas Valley was also relatively poor, again probably caused by the predominantly fair weather throughout hunting season. Recommendations: 1. The Arkansas Valley Goose Flock Investigation, as it has existed since its beginning, is now essentially complete. Band recovery analyses and preparation of the final report remain to be done. 2. The operation of check stations to collect management data on age composition, hunter harvest, and hunting pressure should continue. �- 67 3. Continuing aerial inventory will be a necessary annual management technique. 4. A delayed opening for the entire Arkansas Valley Canada Goose wintering area is recommended for the 1966-67 hunting season. LITERATURE CITED Hunt, Richard A., J. G. Bell and L. R. Jahn. 1962. Managed goose hunting at Horicon Marsh. Trans. N. Am. Wildl. & Nat. Res. Conf., 27:91-106. Prepared by: William R. Rutherford Wildlife Researcher Approved by: Jack Grieb Project Leader Date: October, 1966 Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator ��October, 1966 - 69 - JOB COMPLETION RESEARCH State of PROJECT REPORT SEGMENT COLORADO ----~~~~~-------------- Project No. W-88-R-ll Work Plan No. Migratory II Title of Job: Cooperative Period Covered: April Bird Investigations Job No. Lesser 4b Canada Goose Flock Investigation 1, 1965 through March 31, 1966 ABSTRACT A December inventory of 101,000 birds and a February inventory of 110,000 indicate good status and healthy increase in the size of the Short Grass Prairie Canada goose population. Age composition of the birds checked through Two Buttes check stations was about 37' per cent. Distribution of band recoveries for all banding years is, presented in tabular form with no comment at this time. The final report will document and discuss all phases of this goose population and present a management action program. It is recommended ,_, that Kenard P. Baer coordinate activities for the December and January Inventories beginning the fall 'of 1966. ��- 71 COOPERATIVE LESSER CANADA GOOSE FLOCK INVESTIGATION Jack R. Grieb INTRODUCTION This cooperative investigation has entered its final stages. The collection' and analysis of current information will conclude the research portion of the study and a formal report will be prepared. It was hoped that the final report could have been completed and submitted instead of this report; however, the analysis of band recovery data took far longer than anticipated, and correspondence with persons familiar with the far north breeding areas in order to better interpret the band recovery distribution data consumed a great deal of time. Every effort will be made to consolidate all available data into rough draft form by January 1, 1967 and completion of the final report during the current segment. The following report will list only information gathered during the current segment period April 1, 1965 through March 31, 1966. No interpretation will be made of these data and only general observation will be included as to population status. Objectives: Procedures: (1) Determine the size of the Canada goose flock wintering in western Nebraska, southeast Colorado, northeast New Mexico, and the panhandle of Texas. (2) Determine age and sex composition (3) Determine wintering harvest and migration areas for geese from each area of the general flock winter range. (1) Conduct periodic, areas. (2) Trap and band geese on the wintering (3) Analyze band recoveries cooperative of this wintering flock. aerial surveys over the wintering grounds. and compare between banding stations. Results: Migration and Wintering Counts.--The main goose migration onto the wintering grounds occurred from November 13-15. This appeared to be triggered by a substantial cold front moving down from Canada which produced snow and freezing weather in Canada and the northern United States. Results of the two annual inventories are listed in Table 1. These estimate a December 1 population of about 101,000 geese with most birds located in Colorado. The reason for the pile-up of birds in Colorado was that the area around Two Buttes Reservoir near Springfield was closed until November 27 to attract more geese. Obviously, this is exactly what happened; however, this concentration did not last long after the season began. Another reason for larger than normal number �- 72 of birds in the Arkansas Valley was the abundance of water areas because of above normal rains. Geese were observed on many rain basins south and east of John Martin Reservoir where these basins never before existed. The January inventory turned out to be a complete flop. Although the weather was not bad the day of the count, birds could not be located and the resulting inventory was obviously wrong. In early February at the Wing Bee held in Fort Collins, cooperating personnel got together and decided to make another inventory in an effort to obtain an adequate count of this population. Fortunately, spring migration had not begun, thus, it is believed that the count listed in Table 1 offers a good estimate of the size of this population after the hunting season. Table l.--Inventories Area Short Grass Prairie December Texas Waggoner Ranch Buffalo Lake Area Muleshoe Area New Mexico Nebraska Colorado Totals 1/ Jj 1 Population, 1965-66. Number of Birds Counted February 18,800 / 7,000.1 500 24,300 35,250 400 5,475 8,981 60,000 100,756 4,700 6,700 39,135 110,485 Robert Brown estimated 3,500 on Buffalo Lake. Special February count substituted for regular January Inventory since the January count missed large numbers of birds because of weather and distributions. Age Composition Information.--Since no banding was done at Two Buttes this year the only·iriformation available·to estimate age composition of the population was that obtained from birds bagged on the area and checked through the check stations. Checkers pulled tails which were read by William Rutherford after the hunting season. Results indicated that there were 570 adults and 340 juveniles aged which permits an estimate that young birds made up about 37 per cent of the population during the 1965-66 season. Group Count Data.--A total of 717 birds were counted for an average group size of 4.1 birds. in 174 groups Analysis of Band Recovery Data.--Distribution of recoveries by banding area are plotted in Table 2. No further comment will be made about this table at the present time. �Table 2.--Distribution of Recoveries by Banding Area and Recovery Area, All Recovery Years. Per Cent Recoveries Alberta Saskatchewan Nebraska New Mexico Buffalo Lake Waggoner Colorado Recovery Area (Texas) (Texas) Far North Canada Mackenzie Franklin Keewatin Yukon Alberta-Above 530 Lat. Saskatchewan-Above 530 Lat. British ColumbiaAbove 530 Lat. Manitoba-Above 530 Lat. Alberta-Below 530 Lat. British ColumbiaBelow 530 Lat. Saskatchewan-Below 530 Lat. Ontario-Below 530 Lat. Manitoba-Below 530 Lat. TOTAL CANADA Colorado Kansas Montana Nebraska New Mexico North Dakota Oklahoma South Dakota Texas Buffalo Lake Area Waggoner Area Gulf Coast Wyoming TOTAL CENT. FLY 2.2 0.6 - - 1.8 2.9 0.6 4.3 0.3 T 4.9 1.0 4.4 6.7 3.3 0.6 0.7 2.3 0.5 1.2 - 0.6 27.8 7.1 T T 1.3 "'"' r ~7.0 18.9 32.2 23.8 - - - 0,6 14.6 34.9 17.1 13.5 - 0.3 -- ~ T 52.6 29.4 0.4 0.5 5.6 0.8 0.1 0.5 0.7 4.4 2.0 0.4 0.5 45.3 63.3 6.9 2.6 0.7 3.7 0.6 21.8 1.0 1.0 6.3 2.9 1.3 0.3 0.5 1.3 13.4 3.3 10.2 8.5 4.2 8.0 tAl 7.8 53.3 38.9 34.5 1.1 1.1 5.6 1.1 62.2 8.8 0.6 1.2 4.1 1.1 1.8 1.0 ~ 36.4 48.8 16.5 -.J 42.3 5.6 4.4 2.4 17.7 1.8 54.5 36.6 .2.:2 44.6 �Table 2.--~Continued~ Recovery Area Colorado Waggoner (Texas) Buffalo Lake (Texas) New Mexico Per Cent Recoveries Nebraska Alberta Saskatchewan --.J ~ Atlantic Fly Missippi Fly Pac Lf Lc Fly Mexico TOTAL RECOVERIES T 2.1' T 2055 0.3 308 2.5 6.6 6.6 1.2 205 166 90 170 �- 75 Mortality Rates.--Calculation of annual mortality rates by the composite dynamic method indicate that average annual mortality is about 28 per cent for birds one year and older in this population. In addition, first year recovery rates vary from a low of 4.6 to a high of 11.8 in Colorado depending upon the year. These data will be documented and discussed in the final report, but obviously they indicate that the population is not sustaining excessive mortality which agrees with population increases recorded over the years. Flock Status and Management Recommendations.--In general, it can be concluded that the status of this population is excellent with increases noted year after year in total population size. Correspondence with Alex Dzubin indicates that perhaps the short grass prairie birds did not sustain as good a production year as normal the spring and summer of 1965. Fortunately, it appears that harvest was down somewhat not only in Canada but also in U.S. areas. Undoubtedly, this permitted the continued increase in the size of the population remaining after the hunting season. Complete management recommendations will be given in the final report of this investigation, but in the interum it is important that we maintain continuity in the collection of management data. Thus, it is recommended that the two annual winter inventories be continued with the first one occurring as early in December as possible and the second as part of the January Inventory. Further that these inventories be coordinated by the Bureau of Sport Fisheries and Wildlife, specifically Mr. Kenard P. Baer, assistant supervisor, Management and Enforcement, Bureau of Sport Fisheries and Wildlife, Albuquerque. That Ken Baer establish the dates for these inventories and notify all cooperating states, and assemble all information resulting therefrom with reports summarizing this activity sent to the cooperating agencies and other interested persons. Finally that this responsibility begin during the fall of 1966. Prepared Date by: Jack R. Grieb Wildlife Research Leader October, 1966 Approved by: Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator ��October, 1966 - 77 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO ------~~~~~-------- Project No. w-88-R-II Work Plan No. 3 Migratory Bird Investigations Job No. I Title of Job: Review of Duck Literature Relating to Population Dynamics, and Banding Analysis ~Cechnigues and Findings Period Covered: Personnel: April 1, 1965 through December 31, 1966 Howard D. Funk ABSTRACT This report covers a variety of information relating to methods of studying population dynamics of waterfowl through use of various band recovery analysis methods. An attempt was made to fini and illustrate, by examples, those methods utilized most frequently and Judged to supply the most valid data for use in the optiIllUlh management of our waterfowl resource. �- 78 - Objectives: To review literature techniques and findings. relating to population dynamics analysis Procedures: A search of the literature was made to find the most recent methods of analyzing band recoveries to obtain most valid estimates on waterfowl population dynamics for use in managing our resource in the most efficient and optimum manner. Introduction One of the most important tools we have for determining characteristics of migratory birds such as waterfowl is banding. This coupled with various types of counts like the wintering ground counts, staging area counts, breeding pair surveys and production surveys can produce good indications of how a certain group or species is doing from year to year. However, determining characteristics of a group is very complicated due to the variety of interrelated items affecting the group. There are several general principles which should be kept in mind when planning banding programs. One is that to manage waterfowl intensely, our banding must be of sufficient size and distributed in all important areas. Then once the important factors for each smaller area are known, follow-up banding is often necessary in various vital areas so we can keep tab on the condition of each population through years to come. As banded birds are only a sample of each population, the distribution of banding is important as the recoveries must reflect the characteristics of the populations they represent. Band ing of birds can be utilized to reveal three main characteristics of a population and there are many ramifications of each. The three are: (1) distribution of hunting kill, (2) rate of kill, and (3) annual mortality. Again, all are interrelated and dependent on each other but will be discussed separately under each heading. Measuring Distribution of Harvest Distribution of harvest of a group of banded birds is the best indication of migration patterns we have. However, it may not be as complete a picture as we would like due to differences in hunting pressure from area to area. For instance, a group of birds may migrate through some areas with few hunters, and the same group may also pass through areas of high numbers of hunters. We may get many recoveries of banded birds from the heavy hunting pressure areas and few from the low hunting pressure areas but this does not mean most of the birds utilize the former area. We have some areas of human populations which are growing steadily and this will affect the distribution of harvest through the years. Other areas may stay relatively unchanged. Thus, distribution of harvest is what we must look at in setting and studying effects of hunting regulations. If a portion of a population is not harvested as greatly as another, it will show up in overall mortality estimate of the population. If there are two populations of birds being harvested to different degrees, then there is a basis �- 79 - for managing them separately. Geis (l964a) stated that it is essential we know the distribution of ,hunting kill relating to various summer: and winter populations. If, for example, we know what proportion of a group of birds from an Alberta breeding ground goes to a certain flyway or harvest area, we can utilize breeding ground and production surveys in the north for estimating fall flight by area and for setting seasons. Predictions can be made for each hunting season based on the normal pattern of distribution of birds to the south. This is not without difficulties as the weather has influence on when and where birds migrate. Low (1957) reported on banding ducks on 'Canadian breeding areas and showed differences between years of recoveries from these bandings. He pOinted out the need for banding in all stratums in the north for a number of years and then figuring an average dispersal pattern. The recoveries can be plotted by degree block and certainly must be weighted according to number of birds present in harvest areas and also weighted according to hunting pressure by area to come up with valid distribution estimates. Breeding ground banding is an important item which probably should be increased because there are contrasting opinions about migration routes used by the various ages and sexes of migratory birds, especially ducks. We must settle this issue and determine how young of the year migrate; whether they merely randomly associate themselves with migrating adults from various wintering areas, or if they migrate separately from adults in some sort of fashion. This can only be done by a combination of further banding and survey work. Distribution of harvest from bandings in wintering populations is becoming more important. It is generally thought that once a duck winters in a certain area, the chances of it returning there the next year are great. For some reason, certain ducks winter in certain locations while others may pass through but winter in other areas. Severe weather may force some northern wintering birds farther south but studies indicate these populations to have distinct terminal wintering grounds. Thus, these various wintering populations are distinct at least during winter. They may utilize similar flyway areas or even use the same surrnnernesting areas as other groups but separate again the following winter bringing some young birds .a Lon g with them, not necessarily their own. These wintering area populations should be the basis for management on a flock basis. This is already being practiced in the Columbia River Basin in the Pacific Northwest where bag limits and seasons are more liberal than in other areas. The San Luis Valley season in Colorado is a prime example of special regulations on a distinct summer population of birds. Derivation of hunting kill in various harvest areas is vital to the management of waterfowl. It can give us justification for more liberal seasons or restrictive seasons in others. This can even be done by periods of the year as, for example after a certain time of year, the majority of harvest may be made up of birds actually wintering in the area. Geis (l964a) wrote that the definition of areas that derive their kill from populations differing from those supplying harvest to other harvest areas serves as an important basis for progressive management. It served as justification for our present flyway system. It can also be utilized to form smaller management areas to provide �-80 - more recreation or protection, as needed, than can be obtained by uniform regulations throughout an entire flyway as is the case at the present time. He also said that in order to estimate derivation of kill in a certain area, it is necessary to weight bandings with population data. Thus, banding during a period when population surveys are possible, such as during winter, is an important factor. Geis and Taber (1963) discussed methods of weighting band recoveries and said that when certain conditions are met, recoveries of banded birds can be utilized to determine the relative size of hunting kill in various harvest areas. Weighting also permits estimates on size of kill, if actual kill is known for at least one of the areas of harvest involved. Thus, if several breeding or wintering areas contribute to harvest in one or more areas, we can get estimates on what proportion comes from each. The conditions needing to be met are as follows: (1) all "populations" contributing to the kill in the harvest areas under consideration must be represented by an adequate sample of banded birds, and (2) population data must be available to reflect the relative size of each "population" contributing to the kill. Examples from Geisand Taber (1963) follow. The first concerns three populations (A, B, and C) being harvested in ,three areas (X, Y, and Z). A population index value was used instead of actual population numbers. Table l.--Distribution Population A B C of harvest Population Index Value 100 50 10 of three populations No. Banded 1,000 2,000 4,000 in three harvest No. Banded Recovered by Area X Y Z 60 40 100 30 50 100 10 10 600 areas. Total Recoveries 100 100 800 Here we see no relationship between size of kill in each harvest area and actual number of recoveries in each area. The greatest number of total recoveries comes from area Z due to the large number coming from population C. However, population C is only a tenth as large as population A, suggesting each population C recovery represents relatively fewer birds. Thus, the recoveries must be weighted. The most direct way to calculate the weight of each recovery is to divide the population index for an area by the number banded in each area. Thus: Population Population Population 100 1000 50 B = 2000 10 C = 4000 A .1000 = .0250 .0025 �Table 2.--Ki11 indexes for each of three populations in three harvest areas and percent of total kill in each area. Harves t Areas Area X Area Y Area Z Total Weighting No. Kill No. Weighting Kill No. Weighting Kill Kill Population Recoveries Factor Index Recoveries Factor Index Recoveries Factor Index Indexes A B C 60 40 100 Totals Percent of Total Kill .1000 .025 .0025 6.00 1.00 0.25 7.25 50% 30 50 100 .1000 .025 .0025 3.00 1.25 0.25 4.50 31% 10 10 600 .1000 .025 .0025 1.00 0.25 1.50 2.75 19% 10.00 2.50 2.00 14.50 co I-' �- 82 - Then the weighting factors for all populations can be taken times the recoveries in each recovery area for a kill index as in Table 2. Thus, 50 percent of the total kill is in area X and population A contributes most to the harvest in most areas. Witt (1965) used a similar method in determining wintering area derivation of ducks as a basis for splitting Montana between the Pacific and Central Flyways. The above method of weighting requires that either only first year recoveries be used or only those from birds banded a long enough period of time so that all possible recoveries have been reported. If these requirements are not met, those birds banded recently and utilized in the calculations will not receive their proper weight. However, it is often necessary to combine many years of data for best information on relationships between populations and harvest areas. In order to uti.lize all recoveries, a more involved procedure of weighting can be used to eliminate the above mentioned difficulties. This method is shown below from Geis and Taber (1963). Table 3.--Preferred l. method of weighting 2. 3. Population Population Index Value No. Banded A B C 100 50 10 1,000 2,000 4,000 recoveries. 4. Recoveries Per No. Population Recovered Unit (1 T 3) 100 100 800 1.0000 0.5000 0.0125 5. 6. Recovery Rate (3 :- 2) Weighting Factor (4 x 5) 0.10 0.05 0.20 0.1000 0.0250 0.0025 By using this method, you get an indication of how many birds each recovery represents plus the recovery rate for each population in each unit of recovery. The product of the two figures is the weighting factor. Actual numbers of birds censused can be used in the first column instead of population index values. If this is done, the weighting factor would be in terms of kill per recovery. An example from Geis and Martinson (1966) of getting kill per recovery weighting factors can be represented in Table 4 by using actual population counts. These weighting factors are not corrected for reporting bias or crippling loss, however. Table 4. --Wei factors to obtain relative kill er recover data. Total Population Recoveries Per Recovery Weighting Factor Everywhere Recovery Rate (Kill per Recovery) Area Winter Population N. E. Colorado 272,000 4,514 60 .038 2.3 90,000 1,325 68 .030 2.0 s. E. Colorado �- 83 - The weighting factors suggest that, with differences in wintering population sizes, differences in numbers of birds banded, and differences in recovery rates for each group, each recovery from northeast' Colorado represents 2.3 bagged birds from the population as compared to only 2.0 for each southeast Colorado recovery. The winter population figure would have to be an average figure since the beginning of banding. To get wintering area derivation of harvest for anyone area of harvest, we must compute the weighting factors for all areas contributing to the harvest in the one area as below (Geis and Martinson 1966). Say we want to determine percent of birds harvested in northeast Colorado from all contributing areas. Weighting factors for all states must be listed and also the number of recoveries from each group recovered in northeast Colorado. The Harvest Index is the product of the two. The total of all Harvest Indexes divided into the Harvest Index for each area of contribution gives the percent of harvest each area contributes to northeast Colorado harvest as in Table 5. Table 5.--Wintering area derivation of harvest for northeast Colorado. Recoveries Percent Wintering Weighting in Harvest of Area Factor Colorado Index Harvest W. Montana C. Montana E. Montana N. Wyoming S. Wyoming N. E. Colorado S. E. Colorado 2.6 1.8 0.6 1.6 2.8 2.3 2.0 etc. 2 6 10 22 34 1,690 278 etc. Total Harvest Index = 5.2 10.8 6.0 35.2 95.2 3,887.0 556.0 etc. T 0.1 0.1 0.4 1.0 40.6 5.8 etc. 9,581.3 100.0% Thus, the harvest index for northeast Colorado (3,887.0) divided by the total of all harvest indexes (9,581.3) gives a figure of 40.6 percent. This means 40.6 percent of all harvested birds in northeastern Colorado came from birds wintering in northeast Colorado. Wintering birds in southeast Colorado contributed 5.8 percent of northeast Colorado harvest, and so forth. If this involved procedure is accomplished for all areas of recovery, harvest distribution can be displayed for all groups of wintering birds. By use of a similar method as described by Geis and Martinson (1966), distribution of summer bandings into an area of recovery can be compared. The example in Table 6 shows the method by which contributions from two summer populations of birds for one recovery area can be compared. Therefore, we estimate that numbers of birds ending up in Colorado from Alberta and Saskatchewan are about equal even though Saskatchewan has more birds present in the summer population. The reasoning for this estimate is that apparently Saskatchewan birds utilize another flyway more, or at least do not come to �- 84 - Colorado in the same proportion to total summering birds present as Alberta birds. Table 6.--Contribution of two summer populations to one recovery area. Contiibuting Areas Alberta Saskatchewan Summer Population Size Total Recoveries Everywhere Population Per Recovery Recovery Rate Weighting Factor (Pop./Recov. X Rec. Rate) No. Recovered in Colorado Harvest Index (Weighting Factor X Recoveries in Colorado) Percent Contributed to Colorado Harvest by each summer population 1,736,000 2,101 826 .08 66 3,067,000 5,814 527 .06 32 63 4,158 137 4,384 49% 51% A method by which the contribution of one banding area to several units of recovery can be estimated was described by Grieb et. al. (1966). First year recovery rates were utilized in the procedure but all year recoveries could be used in the same way. The method and results are shown below in Table 7. The number of banded male mallards, in this sample, was divided into the number reported from each area of recovery which amounts to a recovery rate for each recovery unit. These recovery rates were taken times the estimated wintering population in the unit of banding which gave a series of Harvest Indexes. Each of these were then divided by the total of all Harvest Indexes to get percentage distribution foi each area of recovery. Results of many areas of banding can be added together. The method adjusts for the differiqg sizes of wintering populations, differing numbers of birds banded, and differing recovery rates from various areas. Sex ratio ground counts could also be used for wintering population data from each banding unit to calculate the distribution between sexes by unit as closely as possible. For example, if 60 percent of the population was male mallards inane banding unit but only 50 percent in another, we could get more accurate distribution estimates by using only male wintering population data for male recoveries rather than using total population estimates for all calculations. Sometimes it is necessary to determine sizes of a population contributing to the kill in a certain area before the distribution of kill can be patterned. Geis and Martinson (1966) gave an example of this in which two populations, A and B, contributed to the kill in two recovery areas, X and Y. Both A and B were represented by bandings. Six percent of the banded birds from A were harvested in X and 3 percent in Y. Two percent of the banded birds from B �- 85 - Table 7.--Contribution of one area of banding RECOVERY Number 1 No. Recoveries Number = 15 1st Year Recovery Rate = .01000 UNITS 2 No. Recoveries to several areas of recovery. Number = 10 3 Number 4 = 8 No. Recoveries 1st Year Recovery Rate = .00533 1st Year Recovery Rate = .00667 No. Recoveries = 5 1st Year Recovery Rate = .00333 WINTER BANDING UNIT "A" also RECOVERY UNIT NUMBER 5 Average January No. Male Mallards No. Recoveries 1 2 3 4 5 Number Recoveries 15 10 8 5 35 . fo f- ~ •• ;. Banded = 1,500 = 1st Year Recovery Recovery Unit = 20,000 Inventory 35 Rate .02333 Number Banded Average 1st Year Recovery X Winter Rate Population Individual •• Harvest index 1,500 1,500 1,500 1,500 1,500 .01000 X 20,000 .00667 X 20,000 .00533 X 20,000 .00333 X 20,000 = .02333 X 20,000 Total Harvest Index = 200 133 107 67 467 974 •• •• f- to ;. Total Harvest Indexes Harvest Distribution Percent 974 974 974 974 974 20.5 13.7 11.0 6.9 47.9 = were killed in X and 6 percent in Y. In this case, all banded birds taken in X and Y had to come from either A or B. Total birds harvested in X and Y were known from some type of a survey. Thus, by solving simultaneous equations, using total kill from X and Y and the kill rates in both recovery areas from both A and B, total populations needed in A and B to have produced the rates found can be estimated. Then, the recovery rates can be taken times the total populations to get the distribution of harvest in each recovery area from each population as shown in Table 8. �- 86 - Table 8.--Simultaneous distribution Production Area equations utilized to determine of harvest from two populations Population Size A (75,000)11 B (100,000)!! l!These ~/These figures figures Simultaneous Kill (Band Recovery) Rate in Harvest Area population sizes and in two recovery areas. Distribution of Kill by Harvest Area X y X Y .06 .02 .03 .06 (4,500)2/ (2,000)- (2,250)2/ (6,000)- 6,500 8,250 27 2/ found by solving simultaneous equations as shown below. found by taking recovery rates times population size. equations are solved as follows: (2) .06A + .02B .03A + .06B (1) x 1 (2) x 2 .06A + .02B 6,500 .06A + .12B =16,500 (1) - .10B B 6,500 8,250 -10,000 100,000 .06A = (.02) (100,000) 6,500 .06A + 2,000 6,500 .06A 4,500 A = 75,000 Geis (1964a) stated that use of weighted band recoveries not only furnishes information on distribution of hunting kill when all significant populations are represented by banded birds, information valuable in itself, but also with estimates on accuracy of population surveys. The (1) Mail Questionnaire Survey plus weighted band recovery data from (2) summer bandings and (3) winter bandings provide three independent estimates on the size of kill. When two of them agree and one does not, it gives us reason to look critically at the one that does not agree. If the size of harvest is not known for an area but we do have harvest survey data estimated to be valid for other areas, we can estimate harvest for the unknown area. Geis and Martinson (1966) utilized this method for estimating harvest in Canada where we have no report card or wing surveys to estimate harvest distribution or size. We have to assume band reporting rates from Canada and the United States are similar for this example in Table 9. �- 87 Table 9.--Estimating harvest between the United fi ures. size in Canada and, thus, harvest distribution States and Canada from United States harvest Percent of Total Band Recoveries Taken in Canada Adult Immature Harvest Year 1962 1963 1964 28 25 23 52 40 34 United Adult States Harvest Immature 593,900 985,700 1,404,900 755,800 1,378,100 1,563,500 In the above table, we have percentages of adult and immature duck recoveries taken in Canada for several years based on weighted band recoveries of preseason bandings. We also have the percentages taken in the United States (although not listed) as the percent remaining after subtracting each of the above from 100 is the percent recovered in the United States. For example, in 1962, 28 percent of the recoveries from adults came from Canada so 100 -28 72 percent came from the United States. We also have the number of adults harvested in the United States in 1962. Thus, we have three of four items needed to find the adult harvest in Canada in 1962 by simple proportion as shown below. This must be done for each year for each age group. 28 • x 72 593,900 = 72 X = 16,629,200 X Measuring 231,000 Adults killed in Canada in 1962. Rate of Kill Measuring rate of kill of any population is complex facets for which Geis (1964a) gives explanations. (1) Band recovery rate - che proportion reported recovered to the Migratory Example (2) and is composed of the birds banded that are Bird Banding Office. - If 1,000 birds are banded and 100 are reported; this is a 10 percent recovery rate. Reporting rate - the proportion of bands taken by hunters are actually reported to the Banding Office. Example of several that - If only half of the banded birds taken by hunters are reported, the reporting rate is 50 percent. �- 88 - (3) Harvest rate - the proportion of the population that is harvested. This is the recovery rate divided by the reporting rate. Example (4) Kill rate - This is the harvest rate with the addition of crippling loss. This is an estimate of the total rate of hunting kill or the proportion of the population dying as a result of hu~ting mortality. Example (5) - From (1) and (2), we divide 50 percent into 10 percent and get a harvest rate of 20 percent. - If crippling loss is 40 percent of the harvest rate in the above (3), then the kill rate would be .20 X .40 = .08 + .20 = .28 or 28 percent. Mortality rate - the proportion of the population entering a hunting season that die from all causes before the next hunting season starts. Example - If 1,000 birds enter a hunting season and 600 die as a result of hunting mortality, disease, accidents, etc., before the next season starts, the annual mortality is 60 percent. Number 5 will be covered more in the next section but is placed here to keep all rate definitions together. The first three items present a problem in attempting to determine actual harvest as closely as possible. Band recovery rates, reporting rates and harvest rates are all related and validity of each years results on kill rate estimates depend on trying to determine how many hunters actually report their bands each year and also crippling loss variations. One reason for lower reporting rates of banded birds may be due to too many banded birds in one area. If a hunter gets report after report saying each bird he killed was banded in a certain locality, he will come to think that all birds in his hunting area come from this certain banding area and he may simply quit reporting his bands. This not only affects estimates of distribution of the harvest but also estimates of rate of kill and annual mortality. However, if other populations of birds contributing to the harvest in a certain hunting area are represented by banded birds, the chances are hunters will keep reporting the bands to see where they have been banded. Banding has to be accomplished to a degree sufficient to obtain data needed, but not to the extent that hunters loose interest and quit sending in bands. Often, bands are recovered by people living in remote areas without ready access to the mail and for some reason the hunter may never take the trouble to report the band when he has the chance. Some hunters believe that if they do not report the band, the government employees will think many birds are still alive and the seasons may be lengthened or limits raised. Some hunters become soured at low bag limits and short seasons and stubbornly refuse to send bands to the Banding Office. Of course, many banded birds die from crippling or natural causes and are never reported. �- 89 - Martinson (1966) reported a significant change in reporting rates for ducks since the 1950's. During that period, it was estimated that about half of the bands from bagged ducks were reported by hunters while reporting rates for the 1962-63 and 1963-q4 seasons were estimated to be only about a third of tha total banded birds actually bagged. These rates were for all duck species combined and it was found that band reporting rates were high for canvasbacks, redheads and pintails but low for teals. Martinson stated that band reporting decreases were concurrent with significant changes in duck regulations, the volume of duck banding, and the method used in relaying information to the person obtaining the band. Martinson and McCann (1966) found that hand reporting rates for geese and brant also were estimated to be lower from about 1962 through 1965 (36 percent) than during earlier years (about 60 percent). Band recovery rates serve as a basis for estimating population levels before the hunting season began (Geis 1964a). This is where kill rates come into the picture. If the rate of kill (all deaths due to hunting) is 10 percent of a population and you know how many birds were harvested, it is a simple matter to obtain an estimate of the pre-season population needed to obtain this harvest. Say the kill was 10,000 birds as estimated by hunter questionnaires and the kill rate was 10 percent. The 10 percent kill rate divided into the 100 percent total population gives a figure of 10. This 10 taken times the 10,000 bird kill gives a pre-season population estimate of 100,000 birds necessary to have been present. Kill surveys and wing collection surveys are necessary to get estimates on the kill. This brings into light, the necessity of having surveys which can produce information on ages, sexes and even species in the harvest as all of these have an effect on estimating pre-season population sizes, harvest distribution, annual mortality or anything else connected. Population estimates as calculated above can be used to check the accuracy of aerial population surveys or, as in the case of wood ducks, recovery rates provide the only method of estimating population sizes. Population size estimates from recovery rates must be made separately for age classes because of differences in vulnerability to the gun between young and older birds. Geis (1964a) stated that in order to interpret results of duck wing surveys correctly, it is essential to know the extent to which immatures are more likely to be shot than adults. Young mallards for example, may show a direct recovery' rate twice that of adults and it is necessary to estimate how much more vulnerable young are to shooting than adults (Table 10) (Geis and Martinson 1966). Thus, in order to understand the implications of mortality rate estimates, it is essential to determine the rate of annual increase from the measurement of age composition in the kill from wing collections adjusted for the greater vulnerability of immatures to shooting. The difference in vulnerability between age groups can be found by comparison of direct recovery rates. If, for example, we banded adult and immature birds pre-season and had a direct recovery rate of 15 percent from the young and only 10 percent for the adults, we can say the young were 1.5 times as likely to be shot as adults. We can ·do this as the rates are percentages. Therefore, if the age ratio in the kill was 1.5 immatures 'per adult, we can say the pre-season ratio had to be only 1 immature per adult. Another example would be if 14 �- 90 - percent direct recovery 'rate on immatures and only a 7 percent rate on adults, the immatures were twice as vulnerable to the gun. Then, if the kill ratio was 3 immatures/adult, actual pre-season population ratios would have had to have been 1.5 immatures/ adult. For best results, bandings should be distributed throughout the population to be harvested. The trend now is to band flying birds pre-season since banding local young may bias recovery data through extensive natural mortality before the hunting season. Table 10.--Estimating pre-season populations present from pre-season bandings. of adult and 'immature mallards Source of Data Information Mail Questionnaire Survey Wing Collection Survey Mail Questionnaire and Wing Survey Total retrieved kill Age ratio in kill (imm/adult) 9,492 0.8 Hunting kill by age groups: Adults Immatures 5,273 4,219 Hunting kill rate: Adult Immature 0.1648 0.1708 Pre-season population estimate: Adults Immatures Total 31,996 24,701 56,697 Banding and Mail Questionnaire Surveys Hunting kill divided by hunting kill rate Estimate There are many reasons why young are more vulnerable to shooting. Young birds do not seem to be as wary of hunters, decoys, and blinds and often can be decoyed to places adults will not go near. In the case of geese, if the adult is shot, the young may circle the area waiting for the adult, and therefore may also get shot. Young of some species band together and, with no former experience with hunting seasons, may be very vulnerable to shooting. It is generally accepted that vulnerability of young to shooting decreases as the birds travel south and are exposed to more and more shooting pressure. Sex differences in shooting pressure must also be accounted for in the evaluation of a season. Geis (1964a) wrote that band recovery rates provide a measure of the extent to which one sex of ducks is more likely to be shot than another. The mallard is a good example as many hunters, through personal choice or merely that fact that the more colorful drakes show up so well, shoot many more drakes than hens. Females of duck species suffer high mortality on nesting grounds from predators, etc. and become proportionally �- 91 - However, there is much publicity fewer in the population from natural causes. to hunters in "spare the hen" programs which also affects choice of hunters in their hunting selection. Determining hunting selection of drakes or hens can probably best be estimated by pre-season bandings, similar to that used in estimates of age vulnerability. Comparison of direct recovery rates by sex should indicate differences in hunter selectivity. However in these estimates, we should make allowances for the fact that males are more abundant in the population after the first year, especially. Some species of ducks, such as black ducks, do not exhibit great differences in coloration between males and fetaa1es, especially to the hunter shooting them~ These species are valuable in making estimates on hunter preferences when compared to statistics on mallards, for instance. Also, mortality rates on black ducks can be estimated closely, because there is little hunter preference in shooting and sex ratios in the population are due almost solely to natural mortality such as nesting mortality. Determining rate of kill for various areas of harvest is important not only for obtaining distribution of kill but for best estimates on population sizes needed to obtain the kill. As in Table 8, we used the simultaneous equation method for estimating kill distribution in areas X and Y. However, before we could do this, the popu1a.tion sizes of A and B had to be obtained. We will always be faced with having areas of high hunting pressure and areas of low pressure and we must be able to determine the amount of impact each harvest area has on a population. If a population of birds is defined~which inhabits areas of low hunting pressure, we can find out it is not being harvested at an optimum level by comparison of recovery rates in all areas it occupies. This is also true of birds inhabiting areas of high hunting pressure and we can determine if the recovery rates on it are too great and offer protection for the population by manipulation of bag limits and hunting seasons. Much has been written about weighting recoveries in the section on distribution which also applies here for rate of kill. However, Geis and Martinson (1966) offer another method of weighting harvest rates on a population. The example in Table 11 concerns Canada geese in the Short Grass Prairie Canada Goose wintering population. He r e we can estimate the weighted harvest rate in Colorado from birds winter~lg in various portions of the popoulation wintering grounds. Each wintering area in Table 11 contributes to the harvest in Colorado and each has differing first year recovery rates on the various size populations as determined by bandings on each group. The harvest rate of .0808 in Colorado on Colorado banded birds, but still a portion of the whole population, is much higher than the harvest rate in Colorado on other banded segments of the population. Thus, by utilizing the different recovery rates and percentages of the population totals from each wintering area, the weighted estimate of average harvest rate in Colorado concerning the whole popu1ati.on is obtained and was estimated to have been .OL~40. �Table ll.--Obtaining a weighted average harvest rate in one area on a population of Canada geese wintering in several areas. Average Harvest Weighted Harvest Percent Percent Bands 1st Season Rate Rate Harvest X Wintering = Rate in Winter Recovered in by Recovery (Assumes 40% in Wintering Area Inventory Colorado Rate Reporting Rate) Colorado Area Colorado Colorado Buffalo Lake Waggoner Ranch New Mexico 40,000 30,000 40,000 4,000 35.0 16.0 10.8 16.0 .0924 .0800 .0649 .0833 .2310 .2000 .1623 .2083 .35 X .0808 X .0320 .26 .0175 X .35 X .0330 .04 Weight Average Harvest Rate in Colorado = = = = .0283 .0083 .0061 .0013 = .0440 \0 I\) �- 93 - Geis and Martinson (1966) exhibited a method of calculating continental mallard populations from recovery rates and harvest surveys as in Table 12. Here the kill in the United States was known from harvest surveys, the age ratio in the kill was obtained by wing surveys and recoveries from birds were known from bandings. The band recovery rate in the United States alone had to be computed and weighted because some bandings also came from Canada. This was done by proportion of adult and immature recoveries taken in Canada and the Unites States and correcting the United States rate. The reporting rate in 1962 was figured to be .346 percent. Then, the harvest rate in the United States alone was computed by dividing the reporting rate into the United States recovery rate giving a harvest rate for both adults and immatures. Then harvest rates were divided into the actual harvest estimated, by age groups, for pre-season population level estimates. This was shown for two different years in Table 12. By working backward, it was possible to come up with estimates of adult pre-season population figures to compare with breeding ground population figures from surveys. Both the 1962 and 1963 estimates of adults preseason came out close to the actual survey figures from Mayas shown at the bottom of Table 12. Band recovery rates play an important part not only by indicating differences which exist between populations of ducks of the same species, thus, providing for smaller management units, but also point out differences among species in harvest rates. It was the determination of low recovery rates in blue-winged teal which was responsible for early experimental seasons on this species. They migrate earlier than most others and are not present when the majority of regular seasons are conducted. High recovery rates from canvasback bandings indicated this species needed special regulations in many areas to keep the populations from being over harvested. By examining recovery rates that occur under various regulations, it is possible to determine the extent to which regulations affect rate of kill. Geis (1964a) gave the canvasback as an example. When the canvasback daily bag limit was reduced from 4 one year to 2 the next, band recovery rates from post-season bandings were reduced by half, indicating the population was being helped by a lower bag limit. Blue-winged teal recovery rates were shown to be lower in Minnesota when seasons opened in mid-October rather than early October, suggesting the birds had moved out of the harvest area by midOctober. The proportion of total deaths due to hunting alone can be estimated by recovery rates. This i.s done by expanding the reported recovery rate to include non-reported birds and crippling loss as Geis (1964a) indicated in Table 13. It can be seen that band recovery rates are the basic ingredients that allow the determination of hunting as a mortality factor. In the following example, the 35 percent is the harvest rate (reported plus non-reported band recoveries) while the 49 percent is the kill rate which includes harvest rate plus corrections for crippling loss. �Table 12.-- Indirect continental mallard population estimates from harvest surveys and band recovery rates. 1962 1963 All Ages Harvest in U. S. 1,349,700 1.26 Age ratio in the kill (Imm./Ad.) Harvest by age group Band recovery rate (Weighted rate in U. S. from pre-season banding in Canada and U. S.) Band reporting rate .346 Harvest rate in U. S. Pre-season population May population from breeding ground survey Adults Immatures All Ages Adults Immatures 2,363,800 1.36 597,242 752,458 .0313 .0288 \0 .j::"'" 1,001,778 1,362,022 .0386 .0457 .1212 8,448,320 .1437 9,478,201 .318 .0905 6,599,359 6,403,000 .0832 9,043,966 7,618,000 �- 95 - Table l3.--Estimating the proportion of total deaths due to shooting pressure on a population through use of recovery rates, reporting rates and estimates of crippling loss. Direct Recovery Rates from PreBand Reporting Crippling Species season Bandings Rate Loss Estimate Canvasback 22% x 100 22 63 63% 63x = 40% of bag 2200 x =. 35% of the birds were killed (reported and non-reported) 35% X 140% 49% of the birds were killed (reported, non-reported or died as a result of crippling) Geis (1964b) gave a method of determing band reporting survey data as in Table 14 which is self explanatory. Table l4.--0ne method data. Given: Black Black Black Wings duck duck duck from of determining band reporting bands reported to Handing Office kill wings banded black ducks Total bands taken by hunters Total kill Wings from banded ducks Total wings received Total bands taken by hunters 200,000 400 8,000 Total bands taken by hunters = 200,000 x 400 8,000 Proportion of bands taken that are reported Proportion of black duck bands taken that are reported rates by use of wing rates using wing survey 5,000 200,000 8,000 400 200,000 x .05 = 10,000 Total number of bands reported to Banding Office Total Gands taken by hunters (from wing surveyor mail questionnaire) = ,.2,000 10,000 .50 or 50 percent �- 96 - Determining relative recovery rates by areas between ages of birds is valuab.1e as shown in Table 15. Here we can determine information regarding rates of harvest from north to south between young and old birds which may help in estimating differential vulnerability or reasons why immature/adult ratios in wing surveys in more southern harvest areas may be lower than in northern areas. Table lS.--Relative recovery New York. Recovery rates by regions for black ducks banded in Area Adults Number Banded Northern 187 Immatures 1,150 Areas: (N. Y., N. H., Mich., Ont., and Que ,) Number of recoveries (percent of total recovery) 7 (41%) Recovery 3.74 rate in percent Relative recovery rate (Imm. rec. rate/ad. rec. rate) 104 (78%) 9.04 2.41 (9.04/3.74) Southern Areas: (N. J., pa., Del., Md., Number of recoveries 10 (59%) Ind., Ky., Va., Tenn., (percent of total recoveries) N. C., Ga., Miss., and Recovery rate in percent 5.35 Fla. ) Relative recovery rate (imm. rec. rate/ad. rec. rate) 29 (22%) 2.52 0.47 (2.52/5.35) Northern Southern recovery recovery A For every 100 adults shot in the South, the North. B For every 100 immatures shot in the North. rate rate A 0.70 B 3.59 (3.74/5.35) (9.04/2.52) there were 70 adults shot in shot in the South, there were 359 immatures �- 97 - Thus, in the North, immatures were probably more vulnerable to the gun than adults and were harvested heavily. By the time these birds reached more southern areas, the young either became smarter or were no longer present. to be harvested in the same proportion as in the north, due to heavy northern gunning pressure. Measuring Annual Mortality The third major use of banding data is to estimate annual rates of mortality on a population and, of course, the opposite which are survival rates. Causes of mortality are varied with hunting mortality usually at the top of the list. Hunting mortality includes both actual numbers of birds in the hunters bag plus crippling loss. Natural mortality also has to be determined and this includes anything from accidents to starvation to death from old age. Geis (1964a) stated that knowledge of annual rates of mortality coupled with information on rates of annual increase make possible estimations on popuffition trends. Mortality rates are also utilized in evaluating the importance of hunting as a mortality factor. If shooting mortality does not affect total mortality rates, there is no reason for adjusting yearly regulations to change the status of the populations. In most cases, there is a direct relationship between shooting mortality and total mortality. Thus, rates .at which populations survive or die are very essential to effective waterfowl management. Many methods have been used to estimate annual mortality in past years. Two used very often until recently were the Time-specific Method and the Dynamic Method, both which are described by Geis and Taber (1963) and Geis (1964b). The difference between the Time-specific and Dynamic methods is that the dynamic approach assumes that the number of recoveries that occur each year after banding reflects the total deaths that occurred during the year. In contrast, the time-specific approach assumes the number of recoveries during a year reflects the size of the population going into the year. The method used has to be chosen carefully. The Time-specific Method is shown first in Table 16. Table 16.--The time-specific method of estimating mortality 2r rates.!/ Hunting Season After Banding Band Recoveries Ca1cu1a d Deaths- Mortality Rate 1 2 3 4 5 50 20 10 5 2 87 30 10 5 3 2 50 .60 (first year) Total .57 (average annual) ! From Geis (1964b) 2/50 (-) 20 = 30, 20 (-) 10 10 etc. �- 98 - In Table 16 50 recoveries were reported the first year after banding, 20 the next, 10 the next and so forth. Calculated deaths were obtained by subtracting the numbers of recoveries between years as illustrated. Total calculated deaths is the sum of all subtractions. The mortality rates were obtained by division of calculated deaths by numbers of band recoveries. This method is often used for birds which have short life spans and high mortality rates. The Dynamic Method is illustrated in Table 17, also from Geis (1964b). By this method, total numbers of band recoveries obtained is the number calculated to be alive the first hunting season after banding and then each years recoveries are subtracted from this total to get number calculated alive at the start of each following hunting season. Thus, for this method, it is necessary to have the entire life span of the population being studied represented by recoveries. Table l7.--The dynamic method of estimating Hunting Season After Banding 1 2 3 4 5 Total 1/87 (-) 50 mortality rates. Band Recoveries (individuals dying during period) Calculated "alive at Y7art of period"- 50 20 10 5 2 87 37 17 7 2 87 150 Mortality Rate .57 37 63 .59 37, 37 (-) 20 = 17, etc. Mortality rates are figured by dividing the number of band recoveries for a season by the number calculated to be alive at the beginning of that hunting season. In the case of the first year mortality estimate, 50/87 = 57 percent mortality the first year after banding. When hunting kill varies from year to year or from age group to age group without a corresponding change in total mortality, the mortality estimates obtained by the two'methods above can be in error as most recoveries come from hunting mortality. This error can be reduced by combining data from several banding years into "composite" life tables. This method is being used more each year to compensate and get more valid estimates of mortality even though annual hunting pressure and reporting rates vary. The Composite Dynamic Method is most commonly used now (Geis 1964a). The method uses the number of recoveries that occur each hunting season following banding to reflect the total number of deaths that occur each hunting season following banding. It assumes that hunting mortality makes up the same fraction of total deaths each year regardless of the time interval since banding. �- 99 - Frequently there are more birds banded long enough to yield recoveries for a short time following banding than banded long enough to yield recoveries for a long time after banding. For example, we may have 1,000 birds banded long enough to produce recoveries for the first year after banding but may only have 300 banded long enough to be supplying recoveries five years since banding. Thus, the number of recoveries each year in the Composite Dynamic Method is expressed as "recoveries per thousand birds banded" and these recoveries then portray the survival characteristics of the population. It is also assumed that the recoveries reflect deaths during the entire life span of the species. Thus, the total number of recoveries equals the number of birds that enter the first year similar to the Dynamic Method. However, the method includes an adjustment for the number of birds available for recovery each year and, thus, permits the use of bandings for which all possible recoveries are not yet obtained. A simple illustration of the Composite Dynamic Method is presented in Table 18 from Geis (1964a) with minor alterations on the average annual mortality estimate. In Table 18, mortality rates were calculated by dividing the number alive going into a period into the recoveries for that period. For example, the first year mortality rate was 46 percent after dividing 19.2 by 41.5. Figures for the 5th year in "recoveries per 1,000 birds available" and "alive going into the period" lines had to be subtracted from the totals because more recoveries could be obtained in year 6. If, however, the total recoveries from year 4 would have been 0, then all calculated numbers would have been used in figuring average annual mortality. In the above example, first year mortality was figured to have been 46 percent while mortality in years 2-4 was 43 percent. The overall mortality, years 1 through 4, was estimated to have been 44 percent .. Often first year mortality is considerably higher than other estimated percentages. Thus, the last value or average annual mortality, although not relative to any specific year, is of great importance since this is the mortality rate that must be counter balanced by the production rate in order to maintain a stable population. In this case, since 44 percent of the population dies each year, 44 percent of the population each year must consist of young birds to keep the population stable. In order to do this, the pre-season population each year must have an immature-adult ratio of at least .79 immatures per adult or the population will decline in numbers. If pre-season or fall migratior. banding data includes birds of all ages and you want to construct a composite dynamic table for mortality estimates, you would have to compensate for probable higher mortality rates for first year recoveries for the immature birds. The composite dynamic table would be assembled in the regular way but you would have to disregard the estimated first year mortality rate and consider the estimated.average for years 2-n as most accurate. Composite dynamic tables can be constructed for populations even though several years of banding have been missed between active banding periods. This is not the most desirable but it is possible. �Table 18.--The comEosite dynamic method of estimating mortality rates. Recoveries by Hunting Seasons Survived Number of Year of 1 Banding Birds Banded 2 3 4 5 Totals 16 19 4 6 5 6 10 2 2 3 6 1 2 3 2 50 20 10 5 2 Banded birds availab1e!/ 2,600 2,200 1,700 1,500 500 Recoveries/l,OOO birds banded 19.2 4.0 41.5-4.0=37 .5 Calculated alive going into period 41.5 5.9 3.3 18.3 13.2 7.3 22.3 42.8 (years 2-l~) .43 (18.3/42.8) 4.0 88.3-4.0=84.3 1957 1958 1959 1960 1961 Total / banded Mortality rates 500 1,000 200 500 400 2,600 Total recovered (1st year) .46 (19.2/41.5) 9.1 (Ave. Ann ,) .44 (37.5/84.3) !/All banded birds were available to be recovered the first hunting season after banding; only those birds banded 1957-60 (2,200) were available for second season recoveries, etc. i-' 0 0 �- 101 - The Relative Recovery Rate Method is very useful in estimating mortality and survival rates for both long and short term periods. Estimates with data from several years banding data is best but short term estimates can be obtained. Geis and Martinson (1966) presented an example as shown in Table 19. This example contains data from quite a few years of bandings and, here again, all recoveries possible do not have to be obtained in order to utilize the method. Table 19.--Relative recovery rate method for estimating annual mortality survival: adult Canada geese banded at Two Buttes, Colorado. Winter Banded Number Banded 50-51 51-52 53-54 344 650 900 CU~/ 221 301 85 150 CU .3400 .3344 57-58 58-59 59-60 60-61 61-62 62-63 63-64 347 217 250 306 334 369 335 CU 48 56 60 56 43 16 59 26 30 31 25 18 CU .2212 .2240 .1961 .1677 .1165 .0478 Totals 4,052 Numbe~ 1/ Recover1esl-n 2-n Average survival rates Average mortality rates Recovery Rates2/ l-n 2-n .2471 .2308 .1700 .1200 .1200 .1013 .0748 .0488 1.6477 1. 1128 5/ .67,:) .325 Survival Rate Mortality Rate .727 .690 .273 .310 .768 .536 .612 .604 .642 / 1.02l~ .232 .464 .388 .396 .358 and 5.600 6/ .700.300 .300 .!./l-n= all recoveries from the segment banded in that year; 2-n = all recoveries from the segment banded that year except 1st year recoveries. l/Number of birds banded divided into the number recovered. 3/CU = Cannot Use ~/Surviva1 rate of over 100% not possible but still used in the total. Therefore, no mortality rate is shown for that year but indications are it was low. 5/Division of 1.1128 by 1.6477 (Tends to allow over weighting earlier years.) ~/Average of 8 years divided into 5.600 (Not a good estimate if you have some years of low banded samples. It can be seen in Table 19 that survival rates and mortality rates were figured on a yearly basis and then averaged for probably the best estimate on annual mortality if you do not have some years with low banded samples. The other estimate on survival and mortality is taken from the recovery rate totals. In this table, even though the survival rates were calculated �- 102 - yearly, there were many years of bandings involved in each estimate. As stated before, estimates on mortality can be made by this method with as little as two years data, although the estimates are not as good had you more years of recoveries from the same banded segments. This is shown below in Table 20, also from Geis and Martinson (1966). Table 20.--Relative recovery rate method for estimating mortality and survival from only two years data; adult Canada geese, Two Buttes, Colorado. Number of Recoveries Recovery Rate Winter Number Each Year After Banding Each Year After Banding Banded Banded 1 2 1 2 1951-52 1952-53 1/ CU 650 900 71 85 Survival rate Mortality rate .0569 .0944 37 CU!! .0944 .0569 60% = 100-60 = 40% Cannot Use The 60 percent survival in Table 20 means that 60 percent of the birds going into the first hunting season after banding in 1951-52 survived the first season of hunting. The reasoning behind this is that if all the 1951-52 banded birds had lived through the first hunting season, their second year recovery rate would have been the same as the first hunting season recovery rate for the 1952-53 banded birds. The rates were not the same so the division of .0569 by .0944 gives us an estimate of how many of the former birds survived the first hunting season to be present during the second season. Subtraction of this rate from 100 percent, of course, gives us the mortality rate estimate for the first hunting season. The same logic can be used in estimating the effect a closed season may have on waterfowl survival rates. This is done by comparing recovery rates from years spanning periods of open and closed seasons as in Table 21 as suggested by Geis (1964a). In Table 21, seasons were open both first and second seasons after banding in the years 1955-56 but the first season after banding was closed to hunting for the 1960 banded birds but open the next. Thus, the survival rate in the first group for the first year birds was only 44 percent while 86 percent of the 1960 banded birds survive.d until the second hunting season period suggesting 14 percent of the 1960 banded birds died as a result of natural causes. Thus, the closed season was responsible for a greater number surviving until the second hunting season period. Similar comparisons can be made between two different seasons, one with low bag limits and �- 103 - the other with high limits, with this same method. The method is useful for determining survival for species where population sizes are not known, as for doves. Table 2l.--Evaluating effect of closed seasons on waterfowl relative recovery rate method. Recovery Rate Each Year After Survival Banding Rate 2 1 Year Banded Period of oEen seasons 1955 1956 .034 .077 Period of one closed season closed 1960 .070 1961 .060 survival by the Mortality Rate .44 .56 .86 .14 In a manner similar to that described for the Composite Dynamic Method, we can throw out first year band recovery rates which may be biasing results due to differential vulnerability between ages of birds. For example, if we wanted to use the relative recovery rate method to determine mortality and survival of a population banded during fall migration, first year recovery rates would be biased if we included immature birds in the calculations. However, we can eliminate first year recovery rates by using recoveries from years 2-n instead of years l-n as in Table 19. Likewise, we would use recoveries from years 3-n instead of years 2-n as in the same table. The rest of the calculations would be made in the same way as before. Thus, the mortality estimates would be calculated for birds already through at least one hunting season. A possible reason for using the method in this way may be because you had small banded samples and not enough adults alone to get a valid estimate. Another may be that you banded birds while hunting season was in progress and first year recoveries would be deceiving and of little use. We can compare production rateH to mortality rates by a series of computations involving wing surveys, band recovery data and the use of the relative recovery rate method as shown in Table 22 as demonstrated by Geis and Martinson (1966). For this, we need a sound measure of production rates and the source in this case would be the age composition in the hunting kill adjusted for differential mortality between ages of birds. The example came from mallard bandings and the hunting season in the San Luis Valley of Colorado. When utilizing most methods of estimating mortality rates, best results are obtained by calculating separate rates for adults and immatures, and also for males and females. Young are more vulnerable to shooting than adults and males suffer different types of mortality, both hunting and natural, than females. �- 104· - Table 22.--Comparison of production rates to mortality rates. 1965 Hunting Season- Found a ratio of 2.8 innnatures/adult in the experimental season from wing surveys. - Banding data revealed recovery rates for: adults = .0426 innnatures = .0511 Relative recovery rate method: .0511 = 1.2 or that innnatures were 1.2 times as likely .0426 to be shot as adults during the season. Compare 1.2 to 2.8: (Kill) (wing survey innn./adult not corrected) 2.8 (wing survey imm./adult corrected) X X (Bandings) 1.2 (X times more vulnerable than adults) = 1.0 (0 times more vulnerable than adults) 2.3 or immatures should have been present in the kill data at a ratio of 2.3 imm./ adult if there was no differential vulnerability Translate innn./ adult rate to %: 2.3 + 1.0 = 3.3 2.3 = 70% or 70% of the pre-season population was composed of innnatures. 3.3 Conc Iusion: If the annual rate of increase was 70 percent, the population could have sustained a 70 percent harvest without decreasing the breeding population. Geis and Martinson (1966) illustrated a method of estimating the proportion of non-hunting mortality of a population which could be replaced by hunting mortality based on mortality rates and first year recovery rates. First year recovery rates had to be assembled for a series of states, in this case Central Flyway states, and kill rates calculated for these corrected for non-reporting of bands and crippling loss. A figure of 3.036 taken times the recovery rate for each harvest area corrects for an estimated band reporting rate of only 44 percent and one crippled bird that dies for every three recovered. Then average annual mortality rates for each population have to be determined by a method such as the Composite Dynamic method. Finally, the �... 105 - percent of deaths due to hunting can be computed by division of the kill rate by the average annual mortality rate. This is shown in Table 23'for males. Table 23.--Summary of band recovery, harvest, kill and mortality rate data .for male mallards wintering in the Central Flyway. Wintering Area A B C D 1st Year Recovery Rate Kill Rate (A X 3.036) Average Annual Mortality Rate Percent of Deaths Due to Hunting (B " C) W. Montana E. Montana N. Wyoming S. Wyoming E. So. Dakota E. Nebraska W. Colorado N. E. Colorado S. E. Colorado Oklahoma New Mexico .062 .041 .046 .077 .036 .086 .060 .044 .033 .078 .050 .188 .123 .138 .231 .108 .258 .180 .1.32 .099 .234 .150 .403 .362 .356 .380 .313 .404 .394 .328 .290 .425 .394 47 34 39 62 35 64 46 40 34 55 38 Then the recovery rates and average mortality rates for each area of recovery must be plotted as shown in Figure 1. This shows a definite direct relationship between recovery rates and annual mortality rates. The higher the recovery rate, the higher the mortality rate, showing mortality is affected by varying hunting season lengths and bag .limits. The regression line plotted through all points in Figure 1 intercepts the left side of the graph at about 25 suggesting a mortality rate of about 25 percent with no shooting pressure. This regression line also intercepts the figure of 43 percent mortality at the point .08 percent recovery rate. To obtain the non-hunting mortality estimate at this level of recovery rate, we must take 3.036 times .08 to get a hunting mortality estimate which is approximately 24. Then 43 percent (the total hunting mortality rate) minus 24 percent (the estimated hunting mortality rate) leaves 19 or a non-hunting mortality rate of only 19 percent instead of 25 percent. We can therefore plot a point where the 19 percent on the mortality side and the .08 percent on the recovery side intercept. This plotted point can be joined to the line intercept at 25 on the mortality rate side. Hence, the area of non-hunting mortality replaced by hunting mortality also increases with increase in recovery rates. The percent of non-hunting mortality replaced by hunting mortality at the .08 percent recovery rate in this case is about 6 percent or 25 minus 19 percent. �- 106 - .5 Males .40 " Hunting Mortality • EN NM. • SW (J) .u (1j ~ • NEC !>, .u .,-l .-I • ESD • SEC .30 (1j .u 1-1 0 Area of Non-hunting Mortality Replaced By Hunting Mortality ?! .-I (1j :;j ~ ;a .20 Non-hunting Mortality .10 .02 .04 .06 First Year Recovery Figure 1. .08 .10 Rate Relationship between first hunting season recovery rates and mortality rates; and an illustration of the method of estimating the portion of non-hunting mortality replaced by hunting mortality for various rates of harvest. �- 107 - Bibliography Atwood, E. L. 1956. J. Wild1. Mgmt. Validity of mail survey data on bagged waterfowl. 20(1}:1-16. Bellrose, F. C. 1945. Ratio of reported to unreported duck bands in Illinois. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 9(3}:254. 1955. A comparison of r'ecoverLes from reward and standard bands. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 19(1}:7l-75. Bellrose, F. C. and Elizabeth B. Chase. 1950. Population losses in the mallard, black duck, and blue-winged teal. Ill. Nat. Hist. Survey BioI. Notes No. 22. Urbana. Jan. 27 pp. Bellrose, F. C., T. G. Scott, A. S. Hawkins and J. B. Low. 1961. Sex and age ratios in North American ducks. Ill. Nat. Hist. Surv. Bull. 27(Article 6}:39l-474. Craighead, J. J. and D. S. Stockstead. 1956. Measuring hunting pressure on Canada geese in the Flathead Valley. Trans. 21st. N. Amer. Wildl. Conf. pp. 210-238. Crissy, W. F. 1955. The use of banding data in determining waterfowl migration and distribution. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 19(1}:75-84. Davis, D. E. 1951. 22(3}:103-l07. The analysis of populations by banding. Bird Banding Evenden, F. G., Jr. 1952. Waterfowl sex ratios in the western United States. J. Wild 1. Mgmt. l6(3}:39l-393. ~~eis, A. D. 1964a. Objectives of the waterfowl banding program. In Transactions of a Banding Workshop; Compiled by H. H. Dill. Agassiz Nat. Wildl. Refuge, Middle River, Minn. Aug. 25-27. Bur. of Spt. Fish and Wildl., Region 3, Minneapolis. 22 pp. 1964b. Techniques used in the analysis of banding data. In Waterfowl Banding Course Program of Instruction and Instructor Guides. Bur. of Spt. Fish. and Wildl., Div. of Wildl., {Patuxent Wildl. Res. Center, Laurel, Md.} Feb. 76 pp. Geis, A. D. and E. L. Atwood. 1961. Proportion of recovered waterfowl bands reported. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 25(2):154-159. *Geis, A. D. and R. D. Taber. 1963. Measuring hunting and other mortality. In Wildlife Investigational Techniques (second edition). H. S. Mosby, Ed. Chap. 11. The Wildl. Soc. pp 284-298. *Geis, A. D. and R. K. Martinson. 1966. (Notes from a band analysis workshop}. Denver, Colorado. April 3 and 4. �- 108 - *Grieb, J., H. Funk, D. Witt, G. Wrakestraw, and L. Serdiuk. (1966). A proposed mallard management unit for the Central Flyway. Areport to the Central flyway Waterf9wl Council, Jackson Hole, Wyoming. Fort Collins, Colorado. 32 pp. Hayne, D. w. 1964. Investigation of mail survey reporting by {':'Jaterfowl hunters. Rept , prepared for the Bur. of Spt. Fish. and {-IUdl. by Inst. of Stat., North Carolina State Univ., Raleigh. 24 pp Mimeo. Hf ckey , J. J. 1952. Survival st udf.e s of banded birds. U. S. Fish. and Wildl. Servo Spec. Sci. Rept.~ Wildl. No. 15. Bur. of Spt. Fish. and Wildl., Washington, C. C. 177 pp. 1955. Is there scientific basis for flyway management? Trans. 20th. N. Amer. Wildl, Conf. pp 126-150. Institute of Statistics. 1958. A comparison of the precision of various estimators for estimating ¥aterfowl kill from survey data. Rept. prepared for Bur. Spt. Fish. and Wildl., North Carolina State Univ., Raleigh. 51 pp. Mimeo. *Low, S. H. 1957. Waterfowl banding in the Canadian provinces. Spec. Sci. Rept. -- Wildl. No. 36. Branch of Wildl. Res., Bur. of Spt. Fish. and Wildl., Washington. June. 30 pp. *Martinson, R. K. 1966. Proportion of recovered duck bands that are reported. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 30(2):264-268. *Martinson, R. K. and J. A. McCann. 1966. Proportion of recovered goose and brant bands that are reported. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 30(4):856-858. Quick, H. F. 1960. Animal population analysis. In Manual of Game Investigational Techniques. The Wildl. Soc. pp 7:1-7:35. Ryder, R. A. 1955. A preliminary analysis of waterfowl recoveries in Colorado with notes on trapping and banding. Colorado Game and Fish Dept. Fed. Aid. Compl. Rept., Proj. W-37-R. July 15. 72 pp Mimeo. i(Witt, D. 1965. Analysis of band recovery distribution of waterfowl associated with Montana and suggested re-alignment of the flyway boundary. Montana Fish and Game Dept., Fairfield. June 17. 16 pp. *Literature Cited Prepared by: Howard D. Funk Assistant Wildlife Researcher Date: October, 1966 Approved by: Jack R. Grieb Project Leader �October, 1966 - 109 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO --------~~~~~----------- Project No. w-88-R-ll Work Plan No. 3 Migratory Bird Investigations Job No. 2 Title of Job: Analysis of Mallard Recoveries from Birds Banded in Eastern Colorado Prior to 1962 Period Covered: Personnel: April 1, 1965 through March 31, 1966 Jack R. Grieb and Howard D. Funk ABSTRACT Analysis of data from winter banding in Colorado prior to 1962 strongly suggest that mallards can be separated into flocks for purposes of more adequate management than is now experienced wIth the present four flyway system. Migration routes and summer and winter areas of Colorado birds, as determined by recovery locations, are well defined and lie mainly within the con:t:inesof the 100th meridian to the east and the Pacific-Central Flyway boundary on the west with Alberta and Saskatchewan as the northern boundary. Recovery rates and annual mortality rates for these birds are among the lowest in the western Uni'ted States indicating low hunting pressure in the area defined. Thus,it seems the Central Flyway should be divided into at least two management units based on the lOOth meridian split. Possibly more divisions can be made in the near future as eastern Colorado mallards seem to be segregated into at least three groups with characteristics varying from each other. This is also probably true in other areas outside of Colorado. The Central Flyway cooperative mallard winter banding study initiated in 1965 should result in data sufficient to pinpoint various flocks in the flyway, thu.senabling us to combine those with similar characteristics into management llilitsfor the wisest and most efficient use of each group. �- 110 - Recommendations: Banding data presented in this report are from Colorado only. Montana and Wyoming also did considerable winter banding prior to 1962 and data from all three states should be combined into a joint report. Objectives: The objective of this job is to determine the amount of usable recovery and mortality information available from previous mallard bandings in eastern Colorado. Procedures: Colorado was divided into sixteen management units (See Figure 1) mainly for the purpose of studying separately the smaller groups of mallards in eastern portions of the state and combining those showing similar characteristics. Only those banded during winters prior to 1962 on the east slope, excluding North Park and the San Luis Valley, were studied. Most banding was accomplished in the South Platte Valley (Units 1, 2, 4, and 6) and the Arkansas Valley (Units 10, 11, 12, and 13). In this report, the latter group o£ units will be referred to only as Unit 10. Considerable banding was also accomplished at Bonny Reservoir in Unit 9. Units in the remaining portions of the state were necessary for plotting recovery locations. There were no mallards banded in Unit 3 along the South Platte River during the period of years covered in this report. Banding records from past years were examined and all mallards banded between December 1 and February 28 of each year through 1961-62 were tabulated by sex for each of the above mentioned banding units. Thus, almost all were banded after hunting season. Recovery cards received from the Bureau of Sport Fisheries and Wildlife pertaining to each banding unit were also sorted and only those banded from December through February were utilized. The recovery cards were further sorted so that only cards from those birds shot or found dead during the period September through January of each year remained for analysis. Band recovery distribution maps were made showing recovery locations by sex for birds from each unit of banding. From these maps, the general harvest distribution of all Colorado wintering birds was patterned. The eastern boundary of this major division is considered to be near the 100th meridian which runs north and south from western North Dakota through ~est Texas. The Pacific-Central Flyway boundary makes up the western border. Most data analyses were conducted on the basis of this division. Analyses include data processing by sex and banding unit for recovery locations throughout North America, first year recovery rates and annual mortality rates. The composite dynamic method was employed in annual mortality estimates. Comparisons were made between units and, after lumping units with similar flock characteristics, with other states and flyways concerning annual mortality rates and first year recovery rates by use of data supplied by the Bureau of Sport Fisheries and Wildlife. INTRODUCTION Most waterfowl managers agree that if we are to utilize our waterfowl resource most wisely, we must advance beyond the flyway system now practiced into a more sophisticated system of flock management. If we can locate separate populations of mallards with differing nesting, migration and/or wintering areas as well as varying migration periods, we are in position to manage these on the basis of �- III - each population unit. Thus, protection can be offered when and where needed and surpluses can be harvested when they occur. In 1965, the Central Flyway states joined in a cooperative study to investigate the feasibility of establishing mallard management units within the flyway. Data presented in this report are from mallard winter bandings in various areas in eastern Colorado prior to 1962. These supply information on harvest distribution, migration routes and recovery and annual mortality rates. Differences in mortality and distribution, by age, were not considered as few birds were aged at time of banding and methods used then were not reliable. However, results of this investigation should prove valuable in the overall Central Flyway study. Banding and Band Analyses Winter mallard banding has taken place in eastern Colorado since 1944-45 in Units 1, 2, 4, 6, 9 and 10 (Figure 1). Numbers of mallards tagged are listed in Table 1 by sex and year and unit of banding. Total male mallards banded numbered 30,590 while 18,879 females were banded for a grand total of 49,469 birds. Distribution of Harvest.--As stated in the procedures, recovery locations were plotted on maps of North America. Thus, patterns of harvest were indicated for birds from each banding unit by sex. The fact that there are relatively low human populations and therefore few hunters in much of Wyoming and eastern Montana undoubtedly leaves much to be desired in a true picture of migration routes utilized by mallards from each unit or group of banding units as recoveries are very limited in these two states. Recovery data were analyz8d either by state or groups of states and/or areas as shown in following tables. The divisions are as follows: Canada separate; eastern portions of Colorado, Wyoming and Montana as one area; the rest of the Central Flyway states split on 100 degrees longitude with the western portion including New Mexico; the remaining United States areas divided simply by flyway; and Mexico (See Figure 2). Harvest distribution for first year recoveries is illustrated in Tables 2 and 3 for males and females, respectively. Close scrutiny of these tables suggests the major migration route, as determinp.d by harvest patterns, for all eastern Colorado winter banded birds lies mostly within the area bounded by the 100th meridian on the east and the Pacific-Central Flyway boundary on the west. Thus, Alberta, Saskatchewan, eastern portions of Montana, Wyoming and Colorado, and the western portions of the eastern tier of Central Flyway states along with New Mexico should be one management unit. Seventy-eight percent of first year recoveries from males banded in Colorado come from this area along with 76 percent of the female recoveries. Canada (almost entirely Alberta and Saskatchewan) accounts for 22 to 26 percent of these recoveries, the tri-state area of Montana, Wyoming and Colorado between 29 and 38 percent (most of which come from Colorado), and the rest of the Central Flyway west of the 100th meridian between 18 and 21 percent. About 11 percent come from the Central Flyway east of the 100th meridian and the rest of the 12 to 13 percent mainly divided between the Pacific and Mississippi Flyways. Over half of the recoveries from the west portion of the eastern tier of Central Flyway states come from western Nebraska which is reasonable as this area is directly north of important winter banding sites in northeastern Colorado and actually a part of the North and South Platte River wintering area complex. It can be noticed in both tables that most of these �~ ~ cr. .u -..-I C 0 .u z ~; L.&...o ~ ~ ~ ~~ wE <l! Zbl) t\l >- C :,: t\l ~ .-l ::: 0 <!-I I-< <l! .u t\l :z .-l <l! I-< :;I en -,-I ~'" .~ , ~, 0:: , 0.. u.. " �- 113 - Table 1. -- Numbers of mallards banded in eastern Colorado prior to 1962 by sex and banding location. Year of Banding 1944-45 45-46 46-47 47-48 48-49 49-50 50-51 51-52 52-53 53-54 54-55 55-56 57-58 60-61 61-62 TOTALS 1944-45 45-46 46-47 47-48 48-49 49-50 50-51 51-52 52-53 53-54 54-55 55-56 57-58 60-61 61-62 TOTALS 1 2 9 Units of Banding 4 6 Ma es 27 1,120 2,581 4,320 5,183 298 397 262 75 598 660 116 676 1,840 973 1,280 1,150 1,453 266 168 10 All 2,596 1,303 600 316 41 257 944 394 3 591 13,529 659 1,970 1,449 Females 11 204 1,309 2,226 3,215 80 188 184 46 362 373 51 7,806 513 1,480 755 366 791 1,008 178 115 102 5,177 48 524 1,480 1,193 1,859 4,816 6,474 961 4~6 33 106 509 52 1 407 48 4,423 18,879 1,799 1,889 330 250 33 106 509 52 1 407 7,045 372 1,001 Total Mallards All Units == 49,469 832 5,206 703 1,840 2,565 4,123 8,066 8,537 1,824 600 41 257 944 394 3 591 102 30,590 �- 114 - \ \ \ \ \ Division of Central Flyway States for Mallard Management Units Based on Colorado Recovery Location Data. I::JWestern Unit ~ Management Tri-sta te Area �- 115 - Table 2. -- Percentage distribution of first year recoveries from male mallards banded in eastern Colorado by unit prior to 1962. Unit 1 % Unit 2 % Unit 9 % Unit 4 % Unit 6 % Unit 10 % Total % Canada Alberta 13.9 Saskatchewan 10.7 Other Canada & North 1.5 Subtotals 26.1 10.5 10.5 0.0 21.0 7.0 9.9 0.0 16.9 2.8 8.3 0.0 11.1 10.7 4.6 0.2 15.5 17.4 10.6 1.2 29.2 12.6 8.7 0.9 22.2 Tri-state Area E. Montana E. Wyoming E. Colorado Subtotals 1.0 2.3 20.4 23.7 0.0 5.3 42.1 47.4 0.0 0.0 31.0 31.0 0.0 8.3 56.9 65.2 1.2 3.0 58.5 62.7 1.2 0.4 20.2 21.8 1.0 2.4 34.4 37.8 C. Fly.W. of 1000 W. North Dakota W. South Dakota W. Nebraska W. Kansas W. Oklahoma w. Texas E. New Mexico Subtotals 3.2 0.7 21.3 1.3 0.0 0.5 0.0 27.0 10.4 5.3 5.3 0.0 0.0 5.3 0.0 26.3 1.4 4.2 12.8 4.2 0.0 2.8 0.0 25.4 5.6 1.4 2.7 1.4 0.0 1.4 0.0 12.5 0.9 0.9 3.3 0.2 0.0 0.0 0.5 5.8 2.4 2.4 6.3 3.5 0.0 0.8 0.8 16.2 2.5 1.3 11.7 1.5 0.0 0.6 0.3 17.9 C. Fly. E. of 100 E. North Dakota E. South Dakota E. Nebraska E. Kansas E. Oklahoma E. Texas Subtotals 1.7 3.0 3.2 1.2 1.7 3.3 14.1 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 1.4 2.8 5.7 1.4 2.8 2.8 16.9 0.0 1.4 0.0 0.0 0.0 4.2 5.6 0.7 2.3 1.2 0.9 0.7 1.2 7.0 1.2 1.6 4.7 1.6 2.4 4.3 15.8 1.2 2.4 2.8 1.1 1.5 2.8 11.8 Pacific Flyway Mississippi Flyway Atlantic Flyway Mexico Grand Totals Sample Size 3.7 5.4 0.0 0.0 100.0 597 5.3 0.0 0.0 0.0 100.0 19 5.6 4.2 0.0 0.0 100.0 71 5.6 0.0 0.0 0.0 100.0 72 6.5 2.3 0.0 0.2 100.0 431 9.1 7.1 0.0 0.8 100.0 253 5.7 4.4 0.0 0.2 100.0 1,443 0 �_ 116 _ Table 3. -- Percentage distribution of first year recoveries from female mallards banded in eastern Colorado by unit prior to 1962. Unit 1 Unit 2 Unit 9 Unit 4 Unit 6 Unit 10 Total % % % % % % % Canada Alberta Saskatchewan Other Can. & North Subtotals 19.4 11.6 1.8 32.8 15.4 7.7 7.7 30.8 16.0 12.0 0.0 28.0 18.9 0.0 14.1 18.9 11.7 6.3 1.4 19.4 2.4 24.5 15.8 8.7 1.8 26.3 Tri-state Area E. Montana E. Wyoming E. Colorado Subtotals 1.4 2.5 11.6 15.5 0.0 2.7 48.7 51.4 1.0 3.9 45.6 50.5 3.7 3.1' 12.8 19.6 1.9 2.9 23.9 28.7 5.4 0.0 8.1 5.4 1.4 1.0 5.3 1.0 0.0 5.5 1.2 11.1 4.3 0.6 1.2 23.9 4.4 1.0 12.0 2.2 0.3 0.8 0.3 21.0 1.5 2.2 2.9 0.7 1.1 2.3 10.7 C. Fly. W of 1000 W. North Dakota W South Dakota W. Nebraska W. Kansas W. Oklahoma W. Texas E. New Mexico Subtotals 0 6.0 0.7 18.2 0.7 0.0 8.0 0.0 30.8 16.0 24.0 0.0 4.0 7.7 15.4 0.0 00 00 00 0.0 0 8.0 12.0 4.0 0.0 0.0 80 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 23.0 28.0 18.9 1.7 1.4 4.2 1.1 0.0 00 0.0 0.0 4 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 04 0 7.7 2,..8 0.0 0.0 05 1.0 11.6 7.7 8.0 4.0 16.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 6.3 1.8 5.0 3.1 1.2 1.8 37 16.6 2.8 10.2 0.0 0.0 4.0 5.4 5.4 8.3 5.8 8.0 7.4 5.5 7.7 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 100.0 13 0.0 100.0 25 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 100.0 284 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 100.0 37 100.0 206 1.1 0.4 27.1 0 0 0 5 0 0.5 9.7 0.0 0 C. Fly E of 100 E. North Dakota E. South Dakota E. Nebraska E. Kansas E. Oklahoma E. Texas Subtotals Pacific Flyway Mississippi Flyway Atlantic Flyway Mexico Grand Total Sample Size 0 0 1.7 1.9 1.9 0 0 0.0 100.0 163 7.8 100.0 728 �- 117 - western Nebraska recoveries come from bandings in northeastern 1, 2 and 9) and also from southeastern Colorado (Unit 10). Colorado (Units Tables 4 and 5, which present all year recovery location percentages, are very similar to Tables 2 and 3 but further strengthen the division of the management unit as stated. Male recoveries increase from 78 percent of first year recoveries taken in this western unit to 84 percent for all years and percentages of females recovered in the unit increase from 76 to 80 percent in the same manner. After passage of time, it seems proportionately fewer recoveries come from out of this suggested area from either the east, west or even from Canada. Inversely, percentages recovered in Colorado increase when all year recoveries are considered. Western Nebraska percentages also increase with time, thus, stressing the close association between birds of that area and Colorado. Again, many of the mallards recovered east of the lOath meridian are from those banded in extreme eastern Colorado. Another interesting item comes to light upon examination of Tables 2 through 5. Percentages of females recovered in Canada are proportionately greater than percentages of males in almost every banding unit both for first year and all year recoveries. This is true for most data from states north of Colorado but not as evident. Probably this is due to the fact that females finish their molt much later than males and may still be in areas more accessible to hunters by the time hunting season arrives in northern nesting areas. Further study of the prior four tables by units of banding indicates very strongly that Colorado mallards are split into separate flocks within the state. Units 1, 2 and 9 (Figure 1) seem to be one flock unit or at least very closely associated. Units 4 and 6 seem to be a separate unit and the Arkansas Valley, Unit 10, still another. Much of the reasoning behind this belief is difference of harvest distribution between birds from each area. Birds from northeastern Colorado (Units 1, 2 and 9) seem to migrate mainly through the western portion of the eastern tier of Central Flyway states with considerable numbers being taken both east and west of this area. About 25 to 30 percent of these birds are recovered in Colorado. Probably between 55 to 60 percent of the north-central Colorado banded birds from Units 4 and 6 are recovered in Colorado with an average of maybe 10 to 15 percent recovered in the tier of state areas from western North Dakota through western Texas. Here we know too little about the migration pattern of these north-central Colorado birds in their journeys north of Colorado because of evident light hunting pressure in Wyoming and Montana. Yet we do know relatively few are taken in areas near the lOath meridian which is unlike data from the northeast birds. North-central Colorado birds are recovered in Canada in smaller proportions than northeast birds but do show they utilize Alberta and Saskatchewan almost exclusively like the northeast group. Arkansas Valley mallards seem to have a wide flyway which overlaps routes of the northcentral and northeast birds, especially in Colorado. However, they do seem to correspond more closely to habits of the northeast birds out of Colorado but tend to move through areas east of the lOath meridian to a somewhat greater extent. Again, birds of this group recovered in Canada come mainly from Alberta and Saskatchewan. Terminal migration, at least during hunting season, seems to be in the vicinity of the respective winter banding sites with few being taken farther south. Arkansas Valley mallards diverge from this observation more than the other two groups �- 118 - �- 119 Table 5. -- Percentage distribution of all year recoveries from female mallards banded in eastern Colorado by unit prior to 1962. Unit 1 Unit 2 Unit 9 Unit 4 Unit 6 Unit 10 Total % % % % % % % Canada Alberta Saskatchewan Other Can. & North Subtotals 15.3 9.4 2.5 27.2 10.8 2.7 8.1 21.6 13.4 8.9 2.2 24.5 11.4 6.3 0.0 1707 11.9 5.8 1.6 1903 15.2 7.0 207 24.9 14.0 7.5 2.3 23.8 Tri-state Area E. Montana E. Wyoming E. Colorado Subtotals 1.6 1.7 22•. 0 25.3 0.0 2.7 29.8 32.5 4.5 0.0 22.2 26.7 3.1 5.2 45.9 54.2 1.1 4.1 50.6 55.8 2.3 2.0 19.5 23.8 1.8 2.6 30.8 35.1 C. Fly. W of 1000 W. North Dakota W. South Dakota W. Nebraska W. Kansas W. Oklahoma W. Texas E. New Mexico Subtotals 3.3 1.0 21.6 0.4 0.1 1.3 0.3 28.0 5.4 5.4 13.5 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 24.3 2.2 0.0 15.6 11.1 2.2 0.0 0.0 31.1 4.2 0.0 8.3 2.1 0.0 0.0 0.0 14.6 1.1 008 5.8 008 0.0 0.8 0.4 9.7 4.1 0.9 10.2 401 0.2 2.9 0.2 22.6 2.9 0.9 1304 1.8 0.2 1.4 0.3 20.9 C. Fly. E. of 1000 E. North Dakota E. South Dakota E. Nebraska E. Kansas E. Oklahoma E. Texas 2.3 1.4 3.8 1.0 0.6 1.8 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 2.7 2.7 2.2 0.0 2.2 0.0 4.5 2~2 1.0 0.0 1.0 0.0 0.0 1.0 0.6 1.4 1.1 0.2 0.8 1.0 1.3 2.5 2.3 1.1 1.6 5.0 1.5 1.5 2.4 0.7 1.0 2.4 Subtotals 10.9 5.4 11.1 3.0 5.1 13.8 9.5 Pacific Flyway Mississippi Flyway Atlantic Flyway Mexico Grand Totals Sample Size 3.8 4.8 0.0 0.0 100.0 705 13.5 2.7 0.0 0.0 100.0 37 4.4 2.2 0.0 0.0 100.0 45 6.3 4.2 0.0 0.0 100.0 96 6.6 3.3 0.0 0.2 100.0 514 7.9 6.8 0.0 0.2 100.0 442 5.9 4.7 0.0 0.1 100.0 1,839 �- 120 - in that they tend to be recovered in proportionately greater numbers ern states of the Central and even the Mississippi Flyways. in the south- Information presented in Tables 6 and 7 shows the degree to which Colorado banded mallards returning to Colorado are harvested in the original unit of banding or in other units in the state the first year after being banded. In Table 6, ffrst year recovery locations in Colorado are shown only by the headings Percent Recovered in Same Unit or Percent Recovered in Other Units. For males, the percentages recovered in the same unit range from 54 to 88 percent. The highest percentages are in the northeast area followed by the north-central and finally the Arkansas Valley or the southeast portion. Undoubtedly the southeast percentage is lowest because the birds have to travel south farther than birds from the other two areas and receive proportionately more gunning pressure before reaching their wintering grounds. This will be explored after examination of Table 7. Female percentages in Table 6 are substantially lower than for males and vary from 50 to 67 percent harvested in the unit of banding. Here the north-central percentages are highest. Table 6.--First sex. year recovery distribution of mallards Males % Recovered In Same Unit Other Unit in Colorado by unit and Females % Recovered In Same Unit Other Unit Banding Units Sample Size N.E. Colo. 1 2 9 108 8 22 72.2 87.5 81.8 27.8 12.5 18.2 33 4 4 54.5 50.0 50.0 45.5 50.0 50.0 N.C. Colo. 4 6 41 238 75.6 72.3 24.4 27.7 18 90 66.7 60.0 33.3 40.0 S.E. Colo. 10 50 54.0 46.0 20 55.0 45.0 Sample Size When the division of eastern Colorado birds into the three aforementioned flocks is followed and first year recovery locations in Colorado are based on a grouping of banding units, the data presented quite significantly strengthen the split of eastern Colorado birds into three flocks. In Table 7, about 86 percent of the male mallards banded in northeastern Colorado and returning the next year were harvested in the northeast. Ten percent were taken in the north-central area with smaller portions harvested in other locations in the state. Ninety-two percent of the north-central males returning to Colorado were harvested in the north-central area, 4 percent in the northeast and the rest in other areas. Only 54 percent of the southeast banded males were recovered in the Arkansas Valley. However, here it can be seen that 14 percent of the Arkansas Valley birds were recovered in northeast Colorado and 26 percent came from the north-central portion. Probably the combined factors (If greater gunning pressure in the northern �Table 7. -- First year recovery distribution of mallards in Colorado by areas and sex. Males Females % Recovered In % Recovered In Sample Size N.E. Colo N.C. Colo S.E. Colo West Slope Other East Slope Sample Size N.E. Colo N.C. Colo S.E. Colo West Slope Other East Slope N. E. Colo. 1 2 9 108 8 22 84.3 100.0 86.4 12.0 0.0 4.5 0.9 0.0 9.1 1.9 0.0 0.0 0.9 0.0 0.0 33 4 4 72.6 50.0 100.0 15.2 25.0 0.') 0.0 0.0 0.0 6.1 0.0 0.0 6.1 25.0 0.0 Total N. E. Colo. 138 85.5 10.2 2.2 1.4 0.7 41 73.2 14.6 0.0 4.9 7.3 N. C. Colo. 4 6 41 238 2.4 4.6 0.0 1.3 0.0 0.8 0.0 2.5 18 90 0.0 3.3 100.0 87.8 0.0 1.1 279 4.3 1.1 0.7 2.2 108 2.8 89.8 0.9 0.0 2.2 1.9 0.0 5.6 Total N. C. Colo. 97.6 90.8 91.7 S. E. Colo. 10, 11 & 12 50 14.0 26.0 54.0 4.0 2.0 20 5.0 30.0 55.0 0.0 10.0 Banding Units and Areas 4.6 ~ J\) ~ �- 122 - part of eastern Colorado and a longer distance for Arkansas Valley winter banded birds to reach their wintering grounds account for the relatively lower percentages of birds actually harvested in the Arkansas Valley. Females seem to wander a bit more in Colorado but still show ample reason for believing the three flocks have differing characteristics. Recovery Rates.--First year and all year recovery rates are illustrated in Table 8 by unit of banding and sex. First year rates are higher in Units 4 and 6 for both males and females than for other units which probably is a reflection of high hunting pressure in the Denver-Greeley-Fort Collins area, especially since over 50 percent of the total harvest of these birds takes place in this area. Higher rates are also shown for these same units in the section on all year recoveries but not to the same degree. Relatively low recovery rates are indicated for Unit 9 for males and females in both first and all year recovery analyses. Much of the reason for this is probably that the average wintering population has been about 20,000 birds for the past decade or so but there is very little hunting pressure exerted on the birds while in the Bonny Reservoir area as it is quite isolated. Table 8. -- First year and all year band recovery rates for mallards banded in Colorado prior to 1962 by unit of banding and sex. Banding Unit Number Banded No. 1st Year Recoveries 1st Yr. No. All All Year Recovery,Rate Year Recoveries Recovery Rate MALES 1 2 9 13,529 659 1,970 597 19 71 .044 .029 .036 2,284 277 201 .169 .153 .102 4 6 1,449 7,815 76 439 .052 .056 101 1,269 .191 .162 10 5,177 253 .049 908 .175 Total & Averages 30,599 1,455 .048 5,040 .165 FEMALES 1 2 9 7,045 372 1,001 283 14 25 .040 .038 .025 705 37 45 .100 .099 .045 4 6 832 5,206 38 216 .046 .041 96 514 .115 .099 10 4,423 165 .037 448 .101 18,879 741 .039 1,845 .098 Total & Averages �_ 123 _ For comparison of first year recovery rates of Colorado banded birds with those winter banded in other areas in the western United States and Canada, data obtained from the Bureau of Sport Fisheries and Wildlife were incorporated into Table 9 along with Colorado data. These data disclose Colorado mallards have among the lowest first year recovery rates of all compared. Actually, the eastern section of the Central Flyway and the Mississippi and Pacific Flyways have significantly higher first year recovery rates than those from the whole general , flyway inhabited by Colorado winter banded birds. Table 9. -- Comparison of first year recovery rates by sex for winter mallards between specific areas in western United States. First Year Recovery Male Area of Banding Tri-state Unit Montana (eastern) Wyoming (northeast) (southeast) Colorado (north-central) (northeast) (southeast) Central Flyway West of 100 0 South Dakota (western) Nebraska (western) Kansas (western) Texas (western) Canada Alberta Central Flyway East of 100 0 South Dakota (eastern) Nebraska (eastern) Texas (northeast) Texas (southeast) Columbia Basin Washington (eastern) Idaho (southern) Oregon (northeast) (southeast) Remainder of Pacific Mississippi Flyway Flyway banded Rates Female .041 .046 .077 .056 .043 .049 .028 .039 .074 .042 .038 .037 .058 .060 .04C .028 .054 .050 .040 .013 .050 .042 .036 .086 .064 .040 .031 .073 .050 .031 .068 .048 .059 .065 .041 .039 .041 .049 .068 .047 .061 .046 Mortality Rates.--Mortalityrates computed by the composite dynamic method are shown in Table 10 by sex and unit of banding in Colorado for first year and average annual mortality. Highest rates both for first year and average annual mortality in males occur in Units 4 and 6, again probably because much of the hunting mortality on these birds occurs in Colorado near the areas of high human populations around Denver. Northeast and southeast Colorado mortality rates for �Table 10. -- First year and average annual mortality rates for mallards banded in Colorado prior to 1962 by unit of banding and sex. Males First Year Average Annual Mortality Mortality Unit of Banding First Year Mortality Females Average Annual Mortality 1 2 9 1, 2 and 9 .261 .188 .304 .260 .311 ~25l .359 .310 .401 .378 .482 .402 .401 .428 .445 .404 4 6 4 and 6 .274 .346 .333 .336 .357 .354 .396 .420 .416 .460 .409 .417 10 .274 .317 .365 .388 Average All Units .289 .327 .394 .403 Table 11. -- Comparison of average annual mortality rates for winter banded mallards between specific areas in the western United States Area of Banding Tri-state Unit Montana (eastern) Wyoming (northeast) (southeast) Colorado (north-central) (northeast) (southeast) o Central Flyway West of 100 South Dakota (western) New Mexico o Central Flyway East of 100 South Dakota (eastern) Nebraska (eastern) Oklahoma (eastern) Columbia Basin Washington (eastern) Idaho (southern) Oregon (northeast) (southeast) Average Annual Mortality Rates Male Female .362 .356 .381 .354 .310 .317 .399 .394 .313 .405 .425 .441 .470 .476 .417 .404 .388 .49J..!1 •49-}.1 .480 .514 .392 .340 .360 .352 .442 .431 .454 .458 Remainder of Pacific Fl~ay .404 .419 Mississippi Flyway .411 .428 11 Only whole state figure available. �- 125 - males are very similar to each other at about 27 percent and 31 percent for first year and average annual mortality, respectively. Female mortality rates are generally higher than for males because of high losses during nesting and seem to remain quite stable close to 40 percent each year starting with the· first year after banding for all units of banding. ' Colorado average annual mortality statistics are compared with data from other states and areas in Table 11 again through use of data obtained from the Bureau. Colorado ranks among the lowest in mortality rates in the western United States for both male and female mallards indicating a longer life span than those birds from other wintering areas. Conclusions Analyses of recoveries from mallards banded in Colorado prior to 1962 have indicated several items of importance which will aid in separating Central Flyway mallards into various management units. Results of ~olorado data analyses suggest the Central Flyway should probably be split into at least two management units with the western unit lying within the boundaries of the 100th meridian on the east and the Pacific-Central Flyway border on the west. Alberta and Saskatchewan seem to be the major nesting and/or staging areas in Canada for Colorado wintering birds and a definite part of this management unit. The majority of mallards banded in Colorado during December through January terminate their winter migration no farther south than Colorado. Females are harvested in Canada to a greater degree than males, possibly due to males leaving the north country before females which may still be in final stages of molt by the time hunting seasons begin. Colorado birds seem to be divided into three groups: (1) the north-central group in the Denver-Gree1ey-Fort Collins area; (2) the northeast birds, probably including Bonny Reservoir mallards; and (3) the Arkansas Valley mallards. Group No. 1 seems to be highly associated with Colorado, Wyoming, Montana and Alberta and Saskatchewan in Canada. About 60 percent of these birds are recovered in Colorado and most of these in the north-central area. Groups 2 and 3 are also associated with Alberta and Saskatchewan but their regions of recovery lie mainly in the eastern tier of Central Flyway states. However, the majority of these recoveries come from west of the 100th meridian with between 20 to 30 percent actually recovered in Colorado. The instinct to return to former wintering grounds in Colorado each winter for all three groups is quite strong, especially in the northeast and north-central birds. Many of the Arkansas Valley birds are harvested in the north-central and northeast portions of Colorado so their migration route overlaps those taken by Groups 1 and 2. This strongly supports the suggestion for splitting eastern Colorado birds into three groups. Finally, recovery rates and annual mortality rates for Colorado birds are among the lowest in the western United States indicating lower hunting pressure than in other reference areas outside of the suggested general management unit. All these factors reveal that determination of mallard management units on a flock basis is feasible. The various flocks of mallards from Colorado seem to have quite definite migration patterns, breeding areas, wintering grounds and, thus, characteristics different from other groups. Undoubtedly, the cooperative winter banding program in the Central Flyway, if conducted to the best of everyones ability, will confirm observations in this report and add tremendously �- 126 - to our knowledge of mallards in the whole flyway. The time for this cooperative study is opportune as we seem to be in a period of high duck production. If an all out effort is made by all cooperators, in a few years we should be in a position to manage our mallard resource in the best interest of each flock through both good and poor production years. Prepared Datc: by: Howard D. Funk Asst. Wildlife Researcher ~O~c~t~o~b~e~r~~1~9~6~6 _ Approved by: ~J~a_c~.k~R~.~G~,r~l~·c~,b----------Project Leader Ferd C. Kl cLn ----~--. schni -1-/: .- "_._.- �October, 1966 - 127 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT state of COLORADO --------~--~-------------- Project No. w-88-R-ll Work Plan No. 3 Migratory Bird Investigations Job No. 6 Title of Job: Investigation of Mallard Management Units of Eastern Colorado Period Covered: Personnel: December 1, 1965 through March 31, 1966 Jack R. Grieb, Richard M. Hopper, William H. Rutherford, Mark A. Strong, Robert D. Kitzmiller, Claude M. Brock, Charles R. Hayes, Jack R. Randall, Jack D. Frost and Howard D. Funk ABSTRACT During the 1965-66 winter, 7,070 mallards were banded in seven eastern Colorado study units. Ground counts indicated sex ratios in our populations were again approximately 1.5:1 males per female. Fluoroscopy studies suggested approximately 6 percent of our immature populations of males and females carried shotj again similar to results of previous years. An average of about 200,000 mallards were present through the winter of 1965-66. Recoveries from birds banded in 1963 (80) and 1964-:65 (109) and harvested in 1965-66 were tabulated for use in final analysis. In general, results of this segment of study seem favorable for splitting the Central Flyway into at least two management units, one east and one west of the 100th meridian. Approximately 80 percent of the recoveries came from the western portion of t~e flyvffiY, Alberta and Saskatchewan. Recovery rates were again low, ranging by age and sex of birds from 1.4 to 2.3 percent for first year recoveries, and from 0.4 to 2.2 percent for second year recoveries. The majority of birds returning to and harvested in Colorado were taken in the general vicinity in which they were banded, thus adding strength to our belief that three separate populations of mallards exist in eastern Colorado. Federal and state wing survey data revealed that proportionately more young were harvested in 1965 (0.54 immatures per adult) than in 1964 (0.35 immatures per adult). Also, hunter selectivity toward males was indicated to have increased over the previous year. Recovery data hinted that we may have had only about 20 percent mortality on our Colorado wintering populations during the 1964 hunting season. �- 128 - Recommendations: This report covers all phases of the eastern Colorado mallard study previously reported in Work Plan 3, Jobs 3, 4 and 5. Results of the stu.dy to date will be examined carefu.lly and a new PPS prepared for work beginning in 1967-68. Objectives: 1. To determine breeding migration and wintering ranges and obtain life history data from mallards wintering in the following seven study units: (a) South Platte Valley Denver to Greeley, (b) South Platte Valley Greeley to Fort Morgan, (c) South Platte Valley Fort Morgan to Sterling, (d) South Platte Valley Sterling to Julesburg, (e) Fort Collins area, (f) Bonny Reservoir area, and (g) the Arkansas River Valley. 2. To determine bias or agreement in age and sex ratios of mallards captured by various methods in comparison with ratios present in the flocks by work unit. 3. To determine the extent of correlation by work unit between (a) percentages of immature mallards with embedded shot, (b) estimates on number of hunters by area and (c) number of birds present, for an index of hunter pressure. Q 4. To estimate hunter selectivity to sexes and differential the gun between 5. vulnerability to ages and sexes of mallards. To compare all of this infonnation in other states and flyways. between work units and with data collected Procedures: Trapping methods used were described in previous reports (Funk, 1964). Five more Salt Plains traps were constructed making a total of 14 cage type traps employed during the ye ar , Trapping was again initiated at Bonny Reservoir because the goose season was closed there and did not hinder our trapping program. Thereafter, trapping was accomplished mainly on a basis of when and where conditions premitted. At times, three crews were trapping in various areas. Analysis procedures were described in the Work Plan 3, Job 5 report (Funk 1965b). In most cases, data were merely assembled for final analysis based on findings from Work Plan 3, Job 2 in which other procedures are described (Funk 1966). The relative recovery method 1Nas utilized in this report to estimate survival and mortality of birds banded in 1963-64 for the 1964 hunting season. (Bureau of Sport Fisheries and Wildlife 1964) INTRODUCTION A study was begun in Colorado during the winter of 1963-64 to determine the feasibility of managing mallards in Colorado on a flock basis. Thus, we wanted to see if it was possible to set up mallard management units so that harvest regulations could be set depending on the status of the populations in each unit. To date, we have completed three years of banding and have recoveries from two years. The study has since been expanded and we are now cooperating in a Central Flyway study on mallards. This report deals mainly with results of the 1965-66 hunting and banding season in regard to Colorado wintering mallards. �- 129 - Trapping, Banding and Surveys - 1965-66 Bands were placed on 7,070 mallards during the winter of 1965-66 as shown in Table 1. Distribution of banding was good with nearly 1,000 banded in each of the seven study areas. Few ducks of other species were trapped, primarily because the bulk of wintering ducks in Colorado are mallards (See Fig. 1 for study unit numbers and locations). Table 1. -- Numbers and percentages of mallards age and area, eastern Colorado, 1965-66. Management Units Numbers Banded (4)Fort Collins 1,006 (6)Denver Greeley 1,093 (3)Greeley Fort Morgan 1,000 (2)Fort Morgan Sterling 1,017 (l)Sterling Julesburg 1,035 (9)Bonny Reservoir 997 (lO)Arkansav Valley 922 Totals and Average % 11 7,070 in the banded sample by sex, Adult Male Female No. % Tot. No. % Tot. Immature Male Female No. % Tot. No. % Tot. 285 28.3 188 18.7 299 29.7 234 23.3 481 44.0 129 11.8 299 27.4 184 16.8 288 28.8 171 17.1 322 32.2 219 21.9 287 28.2 195 19.2 329 32.4 206 20.3 284 27.4 89 8.6 362 35.0 300 29.0 332 33.3 162 16.2 288 28.9 215 21.6 334 36.2 133 14.4 270 29.3 185 20.1 2,291 32.4 1,067 15.1 2,169 30.7 1,543 21. 8 For simplicity in reporting, all be called Unit 10. units 10, 12 and 13 in the Arkansas Valley will Age and Sex Ratios: As displayed in Table 1, we are still having trouble with age and sex ratios in the banded samples. Attempts are made to place 250 bands on birds of each age and sex class (adult males and females and immature males and females) in each study unit. We came closer to accomplishing this in 196566 than in the past two winters but are still finding it difficult to trap females, especially adults. Most of the reason for this is bias in trapping methods. The percentages of each age and sex group in the banded segment (Table 1) are not strictly representative of the ratio in which they were trapped as we released many adults and quite a few immature males unbanded. The reason for this was to keep our banded samples close to 250 for each sex and age group so we do not get too many banded birds in the population and cheapen our recovery rates. Even so, we finally banded proportionately more males than females. The combination of lack of time due to periods of poor trapping weather and trapping �« ~ 0 I _I '" " ill In W Z z ::i 0 ..., >- :: •••• ~ '" 0 �- 131 - bias forced us to either band more males or band fewer than the quotas of 1,000 birds in each unit. We chose the former. However, the average ratio of i~ture to adult females (1.45:1, Table 1) can be considered a fairly correct trap sample ratio as almost all females were banded except for a few in the SterlingJulesburg area (Unit 1). Approximately 100 mallards were trapped with cannon nets at Bonny Reservoir. The purpose of using nets was to obtain age and sex ratios for comparison with cage-type trap ratios but the number caught was not sufficient to allow valid comparisons. Sex ratio data from counts are useful for many purposes even though you cannot obtain direct information on age ratios in a population by simple counts. In the previous two winters, ratios of males to females from ground counts have been close to 1.5:1 or about 60 percent males. Data from 1965-66 sex ratio counts are presented in Table 2 and again indicate a similar ratio. Counts in the Bonny Reservoir area were the lowest in percent males present with an average of about 55 percent. No comparisons can be made with trapping ratios in Table 1 because of trap bias. Table 2. -- Mallard sex ratio counts by study unit, 1965-66. Location Date STERLING - JULESBURG AREA (Unit 1) Tamarack Ranch 2-7-66 Tamarack Ranch 2-7-66 Tamarack Ranch 2-7-66 FORT MORGAN - STERLING AREA (Unit 2) Prewitt Outlet Ditch 2-5-66 Prewitt Outlet Ditch 2-8-66 Prewitt Outlet Ditch 2-8-66 BONNY RESERVOIR AREA (Unit 9) 12-28-65 Bonny Reservoir through 1-10-66 FORT COLLINS AREA (Unit 4) 2-16-66 Timnath Area ARKANSAS RIVER VALLEY AREA (Unit 10) Veerhoeff Pond Area 2-4-66 Veerhoeff Pond Area 2-5-66 Veerhoeff Pond Area 2-9-66 Number Ducks Counted Total Female Male Percent Males 294 318 279 891 205 179 226 610 499 497 505 1,501 58.9 64.0 55.2 59.4 310 303 319 932 189 198 182 569 499 501 501 1,501 62.1 60.5 63.7 62.1 281 268 280 264 290 287 1,670 224 243 223 232 238 222 1,382 505 511 503 496 528 509 3,052 55.6 52.4 55.7 53.2 54.9 56.4 54.7 300 216 516 58.1 315 269 111 695 209 223 63 495 524 492 174 1,190 60.1 54.7 63.8 58.4 �- 132 - Fluoroscopy: Fluoroscopy data from the 1965-66 winter are .presented in Table. 3 for 2,277 mallards examined for body shot. No adult birds were fluoroscoped in the Arkansas Valley and Denver-Greeley areas because of lack of time and holding facilities for the birds. Quotas of at least 100 birds of each age and sex to be examined in each study unit were not always met because of the above reasons and trapping bias which in turn hindered optimum use of the fluoroscope in all areas of trapping. Table 3. -- Numbers of mallards fluoroscoped and numbers and percentages embedded shot by study unit, age and sex, eastern Colorado, 1965-66. willi Number and Percent With Shot Study Number E'luo roscotred AM 1M AF IF Units AM 1M AF IF No. % No. % No. % No. % Fort Collins Unit 4 121 103 94 110 15 12.4 6 5.8 9 9.6 5 4.5 Denver - Greeley Unit 6 o 70 o 62 6 8.6 6 9.7 Greeley - Fort Morgan Unit 3 108 91 33 50 19 17.6 5 5.5 4 12.1 3 6.0 Fort Morgan - Sterling Unit 2 III 103 92 71 12 10.8 7 6.8 12 13.0 2 2.8 Sterling - Julesburg Unit 1 121 101 51 100 32 26.4 6 5.9 6 11.8 3 3.0 Bonny Reservoir Unit 9 137 148 113 144 30 21.9 12 8.1 16 14.2 13 9.0 Arkansas Valley Unit 10 o 77 o 66 4 5.2 2 6.1 •...• Totals and Averages 598 ======================= 383 693 I,. 603 108 18.1 46 6.6 47 12.3 36 6.0 Percentages of birds with shot varied between areas, probably due to both sampling error and actual diffenmces in hunting pressure exerted on each group. Adult males averaged about 18 percent with shot and adult females about 12 percent. Irrnnaturemales and females averaged 6.6 and 6.0 percent with shot, respectively. These rates are similar to those from 1963-64 and 1964-65 (Funk 1964 and 1965a). Winter Aerial Surveys: Results of winter duck surveys are shown in Table 4 by area and specific locations. The December 17 count in northeastern Colorado showed about 222,000 birds present while only 184,000 were counted in the January Inventory; a decline of about 40,000 birds. Similarly to past years, the post-hunting season shift of ducks from reservoirs to the river can be seen by comparison of data between the two count dates. The Ar kans a s Va lley was censused three times; November 23 and December 1, 1965 and January 4-5, 1966. These results show a population decline from 41,000 to 31,400 to 24,000 birds on the respective counts. About 98 percent of all ducks counted we re mallards. Analyses of 1963-64 and 1964-65 Band Recoveries from the 1965-66 Hunting Season This study was begun in the winter of 1963-64 and we now have had three w i nt ers of banding and recoveries from two hunting seasons on these banded birds. Results �- 133 - Table 4. -- Aerial duck counts by interva1~ area and specific location, eastern Colorado, 1965-66. Area FORT COLLINS College Lake Terry Lake Douglas Lake Reservoir No. 8 Reservoir No. 8 Annex Lindenmaier Lake Reservoir No. 15 Woods (Eaton) Lake Hollister (Windsor) Lake New Windsor Reservoir Timnath Reservoir Fossil Creek Reservoir Boyd Lake Loveland Lake Loveland Sugar Factory Slough Sub-totals DENVER - GREELEY Lone Tree Reservoir Carter Reservoir Highlands Lake (S. E. of C~rter) Ish Lake Terry (Longmont) Lake Union Reservoir Foster Lake St. Vrain River and Boulder Creek Batter Lake (6 SE of Longmont) Boulder Reservoir Valmont Reservoir Denver Metro Area Bowles Lake Marston Lake Denver City Park Rock Mountain Arsenal Cherry Creek Reservoir Barr Lake Horse Creek Reservoir Mile High Ponds ~rospect Reservoir Latham Reservoir South Platte River Denver to Greeley Sub-totals GREELEY - FORT MORGAN Riverside Reservoir Jackson Reservoir Empire Reservoir South Platte River Greeley - Fort Morgan Sub-totals Number of nucka Counted By Date December 17, 1965 J~nuary 4-5,1966 50 200 175 500 60 50 o 1,600 400 1,600 o o 300 30 30 7,000 5,755 2,800 2,600 2,900 50 1,710 23,880 2,000 22,000 600 1,000 7,050 200 40 36,820 40 20 275 20 950 6,180 20 275 200 12 11,500 28,550 500 o 1,100 18,000 1,Q,900 88,572 o 30 o o o 2,000 10,400 o 500 o 25 5,000 200 400 550 250 50 8,000 o 600 o 9,000 u,2QQ 43,505 o 5,200 11,700 940 1,500 9,000 12,830 30,670 21,000 31,500 �- 134- Table 4. -- Aerial duck counts by interval, area and specific location, eastern Colorado, 1965-66. (Continued). Number of Ducks Counted by Date December 17, 1965 January 4-5,1~66 FORT MORGAN - STERLING Prewitt Reservoir North Sterling Reservoir South Platte River Fort Morgan - Sterling Sub-totals 24,000 10,000 17,000 900 6,320 40,320 7,000 24,900 1,500 900 STERLING - JULESBURG Jumbo Reservoir South Platte River Sterling - Julesburg South Platte River Julesburg to Big Springs, Neb. Sub-totals 6,600 19,700 500 8,600 20,600 BONNY RESERVOIR Bonny Reservoir Area 30,000 22,000 (See addit iona1 Tables after Dec. 17 and Jan. 4-5 totals) 492 300 2,000 120 500 7,600 1,440 490 225 5,000 380 1,550 80 ARKANSAS VALLEY CF and I Lakes Beeker Pond Dyes Lake Galbroak Cheraw Meredith Reservoir Horse Creek Reservoir Blue Reservoir Nee Noshe Reservoir Upper Queen Reservoir Two Buttes Reservoir John Martin Reservoir Veerhoeff Lake Arkansas River Florence to Rocky Ford Rocky Ford to John Martin Inlet John Martin Dam to State Line Sub-totals TOTALS South Platte Valley Arkansas Valley 320 441 3,020 23,958 222,042 184,325 23,958 �- 135 - Table 4. -- Aerial Colorado, 1965-66. duck counts by interval, (Continued). Area ARKANSAS VALLEY CF & I Lakes Dyes Lake Holbrook Lake Lake Merideth Horse Creek Reservoir Adobe Creek Reservoir Lake Henry Veerhoeff Lake John Martin Reservoir Nee Noshe Reservoir Upper Queens Reservoir Two Buttes Reservoir Turks Pond Arkansas River TOTALS 1/ area and specific November 23, 1965 100 525 50 12,000 1,000 500 0 3,000 12,000 8,000 400 200 3,000 1/ 300 41,075 location, eastern December 1, 1965 0 1,500 300 8,000 0 1,100 200 1,500 9,000 .3,200 3,000 100 3,000 500 31,400 No river count west of Rocky Ford. of the first hunting season are written in the last segment report (Funk 1965b). This section of this report deals mainly with resuJts of the 1965-66 hunting season on birds banded during the first two years of study. Recovery and Mortality Rates: Numbers of birds banded in 1963-64 and 1964-65 as well as numbers of 1965-66 hunting season recoveries for each group are shown in Tables 5 and 6 by age and sex of the birds at time of banding. Eighty second year recoveries and 109 first year r'ecove r Le s were reported. The number of first year recoveries seems low but probably reasonable due to the daily bag limit of only one mallard. Second year recoveries were undoubtedly also affected by the low bag limit. Recovery data were listed in the manner shown iriTables 5 and 6 mainly to facilitate final analyses when the time comes. No recoveries were reported for some age and sex groups in certain study units so recovery rates were calculated only for totals in each group. These are shown at the bottom of each table. Second year recovery rates ranged from 0.4 to 2.2 percent (Table 5) and first year rates varied from 1.4 to 2.3 percent (Table 6), all of which are considered very low. Because we now have two years of band recoveries from the 1964 and 1965 hunting seasons, it was possible to calculate mortality and survival rates for birds banded in 1963-64 for the 1964 hunting season. The relative recovery rate method was used for these estimates. For the purpose of comparison, this was done for each age and sex group designated at time of banding as well as for all males and all females and the results are displayed in Table 7. �- 136 - Table 5. -- Numbers of mallards winter banded in eastern Colorado, 1963-64, and recovered during the 1965-66 hunting season, by age, sex and management unit of banding. Adults Male Area Totals Banded Fort Collins 1,026 Denver Greeley 1,022 Greeley Fort Morgan 280 Fort Morgan Sterling 674 Sterling Julesburg 295 Bonny Reservoir 256 Arkansas Valley 1,022 TOTALS 4,575 Average 2nd Year Recovery Rates Female Recov.,. RecovBanded ered Banded ered Immatures Female RecovRecovBanded ered Banded ered Male 553 10 144 0 197 9 132 0 496 14 70 2 334 5 122 2 99 1 43 1 67 2 71 0 336 8 69 0 194 5 75 0 91 86 515 2,176 3 2 10 48 29 24 105 484 0 0 2 5 112 98 234 1,236 1 0 2 24 63 48 168 679 0 1 0 3 1.0% 2.2% 1.9% 0.4% Table 6. -- Numbers of mallards winter banded in eastern Colorado, 1964-65, and recovered during the 1965-66 hunting season, by age, sex and management unit of banding. 1/ Area Totals Banded Fort Collins 998 Denver Greeley 1,120 Greeley Fort Morgan 973 Fort Morgan Sterling 766 Sterling Julesburg 956 Bonny Reservoir 1,017 Adults Hale Female --'C'-"-' RecovRecovBanded ered Banded ered __ Immatures Female RecovRecovBanded ered Banded ered Male 485 11 119 6 238 6 156 3 609 10 128 o 241 8 142 2 12 103 2 321 6 126 1 7 114 3 90 2 35 o 52,' 558 7 107 -201 3 5 90 3 615 9 167 1 148 2 87 o ~------~~~--~--~~~--~~--~~~--~----~~--~-TOTALS 5,830 3,217 56 738 15 1,239 29 636 9 Average 1st Year 1.7% Recovery Rates 1.4% 2.0% 2.3% 1/ No birds were banded in the Arkansas Valley in 1964-65. �- 137 '- Table 7. -- Relative recovery rate method estimates of survival and mortality of 1963-64 banded mallards during the 1964 hunting season, by age and sex groups at time of banding and for all males and females. No. Recoveries Recovery Rates Each Year Each Year After After Banding Banding Number 1 2 1 2 Banded Age And Sex Year of Banding Immature Males 1963-64 1964-65 1,236 1,239 29 Immature Females 1963-64 1964-65 679 636 9 Adult Males 1963-64 1964-65 2,176 3,217 56 Adult Females 1963-64 1964-65 484 738 15 All Males 1963-64 1964-65 3,412 4,456 85 All Females 1963-64 1964-65 1,163 1,374 24 1/ 24 .0194 .0234 .0044 3 .0142 48 .0221 .0174 5 .829 .171 .310 .690 1.1 1.270 .0103 .507 .0211 1.105 .0069 .394 .0203 72 Survival Mortality Rate Rate .493 .0191 8 .606 .0175 No mortality rate can be shown as survival rate is over 100 percent. does indicate a low mortality rate, however. It It is obvious that survival rate estimates from the data vary greatly throughout Table 7.. They range from 31.0 percent survival in the immature female calculation to about 127 percent survival in the adult male figure, the latter which, of course, is impossible. Even when age groups are combined and estimates were made only for males and females, the influence of many second year adult male recoveries overrides any sense of logic and the results still indicate over 100 percent survival of 1963-64 banded males through the 1964 hunting season. Therefore, we have little to go on in estimating mortality for the above period other than the fact that we have considerably more recoveries from males than females • .Thus, we should probably put our faith in the indicated survival rates for males, both adult and immature, and s,ay that it looks as if at least 80 percent of the male mallards survived the 1964 hunting season to the start of the 1965 season; and possibly more. Females probably did not survive that well due to greater natural mortality during nesting, but they may have survived nearly as well as the males. Sample sizes were very small for females but this may not have been due simply because they were not present during the 1964 season as will be discussed briefly in the section on hunting pressure surveys. In summation, it seems that the two mallard limit in 1964 worked as a tool for stockpiling Colorado wintering mallards. Recoveries in 1965-66 from the 1963-64 and 1964Migration and Harvest Patterns: The tables are arranged 65 bandings are shown in Tables 8 and 9, respectively. recovery estimated most logical for analysis of by groups of states or areas of �- 138 - data" on migration. Results of Work Plan 3, Job 2 (Funk 1966) indicated the Central Flyway should be split into at least two units; one east and one west of the 100th meridian which runs north and south from central North Dakota through west Texas. Thus, data in these two tables are presented on the basis of this split, plus recoveries in the Mississippi and Pacific Flyways, and Canada. Table 8. -- Harvest locations of mallards banded in eastern Colorado in 1963-64 and recovered in 1965-66 by areas of recovery, sex, and age at time of banding. Adult Recovery Location Canada Alberta Saskatchewan Sub-totals Pacific Flyway Montana (west) Colorado (west) Washington Sub-totals Mississippi Flyway Minnesota Illinois Missouri Arkansas Louisiana Sub-totals Totals Female Male Female No. % No. % No. % 3 3 6 6.3 o 4.2 12.5 1 20.0 ~ 1 ~ 1 0 2.1 64.6 6.2 ~ 72 9 o O~O o 3 60.0 12 0.0 2 1 Central Flyway West of 100th Meridian Montana (east) 1 Colorado (east) 31 Nebraska (west) 3 Texas (west) 0 Sub-totals 35 Central Flyway East of 100th Meridian South Dakota (east) Nebraska (east) Kansas (east) Texas (east) Sub-totals Immature Male 1 2 0 2.1 4.1 0.0 o o 3 o --hl: 4 8.3 o 2 4.2 a 0.0 0.0 1 o 2 4.2 1 o 0.0 2.1 0.0 o o o o o 0.0 1 0.0 2.1 o o o o o o 48 100.0 5 1 o ~ 60.0 o a 0 1 "1 20.0 No. % o 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 50.0 o 8.3 o o 0.0 33.4 0.0 0.0 4.2 15 ~ 62.5 0.0 1 a 4.2 0.0 0.0 ~ 0.0 0.0 20.0 ~ 20.0 o o 1 1 o 0.0 33.4 a o o a 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 o o 0.0 0.0 ~ 12.5 1 3 1 33~3 33.3 o 0.0 4.1 0.0 2 8.3 1 4.2 1 o 2 0.0 1 4.2 0.0 0.0 o 0.0 1 4.2 0.0 o o o o 0.0 1 0.0 0.0 4.1 12.5 o 3 1 0.0 33.3 0.0 33.3 100.0 24 100.0 3 100.0 1 0.0 0.0 �- 139 - Table 9. -- Harvest locations of mallards banded in eastern Colorado in 1964-65 and recovered in 1965-66 by areas of recovery, sex, and age at time of banding. Adult % Female No. % Immature Male Female No. % No. % 7 3 1 11 12.5 5.3 1.8 19.6 3 0 0 3 20.0 0.0 0.0 20.0· 3 1 0 4 10.3 3.5 0.0 l3.8 2 0 0 2 22.2 0.0 0.0 22.2 Central Flyway West of 100th Meridian Montana (east) 0 Colorado (east) 36 North Dakota (west) 0 Nebraska (west) 4 Kansas (west) 0 Texas (west) 0 Sub-totals 40 0.0 64.3 0.0 7.1 0.0 0.0 71.4 1 7 0 0 1 1 10 6.7 46.6 0.0 0.0 6.7 66.7 0 12 3 3 1 0 19 0.0 41.4 10.3 10.3 3.5 0.0 65.5 0 4 0 0 0 0 4 0.0 44.5 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 44.5 Central Flyway East of 100th Meridian North Dakota (east) South Dakota (east) Nebraska (east) Sub-totals 1 0 0 1 1.8 0.0 0.0 1.8 0 1 1 2 0.0 6.7 6.6 13.3 0 1 1 2 0.0 3.5 7.0 0 0 0 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Pa cific Flyway Hontana (west) Wyoming (west) Idaho Arizona Sub-totals 1 0 1 0 2 1.8 0.0 1.8 0.0 3.6 0 0 0 0 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0 1 1 1 3 0.0 3.4 3.4 3.5 10.3 3 0 0 0 3 33.3 0.0 0.0 0.0 33.3 Mississippi Flyway Iowa Hississippi Louisiana Sub-totals 1 0 1 2 1.8 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0 3.6 0 0 0 0 1 0.0 3.4 0.0 3.4 0 0 0 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Totals 56 100.0 15 100.0 29 100.0 9 100.0 Recovery Location No. Canada Alberta Saskatchewan Manitoba Sub-totals Male ~ ~ 1) ~ Results of tabulations in Tables 8 and 9 indicate very similar harvest patterns to those found in previous years (Funk 1965b and 1966). Eastern Colorado banded birds are harvested mainly in the proposed western portion of the Central Flyway, and Alberta and Saskatchewan are the major harvest areas in Canada. Probably only 15 to 20 percent of the total recoveries come from other areas. Most �- 140 - conclusions will have to wait until final analysis, but the indication is that division of the Central Flyway based on the 100th Meridian is quite valid. Also, there seems to be little difference in harvest patterns between second year recovery data (Table 8) and first year recovery data (Table 9) at least as far as limited numbers of recoveries permits. The degree to which Colorado winter banded birds returning'to Central Flyway Colorado are harvested In the vicinity of trapping is illustrated in Tables 10 and 11 for 1963-64 and 1964-65 banded birds, respectively. Units of banding are listed down the sides of each table and units of recovery are listed across the tops. The majority of birds are harvested in the same units in which they were banded. The groupings of units in the tables are suggested to be valid from prior studies (Funk 1966). Units 1, 2 and 9 were found to be closely associated; units 3, 4 and 6 one grou.p and the Arkansas Valley mallards seem to belong to another group. Results of data from the 1965-66 season seem to be similar to past findings for all sex and age classes. Table 10. -- Numbers recovered in Central at time of banding. and recovery locations of mallards banded in 1963-64 and Flyway Colorado, 1965-66, by unit of banding, sex, and age �- 141 - Table 11. -- Numbers and recovery locations of mallards banded in 1964-65 arld recovered in Centra11~lyway Colorado, 1965-66, by unit of banding, sex, and age at time of banding. Colorado Unit of Banding Northeast 1 2 9 Sample Size Colorado Unit of Recovery Northeast North-central Southeast 1 2 3 6 9 4 10 Other 15 4 6 4 1 0 0 0 5 1 0 0 3 Adult Male 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 6 9 0 1 0 0 1 0) 0 0 0 4 1 0 7 0 0 1 0 0 0 Northeast 1 2 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 Adult Female 0 0 0 0).\ 0 0 0 0 0 0 North-central 3 4 1 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Immature Female 1 0 0 ·0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 North-central 3 4 6 7 1 4 1 0 2 1 0 Northeast 1 1 1 0 0 InnnatureMale 0 0 0 North-central 3 4 6 3 3 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 2 3 Northeast 1 1 0 0 0 North-central 4 6 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 2 1 0 ]j No banding was accomplished in southeast Colorado (Arkansas Valley) in 1965-66. Wing Surveys: Federal and state wing surveys were again operated in Colorado during the 1965 hunting season to obtain sex and age ratios in the harvest of mallards. The tesults are listed in Tables 12 and 13 by areas and units of sampling. Sample sizes are smaller than.those obtained in 1964 (Funk 1965b), again mostly due to the one mallard limit. As in 1964, the results differ from each other somewhat and, in the final analysis, they w{ll probably be.treated as one survey. �- 142 However, both 1965 surveys, as such, indicate that adult males do not make up as large a portion of the harvest in the Arkansas Valley as they do in northeast and north-central Colorado. This was also found in 1964 results (Funk 1965b). Table 12. -- Age and sex composition of the 1965 mallard harvest in eastern Colorado as estimated by·state ,,,,ing surveys. Adult Immature Sample Size Totals Area Unit Male Female Male Female Northeast Colorado 1 17 5 22 (56.4%) 4 0 4 (10.3%) 8 0 8 (20.5%) 3 2 5 (12.8%) 32 7 39 2 North-central Colorado 3 6 54 15 69 (62.2%) 7 2 9 (8.1%) 14 4 18 (16.2%) 11 4 15 (13.5%) 86 25 111 Southeast Colorado 10 12 13 0 33 14 47 (46 1%) 1 9 6 16 (15.7%) 2 16 5 23 (22.5%) 1 14 1 4 72 26 102 0 --u; (15 7%) 0 Ratios of immatures to adults and also males to females by age class for all of eastern Colorado were obtained for the 1965 hunting season from figures in Tables 12 and 13 combined. The 1965 data indicate a ratio of 0.54 immatures per adult in the harvest in comparison to a 0.35 immatures per adult ratio in 1964 (Funk 1965b). The male-female ratio in 1965 for adults was 3.65 males per female as compared to a 3.14 to 1 ratio in 1964. For immatures, the male-female ratio in 1965 was 1.64 males per female while the 1964 ratio was indicated to have been only 1.14 males per female. It appears that we not only harvested proportionally more young in 1965 than in 1964, but selectivity for males by hunters also seems to have increased in 1965. A good production year plus the fact that the bag limit was lower in 1965 than in 1964 could be the reasons behind the proportional increase in young in the 1965 bag as fewer young may have been harvested in the northern states and provinces and more allowed to continue to Colorado. Increases in males in the bag could be brought about by the one mallard limit in which case hunters may be more inclined to pick drakes over hens. Hunting Pressure Surveys: During the previous segment (Funk 1965b) an att~mpt was made to see if there was a similar relationship between estimates of hunting pressure on birds of the year as determined by fluoroscopy and estimates on hunting pressure from surveys on the number of hunters per number of birds censused. This was compared between six of the seven study areas as there was no banding or fluoroscopy work done in the Arkansas Valley in 1964-65. The �- 143 Table 13. -- Age and sex composition of the 1965 mallard harvest in eastern Colorado as estimated by federal wing surveys. Adult Area County Male N. E. Colo. (Units 1, 2 and 9) Logan Phillips Sedgewick Washington Yuma 35 1 N. C. Colo. (Units 3, 4 and 6) S. E. Colo. (Units 10, 12 and 13) II Boulder Larimer Morgan ll Adams Weld Arapahoe Jefferson Prowers ~ent Pueblo Otero o Itmnature Male Female Sample Size Totals Female 4 15 7 61 2 3 1 1 7 .0 2 1 1 o o o 2 4 9 5 24 (48.9%) (10.2%) 12 (13.6%)- 88 (27.3%) 15 5 3 7 6 15 7 42 2 8 6 33 1 1 6 2 1 6 24 10 184 o 2 o 1 311 (21.2%) 40 (12.9%) 1 o 9 6 3 3 1 21 1 6 43 3 22 16 100 27 o o o 156 (50.2'70) 49 (15.7%) 4 4 4 8 1 o 1 o 13 1 9 (34.2/:,) (23.7%) 2 12 (31. 6%) ---.J! 4 (10.5%) ...ll 38 34 5 3 38 Unit 2 portion of Morgan County included with north-central Colorado data. results of the comparison suggest.edthat it was not possible to do this, due to many factors. The.greatest factor is probably that estimates of hunters present and birds censused in Colorado by unit may be valid but these cannot be compared with fluoroscopy results because not all of the shot in the birds were obtained in Colorado. Possibly the number of hunters per number of birds present by study unit is the most valid estimate of hunting pressure in Colorado that we have. The results of the various surveys are shown in Table 14 without further comment at this time. �- 144 Table 14. -- Data from various surveys for use in comparison of hunting pressure between study units, 1965-66. Study Unit Number of Percent Immature Numbers of 1 Estimated Numbers Hunters Per Male Mallards Ducks Present _I of Hunters ~I 100 Birds Censused With Shot 11 Northeast 1 2 9 North-central 3 4 6 Southeast 10 20,600 24,900 22,000 816 599 204 31,500 36,820 48,505 2,103 1,619 3,098 23,958 1,644 II January Inventory, Table 4. 11 (Grieb and Hunter, 1966). 11 Table 3. 4.0 2.4 0.9 5 9 6.8 8 1 6.7 6 4 0 5 5 5.8 8.6 6 9 5.2 404 0 0 0 0 CONCLUSIONS The study seems to be progressing quite well. We are attempting to rid ourselves of some of the biases involved, such as trapping bias in age and sex ratios. Unfortunately, we have had two seasons of low bag limits in 1964 and 1965, thus, reducing the number of recoveries obtained for estimates on mortality, recovery rates and migration patterns. However, most data gathered seem to be in line with results of analyses of prior banding data (Funk 1966) which strongly indicate the Central Flyway could and should be divided into at least two management units for better utilization and, if needed, protection of our mallard resource. REFERENCES Bureau of Sport Fisheries and Wildlife. 1964. Waterfowl banding course and instructor guides. Div. of Wildl., U. S. Bur. of Spt. Fish & Wildl., Wash. Feb. 76 pp. Funk, H. D. 1964. Winter duck banding in eastern Colorado. and Parks Dept. Game Res. Rept. October, PP. 79-87. Colo. G~me, Fish 1965b. Evaluation of data to determine the range and annual mortality of mallard flocks wintering in Colorado. Coloo Game, Fish and Parks Dept. Res. Rept. October, pp. 137-160. �- 145 Funk, H. D. 1966. Analysis of mallard recoveries from birds banded in eastern Colorado prior to 1962. Colo. Game, Fish and Parks Dept. Res. Rept. October, in press. Grieb, J. R. and G. N. Hunter. 1966 Colorado small game hunter harvest survey 1965. Colo. Game, Fish and Parks Dept. Repto, Fed. Aid Proj. W-88-R. July l~ 23 pp. mimeo. 0 Prepared by: Howard D. Funk Asst. Wildlo Researcher Date: October, 196~6~ _ Approved by: Jack R. Grieb Project Leader Ferd Cp Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator ��October, 1966 . - 147 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO --------~==~~----------- Project No. w-88-R-ll Work Plan No. 4 Title of Job: Period Covered: Personnel: Migratory Bird Investigations Job No. 3 Trapping and Banding Doves April 1, 1965 through :Ma.rch31,1966 U. S. Game Management Agents Charles Hayes, Jack Randall and Jack Frost, and Howard D. Funk ABSTRACT During the summer of 1965, 784 mourning doves were banded in Colorado by U. S. Game Management Agents and State personnel .• Of these, 615 were banded near Stapleton International Airport near Denver. Sixty-four of the remaining were banded near Longmont and 105 in the Lamar-Fort Lyon-Pritchett area in southeast Colorado. Peak of hatching for the Denver banded birds, as estimated from primary feather molt patterns of immature doves, took place between June 10 and 15. A wing survey conducted during hunting season,with the cooperation of Colorado Wildlife Conservation Officers and U. S. Game Management Agents, indicates that about 67 percent of the doves in the 1965 hunter bag were immatures. Aging these young by wings suggested that most young present in the bag were hatched between June 15 and July 20. This suggests that many of the earlier hatched birds had already left Colorado before hunting season. �- 148- Recommendations: hunting season. Longmont areas. ing season. The quota for 1966 will again be 2,000 doves banded before Efforts should be made to continue trapping in the Denver and The wing survey should be continued and expanded during hunt- Objectives: (1) To obtain migration, life history and annual mortality doves raised in and/or migrating through Colorado. (2) To evaluate the dove wing aging method hatching dates and age ratio data. (3) To evaluate the effects of hunting seasons in Colorado on the dove population by age, sex and period. in Colorado information regarding for use in obtaining and other states Procedures: As in the previous segment, attempts were made to trap and band mourning doves in southeastern Colorado near Pritchett and also near Longmont (Funk, 1965). After a time, the Pr i.t.c hc rt traps were moved to the Fort Lyon area in an -attempt to improve t rapp inr; -'ucc:ess. An area closed to public access near Stapleton International Airfield near Denver was located in which many doves were present. Here, old road beds offered good trap sites. Proso millet seemed to be the ideal bait to use in the latter area but milo worked best in the Lamar area. Trapping again was accomplished by use of welded wire cage traps. All trapped birds were aged and sexed. One of the objectives was to band as many nestlings as possibl~ before they fledged, assign an age in days to them as close to correct as possible, and then retrap them at various times later in the season. Thus, we could evaluate the wing aging method and make our own chart on ages of birds with respect to their wing primary feather molt pattern. This attempt proved fruitless mainly because the bander was called on other assignments during periods when many doves were of bandable size. Only a few nestlings were banded. In the fall, wings were collected by-Bureau and State personnel to obtain age ratios in the-harvest and ages of immatures in the bag. Each wing was placed in an envelope on which was recorded the date and location of harvest. Approximately 450 collection envelopes were distributed to cooperating personnel throughout most of the state. The wings were examined after hunting season and the data tallied by area of harvest. Results: Lamar Area -- One hundred and five doves were banded in the Pritchett and Fort Lyon trapping sites south and west of Lamar. Of these, 7 were nestlings, 81 were immatures which had already fledged and 17 were adults. Fourteen of the adult birds were males and 3 were females. The Pritchett area had been a fair trapping location the previous year but in 1965 the numbers of doves present were extremely low. After about a week of poor success, the traps were moved to the Fort Lyon area where doves seemed quite numerous. However, trapping in this area also proved slow even though a variety of sites and types of bait were used. Even trapping in abandoned �- 149 - . feed lots, a type ot ttapping usually quite successful, was slow and erratic. Attempts to band in this area were conducted in July and part of August. Longmont Area.'-- Sixty-four doves were banded about three miles east of Longmont. Fifty 'of these were adults (31 males and 19 females) and only 14 were young. As determined by examination of wing molt, all of the young birds were only a month old or yoUnger. This area is probably a nesting area primarily and not congregation area for young birds, at least during the p~riod of trapping in 1965 (the end of June to mid-July). Here again, trapping success was considered poor with the big problem being inability to get the birds to enter the traps. a Denver Area -- Trapping in the Stapleton Airport area near Denver was the bright spot in dove trapping wtltk in 1965. Agent Jack R. Randall banded 615 doves there from July 9-23 and August 10-14 (Table 1). Only 10 of these were adult birds (all males). Many doves were reported to be present at this site every day and the area was undoubtedly a staging area for young birds. Proso millet worked the best for bait. t Traps wer~ placed on rbads in this location and very ,little trap site maintenanCe wa.snecessary. The traps had to be checked usually three times a day as there was no available shade. The population was apparently very dynamic as only 16 birq9 were 'recaptured after being banded. i, Table l.--Numbers of mourning doves banded in the Denver area by date, age and sex, and wing primary feather molt data for immature doves. Date Banded (1965) 7-9 7-10 7-11 7-12 7-13 7-14 7-15 7-16 7-17 7-18 7-19 7-20 7-21 7-22 7-23 8-10 8-11 8-12 8-13 8-14 TOTALS Immature Last Prima.ry Feather Molted 1 234 5 Adult Male o 1 8 6 1 10 18 1 4 8 1 1 9 23 15 3 7 10 12 11 13 10 11 5 1 1 4 11 2 13 1 1 5 2 4 7 1 9 2 11 2 12 3 10 99 171 1 12 22 11 15 11 3 5 5 a 1 12 7 17 11 1 6 7 1 7 7 1 3 1 3 8 6 12 9 12 20 9 3 1 1 9 2 5 6 171 6 5 4 3 1 1 2 4 4 2 1 1 1 1 108 41 9 6 9 ": 1 2 2 1 1 2 5 1 1 Daily Running Totals Totals 2 43 68 38 72 55 7 14 24 32 36 36 42 57 37 4 2 8 31 7 2 45 113 151 223 278 285 299 323 355 391 427 469 526 563 567 569 577 608 615 615 615 �- 150 - By back-dating each bird from date of capture to date of hatching, through use of the primary molt aging technique (Allen 1963), the peak of hatching for this group of doves was estimated to have occurred between June 10 and 15. The earliest date of hatching was approximately April 26. By mid-May, hatching increased sharply until it reached the mid-June Peak. This sequence of hatching events is similar to the 1964 hatching period (Funk, 1965). Hunting Season Bag Checks: Hunter bag checks conducted by Bureau and State personnel suggested that 66.5 percent of the doves in the bag were immature birds. This seems to be a healthy situation from the standpoint of game management. The estimate was based on a sample of 382 wings collected mainly on the eastern slope of Colorado. However, most samples from all areas of the state quite consistently indicated the percent of immatures in the bag was between 60 and 70 percent. Examination of wings from immature birds in the bag also allowed the estimate that most of the young harvested were hatched between June 15 and July 20. As stated previously, peak of hatching of doves banded in the Denver area was about mid-June. Therefore, the majority of immature birds in the bag were hatched later than most of the young banded in the Denver area. It is generally known that young doves congregate in areas of readily available food, water and shelter and often move from area to area in large numbers. Thus, it is entirely possible that many of the early hatched birds in Colorado moved completely out of the state before hunting season. REFERENCES Allen, J. M. 1963. Primary feather molt rate of wild immature doves in Indiana. Ind. Dept. of Conser., Game Res. Sect. Circular No.4. Indianapolis, Aug. 7pp. Funk, H. D. 1965. Trapping and banding doves. Dept. Game Res. Rept. Oct. pp. 161-169. Prepared Date: by: Howard D. Funk Asst. Wildlife Researcher ~O~c~t~o~b~e~r~,_=1~9~6~6 Colo. Game, Fish and Parks Approved _ by: Jack R. Grieb Project Leader Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �- 151 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO ------~~~~~-------- Project No. w-88-R-ll* Work Plan No. 5 Migratory Bird Investigations Job No. 2 Title of Job: Evaluation of the Impact of the Costilla Project on Migratory Birds and Hunting Opportunities in the San Luis Valley, Period Covered: Personnel: April 1, 1965 to March 31, 1966 Richard M. Hopper, Donald M. Hoffman ABSTRACT 1. Eastdale Reservoir No.1, the only portion of the proposed Costilla Project located in Colorado, is about three miles south of Mesita in Costilla County. The overall project calls for increasing irrigation water to lands in northcentral New Mexico and south-central Colorado. 2. The project plans to restore the dam at Eastdale Reservoir No. 1 to avoid excess leakage and to increase its capacity from 240 to 359 surface acres (1,760 to 3,800 acre-feet). 3. Wildlife losses will amount to 119 acres of cottontail rabbit habitat and the same quantity of potential sage grouse range. 4. In addition, some loss in mourning dove nesting habitat and production will occur. 5. Waterfowl habitat will increase by 149 acres, resulting in modest increases of spring migrants and breeding pairs. 6. Pheasant habitat will increase in quality and quantity on farmlands as a result of more available irrigation water, which in turn, will increase hunter-use and pheasant harvest on these lands. * This report also fulfills Federal Aid obligations for W-37-R-19, Work Plan 16, Job 5 (Water Resources Development StudieS-Costilla Project, Eastdale Reservoir). Migratory bird and upland game information derived from these two jobs was combined to formulate one report. �- 152 - 7. Big game and scaled quail will not be affected Eastda1e Reservoir No.1. 8. As wildlife enhancement features, we recommend a m~n~mum pool of -170 surface acres at Eastda1e Reservoir No. 1 and habitat improvement of the marsh area below the dam. These features would increase waterfowl' production and yield an estimated 300 man-days of waterfowl hunting where none exists now, 9. Additional enhancement recommendations include the purchase or lease of the 125-acre marsh below the dam and 160 acres above the proposed high water line all around the reservoir for use as a wildlife production and public recreation area. 10. It is further recommended that the Colorado·Game, Fish and Parks Department be granted the responsibility of administering the wildlife resource and recreational activities associated with Eastdale Reservoir No. 1 and adjoining land recommended. for purchase or lease. by the work proposed at �- 153 - EVALUATION OF THE IMPACT OF THE COSTILLA PROJECT ON MIGRATORY BIRDS AND HUNTING OPPORTUNITIES IN THE SAN LUIS VALLEY Richard M. Hopper Donald M. Hoffman* INTRODUCTION This report constitutes the Colorado Game, Fish'and Parks Department's contribution to the evaluation of the Costilla Project as it relates to wildlife and associated recreational opportunities. Most of the Costilla Project will occur in the neighboring State of New Mexico. However, information contained in this report applies only to that portion of the project which will fall within the boundaries of Colorado; namely, Eastdale Reservoir No. 1. The Costilla Project (Eastdale Reservoir No.1) was studied with the following basic objectives in mind: (1) to determine losses in wildlife habitat, productions, and hunting that will result from the proposed operation; (2) to determine probable wildlife benefits and problems derived from the project; and (3) to formulate management plans and recommendations which may be incorporated into the Costilla Project to mitigate and./or enhance the wildlife resource and public hunting opportunity in the San Luis Valley. BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE COSTILLA PROJECT The Costilla Project, located in north-central New Mexico and south-central. Colorado, proposes to improve the efficiency of storage, regulation, and distribution of water for irrigation of approximately 8,000 acres of irrigable land in Taos County, New Mexico, and Costilla County, Colorado. This acreage will be served through the regulation of water in three diversion dams; two on Costilla Creek in New Mexico and one on Culebra Creek in Colorado. The existing Costilla Reservoir and the proposed Amalia Reservoir are part of the project plans in New Mexico and will receive no further discussion here. The existing Eastdale Reservoir No. I comprises the major feature of the Costilla Project in Colorado. This small irrigation reservoir occurs on Culebra Creek about three miles south of the town of Mesita in Costilla County in the extreme southeastern part of the San Luis Valley. Eastdale Reservoir No. 1 is supplied with available flows from Culebra Creek during the non-irrigation season and by diversions from Costilla Creek during winter and early spring. Project plans call for restoration of the dam at Eastdale Reservoir No. 1 to avoid excessive leakage and to create a larger reservoir capacity. Present reservoir capacity at effective full pool is 1,760 acre-feet and 240 surface acres. Following restoration of the dam, the reservoir will have a full pool * Hoffman's information in this report fulfills his reporting responsibilities for W-37-R-19, Work Plan 16, Job 5 (Water Resources Development Studies--Costilla Project, Eastdale Reservoir). �- 154 - of 3,800 acre-feet and 359 surface acres. based on irrigation needs, with the water drawn to lowest levels in September. The pattern of operation will be level being high in late spring and Vegetative types surrounding Eastdale Reservoir No. 1 consist largely of sagebrush flats. Irrigated and dryland farms are found to the north in the vicinity of Mesita and to the south, southwest, and southeast of the reservoir, particU-larly' in the Eastdale Community area. A marsh is presently located below the darn. To the northwest, the sagebrush gives way to shortgrass and weed types, probably resulting largely from heavy sheep useage. Pinon-juniper types are found approximately seven miles to the east of the reservoir along the rims of Pedro Mesa. Considering the area which will be flooded through rehabilitation, the vegetation of the bottomland to the northeast of the present reservoir consists of cottonwoods along the edges and willows, weeds, and grass species. Stickweed, Russian thistle, annual grasses, and similar species are common. Western wheatgrass is also found in some areas. Within the sagebrush flats surrounding the reservoir to the north, east, and south, rabbitbrush, snakeweed, stickwood, Russian thistle, blue grama grass, and ring muhly grass are common species in mixture with sagebrush. Big sagebrush density varies from dense to sparse. A more detailed description of the Costilla Project can be found in the Bureau of Reclamation and Bureau of Sport Fisheries and Wildlife reports. WILDLIFE Without Habitat and Wildlife VALUES Costilla Project Populations Migratory birds.--The maximum amount of waterfowl habitat presently associated with Eastdale Reservoir No.1 is 425 acres. This amount consists of 240 surface acres of water above the darn (at full pool), 60 acres of adjacent shoreline vegetation, and about 125 acres of marsh habitat directly below the darn. This maximum acreage is realized only during the spring prior to the beginning of the irrigation season. Irrigation demands gradually reduce the water level during the summer, and by September or October the reservoir becomes dry, or nearly so. Moderate numbers of ducks use Eastdale Reservoir No. 1 during spring migration. The full condition of the reservoir at this time also attracts a small number of breeders. These ducks find some suitable nes ting habitat in the adjacent shoreline vegetation, consisting largely of willows, mixed grasses, and weeds. However, poor brood-rearing habitat exists above the darn because of reduced water levels in the summer which results in mudflats that separate open water and escape cover along the shoreline. Seepage from the reservoir has produced a marshy area of about 125 acres below the darn. A relatively stable water level in this area has resulted in the �- 155 - establishment of emergent aquatic vegetation, making it the best duck production habitat associated with the reservoir. Stable water levels exist here, at least through the brood-rearing season (August). A resident population of Canada gees~ occurs in the Monte Vista area of the San Luis Valley, but, as yet, these birds have not spread as far as Eastdale Reservoir No.1. Wintering geese from the north are not attracted to this reservoir because of its dry condition in the fall and winter. A small and insignificant breeding population of mourning doves utilizes willows and cottonwood trees associated with Eastdale Reservoir No. 1 as nesting habitat. Somewhat more important is the use of the reservoir as a watering area by late summer concentrations of doves. However, its full potential is not realized for this purpose because of the absence of grain or sunflower fields a short distance from the reservoir. Upland game.--According to local residents, pheasants are rarely if ever found in the vicinity of the reservoir pr oper , although a few are known to occur in the irrigated lands of the Eastdale Connnunity to the southwest of the site. The nearest irrigated. lands are about one-half mile southwest of the reservoir below the present dam. Higher populations of pheasants are found north of Mesita in the San Acacio area according to local residents. Field surveys tended to substantiate these statements. Populations of scaled quail were located near the village of Jarosa, approximately four miles south of Eastdale Reservoir No.1, during the early 1950's according to Bert Baker (Hoffman, 1965). None, however, have been seen in the area for a number of years. It is thought that coveys move into the lower San Luis Valley of Colorado in some years from occupied ranges in New Mexico. These apparently are not able to survive and increase due to high elevations and climatic conditions. The extensive areas of sagebrush and complimentary types within the San Luis Valley are historical sage grouse range (Rogers, 1964), although none are found at the present time. The sagebrush vegetative type in Costilla County is also listed as one of 10 areas reconnnended for sage grouse transplanting. The quality of the sagebrush vegetative type varies from areas of dense, tall sagebrush to areas of scattered clumps of big sagebr:ush with annual weeds and shortgrasses, particularly in areas heavily pastured by domestic sheep. Field surveys during the summer of 1965 indicated a fair to good population of cottontail rabbits around the reservoir site. These animals utilize all types of vegetation adjacent to the reservoir for food and cover. Big game.--Local residents reported prong-horned antelope herds of 50 to '60 head sometimes water at the reservoir. Mule deer have occasionally been seen at the reservoir and two elk were reportedly observed last year. Deer and elk probably normally range in the Ute Mountain area in New Mexico. During severe winters deer and elk herd.s may be forced onto the sagebrush flats surrounding. the reservoir. However, any use must be considered insignificant, with the possible exception of antelope. �- 156 - Harvest and Hunter-Use Only ducks, mourning doves, and cottontail rabbits are presently hunted and harvested at Eastdale Reservoir No. 1. Most of the other species mentioned in the preceding section are either absent or rare. Some antelope are harvested outside the boundaries of the reservoir. Even ducks, doves, and cottontails are subject to little harvest, largely because of low hunting pressures. The insignificance of Eastdale Reservoir No. 1 as a duck harvest area is obvious when we consider that only an estimated 33 hunters took 261 ducks in all of Costilla County in 1964 (Grieb and Hunter, 1965). Duck harvest and hunter-use is also hindered at this reservoir because of its low water levels in the fall and winter. Substantia:l numbers of ducks are available to utilize the reservoir during the hunting season, but the lack of an adequate minimum pool prevents this. On August 24, 1965, about 225 ducks of five species were observed here. The reservoir was still about one-fourth full at this time. A permanent pool of sufficient size in the fall and winter would do much to . improve duck hunting at Eastdale Reservoir No. 1. Moderate numbers of mourning doves and cottontail rabbits occur during the hunting season at the reservoir site. However, as mentioned above, harvest is insignificant because of low hunting pressur~. With Costilla Habitat and Wildlife Project Populations Migratory birds.--Following establishment of the Costilla Project, Eastdale Reservoir No. 1 will provide an additional 119 surface acres of water and about 30 acres of shoreline vegetation which will be available as resting and breeding habitat for waterfowl. The habitat area below the dam is expected to be unchanged. Thus, the maximum amount of waterfowl habitat with the project will be about 574 acres, or an increase of 149 acres over chat which presently exists. This difference will undoubtedly produce modest increases in waterfowl use during the spring migration period and during the breeding season. Seasonal drawdowns due to irrigation demands will still eliminate most of the waterfowl habitat by September or October of each year. Thus, habitat conditions during the fall and winter will be essentially the same with the project as it is without the project, simply because of irrigation drawdown. Success of brood-rearing will not be increased with the project. Mourning dove numbers and habitat are not expected to change significantly with the project. However, some loss of nesting habitat will undoubtedly result when existing cottonwood trees are killed by flooding because of the increase in reservoir capacity. This loss is expected to be slight. �- 157 - Upland game.--The area to be inundated (119 acres) must be classified as sub-marginal pheasant and scaled quail ranges since these species have not, in recent years, been seen in the immediate vicinity of the reservoir area. Thus, enlarging of the reservoir will not affect pheasant and quail numbers and habitat at the reservoir site. However, if such are the Bureau of Reclamation's plans, additional irrigation water provided by the project to the Eastdale Community area should increase and improve pheasant habitat, as well as increase pheasant numbers on the farmlands surrounding Eastdale Reservoir No. 1.' ' It is apparent from the number of abandoned farms observed that insufficient water has been available in recent years. Principal crops presently raised in the irrigated areas, including lettuce, potatoes, oats, barley, wheat, and peas, probably would not change to any large extent with increased irrigation water. Scaled quail would not be affected in any way as a result in increased irrigation wa t er , The 119 acres to be inundated by the project represent fair to good cottontail rabbit range and potential sage grouse range. Such habitat would be lost indefinitely with the project. This acreage, however, is rather insignificant when considering the entire San Luis Valley. Harvest and Hunter-Use Waterfowl harvest and hunter-use are expected to remain insignificant with the project because irrigation drawdowns in late summer and fall will continue to deplete the reservoir. Also, significant changes in dove and cottontail harvest and hunting pressure are not likely to occur. Additional irrigation water available from the enlargement of Eastdale Reservoir No. 1 should increase and improve pheasant habitat on some lands in Costilla County. Thus, hunting pressure and pheasant harvest are expected to increase with the project. The extent of this increase will depend upon the acreage of present farmland to receive supplemental irrigation water and the amount of new land to be put into crop production. CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS Losses vs. Gains With the Project Wildlife Colorado losses resulting from the installation (Eastdale Reservoir No.1) include: of the Costilla Project in in reduced nesting habitat and 1. Loss of cottonwood trees resulting production of mourning doves. 2. Loss of 119 acres of cottontail rabbit habitat. 3. Loss of 119 acres of potential sage grouse habitat. �-158 Wildlife Colorado - gains resulting from the installation (Eastdale Reservoir No.1) include: of the Costilla Project and breeding habitat in 1. Gain of 149 acres of resting for waterfowl. 2. Increase in quality and quantity of pheasant habitat on farmlands resulting from more available irrigation water. 3. Increase in hunting-use and pheasant harvest irrigation water from the project. on lands receiving In the overall analysis, gains appear to equal or slightly overshadow losses resulting from the project. Therefore, wildlife recommendations discussed be Low are of an enhancement na t.u re , rather than mitigation. Eastdale Reservoir No. 1 will probably be drawn down to the dry stage, or nearly so, every fall with or without the Costilla Project. Waterfowl hunting opportunities are practically nil under conditions such as this. If it was feasible to operate this reservoir so as to maintain a minimum pool of approximately 170 surface acres (IS-foot contour), waterfowl hunting opportunity would be greatly increased. Water would then be available to maintain constant water levels in the marsh area below the dam on a year-around basis. This l2S-acre area below the dam could be developed further to provide more attractive waterfowl hunting and production habitat. Improved habitat both above and be Low the dam would resul t in an estimated 300 man-days of wat er fow l hunting where none existed before. Duck production habitat could be improved below the dam by (1) constructing low dikes, (2) installing water control structures for controlling the distribution of water, and (3) controlling the quality and quantity of vegetation. Breeding pairs of ducks and duck production could be increased considerably over that which now exists. Eastdale Reservoir No.1 and adjacent lands are presently privately owned, and they are expected to remain so following completion of the project. Therefore, it has not been necessary for the construction agency (Bureau of Reclamation) to establish a proposed take-line. The project would apparently be just an agreement between the private landowner and the Bureau of Reclamation, with no change of landownership. The c::;olorado Game, Fish and Parks Department wishes to manage the reservoir as a wildlife and recreation area. Thus, it would be necessary for this Department, with the cooperation of the Bureau of Reclamation, to purchase or lease adequate lands adjacent to the reservoir for this purpose. Provisions for including a m~n~mum pool of 170 surface acres, for purchasing or leasing adequate management lands adjacent to Eastdale Reservoir No.1, including the marsh area below the dam, and for improving duck production habitat below the dam should constitute enhancement features eligible for cost-sharing under Public Law 89-72. Our Department has expressed a desire to participate in this cost-sharing program in regard to the above enhancement features of the Costilla �-159 - Project. Therefore, in order to realize the full potential of wildlife of this project, the Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department recommends that: 1. The conservation and development of wildlife be included among the purposes for which the pz oje'ct is authorized. 2. Operation of Eastdale Reservoir 170 surface acres for wildlife. 3. The Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department seek an agreement with the landowners involved to manage the wildlife resource and recreational activities at Eastda1e Reservoir No. 1. 4. The 125-acre marsh below Eastda1e Dam and 160 acres above the new high water Line all around the reservoir be purchased or leased on a costsharing basis and turned over to the Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department for administration, with the specific purpose of increasing wildlife production and many types of recreation opportunity. 5.A habitat improvement program be carried out in the area below the dam for the purpose of increasing waterfowl production and hunting opportunity. 6. Adequate public access roads be provided sides of Eastda1e Reservoir No. 1. LITERATURE No. 1 include a minimum pool of about to the north and south CITED Grieb, J. R., and G. N. Hunter. 1965. Colorado small game hunter harvest survey -- 1964. Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Dep t . , Fed. Aid Project W-88-R. 23 pp. Mimeo Hoffman, D. M. 1965. The scaled quail in Colorado -- range, popUlation status, and harvest. Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Dept. Tech. Pub1. No. 18. 47 pp. Rogers, G. E. 1964. Sage grouse investigations in Colorado. Fish and Parks Dept. Tech. Publ. No. 16. 132 pp. Prepared Date: by: Richard M. Hopper Assistant Wildlife Researcher O~c~t~o~b~e~r~~1~9~6~6~ _ Approved by: Colorado Game, ~J~a~c~k~R~.~G~r~1~·e~b~ _ Project Leader Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief ��October, 19bb - 161 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO --------~~~~~----------- Project No. w-88-R-ll* Work Plan No. 5 Migratory Bird Investigations Job No. . 3 ------------------------ Title of Job: Evaluation of the Impact of the Upper South Platte Project on Migratory Birds and Hunting Opportunities in the South Platte Valley Period Covered: Personnel: April 1, 1965 to March 31, 1966 Richard M. Hopper ABSTRACT (1) Hudson Reservoir, the only portion of the Upper South Platte Project of concern in this report, will inundate 3,850 acres of wildlife habitat when filled to the top of the active storage pool. This reservoir will be located about 30 miles northeast of Denver. (2) Migratory bird losses with the project will amount to 3,850 acres of low to high quality mourning dove habitat, resulting in a loss in production of 275 birds. (3) In addition, 250 man-days of dove hunting will be lost annually, amounting to an allllualloss of $1,277. (4) Waterfowl habitat will increase by 809 acres, with an expected increase in wintering populations of ducks and geese resulting from the overall.project. However, without the establishment of a public shooting area, the net gain to migratory bird hunting will be only about 250 DBn-days. As a result, gains with the project will not compensate for mourning doves losses. (5) The creation of a public shooting groUnds at Hudson Reservoir would increase migratory bird hunting in the area to an estimated 4,000 man-days annually. * This report was originally intended to be part of an overall report covering all species of wildlife associated with Hudson Reservoir. Reporting responsibilities were delegated to the author of this report. However, the migratory bird portion is reported separately because information on other species of wildlife will not be available until next segment. �- 162 (6) - In order to realize the full potential of the migratory bird resource at Hudson Reservoir, the Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department recommends that: r (a) The conservation and development of wildlife be included purposes for which the project is authorized. (b) A minimum (c) The project purchase in fee all lands and associated water rights within the take-line proposed in Figure 1 of this report. This take-line is expected to be somewhat larger than the one not yet established by the Bureau of Reclamation, but 2,500 acres of the additional land will mitigate mourning dove losses associated with the project as provided under the Fish and Wildlife Coordination Act. The remaining acreage would be an enhancement feature with fi:nancing available under the Federal Cost-sharing program (P. L. 89-72). (d) The Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department be given the responsibility for managing wildlife and recreational activities on project lands, and for improving and developing wildlife habitat thereon. (e) The Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department participate in the costsharing program available under Public Law 89-72 for financing Wildlife enhancement in the project area. (f) Clearing of the reservoir site be limited to that area lying below the top of the dead storage pool (elev. 5,044 ft.). (g) A zoning plan for Hudson Reservoir be developed cooperatively by the Bureau of Reclamation and the Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department to insure the availability of adequate and safe areas for hunting and fishing. pool of about 2,000 surface among the acres be established. �EVALUATION OF THE IMPACT OF THE UPPER SOUTH PLATTE PROJECT ON MIGRATORY BIRDS AND HUNTllifG OPPORTUNITIES IN" THE SOUTH PLATTE VALLEY Rl.c1:i.ird M. Hopper Introduction: This report constitutes the Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Departments contribution to the evaluation of the Upper South platte Unit as it relates to migratory birds and associated recreational opportunities. Proposed plans of the Upper South Platte Project consist of the following principal features: (1) Two Forks Reservoir on the South Platte River about one mile downstream from the confluence of the North Fork and the South Platte River; (2) Turkshead Reservoir also on the South Platte River about two miles downstream from the Two Forks Dam; and (3) Hudson Reservoir on Box Elder Creek about 30 airmiles northeast of Denver and about four miles southeast of the town of Hudson. Hudson Reservoir is the only portion of the entire project that will have a significant effect on migratory birds. Thus, information contained in this report is limited to the Hudson Reservoir segment of the Upper South Platte Unit. The Upper South Platte Unit (Hudson Reservoir) was studied with the following basic objectives in mind: (1) to determine losses in migratory bird habitat, production, and hunting that will result from the proposed operation; (2) to determine probable migratory bird benefits and problems derived from the project; and (3) to formulate management plans and recommendations which may be incorporated into the Upper South Platte Unit to mitigate and/or enhance the migratory bird resource and public hunting opportunity in the South platte Valley. Brief Description of the Upper South platte Unit The Upper South Platte proposes to provide additional industrial and municipal water to Denver and its suburbs. Other purposes will be flood control, irrigation, and hydroelectric power production. Two Forks Reservoir, to be located on the South platte River in mountainous terrain southwest of Denver, will store surplus flows of the South Platte River and its tributaries and discharges from the Harold D. Roberts Tunnel. Turkshead Reservoir will be constructed directly downstream from Two Forks Reservoir and will be used for hydroelectric power production and regulation of discharges from Two Forks Reservoir. Hudson Reservoir will be located on Box Elder Creek northeast of Denver in Adams and Weld counties. It will store and regulate return flows from Denver as well as flood flows. Some of its water will be used for irrigation, with the remainder to be pumped back to Denver for reuse by municipal and industrial concerns. The latter water will be treated as required. Hudson Reservoir will inundate the existing Horse Creek Reservoir, a small private reservoir, parts of Box Elder and Horse Creeks, some canals, and large areas of land downstream and west of Horse Creek Reservoir. Horse Creek Reservoir has a capacity of almost 17,000 acre-feet with a surface area of 724 acres. Hudson Reservoir will have a maximum capacity of 124,000 acre-feet and an area of 4,000 acres. Capacity to the top of the active storage pool will be 117,000 acre~feet, with a surface acreage of 3,850. Plans call for a minimum pool of 42,000 acre-feet with 1,950 surface acres. �- 164- Economy of the area surrounding the proposed Hudson Reservoir is farming and livestock raising. Both irrigated and dryland farming exist, with principal crops being corn, small grains, sugar beets, and alfalfa. Some native pasture occurs within the proposed Hudson Reservoir site. Migratory Bird Values Effects of Hudson Reservoir on the migratory bird resource will be greatest in the area below the top of the active storage pool (elev. 5,066 ft.) because of frequent inundations to this level. Conditions above this level are expected to change only slightly due to infrequent flooding. Therefore, the following discussions concerns only the area below the top of the active storage pool in regard to migratory bird habitat, production, harvest, and hunter-use before and after project construction. Without Migratory Bird Habitat the Project and populations Waterfowl.--The South platte Valley supplies several important types of waterfowl habitat. Ducks find suitable breeding habitat on ponds, marshes, and riverbottom seeps and sloughs. Nesting habitat is found near the above water areas and in riverbottom meadows. Large lakes and reservoirs, river channels, and warm-water seeps and sloughs provide major resting habitat for wintering ducks and geese throughout the Valley. Large numbers of corn and small-grain fields furnish wintering waterfowl with feeding habitat. The proposed Hudson Reservoir site now provides at least a small amount of all of the various types of waterfowl habitat, but most important is its wintering habitat. The existing Horse Creek Reservoir furnishes good winter resting habitat, while the surrounding farmlands yield feeding habitat. Table 1 lists the types and amounts of waterfowl habitat presently available within the proposed Hudson Reservoir site below the top of the active storage pool (elev. 5,066). Total acreage of waterfowl habitat amounts to 3,041, of which 1,141 acres occur as wetlands. The duck breeding population of the South platte Valley has increased in recent years to an estimated 11,155 pairs in 1965, making it the third most important breeding grounds in Colorado. Mallards and blue-winged teals normally constitute over 90 percent of the total. Breeding Canada geese are found mostly in the area surrounding Denver. An estimated 50 pairs of ducks used the Hudson Reservoir site as breeding and nesting habitat in 1965. Mallards and blue-winged teals were the major species involved. These ducks raised an estimated 200 young to the flight stage. The South Platte Valley is the major duck wintering area in Colorado, with concentrations of up to 300,000 in some years. Wintering ducks rest on numerous lakes and reservoirs and on many miles of riverbottom. Corn fields constitute their main feeding habitat. Mallards make up about 95 percent of the winter �- 165 - duck population, while green-winged teals, pintails, for most of the remaining percentage. and American Widgeon account Table l.--Acres and miles of migratory bird habitat within the Hudson Reservoir site below the top of the active storage pool (elev. 5,066 ft.). Habitat Value Acres High Moderate 724 6 Moderate Moderate 353 58 1.7 5.7 1,141 7.4 Miles WATERFOWL Horse Creek Reservoir Lott Reservoir Horse Creek and Associated Wetlands Ditches and Canals Sub-total (Wetlands) Small-grain Fields Corn Fields Sub-total High High (Uplands) 1,900 TOTAL MOURNING 1,685 215 3,041 DOVES Cottonwoods Waste Areas Small-grain Fields Remainder of Area Below Top of Maximum Pool* High High High Low TOTAL >'(Includes acreage 112 128 1,685 1,925 3,850 in other croplands, farmlots, and roads. Canada goose concentrations are not as large as those in southeastern Colorado, but numbers have been increasing in the South Platte Valley for the past several years. Wintering goose populations now number about 2,000 birds. Three main waterfowl concentration areas exist in the South Platte Valley: (1) riverbottoms, lakes, and reservoirs between Denver and Greeley; (2) riverbottoms, lakes, and reservoirs west of Fort Morgan; and (3) riverbottoms, lakes, and reservoirs between Brush and Julesburg. These areas lie adjacent to the best corn-producing land in Colorado. �- 166 The Denver-Greeley area generally supports about one-third of the total South Platte Valley wintering duck population in Colorado, and at least two-thirds of the Canada goose population. This amounts to figures of 100,000 ducks and about 1,500 geese. The proposed Hudson Reservoir site, specifically Horse Creek Reservoir, attracts significant numbers of waterfowl in the Denver-Greeley area. Aerial counts of Horse Creek Reservoir during a 19 year period (1948-1966) showed an average January population of 5,430 ducks with a maximum of almost 40,000 during anyone year, depending upon weather conditions. However, January counts do not necessarily indicate the maximum number of ducks that use a lake or reservoir. January counts are made following the hunting season when most ducks move to riverbottoms. Ducks concentrate on reservoirs for protection from hunters during the hunting season. November counts at Horse Creek Reservoir showed an average annual population of nearly 11,000 ducks during an 8-year period (19471954). December counts averaged about 7,000 during this same period. Generally then, around 11,000 ducks presently utilize Horse Creek Reservoir during the hunting season each year, with mallards making up the bulk of the population. Canada goose counts at Horse Creek Reservoir during the three periods stated above resulted in average annual figures as follows: November, 104; December, 161; and January, 163. However, up to 2,400 geese have been observed on this .reservoir in anyone year, and it is becoming one of the better large Canada goose reservoirs in the area. Mourning Doves. -- Mourning doves find breeding habitat throughout the South Platte Valley, mostly in the form of farm windbreaks and riverbottoms. Riverbottoms provide resting habitat for doves in the late summer, prior to and dur~ ing migrat ion. Feeding habitat consists of grain fields, fallow cropland, and waste areas. The entire 3,850 acres below the top of the active storage pool at the Hudson Reservoir site is considered mourning dove habitat. Areas of high quality include cottonwood groves, farmlots, grain fields, and waste areas. An estimated average of 85 breeding pairs of mourning doves have inhabited the Hudson Reservoir site each year since 1954. This amounts to an average annual production of about 275 young doves of flying age. Harvest and Hunter - Use Waterfowl. -- The South Platte Valley constitutes the most important duck harvest area in Colorado, largely because of its importance as a wintering area. About 65,000 ducks are harvested annually in this locality, with the following counties contributing to the kill; Adams, Logan, Morgan, Sedgwick, Washington, and Weld. This harvest amounts to about 40 percent of the state total. Mallards make up at least 90 percent of the total bag of ducks. Approximately 9,500 duck hunters account for the harvest in the South Platte Valley each year. Interest in goose hunting is increasing each year in the South Platte Valley. The harvest here is not nearly as large as that in southeastern Colorado, but the kill averages about 1,500 annually in the counties listed above. The number of goose hunters averages about 2,175 each year. The propos ed .Hud son Res~rvoir· site. Li.e.s mos t Ly in We14 count y iD the he ar t of the waterfowl harvest area in the So~th Pl~tt~ Valley. More ducks �-167 - are harvested in Weld county than in any other county in the state. However, the potential harvest of waterfowl at the Hudson Reservoir site is not now being realized because much of the hunting habitat is controlled by a private hunting club. Important hunting habitat at the Hudson Reservoir site presently consists of Horse Creek, Horse Creek Reservoir, small-grain fields (green and ripe), and corn fields. This habitat amounts to about 3,000 acres. Approximately one-half of this hunting acreage is in the hands of a private hunting club, including all of Horse Creek Reservoir. As a result, the waterfowl harvest is below its potential in this area. Harvest is estimated at only 200 ducks and 25 geese annually, yielding about 350 man-days of recreation valued at $3,752 (Table 2). Obviously, the general public is not presently realizing maximum use of a public resource. Relatively few individuals are obtaining most of the benefits. Table 2.--Comparison Reservoirz of migratory bird hunter-use with and without Hudson not considering an~ wildlife management or habitat develoement. Without Project With Project Difference Annual Annual Annual Annual Annual Man-Days Man-Days Annual Han-Days of Use Value Value of Use Value of Use Seecies Waterfowl Mourning Doves TOTALS 350 $3,752 850 $9,830 250 $1,277 0 0 600 $5,029 850 $9,830 + 500 + 250 + 250 $6,078 $1,277 + $4,801 Mourning Doves.--Mourning dove harvest in the 6-county area of the South Platte Valley averages about 39,000 annually. This kill is accomplished by an average of 4,500 hunters. Most dove hunting occurs early in the season because cool weather normally pushes most of the birds south after the first week or two. The proposed Hudson Reservoir site presently contains excellent dove hunting habitat in the form of small-grain fields, fallow croplands, and waste areas in association with some sizeable cottonwood groves. However, as in the case with waterfowl, much of this habitat is controlled by a relatively small group of hunters. So, this area could provide more hunting recreation than the harvest figures indicate. An estimated 350 doves are harvested annually at the Hudson Reservoir site. Annual man-days of use amounts to 250, with an estimated value of $1,277 (Table 2). With the Project The following section discusses expected migratory bird values of the project just as they will be when the project is completed, without taking into consideration values that could result from the application of wildlife management techniques and habitat development on the area. The proposed plan presented �- 168- later in this report will discuss values to be gained on the project area with intensive management of the migratory bird resource. Migratory Bird Habitaet and Populations Waterfowl.--Hudson Reservoir will create 3,850 acres of winter resting habitat for waterfowl in the South Platte Valley. In doing so, it will cover 3,041 acres of waterfowl feeding and resting habitat now in existence. The result will be a net gain of 809 acres of habitat with the project. Hudson Reservoir is expected to become the major winter resting site for waterfowl in the Denver-Greeley area because of its large size as compared to local existing reservoirs. However, its presence will not be critical to the welfare of the birds because the local existing reservoirs, such as Horse Creek, Prospect, Latham, and Barr Lake, now supply plenty of winter resting habitat for present populations of waterfowl. Hudson Reservoir would simply attract birds from these smaller reservoirs and concentrate them in one locality. It is doubtful that overall waterfowl numbers would increase significantly in the Denver-Greeley area. So, essentially Hudson Reservoir will create additional winter resting habitat that is not really needed in the area. Yet, its existence, if managed properly as a public shooting area, could greatly increase public hunting opportunity in a region of Colorado lacking most in this respect. Attractive waterfowl breeding habitat will not result from the construction of Hudson Reservoir. Fluctuating water levels, inherent in a reservoir of this nature, will prevent the creation of desirable breeding conditions. Some production will no doubt occur, but total production with and without the project are expected to be nearly the same. Mourning Doves.--All existing mourning dove habitat in the project area will be eliminated when flooded by Hudson Reservoir. This represents a loss of 3,850 acres of low to high quality dove habitat. Also, mourning dove production will suffer a loss amounting to about 275 birds. Harvest and Hunter - Use Waterfowl.--Waterfowl harvest and hunter-use cannot help but increase with the project. Hudson Reservoirs' large size will attract and hold large numbers of waterfowl in the vicinity during the hunting season, and as a result it is expected to yield about 850 man-days of waterfowl hunting annually (Table 2). This amount of recreation is valued at nearly $10,000 annually, and represents an annual increase of 500 man-days of waterfowl hunting and $6,078 in value over conditions without the project. Mourning Doves.--No dove hunting will occur with the project because Hudson Reservoir will inundate existing habitat and no new dove habitat will be created. Losses with respect to mourning dove hunting will amount to 250 man-days of recreation and $1,277 annually. �- 169- - CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS Losses Vs. Gains with the Project Migratory include: (1) (2) (3) Migratory include: (1) (2) (3) bird losses that will result from the installation Loss Loss Loss loss of Hudson Reservoir of 3,850 acres of low to high quality mourning dove habitat. in mourning dove production amounting to about 275 birds. of 250 man-days of dove hunting annually, resulting in an a.nnual of $1,277. bird gains tha.t will result from the installation of Hudson Reservoir Gain of 809 acres of waterfowl habitat. Increase of 500 man-days of waterfowl hunting annually, yielding an annual gain in value of $6,078. Net gain to migratory bird hunting amounting to 250 man-days of recreation annually, with an annual gain in value of $4,801. The relatively small gains in waterfowl habitat and hunting opportunity associated with the project will not entirely compensate for the great loss of habitat and production suffered by mourning doves. The project should replace much of this habitat with adjacent lands so that through intensive management an attempt can be made to make up at least a portion of this loss. Specific recommendations regarding this subject and the project as a whole are listed below. In order to realize the full potential of the migratory bird resource Reservoir the Colorado Game, Fish and Parks recommends that: (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) at Hudson The conservation and development of wildlife be included among the purposes for which the project is authorized. A minimum pool of about 2,000 surface acres be established. The project purchase in fee all lands and associated water rights within the take-line proposed in Figure 1 of this report. This takeline is expected to be somewhat larger than the one not yet established by the Bureau of Reclamation, but 2,500 acres of the additional land will mitigate mourning dove losses associated with the project as provided under the Fish and Wildlife Coordination Act. The remaining acreage would be an enhancement feature with financing available under the Federal Cost-sharing program (P. L. 89-72). The Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department be given the responsibility for managing wildlife and recreational activities on project lands, and for improving and developing wildlife habitat thereon. The Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department participate in the costsharing program available under Public Law 89-72 for financing Wildlife enhancement in the project area. Clearing of the reservoir site be limited to that area lying below the top of the dead storage pool (elev ..5,044 ft.). A zoning plan for Hudson Reservoir be developed cooperatively by the Bureau of Reclamation and the Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department to insure the availability of adequate and safe areas for hunting and fishing. �- 170 - TiN NORTH R 4 . R5W 21 22 27 34 3 10 11 12 9 15 14 1) 16 TIS R64W Proposed Colorado Hudson Reservoir showing the take-line Game, Fish and Parks Department. recommended by the �- 171 - PROPOSED PLAN OF DEVELOPMENT Below is a general plan for managing and developing project lands placed under the jurisdiction of the Colorado Gam~, Fish and Parks Department. The aim of this plan would be to increase migratory bird use and public hunting opportunity in the project area. Establishment of a Public Shooting Area The Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department plans to establish a public shooting area at Hudson Reservoir. Hudson Reservoir will provide public hunting in a locality where the general public presently has limited hunting opportunity. Most of the best wetlands in the Denver-Greeley area are now owned or leased by gun clubs or unorganized hunting enthusiasts. Restrictions on public hunting are greater here than in any other locality in Colorado, mainly because it is adjacent to a large human population center. Hudson Reservoir, being only a 30-minute drive from the Denver metropolitan area, will help considerably in providing the average city sportsman with a place to hunt. As many as 100,000 ducks and 5,000 geese are expected to winter at Hudson Reservoir during good production years. Thus, a sizeable waterfowl resource will be available for harvesting by the public if a public shooting area is established in conjunction with the reservoir. Table 3 presents expected migratory bird hunting benefits derived from the establishement of a public shooting area at Hudson Reservoir. Benefits of this magnitude will be possible only through intensive management and development work on lands within the take-line proposed in Figure 1. Table 3.--Comparison of migratory bird hunting benefits with and without a publi-c shooting area at Hudson Reservoir. Benefits Contributed to Without a Public With a Public Public Shooting Area Shooting Area Shooting Area Annual Annual Annual Man Annual Annual Man Annual Man Value Days of Use Value Species Days of Use Value Days of Use Waterfowl Mourning Doves TOTALS 850 $9,830 3,500 $41,181 2,650 $31,351 0 o 500 2,554 500 2,554 850 $9,830 4,000 $37,757 3,150 $33,905 Hudson Reservoir will yield a total of 4,000 man-days of migratory bird hunting with the development of a public shooting area. This represents an increase of 3,150 man-days of use over conditions without a public shooting area. Waterfowl hunting contributes 2,650 man-days of this expected increase in use, while mourning dove hunting accounts for the remaining 500. It is anticipated then, that the presence of a public shooting grounds at Hudson Reservoir would supply about four times more migratory bird hunting to the area than would exist in the absence of such a facility. �-l~ Breeding - Habitat The 12,800 acres within the proposed take-line would be managed almost entirely for public hunting with regard to migratory birds. The development of fall and winter feeding and harvest habitat would receive primary emphasis. Waterfowl and mourning dove production will be a minor consideration at Hudson Reservoir. The area does not lend itself to the development of good migratory bird breeding habitat. The possible exception to this is goose production. The upper bays and arms of the reservoir could yield some desirable goose production habit~t. Development include: (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) Feeding of breeding habitat for geese, and to a lesser extent ducks, will Erection of goose nesting structures. Production of green forage, such as alfalfa or barley, adjacent to the reservoir for summer goose feed. Elimination or control of livestock grazing. Control of predator populations. Closing upper end of the reservoir to boating and other forms of recreation during the waterfowl production and rearing season. and Harvest Habitat Croplands on the management area will be farmed on a share-crop basis, whereby local farmers will raise the crops for a percentage of the yield. Crops raised for migratory birds will include corn and alfalfa on irrigated lands and small grains on dry1ands. Some consideration will also be given to crops demanded by the local economy, such as sugar beets, beans, etc. Various farming practices will be followed to insure maximum benefits to migratory birds. Agreements with share croppers will stipulate compliance with these practices. These practices are listed below. (1) (2) (3) No small-grain stubble will be plowed until the spring following harvest of the crop. Corn will not be harvested for silage. Burning, spraying, mowing, or removal of vegetation will be prohibited without permission from the Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department. Migratory Bird Hunting: The entire area will be open to public hunting until such time that conditions warrent the closure of certain portions or the establishment of a firing line. Intensity of management will depend mainly upon the amount of public use the area receives. It is anticipated that the area will not be over-crowded with dove hunters, but waterfowl hunting will no doubt need to be limited through restriction of numbers of hunters or assignment of hunters to specific areas, or both. Parking lots, with appropriate sanitary facilities, will be constructed hunter convenience and to help distribute hunting pressure. for Development, Management, and Maintainence Costs: Table 4 summarizes costs and benefits associated with the proposed plan of development for migratory birds. This plan results in a favorable benefit-cost ratio of 1.20:1 over a 50-year period. �':"173 ..: Table 4.--Cost and benefit analysis of proposed in the Hudson Reservoir area. migratory bird development Item plan Amount COSTS Development Cost Estimates Land Acquisition (5,000 acres) Fencing (21 miles) Signs Parking Lot Facilities (5) Goose Nesting Structures (250) TOTAL $375,000 21,000 2,500 5,000 7,500 $411,000 Source of Development Funds Federal Share Land Acquisition (2,500 acres-mitigation) Cost Sharing Program on Remainder (P. L. 89-72) Total Federal Share State Share Cost Sharing Program (P. L. 89-72) TOTAL $187,500 111,750 $299,250 $111,750 $411,000 Annual Operation and Maintainence Cost Estimates Personnel Operation and Repair of Equipment Road Maintainence - culverts, gravel etc. Tools and Miscellaneous Maintainence Supplies Goose Nesting Structure Maintainence Goose Feed TOTAL $ 7,500 5,000 5,000 1,500 500 500 $ 20,000 Total Cost of Development Program Over a 50-year Period Development Costs Annual 0 & M (times SO) TOTAL BENEFITS Waterfowl Hunting (2,650 ulan-days annually-times 50) Mourning Dove Hunting (500 man-days annually-times SO) BENEFIT - COST RATIO Benefits Costs $ 411,000 1,000,000 $1,411,000 $1,567,550 127,700 $1,695,250 (Over a SO-year Period) $1,695,250 $1,411,000 1. 20: 1 Prepared by: Richard M. Hopper Ass t. Wildlife Eesearchel: Date: October, 1966 Approved by: Jack R. Grieb Project Leader Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief ��October, 1966 - 175 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO --------~~~~----------- Project No. w-88-R-ll* Work Plan No. 5 Migratory Bird Investigations Job No. 4 Title of Job: Evaluation of the Impact of Pueblo Reservoir on Migratory Birds and Hunting Opportunities in the Arkansas Valle~ Period Covered: Personnel: April 1, 1965 to March 31, 1966 Richard M. Hopper, ABSTRACT 1. Pueblo Reservoir, part of the Fryingpan - Arkansas Project, will inundate 5,606 acres of wildlife habitat when filled to the top of the flood control pool. 2. Migratory bird losses with the project will amount to 5,696 acres of low to high quality mourning dove habitat, resulting in a loss in production of 500 birds. 3. In addition, 250 man-days of dove hunting will be lost annually, amounting to an annual loss of $1,277. 4. Waterfowl habitat will increase by nearly 2,000 acres, which is expected to yield significant increases in wintering populations of ducks and geese. 5. The project will supply 3,000 man-days of waterfowl hunting annually, resulting in an annual value of $34,375. Estimated waterfowl hunter-use without the project is 150 man-days annually, with an annual value of only $1,658. 6. Waterfowl gains resulting from theproject are expected to more than compensate for losses to the mourning dove resource. * This report was originally intended to be part of an overall report covering all species of wildlife associated with Pueblo Reservoir. Reporting responsibilities were delegated to Warren D. Snyder, under W-37-R, Work Plan 16, Job 4 (Fryingpan - Arkansas Project, Pueblo Reservoir). However, the migratory bird portion is reported separately because information on other species of wildlife will not be written up until next segment. �- 176 7. To realize the full potential of migratory birds at Pueblo Reservoir, Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department recommends that: the a. The conservation and development of wildlife poses for which the project is authorized. be included among the pur- b" The Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department be given the responsibility for managing wildlife and recreational activities on project lands, and for improving and developing wildlife habitat thereon. c. The Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department participate in the costsharing program available under Public Law 89-72 for financing wildlife enhancement in the project area. d. Adequate public access roads b~ provided of Pueblo Reservoir. e. Clearing of the reservoir site be. limited to that area lying below the top of the conservation pool (elev. 4,881 ft.). f. The take-line proposed by the Bureau of Reclamation be extended to include three additional miles of riverbottom above the reservoir and one additional mile below the reservoir to further enhance the wildlife resource and hunting opportunity in the area. Cost of such lands should be financed under the cost-sharing program outlined in Public Law 89-72. g. The existing railroad bed be plugged wherever bridges occur so that water would remain between the railroad bed and the canyon walls and form waterfowl ponds when the waterlevel in the reservoir is reduced each spring. Financing would come under Po L. 89-720 h. A zoning plan for Pueblo Reservoir be developed cooperatively by the Bureau of Reclamation and the Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department to insure the availability of adequate and safe areas for hunting and fishing. to the north and south sides PUEBLO RESERVOIR MIGRATORY BIRD VALUES Pueblo Reservoir will affect migratory birds in the entire area below the top of the flood control pool (elev. 4899 ft.) because of at least occasional inundations. Waterfowl will not be affected significantly above the top of the conservation pool (e1ev. 4881 ft.), but some mourning dove habitat occurs in the flood control pool. Therefore, the following discussion concerns all of the area to the top of the flood control pool in regard to conditions before and after project construction. Without the Project Migratory Bird Habitat and Populations Waterfowl. -- The lower Arkansas Valley below Pueblo constitutes an important w~ntering area for ducks and geese in Colorado. Mid-winter counts conducted �- 177 during a 19-year period (1948-1966) yielded average annual populations of 82,108 ducks and 27,894 geese for this valley. These populations of waterfowl occur mostly east of Rocky Ford in association with large lakes and reservoirs and small-grain and corn production areaso Ducks, mostly mallards, utilize large bodies of water as resting habitat during the hunting season, but normally move to the riverbottom to spend the remainder of the winter. Geese usually prefer the safety of lakes and reservoirs for the entire winter. Feeding habitat consists of small grain, mostly milo maize and winter wheat, and corn fields. The area west of Rocky Ford to the proposed Pueblo Reservoir site supports only small populations of wintering waterfowl. Unlike the Arkansas Valley east of Rocky Ford, this area lacks one important wintering habitat feature; namely, large reservoirs on which waterfowl can rest and take refuge during the hunting season. The only bodies of water of significant size in the Rocky Ford- Pueblo area are the two Colorado Fuel and Iron Corporation reservoirs south of Pueblo. January inventories for the past few years showed a maximum of 550 ducks and 250 geese utilizing these reservoirs. They are open to hunting by members of a local club and the birds are fairly accessible. Thus, adequate waterfowl resting sites are not now available to keep significant numbers of birds in the area between Rocky Ford and Pueblo. Another factor believed to contribute to low wintering numbers of waterfowl in the Rocky Ford - Pueblo area is that small-grain and corn production represents a smaller portion of the agricultural economy here than it does further east. Much of the irrigated land, particularly in the Pueblo area, is devoted to truck farming. However, there is enough small-grain and corn raised to support a larger wintering population of waterfowl than now exists. Thus, it appears that the scarcity of resting habitat (large lakes or r-e se rvof rs) during the hunting season is the main limiting factor. The 1966 mid-winter waterfowl count of the Arkansas River at the proposed Pueblo Reservoir site yielded less than 50 ducks, mostly mallards and common mergansers. Obviously, the present use of this area by wintering waterfowl is quite low and insignificant. Good breeding habitat is limited in the Arkansas Valley, but some is located along the river in the form of sloughs and seep areas. Extremely hot and dry weather in this region no doubts contributes to low waterfowl production here. An estimated 2,500 pairs of ducks, mostly mallards, pintails, and teals, nest in the Arkansas Valley. This figure is considerably less than those for the major duck production areas of Colorado; specifically, the San Luis Valley, North Park, and the South Platte Valley. It is estimated that no more than 25 pairs of ducks presently breed and nest at the Pueblo Reservoir site below the top of the proposed flood control pool. Mallards and teals are the major species involved. Table 1 shows acres and miles of waterfowl habitat presently Reservoir site below the top of the flood control pool. within the Pueblo Mourning Doves. -- The Arkansas Valley of Colorado is a good mourning dove production area. Streambottoms, pinon-juniper breaks, and farm windbreaks constitute their favorite breeding habitat. Large numbers of doves concentrate in grain production areas during late summer where they remain for a considerable �- 178 - time before moving south~ Abandoned farmlots in association with grain fields are particularly preferred at this time. An estimated average of 150 breeding pairs of mourning doves have inhabited the Pueblo Reservoir site below the top of the flood control pool each year since 1954. This represents an average annual production of about 500 young doves of flying age. The entire area below the top of the flood control pool is considered dove habitat (Table 1). Table 1. -- Acres and Miles of Migratory Bird Habitat Within the Pueblo Reservoir Site Below the Top of the Flood Control Pool (elev. 4,899 ft.). Habitat Value Acres Miles Riverbottom Pasture Riverbottom Timber River Channel Ditches and Canals Low Low Low Low 1,928 363 390 49 13.0 4.1 2,730 17.1 WATERFOWL TOTAL MOURNING DOVES Riverbottom Timber Pinon - Juniper - Brush Remainder of Area Below Top of Flood Control Pool High High Low 363 36 5,297 5,696 TOTAL Harvest and Hunter - Use Waterfowl. -- The Arkansas Valley is second only to the South Platte Valley in number of ducks harvested in Colorado during the regular season. Annual harvest of ducks in the Arkansas Valley over an II-year period (1954-1964) has averaged 21,949, or 16.6 percent of the State total (Grieb and Hunter, 1966). Counties contributing to this kill include Baca, Bent, Crowley, Huerfano, Kiowa, Las Animas, Otero, Prowers, and Pueblo. Over 90 percent of the kill is mallards. An ,average of 4,047 hunters account for the duck harvest in the Arkansas Valley 'each year. The Arkansas Valley constitutes the most important goose harvest area in Colo'rado , with an annual kill that has averaged 13,476 over an II-year period (19541964). This harvest amounts to 83.7 percent of the total for the State. Most of the goose kill occurs in the lower portion of the Valley near Springfield, , �- 179 - Lalnar, and Eads. Goose hunters in the Valley average over 8,000 in number each year, about twice that of duck hunters. Average annual figures for Pueblo County alone include 3,466 ducks harvested by 638 hunters, and 140 geese bagged by III hunters. This harvest represents about 16 percent of the total Arkansas Valley duck kill and only about one percent of the goose kill. Pueblo County has the largest human population of any county in the Valley, yet only a small portion of the total Valley waterfowl bag is taken here. This serves to further emphasize the fact that the largest waterfowl populations occur east of Pueblo County. Using Pueblo County harvest and hunter figures as a basis, it is esti1TI~ated that presently a maximum ,of 25 hunters bag 135 ducks within the proposed Pueblo Reservoir site. This results in a maximum of 150 man-days of use annually, with an estimated value of $1,658 (Table 2). Little or no goose hunting presently occurs at the proposed site. Table 2. -- Comparison Pueblo Reservoir. Species of Migratory Without Project Annual Man-Days Annual of Use Value Bird Harvest and Hunter-Use With Project Annual Man-Days Annual of Use Value Difference Annual Man-Days Annual of Use Value + 2,350 + $26,002 + 500 + $ 6,715 0 250 - $ 1,277 $34,375 + 2,600 $31,400 Ducks 150 $1,658 2,500 Geese 0 0 500 6, ll.5 250 $1,277 0 400 $2,935 3,000 Mourning Doves TOTALS With and Without $27,660 Mourning Doves. -- The Arkans;)s Valley is characterized by lower altitudes and a warmer climate than northern and western parts of the State. Consequently, mourning doves remain here longer during the hunting season and provide potentially more recreation than in most other regions of Colorado. Annual harvest of doves in the nine - county area of the Arkansas Valley averaged 37,642 over a 10-year period (1955-1964), or about 27 percent of the State total (Grieb and Hunter, 1966). The annual number of hunters averaged 4,163 during this same period. As in other regions of the State, the dove resource here does not receive the hunting pressure that it is capable of sustaining. About 39 percent of the total Arkansas Valley dove harvest and about 43 percent This yields an average annual dove harof the hunters occur in Pueblo County. vest of 14,680 for Pueblo County, with the number of hunters averaging J ,790 each year. The number of doves now harvested at the Pueblo Reservoir site is estim:1ted at 350, with about 50 hunter t<1king part. This yields an estimated annual use of �- 180 - 250 man-days valued at $1,277 (Table 2). These low figures are at least partially the results of much of the area being inaccessible to hunters. WITH THE PROJECT Migratory Bird Habitat and Populations Waterfowl. --Pueblo Reservoir will create 4,665 acres of primarily winter resting habitat for waterfowl when filled to the top of the conservation pool. The Bureau of Reclamation predicts that water will be-in the flood control pool only twice in a 38-year period. Thus, the area above the top of the conservation pool (i.e. flood control pool) will be of little or no value to waterfowl. This represents an increase of 1,935 acres over the 2,730 acres that now exist. The reservoir is expected to supply safe resting habitat for wintering waterfowl in an area now limited in this regard. Wintering populations in the Pueblo area could increase to as high as 10,000 ducks and 1,000 geese. Pueblo Reservoir will not create desirable waterfowl breeding habitat because of its fluctuating water level. Some production will no doubt take place at the upper end of the reservoir, but total production with and without the project are expected to be about the same. Mourning Doves.--No mourning dove habitat of any kind will be present at Pueblo Reservoir when it is filled to the top of the flood control pool. This represents a loss of 5,696 acres of low to high quality mourning dove habitat. In addition, mourning dove production losses will amount to about 500 birds. Harvest and Hunter - Use Waterfowl.--Waterfowl harvest and hunter-use are expected to increase with the project because of the presence of a large reservoir which should attract larger numbers of wintering birds. Waterfowl hunting on Pueblo Reservoir will average about 3,000 man-days annually, with a value of $34,375 (Table 2). This represents an annual gain of 2,850 man-days of recreation and an increase in value amounting to $32,717. Mourning Doves.--No dove hunting would occur with the project because of the absence of suitable habitat to attract these birds. Losses in this regard will amount to 250 man-days of recreation and $1,277 annually. Conclusions and Recommendations Losses vs. Gains with the Project.--Migratory bird losses that will result from the installation of Pueblo Reservoir include: (1) Loss of 5,696 acres of low to high quality mourning (2) Loss in mourning (3) Loss of 250 man-days $1,277. dove production amounting of dove hunting dove habitat. to 500 birds. annually, yielding an annual loss of �- 181. - Migratory include: (1) bird gains that will result from the installation Gain of 1,935 acres of waterfowl of Pueblo Reservoir habitat. (2) Increase of 2,850 man-days of wa t er f ow L hunting annually, annual gain in value of $32,717. (3) Net gain to migratory ation annually, resulting bird hunting amounting to 2,600 man-days with an annual gain in value of $31,400. in an of recre- The boost to the waterfowl resource and accompanying hunting opportunity in the Pueblo area that will result from the project outweigh the losses to the mourning dove resource. The increase in waterfowl habitat will not entirely compensate for mourning dove habitat losses, but the waterfowl hunting values associated with the project will substantially overshadow mourning dove habitat, production, and hunting values that nO.,7exist without the project. Therefore, since gains appear to dominate losses resulting from the project, migratory bird recommendations listed be Low are of an enhancement nature, rather than mitigation. In order to realize the full potential of migratory birds at Pueblo Reservoir, the Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department recommends that: (1) The conservation and development of wildlife for which the project is authorized. be included among the purposes (2) The Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department be given the responsibility for managing wildlife and recreational activities on project lands, and for improving and developing wildlife habitat thereon. (3) The Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department participate in the cost-sharing program available under Public L~w 89-72 for financing wildlife enhancement in the project area. (4) Adequate public access roads be provided Pueblo Reservoir. (5) Clearing of the reservoir site be limited to that area lying below the t~p of the conservation pool (elev. 4,881 ft.). (6) The take-line proposed by the Bureau of Reclamation be extended to include three additional miles of river bottom above the reservoir and one additional mile below the reservoir to further enhance the wildlife resource and hunting opportunity in the area. Cost of such lands should be financed under the cost-sharing program outlined in Public Law 89-72. (7) The existing railroad bed be plugged wherever bridges occur so that water would remain between tIle railroad bed and the canyon walls and form waterfow l ponds when the water level in the reservoir is reduced each spring. Financing would come under P. L. 89-72. (8) A zoning plan for Pueblo Reservoir be developed cooperatively by the Bureau of Reclamation and the Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department to insure the availability of adequate and safe areas for hunting and fishing. to the north and south sides of �- JB2 - Proposed Plan of Develo .. pE,lent' Fo ll.owf.ng is a general plan for development and land use practices that wou ld be instigated on lands placed under the jurisdiction of the Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department. This plan will be aimed at increasing migratory bird production and public hunting opportunity in the Pueblo area. Breeding ilabitat.--The upper end of Pueblo Reservoir, including the three additional miles of river bottom recommended for inclusion in the take-line, would be developed for waterfowl production. A small breeding flock of resident Canada geese could be established in the Pueblo area, with the upper end of Pueblo Reservoir serving as a nucleus for dispersal to other local breeding sites. It is doubtful that a local flock of geese in itself could provide much hunting opportunity because of limited bre~~ing habitat in the area. Production would not be sufficient to justify any more than a very restrictive hunting season. However, the major purpose of establishing a local flock would be to attract more migrant geese from the north and to encourage them to winter in the Pueblo area. Thus, the migrant birds, in addition to the local population, would supply a significant source of hunting recreation to the area. Such a program was initiated in northern Colorado near Fort Collins, wh ere few geese previously spent the winter. With the start of a local flock in 1957, that area now winters a migrant population of geese in excess of'5,OOO birds. Such dramatic results cannot be insured in the Pueblo area, but potential benefits appear to justify ,a program of this type. Development of breeding habitat for ducks and geese will involve the following: (1) Creation of shallow breeding construction. (2) Introduc tion of desirable wa t er fow l food and cover plants, whe r e necessary, in and around existing and future impoundments. (3) Elimination (4) Production of green forage, such as alfalfa or barley, ments for summer goose feed. (5) Erection (6) Construction of artificial loafing spots (logs, floating in impoundments lacking natural sites. (7) Control (8) Closing the upper end of the reservoir waterfowl production season. or control of livestock of goose nesting of predator ponds and marshes ,through excavation and dike grazing. adjacent to, impound- structures.' platforms, etc.) populations. to boating and recreation during the Winter Feeding....l~abitat. --The small amount of agricultural lands w i t h i n the project area will be managed as winter feeding grounds for waterfowl. Mourning doves are also expected to utilize such areas in the late summer and early fall. Milo �- 183 - Table 3.--Cost and Benefit Analysis of Proposed the Pueblo Reservoir Area. Waterfowl Development Item Plan in Amount COSTS Development Cost Estimates Land Acquisition (2,560 acres) Shallow Pond and Marsh Construction Fencing (10 miles) Signs Parking Lot Facilities (6) Construction of Access Roads Goose Nesting Structures (250) TOTAL Source of Development Funds Federal Cost Sharing Program Federal Share State Share TOTAL $ (several) $ 150,000 250,000 10,000 1,000 6,000 10,000 7 500 434,500 ( P. L. 89-72) Annual Operation and Maintainence Cost Estimates Personnel Operation and Repair of Equipment Road Maintainence - culverts, gravel etc. Pond and Marsh Maintainence Tools and Miscellaneous Maintainence Supplies Goose Nesting Structure Maintainence Materials Goose Feed Miscellaneous TOTAL Total Cost of Development Program Over a 50 Year Period Development Costs Annual 0 & M (times 50) TOTAL $ $ $ $ 217,250 217,250 434,500 5,000 2,500 2,500 1,000 1,000 500 500 500 13,500 $ 434,500 675,000 $1,109,500 BENEFITS Duck Hunting (2,350 man-days annually - times 50) Goose Hunting (500 man-days annually - times 50) TOTAL BENEFIT - COST RATIO Benefits Costs (Over a 50 Year Period) $1,635,850 $1,109,500 1.47: 1 $1,300,100 335,750 $1,635,850 �- 184 - maize, corn, and winter wheat will be the primary crops grown, Farming will be done on a share-crop basis, whereby local farmers will raise the crops for a percentage of the yield. Corn will not be harvested for silage. Corn and milo will be harvested by at least one week prior to the waterfowl season. Waterfowl Hunting.--The entire project area will be open to public waterfowl hunting until such time that conditions warrent the closure of certain portions or the establishment of a firing line. Only experience will determine the best management of the area in this respect. Intensity of this management will depend largely upon the amount of public use the area receives. Parking lots will be established for hunter convenience. will be provided at each parking lot. Sanitary facilities De\~~lopment, Management, and Maintainence Cos ts.--Table 3 summarizes cos ts and benof Its associated with the proposed plan of development for waterfowl. The plan yields a favorable benefit - cost ratio of 1.47: lover a 50 year period. LITERATURE CITED Grieb, J. R. and G. N. Hunter. 1966. Colorado Small Game Hunter Harvest Survey. 1965. Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Dept., Fed. Aid Project W-88-R. 23 pp. Mimeo. Prepared Date: by: Richard M. Hopper Asst. Wildlife Researcher O __c_t_ob_e_,r~__1~9_6_6 Approved by: _ Jack R. Grieb Project Leader Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief �- 185 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO Project No. w-88-R-ll Work Plan No. 6 ----Migratory Bird Investigations Job No. 1 Title of Job: Indexing Colorado Federal Aid Reports, Migratory Birds Period Covered: April 1, 1965 through March 31, 1966 Personnel: Richard M. Hopper Objective: Index Federal Aid progress and completion reports by author, species, and subject. Procedures: Assemble Federal Aid reports and index the migratory bird portion using standard indexing procedures by author, species and subject. Results: See composite report contained in the April, 1966, Part One issue of the Game Research Report covering all indexing activities planned under this project and Federal Aid Projects W-37-R, W-38-R, W-40-R, and W-IOl-R. Prepared by Richard M. Hopper Approved by: Asst. Wildl. Re:-;earcher Date: October, 1966 Jack R. Grieb ProJect Leader l:JaY11_e W. Sandfort Research Chief Came ��October, 1966 - 187 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO --------~~~~---------- Project No. w-88-R-ll Work Plan No. 5 Migratory Bird Investigations Job No. 5 Title of Job: Evaluation of the Impact of the Grand Mesa Project on Migratory Birds and Hunting Opportunities in the Grand Mesa Area Period Covered: April 1, 1965 to March 31, 1966. Obligations of this investigation were fulfilled by the Federal Aid Job Completion Report for W-37-R-19, Work Plan 16, Job 7, entitled: Grand Mesa Project. Wildlife information derived from these two jobs was combined to formulate one report. Prepared by Richard M. Hopper Wildlife Researcher Approved by: ~~--~~---------------Jack Grieb Project Leader Ferd C. Klcinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator � https://cpw.cvlcollections.org/files/original/fa379abc4a6765f05fc13137d95647fc.pdf f502254bae128909e87c2bcddc62b7a8 PDF Text Text January, 1967 - 1- JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO ------~~~~~-----Bighorn Sheep and Project No. W-41-R-16 Work Plan No. 1 Mountain Goat Investigations Job No. 12 Title of Job: Bighorn Sheep Distribvtion, Populations, and Herd Composition Period Covered: Personnel: June 1, 1965 to May 31, 1966 L.Dale Hibbs ABSTRACT As many of the bighorn sheep ranges as possible were surveyed during this work period. A great deal of time was spent in becoming familiar with the areas. Therefore, counts are low and L~complete in most cases. Bighorn sheep were observed in 13 of the areas surveyed. A questionnaire was sent to all successful applicants for bighorn sheep permits. One hundred and ninety-two or 94 percent of the questionnaires were returned. Information obtained from the questionnaire included: number of sheep killed, number of sheep sighted, number of days hunted, number of years they had hunted, total number of sheep killed, number of goats sighted, etc. This information has been tabulated. It was determined that 40 sheep had been taken for a hunter success of 19.5 percent. Hunters saw a total of 2,581 sheep. A total of 1,171 days were expended by all hunters. The sheep that were killed ranged from large rams with horns that measured 35 inches along the outside curve of the horns to those small rams with horns that measured 12 inches along the outside curves. �- 2 - Objectives: The occurrence and numbers of bighorn sheep herds as well as their sex and age structures are necessary factors for formulation of a sound management plan. The objectives of this job are to: 1. Determine bighorn sheep distribution. 2. Determine populations or trends. 3. Determine herd sex and age composition. 4. Prepare detailed range or distribution maps for specific herds with written descriptions for census, and develop standardized forms which can be used by management personnel during routine census and for recording long-term census information. Procedures: 1. Distribution of bighorn sheep in Colorado were determined by aerial and groUnd observations in areas of known occupancy (Fig. 1), reported but unverified occupancy, and in areas where new herds may have developed close to established herds. Aerial observations were made from fixedwing aircraft and helicopter, and ground observations were made primarily by foot or horseback although trail vehicles, four-wheel drive vehicles, and conventional vehicles were used whenever- conditions allowed. Observation data were recorded on field forms which serve for other portions of this job also. Data recorded included: datej observer; game management unit number, herd or area designation; specific location; route of access into area, if a ground observation; manner of making observation (afoot, horseback, vehicle, fixed-wing or helicopter); time and number of adult males and females, yearlings, young, unclassified, and totals; elevation; vegetative type; general activity; associated animal species; aerial photo numbers, if known or available; and comments. A distribution map will be prepared from these data to add to information already on Figure 1. Forest Service maps, scale 2 inches per mile, will be used where available. In districts where these large-scale maps have not been prepared the t-inch-per-mile maps wiil be used. 2. Attempts were made to obtain as complete a population census as possible in each area studied, or, at least, to establish uniform coverage and counting procedures to provide reliable data from which to determine trend from year to year. These counts are made in conjunction with the distribution observations described under Procedur-e 1, and recorded on the prepared form. Counts are to be attempted under as nearly comparable situations as possible in succeeding years. Population data will be graphed for each herd or area. �- 3 - 3. In conjunction with the two preceding objectives and procedures, the herds observed will be classified by rams, ewes, yearlings, lambs, unclassified, and totals for sex and age, structure data. These data will enable us to determine productivity, survival and g,=neral herd health, on which sound management plans may be based. 4. Detailed distribution maps as developed under Procedure 1 were assembled for the four geographical, administrative regions of the department. Detailed written descriptions for access to specific herd areas and recommendations for census procedures and techniques will be prepared for guides to management personnel. The field observation form will be modified if necessary to adapt it to management use and appropriate forms are being developed upon which to record data for specific herd management units, administrative districts and regions, and statewide, for individual years and for a lO-year period. A,place for five-year averages, as these accumulate, will be included. ��- 5 - Bighorn Sheep Distribution, Populations, and Herd Composition L. Dale Hibbs Project activities are statewide with the bulk of the work being done in the following areas (Fig. 1): Front Range, Mt. Evans, Tarryall, Kenosha, Arkansas River, Sangre de Cristo Range, Poncha Pass-Saguache, Rio Grande San Juan, .Snowmass, Bowen Pass, Gore Range, American Flats - Cow Creek, Lizard Head Pass, San Luis Peak, Collegiate Rangs and Ladore Canon. Activity on the Bighorn Sheep Project, Work Plan No.1, Job No. 12, primarily involved becoming familiar with the bighorn sheep ranges through~ out the state. Approximately 8 weeks were spent in the field, during June, July and August with George W. Jones, former bighorn sheep biologist, who assisted on the access and location of some of the bighorn sheep ranges. The remaining part of the work period was spent surveying bighorn sheep ranges throughout the state. Due to the wide and sparse distribution of bighorn sheep ranges in Colorado, a great deal of time was spent just becoming familiar with these areas. Therefore, bighorn sheep counts are low and incomplete in most areas. N01<T that the areas of frequent bighorn sheep occurrence have been determined, it is anticipated that accurate information concerning bighorn sheep distribution, population and herd composition will be accumulated during the next work period. The bighorn sheep ranges that were surveyed during this work period and the number of sheep observed are shown in Table 1. Sex-ratio counts and popUlation estimates have not been made because only incomplete counts were made in most areas. A questionnaire was sent to all successful applicants for bighorn sheep permits after the close of the 1965 season (see Appendix A). Two hundred and five questionnaires were sent out, of which one hundred ninety-two, or 94 percent, were returned. The primary purpose of the questionnaire was to obtain information on bighorn sheep distribution and numbers, as well as information on hunter success, wounding loss, deer kill, etc. It is anticipated that this type of information will indicate a trend in sheep numbers over a period of years. When sufficient information is available it will be coordinated with the over-all bighorn sheep management plan for the state. From Question No.1, it was determined that 40 sheep were taken during the 1965 season for a hlmter success of 19.5 percent. The bighorn sheep kill by management area is shown in Table 2. The sheep that were taken ranged from large trophy rams with horns that measured 35 inches along the outside curve to those sheep with horns that measured less than 12 inches along the outside curve (Table 3). �6 - :I C o oJ ~ ,J o" o ,- 'J ;~ o U c 0. Q) Q) .c If) o C -L s: .Ql CO o Q) 0'1 C ro 0:: I I. ..- Q) L :J .Ql I..L �-7 - Each hunter was asked to indicate how many ewes, lambs and legal rams he saw during his hunt. In addition, the hunter was asked to mark on the enclosed map where he observed mountain sheep. Table 4 furnishes a sunnnary of hunting pressure and bighorn sheep hunter observations by management area. The successful applicants for bighorn sheep permits are separated into three groups under the main heading "HUNTER": (1) hunters (reported hunting in the area) (2) Non-hunter (did not hunt for some reason) and (3) observed sheep (those hunters that saw sheep during the regular season). The number of sheep observed and the average number of sheep observed per hunter is based only on those hunters that saw sheep. These calculations do not include those hunters that hunted but did not see sheep. A total of 2,581 sheep were sighted by 136 hunters for an average of 19 sheep sighted per hunter. Although the hunter counts cannot be taken verbatum they can be used to indicate a trend in sheep numbers over a period of years. Table 1. -- Bighorn Sheep Ranges Surveyed Area Rams Buffalo Peaks from June 1, 1965, to May 31, 1966. Ewes Lambs Ylgs. Unc La s , Total High Count 28 26 2 6 62 ','(28 10 10 158 48 19 8 Weston Pass 2 5 Cochetopa 22 79 26 5 10 4 3 13 6 4 26 16 Kenosha Mountains 2 10 4 1 17 14 Mount Evans 12 15 13 3 8 51 38 Pikes Peak 15 26 8 74 123 35 Poncha Pass 30 15 6 2 53 17 Rampart Range 10 30 40 15 Sangre de Cristo 5 32 17 Tarryall 8 20 15 3 3 4 4 618 268 Collegiate Glenwood Range Canon Total ic 10 2 10 1 3 115 246 Highest count without 21. 27 1 2 Taylor Sheep Mountain 3 duplication 79 39 139 �-8 - Table 2. -- Bighorn Area No. Sheep Questionnaire Area Information, No. of Permits Sheep Killed 10 0 18 1965 Bighorn Sheep Season. Hunter Success Sheep Wounded Deer Killed 0 0 1 3 3 1.6 0 0 16 Goats Sighted 2 Gore 3 Mt. Evans-Geneva 6 Pikes Peak 8 4 50.0 0 2 0 9 Sangre de Cristo 16 2 1.2 0 2 0 10 Sheep Creek 12 7 58.3 0 4 0 11 Collegiate 30 1 3.3 0 3 42 12 Buffalo Peaks 10 2 20.0 0 1 0 14 Glenwood 5 3 60.0 0 0 0 15 Sheep Mountain 6 2 33.3 0 2 0 16 Cimmarona 6 0 0 ,0 0 0 17 Georgetown-Empire 6 0 0 0 1 0 19 Bowen Pass-Clarks 12 2 16.7 0 0 0 21 Cow Creek 4 0 0 0 0 0 22 San Luis Peak 10 0 0 0 1 0 23 McCurdy 10 3 30.0 1 1 0 24 Battlement 6 2 33.3 0 0 0 25 Wetter horn 6 2 33.3 0 3 0 28 Vallecito 6 0 0 0 1 0 29 Blanco River 6 3 50.0 2 0 0 1 Poudre River 12 2 16.7 0 6 0 4 South Platte 6 2 33.3 0 2 0 205 40 19.5 3 30 61 Cr. Range Peak Mountain Mesa Total Peak �- 9 - Table 3. -- Horn measurements of Bighorn rams killed during the 1965 season. Area Right Horn Length Circum. No. 1 3 4 6 9 10 11 12 14 15 19 23 24 25 29 i~ Location Poudre **20~ .21 3/4 Mt. Evans-Geneva Cr. 27 35 South Platte 15 14~ Pikes Peak 34~ 26 31 Sangre de Cristo 25 3/4 3/4 curl Sheep Creek 26 20 3 inches 34 26 16 14~2 Collegiate Range 25 3/4 Buffalo Peaks 27 26 3/4 Glenwood Canon 22 24 24 1/8 Sheep Mountain 22 5/8 3/4 curl Bowen Pass-Clarks Park 32 33 McCurdy Mountain 20 Battlement Mesa 22~ Wetterhorn 3/4 curl 30 Blanco River 24 28 28 All measurements given in inches 13 13 5/8 13 .15 10 3/4 10 1/8 17 15 Left Horn Length Circum. 19~ 21 3/4 27 35 14~ 14 3/8 32~ 26 31 13~ 25 ram no measurements 15~ 27 13 20 better than ~ curl 16 34 15 28~ 12 16 14 6~ 14~ 22~ 14~ 27 27 3/4 12~ 21 3/4 14~ 24 14~ 14 3/8 25~ 13~ 23~ ram no measurements 15 3/4 30 15 32 12 20 14 22~ ram no measurements 14 3/4 3H 14 24~ 12~ 28~ 12~ 28 12 7/8 13 5/8 13 14 3/4 11 10 1/8 17 15 Spread 20~ 16 18 1/8 21 13~ given 15 13 17~ 16 15 12 6~ 14~ 14~ 13 13 7/8 14~ 14~ 13~ given 15 3/4 15 12 14 given 15 14 1/8 12 3/4 12~ 22 20 21 15 22 20~ 22~ 22 19~ 18 18 17~ 14 20 20~ 20 18 �Table 4. -- Bighorn Sheep hunter observations, 1965 season. Area No. 1 2 3 4 6 9 10 11 12 14 15 16 17 19 21 22 23 24 25 28 29 "k ** Location Hunted Poudre 11 Gore Range 8 Mt. Evans-Geneva Cr. 14 South Platte 6 Pikes Peak 6 Sangre de Cristo 14 Sheep Creek 12 Collegiate Range 23 Buffalo Peaks 10 Glenwood 5 Sheep Hountain 5 Cimonrona Peak 6 Georgetown-Empire 6 BO't17en Pass-Clarks Peak 11 Cow Creek 4 San Luis Peak 7 McCurdy Mountain 10 Battlement Mesa 5 Wetterhorn 6 Vallecito 5 Blanco River 6 Total 180 HUNTERS No. SheeE Observed Non Obs. Legal Ewes hunter Sheep Rams Lambs Total 1 1 3 1 6 11 1 14 6 6 14 12 10 8 5 2 6 6 5 4 5 10 3 4 0 6 136 11 19 14 20 31 35 2 12 6 8 33 9 21 3 12 23 6 14 0 21 300 2377~ 248 5 5 284 303 148 162 60 80 271 302 414 449 109 111 137 149 15 21 8 16 205 238 44 53 68 89 38 41 66 78 75 98 32 38 14 28 0 0 71 92 2281 2581 Includes ewes, lambs and small or illegal rams, Average based only on those hunters that observed sheep. SheeE Eer Hunter Legal Ewes Rams Lambs Total Man-days Effort Total Avg. 1.07'(';~ 21. 57'>* 22.57~* 59 .0 5.0 5.0 62 1.4 21.6 20.3 92 2.3 24.7 27.0 41 3,3 10.0 13.3 44 21.6 2.2 19.4 89 2.9 34.5 37.4 89 11.1 .2 10.9 159 1.5 17.1 18.6 82 1.2 3.0 4.2 18 4.0 4.0 8.0 23 5.5 34.2 39.7 45 1.5 7.3 8.8 32 4.2 13.6 17.8 81 .8 9.5 10.3 31 2.4 13.2 15.6 34 2.3 7.5 65 9.8 2.0 10.7 12.7 26 3.5 3.5 7.0 38 ,0 .0 .0 31 11.8 3.5 15.3 32 2.2 16.8 1171 19.0 5.4 7.8 6.6 6.8 7.3 6.4 7.4 6.9 8.2 3.6 4.6 7.5 5.3 7.4 7.8 4.9 6.5 5.2 6.3 6.2 5.3_ 6.5 f-J 0 �- 11 - The average number of days spent in the field by all hunters was 6.5 days with a range of 1 to 18 days. A total 1,171 man days of effort was expended by the sheep hunters during the regular season. The successful hunter spent, on the average, 4.2 days hunting, while the unsuccessful hunter spent slightly more than 7 days trying to locate a legal ram. Six of the permittees did not hunt due to various reasons. A number of hunters thought that we should have a longer bighorn sheep season. However, from the above information it can be seen that on the average the hunters only utilized approximately one third of the total season. Information obtained from Question No. 5 indicated that three hunters ed a ram but were unable to locate the animal to make a kill. had wound- Before the questionnaire was sent out there was some thoug~that perhaps only the older and more experienced sheep hunters were making the majority of the kills. This line of reasoning was refuted by the information from Question No.6. Sixty-three percent of the permittees were hunting bighorn sheep for the first time. Thirty-three of the 40 rams taken were killed by first-year hunters. The number of years that individuals had hunted bighorn sheep ranged from one to eleven years. The greatest number of bighorn sheep killed by any one hunter was five. Bighorn sheep license holders were allowed to take one antlered deer on a valid deer license in the area in which they had a sheep permit. Question No.7 was included to determine how many sheep hunters took advantage of the above-mentioned situation. Only 30 hunters reported taking a deer during the bighorn sheep season indicating a lack of interest by sheep hunters to kill deer during the bighorn sheep season. Fifty percent of the bucks taken had less than four point antlers with many being in the two point category. A number of bighorn sheep hunters complained about the trophy buck season which opened concurrently with the bighorn sheep season, particularly in the Sangre de Cristo Range, San Juan Primitive Area, Rawah Wilderness Area, Mt. Zirkel Wilderness Area and the La Garita Wilderness Area. Perhaps if the opening date of the trophy buck season were delayed for one week it would remedy this situation and also give the bighorn sheep hunter a better chance of killing a ram. The primary purpose of Question No. 8 was to get information on numbers and distribution of known goat herds, as well as pOSSible information on new herds. Only 12 sightings of mountain goats were reported. All but one of the sightings were in the Collegiate Range and on Mt. Evans. One hunter reported sighting three goats on the head of Piney Creek in the Gore Range. Three days were spent in the area trying to locate the goats but none were sighted. A number of other interesting remarks and suggestions were made under the comments part of the questionnaire, however, they are too numerous and voluminous to list here. Prepared Date by: L. Dale Hibbs Wildlife Researcher January, 1967 Approved by: Richard Project N. Denney Leader Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �- 12 - Appendix A License No. BIGHORN SHEEP QUESTIONNAIRE 1. Were you successful in killing a ram? If so, what are the approximate Length around outside curve. R. H. L. H. Yes No horn measurements? Basal circumference. Widest spread R. H. L. H. 2. Approximately 3. Did you see many ewes and lambs during your hunt? Yes Approximate how many legal rams did you see during your hunt? 4. How many days did you hunt? No. No No. No. 5. Did you wound a ram and not get him? 6. Have you hunted bighorn sheep in Colorado other than this year? Yes No Yes No If so, how many years have you hunted sheep in Colorado, other than this year? Number of years 7. As you know, sheep hunters were allowed to take one antlered deer during sheep season, with a deer license. Did you kill a deer during sheep season? Yes No 8. Did you see any mountain goats during your sheep hunt? If so, where and how many? 9. No. Location Yes No ~----------------- Would you please indicate on the enclosed map by an"X" mark the approximate location where you saw mountain sheep during your hunt. Also mark where you made your kill. Remarks and suggestions (Other comments concerning your sheep hunt). �January, 1967 - 13 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO --------------------------- Project No. W-41-R-16 Work Plan No. 1 Bighorn Sheep and Mountain Goat Investigations Job No. Title of Job: Bighorn Sheep Habitat Studies Period Covered: June 1, 1965 to May 31, 1966 Personnel: 13 L. Dale Hibbs ABSTRACT Intensive paced-Parker range transects were conducted only on tbe Cocbetopa winter bighorn sbeep range. This area is located west of Saguacbe, Colorado. The major overstory cover in tbe area was a dense stan.t of pinon (Pinus edulis) juniper (Juniperus scopulorum). Major grass species included blue grama, (Bouteloua gracilis), Arizona fescue (Festuca arizonica), mountain muhly, (Mllblenbergiamontana), sbeep fescue (Festuca ovina), and carex (Carex sp.). Six one-hundred point paced Parker transects were conducted in tbis area. The condition of the Cochetopa winter sheep range varied from high fair to low excellent. Pellet group counts wer-e made in conjunction with tbe regular vegetative transects. Bigborn" sbeep pellet groups in tbe area ranged from 70 to 360 groups per acre with an average of 37.4 bigborn sbeep days use per acre for the six transects. Sbeep use was noticably greater along tbe edges of the mesas and on the steeprocky slopes of tbe canyons. �- 14 - Objectives: An inventory and evaluation of the ranges now occupied by bighorn· sheep will help provide information on the habitat requirements of this species. The objectives of this job are to: 1. Determine the vegetative types and vegetative composition on bighorn ranges. 2. Determine forage preferences, of bighorn sheep and the competition for forage between this and other species. 3. Determine the topographic features of currently occupied bighorn ranges. Procedures: 1. Modified paced-Parker transects of 100 paces or points, using a 3/4 inch loop, were established in specific herd areas (listed, in part, in "location of work", Job No.1 of this Work Plan). At least two transects will be run in each vegetative type within known herd ranges to obtain vegetative composition. This procedure follows that described in the inter-agency cooperative big game range analysis condition transects (Chapter 8, Range Analysis Handbook, u. S. F. S., Region 11) for browse ranges. For alpine-tundra types a different form of paced transect will be used, similar to that developed for the previous season's use in mountain goat ranges. It, also, is a 100-point paced transect but consists of a pair of them within 50 yards of each other, on which the actual hit is recordedj the nearest plant to a hit, if on litter, moss~ bare soil, erosion pavement or rockj and the first, nearest utilized plant. This gives data for ground cover, composition and utilization, respectively. In addition, ten one-hundredth acre pellet group lots per transect will be counted for an index to total range use. Condition and trend of the range will be determined from data recorded on a range form, as well as soil ratings, as indicated by the scorecard. Certain modifications may have to be made for alpine areas when data from several transects have been gathered and interpreted. Summer and winter range areas ~nll be sampled with transects. 2. Forage preferences will be determined by two methods: a. Visual estimates of utilization by species on the transect hits. b. Analysis of stomach contents of hunter-harvested sheep. Two quart samples will be obtained wherever possible through the cooperation by hunters, and qualitative analyses on one quart will be performed by the point frame method (Chamard, Albert D. and T. W. Box, 1964. A point frame for sampling rumen contents, J. Wldl., Mgmt., 28 (3): 473-477) • �- 15 - While utilization data may not indicate consumption by species of animal, the relative use of the area, as indicated by known or observed animal species, and pellet group counts, will be an indication of actual and potential competition which may exist. Pellet group data are gathered on ten one-hundredth acre plots per transect and are recorded on the back of the range form. 3. The topography and terrain of each herd area will be determined from ground observation, aerial photographs and contour maps. These data will be recorded on a field form. Areas will be planimetered from aerial photographs or available maps. Data recorded will include: area or herd name; specific location; herd altitudinal range; geologic formations, elevations, the areas they occupy and their percentages of the total study area; primary game species being studied; associated animal species; aerial photograph numbers; land status (National Forest, National Park, B. L. M., state, private, and total acreages); comments; data; and investigator. A file will be made for each herd area, and range data sheets, type maps, aerial photographs, and other pertinent data will be maintained for each. �Fig. 1 -- Bighorn sheep utilizing the Arizona fescue-Mountain muhly range type on the Cochatopa winter bighorn sheep range. Fig. 2 -- Ewes and lambs on winter range. Note the availability of rough rocky terrain in the background. �- 17 Bighorn Sheep Habitat Studies L. Dale Hibbs Intensive paced-Parker range transects were conducted only on the Cochetopa bighorn sheep winter range. This area is located about eight miles west of Saguache, Colorado on the north side of State Highway No. 114. Most of this herd's winter range is on B. L. M. ground, except for that ground that borders Saguache Creek, which is privately owned. The area is characterized by small mesas transected by steep-walled rocky canons and lies at an average elevation of approximately 8,500 feet. The major overstory cover in the canons is a dense stand of pinon-juniper (Pinus edulis and Juniperus' scopulorum) and ponderosa pine (Pinus ponderosa). A number of shrubs make up the understory cover in the canons, however, squaw current (Ribes cereum), forwing saltbush (Atriplex canescens) and mountain mahogany (Cercocarpus montanus) are the major species. It was found that the predominant grasses, both on the mesas and in the canons were blue grama (Boutelua gracilis), Arizona fescue (Festuca ovina), and Carex (Carex sp.), in decreaSing order of abundance. The species of plants that were encountered on the range survey as regular transect hits or as composition hits are shown in Table 1. Six one-hundred point paced-Parked transects were run in the vicinity of the Dabney Ranch on Saguache Creek. Since bighorn sheep utilized both the mesas and the steep rocky canons as winter range, transects were run in both vegetative types to determine where the greatest use occurred. The pine bunchgrass 8~orcard was used since it was most nearly applicable to the area. The condition of the Cochetopa bighorn sheep winter range varied from high fair to low excellent. The average forage density index for the six transects was 58.8 hits per transect on desirable and intermediate species, with a range of 54.5 to 64.5 hits per transect. The plant density index ranged from 60.5 to 73.0 hits per transect with an average of 67.2 hits per transect. No intensive utilization transects were conducted since sheep use was extremely light and difficult to determine on the winter range. However, plants that had been utilized were sheep fescue, Arizona fescue, rabbitbrush, blue grama, Indian ricegrass (Oryzopsis hymenoides), four-wing saltbush and pincushion cactus. A herd of 17 sheep were observed to walk along with their heads down and actually seek out this small cactus. Most of the cactus, in an area 500 feet wide by 800 feet long, had been utilized by the sheep. During the latter part of May and the first part of June, before the sheep moved to the higher elevational summer range, they spent a great deal of time feeding in the native hay meadows bordering Saguache Creek. Apparently the new green grass attracted the sheep. �- 18 - Pellet group counts were made in conjunction with the regular vegetative transects. One-hundredth acre plots were established at every tenth point along a 100-point transect. The number of bighorn sheep pellet groups ranged from 70 to 360 groups per acre with an average of 37.4 bighorn sheep day's use per acre for the six transects. Other species found in the area were mule deer, (Odocoileus hemionus), and cattle which had 5.4 and .8 average day's use per acre, respectively. When comparing the areas of greatest use it was evident that sheep use was greatest along the edges of the mesas and on the steep rocky slopes bordering the mesas. Use decreased considerably toward the centers of the mesas, indicating a need by the sheep for having escape cover close by. (Figure 2). Table 1 -- Plants encountered on range transects conducted on the Cochetopa winter Bighorn Sheep range, May, 1966. Trees Pinus ponderosa Dougl P. edulis (Englm.) Gill Pseudotsuga Menziesii (Mirb) Franco Juniperus scopulorum Ponderosa pine Pinon pine Douglas fir Rocky Mountain juniper Shrubs Artemisia frigida Nutt. Cercocarpus montanus Raf. Ribes cereum Dougl. Chrysothamnus parryi Fringed mountain sage Mountain mahogany Squaw cur'rcrrt Rabbitbrush Forbs Atriplex canescens Opuntia polyacantha Haw. Pediocactus simpsonii Fourwing saltbush Prickly pear cactus Pincushion mountain cactus Grasses Bouteloua gracilis Carex sp. L. Festuca-arizonica Vasey F. ovina (Schulf) Koleria cristata Muhlenbergia montana (Nutt.) Hitch. Sitanion hystrix (Nutt.) J. G. Smith Stipa robusta (Vasey) Scribn. Blue grama Sedge Arizona fescue Sheep fescue Junegrass Mountain muhly Bottlebrush squirrel-tail Sleepy grass ========================================================================== Prepared by: L. Dale Hibbs Wildlife Researcher Date: January, 1967 Approved by: Richard N. Denney Pro ject Leader Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �January, 1967 - 19 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO --------~~~~--------Bighorn Sheep and Project No. W-41-R-16 Work Plan No. 2 Mountain Goat Investigations Job No. 4 Title of Job: Mountain Goat Distribution, Populations and Herd Composition Period Covered: Personnel: June 1, 1965 to May 31, 1966. L. Dale Hibbs ABSTRACT Project segments 14 and 15 were completed in June, 1965. A thesis was prepared from the information obtained during the two-ye2L' study on the Ecology of the Mow1tain Goat.· An abstract of the thesis is included. Mountain Goat ranges surveyed during this work period included the Collegiate Range, Mount Evans and the San Juan mountains. Accurate counts were made only in the Collegiate Range. The nanny:kid ratio for both the Mount Shavano and Sheep Mountain herds was 100:100 during 1965. The nanny: yearling ratio for the Mount Shavano herd was 100:66. Three adult male goats were taken during the 1965 mountain goat season held in the Collegiate Range. Samples were collected from two of the goats. �- 20 - Objectives: The occurrence and numbers of mountain goats in Colorado, as well as their sex and age structure, are factors necessary for formulation of a sound management plan. The o9jectives of this job are to: 1. Determine mountain goat distribution. 2. Determine populations or trends. 3. Determine herd sex and age composition. 4. Prepare detailed range or distribution maps for specific herds with written descriptions for census procedures, and develop standardized forms which can be used by management personnel during routine census and for recording long-term census information. Procedures: 1. Distribution of mountain goats in Colorado was determined by aerial and ground observations in areas of known occupancy, unverified reports, and possible new distribution resultD1g from, and close to, established herds. Aerial observations were made from fixed-wing aircraft and helicopter, and ground observations were made primarily by foot or horseback, although trail vehicles, four-wheel drive vehicles, and conventional vehicles were used whenever conditions allowed. Observational data were recorded on field forms developed for this project. These forms also will serve for other portions of this job. Data recorded included date; observer; game management unit number, herd or area designation; manner of making observation; time and number of adult males and females, yearlings, young, unclassified, and totals; elevation; vegetative type; general activity; associated animal species;, aerial photo number if known or available; and comments. A distribution map will be prepared from these data to add to information ~lready on Figure 1. Forest Service maps, scale two inches per mile will be used where available. In districts where these large-scale maps have not been prepared, the i-inch-per-mile maps will be used. 2. Attempts were made to obtain as complete a population census as possible in each area studied, or, at least, to establish a uniform coverage and counting procedure to provide reliable data from which to determli1e trends from year to year. These counts are made in conjunction w~th the distribution observations described under Procedure 1, and recorded on the prepared form. Counts are to be attempted under as nearly comparable situations as possible in succeeding years. Population data will be graphed for each herd or area. 3. In conjunction with the two preceding objectives and procedures, the herds observed will be classified by billies, nannies, yearlings, kids and unclassified, and totals for sex and age structure data. These data will enable us to determine productivity, survival and general herd health, on which sound management plans may be based. �COLLEGIATE [ •• "'--., +--; r RANGE Mt. EVANS (-'"oJ" -.'ro I--' \ " \., . -l I \ I t "',- '\ 'FIG. I Mountain. goat distribution in c o l or o d o, June 1966 �- 22 - 4. Detailed distribution maps as developed under Procedure 1 were assembled for the four geographical, administrative regions of the department. Detailed written descriptions for access to specific herds and recommendations for census procedures and techniques will be prepared for guides to management personnel. The field observation form will be modified if necessary to adapt it to management use and appropriate forms are being developed upon which to record data for specific herd management units, administrative districts and regions and statewide for individual years and for a lO-year period. A place for five-year averages, as these accumulate, will be included. P-RProjects W-41-R-14 & 15 were completed in June of 1965. A thesis was prepared from the information obtained during the two-year study on the Ecology of the Mountain Goat. The following is an abstract of that thesis: ABSTRACT OF THESIS A study conducted June-September, 1963, and 1964, sought to determine that status and habitat utilization of a transplanted herd of mountain goats (Oreamnos americanus missoulae) in the Collegiate Range, Colorado. Intensive investigation was confined primarily to Mount Shavano in the southern end of the range. The composition and trend in range condition of the Mount Shavano area was determined. The population and seasonal distribution of mountain goats with respect to physiographic, vegetative, and climatic factors was determined and summer and winter range boundaries established for most herds. Goats in the range did not exhibit a true migration. Instead they moved throughout the range freely rather than using a particular area during anyone season. The extent and pattern of daily movement was determined for the Mount Shavano herd of 35 animals. The mean daily movement for this herd was 691 yeard. A description of such physical characteristics as pelage and color, age and size, horns, hooves, senses, breeding activities, and development of young was presented. The summer and winter food habits of mountain goats were ascertained with the conclusion being that grasses and grass-like plants make up the greater part of the diet throughout the year. The high, windswept alpine terrain above timberline appeared to be an important part of the mountain goat's habitat in Colorado. Goats were observed using these areas during all months of the year and the accessibility, availability, and extent of habitat of this type might be a limiting factor during critical winter periods when deep winter snows cover the grasses above timberline. �- 23 - Aerial censusing proved to be the best method for determining the number of goats over a broad area in the Collegiate Range. Air and ground counts on the same areas compared quite closely. Aerial photographs, taken of herds above timberline, were used to obtain accurate total counts and in most cases faily accurate sex and age classification counts could be made. Aerial and ground trend count routes were established to provide information needed to manage properly the Collegi~te Range herd on a maximum sustained yield basis. Suggested management recommendations include a limited permit hunting system and legal protection for mountain goats as big game animals in Colorado. ��- 25 - Mountain Goat Distribution, Populations and Herd Composition L. Dale Hibbs The mountain goa-t project is being continued, although not as intensively, as part of P-R Project W-41-R, Bighorn Sheep and Mountain Goat Investigations. Activity on the mountain goat study (W. P. 2, Job No.4) was concerned primarily with attempting to locate mountain goat concentrations in the Collegiate Range, San Juan Mountains and on Mount Evans. A great deal of time was spent in becoming familiar with these areas. Therefore, the counts are low and incomplete. Each of the three areas mentioned will be considered separately. Collegiate Range: The Collegiate Range herd comprises the largest of the three transplanted goat herds in Colorado. Therefore, a greater amount of time was spent in this area. Annual trend counts were established for the key herds on Mount Shavano and Sheep Mountain during the previous two-year study. These herds were selected since they contained almost 80 percent of the goats in the Collegiate Range and were the only herds in which female goats were present. The trend count routes, as well as the summer and winter distributional ranges of the goats in the Collegiate Range, are available in the Colorado Game Research Report, January, 1966, Part One. These records will be supplemented as additional information becomes available. It has been found that the best time of the year to obtain accurate classification counts of the herds is during the first two weeks in July. By this time most of the nannies and their new kids have moved to the high slopes above timberline and have joined the yearlings and nannies without kids. The kids, yearlings and adults can be distinguished easily at this time. The best time to obtain a total count of the goats in an area is during the latter part of November. At this time most of the lone males will have joined the herds of nannies, kids and yearlings. Counts on two successive days in the Shavano area were necessary to obtain the desired herd coverage. The efficiency of ground counts was increased if the area was flown and the main goat concentrations determined before going into the area on foot. Aerial and ground trend counts and limited field observations were made of the mountain goats in the Collegiate Range during this work period. The numbers, sex ratio and areas of occurence of the mountain goats located are shown in Table 1. Fairly good coverage was made of the herds on Mount Shavano and Sheep Mountain herds was 100:100 during 1965. There were twin kids present in both herds indicating a high reproductive rate. The nanny: yearling ratio for the Mount Shavano herd was 100:66, which may be low, since it.was difficult to distinguish yearling from two-year-old goats. �- 26 - Table l. -- Mountain Goat observations, Adult Area Male Mount Shavano July 6, 1965 August 24, 1965 November 30, 1965 4 1 Mount Antero July 6, 1965 2 Mount Princeton July 6, 1965 6 Sheep Mountain June 28, 1965 June 29, 1965 June 30, 1965 July 6, 1965 August 23, 1965 November 30, 1965 Jones Mountain August 23, 1965 * 1 1 1 1 2 Collegiate Female Yearling 9 3 6 6 11 Range, Colorado, Kid Unc L, Total 10* 4* i1 4 7 17 30 24 40 2 6 4 7 4 7 2 3 2 11 9 1 7 5~'< 8* 4 5 7 16 11 7 14 21 Includes one set of twins. 12 24 11 7 2 Total 1965. 30 40 29 2 63 29 67 70 250 �- 27 - The second mountain goat hunting season was held in August of 1965. Six permits were allowed in specified areas of the Collegiate Range. Three adult male goats were taken during this season. They were all large goats with horns that ranged from 8 7/8 to 9 3/4 inches long when measured along the outside curve of the horns. Samples of the lungs, blood, stomach and large intestine were obtained from two of the goats. These samples have not been analyzed. San Juans: Of the three transplanted goat herds, the San Juan is the one about which we know the least. Only limited sightings have been made since their release in 1964. One week was spent in the vicinity of Lake City during July of 1965. I was unable to locate any goats or sign of goats in this area. Time has been set aside during the summer of 1966 for the purpose of locating these goats. Recently there have been some reliable reports of goats in this area. These leads will be checked out in an attempt to prove or disprove their accuracy. It appears that the goats have moved out of the original transplant area, but their present range is not known. One adult female (Tag No. S-293) was found dead in the New York Creek drainage near Silverton, Colorado by a Mr. Art Griffiths. Where the goat was found is approximately 25 miles, as the crow flies, from where the goats were originally released. This find would indicate that the goats are ranging somewhat farther south than we thought. Mount Evans: Little information is available on the Mount Evans herd, however, additional time is being devoted to this area during 1966. There have been numerous sightings of goats on MOunt Evans since +'heir release in 1961, but it is extremely difficult to estimate the total number of goats present on the basis of available information. I was able to locate a total of 14 goats in one herd. There were young goats present, indicating that this herd has become established. There is reason to believe that there are at least 25 to 30 goats in this herd. A total of 16 goats were sighted by bighorn sheep hunters during the 1965 bighorn sheep season. Reliable sightings of goats have been reported in areas southwest of Mount Evans. All leads with respect to goat sightings will be traced during the 1966 work segment. Prepared by: L. Dale Hibbs Wildlife Researcher Date: January 2 1967 Approved by: Richard N. Denney :Project Leader Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator ��January, 1967 - 29 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGME:NT State of COLORADO .Project No. W-41-R-16 Work Plan No. 2 Bighorn Sheep and Mountain Goat Investigations Job No. Title of Job: Mountain Goat Habitat Studies Period Covered: June 1, 1965 to May 31, 1966. Personnel: 5 L. Dale Hibbs ABSTRACT No intensive paced-Parker range condition transects were conducted on mountain goat ranges during this work period. Stomach samples were collected from tvTO of the goats tba t were killed during the hunting season. Feeding observations of the Sheep Mountain goat herd indicated that goats tend to.browse to a greater extent during the spring months than was previously determined. �- 30 Objectives: An inventory and evaluation of the ranges now occupied by mountain goats will provide information on the habitat requirements of this species. The objectives of this job are to: 1. Determine the vegetative types and vegetative composition on mountain goat ranges. 2. Determine the forage preferences of mountain goats and the competition for forage between this and other species. 3. Determine the topographic features of currently occupied mountain goat ranges. Procedures: 1. Modified paced-Parker transects of 100 hits, using a 3!4-inch loop, ivill be established in specific herd areas. At least two transects will be run in each vegetative type within known herd ranges to obtain vegetative composition. This procedure follows that described in the inter-agency cooperative big game range analysis condition transects (Chapter 8, Range Analysis Handbook, U. S.F.S., Region 11) for browse ranges. The alpinetundra types will be sampled with a different modification of the paced transect developed for the previous season's use on mountain goat ranges. It also is a 100-point transect, but consists of a pair of them, not utilization respectively. In addition, ten one-hundredth acre pellet group plots per transect will be counted for an index to total range use. Data will be recorded on a range analysis form prepared for this projecto Condition and trend of the range will be determined from data recorded on the form, as well as soil ratings~ as indicated by the score-card. Summer and winter range areas will be transected with paced transects. 2. Forage preferences are determined by two methods: a. Visual estimates of utilization by species on the transect hits, and b. Analysis of stomach contents of hunter-harvested goats. Two-quart samples were obtained whenever possible through the cooperation of hunters, and qualitative analyses were performed on one quart by the point frame method (Chamrad , Albert D. and T. W. Box, 1964. A point frame for sampling rumen contents. J. Wild1. Mgmt., 28(3): 473-477. While utilization data may not indicate consumption by species of animal, the relative use of the area, as indicated by known or observed ,animal species, and pellet group counts, will be an indication of actual and potential competition which may exist. Pellet group data are gathered on two one-hundredth acre plots per transect and are recorded on the back of the range data form. 3. The topography and terrain of each herd area are being determined from grolmd observations, aerial photographs and contour maps. Areas are planimetered from aerial photographs or available maps. Data recorded will include area or herd name; specific location; herd altitudinal range; geologic formations, elevations (their areas and percentages of the study area): primary game species being studied; associated animal species; aerial photograph numbers; land status (National Forest, National Park, B.L.M., State, Private, and total acreages); commentsj dataj and investigator. A file was made for each herd area, and range data sheets, type maps, aerial photographs, ani other pertinent data is maintained for each. �- 31 Mountain Goat Habitat Studies L. Dale Hibbs No intensive paced-Parker range condition transects were conducted on mountain goat ranges during this work period. However, intensive vegetative transects were conducted during the previous two-year study. This information is available in the Colorado Game Research Report, January, 1966, Part One. The summer and winter distributional ranges have been established for some of the herds. Therefore, range information will be collected during the 1966 work period. Stomach samples were collected from two of the goats that were killed during the 1965 hunting season. These samples have not been analyzed. As was mentioned earlier, only limited observations were made of mountain goats during this work period. However, some feeding observations were made on the Sheep Mountain herd in the Collegiate Range. The Sheep Mountain goat herd was under intensive observation for three days during the latter part of June. It was noted that the goats took, in addition to grass, a large amount of the young leaves and buds of quaking aspen (Populus tremuloides). These observations indicated that goats browsed more in the spring than was previously determined. However, additional data will have to be collected before any definite conclusions can be drawn. Approved by: Richard N. Denney Project Leader Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator ��- 33 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT state of COLORADO -------------~------------- Project No. W-40-R-7 Work Plan No. 1 Title of Job: Job No. 10 Review of Literature Period Covered: Personnel: Antelope Investigations May 1, 1965 through April 30, 1966. George D. Bear Objective: Prepare an annotated bibliography of literature pertaining to population and census of big game animals with emphasis on pronghorn antelope. Procedure: Literature was reviewed at the Game Research Center, Fort Collins. Due to time spent on other project jobs, little time was spent on the review, therefore it was not completed. Findings: A few publications were reviewed and abstracted, however very few references have been added to the reference list presented for this job in the Federal Aid Report for Colorado, Part Two, p. 247, January, 1965· Prepared by: George D. Bear Wildlife Researcher Date: January, 1967 Approved by: Jack R. Grieb Project Leader Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief ��January, 1967 - 35 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO --------~~~~~---------- Project No. W-40-R-7 Work Plan No. 1 Antelope Investigations Job No. 11 Title of Job: Herd Structure and Factors Affecting Herd Structure Period Covered: May 1, 1965 through April 3'0, 1966 Personnel: George D. Bear ABSTRACT Hunter check stations were established in the vicinity of the Larimer County and Moffat County study area3 to obtain the ages of the antelope killed by the hunters and general information on hunter observations. There was little difference in the sex and fawn-adult ratios obtained at the check stations as compared to the hunter report card returns. The mean age for'the antelope shot in units 2A, 4 and 5 were 1.6, 2.3, and 3.0 years old, respectively. All of the antelope brought through the check stations were killed the first day. The average amount of time required by successful hunters to bag their antelope was longer for doe hunters than for buck hunters in Unit 2A, while in Units 4 and 5 it took the buck hunters longer to bag an animal. There were 51 antelope fawns tagged in Moffat County during May and June. Three of these fawns were killed by hunters in the fall. Female reproductive tracts and eyeballs were collected from the antelope at the Unit 2A check station. These specimens were stored until they can be analyzed. Horn length as measured and reported by the hunters on report car-d.s may prove to be a usable index in determining the general age structure of the antelope buck harvest. Hunter report cards showed 18% of the buck kill were yearlings, whereas check station data showed 23% of the harvest was yearlings. Mortality due to predators and diseases appears bery minor. Sheep-tight fences in the Moffat County area can be a serious mortality factor in the future, unless passage-ways for the antelope are placed in them. �- 36 - Objectives: (1) Obtain sex and age counts for at least two major herds in the state and test various aging techniques. (2) Obtain information (3) Evaluate and interpret data obtained losses and hunting mortality. on antelope mortality. in this appraisal, including natural Procedures: Study areas were established in Larimer and Moffat counties where major antelope concentrations exist in two different vegetative types. The Larimer County study area is located in the rolling prairie region approximately 20 miles north of Fort Collins, Colorado, and is characterized by vegetation typical of shortgrass areas, blue grama (Bouteloua gracilis), buffalo grass (Buchloe dactyloides), western wheatgrass (Agropyron smithii) , and others. This area is approximately 88 square miles in size. The Moffat County study area is located in the rolling sandhills immediately south of Maybell, Colorado, and is characterized by a moderately dense overstory consisting primarily of bitterbrush (Purshia triden~) and big sagebrush (Artemisia tridentata). Cheatgrass (Bromus tectorum) is the most abundant understory species occurring on the area. The Moffat County area is approximately 30 square miles in size and is enclosed by a sheep-tight fence. Both study areas are grazed by sheep and cattle. (1) Check station$ were established on or near each of the two study areas during the antelope hunting season to facilitate collection of information. Antelope permits are issued on a public drawing basis; successful applicants received instruction sheets in their letters of notification. The eyes and lower jaw were collected from older animals as aids in age classification. The eyes were tagged and preserved in formalin until the lenses can be removed, dried, weighed, and the age of the animal determined. The eye lenses shall be dried in an Qven at 60 degrees Centigrade for a period of 72 hours, then weighed to the nearest one-thousandth of a gram. Tooth eruption and wear in the lower jaw was compared to a jaw board of assignedage animals to insure greater accuracy in this method of aging antelope. Other aging techniques, such as horn length, head length, and head width, shall be investigated. Sex and location of kills were recorded. Hunting information (possible wounding loss, number of hours hunted, and the number of animals observed) were recorded for each hunter checked. Hunters who killed a buck antelope were requested to record the length of the buck's horns on a post card given to each hunter at the check station. This information was compared to the information collected at the antelope check stations to evaluate the possibility of using horn length, as reported by the hunters, as an index to the proportion of yearling antelope in the harvest. Hunters having doe permits for the Moffat County study area were requested to bring the reproductive tracts from the does they killed to the check station. The hunters were given a plastic bag and a diagram of the female antelope reproductive tract as they entered the main gate. The tract was labeled (date, age of the doe, and the check station number) and preserved in a 10% formalin solution until a corpus luteum count may be made on sectioned ovaries. This information will be used to infer reproductive potential in the herd. �- 37 - It is essential to have data from known-age animals if the aging techniques are to be properly evaluated, thus fawns on the study areas were marked.' Due to the precociousness of young antelope, the fawns must be caught within a few days after birth. Most antelope fawns in Colorado are born in a period from May 25th to June 15th, hence, the tagging operations was confined to this period. The fawns were located by watching a doe until she went to nurse her fawns, then when the fawn hid itself the worker used a long handled fish net to capture the young animal. Two metal tags were placed in the ears of the animal, one in each ear. The sex of the antelope was noted and then it was released. The tags are approximately one and one-half inches in diameter and have an identification number and a notation (requesting the finder to return the tag to the Department of Game, Fish, and Parks at Fort Collins) inscribed on it. (2) Hunter check stations and hunter report cards were used in determining the number of antelope harvested on the study areas by hunters. Wounding loss was determined by randomly working the study area on the ground (on foot or by vehicle). Information pertaining to natural mortality was obtained whenever the opportunity permitted. Eagle nests on or near the study area were examined for antelope remains. (3) Summary tables need to be prepared from the sex ratio, age ratio, and mortality data to evaluate the effect of natural and hunting mortality on the overall herd structure and total numbers. The information obtained from the female reproductive tracts will be used to infer the potential production of the herds for the past breeding season. This informat:lon will be compared to the actual fawn-counts conducted in August. The age of each antelope brought through the check stations was determined by dentition, the aging data collected from these animals was grouped into their corresponding agegroup, one through five. Results: There were 60 antelope harvested on the Moffat County study area, Unit 2A; this was a success ratio of 60% (Table 1). Approximately 65% of these animals were aged by check station personnel. Table l.--Sex ratio of the 1965 antelope kill on the antelope study areas, based ueon hunter reeort cards and check station data.* Fawns Does Bucks Total Number Number % Number % Unit % Check Station 2A 5 13 11 32 55 16 8 39 40 12 1 29 5 41 20 Report Cards 60 27 16 :p 20 40 24 2A 105 6 6 3S 37 62 59 5 "1(Therewere 100 permits issued for Unit 2A (75 doe, 25 buck) and 125 either-sex permits for Unit 5. �,- 38 - Hunter report cards indicated 105 antelope were harvested on the Larimer County study area, Unit 5. However, due to short notice of closure of private lands to antelope hunting in Unit 5 the hunters were permitted to hunt in adjacent units. Many of the antelope reported by Unit 5 permit holders were actually killed in management units other than,5. Also, the hunters with Unit 5 permits were given the option of waiting until December, when these private lands in Unit 5 were open to hunting. Only 10 hunters were present in the late season; 8 antelope were harvested at that time. There were 20 antelope from Unit 5 sexed and aged by check station personnel. There was only a small difference in the sex ratio of the harvest as reported by hunter report cards as compared to the check station data. There also is very little difference in the reported percentage of fawns in the kill as compared to the known percentage of fawns in the harvest. In previous years there appeared to be a tendency for hunters to report fawns as adult animals. The mean age of animals brought through the check stations is presented in Table 2. The mean age for antelope from units 2A, 4, and 5 was 1.6, 2.3, and 3.0, respectively. Most of the animals were 2% years old and younger. In Unit 2A the mean age was higher for bucks than does, whereas in units 4 and 5 the mean age was higher for does than bucks. In Unit 2A the licenses are issued for bucks or does, while the licenses in the other areas are either-sex. Therefore the hunting pressure in the specified permit area is shifted to the doe population as when the sex harvested is left to the discretion of the hunter. All antelope brought through the check stations were killed the first day (Table 3). There was a heavy snow storm which moved into Moffat County the day before the opening of the hunting season. This storm lasted through the night of the "opening day", depositing from 18 to 24 inches of snow in the area. The storm was accompanied with near zero temperatures. Many hunters returned home without hunting and most of the remaining hunters returned home the evening of the first day regardless if they had bagged an animal or not. On the East Slope in Larimer County the weather was clear and warm opening day, but heavy ground fog and drizzling rain occured the second day, Therefore the weather had a great effect on the distribution of the antelope harvest; limiting it to the first day of the season. The average amount of time required by successful hunters to bag their antelope was longer for doe hunters in Unit 2A than for buck hunters (Table 3). In units 4 and 5 the average time was longer for buck hunters than doe hunters. Therefore it required a hunter more time to bag a doe than a buck in the specified permit area. A higher ratio of buck to does was reporLeo by hunters in Unit 2A thariby hunters in Unit 4 or Unit 5. There were 51 antelope fawns tagged in Moffat County during May and June (Table 4). There were 17 bucks, 31 does, and 3 fawns which were not sexed before they were released. Three of these 51 tagged fawns were killed by hunters in the fall. Head measurements were made and eyes collected from a few antelope brought through the check station. The head measurements are presented in TaQle 5. They will be grouped with data collected in previous years for tabulation. The eyes are .stored in formalin until they can be dried weighed and the data grouped with previous years data. �- 39 - Table 2.--Age and sex of 'the antelope checked through the check stations. Age Class Bucks Does Total (Years) Number Number % Number % % Unit 2A Fawn 4 23.6 8 33.3 12 29.3 '3 41.7 1 31.7 17.6 10 13 2 5 29.4 4 16.7 9 22.0 3 1 5.9 1 4.2 2 4.9 4 4 23.6 4 10.0 5+ 1 4.2 1 2.4 Total 17 24 41 1.2 1.6 Mean Age 2.4 Unit 4 Fawn 4 1 4 2 8 3 1 4 1 5+ 1 Total 19 Mean Age 2.2 Unit 5 Fawn 1 2 3 4 5+ 21.0 21.0 42.1 5.2 5.3 5.3 1 4 4 8.3 33.3 33.3 2 16.7 8.3 1 Total 12 Mean Age 2.6 2 33.3 2 33.3 1 1 6 2.7 16.7 16.7 1 2 3 12.5 25.0 37.5 2 25.0 8 3.5 6 4 10 1 2 2 25 2.3 24.0 16.0 40.0 4.0 8.0 8.0 1 5 6 3 2 3 5.0 25.0 30.0 15.0 10.0 15.0 20 3.0 Table 3.--Misce11aneous hunter information collected at the antelope hunter check stations. Unit Category 2A 4 5 Kill Bucks First day Second day Does First day Second day Both sexes First day Second day Hunter observations Buck hunters Number of hunters checked 17 24 14 24 21 10 41 45 .24 17 22 14 �- 40 - Table 3.--Miscellaneous hunter information collected at the antelope hunter check stations. (Continued) Category Antelope observed/hunter Hours hunted/hunter Antelope observed/hunter/hour Bucks observed/100does Doe Hunters Number of hunters checked Antelope observed/hunter Hours hunted/hunter Antelope observed/hunter/hour Bucks observed/100 does Buck and doe hunters Number of hunters checked Antelope observed/hunter Hours hunted/hunter Antelope observed/hunter/hour Bucks observed/100 does Wounded antelope observed Abandoned antelope observed 36 Unit 4 16 4.4 4 20 5 50 3.6 14 19 23 50 3.8 13 45 20 25 3.7 7 6 10 27 2.6 10 27 40 42 3.4 12 42 6 42 20 4.0 5 12 24 40 3.2 13 21 6 2 3 1 2A 32 2.9 11 �- 41 - Table 4.--Ante10Ee fawns tagged on the Moffat County study area during 1965. Date Tagged Tag Number Sex Unit Number"( buck 5-26 AN101 2-N 5-31 AN102 buck 2-N 5-31 AN103 ? 2-N 6-2 doe AN76 2-8 6-2 AN78 buck 2-S doe 6-2 AN77 2-S 6-2 doe AN79 2A buck 6-2 AN104 2-N AN105 buck 6-3 2A 6-3 AN106 ? 2A .AN80 doe 6-3 2A 6-3 doe AN81 2A doe 6-3 AN107"(* 2-8 buck 6-4 AN82 2-N buck 6-5 AN110 2-N doe 6-5 AN111 2-N doe AN112 6-5 2-N doe AN108 6-5 2-S doe AN109 2-S 6-5 buck ANl14 2A 6-5 doe ANl15 2A 6-5 buck 2A AN116 6-5 doe 2A AN117 6-6 buck 2A AN118 6-6 doe 2A ANl19 6-6 doe 2A AN120 6-6 buck 2A AN121 6-6 ? 2:-N AN122 6-7 buck 2-N AN113 6-7 doe 2-S AN123 6-7 2-S buck AN124 6-7 doe 2-8 AN125 6-7 doe 2-S AN51 6-7 2-S doe AN53 6-7 2-N buck AN52 6-8 2A doe AN54 6-8 2A doe AN55 6-8 2A doe AN56 6-8 2A doe AN58 6-9 2A doe AN59 6-9 2A doe AN60 6-9 2-S buck AN62 6-12 2-S buck AN63 6-12 .doe 2-N AN64 6-12 2A AN65~'(* doe 6-12 2A doe AN66""'( 6-12 2-S doe AN67 6-12 2-S doe AN68 6-12 2-S doe AN69 6-13 2-S buck AN70 6-13 2-N doe AN 71 6-13 40, Unit 2-N *Unit 2-S is that portion of Unit 2 that lays south of highway U. S. is that portion that lays north of this highway. **This animal was killed during the hunting season in September. �- 42 - Table 5.--Head length and width measurements Maybell check station. for 18 antelope measured at the Age Class 1 Sex Bucks Does 2 3 4 Length Width Length Width Length Width Length Width 26.8 29.1 11. 7 11.0 30.2 30.5 29.5 29.7 11.2 11.4 11.7 12.3 29.8 11. 2 29.5 30.3 31.4 30.2 29.5 28.7 11.1 11.7 11.8 12.3 11.8 12.5 29.2 30.5 29.8 10.3 10.3 10.3 30.5 28.9 10.2 10.3 Post cards requesting horn measurements were given to buck hunters as they came through the check station. There were 22 cards returned. Based on the horn length-age information collected during last year the hunter cards showed 18% of the buck harvest were yearlings. The check station figures showed 23% of the buck harvest were yearlings. This method of determining the yearling kill in the buck harvest may have merit, but a larger sample and additional information is needed. The female reproductive tracts brought to the check station by hunters hunting in Unit 2A have been preserved in formalin. They shall be analyzed when advice can be obtained from personnel experienced in techniques for sectioning ovaries and interpreting such information. The female tracts collected monthly on the physiology study will be an aid in following the seasonal development of the various tissues. The wounding and crippling loss was very minor on the study areas. There were only three dead and crippled antelope, two bucks and one doe, found following the hunting season in Unit 2A. This is a marked decrease from previous years. The deep snows apparently made it very difficult for hunters to obtain animals, thus the antelope were not abondoned once'the hunter obtained one. Also, the fresh snow made it easier for the hunters to retrieve dead and wounded animals. Due to weather conditions the wounding loss on the study area (Unit 2A) could not be surveyed with an airplane. Unit 5 was surveyed both from the ground and from the air. A Bell helicopter was used for the aerial survey. Only one crippled buck and one dead buck were found. Therefore, as in past years, the wounding loss was very low in the shortgrass plains region. Mortality due to predators appeared to be very light on both areas. The buffer species (rabbits) were extremely scarce on both-areas, however the predator populations, eagles and coyotes, were noticeably lower than previous years. Sheep ranchers in the Moffat County area exercise very intense coyote control programs and the coyote population was very low. There was one den of coyote pups known to have been raised on the study area. In mid June the fresh remains of a young antelope fawn was found in the locality frequented by this group of coyotes. �- 43 - There were numerous coyote tracks concentrated around the area. It was "ssumed the coyotes had killed the fawn. There wasn't additional evidence fo',,·., '.l ;,ildicate other predator kills on the study area in Moffat County. Coyotcs"~ecl to be very numerous on the study area in Larimer County (Unit 5). Aerial .int.elope counts in the winter months indicated there were approximately one coyote per five square miles, but counts during the summer months revealed only about one coyote per seventy-five square miles of land area. This trend was evident during other years, also. The coyotes apparently frequent the areas adjacent to the plains and out on the plains during the winter months, then shift back into the foothills during the summer months. Therefore, they appeared to be scarce in the plains region during the antelope fawning season. On several occasions during the winter coyotes and antelope were seen in close association. It appeared the antelope were in no danger; in fact regarded the coyotes with curious facination. There was no evidence of an antelope being killed by a coyote on the study area. Several eagle nests were visited periodically during the antelope fawning season. Only the remains of rabbits and ground squirrels were found at the nests. The carcass of one fawn was found on the study area. The cause of death was undetermined. It had been dead for several days. The animal was estimated to be less than one week old. It had not been molested by a predator and was in the normal position assumed by an antelope fawn when lying down. During March two doe antelope were collected in Moffat County for the physiology study. They both had abnormally long hooves and slightly swollen joints. One of the does chose to lie down and hide in the brush when she was approached rather than flee with the other antelope associated with her. Later she got up and attempted to move off, but had extreme difficulty in walking. The second doe collected was thought to be a healthy animal before she was collected. There were 79 other antelope observed in the area that morning and 5 of these showed obvious signs of being lame. The lameness was apparently caused by a joint desease. Attempts were made to capture some of the lame animals for intensified study at the Game, Fish and Parks Department Research Center, Fort Collins. The attempts were unsuccessful; however, additional effort will be made to obtain some of the lame animals and identify the cause for the lameness. The lameness was not evident among the animals after the weather became warm and drier. Sheep-tight fences constructed on Bureau of Land Management lands adjacent to the study area has contributed to antelope mortality in the area. The areas were fenced into pastures approximately two miles wide and three miles long so the leasee could graze sheep on the area with fewer'herders, thus eliminating some of his expenses. The fences were constructed as follows: a barbed wire laid flush at ground level, a 30 or 36 inch net wire placed four inches above this wire, then a barbed wire six inches above the top of the net wire. This type of fence will not only contain cattle and sheep but antelope as well. The pastures didn't contain water and athe fences blocked the routes normally traveled by the antelope to the wa t er holes. During "dry periods" the antelope were observed walking the fence lines looking for an opening. The gates were open, however, they were poorly located and many antelope could not find them. Four antelope were found hanging in the fences. They had attempted to jump over the fences but caught their hind legs in between the woven wire and the top barbed wire, thus were trapped and died. Unusually frequent summer rains kept the problem from becoming extremely serious. The fences also blocked the migration route normally followed by the a antelope to winter ranges. The antelope in the area were then forced to remain �- 44 - on their summer range. Fortunately it was a mild winter and the antelope faired well. However, in the future these fences and others being constructed in this fashion can be detrimental to antelope herds in the area. This page should be inserted in the January, 1967 issue, Game Research Report. Prepared by: George D. Bear Wildlife Researcher Date: January, 1967 Approved by: Jack R. Grieb Project Leader Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief �January, 1967 - 45 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT REGMENT State of COLORA.DO Project No. W-40-R-7 Work Plan No. 1 Title of Job: Period Covered: Personnel: Antelope Investigations Job No. 12 Antelope Census May 1, 1965 through April 30, 1966 George D. Bear ABSTRACT Aerial counts were made with a fixed-wing airplane and a Bell helicopter. The study areas were flown in one mile-wide strips at an altitude of 100-300 feet. Sex, age, and location were recorded for the antelope counted, also the flight conditions were recorded. Higher total counts ard buck-to-doe ratios were obtained on the helicopter flight than ona fixed-wing flight in the same area. Additional data are needed before a comparison can be made between the direction of flights and the total number of antelope counted. The buck-to-doe ratios were nearly the same for both study areas (Unit 2A. and Unit 5), while the fawn-to-doe ratio was lower on Unit 2A than on Unit 5. Data collected on these flights will be used in the study on population trends. �- 46 Objectives: 1. Determine the sex ratios, age ratios, and the numbers areas by aerial counts. of antelope 2. Compare results from flights conducted conducted in an east-west dir~ction. direction Procedures: The study areas outlined also used for this job. in north-south in given and flights in Job 11, Sex and Age Composition, were 1. Aerial counts were made with a fixed-wing airplane and a Bell helicopter. The study areas were flown in one mile-wide strips at an altitude of 100300 feet. The following' information was recorded for each antelope herd encountered: time of observation, vegetative type, aerial strip number, location on strip, number of males, number of females, number of fawns, number of unclassified antelope, and their activity when first observed. A tally of other wildlife species observed also was kept. The condition of the air, light, and ground cover was classified as outlined in the Colorado Federal Aid Game Research Report, January, 1965, Part Two, for the Antelope Investigations Project, W-40-R-5. This information was recorded on a tape recorder, then transferred to an aerial census form at a later date. Two flights on successive days were to be made in early fall before hunting season and early spring. 2. The flights mentioned in Objective 1, above, were designed to obtain information on aerial census conducted while flying in twv different direction. The pattern of flying was as mentioned above, but the first-day flight was to be conducted in an east-west direction and the second-day flight in a north-south direction. The results from the two directions will be compared and evaluated to determine which of the directions will provide a better census and yield better data. Results: A Cessna 182 and Cessna 180 were used for the fixed-wing flights and a Bell super-charged 47G3B helicopter was used for the helicopter flight. The helicopter census was made in Unit 5 while conducting the wounding loss survey following the hunting seasons. The total animals counted with the helicopter, 330 antelope, was higher than the total counted, 208 antelope, on the fixed-wing flight in September (Table 1). The buck-to-doe ratio was slightly higher for the helicopter flight than for the fixed-wing flight, 37:100 and 32:100, respectively. The helicopter flies slower and viSibility is better than the fixedwing airplane, also, the antelope were in larger groups when the helicopter flight was conducted. All these factors probably contributed to the higher count made from the helicopter. There didn't appear to be any pattern in total numbers of antelope counted and the direction of flight. In Unit 2A a higher count was obtained on an east-west flight than on a north-south flight. In Unit 5 a higher count was obtained on the north-south flight. Due to difficulty in obtaining an airplane for the census work comparative flights were obtained only in August on Unit 2A and in May on Unit 5. Therefore additional information is needed before definite comparisons can be made between north-south and east-west flights. The flights are made during early morning hours when the sun is still quite low near the horizon. It seemed to be easier for the pilot and observer to see when the �Table 1. -- Aerial census on the antelope study areas. Area & Date Aircraft Dir. of Flight Census Conditions Air Ground Light AnteloEe Counted Bucks Does Fawns Total Census Buck-doe-fawn Time Ratio (min.) Ave. Herd Size Unit 2A May 20 Aug. 30 Aug. 31 Cessna Cessna Cessna E-W E-W N-S III III III II I I II I I 50 77 40 U5 136 129 III III III III III III I II I I I I 32 29 35 • 89 75 68 108 241 74 68 165 287 237 43-100 57-100-54 31-100-52 42 79 47 4.1 6.2 107 97 208 330 43-100 42-100 32-100-60 37-100 65 67 65 95 4.9 409 8.3 14.3 Unit 5 May 13 May 18 Sept. 24 Dec. 6 Cessna Cessna Cessna Helicopter E-W N-S E-W E-W 65 - ~ -.,J �- 48 flights were made on a.north-south direction and they didn't have to face directly into the sun as on east-west flights. The early spring counts showed the buck-to-doe ratios to be the same for both areas. The fawn-to-doe ratios were slightly lower on Unit 2A. than on Unit 5. This information will be further evaluated in the study on population trends. Prepared by: George D. Bear Wildlife Researcher Date: January, 1967 Approved by: Jack R. Grieb Project Leader 'Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief �- 49 JOB COMPLETION REPORT . RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO L. Project No. W-40-R-7 Work Plan No. 1 Antelop~ Investigations Job No. 13 Title of Job: Techniques for Determining Population Trends Period Covered: January 1, 1966 through April 30, 1966 Personnel: George D. Bear Objective: To develop the most effective procedure for determining antelope population trends. Procedure: Census data for the three-year period will be graphed, tables ·prepared, and otherwise analyzed to best depict the basic population trend in each of the two herds under study. The data collected in Job 11 (Sex and Age Composition) and Job 12 (Antelope Census) is to be used. Results: Very little was accomplished on this job, pending ~.review of literature on population dynamics. References need to be reviewed to find the various techniques used in determining population trends. Then the various techniques can be applied. to the data to evaluate the best techniques .for determining antelope population trends. Prepared by: George D. Bear Wildlife Researcher Date: January, 1967 Approved by: Jack R. Grieb Project Leader Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief ��January, 1967 - 51 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO -------------------------- Project No. W-40-R-7 Work Plan No. 2 Title of Job: Antelope Investigations Job No. 1 The Moffat County Bitterbrush Mortality Study Period Covered: ':July 1, 1965 through April 30, 1966 Personnel: George D. Bear ABSTRACT This study was conducted on the bitterbrush dominated rangelands immediately south of Maybell, Moffat County, Colorado. In 1961-62 the bitterbrush started dying-off. The objective of this study was to evaluate current bitterbrush mortality and provide estimates of the densities of the shrubs species on the area. Four permanent line transects we~e established on the area to facilitate data gathering. Bitterbrush had the highest percent coverage, 13.8%. Other plants in descending order of cover percentages were: little rabbitbrush, silver sage, gray rabbitbrush, silver sage, bitterbrush, big sagebrush, and snakeweed. The over-all average computed from all the transects indicates 37% of the bitterbfush crown cover is dead. The mortality rate for the individual transects ranged from 45% to 31%. . �- 52 - Recommendations: The present phase of this study was completed during this segment, however, the study should be repeated in approximately five to seven years so a trend can be established for the shrub population under study. The results then should be published in Ecology. Review of Literature Bitterbrush (Purshia tridentata) is an important browse plant to wildlife throughout the west. Bitterbrush plants grow best on coarse-textured soils, which are well drained and slightly acid to neutral in nature. The average size, numbers, and density of bitterbrush plants in California decreases as the soils become shallower and the soil texture finer and heavier. Sagebrush and perennial grasses are predominant on the heavier soils (Nord, 1959; Nord, 1965). Bitterbrush reproduces predominately by seeds. Plants in nurseries have produced seeds when 3 years old, however in natiye stands.it may require a plant 10 years or more to mature. Increased twig leader growth occurs dur~ ing years of favorable precipitation but increased seed production is reflected the following year (Nord, 1965). Rodents are extremely important in perpetuation of bitterbrush in the natural state; because of the nature of the seed, dispersion is dependent on a means of dispersal other than wind. Rodents will gather the seeds and cache them in a small hole in the ground. Thus, the seeds are planted, later they will germinate and grow. Seedlings which become established under the crowns of the older plants usually don't survive, seedlings do better in the open areas nearly void of litter (Nord, 1965; Brown and Martinsen, 1959; Hormay, 1943). Several studies have been conducted in California and Idaho on re-establishment of bitterbrush on ranges where this shrub has been seriously depleted. Competition for soil mOistureiby other vegetation is a serious factor in seedling mortality (Brown and Martinsen, 1959; Holmgren, 1956; Ho rmay , 1943; Hubbard, 1957; Hubbard and Sanderson,' 1961). Holmgren (1956) studied competition between annuals and young bitterbrush plant in Idaho. He found few bitterbrush seedlings can survive in a cheatgrass stand. Seedling mortality was highest in the spring when cheatgrass was rapidly growing. Fall germinating cheatgrass was a more severe competitor than spring germinating cheatgrass because of its advanced development at the time of bitterbrush seed germination. Holmgren«1956) also found, the competitive effect of cheatgrass extends more than one-foot toward the center from the edge of a cleared plot. The bitterbrush seedlings were better able to compete with broad-leaved summer annuals than the cheatgrass. The peak of competion was not until in the summer on the weed plots when the weeds were actively growing. The influence of broad-leaved plants resulted in low-vigor bitterbrush plants that continue to die-off for 2-3 years. Seedlings growing in weed-free plots were vigorous, but subsequent invasion of weeds results in negligible or no mortality but caused a slowing up of the growth rate of the bitterbrush plants. Hubbard (1957) also studied the effects of plant competition upon bitterbrush seedlings. He established plots representing three levels of competition: (1) negligible, (2) light, and (3) heavy. He also measured soil moisture by using units which indicate soil moisture by measuring the degree of resistance to an electrical current passing through the soil. Bitterbrush seedling mortality on the plots at the end of three seasons was: negUgible, 22%; light, 21%; and heavy, 57-60%. Until July 13 of the first year mortality was nearly the same �- 53 - on all plots and was contributed to insects, after that mortality was contributed to the decline in soil moisture. Apparently the invading weeds on the "light plots" used little soil moisture, whereas grasses on the heavy plots were very competitive for soil moisture. Mortality on the negligible and light plots was very minor after the first year, while mortality on the heavy plots continued to climb. Bitterbrush seedlings under heavy competition grew only for a short time in the spring, whereas seedlings on other plots grew all summer. Bitterbrush heights on the heavy plots at the end of three years was 4.5-5.5 inches; and on the other plots the average height was 26 inches. The roots also showed great response: plants on negligible and light plots measured 42 inches and were extensively branched; while the bitterbrush plants on the heavy plots were 20-30 inches tall and the roots were generally unbranched. Hubbard (1957) concluded, even though some bitterbrush plants may survive under heavy competition there is little chance they will break free of competition and become dominant plants. In areas of low precipitation the most important limiting factor of seedling establishment is soil moisture. Hubbard and Sanderson a bitterbrush die-off (1961) studied the effect of grass on bitterbrush area in northern California. They state, growth in "this study vary clearly demonstrated that competition from other plants reduces bitterbrush growth and production. Production is a function of both number and length of leaders. Both were increased by removing the herbaceous understory from plots in an area of bitterbrush mortality near Mount Hebron, California. This study was conducted during a drought year, which undoubtedly increased the degree of competition for moisture. The response to weeding does not prove that the underst0ry competition is actually killing the bitterbrush - only that it is reducing production and probably vigor". McKell and Chilcote (1957) studied the response of green rabbitbrush (Chrysothamus viscidiflorus) and gray rabbitbrush (Chrysothamus nauseosus) following removal of competing vegetation. Rabbitbrush plants with the other vegetation removed had a ::-':eater amount of stem growth, greener leaves, and the flowers devloped earl i.c.r (three weeks); also the flower production was three times greater for gray rabbitbrush and five times greater for green rabbitbrush. Although bitterbrush reproduction is primarily from seeds, bitterbrush may reproduce from stem layering and sprouting from the root crown. Sprouting from the root crown is common in Idaho and to a lesser degree in the western Great Basin and California. Bitterbrush sprouts from an existing mass of dormant buds wholly or partly encircling the stem at ground level, or from a callus of meristematic tissue formed beneath the bark and encircling the stem. Two factors responsible for stem layering are soil moisture and growth form of the plant. More stem layering occurs on plants with decumbent branches than those with upright branches. Soil moisture and intensity of the fire seems to be an important factor in resprouting of bitterbrush plants in burned-over areas. Light to moderate fire intensities at times of high soil moisture results in a larger percentage of resprouting. (Blaisdeil, 1950; Blaisdell and Mueggler, 1956; Nord 1965). Blaisdell (1950) found that 15 years after burning there was 55% as much bitterbrush on the burned areas as on the unburned areas in Idaho. �- 55 - piece of string, approximately 3 inches long, was dropped on each shrub as it was counted; this helped to insure a complete count without duplications. Results: Bitterbrush (Purshia tridentata) had the highest percent coverage (13.8%) and frequency of occurance (93%) of the shrubs occurring on the transects (Table 1). Little rabbitbrush (Chrysothamnus viscidiflorus), gray rabbitbrush (Chryothamnus nauseosus), and silver sage (Artemisia~) had coverage estimates of 5.2%, 2.8%, and 3.1%, respectively. Big sagebrush (Artemisia tridentata) and snakeweed (Gutierrezia sarothrae) each had coverages less than 1%. Little rabbitbrush had slightly more plants per acre (431) than bitterbrush (427). The number of plants per acre for silver sage and gray rabbitbrush were 234 and 141, respectively. Snakeweed and big sagebrush were low in the number of plants per acre, less than 25. Even though bitterbrush had a higher density than the other shrubs on the transects, bitterbrush reproduction was lower than that for several of the other shrubs (Table 1). The number of seedlings per acre for each shrub species in desceriding order was: little rabbitbrush, 524; gray rabbitbrush, 247; silver sage, 175; bitterbrush, 137; big sagebrush, 24; and snakeweed, 23. The over all average computed for all four transects indicates 63% of the bitterbrush crown cover is still alive or 37% dead (Table 2). The percentages for the transects ranged from 55% to 69%, thus indicating the mortality rate was fairly uniform from one transect to the next across the area. Plants being classified as Class 6, or 81-100% alive were most frequent (77%) on the plots and most abundant (240 per acre). The next greatest number occurred in Class 5, 98 plants per acre, and occurring on 57% of the plots. The average n'1mber of plants per acre for the other plant classes were: 41-60% alive, 42 plants per acre; 21-40% alive, 19 plants per acre; 1-20% alive, 28 plants per acre; and plants entirely dead, 74 plants per acre. Even though the majority of the bitterbrush plants occurred in the higher classes, 60%-100% alive, there were quite a few in the lower classes, dead - 20%, as well. There were extremely few plants that could be classified as 100% alive, so the decimating factor which caused partial or entire mortality of bitterbrush plants effected the majority of the plants and caused an overall mortality rate of 37% for the bitterbrush. Additional information is needed at a future date to determine the trend in the shrub densities and if bitterbrush will continue to be the dominant shrub on the area. Bitterbrush reproduction (seedlings) appears to be lower than that for the other shrubs, so as the mature bitterbrush plants die-off the other shrubs may fill in the vacancy. It is impossible to speculate from this' limited data on the effect of a change in shrub densities on the overall antelope food·habits and well-being. SUMMARY Other studies conducted on bitterbrush in the West indicated soil moisture was a very important factor in bitterbrush seedling mortality. Cheatgrass was a more serious competitor for soil moisture than annual weeds. Cheatgrass startea growing earlier in the spring, which coincided with the germination of bitterbrush seeds. Therefore the bitterbrush seedlings had to compete with the cheatgrass immediately upon germination. The annual weeds did not reach their peak of growth until in mid-summer, thus competition for soil moisture was not until after the bitterbrush seedling had initially become established. Even though the bitterbrush seedling mortality was lower when competing with annual weeds, �- 56 - Table 1. -- The percent coverage, number of plants, and number of seedlings for each shrub species occuring on the Browse Survey Transects in Moffat County. Species 1 Transect 2 Number 3 Purshia tridentata Percent coverage Number of plants per acre Freq. of occurrence on plots Number of seedlings per acre Freq. of occurrence on plots 11.5% 531 86% 65 25% 13.2% 422 94% 223 36% 16.0% 463 95% Artemisia cana Percent coverage Number of plants per acre Freq. of occurrence on plots Number of seedlings per acre Freq. of occurrence on plots 3.7% 268 38% 387 11% 0.5% 16 4% Artemisia tridentata Percent coverage Number of plants per acre Freq. of occurrence on plots Number of seedlings per acre Freq. of occurrence on plots Chrysothamnus nauseosus Percent coverage Number of plants per acre Freq. of occurrence on plots Number of seedlings per acre Freq. of occurrence on plots Chrysothamnus viscidiflorus Percent coverage Number of plants per acre Freq. of occurrence on plots Number of seedlings per acre Freq. of occurrence on plots Gutierrezia sarothrae Percent coverage Number of plants per acre Freq. of occurrence on plots Number of seedlings per acre Freq. of occurrence on plots 4 Average 38% 14.5% 295 95% 79 24% 13.8% 427 93% 137 31% 3.0% 180 28% 139 12% 2.6% 198 31% 170 14% 3.1% 298 47% 12 7% 3.1% 234 36% 175 11% 0.1% 23 6% 95 2% 0.01% 6.1% 324 82% 339 32% 1.2% 60 26% 193 19% 1.2% 51 27% 85 12% 3.6% 342 5.7% 431 79% 952 52% 7.0% 617 83% 1002 60% 0.2% 29 16% 0.1% 16 6% 1 1 1% o 63% '90 17% 0.1% 28 7% o 1% 181 0.2% 10 3% 24 1% 1 1% 1 1% 2.8% 128 49% 327 27% 4.3% 336 67% 51 25% 0.03% 17 7% 1 1% 2.8% 141 46% 247 23% 5.2% 431 73% 524 39% 0.1% 23 9% 1 1% �Table 2. -- The number of bitterbrush plants occurring in each class based on the amount of each shrub still living. 1 Transect Number Number Per Acre Freq. on Plots Number 1 76 37% 2 Number Freq. Per on Acre Plots 28 15% Plant CLa ssw 3 4 Number Freq. Number Freq. Per on Per on Acre Plots Acre Plots 18 16% 40 31% Number Per Acre Freq. on Plots Number Per Acre Freq. on Plots Average Percent of Shrub Grown Living 108 59% 337 80% 67% 5 6 Number 2 102 40% "45 35% 28 20% 40 27% 124 68% 185 70% 55% Number 3 62 25% 15 13% 12 11% 41 31% 88 56% 303 85% 69% Number 4 54 26% 23 17% 19 17% 48 35% 71 45% 134 72% 59% Average 74 32% 28 20% 19 16% 42 31% 98 57% 240 77% 63% * Each plant was recorded under the proper class by dot-tally; each class was based upon the percent of the plant living; Class 1: dead, Class 2: 1-20%, Class 3: 21-40%, Class 4: 41-60%, Class 5: 61-80%, Class 6: 81-100%. . \.n -.J �- 58 - the bitterbrush plants on the weed plots had very low vigor. Competition from other plants also resulted in lower twig production as well as high seedling mortality. This study was conducted in the rolling sandhi11s area immediately south of Maybell, Moffat County, Colorado. The area is characterized by a bitterbrush overstory and a cheatgrass-cacti understory. In 1961-62 the bitterbrush started dying-off. The objective of this study was to evaluate current bitterbrush mortality and provide estimates of the densities of the shrub species on the area. Four line transects with one hundred plots on each were selectively placed at equal intervals across the study area. The plots were lOa-square feet in size and placed at 125-foot intervals. Each bitterbrush plant was recorded in one of six class intervals, depending on the relative percent of the crown cover still living. The total number of plants and the number of seedlings were recorded for each shrub species occurring on the plots. Density estimates for the shrubs were obtained by using an angle guage. Bitterbrush had the highest percent coverage, 13.8%. Other plants in descending order of cover percentages were: little rabbitbrush, silver sage, gray rabbitbrush, big sagebrush, and snakeweed. The number of seedlings per acre in descending order were: little rabbitbrush, gray rabbitbrush, silver sage, bitterbrush, big sagebrush, and snakeweed. The over-all average computed from all the transects indicates 37% of the bitterbrush crown cover is dead. The mortality rate for the individual transects ranged from 45% to 31%. The crowns of most of the plants on the area showed at least a minor percentage of dead material. LITERATURE CITED Blaisdell, J. B. 1950. Effects of controlled burning on bitterbrush on the upper Snake River plains. Intermountain Forest and Range Exp. Sta. Res. Paper No. 20. 3 pp. Blaisdell, J. B. and W. F. Muegg1er. 1956. Sprouting of bitterbrush (Purshia tridentata) following burning or top removal. Ecology 37(2):365-370. Brown, E. R. and C. F. Martinsen. 1959. Browse planting for big game in the state of Washington. Washington State Game Dept. Bio1. Bull. No. 12. 63 pp. Clark, E. C. 1956. in California. Holmgren, R. C. tridentata) The Great Basin tent caterpillar in relation California Fish and Game 42(2):131-142. 1956. Competition in Idaho. Ecology Hormay, A. L. 1943. Bitterbrush Exp. Sta. Res. Note No. 34. Hubbard, R. L. California 1956. Forest to bitterbrush between annuals and young bitterbrush 37(2):370-377. in California. 13 pp. California Forest (Purshia and Range Bitterbrush seedlings destroyed by cutworms and wireworms. and Range Exp. Sta. Forest Res. Note No. 114. 2 pp. �- 59 Hubbard, R. L. 1957. The effects of plant competition upon the growth and survival of bitterbrush seedlings. Jour. Range Mgmt. 10(3):135-137. Hubbard, R. L. and H. R. Sanderson. 1961. Grass reduces bitterbrush production. California Fish and Game 47:391-398. McKell, C. M ..and W. W. Chilcote. 1957. Response of rabbi tbrushfollovTing removal of competing vegetation. Jour. Range Mgmt. 10(5):228-230. Nord, E. c. 1959. Bitterbrush ecology some recent findings. Southwest Forest and Range Exp. Sta. Res. Note No. 148. 8pp. 1965. Autecology of bitterbrush in California. Monographs 35(3):307-334. Prepared by: George D. Bear Wildlife Researcher Date: January, 1967 Approved by: Pacific Ecological Jack R. Grieb Project Leader Wayr;e W. Sandfort Game Research Chief ��January, 1967 - 61 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO --------~~~~~--------- Pr o.jec t No. W-40-R-7 Work Plan No. 2 Title of Job: Period Covered: Personnel: Antelope Investigations Job No. 2 Food Habits of Antelope M3.y 1, 1965 through April 30., 1966 George D. Bear ABSTRACT Study areas were established on rangelands in Moffat County characterized by sagebrush and bitterbrush. Stomach samples were taken from 29 antelope collected at monthly intervals. The samples were stored in formalin until they can be sorted and analyzed. Temporary vegetation transects were established in the immediate vicinity where the antelope were collected each month to provide an index to plants availabl~ to the animals. The percent composition and frequency for each plant species occurring on these transects .are presented in Tables 1 and 2. This information will be compared to the plant composition in each of the corresponding stomach samples. �- 62 - Objectives: To determine food preferences on a sagebrush and bitterbrush··range. and foods eaten by antelope living Procedure: Study areas were established in Antelope Management Units 2A and 3, both are located in Moffat County, Colorado. These areas are characterized by a shrub overstory; Unit 2A is predominantly a bitterbrush range, while Unit 3 is characterized by sagebrush. Three antelope were collected for stomach samples each month throughout the year. One doe and one buck was collected from Unit 3, and one doe collected on Unit 2A. A two-quart sample of the rumen contents was taken from each animal, taking care to mix rumen contents prior to collection so that a representative sample was obtained. The sample was placed in two one-quart, paper cartons marked with the specimen number, sex of the animal, date of collection, location of the collection, and the name of the person making the collection. The carton was then filled with formalin to preserve the sample until it can be analyzed. During analysis, the rumen sample will be sorted as to the species of plants. A binocular microscope shall be used when necessary to identify the plant particles as they are sorted from the rumen sample. When the sample is sorted into the various plant categories and air dried, each category shall be weighed to the nearest gram and the percent volume (occu1ar estimate) also estimated. This estimate will be made in relation to the over-all volume of the entire sample. This information is to be entered on prepared forms (Martin,1949). Stomach contents analyzed by this technique will also be analyzed by the "point frame" technique outlined by Chamrad and Box (1964). In using the point frame technique, the rumen contents are spread evenly over the bottom of flat enamel tray (17 x 28 em). Then a frame containing five pins placed at a 450 angle through a wood bar is fitted to slide along the top of the tray. The plant fragment hit by each. pin as each pin is dropped into the sample is recorded, until one hundred pinhits have been recorded for the sample. The results obtained from using these two techniques will be compared to determine which technique is most desirable to use for analyzing antelope stomach contents. A temporary vegetative transect was established in the immediate vicinity where the antelope were collected each month to provide an index to plants available to the animals. The location and direction of the transects were selected to obtain a sample most representive of the area. There were 50 plots on the transect. These were circular in shape and one-square meter in size; a hoop made out of a heavy gauge wire was used to mark the periphery of the plot. The first plot was randomly located, then the successive plots were located at 125 foot intervals along a predetermined direction. A light steel cable, 125 feet long, was used to mark the distance between plots. Percent coverage was estimated for each plant species occurring on the plot. Percent coverage is defined as the vertical projection of the live canopy of a plant upon the plane surface of the ground. The mean coverage estimates and percent frequency were computed for each plant species occurring on the transect. Results: Stomach samples were obtained from 29 antelope collected in Moffat County. There were 10 antelope collected in the bitterbrush vegetative type and 19 in the sagebrush type. In addition, 22 stomach samples were taken from dead antelope found on the bitterbrush range following the hunting season. The stomach samples were preserved in formalin and stored. They have not been analyzed at the present date. �Table l. -- Frequency and composition of the vegetative species occuring in the localities where antelope were collected in a bitterbrush range. Collection Number 53 54 37 42 48 52 33 29 Freq. Compo Freq. Compo Freq. Compo Freq. Compo Freq. Comp.Freq. Comp.Freq. Comp.Freq. Comp. Plant Species grasses Agropyron sp, Agropyron trachycaulum Bouteloua gracilis Bromus tectorum Carex sp. Koleria cristata Otyzopsis hymenoides Sitanion hystrix Sporobolus cryptandrus Stipa comata Unidentified grasses Sub-total Forbs Agoseris sp. Allium sp , Antennaria sp. Chenopodium sp. Chrysopsis villosa Detphinium sp. Erigeron sp, Eriogonum Eriogonum iff:l Eriogonum #2 Erysimum asperum Lappula sp, Lupinus sp. Lygodesmia sp. enothera trichocalyx .fhlox sp , (%) (%) - - 24 4 90 - T % 8 - 16 12 16 T T T (%) (%) - - 20 - - - - 10 14 2 26 10 2 4 4 - 6 60 2 19 28 T 2 18 5 T T T 96 - - - - - 3 16 96 - - - - - 14 T - 34 1 60 - - - -8 12 T 1 90 8 11 T - T T 2 2 - 1 90 - - - 2 - T - - - 48 - - 3 2 - 14 14 20 T 14 - - 14 (%) (%) - - - (%) 36 11 - (%) T 12 94 - (%) - 22 94 - 1 T T (%) (%) (%) - - 34 - 4 2 4 - 4 4 T (%) (%) (%) - - - 92 3 18 96 - - - .. - .;. 2 2 - T T -2 w 0\ 13 T 19 42 - 4 8 T T 27 4 5 2 (%) 21 T T 1 - T 2 T 2 50 8 - - - - T T T T 1 T T T - - - - 24 1 - 6 T 2 6 T 1 32 8 1 T - T 28 26 - - T T 18 2 T 2 T 2 - - - - - - - - - 2 T 2 T - - - - - - 10 1 - - 38 1 - - - - 2 T 8 T 4 T 2 T - - 2 T - - 1 �Table 1. -- Frequency and composition of the vegetative species occurring in the localities where antelope were collected in a bitterbrush range. (Continued). Collection Number 29 33 37 42 48 52 53 54 Pre;. Compo Freq. Compo Freq. Compo Freq. Compo Freq. Comp.Freq. Comp.Freq. Comp.Freq. Compo Plant Species Forbs Senicio sp. Sphaeralcea coccinea Zygadenus e1egans Unidentified forbs Unknown #1 Unknown #2 Unknown #3 Unknown #4 Unknown #5 Unknown {fo6 Sub-total Shrubs Artemisia sp. Artemisia cana Artemisia frigida Artemisia tridentata Chrysothamnus viscidif10rus Chrysothamnus nauseosus Gutierrezia sarothrae Opuntia sp. Purshia tridentata Tetra~ canescens Sub-total Total (%) (%) (%) (%) (%) (%) 6 2 62 10 4 T T T 1 T T T - 2 16 10 -' T T 1 T T 7 2 - 4 12 12 16 8 6 4 62 4 6 46 6 16 72 60 4 T 16 T 2 7 2 1 10 35 T 74 100 6 44 22 50 24 56 58 1 12 1 8 6 9 42 (%) (%) (%) (%) (%) (%) (%) (%) (%) (%) - - - 4 - T T - 2 - 1 - 2 T 2 T 2 - T - - - - - - _ _ 4 2 T T 4 12 30 2 48 24 2 48 6C 5 2 1 25 6 T 5 38 2 12 18 2 40 4 12 20 86 7 1 1 12 1 T 1 70 2 36 18 4 56 8 8 68 3 T 3 7 T T 80 3 18 8 20 26 80 52 2 T 4 8 11 44 2 68 22 10 28 6 18 86 60 10 1 5 5 3 1 10 43 4 24 8 2 60 14 14 T 2 12 9 52 56 5 33 79 82 93 93 69 78 75 100 100 100 99 99 99 100 ~ �Table 2. -- Frequency and composition for the vegetative species occurring in the localities where antelope where collected on a sagebrush range. Collection Number 30 31 34-35 38-39 40-41 43-44 46-47 49 Freq. Compo Freq. Compo Freq. Compo Freq. Compo Freq. Comp.Freq. Comp.Freq. Comp.Freq. Compo Plant Species Grasses A gropyron sp. Agropyron smithii Agropyron spicatum Agropyron trachycaulum Bouteloua gracilis Bromus tectorum Carex sp. Koeleria cristala Oryzopsis hymenoides Sitanion hystrix Stipa comata sub-total Forbs Allium sp. Antennaria sp. Arenaria fendleri Aster sp. Astragalus sp. Chenopodium sp. Chrysops is villosa Erigeron sp. Eriogonum sp , Eriogonum #1 Eriogonum 4/:2 Erysimum asperum Lappu1a sp, Linum lewisi Lesguere11a montana Lupinus sp. Lygodesmia sp. Oenothera trichocalyx (%) (%) (%) 8 1 - - - - 64 2 - - 60 2 34 12 80 38 7 T 1 1 4 3 19 (%) (%) (%) (%) - - T 2 18 2 10 64 34 38 96 T 36 T 8 - - - - - - 4 3 4 17 29 - 4 T 2 6 2 6 T T T 22 1 - - - - 2 20 T T T 66 36 2 - 4 2 -8 - - - - 1 -- - - 20 2 2 T ••• - 52 10 - - 26 30 2 2 1 1 1 13 14 1 - - 86 - 30 4 8 T - -1 12 T 1 1 3 2 5 62 16 42 68 2 1 2 7 12 14 14 16 92 10 22 8 20 34 - - 16 T 2 T 4 2 T T 2 T 4 T 24 2 4 4 2 T T 4 ·14 T T T 1 - T - - - - - 2 3 - 2 2 T - - (%) 13 2 - (%) (%) 58 T T T 2 (%) (%) - - 18 1 6 6 T T 8 11 - - - - - - 3 4 T - T (%) (%) - 4 1 T T - (%) (%) - 2 T I - 2 T 0\ V1 �Table 2. -- Frequency and composition for the vegetative species occurring in the localities where antelope where collected on a sagebrush range. (Continued). Collection Number 30 31 34-35 38-39 40-41 43-44 46-47 49 Freq. Compo Freq. Compo Freq. Compo Freq. Compo Freq. Comp.Freq. Comp.Freq. Comp.Freq. Compo Plant Species Forbs Penstemon sp. Phlox sp. Salsola Kali Sphaera1cea coccinea Trifolium sp, Unidentified Forbs Unidentified Cruciferae Unidentified Compositae Unknown ifH Unknown iffo3 Unknown iff4 Unknown iffo5 Unknown iff6 Unknown iff7 Unknown #8 Sub-total Shrubs Artemisia ~ Artemisia frigida Artemisia tridentata Atrip1ex canescens Chr~sothamnus sp. Chr~sothamnus nauseosus Chrysothamnus viscidif10rus Eurotia 1anata Gutierrezia sarothrae LeEtodact~lon sp. ..QE1ntiasp. Purshia tridentata Tetradymia canescens Sub-total Total (%) (%) (%) (%) (%) (%) (%) - -1 - 2 T 14 T - - - - 12 20 12 T T T 28 4 2 T - - 2 14 T 4 50 3 - - 6 '4 T 1 30 2 14 12 - T T T - - - 60 1 - - 2 16 T - - 10 10 - 2 2 (%) (%) (%) (%) 1 12 (%) (%) (%) (%) (%) - - 1 T 4 T - - - - 2 T 1 T 8 T - - - - - 4 1 - - - - - - - 13 7 2 3 - - - - - 100 65 12 72 1 32 2 76 T 54 16 14 84 2 T 41 2 88 T 65 92 68 - - - - - - - - 4 1 -1 14 60 2 20 12 30 3 6 1 - 1 3 T 24 26 60 - 12 - 16 2 14 22 18 10 4 T - - - - 0'\ 0'\ - ,I - T - - - 1 8 - - - - - 1 T 1 1 5 T 73 100 - -8 52 40 10 24 12 16 58 - - T 12 - 4 T 5 2 2 58 100 - 6 10 12 36 28 - 68 100 2 22 28 16 - - - 4 2 2 14 14 2 8 2 1 81 100 2 85 99 0 96 10 - T 94 2 92 18 82 - 2 T 11 2 T 3 - - 6 T 1 6 1 14 2 88 99 97 100 95 99 �Table 2. -- Frequency and composition on a sagebrush range. (Continued). for the vegetative Collection 50 species occurring in the localities where antelope where collected Number 51 55 Freq. Compo Freq. Compo Freq. Compo Plant Species Grasses Agropyron sp. Agropyron smithii Agropyron spicatum Agropyron trachycaulum Bouteloua gracilis Bromus tectorum Carex sp. Koeleria cristala Oryzopsis hymenoides Sitanion Hystrix Stipa comata Sub-total Forbs Allium sp , Antennaria sp , Arenaria fendleri Aster sp. ~galus sp , Chenopodium sp , Chrysopsis villosa Erigeron sp. Eriogonum sp. Eriogonum #1. Eriogonum #2 Erysimum asperum Lappula sp. Linum lewisi Lesguerella montana Lupinus sp. Lygodesmia sp, Oenothera trichocalyx (%) (%) (%) (%) (%) (%) 40 18 6 1 44 4 40 6 14 3 12 8 2 1 22 3 64 3 6 1 2 2 44 T 2 6 70 16 29 26 T 2 24 T 4 11 2 T 6 T 16 36 26 2 T 12 1 2 T 0\ -.J �Table 2. -- Frequency and composition for the vegetative species occurring in the localities where antelope where collected on a sagebrush range. (Continued). Collection Number 51 55 50 Freq. Compo Freq. Compo Freq. Compo Plant Species Forbs Penstemon sp. Phlox sp. Salsola kali Sphaeralcea coccinea Trifolium sp. Unidentified Forbs Unidentified Cruciferae Unidentified Compositae U!.known #1 Unknown #3 Unknown #4 Unknown :fls Unknown :f16 Unknown :ff7 Unknown #8 Sub-total Shrubs Artemisia ~ Artemisia frigida Artemisia tridentata Atrip1ex canescens Chrysothamnus sp. Chrysothamnus nauseosus Chrysothamnus viscidiflorus Eurotia lanata Gutierrezia sarothrae Leptodacty1on sp. Opuntia sp. Purshia tridentara Tetrad:tP6iaca(!escens ::;u-tota Total (%) (%) (%) (%) (%) (%) 4 T 16 1 56 1 - - - - 2 T 36 7 12 26 52 T T 1 - - - - 0'\ c:> - 4 - - - 60 10 39 26 48 60 - - 8 28 5 18 - - T - 2 12 2 T 2 T 3 T T 4 T - - 6 2 1 -8 - - 89 100 4 8 1 - 1 - 66 100 10 88 T 43 2 30 T 5 36 2 28 18 8 8 �- 69 Frequencies and composition of the vegetation occurring in the localities where the antelope were collected are presented in Table 1 and Table 2. These data will be compared to the data from the stomach samples when the samples are analyzed. Attempts were made to collect additional information on the vegetative species eaten by antelope. However, it proved to be extremely difficult to get close enough to a group of antelope to observe the vegetative species they were feeding upon without alerting them to the observer's presence. This portion of the study did not seem practicable, therefore was abandoned. LITERATURE CITED Chamrad, A. D. and T. W. Box. 1964. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 28(3):473-477. A point frame for sampling rumen contents. Martin, A. c. 1949. Procedures in wildlife food studies. Wildlife Service Leaflet No. 325, 10 pp. Prepared by: George D. Bear Wildlife Researcher Date: January, 1967 Approved by: U. S. Fish and Jack Grieb ~~~~~---------------Project Leader Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief ��January, 1967 - 71 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO Project No. W-40-R-7 Work Plan No. 2 Title of Job: Period Covered: Personnel: Antelope Investigations Job No. 3 Physiological Studies May 1, 1965 through April 30, 1966 George D. Bear ABSTRACT Measurements were made on 29 antelope collected at monthly intervals throughout the year and on 22 antelope found on the Moffat County Antelope Study Area after the hunting season .. There were approximately 6,120 measurements made on these 51 animals, which are presented in Tables 1-28. The data is merely presented here and will be analyzed in detail when the study is completed. The measurements were as follows: Blood samples were taken as soon as possible after the death of the animal. The blood was analyzed by laboratory technicians for its chemistry and cell volumes. Two carcass weights were made: a bled weight and an eviscerated carcass weight. External body measurements were: ear lengths, head length, interorbital width, neck circumference, hoof lengths, hind feet lengths, tail length, mammary gland dimension~, scrotum, dimensions, horn measurements, and girth. The following areas of pelage were classified as to color: Dorsal rostrum, interorbital, dorsal surface between the shoulder blades, and outer thigh. Pelage weight was sampled from the shoulder area of the body. Length, width, and depth measurements, weights, and volumes were made on the following glands: adrenals, thyroid, pituitary, testes, epididymides, prostate, and ovaries. Length, width, and depth measurements, weights, and volumes were recorded for the following organs: liver, kidneys, heart, spleen, lungs, brain, eyeballs, and stomach. �r,· - 72 - Several measurements were made on the lower mandible: length of the mandibular and maxillary teeth series, the mandibular diastema, and the length of the ramus. The length and width of the uterine horns, vagina, and cervix and the weight was recorded for all female reproductive tracts. Fat deposition measurements were made on the brisket, rump, mesentary, kidney, and the marrow of the left femure and tibia. Objectives: To measure physiological and morphological characteristics of antelope collected seasonally to establish "physiological norms" and to provide basic morphological data as related to sex and age classes. Procedures: The antelope, two does and one buck, collected each month in Moffat County for the food habits study (Job 2) were also used for this study; and in addition, the dead and crippled antelope found on the study areas after hunting season. Most of the procedures, in so far as possible, were duplicated and the. descriptions taken from Anderson, A. E. and D. E. Medin, 1962, Physical Characteristics, W-I05-R, W. P. 5, Job 1, pp. 253-299, in Quarterly Report, July 1962, Part 2, An Ecoligical Investigation of the Cache la Poudre Deer Herd, Colorado, 339 pp. (processed). FIELD Equipment The following No. 2 4 2 2 1 8 3 1 1 1 1 1 8 1 1 1 items were carried in a field kit. Item Syringes, 50 cc. Syringe needles, 13 gauge, 3~ inches long in stoppered tube. Tubes, centrifuge, 60 ml with plastic caps. Tubes, 15 cc with rubber stoppers with 1 ml, oven dried, anti-coagulant, potassium EDTA (ethylene diamine tetra acetate) distributed along their sides and bottom. Slide box, partitioned with dust proof cover. Slides, glass, microscope. Cotton swabs on five inch long swab sticks. Plastic vial with physiological saline (30 cc). Plastic vial with 80 percent alcohol (10 cc). Medicine dropper. Steel tape, metric, flexible, of six-root length. Transparent ruler, metric, flexible, of sixinch length. Pieces of paper toweling. Tweezers. Sheath knife. Glass rod of three-inch length. �- 73 - Shooting Location of the Antelope of shot When possible, Observations the antelope was shot at the junction of the neck and shoulder. to be recorded The following observations were recorded: behavior of the antelope before and after shooting, time of shooting, time of death, estimated distance of shot in yards, weather conditions, and number and behavior of associated antelope. Collection Method of Blood Samples of entering heart Blood samples were collected within 15 minutes of shooting. The blood is aspirated from the heart with'a. syringe and needle. The heart was entered from the left side between the fourth and fifth ribs and about two inches above the sternum. The index finger was used to push aside the pelage at the point of needle entry until the point is inside the thoracic cavity. Both hands were then used to introduce the needle into the heart; the syringe plunger being slowly withdrawn when contact is made with the heart. Anti-coagulant sample When about 20 cc of blood had been obtained, the syringe was detached from the needle and about 7 cc of blood was gently flushed into each of two anticoagulant tubes. The blood was flushed gently and allowed to trickle down the tube walls. Immediately after filling, each tube was stoppered, held downward momentarily, and its top moved gently through an arc of 1800 for about two minutes. Serum sample After the anti-coagulant sample had been obtained, two samples of about 50 cc each were aspirated in the same manner and flushed into each of the two 60 ml centrifuge tubes. Female Reproductive Tract Vulva measurements The maximum length and width of the vulva were measured with a transparent rule to the nearest millimeter as soon as possible after death. �- 74 - External General Body Measurements methods Three additional external body measurements were made as soon as possible after death. They were taken with a flexible steel tape to the nearest centimeter with the carcass lying on a flat surface. Measurements Total length--The distance measured from the tip of the nose to the distal end of the last tail vertebrae. The carcass is laid on its right side with head extended forward so that the nose is brought into as nearly a straight line with the back as possible, the tape being passed from the end of the nose over the top of the head directly to the top of the shoulders and along the backbone to the distal edge of the last coccygeal vertebrae. Shoulder height--The distance measured from the posterior the left hoof to the top of the scapula. edge of Girth--The circumference of the body within the first inch posterior to the edge of the scapula. The tape is held firmly but without undue tension. Care of Equipment Syringe and Carcass and needle The syringe and needles are washed and flushed reassembling the syringe and p Iac i.ng in kit. with cold water before Carcass The carcass is transported to the pickup It is covered with a tarp in the truck. in such a way as to minimize damage. LABORATORY Blood Analyses and Chemical Determination The blood samples were analyzed for the following: erythrocyte count, leucocyte count, differential leucocyte count (neutrophi1s, lymphocytes, monocytes, eosinophi1s and basophi1s), hemoglobin, and h cruato cr Lt . This wo rk was doae at the Game, Fish, and Parks Department Research Center, Fort Collins, Colorado, by the laboratory technician, Miss Fields. �- 75 - External Body Measurements General methods All external body measurements were made in the metric system at. three to 24 hours from the time of death. The measurements, instruments used, and their precision are described as follows. Measurements Ear lengths--Intertragic notch to the tip of the auricle of both ears, not including hair, with a transparent rule to the nearest one-half centimeter. Head length--Occiput millimeter. to the incisors with a caliper to the nearest Inter-orbital width--The maximum distance between the zygomatic arches measured with a caliper to the nearest millimeter. Neck circumference--Two measurements: one (a) made at a point 14 centimeters posterior to the occiput and the other (b) at the extreme lower base of the neck. Both measurements were made with a steel tape and measured to the nearest centimeter. The tape was held snugly but without excessive tension. Hoof lengths--Measured on all four feet as the maximum distance between the tip of the outside claw to its posterior edge. These measurements were made with a vernier caliper to the nearest millimeter. Hind feet lengths--Measured on both limbs from the tuber calcis (calcaneum) of the fibular tarsal bone to the tip of the hoof (outside claw) with a caliper to the nearest millimeter. Tail length--Measured from the perianal region to the distal end of the last coccygeal vertebrae with a transparent rule to the nearest one-half centimeter. The tail was held straight in relation to the spine and its ventral surface laid along the edge of the rule. Mammary gland--The maximum length and width were measured from the hair line, or point of swelling, and the maximum depth of a medial, longitudinal incision. A transparent rule was used in all cases, the length and width being measured to the nearest centimeter and the maximum depth to the nearest millimeter. Nipple lengths were also measured with a transparent rule to the nearest millimeter while their basal diameters were measured with a vernier caliper to the longitudnal axis of the body. Male reproductive organs--Measurements include the maximum length, width, and depth of the scrotum and the length of the penile sheath from the scrotum to the distal end. These were measured with a transparent rule to the nearest one-half centimeter. �- 76 - Eviscerated carcass--Weighed with all viscera and visceral fat removed. Gland Methodology General methods Immediately after dissection the glands were placed in individual, labeled, beakers containing physiological saline (prepared with tap water and either non-iodized table NaCl or reagent grade NaCl) until all fat and extraneous tissue could be removed. After blotting, measurements including longitudinal, transverse, and height diameters were made with a vernier caliper to the nearest 0.1 millimeter. Fresh weights were then obtained on a triple-beam balance scale to the nearest centigram. Volumes were calculated using their weight in air and submerged weights in water in the following formula based on Archimedes' principle and as illustrated by White (1956:219). Volume Measurements, in cc gland + apparatus (wt. in air - wt. in H O) 2 apparatus (wt. in air - wt. in H O) 2 weights, volumes, Adrenals--Longitudinal, adrenal are measured. special transverse, treatments and vertical diameters of each Thymus--The sometimes non-discrete appearing lobes are separated and their maximum longitudinal, transverse, and vertical diameters are measured. Thyroid--The maximum longitudinal, transverse, and vertical and the weight and volume of each lobe are obtained. diameters Pituitary--Following dissection of the brain, this gland was removed from the sella turcica by cutting the dura mater at the rim of the sella turcica with a scapel, cutting the infundibular stalk and gently removing the encapsulating dura mater with a probe. The maximum and minimum diameters were measured and its weight and volume determined. Testes and epididymides--Each testis was removed from the scrotum by severing the spermatic cord at the caudad portion of the ductus deferens as well as the tunica vaginal is where attached to the testes. The tunica albuginea was then carefully stripped from the testes exterior and the epididymis is removed by severing the coni vasculosi at their junction with the testis. The longitudinal and transverse diameters of each testis were measured with a vernier caliper to the nearest millimeter; after their individual weights and volumes were recorded, a longitudinal, and almost complete bisection was made of each testis and a similar bisection of each epididymis. A dry smear is made of each testis and epididymis, drawing the cut surface over a slide (Weesner, 1960:114). �- 77 - Prostate--The prostate gland was dissected from the neck of the urinary bladder and its weight and volume determined. Ovaries--These glands are to be studied both from materials collected on a monthly basis and from a large sample collected during the late September hunting season by soliciting hunter cooperation. On the latter material, measurements, weights, and volumes were not obtained. On the ovaries collected each month" the maximum longitudinal, transverse, and vertical diameters were measured to the nearest 0.1 millimeter with a vernier caliper; fresh weights and volumes were also obtained. Ovaries from both sources were treated and their structures analyzed in the same manner. They were fixed in labeled, individual vials with 10 percent buffered formalin. Organ Methodology General methods After dissection, each organ was '-lashedin tap water and placed in physiological saline. Paired or fragile organs were placed in separate marked containers while the larger, discrete organs were placed in a common container. Following the removal of fat and extraneous tissue the organs were blotted, measured, and weighed on a triangle or double beam balance scale to the nearest 0.1 gram or 1 gram as stated below. Volumes were determined as described for glands. Dissec tion~ measurements, weights, volumes, special treaLnents Liver--The maximum (left to right lobes), transverse (right lobe at right angles to the longitudinal axis of the liver), and height (along the transverse bisection) diameters were measured to the nearest millimeter. A caliper was used to measure the longitudinal and transverse diameters and a transparent rule for the vertical diameter measured along the transverse bisection. Kidneys--Each kidney was removed by first cutting the fat anteridr and posterior to the kidney and at right angles to its longitudinal axis. A cut was then made parallel to its longitudinal axis and immediately adjacent to the kidney capsules thereby severing the fat, ureter pelvis, arid the renal arteries and veins. The kidney was weighed to the nearest 0.1 gram with fat after removal of the ureter pelvis and the renal arteries and veins at the point of their junction with the hilum. The attached fat 'vas then removed and the kidney was weighed without fat. The maximum longitudinal, transverse (at the hilum), and vertical (opposite the hilum) diameters were measured with a caliper to the nearest millimeter. The kidney fat index (percent) for each kidney was computed by subtracting the kidney weight without fat from the kidney weight with fat and dividing the difference by the kidney weight without fat. The result was multiplied by 100. Total kidney fat index was computed the same way from the summed values of both kidneys. Heart--The peri.cardium was removed, coagulated blood in the chambers washed out with tap water, and all vessels cut at their junction �- 78 - with the heart. Preparatory to measurement, the heart was placed so the left side was facing the measurer. The maximum longitudinal diameter was measured from the left atrium (auricle) between the aortic arch and superior vena cava to the apex. The maximum transverse diameter was measured at the point of greatest heart breadth. Both measurements were taken with a caliper and read to the nearest millimeter. The weight was recorded to the nearest gram, and the volume was taken. Spleen--Weight to the nearest gram and volume were recorded this organ, also the longitudinal and transverse diameters. for Lungs--The left and right lungs were separated and weighed nearest 10 grams. No measurements or volumes were taken. to the Brain--It was removed by first making three cuts with a bone saw; two along the edge of the frontal and parietal bones and one at right angles ell the longitudinal axis of the skull and a.t, or just above the postorbital process of the frontal bone. A rongeur forceps was tl]Cn Uc,I::<1 to remove the frontal, parietal, and interparietal bones t.h n '(' 1 rt.cl y exposing the dorsal surface of the brain from the o l.fa !,,; to the medulla oblongata. A probe and blunt scissors rJ to separate the meninges from the brain case and to sever t.!, ":mial nerves and the infundibulum stalk at the ventral surface of the cranium. When the brain \Vas completely free in the cranium it was moved forward and the spinal cord was severed at the extreme posterior portion of the rhomboid fossa or level of the obex. This appeared as the posterior point of a shallow depression on the dorsal surface of the medulla oblongata. The described point of severance corresponds roughly to the junction of the medula ob Lon.ga :.. and spinal cord. Following removal of the meninges the maximum longitudinal diameter was measured with the brain on its ventral surface from the frontal to the occipital lobes of the cerebrum immediately parallel to the longitudinal fissure. The maximum transverse diameter of the brain \Vas measured at a selected point on the temporal lobes. All measurements we re made with a caliper' to the nearest millimeter; weight was recorded to the nearest gram. ! Eyeballs-- Both eyeballs were removed from their orbits by first cutting the conjunctiva (the mucous membrane which lines the eyelids) completely around the eyeball then pressing the eyeball gently outward and to the side. The extrinsic nerves, muscles, and' vessels were severed with scissors and the eyeball w i thdrawn from its socket. Two external maximum diameter measurements were made with a vernier caliper to the nearest 0.1 millimeter as follows: longitudinal, from the cornea to the extreme posterior wall; transverse, from wall to wall at a right angle to the longitudinal measurement. Weights were taken to the nearest 0.1 gram. Stomach and contents The stomach was removed by severing at the cardia and pylorus and tying each end with string to retain the contents. It was weighed to the nearest 10 �- 79 - grams on a balance scale. The omasum and abomasum were removed, then the rumen and reticulum and their contents were weighed. The entire stomach without the contents was then weighed. Measurements Mandibular and maxillary of Teeth and Bones teeth row series The series were measured with a vernier caliper to the nearest 0.1 millimeter. Measurements included (1) the alveolar distance from the anterior border of the anterior molar to the posterior border of the posterior molar; and (2) the alveolar distance from the anterior border of the anterior premolar to the posterior border of the posterior molar. Length of mandible It was measured with a caliper to the nearest millimeter. The maximum length of the left ramus was measured, not including any part of a tooth that extends forward from the anterior end of the bone. Length of mandibular diastema The distance from the posterior-most margin of the alveolus of the lower incisor to the anterior-most margin of the first fourth cheek tboth was measured with a caliper to the nearest millimeter. Left femur and tibia Before dissection, the femur was cracked, marrow from the central portion of the shaft was removed, placed in a crucible and macerated into a homogenous mass. Marrow color was immediately classified using the color charts of Munsell (1929-1960). The marrow consistency was rated in one of three categories, (a) solid, (b) putty-like, and (c) gelatinous. Right femur and tibia No measurements were taken. The bones were fairly well cleaned, labeled, and placed in a labeled polyethylene bag and frozen immediately. After storage the marrow was removed for analysis of fat at the laboratory. Female Reproductive Tract General methods Immediately after dissection the intact tract was placed in physiological saline. After draining, blotting, and trimming all fat and the bladder (at its junction with the urethra), the tract was measured and weighed as described below. Measurements All measurements were made with the tract lying on its dorsal surface and �- 80 - include the length and width of the uterine horns and body, vagina, and cervix. All measurements were made with a transparent rule to the nearest one-half centimeter. Weight Weights were obtained with balance scales to either the nearest one or ten grams depending on its size. In the gravid uterus, the weight of the tract with its uterine fluids and membrane was found by subtracting the weight of the embryo(s) or fetus(es). Measurements of Fetuses and Embryos External measurements of the fetuses were made as for the larger adult animals. No internal measurements were made. Only a rump-crown measurement was made on very small embryos. Fat Deposition Records of fat deposition on the brisket, rump, and visceral fat were made in addition to the kidney fat index and the marrow fat indices. Depth of the brisket fat was measured on the sternum at the third rib, when a cut was made parallel to the longitudinal axis of the carcass. Depth of the rump fat was measured at the maximum fat depth along a cut ~pproximately 12 inches long made at a 45° angle to the backbone startlng at the base of the tail and proceeding anteriorly across the right side of the rump. These measurements were made with a transparent rule to the nearest one-half centimeter. Fat in the visceral cavity, including mesentaric fat and kidney fat, was removed and weighed to the nearest 10 grams. Results: Measurements were made on 29 pronghorn antelope collected in Moffat County during the last project year (Tables 1-16). These animals were necropsied within a few hours after death. In addition 22 antelope were found on the study area following the hunting season. These animals were frozen until they could be necropsied and the various measurements made (Tables 17-28). Many of the antelope picked .up after the season had been dead as long as 24 hours, thus were in various stages of decomposition. The data from the two sample groups was tabulated separately in this report until it can be determined if the measurements on fresh tissues will vary significantly from measurements made on decomposed and frozen tissues. This study on antelope physiology is being continued in the present project year; therefore, these data presented here will be grouped with the data presently being collected before statistical parameters are determined for the various measurements. �- 81 - Table l.--External body measurements in Moffat Countl. (centimeters) for doe antelope collected Specimen Number Category Estimated age Shoulder height Total body length Tail length Body length Head length Interorbital width Mammary length width depth Vulva length width Mammary nipples (length) Left anterior posterior Right anterior posterior Mammary nipples (basal dia. ) Left anterior posterior Right anterior posterior Ear lengths Left Right Hind feet lengths Left Right Hoof length Left front rear Right front rear Horn lengths Left Right Girth Neck Point a Point b Carcass weights (lbs.) Bled Evicerated 26 27 29 31 33 34 36 5-1 92.5 141.0 13.8 3-1 88.2 145.5 14.8 3-2 84.9 144.0 13.9 4-2 89.1 114.2 10.6 1-3 89.2 136.7 11.6 8-3 95.6 149.2 14.7 4-4 88.7 133.0 8.5 30.1 28.1 11.1 8.1 6.6 27.8 12.3 3.0 3.0 3.6 2.0 2.6 1.5 31.0 11.7 18.0 11.0 12.0 4.5 2.0 28.9 12.1 9.0 4.0 2.0 4.0 1.5 19.0 20.0 9.5 3.5 1.0 18.5 13.5 12.5 3.5 1.5 28.8 13.3 29.3 16.6 7.5 3.5 1.5 2.2 2.3 2.2 2.4 2.0 1.7 1.5 1.9 2.0 1.8 1.8 1.8 1.5 1.7 1.5 1.4 1.5 1.4 1.6 1.4 2.4 3.0 2.4 2.7 2.8 2.0 2.5 2.5 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.4 1.4 1.9 1.9 1.7 1.6 1.4 1.7 1.5 1.7 0.9 0.8 0.9 0.9 1.4 1.6 1.6 1.5 1.4 2.0 1.4 1.3 15.0 14.9 15.1 15.6 15.5 14.3 14.7 14.7 14.8 14.8 15.1 16.2 15.9 43.6 43.8 36.8 36.5 43.0 42.8 42.1 42.1 41.9 41.6 43.8 43.5 42.2 43.0 8.8 7.1 7.5 7.7 6.5 7.9 6.9 8.1 7.2 7.8 6.9 6.4 5.9 6.5 6.1 7.5 6.7 7.7 7.0 7.8 7.0 7.6 6.6 7.7 6.7 7.3 6.4 2.6 2.1 89.4 0.8 0.8 89.8 5.0 4.8 90.3 1.0 1.0 88.2 3.0 2.8 88.2 0.5 0.5 96.0 6.5 3.5 .90.8 33.0 47.0 30.8 47.6 31.5 47.4 33.6 33.0 43.6 112 78 112 70 111 74 116 84 89 67 103 74 92 69 �- 82 - Table l.--External body measurements (centimeters) in Moffat County. (continued) for doe antelope collected S2ecimen Number Category Estimated age (yr. - mo , ) Shoulder height Total body length Tail length Body length Head length Interorbital width Mammary length width depth Vulva length width Mammary nipples (length) Left anterior posterior Right anterior posterior Mammary nipples (basal d La , ) Left anterior posterior Right anterior posterior Ear lengths Left Right Hind feet lengths Left Right Hoof lengths Left front rear Right front rear Horn lengths Left Right Girth Neck Point a Point b Carcass weights (lbs.) Bled Evicerated 37 39 40 42 44 46 48 5-4 93.0 143.7 15.2 6-4 81.2 141.0 14.1 5-5 95.7 145.7 9.3 2-6 90.3 138.9 9.5 5-6 94.5 152.0 13.8 4-7 88.0 142.3 7.4 3-8 98.0 30.1 13.1 8.0 4.5 1.5 3.1 1.4 8.0 5.0 3.0 3.5 1.8 29.9 10.1 7.0 5.0 2.5 3.5 1.2 28.3 12.3 5.0 4.5 30.1 12.3 6.5 4.5 2.5 1.5 3.5 0.8 29.6 13.0 6.0 3.0 2.5 3.5 2.5 1.5 1.5 1.8 1.8 2.5 2.5 2.5 1.7 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.7 1.3 1.3 1.2 1.2 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.8 2.3 2.4 2.6 1.4 1.9 1.5 2.0 1.0 0.9 1.1 1.1 1.4 1.4 2.1 1.6 1.5 1.7 1.8 1.6 0.9 0.9 1.0 1.0 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.3 1.3 1.6 1.3 1.1 1.1 1.0 1.1 16.0 16.4 15.9 15.6 15.1 15.1 1'4.3 14.4 15.2 15.3 15.2 15.1 14.7 14.6 39.4 39.4 37.5 37.9 40.8 40.7 38.5 38.5 42.3 42.7 38.5 38.5 43.8 43.7 7.9 7.0 7.9 7.1 7.7 7.0 7.7 7.2 7.7 6.2 7.7 6.4 7.0 6.9 8.6 7.2 6.3 7.0 6.1 7.3 6.2 ' 7.1 6.2 7.5 7.1 7.3 7.3 3.0 1.5 0.9 0.9 98.2 2.0 2.0 93.7 3.7 3.5 4.9 4.8 89.0 34.9 49.8 34.8 54.0 39.5 52.5 98 110 77 119 86 97.7 91.2 0.2 0.2 95.5 48.2 40.4 50.5 50.8 114 81 109 78 107 77 ,~,O 11.5 6.0 3.5 2.7 1.4 92 66 �- 83 - Table (centimeters) for doe antelope 1.--Externa1 body measurements in Moffat County. ~Continued2 SEecimenNumber 53 54 52 50 Category Estimated age (yr. - mon , ) Shoulder height Total body length Tail length Body length Head length Interorbital width Mammary length width depth Vulva length width Mammary nipples (length) Left anterior posterior Right anterior posterior Mammary nipples (basal d La , ) Left anterior posterior Right anterior posterior Ear lengths Left Right Hind feet lengths Left Right Hoof length Left front rear Right front rear Horn lengths Left Right Girth Neck Point a Point b Carcass weights (lbs.) Bled Evicerated 6-9 91.0 148.2 13.7 3-10 92.5 142.3 12.0 4-10 94.7 141. 7 12.5 5-11 89.9 134.4 17.1 29.4 12.2 6.5 3.5 3.5 2.0 27.4 11.7 4.0 3.5 2.0 3.0 1.5 29.4 13.2 4.5 5.0 1.8 2.0 1.3 26.9 12.3 7.5 4.5 3.5 3.8 1.2 2.4 1.8 2.5 2.5 1.3 1.3 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.3 1.5 1.3 2.1 1.9 2.3 1.9 2.5 1.6 2.5 1.7 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.1 0.9 1.0 1.0 1.2 1.2 1.1 1.3 1.3 14.9 15.0 14.6 14.5 15.4 15.7 1?2 15.3 43.4 43.3 44.0 42.0 44.0 44.5 44.9 45.0 6.6 6.0 7.0 6.0 8.8 9.2 8.8 13.4 7.2 11. 5 9.0 10.8 8.4 7.5 8.2 7.0 4.3 4.5 0.0 0.0 82.0 1.6 5.5 86.5 1.0 3.6 98.2 38.0 28.2 44.3 39.0 49.0 125 84 92 63 95 63 113 75 collected �- 84 - Table 2.--Externa1 body measurements (centimeters) for buck antelope collected in Moffat County. Specimen Number Category Estimated age (yr. - mon , ) Shoulder height Total body length Tail length Body length Head length Interorbital width Penis length Scrotum length height width Ear length Left Right Hind foot lengths Left Right Hoof lengths Left front rear Righ t front rear Horns Basal Circumference Left Right Length Left Right Prong lengths Left Right Spread (tip to tip) Spread (max. inside) Girth Neck Point a Point b Carcass weights (lbs.) Bled Evicerated 28 30 32 35 38 41 43 4-1 82.0 139.0 13.7 1-2 90.1 145.9 11.7 1-2 81.0 114.2 11.0 2-3 95.7 132.8 15.6 2-5 88.7 146.0 11.5 0-6 87.1 112.7 10.2 2-7 97.0 139.0 13.5 29.8 13 .8 15.0 6.5 5.5 2.5 28.5 13.5 13 .5 7.0 5.5 3.0 24.7 11.8 11.5 6.0 5.0 3.0 31.1 14.1 15.0 7.0 5.5 4.5 24.7 14.1 13 .0 7.5 5.5 3.5 24.2 10.3 13.5 3.0 3.5 2.0 29.9 14.7 16.0 3.0 5.0 5.5 15.1 15.0 13.9 14.5 15.4 15.3 16.0 15.9 14.8 15.0 15.2 15.0 15.8 15.8 36.8 36.7 38.1 37.9 41.1 40.5 42.8 43.0 39.3 39.2 37.5 37.7 43.5 43.1 6.6 6.2 6.7 6.·4 6.5 7.1 6.7 6.5 6.9 5.9 7.6 6.8 7.6 7.2 1.0 6.5 7.2 6.4 6.4 5.8 6.5 5.9 6.4 6.0 6.7 6.4 lJf .3 14.7 11.6 11.8 13.1 13.0 14.1 14.0 5.7 5.7 12.8 12.7 29.0 29.2 17.0 18.5 13 .0 12.5 29.5 29.5 32.7 32.7 4.6 4.3 20.5 20.5 4.6 4.4 15.6 21.3 97.3 2.0 1.7 14.3 13.7 82.9 0.0 0.0 6.1 6.0 21.0 27.0 100.0 6.0 4.0 8.3 19.1 95.2 0.0 0.0 9.5 9.5 83.8 18.5 20.5 97.5 49.0 63.5 45.5 55.5 22.5 47.8 42.2 54.8 122 92 120 87 68 123 87 5.3 74.6 34.7 44.0 104 80 107 82 54 �- 85 - Table 2.--Externa1 body measurements (centimeters) for buck antelope collected in Moffat Countl. {Continued} Specimen Number Category Estimated age (yr. - mon.) Shoulder height Total body length Tail length Body length Head length Interorbital width Penis length Scrotum length height width Ear length Left Right Hind foot lengths Left Right Hoof lengths Left front rear Right front rear Horns Basal circumference Left Right Length Left Right Prong lengths Left Right Spread (tip to tip) Spread (max , inside) Girth Neck Point a Point b Carcass weights (lbs.) Bled Evicerated 47 49 51 55 1-8 90.3 142.5 8.9 5-9 93.2 145.2 13 .3 1-10 97.0 145.8 15.2 2-11 92.7 142.2 11.7 29.2 13 .2 12.0 3.5 5.5 4.2 28.9 13.9 15.0 3.5 5.5 4.0 29.6 14.0 13 .0 8.0 5.0 3.0 29.2 14.7 15.0 5.5 4.0 5.0 16.1 16.1 14.9 15.5 15.7 15.1 15.2 41.1 41.1 43.4 43.7 45.4 45.5 44.4 44.2 6.5 6.0 6.6 6.4 7.0 6.4 6.9 6.5 7.0 6.7 . 7.1 6.5 7.5 7.1 7.5 6.7 14.9 14.8 16.4 15.3 14.8 14.7 .14.4 14.8 21.6 21.4 28.2 28.3 25.4 25.3 26.7 26.8 5.8 6.0 20.0 23.1 99.7 9.5 10.0 10.0 17.5 99.0 7.2 7.0 20.3 22 .5 94.0 7.5 7.0 17.7 23.5 94.2 47.8 63.0 49.2 47.2 56.5 118 84 110 82 113 84 113 88 �- 86 Table 3.--Measurements (millimeters), weights (grams) , and volumes (cubic centimeters) of the organs of the doe antelope collected in Moffat County. Specimen Number Organ 26 27 29 31 33 34 Longitudinal Transverse Weight Volume 135 89 365 347 143 108 421 405 137 95 405 389 127 99 356 335 126 96 318 301 124 104 346 327 Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Volume 292 178 40 1100 1023 302 173 55 1230 1152 324 177 49 1290 1218 276 168 55 890 838 292 136 34 790 736 266 177 49 1130 1057 Heart Liver Brain Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Volume Spleen Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Volume Kidney (Left) Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Volume Kidney (Right) Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Volume Lung Weights Left Right Eyeball (left) Longitudinal Transverse Weight Volume Eyeball (Right) Longitudinal Transverse Weight Volume 103 99 97 93 107 103 109 105 75 70 35 122 117 146 101 192 98 160 94 136 120 117 78 149 102 89 85 105 99 74 73 113 106 58 54 85 80 86.9 40.7 52.0 101.5 96.5 95.6 48.9 56.8 120.3 114.0 94.9 45.1 56.8 132.0 125.6 80.9 40.5 56.9 106.0 101.2 77.3 41.5 49.5 80.3 76.2 99.3 44.5 53.4 139.1 132.4 86.0 42.4 51.0 107.0 101.8 88.7 41.2 54.8 112.3 106.5 90.5 49.5 56.2 125.7 119.6 81.8 38.4 55.3 105.8 101.1 78.0 43.7 44.0 82.5 78.6 89.7 42.8 54.8 137.4 130.7 226 370 268 580 31.0 36.4 22.5 21.8 34.2 37.3 23.7 22.7 178.7 457.8 34.6 36.5 23.2 22.3 32.1 34.3 22.5 21.7 32.1 33.9 18.0 17.4 35.9 37.8 24.0 23.2 32.3 35.3 31.0 34.9 18.8 18.3 34.6 37.6 25.5 24.6 �- 87 Table 3.--Measurements (millimeters), weights (grams), and volumes (cubic centimeters) of the organs of the doe antelope collected in Moffat County. (Continued) Specimen Number Organ 36 37 39 40 42 44 Longitudinal Transverse Weight Volume 130 102 354 336 135 103 370 352 143 98 381 363 151 113 411 390 137 143 105 427 404 291 218 45 990 928 302 154 44 1195 1111 319 183 46 1440 1343 Heart Liver Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Volume Brain Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Volume Spleen Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Volume Kidney (Left) Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Volume Kidney (Right) Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Volume Lung Weights Left Right Eyeball (Left) Longitudinal Transverse Weight Volume Eyeball (Right) Longitudinal Transverse Weight Volume 75 70 33 106 102 108 103 144 111 133 107 82 78 98 330 312 80 72 118 115 154 90 133 91 97 92 168 117 8 91 86 71 67 74 70 154 114 7 73 69 86.0 38.8 53.5 107.8 104.1 87.0 42.8 54.8 118.1 111.9 88.7 47.9 54.9 121.0 115.0 95.8 50.7 54.3 129.6 123.0 80.5 45.7 45.3 84.7 80.3 94.3 52.4 55.1 133.0 128.0 87.1 38.4 57.8 110.6 105.6 86.3 56.5 46.2 112.3 107.4 94.5 51.0 54.4 124.3 118.1 89.1 48.0 58.9 126.6 120.1 77.3 44.1 44.5 79.1 75.1 93.7 46.0 58.7 134.7 128.7 34.0 36.7 21.2 20.8 34.3 37.0 25.1 24.3 250 360 290 450 32.8 36.8 22.5 21.9 33.2 37.0 25.0 24.1 34.1 36.0 21.1 20.6 34.1 36.7 22.1 21.4 34.1 38.1 25.1 24.3 31.4 35.6 20.7 20.1 �- 88 - �- 89 - Table 4.--Measurements centimeters) County. Organ (millimeters), weights (grams) , and volumes (cubic of the organs of the buck antelope collected in Moffat Specimen Number 28 30 32 35 38 41 Longitudinal Transverse Weight Volume 147 115 425 406 144 103 422 401 103 79 236 224 131 101 491 471 148 120 420 401 119 95 285 270 Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Volume 312 183 54 1200 1119 275 159 45 870 812 233 133 25 462 434 299 164 38 960 895 302 172 46 1380 1298 265 160 38 1010 946 138 134 104 101 107 103 122 118 103 99 155 105 122 109 135 96 153 82 121 70 88 84 67 64 83 78 125 117 53 50 Heart Liver Brain Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Volume Spleen Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Volume Kidney (Left) Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Volume Kidney (Right) Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Volume Lung Weights Left Right Eyeball (Left) Longitudinal Transverse Weight Volume Eyeball (Right) Longitudinal Transverse Weight Volume 89.1 46.5 51.0 107.2 102.0 81.5 37.4 53.7 89.1 84,6 72.8 44.1 49.2 74.0 70.9 84.5 51.1 52.1 128.0 122.9 89.9 57.8 56.0 140.2 132.6 79.8 46.0 49.1 101. 9 96.6 86.8 46.1 52.2 117.3 111. 7 83.8 41.0 50.7 94.7 87.9 70.9 43.7 43.3 66.7 63.6 83.0 50.6 54.8 133.4 128.0 95.9 54.0 60.9 169.2 160.3 79.1 46.9 49.3 97.8 93.0 400 570 302 563 360 450 180 240 33.0 34.8 22.1 21. 3 32.3 34.9 19.0 18.3 31. 5 34.1 18.0 17.3 32.5 35.1 20.5 19.7 32.7 36.6 20.6 19.8 30.0 34.1 17.5 16.8 32.0 35.0 19.7 19.1 29.9 34.2 18.0 17.2 32.1 34.7 20.7 19.9 33.9 35.1 20.4 19.6 30.4 34.3 17.0 16.3 �- 90 - (millimeters), weights (grams), and volumes (cubic Table 4.--Measurements centimeters) of the organs of the buck antelope collected in Moffat County. (Continued) Specimen Number 43 47 49 51 55 Longitudinal Transverse Weight Volume 143 110 405 382 147 122 497 477 150 124 494 469 153 119 493 467 149 111 416 394 Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Volume 302 176 53 1500 1392 310 182 49 1430 1324 338 197 45 1340 1248 310 171 50 1170 1092 335 189 47 1205 1124 Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Volume Spleen Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Volume (Left) Kidney Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Volume Kidney (Right) Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Volume Lung Weights Left Right (Left) Eyeball Longitudinal Transverse Weight Volume (Right) Eyeball Longitudinal Transverse Weight Volume 81 80 76 66 117 113 117 112 164 127 112 106 155 90 12 93 88 147 93 12 79 75 150 109 11 89 84 175 105 13 103 97 93.1 59.4 63.2 177.6 170.7 92.6 57.1 59.1 146.7 139.5 98.2 55.1 56.4 163.4 155.2 89.6 47.2 61. 2 124.1 117.2 98.0 57.2 54.1 163.2 154.7 95.1 54.1 60.0 161.8 154.6 89.5 56.2 61.1 155.1 147.6 97.1 51.1 62.4 158.4 150.0 89.2 45.0 60.4 127.6 120.7 97.7 59.9 54.2 167.6 158.8 370 490 315 450 255 365 310 380 33.1 37.0 22.1 21. 3 33.7 36.8 22.2 21.1 33.0 37.2 22.0 21. 2 32.7 36.4 21. 7 20.9 Grgan Heart Liver Brain 33.0 36.3 20.5 19.8 32.9 36.1 21. 5 20.7 32.9 35.7 19.9 19.2 32.2 35.9 21.1 20.4 79 78 37 127 122 33.7 38.0 23.8 23.0 �- 91 Table 5.--Gland measurements (millimeters) , weights (grams), and volumes centimeters) for the doe antelope collected in Moffat County. Gland Thyroid (Left) Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Volume Thyroid (Right) Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Volume Adrenal (Left) Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Volume Adrenal (Right) Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Volume Ovary (Left) Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Volume Ovary (Right) Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Volume Pituitary Longitudinal Transverse Weight Volume (cubic Specimen Number 29 31 33 34 36 37 55. 16.2 7.2 3.9 3.4 36.3 13.3 7.3 2.6 2.3 31. 3 14.3 8.7 2.4 2.0 55.1 15.8 5.5 1.9 1.7 48.4 15.0 5.2 3.3 3.1 34.9 19.7 7.2 3.4 3.2 40.3 14.7 7.2 2.3 2.1 51. 6 14.9 7.4 3.5 3.1 34.9 12.0 6.5 1.9 1.7 25.5 16.3 6.8 1.5 1.2 43.7 17.0 4.6 2.0 1.8 42.0 21. 7 11.0 4.4 4.1 36.6 13.7 8.0 2.3 2.1 37.8 16.0 7.7 2.4 2.2 40.0 12.1 7.8 2.8 2.5 39.9 10.0 6.3 2.4 2.1 32.3 11.4 6.2 1.5 1.2 34.5 11. 5 8.2 2.3 2.0 34.9 14.2 6.7 1.9 1.8 31.0 13.2 7.3 2.0 1.8 34.7 18.3 7.0 2.1 1.9 42.4 13.1 7.6 3.1 2.7 35.2 9.6 7.2 2.1 1.8 28.9 lO.7 9.5 2.2 2.0 37.8 11. 9 7.5 7.5 1.7 18.9 16.2 10.0 1.4 1.3 14.2 13.4 7.3 0.8 0.7 17.9 12.6 7.5 1.1 0.9 16.8 14.3 8.2 1.2 0.9 10.4 8.9 6.0 0.4 0.2 16.1 12.4 8.7 0.9 0.8 18.1 13.8 8.9 1.3 1.2 18.9 14.0 12.7 1.7 1.6 15.9 12.9 7.0 0.9 0.8 15.8 12.6 7,5 1.0 0.8 17.0 13.4 9.3 1.2 0.9 10.7 9.9 7.3 0.4 0.2 15.0 12.2 8.5 0.9 0.8 15.9 13.1 9.0 1.3 1.2 18.7 13.0 9.5 1.3 1.2 26 27 46.3 14.7 7.2 2.8 2.5 9.5 0.6 0.5 1.0 0.9 0.5 0.4 12.1 7.8 0.5 0.4 �- 92 - Table (millimeters) , weights (grams), and volumes 5.--Gland measurements centimeters) for the doe antelope collected in Moffat County. (Continued) Gland Thyroid (Left) Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Volume Thyroid (Right) Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Volume Adrenal (Left) Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Volume Adrenal (Right) Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Volume Ovary (Left) Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Volume Ovary (Right) Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Volume Pituitary Longitudinal Transverse Weight Volume Specimen Number (cubic 39 40 42 44 46 48 40.6 15.7 7.8 2.9 2.7 35.0 17.1 7.5 2.5 2.1 31. 5 15.0 8.4 2.1 1.9 35.0 16.1 7.0 1.9 1.7 39.8 12.5 7.1 1.9 1.8 41.8 14.1 8.2 2.5 2.3 27.9 19.0 8.7 2.7 2.5 32.1 16.8 7.9 2.6 2.2 27.3 15.3 9.0 2.1 1.9 41.0 17.3 8.2 2.4 2.2 35.1 13.4 7.6 2.1 2.0 32.9 14.6 8.1 2.2 2.0 35.0 14.0 7.9 2.1 1.8 37.0 11.8 6.1 1.9 1.7 39.9 13.0 8.0 2.3 2.2 35.6 14.8 8.8 2.2 2.1 33.1 17.3 12.2 2.4 2.2 12.1 7.9 2.0 1.7 31.4 12.0 5.5 1.8 1.6 34.7 12.6 8.1 2.2 2.1 28.3 18.1 8.2 1.9 1.8 16.9 15.4 9.4 1.5 1.4 19.2 14.1 10.0 1.5 . 1.3 14.9 13.0 9.3 1.0 0.9 20.6 9.9 15.2 1.3 1.2 17.6 16.7 9.0 1.7 1.6 21.4 18.2 10.0 2.3 2.1 18.8 14.2 9.0 1.5 1.L~ 16.3 13.1 9.2 1.1 0.9 16.7 13.2 9.7 1.1 0.9 20.2 13.4 12.0 1.4 1.3 13.6 8.1 0.4 0.3 18.2 15.9 9.8 1.3 1.2 11. 5 8.7 0.4 0.3 �- 93 - (millimeters), weights (grams) , and volumes Table 5.--Gland measurements centimeters) for the doe antelope collected in Moffat County. Continued Specimen Number Gland Thyroid (Left) Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Volume Thyroid (Right) Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Volume Adrenal (Left) Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Volume Adrenal (Right) Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Volume Ovary (Left) Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Volume Ovary (Right) Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Volume Pituitary Longitudinal Transverse Weight Volume 50 52 36.9 14.4 8.1 2.4 2.1 38.9 20.8 11. 9 5.4 5.2 34.2 13.0 4.7 1.8 1.6 38.3 18.3 12.1 5.2 5.0 46.5 14.6 5.2 1.9 1.7 53 54 30.8 21. 9 11. 5 2.9 2.7 38.3 11.7 8.0 2.3 2.2 30.2 12.8 8.4 2.0 1.6 38.8 18.1 4.9 1.6 1.4 31.0 10.1 9.0 1.8 1.7 34.7 11. 9 7.2 2.1 2.0 24.7 12.8 9.0 1.6 1.3 17.7 16.0 9.3 1.3 1.1 18.9 16.8 9.6 1.8 1.6 16.3 13.8 8.8 1.0 0.9 18.8 14.1 9.5 1.3 1.2 19.0 16.3 8.7 1.5 1.3 11. 9 10.4 5.7 0.5 0.4 20.4 11.3 6.3 1.1 1.0 17.4 13.9 9.5 1.2 1.1 9.2 9.3 0.5 0.4 11. 5 8.6 0.6 0.5 13.2 10.4 0.7 0.6 (cubic �- 94 Table 6.--Gland measurements (millimeters) , weights (grams), and volumes centimeters) for buck antelope collected in Moffat County. Specimen Gland Thyroid (Left) Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Volume Thyroid (Right) Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Volume Adrenal (Left) Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Volume Adrenal (Right) Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weigh t Volume Testis (Left) Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Volume Testis (Right) Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Volume Pituitary Longitudinal Transverse Weight Volume Prostate Longitudinal Weight Volume (cubic Number 28 30 32 35 38 41 35.9 19.8 9.9 2.9 2.7 36.5 12.0 7.0 2.0 1.7 27.9 9.9 7.0 1.6 1.4 38.2 19.4 7.6 2.8 2.6 42.6 15.9 8.0 3.2 2.8 28.2 10.4 6.5 1.4 1.2 32.8 16.7 9.8 2.8 2.6 44.6 14.2 5.7 1.9 1.6 29.1 11.4 6.5 1.3 1.1 42.8 15.6 7.7 2.5 2.3 31.0 19.0 11. 1 3.2 2.8 19.0 12.1 6.1 1.0 0.9 42.5 12.0 8.9 2.2 2.0 36.8 10.0 5.9 1.6 1.3 27.2 9.9 7.0 1.6 1.4 33.0 10.9 6.8 1.3 1.2 33.9 14.9 8.0 2.9 2.7 30.6 9.9 6.8 1.2 0.9 31. 2 12.4 9.2 1.7 1.5 36.5 9.7 4.3 1.6 1.3 31.7 9.1 6.9 1.6 1.4 32.8 10.3 6.0 1.3 1.2 29.7 17.0 9.0 2.2 2.0 35.5 10.2 4.9 1.3 1.0 39.6 30.0 47.8 32.1 36.3 26.7 14.5 13.9 24.6 23.5 12.0 11.4 43.6 3'4.1 29.7 24.8 23.7 50.0 31.5 27.6 25.0 23.8 23.1 17.1 18.9 3.6 3.2 38.9 27.9 48.4· 32.3 36.1 26.5 13.7 13.2 25.2 24.0 11. 7 11. 1 43.5 34.8 29.7 24.0 22.9 48.8 31. 2 28.1 22.0 20.9 24.6 18.0 14.9 3.7 3.3 26.4 1.9 1.7 11.8 0.7 0.6 0.4 0.3 0.6 0.5 0.6 0.5 9.6 11. 5 0.2 0.1 1.7 1.6 19.6 1.5 1.3 18.0 1.0 0.9 26.8 1.8 1.7 �- 95 - Table 6.--Gland measurements (millimeters) , weights (grams, and volumes (cubic centimeters) for buck antelope collected in Moffat County. (Continued) Specimen Number Gland Thyroid (Left) Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Volume Thyroid (Right) Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Volume Adrenal (Left) Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Volume Adrenal (Right) Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Volume Testis (Left) Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Volume Testis (Right) Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Volume Pituitary Longitudinal Transverse Weight Volume Prostate Longitudinal Weight Volume 43 47 49 38.8 18.0 9.3 3.7 3.5 37.7 16.7 8.2 2.5 2.3 38.3 17.0 8.8 2.5 2.3 41.1 15.8 9.6 3.1 2.9 29.6 19.1 7.5 2.0 1.8 31.7 13.5 7.5 1.8 1.7 37.9 10.6 6.9 1.1 1.0 36.6 13.8 7.7 2.1 1.9 37.9 16.9 5.0 1.6 1.3 34.1 14.2 7.7 2.2 2.0 29.2 14.4 6.0 1.2 1.1 32.3 17.2 6.2 2.5 2.3 36.9 18.9 4.0 1.5 1.2 32.6 14.1 5.1 2.1 1.9 40.0 28.7 22.3 13.6 12.7 35.2 20.3 27.9 12.5 11. 6 35.1 23.9 22.5 10.2 9.7 40.4 27.5 22.6 13.8 13.0 40.7 28.7 25.6 14.6 13.9 39.6 36.4 22.3 13.5 12.6 35.3 22.9 24.9 11.7 10.8 33.7 24.4 21.1 9.6 9.1 38.1 29.0 22.5 12.9 12.3 41.4 27.9 22.6 14.2 13.5 55 30.8 17.2 6.9 2.1 1.9 29.6 13.7 7.0 1.6 1.4 11.2 10.1 0.4 0.3 15.5 0.9 0.7 51 10.5 9.6 0.5 0.4 1.4 0.2 16.1 1.3 1.2 20.2 1.9 1.7 �- 96 - Table 7.--Stomach weights Bucks Specimen Number 28 30 32 35 38 41 43 47 49 51 55 for doe and buck ante1°Ee Weight {grams} Entire Rumen Rumen Stomach & and without Contents Contents Contents 3970 5250 2750 5690 7020 3470 6280 3890 6100 5060 6120 3540 4720 2430 4930 6260 3020 5330 3040 5060 4440 5780 1020 920 430 900 770 450 980 750 640 810 Specimen Number 26 27 29 31 33 34 36 37 39 40 42 44 48 50 52 53 54 collected Does in Moffat County. Weight {grams} Entire Rumen Rumen Stomach & and without Contents Contents Contents 4940 6280 9620 6530 4640 6220 4450 5920 5590 4220 6250 3220 4210 3800 4400 3955 4180 5670 8190 5920 4090 5350 2300 3380 5110 4820 3670 5210 2820 3420 3210 3840 3030 1270 1254 1300 1120 690 1280 810 710 750 650 670 910 530 870 610 620 690 �- 97 - Table 8.--Measurements (millimeters) and weights (grams) for the reproductive tracts and embryos taken from doe antelope collected in Moffat Count • Measurement Uterine Horn (Left) Longitudinal Transverse Uterine Horn (Right) Longitudinal Transverse Vagina Longitudinal Transverse Cervix Longitudinal Transverse Median Septum Length True Uterine Length Weight w i t h Young Embryo (Left) Sex Weight Rump-crown Length Total Length Shoulder Height Embryo (Right) Sex Weight Rump-crown Length Total Length Shoulder Height Collection Date Specimen Number 29 31 33 34 69 15 43 14 62 16 82 12 76 13 53 14 60 13 153 35 k52 29 145 155 30 30 35 88 25 36 85 25 57 21 30 20 46 40 272 135 39 92 52 19 27 26 95 40 13 27 22 49 60 17 22 28 86 6-17 6-19 7-19 7-26 8-26 8-29 26 27 125 83 118 35 75 15 126 82 100 32 142 26 160 �- 98 - Table 8.--Measurements (millimeters) and weights (grams) for the reproductive tracts and embryos taken from doe antelope collected in Moffat ~ounty. (gontinued) Measurement Uterine Horn (Left) Longitudinal Transverse Uterine Horn (Right) Longitudinal Transverse Vagina Longitudinal Transverse Cervix Longitudinal Transverse Median Septum Length True Uterine Length Weight with Young Weight without Young Embryo (Left) Sex Weight Rump-crown Length Total Length Shoulder Height Embryo (Right) Sex Weight Rump-crown Length Total Length Shoulder Height Collection Date Seecimen Number 39 40 36 37 74 19 62 14 66 19 75 18 67 18 130 22 42 44 105 45 104 48 165 88 74 20 103 42 99 50 148 88 125 30 165 30 145 30 165 29 155 30 74 19 42 35 60 12 13 20 60 18 40 35 103 94 113 45 13 50 45 232 120 85 9 65 25 285 95 80 15 40 50 820 200 3 26 4 11 Male 156 105 3 28 5 44 40 105 11-27 11-29 12-27 9-12 10-7 10-12 �- 99 Table 8.--Measurements (millimeters) and weights (grams) for the reproductive tracts and embryos taken from doe antelope collected in Moffat Count.y , (Continued) Specimen Number Measurement Uterine Horn (Left) Longitudinal Transverse Uterine Horn (Right) Longitudinal Transverse Vagina Longitudinal Transverse Cervix Longitudinal Transverse Median Septum Length True Uterine Length Weight with Young Weight without Young Embryo (Left) Sex Weight Rump-crown Length Total Length Shoulder Height Embryo (Right) Sex Weight Rump-crown Length Total Length Shoulder Height Collection Date 46 48 50 52 53 54 236 97 280 135 225 117 252 140 180 145 250 250 234 109 270 130 230 120 245 140 230 142 230 190 165 20 190 20 160 20 180 20 198 25 180 26 110 15 35 60 1590 270 100 15 30 140 2350 570 85 20 90 85 2910 430 60 18 45 175 3330 400 65 20 40 162 3075 465 90 18 45 230 5390 795 Male 156 165 185 Male 445 229 282 165 Male 350 205 242 155 Female 715 262 335 225 Male 670 264 327 220 Male 1500 348 437 305 Male 162 160 185 Male 500 237 284 184 3-3 Female 475 235 287 185 3-5 Female 665 266 337 225 3-25 Female 735 275 330 224 3-25 Male 1385 348 422 302 4-26 1-26 �- 100 - Table 9.--Carcass fat estimations for anteloEe collected Collection Index 26 Kidney Fat Index (percent) 11 Left Kidney Right Kidney 7 Both 9 none Back Fat Depth (mm) 4 Thoracic Fat Depth (mm) 43 Visceral Fat Bone Marrow Visual Est. Femur Color 5R-7/9 Solid Consistency Tibia Color 5R-7/8 Consistency Putty-like Bone Marrow Chemical Anal. Femur 99 Percent Fat 13 Percent Moisture Tibia Percent Fat 99 4 Percent Moisture 6-17 Date Collected Female Sex in Moffat County. Number 27 28 29 30 14 11 13 58 43 50 none 6 420 9 8 9 none 6 45 29 24 27 none 9 178 5R+8/6 5R-IO/l Solid 5R-8/8 5R-10/l Solid 99 3 99 Trace 91 14 98 1 99 2 6-19 Female 99 1 6-21 Male 94 3 7-19 Female 97 Trace 7-20 Male 36 �- 101 - Table 9.--Carcassfat Index estimations 31 Kidney Fat Index (percent) Left Kidney 44 Right Kidney 42 Both 43 Back Fat Depth (mm) none Thoracic Fat Depth (rom) 12 Visceral Fat 529 Bone Marrow Visual Est , Femur Color 5R-10/l Consistency Solid Tibia Color 5R-10/l Solid Consistency Bone Marrow Chemical Anal. Femur Percent Fat 98 Percent Moisture 4 Tibia Percent Fat 96 Percent Moisture 3 Date Collected 7-26 Female Sex for antelope collected in Moffat County. (Contld.) Collection. Number 33idc 34 35 4 7 5 none none 10 72 72 72 none 7 441 34 25 29 none 7 188 ·107 80 94 none 10 725 5R-4/6 Putty":' like 5R-10/l Solid 5R-ll/2 Solid, 5R-ll/l Solid 5YR-8/4 Putty-like 5R-10/l Solid 5R-ll/l Solid 5R-10/l Solid 65 77 97 1 96 5 95 Trace 82 70 7-26 Male 92 Trace 8-26 Female 97 86 Trace 8-29 Male 32* ~.(Had broken leg and was in very poor condition. id<Not nursing young. 1 8-29 Female �- 102 - Table 9.--Carcass fat estimations for antelope co11eGted in Moffat County. (Continued) Collection Number Index 36 37 Kidney Fat Index (percent) Left Kidney 117 135 Right Kidney 107 140 Both 112 137 Back Fat Depth (mm) 3 1 Thoracic Fat Depth (mm) 14 10 Visceral Fat 940 1600 Bone Marrow Visual Est. Femur Color 5R-10/2 5R-8/8 Consistency Solid Putty-like Tibia Color 5R-10/2 5R-8/6 Consistency Solid Putty-like Bone Marrow Chemical Anal. Femur Percent Fat 90 94 Percent Moisture 12 39 Tibia Percent Fat 91 95 11 Percent Moisture 25 Date Collected 10-7 9-21 Female Female Sex 38 39 40 24 20 22 none 82 64 81 73 1 28 1002 74 59 67 none 14 855 5R-10/l Solid 5R-10/2 Solid 5R-10/2 Solid 5R-10/2 Solid 5R-10/2 Solid 5R-10/8 Solid 99 5 99 9 94 99 99 10 10-12 Female 96 6 11-27 Female 5 2 10-11 Male 7 �- 103 - Table 9.--Carcass fat estimations . ~(C.ontinued for antelope collected Collection Index 41 Kidney Fat Index (percent) Left Kidney 32 Right Kidney 30 Both 31 Back Fat Depth (mm) none Thoracic Fat Depth (mm) 6 Visceral Fat 160 Bone !'1arrowVisual Est. Femur Color 5R-8/8 Consistency Putty-like Tibia Color 5R-8/8 Consistency Putty-like Bone Marrow Chemical Anal. Femur Percent Fat 94 Percent Moisture 1 Tibia Percent Fat 95 Percent Moisture 1 Date Collected 11-28 Sex Male --- -- in Moffat County • Number 42 43 44 46 119 143 130 2 16 1030 82 70 76 none 10 1230 93 75 84 Trace 10 990 206 208 207 none 11 1580 5R-10/l Solid 5R-8/6 Solid 5R-IO/2 Solid 5R-IO/l Solid 5R-9/4 Solid 5R-5.5/8 Putty-like 5R·-7/8 Solid 5R-8/6 Solid 97 2 98 10 94 6 96 5 97 4 11-29 Female 99 8 12-27 Male 95 6 12-27 Female 94 5 1-26 Female �- 104 - Table 9.--Carcass fat estimations (Continued) for antelope collected Collection Index 47 Kidney Fat Index (percent) Left Kidney 74 Right Kidney 73 Both 74 none Back Fat Depth (mm) Thoracic Fat Depth (rom) 12 Visceral Fat 940 Bone Marrow Visual Est. Femur Color 5R-9/4 Consistency Solid Tibia Color 5R-6.5/8 Consistency Putty-like Bone Marrow Chemical Anal. Femur Percent Fat 96 Percent Moisture 7 Tibia Percent Fat 97 Percent Moisture 7 1-26 Date Collected Male Sex in Moffat County. Number 48 49 50 51 57 38 47 Trace 7 510 47 10 Trace 12 1000 89 93 91 Trace 13 1360 none 5 116 5R-10/4 Solid 5R-9/6 Solid 5R-9/4 Solid 5R-9/4 Putty-like 5R-8/4 Solid 5R-8/6 Solid 5R-7/6 Solid 5R-9/4 Putty-like 94 7 91 8 97 5 90 33 93 7 3-3 Female 93 8 3-4 Male 89 93 22 3-23 Male 40 44 7 3-5 Female 9 9 �- 105 - Table 9.--Carcass fat estimations (Continued) for antelope collected Collection Index 52 Kidney Fat Index (percent) Left Kidney 66 Right Kidney 43 Both 54 none Back Fat Depth (mm) 9 Thoracic Fat Depth (rom) 600 Visceral Fat Bone Marrow Visual Est. Femur 5R-10/1 Color Solid Consistency Tibia 5R-9/4 Color Consistency Solid Bone Marrow Chemical Anal. Femur Percent Fat 95 Percent Moisture 6 Tibia Percent Fat 94 Percent Moisture 3 Date Collected 3-25 Sex Female in Moffat County. Number 53 54 55 70 63 67 none 11 650 34 17 25 none 10 8 9 7 295 145 5R-10/2 Solid 5R-9.5/1 Solid 5R-9/4 Solid 5R-9/4 Solid 5R-7.5/4 Putty-like 5R-9/4 Solid 96 4 95 93 31 96 95 2 5 3-25 Female 4-26 Female 7 9 none 91 21 4-27 Male �Table 10.--Teeth and bone measurements {millimeters2 for doe anteloee collected in Moffat Countz. Specimen Number Heasllrement Length of Tooth Rows (Left) Maxillary premolar and molar Maxillary molar only Nandibular premolar and molar Mandibular molar only Length of Tooth Rows (Right) Maxillary premolar and molar Maxillary molar only Mandibular premolar and molar Mandibular molar only Length of mandibular diastema Length of ramus Estimated age (years-months) 29 31 33 34 36 37 39 40 72.5 44.8 80.3 52.3 68.8 44.0 73.8 48.7 62.8 70.3 30.9 74.2 48.8 79.5 55.0 72.2 46.6 80.0 53.7 70.0 45.5 74.8 50.9 72.5 47.9 78.7 53.9 74.0 48.2 77.2 53.9 72.8 44.2 78.9 51. 2 69.7 222 3-2 68.7 44.7 75.9 48.3 64.6 211 4-2 62.1 43.8 69.8 32.5 65.5 213 1-3 68.7 44.7 76.6 50.4 79.6 237 8-3 74.3 46.0 80.2 53.0 72.3 221 4-4 71.7 46.8 76.7 51. 2 74.1 228 5-5 75.7 51.4 80.2 56.9 74.9 226 5-5 74.0 48.6 77 .8 54.2 72.1 227 I 5-6 f-' 34.5 0 0\ I Table 10.--Teeth and bone measurements {millimeters2 for doe anteloee collected in Moffat Countz. Specimen Number Measurement Length of Tooth Rows (Left) Haxillary premolar and molar Haxillary molar only Handibular premolar and molar Mandibular molar only Length of Tooth Rows (Right) Maxillary premolar and molar Maxillary mo lar only Handibular premolar and molar Mandibular molar only Length of mandibular diastema Length of ramus Estimate age (years-months) 42 44 46 50 52 53 54 63.8 39.3 71.4 45.1 69.9 46.0 73.8 52.1 75.5 30.3 79.3 27.5 74.0 28.8 76.9 24.0 68.0 43.3 75.4 49.7 69.5 44.2 76.5 50.9 68.6 45.0 75.1 52.1 64.1 38.2 69.1 45.2 73.9 216 2-6 69.3 45.1 73.3 51.9 76.5 230 5-7 74.5 30.0 79.4 27.5 64.8 218 4-8 73.0 26.9 75.4 24.2 74.9 232 6-9 68.7 45.5 75.0 50.2 66.4 212 3-10 - 68.8 44.3 74.8 52.l 70.9 223 5-11 - 77.9 53.2 67.9 223 4-10 {Continued2 �Table ll.--Teeth and bone measurements ~millimeters2 for buck anteloEe collected in Moffat Countz. Specimen Number Heasurement Length of Tooth Rows (Left) Maxillary premolar and molar Maxillary molar only Mandibular premolar and molar Handibular molar only Length of Tooth Rows (Right) Maxillary premolar and molar Maxillary molar only Mandibular premolar and molar Mandibular molar only Length of mandibular diastema Lemgth of ramus Fstimated age ~zrs.-mon.2 30 32 35 38 41· 43 47 49 51 55 60.5 29.8 70.0 36.8 58.0 29.0 63.0 35.2 74.1 46.1 76.4 50.3 71. 2 43.0 79.7 53.7 47.0 16.7 56.9 28.1 74.0 45.7 81.9 30.0 71.1 30.1 78.9 .. 28.7 74.0 27.9 74.3 26.0 74.0 44.1 76.4 51. 2 70.1 44.7 73.7 48.8 60.9 30.5 63.8 35.7 73.5 220 1-2 59.6 29.8 63.9 35.7 63.0 194 1-2 74.4 45.6 75.2 49.8 77.7 224 2-3 72.0 43.9 80.4 54.9 75.0 224 2-5 46.6 14.5 56.2 27.8 56.8 180 0-6 73.6 45.3 81. 9 30.0 70.7 223 2-7 70.8 31.1 79.2 28.7 70.6 214 1-8 74.7 28.2 76.2 26.0 81.4 231 5-9 74.6 44.8 78.4 51. 2 77 .1 217 1-10 70.5 44.1 73.3 48.8 74.4 233 2-11 r I-'" 0 --l �- 108 - Table 12.--Weight of hair from hide samples expressed as a percentage of the total weight of the sample. Month Collected Sex August August October October December December January March March March March April April Female Female Female Male Male Female Male Female Male Female Female Female Male Necropsy No. Percent 33 34 37 3S 43 44 47 4S 51 52 53 54 55 50 5S 56 67 74 6S 69 71 75 76 65 49 69 Table 13.--Pelage color classification and rump patch measurements for doe ante lore collected in Moffat County. Color Classifi.cations Specimen Number Dorsal Rostrum Interorbital 26 27 29 31 33 34 37 39 40 42 44 46 4S 50 52 53 54 10YR-6/4 10YR-7/5 10YR-7/S 10YR-S/6 10YR-7.5/6 lOYR-S/3 10YR-7/5 lOYR-S/5 10YR-S/5 10YR-7/S 10YR-S.5/6 lOYR-7/3 10YR-7/3 10YR-S/3 10YR-6.5/5 10YR-S/2 10YR-S/2 10YR-S/2.5 10YR-7.5/2 10YR-S/2.5 10YR-6.5/2 10YR-S/i. 5 10YR-7.5/2 10YR-S/4 10YR-9/6 10YR-7.5/4 10YR-7.5/2 10YR-S/2.5 10YR-9/6 10YR-7.5/1 Outer Thigh 10YR-S/3 10YR-8/5 10YR-S/5 10YR-7.5/6 10YR-S/4 10YR-S/5 10YR-S/3 10YR-8/3 10YR-9/4 10YR-9/4 10YR-S/4 10YR-S.5/4 10YR-9/4 10YR-9/2 10YR-9/2 10YR-8/2.5 10YR-S/4 Rump Patch Measurements {Centimeters2 Shoulders Longitudinal Transverse 10YR-S/7 10YR-7/S 10YR-S/7 lOYR-7.5/6 10YR-S/4 10YR-7/5 10YR-9/6 lOYR-S/5 10YR-7.5/4 10YR-S.5/6 10YR-S/4 10YR-8/4 10YR--7.5/4 10YR-7.5/4 10YR-8/4 10YR-8/6 10YR-7.5/1 29 26 27 28 32 31 30 33 33 33 29 35 29 33 30 36 33 37 33 35 34 43 36 35 35 35 34 34 40 �Table l4.--Pelage color classifications, rump patch measurements, antelope collected in Moffat County. Rump Patch Measurements ~cm2 Color Classifications Specimen Number Dorsal Rostrum Interorbital 28 30 32 35 38 41 43 47 49 51 55 lOYR-3/2 lOYR-6.5/6 lOYR-8/5 lOYR-7/4 10YR-3/2 10YR-7.5/4 10YR-2/1 10YR-7.5/4 lOYR-6/2 10YR-6.5/2 lOYR-6.5/2 lOYR-4/2 lOYR-4/2 10YR-8.5/6 lOYR-4.5/2 10YR-3/2 10YR-7.5/4 10YR-3/2 10YR-6.5/2 lOYR-7/2 10YR-7/2 10YR-6/4 Outer Thigh lO'¥R~8/5 lOYR-8/5 lOYR-8.5/6 lOYR-8/5 10YR-8/3 lOYR-9/4 10YR-8/4 10YR-8/2.5 10YR-9/4 10YR-9/4 lOYR-8.5/4 and check patch measurements Shoulders lOYR-8/2 lOYR-7/9 lOYR-7.5/6 lOYR-6.5/8 10YR-7/5 10YR-7.5/6 10YR-8/4 10YR-7.5/6 10YR-7.5/4 10YR-7/ 6 10YR-7.5/6 for buck Check Patch Measurements (cm) Transverse Longitudinal Transverse - - 26 20 34 32 35 33 33 36 33 34 27 28 31 37 34 33 35 36 33 36 5.5 5.0 3.0 10.0 5.0 5.0 5.5 7.0 5.5 6.5 7.5 3.0 2.5 2.0 4.0 3.5 1.5 3.3 2.5 3.0 4.0 4.0 Longitudinal I-' 0 \0 �- 110 - Table 15.--Body temperatures (degrees centigrade) of antelope collected in Moffat Countl. 26 Time after death (hrs.) Muscle Temp. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 39 Air Temp. Collection Number 27 28 Muscle Air Muscle Air Temp. Temp. Temp. Temp. 41 27 41 19!z °"'41 36 34 24 20 18 39!z 29 Muscle Temp. 41 39!z ~'<- 1(58 24 36 20 21 22 23 24 25 Rectal Temp. at death 38 1(The animal was evicerated at this time. 39 39!z Air Temp. 40!z 23 �- 111 - Table l5.--Body temperatures (degrees centigrade) of antelope co llec ted in Moffat Count::z:.~Continued~ Collection Number 30 31 32 33 Time after Muscle Air Muscle Air Muscle Air Muscle Air death (hrs.) Temp. Temp. Temp. Temp Temp. Temp. Temp. Temp. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 39 39 *36 34 34 *37lz 36 34lz 38lz 25 24 i<- 34lz 21 39 40 26 21 *32 20 21 22 23 24 25 Rectal Temp. at death 39lz 39 38lz 19lz 19lz 39 21 19lz 40 22 25 24 �- 112 - Table l5.--Body temperatures (degrees centigrade) of antelope co11ected in Moffat Countl:. {Continued} 34 Time after death (hrs.) Muscle Temp. Air Temp. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 37~ "/:37 34 19 21 Collection Number 35 37 Muscle Air Muscle Air Temp. Temp. Temp. Temp. 39 38 39 l8~ "/(- 31 29~ 26 26~ 38 37~ 23 23 30 29~ 29 22 23~ 21 27 14 "/(39 36~ 15 l7~ 33 19 29 27 25 25~ 20~ 21 20 18 25 14 14 6~ 26 25~ 20 21 22 23 24 25 Rectal Temp. at death 37~ *The animal was evicerated at this time. 39~ 38~ 38 Muscle Temp. 39 Air Temp. "/(37 17 - 31 27 25 16 16 14 22~ 23 12 9~ 12 3 38 �- 113 - Table 15.--Body temperatures (degrees centigrade) of antelope collected in Moffat Count~. ~Continued} Collection Number 40 41 39 42 Time after death (hrs.) Muscle Temp. Air Temp. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 38~ 20 21 22 23 24 25 Rectal Temp. at death *The animal was Air Temp. Muscle Temp. Air Temp. 38~ *37~ 35~ 33 20 18~ 14 29 24 11~ 13~ 12 3 10~ 8 Air Temp. 38~ *37 -2 34 30 27 20 -2~ -3~ -4 -5 18 -6 38~ 38~ evicerated at this time. Muscle Temp. 38~ *36 34 30 26 24 -1 -1 0 -1 -3~ 18 14 -4 -4 38~ Muscle Temp. 38 *34 31 27 25 21 1 2 2 -2 17 llj -2 -3 38~ 0 ~ �- 114 - Table 15.--Body temperatures (degrees centigrade) of antelope collected in Moffat County. {Continued2 Collection Number 43 46 47 48 Time after Muscle Air Muscle Air Muscle Air Muscle Air death (hrs.) Temp. Temp. Temp. Temp. Temp. Temp. Temp. Temp. 0 38 38 38 1 2 3 *4 *27 -3 5 *35 -1 *35 -1 6 30~ -2 30 -2 7 26~ -9 27 -9 8 24 -7 24 -7 9 10 11 12 20 21 22 23 24 25 Rectal Temp. at death 37~ *The animal was evicerated at this time. 38~ 39~ �- 115 - Table l5.--Body temperatures (degrees centigrade) of antelope collected in Moffat Count:t. ~Continuedl Collection Number 49 50 51 29 Time after Muscle Muscle Air Air Muscle Air Muscle Air death (hrs.) Temp. Temp. Temp. Temp. Temp. Temp. Temp. Temp. 0 38 39 37~ 38~ 1 2 3 *38~ 3 36 2~ 31 4 2~ 26 11 5 5 *38 23 34 6 11~ 3~ 32 11 7 29 8 8 9 10 11 12 20 21 22 23 24 25 8~ Rectal Temp. at death 37 *The animal was evicerated at this time. 37~ 39 38 2 �- 116 - Table l5.--Body temperatures (degrees centigrade) of antelope collected in Moffat County. (Continued) Collection Number 53 Time after death (hrs.) Muscle Temp. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 40~ 54 Air Temp. *39 35 11 9 2 8 7 8 9 10 55 Muscle Temp. 39 Air Temp. i(39~ 19 19~ 20 20 20 l8~ 18 .36~ 32~ 3l~ 30 28 26 Muscle Temp. 38~ i(38 34.J.2 3l~ 30 11 12 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Rectal Temp. at death 39~ *The animal was evicerated at this time. 38~ Air Temp. 38~ 44 45 43 44 �Table 16.--B1ood ana1~sis for ante10Ee collected on the Moffat Count~ Stud~ Area in 1965. 50 48 41 40 39 38 37 35 34 33 31 30 Sample No. 51 52 54 55 Date 7-20 7-25 8-26 8-28 8-29 10-7 10-11 10-12 11-27 11-28 3-3 3-5 3-23 3-25 4-26 4-27 Sex Buck Doe Doe Doe Buck Doe Doe Doe Buck Erythrocytes M/ cu. tmn 7.50 5.60 8.25 7.25 11.20 Leucocytes per cu. rom 1400 1200 2050 2300 1400 Neutrophils Segs/% Immature 16 0 24 0 32 0 36 0 Lymphocytes-% 56 48 44 36 Buck Doe Doe Buck Doe Buck Doe 9.67 10.00 8.30 8.15 8.30 10.31 12.65 8.05 9.68 10.00 12.25 2650 4000 2150 1500 2500 1400 2300 2100 3100 1900 1750 28 0 0 0 28 0 32 0 39 3 28 4 48 0 60 0 40 0 32 0 52 0 28 0 40 56 42 50 40 46 48 28 40 36 36 24 ~ I-' -..J Monocytes-% 28 28 16 27, 28 36 16 16 13 10 0 8 20 28 12 32 Eosinophils-% 0 0 4 0 4 8 14 2 4 10 0 4 0 4 0 16 Basophi1s-% 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 Hemoglobin g/100 m1 14.9 12.6 16.6 14.9 22.5 20.3 17.6 17.7 13.4 13.7 16.6 18.6 13.9 16.1 15.7 18.0 Hematocrit-% 42 35 42 39 58 56 48 47 40 43 50 55 44 52 45 53 �,., 118 - Table 17.--Externa1 body measurements (cc) and weights for dead and wounded doe ante10ee found after the anteloee hunting season in Moffat County,. Specimen Number Measurement 1 3 4 7 13 14 18 19 20 Estimated age (yr. -rnon , ) 4-4 3-4 3-4 4-4 2-4 0-4 2-4 0-4 0-4 Shoulder Height 86.0 83.0 77.0 79.0 80.0 66.5 81.9 72.0 77.0 Total body length 132.0 139.5 133.0 132.1 135.8 107.5 132.0 118.5 125.0 Tail length 8.5 9.0 12.0 10.2 11.8 10.7 12.9 10.3 15.2 Body length 123.5 130.5 121.0 121.9 124.0 97.3 119.1 108.2 109.8 H~ad length 29.3 29.1 29.7 28.0 28.6 27.8 23.0 Interorbital width 12.7 12.3 13.5 12.6 13.0 12.1 10.6 Mammary Length 13.5 14.4 14.0 13.5 1.6 12.0 5.5 4.0 Depth 5.0 3.5 4.8 5.0 1.5 0.8 5.7 2.0 Mammary nipples (length) Left anterior 1.9 2.3 2.5 2.5 1.5 2.0 0.5 0.6 0.5 posterior 2.0 2.3 2.6 2.5 2.1 0.5 2.0 0.7 0.6 Right anterior 1.8 2.1 2.7 2.8 1.5 2.0 0.4 0.7 0.5 posterior 2.0 2.3 1.9 2.7 2.2 0.5 2.5 0.8 0.6 M?mmary nipples (basal dia. ) Left anterior 1.2 1.3 0.9 1.6 2.0 1.1 0.6 0.6 0.6 posterior 1.1 1.8 1.5 0.7 1.4 2.0 0.6 0.7 0.6 Right anterior 1.3 0.9 1.3 1.7 2.0 1.1 0.6 0.6 0.6 1.0 posterior 1.5 2.0 2.0 1.7 2.2 0.6 0.7 0.6 Eflr lengths Left 15.0 Right 15.0 H~nd feet lengths Left 42.5 Right 43.5 Hoof lengths Left front rear 6.4 Right front 7.4 rear 6.8 Horn lengths Left 0.0 Right 0.0 Girth 89.5 Neck Point a 36.0 Point b 53.0 Carcass weights (kilograms) Bled 38.9 Evicerated 30.6 15.2 13.7 15.4 15.1 14.7 14.9 15.7 15.5 14.2 13.9 15.0 15.1 14.4 14.6 14.9 15.0 42.3 42.5 43.5 43.6 40.0 41.0 42.7 42.0 37.0 37.6 42.2 42.4 34.4 34.2 39.7 39.5 6.8 6.7 7.4 7.1 7.4 10.0 7.3 8.2 6.7 8.2 6.6 6.4 7.4 5.5 4.9 5.4 5.0 8.2 6.2 6.2 5.7 5.2 6.1 5.2 6.2 5.7 6.1 5.7 6.0 6.3 97.2 0.0 0.0 97.8 2.5 2.7 82.5 1.0 1.0 91.0 0.0 0.0 70.0 4.1 4.2 88.5 0.0 0.0 74.3 0.0 0.0 74.2 37.7 49.2 34.5 46.0 33.5 51.6 34.9 53.4 28.8 39.8 38.5 52.5 31.8 44.3 32.7 37.6 47.1 36.9 42.3 32.8 39.3 39.2 32.2 17.0 13.2 36.0 28.5 25.0 18.6 24.3 18.7 �- 119 - Table 18.--Externa1 body measurements (centimeters) and weights for dead and wounded buck antelope found after the antelope hunting season in Moffat Countx:. Specimen Number Measurement Estimated age (yr. - mon , ) Shoulder height Total body length Tail length Body length Head length Interorbital width Penis length Scrotum length heigth width Ear length Left Right Hind feet length Left Right Hoof length Left front rear Right front rear Horns Basal circumference Left Right Length Left Right Prong lengths Left Right Spread (tip to tip) Girth Neck Point a Point b Carcass weights (Kilogram) Bled Evicerated 5 6 8 9 10 11 1-4 81.2 139.5 12.5 127.0 28.0 13.6 16.0 7.5 6.5 2.5 0-4 76.3 108.0 8.2 99.8 22.2 10.2 .10.5 3.7 2.5 1.5 0-4 70.5 107.2 6.5 100.7 21.3 10.1 10.2 3.73 3.6 1.0 1-4 83.7 132.2 12.2 120.0 27.4 11.3 11.0 8.5 5.5 2.0 1-4 85.7 131.0 8.2 122.8 27.5 13.4 13.5 6.5 5.5 2.0 1-4 81.5 132.5 0.5 123.0 27.5 13.3 13.5 7.5 5.5 5.0 15.1 15.2 13.8 13.9 12.2 12.4 15.9 17.2 15.2 14.8 14.9 15.0 41. 2 41. 2 39.0 36.5 39.1 36.1 41.5 41.7 42.8 42.9 41.9 42.2 7.1 6.3 7.0 5.5 5.8 5.2 5.6 5.2 4.8 4.7 4.7 4.7 7.5 5.8 7.0 6.0 6.5 7.8 7.2 6.8 7.5 6.8 7.4 6.1 10.5 10.5 11.0 11.2 12.4 1.0 1.0 15.5 17.0 17.8 18.5 16.6 0.0 0.0 0.5 0.5 18.5 91.5 106.0 11.0 12.0 17.0 15.7 1.2 2.1 2.7 21.0 93.5 0.0 0.0 8.5 74.6 67.2 1.0 1.0 21.0 89.5 43.0 58.5 30.4 33.8 29.2 42.5 34.4 45.5 48.7 59.9 46.0 56.0 42.6 21.1 18.1 19.4 16.0 31.5 25.6 36.4 50.8 2.0 �- 120 - Table 18.--Externa1 body measurements (centimeters) and weights for dead and wounded buck antelope found after the antelope hunting season in Moffat County. (Continued) Specimen Number Measurement Estimated age (yr. - mon.) Shoulder height Total body Lengt.h . Tail length Body length Head length Interorbital width Penis length Scrotum length Height width Ear length Left Right Hind feet length Left Right Hoof length Left front rear Right front rear Horns Basal circumference Left Right Length Left Right Prong lengths Left Right Spread (tip to tip Girth Neck Point a Point b Carcass weights (Kilogram) Bled Evicerated 12 15 16 17 21 22 1-4 87.5 140.5 11.4 129.1 28.4 13.1 11.5 6.2 4.5 4.0 0-4 .110.0 0-4 78.0 115.2 100.0 22.3 9.9 10.4 5.5 4.0 1.6 103.7 21.8 10.4 10.5 4.5 4.5 1.8 1-4 78.0 141.9 14.6 127.3 29.0 12.5 12.5 8.0 5.5 3.5 1-4 85.2 147.0 lS.7 131.3 28.8 13.6 10.5 7.5 4.5 1-4 84.4 129.8 15.5 114.3 28.8 12.4 13.5 7.0 6.0 3.0 15.0 15.2 13.9 13.9 15.2 14.8 14.9 15.1 15.3 15.2 14.4 14.3 44.8 44.5 38.4 38.6 39.3 38.9 43.2 43.4 44.4 44.4 43.5 43.5 7.2 7.3 7.5 7.0 5.8 5.7 5.7 5.5 6.3 5.7 6.2 5.4 7.9 6.5 7.1 6.6 7.4 6.5 7.3 6.5 7.7 6.5 7.7 6.7 11.2 11.3 4.5 4.5 7.6 7.4 11.2 11.2 12.4 12.3 11.4 11.8 16.5 17.3 2.5' 2.2 4.5 4.5 16.8 17.8 17.2 17.2 19.5 18.8 1.0 1.0 6.8 95.3 0.0 0.0 8.2 74.0 0.0 0.0 12.5 78.5 1.7 1.8 14.3 95.2 1.0 1.0 17.2 94.3 2.4 2.2 17.0 94.3 45.2 63.2 32.5 42 -. 2 32.1 43.2 50.5 57.0 43.2 57.9 50.3 57.4 48.0 36.9 21.0 15.8 27.6 41.2 44.2 34.2 46.6 35.7 9.9-···· ..·11.":5 5.5 �- 121 - Table 19.--Measurements (mm) and weights (g) of the organs for the dead and wounded doe antelope found after the antelope hunting season in Moffat Count~. SI!ecimenNumber 13 18 19 20 14 3 4 Organ 1 Heart 115 92 380 140 110 430 128 87 310 125 95 295 96 76 160 120 94 270 115 82 180 Longitudinal 279 Transverse 155 35 Vertical 840 Weight Spleen 20 Weight Kidney (Left) 87 Longitudinal 50 Transverse 34 Vertical 85 Weight Kidney (Right) 82 Longitudinal 53 Transverse 36 Vertical 81 Weight Lung Weights 260 Left 390 Right Stomach 3760 With contents Rumen & Retic. with contents 3320 316 152 34 880 250 153 38 740 297 143 35 820 256 119 23 390 257 152 42 830 260 118 30 520 59 112 89 33 63 58 36 87 62 27 96 88 54 37 90 81 54 28 78 68 40 32 44 81 46 44 84 71 45 11 58 63 46 28 53 88 62 28 106 86 49 32 87 80 55 26 77 64 42 22 41 80 52 38 80 56 71 47 25 53 Longitudinal Transverse Weight Liver 280 310 4870 3940 2670 1510 2760 2810 2230 4210 3410 . 2250 1090 2280 2500 1940 �- 122 - Table 20.--Measurements ,(rom)and weights (g) of the organs for the wounded and dead 'buck antelope found after the antelope hunting season in Moffat Count • Specimen Number Organ 6 8 9 12 15 16 21 22 117 72 200 107 78 159 121 100 310 132 92 300 116 84 180 108 81 220 133 106 320 130 102 290 273 127 35 690 248 116 30 400 222 126 38 390 313 135 36 530 269 170 46 930 266 137 34 590 239 137 32 490 300 173 34 770 282 162 , 36 780 61 38 68 134 29 54 56 74 76 67 47 24 45 49 86 61 33 99 67 41 39 52 72 50 35 67 130 200 200 210 240 330 190 340 2050 4590 1880 3330 4330 5150 1710 4110 1480 2980 3770 4600 5 Heart Longitudinal Transverse Weight Liver Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Spleen Weight Kidney (Left) Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Lung Weights Left Right Stomach With Contents Rumen & Retic. with contents 78 46 48 90 -. �- 123 Table 2l.--Measurements (nun) and weights (g) for the glands of the dead and wounded doe ante1°Ee found after the anteloEe hunting season in Moffat Count:t:. Specimen Number -- Gland Thyroid (left) Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Thyroid (right) Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Adrenal (left) Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Adrenal (right) Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Ovary (left) Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Ovary (right) Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight 1 42.0 12.0 B.O 2.4 3 35.8 11.4 2.0 1.2 4 13 40.0 11.8 4.4 1.3 14 18 19 20 45.9 15.4 5.8 1.8 34.7 23.8 6.6 3.7 29.0 11.0 3.8 0.8 32.0 13.2 5.8 0.8 39.6 12.6 2.1 1.1 36.2 10.8 5.6 1.1 29.9 16.9 5.2 1.6 23.1 12.8 4.0 0.7 25.4 12.0 4.2 ' 0.6 31.5 14.0 5.8 2.2 38.9 11.8 4.4 1.6 26.6 10.4 6.9 1.6 36.9 14.0 5.0 1.3 24.0 9.4 4.4 0.6 29.2 10.8 3.7 0.7 35.9 13.0 6.5 1.9 32.0 9.6 6.1 1.1 26.5 10.2 5.9 1.7 38.3 15.4 5.5 1.3 26.0 7.5 4.5 0.6 17.0 14.0 7.0 1.1 19.0 15.0 6.0 1.2 17.8 15.2 6.0 1.6 15.8 11.7 8.6 0.9 13.3 7.4 4.7 0.3 15.9 11.5 7.4 0.6 11.5 7.6 4.1 0.2 11.2 5.4 2.2 0.1 20.0 17.0 7.0 1.4 20.0 14.0 6.0 1.3 1B.2 15.7 11-.5 1.9 14.2 11.0 8.0 0.7 12.3 7.7 4.3 0.3 16.0 13.2 6.6 0.8 11.9 8.3 4.4 0.3 8.5 5.8 4.0 0.1 �- 124 - Table 22.--Measurements (nun) and weights (g) for the glands of the dead and wounded buck antelope found after the antelope hunting season in Moffat County. Specimen Number Gland Thyroid (left) Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Thyroid (right) Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Adrenal (left) Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Adrenal (right) Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Testis (left) Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Testis (right) Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Prostrate Weight 5 36.0 9.0 3.5 0.9 6 8 9 33.3 10.5 4.1 0.5 29.0 11.4 5.0 0.9 37.5 10.6 7.6 1.0 26.6 11.1 5.1 0.5 26.8 12.4 5.9 1.0 35.8 9.9 5.9 0.6 26.7 9.1 4.0 0.6 12 15 16 23.4 14.0 4.3 1.2 21.8 11.8 5.5 0.8 31.1 11.1 5.2 0.8 32.5 15.0 6.0 1.6 31.8 12.7 5.6 1.2 33.2 9.1 2.6 0.5 24.8 11.4 6.7 1.0 29.9 9.9 4.9 ,1.0 27.0 10.1 4.9 0.9 23.0 13.0 6.7 1.0 32.8 10.4 3.8 1.1 17 20/0 8.3 4.3 0.7 24.2 17.5 3.2 0.6 37.0 29.3 16.1 13.1 21.1 14.1 11.2 2.3 18.6 13.2 12.0 1.5 40.5 28.4 20.4 13.6 45.8 35.9 26.9 24.7 21.2 17.1 12.7 2.6 24.5 18.0 17.0 3.7 45.6 31.5 26.5 21.6 40.1 31.0 19.5 15.0 21.8 16.9 12.9 2.6 19.4 13;0 11.5 1.5 39.1 28.3 19.8 12.7 45.8 34.0 26.9 23.5 24.6 16.0 11.3 2.6 23.9 16.9 15.4 3.3 45.3 34.0 23.8 21.5 1.0 0.3 0.2 1.0 �- 125 - Table 22.--Measurements (mm) and weights (g) for the glands of the dead and wounded buck antelope found after the antelope hunting season in Moffat County. (Continued) Specimen Number Gland Thyroid (left) Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Thyroid (right) Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Adrenal (left) Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Adrenal (right) Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Testis (left) Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Testis (right) Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Prostrate Weight 21 22 38.7 10.7 2.2 0.5 43.8 30.7 23.1 17.6 38.8 30.0 22.7 13.4 41.0 33.1 23.2 17.1 38.0 29.8 23.4 13.8 1.0 0.7 �- 126 - Table 23.--Measurements (millimeters) and weights (grams) for the reproductive tracts taken from doe antelope found in Moffat County following the huntin€i season. Measurement Uterine Horn (Left) Longitudinal Transverse Uterine Horn (Right) Longitudinal Transverse Vagina Longitudinal Transverse Cervix Longi tudinal Transverse Median Septum Length True Uterine Length Weight Without Young 1 3 SEecimen Number 4 13 14 70 30 60 28 48 19 52 20 35 8 75 30 59 28 50 20 60 22 37 12 135 35 155 40 132 45 90 l&- 60 15 30 35 90 62 9 30 30 109 61 17 25 34 105 31 10 18 18 16 24 48 Table 23.--Measurements (millimeters) and weights (grams) for the reproductive tracts taken from doe antelope found in Moffat Cou.rt.y following the hunting season. (Continued) Specimen Number Measurement 18 19 20 Uterine Horn (Left) Longitudinal 58 28 40 Transverse 16 9 10 Uterine Horn (Right) Longitudinal 52 27 39 Transverse 17 9 10 Vagina Longitudinal 90 105 Transverse 12 18 Cervix Longitudinal 25 25 Transverse 8 10 Median Septum Length 28 12 14 True Uterine Length 24 28 26 Weight Without Young 174 174 �- 127 - Table 24.--Carcass fat estimations for wounded and dead antelope found in Moffat County following the hunting season. Depth of Depth of Specimen Back Fat Thoracic Kidne:¥:Fat lndex {%} Age Number Left Right Both {rom) Fat (rom) {yr.-mo.) Sex 1 3 4 5 6 8 9 10 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 6 28 13 47 7 33 40 7 6 0 24 18 10 55 68 7 23 11 48 11 18 7 25 12 .48 9 43 44 8 8 7 80 26 21 8 38 42 7 7 3 Trace Trace 25 20 9 Trace 60 64 0 1 1 Trace 0 0 0 3 2 0 13 5 21 3 11 7 10 10 13 2 2 2 8 7 7 4 12 8 4-4 3-4 3-4 1-4 0-4 0-4 1-4 1-4 1-4 2-4 0-4 0-4 0-4 1-4 2-4 0-4 0-4 1-4 1-4 Female Female Female Male Male Male Male Male Male Female Female Male Male Male Female Female Female Male Male �- 128 - Table 25.--Teeth and bone measurements (millimeters) for wounded and dead doe anteloee found in Moffat Countl following the hunting season. Specimen Number Measurement 1 3 4 13 7 Length of Tooth Rows (Left) Maxillary premolar and molar Maxillary molar only Mandibular premolar and molar Mandibular molar only Length of Tooth Rows (Right) Maxillary premolar and molar Maxillary molar only Mandibular premolar and molar Mandibular molar only Length of Mandibular Diastema Length of Ramus Estimated Age (yrs.-mon.) 71.4 46.3 73.0 50.0 72.9 45.2 76.4 50.3 69.0 42.1 76.5 48.8 70.6 42.9 71.4 47.0 67.0 41.3 73.3 48.0 71.5 46.3 74.4 41. 9 73.0 217 4-4 73.8 45.3 77 .2 50.0 73.8 69.0 43.2 78.2 49.1 73.2 69.6 42.4 67.4 41. 3 74.3 47.8 3-4 3-4 46.6 76.0 209 5-4 2-4 Table 25.--Teeth and bone measurements (millimeters) for wounded and dead doe anteloee found in Moffat County following the hunting season. (Cont'd.) Seecimen Number Measurement 14 18 19 20 Length of Tooth Rows (Left) Maxillary premolar and molar Maxillary molar only Mandibular premolar and molar Mandibular molar only Length of Tooth Rows (Right) Maxillary premolar and molar Maxillary molar only Mandibular premolar and molar Mandibular molar only Length of Mandibular Diastema Length of Ramus Estimated Age (yrs.-mon.) 44.3 13.8 44.0 13.4 48.9 0-4 68.2 42.2 75.3 47.7 46.6 13.3 46.7 14.5 42.3 11.1 45.9 14.2 68.0 41.8 72.4 47.8 68.0 212 2-4 46.4 13.3 47.4 15.4 51.4 166 0-4 42.5 11.7 45.6 14.4 54.0 169 0-4 �- 129 - Table 26~--Teeth and bone measurements (millimeters) for wounded and dead buck antelope found in Moffat County following the hunting season. Specimen Number Measurement 6 8 9 10 12 Length of Tooth Rows (Left) Maxillary premolar and molar Maxillary molar only Mandibular p remo l.arand molar Mandibular molar on Ly Length of Tooth Rows (Right) Maxillary premolar and molar Maxillary molar only Mandibular premolar and molar Mandibular molar only Length of Mandibular Diastema Length of Ramus Estimated age (yr.-mon.) 47.1 24.7 46.2 31.0 45 •.0 25.0 46.7 31.8 65.6 47.9 69.8 42.0 67.2 48.8 67.1 39.0 68.4 38.4 69.5 . 41.1 46.2 25.9 46.4 43.] 24A. 46.3 32.1 47.7 155 0-4 65.7 48.0 69.8 42.6 73.1 212 1-4 67.8 49.8 67.8 38.0 69.4 204 1-4 69.6 39.2 68.7 40.8 70.7 213 1-4 3(L2 54.6 0-4 Table 26.--Teeth and bone measurements (millimeters) for wounded and dead buck antelope found in Moffat County following the hunting season. (Cont'd.) Specimen Number Measurement 15 16 21 -----------------------22 Length of Tooth Rows (Left) Maxillary premolar and molar 45.4 46.5 65.7 64.8 Maxillary molar only 12.6 14.1 35.2 35.0 Mandibular premolar and molar 45.3 45.7 69.8 70.4 Mandibular molar only 14.6 41.9 15.0 42.2 Length of Tooth Rows (Right) Maxillary premolar and molar 45.1 46.7 65.5 65.0 Maxillary molar only 12.5 13.5 35.8 35.0 Mandibular premolar and molar 45.1 71.2 45.5 68.9 Mandibular molar only 41.5 14.9 14.8 42.8 Length of Mandibular Diastema 53.7 71.8 49.4 69.2 Length of Ramus 163 164 211 212 Estimated age (yr.-mon ,) 11-4 0-4 1-4 1-4 �Table 27.--Pelage color classifications and rump patch measurements for dead and wounded buck antelope found in Moffat County follQw~i~n~g~t~h~e~h~u~n~t~~:·n~g-=s~e~a~s~o~n~.-----_ Specimen Number 5 6 S 9 10 11 12 lS 16 17 21 22 Color Classification Outer Dorsal Shoulders Thigh Rostrum 10YR-3/l 10YR-7/S 10YR-6/5 10YR-6/4 10YR-6/3 10YR-3/2 10YR-7/S 10YR-S/3 10YR-7/5 10YR-7/5 10YR-4/2 10YR-3/2 10YR-S/S lOYR-S/S 10YR-S/S 10YR-S/5 10YR-S/5 10YR-S/5 10YR-S/5 10YR-S/5 10YR-8/5 10YR-S/5 10YR-S/S 10YR-S/S lOYR-7/S 10YR-7/S 10YR-7/5 10YR-7/5 10YR':"6/5 --10YR-6/S 10YR-S/3 10YR-6/S 10YR-7/5 --lOYR-7 /S Rump Patch Measurements ~cm2 Transverse Longi tudina 1 34.0 2S.0 24.0 25.0 2S.0 33.0 30.0 2S.0 2S.0 30.0 23.0 31.0 3S.0 26.5 27.0 29.5 35.0 33.5 2S.5 30.0 35.0 40.0 2S.0 33.0 Cheek Patch Measurements ~cm2 Transverse Longitudinal 6.S 2.0 4.0 4.S 5.0 9.0 6.5 2.0 3.0 5.5 4.S S.O 3.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 2.5 4.S 3.5 1.0 1.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 Table 28.--Pelage color classifications and rump patch measurements for dead and wounded doe antelope found in Moffat County followi~~t=h~e~h~u=n~t~i~n~g~s~e~a=s~o~n~.~-----------------~ Color Classification Rump Patch Specimen Dorsal Outer Measurements (cm2 Number Rostrum Thigh Shoulders Longitudinal Transverse 1 3 4 7 13 14 18 19 20 --- --- 10YR-7/S 10YR-7/S 10YR-7/S 10YR-7/S 10YR-S/S 10YR-S/S 10YR-S/S lOYR-S/ S 10YR-8/5 10YR-8/S 10YR-S/3 10YR-S/S --10YR-7/S 10YR-7/S 10YR-S/3 10YR-6/S 10YR-6/S 10YR-6/S 10YR-6/S 10YR-6/S 10YR-8/3 10YR-6/6 10YR-7/S 10YR-6/S 32.S 31.S 29.0 39.0 23.S 2S.0 2S.0 26.0 33.S 32.0 32.S 33.0 33.S 40.0 33.0 33.0 ~ co 0 �- 131 - LITERATURE CrrED Munsell, A. H. 1929-1960. Munsell book of color, pocket edition. Munsell. Color Co., Inc., Baltimore, Maryland. Weesner, Francis M. 1960. General zoological microtechniques. and Wilkins Co., Baltimore, Maryland. 230 pp. White, H. E. New York. 1956. Modern 'college physics. 824 pp. Prepared by: George D. Bear Wildlife Researcher Date: January, 1967 The WiJ_liams D. Van Nostrand Co., Inc., Approved by: Jack R. Grieb Project Leader Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief � https://cpw.cvlcollections.org/files/original/50ee5bd6e7b20914cc3fd3c7de5fc16f.pdf 08676a112b0f69c2df82d69516c7ee45 PDF Text Text - 135 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO --------~~~~~-------An Ecological Investigation of the Cache Project No. W-105-R-7 la Poudre Deer Herd, Colorado Work Plan No. 3 Environmental Studies Job No. 1 Climatic Environment Period Covered: Personnel: January, 1966 - December, 1966 Dean E. Medin, Allen E. Anderson Objective: Measure the local climate on each of five, selected study locations believed to be representative of the lower-winter, middle-winter, upper-winter, transitional, and summer ranges of the herd so that data relevant to the biota under study can be adequately interpretated, particularly from the standpoint of elevational relationships. Progress: Field work was completed May 31, 1965 (Segment 6). No progress was made in analyses of summarized data or in relating selected climatic variables to forage yields, deer use, plant phenology, or deer physiology during this segment. Future Plans: The data will be punched on IBM cards during 1967 (Segment 8). Active work on this job will be curtailed until Segment 9. The monthly and annual summaries now on hand will suffice for general interpretation of data gathered under Work Plan 4, Job 1 (Population Density and Structure), Work Plan 5, Job 2 (Reproductive Studies), and Work Plan 5, Job 3 (Harvest Analysis). Prepared by: Allen E. Anderson Wildlife Researcher Date: January, 1967 Approved by: Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator ��- 137 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO ----------~--~~-------An Ecological Investigation of the Cache Project No. W-105-R-7 Work Plan No. 3 Environmental Studies Job No. 3 Vegetative Analysis Period Covered: Personnel: la Poudre Deer herd, Colorado Janu~ry, 1966 - December, 1966. Dean E. Medin, Allen E. Anderson Objectives: (1) Record the phenological development of selected range plants on five study locations believed to be representative of the lower-winter, middle-winter, upper-winter, transitional, and summer ranges of the herd. (2) Quantitatively describe the vegetation (by vegetative type) of each of the above study areas to: (a) provide basic on vegetative cover and composition and to (b) aid in interpretation of deer distribution, food preference, and activity as related to food and cover. (3) Estimate the mean yield and use of important browse species on the winter range study areas, to provide data relative to the effects of various popUlation levels (Work Plan 4, Job 1) on important seasonal food items. Progress: Field work was completed and a large amount of data tabulated and analyzed in 1965 (Segment 6). No progress was made in investigation of phenology - site, phenology-climatic, or in vegetative composition and cover-deer distribution and density relationships during 1966 (Segment 7). Future Plans: No concerted effort on this job will be feasible until the latter portion of 1968 (Segment 9). Prepared by: Date: Allen E. Anderson Wildlife Researcher Approved by: Wayne W. Sand fort Game Research Chief Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator ��- 139 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO ----------~~~~-------An Ecological Investigation of the Cache Project No. W-105-R-V. Work Plan No. 3 Job No. 4 Period Covered: Personnel: la Poudre Deer Herd, Colorado Environmental Studies Food Cover Relationships Influenced By Environmental Factors January, 1966 - December, 1966 Charles M. Loveless Objectives: (1) Measure or otherwise appraise selected characteristics of the physical, climatological, and biological factors of a winter-range environment on a representative study area, and evaluate the influence of these factors on deer use of food-cover types. (2) Assess, refine, and develop methods attendant to the research problem. Progress: Mr. Loveless completed the Ph.D. degree at Colorado State University in 1963. During 1966 (Segment 7), his dissertation fulfilling the above objectives was adapted to the format of a Technical Publication of the Colorado Game, Fish, and Parks Department. Future Plans: ment 9). Publication is anticipated during 1967 (Segment 8) or 1968 (Seg- Prepared by: Allen E. Anderson Wildlife Researcher Date: January, 1967 Approved by: Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator ��- 141 - JOB COMPLETION RESEARCH S ta te of Project PROJECT REPORT SEGMENT ~C::..:O:.:LO=RA==D_=O _ No. __ An Ecological Investigation of the Cache --=..:W_-....::1:.;:O;.::5~-.=:R:...-..:.7 :, la Poudre Deer Herd Co lorado Work Plan No. 3 Environmental Job No. 5 Food Preference Period Covered: Personnel: January, Dean E. Medin, 1966 - December, Allen Studies 1966 E. Anderson Objectives: Estimate food preference by season for different elevational ranges and vegetative types so that seasonal forage use by deer can be related to the vegetation at each elevational level under study. Progress: Stomach content samples from 232 mule deer were collected from April 13, 1961 to April 27, 1965. Botanical identification and quantification of their component parts were completed for 174 of these samples during 1966 (Segment 7). Data programming was discussed briefly with David C. Bowden of the Colorado State University Statistical Laboratory. Future Plans: Identification and quantification of the rema1n1ng 58 stomach content samples will be completed during 1967 (Segment 8) by Mr. Dean E. Medin. Seasonal, elevational, and vegetative type comparisons of these samples will be initiated during 1967. It is anticipated that these comparisons will be made using punch card-computer techniques. Tentatively, a manuscript will be submitted for publication during 1968 (Segment 9). Prepared Date: by: Allen E. Anderson Wildlife Researcher Approved by: Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator ��- 143 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO ----------~~~~-------An Ecological Investigation of the Cache Pro j ect No. __ ---.;W~--=1:..=O;.:;5_-.:.;R_7.:...--_ 1a Poudre Deer Herd, Colorado Work Plan No. 3 Environmental Studies Job No. 6 Ecological History of Key Browse Species Period Covered: Personnel: January, 1966 - December, 1966 Robert D. Roughton Objectives: Determine age structures of selected browse stands and relate to ecology and management of big sagebrush Artemisia tridentata, true mountain mahogany Cercocarpus montanus, wax current Ribes cereum, and skunkbush Rhus tri1obata. Progress: Mr. Roughton completed his thesis and received the M. S. degree from Colorado State University (Colorado Cooperative Wildlife Research Unit) during 1966 (Segment 7). The task of thesis revision for publication was not initiated during Segment 7. Future Plans: Thesis reV1S1on for publication will begin during 1967 (Segment 8). Hopefully, a manuscript will be submitted for publication during 1968 (Segment 9). Prepared by: Allen E. Anderson Wildlife Researcher Date: January, 1967 Approved by: Wayne We Sandfort Game Research Chief Ferd C. K1einschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator ��- 145 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT Sta te of C:.,;O:.,:LO::.::..::;RA=:;.::DO:.::.... _ An Ecological Investigation of the Cache W-105-R-7 la Poudre Deer Herd, Colorado Project No. Work Plan No. ~4 Job No. 1 Period Covered: Personnel: _ Population Studies Population Density and Structure January, 1966 - December, 1966 Allen E. Anderson, Dean E. Medin Objectives: (1) Estimate population density on each of five study locations believed to be representative of the lower winter, upper, winter, transitional, and summer ranges of the herd to: (a) relate density to changing environmental conditions (Work Plan 3), and (b) elucidate density-elevational relationships, particularly between years. (2) Estimate sex and age structure (composition) of the population to provide basic information on herd dynamics. Progress: The status of this job includes the completion of all field work during 1965 and a continuing compilation, summarization, and preliminary analyses during 1966 (Segment 7). These activities emphasized the need to employ a statistician on the problem of developing a more satisfactory analytical and interpretative approach to both pellet group and herd structure data. Future Plans: During Segment 8, emphasiS will be placed on: (1) development of improved analytical procedures, (2) deer density-climatic-vegetative and topographic relationships, and (3) herd structure samples as a function of time of day. Preparation of final manuscripts will begin during 1968 (Segment 9). Prepared by: Allen E. Anderson Wildlife Researcher Date: January, 1967 Approved by: Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator ��- 147 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO ----------~~~~~-----An Ecological Investigation Project No. W-l05-R-7 Work Plan No. 5 Physiological Job No. 1 Physical Period Covered: Personnel: January, 1966 - December, Allen E. Anderson, of the Cache la Poudre Deer Herd, Colorado Studies Characteristics 1966 Dean E. Medin Objectives: Measure relevant physiological and morphological characteristics of deer collected seasonally so that: (a) the response of the herd to its environment can be more adequately interpret ed, (b) establish "physiological norms," and (c) provide basic morphological data as related to sex and age class. Progress: From April 1, 1961 to April 27, 1965, 192 mule deer were collected at approximate weekly intervals. An additional 33 were obtained from other sources, mainly highway mortality. Tabulation of over 40,000 measurements of selected physiological, morphological, and hematological characteristics and some preliminary analyses have been completed. During 1966 (Segment 7), primary emphasis was placed on a continuing review of literature. About 1,500 references dealing directly or indirectly with the above objectives were recorded and placed in the project bibliographical files. A manuscript entitled: "Densitometric and ether-extract estimates of percent carcass fat in mule deer" by Allen E. Anderson, Dean E. Medin, and D. Paul Ochs was prepared, submitted, and tentatively accepted by the Journal of Mammalogy. In addition, endocrine glands donated to the Department of Anatomy, College of Veterinary Medicine, Colorado State University, were the subject of detailed morphologic study by the staff and graduate students. According to Robert W. Davis, Professor and Chairman of the Department of Anatomy: "current studies are at the gross, subgross, and light microscopic level." A summary of current research by the Department of Anatomy on project-donated materials is tabulated below. Gland Investigator Pituitary Parathyroid Adrenal Testes Thyroid Ken E. Nicolls Floyd M. Urschel Jr. John R. Hillman Roger R. Markwald Robert W. Davis Robert A. Kainer Thyroid Degree Pursued Ph.D. M. S. M. S. M. S. Expected Completion (Year) 1969 1967 1967 1967 Indefinite Indefinite �- 148 - Mr. Hillman will begin research during 1967 for the Ph.D. based in part on histologic and densitometric studies of several bones from the Poudre deer collections. Mr. James A. Erickson, a graduate student (M. S.) in Wildlife Biology at Colorado State University, developed during 1966 an efficient method of exposing dental cementum of mule deer thereby making the dental cementum technique for estimating age practical when large samples are involved. Mr. Erickson is in the process of evaluating the molar-wear ratio and eye lens weight techniques using the dental cementum method as the standard. Materials for this research were furnished from 103 mature (26 + months of age) mule deer collected under this job. A test of the subjective molar-wear criteria technique as employed at the Poudre check station (1960-65) was conducted during the 1966 big season (Work Plan 5, Job 3) by extracting one first incisor (for counts of dental cementum) from each of 116 mature deer which had been assigned to one of five age classes by molar-wear criteria. Future Plans: During 1967 (Segment 8), major emphasis will be placed on completion of the final review of literature, statistical consultation, and selection of proper statistical applications. Card-punching and programming may be withheld until 1968 (Segment 9). Prepared Date: by: Allen E. Anderson Wildlife Researcher January, 1967 Approved by: Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �- 149 JOB COMPLETION RESEARCH State of REPORT PROJECT SEGMENT COLORADO ----------~~~~~-----An Ecological Investigation Project No. W-I05-R-7 Work Plan No. 5 Physiological Studies Job No. 2 Reproductive Studies Period Covered: Personnel: January, la Poudre Deer Herd 1966 - December, Allen E. Anderson, of the Cache Colorado 1966 Dean E. Medin Objectives: Determine the reproductive pattern of the deer herd to provide data on: (a) morphology of the reproductive organs as related to age and season (b) tentatively, the relationship of productivity to the measured factors of the environment. Progress: The reproductive organs of 85 males and 112 females collected at approximate weekly intervals from April 31, 1961 to April 27, 1965 are in various stages of study. No progress was made by project personnel on remaining laboratory work or on summarization and analyses of existing data. However, the 86 prenatal young collected, weighed, measured, and preserved by the project were subjected to more intensive morphological studies involving both the soft and hard tissues by Mrs. Catherine Short, a graduate student (M. S.) at Stephan F. Austin State College, Nacogdoches, Texas. A manuscript reporting on a portion of her research was reviewed by project personnel during 1966 (Segment 7) but no word has yet been received of its final disposition. Mr. Ture Schoultz, a graduate student (M. S.) at the University of Colorado, Boulder, continued work on a microscopic study of ovaries selected from 342 sets made available to him by project personnel. Future Plans: The descriptive histology of the seminiferous tubules from the 1964 and 1965 materials will be further investigated during 1967 (Segment 8) and perhaps completed by 1968 (Segment 9). Frequency distributions over time of ovarian and testicular weights and volumes, seasonal flucuations in reproductive tract morphology by age class, and summarization of the reproductive performance of all females are some of the aspects to be examined during Segment 8 (1967) and 9 (1968). Prepared Date: by: Allen E. Anderson Wildlife Researcher January, 1967 Approved by: Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief Ferd C. K1einschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator ��- 151 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENl' State of COLORADO ----------~~~~~-----An Ecological Investigation of the Cache Pro ject No. ~W_-_=1..::.0=_5_R;.:..,.7.:..- _ Work Plan No. 5 ------~-----------=-3 Job No. Period Covered: Personnel: _ la Poudre Deer Herd, Colorado Physiological Studies Harvest Analysis January, 1966 - December, 1966 Allen E. Anderson and Dean E. Medin Objectives: (1) Determine the age and sex structure of deer herd to provide estimates of: (a) net productivity (percent of female yearlings in the kill) and (b) the effects of hunting regulations. (2) Locate the distribution of the kill by subunit to relate the age and sex structure of the kill to elevational levels and harvest intensity. (3) Measure relevant physical characteristics of the deer killed to provide an index of herd response to food quality. Progress: Final analyses of all pertinent data were completed during Segment 7 using the services and facilities of the Colorado State University Statistical Laboratory and Computer Center. Transfer of data from the computer print-out sheets to suitable manuscript format was iriitiated. Future Plans: During 1967 (Segment 8), major interpretative effort will be placed on antler morphology relative to objective 3. It is anticipated that the mo.rphology of developing antlers derived from regular collections (Work Plan 3, Job 1) will be incorporated into these data. Manuscript preparation will be initiated and hopefully, completed, during Segment 8(1967). Preparation of life tables from kill age structure, 1960-65, will also be investigated during Segment 8. Prepared by: Allen E. Anderson Wildlife Researcher Date: In.nuary, 1967 Approved by: Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator � https://cpw.cvlcollections.org/files/original/14fdaeb9a7a35c1c75bdbb113e2a7c0b.pdf 90b08d3323412617e0f9fc0f467cb17f PDF Text Text JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of --.-:.C:..::O:...:L:..:O:.:..RA::..::=.D:.:..O------ Project No. W-37-R-20 Work Plan No. 3 Game Bird Survey Job No. Sa Title of Job: Effects of Sagebrush Control on Abundance, Distribution and Movements of Sage Grouse. Period Covered: April l~ 1966 to March 31, 1967. Personnel: F. Glover, H. Swope, R. Ryder, B. Gill, B. Poley, D. Gore, C. Weatherill, W. Russell, E. Downer, T. Morrow~ and H. Carr. ABSTRACT This was the post-spraying phase of a project designed to evaluate the effects on sage grouse of sagebrush control with 2,4-D. Sage grouse were studied before and after spraying, on sprayed and unsprayed areas, and in relation to strip and block sprayed areas. Population level and productivity were determined primarily from strutting ground censuses, nest searches, and brood censuses. Movements and distribution were determined by following and observing sage grouse, plotting on a map locations of all sage grouse observed, and by reobserving tagged sage grouse. Effects on vegetation were measured by frequency of all species, and density and crown intercept of shrubs. Sagebrush control apparently did not adversely affect strutting activities or grounds. Neither did it definitely affect nesting use of sprayed areas or nesting successj however, hens tended to nest close to unsprayed areas. Brood production and survival were not noticeably affected by spraying. Annual movements between strutting grounds were common, and most movements were to the ground on the large sprayed block. Adult sage grouse avoided block sprayed areas (except during strutting season), not because of a barrier to movements, but probably because the blocks did not provide necessary habitat requirements. Movements of broods apparently were restricted by sprayed areas. The area sprayed in 50 yard strips alternated with 150 yard leave strips had no noticeable adverse effects on sage grousec Although individual species varied, shrubs and forbs generally were less frequent, and grasses more frequent on sprayed plots than unsprayed plots. Residues of 2,4-D were detected in sage grouse, particularly brain tissues, but its effects were not determined. This research indicated the necessity of continuing the project as population levels and vegetation change, in order to determine the long term effects of sagebrush control on sage grouse. �ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS Sincere thanks to Dr. F. A. Glover, my adviser, and assistance for his guidance both with this project and in general. office with something I always left his new to ponder. Thanks also to Mr. H. M. Swope. Dr. R. Ao Ryder and Dr. F. Blackmore who served on my Graduate work and preparation Dr. Ryder's Committee. Mr. Swope's assistance of this report were sincerely suggestions, advice and guidance with field- appreciated, as were and Dr. Blackmore's criticism of this thesis. Mr. R. B. Gill deserves credit for planning this work, which I simply continued further to him for familiarizing indebted outset of my work. and his untiring and exacting equipment sagebrush. graciously me with the project at the I am for determining essential and Dr. J. Nagy oil levels in J. D. Harder, T. Barber, Dr. J. R, Lacher, W. Russell. E. Downer, R. Keiss, and F. Fields also aspects of the study, and their efforts appreciated. Special thanks are extended help and hospitality indebted study. for 2,4-D residue analysis, and assistance helped with various were certainly the post-spraying work was invaluable. arranged T. L. Morrow, C. Weatheri11, much of Mr. B. E. Poley helped with the field investigation, Mr. C. Henderson provided during and instigating throughout to my wife, Doreen, and spent her "holidays" to Mr. Don Gore and Mrs. Gore for their my work in North Park, Finally, I am who lived alone during most of my fieldwork, as a sage grouse biologist v or typist. �TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter Page 1. INTRODUCTION 1 II. METHODS AND MATERIALS 11 Population Level and Productivity Strutting Ground Census Nest Search Brood Census Hunting Season Analysis 11 Distribution and Movements l3 11 12 l3 Trapping Marking Radio Telemetry Reobservations 14 Vegetation Analysis 17 2,4-D Residue Sampling 18 15 16 17 Sage Grouse Ground Squirrels and Rabbits Sagebrush and Soil Essential Oil Levels in Sage Grouse Diets III. 11 RESULTS AND DISCUSSION 19 19 20 20 22 Population Level and Productivity Strutting Ground Census Nest Search Brood Census Summer Population Census Kill Analysis Distribution and Movements Spring Sunnner Winter 22 22 28 35 45 47 49 54 60 71 vi �Page Chapter Vegetation Analysis 75 Frequency Density Crown Intercept 84 2,4-D Residue Sampling 87 76 87 Sage grouse Ground Squirrels and Jackrabbits Sagebrush Soil Essential Oil Levels in Sage Grouse Diets 87 90 91 92 92 IV. SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS 96 V. RECOMMENDATIONS 102 LITERATURE CITED 103 vii �L1st OF TABLES Table Page 1. Comparison of 1965 and 1966 strutting ground censuses 22 2. Age structure of the strutting male population in 1966 23 3. Number and success of nests on sprayed and unsprayed plots 30 4. Comparison of sage gronse brood censuses from 1~64 to 1966 36 5. Average brood size 1n 1965 and 1966 as indicated by broods counted completely 40 6. Comparison of censuses on five brood routes in 1965 and 1966 42 7. Comparison of 1965 and 1966 summer population indices determined from brood routes 46 Comparison of hunter-killed sage grouse and hunting pressure in 1965 and 1966 4~ 8. 9. -Sage grouse tagged and released in 1965 and 1966 10. 50 Reobservations of tagged male sage grouse on strutting grounds 57 Frequencies of the most common plant species on sprayed and unsprayed plots in each growth category 78 Relative frequencies of the most common-piant species on sprayed and unsprayed plots in each growth category 80 Density of Artemisia tridentata and Chrysothamnus viscidiflorus on sprayed and unsprayed plots 85 Length (feet} of Artemis-iatridentat::a and.. Chrysothamnus viscidiflorus crown intercepted/IOO ft of transect 88 l5..Residu~,of 2,4-n in samples collected on the study area 11 to 16 months after spraying 89 11. 12. 13. 14. 16. Amounts of essential oils in sagebrush removed from the digestive tracts of sage grouse viii 94 �LIST OF FIGURES lPage Figure L 2. Major roads, lakes and drainage .channels on the study area; its general location and boundaries 4 Sagebrush control patterns on the study area 8 and active strutting grounds 3. Total strutting male counts on the study area since 1959 27 4. General areas sampled by each brood census route 43 5. Observed interstrutting ground movements grouse tagged in 1965 and 1966 of male sage 59 6. Distribution of sage grouse during summer 1965 61 7. Distribution of sage grouse during summer 1966 62 8. Tagged sage grouse reobserved in 1965 and 1966 9. 10. 11. away from strutting grounds 63 Intermittent stream channels which provided routes for sage grouse migrating to-meadows along the northeast side of the study area prior to sagebrush control 69 Number of sage grouse and location of flocks sited during winter distribution survey, 1966 72 Relative frequencies of shrubs, forbs, and grasses on sprayed and unsprayed plots n ix �2 preservation certainly afforded justifies Deeply the vast tracts of sage lands in the West," the grave concern expressed involved with the conflict and sage grouse welfare, the Colorado by wildlife between sagebrush of the Bureau of Land Management, a study to determine how sagebrush The project was planned sagebrush control, and thereby eradication Game, Fish and Parks Department, with the cooperation grouse. biologists. undertook control with 2,4-D affected to evaluate various to provide positive patterns sage of information about the problem. The Bureau of Land Management postponed of sagebrush, until Mr. R. Bruce Gill Cooperative Research Wildlife of sage grouse in relation control project. locations (Research Fellow, Colorado Unit) completed to habitat and areas of sagebrush a detailed in the vicinity Based on his research, (total 4,000 acres) control of 4,000 acres Gill inventory of the proposed (1965) recommended to be" sprayed with various so that information the patterns about its effects on sage grouse could be obtained. The Bureau of Land Management these recommendations phenoxyacetic with 2 Ib iso-octyl The post-spraying 2,4-D application ester of 2,4-D from airplanes between study was intended to the sagebrush control project. after Much of this of Gill's research. to determine con- June 2 and 5, 1965. phase of the "study began immediately continuation to (2,4-dichloro- A private and is the basis for this report. work was a post-spraying grouse the area according acid) in 4 2/3 gal of water/acre" tractor did the spraying post-spraying sprayed The the reaction The objectives of sage were: �3 1, To determine the distribution and movements of sage grouse after sagebrush was sprayed with 2,4-D, 2. To determine sage grouse numbers and to classify them by sex and age, after sagebrush was sprayed with 2,4-D. 3. To determine vegetative and edaphic factors caused by the treatment of sagebrush with 2,4-D. 4. To recommend patterns and methods of treating sagebrush with a herbicide for future studies, and for ultimate broadscale management-on public lands. The study area was located in the Lake John vicinity of Jackson '~County in north-central Colorado (Fig. 1, inset), It was in the ,northwest portion of a bowl-like park surrounded by mountains, some 13,000 ft above sea level. The region is known as North Park. The study area (Fig. 1) encompassed about 60 seetions of land bbunded by the North Platte River on the east, the North Fork of the North Platte on the south, the foothills of the continental divide on the west, and the Cowdrey-Pearl road (Jackson County No.6) on the north. The elevation varied from about 8,600 ft in the north- central part to about 7,900 in the northeastern corner. The interior of the study area was generally undulating uplands consisting of numerous benches and ridges with intervening hollows and draws. The west, south and east edges were flatter lowland areas 'bordering the major drainages. The west side of the study area drained via intermittent streams into Lake Creek, and then southward into 'the North Fork of the North Platte River. The North Fork emptied into the North Platte River which flowed northward along the eastern boundary �4 ( / / LEGEND ----- River --- .. .- Intermittent stream 1 mile Lake Road Fig. 1. Scale Major roads, lakes and drainage channels on the study area; its general location and boundaries. �5 of the study area. The east side of the area drained eastward through intermittent streams directly into the North Platte. There were several small lakes"and potholes along Lake Creek on the west side, and several man-made water impoundments scattered throughout the upland interior of the study area. Also, there were numerous small potholes throughout the upland area, but these were dry during most of the year. Some of the small lakes on the west side, and Alkali Lake in the south-central part of the study area collected runoff from immediately surrounding land, but they had no water outlet. Generally, soils on the area had a coarse, gravelly appearance, particularly on the ridges. textured and deeper. Soils in the gullies appeared finer Many of the wet soils, particularly surrounding lakes with no outlet, were extremely alkaline, and some were covered with a white accumulation of salts. Many of the steeper ridge sides and draws had been eroded by water. The ridge tops probably had been influenced considerably by wind erosion, which would provide a partial explanation for their gravelly appearance. Two major vegetation types existed on the study area. The central upland portion was primarily a sagebrush-grassland range. The south, east and west sides; adjacent to the major drainages, were primarily moist meadowlands. The upland vegetation was dominated by the big sagebrush group (Artemisia tridentata). According to Beetle (1960), the major species in North Park was ~ •.!.. vaseyana. Sagebrush had three different growth forms which Dargan and Permut (194Q) designated �6 A-I, A-2 and A-3. Gill (1965) classified the sagebrush similarily, and described each type quantitatively. growing, non-vigorous sage; A-2was In general, A-I was low- sage of intermediate height and vigor; A-3 was tall, vigoroussageo A-I sage grew on shallow dry soils, mostly on ridge tops; and A-3 grew on moist deep soils, mostly in gully bottoms. A-2 was a transitional form which grew in soils of intermediate moisture and depth; often on sidehills and benches. Rabbi tbrush (Chrysothamnus -viscidiflorus) was .. a sub- dominant throughout most of the-area, but was most frequent in A-2 types. The most frequent grasses were Bouteloua gracilis and Koeleria cristata on poor sites associated with A-I and A-2 sagebrush, and ~ spp., Calamagrostis montanensis,andStipa favorable sites associatedwith-A-3 sagebrush. lettermanion more Agropyron smithli was the most frequent grass -on all sites. The most frequent forbson Erigeron pumilus,Artemis~ the upland areas were Phlox spp. frigida, and Astraga!ussp. associated with A-I and A-2 sagebrush ; and=Her t ensLa bakeri; §..e;,l1~ci.2 sp ,, Trifolium gymnoca£e.~~ Androsace-sept6ntrionalis and Eriogonum spp. associated with A-3 sagebrush. The moist lowland area adjacent to the major drainages and lakes, and surrounding some of the lll?ls.~dwaterimpoundments-had a vastly different appearance. These azeas -,,7ere pz Imar Ll.y meadowlands interspersed with Chrysothamnus spp., Sarcobatus vermiculatus, and Salix spp. Chrysothamnus nauseosus was the dominant species in localized situations, and Sarcobatusvermiculatusoccurred as the �7 dominant species on poorly drained, alkaline soils. Salix spp. generally were restricted to land immediately adjaeent to streams. The meadows were dominated by grasses, rushes (Juncus spp.) and sedges (Carex spp.), but had a wide variety of forbs associated with them. Two portions of the study area had been cleared of sagebrush prior to this study. One portion, involving about l'3/4 sections of public land and about one other section of private land, was reseeded mostly to crestedwheatgrass with some Russian wild rye. The other portion, involving almost 2 sections of private land, apparently had been seeded to rye, but it was "not tilled during 1965 or 1966. It had become revegetated with various grasses and broad-leafed weeds. The upland sagebrush areas were mostly public lands administered by the Bureau of Land Management.- These" lands were leased by ranchers whose cattle grazed them during spring and early summer. The lowland areas were mostly- private lands used'fot:'hay production. The majority of the meadows" were "irrigated during late spring and early summer. They were grazed "in early spring and in fall after haying. The areas of sprayed sagebrush "(Fig. 2) were" located in the interior part of the study area," primarily on upland sites. Two blocks of sagebrush range were sprayed, one about 500 acres and the other about 1,800 acres. of untreated sagebrush. grouse strutting ground. They were separated by about 900 acres Each treated" block contained one sage �8 SG sO D AREA C SG 5 o AREA B SG \. \ ... -,- SG I 60 LEGEND A. 500 acres; block sprayed B. 1800 acres; block sprayed C. 1200 acres; 50 yd. spray strips 150 yd. leave strips D. 500 acres; 50 - 250 yd. spray strips 200 yd. leave strips SG. Strutting ground Fig. 2. Scale 1 Mile Sagebrush control patterns and active strutting grounds on the study area. �9 Two other areas were sprayed in strips, alternated with unsprayed strips. One area had 50 yard sprayed strips and 150 yard leave strips. Approximately 1,200 acres were sprayed in this pattern. grounds were located in this area. Two strutting The second area was sprayed in strips of various widths alternated with 200 yard untreated strips. There were four strips 50 yards wide, four 100 yards, four 150 yards, three 200 yards and two 250 yards wide. strips increased from west toeast,and about 500 acres, The width of sprayed the sprayed area totaled These strips intercepted intermittent stream drainages used for migration routes by broods moving to summer ranges along the North Platte River (Gill 1965), Climatically,North Park was a region of extremes. was dry with much of the precipitation falling in winter. were severely cold and summers hot. The area Winters There was extreme temperature fluctuation between night and day·--- characteristic of high areas surrounded by persistently, snow-covered mountains. The area was frequently buffeted by high winds. Some commonly observed wildlife species inhabiting the area were mule deer (Odocoileus hemionus), pronghorns "(Antiloc"}pra .ill!!.ericana), coyotes (Canis latrans), red foxes (Vulpes fulva), badgers (Taxidea taxus), prairie dogs (Cynomys leucurus), ground squirrels (Citellus richardsoni), jackrabbits (Lepus townsendi), golden eagles (Aguila chrysaetos), marsh hawks {C,:J,.,!cus cyaneus), red-tailed hawks (J3uJ~~~ Jame.!s_ellsis), SwaLnson I s hawks (],.swainsoni), ferruginous hawks (B. regalis), sparrow hawks (Falco sparverius), horned larks (E.remophilaaJ&esJ:Eis)j. vesper sparrows (Pooecetes �10 gramineus), sage thrashers (Oreoscoptes montanus), crows (Corvus brachyrhynchos), magpies (Pica pica), as well as many migrant species of water and shore birds, etc. �11 CHAPTER II METHODS AND MATERIALS POPULATION LEVEL AND PRODUCTIVITY Strutting Ground Census Strutting grounds on the study area had been located previously (Rogers 1964, Gill 1965), and all had been censused annually since 1959. However, I watched for new'or relocated grounds. All known grounds were kept under observation, and active ones were censused every two or three mornings throughout the strut t tngvaeaaon. were counted from a vehicle driven to'anearby I classified males as adults orsubadults, Birds vantage point. as indicated by their behavior and the size of their white breast band (Patterson 1952, Gill 1965). Nest Search To determine the effects of 'sagebrush control on sage grouse nesting, 60 five-acre plots (27 'in sprayed and 33 in unsprayed areas) were systematically searched for nests in both 1965 and 1966. The plots were located within 1 1/4 miles of the nearest strutting ground, and placed, as much as possible, in what Gill (1965) found to be favorable nesting cover. Each plot was surveyed with a compass, permanently located with a steel corner-stake and recorded on a map. The sides of �12 the plots were paced off 155 yards'square or 220 x 110 yards, the shape depending on the particular site.- In order to fit into the sprayed strips, plots established on these areas had 50 x 484 yard dimensions. In searching for nests, we used the procedure employed and described by Gill (1965). Twomen,- separated by a 14 ft rope, walked abreast back and forth across the plot towards a flag on the opposite side. Each traverse was'walked in both directions, so that each plot was doubly searched. Each man kept 7 ft on either side of himself under surveillance. Nests of the year wen~ differentiated from older nests by general appearance. Shell fragments in nests of the+year usually were large and colored; whereas, shell fragments in older nests usually were small and bleached. 'Old nest craters often were filled with litter and had vegetation growing in them. Feathers found in old nests were extremely weathered compared with those in nests of the year. Successfully hatched eggs were recognized by the circular manner in which the large end of the shell was pipped' off. If the shell was subsequently crushed, the shell membrane indicated whether or not the egg had hatched, Brood Census Five brood routes were established by Gill (1965) during the pre-spraying phase of this study. Each was about 20 miles long and covered a different portion of the study area (Fig. 4). �13 Each of the five routes was censused once a week throughout the summer, and each census was conducted' while driving a truck along the route at 10 to 20 miles/hr during the last 2 or 3 hrbefore dark. The sex and age of all sage grouse were recorded ; and,,their location plotted on a map. All meadows along the route were scanned thoroughly with binoculars, and 'whenever possible, broods were flushed to ensure complete counts. To avoid censusing the same segment of a route always at the 'same relative time,' the direction of travel was alternated each time a route was run. Hunting Season Analysis Check-stations were operated--atWalden-and Cowdrey during the hunting seasons in 1965 and 1966, as they had-been since 1955, excepting 1960. All hunters were stopped,' their-kill was recorded, and a wing removed from undressed sage grouse. \.vingswere classified as to sex and age according to Crunden's (1963) wing key. To obtain a measure of hunting pressure and time required to bag a bird, hunters were asked how long they had hunted. DISTRIBUTION AtIDMOVEMENTS General movements, particularly in relation to sprayed areas, we:re observed and recorded while following flocks of birds. This was done primarily during the'breeding season, when sage grouse could be followed from strutting grounds. During summer, it was very difficult to find birds to follow, particularly in the vicinity of sprayed areas. The birds' location, movements, and �14 activities were recorded. Weather was recorded hourly to aid in interpreting the observations. All sage grouse observed during-the study (including those observed on brood census routes) were recorded, and their locations described. These locations were plotted on a map to provide information about sage grouse distribution during spring and summer. Winter distribution was indicated by three aerial surveys of the study area between 8:30 and 11:00 AM on January 13, February 16, and March 23, 1966. A pilot and two observers systematically sampled the area from a Cessna 180 aircraft flying at about 100 ft altitude and 80 miles/hr. We surveyed the entire study area by flying the plane along east-west transect lines 1/2 mile apart. The location and size of each flock observed were recorded on a map. Trapping Most birds were trapped using the "spot-lighting" technique described by Pyrah (1959). It involved-driving onto sage grouse roosting areas at night, locating and blinding a bird in a spotlight beam, stalking quickly along- the'light beam, and placing a long handled dip-net over the bird. Captured birds were held in burlap sacks until marked and released. The technique was repeated until no more birds could be found-on the roosting area. This method was used mostly during breeding season when sage grouse roosted on strutting grounds, although some were captured on roosting areas in summer. We used a stationary cannon-net on the strutting grounds twice, but found it was inefficient because of the time and effort required �15 to clear the brush from around the net while setting it, and from the net after it was fired. Several birds were captured with a mobile cannon-net similar to the one'described'by Lacher and Lacher (1964). This net, mounted an and anchored to the truck bumper, was 30 by 50 it nylon mesh and was pulled lengthwise by two projectiles, each propelled, by 75 gr of black powder'. The mobile cannon-net was used in summer primarily. We also attempted to capture sage grouse with a drive-net trap similar to those described by Allred (1946), Thompson (1946), and Patterson (1952). This trap also 'was used in summer and was set to intercept sage grouse moving from meadow feeding areas to roosting areas. We did not attempt to camouflage the trap. Marking Captured birds were banded with a Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department leg-band inscribed'with a number and return address, and a numbered plastic leg-bandettecolor-'coded according to tagging location. Band size was 16 for males and 14 for females. In 1966, chicks that were too small to be sexed or to retain a leg band were tagged 'vlitha numbered strap-style wing-band. In 1965, adult sage grouse were marked with a naugahyde, pancho tag of a color signifying the tagging location. Each tag was numbered with upholstery dye for individual recognition. The tag was similar to the one Gill (1965) adopted from Pyrah (1963). The front was 1 inch longer, so the number was not obscured by neck feathers, and a strip of 1/2 inch elastic was placed around each �16 wing and stapled to the back of the tag to ensure its retention. The original 8 inch tag was used on females. In 1966, some birds were marked with pancho tags; and some with patagial streamers similar to those described by Anderson (1963). They were cut from colored plastic, and attached directly to a wing band fastened through the bird's patagium. attached to each wing. A streamer was The streamers were about 5 inches long and 1 inch wide, and color-coded according to tagging location. They were numbered individually with symbols which I thought were easier than numbers to identify at a distance. The distal tip of the streamer was shaped to indicate whether the bird was an adult or subadult when tagged. Radio Telemetry Several birds were equipped with radio transmitters purchased from S. Markusen, Cloquet, Minnesota. In 1965, an Eddystone communications receiver (model 770R) and a yagi antenna.mounted on a truck were used to monitor the signals. In 1966, a receiver specially designed for this purpose by S. Markusenwas the receiver and antenna were hand-held. used. Both Birds were located generally by plotting the direction from which the-maximum signal was received, repeating the procedure from a different place and determining the location by-triangulation. The bird could be located precisely by moving towards the maximum signal until the bird was seen. �17 :Reobservations A marked bird provides little data unless-oft-Ls- re-observed. Consequently, we maintained a continual vigilance fer these birds, and recorded all reobservations~ We utilized brood census routes and actual movement observations also- for locating-marked sage grouse. Bands returned by hunters,and banded 'birds found dead provided additional information·-about-movements and distribution of sage grouse. VEB£TATIONANALYSIS To 'enable quantitative description of veget at Lorron the study area prior to spraying, Gill (1965) established 21 macroplots (seven in each sagebrush growth category) in which he sampled the vegetation. He patterned his sampling technique after that described by Hyder et al. (1963). Gill selected similar plot sites on control areas and areas to be sprayed. Where possible, plots in each growth category were placed in close proximity, one in an area to be sprayed and the second in a control area. I resampled-the plots in the same manner in 1966 to determine what vegetative changes had resulted from the 2,4-D application. A macroplot consisted of a-lOO ft baseline (set·perpendicular to the contours) from which four 100 ft transects extended at right angles. One transect was located randomly from each quarter of the baseline. �18 We determined frequency by recording each species occurring within a square-foot quadrat which was placed every 4 ft along each transect. A maximum of 100 "hits" was possible for any species in a macroplot. Frequency is the percentage expression of the number of "hits" recorded for a species, divided by the number of "hits" possible for that species. Relative frequency is the percentage expression of the number of "hits" recorded for a species or group of plants, divided by the total "hits" for all plants. Density was determined for shrubs (two categories for sagebrush: young-seedling and mature-decadent) by r"eqolj:d:i;;ng-the number of shrubs within 6 inches of each t ransec t v t'Ih~ length of crown intercepted by each transect was recorded for all shrubs, and sagebrush intercept was recorded in the following vigor classes: young, seedling, mature, decadent, and dead. Also, height of intercepted sagebrush plants was recox;9-ed. 2,4-D RESIDUE SAMPLING Forty-two samples were analyzed for 2,4-D residues by Spectran Laboratories Inc., Denver. Tpis,wor}c was contract.ed by - !,.- Mr. Croswell Henderson, Bureau of Sport Fisheries and Wildlife, and financed by the Bureau's Pesticide Surveillance Program. I turned all samples over to Mr. Henderson who transported them to Spectran Laboratories and arranged for the analysis. �19 Sage Grouse TWEalve sage grouse were collected with a,22 rifle and a shotgun during spring, 1966, about 11 months after sagebrush was sprayed with 2,4-D. Six were collected fromunsprayed six from sprayed areas. ar,as and They were frozen until early August, when tissue samples were excised for analysis. The brains were removed and combined into two samples, one from birds collected on sprayed areas and the other from birds collected on unsprayed areas. Approximately 100 g of muscle tissue were excised from the breast of each bird. For analysis, most breast samples were combined with another from the same group of birds (either from sprayed or unsprayed areas). One bird from a sprayed block and one from sprayed strips were analyzed separate:lY· Ground Squirrels and Rabbits Besides the sage grouse, 14 ground squirrels (Citellus richardsoni) and four jackrabbits '(Lepus townsendi) were collected with a .22 rifle for 2,4-D residue analysis. They were collected between May and August 1966, frozen until Augu-st when the skins were removed, and the remaining carcasses tested for 2,4-D residues. We tested three samples of ground squirrels (2 carcasses/sample) collected from sprayed strips, two similar samples from the unsprayed area, and three samples (two with two carcasses and one with one carcass) from the block sprayed ar~as. carcasses were analyzed separately. Four rabbit Two were collected from sprayed blocks, one from sprayed strips and one from an unsprayed area. �20 ~bru~l\and Soil Twe.Lve sagebrush samples (about 100 g each) were collected in October 1966, about 16 months after 2,4-D application, and analyzed for 2,4-D residues. Leaves and twig tips were picked, placed in plastic bags and frozen. Five samples were collected from sprayed blocks, two from sprayed strips, two from unsprayed strips and three from control areas. Eight soil samples {about 200 g each) were collected in October 1966 and analyzed for 2,4-D residues. A sample consisted of small amounts of soil gathered from several places in the general vicinity. They were taken from the top 1 1/2 inches of soil. Two were collected from sprayed strips, three from sprayed blocks, two from unsprayed strips and one from a control area. ESSENTIAL OIL LEVELS IN SAGE GROUSE DIETS The alimentary canal was removed from the sage grouse collected for 2,4-D residue testing. The contents of the crop, gizzard, small intestine, large intestine and caeca were separated and air dried. The gizzard contents were combined in groups of two or three to increase the sample weight. Samples weighed from 47 to 60 g, although one weighed only 35.5 g. These samples were distilled by boiling with 2.5 liters of water for 5 hr in a 5 liter flask fitted with a reflux condensor and an oil trap. The sagebrush oils were drawn off, weighed, and compared to oil levels that Gill (1965) found in the three growth forms of sagebrush. �21 The small intestinal, contents were all combined into one sample and distilled in the same manner. The caecal contents also were distilled in one composite sample. The combined contents of the large intestines were insufficient (10 g) -to warrant distilling. �22 CHAPTER III RESULTS AND DISCUSSION POPULATION LEVEL AND PRODUCTIVITY Strutting Ground Census The 1966 strutting ground census indicated a population increase over 1965. Besides an increase from 166 to 234 strutting males, the number of "active" strutting grounds increased from four to eight (Table 1 and Fig. 2). T~ble 1. YEAR Com2arison of 1965 and 1266 §truttiDi srQuDd c~tlililuse§~ MAXIMUM NUMBER OF STRUTTING MALES Strutting Ground Number Total 2* 4 5'~ 6 8 9* 10* 11* 1965 9 53 52 0 0 52 0 0 166 1966 9 47 54 2 6 97 6 13 234 *Strutting grounds on sprayed areas. SG (strutting ground) 2 and SG 5, which were on the sprayed blocks, had practically the same number of strutting males in 1965 and 1966. SG 9, on the strip sprayed area, increased from 52 males in 1965 to 97 in 1966. SG 4, which had the most males of all strutting grounds on the control area in 1965 decreased slightly. Four old strutting grounds (Rogers 1964) were reactivated in 1966; however, all but SG 11 were abandoned by May 1. Three of these were on unsprayed areas and one on a strip sprayed area. About 66% �23 of the population increase was accounted for on one strutting ground (SG 9), with most of the remaining increase on the four reactivated grounds. The age structure (adults and subadults) of strutting males was calculated from the highest count obtained for each group on each strutting ground. This is different from the highest total male count on a single day shown for each strutting ground in Table 1, Based on these figures, 15.5% of the strutting males were subadults in 1966 (Table 2). This proportion of subadults seems rather low considering the high average brood size in 1965. JJf nesting success was 20 to 25% (Table 3) and average September brood size five (Table 5), there should have been 125 young/200 adults (if we assume a 50:50 sex ratio) or 62 juvenile males/ 100 adult males. Juvenile males may suffer more loss before the next breeding season, but it seems unlikely that "they would be reduced to only 15.5% of the male population. Table 2£ Age structure of the strutting male population in 19660" STRUTTING GROUND NUMBER Percent subadults 2* 4 5* 6 8 9* 10* 11 18.2 10.6 12.5 o o 21.4 o 12.5 Average 15.5 *Strutting grounds on sprayed areas. In a static population, Patterson (1952) found about 20% of the strutting males to be subadultso However, the North Park �24 population had increased from the maximum about 40% since 1965. Age ratios, counts of adults and subadults graphs of strutting and 33% in 1964; ground attendance, indicate even though the population determined shown in Gill's 37% subadults in 1963 was declining. no graphs were shown for SG 4 or 5, two of the largest (1965) However, three grounds on the study area. Perhaps part of the low proportion rect classification. subadult of subadults I was not confident of my ability from adult males except in hand. Often, to distinguish I classified same bird in both categories, depending was strutting At any rate, variation at the moment. was due to incor- largely on whether the or not it due to my error should have been consistent. Age structure The three smallest of males on individual grounds, and SG 4, the largest area, had the lowest proportion sprayed block, a slightly block, grounds are given in Table 2. of subadult males. ground on the control SG 5, in the large and SG 11, a small ground on the control area, had only greater proportion than SG 4. SG 2, in the small sprayed and SG 9, in the strip sprayed area, had the greatest of subadult males. The period between April of greatest Adult male attendance on all grounds occurred A small secondary grounds during peak occurred on the second week of May. peaked on all grounds between April 10 and 21. males attained most strutting female attendance 9 and 16 in 1966. the three larger strutting Subadult proportion peak attendance grounds. most birds of all grounds between April 16 and 29 on SG 9, in the strip sprayed area, had the on the study area, and did not reach the �25 peak number of subadults until May 14. only two fewer than its peak number. However, on April 15 it had This pattern of attendance was similar to what Gill (1965) found prior to sagebrush control. Strutting activities in 1966 were frequently disrupted. attempts to census SG 4, only two (22%) were successful. Of nine All nine attempts were made under satisfactory weather conditions and earlier than 1/2 hour after sunrise. Three times the birds flushed while I was more than 200 yards from the ground, and four times there were fewer than five birds present when I arrived. Of seven attempts to census SG 9 under optimum conditions, four (57%) were successful. Twice there were no birds present and once they flew as I approached. On SG 5 in the large sprayed block, four successful counts (50%) resulted from eight attempts under optimum conditions. Once the birds flushed as I approached, and three times no birds were present. The smaller strutting grounds were disrupted less often. In one-third of the instances when few or no birds were present, a golden eagle was sitting on or near the strutting ground. not determine causes for the remaining instances. I could The disruption apparently was not associated with sagebrush control, because it was most frequent on SG 4 in the control areao The three smallest strutting grounds were abandoned by April 30; whereas, strutting continued on larger grounds until about May 25,1966. Although, sage grouse tended to abandon the smaller g~ounds earlier in the spring, there was no apparent difference in date of abandonment attribatable to sagebrush control. Strutting activity ceased slightly earlier in 1966 than in 1963 or 1964. �26 These data indicated that sagebrush control with 2,4-D had not been detrimental to strutting activities. Sagebrush spraying probably did not seriously dlsfigurestrutting. grounds per se , since they were not obviously ,altered, except for reduction of previously sparse sagebrush. Sagebrush spraying may be beneficial in this respect, because sage grouse usually strut on relatively open sHes. Schlatterer (1960) noted that sage grouse shifted the position of strutting grounds onto burned or cleared ar£as. Patterson (1952) and Trueblood (1954) believed sage grouse would tolerate drastic physical changes in their strutting grounds. Ins.pite of the population increase since 1965, the strutting population in 1966 was the second lowest recorded since continual, annual census begah in 1959 (Fig.3). The increase since 1965 could have been a natural fluc.tuation that would have occurred regardless of sagebrush eontrro l., - . Fluctuations of rhf.smagnitude have occurred before (Fig.3). Thispopulatidn, like all wildlif~ populations, will continue to fluctuate; .-however, it might never again reach the peak numbers of the past. Also, the average population of the future might be smaller than the average -of the past. This is based on the assumption that the population will decrease as a result of sagebrush eradication -- a logical assumption where large blocks of sagebrush are eliminated. However, where sagebrush was sprayed in narrow strips, as part of this area was, the population might be unaffected, or even benefitted. Such an effect is feasible because of increased edge and diversity of habitat that results from strip spraying. �27 166 1959 Fig. 3. 1960 1961 1962 1963 1964 1965 1966 Total strutting male counts on the study area since 1959. �28 Nest Search In 1965, we found 23 nests of the year on the 60 five-acre plots. Twelve nests were found on sprayed areas (11.25 acres/nest) and lIon unsprayed areas (15 acres/nest). These figures do not indicate the effects of sagebrush control, because most nesting was completed or nearing completion when herbicide application began on June 2, 1965. In 1966, all plots were searched again and 10 nests of the year were found, eight on sprayed areas (16.88 acres/nest) and two on unsprayed (82.5 acres/nest). Although I attempted to establish all plots in favorable nesting cover, there were several reasons why sprayed and unsprayed plots could not be compared dire~tly. The sample was small and there was considerable variation between plots. Variation cacsed by the distance of plots from strutting grounds was not stratified, because there was not always enough favorable nesting cover to establish the necessary plots in each stratification. I thought nesting cover would be most important, and therefore sacrificed control of the distance variable. Also, the various sprayed and control areas were not situated with the same relationship to strutting grounds. For instances only a few acres of the unsprayed block between areas A and B were within 1/2 mile of a strutting ground (Fig.2); in other places, plots were within 1 mile of two strutting grounds. Furthermore, the five stratifications were not sampled proportionally, because of insufficient time to determine accurately the amount of favorable nesting cover in each one, and to search the required number of plots in the outer ones. �29 However, 1965 data (pre-spraying) can be compared with 1966 data (post spraying), since the same plots were searched both years. Although this comparison was affected by several factors, particularly annua l, ~!eather and.population level, the 33 plots on unsprayed areas should. have controJ.led some of these variables. The number of nests found on sprayed and unsprayed plots in 1965 and 1966 are shown in Tab Le 3. The 10 nests found in 1966 represent a 56.5% decrease from the 23 found in 1965. This decrease occurred in spite of the substantial population increase indicated by the strutting ground census. However, this decrease apparently was not caused by sagebrush control, because unspr ayed plots had greater reduction in nesting use than did sprayed plots. Unsprayecl pLots had 81. 8% fewer nests in 1966; whereas, sprayed pLo t s bad 33.3!~ fe·A'er.Some other factors apparently ~7e7.:'e involved, and !:heymust have been more severe on unsprayed than on sprayed plots. 'hether sagebr:1sh control reduced the influence of these T••• factors on sprayed areas is unknown. Possibly, fewer..nests were found in'i. ".:~ 1966- because of weather conditions, different than occurred in 1965. In 1965, considerable snow remained on the study area during the mating peak which occurred about April 22. tlost potholes, intermittent drainages and other depre8sions contained water, and might have induced wider nest distribution. In 1966, snow was practically absent from the study area by the peak of mating, between April 9 and 16. Most potholes and depressions were dry, and only the major intermittent drainages �30 Table 3. Number and success of nests on sprayed and unspr ayed plots. ---._,.=::2 SPRAYED NEAREST STRUTTING GROUND No. Nests of Plots Year (MILES) 1965 1966 UNSPRAYED Successful Nests 1965 1966 No. Nests of Plots Year 1965 1966 Successful Nests~ 1965 1966 1/4 or less 3 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 o 0 1/4 - 1/2 7 5 4 2 2 7 0 0 0 0 1/2 - 3/4 9 4 2 1 0 9 1 2 0 0 3/4 - 1 8 2 2 1 0 13 9 0 0 0 1 0 3 1 0 0 0 33 11 2 o o - 1 1/4 Total 27 12 8 5 2 �31 contained water. Therefore, a greater percentage of hens might have nested nearer to meadowlands along creeks, rivers, and other permanent water. Although Batterson and Morse (1948) and Nelson (1955) in Oregon, and Dargan and Keller (1940) and Keller, Shepherd and Randall (1941) in North Park believed that nesting distribution was not affected by water, Patterson (1952) noticed changes in nesting distribution in response to annual moisture variation. Girard (1935) believed that nesting areas were within easy flying distance of water. Although most of my study area was within a mile of water, nests might have been concentrated closer to the moist meadowlands during the dry spring of 1966. The combination of 20 to 25% nesting success in 1965, and high average brood size (5) in September 1965, should have created a high proportion of subadultsage grouse in the 1966 breeding population. This was not indicated in the 1966 strutting ground census, but as previously explained, it may have been due to my error in aging strutting birds. Stanton (1958) found that all adult females had ovulated, but 5 of 20 subadults had not. subadults; Eng (1960) found that females with broods were 27.3% whereas, females without broods were 64.3% subadults. These observations suggested that subadults produced fewer chicks than did adults, and Stanton's (1958) findings indicated that some subadults had not nested. Thus, the proportion of females that nested in 1966 might have been lower than usual. Also, these subadults would have been less mature than normal during the 1966 breeding season, because of the late 1965 breeding and subsequent hatching periods. At any rate, the age �32 ratio would not entirely explain the reduced 1966 nest production indicated by these plots. On the nest search plots, 21.7% (5) of 23 nests hatched in 1965, and 20% (2) of 10 nests hatched in 1966. When all located nests of the year (not just those on plots) were included in the calculation, 24.1% (7) of 29 hatched in 1965, and 25% (4) of 16 hatched in 1966. Both methods suggested nesting success was similar in 1965 and 1966. Nesting success on sprayed plots decreased from 41.6% (5) of 12 nests in 1965 to 25% (2) of eight nests in 1966. on unsprayed areas in 1966, neither hatched. Of two nests located However, none of 11 nests found on unsprayed areas in 1965 hatched either. Although nesting success was lower on sprayed plots in 1966 than 1965, a similar reduction, if it occurred, could not be detected on unsprayed plots, because nests on these plots were 100% unsuccessful in 1965. Also, the 1966 sample (2 nests) on unsprayed plots was too small to accurately determine nesting success on the control area. Consequently, the decreased nesting success on sprayeu plots cannot be attributed definitely to sagebrush control. Seventy-five to 80% of the nests located both in 1965 and 1966, were destroyed, or deserted and then destroyed. I did not attempt to determine the original cause of destruction since the nest search was conducted 1 to 4 months after nesting was completed. Evidence of the cause of destruction had long been obscured, and many agents could have disturbed the nests in the meantime. Destruction and or desert~on of nests was high on this study area during 1965 and 1966. Gill (1965) reported 70% destruction here in �33 1964, and Keller et a1. (1941) reported 56.7% destruction ami 8,3;;; desertion of nests in North Park in 1941. In Wyoming, Patterson (1952) found nesting successes as low as 23.1% and as high as 60.8%, Nelson (1955) reported 31.8 to 39.2% nesting success in Oregon; whereas, Griner (1939) reported nesting success in Utah averaged 60.25% for 2 years, Keller et a1. (1941) believed badgers destroyed the majority of sage grouse nests in North Park, but Gill (1965) believed ground squirrels (Citellus richardsoni) destroyed 50% of the nests and badgers destroyed 43.8%. Judging from the abundance of these species compared with other potential nest predators on the study area in 1965 and 1966, I suspect they were still the major cause of nest destruction. Crows and magpies were common the study area, but they tended to stay near the meadows and probably caused little destruction on upland areas where nest-search plots were located. I do not know what effect sagebrush control had on the reLatLonship between sage grouse and nest predators. The reaction of ground squirrels and badgers may tremendously influence nesting succeS3 on sprayed areas in the future, Concealment provided by sprayed sage- brush also will influence the degree of nest destruction in th.~ future, particularly by avian predators. Batterson and Morse (1948) found 50% of their sage grouse nests under or near partially dead sagebrush. Conversely, Nelson (1955) found only one of 51 nests beneath dead plants. Perhaps this depended partly on the amount of dead sagebrush available. In North Park, dead sagebrush did not prevent females from nesting on sprayed areas~ as �34 72.7% of the 11 nests found on sprayed areas (not just on sprayed plots) were beneath dead sagebrush, and 27.3% were beneath sagebrush with at least one living branch. However, 8 of the 11 nests were within 100 yards of relatively extensive patches of live sagebrush, and also within 200 yards of unsprayed areas. The four nests that hatched were beneath dead sagebrush. Two were within 200 yards of unsprayed areas and two were in the middle of the 1800 acre sprayed block, and not close to any extensive areas of live sagebrush. Trueblood (1954) found that sage grouse nested on reseeded areas, but preferred the remaining scattered sagebrush for cover; found 25% of the nests near or beneath clumps of grass. however, he He believed suitability of reseeded areas was closely related to seasonal precipitation. Since sage grouse nested on reseeded areas, it is not surprising that they nested on sprayed areas. The persistent dead sagebrush stalks apparently provided adequate nesting cover, and sufficient sagebrush survived to provide food for hens. tended to nest near patches of living sagebrush. However, they Furthermore, excellent growing conditions in 1965 produced a lush stand of grasses which was available for nesting cover in 1966. As the dead sagebrush deteriorates in the future, nesting use of sprayed areas likely will decline, particularly when growing conditions are poor and cover sparse. Also, nest destruction probably will increase under these circumstances, because nest concealment will be inferior. Trueblood (1954) thought hens nesting on reseeded areas were easier to detect than hens on non-reseeded areas. �35 Brood Census A comparison of brood route data from 1964, 1965 and 1966 is presented in Table 4. The 1964 data were taken from Gill (1965). Since he censused the brood routes until only August 15, 1964, I have totaled the 1965 and 1966 data at the same date for comparison. His 1963 data have not been included because they were not collected on the standardized routes. From 1964 to 1965, observations of broods and young decreased from 40 to 24 and 116 to 78 respectively. 24.8 to 38.9. The miles/brood increased from These data reflect the population decrease indicated by the strutting ground census. The implied decrease in production must be qualified because of the 1965 conditions. Sage grouse probably were more difficult to see because of luxuriant vegetation resulting from above average rainfall. Furthermore, summer migration of broods to the meadows (Gill 1965) may have been less prominent than usual because of lush vegetation and more available water throughout the study area. If this was correct, sage grouse would have been dispersed over a greater area, much of which was sagebrush range; consequently, the chances of observing them would have been less than if they had been concentrated on the meadows. In 1966, 41 broods were observed by August 15, an average of 23.7 miles/brood. Each brood observation required 15.2 less miles of travel in 1966 than in 1965. According to the brood route data, about the same number of broods was produced in 1966 as in 1964, even though the strutting ground census was 30.6% lower in 1966 than in 1964, and the 1966 nesting success was only 20 to 25% compared to 30% in 1964. �36 Table 4. Comparison of sage grouse brood censuses from 1964 to 19660 PERIOD YEAR BROODS YOUNG June 1964 1 5 1-15 1965 1 2 1966 0 0 June 1964 6 31 16-30 1965 0 0 1966 7 29 July 1964 2 11 1-15 1965 9 32 1-7 25.4 3 •. 5- 1966 21 82 1-7 10.3 3.9 July 1964 23 48 16-31 1965 11 29 1-6 22.1 2.6 1966 11 46 1-9 19.7 4.2 August 1964 8 21 1-15 1965 3 15 1-9 71.0 5.0 1966 2 7 3-4 108.0 3.5 BROOD SIZE RANGE MILES/ BROOD RELATIVE BROOD SIZE* 5 0 43.1 2 5.2 1-7 37.8 401 5.5 2.1 2.6 �37 Table 4. (continued) 1964 to 1966. PERIOD YEAR August 1964 16-31 September 1-15 Totals Comparison of sage grouse brood censuses from BROOD SIZE RANGE MILES/ BROOD RELATIVE BROOD SIZE* BROODS YOUNG 1965 2 8 3-5 106.8 4 1966 1 2 0 216.3 2 1965 2 10 0 52.9 5 1966 3 15 3-6 72.1 5 1964 (40)** (116) (24.8) (2.9) 1964 96(78) 1-9 44.8 (38.9) 3.4 1966 45(41) 181(164) 1-9 31.2 (23.7) 4.0 1965 28(24) * Includes incompletely counted broods. **Figures in parentheses are totals as of August 15. �38 However, as indicated by observations of hens, only 18 2% were succes s0 ful in 1964 (Gill 1965). Still, on the basis of population level and reproductive success, the brood increase since 1965 was understandable, but the similarity between 1964 and 1966 data was not. In 1965 and 1966, the brood census was continued into September. Based on these data, 28 broods were observed during 1.255.2 miles of travel on the brood routes in 1965 -- an average of one brood/ t.4.8 miles, In 1966, 45 broods were observed during 1,406.1 miles of travel on the same routes -- an average of one brood/3l.2 miles, The greater brood production in 1966 was still obvious, but miles/ brood increased considerably after August 15. "break-down" of broods after mid-August. This was due to the Undoubtedly several broods were seen, but they could not be distinguished from adult females; consequently, the observations of unclassified birds increased during late summer. While miles/brood increased tremendously, miles/bird remained relatively constant. Pyrah (1954) stated that brood structure began to break down in late July, and Stanton (1958) stated that broods were no longer recognizable by mid-August; however, the date depends on the peak hatching period, and applies to the majority of broods -not all broods, In 1964 and 1965, the peak period for brood observation was during the last half of July. half of July. In 1966, the peak period was during the first The difference probably resulted from the mating peak which was 1 to 2 weeks earlier in 1966 than in either 1964 or 1965. Consequently, the hatching peak would have been earlier, and the broods older by July 1. �39 It often was difficult to obtain complete counts, especially of young broods. Because many broods were counted incompletely, relative brood sizes given in Table 4 do not indicate average brood size. In most cases~ broods smaller than three probably were not counted completely. I determined average brood size from broods that were counted completely (Table 5). Some were observed on brood routes, and the remainder were general observations recorded whenever a brood was seen. These data do not indicate relative abundance of broods, because the time and area in which they were recorded were not standardized. These data indicated that average brood size decreased from 5.6 in 1965 to 4.7 in 1966. This was the average of all broods observed throughout each summer, not the average brood size at the end of summer. Average brood size in 1965 and 1966 was hig~ than the 3.7 and 2.9 Gill (1965) found in 1963 and 1964 respectively. I understood that he had recorded only complete counts. Relative brood size (Table 4) in 1966 was 0,6 chicks larger than in 1965, but average brood size (Table 5) was 0.9 chicks smaller in 1966 than in 1965. I am unable to explain this discrepancy in the relation- ship between average and relative brood size. Throughout the 1965 summer, 146 female sage grouse were observed, and 44 (30.1%) of them had broods. In the 1966 summer, 328 females were observed, and 73 (2203%) had broods. hens The percentage of successful calculated in this manner compares closely with the percentage of successful nests found each year. Gill (1965) found 34.4 and 18.2% of the females were successful in 1963 and 1964 respectively. �40 Table 5. Average brood size in 1965 and 1966 as indicated by broods counted completely. AVERAGE BROOD SIZE RANGE 3.7 3-4 12 500 2-7 1965 4 505 3-7 1-15 1966 13 4.8 3-7 July 1965 2 6 0 16-31 1966 8 5 3-9 August 1965 2 7 5-9 1-15 1966 3 3.6 3-4 August 1965 3 5 0 16-31 1966 1 2 0 September 1965 2 5 0 1-15 1966 3 5 3-6 Total 1965 13 3-9 1966 43 2-9 PERIOD YEAR BROODS June 1965 0 1-15 1966 3 June 1965 0 16-30 1966 July �41 At this time, there appears to be little relationship between the brood census data and sagebrush control. Although the herbicide was applied during the 1965 hatching period, several weeks passed before its effects were very noticeable. 2,4-D should not have harmed the birds directly (Rudd and Gene11y 1956, U.S.DepoAgr.1961),andI found no evidence of injury due to indirect effects of 2,4-D at that time. Although, the number of broods observed was much lower in 1965 than 1964, this probably was due to the low 1965 breeding population and to weather conditionso Since broods usually migrated to meadows near the periphery of the study area for the summer (Gill 1965), the sagebrush control probably did not harm broods at that time. Although the 1965 migration probably was less prominent than usual, this likely was due to weather conditions,not to sagebrush control. Sagebrush control certainly would have affected broods in 1966, but the effect was not obvious. The number of broods produced in 1966 was greater than in 1965, but this was due mostly to population level. Average brood size was smaller in 1966 than in 1965 but was still above the pre-spraying years of 1963 and 19640 The percentage of successful females was similar in 1965 and 1966, and success in both years was between the high and low success percentages of the pre-spraying study (Gill 1965). Comparison of individual brood routes in 1965 and 1966 (Table 6) did not help to determine the effects of sagebrush control on brood productiono Routes 3 and 4 sampled some of the strip sprayed areas, but primarily they sampled meadowlands and unsprayed sagebrush, as did route 1 (Figo4)o �42 Table 6, Comparison of censuses on five brood routes in 1965 and 1966. BROOD ROUTE NUMBER 1 1965 2 1966 1965 3 1966 1965 4 1966 1965 5 1966 1965 1966 ',.'.' Total Miles 234.3 279.2 260.7 283.5 195.7 218.2 316.7 357.1 247.8 268.1 Total Broods 5 12 8 Miles/ Brood 4609 23.3 Relative Brood Size 502 4.2 8 1 6 l3 12 1 7 32.6 35.4 195.7 36.4 24.4 29.8 247.8 38.3 3.2 3.9 3.5 2.6 5 5 2.7 238 30 5 Total Birds 33 Miles! Bird 7.1 1.6 6.4 2.4 16.3 1.7 4.6 1.5 8.3 2.5 Nonbrooded Hens 2 7 7 22 1 25 19 55 9 23 Males 0 0 0 55 5 6 0 61 4 0 Unclassified Birds 0 102 0 0 0 69 3 50 11 60 171 41 116 12 127 69 109 �43 ROUTE 4 ROUTE 3 ROUTE 2 i- I ROUTE 1/· / ROUTE ~5 Scale 1 Mile Fig. 4. General areas sampled by each brood census route. �44 Route 5, which sampled part of the sprayed strips and large sprayed block, also primarily sampled unsprayed sagebrush and meadows. However, these routes all sampled meadows that provided summer range for sage grouse that bred and nested on or near the sprayed areas. Route 2 sampled upland sagebrush range and the sprayed areas. No sage grouse were observed on route 2 in summer, 1964 (prior to sagebrush control), because most of them were near the meadowlands at the periphery of the study area (Gill 1965). "bserved on route 2; In 1965, 41 birds were however, most were on or near three different meadows in intermittent drainages. As previously stated, the upland ~~~s were likely more suitable for summer range in 1965, because of lush vegetation and. increased water resulting from above average rain- fall. The other birds observed on route 2 were two groups of nonhrood.ed hens and one newly hatched brood~ all seen in June. In 1966, 116 birds were observed on route 2, all on or beside the three'meadows frequented- in 1965. July 15. Of these birds, 111 were seen before Although 1966 was much drier than 1965, these meadows had free water or succul-ent plantsavailabl.e. Consequently, the increased observations on route 2 likely were not aue to sagebrush control. Although spraying sag~brush increased grass production, the sprayed areas remained arid rangelands and probably would not substitute for moist meadowlands utilized by sage g.rouse for summer rang.e. Also, fewer forbs grew on sprayed areas (Fig.ll), further reducing. their summer range potential. �45 Summer Population Census The brood routes provided a summer population index and supplemented the spring strutting ground census. To standardize this index, I have presented the data in miles/bird observed (Table 7). In 1965, an average of one bird/6.8 miles was observed; in 1966, one bird/l.8 miles was observed -- a reduction of 73.5% in miles required/observation, or a 73.5% increase in population (if it is a simple inverse relationship). Adult birds alone required 71.9% £ewer miles/observation in 1966 than in 1965. This index indicated a greater population increase since 1965 than did strutting ground census. However, the two census methods were not comparable, because the strutting ground census was an index of adult males; whereas, the summer population census was an index of total population. The indicatecLincrease must be due largely to adults since the average brood size and proportion of successful females were slightly lower in 1966 than in 1965. Also the miles/brood observed in 1966 were only 30.4% less than in 1965. The 91.8% decrease in miles/ male probably accounted for much of the indicated population increase in 1966 compared with 1965. As previously discussed, the luxuriant vegetation in 1965 probably minimized the concentration of grouse around meadows, and reduced the chances of observing the birdsp thereby exaggerating the population increase in 1966. Also, some birds might have immigrated to the study area after the strutting gr.o.unc:l census. �46 Table 7. Comparison of 1965 and 1966 summer population indices determined from brood routes. MILES PER 1965 1966 Bird 6.8 1.8 Cock l39.5 11.5 Hen 19.0 7.'9 Adult 16.7 4.,7 Juvenile rs.r 7.8 Unclassified 89.7 5.0 Brood 44.8 31. 2 Nonbrooded hen 33.0 IO.O �47 Kill Analysis A comparison of hunter-killed sage grouse in 1965 and 1966 is given in Table 8. Check-stations were operated from 8:00 AM until hunters stopped returning from the field in the evening. Sex and age classifications were determined from all wings collected during this time, but hunting pressure indices were determined from interviews between 8:00 AM and 5:00 PM, so they would be comparable to indices determined for previous years. The 3,9% more adults in the 1966 kill could easily be due to sampling error, but it is also explainable by the slight decreases of average brood size and percentage of successful hens, as indicated by brood routes. In 1965 the sex ratio was relatively even, but in 1966 ther~was a disproportionately greater kill of females. Sex ratio data were difficult to interpret because the population sex ratio was unknown. Furthermorej males and females might differ in their vulnera- bility to hunting. Although seldom very successful, hunters have at..temptecttd'shoO't smaller birds in preference to adult cocks (Gill 1965). Also, Gill (1965) believed the flocking habits of adult cocks and nonbrooded females reduced their chances of being shot; furthermore, much of the area on which they were congregated was closed to hunting in 196J' and 1:96lf. The percentage of males in the 1966 kill was similar to the pe~centage in 1963 and 1964 (Gill 1965). The higher male kill in 1965 "'might'have";been'due to:theaforero:enfiol1.ecCwiderd:i.spel:"Siol1. of birds. �48 Table 8. Comparisons of hunter-killed sage grouse and hunting pressure in 1965 and 1966. Season length 1965 1966 1 day 2 days Total birds 116 263 Total birds classified 109 153 % Adult cocks 24.8 12.4 % Juvenile cocks 23.8 17.0 % Adult hens 27.5 43.8 % Juvenile hens 23.8 26.8 % Adults 52.3 56.2 % Juveniles 47.7 43.8 % Males 48.6 29.4 % Females 51.4 70.6 Hunters checked ISO 306 Hunter-hours 626 1227 Birds/hunter D.77 Hunter-hours/bird 5.4 4.7 �49 Hunting pressure (man-hours/day) was similar in 1965 and 1966, but the season was 2 days long in 1966, and 1 day in 1965. Consequently, about twice as many hunter-hours were logged in 1966. Hunter success (birds/hunter and hunter-hours/bird) was slightly improved in 1966. Because of the population increase since 1965, a greater increase in hunter-success might have been expected. However,the kill in 1966 was 127% greater than in 1965, even though the highest estimate of population increase was 73.5% (based on brood routes). Of course, the hunting season was 100% longer. DISTRIBUTION AND MOVEMENTS During 1965 and 1966, 110 sage grouse were trapped, and 107 were tagged and released. The other three died -- a chick and an adult male presumably of shock, and an adult male was killed after its wing was broken by the cannon-net. Of 107 birds released, 38 were reobserved a total of 62 times (Table 9). In spite of the greater population in 1966, only about half as many birds were captured as in 1965, and over half of these were captured on summer roosting areas. For unknown reasons, the spot- lighting technique was not as successful on the strutting grounds in 1966. Part of the problemplObably was because I attempted most of the trawingin May, at least 2 weeks after the peak of mating. Dalke et al. (1960) believed the most successful time for trapping on strut"ting grounds was during the peak of mating. However, Patterson (1952) was unable to capture sage grouse by the spotlighting technique. �50 Table 9. YEAR 1965 Sage grouse tagged and released in 1965 and 1966. LOCATION TAG SUBADULTS JUVENILES TOTAL Type Color Cocks Hens Cocks Hens SG 2 Pancho Light green 3(1) 1 1 1 0 6 (1) SG 4 Pancho Yellow 14(5) 1* 3(1) 0 0 18 (6) SG 5 Pancho Lavender 15(2) 1* 8 (1) 0 0 24 (3) Red 12 *(3) 1 3(1) 0 0 16(4) White 0 6* (2) 0 1 0 7 (2) 2 o 71 (16) SG 9 Pancho E1se- Pancho where Subtotal ADULTS 44(11) 10(2) 15(3) �51 Table 9. (continued) YEAR Sage grouse tagged and released in 1965 and 1966. TAG LOCATION ADULTS SUBADULTS JUVENILES TOTAL Type Color Cocks Hens Cocks Hens Patagia1 Light green 0 0 1 0 0 1 SG 4 Patagia1 Pancho Yellow 1 0 2 (1) 0 0 3 (1) SG 5 Patagia1 Blue 1 0 0 0 0 1 SG 9 Patagia1 Pancho Red 0 0 **(2) 4 0 0 4 (2) SG 10 Pancho Dark green 1(1) 0 0 0 0 1(1) SG 11 Patagial Blue and () red o 0 1(1) 0 1(1) Else- Patagia1 where Pancho Dark green White 3(2) *6(5) 3(2) ** 2 (1) 11 (7) 25 (17) Subtotal 6(3) 6(5) 10(5) 3(2) 11(7) 36(22) Total 50(14) 16(7) 25(8) 5(2) 11(7) 107(38) 1966 SG 2 * One bird equipped with radio transmitter. ** Two birds equipped with radio transmitters. Number of birds reobserved are in parentheses. �52 Although more than 75% of the males captured on strutting grounds in 1965 were captured after May 1 (peak af mating. April 24)~ no sage grouse were captured after May 1, 1966 (peak of mating April even though most effort was expended after that date. 19~ I visited grounds trapping Several at least four strutting conditions times were good before. 1 could get: CLOse enough to but in most cases, capture when weather). they flushed them; often:- as. I dr.ove onto good strutting during April ground census I trapped throughout, 1966, because data first.- However, I wanted to trapping nights, three of- were .spent .tr¥ping -t:hellbir.ds that: were during April was not too successful. which on each of 7 nights, ground. I'-,(Hrl not trap intensively obtain Between Mayg and (minimal :moonlight .and nuadva::se no birds were present, the strutting 9-16), Six different captured. 1. have no explanat.iere for the- bXrdst wild- he-hcmi.o-x:!O' previously discussed, strutting ground population in 1966 than 1965, as indicated ~tdbecause of 1965 production, Gill unduly hampered attached. subadults the pancho was found during morning by trapping were more difficult grounds .±n :the results and particularly to trap because more readily. vis-ible,. they might have with the elastic harness I found only three-pancho-t:a,gged grouse and at least 11 others were still alive vations)".. of suhadu1ts might have been responsible. tags '\Je-r~e readily the birds, Although, situation A higherproportinn from the strutting Although died, censuses. (1965) believed they flushed a similar hut as .tha:tbad (proved by later reobser- only tlu:ee: af. sa cocks- mcu:ked with pancho tags were reobserved �53 alive on strutting grounds in 1965. All three were adults roosting at night, and none were observed strutting, One of the 3 that died was found later on a strutting ground. It appeared the pancho tags were adversely affecting the birds' activities and behavior if not increasing their mortality. Conse- quently, 11 grouse were tagged with patagial streamers in 1966, These streamers were readily observed, but individual identification was difficult. Of 11 sage grouse marked with patagial tags, one lost both streamers and one tore off most of the tag below the attachment. These tags were cut from a plastic material that did not have a cloth base, and were not as strong as those with a cloth base. Radio telemetry work was not very successful in 1965, primarily because of improper receiving equipment. One adult male and three adult females were outfitted with transmitters, but signals were never received from two hens and were received from the third for only 2 days. Signals were received from the male for 41 days after release, but the bird never was located precisely. Maximum distance from which signals were received under test conditions was 2/3 mile. Directional sensitivity of the receiver was poor. The technique'was much more successful in 1966, when proper receiving equipment was obtained. Signals were received from 1 mile away, and directional sensitivity of the receiver was better; although, si;g.nalsseemed to be deflected by geographical features. Four males and one hen were equipped with transmitters, and all but the hen were ret'()eated~ One male was continually monitored for 28 days; the others for shorter periods, Cessation of signals was caused by the loss of �54 batteries One cock was observed 0 and a hunter subsequently with the battery missing, shot a cock equipped with a transmitter Two cocks lost the entire transmitter but no battery. and were ret~apped in 1967 bear- ing only leg bands. Although only about half as many sage grouse were marked as in 1965, six more were reobserved, recorded. Increased which were marked reobservations in 1966 and 22 more reobservations in 1966 'Were partly due to 25 birds on a small area of summer range around which remained all summer. grounds dispersed On the contrary. to an unknown were they birds marked on strutting extent in moving to summer ranges. Spring Gill (1965) wrote that movements grouse in spring were oriented during early spring, but less rigidly and distribution to the strutting of male sage grounds, as strutting particularly activity waned after the peak of mating. He believed females were also in the vicinity strutting Tbe situation was similar grounds4 Females frequently of tire strutting Of 37 females April were observed on upland areas in the vicinity (excluding strutting 10 and May 31, 1966, 23,were observed I attempted quickly thereafter, to determine I mile, The approximate ground counts) between by April 3~. Observations as they began nesting. cruising SG 2 and 5 on the sprayed blocks, contro:l area. in 1966. grounds until about 1 week after the peak of mating. recorded of hens declined of radii of males that strutted SG 9 on sprayed radii were: strips and SG 4 on the SG 2 -- T/8 mile, SG 5 -- 1 mile, and SG 9 -- 1 1/8 mileso on SG 4 -- �55 There were many weaknesses in the determination of these radii" Each figure represented only a few days' observations. Also, there were seldom more than 20 birds in the flock under observation, and invariably numbers dwindled as they dispersed over a wider area. Only about five birds could be kept under continuous surveillance, and even five would often "disappear" so that the plotted location represented the last place they were seen, not the greatest extent of the days' movements. Although of questionable significance, birds from the smallest and largest strutting grounds had the shortest and longest cruising radii respectively; whereas birds from SG 4 and 5, which had 47 and 54 strutting males respectively, both had I mile cruising radii. This could have been caused by range limitations or a manifestation of saturation point, forcing birds from larger strutting groliludsto disperse over a greater area. Although cruising radii figures were questionable, I was able to determine the general areas utilized by sqge grous~ from each strutting ground dur1ng the day. I do not know what proportion of the birds used each area, nor if the same birds tended to use the same area every day. Birds from SG 2, on the small sprayed block, were never observed to spend the entire day within the block sprayed area. Every day that I observed them leaving SG 2, almost all of them flew east onto strip sprayed area D (Fig. 2), where they apparently spent the dayo Occasionally one or two would fly south towards the unsprayed block. �56 Some birds trOm SG 5, on the large sprayed block, spent: thQentire i' I I' day on this block urttil about mid-April, after which they qUickiy increased thet:t·cruising radii. They moved 'West and north from SG 5, and I thi,rikmost of them spent the day on strip sprayed area C or on the unsprayed block. After April 16, I hever found sage grouse on the sprayed block later than about 10:00 AM. Apparently this area was satisfactory for strutting., Cover was still adequate to allow them to move between SG 5 and feeding and resting areas. Although the birds usually moved in short flights, the sprayed area may become a barrier to movements once the dead sagebrush stalks deteriorate. Birds from SG 4 spent the day-primarily south and west of the strutting ground, although some moved northeast or northwest occasionally. They were ob$erved along the edge of the large sprayed block, put none were seen within it. A few birds were seen on the southern part of strip sprayed area C (Fig. 2), but none were known to be from SG 40 Birds fromSG 9 dispersed in all directions, but primarily west- ward and northeastward. Probably, the majority moved west onto the unsprayed area; however, they also did so prior to sagebrush control o I followed only those chat moved northeastward, because they remained on the strip sprayed area. Ten marked male sage grouse were reobserved on strutting grounds (Table 10). Of these la, six were on the strutting ground where they had been tagged, and four were on different struttmg grounds (F:tg. 5).., Two of the four involved in interstrutting ground movements were �57 Table 10. grounds Reobservations of tagged male sage grouse on strutting BIRD NO. AGE WHEN TAGGED TAGGING DATE TAGGING REOBSERVATIONS LOCATION ----..•...• ~--Locations Dates 1414 Adult 29 April 1965 SG 4 SG 4 18 May 1965 1420 Adult 6-May 19_65 ___ SG 4 SG4 13 May 1965 SG 4 2L May ;1.965 SG 4 21 April 1966 SG 4 21 April 1966 SG 4 6 May 1966 SG 4 1967* 0 1428 Adult 18 May 1965 SG 4 1463 Subadu1t 20 April 1966 SG 4 SG 4 17 April 1967 1402 Adult 23 April 1965 SG 5 SG 5 13 May 1965 1417 Adult 5 May 1965 SG 9 SG 9 14 May 1965 1457 Subadu1t 3 June 1965 SG 4 SG 9 14 April 1966 SG 5 16 April 1966 SG 5 21 April 1966 1318 Subadu1t 18 May 1965 SG 9 SG 5 1 May 1967 1467 Adult 1 May 1966 SG 9 SG 5 25 April 1967 1461 Adult 20 April 1966 SG 10 SG 4 17 April 1967 *Date not available �58 subadults when tagged. All four were first reobserved on a different ground the year after tagging. The only bird recorded on two grounds in one season was tagged on SG 4 in 1965, and reobserved on both SG 9 and SG 5 in 19660 Three of the four birds that moved to a different strutting ground moved to SG 5 in the large sprayed block (Fig. 5). No birds marked on SG 5 were observed on another ground, even though SG 5 was in the middle of the large sprayed block, one from SG 4 on the control area. it subsequently moved to SG 5. One bird moved to and Only one b~rd moved to SG 9, and SG 9 was the lat'.geststrutting ground, and perhaps sage grouse tended to disperse from there to grounds where more strutting territory was available. Although only one instance of a bird using two strutting grounds in one season was recorded, only six birds were reobserved more than once on any ground in one seasono Interstrutting ground movements between years apparently were more connnon. Although 40% of the 10 birds reobserved on strutting grounds were involved in inter-ground movements, only seven of the 10 were observed in more than 1 year. Thus, 57% of the birds observed in more than one year were involved in annual interstrutting ground movementso Since many marked birds were not seen on strutting grounds again, possibly the tagging had adversely aTfected tbeir behavior. The high percentage of interstrutting ground movements might have been abnormal behavior caused by the tags. At any rate, sagebrush control apparently did not induce sage grouse to move from sprayed to un.sprayed strutting grounds since most moved to SG 5 on the large sprayed block. �59 Area C Area A \'\ SG : \ - \ \ \ y~ '\ /' Y ) ./ 0, SG 5 Area B ) J \ \ \ LEGEND Scale 1 Mile ---4) road annual movement $~~ seasonal movement SG strutting ground Fig. 5. Observed interstrutting ground movements of male sage grouse tagged in 1965 and 1966. �60 SG 4 had the greatest return of marked birds. Two birds were each reobserved there three times, and two others were each reobserved there once. One bird marked on SG 5, and another marked on SG 9 were each reobserved once on their respective tagging sites. Summer Gill (1965) found sage grouse concentrated on specific parts of meadows along the major drainages during summer. I found a similar distribution of sage grouse during the 1965 and 1966 summers. Areas of summer distribution, as determined from observations made during brood censuses, are outlined in Figs. 6 and 7. Gill (1965) mapped eight major areas of concentration in 1964. In 1965, I found only minor concentrations of sage grouse in three of those areas and in one other (Fig. 6). The new area was also a meadow situation along two intermittent streams near the small sprayed block. Both drainages contained available water. The low population level in 1965 was responsible for much of the reduced number of bird observations and concentration areas. Also, the wet 1965 season with its resultant lush vegetation might have enabled the birds to remain more evenly distributed throughout the study area, thereby minimizing summer concentrations. Three marked grouse were reobserved on the upland areas during summer, 1965 (Fig. 8). However, two were at a small pothole which contained a little water much of the summer, and one of this pair was reobserved 25 days later in meadows 2 miles to the west. �61 ** '* ',.....-"" * ff fff , / -,,-' "" " .•..-, ,.,....- '\ f'f " <, f' ;',~ ./ \ L- I \ * ...- \ / \ -" '. \ \ " .. ,,. ) /" .~, -, \ LEGEND -: I I \ brood f female m male u unclassified U 10 unclassified * \, .•.•. "'" \\ ':. "-....... <, , Scale 1 Mile -- ,\ ""J~,,--) , -~, Fig. 6. Distribution \ of sage grouse during summer 1965. ... �62 , (~ '- \ \ ! '~~\ \'--__ ....JI'-----,- - Jr:. t • j I LEGEND m M f F * U u I . [\\ male 10 males female 10 females brood 10 unclassified unclassified Fig. 7. Distribution Scale 1 Mile of sage grouse during summer 1966. �63 , I ,, ,--- •.•.•. \ \ I :f> ,\j / --- \ "I /'" ./ \ ) I LEGEND 1," / I HK Hunter Kill S Sighting R Report / -, , tagging location o " <, '.""', ': strutting ~observed ground Scale 1 Mile HK \'\; \ \ off map .~1965 Fig, 8. Tagged sage grouse reo bserved away from strutting in 1965 and 1966, grounds �64 In 1966, many more birds were observed during the brood census, and birds were concentrated in all areas Gill (1965) had outlined (Fig. 7). The additional concentration area found in 1965 was utilized also. The increased population in 1966 probably was most responsible for the greater number of concentration areas and birds observed. Unlike 1965, there was little rain during 1966, and the drier conditions might have helped to concentrate the grouse on meadows. Three marked cocks were reobserved several miles from the study area in 1965. A subadult was shot in September, 7 miles southwest of its tagging site (SG 5), and 2 miles south of the meadows on the southern boundary of the study area. Gill (1965) reported one adult cock tagged on SG 4 had moved 12 miles south of the study area, but he thought it might have been tagged while migrating to a strutting ground further south. The other two were adults marked on SG 4. One was reobserved August 29, 10 miles east and 1 mile south of SG 4. The other .was shot September 14, 11 miles east and 1 mile south of SG 4. They were 6 1/2 and 7 1/2 miles, respectively, east of the study area. Gill (1965)"-'reportedthat birds tagged on SG 9 were reobserved in this area during winter. The three cocks I tagged were marked May 13 and 18, 1965, so were not likely tagged while migrating through the study area. If many birds dispersed to this extent in 1965, it would help explain the reduced number of birds, particularly males" observed on brood routes that year. brood census in 1965. Only nine cocks were observed during the �65 Reobservations of marked grouse in 1966 indicated during summer were generally quite restricted, reached their summer range. Pyrah during late summer were usually molting at least once they (1954) stated that daily movements less than 1/2 mile, perhaps due to of flight feathers. One subadult 15, 1966. female was tagged northeast She was reobserved 29, 30 and September site. She was shot September Of 25 birds captured reobserved (Table 9). within females without 1/4 mile of the tagging 11, 1966 in the same vicinity. Sixteen were within 1 1/2 miles. 1/2 mile of the tagging Although broods were reobserved 1 week of tagging, vicinity 8, 1966 within hens on near their summer range in 1966, 17 were site, and the other within subadult of Lake John on April in a flock of nonbrooded August other marked four adult and one only once, and all birds were observed in the all summer. Two males were seen twice within a subadult within 1/2 mile of the tagging 2 days and an adult within was observed subsequently. with a transmitter, but presumably the battery more signals were received. Another was seen four times between July 16 and August the tagging site. 14, was relocated A subadult within 11, after which this bird was monitored several carne off, because stopped no tagged July 12, 1966, 16 within 1/2 mile of with a transmitter 1 mile of its capture the transmitter It had been equipped adult male, male equipped site, 1 month after tagging. I think the subadult August their movements July site six times by functioning. times in the general vicinity Also, with- �66 out actually being located. It was shot on September la, 1966, about 1 mile from its capture site. An adult female and six of her chicks were marked on July 9, 1966, and were reobserved on July la, 12 and 14 within 1/4 mile of their tagging site. The hen and five marked chicks were reobserved near the North Platte River September 6, 1 1/2 miles south and 5 1/4 miles east of the tagging site. On September 8, this hen and brood, still intact and discrete, were seen about 1 mile southwest of the previous location. I suspect this major movement had occurred after September l. There was an obvious influx of sage grouse onto the northeast portion of the study area after September 1, as evidenced by data from brood route 3 (Figs. 4 and 7). This route was censused 11 times by August 31, and a total of 51 birds were recorded. Seventy- six were recorded during the next two censuses. Coincident with this influx of birds, the meadow at the northwest corner of area C was abandoned. It was on this meadow that the marked hen and her five chicks had been observed previously. birds had been utilizing this meadow as shown in Fig. 7. Many I have no explanation for this movement, except that the meadows had begun to dry and birds might have been returning to winter ranges. Summer movements of sage grouse appeared to be influenced directly by precipitation. Whenever it rained, sage grouse dispersed from the meadow at the northwestern corner of area C. dried, they recongregated around the meadow. As the area This likely was due in part to increased vegetative succulence and available water on �67 surrounding areas. Another possible reason was the wetness of the meadow, the surface of which was pitted with holes about 1 ft deep between intervening hummocks Whenever it rained, these holes o collected and held water temporarily. This would render the meadow unattractive until the water drained off or soaked away. It is difficult to relate these data to sagebrush control. Birds were observed on the block sprayed areas only twice during 1965 and 1966, excluding the strutting seasono Two broods (probably one seen twice) were at the southwestern corner of the large sprayed block in June 1965. They were within 100 yards of a successful nest which was constructed prior to sagebrush control, The birds observed on the edge of the small sprayed block (Figs. 6 and 7) were either on the meadows by the intermittent streams, or on the strip sprayed area D to the east. However, nests were found on the block sprayed areas, indicating that some birds were on these areas during late spring. The lack of sage grouse on these areas in summer probably was not due to sagebrush control, because grouse used them only sparingly during summers prior to sagebrush control. Both areas were arid sagebrush-grassland ranges, unlike the moist meadows used for summer range. Probably the greatest change in summer distribution after sagebrush control, was the greatly decreased concentration of sage grouse on meadows along the North Platte River at the northeast side of the study area. Gill (1965) recorded at least 17 broods along these meadows by August 15, 1964. By the same date, I recorded only one brood in 1965 and two in 1966. Although in 1966, 127 grouse were �68 'seen on brood route 3 which sampled after August 15. (Figs. 4 and 7). They were located mostly on unsprayed upland areas As previously this probably was an influx of birds from the northwest Gill (1965) believed northeast streams that broods migrated entire from nesting stream channels. areas to Fig.9 depicts during summer, in Fig. 9 passed 1963 and 1964. through some sprayed area. used summer concentration For the most part, intermittent concentration Almost the into the North Platte at zone. drainages zones were not sprayed. of sage All major intermittent sprayed part of the study area drained this previously the that merged with the North Platte River at the side of the study area, where he found concentrations grouse broods drainages discussed, corner of strip sprayed area C. summer ranges via intermittent intermittent this area, 92 of them were seen leading to other summer Sage grouse were concentrated in all of these other zones in summer 1966, as they were during the prespraying study, low population They were not in 1965, but that probably and existing Thus, the sprayed the number of sage summer range along the North Platte at the side of the study area" and probably conditions. areas seem to have reduced grouse broods utilizing northeast weather was due to the were not severely Adult sage grouse are strong fliers, restricted by these sprayed areas, although they may be by larger areas of dead sagebrush. Males continued strutting on grounds and hens in the middle nested on sprayed areas. Broods,on fliers, and are much more restricted of the sprayed blocks, the other hand, are not strong in their movements. Broods that �69 f \ " ••• ~It •• '\., ~' . ~ -. """ Area B Area C .. "~ ~ ~--~------~------------~ LEGEND Intermittent -stream-- P / /=::3 Summer concentration area Fig. 9. Intermittent stream channels grouse migrating to meadows prior to sagebrush control. Scale lMile which provided along the northeast routes for sage side of the study area �70 hatched on sprayed areas probably moved off, but broods that hatched on unsprayed areas might have been reluctant to move onto sprayed areas. If this was so, many broods that hatched on area C and attempted to migrate along interm'ittent streams would have been stopped by the block sprayed areas, if not by the 50 yard east-west sprayed strips. Similarly, broods hatching on area D might have been kept from the North Platte meadows by the north-south sprayed strips (some up to 250 yards wide) across the migration routes at right angles. Broods that hatched on unsprayed areas east of the sprayed blocks (Fig.9) probably migrated normally to the North Platte meadows, while those that hatched on area C might have moved to meadows on the west side or the northcentral part of the study area (Fig.7). This would explain the increased concentration of broods at the northwest corner of area C, and in the drainages by the small sprayed block. By September, when juvenile birds could fly strongly, their movements would not have been restricted by the sprayed areas. This was suggested by the aforementioned movement of birds from the northcentral to the northeastern part of the study area in September 1966. Many of these birds likely were juveniles, although they were recorded as unclassified. Another possible reason for limited use of these North Platte meadows in 1965 and 1966 was the decreased population on SG 2 on the small sprayed block -- 20, 26, 9, and 9 males in 1963, 1964, 1965, and 1966 respectively, of the decrease, However, this would account for only a small part �71 My observations durirtg spring indicated that birds from SG 2 spent the daytime on the strip sprayed area D between range along the North Platte. midway between these meadows I reobserved a cock in early summer about and SG 2, its tagging site. 1964, two sage grouse tagged on SG 2 were shot these North Platte meadows (Gill 1965). sage grouse from SG 2 were towards (1965) observed movement there probably data concerned SG 2 and this summer males; between this ground and Since all known movements these meadows, came from SG 2. whereas, In 1963 and of some of the birds Gill However, the majority most of the of birds utilizing this area in 1963 and 1964 were females and broods. In 1964, two grouse were shot between they were tagged, suggesting meadows in summer. 1964 to 1966; towards these meadows and SG 5 where that these birds also used these North Platte The population however, these meadows I observed on SG 5 was relatively no movement stable from of sage grouse from SG 5 during 1965 or 1966. Winter The location winter and size of sage grouse flocks observed distribution surveys are shown in Fig. 10. during 1966 One flock of 10 birds was on strip sprayed area C, and five flocks were on unsprayed Two flocks were close to the large sprayed block. Unfortunately exact location because of these flocks was not determined, areas. 9 the they flushed before we saw them. It was difficult because of the birds' in sagebrush problems, where to count large flocks accurately shadows on the ground. they were impossible from the plane, Invariably, to count. they resettled Because of these the number of birds in the two largest flocks was approximated. �72 r-'\ \ \ U Area C (j ./" ,,~ -010 ••..• Area B LEGEND ~ Flock January 13 ~ Flock March 23 Scale 1 mile --Roads Fig. 10. Number of sage grouse and location of flocks sighted during winter distribution survey, 1966. �13 I All flocks observed on the northeastern the southern part of the study area. One flock was observed to the winter distribution Gill but many migrated He suggested that birds remaining northeastern portion, terrain. survey. (1965) reportedo because Although to areas east of the North Platte on the study area congregated of the snow-free Rivero on the ridges of the more there did not appear to be much snow on the study area in 1966~ it might have been sufficient, survey, the January on (1965) found that some sage grouse stayed on the study area during winter~ rolling cover, and all b~t aile were part of the study area, but only during This was similar Gill were in sagebrush to force sage grouse from the southern after the January to the northeastern portion. No birds were seen during was due to chance. unnoticed between the February Because of the low population the transects. Also, downwind, Only one flock thereby reducing for "82% of t he grouse the March flight; observed flight. They might have flocked together blizzard during the two to three previous days. Furthermore, any marked grouse or concentrations 0 areas local Wildlife (outside the study area). Conservation during because that sage grouse migrated in 1966 migration the of a severe from the study area Officers of grouse on previous Perhaps if the the noise. January I found no indication (O°F with a strong to flush, particularly (75 birds) was found during howev er , this accounted birds could have gone the weather south wind) might have made them reluctant plane passed survey, but this probably did not see wintering was unnecessary since �74 plenty of sagebrush for food appeared to be available on the study area, I Hbwever, the low population level would have obscured any movements. I spent 1 1/2 days on the study area in late December 1966, and snow\ shoed about 5 or 6 miles on the large sprayed block, but found no indication tllatsage grouse had been on it. Two flocks (13 and 27 birds) were observed on the unsprayed area about 1 mile south of strip sprayed area C. Sage grouse continued using strip sprayed areas for winter range, probably because live sagebrush was available within a few yards, On the other hand, sage grouse probably did not use the block sprayed areas during winter because insufficient live sagebrush was available for food. The dependence of sage grouse on sagebrush for winter food is well-known. Although sage grouse tended to avoid sprayed blocks after the strutting season, observations of grouse movements on the blocks and on strip sprayed areas indicated that these sprayed areas were not a direct physical barrier to adult birds. Rather, sage grouse avoided the blocks likely because they provided insufficient sagebrush for food during spring, and were inadequate for summer range. Sage grouse did not appear hesitant to cross a mile of sprayed sagebrush enroute to strutting grounds. in and out of 50 yard sprayed strips. They also appeared to move freely Although several days were spent on strip sprayed area D in summer, I observed broods in this area only during spring, and they never moved far enough from SG 2 to reach sprayed strips wider than 100 yards. Most of the time they were around the 50 yard strips. Although sage grouse moved freely through strip sprayed areas when movement was their primary activity, they sometimes tended to congregate �75 along the edges of the strips when feeding. Since sagebrush in sprayed strips was dead, the birds would move along the edges while feeding on live sagebrush in unsprayed strips. This congregation at edges of sprayed strips apparently was due to lack of food, not to any barriers to movement per se, The apparent disregard of sprayed strips by sage grouse was further exemplified by birds that were observed resting in sprayed areas during mid-day. They also frequently resettled in sprayed strips after flushing. Martin (1965) reported that 94% of 184 birds flushed resettled in unsprayed strips, but his study area consisted of unsprayed strips in a large sprayed block. His sprayed areas were more than 50 yards wide. Although adult grouse movements did not appear hampered by 50 yard sprayed strips, the birds probably would not tolerate much wider strips before avoiding them, as they did the block sprayed areas. Broods probably would be restricted by narrower strips than would adults. The effect of length of time after spraying should be considered in interpreting these observations. This study terminated less than 1 1/2 years after spraying, and the dead sagebrush stalks still provided considerable cover for sage ,grouse. The future effects on sage grouse movements will be affected by deterioration of dead sagebrush and by sagebrush reinvasion. As the stalks deteriorate and cover decreases, the width of sprayed strips tolerable to sage grouse will also decrease. VEGETATION ANALYSIS These data are average measurements made on sprayed and unsprayed areas about 1 year after spraying. They were made on the plots Gill �76 (1965) sampled the previous year, but cannot be compared directly with , , h:fikfigures, which were aVerages of seven plots for each gt~wth form (A..Ll, A-2, A-3). MY tlataare averages of three unsprayed and four sprayed plots from each growth form. The smaller sample probably accounted for most differences between Gill's (1965) data, and my data from unsprayed plots. was some yearly variation as well. Undoubtedly, there Also, observer variation was indicated particularly by frequencies of grasses, which were difficult to identify by vegetative characteristics (they had not "headed out"). Annual variation and observer variation should not influence comparisons of sprayed and unsprayed plots in 1966. Individual plot sites varied, but since the obvious difference of growth form (A-I, A-2, A-3) was stratified, most of the difference between sprayed and unsprayed plots probably was due to spraying. Frequency In general, shrubs and forbs were less frequent, and grasses more frequent on sprayed plots, as illustrated by relative frequencies (Fig.ll); however, there were some exceptions among individual species. There were no tremendous differences in relative frequency of shrubs, forbs, or grasses between sprayed and unsprayed plots, but the frequencies of certain species were quite different. This was understandable because all species were not equally susceptible to 2,4-D; furthermore, 2,4-D was applied at the most effective time for killing sagebrush -- not necessarily the best time for killing other species. Frequencies and relative frequencies of individual species are given in Tables 11 and 12 respectively. �77 70 . 0\ unsprayed 0\ II') sprayed ~ co 0 0\ C'") ~ :;.-. u Z riI ~ 0' riI ~ 11! riI :> 30 H 0\ ~ ....:I riI ~ \0 r-- 2 10 A-1 A-2 SHRUBS A-3 A-1 A-2 FORBS A-3 A-1 A-2 A-3 GRASSES Fig. 11. Relative frequencies of shrubs, forbs, and grasses on sprayed and unsprayed plots. �78 Table 11. Frequencies of the mostcommon plant species on sprayed and unsprayed plots in each growth category. SPECIES A-I Unsprayed Sprayed A-2 Unsprayed Sprayed A-3 Unsprayed Sprayed SHRUBS Artemisia tridentata 32.3 9.8 39.6 15.2 66.0 40.5 Chr~sothamnus viscidiflorus 34.3 23.0 41.0 33.2 11.0 5.5 2.0 6.8 C. nauseosus Tetradymia canescens 9.6 0.2 Phlox spp. 74.0 61.8 77.6 64.5 Erigeron pumilus 55.3 38.2 55.6 31.8 Artemisia frigida 52.3 32.2 35.0 22.2 Astragalus sp. 32.6 15.2 6.3 2.0 FORBS Mertensia bakeri -_ .•..- 7.0 10.8 Senecio sp. 13.6 13.2 Trifolium gymnocarpon 14.6 9.2 Androsace septentrionalis 12.6 15.2 Eriogonum spp. 17.3 7.0 �79 Table 11. (continued) Frequencies of the most common plant species on sprayed and unsprayed plots in each growth category. SPECIES A-I A-2 Unsprayed Sprayed Unsprayed Sprayed A-3 Unsprayed Sprayed GRASSES Agropyron smithii 53.3 82.5 66.6 88.2 79.6 76.2 Koe1eria cristata 17.3 18,0 14.3 7.5 5.3 9.2 Ca1amagrostis montanensis 8.3 10.2 13.0 14.8 27~6 46.2 Boute10ua gracilis 15.6 15.5 10.3 12.2 Poa sppo 17.3 10.0 12.0 14.0 41.3 50.8 Stipa 1ettermani 6.3 14.5 30.3 38.0 Sitanion hystrix 1.6 7.2 3.0 11.0 '- ' �80 Table 12. Relative frequencies of the most common plant species on sprayed and unsprayed plots in each growth category. SPECIES A-I Unsprayed Sprayed A-2 Unsprayed Sprayed A-3 Unsprayed Sprayed SHRUBS Artemisia tridentata 7.1 2.6 9.6 4.5 16.4 10.1 Chr~sothamnus viscidif10rus 7.5 6.1 9.9 9.8 2.7 1.4 0.5 1.7 1.7 2.7 Senecio sp. 3.4 3.3 Trifolium gvmnocarpon. 3.6 2.3 Androsace septentriona1is 3.1 3.8 Eriogonum spp. 4.3 1.7 C. nauseosus Tetradymia canescens 2.1 0.1 Phlox spp. 16.2 16.3 18.8 19.0 Erigeron pumi1us 12.1 10.1 13.5 9.4 Artemisia frigida 11.4 8.5 8.5 6.6 Astragalus Spa 7.1 4.0 1.5 0.6 FORBS Mertensia bakeri �81 Table 120 (coili::inued)Relative frequencies of the most common plant species on sprayed and unsprayed plots in each growth category 0 SPECIES A-I A-2 A-3 Unsprayed Sprayed Unsprayed Sprayed Unsprayed Sprayed GRASSES Agropyron smithii 11.7 21.9 16.6 26.3 19.8 19.1 Koe1eria cristata 3.8 4.8 3.5 2.2 1.3 203 Calamagrostis montanensis 1.8 2.7 301 4.3 6.9 11.6 Boute1oua gracilis 3.4 4.1 2.5 3.6 ~ 3.8 2.6 2.9 4.1 10.3 1207 Stipa 1ettermani 1.5 4.3 7.5 9.5 Sitanion hIstrix 0.4 2.1 0.7 2.7 spp , �82 Chrysothamnus nauseosus was the only shrub more frequent on sprayed plots than on unsprayed plots; spraying. however, this probably was so prior to C. viscidif10rus was more common than £. nauseosus, and in A-1 and A-2 plots, £. viscidif10rus was more frequent than sagebrush. The frequency of £. viscidif10rus was lower on sprayed plots than on unsprayed plots, but not nearly so much lower as was the frequency of sagebrush. Under these circumstances, £. viscidif10rus, which has a large reproductive capacity (McKell and Chilcote 1957), an efficient seed dispersal system (Frischknecht 1961), and is quick to invade deteriorated ranges (Cook, Leonard and Bonham 1965), may increase considerably on sprayed areas, particularly if grasses are overgrazed. The difference between frequencies of Phlox sppo on sprayed and unsprayed A-1 plots should be slightly smaller. On all but one sprayed plot, I recorded a particular plant as Ph1oxbryoides. While sampling this plot, I discovered that two species were involved, and proceeded to record them separately. Unfortunately, my attempted correction causes Phlox sppo to be lower on sprayed plots than if I had continued recording them as one species. However, the error was not great. When data from that plot were eliminated from calculations, the frequency of Phlox spp. was 59.7. Phlox spp. does not include all species of the genus found in the plots, as two recognizable but unidentified species of Phlox were recorded separately. Phlox spp. might have been damaged more than was indicated by frequency data. Many Phlox spp. were severely damaged and might have died later; however, a "hit" was recorded if any green color remained in the plant. Several workers found Phlox spp. moderately to severely �83 damaged by 2,4-D (Hull and Vaughn195l, Hull, Kissinger and Vaughn 1952, Bohmont 1954). Most forbs were less frequent on sprayed than on unsprayed plots, particularly in A-I and A-2 categories. However, in the A-3 category, Mertensia bakeri and Androsace septentrionalis were more frequent on sprayed plots. Relative frequency of forbs on A-3 plots was only 1.9% less on sprayed than on unsprayed plots (Fig.ll). poorer forb kill If this indicated a occurred on A-3 plots, forbs might have been sheltered from the 2,4-D by A-3 sagebrush, which had greater height and crown intercept than A-lor A-2 sagebrush. more resistant to 2,4-D. Also, these species might have been The two species which were more frequent on sprayed plots might have been more frequent prior to spraying, or they might have increased because of reduced competition after spraying. At any rate, the continued presence of forbs is likely to be important to sage grouse, particularly chicks that hatch on sprayed areas. Forbs constitute a considerable proportion of the summer diet of sage grouse (Griner 1939, Patterson 1952, Trueblood 1954). Grasses constituted a greater proportion of the vegetative composition in A-3 categories than did forbs (Fig,ll). Relative frequency of forbs was greatest on A-I plots, and decreased progressively through A-2 and A-3 plots < Relative frequency of grasses increased progressively through A-2 and A-3 plots. Relative frequency of shrubs was fairly uniform in all growth categories. Agropyron smithii, the most common grass in all growth categories, was substantially more frequent in sprayed than in unsprayed A-I and A-2 plots, but slightly less frequent in sprayed A-3 plots" However, in the �84 A-3 category, several other grasses were considerably more frequent on sprayed plots, as indicated in Fig. 11 and shown in Table 11. Effects of 2,4-D on other grasses were quite variable. sagebrush, ~ spp. (mostly ~ In A-I secunda) were less frequent on sprayed than on unsprayed plots, but other grasses were similar on both. In A-2 sagebrush, Sitanion hystrix and Stipa lettermani were more frequent on sprayed plots, but Koeleria cristata was more frequent on unsprayed plots. In A-3 sagebrush, Calamagrostis montanensis, ~ spp., and Stipa letter- mani were the major species with greater frequencies on sprayed plots. Although less abundant, Sitanion hystrix and Koeleria cristata were proportionally more frequent on sprayed plots. Frequency data are difficult to interpret. They indicate changes in abundance of species, and changes in relative composition of the vegetation. They do not indicate the magnitude of change. Changes in size and vigor of plants affect forage production but have no effect on frequency. Thus, shrubs and forbs probably were damaged more severely than indicated by frequency, because plants with only one living branch were recorded as "hits". Conversely most of the increase in grass production following chemical sagebrush control is due to increased spread and vigor of original plants, rather than establishment of new plants (Cornelius and Graham 1951, Hull et al. 1952, Hyder and Sneva 1956). Density In all growth categories, mature-decadent sagebrush was less dense on sprayed than on unsprayed plots (Table 13). Density of young-seedling sagebrush was negligible on A-I and A-2 plots, but reached 137 �85 Table 13. Density of Artemisia tridentata and Chrysothamnus viscidif10rus on sprayed and unsprayed plots. PLANTS/100 ft2 Chrysothamnus ,'viscidif1orus Artemisia tridentata GROWTH CATEGORY Young-Seedling Mature-Decadent unsprayed sprayed unsprayed sprayed unsprayed sprayed A-1 o 0.1 44 10 28 19 A-2 3 0.8 29 11 38 32 A-3 137 43 68 15 9 3 �86 plants/IOO ft 2 on unsprayed A-3 plotso Young-seedling sagebrush was less than one-third as dense on sprayed A-3 plots. These data indicate that young-seedling sagebrush was 69% killed, mature-decadent sagebrush was 74% killed, and the overall kill was about 72%. This was not an accurate measure of the kill, because 12 plots sampled only a small portion of the sprayed area. not account for partially killed plants. Furthermore, it did A plant could have had 90% of its branches dead, and still been recorded as a living plant. Also, the A-I, A-2 and A-3 categories were sampled equally, but did not occur in equal amounts. Weldon, Bohmont and Alley (1958) believed ranges would stay relatively free of sagebrush killed. for 4 years, if at least 75% of the sagebrush was Cook (1963) stated that if less than 20% of a plant's foliage remained, the plant would likely die in a few years. Since partially killed plants were not considered, the ultimate kill will be greater than 72%. Thus, sagebrush probably will not reinvade this area for several years; although, this will depend considerably on the normal climax vegetation and the grazing management that is practised. Regeneration may be more rapid on sprayed A-3 plots, where 43 youngseedling plants/IOO ft2 remained, as well as mature-decadent plants. Although competition from grasses may prevent establishment of more sagebrush seedlings, Blaisdell (1949) found sagebrush over 2 years old was not greatly affected by grasses. The overall density of Chrysothamnus viscidiflorus was only 28% less on sprayed plots than on unsprayed plots. This further suggests that �'87 , ., ~. viscidiflorus may increase. It was more frequent than sagebrush on unsprayed A-I and A-2 plots, and more dense on unsprayed A-2 plots, but less effectively controlled on sprayed plotso Crown Intercept In all growth categories, less mature and more dead sagebrush crown was intercepted on sprayed than on unsprayed plots (Table 14)0 The length of decadent crown intercept was similar on both sprayed and unsprayed plots. Crown intercept of young plants was negligible. Sixty-three percent less live sagebrush crown was intercepted on sprayed plots than on unsprayed plots. This measure of kill accounted for partially dead plants, but did not account for the kill of youngseedlings, most of which were beneath the crowns of larger plants. Crown intercept will change in the future as damaged plants die or revive. Although Chrysothamnus viscidiflorus was more frequent than sagebrush on A-I and A-2 plots~ crown interc.ept measurements showed that it was far from being dominant. the individual plants were small; (Table 14) Although it was common, however, their size and vigor may increase on sprayed areas now that sagebrush competition has been reduced. 2,4-D RESIDUE SAMPLING Sage grouse The 2,4-D residues detected in sage grouse are listed in Table 15. Because sage grouse were so mobile, a comparison of samples from �88 . I , Table 140 Length (feet) of Artemisia tridentata and Chrysothamnus viscidif10rus crown intercepted/100 ft of transect. A-I VIGOR A-2 A-3 SPECIES CLASS A. tri-- Young 0.0 0.0 0.1 0.0 0.0 0.1 Mature 6.0 0.3 10.4 1.2 34.8 6.0 Decadent 4.3 3.6 4.7 5.3 5.7 7.8 Dead 0.8 6.4 1.2 10.9 5.1 23.9 Total 11.1 10 3 16.4 17.4 45.6 37.8 C.viscidif10rus 1.6 0,85 2.7 1.7 0.6 0.4 Unsprayed Sprayed Unsprayed Sprayed Unsprayed Sprayed dentata 0 �89 Table 15. Residues of 2,4-D in samples collected on the study area 11 to 16 months after spraying. SPECIES 2,4-D RESIDUES (ppm) SAMPLE .• Sprayed Unsprayed Strips Sage Grouse Ground Squirrels Jackrabbits Blocks Sagebrush Strips Blocks 0.33 Breast ND* 1.12 Breast 2.70 2.25 Breast ND 0.42 Carcass 1.24 2.85 3.60 Carcass 2.37 4.40 1.20 Carcass 1.20 4.00 2.36 Carcass 1.60 0.34 ND 8.l3 2.40 Leaves 1.7 1.4 5.5 5.0 Leaves 2.2 1.8 3.5 2.8 2.5 3.6 Leaves Leaves 5.5 Leaves 2.0 Soil 0.3 Soil 0.1 Soil * Not detected. ND Both 6.00 Brain Carcass :'!'l" ..;.. •• ND 0.2 ND 0.2 0.5 �90 sprayed and unsprayed areas would be of dubious value. Probably all birds had been exposed to sprayed and unsprayed areas. Individual breast samples were variable, but the composite brain sample from birds collected on sprayed areas contained 5067 ppm more residue than the control sampleso These data were more valuable from the standpoint of 2,4-D ,,',i';""""'i .~1.lFY~l),.~n,ce, t.h~nfor 9qmpariso:p,~'Theyproved2,,4-Dresiduesaccumu~ lated in sage grouse, particularly in brain tissue, but gave no information about their effects 0 Higby (1965) also detected 2,4-D residues in sage grouse. I do not know of any stud~es con~u~ted to determine the effects of 2,4-D accumulation in sage grouse t 'Ilcn: even to establish levels at wnlr:th accumulations would be damaging or Let.had ; . From the standpoint ~j'''"'1 o.fm.an consumption, all residue levels detected in breast samples were below the 5 ppm allowed in citrus fruit for human consumption "'(€rafts and Robbins 1962). Ground SguirrelsandJackrabbits Although variable, 2,4-1} residues generally were greater in grotmd squirrels collected on sprayed areas .(Table 15). Since most ground squirrels from the control area were collected 2 to 2 1/2 miles from sprayed areas, the residue levels they contained were surprisingly high. These squirrels would not likely have been in cont~ct with sp--rayect areas. Strangely, the lowest residue level (1.20 ppm) was detected in samples from both blocksprayed.and control areas. Residue levels of 2,4-D detected in jackrabbits also were variable. Although one collected on strip sprayed sagebrush contained .',. �91 8.13 ppm, one collected in the middle of the large sprayed block contained none. As with sage grouse, jackrabbits could easily have been collected on areas far from their usual range. However, more complex factors probably were involved in accumulation of 2,4-D ~esidues in the tissues of these species. Sagebrush Residues of 2,4-D detected in sagebrush samples also were variable (Table l5). Residue levels generally were higher on sprayed areas, but all con.trol sampl~s contained some 2,4-D. One control sample contained 3.6,ppm, even though it was collected 2 1/2 miles from the sprayed areas.' '; Samples from sprayed areas contained from 2.0,-to 5.5 ppm of 2;4-D. These data indicated that 2,4-D had permeated much of the area surrounding the sprayed portions, and partly explains the 2,4-D 'residues in animals from control areas. Undoubtedly sage grouse had been ingesting 2,4-D but even 5.5 ppm ,', (the highest level in sagebrush) was barely above the limit allowed in citrus fruits for human consumption., However, Henderson (1966) found 11.84 ppm of 2,4-D in sagebrush 15 days after spraying. Bjorn and Northen (1948) found oral dosages of between 28~and 280 mg 2,4-D/kg body weight were required to affect weight gain of domestic chicks. The lethal oral dose was between 380 and 765 mg/kg, but 3,360 mg administered over 4 weeks was not lethal. Henderson (1966) mentioned studies indicating 2,4-D was not toxic to pheasants and quail at rates up to 2500 ppm in feed, but 1000 ppm damaged kidneys and livers of wild geese. �92 Apparently, the tolerance of various species differs, but it seems un~ikely that sage grouse would be harmed seriously by sagebrush contain~ ing 5.5 ppm of 2,4-D residues. However, the long term effects may be detrimental to sage grouse. Residues of 2,4-D were detected in soil samples from sprayed blocks and ubsprayed strips (Table 15). catingthe The highest level was 0.5 ppm, indi"- chemical was almost dissipated. However, 2,4-D would not have been concentrated in soil as it would have been in living tissues. The residues detE!~ted.in unsprayed strips were not surprising, because sprayed areas were at most 75 yards away, but it was strange that none were detected in sprayed strips. Since little 2,4-D remained in the soil, sagebrush probably will not accumulate much more. Thornton. (1950) reported. 2,4-D residues would remain in soil from a few days to a year, depending on various condHiol1s,and Crafts and Robbins (1962) repot:~~d tha( seedlings had been killed by 2,4-D residues 6 to 9 months after application. These soil samples were collected 16 months after spraying. ESSENTIAL OIL LEVELS-i:N SAG~.GRQJJSE."DIETS In early spring, 196"6,_~age grouse stayed on the large sprayed &lock all day. Although Dargan et ale (1942) fuund sagebrush constituted 100% and 98.8% of the diet of North Park sage grouse in April, 1940 and 1941 respectively, __ .birds.in.1966 were staying on a sprayed area, and often feeding where no living sagebrush remained. I had hoped to learn �93 the difference both in constit~ents and proximate analysis values between the diets of these grouse and grouse feeding in unsprayed sagebrush. Unfortunately, by the time I obtained a collecting permit, sage grouse from SG 5 had increased .their daily cruising radii, and were abandoning~he sprayed block every day after strutting. Consequently, I could not collect any birds that were staying or feeding on the s block. Gill (1965) believed sage grouse ate A-I and A-2 sagebrush, but not A-3 sagebrush. He found A~l and A-2 sagebrush contained an average of 0.456 g of essential oils/lOO g of foliage, but A-3 sagebrush contained an average of 0.793 g/lOO g. Since stomachs of the sage grouse I collected contained almost exclusively sagebrush (a few contained traces of Trifolium sp.) the contents were distilled, and their essential oil levels determined (Table 16). The average of five samples was 0.939 g of oils/lOO g of sample (dry matter). This was greater than the oil content Gill (1965) found in A-3 sagebrush, but my figures were based on dry matter and his were not. I do not know how much difference this would make, but Ward and Nagy (1966) found 2.00 to 2.17 g of oils/lOO g of sagebrush leaves and twigs (dry matter) collected during May 1964 and 1965. Compared with these figures, the amount of oils in sage groU$e stomachs was about 50% lower. This might have been due to,sage grouse not feeding on A-3 sagebrush. I also distilled the contents of the caeca and small intestines to determine if the proportion of essential oils changed as digestion �94 Table 16. Amounts of essential oils in sagebrush removed from the digestive tracts of sage grouse. GRAMS OF ESSENTIAL OILS/IOO g DRY MATTER SAMPLE Contents of Gizzard 1 0.884 2 0.888 3 0.896 4 0.964 5 1.062 Average 0.939 Small Intestine Caeca 0.074 �95 progressed. The essential oil level was much lower in both small intestinal and caecal contents than in stomach contents (Table 16). Although 44 g of small intestinal contents were distilled, too little oil was produced to enable me to collect it. A larger sample of caecal contents produced a small amount of oil, but it was brown colored, not clear yellow like the oil from the stomach contents. Nagy, Steinhoff and Ward (1964) found microbial activity was depressed by essential oils of sagebrush. bacterial digestion is in sage grouse; I do not know how important however, it probably would occur primarily in the caeca, where the essential oil level has been much reduced. �96 CHAPTER 4- SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS From 1965 to 1966, strutting ground populations increased about 40% and the number of "active" grounds doubled. Populations on individual grounds increased on the strip sprayed area, but remained relatively. stable on block sprayed and control areas. Three strutting grounds on control areas and -one on stri-p spr~yed areas were reactivated, probably due to the population increase, not sagebrush control. Strutting was disrupted frequently in 1966, but most frequently on the laY.ge ground on the unsprayed area. Small strutting grounds were abandoned earlier in the season than large ones, but there was-1.\O obyi~us difference due to sagebrush control. In spite of the population increase since 1965, we found 56.5% fewer nests in 1966; however, the greatest reduction wason unsprayed areas, and might have been due to drier weather and a hi~her proportion of subadults. Hatching success was 2-0to 25% both years, but decreased on sprayed areas from 41.6% in 1965 to 25% in 1966; however, this decrease was not attributable to sagebrush control. On sprayed areas, 72.7% of 11 nests found were beneath dead sagebrush, but 8-were within. 200 yardso£ unsprayed areas. The miles/brood observation were 24.8, 38.9, and 23.7 in 1964, 1965 and 19-66,.respectively. These figures reflected the population �97 change primarily, but 1965 observations probably were reduced by weather conditions as well. Average brood sizes were 2.9, 5.6, and 4.7 in 1964, 1965, and 1966 respectively. Check station data revealed a 127% greater kill (season 100% longer), and a slightly greater hunter-success in 1966 than in 1965, but the proportion of juvenile birds killed was slightly lower. A dispropor- tionate number of females were killed in 1966, but this probably was influenced by many factors. Prior to nesting, females were observed frequently on upland areas surrounding strutting grounds. Males stayed in the strutting ground vicinity throughout the breeding season. Their daily cruising radii seemed to depend more on strutting ground population than on sagebrus~ control. However, cruising radii were affected by sagebrush control,as indicated by birds from SG 5. They increased their cruising radius to 1 mile in early spring, presumably because of insufficient food within the large sprayed block, where SG 5 was located. Sage grouse never were observed on the large sprayed block later than 10:00 AM after April 16. Birds from SG 2, on the small sprayed block, never were observed to spend the entire day on that block. Of 10 marked sage grouse reob§erved on strutting grounds, four were on a ground other than the one on which they were marked. All four interground movements involved 2 years; however, one bird was reobserved on two different grounds the year after tagging. Annual interground movements were more common than indicated by thes"~'figures. Fifty-seven percent of the birds reobserved in 2 or 3 different years were involved �98 in interground movements; however, adverse effects of the pancho tags might have increased these movements. No birds tagged on SG 5, on the large sprayed block, were reobserved on another strutting ground, but three birds moved to SG 5. In general, sage grouse concentrated on meadows during summer, but concentrations were less obvious in 1965 than in 1966, probably because of the smaller population and wetter weather. Prior to sagebrush control, sage grouse broods congregated on meadows along the North Platte River at the northeast side of the study area. Few broods were found there after sagebrush control, probably because all major intermittent stream channels, along which broods migrated to these meadows, drained through some sprayed area. After sagebrush control, summer congregations of sage grouse were found in all other zones in which they had congregated prior to sagebrush control. Migration routes leading to these zones crossed only small areas of sprayed sagebrush. In general, sage grouse wintered on the northeastern part of the study area, as they did before sagebrush control e However, none were observed on the sprayed blocks, which had little live sagebrush available in winter. Birds were observed during winter on strip sprayed areas, where live sagebrush was available within a few yards. Sage grouse readily moved through sprayed sagebrush enroute to and from strutting grounds; however, they avoided sprayed blocks at other times. Excluding the strutting season, I observed sage grouse on sprayed blocks only twice during 1965 and 1966. Although sage grouse moved freely through strip sprayed areas, they sometimes congregated along strip edges while feeding. This was due to lack of food in the sprayed strips, not �99 to'any barrier to movements" Sage grouse were seen resting in sprayed strips, and resettling in sprayed strips after flushing. Although individual species reacted differently, generally shrubs and forbs were less frequent, and grasses were more frequent on sprayed plots than on unsprayed plots. Forbs and shrubs probably were damaged more severely than indicated by these data, because damaged recorded as "hits" might have died subsequently. plants Conversely, grass production increased more than indicated, because increased size and vigor of individual plants did not increase frequency. Forbs on~-3 plots were not so severely damaged as on A-I and A-2 plots. Residues of 2,4-D were detected in sage grouse, particularly in brain tissues, and in ground squirrels and jackrabbits; however, the effects of these residues were not known. Residues were detected in all sagebrush samples, even ones collected 2 1/2 miles from sprayed areas. Apparently, 2,4-D had permeated the surrounding area, probably accounting for part of the residues in animals collected on unsprayed areas. Soil samples contained only small amounts of residues, indicating that the chemical was almost dissipated. The amount of essential oils in sage grouse stomach contents averagedO.939g/100g (dry matter). This suggested that sage grouse ate sagebrush containing low levels of essential oils. Although a greater percentage of oils was obtained from these samples than Gill (1965) obtained from sagebrush he collected, this was because my samples were based on dry matter, and his were not. Essential oil levels were much reduced in the small intestinal and caecal contents. This probably is advantageous for bacterial digestion. �100 Sagebrush control apparently did not adversely affect strutting activities or grounds. Neither did it definitely affect nesting use of sprayed areas or nesting success; however, hens tended to nest near the edges of sprayed blocks. Brood production and survival were not obvi- ously affected by spraying. Annual interstrutting ground movements appeared to be connnon, but sagebrush control did not influence birds to leave struLtin~~~+ounds on sprayed areas; in fact, most movements were to the ground on the large sprayed block. Movements of adult sage grouse were affected, but not hampered by areas of sprayed sagebrush. Although they moved to and from a strutting ground through a mile of sprayed sagebrush, they avoided sprayed blocks at other times, probably because the blocks were arid range],:ands,unsuitable fDr -summer range, and without suff·ici-entsagebrush for food during other seasons. Movements of broods, however, probably were restricted by sprayed areas, particularly sprayed blocks. The areas sprayed in 50 yard s.tripshad no noticeable adverse effects on sage grouse. In general, spraying decreased forbs .and shrubs but increased grasses. Reinvasion of sagebrush likely will be slow on A-I and A-2 sites, but faster on A-3 sites. Residues of 2,4-D permeated much of the area surrounding sprayed blocks and strips. Residues were detected in sage grouse, particularly brain tissue, but probably had not harmed the birds. These conclusions should be regarded as preliminary. The outstand- ing implication from this research was the necessity of continuing the study to determine long-term effects of sagebrush control on sage �101 grouse. This was emphasized by fluctuations of population level, which obscured the effects of sagebrush control. Future vegetative changes, particularly degree and speed of sagebrush reinvasion, will influence the ultimate effects on sage grouse. Deterioration of dead sagebrush will further reduce available cover on sprayed areas, and may adversely affect sage grouse to an extent not yet detected. Annual weather also will influence the effects of sagebrush control, particularly after dead sagebrush deteriorates. To properly evaluate the effects of sagebrush control on sage grouse, the study will have to be continued, as the vegetation changes and population fluctuates. This project has the potential to answer many questions, but it must be continued to realize t.~~~ potential. �102 CHAPTER 5 RECOMMENDATIONS 1) This study should be continued during various population levels, and as sagebrush deteriorates, to determine long-term effects of sagebrush control on sage grouse. 2) Large blocks of sagebrush should not be sprayed, where sage grouse welfare is a consideration. 3) Major winter concentration areas should not be sprayed. 4) 'Pending further study, spraying sagebrush in SO yard strips alternated with 150 yard leave strips does not appear to be detrimental to sage grouse. 5) Unsprayed sagebrush should be left along major intermittent drainages and streams leading to summer brood ranges, particularly if sprayed strips are wider than 50 yards. �103 LITERATURE CITED Allred, W. 1946. Sage grouse trapping and transplanting. Proc. Annu. Conf. Western Ass. State Game and Fish Commissioners. 143-146. Anderson, A. 1963. 27:284-288. Patagia1 tags for waterfowl. Batterson, W.M. and W.B. Morse. Sere 1. Oregon Game Comm. 1948. 29 p. 26: J. Wildlo Manage. Oregon sage grouse. Ore. Fauna Beetle, A.A. 1960. A study of sagebrush. The section Tridentatae of Artemisia. Wyoming Agr. Exp. StaG Bull. 368. Laramie. 83 p. Bjorn, M.K. and H.T. Northen. 1948. Effects of 2,4-Dichlorophenoxyacetic acid on chicks. Science 108:479-480. Blaisdell, J.P. 1949. reseeded grasses. Competition between sagebrush seedlings and Ecology 30:512-519. Bohmont, D.W. 1954. Chemical control of big sagebrush. Effects of chemical treatments upon big sagebrush and associated plartts. Wyoming Agr. Exp. StaG Mimeo. Circ. 39. 9 p. Cook, C.W. 1963. Herbicide control'; 'of sagebrush on seeded foothill ranges in Utah. J. Range Manage. 16:190-195. Cook, C.W., P.D. Leonard, and C.D. Bonham. 1965. Rabbitbrush competition and control on Utah rangelands. Utah State Univ. Agr. Expo StaG Bull. 454. Logan. 28 p. Cornelius, D.R. and C.A. Graham. 1951. Selective herbicides for improving California forest ranges. J. Range Manage. 4:95-100. Crafts, A.S. and W.W. Robbins. Book Co., Inc. New York, 1962. Weed control. 660 po 3 ed. McGraw-Hill Crunden, C.W. 1963. Age and sex of sage grouse from wings. Manage. 27:846-849. J. Wildl. �104 Dalke, P.D., D.B. Pyrah, D.C. Stanton. JoE. Crawford, and E. Schlatterer. 1960. Seasonal movements and breeding behavior of sage grouse in Idaho. Trans. North Amer, Wildl. Conf. 25:396-407. Dargan, L.M., and R.Je Keller. Jac.kson County, Colorado. Surv , 2 28 p , 1940. Survey of 1940: North Park, Colorado Game and Fish Comma Sage Grouse c Dargan, L.M., R.J. Keller, H.R. Shepherd and R.N. Randall. 1942. Survey of 1941-42: Food studies, parasite relations, habitat-requirements. Including preliminary data on sharp-tail grouse in Moffat and Routt Counties. Colorado Game and Fish Comm. Sage Grouse Surv. 4. 10 p. andlO p. Dargan~ L.M. and G. Permute 1940. Reconnaissance, 1939: North Park, Colorado. Colorado Game and Fish Comm. Sage Grouse Invest. 1. 32 p, Eng, Rs L, 1960. Factors affecting sage grouse p roduc t fon', Montana Upland Game Bird Invest. Pr oj , W-9l-R-2; Job II-A._ Frischknecht, N.C. 19610 Sagebrush versus rabbitbrush imrasiouof crested wheatgrass rangee Annue Meeting Amer. Soc. Range Manage. 14:38-39. (Abst;r , ) • Gill, R.B. 1965. Effects of sagebrush control on distribution and abundance of sage grouse. Colorado Game, Fish, and Parks Dep. W-37-R-17 Work Plan 3, Job 8. Job Completion Rep. 185 p. - Proj. Girard, GoL. 1935. Life history, habits and food of the sage grouse, Centrocercus urophasianus. M.A. Thesis .•.Univ •.. Wy:oming,...Laramie. _<. 153 p. Griner~ L.A. 1939. A study of the sage grouse (Centrocercusurophasi~), with special reference to life history, habitat requirements, and numbers and distribution. M.S. Thesis. Utah State Agr. ColI., Logan. III po Henderson, C. 1966. Chicken brush control project, North Park, Colorado. U.S. Dep. of the Interiore Pesticide Surveillance Program, Spec. Rep. 11 p. Higby, L.W. 1965. Effects of sagebrush spraying on sage grouse populations (a discussion of a case history under study). Presented at 1965 Western States Sage Grouse Workshop. Wyoming Game and Fish Comm. Cheyenne. 4 p. mimeoo Hull~ A.C., Jr., N.A. Kissinger, Jr. and W.T. Vaughn. 1952. Chemieal control of big sagebrush in Wyoming. J. Range Manage. 5:398-402. Hull, A.C., Jr., and WeT. Vaughn. 1951. Controlling big sagehrush~ith 2,4-D and other chemicals. J. Range Manage. 4;158-164. �105 Hyder, D.N., C.E. Conrad, P.T. Tueller, L.D. Calvin, C.E. Poulton, and F.A. Sneva. 1963. Frequency sampling in sagebrush-bunchgrass vegetation. Ecology. 44:740-746. Hyder, D.N. and F.A. Sneva. ing. J. Range Manage. 1956. Herbage response to sagebrush s~ray9:34-38. Keller, R.J., H.R. Shepherd, and R.N. Randall. 1941.Survey of 1941: North Park, Jackson County, Moffat County; including comparative data of previous seasons. Colorado Game and Fish Comm. Sage Grouse Surv. 3. 31 p. Lacher, J.R. and Dorothy D. Lacher. J. Wildl. Manage. 28:595-597. 1964. A mobile cannon net trap. Martin, N. 1965. Effects of sagebrush manipulation on sage grouse. Montana Final Job Completion Rep. Proj. W-9l-R-6 and W-9l-R-7. Job II-A.l. 38 p. McKell, C.M. and W.W. Chilcote. 1957. Response of rabbitbrush following removal of competing vegetation. J. Range Manage. 10:228-230. Nagy, J.G" H.W. Steinhoff, and G.M. Ward. 1964. Effects of the essential oils of sagebrush on deer rumen microbial function. Wildl. Manage. 28:785-790. J. Nelson, O.C. 1955. A f~eld study of the sage grouse in southeastern Oregon with special reference to reproduction and survival. M.S. Thesis. Oregon State ColI., Corvallis. 113 p. Patterson, R.L. 1952. Denver. 341 p. The sage grouse in Wyoming. Sage Books, Inc., Pyrah, D. 1954. A preliminary study toward sage grouse management in Clark and Fremont Counties, Idaho, based on seasonal movements. M.S. Thesis. Univ. Idaho, Moscow. 90 p. Pyrah, D. 1959. Sage grouse population trend study. Sage grouse trapping study. Wyoming Game Bird Surv. Proj. W-50-R-8; Work Plan 2; Jobs 1 and 2. 38-64. Pyrah, D. 1963. Sage grouse investigations. Idaho Fish and Game Dep., Wildl. Restoration Div. Job Completion Rep. Proj. W-125-R-2. 71 p. Rogers, G.E. 1964. Sage grouse investigations in Colorado. Game, Fish, and Parks Dep. Tech. Pub. 16. 132 p. Colorado Rudd, R.L. and R.E. Genelly. 1956. Pesticides: their use and toxicity to wildlife. California Dep. Fish and Game Bull. 7. 209 p. Schlatterer, EoF. 19600 Productivity and movements of a population of sage grouse in southeastern Idaho. M.S. Thesis. Univ. Idaho, Moscow. 87 p. �- 106 - stanton, D. c. 1958. A study of breeding and reproduction in a sage .grouse population in southeastern Idaho. M.S. Thesis. Univ. Idaho, Moscow. 87 p. Thompson, W. K. 1946. Live trapping and transplanting ring-necked pheasants and sage grouse. Proc. Annu. Conf. Western Ass. State Game and Fish Commissioners. 26:133-137. Thornton, B. J. 1950. The use of 2,4-D and 2,4,5-T in controlling herbaceous and woody plant growth. Colorado Agr. Exp. StaG Misc. Sere Paper 470. 13 p. Trueblood, R. w. 1954. The effect of grass reseeding in sagebrush lands on sage grouse populations. M.S. Thesis. Utah State Agr. Coll., Logan. 77 p. U.S. Department of Agriculture. 1961. Chemical control of brush and trees. Farmers! Bull. 2158. U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington 23 p. Ward, G.M. and J.G. Nagy. 1966. Bacterial inhibition by the essential oils of sagebrush. Colorado State Univ. Dep. Anim. Sci. Final Rep. to the National Science Foundation. Grant GB 1507. 54 p. Weldon, L.W., D.W. Bohmont, and H.P. Alley. 1958. Re-establishment of sagebrush following chemical control. Weeds 6:298-303. Prepared by Date Harold D. Carr Approved by Harold M. Swope ------------~--------Wildlife Researcher April, 1967 --------~~--~~~----------- Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator � https://cpw.cvlcollections.org/files/original/21693fc7d9712d64bdf3d044e21b0c89.pdf 606c841de14bd30d97d2660f8953090a PDF Text Text -107- JOB COMPLETION RESEARCH State of Project PROJECT REPORT SEGMENT COLORADO -------------------------No. 12 Job No. Work Plan No. 1 Title of Job: Summarization Period Covered: April Personnel: Game Bird Survey W-37-R-20 and Publication of Pheasant Research Findings 1, 1966 to March 31, 1967 Hayne W. Sandfort and Harold M. Swope Objectives: To summarize all past wor-k and information Colorado and publish the results. on the species in Procedures: Materials pertaining to pheasant history, management and research are being compiled for inclusion in the final manuscript. A general outline has been prepared and is being expanded under each specific category. Findings: Progress on this job finally appears to be moving off of dead center. The general outline has been eA~anded and lists of tables, figures and photos are being compiled. The step by step objectives and procedures developed for guidance during Segment 21 give a more tangible approach to the execution of this job. Prepared Date: by: Harold M. Swope Wildlife Researcher April 1967 Approved by: Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator ��April, 1967 - 109 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT state of COLORADO --------~~~~~--------- Project No. W-37-R-20 Work Plan No. 1 Game Bird Surveys Job No. 14c Title of Job: Measurement of Environmental Factors (Hen Harvest) Period Covered: April 1, 1966 through March 31, 1967 Personnel: Harold M. Swope and Warren D. Snyder ABSTRACT Mapping of vegetative cover types, which was begun in 1963, was completed in early 1967. Analysis was begun on the 580 and 411 square miles that were respectively mapped on the experimental and control study areas. Small grain crops occupied about 41 percent of the experimental area and 38 percent of the control. Near equal percentages of the land were summer fallowed. Approximately 8 percent of the experimental area was pasture compared to 13·5 percent of the control. The average experimental section contained 9·9 acres of vdld areas and special covertsj whereas the average control section contained 18.6 acres. Most of the cover types were near equally represented on the two study areas. Precipitation ranged above normal for June through September, 1966, but fell below average during the 1966-67 winter. Total accumulations on both areas were in the 20 to 23 inch range. Winter wheat attained greater height in April and May, 1966 than in past years. Good subsoil moisture was the main factor in this growth. Plowing of small grain stubble progressed rapidly from late April through midMay on both study areas. On April 26 it \Vasonly 20 percent complete. On May 9 it was about 80 percent complete. �- 110 - Objectives: To determine differences in vegetation, precipitation and other envir6nmental factors between the experimental and control areas. Such differences can be related to pheasant populations as an aid in interpreting the effects of hen pheasant shooti~g. Techniques Used: Aerial photos, scaled 4 inches equal 1 mile, were used as the framework for cover type mapping. These were obtained and used at District Soil Conservation Service offices. Section lines, farm lot locations and other landmarks were transferred from these to graph paper. The graph paper copy was used in the field where field boundaries, crop types and other details were recorded. The graph squares were used as a grid to compute acreages of the various cover types per section. Cover types per section were recorded on special forms. Precipitation was recorded by cooperating farmers at or near the four central township corners in each of the two study areas. These farmers were contacted twice each year to transfer precipitation records. Transects for measuring vegetative vigor were established in two wheat fields at each corner of the study and control central townships. Fifty vegetative height measurements, one pace apart, were made along each transect during the period of vegetative growth. The last measurement was made late in summer to record stubble height and post-harvest residual weed growth. Twenty-six conditions perimental photos were taken during November to record roadside and field cover at thirteen photo hub sites. Seven of these sites were in the exarea and six in the control area. �- 111 - Measurement of Environmental Factors Warren D. Snyder Cover Type Mapping. -- Vegetative cover mapping, which was begun in 1963, was terminated during the work segment. Approximately 580 square miles were mapped on the experimental area and 411 square miles were completed on the control (Figure 1). Only large continuous rangeland areas were excluded. Cover type acreages and percentages of the two study areas are contained in Table 1. Average cover type acreages per 640 acre section are illustrated in Table 2. The high percent of the land planted to small grain crops is the most significant item among the figures. Approximately 42 percent of the experimental area and 38 percent of the control contained wheat, oats, barley or rye. These percentages can be approximately doubled to ascertain land devoted to small grain crops because most farmers summer fallow half of their land to be used for this purpose. Winter wheat occupied nearly all the acreage. It was the only important cash crop among the group. The others were primarily planted to utilize land that could not be planted to a cash crop because of federal crop restrictions. Most of the oats and rye were cut and baled for feed before they ripened. Summer fallowed land consumed a near equal percent of the two study areas A 20 percent increase in the wheat base, granted for 1967, boosted 1966 summer fallow acreages. This increase was partially reflected in Table 1 where fallow acreages were slightly larger than planted acreages of small grains. Most of the acreage was mapped prior to the summer of 1966 and was not affected by the increased wheat base. o Corn, which was planted on slightly over 1 percent of the total acreage, was either irrigated or grown on locations possessing sandy soils. The southwest part of the experimental area and the southeast corner of the control were the major corn producing locations. It was often interspersed under strip farming practices with milo, wheat .and other crops. Grain sorghum production centered in the strip farmed sandy soils. Due to federal restrictions on wheat acreages it was planted as a substitute crop throughout the study region. Millet is included with the grain sorghums in Tables 1 and 2. It also served as a substitute crop. Large acreages in the control were planted to millets in 1965 following drought destruction of much of the winter wheat. Or a ssland s occupied approximately 8 percent of the experimental area and 13.5 percent of the control. Higher amounts on the control area were primarily due to numerous interspersed short-grass pastures. These were most common along the several drainages and in the west part of the area. Portions of the marginal sandhills were included in both area totals. In most cases plowed acreages were fallowed croplands that lay idle over winter. Often these were planted to oa t s , millet, or mila during the f ol Low i ng spring. In other ins t ancc s the Land was fallowe d for two consecutive years. UsuCllly they were small tracts which were surplus under the federal Clcreage control programs. �112 the experimental hen pheasant �- 113 - Table 1. -- Cover types by acreage and percent on the experimental study areas. Cover Type CroE TYEe Green Wheat* Fallow Wheat"'~ Corn Sorghums, Millets Pasture Plowed Misc'eLl.ane ous+? Total Crop Types EXEerimenta1 Percent Acreage Control Acreage Percent .54 97.71 97,741.8 101,406.9 3,827 .4 11,611.1 35,599.2 1,432.4 12418.0 253,036.8 37.23 38.62 1.46 4.42 13.56 .55 .54 96.38 1,580.7 3l~2.6 656.0 10.1+ 161. 7 50.9 33.4 2,835.7 .42 .09 .1.7 .003 .04 .01 .009 .74 1,009.9 247.0 398.0 22.0 109.0 25.0 77.3 1,888.2 .38 .09 .15 .008 .04 .01 .03 .71 Wild Areas and S]2ecial Coverts 695.0 Tree Plantings 2,016.7 Draws & Low Areas 567.3 Rights of Way 4.29.2 Fence Rows 1,689.1 Edge Cover 4.76.8 Hiscellaneous 5,874.1 Total Special Coverts 379,446.6 Grand Total .18 .53 .15 .ll .45 .13 1.55 335.3 3,832.2 281.2 596.1 1,3L~5.9 1,241.3 7,632.0 262,557.0 .13 1.46 .ll .23 .51 .47 2.91 Cultural Features Occupied Farm Lots Vacant Fann Lots Towns Cemeteries Highways Ra I Lr oad s Hiscellaneous Total Cultura 1 Features "k 156,668.4 158,042.3 4,313.0 17,205.2 30,940.5 1,556.4 22011.O 370,736.8 Or other Ce r e a 1 Grain was the major miscellaneous ~'d~Alfalfa 41.29 41.65 1.14 4.53 and control 8.15 .,a crop Alfalfa headed the list of miscellaneous crops. It was interspersed in the sandy soils and on irrigated land. Sugar beets and beans were increasingly evident on irrigated land. A few fields, which were being leveled, were also included here. Only a small percent of the land was under irrigation, but several new irrigation wells were put into operation each year. Most of the irrigated land lay south of Holyoke and along the northern edge of Yuma County. Cultural features covered less than three-fourths of one percent of the total area or approximately 4.6 acres per section. The two study areas possessed near equal percentages of all cover types in the category. Slightly more than half of the cultural land contained occupied farm lots. Secondary (dirt and gravel) road surfaces were not included in the totals of Tables 1 and 2. Personnel, who mapped central parts of the two study areas, included secondary road surfaces in 277 sections of the approximate 1000 mapped. These roads covered about 4.6 acres per section; an acreage nearly equivalent to that of all other cultural features. �- 114 - Table 2. -- Cover type acreages type percentages. per 640 acre section based on study area cover Cover Type Experimental Acres per Section Area Control Area Cover Type Green Wheat* Summer Fallow Corn Sorghums, Millets Pasture Plowed Misce Ll ane ou sws 264.26 266.56 7.30 28.99 52.16 2.62 3.46 238.27 247.17 9.34 28.29 86.78 3.52 3.46 Total Crop Types 625.35 616.83 Cultural Features Occupied Farm Lots Vacant Farm Lots Towns Cemeteries Highways Railroads Misce llaneous 2.69 .58 1.09 Trace .26 .06 .06 2.43 .58 .96 .06 .26 .06 .20 Total Cultural 4.74 4.55 1.15 3.39 .96 .70 2.88 .83 .83 9.35 .70 1.47 3.26 3.01 9.91 18.62 640.00 640.00 Features Wild Areas and Special Coverts Tree P1antings Draws and Low areas Right of Way Fence Row Edge Cover Miscellaneous Total Special Coverts TOTAL ALL COVER TYPES ~Green wheat or other cereal grain Alfalfa was the major crop ** Wild areas and special coverts on the control area out-ranked those on the experimental area by nearly two to one. The control possessed many more unfarmed drainage areas and grassy knolls. The experimental area contained numerous undrained low areas that often contained water. Most of these were intermitten t Ly farmed so could not be tallied as special coverts. The experimental area contained more and better windbreaks than the control. Most of these were located at farm lots. Several at vacant farm lots ,,,erebulldozed out and burned during the four year mapping period. Few new windbreaks or shelterbelts were being planted. �- 115 - Acreages of cover associated with fences were computed using a ratio of onehalf acre per mile of fence. Table 1 indicates fences were approximately twice as prevalent on the control as in the experimental area. The higher proportion of pastures I.n the control probably accounts for some of the differential. Edge cover was predominately roadside cover and cover along unfenced field boundaries. Some secondary road right of ways, that were not maintained and seldom traveled, were included here. These were most common in the western part of the control. Knolls vegetated by short-grass and mid-grass species headed the list of miscellaneous cover. These were found along hillsides where limestone outcroppings made farming difficult. They were most common in the western part of the control. Further analysis of the cover type information remains to be completed. This will include computation of the percent of pasture suitable as nesting cover, a breakdown of the edge cover by widths, and determination of the average field size. A discussion of the qualities of the various cover types for pheasants will be included. Climatic Data. -- Precipitation for the April, 1966 through March, 1967 period ranged from about 20 to 23 inches on the experimental and control central township corners (Table 3). Precipitation averaged slightly higher on the experimental area. This was partially due to quality differences in record keeping by farmers on the two areas. Precipitation on both areas averaged we II above the approximate seventeen inch average annual rainfall of the region. Rainfall was below normal in April and May, 1966. Above average rainfall persisted from June through September, while the 1966-67 winter was almost void of precipitation. Infrequent snowfalls never accumulated in excess of two inches. A damaging August hailstorm hit only one small area on the Yuma County - Logan County line in the southwest corner of the control. The site was not discovered until two or three weeks later so area searches were not made. Torrential August cloudbursts flooded the west and southwe s t portions of the conrro L, Flood wa t ers from these ra ins moved eas t through the control area to accumu I.a te in intermittent lakes at the west edge of the sandhills. A considerable amount of the cover along the normally dry stream beds was destroyed or disturbed by the floods. Vegetative Growth Measurements. -- Excellent subsoil moisture, accumulated during the previous year, boosted wheat growth in April and May of 1966 (Table 4). This growth occurred despite deficiencies in spring ra infa 11. Wheat grow t h , stubble height and weed overstory comparisons for the four years of study are shown in Figure 2. Stubble height in 1966 appeared to have suffered from spring moisture deficiencies. Post-harvest weed growth varied considerably from field to field. In general it approximated that of previous years. Wheat harvest was started during the last week in June and peaked during the first week in July. Standing water in low areas, which had han~ered harvest in 1965, was not a factor in 1966. Summer roadside cover, as in 1965, was abundant and provided excellent cover for phe asant broods. Late summer and car ly fall mowi.ng reduced most of this abundant weed growth. �- 116 - Table 3. -- Inches of precipitation study areas -- 1966-1967. recorded on the experimental Township Month S.E. Corner N.W. S. W. and control Experimental N.E. Average Township 1966 April May June July August September October November December 1.35 0.26 5.15 4.46 4.83 3.18 .65 .23 .17 1.19 1.41 7.95 3.01 3.85 4.67 .35 .40 .18 1.45 .49 4.95 3.70 5.37 3.16 1.25 1.01 6.89 3.54 3.30 5.23 1967 January February March 1.34 .79 6.24 3.68 4.34 4.06 .50 .31 .17 .11 .20 .20 .17 Trace Trace Trace Trace .31 .30 23.51 .35 19.78 21.22 .32 21.92 1.70 1.07 5.27 6.32 4.16 2.39 .75 .16 .19 1.18 .71 4.68 4.66 5.09 2.19 .75 .16 .19 .24 .24 Trace Control Township 1966 April May June July August September October November December .16 .39 3.89 2.05 7.30 1.50 1.69 .67 4.88 5.60 3.80 2.68 2 OO~b'( 2. 24~',~'( 3. 52~'d, 0 1967 January February March Trace .28 15.29 * 19.32 Accurate Records not kept considered too unreliable ~·(·k Data 7.76 to use in average 22.53 .28 20.13 �- 117 - Table 4. -- Wheat growth, stubble height and weed overstory on the experimental and control area transects in 1966. Green Wheat Measurement Date Transect 4-26 4-15 5-5 5-16 6-4 5-25 measurements collected Stubble Weed Height Overstory September, 1966 E2."Per imenta 1 Area Transects 12 04 11.88 9.98 12.20 8.04 8.72 13.30 10.50 7 8 8.85 8.33 8.68 7.52 6.46 6.48 7.89 8.99 11.53 11.15 7.85 10.10 8.48 8.79 10.72 11.03 16.05 17 32 12.01 15.35 11.87 12034 14.63 14.71 23025 22.16 17.06 22.28 17.23 17.98 19.69 19.96 29.36 30.51 24.31 28.32 22.20 23.21 24.96 26.97 39.19 36.55 33.36 37.57 30.24 31.06 34.02 29.00 Mean 63.20 7.90 79.65 9.96 114.28 14.28 - - - - 159.61 19095 209.84 26.23 270.99 33.87 - - - - - - 1 2 3 4 5 6 - - - - - 0 - - - - - - - - - Control 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Sum He an 8.81 8.17 9.32 8.16 9.54 8.13 8.12 8.00 11.43 12.01 12.28 11.98 13.16 12.24 9.75 10.85 93,,70 11.71 17.06 16.57 17012 17.82 18.75 16.15 14.80 14.60 0 - - - 29 36 27027 22.15 21.89 25.73 26.62 19.76 28.46 0 201.24 25.16 - - - - - Area Transects 21035 20.72 190'44 21.71 22.27 22.39 19.47 20.18 24.58 25.41 21.24 24.19 22.56 24.81 23.65 28.99 29.70 28 38 22 01 28.21 29.47 27.98 26.61 27.81 195.43 24.43 220.17 27.52 0 0 7.88 10.50 8.02 8.76 8.66 9.42 9.00 7020 16.82 24.38 18.71 19 87 26.57 20.59 17.83 16.72 0 161049 20.19 Period of Stubble Plowing. -- Table 5 shows the progress of small grain s t ubb le plowing during the spring of 1966. The percentages indicate progress wa s nearly the same on both areas. A four year comparison is shown in Figure 3. It indicates p lowi.ng was started later than normal in 1966, but progress was more rapid than usual. Photo Hubs. -- Fall cover conditions were pictorially recorded at thirteen photo hub sites on the two study areas. The black and white photos were taken in mid-November. �30 28 26 24 :0::: ~ -----0.. 1965 _ 22 ~ (1) Hg~ ti 20 1'1.1 rt o ti CIl '< ~ 18. l:ti u e;------ .,.,~ 16 .,.,~ 1964 "} rt ;.J .c 14 f-' 00 I-J (I) 'M <1J rt 1965 ~ ~ 12 0' 0' I-' (1) l:ti 10 (1). ,..,. 1966 oq ::r 8 1963 1964 rt 6 4 2 0 15 25 April Figure 2. w. Gro'¥lth of \vinter I 5 I 15 25 May whe a t , whea t stubble control study areas. height, I 4 June and weed over s cory 14 height on the experimental and co �- 119 - 100 90 "., 80 "., "., ;' a 60 ./ ,. W ~ 0 ...J 1965 I 50 ./ , , .- ,p " , ,.;' " Exper" 1'964 ,, pP e 0.. ". ;' , , '" ,. " "., /' /' 70 "., ., ., .A'•• 40 1965 ExperQ t- ... " --1964 Control Z W u .. 30 0:: W o, "., ". / 20 10 0 24 26 28 1 3 Progress 9 11 May April Figo 3 7 5 of spring plowing of wheat stubble. 13 15 17 �- 120 - Table 5. -- The progress of stubble plowing ,on the experimental study areas -- Spring, 1966. EXEerimenta 1 Area Mileage Percent April Status Plowed Stubble In Progress Standing Stubble 11.50 8.35 46.85 66.70 17.5% 12.3 70.2 Plowed Stubble In Progress Standing Stubble 40.60 3.15 7.25 51.00 79.6% 6.2 14.2 Prepared by: Warren D. Snyder Wildl. Researcher AEril, Control Area Mileage Percent 26 and 27 8.30 2.65 26.10 37.05 22.5% 7.1 70.4 May 9 Asst. Date: and control 1967 Approved 27.80 1.90 4.65 34.35 by: 80.9% 5.5 13.6 Harold M. SwoEe Wildlife Researcher Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �- 121 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO --------~~~~--------Game Bird Survey Project No. W-37-R-20 Work Plan No. 1 Title of Job: Population Studies (Hen Harvest) Period Covered: April 1, 1966 through March 31, 1967 Personnel: Job No. l4d Harold M. Swope and Warren D. Snyder ABSTRACT Pheasant crowing indices averaged 67.6 and 41.9 on the experimental and control study areas. Respective ratios of hens to roosters were 2.38 and 2.32 on the two areas. On the experimental study area there were 5.06 young per hen. On the control area the young per hen ratio averaged 5.82. The 1966 pheasant hatch peaked in late June, but good production continued through July and August. Fall population indices of 1042.1 and 704.8 on the experimental and control areas respectively increased by 89 percent and 195 percent over 1965 figures. Pheasant crowing and sex ratio indices were above average for the four years of study, but reproductive success was the key to high fall population indices. �- 122 - Objectives: 1. To determine pre-treatment 2. To determine ing. changes 3. To determine causes of pheasant mortality pheasant population in pheasant populations Techniques: The Kimball crowing-count method, was used on three routes in each study area. levels within the study areas. following hen pheasant shoot- from factors other than hunting~ as revised in Colorado Early morning and late evening surveys were used to determine ing the spring breeding period. in 1953, sex ratios dur- Roadside brood counts were employed through August and into September. Hens, young and cocks were tallied on seven routes in each study area. The broods were flushed when pOSSible during early morning and late evening periods. Age estim8tes were collected on clearly observed broods. Pheasant popUlation indices were computed by applying the formula p = C + CH for spring populations and P = C+CH+CHY to derive fall indices. In these formulas C denotes the average crowing index, H is the average number of hens per cock from spring sex ratios, and Y is the average number of young per hen. �- 123 Population Studies Warren D. Snyder Crowing Counts -- Pheasant crowing indices climbed in 1966 following the 1965 low. Several factors are responsible for this increase. An above average late summer hatch in 1965 (Figure 5) was not reflected in the short season set by the Department. Abundant weed and stubble cover hampered both observers and hunters. Many hunters made only short and ineffectual h~~ting efforts, since they believed pheasant populations were quite low. The pheasants wintered well despite the prolonged January - February snow conditions. Pheasant crowing indices for 1966 are summarized in Table 6. Pheasants continued to be in greater abundance on the experimental area for the third successive year (Table 7). Drought conditions in 1965 led to pre-harvest plowing of many wheat fields in the control area. Nest destruction at that time probably was an important factor in the continued numerical difference between the two populations. Table 6 -- 1966 Pheasant Crowing Indices on the Six Hen Pheasant Harvest Study Routes. Crowing Routes Experimental Area Central East West East Control Area Central West 31.9 78.8 1+5·5 37·2 71.5 52·5 38.1 49.1 29·4 25·7 31.0 49.8 40.6 14.1 16.4 25·4 1~0.4 25.0 32.8 23·5 16.3 ~Q~~: 5~~Q 3~~7 ~Q~2 ~~~1 ~~~~_ 78.&x-* 73.8 50.1 50.0 40.1~ 35·3 ============================================================================== * ~- The average number of pheasant calls per station. 1~e average number of calls using the highest count per station. �- 124 - Table 7. -- A comparison experimental and control of the 1963 through study routes.* Area and Route 1963 Crowing 1964 Experimenta 1 East Central West 62.9 43.3 38.0 Average Control East Central West Average ?'( Highest crowing 1966 crowing count indices on the Indices 1965 1966 71.6 75.3 64.7 49.0 45.6 48.1 78.8 73.8 50.1 48.1 70.5 47.6 67.6 42.0 50.8 42.2 49.2 58.7 62.1 25.0 23.9 29.4 45.0 56.7 26.1 50.0 40.4 35.3 41.9 index per station figures were averaged. Sex Ratios. -- Sex ratios were markedly similar on the two study areas during the spring of 1966. Harem counts, which were used in past phases of this study, showed 2.38 hens per cock on the experimental study area and 2.32 hens per cock on the control area (Tables 8 & 9). As previously reported (Snyder, 1966) winter counts in January and February, 1966 showed approximately 3.5 hens per cock where birds w·ere found in large concentrations. Comparable counts of small concentrations revealed 2.1 hens per cock. Winter sex ratios were approximately the same on both study areas. Table 8. -- Pheasant of 1966. sex ratios on the hen harvest Experimental Cocks Observed Hens Observed Total Hens per Cock Miles Driven Birds per Mile study areas during the spring Area Control Area 140 333 473 2.38 193.3 2.44 Table 9. -- Comparative spring harem perimental and control study areas. Area 1963 Expe rimenta 1 Control 1.72 1.69 Experimental Control 1.69 1.68 indices 1964 112 260 372 2.32 179.9 2.06 from 1963 through 1965 Hens per Cock 2.23 2.24 1. 90 2.12 Pheasants per Mile 1.45 2.86 3.68 0.82 1966 on the ex- 1966 2.38 2.32 2.44 2.06 �- 125 - Brood Production. -- Pheasant brood production was the highlight of 1966 on the study areas. In over 1400 miles of brood counts and a sample in excess of 5000 pheasants (Table 10) over 5 young per hen were observed. Production was highest (5.82) on the control area. The index of pheasants observed per mile indicates the wide population differential between the two study areas continued. Table 10. --Pheasant brood count data collected study areas Summer, 1966. on the experimental and control -- Route Miles E-l N. Brd. E-2 E. Crow. E-3 SE Brd. E-4 Cent. Brd. E-5 Cent. Crow. E-6 w. Brd. E-7 W. Crow. Total Avera Average 104.8 96.8 107.0 103.2 91.3 105.4 98.5 707.0 Young Total Birds Experimental Group 219 40 83 422 76 391 63 288 184 41 72 374 224 40 2102 415 373 554 556 465 255 537 300 3040 Hens Young per Hen Birds per Mile Birds per Minute 5.48 5.08 5.14 4.71 4.49 5.14 5.60 3.56 5.72 5.20 4.51 2.78 5.09 3.06 0.93 1.25 1.16 1.03 0.72 1.15 0.72 5.06 4.30 1.01 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------C-l E. Brd. C-2 E Crow. C-3 N. Brd. C-4 Cent. Brd. C-5 Cent. Crow. C-6 W. Brd. C-7 W. Crow. 112.7 93.0 129.1 114.0 84.2 124.2 70.8 Control GrouE 46 284 188 34 157 29 36 191 26 148 410 66 205 35 Total Average 728.0 272 389 237 200 319 195 554 253 1583 2147 6.17 5.53 5.44 5.31 5.69 6.21 5.86 3.45 2.55 1 55 2.80 2.32 4.46 3.57 0.90 0.66 0.45 0.68 0 59 1.08 0.86 5 82 2.95 0.77 0 0 0 Table 11 compares the 1966 production data with that of the three previous years. Both the above mentioned indices are markedly above those obtained in preceeding years of study. Table 11. -- Pheasant brood production experimental and control study areas. Area Experimenta 1 Control Experimenta 1 Control during 1964 Young Eer Hen 2.53 4.17 2.64 3.65 Pheasants Eer Mile 2.11 2.22 1.23 0.21 1963 the four years of study on the 1965 1966 3.83 3.46 5.06 5.82 1.72 0.80 4.30 2.95 �30 25 I " "0 I Q) .r:: o +.J I I I 20 tIl "0 j:Q I I 15 1963 4-! +.J 1-1 Q) p... .\ I \ I I I o s:: Q) o "\ , , ~ o o1-1 "- \ I ,: .\ I I 10 : I I I / 1966 ,. ,/ ,, 1 1965 )' ~. ~• o 2 May 3 4 1 , \ I / .••.. I-' f\) ... ..•. '\.. '\ ' .. , / \ \ \ .••.. I ..........• '.'\ ~ \ I 5 ... .• \ --.J " ,, .•.• \ \ 2 3 June 4 1 -' 3 2 July 4 1 3 2 August Approximate Weekly Period of Hatch Figure 5. -- Approximate hatching dates of pheasant broods from 1963 through 1966. 4 1 September �- 128 - 1100 1000 900 800 ~ 700 / <!l 'U / I:l H I:l 0 -.-I ./.J 500 .-It1j ;:l c, 0 r:4 .-I .-I t1j ~ / 600 400 / -- 300 -- -- - / / ....... / / '" '" / / '" '" / Control '" ~ / / 'v 200 100 0 1963 1964 1965 1966 Year Figure 6. -- Fall population indices on the experimental and control study areas from 1963 through 1966. �- 129 - Brood age estimates were used to obtain estimated hatching dates. Results for 1966 are illustrated in Figure 4. Experimental and control area data were combined for each of the four years to show annual differences in the period and peak of hatch (Figure 5). As previously explained, compilation of the crowing count, sex ratio and brood production figures into a signle fall population index is achieved by the formula P = C + CH + CRY. Table 12 shows the fall population indices for the two study areas during 1966. Figure 6 illustrates the four year comparison of these figures. Table 12. -- Spring and Fall population and control areas - 1966. indices of pheasants in the experimental Area Average Crowing Index Hens per Cock Young per Hen Spring Pop. Index Fall Pop. Index Experimental East. Rte. Cent. Rte. West Rte. Tota 1 Exper. 78.8 73.8 50.1 67.6 2.38 2.38 2.38 2 38 5.08 4.49 5.60 266.3 249.0 169.3 228.5 1178.8 1076.1 836.8 1042.1 0 5. 06~'c ------------------------------------~---------------------------------------- Control East Rte. Cent. Rte. West Rte. Total Control * The average 50.0 40.4 35.3 41.9 2.32 2.32 2.32 2.32 of seven routes conducted 5.53 5.69 5.86 5.82* 166.0 134.1 111.2 139.1 807.4 667.3 593.9 704.8 on each study area. References Snyder, W. D. 1966. Pheasant population studies (Effects of hen harvest). p. 15-21. Colo. Dept. of Game, Fish and Parks. Game Research Report. April, 1966. Prepared Date: by: Warren D. Snyder Asst. Wildl. Researcher April , 1967 Approved by: Harold M. Swope Wildlife Researcher Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator ��April, 1967 - 131 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO ------------------------- Project No. Work Plan Game Bird Survey W-37-R-20 1 ------------------------ Job No. 14e Title of Job: Formulation of Hunting Regulations and Harvest Survey Period Covered: April 1, 1966 through March 31, 1967 Personnel: Harold M. Swope, Wayne L. Russell, Francis L. Waugh, Warren D. Snyder ABSTRACT Opening weekend hunting pressure increased approximately 34 percent on the control and 46 percent on the experimental area over the 1963 base year figures. Hunting pressure during subsequent periods of the season was slightly higher than in the previous year. Only about 4 percent of the land was posted against hunting along the three study transects. Posting of land had not changed to any significant degree during the four years of study. �- 132 - Objectives: 1. To establish the exact number of hen permits mental area and to issue these permits. 2. To submit recommendations for the general hunting regulations within the experimental and c6ntro1 areas, including bag limits, length of season and shooting hours. 3. To collect to be issued within the experi- harvest data on hens and cocks from hunters within the study areas. Techniques Used: Since an experimental hen season was not held in 1966 there was no need to establish the number of permits and to issue them. General hunting regulations were recommended in 1966. Aerial hunting pressure surveys were flown during the opening afternoon of pheasant season. These covered 174 square miles along established transects in each study area. Observations of hunting pressure were continued on varied weekday and weekend periods through the remainder of the season. Usually they were recorded while conducting other field studies. Land posting surveys were completed on three crowing routes in the experimental area. Adjacent land was re·corded as unposted, posted "hunting by permission" or posted "no hunting." �- 133 Formulation of Hunting Regulations and Harvest Survey Warren D. Snyder Hunting Pressure Surveys -- A fifty day season, November 12 to December 31, 1966 was partially responsible for a ma.ior increase in opening weekend hunting pressure. Table 13 compares the 1966 opening day hunting pressure with that of the three previous years. Transect pressure in 1966 increased over that of 1963 by 34 percent on the control and 46 percent on the experimental area. Table 13 -- Opening day pheasant hunting pressure, 1963 - 1966. Year 1963 1964 1965 1966 Number of Cars Observed Control Area Experimental Area 197 221 207 265 199 184 196 291 ============================================================================= Table 14 compares opening weekend hunting pressure with that on subsequent weekday and weekend periods in 1965 and 1966. Figures for the opening weekend include all vehicles away from farmyards. Some of the hunters undoubtedly parked their vehicles at farmyards and hunted in large groups on the opening weekend, but not all the vehicles in the field were those of hunters. It is assumed in Table 14 that the total vehicles in the field approximated the number of hunting parties. The factor of time is also not included in Table 14. Aerial transects were conducted during an approximate two hour period. The 549 miles of weekday transect in 1965 were completed in approximately 40 hours. It was assumed that one section of land was observed for every mile traveled. These counts were not made on prescribed routes. Despite these irregularities Table 14 provides a general comparison of hunting pressure difference between the opening weekend and subsequent periods. �- 134 - Table 14. -- A general comparison periods in 1965 and 1966. of hunting pressure Sguare Miles 1965 1966 Period on weekday and weekend Miles Eer Hunting Party 1965 1966 Opening Weekend* Exper. Area Cont , Area 174 174 174 174 1.53 1.42 1.22 0.99 2nd Weekendi(")(o 80 140 8.00 6.36' 3rd Weekend 148 4th Weekend Weekday 11038 62 Periods * Aerial Transects *,(0Ground Observations 541 10.33 651 42.23 23.25 after opening weekend. Land Posting. -- Approximately 84 percent of the land along the three experimental area transects remained unposted in 1966. Only 4 percent was posted against hunting. The remaining 12 percent was posted "hunting by permission." These percentages compare closely with those obtained in the three preceding years. General observations indicated land near towns was posted to a higher degree than land in more distal portions of the study region. Prepared Date: by: Warren D. Sn~y~d_e_r _ Asst. Wi1dl. Researcher April, 1967 Approved by: Harold M. SwoEe Wildlife Researcher Ferd C. K1einschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �April, 1967 - 135 JOB COMPLET!ON REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO --------~==~~--------- Project No. W-37-R-20 Work Plan 1 Title of Job: Period Covered: Personnel: Game Bird Survey Job No. 16 Pheasant Nest Site Selection Study April 1, 1966 to March 31, 1967 Lawrence A. Webster, Robert L. Schmidt, Warren D. Snyder, Harold M. Swope ABSTRACT Plans to stock the nest site enclosures with pheasants during February and March, 1966, had to be postponed because of the lack of residual vegetation to serve as cover. Vegetation in the 48 test plots y~s well established during the 1966 growing season. Supplemental irrigation (aerial) was applied once during the dry spring period and twice in the fall to insure survival and establishment of vegetation being tested. Ten hens and two cocks were placed in each of the four enclosures during February and March, 1967. These birds were trapped in the Holyoke Julesburg area. They were wing-clipped and banded prior to release in the nest site enclosures. �- 136 - Objectives: 1. To stock experimental enclosures with pheasants. 2. To determine the vegetative type preferred 3. To determine the vegetative qualities by nesting pheasants. preferred by nesting pheasants. Procedures: 1. Pheasants were live-trapped in the dry farmed areas of extreme northeastern Colorado. It was originally intended that pheasants would be captured by: (1) bait traps; (2) cannon nets; (3) semi-permanent drive traps in baited areas; (4) mist nets. By mid-February, however, the snow required to make baiting effective had not materialized. Baiting efforts proved to be fruitless. Mist nets were apparently seen and avoided. Night spot-lighting was tried but the birds were too wary and would not hold. Several hundred feet of discarded netting was obtained from the fish salvage section. Though our problems were far from over this netting was effectively used to catch pheasants. Initially the netting was used to form wings, with a large bag at the apex of the V. The entrance to the catch bag was tediously camouflaged. A few birds were caught in this manner but too much time was consumed erecting and dismantling traps. Efforts persisted, with modifications made in each set up, until the nets were strung out flat over good wheat stubble or weed cover. The back edges of the nets were weighted down by steel fence posts and heavy chains. Drives were often started a half mile from the nets with the pace greatly accelerated during the last quarter mile. Three birds were the most caught in anyone drive but using this technique permitted many sets to be made each day, Toward the end of the trapping period a group of pheasants finally started coming into a baited area on the Sand Draw. Nine hens were captured with a cannon net at this site, which had been baited for two months, in one shot. This re-affirmed original confidence in the cannon net. Forty- four hens and 21 roosters were captured. One hen wa s killed during the trapping operations and three were held to replace losses that might Occur during the study. The remaining 40 hens were banded, wing-clipped and evenly distributed in the four nesting plot enclosures. Two roosters were also banded, wing-clipped and placed in each enclosure. Four cocks were retained as replacements and the rest released at trap sites. The last birds were placed in the nest site enclosures on March 17. Initial plans to braile or pinion birds were not carried out because of possible physiological shock close to the nesting season. The clipping of the primary feathers on one wing will necessitate recapture of the birds prior to completion of the next moult, but it is anticipated that some of the hens will be brailed at that time. 2. Tower observations and nest searches will be conducted during the next segment to determine the vegetative types selected by pheasant hens. 3. Vegetative heights and density measurements during the next segment. will be taken at each nest site �- 137 Pheasant Nest Site Selection Study Harold M. Swope Due to the lack of residual vegetation during the early spring of 1966 (the plots were seeded during that spring) it was decided not to stock the enclosure with pheasants. Vegetation was adequate for nesting by the latter part of ,May but the birds would have been confined with no vegetative cover for several months prior to that time. This delay in placing pheasants in the enclosure will postpone nest searches until the late spring and early summer of 1967. Not until that time will it be possible to pursue the second and third objectives established for this segment of the study. The first objective was accomplished by the release of 48 wing clipped pheasants in the experimental nest site selection enclosure. Ten hen and two cock pheasants were placed in each of the four quadrats. Table 1 su~rizes the band numbers and release dates of the individual birds by quadrats. The initial release was made February and the final one on March 17, 1967. Table 1. -- Release dates and band nu~bers site selection enclosure quadrats. Quadrat Release Date of pheasants placed in the four nest Band Number Sex Southwest 2-18-67 2-18-67 2-18-67 2-18-67 2-25-67 2-25-67 2-25-67 2-25-67 2-25-67 2-25-67 2-25-67 2-25-67 201 212 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 M M F F F F F F F F F F Northwest 2-25-67 2-25-67 2-25-67 3-3-67 3-3-67 3-3-67 3-3-67 3-3-67 3-3-67 3-3-67 3-3-67 3-3-67 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 M M F F F F F F F F F F �- 138 - Table 1. -- Release dates and band numbers of pheasants placed in the four nest site selection enclosure quadrats (continued). Quadrat Release Date Band Number Sex Southeast 2-25-67 3-3-67 3-3-67 3-10-67 3-10-67 3-10-67 3-10-67 3-10-67 3-10-67 3-10-67 3-10-67 3-10-67 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 M M 3-3-67 3-3-67 3-10-67 3-10-67 3-10-67 3-10-67 3-10-67 3-17-67 3-17-67 3-17-67 3-17-67 3-17-67 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 Northeast F F F F F F F F F F M M F F F F F F F F F F For several weeks following release the birds were observed to 'work' along the fences. As the vegetation in the plots began to green up there was evidence the pheasants might curtail this fence line activity. Due to an extremely dry March and April (1966) aerial irrigation was applied once to the plots in April. Two water applications were made in the fall to help establish newly seeded wheat and clover. It is anticipated that there will be no more irrigation of these plots unless it is necessary to prevent loss of the established vegetation. Prepared by: Date: Harold M. Swope Wildlife Researcher April , 1967 Approved by: Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief Ferd C. K1einschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �- 139 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO --------~~~------------ Project No. W-37-R-20 Work Plan No. 4 Game Bird Survey Job No. 12 Title of Job: SUmmarization and Publication of Chukar Partridge Research Findings Period Covered: Personnel: April 1, 1966 to March 31, 1967 Wayne W. Sandfort Objectives -- To summarize and publish the results of all past work done on the species in Colorado. Procedures -- Findings obtained under Work Plan 4, Jobs 1 through 11 in Project W~37-R, data from chukar partridge investigations conducted by other projects, individuals or organizations, and miscellaneous information pertinent to chukar management and research in Colorado are being assembled and analyzed for inclusion in a final manuscript. A detailed for mat and outline for the report has been prepared. Findings -- Work is progressing on this publication and plans continue to stand for preparation of comprehensive publication on this species. Substantial progress on the final manuscript is hoped for during Segment 21 of this project. Prepared by: Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief Date April, 1967 Approved by: Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator ��- 141 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO ------~~~~--------- Project No. W-37-R-20 Work Plan No. 6 Title of.Job: Game Bird Survey Job No. 4 Summarization of Experimental Habitat Improvement Studies Period Covered: April 1, 1966 to March 31, 1967 Personnel: Warren D. Snyder and Robert L. Hoover Bids for publication of this manuscript were let during the work segment and a low bid was obtained. Technical editing was begun by Robert L. Hoover. Assistance was provided by Warren D. Snyder. Publication should be forthcoming in the near future. Objective -- To publish research findings on past experimental habitat improvement for scaled quail studies (Work Plan 6, Job 1). Procedure -- Technical Bulletin Publication. A thorough summarization has been made of the objectives, conditions, procedures, results, conclusions and recommendations covering parts 1 through 4 of Work Plan 6, Job 1 for a technical bulletin publication. Prepared by: Warren D. Snyder Wildlife Researcher Date April, 1967 Approved by: Harold M. Swope Wildlife Researcher Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator ��April, 1967 - 143 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO Project No. W-37-R-20 Work Plan No. 8 Title of Job: Period Covered: Personnel: Game Bird Survey Job No. 5 Lesser Prairie Chicken Adaptability April 1, 1966 to March 31, 1967 ponald M. Hoffman ABSTRACT Two sites in Baca County including an area approximately fourteen airline miles southwest of Pritchett, Colorado, and an area approximately twelve airline miles southeast of Springfield, Colorado, were inspected as possible lesser prairie chicken release sites during this reporting period. Both of these sites are historical ranges for the species and both hold definite possibility as future ranges. The site located twelve miles southeast of Springfield, Colorado, is the larger of the two sites reported. For this reason, it is ranked above the site fourteen miles southwest of Pritchett, Colorado, as a future transplant site location if birds for release become available. Final ranking of potential release areas will be made following the inspection of two additional sites. �- 144 INTRODUCTION This study was initiated when it appeared that lesser pralrle chicken transplanting stock would be secured in exchange for Colorado antelope through a wildlife trade agreement with the state of Kansas. Preliminary site inspections made in mapping scaled quail range under previously completed studies indicated there are extensive areas of high quality sand sagebrush - grasslands in southeastern Colorado which hold definite possibilities for the restoration of the lesser prairie chicken. Habitat requirements of the lesser prairie chicken and characteristics of occupied ranges in Colorado are described within the Job Completion Report for Work Plan 8, Job 1, October, 1959. It is planned to inspect two more proposed sites including one in Pueblo County and one in Lincoln County during the next segment. The final ranking of all sites inspected will be made after these inspections. OBJECTIVE To re-establish lesser prairie chickens in historical ranges within southeastern Colorado. 1. To select sites for release of stock. 2. To determine success of introductions. TECHNIQUES 1. Selection of release sites. -This includes comparisons of characteristics of proposed sites with habitat supporting populations of the species. Comparisons include: a. Location and general features. b. Vegetative types. c. Size of area. d. Land ownership. e. Soil type. f. Climate. g. Water sources. h. Terrain. 2. Success of introduction. The conduct of this portion of the study will depend upon securing transplant stock for release through wildlife trade agreements with other states. a. Conduct periodic census of release sites during spring periods using standard prairie chicken census procedures. b. Secure reports of birds observed by landowners, Federal land-use personnel and others. c. Evaluate the degree of success attained. �- 145 Lesser Prairie Chicken Adaptab:i.lity Donald M. Hoffman Location and general featu:J;~~ .• -- Occupied range located southeast and southwest of Campo, Colorado, the nearest to the two sites inspected during this reportingperiod~ varies in elevation from 3500 feet along the CinrrnaronRiver to 1~300 feet at the western limits. The extent of sand sagebrush .-grassland communities and occupied lesser prairie chicken range in Colorado during 1962 is shown in Figure 3, Journ~, of Hils!.1ife Managemen..!:., Vol. 27, No.4, Oct., 1963, p. 730. Refer to Table 1 for description of site locations. Other upland game bird species found within occupied include scaled quail, bobwhf t;e quail, and pheasants. A v Lew of the occupied range south of the Cimmaron lesser prairie chicken range River is shown in Figure 1. ~_tativ~lJ~ .• -- Sand sagebrush - grassland primarily with dense sand sagebrush; yucca; various grasses including bluestems, sideoats grama, blue grama, and sand lovegrass; and various weeds including sunflower, evening starflower, and Russian thistle. Dryland cultivated fields are interspersed with the sand sagebrush - grassland areas and add to the. habitat in providing winter feed for the species o Size..£:fare~. -.-An extensive area of occupied range cons i srr.ng of sand sagebrush grassland vegetative types and bordering dryland cultivated fields approximates 10 miles in width and 36 miles in length or approximately 360 square miles in extent 0 Land o1;·mership.--.Extensive areas of Federally administered land w i t h i n the Comanche National Grasslands of the San Isabel National Forest are found along with scattered areas of privately owned lands. Soil .. !:..lpes Deep sandy soils for the most part, although soils are scattered throughout the range. o -- small areas of tighter Climate. _..The nearest weather station to the occupied lesser pr.ai.r i.e chicken range described is Springfield, Colorado, which is approximately 22 miles north of the closest known display ground. Table 2 lists precipitation for the period 1951 - 1960 for Springfield and other stations referred to within this report. Table 3 lists temperatures for these same stations. �Table 1. -- Locations Site Number County I Baca of proposed transplanting sites 11 Location Location relative Climatological to nearest Station USFS Comanche National Grasslands, 14 miles southwest of Pritchett, Colorado. Specific release site location is in Section 36, T32S, R50W or one-eighth mile south of Lloyd Lair farm headquarters. 24 miles southwest of Springfield, Colorado f-' +"" 0'\ 2 Baca USFS Comanche National Grasslands, 12 miles southeast of Springfield, Colorado. Specific release site location is in Sec. 4, T32S, R46W or four miles due east of USFS Project Headquarters. 12 miles southeast of Springfield, Colorado 3 Lincoln Big Sandy Creek area seven miles due south of Hugo, Colorado in Section 4&5, 8&9, Tl2S, R54W. 22 miles southeast of Limon, Colorado of 4 Pueblo Three miles northeast 26, Tl9S, R62W. 17 miles northeast Pueblo, Colorado of 1/ of Thatcher Ranch in Section Established lesser prairie chicken display grounds during 1962 were found in locations five miles southeast Holly, Colorado in Pr owe r s County and twenty-two miles southeast of Springfield, Colorado in Baca County. of �- 147 - Figure 1 -- Occupied lesser pra1r1e chicken range in southeastern Baca County, Colorado. Sand sagebrush - grassland plant community in late spring period. (D. Hoffman, photo) �Table 2. -- Precipitation -- ten year period, 1951-1960 1/ E1ev. Total Snowfall Jan. Feb. Mar. Apr. May June July Aug. Sept. Oct. Nov. Dec. Annual Holly 3393 20.2 .57 .34 .73 .97 2.65 1.73 1.68 2.10 .94 082 .52 .34 13039 Springfield 4400 17.4 .37 035 .90 1.27 2.68 1.25 2.39 1.92 .59 .80 .52 .28 13.32 A.VERAGE 3896 18.8 .47 .35 .82 1.12 2.67 1.49 2~O4 2.01 .77 081 .52 .31 l3.36 ~ Station CP- Lamar 3635 25.7 .58 .41 078 1.19 2.41 1.81 1.79 2.17 .90 .75 .61 .30 l3.70 I Limon 3360 27.1 .28 .25 060 1.11 2.23 1.61 2.43 1.98 .77 .80 .40 .18 12.64 Pueblo 4639 32.6 .25 .23 047 1.18 2.36 .83 1.50 1.52 .62 .94 .49 .21 10.60 11 From U. S. Department of Commerce, Weather Bureau, 1964. �Table 3. -- Temperatures. 1/ - }lar. min. mean ~ min. mean max , Feb. min. mean ma x , ma x, Holly (10 yrs-mean) (9 yrs-min&max) 16.6 31.5 46.4 20.6 35.4 50.2 Springfield (10 yr s -rne an) (8 yrs-min.&max) 16.7 33.0 49.3 AVERAGE 16.7 32.3 47.9 Station & number years data Jan. min. mean June mino mean maxo July min. mean ma x, Nay min. mean max. 26.3 41.1 55.9 37.9 53 3 68.5 49.6 64,1 78.5 20.1 35,8 51.6 2Lf.2 39.8 56.0 34.8 5101 67.3 20.4 35.6 50.9 25.3 40.5 56.0 36.4 52.2 67.9 0 Se]2t. min •. mean Oct. min. mean ma x, Aug. min. mean max, ma x, 60.4 75.7 90.9 64.0 79,5 94.9 62.9 78.2 93.4 45.1 60.6 76.0 55.7 72.2 88.7 60.3 76.2 92.0 47.4 62.4 77.3 58 1 74.0 89.8 62.2 77.9 93.5 0 Dec. min. mean Annual min. mean ma x , Nov. min. mean max. max , max , 52.5 69.6 86.6 39.0 56.2 73.1 24.7 41.2 57.5 18.6 33.5 48.3 39.4 54.9 70.4 59.4 75.1 90.8 49.8 67.7 85.5 38.1 55.3 72.8 24.0 40.8 57.6 18.0 34.6 51.2 37.2 53.5 69.9 61.2 76.7 92.1 51.2 68.7 86.1 38.5 55.8 73.0 24.4 41.0 57.6 18.3 34.1 49.8 38.3 54.2 70.2 I-" -F Lamar (10 yrs) 13.6 29.6 45.6 18.5 34.1 49.6 24.0 39.7 55.2 35.8 51.4 67.0 47.8 . 62.4 77 .0 58.6 73.8 88.9 63.1 78.2 93.3 62.0 76.8 91. 5 51.1 67.8 84.4 37.7 54.9 72.1 22.7 39.3 55.8 16.9 32.6 48.3 37.7 53.4 69.1 Limon (10 yrs) 11.0 27.0 43.0 14.4 29.8 45.2 18.5 33.5 48.4 29.1 43.9 58.8 40.8 55.1 69.3 50.4 65.9 81.5 55.0 70.7 86.4 54.1 69.5 84.9 43.3 60.7 78.1 32.2 49.1 65.9 18.8 34.7 50.6 13.6 29.4 45.3 31.8 47.4 63.1 Pueblo (35 yrs) 15.9 30.7 45.5 19.2 33.8 48.3 26.2 40.7 55.2 36.1 50.5 64.9 45.9 59.8 73.7 54.9 69.8 84.7 60.5 75.1 89.6 59.1 73.4 87.7 50.0 65.3 80.5 37.5 53.3 69.1 24.9 40.3 55.7 17.4 32.3 47.1 37.3 52.1 66.8 1./ From U. S. Department of Commerce, Heather Bureau, 1964 and 1965. \0 �- 150 - Water sources. -- Stock wells are scattered throughout the area and a number of guzzlers have been installed in recent years in a cooperative effort to improve upland game bird habitat by the U. S. Forest Service and the Colorado Game , . Fish, and Parks Department. Terrain. -- The terrain varies brush hills. Sites proposed from relatively as lesser prairie flat to gently rolling sand sage- chicken range Four sites have been proposed as possible lesser prairie chicken release sites. These are listed in Table 1. Of these four, two were inspected during the present reporting period and are discussed separately below. It is planned to inspect the remaining two during the next segment. SITE NUMBER 1 Location and general features. -- A site within the Comanche National Grasslands consisting primarily of Pastures SA, 5D, 5E, 5G, and l2A located approximately 11 miles south and 7 miles west, or 14 airline miles southwest, of .the town of Pritchett, Colorado, in Baca County is shown in Figure 2. The elevation of the proposed release site is approximately 5100 feet. Local residents have reported lesser prairie chicken flocks of several hundred birds within this general area in earlier days; however, no birds are found in the area at the present time. Scaled quail, bobwhite quail, and pheasants are common upland game bird species found within the area. Vegetative type. -- Sand sagebrush - grassland primarily with some areas of blue grama and buffalo grass whe re soils are tighter. Figure 3 shows the general vegetative compositions for much of the area. Dryland farmlands are scattered around the proposed site, particularly to the north, east, and south. The sand sagebrush - grassland type gives way to a dense cholla cactus - yucca - grassland to the west where soils are tighter. A l60-acre tract directly south of the Lloyd Lair farm headquarters has been an old field which was planted to tree and shrub species during the CCC days of the 1930's. This area has been developed as upland game bird habitat in recent years by U. S. Forest Service personnel. Chinese elm, cottonwoods, Russian olive, black locust, junipers, sand cherry, yucca and tree cactus mostly in shelterbelt form are found in the tract. The tract has not been pastured for several years and sand sagebrush; weed species; grasses as blue grama, sand lovegrass, and side-oats grama form a dense ground cover. Figure 4 shows a view of this shelterbelt tract. Size of area. -- Cover type maps made while mapping scaled quail range show that a block of sand sagebrush - grassland and surrounding dryland cultivated lands consists of approximately 10 square miles. The size of the area is thought to be large enough for survival and increase of lesser prairie chickens. Land ownership. -- Approximately 11 square miles are U. S. Forest Service administered grazing tracts and 18 square miles are privately owned lands. �- 151 - II .' / "II .5 20 30 II II z; ::===== S5 •.. \..... = == == == == ~:}--------1 56 51 .~~ 11 II II II I • o " 12 e " 4' 6 • o IS II> o 0 " •• • •• 2' '0 T.32 S. "0 '5 (!) to 10 " SCALE o OF MILES 112 =='• 1953 Figure 2. -- Location of site southwest of Pritchett, as lesser prairie chicken range. Colorado which was inspected �- 152 - Figure 3. -- Sand sagebrush-grassland plant community within the site located southwest of Pritchett, Colorado in Baca County. Summer, 1966. (D. Hoffman, photo) Figure 4. -- She1terbe1t tree planting located one-half mile north of Figure 3 photograph. Summer, 1966. (D. Hoffman, photo) �- 153 - Soil tyPes. blow areas. Deep sandy soils for the most part were noted with several sand A few small patches of rather tight soil were also noted. Climate. -- The site is approximately 22 miles northwest of the nearest known lesser prairie chicken display ground at a slightly higher elevation; so the climate is probably quite comparable to that of occupied range. The nearest weather station to this site is Springfield, Colorado, which is approximately 24 miles to the northeast (Table 1). Water sources. -- Permanent water is found at a guzzler within the 160 acre shelterbelt tract described under vegetative types. In addition, several stock water wells are scattered throughout the pastures which are stocked during various periods of the year. Terrain. hills. The terrain varies from relatively flat to rolling sand sagebrush Summary and recommendation. -- This area compares favorably with occupied habitat in Colorado and should support lesser prairie chickens if restocked. One potential drawback is the small size of the area, but this is not thought to be a serious factor. A transplant of birds is recommended within stock for this purpose becomes available. SITE NUMBER the shelterbelt tract if and when 2 Location and general features. -- A site within the Comanche National Grasslands consisting primarily of Pastures l3B, 13E, 13F, and 13H located approximately 8 miles south and 4 miles east, or 12 airline miles southeast, of the t own of Springfield in Baca County along the Sand Arroya drainage is shown in Figure 5. The elevation of the proposed release site is approximately 4300 feet. The area is historical lesser pralrle chicken range and it is pOSSible that a very small remnant population of lesser prairie chickens still exists in the area based upon past sightings by D. S. Forest Service personnel. Early morning listening checks were made in the area by the ~riter without success in locating resident birds. Pheasants and scaled quail are the common upland game bird species found within the general area. Vegetative type. -- Sand sagebrush - grassland primarily with yucca and various weeds as sunflowers, Russian thistle, and evening starflower; and various grasses as sand dropseed and side-oats grama. Dryland farmlands largely border the areas of sand sagebrush - grassland. Figure 6 shows a view of the sand sagebrush grassland type. An old cultivated field within Pasture 13F located on the south border of the proposed release area has been reseeded to taller grass species such as bluestems. This area should benefit lesser prairie chickens in providing nesting cover. Figure 7 shows a v i cw of this reseeded area. Sand blow areas arc rather common w i t h i.n the Sand Arroya area , These are caused by Hind erosion combined with deep sandy soils. Figure 8 shows a v Lew of one of theRe sand blow areas. �- 154 - , , :.-. I.~~~ po' i ~ V [\ ). p- '-- :. 9.2.) ____:= ====L:S===\j ~~~A;07. \ s 70 WALSH • • 10 17 : " •• " 11 II • 10 12: " 7 (/ ,:.r--' .----.,.-~ ~ lf~ 10 8 9 == =->: .. - " I H I~ I• .., •.. UJ UJ J: (f) >•.. Z :J o o <{ o <{ ID I N I , T.32";' , 1 I· 2. 27 Ii • 33 II ''"" II. II II II :: 30 25 28 :: 29· 27 28 •• j I J: • SHEET I = = : == =::,~JL = == ==:{l--,,-----+-----4If----+---j • 33 3. --.JL-_-!.~ __ .J.!I.:..-_ _/1..__ 3. m .....1__,_.1:<_ I 2' II H. '" I· II II II II . 3. 30 _':-'- .- COUNTY BACA SCALE OF MILES __ 21 1953 Figure 5. -- Location of site southeast of Springfield, spected as lesser prairie chicken range. Colorado which was in- �- 155 - Figure 6. -- Sand sagebrushgrassland plant community located southeast of Springfield, Colorado in Baca County. Sand sagebrush is in dormant condition. Jan., 1967. (D. Hoffman, photo) Figure 7. -- Reseeded bluestem grasses in a site located one-half mile south of Figure 6 photograph. Jan., 1967. (D. Hoffman, photo) Figure 8. -- Sand blow area located near the Figure 6 photograph. These are found within many of the occupied and formerly occupied ranges in Colorado. Jan., 1967. (D. Hoffman, photo) �- 156 Size of area. -- The main area approximates eight miles long by four miles wide along Sand Arroya, or about 32 square miles in size. This vegetative type also extends to the west and to the northeast of the main area but these blocks not included in these calculations. The size of the area is thought of lesser prairie chickens. to be adequate to support a sizeable population Land ownership. -- The main area is largely Federally lands border the Federal lands. owned, although private Soil type. -- Deep sandy soils for the most part with several sand blow areas were noted. A few small patches of rather tight soil were noted. Climate. -- The site is located approximately twenty miles northwest of occupied lesser prairie chicken range southeast of the town of Campo, Colorado, and at approximately the same elevation; so the climate is thought to be comparable to that of occupied range. The nearest weather station to this site is Springfield, Colorado, which is twelve miles to the northwest of the proposed release site (Table 1.). Water sources. -- A few stock wells are located throughout the area. The installation of a series of guzzlers which has been proposed by Federal personnel would probably benefit all upland game bird species if and when the area is restocked to provide more permanent water. Terrain. -- The terrain varies from relatively flat to rolling sand sagebrush hills. The aspect is much the same as found within occupied ranges southeast and southwest of Campo, Colorado. Summary and recommendations. -- This area. as well as Site Number 1, appears to hold definite possibility for rest@cking lesser prairie chickens. A transplant of birds is recommended if and when stock for this purpose becomes available. Of the two sites inspected, this area should hold preference because of its larger size. Prepared Date: by: Donald M. Hoffman Wildlife Researcher April, 1967 Approved by: Wayne W. Sand fort Game Research Chief Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �April, 1967 - 157 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO --------~~~~---- Project No. W-37-R-20 Work Plan No. 10 Game Bird Survey Job No. Title of Job: Hungarian Partridge Adaptability Period Covered: April 1, 1966 to March 31, 1967 Personnel: 1 Harold M. Swope, Harry Dobbs, Bill Roland, Charlie Brown. ABSTRACT No sigbtings of Hungarian partridges have been reported in tbe Douglas Lake area, nortb of Fort Collins, during tbe past year. Several unconfirmed Hun sigbtings were reported from tbe Craig area. A landowner questionnaire va s scnt to 41 persons in tbe release vicinity. Seven of tbe 24 wbo responded claimed to have seen Hungarian partridge during 1966. Thougb 192 Huns were reported it is likely tbat some of these birds wer-e chukar partridge or sharp-tailed grouse. Personal contacts ,..rill be ma,de ,OJi tb those reporting Hun observations. �- 158 - Reco~nendations: To give these birds a fair chance for establishment 300 to 500 should be released in the Craig area for each of the next three years (1968-70). If Huns are available for release in these numbers more intensive follow-up efforts should be made. Attempted establishment in other areas should depend upon the success in Moffat County. Objectives: To deternune the success of Hungarian partridge introductions in the State. Procedures: Wildlife Conservation Officers and ranchers in the vicinities of the release sites have been asked (through newspaper articles and personal contact) to be on the lookout for Huns and to record number, location and observation date. These persons were interviewed by a mailed questiom1aire (some by personal contact) to check on the results of their observations. �- 159 - Hungarian Partridge Adaptability Harold M. Swope Findings: Contacts with landowners, ditch riders and Game, Fish and Parks Department personnel working in the Douglas Lake area have failed to reveal any Hungarian partridge sightings during 1966. Complete attention has since been focused on releases made in the Craig area. A recap of release records in the Craig vicinity shows that 40 wild-trapped Huns from Idaho were liberated on March 28, 1964. On March 23, 1965, 124 penraised Huns from Oregon were released. When it is realized that several thousand square miles of homogeneous range surrounds the release sites an appreciation may be gained of the difficultieis involved in relocating a handfull of birds. Very minimal efforts were made to run roadside transects in the area because of the apparent futility of employing such methods. After hearing unconfirmed reports that several nearby ranchers had seen Huns it "(vasdecided to mail questionnaires to a sample of area landowners. The names of 41 major landowners within 8 miles of the release sites W'~re obtained from the County Assessors office in Craig. A questionnaire was sent to each with a personal letter ex-plaining our efforts with Hungarian partridge. A self-addressed, postage prepaid envelope was also enclosed. A sample copy of the questionnaire and personal letter is included with this report. Twenty-four of the 41 questionnaires were returned. Seven of those responding allegedly observed Huns during 1966. Though 192 Huns were reported it is likely that some of these birds were chukar partridge or sharp-tailed grouse. Table 1 itemizes the response to the Hun questionnaire. Table 1. -- Landowner County, Colorado. Name of Landowner Harry L. Durham Paul Freet Harvey W. Rader Geo. B. Weisbeck, Kermit I. Osborn Jacob II. Hami 11 Edgar Clark Lowry Seely Alex Urie Joseph J. Rader John Charchalis Harry Kourlis Lester W. Cox Jr. --------------- response to 1966 Hungarian partridge Response No Huns observed No response No Hun s observed No response No Huns observed Observed 48 No response Observed 27 (October) No Huns observed No Huns observed No response No response No Huns observed questionnaire, Moffat Approximate Location of Hun Sighting I1es Mountain �- 160 COMMISSION C. M. Furneaux PresIdent JOHN A. LOVE, Governor TeL DEPARTMENT OF II GAME, 6G60 BROADWAY, FISH DENVER 0 AND Orest Gerbaz Vice President PARKS Floyd Gelz Secretary 80216 Marshall Hughes Melvern Renfrow William H. August Bob Hendricks LeRoy Robson Harry Combs John E. Holden Ph. 825·1192 Game Research Center P. O. Box 567 Fort Collins, Colorado Harry R. Woodward Oct. 25, 1967 Director Mr. Harry L. Durham Hamilton, Colorado Dear Mr. Durham: In hopes of establishing a new game bird in Colorado your Game, Fish and Parks Department planted Hungarian partridge southwest of Craig in 1964 and 1965. We are currently raising more of these birds in our experimental game farm for additional releases in the Craig area. Be":' fore we continue the stocking program, however, we need information to evaluate its success. The attached questionnaire, is being sent to a sample of landowners where Hungarian partridge may have been recently observed. We will sincerely appreciate your cooperation in completing the questionnaire and returning in the stamped, addressed envelope provided for your convenience. If you do not farm the land yourself please relay the questionnaire to the person most likely to have observed these birds. Thank you for assisting Colorado. our efforts to establish this fine game bird in Sincerely, Harry R. Woodward, By: Harold M. Swope Wildlife Researcher HMS:GH Enclosure on Director �- 161 - HUNGARIAN Name PARTRIDGE QUESTIONNA IRE ------------------------------------------------------------------------- Address Check appropriate boxes: I have not seen any Hungarian c==J I have seen Hungarian I have positive this year. If you checked either How many Hungarian Approximate partridge partridge knowledge this year. this year. of someone else having of the last two boxes please partridge did you see? se en Hunganfan partridge continue below. _ date Huns were sighted. Approxima tel oca t ion 0f sight ings •_._-:--:-(Township, Range, Section -- if known) Please list names and addresses of other persons known to have seen Hungarian partridge this year Comments: (Would help to know if birds were seen while cutting they appeared to be young birds.) grain and if _ _ �- 162 - Table 1. -- Landowner response County, Colorado. (Continued). to 1966 Hungarian Name of Landowner partridge questionnaire, Moffat Approximate Location of Hun Sighting Response George Augares Roland K. Glass Steve Simos Estate No response No response Observed 100 Gordon C. Winn Elton L. Gent Stephen Biskup Raymond A. Knez Otto Schrader H. G. Culverwell Lorence Ellgen Iva B. Haxton D. W. Johnson Myrtle B. VanDorn George Gooch Earl E. Counts Ernest S. Kline Ervin Stehle Stanley Preece Vaughn Preece Stanley Beckett John Vaos Philip A. Jensen Patrick Sweeney Richard McIntyre Gossard, Inc. Wilson Land & Livestock Co. Craig Land & Devel'opment Co. by 1. P. Beckett Rex Walker & Pat Mantle Observed 6 (August) Observed 30-40 No response No Huns observed No response No Huns observed Observed 10 (June) No Huns observed No Huns observed No Huns observed No response No reponse No Huns observed No response No response No Huns observed No response No Huns observed No response No Huns observed No Huns observed No Huns observed No response Observed 1 (October) No response T9N, RlOOW, and T9N, RlOlWlOl. Hamilton area T5N, R95W T6N, R92W, Sec. 34 T7N, R92W, Sec. 12 Personal contacts are planned during the late summer of 1967 with each landowner reporting Hun sightings. Searches will be made in the vicinity of reported observations. Prepared Date: by: Harold M. Swope Wildlife Researcher A.pril, 1967 Approved by: Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coorindator �April, 1967 - 163 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO Pro,jectNo. W-37-R-20 Work Plan No. 10 Title of Job: Game Bird SUl'vey Job No. 2 Experimental Breeding of Hungs,rianPartridges Period Covered: April 1, 1966 to March 31, 1967 *Personnel: Willis ~~nsfield and Harold Swope ABSTRACT The three pairs of HungarLan partridges fed a grain diet during breeding and egg laying produced fewer eggs than those birds given high protein feeds. Stimulighting (tvlOhours of artificial light in addition to normal light incidence) appears to increase egg production but results are inconclusive. Additional research is needed in this area. Commun.iby pen mating, where 11 hens were confined with two cocks, resulted in a high percentage of infertile eggs The number of eggs laid per hen was beLow the average for control hens. 0 The isolation of breeding pairs did not appear to s'ignificantlyaffect fertile egg procluction. * This experimentation was conducted at the Fort Collins Wildlife Research Station by WilliG ManGfield. DecLgncd and reported by Harold Swope. �- 164 - Recommendations: It was necessary to place those birds subjected to stimulighting and afforded isolation in pens with wire floors. This introduced a bias when fertile egg production data were compared with results from birds placed on the ground. It is recommended that the effects of stimu1ighting again be tested, with all birds placed on the ground. A heavy chick loss was encountered during the four days following hatching. Experimentation is necessary to develop feeding techniques to prevent this excessive loss. Objectives: 1. To determine the effects of a high protein 2. To ascertain if stimulighting 3. To compare 4. To compare the fertile egg production visual contact pairing. increases fertile egg production diet on fertile egg production. fertile egg production. resulting from several mating procedures. resulting from isolated pairing with Procedures: 1. Hungarian partridge were paired off and placed in pens in March, 1966. Females were allowed to select their mates, except for those birds placed in the 'community pen'. 2. Eleven mated pairs were placed in individual pens to be used as controls. These Huns were fed a high protein game bird feed called Diamond S (28 percent protein, 3 percent fat). They received normal daylight only, and were placed on the ground. 3. Three mated pairs were placed in three pens and fed a diet of scratch grain cracked corn and whole wheat, oats and milo. Otherwise they were treated exactly the same as the control birds. 4. Three mated pairs were put in separate pens where they we re subjected to two hours of artificial light in the evening just after dusk. It was necessary to place these birds in pens with wire floors up off the ground because no electricity was available to the other pens. Otherwise treatment was the same as given the control birds. 5. Three mated pairs were placed in individual pens with each pair being visually isolated from all other birds. This was accomplished by placing the Huns in pens separated from the rest (with wire floors) and fastening burlap to the lower portion of the sides. 6. Three additional pairs were treated exactly the same as the control birds, but placed in pens with wire floors up off the ground. It was hoped these would serve as controls for the others that were put on wire. 7. The rema~n1ng 11 hens and two cocks were placed in a community ground, and treat~q ju~t the same as the control birds. pen, on the �Experimental Breeding of Hungarian Partridges Harold M. Swope Findings: The Hungarian partridge to be used in this experiment were placed in a large run way off which were open doors to smaller pens. As the female herded the male of her choice into one of these small pens an observer closed the door. In this manner mated pairs were obtained. This pairing technique was applied in March, 1966. The widely varying egg laying capabilities of individual hens makes it difficult to accurately evaluate the effect of some treatments on fertile egg production, however, some obvious conclusions may be drawn. The birds fed scratch grain produced only five eggs and three of these were _nfertile. From this we conclude that the provision of a high protein feed to laying Huns is mandatory. See Table 1 for this information. Table 1. -- Productivity and fertility of Hungarian partridge as influenced various treatment, Fort Collins Wildlife Research Station, 1966. Pen No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Eggs Laid Treatments Controls Controls Controls Controls Controls Controls Controls Controls Controls Controls Controls Average Total Infertile 52 21 2 1 29 55 9 4 33 40 29 1 4 4 19 9 by Percent Fertile Eggs Laid 60 93 98 89 100 88 52 69 o o 58 32 31 22 11 8.5 Graind Fed Grain Fed Grain Fed Average o o 3 2 2 1 1.7 1 Stimulighting Stimulighting Stimulighting ~'('Average 52 34 38 28 9 41.3 16.7 7 18 4 3 3 3.3 43 2 13 60 66 72 33 50 40 46 74 66 60 Isolated Isolated Isolated ;';'Average --24.3 21 22 23 Controls Controls Control.s ;·('Aver.g.~e 18 27 47 . 30.7 3 4 "3 89 89 91 90 24 Comm1-m.~ty us 89 23 18 19 20 48 p,en 83 94 86 �- 166 Another clear-cut deduction was possible after analyzing egg production and fertility of the 11 hens and two cocks in the community pen. These data, shown in Table 1, indicate low egg production and a high incidence of infertile eggs as compareu with control hens. Hens in the community pen averaged 10.4 eggs, of which only 23 percent were fertile. The paired control hens averaged 31 eggs each with 72 percent of these fertile. This certainly substantiates the importance of mated pairing. The effects of stimulighting and isolation were not so decisive. A variable was introduced when it became necessary to place the birds subjected to stimulighting and isolation in pens with wire floors. Even though three pairs of control birds were also placed on wire there is some doubt as to whether we tested the effects of stimulighting and isolation on egg production, or whether being on ground or wire exerted some influence, The three control hens on the wire floors produced almost exactly the same number of eggs per bird (31) as the 11 control hens on the ground.. Stimulighting did increase egg production by ten eggs per hen compared with control birds, however; only 60 percent of these eggs were fertile. Data presented in Table 1 indicate that the birds on wire achieved higher egg fertility than those on the ground, except for the reduced fertility apparently caused by stimulighting. Bird rearing facilities at the Fort Collins Wildlife Research Station are quite limited because they are strictly for experimental purposes. The wire floor pens were used only as a temporary measure and will not be available again. There was no original intent to test productivity between birds on wire and those on the ground but it appears this may be worth further research if pen space becomes available. Workers do feel that the effects of stimulighting, "lith all birds treated exactly the same except for supplemental light, needs additional evaluation. Prepared Date: by: Harold M. Swope Wildlife Researcher Approved by: Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �April, 1967 - 167 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO Project No. W-37-R-20 Work Plan No. 12 Game Bird Survey Job No. 10 Title of Job: Relationships of the Productivity and Distribution of Wild Turkeys on the Uncompahgre Plateau to th~ Environment Period Covered: Personnel: April 1, 1966 to March 31, 1967 Glenn Rogers conducted hunter checks during the turkey season and Wildlife Conservation Officer, Tom Sherrill assisted with brood counts, helped trap turkeys and provided information regarding distribution. ABSTRACT Feed stations were established during the vrinter to concentrate turkeys for census. One hundred and forty birds, six less than last year and 60% less than the four year average, were seen or reported. Birds were less concentrated this year, due to light snows. n1US the census is less accurate than in the past. There were proDably more turkeys in the study area this winter than the census indicates. Twenty-six wild turkeys were trapped, marked, and released in two areas on the Uncompahgre Plateau. Most birds Vieremarked with wing markers and "Jiffy" wing bands. Movements were determined. by observing the travel of marked birds, some of which moved 12, 14, 21 and 31 air line miles from sites "here the birds were captured, marked and released. Two other birds transplanted to an area south of Norwood, Colorado, moved onto the study area. Movement was over 44 air line miles. Due to a population decline and the resulting small kill, reliable estimates of the productivity and of the sex and age ratio of the turkey kill could not be calculated. Climatological data was collected at two weather stations consisting of a maximum - minimum thermometer, a hygrothermograph, an anemometer, and a rain guage. 'rransects were run to measure yearly trends in mast production. A miniature transmitter operating on a solar cell was attached to a turkey on Love Mesa. 111e solar cell did not operate in the timberj therefore, movements were not followed. �- 168 - 'AY 8 C ••. \. [ • NATURITA :....j,1·214 RIDGElltA\' Figure I.--Distribution the winter of 1966-67. Parenthesis. of 140 wi Id turkeys on the Uncompahgre Plateau during The number of birds wintering in each area appears in �- 169 - RELATIONSHIPS OF THE PRODUCTIVITY WILD TURKEYS ON THE UNCOMPAHGRE AND DISTRIBUTION OF PLATEAU TO THE ENVIRONMENT Gary T. Myers Objectives: (1) To determine the size, distribution, turkey population on the Uncompahgre and productivity Plateau. of the wild (2) Record movements of wild turkeys and determine factors affect these movements. (3) Determine the sex and age structure of the turkey kill on the Uncompahgre Plateau to provide estimates of total harvest and size of the turkey population. (4) Determine the vegetative types present on the wild turkey summer and winter range and the species composition and abundance of food producing species within each type. Also determine the elevation, describe topography, and record certain climatic factors on part of the better turkey summer and winter ranges. how environmental Techniques: Census.--The size of turkey population was determined by counting turkeys in the vicinity of established feed stations consisting of baled oat hay and whole oats in wintering areas on the Uncompahgre Plateau. The number of turkeys seen in the vicinity of the feed stations by Department personnel and other reliable persons was recorded. Visits were made to other winter areas where turkeys were reported and birds were counted where possible. Counts were made from December to Mayo Distribution and Movement.--Techniques used to determine distribution involved field observations, reports from reliable sources, and location of kills made by hunters contacted during the hunting se~son. Movements were determined by the location of turkeys which were trapped, marked, and released in wintering areas. Turkeys were trapped with the cannon net at the Hill Ranch and with a slat type trap on Blue Creek. Captured birds were sexed and aged. Most birds were marked with National "Jiffy" wing bands and wing markers. Effects of Environmental Factors Upon Movement.--A radio transmitter operating on a solar cell was attached to a turkey released on Love Mesa. Movement was to be followed when the bird reached the winter range at Pickett Corral. But the bird wintered elsewhere, so movements were not followed. �- 170 - Sex and Age Structure of the Kill.--The sex and age structure of the turkey kill could not be calculated due to the small sample of the kill which was obtained by conducting hunter checks during the turkey seasons. During the 1967 spring season (May 2 and 3) hunters were checked on the north end of the Divide Road and in the vicinity of Pickett Corral in Escalante Canyon. Questionnaires were sent to all hunters who purchased turkey licenses during the spring season near the study area to determine kill. Productivity.--Productivity could not be calculated due to the small number of marked birds killed and because of the small kill. Physical Factors.--Climatological data was collected from two weather stations cons isting of a maximum - minimum thermometer, a hygro+hermog raph (housed in standard weather shelters), an anemometer, and a rain guage. One station was located about one-half mile inside the Uncompahgre National Forest boundary west of the Pickett Corral road. The other station was at Pickett Corral. Transects were also run to measure mast production. Findings: Census.--Turkeys in the study area were counted by various methods during the past five winters. A total of 140 birds were seen or reported last winter (Figure 1) compared to 146 turkeys counted in the winter of 1965-66 (Figure 2). The two counts are not significantly different (P=.73). But this year's count is 60% below the four year average winter count of 348 birds. Light snowfall during the winter of 1965-66 let turkeys winter at higher elevations than during the past three years. Even less snow fell this winter making census more difficult than last year. Turkeys, which usually winter in San Miguel Canyon at about 6,000 feet elevation, spent this winter in Hanks Valley at approximately 8,000 feet elevation. Flocks which normally winter in the lower part of Spring Creek Canyon and at the Templeton Ranch also remained at higher elevations, and turkeys in Dominguez Canyon drifted in and out of the usual winter area. Since about the same number of birds were censused this winter, when birds were less likely to be counted, the winter turkey population is probably larger this year then last. Movement and Distribution.--Figure 3 shows the location of banding sites and minimum distance of movement of banded birds from these sites. Two birds marked in the study area were killed during 1966 hunting seasons. A hen poult marked at the Hill Ranch on February 2, 1965, was killed on Kelso Creek near Pickett Corral on November 20, 1966. Movement was at least 21 miles. The bird carried all markers for about 2l~ months (Table 1). Another hen, marked at the Hill Ranch, was killed in Hanks Valley on November 26, 1966. Band numbers are not known; so it is impossible to determine exactly which bird was killed or when it was marked. �500 400 Cl W I:; "':J 0 u 300 (f) >w -. :::s::: a:: :J f!..t... 0 a:: w co 200 L I :E ~ 100 a 1962-1963 1963-1964 1964-1965 YEAR OF WINTER Figure 2.--Number of turkeys counted 1965-1966 1966-1967 CENSUS in the study area during the past five winters. f-' --J f-' �- 172 - A third marked bird was killed during the 1967 spring gobbler season (probably during early May). This bird, a tom, was marked in Spring Creek Canyon near Montrose on January 21, 1965. It was killed two years and three months later in Hanks Valley, 14 miles from the release site. A young hen, marked at the same time and placed as the tom, was recaptured and released at the Gunn Ranch, about 12 miles south of Montrose, on December 30, 1966. Another hen from Spring Creek Canyon was seen in Hanks Valley on November 25, 1966. A number of other marked birds were seen or reported. On May 15, 1966, Ronald Schmitt, District Ranger, saw a marked tom on Uranium Road. The bird had a yellow wing band and was from Dominguez Canyon, 11 miles away. Tom Sherrill saw two hens from the Hill Ranch about ~ mile east of Kelly Creek during mid August, 1966. These birds were about 9 miles from the banding site, and in the latter part of August, archers saw a turkey from Pickett Corral on Love Mesa near the Old Poison Fence. This bird had traveled almost nine miles from the release siteo On May 20, 1967, Forest Service personnel saw six banded turkeys on Bug Point, southwest of Cold Springs Ranger Station. Two birds had red wing bands and were 31 miles from the Hill Ranch site where they were banded. Two more birds, carrying white wing bands had moved from a site about five miles south of Norwood, 44 miles away. These birds probably moved a greater distance than other birds, since they were moved to the release s Lt e from the Gunn Ranch (in February, 1965) in an attempt to get a turkey flock started in the Lone Cone - Norwood area. Instead of moving into the Lone Cone area for the summer, a majority of these birds ended up on Clay Creek on the Unc(Mpahgre Plateau. Three of them were killed there during the November, 1965, turkey season. The remaining two turkeys seen on Bug Point had blue wing bands, as did two turkeys on Blue Creek seen in March, 1967. These four birds were from either Pickett Corral or Love Mesa. The winter distribution of wild turkeys is seen in Figure I. In the past all known winter concentrations have been in the Pinyon-Juniper forest type. This winter, one flock of 18 birds wintered at about 8,000 feet elevation in the Ponderosa Pine and Oak Brush type. South facing slopes in this area were free of snow throughout most of the winter, which is probably the reason birds remained there this winter. With the exception of Hanks Valley, where birds nested this spring, turkeys began leaving the winter ranges in March, and most birds were gone by April 15. By May 1, 1967, most turkeys were occupying ranges between 8,000 and 9,000 feet elevation, which seems to be the zone occupied by a majority of the breeding birds in the study area. Brood counts were conducted during August in areas where turkeys are occassionally seen in the summer. A total of 440 miles were driven at an average speed of 9.4 miles an hour between 5:45 a.m. and 8:45 p.m. (daylight savings time). Most driving was done in the morning am evening. Only one flock of three toms was observed. Three broods were reported and another brood was later seen. The four broods contained an average of 7.7 young. �- 173 I • C ALE NATURITA ~ I I ? RIDGE Figure 3.-~Location of aJ I banding sit~s. in the study area, genera' direction, and minimum distance of movement of ba1'\l,qJp.ql oi rds from these areas. • WAY �Table l.--Information concerning marked turkeys killed or recaptured on the Uncompahgre Plateau between April 1, 1966, and May 30, 1967. F~D. indicates field dressed weight. Back or Hing Tag Color No. Jiffy \\lingBand No. Leg Band No. Sex Age Weight (pounds) Date Captured Place Captured 10.6 10.3 10.3 1-28-66 2-22-67 2-22-67 Hill Ranch Hill Ranch Hill Ranch 6.5 2-2-65 1st release Recaptured 2nd release Red Red Red 63 63 63 123 123 123 T-590 T-590 T-590 F F F A A A 1st release ~i!l~d Red R~d 43 4~ 101 !O! T-568 T:5§8 F ~ __ Y ~ __ Black & Orange 19 B!a~k_&_OEa~g~ __ l~ 77 T-552 M Y :-:-:- ~ __ ~ 12.2 7 1-21-65 7Z ~-_7:6Z Spring Creek ~~k~ ya!l~y - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1st release ~i!l~d Z.~~.~.__ 1!-~0:6§ __ ~i~k~tE ~oEr~l 1st release Recaptured 2nd release Red Red Red 45 45 45 103 --151 T-570 T-570 T-570 F F F A A A 9.8 9.3 9.3 2-2-65 2-22-67 2-22-67 Hill Ranch Hill Ranch Hill Ranch 1st release Recapture 2nd release Red Red Red 75 75 75 135 135 135 ------- F F F A A A 10.1 10.1 10.1 1-28-66 2-22-67 2-22-67 Hill Ranch Hill Ranch Hill Ranch 1st release Recapture ?n~ re1e§s~ Red Red R~d 34 34 3~ 92 92 9~ T-S59 --:-: M M ~ __ A A ~ 15.8 16.9 16£9 1-29-65 2-22-67 ~-f2:6Z Hill Ranch Hill Ranch ~i1l_R§n£h 1st release Recapture 2nd release Black & Orange Black & Orange Black & Orange 25 25 25 83 83 83 T-96 ----- F F:'.. F Y 8 8 7 7 1-21-65 12-30-66 12-30-66 Spring Creek Gunn Ranch Gunn Ranch - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ,;, 0 II ~ -17 �- 175 - Check station personnel examined only two turkeys killed during the October turkey season. Both birds were killed where both aspen and oak brush occurred. In the November turkey season, I checked four turkeys killed by hunters. Three were killed in the ponderosa pine forest type and one in oak brush. Productivity.--A number of mathematical ratios could be used to estimate the size of the turkey population if sex and age ratios of the kill were known; In 1966, only six turkeys were sexed and aged by reliable people during the fall turkey seasons (Table 2). Kill during the 1967 spring turkey season was determined by contacting license agents in Gateway, Uravan, Nucla, Naturita, Norwood, Placerville, Ridgway, Montrose, Olathe, Delta, and Grand Junction. Only 16 people purchased turkey licenses for this season. Questionnaires were sent to 14 of the hunters (two license duplicates were not legible). Thirteen questionnaires were returned. Only seven people hunted turkeys during the spring on the Uncompahgre Plateau. These people spent 111 hours trying to kill turkeys. Two hunters saw birds, but only one turkey was killed. This bird had been sexed and aged by a biologist in the field. These samples of the kill are too small to accurately determine the age ratio of the kill. Similarly, estimates of the sex ratio of the kill based on the small sample are not accurate. Thus, it is impossible to estimate productivity with any reliability. Some idea of the size of the population can be gained by comparing the annual kill figures for the study area. Only 40 turkeys were killed by 108 hunters on the Uncompahgre Plateau last year (Figure 4). This was the smallest kill since before 1959 when 66 hunters took 51 birds. However, the kill is an improvement over last year when 239 hunters took 58 turkeys. Pressure declined 55% this year from last year, but the kill decreased only 31%. Apparently there were more turkeys in the population during 1966 hunting seasons than during 1965 hunting seasons. Radio Telemetry.--A transmitter, powered by a small, rechargeable battery and a solar cell was attached to a male poult turkey which was released on Love Mesa on September 22, 1966. The bird was captured at the Gunn Ranch south of Montrose, whe re it had been running with domestic turkeys. The bird was released in the vicinity of a flock of wild turkeys which normally winter at Pickett Corral. We hoped to recapture this bird during the winter to see if the transmitter was still attached and in proper working condition, but the bird did not winter at Pickett Corral. �- 176 - Table 2.--Sex and age structure of the turkey kill examined personnel in 1966 and during the spring of 1967. by field 1967 Spring Season Number 1966 October Season Toms Hens Poults 1 0 0 1 0 1 2 2 2 2 3 Total 1 2 4 7 of Birds Killed 1966 November Season All Seasons Combined 0 No attempt was made to follow the movements of this bird on Love Mesa because timber in the area provided so much shade that the solar cell would not operate. We had planned to follow the movements of the bird when it reached the winter range, but the bird wintered elsewhere or died. Trapping and Banding Operations.--Turkeys have been trapped, banded, and released during the winter on the Uncompahgre Plateau since 1961-62. Twenty-six turkeys, including four recaptures (Table 1), were trapped, banded, and released this wi.nter in the study area (Table 3). Twelve of the birds were marked at the Hill Ranch west of Nucla, Colorado, on Highway 90 next to the forest boundary. The remaining 14 turkeys were trapped on Blue Creek about two miles above Blue Creek Ranch. On September 22, 1966, five turkeys were trapped at the Gunn Ranch, about 12 miles south of Montrose on Cow Creek, and taken to Love Mesa, where three of them were banded and released. The remaining two birds died during the trip to Love Mesa. Banding records for these birds were lost. Wing markers of different colors were used to mark the birds in the three areas (Table 4). Mast Production.--Ten transects were established in the Oak Brush to measure mast production. Plants of various sizes were included in each transect. Averages cannot be projected to measure total production because of the wide vCiriation in the numbers of acorns produced per transect. But differences in the number of acorns counted on the same transect from year to year provide an index to determine increases or decreases in mast production (Table 5). In 1964, 3515 acorns were counted in 8 transects. In 1965, two new transects were established. A total of 7,189 acorns were produced by the six lower transects, while no acorns were produced by transects located at or above 8,600 feet elevation. In 1966, 2,589 acorns were produced by the 10 transects. Apparently less mast was produced this year than in 1964 and 1965. More mast occurred at higher elevations in 1964 than in 1965. A little more mast was produced by transects at or below 8,400 feet elevation in 1966 than in 1964 with the exception of the transect at 7,970 feet elevation. �o o 1.-''\ o o -:t llJ :::> n: U) (/) CL w n: o o t{'\ 3(Jf,(;S3CJd - 177 - o o C\J ONV 111>1 o o o- ~ i'C\ o- -o C\J <o c- <o o-, 0 0" -o 0' L!\ o- o 0:: « lU >- . '.0 '0 o-, I rr- o-, L!\ :J (l) IU - +«l 0... OJ (l) L a.. IU s: 0 C U C (l) :::> .c +- 0 c .x: (f) -0 C «l ~(l) +C =' s: 0 4- L (l) E .D ~ . I I -.::t ::J (l) L (J) u, �Table 3. --infOI-,T2lT ion concerning l ur xe y s banded and released on the Uncornoahqr e Plateau during the winh9r ! ~~l6-67. Ot -----~.. '\ ' .. I '8_'1.3; ~er- "" Co! or Pink Pink Pink i nk No • q, ''l ,,,-, f.3i 32 '// j nSj Bald Leg Sand 0io. No. Sex Age ( pounds) --- F ,A. r- ---- Y 171+ 143 17! 11..,2 Pink 63 84 Pi nk 81; ,/ 173 ?ink Pink Pink Pink Pin'-< Pink 86 ILJ+ 87 I '7( ' ,0 r) :::>',nr:, I Pink 175 88 8] ILl) )0 177 -- --- It:.:"> ./v 178 179 130 151 Red Red Red 45 91 92 152 ;~::d 75 135 Red Red Red Red Red Red Red ::<2d 92; 94 95 ,/ ::<1 /4 63 ,~/ Ie:;;: ,/./ 154 155 156 ~;) ;1- 123 ;10 157 '17 1r::0 .jJ -~ :it; Ie;:> // ----- ----- ----------- --- --- ----570 --- ------------5jC --- --- --- Vie i ght A ---------- r A ---- ,\\ Y F Y F A 'I Y Y Y ------- A Y ---- r- A r- r 'y', F ,\ ~/"1\ r- r- F ---- ---- ------- ---- .---- F Y r A ,'" " y F F A A F F A A ,'II y 9.0 9.9 ji\ ~ ,. A 16.:) II r 10.3 A .. ,. r\\ F 9.') 12.5 ';1.7 10.1 9.8 9.3 y 11,0 A 10.7 Date Caotured 27. !?67 27, 1967 27, 1-:;67 27, Ig67 Jon. 27. 1967 Jan. 27, f g67 Jan. 27, Ig67 Jan. 27, 1':)67 Jon. 27. q67 Jan. 27. 1967 Je o , 27. Ig67 Jan. 27. 1967 Jail. 27. '967 JM. 27. 1967 F eb , 22, '':]67 Feb. 22, Ig67 Jan. Jan. Jan. Jan. Feb. 22. Feb. 22. Feb. 22, Feb. 22, Feb. 22, Feb. 22. Feb. 22, Feb. 22, Feb. 22, Feb. 22, i':j67 1167 1:::)67 J?67 1'167 1967 1967 1'167 rg67 1=167 I-' -..:] OJ �- 179 - Table 4.--Wi1d turkeys trapped, marked, and released in the study area in September 1966 and during the winter of 1966-67. Adults Sub. Adults Males Females Males Females Total Color of Wing Markers Employed 0 1 0 6 8 0 3 3 1 5 0 2 14 12 3 Pink Red Blue Location Where Trapped, Marked, and Released Blue Creek Hill Ranch Love Mesa Table 5.--Comparison of the number of acorns counted in eight Oak Brush transects during the summers of 1964, 1965, and 1966 on the Uncompahgre Plateau. No. Acorns Counted Per Clump of Oak Brush Approximate Elevation Of Transect 1964 1965 1966 1964 1965 1966 9,550 9,150 9,000 8,600 8,420 8,200 8,000 7,970 7,930 7,500 8-372 0-337 no count no count 0-13 0-127 0-301 0-164 0-64 0-6 0-0 0-0 0-0 0-0 2-54 0-1,649 0-1,228 0-509 23-331 0-186 0-25 0-316 0-2 0-9 0-50 0-242 0-561 0-105 1-116 0-5 157.7 48.2 no count no count 3.9 22.3 68.5 36.9 13 3 0.7 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 18.5 226 3 172.1 109.5 149.8 42.7 4.2 42.3 0.3 1.4 17.2 41.5 103.1 16.7 30.7 1.5 3,515 7,189 2,589 Range Total Production Average 0 0 Climatological Data.--Climatological data was collected from two wea t he r stations. One station was located about ~ mile inside the Uncompahgre National Forest boundary we s t of the road to Pickett Corral. The other station was at Pickett Corral. Information from these stations is summarized in Table 6 0 Incidental Information.--The turkey population on the Uncompahgre Plateau began to decline in the spring and sununer of 1964. The decline is reflected in the kill, the hunting pressure, and the winter counts. There is no way of knowing what percentage of the total population is counted each winter; but the counts are somewha t indicative of population trends. Based on observations at major winter concentration areas during past years, winter losses on the Uncompahgre Plateau are negligible. �- 180 - Because of this, winter counts reflect the size of the population until the birds leave the winter range in April. Counts indicate that roughly 480 birds were present on the Plateau in April, 1963, and again in April, 1964. Brood counts completed in September averaged 8.5 young per hen with brood (17 broods) in 1963 and 7.0 (27 broods) in 1964. The brood counts were not significantly different, indicating that the population going into the hunting season should have been the same in 1963 and 1964 (provided that the same number of hens had young both years). The only important change in the turkey season was a big increase to three birds in 1964 from two birds in 1963. I expected the increase in the bag limit to attract more hunters and increase the kill. Pressure increased from about 340 hunters to 425 hunters. But the kill dropped from around 245 birds to 220 birds. Since the kill was less, I expected to count more birds during the winter of 1964-65 than were counted the previous winter. But the censused population decreased from around 480 birds to about 240 birds. Evidently some type of mortality occurred which was not reflected in the brood counts. Again, winter losses were negligible during the 1964-65 winter. following summer, no broods were seen and only one was reported. The Only 58 turkeys were killed by 239 hunters in 1965. This was the lowest kill since 1959 when 66 hunters took 51 birdso Following the turkey season (in the winter of 1965-66), only 145 turkeys were counted~ In 1966, four broods were counted which contained an average of 7.7 young and 40 turkeys were killed by 108 hunters. The following winter 140 turkeys were counted. Apparently the turkey population is no longer declining. According to Darrell Nish, Principal Biologist with the Utah Department of Fish and Game, the wild turkey population in the La Sal Mountains, just west of the Uncompahgre Plateau, declined considerably during the past two years. Due to the declinej Utah closed the turkey season in the La Sal Mountains in 1966. They have received unconfirmed reports of blackhead disease, but do not really know what caused the decline. Turkeys winter in three areas on the Uncompahgre Plateau where they come in contact with chickens, one of the main sources of blackhead infection in turkeys. Since turkeys on the Uncompahgre Plateau frequenJ:ly move from one area to another (Figure 3), infected birds could eaSily transmit the disease to turkeys throughout the Plateau. But there is little evidence that this occurred. In summary, the turkey population declined sometime in the spring, summer, or fall of 1964. There was little, if any, reproduction in 1965. The decline lost its momentum and the population held its own or increased slightly in 1966. The present population is considerably below the 1963 level. �Table 6.--C1imato1ogical data gathered from two weather stations 1966, and April 1, 1967, is summarized below. on the Uncompahgre Plateau between April 1, -Data Collected At Stati on No. I Max. Temp. (F) M in. Ternp , (F) Ave. ~ax. Temp. (F) Ave. f,\ in. Temp. (F) Ave. (.\eanTernp, (F) :,\ax.Re I. Hum. (%) I\\in.ReI. Hum. (5S) Ave. !;\ax.Rei. HUrl. (is) Ave. Min. Rei. Hum. (is) Ave. Mean Rei. Hum. (%) Total Precipe (in.) Ave. \Vi nd Ve I. (m. p •h. ) June Apr iI May 69 21 58 32 45 100 16 74 28 52 1.00 79 35 71 42 56 99 13 3.5 July Sept. Oct. Nov. Dec. Jan. Feb. Mar. - ff:) 27 48 0.98 3.8 87 38 78 47 62 99 II 70 24 /.'? ,-!-, 0.92 3.9 9L~ 48 86 56 71 98 II 76 29 52 1.27 2.0 83 42 75 46 61 100 17 80 30 54 -- -- 71 20 61 34 47 100 15 0"" /) 36 64 0.25 -- 63 -- ---- 100 32 87 50 67 0.62 2.~_ 54 0 37 18 28 100 38 95 53 74 0.90 2.•£ 47 8 38 19 29 100 32 92 48 70 0.37 2.3 54 9 41 17 28 100 213 .151, :,~) .~~ 0.L!2 3.0 64 12 52 28 40 100 17 1:) 2;~!) :;.2 0.66 4.0 I-' co I-' I Data Collected At Station No.2 Max. Temp. (F) l/dn. Temp. (F) Ave. Max. Temp. (F) Ave. 1,\ in. Tem p • (F ) Ave. Mean Temp. (F) /\\ax.Rei. Hum. (%) Min. ReI. Hum. (%) Ave. Max. ReI. HUrl. (%) Ave. M in. Rei. H urn. (%) Ave. Mean Rei. Hum. (%) Toral Precipe (in.) Ave. '.'1ind Vel. (m.p.h.) -68 17 57 28 43 100 19 81 30 55 0.89 3.2 80 29 71 39 55 100 15 71 39 55 0.52 3.6 87 32 79 44 61 100 13 79 25 52 0.86 .35 95 44 86 52 70 100 14 85 30 52 0.64- 83 34 75 43 60 98 17 89 30 59 -- 71 15 60 34 47 100 15 95 38 67 0.31 61 17 50 27 38 100 27 92 46 68 0.61 53 4 36 21 30 99 35 95 55 76 -- 48 -10 40 17 30 99 31 95 46 71 -- 51 6 38 16 27 98 24 90 40 65 0.33 64- " 51 28 39 ,00 16 81 31 57 o.: 3 �- 182 - Prepared by Gary T. MYers Wildlife Researcher Date April, 1967 Approved by: Donald M. Hoffman Wildlife Researcher Ferd C. Kleinscbni tz Federal Aid Coordinator �April, 1967 - 183 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECTSEGMENT State Project COLORADO of No. Work Plan No. Title of Job: Period Covered: Personnel: W-37-R-20 Game Bird 12 Job No. Survey 12 Wild Turkey Roost Study April 1, 1966 to .M3.rch31, 1967 Donald M. Hoffman ABSTRAC'r 1\1O additional summer period roosting sites were located and meacur ed , bringing the total known summer period roosting sites to nine. One of t.hese s i t.e s , located on vJhite Creek at an elevation of appr-ox.lrm t.e Ly lCl,30,) feet wi.t.h.Ln an Engelmann Spruce type, is the first located 1dthin this t;rT'C and the high,~st in elevation recorded to date in this study. A. number of t.urkeys are lD.l.O'.V11 to summe r in these higher ranges, however. Nine \'linter, three t.emporary wtnter, ana. seven summer period r-cost.Lng s i.t.es .Loca tell and reported. on in earlier segment", brings the t.ot.a I. of :'1.11 known r ooc t i.ng :';i teG to brenty-one. 'I'hese are all Loca ted vii th5.11;:\ c tudya r-ea of appr-ox imat.e Ly 900 s quare mi Les of range. �Table 1. -- Information Number of site Type Surrrrner relating Drainage to Nerriam's County 8 Niddle Creek Huerfano 9 Ivhite Creek Huerfano Table 2. -- Surrrrnaryof measurements Number in Sample Species d.b.h. (in. ) 5 Ppo 3 Pen Key to Abbrev.: Ppo - Ponderosa Pen - Engelmann turkey roosting sites. Ownership Elev. (ft.) State (school section) Private Slope Number trees used and period Date measured Exposure (%) Size (acre) 9,300 SE 40 .50 5 (1966) Sept. 26, 1966 10,300 IV 15 .50 3 (1966) Oct. 13, 1966 of eight trees used for roosts. Est. age (yrs.) Number trunks scarred Height (it. ) Percent Cr-own 355.0 T 71.0 M 50-85 R - 3 RO 2 FO 1 R 280.0 T 56.0 M 50-60 R T 90.0 M 30.0 29~-30~ R 260.0 T 86.7 M 80-90 R 260.0 T 86.7 M 80-90 R - 1 RO 2 PO 0 106.0 21.2 19-27~ T M pine (Pinus ponderosa) spruce (Picea engelmanni) Shape top RO - Rounded, open FO - Flat, open PO - Pointed, open I-' OJ +- �WILD TURKEY ROOST STUDY INTRODUCTION This study has been in progress for four years. During the next segment, it is planned to complete the necessary field work, analyze the data gathered, and write-up a final report. A preliminary report titled Merriam's turkey roost preferences on mountain ranges, Game Information Leaflet Number 45, Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department, August, 1967, 6 pp. presents previous information relating to physical characteristics of roosting sites and trees. OBJECTIVES 1. To determine the physical in a mountain type range. characteristics of roosting sites and trees with- 2. To determine use of roosts agement of the species. by wild and their importance turkeys in the man- TECHNIQUES 1. Roost characteristics. A. Approximate size of roosting areas to be measured and counting number of trees utilized for roosts. B. Trees C. Heights level. of roosting D. Diameter of roost E. Age of sample roost trees and/or increment borings. F. Exposure location G. Habitat in the vicinity vegetative types. H. Elevation I. Age classes charts. J. Other information to be recorded included past history, main season of use, species of trees utilized, presence or absence of fire scars on utilized trunks, as roosts to be classified trees to be measured tree trunks according using to be measured to be estimated through to indicated a measuring using using pacing diameter ring counts distances use. tape and Abney tape. of stumps and slope of roosting sites to be determined by observing of the sun and using measuring tape and Abney level. of roosting of roosts sites of roosting shape of crown, to be determined to be determined trees to be recorded and percent through the observing by use of altimeter. using of crown ar ea , tree classification �- 186 2. Use characteristics. A. Times of entering roosts in evenings and times of leaving roosts in mornings to be recorded at weekly intervals insofar as possible during the fall, winter, and early spring periods by observation from roost vantage points. These times will be compared with official sunset and sunrise tables adjusted for roosting site locations. Weather factors at the time of observation including temperature, amount of snow cover, and precipitation to be recorded. B. Duration of use of roosting sites to be determined through weekly vations and flock counts during various periods of the year. C.Numbers birds of turkeys using roosting sites to be determined in the vicinity of known roosting sites. obser- by counts of FINDINGS Table 1 lists information relating to the two new summer period roosting sites located and measured during this reporting period. Figure 1 shows the White Creek site within an Engelmann Spruce type at an elevation of approximately 10,300 feet. Table 2 lists measurements t wo summer period roosting of individual sites. roosting The recording of times when turkeys entered roost were started during the fall period. made during this period. Prepared Date: by: Donald M. Hoffman Wildlife Researcher April, 1967 trees by species within these and left the main Sarcillo Canyon Table 3 summarizes the observations Approved by: Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �Table 3. -- Summary of times Merriam's turkeys left and entered Sarci110 Canyon Roost compared to Official Sunrise-Sunset times for area. Period of day AM Period of year Fall Number of weekly observations 3 PM Fall 7 1/ (-) Average time interva 1.!.I - 19 min. f 3 min. Range in readings - 14 to 26 min. 6 to f 10 min. Number of birds using roosts 30 to 80 - 12 to 80 Refers to times birds entered or left roost trees before official SR-SS times for area. (I) Refers to times birds entered or left roost trees after official SR"'SS times for area. !-' CP -..:] �- 188 - Figure 1. -- Grove of large Engelmann Spruce at 10,300 feet elevation used as Merriam's turkey summer roosting site, White Creek, Huerfano County. (D. Hoffman, photo) �April, 1967 - 189 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECTSEGM1~T State Project of COLORADO No. Work Plan No. Job No. 12 Title of Job: Period Covered: April Personnel: GameBird Survey W-37-R-20 Experimental Habitat 13 Improvement for Wild Turkeys 1, 1966 to Mirch 31, 1967 Hugh R. Jones, J. Frank Cordova, Clifford A. Moser, Charles Reickert, and T. Leonar-d Ortiz assisted with various aspects of the study. To these individuals, and to the landowners who permitted use of their land for the study, I express my sincere apprec1ation. ABSTRACT A total of 395 w.i Ld turkeys in 11 \{l)1-cering flocks was counted during the 196667 period '.vithin the extensive study ar-ea of approximately 900 square miles of range. This popu.lat i.on is 12 birds less than the ~·07 counted during the 196566 ,,rintering per-Lod. By t:Y1JCof area, 129 btrds in f'Lve flocks were coun ted 'ivithin the f'Lve developrn.ental study ar ea.s and 28 birds in three flocks wer-e counted. 'wL thin the f'Lve control study areas. In add i.tii.on, 238 birds in three flocks were count.ed w:L t.h.Lnother mj s ce Ll.aneous winterinc; areas. A sex-ratio of Li-6 maLes: 100 f'emaLes was calculated for the 1966-67 period baaed upon a sampLe of 251 Merriam s t.ur-keys observed at close range. 1 An improved hatch va s found during 1966 Ln comparison with 1965. Forty-one suc ce as f'uL hens averaged 6.0 young per brood durLng 1966 compared with an average of 5.7 young per 'brood for 21 successful hens during 1965. Wild. turkeys, most pr-obabLy from the Copper King Gulch \.J'inter1ng area (elevation 8.250 feet) had. r-ea.ched the t.op of' the Sangre de Cristo Rarige in the vicinity of Indian Creek Pa.ss (elevation 9,500 feet), by late April, 1966. ThL3 was approximately one month e:u'lier than observed during 196L~ and 1965 and reflects milder ,,'ca.ther conditions dL1.:r:Lne; the early spring period of 1966. Hintering popu.Ia.t.Lonc rluring 1966-67 wer-e more stable than previously observed. Green grass was avaLLabLe in most wintering ar-ea.s by mi.d=Feb rua r'y , 1967 and the regular ::;prin[~ cUspcn::':cl dur Lng 1966 had. started by late Ivhrch in most of the "Tintcrinc; ar ea s chcc ked , B3_sed.upon GameIv'!'anal3crnerrt Div:Lsj.on da ta , the kill Df t.ur-keys within Unit 85 in 1966 dur i ng the open {;.e:Jci,OI1 October 1 t.lrrough 9 was 70 birds hi[~her (110 in 1966 compared to lj·O Ln 1965) t.han killed in 1965 during both the April 10-18 �- 190 and October 2-10 seasons. Numbers of hunters increased from 109 to 174. The nwnber of turkeys killed in 1966 (110) is approximately 27 percent of the minimum wintering population of 407 counted during the 1965-66 wintering period. Developmental work again consisted of providing supplemental feed in the form of baled oat hay, whole oats, and/or whole maize within the five developmental study areas and in Sarcillo Canyon from early November, 1966 through mid-March, 1967 for the most part. Of these five developmental study areas, three had consistently heavy use from early December, 1966 through mid-March, 1967 and the other two had consistently heavy use from early January, 1967 through midMuch, 1967. Periods of heaviest use of feedgrounds could be correlated with prevailing weat.he r conditions. INTRODUCTION Population dynamics and kill trends in relation to possible habitat improvement through supplemental feeding practices are being investigated in this study. Investigations have geen in progress for a three-year period. As with previous segments, most of the information gathered is presented in tabular form. Efforts during this segment have been directed toward securing as accurate population, sex-ratio, brood COWlt, weather, and natural food production information as possible. Work on the mapping of study areas has been completed and reported on in the April, 1966 Job Completion Report for this study. No further work has been accomplished on the collection and recording of background information. OBJECTIVE To determine supplemental the value of development of wintering grounds through feed on wild turkey number, distribution and harvest. the use of TECHNIQUES 10 Collect and record background information. 2. M~p study areas. 3. Determine annual popUlation 4. Determine annual reproductive 5. Determine seasonal 6. Determine turkey 7. Provide supplemental levels through success distribution feed within through through kill and hunting wintering flock counts. brood counts. field checks. preSSUl"e through selected period hunter checks. areas and study effects. �- 191 EXPERIMENTAL HABITAT lliPROVEMENT FOR WILD TURKEYS Donald M. Hoffman Annual population levels. -- Annual population levels were again determined through flock and sex-ratio counts of birds on wintering grounds. Populations were found to be more stable during the wintering period of 1966-67 than during the two previous wintering periods. A total of 395 wild turkeys in 11 wintering flocks was counted during the 1966-67 period within the extensive study area of approximately 900 square miles of range. The locat ions of these flocks with numbers of birds indicated are shown in Figure 2. This population is 12 birds less than the 407 birds counted during the 1965~66 wintering period. Numbers of birds and locations of flocks for the 1966-67 wintering period are listed in Table 1. By type of area, 129 birds in five flocks (17 birds less than counted during the 1965-66 period) were counted in the five developmental study areas and 28 birds in three flocks (an equal number of birds and flocks to that counted during the 1965-66 period) were counted in the five control study areas. In addition, 238 birds in three flocks (five more birds than counted during the 1965-66 period) were counted in wintering areas not within the study or control areas. A sex-ratio of 46 males:100 females was calculated for the 1966-67 period, upon a sample of 251 Merriam's turkeys observed at close range (Table 1). based Brood Counts. Brood counts to determine reproductive success were continued within the various study areas and reports of broods were secured from individuals considered to be reliable. Table 2 summarizes the results of these surveys. An improved hatch was found during 1966 in comparison with 1965. Forty-one successful hens averaged 6.0 young per brood during 1966 compared with an average of 5.7 young per brood for 21 successful hens during 1965. During 1966, six broods with a total of 37 young were counted by the writer and the remainder were reported by various other individuals. In Sarcillo Canyon where five different hens were observed to be successful in raising broods, eight hens with no young ranged most of the summer and a flock of li, hens with no young was counted on September 20, 1966. This indicates a high percentage of broodless hens for this area. It is not known if this was also the case for the other areas. Seasonal distribution. -- Information on movement of birds, most probably from the Copper King Gulch wintering area (elevation 8,250 feet) t owa rd summer range based upon bbservation of birds or field sign at various checkpoints was again recorded during 1966. It was observed that wild turkeys had reached the top of the Sangre de Cristo Range in the vicinity of Indian Creek Pass (elevation 9,500 feet) by late April, 1966. This was approximately one month earlier than observed during 1964 and 1965 and reflects the mild open weather conditions prevailing during the early spring period of 1966. Elevational checks of spring and summer observations nesting sites, field signs, and known kill locations of 1964 through 1966 are summarized in Table 3. of adult birds, broods, during the hunting seasons �Table 1. -- Wintering populations and sex-ratios of Merriam's turkeys - October, 1966-March, 1967. Wintering Popula tion J..7 Type of area Area Developmental (D) 1. Hiddle Creek 2. East Indian Creek 3. Cucharas River 4. Wahatoya Canyon-Bear Creek Hesa 5. North Trujillo Creek-Mavricio Canyon Sub-totals Control (C) 1. Huerfano River-Hosea Pass 2. Pass Creek 3. Santa Clara Creek 4. Wilkins Creek-Whiskey Creek 5. North Fork Sub-totals Other (0) 3 1. Sarcil10 Canyon _I 2. Burro Canyon 3. Del Aqua Canyon 4. Apishapa Canyon 5. Abbotts Creek-Duling Creek 6. Wet Canyon 7. School Creek Sub-totals TOTALS Adult Males Juv. Males Hens 7 2 15 17 3 9 6 8 7 Total Number Flocks 6 15 32 12 1 1 1 FC FC FC 1-23-67 1-10-67 & 3-14-67 2-20-67 20 26 1 FC 2-20-67 ng 1 FC 2-13-67 & 2-21-67 Lti 1-25-67 29 44 2 Source _I 7I TI /lJ 2 1 9 12 1 Fe 7 7 1 o o RR RR FC RR 9 9 11 1 16 22 12 42 25 19 o 12 25 86 172 ) 1 o o 28 3 76 1 o o 77 102 1 o o 41 60 1 o o o 238 395 3 o 22 54 Dates of Best Counts Un c La ss, U8 144 FC RR RR, FC RR RR, FC RR RR U 11 Populations were more stable than observed during previous years. 11 Key to abbrev.:FC-F1ock counts; RR-Rancher or other report. 11 Seven mature toms and twelve hens (total 19) live-trapped and removed from area during period. Indicated sex-ratio = 46 ma1es:100 females based upon sample of 251 birds. Supplemental feed provided by landowners or others in areas C1, 03, and 05. I--' 1-26-67 2-21-67 & 3-8-67 3-2-67 1-26-67 is �.- 193 - Table 2. -- Summary of brood count information - 1966. Type of Area Hens Poults Developmental (5 areas) Control (5 areas) Other areas Totals 13 7 21 41 75 39 133 247 Average Average brood size 5.8 5.6 6.3 6.0 Elevational checks of late fall and winter observations through 1966-67 are summarized in Table 4. of birds for 1963-64 Approximate elevations of vegetational zones and communities within the extensive study area based upon altimeter readings secured along five routes are listed in Table 5. The regular late March. 1967. spring dispersal during 1967 had started in most wintering areas by Green grass was available in most wintering areas by mid-February, Kill and hunting pressure. -- Merriam's turkey kill and indicated hunting pressure within Game Management Unit Number 85, comprising all of the extensive study area except for the Huerfano River-Mosca Pass and Pass Creek control study areas are summarized in Table 6. The kill of turkeys within Unit Number 85 in 1966 during the open season October 1-9 was 70 birds higher (110 in 1966 compared to 40 in 1965) than killed in 1965 during both the April 10-18 and October 2-10 seasons according to Game Management Division data. Numbers of hunters increased from 109 to 174. Much of the increase in hunting pressure and kill is thought to result from the Departmental purchase and experimental management practices on the Spanish Peaks Management Area in upper Sarcillo Canyon. The number of turkeys killed in 1966 (110) is approximately 27 percent of the minimum wintering population of 407 counted during the previous (1965-66) wintering period. With the acquiring of the Spanish Peaks Management Area in upper Sarcillo Canyon and cooperation from Southeast Region personnel, an accurate check on hunting pressure and turkey kill for this area has been secured. A census on September 20, 1966, ten days prior to the opening of the 1966 season, by the wr Lter showed a minimum of 83 birds in five flocks in the area. These flocks included three hens with 20 young, 13 hens and young, 14 hens with no young, 21 yearling and two-year old toms, and 12 old mature toms. In upper Sarcillo Canyon, including the Spanish Peaks Management area proper, and the McDonald Brothers and John Serra properties (approximately 10,000 acres of range), seventy different turkey hunters (repeats eliminated) killed a total of 22 wild turkeys during the October 1-9, 1966 open seRson. These included seven mature hens, four juvenile hens, eight mature toms, two juvenile toms, �Table 3. -- Summary of spring, summer, and early fall periods Merriam's turkey distribution checks 1/ Number Observations Year 1964 5 2 27 4 19 3 Sub-total Range Mean 1965 (it) 8,650 9,550 8,400 8,950 8,850 7,600 7,200 to 10,200 3 17 11 49 5 Spring gobbler season kill locations (Apr. 10-18) Nesting site locations Brood rearing locations Adult birds observed locations Field sign locations Fall season kill locations (Oct. 2-10) 7,800 to 8,050 8,700 to 9,300 7,500 to 9,500 7,700 to 10,500 7,700 to 10,500 7,200 to 9,200 8,650 7,950 8,900 8,200 8,450 ij,750 8,100 87 7,200 to 10,500 8,550 1966 2 25 15 33 4 Sub-total Range Nean Mean Elevation 60 2 Sub-total Range Mean Type 0 f Data ]:/ Spring gobbler season kill locations (May 2-12) Nesting site locations Brood rearing locations Adult birds observed locations Field sign locations Fall season kill locations (Oct. 3-11) Elevationa1 Range (ft) 7,800 to 9,500 9,250 to 9,800 7,200 to 10,200 8,100 to 9,300 7,900 to 10,050 7,200 to 7,800 No spring gobbler season held in 1966 Nesting site locations Brood rearing locations Adult birds observed locations Field sign locations Fall season kill locations (Oct. 1-9) 8,800 to 10,500 7,400 to 10,000 7,500 to 10,400 7,200 to 11,100 7,200 to 9,200 9,650 8,200 7,950 8,900 8,200 79 7,200 to 11,100 1/ Period early Nay to late September except for open seasons where dates are listed. 1/ Nesting site locations - including harem flocks observed or nesting hen field sign observed; Brood rearing locations - includes locations where broods observed or reported; Field sign locations - includes observations of droppings, tracks, shed feathers, scratchings, or reports. 8,600 f-' \0 +" �- 195 - Table 41 -- Summary of late fall and winter periods Merriam's checks _I Period Number Observations 1963-64 1964-65 1965-66 1966-67 25 22 16 14 J./ Period December 1 to March Elevational Range (f't) 7,200 7,200 7,200 7,200 Mean Elevation (ft) to 8,600 to 9,000 to 8,500 to 9,250 7,900 8,100 8,050 8,200 15. Table 5. -- Approximate elevations extensive study area ~I Vegetational Zone Pinon-juniper turkey distribution of vegetational zones and communities within Range in Elevations Vegetational Community (f t ) Below 6,000 to 8,600 Gambel's oak (found within both pinon-juniper and ponderosa pine zones) Ponderosa pine White firblue spruce-aspen 7,100 to 9,500 7,200 to 9,500 8,200 to 10,000 Lodgepole pine (found in limited areas only) Engelmann sprucealpine fir-aspen 9,600 to 10,000 10,000 to timberline (11,500) Bristlecone pine (fo~nd in limited areas only) 9,400 toll, 100 1/ Based upon altimeter 11 Elevations, particularly within the ponderosa pine zone, were found to vary as much as 1,000 feet according to wet or dry site conditions. Average elevations are therefore listed. readings secured along five routes. and one unclassified or six juvenile birds and fifteen mature birds. The total number killed (22) as determined by hunter checks was approximately 27 percent of the minimum pre-season population. Developmental work. -- Developmental work again consisted of prOViding supplemental feed in the form of baled oat hay, whole oats, and/or whole maize w i t hLn the five developmental study areas and in upper Sarcillo Canyon from early November, 1966 through mid-March, 1967 for the most part. The whole grain was putchased locally and the baled oat hay was raised on the Spanish Peaks Management Ar ca . Eccd ground s were sorv i ccd weekly on A regular bas i.s , FiclcI checks of both developmental and control study areas were made to determine populations, �Table 6. -- Merriam's turkey kill and hunting pressure within Open season Dates Year 1966 Field Checks Number Number Turkeys Hunters extensive study area. ura inage and area Type of Area Approximate Elevation (ft.) Game Mgmt. Div. Dat~7 Number Number Turkeys Hunters No Spring Season Oct. 1-9 Tota Is 3 3 Spring Creek, San Isabel N.F. D 9,200 1 2 Niddle Creek. Niddlemist River D 8,500 22 70 Sa rc i Ll,o Can. 1/ State land, NcDonald and Serra Ranches o 7,900 4 17 Del Aqua Can. Zele Ranch o 7,250 30 92 1/ For Unit Number 1/ During big game season October 85. f-' \0 0\ 110 110 174 174 Data from hunter report cards. 22-31, 1966, 44 deer hunters killed 5 deer on Spanish Peaks Management Area. �- 197 - distribution, periods of use, and record information disease, crippling incidence, and poaching activity. on factors such as predation, Figure 1 shows the location of a feedground on North Trujillo Cr eek late in the winter of 1966-67. Forty-four turkeys wintered in this area and only three bales of oat hay remain from the eleven stacked at this site. In several instances, turkeys had scratched through up to 14 inches of snow to feed at these sites. Table 7 lists the amounts and costs of supplemental feed used during the wintering period of 1966-67. Table 8 lists information on the periods of use, times of movement to wintering areas, and times of spring dispersal for the third year of this deve lopmenta 1 wo rk , Mature gobblers were most often the last to arrive on the wintering gounds and small groups of toms remained in the vicinity of the w i nt er Lng grounds a f t er most of the other birds h<ld left in several instances. Of the five developmental study areas, three (East Indian Creek, Bear Creek Nesa, and North Trujillo Creek) had consistently heavy use of the feedgrounds from early December, 1966 through mid-Harch, 1967 and the other two (Nidd lc Creek and Cu cha ras River) had consistently he a vy use from early .Ianua ry , 1967 through mid-March, 1967. Periods of heaviest use of feedgrounds could again be correlated with weather conditions. Experimental habitat development work by the Southeast Region on the Spn n i sh Peaks Management Area during 1966 consisted of planting two fields of six and nine acres each to cultivated oats and the total elimination of domestic livestock grazing from the p<lstures formerly used during the ",inter period by the previous owne r . Nine acres of the cu lt iv a t cd oa t s were cut and 145 ba Le s we re stacked for use during the w i.nt er period. The remaining six acres were left standing. This field wa s used regularly by the wild turkey flocks and a herd of deer during the wintering period of 1966-67. Environmentcll factors u Heather. -- Continuous wca t hc r information wa s again collected at two stations during this reporting period w i t h the results summa r i zed in Tables 9 and 10. One we a t he r station is located within the Copper King Gulch w Lnr cr i.ng a rca , northwest of the Spanish Peaks, at an elev~tion of 8,000 feet and the other is located wi.t h i.n the Sarcillo Canyon wintering area, southeast of the Span i sh Pe ak s , at an elevation of 7,900 feet. The Heather during the 1966-67 winter period was ch~racterized by mild, open weather until early February, 1967. During February, 45 inches of snow fell at the Copper King Gulch station. The weather bad moderated by miel-Ma:t;"ch, 1967 and the wintering concentrations of wild turkeys were observed to start dispersingin late Harch fer most areas. Total amounts of moisture showed improvement eluring the winter of 1966-67 compared with the previous winter of 1965-66. Snowfall amounts recorded for the period September, 1966 through March, 1967 were LaVeta (elevation 7,050 feet) 61 inches and Copper King Gulch (elevation 8,000 feet) 104 inches. Snowfall amounts in inches by months during this period at the Copper King Gulch station were as follows: �- 198 - Figure 1. -- A baled oat hay feedground on North Trujillo Creek late in the winter of 1966-67 showing heavy use. (D. Hoffman, photo) �Table 7. -- Amounts and costs of supplemental ------ Whole oats (lbs.) Whole maize (lbs.) Oat Hay (bales) Cost of feed Number turkeys w i nt.e r e d Average cost per bird 1/ Nineteen of these --~---- Developmental Areas Bear Creek North Trujillo Creek Hesa East Indian Creek Cucharas River 620 1,240 940 12 $27.94 11 $45.09 300 40 5 $13.81 12 $37.22 850 225 14 $41. 67 26 44 :'iiddle Creek Item feed - 1966-67. turkeys 15 32 12 live-trapped and removed from area. -- Other Sarcillo Canyon Total -460 42 $45.90 3,950 725 96 $211.63 76 1/ $ 205 1.03 f-" '-0 '-0 �Table 8. -- Infonnation on use of experimental w i n t e r Lng grounds Time feeding started Type of area Ar e a Developmental Hiddle Creek No utilization Light utilization Heavy utilization Time of spring dispersa 1 Nov., 66 early Nov., 66late Dec., 66 mid Mar., 67late Mar., 67 early .Jan , , 67mid Mar., 67 late early Nov., 66 -- early Nov., 66late Nov., 66 early Dec., 66mid Mar., 67 mid Mar., 67 early Jan., 67 -- mid Mar., 67late Mar., 67 early Jan., 67mid Mar., 67 late Mar., 67 Bear Creek Mesa early Nov, , 66 -- early Nov., 66late Nov., 66 early Dec., 66mid Mar., 67 late Mar., 67 North Truj illo Creek early Nov., -- early Nov., 66late Nov., 66 early Dec., 66mid Mar., 67 late Mar., 67 Sarcillo early -- early Nov., 66late Mar., 67 late Mar., 67 Indian Cucharas Creek River 66 Other Dates j) early East 1/ - 1966-67. are Canyon approximate Nov., and were determined 66 by weekly - checks of areas. YJ.8r., 67 I\) 0 0 �Table 9. -- Annual summary of climatological data - East Indian Creek Study Area - 1966-67. Copper King Gulch Elevation 81000 feet. Year 1966 Honth Ha x , April Hay June July August September October November December 70 79 89 90 83 83 73 65 59 Temeerature. Air OF }lean Mean \.Jeekly Weekly Ha x , Min. Min. 68.4 76.3 80.2 86.8 81.0 79.6 68.5 61.3 52.0 - 1 20 31 40 35 22 6 8 -10 11.4 26.3 32.4 43.5 37.3 30.0 13.3 13.3 - 1.3 Re 1. Hum. % Mean of Mean of Precip. Weekly Weekly Inches Water Max. & Min. Max.&Min. 39.9 51.3 57.2 65.1 59.1 54.8 40.6 40.6 25.4 34.4 41.6 36.8 39.4 41.0 40.2 34.5 34.5 32.5 2.22 2.23 1.10 1.88 3.14 0.94 0.57 0.57 1.55 Station No. 1 Site Wind Total Miles Mean Vel. Mph 3,347.9 3,240.9 2,713.1 1,586.5 1,480.4 2,581. 5 2,988.5 2,988.5 1,109.8 4.2 4.5 3.3 2.4 2.2 3.0 4.3 4.3 1.3 . ro 1967 January February March 55 53 65 52.0 49.3 59.3 - 6 -13 -12 Average Total Instruments 72.0 67.9 10.0 0 - 2.1 4.4 4.7 .5 - 3.0 3.3 25.3 23.1 31.3 34.1 33.5 34.4 17.1 42.6 2,486.9 3.5 17.78 Hygrothermograph Precipe Totalizing, 3-cup guage anemometer Maximum, minimum thermometers and hygrothermograph 36.3 0.64 2.53 0.85 1,391.1 2,922.8 3,163.2 f-' �- 202 Figl,lre2. Approximate locations of 11 wintering flocks during 1966-67 period with numbers of birds indicated. �Table 10. -- Annual summary of climatological data - Sarcillo Canyon Study Area - 1966-67. Spanish Peak_sHanagement Area Elevation 72900 feet. Year 1966 Honth Ha x , Mean Weekly ~lax. April Hay June July August September October November December 77 87 92 92 84 82 76 71 67 72.4 80.8 83.2 88.8 82.5 80.0 74.5 67.0 61 0 0 Station No. 2 Site Temperature, Air of Rel. Hum. % Mean Mean of Hean of Precipe Weekly Weekly Weekly Inches Hin. Min. Max.&Min Hax.&Min. Water Total Hiles Hean Vel. Hph. 2 22 37 37 36 25 14 9 -10 1.29 0.77 1.55 6.68 6.47 0.52 0~30 0.21 0.43 1,542.1 1,818.8 1,336.8 551.8 617.7 1,040,1 1,988.0 2,339.5 1,351.2 1.8 2.6 1.6 0,9 0.8 1.4 3.0 3.5 1.6 o 15.6 28.3 39.4 44.5 38.3 34.0 17.0 13.0 - 1.0 44.0 54.5 61.3 66.6 60.4 57.0 45.8 40.0 30.1 46.5 45.8 50.4 58.6 54.4 52.5 45.4 46.8 45.1 Wind , I\) 1967 0 January February Harch Average Total Instruments 65 63 71 77.2 61.0 58.5 67.8 73.1 - 8 - 8 - 6 12.5 Maximum, minimum thermometers and hygrothermograph .8 - 20 -11.8 20.0 0 35.9 28.1 39.8 47.0 49.3 46.5 45.9 48.9 0.43 1.22 0.31 20.18 Hygrothermograph Precipe guage 1,404.9 1,550.0 1,646.5 1,432.3 2.1 2.3 2.5 2.0 Totalizing, 3-cup anemometer w �- 204 September, 1966 October, 1966 November, 1966 December, 1966 J~nuary, 1967 February, 1967 March, 1967 Total o Trace 4 17 17 45 21 104 Natural food production. -- Poor winter and spring mositure during 1966 resulted in the lowest natural food production level recorded since these checks were started in 1964. Heavy rains during late July and early August of 1966 in most turkey ranges came too late to benefit mast and berry crops but grasses and weeds we re greatly benefited. Ponderosa pine and pinon pine had a distinct lack of cones. Acorns were variable in production with only a poor to fair crop being produced in most areas checked. Wild berries as rose, snowberry, and skunkberry showed poor crops of fruit in ~bst areas. Population limiting factors. -- One hen carcass thought to have been killed by turkey hunters but not found was observed near the roosting area at the Spanish Peaks Management Area after the fall season closed. No other instances of crippled, porting period and no instances or disease:d birds were observed during this reof illegal kills have been observed or reported. .' ~ ~" " ,~ :~ ~ x fl ;'>! h . ,~! l,~ ;\ Prepared Date: by: Donald M. Hoffman Wildlife Researcher April , 1967 Approved by: Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief Ferd C. K1einschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �April, 1967 - 205 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO ------~~~~~------------ Project No. Work Plan No. Title of Job: 14 Job No. 12 Use of Food Plotn to Concentrate Period Covered: April Personnel: Game Bird Survey W-37-R-20 Wild. Turkeys 1, 1966 through M3.rch 31, 1967 Special thanks are due Harold David for assistance with fencing and selection of study sitesj Bob Mangus helped select study sites and haul equipment. Richard DeHaven, Max Torres, and Kent Jackson moved farm equipment to and from the fields. Funds to pay for plowing and planting were provided by the Southwest Region of the Game, Fish and Parks Department. The U. S. Forest Service, Miguel District, provided the land on which this study is being conducted. ABSTRACT The purpose of this study is to determine the effects of small food plots on fall concentrations and harvest of wi.ld t.ur-keys . '1\.10 ten acre fields, one at 7,200 feet elevation and the other at 8,300 feet elevation, located in good turkey hab i t.at on the Uncompahgre Plateau, are being used for this purpose. '1\.{0 acres of proso and two acres of millet we re planted in both fields during June, 1966. A good stand of each crop came up in the lower field, but millet grain produc tion wa s poor. Both crop.s failed in the upper plot. In September, the remaining area in eo.ch fielcl was sowed to equal acreages of barley, rye, and whent. 'I'heupper f'Le Ld vva s.planted in a pattern so that each crop was e qua lly available to turkeys. The planting pattern will permit the use of sto t.Lst i.cs to determine wh lch crop turkeys prefer. Checks made before, during and after the turkey seauons indicate that neither food plot was used by t.ur'keys durLng 1966. �- 206 INTRODUCTION At least 500 turkeys wintered in different areas on the Uncompahgre Plateau in past years. These turkeys had a potential to increase to almost 3,000 birds in one year, yet only 1,217 turkeys were harvested in this area between 1954 and the end of 1965. Winter census indicates that the unharvested surplus was not carried over from one year to the next. Apparently turkeys were wasted because this bird population was inadequately harvested, yet an adequate harvest is difficult to obtain. A liberal bag limit of three birds per year in conjunction with a spring, fall, and winter turkey season was held in 1964. This season bribed more turkey hunters into the field than ever before, but many of the new turkey hunters gave up the sport because they were unable to locate turkeys to hunt. Birds were difficult to find because they were widely scattered over a large area. Toms we re distributed over 1,230 square miles of range during the spring season. There was one small group of gobblers for every 6,000 to 9,000 acres of habitat. If this same area contained 3,000 turkeys during the October season, when there might be 15 or more turkeys to a flock, there probably would have been one flock of birds to every 4,000 acres of habitat. During November, birds were concentrated in smaller areas and larger groups, but by then many of the hunters had given up_ The wasted surplus of turkeys might have been salvaged if these birds could have been concentrated during the turkey seasons. Investigations have been in progress for one year, although the plots were fenced and planted to spring wheat in 1965. Objectives. --To determine the effects of small food plots on fall concentrations and harvest of wild turkeys. 1. Determine which of five different crops mature and produce grain under dryland conditions at 7,200 and 8,300 feet elevation on the Uncompahgre Plateau. 2. Determine whe t her turkeys are concentrated at the food plantings during the October and November turkey seasons. J. Determine wh i.c h crops, of those gro\om, are preferred Techniques. by turkeys. -- 1. Two acres each of proso, foxtail millet, barley, whe a t , and rye were planted in two ten acre fields to determine which crops "Jill gr ow in the study areas, The proso and foxtail millet were planted on June 14 and 15. Other crops were seeded on September 21. 2. The number of turkeys and abundance of droppings seen in food plots prior to, during, and after the October and November turkey seasons were recorded. 3. The third objective, that of c1etennining which crops are preferred by turkeys, is being carried out at the upper field. The lower plot is not suited to this type of study because of its irregular sh<Jpe. a. The upper plot was divided into twenty-five 0.4 acre plots and pl<Jnted in a pattern so that each crop was equally ava i Labl.c to turkeys. b. Turkeys did not use food plots so preferences for a p<Jrticul<Jrcrop could not be determined of turkeys this year. �- 207 - USE OF FOOD PLOTS TO CONCENTRATE WILD TURKEYS Gary T. Myers Study area. --Two ten acre sites located on the Uncompahgre Plateau within the Uncompahgre National Forest were fenced by the Forest Service and planted to spring wheat by the Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department in 1965 to provide feed for wild turkeys. These fields are being used for the present study. One of the fields is situated at about 7,200 feet elevation on the rim above the San Miguel River north of McKenzie Creek on Craig Point in Section 21, Township 45 North, Range 97 West of the New Mexico Principal Meridian. Ponderosa pine, pinyon-juniper, oak brush, and grassland types are present in this area where more than 100 turkeys once wintered. Roost sites and water occur near the food plot. The other ten acre field lies at approximately 8,300 feet elevation near aspen, oak brush, ponderosa pine, sagebrush, and grassland types. This field is one mile north east of Lewis Reservoir between the Dave Wood Road and Horsefly Creek in Section 29, Township 46 North, Range 11 West of the New Mexico Principal Meridian. Roost sites are available near the food plot, and a pond was built adjacent to the field in 1966. Wild turkeys usually frequent this area during late spring, summer, and fall. Climatic conditions. --Some idea of rainfall in the study areas can be gained by examining precipitation records from Sanborn Park which lies within six miles of each food plot at an elevation of about 7,600 feet. Average annual precipitation in Sanborn Park for the past 12 years (from 1955 through 1966) was 15.68 inches. Over 40% of this moisture fell during July, August, September, and October (Table 1). Even though a weather station is located within six miles of both food plots, precipitation may not be the same in the study area. Last year it rained several times at the weather station but not in the food plots. Next year a rain gauge will be placed at the edge of each field and checked morithly throughout the summer to see if rainfall in the study area corresponds to precipitation measured in Sanborn Park. This information will help explain why certain crops fail to mature. �- 208 - Food plot establtshrnent. --The food plots were chisel plowed two directions, harrowed, and seeded with a grain drill when the soil dried enough to be worked. Spring wheat was planted in the lower field on June 8, 1965, and in the upper field on June 14, 1965. Crop growth ended when a snow fell on September 20. Most of the wheat in both fields failed to mature, but one small flock of turkeys did use the upper food plot during the week prior to the October turkey season. No birds were killed in the vicinity of either food plot during 1965 and neither area received turkey use the following winter. Crop production. --The first objective was to find a crop that would grow in the study area. This study began in the springs of 1966. The field on Craig Point was chisel plowed two directions and harrowed. Two acres of proso and two acres of foxtail millet were planted on June 14, 1966, with a grain drill. The proso was seeded at 40 pounds per acre and the millet at 30 pounds per acre. A good stand of both proso and millet came up, but the millet produced little grain, probably because of slow growth due to poor moisture conditions during the summer. The remaining six acres in this field were cultivated on August 5, and planted to wheat, rye, and barley on September 21. Two acres of each crop were sowed with a grain drill at the following rates: Winter Wheat- - - - - - - - -75 pounds per acre Winter Rye- - - - - - - -70 pounds per acre Winter Barley- - - - - - - - - - - - 60 pounds per acre The upper field was divided into twenty-five plots, roughly 0.4 acres in size, and planted in a pattern so that each crop would be equally available to turkeys (Figure 1). Wheat stuble from the previous years crop was so dense in this field that a disc plow had to be used instead of the chisel plow. As a result, considerable soil moisture v':' lost. Two acres of proso and two acres of millet were drilled, iing to pattern, on June 15, 1966, at the same rate used in ti r field. A poor stand of both proso and millet came up, probably L" of inadequate moisture. A small amount of proso, and less milicl_, produced grain. The other six acres were seeded to equal amounts of wheat, rye, and barley on September 21, at previously mentioned rates in the specified pattern. Turkey use of food plots. --Another objective of this study was to determine whether turkeys were concentrated at the food plantings during the two turkey seasons. The first season continued from October 1, through October 9, and the second from November 19, through November 27. One turkey per year per person could be killed between sunrise and sunset with a long bow or 10, 12, 16, or 20-gauge shotgun. Turkey use was determined by recording the number of turkeys and abundance of droppings seen in food plots prior to, during, and after both turkey seasons. Checks made at these times indicated that turkeys did not use either food planting. No tracks, droppings, or birds were seen or reported in either arca , Howe ve r , at least: 40 birds ranged within three miles of the upper food plot before and during the Novcnilierseason. The �Table 1. -Average monthly precipitation falling in Sanborn Park during the past 12 years.* Year Honth 1955 1956 1957 1958 1959 1960 1961 1962 1963 1964 1965 1966 Average January February Harch April Nay June July August September October November December 1.02 2.02 .49 1.46 1.14 .41 1.44 1.41 .30 .16 1.48 .92 2.73 .53 .64 1.54 .30 .35 .88 .94 .37 1.03 .96 1.15 2.71 1.20 1.27 2.63 3.87 1.13 2.95 3.73 .01 4.41 1.77 1.01 1.42 1.58 1. 17 .62 .33 .63 .61 3.25 2.03 1.33 1.29 .56 .59 1.08 .53 1.26 .22 .49 .89 2.56 2.94 1.89 .45 1.13 1.22 2.28 1.56 .71 .39 .38 .34 .76 2.18 1.70 .64 1.16 .82 1.32 2.57 .99 .93 .39 .76 1.91 3.34 1.73 .80 1.14 .44 1.95 .76 .82 .72 .45 1.21 .70 2.85 1.42 1.05 1,02 1.10 1.32 .75 .23 .20 .25 1.77 3.71 .42 2.38 1.17 .75 .56 .49 1.75 1.74 .66 .37 2.01 2.51 1.60 .00 1.73 2.16 1.20 1.45 1.60 2.75 1.90 1.27 3.23 2.15 2.70 1.83 1.56 1.81 .43 .93 .09 .59 .63 1.51 1.35 2.28 1.37 1.04 1.0'5 1.16 1.19 1.35 1.10 1.28 0.94 0.64 1.45 2.16 1.67 1.58 1.16 1.16 Total 12.25 11.42 26.69 14.82 14.03 13.32 16.70 13.39 14.05 15.58 23.45 12.43 15.68 i', Information provided by Niguel District, U. S. Forest Service ro 0 \0 �- 210 - MIL. RYE BAR. PRO. INHE. 1------ BAR. PRO. WHE. MIL. RYE ------- ..---.- MIL. WHE. RYE BAR. f----- ------ RYE BAR. PRO. VlHE. -I--- PRO. Figure PRO. WHE. I. MIL. ---- MIL. RYE BAr.~• A food plot was divided and planted into this pattern to determine which crops are preferred by t ur key s , �- 211 - nearest flock, containing twelve birds, was about a mile from the planting in November. Most of these turkeys moved into Horsefly Canyon and wintered at least eight miles below the upper food plot. During November, the turkeys nearest the lower food plot were at least six miles away on North Creek. In December, about twelve birds moved into the lower food plot area to winter but were not utilizing food in the plot in January. Perhaps they will use green forage in the field this spring. Crop preference. --The final objective, to find which crop turkeys prefer, is to ,be determined at the upper food plot. The, field was divided and planted into the pattern shown in Figure 1 so that each crop would be equally available to birds. Since turkeys did not use the food plot, preferences were not determined. As expected, birds may be some time finding and using the food plots. Prepared Date: by: Gary T. Myers Asst. Wildlife April, 1967 Approved Researcher by: Donald M. Hoffman Wildlife Researcher Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator ��- 213 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO ------------------------- Project No. W-37-R-20 Work Plan No. 13 Game Bird Survey Job No. 6 Title of Job; Summarization of Sharp-tailed Grouse Studies Period Covered: April 1, 1966 to .March31, 1967 Personnel: Glenn E. Rogers Objective: To compile, analyze, summarize, and publish all Colorado sharptailed grouse information in technical bulletin form. Procedure; Findings obtained under Work Plan 13, Jobs 1 through 6, and data from sharp-tailed grouse investigations by other organizations were compiled within an appropriate outline. Findings: A completed manuscript has been submitted for final editing. Prepared by: Glenn E. Rogers Wildlife Researcher Date: April, 1967 Approved by: Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator ��April, 1967 - 215 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO Project No. W-37-R-20 Work Plan No. 15 Game Bird Survey Job No. Title of Job: Study of Mountain Quail Adaptability Period Covered: April 1, 1966 to March 31, 1967 Personnel: 2 Glenn E. Rogers, Gary T. Myers, Don W. Minnich and Wayne L. Russell ABSTRACT On August 21, 1966, Colorado received 164 mountain quail, including 23 adults and 141 young, from the California Fish and Game Department. These birds were released the same day on Indian Creek within the Uncompahgre National Forest, about four miles west of the 1965 releases. Three mountain quail were killed by hunters on November 19, 1966 in the East Fork Valley of Escalante Creek about 25 miles east of the release area. Reports indicate that 12 to 14 quail from the 1965 releases have remained on Indian Creek, while an unkno.m number have moved to Blue Creek about three miles south. �- 216 - INTRODUCTION The Indian Creek drainage of the Uncompahgre National ~orest was determined to be the most suitable area for trial releases of mountain quail in Colorado, under Work Plan 15, Job 1. A wildlife trade agreement involving mountain quail for Merriam's turkeys was made between the California Fish and Game Department and the Colorado Department of Game, Fish and Parks. Releases of mountain quail were made in 1965 and 1966 and 14 Merriam's turkeys were live-trapped and shipped to California. An evaluation of trial releases of mountain quail is being made under this job. OBJECTIVES 1. To release mountain quail in selected areas. 2. To determine of introduction. success PROCEDURES Wild mountain quail obtained to be most suitable. from California were released in areas determined People in the vicinity of the releases were informed of descriptions and habits of mountain quail through educational media available. We requested that sightings be reported to Colorado Department of Game, Fish and Parks personnel. Ranchers, sportsmen, and personnel of Federal and State agencies were contacted regarding numbers and locations of birds observed. Personal observations of birds were secured where possible. Reports and observations were recorded in tables and on maps to evaluate the degree of success obtained in establishing the species. �- 217 STUDY OF MOUNTAIN QUAIL ADAPTABILITY Glenn E. Rogers On August 20, 1966, a third shipment of mountain quail was received from the California Department of Fish and Game. A total of 164 birds, including 23 adults and 141 young, was sent. One young bird died enroute. The major airlines were on strike at this time and no commercial carrier would handle live birds. This strike presented additional problems in coordinating trapping and transportation. The problem was solved by sending the Colorado Department plane, piloted by Wayne Russell, to California to haul the birds. Gary T. Myers of Montrose accompanied the pilot to assist in any way possible. The birds arrived in Grand Junction at 2:00 p.m. on August 20, 1966, and were taken immediately to the west side of the Uncompahgre Plateau. They were released at 4:30 p.m. the same afternoon on Indian Creek. The release site was about four miles west and a thousand feet lower than the 1965 release site (figure 1). All birds released appeared to be in good condition and immediately began calling and feeding. On November 21, 1966, Gary Myers confiscated three mountain quail that had been killed by hunters on the 19th. The hunters stated that there were 12 birds in the group fired at and that more birds were heard calling in the area. Although the chukar partridge and Gambel's quail seasons were open, the hunters were specifically after wild turkeys. The quail were killed in the valley of the East Fork of Escalante Creek, about one and one-half miles above Pickett Corral and 25 airline miles east of the release site. The dead quail were sent to Colorado State University at Fort Collins for examination. A report from Clait Braun stated the body condition of the quail was good. The crops from these birds will be analyzed later by students at the University. In October, 1966, Mr. High, a State Mine Inspector, reported seeing 12 to 14 quail at a spring about one mile below the 1966 release site. Quail had been seen by him in February, 1966, in the same area. It is believed that these birds were part of the 1965 releases. In late fall of 1965, Mr. J. D. Sloggett of Grand Junction sighted an unknown number of quail on Blue Mesa. No additional reports have been received from miners and ranchers in this area. On December 30, 1966, 27 Merriam's turkeys were trapped by Gary Myers, Don Minnich, and myself, south of Montrose. Four toms and ten hens from this catch were shipped to Sacramento, California by air freight to complete our part of the trade commitment. Prepared Date: by: Glenn E. Rogers Asst. Wild1. Researcher April 1967 Approved by: Wayne W. Sandfort Game' Research Chief Ferd.C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �- 218 - T'T1t,/ e oS O=W;;:.,,!~ 5c.~lc: Figure 1. -- Locations of 1965-66 mountain quail releases and sightings. �April, 1967 - 219 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO --------~--~~--------- Project No. W-37-R-20 Game Bird Survey Job No. Work Plan No. 4 Title of Job: Frying Pan-Arkansas Project, Pueblo Reservoir Period Covered: April 1, 1966 through March 31, 1967 Personnel: Warren D. Snyder ABSTRACT The Pueblo Reservoir, as part of the Frying Pan-Arkansas Project, will lie to the west of Pueblo, Colorado on the Arkansas River. It is designed for irrigation and flood control and will have a conservation pool covering 4,640 acres. The reservoir at flood level will inudate 5,670 acres of fair to good cottontail and scaled quail habitat. Losses include existing populations of cottontails and scaled quail; losses of the two species to hunting at an estimated $500.00 annual loss; and loss of hunting opportunity valued at approximately $2,244.00 per year. Mitigation for upland game losses should include (1) extension of the take line to include 2,000 acres of range upstream from the reservoir, and (2) development of an effective habitat improvement program to increase numbers of the two species on the public area. The Colorado Department of Game, Fish and Parks should be given regulatory power over the site with respect ~o development and management for recreational purposes. ��- 221 - Frying Pan-Arkansas Project, Pueblo Reservoir Warren D. Snyder This report summarizes a study of the impact of the Pueblo Reservoir on upland game bird resources and hunting opportunity. This reservoir, scheduled for completion in 1972, is located on the Arkansas River a few miles west of Pueblo, Colorado. It is part of the Fryingpan-Arkansas Project and will be used primarily for storage of irrigation water. As a resutt it will have a fluctuating water level. Plans at present call for a conservation pool that will not exceed 4,880 6 feet elevation and cover 4,640 acres. The minimum pool will normally occupy 1,670 acres. 0 The Pueblo Reservoir is also designed as a flood control structure. At maximum flood control capacity it will inundate approximately 5,670 acres of the Arkansas riverbottom. Its proximity to the city of Pueblo will mean that a third use, recreation, will be an important function of the reservoir and adjacent areas. Camping, boating, sight-seeing, fishing and hunting will be important uses of the site. Existing Habitat. -- The bottomlands at the site of the proposed reservoir contain a variety of vegetation. Portions of the area are irrigated farmland. Shortgrass pastures occupy large areaso Some large groves of mature cottonwoods also exist. The better cover for wildlife is found along the river banks, irrigation canals and fence rows. Willows, rabbitbrush, snakeweed and a variety of grasses and forbs are present. Steep canyon walls border the bottom1ands throughout most of the reservoir site. South facing slopes are sparsely occupied by skunkbush, tree cactus, snakeweed and grasses. On north facing slopes pinyon-juniper species are added to the list. The canyon walls extend away from the river bottoms in many places where tributaries enter. Small springs occur at or near the heads of some of these side canyons. Relief varies from 200 to 300 feet in the area. Bordering upland areas are predominately shortgrass range. Tree cactus, snakeweed and pinyon-juniper appear in occasional to moderately dense occurrences. Soils tend to be shallow. Annual precipitation averages approximately 11 to 12 inches (Hoffman, 1965). Upland Game. -- Scaled quail and cottontails are the only upland game of significance in the proposed reservoir site. Pheasants are almost nonexistent in the area according to the district wildlife conservation officer (Kent, personal correspondence, January, 1966). The range for pheasants would have to be classed as poor. Losses of Upland Game. -- Approximately 4,640 acres of land in the conservation pool will be permanently lost as upland game habitat. An additional 1,030 acres within the flood pool will be occasionally inundated, and therefore, will be of little value to wildlife. �- 222 - Accurate population figures for scaled quail and cottontails in the reservoir area do not exist. Numbers of both species fluctuate widely from one year to the next. Scaled quail probably do not average more than twenty to twenty-five birds per square mileo This would mean there are approximately 200 birds in the reservoir area. Estimates of cottontails would range somewhat higher. The Pueblo Reservoir will increase the supply of additional irrigation water,to downstream farming areas. It is not expected to increase the amount of land under irrigation to any significant degree but will overcome water shortages that presently exist. Therefore, it probably will not increase downstream wildlife populations. Harvest and Hunter Use Loss. -- The average seasonal harvest of scaled quail in southeastern Colorado approximates five birds per hunter each season (Grieb and Hunter, 1965). It is estimated that approximately twelve quail hunters presently utilize the reservoir site annually. They contribute approximately $386 00 through this recreation to the State's economy each year. 1/ 0 The Grieb and Hunter (1963 and 1965) reports indicate that about 1800 hunters pursue rabbits annually in Pueblo County. The average seasonal harvest is five rabbits per hunter. Annual harvest on the proposed Pueblo Reservoir site probably averages 250 rabbits harvested by 50 hunters. This recreation is valued at $1,768 00 per year o 0 CONCLUSIONS Losses resulting from construction of the Pueblo Reservoir will include: Loss of 5,670 acres of fair to good scaled quail range. Loss of 5,670 acres of fair to good cottontail Loss of all scaled quail and cottontail site. Estimated annually. populations on the reservoir losses of 50 scaled quail and 250 cottontails to hunters The value of these would be estimated at roughly $500.00. Loss of hunting per year. opportunity Loss of rabbit hunting value of $1,906.00. 1./ range. for 12 quail hunters valued at $338.00 opportunity for 50 hunters with an annual Recreational monetary values are based on a report put out each year by the management section of the Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department. �- 223 - RECOMMENDATIONS Mitigation and Enhancement for Upland Game Two revenue sources are available for replacement and development of upland game populations. These include (1) compensatory funds resulting from removal of lands, habitat, upland game and hunting opportunity; and (2) funds for enhancement of upland game resources under a federal government - Colorado Game, Fish, and Parks cost sharing program. Excellent opportunities exist for mitigation of the removal of wildlife and wildlife habitat. Land acquisition and habitat improvement are the principal factors involved. Efforts should be directed toward cottontails and scaled quail since they are best adapted to the environment. Conditions for upland game, in general, are more attractive within the proposed reservoir site than in adjacent areas. Most of the surrounding locality is dominated by shortgrass pasture that has been heavily grazed for years. It is not easily diverted into food and cover producing habitat essential to upland game. The canyon walls and adjacent stands of tree cactus, shrubs and trees provide fair potential for development. However, south and southwest facing slopes receive direct heat from the sun through most of the year. Vegetative food and cover of any kind is sparse. North and northwest facing slopes provide good summer range for scaled quail and rabbits, but they are shaded, cold and windswept in the winter. Bottomland areas adjacent to canyon walls serve as important feeding areas for scaled quail and cottontails. In many areas these will be inundated by water. Some of the better scaled quail and cottontail range is upstream from the reservoir. It is proposed that the take line be extended to include land one-half mile on either side of the river for at least three miles above the upper end of the reservoir. This would include a minimum of 2,000 additional acres of land. The existing take line surrounding the reservoir includes most of the side canyons. A few coveys could be established in new locations. It is recommended that the area within the take line adjacent to the reservoir not be decreased. A well planned development program should be initiated to numerically increase scaled quail and cottontails in public areas adjacent to the reservoir. Recommendations for inclusion within the program are listed as follows. (1) Preliminary consideration should be given to other public uses of the reservoir. Boating, fishing, camping, picnicing, hiking and sightseeing will take priority in several locations around the reservoir. Public use of such areas will be heavy. Habitat manipulation should not be attempted at these sites. �- 224 - (2) Livestock grazing should be halted on all puLlic lands for a period of not less than five years. If renewed, it should be only in locations of little or no value to wildlife and on a restricted basis. Revenue obtained from grazing should be used to maintain fences and manipulate habitat for wildlife. (3) Access roads to hunting the reservoir. areas should be constructed on both sides of (4) Habitat manipulations should be established at carefully selected sites adjacent to and above the reservoir. Manipulations recommended for use include: (a) Sites that already possess scaled quail or near-adequate habitat should receive priority for development. Fewer alterations are needed on sites that already possess most of the species needs. (b) Construction of brush piles and other resting cover for scaled quail and cottontails. Trees removed from the reservoir basin could be used advantageously here. (c) Development of springs which exist in tributary canyons. Priority should be given to development of green, succulent vegetation. (d) Construction of check dams on side drainages to retain water for stimulation of food and cover producing vegetation. (e) Construction of terraces above and below canyon walls for stimulation of food producing vegetation. Reseeding of annual and perennial food producing species is recommended. Destruction of sod strips in other locations adjacent to cover would stimulate growth of food producing vegetation. (f) Tree cactus should be transplanted as cover where needed to aid in establishing new covey home ranges. These could be obtained from the reservoir basin. They can be transplanted without watering and cultivation with near complete survival. The larger plants, two and three feet in height, furnish ready made cover. (g) Due to the aridity of the region deciduous and evergreen tree plantings should be restricted to only a few choice sites where moisture is received from springs or rainfall collecting aprons. Priority species would include native junipers and skunkbush. �- 225 - (5) Windbreaks are not recommended habitat improvements to mitigate wildlife losses. If established, they should be primarily a parks function for scenic enhancement of the area. Therefore, it is recommended that enhancement funds be used to establish and maintain them. If possible, they should be irrigated. Their value to wildlife would be secondary. It is recommended that the Colorado Department of Game, Fish, and Parks be given regulatory power over Pueblo Reservoir and surrounding lands with respect to management for recreational purposes. The Parks Division, which would have the major responsibility, should' coordinate its efforts with wildlife and fishery interests to develop and maintain a quality public use area. REFERENCES Grieb, J. R., and G. N. Hunter. 1963 Colorado small game hunter harvest survey -- 1962. Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Dept., Fed. Aid Project W-88-R. 52 pp. Mimeo. 0 harvest survey -- 1965. Fed. Aid Project W-88-R. 1966. Colorado small game hunter Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Dept., 23 pp. Mimeo. Hoffman, D. M. 1965. The scaled quail in Colorado -- range, population status, and harvest. Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Dept. Tech. Publ. No. 18. 47 pp. Kent, W. L. 1966. Personal Pueblo Reservoir area. Prepared Date: letter covering game populations dtd. January 18, 1966. by:__~W~a~r~r~e~n~D~._S~n~y=d=e~r Approved ~A~p~r~1~·1~1~9~6~7 _ in the by:__~H~a~r~o~l~d~M~.~S~w~o=p~e~~ _ Wildlife Researcher Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Fed. Aid Coordinator ��April, 1967 - 227 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO --------~~~~---------- Project No. W-37-R-20 Work Plan No. 16 Game Bird Survey Job No. 8 Title of Job: Upper South Platte Project, Two Forks Reservoir Period Covered: April 1, 1966 to March 31, 1967 Personnel: Harold M. Swope ABSTRACT Reporting responsibil~ty for this job has been assigned to w-88-R. Due to the nature of findings, however, reporting will be made under W-37-R. Information received from the Bureau of Reclamation indicated that the Hudson Reservoir, the only portion of the Two Forks project that will affect upland game, will not be constructed for at least 10 years. The Chatfield Project diverted attention from the Two Forks complex. A letter recommending proposed use of the Chatfield site was sent to water resource personnel. �- 228 - Objectives: (1) To investigate the possible effects of the project on: a. Loss of pheasant range. b. Alteration c. Restriction of game bird movement because of reservoir, canals, roads, fences, human activities, etc. d. Loss of birds through drowning, etc. e. Hunter access and hunting. f. Possible conflicts tionists. in proportions of available range types. increased traffic hazzards, of interest between hunters and recrea- (2) To investigate the possibility for State control of lands within the project area as concerns the management and welfare of pheasants. (3) To investigate whether means of migating losses to and/or enhancing upland game bird values exist and suggest what these might be. Techniques Used: General reservoir reports and plans. site reconnaissance and review of available Recommendations: A letter of recommendation on the Chatfield Reservoir was sent to Chief Wildlife Water Resource Specialist Pete Barrows. The contents of this letter are included under Findings. In a discussion with Bureau of Reclamation official Mr. Richard Eggen it was learned that the Hudson Reservoir portion of the Upper South Platte Project will not be considered for at least ten years. Field data pertaining to this project should be obtained closer to the time of project construction. Reconnaissance surveys made at this time would have to be repeated in ten or more years to assure validity. �- 229 - Upper South Platte Project, Two Forks Reservoir Harold M. Swope As reported in the W-37-R-19 Game Research Report (April, 1966) the disastrous flood of 1965 diverted attention from the Two Fork Reservoir to the Chatfield project. The Chatfield development is being pushed with much haste and a report was requested as to its potential for upland game development. This information was submitted in the form of a letter to the Department's Chief Wildlife Water Resource Specialist Paul T. BArrows. The contents of this letter follow. April 14, 1967 Dear Mr. Barrows: Within the last year I have visited the proposed Chatfield Reservoir site on two occasions, with a view toward making recommendations for future recreational uses pertaining to upland game. It is quite obvious that much of the area has been literally gutted by what we humans call progress. A few remnants of what was highly productive wildlife habitat not many years ago still exist, but one has to search pretty hard to find them. If the causes of habitat destruction were removed the area could once again produce native vegetation and wildlife. These river bottom sites combine the ideal situations for this purpose. With the proximity of well over a million people, and our proven ability to increase this population annually, use of the area for hunting does not appear practical. It could produce some very fine hunting but on such a limited, strictly controlled basis that it does not appear feasible. I believe it a safe assumption that this area will soon be enveloped by urban sprawl. Our responsibility appears to be one of providing benefits to the largest possible numbers of people without-undue sacrifice of wildlife values. My recommendations to accomplish this are as follows: 1. Acquire sizable tracts of land surrounding the water the lowlands above and below the reservoir. line, particularly 2. Develop the perimeters picnicking and related 3. Develop the remainder of the land area for wildlife by encouraging and hastening the growth of native vegetation. This area would have to be protected from grazing and human molestation. Pheasants, rabbits and song birds will return with the restoration of the habitat. It may be desirable to release bobwhite quail if adequate habitat is developed. 4. Following the restoration of the wildlife habitat planned, plainly marked trails through the area. of the area, on the higher ground, uses. in as park sites for construct several well �- 230 - The development of this type of wildlife park strictly for scenic and educational purposes may sound "way out" for this section of the country, but it does not require much vision to see the rapidly approaching need. The day is not far away when many Denver area dwellers will never see this resident wildlife, and its requisite habitat, if a "close in" area is not preserved for that purpose. We can take our cue from the eastern states, where nature parks are popular attractions. This is all pretty general but if and when a decision is made to restore the area to productive wildlife range specific recommendations will be made as to how this can be done. Respectfully submitted, It has been previously reported that the Hudson Reservoir portion of the Two Forks project may have a profound effect upon upland game. The Two Forks dam will be located in steep, dry mountain slopes and will have no significant effect on upland game. In view of this efforts were initialed to gather information on the Hudson Reservoir. Bureau of Reclamation official Mr. Richard Eggen was contacted for this purpose. He had just received word that the Hudson Reservoir portion of the project was out for at least ten years. Within that length of time the land use and upland game picture may change considerably. There seems little value in conducting a survey now that will have to be repeated anyway in the years to come. Prepared Date: by: Harold M. Swope Wildlife Researcher April, 1967 Approved by: Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �April, 1967 - 231 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO Project No. W-37-R-20 Work Plan No. 17 Game Bird Survey Job No. Title of Job: Inventory of Ptarmigan Populations Period Covered: April 1, 1966 to March 31, 1967 Personnel: 1 Glenn E. Rogers and Clait E. Braun ABSTRACT Major enwhasis for 1966 w~s placed on collecting population density information for five selected study areas. The average spring breeding population for all areas was 15.5 birds per square mile. Five nests were found, of which three were successful. The average number of eggs per nest was 6.75. A total of 56 broods was seen with an average of 4.5 chicks per brood. A fall population was estimated by Lincoln D1dex on 217 banded ptarmigan using the hunting season for recapture information. Ptarmigan per square mile ranged from a low of 35.4 at Mesa Seco to a high of 74.4 at CroWl1Point. Hunting pressures varied from three to 73 hunters per square mile with Mount Evans receiving the heaviest pressure. �- 232 - INTRODUCTION Work during the spring and summer of 1966 was concentrated in determining population densities for five selected study areas. Southern white-tailed ptarmigan (Lagopus leucurus altipetens) were caught, banded and released. Recapture information was collected during the regular hunting seasons and population densities were estimated by the Lincoln Index method. Trips were made during all months of the year into as many new areas as time allowed to obtain information on ptarmigan distribution. Efforts were also continued on collecting additional information on sexing and aging, applicability of various methods of censusing, effects of hunting, yearly production, and habitat requirements. As this study is scheduled to run another year, this report is limited to work accomplished without any attempt to evaluate or explain results. OBJECTIVES 1. To gather and record background information pertaining tion, density, and census methods for ptarmigan. 2. To map ptarmigan 3. To determine tions. to range, distribu- range in Colorado. methods for ascertaining annual changes in ptarmigan popula- PROCEDURES 1. Background 2. Map range. -- Determine perimeter of ptarmigan range by county through 'interviews of Departmental personnel, Federal land-use agency personnel, mus- information. Review and abstract available information. eum personnel, ranchers, and/or sportsmen. Inspect habitat capable of supporting ptarmigan populations and' secure persona 1 observations. Determine density of populations by observing and counting populations. Planimeter various units of range to determine square miles of different types of ranges and total range for each county and statewide. 3. Prepared distribution Population inventory. map of ptarmigan -- Capture range. and band birds on specific study areas. Secure counts within trend areas or along routes during various seasons of the year and periods of the day. Record birds observed, specific location, time of observation, mileage, weather conditions, and other factors. Record miscellaneous observations according to numbers of birds, courtship behavior, brood size, specific location, vegetative cover type, range condition, elevation, topography, and ,weather factors. Record harvest cess. information according to hunting pressure and harvest suc- �- 233 - INVENTORY OF PTARMIGAN POPULATIONS Glenn E. Rogers and Clait E. Braun Population densities. -- A major requirement in any basic inventory study requires that reasonable estimates be made regarding the number of birds that occupy specific sections of the available habitat. The broad scope of this study, and the limited time and manpower available precludes sampling at a degree that data obtained could be postulated into state-wide population estimates. Data obtained are indicative of population densities for the specific study areas and to some degree may represent population densities for similar habitats. Choate (1963) in his study of unhunted northern white-tailed ptarmigan in Montana found densities varying from 17.5 to 125.0 ptarmigan per square mile, depending on time of year (summer to early fall) and amount of habitat included in calculations. Lowest seasonal densities were during the breeding season with an increase during the flock and brood season and the highest densities at the end of the season (mid-September). Choate (1963) used the Schnabel method to estimate ptarmigan densities and divided his area calculations into three categories: (1) lowest density - the number of individuals on the whole study area, (2) ecologic density - the number within suitable habitat only, and (3) greatest density - the number within areas of aggregation. Within this report, population density calculations are based upon ecologic density, although the final report will include estimates for contiguous study blocks regardless of total habitat suitability. Study Area. -- Originally, four study areas were selected with one additional area added to allow for contingencies within our program. The five areas are located along or near the Continental Divide from southwestern to northcentral Colorado (Figure 1). Size of study areas varied as follows: Crown Point, 1.93 square miles; Rocky Mountain National Park, 2.14 square miles (this was further divided into three areas: 'I'omb srme Ridge-,Sundance Mountain, 1.25 square miles; Toll'Memorial, 0.19 square miles; and Fall River Pass-Gore Turnout, 0.70 square miles); Mount Evans, 1.54 square miles; Independence Pass, 1.32 square miles; �"':l •.... MOFFAT !ROUTT OQ (:! I'i CD i i i i i j LARIMER w E L LOGAN o -j I r------- __ 1._-, i o I J-h RIO MORGAN i BLANCO "Cl rt Pl g f·-· , -v, ·-·-·---·-" . GAR ._._._ FIE L 0 •.... OQ Pl ;:l Pl f\) W I'i CD Pol +:- so B A �- 235 - and Mesa Seco, 1.48 square miles. The study areas are from 10,800 to 14,264 feet in elevation and we hope represent at least four types of ptarmigan habitat in vegetative cover, condition, and use. I Breeding Season Population Densities. -- All observations of ptarmigan either as breeding pairs or as unmated birds from April until about mid-June were recorded. In most instances, birds were tagged to assure that later movements did not result in repetitve counts. A spring breeding population was then calculated for each study area and for the total area sampled (Table 1). The 15.5 breeding birds per square mile is within the range of ecological density computed by Choate (1963) in Glacier National Park. Table l. -- Breeding Season Population Study Area Tombstone RidgeSundance Mountain Toll Memorial Fall River PassGore Turnout Total-Rocky Mtn. National Park Areas Ht , Goliath-Ht. Evans Crown Point-Crown Mountain Independence Pass Hesa Seco Total (All Areas) ·k One male was apparently Densities, All Areas, 1966. Square Miles No. of Breeding Pairs Unmated Birds Total Breeding Season Population Birds Per Square Mile 1.25 0.19 12 6 5 males 3 males 29 15 23.2 78.9 0.70 8 2 males 18 25.7 2.14 26 10 males 62 29.0 1.54 5"'~ 1 male 12 7.8 1.93 1.32 1.48 8 .t~l 12 5 4 52 4 males 3 males 7 males 25 28 l3 15 l30 14.5 9.8 10.1 15.5 mated with two hens. Brood Season Densities. -- Five nests were located, including one by Paul Gilbert, Area Supervisor at Hot Sulpur Springs. Of the five, three were successful and two were destroyed by unknown predators. Numbers of eggs per nest were six, six, and seven for successful nests and either six or seven in one of the destroyed nests. Broods seen were recorded by area, time, and number of young per adult females (Table 2). The average number of chicks per brood observed during the summer was 4.5 (Table 3). A gradual decrease in size of broods was evident from July 1 to September 15. Hunting Season Population Densities. -- A total of 217 ptarmigan was caught, tagged, and released from April 15 to September 9, 1966. At the opening of the regular hunting season, there should have been 25 tagged birds at Cr own Point, 26 at Mount Evans, 19 at Independence Pass, and 35 at Mesa Seco. �- 236 - Table 2. -- Mean Brood Size by Time Period and Area, 1966. Dates Area Mt. GoliathMt. Evans Rocky Mtn. Natl. Park Crown Point Crown'Mtn. Independence Pass Mesa Seco Other Areas * Number Table July 1-15 July 16-31 None seen 1.0 (1),'(0 None seen 6.0 (2);'( Aug. 16-31 Sept. 1-15 2.5 (2)* None seen 4.7 (8)* 4.4 (9)''(0 3.7 (3);'( 3.8 (5)* None seen 5.2 (5)"( 4.8 (6)* Not searched Not searched None seen None seen None seen 4.7 (3);'( None seen None seen 4.7 (3)"( 4.0 (1)''(0 4.4 (5);'( None seen None seen Not searched 5.5 (2);'( 4.0 (1);'( of broods Aug. 1-15 Not searched seen. 3. -- Mean Brood Size by Time Period, All Areas, 1966. Date July 1-15 July 16-31 August 1-15 August 16-31 September 1-15 TOTALS Number Average Number of Chicks per Brood of Broods 5 5.4 4.6 4.5 4.2 3.8 4.5 17 18 11 5 56 Using the hunting season as a random method of recapture, a fall population density was estimated for each study area (Table 4). The estimated fall density for all areas by Lincoln Index was 55.6 birds per square mile. A computed fall density using spring breeding pairs times mean brood size was 55.3 birds per square mile. Table 4. -- Fall Population Study Areas, 1966. Area Mount E-vans Crown Point Independence Pass Mesa Seco Estimates Computed through Lincoln Index for Selected Square Miles Total Banded Banded Birds Harvested Total Harvest Birds per Square Mile 1.54 1.93 1.32 1.48 26 25 19 35 12 4 41 23 20 9 57.6 74.4 47.9 35.4 6 6 �- 237 - Hunting pressure varied from light at Mesa Seco to very heavy at Mount Evans (Table 5). The kill of adult males was higher for all areas, except Crown Point, than would be expected under random selection of a normal population. At Crown Point, no adult males were harvested. Table 5. -- Hunting Pressure and Harvest on Four Ptarmigan .t Mount Evans Crown Point Independence Mesa Seco Ptarmigan Number Birds of Hours Birds Crippled Adult Hunters Hunted Seen & Lost M F Area Pass TOTALS Study Areas, 1966. Killed Unk. Juvenile Unk. Sex & M F Juv. Age Total 112 24 27 4 352 94 92 6 85 83 44 30 1 2 3 0 14 0 10 5 6 5 6 1 1 3 0 0 0 5 3 3 19 8 0 0 1 2 1 0 41 23 20 167 544 242 6 29 18 4· 11 27 4 93 9 Distribution. -- Searches were continued into new areas throughout the year to determine relative ptarmigan distribution and habitat limitations. In many instances (Guanella Pass, Mountain Boy Gulch, Independence Lake, etc.), these searches were on the perimeter of the study areas to check movements and distribution within habitat units. Other trips (Wolf Creek Pass to Silverton, Loveland Basin, Howardsville, Los Pinos Pass, etc.) we re made to determine either winter 'or summer occurrence and to personally confirm reported distribution (Figure 2). Personnel observation over the past two summers has now been made to all but five alpine regions: the Sangre de Cristo Range, Park Range, Never Summer Range, Pikes Peak, and the Conejos-Chama area. Observations during the winter and spring months are still too limited to postulate a state-wide distribution for those periods. From present knowledge, ptarmigan in southwestern Colorado tend to move to lower elevations (8,000 to 10,000 feet), while the birds in the northcentral mountains use approximately the same habitat winter and summer. San Juans. -- A pack trip along the Continental Divide from Wolf Creek Pass to Silverton resulted in frequent observations of ptarmigan or ptarmigan sign. In addition, ptarmigan were heard calling at times and in areas when sign was not observed. Several general statements can be made regarding habitat in this area in comparing it to the alpine areas of central and north-central Colorado: 1. Grass density is higher with a corresponding lower forb density. 2. Although birds were observed at 11,000 feet (Archuleta Lake), pine-tundra is limited to areas above 12,500 feet. typical al- �I-;:j t-'. aq c 0 LOP W LARIMER E L LOGAN 0 ~ Ii (!) N l1:J rr ru gt-'. aq ru ::l ::r' ~ t-'. r+ ru r+ (fl o o ~ (!) Ii (!) 0... t-'. ::l I\) w OJ I-' \0 0\ 0\ T E R 0 i i-------- --·--1-·----- i A N 1M j \ •.,'10.,,0", i i A \ ~./ i i i i n >fl!NGF'I[LO /.r-----" .---" .)t\"1d~T are as .s U1.~·:2·~lCr i~r'l\leTllw'Jry.:i"t? iO in 'Ientory- [!J • -X 8 A c~. �- 239 - Figure 3. -- Representative feathers from the back region of ptarmigan. is on the left, female on right. Male Figure 4. -- Study skins of sub-adult ptarmigan collected in mid-september. Male is on the left, female on the right. Primary pigmentation can be seen on both birds. �- 240 - 3. Rocks are of volcanic or~g~n (felsites and breccias) and tend to disintegrate forming talus slopes and provide few rocks large enough for cover or camouflage. Sex and age characteristics. -- In summer, the sex of adult southern white-tailed ptarmigan can be determined through gross observations of plumage coloration (Figures 3 and 4), behavior, and calls. Since 1958, measurements have been secured on approximately 360 ptarmigan. Measurements of rectrix length and wing lengths as described by Bergerud, Peters, and McGrath (1963) were taken for all birds banded and for all hunter kills checked in 1966. Previous to 1966, measurements of total wing length, central rectrix length, length of middle toe, and length of the eight distal primaries were taken on all killed or trapped birds. In addition to these measurements, information on weights, length, width, color of eye combs, length and color of central upper tail coverts, and plumage replacement and pigmentation were collected for most birds. Full summer plumage, except in yearling birds, is attained by the first of June. Plumage in both males and females is darker or more strongly marked in June and July than it is in August and September. Ptarmigan, under 15 to 16 months old (sub-adults), can easily be distinguished from older birds by body and/or plumage characteristics. The size, presence of dmm, or the presence of colored feathers (yellowish-gray on the breast and 1ight b rown on the primaries) all help in distinguishing chicks from adults. As the fall molt progresses, hO\vever, the new breast feathers are white and the primaries are white except for a speckled pigmentation (Figure 4) on primaries 8, 9, or 10 (Petrides, 1942) and the distal primary covert. This pigmentation might be present on all the three distal primaries or on only one of the three. One young bird, out of 90 examined, had not molted primary 8 but pigmentation was not present on primary 9 or 10 and only very slightly on the distal covert. This bird was captured on August 30, 1966. As primaries 9 and 10 are carried for a little over a year, these sub-adult birds can be separated from older birds during their first breeding season. LITERATURE CITED Bergerud, A. T., S. S. Peters, and R. McGrath. 1963. Determining sex and age of willow ptarmigan in Newfoundland. Jour. Wildl. Mgmt. 27(4):700-711. Choate, C. S. 1963. Habitat and population dynamics in Montana. Jour. 1.Jildl.Mgmt. 27(4):684-699. of white-tailed Petrides, G. A. 1942. Age determination in American Trans. North Amer. Wildl. Conf. 7:307-328. gallinaceous Prepared Donald M. Hoffman Wildlife Researcher Date: by: Glenn E. Rogers Asst. Wildl. Researcher April, 1967 Approved by: ptarmigan game birds. Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �- 241 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECTSEGMENT State of Project COLORADO No. W-37-R-20 Game Bird. Survey Hork Plan No. 18 Ti t.Le of Job: Indexing Period Covered: Personnel: April ,Job No. 1, 1 Game Researcl1.J;erort~ ._._ 1966 to ~/fa_rch31.• 1967 Donald M. Hoffman and Gary T. HY";'1':.: Objective: To as s i s t w.lLh the work of indexing and job completion report:: .. all Fult:~nd Aid cuar t.er Li.es Findings: See c omposLt.c report corrta i.ned in the !\prLl.; 1~.'66 :i.~~;::1.;eof the Carne P.esearch Helx1rt covcr-Lng all indezinc; .J.ctivj.tL·',; p.lYtnIlcc1 unci.'}]' this project and Feder~l Aid Projects W-3B-R, W-~D-R, w-88-n 2nd W-I01-R. Prepared Date: by: Donald M. Hoffman vlildlife Researcher April, 1967 Approved by: Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator � https://cpw.cvlcollections.org/files/original/52c26aa7aea3b6349e063baa2f35897c.pdf 5573f6ff99536f66f81b926f480fa4de PDF Text Text July, 1967 - 1- JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT (Publication) State of COLORADO Project No. W-10l-R-9 Work Plan No. Title of Job: Period Covered: Personnel: Game Range Investigations Job No. 1 1 Mesa Verde Clip Plot Study April 1, 1966 through March 31, 1967 Harold R. Shepherd ABSTRACT The Mesa Verde Clip Plot Study is a long-term clipping experiment simulating different intensities of game use on five important species of browse plants. Objective of the study is to learn how the yearly removal of certain percentages of the current annual growth stems and of old stems affects the plants. Field work, data compilation, analyses, graphs, and tables have been completed, and a portion of the first draft of a final report has been written. All plot fences have been removed. The completion and publication of a final report to be entitled llEffectsof Variable Clipping on Key Browse Species in Southwestern Colorado" is the only work remalnlng to be done on the study. This is scheduled for the next project segment. ��- 3 Mesa Verde Clip Plot Study Harold R. Shepherd For sound winter game range management it is necessary to know the percentage of current annual growth game may be permitted to remove yearly from browse plants without injuring them. Also, it is important to know the effect of different intensities of use on the amount of forage produced. The Mesa Verde Clip Plot Study is a long-term clipping experiment simulating different intensities of game use on the important species of browse plants: big sagebrush, antelope bitterbrush, mountain mahogany, serviceberry, and gambel oak. The purpose of the study is to attempt to learn how the yearly removal of certain percentages of the current annual growth stems and of old stems affects the plants and their forage production. Procedure and Findings Previous Segments. -- Field work outlined in previous segments has been accomplished. Field data were compiled and chi-square, correlation, and regression analyses made of the data. An outline for a final report was made and approved, graphs and tables were made in final form, and a first draft of the "Introductiontr, "Description of Study Area", and "Methods" was prepared. All plot fences were removed and salvaged. Curren.t Segment. -- Preparatory to writing the ItResultsand Conclusionslf section of the final report, data were reviewed and comparisons made between results of various treatments. To complete the final report, the ItResultsand Conclusionslt section must be written. Next, the manuscript will be submitted to an Editorial Committee for com~ents and suggestions. Then a final draft will be preIJared,incorporating needed revisions, and submitted for publication. PreIJared by: Harold R. Shepherd Wildlife Researcher Da te: July, 1967 ApIJroved by: Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator ��July, 1967 - 5 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO --------~----------------~ Project No. W-IOI-R-~ Work Plan No. 1 Game Range Investigations Job No. 4 Title of Job: Paddock-Studies on Effects of Varying Intensities of Deer Use Period Covered: Perso~nel: April 1, 1966 to JY.arch31, 1967 William T. McKean, Richard M. Bartmann, John F. Corey, Julius J. Klein, Nelson Cain, Michael L. Head, Donald E. Speers, Robert C. Moore, Raymond L. Kohls, Thomas M. Pojar, Henry Pedersen, Robert E. Keiss, Dr. Robert W. Davis, Dr. Hermann Meyer, Dr. C. P. Hibler, Dr. Y. Abdelbaki, Florence G. Fields, Patrick Davies, Noland Dunnan, Roger Markwold, Richard Hillman, Ken E. Nicolls, Mel Urschel, Wayne E. Tinder, John Findlay, Jo~~ Whalin, Robert B. White, Dave Bowden (Statistician), and Harold R. Shepherd (Project Leader). ABSTRACT Final measurements were made of current annual growth stems of antelope bitterbrush (Purshia tridentata), true mountain mahogany (Cercocarpus montanus), and serviceberry (Amelanchier utahensis) to determine production and utilization of these key browse species under different deer stocking rates (10, 20, 30, 40, and 60 deer-days per acre) during the fall of 1966. Browse production for 1965 and 1966, uncorrected for precipitation effects and deviations in deer-days per acre, is presented graphically in relation to the 1962 base year production. Utilization data for the 1966 and 1967 stocking periods are shown in tabular form. Production and utilization data need to be adjusted for difr'erences in desired deer-days and those actually achieved on the center "study" acre, as indicated by pellet group counts, bef~re proper analyses can be made. Mountain mahogany has usually been the heaviest browsed species each year, followed by bitterbrush and serviceberry. Moderate to heavymahogany use by rabbits (Sylvilagus sp. and Lepus sp.) occurred in Paddocks One and Six in 1967. --- �-6 - Production of grass, forbs, and browse in 1966, based on ocular estimates, still shows little relationship to stocking rate. Results of utilization estimates in 1967 tend to follow the pattern shown by those of the stem length measurements •. Sample sizes for most browse species were inadequate to give reliable estimates of actual utilization. These data also need to be adjusted for deviations in deer-days as indicated above. Paddock stocking was accomplished from January 12 through February 4, 1967. All 17 deer used were necropsied by Veterinary Science personnel fromCSU and laboratory technicians from the Fort Collins Research Center. Only results of blood, urine, and femur marrow fat analyses have been received. 1bese are presented in tabular form. Tests for brucellosis and leptospirosis proved negative for all 17 deer. Weight records, in pounds per deer-day, show that all deer lost weight regardless of stocking rate, and bucks lost as much or more than does. Total pellet-group counts made in every paddock each year show that the average daily defecation rate varied more between years than between stocking rates. The over-all mean rate was 13.6 + 0.62 SE groups per deer-day. Pellet COlL~t results indicate that the number of deer-days actually achieved on the inside "study" acre in each paddock during 1963 to 1967 varied from 66 percent more to 30 percent less than the desired rates. Rumen content samples were taken from all 17 deer used in 1967. Results of analyses were similar to those for 1963. The percentage of pinyon pine (Pinus edulis) found in samples from all paddocks in 1967 slightly exceeded that found in 1963. �-7Paddock Studies on Effects of Varying Intensities of Deer Use Richard M. Bartmann Introduction Deer management in Colorado, and in many other states, is based on winterrange condition and trend and on yearly browse utilization. Little is known, however, about the actual carrying capacities of these winter range areas or about how different degrees of deer use affect the range and the deer themselves. To obtain better information about this, a study was started at the Little Hills Experiment Station to learn how five intensities of deer use (10, 20, 30, 40, and 60 deer-days per acre) affect the pinyonjuniper range and the health of the deer. One four-acre and five two-acre pens were constructed on deer winter range near the Station. Field work was begun in 1962 and, except for continued stocking of the system, will be terminated in August, 1967. This, the fifth Job Completion Report on the study, reports progress made during the period April 1, 1966 through March 31, 1967. Previous reports were published in Game Research Reports of the Federal Aid Division of the Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department for the years 1962 through 1966. Objectives Long Range Objectiues To obtain more precise information about how five intensities of deer browsing (10, 20, 30, 40, and 60 deer-days per acre) affect a typical pinyon-juniper type range and the health of the deer. Segment Objectives (1.) To determine changes in production and utilization of key browse species by stem length measurement methods'. (2) To determine the relative accuracy of using small samples (one to four branches) or the entire bush to estimate production and utilization, using stem length measurements. (3) To determine, by ocular estimates, differences in total forage production of browse plants and herbaceous species. (4) To determine, by ocular estimates, differences in utilization of all browse species in the paddocks. (5) To determine the physiological effects on the stocked deer caused by the changing food conditions within the various paddocks. (6) To relate defecation rates to stocking rates in each paddock. (7) To compile and analyze the information obtained each year. �- 8 Tecbniques Used A detailed accoQ~t of tecbniques was previously given by McKean and Burdick (1964 and 1965). A brief summary is presented below. (Numbers correspond to those for the s~gment objectives.) (1) Ten bushes each of bitterbrush, mountain mahogany, and serviceberry were randomly selected in the center acre of each paddock. Each fall, all the current annual growth stems were measured, in millimeters, to determine production. stems remaining in the spring after stocking were remeasured to determine utilization. (2) Four branches were tagged on each bush chosen for stem length measurements. Branches were located in the four cardinal directions whenever possible. Twenty-two stems, in two groups of ten and twelve, were marked with tags on each branch beginning with the outer-most tw~g. Production and utilization were determined separately for the tagged branches for comparison with the production and utilization on the entire busho (3) Ten circular mil-acre plots were randomly located in the center acre Estimates were made of grass and weed production during late July or early August. Yields of grass and weeds were converted to pounds per acre, oven-dry weight. Browse production estimates were made in the fall after the leaves had dropped. These yields were converted to pounds per acre, air-dry weight. of each paddock. (4) Browse utilization estimates were made along lOO-point paced transects which criss-crossed the center acre of every paddock, except the fenced control, in a predetermined pattern. The pace interval between points was randomly chosen. The percent utilization on the browse plant nearest the observer's toe, based on the vertical projection of stems or foliage, at each point was estimated. (5) Necropsies were performed on all deer during the first and fifth years of stocking. Work was done by Veterinary Science personnel from CSU. Tbey were assisted by laboratory tecbnicians from the Fort Collins Research Center L~ 1967. Data on blood, urine, femur marrow fat, organ weights and condition, and endo and ectoparasites were recorded. Also, tests for brucellosis and leptospirosis were made and rumen content samples collected. (6) Total COQ~ts of pellet groups were made each year in late April or early May following stocking. String was used to sub-divide the paddocks into strips to enable more accurate counting. Strip widths varied depending upon crew sizes which ranged from two to four men. Every strip was counted twice, once from each end. The total number of pellet groups in each paddock ¥as divided by the total deer-days achieved to determine the daily defecation rate. The number of groups on the inside "study" acre and the remaining outside acre were kept separate to determine the "fence effect". (7) Data wi 1 be compiled and analyzed by methods best suited to each separate phase of the study. �-9 +120 +100 •.•••. /'-True mountain mahogany '",' ...., (Cercocarpus montanYs) +80 +60 Bitterbrush (Purshia tridentata) +4<) CD bO ~ ~ u "t: +20 rviceberry (Amelanchier utahensis) 0 Base year, 1962 Q) o J..t Q) -20 ~ -40 -60 60 40 )0 20 o 10 Variable (Unfenced control) Deer-Days per Acre FigoL Fercent of change in production of key browse species under different deer stocking rates in the paddocks in 1965 as compared to 1962. Data are uncorrected for precipitation effects and'deviations' in deer-days. +60 tA +40 v-Bitterbrush Q) bO +20 ~ .i:l U +> \ 0 \ ~ Q) c 'CD"' ~ -20 -40 <, -60 "'--::/ <, -80 60 40 J " ~" )0 Base year, 1962 Serviceberry \ \: ,,"-20 ./"True mountain mahogany ----~, . -",~.c_,-- 10 o Variable (Unfenced control) Deer-Days per Acre Fig. 4 Percent of change in production of key browse species under different deer stocking rates in the paddocks in 1966 as compared to 1962. Data are uncorrected for precipitation effects And deviations in deer-days. �- 10 - Findings Stem Length Measurements Production. -- The fifth and final year of production measurements were corr~leted during the fall of 1966. Results show antelope bitterbrish, true mourrta Ln mahogany, and serviceberry production in the paddocks during 1965, spurred by abundant moisture, to be the highest of the five-year period, 1962-66. The situation was reversed in 1966 when limited rain resulted in one of the lowest levels of production. The percent change in production, by species and stocking rate, in 1965 and 1966 compared to the base year 1962 is shown in Figures 1 and 2, respectively. The data are uncorrected for precipitation and deviations in deer-days per acre but still somewhat indicative of the relationships between paddocks within anyone year. Generally the smallest negative change or the greatest positive change in production each year occurred in the heaviest stocked paddocks. L~ Figure 2, a large positive change is shown in bitterbrush production at the 20 deer-days per acre rate while changes in production of all other species in all paddocks were negative. This deviation resulted from a large increase in the number of current annual growth stems on one bush which was great enough to more than offset the decreased production on the other nine bushes. utilization. -- Utilization measurements were completed during the spring of 1967. The utilization percentages for bitterbrush, mountain mahogany, and serviceberry in 1966 and 1967 are shown in Table 1. Utilization between paddocks in 1966 and 1967 is somewhat inconsistent with the stocking rate; but generally, the lighter rates had the lower use, as expected. Serviceberry, the most abundant and probably the least palatable of the three species, seemed to have been utilized most nearly in proportion to stocking rate. Mo~~tain rr~hogany was the most heavily browsed species in nearly all pad.docks both years, followed by bitterbrush and serviceberry. Use of all species was generally higher the second year due to the low browse production the preceding growing season. Because of this scanty production, mourrta in mahogany was eaten back into two-year old wood in all paddocks in 1967. Since measurements were made only on current annual growth stems, figures for this excessive use are lacking. Mountain mahogany was heavily eaten by rabbits in Paddock Six (10 deer-days per acre) in 1967. On one bush showing only rabbit use, 93 percent of the current annual growth was taken. In addition, some stems were nipped back into three-year-old wood. Damage probably occurred during and, to a large extent, after stocking. Rabbits were attracted to the hay and sheep pellets fed to deer in the holding pen adjacent to Paddock Six. They stayed in the area wherl this supplemental feeding was discontinued and began eating browse. �- II - Table 1 -- Percent utilization of three browse species under different deer stocking rates in the paddocks at the Little Hills Experiment Station, 1965 and 1966 . . .. . 1966 Unfenced 60 40 30 20 10 ..Contrbl Antelope bitter-brush (Purshia tridentata) 27 13 76 30 12 3 True mountain mahogany (Cercocarpus montanus) 52 46 67 48 31 19 Serviceberry (Amelanchier utahensis) 20 8 12 5 3 5 ~~telope bitterbrush True mountain mahogany Serviceberry 53 78 43 46 71 36 8 28 26 10 48 2 14 49 17 45 52 4 Year 1965 Deer-days per Acre =========================================================================== A similar situation existed near Paddock One (60 deer-days per acre). In this case, the attractant was alfalfa used in a box type deer trap. The trap was finally left closed because rabbits kept releasing the trigger. Moderate rabbit use was found on mahogany in Paddock One. Several factors can contribute to some of the poor relationships encountered between utilization and stocking rates. Sample variation is probably one of the main ones. It has caused computed sample sizes in many instances to be impractically large. Both the time and labor recruitment problems precluded any sample much larger than the ten bushes per species per paddock that were measured. Snow cover during the stocking period had an unmeasurable influence on utilizatlon. Snow depths at that time of year have ranged from 8 to 18 inches. Thus, during some years the deer had to do considerable pawing to expose the browse. Rabbit concentrations, as mentioned above, had a considerable effect on utilization in 1967. This condition has existed in previous years, but not to the extent recently noted. ~he data need to be adjusted for deviations in actual deer-days achieved on the center "study" acre as indicated by pellet-group counts. �- 12 - Correlation: Tagged stems vs. Total Bush -- Field data cQllection has been completed. L~previous analyses, correlations were made on a single bush basis. Future analyses will be oriented towards correlating the utilization on those same ten bushes. This should give a better indication of the reliability of the method currently used by management personnel on intensive big game range transects. Ocular Estimates Production -- Results of forage production estimates for 1966 are shown in Tables 2 and 3. The lack of a figure for some species in Table 2 indicates that the estimates do not reflect the true production of all species. However, we can compare relative changes in production between paddocks. Air-d.ry yields of browse in 1966, regardless of stocking rate, ranged from 14 to 69 pOlL'l1ds per acre with pinyon pine and serviceberry contributing most to production (Table 2). Oven-dried yields of grass ranged from 4 to 29 po-unds per acre, and of weeds, 11 to 3(3 pounds per acre (Table 3). Over-all production in 1966 was down about two-thirds from that of 1965 "because of precipitation differences between the two years. Yearly changes in forage production still bear little relationship to stocking-rates. The data need to be adjusted for deviations in deer-days on the center acre, as mentioned above. utilization -- Final browse utilization estimates were completed in 1967. utilization was generally higher than Ln 1966. Mountain mahogany was the heaviest-used species in all paddocks with a range of from 21 to 95 percent (Ta-ble 4). Pinyon pine use, except in Paddock One (60 deer-days per acre), was relatively light despite the low production of the other browse species the preceding summer. The high percentage of pine in deer stomach samples from all paddocks suggests greater pine use than was estimated. Part of the d.iscrepancies encountered with ocular estimates are inherent in the method employed here. Species will be contacted in relative proportion to their density. Thus, larger sample sizes are associated 'with the more ab"xndant species such as serviceberry and snowberry (Symphoricarpos oreophilus); while sample sizes on the comparatively less plentiful species, such as mo-xntain mahogany and bitterbrush, are grossly inadequate. l1::.e d.ataneed to be adjusted for actual deer-days achieved on the center acre~ as mentioned above. �- 13 - Table 2.--Estimated browse production, in pounds per acre air-dry weight, under different deer stocking rates in the paddocks at the Little Hills Experiment Station, 1966. Unfenced Deer-Days per Acre Species 60 40 30 20 10 o Control Antelope bitterbrush {Purshia tridentata} True mountain mahogany {Cercocarpus montanus} Serviceberry {Ame1anchier utahensis} Snowberry· {Symphoricarpos oreophi1us} Pinyon pine }) {Pinus edulis} Utah juniper {Juniperus utahensis} Big sagebrush {Artemisia tridentata} Oregon grape {Berberis repens} Totals 2:/ 17 1.1 1 1 1 <[1 3 <1 <1 37 9 13 17 31 6 8 5 2 4 7 9 5 7 11 51 15 <1 19 1 48 <1 3 2 3 <1 <1 <1 <1 1 1 1 3 2 2 54 69 37 31 69 14 5 1 1 65 Includes all available needles and current annual growth. Discrepancies between totals and component figures are due to rounding. Table 3.--Estimated forage production of browse, in pounds per acre air-dry weight, and grass and forbs, in pounds per acre oven-dry weight, under different stocking in the paddocks at the Little Hills Experiment Station, 1966. Unfenced Forage Deer-Da~s per Acre Control 0 10 20 60 40 30 Type 65 14 69 31 69 37 Browse 54 18 4 15 13 11 15 Grass 29 17 11 15 11 19 38 Forbs 35 rYles Annual grasses and forbs excluded. �Table 5.--Paddock stocking record~ 1967. Age Tag Weight Paddock Number Before After Number Sex (¥ears) J 1 1 1 1 1 Doe Doe Buck Doe Doe Doe 8+ 8+ 1~ 3~ 5~ 8+ L762 None L875 L861 L770 B9 133 135 122 l30 118 152 121 129 103 117 102 129 Date In Out Fetuses 1-12 1-12 1-12 1-12 1-12 1-12 2-2 2-2 2-2 2-2 2-2 2-2 1~ Remarks kf 2~ 1~ s kf 1~ & kf I-' Doe Buck Doe Doe 5~ 1~ 3~ 7~ L763 L755 L895 L897 128 115 128 130 113 103 117 121 1-13 1-13 1-13 1-13 2-3 2-3 2-3 2-3 3 3 3 Doe Buck Buck 8+ L776 L849 L851 146 153 ll7 115 137 ll2 1-15 1-15 2-4 2-4 2-4 2~ 2~ 1~ 5 5 Doe Buck 1~ 1~ L772 L845 ll2 137 90 125 1-13 1-13 2-3 2-3 W&kf 6 6 Buck Buck 1~ 1~ A2634 L873 ll8 108 109 100 1-12 1-12 2-2 2-2 I-IS +:- It! 2 2 2 2 2~ W&kf --- Infected leg and foot. Split lower lip. �- 15 Table 4 -- Percent utilization of all broyse species under different deer stocking rates in the paddocks' as determined by ocular estimate), Little Hills Experiment Station, Spring, 1967. 60 6 Antelope bitterbrush (FUrshia tridentata) True mountain mahogany (Cercocarpus montanus) Serviceberry (Amelanchier utahensis) Snowberry (Symphoricarpos oreophilus) 37* Average of key species ~I Y 1 20 50 35* 50 21* 43 9 1* 15* 20* 1* 1* 0* 1* 7 8 1 4 1 o 3 1 o 1 o 37 21* 2* o 10 Unfenced Gont'iO'l 3 95 Pinyon pine (Pinus edulis) Utah juniper (Juniperus utahensis) Big sagebrush (ArtemiSia tridentata) Little rabbitbrush (Chrysothamnus viscidiflorus) Or~gon grape (Berberis repens) * Deer-Days per Acre 40 30 20 29 3 o o o o 59 31 16 17 19 Indicates use by rabbits in addition. Includes bitterbrUsh, mahogany and serviceberry. Paddock Stocking Stocking and Physiology -- The fifth series of paddock stocking occurred from January 12 to February 4, 1967 (Table 5). Deer were placed in the paddock holding pen and the Corral Gulch enclosure until sufficient numbers were on hand. Supplemental feeding was done with alfalfa hay and Purina Sheep Checkers. All deer survived the 20-day stocking period. Entry and removal dates were staggered over four-day periods to allow CSU Veterinary Science personnel and laboratory technicians from the_'Fort Collins Research Center sufficient time to perform the desired necropsy on all animals. Results of blooQ,urine, and femur marrow fat analyses have been received from the Department laboratory (Table 6). Findings of CSU veterinarians have not been received. Tests for both brucellosis and leptospirosis were negative for all 17 deer. Weight Records -- Table 7 summarizes the five-year averages of daily weight losses by deer under the different stocking rates. Weight losses by bucks were equal to, or greater than, those by does. With few exceptions, the heavier stocking rates yielded the largest weight losses. �- 16 Much can affect weight changes in this type of an experiment. The physical and psychological stresses imposed upon wild deer by handling and confinement probably results in excessive losses, especially in the relatively short period of 20 days. The small sample Sizes, age differences of the deer, and yearly differences in browse production all contribute to the high variability encountered. Pellet Group Counts Final deer pellet group counts have been completed. A review of the literature has been begun but not completed, so only a summary of results is presented here. Daily mean defecation rates by paddock and by year are shown in Table 8. The 1964 data are not included because counts that year were made from mid-May to mid-June by one man. Data are also not included if deer died during or immediately after confinement and when physical injuries appeared to hamper normal activity of the animals. The over-all mean daily defecation rate was 13.6 + 0.62 SE groups, with a range of from 10.2 to 16.1 groups. Variation was-greater between years than between stocking rates. No definite relationship existed between defecation and stocking rates. The higher mean rates in 1963 and 1967 were each preceded by a season of low browse production; while the lower mean rates in 1965 and 1966 were each preceded by a season of relatively high browse production. This is contradictory to current information. Several factors need to be considered for proper interpretation of results. Some of these include the effects of physical and psychological stress, observer error, age composition of experimental animals, type of food consumed and density of forage plants available. Deer-days actually achieved on the inside "study" acre of each paddock from 1963 to 1967 varied from 66 percent more to 30 percent less than the desired rates (Table 9). On this basis, all data need to be corrected for the deviations from the mean expected number of deer-days on the center acre of each paddock. Rumen Content Analysis Rumen content samples were collected from each of the 17 deer used in 1967. The proportion and occurrence of each food species, in percentages, are shown in Table 10 by stocking rate. Corresponding data for 1963 are also given for comparison. The most noticeable feature in Table 10 is the high percentage of pinyon pine in all stomachs, ranging from 55 to 92 percent. This is even higher than it was in 1963. The greater pine use in 1967 probabllf reflects the lower total browse production that year as well as the greater snow depth, 18 inches as opposed to only about 8 inches in 1963. �Table 6.--Blood, urine, and femur marrow fat analyses of 17 mule deer stocked at different rates in the paddocks at the Little Hills Experiment Station, January-February, 1967. Deer Number None L862 L875 L770 Item B9 L673 Sex Estimated age (years) Stocking rate (deer-days/acre) Blood: Hematocrit (%) Hemoglobin (g/10Om1) Sedimentation rate (mm/hr) Erythrocyte count (mi11ions/mm3) Leucocyte count (hundreds/mm3) Differential counts (% of 100) Segmented neutrophi1s Band neutrophils Lymphocytes Monocytes Eosinophils Basophils Thrombocytes Calcium (meq/1iter/mg%) Phosphorus (meq/1iter/mg %) Potassium (meq/1iter) Sodium (meq/1iter) Ch1oride-NaC1 (meq/1iter/mg %) Cholesterol (mg %) Creatinine (mg %) Protein (g %) Blood Urea Nitrogen (mg %) Urinalysis: pH Specific gravity Sugar Albumin Acetone Color Characteristic Femur ma rrow fat (%):. Right Left F 8+ 60 F 3~ 60 40 12.6 4.0 8.5 45.0 51 15.7 4.5 10.8 66.0 1~ 60 F 5~ 60 F 8+ 60 F 8+ 60 43 13.0 5.5 9.5 91.0 46 14.9 4.3 12.5 62.0 42 13.4 14.5 7.5 90.0 44 13.1 4.0 6.5 52.0 M 60 62 72 67 49 79 2 3 6 11 9 4 14 30 16 27 22 22 3 13 11 4 9 8 0 3 0 3 3 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 -----------------------Approximate1ynorma1 in number----------------< 2.5 mg 1.7/3.8 1.1/2.5 < 2.5 mg 2.1/4.8 < 2.5 mg 3.1/5.4 4.1/7.0 >9.2 mg 4.5/8.0 5.0/8.6 4.6/7.9 5.8 5.6 5.4 7.3 4.9 5.4 88.1 100.0 102.2 100.0 87.0 84.8 109.1/638.7 91.9/538.0 91.9/538.0 129.1/755.2 118.2/691.4 91.9/538.0 82.7 93.1 62.1 119.9 99.2 62.1 3.8 2.6 3.2 2.5 1.6 3.0 7.6 8.0 7.8 7.8 6.9 6.2 10.0 25.0 10.0 35.0 15.0 10.0 5.5 1.035 1+ 3+ 0 Smoky Cloudy 29.6 24.7 -- --- 6.0 >1.039 2+ 2+ 0 Amber Cloudy 5.5 1.030 1+ tr 0 Yellow Cloudy 7.0 1.032 1+ tr tr Smoky Cloudy 13.8 14.6 18.2 22.0 26.2 38.3 10.6 10.0 -- --- -- 59.0 60.5 l-' --J �Table 6.--Blood, urine, and femur marrow fat analyses of 17 mule deer stocked at different rates in the paddocks at the Little Hills Experiment Station, January-February. 1967. (Continued) Deer Number Item L895 L763 L897 L755 L777 L849 Sex F F F M F M Estimated age (years) 3~ 5~ 7~ l~ 8+ 7~ Stocking rate (deer-days/acre) 40 40 40 40 30 30 Blood: Hematocrit (%) 45 41 42 41 44 45 Hemoglobin (g/100 ml) 14.5 12.6 14.5 13.0 14.5 14.5 Sedimentation rate (mm/hr) 3.5 2.3 2.0 6.0 3.5 5.0 Erythrocyte count (Millinos/mm3) 8.0 9.5 8.5 8.5 6.5 8.0 Leucocyte count (hundreds/mm3) 48.0 25.0 51.0 46.5 74.5 26.0 Differential counts (% of 100) Segmented neutrophils 57 43 75 64 83 46 Band neutrophils 1 3 o 6 o 2 Lymphocytes 29 50 23 26 15 47 Monocytes 4 9 1 4 1 5 Eosinophils 4 o o o o o Basophils o o o o 1 o Thrombocytes ---------------- Approximately normal in number Calcium (meq/liter/mg %) 1.1/2.5 1.6/3.6 2.0/4.5 1.3/2.8 1.6/3.6 1.1/2.5 Phosphorus (meq/liter/mg %) 3.4/5.9 3.6/6.2 2.8/4.9 >9.2 mg 2.7/4.7 >9.2 mg Potassium (meq/liter) 4.9 5.1 5.6 5.2 7.2 7.5 Sodium (meq/liter) 88.1 97.9 97.9 87.0 113.1 84.8 Chloride-NaCl (meq/liter/mg %) 127.3/744.5 92.7/542.4 104.6/611.6 87.8/513.5 101.8/595.6 104.6/611. 6 Oholesterol (mg %) 70.3 101.3 95.1 88.9 86.8 89.1 Creatinine (mg %) 3.0 2.9 2.1 3.0 2.6 2.8 Protein (g %) 7.3 8.0 5.8 8.8 8.3 8.6 Blood Urea Nitrogen (mg %) 10.0 10.010.0 10.0 70.0 20.0 Urinalysis: pH 5.5 6.0 5.5 8.0 7.0 6.0 Specific gravity >1. 039 1.037 >1.039 1.021 >1.039 1.021 Sugar 1+ 1+ 2+ 1+ 1+ 1+ }fAlbumin 2+ 1+ 2+ 4+ 3+ Acetone o o o o o o Color Dark yellow Dark yellow Straw Yellow Yellow Light ye11ow Characteristic Clear Cloudy Cloudy Viscous-clear Clear Cloudy Femur marrow fat (%): Right 11.6 1.2 15.3 0.4 0.8 2.5 Left 1.0 9.1 0.7 16.7 2.7 0.5 ~ co �Table 6.--Blood, urine, and femur marrow fat analyses of 17 mule deer stocked at different rates in the paddocks at the Little Hills Experiment Station, January-February, 1967. (Continued) Item Sex Estimated age (years) Stocking rate (deer-days/acre) Blood: Hematocrit (%) Hemoglobin (g/lOO ml) Sedimentation rate (rom/hr) 3 Erythrocyte count (millions/rom ) Leucocyte count (hundreds/rom3) Differential counts (% of 100) Segmented neutrophils Band neutrophils Lymphocytes Monocytes Eos inophils Basophils Thrombocytes Calcium (meq/liter/mg %) Phosphorus (meq/liter/mg %) Potassium (meq/liter) Sodium (meq/liter) Chloride-NaCl (meq/liter/mg %) Cholesterol (mg %) Creatinine (mg %) Protein (g %) Blood Urea Nitrogen (mg %) Urinalysis: pH Specific gravity Sugar Albumin Acetone Color Characteristic Femur marrow fat (%). Right Left L85l M lJ:i 30 L846 M lJ:i 20 Deer Number L772 F lJ:i 20 A2634 M 1J:i 10 L873 M 1J:i 10 47 14.5 5.0 10.0 67.5 47 15.3 5.0 9.5 55.0 48 14.9 2.5 9.5 43.0 45 14.1 1.5 12.0 29.0 44 14.5 5.5 8.0 33.0 59 25 46 48 57 2 9 2 7 8 52 24 37 27 30 17 7 8 11 9 1 4 0 5 5 0 0 0 0 0 -------------- Approximately normal in number ----------1.4/3.2 < 2.5 mg 1.1/2.5 2.6/5.8 1.4/3.2 2.8/5.7 4. 1/7 .0 4.2/7 •2 > 9.2 mg 3.1/5.4 5.4 5.9 5.9 5.4 6.3 102.2 106.6 69.6 69.6 97.9 90.9/531.8 127.3/744.5 113.7/664.8 116.4/680.7 91.8/537.1 66.2 107.5 78.5 95.1 60.0 2.8 2.4 2.5 2.9 1.8 6.4 6.2 6.0 7.6 7.8 10.0 15.0 40.0 20.0 20.0 6.0 > 1.039 > 1.039 1+ 2+ Amber Cloudy 1+ tr 0 Smoky Cloudy 5.5 1.039 1+ 0 0 Dark yellow Cloudy 7.5 11.0 4.0 6.6 7.4 13.3 5.5 o 5.5 > 1.039 5.5 > 1.039 1+ 2+ 0 Amber Clear 1+ 1+ 0 Yellow Cloudy 10.1 10.2 7.4 13.3 I-' \0 �- 20 - Table 7.--Five-year averages of daily weight losses, in pounds per deer-day, of deer stocked at different rates in the paddocks at the Little Hills Experiment Station, 1963-67. Deer-Da~s Eer Acre Sex-Number-Days-Weight 60 40 30 20 10 Bucks: No. of animals 4 4 5 3 4 Total deer-days 82 81 99 56 82 Total weight loss (lb.) 70 52 50 57 36 Weight loss/deer-day (lb.) Does: Both: No. of animals Total deer-days Total weight loss (lb.) 0.9 17 307 178 0.6 10 207 89 0.5 5 103 56 1.0 0.4 3 57 29 3 63 9 Weight loss/deer-day (lb.) 0.6 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.1 Weight loss/deer-day (lb.) 0.6 0.5 0.5 0.8 0.3 Table 8.--Defecation rates, in groups per deer-day, of deer confined at different stocking rates for 20-day periods during winter in the paddocks at the Little Hills Experiment Station, 1963-67. Year Stocking Rate 1964 1..1 Deer-Days/Acre 1963 1965 1966 1967 Paddock Average 1:.1 -1.7 60 14.9 12.2 13.6 2/ 1/ 16.6 40 13,.0 14.8 "'l./ 30 14.2 10.2 14.5 13.0 1:.1 20 16.1 12.7 11.1 13.3 11.9 11.1 10 13.3 18.2 13.6 --+ Yearly Average 15.0 11.6 11.1 14.5 13.6 - 0.62 SE 1/ 1/ Counts were made from mid-May to mid-June by only one man. An uncertain number of deer-days due to mortality or abnormality of some animals because of injury precluded any calculations. Table 9.--Comparison of deer-days desired and those achieved on the central "study" acre of each paddock, based on pellet group counts from 1963 to 1967. Year 1963 1964 1965 1966 1967 Paddock 1 Ach , Des. 60 60.9 60 64.0 60 65.6 60 62.9 60 61.8 Deer-Da~s Eer Acre Paddock 2 Paddock 3 Paddock 5 Des. Ach. Des. Ach. Des. Ach. 40 45.1 30 20 33.7 19.7 20 40 25.6 48.5 30 35.7 40 30 45.8 36.3 20 24.2 40 48.6 30 26.2 20 17.9 41.7 20 14.0 30 27.3 40 Paddock 6 Des. Ach. 10 15.4 10 16.6 10 13.1 10 9.7 12.4 10 �Table 10.--Estimated proportions and occurrence, expressed in percentages, of plant species eaten by deer under different stocking rates in the paddocks at the Little Hills Experiment Station in 1963 and 1967. (Numbers of samp Le s for each year are in parentheses.) Stockin~ate __(Deer-Days per Acre) Unfenced Contro 1 1:./ 60 40 30 20 10 Year Pro. Occ. Pro. Occ. Plant Species Pro. Occ. Pro. Occ. Pro. Occ. Pro. Occ ; (6) Antelope bitterbrush (Purshia tridentata) 1963 1967 True mountain mahogany (Cercocarpus montanus) (4) tr. 67 17 1963 1967 5 83 Serviceberry (Ame1anchier utahensis) 1963 1967 5 5 100 100 Snowberry (Symphoricarpos oreophilus) 1963 1967 tr. tr. Pinyon pine (Pinus edulis) 1963 1967 77 Utah juniper (Juniperus utahensis) 1963 1967 12 Big sagebrush (Artemisia tridentata) 1963 1967 Oregon grape (Berberis repens) 1963 1967 Grass and forbs ~/ 1963 1967 17 1/ 1 92 3 tr. (3) tr, 50 25 tr. tr. 50 25 6 4 100 100 50 50 1 3 100 100 100 83 (3 & 2) 1 100 tr. tr. 50 1 100 tr. 6 100 100 9 5 10 12 tr. 100 50 6 100 84 88 100 100 70 93 100 100 47 6 5 100 100 9 100 67 37 1 tr. 25 1 67 tr. 33 1 tr, 50 tr, 75 100 25 1 tr. 67 67 (2) (2 & 0) 12 100 2 50 67 5 1 100 50 1 50 100 100 38 43 100 100 10 100 100 50 tr. tr. 50 50 2 50 100 100 30 55 100 100 65 100 100 100 7 1 100 50 12 100 8 tr. 33 2 50 8 50 tr. 50 1 100 6 100 2 80 33 f\) I-' Two deer were trapped outside of the paddocks in 1963 to serve as controls. No deer were caught in 1967. Grass was present mostly in trace amounts. The majority of forbs were Mertensia~. and Ba1samorhiza ~. �- 22 contrast, j"lL.'1.iper was present to a lesser extent in samples collected in 1967 compared to 1963. Though the lower juniper use is consistent among paddocks, the small degree of difference in most instances suggests that it probably stems from high variability resulting from small sample Slzes. E.ut low forage production on ''high-lined''trees after 1963 in the heavier stocked paddocks left little food available by 1967. ])1. Se:::'viceberry was f'ound in almost the identical proportions found in 1963. Bitterb~Qsh and mahogany were seldom present in more than token amounts. Despite its abundance, snowberry was not taken very avidly either year; further attesting to its low palatibility at that time of year. Rabbit and Rodent Control Rabbit ~~d rodent control was carried out as in previous years. S~ryc~Jlin e and arsenic in water solutions were placed around the paddock system during the dry summer'months. No efforts were made to evaluate the effects. But observations of chipmUIlks (Eutamias sp.) and rabbits during late summer and early fall indicate results were negligible. Literature Cited McKean, W. '1'. and H. E. Burdick. 1964. Paddock studies on effects of varying intensities of deer use, p. 27-45. Game Research Report, January, Colo. Game, Fish and Parks Dept., Denver. McKean) W. T. and H. E. Burdick. 1965. Paddock studies on effects of varying intensities of deer use, p. 147-166.:,> Game Research Report, July, Part 2, Colo. Game, Fish and Parks Dept.;-Denver. Prepared by: Date: Richard M. Bartmann Wildlife Researcher Approved by: Harold R. Shepherd Project Leader Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �July, 1967 - 23 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO Project No. W-10l-R-9 .Work Plan No. 2 Title of Job: ..Per-Led Covered: Personnel: Game Range Investigations Job No. 1 Little Hills Grazing Study April 1, 1966 to :March 31, 1967 William T. McKean, Richard M. Bartmann, John F. Corey, Julius J. Klein, Nelson Cain, Michael L. Head, DonaldE. Speers, Wayne E.Tinder, John Findlay, Robert B. White, :Mark Smuin, Robert C. Moore, Thomas M. Pojar, Henry Pedersen, Dave Bowden (Statistician), and Harold R. Shepherd (Project Leader). ABSTRACT The desired stocking levels for sheep and cattle were attained within reasonable limits during both spring and fall periods in 1966. Coyotes killed five sheep in the spring. All sheep were belled in the fall and no losses occurred. Cattle stocking was accomplished almost without incident during both seasons. Sixty-five deer were placed in the pastures from October 15 to December 3, 1966. All but four were caught in group and wing traps. Removals took place between March 27 and:May 5, 1967. One crippled fawn was shot shortly after stocking, and ten other deer died during the winter. Daily weight changes of sheep and cattle in the pastures were again recorded in 1966. These are presented along with a five-year summary of changes for 1962-66. The smallest gains or heaviest losses for both species occurred in the heavy use pastures during both spring and fall periods. Pictures of browsing and grazing pasture animals and of vegetative changes were taken in color and black and white film. Fo~rteen pasture soil types, recognized by the SCS soils scientist, have been combined into approximately five for purposes of stratifying existing pasture data. �- 24 Correlatio~ coefficients between browse density and browse reproduction, as determL~ed from line transects in 1958 and again in 1963, were stronger in 1958. Relationships between stocking rates and these values were not clear. irwenty-three pasture deer rumens were analysed during the period. Tours and talks concerning research work were given to nine groups, comprising 83 individuals, during the year. Seventy-six groups, comprising 193 individuals, were assisted during hunting season in a variety of ways. Two Outdoor Facts sheets, two newspaper articles, and a section in the annua L "Game Research Review" were written. Two talks on project work were presented~ and an exhibit at the Rio Blanco County fair was prepared. �- 25 Little Hills Grazing Study William T. McKean and RichardM. Bartmann Introduction Li.vestock and mule deer compete for food to varying degrees on big game winter ranges in Colorado. One of the typical areas where this situation exists is in northwestern Colorado on the Piceance drainage of the White River, in the pinyon-juniper vegetation type. The Little Hills grazing study was designed to determine the nature and extent of such competition and to measure the effects upon this range type of varying intensites of grazing and browsing. Now completing its eighteenth year, the study currently entails analysis of accumulated data but continues the stocking of all pastures with deer, sheep and cattle at the scheduled rates. Previous reports were published in Quarterly Reports and Game Research Reports of the Federal Aid Division of the Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department for the years 1949 through 1965. Objectives Long Range (1) To determine the amounts and kinds of forage used by deer, cattle, and sheep in enclosures and under various intensities of grazing. (2) To measure and record the plant succession occurring under these treatments. (3) To analyze, interpret, and publish results of this stu.¢iy. Techniques Used Forage Utilization Studies Pasture Stocking -- The series of nine pastures were stocked and maintained as described in the July, 1959 Quarterly Report and as modified during the seventh segment of Project W-10l-R, when stocking rates in all heavy-use pastures were reduced to one-half their original rate. Weights of cattle and sheep were taken before and after stocking in each pasture by means of a combination squeeze-chute and scale. All stock were "shrunk" overnight before each weighing. The rate of gain or loss per stock-day was calculated. Plant Succession Studies Range Condition and Trend -- The final condition and trend estimates and measurements Ln. the field were not to be made in 1966-67. �- 26 - Pictorial Records -- A few pictures, in color and black and white, of livestock and deer and of vegetative changes were taken throughout the year. These will be used for publications and talks. Soil JL~alysis -- The tabulation of soils acreages and descriptions, as pla~~ed in the P~S.& E. for 1966-67, was completed before report writing time for the 1965-66 segment. These data were included in that report. However, analysis and interpretation of these data must still be done. Findings Pasture Stocking Sheep -- Spring sheep stocking was done with 14 bucks, 14 ewes, and 7 yearling ewes. Harrassment by coyotes resulted in the loss of five head. Oroewas killed during a l5-day period in which a temporary laborer was hired to watch the sheep. The owner was reimbursed for these. The stocking period was extended where required to obtain the proper number of An lma.LUnit Months in each pasture (Table 1). The AUM calculations for sheep aI!.dcattle are based on equivalents reported by McKeaI!.(1960). Upon recormnendation of the stock owner, all 35 ewes used during the fall were belled. No losses occurred. Cattle -- Another group of 12 wild two-year-old heifers were used in the spring and fall of 1966. Two of these escaped during the initial spring weighing prior to placement in Pasture Two. One was recovered several days later and a replacement was secured for the other. The few deficient cow-days that resulted in Pasture Two were made up in the fall. Livestock Weights -- With two exceptions, all weights were obtained on proper schedule and under' good condi t.Lons . No usable weights were gotten 1'0:'::' sheep durdzig spring in Pastures One and Nine because the scales were found to be out of adjustment too late to be corrected. Table 2 shows the average weight changes in 1966 by pasture, season and type of stock. Changes in sheep weights were not greatly different from those for 1965. Pa sbur-e Five yielded the greatest loss and Pasture Nine the largest gain per sheep-day during the 1966 fall season. Weight changes of cattle continue to reflect the effect of heavy stocking in Pas tur'e 'NO wher-e losses, or trivial gains, were recorded. Unexpected large weight losses have sometimes appeared in Pastures Tnree and Eight. Such a situation existed in Pasture Three during the fall of 1966. We suspect the problem arises from the use of catchment-type watering devices in these two pastures. Sometimes the cattle apparently do not find them right away or, during fall periods, the pipes serving the tanks freeze. Figure 1 summarizes the average daily weight changes by livestock for the period 1962-66. Here, the effect of many years of heavy use in Pastures One and Two by sheep and cattle, respectively, is evident even though the stocking. rate in each of these pasture was reduced by one-half in 1964. �- 27 - rza +3 ,..... D Fall ~ CI ~ 0 ° Spring +2 -+' (J) ..0 .-I <;» !Il 0) !Il !Il +1 ° ] H !Il s::: ·rl Cd e;, 0 +' ..c: b.O ·rl ~ -1 ••• 0) No)o) !Il.-f ::> ~ :::1~Cd +' u !Il Cd CdO)>, f: ~:X::.D 0) CI 0) !Il08 ::> (""\ 0) O).-f O)+'+' ""Cd+' :;:1"" Cd +'O)U !Il't:l Cd 0>' ~~.D 0) !Il co::> 0) O).-f O)+'+' ""Cd+' :::1"" Cd +'O)U !Il't:l ~~.& ..-40) !Il P. 0)::> 0) "" 0) :::1~..c: +' (J) !Il Cd ~~E ""0) 0) O)CI !Il ::>08 0) !Il ::> V"\ 0'\ ° o..::E:.D ° o..::E:.D 0) P. 0) +' 0) "" Cd 0) :;:1""..c: +,O){J) !Il't:l Cd >, 0) o, 0) +' 0) "" Cd 0) :::1""..c: +'O){J) !Il't:l Cd >, Figure 1.--Five-year average of daily weight gains and losses by cattle and sheep under two grazing intensities in the experimental pastures at the Little Hills Experiment Station, 1962-66. �Table 1. ~- Summary of sheep and cattle stocking records for the experimental pastures at the Little Hills Experiment Station, 1966. Pasture No. 1 Species Sheep SEring Stocked Removed 6-41.7 5-25 Stocked 11-13 Removed 11-25 Acres 76.37 2 Cattle 5-3 ]j 5-14 10-16 1/ 10-26 3 Cattle 5-28 6-7 10-3 10-14 5 Sheep 6-5 6-20 2/ 10-7 8 Cattle 5-15 5-27 9 Sheep 5-2 5-23 2/ 1/ u3/ ~/ 5/ 6/ Jj Fall Season of Use Spring Fall Season No. of Animals 32 35 67 Total Days 315 438 753 ADM7/ 2.3 2.9 5.2 - A/ADM 33.2 26.3 14.7 166.25 Spring Fall Season 12 11 23 125 115 240 4.2 3.8 8.0 39.6 43.8 20.8 161.81 Spring Fall Season 12 11 23 120 125 245 4.0 4.2 8.2 40.5 38.5 19.7 10-18 85.42 Spring Fall Season 30 35 65 ·453 403 856 3.3 2.7 6.0 25.9 31.6 14.3 10-27 11-9 205.43 Spring Fall Season 12 11 23 144 143 287 4.8 4.8 9.6 42.8 42.8 21.4 10-19 11-12 155.55 Spring Fall Season 35 35 70 708 840 1548 5.0 5.6 10.6 31.1 27.8 14.6 !i/ One sheep killed on May 30. One cow stocked on May 6 and one on May 7. One cow stocked on October 18. One cow out on October 18. One sheep killed on June 8. Three sheep killed on May 14. Corrected for sex and age differences based on equivalents obtained from CSU in 1959. ro CO �- 29 Table 2 Weight gains and losses by cattle and sheep in the experimental pastures at the'Little Hills Experiment Station, 1966. ',','.'." 'Se'ason'Species Spring Sheep Total Pounds Gairied or Lost Gain or Loss per 'Stock-Day Clbs) 453 Y + 13 +0.03 Pasture No. 1/ Total Stock-Days 9 1 5 ?J Fall Sheep 5 9 1 403 840 438 -247 + 93 -117 - 0.6 + 0.1 - 0.3 Spring Cattle 2 8 3 110 144 120 -175 +385 + 50 - 1.6 + 2·7 + 0.4 Fall Cattle 3 8 2 110 105 143 -335 +276 + 19 - 3·0 + 2.6 + 0.1 ========================================================================== 1/ Arranged in the order in which they were stocked. g; Scales out of adjustment. Thirteen years of cattle weight data from eastern Colorado for yearling heifers on ponderosa pine-bunchgrass range, and yearling steers and heifers and two-year old heifers on shortgrass range show about 2 pounds per day gain during spring months; on~y maintenance, or a slight loss occurred during early fall (Klipple, 1953). No mention was made as to degree of stocking-whether light, moderate, or heavy. Weight changes under the moderate rate (20 days per cow-month) in the Little Hills pastures come closest to approaching the above values. Deer -- Deer stocking began on October 15 and was completed on December 3, 1966 (Table 3). All deer were caught in either group or wing type traps, except for one which had remained in Pasture Seven all summer and three that got into Pasture Three during the fall cow removal operation. Two deer were found dead in Pasture Three, and one crippled fawn was shot there. Pastures Four and Six had four dead deer each. Deer were removed during the period March 27 to May 5, 1967. Assisting the Little Hills crew in this task, were six WCO trainees, a "Casual laborer, and inmates from the nearby Reformatory Honor Camp. One mature doe was sent to the Veterinary Science Department at CSU for experimental purposes. The desired total number of deer-days in each pasture were attained or nearly attained. ll Deer Trapping and Tagging -- Deer trapping and tagging, eoccept for stocking p~rposes, was discontinued in 1966. Tag and sight returns received through the 1966 big game season were included in subsequent analyses. �- 30 An Outdoor Facts leaflet entitled "Deer Trapping and tagging Results at the Little Hills Experiment Station" was prepared, a rough draft of which was submitted for review in February, 1967. This has been returned and is currently being revised. Table 3 Pasture No. Summary of deer stocking records for the experimental pastures at the Little Hills Experiment Station during winterz 1966-67. Date Pasture Deer-Days 1/ Stocked Removed Acreage Desired Achieved Deviation 3 10-17 to 11-11 3-27 to 5-5 162.81 2427 2258 -169 4 10-28 to 12-3 4-17 to 5-3 143.64 2873 2728 -145 5 10-24 to 11-1 4-5 86042 1281 1284 + 6 11-1 to 11-16 4-27 to 5-3 98.93 1484 1309 -175 7 10-15 to 11-24 4-12 to 4-14 90.67 907 902 5 3 ============================================================================ "!:./ Fawn deer counted as one-half deer for stocking purposes. Plant Succession Studies Pictures _.-Several usable photos were taken. Some examples are shown in Figures 2 - 5. Still more are needed, particularly to show vegetative changes between seasons and pastures and of different browsing and grazing habits of the animals. Soil Analysis -- Fourteen different soil types were recognized in the pastures together with divisions based upon soil complexes and degree of slope. At this writing, these appear to be more than are necessary to stratify most of the existing data. Mr. J. L. Nielsen, Soil Scientist with the ses in Glenwood Springs, who did the initial survey in 19653 pointed out some possible soil type combinations. Based on his suggestions and on other information deri:ved from soil type descriptions, the original 14 major types were tentatively reduced to five categories within which future data stratification may be accomplished. Much work remains to be done on existing data before final conclusions can be drawn. No further work was done on existing pasture data analysis in relation to the soil information. �- 31 - Fig. 2. Sheep browsing mountain mahogany (Richard M. Bartmann photo). Fig. 3. Cows browsing service berry in Pasture Two June, (Richard M. Bartmann photo). in Pasture Nine June, 1967. 1967. �- 32 - / Fig. 4. Deer browsing bitterbrush in deep snow, Pasture February, 1967. (William T. McKean photo). Four, Fig. 5. Decadent service berry plants in Pasture One east side, June, 1964. Note absence of grass and weeds. (William T. McKean photo). �- 33 Line Transect Analysis -- A correlation analysis between browse density and browse reproduction in the pastures, started by Donald G. Smith in 1963, was completed. The sample correlation coefficients (r) for each pasture, together with the coefficients derived from the 1958 data, are shown in Table 4. Correlations were generally stronger in 1958 than in 1963. The Ifrlf values in 1963 were quite similar in nearly all pastures. Preliminary multiple mean comparisons using Duncan's test were begun on some of the browse density, numbers and reproduction data. This has not progressed far enpugh to report any results. Table 4 -- Sample correlation coeffieicnts (r) for browse density with browse reproduction in the Little Hills pastures, based on 1958 and 1963 data. Pasture number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 r 1958 0·532 0.875 0.596 0.618 0.376 -0.066 0.896 0.680 0.070 1963 0.480 0.460 0.370 0.667 0·399 0.354 0.251 0.348 0.478 ========================================================================== Rumen Content Analysis This year we have analysed rumen contents of 23 mule deer from the pastures. These are about equally divided between winter-killed specimens and those shot for removal from the pastures. Several collections analysed date back as far as 1961. One summary presented in segment seven covered the collections made in the period 1963-1965. All samples will be combined and analysed by pasture during the next segment. Demonstrations and Publications Nine groups of visitors totaling 83 individuals were toured about the Station and talked to concerning project work. These included CSU Senior Wildlife :Management students and instructors (34); representatives from Nigeria and Zambia, Africa (2), and their sponsors from the BLM and Intermountain Forest and Range Experiment Station (3); summer school students from Meeker Elementary and Junior High Schools and instructors in two groups (39), and four private citizens. During the hunting season, 76 groups totaling 193 individuals were given information at the Station. Very little of this pertained to research. �- 34 The Outdoor Facts sheets were prepared as well as the annual "Game Research Review" section pertaining to the Station findings. Two newspaper articles were written about Station work for local and regional distribution. Two illustrated talks were given. One to the CSU Range Club on December 5, 1966 and one to the "North-West Regional Game Management" meeting at Glenwood Springs on May 12, 1966. An exhibit depicting results of the trapping and tagging program was prepared for the Rio Blanco County Fair. Literature Cited Klipple, G. E. 1953. Weight gains made by range cattle while grazing summer ranges. Research Notes, No. 12, Rocky Mountain Forest and Range Experiment Stations, Ft. Collins, Colorado 2 p. mimeo. McKean, W. T. 1960. Little Hills grazing study, p. 3:-23. Report, Oct., Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Dept. Prepared by: Date: William T. McKean Wildlife Researcher Approved by: Quarterly Harold R. Shepherd Project Leader Richard M. Bartmann Wildlife Researcher Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief July, 1967 Ferd Co Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �July, 1967 - 35 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO --------~~~~---------- Project No. W-IOI-R-9 Work Plan No. 2 Game Range Investigations Job No. la Title of Job: Little Hills Grazing Study, publication of Results Period Covered: Personnel: April 1, 1966 to March 31, 1967 William T. McKean ABSTRACT Sub-job la was created to implement production of a series of publications concerning results of the Little Hills Grazing Study. Due to a personnel shortage (Wildlife Researcher Candidate did not begin work until late in 1966) the Wildlife Researcher had to spend full time on other jobs. So very little work was accomplished on this one. Therefore, objectives and procedures will remain essentially the same in the next segment (10). ��- 37 Publication of Results of Little Hills Grazing Study William T. McKean To implement publication of the various phases of the Little Hills Grazing Study (Work Plan 2J Job 1), a sub-job (la) was created. Due to a personnel shortage (Wildlife Researcher Candidate) until late 1966, the Wildlife Researcher had to devote full time to other jobs and, consequently, very little work was done on this sub-job. Therefore, objectives and procedures in the coming segment (10) will remain essentially unchanged. Objectives Long Range Objectives To determine. how cattle, sheep and deer compete with each other for forage on a lightly, moderately, and heavily grazed pinyon-juniper range and to determine some of the effects of this competition on the range. Segment Objectives To implement the production of a number of technical, semi-technical, and popular types of publications concerning results of the work done under Wm'k Plan 2, Job 1. Procedure and Findings A few photographs have been takeno New graphs have been constructed to more nearly depict the actual livestock stocking rates, adjusted for sex and age. One conference with the statistician resulted in the conclusion that the ocular estimate data on utilization probably will not lend themselves to statistical analysis. It is believed that for publication of results several shorter articles will be preferable to only one or two long ones. A number of pertinent articles in the various range and wildlife journals have been reviewed during the year. No outlines or detailed plans have been prepared during this segment. Prepared by: Date: William T. McKean Wildlife Researcher Approved by: Harold R. Shepherd Project Leader Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordi.nator ��July, 1967 - 39 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO ---------------------------- Project No. ~W_-_l_O_l~-R~-9~ Work Plan No. Title of Job: _ Game Range Investigations Job No. 2 3 Rodent Effects on Deer Winter Range Period Cove:-c-ed:April 1.11966 through lfJarch31, 1967 Personnel: Harold R. Shepherd ABSTRACT Field work has been completed on a study made in southwestern Colorado by the Colorado Department of Game, Fish and Parks to learn how rodents affect deer winter range in a pinyon-juniper type. During this, the eleventh year of study, preparations were made for pleting laboratory work on the food-habits portion of the study. com- ��- 41 Rodent Effects on Deer Winter Range Harold R. Shepherd Many winter deer ranges in Colorado are deteriorating. They are often marked by the dte-off of woody shrubs and by a scarcity of seedling shrubs. C~me biologists have become accustomed to blaming this condition on overuse by big game and livestock. However, there is reason to suspect rodents may be partially responsible, for rodent damaged browse plants have been found in some areas. It is suspected that in some areas rodents may be largely responsible for the scarcity of bitterbrush and mountain mahogany seedlings. In any so~~d program of game-range management all of the factors contributing to range use and deterioration should be taken into consideration, including the effects of rodents. A study was needed to learn how rodents affect deer winter range. Such a study was begun in August of 1956 in Mesa Verde National Park. Field work was terminated in September of 1964. This is the eleventh Job Completion Report on the study'. It reports the progress made ~uring the period April 1, 1966 through March 31, 1967 toward accomplishment of the long-term objectives of the study. Previous reports were published in Game Research Reports of the Federal Aid Division of the Colorado Department of Game, Fis'hand Parks for the years 1957 through 1966. Objectives The long-term, over-all objective is to study how rodents affect the composition, gro~~d cover and reproduction of vegetation in a pinyonjuniper type deer range, with particular emphasis on browse plants. Tb,e objectives for the period covered by this report are as follows: 1. To complete laboratory work on the food-habits portion of the study. 2. To complete the compilation, summarization and statistical analysis of food habits, transect and census data. 3. To prepare a final report on the results of the study. 4. To publish the results of the study in the Journal of Wildlife Management or the Journal of ,Mammalogy. �- 42 - Results Preparations were made for completing laboratory work on the food-habits portion of the study by assembling plant and insect materials for making reference slides, planning procedures and by arranging for student help. MY duties and responsibilities as Project Leader left not enough time to complete most of the objectives. Revised P.P.S. objectives establish a more realistic schedule for completing the food-habits work and publishing final results of the entire study. The revised schedule calls for completion of the laboratory work and analysis of food-habits and census data in the 1967-68 project year. In the following year, a final report will be prepared for pUblication. Prepared by: Harold R. Shepherd Wildlife Researcher Date: July, 1967 Approved by: Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator �July, 1967 - 43 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT state of COLORADO Project No. W-IOI-R-9 Work Plan No. 3 C~me Range Investigations Job No. 3 Title of Job: Browse Transect Analysis and Application Period Covered: April 1, 1966 to March 31, 1967 Persor~el: Kenneth C. Dillinger and Robert C. Moore, Student Assistantsj Robert W. Chavez, utility Worker; Bertram D. Baker, Assistant Wildlife Researcher. Cooperating: Paul Applegate, BLM state Office, Denverj Neil McCleery, Assistant District Man3ger, BLM, Craig; Stan Colby and Bob Armstrong, BLM White River Resource Area, Meeker; BLM Seasonal Range Aids Charles Robbins and Larry Forbis, Craig; U. S. Forest Service Region 2 Range and Wildlife Staff Officers Milt Wright and Jim Cruse; Range and Wildlife Staff Officers Jerry Martinez and Har~ey Orahood, Gunnison National Forest, Gunnison; Range and Wildlife Staff Officer Ron Schulz, Rio Grande National Forest, Monte Vista; and Range and Wildlife Staff Officer Dale Jones, San Juan National Forest, Durango. ABSTRACT Copies of two-inch scale, four-color township plat big game winter range maps of the GillLDisonNational Forest were received from Region 2, UO S. Forest Service. These maps, involving Forest portions of Game Units 54, 55, 63 and 67 were proofed, and type acreages were compiled and tabulated as maps were checked for inaccuracies. Territory adjustments between Units 76 and 80 necessitated for preparation of two-inch scale work copy maps of four additional townships for four-color reproduction by Region 2 Map Engineers. All township plats for Unit 76 are now or soon will be in final stages of printing. Unit 76 ty~e acreages by land ownership were compiled as map proof work was accomplished in 1965 and 1966. After a tentative summary of acreages was made for Unit 76 winter ranges, a report was prepared encompassing range inventory data and pertinent background information. That report is presented as an appendix to this completion report. In 1966 approximately 146,000 acres of winter range in Game Unit 22 were inventoried in continuing cooperative efforts with the Craig District of the BLM. A total of 130 browse range condition transects were read, ~Dd 55 non-transected type forms were prepared by temporary summer field crew. The crew consisted of four men for one month and three for two months in full-time employment. �- 44 Transecting of shrub or shrub-containing pinyon-juniper types in the western portion of Unit 22 showed that browse densities and vigor are consistently low or poor. Browse composition (quality) averaged better than medium. The latter is due to the wide distribution and moderate abundance of true mountain mahogany. Mountain mahogany and big sagebrush together are indicated as being the most important sources of deer forage in the western part of Unit 22. �- 45 Browse Transect Analysis and Application Bertram D. Baker The proofing of two-inch scale, big game winter range township plat maps was completed for Game Unit 76 (Rio Grande). This review involved 15 townships, four of which covered portions of Game Units 79 and 80 where the latter adjoin Unit 76 at the Rio Grande and South Fork of Rio Grande Rivers. A report on the big game winter range inventory of Unit 76 was prepared and circulated to Department Southwest Region and Denver Staffmen and U. S. Forest Service Region 2 and Rio Grande National Forest personnel for review and corn..rnen t e Vegetation type acreages were checked and compiled as proofing was done on two-inch scale, winter range township plat maps from cooperative Gunnison National Forest surveys in Units 54, 55, 63 and 67. A cooperative inventory of big game winter range in Game Unit 22 was continued with the Bureau of Land Management. The unsurveyed remaining northeast corner of the Little Hills Triangle plus over one-half of the winter range west of Piceance Creek were inventoried in 1966. OBJECTIVES 1. 'roprepare for final reproduction two-inch scale vegetation type maps of big game winter ranges from cooperative Gunnison, Grand Mesa-Uncompahgre, Rio GrandeJ and San Juan National Forest inventories. 2. To compile, summarize and analyze vegetation type acreage and condition information by game management unit. 3. To prepare game unit winter range reports as completed inventory analyses are finished. 4. 'I'ocontinue the cooperative inventory of big game winter ranges in Unit 22 (Piceance) with the Bureau of Land Management. TECHNIQUES Procedures employed in the inventory of Unit 22 winter ranges have been detailed in the interagency approved big game range analysis instructions as presented by Denney (1962). Also, supplementary techniques have been treated by Baker (1966). �- 46 - FINDINGS Map Preparation Gunnison National Forest -- A minimum of six copies each of township plat maps of 50 townships were received from Region 2, U. S. Forest Service, Denver. These maps are four-color reproductions showing vegetation types, browse range condition transect information, and type acreages by land ownership within the zone of average winter use by elk and deer. Territory covered by the maps includes National Forest portions of Game Units 53, 54, 55, 63 and 67. Also included in the map coverage are townships outside and below the National Forest for the Sapinero Management Area in Unit 54. With the start on game unit vegetation type acreage summarization, it was discovered that many errors existed on the township plats. Vegetation type lines had been omitted or were in improper places, and type designations were omitted or wrong. Furthermore, when data were transferred from two-inch scale quarter quad intermediate maps to the township plats, type acreages evidently were not adjusted to correspond with new map area boundaries. These acreage, type line, type designation, and miscellaneous other discrepancies necessitated the job of again proofing the maps. Gunnison National Forest Range Analyst Harley Orahood provided exceLLerrt assistance in the correcting of errors on Game Unit 54, 55, 63 and 67 t-ownship plats. This work will continue in the 1967-68 segment to complete information for Game Units 52 and 53. Grand Mesa-Uncompahgre National Forest -- Copies of the last of two-inch scale, four-color township plat maps were received in 1966. Because of greater priority given to map work and type acreage summarization for the Gunnison and Rio Grande surveys, no proofing was done on maps from this National Forest. Rio Grande National Forest -- In 1965, 11 two-inch scale, four-color township plat maps of then existing Game Unit 76 were proofed and corrected. That same year, boundaries of Unit 76 were expanded to include the portion of Unit 80 between Goose Creek and U. S. Highway 160. In order to complete map coverage of this additional Unit 76 area, winter range inventory data were placed on two-inch scale township plat, three-color base maps of four new townships. All 15 up-dated township plats were then submitted to Forest Service Region 2 map drafting personnel for final processing. Copies of this final printing had not been received as of April 1, 1967. High priority was given map work for Unit 76 at the request of Project W-38-R. That project needed completed range inventory information to augment results of an intensive elk population dynamics study which is nearing an end on the Rio Grande elk herd. San Juan National Forest -- Progress was made on preparation of maps for the Pagosa Ranger District. TYPe acreages were and are being computed on township plat work maps prior to submitting them to Region 2 personnel for four-color reproduction. No recent information is available on the status of map work for remaining parts of the Forest. �- 47 - Gurmison :National Forest -- 'Iables of vegetation type acreages by land ownership have been prepared in preliminary form for GameUnits 54~ 557 63 and 67. These acreage corrwilations were done as four-color township plat maps were proo~ed, against field inventory aerial photos. Work will continue in the 1967-68 segment to complete type acreage compilations for Un:Lts 52 and 53. Grand Mesa-UncompahgreNati,onal Forest reported. for this National Forest. -- No further accomplishments are Rio Grand,e National Forest -- In order to meet the already mentioned needs of Project W-38-R in its Rio Grande elk herd investigation, Unit 76 vegetation type acreages by ownership were compiled as proof work progressed on 'townsr,ip plat maps. A type acreage summar-ywas made from the compilation and. formed the bas Ls of a comprehensive big game range analysis report that 1s presented as an appendIx to th1s report. SuffIce to say here that 237 different vegetation types and three other land cover categories were found to exJ.st in Unit 76 winter ranges. Determined also was a total of about 66,000 acres of winter range or about 11%of the total area of Unit 76. Further explanation should be made of the report in the appendix. Errors had been noted in official boundary designations of Unit 76. To call at.tent.Lon to this situation and discuss other relevent information about the 'lZJ,it~ a more comprehensive description of the area WdS prepared than was originally intended. Despite the extra work that was necessary in pr-epar-Lngthe report, it will be used as a pattern in future game unit analyses regardless of the extent of Lnd.l.v.ldua L unit Lnverrt.or-Le s (almost all game units will only have National Forest lands inventoried). San ,}u,ani\J'ational Forest -- Type acreage compilations were not possible since finished maps have not been received of big game winter range Lnventor-Les on t.h.is forest. Q£op~rative B::Lg GameRange Analysis Field Inventory Wb,i te River ResoQrce Area- Bureau of Land Management -- The survey of 'GamecTni -t22-CPiceance,) r,j,g game winter range was continued in the summer of 1966. T11:1.s Lnvent.oz-y , begun In 1965.9 is a cooperative venture with the White Eiver Resource Area, Craig District, Bureau of Land,Management. Interagency accepted standard.::Lzedprocedures provided techniques for obtaining Lnf'or-ma.t.Lon on vegetation types, browse range condf.t.Lon and animal dist:dl"ution and i.ntensities of use (Baker J 1966) 0 BegLnrrIng June 7 J 1966? a field camp was established and, maintained at the .Ivo Shults Ranch sout.hwest of Meeker on the White River. This site was Ln the nort:b.easte:n:. corner' of Unit 22 where fi.eld. work was interrupted at the end. of the summer'in 1965. Assf.s tant.s Dill:i.ngerJ Moore , For-bls , and Robb.tns were trained at the Shults Camp and cont:inued the big game range inv-entory urrtd.l. both field and office mapping phases were completed fo~c the nor-theas cern corner 0 �- 48 Ken Df.Ll.Lnge r left the crew July 1 to accept a Wildlife Conservation Officer Trainee position with the Department. Bob Moore resigned effective July 20 to meet an Army draft call. In the recruitment of replacements for Dillinger and Moore, only one man was found, Bob Chavez, who worked the remainder of the summer. House trailers were moved to the Little Hills Game Experiment Station July 6, and field headquarters were maintained there for inventory work west of Piceance Creek until September 2. All temporary summer help left by the latter date to return to fall terms at their colleges. Nearly all of the winter range west of Piceance Creek between Hammond Draw on the west and Ryans Gulch on the south in Unit 22 was inventoried in 1966. Following the procedure used in 1966 (Baker, 1966), two "key" areas were delineated, mainly for ease in locating transects. First, the Hammond-Barcus Key Area was named and given the following boundaries: Hammond Draw on the west (also western limit of Unit 22), State Highway 64 on the north, Yellow Creek on the east, and Barcus Creek on the south. The BarCUS-Ryans Key Area was bounded thus: Barcus Creek on the northwest, Yellow Creek from the mouth of Barcus Creek north to Highway 64 on the west, F~ghway 64 on the north, Piceance Creek from its mouth to the mouth of Ryans Gulch on the east, and Ryans Gulch on the south. After completion of field work in the Segar Mountain Key Area (northeast corner of Unit 22), Ken Dillinger transferred notations that had been made on 1-20,000 scale aerial photos to two-inch scale air photo mosaics, and thence to velum overlays. From the velum overlay tracings, Ken then put the data on a two-inch scale base map of the Little Hills Triangle Grazing Unit to complete the first phases of mapping that portion of Unit 22. A total of approximately 15,600 acres were inventoried in the Segar Mountain Key Area and 130,300 acres in the Hammond-Barcus and BarcusRyans Key Areas. Thirty-four browse range condition transects were read in the Segar Mountain Key Area, and 96 were read in the "key" areas west of Piceance Creek. Altogehter, 55 non-transected type forms were filled out for types examined in 1966. The typing of browse range condition transect forms is in progress with five copies each of the 1965 transect forms being completed as of April 1, 1967. One typed copy will be returned to the BLM Craig Office with each original field copy when all forms have been typed. Pending final compilation of map acreage information, there now appears to be approximately 165,000 acres of game winter range in the Little Hills Triangle (BLM Little Hills Grazing Unit) portion of Game Unit 22. BLM Officer Dick Moos at Craig computed type acreages by ownership on the two-inch scale map that was drafted by Ken Dillinger. Dick also compiled acreages in preliminary tabulations as he determined acreages on the map. As of this writing, acreage data evaluations have not been continued any further. �- 49 - Figure 1. -- Game Unit 22 (Piceance) winter range near average upper limit of use on Duck Creek. Typical open pinyon-juniper stand and small upland sagebrush parkin foreground. Extensive sagebrush bottom on Duck Creek leads southwestward to Cathedral Bluffs highlands. March 2, 1967. �-50 Figure - 2. -- Game Unit 22 (Piceance) winter range near average upper limit of use at south edge of Bar D Mesa. Extensive gently sloping sagebrush parks typical of area between Duck Creek and Ryans Gulch show in fore- and centerground. March 2, 1967. �- 51 Tables 1 and 2 list the numbers of browse range condition transects that were read by major vegetation types and the principal plant species found in those types by IIkey"areain 1966. Generally speaking, the distribution of the transects in Segar Mountain Key Area types conformed with that determined in 1965 (Baker, 1966). The data in Tables 2, 3 and 4 for the area west of Piceance Creek (Combined Hammond-Barcus and Barcus-Ryans Key Areas) tend to present quite a different picture, however. First of all, the occurrence of 81 of 96 transects in pinyon-juniper types indicates a preponderance of this timber cover west of Piceance Creek (Table 2). Furthermore, the presence of more xerophytic shrubs in the pinyon-j"Cl.Yliper understory (Tables 2 and 3) and the very low browse densities (Table 4) tend to substantiate more casual observations that this area is very dry. Thus, the area is basically less productive of all ki.nds of plants. Table 1 -- Summary of 34 browse range condition transects, Segar Mountain Key Area, Little Hills Triangle game winter range, Game Unit 22 (Piceance), Summer, 1966. Vegetative Type Number and Name Number of Transects 4 - Sagebrush or Rabbitbrush 9 5 - Browse 6 9 - Pinyon-Juniper 19 Total 34 Type Species * A ssoca.a ·tdS e .** pec i.es- Artr, Quga, AME, Chvd, Cerno, SYM, CHY*** P, J, Artr, Quga, AME, Cerno, Chvd, SYM Chna, Save, Putr, POA P, J, AME, Cemo, Putr, Artr, SYM QUE, Chna, Chvd, CHY*** Chna ============================================================================ * Species used only in type designations but also listed variously as associated species from compositions arrived at by transecting. ** Species never used in type designations but recorded in compositions by transecting • .*** Various mixtures of rabbi tbrushes (Chrysothanmus spp.), principally Chvd and Chna , �- 52 Table 2 -- Summary of 96 browse range condition transects, combined Hammond-Bar-cus and Barcus-Ryans Key Areas, Game Unit 22 (Piceance) game winter range, Summer, 1966. Vegetative Type Number and Name Number of Transects 4 - Sagebrush or Rabbitbrush 5 - Browse 9 Artr, Atco Eula, Save, Chde, Chna Chvd , CHY3 3 AME, Cemo, Chna SYM, EPH, Chvd , CHY3 9 - Pinyon-Juniper 81 P, J, Artr, Cemo, AME, Putr, Arno, Chde, SYM Atco, EPH, Teca, CEA, ERO, Save Eular.Chvd, Chna, CRY , TET+ Atco, Artr AME, Atnu, Chde, Eula, Save 13 - Saltbush 3 Type Speciesl Associated Spe-cie-s2 3 Total -=========================================================================== 1 Species used only in type designations but also listed variously as associated species from compositions arrived at by transecting. 2 Species never used in type designations but recorded in compositions by transecting. 3 Various mixtures of rabbitbrushes (Chrysothamnus spp.) principally Chvd and Chna. 4 Usually sysnonymous with Teca although Tesp is present in some low elevation, desert shrub associationsj symbol thus might include both species. Table 3 -- Frequency of browse species listed as key species from vigor ratings, 34 and 96 browse range condition transects, respectively, Segar Mountain Key Area and the combined Hammond-Barcus and Barcus-F~ans Key Areas, Game Unit 22 (Piceance), 1966. Key Species Cemo Artr AME Putr Chvd QUE Atco Arno Chde Totals Frequency* Segar Mountain Key Area 19 8 26 3 6 4 o o o Hammond-Barcus and BarCUS-Ryans Key Areas 52 39 11 10 o o 3 2 1 11 ============================================================================ * Vigor computations are made and scored for all species designated as being key on a transect. Since more than one species are frequently listed for each transect, the totals of frequencies do not equal the numbers of transects for the respective key areas. �- 53 Summary of ratings for b}owse and soil, 96 browse range conditfi.ontransects, the combined Hammond-Barcus and BarcusRyans ,Key Area, Game Unit 22 (Piceance), 1966. 'Table 4 Rating Item Low Medium High Total Browse Composition No , of Transects % of Total 22 23 26 27 48 50 96 100 Browse Density :No. of Transects % of Total 81 84 14 15 1 1 96 100 Browse Vigor liTo.of Transects % of Total 66 69 24 25 6 6 59 61 1 1 Soil Stability No. of 'I'ransects % of Total * Overall or Average Rating* 2.27 (Medium +) 1.17 (Low +) 1.38 (Low +) 96 100 1.64 (Medium -) 36 38 96 100 Corrwuted on basis of Low =1, Medium =2, and High =3. Perhaps the only good factor in the situation west of Piceance Creek is that.true mountain mahogany (Cercocarpus montanus) is widely distributed on uplaDd areas and is fairly abundant. Mountain mahogany was credited as being "key" on 52 of the 96 transects read (Table 3). Also, though less highly preferred by deer, big sagebrush (Artemisia tridentata) was found to be probably the next most important species. It serves more as a cover plant in the characteristically dense bottomland stands but is a pr~.me forage producer in the extensive park-like upland areas as well as in associat:ion with the abundant pinyon-juniper ty-pe. Some diffi.culty has been and is being experienced in establishing an average upper limit of winter game distribution in the territory west of Piceance Creek. From the high ground of the Cathedral Bluffs on the west, the land slopes gradually northeastwardly towards Yellow and Pf.c eance Creeks. 'Ihus, easy terrai.n and the factor of wide inseasonal variations of snow cover and temperatures tend to permit comparatively free movements of game over large expanses of territory most winters. The BLM off::Lcersinvolved with inventory activities have agreed generally to allow game animals the benefit of the doubt, and liberal interpretations of winter boundaries of use are prevailing. �- 54 LITERATURE CITED Baker, Bertram D. 1966. Browse transect analysis and application, p , 55.<l7. ___ GameRes. Rep. , July, 1966. Colo. Dept. of Game, Fish and Parks. Denney, Richard N. 1962. Browse transect P> 51-96. c-,- GameRes. Rep., April, and Parks. analysis and application, Colo. Dept. of Game, Fish 1962. �- 55 APPENDIX BIG GAME WINTER RANGE ANALYSIS GAME UNIT 76 - RIO GRANDE INTRODUCTION This report presents the results of an inventory of big game winter range in Game Unit 76. Field work was begun in the summer of 1962 and completed in 1963. Operations were on a joint Forest Service-Department basis and had crews that consisted of two men in 1962 and three in 1963. Student Staff Assistant of the Rio Grande National Forest. Sporadic additional assistance was given by staff and district personnel of both agencies. The mapping portion of the job has been and is being carried out principally by Region 2 Forest Service Engineers with the help of Bob Pizel, Rio Grande National Forest staff members and myself. DESCRIPTION OF UNIT Location -- Game Unit 76 is located in portions of Hinsdale, Mineral, San Juan and Rio Grande Counties in Colorado. Boundaries of this unit, according to Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department Laws and Regulations Handbook, 1965 (page 16, Chapter 3 - Big Game) are as follows: "Those portions of Hinsdale, lfdneral, Rio Grande and San Juan counties south, east, and north of the Continental Divide; west of a line from Continental Divide on the south along Uo S. Highway Noo 160 to its intersection with State Highway No. 149 at South Fork, along State Highway No. 149 to the West Fork of Bellows Creek, and thence up Bellows Creek to the Continental Divide." State Highway No. 149 does not intercept Bellows Creek, and the West Fork of Bellows Creek has several main branches at its origin near the top of the Saguache Creek-Cellows Creek Divide in the La Garita Mountains. This divide, technically, is not the Continental Divide. However, for practical management and law enforcement purposes, the haziness of the legal description of the boundaries at those points does not present any appreciable problem. unit 76 encompasses approximately 942 square miles or 602,880 acres, as determined by planimetering boundaries on a one-quarter of an inch to the mile scale map. Physical features -- The Rio Grande River and its tributary streams dominate the topography of the unito The terrain is extremely rough. Steep, rock-rimmed canyons and narrow stream bottoms bisect the landscape throughout. Elevations vary from approximately 8,100 feet at South Fork to over 13,000 feet on peaks near and on the Continental Divide. Three large irrigation reservoirs, Santa Maria, Rio Grande andContinental, and several smaller lakes and reservoirs are located within the Lilli t. �- 56 Lndustry -- The unit has a sparse permanent human population. Cattle and 'dude ranching, either singly and separately, or commonly together under one ownership, are the largest industries. Summer tourism greatly increases the population for about four months of the year. Creede, the only ~unicipality within Unit 76, is the county seat of Mineral County. The Emperius Mining Company, a substantial producer of lead, zinc, and silver, is a big contributor to the economy of Creede. LIMITS OF AVERAGE WINTER RANGE North side of Rio Grande -- On the north side of the Rio Grande River the winter range zone, in variable width, extends from about Bristol View Guard Station south and east to Bellows and West Bellows Creeks. South side of Rio Grande -- On ranges south of the river there is a noticeable lack of big game use west of Red Mountain Creek. This is probably due to steep, timbered slopes that face north and northeastward to the river. A narrow band of winter range is found south of the river between Seven Mile Bridge and Goose Creek. Goose Creek has a fairly wide belt of winter range on both sides from its confluence with the Rio Grande River to Haypress Lake. The Elk Creek drainage, near the eastern edge of the unit, is also a moderately-sized section of consistently-used winter range. General -- The upper limit of the winter range varies a lot in elevation, and it is largely determined by elk which generally winter at higher elevations than deer. Elk consistently winter as high as possible, frequently in snow that is shoulder high or more. Exposure, more than elevation, seems to dictate where animals are found in winter. For example, on some south exposures, particularly southeast of Bristol Head and on upper Farmers Creek, elk have used open coniferous types at elevations as high as 11,000 feet. However, the average upper limit was found to be at or below 10,000 feet. KEY AREAS When we began making big game winter range inventories, we planned to begin analyzing areas considered "key" according to the Interagency Big Game Range Instructions. However, it was soon apparent that this was not feasible because of inadequate information about range use and game distribution. Certainly, bits of general information existed about scattered places, but this was mostly in the minds of men. It was insufficient for the delineation of key areas. Consequently, Unit 76 surveys were made first of the entire winter range within the Unit, without delineating or considering "key" areas. With the first-hand knowledge and experience gained from this fieldwork, personnel of both the Forest Service and Department agreed that all of the winter range should be considered "key". Although some areas appeared to be more important than others because they received more consistent use by big game, differences between areas were too fine to be of practical value. Therefore, to help locate transects quickly, Unit 76 was subdivided into eight "key" areas, as follows: �- 57 Clear Creek key elk area -- All winter range west of Clear Creek and 'north of Rio Grande River. Long Ridge key elk area -- All winter range east of Clear Creek, north of Rio Grande River, and west of Santa Maria Reservoir and Seepage Creek. Bulldog Mountain key elk area All winter range east of Santa Maria Reservoir-Seepage Creek, north of Rio Grande River, and west of East Willow Creek above Creede. Red Mountain key elk area -- All winter range within Trout, Red Mountain, and Lime Creek drainages south of the Rio Grande River. Deep Creek key elk area -- All winter range east of Lime Creek-Deep Creek Divide to approximately McKinney Gulch, south of the Rio Grande River, and west of Wagon Wheel Gap. Farmers Creek key elk-deer area -- All winter range east of East Willow Creek to Bellows-West Bellows Creeks north of the Rio Grande River. Goose Creek key elk area -- All winter range within the Goose Creek drainage plus areas south of Rio Grande River west of Wagon Wheel Gap to McKinney Gulch~ and east of the Gap to Palisade Camp Ground. Elk Creek key elk-deer area -- All winter range in Elk, Trout, and Decker Creek drainages south of the Rio Grande River and north of the South Fork of Rio Grande River. Deer are usually found in each "key" area most winters; however, areas that have been designated "key" for elk ordinarily contain very few deer. As is their habit generally on Colorado winter ranges, elk rarely make concentrated use of anyone locality year after year within the average zone of occupation. Except for perhaps the Long Ridge and Goose Creek key areas~ it would be difficult to predict where animals might be found in Unit 76 with any degree of accuracy any single year. Similarly, it is recognized that isolated areas probably exist above the average winter line where elk may often be found. Such localities most J-ikelyare south facingJ open-grassland ridges that stay relatively free of snow. A lack of time prevented attempting to locate such areas. LAND OWNERSHIP Rio Grande National Forest -- Except for less than a section of land near Baxterville (Jct. ofU. S. Highway 160 and State Highway 149), all of Unit 76 lies within the Rio Grande National Forest. �- 58 Private land -- Lands in private ownership are a very small part of the total area of Unit 76. For example, 88.9% for Mineral County is in National Forest ownership, the remainder being in private and local government ownership (Colo. state Planning Division 1961). Cattle and dude ranches, summer home sites~ and mining patents make up the bulk of land in private ownership. Actual importance of private holdings in Unit 76 is greater than is indicated by the statistic given above for Mineral County. For example, Table 1 shows that, of 66,278 total acres of winter range, about 12,561 acres or 19% are under patent. This places the ratio of game winter range acreages of private to National Forest land at nearly 1 to 50 Not to be overlooked, also is the fact that in severe winters, ranchers sustain nuisance and actual damage to haystacks because their holdings are mostly in the bottomlands upon which elk and deer concentrate. Public domain -- There is no public domain in Unit 76. ~ame, Fish and Parks Department -- Approximately 433 acres of the Coller Management Area lie in Unit 76. other state lands -- There are no other state lands in Unit 76. VEGETATIVE TYPES Conifer type -- Of the 66,278 acres of winter range (Table 1) in Unit 76, the largest component is 23,548 acres of Type 6 or Conifer Type. Douglas fir (Pseudotsuga menziesii) is the most common dominant conifer. Aspen (:Populustremuloides) is the most frequently listed co-dominant secondary species. Common juniper (Juniperus communis) is the most frequently named understory species in associations with Douglas fir and aspen. Closely following common juniper in importance are currants (Ribes spp.) and Arizona fescue (Festuca arizonica). Other associated understory plants are mountain muhly (Muhlenbergia montanus), slim-stem muhly (M. filiculmis), Thurber fescue (F. thurberi), lupines (Lupinus spp.), russet buffaloberry (Shepherdia canadensIs), and snowberrys (Symphoricarpos spp.)o Ranking behind Douglas fir in importance are these dominant conifers: ponderosa pine (Pinus ponderosa), bristlecone pine (Po aristata), Engelmann spruce (Picea engelmanni), and blue spruce (~o pungens)o Grassland type -- The second most extensive vegetative type is the Grassland Type (Type 1) which comprises 19,258 acres of the total. Arizona fescue is the most conspicuous dominant species, being listed in over onehalf of the grassland acre~ge. Thurber fescue, mountain muhly, Parry danthonis (Danthonia parryi), sedges (Carex spp.), slimstemmuhly, blue grama (Bouteloua gracilis), bluestem wheatgrass (Agropyron smithii), and needle and thread (Stipa comata) are co-dominant and/or secondary species. �- 59 The importance of Arizona fescue cannot be over emphasized because of its wide distribution and generally good abundance. Elk stomach analysis-food habits studies by Project W-38-R so far do not separate grass species, but they do show that the grass component averages nearly 60 percent of the winter forage consumed. This, plus past utilization study results near CreedeJ leads me to believe that Arizona fescue is the number-one key species on Unit 76 winter range. Broad-leaf tree type -- The Broad-leaf Tree Type (Type 10) is almost completely synonymous with aspen cover and is the third most extensive vegetative type in this unit. Aspen and a small acreage of thinleaf alder (Alnus tenuifolia) dominate in a total acreage of 11,113 acres. Important co-dominant overstory species found associated with aspen are Engelmann spruce (3,855 acres), Douglas fir (1,650 acres), and blue spruce and br'Ls t Lecone pine in lesser amounts. Table 1 -- Vegetative type and land category acreage summary - Game Unit 76. Type or Land Ownership Acreage category Nat. Forest 1 - Grassland 2 - Meadow 4 - Rabbitbrush 5 - Browse 6 - Conifer 8 - Barren (Rock) 9 - Pinyon 10 - Broad-leaf tree Cultivated Hay Unclassified* Total Acres 15,342 119 592 5,346 20,211 180 24 10,183 20 0 1,267 53J284 Private G.F. & Parks Dept. 3,902 476 512 2,375 3,298 6 0 930 232 190 640 12,561 14 0 149 0 39 0 0 0 0 0 231 433 Total 19,258 595 1,253 7,721 23,548 186 24 11,ll3 252 190 2,138 66,278 ========~================================================================== * See text for explanation. The aspen type, typically, has a wide variety of associated understory species. Of the shrubby plants, the most frequently listed in order of importance are buffalo~erry, common juniper, bearberry (Arctostaphylos uva=ur-sd), snowberrys, shrubby cinquefoil (Potentilla fruticosa), and ·currants" Most common grasses and forbs are Arizona and Thurber fescues, mountain muh Ly , bromegrasses (Bromus spp.), bluegrasses (Poa spp.), sedges, lupines, golden-banner (Thermopsis montanus), and timothy\phleum .pratense) 0 Conifer and aspen types together provide over one-half of the total acreage of winter range in Unit 76. This might seem to be disadvantageous to big game populations, but there are reasons why it works advantageously. First, the conifer and aspen stands are generally open. These types thus afford substantial amounts of both forage and cover most winters. Furthermore, the good.mixture of conifer, aspen and other vegetation certainly benefi.ts big game. �- 60 Browse type -- Despite low species quality, the Browse Type (Type 5) ranks fourth in extent with 7,721 acres. Snowberrys are first in distribution and aburldance followed closely by currants. Other important shrubby dominants or co-dominants are skunkbush (Rhus trilobata), willows (Salix spp.), shrubby cinquefoil, chokecherry (PrunUS-Virginiana), and rabbitbrushes (Chrysothimnus spp.). Snowberrys conform to the statewide least desirable preferability rating. But skunkbush might rate higher than least desirable here in the San Luis Valley, for it has been moderately to tightly hedged everywhere. It is, however, suspected that less use would be made of skunkbush if a greater volume of higher quality species occurred with it. Similarly, shrubby cinque foil could be rated higher than least desirable, although elk and deer do not eat it as much as they do skunkbush. Chokecherry and willows are good browse, particularly for elk, but they are not widely distributed within the winter range. Herbaceous species of importance in Type 5 acreages include Arizona and Thurber fescues, mountain and slimstem muhlys, blue grama, Indian ricegrass (Oryzopsis hymenoides), mountain dandelions (Agoseris spp.), Parry danthonia, sedges, and rushes (Juncus spp.). Unclassified -- Ranking fifth in total acreage is the category which I have termed "Unclassified". These 2,138 acres largely include narrow riverbank and bottom vegetation, water surface and bars between stream banks, summer homes, ranches, and resort sites, and miscellaneous small, broken areas around human habitation not important as forage producing range. Also, at present there are areas that are in error on maps. As soon as corrections can be made on the ITl9-ps, acreages now called "Unclassified" will be given their proper vegetational type designations. Rabbitbrush type -- Providing 1,253 acres, the sixth most extensive vegetative type is Type 4 - Rabbitbrush. Dominant and co-dominant species in this category include rubber rabbitbrush (Chrysothamnus nauseosus) and Douglas rabbitbrush (C. viscidiflorus) which are found together in most type assocJ.ations. Parry rabbitbrush (C. parryi) is another co-dominant specIes, but it is less abundant and widely d.istributed than the other two, Commonly associated grasses in Type 4 include Arizona fescue, mountain and sli.mstem mun Lys , blue grama , bluestem wheat grass, and bottlebrush squirreltail (Sitanio~ hystrix). Other type s -- The Meadow Type (Type 2), Type 8 or Barren (here as Rock), Pi.nyon T;ype (Type 9), and Hay and Cultivated categories comprise the rema'ning minor land and vegetative type acreages. RANGE TRANSECTS Browse range condition transects -- Partially discussed already are the approximately 9,000 acres of browse types (Type 4 - Rabbitbrush and Type 5Browse) in Unit 76. This acreage, although fairly substantial, amounts to only about one-seventh of the total area of winter range. In actuality, these shrub types are even less significant when their content is more closely considered. �- 61 As before in other portions of the San Luis Valley, difficulties arose in application of techniques for establishing transects. This was due to low quality of species, low stand densities, and poor vigor, the latter more because of age than hedging characteristics. Snowberrys, currants, and rabbit-brushes were early seen to be the most abundant dominant plants in Unit 76 shrub types. Except for Douglas rabbitbrush, these shrubs rate as being least desirable in preferability. Since analysis instructions call for the use of desirable or intermediate species as "key" species in transect computations, we were faced at the start with marginal quality plants upon which to base composition and vigor ratings. Therefore, rather than read several predictably low-rated transects in browse, we agreed to and did establish temporary paced Parker range condition transects in grassland and browse types in attempting to fill the gap. Results of four transects that were established reflect both the low browse quality situation and the problems faced in transect establishment. Of the four transects, four rated low in composition and vigorj three rated low, and one rated medium in density. Paced Parker range condition transects -- The paced Parker method is a shortened version of the standard Parker 3-Step technique. Both systems were originally developed for livestock range analysis. Nevertheless, except for the fact that all forb and browse species are classified as being least desirable in the Parker procedure, principles that are involved also fit objectives of proper range management for elk on their wintering areas. The aforementioned exception does not cause appreciable distortion of transect results because nearly all browse hits are on least desirable species anyway (according to browse range condition preferability listings) and forbs are very minor components in elk winter diets. Whether this approach is right or wrong, 36 paced Parker transects were read in Unit 76. Thirty-three were in grassland typesj two were in browse types; and one was put in a rabbitbrush type. Of the 36 Parker transect ratings for forage density and composition, ten were in the very poor category, seven were poor, ten were fair, four were good, and five were excellent. These results do not give much cause for optimism, although having 19 in the fair or above class ~nd considering many types that are not accessible to cattle tends to support the belief that forage is in adequate volume and quality to sustain the present elk herd. Record for non-transected types -- Big game range analysis procedures do not provide for placement of transects in conifer and aspen types not having measurable amounts of understory browse and/or herbaceous plant species. Because of the need to obtain some indication of big game use over as much area as possible and for timber and aspen acreages, in particular, an observation form was employed similar to one that had earlier been developed on White River surveys. Despite the pellet group transect of which it is a part, the form was termed "Record for Non-transected Types" or-: "whf.t,e " form. It provides space for describing type locations, vegetation present~ hedging of browse and aspen, and the recording of pe~let-group-count information. Some 120 write-ups were prepared for types in Unit 76. �- 62 Colorado state Planning Division. the state of Colorado. 916 p. Prepared by: Bertram D. Baker Wildlife Researcher Date: July, 1967 1961. Colorado 1959-61, Yearbook of Approved by: Harold R. Shepherd Project Leader Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief Ferd C. Kl.e LnschnLtz Federal Aid Coordinator �July, 1967 - 63 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT (Inventory) State of COLORADO --------~----------------- Project No. W-10l-R-9 Work Plan No. 4 Game Range Investigations Job No. Title of Job: Inventory of Range Manipulation Projects in Colorado Period Covered: April 1, 1966 to March 31, 1967 Persorillel: Harold R. Shepherd, Donald M. Hoffman, Glenn E. Rogers, Gary T. MYers, R. Bruce Gill, David F. Gordon and Roland C. Kufeld. ABSTRACT Officers of each National Forest and each Bureau of Land Management District in Colorado, and the ute Mountain and Southern ute Indian Agencies were visited by C~me, Fish and Parks Department personnel who recorded range type conversion project information from records on file in those offices. Prior to January 1, 1966, the Ue So Forest Service, Bureau of Land Management, and the ute Indians had modified by chemical or mechanical means 521,977 acres of rangeland in the western half of Colorado. An additional 155,441 acres were modified by Soil Conservation Service projects between July 1, 1962 and June 30, 1966. Only preliminary examination of the range type conversion project inventory data collected has been made at the close of this project segment. The data will be transferred to Mark Page Reader forms and IBM Cards and analyzed by Colorado State University Statistical Laboratory personnel during the next segment of this project. Some range type conversion projects which have been conducted in important game areas will be selected for further study. The agencies that conducted these projects will be contacted during the next segment of this project and requested to provide any information they may have concerning the effects of these projects on the range, livestock, and wildlife. Some of these project areas will be visited to observe and photograph post-treatment conditions. A prpposal for an information exchange system designed to keep the Department of Game, Fish and Parks and land management agencies mutually advised on new range type conversion projects being planned is being developed under this project. The proposal will be presented to the L~teragency Committee on Wildlife Ecology in June, 1967, through the Habitat Manipulation Subcommittee as a step toward having the system adopted for use by land management agencies in Colorado. ��- 65 Inventory of Range Manipulation Projects in Colorado Roland C. Kufeld INTRODUCTION The alteration of western range vegetation has become so widespread as to cause concern among wildlife managers. This concern is primarily because of effects on important wildlife forage and cover plants due to conversion of vegetation from one type to another. Virtually all of the range type conversion projects in the western half o~ mountainous portion of Colorado are located in big game or sage grouse range. Extensive conversion of vegetation from one type to another undoubtedly has profound effects on wildlife. For example~ control of sagebrush and establishment of grass is usually believed detrimental to deer and sage grouse~ although in some instances it might benefit these and other species. So they can judge the effect of past range type conversions on game and predict the probable impact of similar projects, game managers need to know the 10cationJ extent» and kinds of type conversion projects which have already modified game ranges in their areas. Also, they need to know in advance where, when and how the range is going to be affected, so they can determine the probable effects of proposed projects on wildlife and make recommendations to maintain or improve the wildlife habitat. The purpose of this inventory is to provide game managers with information about; projects which have been completed in Colorado, to determine how these affected wildlife.'!and to establish an interagency information exchange system designed to keep all agencies mutually advised about proposed type conversion projects and about the results of past projects. The information obtained and the establishment of an information exchange system will also provide a foundation for future cooperative field studies between the Department of Game, Fish and Parks and other land management agencies to further evaluate the effects of various range manipulation treatments on wildlife. OBJECTIVES Objectives outlined in the Plans, Specifications and Estimates for this project segment are as follows: 1. To compile information on range type conversion projects which have modified game ranges in Colorado 2. To develop a data processing system for summarizing this information. PROCEDURES Data Collection -- Offices of each National Forest and each Bureau of Land ~~nagement District in Colorado.'!and the Ute Mountain and Southern Ute L~dian agencies were visited by Game~ Fish and Parks Department personnel who recorded pertinent range type conversion project information from records on file in those offices. Original plans called for the collection �- 66 of inforw~tion about individual type conversion projects conducted by the U. S. Soil Conservation Service. This could not be done since Soil Conservation Service records are not reported as individual projects; however, total acreages of '~rush and weed controllf work done by the Soil Conservation Service were obtained from their'State office. The inventory concentrated on range type conversion projects located in the western half or mountainous portion of Colorado, encompassing all of the state west of Interstate Highway 25. Data collected for each range type conversion project inventoried included the project designation, land status, location, site description, climatic data, range condition and use at the time of treatment, and information describing the treatment. The data form used to collect range type conversion project inventory data was revised during this project segment. A copy cf the revised form is shown in Figure 1. Inventory data collected during the previous segment, using the old form (Smith, 1966), were transferred to the revised form. The location of each project inventoried was'mapped on standard Forest Service and Bureau of Land Management maps, and project areas were color coded to designate the type of treatment applied. Regional Game, Fish and Parks Department personnel provided information on the kL~ds of wildlife and amo~~t of wildlife use present at the time of treatment in each of the project locations. Primary consideration was given to the presence and amount of use by deer, elk and sage grouse. Land managing agencies assisted in supplying range and habitat information. Data Processing-- A data processing system was designed whereby data will be transferred from field forms to M:1rkPage Reader forms and then to IBM cards. The final decision concerning the exact layout of the Mark Page Reader forms and IBM cards had not been made at the end of this segment, however. It will be necessary to use five Mark Page Reader forms and five IBM cards for each range type conversion project. The Mark Page Reader Forms and IBM cards for each project will be tied together by project number for analysis p-ur~oses. Data transfer and analysis will be accomplished during the coming segment. Data will be analyzed by Colorado State University Statistical Laboratory personnel. Reporting -- An interim report of the total acreage of wildlife habitat treated in Colorado was scheduled to be made available to cooperating agencies by J\11y 31, 1966. This date was not met because of personnel changes and the large amount of fieldwork necessary to assemble the information. The interim report was completed before the end of the project segment, but it is being withheld from distribution pending review by personnel of Colorado Department of Game, Fish and Parks and cooperating agenc Le s , RE~OLTS AND DISCUSSION Extent of Completed Range Type Conversion Projects -- Most of the range type conversion work in Colorado has been directed toward control of sagebrush and pinyon-juniper vegetation. Range type conversion'work began in Colorado aroung 1940. Prior to 1955, plowing and seeding, or simply broadcasting seed onto untreated areas, was the major form of range type conversion , S:ince 1955, many acres have been treated by chemical sprays. Chemicals were first applied with ground spraying equipment, but in recent years �-67 - most herbicides have been applied by aircraft, especially where large areas are involved. Almost all of the chemical spray projects have employed 2-4-D. Chaining and bulldozing have been popular methods for removing sagebrush and pinyon-juniper since 1955. Controlled burhinghas been used experimentally in recent years to control Gam~el oak and pinyon-juniper vegetation. Various types of brush cutters, mashers and beaters have also been tried since 1955 to control sagebrush, rabbitbrush and similar types of vegetation. Prior to January 1, 1966, the U. S. Forest Service, Bureau of Land Management and the ute Indians had modified by chemical or mechanical means 521,977 acres of rangeland in the western half of Colorado (Table 1). An additional 155,441 acres were modified by Soil Conservation Service projects between July 1, 1962 and June 30, 1966. Table 1 -- Total acreages of range type conversion projects completed in Colorado prior to January 1, 1966 by the Forest Service, Bureau of Land Management, and Southern ute and Ute Mountain Indians. ~. Agency Uncompahgre National Forest Gunnison National Forest Grand Mesa National Forest Routt National Forest San Juan National Forest Rio Grande National Forest White River National Forest Pike National Forest San Isabel National Forest Roosevelt National Forest Arapahoe National Forest Total Forest Service Montrose BLM District Craig BLMDistrict Glenwood Springs BLM District Canon City BLM District Grand Junction BLM District Total BLM Southern Ut.e Tnd.Lan Agency ute Mountain Indian Agency Total Indian Agencies Total All Agencies No. of Projects Acre~ Treated ?J Surface acres Treated 68 58 42 76 57 35 41 29 14 18 26 48,477 37,148 22,840 16,888 16,260 14,345 13,272 10,886 6,498 5,922 4,310 45,624 36,888 18,567 16,488 15,005 14,345 12,972 9,478 6,498 4,432 4,310 464 184,607 137 94 88 49 54 196,846 105,021 59,086 41,069 31,137 25,950 422 22 _5 27 262,263 37,988 24,880 62,868 257,304 26,224 242880 51,104 913 521,977 493,015 - 104,548 57,201 40,038 30,787 24,730 =========================================================================== li Totals shown herein represent acreages of rangeland treated for range improvement and watershed management purposes, and do not include acreages treated in connection with timber management projects. ?J Denotes total acreages of projects, not total surface acres of land treated. Some projects overlapped. �Figure l.--Revised field form used to record data on habitat manipulation projects. GFP #3 - 68 Page 1 HABITAT MANIPULATION PROJECTS IN COLORADO Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department 1* PROJECT DESIGNATION 1. Number 2. Name II* LAND STATUS Name. 3. Natl. Forest 4. BLM District 5. State Agency 6. SCS District 7. Indian Agency 8. Private (Name & Address) II1* LOCATION 9. G.F.&P. Region 12. County Townsh ip___ IV V VI District or Unit 10. W.C.O. District 13. Drainage Range· Sections Allotment 11. Game Mgmt. Unit No. P.M•. SITE DESCRIPTION Dominant 14.* Vegetative Type 15. Species, 16.* Elevation 17. Topography 18. Percent Slope 19. Exposure . 20. Soil Type. 21. Erosion Condition-------22. Range Condition~ 23. Forage Production (lbs/acre) 24. Vegetative Density Bare 25. Shrubs 26. Herbs 27. Litter 28. Ground. Density Determined by 29. Agency--30. Date Remarks _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ CLIMATIC DATA 31. Avg. Annual Precipitation 33. Av. Annual Temperature 35. Avg. Snow Depth on Area Seasonal 32. Distribution 34. Length Growing Season~ 36~ Station Reportin.~ RANGE USE (At Treatment) 37~ Kind of Livestock 39. Carrying Capacity 41. Stocking Rate_ 38~ Season of Use, _ 40. Grazing System~ __.---Remarks -" ....•... __ ---------- 42~~Kind of t.Jildlife _ ------- How Use Determined Remarks 43~ Season of Use 45. Agency _ _ _ 44. Amount. of Use. _ _ 46. Date. _ �·- 69 Page 2 VII TREA TMENT 47~~No. Acres Treated" 50~ Kind of Treatment . 51"!' Date Treated 48~ Purpose . 49. Special of Treatment Yes Treatment: No. 52~ Equipment, 53~ Seeded: Yes 55~ Date Seeded _ Chemicals _ 54~ HowSeeded~·~~------------------------.. 56"!' Species Seeded. .;...... 57"!' Rate Seeded 58. Protection Given:.-. 59'1 Forage Production Determined Quantitatively: Yes' No Location From Other Projects_· Remarks vrrr _ Kind No' _ _ _ _ ------------------------------------------------------------- EFFECTS OF TREATMENT -------- After ~ecies Decrease Increase 60. Forage.Production (lhs) 61. Vegetative Density' (%) 62. Shrubs 63. Herbs 66. Kill Percent 68. Success Percent 70. Agency Making Determination 65. Bare Ground 64. Litter 67. How Kill Determined 69. How Success Determined 71. Date Remarks 72. Kind of Livestock '..,. 75. Present Carrying Present Stocking 80. Nt'>Chcinge___ 77. 73. ,Season 'of Use 78•. Increase of Capacity 81.' How Carrying 82. Agency Remarks:Making DeterminationL ~ Kind of Wildlife 87. More Use By 89. Type Cover Affected 85. System 76. Date, Capacity Rate 8~. 74. Type of Grazing -:_ 79 Decrease of. _ & Stocking Rate Determined 83. Date. ~-------------- _ _ _ 86. Amount.~ Of Use 88. Less Use By 90. Period Game Gone_· Season Of Use - _ _ _ _ TREATMENT '91. Be~eficial 92. Detrimental, _ 95. How Determined 93. No Effect 96. Agency 94. Unknown'------97. Date. _ Remarlq:; ------.~.~._-".". ..,- .......•..... _._. __ ._.---,.._.:..-_--------------- Information Obta inedBy Information Obtained From Field Inspection Made: Yes Location of Photo Statio~~ ~ * Items "flagged" importance, made to obtain are of primary information. No Tit Le Title Date _ _ -------------- and special effort should be �- 70 Evaluation of Effects of Treatment -- The data form which has been used to i~ventory range type conversion projects (Figure 1) contains a section for recording information concerning the effects of treatment on the range, livestock, and wildlife. This section of the form was left blank until all of the rarlge type conversion projects completed prior to January 1, 1966, were ~nventoried. During the next project segment a number of the completed range type conversion projects which have been conducted in important game areas will be selected for fur·ther study. The agencies that conducted these projects will be contacted and requested to provide the type of information :o.ecessaryto complete the 'r:Effectsof Treatment" section of the data form (Figure 1). Some of these project areas will be visited to observe and photograph post-treatment conditions. Later, more comprehensive research stUdies ~y be designed and undertaken to more accurately determine the iIT_~ediateand long range effects of various types of habitat type conversion projects on wildlife species. Evah,-ation of F'l1.ture Range Type Conversion Projects -- Federal land-use agencies have been urged to report plans for range type conversion work to appropriate Game, Fish and Parks Regional offices. The need for an interagency information exchange system designed to keep the Department of Game, Fish and Parks and land management agencies mutually advised about new range type conversion projects being planned was emphasized by Department personnel at a meeting of the Interagency Committee on Wildlife Ecology in February, 1967. The Department agreed to draft and submit a specific proposal for an information exchange under this project through the Habitat M:mip·Qlation Subcommittee for presentation to the Committee on Wildlife Ecology in June, 1967. The proposed system was being designed at the close of this project segment. It would involve the use of two data forms, and the procedure would be as follows: 1. When a new range type conversion project was proposed the land manage- ~ent age~cy would send a letter to the Regional Manager in the Game, Fish and Parks Department Region where the project would be located advisL~g him of their range type conversion plans. Information contaL~ed in the letter would include for each proposed project the legal description of the location, a map showing the location, and information describing the project site, climatic conditions, range condition and use by livestock and wildlife, number of acres to be treated, the kind of treatment to be applied and the purpose for the treatment. s:rheletter wouLd be sent at least one year before beginning work and before the projects had been approved by the Agency's Regional or State Office. 2. Form GFP #4A entitled "Completed Habitat Type Conversion Project," would be filled out by the land management agencies for each completed range revegetation project as soon as the conversion work had been done, and. the form would be mailed to the Regional Manager in the Game, Fish and.Parks Department Region where the project is located. 3. Form GFP, #4B entitled "Results and Effects of Habitat Type Conversion Project," wou.ld be filled out on the ground by the land management agencies and Game, Fish and Parks Regional personnel for each completed range revegetation project two years after the conversion work had been done, and it would be mailed to the Regional Manager in the Game, Fish and Parks Department Region where the project is located. �- 71 - 4. The Regional Colorado Department of Game, Fish and Parks Offices would forward copies of all letters describing plans for proposed range type conversion projects and copies of all data forms they received from the land management agencies, along with their comments concerning the wildlife implications of each project, to the Colorado Department of Game, Fish and Parks Game Research Center in Fort Collins, attention Game Range Investigations Project Leader. A central file for all range type conversion projects would be established and maintained at the Game Research Center. Data for all projects would be recorded on IBM cards, and the data would be available to all cooperating agencies. I~e designs for the two data forms which would be used for the information exchange system have not been completed, however the forms would be designed so that information concerning future range type conversion projects could be directly compared by IBM to information describing range type conversion projects completed prior to January 1, 1966. Information about those latter projects were inventoried on Form GFP #3, (Figure 1) by the Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department Game Research Division. Thus, it would be possible for land man~gement agencies to obtain various types of IBM listings concerning their range type conversion projects upon request to the Game, Fish and Parks Department. REFERENCES CITED Smith, Donald G. 1966. Inventory of range manipulation projects in Colorado. Game Research Report, July, pp. 69-77. Colo. Dept. of Game, Fish and Parks. Prepared by: Roland C. Kufeld Wildlife Researcher Date: July~ 1967 Approved by: Harold R. Shepherd Project Leader Ferd C. Kleinschnitz Federal Aid Coordinator ��July, 1967 - 73 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT state of COLORADO -------------------------------- Project No. W-38-R-21 ----~~-------------- Work Plan No. Title of Job: 1 Deer-Elk Investigations Job No. 5 Experimental Trappi~g and Marking Techniques Period Covered: April 1, 1966 through :M3.rch31" 1967 Personnel: M. C. Coghill, Raymond J. Boyd, Errol E. Ryland, Bill Fischer, Allison Mason, Wayne Knisley, Scott Bessire, Gene Bassett, Herb Browning, Tom Lynch, Don Benson, Earl Cochran, Glen Hinshaw, stan Ogilvie, Harold Lanning, Bill Forgett, Harvey Bray, Clarence Gore, Dick Lichtenberg, Claude White, Harold Burdick, Harry Dobbs, Charlie Brown, Dallas Morgan and Harold Wixson. ABSTRACT There was a total of 246 elk and 12 deer trapped and marked during the 1966-1967 trapping season. All elk were marked with various colors of collars denoting different trap sites. A total of 22 tagged and banded elk were killed during the 1966 big game season. Neck-banded elk sightings which indicated that elk in the Sapinero Area move about 35 miles to the southeast to winter, elk on the Flat Tops area of the White River move distances of up to 35 miles north and west to winter, and elk that winter in the Pagosa Springs area, summer and intermix with elk in the upper Rio Grande area some 45-50 miles 'north of the trapping area. �- 74 ! . Objectives: (1) Improve the existing electr.ic counter. (2) Improve the efficiency of existing Federal Aid traps. (3) Develop new, more efficient methods of trapping. (4) Attempt to locate a better metal ear tag that is commercially available. (5) Determine the feasibility of marking elk from the helicopter with paint. Procedures: (1) Install the electric counter in the EllginTrap located on the Sapinero Game Management Area near Gunnison, Colorado, and adjust the counter so that it will release the gate when a certain number of elk have passed through the gate into the trap. (2) Draw up a set of plans and construct a set of three portable squeezechutes to be used in place of the jump-net in the group traps now in use at the Sapinero Game Management Area. (3) Assist in the setting up and operation of the experimental "drive-trap" on Sheep Creek in the Saguache area. Pay flight time for one of the helicopters that will be used in herding elk into the wings of the trap. Use the portable squeeze-chut.es to speed up releasing elk from the holding corral in the trap. (4) Correspond with various tag and marker supply companies in order to determine if there is a commercially available ear tag that is made of harder material so that bending and breaking of the piercing tip that we are now experiencing with our present tags can be eliminated. (5) Examine the existing spray gun developed by Sky Choppers, Inc. to see if it will do an. adequate job of spraying paint or dye from the helicopter while it is hovering within "ground-effect" above running elk. After satisfactory ground testing of the spray equipment, try and mark elk in the upper Rio Grande area on Pole Creek with paint so that shorttime movements of elk caused by hunting pressure can be determined, by hunter observation, kills and aerial sightings of painted elk. �- 75 Experimental Trapping and M:trking Techniques Raymond J. Boyd and M. C. Coghill The electric counter was set up in the Ellgin Trap at the Sapinero Game Management Area and set to close the gate after six elk had entered the trap. This device did not prove successful since the beam of light that operates the counter has a source approximately one-inch in diameter, and this beam must be aligned so that the light is always shining into the photoelectric cell opposite the light source. Alignment of the light source is so critical that we could not keep it and the photo-electric cell aligned in the trap. Even a slight wind moved the trap so that the counter-release would not operate efficiently enough to make it practical for use in portable group-type big game traps. The mechanism has some promise for use in a trap that is of a permanent nature where it could be fastened to large posts set deep in the ground. However, we will not be able to use this type of gate release and recommend that no further work be done on this phase. A tentative set of plans were drawn for three portable squeeze chutes to be used in conjunction with the portable group trap developed under this job in past years. The main idea being that the chutes could be used singly or fastened together to make a "string" of chutes. All parts were to be cut on jigs so that any part of one chute could be used in another chute. This plan would allow easy set-up of chutes by anyone having use for them . Actual chute construction could not be started during this segment as the shop buildings that we had planned to use were taken over by the Bureau of Reclamation and no adequate facilities could be located during the short time remaining in the segment. All required fencing, poles, wire and panels for the "drive-trap" were hauled into the Sheep Creek area and portions of the trap set up during the early winter of 1966-67. However, snowfall in this area was very light and no elk concentrated in this wintering area. Therefore, we could not try driving elk with helicopters into the trap. This phase of the job will be continued during the next segment. Correspondence with the Salt Lake stamp Company, who are presently making our ear tags, indicated that they could not make an ear tag out of stronger metal than they are now using. Another tag company in Alabama was contacted concerning our problems, but at the time of this report, nothing had been heard from them regarding our questions. Thus, there is nothing to report on this phase of the job. �- 76 - No actual field time was spent on the aerial spraying of paint onto elk from a helicopter as the firm that furnishes the helicopters to the Department had all of their machines either in for major overhauls or completely wrecked at the time we needed to do the spraying. Some time was spent trying to locate a more powerful pump than the one used by the helicopters to spray agricultural chemicals, as we felt that an increase in pressure in the paint tank would be needed to properly put out the paint or dye. Until we get a chance to tryout a new pump and a resulting increase in tank pressure, we will have no information on how this modification will effect the stream of paint being shot from the spray gun. Thus we have essentially a negative report on this phase and will continue this portion of the job next segment. During the 1966-67 trapping season, there were 13 elk traps set up in various areas on the western slope of Colorado constructed according to plans and specifications developed by W-38-R personnel. A total of 246 elk were tagged and banded in these traps. In order to have a published record of trap sites and tag numbers, Tables 1 thru 13 list the elk tagged and banded during 1966-67 in Colorado. No time was spent by project personnel in the operation of these traps. A total of 22 tagged and banded elk were killed during the 1966 big game season in Colorado. Tables 14 thru 17 indicate the tagged elk killed, distance moved, and time between tagging and recovery. Figures 1, 2 and 3 show graphically the movements from trap sites to kill locations of the marked elk. Elk tagged at three locations on the White River elk study area, showed movements from the Hill Creek trap site east for a distance of 13 miles, movements from the Miller Creek trap up to 35 miles northeast, and only a four-mile movement from the East Fork of the Williams Fork to the Dunkley Flat Tops (Figure 2). For the first time since trapping was started in 1957 at the Sapinero Game Management Area, elk have shown extreme movements out of the general area where tags have been reported in the past. One elk that was tagged in 1962 was killed on East Sopris Creek, nearly 53 miles north-northeast of the trapping site, while another elk tagged in 1965 was killed on Stewart Peak which is located 45 miles south-southeast of the trap site (Figure 3). Tagged elk killed in the upper Rio Grande elk study area that had been tagged in the San Juan Basin moved nearly 44 miles from the trap site, and one elk ·tagged near Creede on the Rio Grande was killed at Palisade Meadows north of Pagosa Springs, a movement of 42 miles southwest of where it was banded (Figure 1). There were a total of 99 neck band sightings reported to the Department during 1966 in the Rio Grande elk study area. Of these, 39 were white bands, 18 were blue bands, 16 were rocket red bands, 15 were green collars and 11 were colored orange (Figures 4 thru 8). The large number of green neck bands sighted in the Rio Grande area suggests that there is a considerable interchange between elk that winter west of Pagosa Springs and elk that summer in the upper Rio Grande. In the past three years there has been only one elk killed in the San Juan area that was tagged and banded in the Rio Grande, however, we have had nine reports of elk killed in the Rio Grande that were tagged in the San Juan during the same period. �~ -- --- PAVED HIGHWAY - DIRT OR GRAVEL _ LAKE -f- MOUNTAIN ,.,../ WILDERNESS OR PEAK AREA BOUNDARY FIGURE 1 - TAG RETURNS FROM FIVE ELK KILLED IN THE RIO GRANDE ELK STUDY AREA, AND ONE RIO GRANDE ELK K~LLED IN THE SAN JUAN AREA, 1966. ROAD RESERVOIR �- 78 - N • STUDY AREA FIGURE 2 - TAG RETURNS FROM FIVE ELK KILLED IN THE WHITE RIVER LEGEND ELK STUDY AREA, 1966. GAME MANAGEMENT BOUNDARY UNIT --r tlGHWAY SECONDARY ROAD RIVER - c:IIWC --------<::::- LAKE: • ---- �- 79 - East Sopris Creek 53 miles 63 LEGEND GAME MANAGEMENT UNIT BOUNDARY HIGHWAY -=-- SECONDARY ROAD ---- RIVER • • CREEK • • -~Stewart Peak PEAK 45 miles FIGURE 3 - TAG RETURNS FROM THREE ELK KILLED LAKE • IN THE GUNNISON AREA, 1966 �LEGEND -- PAVED ---- DIRT •• LAKE HIGHWAY OR GRAVEL OR ROAD RESERVOIR ••••••••••• AIVER .>---... CREEK -{- MOUNTAIN f",,,,.,/ WILDERNESS PEAK AREA BOUNDARY CP 0- FIGURE 4 - SIGHTING LOCATIONS OF 11 ORANGE NBCK-BANDED DURING 1966 - RIO GRfu~DE ELK S'rUDY AREA C!) 'I'r-ap Site X Band Sighting Location ELK �~ - PAVEO ---- ,, Dlilr. HIGHWAY 011 8RAVEL _ LAKE OR -I- MOUNTAIN --'" WILDERNESS ROAO RESERVOIR PEAK AREA BOUNDARY OJ I-'" FIGURE 5 - SIGHTING LOCATIONS OF 15 GREEN NECK~BANDED ELK DURING 1966 - RIO GRANDE ELK STUDY AREA o Trap Site xBand Sighting �LEGEND - PAVED ---- DIRT HIGHWAY OR GRAVEL •• LAKE OR -{- MOUNTAIN ,""./ WILDERNESS ROAD RESERVOIR PEAK AREA BOUNDARY co ro FIGURE 6 - SIGHTING LOCATIONS OF 16 ROCKET RED NECK-BANDED ELK DURING 1966 - RIO GRANDE ELK STUDY AREA (!) Trap Site xBand S~ghting Location �~ - PAVED ---- HIGHWAY DIRT OR GRAVEL OR ROAD REIE~VOlR _ LAKE + MOUNTAIN ,.,"'/ WILDERNESS ."EA PEAK BOUNDARY 8] FIGURE 7 - SIGHTING LOCATIONS OF 39 WHITE NECK-BANDED ELK DURING 1966 RIO GRANDE ELK STUDY AREA <:> Trap Site ~Band Sighting Location �LEGEND - PAVED ---- DIRT ••• LAKE ...,....... RIVEA .>--.. HIGHWAY OR GRAVEL OR ROAD RESERVOIR CREEK -i- MOUNTAIN ,., ••/ WILDERNESS PEAK AREA BOUNDARY co + FIGURE 8 - SIGHTING LOCATIONS OF 18 BLUE NECK-BANDED ELK DURING 1966 RIO GRANDE ELK STUDY AREA o Trap Site xBand Sighting Location �- 85 - Many sightings of green-banded elk have been reported to us during the past few years, and many of these sightings were during aerial trend counts in late January and February which indicates that these elk were wintering in two different areas, or at least were wintering in the Rio Grande the year after banding in the San Juan. Information gained from a banding program shows the value of such a program to the Management Division. Game Management Unit boundaries were set up in Colorado many years ago, mostly on the basis of the opinions of the resident W.C.O. as to the general boundaries of the herd in question. Banding information will help determine if changes in unit boundaries are necessary. Recommendations: (1) Encourage Region personnel to set up regular, systematic schedules of aerial flights over the various trapping areas in order to determine movements of banded animals and areas of concentration at different seasons of the year. (2) Keep up-to-date maps of each trapping area with a cumulative record of all. sightings and tag returns from hunter-killed elk. These mapped locations will be helpfull when big game seasons are set within local areas. (3) Assist Regional personnel in selecting sites for new traps and act as consultant in the construction and operation of new traps. All ear tags and neck bands will.be ordered by the Federal Aid Research staff, even though Regions will pay the cost of the materials. This needs to be done to keep numbers and colors from being duplicated. Also, the Federal Aid Big Game Research staff will act as a clearing house for band sightings, tag returns, etc., for the same reasons as above. (4) Complete construction and revise plans for portable squeeze be used in conjunction with the portable group traps. (5) Assist in setting up and running the experimental Sheep Creek in the Saguache area. Prepared by: Raymond J. Boyd Wildlife Researcher M. C. Coghill Research Assistant Date: July, 1967 Approved chutes "drive-trap" on by: Jack R. Grieb Project Leader Wayne W. Sand fort Game Research Chief to �- 86 Table 1.-- Elk Trapped and Tagged at the Big Beaver Trap, White River National Forest, Colorado - Winter 1966-67. Date Tagged 12/18/66 12/18/66 12/18/66 12/20/66 12/20/66 12/28/66 12/28/66 12/28/66 12/31/66 12/31/66 12/31/66 12/31/66 12/31/66 12/31/66 1/2/67 1/4/67 1/5/67 1/5/67 1/5/67 1/8/67 1/8/67 1/8/67 1/8/67 1/8/67 1/9/67 1/9/67 1/11/67 1/11/67 1/11/67 1/11/67 1/1l+/67 1/14/67 1/14/67 1/16/67 1/16/67 1/16/67 1/18/67 1/18/67 1/18/67 1/30/67 1/30/67 1/30/67 1/30/67 1/30/67 1/30/67 1/30/67 2/3/67 2/3/67 Sex Age Female Female Mature Mature Calf Mature Mature Mature Mature Mature Calf Mature Calf Yearling Mature Calf Mature Mature Mature Mature Calf Mature Yearling Calf Calf Mature Yearling Mature Yearling Mature Mature Mature Mature Mature' Mature Old Old Mature Mature Calf Calf Yearling Old Calf Mature Old Yearling Mature Mature Mature Female Female Female Female Female Female Female Female Male Female Male Female Female Female Female Male Female Female Male Male Female Male Female Female Female Female Female Female Female Female Female Female Female Female Male Female Female Female Female Female Female Female Female Female Female Ear Tag Numbers W-332 W-333 W-334 W-335 W-336 W-337 W-338 W-339 (7) (7) (7) (7) (1) W-34l W-342 W-343 W-344 W-345 W-348 W-126 W-127 W-128 W-129 W-13l W-132 W-133 W-134 W-135 W-14l W-142 B-1 B-2 B-3 B-4 B-5 B-6 B-7 B-8 B-9 B-lO B-ll B-12 B-13 B-15 B-16 B-17 B-18 B-19 B-20 B-21 B-22 B-23 W-332 W-333 W-334 W-335 W-336 W-337 W-338 W-339 W-340 W-341 W-342 W-343 W-344 W-345 W-348 W-126 W-127 W-128 W-129 W-13l W-132 W-133 W-134 W-135 W-14l W-142 B-1 B-2 B-3 B-4 B-5 B-6 B-7 B-8 B-9 B-10 B-ll B-12 B-13 B-15 B-16 B-17 B-18 B-19 B-20 B-21 B-22 B-23 Remarks blue neck band blue neck band blue neck band blue neck band blue neck band blue neck band blue neck band blue neck band blue neck band, only one tag blue neck band blue neck band blue neck band blue neck band blue neck band blue neck band blue neck band blue neck band blue neck band blue neck band blue neck band blue neck band blue neck band blue neck band blue neck band blue neck band blue neck band blue neck band blue neck band blue neck band blue neck band blue neck band blue neck band blue neck band blue neck band blue neck band blue neck band blue neck band blue neck band blue neck band blue neck band blue neck band blue neck band blue neck band blue neck band blue neck band blue neck band blue neck band blue neck'band �- 87 - Table 2. - Elk Trapped and Tagged at the Miller Creek Trap, White River National Forest, Colorado - Winter 1966-67. Date Tagged Sex Age 1/14/67 1/14/67 1/30/67 1/30/67 1/2/67 1/2/67 1/4/67 1/9/67 1/9/67 1/9/67 1/9/67 1/9/67 Female Female Male Female Female Female Female Male Female Female Female Female Mature Calf Calf Old Calf Calf Calf Calf Calf Calf Calf Calf Ear Tag Numbers M-l M-2 M-3 M-4 W-346 W-347 W-349 W-136 W-137 W-138 W-139 W-140 M-l M-2 M-3 M-4 W-346 W-347 W-349 W-136 W-137 W-138 W-139 W-140 Remarks green neck band green neck band green neck band green neck band green neck band green neck band green neck band green neck band green neck band green neck band green neck band green neck band Table 3.-- Elk Trapped and Tagged at the Slater Trap, Routt National Forest, Colorado - Winter 1966-67. Date Tagged 2/1/67 2/1/67 2/1/67 2/1/67 2/1/67 2/1/67 2/1/67 2/8/67 2/8/67 2/8/67 2/8/67 2/8/67 2/8/67 2/8/67 2/8/67 2/13/67 2/13/67 2/13/67 2/20/67 2/20/67 2/20/67 2/20/67 2/20/67 2/20/67 Sex Age Male Female Female Female Male Female Female Female Female .Male Female Female Male Female Male Female Female Female Male Female Female Yearling Yearling Yearling Calf Calf Mature Calf Mature Yearling Yearling Yearling Mature Yearling Mature Calf Mature Mature Mature Yearling Mature Yearling Female Female Mature Mature Ear Tag Numbers ('2) (7) (7) (7) (7) (7) (7) (7) (7) S-l S-2 S-5 S-6 S-7 S-8 S-9 S-lO S-l1 S-12 S-13 S-14 S-15 S-16 S-17 S-18 S-19 S-20 S-21 2-22 S-23 S-24 S-25 S-26 S-l S-2 S-5 S-6 S-7 S-8 S-9 S-lO S-l1 S-12 .S-13 S-14 S-15 S-16 S-17 S-18 S-19 S-20 S-2l S-22 S-23 S-24 S-25 S-26 Remarks white with red stripe band white with red stripe band white with red stripe band white with red stripe band white with red stripe band white with red stripe band white with red stripe band white with red stripe band white with red stripe band white with red stripe band white with red stripe band white with red stripe band white with red stripe band white with red stripe band white with red stripe band white with red stripe band white with red stripe band white with red stripe band white with red stripe band white with red stripe band white with red stripe band white with red stripe band white with red stripe band white with red stripe band �- 88 Table 3.-- Elk Trapped and Tagged at the Slater Trap, Routt National Forest, Colorado - Winter 1966-67. (Continued) Date Tagged Sex 2/20/67 2/28/67 2/28/67 2/28/67 2/28/67 2/28/67 2/28/67 2/28/67 Female Male Male Female Female Female Male Female Ear Tag Numbers Age Mature Yearling Yearling Mature Yearling Yearling Yearling Yearling ( 7) (7) (7) (7) (7) (7) S-27 S-28 S-29 S-30 S-31 S-32 S-33 S-34 S-27 S-28 S-29 S-30 S-31 S-32 S-33 S-34 Remarks white with red stripe band white with red stripe band white with red stripe band white with red stripe band white with red stripe band white with red stripe band white with red stripe band white with red stripe band Table 4.-- Elk Trapped and Tagged at the Ellgin Trap, Gunnison National Forest, Colorado - Winter 1966-67. Date Tagged 2/8/67 2/8/67 2/8/67 2/8/67 2/8/67 2/8/67 2/8/67 2/8/67 2/8/67 2/8/67 2/8/67 2/9/67 2/9/67 2/9/67 2/9/67 2/9/67 2/13/67 2/14/67 2/14/67 2/18/67 2/18/67 2/18/67 2/18/67 2/22/67 2/22/67 2/22/67 2/22/67 2/22/67 2/24/67 2/24/67 Sex Age Female Male Female Male Male Male Female Female Male Female Female Female Male Male Male Mature Calf Mature Yearling Calf Calf Calf Calf Calf Calf Calf Yearling Calf Calf Calf Calf Calf Yearling Calf Mature Mature Mature Yearling Mature Mature Mature Calf Mature Calf Mature Female Female Male Female Female Female Female Female Female Female Male Female Male Female Ear Tag Numbers S-252 S-253 S-254 S-255 S-256 S-257 S-258 S-259 S-260 S-26l S-262 S-263 S-264 S-265 S-266 S-267 S-268 S-269 S-270 S-271 S-272 S-273 S-274 S-275 S-276 S-277 S-278 S-279 S-280 S-28l S-252 S-253 S-254 S-255 S-256 S-258 S-260 S-26l S-262 S-263 S-264 S-265 S-266 S-267 S-268 S-269 S-270 S-271 S-272 S-273 S-274 S-275 S-276 S-277 S-278 S-279 S-280 S-28l Remarks white neck band white neck band white neck band white neck band white neck band white neck band white neck band white neck band white neck band numbered 222 white neck band no collar white neck band white neck band white neck band white neck band white neck band white neck band white neck band white neck band white neck band white neck band white neck band white neck band white neck band white neck band white neck band white neck band white neck band white neck band white neck band �- 89 Table 5.-- Elk Trapped and Tagged at the Falls Creek Trap, San Juan National Forest, Colorado - Winter 1966-67. Date Tagged Sex Age 1/18/67 1/18/67 1/18/67 1/19/67 1/21/67 1/25/67 1/26/67 1/26/67 1/28/67 1/28/67 1/28/67 1/31/67 2/4/67 2/4/67 2/5/67 2/13/67 2/13/67 12/10/67 12/10/67 12/10/67 12/10/67 12/10/67 12/12/67 12/12/67 12/13/67 12/13/67 12/30/67 12/30/67 12/30/67 12/30/67 12/30/67 1/167 12/31/67 1/2/67 1/2/67 1/4/67 1/5/67 1/5/67 1/7 /67 1/7/67 1/7 /67 1/13/67 1/13/67 1/16/67 1/16/67 1/17/67 2/17/67 2/17 /67 Female Female Male Female Male Male Female Female Female Female Female Female Female Male Female Male Male Female Female Female Female Male Male Female Female Female Female Female Female Female Male Female Female Male Female Female Male Male Female Female Male Female Male Female Female Female Female Female Mature Mature Calf Mature Calf Calf Calf Calf Mature Calf Calf Calf Mature Calf Mature Mature Mature Mature Mature Yearling Calf Calf Calf Calf Calf Calf Yearling Mature Calf Calf Calf Calf Yearling Yearling Calf Calf Calf Calf Calf Yearling Yearling Mature Calf Mature Mature Mature Calf Ear Tag Numbers (7) (7) (7) (7) H-57 H-58 H-59 H-60 H-61 H-62 H-64 H-65 H-66 H-67 H-68 H-70 H-7l H-72 H-73 H-74 H-75 H-76 H-77 H-78 H-79 H-80 H-8l H-82 H-83 H-84 H-87 H-88 H-89 H-90 H-9l H-92 H-93 H-94 H-95 H-96 H-97 H-98 H-99 H-lOO H-5l H-52 H-53 H-54 H-55 H-56 li-lOl H-102 H-57 H-58 H-59 H-60 H-61 H-62 H-64 H-65 H-66 H-67 H-68 H-70 H-7l H-72 H-73 H-74 H-75 H-76 H-77 H-78 H-79 H-80 H-8l H-82 H-83 H-84 H-87 H-88 H-89 H-90 H-91 H-92 H-93 H-94 H-95 H-96 H-97 H-98 H-99 H-100 H-5l H-52 H-53 H-54 H-55 H-56 H-lOl H-102 Color of Collar blue neck band blue neck band blue neck band blue neck band blue neck band blue neck band blue neck band blue neck band blue neck band blue neck band blue neck band blue neck band blue neck band blue neck band blue neck band blue neck band blue neck band blue neck band blue neck band blue neck band blue neck band blue neck band blue neck band blue neck band blue neck band blue neck band blue neck band blue neck band blue neck band blue neck band blue neck band blue neck band blue neck band blue neck band blue neck band blue neck band blue neck band blue neck band blue neck band blue neck band blue neck band blue neck band blue neck band blue neck band blue neck band blue neck band blue neck band blue neck band �- 90 Table 6.-- Elk Trapped and Tagged at the Mill Creek Trap, San Juan National Forest, Colorado - Winter 1966-67. Date Tagged Sex 1/8/67 1/8/67 1/9/67 1/24/67 1/24/67 1/24/67 1/24/67 1/24/67 1/26/67 1/27/67 1/27/67 1/27/67 1/27/67 Female Female Male Female Female Female Male Male Male Female Female Female Female Age Mature Calf Mature Mature Calf Yearling (1) Calf Calf Yearling Mature Mature Mature Calf Ear Tag Numbers P-206 P-208 P-209 P-213 P-2l4 P-215 P-2l6 P-2l7 P-2l8 P-219 P-220 P-221 P-222 P-206 P-208 P-209 P-213 P-214 P-215 P-2l6 P-217 P-218 P-2l9 P-220 P-221 P-222 Color of Collar dark red collar dark red collar dark red collar dark red collar dark red collar dark red collar dark red collar dark red collar dark red collar dark red collar dark red collar dark red collar dark red collar Table 7.-- Elk Trapped and Tagged at the Devil Creek Trap, San Juan National Forest, Colorado - Winter 1966-67. Date Tagged Sex 1/5/67 1/5/67 1/5/67 1/5/67 1/8/67 1/10/67 1/13/67 1/11/67 1/13/67 1/13/67 1/13/67 1/13/67 1/13/67 1/29/67 1/29/67 Male Male Male Female Male Male Female Female Female Male Male Female Female Female Male Age Calf Calf Calf Calf Calf Calf Mature Mature Calf Calf Calf Calf Yearling (1) Mature Calf Ear Tag Numbers P-82 P-83 P-84 P-85 P-86 P-87 P-88 P-89 P-90 P-91 P-92 P-93 P-94 P-95 P-96 P-82 P-83 P-84 P-85 P-86 P-87 P-88 P-89 P-90 P-9l P-92 P-93 P-94 P-95 P-96 Color of Collar dark gr.een collar dark green collar dark green collar dark green collar dark green collar dark green collar dark green collar dark green collar dark green collar dark g'Leen collar dark green collar dark green collar dark green collar dark green collar dark green collar �- 91 Table 8.-- Elk Trapped and Tagged at the Fish Creek Trap, San Juan National Forest, Colorado - Winter 1966-67. Date Tagged Sex Age 12/16/67 12/16/67 12/31/67 1/8/67 1/1/67 1/1/67 1/30/67 1/8/67 1/10/67 1/30/67 1/30/67 Female Female Female Female Male Female Female Female Female Female Female Calf Mature Yearling (7) Mature Calf Mature Yearling (7) Mature Mature Mature Mature Ear Tag Numbers D-126 D-127 D-128 D-129 D-130 D-13l D-133 D-137 D-138 D-139 D-142 D-126 D-127 D-128 D-129 D-130 D-13l D-133 D-137 D-138 D-139 D-142 Color of Collar dark green band dark green band dark green band dark green band dark green band dark green band no band dark green band dark green band dark green band dark green band Table 9.-- Deer Trapped and Tagged at the Falls Creedk Trap, San Juan National Forest, Colorado - Winter 1966-67. Date Tagged 12/19/66 12/27/66 1/26/67 1/31/67 2/17/67 2/17/67 2/17/67 Sex Age Male Male Male Female Female Male Fawn Fawn Fawn Fawn Mature Mature Ear Tag Numbers H-85 H-86 H-63 H-69 H-l03 H-104 H-105 Remarks H-85 H-86 H-63 H-69 H-103 H-l04 H-l05 Table 10.-- Deer Trapped and Tagged at the Mill Creek Trap, San Juan National Forest, Colorado - Winter 1966-67. Date Tagged Sex Age 1/5/67 1/8/67 1/9/67 1/13/67 1/15/67 Male Female Male Female Male Yearling (7) Mature Mature Mature Mature Ear Tag Numbers P-205 P-207 P-2l0 P-2ll P-2l2 P-205 P-207 P-2l0 P-211 P-2l2 Remarks �- 92 Table ll.-- Elk Tagged and Banded at the Coller Hanagement Area, Rio Grande National Forest, Colorado - Winter 1966-67. Date Tagged 11/25/66 11/25/66 11/25/66 11/25/66 11/25/66 11/27/66 11/27/66 LL/29/66 11/29/66 11/30/66 12/8/66 12/16/66 12/16/66 12/16/66 12/16/66 12/18/66 12/18/66 1/6/67 1/3/67 1/6/67 1/6/67 1/6/67 Sex Age Female Female Female Male Female Male Female Male Female Female Female Female Male Calf 'Mature Calf Calf Calf Calf Mature Calf Mature Calf Nature Mature Calf Mature Calf Calf Calf Calf Calf Mature Yearling ('1) Calf EemaLe Male Female Female Female Female Female Female Female Ear Tag Numbers SL-24 SL-25 SL-28 SL-29 SL-30 SL-3l SL-32 SL-33 SL-34 SL-35 SL-36 SL-37 SL-38 SL-39 SL-40 SL_L~l SL-42 SL-43 SL-44 SL-45 SL-46 SL-47 SL-24 SL-25 SL-28 SL-29 SL-30 SL-3l SL-32 SL-33 SL-34 SL-35 SL-36 SL-37 SL-38 SL-39 SL-40 SL-4l SL-42 SL-43 SL-44 SL·~45 SL-46 SL-47 Color of Collar orange and white band orange and white band orange and white band orange and white band orange and white band orange and white band orange and white band orange and white band orange and white band orange and white band orange and white band orange and white band orange and white band orange and white band orange and white band orange and white band orange and white band orange and white band orange and white band orange and.'white band orange and white band orange and white band Table 12.-- Elk Tagged and Banded at the Goose Creek Trap, Rio Grande National Forest, Colorado - Winter 1966-67. Date Tagged Sex 1/1/67 1/1/67 1/27/67 1/27/67 1/27/67 2/11/67 2/11/67 3/8/67 3/8/67 3/8/67 3/8/67 3/8/67 3/8/67 Male Female Female Female Female Male Female Female Female Female Female Male Female Age Calf Calf Mature Yearling Calf Calf Yearling Mature Mature Mature Calf Calf Mature Ear Tag Numbers RG-lOl RG-102 RG-I03 RG-104 RG-105 RG-106 RG-107 RG-108 RG-109 RG-110 RG-1l2 RG-1l3 RG-1l4 RG-101 RG-I02 RG-I03 RG-I04 RG-10S RG-106 RG-I07 RG-108 RG-109 RG-110 RG-1l2 RG-113 RG-114· Color of Collar white neck band white neck band white neck band white neck band white neck band white neck band white neck band white neck band white neck band white neck band white neck band white neck band white neck band �- 93 Table B.-- Date Recaught 2/14/67 Cow S-232 2/22/67 Elk Recatch Records, Gunnison National Forest, Colorado - Winter 1966-67 • Date Originally Tagged Time Lapse Original Weight Recatch Weight 3/8/65 23 months 545 lbs. 445 lbs. 2/1/62 60 months 465 1bs. Remarks original collar intact, had lost 100 lbs. had lost original collar �- 94 Table 14.-- Tag Returns From Elk Killed During 1966 Big Game Season, Rio Grande National Forest, Colorado. Date Killed Date Tagged Where Tagged 10/66 2/10/66 SL-22 3/2/66 SL-26 3/2/66 SL-27 1/26/65 SL-199 1/21/65 P-21 1/23/65 P-29 Road Canyon Reservoir Long Ridge 1 mile north of 30-mi le camp Timber Hill Shallow Creek Texas Creek West Bellows Creek Devil Creek Palisade Meadows Upper Rio Grande Bear Town 10/16/66 10/15/66 10/66 10/29/66 10/19/66 Devil Creek Where Killed Remarks collar intact, had moved 4 miles west collar intact, had moved 14 miles west collar intact, had moved 9 miles west animal had moved about 42 miles southwest collar intact, had moved 44 miles northwest collar intact, had moved 42 miles northwest �- 95 Table 15.-- Tag Returns From Elk Killed During the 1966 Big Game Season, Gunnison National Forest, Colorado. Date Killed Date Tagged Where Tagged 10/66 3/14/62 S-32 3/9/65 S-242 3/15/65 S-247 Corral Gulch 10/15/66 10/16/66 Ellgin Trap Ellgin Trap Where Killed East Sopris Creek Stewart Peak E. Beckwith Mountain Remarks had lost collar, had moved 53 miles north of the trap had lost collar, had moved 45 miles SSE of the trap still had collar, had moved 26 miles north Table 16.-- Tag Returns From Elk Killed During the 1966 Big Game Season, San Juan National Forest, Colorado. Date Killed ·Date Tagged 10/15/66 2/19/65 Falls Creek H-13 2/27/65 Falls Creek H-15 4/12/65 Falls Creek H-33 12/17/65 Falls Creek H-4l Devil Creek 2/3/65 P-4l 1/23/66 Devil Creek 10/66 10/66 10/24/66 10/15/66 10/16/66 Where Tagged Where Killed Bear Creek Bear Creek Big Elk and Little Elk Creek Fish Creek Graham Peak North of Pagosa 10 miles Remarks still had collar, had moved 15 miles northwest still had collar, had moved 15 miles NW had lost collar, had moved 12 miles north still had collar, had moved 18.4 miles NW still had collar, had moved 25 miles north had lost collar, had moved 28 miles northeast �- 96 - Table 17.-- Tag Returns From Elk Killed During the 1966 Big Game Season, White River National Forest, Colorado. Date Killed Date Tagged Where Tagged Where Killed 10/66 2/21/63 W-54 3/11/63 W-63 1/20/65 W-123 2/65 W-207 2/65 W-210 2/65 W-22l 2/65 W-2l2 Hill Creek no other information Hill Creek Marvine Peak 10/66 10/66 10/29/66 10/66 10/66 10/66 E. Fk Williams Dunkley Flat Fork River Tops Miller Creek 4-mile Gulch Miller Creek Mi ller Creek Miller Creek Trappers Lake south 1 mi. no information Miller Creek . Remarks had moved 13 miles NE still had collar, had moved 4 miles east had moved 2 miles east of the trap had moved two miles east 3-point bull had moved 35 miles NE 5-point bull �July, 1967 - 97 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO --------~~~~--------- Project No. .W-38-R-21 Work Plan No. 1 Deer-Elk Investigations Job No. 6 Title of Job: Experimental Immobilization Techniques Period Covered: April 1, 1966 through March 31, 1967 Personnel: Raymond J. Boyd, Richard N. Denney and L. Dale Hibbs ABSTRACT The pens, laboratory building and scale facilities were not completed before the end of the segment so that actual work on this job was delayed because of the lack of proper facilities. Five mule deer, one fallow deer and three elk were immobilized with succinylcholine chloride, while five bighorn sheep were unsuccessfully immobilized \d th the same drug. Phencyclidine hydrochloride (Sernylan) and succinylcholine chloride were mixed in the ratio of 10:1 and allowed to stand on the shelf for 8 days, no separation or precipitating of the two compounds was noted. �- 98 - Recommendations: (1) Continue this job as originally planned with specific work on mixtures of various drugs. (2) Attempt to obtain a narcotics license from the U. S. Treasury Department so that experimentation with the oripavine derivative, M-99, can be carried out on native big game animals in Colorado. (3) Investigate further the euthanization phases with the assistance of Dr. Fred Glover of the Colorado Cooperative Wildlife Research Unit. Objectives: (1) Determine the most efficient immobilizing and tranquilizing agents and dosages for Colorado big game species. (2) Compare the euthanization qualities injected with two types of arrows. of succinylcholine chloride Procedures: (1) A delay in the final construction phases of the pens and laboratory building did not allow time for intensive work on this job. In the course of the year it was possible to inject succinylcholine chloride into six deer, three elk and five bighorn sheep using Cap-Chur equipment. a. Formulate a mixture of phencyclidine hydrochloride and succinylcholine chloride in the ratio. of 10:1 to see if they are complimentary and will not separate or precipitate out after being mixed. (2) No work was accomplished on theeuthanization phase of this job as the project leader, Richard N. Denney, resigned from the Department to a~c~pt assignment with the United Nations FAO Project in Kenya, East Africa. The writer was transferred to Fort Collins in September, 1966, but pr.ess of other duties did not allow time for work on this specific job. �- 99 - Delays in the final construction phases on the laboratory building, scale facilities and concrete aprons in the pens did not allow time for work on the specific jobs planned for the penned animals. Animals in the pens and available for the drug work include 11 elk, six deer and three bighorn sheep. Much of the work on this job was assigned to Richard N. Denney who resigned from the Colorado Game, Fish and Barks Department to accept an assignment with the United Nations FAO Project in Kenya, East Africa. The writer was transferred to Fort Collins in September, 1966 to continue some of the jobs assigned to Mr. Denney, but moving, press of other jobs and the writing of a major pUblication on other jobs in this project did not allow time to pursue much of this job. However, in the normal course of duties in the Department, opportunities arose to use the Cap-Chur equipment to inject several species of Colorado big game animals with the muscle relaxant succinylcholine chloride. Results of this work are shown below in Table 1. �- 100 - Table 1.--Dosages of Succinylcholine Chloride used for immobilization of deer, elk and bighorn sheep*, Colorado, 1967. Est. Total Mg. per ImmoSpecies Sex Age Weight Dosage Pounds bi1ized Recovered Deer..!! male mature 175 if 8 mg. 0.0457 5:30 17:00 Deer male fawn 50 if 4 mg. 0.08 3:14 18:56 Deer male yearling 140 if 6 mg. 0.0428 2:57 11: 35 Deer male yearling 135 if 6 mg. 0.0444 2:59 23:16 Deer male yearling 135 if 6 mg. 0.0444 2:04 27:37 Deer];/ female old 100 if 8 mg. 0.08 3:40 25:00 E1k1/ Elk Elk female female female mature mature mature 400 if 13 mg. 400 if 13 mg. 400 if 14 mg. 0.0325 0.0325 0.035 10:55 8:58 6:55 14:06 3:53 18:00 Bighor~/ female mature 135 if 14 mg. 0.1044 no reaction Bighorn female mature 130 if 15 mg. 0.1154 no reaction Bighorn female mature 135 if 16 mg. 0.1185 no reaction Bighorn female mature 135 if 17 mg. 0.1259 no reaction Bighorn female mature 130 if 18 mg. 0.1385 some ataxia in 11 min. *Mr. L. Dale Hibbs furnished data on bighorn sheep drug dosages taken during field work on Federal Aid Project W-4l-R. 1/ Rocky Mountain Mule Deer (Odocoileus hemionus) - these were penned animals. 2/ Fallow Deer (Dama dama) - these were penned animals. 3/ Rocky Mountain Elk (Cervu8 canadensis) - these were penned animals. ~/ Rocky Mountain Bighorn Sheep (Ovis canadensis) - these were free-ranging animals. Two of the drugs (phencyclidine hydrochloride and succinylcholine chloride) that we have used singly in the past for immobilization of Colorado big game animals were mixed in the ratio of 10:1 and stored at room temperature and under refrigeration for eight days. At the end of this time, no separation or precipitating out of either of the drugs was noted. Prepared by: Raymond J. Boyd Wildlife Researcher Date: July, 1967 Approved by: Jack R. Grieb Project Leader Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief �July, 1967 - 101 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO -------------------------- Project No. W-3B-R-21 Work Plan No. 1 Deer-Elk Investigations 7 Title of Job: Experimental Telemeterlllg Devices Period Covered: April 1, 1966 to March 31, 1967 Personnel: Richard N. Denny, Raymond J. Boyd, Marion C. Coghill and Edgar J. Prenzlow ABSTRACT An annotated bibliography on wildlife telemetry is appended to this report'. A justification report concerning telemetry was completed, and two department personnel attended the Biomedical Telemetry Conference at San Francisco during March, 1966. Four ~~rkusen transmitters placed on penned cow elk operated 45, 63 12l and l33 days with eight ounces of mercury batteries. Line-of-sight transmission on the ground with the Markusen VHF, 12-channel receiver and directional yagi-type antenna was satisfactory when tested on penned animals. Different size capacitors and different colored resin bulbs were used in construction of neon blinker systems for deer and elk. Methods of mounting the systems on collars and visibility tests will be completed on penned animals during the next segment. �- 102 Recommendations: Continue the job as planned, but survey other big game telemetry projects to determine the degree of efficiency that is presently obtained and type of equipment used. From information gathered and data on penned animals, prepare recommendations for an appropriate field investigation. Objectives: (1) Determine the most suitable transmitters and receivers to use on deer and elk. (2) Develop and test the use of visual blinkers on deer. Procedures: A feasibility report was written concerning wildlife telemetry on big game in Colorado. The Wildlife Telemetry Newsletters, Bio-Telemetry, edited by L. E. Slater, and Biomedical Telemetry, edited by C. A. Caceres, wer-e the primary references used to comp.Ie te the report. Two Wildlife Researchers, representing the Department, attended the Biomedical Telemetry Conference in San Francisco on March 18-20, 1966. A summary of the Conference was written ny Mr. Richard N. Denny. Two Markusen transmitters, attached to canvas-webb collars, were removed from immobilized cow elk and two other Markusen transmitters were installed on the same animals. The animals were in pens at the Research Center at Fort Collins. The S. L. Markusen Company and the Biomedical Electronics laboratory at the Denver Research Institute were contacted concerning possible malfunction of previously purchased equipment and construction of new types of receiving antennas. Ten neon blinker systems were constructed by project personnel and will be attached with collars to deer and elk in pens at the Research Center at Fort Collins during June of 1967. The length and frequency of the blink is controlled by capacitors. Four systems have size 2.0 capacitors, three have 1.5 capacitors and three have 0.5 capacitors. Five different colored (clear, red, blue, ye Ll.ow and green) shields, made from Aleenes' noncritical liquid plastic resin, will protect the 105 - 125 volt, ~ watt General Electric glow lamp. Also, each system will include a 1.0 megohm, 1.0 watt resistor. On six of the blinkers, two 45 volt U30 radio "B" batteries will be used and these should have a life of from 8 - 12 months. The remaining four blinker systems will utilize three of these same size batteries to test if the increased wattage will significantly increase the life of the system. Visibility, battel~ life and durability will be tested during the next segment and diagrams and photographs of the final, tested apparatus will be presented at that time. �- 103 Experimental Telemetering Devices At the request of Mr. Jack R. Griep, who replaced Mr. Richard N. Denny as W-38-R Project Leader on September 1, 1966, a feasibility report was vITitten during January, 1966, concerning wildlife telemetry in Colorado. Segments of the report are included as Appendix A. Allen E. Anderson and Richard N. Denny, Wildlife Researchers with the Department, attended the Biomedical Telemetry Conference at the University of California, Berkeley, California. 'l'l:le book, Biomedical Telemetry, edited by Cesar A. Caceres and published in 1965 by Academic Press, New York and London, was purchased to acquaint Messrs. Allen and Denny with information presented at the conference. A swmnary report of the conference was written by Mr. Denny for the Department and is presented.as Appendix B. An annotated bibliography on wildlife telemetry by William D. Cooper, wildlife student, Colorado State University, is included as Appendix C of this report. Results were obtained from two of the M3.rkusen transmitters placed on cow elk in pens at the Research Center in Fort Collins. The t.wo transmitters, one (S-270 ,vith modified whip antenna) and the other (S-273 with whip antenna), were put on the animals June 27, 1966. 'l'l:le signal from transmitter S-270 was last heard August 29, 1966 (63 days) and from transmitter S-273 on August 10, 1966 (45 days). 'l'l:le transmitter packages were retrieved on January 19, 1967 and other than normal wear, no external damage was evident. Both transmitters, complete with antennas, and attached to the collars, were returned to S. L. Markusen Company for inspection to determine what, if any, malfunction had occurred. Markusen's inspection revealed that the transmitters "showed heavy wear on the antennas". On January 19, 1967, when the above two transmitters were recovered, the same two elk were again instrumented with the two remaining Markusen transmitters (S-272 and S-27l). The transmitters, both with modified whip antennas, operated 121 days (January 19, 1967 to May 19, 1967) and 133 days January 19, 1967 to M3.y 31, 1967) respectively. Continuous wave transmission was received satisfactorily from all transmitters using M3.rkusen's l2-channel, VBF tracking receiver equipped with a directional yagi-tYJ?s= antenna (Figure I). J"ohn T. Schwartz, Resident Engineer at Biomedical Electronics Laboratory, Denver Research Institute, University of Denver, was contacted regarding specifications for receiving antennas for both helicopter and fixed-wing aircraft. At present, no answer has been received. Prepared by: E. J. Prenzlow Wildlife Researcher Candidate Date: Approved by: Jack R. Grieb Project Leader Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief �- 104 - APPENDIX A TELEMETRY FEASIBILITY REPORT Introduction.--Biote1emetry as defined by Schmitt (1965) is "measurement at a distance of quantities having biological interest scientifically or technologically." Physical scientists have developed instrumentation that is more sensitive and comprehensive than human senses. Without such instrumentation, however, biologists have obtained data but often it is too discontinuous and incomplete for reliable statistical analysis (Warner, 1963). The study of animal motility is one of the most significant observations that can advance ecology. Warner (1963) stated that the knowledge of an animals' diel, seasonal and annual movements is paramount and that before conservationists can adequately manage and control animal populations for the good of all, they must first be able to predict occurrences in the ecological world. Discussion.--In an editorial of the December, 1963 issue of Wildlife Telemetry Newsletter, Lowell Adams (editor) presented the following ideas that should be considered when entering into the telemetry field. (1) "Recognize that the problem is one of human relations first, a technological one only incidentally •••, (2) Clearly present the magnitude of the developmental job and invite comparisons of the very great cost with the very great benefits to be expected, (3) Encourage those who want to get into the developmental swim. to recognize the size of the task without giving the impression, 'You better stand back. We are handling this very difficult work. We will let you know when we are ready for you to start to participate.' (4) Warn those who propose to purchase commercial equipment (and those who supply it) that it is difficult for suppliers and users to understand each other across their interdisciplinary gap and they must, therefore, be especially careful in specifying the user's requirements and supplier's product •••• , (5) Emphasize state of the art when publishing biological research and not give the impression that a 'first' in telemetry represents the end and all of telemetry, (6) Publish as rapidly as possible telemetry results of ever-increasing biological significance-results which would be difficult or impossible to obtain without telemetry ••• , (7) Decide what we need to do about an organization specifically devoted to the care and feeding of wildlife telemetry." A problem that Griffin (1963) discussed was the overemphasis placed on fashioning the tools of telemetry instead of trying to answer the original biological objectives. Telemetry programs are worthwhile only if they allow us to learn something about the animals we are studying. Warner (1963) cautioned that the "do-it-yourself" programs in wildlife telemetry are wasteful pursuits of time, energy and money because programming and telemetry should be left to the engineers. Furthermore, Adams (1964) stated that most telemetry projects tend to be under-financed and too little time is allotted for development and repair of the equipment. �- 105 - Wildlife telemetry was first inaugurated in 1957. In 1963, 13 states (26%) were using telemetry for animal location and physiology studies in their wildlife programs. According to another survey conducted in 1963, 5 states (12%) of the 41 replying expected to invest more than $5,000 in just telemetry equipment and 17 states (42%) expected to invest from $1,000 to $5,000. Projects in Colorado since 1964 have invested more than $4,000 in equipment and have yet to collect any worthwhile ecological data. Toback (1963) suggested the following questions should be considered before an organization launches into an intensive wildlife telemetry program: (1) How much effort and cost are involved? (2) Is it more efficient to rely on traditional techniques? (3) Is the level of our questions sufficiently advanced to keep up with the technological answers? (4) Is our knowledge sufficient to warrant the expenditure of time, effort and money to answer questions which may now seem important, but which on further experimentation would be revealed as inconsequential? (5) Also, will telemetry answer the questions fast enough over traditional methods to warrant the extra expense? Conclusions.--The questions we have to answer are: (1) Should we continue with telemetry? and (2) if so, what is the best route to follow? The Department then has a choice of pursuing one of the following possibilities: 1. Establish monies for a contract (payable only upon satisfaction) with an independent electronics company to develop and test a feasible telemetry program for our Department. For example, determine percent of elk not counted during helicopter flights using instrumented animals within a known population. 2. Employ basiso 3. Continue on a IIdo-it-yourself" basis and utilize consultants in the telemetry field. Time and money should be allowed also for travel of Department personnel to visit similar programs now in operation and to attend meetings concerned with wildlife telemetry. 4. Wait until the national pendulum has swung to data gathering rather than equipment development. This would alleviate most of the cost of development and production and allow Department monies to be spent primarily on data collection, which should be our main objective. This, however, raises another question. If we wait, when should we start? The Department should not start until considerable and sufficient monies are established for well designed and specific jobs that will answer particular questions or management problems. In other words, let us be sure we have an adequate, well defined problem before going to a lot of expense trying to solve it. The first step would be to get these problems in writing so that they can be analyzed and considered. an "electroniker" to assist the biologist on a full time �- 106 - LITERATURE CITED Adams, L. 1964. National telemetry conference 1964. Sec. 2-3, p. 1-7. Griffin, D. R. 1963. The potential for telemetry in studies of animal orientation, p. 25-31. In L. Slater, Bio-te1emetry - the use of telemetry in animal behavior and physiology in relation to ecological problems. Pergamon Press, Oxford - London - New York - Paris. Schmitt, O. H. 1965. A beginning in Bio-te1emetry. p. 1-14. In C.A. Caceres, Biomedical telemetry. Academic Press, New York - London. Tobach, Ethel. 1963. The potential for telemetry in the study of the social behavior of laboratory animals. p. 33-44. In L. Slater, Bio-te1emetry - the use of telemetry in animal behavior and physiology in relation to ecological problems. Pergamon Press, Oxford - London New York - Paris. Warner, D. W. 1963. Fundamental problems in the use of telemetry in ecological studies. p. 15-24. In L. Slater, Bio-te1emetry - the use of telemetry in animal behavior and physiology in relation to ecological problems. Pergamon Press, Oxford - London - New York Paris. �- 107 - APPENDIX SUMMARY OF BIOMEDICAL B TELEMETRY CONFERENCE Biotelemetry is often defined as measurement at a distance of quantities having biological interest scientifically or technologically. This particular session dealt primarily with transducers and transponders utilized to obtain data on deep body temperatures, respiratory rates, pressure changes (peristalsis and intraoptic), pH, acceleration, EGG and EEG; and it lightly touched on the subject of radio-tracking. Some of the fundamentals of the electronic concept were presented for the benefit of the biologists present, and discussions on sensors and transducers of physiological variables, active transmitters and receivers, antenna types, choice of power source, frequency, modulation, passive transmitters, components and materials for long-term implants, terrestrial and aquatic animal studies, and medical applications. Exhibits included actual transducers for various physiological parameters, graphs and recordings of data, two instrumented lizards, and a rabbit with an implanted sensor for EGG. Generally, I felt that the course was very worthwhile, although I was disappointed that the particular field (radio-tracking) I was most interested in was not dealt with in any detail. This was the feeling, apparently, among many of those in attendance, which included medical doctors, PhD's, space scientists, Air Force personnel, neuro-phyicists, electrical and electronic engineers and biologists.--Richard N. Denney �- 108 - A PARTIALLY ANNOTATED BIBLIOGRAPHY ON BIOTELEMETRY W~"II" 1am D. Cooper-1/ Adams, L. 1964. Wildlife Telemetry Newsletter, 3(2):5. 1964. Wildlife Telemetry Newsletter, 3(4):5. 1965. Wildlife Telemetry Newsletter, 4(1):5. 1965. Progress in ecological biotelemetry. Bio. Sci., 15(2):83-86. Summarized information concerning the basic theories for the use of biotelemetry from 1957 to 1965 is presented. This includes evaluation of this new science and a list of ecological biotelemetry projects using unrestrained wildlife. The essential point here is that these new telemetric procedures reveal the refinements of certain ecological concepts. Not only does it provide more information about wildlife species but much better information. Adams, L. and W. C. Smith. 1964. Wildlife Telemetry. Telero. Conf., Sec. 2-3:1-7. Proc. 1964 Natl. Adey, W. R. 1963. Potential for telemetry in the recording of brain waves from animals and men exposed to the stresses of space flight. In: Slater, 1963. pp. 289-302. Anonymous. 1958. Bibliography on Medical Electronics. Med. Electron., New York. pp. 1-99. IRE Prof. Group Anonymous. 1959. Bibliography on Medical Electronics, Supp. I. Group Med. Electron., New York. pp. 1-68. IRE Prof. Anonymous. 1960. Bibliography on Medical Electronics, Supp. II. IRE Prof. Group Med. Electron., New York. pp. 1-76. Anonymous. 1960. Development and use of short wave radio transmitter to trace animal movements. Progr. Rept. Univ. Minn. pp. 1-26. Mimeo. Anonymous. 1961. Biophysical telemetering systems tracks pigeons in 25-mile flight. Electron. Prod., pp. 2lW, lllW, l13W. Anonymous. 1961. Radio rabbits. Ill. Wildl., 16(4):12. Anonymous. 1962. Development and use of short wave transmitters to trace animal movements. August, 1960-February, 1962. Univ. ~linn. pp. 1-18. Mimeo. Anonymous. 1963. Rat walkie-talkie. Ill. l-Jildl.,19(1):8. l/Student Colorado State University, Department of Fishery and Wildlife Biology. �- 109 Anonymous. 1963. Studies of movements, behavior, and activities of ruffed grouse using radio telemetry techniques. Univ. Minn. pp. 1-30. Mimeo. Anonymous. 1963. Application of telemetry for the management of sportsman regarding their cardiovascular function. Abst. only. Japan Circulation J., 27:773. Asahina, K. and A. Morio. 1963. Telemetry of electrocardiograms during exercise. In: Symp. Applic. Telem. Syst. to Med. Tokyo, 1962. Med. Electron. BioI. Eng., 4:578. Bach, L. M. N. 1963. Telemetering neuro-physiological information from animals. In: Slater, 1963. pp. 321-326. Baldwin, H. A. 1965. Marine biotelemetry. Bio. Sci., 15(2):95-97. Experiments involving the transmission of physiological data by the use of radio-telemetry from marine animals is presented. Such information includes electrocardiograms, body temperature, and acoustic activity. Barry, W. 1964. A radio telemetering device. J. Appl. Physiol., 19:528-530. A radio telemetering device is presented in detail. This device is successful in transmitting the electrocardiogram of freely moving humans at ranges up to 200 yards. When used with the appropriate transducer, any physiological variable can be quantitatively investigated. Beal, R. o. 1967. Radio transmitter-collars for squirrels. Mgmt., 31(2):373-374. J. Wildl. Beenken, H. G. and F. L. Dunn. 1959. Short-distance telemetering of physiological information. IRE Trans. Space Electron. Telemetry, SET 5 (2):82-86. Birkebak, R. C. 1963. Wildlife telemetry gear now commercially available. In: Wildlife Telemetry Newsletter, 2(4):2-4. Bligh, J. 1964. Continuous radio-telemetric records of the deep body temperature of some unrestrained African mammals under near-natural conditions. In press. Bligh, J. and M. Beadle. 1963. The continuous radio-telemetric recording of deep body temperatures of some African mammals. Biochem. J., 89(2):72. Bligh. J. and S. G. Robinson. 1963. Continuous telemetry of the deep body temperatures of sheep under field conditions. Abstract. J. Physiol. London, 165:1. Brannick, L. J. dogs. In: 1963. Recording physiological functions from unrestrai?ed Slater, 1963. pp. 303-309. Brown, C. C. and G. N. Webb. 1964. Instrumentation with semiconductors: For medical researchers. In: Amer. Lec. Objective Psychiatry, 1964. pp. 272. �- 110 - Brown, R. L. 1967. The role of social regulation of survival and breeding in male sharptail grouse. Abst. only. Ann. Conf., Northwest Sect., The Wildlife Society. 4 pp. Busser, J. H. and M. Mayer. 1957. Radio thermometer penguin egg. Naval Res. Rev., pp. 9-13. that fits in a Carr, A. 1962. Orientation problems in the high seas travel and terrestrial movements of marine turtles. Amer. Sci., 50(3):359-374. 1963. Orientation problems in the high seas travel and terrestrial movements of marine turtles. In: Slater, 1963. pp. 179-193. Cebula, J. J. 1966. Radio-telemetry as a technique used in greater prairie chicken (Tympanuchos cupido pinnatus) mobility studies. Master's Thesis. Kansas St. Univ. 61 pp. Chaffee, E. L. and R. V. Light. 1934-5. A method for remote control of electrical stimulation of the nervous system. I. The history of electrical excitation. Yale J. BioI. Med., 7:83-128. Cholvin, N. R. 1962. Development and operation of chronically implanted electronic devices, with their effects, in experimental animals. 1962 IRE Nat'1. Conv. Recoud , Pt. 9, pp •.79-87. Cochran, W. W. and T. E. Hagen. 1963. Construction of collar transmitters for deer. Mus. Nat Hist., Univ. Minn., Tech. Rept. No.4, pp. 1-12. Mi.meo" Iv. and R. D. Lo rd , Jr. 1963. A radio ••tracking system for wild animals. J. Wildl. Mgmt., 1:9-24. Radio-tracking systems for tracing the movements of birds, such as, wild ducks, pheasants, or hawks; and wild mammals, such as, cottontail hares, striped skunks, and raccoons are presented. Details concerning the transmitters and receivers are given. The complete transmitter without batteries weighs approximately 10 grams and costs about $8.00 for parts. Instructions are given for the construction of the transmitters and for the attachment to the animals concerned. The rece1v1ng unit weighs about 10 pounds, including batteries, thus m~~ing it portable. A loop antenna is used and is very accurate in p Ick Lng t:p the different frequencies at which the transmitters can operate. Deta~ls are given as to the performance of the transmitters for use in tracking different species of wildlife . Cochr an , W. w., iJ. l'LC(;O, .:...J.ld F. :. b"' .•.. :....cu."". _90... A 1.i1.u1o-tri1.cl<inb technique for fo llowing flying ducks. Mus.~ Mat. His t ,.; Uni v. Minn., Tech. Rept. No.8, pp. 1-6. Mimeo. •.. .oc nr an , ~,;. �- 111 - Cochran, W. W., D. W. Warner, and D. G. Raveling. 1963. A radio transmitter for tracking geese and other birds. Mus. Nat. Hist., Univ. Minn. pp. 1-4. Mimeo. Cochran, W. W., D. W. Warner, J. R. Tester, and V. B. Kuechle. 1965. Automatic radio-tracking system for monitoring animal movements. Bio. Sci., 15(2):98-100. The design, construction, and use of an automatic radio-tracking system is used to study animal movements. Data such as the time and the bearing for 52 animals can be continuously recorded on l6-mm film. This is done by the use of two towers, equipped with rotating antennas, radio receivers, and recorders. The information taken in by the recorders is used to take bearing of the radio transmitter tagged animals. Using a triangulation procedure, locations of these animals can be determined. Ranges up to several miles are obtainable with great accuracy. Cochrum, L. 1963. New Mex.-Ariz. Wildlife telemetry (Abst.). Proc. Sect., The WildL Soc. pp. 18-20. 2nd Ann. Meeting, Coester, W., G. Olson, and J. L. Seubert. 1960. Miniature radio development, 1960, South Dakota Dept. Game, Fish, and Parks. Mimeo. Cole, transmitter pp. 1-6. L. C. 1963. Radiote1emetering of environmental conditions for ecological field studies. In: Slater, 1963. pp. 203-209. Two transmitters are described for the purpose of reading and transmitting ecological information. The basic transmitter and the long range model are designed basically for the transmission of spot temperatures. If the use of a themistor is replaced for a transducer, the transmitter can also measure light intensity, relative humidity, barometric pressure, available soil moisture, or any other environmental factor for which the transducer can be constructed to convert changes into electrical resistance charges. Corson, S. A., E. OIL. Corson, B. Pasamanick, and J. M. England. 1963. The influence of restraint and isolation of physiologic base lines in conditioned reflex studies; The promise of telemetry. In: Slater, 1963. pp. 311-320. Craighead, F. C., Jr., and J. J. Craighead. 1965. Tracking grizzly bears. Bio. Sci., 15(2):88-92. Summarized report from 1961 to 1965 on radio-tracking of grizzly bears is presented. The tracking system used includes four types of receivers; a base station, field station, mobile units, and portable directional, all of which were developed by the Philco Corportation. The transmitters are crystal-controlled, transistorized, 1 x 1 x 2 inches in size, 1.8 ounces in weight, and vary in output from 90 to 200 mw pulses. The antenna serves as the collar for attachment. The power supply consists of seven Mallory mercury cells, and power the transmitter for 60 days, or better. A few ecological insights for the grizzly bear are cited. Future studies proposed for the use of telemetry and its advantages are noted. �-~Craighead, F. C., J. J. Craighead, and R. C. Davies. 1963. Radio tracking of grizzly bears. In: Slater, 1963. pp. 133-148. The use of radio-telemetry for tracking grizzly bears is one investigative phase of a comprehensive ecological study. The general objectives of this study involve capture and handling methods, population dynamics, population behavior, determination of home ranges and carrying capacity, physiological studies, and the use of electronic equipment to gather this data. The bears were immobilized by the use of succinylcholine from an injection powered by a C02 gun. Requirements and hypothetical tracking systems were established. The transmitters are fully described and were field tested. All operational equipment; transmitters, antennae, power supplies, and receiving stations are explained as to set up, operation, and evaluation. The results of the tracking are characterized by giving examples of actual cases. The effective tracking distance was ~ mile for the portable receiving units. The use of mobile receiving units in the future will greatly increase the amount of information received, with hopes of obtaining data on the physiology of free roaming animals, and from hibernation. Deboo, G. J. and T. B. Fryer. No date. A miniature biopotential telemetry system. NASA, TM X-54068. pp. 1-13. Mimeo. Delgado, J. M. R. 1959b. A transistor timed stimulator. Neurorhysiol., 11:591-593. EEG. Clin. 1959c. Electronic command of movements and behavior. Trans. N. Y. Acad. Sci., 21:689-699. 1959d. Modification of social behavior induced by remotecontrolled electrical stimulation of the brain. XXI into Congr. Physio1. Sci., Abstracts. 75 pp. 1962. To be published. Slater, 1963. Telemetering of movements in monkey colonies. 1963. Telemetry and telestimu1ation of the brain. pp. 231-249. In: DeVos, A. and F. W. Anderka. 1964. A transmitter-receiver unit for microclimatic data. Ecology, 45:171-172. Dodge, W. E. and M. B. Church. 1965. Construction of transmitters for radio-tracking hares and mountain beavers. Northwest Sci., 39(3):118-122. Dow, W. 1960. A te1emetering hydrophone. Deep Sea Res. 7:142-147. Dutky, S. R., M. S. Schechter, and W. N. Sullivan. 1963. Monitoring electro-physiological locomotive activity of insects to detect biological rhythms. In: Slater, 1963. pp. 273-281. �- 113 Eklund, C. R. 1963. Determination of temperatures of incubating eggs of antarctic birds. In: Slater, 1963. pp. 267-272. Eklund, C. R. and F. E. Charlton. 1959. Measuring the temperatures of incubating penguin eggs. Am. Sci., 47:80-86. Eliassen, E. 1960. A method for measuring the heart rate and stroke/pulse pressure in birds by normal flight. Arbok Univ. Bergen, Mat.-Nat. Ser., 12:1-22. 1963. Telemetric registering of physiological data in birds in normal flight. In: Slater, 1963. pp. 257-265. The transmitter used included a catheter and a hypodermic needle. It weighed about 2 to 2~ percent of the bird's total weight. The catheter was introduced into the right heart. The transmitter was situated upon the bird's back, as not to displace the equilibrium of the bird. The data obtained dealt with the cardiovascular responses to flight. Complete description of the apparatus, including a drawing of the transducer is presented. A domestic duck and a sea gull were tested in a closed room. This was done in order to re-capture the birds and do several experiments on each bird. Cardiovascular results for both the duck and sea gull are presented. Ellis, R. J. 1964. Tracking raccoons by radio. J. Wi1dl. Mgmt., 28:363-386. The tracking of raccoons was done by a radio transmitter and receiver setup in east-central Illinois. The transmitters were housed in a rugged lucite plastic box and embedded in an epoxy-resin cement. The antenna was bolted to the box and was made of brass shaped in a loop. The collar was made of a neoprene-coated nylon material, and the antenna fitted concentrically around it. Tracking was done by using three or more lines of bearing to get a fix, and when taken within a t mile of the transmitter, very little error was observed. The animals studies showed much activity during the day, spent much of their time on the ground, and made very much use of the corn in livestock feeders located on nearby farms. Ellison, L. N. 1967. Spring movements and behavior of territorial and nonterritorial male Alaskan spruce grouse. Abst. only. Ann. Conf., Northwest Sect., The Wildl. Soc. pp. 4. England, S. J. M. and B. Pasamanick. 1961. Radiotelemetry of physiological responses in the laboratory animal. Science, 133:106-107. Essler, W. 1961. Radio telemetry of electrocardiograms and body temperatures from surgically implanted transmitters. Dissertation Abstr., 21: 1981. 1963. Radiotelemetry of heart rate and temperature with subdermally implanted sensors. In: Slater, 1963. pp. 341-351. Ess1er, w. O. and G. E. Folk, Jr. 1961. Determination of physiological rhythms of unrestrained animals by radio telemetry. Nature, 190:90-91. �- 114 Essler, W. O. and G. E. Folk, Jr. 1962. A method of determining true resting heart rate of unrestrained mammals by radio telemetry. Animal Behavior, 10:168-170. Ess1er, W. O. and G. E. Folk, Jr. 1963. Te1emetering the heart rate and EKG in penned animals. In: Wi1dl. Telemetry Newsletter. 2(4):4-6. Essler, W. O. and G. E. Folk, Jr. No Date. Multichannel radio telemetry system used to obtain heart rate. pp. 1-4. (Multilithed) Essler, W.O., G. E. Folk, Jr., and G. E. Adamson. 1961. 24-hour cardiac activity of unrestrained cats. Federation Proc., 20:129. Ettleson, B. L. and B. loJ. Pine. 1962. Development of an internalized animal telemetry system. Aerospace Med., 33:75-80. Evans, W. E. and W. loJ. Southerland. 1963. of aquatic animal communication. In: Potential for telemetry in studies Slater, 1963. pp. 217-224. Findley, J. D. 1963. Detecting and recording the behavior of animals in a multi-enclosure, programed environment. In: Slater, 1963. pp. 213-216 Fischler, H., B. Blum, E. G. Frei, and M. Streif1er. 1961. Telemetering of EEG's from unrestrained convulsive cats by a transistorized nmp1ifiertransmitter. Electroencephalog. Clin. Neurophysiol., 13:807-812. Fischler, H. and E. H. Frei. 1963. Subminiature apparo.tus for radiotelemetering of EEG data. IEEE Trans. Bio-Med. Electron., Bl'~-lO: 29-36. Flood, M. M. 1963. Experimenting with monkeys to be stimulated by remote control of electrodes planted chronically in the brain. In: Slater, 1963. pp. 251-254. Flory, L. E., F. L. Hatke, and V. K. Zworykin. 1963. Telemetering internal biological potentials with passive types capsules. In: 5th Intern. Conf. Med. Electron. BioI. Eng., 1:575. Folk, G. E., Jr. 1961. of labile animals. Observations on the daily rhythms of body temperature Ann. N. Y. Acad. Sci., 98:954-969. 1964. The problems of electrodes with EKG radio capsules. In: Murry, W. E. and P. F. Salisbury. 1964. Biomedical Sci. Instrumentation, Vol. 2. Plenum Press, Nell7York. Folk, G. E., Jr., and R. S. Hedges. 1964. Comparative physiology of heart rate of unrestrained mammals. Am. Zool., 4:297. Franklin, D. L., N. W. Watson, R. L. Van Citters, and O. A. Smith. 1964. Blood flow telemetered from dogs and baboons (flow meters) (Sic) Abst. only. Federation Proc., 23:303. �- 115 Galler, S. R. and C. E. Fix. Res. Rev., pp. 11-14. 1961. Animal tracking gone modern. Geddes, L. A. 1962. A bibliography of biological telemetry. Electron., 1:294-298. Naval Am. J. Med. Geddes, L. A. and H. E. Hoff. 1963. Transmission of physiological data by wire. In: Slater, 1963. pp. 329-337. Glasscock, W. R. and N. J. Holter. 1952. Radioelectroencephalography medical research. Electronics, 25:126-129. for Gold, D. C. and W. J. Perkins. 1959. A miniature electroencephalograph telemeter system. Electron. Eng., 31:337-339. Goldberg, M. N. and D. R. Foster. 1963. Telemetry of physiological data during parachute research. Biomed. Sci. Instr., 1:263-271. Griffin, D. R. 1952. Radioactive tagging of animals under natural conditions. Ecology, 33(3):329-335. 1963. The potential for telemetry in studies of animal orientation. In: Slater, 1963. pp. 25-31. Griffith, R. S. 1960. Mouse transmits own temperature. Electron., 31:101, 106. Radiation Haahn. F. 1963. Radiotelemetry techniques in physiology. Telemetry Session, 28th Annual Meeting N. Am. Wildl. Soc. Detroit. 1965. Designing for physiological data. Bio. Sci., 15(2):112-115. Description of typical radio-telemetry systems for gaining physiological information from free roaming subjects are given and compared. Included is a table on design goals for multi-channel, telemetric equipment for physiology. These are compared to present practical systems. Block diagrams for both single channel systems and multi-channel systems are shown. Typical recordings from a multi-channeled system are shown. Hasler, A. D. 1960. Homing orientation in migrating fishes. 23:94-115. Hasler, A. D. and H. F. Henderson. study of homing in fish. In: Ergebn. BioI., 1963. Instrumentation problems in the Slater, 1963. pp. 195-201. Head, H. T. 1960. The influence of trees on television field strengths at ultra-high frequencies. Proc. IRE: 1016-1020. Heezen, K. L. and J. R. Tester. 1967. Evaluation of radio-tracking by triangulation with special reference to deer movements. J. Wildi. Mgmt., 31(1):124-141. �-~Helvey, T. C. 1959. space capsules. Telemetered parameters of primates and humans from IRE Trans. Space Electron, Telemetry, SET-5:99-l02. Hendrix, C. E. 1960. An ultrasonic telemeter for physiological measurements on free-swimming sea animals. China Lake Calif., Tech. Note 304-50. pp. 1-15. Mimeo. Hoare, D. W. and J. M. Ivison. 1961. Measuring the heart rate of an active athlete. Electron, Eng., 33:6-8. Holter, N. J. 1949. Remote recording of physiological data. Med. J., 46:749-751. sciences. Rocky Mtn. 1963. Some perspective on telemetry in the biological In: Slater, 1963. pp. 61-64. Jacobson, B. and L. Nordberg. 1961. Endoradiosondes for pressure telemetering. IRE Trans. Bio-Med. Electron., BME-8:l92-l96. Jacobson, B. and B. Lindstrom. 1960. FM receiving systems for radiosonde techniques. IRE Trans. Med. Electron., ME-7:334-339. Jacobson, B. 1958. Endoradiosondes. Jeffries, R. J. 1963. 1963. pp. 65-74. Svenska Lakartidn., 55:587. The frontiers of telemetry technology. In: Slater, Jensen, G. D. and G. L. Mullins. 1963. A telemetry approach to motherinfant interaction in monkeys. In: Slater, 1963. pp. 225-229. Jeter, L. K. and R. L. Marchinton. 1964. Preliminary report of telemetric study of deer movements and behavior on the Eglin Field Reservation in northwestern Florida. Florida Game and Fresh Water Fish Comm. pp. 1-30. Mimeo. Johnson, J. H. 1960. Sonic tracking of adult salmon at Bonneville Dam, 1957. Fishery Bull. 176. U. S. Fish and Wildl. Ser., 60:471-485. Johnston, D. H. and G. B. Kolenosky. 1965. and other large mammals. Abst. only. letter, 4(2):1-2. Tracking foxes, timber wolves, In: Wildlife Telemetry News- Kamp, A. and S. Van Leeuwen. 1961. A two-channel EEG radio telemetering system. Electroencephalog. Clin. Neurophysiol., 13:803-806. Kanavau, J. L. 1963. Continuous automatic monitoring of the activities of small captive animals. Ecology, 44(1):95-110. Kezer, C. F. and M. H. Aronson. 1950. Tiny temperature telemeter in selfblocking oscillator. lnstr. Contr. Systems, 32:724. �- 117 Ko, W. H. 1963. Micro-electronic technology and its application to biotelemetry. In: Slater, 1963. pp. 107-116. 1965. Progress in miniaturized biotelemetry. Bio. Sci., 15(2): 118-120. Evolution in the use and design of micro-electronic equipment is presented, that which is applicable to biotelemetry. The design of miniaturized telemetering transmitters at Case Institute are described. Circuit diagrams for the K-4 and K-5 transmitters are given, along with their relative size. Radio powering of implanted K-5 transmitters are reported. Ko, W., W. Thompson, and E. Yon. 1963. Tunnel diode FM transmitter for medical research and laboratory telemetering. Med. Electron. BioI. Eng., 1:363-369. Kozar. A. J. 1963. Telemetered heart rates recorded during gymnastic routine. Res. Quart., 34:102-106. Kuck, A., F. M. Liebman, and L. Kussick. for telemetering muscle potentials. BME-IO: 117-119. 1963. A miniature transmitter IEEE Trans. Bio-Med. Elec~ron., Ruck, T. L. 1966. An improved battery hoQkup for radiotelemetry studies. J. Wildl. Mgmt., 30:858-859. The method described eliminates soldering time and equipment in the field. All components are carried with the field man, and in 15 minutes after capture, the game bird can be released. This quick method results in less chance of shocking the animal or causing abnormal behavior. The equipment is described, and when assembled only adds three grams extra weight to the total. Lebiunyan , C. D., \oJ. White, E. Nybert, and J. J. Christian. 1959. Design of a miniature radio transmitter for use in animal studies. J. Wildl. Mgmt., 23:107-110. The use, design, and qualities of an in-vivo transmitter are presented. It was designed for the study of physiological changes of burrowing animals. Also described are methods of protecting the transmitter from body chemical action. The transmitter has a range of approximately 25 yards above the ground and 18 yards below the ground. The batteries last up to 161 days, the cost is about $25.00, and the size of the animal used must be larger than a woodchuck. Lion, K. S. 1963. Development in transducers and sensors for biological events. In: Slater, 1963. pp. 75-82. Long, F. M. 1962. Biological energy as a power source for a physiological telemetering system. IRE Intern. Conv. Record, 10:68-73. Lord, R. D., Jr. and W. W. Cochran. 1963. Techniques in radiotracking wild animals. In: Slater, 1963. pp. 149-154. The design of the radio-tracking system included small tag �- ais transmitters, mercury batteries, a crystal controlled oscillator, a tuned loop antenna, and portable direction finding receivers. Explanations as to the construction, operation, and specifications of the above are given. Equations are given for determining transmitter power capabilities and range possibilities. Methods of attachment include harnesses made of canvas for rabbits, and more rigid collars for skunks and raccoons. Lord, R. D., Jr., F. C. Bellrose, and W. W. Cochran. 1962. Radiotelemetry of the respiration of a flying duck. Science, 137:39-40. Lutherer, L. 0., G. E. Folk, Jr., and W. O. Essler. pattern of reindeer in Artic continuous light. 1962. Daily activity Zoologist, 2:536. Mackay, R. S. 1959. Radio telemetering from within the human body. Trans. Med. Electron., ME-6:l00-105. 1960. Endoradiosondes, further notes. Electron., ME-7:67-73. 1961. 134:1196-1202. IRE IRE Trans. Med. Radio telemetering from inside the body. Science, 1963. The potential for telemetry in biological research in the physiology of animals and man. In: Slater, 1963. pp. 45-58. 1963. 19:650-653. Radio telemetry from inside the body. New Scientist, 1964. Deep body temperature of untethered dolphins recorded by ingested radio transmitter. Science, 144:864-866. 1964. Galapogos tortoise and marine iguana deep body temperatures measured by radio telemetry. Nature, 204:355-358. 1964. A progress report on telemetry from inside the body. Biomed. Sci. lnstr., 2:275-292. Mackay, R. S. and B. Jacobson. 1957. Endoradiosonde. Nature, 179:1239-1240. Mackay, R. S. and B. Jacobson. Electronics, 31:51-53. 1958. Pill telemeters from digestive tract. Marchal, M. and M. T. Marchal. 1958. Nouvell methode d'exploration de la digestion par capsule radio electri ingerable. Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci., 246:3519. Marchinton, R. L. 1964. Activity cycles and mobility of central Florida deer based on telemetric and observational data. Master's Thesis. Univ. Florida. 101 p. �- 119 - Marshall, W. H. 1960. Development and use of short wave radio transmitter to trace animal movements. Univ. Minn. pp. 1-27. Mimeo. 1963. Radiotracking of porcupines and ruffed grouse. In: Slater, 1963. 173-178. The results of a project to develop transmitters and a system of radio-positioning ruffed grouse is presented. Because the porcupine was found in the same habitat and could be captured more easily, it was also studied-with reference to radio-positioning and tracking. Transmitters, power supplies, antennae, harnesses, and receivers are all described as to specifications and operations. 1965. Wildlife Telemetry Newsletter, 4(4):8 p. 1965. Ruffed grouse behavior. BioSci., 15(2):92-94. A radio frequency (RF) marking and tracking system is used to study the behavior of the ruffed grouse. The system consists of a transmitter, battery, and harness, all weighing 20 grams; and a portable receiver weighing 4.5 pounds. The battery life was for 60 days, but by re-trapping the marked birds, this period was extended. The fine wire antenna, which was eight inches in length, changed the pitch in the signal. This denoted different activities such as, resting, walking, running, flying, feeding and drumming. Also different activities were recorded for the different seasons of the year, such as during winter during the breeding period, during the early spring, and during the drumming period. For future studies the author is attempting to derive calorimetric methods, the energies available the bird, and rates of dissipation of energy in the selected habitats. 1966. Wildlife Telemetry Newsletter, 5(1):8 p. 1966. Wildlife Telemetry Newsletter, 5(2):8 p. Marshall, W. H. and J. J. Kupa. 1963. Development of radio-telemetry techniques for ruffed grouse studies. Univ. Minn. pp. 1-8. Mimeo. Marshall, W. H., G. W. Gullion, and R. G. Schwab. 1962. Early summer activities of porcupines as determined by radio-positioning technique. J. Wildl. Mgmt., 26:75-79. The activities of the porcupines included their movement, activity pattern, habitat selection, selection of trees, ground-level shelters, relations to insects, and food preferences. Nocturnal movements were more noticeable than diurnal activities. The young porcupine studied kept in close association with its mother. The use of trees appeared to be an escape from mosquitoes, and the limited observations on feeding indicated consumption of deciduous tree leaves. Matsui, H., K. Takagi, M. Kobayashi, and T. Iwami. 1963. A note on applications of radio telemetry to sports medicine. Med. Electron. BioI. Eng., 1:578. �- ]20 - McEwen, L. C. 1965. Sharptail grouse pesticide studies. Wildlife Telemetry Newsletter, 4(2):5. McLennan, M. A. 4:420-427. 1959. Abst. only. In: Physiological telemetry. Advan. Astronaut. Sci., Mech, L. D., K. L. Heezen, and D. B. Siniff. 1966. Onset and cessation of activity in cottontail rabbits and snowshoe hares in realtion to sunset and sunrise. Animal Behavior, 14(4):410-414. Mech, L. D., V. B. Kuechle, D. W. Warner, and J. R. Tester. 1965. A collar for attaching radio transmitters to rabbits, hares, and raccoons. J. Wildl. Mgmt., 29(4):898-902. Merriam, H. G. 1961. Problems in woodchuck population ecology and a plan for telemetric study. Dissertation Abst., 22:684. movements. 1963. Low frequency telemetric monitoring of woodchuck In: Slater, 1963. pp. 155-171. Michener, M. and C. ~valcott. 1965. Airplane tracking of single homing pigeons. Abst. only. In: Wildlife Telemetry Newsletter, 4(2):6. Myers, G. T. No date. Potential and use of telemetry in studies of birds. Colo. St. Univ., Tech. Rept., pp. 1-13. Mimeo. Nagumo, J., A. Uchiyama, S. Kimoto, T. Watanuki, M. Hori, K. Suma, A. Ouchi, M. Kumano, H. Watanabe. 1962. Echo capsule for medical use (a batteryless endoradiosonde). IRE Trans. Bio-Med. Electron., BME-9: 195-199. Nomura, S. 1963. Telemetry of electrocardiograms of racing horses and jockeys. Med. Electron. BioI. Eng., 1:578. Norris, K. 1963. Preparations for radio-telemetry of the body temperatures of large reptiles. In: Slater, 1963. pp. 283-287. Oka, Y., N. Utsuyama, K. Noda, and M. Kimura. 1963. Studies of radio telemetering on EKG and respiratory movements during running, jumping, and swimming. Med. Electron. BioI. Eng., 1:578-579. Patric, E. F., A. Longacre, and R. F. Doan. 1965. A modified approach to animal position finding. Abst. only. In: Wildlife Telemetry Newsletter, 4(2): 2. Payne, L. C. 1960. Simple telemetering system for signaling high rumen pressures. Science, 131:611-612. Pienkowski, E. C. 1962. The development of radio equipment to be used for tracking small mammals. Thesis, Ohio St. Univ. vii - 79. Mimeo. �- 121 - Pienkowski, E. C. 1962. Miniature 6-meter transmitter. QST, Nov. p. 58. Construction by the use of diagrams is shown, along with equipment needed. The total volume of the transmitter is less than one cubic inch, and the weight about two ounces. The transmitter is operated by a 2.5-volt mercury battery. The transmitter is designed to be attached to small animals, for tracking. A modulator is included for listening to their sounds, heart beats and respiration. 1965. Predicting transmitter range and life. BioSci., 15(2): 115-117. The description of techniques and calculations are presented to help the field biologist predict and improve on the range and the life of his biotelemetering system. The effects of transmitter power, antenna gain, and intervening terrain are determined from separate graphs. The biologist can use these graphs to evaluate the significance of each parameter. Rawson, K. S. and P. H. Hartline. 1964. Telemetry of homing behavior by the dcermouse, Peromyscus. Sci., 146(3651):1596-1597. Robbins, R. and O. B. Lee. 1964. Conserve Digest., 31(1):2-3. "Chess game with a muley." WR 113:43. S. Dak. Robel, R. J. 1965. Use of radio-telemetry in movement studies of greater prairie chickens in Kansas. Abst. only. In: Wildlife Telemetry Newsletter, 4(2):2-3. Robinson, S. G. No date. A temperature telemetering system with constant accuracy. Med. Electron. BioI. Eng., 2:81-83. Rozenb1at, V. V. 1963. Dinamicheskaya biotelemetriya USP Sovrem BioI., 56:341-364. (Dynamic biotelemetry). Roy, O. Z. and J. S. Hart. 1963. Transmitter for telemetry of biological data from birds in flight. IEEE Trans. Bio-Med. Electron., BME-lO:114-ll6. Sanderson, G. C. 1963. Radio-tracking rats in Malaysia- a preliminary study. Armed Servo Tech. Inform. Agency. Arlington Hall Station, Arlington, Va. pp. 1-17. Mimeo. Abs t , only. 1965. Recent developments in radio tracking in Illinois. In: l.JildlifeTelemetry Newsletter, 4(2): 3-5. Sanderson. G. C. and B. C. Sanderson. 1964. Radio-tracking rats in Malaysia--a prelimi.nary study , J. 'Hildl. Hgmt ,~ 28:152..768. Schmidt-Koenig, K. 1963. The problems of distant tracking in experiments in bird orientation. In: Slater, 1963. pp. 119-124. Schladweiler, P. and T. W. Mussehl. 1967. Use of radio telemetry during forest grouse-pesticide studies. Abst. only. Ann. Conf., Northwest Sect., The Wildl. Soc. pp. 5. �- 122 Schnell, G. D. 1965. Recording the flight-speed of birds by Doppler radar. The Living Bird, 4:79-87. Shipton, H. W., J. W. Emde, and G. E. Folk, Jr. 1959. A multiple point recorder for small aniamal locomotor activity. Proc. Iowa Acad. Sci., 66:407-412. Singer, A. 1963. 1963. Some solutions to the problem of homing. pp. 125-132. In: Slater, Siniff, D. B. and J. R. Tester. 1965. Computer analysis of animal movement data obtained by telemetry. BioSci., 15(2):104-108. The data obtained for use in the computer was that from the automatic radio-tracking system. The data is read from the film, recorded on a form, and then transferred to machine punch cards. The computer used is a high-speed digital type. Automatic map construction and distance compu':3.tionsof the animal movements are obtained. A diagram is included that shows the operations and logical sequence for the program. A discussion of the program and photos of the output are provided. Certain problems encountered when interpreting the data are considered. Such problems deal with ecological concepts involving activity patterns and home range. Slade, N. A., J. J. Cebula, and R. J. Robel. 1965. Accuracy and reliability of biotelemetric instruments used in animal movement studies in prairie grasslands of Kansas. Trans. Kansas Acad. Sci., 68(1):173-179. The purpose of this study was to determine the accuracy and reliability of biotelemetric equipment. The transmitters, receivers, and antennae are described. A pointer attached to the base of each antenna allowed an azimuth reading for each signal received. A location accuracy experiment was conducted to compare the use of two azimuth readings and three azimuth readings. Of the 66 azimuth determinations attempted, 58 were successful. A high power line in the area may have possibly deflected some of the radio signals. Slagle, A. K. 1963. An electronic system for the study of the movements of wild animals. Master's Thesis. Univ. Missouri, Columbia, 107 p. 1965. Designing systems for the field. BioSci., 15(2):109-112. The system described is for determination of raccoon range. The equipment; radio transmitters, antenna, collars, power supply, and receivers are described. Basic requirements for the system are presented. Diagrams for the circuits are shown and explained. Being a pilot s tudy field problems are discussed and improvements are considered. Slater, L. E. 1963. Bio-Telemetry. The use of telemetry in animal behavior and physiology in relation to ecological problems. Proc. Interdisciplinary Conf. Pergamon Press, N. Y. pp. xii-373. This book covers many applications for the use of bio-te1emetry. Included are: Potentials for telemetry in biological research; the current state of biological telemetry; reports on telemetry in animal �- 123 - tracking, orientation, and ecology; reports on telemetry in studies of animal social behavior; reports on telemetry in studies of animal physiology; and report on telemetry in studies of physiology in man. The book is very comprehensive, and also includes a discussion; question and answer section after each sub-section. Smith, Jr., P. E. 1963. Instrumentation for work physiology studies. Slater, 1963. pp. 363-369. In: Southern, W. E. 1964a. Equipment and techniques for using radio telemetry in wildlife studies. Rept. No.3. Northern Ill. Univ. 1964b. Additional observations of winter bald eagle populations: Including remarks on biotelemetry techniques and immature plumages. Wilson Bull., 76(2):121-137. 1964. wildlife studies. 1-33. Mimeo. 1965. Equipment and techniques for using radio-telemetry in Report No.3. Dept. BioI. Sci. No. Ill. Univ. pp. Avian navigation. 1965. Biotelemetry: The Living Bird, 4:45-58. BioSci., l5(2):87-88. A new technique for wildlife research. Sperry, C. S., C. P. Gadsden, C. Rodriquez, and L. M. N. Bach. 1961. Miniature subcutaneous frequency-modulated transmitter for brain potentials. Science, 134:1423-1424. Stemerick, J. 1965. A new physiological and tracking telemetry system. Abst. only. In: Wildlife Telemetry Newsletter, 4(2):3. Storm, G. L. 1965. Movements and activities of foxes as determined by radio-tracking. J. Wildl. Mgmt., 29(1):1-13. Sturkie, P. D. 1963. Heart rate of chickens determined by radio telemetry during light and dark periods. Poultry Sci., 42:797-798. Sullivan, F. H., C. Hoefner, and V. W. Bolie. 1963. Electronic systems for biological telemetry. In: Slater, 1963. pp. 83-106. Sullivan, G., T. A. Schulkins, and T. Freeman. 1961. Internalized animal telemetry system--biochemical and surgical considerations. Abst. Aerospace Med., 32:249. Tester, J. R. 1961. Techniques for studying movements of vertebrates in the field. Mus. Nat'l. Hist., Univ. Minn., Tech. Rept., pp. 1-23. Mimeo. No.6. 1963. Radio tracking of ducks, deer, and toads. Tech. Rept. Mus. Nat'l. Hist., Minneapolis: Univ. Minn. pp. 1-9. �= 124 Tester, J. R. 1966. Potentials of radio-tracking in studies of vertebrate behavior. 19th Conf. on Engineering in Medicine and Biology. San Francisco. Tester, J. R., and K. L. Reezen. 1965. Deer response to a drive consus determined by radio-tracking. BioSci., 15(2):100-104. This experiment was undertaken to determine the behavior and responses of three deer subjected to a drive census. The deer were captured and equipped with radio transmitters. Weather data was obtained for the census and correlated to the data received. The movements of two of the deer are given in detailed presentations. In conclusion, the drive census had little or only temporary effect on range and movements of the two radio-tracked deer. Tester, J. R. and D. B. Siniff. 1965. Aspects of animal movement and home range data obtained by telemetry. Trans. N. Am. Wildl. and Nat. Resources Conf., 30:379-392. The use of an automatic radio-tracking system to monitor movements of a raccoon is presented. The high-speed digital computer was used to analyze the data. The main concern is to explain the concept of home range in terms of: (1) Effect of sampling intervals on distance traveled and area used. (2) Center of activity and activity radius. (3) Distribution of telemetry fixes within a home range. Problems encountered and applications for the study are discussed. Tester, J. R., D. W. Warner, and W. W. Cochran. 1964. A radio-tracking system for studying movements of deer. J. Wildl. Mgmt., 28:42-45. The radio receiver and transmitters are described in complete detail. With the use of batteries, a two year operation can be carried out without replacement. Methods for applying the transmitters, and for weather proofing are given. The weight of the collar, batteries, and transmitter are approximately 180 grams. Operationally, the transmitters were tested for most climatic conditions, including one for low temperatures down to -15 degrees F. The deer were located by triangulation, but could also be located by one field man. The receiver has an effective range of 3/4 mile with the use of 80 and 100 foot towers. The deer studied were semi-domesticated, and thus were easier to locate. The study was mainly designed to evaluate this new;radio-tl'flCkingsystem. Tester, J. R., D. W. Warner, and W. W. Cochran. No date. A radio-trackin.g system for studying movements of deer with observations on movements of penned deer after release. Mus. Nat'l. Rist. Minneapolis: Univ. Minn. pp. 1-5. Mimeo. Thomas, D. E. and J. M. Klein. World, 63:42. 1960. FM wireless microphones. Electron Thompson, R. D. 1965. Telemetering physiological functions of birds. Abst. only. In: Wildlife Telemetry Newsletter, 4(2):6. �- 125 - Tobach, E. 1963. The potential for telemetry in the social behavior of laboratory animals. In: Slater, 1963. pp. 33-44. Tolles, W. E. 1963. Short range telemetry of ingested or implanted sensors. In: Slater, 1963. pp. 339-340. Explanation of the passive and active pills is given, with details pertaining to the passive pill. This pill is a piece of highly permeable iron surrounded by wire with a variable gap for a pressuresensitive element. It can measure certain gastrointestinal activity, and does not require chronic implantation. Trefethen, P. S., J. W. Dudly, and M. R. Smith. 1957. follow tagged fish. Electronics, 30(4):156-160. Varney, J. 1964. Batteries for biotelemetry, In: Newsletter (Special addition), 3(2);5 p. Ultrasonic tracers Wildlife Telemetry Verts, B. J. 1963. Equipment and technique for radio-tracking striped skunks. J. Wildl. Mgmt., 27:325-339. A step by step procedure is given for the construction of the transmitters. This includes, from the attachment of the antenna to the installation of the batteries. There are 20 steps in the complete operation. Two types of receivers were used, one mounted on an automobile and the other a portable. The mounted one gave better results, because it had a better power supply. The accuracy of the skunk's position using a triangulation method was about 25 feet at ~ mile, and about 75 feet at ~ mile. A diode receiver was constructed, its meter was calibrated, and it was then possible to predict the range of the transmitters directly from output values indicated by the meter. The movements of the skunks were detected by changes in intensity of the radio signal. It was noted that the skunk had two common gaits (a gallop and a pace). A problem arose when the skunk entered water. The transmitter stopped signaling, but resumed again when the skunk came out to dry land. Vreeland, R., C. Collins, L. Williams, C. Yeager, A. Gianascol, and J. Henderson, Jr. 1963. A subminiature radio EEG telemeter for studies of disturbed children. Electroencephal. Clin. Neurophysiol., 15:327-329. Vreeland, R. W., L. A. Williams, C. L. Yeager, and J. Henderson, Jr. 1958. Unit telemeters scalp voltages. Electronics, July 18, no pagination. Warner, D. W. 1963. Fundamental problems in the use of telemetry in ecological studies. In: Slater, 1963. pp. 15-24. Warner, D. W., J. R. Tester, S. L. Jacobson, J. P. Lindmeier, J. P. Hartnett, and R. C. Birkebak. 1960. A study of the mobile responses of animals to radiation fields and to other physical and biotic factors in the natural environment. Prog. Rept. No.1. Mus. Nat. Rist., Univ. Minn. pp. i.-IS. Mimeo. �- 126 - Warner, D. W., J. R. Tester, S. L. Jacobson, J. P. Lindmeier, J. P. Hartnett, and R. C. Birkebak. 1961. A study of the mobile responses of animals to radiation fields and to other physical and biotic factors in the natural environment. Prog. Rept. No.2. Mus. Nat. Hist., Univ. Minn. i-vii - 65. Mimeo. Webb, G. N. 1963. of time. In: The display of physiological data from extended periods Slater, 1963. pp. 353-361. Young, I. J. and W. S. Naylor. 1964. Implanted two-way telemetry in laboratory animals. Am. J. Med. Electron., 3:28-33. Zworykin, V. K. and F. L. Hatke. 1961. A miniaturized hospital telemetering system. Session 17-6, Dig. Intern. Conf. Med. Electron., New York. �July, 1967 - 127 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO ------------------------- Project No. W-38-R-21 Work Plan No. 2 Title of Job: Deer-Elk Investigations Job No. 7a White River Elk Study Period Covered: April 1, 1966 through March 31, 1967 Personnel: Raymond J. Boyd ABSTRACT Fourty-one pages of rough draft have been typed up for the manuscript. An additional 16 pages of tables on the physiology summaries have been roughed out but have not yet been typed. Analysis of the range data is now being processed by Analysis of Variance analysis and some life-table work has been started on the population data. �- 128 - Recommendations: (1) Gather all data relative to the research studies on this elk herd and publish the results in a final major publication. Included in this final report should be recommendations to management relative to the proper harvest, ideal sex and age ratios in the herd and proper range management recommendations. Objectives: To publish investigation project. Technigues all of the research findings resulting from this Used: (1) As each chapter of the manuscript was started, pertinent literature was was reviewed for background information and citations were wri~~en up for literature cited in the text. (2) A short historical background report on the White River elk herd, written by Donald G. Smith of the Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department is on hand, but more information is needed to fill the gaps in some sections of the report. (3) Procedures, methods in each chapter. (4) A preliminary statistical analysis of winter range data by Analysis of Variance has been completed. The analysis showed enough promise that a complete analysis will now be undertaken to determine relationships between elk use and browse density, composition, vigor and soil conditions. (5) The analysis of data is not complete enough, at the present time, to make recommendations to management. These recommendations will be formulated when the analysis is completed. and materials are being written as the first section Findings: Forty-one pages of the narrative portion of the manuscript have been typed in rough draft form. Summaries of the physiological data have been roughed out in tabular form for an additional 16 pages. A preliminary one-way Analysis of Variance was completed by Mr. Dave Bowdenof the Colorado State University Statistical Laboratory on the elk winter range data which indicated that this type of analysis could be used on the data. Plans are now being made to run a complete Analysis of Variance on the elk winter range transect data. Some preliminary work has been started on life tables, survival curves and age pyramid analysis of the check station aging data. Population projections from the sex and age-ratio counts have been worked out by two different formulae. Prepared Date: by: ~R~a~y~m~o~n~d~J~.~B~o~y-d~---Approved Wildlife Researcher J_u~ly~,~1~9_6~7~ _ by: Jack R. Grieb Project Leader �July, 1967 - 129 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT state of COLORADO --------~---------------- Project No. W-38-R-2l Work Plan No. 4 Deer-Elk Investigations Job No. 3c Title of Job: Evaluation of Deer-Highway Crossing Safety Measures Period Covered: April 1, 1966 through March 31, 1967 Personnel: David F. Gordon, Marion C.Coghill, Furman W. Dunham and Dick L. Lichtenberg ABSTRACT The road-kill of deer in Colorado during 1966 was reported as 2,107 animals. Three study areas have been designated in the state in which to test methods of reducing this figure. Van de Ree mirrors between Grand Valley and Rifle have not shown a statistically significant reduction in road-kill. However, the ratio of kills between treated and untreated sections has been relatively greater since installation of mirrors. Bridges north of Rio Blanco have not been effective. It seems that deer, in any great numbers, are not using the area. Culverts near Sapinero were not used this year because of the mild weather and scarcity of deer in the area. Baits of hay and salt did not attract them. �- 130 - Recommendations: (1) Survey other states using scare-devices to determine their effectiveness across the nation. (2) Test means of counting deer that cross the highway. (3) Suspend the study of bridges as highway-underpasses until a more suitable area can be found. (4) Continue the study of culverts as highway-underpasses until some normal movement of deer occurs. (5) Re-establish approaches to the culverts. (6) Develop means of preventing the motoring public from using the culverts as trash dumps. Objectives: (1) To evaluate the effectiveness of scare-devices to reduce road-kill of deer. (2) To evaluate the effectiveness of·crossings under highways to reduce road-kill of deer. (3) To evaluate the effectiveness of baiting and wing-fencing as inducements to deer to use highway-underpasses. Procedures: (1) Two and one-half miles of Van de Ree mirrors have been installed along the shoulders of U. S. Highway 6-24 east of Grand Valley, Colorado. (a) (2) The mirrors were checked monthly for maintenance and replacement, and polishing spring and fall. .,i Highway-underpasses are located along Colorado Hfghway 13-789"north of Rio Blanco, Colorado and U. S. Highway 50 near Sapinero, Colorado. (a) Relative use of the highway-underpasses has been determined by daily counting and obliterating tracks passing through the underpasses during fall and spring migrations. (b) Baiting deer through the underpasses with hay and blocks of salt has been attempted. �- 131 - EVALUATION OF DEER-HIGHWAY CROSSING SAFETY MEASURES I David F. Gordon There were 2107 deer, 68 elk and 4 pronghorns reported killed on highways in Colorado from January 1, through December 31, 1966. Means of alleviating this problem have been under study since 1961. Methods tried include signs warning motorists of game crossings, scare-devices for deer and highway-underpasses. Grateful acknowledgements are given Are~ Supervisor Harvey Bray and Wildlife Conservation Officers Furman Dunham and Dick Lichtenberg for their help and cooperation in reporting road-kills in their districts. Thanks also to Wildlife Research Assistant Cliff Coghill for his work gathering data and reporting on the portion of the study near Sapinero. Highway maintenance crews have been very cooperative in noting and reporting the location of road-kills to the WCO's. Van de Ree Mirrors A 2.5-mile stretch of Van de Ree mirrors has been in operation on U. S. Highway 6-24 between Grand Valley and Rifle, Colorado since January 1965. Description of Set-up: At the request of the State Highway Patrol (Gordon 1966) the Van de Ree mirrors were installed in two sections, one reflecting the beams of headlights off the highway on the same side of the road as approaching traffic and one reflecting across the highway. Mirrors were placed on posts at the outside edge of the shoulders staggered every 50 feet on alternate sides of the highway. In the cross-flash section mirrors were set 34 inches above the ground. In the other section they were set to cover the contour of the land beyond the shoulder. Maintenance: Maintenance of mirror assemblies included checking them every month and repairing any damage. Mirrors were polished twice a year, spring and fall. In summer, vegetation that obscured the mirror was removed. Polishing 260 mirrors takes eight man-hours. Trimming vegetation around the posts takes at least 8-12 man-hours. Readjusting and replacing assemblies takes about one man-hour per month. Table 1 summarizes the cost of replacement of mirrors and posts since they were installed in 1965. The loss of assemblies to theft was greater this year. No mirrors were used as targets. The total cost has risen above last year by 53 percent. , �- 132 - Table l.--Numbers, percents and cost of posts and Van de Ree mirrors in the Colorado study. Year!!/ Cost Posts @ $1.10 Destroyed·by Inherent Vandalism Hazards No. % No. % 196~7 1965 1966 $14.30 $11.00 $23.10 13 4 12 a7 b/ 100 40 57 0 6 9 0 60 43 Total 13 10 21 Cost $ 5.60 $19.60 $23.80 The year runs from April 1 through March 31. Only the months of January lost Mirrors @ $1.40 Destroyed by Inherent Vandalism Hazards No. % No. % Total 4 8 12 4 14 17 100 57 71 through March were included 0 6 5 0 43 29 in these figures. Findings: On the night of November 3, 1966 I followed a car through the mirrors at about three or four car-lengths. I noticed a blink from the mirror ahead just as the car came opposite the assembly (Figure 1). This occured only in the cross-flash section. Even though I was looking for the flash, I did not always notice it. In the last year the Highway Department has installed white, Stratolite reflectors through the study area making the flash even less conspicuous to motorist. Gillelan (1965) had a photograph in his article showing a big, round, bright spot like a spotlight, which was the reflection of headlights from a Van de Ree mirror. When I stood off the side of the road to see what the reflection looked like it appeared merely as a blink as the reflected beam swept across me. The dimples in the mirror and the square shape were clearly distinguishable. In tabulating the road-kill for each year the winter months have been lumped together. Thus the year runs from April 1 through March 31. The months of highest kill remain November through March (Figure 2). Table 2 and Figure 3 summarize the road-kill in the study area since 1961. In 1963 the number of deer killed in the mirror-section compared to the rest of the study area came closer to a 1:1 ratio than for any other year. In 1964 it was farthest -f rom a 1:1 ratio. Following installation of mirrors in January 1965, although the number of road-kills in the mirror-section increased over the previous year, the ratio of kills between mirrors to outside mirrors remained wide. Conclusions: In my op1n10n the reflection of headlight beams from a mirror into the eyes of a deer does not confuse and immobilize the animal as headlights would, but merely catches its attention long enough to let the car pass. This opinion is shared by Murph~( (personal communication) of the Missouri Department of Conservation. The number of deer killed in the mirror-section compared to the rest of the study area was relatively less after the mirrors were installed than before, but statistical analysis does not definitely indicate a significant difference. (Calculated chi-square = 7.08. Tabular chi-square at the 5 * Dean A. Murphy, Research Biologist, Missouri Jefferson City, Missouri, February 1967. Department of Conservation, �- 133 - / �- 134 - AVERAGE ROAD-KILL OF DEER BY MONTH 10 so. CD OJ C "0 CD ~ I "0 0 0 - « 0 so. CD .0 E ~ z CD CJI 0 so. CD > « OL---~--~---4--~--~~~~--~--~--~------~"un Apr May Jul Aug Sep Month 'Oct Nov Dee JanFeb Figure 2 - Graph of the average number of monthly road-kills along U.S. 6-24 between Rifle and Grand Valley, Colorado, April 1, 1961 _ M3.rch 31, 1967. Mar �- 135 - ROAD-KILL OF DEER BV VEAR (April I - March 31) 80 "011) «p1O - =cn 0_ fill '-C:o. •.. o ...,::s •.• C •• •.. •..-;, • • o 00 :i -., ) ." 60 > ~ > .).---~ \ I ." " o ~ • a: 4f- \ o T' . 4 •• • .a e :J / G· \ / \......... \. <,....j.I Z 30 • • • 8··· _. J";'1 • •• -\...:..It. •••• Outside ~.~ ~ >) El •._ • >~. > > • ..... > . El>·· >) ••o. ••- •••• e. » ..0 •••••8 Totol - ~ •."".--- > • ~•• . >- •__ ~~ e. - ~).A Mirrors •••••• Between Mirrors Ol~------~--------~--------~------~~------~-~~ '61 '62 '63 '64 '65 '68 Vear Fi'gure 3 - Graph comparing the numbers of road-killed deer along U. S. Highway 6-24 between Rifle and Grand Valley, Colorado, April 1, 1961 fvBrch 31, 1967. �- 136 - and 50 percent levels with four degrees of freedom = 9.49 and 3.36 respectively.) Table 2.--Comparison of the number of road-kills along U. S. 6-24 between Grand Valley and Rifle, Colorado for the project years ~I 19611966. Year Outside Mirrors 1961 1962 1963 1964 1965 1966 55 26 21 ~7 48 46 49 Road-Kill Mirror-Section Total 31 13 16 8 11 22 86 39 37 56 57 71 Project year runs from April 1 through March 31. The road-kill in the mirror-section in 1966 was double what it was in 1965 (Table 2). Even so the difference in kill between mirrors and outside mirrors in 1966 was significantly greater than the greatest difference before mirrors were installed (1961). (Calculated chi-square = 32.30. Tabular chi-square at the 5 percent level with one degree of freedom = 3.84.) The increased kill in the mirror-section in 1966 apparently was not due to a shift in the pattern of movement of deer across the road in the study area. Assuming that the number of deer killed at any given location on the highway is directly proportionate to the number of deer crossing at that point, statistical analysis does not indicate any significant shift in the pattern of movement. (Calculated chi-square = 3.41. Tabular chisquare at the 5 and 50 percent levels with 5 degrees of freedom = 11.07 and 4.35 respectively.) One possible explanation for the increase in road-kill between the mirrors in 1966 could be that the deer have become somewhat accustomed to the flash of the mirror and no longer notice it. There is not enough data to draw valid conclusions on the effectiveness of the mirrors. To gather sufficient data, study areas would have to be set up in various types of terrain and vegetative cover with one section treated and a similar section untreated. If a method of accurately counting deer that cross a highway could be perfected, the data would be even better. Recommendations: Conduct a survey of the effectiveness of Van de Ree mirrors and similar devices as used by other states. Test several types of counters using the principle of breaking a ray to register each deer that crosses the road. Compare this tally to numbers of tracks that cross a piece of loose soil beyond the shoulder at the same location as the counter. �- 137 - Bridges Means of conditioning deer to use stream beds under bridges to cross highways have been studied in Colorado. Bridges north of Rio Blanco where the road crosses an historical, deer migration route were used. Findings: There are bridges on Colorado Highway 13-789 across Twelve Mile, Thirteen Mile and Fourteen Mile creeks, beginning 4 miles north of Rio Blanco, Rio Blanco County, Colorado. This area has been an historic migration route for deer. It was thought that the deer might be conditioned to use the stream beds to cross under the highway. This year fall migration began very shortly after hunting season. Some animals used the historic route, but the local WCO noted most of them crossing above and below the bridges. Thirty-five deer-vehicle collisions were reported on the Rio Blanco-Meeker highway between the bridges, six during November 1966 and one on February 22, 1967. No inducements were used to attract or funnel the deer under the bridges. Recommendations: It is recommended that this part at least until a more suitable area can be found. deer crossing the highway at the bridges to obtain spending money to induce them with baits or fences of the job be suspended There are not enough valid data or warrant to use the stream beds. Culverts Means of conditioning deer to use culverts to cross under highways have been studied in Colorado. Culverts near Sapinero where deer cross for food and water are being used. Description of Set-up: The Bureau of Reclamation installed three, 7-footdiameter, steel culverts (Figure 4), 40 to 60-feet long, under U. S. Highway 50 when the roadway was relocated for Blue Mesa Dam. These culverts are located on natural game trails at Dry Gulch, East Elk Creek and Red Creek; 2.8, 5.2 and 8.2 miles respectively, west of the junction of U. S. 50 and state 149. One foot of soil was spread in the bottom of the culverts as natural footing for deer. Maintenance: Motorists find the culverts easily accessible from the road and use them for picnicking and disposal of litter. This debris was removed. Steep hillsides opposite the culverts on the north make a natural trap for snow plowed from the road. During the winter of 1965-66 when snow became to deep, trails to the culverts were tramped into it from existing game trails with snowshoes. Baiting was tried to induce deer to use the tubes. Alfalfa hay was placed near the north end of the underpasses in December 1966 and again in January 1967. During the latter part of January 1967, 33-percent protein blocks were placed inside the tubes. �- 138 - Findings: Snow came early and deep in the fall of 1965. Roads and trails were plowed to the river by construction crews. Game tended to use these trails rather than their natural routes. Paths that were made by snowshoes to the mouths of the culverts were not used. The tubes were checked periodically and tracks of one deer were seen. They went about half-way through then turned around and left by the same end they entered. The winter of 1966-67 was relatively mild. No snow was on the ground in December and no deer were observed in the area. Culverts were baited in December and again after 6-8 inches of snow fell in January. A few deer were seen in the area, but none of the hay was touched. During the latter part of January 33-percent-protein blocks were placed inside the culverts as bait. These were not used either. It did not seem feasible to try wing-fencing this year since there were so few deer in the area. There was no real migration during the 1966-67 season and only an occasional deer crossed the highway. By February 15, 1967 snow had melted at the higher elevations and deer had moved back up. The deepest snow during the entire winter was about 8 inches. Between November 1965 and April 1966, 36 deer were killed on the highway. This number probably can be increased by ten animals that were not counted by highway maintenance crews because of heavy snow storms at night. Compare a total of three road-kills from November 1966 through March 1967. Conclusions: Heavy snow during the winter of 1965-66 prevented deer from using their natural, migration routes. This barrier was probably the reason deer did not use the culverts even after trails to them were tramped into the snow. The mild winter of 1966-67 permitted most of the deer to remain on higher range away from the highway. Bait was not enough to attract theln and the scarcity of deer on the highway reduced the road-kill. Recommendations: This job should be continued for another year or until some normal migration of deer occurs. This will permit a test of wingfencing to funnel deer through the tubes. Continue using bait to attract deer to the crossings. The approaches to these culverts have been eroded due to heavy rains. They should be reestablished using a small bulldozer. This job should take about three hours. Some means of preventing the motoring public from using the culverts as trash dumps should be developed. Perhaps the approaches could be fenced and warning signs set up. �- 139 - LITERA'IDRE CITED Gillelan, G. H. 1965. Deer mirrors: 9 states test them to cut road kill. Outdoor Life 135 (2): 24-26, 143. Gordon, D. F. 1966. Evaluation of deer-highway crossing safety measures. Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Dep., Job Completion Rep., P.-R. Project W-38-R-20, July. 179-194. Prepared Date: by: David F. Gordon Wildlife Researcher July, 1967 Approved by: ~=Ja.:..:.c.::..;k~R~.-=G.:..:.r.:..:.ie-:: _ Project Leader Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief ��July, 1967 - 141 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO --------~~~~--------- Project No. W-38-R-21 Work Plan No. 4 Deer-Elk Investigations Job No. 4 Title of Job: Evaluation of the Effects of Mountain Lion Predation Period Covered: April 1, 1966 through March 31, 1967 Personnel: Kenneth R. Dixon and Raymond J. Boyd. Personnel in the Northwest Region and the Denver Headquarters of the Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department assisted in many phases of this project. Personnel in the Bureau of Sport Fisheries and Wildlife, Colorado Wool Growers and the Colorado Cattlemen's Association also contributed to the study. Their help is gratefully acknowledged. ABSTRACT Bounties were paid on mountain lions by the Denver Post newspaper from 1920 through 1939, a total of 890 lions being bountied at $50.00 each. The State of Colorado initiated a bounty system on lions in 1929 paying $50.00 for 1,457 lions of any age until 1965. FiVe counties in Colorado provided nearly three-fourths of the total lion kill from July 1956 to June, 1965; three of these counties: Fremont, Garfield and Rio Blanco provided 53 percent of the total kill. Of eight actual lion kills of mule deer examined, all were bucks with. antlers averaging four points to a side and an age of 7 to 9 years. Domestic sheep kills by mountain lions in 1965 totaled 139 head out of a total predator loss of 15,815 head, or 0.8 percent. �- 142 - Recommendations: (1) No recommendations will be made to Management at this time since information in this report covers only one year's work. (2) Continue the study as planned for one more year. Objectives: (1) Determine the distribution and population of mountain lions in Colorado. (2) Determine if there is predation selectivity by mountain lions for age, sex or physical condition of deer or elk; and if there is any particular age-group or condition class of mountain lions that do a major portion of this predation. (3) Determine the extent of mountain lion predation what conditions livestock predation occurs. on livestock and under Procedures: (1) An estimate of the past distribution of mountain lions in Colorado will be obtained from an examination of the Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department files on bounty payments through March 12, 1965, when the bounty was removed from the lion. On July 1, 1965, the mountain lion was declared a big game animal, and information on lion distribution since that time will be gathered by inspection of lion license report card returns. Reports from licensed guides will also be examined for information on lion kills and chases. In addition, Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department personnel, U. S. Fish and Wildlife Personnel, and licensed lion hunting guides will be asked to notify Mr. Kenneth R. Dixon, through the Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Research Center in Fort Collins, immediately by telephone of all deer and elk believed to have been killed by mountain lions. These reports will not only be used for lion distribution data, but each report will be investigated to obtain addidtional information for this study. Livestock owners in the State will be asked to notify the Department of predation on livestock whether or not a damage claim is made. A preliminary estimate of mountain lion populations will be made from a survey of licensed lion hunting guides, State Game, Fish and Parks Department personnel and U. S. Fish and Wildlife Service Predator and Rodent Control personnel. An intensive study area will be set up in Game Management Units 21, 22 and 40. A tracking study will be conducted in these areas, primarily on foot. The total lion population in this area will be estimated from information gained from interviews, and used to make inferences about lion populations in larger areas of lion habitat in the State. (2) The sex, age and condition of all lion kills will be determined .by field inspection of the carcass, removal of the lower jaw for aging and taking .a femur for marrow fat determinations as a measurement of the physical condition of the animal at the time it was killed. Other data to be �- 143 - recorded will be: date kill was found; estimated time since kill; county~ section; nearest town; drainage; elevation; vegetative cover at the kill site, and if there is evidence of the kill being moved, the vegetative cover where the kill was made; weather conditions; amount of snow on the ground; parts of the kill that were eaten; antler points; proximity to other big game animals and livestock; and miscellaneous comments. Photographs of all kills will be taken as part of the permanent records. These data will be compared with information on live herds in the same areas obtained from hunter license reports and other information which may become available. A comparison of these data should give an indication of any selectivity shown by lions in their predation habits. The investigation of lion predation of big game reported to the Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department, together with field tracking studies will be the main sources of data. Any lion that is killed by licensed guides in this area will be inspected, if at all possible, in order to determine the sex of the lion, general body condition, obtain a stomach sample and remove one tooth for sectioning and aging by the dental cementum technique. (3) State livestock owners will be encouraged to notify the Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Research Center whenever predation by lions on livestock occurs. This information will be investigated to determine the conditions surrounding the predation. Information gathered will include: date of kill; kind and number of stock killed, weather conditions; amount of snow on the ground; vegetative cover at kill site; portions of the animal eaten; county; nearest town; owner; availability of other livestock and big game in the immediate vicinity and any other miscellaneous comments. Photographs will be taken of all stock kills. �- 144 - Persons interviewed concerning mountain lions in Colorado. Name Address Occupation Atwood, Cap Cooper, William L. DelDuca, Nick R. Denton, Bryan Dobbs, Harry Goecker, Roy E. Hurd, Bud Jerome, Dudley Kent, Bill Lundgren, Larry Moen, Duane Morris, Hartle Patton, Nate Peters, Bob Peters, Gene Peters, Jack Putnam, Jack Rice, Dave Grand Junction· Coaldale Colorado Springs La Veta Craig Littleton Steamboat Springs Fruita Beulah Palisade Tie Siding, Wyoming Eckert Canon City Canon City Rangely Fruita Denver Denver Vidakovich, Lou Wallace, Bill Wilkinson, Ernest Rangely Collbran Monte Vista Guide & Outfitter Guide & Outfitter Guide & Outfitter Lion Hunter (retired) G.F.P. Area Supervisor Rancher & Guide W.C.O. W.C.O. (retired) W.C.O. Lion Hunter & Guide Rancher & Lion Hunter Federal Trapper Rancher Guide & Outfitter Federal Trapper Trapper & Guide Taxidermist & Lion Hunter Exec. Sec. of Colo. Cattlemen IS Assn. W.C.O. Guide & Outfitter Taxidermist & Lion Owner �- 145 - EVALUATION OF THE EFFECTS OF MOUNTAIN LION PREDATION I Kenneth R. Dixon Population Methods of Estimation Any method of population estimation is difficult. This is particularly true of mountain lions, I think, due to their secretive nature. Population estimates are mostly calculated guesses based on some function of the annual kill and modified by such factors as survival of young, observations of home range and carrying capacity of habitat. In a questionnaire survey, Cahalane (1964) estimated the lion population in Colorado to be between 250 and 400 animals. The basis for these estimates was the lion kill times a factor of seven. In Utah a factor of three and in British Columbia a factor of 20 was used. Johnson, ~ al (1954) devised a formula to determine the minimum population. It is based on these factors: (1) an approximately equal sex ratio; (2) an average breeding age of two years; (3) an average litter size of two (4) time between litters, two years; and (5) a longevity of ten years. Assuming these are true, it takes two lions to produce another one each year. This gives the formula N=3K+.3K where N is the minimum lion population and K is the total annual kill. 10 Ten percent is added to make up for natural attrition. These life history data are supported by productivity studies by Robinette, ~ al (1961). However, I question whether this gives a minimum estimate. The two lions needed to produce the one figured in the kill may also be a part of the kill. This happens when a female lion with kittens is killed. If the kittens are not killed, they may die anyway unless they are old enough to hunt on their own. In this case the kill would be greater than the 30 percent and the population actually smaller than estimated. Hunter Kill Data The two main sources of data for population and distribution are bounty records and U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service Predator Control Reports. In 1920, the Denver Post newspaper started paying a bounty of $25 on adult lions and $10 on cubs. This was discontinued in 1939. From 1920 to August 1935 they estimated bounties paid on 700 adult lions and 190 cubs for a total of 890 animals. The State of Colorado initated a bounty system on lions in 1929 paying $50 for a lion of any age. This bounty was discontinued in 1965. Both of these bounti8S were begun at the insistence of stockmen in the state who felt that the lion was a serious predator on livestock. However, in 1954 (eleven years before the bounty ended) L. H. Douglas wrote in the American Cattle Producer (1954, p. 11) of the $50 bounty, "This is not so much from the standpoint that he preys on domestic animals as that he kills deer indiscreetly, killing nearly always more than he needs for food.", and that the lion is "not a serious factor in losses of range cattle." �- 146 - In the 37 years that the state paid bounties, at least 1457 lions were bountied. Data for part of the 1940 and all of 1941, 1942 and 1943 are missing. The number of lions bountied by year is presented in Table 1. Table l.--Mountain lions bountied in Co Lor ado= Fiscal Fiscal Fiscal Year No. Year No. Year No. Fiscal Year No. 1929 1930 1931 1932 1933 1934 1935 1936 1937 10 13 12 45 28 39 47 58 54 1956 1957 1958 1959 1960 1961 1962 1963 1964 66 82 46 38 31 38 34 45 80 15 92 58 85 73 59 45 43 42 1938 1939 1940 1941 1942 1943 1944 1945 1946 50 16 13** 13 18 5 1947 1948 1949 1950 1951 1952 1953 1954 1955 * Sources of data: 19~9-1940 - Rocky Mountain News, 1944-1945 - Colo. Game and Fish Biennial Rept., 1946-1965 - Colo. Game, Fish and Parks Bounty records. ** Data incomplete or missing from 1940 to 1943. The predator control take of lions by federal trappers for the same number of years (1929-1965) was 208. These are given in Table 2. Table 2.--Mountain Lions taken by federal trappers in Colorado. Fiscal Fiscal Fiscal Fiscal Year No. Year No. Year No. Year 1929 1930 1931 .1932 1933 1934 1935 1936 1937 1 2 6 2 2 2 1 0 1 1938 1939 1940 1941 1942 1943 1944 1945 1946 0 0 0 0 2 1 8 2 0 1947 1948 1949 1950 1951 1952 1953 1954 1955 4 0 9 8 7 7 12 14 9 1956 1947 1958 1959 1960 1961 1962 1963 1964 1965 No. 4 22 19 16 7 6 13 7 12 2 The combined bounty and federal take is 1665 lions for an average of 40 lions per year. The total kill is shown in Figure 1 and illustrates the great fluctuation in kill from year to year. On July 1, 1965, the mountain lion became a big game animal in Colorado. the two seasons since then 49 lions have been reported killed as a game animal. Table 3 shows a summary of the hunter kill data. In �- 147 - Table 3.--Mountain Lion season kill dataz 1965-66 and 1966-67. 1965-66 Male Female County Chaffee Fremont Garfield Grand Jefferson Larimer Mesa Moffat Park Rio Blanco Saguache Teller Douglas Unknown 4 Total 7 4 2 1 1966-67 Male Female 1 2 2 1 3 5 1 1 1 5 3 1 2 3 3 1 1 1 1 11 18 22 Total 10 7 8 1 1 1 5 3 1 8 1 1 1 1 9 31 49 The kill figure in the first year would be expected to be low as many hunters may have been unfamiliar with the season. The following season the kill went from 18 to 31, an increase of 72 percent. Factors Affecting Populations (1) Hunting - The removal of any number of animals will have some effect on the population. The removal of females will have a greater effect because of their low breeding potential. (2) Productivity - As mentioned above, lions have a low productivity, averaging one offspring per year per female. (3) Predators - Lions, being predators themselves, are not generally considered susceptible to predators. However, the occurrence of cannibalism is well documented (Young, 1927 and Lesowski, 1963). As in domestic cats, the male will eat its own kittens. Another predator on kittens is the coyote. If a coyote finds lion kittens feeding on a kill in the absence of the parent it may kill them (Jack Peters, personal communication, 1967). (4) Weather - Weather may have both a direct and indirect effect on survival of kittens. If bad weather makes deer hard to find, a female may have to be gone too long in search of food to support all her kittens and they may starve or weaken and die of exposure. (5) Food - There is much debate as to whether predators are limited by their prey or are limiting factors on the prey. Possibly some predators which prey on small mammals with oscillating fluctuations are limited. Because deer do not fluctuate greatly and are generally abundant, I feel that they are not limiting the lion population. �110I 10 r- 9 80) No. Uons 7C Killed 6 :) - 5 "I f-' +- co r- 4 ) 3C 2J r- ,.., ) C7I C\l C7I •• I• • • 0 ro C7I 10 ro C7I o <:t en -- ••n I 10 <:t <n o 10 <n I 10 10 o I I •• <n <n ~ I ID Fiscal Veor Figure 1. Number of lions killed in Colorado, 1929-1965 (Fiscal Year). Solid bars represent federal trapper kill and clear bars represent bounty hunter kill. Bounty data is missing from 1940-1945. 10 �- 149 - (6) Immigration and Emigration - Lions may move into Colorado from adjoing states, particularly Utah. The increase due to immigration is believed by some lion hunters to be greater than the increase due to natural productivity. Trends and Population Estimate Long range changes in lion populations are difficult to determine primarily because the earliest estimates were based on sightings or tracks which were not made systmatically. At present, estimates based on track counts are not practical due to the rugged terrain of their habitat and their wide cruising radius estimated to be at least 25 miles (Young, 1945). An annual kill is the best information in determining trends and population estimates. The estimated kill by the Denver Post bounty was 890 lions in 16 years, from 1920 to 1935. For the last 16 years of the state bounty (1950-1965), 795 lions were killed (The federal trapper kill is not considered here). This shows a decrease of only 95 lions over a period of 45 years. The total kill by bounty hunters and federal trappers might give a clearer picture. As shown in Fig. 1, there is much fluctuation in the annual kill. There are several possible reasons for these flucuations which make it difficult to find a trend. One of the most important reasons is weather. Because most lion hunting is done with dogs with snow cover, the amount and frequency of snowfall will affect the amount of hunting done. For example, in the winter of 1963-64, 92 lions were taken, the third highest since the bounty started. That winter had an above average snowfall. Another important factor is the number of lion hunters involved in the total kill. In that same year, 1963-64, 39 hunters were involved in the kill for an average of 2.4 lions per hunter while the following year 32 hunters took only 66 lions for a 2.1 average. These two factors indicate a decline in population from 1963-1965. Taking Fig. 1, and eliminating those years for which data is missing, there is an average annual kill of 50. Given an annual kill of 50 lions, the population estimated with a kill factor of seven would be 350 lions. This seems to me to be too high. A more realistic figure would be obtained using the formula of Johnson, et al (1954). This gives a population estimate of 165 lions. Although thi;-may seem low, a population of this size could support an annual kill of 50 animals provided the breeding potential of one new lion per pair of adults is realized. Because of the two years required for breeding age, fluctuations may occur. Fluctuations may also be caused when the kill is greater than 50, although some slack may be taken up by immigrants. I believe this to be a fairly accurate picture of the lion population in the state. A second method was devised using a ten year average from the bounty records from 1956-1965. The average for each county was used as an index (see appendix A). An estimate of the population of Mesa county was made by interviewing several lion hunters from that county (see appendix B). They estimated the population in that county to be 15 lions, from tracks and other signs and from lions they had treed and not killed. This figure was used to obtain estimates of the population in other counties. The total figure for the state by this method is 142 lions. �- 150 - A third method used the largest kill in each county for the 5 year period from 1961-1965. Because some lion hunters will concentrate their hunting in one area in one year and move to another area the next, the number of lions taken in one county varies from year to year. In the highest year nearly all the lions may be removed. This gives 124 lions and should be at least a minimum estimate of the population. As the lion is now a big game animal, there is an opportunity to obtain data more helpful in estimating populations. One factor that may be used in predicting future population trends is the sex ratio of the kill. Most professional hunters prefer to take males and leave the females to assure a future income. However, with many guides working in one area it is difficult for them to keep track of the lions in the area. If the number of females in the kill increases, the population may decrease. The number of females killed decreased from 11 in 1965-66 to 7 in 1966-67. With increasing popularity of lion hunting as a sport, more out-of-state hunters are hunting in Colorado. Non-resident hunters took only 5 lions during the 1965-66 season but killed 20 lions in the 1966-67 season while resident hunters took only 11. Di~tribution Habitat Although mountain lions are found occasionally in many types of terrain they seem to prefer rough canyons and rimrock mesas with scattered cover of pinionjuniper to either dense mountain forests or flat, open plains. It may be that the lion has developed this preference in the time that civilization has claimed former wilderness areas. In early times, lions were occasionally found east of the mountains, particularly along water courses which provided cover. The only record of a lion killed on the plains in the last 12 years was one in Baca County in fiscal year 1960. There are two main areas in the state which provide good lion habitat. One is along the Front Range beginning with the Rampart Range south of Phillipsburg and including the Sangre de Cristo and Wet Mountains into New Mexico. The second is in the northwestern part of the state, pri~arily in the counties of Moffat, Rio Blanco, Garfield and Mesa. During the ten year period from 1956 to 1965, 243 lions or 39 percent were killed on the eastern slope and 182 or 61 percent killed on the western slope. Distribution by County The breakdown by county of the total kill by bounty hunters and federal trappers from July 1956 to June 1965 is shown in Figure 2. A complete table of the lion kill by county is given in Appendix A. It is evident from Figure 2 that a few counties contributed most of the lions killed. Fremont, Garfield and Rio Blanco counties provided 53 percent of the total kill and Mesa and Moffat counties added another 20 percent. This means that five counties out of 32 provided nearly three-fourths of the total kill. �1"20 .. 110I r- 10 C 9 . 8) 7 )r- No. Lions Killed 6 ::>- 5) I-' VI - I-' 40) I- 30 r+ l- 2) - f- o 111m 123 123 n1lrl123123 m rffll-nl 123123123123123 123123 123123 n-fl n n 123 23123 III 0 .,. Go '"E0 .•.. .•.. 0 <i u e III .J: 0 0 III QI ;:, c;. 0 0 w C:ID Q 0 a.. - .. C E Q; ;: It (!) 0 CD w 'c:I Q 0 C .. c:I .•.. III ;:, :I: c 0 ••• ""U -,0 c .. 0 ••• - CD .•.. -, III "- .. E 0 -l E 'c ct '"c:I -l r- 23 123 0 c:I CII nJl 123123 0 en III :! •.. 0 .•.. .•.. ~ •.... U CII 0 0 :! - .0& 0 .•. •.. ~ 0: 0::. 0:: 0 C CII c III c ..- Ql 0 .J: u 0 :J .. ell CII ..- CI 0 .&: C/) 0 County Figure 2.--Distribution of lion kill in Colorado from 1956 to 1965. Column 1 is the kill from 1956 to 1960. Column 2 is the kill from 1960 to 1965. Column 3 is the total for the ten years. �- 152 - Nearly all of Fremont county provides good lion habitat. Lions are taken on both sides of the Arkansas River but are not usually found east of Canon City in the valley because there is little cover and rough terrain. Also, the Wet Mountain Valley between the Sangre de Cristos and the Wet Mountains has few lions due to lack of cover. On the western slope, in Mesa County, lions are found primarily in the Book Cliffs west of De Beque and are not usually found south of the Colorado River. In Garfield County, most of the lions are found in the Book and Roan Cliffs west of Grand Valley. Most of the lions in Rio Blanco County are found in the Douglas Creek and Evacuation Creek drainages south of Rangely. Although lions may be found throughout Moffat County, the large concentrations extend from the Dinosaur National Monument north into Brown's Park. Table 3 shows the hunter kill generally was greatest where estimated lion populations were highest with one exception. There were 10 lions taken in Chaffee County in the past two years while in the previous ten years only four lions were killed. I believe this is due to increased hunting pressure in this county rather than an increase in population or change in distribution. Figure 3 shows the location of some of the lions killed during the last two hunting seasons. Mountain Lion Predation on Big Game Food Habits Deer are recognized as the main prey species of the mountain lion. Sperry (Young and Goldman, 1946) made an analysis of 113 lionsstomachs from 9 western states. Table 4 shows a summary of his study. Table 4.--Percentages State Arizona Colorado Idaho Montana New Mexico Oregon Texas Utah Washington b~ volume of annual food of mountain lions* No. Stomachs Deer Porcupine Sheep Goat Horse Cow Other Mammals Carrion 25 2 1 16 37 1 11 12 8 55.0 100.0 100.0 75.0 40.5 100.0 68.2 66.7 100.0 10.4 10.0 20.0 2.6 2.0 25.0 36.4 2.8 8.1 6.8 2.7 16.7 4.5 8.3 -/(Adapted from Sperry (Young and Goldman, Grass 2.7 27..3 8.3 1946). Similar results were found by Dixon (1925), Hibben (1937), Connolly (1949) and Robinette, et al. (1959). In this study eight deer were found killed by lions. The only other-;pecies found killed was one porcupine which usually ranks second to deer in most food habits studies. �COLORADO MOI"AT SEOGWICK LOGAN WELO LARIMER ROUTT PHILLIPS MORGAN I YUMA WASHINGTON RIO 8tANCO • •••• GAyllLD •• lor LINCOLN ELSERT CARSON •• .A •• ••••• M~SA TELLER I e: PASO I MONTI10S£ PU~SLO I--' V1 W CHUEHNE I CROWLEY I J KIOWA SAGUACH~ SAN MIGU~L • 'HINSDAU PROWERS SENT DOLORES RIO GNANOE Fig. 3 a a I ALAMOSA LAS ANIMAS MONTEZUMA Oistr i bution Each of mountain lions killed as big game in 1965 ~66 and 1966~67. triangle represents one lion. SACA �- 154 - Although lions are known to kill elk, no records of this occuring in Colorado have been found. Reports of lions killing antelope near Guffey, Colorado (Nick DelDuca, personal communication, 1967) and big horn sheep being killed near Beaver Creek (Bill Kent, personal communication, 1967) have been received. Selectivity in Lion Predation of Deer There has been much discussion about the effect of lion predation on deer herds. Some claim that lions eat only the weak or wounded deer (Hibben, 1937). Connolly (1949) found no unfit deer in the kills he examined. However, he suggests that lions take mentally lax or deficient deer as they are able to take them by surprise. In the present study, eight lion kills were examined from January 1 to March 31, 1967. All eight kills were found in Prairie Canyon located in the southwest corner of Garfield County near the Utah line. Two of the kills were found up on a bench between two side canyons, approximately 200 to 300 feet above the canyon floor. The other six kills were found in the bottom of the canyons. All but one of these were found up on a creek bank under a pinion, juniper or oak. One kill was found directly in a frozen creek bed. The elevation of the kill sites varied from 5600 to 6000 feet. There was a snow depth from two to four inches at every site but one on a bench which had three to four inches in the surrounding area but had melted away at the kill site. A typical lion kill is shown in Figure 4. Selection for Sex.--Mountain lions are often pictured killers of does and fawns, presumably because they are thought to be more vulnerable. All indications, however, show the exact opposite, that is a preference for bucks. Hibben (1937), found 84 percent of the kills he found were bucks. Robinette, et a1. (1959) found a significantly higher proportion of bucks in lion kills tha~in live herds during the winter. The eight kills examined in this study· were all bucks with antlers averaging four points on a side. Several theories have been made to explain the selection of bucks. One is that the lion instinctively is trying to preserve his food supply. H~bben (1937) suggests that it may be that large bucks are more apt to be alone than does and young bucks which often run in large groups. Robinette, et a1. (1959) suggest that it may be due to bucks being less wary during the rut, and that bucks prefer 1edgy, broken terrain, the preferred habitat of the lion, rather than an actual preference for them. Although Hibben (1937) considers it "far-fetched", I would not discount the possibility of an instinctive preference for bucks. Stranger things have evolved for the preservation of a species. Selection for Age.--Very little information is available on the age distribution of lion kills. Robinette, ~ al. (1959) divided his sample of lion kills into bucks, does and fawns. His discussion of bucks was considered previously. They found a slightly lower proportion of fawns than their prevalence in the herd during the summer and a nearly equal ratio during the winter. They felt that during the summer the fawn kill could have been much greater than their prevalence in the herd and the small sample did not give a realistic comparison. Hibben (1937) collected 11 kills which are presented in Table 5. The technique for aging was a combination of antler and tooth examination. �Fig. 4.--Typical mule deer killed by mountain Colorado. lion. Garfield County, �- 156 - Table 5.--Age of lion killed deer, from Hibben (1937). Approximate ~e No. of Kills 1-2 2-3 3-4 4-5 3 4 1 3 Total 11 In the present study both tooth eruption and wear and cementum annu1ation techniques were used. The ages are given in Table 6. Table 6.--Ages of lion killed deer from Garfield County, Colorado, 1966-67. A e Kill No. Tooth wear* 1 2 3 4 5** 6 7** 8 7-8 7-8 7-8 2 9+ 7-8 Annulations 9 9 not aged " " " " " II II " II " * The aging by tooth eruption and wear was done by Allen Anderson, Wildlife Researcher, Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department. The aging by cementum annu1ations was done by James Erikson, graduate student at Colo. State Univ. **Lower jaw missing, molars from upper jaw used for aging. Although this sample is too small to draw conclusions, there appears to be a tendency not only to take a predominance of bucks but primarily older bucks. Selection for Physical Condition.--As mentioned previously in this paper, there are some proponents (primarily Hibben, 1937) of the theory that lions kill the weak and wounded deer. Connolly (1949) disagrees with this theory as all of the kills he found appeared to be normal in all respects and in good physical condition. With no exception, all the lion hunters interviewed for this study agree that lions do not kill only the sick and wounded, including Bryan Denton and Bill Kent (Denton and Kent, 1957). It had been intended to use a femur from the kills to test the marrow for fat content. However the kills were either chewed up by coyotes or too old to attempt the analysis. Conclusions Because the sample of lion kills is so small, no valid comparisons can be made with live herds. The sex ratio of the hunter kill from that area (Douglas Game Management Unit) is 49 percent bucks, 43 percent does, and 7 �- 157 - percent fawns. If the present trend of bucks in lion kill continues, a preference is indicated. The age distribution for this same area is yearlings, 53 percent; 3 1/3 - 4 1/3 years, 34 percent; mature, 11 percent; unknown, 2 percent. A preference for older animals may be shown with more data. How does this affect a deer herd? Assuming a preference for bucks and older animals, lions should have a beneficial effect on the herd. Because mature animals contribute little to breeding populations as a whole, their removal is not detrimental. And, by removing some amount of deer each year lions may prevent irruptions in the population (leopold, 1943). Mountain Lion Predation on Livestock Extent of Predation The long held reputation of the mountain lion as a stock killer is now recognized as unwarranted. This is pointed out by the support of the Colorado Cattlemen's Association for the removal of the bounty on the lion. In Colorado, at least, the lion is not considered a serious predator on cattle Although a lion is known to be fond of horse meat, most ranchers have little trouble from lions in Colorado. One reason is that few horses are raised in lion country. Compared with other predators, the mountain lion is not an important predator on domestic sheep. However, on occasion a single lion will kill several sheep in one night and this could be catastrophic to a rancher with a small band of sheep. On a statewide basis, the lion ranks at the bottom of the list of predator losses. As evidenced by the fact that in 1965, the Colorado Wool Growers Association reported a loss. from all predators of 15,816 sheep. Of these sheep only 139 or 0.8 percent were killed by lions. A summary of predator loss from 1962-1963 is given in Table 7. Table 7.--SheeE Eredator loss. Data from Colorado Wool Growers Association. Year 1962-63 1963-64 1965 No. Sheep Reported %of Total on Farms in Colo. 98,870 15.3 240,476 22.2 289,003 26.3 Coyote Bear Bobcat Dog Eagle Lion 5,497 770 771 165 132 149 9,527 1,447 1,503 864 372 241 12,033 1,347 1,573 568 155 139 Total % loss of sheep reported 7,424 7.5 13,954 5.8 15,815 5.5 �- 158 - For the three year period, the total loss from lions is 529. Of these, 311 or 59% were killed in Rio Blanso county, which has one of the largest lion populations in the state. The lion loss for different areas of the state is given in Table 8. This table shows a close association between the number of sheep killed and areas of high lion density. Table 8.--Sheep killed by lions in Colorado Wool Growers Association. Area from 1962-65. Data from Colorado 1962-63 1963-64 1965 Total Mesa County Rio Blanco Routt-Moffat Saguache Assn. Colo. River Assn. Eagle-Pitkin Middle Park Assn. San Juan Assn. Garfield County Delta-Gunnison 0 143 0 0 0 0 0 0 6 0 12 120 52 0 00 19 0 2 16 20 19 48 28 18 2 2 12 10 0 0 31 311 80 18 2 21 12 12 22 20 Total 149 241 139 529 Reasons for Predation In an attempt to learn some of the conditions surrounding lion predation on sheep, a case of predation was investigated on December 19, 1966. About 1000 head of sheep, owned by Dave Christensen were located in Corcoran Wash west of De Beque. The predation occurred on the night of December 12, 1966 as the sheep were bedded down on a slope on the north side of the wash. The vegetative cover in the area is sagebrush interspersed with pinon-juniper. There was two to three inches of melting snow on the ground, the last snowfall being on December 6, six days earlier. There was enough snow on the ground to tell by the tracks that the lion came over a ridge into the wash from the northwest. A total of nine sheep were killed but only one hind quarter of one sheep was eaten. Fang marks were found on the back of the necks of the sheep which were also broken. The lion moved through the herd killing one sheep after another almost in a straight line rather than jumping from sheep to sheep in a small area as might be suspected. The distance from the first kill to the ninth was approximately 200 yeards, with sheep being 150 to 200 feet apart and two sheep only inches apart. The last sheep killed was the one the lion fed upon. The rest of the sheep remained in the area and the lion, no doubt, passed up many sheep between some of the kills. It is significant that a similar case of predation only eight months previously during the spring. occurred in this same wash One of the first reasons suggested for mountain lions turning to livestock is that their natural food, deer, is in low abundance. However, those areas of greatest sheep predation in Northwest Colorado are also areas of high deer populations with such counties as Rio Blanco, Garfield and Mesa usually ranking in the top ten in number of deer harvested. The fact that lions rarely �- 159 - eat much of the sheep they kill also opposes this theory. In the one case of lion predation investigated near De Beque, Colorado in December 1966, nine ewes were killed and only one hind quarter of one sheep was eaten. If deer were so scarce that a lion killed sheep out of hunger it would seem that he would eat more than he did. A second explanation for a lion's killing sheep is that it is the older and weaker animals that do the killing. There is some evidence to support this theory from the case investigated on December 19, 1966. A lion killed several days later which was believed to be the predator, was an old tom with the toes of one front paw missing - evidently lost in a trap -. A second case of predation also in December occurred near Grand Valley, Colorado. The lion was trailed and killed a few days later and was found to have the right upper canine missing and a complete fracture of the left humerus which had healed. (See Fig. 5-a,b,c). These injuries may be enough to reduce a lion's ability to kill deer as often. It should be pointed out that these lions were sill able to kill deer (one was found with deer remains in its stomach). The same argument can be made against this theory, that very little of the sheep are eaten. The fact remains that more sheep are killed than are needed for food. This leads me to believe that the lion's motivation for killing sheep is not hunger, although it may be a contributing factor. The final answer to the cause of sheep predation may be found in the complex interaction of endogenous and exogenous factors involved in predatory behavior. More information is needed on both the physiological state of the lion and its reaction to stimuli produced by the sheep, the environment or both. �- 160 - Fig. 5 a.--Skull of mountain lion with right upper canine missing. The lion had been killing sheep. Photo by Jack Putnam �- 161 - Fig. 5 b.--Left humerus of mountain lion showing healed fracture. Normal humerus shown above for comparison. Photo by Jack Putnam �- 162 - Fig. 5 c.--Left humerus of mountain lion showing healed fracture. Normal humerus shown to left for comparison. Photo by Jack Putnam �Combined bounty hunter and federal trapper lion kill b~county in Colorado. ----- 1956 1957 1958 Fiscal Year 1959 1960 1961 Alamosa 0 Archuleta 0 Baca 0 Boulder 0 Chaffee 0 Costilla 0 Custer 0 Delta 0 Douglas 1 Eagle 0 E1 Paso 4 Fremont 7 Garfield 19 Grand 0 Huerfano 0 Jackson 0 Jefferson 5 La Plata 0 Larimer 0 Las Animas 0 Mesa 11 Moffat 2 Montezuma 0 Montrose 0 Park 1 Pitkin 0 Pueblo 0 Rio Blanco 16 Routt 0 San Miguel 0 Saguache 0 Teller 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 5 0 1 9 22 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 34 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 6 1 1 2 11 0 0 2 4 0 4 0 7 8 0 1 2 0 0 14 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 2 0 0 2 10 0 1 0 3 0 1 0 1 15 1 1 0 0 0 13 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 3 1 0 8 3 1 0 0 0 0 4 0 0 8 1 1 0 1 0 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 13 4 0 0 0 4 0 9 0 1 6 0 0 0 0 1 3 2 0 0 0 2 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 11 10 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 7 3 0 0 0 0 0 7 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 1 0 9 7 0 1 0 0 0 1 3 3 7 0 0 0 0 1 8 0 0 4 0 3 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 2 1 1 21 16 0 1 2 0 0 1 1 8 9 0 1 0 0 2 12 0 0 10 0 Total 104 64 54 38 44 47 52 92 Count:t 66 0 21 2 1962 1963 1964 1965 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 7 0 0 23 7 0 2 0 1 0 3 0 7 2 0 0 0 0 0 8 0 0 2 0 64 10 Year Total Largest No. in Last 5 Years Percentage Index 7 1 1 1 4 1 1 3 29 4 8 105 109 1 5 4 23 1 23 5 66 62 2 4 3 4 4 118 6 1 18 1 3 1 0 1 3 1 1 0 7 1 1 23 16 0 2 2 4 1 9 3 8 9 0 1 0 0 2 12 2 1 10 0 625 124 1.12 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.64 0.16 0.16 0.48 4.64 0.64 1.28 16.80 17.44 0.16 0.80 0.64 3.68 0.16 3.68 0.80 10.56 9.92 0.32 0.64 0.48 0.64 0.64 18.88 0.96 0.16 2.88 0.16 100.0 f-' 0\ w �- 164 - LITERATURE CI'J!ED Cahalane, V. H. 1964. A preliminary study of distribution and numbers of cougar, grizzly and wolf in North America. New York Zoological Society, N. Y. Connolly, E. J., Jr. 1949. Food habits and life history of the mountain lion. M. S. Thesis. Univ. Utah. Denton, B. L. and W. L. Kent. 1957. The mountain lion fact and fancy. Colo. Outdoors 6(1):6-11. Dixon, J. 1925. Food predilections of predatory and fur-bearing mammals. J. Mamm. 6:34-46. Douglas, L. H. 1954. Scat! Am. Cattle Producer 36(1):9-12. Hibben, F. C. 1937. A preliminary study of the mountain lion (Felis oregonenis). Univ. New Mex. No. 318. 59 p. Johnson, M. L., and L. K. Counch. 1954. Determination of the abundance of cougar. J. Mamm. 35:255-256. Leopold, A. 1943. Deer irruptions. Trans Wisc. Acad. Sci., Arts and Letters 35:351-66. Lesowski, J. 1963. Two observations of cougar cannibalism. J. Mamm. 44:586. Robinette, W. L., J. S. Gashwiler, and O. W. Morris. 1959. Food habits of the cougar in Utah and Nevada. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 23:261-273. Robinette, W. L., J. S. Gashwiler, and O. W. Morris. 1961. Notes on cougar productivity and life history. J. Mamm. 42:204-217. Young, S. P. 1927. Mountain lion eats its own kittens. J. Mamm. 8:158-160 • --::----,,-----:: • 1945. Mountain lion trapping. Circ. 6, Fish and Wildlife Service, U. S. Dept. Interior, Wash., D. C. 7p. Young, S. P. and E. A. Goldman. 1946. The puma/mysteriOUS American cat. Wildl. Mgmt. Inst. 358 p. Prepared by: Kenneth R. Dixon Student Assistant Date: July, 1967 Approved by: Jack R. Grieb Project Leader Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief � https://cpw.cvlcollections.org/files/original/f64e9b09b91aa83d7e0cc43a5cf14390.pdf 875166001adcf3915a8b63a013980cfd PDF Text Text July, 1967 - 165 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO --------~~~~--------- Project No. W-38-R-21 Work Plan No. 6 Deer-Elk Investigations Job No. 10 Title of Job: Methods of Evaluating Elk Use on Native Pastures During the Spring Period Covered: Personnel: April 1, 1966 through October 15, 1966 David F. Gordon, Raymond J. Boyd, Bertram D. Baker, EdgarJ; Prenzlow ABSTRACT A pasture on private land belonging to Mr. Oris Albertson on upper Poison Creek was selected for study. Thirteen sets of three plots each were established to compare total-use and elk-use-only to total exclosure. All but three of the elk-use-only exclosures were destroyed by cattle using the cylindrical cages as rubbing posts. Analysis of data obtained indicated need for 30 such sets to detect a 250-pound-per-acredifference with 90 percent confidence. , . �- 166 Recommendations: (1) Make a visit to the area in question with Mr. Albertson and have him indicate the pasture he wants used as a study area. (2) See if some agreement can be reached in which Mr. Albertson will not harass elk from this pasture and will keep his cattle and horses off until the elk have gone. (a) If this agreement can be reached it is recommended that the procedure outlined in the PS&E for segment W-38-R-22 be implemented on the area chosen by Mr. Albertson beginning in October 1967. (b) If this agreement cannot be reached, it is recommended that further effort on this study be delayed until such an agreement can be made either with Mr. Albertson or someone else. Objectives: (1) To determine the amount and kind of pasture and meadow grasses eaten by elk in the spring before cattle are turned onto the range. (2) To determine the effects of spring grazing by elk upon native pasture and meadow grasses. Procedures: (1) A review of literature relative to the food habits of elk during the period of the year that the use occurs was conducted. (2) Thirteen sets of three production-utilization plots were established and the species of vegetation in each noted. (a) One pair of each set was established in the fall after the cattle were removed. One plot of each pair was covered with a conical cage and the other left uncovered. (b) In the spring after the elk had left and before the cattle were turned onto the range, one more plot was established and covered with a cylindrical cage. (c) The second fall, the three plots at each station were clipped, the production air-dried and weighed and the cages and stakes moved to new locations. �- 167 - METHODS OF EVALUATING ELK USE ON NATIVE DURING THE SPRING PASTURES David F. Gordon Claims for damage to native pastures by elk in the spring have been submitted from time to time. So far none of these have been honored because the crop is not cultivated. In order to be prepared for the eventuality that such claims will be honored, a study was initiated to determine if elk grazing on native pastures in the spring is damaging to the grass and if so, to what extent. Grateful acknowledgment is given to Ray Boyd for his advice, correspondence with Mr. Oris Albertson concerning the study and assistance in locating plots in the spring. Thanks also is extended to Bert Baker for his assistance in setting out the plots and identifying the species in them and to Ed Prenzlow for his help in clipping the plots. Location and Design of Study In 1957 Mr. Oris Albertson submitted his first claim for damages sustained when elk used his native pasture. A second claim was submitted in 1963. Neither of these were honored. Subsequently he asked that a study of such damage be conducted. The U. S. Forest Service (*Anthony K. Quinkert, 1966 personal communication) conducted an administrative study of the problem on forest land which Albertson leases and found no damage. The location of the study was changed several times to satisfy Mr. Albertson. The Game, Fish and Parks Department was then asked to initiate a study on Albertson's private land and agreed to do so. A trip into the country in question was made and a pasture belonging to Mr. Albertson on upper Poison Creek, Eagle County, Colorado (Fig. 1) was arbitrarily selected after several unsuccessful attempts to contact him. After the study was set up contact was finally made only to find that the location was not his problem area. He was very pessimistic about the study being of any help to him even if it showed he was sustaining damage. Therefore, he said that he would continue to harass the elk from the study field if he thought they were doing him damage. In the fall of 1965, 13 pairs of 9.6-square-foot plots were established (Fig. 2 and 3) and the vegetation listed below identified with the help of Bert Baker. *Anthonly K. Quinkert, District Ranger, White River National Springs, Colorado, April, 1966. Forest, Glenwood �- 168 - Grasses Western wheatgrass Bluegrass Bromegrass Blue grama Agropyron smithi Poa sp. Bromus sp. Boute10ua gracilis Grass-like Sedge Carex sp. False yarrow Yarrow Geranium Common dandelion Herbaceous cinquefoil Violet Composite Chaenactis a1pina Achillea 1anu10sa Geranium sp. Taraxacum officina1e Potenti11a fruticosa Viola sp. Compositae Forbs Table 1.--Weights of vegetation clipped from production - utilization plots on Albertson's pasture on upper Poison Creek, Eagle County, Colorado - 1965. Treatment Plot Number Total Exc10sure grams 1 2 3 4 5 62.8 37.9 84.2 6 69'\1 ----- 63.2 68.4 38.1 54.8 103.3 173.4 131.4 54.1 llA11 cages knocked down and plot grazed. 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Elk Use Only grams ----1.1 60.61/ ----- ----11 ----11 ----11 48.6 ~~:~11 ----11 ----11 ----11 ----11 Total Use grams 7.8 25.0 11.1 8.2 14.9 14.6 9.4 14.1 92.5 34.4 47.1 10.2 �- 169 - .....--. z " ,\ " Z I- ~ >-en IrO >-\0 x,..... "" i "' ~ '-0 co \' \\ \\ p:; .. " ,I' If a. (/) g{ 0 Q. .- ..::t"' ~~,,~ .::;!.:: ) C) ~ = N OJ (/) "' ....• IN ~ "--"' ,.~-:.. »: /: " 'I " ~" 0 ,? 0~ I, " C? " ~" ~+ q Ul OJ QO j It) OJ ~ -> ~~ ,/' q0- (J ,,' I, ," " ~ ~ 17 ~~ ~ ~ .p ~ .f, ~ , '1 Ul cd p., OJ 1\ > 'r! .p cd ~ .,. en ~ OJ ..cl .p CH 0 p., .... u, ~ OW i» .p 'r! ~o) 4 ;j (!) :::> en ( r@' . ., . ,\" • ! 1 J C) 'rI CD ~ > r-l 'It. ••••.•••• Q) ~ ~ 'r! �.•.... " ' "", '" . .. .. 4' -.....~..., "', : ~ .. " \ \ \ + ". .." ~ ••• ... '11, •• ~iI, ' ~.~ .. " ~" -, " ... ~, I, .t. " """. . II~ •• ".\' ~ ,~, 0 t •. . '" '. '. ..... '\\' ~~'... .•.:.r::' • ---~:tl:::::::, , '. .. -...... "lit,_, .." " -.- "'. ".. -~••- "',9>".-. ..- .'. a 0 "~.. .... I .••• .•••..••••• ". - ". \. ' ~ 12 ." •••••••• "'. ". ••, : ' .•' .•.... •••• ~ 0 "~" o ... .., D .~ _ •••••••• -- ...•" 0 .., 0 ••••.•••••• II 0 •• '• +-' -"-l o. . ."<.» '~,.__ 0 0 0 ..~..-.I~..... 9 , -. .... \ 8 .... "'" . '''''' ". "'~ 70: ..... : .... , " .~_ . '_'". ... -'--..'.'" '~' '-.. -=-", "• .0... ..• ' , _. '0. ' -, ... ., ..........' ·0 ,. Figure 2 - Map of the native pasture damage study area on upper Poison Creek (N~, Sec. 4, T3S; R86w, NMPM) showing the location of the production-utilization plots. �- 171 - Fig. 3.-- Photograph of part of the pasture on upper Poison Creek showing the creek and both sides of the valley. �- 172 - Conical cages (Fig. 4) were staked down over one plot of each pair to prevent elk and cattle use. The other plot was left uncovered. The difference in production between these two plots gave a measure of elk use. In the spring after the elk had left one more plot was established and surrounded with a cylindrical cage (Fig. 5) which was staked down. Production from this plot was compared with production from the totally exclosed plot at the same station (Table 1). Fig. 4.--Photograph of a conical cage used in the study on upper Poison Creek - 1966. �- 173 - Fig. 5.-- Photograph of a cylindrical Poison Creek -- 1966. cage used in the study on upper �- 174 - Findings The study field was visited on April 14, 1966 to see if elk were present. There were a few elk pellet-groups, but all were at least a week old. Deer and horse droppings were fresher. The plots were clipped the week before hunting season. Unfortunately all but three of the cylindrical cages had been knocked down and the grass grazed. Only one of the conical cages had been uprooted. Conclusions No conclusions on the effect of elk use on forage production can be reached because of the removal of so many cages and the short time the elk used the pasture. The cylindrical cages were very convenient rubbing posts for cattle and the stakes were not firmly enough planted to hold the cages down against such stress. Conical cages were far less severely used probably because their sloping sides were not efficient rubbing posts. Stakes that were driven into the ground in the fall seemed to hold better than those set in the spring. Statistical analysis of the data indicated that 30 stations of three plots each would allow 90 percent confidence in detecting a difference of 250 pounds of forage per acre. Prepared by: David F. Gordon Wildlife Researcher Candidate Date: July, 1967 Approved by: Jack R. Grieb Project Leader Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief �July, 1967 - 175 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO --------~~~~-------- Project No. Deer-Elk Investigations W-38-R-21 Work Plan No. 6 -------------------- Job No. 11 . I Title of Job: Evaluation of Deer Use on Alfalfa Uhder Different Irrigation Rates: Period Covered: Personnel: Raymond J. Boyd, David F. Gordon, Edgar J. Prenzlow, Michael L. Head ABSTRACT Vegetation from eight pairs of plots, 9.6-square-feet in area, were clipped from an alfalfa field, air-dried and weighed to determine if grazing by deer in the spring had an effect on the production of alfalfa hay. No statistically significant differences could be detected between the protected and unprotected plots at the .05 level. Sample size calculations indicated that 58 pairs of plots would be needed to achieve 90 percent accuracy at the 95 percent level. ' �- 176 - Recommendations: (1) Continue this study for at least two more years at the present location. (2) Permanently mark all plots so that the same ones can be clipped each year. This will increase the sample size by incorporating years in the analysis. (3) Delete the objective to determine the moisture content of the soil. (4) Attempt to locate other alfalfa fields where greater grazing pressure by deer is available, and set up similar studies on these fields. Objectives: (1) To determine the relative production in pounds of hay per acre between fenced and unfenced study plots in alfalfa fields that are grazed by deer in the spring. (a) One field to receive adequate irrigation. (b) One field to receive inadequate irrigation. (2) To determine the moisture content of the soil in the study area during the growing season. (3) To determine meteorological data (air temperature and relative-humidity) at the study area. (4) To determine the number of deer and the time of greatest grazing use on ·the study fields. Procedures: (1) Eight pairs of 9.6-square-foot plots, one fenced and the other open, were established for production and utilization estimates in an alfalfa field. (a) The center of each plot was marked with a 4-foot electric fence post and one plot of each pair covered with a conical cage. (b) The field was irrigated adequately. (c) The vegetation from each plot was clipped and sacked at the time of first cutting. The samples were air-dried and weighed to show differences between grazed and ungrazed plots. The stakes and cones were removed at the time of clipping. (2) An aerial photo of the field was obtained for acreage determination. �- 177 - EVALUATION OF DEER USE ON ALFALFA UNDER DIFFER~NT IRRIGATION RATES David F. Gordon On July 6, 1966 in an alfalfa field of approximately 11.5 acres at the Little Hills Game Experiment Station, eight plots of alfalfa that had been protected from deer grazing by conical cages and eight plots that had been unprotected were clipped and the vegetation saved for drying and weighing. Mike Head of the experiment station staff assisted with the clipping. All samples were stored in the warehouse at the Southwest Regional office in Montrose, Colorado where they were distributed to allow good air circulation to each sack. The dry samples were weighed (Table 1) to the nearest gram on January 5, 1967. Table l.--Weights of alfalfa samples from eight pairs of 9.6-square-foot plots located at Little Hills Game Experiment Station, Meeker, Colorado, 1966. Weight in Grams Plot Unprotected from Protected from Grazing by Deer Number Grazing by Deer 382 355 1 633 552 2 393 3 677 491 439 4 685 440 5 549 324 6 186 544 7 490 473 8 Total 3,833 3,730 Statistical analysis of these data showed that no significant difference could be detected at the 95 percent confidence level (T = 0.2786, + .05 = 2.365 7 D.F.) We felt that it was important to determine the sample size needed for several levels of confidence. Accordingly, sample size calculations were run and are listed in Table 2. �- 178 - Table 2.--Number of samples needed to detect differenced in production 95 percent of the time - Alfalfa Clip Plot Data. Colorado. 1966. Level of Number of Plots Confidence Protected Unprotected 95% 100 232 90% 25 58 85% 12 26 80% 7 15 A shortage of man-power and time did not permit the installation of soi1moisture stacks or counts of deer during this segment. No meteorological data was obtained because a working hygro-thermograph was not available. It is recommended that no soil-moisture data be obtained in this study because only two levels of irrigation, adequate and none, are to be used. Prepared by: Date: David F. Gordon Wildlife Researcher Candidate J_u_l~y~,_1_96 __ 7 _ Approved by: Jack R. Grieb Project Leader Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief �July, 1967 - 179 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO ------~~~~~-------- Project No. W-38-R-2l Work Plan No. 6 Deer-Elk Investigations Job No. 12 Title of Job: Methods of Determining the Effects of Spring Grazing by Deer on Crested Wheatgrass Pastures Period Covered: Personnel: April 1, 1966 through September 30, 1966 Raymond J. Boyd, David F. Gordon, Edgar J. Prenzlowand Michael L. Head ABSTRACT Vegetation from nine pairs of plots, 9.6-square-feet in area, were clipped from a crested wheatgrass field, air-dried and weighed to determine if grazing by deer had an effect on the production. No statistically significant differences could be detected between the protected and unprotected plots at the .05 lev~l. Sample size calculations indicated that 45 pairs of plots would be needed to achieve 90 percent accuracy. �- 180 - Recommendations: (1) Continue this study for at least two more years at the present location. (2) Permanently mark all plots so that the same plots can be clipped each year. This will increase the sample size by incorporating years in the analysis. Objectives: (1) To determine the relative production in pounds of grass per acre between fenced and unfenced study plots in crested wheat grass pastures that are grazed by deer in the spring. (2) To determine the moisture the growing season. (3) To determine meteorological data (air temperature humidity) at the study area. (4) To determine the number of deer and the time of greatest grazing use on the study fields. content of the soil in the study area during and re1ative- . Procedures: (1) (2) Nine pairs of 9.6-square-foot plots, one fenced and the other open, grouped in clusters of three pairs each were established for production and utilization estimates in a crested wheatgrass pasture. (a) The center of each plot was marked with a 4-foot, electric fence post and one plot of each pair covered with a conical cage. (b) The vegetation from each plot was clipped and sacked at the time of first cutting. The samples were air-dried and weighed to show differences between grazed and ungrazed plots. The stakes and cones were removed at the time of clipping. An aerial photo of the field was obtained for acreage determinations. �- 181 - METHODS OF DETERMINING THE EFFECTS OF SPRING GRAZING BY DEER ON CRESTED WHEATGRASS PASTURES David F. Gordon On August 1 and 2, 1966 in a field of crested wheatgrass of approximately six acres at Little Hills Game Experiment Station, nine plots that had been protected from grazing by deer by conical cages and nine plots that had been unprotected were clipped and the vegetation saved for drying and weighing. Mike Head of the experiment station staff assisted with the clipping. All of the samples were stored in the warehouse at the Southwest Regional office in Montrose, Colorado where they were distributed to allow good air circulation to each sack. The dry samples were weighed (Table 1) to the nearest gram on January 5, 1967. Table l.--Weights of crested wheatgrass samples from nine pairs of 9.6square-foot plots located at Little Hills Game Experiment Station, Meeker, Colorado, 1966. Weight in Grams Plot Number Protected from Grazing by Deer Unprotected from Grazing by Deer 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 327 194 129 92 136 94 90 97 90 234 138 190 62 63 61 60 59 97 Totals 1,249 964 Statistical analysis of these data indicated that no significant difference could be detected at the 95 percent level using a Paired "T" Test (t = 0.9268, t 05 = 2.306, 8 df.). We also felt that it was important to determine what sample size would be needed to detect several degrees of difference in production at the 95 percent level, accordingly, sample size calculations were run on the data and are listed below in Table 2. �- 1812 - Table 2.--Number of samples needed to detect differences in production 95 percent of the t~me, four levels of confidence - Crested Wheatgrass Clip Plot Data, Colorado, 1966. Number of Plots Level of Confidence 95% 90% 85% 80% Protected Unprotected 605 151 67 714 178 79 45 38 A shortage of man-power and time prevented the installation of soil-moisture stacks and nightly counts of deer during the segment. No meteorological data was obtained because a working hygro-thermograph was not available. Prepared by: David F. Gordon Wildlife Researcher Candidate Date: July, 1967 Approved by: Jack R. Grieb Project Leader Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief �July, 1967 - 183 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO --------~~~~--------- Project No. W-38-R-21 Work Plan No. 6 Deer-Elk Investigations Job No. Title of Job: Evaluation of the Effects of Deer and Rodent Use on Pinto Bean Production Period Covered: April 1, 1966 through October 15, 1966 Personnel: David F. Gordon, Raymond J. Boyd, R. Bruce Gill, Millard E. Graham and Terry Dicken. ABSTRACT The job of refencing the study field to fit the new design took until the first week of August. Therefore no data on production was obtained. During the fence building activity no deer tracks were observed in or ar0Hti-4p'pefield. By harvest time the tracks were numerous over the entire fiel~: ~abbit sign was profuse all summer. No porcupine sign was observed i~ the field. The species of small mammals trapped around the field was almost identical with last segment exc~pt for Onychomys leucogaster' instead of Citellus spilosoma. Pr-ecLp Lt.at.Lon m;s not as heavy as in 1965 and erosion less severe. �- 184 - Objectives: (1) To determine the effects of grazing by deer, rabbits and porcupines upon pinto bean production. (2) To determine the correlation between grazing use and available moisture, and its effect upon pinto bean production. (3) To determine area. (4) To determine the species and density of mammals and porcupines in the area. the daily temperature and relative humidity soil- at the study smaller than rabbits Procedures: (1) A field of pinto beans of about 10 acres was treated as follows (Fig. 1): (a) (b) Divided into quarters for replication of treatment. Four plots, 28.5 x 325 feet, established in each quarter and treated as follows: (1) (2) (3) (4) (c) The fences were constructed (1) (2) (3) (4) (d) (e) (f) (g) One unfenced. One surrounded with a woven-wire fence 39-inches high, the lower portion of which was covered by l-inch-mesh poultry netting 36-inches wide. One surrounded with a woven-wire fence 78-inches wide raised about 4-9 inches off the ground. One surrounded with a woven-wire fence 78-inches high, the lower portion of which was covered by l-inch-mesh poultry netting 36-inches wide. as follows: Creosote posts set at each corner of each plot. Woven-wire stapled to corner posts and hung on steel posts spaced 10-feet apart. Poultry netting attached to woven-wire with hog rings. Removable gates were to be placed at each end of each plot. Gates were to be removed and replaced at each cultivation and at time of cutting. Gates were to be removed just prior to harvesting and will be replaced just after planting. The field was to be sampled at harvest by collecting the beans from each plot as they came through the comb~ne. These data were to be analyzed by analysis of variance and covariance. (2) Data on temperature and relative-humidity was obtained by a recording hygro-thermograph installed at the study field. (3) An inventory of small mammal species around the field was taken. �- 185 - EVALUATION OF THE EFFECTS OF DEER AND RODENT USE ON PINTO BEAN PRODUCTION David F. Gordon There was no data gathered this segment on bean production because it took until the first week of August to complete fencing of all plots~ This has the advantage that the deer will be used to these structures in the field when the actual study begins. The cooperation of the Dickens is most gratefully acknowledged. Mr. Dicken has very graciously accommodated his schedule to ours, put up with the inconvenience of fences in his field, changed charts on the hygro-thermograph when our personnel could not be present and willingly helped with the collection of samples at harvest. Method of Fencing The job of setting up the study took longer than was anticipated. Before the beans were planted, last year's fences were removed. The same material was used over again as part of the new plot fences. Before all fences were complete, the beans had set and it was rather difficult to stretch the wire without damaging the beans. To accomplish this, a roll of woven-wire was mounted on a bar across the back of a pickup. One end was stapled to a corner post and the truck driven down the field between the bean rows. As the wire unrolled it was leaned up against the fence posts by two men. This way it did a minimum of damage to the bean plants. Findings During the fence building operations there were no signs of deer, (Odocoi1eus hemoinus) in the field. On June 28, 1966, the day we began setting corner posts, the tracks of one deer were seen at the edge of the northeast quarter (Fig. 1). Cottontails (Sy1vi1agus sp.) and jackrabbits (Lepus sp.) were all over the field all summer. No porcupine (Erethizon dorsatum) sign was observed in the field but some pinyon trees (Pinus edu1is) were barked just west of the field. Mrs. Dicken voiced doubt that the deer would even visit the field after the fences were completed. She reasoned the fences would frighten them. With that in mind I specifically looked for deer sign several times through the summer. The last work on the fences was done on August 3 (Fig. 2). At that time no deer sign had been seen in the field. On August 24-26 the field was again checked in conjunction with the small mammal trapping. There were a few tracks in the field. On September 22, just before the beans were threshed, the field was visited again and this time there were tracks in every quarter. The tracks had been made at different times during the previous month. One pellet-group was noted just west of the field where it had not been earlier in the summer. �- 186 - N R - Rodent Exclosure .0 - Deer Exclosure T - Total Exclolur. Figure 1 - Map of the study field of pinto beans at Egnar indicating location of the plots and their treatment. �- 187 - Fig. 2 -- Photograph of the fencing in the pinto bean damage study field. ��July, 1967 - 189 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO ------~~~~~-------- Project No. W-38-R-2l Work Plan No. llA Deer-Elk Investigations Job No. 4 Title of Job: Elk Seasonal Movements, Rocky Mountain Park Period Covered: April 1, 1966 to March 31, 1967 Personnel: Richard N. Denney, Raymond J. Boyd, Edmund Bucknall, Walter Schuett, Paul F. Gilbert, Judd Cooney, L. Dale Hibbs, George D. Bear, and R. Bruce Gill ABSTRACT Fifty eight additional elk were trapped and neckbanded during the winter of 1966-67. Analysis of reported sightings of Park banded elk revealed that the majority of the Park elk winter within the Park boundaries. Severity of the winter, especially snow depth, determines how many Park elk winter outside the Park. Migration to summer ranges begins in mid-May and is completed by nud-July. Elk which summer west of the Park tend to concentrate in the bottomland areas of the upper Colorado River during the month of June before migrating up to alpine summering areas. Five major summering areas were identified within the Park and four outside the Park. The return migration to wintering areas begins in October with another period of concentration in the upper Colorado River bottoms occurring at this time. The timing of the fall migration is related to October precipitation (presumabley snow) falling on summer ranges. It was concluded that the regular big game hunting season occurs too late to accomplish a consistent harvest of Park elk. �- 190 - Recommendations.--Hold an experimental elk season in areas outside the Park where Park-banded elk have been observed to concentrate during the summer. This season should occur in September before Park elk migrate back across the Park boundaries. Objectives: (1) Determine the normal seasonal movements herd, and general migration routes. (2) Determine (3) Determine the correlations, if any, between meteorological phenological phenomena with individual and herd behavior. the movements of individual of the sub-units of the elk elk between herds and drainages. and Procedures: (1) Determine the distances and directions of movements from the previous observations made during monthly fixed-wing airplane flights through field and aerial observations of herd units on seasonal ranges. (2) Construct and operate cooperatively with the Park Service and Forest Service two or more group live traps to neckband as many elk as possible on as many different trapsites as feasible on winter concentration areas in Rocky Mountain National Park and adjoining National Forests. Different colored collars will be used at each trapsite so that movement and integration of herd sub-units can be ascertained, based on observations by field personnel in the area, and on aerial observations. Each collared elk will be tagged in each ear, serially numbered, so as to permit identification upon recovery through harvesting or other means. (3) Weather station data at the Rocky Mountain National Park headquarters and other established stations will be compared with observed herd behavior and coincidental phenological observations as to time and rate of development of plants in relationship to snow recession and temperatures to see if correlations exist between these various factors. �- 191 - ELK SEASONAL MOVEMENTS R. Bruce Gill Introduction One of the most pressing problems affecting management of the Rocky Mountain National Park elk herd is that of increasing herd size and declining winter range condition. The urgency of this problem coupled with a general lack of specific information concerning seasonal movements and population dynamics of the Park herd prompted the inception of the Rocky Mountain National Park Cooperative Elk Study Program in 1962 with the National Park Service, the U. S. Forest Service, and the Game, Fish and Parks Department. The National Park Service realized the necessity for some kind of population control as early as 1943 when the first animal reduction program was initiated within Rocky Mountain National Park. This program was discontinued in 1944 because of a general lack of public support and minimal success of the operation. Reduction was resumed in 1949 and continued until 1962 when increasing public disfavor of direct reduction programs prompted a halt in the program. The seasonal movements segment of the Rocky Mountain National Park Cooperative Elk Study was begun to determine if there was any period during the year when sufficient numbers of elk were located outside the Park boundaries to allow hunters to harvest Park herd surpluses. Results of this study are summarized in the following report. Trapping and Banding Fifty-eight Park elk were trapped and neckbanded in Rocky Mountain National Park during the winter of 1966-67 (excluding retraps of previously banded elk) • Fifteen of these were banded \lith orange neckbands at the Horseshoe Park trapsite, and 43 were banded with white neckbands at the Moraine Park trapsite (Fig. 1). This raises the estimated total number of Park-banded elk in the field to 239 as of March 31, 1967 (excluding known losses) (Table 1). Seasonal Movements Winter Distribution.--Since the winter of 1962-63 an intensive trapping and banding program has been conducted within Rocky Mountain National Park on major elk winter range areas. Data on post-banding distributions have been accumulating since January, 1963 and sufficient information is available now to permit a more detailed delineation of the seasonal ranges of this herd. Guse et ale (1965) briefly described the seasonal ranges of the Park herd, but they were not specific in their descriptions. Most of the Park elk winter ranges are located on the east side of the Continental Divide primarily in Horseshoe Park, Moraine Park, Hallowell Park, and Beaver Meadows. During relatively mild winters most Park elk �I - 19L7 JA.;;UAi1Y - ::':;';'\CB, 19(3 : " Crags ,n ,;.;;~ -IP ,"<'" ' ::;«<:~.~. ~:~--:>:::"'" r, I.o"hu .. :. - " '.' ~ Crystal ~ Storm Mtn. t<: "'-:' .. ~ .. ' /~ ~~ " .x-<"< 'c (!y::" :/.~:': :{it~' .{ ~"l ~ ~~ ~..\,::, ., t; Crosier ••.• rseshoe Mtn. Mtn. o Park 'j\ )i~ p"/ )'., Pcriko ./ 3;./ :" .. . ';,'1 , 'It .. n. .. / r. , '-"'"\. .', .. (',: "\ . ;.('_}'1 .'~.. .('." ~ ~~ ',(J tJ V. 1,;,~ 1 . ~) •. " il. ,,<; .,.' fj 1J ~p \ J a \ :i ?,r , ~ f'orp:1Yry~:-- ;~ 1, ) :,\' Pl< ':'-'"""i\ .'1 •..• ,.' , / :~;\::l ' h Area t:. .-----' •• 0 \ --~ c.>: ..;:',/ ~<:(RI'/,' j/ ~ ''-~-./ ~ ./ ... r.. \ '-.:' /'/ ij, 1 •• [\) . ,,/.....,... +-, C,<Jilily H,JS. ":, . , •"'-' , ~, ) > ~,\ "''''-'.' •= • = • = \~ sightingsof elk banded inside Rocky Mountain National Park si~htin¥s of elk banied by he Li.cop v er in :,o.::1.dle Park location of trapping area •.' ,,' 'I ~(nnl)y .' . .. : \0 "- .~~'-O~'. .f:';\_ ss»> C}= major Rocky major Rocky f-' .' '-'-", : 'L)= ,/, •.... "" ,'\!/' "--. IIfcw (' r' . Sisters ) ~~ . , Aroa ~ F ~ G' '\~(.'" Lake ~ • TVlIn L~i't s. '\ . (( tJ:) !)iilfJ ~',\ I~,"~ -..'. 1~\J;~,J ~ . • ;:.,~-"("":l.:!n :~"""" ., ~ "-.-'" " , ,,. /1", ( ... .. ,.\'''',., ,\',,"'" ~ "<:» 11"'" ~:J / \ .", , • . '\.o:'r'~'U;:--'-q . .(f1:::""~~i ~ .. Olympus elk SQ~ner range within I·IJuntainNational Park elk i.;interrange inthin :'lountainNa ti :mal Park F;i.gure1 - Summary of January - :March sightings of banded elk observed outside Rocky Mountain National Park, 1963-1967. �- 193 - Table l.--Sex and age of elk trapped in Rocky Mountain National Park, 1966-67. ~o. Trap Site Neckband Color Ear Tag No. Right Left 1 Moraine Park White 2 Moraine Park White 3 Moraine Park White 4 Moraine Park White 5 Moraine Park White 6 Moraine Park White 7 Moraine Park White 8 Moraine Park White 9 Moraine Park White 10 Moraine Park White 11 Moraine Park White 12 Moraine Park White 13 Moraine Park White 14 Moraine Park White 15 Moraine Park White 16 Moraine Park White 17 Moraine Park White 18 Moraine Park White 19 Moraine Park White 20 Moraine Park White 21 Moraine Park White 22 Moraine Park White 23 Moraine Park White 24 Moraine Park White 25 Moraine Park White Round 530 Round 531 Round 532 Round 533 Round 534 Round 535 Round 537 Round 538 Round 539 Round 540 Round 541 Round 542 Round 543 Round 544 Round 546 Round 547 Round 548 Round 549 Round 550 Round 551 Round 552 Round 553 Round 554 Round 555 Round 556 Strap 530 Strap 531 Strap 532 Strap 533 Strap 534 Strap 535 Strap 537 Strap 538 Strap 539 Strap 540 Strap 541 Strap 542 Strap 543 Strap 544 Strap 546 Strap 547 Strap 548 Strap 549 Strap 550 Strap 551 Strap 552 Strap 553 Strap 554 Strap 555 Strap 556 Sex Age Date F Mat. 11/17/66 M calf 11/17/66 F calf 11/17/66 M calf 12/ 5/66 F Mat. 12/ 5/66 M 1~ 12/ 5/66 F Mat. 12/ 5/66 F Mat. 12/ 8/66 F Mat. 12/ 8/66 F calf 12/ 8/66 F Mat. 12/ 8/66 F Mat. ·12/ 8/66 F calf 12/ 8/66 F calf 12/ 8/66 M 1~ 12/12/66 F Mat. 12/12/66 M 1~ 12/12/66 M 1~ 12/14/66 M 1~ 1/ 9/67 M H 1/ 9/67 F Mat. 1/ 9/67 F Mat. 1/ 9/67 F Mat. 1/ 9/67 F calf 1/ 9/67 F Mat. 1/ 9/67 �- 194 - Table 1.--Sex and age of elk trapped in Rocky Mountain National Park, (Continued) Neckband Ear Tag No. No. Trap Site Color Right Left Sex Age 1}z 26. Moraine Park White Round Strap M 557 557 Moraine Park White 27 Round Strap F Mat. 558 558 29 Moraine Park White F Round Strap calf 559 559 Moraine Park White MatG 30 Round Strap F 560 560 31 Moraine Park White Round Strap F calf 561 561 1}z Moraine Park Round Strap 32 None M 562 562 Moraine Park White Round Strap F Mat. 33 563 563 Moraine Park White Round Strap M calf 34 564 564 F Moraine Park None Round Strap calf 35 565 565 White Moraine Park Round Strap M calf 36 566 566 White Round Strap F calf Moraine Park 37 567 567 Moraine Park White Round Strap F calf 38 568 568 1}z White Round Strap M Moraine Park 39 569 569 F calf White Round Strap Moraine Park 40 570 570 F White Round Strap Moraine Park Mat. 41 571 571 Mat White F Moraine Park Round Strap 42 572 572 F Moraine Park' White Round Strap calf 43 573 573 1}z Round Strap M Moraine Park White 44 574 574 calf 11 Orange Round Strap Horseshoe Park 1 126 126 F calf Orange Round Strap Horseshoe Park 2 127 127 Round Strap M Horseshoe Park Orange 4-5 3 128 128 M Orange Round Strap Horseshoe Park 7-8 4 129 129 F Orange Round Strap 3-4 Horseshoe Park 5 130 130 F Mat. Orange Round Strap Horseshoe Park 6 131 131 0 1966-67. Date 1/ 9/67 1/ 9/67 1/ 9/67 1/ 9/67 1/ 9/67 1/ 9/67 1/17/67 1/17/67 1/17/67 1/17/67 1/17/67 1/17/67 1/17/67 1/17/67 1/31/67 1/31/67 1/31/67 1/31/67 10/30/66 10/30/66 10/31/66 11/ 1/66 11/ 8/66 11/18/66 �- 195 - Table 1.--Sex and age of elk trapped in Rocky Mountain National Park, 1966-67. (Continued) No. 7 Trap Site Horseshoe Park Neckband Color None 8 Horseshoe Park Orange 9 Horseshoe Park Orange 10 Horseshoe Park Orange 11 Horseshoe Park Orange 12 Horseshoe Park Orange 13 Horseshoe Park Orange 14 Horseshoe Park Orange 15 Horseshoe Park Orange Ear Tag No. Right Left Round None 132 Round Strap 133 133 Round Strap 134 134 Round Strap 135 135 Round Strap 136 136 Round Strap 138 138 Round Strap 139 139 Round Strap 140 140 Round Strap 142 142 Sex M Age l~ Date 11/18/66 M l~ 11/18/66 F Mat. 12/ 7/66 F Mat. 12/ 7/66 M l~ 12/ 7/66 M 2~ 1/19/67 M 3~ 1/19/67 M Mat. 1/27/67 M 3~ 2/ 2/67 apparently winter within the Park boundaries. Only during the period JanuaryMarch, 1963 were significant numbers of banded elk observed outside the Park on the east side. During this period 13 banded elk were reported east of the Park as compared to one in 1964, five in 1965, one in 1966, and two in 1967. The low number of winter sightings of banded elk east of the Park appears to be related to two factors: (1) relatively dry, snow-free winters which permit the elk to remain within the Park boundaries and (2) location of trapsites in areas which fail to band those portions of the herd most likely to winter outside the Park. Relative to the first factor, 1963 was the only year during the study period when th /tota1 precipitation during the January-March period exceeded 1.5 inches.In all other years this total was less than 1.3 inches (Table 2). Relative to the second factor, only two trapsites currently are being used in Rocky Mountain National Park, these are the Horseshoe and Moraine Park traps. Banded elk from these two trapsites use the Fall River, Forest Canyon, Roaring River, and Glacier Creek drainages as migration routes, but elk which summer in areas of the northeastern corner of the Park apparently do not winter on the HorseshoeMoraine Park ranges and, consequently, are not captured during regular trapping operations. r There is evidence that some of these elk move out of summer range areas in the Mt. Dickinson, Mt. Dunraven, and Mt. Tileston areas via the North Fork of the Big Thompson River, West Creek, Cow Creek, and Black Canyon Creek drainages. Mr. Frank McGraw of the McGraw Ranch located on Cow Creek just east of the Park boundary has reported herds of elk regularly migrate down Cow Creek past his ranch, presumably to winter on Crosier Mountain. 11 Weather data taken from the Estes Park weather station. �If trapsites were constructed along migrations routes in these areas it might be demonstrated that considerably more Park elk winter east of the Park than current observations indicateo Observations of banded elk within the Park indicate that there is considerable mixing of the wintering populations in the Horseshoe-Moraine Park areas. Elk banded at each of these two trapsites have frequently been seen with elk banded at the other trapsite. In general, however, elk banded at the Moraine Park trap are more likely to be seen outside the Park than those banded at Horseshoe Park. Only a small portion of the Park elk winter west of the Continental Divide with the majority of these wintering in the Colorado River bottomlands north of Granby. Occasionally Park banded elk have been observed with elk wintering in the vicinity of Willow Creek Reservoir (Figo 1). The number of Park-banded elk observed west of the Park during the period January-March appears to be related to the amount of precipitation (presumably snow) falling in alpine areas during the preceding period of October-December. In January-March, 1965 three Park-banded elk were observed west of the Continental Divide, and for the same period in 1967 four banded elk were observed. The corresponding periods of October-December~ 1964 and 1966 were the only two October-Decem~Tr periods of the study that total precipitation exceeded 4.00 inches. - (Table 2). It was concluded that early, heavy snow accumulation accompanied by low temperatures produced effective barriers to the late migrating portions of the Park herd, thus preventing them from completing normal migrations patterns across the Continental Divide to winter ranges on the east side. Migration to Summer Ranges.--Guse et ale (1965) reported that Park elk begin migration over the Continental Divide to surrrrner ranges in mid-April, however, observations made during April-May, 1966 indicated that the majority of migrants do not begin leaving wintering areas until mid-May (Gill, 1966). Most early migrants move over the Continental Divide down into the upper Colorado River bott.oml.ands(Fig. 2). They remain in these areas until after the calvtRs period is concluded in June and subsequently move into alpine summering areas during latter June to the first half of July. The most commonly used migration routes from winter trapsites to summering areas and vice-ver$a are shown in Figure 3 0 At least three factors appear to be related to the timing of these movements from the Colorado River bottomlands to alpine summering areas: (1) peak of the insect hatch (in bottomland areas) normally occurs between the last two weeks in June to the first two weeks in July; (2) June marks the beginning of the tourist influx into Rocky Mountain National Park building to peak numbers by the fourth of July. This increased traffic and visitor activity along Highway 34 could cause elk to move upward to less frequented locales; and (3) July-September is the normal growing season for most alpine plants and the period when they provide the most nutritious forage. Distances traveled from wintering to summering areas vary from 2~ to l8~ airline miles within the Park and as far as 37~ airline miles outside the ~J Weather data taken from the National Park Service Weather Station~ I mile N. W. of Grand Lake, Colorado. �Table 2e--Summary Year 1962 1963 1964 1965 1966 of Rocky Mountain National Park weather data, 1962-1966. Location of Station Jan. . Temp. Grand Lake Estes Park Grand Lake Estes Park Grand Lake Estes Park Grand Lake Estes Park Grand Lake Estes Park -----o 34.1 F 40.50F 28.7oF 36.8oF 3L90F 38.90F 33.2oF 41.6oF - Mar. Pcpt. Apr. Temp. June - Pcpt. July Temp. --- --- --- --- --4.98 in. 1.59 in. 4.98 in. 1.21 in. 5.59 in. 0.98 in. 2.23 in. 1.16 in. --- 62.1oF 65.1oF 58.0oF 61.2oF 57.2oF 60.8oF 59.2oF 64.4oF --4.88 in. 5.06 in. 5.94 in. 3.87 in. 5.08 in. 6.33 in. 4.28 in. 3.27 in. --- 74.1oF 76.5OF 72.50F 75.8oF 67.6oF 71.3OF 72. 1°F 75.6oF - Sept. Pcpt. ----6.73 in. 6.44 in. 5.74 in. 3.41 in. 7.62 in. 6.25 in. 4.61 in. 5.61 in. Oct. Temp. 47.1oF 53.0oF 47.7oF 53.0oF 43.4oF 48.90F 46.2oF 53.1oF 42.6oF 50. 6°F - Dec • Pcpt. 1.89 in. 1.12 in. 1.71 in. 0.97 in. 4.59 in. 1023 in. 3.61 in. 0.95 in. 4.29 in. 0.99 in. I-' \.0 -..J �4> ? Crystal Min. ~ APRIL - JuNE, 1963 - 1967 Storm Mtn. ~ (£jJjJ) . . ~ ; . .. ~ . 'seShoG:':k ~ NTAIN " Moose Mtn. i/;f Sisters I-' \0 co (' ( • = sightings of elk banded inside Rocky Hountain National Park s i zh td.nz s of elk banded by • = heJ:icopter in [{idUe Park • = location of trapping area ft:j- &P - major- elk sunmer- range Hithin Rocky Eountain National Park c:J= major elk winter range within Rocky Hount.a.Ln National Park Figure 2 - Summary of Ap~il - June sightings of Park banded elk observed outside Rocky Mountain National Park and sightings of Granby banded elk observed with Park banded elk, 1963-1967. �.(p ? Crystal Mtn. Storm ~n. Crosier Mtn. e <, ~'~. , \. ';..! ='. ~ \~ ~ L Moose Mtn. i/! ~. Twin Sisters {' ( Granby Trappin Area • Troublesome Trap ping .Ie Area $igure 3 - Probable migration routes of Park elk to and from summering areas. I-' \0 \0 �- 200 - Park. However, in most cases the nature of the terrain necessitates travelling at least twice the airline mileage between winter and summer ranges. Summer Distribution.--Most elk migrating from winter to summer ranges concentrate in five major summering areas within the Park, these are: (1) the Mirror Lake-Mummy Pass Area; (2) the Flatiron Mountain-Mount Chapin area; (3) the Specimen Mountain area; (4) the Forest Canyon Pass-Gorge Lakes area; and (5) the Nakai Peak-Snowdrift Peak area. There are other areas within the Park with lesser concentrations of elk, but all these areas where banded elk have been observed are located in the northern 'twothirds of the Park (Fig. 4). Banded elk sightings indicate that a significant number of Park-banded elk move outside the Park to summer. These areas are located primarily north and west of the Park and can be grouped into four general locations: (1) the Browns Lake-Comanche Peak area; (2) the Flattop Mountain-Thunder Pass area; (3) the Cascade Mountain-Parkview Mountain area; and (4) the Porphyry Peaks-Gravel Mountain area (Fig. 4). To date, there have been only two reports of Park-banded elk observed south of the Colorado River in Middle Park. A sheepherder reported seeing four Park-banded elk at the headwaters of the South Fork of the Williams Fork River in August, 1965, and a hunter reported another Park-banded elk between Beaver Creek and Little Muddy Creek just north of Church Park in October, 1966. Migration to Winter Ranges.--The reverse migration to winter range areas usually begins in October. Elk which have summered west of the Park again begin to concentrate in or near the upper Colorado River bottoms for a short period before recrossing the Continental Divide (Fig. ·5). Timing of the migration of Park elk back into the Park appears to be related to the precipitatio~/occurring in October. In 1963 the October precipitation was 0.37 inches - and two Park-banded elk were harvested during the regular season. In 1965 October precipitation was 0.10 inches and nine Park-banded elk were harvested. Compare these observations with 1966 when 1.30 inches of precipitation fell in October and no Park elk were harvested (Table 3). In 1966 five inches of snow were recorded at the Park Service's Grand Lake weather station during the period October 1-14 prior to the opening of big game season. Fixed-wing flights were conducted over summering areas both within and outside the Park during this period, and every elk observed was seen in areas bordering the upper limits of winter ranges. Tracks of elk within the Park were followed and the majority of these moved out of the alpine summering areas immediately after the first major snowstorm on October 3-4, 1966. They were subsequently located just above the Horseshoe Park trap on the east side of the Continental Divide. The relationship between the number of Park-banded elk killed during the regular big game hunting season and October precipitation is significant when one considers the major objective of the study. It seems that if a consistent harvest of Park elk is one of the management objectives for this herd, then the season must occur earlier than the current mid-October �;-<~,« < « <{ee,' 47 ««<'<'1 1963 - 1966 JULY - SSPl'E~'illER. , .(o1U ~'o' Crags I ik (§S) ~ -).~ '5Oshoe 1l 'i"i '§. i!1::...~ e. :.~ .\ r'\ ~..•• , / ./ 7,J~'f< ,'"I \'j R\ ,. 'l; ;{) !} .) '. {j. \\ IJ ". t'.J ' orphyry Pk S.·• II~~ "0 ., I I '-: G '1.:\ , 1 \ I \ c \Willow o . 'ii' op Ding Area .._.~ " ... p ~' -.,i-.5;;cll ~ , ~ ~.,~ rcnoy T Co in' Are ,.r. ~.:.:: /, •..• :~ranbY· '>" t/\ '\ ~ \ ~ '-~ Q Si;::rs ~ ( r:: \ ( , / " ,,,,,,,-,, .~-...." II .~"""" ,,""n" '\~ • • = sightings of elk banded inside Rocky Mountain National Park = sithtin~s of elk banded by he icop er in ~liddle Park = location of trapping area • &9. I t.l,)o:.;; ~.lln. ~.~~ !.'.~ Twin 'l< . r(~~e C8 ~t'.:l " ,~ ~ 0 ~ ~ "'~1 <' ., . ~ .. T(QU o!;:;:;omi) ,. ". r'~"~ ,,'~ .",'. 3)' IJ~.., ., ." Park M . ".,.'/ .-:" .. '2ki"'_,11 '1 '. .i:'t ""r'.,~ \ 'd: W..· / ~Lf..J< </" ....,J<'<"::':"::'''--'-' <': '" """- "\. Crosier r.iln. ~ ~ 1 <;;.--,,1 Wn. .c, ,.<0;:")., '·":1 Mtn, Storm Mtn, ~ ~',,11/-<~~~d!iJ ~ '-', ~ Crystal - major elk surr~er range within Rocky Mountain National Park elk winter range within o = major Rocky Mountain National Park F~gvre 4 - Summary of July - September sightings of Park-banded elk observed outside Rocky Mountain National Park and sightingsof Granby-banded elk observed with Park elk, 1963-1966. f\) o I-' ��- 203 - Table 3.--Relationship of October precipitation to the number of Parkbanded elk killed during regular big game hunting season. Year October Precipitation Banded Elk Harvested 1963 1964 1965 1966 0.37 in. 0.23 in. 0.10 in. 1.30 in. 2 3 9 0 opening date in order to be certain that Park elk will still be outside the Park during the season. It is recommended, therefore, that an earlier season in September be tested on an experimental basis to determine its effectiveness in harvesting Park elk. �•• d f.1 Crystal Mtn. January - Harch, 1966 - 1967 Storm ~n. Nokhu Crags ~ Crosier Mtn. ~ e Horseshoe Park \ ROcl<V MOUNTAIN NATI~ PARK ", " <, ~'~. a. . \. ~~ Moose Mtn. ~ \~ ~l f/! ~. • (' d Lake " J Sisters .~~~ , ( Granby Trappin Area •0 > •= sightings of elk b."nded inside Rocky l·bunt9-inNa ti onaL Park • = sightings of elk b'Jnded by helicopter in ?Iiddle Pa rk 4t = location of trapping area Figure 6 - Summary of banded elk sightings during monthly aerial flights, January - March, 1966-67. I\) o -I="" �.:tP ? Crystal Mtn. ~ April - June, 1966 - 1967 Storm ~n. Crosier Mtn. Horseshoe 9 Park '""" <,~'~. , \. Moose Mtn. ~~ i/! -c,. (p ~i. ~" Sisters • ( ( Granby Trappin Area o • = sightings of elk banded inside Rocky Mount.aLn National Park • = sightings of elk banded by hel~copter • = I\) o \Jl in I-fiddlePark Loca tion of trapping area F~gure 7 - Summary of banded elk sightings during monthly aerial flights, April - June, 1966-67. �4> July - September, .r,:t Crystal Mtn. ~ 1966 - 1967 \ • ,... Crosier Mtn. Trap R~l~UNTAIN 0 • e Horseshoe Park ~~ NA~ PARK " <, C"\ . ~. \..,~ Moose Mtn. :1/1 Twin Sisters \~ Gr~~.~Lake " tJ , Storm ~n. I\) o 0\ ( ( • = sightings of elk b~n1ed inside Rocky Hountain National Park = 4t = sightings of elk ban::ledby helicopter in Hiddle Park location of trapping area Figure 8 - Summary of banded elk sightings dllring monthly aerial flights, July - September, 1966-67. �';ctobe '- r •..•••• - . Decenbe '-' r •••••.• '1 ••••.••••. t .fP • lOh6 / -.../ Storm ~n. I) ~ Horseshoe ? Crystal Mtn. Crosier Mtn. C Pork - Trap ~ o RO~~ 'MOUNTAIN NATI~ PARK " <, (I~A' , '\ (). Moose Mtn. ~&. i/! Sisters \~ ( ( Granby Trappin. " Area o • = sightings of elk banded inside Rocky I'lountain National Park Trout 'csome ,0 Trap ping Area • = sightings of elk banded by 4t= Figure 9 - Summary of banded elk sightings I\) o -.J heltcopter in ~liddle Park location of trapping area during monthly aerial flights, October - December, 1966. �- 208 - Literature Cited Guse, N., B. Rice, L. Carr, and R. N. Denney. 1965. Preliminary Report. Rocky Mountain Cooperative Elk Study. Colo. Game Res. Rep. July: 77-120. Gill, R. B. 1966. Seasonal movements, Rocky Mountain National Park. Colo. Game Res. Rep. July: 219-226. Prepared by: R. Bruce Gill Approved by: Jack R. Grieb Assistant Wildlife Researcher Project Leader Date: July, 1967 Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief �July, 1967 - 209 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO ------~~~~~---------- Project No. W-38-R-21 Work Plan No. llA Title of Job: Deer-Elk Investigations Job No. 5 Population Components, Rocky Mountain National Park Period Covered: April 1, 1966 through March 31, 1967 Personnel: Richard N. Denney, Raymond J. Boyd, Edmund Bucknall and R. Bruce Gill ABSTRACT Four elk classification counts were conducted of the Rocky Mountain National Park elk herd during the 1966-67 project segment, two in the fall and two in the winter. The classification in mid-September resulted in the highest bull:cow ratios. There were notable differences in herd composition results when observers extent of ground coverage and time of counts were compared between the two fall classifications. Late November was determined to be the optimum time to achieve maximum calf:cow ratios with the minimum flight time expended. Also late .November had comparatively better weather conditions for flying than any Rubsequent winter period. �- 210 - Recommendations: A final job completion report is being prepared and will concern itself primarily with developing specific management recommendations for the Rocky Mountain National Park based upon the results of data from the entire ~ooperative Elk Study program. Objectives: (1) Determine the sex-ratio of the elk in this herd. (2) Determine the cow-calf ratio of the elk in this herd. (3) Determine the age class structure Procedures: ratios of: Through field, fixed-wing of this herd. airplane, and helicopter counts ascertain (1) Bulls to cows using one observer so as to minimize the variations inherent in different observers. Enumerate the actual numbers of bulls and adult cows observed to base calculations for determining the number of cows per bull, and bulls per 100 cows. (2) Calves to cows, using one observer so as to have comparable counts from year to year and from area to area. Calves per 100 cows also will be calculated. (3) Mature bulls to yearling bulls to provide a clue to survival from calfhood to maturity. Data taken during control harvesting and special season hunts as to sex and age classes in the harvest will also be analyzed. �- 211 - POPULATION COMPONENTS R. Bruce Gill Fertility of ruminant species has been reported to be related to the physical condition of the animals and hence indirectly related to forage abundance and quality (Morton and Cheatum, 1946; Cheatum and Severinghaus, 1950; Lassen et al., 1952; Miller et al., 1942; Cowan, 1950; and Julander et al., 1959). As a-result of this knowledge, big game managers have relied upon-sex and age classification data, in part, to evaluate the condition of big game populations. Reliable sex and age data are necessary if meaningful conclusions are to be drawn from them. Classifications from helicopters have proved to be a valuable management tool for elk in this respect. Normally in Colorado selected elk populations have been counted twice each year, once before the October hunting season and once following the season. These counts, in conjunction with kill data, have been used to make estimates of total populations and as indicators of reproductive performances. Elk classifications by helicopters were begun in Rocky Mountain National Park in 1965 in an effort to determine annual increments and the proportion of the population in the various age and sex classes. It was decided that two counts per year should be conducted even though this herd is not hunted, one in the fall during the rut to insure maximum bull: cow ratios and one in the winter in order to attempt to evaluate post-calving mortality. The 1965 fall classification was conducted in late August, while the winter classification was conducted in mid-March, 1966. It was believed that both of these classific"ations were ill-timed because the first one was too early to coincide with the peak of the rut, and the second one occurred after the antler drop had already begun. Therefore, during the past segment two fall counts were conducted to ascertain the optimum count time. One was flown on September 17-18, 1966 and the other on September 26. Likewise two winter counts were conducted,the first on November 28-29, 1966 and the other on February 6 and 9, 1967. The results of these classifications are summarized in the following report. POPULATION CLASSIFICATIONS - FALL COUNTS Comparison of the two fall classifications conducted over Rocky Mountain National Park indicated that the early count on September 17-18 was the most productive for obtaining maximum bull to cow ratios. On the first classification 380 elk were tallied with a resultant ratio of 80 bulls per 100 cows (Table 1), while on the second classification 214 elk were counted resulting in a ratio of 40 bulls per 100 cows (Table 2). All of the areas flown during the first classification were not covered during the second classification and, consequently, the total figures were not exactly comparable. However, when the results of both flights were modified so as to include only those areas covered on both classifications, the results were nearly the same as the unmodified results. �- 212 - Table 1.--Pre-season sex and age classifications of the Rocky Mountain National Park elk herd. September 17-18, 1966. Mature Bulls Location Crosier Mountain Signal Mountain East side Mummy Pass North side Mummy Pass Mummy Pass Creek head Flint Pass North side Marmot Point N. E. side Specimen Mtn. S. side Specimen Mtn. E. side Specimen Mtn. Iceberg Lake East end Horseshoe Park S. side Forest Canyon Head Forest Canyon N. side Forest Canyon West Creek Fay Lakes South side Mt. Chiquita Lake of the Clouds NiselMountain Heeld of Box Canyon South ~ipe Nakai Peak N. aide Parkview Mtn. s. E, side Parkview Mtn. TotElf§ Percentages Ratig§ Spike Bulls Cows Calves 1 2 1 2 12 14 7 1 2 6 13 3 23 19 4 12 10 3 3 22 17 5 18 5 12 11 6 1 1 1 2 31 2 13 4 4 5 2 4 3 5 10 1 6 4 8 2 1 8 5 1 1 1 11 5 6 4 7 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 10 5 1 10 54 43 8 11 8 Total 1 1 33 97 5.5 8.7 80 bulls per 100 cows 16 12 36 16 25 10 38 1 6 7 7 5 1 63 87 42.9 22.9 53 calves per 100 cows 9 14 4 380 100.0 �- 213 - Table 2.--Pre-season sex and age classifications of the Rocky Mountain National Park elk herd, September 26, 1966. Mature Spike Calves Total Location Bulls Bulls Cows Upper Moraine Park North side Forest Canyon 3 Head Forest Canyon 1 S. side Forest Canyon 1 Bench W. of Gorge Lakes 7 S. side Specimen Mtn. 1 W. side Specimen Mtn. 7 North arm Specimen Mtn. 2 E. side Specimen Mtn. 4 Willow Cr. Basin Specimen Mtn. 3 Ridge N. E. of Specimen Mtn. 10 Ridge N. Fall River Pass 1 Ridge N. E. Iceberg Lake 4 Totals Percentages Ratios 44 2 6 2 2 3 21 2 2 2 11 2 5 38 5 2 4 7 1 3 2 1 7 20 28 10 15 33 9 11 7 6 4 14 2 2 5 20.6 2.3 40 bulls per 100 cows 55 17 21 214 109 56 100.0 26.2 50.9 51 calves per 100 cows The September 17-18 modified classifications revealed a ratio of 85 bulls per 100 cows and the September 26 modified classifications indicated a ratio of 47 bulls per 100 cows (Table 3). The greatest difference in the two classifications was in the yearling or "spike" bull class with "spikes" comprising 24.2 percent of the bulls observed on the first classification while comprising only 9.1 percent during the second. A probable explanation for this difference could be observer error in classifying some "spikes" as cows. Different observers flew on each of the classifications, and the comparative composition of one herd serves to illustrate the differences. Both observers counted the same number of elk (38) in the basin west of Gorge Lakes. The observer on the first classification tallied the following: 8 mature bulls, 11 "spike" bulls, 12 cows, and 7 calves, while the second observer classified them thusly: 7 mature bulls, 3 "spike" bulls, 21 cows, and 7 calves. The only major differences were in the "spike" and cow classes. But even when the "spike" category was omitted from each of the results, there was still a significant difference between the two mature bull ratios. This difference was attributed to the time. lapse between the two classifications, with the first occurring just as the rut peaked and the second occurring after.the peak. Observer error and the timing of the classification were not the only factors that tended to depress bull: cow ratios. The area that was covered during the flights also appeared to be important. For example, during the first classification all of the areas within the Park which were known to be elk summering areas were checked, whereas during the second classification the entire northeastern corner of the Park was omitted. That corner alone accounted for 45.4 percent of the total bulls counted on the early classification. Considering the three sources of error believed to be present in the second classification, the results of the first one probably provided the best �Table 3.-~Comparison of September 17-18 and September 26, 1966 elk classification counts, modified so as to compare equal flight areas. =:.:.. ', '-~:,:....o 3pil:8 .;..i.!. cur-e 3~Jil::e - -,-, ,?,,"1 .-;u.__ i ~...• .w~...;....l..S Are:?. i" C·..: 1-'.7",-35 7 •••~ '>41-..,,1-, .• ..,) T .:t t.:' "=:~2..:3 C,)~·:s Lt~~.~S C.:l178s ~ Total.. .,~'t'":" S~ptember 17-18 N. side Forest Canyon Canyon He;.d Forest S. side F0rest Cany'":'l1 5e r;:,9?-·:bsr ., 26 2 13 6 31 1"\ .I v 6 2 11 1 .1"\ v ,'"' v o 1 1 0 2 2 5 8 11 12 7 38 8 3 23 9 41-" 10 s. side Specimen l·;:tn. 8 o 1 ,., •. ( 11 36 1 0 2 1 ~ E. side Spec i ne n Etn. 5 1 5 :;~ 16 }; 0 2 oj ,..., 11 1 o o 1 o 18 o 25 .., c o :;; .LO 1 . IIA 175 3~' .I ~..,Q 100.0 N.Z. side Iceberg Spec i.men l·:tn. lake l:.armot Point TJTALS .I 47 ..1.) 73 (:) ( v •.J hi.? P§C~~:T;"C3S 26.9 P...~.TIOS 6~ :-;1 t.ur e Dulls/100 r:e '-,-."",,_.-' v}::;> ~.,I Bulls/iCO -T .•. ( ro I-' 12 ,- :....r~.) c'":'ws 21 Spike c -:-·~·!S r'\"''''':'::1'-'l(1r :..,.. -:,.. J.. j ,~; I '.J ~ , . ••. ~ f'I v 20 10 35 I. 0 11 6 21 1"\ v o 7 17 ') ...,,, 1"7 ~',1.•. 157 50.3 26.1 100.0 -" !-.r' / ?" "'"1 '- J. • { -./ 1::: / ~J lI:?.tc.;.re ::Ju::"::"s/100 ccvs ::.:.115/100 C:::MS 4 Spike cows 52 calves/l0c) +=" �- 215 - estimate of the proportion of bulls in the Park herd, and these results clearly indicate a surplus of bulls. Also it was believed that the first classification provided the best estimate of the proportion of yearling bulls in the Park herd. The ratio of yearling bulls per 100 mature bulls was 34:100. This ratio agrees reasonably well with the ratio of 30:100 obtained from a sample of 284 elk killed during Park Service reduction programs in 1944-45, 1949-50 and 1954-55. The relationship between the number of yearling bulls in the P~rk herd to the number of yearling cows is not known, but a sample of fetuses (75) obtained during the 1961-62 herd reduction program indicated a fetal sex ratio of 127 males per 100 females (Guse et al., 1965). If the post-natal mortality rate of both sexes is the same thr~gh the first year then one would expect that 26 of the 163 cows counted on the September 17-18 classification were yearlings, or 19 yearling cows per 100 adult cows. This ratio agrees with the ratio of 19 yearling cows per 100 adult cows obtained from a sample of 303 cow elk examined during the herd reductions from 1945-1962. The ratio of calves per 100 cows obtained on both flights agree quite closely (Table 2), so the early count ratio of 53 calves per 100 cows was accepted as the best estimate of the true population ratio. From all the foregoing data it was estimated that the Park herd composition was comprised of the following classes: 28.7 percent mature bulls, 9.7 percent yearling bulls, 35.8 percent mature cows, 6.9 percent yearling cows and 18.9 percent calves. These percentages are based upon a number of unverified assumptions, and therefore, may not be correct but they represent the best estimate available for the Park herd composition. POPULATION CLASSIFICATIONS - WINTER COUNTS Comparison of the two winter counts indicated that there was no difference between the ratios of calves per 100 cows of the two classifications with 57 calves per 100 cows being tallied on each classification (Tables 4 and 5). However, it was necessary to fly over nearly three times as much area to acquire an adequate sample size in February than was necessary in late November. The calf: cow ratios of the winter classifications slightly exceeded the ratios of both fall classifications. This same phenomena was observed during the 1965-66 classifications, and, thus, it was concluded that winter classifications of the Rocky Mountain National Park elk herd resulted in the highest cow:calf ratios (Table 6). The bu11:cow ratios resulting from winter classifications were decidedly different from the fall classifications (Table 6). The mid-September classification indicated a bull composition of 60 mature bulls and 20 spike bulls per 100 cows, whereas the late November classification indicated a composition of 34 mature bulls and 20 spike bulls per 100 cows, and the February classification produced 13 mature bulls and 18 spike bulls per 100 cows. From these data it appeared that although spike bull: cow ratios remainedrelatively the same from September through February, the mature bu1l:cow ratios declined steadily. This decline was believed to be an apparent decline rather than a real one, as a result of behavioria1 differences between the older bulls and the cow-ca1f-year1ing groups. After the rut, the older bulls appeared to become more solitary or gathered into small groups of two to four �- 216 - animals. These groups often wintered in the more isolated and inaccessible areas of the Park, and thus, many of them were missed on a classification where one of the main objectives was to classify as many animals in as short a time as possible. It was concluded that regardless of when the winter classifications were made the bull:cow ratios would be depressed because of the above-mentioned behaviorial bias, but the earlier the classification was flown the less the bias would be. It was also observed that early winter classifications were better because the most favorable winter flying conditions were af for.ded at this time. Table 4.--Post season sex and age classifications of the Rocky Mountain National Park elk herdz November 28-29z 1966. Mature Spike Calves Total Bulls Bulls Cows Location Beaver Mountain Tombstone Ridge North side Forest Canyon Marmot Point South side Stormy Peaks Mount Dickinson North side Mt. Dunraven Ypsi10n Mountain Black Canyon Ridge Mount Fairchild Mount Ti1eston Fall River (Harmony Ranch) Horseshoe Park Red River Ranch Moraine Park 1 9 20 4 2 17 26 1 1 Totals Percentages Ratios 256 51 87 47.2 16.1 9.4 54 bu11s/100 cows 9 3 6 9 9 1 2 12 3 3 52 29 3 7 2 17 41 18 5 2 2 3 10 20 12 2 65 12 34 38 9 21 148 27.3 57 ca1ves/100 1 99 20 4 7 29 31 34 71 39 7 1 117 21 61 542 100.0 cows �- 217 - Table 5.--Post-season sex and age classifications of the Rocky Mountain National Park elk herd, February 6 and 9, 1967. Location Mature Bulls Spike Bulls Cows Calves Total 3 6 1 4 3 51 49 25 27 11 7 41 49 16 32 79 83 19 61 84 8 22 9 7 6 WITHIN THE PARK Central Moraine Park Upper Moraine Park Lower Beaver Meadows Central Beaver Meadows Upper Beaver Meadows Central Horseshoe Park Upper Horseshoe Park S. side Mt. Dickinson N. side Mt. Dickinson Totals Percentages Ratios 1 5 4 16 5 12 4 26 41 6.2 9.8 29 bulls/lOO cows 230 54.9 43 28 17 122 419 29.1 100.0 53 calves/lOO cows - - - - - - - OUTSIDE THE PARK Crosier Mountain Crosier Mountain Crosier Mountain Crosier Mountain Crosier Mountain W. Fork of Little Thompson Buckhorn Creek Buckhorn Creek Buckhorn Creek Elk Creek Signal Mountain N. side Storm Mountain Totals Percentages Ratios Combined Totals Percentages Ratios 2 1 5 1 10 3 8 4 1 1 3 23 26 17 11 2 21 16 7 7 4 8 2 9 19 5 47 41 4· 39 15 30+ unclassified 4 1 5 2 2 17 16 9.0 8.5 35 bulls/100 cows COMBINED RESULTS 42 57 6.9 9.4 31 bulls/lOO cows 93 49.5 62 188 33.0 100.0 67 calves/lOOcows 323 53.2 184 607 30.5 100.0 55 calves/lOO cows �Table 6.--Comparisons of the 1965-66,Rocky Mountain National Park elk classifications with the 1966-67 classifications. Project Type of Period % % Bulls per Calves per % Count of Count Bulls 100 Cows 100 CowS" Year Cows Calves 1965-66 1966-67 1966-67 1965-66 1966-67 1966-67 Pre-season Pre-season Pre-season Post-season Post-season Post-season August, 1965 September, 1966 September, 1966 March, 1966 November, 1966 February, 1967 31. 8 34.2 22.9 12.5 25.5 16.3 51.1 42.9 50.9 64.8 47.2 53.2 17.1 22.9 26.2 27.7 27.3 30.5 62 80 40 19 54 31 33 53 51 35 57 57 Sample Size 403 380 214 264 542 607 ro I-' CP �- 219 - LITERATURE CITED Cheatum, E. L., and C. W. Severinghaus. 1950. Variations in fertility of white-tailed deer related to range conditions. N. Amer. Wildl. Conf., Trans. 15:170-189. Cowan, I. McT. 1950. Some vital statistics of big game on over-stocked mountain range. N. Amer. Wildl. Conf., Trans. 15:581-588. Guse, N., B. Rice, L. Carr, and R. N. Denney. 1965. Specific herd studies. Rocky Mountain Cooperative Elk Study. Colo. Game Res. Rept., July:77-l20. Julander, 0., W. L. Robinette, and D. A. Jones. 1959. Relation of summer range condition to mule deer herd productivity. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 23 (1):54-60. Miller, R. F., G. H. Hart, and H. H. Cole. 1942. Fertility in sheep as affected by nutrition during the breeding season and pregnancy. Calif. Agr. Exp. Sta. Bull. 672. 31 pp. Morton, G. H., and E. L. Cheatum. 1946. Regional differences in breeding potential of white-tailed deer in New York. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 10:242-248. Prepared by: R. Bruce Gill Asst. Wildl. Researcher Date: ~J~u~1~y~,~1~9~6~7~ _ Approved by: Jack R. Grieb Project Leader Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief ��July, 1967 - 221 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT state of COLORADO ------------------------- Project No. W-38-R-21 Work Plan No. liB Title of Job: Deer-Elk Investigations Job No. 2 Winter and Summer Range Delimitation, Rio Grande Elk Period Covered: April 1, 1966 through March 31, 1967 Personnel: Edgar J. Prenzlow ABSTRACT Work was not completed for this job as sufficient time was not available, due to personnel changes, for final drafting of overlays showing primary and secondary winter ranges and winter and summer elk concentration areas. However, all data collected by Projects W-IOI-R and W-38-R needed to complete the report are ready for write-up and plotting on the various maps and overlays. These data are on file at the Research Center in Fort Collins and duplicate copies will also be filed at the Southwest Regional Office in Montrose. �- 222 - Recommendations: (1) Complete the maps of the study area with two overlays showing primary and secondary winter ranges in Game ~~nagement Unit 76. (2) Make up overlays showing winter and sunnnerconcentration areas that were determined by aerial flights throughout the year. Objectives: Areas of use during the various seasons of the year must be determined to know where elk concentrate at various times, and to determine the total available range for each seaSon. (1) Delimit and map the primary winter and summer range within the study area. These are ranges that the elk will normally use seven or eight years out of every ten. (2) Delimit and map the secondary elk ranges in the study area, those areas that are sometimes known as intermediate or spring-fall ranges, which when added to the primary winter range will give the total winter range available to the elk. Procedure: (1) Determine through records, files, publications and field observations, the areas of elk concentration in the past and map these areas. (2) Delimit and map the present elk concentration areas through use of fixed-wing flights and some helicopter flights on a bi-monthly basis for two years. The study area will be flown on a regular strip basis that will be flown the same way each time. Additional information on elk concentrations will be gathered during sex and age classification counts of the elk on the area, and from notes taken on regular aerial trend counts. The animals observed on these flights will be located on maps by the observer while actually flying and making the observations as to location, numbers and movements. (3) Use the maps needed for Job 3 under this work plan to supplement the aerial sightings of elk concentrations. �- 223 - Winter and Summer Range Delimitation, Rio Grande Elk Final write-up for this job was not accomplished ~uring the past segment. Sufficient time was not available, due to personnel changes, to complete overlays showing primary and secondary winter ranges and winter and summer elk concentration areaS in Game Management Unit 76. Mapping of vegetation on winter ranges and the associated use patterns of elk as determined by pellet group counts and utilization estimates on winter browse plants was completed under Project W-IOI-R. The report is on file at the Research Center in Fort Collins and a copy is filed at the Southwest Regional Office in Montrose. Maps of elk concentration areas during winter months are also filed at the Research Center. These maps indicate concentration areas for three winters (1963-64, 1964-65 and 1965-66). The areas of concentration were mapped by Southwest Regional personnel while flying winter trend counts over the study area. It is anticipated that the report for this job will be completed during the next segmen+. Duplicate copies of the report will be available upon completion at-, Up Southwest Regional Office. Prepared by: Edgar J. Prenzlow Wildlife Researcher Candidate Date: July, 1967 Approved by: Jack R. Grieb Project Leader Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief ��July, 1967 - 225 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO --------~~~~--------Deer-Elk Investigations Project No. W-38-R-21 Work Plan No. llB Title of Job: Seasonal Movements, Rio Grande Period Covered: April 1, 1966 through March 31, 1967 Personnel: Job No. 4 Raymond J. Boyd, Richard N. Denney, Errol E. Ryland, Don Benson, Earl Cochran, Glen Hinshaw ABSTRACT A total of 35 elk were trapped, ear tagged and neck banded at two sites within the study area during the past segment. Six tagged elk were harvested by hunters during the 1966 big game season, and during the year there were a total of 99 sightings of neck-banded elk reported to the Department. Fifteen sightings of green neck-banded elk from the San Juan area some 45 miles to the south were reported to the Department during the past year and one of the San Juan tagged elk was killed in the upper Rio Grande area. This documents more thoroughly, the fact that many of the San Juan elk are summering in the upper Rio Grande areaso �- 226 - Recommendations: (1) Continue to keep track of neck band sightings and tag recoveries on the maps located at the Fort Collins Research Center. (2) Attempt to mark large numbers of elk in late September with paint shlJt from a pressure gun carried in a helicopter. (3) Schedule bi-monthly flights in the study area for one year in order to determine movements of elk, by month, within the study area. Keep track of the total numbers of elk seen on each flight and the total number of banded elk seen for statistical analysis by the Schnabel Estimator method. (4) Construct a "drive-trap" on Long Ridge for trapping during the winter 1967-68. This wintering area is the only major area left "untrapped" in the study area. Objectives: (1) Determine the normal seasonal movements of the sub-units of this elk herd, and the general migration patterns from summer to winter range and back. (2) Determine the movements of individual elk between herds and drainages. Procedures: (1) Ear tag and neck band elk caught in the study area in traps constructed to specifications determined by project personnel under Work Plan l, Job 5, segment 20 of Federal. Aid Project W-38-R. (2) Collect data from hunter observations of banded elk and ear tag returns at check stations. Compile and place the locations of band sightings reported over the past year from all sources on maps. �- 227 Seasonal Movements, Rio Grande All trapping and tagging of elk in the study area was conducted by personnel of the Southwest Region. A total of 13 elk were trapped, tagged and banded with white collars at the Goose Creek trap, while 22 elk were caught, tagged and banded with white and orange collars at the Coller Management Area in the eastern end of the study area. There were six tagged and banded elk killed in the study area during the 1966 big game season. One of the tagged elk killed had originally been tagged at the Devil Creek trap west of Pagosa Springs, Colorado in the San Juan National Forest. When killed the elk had moved 42 miles north of the trap site and crossed the Continental Divide out of the San Juan River drainage into the Rio Grande RiVer drainage. This was hot an isolated kill of San Juan elk in the Rio Grande area, as there have been 3 elk killed on the Rio Grande side in the past three years, and a total of 22·green banded elk from the San Juan have been seen in the study area (Figure 5) in the past two years. At least three of the green-banded elk have spent the winter following banding in the San Juan in the Rio Grande area be tween Creede and South Fork. This indicates a large mingling of elk from the bvo areas·on the summer range along the Continental Divide at the head of the Pine and Piedra River, Squaw Creek and the Rio Grande Wiminuche. Some interchange of elk from the head of Goose Creek on the Rio Grande and the San Juan side has also been noted by the sightings of white-banded elk on the East Fork of the Piedra River just over the divide from Goose Creek. No white-banded elk have been killed on the San Juan side, however .. During 1966 there was a total of 99 neck band sightings reported to project personnel (Figures 1 - 5). Movements within the Goose Creek trapping area were the same as they have been in the past four years, with the elk moving about 16 miles south of the trap site to summer (Figure 1), while elk tagged in the Long Ridge area (Figure 2) move about 15 miles west of the trap site to summer, and also move about 12 miles east of the trap site in late winter, an east-west movement of about 27 to 28 miles. Elk banded on Shaw Creek with blue neck bands generally move only eight to ten miles south of the trapping site to their summer ranges (Figure 4). Of the 99 band sightings reported during 1966, 15 of them were green-banded elk from the Devil Creek trap in the San Juan. These elk moved an average distance of 45 miles north of the trapping site (Figure 5). . Prepared by: Raymond J. Boyd Wildlife Researcher Date: July, 1967 Approved by: Jack R. Grieb Project Leader Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief �- 228 - Table l.--Elk trapped and tagged at the Coller Management Are, Rio Grande National Forest~ Colorado - Winter 1966-67. Date 11/25/66 11/25/66 11/25/66 11/25/66 11/25/66 11/27/66 11/27/66 11/29/66 11/29/66 11/30/66 12/8/66 12/16/66 12/16/66 12/16/66 12/16/66 12/18/66 12/18/66 1/6/67 1/3/67 1/6/67 1/6/67 1/6/67 Sex Female Female Female Male Female Male Female Male Female Female Female Female Male Female Male Female Female Female Female Female Female Female Age Calf Mature Calf Calf Calf Calf Mature Calf Mature Calf Mature Mature Calf Mature Calf Calf Calf Calf Calf Mature Yearling Calf Tag Numbers SL - 24 SL - 25 SL - 28 SL - 29 SL - 30 SL - 31 SL - 32 SL - 33 SL 34 SL - 35 SL - 36 SL - 37 SL - 38 SL - 39 SL - 40 SL - 41 SL - 42 SL - 43 SL - 44 SL - 45 SL - 46 SL - 47 Remarks orange and white collar orange and white collar orange and white collar orange and white collar orange and white collar orange and white collar orange and white collar orange and white collar orange and white collar orange and white collar orange and white collar orange and white collar orange and white collar orange and white collar orange and white collar orange and white collar orange and white collar orange and white collar orange and white collar orange and white collar orange and white collar orange and white collar Table 2.--Elk trapped and tagged at the Goose Creek Trap, Rio Grande National Forestz Colorado - Winter 1966-67. Date Sex Age Tag Numbers Remarks 1/1/67 1/1/67 1/27/67 1/27/67 1/27/67 2/11/67 2/11/67 3/8/67 3/8/67 3/8/67 3/8/67 3/8/67 3/8/67 Male Female Female Female Female Male Female Female Female Female Female Male Female Calf Calf Mature Yearling Calf Calf Yearling Mature Mature Mature Calf Calf Mature RG - 101 RG - 102 RG - 103 RG - 104 105 RG 106 RG RG - 107 RG - 108 RG - 109 RG - 110 RG - 112 RG - 113 RG - 114 white neck band white neck band white neck band white neck band white neck band white neck band white neck band white neck band white neck band white neck band white neck band white neck band white neck band �- 229 - Table 3.--Tag returns from elk killed during the 1966 Big Game Season, Rio Grande National Forest Colorado. Date Date Tagged Where Where Killed Tag Number Tagged, Killed Remarks 10/15/66 3/2/66 Shallow Texas still had neck band, SL - 27 Creek Creek had moved 9 miles west 10/16/66 3/2/66 SL - 26 Long Ridge Timber Hill still had band, had moved 14 miles west 10/66 1/26/65 SL - 199 West Bellows Creek Palisade Meadows animal had moved about 34 miles 10/66 2/10/66 SL - 22 Road Canyon Reservoir 1 mile still had band, had north of moved 4 miles WSW 30-mile camp ground 10/19/66 1/23/65 P - 29 Turkey Ranch Bear Town still had collar, had moved 42 miles 11/2/66 12/64 no tags Shaw Creek Little Beaver only had band, had moved 12 miles south ��~ - PAVED ---- DIRT •• LAKE ..,...,. RIVER .>---.. HIGHWAY OR GRAVEL OR ROAD RESENVOiR CREEK -I- MOUNTAIN ,." •• / WILDERNESS PEAK AREA BOUNDARY I\)lA). f-L FIGURE 2 - ORANGE NECK R~ND SIGHTINGS DURING 1966, RIO GRANDE ELK STUDY AREA 11 Bands are shown • Trap Site XBand Sighting Location �~ - PAVED ---- DIRT _ LAKE ..,...,... RIVER .>--... HIGHWAY OR ORAVEL OR ROAO RESERVOIR CREEK -I- MOUNTAIN '""./ WILDERNESS PEAK AREA BOUNDARY (\) LV (\) FIGURE 3 - RED NECK BAND SIGHTINGS DURING 1966, RIO GRANDE ELK STUDY AREA 16 Bands are shown XBand Sighting Location �~ - ---- PAVED HIGHWAY DIRT OR GRAVEL •• LAKE ".... RIVER CREEK .>---.. OR ROAD REU.VOIR -1- MOUNTAIN ,.,../ WILDERNESS PEAK AREA BOUNDARY ro lAJ LA> FIGURE 4 - BLUE NECK BAND SIGHTINGS DURING 1966, RIO GRANDE ELK STUDY AREA 18 Bands are shown • Trap Site x Band Sighting ---- Location �,, ( ~ - PAVED ---- DIRT HIGHWAY OR GRAVE~ _ ~AKE OR -I- MOUNTAIN ,.,""",; W1LDEftNE8S ftDAD RESEftVOIR PEAK AREA BOUNDARY I\) W +- FIGURE 5 - GREEN NECK BAND SIGHTINGS 15 Bands are shown v DURING 1966, RIO GRAf\1J)E ELK STUDY AREA (average distance traveled, 45 miles) Bite XBand Si Location �~ ~ PAVED ---- DIRT •• HIGHWAY OR ~AKE ORAVE~ OR ROAD RESERVOIR ••••••• RIVER ..>-----. CREEK· -1- MOUNTAIN I,.,••.• ,/' WILDERNESS PEAK AREA ·eOUNDARY (\) W \JT FIGURE 6 - TAGGED ELK KILLED DURING THE 1966 BIG GAME SEASON, RIO GRANDE ELK STUDY AREA Six kill locations \ are shown ft-z.T Kill Location Site and Tag Number ��July, 1967 ~ ~37 - J©~ ~a.MPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT ~tate of ~C~O~L~O~RA~D~O Project No. W-38-R-21 Work Plan No. 1m _ Deer-Elk Investigations Job No. 5 --------~~---------- Title of Job: Population Components, Rio Grande Elk Period Covered: April 1, 1966 through March 31, 1967 Personnel: Raymond J. Boyd, Earl Cochran, Don Benson, Glen Hinshaw, Don Hoffman, Bert Baker, Don Smith and Bill Wiltzius. ABSTRACT Pre-season classifications of 959 elk indicated a ratio of 30 bulls and 60 calves per 100 cows, while post-season counts gave ratios of 11 bulls and 56 calves per 100 cows from a sample of 1,000 elk. The total elk kill from the study area was determined by card projections to be 975 elk composed of 545 bulls, 331 cows and 99 calves. A total of 2,955 resident hunters killed 713 elk for a success ratio of 24.1 percent, while 930 non-resident hunters killed 262 elk for a success of 28.1 percent. A total of 248 elk were aged at the Del Norte check station with 80.0 percent of the aged kill being under five years of age. An elk population on the study area, after the 1966 big game season, of 2,139 elk was projected using the sex and age data. �- 238 - Recommend a tions: (1) Compile and analyze old data from this three-year study and publish it in the form of a final report or Journal of Wildlife Management article. (2) Recommend to Management that the pre- and post-season aerial sex and age ratio counts be continued as a basis for proper management of this herd. Indicate to Management what ideal sex and age ratios should be maintained to hold the herd at its present level of production and size. Ob jectives: (1) Determine the sex-ratio, (2) Determine the cow-calf (3) Determine the age-class hunting season. both pre- and post-season, of this elk herd. ratio, both pre- and post-season, structure of this elk herd. of this elk herd during the fall Procedure: (1) Using a helicopter, fly the entire area, using one observer, and classify elk according to whether they are bulls or cows. These counts to be done in late September and early December. All classifications to be put on tape and later extracted so that the eyes of the observer never have to leave the elk being classified. It would appear, from previous work done on this herd, that at least 1,000 elk must be classified in order to eliminate the variation found in individual groups of elk. (2) Using a helicopter, fly the entire study area, using one observer, and classify elk according to whether they are cows or calves. This can most easily be done by looking at the head of the elk. A calf has a short rostrum and a "fuzzy" appearance to its forehead and neck. All of these classifications will be put on tape and later extracted. (3) Research biologists will be assigned to the regular Game Management check station at Del Norte to check and age elk out of the study area. All elk killed in the study area will be examined at the check station for sex and age (by tooth wear and eruption), lactating or not, antler point count, day of kill, location of kill and whether banded or not. Data gathered will be analyzed by the age-pyramid technique of analysis, and included in population projections according to formulas developed by Rassmussen and Doman, utilizing pre- and post-season sex ratio changes correlated with known harvest. (Rassmussen, D. I. and Everett R. Doman. 1943. Census methods and their application in the management of mule deer. Trans. N. A. Wildl. Conf., 8: 369-379.) �- 239 - POPULATION COHPONENTS (RIO GRANDE ELK) Raymond J. Boyd Sex and Age-Class Composition of the Rio Grande Elk Herd The 1966 p~e-season sex and age ratio classifications of the Rio Grande elk herd were made September 27 and 28, 1966. Counting conditions were good for the most part, with large numbers of elk being found above timberline in the 12,000 to 13,000 foot elevation areas. Bull elk classifications were broken down into three categories; mature bulls (massive antlers), young bulls (light beams, but typical four, five or six-point formation) and spike bulls (yearlings). Table 1 below lists the classifications. Table 1.--Pre-season sex and age-class classifications of the Rio Grande Elk herd Colorado 1966. Young Location Bulls Bulls Calves Total Spikes Cows Long Park East Bellows Creek Wasson Park Miners Creek Rito Hondo Creek Finger Mesa Heart Lake West Lost Trail Creek Archuleta Creek Hope Creek Goose Creek Ivy Creek Raspberry Gulch Deep Creek Texas Creek Pole Mountain Middle Pole Creek East Pole Creek Quartzite Greek Ute Ridge West Ute Creek Middle Ute Creek East Ute Creek Rio Grande Wiminuche Big Squaw Creek Red Mountain Creek East Trout Creek Trout Creek Squaw Basin Pearl Lakes Area Black Mountain McClelland Mountain Total Percent 1 2 6 11 1 1 3 1 2 2 1 2 6 2 1 7 17 14 6 4 8 28 2 18 8 4 4 5 17 2 43 25 1 8 7 3 1 1 26 16 4 1 1 2 9 4 7 15 4 3 1 3 31 3 1 5 8 7 32 55 18 22 8 3 1 2 1 4 1 1 1 18 11 1 1 80 16 45 1 12 16 21 10 10 15 2 15 56 5 10 9 4 11 19 22 29 27 21 14 27 1 4 1 13 1 10 1 1 44 34 5 16 16 63 105 21 39 49 51 34 2 4 7 4 26 46 5 31 13 17 13 34 1 3 2 6 3 12 7 22 5 305 31. 8 959 1 2 1 2 5 8 50 5.3 51 5.2 50 5.3 503 52.4 1 1 1 21 100 �- 240 - A total of 959 elk were classified resulting in a ratio of 30 bulls (including spikes) per 100 cows and 60 ca~ves per 100 cows. The 1966 post-season sex and age-class counts of this elk herd were made December 20, 21 and 22. Counting conditions were the most difficult I have ever encountered since I started this type of work in 1957. A very spotty snow background, and where it occurred at all, the snow was old and tracks wer e difficult to sort out. Table 2 below lists the classifications. Table 2.--Post-season sex and age-class classifications of the Rio Grande elk herd Colorado 1966. Young Calves Total Location Bulls Bulls Spikes Cows Bellows Creek Farmers Creek Shallow Creek S. Side of Bristol Mt. Santa Maria Reservoir Long Ridge Lime Creek E. of 7-Mi1e Bridge Deep Creek Ski Tow Area Elk Mountain Elk Creek Coller Mgmt. Area Haney Gulch Elk Park Palisade Campground Caldwell Creek Pierce Creek Elliott Creek Humphrey's Lake Area Leopard Creek Soda Creek Mouth of Goose Creek Sentinel Mountain Poison Gulch Trout Creek S. Fork of Rio Grande Total Percent 2 63 145 3 4 39 98 5 43 3 6 41 24 71 5 48 1 4 28 19 8 33 1 42 23 32 6 80 1 77 16 16 45 54 2 2 16 30 6 31 24 67 1 4 2 3 3 6 1 3 4 11 1 1 1 2 6 6 26 26 13 16 13 40 7 4 5 3 1 1 1 2 1 1 5 3 1 4 1 1 10 3 1 6 11 1.1 13 1.3 1 4 2 42 4.2 29 65 25 21 44 11 17 6 52 28 97 16 49 4 1 5 596 59.6 338 33.8 1,000 100 A total of 1,000 elk were classified which indicated a ratio of 56 calves and 11 bulls (including spikes) per 100 cows. Tables 3 and 4 below list the sex and age-class classifications on the study area since the study was begun in 1961. �- 241 - The 1966 elk kill within the three Game Management Units included in the study area was determined to be 975 animals. These kill figures are based upon hunter report card returns and projections of the results of the report card returns. Table 5 shows the elk kill by unit and by sex according'to these hunter report cards. Table 3.--Pre-season classification counts, 1961 through 1966 Rio Grande elk herd Colorado. Ratios Bulls Cows Calves Year Bulls Spikes Cows Calves Total 45 100 67 1961 378 170* 254 802 29 100 51 1962 115 50 562 289 1,016 43 100 61 1963 131 82 493 305 1,011 39 100 56 1964 145 89 334 598 1,16611 35 100 56 1965 35 229120 7 67 30 100 60 1966 101 50 503 305 959 36 100 58 697 278 2,654 1,554 5,183 -:<Spikesincluded with bul1 in this count. liVery poor counting conditions. Table 4.--Post-season classifications, 1961 through 1966, Rio Grande elk herd Colorado. Bulls Ratios Cows Calves 17 24 16 17 13 11 100 100 100 100 100 100 64 44 65 56 56 56 17 100 55 Year Bulls Spikes Cows Calves Total 1961 1962 1963 1964 1965 1966 26 175 29 37 43 24 67 115 109 66 36 42 542 1,165 818 606 625 596 348 517 535 340 329 338 983 1,972 1,491 1,049 1,035 1,000 336 435 4,352 2,407 7,530 Table 5.--The 1966 elk kill by sex on the Rio Grande elk study area, based upon hunter report card returns and projections. Unit Bulls Percent Cows Percent Calves Percent Total 76 79 80 275 83 187 56.8 66.9 50.9 154 35 142 31.8 28.2 38.7 55 6 38 11.3 4.8 10.3 484 124 367 Total 545 55.9 331 33.9 99 10.2 975 �- 242 - Table 6.--The 1966 .elk kill, by sex, on the Rio Grande elk study area, based uEon data from the Del Norte Check Station. Total Percent Calves Percent Cows Percent Bulls Unit 76 79 80 Total 280 51 126 457 5.8 16 0 9 25 34.6 35.3 28.5 33.0 97 18 36 151 59.6 64.7 64.3 61.3 167 33 81 281 7.3 5.8 During the 1966 big game season elk were sexed and aged at the regular Game Management checking station located at Del Norte, Colorado. A total of 405 elk were checked out of the study area, and of these, 248 were aged. Table 7 below indicates the sex and age of the kill checked out during the first nine days of the 1966 big game season. Table 7.--Sex and age of the 1966 elk kill checked through the Del Norte check stationz Rio Grande areaz Colorado. Total 9+ 8% 7~ 6~ 5~ 4~ 3~ Calf 2~ l~ Age Bulls Cows 16 14 81 8 37 10 7 7 Total 30 12.1 89 35.9 14 47 18.9 5.5 80.0 6 13 5 10 2 5 0 6 1 5 2 13 157 91 19 7.6 15 6.0 7 3.2 6 2.4 6 2.4 15 6.0 248 100 The yearling kill figures, based upon hunter report card returns, is concerned only with the bull kill, while the check station data includes both bulls and cows. In the 89 yearling elk aged at the check station, there were 8 yearling cows. Table 8.--Yearling kill, 1966 big game season, Rio Grande elk study area, Colorado. Check Station Data Card Projection 70 Number~/ % Numberl) Unit 32.83 55 24.47 75 76 27.27 9 34.09 28 79 20.98 17 28.28 52 80 Total 155 28.44 81 l/These figures area based upon bull elk only, by report card. l/These figures are based upon all bull elk aged. 28.82 �- 243 - The success ratio of hunters that had antler less elk permits for the 1966 big game season in the study area, based upon hunter report card returns, is listed below in Table 9. The success ratio of all hunters in the study area in 1966 is shown in Table 10. Table 9.--Total elk kill on antlerless ~ermits2 1966. Number Success Animals Killed on Permits of Ratio of Calves Total Cows Unit Permits Area Permits 76 79 80 R R-2 R-l Total Kill 400 100 300 52.2 41.0 60.0 154 35 142 55 6 38 209 41 180 484 124 367 800 53.8 331 99 430 975 Total Table 10.--Total hunters, total elk kill and success of all hunters, 1966, Rio Grande elk study area, Colorado. Animals Killed Number of Success Total Calves Ratio Bulls Cows Unit Hunters 76 79 80 1,673 725 1,487· 28.9 17.1 24.8 275 83 187 154 35 142 55 6 38 484 124 367 Total 3,885 25.1 545 331 99 975 The total elk kill, numbers of hunters and success of resident and nonresident hunters are shown in Tables 11 and 12. Table 11.--Number of,resident hunters, total elk kill and success ratio, 1966 big game season - Rio Grande elk studX areaz Colorado. 146 66 139 Animals Killed Calves Cows 124 49 35 29 125 Total 319 101 293 351 284 713 Success Ratio Bulls 76 79 80 Number of Hunters 1,144 606 1,205 27.8 16.7 24.3 Total 2,955 24.1 Unit 78 �- 244 - Table l2.--Number of non-resident hunters, total elk kill and success ratio, 1966 big game seasonz Rio Grande elk studl areaz Colorado. Unit Number of Hunters Success Ratio Bulls 76 79 80 529 119 282 31.1 19.3 26.2 129 17 48 30 Total 930 28.1 194 Animals Killed Cows Calves Total 17 6 6 9 165 23 74 47 21 262 During 1966, the resident hunter in the three units of the study area, came from 41 counties to hunt elk, while the non-resident hunter came from 26 states. Information relative to the day of kill, by unit, is shown in Table 13. Table l3.--Day of kill, by unit - 1966 big game season, Rio Grande elk study area Colorado. Unit 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 76 79 80 110 9 41 46 7 28 19 ' 4 11 15 4 6 17 2 1 2 6 2 1 215 27 89 Total Percent 160 48.3 81 24.4 34 10.2 25 7.5 19 5.7 9 2.7 3 0.9 331 100 8 9 Total Population Estimate Results of Classification counts and hunter harvest on the study area. Pre-Season Kill Post-Season Bull Cows Calves Total Cows and Calves 151 545 66 503 331 596 305 99 338 959 975 1,000 808 430 934 Ratios and Kill Pre-Season Kill Post-Season Bulls 30 545 11 Cows 100 331 100 Calves 60 99 56 Total Bulls to Unantlered 1 5.35 975 1 14.15 �- 245 - POPULATION Let: T k pI p2 b Then: the total population PROJECTION total population total kill fraction of bulls in counts a~ter hunting season fraction of bulls in counts before hunting season fraction of bulls in the total kill T = k(pl - b) p L - p2 For 1966 in the Rio Grande Elk Study Area: Then: k pI 484 64 or .064 1,000 p2 151 or .157 959 b 275 484 T 484{.064 - .568) (.064 - .157) T 484{ -. 504~ .093 T -243.936 - .093 T 2,623 elk prior (Unit 76) .568 - Total pre-season population Less Total Kill Total post-season population to the opening 2,623 484 2,139 of the 1966 big game season Composed of: Bulls 141 (6.6%) Cows 1,275 (59.6%) Calves 723 (33.8%) 2,139 (100%) Discussion: No discussion of the data presented here will be attempted as we have recommended that all of the data gathered on the Rio Grande Elk Study Area be compiled and published as a series of three articles in the Journal of Wildlife Man~gement. Prepared Date: by: Raymond J. Boyd Wildlife Researcher July, 1967 Approved by: Jack R. Grieb Project Leader Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief ��July, 1967 - 247 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO --------~~~~~------- Project No. W-38-R-21 Work Plan No. llB Deer-Elk Investigations Job No. 6 Title of Job: Physical Characteristics, Rio Grande Elk Period Covered: April 1, 1966 through March 31, 1967 Personnel: Raymond J. Boyd, David F. Gordon, R. Bruce Gill and Walt Hawkins ABSTRACT Four elk were needed to complete .the collection of two female elk per month for a 12-month period. Three elk were collected, two in April and one in September. Extremely bad weather made it impossible to collect the second elk in September. The job was closed out with 23 elk collected for the physiology studies. Whole weights, standard measurements, blood chemistries and counts, organ measurements. and volumes and kidney-fat indexes were taken on all collected animals. Further determinations for food habits, radioactive isotopes accumulations and fetal measurements were taken. �- 248 - Recommendations: Compare the physical characteristics of the Rio Grande elk herd with the physical makeup of the White River elk herd, and publish the results in the Journal of Wildlife Management. Objectives: To determine if the physical characteristics of the Rio Grande elk herd, which winters on bunch-grass ranges, are different from the White River elk herd, which winters on a browse range area. Procedures: (1) Collect blood samples from all elk trapped in the study area and send it to the Research Center in Fort Collins, Colorado for complete chemical analysis and counts. Items particularly looked for will include blood calcium, phosphorous, sodium and potas$ium. (2) Weigh all of the elk trapped in the study area. (3) Collect two elk per month to get the following information: food habits from stomach analysis, ovarian analysis to get additional information on herd increment, correlation of eye lens weights with age and range conditions, analysis of bones and glands and tissues for atomic fallout accumulations, endocrine gland analysis, incidence and kind of endoparasites and exctoparasites, standard measurements, weights and volumes of all organs. �- 249 , PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS During the past segment, three mature cow elk were collected for complete necropsy examinations. All of the elk were collected by using a helicopter to locate the elk and then shooting them with a Cap-Chur gun. The automatic syringe was loaded with a lethal dose of Succinyl-choline chloride. Killing elk with drugs precluded the possibility of destroying organs, etc. that would be needed for complete examinations. Table 1 lists a partial summary of the necropsy data that was gathered on the three elk collected during this segment. Discussion: There will be no discussion of the data presented here as a final publication has been proposed for the Journal of Wildlife Management covering all of the data found and comparing the Rio Grande elk with elk from the White River. Table 1.--Partia1 summary of elk physiology studies, 1966-67, Rio Grande elk study area, Colorado. 33 9/65 8~ 560 150 .267 60 57.2 86~ 95.4 1,574.5 Item Date collected Age Total body weight Mg. of drug Mg. per pound to kill Time required for death (sec.) Dressing percentage Total body length Kidney fat index Heart volume Brain volume Hemoglobin Erythrocytes Hematocrit Leukocytes Po1ymorphs Lymphocytes Monocytes Eosinophils Prepared by: Raymond J. Boyd Wildlife Researcher Date: 22.3 9.75 56% 2,500 20% 40% 12% 28% Elk Number 47 4/66 9~ 482 100 .207 145 51.0 89~ 24.0 1,454,.1 414.8 17.1 9.90 53% 2,000 17% 45% 29% 19% 48 4/66 8~ 500 100 .200 60 53.6 85 3/4 20.5 1,322.9 362.3 16.1 8.80 49% 2,500 10% 40% 19% 31% Approved by: Jack R. Grieb Project Leader ~~J~u~lLy~.~1~9~6~7----------- Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief ��July, 1967 - 251 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO --------~~~---------Deer-Elk Investigations Project No. W-38-R-21 ------~--~--------1 Job No. Work Plan No. llc ---------------------------------~---------Title of Job: Population Components (White River Elk) Period Covered: April 1, 1966 through March 31, 1967 Personnel: Jack R. Grieb, Richard N. Denney, Raymond J. Boyd, Edgar J. Prenzlow, David F. Gordon, Bertram Baker, George Bear, Darrell Bingham, Walter Burkhard, Larry Finnel, Howard Funk, Bruce Gill, Richard Gregory, Dale Hibbs, Donald Hoffman, Richard Hopper, Donald Horak, Richard Klein, Gary MYers, Glenn Rogers, William Rutherford, Wayne Sandfort, Robert Schmidt, Harold Shepherd, Warren Snyder, Harold Swope and Donald Weber. ABSTRACT Pre- and post-season classification counts of elk in Units 23 and 24 were taken with a helicopter. A pre-season ratio of 28 bulls (including spikes) per 100 cows and 57 calves per 100 cows was determined, while the postseason classifications indicated a ratio of 10 bulls (including spikes) per 100 cows and 59 calves per 100 cows. The total elk kill in Game Manqgement Units 23 and 24 was 1,585 elk as determined by game management surveys and was composed of 776 (49.0%) bulls, 654 (41.3%) cows and 155 (9.8%) calves. Later a questionnaire was mailed to license holders who did not return their report cards. From this information, it was projected that 1,447 elk were killed in Units 23 and 24 instead of 1,585, and the kill consisted of 709 (49.0%) bulls, 611 (42.2%) cows and 127 (8.8%) calves. ~ing of 778 elk, killed in the two White River Game Management Units{ indicated that 86.9% of the kill was in the portion of the elk herd under 42 years old. Success ratio of resident hunters was 39.6% while non-resident hunters enjoyed a success ratio of 48.7% making the over-all success ratio of 3,482 license holders 41.6% as revealed by a follow-up questionnaire. A population estimate of 5,176 elk was projected on the study area after the 1966 big game hunting season by using the 1966 corrected kill figures, and the 1966 pre- and post-season classification counts. Segments of the population after the 1966 season were estimated to be 311 (6.0%) bulls, 2,939 (56.8%) cows and 1,926 (37.2%) calves. �- 252 Recommendations: (1) Continue the pre-and post-season sex and age ratio counts using a helicopter for two more years (ending December, 1968). (2) Set up and run four research check stations (Meeker, Deep Creek, New Castle and Ripple Creek) for 9 days during the 1967 big game season. These stations, along with management stations at Rifle and.Idaho Springs, will collect data on sex and age of the elk kill, kill locations, bandedelk sightings, hunter distribution and public reaction to the specified elk permit type of hunt on the White River. (3) It is recommended that 2,500 bull permits and 1,500 cow permits be issued for 1967 to obtain the desired harvest of this elk herd and to achieve a post-season ratio which would approach 20 bulls per 100 cows. Objectives: To evolve a management plan for the White River elk herd, based upon biological data: (1) Determine the pre- and post-season sex-ratio of this elk herd. (2) Determine the pre- and post-season cow-calf ratio of this elk herd. (3) Determine the age-class structure of the hunter harvest of this elk herd. Procedures: (1) Elk were classified as bu LLs and cows from a helicopter flown over the study area in late September and early December. These classifications were recorded on tape and later extracted. (2) Cow and calf counts were also made by helicopter during these same flights. This is most easily done by looking at the head conformation of the elk. A calf has a short rostrum and a "fuzzy" appearance to its forehead. (3) Special check stations were set up around the study area at Meeker, Deep Creek, New Castle, Ripple Creek and Hamilton. The regular game management check stations at Rifle and Idaho Springs also assisted in this portion of the study. Elk killed in the study area were examined at the stations for: sex and age (by tooth wear and eruption), antler point count, lactating or not, day of kill, kill location and whether banded or not. Data gathered were analyzed by standard statistical tests, age-pyramid techniques and time-specific life tables. Population projections are also included. (4) This year, a questionnaire was mailed to 1,024 Area E hunters who did not return report cards attached to each specified permit. This random survey, in combination with game management's report card system, permitted an estimate of the 1966 elk harvest. With this harvest estimate and the 1966 pre- and post-season sex and age ratio counts, an elk population projection was made for the purpose of making recommendations to management for the 1967 elk season in Area E. �- 253 - WHITE RIVER ELK HERD POPULATION COMPONENTS Edgar J. Prenzlow Introduction A special experimental hunt was held during the 1966 big game season in Game Management Units 23 and 24 (Area E) of the White River. Persons with permits, specifying either an antlered or an antler less elk, could hunt only in these two units. Area E was selected for this experimental hunt because more information has been collected on this elk herd than any other in the state. Thus, a better evaluation of the results of this experimental season may be possible. Also, range conditions affecting the status of this herd have been more closely studied. Information on this herd includes 17 years of aerial population trend counts, 11 years of results from hunter's choice elk validations, 7 years of sex and age composition studies before and after each hunting season, 4 years of sex and age analysis of the kill and many years of kill information obtained from management check stations and hunter report cards. Increased hunting pressure, especially on the bull segment of the population, has reduced the number of older bulls and removed about 55 percent of the yearlings each year prior to 1966. At the present time, however, the reproductive rate of this herd is the highest of any known herd in North America. Studies on summer range have revealed that elk use has increased seven times over a six-year period. Information collected thus far has shown that three problems may develop in the management of this elk herd: (1) it is possible that if the herd is not held stable, the reproductive potential may decrease, (2) if the herd continues to increase, range damage will result, and (3) unlimited hunting pressure will reduce the quality of hunting in that it will remove the majority of the older and larger bulls. Hopefully, a specified permit hunt with a set number of permits for both antlered and antlerless elk, as in some smaller Colorado elk herds now, will solve the three problems outlined above. Therefore, the overall objective of this study is to maintain the White River Elk Herd at the level desired by management based on the forage supply, yet provide a maximum elk harvest each year. Information in the Introduction was taken from reports compiled by Mr. Richard N. Denny. These reports were written and presented to the commission in 1966 for justification of the specified permit hunt on the White River Study Ared. Composition of the White River Elk Herd - Aerial Surveys.--The 1966 pre-season sex and age-ratio counts of the White River elk herd were made on September 20, 21 and 22. These classifications were confined to elk located in Game Management Units 23 and 24 (Table 1). A total of 557 elk were classified resulting in a ratio of 28 bulls (including spikes) per 100 cows and 57 calves per 100 cows. �- 254 - sex and age ratio counts, White River Study Area, Table I. --Pre-season Colorado, 1966. Bul Is Young Bulls 2 I I I 8 4 4 2 I I 3 4 3 4 Sp i kes 7 2 I 3 I 8 6 Cows 8 6 16 26 12 I, 39 18 9 2 50 27 12 Calves Total 4 4 15 19 32 47 21 2 68 33 13 3 85 59 23 3 63 5 9 30 14 Coal Creek Sleepy Cat Area Lost Park Area Sand Peak Area Pagoda Peak Area Ute Creek Marvine Creek Big Fish Creek Trappers Peak Area Shingle Peak Area South Fork down to Park Creek Park Creek Lost Solar Creek Fowl er Bench South Fork above Campground Wagon Whee I Creek South Fork, BudgeYs Down Nichols Creek Burro Mountai-n 557 Total Per Cent II 15 7 I 18 9 3 I 31 17 4, I' I I 2 2 30 3 4 21 6 23 2 3 8 5 54 9.8 299 53.6 172 30.9 7 2 17 3.0 15 2.7 . Locat ion 100 - _._---- --- The 1966 post-season sex and age-ratio counts of the White River Elk Herd were made on November 30 through December 1 and 2, inclusive. All flying was confined to Game Management Units 23 and 24. A total of 2,112 elk were classified resulting in a ratio of 10 bulls (including spikes) per 100 cows and 59 calves per 100 cows (Table 2). The pre- and post-season classification counts since the study began are listed in Tables 3 and 4 for comparative purposes. These counts include only elk from Units 23 and 24. Previous reports for this job have listed classification counts for the entire White River Elk Herd. �- 255 - sex and age ratio counts, Table 2.--Post-season Mature Bul Is Young Bulls Sp ikes Calves Total 53 10 42 23 112 15 3 21 160 19 95 63 267 43 6 I 8 6 22 35 6 4 13 51 3 5 87 9 1 77 37 7 7 6 21 13 59 f08 20 18 31 165 16 3 102 9 52 38 137 25 2 22 6 3 5 13 7 36 66 13 13 ' 13 106 6 7 165 21+ 2 140 51 12 263 40 4 239 91 9 15 87 95 38 53 136 163 114 5.4 1,245 58.9 739 35.1 2,112 100 5 I 2 18 2 I 2 I 7 I I 5 7 2 2 2 9 5 I 2 7 .3 4 7 .3 Cows 1966, White River Study Area. 3 I L~5 " Locat ion Coal Creek Uranium Peak Big Beaver Sawmill Mountain East Beaver Sleepy Cat Area Sand Peak Area Missouri Creek Deadhorse Gulch Pagoda Peak Area Ripple Creek Bear Creek Pickett Pin Creek lynx Creek Crooks Park Ute Creek West Marvine Marv ine Creek.' East Marvine Baldy Mountain Buford Peak South Fork down from Budge's Park Creek Bloomfield Bench lost Solar Creek South Fork down from lost Solar Fowl er Bench Oak Ridge Total Per Cent �- 256 - Table 3.--Pre-season sex and age classification counts expressed in ratios per lOa cows and percentages for Un i t s 23 and 24, Area E, 196o through 1966. : .. =--_ . -::: Ratios and Percentages Year Bulls Spikes COVIS 1960 1961 1962 1963 19Q~ 1965 1966 58 76 100 59 29 72 32 91 94 116 66 91 161 54 216 400 )-\.62 297 363 699 299 !E .• Of * : , E Calves Tol·al 133 301 298 203 203 416 172 498 871 i2t 97h 625 686 1,348 557 Bu IIs Cows Calves 69 (29.9) 42 (19.5) 47 (22.1 ) 42 (20.0) 33 (17.5) 33 (17.3) 28 (15.4) 100 (L~3.4) 100 (L6.9) '00 (47.3) 100 (l.a .5) 100 (52.9) 100 (51.8) 100 (53.6) 62 (26.7) 75 (34.6) 64 (30.6) 68 (32.5) 56 (29.6) 59 (30.9) 57 (31.0) T·""·==S:'T"':t:--===== _..~. I. = =--'.- Table 4.--Post-season sex and age classification counts expressed in ratios per 100 cows and percentages for Units 23 and 24, Area E, 1960 through 1966. Year Bul Is Spikes COVIS Calves Total 1960 1961 1962 1963 1964 1965 1966 15 32 43 18 18 26 14 46 74 82 27 99 59 114 346 465 41+6 382 1,130 930 1,245 305 430 335 260 692 613 739 712 1,001 906 6f37 1,939 1,628 2,112 Ratios and Percentages CF.llves Sui Is COV/S ---.-- 18 ( 8.6) 23 (10.6) 28 (13.8) 12 ( 6.7) 10 ( 6.0) 9 ( 5.2) 10 ( 6.1) 100 (48.6) 100 (46.5) 100 (h9.2) 100 (55.6) 100 (58.3) 100 (57.1) 100 (58.9) 88 (42.8) 92 (42.9) 75 (37.0) 68 (37.7) 61 (35.7) 66 (37.7) 59 (35.0) �- 257 - Harvest Surveys - Game Management.--The 1966 total elk kill in Game Management Units 23 and 24, according to gill Hunter, State Game Manager, was determined to be 1,585 elk. The kill was comprised of 776 (49%) bulls, 654 (41%) cows and 155 (10%) calves. These figures are based upon hunter report card returns and statistical projections. Table 5 lists the composition of elk killed for both game management units. Table 5.--Composition of the 1966 elk kill on the White River study Area. Uni t Bulls <11 /0 Cows at 23 323 L63 t~8~3 49.5 270 384 40.L+ 21.1- Total 776 rO.O 654 11 Calves % Total 41.9 76 79 11.4 8.6 669 916 hi .3 155 9.8 1,585 /0 V Based on figures taken from "Resume of Colorado's 1966 Big Game Season." Table 6 lists the number of elk killed in each unit and the success ratio of Area E hunters with ant1erless elk permits. Table 7 shows these same type of figures for antlered only permits, while Table 8 lists the combined totals for both ant1er1ess and antlered permits. Table 6.--Total "rea. V elk kill in 1966 on antlcrless elk permits, White River Study An ima Is Ki I'ed on Perm it Areu Number of Perm its 'Success Ralio of Perm its Cows Calves Total F 1,000 80.J~~ 270 3811, 76 2l..J. 346 463 Tolal E 1,000 80.% 654 Unit 23 79 809 155 ~-. .. V Based on figures taken From "Resume of Co lorado s 1966 Big Game Season". t Table 7.--Toral Study /"rea. V elk ki II in 1966 on ant Iercd only ell< perm its, \Vhite River I: =:z :: : -: : Area 23 24 E 2,}1-52 3 I.6'}~ Tof'al E 2,1.62 31.6% ..- ..•·s:;::,2 5 Animals f<iIIed on Permits Unit _.__ ::=-~ Success RaJ-io of Permi t s Nurnber of Perm it s Bul Is Total 323 L153 323 h53 776 776 .:J Based on figures taken from "Resume of Colorado's 1966 Big Game Season." �- 258 - Table 8.--Total hunt ers " total Whi t e River Sfudy Area. !.I Number of Hunters Un i t 23 ell< kill and success -- of all hunt er s in 1966 --, Success - An i maI s 1< i I I ed -------~.------.-.--.. -.Bull s Cows Calves Total .. Ratio L~3.Wa 2L~ 1,571+ 1,878 Lj.8.8}~ 1.153 Tot a I 3,452 46. Cf/~ 776 Y Based on figures taken 323 from 270 38J.+ 76 79 669 916 651.~ 155 1,585 Color ado s 1966 Big "Resume of t Season". Carno The number of hunters and success ratio of resident and non-resident hunters are shown in Tables 9 and 10. All figures in Tables 5 through 10 are taken from 1966 Game Management Reports and some comparisons between these and figures compiled by the research division will be made later in this report. Table 9.--Number of non-resident hunters, in 1)66, White River Study Area • Uni j 23 Success Total : 87.2% t ... Based on figures taken i from of resident Study Area. Numb er of Hunters Unit ;: }} and success Total Calves 135 175 57 53 21 17 310 ! i"5 ,_ -=-- "Resume of total I fa 213 21-+5 38 . Colorado's elk ratio --.:.;.......-Ki II ed Cows Success kill 458 _it·-,.. "i 1966 Big : i Game Season". and success ratio in An ima I s 1< i I I ed Total Ra I io Bulls Cows Calves 188 278 213 1,603 55 62 456 671 2,927 466 117 1,127 1966 Big Game Season". 1,321+ Total , hunters, y kill Bu l Is 85.21v j: Table 10.--Number 1966, White River ------' 89.1% 525 t. elk Animals Ral'io 250 275 21.J.. y -- Number of Hunt or s total .!I Based on figures taken from "Resume of 331 Colorado's �- 259 - Table 11 lists elk hunting pressure in Units 23 and 24 for 1958 through 1966. In 1966, non-resident hunters came from 32 states and resident hunters came from 41 of the 63 counties in Colorado. A breakdown of hunting pressure by unit and by state or county of residence is shown in Tables 12 and 13. Table II.--Total Year 1958 1959 1960 1961 1962 1963 1964 1965 1966 Total gj elk hunting pressure, ---.- Un it 23 Un it 2L~ Total Pressure I, 100 1,574 1,01+8 986 1,016 1s, 663 2,.002 2,292 3,093 2,1+27 1,878 2,148 2,138 2,435 3,459 3.710 4,063 5,454 4,43i 3.452 14,885 16,405 31,290 1,152 1,419 1,796 1,708 1.771 2,361 2,00L~ 2/ 1958 to 1966, Whi te River study Area. ~ )) Based on figures taken from "Resume of Colorado's 1966 Big Game Season". gj Unlimited bull elk hunters in these years (1958-1965 inc.) V On 1y 2.452 bu II elk hunters allowed in the area in 1966 !/ �- 260 - Table 12.--Hunting pressure by unit and by state of residence1for the 1966 big game season, White River Study Area, Co1orado.State Alabama Arizona Arkansas Cal ifornia Florida Georgia III i no is Indiana Iowa Kansas Kentucky Louisiana Michigan Minnesota Mississippi 1.\ issour i Nebraska Nevada New Hampstilire New Jersey New York North Dakota Ohio Oklahoma Pennsylvania South Dakota Tennessee Texas Utah Virginia Wisconsin Hawa i i Total Unit 23 5 2 8 90 2 24 Unit 3 10 72 8 2 18 162 3 5 o o 2 10 18 2 4 2 10 3 2 10 6 2 18 5 6 o 2 2 To te l 3 28 6 5 12 22 3 5 5 6 6 o 7 12 2 36 2 2 2 3 13 14 5 o 4 7 12 28 41 5 8 13 3 2 2 16 7 2 9 2 3 18 3 o 7 8 2 250 275 II Based on figures taken from "Resume of Colorado's 4.2 15 18 8 8 o % 4 19 4 5 34 10 9 17 3.2 2 525 1966 Big Game Season". �- 261 - Table l3.--Hunting pressure by unit and by county of residenci/for bi~ ~ame season, White River Study Area, Colorado.- County Uni t 23 Adams Arapahoe Bent Boulder Clear Creek CroV/ley Cus +or Del ta Denver Douglas Eagle Elbert EI Paso Fremont Garfield Gi Ipin Grand Gunnison Huerfano Jefferson Kit Carson Lake 101 155 0 119 0 5 5 3 3 312 3 3 3 30 5 20 3 3 3 6 75 3 10 Lar iner- 64 Cha f f ee Las Animas L.incoln Logan Mesa Moffa-~ Montrose Morgan Otero Pitkin Prowers Pueblo Rio Blanco Routt Teller Washington Weld Yuma Total Unit 24 100 169 8 12h 3 3 0 0 5 443 8 3 3 60 8 30 0 0 0 0 100 5 6 16 2 17 19 65 5 Total 201 324 8 21-l-3 3 8 5 3 8 755 90 13 50 3 3 3 6 175 8 16 28 5 3 9 14 203 0 3 3 8 61 3 1,321-1- 1,603 J.! Based on figures taken from "Resume of Colorado's 6.9 " .1 8.3 25.8 3. I 6.0 80 33 37 140 15 16 46 5 6 13 24 395 " % "66 3 16 t8 75 10 5 18 0 3 4 10 192 3 0 3 30 0 " the 1966 5 " 91 4.8 13.5 3.1 " 2,927 1966 Big Game Season". �- 262 - Harvest Surveys - Game Research.--Accurate kill estimates, in combination with sex and age ratios, are paramount for making valid population estimates (Dasmann, 1952). To better estimate the elk kill in Game Management Units 23 and 24, a random survey was conducted on 1,024 license holders who did not return their regular game management report cards. Of the 1,024 hunters sampled, 876 (85.5%) responded to the survey which included one follow-up letter. This was not possible in the past because of unlimited bull hunters on the study area. However, this year every hunter was required to have a specified permit, thusly, making available a list of all hunters' names and address. A total of 3,482 licenses were issued for Area E which included 1,877 resident bull licenses; 850 resident cow licenses; 605 non-resident bull licenses; and 150 non-resident cow licenses. The random survey, in comination with the report card system, allowed for a reasonable estimate of the number of active hunters and the success ratio of license holders as shown in Table 14. Table 14.--Sunnnry for 1966. of ki II statistics for Rp.sidcn~ ---Ou IIs L icerise Game h\anagpmenr Units 23 and 24 Non-Resi::lent .-------- Cows ----- ----- ------Bu f Is .. Total 150 150 3,842 168 3,314 Cows No Hunt Aci iv()Hunters 1,877 136 1,71.1.1 850 26 821~ 605 6 59) SUCC[SSFUL Repol-t Card Random Tolal 511.1753 1,267 100 119 219 155 209 364 12 5 17 781 1,086 1,867 UNSUCCESSFUL Report Ce r-d Randorn Tolal 255 21) )17L~ 362 21-1-3 605 ILO 86 235 82 51 133 848 Issu0d Success Raiio 1/ 1/ 73 .1iJ~ a ! ,£'Z~ ~7 88. r;t, Kil I por license According to our estimate, a total of 1,447 elk (709 bulls, 611 cows and 127 calves) were harvested in Area E during 1966 instead of the 1,585 elk (776 bulls, 654 cows and 155 calves) estimated by game management. To pinpoint some of this error--where it comes from, why it exists--a comparison of the two total kill estimates is made in Table 15. �- 263 - Table 15.--Total resident and n6n-resident report card returns and random survey. --Non-Resident Residenl C(-;.-:;t / Bu II Report Car-d Random elk kil I by sex in per cent based on Bull h66 (2h. 8;.~)'§ 661 (77.8%) 310(51.2%) 47Li- (25. 3~~) 605 (73.1-,%) 235 (39.2%) '-~-'.--.- Cow Total '48 (98.7%) 133 (88.7'10) 1,585 (63. ,%) I,4la (56.7%) ==~====.. --==--======- Includes calf ki II Hunter success based on total estimate ki II per total license sa Ie From Table 15 we conclude: (1) the report card system reasonably estimated the resident bull kill; (2) the report card method over-estimated the resident cow kill; (3) the report card method strongly over-estimated the non-resident bull kill; and (4) the report card method strongly over-estimated the nonresident cow kill. There were 150 non-resident cow licenses issued and the report card system estimated that 148 license holders were successful. Apparently, the high kill estimate of 1,585 was partially caused by an overestimate of the success of hunters who did not return their report cards. Further, all valid license holders (75/3,482 = 2.2%) did not hunt in Area E during 1966. Another estimate that indicates a total kill of 1,447 animals is reasonable can be derived from management check station information. However, three assumptions have to be made: (1) that those persons who did not return their report cards were checked through a check station at the same rate as those who did return their report cards; (2) that residents and non-residents responded on the random survey at the same rate (not quite true); and (3) that residents and non-residents were checked through the Rifle, Idaho Springs and Artesia check stations at the same rate. This is also not quite true, because proportionately more non-residents (50/74 = 67.6%) were checked than residents (120/206 = 58.3%) as shown in Table 16. Table 16.--Numbers of elk checked through the Rifle, Idaho Springs and Artesia check stations basod on random survey. -- Ou II ..,. Cow Yo's .!J I 0/ No .:: Res ident· Non-Pe s i dent 53 38 39 Tol-al 91 --_ -.- Calf ----Yes No Yes No 53 II LI2 14 IL~ 5 7 I 3 120 50 53 64 L,) 8 170 Yes --_ ...... _- 1/ Checked at check stat ion Not checked at check s+a t lon No ---. 15 86 Grand Total ~. 206 74 11O 280 .- ----_ -~-~----.-~ _--_._ . V Tolal .. ..•. .. .. .•.•. �- 264 - Therefore, a rough total kill estimate can be made when the number of elk (763) actually checked at these three stations are compared to the combined 170 (60.7%) of the 280 resident and non-resident elk that were said to be checked by hunters receiving the questionnaire. Thus, 60.7 is to 763 as 100 is to x; therefore a total of x = 1,257 elk were killed. Considering the total analysis, the report card method was close to our estimate--c1ose enough for management purposes at 1east--but not for population analysis. Harvest Surveys - Research Check Stations.--Five research check stations (Meeker, New Castle, Deep Creek, Ripple Creek and Hamilton) were operated on the study area during the 1966 big game season. Research personnel at the regular management check stations at Rifle and Idaho Springs checked elk that were harvested from the White River Units. A total of 1,384 elk were checked over a nine-day period from October 15-23, 1966. Table 17 lists the average number of elk checked at each check station from 1964 through 1966. Table White 3h) 17.--Nur.1bcr of elk chocked through research check Herd, (Game Management Units 12, 13,23. I S/611.-1966. Sration 19~. 1965 f;\ee:«!r Deep Cr e ck Ne\'! Cas lie r~if I e l deho Springs Ripplr: Creek Hair; i I ton 553 338 321 137 32 Toi-<)I stations 1,381 from the and ?h, 25, 26,33 RivE,r Elk 1966 Average 506 591 550 227 220 196 138 137 166 262 228 I ,2oL~ 1211. 159 133 109 120 120 1+ 1 , 38[~--'-- 4 1,323 Of the 1,384 elk checked, age determinations were made on 778 animals from just Units 23 and 24. Elk that were four and one-half years old and younger comprised 86.9% (676/788) of the elk checked (Table 18). Tables 19 and 20 list the sex and age, and percent composition of the animals by unit brought through the check stations, respectively. Some comparisons can be made at this point. Approximately 65% (935/1,447) of the estimated kill was checked by research stations and the percent of bulls (51.1%), cows (40.3%) and calves (8.6%) checked compares very closely to the percent of bulls (49.0%), cows (42.2%) and calves (8.8%) in the estimated total kill. Also, these percentages compare closely to management's kill estimate percentages (see Tables 5 and 20). This probably is a good indication that with a fairly large sample of the kill passing through check stations, we check each class in about the same proportion that they are harvested from the herd. �Table White 18.--Sex and age of River study Area. the 1966 elk kill checked through seven stations, AGE Bulls Cows Calves I-~- 2*z; h9 330 64 31 h6 LI.8 3'~ 12 1.a 4~)- 5·,ti"6-1,7:~ c: z; t.:" " 7 28 6.3 4.5 38 3 18 0 17 8-1~ 9+ 2 0 18 9 --------------------------------------------------------------------------80 376 112 59 1-t9 35 21 17 9 20 Total Per Cent 10.3 48.3 14.4 86.% 7.6 2.7 2.2 1.2 2.6 Of 344 females, 53.8% (185/344) were found to be lactating when harvested in October. Four- and five-year old females had a lactation incidence of 82.9% (29/35) and 84.6% (22/26), respectively. Only eight-year old cows exhibited a higher percentage (88.9%); however, these data were based on a sample of only nine animals. Surprisingly, two yearling cows were recorded as lactating. This figu:e is probably in error, and indicates that they were pregnant as ca:ves, wh1ch is rather unlikely. Of the 112 aged females that were not lactat1ng, 75 or 67.0% were either yearlings or two-year old cows (Table 21). Of the animals aged at check stations, yearling males (330) and females (46) comprised 48.3% (376/778) of the 1966 elk kill. Management also quoted a figure of 48.1% for the yearling. kill in Units 23 and 24. These figures are not comparable, however, because management bases their figures on the reported kill of spike bulls only, while research's figures include actually aged yearling elk of both sexes. To better understand and interpret the affect of hunting on this herd, life tables as described by Mosby (1963) were constructed using females that were aged at check stations during the years 1960-1966. Also, analysis of the yearling cow kill compared to the mature cow kill were made. Neither of these will be reported in this segment because of some questions about the accuracy of the 1960 and 1962 data. Consequently, the raw data for the last several years is going to be rechecked and it is planned that a complete analysis of White River information will be presented in the next segment report. �Table 19.--Sex and age oT the 1~66 elk kill by unit, .checked through seven stations, Calf !I 11..1/ 2 _ 3~- h-6- Unit A\ F M F M 23 24 12 37 6 25 53 277 12 34 16 8 48 40 21.. 1/ 2 _ F 5~ M F M 2 I0 II '12 I 0 26 36 F &1,- 7~- 2 - M F 0 7 3 25 \Vhite River M F 2 I 5 I3 Study Area. 84,- Total 9+ ._---M F M F fA F 0 0 0 2 3 I8 _ _. G ... 6 II Aged .---- ~---..• 0 0 3 6 , 52 626 ----------------------------------------------------_ .. _------------------------------------_._------------------Tota I 49 31 330 46 64 48 12 47 I I 38 7 28 3 18 0 17 0 9 2 18 778 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------_._--- -Per Cent 6.3 4.0 42.4 5.9 8.2 6.2 1.5 6.0 1.44.9 .9 3.6 .L~ 2.3 .0 2.2 .0 1.2 .3 2.3 fOO.O J.! These male age classes include elk aged by all methods (jaws, antlers, c I ude ages of on I y those an imaI s where jaws were brought in. etc.). All older male classes in- ro 0\ 0\ �- 267 - Table 20.--Per c ori+ composi1" ion of animals 1966, \Vhite River S rudy Area. Bull s crf 1° Unit 23 Unit 211_ 83 395 Total )-+78 checked --..-.- COVJs % Calves % Total 48.0 51.8 72 305 L~I.6 18 62 I O.~ 1-+0.0 8.2 173 762 51. I 377 40.3 80 8.6 935 of l ac la t ion by age class, Table 21.--lncidence through seven stations, 1;>66I.'!hiteRiver Study Area. Age Lac re+ i ng Non-lac. cd jJ taco :J Unaqod 71 I~ 2}~' 72- 1-1-';~' 5~~ 2 38 6 37 2) 12 70.7 2) 6 82.9 5.0 Ih.o 61,- 22 II 4 4 81-1-.673.3 7-"'.J, 8-;~\- 9+ UA 8 10 " 73.3 88.9 62.5 ~- I / 0 II Total 57 47 185 159 53.8 females Information relative to the day of kill is shown in Table 22. Almost 93% of the elk checked were killed within the first five days of the 1966 season in Units 23 and 24. Table 22.--Day of ki II, by unit, 1966 big game season, White l~iver study Area. 9 Total 176 757 ----------------------------~----~---------------------2 933 The questionnaire revealed that hunting parties in Area E averaged 4.37 persons in 1966 while each party only averaged 1.25 elk and 1.77 deer licenses. This indicates that over half of the people in each party, on the average, were not licensed to hunt big game. Another point which may be of interest is that a larger number of people were hunting on deer rather than elk licenses in an area well known for elk hunting, especially Game Management Unit 24 (Table 23). �- 268 - Teb l o 23.--N\CDn number of hunters, 1)66, White River Study Area. elk 'and dec, I l ce nsns per party during 23 Un t : 211 Area E 1.35 1.15 1.25 1 .67 I .86 I .77 Un l t Mean si~o of hunting party MeQn numb0- of elk I icen3e~ per party Mean number of de er: lie enso's per par t y = - -: , .j : t t Y Average of Uni ts 23 and 21.1.• Y -~--'--~---;--..-------:---)1.5:1 ,l,.lh L~.37 :a 2_-4. During the 1966 season, 924 hunters sampled observed 16,473 elk in Area E (Table 24). These figures represent just the first nine days of a twenty-day season. Tab l e 2l.~.--[lk observations by hun t er s during 1966, Vlhite Class ---_._-_._-_ .•._._---Yoar l ing Unit Sf udv Area. Bulls fila I'ure Bu I I s Total Elk Y 23 [ 1:< obsor vcd /;\ean per hunt or Unit River -=:0= .:::.._....:::---=..-=--- .,=======_.========= 2)1, 137 .80 120 1,892 .70 11.00 ?/ ~ I k obscr vcd 1,033 62L~ l.lt,581 f!\C,ln p or h u n j' or 1.37 .83 , 19.39 1,170 7LJI' 921+ 924 .81 16,'-1-73 924 17.83 A~'-'''' ' .:c: ['" - l...7/ F 1:< observed No. 0 f hun t or s f,~can per hun ler -,/ Based on 1.27 172 hun i er obscr va r ions y Z; Avor aqo of Un i t s 23 and 2J..l. Bi):,;()d 011 7[·0 ..Jr..~ hun t or ob s cr va ' ions Comparisons are shown in Table 2S between the numbers and percents of elk observed by hunters and the pre- and post-season classification counts for the past three years. Hunters observed a greater number of bulls, but aerial observers in general see a higher percentage of males during pre-season flights, especially spike bulls. As shown, older bulls are rarely seen (approximately 1.0% of the sample) during the post-season counts. This is probably due to the heavy harvest of bulls; however, it may be sampling error. Assumptions are that mature bulls comprise a larger percentage of the White River herd than aerial surveys indicate. This is probably true, but to what percentage is difficult to assess. In July, 1966, herd composition data were collected on �- 269 - 272 animals from ground surveys. At this time, larger bulls comprised 10.7% (29/272) and spike bulls 7.4% (~0/272) of the sample. This may be a better method of estimating the percent composition of mature bulls, but it is not true for yearling bulls because they are difficult to recognize at this time of year. However, percentage of yearling bulls observed compared closely to the average percent (6.9%) that hunters have observed for the last three years. Table 25.--[lk observations by hun r er s compared 10 pre-season counts, 1964- 1966, White River Study Area. Spike ._,=====:::========-:.======= Bu IIs BuII s -~-------------------,_._-----I?6h Hun t er' obscr-valions 8' I (L1.3%) Pre-season counts Post-season coun~s 2J (Ll. ~~) 18 (0.9%) Cows and Calves 17,327 (9'.0%) 566 (82.510) ',822 (9J.t.o%) Total 19,03h 6R6 I ~93j Ij62 Hunter observations Pre-season counts Post-season counts Hunter observations Pre-season counts Po~t-scason counts 1,008 ( 8.8')1,) 161 (I I.'],'~) 59 ( 3.6'}s) 505 (}~.L~) 72 (5.3%) 26 (, .6'f,) 9,886 (86.710) I , II 5 11,399 (82.7%) 1,543 (94.8j~) 1,348 1h, 559 (88 .}-J%) 471 (8[j..6%) 16,}.+73 OS} s > I -r- «()7. ry:<1) "/ :; • //0 1,628 557 2,' 12 ' Seven marked elk were seen on the study area by hunters during 1966. For information on movements, location of tagging and kill of marked animals, refer to the segment report for Work Plan 1, Job 5 - Experimental Trapping and Marking Techniques. Analysis of antler point data to establish a criterion for aging elk have been attempted before with little success because of extreme variability. This variability is present in the younger as well as the older age classes. For example, of 327 yearling bulls aged by methods described by Quimby and Gaab (1957), only 63.9% (209/327) exhibited the typical (1-1) antler point count; whereas, 36.1% (118/327) had at least one forked antler, 12.5% (41/327) had mo re than two points on each side, and 2.8% (9/327) had at least four points on one side. Additional information on antler point counts is listed in Table 26. Area E hunters observed 70 wounded elk and 99 abandoned carcasses during the 1966 season. Apparently, bulls are wounded in a larger proportion than cows, but as would be expected, cows are left abandoned at a much higher rate than bulls (Table 27). �- 270 - Table River 26.--Antler study Areo. po i nls by age class of bull elk harvested during 1966, White ==========~~=========================-Unit Age ',\eun Right· 23 Mean Left Un it No. ?lJ- ---- .•"~-------,, Mean Righi Mean Left "----"" '",,- .-- t·JI) • --------:--------------------_ ..---_._----r .5!, 1.55 1.37 r .39 h.32 271 4.11 5·00 5.00 4.00 5.50 f5.50 8 '0 5.00 5.00 6.00 5.2') 6.00 7 s 5.00 S.OO 9 5.50 5.50 " c, '!-.50 h.57 3 1,- 5.00 5.00 5.33 6.00 ~) ~ 6 h7 7 Only one elk carcass was in a sour condition. how the carcasses were prepared for transport Information concerning is listed in Table 28. 2 this and Harvested elk were packed from kill locations to hunter camps in a variety of ways. According to the check station questionnaire, which only recorded the following methods, 34.6% were packed out with a vehicle, 37.6% by horse or mule and 26.8% by hand (man). Less than 1.0% were returned to camps by a combination of these methods (e.g. vehicle and horse). Population Estimates - Game Research Using the corrected kill figure of 1,447 and pre- and post-season classification counts, an elk population estimate was calculated for Units 23 and 24. A formula devised by Mr. David Bowden, Colorado State University Statistical Laboratory, was used to determine the 1966 pre-season population. Pre season population estimates for the years 1961 through 1965 also were calculated. Correction factors based on the 1966 random survey information were applied to the regular kill estimates for past years. This was done to correct for a possible overestimate of the success of hunters who did not return their report cards (1,853) and the fact that all licensed hunters did not actually hunt (168/3,482 = 4.8%). See also Tables 14 and 15 and conclusions made under Harvest Surveys - Game Research. Post-season population estimates were determined by working backwards from the base year of 1966 using Bowden's population estimate, the corrected kill and the percent of bulls, cows and calves in the pre- and post-season classification counts for the respective years. We believe that information for 1966 is the most accurate, and that the further we project backwards from this base year, the greater the error. However, this gives a percentage estimate for bulls, cows and calves for each year which compares very closely to the percentages of each class determined from aerial counts (Table 29). �- 271 - Table 27.--Wounded elk or abandoned carcasses observed by Area E hunters during 1966, White River Study Area. Class Total Bull Cow 6 .03 0 .00 3 .02 6 .03 42 .06 9 ..01 8 .01 75 •I0 48 .05 .OJ Calf .!I Unit 23 Wounded elk observed Mean Obs. per hun+or Abandoned carcasses Mean Obs. per hunt er Un i t I .01 10 .06 I 7 .01 .04 10 .01 8 .01 60 2h ?! Wounded elk observed Mean Obs. per hunter Abandoned carcasses Mean Obs. per hunter .• 08 92 .12 "2/ Area E Wounded elk observed Mean Obs. per hun ler Abi)ndoned carcasses Mean Obs. per hunt or " 81 .09 9 .01 " .01 9 .01 70 .08 99 .11 Based on 172 hun ler observa lions g;1/ Based on 752 hunter observatjons -y Based on 92L~ hunt or observati6ns--Average Table 28.--Carcass of Units 23 and 2)-1,. conditions of r966 harvesled elk, White River Study Area~ Condition of Carcasses Unit 23 Males Females % of total Quar t. Unskinned Skinned 18 19.2 42 34 45.5 27 27 32.0 61 54 68.0 0.1 109 31.0 60 51 15.2 235 156 53.7 136 106 33.8 268 205 66.2 o. I 285 31.8 143 16.0 467 52.2 296 33.5 588 66.5 Good Sour Hogdr. 90 82 100.0 0 0 0.0 31 28 35.3 426 322 o 117 I 99.9 920 99.9 Half ILJ. -- Un it 2L~ Males Females % of total Area E Total 1/ % of total !I Total of Units 23 and 24. �- 272 - Table 29.--Elk population 1966 as the base year. Pre-Season Count % 1961 Bulls Cows Calves Total 19.5% 45.9% 3J-J..6% estimates Pre-Season Popu 1at ion 23.8% 996 1,791 1.400 42.810 4,187 I 00. OJ, 33.4% for the years 1961 through 1966 using Corrected Ki 1I }) Posi-Season Count 10 Post-Season Popu 1at ion 657 30h 29 8.6% 48.6% 339 10.610 I,J-l-87 46.5% 1,371 42.9% ---------------------------------------------1962 Bul Is Cows Calves 22.1% 47.3% 30.6% Total 42.fr/c -990 1,134 2,063 1,373 21~ .•B10 45.1% 20.1% 637 290 40 4,570 lOO.a/o 967 3,197 .. 100.0% _---------------------------10.6% 46.5% 42.9% 497 1,773 1,333 13.870 49.2% 3,603 100.a/o 282 2,336 1,584 6.7/0 55.6% 37.7% 4,202 100.a/o 37.a/o ---------------------------------------------------------------------------1963 Bul Is Cows Calves 20.a/o 47.5% 32.5% Total 1,023 2,580 1,606 19.6% 49 • :;/0 r:cr1 30.9% 5,209 100~0% 741 21.14 22 13.fr/c 49.2/0 36.9% 1,007 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------1964 Bul Is Cows Calves 17.5% 52.% 29.6% Total 23.2"/0 1,318 2,884 1,475 50.810 26.a/o 1,080 574 60 5,677 100.0% 1,714 6.6% 55.6% 37.8%, 6.r:f/o 238 2,310 1,415 58.3% 35.7/0 3,963 I00. a/o 238 2,609 1,723. 5.2% 57.1% 37.7% ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1965 Bulls Cows Calves 17.3% 51.8% 30.9"/0 Total 1,020 2,91+3 1,766 17.8% 51 .4/0 5,729 100.r:f/o 30.fr/c 872 331.J- L~3 6.0% 58.3% 35.7% 1,159 -. 4,570 100.0% ---------------------------------------------------------------------------1966 Bulls Cows Calves 15.4/00 53.7% 30.9% Total 1,020 3,550 2,053 I 5.l.ffo 53.6% 3 I •r:f/o 6,623 100.0% 709 611 127 I,J-l47 !I Kill for years 1961-1965 based on 91.3% (bulls), (ea I ves). 6.1% 58.9% 37. '2'/0 311 2,939 1.926 6.0% 56.8% 37.2% - ---.. 5.176 100.0% 93.lffo (Cows) and 81.9% �273 ~ T Using Bowden's population formula ~ = K(P1 - P ~, the estimate of the 1966 pre-season population of the White River e1k2herd was 6,623 animals with confidence intervals (± 210,0>(= .05, z = 1.96). b Total 1966 pre-season population Total 1966 kill = 1,447 Fraction of bulls in post-season classification count = 128/2,112 = .0606 Fraction of bulls in pre-season classification count = 86/557 = .1544 Fraction of bulls in 1966 total kill = 709/1,447 = .4899. \~en using this formula, the kill figure used is a critical factor. For' example, for every animal off in the kill estimate, the population estimate will be off five animals. This is why it is necessary to have the kill figure as accurate as possible. Other population estimates were computed using formulae described by Rassmussen and Doman (1953), Sellack and Hart (1957) and Rupp (1966). The totals computed were 7,735; 6,637; and 6,787; respectively. All four methods estimated the pre-season elk population to be between 6,623 and 7,735 with a combined range of slightly over 1,100 animals. It is reasonable that these formulas should estimate similar totals because each use the same criteria (kill, pre- and post-season classification counts). Assuming that we do have reasonable estimates of the White River Elk Herd by classes, it is interesting to note the small number of bulls that remain in the herd after each hunting season. There is considerable conjecture and discussion within the Department that this heavy bull harvest may affect the productivity (calves per 100 cows) of the herd. For instance, from 1960 to 1962 the post-season bull:cow:calf ratios averaged 23:100:85 and are significantly different from the 1963 to 1966 average post-season ratios of 10:100:64 (x2 = 33.22, ~( = .05, 2 d.f.). As a result, it was decided to test if a narrower bull:cow ratio of approximately 20-25:100 would again increase herd productivity, to 70-80 calves per 100 cows. Consequently, harvest recommendations for 1967 were designed to increase the present bull:cow ratio. It is hoped that through analysis of future data, some substantial evidence can be gained as to whether an extreme bull:cow ratio has any appreciable affect on herd productivity. At this time, it is known that there is a highly significant difference (X2 = 47.45,,~ = .01, 6 d.f.) between the pre-season bull:cow ratios (28-69:100) from 1960 through 1966, but no evidence can be found of any significant difference (X2 = 9.98, ~ = .05, 6 d.f.) between the pre-season cow:calf ratios (56-75:100) for these same years (Table 30). However, a difference can be shown with 90% confidence when plotted, between the years 1961 (100:75) and 1964 (100:56). Harvest Recommendations and Predictions Harvest recommendations for the 1967 season are based primarily on past hunter success ratios and present population estimates. Moreover, to maintain approximately the same number of cows post-season in 1967 as in 1966 and increase the number of bulls, it was recommended and approved by the Commission that 4,000 permits (2,500 bulls and 1,500 cows) be issued to obtain the desired harvest. On the basis of this number of permits, a post-season population projection �- 274 - Table 100 cow f-::ivcr Sfudy f p,...r ;().--Cal 1960-IS:l16, \\'hiic 2/ Co-.:;-::. Year 1;;6c ':"'" Area. C[llves / 133 400 L 1')6! 1::;.62 19(~3 r e t l os w l l h ,••• ' 196h 1965 3()) 301 2:10 203 203 (q) I )lOLl hl6 ~')!) 172 } (~ ·Ilx, 297 y);' conf idenr.o 1/ I imi t s for y :: l irr i t s 100 cuives/coV}::.. 2/ W0re i ')['0:' ' ':)1') Appr ox , C.L. ± I~ ~ J 0,." t I I.h ± 10.6 ± '2.3 9.6 t t 7.3 t- 10.G .. : Confidence I o I lOV/'3: elk, c a l cu lta od t ( 100 V(Calv(~s u s i nq Cl formula + C0\'1S) Riney from C(J;--:;;S/cow:;~-) ( 1')56) as ar.d -{. == .05 Ar.l lj,J I he I i COi'! or c ouri+ s 31.--i'opulul ion projcc ti ons cow p0rmi t:; i5sued in 1967, TobIE: 1,500 i)n:<~c·c' ';on Count ,j I)G';' ihld 1)0) based ~hitc river Siudy Area. f·)r i:)r'c- :-;cason on Cou n i bul I and ~/ Posi' ..Scason Ki I I Popu I ai ion 2,500 7~ r·)si -Season ~\)PuIa t ion l)Cu 5 .l.l~:' 6. Ito Gul I:: ! 7'''' .,/ ~3. 7'/;: I ,020 3,550 15.1{" CO':I$ 53.6;',: () ! I CiJI V()s 30.9/;; 2,053 -")'''' :)~,•)J~ 31 .I,_'/J I:n 35.(~:' 6,623 100.0;1, I I~ I ,~_~J_·:·I Total 311 6. a;;, 2,)3) 1.926 56.8/0 37.2/0 --~--5, ! 76 I00. CP;S -------------------------------------------------------------_._------------1367 Sui I I , ::'71r. 17. If, CO\'/S ),)02 ';Ie. • ';I;,) c::~ c::r-1' 625 0)1 Ca l vcc ~ )O.)C~ 23lt c: ,!:0(7 ..,)) ----7,11-)') I :)0. 0}~ 1,750 Total ~ S4) Ih.l~ 3.01 r ?,(Y'.9 50.3;; 5.689 100.0'10 )5.6;; 1968 f , 66'-!, 20.7% COV/S 4,026 50.2'f, Ca'vc~ 2,320 2).1/~ Tot a I 0,010 100. 0}s Bu I' 5 'IIi II dep ond upon IhC' avor aqe pr oduc l ivi I'y 5fl calves per If Ihis changes, t hon The fiJlllCS must be a t l cr od , [3D:,cd on 25/~ hun l er' success on o n t l or cd por mi l s and 75~~hunter success antlerless permits. These da ta ()f 100 COVls. on �- 275 - for 1967 and a pre-season population projection for 1968 were made based on an estimated 1967 harvest of 1~750 (625 bulls, 891 cows and 234 calves). (See Table 31). As a check, the 1967 and 1968 percep.tages .Ln Table 31 for each class (bull, cow and calf) will be compared to the actual pre- and post-season sex and age ratio counts of these years. The 1967 projected kill will be compared to the estimated kill in 1967 taken again bya random survey. Also, after the 1967 season when the results of the classification counts and estimated kill are determined, a new 1967 pre-season population estimate will be computed by Bowden IS formu la and compared to the .pre sent; 1967 pre-season population, projection. Note that these comparisons will aetas independent est Imat es the same thing and, if there is close agreement, it will be a good indication that the population estimates are reasonable. Figures in this repo r.t;used for. estimates and predictions do not take in account natural mortality or wounding loss. However, for the 1967 season, the questionnaire has been reworded so that we may obtain abetter estimate of these two factors. of �- 276 LITERATURE CITED Da smann , R. F. 1952. Methods for estimating deer populations from kill data. California Fish and Game. 38(2): 225-233. Denney, R. N. (n.d.) Specified elk permits for White River in 1966. Game, Fish and Parks Department, 3 p. T,ypewritten. Colurado Hunter, G. N. 1966. Resume of Colorado's 1966 big game season. Game, Fish and Parks Department. Mimeograph. Colorado Mosby, H. S. (ed.) 1963. Wildlife investigational techniques. Wildlife Society. 419 p. The Quimby, D. C. and J. E. Gaab. 1957. Mandibular dentition as an age indicator in Rocky Mountain Elk. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 21(4): 435-451. Rassmussen, D. I. and E. R. Doman. 1953. Census methods and their application in the management of mule deer. Trans. N. A. Wildl. Conf. 8: 369-379. Riney, T. 1956. Differences in proportion of fawns to hinds in red deer (Cervus elaphus) from several New Zealand environments. Nature. 177: 488-489. Rupp, R. s. 1966. Generalized equation fur the ratio method of estimating population abundance. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 30(3): 523-526. Sellack, D. M. and C. M. Hart. 1957. Calculating the percentage of kill from sex and age ratio. California Fish and Game. 43(4): 309-316. Prepared by: E. J. Prenzlow Wildlife Researcher Candidate Approved by: Jack R. Grieb ~-=-----Project Leader �July, 1967 - 277 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO --------~~~~-------- Project No. W-38-R-21 Work Plan No. Deer-Elk Investigations Job No. 2 Title of Job: Yellow Jacket Project Period Covered: April 1, 1966 through March 31, 1967 Personnel: Raymond J. Boyd and David F. Gordon ABSTRACT The proposed Yellow Jacket Project lies on lands between the Yampa and White Rivers .and along both sides of Colorado. Highway 13-789 south of Meeker. The project is designed to bring irrigation water to 23,610 acres of which 19,920 are presently unirrigated. This new irrigation will des~ troy the only sage grouse strutting ground in the area. It will also reduce the critical, deer winter-range by 14,180 acres. The Yellow Jacket Canal will bisect a route used by elk to cross from their calving grounds to summer range. The loss of winter range can be mitigated by securing land on OakRidge that is accessible to the public. The part of the canal that is bench-flume can be rendered more pa&sable by covering 100-foo~ sections with a reinforced-concrete roof and fencing the intervening spaces of open flume. �- 278 - Recommendations: 1. Lands accessible to the public should be secured on Oak Ridge to mitigate the loss of critical winter-range. 2. The stretch of bench-flume through the elk crossing (about 1.75 miles), should be covered every quarter-mile with dirt-covered, lOO~foot sections of reinforced-concrete roof and the intervening open flume be fenced on both sides to exclude elk. The exact locations of the crossing is to be specified by a representative of the Colorado Department of Game, Fish and Parks. 3. Trash racks and ramps to provide of each siphon. egress should be installed at the mouth Objectives: 1. Determine the location Yellow Jacket Project. and area of deer and elk range affected by the 2. Determine the effect of the innundated. area on deer and elk range and seasonal movements. 3. Determine the potential damage by deer and elk to the newly irrigated lands resulting from the proposed impoundment. 4. Recommend means of mitigating losses to the deer and elk resource created by the Yellow Jacket Project. Procedures: 1. Proposed obtained 2. Personnel of the Colorado Departmeqt of Game, Fish and Parks and other interested agencies as well as local residents were contacted to determine the following: a. b. c. d. e. project specifications and maps of the areas involved were from the Bureau of Reclamation office in Grand Junction, Colorado. Location and extent of deer and elk winter-range. Information on hunting pressure. Information on present and future agricultural practices. Information on game-damage claims. Information on deer and elk movements. 3. Field inspection lands involved. 4. A summary was made to determine the present of the impact of the project was written game situation on from this information. �- 279 - YELLOW JACKET PROJECT David F. Gordon The proposed Yellow Jacket Project, Colorado is located on lands between the Yampa and White Rivers and along both sides of state Highway 13-789 south of Meeker, Rio Blanco County (Fig. 1). Features of the project that will affect game range are summarized in Tables 1, 2 and 3. Table l.--Capacities and land areas covered by the proposed the Yellow Jacket project.!! Reservoir Capacities Active Name Lost Park Ripple Thornburgh reservoirs Land Area Covered. (acres) (acre feet) Total 20,000 18,000 16,500 of 22,000 20,000 22,000 550 360 570 !/Table adapted and updated from Summary Sheet, Yellow Jacket Project, Colorado by the Bureau of Reclamation, June 1965. Table 2.--Capacities and lengths of the proposed Jacket Project.!/ Canal Name Length canals of the Yellow (miles) Capacity 31.1 35.8 4.7 12.1 Yellow Jacket Josephine Basin Lost Park Feeder Milk Creek 360 Name of Area 50 & 75 190 White River Milk Creek Total Acres irrigation Full Service Lan~/ 15 ,74o!!:./ 4,180 19,920 & 175 185 l/Table from Summary Sheets, Yellow Jacket Project, - of Reclamation, April 1967. Table 3.--Land area to rec~ive Jacket project.!1 (cfs) Colorado by the Bureau water under the proposed Acreages Supplemental 2,000 1,690 3,690 Service lan~/ Yellow Total 17,740 5,870 23,610 l/Table adapted from Summary Sheets, Yellow Jacket Project, Colorado by the - Bureau of Reclamation, April 1967. 2/Presently unirrigated land to receive irrigation water. 3/Presently irrigated land to receive supplemental irrigation water. ~/This acreage includes 14,180 acres of critical, deer winter-range. �- 280 - 1 3 ----RiO'il _~ &. ~CO N. Lost Pork F _ 1 2 N. / \ ... (- //,~e"ow / ( <, / : conal \ l ~.' , .' ~ Ell Colving : Gr~und ...~ ~ ..~~ \ ". . 1 I S / -, ./- -, -, <, 'Josephine Conal 8osin/ ---- ... ' ••,11'" ~,~~ , '\ '(~.J ~. �- 281 - , l ~-=Y1 ~"'"'c.......-- KEY T}) )V ~ c:=::::J 0:;1;( ~"'-~........-,: ~-~ -~ /' -r--dJ" ...I4~ /( _ SUPPLEMENTAL SERVICE FULL LAND SERVICE Potential LAND Reservoir Canol Late rct Pumping - Plont Siphon Tunnel . .~ ~7 MAP EXPLANATION Ii P III#,- ---j / Winter-Ronoe I \ \\ Upper Limit Critical Deer Winter-Range ('\~---"- Elk Trail 'oRNBU'RG1f RES. ,'~.Elk Calving I Ground r / UNITED STATES OF THE INTERIOR OF RECLAMArtON / oe PARTMENT BUREAU YELLOW JACKET PROJECT, GENERAL ORAWN_ [.8",TRACEO __ T Jj. CHECKED GRANO JCT., COLf) M4P SUBMlrrEO _ RECOMMENO£O _ APPROVEO COLO. . 94/-4/7- 46 �ro ro CD Fig. 2.--Typical sagebrush Colorado. and dry farm land extending along the foot of Oak Ridge, Rio Blanco County, �- 283 - The project is designed to bring 23,610 acres of range, and dry and partially irrigated farm land under irrigation. These lands range in elevation from 6,200 to 7,400 feet. The growing season averages 130 days per year. The agricultural pattern of mostly native hay and small grains is to remain the same. Figure 2 is a typical view of the land below OakRidge slated to receive full service. Findings Small Game and Beavers This section of Colorado is not especially noted for its abundance of upland game or waterfowl. Small game present include sage grouse, blue grouse, sharp-tailed grouse, doves, rabbits and ducks. There is a major strutting ground for sage grouse in the middle of the proposed full-service-land of the Milk Creek area. This will be eliminated under the project. The areas inhabited by blue and sharp-tailed grouse will not be affected. There should be very little effect, and that probably beneficial, on doves and rabbits. It is difficult to obtain data on man-days of hunting for waterfowl in this area. In 1965 the small game survey (Grieb and Hunter, 1966) showed that 73 duck hunters took 226 ducks throughout Rio Blanco County. The proposed reservoirs might increase duck hunting to some extent. The innundation of existing beaver colonies by the proposed reservoirs would necessitate emmigration of the beavers to new home sites. This and concomitant construction of new watercourses could invite serious damage to canals and irrigation ditches. Deer and Elk Impact of Reservoirs on Game Range The proposed reservoirs of the project (Table 1 and Figure 1) are all located on sunwer range. They will cover a cumulative total of 1,480 acres of summer game-range. Since summer range is usually abundant and not a limiting factor to game numbers, this loss is not critical by itself. However, add to this figure the proposed 10,155 acres of newly irrigated land (Table 4) that will be taken from the summer range and a very sizeable area is lost. Table 4.--Game range1/ affected by the proposed Yellow Jacket Project in the White River area of Colorado. Acreages at Present Season of Use Total Irrigated Unirrigated by Game Summer Winter Total Acres l/This includes 10,155 31,020 41,175 1,330 4,675 6,005 all the land below the upper boundary 11,485 35,695 47,180 of land to be irrigated. �- 284 - Impact of Irrigation on Game Range Milk Creek Area: Two major areas to receive irrigation water under the project are the Milk Creek area north of Axial and the White River country east and southwest of Meeker (Table 3, Fig. 1). The Milk Creek area will bring 4,180 acres of range, and dry and partially irrigated farm land under irrigation. During normal winters deer stay on the more wooded slopes adjacent to this area. Although little or no crop damage is reported from the land northwest of state highway 789 under present. agricultural practices, ownership and deer numbers, a potentially dangerous situation would be created by the project. Some alfalfa is grown on the area now. Additional water would conceivably increase the acreage planted to this crop. Deer are known to graze on alfalfa in the spring before their natural forage is available at higher elevations. An increase in the acreage of alfalfa or a change in ownership of the land could create claims of damage to this crop in the future. Claims for damage to growing alfalfa have been submitted by two ranches, served by the lIes Lateral. The heaviest use occured during dry years when the deer were compelled to come down to the irrigation ditches for water in late summer and early fall. Special seasons were held in the area to reduce deer numbers. These seasons apparently served their purpose, judging from fewer damage claims. Since this land is already irrigated, its use pattern under project conditions should not change. When the deer population in the area increases to a damaging level their numbers can be controlled by hunting. White River Area: The White River country (Fig. 1) east and southwest of Meeker includes critical, deer winter-range. Under the proposed project a total of 47,180 acres of land used by deer and elk will be affected by irrigation in this section (Table 4). This acreage includes all the land within boundaries determined by the upper limits of lands to be irrigated. As an example, in the Lit~~e Beaver and Coal Creek drainages cropland surrounds many sagebrush hills. Because of this cultivation, deer are reluctant to use these islands. An increase of irrigated acres and the possibility that the hills will be leveled and sown to crops would aggravate the situation. Within the 47,180 acres are 15,740 acres which are presently unirrigated, but are slated to receive irrigation (Table 3). Of these 15,740 acres, 14,180 are classed as critical, deer winter-range. There are heavy concentrations of elk that winter on Oak Ridge above the Josephine Basin Canal. An increase in or change in type of hay production might entice these elk to raid haystacks. The loss of critical deer winter-range would necessitate a reduction in the deer he~d of about 800 animals calculated from known numbers of deer per square mile. Ultimately this would reduce hunting in the area by approximately 4,750 man-days. Suggested Means of Mitigation for Lost Range: Damage claims under the present crop pattern are negligible. However, the combination of factors, reduced and crowded winter-range and an increased number of irrigated acres with a possible change in the crop pattern, would create a potential damage situation. �- 285 - At this time there is no public access to the Oak Ridge area and deer and elk numbers are increasing. The above mentioned damage situation could be partially reduced if winter-range lands on Oak Ridge could be secured and made accessible to the public. Impact of Canals on Elk Movements The Yellow Jacket Canal is diverted from the North Fork of the White River just below Fawn Creek (Fig. 1). Construction specifications for the canal above Big Beaver Creek Crossing follows: Dimensions - Bottom- - - - - - - - - 22 feet Top Width- - - - -54 feet Water Depth- - - - - - - 5 feet Freeboard Depth- - - - - 3 feet Side Slope- - - - - - -2:1 Capacity- - - - - - - - - - - - - - 360 cfs Length- - - - - - - - - - - - - - -31.1 miles Construction Notes - Earth canals where possible. Concrete flumes on steep hillsides. Siphons under major drainages. bench- Elk Movement across the North Fork of the White River: There are approximately 4.0 miles of steep hillside from where the canal crosses the road below Fawn Creek to Buford (Fig. 3). This stretch of the canal is to be mostly concrete bench-flume, la-feet across, with three siphons under major drainages. From the road crossing to the first siphon is about 1.75 miles. This long stretch of flume bisects a major elk crossing between their calving grounds north of the North Fork and summer range south of the river. Calves would find this obstacle difficult to cross. Elk Movement up Big Beaver Creek: There is another calving area on Oak Ridge (Fig. 1). Most of these elk move up the Big Beaver drainage, but a few cross over into the North Fork drainage. The Yellow Jacket Canal would present an obstacle to elk with calves that move up Big Beaver Creek. The canal at this point has a width of 54 feet from bank to bank and 42 feet at water level. Animals wishing to cross would have to swim. Though the banks are not steep, it would be difficult for elk to climb out of the canal. This would be especially true for calves that are being swept along by the current. Suggested Means of Reducing Obstacles to Movement: To reduce the obstacle to elk movement presented by the bench-flume, cover lOa-foot sections of the flume with a dirt-covered, reinforced-concrete roof. These sections should be spaced every quarter-mile through the area (about 1.75 miles) used by the elk (Fig. 3) and the intervening, open flume fenced on both sides to exclude elk. To reduce the chance of injury of death by drowning to animals that find difficulty crossing the canal, trash racks and ramps (Gubser 1960) should be installed at least at the mouth of each siphon to provide egress from the canal. �N . .. ' ':.:::: :::.::".:".:.~'-:.'.' ...~ . ....... ' "~ .~ -, " "'. ~\ ~ .... " 'i c<o· .\<,' . '. f\) , CD 0'\ Road -- Str.om Siphon --< Diversion .......c;,- Conal L BencJl J ........ ..~ Structure Flum • Elk Trail Covered Flume Figure 3 _ Detailed map of the bench flume between the Fawn Creek crossing and Buford, colorado. �- 287 - Summary The proposed Yellow Jacket Project will irrigate 5,870 acres in the Milk Creek area. A sage grouse strutting ground would be eliminated by the project. Increased damage problems by deer in the section are a matter of conjecture. In the White River area 14,180 acres of critical, deer winter-range will come under irrigation. This would ultimately result in a loss of about 4,750 mandays of deer hunting. The Yellow Jacket Canal will bisect two routes used by elk with calves moving to summer range. The loss of winter range cannot be replaced but can be mitigated by securing land on Oak Ridge that is made accessible to the public. The obstacle produced by the canal can be reduced by covering 100-foot sections of the benchflume with a reinforced-concrete roof and fencing the open flume between to exclude elk. Trash racks and landing mats at the mouths of all siphons would help prevent injury to and drowning of elk swept down the canal. LITERATURE CITED Grieb, J. R. and G. N. Hunter. 1966. Colorado small game hunter harvest survey - - 1965. Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Dept. 24 p. (Mimeo report) Gubser, C. E. 1960. An inquiry into the effects of reservoirs and canals on big-game migrations. Proc. Ann. Conf. Western Assn. State Game and 12 fig. (Typewritten). Fish Comm. 18 p. + Prepared by: David F. Gordon Approved by: Jack R. Grieb --~~~~--~--~~---Wildlife Researcher Project Leader Candidate Date: July, 1967 Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief ��July, 1967 - 289 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT state of COLORADO Project No. W-38-R-21 Work Plan No. 12 Personnel: Job No. 3 Upper Gunnison Project Title of Job: Period Covered: Deer-Elk Investigations J~e 1, 1966 to May 31, 1967 Edgar J. Prenzlow ABSTRACT The project area is located in the Upper Gunnison Basin in west central Colorado and is designed to provide irrigation water for at least 4,480 full service acres and 18,780 supplemental service acres. The project will include approximately 15 miles of canals, but the exact number of reservoirs is ~decided. Estimated project costs exceed $9,000,000.00. The Bureau of Reclamation estimates recreation benefits will average $56,200.00 annually, while the Bureau of Sport Fisneries and Wildlife predicts a loss of 6,000 big game h~ter-days. This study indicates that 8.000 acres of big game winter range in Game Management Units 54, 55 and 67 will be affected which will necessitate a reduction of 800 to 1,000 deer or from 615 elk to 800 elk. Additional reductions may be necessary to eliminate future damage problems. As a result, the citizens of Colorado will lost at least $562,500.00 and 10,880 hunterdays use annually. �- 290 - Objectives: (1) Determine the location and area of deer and elk range affected by the Upper Gunnison Project. (2) Determine the effect of the inundated area on deer and elk range and seasonal movements of these animals. (3) Determine the potential damage by deer and elk to the newly irrigated lands resulting from impoundment. (4) Recommend means of mitigating losses to the deer and elk resource created by the Upper Gunnison Project. Procedures: (1) The Bureau of Reclamation and the Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department's Wildlife Water Resources Division were contacted regarding specific sites, specifications and maps of the Upper Gunnison Project. Field and map surveys were conducted to determine acres of deer and elk range inudated or otherwise affected by the development of roads, canals and other project structures. Results from past Forest Service and Department range transects of the Gunnison area were analyzed to determine browse utilization. (2) Department field men were contacted concerning probable changes in deer and elk range and seasonal movement patterns resulting from impoundment and the accompanying structures. (3) Areas provided with irrigation water from the project were examined to determine use by deer and elk. Potential crop damage was projected based on knowledge of past damage in similar areas. (4) Recommendations were made from analyzed and interpreted data gathered from Bureau and Department surveys to suggest mitigation of losses incurred from the project. �- 291 Upper Gunnison Project (Effects on Wildlife Resources in Colorado) Edgar J. Prenzlow Introduction: The Upper Gunnison Project, a Bureau of Reclamation development under the Colorado River storage Project, is to be undertaken on principle tributaries of the Gunnison River in Gunnison and Sagauche counties in Colorado. The Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department is concerned with the effects of this project on wildlife resources in Game Management Gnits 54, 55 and 67. Big game resources in this area provide an important source of recreation to the people of Colorado. Bureau of Reclamation investigations were made in cooperation with the Colorado Water Conservation Board, the Colorado River Water Conservation District, and the Upper Gunnison River Water Conservancy District. The Bureau's Reconnaissance Report, dated March 1964, appraised three development possibilities entitled Comprehensive, Intermediate and Small. A Notice of Initiation of Investigation, transmitted on 1 March 1966 by the Bureau, stated that irrigation water would be provided for about 18,000 acres of supplemental service and up to 15,000 acres of full service lands. The plan would utilize the existing Taylor Park Reservoir, potential reservoir storage on the East River, Cement Creek and Tomichi Creek, two powerplants, major canals, laterals and drains. No new farm units would be established, thus the full service lands would be integrated into existing farm units. Also, a detailed land classification would identify lands suitable for irrigation. Under consideration would be a plan of cost-sharing provided by the Federal Water Project Recreation Act of 9 July 1965. At a coordination meeting in Grand Junction, Colorado on 15 February 1967, Bureau personnel stated that it was not feasible to instigate either of the Comprehensive or the Intermediate Plans because of the economics of the Upper Gunnison area. A development similar to the Small Plan is feasible but further investigations have to be made. Thus, recomraendations concerning the wildlife resource for this project pertain to the Small Plan. DESCRIPTION OF THE UPPER GUNNISON AREA The project area is in the Upper GunnisJn Basin in west central Colorado. The town of Gunnison, with a 1960 population of 3,477, is the County seat and the major trade center. Other communities in the project area include, Crested Butte, Almont, Parlin, Doyleville, Crookton and lake City. Highway U. S. 50 and Colorado State Highways 114, 135, 149 and 341 serve the area. At present no railroads are in operation. The Gunnison River has numerous tributaries draining the surrounding mountain ranges. The main Gunnison River is formed by the East and Taylor Rivers which meet near the town of Almont and it them flows northwest approximately 130 miles to its confluence with the Colorado River. �- 292 - Gunnison River tributaries include the Ohio, Antelope, Tomichi Creeks and the Lake Fork. The Slate River and Cement Creek are tributaries of the East River while tributaries of Tomichi Creek include Quartz, Cochetopa, Razor and Needle Creeks. Existing agricultural areas average about 8,000 feet in elevation. The growing season averages 80 days between killing frosts. Four inches of precipitation occur during the growing season with an annual mean of 10.6 inches. Livestock production has been the bulk of the economy, however, recreation is becoming more important every year and is affecting land values. The Gunnison area is noted for its fishing rivers, lakes and big game hunting and it is recognized nationally for its winter ski slopes. PROJECT PLAN The Bureau's project is designed to provide for irrigation on a limited scale, fish, wildlife and recreation, but probably not hydroelectric power. A total of 23,260 acres would have irrigation service including 4,480 acres of full service land and 18,780 acres of supplemental service land. The pr~ject is not designed to create any new farm units, but it would affect lands near the Cement Creek, Ohio Creek, Tomichi Creek and Cochatopa Creek (Figure 1). The water supply for the East River area would be available from direct flow from the East River, return flow and storage releases from a potential Cement Creek Reservoir located on Cement Creek. The Cement Creek Reservoir will not be built unless some other state or federal agency can justify sufficient benefits from its construction. Areas around Ohio Creek would be served by storage releases from the existing Taylor Park Reservoir or from the potential Castle Creek or Hinkle Reservoirs located on the headwaters of Ohio Creek. If the Castle Creek Reservoir can be justified by other state or federal agencies, it would eliminate the enlargement of the Gunnison Highline Canal. If this reservoir can not be justified, for recreational use for instance, the Gunnison Highline Canal could divert water from the Gunnison River after being enlarged, aligned and extended. Portions of the water carried in the canal would replace natural flows presently used in the service area of the Highline Canal, therefore releasing the natural flows for upstream use. The water supply for the Tomichi Creek area would consist of storage releases from the potential Elko Reservoir or an alternate Agate Reservoir which would be located north of U. S. Highway 50. Elko Reservoir would be constructed on Tomichi Creek downstream from the town of Sargents. Water from one of the reservoirs would be released from Tomichi Creek and distributed to project land by the potential Crookton Canal and existing canals and laterals. Specific plans were not available on the Banana Ranch Reservoir. It was stated by Bureau personnel at the February 1967 coordination meeting, that in all land areas served only earth-lined canals, laterals �- 293 ,-' '-1 \ , y(," : ~ ~ \ , -iiEMENT L, ,f'C~EEK RES. 14 , I 81 5 E=::J Full Service Cf~'2(' Potential 'I.".& O'-- Land Reservoir .j a~~ rJ Conal - Gaging Station !le'-LIIt OF rJR13F ~l I 12 .-J --L4I "'ILEe ~(.:O.,.~ 'Q 7G~r~p ;.:~ ~ ~_l I./N/rED DEPAlfrMENT ,rATES OF BUREAU 0' THE INTER/Oil RECLAMATION REGION 4 L,,~·I--1.rUPPER GUNNISON PROJECT BANANA RANCH RES. Small development "~~~.46 ,PI" I Fig. 1. No 'tk-' ---~ " -- PRE L / M / N A R Y MAP , plan for the Upper Gunnison Project (Bu. Rec. photo). �- 294 - and drains would be constructed. Also, these structures would be built only if necessary and that recreational facd.l.Lt Les would be provided. Estimated Costs, Project Works and Irrigation Construction costs of project structures are estimated at $9,594,000.00 (Table 1). Table 1. Facility --Estimated costs of project facilities. Cost Cement Creek Dam and Reservoir Banana. Ranch Dam and Reservoir E1ko Dam and Reservoir Gunnison High1ine Canal Crook ton Canal Gunnison Pumping System Cement Creek Forest Service Road Relocation U. S. Highway 50 Municipal and Industrial Replacement Storage Cement Creek Recreation Facilities Los Pinos Laterals Interest during Construction $1,650,000 1,888,000 1,770,000 550,000 460,000 416,000 750,000 700,000 75,000 630,000 10,000 695,000 TOTAL $9,594,000 Approximate capacities of project reservoirs are listed in Table 2 and the approximate sizes and initial capacities of canals are shown in Table 3. Table 2. --Capacities of major project reservoirs in acre-feet. Inactive Active Reservoir Taylor Park (existing) Banana Ranch Cement Creek E1ko Agate (alternate) Castle Creek (alternate) Hinkle (alternate) TOTALS 71,600 4,000 10,000 7,500 6,000 4,500 5,000 108,600 3!~,600 1,500 2,000 2,000 2,000 1,500 2,000 45,600 Total 106,200 5,500 12,000 9,500 8,000 6,000 7 000 154,200 �- 295 - Table 3. Canal --Approximate sizes and initial capacities of project canals. Length (miles) Initial Capacity (sec-ft.) Gunnison Highline Crookton TOTALS , 7.6 7.9 15.5 150 40 190 Acreages that would be furnished irrigation water with the Small Plan are listed in Table 4. Table 4. --Irrigated acres of land on project areas. Cochatopa Ohio Creek Creek Full Service Supplemental Service TOTALS 2,390 2,910 5,300 7,690 7,690 Tomichi Creek Total 2,090 8,180 10,270 4,480 18,780 23,260 Irrigation water with the Small Plan would average 68,890 acre-feet annually, including 42,000 acre-feet presently available and 26,890 acre-feet in increased project supplies. The increased supply by the project would include approximately 27,500 acre-feet 'of storage releases and direct flow diversions and 12,900 acre-feet of return flow. Payment by irrigators would average $58,400 annually. Irrigation benefits are estimated at an average of $498,200 annually for the 100-year period, including $256,500 in direct benefits and $241,700 in indirect and public benefits. Fish, Wildlife and Recreation With inactive storage capacities in each of the potential reservoirs, reserves for fish conservation would be provided. Streamflow would be improved in segments of Cement Creek, Taylor and East Rivers below the dams, and in the Gunnison River and Tomichi Creek below Elko Reservoir. With the Small Plan, according to the Bureau's reports, irrigation could only be provided to small areas of full service lands that are important as big game winter range. The losses expected would only be negligible. Recreation facilities would be provided on new project reservoirs and at the existing Taylor Park Reservoir. Land areas for recreation and facilities for boating, camping and picnicking would be acquired as necessary. All recreation developments would be coordinated with the U. S. Forest Service. Recreation benefits have been estimated by the Bureau at an average of $56,200 annually. �- 296 - Benefit - Cost Analysis The benefit-cost ratio for the Small Plan is estimated at 2.05:1 with all benefits considered. With only the direct benefits the ratio would be 1.32:1. Total benefits of the entire development are estimated to be $683,400 annually (Table 5). Table 5.--Annua1 benefits of the Upper Gunnison Project. Direct Indirect and Source Benefits Public Benefits Irrigation $256,500 $241,700 Fish and Wildlife 129,000 Recreation 56,200 TOTALS $441,700 $241,700 Total $498,200 129,000 56,200 $683,400 The average annual equivalent costs are estimated at $334,075 as shown in Table 6. The total construction cost estimate is $9,594,000 including $8,899,000 of actual cost of construction and $695,000 interest. Table 6.--Average annual equivalent costs of Upper Gunnison Project. Average Annual Item Equivalent Cost Total Project Investment $239,835 Annual Operation, Maintenance and Replacement 65,040 Share of Colorado River Storage Project 29,200 TOTAL $334,075 Cost Allocations Allocations of project costs, including prov~s~ons for replacement storage, are shown in Table 7. Allocations were made by the separable costs-remaining benefits methods. �- 297 - Table 7.--A110cation of costs of the Upper Gunnison Project based on the 1964 Reconnaissance Report. Annual Operation Interest Maintenance Construction During and Replacement Item Costs Construction Costs Irrigation $4,589,400 $344,475 $31,850 Fish and Wildlife 1,814,600 136,100 18,200 Recreation 810,500 28,900 15,250 TOTALS $7,214,500 $509,475 $65,300 Repayment Irrigation construction costs would be repaid over a 50-year period without interest. Of the total allocation about $1,327,500 would be paid by irrigators ($750,000 from ad valorem tax revenues, and the remaining $2,511,900 from Colorado's credits in the Upper Colorado River Basin Fund). Local, non-federal agencies would pay operation, maintenance and replacement costs of recreational facilities which they operated, but the other operating costs of fish, wildlife and recreational facilities would be non-reimbursable. Of the $2,790,100 construction costs and interest during construction allocated to fish, wildlife and recreation, approximately $2,286,200 would be non-reimbursable and $503,900 would be'reimbursab1e with interest. Details regarding the project can be found in the Upper Gunnison Project Reconnaissance Report and the Preliminary Summary Sheet written by J. W. Robbins dated 8 March 1967, where most of the preceeding information was obtained. WILDLIFE VALUES Large deer populations occur within Game Management Units 54, 55 and 67 and much of the area affected by the Upper Gunnison Project is critical, historic winter range. Elk occupy many of these same areas, especially during severe winters when habitat is the most limiting factor .. Sage grouse habitat has become very limited because of overuse by both cattle and wildlife. Sagebrush eradication programs in the area have eliminated vast areas of food and cover. Included as an appendix to this report are facts compiled by Glen Rogers, Game Bird Investigations, concerning losses of sage grouse and habitat. Several other wildlife species inhabit proposed project lands but this report is concerned primarily with the effects on big game. Wildlife Resources Without The Project Big game resources in the Gunnison area are dependent upon the type of habitat that is available and proper management of the species and the habitat. Table 8 shows there are 1,612,800 acres of land in Game Management Units 54, 55 and 67 and who has the responsibility of ownership. �- 298 - Table 8.--Land status in acres of Game Management Units 54, 55 and 67. Tomichi Taylor River Sapinero Total Unit Unit Unit Ownership USFS BLM Private State 248,960 74,880 83,200 7,680 522,240 62,080 31,360 6,400 345,600 201,600 28,800 1,116,800 338,560 143,360 14,080 TOTALS 414,720 622,080 576,000 1.,612,800 Habitat and Wildlife Use.--The exact amount of winter range in the Gunnison area is not known at present but investigations by Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department are attempting to determine these figures. It is estimated there are 222,720 acres outside of the Gunnison National Forest that will be affected by the Upper Gunnison Project. Of these 222,720 acres, approximately 50,000 acres are meadowlands and another estimated 43,000 acres are unavailable for use by wildlife. This leaves approximately 129,000 acres of winter range available on private and Bureau of Land Management lands. Forest Service personnel have determined there are 54,693 acres of key winter range on the Gunnison National Forest adjacent to proposed project lands as shown in Table 9. Table 9.--Acres of key deer and elk winter range on the Gunnison National Forest in Game Management Units 54, 55 and 67. Acres National Forest District Unit 54 55 55 67 TOTAL Taylor River Taylor River Tomichi Tomichi 8,378 25,763 15,030 5,522 54,693 In 1938 ecological plots were established on severe winter ranges just west of the Upper Gunnison Project lands. In 1958 a reconnaissance survey in the same area determined the effects of 20 years use by domestic stock and wildlife. The winter ranges showed a definite downward trend as far as wildlife was concerned. The browse species had decreased from 82% to 54% with estimated 100% use on oakbrush. Other browse species showed utilization of from 70 to 80% (Boyd 1960). Since 1956 a total of 98 extensive range transects were conducted in Game Management Units 54, 55 and 67. Table 10 shows the number of deer and elk days use per acre on the different units. �- 299 - Table 10.--Average deer and elk days use from extensive transects in Game Management Units 54, 55 and 67. Tomichi Uni t Taylor River Unit Sapinero Unit Species 25.4 (8) 16.2 (39)· 26.5 (15) !/ Deer 2.3 (5) 10.5 (21) 4.9 (10) Elk 31.4 27.7 26.7 TOTALS !/ Brackets indicate number of transects. Five intensive transects on these same units averaged 21.3 deer days use per acre. The transects, all located on National Forest lands, have been read over an average period of six years. A two-year investigation determined that aerial census crews counted 53.35% or a ratio of 1:1.54, of the elk on the West Gunnison Elk Trend (Boyd 1960). Table 11 shows that elk trend counts on the three Game Management Units averaged 1,953 elk per year over a ten-year period. When the correction factor of 53.35% is applied to the total aerial count of 1,953, a projected total of 3,661 elk were present in the areas counted. Table 11.--Aerial census of elk in Game Management Units 542 55 arid 67. Trend Area CochetopaEast West Total Saguache Gunnison Gunnison Year 1958 1959 1960 1961 1962 1963 1964 1965 1966 1967 TOTALS 740 851 1,079 983 855 1,406 980 1,546 1,216 1,454 11,110 426 385 441 512 577 626 652 631 860 776 5,886 684 945 245 NC 121 180 148 206 NC NC 2,529 1,850 2,181 1,765 1,495 1,553 2,212 1,780 2,383 2,076 2,230 19,525 AVERAGE 1,111 589 361 1,952 Recent deer numbers for these respective areas are not available because of the need for elk census data in the last few years. Deer trend eounts were .made from 1948 through 1952 on areas in Unit 54 just west of the proposed project lands. A yearly average of 1,283 deer were counted. It has been established that 38.5% or an air-ground ratio of 1:2.59, of the deer in this type terrain are counted from the air (Boyd 1960). Applying this correction factor, a projected average total of 3,332 deer were present in just the one area censused. �- 300 - Harvest and Hunter Use.--The Upper Gunnison River Basin is as famous for its big game hunting as it is for its trout fishing. In the last five years hunting pressure has increased steadily. According to Hunter (1961-1965), deer in the Gunnison area provided recreation for an average of 5,292 hunters (Table 12). During the same five-year period, the Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department received $104,326 annually for license fees from resident and non-resident deer hunters (Table 13). Elk in the Gunnison area provided recreation for 3,950 hunters annually and the Department's revenue averaged $73,226 yearly. Table 14 and 15 list the statistics for the periods 1961 through 1965. Table 12.--Hunting pressure and deer kill in Game Management Units 54, 55 and 67 for the xears 1961-1965. No. of Deer Hunters Year Resident Non-Resident Total Deer Kill 1961 3,161 1,464 4,625 4,998 1962 4,417 1,719 6,136 5,766 1963 3,408 1,461 4,824 3,467 1964 3,819 1,508 5,327 2,984 1965 3,399 2,105 5,504 3,205 TOTALS Five-Year Average 18,204 8,257 26,416 20,420 3,641 1,651 5,283 4,084 Table 13.--Income of the Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department from sale of deer licenses in Game Management Units 54, 55 and 67. Income from Licenses sold to Resident Non-Resident First Second First Second Year License, License License License Total 1961 1962 1963 1964 1965 s 23,707 33,127 25,560 28,642 25,492 8,845 3,640 1,675 3,295 68,760 58,440 60,320 84,200 10,102 8,242 6,690 12,330 $ 82,267 120,835 95,882 97,327 125,317 TOTALS $136,528 $ 27,306 $17,455 $ 4,363 $330,280 $ 66,056 $37,364 $ 9,341 $521,628 $104,326 Average s 58,560 $ s In addition, the citizens of Co1ora~o received $1,297,301 annually from deer and elk hunters in Game Management Units 54, 55 and 67 as shown in Table 16. The. 4,084 deer and 994 elk that were killed annually within the three management units produced approximately 515,040 pounds of processed meat. The �- 301 - average deer yields approximately 75 pounds and an elk about 210 pounds of edible meat. Assuming that each pound is worth $.50 to a consumer, a total of $257,520 of game meat is produced yearly in the Gunnison area. Table 14.--Hunting pressure and elk kill in Game Management Units 54, 55 and 67 for the ~ears 1961-1965. No. of Elk Hunters Total Elk Kill Year Resident Non-Resident 1961 1962 1963 1964 1965 TOTALS Five-Year Average 2,883 3,208 3,229 3,135 3,083 15,538 669 863 785 894 1,004 4,215 3,552 4,071 4,014 4,029 4,087 19,753 1,090 827 1,011 1,032 1,012 4,972 3,107 843 3,950 994 Table 15.--Income of the Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department from sale of elk licenses in Game Management Units 54, 55 and 67. Income From Licenses Sold to Year Resident Non-Residents Total 1961 1962 1963 1964 1965 TOTALS Five-Year Average $ 28,830 32,080 32,290 31,350 30,830 $155,380 $ 33,450 43,150 39,250 44,700 50,200 $210,750 $ 62,280 75,230 71,540 76,050 81,030 $366,130 $ 31,076 $ 42,150 $ 73,226 Wildlife Resources Effected by the Project Wildlife losses occurring because of reclamation projects in the western states can or cannot be significant in relation to total numbers of deer and elk. However, it is the responsibility of the Game, Fish and Parks Department to protect and manage the wildlife resources in Colorado. Humanitarian aspects and public concern are important factors which must be considered by all concerned agencies. �- 302 - Table l6.--Average annual revenue from deer and elk hunters in Game Management Units 54, 55 and 67 based on average hunting pressures in the years 1961-1965. Average Type of Number Amount Spent Hunter Hunters Per Injividual Total Spent Resident Deer Non-Resident Deer Resident Elk NonoolResident Elk 3,641 1,651 3,108 843 $ 90.36 '315.95 126.67 414.09 $ 32,900 521,633 393,690 349,077 TOTALS 9,243 $947.07 $1,297,301 Habitat and Game Use Losses.--The Upper Gunnison Project will be detrimental to big game in the Gunnison Basin. The most significant loss will be winter range at the lower elevations of from 7,200 - 9,000 feet. Wintering areas will be eliminated primarily by the conversion of native range lands to irrigated, agricultural lands rather than by actual inudation by reservoir sites. Loss of habitat at the potential reservoir sites on Cement Creek (12,000 acre-feet) is not particularly significant because this area is primarily summer range of which there is sufficient amounts at present for use by big game herds. However, E1ko Reservoir (9,500 acre-feet), or the alternate Agate Reservoir (8,000 acre-feet) on the Tomichi Creek drainage will affect lands now used as big game winter range (Table 2). About 8,000 acres of new land will be affected. This figure includes the number of acres that will be inudated by potential reservoirs, canals, laterals and drains, and lands lost because of irrigation access roads, fences and other project structures. From 8 to 10 acres of native range are required to winter one deer and about 10 to 13 acres for one elk. An average winter is considered to be five months, usually including the months of November through March. A loss of 8,000 winter range acres in the Gunnison area would necessitate a reduction of the base deer herd by 800 to 1,000 animals, and a reduction of from 615 to 800 elk. This reduction would have to be made in order to utilize the remaining winter range at a desirable rate. A reduction of the wildlife population in this area is significant especially since construction of Blue Mesa Reservoir, the Fruitland Mesa and Grand Mesa Projects located in adjacent Game Management Units, have inudated and/or put sizeable acreages into agriculture that once were critical winter range for both deer and elk. Reservoirs and canals often block migration of big game animals and essential winter range may be cut off, even though it is not inudated. These facilities not only block normal movement, but losses through injury and drowning sometimes occur (Gubser 1960). Scattered observations and short-term studies have determined some of the effects of canals on wildlife movements, but only fragmentary data are available to evaluate the seriousness. It is known that losses of both deer and elk have occurred while attempting to cross reservoirs �- 303 - and canals in Colorado. Wildlife distances, rather they attempt,to are hazardous or not. generally will not detour significant cross these structures whether conditions Bureau personnel, at the 15 February 1967 Coordination Meeting, assured cooperating agencies that all canals would be earth-lined with a 2:1 slope, and that flows would be approximately two feet per second. Danger to game animals is hard to establish without knowing the actual dimensions. These canals, with the above specifications, may be a major hindrance to movements of deer and elk during spring and fall periods when thin ice covers the canals. All canals should be constructed with this· potential hazard in mind~ The Game, Fish and Parks Department expended $180,094 for their Game Damage Program for the fiscal year 1965-66. Damage claims to landowners in Gunnison and Saguache counties alone amounted to $1,406. This does not include costs of prevention (fences, panels, personnel, mileage, etc.) or arbitrators. The fiscal year 1965-66 presented different conditions and problems as compared to 1964-65 in that the winter was mild and deer and elk did little damage to haystacks and crops as in previous years (Coleman 1966). The Upper Gunnison Project will increase the number of animal units of domestic stock on existing farms and ranches, since approximately 4,500 acres of full service land and 18,000 acres of supplemental service will be provided. These animals will have to depend on additional lands during certain times of the year and this again reduces the amount of forage available for wildlife use. It is possible that from 5 to 15 percent of the base herds of both deer and elk will have to be removed to prevent damage to the increased hay production •. Even with this reduction damage claims will increase. The increased cost of game damage control measures will be an additional cost. Upland game will be affected somewhat with the increase of irrigated land. Sage grouse may lose portions of their habitat but irrigation, if interspensed with existing range, sometimes results in beneficial conditions. No significant changes in the populations of cottontail rabbits or mourning doves will be expected. Project reservoirs may increase resting areas for wa terfowl. Revenue and Hunter-Day Losses ..--Deer and elk herds would have to be reduced with a loss of 8,000 acres of winter range in the Gunnison area. Based on a 1961 to 1965 average, each deer in the area was worth approximately $200 and each elk approximately $925 as shown in Table 17. �- 304 - Table l7.--Average annual value per animal harvested in the Gunnison Area. Revenue Deer Elk License Fees $104,326 (Table 13) $ 73,226 (Table 15) Resident Expense 32,900 (Table 16) 393,690 (Table 16) Non-Resident Expense 521,633 (Table 16) 349,077 (Table 16) Meat Value 153,150 (4,084 X 75 X .50¢) 104,150 (994 X 210 X . 5O~) TOTAL VALUE $812,009 $920,143 Annual Harvest 4,084 994 Value per Animal 198 925 $ $ Scott (1963) and Gatlin (1964) both estimated that 6,000 hunter-days, or 10% of 60,000 projected hunter-days use over the lOO-year life of the project, would be lost under the Comprehensive Plan. The author feels this estimate is too conservative, even for the Small Plan. Better estimates of annual financial loss and hunter-days use with the project appear in Table 18. These figures are based on minimum and maximum stocking rates dependent upon wiutering conditions. Table l8.--Annual hunter-day and financial loss with necessary reduction of deer and/or elk in Game Management Units 54 55 and 67. Stocking Herd Value per Financial Loss of Conditions Reduction Animal Loss (annual) Hunter-days Deer Minimum 800 $200 $160,000 3,105 (mild win ter) Maximum 1,000 200 200,000 3,882 (severe winter) Elk Minimum (mild win ter) Maximum (severe winter) 615 $925 $568,875 12,220 800 925 740,000 15,895 If a reduction of 800 elk was necessary, and this is a conservative estimate, a loss of 15,895 hunter-days and $740,000 would result. Minnich (1967), Who made Department recommendations for the San Miguel Project, determined that approximately 8.6 hunter-days were expended to harvest each deer in that area during 1965. Our estimates assumed only 3 hunter-days to harvest each deer and 5 hunter-days to harvest each elk in the Gunnison area. Using this estimate, assume the Department is required to reduce the Gunnison deer and elk herds by 1,000 animal units, say 500 deer and 500 elk. This is an annual loss of $562,000 to the citizens of Colorado each year for the 100year life of the project. There also would be an estimated loss of 10,880 hunter-days each year as shown in Table 19. �- 305 - Table 19.--Projected annual and project-life losses of revenue and hunterdays use in Game Management Units 54, 55 and 67. Financial Animal Value per Hunter-days Loss Loss Reduction Animal s 100,000 462,500 562,500 $ $56,250,000 500 Deer $ 200 925 500 Elk $1,125 TOTALS (Annual) Times 100-Year Life of Project 1,940 8,940 10,880 1,088,000 Other wildlife, big game (bear, bighorn sheep, mountain lion, etc.), upland game (sage grouse, blue grouse), waterfowl (various species) and fur-bearers (various species) will not be affected appreciably under the small development plan. Only a little over 2,500 man days use are expended annually for these species in the Gunnison area. LITERATURE CITED Bureau of Reclamation, Region 4. 1964. Reconnaissance Report. 49 p. 1966. Upper Gunnison Project Colorado, Notice of initiation of investigation. 1 p. Unpubl. 1967. Sunnnary.Sheets - Upper Gunnison Project Colorado (Plan Formulation). 5 p. Unpubl. Boyd, R. J. 1960. Game numbers and range information - to be used in conjunction with Curecanti mitigation and range allocation meetings. Colo. Game, Fish and Parks Dept. 3 p. Unpubl. Coleman, A. D. 1966. Game damage report, 1965-1966. and Parks Dept. Unpubl. Colorado Game, Fish .and Parks Commission. 2 p. Unpubl. 1964. Colo. Game, Fish Fencing specifications. Gatlin, J. c. 1964. Upper Gunnison River Project Colorado. Sport Fisheries and Wildl., U.S.D.I. 14 p. Unpubl. Bureau of Gubser, C. E. 1960. An inquiry into the effects of reservoirs and canals on big-game migrations. Proc. Ann. Conf. Western Assn. State Game and Fish Comm., 18 po Unpubl. Hunter, G. N. 1961-1965. Resume of Colorado's big game season. .. ' Game, Fish and Parks Dep t , , Unpub I, Colo . Minnich, D. W. 1966. San Miguel Project, big game range loss mitigation. Colo. Game, Fish and Parks Dept., Unpubl. Scott, R. W. 1963. Derivation of wildlife use estimates for Upper Gunnison River Project Report. Bureau of Sport Fisheries and Wildl., Branch of River Basin Studies., U.S.D.I.3 p. Unpubl. �- 306 - Reconunendations : Annual wildlife losses valued at $562,500.00 and a loss of 10,880 hunterdays will occur as a result of the Upper Gunnison Project. Compensation to restore pre-impoundment values and possibly enhance the resources and public recreational opportunities should be made for these losses under the terms of Public Law 732, 79th Congress. In order to realize the full potential of wildlife, we reconunend the following: (1) Prime big game winter range should be eliminated from consideration for irrigation or inudation, and if not, any wintering areas affected should be replaced by comparable purchased or reclassified Federal lands. It is paramount that these areas be owned and controlled by the Game, Fish and Parks Department to insure proper game management practices. (2) All canal structures should be located and constructed so they will not interfere with, nor be hazardous to big game movements to or from winter ranges. Properly built canals will reduce injury and drowning of big game. However, without sufficient details of project canals from the Bureau, it is impossible to recommend exact specifications to alleviate losses to the wildlife resources. The Department. suggests, therefore, that all canals should include the following: (a) canals should be provided with trashracks, steps and/or other devices at inlets to siphons to allow egress of trapped animals, or (b) if it is determined that canals are causing game mortalities, all canals should be completely fenced and earthcovered bridges should be placed every 100 yards in areas of heavy migrations to allow free movement of domestic stock and game animals. Bridges should be constructed by specifications as described by Gubser (1960), and fences should abide by specifications set forth by the Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Commission Policy Number 28. (3) Any highway relocations along reservoirs should be placed as close to the high water line as possible to eliminate areas that might attract big game near highways or reservoirs. (4) Adequate access should be provided for recreationists to all reservoirs and any newly acquired lands to be used fer game management areas. (5) The Department is concerned with minimizing possible depredation problems on irrigated areas. Since fish and wildlife conservation is a project purpose, and presumably there will be benefits accruing to other purposes by reason of the nonreimbursable fish and wildlife cost allocation, it is suggested that damage claims resulting from big game on irrigated lands might be foregone. It would be desirable to develop a formal agreement between the Colorado Department of Game, Fish and Parks and the Upper Gunnison River Water Conservancy District whereby these problems would be handled at a minimum cost to the Department (Gatlin 1964). �- 307 - (6) It is further recommended that the Bureau of Reclamation should reimburse monies spent by the Department to investigate the following: (1) The mortality rates in existing reservoirs and canals, (2) the tendency of big game animals to avoid reservoirs during migrations, (3) the distance big game animals will swim when crossing reservoirs, (4) the effects of overpopulation of big game on winter range as a result of obstruction of migrations, (5) the effectiveness of canal escape deVices, (6) the effectiveness of earth-covered bridges and fences for safe canal crossings, (7) the design and specifications of such preventative devices, and (8) the feasibility and costs of constructing and operating these devices. Prepared by: Edgar J. Prenzlow Approved by: Wildlife Researcher Canidate Date: J_u_l~y~,~1~9_6_7 _ Jack R. Grieb Project Leader ��July, 1967 - 309 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO ------~~~~~------- Project No. W-38-R-21 Work Plan No. 12 Title of Job: Indexing Game Research Reports Period Covered: April 1, 1966 through March 31, 1967 Personnel: Deer-Elk Investigations Job No. 1 Raymond J. Boyd ABSTRACT No work was done on this job as all office work had been accomplished during Segment 20. For information on this job refer to the April, 1966 Game Research Report, Federal Aid Division, Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department, pages 1-15 inclusive. �- 310 - Recommendations: (1) Discontinue accomplished this job as' all additional work on indexing is being at the Denver Public Library Conservation Center. Objectives: (1) To prepare an index for all Game Research Reports published by the Colorado Department of Game, Fish and Parks, listing deer-elk investigation literature contained in Progress and Completion reports. (2) To arrange the index to conform to a standard format, that will accommodate all other categories of investigative literature published in Quarterly Progress and Game Research Reports. (3) To make this index available for incorporation Quarterly Progress and Game Research Reports. in a composite index of Procedures: Procedures to fulfill Objectives 1 to 3 above will involve assembling a complete set of Quarterly Progress and Game Research Reports published by the Colorado Department of Game, Fish and Parks. From this master set, a cumulative index and indexes for yearly volumes will be prepared. Indexes will be developed under the major categories of author, species and subject according to the form used by the Journal of Wildlife Ma na gemen t• All work scheduleq for this segment was accomplished in Segment 20 and is reported in the April, 1966 issue of the Game Research Report, Federal Aid Division Colorado Game, .Fish and Parks Department, pages 1 thru IS. This job was inadvertently included in this segment, thus necessitating this negative report in order to clear this job from required reports for Segment 21. Prepared Date: Approved by: Raymond J. Boyd Wildlife Researcher ~J~u~1~y~,~1~9~6~7~ _ by: Jack R. Grieb Project Leader Wayne W. Sand fort Game Research Chief � https://cpw.cvlcollections.org/files/original/dd15cff4616f2c268219715a095b6f5a.pdf 2e22c5dfdc3bc832b8a697a26e824907 PDF Text Text October, 1967 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT state of ---=C:...;O:.:LO=RA.:...:::D-=O _ Project No. W-SS-R-12 Work Plan No. 1 Title of Job: Period Covered: Migratory Bird Investigations Job No. 1 Waterfowl Production Survey April 1, 1966 to May 31, 1966 .. Personnel: Those cooperating on the 1966 counts were: Charles "Pete"Bryant and staff, Monte Vista National Wildlife Refuge; Jack Frost, Charles Hayes, and Mitchell Sheldon, U. S. Bureau of Sport Fisheries and Wildlife; Michael Szymczak, Colorado State University; and Howard Funk, Jack Grieb, Richard Hopper, Laurence Riordan, Wayne Russell, and William Rutherford, Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department. Objectives: To determine, through statistically reliable sampling techniques, the number of ducks and geese, by species, produced on Colorado waterfowl breeding grounds. Techniques Used: Present breeding-pair and production surveys have been consolidated into a breeding-pair inventory in late May and early June. One week of the inventory requires roughtly 30 to 40 hours of aircraft use. All other work is done on the ground, usually in cooperation with local Bureau of Sport Fisheries and Wildlife personnel. On the basis of these studies, reports are made, as required, to the Bureau of Sport Fisheries and Wildlife, which constitutes Colorado's part in the annual cooperative breeding ground survey. The 1966 surveys were conducted within the period May 9 to May 31, During this time, ground counts were made in the Yampa Va~ley and Brown!s Park, aerial counte were made in the South Platte and Cache la Poudre Valleys and in North Park, and intensive aerial coverages combined with air-ground comparison studies were conducted in the San Luis Valley. As for the p~st several years, intensive brood surveys were not conducted this year due to a lack of time. Thus, this final breeding ground report considers only the breeding-pair surveys with last minute notes on weather and water conditions, accompanied by gross observations of early nesting success in the breeding areas. All survey methods and sample areas remained the same as in past years, with the previously mentioned intensive inventory in the San Luis Valley being continued for the third year. Flying was done with a Cessna lSO airplane on all aerial counts. Areas which are sampled by blocks or sections were flown with one observer, while areas sampled by transects were flown with two observers. �-2- Waterfowl Production Survey William H. Rutherford Findings: Weather conditions in Colorado during the spring and early summer were generally good to excellent for nesting waterfowl. Water supplies were low in some areas, even though reservoir storage holdover from last year was high. The high mountain snowpack was below normal, and many meadows which are normally flooded in the spring were dry this year. The effect of the dry spring was particularly noticeable in the Cache la Poudre, South Platte, and Yampa Valleys, where waterfowl nesting habitat was not as abundant as in past years. Table 1. -- Summary of Colorado Duck Breeding Ground Population Estimates, 1966 with 1965 and the Twelve-year Average for Comparison. Total EstimBted Breeding Pairs l2-yr. Ave. Percent Change From From l2-yr. Are~a~================~1~9~6~6====~1~9~6~5====~1=9~5~4~-=19~6~5========19~6=5======A=v=e=r=a San Luis Valley 26,835 26,682 27,715 11 + 0.6 3.2 11 North Park 11,622 9,044 5,106 +.28.5 +127.6 South Platte Valley 6,701 11,155 4,692 - 39.9 + 42.8 Cache la Poudre Valley 2,762 5,057 1,831 - 45.4 + 50.8 Yampa Valley 2,105 3,838 2,956 - 45.2 - 28.8 Brown's Park 392 157 110 +149.7 +256.4 TOTALS 50,417 55,933 '42,410 9.9 + 18.9 II San Luis Valley averages are based on results of 1964 and 1965 coverage only. The much less intensive coverage of previous years is not included in the calculations. Examination of the duck breeding-pair estimates by area (Table 1) reveal that the 1966 counts were down 9.9 percent from 1965 and were 18.9 percent above the 1954-1965 twelve-year average. The reduced water levels and resultant decrease in nesting habitat in 1966 had a noticeable. effect when compared with recent past years, but breeding populations ,vere still considerably above the long-term average. Comparison of individual breeding ground estimates between 1965 and 1966 showed the changes noted in Table 1. The South Platte Valley, the Cache la Poudre Valley, and the Yampa Valley all showed decreases from 1965, and the Yampa Valley and the San Luis Valley showed decreases from the long-term average. All other breeding grounds showed increases in the number of breeding-pairs over 1965 and over the long-term average. . �-3Table 2. -- Species Composition of the Colorado Breeding Duck Population, 1966, 1965, and the 1954-1965 Twelve-year Average. Number of Breedin8 Pairs 1954-1965 Average 1965 1966 Species Composition, Percent 1954-1965 Average 1965 1966 63.16 53.78 57.35 Species 27,470 30,083 28,913 Mallard Bl.ue-wtnged or 9.04 13.08 6.82 3,934 7,314 3,440 Cinnamon Teal 6.61 4.22 5.99 2,876 2,358 3,018 Pintail 8.21 9.83 9.65 3,570 5,501 4,863 Gadwall 1.28 2.15 0.32 558 1,200 164 American Widgeon 3.34 5.30 7.16 1,451 2,964 3,609 Shoveler 2.68 1.48 6.95 1,167 3,890 745 Oreeri-wt.ngedTea1 3.38 3.10 8,03 1,469 1,732 4,050 Redhead 1.22 0.49 1.87 532 276 943 Lesser Scaup 0.22 0.05 0.47 96 27 240 Ruddy Duck 0.01 0.02 5 14 Bufflehead 0.06 27 Canv3sback 0.17 0.05 0.08 72 27 40 Ringneck 0.62 0.98 0.78 270 392 547 American Merganser 100.00 100.00 100.00 43,497 55,933 50,417 TOTALS 11 San Luis Valley averages, included here, are for the years 1964 and 1965 only. Species composition percentages of the breeding duck population showed some changes as noted in Table 2. Teals (all species) and widgeon were down considerably; shovelers, redheads, and scaup showed increases; and other species percentages remained stable. In 1966, the we st ern slope Canada goose breeding area showed an increase in number of geese and total gosling production over both last year and the longterm average. Flock size, in fact, was the largest ever recorded since the survey wa s initiated. The phenology of the season wa s advanced over the past two years, and spring runoff had begun to recede at the time of the survey. Nest hatching was about 90 percent completed, all hatched nests had remained high and dry, and no evidence of nest flooding could be detected. �-4- Table 3. -- Number of Canada Geese by Breeding Classification, Noffat County, Colorado, 1966. Nesting Pairs 2-yr.old 1/ Pairs Estimated J:./ No. Goslings No. Birds In Groups Total Birds Yampa Craig to Juniper Springs 15 7 74 114 232 Juniper to Cross Mountain 13 2 66 40 136 Lily Park· YAMPA TOTALS 21 49 3 12 100 240 89 243 237 605 Green (Brown's Park) 6 11 29 67 130 Little Snake (lower .bridge to state line) 13 11 66 121 235 GRAND TOTALS 68 34 335 406 970 Area 1/ Novice pairs which are potential nesters next year. J:./ This category includes both eggs and goslings counted. Table 4. -- Total Canada Geese Observed, Moffat County, Colorado, 1966. No. Geese Counted Percent Chatille From 1956-65 Ave •. Frem 1965 Area 1966 1965 1956-65 Ave. Yampa River 605 517 280 + 17 + 116 Green River 130 47 54 + 177 + 141 Little Snake River 235 168 179 1/ TOTALS 970 732 513 + 40 + 32 + 31 1/ + 89 1/ Little Snake River not included in survey until 1962. �-5Table 5. -- Number of Canada Goose Goslings Estimated, Moffat County, Colorado, 1966. Percent Chan~ ____ From 1956-65 From 1965 Ave. Number of Goslings Area 1966 1965 1956-65 Ave. Yampa River 240 182 103 + 32 + 133 Green River 29 19 20 + 53 + 45 Little Snake River 66 59 531.1 TOTALS 335 260 176 + 12 + 29 + 24 1/ + 90 1/ Little Snake River not included in survey until 1962. Tables 3, 4, and 5 list the nurrbers, age composition, location, and past years' comparisons of this breeding goose flock. Examination of these data by area shows that the Yampa and Little Snake Rivers continue to contribute most of the volume of production and total geese observed, but that the Green River is making a substantial recovery. The f Low of the Green River is well stablized fo Ll.owfng the initial filling of Flaming Gorge Reservoir, and some good goose nesting islands now exist. In addition, the Brcwn+s Park National Wildlife Refuge is now a reality, and development work has progressed to the point that some of the sloughs (dry ever since the spring floodwaters have been controlled) are being filled by pumping from the river. It appears that the production habitat in Brown's Park now has the potential to be at least as good as during the "good" years of the 1950's. The current surveys indicate an above-average production year and a continuation of the excellent status of the Canada goose flock in Moffat County. The management objective continues to be to increase the size of this flock, particularly because of the predicted increase in habitat quantity and quality in Brown's Park. Fall Flight Prediction: It is anticipated that fall duck flights from Colorado's 1966 production will be above average, though slightly decreased from those of last year. There may be some local surrmerwater shortages, but not great enough to affect brood survival rates. Populations and production of Canada geese indicate an excellent flock status, but hunting restrictions both in Colorado and in California Game Management Unit 22 are still very much in order, to avoid the or~ginal mistake of overharvesting. The recommended bag and possession limit for Moffat County for the ~966 season is one goose. Prepared by: William H. Rutherford Asst. Wildlife Researcher Date: October, 1967 Approved by: Jack R. Grieb Project Leader ��October, 1967 -7JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO Project No. w-88-R-12 Work Plan No. 1 Migratory Bird Investigations Job No. Title of Job: Trapping and Banding Ducks and Geese Period Covered: April 1, 1966 to March 31, 1967 Personnel: 2 Charles Hayes, Jack Randall, Dale Horne, Bureau of Sport Fisheries and Wildlife; Gail Boyd, Brownlee Guyer, Pat Hatch, Alfred Hemmert, Charles Hurd, Robert Kitzmiller, Wilber Ladd, Carl Leonard, Lonnie Martinez, Richard McDonald, Gene Nugent, Perry Olson, Charles Roberts, Errol Ryland, Michael Szymczak, Howard Funk, Jack Grieb, William Rutherford, Richard Hopper, Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department. ABSTRACT Nearly 13,600 ducks of 12 species were trapped and banded during 1966-67 (Segment 12). Mallards accounted for almost 10,000 of this total because of their predominance in the state and because of the emphasis placed on this species in our San Luis Valley and eastern Colorado banding programs. Pintails and green-winged teal were the next most abundant species banded, with 1,394 and 1,087, respectively. Operations in the San Luis Valley consisted of a pre-season banding program in August and September and resulted in the banding of 3,015 ducks, including 2,181 mallards. post-season winter banding in the four major areas of eastern Colorado -- Cache la poudre Valley, South Platte Valley, Bonny Reservoir, Arkansas Valley -- yielded 7,245 ducks, with all except 222 be~ng mallards. Slightly over 3,300 ducks were banded in North Park. Teals, pintails, and mallards comprised most of the total here. One thousand two hundred and six Canada geese were banded in Colorado in 1966-67. Over one-half of these (674) were banded during the winter in the Arkansas Valley. Most of the remaining number resulted from trapping of our resident flocks in the Fort Collins, Boulder, and Denver areas in the Cache la Poudre and South Platte Valleys. �- 8 - INTRODUCTION Trapping and banding activities of Project W-88-R-12 are summarized in this report for the segment-year April 1, 1966 to March 31, 1967. Analysis of band recoveries is carried under a separate job (Work Plan 1, Job 3); thus, no attempt was made to interpret banding data in this report. This report was limited to a tabulation and factual description of numbers and locations of waterfowl banded during the specified segment-year, with comments on trapping techniques and other pertinent information. Objectives: (1) To trap and band ducks and geese for the purpose of accumulating life history, and annual mortality data. migration, (2) To report the species and numbers of ducks and geese banded as part of other W-88-R-12 jobs. Techniques Used.--Banding operations remained about the same as in past years, with work being divided into three phases -- mid-summer, late summer, and winter banding. Mid-summer banding was conducted on Colorado breeding grounds and emphasized the banding of young ducks and geese, and molting adults that nested in the vicinity of the banding sites. Late summer activities consisted of pre-season duck banding in the San Luis Valley as part of the continued intensive study to evaluate the effects of hunting on local ducks in that area (Work Plan 1, Job 12). Emphasis was placed upon the banding of mallards during this operation. Winter banding of ducks was continued in eastern Colorado for the fourth consecutive year as part of the intensive investigation of wintering mallard populations (Work Plan 3, Job 6). This was a post-season operation conducted in four general areas: (1) Cache la Poudre Valley, (2) South Platte Valley, (3) Arkansas Valley, and (4) Bonny Reservoir. Winter banding of geese was confined to the Arkansas Valley in southeastern Colorado. This work was part of a job designed to collect management information on the Short Grass Prairie Canada Goose Population. Three types of traps were used to capture ducks and geese during segment 12. Included were the (1) corral trap for drive-trapping during the mid-summer duck and goose banding phase; (2) Salt Plains trap for late summer and winter bait-trapping of ducks; and (3) cannon-net trap for bait-trapping ducks and geese in the winter. �-9 - TRAPPING AND BANDING DUCKS AND GEESE Richard M. Hopper DUCKS Table 1 shows the number of ducks banded by species and location. 13,600 ducks of 12 species were banded during segment 12. Nearly The mallard, as usual, was the most numerous species in the banded samples during 1966-67. This species accounted for 9,989, or about 74 percent, of the total ducks banded. Slightly over 7,000 of these mallards were banded in conjunction with the intensive study of mallard flocks wintering in eastern Colorado. An additional 2,181 mallards were banded in the San Luis Valley, with the remaining 785 banded in North Park. Summer Banding on Molting Areas.--Summer banding of ducks on molting areas was limited to North Park in Jackson County. Operations here resulted in the banding of 3,304 ducks, a figure substantially above that of most previous years (Table 1). In 1966, banding was done in late July rather than in early August as in past years. It appeared that the peak in numbers of molting ducks occurred at this earlier date. This was particularly true for the early nesting species, such as mallards and pintails. North Park banding operations in 1967 will again be conducted in late July to see if peak numbers of molting birds again occur at this time. Perhaps we have missed many molters in past years by waiting until early August to band. The banded sample of 3,304 ducks in North Park in 1966 consisted largely of the following species listed in order of abundance: green-winged teal, pintail, mallard, cinnamon or blue-winged teal, American widgeon, and gadwall. The latter two species constitute a larger segment of the duck population in North Park than the banded sample indicates, but they are much more difficult to drive into corral traps than the other species. San Luis Valley Cooperative Study.--The San Luis Valley Cooperative Mallard Investigation continued in 1966, with pre-season banding playing an important role in the overall study. Trapping and banding was again conducted from late August through the middle of September. Operations at this time of year resulted in banding mostly flying adults and immatures. Banding quotas were set at 1,000 mallards of each age and sex class, resulting in a goal of 4,000 mallards for the entire Valley floor. State personnel and Federal Game Agents were to band one-half of this total north of the Rio Grande River, with the other half to be banded by Refuge and other federal men in that portion of the Valley south of the Rio Grande River. A state man was also assigned to band as many mallards as possible in the mountains to the west of the Valley floor. �Table l.--Number of ducks banded b~c1es and location, 1966-67. Cache la South North Poudre Platte Bonny Species Park Valley Valley Reservoir Mallard 785 1,013 3,835 999 Gadwall 60 ---American Widgeon 233 1 1 -Green-winged Teal 996 7 2 -Cinnamon and Blue-winged Teal 258 ---Shoveler 12 ---Pintail 932 4 8 -Redhead 4 ---Canvasback ----Lesser Scaup 1 ---Ring-necked Duck 23 --2 TOTALS 3,304 1,025 3,846 1,001 Arkansas Valley 1,176 -129 1 San Luis valleyll 2,181 30 18 81 Totals 9,989 90 382 1,087 r-' 0 --67 ---- 160 1 383 133 -- 4 418 13 1,394 137 1 24 29 3,015 13,564 1,373 1 23 l/Birds banded in Valley north of the Rio Grande River or in the mountains west of the Valley. �- II - Table 1 reveals that 3,015 ducks of 12 species were banded north of the Rio Grande River on the Valley floor and in the mountains to the west. Mallards constituted nearly 2,200 of this total, including 323 from mountain lakes. Pintails, cinnamon or blue-winged teals, and redheads made up most of the remaining total. Additional info~ation can be found in the Job Completion report covering the "San Luis Valley Cooperative Mallard Investigation" (Work Plan 1, Job 12). Winter Duck Banding in Eastern Colorado.--Eastern Colorado mallard banding was again conducted during the winter of 1966-67. This marked the fourth consecutive year of a comprehensive investigation of wintering mallard populations on the high plains of Colorado. Our quota was set at 7,000 mallards, 1,000 in each of seven study areas or management units. An effort was made to obtain equal samples of each age and sex class in each area. Banding was initiated after the close of the hunting season. Slightly over 7,000 mallards were banded as a result of this program during December, 1966 and January and February, 1967 (Table 1). This included the Cache la Poudre, South Platte, and Arkansas valleys and Bonny Reservoir. Only a small number of ducks of other species was banded. Federal personnel cooperated considerably with the banding program in the South Platte and Arkansas valleys. A detailed report on this program will appear as a separate Job Completion Report entitled "Investigation of Mallard Management Units of Eastern Colorado" (Work Plan 3, Job 6). Geese Goose banding in Colorado during segment 12 (1966-67) was conducted in the Cache la Poudre Valley near Fort Collins and Windsor, in the South Platte Valley near Denver and Boulder, in the Arkansas Valley, and at Bonny Reservoir. Table 2 lists the number of Canada geese banded in each area. were banded in the three areas combined. Over 1,200 birds Summer banding of our resident flock of Canada geese was again accomplished on two lakes in the Cache la Poudre Valley near Fort Collins. This operation resulted in banding 181 molting adults and locally produced goslings. An additional 124 molting adult geese were captured in the Denver area, transported, neck banded, leg banded, and released on New Windsor Reservoir near Windsor and Reservoir No. 8 near Fort Collins. This was an attempt to relieve overcrowding in the Denver area. Thus, 305 Canada geese were banded in the Cache la Poudre Valley during segment 12. One hundred and sixteen goslings were obtained from the Denver area flock for transplanting elsewhere in the state as part of our continuing program aimed at increasing the number and distribution of nesting geese in Colorado. These goslings were hand-reared, transported, neck banded, leg banded, and released on two water areas near Boulder in the South Platte Valley. �- 12 - Other South Platte Valley bandings included 33 adult geese at the Denver City Park and 58 adults and locals at Valmont Reservoir near Boulder. These birds were released immediately after banding at the trapping site. Total number of geese banded in the South Platte Valley during Segment 12 amounted to 207 birds. Twenty goose eggs were taken from the local flock at Bonny Reservoir and hatched at the Fort Collins Research Station. Twenty banded goslings were later returned to the goose ponds below Bonny Dam. Winter goose banding was again initiated in the Arkansas Valley in 1966-67, after a pause in banding efforts during the previous year. It was concluded that a sample of the Short Grass Prairie Canada Goose population wintering in southern Colorado should be banded annually in order to maintain our contact with this segment of the population and to detect changes within that may indicate necessary changes in management practices. An annual quota of 1,000 geese was set for this area. However, during segment 12 only 674 Canada geese were banded because of difficult trapping conditions. This information will be reported in detail under "Arkansas Valley Canada Goose Flock Management Studies" (Work Plan 2, Job 5). Table 2.--Number of Canada geese banded by location, Location Number Cache la Poudre Valley South Platte Valley Bonny Reservoir Arkansas Valley Total Prepared Date: by: 1966-67. Richard M. Hopper Asst. ~ildlife Researcher ~O~~~t~o~b~e~r~,~1~9~6~7~ _ 305 207 20 674 1 206 Approved by: Jack R. Grieb Project Leader Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief �October, 1967 - 13 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO Project No. w-88-R-12 Work Plan No. 1 Migratory Bird Investigations Job No. 3 Title of Job: Analysis of Waterfowl Banding Data Period Covered: April 1, 1966 to M3.rch 31, 1967 Personnel: Richard M. Hopper Objectives: Analyze recoveries from all species of waterfowl banded in North Park to determine distribution of recoveries between geographic areas between years by age class, the annual mortality of each waterfowl species, and differences in annual mortality between age classes of the waterfowl sp~cies. Techniques Used: (1) Compare distribution of recoveries between geographic areas between years. (2) Compare distribution of recoveries between geographic areas between years by age class. (3) Calculate the annual mortality using the "time specific" or "composite dynamic" mortality ana~sis method. Findings: This is a negative report. Work on other project jobs left no time to devote to this one. Hopefully, a duplicate deck of IBM recovery cards for North Park bandings can be obtained from the banding office next segment. An attempt will be made to initiate this analysis at that time. Prepared by: Richard M. Hopper Wildlife Researcher Date: October, 1967 Approved by Jack R. Grieb Project Leader Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief ��October, 1967 - 15 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO Project No. w-88-R-12 Work Plan No. 1 Title of Job: Period Covered: Migratory Bird Investigations Job No. 5 Waterfowl Kill Survey 1966 ABSTRACT Techniques were similar to those used in the past with hunters' names drawn in a mechanical random fashion from duplicate license stubs of current license sales. One follow-up was sent to non-reporting hunters after an interval of two to three weeks. The questionnaire remained the same in form and context as last year. Questionnaires were sent to 13,096 randomly selected license buyers in 1966 and a total of 9,415 responded for a return of 71.8 per cent. Of the 9,415 returns, 5,785 reported hunting, and 3,630 bought a license but did not hunt. Most of the hunters in this last category were found .to have purchased a combination hunting and fishing license which was used for fishing only. Thus, of the total license sales of 188,050 during 1966, it is estimated that 114,492 hunters hunted one or more species of small game. This is a strong increase in the number of hunters (89,257) estimated for 1965. ��- 17 WATERFOWL KILL SURVEY Jack R. Grieb Objectives: ;To estimate the state harvest of waterfowl for the 1967 hunting season by species, by county, and by intervals of the season. Colorado duck stamp sales are plotted in Table 1 revealing that the 1966 sale of 29,377 was significantly larger than the previous year. In fact, this is the most duck stamps sold since 1960, the beginning of the decrease in duck population. This increase is attributed to relaxation of hunting regulations for the 1966 season on the eastern slope. Undoubtedly, the experimental San Luis Valley duck season and the experimental teal season also encouraged hunters to participate. Table 1 -- Duck Stamp Sales for Colorado Year Number of Stamps Sold Per Cent Change From Previous Year 32,450 1954 + 20.5 39,107 1955 + 20·5 1956 36,303 7·2 41,794 1957 + 15·1 .02 41,897 1958 + 31,431 24.9 1959 1960 30,592 2.7 1961 24,854 - 18.8 - 28.8 1962 17,701 22,940 1963 + 29.6 1964 25,282 + 10.2 - 18.8 1965 20,537 1966 + 43.0 29,377 ==~======================================================================== Table 2 classifies Duck Stamp buyers by the type of hunting in which they engaged for the past 13 years. Thus, it appears that number of duck and goose hunters were highest since 1960. There appeared to be an increase in days hunted for both ducks and geese which generally depicts the increase in hunter activity during the 1966-67 season. �- 18 - Duck Harvest Hunting statistics of the 1966 season are tabulated and compared with past years in Table 3. This reveals that total estimated retrieved kill of 116,205 was significantly greater than the previous year and the largest since 1960. The reason the harvest increased so strongly was due to ,the large increase in hunters as a result of relaxed hunting regulations, favorable publicity, and special seasons which offered a variety of hunting opportunity this past fall. In addition, it was estimated that 23,993 birds were crippled for a wounding loss of 17.1 per cent permitting an estimated total hunting mortality of 140,198 ducks for 1966 in Colorado. Table 2 -- Estimated Number of Duck and Goose Hunters, Average Number of Days Hunted and Season Length, by Year Year Number of Duck Hunters Number of Goose Hunters Average Number Days Hun,ted For Ducks Geese Season Length (days) Ducks Geese 1954 1955 1956 1957 1958 1959 1960 1961 1962 1963 1964 1965 1966 31,834 37,816 34,793 37,166 38,773 29,060 29,480 22,920 13,918 17,989 19,189 15,374 23,635 12,136 17,634 12,477 12,057 14,705 13,647 14,107 11,245 9,159 10,841 13,678 1l,344 15,807 7.64 60 75 75 75 90 50 60 30 25 11 60 8.87 7·37 6.52 5.78 5·70 6.05 4.40 5·27 5.66 6.30 5.62 5.96 6.64 7·37 5·53 6.25 35 II 40 II 36 II 60 II 5-10 60 60 60 60 75 75 60 75 75 75 75 75 Bag and Possession Limit Ducks Geese 2-2 2-2 2-2 2-2 2-2 2-2 2-2 2-2 2-4 41 2-2 4-8 "21 2-2 4-8 "21 2-2 4-8 31 2-2 3-6 "?.I 2-2 5-10 5-10 5-10 4-8 4-8 3-6 3-6 =========================================================================== ~I Hunting regulations for East Slope. West Slope had a general season of 75 days with 4 ducks in bag, and 8 in possession in 1962, and 90 days, 4 in bag and 8 in possession in 1963, 1964 and 1965 j and 90 days 5 in bag and 10 in possession in 1966. gj Two mallards allowed in bag, and four in possession on East Slope. II One mallard and pintail allowed in bag and two in possession on East Slope, three mallards or three pintai1s on West Slope. ~I One mallard in bag and two in possession on East Slope. �- 19 Species composition of the 1966 bag is listed in Table 4 and compared with the average of the twelve previous years. These data indicate that total duck harvest was about 20 per cent less than the twelve-year average because of restricted regulations, reduced number of hunters, and lower average seasonal bag than in the past. The mallard remains the most common species taken with the green-winged teal next. Table 3 -- Duck Harvest Statistics, 1954 - 1966. Date Slope 1954 1955 1956 1957 1958 1959 1960 1961 1962 TOTAL 1963 East West TOTAL 1964 East West TOTAL 1965 East West TOTAL 1966 Average Seasonal Bag Total Estimated Harvest Wounding Percent Loss Number 31,834 37,816 34,793 37,166 38,773 29,480 22,920 5.6 6.7 5·9 6.8 6.1 4.2 5.0 3.8 179,856 253,367 185,737 254,587 236,515 122,924 147,400 86,408 14.5 13·1 16.3 14.1 12·3 15·5 13·1 21.4 30,396 38,182 36,195 41,679 33,088 22,417 22,257 23,608 210,252 291,549 221,932 296,266 269,603 145,341 169,667 11,349 2,569 13,918 2.6 3·5 2.8 29,507 38,499 13·1 4,603 1,187 5,790 34;110 8z992 13·5 11.7 15,627 2,362 17,989 5.1 3.6 4.9 80,167 8,503 88,670 10·7 9·7 10.6 9,636 916 10,552 89,803 9,419 99,222 16,311 2,878 19,189 4.0 4.0 4.0 65,2l~4 11,512 76,756 10.6 10.4 10.6 7,764 1,335 9,099 73,008 12,847 85,855 12,747 2,627 15,374 5.0 4.3 4.9 64,245 75,567 18.7 15·4 18.2 12,007 1,744 13,751 76,252 13(066 89,318 19,494 4,141 23,635 5·0 4.4 4.9 97,860 18,345 n6,205 16.4 20.4 17.1 19,278 4,715 23,993 117,138 23,060 140,198 29,060 East West East West TOTAL Total Estimated Hunting Mortality Number of Hunters l1z322 ============================================================================ 110;016 10z179 44,289 �- 20 - Table 4 -- Species Composition of the Bag. 1966 Number Killed % of M3.llard Pintail Green-wing Teal Blue-wing Teal Baldpate Gadwall Shoveller Scaup Redhead Canvasback Others and Unknown 77,927 5,712 11,253 4,752 2,006 4,471 1,694 1,987 67.1 i+.9 9.8 4.1 1.7 3.8 1.4 1.7 6z403 TOTALS 116,205 5·5 100.0 Species Total l2-Year Average 1954 - 1965 Number of Killed Total % 98,721 4,729 13,254 5,618 1,580 4,105 1,653 1,075 1,176. 995 13,029 145,935 67.7 3·2 9·2 3.8 1.1 2.8 1.1 0·7 0.8 0·7 8.9 100.0 % Change 1966 From l2-Year Average Harvest - 21.1 + 20.8 - 15.1 - 15.4 t 27.0 + 8·9 + 2·5 + 84.8 - 50.8 - 20.4 =========================================================================== Comparison of eastern and western slope species composition is made in Table 5 revealing that despite the longer hunting season which began earlier in the fallon the western slope, the mallard made up an even greater per cent of the total harvest there as compared to the east slope. This probably indicates a lack of other species in this area during the entire fall period so that the hunting season, regardless of when set, is bound to place pressure mainly on mallards. Table 5 -- Comparison of Species Composition Between East and West Slope Duck Harvest. East Slope West Slope Number Killed % of Total Number Killed % of M3.llard Pintail Green-wing Teal Blue-wing Teal Baldpate Gadwall Shoveller Scaup Others and Unknown 62,827 5,088 10,373 4,404 1,859 4,306 1,566 1,859 5 578 64.2 5.2 10.6 4.5 1.9 4.4 1.6 1.9 5.7 15,100 624 880 348 147 165 128 128 825 82.3 3.4 4.8 1.9 0.8 0·9 0.7 0·7 4.5 TOTAL 97,860 100.0 Species =======================================~================================== Total 100.0 �- 21 - Duck kill and hunting pressure by 10-day intervals of the season for both east and west slopes is tabulated in Table 6. These data show that harvest for each area was fairly evenly divided over the season intervals indicating that no one part of the season was better than the other. Table 6 -- Ducks Bagged and Hunting Pressure by 10-day Intervals of the 1966 Season. Estimated Birds Bagged No. of % Total Ducks Kill Dates Estimated Hunting Pressure No. of Total Hunters Hunters % EAST SLOPE Sept. 10 - 18 1/ 1 - 18 Oct. 22 - 31 Nov. 1 - 10 Nov. 11 - 20 Nov. 21 - 30 Dec. 1 - 10 Dec. 11 - 20 .Oc t , g; 6,195 21,275 14,082 12,046 15,032 11,880 9,071 8.279 6.33 21.74 14.39 12·31 15.36 12.14 9·27 8.46 1,378 3,255 4,056 4,266 5,067 4,424 3,415 2,789 5.83 13·77 17.16 18.05 21.44 18.72 14.45 11.80 10.65 7.54 12.11 15.04 12.33 10·52 11.72 12.63 7.46 754 785 1,059 1,508 1,075 851 1,050 818 610 3.19 3.32 4.48 6.38 4.55 3.60 4.48 3.46 2.58 WEST SLOPE Oct. Oct. Nov. Nov. Nov. Dec. Dec. Dec. Dec. 11 - 20 21 - 30 1 - 10 11 - 20 21 - 30 1 - 10 11 - 20 21 - 30 31 - Jan. 9 1,954 1,383 2,221 2,759 2,262 1,931 2,150 2,317 1,368 =========================================================================== !I Experimental Teal Season -- Eastern Slope Only. ~/ Experimental San Luis Valley Duck Season. San Luis Valley Experimental Season -- This was the fourth year of an experimental duck hunting season in the San Luis Valley. Reasons for the season and results have been reported to details elsewhere, and will not be repeated. However, information gained through this survey on this season will be presented here. According to questionnaire data, 3,255 hunters bagged an estimated 21,275 ducks in the San Luis valley during the experimental season, October 1-18, 1966. This is compared to an estimated 1,453 hunters and 12,078 retrieved kill for the previous year. The indication that kill was increased in 1966 substantiates observations made during the season. However, number of hunters is rather meaningless since they refer to successful hunters rather than estimating total hunters. �- 22 - Goose Harvest Hunting statistics of the goose season presented in Table 7 estimate 15,807 hunters bagged an average of 1.9 geese during the season for a total estimated harvest of 30,033 birds. In addition, another 5,832 birds were reported wounded but not retrieved for a wounding loss of 16.2 per cent. This permits a total hunting mortality estimate for Colorado during 1966 of 35,865 geese. Table 7 -- Goose Harvest statistics, 1954 - 1966. Year Number of Hunters Average Seasonal Bag Total Estimated Harvest Wounding Loss Percent Number Total Estimated Hunting Mortality 12,136 17,364 11,541 12,057 14,705 13,647 14,107 11,245 0.7 1.0 1.0 1.2 1.3 1.6 1.1 1.3 8,168 17,711 11,310 14,589 19,704 21,972 15,659 14,056 22.8 18.3 21.6 23·5 22·3 17.8 20·7 24.5 2,410 3,884 3,116 4,473 5,655 4,730 4,087 4,568 10,578 21,248 14,426 19,062 25,359 26,702 19,746 18,624 East West 8,828 331 1.5 1.3 13,241 430 19·5 3,218 TOTAL 9,159 1.5 13,671 19·1 ° 3,218 East West 10,462 379 17,785 114 15.2 3,184 TOTAL 10,841 1.7 0·3 1.6 17,899 17.8 ° 3,184 East West 13,295 383 5,624 13,6rr8 23,931 192 24,123 19·0 0 TOTAL 1.8 0·5 1.7 18.9 5,624 29,747 East West 10,941 403 1.2 1.0 13,239 419 24.6 27·0 3,257 113 16,496 532 TOTAL 11,344 1.2 13,658 24.7 3,370 17,028 East West 15,443 364 1.9 1.1 29,613 420 16.2 5,745 87 35,358 507 TOTAL 15,807 1.9 30,033 16.2 5,832 35,865 Slope 1954 1955 1956 1957 1958 1959 1960 1961 1962 1963 1964 1965 1966 ° ° ° ° 11.. 16,889 11.. 11.. average goose harvest is 15,169 -- 1954 - 1966. =========================================================================== y No cripples reported on the west slope. 20,969 114 21,083 =========================================================================== Twelve-year 16,459 430 29,555 192 �- 23 - Species composition of geese killed was similar between all ten years of the survey being 98 per cent or above Canada geese. The remaining percentages were "other and unknown" species of geese, and were probably mainly Canada geese which t2e hunters were not able to correctly identify. It is known that there were a few snow geese taken in Colorado during this hunting season and an even smaller number of white fronts. The 1966 goose hunting season was characterized by good water and good food conditions in the Arkansas Valley during the fall and winter periods. Census figures taken at weekly intervals in the Arkansas Valley indicated a large number of geese present in Colorado during the season. These birds seemed to be distributed on all water bodies in the Valley with major concentrations in the Two Buttes area. In addition to the Arkansas Valley numbers of wintering geese in the DenverGreeley - Fort Collins area increased significantly and undoubtedly contributed to the excellent harvest. Comparison of the 1966 season with past years shows a strong increase in number of hunters and total harvest. Average seasonal bag was the largest ever recorded for the state and this is the greatest number of hunters cince 1955 with the most geese killed since the survey began in 1954. During the last three years, goose permits, a six bird season limit, and other special regulations were established for Larimer County. A random sample drawn from the 3,996 permits issued indicated that 1,086 obtained permits but did not use them, 2,910 hunters hunted geese one or more times bagging 764 geese in Larimer County, 409 birds in Weld County and 11 birds in Boulder County for a total harvest of 1,184, an increase of 41.3% over the 838 birds bagged in 1965. Waterfowl Harvest by County The reader is cautioned that information presented in this section is subject to a great deal more error in accuracy than estimates in previous sections, since the original sample has been broken down to county, thus decreasing the size of sample on which to base estimates. This is probably even more true of geese than ducks, because there were many more duck hunters. Consequently, it is realized that in some counties, both duck and goose kill have been over-estimated, and in others, underestimated. However, despite this error, these data represent the most accurate information on this subject possible at the present time. Tables 8 and 9 compare the 1966 duck and goose kill respectively with average of previous seasons, by county, within each waterfowl region. These regional divisions of the State were located on the basis of waterfowl migration, location, and topography; and permit a closer evaluation of kill, yearly changes in kill, and the effect of different types of hWlting seasons on various portions of Colorado. �- 24 - Table 8 -- Duck Kill by Region and County. Estimated 1966 Waterfowl 1966 Duck Kill Hunting Pressure Region Number Number Per Cent Per Cent and County Killed of Total Hunter of Total Twelve-year Average 1954-1966 Number Per Cent Killed of Total East Slope NORTHEAST Cheyenne Kit Carson Lincoln Logan Morgan Phillips Sedgwick .Washington Yuma NORTHEAST TOTAL 196 1,076 979 4,697 5,872 0.2 1.1 1.0 4.8 6.0 1,957 1,468 lz664 17,909 SOUTHEAST Baca Bent Crowley Huerfano Kiowa Las Animas Otero Prowers Pueblo SOUTHEAST TOTAL CENTRAL Adams Arapahoe Boulder Douglas Elbert El Paso Jefferson Larimer Weld CENTRAL TOTAL 2.0 1.5 1.7 18.3 19 234 195 1,171 1,229 19 468 312 351 3,998 489 2,838 1,272 391 1,174 293 1,272 2,055 2,349 12,133 0·5 2·9 1.3 0.4 1.2 0·3 1.3 2.1 2.4 12.4 6,949 2,838 4,110 98 98 685 391 8,613 18z692 42,474 7.1 2·9 4.2 0.1 0.1 0·7 0.4 8.8 19·1 43.4 0.1 1.2 1.0 6.0 6.3 0.1 2.4 1.6 1.8 20·5 507 1,515 1,188 7.462 9,364 224 4,269 2.235 3,381 30,145 0.4 1.2 0·9 5.9 7.5 0.2 3.4 1.8 2.7 24.0 175 897 331 39 273 156 292 448 565 3,176 0·9 4.6 1.7 0.2 1.4 0.8 1.5 2.3 2·9 16.3 1,345 3,222 3,04.4 702 1,694 1,190 1,934 4,243 3,295 20,670 1.1 2·5 2.4 0.5 1.3 0·9 1.5 3·5 2·7 16.4 1,287 604 936 19 78 195 117 2,028 3z1OO 8,364 6.6 3·1 4.8 0.1 0.4 1.0 0.6 10.4 15·9 42.9 7,557 1,399 7,532 121 309 1,029 1,522 11,158 26,974 57,601 6.0 1.1 6.0 0.1 0.2 0.8 1.2 8.8 21.5 45.7 �- 25 Table 8 -- Duck Kill by Region and County (continued). Waterfowl Region and County 1966 Duck Kill Number Per Cent Killed of Total SAN LUIS VALLEY Alamosa Conejos Costilla Rio Grande Saguache 5,969 2,544 1,174 8,025 SAN LUIS VALLEY TOTAL Estimated 1966 Hunting Pressure Number Per Cent Hunters of Total Twelve-year Average 1954-1966 Number Per Cent Killed of Total 5z774 6.1 2.6 1.2 8.2 5·9 897 468 214 1,171 682 4.6 2.4 1.1 6.0 3·5 3,597 2,376 577 4,884 3z 703 2·9 1.9 0.4 3·9 2·9 23,486 24.0 3,432 17.6 15,137 12.0 391 98 98 587 0.4 0.1 0.1 0.6 78 19 19 214 0.4 0.1 0.1 1.1 493 0.4 307 890 0.2 0.8 293 98 293 0·3 0.1 0·3 117 19 58 0.6 0.1 0·3 182 193 326 50 0.1 0.1 0.3 1,858 1.9 524 2.7 2,441 1.9 1,630 542 743 890 8.6 2.8 4.0 4.7 3,805 20.1 HIGH COUNTRY Chaffee Clear Creek Custer Fremont Gilpin Jackson Lake Park Teller HIGH COUNTRY TOTAL w~t Slope NORTHWEST Garfield Moffat Rio Blanco Routt 1,945 440 587 330 10.6 2.4 3.2 1.8 50 11 16 13 NORTHWEST TOTAL 3,302 18.0 90 12.2 2·7 3·9 3.1 21.9 WEST CENTRAL Delta Mesa Montrose Ouray 3,871 4,807 1,394 21.1 26.2 7.6 64 92 41 2 15.4 22.0 9·9 0.4 2,883 4,629 2,567 196 15.2 24.5 13.5 1.0 10,072 54.9 199 47.7 10,275 54.2 WEST CENTRAL TOTAL �- 26 - Table 8 -- Duck Kill by Region and County (continued). Waterfowl Region and County 1966 Duck Kill Number Per Cent Killed of Total Estimated 1966 Hunting Pressure Number Per Cent Hunters of Total SOUTHWEST Archuleta Dolores Hinsdale La Plata Mineral Montezuma San Juan San Miguel 37 18 0.2 0.1 5 2 o .)~ 1,137 92 1,266 110 220 6.2 0·5 6.9 0.6 1.2 29 3 16 3 6 0.8 3·9 .8 1.5 SOUTHWEST TOTAL 2,880 15·7 64 Eagle Grand Gunnison Pitkin Summit 385 477 605 367 257 2.1 2.6 3·3 2.0 1.4 HIGH COUNTRY TOTAL 2,091 11.4 1.2 Twelve-year Average 1954-1966 Number Per Cent Killed of Total 144 28 46 1,536 110 803 0.7 0.1 0.2 8.2 0.6 4.3 188 1.0 15.6 2,855 15.1 14 18 16 5 8 3.5 4.3 3·9 1.2 1.9 824 323 554 249 71 4.4 1.7 2·9 1.3 0.3 61 14.8 2,021 10.6 30,145 20,670 57,601 15,137 2,441 3,805 10,275 2,855 2,021 144,950 20.8 14.2 39.8 10.4 1.7 2.6 7.1 2.0 1.4 100.0 125,994 18,956 86.9 13.1 7.0 HIGH COUNTRY Summary by Region NORTHEAST 17,909 SOUTHEAST 12,133 CENTRAL 42,474 SAN LUIS VALLEY 23,486 HIGH COUNTRY(E) 1,858 NORTHWEST 3,302 WEST CENTRAL 10,072 SOUTHWEST 2,880 HIGH COUNTRY(W) 2,091 TOTAL OF REGION 116,205 15.4 10.4 36.6 20.2 1.6 2.8 8.7 2·5 1.8 3,998 3,176 8,364 3,432 524 90 199 64 61 100.0 19,908 20.1 15·9 42.1 17.3 2.6 0.4 1.0 0·3 0·3 100.0 EAST SLOPE WEST SLOPE 84.2 15.8 19,494 414 97·9 2.1 97,860 18,345 ================~========================================================== �- 27 - Grossly, it appears that the increase in duck harvest was mainly in the North-Central Region and the San Luis Valley. This indicates that hunters were still not willing to travel to the eastern parts of the State because of the two mallard limit; but, they were very willing to travel to the San Luis Valley for five mallards. The eastern slope again contributed the bulk of the'duck harvest being about 85% in 1966 which is similar to past years. Weld was again the high harvest county. Table 9 -- Goose Kill by Region and County. Waterfowl Region and County 1966 Goose Kill Number Per Cent Killed of Total Estimated 1966 Hunting Pressure Number Per Cent Hunters of Total Twelve-year Average 1954-1965 Number Per Cent Killed of Total East Slope NORTHEAST Cheyenne Kit Carson Lincoln Logan Morgan Phillips Sedgewick Washington Yuma 150 0.5 150 390 330 0.5 1.3 1.1 60 90 30 Baca Bent Crowley Huerfano Kiowa Las Animas Otero Prowers Pueblo SOUTHEAST TOTAL NORTHEAST TOTAL 0.2 0.3 0.1 63 16 126 79 775 16 79 190 47 0.4 0.1 0.8 0.5 4.9 0.1 0.5 1.2 0.3 16 36 9 144 536 2 51 79 106 0.0 0.2 0.0 1.0 3.5 0.0 0.3 0.5 0.6 7,930 4,836 751 30 6,758 120 1,231 2,463 150 26.4 16.1 2.5 0.1 22·5 0.4 4.1 8.2 0·5 2,909 2,102 695 47 1,834 63 474 1,091 142 18.4 13·3 4.4 0.3 11.6 0.4 3.0 6.9 0·9 4,960 1,524 685 142 2,937 120 284 2,317 185 31.1 9.5 4.3 0.9 18.4 0·7 1.7 14.6 1.1 24,269 80.8 9,357 59·2 13,154 --~------------------~------~~------------------1,200 4.0 1,391 8.8 979 6.1 SOUTHEAST �- 28 - Table 9 -- Goose Kill by Region and County (continued). Waterfowl Region and County 1966 Goose Kill Number Per Cent Killed of Total CENTRAL Adams Arapahoe Boulder Douglas Elbert El Paso Jefferson Larimer Weld 60 1,382 1,712 CENTRAL TOTAL SAN LUIS VALLEY Alamosa Conejos Costilla Rio Grande Saguache 360 150 30 1.2 0·5 0.1 Twelve-year Average 1954-1965 Number Per Cent Killed of Total 522 237 63 3·3 1.5 0.4 309 146 56 2.0 0·9 0·3 16 0.1 0.2 4.6 5·7 16 1,755 lz518 0.1 11.1 9.6 7 9 148 193 580 0·9 1.3 3·7 3,694 12·3 4,127 26.1 1,448 9.1 120 240 0.4 0.8 95 142 142 0.6 0·9 0·9 30 0.1 31 0.2 6 139 117 2 2 0.0 0·9 0·7 0.0 0.0 390 1.3 410 2.6 266 1.6 30 30 0.1 0.1 63 16 16 0.4 0.1 0.1 6 21 0.0 0.0 0.2 47 16 0-3 0.1 3 0.0 SAN LUIS VALLEY TOTAL HIGH COUNTRY (EAST) Chaffee Clear Creek Custer Fremont Gilpin Jackson Lake Park Teller HIGH COUNTRY TOTAL Estimated 1966 Hunting Pressure Number Per Cent Hunters of Total 60 0.2 158 10. 30 0.2 0.1 0·9 0.2 0.2 1.4 14 65 0.0 0.4 79 0.4 West Slope NORTHWEST Garfield Moffat Rio Blanco Routt 150 0·5 90 0·3 16 142 31 31 NORTHWEST TOTAL 240 0.8 220 �- 29 Table 9 -- Goose Kill by Region and County (continued). Waterfowl Region and County 1966 Goose Kill Number Per Cent Killed of Total WEST CENTRAL Delta Mesa Montrose Ouray 30 WEST CENTRAL TOTAL 30 0.1 0.1 SOUTHWEST Archuleta Dolores Hinsdale T.i.J. Plata ~tLneral MonteL:uma San Juan San Miguel SOUTHWEST 'IDTAL HIGH COUNTRY (WEST) Eagle Grand Gunnison Pitkin Summit HIGH COUNTRY TOTAL Estimated 1966 Hunting Pressure Number Per Cent Hunters of Total 32 16 0.2 0.1 16 0.1 64 0.4 32 0.2 32 0.2 Twelve-year Average 1954 - 1965 Number Per Cent Killed of Total 9 8 20 0.0 0.0 0.2 37 0.2 0.0 30 0.1 16 0.1 4 30 90 0.1 0·3 16 16 0.1 0.1 4 12 .1 150 0·5 48 0.3 20 .1 8.8 59.2 26.1 2.6 1.0 1.4 0.4 0.2 0·3 979 13,154 1,448 266 30 79 37 2 20 6.1 82.3 9.1 1.6 0.2 0.4 0.2 0.0 0.1 Summary by Region NORTHEAST SOUTHEAST CENTRAL SAN LUIS VALLEY HIGH COUNTRY(E) NORTHWEST WEST CENTRAL SOUTHWEST HIGH COUNTRY(W) 1,200 24,269 3,694 390 60 240 30 4.0 80.8 12·3 1.3 0.2 0.8 0.1 150 0·5 1,391 9,357 4,127 410 158 220 64 32 48 TOTAL OF REG ION 30,033 100.0 15,807 100.0 16,015 100.0 EAST SLOPE WEST SLOPE 29,613 420 98.6 1.4 15,443 364 97·7 2·3 15,879 136 99.3 0·7 ==~========================================================================== �- 30 The 1966 goose harvest compared to the twelve-year average in Table 9 shows that total harvest was the highest ever recorded. Also, that the Southeast Region accounted for more than 80 per cent of the total goose bag, with Baca, Kiowa, Bent and Prowers the top harvest counties, in that order. Waterfowl Management Units Again this year, harvest information has been gathered on the basis of waterfowl management units. The purpose of this is a better alignment of data to provide information about specific flocks of ducks and geese. For example Unit 1 compasses the area utilized by wintering ducks at Jumbo Reservoir, Unit 5 is North Park, and Unit 15 is the San Luis Valley. In many cases duck or goose flock boundaries transcend county lines and it has been difficult to put together county information so that we could look at the influence of hunting pressure and harvest on separate flocks. Naturally, we hope that management units will solve this problem. Results are tabulated in Table 10 and are offered without further comment at this time. Table 10 -- Estimated Waterfowl Hunters and Harvest by Management Unit, 1966. Ducks Geese Management Hunters Bag Hunters Bag Unit No. No. % No. % No. East Slope 12 13 14 15 1,409 681 2,656 1,762 179 3,022 382 354 478 585 275 1,101 639 193 3,158 7.08 3.42 13.34 8.85 0·90 15.18 1.92 1.78 2.40 2.94 1.38 5·53 3·21 0·97 15.86 6,784 4,137 15,352 9,052 825 16,281 1,615 1,418 2,522 2,882 1,104 4,102 3,288 674 24,718 5.84 3.56 13.21 7.79 0·71 14.01 1.39 1.22 2.17 2.48 0·95 3·53 2.83 0.58 21.27 Totals 16,874 84.76 94,754 81.54 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 362 362 1,960 1,778 66 1,004 34 131 82 2,306 3,524 2,931 526 99 329 486 195 1,950 1,688 585 910 1.62 0.65 6.49 5.62 1.95 3·03 372 1.24 2.29 2.29 12.40 11.25 0.42 6.35 0.21 0.83 0·52 14.59 22.29 18.54 3.33 0.63 2.08 33 c.ai 7,326 8,641 6,563 486 114 261 24.39 28.77 21.85 1.62 0.38 0.87 98.02 29,610 98.59 1.98 423 1.41 West Slope 16 GRAND 'IDTALS 21,451 19,908 100.0 18.46 116,205 100.0 313 15,807 100.0 30,033 100.0 =============================================================================== �October, 1967 - 31 JOB DESCRIPTION RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT state of COLORADO --------~~~~--------- Project No. w-88-R-12 Work Plan No. 1 Migratory Bird Investigations Job No. Title of Job: Waterfowl Habitat Improvement Studies Period Covered: April 1, 1966 to March 31, 1967 Personnel: 7 Richard M. Hopper ABSTRACT Waterfowl habitat improvement recommendations were made for the Bonny Reservoir and Banner Lakes management areas. Recommendations for Bonny Reservoir included the development of about 200 acres of land by blasting potholes and constructing shallow, permanent impoundments. Suggested improvements at Banner Lakes property included (1) control of rough fish populations, (2) control of cattails, (3) maintenance of stable water levels, and (4) production of corn and small grains. ��- 33 - WATERFOWL HABITAT IMPROVEMENT STUDIES Richard M. Hopper Introduction: Activities during segment 12 were confined to making habitat development recommendations on state-owned properties in eastern Colorado; namely, Bonny Reservoir and Banner Lakes management areas. Two other stateowned properties, Jumbo and Smith in northeastern Colorado, were originally planned for inclusion in this segment's work, but no time was available for investigating these areas. Objectives: (1) To examine Bonny Reservoir and Banner Lakes management determine waterfowl habitat needs for each area. (2) To prepare waterfowl areas. habitat improvement areas, and plans for each of the above Procedures: The two areas in question were visited periodically through the summer of 1966. They were evaluated from the standpoint of their respective types of waterfowl potential. A contour map of the land lying at the west end of Bonny Reservoir was prepared by a private engineering concern. This map contained a contour interval of two feet and was helpful in determining locations for possible shallow impoundment developments. Soils maps of the Bonny Reservoir area were studied to determine soil types and characteristics compatible with the development of shallow impoundments. Such maps were available through the Wray office of the Soil Conservation Service. A Soil Conservation Service engineer conducted soil porosity tests on a portion of the land at the west end of Bonny Reservoir to determine the ability of the soil to retain surface water. A map of the Banner Lakes property was already available when the investigation started. It consisted of an aerial photograph (scale: 8 inches = 1 mile) with several transparent overlays prepared by Perry Olson, local Wildlife Conservation Officer in charge of the property. Results and Recommendations: Bonny Reservoir Management Area.--That portion of the Bonny Reservoir property with the highest waterfowl habitat development potential is outlined with hatch-marks in Figure 1. This area constitutes about 200 acres. It was broken down into two segments based upon the type of development best suited for each. These segments are designated A and B. Habitat improvement recommendations are restricted to these two segments. Segment A consists of about 100 acres of bottomland marsh adjacent to the south bank of the South Republican River. This area falls into the "Type 3" wetlands category (shallow fresh marsh) described by Martin et a1. (1953). Its surface soils are waterlogged throughout the year and as much as six inches of standing water occurs at a few sites. No more than two acres of open water presently exist in the dense stands of emergent vegetation. This open water is in the form of two artificially dug ponds. Vegetation of the area is dominated by the following species: three-square bulrush (Scirpus �LEGEND CD ® @ @ @ ® CV ® ® Porks Superintendent's House Dom Tender', Residence Air Slrip Fosler Grove Campground Moin Swimming Beoch a Compground Concession Areo Boot Romp Jetty with FinC}er Docks Woler Ski Areo a Lounching R. 43 ® if W. Fresh Woter Wells OverniC}ht Use Areos Limited Doy Use Areos @ © 8J..9 ~ Is'(I1 Romp ® 17'Yi6 T. ~f 5 :;) S. III ...;.!? ..,e f=.<D 0- w +I / ® ~I~ State ) <t t\I Highway@ 5~ 0.:;) c: C/t ~....:.!!? :>0CD..,e ~t!5~ ~ ; # ~ J ® 112 0 I mile SITE PLAN BONNY RECREATION YUMA COUNTY Fig.--Bonny Reservoir property showing location of area with the highest waterfowl habitat development potential. AREA �- 35 - americanus), spikerushes (Eleocharis spp.), sedges (Carex spp.), rushes (Juncus spp.), hardstem bulrush C§.. acutus), softstem bulrush C§.. validus), cattails (Typha spp.), saltgrass (Distichlis stricta), foxtail barley (Hordeum jubatum), and sweetclovers (Melilotus spp.). Waterfowl use of segment A is now restricted due to the scarsity of surface water and open water. This results in a limited amount of territorial, feeding, resting, and loafing space. Good nesting cover is plentiful, but the absence of other requirements reduces its value. It was originally planned to construct several shallow impoundments on this gently sloping area by building low dikes. Flooding would have then created the much needed open water and edge for increased waterfowl use. Soils of the area are of a porous nature, but tests found them to have a low water infiltration rate because of the high water table. The high water table results from the presence of Bonny Reservoir a short distance away. This water table could be expected to drop considerably with the lowering of the water level in the reservoir. This very situation could occur in the next several years because local farmers are strongly advocating the use of reservoir water for irrigation. Reservoir water has not been available for this lype of use in the past. A drop in the water table at the development site would result in the draining away of any surface water, including that in the impoundments first proposed above. Thus, the idea of developing shallow impoundments in segment A was abondoned from an economic standpoint. The cost of such impoundments would be prohibitive considering the work would involve the use of a dragline placed on mats, a slow and expensive process. The amount of money involved, estimated at over $10,000 would not warrent the gamble. A much cheaper method was therefore devised to develop segment A. This involves the use of an ammonium nitrate-fuel oil mixture (AN-FO) to blast potholes. Instead of inundating the marsh this method simply creates pools of water at or near the level of the marsh surface, thereby accompolishing the same end result of producing open water and edge where it did not previously occur. This method not only achieves the goal of getting the marsh developed, but it also affords a good opportunity to evaluate its effectiveness for possible acceptance as a state-wide development technique. Thus, these development plans were designed with a research project in mind. The pattern of potholes recommended for blasting and the suggested procedures are as follows: 1. Divide the area into three blocks of equal size, with a buffer zone 300 feet wide between them. 2. Using AN-FO, blast 28 equally-spaced potholes in each block (four rows of seven potholes each). Each block should contain one row of seven potholes blasted with each of the following sizes of AN-FO charges: 25, 50, 75, and 150 pounds. 3. Locate each row at random. This would result in a total of 84 potholes of four different sizes (21 of each). Cost for this development should not exceed about $1,500, including labor and materials. This represents a considerable savings over the shallow �- 36 - impoundment proposal. Research work is due to start on this AN-FO blasting study during the summer of 1967. Segment B, also approximately 100 acres in size, is a relative flat bench area lying just above and to the south of Segment A. This area is not wet enough to be considered in the category of wetlands. Vegetation consists of mixed sedges, rushes, grasses, and forbs. Domestic crops are grown on a portion of the area. Its soils are mostly heavy, with clay and clay-loam predominating. The gentle slope of the land and heavy soils make segment B ideal for the development of shallow, permanent impoundments. Thus, it is recommended that two or three shallow impoundments be created here through the construction of low dikes. Maximum water depths at the dikes should not exceed 18 to 24 inches. Since no source of water is presently available, it would be necessary to drill a well and install a pump at the highest point in Segment B. This point occurs at the west edge. Banner Lakes Management Area.--Banner Lakes consists of a series of nine ponds or small lakes along Jim Creek near the town of Hudson. This property is situated in one of Colorado's major waterfowl wintering areas. Thus, every opportunity should be made to improve its attractiveness to waterfowl. Recommendations for improvement of waterfowl habitat includes: 1. Control of rough fish populations. Excessive rough fish populations particularly carp, are a problem in the lakes. They enter from irrigation canals that supply water to the lakes. Their presence has produced turbid water in the lakes and has practically eliminated the growth of submergent aquatic vegetation, thereby reducing the supply of natural duck food in the area. Each lake should be poisoned every three to five years, depending on how rapidly the fish repopulate themselves. Perhaps the best time to conduct a poisoning program would be during August after the broodrearing season when water levels could be lowered. Less poison would thus be required to obtain the desired results. If such a procedure resulted in the problem of getting the lakes full of water again before the start of the waterfowl hunting season, then it would be necessary to poison only one or two lakes each year. 2. Control of cattails. Cattails occur as solid, thick stands at the upper end of each lake. They are so rank in places that ducks cannot penetrate them. This situation reduces the size of each lake area, thereby decreasing waterfowl use below its potential. A few cattails are desirable, but they should be interspersed with open water to create an edgeeffect. Therefore, the objective at Banner Lakes should be to eliminate most of the cattails and replace them with open water and more desirable waterfowl food and cover plants. Three methods of cattail control recommended for use at Banner Lakes includes hand cutting, chemical spraying, and pothole blasting. Hand cutting is effective only in flooded cattails. Ste~s should be cut at least three inches below the surface of the water. The �- 37 - important point is that the cut stems remain in a constant state of submergence until death is apparent. This would easily be achieved by maintaining stable water levels in the lakes. Strips or blocks of open water could be produced by this method. On plots where the cut stems were constantly covered with at least three inches of water, over 90 percent reduction in cattail growth was obtained with one cutting in Utah (Nelson and Dietz, 1966). Similar results were obtained in Maryland and Tennessee (Martin et. al., 1957). Dalpon offers an effective, but not complete, method of controlling mature cattails in deep water (Nelson and Dietz, 1966). This chemical can be sprayed by hand or from an airplane at the rate of 20 pounds to 10 gallons of water per acre. It is available from the Dow Chemical Company. Because of the relatively small size of the cattail stands in question, hand spraying may be easier to control with less chance of hitting other types of vegetation. Control is most effective when dalpon is applied in the fall (September). Blasting of potholes in cattail stands with ammonium nitrate is recommended where little or no surface water exist. This method not only eliminates cattails but it also creates open water where little or none occurred before. This method could be used most effectively at the edges of cattail stands. Twenty-five pound charges of ammonium nitrate placed at 100-foot intervals around these edges should be appropriate. 3. Maintenance of stable water levels. Until we learn more about the advantages of drawing down water levels, we should strive to maintain relatively stable water levels in the lakes. Dropping water levels to the mud-flat stage can improve the fertility of a lake and incourage the growth of desirable waterfowl food and cover plants, but it is also the best condition for the invasion and establishment of cattails. Cattail seeds readily germinate on mud-flats, but are discouraged in flooded areas. This is precisely why an abundance of cattails now occur at Banner Lakes. These lakes were formerly irrigation reservoirs and they were often drawn down to the mud-flat stage. Considering the already abundant status of cattail, water levels should be held as stable as possible until this undesirable plant is controlled. 4. Production of corn and small grains. Corn should be grown on the irrigated portions of the property and small grains (wheat, milo, millet) on the dryland areas. Sharecropping is recommended, with the Department's share of each crop left standing. When the lakes freeze-over in the winter, field shooting may be the only hunting available on the Banner Lakes Management Area. Thus, it is essential that a good farming program be undertaken on this property. �- 38 - LITERATURE CITED Martin, A. C., N. Hotchkiss, F. M. Uhler, and W. S. Bourn. 1953. Classification of wetlands of the United states. U.S.D.I., Fish and Wildl. Servo Spec. Sci. Rept.: Wildl. No. 20, 14 p. Martin, A. C., R. C. Erickson, and J. H Steenis. 1957. Improving duck marshes by weed control. U. S. D. I., Fish and Wildl. Servo Circ. 19, 60 p. Nelson, N. F., and R. H. Dietz. 1966. Cattail control methods in Utah. Utah State Dept. of Fish and Game, Publ. No. 66-2, 31 p. Prepared by: Richard M. Hopper .Assistant Researcher Date: October, 1967 Approved by: Jack R. Grieb Project Leader Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief �October, 1967 - 39 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT state of COLORADO -------------------------- Project No. w-88-R-12 Work Plan No. Title of Job: 1 Migratory Bird Investigations Job No. 12 San Luis Valley Cooperative Mallard Investigation Period Covered: April 1, 1966 to March 31, 1967 Personnel: Charles Hayes, Jack Randall, Dale Horne, Bureau of Sport Fisheries and Wildlife; Wayne Russell, Jack Grieb, William Rutherford, Howard Funk, Wilber Ladd, Errol Ryland, Donald Benson, and Richard Hopper, Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department. ABSTRACT The aerial breeding pair survey in 1966 for the San Luis Valley, corrected by air-ground comparison data, and stratified on the basis of high and low production areas, estimated 24,746 pairs of ducks (12,172 mallards). This represented a decrease in all ducks of about 2,200 pairs from 1965, but mallards remained the same. Refinement in sampling technique has reduced the sampling error each year of the survey from a high of + 31.0 percent in 1964 to a low of ~ 23.4 percent in 1966. The high country breeding population survey estimated 2,316 pairs of 13 species, with mallards contributing 1,167 pairs. Sampling error in'1966 (~ 14.8 percent) was considerably below that in 1965. Colorado personnel assisted in banding 3,015 ducks during the pre-season banding effort, of which 2,506 were banded on the Valley floor and 509 in the mountains to the west of the Valley. Mallards accounted for 2,181 of the total. Colorado personnel ran two check stations on the Monte Vista National Wildlife Refuge and made 35 hunter performance checks. �- 40 - Recommendations: (1) Conduct the San Luis Valley breeding-pair survey and air-ground comparison study in 1967, using the same techniques as in 1966. (2) Continue the high-country production survey in 1967 to give us an opportunity to sample the area under various climate and phenology conditions. (3) Continue the pre-season trapping and banding program on the Valley floor in 1967, beginning in mid-August and terminating no later than September 20. Discontinue high-country banding. Objectives: To evaluate the effects of hunting pressure on the local population of mallards breeding in the San Luis Valley. Colorado's part of this study was covered under the following sub-objectives: (1) Determine the size of the breeding population in the San Luis Valley. (2) Determine the size of the breeding popUlation in the high altitude country west of the Valley. (3) Assist in gathering harvest information during the special waterfowl hunting season. �- 41 - SAN LUIS VALLEY COOPERATIVE MALLARD INVESTIGATION This report presents results of the Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Departments' operations during the third consecutive year of the cooperative mallard study with the Bureau of Sport Fisheries and Wildlife in the San Luis Valley. The stated objectives reported here are those for which the Colorado Department had primary responsibility in 1966. A report covering all phases of the study appears as Administrat'fve Report No. 130 (Grieb et al., 1967) prepared by members of both agencies and distributed by the Bureau of Sport Fisheries and Wildlife, Branch of Wildlife Research, Migratory Bird Populations Station. Breeding Population Survey of the Valley Floor History of the San Luis Valley breeding population and methods for estimating breeding-pair numbers prior to the initiation of the cooperative study in 1964 have been presented in earlier reports and need not be repeated here (Grieb and Ballou, 1963; Ballou et ~., 1964; Grieb ~ ~., 1965). Some changes have occurred in the breeding population survey each year in an effort to further refine our estimates and to obtain the best possible evaluation of the experimental hunting seasons. Techniques Used: Procedures for conducting the 1966 breeding population survey remained essentially the same as in 1965 (see Hopper and Rutherford, 1966 for details), although a few changes were added in 1966 in an effort to reduce sampling error. Despite further refinements in sampling technique in 1965, sampling. error continued to be high. A summary of techniques used is presented below, along with the added methods. (1) The regular breeding population survey was stratified according to high and low waterfowl concentration areas. The sample of the low concentration area consisted of 50 regular air transects totaling 934 linear miles and yielding a sample size of 18.27 percent. (2) High concentration areas included Monte Vista National Wildlife Refuge, Russell Lakes, Mishak Lakes, San Luis Lakes, and Adams Lake. Aerial surveys and air-ground comparison studies were discontinued on the Refuge because of the extreme difficulty in making ground counts. Birds had a tendency to "roll-up" and the counts were considered inaccurate. A good estimate of the Refuge breeding population was obtained from nesting transect data collected by Refuge personnel. These transects, which constitute a 5.5 percent sample, are covered once in May and once in June. Nests "unknown" as to species were first distributed according to the species composition of the "known" nests for each coverage. Numbers of "unknown" hatched nests were distributed in the same manner. Then, the following formula was used to obtain the estimated number of breeding pairs by species on the Refuge: MN + [ (IN) - (MN - MHN)] = no. of breeding pairs on Refuge 5.5 Where:MN = no. of nest found on transect during May coverage IN = no. of nest found on transect during June coverage MHN = no. of May nests that hatched 5.5 = percent sample size. �- 42 - Breeding-pair estimates for the Refuge based on.this method replaced aerial estimates for all years of the study. have now Six regular air transects totaling 12 linear miles were covered on Russell Lakes. This produced a sample size of 33.33 percent. Complete counts were made of San Luis Lakes, Mishak Lakes, and Adams Lake. Adams Lake was a portion of the low concentration area prior to 1966. (3) Air-ground comparison studies were conducted on 26 transects totaling 129 linear miles. These were all located in the low waterfowl concentration area. Both air and ground counts were made on these transects. (4) A new procedure put into effect involved the elimination of birds unidentified as to species from aerial counts of air-ground comparison and regular air transects. The elimination in one place necessitated their removal in the other. What this means, for example, is that if we obtained a visibility ratio of 0.35 for the mallard using this method, then we would say that the air crew identified, ~ mallards, 35 percent of the mallards actually present. A true distribution of unidentified birds cannot be achieved by dividing them up according to the percentage species composition of the identified birds. Thus, what interpretation or statement can we make regarding the higher ratio obtained when some unidentified birds are added to those identified as mallards? No meaningful interpretation exists. A main advantage of this new method is that fewer calculations are needed to yield the necessary estimates, thereby reducing time spent and chances of making mathematical errors. This method was applied to a11.years of the study so the data would be comparable between years. Thus, figures in this report vary somewhat from those presented in earlier reports. New standard errors were also calculated for all years, using only identified ducks. Findings: Air-Ground Comparison Study.--Air and ground counts of the air-ground comparison transects are compared by species in Table 1. These visibility ratios were used to correct regular air transect counts, including those for Russell Lakes, to obtain an estimate of total breeding pairs in the Valley. Aerial Breeding Pair Inventory.--Tab1e 2 lists size, sampling intensity, and estimated breeding pairs for the six areas covered during the 1966 survey. Breeding pair estimates for 1964-65 are included for comparison. Sampling intensity for the major portion of the Valley was slightly less in 1966 (15.40%) as compared to previous years (18.27%) because a few transects were flown with one aerial observer instead of the usual two. The 1966 breeding population was estimated at 24,746 pairs for the entire Valley floor, including all species of ducks. This figure is somewhat lower than the estimates for 1965 (27,942) and for 1964 (28,200). Monte Vista Refuge was up about 1,000 pairs in 1966 over 1965, but was nearly equal to the 1964 figure. A similar situation existed for Russell Lakes. Breeding numbers of ducks were lower on these two areas in 1965 but higher �- 43 - Table l.--Air-ground comparison of ducks counted on 129 miles of transect in the low waterfowl concentration area of the Valley, 1966. Estimated Breeding Pairs Proportion Ground Air Identified Species Pairs Percent Pairs Percent From the Air Mallard Gadwall Pintail American Widgeon Shoveler Blue-winged and Cinnamon Teal Green-winged Teal Redhead Other Divers Totals 412 86 70 17 '87 49.4 10.3 8.4 2.0 10.4 150 16 22 108 25 20 10 12.9 3.0 2.4 1.2 14 835 100.0 63.9 6.8 9.4 0.8 12.3 0.364 0.186 0.314 0.118 0.333 o 6.0 0.0 0.8 0.0 0.130 / 0.04sl 0.1002/ 0.05&= 235 100.0 0.281 2 29 o 2 l/Average of two previous years because no green-winged teal were observed from the air. l/None observed in 1965 and 1966, so 1964 figure was used. in the remainder of the Valley than in 1964 and 1966 because the excellent water conditions throughout the Valley in 1965 no doubt dispersed the birds. Drier years, such as 1964 and 1966, tend to concentrate breeding ducks on permanent water areas, which includes Monte Vista Refuge and Russell Lakes • .Table 2.--Breeding pairs by density type as estimated from the San Luis Valley' re ular air transects and nestin transects 1964-66. Sq. Miles Percent Estimated Breeding Pairsl Type Habitat Sample 1964 1965 1966 Monte Vista NWR Russell Lakes San Luis Lakes Mishak Lakes Adams Lake Remainder of Valley TOTALS 22 6 7 4 1 1,265 1,305 5.50 33.33 100.00 100.00 100.002/ 15.40= 3,944 1,350 3,000 892 60 187 3,964 1,509 105 338 22,906 22,803 18,824 6 16.94 28,200 27,942 24,746 l/Determined from nesting transects on Monte Vista National Wildlife Refuge and from aerial transects on all 'other areas. 'l/Sample size was 18.27 percent in 1964 and 1965. �- 44 - Table 3.--Species composition of the San Luis Valley breeding population, 1964-66. 1964 1965 1966 Pairs Species Pairs % Pairs % Mallard Gadwall Pintail American Widgeon Green-winged Teal Blue-winged or Cinnamon Teal Shoveler Redhead Misc. Divers 15,066 1,776 4,492 77 263 53.4 6.3 15.9 0.3 0.9 12,149 3,988 1,266 166 1,981 43.5 14.3 4.5 0.6 7.1 12,172 2,405 1,954 0 409 49.2 9.7 7~9 0.0 1.7 2,337 1,030 2,647 512 8.3 3.7 9.4 1.8 6,267 978 1,142 5 22.4 3.5 4.1 1,942 2,476 2,836 552 7.8 10.0 11.5 2.2 28,200 100.0 27,942 100.0 24,746 100.0 TOTALS t.05 Stc:ndard Error!/ + 31.0% + 28.0% % + 23.4% !/Excluding Monte Vista Refuge. Table 3 shows the species composition of the 1966 estimated breeding population in the San Luis Valley. Similar figures are also shown for 1964 and 1965 for comparison. Mallards maintained similar numbers in 1966 as in 1965, both years yielding about 2,900 pairs fewer than in 1964. Mallards remained the dominant species again in 1966, comprising nearly 50 percent of the total estimated breeding population. Gadwalls and the three species of teal were down from 1965, while pintails, shovelers, and redheads showed increases over 1965. Sampling error associated with the breeding pair estimates has gradually decreased during the three years pf study from a high of ± 31.0 percent in 1964 to a low of ± 23.4 percent in 1966. This reduction in error reflects the results of stratifying the sample into high and low waterfowl concentration areas. RECOMMENDATIONS High and low waterfowl concentration areas are now being sampled to the greatest extent possible within limits of time and manpower. Such a procedure has reduced the potential sampling error associated with the total estimated breeding pairs to a degree that can be tolerated. Thus, techniques for conducting the breeding pair survey in 1967 should remain the same as in 1966. �- 45 - BREEDING POPULATION SURVEY OF THE SAN LUIS VALLEY HIGH-COUNTRY Waterfowl breeding pair inventories were continued for the third year in the high country on the west side of the San Luis Valley, as a part of the Cooperative Mallard Investigation, Work Plan 1, Job 12, Project W-88-R. Generally, the study area encompasses the Rio Grande National Forest and includes all private lands lying within the major forest boundary as well as a scattering of both public and private lands in habitat types considered to be a part of the high-country area. It is known that this high-country area (that part of the Rio Grande drainage which does not actually lie on the Valley floor of the San Luis Valley) supports a population of breeding waterfowl, and may contribute substantially to the total waterfowl production of the Valley. Just what this contribution may be has in the past been a matter of conjecture. Thus, the investigation here described was undertaken in an attempt to express in quantitative terms the waterfowl production of this area. Techniques Used: The extreme variability in the data encountered during the first year of study was largely overcome during the second year by stratifying the area into low-density and high-density habitat types. Samples were taken within the low-density types, while high-density types (larger lakes) were completely counted. This stratification and sampling of low-density habitat was further refined during 1966 by eliminating a great deal of area which could not possibly contain waterfowl habitat. The remaining sections, totaling 685, were then classified according to National Forest Ranger District, and a sample of sections was then randomly selected from each Ranger District. A total of 75 sections constitutes the sample. Total counts from the larger lakes within the study area were added to the projected figures from the sample sections to give an estimate of the total waterfowl population. Findings: The problem of many sample sections being snowbound and inaccessible at the time of the survey was not as acute as it was last year, although eight sections could not be visited on this account this year. The actual number of sections which were surveyed was 67. Table 4, following, presents estimates of the waterfowl breeding pair population on the study area. Confidence intervals are well within acceptable limits, and species composition estimates are considered to be very good; in fact estimates of both the total population and the species composition are greatly improved over those of last year. This is unquestionably the result of further elimination of sections which do not contain waterfowl habitat. �- 46 - -- Table 4. Waterfowl Breeding Pair Estimates for San Luis Valley High-County Study Area, 1966. Species Mallard Gadwall Green-winged Teal Blue-winged Teal Cinnamon Teal Pintail Redhead Ruddy Duck American Widgeon Shoveler Ringnecked Duck American Merganser Lesser Scaup TOTALS Projected Total Pairs From Sample Sections 925 122 311 11 67 56 11 11 11 33 22 1,580 Total Count Estimated 95% Confidence Total (Pairs) on Interval Lakes Pairs 809-1,041 242 1,167 85-159 232 354 286-336 27 338 6-16 7 18 47-87 8 75 41-71 11 67 9-13 74 85 24 9-13 35 14 3 9-13 42 24-42 9 21-23 36 14 no projection 10 10 no projection 75 75 1,346-1,814 (± 14.8%) 736 2,316 Species Composition Percentage 50.4 15.3 14.6 0.8 3.2 2.9 3.7 1.5 0.6 1.8 1.6 0.4 3.2 100.0 The data and the analysis thereof show that production from adjacent highmountain country contributed more to the San Luis Valley waterfowl population in 1966 than in 1965 (8.6 percent and 6.5 percent respectively), but still not as much as had previously been supposed. Recommendations: Stratification of the study area has shown that variability can be reduced to a reasonable and workable level. It appears that elimination of sections not containing waterfowl, habitat has been satisfactorily accomplished, and that the list of sample sections needs no further changes. It is recommended that 'the high-country production survey be continued to give us an opportunity to sample the area under various climate and phenology conditions. PRE-SEASON DUCK BANDING Pre-season banding played an important role in the overall study again in 1966. Trapping and banding of flying adult and immature ducks of most species were conducted from mid-August to mid-September. Quotas were set at 1,000 mallards of each age and sex class, resulting in a goal of 4,000 mallards for the entire Valley floor. Other species were banded, but without the establish.ment of quotas. State personnel and Federal Game Agents were assigned to band one half of the mallard quota north of the Rio Grande River, while refuge and other Federal men were responsible for the other one half south of the Rio Grande River. A state man was also assigned to band as many ducks as possible in the mountains west of the Valley floor. This report includes only the �- 47 - banding efforts mountains. of crews in the northern portion of the Valley and in the Technigues Used: Bait traps of the Salt Plains variety were used to capture ducks. These were baited with barley and wheat. Traps were distributed throughout all major duck concentration areas. Findings: Slightly over 2,500 ducks of 10 species were banded in the northern portion of the Valley floor (Table 5). An additional 509 of nine species were banded in the mountains, yielding a total of 3,015 ducks for the entire 1966 banding effort in the San Luis Valley. Mallards were by far the most abundant species in the banded sample with 2,181, of which 1,858 were obtained from the Valley floor. Mallard quotas on the Valley floor were reached for all age and sex classes except "adult males". The pintail was the next most abundant species banded, with a total of 383. Table 5.--Number of ducks banded by sp~cies and iocation during pre-season in the San Luis Valley, 1966. Species Valley Floor Location Mountains Total Mallard Gadwall American Widgeon Green-winged Teal Blue-winged or Cinnamon Teal Shoveler Pintail Redhead Lesser Scaup Ring-necked Duck Canvasback 1,858 6 15 36 323 24 3 45 2,181 30 18 81 97 63 1 4 23 23 4 1 ° ° 160 1 383 133 23 4 1 TOTALS 2,506 509 ° 379 110 ° 3,015 Recommendations: Trapping and banding operations should continue on the Valley floor as a pre-season endeavor if an experimental duck hunting season is granted in 1967. Such a program should again begin the second or third week of August and continue through the middle of September. Sufficient banding has now been done in the mountains to give us good information on the contribution of this area to the Valley floor. Thus, high-country banding is not recommended for 1967. The additional manpower and traps can best be utilized at the lower elevation. �- 48 - HARVEST INFORMATION State personnel again assisted in collecting hunter and harvest data during the experimental duck hunting season. Check stations No. 2 and 5 were operated on the Monte Vista National Wildlife Refuge during the period October 1-9. Also, 35 hunter performance checks.were obtained, mostly on areas other than the Refuge. All information gathered from this work was given to the Bureau of Sport Fisheries and Wildlife and combined with similar data which they gathered. A report covering all phases of the investigation appears as Administrative Report No. 130 (Grieb ~ al., 1967) prepared by members of both agencies and distributed by the Bureau of Sport Fisheries and Wildlife, Branch of Wildlife Research, Migratory Bird Populations Station. Thus, no tabulation of hunter or harvest activities will be presented here. LITERATURE CITED Ballou, R. M., J. R. Grieb, and A. D. Geis. 1964. Progress reportexperimental hunting season in the San Luis Valley, 1963. U.S.D.I., Bur. of Sport Fisheries and Wildl. Migratory Bird Pop. Sta., Admin. Rpt. No. 49, 7 p. Grieb, J. R. and R. M. Ballou. 1963. An evaluation of a proposed experimental duck hunting season in the San Luis Valley, Colorado. Rpt. to the Central Flyway Council. Aug. 38 p. Grieb, J. R., R. M. Hopper, and W. H. Rutherford. 1965. San Lui~ Valley cooperative mallar4 investigation. Colo. Game, Fish and Parks Dept., Fed. Aid Game Res. Rpt. Oct. p. 59-78. Hopper, R. M. and W. H. Rutherford. 1966. San Luis Valley Cooperative mallard investigation. Colo. Game, Fish and Parks Dept., Fed. Aid Game Res. Rpt. Oct. p. 33-44. Prepared by: Richard M. Hopper Asst. Wildlife Researcher William H. Rutherford Wildlife Researcher Date:__~ __ ~O~~~t~o~b~e~r~,_1~9~6~7~ _ Approved by: Jack R. Grieb Project Leader Wayne W. Sand fort Game ·Research Chief �October, 1967 - 49 - ' JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO --------~~~~~-----Migratory Bird Investigations w-88-R-12 Project No. Work Plan No. 2 ------~------------ Job No. 2 Title of Job: Experimental Studies on Improving Status of Canada Goose Populations Period Covered: Personnel: April 1, 1966 to March 31, 1967 Gurney Crawford, Jack Grieb, Richard Hopper"Howard William Rutherford. Funk, and ABSTRACT The size of the Larimer County breeding Canada goose flock continues to increase, although not at the rate originally expected. This is apparently the result of some members of the local flock being harvested during hunting season. Production in the flock likewise shows a somewhat weak increase, and is centered at three main concentration areas. Additional nesting structures built during 1966 totaled 52, part of which were placed in new areas in an attempt to attract nesting geese away from the conc,entration areas ~ Gosling transplanting was not done in Larimer County in 1966, but 1~4 adult geese were transplanted in a partially successful attempt to determine whether adults can be used as transplant stock. Flock size and production in the Boulder County flock have increased spectacularly, and it is predicted that this will be a major concentration area in the next few years. Additional nesting structures built in Boulder County during 1966 totaled 27. The transplanting program resulted in a total of 116 gosling released. The grand total of geese banded in Larimer County, Boulder County, and Denver was 603, of which 20 were taken to Bonny Reservoir and 71 to Monte Vista. Protective measures, including the season bag limit, permits' required, and closed areas, remained the same as in 1965. Hunting pressure and harvest, primarily on the migratory High-Line geese, increased significantly over that of 1965, probably as a result of the tremendous increase in the number of wintering geese. Recommendations for further transplanting, building nesting structures, and hunting regulations are presented. �- 50 - Objectives: (1) Continue efforts to establish a breeding flock of Canada geese at Valmont Reservoir near Boulder, Colorado. Begin establishing a breeding goose flock on Terry Lake near Longmont, Colorado. (2) Continue the spread of the College and Terry Lake flock into unoccupied habitat in the Fort Collins-Love land-Windsor area. (3) Retention of migrant Great Basin goose flocks within the migration and wintering periods. Procedures: As given in past reports of this job. the State during �- 51 - EXPERIMENTAL STUDIES ON IMPROVING William STATUS OF CANADA GOOSE POPULATIONS H. Rutherford The specific assignment of Gurney Crawford, under Project W-llO-D, continues to be the development of breeding Canada goose populations in the Northeast Region. Thus, the following report of activities and accomplishments will contain much of the same information which will also be reported in the completion report of W-llO-D. The reason for this duplication is to preserve continuity in reporting results of the establishment of Canada goose flocks initiated under Project W-88-R. Larimer County Flock Production.--Although the size of the breeding goose population in Larimer County continues to show an annual increase, the rate of increase during 1966 was not as great as expected for the second consecutive year. Number of nests established was 106, or 27 more than established the previous year. Of these, 31 nests were determined to be failures. The net result was 213 young raised to flight which is only 35 more than the previous year (Table 1). The 1965 hunting season was delayed until November 27, to avoid placing hunting pressure on local geese before the arrival of migrants. The early opening in 1964 was judged primarily responsible for the weak increase in flock size ~oted in 1965. However, it appears that a significant segment of the local population may also have been harvested during the 1965 season, in spite of the later opening of the season. Table 1.--Larimer County Canada Goose Flock Production Information, 1957- 1966. No. of Birds of Year Breeding Age 1957 1958 1959 1960 1961 1962 1963 1964 1965 1966 No. Nests Established No. Nests Hatched No. Birds Raised on Area No. Birds Planted Approximate Size of Flock 500+ ]j 0 0 1 4 7 23 43 68 79 106 0 0 1 4 6 21 31 59 60 75 0 0 5 14 20 79 100 154 178 213 31 23 48 68 95 101 0 0 0 0 31 54 60 120 210 400 500 600 650 750+ }) Difficult to make a good estimate. 0 0 2 8 20 53 135 250 430 �- 52 - Some additional pioneering of nesting birds into new areas occured in 1966, as compared with 1965, but for the most part, production was centered at College Lake, Terry Lake, and Watson Lake, which accounted for 64 percent of all goslings raised to flight (Table 2). It is hoped that future increases in this flock will take place away from these three concentration areas, resulting in a stronger and more stable population. Table 2.--Product;ion Results, 1966 1.1 Lake Anderson Pond *Annex Reservoir Bureau Standards College Lake Claymore Lake Dean's Lake *Dickson Gravel Pit *E1der Lake *F1atiron Pond Herring Lake Lamb's Pond Sterling Pond Lindenmeier Lake *Reservoir 41=8 Rhoades Sterling Pond Terry Lake *Timnath Reservoir Watson Lake Totals 17 * Larimer County Canada Goose Flock, Spring, Number Nest Failures Number Failed to Mature Number Nests Number Eggs 2 2 9 8 o 8 1 2 1 25 3 7 127 15 o o 7 58 12 1 17 2 1 11 6 5 6 o 4 o 5 1 9 Number Young 1 1 5 2 8 o o o o o 4 19 2 8 1 1 1 2 5 6 5 9 18 o 5 o o o 1 35 1 17 5 151 7 82 106 498 1 1 o 2 9 5 o 10 3 1 3 o 1 7 Young Surviving to Date 7 2 6 41 11 5 3 4 4 7 5 o 3 9 4 61 o 68 7 o 7 5 41 7 34 31 253 40 213 Table prepared by G. I. Crawford. New locations where geese nested. Habitat Improvement.--Nesting structures built during 1966 included 36 post-type structures and 16 floating structures which were placed on Larimer County lakes. Most of these were placed in locations where geese have been observed, although some attempt was made to attract geese to new areas through the placement of structures. It is desirable that this portion of the program be continued and expanded since now that young from this flock are imprinted to nesting structures, it should be possible to distribute the birds to various water areas simply by building structures on these areas. �- 53 - As noted in the past, natural nesting sites are extremely limited in this area. Therefore, the continued growth of this population will depend upon construction of nest sites and maintenance of old structures each year. Transplant Program.--Gosling releases were not made in Larimer County in 1966. However, in an attempt to alleviate overcrowding problems at Denver City Park, some adult geese were moved to Larimer and. Weld Counties, as follows: 21 adult males and 22 adult females were neckbanded and released on Reservoir #8, and 45 adult males and 36 adult females were neckbanded and released on New Windsor Reservoir. As expected, many of these returned to Denver, but some remained at the release sites, making the experiment at least partially successful. This was done primarily to determine whether adult birds can be used as transplant stock. Boulder County Flock Production.--Boulder County, and particularly Valmont Reservoir, can now be considered as a significant goose production area, following the gosling releases which began in 1963. In 1965, only 11 goslings were raised on Boulder County lakes, wnile in 1966, the number raised was 52(Tables 3 and 4). It is obvious that the Boulder County population is becoming firmly established, and it is believed that this area will be a major breeding and concentration area within the next few years. Table 3.--Boulder Year No. of Birds of Breeding Age 1963 1964 1965 1966 ]) County Canada Goose Flock Production 12 1./ 22 It is believed flock. Table 4.--Production 1966 11. No. Nests Established No. Nests Hatched 6 22 Informatidn 1963-1966. No. Birds Raised on Area No. Birds Planted Approximate Size of Flock 11 52 86 97 131 116 175 300 400 + 6 15 that most of these are adults from the Denver Metropolitan Results, Boulder County Canada Goose Flock, Number Nests Number Eggs Number Nest Failures Number Young Number Failed to Mature Young Surviving to Date East Lake Faivre Ranch Valmont Reservoir 1 1 20 5 6 94 0 0 7 5 6 47 1 0 5 4 6 42 Totals 22 105 7 58 6 52 Lake Table prepared by G. 1. Crawford. Spring, �- 54 - Habitat Improvement.--During this project interval, 25 nesting structures were erected on Valmont Reservoir, and two were built on Faivre Ranch. Transplant Program.--On June 23, 1966, 116 goslings were trapped at Denver City Park, Maddy's, and Bel Mar Estate, and brought to the Fort Collins Research Station. These birds were held in the goose pens for conditioning prior to release. On July 11, 1966, a total of 90 goslings (54 males and 36 females) were released on the Faivre Ranch, about 7 miles north of Boulder. On July 22, 1966, the remaining 26 goslings (18 males and 8 females) were released on Valmont Reservoir. Trapping and Banding The results of Larimer and Boulder County summer goose banding, as well as the banding of geese which were transporte9 elsewhere, will be tabulated in this report simply for the purpose of reporting all activities carried out under this job (Table 5). In addition, these bandings will also be reported under Work Plan 1, Job 2. Protective Measures Special hunting regulations requiring a permit and limiting harvest to a season bag of six geese per hunter were continued in 1966-67. The permit area, the Larimer-Boulder County closed areas, and the reservoir closed areas lying within the permit area remained the same as established for the 1965-66 hunting season. The number of permits issued for the 1966-67 season increased to 3,996. From a questionnaire sent to 493 hunters, it was determined that 1,086 hunters obtaining a permit did not use it, thus it was estimated that the total number of participating hunters numbered 2,910. Additional hunting statistics indicate that average number of days hunted was 5.1 and the average seasonal bag was 0.4 geese per hunter. This permits an estimated total harvest of 1,184 birds of which 64.5 percent or 764 were taken in Larimer County; 34.5 percent or 409 in western Weld County; and 1.0 percent or 11 in Boulder County. Considering the size of the wintering population and the general flock status, not only of resident birds but also of the migratory High-Line Population, it is believed that this harvest should not be exceeded in order to attain the objective of increasing the size of the population over the next few years. It is recommended that the number of hunters in the permit area be limited to approximately 3,000, and that the Northeast Region adopt regulations to this effect. Wintering populations Table 6 tabulates results of the January, 1967, mid-winter inventory by specific lakes within general areas in Larimer, Weld and Boulder Counties. This information reveals the continuing strong increase in wintering goose numbers as a result of area closures begun in 1960. Furthermore, numbers of geese in southern Larimer and Weld Counties and in Boulder County again showed �- 55 - Table 5.--Canada Goose Banding Results, Summer, 1966. Location Number Banded by Age and Sex AM AF 1M IF Trapped, banded, and released at Terry Lake 32 40 7 16 95 Trapped, banded and released at College Lake 32 18 25 11 86 Trapped, banded and released at Valmont Reservoir 15 10 26 7 58 10 10 20 Hatched from eggs taken at Bonny Reservoir; returned to Bonny Reservoir Total Trapped in Denver; transported to New Windsor Reservoir 45 36 81 Trapped in Denver; transported to Reservoir #8 21 22 43 Trapped in Denver; banded and released at trapping site 18 15 33 Trapped in Denver; transported to Monte Vista NWR 33 38 71 Trapped in Denver; transported to Faivre Ranch 54 36 90 Trapped in Denver; transported to Valmont Reservoir 18 8 26 140 88 603 Totals 196 179 a strong increase probably as a result of continuing the additionalclosed areas established the previous year. Apparently these increases were a result of holding a larger number of migrants, rather than to any population shifts on Colorado wintering grounds, as all areas showed general population increases. Recommendations (1) With the Boulder County flock now on a firm footing, emphasis on gosling transplants should be shifted to the San Luis Valley. In addition, to gain relief from over-crowded conditions at Denver City Park, adult birds should also be moved to the San Luis Valley. This is expected to put the establishment of a resident flock in the Valley on a stepped-up timetable. �- 56 Table 6.--January Inventory Canada Geese, Northeast Region. 1959 Original Release Area College Lake Terry Lake Lindemeier Lake Reservoir No. 5 Reservoir No. 6 Reservoir No. 8 Reservoir No. 9 Reservoir No. 15 Douglas Lake Rocky Ridge Reservoir Cobb Lake Eaton Reservoir New Windsor Windsor Reservoir 10 Warren Lake Timnath Reservoir 12 Fossil Creek Res. Boyd Lake Green Walt Lake Totals 22 New Release Area Lonetree Reservoir Terry (Longmont) Lake Va1mont Reservoir 15 Swede Lake Union Reservoir Totals 15 1960 Jj 75 1961 1962 Year 1963 1964 1965 1966 '!:/ 1967 82 225 180 450 251 875 506 915 1,150 650 1,013 867 975 480 1,250 1,785 450 400 37 437 70 1,000 165 1,703 2,065 605 406 320 170 15 80 660 7 34 25 20 60 25 60 25 45 220 370 127 11 512 288 1,039 292 476 482 1,320 1,945 2,686 3,836 200 114 100' 900 150 1,000 4,287 5,966 80 100 15 80 100 50 15 112 11 392 580 65 15 65 41 25 957 650 1,218 1,300 9,739 995 388 1,383 Denver Area Denver Met .Area No No Count Count Lakes East of Management Area Barr Lake 120 130 Horse Creek Res. 45 120 Milton Reservoir 110 250 Latham Reservoir 270 22 Empire Reservoir 45 Riverside Res. 80 40 Jackson Lake 432 Prewitt Res. Jumbo Reservoir So.P1atte River Totals 625 1,039 Grand Totals 1/ "if 662 1,764 No Count 301 975 615 761 1,888 .1,500 355 60 300 10 85 50 450 60 81 96 250 20 480 259 170 325 500 100 100 100 300 20 10 300 135 100 100 50 300 50 462 125 198 209 895 670 475 1,260 1,100 1,514 185 230 40 602 1,723 2,215 2,916 4,151 5,791 6,248 9,948 14,345 First year Larimer County closed to goose hunting. Additional closed area imposed in Boulder County. �- 57 - (2) An attempt should be made to extend the breeding range of the West Slope Canada goose flock, by collecting eggs in Moffat County, hatching and rearing goslings at Fort Collins, and releasing the birds on the Colorado River near Grand Junction. (3) Nesting structures should continue to be erected at suitable locations in larimer, Weld and Boulder Counties. (4) Specific recommendations for closed areas and seasons will be discussed at a meeting with all concerned personnel in the Northeast Region. Prepared by: William H. Rutherford Wildlife Researcher Date: October, 1967 Approved by: Jack R. Grieb Project Leader Wayne W. Sandfort .Game Research Chief ��October, 1967 - 59 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO --------~~~~~----~ w-88-R-12 Project No. Work Plan No. . 2 ------------------- Migratory Bird Investigations Job No. 4a . Title of Job: Investigation of the Arkansas Valley Wintering Goose Flock Period Covered: April 1, 1966 to March 31, 1967 Personnel: William H. Rutherford Objectives: To write the final completion report for this job. Results: This is, essentially, a negative report for this segment. Most of the band recovery analyses have·been completed, analyses of morphological characteristics of Canada geese are being completed, and the rough draft is now in process. Time commitments on other jobs during Segment 12 have prevented the completion of·this job as scheduled. It is anticipated that completion will be made during Segment 13. Prepared by: William H. Rutherford Wildlife Researcher Date: October, 1967 Approved by: Jack R. Grieb Project Leader Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief ��October, 1967 - 61 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJEC T SEGMENT State of COLORADO ------~~~~~---------- Project No. w-88-R-12 Work Plan No. 2 Title of Job: Migratory Bird Investigations Job No. 5 Arkansas Valley Goose Flock Management Studies Period Covered: April 1, 1966 to March 31, 1967 Personnel: Permanent Employees - Don Bogart, Robert Clark, Jack Grieb, Leonard Johnson, William Rutherford, Bert Widhalm. Temporary Employees - Claude Brock, Homer Eskew, Robert Kitzmiller, Horace Moorehead, Gene 'Hugent, Clyde Rodgers, Fred Roth, Mary'Lou Selch, Jesse Wheeler. ABSTRACT Water and weather conditions were judged to be excellent, and food conditions fair to good, for the Canada goose flock in the Arkansas Valley of Colorado during the winter of 1966-67. Aerial census flights over the major wintering areas of this flock indicated that flock status remained excellent, with normal numbers of geese wintering in Colorado. Migration of geese into the Valley occurred earlier than has been the case for the previous four years. A delayed season opening for the entire Arkansas Valley, occurring about a week after arrival of geese on the wintering grounds, may have helped to hold birds in the Valley, but this cannot be definitely shown. Hunter use and goose harvest at the Two Buttes Management Area were low, because of failure of birds to remain on Two Buttes Reservoir, but throughout the Valley the number of hunters was up and the average season bag per hunter reached an all-time high. This resulted in the highest estimated kill on record. The wounding loss study estimated a loss of about 18-20 percent of the total hunting mortality. Information obtained at the Two Buttes check stations showed that goose feeding flights were generally to the south and southeast,. with practically no flights to the north, and that hunter success fell off rapidly within a few days after season opening. Goose use of the area diminished progressively. Hunter success increased proportionally as the number of days hunted per individual hunter. A total of 674 geese were newly banded. Trapping and check station data showed that juvenile birds made up a coneLde.rab.lyhigher percentage of the flock than during the previous two years, indicating that 1966 was 'an eKcellent production year. Family group counts failed to indicate �- 62 - the higher percentage of juveniles in the flock. The sex ratio of trapped birds was close to 50:50. Average weights of geese taken by hunters at Two Buttes were greater than those taken by trapping, and average weights of geese trapped at John Martin Reservoir were considerably greater than in either sample of Two Buttes Birds. Weather effects upon hunter success and goose harvest were not particularly noticeable, the good distribution of birds being judged more responsible for the excellent hunting season~ Recommendations for continuing management techniques in the Arkansas Valley are presented. Recommendations: 1. The operation of check stations to collect management data on age composition, hunter harvest, and hunting pressure at Two Buttes should be continued. 2. Continuing 3. A delayed season opening for the entire Arkansas Valley Canada goose wintering area is recommended for the 1967-68 hunting season, to begin on November 18. In addition, it is recommended that hunting on the Two Buttes Management Area be further delayed until December 2. 4. Arter the December 2 opening at Two Buttes, the two sides of the Reservoir should be opened and closed to hunting alternately, at weekly intervals: aerial inventory will be a necessary management technique. �- 63 - ARKANSAS VALLEY GOOSE FLOCK MANAGEMENT STUDIES William H. Rutherford Introduction: This job has evolved from an earlier job, Investigations of the Arkansas Valley Wintering Goose Flock, which is now in final report process. It was recognized that termination of the investigative phases of the Arkansas Valley Goose Flock Study did not terminate the need to continue the gathering of management information, to enable us to evaluate the annual status of the population and fulfill our obligation to the Central Flyway. The expected increase in hunting pressure and the corresponding increased harvest of this flock indicates the need for future recommendations which will permit the correct harvest of this resource upon a sustained yield basis. Objectives: (1) To determine the fall movement size of the wintering flock. of geese into the Arkansas (2) To obtain an estimate (3) To determine the age composition, pressure on the flock. (4) To investigate the relationship lakes in the Arkansas Valley. (5) To trap and band geese at various of production Valley and the in the flock. mortality, wounding loss, and hunting between Canada geese wintering locations in the Arkansas on various Valley. Procedures: Periodic aerial counts were made in the Arkansas Valley of Colorado, coupled with both ground and aerial counts made throughout the wintering grounds of the Short Grass Prairie Canada Goose Population by various State and Federal personnel. These counts were made for the purpose of determining the size and distribution of the wintering goose population. Check stations were operated at the Two Buttes Management Area to determine hunting pressure, harvest, wounding loss, and age ratio of the goose flock. Geese were trapped and banded after the close of hunting season to determine age ratios, mortality rates, and migration information. Results: Water, Food, and Weather Conditions: Water levels in the reservoirs of the Arkansas Valley remained higher than normal through 1966, primarily as a result of storage holdover from the extremely wet 1965 season. The summer of 1966 was quite dry, so that the numerous small rain-filled depressions which were evident the year before did not contain water this year. In general, water conditions in the Valley were favorable for the wintering geese. Food conditions were variable, but generally fair to good, throughout the Valley. The dryland winter wheat plantings showed rather poor growth because �- 64 - of failure to receive adequate fall moisture, and thus provided little grazing for wintering geese. Much of the dryland milo failed to make a crop, although enough was present to provide a considerable amount of goose feed. Irrigated wheat and milo were good, and provided a substantial contribution to the goose feed potential. Weather was generally warm, dry, and mild, with no major storms, throughout hunting season. Temperatures low enough to freeze over most of the lakes and reservoirs occurred in late December, but this had little effect on the distribution of geese. On all reservoirs which held concentrations of geese, the birds themselves were able to maintain at least one spot of open water. Migration Movement and Wintering Population: Three separate aerial censuses were used to determine the movement of Canada geese (Branta canadensis parvipes) into, and wintering populations of, the Arkansas Valley. Two of these flights were coordinated with similar ones in the Texas panhandle, northeastern New Mexico, and western Nebraska, so that it was possible to determine the status of the entire population, rather than just that portion wintering in Colorado. Flights were completed on schedule, with no delays or postponements caused by weather. Aerial counts in the Arkansas Valley of Colorado were considered to be highly satisfactory (Table 1). It was felt by personnel involved that all geese wintering in the Texas panhandle were not found during either the early December status count or the regular midwinter inventory; thus, the figures for total population status are considered to be low (Table 2). Of particular concern is the early December status count which showed fewer geese than were counted in January. It is virtually certain that birds were missed on this earlier count. It appears that the post-hunting season size of the Short Grass Prairie Population was about 115,000 birds, which indicates a continuing healthy situation and increasing numbers. Arrival of birds on the wintering grounds in 1966 occurred slightly earlier than in 1965, and considerably earlier than during the three seasons prior to 1965. The main migration took place about November 10 to 12. On November 1, the Two Buttes Reservoir area had 369 geese; on November 7, the count was 1,850. On November 10, 5,800 were counted and on the following day about 8,000 were present. Movement was largely finished by November 13, and the first aerial count (see Table 1) on November 15 showed normal wintering numbers. Evaluation of Arkansas Valley Delayed Season Ope .ning: For the second consecutive year, a season opening calculated to occur after the arrival of geese on the wintering grounds was held. Last year, the delayed opening included the Two Buttes area only, while this year the delayed opening covered the entire Arkansas Valley. The opening of goose hunting season on November 19, and the arrival of geese in the Valley by November 12, resulted in a period of about 7 days during which geese were present, but not subjected to hunting harassment. During this interim period, the birds established definite daily feeding flight patterns, and by the opening of hunting season were returning to and departing from the reservoirs at about 10:00 AM and 3:30 PM, respectively. Feeding flights involving several thousand birds going to one field were not as common as during the previous year, and landowner complaints of crop depredation did not occur. �- 65 - Table 1.--Aeria1 Canada 1966-67. goose counts, Arkansas Location Valley, Colorado by dates, Nov. 15 Dec. 1 Jan. 12 Meredith Reservoir Holbrook Reservoir Dyes Reservoir Blue Lake (Adobe Cr. Res.) Pothole east of Blue Lake Swede Lake Eads Group: Sweetwater Nee Gronda Nee Noshe Upper Queens Verhoeff Ponds John Martin Reservoir Sniff Pond Beeker Pond CF & I Lakes Arkansas River Lake S. E. of Walsenburg Two Buttes Reservoir Turk's Pond 4,150 0 0 5,000 1,800 0 6,700 400 350 1,200 900 4,500 1,475 200 175 0 0 0 3,300 0 13,300 1,100 0 8,300 2,200 0 0 0 0 8,000 2,500 75 12 9,000 25 25 5,000 1,500 0 0 0 150 500 6,800 150 0 9,125 2,000 2,000 3,500 0 275 40 265 0 130 12,500 TOTALS 49,650 40,112 29,835 Table 2.--Post-hunting season status of short grass pra1r1e Canada goose population, 1960-67, data generally from regular mid-winter inventories. Year Number of Birds Year Number of Birds 1960 77,709 1964 81,221 1961 103,355 1965 103,435 1962 80,133 110,485.1/ 1966 1963 93 940 1967 111 452 l/Inventory of February 15, 1966, substituted for unsatisfactory January inventory. Table 3.--January inventory of Canada geese, Arkansas Valley, Co lorado, 1948 - 1967. Goose Count Year Goose Count Year Goose Count Year 40, 250.;f./ 1962 25,110 1955 4,798 1948 35,889 1963 24,212 1956 12,286 1949 33,750 1964 24,617 1957 13,170 1950 37,693 1965 35,894 1958 19,320 1951 38 ,63sl1 1966q 44,660 1959 30,463 1952 29,835 1967 37,394 1960 20,236 1953 31 360 1961 20 280 1954 1/Inventory of February 7, 1962, substituted for January, 1962, inventory. l/Inventory of February 15, 1966, substituted for January, 1966, inventory. �- 66 - Following the opening of hunting season, birds in the Two Buttes area failed to maintain the feeding flight pattern which had been established. They often flew in and out at various odd times, and gradually built up greater numbers at Turk's Pond, a small private body of water about 12 miles southeast of Two Buttes Reservoir. Feeding flight patterns at Turk's Pond were more consistent, probably due to the fact that hunter harassment was not as heavy, either on the firing line or in the feeding fields. Many of the Two Buttes area birds simply departed and flew south to Buffalo Lake National Wildlife Refuge in the Texas panhandle. On the lakes in the northern part of the Valley, the opening of hunting season resulted in a great deal more interchange and shifting of geese, but no appreciable dwindling of numbers could be detected. Birds would build up in numbers at Eads Lakes for a few days, then depart to the John Martin Reservoir area, and vice versa. No clear-cut effect of the delayed season opening could be determined. Hunting was somewhat better in the northern part of the Valley than in the Two Buttes area, due mainly to better distribution of geese. It is possible that the establishment of routine feeding flights, which was made possible by the delayed season opening, did result in holding more birds than would otherwise have occurred, but this cannot be definitely shown. Hunter Harvest: The operation of check stations at the Two Buttes Management Area during the 1966-67 hunting season resulted in collection of an essentially complete set of data. Table 4 presents data on harvest, wounding loss, hunting pressure, and hunter success. Table 4.--Goose harvest, wounding loss, hunting Two Buttes Management Area, 1966-67. Resident Item Goose Harvest: Adult Juvenile Unknown Ages Total Percent Adults Percent Juveniles Wounding 182 203 pressure, All Hunters: Number Percent Successful Total Hunter Days Hunter Days/Hunter Ave. Bag/Hunter Ave. Bag/Hunter Day success, Non-Resident Total 33 69 215 272 6 o 6 391 47.4 52.6 102 32.7 67.3 493 44.2 55.8 101 Loss Successful Hunters: Number Ave. bag/hunter and hunter 273 1.43 62 1.63 335 1.47 1,017 26.8 1,917 1.88 0.38 0.20 240 25.8 496 2.07 0.42 0.21 1,257 26.6 2,413 1.92 0.39 0.20 �- 67 - Table 5 compares the current goose harvest in the Arkansas Valley with the twelve-year average, indicating that the total harvest during the past year was up 84.5 percent from the twelve-year average. Baca and Prowers Counties showed decreases in the percentage of total Valley harvest, while Kiowa and Bent Counties showed increases. Throughout the Valley, the number of hunters was up 48.2 percent from last year, and the average season bag per hunter reached an all-time high of 2.59 compared with last year's 1.52. These. factors in combination, apparently brought about by reasonably good hunting weather and excellent distribution of the geese, resulted in the best hunting season on record. The poor hunting on the Two Buttes Management Area was compensated for by increased harvest by field hunters. Table 5.--Goose harvest in the Arkansas Valley, by county. 1966-67 and the 12-year average, 1954-65, based on results of random survey. Number and Percent of Geese Bagged l2-year average 1966-67 County Lakes No. % No. % Baca Two Buttes and Turk's 32.8 4,956 37.5 7,930 Eads and Blue Kiowa 2,938 22.4 6,758 27.8 Prowers Two Buttes and Eads 10.1 2,318 17.7 2,463 Bent John Martin, Blue and 11. 6 Horsecreek 1,525 4,836 19.9 Meredith and Henry 5.2 3.1 Crowley 686 751 1.4 0.6 Pueblo 185 150 1.1 0.1 142 30 Huerfano Otero Horsecreek, Cheraw group, 284 2.2 1,231 5.1 Dyes and Holbrook Las Animas 120 120 0.5 0.9 TOTALS 13,154 100.0 24,269 100.0 Table 6 lists goose hunting statistics for the past 13 years, and shows that 1966 stamp sales increased 43 percent over the previous year. This reflects the increase in goose hunting pressure as well as the more liberal 1966 Central Flyway duck season. �- 68 - Table 6.--Goose hunting season statisticsz 1954-66. Year 1954 1955 1956 1957 1958 1959 1960 1961 1962 1963 1964 1965 1966 Dates of Season 11/1 - 12/30 11/1 - 12/30 11/9 1/7 11/2 - 11/31 11/17 - 1/15 10/26 - 1/8 10/26 - 1/8 11/10 - 1/8 10/31 - 1/13 11/2 1/15 11/2 1/15 11/2 - 1/15 11/19 - 1/15 Stamp Sales 32,450 39,107 36,303 41,794 41,897 31,431 30,592 24,854 17,701 22,940 25,282 20,537 29 377 Estimated Goose Hunters 7,071 9,054 9,833 9,113 10,082 8,888 9,838 7,577 6,021 6,668 8,016 6,313 9 357 Arkansas Valley Average Season Estimated Bag Kill 1.04 7,372 1.54 13,904 1.05 10,276 1.39 12,656 1.51 15,205 1.61 14,309 1.39 13,629 1.68 11,724 1.58 9,495 2.17 14,444 2.30 18,474 1.52 9,613 2.59 24 269 Wounding Loss: Wounding loss in the 1966-67 hunting season was estimated by two methods: (1) The small game hunter random survey indicated a loss of 16.2 percent of the total goose harvest mortality; and (2) Check station information permits calculation of loss on the firing line of a minimum of 17.0 percent. The check station figure is commonly lower than the random survey figure, but this year's figures show very close agreement. It is believed that these figures represent absolute minimums, and that probably the actual figure is slightly higher. Hunter Habits and Characteristics: Table 7 shows the relative goose kill, hunting pressure and hunter success for weekly intervals on the Two Buttes Management Area. Variations during the season are caused, of course, by the combination of varying hunter use (weather, weekends vs. weekdays, etc.) and varying hunting conditions (weather, goose population present, changes in daily goose flight patterns, etc.). Table 7.--Hunting pressure and goose harvest by weekly intervals, Two Management Area, 1966-67. Week Interval 11/19 to 11/26 11/27 to 12/3 12/4 to 12/10 12/11 to 12/17 12/18 to 12/24 12/25 to 12/31 1/1 to 1/7 1/8 to 1/15 TOTALS Total Number of Hunter Days 828 236 338 336 216 177 131 151 2,413 Successful Hunter Days 259 28 38 30 8 13 16 10 402 Number of Geese Bagged 336 29 42 34 9 13 19 11 493 Buttes Average Bag Per Hunter Day .406 .123 .124 .101 .042 .073 .145 .073 .204 �- 69 - Table 8.--Resident and non-resident hunter-days of use by pit location, Two Buttes Management Area, 1966-67. South Side Pit Hunter-days Pit Hunter-days Pit Hunter-days Pit Hunter-days No. Res. Non-Res. No. Res. Non-res. No. Res. Non-res. No. Res. Non-res. 1 40 5 21 27 4 41 14 0 61 4 0 2 48 6 22 27 6 42 9 5 62 5 2 3 66 4 23 11 2 43 16 1 63 3 1 4 66 6 24 14 3 44 29 1 64 1 1 5 74 9 25 24 8 45 18 3 65 3 0 6 78 8 26 9 4 46 18 3 66 o 2 7 65 10 27 12 2 47 16 2 67 1 1 8 61 17 28 20 5 48 15 0 68 o 2 9 58 18 29 9 3 49 24 20 69 o 2 10 52 19 30 13 5 50 11 3 2 3 70 11 71 17 31 22 4 51 71 7 5 o 3 12 91 34 32 15 8 52 13 11 72 o 2 13 62 12 33 17 4 53 22 7 75 2 0 14 52 18 34 18 10 54 24 3 76 3 0 15 74 12 35 14 11 55 18 4 1 0 78 16 63 25 36 14 5 13 10 56 81 1 0 17 49 17 37 15 5 9 5 57 unk. 3 4 18 32 5 38 15 5 58 5 0 19 17 12 39 19 0 59 4 2 20 13 8 40 13 2 60 o 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 TOTALS: North Side 2 13 31 3 8 0 4 o 14 32 6 7 4 0 0 3 1 15 9 2 1 33 29 2 10 2 2 17 3 0 B 6 11 3 2 1 18 3 0 unk. 3 7 12 2 22 o 1 1 0 7 South Side: Resident: 1,774 North Side: Resident: Non-resident: 471 Non-resident: Total: 2,245 Total: Goose Kill: 486 Goose Kill: Bag/hunter-day: 0.22 Bag/hunter-day: 19 12 12 3 GRAND TOTAL: 5 7 8 o Resident: Non-resident: Total: Goose Kill: Bag/hunter-day: o o 2 o o 143 25 168 7 0.04 1,917 496 2,413 493 0.20 Feeding flights from the Reservoir were generally to the south and southeast, resulting in much higher hunting pressure and goose kill on the south side firing line. The food plot on the north side received no use by feeding geese, and the only north side pits which showed any hunter use and hunting success were those at the extreme west end (Table 8). �- 70 - Check station data were again examined to determine the influence of repeated trips by hunters upon individual hunter success at the Two Buttes Management Area. These data are presented in Table 9. There is, of course, no question that the hunters who make two or more trips to the Management Area should have a higher rate of success than do the one-trip hunters, based simply on whether the hunter is or is not successful at least once during the season. Thus, it is to be expected that the ratio of successful to unsuccessful hunters should increase as the number of days hunted increases. Howeve r , as shown in Table 9, the average bag per hunter day also increases as the number of days hunted increases, indicating that it is the better hunters who make repeat trips to the Management Area. Table 9.--Re1ationship of number of individual hunters, days hunted, hunting success, Two Buttes Management Area, 1966-67. Ratio of Number Number of Number of Successful to Number of of Days Unsuccessful Successful Unsuccessful Geese Hunted Hunters Hunters Hunters Bagged 577 1 79 0.137 107 219 2 115 0.525 148 3 83 58 0.699 85 4 24 31 1.292 57 12 5 21 1.750 32 6 4 12 23 3.0001/ 7 0 7 Inf.16 8 1 6 6.000 11 1 9 3 3.000 4 1 10 1 1.000 1 11 0 0 0 0.0001/ 12 0 2 Inf.9 TOTALS 922 335 0.363 493 and Average Bag Per Hunter Dal .163 .222 .201 .259 .194 .240 .327 .196 .111 .050 .000 .375 .204 u- number cannot be divided by zero; hence this ratio is expressed as "infinity". Special Banding Investigation: During the 1966-67 wintering season, trapping and banding of geese in the Arkansas 'Va11ey was done following the close of hunting season. The trapping site at Two Buttes Reservoir had been pre-baited for about a week, and on January 18 (three days after the close of hunting season) the first catch, consisting of 137 small Canada geese, was madp-o The following day, a small catch of 36 was made at the same site. From this time on, extreme difficulty was encountered in getting birds to go to the bait, and finally all geese left Two Buttes Reservoir and did not return. Trapping operations were moved to the John Martin Reservoir area, which includes Verhoeff Pond, where about 20,000 geese were present, but even here it was necessary to fire the net on small groups of geese, as it was impossible to get larger groups to build up on the baited area. The trapping was finally terminated on February 13, after warm weather had melted the ice on John Martin Reservoir and the geese had become dispersed allover the lake. The quota of 1,000 birds was not reached, as only 674 were newly banded. The trapping and banding results for the 1966-67 season are presented in Table 10. �- 71 - Table Date 1/18/67 1/19/67 1/28/67 1/29/67 1/30/67 2/1/67 2/4/67 2/5/67 2/7/67 2/8/67 2/9/67 2/10/67 2/12/67 2/13/67 TOTALS Valley Banding Results, 1966-670 Number of Number of Geese Banded Location Recaptures Total 132 36 73 22 88 29 56 16 43 28 29 62 21 39 5 0 5 1 1 3 0 1 2 2 3 1 1 137 36 78 23 90 30 59 16 44 30 31 65 22 40 674 27 701 10.--Arkansas Two Buttes Res. Two Buttes Res. Verhoeff Pond John Martin Res. John Martin Res. John Martin Res. John Martin Res. Verhoeff Pond John Martin Res. John Martin Res. John Martin Res. John Martin Res. John Martin Res. Verhoeff Pond 2 Information obtained from trapping and banding geese, along with certain information from check stations, is presented under appropriate sub-headings in the following: Age and Sex Composition: Age determination of all geese trapped was by notched tail-feather method, double checked by cloacal examination. Age determination of all geese checked through check stations was by notched tail-feather method. Table 11 compares the percentage of young birds between the trapped sample and the check station sample, with the trapped sample separated by location. All birds in the trapped sample are listed, even though many of the small catches made were certainly not representative of the population. It has customarily been considered that check station information may be a more valid measure of age composition. Normally, the percentage of young birds in the check station sample is higher than in the trapped and banded sample, and this condition held true this year. This year, also, percentages of young birds in both the check station sample and in the trapped sample were considerably higher than in previous years. These data, combined with information relayed by various people working in Canada, indicate that the Short Grass Prairie Population experienced an excellent production year in 1966. Data on sizes of Canada goose family groups in the Arkansas Valley are presented in Table 12. These counts showed family groups to be generally the same size as in previous years, and do not reflect the greater number of young birds noted in check station and trapping samples. We have not in the past placed any degree of reliance upon family group counts. The inherent difficulty in maintaining standardization of method, and the lack of consistency in data, cause this technique to be less than ideal. �- 72 - Table 11.--Age comparison of the Arkansas Valley Canada goose flock, 1966-67, as estimated by trapping and check station results. Number of Percent Number of Percent Total Young Young Adults Adults Birds Trapped Sample: Two Buttes Res. John Martin Res. Total Trapped Birds 68 217 285 39.3 41.1 40.7 105 311 416 60.7 58.9 59.3 173 528 701 Check Station Sample: Two Buttes Res. 262 54.7 217 45.3 479 Table 12.--Family grouE counts of Canada geesez Arkansas Va11eYI 1966-67. Number Number Average Number of of Group of Birds Location Date Birds GrouEs Present Size Activity Two Buttes 1/16/67 116 31 3.74 1,000 On ice Two Buttes 1/17/67 86 26 3.31 1,000 On ice Turk's 1/17/67 69 24 2.88 1,300 On water John Martin 1/27/67 381 102 3.73 21,000 On ice John Martin 2/6/67 348 88 3.95 12 600 On ice TOTALS 1,000 271 3.69 Information on sex ratios was derived from the trapped sample only, and is presented in Table 13. These data show a fairly evenly balanced sex ratio, consistent with the data from previous years. Table l3.--Sex composition of the Arkansas Valley Canada goose flock, 1966-67, from traEEed samEle. Number Percent Number of Percent Total Location of Males Males Females Females Birds Two Buttes Reservoir 90 52.0 83 48.0 173 51.7 John Martin Reservoir 255 48.3 273 528 TOTALS 345 49.2 356 50.8 701 Goose Weights: The mean weights of hunter-harvested birds and of trapped and banded birds are presented in Table 14. Of the 493 Canada geese which were checked through the Two Buttes check stations, useable weight data were recorded on 479. The mean weights of hunter-harvested birds show more variation between the two age classes than was true last year, with the mean weight for all geese being slightly higher. Again, as has been true for the past several years, geese taken by hunters at Two Buttes were larger than those taken by cannon-net trapping at the same location. Two possible reasons have been advanced: (1) It has commonly been accepted that there is probably no selectivity on the part �- 73 of firing-line shooters, but the data suggest that hunters may tend to pick a larger bird at which to shoot; and (2) There exists the possibility that weight loss as the result of hunting season stress could account for the difference. The sample of birds taken by hunters was distributed throughout hunting season, while the sample from cannon-net trapping was taken after the close of hunting season. As shown in Table 14, geese trapped at John Martin were considerably larger than geese from either of the Two Buttes samples. This same phenomenon was observed two years ago, when it was noted that geese trapped at Eads 'Lakes were significantly larger than the Two Buttes birds. This suggests that, in large part, a different segment of the flock, having different physical characteristics, winters in the northers part of the Arkansas Valley. Table 14 -- Comparison of Weights of Geese From Trapped and Check Station Samplesz Arkansas Valley, 1966-67. Number of Adults Source Two Buttes Check Station Two Buttes Trapping John Martin Trapping Average Nrunber of wt., Lbs , Juveniles Average Number wt., Lbs . of Geese Average wt., n» , 217 5.67 262 5·10 479 5.36 105 5·47 68 4.85 173 5·23 311 6.08 217 5.48 528 5.83 ==================================================================~============ Effects of weather Upon Goose Flights and Hunter Harvest: The use of the aerator was continued at Two Buttes again this year. However, weather cold enough to freeze the lake did not, occur until quite late in the season, and by this time most of the geese had left. Thus, the aerator had little effect in holding birds on the lake, even though it successfully kept a spot of open water after the lake had frozen over. The effect of weather upon goose flights was difficult to assess. Cold and stormy weather during hunting season occurred very rarely, and there were a number of ''bluebird''days. It would seem that this situation would not be conducive to high hunter success, yet the estimated kill in the Valley and the individual hunter success ratio were both the highest on record. Excellent distribution of geese, making a maximum nrunber available to hunters, plus a greater nrunber of hunters participating, seems to be the prime reason for the unusually large harvest. Prepared by: William H. Rutherford Wildlife Researcher Date: October, 1967 Approved by: Jack R. Grieb Project Leader Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief ��October, 1967 - 75 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO -------------------------- Project No. w-88-R-12 Work Plan No. 3 Mibratory Bird Investigations Job No. 6 Title of Job: Investigation of Mallard Management Units of Eastern Colorado Period Covered: Personnel: December 1, 1966 through September 1, 1967 U. S. Game Management Agents Charles Hayes, Dale Horne, and Jack Randall and Richard Hopper, William Rutherford, Jack Grieb, Bob Kitzmiller, Charles Hurd, Mike Szymczak, Richard McDonald, Perry Olson, Charles Roberts, Brownlee Guyer, Gail Boyd, and Howard Funk of the Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department. ABSTRACT In the winter of 1966-67, 7,021 mallards were banded in seven study units in eastern Colorado. Approximately 30 percent of these were adult males, 30 percent immature males, 16 percent adult females and 25 percent immature females. Ground counts again indicated the sex ratio of mallards in the wild was about 1.5 males per female or 60 percent males. Fluoroscopy studies again showed only about 5 percent of the young of the year mallards in Colorado carried body shot from the 1966-67 hunting season. About 250,000 mallards were present in eastern Colorado in January of 1967. Recoveries during the 1966 hunting season numbered 57 from the 1963-64 winter banding, 85 from the 1964-65 winter, and 138 from the 1965-66 winter banding. Recovery rates remained at a low 1 to 2 percent, according to age and sex of the birds and number of years since banding. Annual mortality of all male mallards since the beginning of this study in 1963 is estimated to be between 5 and 25 percent per year which is very low. Female mortality is estimated to have been higher at possibly near 50 percent per year. Migration routes as determined by locations of recoveries again strongly suggest most of the mallards which winter in Colorado remain within that portion of the Central Flyway west of the 100th Meridian and in Alberta and Saskatchewan. A high proportion of those harvested each year are taken in Colorado and most of them "home" to the general vicinity in which they were first trapped and banded. Federal and State operated wing surveys again showed a high proportion of adult male mallards in the hunters bag further suggesting a surplus of adult males in the state which could and should be harvested to a greater degree than in the past few years of one and two mallard bag limits. �- 76 - Recommendations: Trapping and banding throughout eastern Colorado will be continued at least one more winter. Preliminary work of summarizing all years o,f banding and recoveries should be initiated during Segment 13 to help determine if another winter of banding will be needed to complete the mallard study in the Central Flyway. Objectives: (1) To determine breeding, migration and wintering ranges and obtain life history and mortality data from mallards wintering in the following seven study areas: (a) South Platte Valley, Denver to Greeley, (b) South Platte Valley, Greeley to Fort Morgan, (c) South Platte Valley, Fort Morgan to Sterling, (d) South platte Valley, Sterling to Julesburg (e) Fort Collins area, (f) Bonny Reservoir area, and (g) the Arkansas River Valley. (2) To determine bias or agreement in age and sex ratios of mallards captured by various methods in comparison with ratios present in the flocks by work unit. (3) To determine the extent of correlation by work unit between (a) percentages of immature mallards with embedded shot, (b) estimates on number of hunters by area and (c) number of birds present for an index of hunter pressure. (4) To estimate hunter to the gun between selectivity to sexes and differential ages and sexes of mallards. vulnerability ,(5) To compare all of this information between work units and with data collected in other states and Flyways. Procedure: Trapping methods, mainly with Salt Plains type traps, were described in previous segment reports (Funk 1964). Six more Salt Plains traps were constructed making a total of 20 utilized during the winter. As in prior years, trapping was begun in the Bonny Reservoir area followed by work in the Arkansas and South Platte Valleys. In most cases, data from trapping and surveys in 1966-67 are merely assembled in a manner which will aid final analysis. Some comparisons are made between study areas and years in the survey and band recovery data. INTRODUCTION In 1963, a study was initiated to determine if mallards in eastern Colorado were all one flock or if these were several flocks which could possibly be managed separately with differing seasons and bag limits. In 1965, the rest of the Central Flyway states joined us in an effort to determine if flock management in the flyway was feasible for mallards. To date colorado has four winters of bandings and three years of recovery data. The rest of the flyway states have two winters of banding and recoveries from one year. This report covers the Colorado portion of this study, mainly from the 1966-67 hunting season and trapping program. Final analyses will not begin for at least another year. �- 77 - Trapping, Banding and Surveys - 1966-67 Mallard trapping in the seven study areas in eastern Colorado produced 7,021 birds banded after the hunting season of 1966-67. These are shown in Table 1 by age, sex and study unit (see Fig. 1 for study unit numbers and locations). Approximately 220 ducks of other species were banded in conjunction with the mallard banding; mainly American widgeon and pintai1s in the,Arkansas Valley. Table l.--Numbers and percentages of mallards in the banded sample by sex, age and area, eastern Colorado, 1966-67. Adult Management Units (4)Fort Collins (6)Denver Greeley (3)Gree1ey Fort Morgan (2)Fort Morgan Sterling (1)Sterling Julesburg (9)Bonny Reservoir (lO)Arkansas 1/ Valley Totals and Average % !! Numbers Banded Immature Male No. Female % .No. Male % No. Female % No. % 1,013 290 28.7 210 20.7 289 28.5 224 22.1 912 249 27.3 179 19.6 266 29.2 218 23.9 1,000 250 25.0 152 15.2 320 32.0 278 27.8 923 431 46.7 108 11.7 266 28.8 118 12.8 1,000 298 29.8 69 6.9 340 34.0 293 29.3 999 259 25.9 148 14.8 277 27.7 315 31.6 1,174 321 27.4 270 23.0 307 26.1 276 23.5 7,021 2,098 29.9 1,136 16.2 2,065 29.4 1,722 24.5 For simplicity in reporting, Units 10, 12 and 13 in the Arkansas Valley will be referred to as Unit 10. Age and Sex Composition: Table 1 indicates that the sex composition of banded mallards by study unit was heavy toward males. This has been the trend since the beginning of the study. Adult females are usually lowest in number in the samples; this year at only 16 percent of the total banded. Ratios in Table 1 are not representative of the proportion in which mallards of various sex and age classes were trapped as we released many adult males and a fair number of immature males without bands. Our quotas were 1,000 banded mallards per study unit, of which about 250 were to be adult males, adult females, immature males and immature females. The limit of 1,000 bands was set so as not to get an excess of banded birds in the population and, thus influence band reporting rates. Lack of time, poor trapping weather, and trap bias in favor of males eventually forced us to band proportionately more males than females in order to reach 1,000 birds per unit. �WATERFOWL MAIIAGEMENT UNITS WYOMING NEB J: « GFP-R-M-l Figure 1. --Mallard management urit t s in CoLor ad o., . I. .. . . K " �- 79 - Almost 1,200 mallards were banded in the Arkansas Valley, thus exceeding our quota in that area. This was ,done on purpose as we found some new areas of trapping not sampled prior to 1966-67 and also because we missed a year of trapping in the Arkansas VaHey in'1964-65 due to early migration. Sex ratio ground counts were again conducted in most study units during the winter. As in past years, the ratio of mallard males to females was close to 1.5:1 or 60 percent ma.les as shown in Table 2. This ratio cannot be compared with sex composition in Table 1 because of trap bias. Table 2.--Mallard sex ratio ground counts by study unit, 1966-67., Number Ducks Counted Date Location Male Female Total BONNY RESERVOIR AREA (Unit 9) 12-18-66 Bonny Reservoir 12-19-66 Bonny Reservoir 12-19-66 Bonny Reservoir 12-29-66 Bonny Reservoir 12-29-66 Bonny Reservoir STERLING - JULESBURG AREA (Unit 1) Prewitt Reservoir 2-18-67 South Platte River 2-18-67 South Platte River 2-20-67 FORT MORGAN - STERLING AREA (Unit 2) 2-20-67 South Platte River DENVER - GREELEY AREA (Unit 6) 1-25-67 Va1mont Reservoir Lake 1 Lake 2 Percent Males 302 346 323 320 323 1,614 228 220 214 219 212 1,093 530 566 537 539 535 2,707 57.0 61.1 60.1 59.4 60.4 59.6 319 265 210 794 237 208 149 594 556 473 359 1,388 57.4 56.0 58.5 57.2 159 118 277 57.4 267 644 911 175 358 533 442 1,002 1,444 60.4 64.3 63.1 Fluoroscopy: Results of fluoroscopic examination of trapped mallards for embedded shot during 1966-67 are displayed in Table 3. This year, only young birds were examined. Samples were small in some units and no birds were fluoroscoped in Units 6 and 10. Percent with shot varied by unit and also with sample sizes. The average percent with shot was almost 5 percent which is similar to data from previous years. Winter Aerial Surveys: Duck counts for eastern Colorado during the winter of 1966-67 are listed in Table 4 by period of count and area. The December 2, 1966 count includes only the South Platte River valley as no count was made in the Arkansas Valley. The January Inventory of early 1967 includes both areas. Numbers of ducks in the South Platte drainage dropped from about 350,000 in early December to about 200,000 in early January. Approximately 55,000 birds were present in the Arkansas Valley during the latter count. �- 80 - Table 3.--Numbers of immature mallards fluoroscoped and numbers and percentages with embedded shot, by study unit and sex, eastern Colorado, 1966-67. Study Units Fort Collins Unit 4 Greeley - Fort Morgan Unit 3 Fort Morgan - Sterling Unit 2 Sterling - Julesburg Unit 1 Bonny Reservoir Unit 9 Totals and Averages Immature Males Number Number X-rayed With Shot Percent Immature Females Number Number X-rayed With Shot Percent 122 4 3.3 100 5 5.0 154 13 8.4 100 6 6.0 87 5 5.7 26 3 11.5 134 4 3.0 58 3 5.2 100 2 2.0 100 2 2.0 597 28 4.7 384 19 4.9 About 95 percent of the birds present during both censuses were mallards, except for the January Inventory in the Arkansas Valley where only 75-80 percent of the total were mallards. Analysis of Band Recovery Data From the 1966-67 Season Data from the 1966-67 hunting season for mallards banded in eastern Colorado beginning the winter of 1963-64 are presented in this portion of the report along with wing and hunter pressure survey data. Recovery and Mortality Rates: Tables 5, 6 and 7 illustrate the numbers of mallards banded by area, age and sex during the winters of 1963-64 through 1965-66. Numbers of recoveries from each group of birds are also listed in these tables. There were 57 third-year recoveries from the 1963-64 bandings, 85 second-year recoveries from 1964-65, and 138 first-year recoveries from 1965-66 banded mallards. Recovery rates were calculated only for birds banded each year in all study units and these percentages are shown at the bottom of Tables 5, 6 and 7. Most percentages of banded birds recovered did not exceed 2 percent, indicating low mortality from shooting. Thus, the rates did not vary much between years, averaging between 1 and 2 percent of the males recovered each year and between 0.3 to 1.5 percent recovery rates for the females. The more rapid decline in percent of females recovered over male recoveries from first-year to thirdyear recoveries is probably indicative of high natural mortality to females during nesting season. Estimates of annual mortality and survival rates were made for various groups of mallards by sex and age classes during the 1964 and 1965 hunting seasons. The relative recovery rate method was utilized in these estimates as shown in Table 8. Survival and mortality rates varied considerably for all sex groups by age class except for adult males which had a calculated survival rate of . �- 81 - Table 4.--Aeria1 duck counts by interval, study unit and specific location, eastern Colorado, 1966-67. Number Ducks by Date Area December 2, 1966 January 9-12, 1967 Fort Collins Area (Unit 4) College Lake Terry Lake Reservoir No. 8 Reservoir No. 8 Annex Reservoir No. 6 Douglas Reservoir Rocky Ridge Reservoir Lindenmaier Reservoir Long Pond Cobb Lake Nelson (Greenwalt) Lake New Windsor Reservoir Woods (Eaton) Lake Hollister Lake (Windsor Res.) Timnath Reservoir Boyd Lake Horseshoe Lake Fossil Creek Reservoir Loveland Lake Loveland Sugar Factory Slough Sub-totals Denver - Greeley Area (Unit 6) Boedecker Lake Lone Tree Reservoir Loveland Reservoir Ish Lake Terry (Longmont) Lake Union Reservoir Baller Lake Boulder Reservoir Valmont Reservoir St. Vrain River and Boulder Creek Denver Metro Area Barr Lake Mile High Ponds Horsecreek Reservoir Prospect Reservoir Banner Lakes Latham Reservoir Milton Reservoir South Platte River Sub-totals o 3,400 1,520 1,125 1,050 350 200 50 15 3,700 o 38,000 8,800 6,900 2,800 5,840 760 2,800 250 o 77,560 375 120 120 60 2,175 3,400 25 100 1,500 5,500 25 o o o 200 o o 2,000 16,000 5,500 2,150 o 2,800 o 1,000 o 2,700 39,475 o o o o o 7,000 1,100 8 o 2,125 o 11,100 1,400 665 18,000 600 1,100 1,600 20 33,200 6,055 50 78,933 7,200 600 20,100 67,765 o 28,500 o o o �- 82 - Table 4.--Aeria1 duck counts by interval, study unit and specific location, eastern Colorado, 1966-67. (Continued) Number Ducks by Date Area December 2, 1966 January 9-12, 1967 Greeley - Fort Morgan Area (Unit 3) Riverside Reservoir 8,150 0 Empire Reservoir 6,300 0 Jackson Reservoir 26,000 9,000 South Platte River 1,400 7,500 Sub-totals 41,850 16,500 Fort Morgan - Sterling Area (Unit 2) Pruitt Reservoir North Sterling Reservoir South Platte River Sub-totals 40,500 12,650 40 53,190 9,500 150 11,500 21,150 Sterling - Julesburg Area (Unit 1) Jumbo Reservoir South Platte River Sub-totals 66,000 100 66,100 12,000 23,000 35,000 Bonny Reservoir Area (Unit 9) Southwest Holyoke Bonny Reservoir Sub-totals 2,950 31,000 33,950 0 21,100 21,100 No Count 15,500 175 200 9,500 10 15,500 2,600 750 2,300 25 Arkansas Valley Area (Units 10, 11, 12 and 13) Meredith Reservoir Dyes Lake Sweetwater Reservoir Nee Noshe Reservoir Upper Queens Lake John Martin Reservoir Two Buttes Reservoir Turk's Pond Beeker Pond C F and I Ponds Arkansas River Kansas Line - Lamar Lamar - John Martin Dam John Martin Inlet - Rocky Ford Rocky Ford - Pueblo Sub-totals No Count 4,800 300 2,600 1,050 55,310 Totals South Platte Valley Arkansas Valley 351,583 No Count 200,990 55,310 �- 83 - Table 5.--Numbers of mallards winter banded in eastern Colorado, 1963-64, and recovered during the 1966-67 hunting season, by age, sex and unit of bandin • Adults Irnrnatures Male Female Male Female Totals RecovRecovRecovRecovArea Banded Banded ered Banded ered Banded ered Banded ered Fort Collins 1,026 553 4 144 0 197 10 132 1 Denver Greeley 1,022 496 13 70 0 334 4 122 0 Greeley Fort Morgan 280 99 0 43 0 67 0 71 0 Fort Morgan Sterling 674 336 6 69 1 194 4 75 0 Sterling Julesburg 295 91 1 29 0 112 3 63 0 Bonny Reservoir 256 86 0 24 0 98 1 48 0 Arkansas Valley 1,022 515 5 105 1 234 2 168 1 Totals 4,575 Average 3rd Year Recovery Rate 2,176 29 484 1.3% 2 1,236 24 679 1.9% 0.4% 2 0.3% Table 6.--Numbers of mallards winter banded in eastern Colorado, 1964-65, and recovered during the 1966-67 hunting season, by age, sex and unit of banding. 1/ Adults Irnrnatures Male Female Male Female Totals RecovRecovRecovRecovArea Banded Banded ered Banded ered Banded ered Banded ered Fort Collins 998 Denver Greeley 1,120 Greeley Fort Morgan 973 Fort Morgan Sterling 766 Sterling Julesburg 956 Bonny Reservoir 1,017 Totals 5,830 Average 2nd year Recovery Rate 485 10 119 1 238 2 156 0 609 17 128 1 241 0 142 2 423 7 103 1 321 6 126 2 527 9 114 0 90 0 35 2 558 615 11 11 65 107 167 738 0 1 201 148 1,239 0 2 10 90 87 636 0 0 6 3,217 2.0% 4 0.5% 0.8% .UNo banding accomplished in the Arkansas Valley during 1964-65. 0.9% �- 84 - Table 7.--Numbers of mallards winter banded in eastern Colorado, 1965-66, and recovered during the 1966-67 hunting season, by age, sex and unit of banding. Adults Male Area Fort Collins Denver Greeley Greeley Fort Morgan Fort Morgan Sterling Sterling Julesburg Bonny Reservoir Arkansas Va lley Totals Average 1st Year Recovery Rate Totals Banded RecovBanded ered Immatures Female RecovBanded ered Male RecovBanded ered Female RecovBanded ered 1,006 285 6 188 2 299 9 234 4 1,093 481 15 129 1 299 10 184 2 1,000 288 5 171 4 322 8 219 4 1,017 287 6 195 5 329 6 206 2 1,035 997 922 284 322 334 6 6 5 89 162 133 ° 1 2 362 288 270 9 6 3 300 215 185 2 5 4 7,070 2,291 49 1,067 15 2,169 51 1,543 23 2.1% 1.4% 2.4% 1.5% 94 percent for the two years. Survival rates for immature males varied from 123 percent survival, which of course is impossible, to only 34.5 percent survival. Sampling error along with changes in harvest rates caused by going from a 1 mallard limit to a 2 mallard limit and vice versa eVidently were the causes for this discrepancy. However, survival of all male mallards during the 1964 and 1965 seasons is judged to have been high, probably over 75 percent. Female survival is calculated to have been much lower than for males during the 1964 and 1965 seasons (Table 8). Female survival rates varied by age class from 32 to 63 percent, but when age groups were combined, the survival rates were between 42 and 50 percent. The relative recovery rate method of calculating mortality and survival takes into consideration all forms of mortality, natural as well as hunting. The lower survival rates for females over males thus indicates the high natural mortaltiy to hens during the nesting season as shown in recovery rates presented in Tables 5, 6 and 7. In summation, both low recovery rates and high survival rates suggest hunting contributed little to the mortality of Colorado wintering populations of mallards since 1963-64. Low daily bag limits of 2 mallards per day in 1964, 1 in 1965, and 2 in 1966 were the main reasons for this phenomenon. �- 85 - Table 8.--Re1ative recovery rate method estimates of annual survival and mortality of 1963-64 and 1964-65 banded mallards during the 1964 and 1965 hunting seasons by sex and age groups at time of banding. Year of Banding No. Recoveries Recovery Rates Each Year Afr,r Each Year 2 After Banding _I Surviva1 Morta1i§y. Number Banding Banded 1-3 2-3 1-3 Rate 1/ Rate-7 2-3 Immature Males 1963- 64 1964-65 1965-66 1,236 1,239 2,169 cu !:il 48 39 51 1.0 Adult Males 1963-64 1964-65 1965-66 2,176 3,217 2,291 CU 121 49 Immature Females 1963-64 1964-65 1965-66 679 636 1,543 Adult Females 1963-64 1964-65 1965-66 All Males All Females Age and Sex II 11 31 ~/ 21 CU .0315 .0235 .0388 .0081 77 65 CU .0376 .0214 CU 15 23 5 6 484 738 1,067 cu 1963-64 1964-65 1965-66 1963-64 1964-65 1965-66 1.232 21 0.345 0.655 .0354 .0202 0.941 0.944 0.059 0.056 CU .0236 .0149 .0074 .0094 0.314 0.631 0.686 0.369 7 4 CU .0257 .0141 .0145 .0054 0.564 0.383 0.436 0.617 3,412 4,456 4,460 CU 125 160 75 100 CU .0359 .0224 .0366 .0168 1.019 0.750 0.250 1,163 1,374 2,610 CU 34 38 CU .0247 .0146 .0103 .0073 0.417 0.500 0.583 0.500 19 15 12 10 1-3= all recoveries from each banded segment. 2-3= all recoveries except first-year recoveries. Number of birds banded divided into number recovered = recovery rate in percent. In percent. Example 1.232 = 123.2 percent; or, 0.345 = 34.5%. CU = Cannot Use. Survival rate of 100 percent or over impossible. However, survival rate· indicated to be high. Migration and Harvest Patterns: Recoveries from the 1966 hunting season from birds banded in 1963-64, 1964-65 and 1965-66 are shown in Tables 9, 10 and 11, respectively. In these tables, recoveries are grouped into those from provinces in Canada and states in the Central Flyway west of the 100th meridian, Central Flyway east of the 100th meridian, Pacific Flyway and the Mississippi Flyway. The recoveries are further broken down by sex and age class of the birds at time of banding. �- 86 Table 9.--Harvest locations of mallards banded in eastern Colorado in 1963-64 and recovered in 1966-67 by area of recovery, sex, and age at time of banding. Location Adult Male Female No. % No. % Immature Male Female No. % No. % Canada Alberta Saskatchewan Sub-totals 4 2 6 13.8 6.9 20.7 1 1 2 50.0 50.0 100.0 2 2 4 9.5 9.5 1.9.0 1 0 1 50.0 0.0 50.0 Central Flyway West of 100th Meridian Colorado 17 Nebraska 4 Kansas 0 Sub-totals 21 58.6 13.8 0.0 72.4 0 0 0 0 0.0 0.0 --0.0 0.0 7 2 1 10 33.2 9.5 4.8 47.5 1 0 0 1 50.0 0.0 0.0 50.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 1 4.8 0 0.0 1 0 0 0 0 1 3.4 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 3.4 2 6":b 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0 2 1 1 1 0 5 0.0 9.5 4.8 4.8 4.8 0.0 23.9 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Mississippi Flyway Illinois Sub-totals 0 0 0.0 0.0 0 0 0.0 0.0 1 1 4.8 4.8 0 0 0.0 -0.0 Totals 29 100.0 2 100.0 21 100.0 2 100.0 Central Flyway East of 100th Meridian South Dakota Pacific Flyway Colorado Idaho Washington Montana Utah Wyoming Sub-totals �- 87 - Table 10.--Harvest locations of mallards banded in eastern Colorado in 1964-65 and recovered in 1966-67 by area of recovery, sex, and age at time of banding. Adult Immature Location No. % Female No. % Canada Alberta Saskatchewan Sub-totals 6 2 8 9.2 3.1 12.3 1 0 1 25.0 0.0 25.0 0 1 1 0.0 10.0 10.0 1 2 3 16.7 33.3 50.0 Central Flyway West of 100th Meridian Colorado 39 Wyoming 2 North Dakota 2 South Dakota 2 Nebraska 5 1 Kansas Sub-totals 51 60.1 3.1 3.1 3.1 7.7 1.5 78.6 2 0 1 0 0 0 5 0 0 1 1 0 7 50.0 0.0 0.0 10.0 10.0 0.0 70.0 2 0 1 0 0 0 3 50.0 0.0 25.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 75.0 3 33.3 0.0 16.7 0.0 0.0 0.0 50.0 Central Flyway East of 100th Meridian North Dakota South Dakota Nebraska Sub-totals 1 1 0 2 1.5 1.5 0.0 --3.0 0 0 0 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 1 0 1 2 10.0 0.0 10.0 20.0 0 0 0 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Pacific Flyway Nevada Idaho Sub-totals 1 2 3 1.5 3.1 4.6 0 0 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0 0 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0 0 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Mississippi Flyway Louisiana Sub-totals 1 1 1.5 1.5 0 0 0.0 0.0 0 0 0.0 0.0 0 0 0.0 0.0 Totals 65 100.0 4 100.0 10 100.0 6 100.0· Male Male No. % No. Female % �- 88 - Table l1.--Harvest locations of mallards banded in eastern Colorado in 1965-66 and recovered in 1966-67 by area of recovery, sex, and age at time of banding. Location Adult Male Female No. % No. % Immature Male Female No. % No. % Canada. Alberta Saskatchewan Sub-totals 4 2 6 8.2 4.1 12.3 -- 2 0 2 13.3 0.0 13.3 6 3 9 11.8 5.8 17.6 1 2 3 4.3 8.8 13.1 Central Flyway West of 100th Meridian Colorado 32 Montana 1 Wyoming 1 North Dakota 3 South Dakota 1 Nebraska 4 Texas 0 Sub-totals 42 65.3 2.0 2.0 6.2 2.0 8.2 0.0 85.7 7 1 0 0 0 1 0 9 46.6 6.7 0.0 0.0 0.0 6.7 0.0 60.0 17 0 2 1 1 7 1 29 33.3 0.0 3.9 2.0 2.0 13.7 2.0 56.9 7 0 2 0 2 1 0 12 30.5 0.0 8.7 0.0 8.7 4.3 0.0 52.2 Central Flyway East of 100th Meridian North Dakota 0 South Dakota 1 Nebraska 0 Kansas 0 Oklahoma 0 -1 Sub-totals 0.0 2.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 2.0 0 0 0 2 1 3 0.0 0.0 0.0 13.3 6.7 20.0 2 1 2 1 0 6 3.9 2.0 3.9 2.0 0.0 11.8 0 .0 1 0 1 2 0.0 0.0 4.3 0.0 4.4 8.7 Pacific Flyway Colorado Montana Washington Idaho Utah Sub-totals 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0 1 2 1 0 4 0.0 2.0 3.8 2.0 0.0 7.8 2 1 0 1 1 5 8.7 4.3 0.0 4.3 4.4 . 21.7 Mississippi Flyway Iowa Louisiana Arkansas Sub-totals 0 0 0 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 1 0 0 1 6.7 0.0 --0.0 6.7 0 1 2 3 0.0 2.0 3.9 5.9 0 1 0 1 0.0 4.3 0.0 4.3 Totals 49 100.0 15 100.0 51 100.0 23 100.0 �A study completed in 1966 (Funk 1966) suggested that the Central Flyway should be split into two management units as mallards west of the 100th meridian are a separate group from those east of the 100th meridian. It was shown that approximately 80 percent of the mallards banded in Colorado in winters prior to 1962 were recovered in the Central Flyway west of the 100th and in Alberta and Saskatchewan, directly north of this proposed unit. To date, data from this study agree strongly with the 1966 report. As seen in Tables 9, 10 and 11, the majority of the banded birds recovered during the 1966 season were again taken in the western portion of the Central Flyway and Alberta and Saskatchewan. These data help strengthen proposals by the Central Flyway Technical Committee in 1966 and 1967 to split the flyway into two units on the 100th meridian (Grieb et al. 1966 and Funk et al. 1967). Data regarding the degree to which Colorado winter banded mallards return in following years to the general area in which they were banded are shown in Tables 12, 13 and 14 for birds banded in 1963-64, 1964-65 and 1965-66, respectively. Previous study has shown that mallards in Management Units 1, 2 and 9 (See Fig. 1) are closely associated, those in 3, 4 and 6 of a similar group, and those in the Arkansas Valley another group (Funk 1966). Data in Tables 12, 13 and 14 again show the "homing" instinct of these birds to the same wintering grounds each year as the majority are recovered in the same general area in Colorado in which they were banded 1, 2 and 3 years ago. This is true in all sex and age classes shown in the tables supporting the theory that the majority of mallards will return year after year to the general wintering area occupied during the first year of their lives. Table l2.--Numbers and recovery locations of mallards banded in 1963-64 and recovered in Central Flyway Colorado, 1966-67, by unit of banding, sex, and age at time of banding. Colorado Unit of Banding Northeast 1 2 North-central 4 6 Southeast 10 Sample Size Northeast 1 2 9 Colorado Unit of Recovery North-central Southeast 3 6 4 10 Other 16 13 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 Adult Male 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 11 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 3 1 6 0 0 0 1 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 1 2 0 0 IrrnnatureMale Northeast 2 North-centra 1 4 6 Southeast 10 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 1 2 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 IrrnnatureFemale North-central 4 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 �- 90 - Table l3.--Numbers and recovery locations of mallards banded in 1964-65 and recovered in Central Flyway Co1oUdo, 1966-67, by unit of banding, sex, and age at time of banding _ • Colorado Colorado Unit of Recover~ Unit of Northeast Sample North-central Southeast Other Banding Size 1 2 9 3 4 6 10 15 Northeast Adult Male 1 5 3 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 2 5 1 2 0 1 0 1 0 0 9 4 1 0 2 1 0 0 0 0 North-central 3 5 0 0 0 3 0 2 0 0 4 9 0 0 0 0 4 4 0 1 6 11 0 0 0 1 2 8 0 0 North-central 3 6 Adult Female 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 North-central 3 6 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Immature Male North-central 4 0 0 3 2 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 Immature Female 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 No banding in southeast Colorado in 1964-65. 0 0 �- 91 Table 14.--Numbers and recovery locations of mallards banded in 1965-66 and recovered in Central Flyway Colorado, 1966-67, by unit of banding, sex, and age at time of banding. Colorado Colorado Unit of Recovery Unit of Sample Northeast North-central Southeast Other Banding Size 1 2 6 16 9 3 4 10 15 8 Northeast 1 2 9 North-central 3 4 6 Southeast 10 1 3 0 2 0 1 0 5 6 13 2 Adult Male 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 4 1 0 1 10 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 2 Adult Female North-central 3 4 6 Southeast 10 3 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 2 Immature Male Northeast 1 2 9 North-central 4 6 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 7 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 4 1 1 4 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 2 Immature Female Northeast 1 9 North-central 3 4 6 Southeast 10 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 2 2 1 Wing Surveys: As in the past two years, duck wing surveys were conducted during the 1966-67 hunting season by the Bureau of Sport Fisheries and Wildlife and Colorado (Tables 15 and 16, respectively). The main items of concern of these surveys for this investigation are the age and sex ratios of mallards in the bag by groups of management units. �- 92 - Table 15.--Age and sex composition of the 1966 mallard harvest in eastern Colorado as estimated by Federal wing survey. Adult Male Female Immature Male Female Sample Size Totals Sedgewick Phillips Logan Washington Yuma Totals 4 2 39 1 11 57 (44.9%) 15 0 6 23 (18.1%) 1 1 21 0 8 31 (24.4%) 0 0 12 0 4 16 (12.6%) 7 3 87 1 29 127 North-central (3, 4 and 6) Weld Morgan II Boulder Larimer Adams Totals 73 16 10 4 16 119 (44.9%) 35 5 7 1 6 54 (20.4%) 30 3 6 3 8 50 (18.9%) 27 6 3 0 6 42 (15.8%) 165 30 26 8 36 265 Southeast (10, 12 and 13) Bent Prowers Pueblo Crowley Totals 9 0 1 1 11 (39.3%) 4 0 0 -40 (14.3%) 3 3 4 0 10 (35.7%) 0 2 1 0 . 3 (10.7%) 16 5 6 1 28 Area and Unit Number Northeast (1, 2 and 9) 1.1 County 2 0 Unit 2 portion of Morgan County included with north-central Colorado data. Table 16.--Age and sex composition of the 1966 mallard harvest in eastern Colorado as estimated by State wing survey. Area Northeast Unit 1 9 North-central 4 6 Southeast 10 Sample Size Totals Adult Male Female Immature Male Female 27 6 33 (45.8%) 13 2 15 (20.8%) 8 4 12 (16.7%) 9 3 12 (16.7%) 57 15 72 12 73 85 (44.1%) 3 32 35 (18.1%) 6 29 35 (18.1%) 13 25 38 (19.7%) 34 159 193 10 (47.6%) 1 ( 4.8%) 6 (28.6%) 4 (19.0%) 21 �- 93 - Examination of Tables 15 and 16 reveals remarkable similarity in percentage composition of the various sex and age classes between Federal and State surveys. Approximately 45 percent of the bag was composed of adult males with about 20 percent immature males. This suggests either a shortage of young males in the population or a surplus of adults. Probably the latter is correct because of low recovery and mortality rates observed in the past few years. The proportion of females in the bag in both Tables 15 and 16 usually ranged between 15 and 20 percent except in the Arkansas Valley where the estimates were somewhat lower. However, in both tables, samples were quite small in the Arkansas Valley. Percentages of females in most comparisons slightly favored the adults over immature birds. Hunting Pressure Surveys: In Table 17, results from several surveys are assembled in order to compare hunting pressure estimates by management unit during the 1966-67 hunting season. Included in the table are results from the January Inventory, estimates of numbers of hunters by area, and percent of immature male mallards with shot in their bodies from the fluoroscopy investigation. Table 17.--Data from various surveys for use in comparison between study units, 1966-67. of hunting pressure Estimated Numbers of Hunters 'l:/ Numbers of Hunters per 100 Birds Censused Percent Immature Male Malla:37s With Shot - 35,000 21,150 21,100 1,409 681 478 4.0 3.2 2.3 3.0 5.7 2.0 North-centra 1 3 4 6 16,500 39,475 67,765 2,656 1,762 3,022 16.1 4.5 4.5 8.4 3.3 Southeast 10 55,310 2,325 4.2 Numbers of Ducks Present Unit Northeast 1 2 9 1/ l/January Inventory, Table 4. 2/Grieb and Hunter, 1967. 1/Tab1e 3. In past years, it was believed that estimates of hunter pressure could be obtained for each study unit by comparing estimated numbers of hunters per 100 birds present with numbers of immature birds with shot. However, the young birds do not pick up all their shot in Colorado so the comparison is not valid. The percent of birds with shot and number of hunters per 100 �- 94 - birds in Table 17 are quite similar by unit and there seems to be some correlation between the two. Possibly this is true to some extent but the method is not exact enough to provide valid comparisons for hunter pressure differences between units. Probably the best comparison would simply be numbers of hunters per 100 birds by unit as estimated from the hunter questionnaire survey (Grieb and Hunter 1967). CONCLUSIONS We have now concluded four years of winter banding and three years of hunting on our banded samples. We are fortunate that the remainder of the Central Flyway States joined in a cooperative mallard investigation. The other states have two years of winter banding completed along with one hunting season on these birds. We are unfortunate in the fact that hunting seasons of the past three years have been characterized by low bag limits on mallards. Had we been able to harvest more mallards, we would have obtained more reliable data concerning all phases of this investigation. However, we can possibly obtain almost as good results over a longer period of time. The results of this study seem to be in line with those obtained in the study on analysis of banding data prior to 1962 (Funk 1966). These add support to splitting the Central Flyway into two units. Also, indications of low mortality and surpluses of adult mallard males certainly seem to give justif~cation for relaxation of mallard bag limits in the western Central Flyway. �- 95 Funk, H. D. 1964. Winter duck banding in eastern Colorado. Colo. Game, Fish and Parks Dept. Game Res. Rept. October. pp. 79-87. 1966. Analysis of mallard recoveries from birds banded in eastern Colorado prior to 1962. Colo. Game, Fish and Parks Dept. Game Res. Rept. October. pp. 109-126. Funk, H. D., J. R. Grieb, G. Wrakestraw, D. Witt and G. Merrill. 1967. Ths Cent~al Flyway High Plains Mallard Management Unit, (A supplemental report). Cent. Fly. Tech. Comm. Rept. July. 20 pp. Grieb, J. R., H. D. Funk, D. Witt, G. Wrakestraw and L. Serdink. (1965). A proposed mallard management unit for the Central Flyway. Cent. Fly. Tech. Comm. Rept. 32 pp. Grieb, J. R. and G. N. Hunter. 1967. Colorado small game hunter harvest survey -- 1966. Colo. Game, Fish and Parks Dept. Rept., Fed. Aid Proj. w-88-R. July 1. 23 pp. Prepared by: Howard D. Funk Assistant Researcher Date: October, 1967 Approved by: Jack R. Grieb Project Leader Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief ��October, 1967 - 97 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO --------~---------------- Project No. w-88-R-12 Work Plan No. 4 Title of Job: Trapping and Banding Doves Period Covered: April 1, 1966 through April 30, 1967 Personnel: Migratory Bird Investigations Job No. 3 Marvin Smith, Alfred He mmert, Glen Hinshaw, Scott Bessire, Bert Widhalm, Alfred Heins, William Brandes, Jack Grieb, Richard Hopper, U. S. Game Management Agents Charles Hayes and Jack Randall, and Howard Funk. ABSTRACT Due to poor trapping success and conflicting work assignments, only 199 mourning doves were banded in Colorado during 1966. These were tagged in the Rocky Mountain Arsenal area north of Denver by U. S. Game Management Agent Jack E. Randall from June 26 through July 23. Of the total, 21 were adult males, 27 were adult females and 151 were immature doves. Wing molt data indicated hatching commenced about April 29 and that most young left the trapping area after reaching the age of approximately 45 days. Contacts with hunters during the first ten days of September produced a sample of 492 dove wings, mainly from the east slope, for use in estimating age ratios of birds in the bag and ages of young through use of the primary feather molt technique. The average bag contained 70 percent immature birds with southeast Colorado hunters having the highest proportion of young at 77 percent. Peak of hatching for doves in the bagged samples, as estimated by examination of feather molt, was between July 10 and 25. As in previous years, wing molt data suggested that many birds hatched in May and June probably had already left the state prior to hunting season. �- 98 - Recommendations: Effort should be made to band at least 500 mourning doves in the Fort Collins area or to the east in the South Platte Valley and 1,000 in the Craig area. U. S. Game Management Agents will probably assist in the Craig area as well as band an additional 500-1,000 doves in the Denver and .Pueblo areas. Objectives: (1) To obtain migration, life history and annual mortality information regarding doves raised in and/or migrating through Colorado. (2) To evaluate the dove wing aging method in Colorado hatching dates and age ratio data. (3) To evaluate the effects of hunting seasons in Colorado and other states on the dove population by age, sex and period. for use in obtaining Procedures: Due to pressing work loads, U. S. Game Management Agent Jack E. Randall was the only one able to spend time on the banding program in 1966. He utilized traps, bait, and trapping, aging and sexing techniques similar to those described in the Segment 10 report (Funk 1965). No nestlings were banded because of lack of time and personnel. no evaluation of the wing aging technique was possible. Therefore, Hunter bag checks were again made in September and wings collected for the purpose of obtaining hunting season age and sex ratios as well as ages of immature doves from wing molt data. Wildlife Conservation Officers in various parts of the state assisted with the wing collection. �- 99 TRAPPING AND BANDING DOVES Howard D. F1lllk Findings: Dove trapping in 1966 was limited to the Rocky Mountain Arsenal area northeast of Denver where Agent Randall banded 21 adult males, 27 adult females and 151 immatures for a total of 199 birds (Table 1). Proportion of young in the banded sample (75.9 percent) was quite high but not uncommon as the trapping site seems to be located in a staging area for immature birds. Trapping results were excellent on the first day with 43 immature birds captured, but success decreased rapidly and never again picked up during the remainder of the effort. In Table 2, numbers of immature birds captured by day are listed along with wing molt data for each bird. As explained in prior reports, wing primary feather molt may be utilized to assign an approximate age to young doves (Funk, 1965). Only two birds had molted their fifth primary feather (approximately 63 days old) on the date of capture and the bulk of birds had a molt between 0 and 3 (from 15 to 45 days old). This was consistent throughout the trapping period extending over approximately one month. Thus, it seems young birds remained in the staging area until the age of about 45 days and then left, otherwise more birds older than 45 days of age would have been captured toward the end of the trapping effort in July. �- 100 - Table 1.--Number of mourning doves banded in the Rocky Mountain Arsenal area in 1966 by agez sex and date of ca:eture. Adult Adult Daily Running Date Male Female Irmnature Totals Totals 6/26 6/27 6/28 6/29 6/30 7/1 7/6 7/7 7/8 7/9 7/10 7/11 7/19 7/20 7/21 7/22 7/23 Totals 43 11 14 6 11 4 43 11 14 7 16 10 43 54 68 75 91 101 6 9 7 9 1 1 8 20 11 12 1 2 109 129 140 152 153 155 1 5 1 1 4 7 5 12 1 10 12 8 13 156 166 178 186 199 27 151 199 199 2 3 1 3 3 4 2 1 2 7 2 2 1 5 2 1 21 Table 2.--Immature mourning dove wing primary feather molt sequence in the 1966 trae:eed same1es near Denver. Number Last Primary Feather Molted Date Caetured 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 6/26 6/27 6/28 6/29 6/30 7/1 43 11 14 6 11 4 11 6 3 2 2 7/6 7/7 7/8 7/9 7/10 7/11 7/19 7/20 7/21 7/22 7/23 Totals 9 7 9 1 3 1 13 5 3 2 3 1 5 1 13 4 6 2 3 1 1 2 3 1 1 1 1 12 1 2 1 4 151 31 5 1 1 1 1 1 4 7 2 1 2 2 5 1 4 2 3 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 3 2 3 1 1 3 39 44 26 9 2 �- 101 - Back-dating data from wing molt sequence of birds in Table 2 indicate April 29 was the approximate beginning date of hatching in the 1966 season which is similar to estimates of previous years. Numbers of birds in the sample were too few over the banding period to permit a valid estimate of hatching peak. A wing survey was conducted during the 1966 hunting season with the cooperation of a number of Wildlife Conservation Officers in the state. Four hundred ninety-two wings were collected from hunters in seven areas as shown in Table 3. Since male and female dove wings cannot be distinguished from each other, results in the table are listed only by age. Approximately 70 percent of the average bag was composed of young doves with some variance being noted between general areas within the state. Southeast Colorado had the highest proportion of young with about 78 percent. Table 3.--Numbers and percentages of doves in bagged sample during the 1966 Colorado hunting season by age and area of collection. Sample Number Percent Area Size Adult Immature Adult Immature Northeast Fort Collins 65 26 39 40.0 60.0 Denver 10 8 2 80.0 20.0 Sterling 20 9 11 45.0 55.0 Bonny Reservoir 49 18 3i 36.7 63.3 Sub-Totals 144 61 83 42.4 57.6 Southeast Pritchett Fort Lyon Sub-Totals 104 181 285 25 39 64 79 142 221 24.0 21. 5 22.5 76.0 78.5 77 .5 Southwest Cortez-Durango 63 23 40 36.5 63.5 492 148 344 30.1 69.9 Grand Totals Wing molt data were also collected from immature birds in the bag and are displayed in Table 4. Doves obtained during hunting season were of ages from 15 days (0 molt) to over 100 days old (8 molt). The average molt for all areas has to be considered somewhere between 2 and 4 which would make the estimated peak of hatching for these birds to have occurred between July 10 and 25 or from approximately 40 to 55 days prior to the first week of September when the bulk of the sample was gathered. This estimated peak of hatching is no doubt biased to some degree due to early departure of a portion of the earlier hatched young from the state. For example, the oldest birds in the bagged sample were about 103 days old (8 molt) which, when back-dated, would have had a hatching date of approximately May 25. We know from estimated hatching dates of banded immatures in Table 2 that some hatching had begun as �- 102 - early as April 29. Thus, we are missing the early hatched segment of immatures in the bagged sample and they must have left Colorado prior to September 1. Most of the Cortez-Durango birds were very young in comparison with those from eastern Colorado. Table 4 -- Wing Primary Feather Molt Data From Immature Doves in the 1966 Colorado Hunting Season Bag Samples by Area. Sample Size Area o Last Primary Feather Molted 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 4 6 Northeast Fort Collins Denver Sterling Bonny Reservoir 11 31 4 4 _5 _5 Sub-Totals 83 7 9 14 Southeast Pritchett Fort Lyon 79 142 14 _5 21 8 Sub-Totals 221 19 Southwest Cortez-Durango 40 12 Grand Totals 334 2 39 2 Percent of Total 6 4 4 2 1 2 1 3 _5 _3 _5 16 12 9 10 5 1 12 27 7 17 13 25 4 22 4 22 3 15 1 1 29 39 24 38 26 26 18 1 11 5 4 3 2 2 44 53 37 39 23 3 12.8 15.4 10.8 11.3 1 1 11.0 8 14.2 10 1 1 3 16.9 =============================================================================== REFERENCES Funk, H. D. 1965. Trapping and Banding doves. Dept. Game Res. Erpt. Oct. pp. 161-169. Prepared by: Howard D. Funk Assistant Researcher Date: October 1967 Colo. Game, Fish and Parks Approved by: Jack R. Grieb Project Leader Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief �- 103 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO -------------------------- Project No. w-88-R-12 Work Plan No. 6 Title of Job: Migratory Bird Investigations Job No. 1 Indexing Colorado Federal Aid Reports, Migratory Birds Period Covered: April 1, 1966 through March 31, 1967 Personnel: Richard M. Hopper Objective: Index Federal Aid progress and completion reports by author, species, and subject. Procedures: Assemble Federal Aid reports and index the migratory bird portion using standard indexing procedures by author; species, and subject. Results: This work was completed in Segment 11. See composite report contained in the April, 1966, Part One issue of the Game Research Report covering all indexing activities planned under this project and Federal Aid Projects W-37-R, W-38-R, W-40-R, and W-10l-R. Prepared by: Richard M. Hopper Assistant Researcher Date: October, 1967 Approved by: Jack R. Grieb Project Leader Wayne W. Sandfort Game Research Chief � https://cpw.cvlcollections.org/files/original/efd00eb2b76328a6acd7ffd845b509b4.pdf fa513c4fa7f16cebb3ad11c94fa6a0e2 PDF Text Text - 1 - JOB CO:MPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO Project No. W-40-R-8 Work Plan No. 1 Job No. Title of Job: 10 Review of Literature Period Covered: Personnel: Antelope Investigations M3.y 1, 1966 through April 30, 1967. George D. Bear Objective: Prepare an annotated bibliography of literature pertaining to population determination, food habit studies and census of big game animals with emphasis on pronghorn antelope. Procedure: Abstract available literature pertaining to population determination and census of big game animals., and antelope food habit studies. Compile the bibliographic references into a suitable summary report form. The library at Colorado State University will be the main source of material, but other libraries will be included as necessary. Results: Very little was accomplished on this job, efforts were directed toward preparing the transa:ctions for the 1966 Antelope States Workshop, for which Colorado was the host, and other jobs in this project. The majority of field work associated with this project was completed under this segment, therefore, more time is to be spent on office and librai,y work during the next segment, Prepared by: George D. Bear Assta Wildlife Researcher Date: January, 1968 Approved by: Jack R. Grieb Project Leader Wayne w. Sandfort Game Research Chief ��January, 1968 - 3 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO ----------------- Project No. W-40-R-8 work Plan No. 1 Antelope Investigations Job No. 11 Title of Job: Herd Structure and Factors Affecting Herd Structure Period Covered: Ma.y 1, 1966 through April 30, 1967. Personnel: George D. Bear ABSTRAC'T' Hunter check stations were established in the vicinity of the Antelope Study Areas in Moffat and Iarimer counties. Approximately 89% of antelope killed on Unit 2A were checked by check station personnel, while 40% of the animals killed on Unit 5 were checked. The sex and age was recorded for each animal and miscellaneous information obtained from each hunter contacted. The mean age of antelope brought through the check stations was 2.9, 2.7, 2.3, and 2.3 years old for Antelope Management Units 2A, 2, 4 and 5 respectively. There was 100% correlation between the percentage of yearling bucks in the harvest as determined by horn length measurements reported by hunters and data obtained at the check stations. However, the sample size was quite small, and a more extensive survey is needed. The wounding loss was very low. A total of four animals were found on the Moffat County Study Area following the hunting season. Natural mortalities due to predators and diseases appears to be very minor. Nine dead antelope were found hanging in fences. They became entangled in the fences as they attempted to jump across. A total of 18 antelope fawns were tagged on the Larimer County Study Area. These animals were tagged and released in effort to obtain known-age animals for the study on aging techniques. �- 4 - Objectives: (1) Obtain sex and age counts for at least three major herds in the state and test various aging techniques. (2) Obtain information on antelope mortality. (3) Evaluate and interpret data obtained in this appraisal, including natural losses and hunting mortality. Procedures: Antelope M3.nagement Units 2A and 5 are the designated study areas for this work. The Unit 5 study area is located in the rolling plains region approximately 20 miles north of Fort Collins, Iarimer County, Colorado. The Unit 2A study area is located in the rolling sandhills immediately south of M3.ybell, Moffat County, Colorado, and is characterized by a moderately dense shrub overstory. (1) Check stations were established in the vicinity of each study area to check animals killed during the hunting season. Age, sex, and location of kill was recorded for each animal checked. Age was determined by the tooth eruption and wear technique. Hunting information (wounded and abandoned antelope observed, number of hours hunted, and number of antelope observed) was recorded for each hunter checked. Hunters who killed a buck antelope were requested to record the length of the buck's horns on a Hunter Report Card. This information is to be compared to check station data to evaluate the possibility of using horn length, reported by hunters, as an index to the proportion of yearling antelope in the harvest. It is essential to have data from known-age animals if the aging techniques are to be properly evaluated. Fawns were captured when they were just a few days old, marked with metal ear tags, an.d released. The tags are approximately one and one-half inches in diameter and have an identification number and a notation (requesting the finder to return the tag to the Department of Game, Fish and Parks at Fort Collins) inscribed on it. (2) Hunter check stations and hunter report cards were used to determine the number of antelope harvested on the study areas by hunters. Wounding loss was determined by randomly working the areas on foot and by vehicle. Information on natural mortality was to be obtained by collecting carnivores and examining the stomach contents whenever the opportunity permitted. Eagle nests were checked for antelope remains. �- 5 HERD STRUCTURE AND FACTORS AFFECTING HERD STRUCTURE George D. Bear 'l'here were 92 antelope harvested on the Moffat County Study Area during a three-day hunting season in September, 1966 (Table 1). This was a success ratio of 92 percent. Check station personnel aged 82 of these 92 animals or 89 percent of the animals harvested. Many hunters with fawns tended to refer, to them as yearling animals. The report card data shows fewer fawns and more adults killed than tallied at the check stations, therefore, some hunters are reporting fawns as adult animals. Table 1 -- Sex Ratio: of the 1966 Antelope Harvest on Unit 2A Based Upon Hunter Report Cards and Check Station Data.* Bucks Does Fawns Source Number % Number % Number % Total Check Station Report Cards 41 50 22 27 35 19 23 82 14 17 92 ====- -- __, * There were 100 permits (50 buck and 50 doe issued for Unit 2A, Much of the land in the Iarimer County Study Area (Unit 5) has been closed to hunting by private landowners. Therefore, Unit 5 was combined with an adjacent management unit last year. Approximately 15 antelope were killed on the study area, six of these animals were checked at hunter check stations. The majority of antelope in Moffat County, Units 2 and 2A, WJore killed the first day of hunting season (Table 2). The weather was clear in these areas, whereas there were scattered rain showers the opening day in Unit 4, Iarimer County. The harvest in Unit 4 was more evenly distributed between the first and second day of the season. Units 4 and 5 were open two weekends (4 days), however, no hunters were checked the second weekend. Apparently there were very few people hunting the second weekend. The average amount of time required for the successful hunters in Units 2, 2A, 4 and 5 to bag their antelope was 3.8, 4.3, 5.3 and 4.7 hours, respectively. A larger number of wounded and abandoned antelope were reported by hunters in Units 2A and 2, than hunters in Units 4 and 5. The mean age of the antelope harvested on Units 2A, 2, 4 and 5 was 2.9, 2,7, 2,3 and 2.3 years respectively (Table 3). The permits issued for Units 2A and 2 are specified permits (buck or doe), whereas the permits for Units 4 and 5 are either-sex permits. The mean age of bucks harvested on Unit 2A was greater than the mean age of does; whereas on Units 2 and 4 the mean age was higher for does than the mean age of bucks harvested. �.,. 6 - Table 2 -- Miscellaneous Hunter Information Collected at the Antelope Hunter Check Stations. Unit Category Kill Bucks First Day Second Day Does First Day Second Day Both Sexes First Day Second Day Hunter Observations Buck Hunters Number of hunters checked Antelope observed/hunter Hours hunted/hunter Antelope observed/hunter/hour Bucks observed/100 does Doe Hm1ters Number of hunters checked Antelope observed/hunter Hours hm1ted/hunter Antelope observed/hunter/hour Bucks observed/100 does Buck and Doe Hunters Number of hunters checked Antelope observed/hunter Hours hunted/hunter Antelope observed/hunter/hour Bucks observed/100 does Wounded antelope observed Abandoned antelope observed 2A 2 4 5 43 5 17 7 10 12 3 1 37 16 1 1 8 9 2 80 6 33 8 18 21 3 48 24 40 4.1 71 3.5 22 21 26 10 20 4 26 1 16 38 17 69 4.0 17 3'{ 4.3 9 47 86 39 4.3 9 36 15 3 25 37 70 3.3 18 12 16 8 5.3 0 3 4 5.0 5 46 2 17 2 5.3 4.o 0.5 3 14 39 19 0 6 18 5.3 4.7 15 42 7 0 0 0 L ;::;:====---====== .. == =====--·~------=-==~=-· -- ~;:::::====-~ t i *>==-~=====-~ .•. :::l:;:::;::;::::'.::;:::::=:::: • 4 :::::=;::;::;========== �- 7 - .Table 3 -- Age. and Sex of the Antelope Checked Through the Hunter Check .. Stations. Age Class Years Bucks Number o/o Does Number 3/o Total Number o/o Unit 2A Fawn 6 13 13 38 19 l 5 5 5 4 14 14 11 9 14 10 17 12 12 12 2 12 11 25 3 4 8 17 9 5+ 7 19 15 Total · Mean Age 47 Unit 2 Fawn 4 8 6 3 3 5+ 1 Total . Mean Age 22 1 2 3 5 82 35 2·.4 3.2 1 3 5 35 27 14 14 5 2.9 2 18 1 10 3 3 27 27 0 0 2 18 11 3.0 2.6 22 12 21 15 15 15 3 9 9 6 3 3 9 27 27 19 9 9 33 2.7 Unit 4 Fawn 1 9 1 6 3 33 4 50 1 11 22 10 2 6 33 3 0 0 2 0 4 5+ 1 1 6 1 6 2 Total Mean Age 18 0 11 22 8 0 2 30 0 3 11 7 27 9 2.1 15 37 2 .. 3 2.7 Unit 5 Fawn 0 1 0 2 3 4 5+ Total Mean Age __ .,...__ ........,,._._. ---- 0 0 2 1 1 1 33 0 33 0 0 0 0 0 3 3.5 33 0 2 0.5 2 40 0 0 l 1 1 20 20 20 0 0 0 100 0 0 0 0 5 2~3 --=-=====~~~~===========-= �- 8 - '.nable 4 - ~ A..11.telo:pe Fawns Tagged.on the larimer County Study Area During 1966. Date Tagged T'a.g Number 5-31 5-31 An61 An72 An73 An84 An74 5-31 6-3 6-4 6-4 6-10 6-10 6-10 6-10 6-11 6-11 6-11 6-11 6-11 6-11 6-13 6-14 An75 An85 An86 An87 An83 An88 An90 An89 An91 An92 An93 An94 An95 Sex Male 11113.le Female M:t.le Female M3.le M3.le M3.le 1119.le 1119.le 1119.le JYiale M:l.le M3.le M:l.le Male M='cle Female ·Unit Number 5 - East 5 - East 5 - East 5 - West 5 - East 5 - East 5 - East 5 - East 5 - East 5 - East 5 - East 5 - East 5 - East 5 - East 5 - East 5 - East 5 - East 5 - East =~;====~~========-=-~==~=-- ~======~=-=============~=====-~=~=~==~=~======== T.here were 47 report cards distributed to hunters harvesting buck antelope on the study areas. 'J;'hese cards requested the hunters to measure the horn lengths of their animal. Of these cards 25 or 53% of them were filled out and returned. The ..ho!'.n length::·figures as reported by these hunters was used to determine percentage of yearling bucks in the harvest. The hunter report cards and check station data both indicated 28%, of the sample was yearlings; or 100% correlation. However, this is a small sample, and a more extensive survey is:neE::d.ed to evaluate the use of horn measurements to determine number of yearlings in the harvest. The wounding loss survey was determined by moving through the areas on foot and by vehicle. An aerial survey was scheduled, but the airplane w.s not available at that time. A total of four animals were found on Unit 2A (1 buck and 3 does). The buck was four years old and the does were one year old, 2 years old and 2 years old. Since most of the Larimer County Study Area was closed. to hunting and the hunting :pressure very light, a wounding_loss survey -was not conducted there. Favms made up a larger portion of the harvest than was counted in the aerial survey made before the season. Ax1 aerial survey conducted on August 31 indicated. a ratio of 71 fawns per 100 does in the population (Table 1, Work Plan I, Job 12 of this report); while the ratio in the harvest was 86 fawns per 100 does. A conclusive answer for this discrepency cannot be presented at this present time. �- 9 - Natural mortalities seem to be very limited. Only one sick animal was found, a fawn approximately one week old. This animal was extremely weak and apparently suffering from diarrhea. The fawn was cured, but died a couple of weeks later. A necropsy was conducted at the Colorado State University Veterinary College, and the cause of determined to be a leaky heart valve. Surveys failed to find any evidence of mortality due to predators. On one occassion during the fawning season a doe was observed driving a coyote out of an area. It was assumed the coyote may have attempted to catch the does' fawn, however, an intensive search failed to reveal any sign of a fawn in the area. Sheep-tight fences in the locality adjacent to the Moffat County Study Area contributed to antelope mortality. Woven wire fences constructed in the area prohibited antelope movement to natural waterholes. Nine adult antelope were found dead in the fences. They had attempted to jump over the fences, but got their hind legs tangled in the barbed wire running along the top of the woven wire. What effect these fences may have had on other antelope forced to remain in areas with.out a source of water is not ksown. There were 18 antelope fawns tagged on the Larimer County Study Area. Three of these·. were females and 15 were males (Table 4). In addition, six female fawns were given to the U.S. Fish and Wildlife service at Denver for work with pesticides. Prepared by: George D. Bear Asst. Wildlife Researcher Date: January, 1968 Approved by: Jack R. Grieb Project Leader Wayne w. Sandfort Game Research Chief ��January, 1968 - 11 - JOB·COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO Project No. W-40-R-8 Work Plan No. 1 Title of Job: Period Covered: Personnel: Antelope Investigations Job No. 12 Antelope Census Ms,y 1, 1966 through April 31, 1967 George D. Bear ABST'RACT Aerial counts were made with a fixed-wing airplane. The study areas were flown in one mile-wide strips at an altitude of 100-300 feet. Flights were conducted on two successive days on each study area during April and August. The first flight was conducted in a north-south direction and the second flight in an east-west direction. Flight conditions, sex, age, and location of the antelope observed were recorded. The buck to doe ratios were nearly the same for both study areas, while the fawn to doe ratio was lower on Unit 5 than Unit 2A. Data collected on these flights will be used in the study on population trends. Additional information is needed before a comparison can be made between the direction of flights and the total number of antelope counted$ �- 12 - Objectives: (1) Determine the sex ratios, age ratios and the numbers of antelope in given areas by aerial counts. (2) Compare results from flights conducted in north-south direction and flights conducted in east-west direction. Procedures: The study areas outlined in Job 11, Herd Structure and Factors Affecting Herd Structure, were used for this job. (1) Aerial counts were made using fixed-wing airplanes, Cessna 180 and Cessna 182. These counts were made during the early morning hours and on clear days, when possible. The study areas were flown in one mile wide strips at an altitude of 100-300 feet. The following information was recorded for each antelope herd encountered: time of observation, vegetative type, aerial strip number, location on strip, number of males, number of females, number of fawns, and their activity when first observed. A tally of other wildlife species observed was also kept. Two flights on successive days were made on each area in August and April. (2) The flights mentioned above were used to obtain information on aerial counts flown in two different directions. The first-day flight was flown in an east-west direction and the second-day flight flown in a north-south direction over the same area. The results from the two flights are compared to determine which direction provides better census data~ �- 13 Antelope Census George D. Bear Sex ratio counts in April indicated the buck to doe ratios for both study areas to be nearly equal. A ratio of 40 bucks/100 a.oes -was counted on Unit 2A ana. a ratio of 38 bucks/100 does on Unit 5 (Table 1). The fawn to doe ratios obtained on flights conducted in August were lower than they have been on these areas in previous years. The ratio for Unit 2A was approximately 75 fawns/100 does and the ratio for Unit 5 was approximately 4o fawns/100 does. The buck to doe ratios obtained on the August counts showed more variation between the two successive flights than the fawn to doe ratios obtained on the same flights. This difference is likely because fawns are more closely associated with the doe at this time of the year than bucks; thus, if a doe is observed her fawns are usually seen also, while isolated bucks may or may not be seen in the same proportion to the does observed. Higher total counts were obtained on the north-south flights than on the eastwest flights, however, the data is very limited. Paired flights conducted in August on each of the two study areas are comparable; while paired flights conducted in April on Unit 5 are disregarded in this appraisal due to the very poor census conditions encountered on the north-south flight. More information is needed before an evaluation can be made between aerial flights conducted in an east-west and north-south direction. Table l -- Aerial Census on the Antelope Study Areas. and Date Dir. of Census Conditions Flight Ground Light Air Unit 2A April 25 E Aug. 30 Antelope Counted Bucks Does Fawns Total BuckDoe- Census Ave. Fa,,m Time Herd Ratio (Min.) Size -w III I I 51 127 E - w III I I 56 54 42 152 104-100-78 40 4.o Aug. 31 N· - s III II I 40 76 54 170 53-100-71 37 4.9 Unit 5 April 15 E -w III I I 63 168 231 38-100 78 10. 5 April 22 N - s III III II 14 49 63 29-100 67 15.8 Aug. 17 E - w III I II 79 177 324 45-100-37 113 6.2 Prepared by: George D. Bear Asst. Wildlife Researcher Date: January, 1968 178 68 Approved by: 40-100 50 Jack R. Grieb Project Leader Wayne w. Sand:fort Game Research Chief ��- 15 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO ____.;;..:.===-----Antelope Investigations Project No. W-40-R-8 Work Plan No. 1 Title of Job: Techniques For Determining Population Trends Period Covered: Personnel: Job No. 13 January 1, 1967 through April 30, 1967. George D. Bear Objectives: To develop the most effective procedure for determing antelope population trends. Procedure: Census data for the four-year period was to be graphed, tables prepared, and otherwise analyzed to best depict the basic population trend in each of the two herds under study. Results: Nothing was accomplished on this job, pending a review of literature on population dynamics. Data on herd structure, mortality, and annual increment has been obtained under Jobs 11 and J2 of this project since Mcty, 1963. References need to be reviewed to find the various techniques used in determining population trends. Then the various techniques can be applied to the aa ta to evaluate the best techniques for determing.'B.ntelope population trends. Prepared by: George D. Bear Asst. Wildlife Researcher Date: January, 1968 Approved by: Jack R. Grieb Project Leader Wayne w. Sandfort Game Research Chief ��January, 1968 -17 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO -----=--=-===------ Project No. W-40-R-8 Work Plan No. 2 Title of Job: Period Covered: Personnel: Antelope Investigations Job No. 2 Food Habits of Antelope May 1, 1966 through April 30, 1967. George D. Bear ABSTRACT Twenty-one antelope were collected on the Saguache County Study Area. Rumen samples from these animals and 44 other antelope collected on the Moffat County Study Area during the previous work segment were sorted into major vegetative classes. The final sorting and identification of the plant species in the sample shall be completed during the next work segment. Vegetation surveys were conducted in the locality where each animal was collected to provide an index to species of plants available to the animals. The percent frequency and composition for each plant species occurring on the transects is presented in Table 1. �- 18 - Objective: To determine food preferences and foods eaten by antelope living on a rabbitbrush range. Procedure: Antelope Management Unit 18 in Saguache County, Colorado was designated as the study area for this work. This area is characterized by a rabbitbrush overstory. Two antelope were collected each month throughout the year. A two-quart sample of the rumen contents was taken from each animal and preserved in formalin until it could be analyzed at the Game Research Center, Fort Collins. Samples were washed through graduated sieves, then sorted to plant species. Each grouping was placed in labeled envelopes until further sorting and analyses can be made. A binoccular microscope shall be used for final identification. Each plant category shall be weighed to the nearest gram; next the percentages for each species in the rumen sample will be computed. Temporary vegetation transects were established in the immediate vicinity where each animal was collected to provide an index of plant species available to the animals. The location and direction of the transects were selected so as to obtain a sample most representative of the area. There were fifty plots on each transect. The plots were circular in shape and one-square meter in size; a hoop made out of a heavy guage wire was used to mark the periphery of the plots. The first plot was randomly located, then successive plots were located at 125-foot intervals along a predetermined direction. Percent coverage was estimated for each plant species occurring on the plot. Observations were made on the general feeding habits of the antelope. Notes. were kept on the amount of time the observed antelope spent feeding during each day, time of day they fed, the vegetative type they fed in, and the general conditions of the vegetation. Results: A total of 21 antelope were collected on the Saguache County Study Area. Three animals shall be collected during the next work segment so there will be a total of 24 or two animals from each month. Rumen samples were collected from each animal. These samples have been grossly sorted into the various vegetative classes. The final sorting and identification of each vegetative species remains to be done. In addition 44 rumen samples collected during the last work segment have been sorted into the main vegetative classes. The data collected on the vegetation transects is presented in Table 1. The general notes on feeding behavior needs further analysis. Prepared by: George D. Bear Asst. Wildlife Researcher Date: January, 1968 Approved by: Jack R. Grieb Project Leader Wayne w. Sandfort Game Research Chief �- 19 - Table L Frequency and composition of vegetative species occurring in localities -- where antelope were collected on a rabbitbrush range.* 56 Grasses Agropyron smithii, Agropyron trachycaulum Aristida sp. Boutel~ua gracilis Care:x: sp. Koaleria cristata Muhlenbergia richardsonis . Muhlenbergia 1:£!..reyi Oryzopsis hymenoides Poa fendleriana Sitanion hystrix Sporobolus cryptandrus 57 Freq. Comp. Freq. (%) (%) (%) Collection Number 58 Comp, Freq. Comp. Freq. Comp. (%) (%) (%) 2 2 T T 86 49 2 T 10 1 l • (%) 100 68 30 17 42 5 72 26 f%~ 100 66 10 2 59 2 50 5 42 4 6 18 4 1 Stipa comata Stiea lettermani Unidentfied grasses Sub-total 68 48 73 62 'Forbs Allium sp. Arenaria fendleri Camelina microcarpa Castilleja sp. Chenopodium sp. Chrysopsis. villosa Cryptantha ;11irgata Erigeron sp. Eriogonum sp. Hymenoxys richardsoni La.ppula sp. Lich.en Lu:einus sp. 2 2 70 T T 8 12 34 64 T 1 5 6 T 2 6 T 14 T T 4 30 72 T 4 6 24 80 16 .. Lygodesm:i.a sp. Oenothera trichocalyx fenst:emon sp. Phlox sp. :Potentilla sp. Salsola ka.li Senicie sp. Sphaeralcea coccinea Thermopsis sp. Unidentified Forbs Sub-total T 2 2 T T 8 62 28. 1 1 8 8 T 12 2 8 T 16 1 24 2 T 8 18 19 T 12 �- 20 ~ Table 1. -- Frequency and composition of ve 5etative species occurring in localities where antelope were collected on a rabbitbrush range. (continued) Shrubs Artemisia filifolia Artemisia frigida Arternisia tridentata Atriplex canescens Atriplex sp. Chrysothamnus nauseosus Chrysothamnus parryi Chrysothamnus vicidiflorus Echinocactus sp. Eurotia lanata Collection Number _......;:5:..::8'---Comp. Freq. Comp. (%) (%) (%) Freq. 56 Comp. (%) (%) Freq. (%) 66 5 46 4 30 8 6 4 16 24 3 66 25 14 22 2 66 10 57 Comp. (%) 6 1 2 3 16 1 5 16 7 20 l 12 2 2 T 6 2 1 8 2 6 T 6 2 l 2 Go.tierrezia sarothrae 59 Freq. (%) Leptodactylon sp. Opuntia sp. Quercus sp. Rhus trilobata Ribes cereum Symphorocarpus sp. Tetradymia canescens Yucca sp. Sub-total 18 43 13 25 TOTAL 99 99 100 99 * Percent frequency is the percentage of the plots on which each plant species occurs. �- 21 - 'J;able 1. -- Frequency and composition of vegetative species occurring in localities (continued) ;,,;here antelope were collected on a rabbitbrush range. Collection Number Plant Species Grasses Agropyron smithii Agropyron trachycaulum Aristida sp. Bouteloua gracilis Carex sp. Koeleria cristata Muhlenbergia richardsonis Muhlenbergia torrey£ Oryzopsis hymenoides Freq. 60 Comp. Freq. Comp. (%) (%) (%) (%) (%) (%) 2 T 2 T 40 4 8 T 82 48 96 32 48 20 10 1 2 2 T 48 1 86 10 1 72 9 24 4 26 1 1 12 1 48 8 T Poa feudleriana 8 1 Sitanion hystrix Sporobolus cr;x:etandrus Stipa comata Stipa lettermani Unidentfied grasses Sub-total 4 T Forbs Allium sp. Arenaria fendleri Camelina microca:rpa Castilleja sp. Chenopodium sp. Chrysopsis villosa . Cryptantha virgata Erigeron sp. Eriogonum sp, Hymenoxvs richardsoni Lappula sp. Lichen Lupinus sp. Lygodesmia sp. Oenothera trichocalyx Penstemon sp. Phlox sp. Potentilla sp. 16 Sub-total 62 Freq. Comp. 2 2 61 2 T 32 l 4 T 44 24 80 l Comp. 94 63 22 5 (%) (%} T 68 T 2 T 10 4 2 T 10 1 36 2 2 T 8 10 T 28 11 2 T 1 19 20 T 92 ·5 4 T T 2 6 T 42 4 2 T 14 4 30 T l T 14 5 16 52 T 2 52 T 3 16 T 4 T 8 2 24 63 Freq. 47 55 20 Salsola hl!_ Senicio sp. Sphaeralcea coccinea Thermopsis sp. Unidentified forbs 61 12 4 T 14 10 �- 22 - Table 1. -- Frequency and composition of vegetative species occuring in localities where antelope were collected on a rabbitbrush range. Plant Species Freq. (%) Shrubs Artemisia filifolia Artemisia frigida Artemisia tridentata Atri:elex canescens Atri£lex sp. Chrysothamnus nauseosus Chrysothamnus parryi Chrysothamnus vicidHlorus Echinocactus sp. Eurotia lanata Gutierrezia sarothrae LeEtodactylo.n sp. O:euntia sp. Quercus sp. ~ trilobata Ribes cereum SvwEhorocar:eus sp. Tetrapymi~ canescens Yucca sp. Sub-total TOTAL 60 Comp~ (%)·. 18 1 74 7 61 Freq. (%) ( continued) Collection Number 62 Comp. Freq. Comp. (%) (%) (%) 52 5 63 Freq. (%) Comp. (%) 2 T . 26 10 18 3 12 3 18 4 36 6 22 9 30 9 2 6 T 2 T 10 6 T 12 2 6 T 60 18 72 17 4 2 2 2 T 2 8 T 1 8 33 1 38 21 99 100 99 99 �- 23 - Table L -- Frequency and composition of vegetative species occuring in localities where antelope were collected on a rabbitbrush range. (continued) Collection Number 64 Plant Species Grasses Agropyron smithii Agtopyron trachycaulum Aristida sp. Bouteloua _gracilis Carex sp. Koeleria cristata Muhlenbergia richardsonis Muhlengergia torreyi 65 66 68 Freq. Comp. Freq. Comp. Freq. Comp. Freq. Comp. (%) (%) (%) (%) (%) (%) (%). (%) 20 3 44 7 2 T 98 37 94 58 40 2 2 T 44 34 10 · Oryzopsis hymenoides, Poa fendleriana 2 T Sitanion hystrix Sporobolus cryptandrus Stipa c,omata Stipa lettermani Unidentfied grasses Sub-total 18 T 4 T 98 8 67 92 . T 2 T 67 58 46 48 Forbs Allium sp. Arenaria fendleri Camelina microcarpa Castilleja sp. Chenopodium sp. Chrysopsis villosa Cryptantha virgata Erigeron sp. Eriogonum sp. Hymenoxys richardsoni Lappula sp. Lichen Lupinus sp. Lygodesmia sp. Oenothera trichocalyx Penstemon sp. Phlox sp. Potentilla sp. Salsola kali 14 50 4 2 T 2 T 90 14 T 2 2 1 36 4 18 l 2 T 4 T 52 82 11 78 9 8 T T 4 10 3 2 T 14 l 1 T T 2 36 T 12 2 14 T T . 4 Senicic, sp, Sphaeralces coccinea Thermopsis sp. Unidentified Forbs Sub-total 6 16 8 21 20 T 8 T 28 10 T .. l 2 , �- 24 - Table l. -- Frequency and.composition of vegetative species.occurring in localities where antelope were collected on a rabbi.thrush range. (continued) Collection Number Plant Species 65 68 66 Freq. 64 Comp. Freq. Comp. Freq. Comp. Comp. {%) (%) {%) (%) Freq. (%) (%) (%) (%) 2 T 90 22 2 T 2 T 12 1 18 3 12 5 8 4 20 3 T 1 60 16 24 6 2 T 3 52 29 Shrubs ~rtemisia f:i.lifolia Artemisia frigida Artemisia tridentata Atriplex canescens Atripl.ex sp. Chrysothamnus nauseosus Chrysothamnus parryi Chrysothamnus vicidiflorus Echinocactus sp. Eurotia lanata Gutierrezia sarothrae Leptodactylon sp. Opuntia sp. guercus sp. Rhus trilobata Ribes cereum Symphorocarpus sp. 4 T 2 1 42 5 2 4 2 2 24 2 T 66 26 4 44 40 100 100 4 2 Tetradyrr\I,J.. canescens Yucca sp. Sub"."total 12 1 32 TOTAL 100 100 T �- 25 - Table l. -- Frequency and composition of vegetative species occurring in localities where antelope were collected on a rabbitb:rush range. (continued) Plant Species Grasses Agropyron smithii Freq, Collection Number 71 Comp. Freq. Comp. Freq. Comp. (%) (%) (%) (%) (%) (%) (%) 20 1 4 T T 33 4 80 4 82 37 100 70 94 41 2 T 4 T 2 T 14 1 2 T 2 T 8 T 2 T 2 T 2 T Freq. 46 Comp. (%) 58 72 ~zropyron trachycaulum Aristida sp, Bouteloua gracilis Carex sp. Koeleria cristata Muhlenbergia richardsonis Muhlenbergia torreyi Oryzopsis hymenoides Poa fendleriana Sitanion hystrix Sporobolus cryptandrus Stipa comata Stipa lettermani Unidentfied grasses 74 Forbs -·-Allium sp. An.maria fend ler i Camelina microcarpa Castilleja sp. Chenopodium sp. Chrysopsis villosa Cryptantha virgata Erigeron sp. Eriogonum sp Hymenoxys richardsoni Lappula sp. Lichen Lupinus sp. Lygodesmia sp. 18 22 51 Sub-total T 3 16 38 14 4 22 8 1 T T T 1 41 71 41 2 2 T 2 T 10 1 30 1 4 4 62 T T 9 38 4 1 T 2 T 18 T 12 T 42 5 Oenothera trichocalvs Penstemon sp. Phiox sp. 14 1 Potentilla sp. Salsola -·-·kali Senicio sp. .... Sphaeralcea coccinea 6 Thel:'mopsis sp. Unidentified Forbs 30 Sub-total T 18 4 12 T 32 8 2 4 14 15 2 �- 26 - Table 1. -- Frequency and composition of vegetative species occurring in localiLies where antelope were collected on a rabbitbrush range. (continued) Collection Number Plant Species Artemisia tridentata Atriplex canescens Atriplex sp. Chrysothamnus nauseosus Chrysothamnus parryi Chrvsothamnus vicidiflorus Echinocactus sp. Eurotia lanata Gutierrezia sarothrae Leptodactylon sp. Opuntia sp. Quercus sp. Rhus trilobata Ribes cereum Symphorocarpus sp. TetradyPia canescens Yucca sp. Sub-total TOTAL 72 69 Comp. Freq. Comp. Freq. Comp. Freq. Comp. (%) (%) (%) (%) (%) (%) (%) (%) 8 2 66 2 56 8 4 T 8 2 7 8 2 6 4 22 2 72 48 Shrubs Artemisia filifolia Artemis La frigida 71 70 Freq. 18 4 66 8 42 11 12 5 24 2 T 46 16 7 8 46 8 2 18 2 5 14 4 6 12 2 2 6 1 22 4 4 4 l l 2 2 1 44 44 2 14 56 99 99 100 99 l �- 27 - Table l. -- Frequency and composition of vegetative species occurring in localities where antelope were collected on a rabbitbrush range. Collection Number 73 Plant Species Grasses Agropyron smithii Agropyron trachycaulum Aristida sp. Bouteloua gracilis Carex sp. Koeleria cristata Muhlenbergia richardsonis Muhlenbergia torreyi Oryzopsis hymenoides Poa fendleriana Sitanion hystrix Sporo_J,~ cryptandrus Stipa comata Stipa lettermani Unidentfied grasses Sub-total Forbs Allium sp. Arenaria fendleri Camelina microcarpa Castilleja sp. Chenopodium sp. Chrysopsis villosa Cryptantha virgata Erigeron sp. Eriogonum sp. Hymenoxys richardsoni Lappula sp. Lichen Lupinus sp. Lygodesmia sp. Oenothera trichocalyx Penstemon sp. PJJ:lox sp. Poterttilla Gp. Salsola kali Senicio sp. Sphaeralcea coccinea Thermopsis sp. Unidentified Forbs Sub-total 74 71 75 Freq. Comp. Freq. Comp. Freq. Comp. Freq. Comp. (%) (%) (%) (%) (%) (%) (%) (%) 32 4 98 33 86 48 86 61 4 T 8 1 32 4 30 3 6 100 18 20 T 57 l l 76 . 52 45 59 2 8 65 T 68 5 2 T 2 T 10 1 94 11 10 5 T 12 4 T 16 86 14 22 8 18 .3 12 1 2 T 6 T 2 92 T 25 17 �- 28 Table 1. -- Frequency and composition of vegetative species occurring in.localities where antelope w~re collected on a rabbitbrush range. (continued) Plant Species Shrubs Artemisia filifolia Artemisia frigida Artemisia tridentata Atriplex canescens Atri:eles .§.E_. Chrysothamnus nauseosus Chrysothamnus parryi Chrysothamnus vicidiflorus Echinocactus .:iE.· Eurotia lanata Gutierrezia sarotbrae Leptodactylon §_£. 0Euntia .2.J2,. Quercus .2.J2,. Rhus trilobata Ribes cereum Svm12horocar:eus fil?.. Tetraciymia cane~3cens Yucca .2.£.. Sub-total TOTAL Freq. (%) 73 Comp. Collection Number 74 75 Freq. Comp. Freq. Comp. (%) (%) (%) (%) 92 16 71 Freq. Comp. (%) (%) (%) 20 1 30 2 28 15 28 2 26 5 74 13 16 34 4 10 14 3 6 T 20 12 18 3 58 22 28 7 16 2 6 T 8 6 1 T 10 1 2 T 35 43 23 10 99 100 100 100 �- 29 - Table 1. -- Frequency and composition of vegetative species occurring in locali t h's where antelope were collected on a rabbitbrush range. (continued) Collection Number Plant Species Grasses Agropyron smithii Agropyron trachycaulum Aristida sp. Bouteloua gracilis Carex sp. Koeleria cristata Muhl.enbergia richardsonis Muhlenbergia torreyi Oryzopsis hynenoides Poa fendleriana Sitanion hystrix Sporobolus cryptandrus Stipa comata Stipa lettermani Unidentfied grasses Sub-total Forbs Allium sp. Arenaria fendleri Camelina microcarpa Castilleja sp. Chenopodium sp. Chrysopsis villosa Cryptantha virgata Erigeron sp. Eriogonum sp. Hymenoxys richardsoni Lappula sp. Lichen Lupinus sp. Lygodesmia sp. Oenothera trichocalyx Penstemon sp. Phlox sp. Potentilla sp. Salsola kali Freq. 78 Comp. Freq. Comp. Freq. Comp. (%) (%) (%) (%) (%) (%) 2 2 92 T 30 2 T 14 T 84 13 45 38 1 12 T 4 T 18 1 8 6 T T 28 l 2 T Senicio sp~ Sphaeralcea coccinea Thermopsis sp. Unidentified Forbs Sub-total 48 1 4 Freq. (%) Comp. (%) �- 30 - Table L -- Frequency and com.position of v-egetative :3tJecies occurting in localities where antelope were collected on a rabbitbrush range. (continued) Collection Number 78 Plant Species Freq. Comp. Freq. Comp. -------'-'--------""---------"'-(%_,_o)......- ·. ,_('%. ,__o)_ _(..,.__%...,_)_ _(,._%.:....)_ Shrubs Artemisia filifolia Arte~isia frigida Artemisia tridontata Atriplex canescens Atriplex sp. Chyrsothamnus nauseosus Chrysothamnus parryi Chry:c:othamnus vicidiflorus Echinocactus sp. Eurotia lannt:a Gutierrezia sarothrae Leptodactylon sp. Opuntia sp. Quercus sp. Rhus trilobata Ribes coreum Symphorocarpus sp. Tetradymia canesccns Yucca sp. Sub-tota.1 TOTAL 2 44 T 2 20 6 48 5 12 T 2 T 64 26 4 4 6 2 6 T 4 l 50 99 Freq. Comp. Freq. Comp. .......... (7!_,)_.....,('--'%)'--_o-'-~)_ _(,__%.,__)_ �January, 1968 - 31 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO ------------=--------- Project No. W-40-R-8 Work Plan No. 2 Title of Job: Period Covered: Personnel: Antelope Investigations Job No. 3 Physiological Studies May 1, 1966 through April 30, 1967 George D. Bear ABSTRACT Measurements were made on 22 antelope collected at monthly intervals throughout the year on the Saguache County Antelope Study Area. There were approximately 3,295 measurements made on these animals, which are presented in Tables l - 16. The data is merely presented here and will be analyzed in detail when the study is completed. The measurements were as follows: (1) Blood samples were taken as soon as possible after the death of the animal. '.I;lb.e blood was analyzed by laboratory technicians for its chemistry and cell volumes. (2) Two carcass weights were made: weight. a bled weight and an eviscerated carcass (3) External body measurements were: ear lengths, head length, interorbital width, neck circumference, hoof lengths, hind feet lengths, tail length, mammary gland dimensions, scrotum dimensions, horn measurements and girth. (4) The following areas of pelage were classified to color: dorsal rostrum, interorbital, dorsal surface between the shoulder blades and outer thigh. Pelage weight was sampled from the shoulder area of the body. (5) Length, width, and depth measurements, weights, and volumes were made on the following glands: adrenals, thyroid, pituitary, testes, epididymides, prostate and ovaries. (6) Length, width, and depth measurements, weights, and volumes were recorded for the following organs: liver, kidneys, heart, spleen, lungs, brain, eyeballs and stomach. �- 32 (7) Several measurements were made on the lower mandible: length of the mandibular and maxillary teeth series, the mandibular diastema and the length o:f the ramuso (8) The length and. width of the uterine horns, vagina, and. cervix and. the weight was recorded. for all female reproductive tractso ( 9) Fat d.eposi tion measurements were made on the brisket, rump, mesentary, kidney and the marrow o:f the femure and. tibia. Objectives: To measure physiological and. morphological characteristics o:f antelope collected. seasonally to establish "physiological norms" and. to provide basic morphological data as related to sex and. age classes, Procedures: The antelope, one doe and one buck, collected. each month in Saguache County for the food. habits study (Job 2) were also used. for this study o Most of the procedures, in so far as possible, were duplicated and the descriptions taken from Anderson, Ao Eo and. Do Eo Med.in, 1962, Physical Charactertstics, W-105-R, Wo Po 5, Job 1, pp 253-299, in Quarterly Report, ,July, 1962, Part 2, An Ecological Investigation of the Cache la Poud.re Deer Herd, Colorado, 339 pp. (processed) o Shooting of Antelope Location of shot When possible, the antelope was shot at the junction of the neck and. shouldero Observations to be recorded The following observations were recorded.: behavior of the antelope before and. after shooting, time of shooting, time of death estimated di.stance of shot in yards, weather conditions, and number and. behavior of associated. antelope, Collection of Blood. Samples Method. of entering heart Blood. samples were collected. within 15 minutes o:f shootingo The blood. is aspirated from the heart with a sy,ringe and. needle. The heart was entered. from the left side between the fourth and fifth ribs and about two inches above the strenumo The index finger was used to push aside the pelage at the point of need.le entry until the point was inside the thoracic cavityo Both hands were then used. to introduce the needle into the heart; the sy,ringe plu_ctger being slowly withdrawn when contact was made with the beart.o Anti-coagulant sample When about 20 cc of blood had been obtained., the syringe was detached from the needle and. about 7 cc of blood. was gently flushed. into each of two anticoagulant tubes. The blood. was :flushed. gently and. allowed. to trickle down the tube wallso Immediately after filling, each tube was stoppered., held. downward. momentarily, and. its top moved. gently through an arc of 180° for about two minutes~ �- 33 - Serum sample After the anti-coagulant sample. had. been o~titained, two sac:p.ce of about 50 cc each ·vm:re nspirated in the same manner and flushed into each of the two 60 ml centrifuge t·ubes,, Female Reproductive Tract Vulva measurements 1'he rr,axj_mum length and width of the vulva were measured. with a transparent rule to the nearest millimeter as soon as possible after death. External Body Measurements General methods Tbx·ee nciciit:Lonal external body measurements were made as soon as possible after death. They were taken with a flexible steel tape to the nearest centrimeter with the carcass lying on a flat surface. Measurements Total length--The distance measured from the tip of the nose to the distal end. of the last tail vertebrae. The carcass is laid. on its right side with head extended forward so that the nose is brought into as nearly a straight line with the back as possible, the tape being passed from the end of the nose over the top of the head directly to the top of the shoulders and along the backbone to the distal edge of the last coccygeal vertebrae .. Shoulder height--1'he distance measured from the posterior edge of the left hoof to the top of the scapula. GLrth--The circumfe:·ence of the body within the first inch posterior to the edge of the scapula. The tape is held firmly but without undue tension. Care of Equipment and Carcass Syringe and needle The syringe and needles were washed and flushed with cold water before reassembling the syring and placing in kito Carcass ·The carcass was transported to the pickup :in such a way as to minimize damage. LABORATORY Blood A..rtalyses and. Cehmical Determination The blood samples were analyzed for the fellowing: erythrocyte count, leucocyte count, differential leucocyte count (neutrophils, l;nrrphocytes, monecytes, eosinophils and basophi1s), hemoglobin, and hc-matocri t. This work was done at the Game, Fish and. Parks Department Research Center, Fort Collins, Colorado, by the laboratory technician, Miss Fields. �- 34 - External Body Measurements General methods All external body measurements were made in the metric system at three to 24 hours from the time of death. The measurements, instruments used and their precision were described as follows: Measurements Ear lengths--Intertragic notch to the tip of the auricle of both ears, not including hair, with a transparent rule to the nearest one-half centimeter. Head length--Occiput to the incisors with a caliper to the nearest millimeter. Inter-orbital width--The maximum d_istance between the zygomatic arches measured with a caliper to the nearest millimeter. Neck circumference--Two measurements: one (a) made at a point 14 centimeters posterior to the occiput and the other (b) at the extreme lower base of the neck. Both measurements were made with a steel tape and measured to the nearest centimeter. The tape was held snugly but without excessive tension. Hoof lengths--Measured on all four feet as the maximum distance between the tip of the outside claw to its posterior edge. These measurements were made with a vernier caliper to the nearest millimeter. Hind feet lengths--Measured on both limbs from the tuber calcis (calcaneum) of the fibular tarsal bone to the tip of the hoof (outside claw) with a tape to the nearest millimeter. Tail length--Measured from the perianal region to the distal end of the last coccygeal vertebrae with a transparent rule to the nearest one-half centimeter. The tail was held straight in relation to the spine and its ventral surface laid along the edge of the rule. Mammary gland--The maximum length and width were measured from the hair line, or point of swelling, and the maximum depth of a medial, longitudinal inc1.s1.on. A transparent rule was used in all cases, the length and width being measured to the nearest centimeter and also measured with a transparent rule to the nearest millimeter while their basal diameters were measured with a vernier caliper to the longitudnal axis of the body. Male reproductive organs--Measurements include the maximum length, width, and depth of the scrotum and the length of the penile sheath from the scrotum to the distal end. These were measµred with a transparent rule to the nearest one-half centimeter. Eviscerated carcass--Weighed with all viscera and visceral fat removed. �- 35 Gland Methodology General methoa.s Immediately after dissection the glands were placed in individual, labeled, beakers containing physiological saline (prepared with tap water and either non-iodized table NaCl or reagent grade NaCl) until all fat and extraneous tissue could be removed. After blotting, measurements including longitudinal, transverse, and height diameters were made with a vernier caliper to the nearest 0.1 millimeter. Fresh weights were then obtained on a triple-beam balance scale to the nearest centigram. Volumes were calculated using their weight in air and submerged weights in water in the following formula based on Archimedes' principle and as illustrated by White (1956:219). gland+ appartus Volume in cc= (wt. in air - wt. in ~O) apparatus - (wt. in air - wt. in H20) . Measurements, weights, volumes, special treatments Adrenals--Longitudinal, transverse, and vertical diameters of each adrenal were measured. Thymus--The sometimes non-discrete appearing lobes are separated and their maximum longitudinal, transverse, and vertical diameters were measured. Thyroid--The msximum longitudinal, transverse and vertical diameters and the weight and volume of each lobe were obtained. Pituitary---Following dissection of the brain, this gland was removed from the sella turcica by cutting the dura mster at the rim of the sella turica with a scapel, cutting the infundibular stalk and gently removing the encapsulating dura mater with a probe. The msximum and minimum diameters were measured and its weight and volume determined. Testes and epididymides--Each testis was removed from the scrotum by severing the spermstic cord at the caudad portion of the ductus deferens as well as the tunica vaginalis where attached to the testes. The tunica albuginea was then carefully stripped from the testes exterior and the epididymis is removed by severing the coni vasculosi at their junction with the testes. The longitudinal and transverse diameters of each testes were measured with a vernier caliper to the nearest millimeter; their individual weights and volumes were recorded. Prostate--The prostate gland was dissected from the neck of the urinary bladder and its weight and volume determined. �Ovaries--These glands are to be studied both from materials collected on a monthly basis and from a large sample collected during the late September hunting season by soliciting hunter cooperation. On the latter material, measurements, weights, and volumes were not obtained. On the ovaries collected each month, the maximum longitudinal, transverse, and vertical diameters were measured to the nearest 0.1 millimeter with a vernier caliper; fresh weights and volumes were also obtained. Ovaries from both sources were treated and their structures analyzed in the same manner. They were fixed in labeled, individual vials with 10 percent buffered formalin. Organ Methodology General methods After dissection, each organ was washed in tap water and placed in physiological saline. Paired or fragile organs were placed in separate marked containers while the larger, discrete organs were placed in a common container. Following the removal of fat and extraneous tissue the organs were blotted, measured, and weighed on a triangle or double beam balance scale to the nearest 0.1 gram of 1 gram as stated below. Volumes were determined as described for glands. Dissection, measurements, weights, volumes special treatments Liver--'l'he maximum (left to right lobes), transverse (right lobe at right angles to the longitudinal axis of the liver), and height (along the transverse bisection) diameters were measured to the nearest millimeter. A caliper was used to measure the longitudinal and transverse diameters and a transparent rule for the vertical diameter measured along the transverse bisection. Kidneys--Each kidney was removed by first cutting the fat anterior and posterior to the kidney and at right angles to its longitudinal axis. A cut was then made parallel to its longitudinal axis and immediately adjacent to the kidney capsules thereby severing the fat, ureter pelvis, and the renal arteries and veins. The kidney was weighed to the nearest 0.1 gram with fat after removal of the ureter pelvis and the renal arteries and veins at the point of their junction with the hilum. The attached fat was then removed and the kidney was weighed without fat. The maximum longitudinal, transverse (at the hilum), and vertical (opposite the hilum) diameters were measured with a caliper to the nearest millimeter. The kidney fat index (percent) for each kidney was computed by subtracting the kidney weight without fat from the kidney weight with fat and dividing the difference by the kidney weight without fat. c'.L'.!l:e result was multiplied by 100. Total kidney fat index was computed the same way from the summed values of both kidneys. Heart--The pericardium was removed, coagulated blood in the chambers washed out with tap water, and all vessels cut at their junction with the heart. Preparatory to measurement, the heart was placed so the left side was facing:the measurer. The maximum longitudinal diameter was measured from the left atrium (auricle) between the aortic arch and superior vena cava to the apex. The maximum transverse diameter was measured at the point of greatest heart breadth. Both measurements were taken with a caliper and read to the nearest millimeter. The weight was recorded to the nearest gram, and the volume was taken. �- 37 Spleen--Weight to the nearest gram and volume were recorded for this organ, also the longitudinal and transverse diameters. Lungs--The left and right lungs were separated and weighed to the nearest 10 grams. No measurements or volumes were taken. Brain--It was removed by first making three cuts with a bone saw; two along the edge of the frontal and parietal bones and one at right angles to the longitudinal axis of the skull and at, or just above the postorbital process of the frontal bone. A rongeur forceps was then used to remove the frontal, parietal, and interparietal bones thus completely exposing the dorsal surface of the brain from the olfactory bulbs to the medulla oblongata. A probe and blunt scissors were used to separate the meninges from the brain case and to sever the cranial nerves and the infundibulum stalk at the ventral surface of the cranium. When the brain was completely free in the cranium it was moved forward and the spinal cord was severed at the extreme posterior port:i.on of the rhomboid fossa or level of the obex. This appeared as the posterior point of a shallow depression on the dorsal surface of the medulla oblongata. The described point of severance corresponds roughly to the junction of the medulla oblongata and spinal cord. Follow:l.ng removal of the meninges the maximum longitudinal dimeter was measured with the brain on its ventral surface from the frontal to the occipital lobes of the cerebrum immediately parallel to the longitudinal fissure. The maximum transverse diameter of the brain was measured at a selected point on the temporal lobes, All :measurements were made with a caliper to the nearest millimeter; weight was recorded to the nearest gram. Eyeballs--Both eyeballs were removed from their orbits by first cutting the conjunctiva (the mucous membrane which lines the eyelids) completely around the eyeball then pressing the eyeball gently outward and to the side. The extrinsic nerves, muscles, and vessels were severed with scissors and the eyeball withdrawn from its socket. Two external maximum diameter measurements were made with a vernier c:aliper to the nearest 0.1 millimeter as follows: Longitudinal, from the cornea to the extreme posterior wall; transverse, from wall to wall at a right angle to the longitudinal measurement. Weights were taken to the nearest 0.1 gram. Stomach and contents--The stomach weds removed by severing at the cardia and pylorus and typing each end with string to retain the contents. It was weighed to the nearest 10 grams on a balance scale. The omasum and abomasum were removed, then the rumen and reticulum and their contents were weighed. The entire stomach without the contents was then weighed. Measurements of Teeth and Bones Mandibular and maxillary teeth row series--The series were measured with a vernier caliper to the nearest 0.1 millimeter. Measurements included (1) the alveolar distance from the anterior border of the anterior premolar to the posterior border of the posterior molar. Length of mandible--It was measured with a caliper to the nearest millimeter. T'ne maximum length of the left ramus was measured, not including any part of a tooth that extends forward from the anterior end of the bone. �Length of mandibular diastema--The distance from the posterior-most margin of the alveolus of the lower incisor to the anterior-most margin of the first fourth cheek tooth was measured with a caliper to the nearest millimeter. Left femur and tibia--Before dissection, the femur was cracked, marrow from the central portion of the shaft was removed, placed in a crucible and macerated into a homogenous mass. Marrow color was immediately classified using the color charts of Mmsell (1929-1960). The marrow consistency wss rated in one of three categories, (a) solid, (b) putty-like, and (c) gelatinous. Right femur and tibia--No measurements were taken. The bones were fairly well cleaned, labeled, and placed in a labeled polyethylene bag and frozen immediately. After storage the marrow was removed for analysis of fat at the laboratory. Female Reproductive Tract General methods--Irnmediately after dissection the intact tract was placed in physiological saline. After draining, blotting, and trimming all fat and the bladder (at its juction with the urethra), the tract was measured and weighed as described below. Measurements--All measurements were made with the tract lying on its dorsal surface and include the length and width of the uterine horns and body, vagina, and cervix. All measurements were made with a transparent rule to the nearest one-half centimeter. Weight--Weights were obtained with balance scales to either the nearest one or ten grams depending on its size. In the gravid uterus, the weight of the tract with its uterine fluids and membrane was found by subtracting the weight of the embryo(s) or fetus(es). Measurements of Fetuses and Embryos External measurements of the fetuses were made as for the larger adult animals. No internal measurements were made. Only a rump-crown measurement was made on very small embryos. Fat Deposition Records of fat deposition on the brisket, rump, and visceral fat were made in addition to the kidney fat index and the marrow fat indices. Depth of the brisket fat wss measured on the sternum at the third rib, when a cut was made parallel to the longitudinal axis of the carcass. Depth of the rump fat was measured at the maximum fat depth along a cut approximately 12 inches long made at a 45° angle to the backbone starting at the base of the tail and proceeding anteriorly across the right side of the rump. These measurements were made with a transparent rule to the nearest millimeter. Fat in the visceral cavity, including,mesentaric fat and kiclney fat, was removed and weighed to the nearest 10 grams. �- 39 - RESULTS: Measurements were made on 22 antelope collected in the immediate vicinity of' Saguache, Saguache Co., Colorado. One doe and one buck were collected at monthly intervals throughout the year; however one doe is needed in August and two bucks, one during each month, are needed in October and November to complete the sample. The data collected is presented in Tables 1 - 16. This study was conducted in Mof'f'at Co. during the last segment (W-4O-R-7); the data from both segments shall be combined, analyzed, and published during the next work year. �- 40 - Table L --External body measurements (centimeters} for doe antelope collected in Sa~uache Countz. S:e_ecimen.Number Category 56 60 63 66 58 65 . · . 4-1 1-3 Estimated age (yr. - mon.) 1-4 2-11 3-0 6-5 Shoulder height 88.8 85.9 89.3 95.5 91.7 Total body length 141.6 143.4 148.9 129. 2 139.8 Tail length 12.7 11. 9 12.5 14.3 12.8 12.5 125.5 130.6 Body length 136.2 117.3 129. l Head length 27.5 29.5 28.3 26.2 28.9 27.5 10,8 Interorbital width 12.7 12.8 12.4 13.2 12.4 Mammary length 12.0 18.0 3.0 3.0 17. 5 6.0 width 7.0 14.0 14.5 4.0 4.0 4.5 1.8 depth 8.5 7.5 2.0 1.8 5.5 3.0 3.0 3.5 Vulva length 4.5 4.0 4.0 width 2.0 1.0 1.6 1.5 1.5 1.5 Mammary nipples (length) 1.5 Left anterior 1. 2 2.2 1. 2 1. 2 1.7 posterior 2.5 L2 1.3 LS 1.4 1.7 1. 6 Right anterior 1.3 2.2 1.3 1. 2 1.6 1.6 2.2 posterior 1.4 1. 2 1. 2 1.3 Mammary nipples (basal dia.) Left anterior 1.2 0.8 1.2 1.1 2.0 1.7 2.0 0.8 2.4 posterior 1. 3 1. 2 1.1 2.3 1.1 0.9 Right anterior 1.6 1.9 1. 3 l. 2 1.1 0.9 2.7 posterior 1.2 1. 2 Ear lengths 14.6 14.2 1.50 13.4 14.6 13. 7 Left 13. 9 14.6 14.6 15.1 13.5 14.7 Right Hind feet lengths 41. 2 40.4 41.3 41.6 38.6 40.4 Left 40.6 41. 2 38.6 40.5 41.3 40.6 Right Hoof length 6.2 6.2 6.6 6.7 Left front 6.4 5.4 6.0 6.2 6.0 rear 5.5 5.9 5.4 6.6 6.8 6.3 6.0 6.2 5.4 Right front 6.1 6.2 6.0 5.6 5.9 rear 5.4 Horn lengths o.o 5.7 3.2 4.5 Left 5.5 1.0 1.5 6.0 3.5 1. 2 4.7 0.5 Right 95.4 92.4 84.4 86.8 89.2 Girth Neck 34.4 31.0 39.0 24.6 31. 9 Point a 52.0 49.0 52.3 Point b Carcass weights (lbs.) 112 100 103 99 112 Bled 89 74 74 72 72 63 Evicerated 69 �Table 1.--External body measurements (centimeters) for doe antelope collected in Saguache County. {Continued} seecimen Number Category 67 68 72 70 74 77 Estimated age (yr. - mon.) 1-5 Shoulder height 87.9 Total body longth 135.0 Tail length 15.6 Body length 119.4 Head length 26.4 Interorbital width 12.4 Mammary length 4. 5 width 2.5 depth 1. 2 Vulva length 3.0 width l. 5 Mammary nipples (length) Left anterior 1.0 posterior 1.1 Right anterior LO posterior 0.9 Mammary nipples (basal dia.) Left anterior 0.8 posterior 0.7 Right anterior 0.7 posterior 0.6 Ear lengths Left 14.5 Right 14.4 Hind feet lengths Left 41.7 . Right 41.9 Hoof length Left front 6.2 rear 6.2 6.3 Right front rear 6.1 0.2 Horn lengths Left 0.2 0.2 Right Girth 86.2 2-6 93.9 133.2 10 .1 123.1 27,8 12.2 1-7 88.3 126.0 12.4 113. 6 3.5 0.9 3.0 1.5 25.l 12.9 4, 7 2.6 1.5 1.9 0.8 1. 6 1.8 0.9 0.9 4.5 1-8 89.5 139.0 13.3 125.7 26.3 5.5 3.0 1.2 3.0 1.5 4 .. 9 88.6 137.7 9.7 128.0 26.3 12.1 5.0 3.0 1.5 3.0 1. 7 1-10 84.5 10.7 25.5 12.3 4.0 3.5 2.0 3.2 2.0 1.4 0.9 0.8 0.9 0.9 1.8 LO 0.9 1.8 1. 6 1.9 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.5 1.5 0.8 0.6 1. 2 0.7 0.7 l. 6 l. 3 0.8 0.8 0.6 0.6 14.2 14.2 13.8 14, 1 13.4 14. l 14.3 13.1 13. 3 41.5 41.3 37.0 37,4 40.6 40,4 40.5 40.2 39.6 39.7 5.0 5.5 5,3 5.6 5.3 6.0 5.4 6.1 5.5 5.1 5.3 5.2 5.2 1.2 0.9 1.2 2.0 1.2 1.1 1.4 1.2 0.8 6.0 5.6 5.6 5.6 0.6 0.6 0.3 90.7 0.5 0.3 0.3 0.1 0.2 83.3 0.3 85.5 0.3 85.4 83.5 37.6 47.2 34.9 46.6 33.5 42.5 30.7 39,6 35.2 55.7 93 66 91 65 79 59 85 60 86 59 4.8 5.2 4. 7 0.5 0.1 Neck Point a Point b Carcass weights {lbs.) Bled Evicerated 81 59 �Table 2.--External body measurements (centimeters) for buck antelope collected in Saguache Co1,1.nt:2:. Seecimen Number. Category 62 57 59 61 64 69 Estimated age (yr. - mon.) Shoulder height Total body length Tail length Body length Head length lnterorbital width Penis length Scro tum length height width Ear length Left Right Hind foot lengths Left Right Hoof lengths Left front rear Right front rear Horns Basal circumference Left Right . Length Left Right Prong lengths Left Right Spread (tip to tip) Spread (max. inside) Girth 2-11 87.5 2-0 87.7 132.8 14.0 118.8 139.0 25.9 13.7 15.0 5.0 4.5 4.0 14. 2 124.8 28.7 13.6 13. 5 5.5 5.0 4.0 1-1 2-2 1-3 86.3 127.3 86.5 95.0 137 .5 140.1 10. 6 11.8 13. 7 14.1 14.0 14.0 14.5 15.0 4.5 5.0 4.5 15.5 4.5 5.5 7.0 6.0 5.5 6.0 6.0 5.5 2.5 12.2 12.2 13. 6 13. 7 13.0 13. 7 13. 9 42.3 42.0 42.2 42.1 42.0 42.5 6.5 6.1 6.5 6.1 129.5 13. 5 13.6 39.6 39.5 4L4 40.8 41.4 41.0 5.4 6.2 5.7 6.3 5.7 6.0 5.9 6.9 6.3 5.8 5.6 6.9 6.6 14.2 14.1 9.1 9.1 14.5 24.0 24.7 17. 2 30.7 18.5 23.3 15.8 29.5 20.0 5.2 5.5 5.2 5.2 0.2 3.0 1.4 2.9 17.0 16.7 0.8 14.8 20. 9 85.7 21.3 86.3 15.3 81. 6 95.4 1.1 27.1 27.4 92.7 38.0 47.5 53,6 34.4 50.2 46.5 60. 5 89 64 100 74 84 61 5.5 11.8 11.6 24. 2 14.3 13. 6 23.5 124.0 28.5 12.4 5.4 14.3 112. 5 10.5 127.0 28.1 14.8 12.3 5.3 2.-6 93. 3 138.3 14.1 6.4 6.5 6.4 6.6 11.6 11.4 19.1 19.1 0.0 o.o 25,l 97.3 Neck Point a Point b Carcass weights (lbs.) Bled Evicerated 55.2 40.9 57.3 115 99 117 85 75 84 46.5 �Table 2. --External body m,g,asu:rements (centimeters) for buck antelope collected in Saguach,~ Coµnty. _(Cont;;;t1i,ted) - F~ =·~~,,--• Category Estimated age (yr. 71 - mort.) 'l\,t~l b©cly tenlii',th Tail length Body length Head length Interorbital width Penis length Scrotum length 73 2-7 4~8 91.6 94.0 138.0 140.5 12.9 125.1 28. 8 14.5 12. 7 127.8 28.5 14.7 16.0 Specimen Number 75 78 1~10 86. 7 127.5 13.7 113.8 25.7 91. 1 134.4 12.l 122.3 27,2 12.8 12.0 4.5 5.5 4.8 4.5 height 4.0 width 3.4 4.7 4.3 12.7 14.0 4.7 4.3 3.0 13. 6 13. 6 17.2 17.1 13. 9 14.5 13.8 14. 6 40.3 40.3 42.6 42.4 4L3 41.4 4L5 41. 2 5.8 5.4 6.1 5.8 6.6 5.8 6.5 5.5 5.7 5.4 5.8 5.4 6.1 5.8 6.1 11. 3 11. 3 12.9 13. 2 13. 0 4.0 Ear length Left Right Hind foot lengths Left Right Hoof lengths Left front rear Right front rear 5.8 Horns Basal circumference Left Right 13.1 13.3 Length Left Right Prong lengths Left Right Spread (tip to tip) Spread (max. inside) 21.8 21. 7 27.7 27.0 18.2 18.1 24.0 23.2 3.8 4.4 20.7 5.0 5.5 6.5 5.8 16.7 21.5 90.8 Girth Neck 88.6 25.2 92,2 4.2 4.2 18.1 19.0 90.0 Point a Point b Carcass weights (lbs.) 37.2 54.5 43.0 60.9 34.5 45.6 52.5 42.6 96 70 118 80 87 58 90 68 Bled Evicerated 20.8 21.1 �Table 3.- ... Measurements (millimeters}, weights (grams), and volumes (cubic centimeters) of the organs of the doe antelope callee ted in Saguache C0:u~ty. Specimen Number Organ 56 58 60 63 66 65 Heart Longitudinal Transverse · Weight 323 Volume 306 Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Volume Brain Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Volume Spleen Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Volume Kidney (Left) Longitudinal · Transverse Vertical Weight Volume Kidney (Right) Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Volume Lung Weights 135 95 137 117 124 383 364 346 329 292 156 43 201 43 200 53 855 1335 900 800 1239 832 74 66 36 100 197 80 67 77 41 41 115 111 110 106 165 122 157 124 105 382 162 142 102 390 370 312 161 25 274 312 162 805 751 73 13 91 349 330 104 Liver 68 43 112 108 142 106 10 84 80 79.0 134 87 10 74 70 31 113 109 135 93 148 110 10 9 72 83 88 68 79 76.1 73.1 47.5 42.3 67.6 88.2 52.1 51.1 118.8 63.8 113. 3 72.1 47.0 84.0 88.l 48.9 78.7 74.9 48.8 58.5 155.0 149.2 92.2 50.2 57.7 155.7 41. 1 49.2 86 .4 149.8 52.3 76. 8. 45.0 46.6 88.7 85.2 70.7 37.8 52.5 101.1 67.0 96.2 32.0 36.1 21.1 20, 3 34.1 33,9 37.2 Left 160 190 240 Right Eyeball (Left) 255 265 330 Langi tud inal Transverse Weight Volume Eyeball (Right) 32.3 35.8 32.1 36.3 36.l 21.0 20.4 20.6 19.8 32.8 36.3 3L4 20.4 19.9 32.0 36.2 21.8 19.6 19.3 21.1 Longitudinal 32.3 35.9 Weight 20.9 20.J Volume 37 13 79.3 44.2 Transverse 73 93 80.3 40.2 ss;1 73 59 40 97 93 16 73.4 83.6 101 44 1185 ll05 108 103 78.6 47.6 47.9 83.8 79.4 42.l 46.1 77 .o 74 276 32.5 21.7 21.0 35.8 37. 8 23.8 23.0 37.2 23.3 22.5 �- .117 - Table 3.--M~asurements (millimeters), weights (grams), and volumes (cubic centimeters) of the organs of the doe antelope collected in Saguache County. (Continued) Specimen Number Organ 70 67 68 72 74 77 Heart Longitudinal 122 135 116 126 115 128 Transverse 91 101 82 98 93 96 Weight 280 350 269 360 317 344 Volume 267 333 254 342 300 336 Liver Longitudinal 281 269 275 26 265 249 Transverse 158 145 14 145 170 142 Vertical 38 39 38 46 34 37 Weight 825 665 735 635 680 575 Volume 615 774 682 591 630 535 Brain Longitudinal 73 72 71 68 69 Transverse 64 67 60 68 58 Vertical 38 33 17 37 40 Weight 112 103 90 85 97 Volume 108 67 100 82 93 Spleen Longitudinal 121 129 120 136 132 132 Transverse 90 80 105 85 79 95 Vertical 10 12 17 9 12 9 Weight 56 73 57 72 70 57 Volume 53 70 54 69 66 54 Kidney (Left) Longitudinal 78.3 77.3 73.3 75.6 78.8 74.1 Transverse 42.8 49.1 40.1 39.2 41.4 38.9 Vertical L4l. 4 46.0 47.1 47.1 45.3 47.8 Weight 69.0 74.4 69.5 72.7 77.8 71.1 Volume 65.4 66.1 70.6 69.1 74.4 67.5 Kidney (Right) Longitudinal 76.1 79.9 76.1 79.8 75.6 72.0 Transverse 35.3 40.4 42.2 38.8 39.3 36.1 Vertical 45.1 44.9 44.5 47.1 50.3 47.0 Weight 63.8 77. 2 79.7 79.5 74.5 68.5 Volume 60.8 75.6 71. 2 64.9 73.4 75.9 Lung Weights Left 160 155 175 Right 240 245 275 Eyeball (Le ft) Longitudinal 31.0 35.4 33.5 31. 1 33.8 Transverse 31.4 36.8 36.5 37.8 36.9 Weight 22.9 19.5 19.8 20.0 24. 5 Volume 22.4 19.1 19.2 23.9 18.9 Eyeball 0Ught) Longitudinal 31.6 33.2 31. 3 35.9 30.1 Transverse 36.5 31.3 34.5 34.5 35.2 Weight 22.0 19. 7 19. 2 19.8 19.0 19.l Volume 21.5 19. 1 18. 6 18.2 �Table 4.--Measurements (millimeters), weights (grams), and volumes (cubic centimeters) of the organs of the·buck antelope collected in Saguache County. Specimen Number Organ 57 59 · 61 62 64 69 Heart 132 127 111 352 334 102 137 102 394 373 354 336 Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Volume Brain Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight 285 158 45 820 763 275 161 44 1020 948 277 172 39 760 715 291 189 37 910 848 72 72 83 62 42 64 32 100 74 63 35 104 Volume 94 100 91 88 139 134 120 91 118 80 13 80 12 93 76 88 14 75 70 82.5 44.8 50.3 94.6 89.1 48.2 52.l 107.1 89.8 101.9 83.0 41.8 51.0 97.6 92. 8 87.5 46.5 55.5 110. 7 105. 3 215 270 215 350 250 375 32.2 34.9 19.9 19.4 32.9 36.1 20.2 19.7 29.7 35,l 17.2 16.8 32.0 35.9 19.8 19.3 33.4 36.1 20.2 19.7 30.7 Longitudinal Transverse Weight Volume 135 122 390 371 144 112 445 423 246 161 37 865 806 295 162 44 985 920 Liver Spleen Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Volume Kidney (Left) Longitudinal •Trans.verse Vertical Weight Volume Kidney (Right) Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Volume Lung Weights Left Right Eyeball (Left) Longitudinal Transverse Weight Volume Eyeball (Right) Longitudinal Transverse Weight Volume 65 76.9 73 71 41 101 98 37 128 124 162 136 10 102 97 135 94 13 99 94 159 101 14 82.5 50.5 80.5 46.7 53. 2 72.8 43.3 45.5 85.7 86 81 39.5 46.1 72.1 68.4 113.0 77. 2 80.2 44.2 50.3 50.9 82.9 45.5 50.4 119.8 114. 7 105.8 100.4 49.5 89.7 85,6 39,6 70.0 66.4 34.9 17.6 17 .2 51.2 118.1 104.2 98.7 8L7 73.0 43,9 230 250 315 295 32.8 35.3 21.2 20.6 31.5 35.5 20.5 19.7 33.2 36.8 32.6 35.2 21.0 20.4 31.3 33.1 36.9 21.6 20.0 35.9 20.4 19.6 21.4 20.8 �- 47 Table 4.-.-Measurements (millimeters), weights (grams), and volumes (cubic centimeters) of the organs of the buck.antelope collected in Saguache County. (Continued) Specimen Number Organ 73 75 71 78 Heart Longitudinal Transverse Weight Volume 137 130 113 110 101 387 366 382 91 282 266 Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Volume Brain Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Volume Spleen Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Volume Kidney (Left) Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Volume Kidney (Right) Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Volume Lung Weights 295 165 38 705 655 362 Liver Left Right Eyeball (Left) Longitudinal Transverse Weight Volume 274 185 43 238 990 540 506 923 81 71 43 128 124 124 36 68 59 37 92 88 83 65 41 118 113 140 91 12 75 142 96 13 82 77 154 107 57 54 71.0 43.0 44.5 68.4 64.7 77,3 43.9 46.8 98.2 93.8 73.7 40.0 46.2 76.2 72. 8 83.8 73,l 37.2 78.9 44.l 74.9 38.3 46.8 53.4 47.5 69.3 65.5 105. 1 73.1 69.7 79.2 39.2 50. 2 87.0 82.9 37.4 23.l 22.4 32.2 36.4 21.6 21. 1 31.8 34.4 18.6 18.0 32.8 37.4 23.1 22.4 32.4 36.3 21.6 21.1 32.3 34.3 111 15 112 100.0 125 91 9 72 38,5 47.9 89.2 85.0 185 300 36.9 33.1 22.3 21.5 32.8 Eyeball (Right) Longitudinal Transverse Weight Volume 37.l 34.0 21.5 20.7 18.5 17.9 �- 4.8 - Table 5,-.. Gland measurements (millimeters), weights (grams), and volumes (cubic centimeters) for the doe antelope collected in Saguache Count .. Gland Thyroid (Left) Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Volume Thyroid (Right Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Volume Adrenal (Left) Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Volume Adrenal (Right) Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Volume Ovary (Left) Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Volume ovary (Right) Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Volume Pituitary Longitudina.l Transverse Weight Volume ..· ..., Specimen Number 60 63 65 66 32.7 12.6 7.3 L6 1.5 57.4 11. 5 6.9 2.2 2.1 56 58 33.8 14. 6 38.0 1.5 37.7 17. 9 6.7 2.4 2.1 30.7 13. 2 6.3 1. 6 27.9 18.1 7.7 1.6 28.9 14.8 31.4 14.8 1.8 1. 5 1.3 1. 6 14.6 1.3 1.2 35,7 11. 3 5.9 1.7 1. 6 42.2 14.4 7.6 2.4 2.0 42.0 27.1 13.8 5.9 28.8 15.1 33.0 13.4 9.2 2.0 30.5 15.0 L8 1.1 31.5 12.2 6.1 1.9 1.7 12.3 7.6 22.4 17.3 6.7 1.6 1. 6 1.5 24.0 14.9 9.3 1.9 1.8 23.5 15.8 9.5 7.6 2.1 1.7 11.0 2.0 0.4 14. 6 41.1 12.4 5.1 1.9 1.7 12.8 7.4 2.5 2.2 15.8 13.8 9.3 2.1 0.4 1. 7 1.5 13. 5 11.0 7.0 0.7 0.6 11.7 5.9 0.5 11.4 9.5 0.5 13.1 6.5 s.6 1.2 16.2 11. 9 31.3 12.4 6.0 l. 9 1.7 LO 0.7 12.1 3.4 0.9 0.6 3.1 15.3 12.8 9.1 13. 9 11.2 13.8 18.8 14.3 1.2 0.9 0.8 0.8 1.8 0.7 1.6 9.8 10.0 8.4 8,3 0.3 10. 5 8;8 1. 2 1.0 LO 12.8 9.5 0.6 0.5 7.3 9.8 7.4 0.5 0.4 11.5 0.2 0.4 0.3 �- 49 - Table 5.--Gland measurements (millimeters), weights (grams~ and volumes (cubic centimeters) for the doe antelope collected in Saguache County. ~Continued) Gland 67 Thyroid (Left) Longitudinal Transverse Vertical 36.6 13,8 6.8 2,1 2,0 Weight Volume Thyroid (Right) Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Volume Adrenal (Left) Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Volume Adrenal (Right) Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Volume Ovary (Left) Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Volume 68 30.l 10.6 6.5 1.6 1.5 34.0 1.4 28.3 13. 3 6.7 1.6 1.5 21.3 11.6 32.0 12.3 6.3 1.0 0.9 6,6 12.3 5.2 1.5 9.9 ·9,2 5.8 0.3 0.2 1.8 1. 7 23.0 17.3 10.0 2.4 2.3 S12ecimen Number 70 72 35.2 10, 5 6.2 0.9 0.8 28,8 11.4 6,2 1.0 0.9 34.l 10.2 35.9 12.1 8.3 1.9 1.7 31.1 13.5 8,6 1.8 32.8 9.5 2.7 5.8 1.1 2.5 LO 28.0 29.1 12.5 5.4 13. 2 38.2 10,8 31.5 11.1 5,2 1.6 1.5 29.4 32.8 14.5 1.3 1. 2 1.3 1.2 28.8 14.8 6.8 1.5 1.4 27.1 9.1 4.6 1.5 1.4 1.4 15.9 12.3 9.1 17.0 15.3 9.1 1.3 1.2 0.7 46.0 12,8 7.9 1.6 1.8 1. 6 0.8 77 6.9 1. 7 1.6 9.7 15.7 8.7 1. 6 74 1.1 1.0 16.3 17 .1 11.2 16.8 8.3 10.1 2.0 0.2 1.1 1.0 Ovary (Right) Longitudinal Transverse Vertical 15.6 13,5 10.1 Weight 1.0 Volume Pituitary Longitudinal· Transverse Weight Volume 0.9 10.6 7.1 0.4 0,3 19.1 15.4 8.4 1.6 1.5 16.8 10.3 10.8 0.4 0.3 8.9 8.3 10. 8 8.6 0.9 0.8 0.3 0. 3 . 15.2 14.9 7.5 1.0 0.9 16.8 13,3 15.6 9.6 9.6 LS 1.4 9.1 1.1 10.5 6.8 0.8 0.7 10.5 1.0 9.6 0.8 0.7 �- 50 - Table 6.--Gland measurements (millimeters), weights (grams), and volumes (cubic centimeters) for buck antefoJ2e colle,5:::.,_t:ed in Saguache.Cqunti . . S;eecimEm Number 61 Gland 57 59 62 64 69 Thyroid (Left) longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Volume Thyroid (Right) Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Volume Adrenal (Left) Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Volume Adrenal (Right) Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Volume Testis (Left) Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Volume Testis (Right) Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Volume Pituitary Longitudinal Transverse Weight Volume Prostate Longitudinal 34.9 34.0 38.6 11.8 12.6 11. 2 9.4 5;2 1.4 1.3 6.9 2.2 2.0 1.5 1.3 1.4 25.8 10.9 8.2 1.5 1.4 36.5 13. 2 6.8 2.0 1.8 34.5 11.5 39.6 14.4 9.2 2.2 2.1 32.6 13.2 2.4 9.0 2.5 2.3 35.2 12.6 5.5 1.5 1.4 41.7 14.6 5.6 2.3 2.0 26.8 31.2 14.8 29.8 10.3 7.8 1.6 1.5 30.9 13.6 8.2 2.0 1.9 29.8 13.1 5.6 32,5 34.3 10.l 6.2 26.9 13.8 9.8 1. 3 1.8 1.6 1.8 1. 7 28.5 10. 9 5.9 1.2 40.4 26.1 26.9 14. 3 13.8 41.0 25.0 26.9 13.4 12.9 14.4 6.9 44.1 27.4 26.4 18.5 17.8 44.1 28.6 26.2 18.8 18.1 9.7 7.1 1.5 1.3 11. 3 4.7 1.1 0.9 37.l 12.l 8.2 2.3 2.1 1.3 6.1 2.0 1.9 9.0 2.7 39.9 12.1 34.3 9.4 5.1 1.5 1.3 30.5 13.8 1. 9 1.8 1.7 41. 3 26.7 22.7 14.6 14.0 45.5 31. 5 30.8 22.7 21. 8 41. 7 40,9 27.2 24.7 14.9 14.3 44.7 31.6 29.8 24.2 23.3 42.8 28.9 26.8 18.9 18.0 10. 2 8.5 9.4 1.6 27.7 25.0 15.9 15.1 49.1 29.4 25.2 15.8 15.4 12.6 9.9 9.8 8.8 5.2 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.4 0.4 10.0 10.l 0.5 0.5 18.7 2.6 1. 7 1.5 15.2 21.3 18.4 1.2 1.9 1.8 1.4 Weight 2.1 Volume 2.0 1.0 0.4 0.4 L4 \ �- 51 - Table 6.--Gland measurements (millimeters), weights (grams), and volumes (cubic centimeters) for buck antelope collected in Saguache County, (Continued) Specimen Number Gland Thyroid (left) Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Volume Thyroid (Right) Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Volume Adrenal (Left) Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Volume Adrenal (Right) Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Volume Testis (Left) Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Volume Testis (Right) Longitudinal Transverse Vertical Weight Volume Pituitary Longitudinal Transverse Weight Volume Prostate Longitudinal Weight Volume 71 73 75 78 22.2 13.2 6.1 1.2 36.9 39.6 9.1 4.1 43.8 1.0 25.5 14.8 7,3 1.5 1. 3 40.0 10. 7 6.9 2.0 1.8 16.4 7.3 2.9 2.7 12,8 1.1 7.6 2.0 1.9 35.5 17.8 7.8 2.4 2.2 42.2 9,0 35,3 35.3 3.8 1.2 1.1 7.6 2.6 2.5 3.24 32.9 13.4 7.1 2.1 2.0 29.8 30.0 14.8 6.2 2.2 2.2 26.3 12.4 6.0 1.0 1.0 14.2 7.1 1.8 1.7 29.9 8.8 7.8 1.5 1.3 1.2 11. 2 6.2 1.0 0.9 32.9 24.6 20. 7 8.8 8.2 30. 8 22.1 32.2 21.0 7.0 6. 7 7.5 7.2 39.4 26.1 25.0 12.9 12.3 32.6 22.7 31. 8 20.9 32.2 18,4 38.2 26.4 7.2 6.9 7.3 7.0 12.2 11. 6 10. 5 10. 8 11. 5 10.0 8.2 0.7 0,6 8.6 0.4 0.3 15.3 1. 6 1.5 19.2 1.8 21.4 21. 3 8.7 8.1 0.8 0.7 11.1 1.. 2 1.1 17.3 1.4 1.3 1. 7 �- 52 Table 7.,~-Stomach weights for doe and buck antelope collected in Saguache ~ ~..:n;.;:;.t.._._ _ _ _ _ _ _....,__ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _. Bucks Does Weight (gramJill___ Entire Rumen Rumen Specimen Stomach & and without Number Contents Contents Contents 57 4735 4105 59 5135 4340 7030 4525 4200 5700 5340 4895 845 4580 705 4370 3430 580 61 62 64 69 71 75 78 5020 4510 670 840 3940 725 5935 3555 805 Weight !grams) Entire Ru.men Rumen Specimen Stomach & and without Number · Contents .. Contents Contents 56 58 70 60 4000 5480 3130 3250 2405 6340 5335 65 66 67 4565 8480 3650 580 7385 6110 4660 4200 4630 3765 5130 935 755 670 5030 620 1000 530 920 550 730 68 72 74 77 3680 3485 4040 3090 515 510 530 �- 53 - Table 8.--M.easurements (millimeters) and weights (gt'ams) for the reproductive tracts and embryos taken from doe antelope collected irt Saguache Count .• S:eecimen Number Measurement Uterine Horn (Left) Longitudinal Transverse Uterine Horn (Right) Longitudina 1 Transverse Vagina Longitudinal Transverse Cervix Longitudinal Transverse Median Septum Length True Uterine Length Weight with Young Weight without Young Embry6 (Left) Sex Weight Rump-crown Length Total Length Shoulder Height Embryo (Right) Sex Weight Rump-crown Length Total Length Shoulder Height Collection Date 56 58 60 63 65 66 300 180 92 70 31 50 12 44 24 13 70 13 70 33 56 12 44 14 69 12 160 36 140 32 132 29 150 23 66 12 80 26 16 46 20 62 92 370 89 185 . 25 210 20 150 105 22 40 71 65 18 32 36 18 25 15 20 15 104 83 68 70 180 8765 920 20 23 11 Female 2440 517 405 -- Male 2710 522 370 5-18-66 6-28-66 7-28-66 9-27-66 1b~28-66 11-19-66 �Table 8.--Measurements (millimeters) and weights (grams) for the reproductive tracts and embryos taken from doe antelope ,collected in Saguache County. (Continued) Measurement Uterine Horn (Left) Longitudinal Transverse Uterine Horn (Right) Longitudinal Transverse Vagina Longitudinal Transverse Cervix Longitudinal Transverse Median Septum Length True Uterine Length Weight with Young Weight without Young Embryo (Left) Sex Weight Rump-crown Length Total Length Shoulder Height Embryo (Right) Sex Weight Rump-crown Length Total Length Shoulder Height Collection Date SJ!ecimen Number 70 72 67 68 78 157 78 155 80 40 31 172 77 147 14 74 77 230 120 230 101 220 147 150 79 233 118 207 107 11 140 20 150 22 150 25 155 21 161 29 70 12 18 25 88 69 75 12 49 28 725 75 12 44 28 1055 150 65 17 42 104 1720 90 215 66 15 42 83 1720 240 1.3 21.2 Female 23.8 90.0 Male 98 140 163 Female 192 Male 186 ,173 205 123 Male 605 243 400 198 Male 100 134 164 Male 211.3 1-23-67 2-18-67 Male 184.6 174 200 122 3-13-67 4-26-67 72 0.8 21.3 11-21-66 Female 25.2 89.8 12-17-66 196 197 10 60 72 1345 71 �- 55 - Table 9,--Carcass fat estimations for antelope collected in Saguache County. Index Kidney Fat Index (percent) Left Kidney Right Kidney Both Back Fat Depth (mm) Thoracic Fat Depth (mm) Visceral Fat (grams) Bone Marrow Visual Est. Femur Color Consistency Tibia Color Consistency Bone Marrow Chemical Anal. Femur Percent Fat Percent Moisture Tibia Percent Fat Percent Moisture Date Collected Sex 56 SEecimen Number 57 58 16 15 16 17 17 17 None 11 Trace 59 23 20 21 None 9 160 160 4 48 12 7 9 None 6 75 SR-9.5/2 Solid SR-10/2 Semi"Solid SR-8/6 Putty-like SR-8,5/4 Putty-like SR-9/4 Solid SR-10/2 Semi-Solid SR-6.5/4 Putty-like SR-7,5/4 Putty-like 54.47 30,12 28.24 67.78 64,67 26.42 85.22 9.47 5-23-66 Male 45.50 48.69 6-28-66 Female 86.87 10,83 6-29-66 Male 5-18-66 Female �- 56 - Table 9.--Carcass fat estimations for antelope collected in Saguache County. Continued Index Kidney Fat Index (percent) Left Kidney Right Kidney Both Back Fat Depth (mm) Thoracic Fat Depth (mm) Visceral Fat (grams) Bone Marrow Visual Est. Femur Color Consistency Tibia Color Consistency Bone Marrow Chemical Anal. Femur Percent Fat Percent Moisture Tibia Percent Fat Percent Moisture Date Collected Sex 60 Specimen Number 61 62 63 122 I 168 146 14 22 11 22 22 47 48 47 12 None T. T T 4 138 9 235 7 410 15 1175 5R-9/4 Putty-like SR-9.5/4 Solid SR-10/3 Solid 5R-2 Solid SR-9/4 SR-8/4 Putty-like Solid SR-9/3 Solid 5R-2 Solid 49.01 46.15 71. 94 94.82 96.39 16.45 1.02 1.20 70.90 24.11 7-28-66 Female 75.78 12.55 7-29-66 Male 95.22 94.67 1.09 1.19 9-27-66 Female 8-25-66 Male �- 57 - '!'able 9.--Car:cass fat estimations for antelope collected in Saguache County. (Continued) Index Kidney Fat Index (percent) Left Kidney Right Kidney Both Back Fat Depth (rmn) Thoracic Fat Depth (mm) Visceral Fat (grams) Bone Marrow Visual Est. Femur Color Consistency Tibia Color Consistency 64 Specimen Number 65 66 67. 144 149 146 42 37 245 59 217 64 40 11 450 231 2 21 62 T 12 1660 885 1065 SR-9/2 SR-9/2 Solid SR-10/2 Solid SR-10/1 Solid SR-10/2 SR-9/2 Solid SR-10/4 Solid 5R-10/4 97.71 1.76 90.36 95.12 1.46 8.94 1.00 93.87 95.38 95.41 95. 72 1.55 9-29-66 Male 1.17 10-28-66 2.47 1.00 11-19-66 11-21-66 Female Female Female None Putty-like T 15 Solid Solid Bone Marrow Chemical Anal. Femur Percent Fat Percent Moisture 97. 7 5 Tibia Percent Fat Percent Moisture Date Collected Sex �- t:-'Q )U - Table 9.--Carcass fat estimations for antelope collected in Saguache County, (Continued) Index Kidney Fat Index (percent) Left Kidney Right Kidney Both Back Fat Depth (mm) Thoracic Fat Depth (mm) Visceral Fat (grams) Bone Marrow Visual Est. Femur Color Consistency Tibia Color Consistency Bone Marrow Chemical Anal. 68 Sepcimen Number 69 70 71 120 116 90 118 None 19 900 84 108 79 92 T T 8 9 9 900 555 545 SR-10/1 Solid 5R-10/4 Solid SR-9/2 Solid SR-9/4 Solid SR-9/4 Solid 5R-9/4 Solid SR-9/4 Solid SR-7.5/4 Solid 90. 96 6.73 88.51 7.64 91.11 4.38 91.04 4.90 44.09 53.41 12-17-66 Female 95.32 1.54 12-16-66 Male 95.46 3.94 1-23-66 86.37 1.60 1-27-66 Male 77 93 75 84 None Femur Percent Fat Percent Moisture Tibia Percent Fat Percent Moisture Date Collected Sex Ferna le �Table 10.--Blood analy;sis for antelope collected on the Saguache County Study; Area. SEecimen Number 58 59 6-28-66 6-29-66 7-28-66 65 10-28-66 Male Female Male Female Female 9.26 8.74 7.00 8.57 7.50 8.90 Leucocytes per cu. mm 1250 1100 700 1450 1500 1400 Neutrophils Segs/% Immature 20 0 32 0 ,28 0 52 Lymphocytes-% 64 60 56 40 Mon,ocytes-% 12 8 16 8 Eos inoph:il s- % 4 0 0 0 Basophils-% 0 0 0 0 Hemoglobin g/100 ml 17.l 16.1 11.0 15.3 14.S 15.3 Hematocrit-% 50 48 33.0 49.0 43 58 Category Date 56 5-18-66 57 5-23-66 Sex Female Erythrocytes M/cu. mm 60 0 '!.JI \0 �TablelO~ • ~Blood analysis for antelope collected on the Saguache County Stud:z:"Area 0 (Continued.) 0 Specimen Number 70 71 72 74 11-21-66 68 12-16-66 1-23-67 1-27=67 2·-18-67 3-13-67 Female Fenu3 le Male Female Male Female Female Erythrocytes M/cu. mm 12.00 9.85 10.29 1120 9.80 1L97 12.50 Leucocytes per cu, mm 570 2000 1500 1700 1100 1700 2000 Neutrophils Segs/% Immature 56 32 29 30 46 50 0 0 0 0 0 0 Lymphocytes-% 40 44 65 66 42 46 Monocytes-% 0 16 3 2 8 4 Eosinophils-% 4 8 3 2 4 0 Basophils-% 0 0 0 0 0 0 Date 66 11-, 18-66 Sex ~ 67 G\ Hemoglobin g/100 ml 18~0 14.5 18.6 16.6 14.1 16 29.0 Hematocrit-% 59 47 57 55 [i.8 49 75 0 �- 61 - Table 11.--Body temperatures (degrees centigrade) of antelope collected in Sa ache Count. Specimen Number Rectal Temperature Muscle Temperature 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 77 78 38.5 38.0 38.0 38.5 40.0 38.5 38,0 38.5 39.5 39.5 39.0 38.0 37.5 40.0 38,0 38.5 37. 5 37. 5 37.5 38.0 38.0 37.5 37.5 38.0 37. 5 38.0 38.0 38.0 38.0 39.0 37.5 38,5 38.0 38,0 38.5 38.0 39,0 38.5 38.0 �Table 12.--Teeth and bone measurements (millimeters) for doe antelope collected in Saguas.he C"o_unty. SEecimen Number Measurement Length of Tooth Rows (Left) Maxillary premolar and molar Maxillary molar only Mandibular premolar and molar Mandibular molar only Length of Tooth Rows (Right) Maxillary premolar and molar Maxillary molar only Mandibular premolar and molar Mandibular molar only Length of mandibular diastema Length of ramus Estimate age (years-months 56 58 60 - 71.5 42.8 69.2 41.5 70.9 49.0 73.9 43.1 66.0 36.1 77.6 52.7 71.3 43.8 76.9 53.1 70.8 219 2-11 68.8 42.2 72.3 50.9 68.3 201 3-0 63 74.6 46.9 71.1 43.2 4-1 65.4 35.0 73.9 44.9 62.9 195 1-3 65 66 74.2 57.3 74.6 48.0 73.0 42.5 74.5 74.6 48.0 63.3 198 1-4 47.6 77.2 54.0 66.5 216 6-5 G\ rv :i;able 12.~-Teeth and bone measurements (millimeters) for doe antelope collected in Saguache County. Seecimen Number Measurement Length of Tooth Rows (Left) Maxillary premolar and molar Maxillary molar only Mandibular premolar and molar Mandibular molar only Length of Tooth Rows (Right) Maxillary premolar and molar Maxillary molar only Mandibular premolar and molar Mandibular molar only Length of mandibular diastema Length of ramus Estimate age (years-months) 67 68 71. 7 69.7 44.3 79.0 53.8 42.2 76.9 51.0 71. 7 76.2 50.9 68.2 207 69.1 43.8 78.9 54.0 69.8 216 1~5 2-6 41.6 70 74.1 49.1 72 74 77 67.1 39.3 72.0 67.9 42.7 73.9 50.3 69.9 41.9 76.9 50.9 68a2 70.0 41.8 lc8. 0 66.5 38.l 74.2 47.2 63 2 186 1-7 67 6 43.2 73.7 50.0 68.9 210 1~8 209 50.9 58.9 187 4~9 1-10 71.4 46.0 0 =-~- 74.6 - �Table 13.--Teeth and bone measurements ~millimeters) for buck antelope collected in Saguache ~ounty. Measurement Length of Tooth Rows (Left) Maxillary premolar and molar Maxillarv molar only Mandibular premolar and molar Mandibular molar only Length of Tooth Rcws (Right) Maxillary premolar and molar Maxillary molar only Mandibular premolar and molar Mandibular molar only Length of mandibular diastema Length of ramus Estimate age (&ears-months) ±i seecimen Number 69 71 57 59 62 69.6 42.1 80.3 49.1 73.2 33.0 79.5 27.5 73.8 44.6 87.2 53.0 72.2 46.l 82.1 54.1 69.3 41. 7 78.5 49.9 61.4 204 2-11 71.8 30.0 77.0 27.2 70.7 209 2-0 73.4 44.2 86.4 52.8 61.2 217 2-2 72.8 45.6 83.3 54.4 70.3 :::ee 213 2-6 73 75 78 70.3 43.4 79.0 51.0 73,0 46.l 75.2 47.7 74.6 42.0 75.8 49~7 71.8 42.5 82.0 51.6 70,4 43,4 79.1 50,7 68.l 207 2-7 72.4 45.7 79.2 54.4 71.9 72.0 41.7 71.1 43.3 66 .• 8 204 1-9 72.8 42.8 78.5 51.6 68.7 217 4-8 205 1-11 O'\ w I �- 64 - Table 14.--Weight of ha.ir from hide samples expressed as a percentage of the total weight of the sam;ele. Month Collected Sex Necropsy No. Percent May May June June July July August September September October November November December December Female Male Female Male Male Male Male Female Male Female Female Female Female Male 57 58 59 60 61 62 72.98 68.03 62.37 52.19 54.92 46.72 56. 89 .· 63 67. 85 . 64 69031 69.87 69.96 73.78 56 65 66 67 68 69 76,.90 78.82 �Table 15.--Pelage color classifications, rump patch measurements, and cheek patch measurements for buck _ante lope collected in Saguache County, Specimen Number 57 59 61 62 64 69 71 73 75 78 Color Classifications Dorsal InterOuter Thigh Rostrum orbital lOYR-5/4 lOYR-8/5 lOYR-3.5/2 10YR~7/6 lOYR-4/2 lOYR-7.5/6 lOYR-4/2 lOYR-3/1 lOYR-8/6 lOYR-3/2 lOYR-4/2 lOYR-8/4.5 lOYR-6/2 lOYR-7 .5/6 lOYR-7.5/4 lOYR-5/2 lOYR-4/2 lOYR-8/2.5 lOYR-5/3 lOYR-5/3 lOYR-8/3 lOYR-4/2 lOYR-8/4 lOYR-2.5/2 lOYR-5/3 lOYR-5.5/4 10YR~7.5/4 lOYR-7/3 lOYR-7 .5/4 lOYR-8/4 Rump Patch Measurements Shoulders lOYR-7.5/6 lOYR-7.5/6 lOYR-7/8 lOYR-8/4 lOYR-7/8 lOYR-7.5/4 lOYR-7.5/6 lOYR-7/5 lOYR-7/8 10YR~7/5 (cml Cheek Patch Measurements Longi- Trans•· tudinal 25 verse Longitudinal 32 23 32 3.0 6.5 28 29 31 s.o 26 35 28 28 33 4. 5 7.5 5.5 6.0 8.0 6.5 7.0 28 32 25 27 36 33 26 30 {cm2 Trans- verse 2.0 3.0 1.5 3.9 7.5 4.0 4.0 5.5 3.0 3.5 (J\ Vl �- 66 - Table 16.--Pelage color classification and rump patch measurements for doe anteloee collected in Saguache Count:y. Rump Patch Measurements Color Classifications ~Centimeters) Specimen Dorsal Outer Interorbital Thigh Shoulders Number Rostrum Longitudinal Transverse 56 58 60 63 65 66 67 68 70 72 74 77 lOYR-3.5/2 lOYR-8/4.5 lOYR-6/2. 5 lOYR-7/4 lOYR-7.5/6 lOYR-7/2. 5 lOYR-8/1 lOYR-8/5 lOYR-7 .5/4 lOYR-7.5/4 lOYR-7. 5/4 lOYR-6.5/2 lOYR-7.5/4 lOYR-6/4. 5 lOYR-7.5/4 lOYR-7/2 lOYR-8/3 lOYR-8/3 lOYR-7/3 lOYR-7/3 lOYR-7 .5/4 lOYR-7/2 lOYR-7.5/4 lOYR-7/3 lOYR-8/4.5 lOYR-7.5/6 lOYR-7/4 lOYR-8/4 lOYR-7/4 lOYR-8/2.5 lOYR-8/4 lOYR-7 .5/4 lOYR-8/4 lOYR-8/3 lOYR-8/4 lOYR-8/5 lOYR-7.5/6 lOYR-7.5/6 lOYR-7/8 lOYR-6/5 lOYR-8/4 lOYR-7/4 lOYR-7/4 lOYR-7.5/4 lOYR-7/4 lOYR-7/4 lOYR-8/5 lOYR-7/5 26 35 25 30 30 34 32 32 33 33 29 28 32 29 32 37 35 37 33 35 �- 67 - Mlny of the 22 antelope collected on the Saguache County Study Area were infected with parasites and diseases. These parasites and diseased tissues are presently being d.iagnosed. by veterinarians at Colorado State University, but a general outline is presented here. There were seven animals infected with lumpy jaw (Actinomyces bovisg, five had small round worms in the small intestine, five antelope had infected liver, and two had cysts in the mesentaries. Ticks (three) were found on one animal. LITERATURE CITED Munsell, A.H. 1929-1960. Munsell book of color, pocket edition. Color Co., Inc. Baltimore, Maryland. White, H. E. New York. 1956. Modern college physics. 824 pp. Prepared by: George D. Bear Asst. Wildlife Researcher Date: January, 1968 Munsell D. Van Nostrand Co., Inc., Approved by: Jack R. Grieb Project Leader Wayne w. Sand.fort Game Research Chief ��January, 1968 - 69 JOB COMPLETION BEFORT RESEA.RCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO Project No. W-41-R-l 7 Work Plan No. 1 Title of Job: Bighorn Sheep and Mountain Goat Investigations Job No. 12 Bighorn Sheep Distribution, Populations and Herd Composition Period Covered: June 1, 1966 to May 31, 1967 Personnel: L. Dale Hibbs ABSTRACT Aerial and ground counts of bighorn sheep herds were made during the segment year in the following areas: Pikes Peak, Rampart Range, Collegiate Range, Sangre de Cristo R.1nge, Buffalo Peaks, Poncha Pass, Taylor River, Sheep Creek, Mount Evans, Georgetown, Glenwood Canyon, Gore Range, Tarryall R3nge, and Bowen Pass-Clark's Peak. Most of the counts are considered to be low or incomplete, and are useful more as trend counts than as estimates of total herd counts. A high mortality among lambs is apparent. Experiments with an immobilizing drug (Sucostrin) showed that a dosage of at least 21 mg. is required for dependable performance on animals weighing about 130 pounds. One ewe was immobilized and captured, and later taken to Fort Collins for study. The sheep was heavily infested with lungworm. A hunter questionnaire study showed that 33 sheep were taken during the 1966 season, for a hunter success of 11.6 percent. Data were also collected on hunter sightings of sheep (average 23.3 per hunter), number of days hunted (average 6.7 per hunter), and various comments on the season. Recommendations for number of permits to be issued in each area are given. �- 70 - Objectives: (1) Determine bighorn sheep distribution. (2) Determine populations or trends. (3) Determine herd sex and age composition. (4) Prepare detailed range or distribution maps for specific herds with written descriptions for census, and develop standardized forms which can be used by management personnel during routine census and for recording long-term census information. Procedures: (1) Distribution of bighorn sheep in Colorado were determined by aerial and ground observations in areas of known occupancy (Figure 1), reported but unverified occupancy, and in areas where new herds may have developed close to established herds. Aerial observations were made from fixed-wing aircraft and helicopter, and ground observations were made primarily by foot or horseback although trail vehicles, four-wheel drive vehicles, and conventional vehicles were used whenever conditions allowed. Observation data were recorded on field forms which also serve for other portions of this job. Data recorded included: date; observer; game management unit number; herd or area designation; specific location; route of access into area, if a ground observation; manner of making observation (afoot, horseback, vehicle, fixed-wing or helicopter); time and number of adult males and females, yearlings, young, unclassified, and totals; elevation; vegetative type; general activity; associated animal species; aerial photo numbers, if known or available; and comments. A distribution map will be prepared from these data to add to information already on Figure 1. Forest Service maps, scaled 2 inches per mile, will be used where available. In districts where these large-scale maps have not been prepared, the \-inch-per-mile maps will be used. (2) Attempts were made to obtain as complete a population census as possible in each area studied, or at least, to establish uniform coverage and counting procedures to provide reliable data from which to determine trend from year to year. These counts are made in conjunction with the distribution observations described under Procedure½ and recorded on the prepared form. Counts are to be attempted under as nearly comparable situations as possible in succeeding years. Population data will be graphed for each herd or area. (3) In conjunction with the two preceding objectives and procedures, the herds observed will be classified by rams, ewes, yearlings, lambs, unclassified, and totals for sex and age, structure data. These data will enable us to determine productivity, survival and general herd health, on which sound management plans may be based. �- 71 - (4) Because of the death of the project worker, Mr. Dale Hibbs, and the subsequent need for completing this report, the detailed distribution maps, written descriptions for access to specific herd areas, and recommendations for census procedures and techniques are not included. It is not known whether these were prepared by Mr. Hibbs. A thorough search of the files failed to locate any of this material. ��- 73 - BIGHORN SHEEP DISTRIBUTION,. POPULATIONS AND HERD COMPOSITION Project activities are statewide; however, major emphasis was placed itl getting accurate data on a few major.herds; namely: PikesPeak,.Rampart Range, Collegiate Range, Sangre de cristo Range, Buffalo Peaks, Poncha Pass Range, Taylor River, Sheep Creek, Mr, Evans, Georgetown, Glenwood Canyon, Gore Range, Tarryall Range, and the Bowen Pass-Clarks Peak Area. Activities on the Bighorn Sheep Project, Work Plan No. 1, Job No. 12, primarily involved going into the above-mentioned sheep ranges in an attempt to. determine the distribution, population, and herd composition of the bighorn sheep in the area. Owing to the wide and sparse distribution of bighorn sheep in Colorado, most of the counts are low and incomplete. Total counts cannot be obtained in most areas; however, maximum herd counts can be made and used as trend counts in evaluating the status of particular herds. From the counts that have been made, it appears that there is a high mortality in the lamb-to-yearling age class. Ewe:lamb ratios are high during June and early summer with ratios as high as 100:80 in some areas. 'By fall (OctoberNovember) the ewe:lamb ratios have dropped to as low as 100:10 in some areas. It is not known for certain what is causing the low lamb survival; however, it appears that the lungworm-pneumonia comple:x may be a contributing factor. Intensive pen studies have been initiated in an attempt to study and. eventually control lungworm in bighorn sheep. Lamb -mortality is probably the single most important factor affecting bighorn sheep at the present time. The bighorn sheep ranges that were surveyed during this work period and the largest unduplicated number of sheep observed in each area are shown in Table L Each area will be considered separately. Table L--Unduplicated Bighorn Sheep Observations in Colorado, June 1966 to June 1967. Area Date Rams Ewes Lambs Yearlings Pikes Peak Glenwood Canyon Georgetown-Empire Bowe'n Pass-Clark ts Peak Gore Range Mt. Evans-Geneva Creek Sangre de Cristo Taylor River tarryall Collegiate Range 1/10/67 unknown 2/23/67 7/8/66· unknown 9/66 8/21/66 unknown Rampart Range Buffalo Peaks Poncha Pass Sheep Creek totals unknown 30 77 8 6 16 2 4 22 12 7 5 4 12 12 12 6 4 4 2 1 28 26 5 27 19 29 unknown 2/9/67 4/3/67 8 10 4 6 2 11 2 .. 9 107 Total 16 23 2 3 3 3 17 12 10 9 4/26/67 8/19/66 12/14/66 Uncl. 21 8 10 23 37 16 2 22 30 6 26 l 12 184 · 63 9 47 16 30 400 �- 74 - Pikes Peak-Area No. 6: The Pikes Peak Sheep Herd probably represents the largest single herd in the State of Colorado at the present time. The herd numbers close to 175 animals. The area and number of sheep observed are shown in Table 2. A total of 158 ewes and 63 lambs were located, which is a ewe:lamb ratio of 100:33 for all months from June to March. Counts made in the vicinity of Bison Reservoir by F. Colley and A. Hamilton during June, 1966, revealed ewe:lamb ratios of 100:79. From these data, it is apparent that there is a high mortality rate in the lamb to yearling-age class. Table 2.--Bighorn Sheep Observations of Pikes Peak Sheep Herd from June 1, 1966 to June 1 1967. Rams Ewes Lambs Yearlingsk Uncl Area Date June 13, 1966 September 3, 1966 Bison Res. Beaver Creek 1 2 September 16, 1966 December 21, 1966 January 9, 1967 January 10, 1967 March 6, 1967 May 21, 1967 Sheep Mountain Oil Creek Oil Creek Oil Creek W. Beaver Creek W. Beaver Creek Oil Creek Sheep Mountain Oil Creek Bison Pres. Totals 4 5 3 2 21 3 7 17 65 5 4 4 29 1 7 38 5 11 10 6 5 33 9 5 42 4 1 18 3 4 4 4 3 Total 10 30 1 47 7 10 1 8 158 63 2 70 13 18 16 61 12 1 17 19 2 3 8 40 334 * The yearling counts are low since yearling animals were difficult to distinguish from young ewes at a distance. It appears that the period of highest lamb mortality occurs in the first three months after birth. The yearling counts are probably low, since most sheep were observed at great distances; and yearling animals were difficult to distinguish from young ewes. Of the 294 sheep classified, there were 22.l percent rams, 53. 7 percent ewes, ·21. 5 percent lambs, and 2. 7 percent yearlings. The Pikes Peak Area was flown on May 21, 1967. A number of new lambs were located that appeared to be about one week old. This would make the date of lambing about the middle of May, which is earlier than during previous years. Summer and winter range boundaries have been established for this herd. However, to avoid duplication, these areas will be described in detail and shown on a map in the P-R Completion Report for this project. Glenwood Canyon-Area No. 14: This is a large area extending from east of Glenwood Springs to west of New Castle. The herd winters and summers throughout the entire area. The only sheep I was able to get accurate counts on were those at Grizzly Creek in Glenwood Canyon. There were ten sheep (6 ewes, �- 75. 2 lambs and 2 rams) in this herd, Two of the ewes and a \-curl ram were caught and taken to the Research Pens in Ft. Collins for study. Both of the ewes captured had lambs during May, 1967; It appears that this herd also has a high mortality rate in the lamb to yearling.;.age class~ Georgetown-Empire Area No. 17: I was only able to make counts in this area on February 16 and 23. A total of 23 sheep (16 ewes, 4 lambs, and 3 ~-curl rams) was located in this area. Since only incomplete counts were made, no sex ratios have been calculated. The primary winter.range of this herd is in the rough, rocky outcroppings that border U.S. Highways 6 and 40 on the north side from Georgetown south to Dumont. Their summer range has not been defined. Bowen Pass-Clark's Peak: I was only able to make one trip into the area on the ground; however, I flew the area on three different occasions. The numbers and areas of occurrence of sheep observed are shown in Table 3. Table 3.--Bighorn Sheep Observations in Bowen Pass~Clark's Peak Area During 1966. Date Area July 8, 1966 Lead Mountain Mt. Cirrus Static Peak Specimen Mtn. Mt .. Cirrus Baker Mtn. August 16, 1966 September 15, 1966 March 17, 1967 Totals Rams Lambs 8 14 5 7 16 21 12 4 17 4 12 5 7 8 5 18 11 49 25 85 3 1 1 l Yearlings Uncl. Total Ewes l This herd appears to be quite healthy with a ewe:lamb ratio of 100:51. No yearling animals were observed. The reason for the lack of year1ings in the count is that most of the sheep were observed from the air making it difficult to distinguish yearlings from young ewes. Some of the summer and winter-range boundaries have been established for this herd; however, additional data are needed before describing the area in detail. Gore Range-Area 2: I have only been able to locate two herds of sheep in this area during the past two years. The sheep summer throughout the Gore Range Area; however, their winter ranges are restricted to small areas because of deep snows. It appears that this herd is gradually decreasing in size. Reliable counts by State Highway Department personnel revealed 27 ewes and lambs and 6 rams in 1963, and 16 ewes and lambs and 6 rams during 1964. These counts were made on the winter range. Winter counts in the same area during 1966-67 revealed only 2 ewes, 2 lambs and 3 rams. These sheep were all observed about one mile east of Vail Village. The only other sheep observed in this area was a small herd of nine (5 ewes, 2 lambs and 2 yea:rlings).above Upper Slate Lake on the northeast side of the Range. Mt. Evans-Geneva Creek .. Area No. 3: Only limited ;sightings of sheep were made ih this area. Counts made. in August and September revealed 17 rams and 5 ewes. The major ewe:lamb herds were not located during this work period. Additional time will be devoted to this area during the 1967 work period, �- 76 - Sangre de Cristo Range - Area No, 9: All counts in this area have been from the air. Either a Bell 47G3B Helicopter or PA-18 Super Cub was used on all flights. Numbers and areas of occurrence of sheep observed are shmm in Table 4, Table 4.--Bighorn Sheep Observations in the Sangre de Cristo Rangv:~ During 19t)3-66. Area Rams Ewes Lambs Yearlings Uncl, Total Date September 4, 1965 February 3, 1966 August 10, 1966 August 21, 1966 February 9, 1967 Totals Creston Needles Willow Creek Deadman Creek Deadman Creek Sand Creek Humboldt Peak Sand Creek Creston Creek Deadman Creek Alpine Creek 5 7 17 5 15 15 10 15 34 9 3 1 8 3 1 8 12 18 6 2 3 2 3 7 3 2 39 37 22 12 15 113 Although the counts in the Sangre de Cristo range are low and incomplete, it appears that the herd is quite healthy as evidenced by the ewe:lamb ratio of 100:59. This area is large and inaccessible and will require additional work before any definite conclusions can be drawn relative to the status of bighorn sheep in the area. ' Taylor River - Area No. 26: The Taylor area was closed to hunting in 1963. The area is quite accessible, and the ram population can be easily overshot. Counts made dc>.ring the 1966-67 work period indicated that a herd of about 30 sheep were present as follows: five 3/4-curl and larger rams, 5 \-curl rams, 2 yearling rams, 12 ewes and 4 lambs for a total unduplicated count of 28 sheep. The primary winter range of this herd is in the rough, rocky outcroppings along the west side of the Taylor River from about one mile north of Almont to about seven miles upriver. They summer at the higher elevations near Taylor Dam. The sheep were starting to move onto the lower reaches of their summer range as early as April 15 of this year, These areas will be described in detail and shown on a map in the final completion report for this project. Tarryall - Area No. 23: The bighorn sheep in this area did not move down onto the low elevation winter range in good numbers due to mild winter conditions. Two counts were made with a total of 26 sheep located as follows: nine rams, 12 ewes, 4 lambs and l yearling, Counts made in the area by department personnel during 1965 revealed approximately 70 sheep in the herd. It appears that this herd has had a very slow buildup in numbers since the big die-off in 1953, �- 77 During most years this herd winters in the low country along both sides of Tarryall Creek, from just below Tarryall Reservoir to about eleven miles downstream. They summer throughout the high country north of Tarryall Reservoir with some probably ranging as far northwest as the Kenosha Mountains. Population, Distribution and Herd Co:nposition of the Collegiate Range, Buffalo Peaks, Rampart Range, and Sheep Creek Bighorn Sheep Herds. The following information will complete the requirements of this job as it relates to the Collegiate Range, Rampart Range, Sheep Creek and Buffalo Peaks bighorn sheep herds. In the future, only data relating to determination of herd status will be gathered on all bighorn sheep herds in the state. All final reports such as this will be combined into a booklet and transmitted to the appropriate management personnel. Each of the above-mentioned areas will be considered separately. Collegiate Range; The collegiate Range sheep herd has decreased from good numbers of sheep during the 1950 1 s to an estimated population of less than 75 animals at the present time. It is speculated that the gradual decline in sheep numbers can be attributed partially to lungworm disease, but there are probably other factors affecting the herd. From the counts that have been made, it is apparent that there are a few sheep on each major mountain within the Range with the largest herds being found on Mr. Antero, Mt. Princeton and Mt. Yale. It appears that there is little movement by sheep between mountains except for a few rams that possibly move from one.mountain to another during the rut. Most ewes and lambs probably live out their entire lives on one major mountain. The numbers, areas and sex ratios of the sheep that have been observed in this area over the past two years are shown in Table 5. A ewe:lamb ratio of 100:36 was calculated for this herd during the 1966 work period. No ewe;yearling ratios were determined since only limited sightings and incomplete counts were made of the sheep in the range. Sightings of sheep by bighorn sheep hunters over the past two hunting seasons also have been scanty. Sixty hunters have sighted a total of 124 sheep, which is slightly over two sheep sighted per hunter per season. These counts indicate a low population density, also. Bighorn sheep are distributed throughout the Collegiate Range; however, population density is low when compared to the extent of available habitat. Since there are few sheep in the area, the best time to get an accurate count is during the winter months (November-February) when sheep are concentrated on low elevation winter range. It is recommended that sheep be transplanted into this area in an attempt to build up the herd. There is sufficient habitat to support a much larger sheep population than presently exists. �- 78 - Table 5.--B:i.~ho:rn Shee;e Observations in Co llE;tt iat,1 Ran~ei ,(uly 1965 . to J_u}y a 1967. Area Date Ra::ms Ewes Lambs Yearlings Uncl. Total July 7, 1965 August 6, 1965 August 24, 1965 December 1, 1965 April 26, 1965 August 19, 1966 December 14, 1966 February 9, 1967 April 3, 1967 July 3, 1967 Antero Mt. Princeton Mt. Antero Mt. Yale Mt. Harvard Mt. Yale Mt. Antero Mt. Shavano Mt. Shavano Mt. Antero Mt. Yale Mt. Princeton Cottonwood Creek Mt. Harvard 6 Mt. 4 3 1 l 1 1 8 5 1 10 2 2 7 l 1 5 2 2 1 1 10 2 2 4 4 N.t. Antt~ro Totals 6 8 3 4 13 5 2 1 1 1 36 13 3 10 l 2 5 67 Rampart Range Herd - Area No. 5: This small herd of sheep can generally be found within or in the near vicinity of Glen Eyrie on the northwest side of Colorado Springs. The herd ranges about as far north along the mountains as the Air Force Academy Property and the north end of Queen 1 s Canyon, the south end of which opens onto the Glen Eyrie Property. Although the sheep summer at the higher elevations near Northfield, they generally can be found at some time during every month of the year on the Glen Eyrie Property, During late fall and early spring from November to May, the herd winters along the south end of the Rampart Range on the Garden of the Gods, Glen Eyrie and Castle Concrete Quarry Properties. Accurate counts have been made of this herd during the last two years~ During the 1965-66 work period, there were 11 ewes and 6 rams present in this herd. No lambs were observed. There were 19 sheep (11 ewes~ 6 rams and 2 lambs) during the 1966-67 work period. Only one of the lambs survived to the yearlingage class, which leaves a ewe:lamb ratio of 100:9. An aerial count made on May 21, 1967, revealed three ewes and two lambs. The sheep were observed in the rough, rocky outcroppings on the north side of Queen 1 s Canyon about: one mile above Glen Eyrie. The lambs were quite small and probably were born within one week. This would make the lambing date for this herd somewhere around the middle of May. Although these sheep are quite tame and relatively unafraid of humans, they still selected the roughest terrain in their home range to have their lambs. Since all sheep in the herd appear tobe healthy, it is not known what is causing the low reproductive rate. One adult ewe was captured (immobilized with Sucostrin) and taken to the research center in Fort Collins for study. This sheep was heavily infested with lungworm (Protostrongylus spp.). The :results of the drug immobilization studies are shown in Table 6. This herd offers an ideal situation for proposed future experimental work with drugs for the control of lungworm in bighorn sheep. �Table 6,--Results of Drug Immobilization studies on Glen Eyrie Bighorn Sheep Herd, Injection Animal Est. Wt. Total Site Sex Age in lbs. Drug Dosage Date Results F 5 130-140 Sucostrin 14 mg. Right hip Observed one hour. No effect. F 4 125-135 Sucostrin 15 mg. Right hip Observed one hour. No effect. F 5 130-140 Sucostrin 16 mg. Right hip Observed one hour. No effect. March 18, 1967 F 5 130-140 Sucostrin 17 mg. Right hip Observed one hour. No effect, March 21, 1967 F 5 130-140 Sucostrin 18 mg. R. Front First ataxia shown at 11 minutes. Sheep assumed wide stance of hind legs, trembling in front shoulders, salivation, and lying down frequently. Able to rise and travel. Covered about one mile in one hour. Overcame drug in one hour, April 1, 1967 F 5 130-140 Sucostrin 19 mg. Right hip Observed for one hour. No effect. April 12, 1967 F 6 130-140 Sucostrin 21 mg. Top of hip Observed for one hour, No effect. April 15, 1967 F 7 135-145 Sucostrin 21 mg. Right hip The only effect observed was a possible slowing down. Stood 5 to 10 minutes without moving. April 16, 1967 F 4 125-135 Sucostrin 22 mg. Left hip Syringe was propelled by powder gun, which resulted in excessive bleeding. Ewe showed some effect as she left the main herd and bedded frequently, Completely recovered in one hour. April 25, 1967 F 8 *122 Sucostrin 25 mg. Right hip Ewe showed first ataxia at 6 min. Laid down at 6 and 8 min, Unable to rise at 9 min, Completely immobilized at 11 min. Not stable at 35 min, Able to hold head up at 40 min. Overcame drug completely in .one hour., 20 minutes. March 15, 1967 �Buffalo Peaks - Area No. 12: The Buffalo Peaks sheep herd has decreased from approximately 200 animals in 1954 to a dangerous lm.v of less than lO sb,eep at the present time. A total of 29 unduplicated sheep were located in tht~ area on April 26, 1966. Ten sheep (5 ewes, 3 yearlings, and 2 ½-curl rams) were sighted approximately two miles north of the summit of Weston Pass and 19 sheep (16 ewes and 3 yearlings) on Buffalo Peaks proper. This is a ewe:yearling ratic of 100:28. There was a ewe:lamb ratio in the area during August of 1965 of 100:88. From these data it was determined that there was a 60 percent mortality in the lamb to yearling~age class. Counts made in the Buffalo Peaks area over the past two years are shown in Table 7. Table 7.--Bighorn SheeE Observations on Buffalo Peaki~,wJulL 1965 to August, 1967. Date Area Rams Ewes Lambs Yearlings Uncl. Total July 8, 1965 July 23, 1965 August 25, 1965 April 26, 1966 July 1967 August: J, 1967 3 Totals Buffalo Peaks Buffalo Peaks Buffalo Pea:ks Horseshoe Mtn. Buffalo Peaks Buffalo Peaks Buffalo Peaks 2 2 7 5 11 10 11 14 2 6 10 5 3 3 28 20 10 19 16 16 8 24 4 1 5 69 35 8 6 120 From the questionnaire data, it was determined that bighorn sheep hunters sighted 169 and 149 sheep during the 1965 and 1966 sheep seasons, respectively. This is an overall average of 15.9 sheep sighted per hunter. This herd ranges over most of the Buffalo Peaks area above timberline during the summer months. Their winter range is more restricted. Some sheep winter on the high windblown slopes above timberline while others winter in the rough, rocky areas overlooking the Arkansas River. There is a small herd of sheep that range in the area north of Weston Pass; however, little is known about them. These sheep may move onto Buffalo Peaks cccasionally, but it is not known for sure. Poncha Pass - Area No. 20: The Poncha Pass Bighorn Sheep Herd has decreased in numbers over the past few years with the area being closed to hunting in 1965. Numerous counts have been made in this area over the past two years. The numbers of sheep observed and the areas of occurrence are shown in Table 8. It appears that there is a surplus of mature rams in the area; however, these sheep disappear during the fall months. It is not known where the rams go; but there is some thought that perhaps they move back and forth between the Cochetopa sheep area and Mt. Antero, a distance of about 20 miles. More infonnation is needed before the herd can be properly managed. The high counts on each of the mountains shown in Table 8 are probably close to upper population limits of the herd. This small herd of sheep ranges primarily on Peleon, Chipeta and Antero Mountains throughout most months of the year. �- 81 Table 8. 0 B:ighorn Sheep Observat:ions in .the ~oncha Pass Range during 1965-66. Date Area Rams Ewes Lambs Yearlings Uncl. ··total July 6, 1965 August 6, 1965 October 25, 1965 August 19, 1966 August 7, 1966 August 3, 1967 January 14, 1966 Peleon Antero Peak Antero Peak Antero Peak Antero Peak Chipeta Antero Peak Antero Peak Chipeta Chipeta Totals 2 2 1 5 5 5 3 l 3 11 8 l 9 2 11 9 t '. 1 6 5 7 1 3 5 1 45 31 8 17 11 6 13 4 9 4 2 86 It is recommended that this herd have priority in any future transplants of sheep. Although the area is small, it will support a much larger bighorn sheep herd. than presently exists. Sheep Creek - Area No, 10: The Sheep Creek Herd probably represents the second largest sheep herd in the state, numbering approximately 125 head. Counts made in the area during the last two years are shown in Table 9. Table 9,--Bighorn Sheep Observations in the ,Sheep Greek Area Durin.g 1965-66. Date Area Rams Ewes Lambs Yearlings Uncl. Total December 22, 1965 January 14, 1966 April 27, 1966 Tr.ickle Mtn. 12 27 Dabney Ranch 6 Pass Creek 5 4 May 4, 1966 Trickle Mtn. 5 December 14, 1966 Trickle Mtn. Trickle Mtn. Totals 47 11 8 14 1 11 4 9 27 6 26 35 106 36 5 12 5 19 48 10 47 182 The ewe:lamb ratio is 100:33, which is probably low since it was difficult to distinguish the young non-bearing female animals from adult ewes. On March 14, 1967, Errol Ryland, Southwest Game :Biologist, counted 98 sheep in the vicinity of Trickle Mountain, of which eight were rams. Bighorn sheep questionnaire information estimated that hunters sighted a total of 414 and 246 bighorn sheep during the 1965 and 1966 bighorn sheep seasons~ respectively. This is an overall average of 34.6 sheep sighted per hunter. The primary winter range of this herd is on Trickle Mountain and along Saguache Creek, which borders the south side of Trickle Mountain. This area is located a.bout eight miles west of Saguache,. Colorado, on the north side of State Highway 114. Most of this herd's winter range is on B .L.M$ ground, except for that ground that borders Sagtiache creek, which is privately �- 82 owned. Intensive paced-Parker winter range transects have been conducted in this area. These data are available in the P-R Quarterly Reports for 1965. The herd has an extensive summer range at the higher elevations that extends from the old Cochetopa Pass Road north to beyond the North Pass Creek Road. Bighorn Sheep Questionnaire Information and Recommendations After the 1966 bighorn sheep season (August 28, to September 18, and from November 19, to November 30), a letter and questionnaire were sent to each licenseholder (Appendix A and B). A total of 285 questionnaires was sent out of which 259, or 91 percent were returned. The primary purpose of the questionnaire was to obtain information on bighorn sheep distribution and numbers over a period of years. When sufficient information is available, it will be coordinated with the bighorn sheep management plan for the state. These data will also be used to compare and/or supplement data collected by Game, Fish and Parks Department personnel. This survey estimated that 33 sheep were taken during the 1966 season for a hunter success of 11.6 percent. The bighorn sheep kill by management area is shown in Table 10. The success ratio is low when considering actual numbers of sheep harvested. However, if we consider the quality of the sheep bagged, the season was a tremendous success. In order to get information relative to the age and size of rams making up the harvest, a number of the sheep heads taken by hunters during the 1966 season were measured and a trophy score established for each, By referring to Table 11, it can be seen that rams harvested ranged from 137\ to 171 trophy points. As a comparison, a ram has to score a minimum of 175 points to be eligible for entry in the Boone and Crockett Record Book. There are 251 bighorn sheep listed in the 1964 edition of the record book, of which ten are from Colorado. Almost all of the rams taken during the 1966 season were six years old or older. This is desirable in that the old mature rams· are being harvested, _leaving the young rams for breeding purposes. Sheep taken ranged from large trophy rams with horns that measured 38 inches along the outside curve to those with horns that measured 28 inches along the outside curve. As can be seen in Table 12, only five of the 30 rams measured during the 1966 season had horns less than 28 inches along the outside curve~ Each hunter was asked to indicate how many legal rams, small rams, ewes and lambs he saw during his hunt. In addition the hunter was asked to mark on an enclosed map where he observed mountain sheep. Table 13 furnishes a summary of hunting pressure and bighorn sheep hunter observations by management area, The successful applicants for bighorn sheep permits are separated into three groups under the main heading "HUNTERS": (1) hunters reported hunting in the area, (2) Non-hunter (did not hunt for some reason) and �TaJ2~\!. 10.--Bi~horn SheeE gue~tionnaire Information 2 1966 Bi~horn _Sh~ Season. Sheep Hunter Sheep Deer No. of Area Killed Success Wounded Killed Permits No. 15 16 Poudre River Gore Range Mt. Evans-Geneva Cr. South Platte Pikes Peak Sangre de Cristo Sheep Creek Collegiate Range Buffalo Peaks Glenwood Sheep Mounta:i.n Cimarona Peak 17 Georgetown-Empire- 12 19 21 22 23 Bowen Pass-Clarks Pk. Cow Creek San Luis Peak Mccurdy Mountain Battlement Mesa Wett:erhorn Peak Vallecito Blanco River _24 l 2 3 4 6 9 10 11 12 14 24 25 28 29 30 Lizard Head Pass Total 24 2 25 8.3 12.0 0 0 9 8 27. 7 0 41.6 2 5 3 0 2 2 1 2 0 0 36 3 10 12 12 0 5 20 s.o 3 12 1 1 8.3 30 0 0 0 0 10 1 5 6 6 0 10.0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 6 16.6 25.0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 33.3 8 6 6 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 285 33 187.8 8 36 0 0 4 5 10 6 0 0 0 2 2 1 l 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Mountain Goats 11 - Collegiate Range - 7 3 Goats Sighted 42.8 - 0 0 0 0 236 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 239 8] �:Xable 11.--Measurements and _T!oehi Scores of Bighorn Ram Heads Taken Durir1g the 1966 Season. Specimen No. Location of Kill Curl l 4 Pikes Peak Pikes Peak Mt, Evans Mt, Evans Mt. Evans Pikes Peak Mt. Evans Mt. Evans Mt. Evans Mt. Evans Bowen Pass Unknown *30 30 33 34 3/4 35 1/4 29 1/2 31 1/2 33 1/2 33 1/2 31 ·36 1/2 30 1/2 5 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 * All Measurements given in inches. Measurements of Lon~est Horn Base l qt. 2 qt. 14 15 1/4 14 1/2 14 14 3/4 13 1/2 14 15 3/4 14 1/2 15 14 1/4 14 1/2 13 3/4 12 1/2 13 3/4 13 1/4 14 1/4 11 1/2 13 3/4 14 1/4 14 14 1/2 14 14 1/2 10 1/2 8 3/4 11 1/4 13 12 1/2 9 12 3/4 11 3/4 11 3/4 11 3/4 12 1/2 12 1/4 3 qt. 7 1/4 5 6 10 1/4 5 1/4 5 1/4 8 3/4 7 7 1/2 6 1/2 8 1/4 8 Trophy S-core Estimated Age 150 142 1/2 157 164 1/2 164 137 1/2 161 1/2 164 1/2 162 1/2 157 1/2 171 159 6 6 6 13 15 8 8 15 9 ~ �Table 12. --Horn Measurements of Bi~horn Shee:e Killed Durin~ the 1966 Season. Area Right Horn Left Horn Lgth. Circum. Lgth. Circum. No. l Poudre 2 Gore Range 3 Mt, Evans-Geneva Creek 6 Pikes Peak 10 12 17 Sangre de Cristo Sheep Creek Buffalo Peaks Georgetown-Empire 19 Bowen Pass-Clark's Peak 9 24 Battlement Mesa A11 m easurements given in inches. 15 1/2 38 36 25 25 1/4 15 30 14 1/2 30 32 14 1/2 32 3/4 curl, no measurements given 31 16 31 35 1/4 14 3/4 35 3/4 curl, no measurements given 23 23 13 33 1/2 14 1/2 33 1/2 33 15 1/4 33 28 13 7 /8 28 34 1/2 34 1/2 16 1/2 29 1/2 31 15 1/2 29 15 1/4 28 3/4 30 15 1/4 30 29 1/2 29 1/2 13 1/2 26 1/2 14 3/4 30 1/4 30 30 14 30 14 1/4 29 1/2 29 1/2 30 15 32 1/4 14 1/2 30 3/4 26 14 1/2 26 1/2 29 29 14 1/4 14 1/2 36 1/2 33 1/2 29 28 1/2 13 32 32 14 1/8 13 1/2 29 3/8 27 1/4 31 31 15 1/2 2 inches better than 1/2 curl 15 15 14 1/2 14 1/2 Spread 21 3/4 19 18 16 14 3/4 13 14 1/2 15 1/4 14 16 1/2 15 1/2 15 1/8 15 1/4 13 1/2 14 5/8 14 14 15 14 1/2 14 1/2 14 14 1/2 13 14 13 1/2 14 1/2 19 22 22 21 21 19 14 5/8 19 20 21 1/2 15 16 1/2 28 24 0) vr �Table 13.- .. Bi~horn SheeE Hunter Observations~ 1966 Season, Hunters NonHunted Hunters Area No. 1 2 3 4 6 9 10 11 12 14 15 16 17 19 21 22 23 24 25· Location Poudre Gore Range Mt. ,Evans Geneva Creek South Platte Pikes Peak Sangre de Cristo Sheep Creek Collegiate Range Buffalo Peaks Glenwood Canon Sheep Mountain Cimarona Peak Georgetown-Empire Bowen PassClark I s Peak Cow Creek San Luis Peak Mccurdy Mountain Battlement Mesa Wetterhorn Peak Vallecito Blanco River Lizard Head Obser. Sheep 20 22 2 19 10 26 10 1 24 9 l 11 17 1 11 19 2 10 Rams Ewes Lambs Total 16 15 91 8 447 38 208 15 762 76 .8 .7 4.6 .4 22,4 1. 7 10.4 71 73 17 270 217 131 l 46 75 17 2,7 .1 70 36 2.8 1.7 5.9 2.1 1.0 .2 2.0 10.4 21.7 16.4 8.0 15.l s.o 180 152 136 545 271 361 303 246 6,4 32.8 1,9 9.3 15.9 •3 0 .5 11.4 .4 29.3 16.2 8.5 3.3 A 16.9 2.6 50.3 28.0 1 14.3 g 3 8 65 2 40 9 5 20 ,4 1.4 11 176 2 7 81 10 24 25 102 21 17 2 2.0 2.1 15 34 19 12 6 108 31 61 20 23 47 13 208 58 95 37 37 6 l.9 1.0 .7 .3 ,3 .5 4.0 0 26 .3 0 5 12 19 3 2 112 so 169 3.6 18.7 10.0 1,8 2.5 38.1 3.5 21.0 27 .1 27. 3 2 2 4 3 0 4.:~ 0 .2 5.2 0 22 14 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 316 457 2204 897 388/+ 1. 3 1.9 9.0 3.7 15.9 300 i~2281 2581 'k*l, 7 2 2 4 3 9 6 3 4 1 3 3 l 33 2 .7 Total 5.7 10.3 15. 3 2.2 3.8 ,3 4.4 2.8 9 3 2 5 1 26 0 Totals 24.5 13 167 1965 - Total 180 6 136 - 140 9 3 0 ~~" 1.8 1.8 2 2 .,.,............... 13 302 0 ,2 0 ,5 6 5 4 LI 13 3.9 1.9 6 2 2 ., =--.. 84 8 4.2 5 1 30 36 114 2 8 5 5 28 29 Shee,2 eer hunter C%L Legal Small Rams Rams Ewes Lambs Rams 7 9 27 No. Sheee Observed Legal Small 17 5 8 l.5 1.0 .5 4.3 4.3 .6 10.9 19.3 23.8 1.3 4.1 6,2 .3 ,8 ,6 5.2 8,8 ,8 ....,...,,,,.~,,,_,,_.,o;,._.,_ * Includes ewes, lambs and small or illegal rams. ** Includes all rams, 1/2-curl (legal in 1965) and larger. 12.7 14,3 I �- 87 (3) observed sheep (those hunters that saw sheep during the regular season). The number of sheep observed, and the average number of sheep observed per hunter is based on those hunters that saw sheep, as well as those hunters that hunted but did not see sheep. A total of 3,884 sheep was sighted by 167 hunters for an average of 23.3 sheep sighted per hunter. This is an increase over the 19.0 sheep sighted per hunter during the 1965 season. Although the hunter count cannot be taken verbatim, they can be used to indicate a trend in sheep numbers over a period of years. Average number of days spent in the field by all hunters during the 1966 season was 6.7 days, as compared to 6.4 days during the 1965 season. Number of days hunted ranged from 1 to 18 days. A total of 1,584 man days of effort was expended by sheep hunters during the regular season. The sucessful hunter spent, on the average, 5.6 days hunting--while the unsuccessful hunter spent almost seven days trying to locate a legal ram. Although the unsuccessful hunter spent on the average seven days' hunting during both 1965 and 1966 seasons, the successful hunter spent an average of 1.4 days longer during the 1966 season than in 1965. This is probably the result of hunters passing up the smaller !,-curl rams (legal during 1965) in an attempt to bag the more wary 3/4-curl and larger rams. Thirteen of the permittees did not hunt for various reasons. A number of hunters thought that we should have a longer season. However, from the above information, it can be seen that hunters untilized only slightly more than one-third of the 23-day season. Of the 259 questionnaires returned 245 of the permittees reported that they hunted during the season. The survey indicates that eight of the hunters w,.,,.mded rams but were unable to locate the animal and make a kill. This is a wounding loss of 24.2 percent. Before the questionnaire was sent, there was some thought that perhaps only the more experienced sheep hunters were making the majority of the kills. This line of reason was not supported by the survey. Seventy-four percent of the permittees were hunting bighorn sheep for the first time. Twenty-one of the 33 rams taken were killed by first-year hunters. The number of years that individuals had hunted bighorn sheep ranged from one to eleven years. Four hunters reported that they had taken five rams in Colorado. Bighorn sheep license holders were allowed to take one antlered deer in the area in which they had a sheep permit. It was determined that only 36 hunters or 14 percent reported taking a deer during the bighorn sheep season. Thirty-one of the 36 bucks taken had four-point or better antlers. Again this year a number of bighorn sheep hunters complained about the trophy-buck season which opened concurrently with the bighorn sheep season, particularly in the Sangre de Cristo Range, Gore Range, Sheep Mountain area, Cimmarron Peak Area, and the Bowen-Clark's Peak Area. Perhaps if the opening date of the trophy-buck season was delayed for one week, it would remedy this situation and also give the bighorn sheep hunter a better chance of killing a ram. �- li8 A question '""'s included to get information on numbers and distribution of known goat herds, as well as new herds. There were 236 mountain goat sightings reported by hunters in the Collegiate Range. Seventeen of the 28 hunters reported seeing goats in this area for an average of 14.8 goats sighted per hunter. Only four sightings of goats were made in the Mt. Evans Area, three at Bear Tracks Lake and one at Summit Lake. No new herds were reported; however, the hunter counts in the Collegiate Range were close to those made in the area by department personnel. A common comment throughout the questionnaire was the fact that the hunters were very much in favor of the 3/4-curl requirement on rams. Most hunters agreed that we should be hunting sheep on a quality rather than a quantity basis. Only one hunter reported that he was hunting for meat. Also, a number of hunters stated that bighorn sheep hunting should be for Colorado residents only. The general trend of comments ranged from the thought 'we were doing a fine job of managing our bighorn sheep, to those few hunters who believed we were doing a poor job. Some hunters thought we should have fewer permits in certain areas. Other comments included: too much domestic-sheep grazing on bighorn sheep ranges, some areas should be closed; should have longer and later seasons, etc. A number of other interesting remarks and suggestions were made under the comments part of the questionnaire; however, they are too numerous to mention here. The questionnaire will be made available to anyone wishing more specific information about particular areas~ Recommendations These recommendations are based on personal observations as well as information obtained from the survey and are intended to supplement information collected by management personnel. I was able to make good counts in some areas, while no counts were made in others. Each sheep hunting area will be considered separately. 3 Area 1 - Poudre: No counts were made in this area; however, from the survey data it would appear that the legal ram population is not large. A total of 16 legal ram~ were sighted by 20 hunters during the sheep season. Twentyfour permits were allowed with two sheep being killed in 1966. I would recommend lowering the number of permits in this area in view of the survey data. Area 2 - Gore Range: The Gore Range sheep population has never been large; however, it has been able to sustain a small herd for a number of years. There were three rams taken in the area during the 1966 season, which brings the total number of rams killed in the Gore Range to five. Helicopter and ground counts in the area during February revealed the following: 2 legal rams, 1 ~-curl ram, 7 ewes, 4 lambs and 2 yearlings for a total of 16. Twenty-two hunters saw a total of 15 legal rams during the season. In view of the existing legal ram population, I would recommend lowering the number of permits (25) by at least one-half. �- 89 Date of Count February 7, 1967 February 24, 1967 Legal Rams Small Rams Ewes Lambs Yearlings 2 2 1 1 7 2 4 2 2 Total 16 7 Area 3 - Mt. Evans-Geneva Creek: There was some thought that if we went to the 3/4-curl requirement on rams we could raise the number of permits considerably without harming the ram population. It is apparent from the survey that with the increase in permits it is possible to seriously exploit the ram population in some areas. As an example the Mt. Evans area had 36 permits with 10 rams being killed. The ram population on Mt. Evans will not support a sustained annual harvest of 10 legal rams. Counts made in August revealed 12 legal rams on the northwest side of Mt. Evans. Twenty-six hunters saw a total of 71 legal rams. I would recommend lowering the permits by one-half for the 1967 season. Date of Count August 9, 1966· January 11, 1967 Legal Rams Small Rams Ewes Lambs Yearlings Total 12 3 3 18 1 1 2 4 Area 4 - South Platte: No counts were made in this area. From the survey data it appears that the legal-ram population in Area 4 is very low. Ten hunters saw one legal ram during season. The area also had one of the lowest ewe-lamb ratios reported. Therefore, I would recommend lowering the number of permits to five until more information has been obtained on the status of legal rams. Area 6 - Pikes Peak: This area had the greatest number of legal rams sighted per hunter, with a total of 46 legal rams sighted by 11 hunters. Twenty-one legal rams were counted in January, 1967. Since this area is small and easily accessible, I would recommend raising the number of permits to 15 for the 1967 season. Date of Count January 9, 1967 January 10, 1967 March 6, 1967 Legal Rams Small Rams 3 23 9 1 Ewes 11 Lambs 4 Yearlings 16 38 8 10 30 uncl. 1 Total 18 77 59 Area 9 - Sangre de Cristo: This area had the next to highest average of legal rams sighted per hunter. Seventy-five legal rams were located by 19 hunters. Helicopter counts made in the area during August and February revealed 12 legal rams each time. Twenty permits were allowed in 1966; however, only one ram was killed. I think the main reason for the low-hunter success is that the area is extremely rugged and inaccessible. I would recommend allowing 20 permits again.this year. �Date.of Count August 10, 1966 August 21, 1966 February 9, 1967 Le~al Rams Srr:iall Rams 10 12 12 Ewes Lambs 15 12 9 6 3 2 Yearlings Total 34 30 17 Area 10 - Sheep Creek: Nine hunters located 17 legal rams during season. I counted 5 legal and 7 1?~curl rams in this area in December, Some of the 1z-curl rams will be legal by fall, Only one ram was taken in this area during the 1966 season. I would recommend having 10 permits in this area again this fall. Also, I would recommend that the southern boundary of the area be extended to Saguache Greek. A number of hunters over the past two years have reported that the large rams were in this area during season. Date of Count December 12, 1965 January 14, 1966 April 27; 1966 May 4, 1966 December 14; 1966 Legal Rams Small Rams 7 3 5 2 5 Lambs 2 Ewes 27 6 14 5 27 5 4 26 12 2 Yearlin~s 8 Total 47 11 1 19 11 48 47 Area 11 - Collegiate R.ange: The Collegiate Range sheep population has decreased from a good number of sheep during the 50 1 s to dangerously low numbers at the present time. Of the 27 permittees that reported hunting in the Collegiate Range, only three observed sheep; and none of these were legal rams, I have only been able to locate 10 legal rams in the range. Therefore; I would recommend lowering the permits by at least one-half for the 1967 season, Date of Count August 24, 1965 December 1, 1965 April 26, 1966 February 9, 1967 Le~al Rams Small Rams Ewes Lambs Y!;arlings 3 3 2 2 8 3 Total 1 10 2 5 10 4 23 Area 12 - Buffalo Peaks: The Buffalo Peaks Sheep Herd has decreased from approximately 200.animals in 1954 to a dangerous low of less than 30 sheep at the present time. Ten hunters saw two legal rams of which one was killed. I have not been able to locate any legal rams over the past two years. r would recommend closing this area until sheep numbers justify another season or until we have more information on the area. Date of Count August 25, 1965 April 26, 1966 April 26, 1966 Lel'!ial Rams Small .Rams Ewes Lambs lO 5 iO 2 16 Yearl_in~s Total 20 10 3 3 19 �- 91 - Area 14 - Glenwood Canyon: No legal rams were sighted by hunters in this area. I was able to locate three legal rams in this area. Most of the hunters concentrated around the Grizzly Creek~No Name Creek Area, There are legal rams in this area; however, if a greater amount of the hunters' time was spent farther west in the Clinetop and Monument Area, I think we would get a better harvest. I would recommend having the same number of permits again this year. Date of Count December 10, 1965 October 14, 1966 October 18, 1966 Legal Rams 1 1 1 Small Rams 1 ~ 6 Lambs 2 5 2 Yearlings 1 Total 10 1 9 Area 15 - Sheep Mountain: Only one count was made in this area. One 3/4curl ram was located about 3 miles west of Wolf Creek Pass. Six hunters saw three legal rams and 11 small rams during season. I would recommend no more than six permits until more information is available. Area 16 - Cimmarona Peak: No counts were made in this area. Five hunters saw two legal and seven small rams during season. It appears that the ram population in this area is low. Therefore, I would recommend a conservative number of permits (5) until more information is available. Area 17 - Georgetown-Empire: I was unable to locate any legal rams in this area. Twelve hunters saw 24 legal and 25 small rams during season. I have reliable reports of at least 7 legal rams being sighted during 1966. Since this is a relatively small accessible area, I would recommend no more than 10 permits. Legal Rams February 13, 1966 February 16, 1967 Small Rams 2 3 Ewes 12 9 Lambs 3 l Yearlings Total 17 13 Area 19 - Bowen-Clarks Peak: A total of nine legal rams was located in this area. Nineteen hunters saw 34 legal and 19 small rams during season. There were six rams taken in area 19 this last season. Although there is possibly some interchange of rams from Rocky Mountain National Park, I don't believe the ar~a will support a yearly harvest this large. I would recommend reducing the permits by one-half in this area also. Date of Count July 8, 1966 August 16, 1966 March 17, 1967 12 Lambs 12 4 8 5 ~ 22 3 1 4 l l Yearlings 37 18 18 �- 92 - Area 21 - Cow Creek: No counts were made in this area. Three hunters saw a total of two legal rams and 12 small rams during season. I would recommend no more than five permits until more information is obtained. Area 22 - San Luis Peak: A total of 8 legal rams was observed in June of 1966. Four hunters reported seeing one legal and six small rams. Although there haven't been any sheep killed in this area during the last two years, I think it is because the hunters aren't finding the sheep. There are a number of legal rams in the area. I would recommend having 10 permits in this area in an attempt to harvest a few of the old mature rams. Date of Count June 23, 1966 Legal Rams Small Rams 8 Ewes Lambs 17 9 Yearlings 6 Total 40 Area 23 - Mccurdy Mountain: I cocated 4 legal rams and 6 small rams in this area during 1966. Nine hunters saw a total of three legal and nine small rams. This is a large area with few sheep. I wouldn't recommend more than 10 permits for the coming season. Date of Count November 22, 1965 December 22, 1966 January 11, 1967 Legal Rams Small Rams 2 2 Ewes 2 3 3 4 9 Lambs Yearlings 4 1 Total 4 6 20 Area 24 - Battlement Mesa: I was unable to make any counts in this area; however, George Jones counted three legal rams during June. Six hunters saw three legal rams and three small rams. Two sheep were killed. I would recommend going to the 3/4-curl requirement and allowing six permits for the 1967 season. Area 25 - Wetterhorn Peak: No counts were made in this area. From the survey it appears that the sheep_population is very low since eight hunters located only three small rams, two ewes and two lambs. I would recommend a low number of permits (5) until we have more information on sheep numbers. Area 28 - Vallecito: No counts were made in this area. No rams have been sighted by hunters in this area during the last two hunting seasons. I would recommend closing this area until we know more about the sheep population. Area 29 - Blanco River: No counts were made in this area. Five hunters saw one legal and 26 small rams during the 1966 season, and six hunters saw 21 legal rams during the 1965 season. It appears from the survey data that there are numerous rams present; however, until we have reliable information, I would recommend a conservative number of permits (6). �- 93 - Area 30 - Lizard Head: No counts were made in this area. Four hunters reported hurrl:ang in the area; however, no sheep or sheep sign was observed during the season. I would recommend closing Area 30 until we have more information on sheep numbers. Time has been set aside during the next , work period to survey the area. Prepared by: L. Dale Hibbs Researcher Candidate And: William H. Rutherford Wildlife Researcher Date: January, 1968 Approved by: Jack R. Grieb Project Leader �- 94 - APPENDIX A STATE OF COLORADO Department of Game, Fish & Parks Dear Bighorn Sheep Hunter: I am presently conducting some mountain sheep studies in the area in which you received a permit. Since you and the other permittees have probably spent a great deal of time in the area, both during and before season, you can probably supply me with information that would be impossible for me to obtain without your help. You can assist in this program by furnishing detailed information concerning your hunt on the enclosed questionnaire and map. It is important that you are as accurate as possible, as much of this information will be used in the future management of our bighorn sheep. Any information or suggestions that you may have concerning the present management of the sheep will be appreciated and considered. Please return the map and questionnaire in the stamped, addressed envelope at your ealiest convenience. Thank you for your cooperation. Sincerely, Dale Hibbs Bighorn Sheep Biologist DH:rs �- 95 APPENDIX B LICENSE NO •. _ _ _ _ _ __ BIGHORN SHEEP QUESTIONNAIRE 1. Were you successful in killing a ram? If so, what are the approximate horn measurements? No_ _ _ __ Yes_ _ __ Length around outside curve: Basal Circumference: R.H. _ _ _ _ __ L.H. _ _ _ _ __ L.H. _______ Widest Spread: R.H. _ _ _ _ __ 2. Approximately how many legal rams did you see during your hunt? 3. Approximately how many ewes and lambs did you see during your hunt? Small Rams No. Number_ __ ----- Ewes No.-"--- Lambs No.--- 4. How many days did you hunt? 5. Did you wound a ram and not get him? 6. Have you hunted bighorn sheep in Colorado other than this year? Number __________ Yes ---- No _ _ _ _ __ No ______ Yes ____ If so, how many years have you hunted sheep in Colorado, other than this year? Number of years _______ How many bighorn sheep have you killed in Colorado? 7. Number ·-------- As you know, sheep hunters were allowed to take one antlered deer during sheep season with a deer license. Did you kill a deer during sheep season? Yes____ No_ _ _ _ __ If so, how many points did your buck have? Right side.__________ Left side Widest Spread._________ ----------- 8. Did you see any mountain goats during your sheep hunt? No._______ Yes ·---- __________ If so, where and how many? Number._______ Location-_ 9. Would you please indicate on the enclosed map by an "X" the approximate location where you saw mountain sheep during your hunt. Also mar "K" where you made your kill. Remarks and suggestions--other comments concerning your sheep hunt. ��January, 1968 - 97 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO Project No. W-41-R-17 Work Plan No. 1 Title of Job: Period Covered: Personnel: Bighorn Sheep and Mountain Goat Investigations Job No. 13 Bighorn Sheep Habitat Studies June 1, 1966 to May 31, 1967 L. Dale Hibbs ABSTRACT No intensive paced-Parker range transects were conducted during the segment year, with work being confined to direct observation of plants and vegetative types utilized. On the Tarryall winter range, bighorn sheep were observed grazing yucca and blue grama grass. On the Rampart Range wintering area, observed sheep utilization occurred on Kentucky bluegrass, Arizona fescue, blue grama, mountain muhly, mountain mahogany, and Rocky Mountain maple. No stomach contents analyses were made, and 110 data on topography and terrain were collected during this segment. �- 98 - Objectives: (1) Detennine the vegetative types and vegetative composition on bighorn ranges~ (2) Determine forage preferences of bighorn sheep and the competition for foraga between this and other species. (3) Determine the topographic features of currently occupied bighorn ranges. Procedures: (1) Modified paced-Parker transects of 100 paces or points, using a 3/4 inch loop, were established in specific herd areas (listed, in part, in "location of work', Job No. 1 of this Work Plan). At least two transects are run in each vegetative type within known herd ranges to obtain vegetative composition. This procedure follows that described in the inter-agency cooperative big game range analysis condition transects (Chapter 8, Range Analysis Handbook, U,S,F,S,, Region ll.) for browse ranges, For alpine-tundra types a different fonn of paced transect is used, similar to that developed for the previous season's use in mountain goat ranges. It, also is a 100point paced transect but consists of a pair of them within 50 yards of each other, on which the actual hit is recorded; the nearest plant to a hit, if on litter, moss, bare soil, erosion pavement or rock; and the first, nearest utilized plant. This gives data for ground cover, composition and utilization, respectively. In addition, ten one-hundredth acre pellet group plots per transect are counted for an index to total range use. Condition and trend of the range are detennined from data recorded on a range fonn, as well as soil ratings, as indicated by the scorecard. Certain modifications may have to be made for alpine areas when data from several transects have been gathered and interpreted. Summer and winter range areas are sampled with transects. (2) Forage preferences are determined by two methods: (a) Visual estimates of utilization by species on the transect hits. (b) Analysis of stomach contents of hunter-harvested sheep. Two quart samples will be obtained wherever possible through the cooperation by hunters, and qualitative analyses on one quart will be performed by the point frame method (Chamard and Box, 1964). While utilization data may not indicate consumption by species of animal, the relative use of the area, as indicated by known or observed animal species, and pellet group counts, will be an indication of actual and potential competition which may exist. Pellet group data are gathered on ten one-hundredth acre plots per transect and are recorded on the back of the range fonn, �- 99 - (3) The topography and terrain of each herd area are determined from ground observation, aerial photographs and contour maps. These data are recorded on a field form. Areas are planimetered from aerial photographs or available maps. Data recorded will include: area or herd name; specific location; herd altitudinal range; geologic formations, elevations, the areas they occupy and their percentages of the total study area; primary game species being studied; associated animal species; aerial photograph numbers; land status (National Forest, National Park, B.L.M., state, private, and total acreages); comments; data; and investigator. A file will be made for each herd area, and range data sheets, type maps, aerial photographs, and other pertinent data will be maintained for each. Results Direct observation of vegative types utilized and individual plants grazed and browsed by sheep were made during this work segment. No intensive paced-Parker range transects were conducted. On January 11, 1967, a group of twenty sheep was observed for one full day on one of the key areas of the Tarryall winter sheep range. The area is located on the northwest side of Farnum Peak. During most winters, the Tarryall sheep herd winters in the low country along both sides of Tarryall Creek from just below Tarryall Reservoir to about eleven miles downstream. This particular herd fed extensively throughout the day on yucca (Yucca glauca) and blue grama grass (Bouteloua gracilis). Only the tips of the yucca plants were utilized by the sheep. It didn't appear that the sheep sought out the yucca plants but browsed them whenever they came in contact with them. The only other bighorn sheep on which utilization data were gathered was the Rampart Range herd. These sheep spend a great deal of time grazing on the Kentucky bluegrass(~ pratensis) lawns on the Glen Eyrie property, particularly during spring and early summer. Other plants utilized were Arizona fescue (Festuca arizonica), blue grams (Bouteloua gracilis), mountain muhly (Muhlenbergia montana), mountain mahogany (Cercocarpus montanus), and Rocky Mountain maple (Acer glabrum). Stomach contents samples were obtained from hunter-harvested sheep, but analyses were not made. Also, a search of the files failed to turn up any recorded data on topography and terrain in bighorn sheep herd areas. �- 100 - Literature Cited Chamard, Albert D. and T. w. Box, 1964. A point frame for sampling rumen contents. J. Wildl. Mgmt., 28(3):473-477• Prepared by: L. Dale Hibbs Researcher Candidate And: William H. Rutherford Wildlife Researcher Date: January, 1968 Approved by: Jack R. Grieb Project Leader �January, 1968 - 101 - JOB COMPLETION BEPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COIDRADO Project No. W-41-R-17 Work Plan No. 2 'ritle of Job: Bighorn Sheep and Mountain Goat Investigations Job No. ~- Mountain Goat Distribution 2 Populations and Herd Composition Period Covered: Ju,_~e 1, 1966 to May 31, 1967 Personnel: L. Dale Hibbs ABSTRACT Aerial and ground trend counts of mouni:;am goats in the Collegiate Range resulted in a total unduplicated count of 92 animals, with nanny: kid ratios ranging from 100:88 to 100:142. The estimated herd size if about 125. Bighorn sheep hunters reported an average of 14.8 goats sighted per hunter. With seven permits allowed, the 1965 goat kill in the Collegiate Range was three. Three goats were collected by the Denver Museum of Natural History in 1966. Stomach samples were obtained from all six goats, and weights and measurements were taken on the three goats collected by the Museum. The stomach samples have not been analyzed. Although only 13 goats were sighted on Mount Evans in 1966, it is believed that this herd numbers about 40--50 animals. No counts were made in the San Juan Mountains. Sutmner and winter ranges of the Collegiate Range goat herd have been delimited and mapped, and trend count routes have been established. Recommendations: 1. M3.ke aunual aerial and ground trend counts according to the prescribed routes and descriptions. 2. Conduct a1n,ual range checks in areas of heaviest goat use on Mount Shavano and Sheep Mountain, to determine when a herd decrease is necessary for proper range use_. 3. Initiate a trapping and transplanting program in the Mount Shavano and Sheep areas moving a few surplus animals each year from these herds into other desirable areas in the Collegiate Range. �- 102 - Objectives: 1. Determine mountain goat distribution. 2. Determine populations or trends. 3, Determine herd sex and age composition. 4. Prepare detailed range or distribution maps for specific herds with written descriptions for census procedures, and develop standardized forms which can be used by management personnel during routine census and for recording long-term census information. Procedures: 1. Distribution of mountain goats in Colorado was determined by aerial and ground observations in areas of known occupancy, unverified reports, and possible new distribution resulting from, and close to, established herds. Aerial observations were made from fixed-wing aircraft and helicopter; and ground observations were made primarily by foot or horseback, although trail vehicles, four-wheel drive vehicles and conventional vehicles were used whenever conditions allowed. Observational data were recorded on fiel_d forms developed for this project. These forms also will serve for other portions of this job. Data recorded included date; observer; game management unit number; herd or area· designation; manner of making observations; time and number of adult male·s and females, yearlings, young, tmclassified, and totals; elevation; vegetative type; general activity; associated animal species; aerial photo number, if known or available; and comments. A distribution map will be prepared from these data to add to information already on Figure 1: Forest Service maps, scaled two inches per mile, will be used where available. In districts where these large-scale maps have not been prepared, the ½-inch per mile maps will be used, 2. Attempts were made to obtain as complete a population census as possible in each area studied, or at least to establish a uniform coverage and counting procedure to provide reliable data from which to determine trends from year to year. These counts are made in conjunction with the distribution observations described under Procedure 1, and recorded on the prepared form. Counts are to be attempted under as nearly comparable. situations as possible in succeeding years. Population data will be graphed for each herd or area. �- 103 - 3. In conjunction with the two preceding objectives and procedures, herds observed will be classified by billies, nannies, yearlings, kids and unclassified, and totals for sex and age structure data. These data will enable us to determine productivity, survival and general herd health, on which sound management plans may be based. ��- 105 Mountain Goat Distribution, Populations and Herd Com;position L. Dale Hibbs William H. Rutherford Activity on this job during the 1966 work period was concerned primarily with attem;pting to locate mountain goat herds in the Collegiate Range, San Juan Mountains and on Mount Evans. Each of the three areas mentioned will be considered separately. Collegiate Range: Aerial and ground trend counts and limited field observations were made of the mountain goats in the Collegiate Range. The number, sexes and areas of occurrence of the mountain goats located during · the 1966 work period are shown in Table 1. The nanny: kid ratio for the Mount Shavano herd was 100:142. The nanny: yearling ratio for the Mount Shavano herd was 100:58 which may be low, since it was difficult to distinguish yearling from two-year-old goats. The Sheep Mountain herd had a nanny: kid ratio of 100:110 which is also high when compared to herds in other states. Information obtained from the bighorn sheep questionnaire indicated that bighorn sheep hunters had sighted 236 mountain goats. Seventeen of the 28 bighorn sheep hunters reported seeing goats·in the area for an average of 14.8 goats sighted per hunter. No new herds were reported; however, the hunter counts in the Collegiate Range were comparable to those made in the area by department personnel. �- 106 - Table l. Mountain Goat Observations During 1966 Adult Male Female Area Yearling Kid :Jnclassified Total 33 33 42 45 8 23 Mt. Shavano March 13, 1966 2 May 26~ 1966 July 20, 1966 August 6, 1966 3 December 16, 1966 February 8, 1967 5 Sheep Mountain June 16, 1966 July 20, 1966 August 6, 1966 December 16, 1966 4 February 8, 1967 3 March 2, 1967 1 2 12 7 *17 6 12 6 17 7 4 3 2 8 2 7 l 3 3 9 3 4 10 1 5 3 9 1 3 ~''*10 5 3 5 12 7 6 5 23 33 l 2 5 5 Princeton June 16, 1966 1 4 July 20, 1966 4 August 6, 1966 December 16, 1966 3 February 8, 1967 1 29 l 4 4 3 l Jones Mountain June 16, 1966 3 December 16, 1966 l 3 1 Antero Peak .July 20 1 1966 7 February 8, 1966 3 7 3 Mt. Evans ·- /,.H !.USt 9 2 3 4 4 Totals 47 64 43 74 1966 Includes five sets of twins **~'<: Includes one set of twins 13 72 300 �- 107 - The third mountain goat season was held in August, 1965, with seven permits allowed in specified areas of the Collegiate Range, Three adult male goats were harvested during this season, They we.re all large goats with horns that ranged from 8 3/8 to 9 inches long when measured along the outside curve of the horns. Samples of lungs, stomach, large intestine and small intestine were obtained from all of these goats. On September 26, 1966, three goats were collected by personnel of the Denver Museum of Natural History. The collection was made on Sheep Mountain and consisted of one adult male, one adult female, and one male kid. A complete set of samples was taken from each goat. The weights and measurements of the goats are shown in Table 2. Samples taken from the goats have not been analyzed. Table 2" Spec No. Weights and Measurements of Goats Collected by Denver Museum in the Collegiate Range, September, 1966 Age in Months Total Tail Sex Length Len~th Ear Shoulder Len~th Len~th Right Horn Lgth. Base Left Horn Lgth. Base Approx. Wei~ht 1 48 M sz~'( 5 5 34 8 7 /8 4 7 /8 8 7 /8 4 7 /8 180 2 48+ F 53 3~ 5 30~ 8 7 /8 4 9 3 7 /8 122 38\ 2 2 3/4 23 l···...,,,,..,1/2 .,·,· 2 1 1/2 2 50 4 3 =.. -- M c,,r- ~•··"""""'"" .... • ,n<W,- , 3/4 ~ .. •'-All measurements given in inches. Mount Evans: I was able to make only one count in the a.rea during No ground counts were made. I located 13 goats (Two adult males, three adult females, four kids, and four yearlings) in the Owl's Head burn area on August 9, 1966. There have been numerous sightings of goats on Mount Evans since their release in 1961, but it is extremely difficult to estimate the total number of goats present on the basis of available information. Additional time will be devoted during the 1967 work period in attempting to determine the status of mountain goats in this area. the 1966 work period, and this was from a helicopter. A question was included on the Bighorn Questionnaire to obtain information on numbers and distribution of known goat herds, as well as new herdso Only four sightings of goats were made in the Mount Evans area by bighorn sheep hunters, three at Bear Tracks Lake and one at Summit Lake. From the information available, there is reason to believe that there is a herd of at least 40 to 50 goats on Mount Evans at the present time. San Ju.an: No counts were made in this area during the work period. �- 108 It appears that the goats have moved out of the transplant area; however, their present distribution is not known. Little can be said concerning the status of mountain goats in the San Juans until additional information is obtained. The following information will complete the requirements of this job as it relates to the Collegiate Range Herd. In the future, only data relating to determination of herd status will be gathered and presented in the annual completion report. When data are gathered on all mountain goat herds in the state, all final reports such as this will be combined into a booklet and transmitted to the appropriate management personnel. �COLLE GI E R GE Figur~ 1 -- Mountain goat distribution in Colorado s �- 110 - The Collegiate Range mountain goat herd constitutes the largest of the three transplanted herds in Colorado at the present time. From data collected in the area over the past four years, it is estimated that there are at least 125 goats in the Range. Aerial and ground trend count routes have been established for this herd. These counts have been made each ye,r for the past four years and should be continued to provide information on which to properly manage the herd. There is a definite upward population trend with nanny: kid ratios that are higher than any reported on by other states. By referring to Table 1, it can be seen that the Mount Shavano and Sheep Mountain herds (which are considered key herds since they contained 80% of the productive females) have nanny: kid ratios ranging from as low as 100:88 to as high as 100:142. Summer and winter distributional ranges have been established for the four major goat herds within the Collegiate Range. Each of the areas will be considered separately. Mount Shavano: Mount Shavano is the southernmost mountain in the Collegiate Range. The present herd of approximately 50 goats originated from a small plant of eight in 1948. Although it appears that this herd has had a slow build-up, this can probably be attributed to the critically small number of animals originally released. This small herd has barely been able to sustain its numbers due to natural mortality such as predators, old age, poaching, disease, parasites, accidental deathes, etc. Now that the herd has overcome this natural mortality factor, we are realizing a greater and more rapid increase in herd size. Trend count data, summarized in Table 3, indicated the rapid growth this herd has shown over the past four years. The herd more than doubled its numbers in the period 1963 to 1966. If the upward population trend continues, a herd decrease will be necessary in order to balance goat numbers with proper range use. This can be accomplished either by a liberal hunting season or a trapping and transplanting program. The Mount Shavano herd ranges throughout most of the area above timberline. The areas of most frequent use during the summer and fall months (June to October) are: the ridge between Squaw Creek and Brown's Creek at elevations from approximately 12,000 to 13,000 feet; the north side of Angel Gulch at elevations from �- 111 - app1'."oximately 12,000 to 13,000 feet; and the north and south side of Sand Gulch at an elevation £rom 11,500 to 12,500; and the McCoy Creek Basin at elevations from 11,500 to 13,500 feet (Figure 1). During the winter and.spring months (November to May), the Mount Shavano herd frequents the windswept ridges (12,000 to 13,000 feet elevation) above.timberline separating the major drainages (McCoy Creek, Squaw Creek, Broi;r;'n' s Creek, Angel Gulch and Red Gulch) or utilize the sheer rock outcroppings that slope into the North Fork of the South Arkansas River and Brown's Creek. Table 3. Mountain Goat classification counts on Mount Shavano, 1963-1966. Year Adult Male Female Kid Yearling Urtclassified Total Nanny;kid Ratio 1963 1 8 11 2 0 22 100:137 1964 3 9 8 l1 2 33 100:88 1%5 5 11 12 6 6 40 100:109 1966 8 12 17 7 6 so 100:142 Total 17 40 48 14 14 145 *100: 120 *Average for all four years. Sheee Mountain. The Sheep Mountain herd represents the largest single concentration of mountain goats in the Collegiate Range. From counts it is estimated that there are approximately sixty goats in the area. The highest single count in the Sheep Mountain area was forty. This count is low and imcomplete due to the large and diversified habitat this herd occupies. Much of their range is in the spruce-fir .forest below timberline, ma.king it likely that some of the goats were not counted when censusing the area. By referring to Table 1, it can he seen that the Sheep Mountain herd also has a high reproductive rate. Nanny: kid ratios over the past two years have ranged from 100:100 duringl965 to 100:110 during 1966. The classification and estimated population of goats in the Sheep Mountain Area is shown in Table 4. The Sheep Mountain herd has the· most extensive summer range of any of the herds studied. From Sheep Mountain (the eastern boundary of their range), the herd ranges west along Gladstone Ridge and Jones Mountain to the Continental Divide (Figure 2). Occasional sightings of lone males, which are probably part of the Sheep Mountain herd, have been made to the south along the Continental Divide. The winter range of this herd is restricted by deep snows during most winters wi most of the goats wintering in two sma.11 areas �r - , _ Winter Range Boundaries Boundaries Figure 2 -- The seasonal distribution of mountain goats on Sheep Mountain, Collegiate Range, Colorado �- 113 I along South Cottonwood Creek, These areas are shown in Figure 2. Both of the major wintering areas are located on south facing slopes and are composed of rough, rocky outcroppings. These areas remain relatively free of snow during most winter months. Table 4. Classification and numbers of Mountain Goats located on Sheep Mountain during the 1966 work period. Area Lower Sheep Mountain Upper Sheep Mountain Jones Mountain Mineral Basin Male Female Kid 5 3 2 2 10 10 11 10 Yearling Unclassified Total 0 0 33 28 7 5 2 2 Total 65 The only other goats that were observed regularly during this time were those on Mount Antero and Mount Princeton. The Mount Antero herd, which was comprised of five adult males, generally ranged throughout the area on the northwest side of Mount Antero. The group frequently ranged along the ridge on the east side of Baldwin Creek or in the meadow bordering this ridge on the west at approximately 12,300 feet elevation, The highest count made on Mount Princeton was seven adult males. These goats generally range throughout the area on the north side of Mount Princeton. However, they also use the area on the south side of Mount Princeton between Cascade Canon and Grouse Canon at approximately 12,800 feet elevation. Their summer and winter ranges are shown in Figure 3. There is some migration of adult males between the Mount Princeton and Sheep Mountain, and the Mount Antero and Mount Shavano goat herds. The period of greatest movement is during the rut in November and December. From the information available, it is estimated that there are at least 125 goats in the Collegiate Range at the present time. Trend Counts Annual trend counts were established for the key herds on Mount Shavano and Sheep Mountain. These herds were selected since they contained almost 80% of the goats in the Collegiate Range and were the only herds in which females were present. The best time of year to obtain accurate classification counts of the herds is during the first two weeks in July. By this time most of the nannies and their new have moved to the high slopes above timberline and have joined the yearlings and nannies without k1.ds. The k1.ds, yearUngs and adults can be dist1.ngu1.shed easily at thfa t1.me. �S1:c:11mer Range Boundaries Range Boundaries Figure 3 -- The seasonal distribution of mountain goats on Mt. Princeton, Collegiate Range, Colorado �- 115 .. The best time to obtain a total count of the goats in an area is during the last two weeks of November. At this time most of the lone males will have joined the herds of nannies, kids yearlings. Ground-trend counts are hampered by deep snow and coverage during most winters is limited to aerial surveys. Counts on two successive days in the Shavano area are necessary to obtain the desired herd coverage. The efficiency of ground counts is increased if the area is flown and the main goat concentrations determined before going into the area on foot. Generally, the morning of the first day is spent traveling to the area. The afternoon and evening then are spent attempting to locate goats. From daylight until evening of the next day the prescribed route is walked in an attempt to locate goats. When making ground-trend counts in the Sheep Mountain area, it was found that a previous flight was essential to determine where the main goat concentrations were before going into the area on foot. In the event that a plane is not available, ground counts from selected observation points can be made. However, it requires three to four days to cover the area. Aerial-trend counts should be conducted during the first two weeks in July for productivity information, and before and after the mountain goat hunting season in August and September. This can be accomplished in conjunction with the ground-trend counts conducted at the same time. Better results are obtained if the trend-count routes are flown on two consecutive days, thus reducing the chance of missing goats that are not counted the first day. One aerial-trend count should be conducted during the breeding season in late November to obtain an estimate of total goats. Data made available by the annual air and grolmd-trend counts will supply information needed to properly manage the Collegiate Range herd on a maximum sustained-yield basis. Prepared by: L. Dale Hibbs Researcher Candidate And: William H. Rutherford Wildlife Researcher Date: January, 1968 Approved by: Jack R. Grieb Project Leader ��- 117 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO ----====--=------ Project No. ___W~--4~1~-~R~-~1~7_ _ _ __ Work Plan No. 2 ----------- Title of Job: Bighorn Sheep and Mountain Goat Investigations Job No. - - - - ~ 5 ' - - - - - - - - - - Mountain Goat Habitat Studies Period Covered: June 1, 1966 to May 31, 1967 No intensive paced-Parker range transects were conducted on mountain goat ranges during this work period. The summer and winter distributional ranges have been established for the major herds in the Collegiate Range. In order to avoid duplication, these areas will be described in detail and shown on maps in the final completion report for this project. It is anticipated that intensive range condition and utilization transects will be conducted during the 1967 work period. Stomach samples were collected from the three hunter-killed goats, as well as the three goats collected by the Denver Museum of Natural History. These samples have not been analyzed. Prepared by: L. Dale Hibbs Researcher Candidate And: -----~W~i~l~l~i~a~m,--H=._R_u_t_h_e~r_f_or_d_ _ Wildlife Researcher Date: January, 1968 _____ ----==~<-..:;:,:.:c;;_ Approved by: Jack R. Grieb Project Leader �- 118 - Objectives: 1. 2. 3. Determine the vegetative types and vegetative composition on mountain goat ranges. Determine the forage preferences of mountain goats and the competition for forage between this and other species. Determine the topographic features of currently occupied mountain goat ranges. Procedures l. Modified paced-Parker transects of 100 hits, using a 3/4-inch loop, will be established in specific herd areas. At least two transects will be run in each vegetative type within known herd ranges to obtain vegetative composition. This procedure follows that described in the inter-agency cooperative big game range analysis condition transects (Chapter 8, Range Analysis Handbook, U.S.F.S., Region 11) for browse ranges. The alpine-tundra types will be sampled with a different modification of the paced transect developed for the previous season's use on mountain goat ranges. It is also a 100-point transect, but consists of a pair of them, acre pellet group plots per transect will be counted for an index to total range use9 Data will be recorded on a range analysis form prepared for this project. Condition and trend of the range will be determined from data recorded on the form, as well as soil ratings, as indicated by the score-card. Summer and winter range areas will be transected with paced transects. 2. Forage preferences are determined by two methods: a. b. Visual estimates of utilization by species on the transect hits, and Analysis of stomach contents of hunter-harvested goats. Two-quart samples were obtained whenever possible through the cooperation of hunters, and qualitative analyses were performed on one quart by the point frame method (Chamrad and Box, 1964). While utilization data may not indicate consumption by species of animals, the relative use of the area, as indicated by known or observed animal species, and pellet group counts, will be an indication of actual and potential competition which may exist. Pellet group data are gathered on two one-hundredth acre plots per transect and are recorded on the back of the range data form. �- 119 - 3. The topography and terrain of each herd area are determined from ground observations, aerial photographs and contour maps. Areas are planimetered from aerial photographs or available maps. Data recorded include area or herd name; specific location; herd altitudinal range; geologic formations, elevations (their areas and percentages of the study area): primary game species being studied; associated animal species; aerial photograph numbers; land status (National Forest, National Park, B.L.M., State, Private, and total acreages); comments; data; and investigator. A file was made for each herd area, and range data sheets, type maps, aerial photographs, and other pertinent data are maintained for each. Literature Cited Chamrad, Albert D. and T. W. Box, 1964. A point frame for sampling rumen contents. J. Wildl. Mgmt., 28 (3): 473-477. � https://cpw.cvlcollections.org/files/original/277fbd6d7517fdc9007583135f97c6e7.pdf 45c52233afee8f139940a280a15acdc9 PDF Text Text April, 1968 • - 1- JOB PROGRESS RESEARCH REPORT PROJECT SEGMENT State of. ~C~OL~O~RA~D~O~ _ Project No. ~W_-~3~7~-R~-~2~1~ _ Game Bird Survey _ Job. No. Work Plan No.__~l~ Title of Job: Period Covered: Personnel: Summarization April and Publication 1, 1967 through March 12 of Pheasant Research Findings 31, 1968 Wayne W. Sand fort , Michael R. Szymczak, Patrick J. Caldwell, Harold M. Swope Abstract Fine progress was made on this job with the completion of a detailed outline by Sandfort. A filing system, with several hundred expanding folders corresponding to the outline categories, was established. All information pertaining to pheasants in the Colorado P-R reports was extracted. With completion of the job of indexing all Colorado P-R reports (by Ken Porter), a 31 page bibliography became available. Lismof figures, tables and photographs these are not yet complete. desired were compiled -- though Considerable information on pheasant life history, weather records and agricultural statistics has been extracted from various sources. �- 2 - Objectives: 1. To complete development of a detailed manuscript outline. 2. To make a list of all tables, figures and photographs in the manuscript. 3. To compile 4. To secure the photographs 5. To prepare a bibliography of all reports relating research and management in Colorado. the data necessary to construct desired that will appear the tables and figures listed. for the manuscript. to studies on pheasant Procedures: The routine procedures normally used in developing outlines, literature and extracting pertinent data were followed. reviewing �- 3 SUMMARIZATION AND PUBLICATION OF PHEASANT RESEARCH FINDINGS Harold M. Swope I. The 13 major subjects in the initial outline were broken down under 64 sub-headings, which in turn were further divided into 256 categories. II. Tables, figures and photographs were made a part of the detailed outline. It will not be feasible to develop a complete list of these until materials and data have been compiled and analyzed. III. It was not possible to devote the time necessary to permit the extraction of data to complete tables and graphs. IV. A list of photographs desired was included with the detailed outline. Files have only been partially searched to determine the usable photographs currently available. Until it is known what is available, it will not be feasible to assign personnel to secure photos yet needed. V. The indexing of Colorado P-R reports was completed by Ken Porter. Additional material (published and unpublished) pertaining to pheasants in Colorado has been assembled and a bibliographic compilation made. VI. Considerable progress was made in several areas not listed as being segment objectives. 1. A filing system has been completed, with headings on several hundred expanding folders (corresponding to detailed outline), to accomodate assembled materials. 2. All material pertaining to pheasants has been extracted from Colorado's P-R reports. 3. The literature has been reviewed and material extracted 0;1. the following subjects: (a) behavior; (b) cover requirements and preferences; (c) food habits; (d) mouJt; (e) pesticides; (f) starvation and winter survival; (g) weights, measurements and bursa development. 4. The records have been searched and detailed weather data extracted from 9 stations in important Colorado pheasant ranges, 1947 - 1966. 5. Colorado agricultural statistics in important pheasant areas have been extracted and compiled. Prepared by: Harold M. Swope Wildlife Researcher ��April, 1968 - 5 JOB PROGRESS RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT COLORADO State of Project REPORT No. W-37-R-21 Work Plan No. 1 Game Bird Survey Job No. 14c of Environmental Factors Title of Job: Measurement Period April 1, 1967 through :M:lrch31, 1968 Covered: Personnel: (Hen Harvest) Gordon East, Lyle Bennett, Mike Stone, John Monarch, Kenneth Dillinger, Harold Swope, Warren Snyder. Larry Green, Abstract A sample incl~ding most of the roadsides in the two study areas revealed that roadwide cover averaged wider in the control than in the experimental area. Precipitation averaged well above normal in both areas in 1967· :M:ljoraccumulations occurred in late spring and early summer favoring pheasant production. Accompanying June hail storms were widespread in both areas. Noticeable reductions in pheasant numbers resulted in parts of southern Sedgwick County. No severe winter storms occurred during tbe winter of 1967-68. Spring growtb of winter wheat approximated that of previous years of study. Stubble beight and weed overstory beigbt were below average on tbe two areas wben compared with previous years. Plowing of wbeat stubble fields progressed abead of normal in 1967· Nearly all fields were completed by mid-:M:lY. Pbotos to record fall cover conditions were taken at tbirteen photo bub locations in November. �-6 - Objectives: To determine differences in vegetation, precipitation and other environmental factors between the experimental and control areas. Such differences can be related to pheasant populations as an aid in interpreting the effects of hen pheasant shooting. Techniques Used: Roadside cover width information was collected from cover type maps and from field reconnaissance where roadside widths had not been previously recorded. Precipitation was recorded by cooperating farmers at or near the four central township corners in'each of the two study areas. These farmers were contacted twice each year to transfer precipitation records. Transects for measuring vegetative vigor were established in two wheat fields at each corner of the study and control central townships. Fifty vegetative height measurements, one pace apart, were made along each transect during the period of vegetative growth. The last measurement was made late in summer to record stubble height and post-harvest residual weed growth. Twenty-six photos were taken during November to record roadside and field cover conditions at thirteen photo hub sites. Seven of these sites were in the experimental area and six in the control area. �-7 - MEASUREMENT OF ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS Warren D. Snyder Cover Mapping Percentages of various roadside cover widths were derived for comparison in the experimental and control hen harvest study areas (Table 1). A majority of the roadside edges within the two areas were included in the sample. The information reveals that control area roadsides averaged wider than those on the test area. The lower percent of the control in wheat and summer fallow is partially responsible for this difference. Farming in the west part of the control is less intense. It also has a higher amount of land in fenced pasture. Table 1. Cover Width (Feet) o 2 4 611 8 12 16 20 24 32 A comparison of roadside control study areas. Experimental cover widths Area Percent 10.76 26.37 18.78 7.03 10.59 13.17 10.59 0.60 1.45 0.66 100.00 in the experimental and Control Area of Occurrence 55.91 16.90 10.34 10.20 37.44 30.79 6.02 13.30 16.86 36.18 12.70 20.27 1.17 2.97 1.97 26.38 100.00 1/ The 6 foot width was used in only part of the sample. Climatic Information Table 2 shows monthly accumulations of precipitation recorded by cooperating farmers near the central township corners in each study area. Several of the cooperators did not keep accurate records, especially in winter. However, the records indicate that pattern and quantity of precipitation was similar on the two areas. �- 8 Table 2. Inches of precipitation study areas - 1967-68. recorded on the experimental Central Township Northwest Southwest Corner Northeast Month Southeast April May June July Aug. Sept. Oct. Nov. Dec. Jan. Feb. March 1.03 4.82 6.39 4.35 .62 .69 .45 .51 1.62 .17 .19 .04 Experimental Township 1.15 1.09 5.38 5.20 7.24 9.75 3.15 3.70 1.70 .65 1.14 .74 .37 .40 1.04 .85 .10 .30 .70 .47 .05 Total 20.88 20.96 April May June July Aug. Sept. Oct. Nov. Dec. Jan. Feb. March 1.25 7.41 4.61 1.66 .60 .76 5.30 5.55 1.48 .22 1.07 24.21 Control Area 1.21 5.18 5.89 1.21 .4·9 1.80 - 1/ - 1/ Total !i Incomplete _1/ and control Average .40 4.55 4.90 1.70 1.08 5.12 6.38 3.86 2.03 1.05 .54 .28 1.02 .04 .25 .10 _1/ 21. 75 2.06 6.51 8.05 1.63 .57 1.00 .60 .35 1.25 .03 .25 .06 22.36 records. A comparison of rainfall amounts during the May through August period reveals general similarities for the summers of 1965 through 1967 (Fig. 1). Mid and late summer pheasant reproduction was above average in the region during this same period. Hail was widespread in both study areas during June, 1967, (Fig. 2). Two severe storms hit parts of southern Sedgwick County. Reductions in pheasant populations in that area were noticeable during late summer production counts. Two farmers reported finding dead pheasants after the storms. Pheasants did not appear to be materially reduced in number in other less severely hailed localities. December was the only month of 1967-68 winter with significant snow accumulations. Severe cold temperatures delayed melting until mid-January. However, snow depths were not great nor did blizzard conditions exist. �-9 - 7 6 ''-. / i Io~ , ~' 5 <, I I .i-:" $1 r-c r " c / ,"v, 4 0 .,-1 .j...J I ClS .j...J p. 3 Q) \ \ / \ \ \ \ \ /; \ " 4-l 0 ,.c: \ ! !-< p... (Jl Q) --_. " 1/ .,-1 o , I , I, .,-1 '1;</\ 0,10, \ \ I \ \ 2 1 () C <.9 \ \ oJ> H \ \ \ \ 1 June May Figure l. "- .... - -- - - - July A comparison of average precipitation amounts harvest study areas from 1963 through 1967. Aug. on the hen �- 10 - Figure 2. Hailed during localities 1967. within the experimental and control study areas �- 11 - 100 90 , 80 / / ," 70 60 '""0 <IJ ~ 0 p.., .-I 1965 50 0 1965 -I-l ~ <IJ U H <IJ p.., 40 30 20 10 O~ __ -L 24 Figure 3. 26 Progress ~ __~ 28 30 ~ __~~ __-L 4 6 2 of spring plowing L- __ -L ,L-__ ~· 8 12 of wheat stubble 10 -L__~ 14 from 1963 through 16 1967. 18 �- 12 - Vegetative Growth Measurements Measurements of wheat growth were continued through the spring of 1967. Dry, warm weather started wheat growth early in March. Cold temperatures froze the wheat and retarded growth in April. Warmer temperatures and rainfall stimulated growth in late May. A comparison of wheat measurements on the two study areas is shown in Table 3. Differences between the two areas are not considered significant nor are 1967 growth patterns when compared with those of previous years of study. Table 3. Transect Wheat growth, stubble height and weed overstory measurements collected on the experimental and control area transects in 1967. Green Wheat Measurement Date 4-17 4-27 5-8 5-17 6-2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10.24 11.55 7.57 6.43 7.32 6.61 9.88 9.22 Average 8.60 Experimental Area Transects 11.57 13.21 16.49 27.81 10.14 13.77 17.70 26.98 11.56 8.98 14.57 24.35 8.33 10.47 14.75 24.82 7.36 10.55 14.15 23.33 11.17 9.78 14.14 23.67 11.33 10.06 14.65 24.61 11.69 12.78 17.55 27.29 11.45 9.74 15.50 25.36 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 4.67 6.79 8.58 10.53 6.20 7.63 8.62 10.14 Control Area Transects 11.24 8.37 8.50 7.20 8.91 11.21 11.57 10.42 13.87 10.58 10.88 12.63 11.86 9.01 14.60 10.07 11.29 14.15 11.22 9.07 14.44 11.18 10.43 15.03 Average 7.90 9.39 10.68 13.40 18.28 21.68 19.01 19.68 23.10 23.87 23.16 23.50 21.53 September, 1967 Stubble Weed Height Overs tory 10.46 8.68 9.04 10.78 7.92 6.72 21. 70 9.89 12.81 8.68 10.83 12.32 11.50 13.25 9.61 10.18 6.42 8.84 7.56 10.55 6.23 6.21 7.46 6.52 9.37 12.22 11.19 10.57 8.29 7.47 10.02 13.68 8.49 Stubble height was short in most parts of the areas (Table 3). Many fields were cut low because of hailed or storm-downed whea t. Persistent rains and slow ripening delayed harvest. This and dry August weather retarded late summer weed growth. Weed overs tory was considerably shorter than in preceeding years (Table 3). Plowing of Stubble Approximately 70 percent of the wheat stubble was worked by April 24, 1967. It was 85 to 90 percent complete by May 10. Figure 3 shows that spring plowing progressed ahead of the five year average. Little difference was noted between the two areas in 1967. �- 13 - Photo Hubs Photos were taken at established points, as in previous years, to illustrate and compare fall cover conditions. Little discernable difference could be observed in the five year records. Therefore this phase of study is being discontinued. Prepared by: Warren D. Snyder Assistant Researcher ��April, 1968 - 15 - JOB PROGRESS RESEARCH REPORT PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO Project No. W-37-R-2l ~--~~~~------------- Game Birds Survey Work Plan No. 1 Title of Job: population Period Covered: Personnel: Job No. Studies l4d (Hen Harvest) April 1, 1967 through March 31, 1968 Gordon East, Lyle Bennett, Mike Stone, John Monarch, Larry Green, Kenneth Dillinger, Harold Swope, Warren Snyder Abstract Pheasant populations were measured as part of the hen harvest study for the fifth consecutive year. An experimental and control area, each approximating 500 square miles, were used in the comparison. Pheasant populations continued to increase in 1967 on both areas. Spring counts showed 2.76 hens per cock, 3.23 birds per mile, and 65.3 as the average crowing rate per station on the test area. In comparison, average ratios of 2.16 hens per cock, 2.01 birds per mile, and 55.0 calls per station were obtained on the control. Birds per mile and spring population indices for the five year study period were plotted on a scatter diagram. The result closely approximated a straight line correlation. This provides confidence that the crowing index, sex ratio and birds per mile figures were all good indicators of population trend. Production counts showed an average of 4.67 young per hen on the test area. A higher index of 5.63 was obtained on the control. Birds per mile averages during production counts were near equal: 3.65 on the test area and 3.71 on the control. Peak fall population indices of 1,09~ and 842 were respective of populations on the test and control areas. The major period of hatch came in late June and early July, 1967. �- 16 Objectives: 1. To determine pre-treatment pheasant population levels within the study areas. 2. To determine changes in pheasant populations following hen pheasant shooting. 3. To determine causes of pheasant mortality from factors other than hunting. Procedures: The Kimball crowing-count method, as revised on three routes in each study area. in Colorado in 1953, was used Early morning and late evening surveys were used to determine during the spring breeding period. sex ratios Roadside brood counts were employed through August and into September. Hens, young and ~ockswere tallied on seven routes in each study area. The broods were flushed when possible during early morning and late evening periods. Age estimates were collected on clearly observed broods. Pheasant population indices were computed by applying the formula ? = C + CH for spring populations and P = C + CH + CHJ to derive fall indices. In these formulas C denotes the average crowing index, H is the average number of hens per cock from spring sex ratios, and Y is the average number of young per hen. �- 17 - POPULATION STUDIES Warren D. Snyder Spring sex ratio counts were completed in April of 1967. Counts indicated sex ratios began dropping in the control about the first of May. The few counts completed following that date were not used. Table 1 shows that ratios of hens per cock and birds ~er mile were both higher in the experimental area than in the control. This table also compares the hens per cock ratios obtained during 1967 with those of the previous four years. Table 1. Pheasant sex ratios obtained study areas, 1963 - 1967. C. Area E. C. E. C. E. C. E. Cocks Hens Total Hens/Cock Miles Birds/Mile 319 550 869 1.72 516 1.69 140 236 376 1.69 224 1.68 180 402 582 2.23 207 2.86 217 460 677 2.12 184 3.68 127 284 411 2.24 284 1.45 82 156 238 1.90 292 0.82 140 333 473 2.38 193 2~44 E. = 1967 1966 1965 1964 1963 Year and control in spring on the experimental C. E. 112 274 260 764 372 1038 2.32 2.78 321 180 2.06 3.23 185 405 590 2.16 294 2.01 C. = control. experimental. Weather conditions were unfavorable during the major and most critical part of the crowing count period. TI~is possibly lowered counts slightly in relation to those collected in previous years. Table 2 s~mmarizes the 1967 crowing count information. A comparison with previous years of study is shown in Table 3. Table 2. 1967 pheasant routes. crowing indices on the six hen pheasant harvest study Crowing Route East Experimental Central 31.5 51.4 62.8 23.7 64.5 52.4 48.0 48.6 11 - - - 62.8 '!:../ 47.2 64.9 West East Control Area Central 29.0 52.6 63.9 41.7 23.4 70.3 52.8 49.1 47.2 48.8 48.8 48.4 71.0 57.3 Area - - - - 46.8 68.2 - - - - - West 26.3 19.4 35.3 27.4 27.1 - - - - - - - - - 1/ The avera~e number of pheasant calls per station. 2/ The average number of calls using the highest count per station. 36.7 �- 18 Table 3. A comparison experimental of the 1963 through 1967 crowing count indices on the and control study routes. 1/ Crowing- Indices Area and Route 1963 1964 1965 1966 1967 Experimental East Central West 62.9 44.3 38.0 71.6 75.3 64.7 49.0 45.6 48.1 78.8 73.8 50.1 62.8 64.9 68.2 Average 48.1 70.5 47.6 67.6 65.3 Control East Central West 42.0 50.8 42.2 49.2 58.7 62.1 25.0 23.9 29.4 50.0 40.4 35.3 71.0 57.3 36.7 Average 45.0 56.7 26.1 41. 9 55.0 1/ Highest crowing index per station figures were averaged. The spring population index (P=C + CH) combines two variables; the crowing index and sex ratio, to provide a measure of population density. The birds-per-mile figure obtained during spring sex ratio counts can also be used as an index of pheasant density. The question arises as to how accurate are these population indicators? To test their quality, the spring population index was plotted against the birds-per-mile index on a scatter diagram. Figure 1 shows the approximation of a straight line correlation that resulted. Annual population changes on the two study areas were reflected in similar proportion by both indices. This apparent relationship provides confidence in the quality of the two population indicators. This relationship between birds-per-mile and the spring population index has management implications. If strict standards are used in collection and interpretation of the sex ratio data, the birds-per-mile index can supplement crowing count data. This would strengthen the spring density estimate and provide a better base for the fall population index. Use of a correlation line graph would be essential. Brood age estimates were used for determining the period and peak of hatch. Figure 2 indicates variables of hatch on the two study areas were similar. Weather conditions in the summer of 1967 paralleled those of 1966. Figure 3 shows that the period and peak of hatch also were close to those of the previous year. The number of young per hen was higher on the control than on the test area for the second consecutive year (Tables 4 and 5). For the first time since the study was initiated, the production birds-per-mile index was higher on the control. This indicates populations in the control have returned to levels equal to those in the experimental area. Fall population indices (Table 6) place the population level on the control below that on the test area. Spring indi.ces in 1968 may provide clarification as to which index more closely represented the actual population level. �19 - Oe-67 e-66 00 e-64 OC-64 OC-67 o >: Q) '"d ~ e-65 H ~::c: o U •..-l .!J+ CIl r-IU Oe-66 Oe-63 OC-63 ::l p.. II 0 p.., p.. CO ~ •..-l H c, 120 CJ) 110 100 90 80 70 0 0.5 1.0 1.5 Pheasants 2.0 per mile 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 (Spring) Figure 1. A scatter diagram showing the relationship of the spring population index to the index of pheasants per mile obtained in spring. e = experimental area; c = control area. �- 20 - ," I 50 I N ! u I m b ! ~, "I 40 e \ ~ \ :' r \ \.), o \ \ I \ f \ \ 30 \ B \ \ r \ 0 \ 0 \ I d - s 20 \ I I ,, ,, , I I \. , ~ \. I 10 ,, I '" I I I I 0 31 May Figure 2. 7 14 21 June The approximate age estimutes9 28 5 12 19 July 26 2 16 9 August period and peak of hatch based on brood Summer, 1967. 23 �30 , 1\ 1964-· . , 25 t' /, I " I I 20 l- \ I v. .I' }-.., I I / ,/ . ; , .• . /' "- "'"\.'- ' \ . \ .. . \ . "- -,.\ .. . ~ (Jl ... , \ . H) t::d I-i 0 0 . \. ,"\ :-1965 0 ". .. , ) .,. ·i ,/ , • ... ,, "- , ,. ,tt' I l=i c+ ,•\ 1966 ~.') I . ,: ,1/ I () (]) , " I / I-i 'I ), I 51- (]) If , 1963 -, / I-cJ ' , I I \ \ I I I \ , I I 10 l- . , I 15 t- , I Wc+ .. o , P"' (]) ~ .' o, I 1 , 2 , 3 May Fugure 3. e,l 4 I 1 2 June 3 , 4 , 1 I 2 , 3 I 4 , I I ~J , 1 2 3 4 1 July Aug. Approximate Weekly Period of Hatch Approximate hatching dates of pheasant broods from 1963 through 1966. , Sept. f\) f-' �- 22 - 1,200 1,100 1,000 F a 1 1 P 900 Experimental 800 I 700 0 P u 1 a t i "" ." ." I I 600 I 500 ... ., ... 400 , ,-" ,, ,, , 300 200 e 100 Control I I ,, I ,, " n I n d I I ,, 0 x ." , "" "" I I I 0 1963 1964 1965 1966 1967 Year Figure 4. Fall population indices on the experimental study areas from 1963 through 1967 and control �- 23 Table 4. Pheasant production data collected on the experimental and control study areas -- Summer, 1967. Minutes Miles Route 104.8 N. Brd Rte. E.Crow. Rte. 101.5 97.3 E.Brd. Rte. C. Brd. Rte. 103.8 C. Crow. Rte. 94.3 99.0 W. Brd. Rte. W. Crow. Rte. 100.0 415 460 455 375 370 470 415 700.7 2560 Young Per Hen Birds Per Mile Birds Per Minute Experimental Area 414 200 42 479 334 78 513 274 49 162 86 23 204 135 23 540 265 59 271 193 45 4.7 4.3 5.6 3.7 5.9 4.5 4.3 3.9 4.7 5.3 1.6 2.2 5.5 2.7 1.00 1.08 1.13 .43 .55 1.10 .65 2583 4.67 3.65 1.01 Hens 319 Young 1487 Total Birds Control Area E. Brd. Rte. E.Crow Rte. N. Brd. Rte. C. Brd. Rte. C. Crow Rte. W. Brd. Rte. w. Crow Rte. Table 5. 1l0.1 100.1 128.7 112.3 108.2 121.8 92.0 415 435 425 385 455 501 430 33 45 31 25 34 47 63 163 299 180 163 150 252 357 322 459 324 265 389 522 591 4.9 6.6 5.8 6.5 4.4 5.4 5.7 2.9 4.6 2.5 2.4 3.6 4.3 6.2 .78 1.06 .76 .119 .85 1.04 1.37 773.2 3046 278 1564 2872 5.63 3.71 .94 Pheasant brood production on the experimental and control study areas from 1963 through 1967. Area Experimental Control Experimental Control 1963 1964 1965 1966 1967 4.17 3.65 Young per Hen 3.83 2.53 3.46 2.64 5.06 5.82 4.67 5.63 2.22 1.23 Pheasants per Mile 1.72 2.11 0.80 0.21 4.30 2.95 3.65 3.71 �- 24 Table 6 - Spring and fall pheasant population indices in the experimental and control study areas -- 1967. Average Hens Young Spring Fall Crowing per per Population population Area Index Cock Hen Index Index Experimental Area East Rte. 62.8 4.28 2·78 237 ·38 984·58 Cent. Rte. 64.8 2·78 5·87 244·94 1,302·36 West Rte. 68.2 2.78 4.29 257.80 1,071.18 Total Exp. 65·3 2·78 4.67 246.83 1,094·58 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ Control Area East Rte. Cent. Rte. West Rte. 71.0 57·3 36·7 2.16 2.16 2.16 6.64 4.41 :;..67 224.36 181.07 115·97 1,242.67 726·90 565·43 Total Control 2.16 55·0 5·63 173·80 842.64 --_~~_D3===================================================================== The 1967 crowing index was lowest in the west part of the control. In direct contrast, production birds-per-mile indices were highest in that same area. Table 7 and Figure 4 compare fall population indices with those obtained in previous years of study. Both areas possessed the highest indices in 1967, and undoubtedly the highest population levels, since the study was initiated. Table 7 - Average fall population indices on the experimental and control study areas from 1963 through 1967-. Area 1963 1964 1965 1966 1967 Experimental Control 475.8 398.6 625.5 494.2 434.2 194.2 1042.1 704.8 1094.6 842.6 ================:::==================================:::========================== Measurement of pheasant population changes follOwing hen pheasant shooting could not be conducted during this segment. This phase of study must await the initiation and completion of an experimental hen season. Significant mortality by factors other than hunting was not measured. Pesticide treated oats was used as a poison bait for grass hoppers by several farmers in the control area. Its influence on the pheasant population in unknown. Prepared by: Warren D. Snyder Assistant Researcher �April, - 25 - JOB PROGRESS RESEARCH REPORT PROJECT SEGMENT S ta te 0 f _--=::C;::..O.=L;::..ORAD==-O=-------Game Bird Survey Pr 0 j ec t No. .:..:W_-.::3...:.7_-.:.:R:,...-.=2.=1 _ Job No. 1 Work Plan Title of Job: Formulation Period Covered: Personnel: April Harold of Hunting Regulations 1, 1967 through March M. Swope, Wayne l4e and Harvest Survey 31, 1968 L. Russell, Warren D. Snyder Abstract Hunting pressure during the opening weekend was measured by aerial counts along established transects. Vehicles observed on the experimental area totaled 327 compared to 264 on the control transect. The overall increase in vehicles compared to the previous years was 6.3 percent. Traffic counter readings indicated a substantial increase in traffic during the opening weekend. The information was too varied to allow derivation of percentage increases or trends. Land posting surveys showed approximately 90 percent of the land was unposted along transects in both study areas. Only 5 percent was posted against hunting. 1968 �- 26 - Objectives: 1. To establish experimental the exact number of hen permits to be issued within area and to issue these permits. 2. To submit recommendations for the general hunting regulations within the experimental and control areas, including bag limits, length of season and shooting hours. 3. To collect harvest study areas. data on hens and cocks from hunters within the the Procedures: Since an experimental hen season was not held in 1967 there was no need to establish the number of permits and to issue them. General hunting regulations were recommended in 1967. Aerial hunting pressure surveys were flown during the opening afternoon of pheasant season. These covered 174 square miles along established transects in each study area. Observations of hunting pressure were continued on varied weekend periods during the early part of the season. weekday and Land posting surveys were completed on three crowing routes in each of the study areas. Adjacent land was recorded as unposted, posted "hunting by permiss ion" or posted "no hunting". �- 27 - FORMULATION OF HUNTING REGULATIONS AND HARVEST SURVEY Warren D. Snyder Hunting Pressure Surveys: The 1967 pheasant season extended from November 11 through December 31, or fifty-one days. Public confidence in the quantity of pheasants increased over that of the previous year. Aerial counts of vehicles along established transects showed hunting pressure also increased. Table 1 shows the number of vehicles parked at farmyards, parked away from farmyards and moving within the transects in the two study areas. Table 2 compares total vehicle figures per sample with those of previous years. Percentage change from the preceding year is also provided. Table l.--Opening day pheasant hunting pressure control study areas in 1967. Vehicles parked at farmyards Vehicles parked elsewhere Moving vehicles Total vehicles observed Car per mile index Percent change from 1966 Overall change from 1966 Experimental l38 148 41 on the experimental Number of Vehicles area Control area 96 117 51 327 264 1.81 +22.5% 1.61 -9% Up 5.9% Table 2.--A comparison of opening day pheasant hunting pressure through 1967. Number or cars observed Year Experimental area Control area Total cars 1963 197 199 396 1964 221 184 405 1965 207 196 403 1966 265 291 556 1967 327 264 591 ~'< Percent increase or decrease and from the previous from 1963 Change= + 2.5 - 0.5 +38.0 + 6.3 year Hunting pressure surveys were not continued after the second weekend of season, but observations indicated hunting pressure was sustained at a higher level than in previous years. Persistent snow conditions through much of December induced many hunters to return. A majority of the pheasants were concentrated at farmyard windbreaks and similar locations creating public relations problems. �- 28 - Table 3.--Vehic1e traffic in Northeast Colorado prior 1967 pheasant hunting season. Period Duration Traffic at North Edge of Holyoke Prior to season 40 days Nov. 11-13 2 opening weekend Nov. 13-20 7 one week Nov. 20-21 H; weekdays Nov. 24-27 3 weekend Nov. 27 - Dec. 4 7 one week Dec. 4-8 4 weekdays to and during Readings the per Day -1/ 856 1,568 1,019 1,017 1,177 864 807 Traffic at South Edge of Haxtun Prior to season 34 days Nov. 10-13 3 opening weekend Nov. 13-17 4~ weekdays Nov. 17-20 3 Nov. 27 - Dec. 4 7 Dec. 4-8 4 Dec. 8-18 10 396 462 398 429 265 319 148 Traffic at North Edge of Haxtun Prior to season 37 days Nov. 10-13 3 opening weekend Nov. 13-17 4~ weekdays Nov. 17-20 3 Nov. 20 - Dec. 8 18 Dec. 8-18 10 473 708 570 539 395 395 Traffic at South Edge of Paoli Oct. 11 to Nov. 4 24 days 100 to 133 Traffic at West Edge of Fleming Prior to season Nov. 10-13 20 days 3 1,093 1,624 Traffic at East Edge of Crook Nov. 1-4 Nov. 4-6 Nov. 6-10 3 days 2 3 1,886 2,102 1,808 1/ Actual vehicle count should be below this number due to use by tandem wheeled vehicles. �- 29 - Table 4.--A survey of land posting within the experimental study areas during November, 1967. Lana Status Hunting by Permission No Hunting Mi. % Mi. % Route Experimental Area East Central West 4.0 1.5 1.5 Total 7.0 8.7 3.3 3.1 17.9 4.5 2.6 8.25 2.0 1.25 Not Posted Mi. 33.75 41.5 45.25 % 73.4 92.2 94.3 120.5 11.5 86.7% 8.3% 5.0% Average and control ----------------------------------------------------------------------------East Central West 1. 25 2.0 5.75 Total 9.0 1.9 4.3 9.9 Control Area 3.25 2.0 0.25 Season Length 44 48 18 50 93.3 91.4 89.7 91. 5% 3.2% 5.3% Table 5.--A comparison of land closure length, 1963-1967. ,'~ 62.5 42.0 52.0 156.5 5.5 Average Year 1963 1964 1965 1966 Exper. 1967 Control 4.8 4.3 0.4 to hunting in relation to season 87% Land Status Hunting by Permission 23% 25% 10% 12% 8% Closed 4% 3% 2% 4% 5% 92% 3% 5% Unposted 73% 72% 88% 84/0 51 137 miles of experimental area sampled from 1963-1967. 171 miles of control area sampled in 1967. �- 30 - Traffic counters were placed across major highways in the region in early October. These were maintained and read through the fall period to measure the influence of the hunting season and to compare hunting pressure through consecutive weekends of the season. The information obtained from this effort was poor. Snow plows cut several of the counter hoses at the first of November. Vandalism and equipment failure added to the problem. Several of the counters were not operating when the season opened. Repeated snow storms in November and December created fluctuations in traffic and continued destruction of counter hose. The few counters still in operation in mid-December were removed. Table 3 summarizes the information obtained. A general increase is noted during the opening weekend but reading obtained subsequent periods of the season were too unreliable for comparison. Land Posting: A sample of the experimental area land has been taken each year to compare the percent unposted, posted "hunting by permission", and closed to hunting. In November, 1967 the sample, which follows crowing routes, was extended to the control. Table 4 shows the miles and percentage figures along the three routes in each study area in 1967. This information is compared with preceding years of study in Table 5. The 1967 sample represents about fifteen percent of the total area within the study areas. Collection of Harvest Data: Collection during the 1967 hunting season. of harvest data was not conducted Prepared by: Warren D. Snyder Assistant Researcher �April, ]()(j8 - 31 - JOB PROGRESS RESEARCH REPORT PROJECT State of COLORADO Project No. W-37-R-2l Work Plan No. 1 ----~---------------- SEGMENT Game Bird Survey Job No. 16 Title of Job: Pheasant Nest Site Selection Period Covered: April 1, 1967 to Personnel: Study. March 31, 1968 Lyle E. Bennett, Dave Bowden, Kenneth C. Dillinger, Gordon P. East, Larry L. Green, John W. Monarch, Robert L. Schmidt, Frank D. Stone, Warren D. Snyder, Harold M. Swope, Lawrence A. Webster, Michael R. Szymczak. Abstract Fifty-four pheasant nests were found in the 48 pheasant nesting plots repsenting six vegetative species, or combinations of species. One nest was found in wheat stubble, 14 in alfalfa, 11 in crested wheatgrass, 11 in hairy vetch, two in white sweet clover, four in volunteer forbs gr owi.ng in the dormant sweet clover plots, and 11 in a crested wheatgrass-alfalfa mixture. Approximately two-thirds of all nests were established less than 15 feet from plot perimeters. The interior or exterior location of plots within quadrants did not appear to influence nest establishment. Average clutch size in the 38 nests, where it was feasible to determine this, was 8.5. There did not appear to be a significant difference in clutch size between cover types. Of the 35 nests not directly affected by mowing and nest search operations, 19 were successful. Best nesting success occurred in crested wheatgrass and hairy vetch. Twenty-eight nests were established prior to June 1, 16 between June 1-20, and 10 after June 20. Nests were established earlier in crested wheatgrass and hairy vetch than in alfalfa, white sweet clover and volunteer forbs. Vegetative height and density data (surrounding nests) are presented but no conclusions were drawn from them. Phenology measurements indicated nearly all plots had adequate cover for pheasant nesting by May 8, 1967. Each quadrant wing-clipped, was stocked with 15 hens and three cocks, all wild-trapped for continuation of the study in 1968. and �- 32 Segment Objectives: 1. To determine the vegetative species preferred by nesting pheasants. 2. To determine the vegetative height and density preferred by nesting pheasants. 3. To trap pheasants and restock the four quadrants in 1968. Procedures: 1. The first nest searches were made May 29. Each plot was divided into strips using white clothesline rope. A lath was used by each searcher to probe and part the vegetation within the strip being searched by him. Nests were marked by a lath stuck in the ground. Eggs were removed from early nests to encourage renesting. As time permitted, plots were searched by the principal investigator. Following mowing and raking of the vegetation July 19-21, plots were thoroughly searched. Distances were measured from each nest to the nearest edge, and to the apex or base (whichever was closest) of the triangular plots. Each nest was then located on a scaled diagram of the area. Number of eggs, fate of nests, and estimated hatching dates were recorded. Early in the spring, birds were obse~ved from centrally located towers in an effort to obtain information on nesting activities. 2. Phenology measurements were made to ascertain 'readiness' of the various vegetative species for use by nesting pheasants. These were accomplished by taking six average-height measurements (one every four paces) while walking from the apex to the center of the base in each triangular plot. Prior to mowing, vegetative height and density data were obtained for each nest located. General height measurements were recorded immediately adjacent to each nest in the four cardinal directions. A steel, one foot square quadrant was then placed adjacent to the north edge of the nest. All stems falling inside this quadrant at ground level were cut and counted. After recording, this procedure was repeated in the other three cardinal directions. 3. Fifty-four hens and roosters were live-trapped in the dryland wheat areas of Phillips and Sedgwick Counties and 15 hens and three cocks released in the NE, NW and SE quadrants.· The remaining 9 hens were released in the SW quadrant with six hens and three cocks held over from the previous year. The new birds were trapped at night using a 30' X 50' cannon net projected from the front of a pickup. Roosting concentration areas were located early in the evening prior to trapping, normally in wheat stubble. After dark these fields were driven until birds were spotted. The truck was maneuvered into firing position the lights turned off, and the net projected by triggering an electric switch. Haste had to be made to get to the net before birds could run out from under it. �- 33 - PHEASANT NEST SITE SELECTION STUDY Harold M. Swope Introduction Forty-eight vegetative plots, representing six species or combination of species, were established in a design outlined in the April 1965, Game Research Report, Part 1, pp. 29-32. This resulted in eight replications of each cover tested. These plots were ready for the introduction of pheasants by 1967, when 12 wild-trapped pheasants (ten hens and two cocks) were wingclipped and placed in each of the four study quadrants. This set the stage for the location of pheasant nests and attendant data presented in this report. Study Area Plot Composition: Initial plans called for plots to be seeded in the following manner. Plot Number 1. Winter wheat (Triticum) 2. Alfalfa (Medicago sativa rhizoma), sand lovegrass (Eragrostis trichodes). 3. Crested wheatgrass (Agropyron cristatum), western wheatgrass (Agropyron smithii). 4. Hairy vetch (Astragalus - madison strain), little bluewestern (Andropogon scoparius). 5. White sweet clover (Melilotus alba). 6. Alfalfa, crested wheatgrass, sand dropseed, sand lovegrass, ryegrass (Lolium multiflorum), switchgrass (Panicum virgatum). The plots were seeded as described, however, the biennial nature of some plants, the dominance of others, and the failure of some to germinate or survive made final plot composition appear as follows during the pheasant nesting season. Plot Number: 1. All of these plots in winter wheat, but four in growing green wheat and four in stubble. 2. Only alfalfa survived so these plots became completely alfalfa. 3. Crested wheatgrass was so dominant that western wheatgrass almost disappeared. 4. Little bluestem wouldn't germinate so hairy vetch took over completely. 5. Since white sweet clover is a biennial, four of the plots were in growing green clover and four in v01unteer forbs. 6. Crested wheatgrass dominated these plots, with a small amount of alfalfa persisting. �- 34 Results Location of nests: Fifty-four pheasant nests were found in the vegetative plots. As may be seen in Table 1, the majority of nests were found in alfalfa, crested wheatgrass and hairy vetch. Reference is made, however, to the description of the study area and the discussion of plot composition. Since crested wheatgrass completely dominated the other vegetation, plots 3 and 6 were almost entirely composed of this species. Table 1. Number of pheasant species. nests found in 48 plots representing Plot Composition Plot Number I I 2 six vegetative No. of Pheasant Nests o Winter Wheat, growing Wheat stubble Alfalfa Crested wheatgrass Hairy vetch White sweet clover, growing Volunteer forbs Crested wheatgrass-alfalfall 3 4 5 5 6 Total 1 14 11 11 2 4 11 "S4 II Number 6 plots were designed to be grass-legume mixtures; however, the alfalfa was slow to establish itself and crested wheatgrass was very predominant. Distances were measured and recorded to enable the plotting of nest locations on scaled diagrams. Figures 1 through 4 show the location of each nest in the four quadrants. As a matter of interest, the distance of each nest from the nearest edge is given in Table 2. Thirty-five percent of all nests were found between 5 and 10 feet from plot edges, while twenty-eight percent were located 10 to 15 feet from plot perimeters. Table 2. Distance of pheasant nests Distance from nearest edge 0-5' 5-10' 10-15' 15-20' 20-25' 25-30' 30-35' from plot perimeters. Number of Nests 3 19 15 8 6 2 1 �- 35 - ~ \\---/ -7 .~ \ / /2 -1 \JW ~ 5 ~~7\ #4 1 inch Fig. 1. ~ ~~ /; 3 nests in northwest 1 = 60 feet. Location of pheasant quadrant. �- 36 - • 3 6 • 2 1 inch Fig. 2. = 60 feet. Location of pheasant nests in northeast quadrant. �- 37 - .~ 5 1 inch = 60 feet. Fig. 3. Location of pheasant nests in southwest quadrant. �- 38 - 1 inc h = 60 feet. . Fig. 4. Locat1.on . of pheasan t nests t 1.n . southeas t quadran • �- 39 The location of plots within quadrants in relation to perimeter fencing appeared to have little effect on nest establishment. Thirty nests were found in the exterior plots and 24 in those interiorly located. Clutch Sizes: Sixteen nests contained an unknown number of eggs. These were robbed by Magpies and small rodents, or broken and scattered too badly to accurately count. The average clutch size in the remaining 38 nests was 8.5, ranging from four to 14 eggs. There does not appear to be a significant variation clutch size between the six plot types, as may be noted in Table 3. Table 3. Clutch sizes found in 38 pheasant Clutch Size 1 2 4 5 3 nests in six vegetative types. Plot Number 4 5 Total 1 1 1 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Unknown Totals Average Clutch Size 1 -1 8.0 4 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 1 1 5 2 2 1 2 7 14 4 U U 8.3 6 1 8.8 3 -6 7.9 U 9.0 8.9 in 1 3 2 7 6 9 3 4 1 0 2 16 54 8.5 Fate of nests: Nest search and mowing operations were directly responsible for abandonment or destruction of 19 nests. Of the remaining 35, there were 19, or 54 percent, successful. Best nest success occurred in plots 3 and 4 where 75 percent and 71 percent hatched. These data are presented in Table 4. Table 4. Fate of 35 pheasant nests in six cover types. Nest Success Plot Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 Total Hatched o 4 6 5 o 4 19 Unsuccessful 1 4 2 2 2 5 16 �- 40 Period of Nest establishment: There appeared to be some definite differences in the period of nest establishment as presented in Table 5. Nests were established in crested wheatgrass and hairy vetch at an earlier date than those in alfalfa and white sweet clover (two in clover and four in volunteer forbs). There appears to be some correlation between the period of nest establishment and the success of the nest (earlier nests more successful). Evaluation of this relationship is difficult because nests located early were robbed of eggs to induce renesting. It is not always possible to tell the exact date of nest establishment; however, it is believed that each nest has been fairly accurately placed in the proper category. This was done by relating the condition and appearance of nests when found, and the stage of incubation of eggs to the probable time of nest establishment. Table 5. Plot Number I 2 3 4 5 6 Totals Relationship of period of pheasant Probable Prior to June I 0 4 8 8 nest establishment to cover type. Period of Nest Establishment June I-June 20 After June 20 I 6 2 0 4 I I 0 2 2 8 3 4 0 28 16 10 Phenology measurements: Plans called for weekly phenology measurements in each plot from the start of vegetative growth in the spring until cessation of growth in the sunnner. As the growth period approached there was apprehension that constant human disturbance within the plots might influence nest establishment. The decision was made to check growth only to find out when vegetation reached a height sufficient to furnish pheasants protective nesting cover. Measurements were made on April 27 and May 8. By this date vegetation in all plots, with the exception of the dormant sweet clover, appeared to provide adequate nesting cover. Table 6 lists the average height by vegetative type, as recorded to the nearest inch, on May 8, 1967. �- 41 Table 6. Average Vegetative height of vegetation Type Wheat stubble Growing winter wheat Alfalfa Crested wheatgrass Hairy vetch White sweet clove! Volunteer forbs ! Crested wheatgrass-alfalfa 1/ Residual in pheasant nesting plots on May 8, 1967. Average Height in Inches 10.8 17.1 13.1 13.6 7.1 6.1 1.0 13.1 growth of last year's sweet clover averaged 42". Height and density of vegetation surrounding nests: Only those nests found prior to mowing provided the opportunity for obtaining vegetative measurements. It was possible to obtain vegetative measurements surrounding 24 nests. Twenty-seven nests were not found until mowing and raking had been completed. Hairy vetch had dri(~d up and disintegrated so badly adjacent to three nests that measurements were not feasible. Since there is little correlation between the number of stems and vegetative density when comparing legumes with grasses, the value of these data are highly questionable. Fifty alfalfa stems, for example, may provide a much denser screen around the nest than 250 crested wheatgrass stems. Table 7 presents the vegetative measurements recorded for each individual nest. The number of stems represents the total counted in four one-foot quadrants immediately adjacent to the nest. The heights given are averages of four measurements taken within each of the quadrants referred to above. Nests were numbered in the order of their discovery. Stocking quadrants with pheasants for 1968: Pheasants were captured, as described under procedures, in Phillips Sedgwick Counties. With the nine holdover pheasants, each quadrant stocked with 15 hens and three cocks by February 22, 1968. and was Near the end of the segment a cat problem was encountered in the plots. Project 98-D personnel trapped five cats and destroyed them. Though pheasant losses did occur, the extent of such losses was unknown at the termination of this segment. �- 42 Table 7 - stem numbers, height and composition of vegetation surrounding 24 pheasant nests. Nest Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 18 19 20 22 23 24 26 28 Number of Stems and Composition Average Height (Inches) 740 crested wheatgrass 1 alfalfa 1,149 crested wheatgrass 373 hairy vetch 1,229 crested wheatgrass 6 alfalfa 691 crested wheatgrass 250 alfalfa 436 crested wheatgrass l/ 47 hairy vetch 653 crested wheatgrass 1,207 crested wheatgrass 5 alfalfa 226 hairy vetch 909 crested wheatgrass 224 alfalfa 229 cheatgrass 3 mustard 1,369 crestedwheatgrass 1,318 crested wheatgrass 1,026 crested wheatgrass 10 alfalfa 227 alfalfa 247 alfalfa 4 ryegrass 208 alfalfa 868 crested wheatgrass 269 alfalfa 1,202 crested wheatgrass 15 alfalfa 306 alfalfa 57 white sweet clover 5 mustard 127 alkali weeds 2/ 41 white sweet clover 18.0 18.0 9·3 22·5 16.8 15·0 20.0 15·5 20·5 9·8 20·3 13·0 23·3 17·5 13·3 20.0 12.8 12·5 10·5 13.8 8.3 12.8 70.0 42.0 ============================================================================= Crested wheatgrass invaded small portion of vetch plot and nest ~~s placed in midst of this grass. ~/ Nest in dormant clover plot. Small clover plants were coming up under forb canopy. Measurements were obtained on only two sides of nest when it was partially uncovered by mowing machine. Prepared by: Harold M. Swope Wildlife Researcher �April, 1908 - 43 - JOB PROGRESS RESEARCH State of COLORADO Project No. W-37-R-21 Work Plan No. 3 Title of Job: Period Covered: Personnel: REPORT PROJECT SEGMENT Game Bird Survey Job No. 8a Effects of Sagebrush Control on Distribution and Abundance of Sage Grouse April 1, 1967 to Minch 31, 1968 Lyle Bennett, Ken Dillenger, Gordon East, Bruce Gill, Don Gore, Larry Green, Terry May (Principal investigator), John Monarch, Warren Snyder, Mike Stone, Harold Swope. Abstract The peak number of displaying males on the 12 major strutting grounds in the Lake John area was 267. This was up from 234 in 1966, and 166 in 1965. Peak female attendance occurred the second week in April; peak male attendance the first week in :M3.y. There do not appear to be significant changes in the use of strutting grounds related to whether the area was block-sprayed, stripsprayed or non-sprayed. Excluding strutting activities, almost no use of block-spray area by sage grouse was observed. All birds observed were in close proximity to live sagebrush except one. An adult male was sighted .3 mile from the nearest live sage. Ninety-one sage grouse were trapped and marked between April 10 and May 5· Four males were reobserved on strutting grounds other than those where they were trapped. One hen was reobserved on a strutting ground 43 days after she was marked with a patagial tag. Twenty-two vegetation transects and 60 nest search plots were permanently marked with 6~-foot steel fence posts to assure relocation. Sage grouse hunter check stations were operated near Cowdrey and Walden. The 300 hunters checked killed 267 sage grouse in 1,177 hours hunted. Females made up 65 percent of the bag composition, adult birds 67 percent. Seven of the sage grouse marked in the spring were brought through the check stations by hunters. �- 44 Objectives: 1. To determine the numbers and sex ratios of sage grouse using the strutting grounds on the study area. 2. To determine the presence of sage grouse on the sprayed and unsprayed areas. 3. To determine the time of day and season of year sage grouse are found on treated areas. Procedures: 1. Strutting ground counts were conducted on all grounds within the study area in accordance with procedures established during the early phase of this study (Game Research Report, April, 1965, Part 3, pp. 42-48). Counts were conducted from April 1 to June 1. 2. Presence of sage grouse on the sprayed and unsprayed areas. a. Five roadside routes, totalling 58.35 miles, were established to cover three types of areas: nonspray-live sagebrush; sprayed block; and sprayed strip. Only one route was driven per evening, starting l~ hours prior to sunset, at speeds between 12 and 16 miles per hour. Sightings were recorded as to cover type and distance from live sagebrush. 3. To ascertain daily and seasonal use of treated areas by sage grouse, vations were recorded by cover type, time and date. obser- Except for strutting ground observations, sage grouse were seldom seen during spring and summer. To partially compensate for the lack of information to fulfill objectives 2 and 3, additional movement distribution, harvest and density data were obtained. 4. Trapping and marking were accomplished using the procedures described by Gill (Game Research Report, April 1965, Part 3, pp. 25-41) and Carr (Game Research Report, April 1967, Part 1, pp. 14-16). Reobservations were made during the course of strutting ground counts, brood surveys and hunter checks. 5. All nest plots and vegetative transects established during the early stages of the study were permanently marked by replacing the small metal stakes, initially used, with 6~-foot steel fence posts. 6. Check stations were operated near Cowdrey and Walden marked birds, flock composition and harvest. to obtain data on �- 45 - EFFECTS OF SAGEBRUSH CONTROL ON DISTRIBUTION AND ABUNDANCE OF SAGE GROUSE Harold M. Swope Introduction The first portion of this project was a pre-treatment study initiated in 1963. In June, 1965, spraying was done by the Bureau of Land Management to the design and specifications determined by these pre-spray efforts. The second phase of the work sought information on the immediate effects of the spray application. A third study is planDed to ascertain the longer term effects of vegetal control after vegetative succession has become somewhat stabilized. The work reported here is designed to monitor sage grouse populations and their response to habitat treatment during the interim period. Student Assistant Terry May was the principle investigator during this portion of the study_ Findings Strutting Ground Counts: For the second consecutive year there appeared to be a significant increase in the peak male attendance on strutting grounds. Combining the highest male count on each of the 12 strutting grounds observed resulted in a total of 265. This compares with a peak count of 166 in 1965 and 234 in 1967 (See Figure 1). Early in the strutting season, activity of adult males was sporadic. Strutting was not confined to the permanent display grounds. As these areas became free of snow cover, intense display activity began. Greatest female attendance occurred the second week in April as may be noted in Figure 2. The accompanying male attendance was highest during the first week of May when sub-adult males became more prevalent. This pattern of strutting ground attendance was similar to that found during the previous years of the study. Spray patterns were designed to place some trol area, some where strips were sprayed, As may be seen in Table 1, counts on these do not appear to show a significant change work. strutting grounds in the block conand others in uncontrolled sagebrush. grounds made in 1965, 1966 and 1967 in use as a result of the control Use by Sage Grouse of Sprayed Versus Unsprayed Areas: Data pertaining to the use of sprayed versus unsprayed areas were difficult to obtain. A total of 102.90 miles were driven on five roadside routes while seeking this information. Nineteen sage grouse were observed in 50.80 miles of non-spray area for an average of 2.67 miles per bird. One bird was seen in 38.15 miles of strip-spray roadsides and one in 13.95 miles of block-spray travel. The productivity of these efforts did not appear to justify the time and effort expended, particularly as the birds moved away from strutting grounds, so the roadside transects were �- 46 - 500446 o / 400 /'\ \ ;;5 V 372 363 337 \ 300 \ 265 \ 20 23~ 'v'/ 166 100 Fig. 1. 1959 1960 Total strutting 1961 1962 male counts 1963 1964 1965 in the Lake John area, 1966 1967 1959-1967. �- 47 Total Males -----Total Females ------------- 1967 240 I~ 200 f I I 160 I NUMBERS OF BIRDS 120 I I /1It f \ //. \ ,, I \ , \ ~ \ \ \ 80 I \ \ I \ \ \ 40 I \ '-,,, 'e- - - .•..- - 5 12 19 April Fig. 2. Sage grouse attendance 26 3 ...•.. 10 -- -e 17 May on all study area strutting grounds, 1967. �- 48 abandoned. With one exception, all birds observed were in live sagebrush. The sage grouse seen in the block spray area was .3 mile from live sagebrush. Table 1.--ComEarison of 19652 1966 and 1967 strutting ground censuses. Maximum number of strutting tiles Strutting grouna number _ Year 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Total 1965 9 53 52 0 0 0 52 0 0 0 166 1966 9 47 54 2 0 6 97 6 13 0 234 1967 10 69 59 12 1 5 81 9 15 4 265 11 Strutting grounds 2 and 5 are located in block-spray areas, 9 and 10 in strip sprayed tracts, and the remainder where no control has taken place. Daily and Seasonal Use of Treated Areas: So few observations of sage grouse were made in the sprayed areas following breeding activities that findings here were negative. Brood surveys made the latter part of July on five permanently established routes (described in April, 1965 Game Research Report, Part 3, pp. 179-180) resulted in sightings of 96 sage grouse. All of these occurred in meadows, or other areas not sprayed. No winter concentrations of sage grouse were reported seen on the block sprayed areas, though some use was observed in the unsprayed strips by non-project personnel. In the April, 1967 Game Research Report (Part 1, p. 98) Carr made the following statement: "Sage grouse readily moved through sagebrush enroute to and from strutting grounds; however, they avoided spray blocks at other times. Excluding the strutting season, I observed sage grouse on sprayed blocks only twice during 1965 and 1966." Observations made in 1967 appear to substantiate Carr's findings. Trapping, Marking and Reobservations: Ninety-one sage grouse were trapped and marked between April 10 and May 5. Seventy-eight of the captured birds were males (50 adults and 28 subadults) and 13 females (eight adults and five subadults). Each bird was banded on the left leg with a numbered aluminum leg band. A plastic color-coded bandette was fitted to the right leg. Colored, naugahyde tags were affixed to the wing patagium. Trapping was attempted on the four major grounds only and birds were color-coded as follows: SG 2 - five birds marked with green; SG 4 - 35 birds marked with yellow; SG 5 - 26 birds marked with white, and; SG 9 - 25 birds marked with red. Twenty-eight confirmed reobservations of birds banded in 1967 were recorded during the spring. Four of these involved birds sighted on a ground other than the one where they were banded. An adult male banded the night of April 13 on SG 4 was reobserved approximately 30 hours later on SG 5, a distance of 1.6 miles. Another adult male moved from SG 4 to SG 5 sometime between April 27 and May 11. The morning of May 16 a subadult male was sighted on SG 9 that had been banded on SG 4 on April 26, a distance of 2.7 miles. A similar distance (2.6 miles) was traveled by another adult male between April 25 and May 16, from SG 5 to SG 9. �- 49 - Five male grouse banded prior to 1967 were reobserved this spring. Two of these were observed on the grounds where they were originally banded. The other three had switched display locations. One adult female was observed 43 days after banding where she was originally trapped. on the strutting ground The remains of four marked birds were found during the spring. Two of these appeared to have flown into a fence, one was killed by an avian predator and the other had been eaten by a mammalian predator. A fifth banded bird was killed in a re-trapping attempt. Marking of Nest and Vegetation Plots: The 22 vegetation transects and 60 nest-search plots established early in the study were permanently marked to assure relocation. The short, temporary metal stakes used to initially identify these special data collection sites were replaced with silver-tipped 6-1--footsteel fence posts. These were driven at least 30 inches into the ground to discourage removal. These plots and transects will be rerun during the final phase of the project. Check Station Data: Check stations were established and operated immediately west of Cowdrey and 1/2 mile west of Walden during the 2 day weekend season of September 9-10. These check station sites command the two primary exits from the Lake John study area. The 300 hunters checked killed 267 sage grouse in 1,177 hours of reported hunting time. This is equivalent to .89 birds per hunter and 4.41 hours hunted per bird. These figures compare favorably with .86 and 4.67 respectively in 1966. The harvest of females was 65 percent. This compares with a 71 percent harvest of hens in 1966. Only 33 percent of the grouse harvested by hunters were juveniles. In 1966, 44 percent were birds of the year. Sex and age composition of the kill was obtained from 265 wing samples taken from birds harvested in the vicinity of Lake John. Seven sage grouse marked during the spring of 1967 were brought through the check stations by hunters. By applying these data (Kill = 267, number of banded birds = 86 1/, number of banded birds killed = 7) to the Lincoln Index, it may be estimated the sage grouse population in the Lake .Iohn area was 3,284. The primary fallacy involved here is the disproportionate number of males banded (86 percent) wnen 65 percent of the harvest was composed of hens. Two sage grouse banded in 1966 were also recovered and reported by hunters. ~/ Ninety-one grouse were banded but five of these were known to have died prior to the hunting season. Prepared by: Haro ld M. ~~wupc Wild1if'e Rcscurche r ��April, - 51 JOB PROGRESS RESEARCH REPORT PROJECT SEGMENT COLORADO State of ------------------------- Project No. Game Bird Survey W-37-R-21 4 Work Plan No. Job No. 12 Title of Job: Summarization and publication of Chukar Partridge Research Findings Period Covered: April 1, 1967 through March 31, 1968 Personnel: Wayne W. Sandfort Objectives: To summarize in Colorado. and publish the results of all past work done on the species Procedures: Findings obtained under Work Plan 4, Jobs 1 through 11 in Project W-37-R, data from chukar partridge investigations conducted by other projects, individuals or organizations, and miscellaneous information pertinent to chukar management and research in Colorado have been assembled and analyzed for inclusion in a final manuscript. A detailed format and outline for the report has been prepared. Findings: Work is progressing slowly on this publication but )lans continue to stand for preparation of comprehensive publication on this species. Date of publication is dependent upon time available for preparation of the final manuscript. Prepared by: Wayne W. Sandfort Game Manager 1(Y; [) ��April, 1968 - 53 - JOB PROGRESS RESEARCH PROJECT State of COLORADO Project No. W_-~3~7_-_R_-_2~l Work Plan No. 8 ----~----------------- _ REPORT SEGMENT Game Bird Survey Job No. Title of Job: Lesser Prairie Chicken Adaptability Period Covered: April Personnel: 1, 1967 to March Donald M. Hoffman, John Stevenson 5 31, 1968 Donald E. Lengel, Clee Sealing, and Abstract Two sites in Baca County were inspected as possible lesser pralrle transplanting sites during Segment 20 and summarized in the April, Job Completion Report for this job. chicken 1967 Three additional sites, including an area approximately seven miles south of Hugo, Colorado in Lincoln County, an area approximately 12 miles north and one mile west of Boone, Colorado in Pueblo County, and an area approximately 17 miles south and two miles east of Ellicott, Colorado in El Paso County were inspected during the present reporting period. All five sites are similar in habitat types to occupied ranges in Colorado and all hold definite possibility as future ranges for the species. An initial shipment of 21 lesser prairie chickens, including ten hens and 11 cocks, wild-trapped by the Kansas Forestry, Fish, and Game Commission south of Meade, Kansas, were released at a site seven miles south of Hugo, Colorado in Lincoln County. The release was made at 10:30 A.M. on March 23, 1968. One additional cock received with this shipment died enroute to the release site. This release was completed at 4:15 P.M. on April 2, 1968 with the addition of four hens and two cocks, secured from Kansas. �- 54 Objectives: To re-establish lesser prairie chickens in historical southeastern Colorado. 1. To select sites for release of stock. 2. To determine ranges within success of introductions. Procedures: 1. Selection of release sites. This includes comparisons of characteristics of proposed sites with habitat supporting populations of the species. Comparisons include: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. 2. Location and general features. Vegetative types. Size of area. Land ownership. Soil type. Climate. Water sources. Terrain. Success of introductions. The conduct of this portion of the study will depend upon securing transplant stock for release. a. b. c. Conduct periodic census of release sites during spring periods using standard prairie chicken census procedures. Secure reports of birds observed by landowners, Federal land-use personnel and others. Evaluate the degree of success attained. �- 55 - LESSER PRAIRIE CHICKEN ADAPTABILITY Donald M. Hoffman Introduction A wildlife trade agreement involving antelope from Colorado for lesser prairie chickens has been made with the State of Kansas. We hope to secure a total of 75 lesser prairie chickens. This would provide for three transplants of 25 birds each in exchange for the antelope livetrapped in southeastern Colorado. Habitat requirements of the lesser pra~r~e chicken and characteristics of occupied ranges in Colorado are described within the Job Completion Report for Work Plan 8, Job 1, October, 1959. These were reviewed briefly in the Job Completion Report for Work Plan 8, Job 5, April, 1967 and are not repeated in this report. Preliminary site inspections made while mapping scaled quail range under a completed study indicated extensive areas of high quality sand sagebrushgrasslands having definite possibility for the restoration of lesser prairie chickens are found in southeastern Colorado. Two sites in Baca County (Sites Number 1 and 2) were inspected as lesser prairie chicken transplanting sites during Segment 20. Three additional sites were inspected during the present reporting period and are discussed separately.in this report, Site Number 3 Location and general features: A site located seven miles south of Hugo, Colorado in Lincoln County (Figures 1 and 2) was inspected on September 27, 1967 with Wildlife Conservation Officer Donald E. Lengel. The map location of this site is shown in Figure 5. The site is within the sand sagebrushgrassland belt of the Big Sandy Creek drainage. The elevation of t~e proposed site is 5,250 feet. It is possible that a few lesser pra~r~e chickens are still found along Big Sandy Creek as far north as Boyero, based upon recent sightings. During the winter of 1965-66, WCO Lengel observed three prairie chickens in the vicinity of Boyero, approximately 17 miles southeast of the proposed release site A single prairie chicken was observed about five years ago by WCO Lengel near Arena Junction, approximately five miles northeast of Kit Carson. This sighting is approximately 27 miles southeast of the proposed release site. o Vegetative types: The proposed release site consists of an extensive area of tall, dense sand sagebrush-grassland with three species of bluestems (big, little, and sand), switchgrass, sand dropseed, and blue grama grasses. Forbs present include ragweed, sunflowers, evening starflowers, and stickseed. Figures 1 and 2 show vegetative composition for much of the area. Dryland farmlands (mostly maize and corn) are located northwest and south of the sand �- 56 sagebrush-grassland type. These should be valuable food for lesser prairie chickens. in furnishing winter Size of area: This block of sand sagebrush-grassland and surrounding dryland cultivated lands consists of approximately 40 square miles of potential range. Other extensive areas of similar types extend along Big Sandy Creek to the Arkansas River. The size of the area is considered to be adequate for survival and production of lesser prairie chickens. Land ownership: The site is privately owned by Mr. Laurence Withers who has been a good cooperator with the Department. Kinney Lake is located approximately three and one-half miles south of the proposed release site. Soil types: Deep sandy soils predominate for the most part. Some sites contain relatively tight soils and characteristic shortgrass vegetation were also noted. Climate: The site is located approximately 17 miles northwest of the nearest reportedly occupied range and is at a slightly higher elevation. The nearest weather station to the site is Limon, Colorado, approximately 20 miles northwest. Climate should not be greatly different from that of occupied range. Water sources: A view of a spring-fed lake used for stock water is shown in Figure 2. There are also several windmills with stock watering ponds in the vicinity so water supply should be ample. Terrain: The terrain is composed mainly of gently rolling Kills. Some areas are relatively flat as well. sand sagebrush Summary and Recommendations: The area is historical range and compares favorably with present-day occupied habitat in Colorado. It should support lesser prairie chickens if restocked. Because of its extensive size and excellent potential, this site is rated first on the list for transplanting. A release of 25 birds of approximately equal sexes is recommended. A good release site is indicated in Figure 5. Site Number 4 Location and general features: A site located approximately 12 miles north and one mile west of Boone, Colorado in Pueblo County (Figure 3) was inspected on December 8, 1965 and June 15, 1967. The map location of this site is shown in Figure 6. This site is within the sand sagebrush-grassland belt of the Black Squirrel Creek drainage. The elevation of the site is approximately 5,000 feet. The site is non-historical types and general features lesser prairie chicken range; however, vegetative are similar to occupied ranges in Colorado. Vegetative types: The proposed site consists of sand sagebrush-grassland with bluestems and three-awn grasses interspersed within the plant community. The quality of the sand sagebrush is not as good as that found in Sites Number 1, 2, and 3; however, bluestem grasses compose a much greater percent of the vegetative cover. Dryland farmlands are found east of the sand sagebrush-grassland belt. �- 57 Size of area: The site consists of an extensive belt of sand sagebrushgrassland of approximately 120 square miles of range in Pueblo County. In addition, this range connects with a large belt of similar habitat in southern El Paso County described in Site Number 5. Land ownership: The proposed transplanting site is privately owned by Mr. Jack Thatcher, who has been a good cooperator with the Department. The antelope live-trapped for Kansas came from an adjoining property. Soil types: Deep sandy soils predominate in the area for the most part. Some sites with relatively tight soils were also observed in the vicinity. Climate: A comparison of climatic features was made in the Job Completion Report for this job for April, 1967. The climate of this area compares favorably with that of occupied habitat in Colorado. Water sources: Scattered windmills with stock tanks or ponds are found throughout the area and should provide adequate water for lesser prairie chickens. Terrain: The terrain varies from relatively flat to gently rolling sand sagebrush hills (Figure 3). Several healed-over sand blow areas were observed in the area. Summary and Recommendations: This area, while non-historical range, compares favorably with occupiedhabi.tatin Colorado and should support lesser prairie chickens if stocked. The area is extensive in size and has fair to good potential. This site is rated third on the list for future transplanting if and when stock becomes available. A release of 25 birds of approximately equal sexes is recommended. A good release site is indicated in Figure 6. Site Number 5 Location and general features: A site located approximately 17 miles south and two miles east of Ellicott, Colorado in El Paso County (Figure 4) was inspected on October 16, 1967. The map location of this site is shown in Figure 7. The site is approximately 12 miles northwest of Site Number 4 and is within the same .sand sagebrush-grassland belt. Vegetative types: Vegetation is similar to that described under Site Number 4, except the sand /3agebrush is of better quality. Size of area: An extensive block of sand sagebrush-grassland (Figure 7) consisting of over 120 square miles of potential range in southeastern El Paso County adjoins the large block of sand sagebrush-grassland described under Site Number; 4. Land ownership: The proposed transpl.anting site is privately owned by Mr. Paul Pease who has been a good cooperator with the Department. son types: Soils are similar to those described under Site Number 4. Climate:' The climate is similar to that described under Site Number 4. �- 58 - Figure 1.-- Sand sagebrush-grassland plant community on the L. Withers property, approximately seven miles south of Hugo in Lincoln County. (D.Hoffman,photo) Figure 2.-- A lake used for stock water on the L. Withers property, northeast of the above photo location. Sand sagebrushgrassland plant community borders lake. (D.Hoffman,photo) �- 59 - Figure 3.-- Sand sagebrush-grassland plant community on the J.Thatcher property, approximately 12 miles north and one mile west of Boone, in Pueblo County. (D.Hoffman~photo) Figure 4.-- Sand sagebrush-grassland plant community on the P.Pease property,approximately 17 miles south and two miles east of Ellicott, in El Paso County. (D.Hoffman,photo) �- 60 (LINCOLN COUNTY SHEET R54W. I) R.53 W. 27 I I IIII I-~f--I I -f---. -·····-- 11 I i " '0 0 J I. C rs '0 " "l. r 1-' " TII S. K/ 2;' ,. " 5 T A T , " .>: u II II II II II ...JI ------:r-·' _____ 0'·-__ : '. " H T.12S. 18 I~"-""'-'--~-""'--'~~ ~ __ ~ II II II If I II ,. "II "~=====~~~=z~~~~=c~_ 26 KEY ro COUNlY SHEETS SHEff I "" " "" II II l I r, I" II H-··· II I. " " " ~ I" " I ,. a ~ I" I 1_ ,6 -\ Fd.gur-e I I" I '--L....._ aa 5.'- - Location of site south of Hugo, Colorado inspected as lesser pr~jrie chjcken ronge. �- 61 EL PASO (SHEET flr:--r·---'-- -.r: I '1/j" JO' ~! *: ! I I I ! I· .0 TI8S 2. 2' 27 ., 2. 30 r"-I=...... 29 .~:~_~_~1 \ 2. :----1--- 13 " 24 •• '0 ;n 3. ac ZI 29 2. .H se 35 -" 12 I. 19 .. z. .2 i_I_'t -+----- Y \ • t--~--I 20 .• 32 5 I 17 20 i;"& T195. 18 3. 32 T N ra 2' ao : If I I• I L re u R.61W R62W I o G 2) IO""J!)' .6 20 ~--------I-------I I ,9 29 28 2. 30 2. 3. 35 34 " 32 -1"'"" -r:-;" 11 (. -.-.-- ~ puEBLO ORDNANCE 12 10 10 DEPOT KI:.Y TO COUNTY SHEETS ..•~ ~ I. l i T205. 23 ?I I I 2. 27 ,. ) 21 22 2. 27 \ '"j" ---- COUNTY PUEBLO SCAl E OF MilES a 1/2 I LI I I I 1 , I I , 1 r~~~t!i~~5~6 •. Figure Lo cat icn of si te north of Boone, Colorado inspected as lesser prairie chicken ,._- I �- 62 o Ul T it 10 21 •• 34 ~ .. SHEET so I ze 'z::;" 3. 31 COUNTY 12 IS " " 20 22 2> t. SCALE :a OF MILES I t 12 13 17 16 IS ,. 13 2. 20 21 22 2> 2' 50 28 27 2. •• 31 33 •• 3. U'~ <?IS) 50 29 .. 28 ~(jvA. '~==== V: " 32 "" ~ ~ II' 31 26 7 \ <?: " \Y~' •• :: se 36 ,,~~ . .:1..--: ~ », "Q-' "'\ 10 12 12 •• I• 13 " 21 22 23 2' 27 20 27 2. •• 34 33 34 •• 36 15 " 13 1.175, 22 2. Figure I. 20 7. -- Location of site Ellicott, as lesser range. south of volorado inspected pr-al rd e chicken �- 63 - Figure 8.-- Release of lesser prairie chickens wild-trapped by Kansas Forestry, Fish, and Game Commission at site south of Hugo, Colorado in Lincoln County on March 23, 1968. (n.Hoffman,photo) �- 64 Water Sources: Scattered windmills provide ample water for lesser prairie chickens. Terrain: The terrain stock water and should provide is similar to that described under Site Number 4. Surmnary and Recommendations: The area is extensive in size and appears to be favorable for lesser prairie chicken range. The area is nC)fJ-historicaI range. This area is rated fourth on the list for future transpJ,mtine if and when stock for release becomes available. A release of 20 to 25 birds of approximately equal sexes is recommended. A good release s Lt.e is ind.icated in Figure 7. Ranking of Sites All five sites inspected are thought to have potential as lesser prairie chicken ranges. Based upon an evaluation of specific characteristics of these sites, the following are recommended for trial releases in decreasing order of rank: 1. 2. 3· 4. 5· L. Wither property, south of Hugo, in Lincoln County (Site Number 3) U.S.F.S. property, southeast of Springfield, in Baca County (Site Number 2) J. Thatcher property, north of Boone, in Pueblo County (Site Number 4) P. Pease property, south of Ellicott, in El Paso County (Site Number 5) U.S.F.S. property, southwest of Pritchett, in Baca County (Site Number 1) Releases of Stock An initial shipment of 21 lesser prairie chickens, including ten hens and 11 cocks wild-trapped by the Kansas Forestry, Fish and Game Commission sout.h of Meade, Kansas, were released at Site Number 3, seven miles south of Hugo, in Lincoln County at 10:30 A.M. on March 23, 1968. One additional cock (Band Number 8) died enroute to the rel~ase site. WildHfe Officer Donald E. Lengel and Mr. Jenner Schoening assisted (Figure 8). Conservation with the release On April 2, 1968 at 4:15 P.M., four hens and two cocks were added to complete the release. This stock was also secured from the Kansas Forestry, Fish and Game Commission and also came from the area south of Meade, Kansas. The following are the Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department band numbers for the birds released: Numbers Numbers aluminum 1 through 12 (less Number 8) and Numbers 24 and 25 are cocks. 13 through 23, and 26 through 28 are hens. Prepared by: Donald M Hoffman WiJdlife Researcher leg �April, - 65 JOB PROGRESS RESEARCH REPORT PROJECT SEGMENT COLORADO ---------------------------- State of Project No. W __-_37~-_R_-_2_l Work Plan No. 10 ----------------------- Job No. Title of Job: Study of Hungarian Partridge Period Covered: April Personnel: _ Game Bird Survey 1, 1967 to March 1 Adaptability 31, 1968 Charlie Brown, Harry Dobbs, Bill Roland, ranchers in the area. Harold Swope, and Abstract Follow-up contacts were made with landowners mail questionnaire with reports of Hungarian who had responded to the 1966 partridge observations. A Hungarian partridge nest, with the intact caps of 17 hatched eggs, was found in the vicinity of an area where a recent brood sighting was reported. Two-hundred-fifty 1968. more Huns were released in Moffat County on April 30, May 1, 1968 �- 66 Objectives: 1. To locate and obtain verified area. 2. To make a trial release counts on Hungarian partridge in the Craig of 400 to 500 Huns in the Craig area. Procedures: 1. Follow-up personal contacts were made on a landowner questionnaire circulated in 1966. Locally assigned Department personnel were asked to obtain and report information on Hun sightings. 2. Hungarian partridge produced at the Fort Collins Wildlife Research Station, as a result of a study to develop production techniques, were released in the Craig area. �- 67 - STUDY OF HUNGARIAN PARTRIDGE ADAPTABILITY Harold M. Swope Introduction Attempts to establish Hungarian partridge in Colorado are currently confined to an area in Moffat County, southwest of Craig. Huns were first released in this vicinity in 1964. Additional releases were made in 1965 and 1967. Results Landowner Contacts: In September and October, 1967, attempts were made to contact all landowners reporting Hun sightings in the 1966 mail questionnaire. Information gained from these contacts follows: Lorence Ellgen, who owns land where initial releases were made, observed approximately six Huns about the middle of the sunnner. He felt hawks had taken a heavy toll of birds released in 1965. Jim Wilson saw 20 Huns the middle of October in a brushy draw on a lower north slope of Isles Mountain. This is approximately 2 miles south of the site of the initial release in 1964. Bud Bowers reported consistently seeing three bunches Mountain during the sunnner and fall of 1966. of Huns on top of Isles These observations totalled about 100 birds. During the past sunnner, Mr. Bowers has frequently seen 50 Huns in his grain fields on Isles Mountain. He attributes the decline in numbers observed to the taller, denser vegetation in 1967. I made follow-up checks on this report. No birds were located, but tracks and sign that were very probably made by Huns were observed. This mountain appears to be an ideal location for future releases. George Counts, who farms the land innnediately north of Lorence Ellgen, claimed to have seen 8 to 10 Hungarian partridge about the middle of the sunnner. This was close to the 1967 release site. Near the first of September, his hired man saw a brood of 10 Huns approximately 1 mile west of the release site. This appeared to be a fairly "hot" lead, so I searched the brushy draw between two wheat fields, near where these birds were reported. A Hungarian partridge nest, with the intact caps from 17 hatched eggs, was found. The nest was located under two live sagebrush plants about 25" tall. The draw along which this nest was found contained intermittent water. A stock pond full of water was .2 mile to the north. This area also appeared to be another good potential release site. �- 68 - Lowry Seely reported seeing several Huns in Axle Basin during the summer. Two Huns were seen last spring (1967) in Maudlin Gulch by Elton Gent. I. P. Bickett, grain harvest, who reported seeing one Hungarian partridge during the 1966 15 miles north of the initial release Site, has seen none since. Attempts were made to contact these were unsuccessful. Gordon Winn, Jacob Hamill and Steve S'Lmos , but W.C.o. Bill Roland and Area Supervisor Harry Dobbs received reports from landowners in the Roundbottom area that Hungarian partridge were frequently seen on top of the snow along the main access road during February and Mlrch, 1967. No details were given. Deep, persistent snow occurred during late winter and early spring of 1967 so it was gratifying to learn that birds did survive until the warming up period commenced. New Hun Releases: Because of the persistent snow condition, the release of 250 Hungarian partridge was not made until April 30 and May 1, 1968. Detai.ls of this release will be reported at the end of the next segment. 'Ihese were the survivors from an experimental breeding study conducted at the Fort Collins Wildlife Research Station during the spring and summer of 1967. Prepared by: Harold M. Swope Wildlife Researcher �April, 1968 - 69 - JOB PROGRESS REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO --------~~~~------------ Project No. ~W_-_3~7_-~R~-~2~1~ Work Plan No. Title of Job: Period Covered: Personnel: ~l~O Experimental April _ Game Bird Survey _ Job No. ~2 of Hungarian Partridge Breeding 1, 1967 through March Willis G. Mansfield, and Harold M. Swope _ 31, 1968 Lawrence A. Webster, Robert L. Schmidt Abstract When pa~r~ng birds for stimulighting experimentation no consideration was given the age of the breeders. It was found that first year layers averaged 34.72 eggs per hen, while second and third year hens averaged 18.06 eggs. This was very valuable information, but completely nullified the reliability of data pertaining to stimulighting. �- 70 - EXPERIMENTAL BREEDING OF HUNGARIAN PARTRIDGE Harold M. Swope Findings The 50 pairs of mated Huns produced a total of 1,203 eggs for an average of 24 eggs per hen. A 42 percent hatching success resulted in 511 chicks. When the birds were paired and placed in the experimental pens no consideration was given to the age of the breeders. This over-sight made it impossible to evaluate the effects of stimulighting, however, valuable information was obtained on the birds to retain for future production efforts. The 12 pairs of birds subjected to stimulighting laid 422 eggs, of which 80.34 percent were fertile and 45.02 percent (190) hatched. The 38 hens not furnished stimulighting laid 781 eggs. (321) hatched, with a 75.16 percent fertility. Only 41.10 percent The preceding figures mean little, however, for all the Huns given extra light were birds hatched the previous spring. These were found to be much better producers than second and third year breeders. Production records were kept according to age of the breeders and revealed the fo11owing~ Eighteen pairs of first year birds produced 625 eggs, or 34.72 eggs per hen. The 32 pairs of second and third year Huns laid 578 eggs, averaging 18.06 per hen. As a result of this important bit of information was selected from chicks hatched in 1968. Segment Objectives: 1. To determine if stimulighting increases the 1969 breeding stock fertile egg production. Procedures: 1. Artificial light (two hours) was supplied to 12 breeding pens, each containing a pair of Hungarian partridge. Thirty-eight pairs of Huns received only normal light. Records were kept on egg production and hatching success. Recommendations: Hungarian partridge the year. breeding stock should be selected from young birds of �April, - 71 - JOB PROGRESS REPORT RESEARCH SEGMENT COLORADO State of ------------------------- Project No. W-37-R-21 12 Work Plan No. Title of Job: Period PROJECT Job No. 10 Relationships of the Productivity and Distribution of Wild Turkeys on the Uncompahgre Plateau to the Environment Covered: Personnel: Game Bird Survey April 1, 1967 to March 31, 1968 Gary T. MYers Objectives: (1) To determine the size, distribution, turkey population on the Uncompahgre and productivity Plateau. of the wild (2) Record movements of wild turkeys and determine affect these movements. how environmental factors (3) Determine the sex and age structure of the turkey kill on the Uncompahgre Plateau to provide estimates of total harvest and Aize of the turkey population. (4) Determine the vegetative types present on the wild turkey summer and winter range and the species composition and abundance of food producing species within each type. Also determine the elevation, describe topography, and record certain climatic factors on part of the better turkey summer and winter ranges. Progress: Field work was completed and vegetative data summarized has started on a technical bulletin covering all phases Future Plans: A concentrated effort will be made to complete for a technical bulletin by July 31, 1968. Prepared for analysis. of this job. Work a rough draft of the manuscript by: Gary T. MYers Assistant Researcher 1968 ��April, 1968 - 73 - JOB PROGRESS REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of ~C~OL~O~RA~D~O~ Project No. W-37-R-2l Work Plan No. 12 Title of Job: Wild Turkey Roost Study Period Covered: April Personnel: _ Game Bird Survey Job No. 1, 1967 to March 12 31, 1968 Donald M. Hoffman Abstract A complete tally of trees 8 inches d.b.h. and up was made on 10 summer roosting sites to study preference for roosting trees. Results indicate that wild turkeys seek the overmature (old growth) age class of trees for roosting purposes and prefer ponderosa pine when available. In areas where ponderosa pine are not readily available, Engelmann spruce, white fir, Douglas fir, or narrowleaf cottonwood are utilized. All 9 winter roosting sites and 8 of the 10 summer roosting sites are in un logged tracts of timber. Many of these unlogged tracts are left due to inaccessibility of the site, while some are left for aesthetic purposes. To date,no roosting sites have been located in second growth tracts of timber. Density of trees (8 inches d.b.h. and up) on 8 unlogged summer sites averaged 64 trees per acre and ranged in number from 24 to 108. Density of trees on 2 logged-over summer sites averaged 30 trees per acre and ranged from 26 to 34. The latter two sites each averaged 61 trees per acre prior to logging as determined by stump counts. A selection method of cutting, which removed approximately half of the old growth, unevenaged ponderosa pine, did not appear to be detrimental to use of these sites for roosting purposes. �- 74 Objectives: 1. To determine the physical characteristics within a mountain type range. 2. To determine use of roosts by wild turkeys and their importance management of the species. Procedures: 1. Physical 2. of roosting sites and trees in the characteristics. A. Comparison of trees available on summer sites with trees utilized for roosting. 1. Perimeters of known summer sites were measured with a measuring tape to secure estimate of acreage involved. 2. Roosting trees formerly identified through presence of accumulated droppings were again identified using field sketches. 3. All trees (8 inches d.b.h. and up) were measured. 4. Trees were classified by age classes as follows: Ponderosa pine -- Dunning's classification (Westveld, 1939) Other species -- Dead Overmature - 22 inches d.b.h. and above Mature - 14 through 2l~ inches d.b.h. Young or thrifty mature - 8 through l3~ inches d.b.h. B. Densities of trees were determined by: 1. Tally of all trees (8 inches d.b.h. and up) on the various summer sites. 2. Tally of stumps from logging operations on the two logged-over summer sites. Use characteristics. A. All work relating to this objective has been completed and reported on in past segments. No additional work was accomplished during this segment. �- 75 - WILD TURKEY ROOST STUDY Donald M. Hoffman Introduction Merriam's turkeys in Colorado have shown a distinct tendency toward seasonal altitudinal migrations. For this reason, roosting sites have been classified as either winter or summer based upon the main period of use. Information pertaining to composition and density of timber tracts comprising the 10 summer roosting sites was gathered in order to compare characteristics of trees used for roosting with characteristics of trees available. The summer sites were selected for this study because these are more compact than the winter sites. Results obtained are, however, thought to be applicable to both summer and winter roosting sites. Composition of Roosting Sites Of 19 roosting sites located to date, including 10 summer and 9 winter sites, all are composed of old growth, unevenaged stands of timber. No roosting sites have been found in second growth tracts of timber. Sixteen roosting sites (85 percent) were located in either pure stands of ponderosa pine or in stands consisting primarily of ponderosa pine but also containing mixtures of white fir, Douglas fir, aspen, and/or narrowleaf cottonwood. One roosting site (5 percent) was located in a mixed stand of Engelmann spruce, alpine fir, and bristlecone pine; one (5 percent) was located in a mixed stand of narrowleaf cottonwood and white fir; and one (5 percent) was located in a mixed stand of white fir, aspen, and ponderosa pine. The 10 summer roosting sites were classified as predominantly ponderosa pine (8 sites), Engelmann spruce (1 site) or narrowleaf cottonwood (1 site). Table 1 lists numbers of trees and percentages by species found within these summer sites. Density of Timber Of the 10 summer sites, 8 (80 percent) were in unlogged, old-growth tracts of timber and 2 (20 percent) have been selectively logged in past years with approximately half of the old growth timber removed. Within the 8 unlogged summer sites, trees (8 inches d.b.h. and up) averaged 64 per acre and ranged in number from 24 to 108. Within the 2 logged summer sites, trees averaged 30 per acre and ranged in number from 26 to 34. A tally of stumps indicated that, prior to logging, these 2 sites averaged 61 trees per acre and ranged in number from 50 to 72. �Table l,--A comparison of trees available on ten summer roostin~ sites with trees used for roosts, Number trees (8ttd,b,h,&uE2 Available Number trees ~8"d,b,h, & uE2 utilized OverYoung-thrifty OverYoung-thrifty Type of Site Species ]J Dead mature Mature mature Dead mature Mature mature Ponderosa pine (eight sites) Abco 0 1 ( 1%) 1 ( 1%) 14 ( 7%) 0 1 ( 2%) 0 0 Pipo 5 ( 3%) 48 (25%) 33 (17%) 66 (35%) 2 ( 4%) 43 (81%) 7 (13%) 0 Potr 0 0 0 3 ( 2%) 0 0 0 0 Psta 0 0 ..l§. ( 9%) 0 0 0 0 0 Sub-totals 5 49 34 101 2 44 7 0 Totals 189 trees 53 trees Engelmann spruce (one site) Ab1a 0 0 0 1 ( 3%) 0 0 0 0 Piar 0 1 ( 3%) 0 0 0 0 0 0 Pien ~ (15%) ~ (15%) 13. (30%) 14 (34%) 0 ..!:. (100%) 0 0 Sub totals 6 7 12 15 0 4 0 0 Totals 40 trees 4 trees Narrow1eaf cottonwood (one site) Abco 0 1 ( 6%) 0 2 (12%) 0 0 0 0 Poan ..1. (41%) -.1. (12%) 0 .2. (29%) ..!:. (100%) 0 0 0 Sub-totals 0 8 2 7 0 4 (5 0 Totals 17 trees 4 trees 1/ Key to species abbreviations: Abco -- white fir (Abies concolor) Ab1a -- alpine fir (Abies 1asiocarEa) Piar -- bristlecone pine (~ aristata) Pien -- Engelmann spruce (~ engelmanni) Pipo -- ponderosa pine (Pinus Eonderosa) Poan -- narrowleaf cottonwood (PoEu1us angustifolia) Potr -- aspen (PoEulus tremuloides) Pst a -- Douglas fir (Pseudotsuga taxifolia) -.J 0\ �- 77 - Both of the logged sites are located within the San Isabel National Forest and are being managed under a selection method of cutting. This method of cutting, which removed approximately half of the old growth trees, did not appear to be detrimental for the use of the sites by wild turkeys for roosting purposes. Use of Roosts Only information needed to complete the overall study prior to publication was secured during this segment. No additional work was accomplished on the study to determine use characteristics. Literature Cited Westveld, R. H. 1939. Applied silviculture in the United States. Wiley and Sons, Inc. New York. pp. 439, 466-467. Prepared by: Donald M. Hoffman Wildlife Researcher John ��April, - 79 JOB PROGRESS RESEARCH PROJECT State of __ -=C-=O-=L~O=-=RA~D=-O-=---_ Project No. W-37-R-2l ~~~~~~------------ Work Plan No. 12 Title of Job: Experimental Period Covered: April Personnel: REPORT SEGMENT Game Bird Survey Job No. Habitat Improvement 1, 1967 to March 13 for Wild Turkeys 31, 1968 Hugh R. Jones, J. Frank Cordova, Clifford A. Moser, and John Serra assisted with various aspects of the study. To these individuals and to the various landowners who permitted use of their land for the study, I express my sincere appreciation. Abstract A total of 382 turkeys in 14 wintering flocks was counted during the 196768 period within the extensive study area of approximately 900 square miles of range. This population is 13 birds less than the 395 counted during the 1966-67 wintering period. By type of area, 150 birds in five flocks were counted within the five developmental study areas and 31 birds in four flocks were counted within the five control study areas. In addition, 201 birds in five flocks were counted within other miscellaneous wintering areas. A sex-ratio of 52 males: 100 females was calculated for the 1967-68 period based upon a sample of 239 Merriam's turkeys observed at close range. Twenty-seven successful hens averaged 5.4 young per brood during 1967 compared with an average of 6.0 young per brood for 41 successful hens during 1966. Based upon Game Management Division data, the kill of turkeys within Game Management Unit Number 85 in 1967 during the open seasons of April 29-May 7 and October 7-15, was ten birds more (120 in 1967 compared with 110 in 1966) than killed in 1966 during the one open season from October 1-9. Numbers of hunters increased from 174 to 294. The number of turkeys killed in 1967 (120) is approximately 30 percent of the minimum wintering population of 395 counted during the 1966-67 period. 1968 �- 80 - Weather during the winter of 1967-68 was severe with a total of 169 inches of snowfall recorded for the Copper King Gulch weather station, elevation 8,000 feet, from September, 1967 through March, 1968. The known wintering grounds were snow covered from early December, 1967 through mid-March, 1968 except for a few south facing slopes which cleared from time to time. High winds accompanied many of the snows so that deep drifts blocked roads and made travel into the wintering areas difficult. Wintering populations of turkeys were relatively stable where supplemental feeding practices were conducted, reflecting the severe winter conditions prevailing. Green grass was available in most wintering areas by mid-February, 1968 and the regular spring dispersal of birds had started by late March, 1968. Development work of baled oat hay study areas from a five acre food feed. again consisted of providing supplemental feed in the form and whole grain (oats and maize) within five developmental early November, 1967 through mid-March, 1968. In addition, plot of cultivated oats was available for supplementary The five acre experimental food plot planted to cultivated oats in Sarcillo Canyon was used by a resident population of 73 turkeys during the wintering period of 1967-68 except for the period from early December, 1967 through mid-January, 1968 when heavy snows covered the plot. During this period, baled oat hay was used to hold the birds in the area until the food plot became bare enough for utilization. Objective: To determine the value of development of wintering grounds through the use of supplemental feed or food plots on wild turkey numbers, distribution, and harvest. Procedures: 1. Collect and record background information. 2. Map study areas. 3. Determine sex-ratio annual population counts. 4. Determine annual reproductive 5. Determine seasonal 6. Determine turkey kill and hunting pressure through hunter use of Game Management Division kill data. 7. Provide supplemental feed through the use of baled oat hay and whole grain or cultivated oat plots within selected areas and study effects. levels through wintering distribution period flock and success through brood counts. through field checks. checks and �- 81 EXPERIMENTAL HABITAT IMPROVEMENT FOR WILD TURKEYS Donald M. Hoffman Introduction Population dynamics and kill trends in relation to experimental habitat improvement measures consisting of supplemental feeding practices and use of food plots planted to cultivated oats are being investigated in this study. Investigations have been in progress for a four-year period. As with previous segments, most of the information gathered is presented in tabular form. Efforts during this segment have been directed toward securing accurate population, sex-ratio, brood count, weather, and natural food production information. Work on the mapping of study areas has been completed and no further work was accomplished on the collection and recording of background information. Findings Annual Population Levels Annual population levels were again determined through flock and sex-ratio counts of birds on wintering grounds. Populations observed in areas of supplemental feeding were found to be relatively stable during the winter of 1967-68, reflecting the severe winter conditions which prevailed from early December, 1967 through mid-March, 1968. Figure 1 shows a wintering flock of turkeys on the Spanish Peaks Management Area during January, 1968. A total of 382 turkeys in 14 flocks was counted during the 1967-68 period within the extensive study area of approximately 900 square miles of range. The locations of these flocks and numbers of birds are shown in Figure 2. This population is composed of 13 birds less than the 395 birds counted in 11 flocks during the 1966-67 period. Numbers of birds and locations of flocks for the 1967-58 period are listed in Table 1. By type of area, 150 birds in five flocks (21 birds more than counted during the 1966-67 period) were counted in the five developmental study areas and 31 birds in four flocks (three birds more than counted during the 1966-67 period) were counted in the five control study areas. No birds could be located within one developmental and two control study areas. In addition, 201 birds in five flocks (37 less than counted during the 1966-67 period) were counted in other miscellaneous wintering areas within the extensive study area. A sex-ratio of 52 males: 100 females was calculated for the 1967-68 period based upon a sample of 239 Merriam's turkeys observed at close range. Of the 382 turkeys counted, 293 (77 percent) were counted in locations where supplemental feed or food plots were available and 89 (23 percent) were counted in locations where supplemental feed or food plots were not known to have been available. More than half (58 percent) of the birds wintered in �~ •• ·-410 oi Figure 1. -- • • ",,\ '-. •....,.. Turkeys using the five acre cultivated oat food plot on the Spanish Peaks Management Area under heavy snow conditions. January 24, 1968. (D.Hoffman,photo). �- 83 ,, , T31 S ) <'0' I r , , r r '- - -.l'--:~"C::":Cl~',l"""-.L(~; : ',I: , , I I, ;1 r 32 S :' s. I ~.~1~'·'" I I r r !--~!- -:.,'. ".;-:"-- N '0' T335 T,,34 S T.35S ro' Figure 2. Approximate locations of 14 wintering flocks during the 1967-68 period with numbers of birds indicated. �Table 1. -- Wintering populations of Merriam's turkeys - October, 1967 to March, 1968. Winterin~ POEulation Type of Adult Juv. Number Area Area Males Males Hens Unc l as s , Total Flocks Developmental (D) 1. Middle Creek 6 5 45 56 1 2. East Indian Creek 5 12 8 25 1 3. Cucharas River 0 0 4. Wahatoya Canyon-Bear Creek Mesa 7 15 2 24 1 5, North Trujillo Creek-Mavricio Canyon 3 8 27 7 45 2 Sub-totals 21 13 99 17 150 5 - - - - - Source11 FC FC FC FC FC Control (C) 1. Huerfano River-Mosca Pass 2. Pass Creek 3. Santa Clara Creek 4. Wilkins Creek-Whiskey Creek 5. North Fork Sub-totals -"0 - 16 9 (; 3T 4 Other (0) 1. Sarci 110 Canyon 15 9 49 73 2 FC -- - --- - 0 1 1 1 0 0 5 RR RR FC RR RR RR 14 2. Burro Canyon .3, Del Aqua Canyon 4. Apishapa Canyon 5, Abbotts Creek-Duling Creek 6. Wet Canyon 7, School Creek Sub-totals TOTALS - 8 - 2 14 - - 5 2 -2 - 13 2 0 16 0 --- 50 120 0 70 8 50 0 0 201 143 382 - TI 9 49 44 38 157 - 6 70 - 11 Key to abbrev.: FC-Flock count; RR-Rancher or other report Indicated sex-ratio = 52 males:lOO females based upon a sample of 239 birds. Supplemental feed provided by landowner in area 03. 2 1 0 1 0 FC, RR FC RR FC RR Dates of Best Counts 1-2-68 2-27-68 1-30-68 2-1-68 & 2-21-68 1-12-68 1-12-68 1-25-68 CP +" 1-24-68 & 2-27-68 3-21-68 �- 85 - 160 140 120 100 80 60 <, <, 40 <, <, " Control areas .... ..•..••. """'- .....• , '" ---------- ------ 20 1963-64 1964-65 1965-66 Wintering Figure 3. -- Winter populations 1966-67 1967-68 Period of Merriam's turkeys, 1963-64 to 1967-68. �- 86 either the developmental areas or in Sarcillo in developmental and control area populations Canyon. Figure 3 shows trends from 1963-64 through 1967-68. Brood eounts Brood counts to determine reproductive success were continued within the various study areas and reports of broods were secured from individuals considered to be reliable. Table 2 summarizes the results of these surveys. Table 2.--Summary of brood count information - 1967. Type of Area Hens Poults Developmental (five areas) Control (five areas) Other areas Totals 7 5 15 36 31 78 145 27 JJ Average Brood Size 5.1 6.2 5.2 5.4 l! Of these 27 broods tallied, writer Average and the remainder 12 hens with 79 poults were counted were reported by other individuals. by the In 1967, fewer broods were found (27 compared with 41 in 1966) and broods averaged smaller (5.4 young per brood compared with 6.0 young per brood in 1966). Broods were later in appearing during 1967 in many areas so it is possible that some broods were entirely missed until fully grown. During 1967, 12 hens with 79 young were counted by the writer, and the remainder were reported by various other individuals. In Sarcillo Canyon, it appeared that the heavy hunting pressure during the spring gobbler season in 1967 resulted in the resident flock moving to surrounding canyons for the nesting season. This was the first Summer in over 15 years that incubating hens and broods were not observed regularly in the Sarcillo Canyon area during the nesting and brood rearing period. Flocks were observed to move back into upper Sarcillo Canyon prior to the regular fall hunting season in October, and a good kill was recorded for the area (Table 4). Seasonal Distribution Observations of adult birds, broods, nesting site locations, field sign locations, and known hunter kill locations during the spring through winter periods are summarized in Table 3. The regular spring dispersal during 1968 had started in most wintering areas by late March, 1968 (Table 6). Kill and Hunting Pressure Merriam's turkey hunter kills and indicated hunting pressure within Game Management Unit Number 85, comprising all of the extensive study area except �Table 3. -- Summary of Merriam's turkey distribution checks. Period Spring, summer, and early fall, 1967 ~I Number Observations 3 4 18 11 18 4 Sub-total Range Mean II Type of Data - Spring gobbler season kill locations (April 29-May 7) Nesting site locations Brood rearing locations Adult birds observed locations Field sign locations Fall season kill locations (October 7-15) Elevational Range (ft.) Mean Elevation (ft 0) 9,200 8,450 7,000 to 8,250 7,200 to 8,600 7,300 to 9,400 7,400 to 10,300 7,300 to 9,400 7,750 7,950 8,500 8,600 8,050 7,900 to 58 7,200 to 10,300 8,250 Late fall, and winter 1967-68 11 14 Wintering flock locations 7,250 to 8,700 8,000 11 Nesting site locations - includes harem flocks observed or nesting hen field sign observed; ~I 11 Brood rearing locations - includes locations where broods observed or reported; Field sign locations - includes observations of droppings, tracks, shed feathers, scratchings, or reports. Period early May to late September except for open seasons where dates are listed. Period early December to mid-March, 1968. CD -J �- 88 for the Huerfano River-Mosca Pass and Pass Creek control areas are summarized in Table 4. Trends in numbers of turkeys killed and numbers of hunters within Unit Number 85 from 1963 through 1967 are shown in Figure 4. The kill of turkeys within Unit Number 85 in 1967 during hunting seasons April 29-May 7 and October 7-15 was ten birds higher than in 1966 (120 in 1967 compared to 110 in 1966) during the one open season October 1-9, according to Game Management Division data. Numbers of hunters increased from 174 to 294. Much of the increase in hunting pressure and kill has resulted from the purchase of the Spanish Peaks Management Area by the Department, and publicity given the area in various news media. The number of turkeys killed in 1967 (120) is approximately 30 percent of the minimum wintering population of 395 counted during the 1966-67 period. On the Spanish Peaks Management Area in upper Sarcillo Canyon, hunters killed 41 birds during both the spring and fall seasons in 1967. This is about 54 percent of the minimum wintering population of 76 recorded during the previous winter period. During the regular fall season, 170 hunters killed 36 birds. This is approximately 55 percent of the pre-season population of 65 counted on October 2, 1967. Additional birds moved into the area from other ranges after the close of the fall season and a wintering population of 73 was recorded (Table 1). Continued counts should show whether this flock can withstand this increasing hunting pressure. Development Work Development work again consisted of providing supplemental feed in the form of baled oat hay, whole oats, and/or maize within the five developmental study areas from early November, 1967 through mid-March, 1968. In upper Sarcillo Canyon, personnel of the Southeast Region planted a ten acre cultivated oat plot, of which five acres were left standing and five acres were cut and baled. The whole grain was purchased locally. Feedgrounds were serviced weekly in-so-far as possible. Field checks of both development and control study areas were made to determine populations, distribution, periods of use, and record information on predation, disease, crippling incidence, and poaching activity. Figure ~ shows a supplemental feeding station late in the winter following heavy turkey use. Table 5 lists the amounts and costs of supplemental feed used during the winter of 1967-68 and costs of the experimental five acre food plot. Table 6 lists information on periods of use and times of spring dispersal for the fourth-year of the study. Of the five developmental study areas, two (Middle Creek and East Indian Creek) had consistently heavy use from early November, 1967 through late March, 1968; one (Bear Creek Mesa) had consistently heavy use from midNovember, 1967 through late March, 1968; one (North Trujillo Creek) had consistently heavy use from late November, 1967 through late March, 1968; and one (Cucharas River) had no use during the winter period due to the flock moving before the feeding station was established. Periods of heaviest use of feedgrounds could again be correlated with prevailing weather conditions. �Table 4.--Merriam's turkey kill and hunting pressure within extensive study area! Field Checks Number Number Approximate Open season turkeys hunters Drainage and Type of elevation Year dates killed (ft,) area • area 1967 Apr. 29Sarcillo Canyon 17 5 88 0 7,900 May 7 State land, McDonald and Serra Ranches 2 2 Middle Creek D 8,250 Middlemist Ranch 1 1 Spring Creek D 9,200 San Isabel N,F. -8Sub-totals 91 Oct. 7-15 Sub-totals TOTALS 36 170 8 19 1 3 1 3 46 54 195 286 11 For Game Management Unit #85. Sarcillo Canyon State land, McDonald and Serra Ranches Del Aqua Canyon Ze1e Ranch Burro Canyon Dochter Ranch East Indian Creek San Isabel N.F. 0 7,900 0 7,300 0 7 ,600 D 9,400 Game M~t, Number turkeys killed OJ \D 120 120 Data from hunter report cards. II During the big game season Oct. 28-Nov. 3, 1967, six deer were killed by 106 hunters. Div, Data ]:1 Number hunters 294 294 �- 90 - 340 300 280 I I / I I 240 I / I I 200 I I Number hunters I / ~ 160 / / ~ / 120 / .----_....... / . ••.•.....•.. ..••........•. / / ----- . 80 40 -._---- 1963 1964 1965 1966 1967 Year Figure 4. -- Merriam i 9 turkey kill and hunting pre ssure within Game Management Uni t Number 85, 1963 to 1967. Data from (;ame Management Division 0 �Table 5.--Amounts and costs of sUEElemental feed and food Elot - 1967-68. Area Middle East Indian Cucharas Bear Creek Item Creek Creek River Mesa Hhole oats (lbs.) 700 950 0 350 Whole maize (lbs.) 350 100 250 500 11 29 Oat hay (bale,) 3 15 $ 31.95 Cost of feed $ 36.33 $ 49.17 Cost of five acre food plot (seed and land preparation) Sub-totals Number turkeys wintered 56 25 0 24 1.97 Average cost per bird $ 0.65 $ $ 1.33 - - North Trujillo Creek 400 650 16 $ 37.68 Sarcillol/ Canl:on Total 2,400 0 0 1,850 36 110 $ 22.68 $ 177 .81 f-' $ 45 0.84 52.00 $ 74.68 $ 73 $ 1.02 $ 52.00 229.81 223 1.03 1/ Five acre food plot with cultivated oats is located in upper Sarcillo Canyon on Spanish Peaks Management Area. 2/ Costs basis: - Whole oats @ $3.00 / 100 Ibs. Whole maize @ $2.40 / 100 lbs. Baled oat hay @ $0.63 / bale \0 �1/ Table 6.--Information on use of experimental wintering grounds - 1967-68.Date .'~-----~-----------------------~T~i-m-e---o~f~----Type of Feeding No Light Heavy Spring Area Area Started Utilization Utilization Utilization Dispersal Developmental Middle Creek Nov. 6, 1967 early Nov., 1967late Mar., 1968 late Mar., 1968 Nov. 3, 1967 Ease In~ian early Nov., 1967late Mar., 1968 ree late Mar., 1968 Cucharas River Nov, 3, 1967 early Nov. , 1967 'rB late Mar., 1968 Bear Creek Nov. 6, 1967 early Nov.,67 mid Nov., 1967 Mesa mid Nov., 67 late Mar.,1968 North Truj illo Nov. 7, 1967 early Nov. ,67 late Nov., 1967 Creek late Nov.,67 lateMar., 1968 Other Sarcillo Canyon early Nov., 1967 late Mar., 1968 late Mar., 1968 11 Dates are approximate and were determined by weekly checks of areas. Weather during period early November, 1967 to early December, 1967 was relatively mild and open. Areas covered with deep snows during early December, 1967 and continued to be snow covered except for a few south facing slopes until mid-March, 1968. - �- 93 - Figure 5.--· Site of baled-oat hay supplemental feeding station on North Trujillo Creek late in winter following heavy turkey use. March 13, 1968. (D. Hoffman, photo) Weather Continuous weather infonnation was again collected at two stations during this reporting period with the results summarized in Tables 7 through 9. One weather station is located within the East Indian Creek wintering area, northwest of the Spanish Peaks, at an elevation of 8,000 feet and the other is located within the Sarcillo Canyon wintering area, southwest of the Spanish Peaks, at an elevation of 7,900 feet. The weather during the summer of 1967 was characterized by very high rainfall. This was followed by one of the most severe winters on record for this region. Most of the wintering areas were snow covered from early December, 1967 through mid-March, 1968, except for a few south facing slopes which cleared from time to time. High winds accompanied many of the snows so that deep drifts blocked roads and made travel into the wintering areas difficult. Wintering populations were relatively stable where supplemental feeding practices were conducted, reflecting the severe winter conditions prevailing. Green grass was available in most wintering areas by mid-February, 1968. �- 94 Table 7.--Snowfall amounts measured within the East Indian Creek wintering area and in the town of LaVeta during the period September, 1967 to March, 1968. Area East Indian Creek LaVeta (Elev. 8,000 ft.) (Elev. 7,050 ft.) Number Amount Number Amount Year Month snows (in.) snows (in.) 1967 September 0 0 0 0 October 3 22 3 12 November 2 16 2 11 December 6 54 6 37 1968 January February March Totals Netural 4 5 4 24 11 31 ...1L 169 4 5 4 24 8 20 23 111 Food Production Food production levels during the summer of 1967 were found to be much improved over 1966. High summer moisture (Tables 8 and 9) resulted in grasses and weeds being benefited. Acorns and pine nut crops were found to be spotty; however, the late flowering species as rose, snowberry, and skunkberry benefited from the heavy rainfall. Twenty-three percent of the total population of turkeys counted during the winter of 1967-68 were found in locations where supplemental feed or food plots were not known to have been available, reflecting the high level of natural food production in 1967. In some instances, however, flocks were found to be ranging in areas below their normal wintering grounds, as occurred during the severe winter of 1963-64. Jopulation Limiting Factora Feathers from a Merriam's Turkey carcass were found on August 4, 1967 on the Ritzus property on North Trujillo Creek. This bird had been dead a long time and the cause of death was unknown. Feathers and bones from a mature gobbler were located on March 8, 1968 on the Spanish Peaks Management Area in Sarcillo Canyon. This bird probably died during the winter period; however, cause of death could not be determined. Four turkeys out of a total of 239 observed at close range in sex-ratio counts were observed to have been crippled. These included three in Sarcillo Canyon and one in North Trujillo Creek. No other instances of crippled, diseased, or dead birds were observed during this reporting period and no instances of illegal kills have been observed or reported. �Table 8. -- Annual su~ry (Station No. ~ Year 1967 of climatological data - East Indian Creek Area _ 1967-68. Site COEEer King Gulch: Elevation 82000 feet) Month Max. TemEeraturel Air of Mean Mean Weekly Weekly Max. Min, Min. April May June July August September October November December 66 83 80 85 82 78 73 67 56 64.4 74.5 75.6 82.8 79.8 76.5 69.5 62.3 51.6 11 10 30 35 31 23 9 - 4 -10 14.8 19.5 33.2 40.0 37.5 28.5 17.8 6.5 - 5.6 Mean of Weekly Max. & Min. 39.6 47.0 54.4 61.4 58.5 52.5 43.6 35.6 23.0 1968 ReI. Hum. % Mean of Weekly Max. & Min. 41.2 45.3 55.3 61.8 62.0 57.6 52.6 52.3 49.4 Wind Precipe Inches Water Total Miles Me.an Vel. Mph 0.25 3.98 2.50 2.67 5.65 1.21 2.17 0.39 1.69 1,785.5 2,838.6 2,338.1 1,583.9 1,596.6 2,139.1 2,757.3 1,917.5 3,893.6 2.6 4.4 2.8 2.3 2.2 2.8 3.7 3.3 4.5 \0 \.n January February March 56 56 63 51.0 51.0 54.6 Average Total 70.4 66.1 Instruments -11 - 5 - 6 7.8 1.0 6.3 3.8 26.0 28.6 29.2 49.8 50.5 49.2 16.9 41. 6 52.3 0.95 1.01 3.62 2,945.2 1,654.7 1,987.6 4.5 2.4 2.4 2,286.5 3.2 26.09 Maximum, minimum thermometers and hygrothermograph Hygrothermograph Precip. gauge Totalizing, 3-cup anemometer �Table 9.--Annua1 summary of climatological data - Sarci110 Canyon Area - 1967-68. (Station No.2: Site SEanish Peaks Manasement Area: Elevation 72900 feet) Hu;;~% Temperature, Air vF Wind Mean Mean Mean of Mean of Precipe Weekly Weekly Weekly Weekly Inches Total Mean Vel. Year Month Max. Max. Min. Min. Max._~ M~ .Max. & Min. Water --.------ Miles Mph 1967 71.2 April 73 11 17.0 44.1 45.7 0.71 2,924.4 4.2 May 85 78.5 16 22.3 50.4 46.3 2.47 1,422.7 2.2 June 85 77 .8 32 51.5 34.2 56.0 1.4 3.79 1,144.9 81.8 July 84 36 40.0 60.9 57.9 6.38 473.7 .7 August 81 79.8 39 40.5 60.1 58.0 4.79 579.1 .8 September 81 31.0 80.0 30 55.5 1.0 54.3 0.66 719.0 October 78 76.3 8 17.7 47.0 1.5 47.0 0.48 1,028.7 November 73 65.0 4 12.5 38.8 1.9 48.3 0.80 1,274.4 December 62 55.0 -6 -2.8 26.1 1.57 47.4 3,205.6 3.6 1968 January 64 31.3 57.5 -6 5.0 44.6 0.51 1,809.0 3.0 February 61 56.3 8.8 -1 32.5 49.0 0.44 986.7 1.4 March 68 58.8 8.4 -3 33.6 1.8 45.4 1,461.8 2.48 Average 74.6 69.8 13:3" 19.6 44.7 49.6 1,419.2 2.0 Total 25.08 Instruments Maximum, minimum thermometers and hygroHygroPrecip. Totalizing, 3-cup thermograph thermograEh gauge anemometer ~. ~~ReT-:- ----- - \.0 0\ �- 97 Food Plot Study During 1967, personnel of the Southeast Region plowed and seeded a ten acre plot to cultivated oats on the Spanish Peaks Management Area. An excellent crop of tall, dense, and well matured oats was produced. Onehalf of the plot (five acres) was cut and 180 bales of oat hay were produced. The remaining one-half of the plot (five acres) was left standing for the turkeys to harvest. Two flocks totaling 73 birds used the five acre standing food plot from the close of the big g~me season until heavy snows combined with high winds covered it in early December, 1967. From early December, 1967 until mid-January, 1968, the plot was not used because of the deep snows and inclement weather. During this period, approximately one ton (26 bales) of the oat hay was used to provide supplemental feed and hold the flocks in the area. No additional whole grain other than that found in the baled oat hay was supplied. In mid-January, 1968, the weather began moderating and the wild turkeys started scratching through the deep crusted snow of 12 to 18 inches to the feed. Heavy use continued through the remainder of the winter and into the spring period. Costs involved in land preparation and seed combined with the use of the 26 bales of oat hay resulted in costs per bird wintered being approximately equal to the average cost of using baled oat hay and whole grain at the supplemental feeding stations. Costs would, however, have been less had the use of the extra baled oat hay not been necessary. It is recommended that some of the cultivated oat crop in future years be cut and baled for emergency use to meet this demand. Prepared by: Donald M. Hoffman Wildlife Researcher ��April, 1968 - 99 - JOB PROGRESS REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO --------------------------- Project No. W-37-R-2l Work Plan No. Game Bird Survey 12 14 Job No. Title of Job: Use of Food Plots to Concentrate Period Covered: April 1, 1967 through March Personnel: Wild Turkeys 31, 1968 Gary T. Myers Abstract Plantings at two ten-acre fields, one at 7,200 feet elevation and the other at 8,300 feet elevation, located in Merriam's turkey habitat in west central Colorado suggest that winter wheat, winter rye and winter barley are crops suited to dryland conditions in turkey habitat on the Uncompahgre Plateau. The growing season is sometimes too short for spring wheat to mature, and climatic conditions are such that proso and millet sometimes fail to produce crops. Examination of fields for droppings and tracks revealed that turkeys were present at both experimental fields during the usual November turkey season but utilized only the upper food plot during the October season. If the abundance of droppings are indicative of preference, the turkeys at both food plots preferred wheat to barley, rye, proso, and millet. Droppings did not occur in sample areas within any crop other than wheat, at the upper food plot during October. But in November at the lower field, two of the 250 square meter sample areas in proso contained droppings, and one of the sample areas in barley contained a turkey dropping. In comparison, 21 of the 250 sample areas in wheat at the lower field contained turkey droppings. These and other findings suggest that food plots might be instrumental in achieving a more efficient turkey harvest, obtaining better distribution of turkeys throughout their habitat, and improving the condition of turkeys going into the nesting season. �- 100 Objectives: To determine the effects of small food plots on fall concentrations vest of wild turkeys. and har- 1. Determine which of five different crops mature and produce grain under dryland conditions at 7,200 and 8,300 feet elevation on the Uncompahgre Plateau. 2. Determine whether turkeys are concentrated the October and November turkey seasons. 3. Determine at the food plantings which crops, of those grown, are preferred during by turkeys. Procedures: 1. Two acres each of proso, foxtail millet, barley, wheat and rye were planted in two ten-acre fields to determine which crops would grow in the study areas. The proso and foxtail millet were planted on June 8 and 16, 1967. Other crops were seeded on September 21, 1966. 2. Turkey use during the October hunting season was determined in the upper field by dropping a hoop enclosing one square meter 20 times in each 0.4-acre plot of wheat prior to the season and 25 times in the same plot following the season. The percentage of square meter samples containing droppings was determined for each sample period. A chi-square test was used to measure the deviation of the observed percentages from those expected under the hypothesis that an equal percentage of hoops contained droppings before and after the season. In addition, the number of turkeys and abundance of droppings and tracks at each field were recorded, both before and following the October season and after usual November turkey hunting seasons. 3. The third objective, that of determining which crops are preferred by turkeys, was investigated at both fields. a. The upper plot was divided into twenty-five 0.4-acre plots and planted in a pattern so that each crop was equally available to turkeys. b. The approximate location of turkey droppings was recorded on a general map of the upper food plot to see if birds sought particular 0.4-acre plots. c. Following tqe October turkey season, a hoop enclosing one square meter was dropped 25 times at 10-step intervals in each of the 25 small plots in the upper field for a total of 125 times in each crop. In the lower field, or food plot, the same hoop was dropped 250 times at five step intervals in each crop. d. A table listing the 95% confidence interval for the binomial distribution was used to obtain confidence intervals for the percentage of hoops containing droppings in each crop. e. The crop growing in plots having a significantly higher percentage droppings was considered the crop preferred by turkeys. of �- 101 - USE OF FOOD PLOTS TO CONCENTRATE WILD TURKEYS Gary T. Myers The Colorado Division of Game, Fish and Parks might provide better habitat for Merriam's turkey (Meleagris gallopavo merriami) in western Colorado by establishing strategically located small grain fields to provide winter food for turkeys and to concentrate them for harvest. Thus a study was initiated to determine which of five different crops produce grain under dryland conditions at 7,200 and 8,300 feet elevation on the Uncompahgre Plateau; which of these crops are preferred by turkeys; and whether or not turkeys concentrate at food plantings during hunting seasons in October and November. Study Area Two 10-acre study sites on the Uncompahgre National Forest were fenced by the Forest Service. One field is on Craig Point at about 7,200 feet elevation and six miles east of Norwood, Colorado. Ponderosa pine, pinyonjuniper, oak brush and grassland types are present on Craig Point where more than 100 turkeys once wintered. The other field, approximately 8,300 feet in elevation and one mile northeast of Lewis Reservoir, is associated with aspen, oak brush, ponderosa pine, sagebrush and grassland. Water and roost sites are available near both food plots. Climatic conditions were approximated from weather data collected in Sanborn Park, less than 6 miles distant, at an elevation of 7,800 feet. The Park received an average of 15.68 inches of moisture annually during the l2-year period 1955 to 1967. The l2l-day period between May 15 and September 13, 1967, was free of killing frost, but temperatures reached 320 F as late as June 13. At least 7.86 inches of rain fell during the growing season in 1967. The lower food plot on Craig Point, 600 feet lower than Sanborn Park, probably offers slightly milder conditions, although the frost-free period is probably similar to that at the Park. Craig Point received less rainfall in 1967 than Sanborn Park; only 3.5 inches during the 3-month period of July, August and September. Meanwhile, the other field or upper plot received 4.53 inches of moisture; 1.96 inches less than Sanborn Park. Due to higher elevation, killing frosts probably occurred at the upper food plot until June 15, 1967. The growing season at this plot, therefore, was only about 90 days in 1967. Results and Discussion Food Plot Establishment: In 1965, before initiating the present study, food plots were chisel-plowed two directions, harrowed and seeded to spring wheat with a grain drill as soon as the soil was dry enough for plowing. Spring �- 102 wheat was planted in the lower field on June 8, and in the upper field six days later. Crop growth terminated when snow fell on September 20. Most wheat in both fields failed to mature and produce grain. As a result of the short growing season, further shortened by the spring thaw, catch crops of proso and foxtail millet were planted the following spring. Two acres of proso and two acres of foxtail millet were planted in each field on June 14 and 15, 1966. A good stand of both proso and millet came up in the lower field, but millet produced almost no grain, probably because of slow growth due to poor moisture conditions and to what seemed to be an unusually cool summer. The proso produced some grain, although many seed heads were empty. In the upper field, a very poor stand of both proso and millet produced minor amounts of proso, and even less millet. This again was probably due to inadequate moisture. Wheat stuble from the previous year's crop was so dense that a disc plow, instead of the chisel plow, had to be used for seedbed preparation. As a result, considerably more soil moisture was lost in the upper field than in the lower field. The following spring, areas previously planted to proso and millet were chisel plowed two directions, harrowed and once more seeded to equal acreages of proso and millet. Dates of planting were June 8, 1967 in the lower field and June 16, 1967 in the upper field. Both crops produced grain in the fall of 1967. On September 21, 1966, six acres in each field were planted to equal acreages of winter wheat, winter rye and winter barley. All crops came up that fall and grew to a height of about one inch before winter. All three crops matured and produced excellent grain crops during the summer of 1967 (Fig. 1). Because information was gathered over a period of only one to two years, no final conclusions can be drawn regarding the suitability of crops to climatic conditions in the study area. However, it seems that crops planted in the fall are more likely to mature in the sometimes short growing season than are crops planted in the spring. Fall crops also utilize moisture present following spring snow melt, much of which is lost to spring crops through seedbed preparation. Perhaps the main disadvantage of raising fall crops is the possibility of winter kill. Additional field replications are needed to determine how often winter crop loss occurs in this area. Preferences Indicated for Various Crops: Data used to determine turkey preferences for the various crops were collected at the upper food plot on October 16, 1967. Turkey droppings occurred within sampled square meter plots located in three of the five wheat fields. Droppings did not occur in sample areas within any of the remaining four crops. Turkey droppings were present in 17 (13.6%) of the 125 square meter samples in wheat. There were significantly more droppings in wheat than in other crops (based on a comparison of confidence limits set by the use of the 95% confidence interval table for the binomial distribution). If the abundance of droppings is indicative of preference, turkeys preferred wheat to proso, foxtail millet, rye and barley in the upper food plot. This conclusion might also be reached by examination of the general location of droppings found in this field. �- 103 - Figure 1. Rye was almost shoulder high in upper food plot and produced an abundant supply of grain, as did other crops planted. The pattern of droppings follows the general distribution of wheat plots. Droppings are noticeably absent in most other crops growing in the upper field (Fig. 2). In the lower field, 21 of the 250 sample areas in wheat contained droppings, and one of the sample areas in barley contained a turkey dropping (Table 1). Significantly more droppings were found in wheat (at the 95% confidence interval) than in other crops. Table l.--Number and percentage of one square meter sample plots placed in each crop growing in the Craig Point Food Plot which contained turkey droppings on November 27, 1967. Confidence limits* Total Plots containing droppings Percent Percent No. Crop plots 0 1 Barley 250 1 0.4 0 1 Rye 250 0 0.0 12 Wheat 5 250 21 8.4 Proso 2 0 4 250 0.8 0 1 Millet 250 0 0.0 - - * Confidence limits (95%) were obtained from a binomial distribution table. �- 104 - PRO MIL BAR •"- ••••••• •••••• •• •• ••••• •••• •• • BAR . ..... • • • WHE •• • • • •••• • ••••••• •• ~.x •••• ••• • •••••• • ••••••• •• • •• ••• • .. ...- .... MIL MIL PRO .. . ".... ... •... ·x· •••••• • ••••• MIL BAR • •• •••• • % WHE ••• ••••••••••• •••••• •••• •• • ••• " ~ x· ••••••• Fig. 2. Pattern in which crops were planted in the upper food plot to make them as equally available to turkeys as possibleo Small x's represent the general location and indicate relative abundance of turkey droppings present in the upper food plot on October 16, 19670 �- 105 Photographs of each food plot were taken from a fixed wing aircraft by the Division photographer (Don Domenick) on January 23, 1968. Comparisons of these photographs with similar pictures taken before winter indicate that most tracks at the food plots occurred in wheat (Fig. 3, 4, 5 and 6). A visit to the lower food plot on foot four days later revealed that the tracks there were made by both deer and turkeys. Tracks at the upper food plot were not identified, but they were probably made by elk and turkey. Apparently turkeys preferred wheat to barley, rye, pro so and foxtail millet during the fall and winter. Results regarding crop preference are comparable to findings in New Mexico, where Spicer (1955) found that Merriam's turkeys preferred grains in the order listed; wheat, oats and rye.If As the wheat vanished, turkeys began to turn to oats and rye. Spicer cautioned that his report did not cover the critical winter months and that results should not be considered conclusive. If ••• In Missouri, Lewis (1967) states that of all cereal grains used in food plots, oats are the most successful.If According to Lewis, cowpeas, buckwheat, sorghums, corn and cultivated millets are also desirable foods for the eastern turkey (Meleagris gallopavo silvestris). It seems that oats were most successful because deer did not eat the crop before it could be utilized by turkeys. If ••• Webb (1963) concluded in South Carolina that Anderson wheat provided more feed for deer and turkeys than did oats. Three clovers (Crimson, Ladino and White Dutch) supported more insects and were even more preferred by turkeys than wheat. Webb estimated that wheat produced 113 pounds per acre of digested protein, while oats produced only 27 pounds per acre. Over 600 pounds of wheat were utilized per acre, while only 158 pounds of oats were utilized. Concentration of Turkeys at Food Plots During Hunting Seasons: Prior to this study, one small flock of turkeys used the upper food plot during the week before the October turkey season. However, no birds were killed in the viCinity of ei~her fopd plot during 1965, and neither area received turkey use the following winter. Checks made the next year, prior to, during and after both turkey seasons, indicated that turkeys did not use either planting. No tracks, droppings, or birds were seen or reported in either area in 1966. As all crops matured in the fall of 1967, turkey sign began to appear at the upper food plot. The regular 1967 turkey season continued from October 7 through October 15. One turkey per person could be killed during the season, between sunrise and sunset, with a longbow or 10 to 20 gauge shotgun. Turkey droppings were found within three of the twenty hoop samples in the 0.4-acre wheat plot in the upper field. Twelve, or 48%, of the twenty-five hoops dropped in the same small wheat plot, located in the northwest corner of the field, contained turkey droppings on October 16, following the turkey season. There was a difference at the .05 level of significance (Chi-square = 4.07 using Yates' correction) indicating that more droppings were present after the season than before the season. Thus, turkeys apparently used the upper food plot between October 4 and October 15, or during the general period of the turkey season. �- 106 - Fig. 30 Distribution of wheat in upper food plot. Fig. 4. Distribution of tracks in upper food plot. �- 107 - Fig. 5. Distribution of wheat in lower field. Fig. 6. Distribution of deer and turkey tracks in lower food plot can be compared with Fig. 6, bV matching underlined objects. �- 108 The lower field was also checked for turkey use prior to the season on October 4, 1967. No turkey droppings were present within any of the one square meter plots and no droppings were seen. On October 16, a visual inspection of the food plot again revealed no turkey droppings. Apparently birds did not use this food plot during the October season. In November, there is usually a turkey season on the Uncompahgre Plateau which opens the Saturday before Thanksgiving and closes the Sunday after Thanksgiving. However, no November season was held in 1967 due to a shortage of turkeys. Nevertheless, both fields were examined during this period to see if turkeys were using the food plots. Snow fell during the period of the usual November turkey season. Both old and new turkey tracks were discovered at both upper and lower fields on November 27, 1967, the day after what would have been the close of the turkey season. That same day, eight birds were seen at the spring near the Craig Point field, and nine other birds were observed feeding in the Craig Point food plot. Turkeys used both fields during the usual November turkey season. Turkey Harvest at Food Plots: Report card returns indicate that 25 hunters killed 13 turkeys on the Uncompahgre Plateau during 1967 hunting seasons. Due to the lack of pressure and small kill, no conclusion can be reached regarding the effect of the food plots on the turkey harvest. However, two of the 13 birds killed on the Uncompahgre Plateau were bagged near one of the grain fields. Potential Use of Food Plots by Managers MacDonald and Jantzen (1967) believe that the Merriam's turkey (Meleagris gallopavo ,!Uerriami) is generally underharvested. Certainly this is true of certain area in Colorado during years when birds are plentiful. Food plots might be strategically located to concentrate turkeys for harvest. According to Lathan (1956), "Food strips of cereals are often booby traps for turkeys. The hunters literally use them as baited areas and consequently may be able to overshoot the birds in that vicinity." A similar statement was made by critics regarding food plots in the southeastern states (Shaffer and Gwynn, 1967). In Georgia and Alabama, baiting is so successful that it has been declared illegal. Powel (1967) states, "It is possible to entirely eliminate a turkey population from a given area if this method of harvesting (baiting) were not outlawed." If food plots have a similar attraction to Merriam's turkey, grain fields might enable managers to better harvest these birds provided that precautions are taken to gaurd against over harvest. Strategically located food plots might also increase the carrying capacity by drawing turkeys into presently unoccupied habitat. Evidence exists which tends to support the idea that flocks introduced into certain winter habitat generally return to that habitat to winter. If a portion of the flock could be drawn into new areas by improving the food supply in those areas, perhaps more birds could be produced. Peterson (1967) is attempting something of this nature in the Black Hills of South Dakota. In addition, food plots might improve productivity of turkeys in areas where adequate food is lacking in winter. Ligon (1946) writes, "It is especially important that the ensuing years brood stock .•. go into the nesting period in good physical condition. If the birds lack fitness, timely and normal �- 109 nesting may be impossible." An important portion of the turkeys in Colorado winter in the pinyon-juniper forest type, most of which is grazed by cattle or sheep. In an important turkey winter area in the pinyon-juniper type on the Uncompahgre Plateau, summer understory cover consisted of 91% rock, litter and bare ground. The remaining portion of the understory contained 4% grass and grass like plants, 3% forbs, and 2% trees and shrubs. After fall grazing by cattle, the understory contained little food for turkeys. Apparently most food is provided by juniper in the overstory. Juniper berries comprised 81% of the total volume of all foods contained in the crops and gizzards from turkeys collected in Arizona during emergency periods when other foods were scarce (Reeves, 1950-51). If juniper berries do not provide an adequate diet, many of the turkeys in Colorado could enter the nesting season in poor physical condition. Literature Latham, R. M. 1956. Harrisburg, Pa. Cited Complete book of the wild turkey. 265pp. Stackpole Co., Lewis, J. B. 1967. Management of the eastern turkey in the ozarks and bottomland hardwoods, p. 371-408. In O. H. Hewitt, (Ed.), The wild turkey and its management. The Wildl. Society, Washington, D.C., and Valley Offset, Inc., Deposit, N. Y. Ligon, J. S. 1946. History and management of merriam's Univ. New Mexico Publ. in BioI. 1:84pp. wild turkey. MacDonald, D., and R. A. Jantzen. 1967. Management of the merriam's turkey, p. 493-534, In O. H. Hewitt, (Ed.), the wild turkey and its management. The Wildl. Society, Washington, D.C., and Valley Offset, Inc., Deposit N. Y. Petersen, L. E. 1967. Black hills turkey research P-R Proj. W-75-R-8. (Mimeo.) 1965-66. South Dakota Powell, J. A. 1967. Management of the Florida turkey and the eastern turkey in Georgia and Alabama, p. 409-451. In O. H. Hewitt, (Ed.)7 The wild turkey and its management. The Wildl. Society, Washington, D.C., and Valley Offset Inc., Deposit, N. Y. Reeves, R. H. 1950-51. Arizona merriam's P-R Proj. W-49-R. (Mimeo.) turkey management surveys. Ariz. Shaffer, C. H., and J. V. Gwynn. 1967. Management of the eastern turkey in oak-pine and pine forests of Virginia and the southeast, p. 303342. In O. H. Hewitt, (Ed.), The wild turkey and its management. The Wildl. Society, Washington, D.C., and Valley Offset, Inc., Deposit, N. Y. Spicer, R. L. 1955. Turkey habitat development P-R Proj. W-76-R-l. (Mimeo.) evaluation. New Mexico �- 110 - Webb, L. G. 1963· utilization of domestic forage crops by deer and wild turkeys with notes on insects inhabiting the crop. Proc. 17th Ann. Conf. SE Assn. Game and Fish Comm. 23pp. Prepared by: Gary T. MYers Assistant Researcher �,. III - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO Project No. W-37-R-21 Work Plan No. 13 Game Bird Survey 6 Job No. Title of Job: Summarization of Sharp-Tailed Grouse Studies Period Covered: April 1, 1967 to M3.rch31, 1968 Personnel: Glenn E. Rogers Objective: To compile, analyze, summarize, and publish all Colorado sharp-tailed grouse information in technical bulletin form. Procedure: Findings obtained under Work Plan 13, Jobs 1 through 6, and data from sharptailed grouse investigations by other organizations were compiled within an appropriate outline. Findings: A completed manuscript has been submitted for final editing. Prepared by: Glenn E. Rogers Assistant Researcher ��April, 1968 - 113 - JOB PROGRESS RESEARCH State of PROJECT REPORT SEGMENT COLORADO ---------------------------- Project No. Game Bird Survey W-37-R-21 Work Plan No. 15 ----------------------- Title of Job: Study of Mountain Period Covered: Personnel: April Job No. 2 ------------------------------ Quail Adaptability 1, 1967 to March 31, 1968 Glenn E. Rogers Abstract On January 25, 1968, 66 wild-trapped mountain quail from western Oregon were released on Indian Creek on the Uncompahgre Plateau. The local Wildlife Conservation Officer, Thomas Sherrill, personally sighted four mountain quail on the South Fork of Mesa Creek in June, 1967, and received reports from deer hunters of 42 quail observed in the same area on the 29th of October, 1967. �- 114 - Objectives: 1. To release 2. mountain To determine success quail in selected areas. of introductions. Procedures: Wild mountain quail from Oregon in accordance with trade agreement involving ptarmigan, were released in areas determined to be most suitable under Work Plan 15, Job 1. All available news media were used to inform people traveling or living in the area of the introductions. Ranchers, sportsmen, miners, and personnel of Federal and state agencies were contacted personally and requested to report all observations. Specific trips were made for personal observation. All reports were recorded and charted for evaluation. �- 115 - STUDY OF MOUNTAIN Glenn QUAIL ADAPTABILITY E. Rogers In troduc tion The release of mountain quail has been continued on the Indian Creek drainage of the encompahgre Plateau. Birds were obtained from Oregon under a trade agreement involving ptarmigan for mountain quail. On September 20, 1967, we trapped and shipped 15 ptarmigan to Oregon. Another shipment of 10 to 15 birds will be made in 1968. All mountain quail observed, since the initial release in 1965, have been in mixed brush, pinon-juniper types near 7) 000 feet in elevation. All observations, except one at the release site, have been from 4 to 25 miles south and east of the release site. Findings On January 24, 1968, we received a shipment of 66 wild-trapped quail from western Oregon. These birds were held overnight and released at 10:00 a.m. on the following day on the Uncompahgre Plateau. The release site was one mile east of the west boundary of the Uncompahgre Forest on the north side of the Outlaw Mesa road in the Indian Creek drainage. Snow depths in the area ranged from zero to three feet, with the south facing slope fairly bare to 9,000 feet elevation. The birds appeared to be in excellent condition; and, after a short flight on release, immediately began feeding, calling, and moving up the slope. The first 1967 sight report of mountain quail came from Wildlife Conservation Officer Thomas Sherrill who observed four and heard others on June 6. This observation was made while planting fish on the South Fork of Mesa Creek about one mile below or west of the forest boundary. On June 26 and on August 17, I walked up the South Fork of Mesa Creek but quail were not heard or seen. On July 19, Errol Ryland and Gary Myers, with the assistance of three hunting dogs, covered this same area without seeing birds but believed that they heard some. On the 28th of October, Wildlife Conservation Officer Thomas Sherrill checked a group of deer hunters from California camped just north of the South Fork of Mesa Creek. These hunters spoke of seeing mountain quail and were requested by Sherrill to keep track of one day's sightings. When contacted two days later they reported seeing 42 quail during a single day's deer hunting. �- 116 - The South Fork of Mesa Creek occupies a steep brush covered valley and is approximately eight airline miles southeast of the original release site. The quail Mr. J. J. Slogett observed last year were in the same range ty-pe about midway between the South Fork and the release site. Prepared by: Glenn E. Rogers Assistant Researcher �April, J968 - 117 JOB PROGRESS RESEARCH Noo ~W_-~3~7_-~R~-2~1 Work Plan NOo __~1~5 Title of Job: Period PROJECT SEGMENT COLORADO State of Project REPORT Covered: Personnel: Experimental April _ Game Bird Survey _ Job No. Breeding of Mountain 1, 1967 through March Willis G. Mansfield, Harold M. Swope. 3 Lawrence Quail 31, 1968 A. Webster, Robert L. Schmidt and Abstract Only nine mountain quail were on hand for research to develop production techniques. Four hens fed a 20 percent protein hen lay feed laid 19 eggs. Three other hens fed a game bird feed containing 22 percent protein laid 146 eggs. Sixty-five young quail were hatched from the 165 eggs. Of the 161 eggs set (four culls) 98 were fertile. �- 118 Objectives: 1. To determine the effects of a special high protein diet (with supplemental calcium) on fertile egg production. 2. To determine the effects of artificial stimulighting on fertile egg production. Procedures: 1. Four hens and one cock were placed in pen number 1 and fed a hen lay feed containing 20 percent protein. The remaining three hens and one cock were fed a 22 percent protein game bird feed in pen number 2. 2. Birds were not available to test the effects of stimulighting. Recommendations: Based on very limited data, mountain quail breeders bird feed containing 22 percent protein. should be fed a game �- 119 - EXPERIMENTAL BREEDING OF MOIDIJ'rAIN QUA.D., Harold M. Swope Findings Only nine mountain quail were available, but it was decided to run a very limited experiment comparing a hen lay feed containing 20 percent protein and a game bird feed with 22 percent protein. Three hens and one cock fed the 22 percent feed produced 146 eggs. Only 19 eggs were produced by four hens and or.e cock fed the 20 percent feed. Sixty-five young were hatched from the 165 eggs laid by all hens. Of the 161 eggs set after culling, 98, or 60.9 percent, were fertile. 11 problem was encountered in sexing these birds. A. Colorado State University poultry expert Wd.S consulted but the sex of one "hen" in pen number one was not positive. ��April, - 121 - JOB PROGRESS REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO ------------------------------ Project No. ~W_-~3~7_-~R~-~2~1~ Work Plan No. ~1~7 Title of Job: Inventory Period Covered: April Personnel: _ Game Bird Survey _ Job No. of Ptarmigan 1 Populations 1, 1967 to March 31, 1968 Glenn E. Rogers and Clait E. Braun Abstract Work again was concentrated on five study areas in an attempt to improve census procedures and to determine population densities. The spring breeding population for 1967 was 15.2 birds per square mile, practically the same as for 1966. The average number of chicks per brood was 4.1 compared to 4.5 in 1966. Reproduction for 1967 was very poor for all areas except Independence Pass with 30 percent of the hens successful. Hunting pressures were slightly less, 157 hunters compared with 167 in 1966; but the kill decreased almost 40 percent. An increased number of banded birds, including carry-over from 1966, were in the hunting population. The fall population on the study areas, estimated by Lincoln Index, was 43.5 birds per square mile, a decrease of 20 percent from 1966. 1~)68 �- 122 - Recommendations: The active portion of this project involving department personnel expires with this reporto Field work will be continued by contract with C1ait E. Braun through 1968. At this time Braun will submit his Doctoral thesis to fulfill the report responsibilities of the contract. The technical publication on "The Southern White-tailed Ptarmigan in Colorado" should be delayed until 1969-1970 to be compiled and evaluated. Objectives: 10 To gather and record background information pertaining bution, density, and census methods for ptarmigan. 2. To map ptarmigan 3. To determine populations. Procedures: 1. Background 2. to range, distri- range in Colorado. methods for ascertaining information. annual changes in ptarmigan -- Review and abstract available information. Map range. -- Determine perimeter of ptarmigan range by county through interviews of Departmental personnel, Federal land-use agency personnel, museum personnel, ranchers, and/or sportsmen. Inspect habitat capable of supporting ptarmigan populations and secure personal observations. Determine density of populations by observing and counting populations. Planimeter various units of range to determine square miles of different types of ranges and total range for each county and statewide. 3. Prepare distribution map of ptarmigan Population -- Capture and band birds on specific inventory. range. study areas. Secure counts within trend areas or along routes during various seasons of the year and periods of the day. Record birds observed, specific location, time of observation, mileage, weather conditions and other factors. Record miscellaneous observations according to numbers of birds, courtship behavior, brood size, specific location, vegetative cover type, range condition, elevation, topography, and weather factors. Record harvest information according to hunting pressure and harvest success. �- 123 - INVENTORY OF PTARMIGAN POPULATIONS by Glenn E. Rogers and C1ait E. Braun As in 1966, all ptarmigan possible were banded in five areas -- Crown Point, Mount Evans, and the Rocky Mountain National Park on the eastern slope and Mesa Seco and Independence Pass on the western slope. To hunting season, 223 ptarmigan were banded in 1967 including re-banding of some birds first banded in 1966. In addition, 76 birds banded in 1966 were re-observed and/or re-banded for a total banded increment of 299 ptarmigan. Above average snow conditions prevailed on all areas except Mesa Seco. Precipitation remained high during spring and early summer for all areas but was below normal in late summer and fall. Plant development and bird behavior were 10 to 15 days later than for 1966. Work was concentrated on the study areas with only cursory checks made at Berthoud Pass, Guanella Pass, Hagerman Pass, Hoosier Pass, Loveland Pass, Mosquito Pass, Niwot Ridge, Pearl Pass, Prospect Mountain, and Taylor Pass. Birds or recent sign were observed at all areas. Vegetative data, using the Kuchler Modification of the Braun-Blanquet method, were collected on the three eastern slope study areas. Terry May, a student assistant from Colorado State University, assisted on all phases of ptarmigan inventory although concentrating on the vegetative work. Ray Schmidt, a masters candidate at C.S.U., contributed to census procedures at all areas while concentrating on a separate ptarmigan behavior study in Rocky Mountain National Park. Census: Primarily, census methods remained the same as for 1966; territorial pairs, brood size, and harvest. Birds were banded on all study areas for individual identification and as a basis for a Lincoln Index. Location of birds was improved this year with the use of tapes on a portable recorder. The male "challenge" call was used early in the season, until midJuly, and a "chick call" was used to locate hens and broods from late July through early September. The male "challenge" tape was not developed until early July and would probably have worked much better in May and June. The "chick call" worked well for both successful and unsuccessful hens. To a degree, the tape aided in the capture of hens for banding o Territorial Pairs: The Independence Pass study area had a heavier snow cover than in 1966. For the first time since 1964, the rock fault, triangle rock, and high bench territories we're not occupied. To the first of July, seven territorial pairs were found. Two yearling males were captured but did not appear territorial. Snow cover on Mesa Seco was the lightest remembered. Only three territorial males were observed, one on the 2nd hill and two on the 3rd. From piles of feathers found on the 2nd hill, it appeared that two males died on territories in late June or early July. �Snow cover was higher and more prolonged than normal on eastern slope study areas. The number of breeding pairs remained about the same as the previous year for Rocky Mountain ~ational Park and Mount Evans (Table 1) while increasing almost double on the Crown Point area. The total number of breeding pairs was up four, but the number of unmated birds was down by 14. Over-all, the breeding population on the study areas was similar to 1966. Table 1.--BreedinB Study area Tombstone RidgeSundance Mountain Toll Memorial Fall River-Gore Turnout Total-Rocky Mountain National Park season EOEulation densities~l areas Square Miles No. of Breeding Pairs Unmated Birds 1967 Total Breeding Season Population 1.25 0.19 121:/ 4 3 males 0 30 8 24.0 42.1 0.70 6 4 males 16 22.9 2.14 22 7 males 54 25.2 Birds Per Square Mile Mt. GoliathMt. Evans Crown PointCrown Mountain Independence Pass Mesa Seeo 1.54 41:.1 1 male 11 7.1 1.93 1.32 1.48 20 7 3 1 male 2 0 41 16 6 21.2 12.1 4.0 Total - all areas 8.41 56 11 128 15.2 1/ Three males were apparently mated with two hens. "il Two males were apparently mated with two hens. Broods: Five broods were seen on Independence Pass consisting of 5~ 5, 4, 2, and 2 young. An additional two young were banded and others were seen, but not as broods. Not only was reproduction the best recorded for this area, but it was also the best for any study area in 1967. Three broods were seen on Mesa Seco consisting of 5, 3, and 1 young. Only four young were tagged and three of these were killed during the 1967 hunting season. The and and the number of broods (Table 2) seen on the three eastern slope study areas the number of young-per-brood were about the same as for 1966; 44 to 48 4.3 to 4.1, respectively. Not as many broods were seen during July as peak of hatching appeared to be delayed about 10 days (Table 3). Over all areas, five more broods were seen in 1967 with a slightly reduced number of young-per-brood. The major difference between reproduction for the two years is not shown in tables. During 1966, unsuccessful hens were rare (five in Rocky Mountain National Park and two at Mount Evans) while in 1967 except for Independence Pass, unsuccessful hens outnumbered successful in specific areas. �J - 125 - Table 2.--Mean brood size by time period, all ~r~~e~a~s~.~~ No. of Average No. of Date Broods Chicks per Brood .-----1 July 1-15 4.0 July 16-31 9 3.3 August 1-15 14 4.6 August 16-31 11 21 3.7 September 1-30=12 4.9 October 1-311) 4 2.5 Totals 61 4.1 II _ Only distinct broods are included. Tabl~-2:.:..Mean_br~~_si~£l_.!:.im~periods and area. 1) July July Aug. Aug. Sept. Oct. Area 1-15 16-31 1-15 16-31 1-30 1-31 -----Mt. GoliathNone None None None None None Mt. Evans seen seen seen seen seen seen Rocky Mtn. 1.0 (1) 4.0 (1) 2.8 (5) 4.6 (12) 3.7 (12) 5.5 (6) National Park Crown PointNone 3.5 (2) None 4.0 (3) 5.0 (2) 3.0 (3) Crown Mtn. seen seen Other areas Not 6.0 (1) None None 3.0 (2) None searched seen seen seen Independence None None 5.0 (2) 3.0 (2) 5.0 (2) Not Pass seen seen searched Mesa Seco None 3.0 (1) None 4.2 (4) Not Not seen seen searched searched II Numbers in parentheses indicate numbers of broods. Four nests were found by Terry May, Ray Schmidt, and a park ranger. An additional single egg was found as if the nest had not been completed. The number of eggs-per-nest was 6, 6, 4, and 3. The three eggs mentioned had been destroyed by an avian predator. The first brood was observed on July 14. All of the above successful nests hatched after the middle of July, approximately ten days later than peak for 1966. Forty-two different hens were observed on all study areas during the brood season. Of these, 17 were unsuccessful (40.55%) while 25 (59.5%) were with broods. However, this is not an accurate picture of nesting success for 1967. For example, no successful hens and four unsuccessful hens were observed at Mt. Goliath-Mt. Evans. Only five successful hens out of a minimum of 20 breeding hens were observed on the Crown Point-Crown Mountain area in 1967. In contrast, in 1966 on this same area, using less efficient techniques and in less time, 11 different broods were observed. It should also be remembered that unsuccessful hens may not be observed as readily as hens with broods. Therefore, from all indications, nesting success was between 35 and 40 percent in Rocky Mountain National Park and at Crown Point, and below 30 percent at Mt. Goliath-Mt. Evans. �- 126 - Hunting Season: Hunting pressure remained about the same on Independence Pass; one-~ hunter, but a total of 30~ less hours hunted (Table 4). Kill dropped to an all-time low of 14 birds. Not a single bird was killed after opening day. Of the 14 birds killed, 10 were banded (Table 5), giving a Lincoln Index of 57.4 or 43.5 birds per square mile (Table 6). Tabl~.:.-Hunting_E.ressure Number of Hunters Area Mount Evans 85 Crown Point 37 Independence Pass 28 Mesa Seco 7 Totals 157 Hours Hunted and harvest on four ptarmigan stu~eas, Ptarmi~an Killed Birds Birds Crippled Adult Juvenile Unk Seen & Lost M. F. M. F. Juv 271.0 40 1 4 7 2 2 0 2 17 176.5 ? 1 6 4 5 2 2 0 19 61.5 29 0 5 3 2 4 0 0 14 i6.0 15 0 3 2 - 1 2 0 0 8 525.0 84 3 18 16 10 10 2 2 58 1967. Unk Sex & A~_Tota1 Table 5.--Huntin~ Date Hunters 9--9-67--1 9- 9-67 3 2 9- 9-67 9- 9-67 1 2 9- 9-67 9-10-67 6 9-10-67 5 9-11-67 0 9-16-67 3 9-17 -67 3 2 9-17-67 Totals 28 E.ressure and kill of etarmigan on Independence Pass, 1967. Birds Ki 11ed Adult Young Hours Male Female Male Female Banded Total Location 2 2 2 2 So. side 15 2 1 2 So. side 3 1 1 2 2 4 No. side 2 1 1 1 No. side 2 1 2 2 4 5 No. side 11 0 So. side 9 0 No. side 0 0 No. side 6 0 So. side 7.5 0 So. side 4 0 No. side 61.5 5 3 2 4 10 14 Table 6.--Four-year comparison of Lincoln Index Data from Independence Pass, Colorado. Number Banded Birds of Birds Birds Total Lincoln per Year Hunters Banded Harvested Harvest Index Square Mile 1964 28 5 21 117.6 89.0 1965 14 8 4 19 38.0 28.7 1966 27 20 5 20 80.0 60.6 1967 28 39 10 14 41.3 54.6 �- 127 Hunting pressure remained light on Mesa kjlling one less bird in six more hours of the birds killed were banded, giving per square mile. Table Seco in 1967 with a few more hunters than in 1966 (Table 7). All eight a Lincoln Index of 16 or 10.8 birds 7 .--Huntingyressure Date 9-12-67 9-14-67 9-14-67 Totals Hunters 3 2 2 7 and kill of ptarmigan on Mesa Seco, 1967. Birds Killed ___ You~ Adult Hours Female Male Male Female Banded Total Location ...,..--'--4 4 4 3rd Hill 4 o 2nd Hill 8 2 2 4 4 16 2 2 8 8 Hunt i.ng pressuro and ha r ve s t (~0crcased on Mount Evans, and juveniles. Only three banded birds were harvested of 108 or 70.1 birds per square mile. ma i.nly in adult males for a Lincoln Index The number of hunters and hours hunted increased on the Crown Point study area. The harvest decreased mainly in number of juvenile birds killed. Only six banded birds were harvested for a Lincoln Index of 168 or 87.0 birds per square mile (Table 8). Harvest within the study areas averaged 10.8 ptarmigan per square mile. The hunting pressure over-all figured about 25 hunters spending four hours within each square mile of the study area. Although there was a decrease in kill, it was mainly in number nr '/:-.,., harvested confirming a poorer production season. Table 8.--Fall population estimates __________ st~~~ea~~ 196~~ _A_r_e_a Mount Evans Crown Point Independence Mesa Seco Totals computed Square Total M-.eiles Banded 1.54 ---19--Pass 1.93 1.32 1.48 6.27 -- 53 39 16 127 through Banded Birds Harvested 3 6 10 8 27 Lincoln Total Index for selected _ 17 per M!,le 70.1 19 14 8 -58 87.0 41.3 10.8 43.51 _!!~! Birds __~are --- Miscellaneous Data: Since banding began on Independence Pass in 1964, we have attempted to record movement, fidelity to territories, longevity, and harvest rat ios. Information collected appears good concerning males but very U tt l.e has been ascertained concerning females. We could propose a number of reasons why information is lacking on hens; but, at present, we have no definite answers. _ �128 Males appear to have a greater fidelity to area and territory than f'emaLe s . Re-observations of adult males was above 70 percent after a lapse of at least 2 years. In 1964, 10 adult males and four adult females were banded. Seven of the males and one female have been killed or retagged up through 1967. In 1965, five males and two females were tagged. All five ma Le s and one female have been harvested. Of the 14 males (12 adult and 2 young) banded in 1966, eight have been harvested and five re-banded by 1967. Only t.vo of the six females banded in 1966 have been harvested or re-observed to date. During 1966, 35 ptarmigan were banded on Mesa Seco consisting of 9 adult males, 5 adult females, 11 young males, and 10 young females. Through 1967, 6 males had been harvested (30%) and 8 had been re-observed accounting for 70 percent. Three females were harvested in 1966 and none were either seen since or harvested for a total of 20 percent. Management Recommendations: In all past inventory projects, an attempt has been made to set-up statewide census procedures capable of determining trend in populations. We doubt if state-wide procedures are feasible on ptarmigan for the following reasons. Ptarmigan populations occur in alpine areas, most of which are inaccessible to the wildlife conservation officer or to the sportsman on a sustained basis. Census procedures involve the use of special equipment, are time consuming, and need hunting for evaluation. For these reasons census procedures should be limited to specific areas where hunting pressures are heavy or where various factors appear to be detrimental to populations with light hunting. Suggested Procedures: Where the local wildlife conservation officer has reason to believe ptarmigan pOpulations should be checked, he will notify the regional game biologist. The regional game biologist will then arrange through the research division for the use of a portable tape recorder, the "challenge" and "chick-call" tapes, noose poles, leg bands, forms, and technical help. The wildlife conservation officer and a technician would then check the area for three days in early June with the "challenge" tape and record breeding pairs; check again for three days in mid-August with the "chick-call" tape for broods and successful hens; band all birds possible during the August period for future identification. Checks would then be made by the conservation officer during the hunting season to determine hunting pressure, total kill, and kill of banded and unbanded birds. The conservation officer should continue these procedures for a three-year period to determine trend in populations. Prepared by: Glenn E. Rogers Assistant Researcher �1968 April, - 129 JOB PROGRESS RESEARCH REPORT PROJECT SEGMENT State of ~C~O~L~O~RA~D~O _ Project No. ~W_-~3~7_-~R~-~2~1~ _ Game Bird Survey _ Job. No. __~l~ Work Plan No. ~1~9 Title of Job: Experimental Period Covered: April Personnel: Breeding of Tinamou 1, 1967 through March Willis G. Mansfield, Harold M. Swope _ Lawrence 31, 1968 A. Webster, Robert Lo Schmidt and Abstract There were not enough tinamou breeders available to conduct the planned research. The 17 breeders produced 166 eggs, from which 44 chicks were hatched. Seventy-four of the eggs were fertile, for a 44.6 percent fert il ity. �- 130 Objectives: 1. To determine the effects of a special high protein diet (with supplemental calcium) on fertile egg production. 2. To determine the effects of artificial stimulighting on fertile egg production. 3. To determine the effects of paired mating compared with group or flock mating. Procedures: Not enough males were available to follow planned procedures. Recommendations: Do not hold tinamou eggs more than five days before starting incubation. �- 131 - EXPERIMENTAL BREEDING Harold M OF TINAMOU Swope There were not enough breeders available to conduct production research as planned. The 17 tinamou were fed a game bird breeder feed containing 22 percent protein and laid 166 eggs. Only 44 chicks were hatched from these eggs, although 74 (44.6%) of the eggs were fertile. It was learned that almost no hatching success was enjoyed when eggs were held more than five days before being placed in the incubator. The poor 23 percent hatching success was at least partially attributed to storage of eggs for a period exceeding five days. This was done to obtai.n a larger setting of eggs to place in the incubator. There is a real problem in distinguishing sexes of tinamou. Experts have been consulted on this, however, nothing was learned from these contacts. Additional sexing efforts will be necessary. � https://cpw.cvlcollections.org/files/original/a0633a262ad36758851d3cf57d2d6ca7.pdf 414bdf19726d6387ad37fafca5699bf6 PDF Text Text July, 1968 - 1- JOB PROGRESS REPORT State of C~O_L_O_RAD~_O Project No. W-10l-R-10 .Work Plan No. 4 Title of Job: Period Covered: Personnel: _ Game Range Investigations Job No. la Inventory of Range Manipulation Projects in Colorado April 1, 1967 to March 31, 1968 Roland C. Kufeld ABSTRACT An inventory was made of range type-conversion projects conducted prior to January 1, 1966, in Colorado by the U. S. Forest Service, Bureau of Land Management and Bureau of Indian Affairs. Offices of these agencies were contacted and information describing range type-conversion projects was collected from records in their files, The inventory was limited to range type-conversion projects located west of Interstate Highway 25· Data concerning effects of treatment on the range, livestock and wildlife were collected on 85 of the 910 projects inventoried through contacts with land management agency and Colorado Department of Game, Fish and Parks personnel. Some additional information on treatment effects was obtained through field inspec'tions of project areas. Data were analyzed by I.B.M. equipment, �-2 - A total of 518,108 acres of rangeland were treated in Colorado prior to January 1, 1966 on U. S. Forest Service, Bureau of Land Management, and Indian Lands, of which 252,562 acres were seeded as part of the treatment. Fifty percent (258,746 acres) has been treated by the Bureau of Land Management, 38 percent (196,494 acres) by the U. S. Forest Service, and 12 percent (62,868 acres) has been treated on Indian Reservations. Fifty-two percent (271,550 acres) has been for sagebrush control, and 26 percent (134,228 acres) for control of pinyon and juniper vegetation. Sixty-one percent (166,468 acres) of all sagebrush treated has been sprayed with chemical herbicides, 21 percent (58,180 acres) has been plowed, and another two percent (4,660 acres) has been treated by a combination of spraying and plowing. Eighty-eight percent (117,494 acres) of all pinyon-juniper vegetation treated has been chained. Chaining for purposes of this report includes anchor chaining, cabling and bulldozing, but most acreage has been anchor chained. The three National Forests in Colorado with the largest type-conversion project acreages are the Uncompahgre, Gunnison, and Grand Mesa. Among the five Bureau of Land Management Districts in Colorado, the Montrose District treated the largest area and the Craig District treated the next largest area. Chemical herbicides have been applied by aircraft on 95 percent of the acreage where sprays have been used. Ninety-seven percent of the sprayed acreage has been treated with 2,4-D. Crested wheatgrass (Agropyron cristatum) has been the grass most frequently used for re-seeding Colorado rangelands. Other corr~only used grasses were smooth brome (Bromus inermis), intermediate wheatgrass (Agropyron intermedium), western wheatgrass (Agropyron smithii), and bluebunch wheatgrass (Agropyron inerme). Four-wing saltbush (Atriplex canescens), the most frequently seeded browse species, has been used on only three percent of the total range acreage seeded. Reseeding methods varied, depending on the vegetative type. Seed was usually drilled in the grassland type and, after plowing, in the sagebrush type Very little of the sprayed sagebrush area was seeded, and most of the seeding done in conjunction with spraying was by aerial broadcasting. Eighty-six percent of the seeding in pinyon-juniper areas was accomplished by aerial broadcasting. Most seed mixtures were applied at a rate of from three to eight pounds per acre. o Sagebrush killed by spraying averaged 78 percent and ranged from 10 to 96 percent on 30 sagebrush spray projects. An average kill of 84 percent on pinyon and juniper was obtained on 15 pinyon-juniper chaining projects. Average plant density did not change after treatment on four sagebrush spray projects evaluated. However, shrub composition dropped from an average of 44 to 24 percent; herbs decreased from 25 to 16 percent, and grass species composition increased from 31 to 60 percent. Seventy-eight percent of the total type-convers~on project acreage located within grazing allotments was treated to improve rangelands for cattle and horses~ and 22 percent was treated for improvement of sheep and goat range. Average cattle carrying capacity on nine sagebrush spray projects increased from 8.0 to 5.3 acres per A.U.M., and from 24.0 to 11.0 acres per A.UGMo follOWing chaining on three pinyon-juniper control projects~ �- 3 - Approximately five percent of the fall-winter-spring deer range and three percent of the fall-winter-spring elk range located in Colorado on U. S. Forest Service and Bureau of Land Management lands have been treated to convert range vegetation from one type to another. A total of 100,286 acres have been treated in Colorado on U. S. Forest Service and Bureau of Land Management lands inhabited by sage grouse. Although a relatively small portionof the fall~winter-spring deer and elk range located on lands administered by these two agencies has been treated, many wildlife people in Colorado feel type-conversions have had a significant impact on deer and elk as well as on sage grouse where many acres of type-conversions have been concentrated in small areas. Appraisals of selected range type-conversion projects were made by Game, Fish and Parks Department personnel who were personally familiar with those projects~ Eighty-three percent of the sagebrush spray projects appraised on fall-winterspring deer range were considered detrimental to deer, and none were believed beneficial. Thirty-eight percent of the pinyon-juniper chainings appraised on fall-winter-spring deer range were considered beneficial to deer, 56 percent were considered detrimental, and six percent 'were thought to have no effect. Twenty-five percent of the sagebrush spray projects appraised on fall-winterspring elk range were considered beneficial to elk, 33 percent were considered detrimental, and 42 percent were considered to have had no effect. All sagebrush spray projects in sage grouse habitat were considered detrimental to sage grouse. Vegetative change~ that occurred after treatment on 36 sagebrush, pinyonjuniper, and browse control projects inspected in the field are described in the text of the report. The probable effects on wildlife of each typeconversion project inspected were determined on the basis of observed changes in plant abundance and composition. A System for Inventory, Evaluation and Exchange of Information on Range Type Conversion Projects was developed under this Federal Aid Project through cooperation of the Interagency Coqncil on Wildlife Ecology. The system was adopted for use in Colorado by the U. S. Forest Service, Bureau of Land Management, and Colorado Department of Game, Fish and Parks, and was placed in operations on January 15~ 1968. ��- 5 - INVENTORY OF RANGE MANIPULATION PROJECTS IN COLORADO Roland C. Kufeld The practice of chemically and mechanically treating western rangelands to convert the vegetation from one type to another in order to improve the range for grazing has become increasingly common in recent years. Virtually all of the range type-conversion projects that have been conducted in the western half or mountainous portion of Colorado are located on big game or sage grouse ranges. Modification of range vegetation to suit the specific needs of livestock may benefit some game species whose requirements are similar to those of livestock, but decrease the value of the range for game species with different requirements. As pointed out by McDermott and Byrnes (1960) the "weedsil of the farmer and forester are not always weeds to the wildlife management technician. The possible effects that widespread range type-conversion programs might have on important wildlife forage and cover plants has become an object of growing concern to Colorado game managers. So they can judge the effect of past range type-conversions on game and predict the probable impact of similar projects~ game managers need to know the location, extent, and kinds of type-conversion projects which have already modified game ranges in their areas. Also, they need to know in advance where~ when, and how the range is going to be affected so they can determine the probable effects of proposed projects on wildlife, and can make recommendations for maintaining or improving the wildlife habitat. The purpose of this study is (1) To determine the characteristics of each of the range type-conversion projects that have been conducted in Colorado. (2) How these projects have affected wildlife. (3) To establish an interagency information exchange system designed to keep all land management agencies mutually advised on proposed type-conversion projects and on results of past projects. OBJECTIVES Objectives outlined in the Plans, Specifications project segment are as follows: (1) (2) (3) (4) and Estimates for this To complete the inventory of range manipulation projects in Colorado. To compile, codify, process and analyze inventory data. To select range manipulation projects amenable to further study, and collect additional data about the effects of treatment on the range, livestock, and wildlife. To develop a processing and filing system for information about proposed range manipulation projects in Colorado . �- 6 - PROCEDURES Data Collection Offices of each National Forest, each Bureau of Land Management, District, and the Southern Ute and Ute Mountain Indian Agencies were visited byGame~ Fish and Parks Department personnel who recorded pertinent range typeconversion project information from records on file in those offices. Original plans called for an inventory of range type-conversion projects conducted by the U. S. Soil Conservation Service. This could not be done because Soil Conservation Service records are not kept as individual projects; however, total acreages of "brush and weed" control work completed by the Soil Conservation Service were obtained from their State Office. The inventory concentrated on range type-conversion projects located in the western half or mountainous portion of Colorado, which encompasses all of the state west of Interstate Highway 25. This report summarizes inventory date for range type-conversion projects completed in Colorado by the Forest Service, Bureau of Land Management, and Bureau of Indian Affairs up to January 1, 1966. Data collected for each range type-conversion project inventoried included the project designation, land status, location, site description, climatic data, range condition and range use at the time of treatment, and information describing the treatment. A standard form (Fig. 1) was used for recording inventory data. The location of each project was mapped on standard Forest Service and Bureau of Land Management maps. Regional Game, Fish and Parks Department personnel provided information on the kinds of wildlife and amount of wildlife use present in each of the project locations at the time of treatment. Primary consideration was given to the presence and amount of use by deer, elk, and sage grouse. Eighty-five projects which had been conducted in important game areas were selected for evaluation of the effects of treatment on the range, livestock and wildlife. Much of this information was obtained from the Agencies that conducted the projects and from regional Game, Fish and Parks Department personnel. The rest of the information was obtained during inspection trips made to many of these project locations. Detailed notes and numerous photographs were taken on each project area inspected, describing the vegetative characteristics and range conditions in adjacent untreated areas as compared with those in the treated areas. Assessments were made of the probable effects of each of these projects on deer, elk, and sage grouse based on changes in vegetative composition and abundance of vegetation which occurred as a result of treatment. Data Processing Inventory data derived from contacts with land management agencies and regional Game, Fish and Parks Department personnel were transferred from original data sheets to Mark Page Reader Forms and then to l.B.M. cards. were analyzed by the Colorado State University computer center. Data �-7- Unfortunately, records pertaining to individual range type-conversion projects were often sketchy, and for most projects it was not possible to obtain all of the inventory data needed to complete the inventory form (Fig. 1). This report summarizes all of the inventory data available, and it must be pointerl out that differences which occur in acreage grand totals among several tables contained in the report are due to lack of date in some categories for some individual projects. For example, the total number of acres for all seeding rate categories (Table 33) is less than the total number of acres seeded by the three agencies surveyed (Table 4), because seeding rate data were lacking for some individual projects. Data in Tables 1 through 27 represent all of the range type-conversion projects inventoried because the information in the categories listed in these tables was available for all projects. Data in most of the tables from number 28 through 47 represent only a portion of the projects inventoried because the data could not be obtained for some projects. A system for inventory, evaluation and exchange of information on range typeconversion projects was developed through cooperation of the Interagency Council on Wildlife Ecology, a group comprised of representatives from various State and Federal land management agencies in Colorado. RESULTS AND DISCUSSION History Of Range Type Conversion In Colorado Range type-conversion work began in Colorado in the early 1930s. One hundred and twenty-seven acres were treated between 1930 and 1935. By January 1, 1966~ 518,108 acres had been treated on U. S. Forest Service, Bureau of Land Management, and Indian lands of which 252,562 acres were seeded as part of the treatment. Another 155,441 acres were modified by Soil Conservation Service Projects between July 1, 1962 and June 30, 1966. From its beginning in the early 1930s, the amount of range treated increased steadily each year until 1950; it dropped off from 1951 through 1955, and accelerated rapidly f~om 1956 until January 1, 1966, the ending date for the range type-conversion project inventory (Fig. 2). Most of the range type-conversion projects in Colorado have been directed toward control of sagebrush and pinyon and juniper vegetation in an effort to increase grass production on these types of ranges. Big sagebrush (Artemesia tridentata) has been the dominant sagebrush species on almost all sagebrush control areas in Colorado, although other sagebrush species were often present. Control of sagebrush began between 1936 and 1940, and until 1955 plowing was the most commonly used sagebrush control method (Fig. 3). Chemical control methods were introduced in the early 1950s~ During the 1950s a number of experimental sagebrush spray projects were conducted to test 2,4-D and 2,4,5-T herbicides. These studies showed that sagebrush could be effectively controlled on large areas with relatively low cost through the use of these two chemicals (Hull, et al, 1952; Kissinger and Hurd, 1953; Pechanec~ et aI, 1954; Blaisdell and Mueggler, 1956; Hyder and Sneva, 1956; Cornelius and Graham, 1958; Johnson~ 1958; and Mueggler and Blaisdell, 1958). �-8 - Since 1955, sagebrush spraying (primarily with 2,4-D) has become quite extensive (Fig. 3). Spraying now far surpasses plowing as the most frequently used sagebrush control method. The early spray projects depended largely on ground spraying equipment. Since 1960, most chemical herbicides have been applied from fixed-wing aircraft or helicopters. The first attempts to control pinyon and juniper were made between 1946 and 1950 (Fig. 4), and pinyon-juniper control continued on a very small scale until 1956. Control programs were expanded in 1956 and accelerated annually until January 1, 1966. Most pinyon-juniper control work has been accomplished by bulldozing (pushing individual trees with a bulldozer), cabling (dragging a cable between two bulldozers), and anchor chaining (dragging a heavy ship anchor chain between two bulldozers) (Fig. 4). Early control programs relied primarily on the bulldozing and cabling techniques, but these were soon largely ~eplaced by anchor chaining. In this report the three techniques wi~l be combined into one category called "chaining", since the overall effe2cs Jf the techniques on the range are similar, and since anchor chaining was by far the most commonly used of the three methods. Railing (dragging an imp~ement constructed of railroad rails behind a tractor) was included in the "chaining" category where it was used to clear sagebrush. Location And Extent Of Complete~ Range Type-Conversion Projects Acreages treated prior to Janua::y 1, 1966, on lands administered by the U. S. Forest Service, Bureau of Land Management, and Bureau of Indian Affairs, and on all of the lands of these three agencies combined are shown by vegetative type and kind of treatment in Tables 1 through 4. Of the 518,108 acres treated up to January 1, 1966, 50 percent (258,746 acres) has been treated by the Bureau of Land Management, 38 percent (196,494 acres) by the U. S. Forest SerVice, and 12 percent (62~68 acres) has been treated on Indian Reservations (Tables 1 through 4). Fifty-two percent (271,550 acres) of the total acreage treated has been for sagebrush control. Sixty-one percent (166,468 acres) of all sagebrush treated has been sprayed with chemical herbiCides, 21 percent (58,180 acres) has been plowed, and another two percent (4,660 acres) has been treated by a combination of spraying and plowing (Table 4). The locations of all sage-brush control projects completed by the Forest Service, Bureau of Land Management and Bureau of Indian Affairs up to January 1, 1966, are shown in Fig. 58 Mailed questionnaire results have shown that in Wyoming the U. S. Forest Service and Bureau of Land Management treated approximately 155,000 acres of sagebrush with chemical sprays through 1964 (Kearl, 1965). Kearl also indicates that ranch operators sprayed approximately 350,000 acres of sagebrush on their own lands through 1964. Thus, a total of about 505,000 acres of sagebrush have been sprayed in Wyoming through 1964 Reports from Game, Fish and Parks Department field personnel indicate that large acreages of sagebrush as well as other types of vegetation have also been treated on private lands in Colorado. Unfortunately, the extent of range type-conversion work on private lands in Colorado is now known. This information was not obtained during the range typeconversion project inventory because private ranch operators usually do not 8 �-9 - maintain the kind of detailed information sought for purposes of the inventory, and private ranchers are much too numerous to make individual contacts feasible. It is logical to assume, however~ that large acreages of private rangeland have also been treated in Colorado. Twenty-six percent (134,228 acres) of the total acerage treated in Colorado by the three land management agencies surveyed has been to control pinyons and junipers (Table 4). Eighty-eight percent (117,494 acres) of all pinyonjuniper vegetation treated has been chained (chaining includes anchor chaining, cabling and bulldozing). Locations of all pinyon-juniper control projects completed by the U. S. Forest Service, Bureau of Land Management, and Bureau of Indian Affairs up to January 1, 1966, are shown in Fig. 6. The grassland type is the third ranking vegetative type in number of acres treated. Eleven percent (57,467 acres) of the total acreage treated in Colorado has been to increase grass production in areas where grasses already predominated (Table 4). Most of these areas supported some weeds, sagebrush or other plant species which it was felt desirable to eradicate. Spraying with chemical herbicides has been the most common control method used in the grassland type~ and. has been used on 55 percent (31,503 acres) of the total grassland type area treated. Plowing was used on 28 percent (16,057 acres) of the total acres treated. The locations of all grassland type-conversion projects completed by the three agencies surveyed through January 1, 1966, are shown in Fig. 7. Although only two percent (12,545 acres) (Table 4) of the total range typeconversion acerage has been located in the browse type, special mention is made of it because of its importance to wintering big game. Spraying has been used to control browse on 86 percent (10,843 acres) of the total browse area treated. Browse type-conversion project locations are shown in Fig. 8. Acreages treated by vegetative type and kind of treatment are shown for individual National Forests, Bureau of Land Management Districts, and Indian Reservations in Tables 5 through 22. Total acreages treated by these agencies are compared directly in Table 23, and the information is shown by location within Colorado Department of Game, Fish and Parks Regions in Tables 24 through 27. More acres of range have been treated on the Uncompahgre National Forest than on any of the other ten National Forests in Colorado. A total of 48,485 acres have been treated on the Uncompahgre (Table 23). The Gunnison ranks in second place with 36,798 acres~ the Grand Mesa third with 22,840 acres, and on down to the Arapahoe which ranks 11th with 4,310 acres. Of the five Bureau of Land Management Districts in Colorado the Montrose District ranks first with 105,021 acres of range treated. The Craig District ranks second with 58,586 acres, and the Grand Junction District fifth with 22,940 acres. A total of 37,988 acres have been treated on the Southern Ute Indian Reservation and 24,880 acres on the Ute Mountain Reservation (Table 23). Fifty-nine percent (308,459 acres) of the acreage of range type-conversions completed in Colorado up to January 1, 1966 is located in the Southwest Game, �- 10 - Fish and Parks Department Region (Table 24); 32 percent (163,969 acres) is located in the Northwest Region (Table 25); five percent (235,000 acres) is in the Southeast Region (Table 26); and four percent (22,180 acres) is in the Northeast Region (Table 27). Range Type-Conversion Equipment, Chemical Herbicides Species Used For Reseeding And Plant Acreages treated by major kinds of treatments such as harrowing, plowing, spraying, chaining etc. have been shown in Tables 1 through 4. Numerous kinds of brush remov8l and reseeding equipment have been used within each of the major "kinds of treatment" categories. Acreages of rangeland sprayed with aerial and ground spraying equipment and three kinds of chemical herbicides are shown in Table 28. Ninety-five percent of the acres sprayed have been sprayed by aircraft, both fixed and rotary wing, and five percent have been sprayed with ground spraying equipment. Ninety-seven percent of the acreage sprayed involved the use of 2,4-D, and three percent was sprayed with 2,4,5-T. Kuron is the only other chemical herbicide used by the three agencies surveyed, and it was only used on one 20-acre project. Acreages of rangeland treated by anchor chaining, cabling, railing and bulldozing are shown in Table 29. This equipment has been used in the sagebrush, pinyon-juniper and browse types. Anchor chaining has been the most extensively used of the four kinds of equipment. Sixty-five percent of the sagebrush range and 86 percent of the pinyon-juniper range treated with these kinds of equipment has involved the use of an anchor chain. Only one 220-acre project involving the use of any of this equipment in the browse type was inventoried, and that area was bulldozed. Unfortunately, range type-conversion project records were not complete enough to determine acreages treated with various kinds of harrows, drags, plows, rotobeaters and other equipment. One 160-acre project was inventoried which involved the use of a heavy brush roller to control pinyon and juniper vegetation. Crested wheatgrass (Agropyron cristatum) has been the most frequently used grass for reseeding rangelands in Colorado. Eighty-four percent (213,246 acres) of the total acreage seeded in Colorado has been seeded with crested wheatgrass. Other frequently used grasses were smooth brome (Bromus inermis) which has been used to reseed 28 percent of the total acres seeded; intermediate wheatgrass (Agropyron intermedium)- 22 percent; western wheatgrass (Agropyron smithii) - 14 percent; andbluebunch wheatgrass (Agropyron inerme) - 12 percent. Numerous other species of grasses have been used less commonly. Those which were used to seed more than two percent of all rangelands seeded are shown in Table 30. Those used to seed less than two percent are listed in Table 31. Sweet Clover seed (Melilotus ~.) was often mixed with grass seed and was used on 47 percent of rangelands seeded. Very little browse seeding has been done in Colorado. Four-wing saltbush (Atriplex canescens) has been used to reseed three percent of all rangelands seeded, and bitterbrush (Purshia tridentata) has been seeded on two percent (Table 30). Mountain mahogany (Cercocarpus montanus) has been used to seed less than two percent of all Colorado rangelands treated (Table 31). Plants were seeded in various �- 11 - combinations of species so numerous the combinations. that is is impractical to list all of Reseeding methods varied depending on the vegetative type. Seventy-three percent of the acreage seeded in the grassland type was drilled and 27 percent was broadcast from ground equipment (Table 32). Seventy percent of the sagebrush area seeded was drilled, eight percent was seeded by aerial broadcasting, and 22 percent was broadcasted from ground equipment. Seeding of sagebrush areas usually followed plowing. As indicated in Table 4, very little of the sprayed sagebrush area was subsequently seeded. Eighty-six percent of the seeding in pinyon and juniper areas was accomplished by aerial broadcasting; six percent was drilled, and eight percent was seeded by ground broadcasting equipment. Seeding rates for those projects where seeding-rate data were available are summarized in Table 33. Most reseeding (78 percent) was done at a rate of three to eight pounds of seed per acre. Environmental Characteristics of Areas Where Range TypeConversions Have Been Located Wide variations were found in pre-treatment plant densities among those sagebrush and pinyon-juniper control projects for which pre-treatment plant density data were available. Range type-conversion treatments were applied to low plant density sagebrush and pinyon-juniper areas as frequently as to areas with high plant densities (Table 34). Shrub composition before treatment ranged from 31 to 70 percent on 89 percent of the acreage of sagebrush control projects for which shrub composition estimates were available (Table 35). On pinyon-juniper control projects with available shrub composition data, pre-treatment shrub composition ranged from 11 to 30 percent on 22 percent of the total acres treated. It ranged from 61 to 70 percent on 56 percent of the total acres, and from 91 to 100 percent on 22 percent of the treated acreage (Table 35). On sagebrush and pinyon-juniper control projects for which pre-treatment range condition data could be obtained, range condition for livestock prior to treatment was most commonly considered poor. Only a little more than one percent of the combined sagebrush and pinyon-juniper range acreages were considered in "good" or better condition for livestock before treatment. (Table 36). Data on condition of these ranges for wildlife were not available. Erosion condition prior to treatment varied from none or slight to moderate on 76 percent of the sagebrush control acreage and on 68 percent of the pinyon-juniper control acreages for projects where pre-treatment erosion condition data could be obtained (Table 37). Erosion condition on the remaining 16 percent of the sagebrush control ~creage and 32 percent of the pinyon-juniper acreage varied from moderate to severe. �- 12 - Effects Effects of TyPe-Conversion On The Range, Livestock Wildlife Effects of treatment as determined And from the inventory On Range Average plant kills resulting from application of control treatments are shown in Table 38. An average sagebrush kill of 78 percent was achieved on 30 sagebrush spray projects covering an area of 36,149 acres. Sagebrush kill on individual spray projects varied from 10 to 96 percent. By way of comparison, Blaisdell and Mueggler (1956) reported sagebrush kills varying from 66 to 100 percent when sagebrush was sprayed with 2,4-D. A ninety-one percent sagebrush kill by spraying has been reported by Hyder and Sneva (1956), and 50 percent kills have been reported by Anderson (1966) and Mueggler and Blaisdell (1958). Hull et ale (1952) report that sagebrush kills of 75 percent or more can be obtained with two pounds of 2,4-D ester. An average sagebrush kill of 93 percent resulted on three projects where sagebrush was plowed (Table 38). Sagebrush kills on these three projects ranged from 90 to 98 percent. A ninety-eight percent kill was obtained on one area where sagebrush was plowed and sprayed (Table 38). An average kill of 84 percent on pinyon and juniper was obtained on 15 pinyon-juniper chaining projects comprising a total of 24,030 acres. On individual projects, pinyon and juniper kills ~anged from 55 to 95 percent (Table 38). Similar results are reported by Plummer and Stapley (1960) who observed pinyon and juniper kills varying from 70 to 95 percent, depending on whether the area was cabled or chained, whether it was treated only one time or treated twice in opposite directions, and depending on the weight of anchor chain links. They found that the highest kills (95 percent) were obtained by chaining twice in opposite directions with 90 pound anchor chain links, or by chaining once with 40 pound links, followed by pipe harrowing. Average changes which occurred in vegetative cover and plant density within two years after spraying on four sagebrush spray projects are shown in Table 39. The four sprayed areas were not reseeded. Although the proportion of the ground covered by vegetation in these sagebrush areas did not change as a result of spraying, shrub composition dropped from an average of 44 percent to 24 percent and herbs decreased from 25 to 16 percent. Reduced competition from shrubs and herbs brought about an increase of from 31 to 60 percent in the composition of grass species (Table 39). Similar results have been reported for other sagebrush spray projects. Anderson (1966) recorded decreases of about 50 percent in sagebrush ground cover and increases of about 50 percent in grass cover after sagebrush was sprayed with 2,4-D on the Uncompahgre National Forest. Hyder and Sneva (1956) recorded an increase of about one-third in the basal ground cover of bunchgrass after spraying had reduced the sagebrush ground cover by 91 percent. This amounted to a threefold increase in herbage production. The higher production was due in part to an increase in numbers of grasses and in basal size, but was primarily due to more vigorous and higher growth of the released grasses. Most of the increase occurred during the first year (Hyder and Sneva, 1956). �- 13 - Kissinger and Hurd (1953) observed increases of 109 percent in pounds of grass produced per acre after spraying killed 60 percent of the sagebrush. Increases of 245 percent occurred after an 80 percent sagebrush kill, and increases of 268 percent were observed after a95 percent sagebrush kill. Mueggler and Blaisdell (1958) report that three years after sagebrush spraying, total air-dry production of grasses had risen from 245 to 430 pounds per acre, an increase of 76 percent; forbs increased from 65 to 92 pounds per acre, an increase of 42 percent; and shrub production decreased from 281 to 219 pounds per acre, a decrease of 22 percent. Data on pre and post treatment forage production are not available for the four sagebrush spray projects described in Table 39; however, the average increase from 31 to 60 percent in grass composition suggests that substantial improvement in grass forage production resulted from spraying sagebrush. Effects on Livestock Ninety-nine percent of the total acreage of range treated in Colorado by the three agencies surveyed was located within grazing allotments. Seventy-eight percent of the total acreage treated within grazing allotments were treated primarily to improve rangelands on cattle and horse allotments, and 22 percent were treated to improve rangelands for sheep and goats (Table 40). Cattle carrying capacities and stocking rates before and after sagebrush spraying and pinyon-juniper chaining on type-conversion projects for which this type of information was available are shown in Table 41. Average cattle carrying capacity following treatment on nine sagebrush spray projects totalling 10,763 acres increased from 8 0 acres per animal-unit-month to 5.3 acres per A.U.M. Accordingly, cattle stocking rates were raised from 8.1 acres per A.U.M. to 6.5 acres per A.U.M. on 13 sagebrush spray projects which totalled 14,278 acres. Similar cattle carrying capacity increases were noted after sagebrush spraying by Hyder and Sneva (1956) who reported that twice as much forage and beef was produced on a 40-acre pasture after sagebrush had been controlled with chemical herbicides. 0 Average cattle carrying capacity following treatment on three pinyon-juniper chaining projects totalling 3,326 acres increased from 24.0 acres per A.U.M., to 11.0 acres per A.U.M. Whether stocking rates were adjusted upward on these three chaining projects was not determined. No increases were made in the stocking rate on five other pinyon-juniper chainings; however, it is not known whether chaining resulted in increased carrying capacities on those five projects, because carrying capacity data were lacking. Effects on Wildlife Ninety-eight percent (510,053 acres) of the rangelands treated in Colorado by the U. S. Forest Service, Bureau of Land MaRagement, and Bureau of Indian Affairs have been located within mule deer range (Table 42). Seventy-five percent (381,314 acres) of the total deer range treated was used by deer during the fall-winter-spring period and 25 percent (128,739 acres) was primarily summer deer range. The fall-winter-spring deer range treated represents �- 14 - approximately five percent of the total winter deer range on lands administered by the U. S. Forest Service and Bureau of Land Management in Colorado. Estimates of total acreages of winter deer range on Forest Service and Bureau of Land Management Lands were provided by McKean (1958). Acreages of deer winter range on Indian Lands were not listed by McKean, but he indicated the acreage was low. Acreages of deer range treated prior to January 1, 1966 that received heavy use by deer at the time of treatment are shown by vegetative type and kind of treatment in Table 43. One-third (99,634 acres) of the total deer fa1l-winter-spring range treated received heavy use by deer at the time of treatment. Fifty-eight percent (57,510 acres) of the heaVily used fallwinter-spring range was in the sagebrush type and 35 percent (34,993 acres) was in the pinyon-juniper type (Table 43). Thirty-eight percent (197,672 acres) of the rangelands treated in Colorado by the U. S. Forest Service and Bureau of Land Management have been located within elk range (Table 44). Sixty-two percent (122,615 acres) of the elk range treated has been fall-winter-spring range. Using McKean's (1958) estimates of the amount of elk winter range in Colorado as a basis, it is estimated that approximately three percent of the fal1-winter-spring elk range on U. S. Forest Service and Bureau of Land Management lands in Colorado has been treated. Seventy percent (85,922 acres) of the fa1l-winter-spring elk range treated has been within the sagebrush type, 15 percent (18,343 acres) has been in the grassland type, and only two percent (2,659 acres) has been treated in the pinyon-juniper type (Table 44). Relatively little (five percent or 6,490 acres) of the fa11-winter-spring elk range treated was heavily used by elk at the time of treatment (Table 45). Elk use on most of this range was moderate or light. A total of 100,286 acres have been treated on U. S. Forest Service and Bureau of Land Management lands in Colorado that were inhabited by sage grouse. Sage grouse are not found on Indian lands in the state. Ninety-seven percent (96,785 acres) of the sage grouse range treated was in the sagebrush type. The other three percent were lands not dominated by sagebrush but which supported some sagebrush plants. Sage grouse use was heavy at the time of treatment on 20 percent (19,951 acres) of the sage grouse range treated (Table 46), Certain Regional Game, Fish and Parks Department Biologists and Area Supervisors were asked to consider range-type conversion projects which had been selected for evaluation of effects of treatment. They were requested to give their appraisals concerning the effects of treatment on wildlife for those projects with which they were personally familiar. Their appraisals are summarized in Table 47. Appraisals of treatment effects took into consideration the extent of kill on important game cover and forage plants, the primary season of game use, the extent of game use observed on project areas following treatment, size and shape of the project area and many other factors. Nineteen projects out of 22 (83 percent) of the sagebrush spray projects appraised on fal1-winter-spring deer range were considered detrimental to deer; none of the sagebrush spray projects were considered beneficial, and �- 15 - four projects (16 percent) were considered to have had no effect (Table 47). These appraisals are supported by research conducted on the Uncompahgre Plateau where a significant decrease in deer use reflected by numbers of pellet-groups was recorded on sagebrush winter deer range after spraying (A.E. Anderson, unpublished data). Sixteen pinyon-juniper chainings located on fall-winter-spring deer range were appraised. Six of these projects (38 percent) were considered beneficial to deer, nine (56 percent) were considered detrimental, and one (six percent) was considered to have had no effect (Table 47). Specific reasons for classifying some pinyon-juniper chainings as beneficial and some as detrimental or no effect as far as game species are concerned are discussed later in the section relating to field inspections of individual range type-conversion projects. Appraisals were made of 12 sagebrush spray projects which were used by elk during the fall-winter-spring period. Three of these projects (25 percent) were considered beneficial to elk, four projects (33 percent) were considered detrimental and five projects (42 percent) were believed to have had no effect on elk (Table 47). Thirteen sagebrush spray projects were appraised which were located in areas inhabited by sage grouse. All of these projects were considered detrimental to sage grouse (Table 47). These appraisals are in agreement with the findings of Martin (1965) who reported that sprayed sagebrush strips provided only four percent of the 415 sage grouse observations made on his study area in Montana, and 91 percent of the 15 sage grouse he observed in sprayed sagebrush strips were within 95 feet of an unsprayed strip. Effects of Treatment in Sagebrush Type as Determined From Field Inspections Type Description Field inspections were made on 22 sagebrush type-conversion projects totalling 24,122 acres. This included 12 projects (17,080 acres) where sagebrush was aerially sprayed but not seeded; four projects (2,997 acres) where the treatment was plowing and seeding; three projects (1,925 acres) where sagebrush was plowed, seeded and later aerially sprayed; and three projects (2,120 acres) where sagebrush was chained but not seeded. In every case untreated areas adjacent to the treated areas supported moderate to heavy stands of big sage and big sage was the dominant species. Native grass understories varied from sparse to heavy. Big sage was sometimes tihe only shrub; however, in many cases big sagebrush was interspersed with various combinations of the following plants: rabbitbrush (Chrysothamnus ~.), serviceberry (Amelanchier ~.), silver sagebrush (Artemesia cana), snowberry (Symphoriocarpos ~.), and antelope bitterbru~h. Forbs were often present and in several areas Wyethia (Wyethia ~.) was common. An untreated area near one project supported a heavy stand of big sage and an abundance of Gambel oak (Quercus gambeli) and small pinyon pines (Pinus edulis) and scattered serviceberry and mountain mahogany. Another untreated area adjacent to a spray �- 16 project supported a heavy stand of big sage with scattered clumps of Gambel oak and occasional ponderosa pines (Pinus ponderosa). Still another area contained a heavy big sage stand and a.moderate stand of greasewood (Sarcobatus 'y_~!"miculatus)and four-wing saltbush. Aerial Spray Without Seeding Effects on the Range. -- Big sagebrush was substantially reduced on nine of the 12 aerial spray projects inspected, moderately reduced on one project, and reduced slightly on two projects. The two spray areas which still supported heavy sage stands were two of the earliest spray projects inspected; one was completed in 1959 and the other in 1961. A good sage kill may have been obtained initially as there is evidence that much of the present sage stand is regrowth. The more recent spray projects were in various stages of reversion to a sagebrush type. Where serviceberry, mountain mahogany and pinyon-pines were present they were killed or heavily damaged by spraying. Rabbitbrush, bitterbrush and Gambel oak were damaged on some spray projects and not on others. The effects of spray on these plants will be discussed later in the section on spraying of browse. Comparison of areas where sagebrush had been sprayed with adjacent unsprayed areas showed substantial improvement in the native grass stand (Figure 9) on five spray projects, moderate improvement on four projects and little or no improvement on three projects. Forbs in the sprayed areas tended to increase or remain at about the same level of abundance except for wyethia, which was reduced in abundance by spraying. Probable Effects on Deer. -- Seven out of eight sagebrush spray projects conducted in areas used by deer primarily during the fall, winter, and spring~ or where deer were present throughout the year, were judged to be detrimental to deer, because of a moderate to heavy sagebrush kill coupled with damage to serviceberry, mountain mahogany, Gambel oak, and other browse plants found on the area. One spray project was considered to have had little effect on winter deer range because of a poor kill on sagebrush. No other browse plants were damaged on that particular project because sagebrush was the only shrub present. Out of four sagebrush spray projects conducted on deer summer ranges, two were considered beneficial to deer because forbs were increased in abundance on the sprayed area, and two projects were considered to have had no effect because there was no change in forb abundance. The fact that a high sagebrush kill was obtained on three of these four projects was disregarded in assessing the probable effects of spraying on deer because these areas were on summer deer range. Probable Effects on Elk. -- Wilbert (1963)' found that sprayed sagebrush areas in Wyoming produced a definite attraction for elk, especially in late spring. He recorded a 40 percent increase in elk use during the first year �- 17 - after spraying substantially reduced sagebrush and increased grass production. The second year, elk use increased 55 percent on one of his study areas and 90 percent on the other. These findings were considered when making appraisals of the probable effects of sagebrush spraying projects in Colorado. Three spray .projects were inspected which were located in areas used by elk primarily during the winter or on a yearlong basis. One project was considered detrimental to elk because the area was nearly a pure sagebrush type, and spraying had resulted in a heavy sagebrush kill with very little improvement in grass cover. Another project was classified as having no effect on elk because detrimental effects of a heavy sage kill caused by spraying were compensated for by a moderate increase in the grass cover. The third project was considered beneficial to elk because the detrimental effects of a heavy sage kill were more than offset by a substantial improvement in grass production. Two out of three aerial sagebrush spray projects conducted on areas used by elk primarily during late spring, summer, and early fall were considered beneficial to elk because of substantial improvement in grass production. The third project probably had little or no effect on elk because there was no change in grass production. The fact that sagebrush and other browse plants were severely damaged by spraying on these projects was not considered detrimental to elk because these areas were summer range. Probable Effects on Sage Grouse. -- Five of six aerial sagebrush spray projects which were conducted in areas inhabited by sage grouse were considered to have had detrimental effects on sage grouse. Sagebrush cover was almost eliminated on these five projects and the spray areas were converted to grass typ~s. The sixth project was a 4,080 acre sagebrush area sprayed in 1965; Detailed pre- and post- treatment studies to determine the effects of sagebrush spraying on sage grouse had been made on it by Gill (1965) and Carr (1967). Carr (1967) found that sagebrush control on this project apparently did not adversely affect strutting activities or strutting grounds. Neither did it definitely affect nesting use of sprayed areas or nesting success; however, hens tended to nest close to unsprayed areas. Brood production and survival were not noticeably affected by spraying. Spraying on this sixth project, was, however, far less successful in killing sagebrush than on the other five projects inspected, and may possibly have been detrimental to sage grouse had a better sagebrush kill been obtained. Plow and Seed Effects on the Range. -- Big sagebrush was almost eliminated initially on the four sagebrush plowing and seeding projects that were inspected. The only sagebrush plants present were sparsely distributed young plants which have come in since the areas were plowed. This situation is illustrated in Figure 10. The only other shrubs present on untreated areas adjacent to the four plowing and seeding projects inspected, besides sagebrush, were rabbitbrush, greasewood, and four-wing saltbush. These were substantially reduced in abundance by plowing. �- 18 - Seeding success was good to excellent on two projects where crested wheatgrass was drilled and another where crested wheatgrass and Russian wildrye was planted. Extremely poor results were obtained from drilling crested wheatgrass, bitterbrush, and four-wing saltbush on another project. Very few crested wheatgrass and four-wing saltbush plants and no bitterbrush plants could be found on this area. Probable Effects on Deer. -- All four plowing and seeding projects inspected were located in areas used by deer primarily during the fall, winter, and spring period, or on a yearlong basis. All were considered detrimental to deer because of the substantial reduction of sagebrush and conversion of the areas to grass types. Probable Effects on Sage Grouse. -- The four plowing and seeding projects were considered detrimental to sage grouse. Very little sagebrush remained for sage grouse food or cover on any of these projects. Plow, Seed, and Aerial Spray Effects on the Range. -- Plowing and seeding with follow-up spraying after several years has been very effective in removing sagebrush and converting the areas to an almost pure grass type on the three projects of this kind inspected. Only a very few young sage plants exist now and these have undoubtedly come in since the treatment was applied. Establishment of seeded grasses has been excellent, especially smooth brome and crested wheatgrass. Probable Effects on Deer. -- Two of the three plowing, seeding, and spraying projects were conducted in areas used by deer primarily during the winter or where deer were present yearlong. These were considered detrimental due to the removal of sagebrush. The third project was considered detrimental even though the area was used by deer during late spring, summer, and early fall because the supply of forbs used by deer during the summer was not increased, and because of the substantial reduction in sagebrush which deer begin to use during the fall months. Probable Effects on Elk. -- Two of the three projects were located in areas used by elk during the winter months or where elk were present throughout the year. Both projects were considered beneficial to elk because a substantial increase in grass production resulted from treatment. It was believed that the improved grass conditions outweigh the detrimental effects of sagebrush removal as far as elk are concerned. Probable Effects on Sage Grouse. -- Both projects, located in areas inhabited by sage grouse, were considered detrimental to sage grouse because of virtual elimination of sagebrush. Chain Without Seeding Effects on the Range Two of the three sagebrush chaining projects inspected were urt~uccessful in removing sagebrush. Heavy stands of high sage occurred on the treated areas and on adjacent untreated areas. Many large dead c -- �- 19 - sagebrush plants were found lying flat on the ground, indicating that chaining removed the large sage plants and left the small ones. The small plants subsequently grew to the size and density of the original stand (Figure 11). The third project almost eliminated large sagebrush plants in the chained area and appeared to have caused the loss of about six inches of topsoil. Numerous small sage plants less than two inches tall occurred in the chained area. These, however, appeared to be dwarf plants caused possibly by topsoil loss rather than newly sprouted plants, so it is doubtful if the sagebrush will soon revert to its original state. Grass cover was not improved noticeably on any of the three sagebrush chaining projects inspected. Probable Effects on Deer. -- All three sagebrush chaining projects were located in areas used by deer primarily during the fall, winter, and spring periods. Two projects were believed to have had little or no effect on deer because very little difference could be distinguished between the sagebrush cover on the chained and adjacent unchained areas. The third project was considered detrimental to deer because chaining almost eliminated the large sagebrush plants and caused soil damage. Probable Effects on Elk. -- One of the three sagebrush chaining projects was located in an area used by elk during the winter. This project was considered detrimental to elk because large sagebrush plants were almost eliminated and grass was not improved. Elk were not present in the vicinities of the other two sagebrush chaining projects inspected, but even so, these two projects would have had no effect on elk because there was little or no change in the amount of grass and sagebrush present. Probable Effects on Sage Grouse. -- The only sagebrush cha1nlng project located within the range of sage grouse was where large sagebrush plants were almost eliminated by chaining. This project was therefore .considered detrimental to sage grouse. The other two chainings would probably have had little or no effect on sage grouse if they had been present because chaining did not reduce the abundance of sagebrush. Effects of Treatment in Pinyon-Juniper From Field Inspections Type as Determined Type Description Thirteen pinyon-juniper type-conversion projects comprls1ng 20,093 acres were inspected. These included five projects (9,489 acres) where pinyon and juniper were chained and the area was not seeded, six chaining and seeding projects (9,824 acres), one project (620 acres) where the area was chained, burned, seeded, and later aerially sprayed with 2-4-D, and one project (160 acres) where a brush roller was used and the area wasoseeded. Untreated pinyon-juniper areas adjacent to the pinyon-juniper type-conversion projects inspected fell into three main categories. The first category was characterized by moderately open stands of pinyon and juniper with an understory composed mainly of various combinations and densities of some or all of the following plants: Serviceberry, big sagebrush, mountain mahogany, �- 20 .- bitterbrush and Gambe1 oak. (Figure 12.) Grass cover varied from sparse to heavy The second category consisted of moderately open stands of pinyon and juniper with an almost pure understory of big sagebrush and some grass (Figure 13). The third category was characterized by heavy stands of dense pinyon and juniper with a very sparse understory of grass and prickly pear cactus and few if any browse plants (Figure 14). Chaining Effects on the Range.-- Large pinyon and juniper trees were uprooted and killed on all twelve of the chaining projects inspected. The smaller trees were more resilient and most were not uprooted, but merely bent over by the chain. They sprang up as soon as the chain passed. Where browse, including sagebrush, occurred in the understory, the usual effect of chaining appeared to be a decrease in abundance of browse for the first one to three years due to removal of large browse plants. Eventually increases occurred in abundance and vigor, brought about by release of the younger plants, and sprouting was stimulated in serviceberry, mountain mahogany and Gambel oak. Where native grasses occurred in the understory they were, in most cases, also released by chaining. The amount of increase in abundance of browse and grass brought about by chaining appeared to be almost entirely dependent on the relative abundance of browse and native grasses prior to treatment. Where a good browse or grass stand existed prior to treatment, a substantial increase in abundance and vigor was usually the eventual result of chaining (Figure IS). However, where the browse or grass understory was sparse or non-existent prior to treatment, there was very little or no improvement in browse abundance and vigor because there were no parent plants to be released. Grass seed was broadcasted by air following chaining on seven of the twelve chaining projects inspected; bitterbrush was seeded on three projects and fourwing saltbush on two projects. The most commonly seeded grasses were various species of wheatgrass, but primarily crested wheatgrass, and various species of wild rye. Seeding success on grasses varied from poor to excellent, but seeding success on bitterbrush and four-wing saltbush was very poor Q One pinyon-juniper chaining was inspected where the uprooted trees had been burned, crested wheatgrass aerially seeded, and two years later the area had been aerially sprayed with 2-4-D. Burning almost completely removed the uprooted pinyon and juniper trees, and the area was converted from a heavy pinyon-juniper forest with a sparse understory of poor qualify Gambel oak, mountain mahogany, bitterbrush, and native grasses to an almost pure, exceptionally heavy stand of crested wheatgrass o Probable Effects resulted in a release on Deer.-Pinyon-juniper chaining projects which of browse plants and general improvement of browse �- 21 - conditions were usually considered beneficial to deer when these projects were located on late. fall, winter, and early spring or yearlong deer ranges. Thus~ five of the 12 chainings inspected and part of the area covered by a sixth chaining were considered beneficial to deer. Chainings located on late fall, winter, early spring or yearlong deer ranges which did not result in release of browse plants were considered detrimental to deer due to removal of the winter forage provided by the pinyon and juniper trees themselves. T'wo projects inspected and part of the area covered by a third project fell into this category. Two recent chainings were considered detrimental to deer because at the time these were inspected browse abundance had been reduced by removal of large browse plants. It appeared evident, however, that on both projects the young plants released by chaining would in time produce an improved browse stand to the benefit of deer. Another project was considered detrimental to deer because despite a substantial increase in browse abundance, chaining was done in an extremely large block and the project was adjacent to other very large chainings. Studies by Colorado Department of Game, Fish and Parks show that deer make little use of the central parts of large chained areas such as the one in Figure 16 due to lack of cover (D. W. Minnich, unpublished data). One of the 12 pinyon-juniper chainings inspected was located on an area used by deer during late spring, summer, and early fall. This happened to be the project where the area was chained, burned, seeded, and later sprayed. The project was considered detrimental to deer because the area was converted to an almost pure grass type with no improvement in the abundance of forbs or other summer deer forage plants, and because of the reduction of browse plants which deer begin to use during early fall. Probable Effects on Elk. -- Only two of the 12 pinyon-juniper chaining projects inspected were located in areas inhabited by elk, and these were both on elk winter range. Browse was not released on either project due to the absence of a browse understory, however both projects were considered beneficial to elk because cover was substantially improved through reseeding. Brush Rolling Effects on the Range. -- One project was inspected where a brush roller or "jungle buster" had been used to remove pinyon and juniper. Unlike a chained area where trees are uprooted but otherwise undamaged (Figure 17) Pinyon and juniper trees in the brush rolled area were partially uprooted, the trunks were snapped off one or two feet above the ground and broken in several places, and the branches were crushed and flattened against the ground (Figure 18). Rolling crushed and killed the large browse plants in the area, but released the smaller plants and resulted in an increase in abundance and vigor of browse. The abundance of native grasses was also increased. Probable Effects on Deer. -- The project was located in an area used by deer primarily during spring and fall, and it was considered beneficial to deer because it caused an increase in the abundance and vigor of browse plants used by deer during the spring and fall period. Brush rolling, however, is �- 22 - probably less beneficial to deer as a type-conversion technique than chaining, since there is very little deer cover left in a rolled area after the trees have been crushed. On a chained area, however, the fallen but intact dead trees provide a certain amount of cover for deer. Effects of Treatment in Browse Type as Determined from Field Inspections Type Description One type-conversion project was inspected which involved aerial spraying of 1,610 acres of browse. Spraying was not followed by reseeding. The vegetation adjacent to the sprayed area fell into two main categories. One category was characterized by a heavy stand of mountain mahogany, serviceberry~ and squaw apple (Peraphyllum ramosissimum), a moderate stand of big sagebrush, and a sparse understory of native grasses. The second category consisted of a heavy stand of Gambel oak. and big sagebrush interspersed with moderate numbers of mountain mahogany, serviceberry, and squaw apple plants, and a sparse grass cover. Both vegetation categories were present within the sprayed area. Aerial Spraying Effects on the Range. -- The reaction of browse to aerial spraying on this project was very similar to the effects observed when browse plants were sprayed in conjunction with aerial sagebrush spray projects. The abundance and vigor of mountain mahogany, serviceberry, and squaw apple was substantially reduced by spraying. Spraying had little effect on Gamel oak on this particular project and on one sagebrush spray project where Gambel oak occurred, however, where Gambel oak was sprayed in conjunction with another sagebrush spray project inspected, it was damaged rather severely. In that instance the inner portions of nearly all Gambel oak plants were alive, but the outer branches had been killed. A moderate sagebrush kill resulted from spraying on this project, there was no noticeable improvement in the abundance of grasses. however Probable Effects on Deer and Elk. -- This project is located on deer and elk summer range, but it is near the lower limits of summer range; during mild years it is probably used by deer and elk during the spring and fall, and possibly, winter seasons. Thus, spraying was considered detrimental to deer and elk because of the heav,y browse kill and failure to increase the abundance of forbs and native grasses. If, however, the project had been located in an area used by deer and elk primarily during the winter, the effects of spraying would have been extremely detrimental. SUGGESTED METHODS FOR IMPROVING RANGE TYPE-CONVERSION PRACTICES The following measures are suggested for improving type-conversion practices to provide maximum benefit to wildlife and to minimize damage to wildlife., These suggestions are based on information collected during the inventory and during the 1967 type-conversion project field inspections. �- 23 - 1. Range type-conversions which reduce the abundance and vigor of browse, including sagebrush, in areas used by deer and elk during the fall, winter~ and spring, particularly on key winter ranges, should be avoided whenever possible. Reduction of browse on spring and fall ranges causes deer and elk to move through these areas more qUickly for lack of forage, and forces them to spend more time on the winter ranges, possibly resulting in damage to the winter range and increased game damage to agricultural crops and haystacks. 2. Application of type-conversion treatment in extremely large blocks should be avoided. Chaining and spraying should be done in strips (Fig. 19). The Colorado Department of Game, Fish and Parks Southwest Region recommends that chained strips be limited to one-fourth mile in width (D. W. Minnich, personal communication). 3. Chaining in pinyon and juniper forests where there is a sparse or nonexistant browse understory should be followed by seeding of browse species. The species to be planted and method of seeding should be carefully selected. Three projects where bitterbrush seed was broadcasted, two where four-wing saltbush seed was broadcasted, and one where bitterbrush and four-wing saltbush seed were drilled were inspected during 1967. Seeding success was very poor in every case. Browse species can be seeded successfully, but certain site preparation and planting procedures must be closely followed (Plummer~ et al., 1966). �- 24 Significance of Past Range Type-Conversion in Relation to Wildlife Programs in Colorado A relatively small portion of the total rangeland area in Colorado has been treated up to January 1, 1966. As previously mentioned, this amounts to only five percent of the total fall-winter-spring deer range and three percent of the fall-winter-spring elk range located in Colorado on lands administered by the U. S. Forest Service and Bureau of Land Management Thus, looking at the statewide picture, the amount of rall-winter-spring deer and elk range treated has been relatively insignificant. On a local basis~ however, where extensive range type-conversion programs have been conducted on Federal lands as well as on adjacent private lands, it is felt by many wildlife people in Colorado that range type-conversion has had a significant impact on game species. Such areas are North Park, Middle Park, and the north and east sides of the Uncompahgre Plateau. o It has been shown that many of the range type-conversion projects completed in the past in Colorado have been detrimental to game species, and some have been beneficial to wildlife. The range type-conversion project inventory has pointed out areas where improvements can be made concerning future range type conversions, and has provided the basis for the following recommendations. First, it is recommended that more complete records be maintained concerning the conduct and results of future range type-conversions. Records of early range type-conversions reviewed during the inventory were usually very sketchy_ Records of recent type-conversions were much more complete, but still left much to be desired. Relatively few of even the more recent project records inventoried described in detail the actual extent of livestock range improvement which occurred as a result of treatment, and there were virtually no records in the project files concerning the effects of individual type-conversions on wildlife. In many cases range transects established prior to treatment to measure the effects of treatment were never re-run, possibly due to personnel changes or busy work schedules, and therefore~ post-treatment data were often lacking. Secondly, it is recommended that close coordination be maintained between land management agencies when planning and carrying out future range type-conversion programs. The need for such coordination has been recognized by the various land management agencies in Colorado, and a system for maintaining close interagency coordination was developed under this Federal Aid Project through cooperation of the Interagency Council on Wildlife Ecology. The system was adopted for use in Colorado by the U. S. Forest Service, Bureau of Land Management, and Colorado Department of Game, Fish and Parks, and was placed in operation on January 15, 1968. Procedures and instructions for using the system entitled "A System for Inventory, Evaluation and Exchange of Information on Range Type-Conversion Projects" are presented in the Appendix of this report. Finally, it is recommended that research be initiated to determine how certain presently-used range type-conversion practices can be improved so they will provide maximum benefit to wildlife or minimize damage to wildlife habitat. Range type-conversion is here to stay and can be expected to continue to accelerate. Future range type-conversion programs must be designed so that maximum benefits to wildlife as well as livestock can be realized, and much research will be necessary to determine how these maximum benefits can best be achieved. �- 25 - RECOMMENDATIONS (1) It is recommended that more complete records be maintained the conduct and results of future range type-conversions. (2) It is recommended that close coorination be maintained between land management agencies when planning and carrying out future range typeconversion programs. (3) It is recommended that research be initiated to detp.rmine how certain presently-used range type-conversion praotices can be improved to provide maximum benefit to wildlife or minimize damage to wildlife habitat. LITERATURE concerning CITED Anderson, Allen E. 1966. An investigation of 2,4-D application to sagebrush within a mountain shrub-conifer complex, Uncompahgre Plateau. Vegetative Studies. Colorado Dept. of Game, Fish and Parks. P-R Project W~114-R-1, WP-1, J-l, Quart. Rept., July, Part 3. p. 349-389. Blaisdell, J. P. and W. F. Muegg1er. 1956. Effects of 2,4-D on forbs and shrubs associated with big sagebrush. J. Range Manage. 9(1):38-40. Carr, Harold D. 1967. Effects of sagebrush control on abundance, distribution and movements of sage grouse. Colorado Dept. of Game, Fish and Parks. P-R Project W-37-R-20, WP-3, J-8a, Quart. Rept. April, Part 1, p. 1-106. Cornelius, Donald R. and Charles A. Graham. 1958 2,4-D. J. Range Manage. ll(3):122-125. 0 Sagebrush control with Gill, R. Bruce. 1966. Effects of sagebrush control on distribution and abundance of sage grouse. Colorado Dept. of Game, Fish and Parks. P-R Project W-37-R-17, WP-3, J-8, Quart. Rep. April, Part 3~ p. 1-185. Harrington, H. D. 1954. Denver, 666 p. Manual of the plants of Colorado. Sage Books, Hull, A. C., Jr., N. A. Kissinger, Jr. and W. T. Vaughn. 1952. Chemical control of big sagebrush in Wyoming. J. Range Manage. 5(6):398-402. Hyder, Donald N. and Forrest A. Sneva. 1956. spraying. J. Range Manage. 9(1):34-38. Johnson, W. M. 1958. J. Range Manage. Herbage response Reinvasion of big sageb~ush 11(4):169-172. following to sagebrush chemical control. Kear1, W. Gordon. 1965. A survey of big sagebrush control in Wyoming, Univ. of Wyoming. Agri. Exp. Sta. Circ. No. 217. 42 p. 1952-1964. �- 26 - Kissinger, N. A., Jr., and Richard M. Hurd. 1953. Control big sagebrush with chemicals and grow more grass. U. S. Forest Service. Rocky Mtn. For. and Range Exp. Sta. Paper No. 11. Martin, Neil. 1965. Effects of sagebrush manipulation on sage grouse. Montana Game and Fish Dept. P-R Project W-91-R-6 and 7, J II-A.l. 3&p, McDermott, R. E. and W. R. Byrnes. 1960. Herbicides and their use in forestry. Proc. Forestry Symp., Aug. 30, 31, 1960. School of For., Pa. State Univ. McKean, 'William T. 1958. Location, extent and ownership of winter ranges. Colorado Dept. of Game, Fish and Parks. P-R Project W-38-R, WP-l, J-2, Quart. Rep. July, p. 5-23· Mueggler, Walter F., and James P. Blaisdell. 1958. Effects on associated species of burning, rotobeating, spraying, and railing sagebrush. J. Range Manage. 11(2):61-66. Pechanec, Joseph, George Stewart, A. Perry Plummer, Joseph H. Robertson andA. C. Hull, Jr. 1954. Controlling sagebrush on range lands. U.' S. Dept. of Agri., Farmers Bull. No. 2072. 36 p. Plummer, A. PerrY, Donald R. Christensen and Stephen B. Monsen. 1966. Highlights, results, and accomplishments of game range restoration studies. Utah Department of Fish and Game. Pub. No. 67-4, 45 p. Plummer, A. Perry, and Homer D. Stapley. 1960. Research in game forage restoration in Utah, Proc. Ann. C®nf. W. Ass. State Game and Fish Comm. 39:159-166. Weintraub. Frances C. 1953. Grasses introduced into the United States. U. S. Dept. of Agri., Agri. Handbook No. 58. Wilbert, Don E. 1963. Some effects of chemical sagebrush control on elk distribution. J. Range Manage. 16 (2):74-78. Approved by: Prepared by: Roland C. Kufeld Asst. Wildlife Researcher Date: Harold R. Shepherd Project Leader Jack R. Grieb Game Research Chief �- 27 - Table l. Acreages of range land treated prior to January 1, 1966 in Colorado by the U. S. Forest Service. Vegetative Kind of No. of Acres Ac. Seeded as Treatment Projects TYEe Treated Part of ,Treatment Grass Seed only 32 2,429 2,429 Harrow 17 2,057 2,057 Plow 51 13,789 13,789 Spray 31 31,503 1,326 Plow & harrow 8 1,448 1,448 Spray & harrow 1 200 200 Spray & plow 3 2,37q. 2,374 Other 1 1z020 12020 Subtotal 144 54,820 24,643 Meadow Perennial Sagebrush Rabbitbrush forbs Seed only Harrow Plow Spray Subtotal 2 2 1 1 6 76 71 15 47 209 76 71 15 47 209 Harrow Plow Spray Plow & harrow Subtotal 2 2 1 1 6 180 325 20 40 565 180 325 20 40 565 Seed only Harrow Plow Spray Chain Rotobeat Plow & harrow Spray & harrow Spray & plow Subtotal 24 11 39 132 1 1 2,659 2,059 10,961 92,057 300 128 1,309 160 135 109,768 2,659 2,059 10,961 540 300 128 1,309 160 135 18,251 6 1 2 217 Harrow Spray Subtotal 3 4 65 22050 2,115 65 0 65 Browse Seed only Plow Spray Burn Spray & plow Subtotal 3 1 15 1 1 21 190 523 10,343 48 40 11,144 175 523 925 0 40 1,663 Conifer Seed only Plow Burn Subtotal 11 2 1 14 955 299 205 1,459 955 299 205 1,459 1 �- 28 - Table l. Acreages of range land treated prior to January 1, 1966 in Colorado by the U. S. Forest Service. {Continued~ Vegetative Kind of No. of Acres Ac. Seeded as Type Treatment Projects Treated Part of Treatment Pinyon-juniper Harrow 1 460 460 Chain 6 6,497 5,509 Brush roller 1 160 160 Subtotal 8 7,117 6,129 Aspen Annual seeds Abandoned Accidental All Veg. lands burn types Seed only Harrow Subtotal 6 5 11 2,892 836 3,728 2,892 836 3,728 Seed only Harrow Plow Spray Spray & plow Subtotal 9 1,196 276 40 910 115 2,537 1,166 276 40 0 ll5 1,597 106 5 56 172 5 1 1 1 17 Seed only Harrow Plow Plow & harrow Subtotal 10 106 5 56 5 172 Seed only Subtotal 5 5 21860 2,860 2,860 2,860 463 196,494 61,341 Grand total 4 1 4 1 5 �- 29 - Table 2. Acreages of rangeland treated prior to January 1, 1966 in Colorado b~ the Bureau of Land Management. Vegetative Kind of No. of Acres Ac. Seeded as Type Treatment Projects Treated Part of Treatment Grass Seed only 3 329 329 Harrow 1 50 50 Plow 5 22268 2z268 Subtotal 9 2,647 2,647 Perennial forbs Seed only Plow Spray Subtotal 1 1 1 3 200 400 152 752 200 400 0 600 Seed only Harrow Plow Spray Chain Burn Rotobeat Plow & harrow Spray & plow Plow & burn Chain & burn Other Subtotal 36 6 107 60 24 5 3 5 5 6 1 1 259 12,008 3,102 41,054 68,01l 14,309 670 395 2,013 4,365 1,503 200 27 147,657 12,008 3,102 40,884 1,807 6,250 670 2,013 4,365 1,503 200 27 72,829 Rabbitbrush Plow Spray Rotobeat Subtotal 4 11 1 16 2,317 11,170 169 13,656 2,317 2,920 0 5,237 Browse Seed only Harrow Plow Spray Burn Subtotal 1 2 1 65 477 84 500 55 1,181 65 477 500 55 1,097 1 81 84 1,000 200 1,000 76z388 78,588 1,000 200 0 53z190 54,390 1 1 40 40 40 40 Sagebrush Pinyon- jmiper Aspen Seed only Plow Spray Chain Seed only Subtotal 1 1 6 1 1 ° ° �- 30 - Table 2. Acreages of rangeland treated prior to January 1, 1966 in Colorado b~ the Bureau of Land Managemen t . {Continued~ Ac. Seeded as Acres Kind of No. of Vegetative Part of Treatment Treated Projects Treatment T~Ee 200 1 200 Seed only Saltbush 200 1 200 Plow 525 3 Other 525 925 Subtotal 925 5 Greasewood Half shrub Annual seeds Abandoned Accidental lands burn All Veg. tYEes Plow Spray Spray & chain Subtotal 1 1 4 167 934 380 1,481 167 0 380 547 Spray Subtotal 5 5 12553 1,553 1,150 1,150 None Plow Plow & harrow Subtotal 1 1 1 3 200 320 60 580 200 320 60 580 Seed only Subtotal 1 40 40 40 40 Seed only Harrow Subtotal 23 24 9,621 25 9,646 9,621 25 9,646 420 2582746 149 z728 Grand total 2 1 1 �- 31 - Table 3, Acreages of rangeland treated prior to January 1, 1966 in Colorado by the Bureau of Indian Affairs. Vegetative Kind of No. of Acres Ac. Seeded as Tlee Treatment Projects Treated Part of Treatment Sagebrush Harrow 1 750 0 Plow 9 6,165 6,165 Spray 3 6,400 1,900 Rotobeat 1 700 ° Plow & burn 1 no 110 Subtotal 15 14,125 8,175 Browse Pinyon-juniper All Vea· tl2es Chain Subtotal 1 1 220 220 0 Seed only Plow Chain Burn Subtotal 3 2 5 1 11 11,684 574 35,235 11°30 48,523 11,684 574 21,060 0 33,318 Grand total 27 622868 412493 0 �- 32 - Table 4. Acreages of rangeland treated prior to January 1, 1966 in Colorado by the U. S. Forest Service, Bureau of Land Managemen t,and Bureau of Indian Affairs. Vegetative Kind of No. of Acres Ac. Seeded as Treatment Projects Treated Part of Treatment TYEe Grass Seed only 35 2,758 2,758 Harrow 18 2,107 2,107 Plow 56 16,057 16,057 Spray 31 31,503 1,326 Plow & harrow 8 1,448 1,448 Spray & furrow 1 200 200 Spray & plow 3 2,374 2,374 Other 1 12020 12020 Subtotal 153 57,467 27,290 Meadow Perennial Sagebrush Rabbitbrush Seed only Harrow Plow Spray Subtotal f:>rbs Seed only Harrow Plow Spray Plow & Iar row Subtotal 2 2 1 1 6 1 2 3 2 1 9 Seed only Harrow Plow Spray Chain Burn Rotobeat Plow & harrow Spray & harrow Spray & plow plow & hrrn Chain & hrr n Other Subtotal 5 11 1 7 7 1 1 491 Harrow Plow Spray Rotobeat Subtotal 4 14 1 20 60 18 155 195 25 5 1 76 71 15 47 209 76 71 15 47 209 200 180 725 172 40 1,317 200 180 725 20 40 1,165 14,667 5,911 58,180 166,468 14,609 670 1,223 3,322 160 4,500 1,613 200 27 271,550 14,667 5,161 58,010 4,247 6,550 670 128 3,322 160 4,500 1,613 200 27 99,255 65 2,317 13,220 169 15,771 65 2,317 2,920 0 5,302 �- 33 - Table 4. Acreages of rangeland treated prior to January 1, 1966 in Colora.do by the U. S. Forest Service, Bureau of Land Managemen t, and Bureau of Indian Affairs. ~Continued) Vegetative Kind of No. of Acres Ac. Seeded as Treatment Projects Treated Part of Treatment T:l:I!e Browse Seed only 4 255 240 Harrow 2 477 L~77 Plow 2 607 523 Spray 16 10,843 1,425 220 Chain 1 0 Burn 2 103 55 Spray & plow 1 40 40 Subtotal 28 12,545 2,760 Conifer Seed only Plow Burn Subtotal 11 2 1 14 955 299 205 1,459 955 299 205 1,459 Pinyon-:juntper Seed only Harrow Plow Spray Chain Burn Brush roller Subtotal 4 12,684 460 774 1 103 12,684 460 774 1,000 117,494 1,030 160 134,228 79,133 0 160 93,837 Seed only Harrow Subtotal 5 12 2,932 836 39768 2,932 836 3,768 200 200 525 925 200 200 525 925 Aspen Saltbush Greasewood Half Shrub Annual seeds Seed only Plow Other Subtotal Plow Spray Spray & Chain Subtotal 1 3 1 90 1 7 1 1 3 5 2 0 ._--- 167 934 380 1,481 167 0 380 lz553 1,553 1z150 1,150 1,396 276 360 910 60 1,366 276 360 1 115 20 3,117 115 2,177 1 1 4 Spray Subtotal 5 Seed only Harrow Plow Spray Plow & harrow Spray & plow Subtotal 10 5 5 2 1 1 547 0 60 �- 3~· - Table 4. Acreages of rangeland treated prior to January 1. 1966 in Colorado by the U. S. Forest Service, Bureau of Land Managemen4 and Bureau of Indian Affairs. (Continued) Kind of No. of Acres Ac. Seeded as Vegetative Projects Treated Part of Treatment Treatment Type Seed only 146 146 5 Abandoned lands Harrow 1 5 5 4 56 56 Plow Plow & harrow 1 5 5 ---Subtotal 11 212 212 Accidental burn All Veg. types 29 12,[+81 25 12,506 12,481 25 12,506 910 518,108 252,562 Seed only Harrow Subtotal 28 Grand total 1 �- 35 - Table 5, Acreages of rangeland treated prior to January 1, 1966. on the Ara2ahoe National Fore~t, Vegetative Kind of 'No. of Acres Acres Seeded as Treatment Projects T:2:Ee Treated Part of Treatment --.2 Grass .Seed only 362 362 Subtotal 9 362 362 Meadow Harrow Subtotal 1 1 11 11 11 11 .Sagebr ush Seed only Plow Spray Subtotal 2 3 123 121 n 123 121 32278 3,522 Spray Subtotal 1 1 Seed only Subtotal Browse Abandoned lands Accidental burn All Veg. t 2:2es 6 100 0 244 1.00 0 0 2 20 20 2 20 20 2 Seed only Subtotal 2 295 295 295 295 Grand total 26 42310 __ 932 �- 36 - Table 6. Acreages of rangeland treated prior to January 1, 1966 on the Grand Mesa National Forest. Acres Seeded as Kind of No. of Acres Vegetative Projects Treated Part of Treatment Treatment T:tEe 307 Seed only 4 307 Grass 70 Harrow 2 70 1 285 Plow 285 1,054 Spray 14 142474 Subtotal 21 15,136 1,716 Meadow Seed only Harrow Spray Subtotal 1 1 1 3 563 505 600 200 681 2,549 60 Seed only Harrow plow Spray Plow & harrow Subtotal 4 1 11 563 505 600 4,200 681 6,549 Browse Spray Subtotal 2 2 130 130 0 0 Conifer Seed only Subtotal 1 54 54 54 54 Chain Subtotal 2 626 626 626 626 Seed only Subtotal 2 2 226 226 226 226 Grand total 42 22z840 5z290 Sagebrush Pinyon-juniper Aspen All Veg. t:tEes 4 1 47 119 12 60 47 119 12 1 1 2 �- 37 - Table 7. Acreages of rangeland treated prior to January 1, 1966 on the Gunnison National Forest. Vegetative Kind of No. of Acres Ac. Seeded as Treatment T:Y2e Projects Treated Part of Treatment Grass Seed only 1 100 100 Harrow 2 450 450 Plow 6 3,590 3~590 Spray 2 2,922 0 Plow & h3.rrow 2 350 350 Subtotal 13 79412 4,490 Meadow Plow Subtotal 1 1 15 15 15 15 Perennial forbs Harrow plow Spray Plow & harrow Subtotal 2 6 180 325 20 40 565 180 325 20 40 565 4 23 2 1,257 23,939 207 1,257 1 5 30 25,408 207 5 1,469 3 1 925 40 965 Sagebrush Browse Plow Spray Plow & harrow Spray & plow Subtotal 2 1 1 Spray Spray & plow Subtotal 4 2,208 40 2,248 Aspen Harrow Subtotal 1 1 150 150 150 150 Annual weeds Seed only Harrow Subtotal 1 2 900 100 1,000 900 100 1,000 Grand to tal 57 362798 82654 All Veg, t:Y2es 1 �- 38 - Table 8. Acreages of rangeland treated prior to January 1, 1966 on the Pike National Forest. Vegetative Kind of No. of Acres Ac. Seeded as Treatment Projects Treated Part of Treatment T~Ee Plow Grass 17 5,019 5,019 Spray 5 3,362 Plow & bar row 1 3 3 Subtotal 23 8,384 5,022 ° Abandoned lands Seed only Plow Subtotal 1 4 5 46 56 102 46 56 102 Accidental turn Seed only Subtotal 1 1. 22400 2,400 22400 2,400 Grand total 29 102886 7z524 All Veg. t~Ees �- 39 - Table 9 .. Acreages of rangeland treated prior to January 1, 1966 on the Rio Grande National Forest. Vegetative Kind of \ .No , of Acres Ac. Seeded as T:2:Ee Treatment Projects Treated Part of Treatment Grass Seed only 4 117 117 Harrow 3 346 346 Plow 7 681 681 Spray 3 75 8,229 Plow & harrow 1 15 15 Spray & plow 1 1,913 1,913 Other 1 12020 1,020 Subtotal 20 12,321 4,167 Sagebrush Rabbitbrush Browse Conifer All VeS' t:2:Ees Seed only Harrow Plow Spray Plow & harrow Spray & plow Subtotal 1 3 1 3 1 1 10 23 410 73 522 200 130 1,358 23 410 73 40 200 130 876 65 65 65 523 48 571 523 523 Harrow Subtotal 1 Plow Burn Subtotal 1 2 Seed only Subtotal 2 30 30 30 30 Grand total 35 1l~2345 52661 1 1 2 65 0 �- 40 - the Table 10. Acreages of rangeland treated prior to January 1, 1966 on Roosevelt National Forest. Ac, Seeded as Acres No. of Kind of Vegetative Part of Treatment Treated Projects Treatment T:l1~e 10 10 1 Seed only Grass 220 220 3 Plow 230 230 4 subtotal Annual weeds Abandoned All Veg. 4 8 12 1,490 42193 5,683 1,490 0 1,490 Seed only Subtotal 1 4 1 4 4 4 plow & hlirrow subtotal 1 1 5 5 5 5 18 52922 12729 Plow Spray Subtotal Sagebrush lands t:t.ees Grand total . , �- 41 - Table 11. Acreages of rangeland treated prior to January 1, 1966 on the Routt National Forest. Vegetative Kind . o.f . No. of Acres Ac. Seeded as Treatment TXee Projects Treated Part of Treatment Grass Seed only 4 518 518 Harrow 3 105 105 Plow 2 165 165 Spray 2 201 196 Plow & harrow 1 60 60 Subtotal 12 1,049 1,044 Sagebrush Conifer Seed only Harrow Plow Spray Spray & h.ar row Subtotal 8 2 3 40. 1 54 124 88 225 14,969 160 15,566 124 88 225 0 160 597 Seed only Subtotal 1 205 205 205 205 Aspen Seed only Subtotal 1 1 50 50 50 50 Annual weeds Seed only Harrow Plow Subtotal 5 2 1 184 95 40 319 154 95 40 289 40 5 45 Abandoned lands All Veg. tXEes 1 8 Seed only Harrow Subtotal 2 40 5 45 Grand total 78 17 234 1 1 2 230 �- 42 - Table 12. Acreages San Isabel National Vegetative Type Grass of rangeland treated prior to January 1, 1966 on the Forest. Kind of No. of Acres Ac. Seeded as Treatment Projects Treated Part of Treatment Seed only 2 619 619 Harrow 1 590 590 Plow 3 2,138 2,138 Plow & harrow 1 750 750 Subtotal 7 4,097 4,097 Sagebrush Harrow Spray Subtotal 1 2 3 220 565 785 220 Rabbitbrush Spray Subtotal 1 1 1,000 1,000 o o Browse Seed only Subtotal 1 1 150 150 150 150 Pinyon':'juniper Harrow Subtotal 1 1 460 460 460 460 Annual Harrow Subtotal 1 1 6 6 6 6 14 6,498 4,933 Weeds All Veg. tYpes Grand total o 220 �- 43 - Table 13. Acreages of rangeland treated prior to January 1, 1966 on the San Juan National Forest. Vegetative Kind of No. of Acres Ac. Seeded as Treatment TlI!e Projects Treated Part of Treatment Grass Seed only 3 24 24 Harrow 4 376 376 Plow 3 88 88 Spray 1 380 0 Plow & harrow 1 50 50 Subtotal 12 918 538 Sagebrush Seed only Harrow Plow Spray Chain Plow & harrow Subtotal 1 2 16 6 1 1 27 6,678 300 100 12,372 Browse Seed only Subtotal 1 1 25 25 25 25 Conifer Seed only Plow Subtotal 8 871 299 1,170 871 299 1,170 316 326 642 316 326 642 108 0 115 223 8,292 Aspen Annual weeds All Veg. types Seed only Harrow Subtotal 2 10 1 2 3 300 216 L~,778 Seed only Spray Spray & Plow Subtotal 4 108 910 115 1,133 Grand total 57 16,260 2 1 1 300 216 4,778 0 300 100 5, 69L~ �- 44 Table 14. Acreages of rangeland treated prior to January 1~ 1966 on the UncomEahgre National Forest. Vegetative Kind of No. of Acres Ac, Seeded as TlEe Treatment Projects Treated Part of Treatment Grass Seed only 1 150 150 Plow 4 658 658 Spray _1 419 Subtotal 6 1,227 808 ° Meadow Sagebrush Rabbitbrush Browse Pinyon- juniper Aspen All Ve g . types Seed only Subtotal Seed only Harrow Plow Spray Plow & harrow Subtotal Spray Subtotal Seed only Spray Subtotal Chain Brush rol.l.e r Subtotal Seed only Harrow Subtotal Grand 'total _1 64 64 64 64 1,386 620 2,417 25,529 121 30,073 1,386 620 2,417 12050 1,050 0 0 15 72865 7,880 0 5,871 160 6,031 4,883 160 5~O43 2 2,100 60 2,160 2,100 60 2,160 68 48,485 12,619 1 6 2 7 27 _1 43 ---2. 2 1 8 9 4 1 5 1 _1 0 121 4,544 ° ° �- 45 - Table 15. Acreages of rangeland treated prior to January 1, 1966 at the White River National Forest. Vegetative Kind of No. of Acres Ac. Seeded as Treatment TYEe Projects Treated Part of Treatment Grass Seed only 3 222 222 Harrow 2 120 120 Plow 5 945 945 Spray 3 1,516 1 Plow & harrow 1 220 220 Spray & harrow 1 200 200 Spray & p'low _2 461 461 Subtotal 17 3,684 2,169 Sagebrush Seed only Spray Rotobeat Subtotal Browse Spray Subtotal Aspen Annual weeds Seed only Harrow Subtotal 2 13 _1 16 140 8,184 128 8,452 140 300 128 568 1 40 40 0 0 200 300 500 200 300 500 1 1 _1 2 Harrow Subtotal 1 1 75 75 75 75 Accidental burn Harrow Subtotal 2 2 165 165 165 165 All Veg. types Grand total 39 12,916 3,477 �- 46 - Table 16. Acreages of rangeland treated prior to January 1, 1966 on the Craig B.L.M. District. Vegetative Kind of No. of Acres Ac. Seeded as Ty(!e Treatment Projects Treated Part of Treatment Sagebrush Seed only 20 7,812 7,812 Harrow 2 217 217 Plow 16 13,798 13,798 Spray 14 11,497 0 Chain 9 4,620 1,992 Burn 5 670 670 Rotobeat 1 240 0 Subtotal 67 38,854 24,489 Browse Pinyon juniper Harrow Burn Subtotal 2 _1 3 477 55 532 477 55 532 152830 15,830 7,042 7,042 Chain Subtotal 13 Seed only Subtotal 1 200 200 200 200 Half Shrub Spray Subtotal 1 1 15 15 0 0 Accidental burn Seed only Harrow 8 1 9 3,130 25 3,155 3,130 25 3~155 All Veg. types Grand total 94 58~586 35,418 Saltbush 13 1 �- 47 - Table 17, Acreages of rangeland treated prior to January 1, 1966 on the Glenwood Springs B.L.M. District. Vegetative Kind of No. 0'£ Acres Ac. Seeded as T:y!!e Treatment Projects Treated Part of Treatment Sagebrush Seed only 4 397 397 Plow 32 5,317 5,147 Spray 20 2~,379 407 Chain 5 1,708 168 Rotobeat 1 75 0 Plow & Ql.arrow 4 663 663 Spray & Plow 2,765 4 2,765 Plow & burn 5 1,330 1,330 Chain & hurn 1 200 200 Other 1 27 27 Subtotal 77 35,861 11,l<i)4 Browse Spray Subtotal 1 1 500 500 500 500 Pinyon-juniper Chain Subtotal 1 1 910 910 910 910 Aspen Seed only Subtotal 1 1 40 40 40 40 167 0 167 Greasewood Plaw Spray Subtotal 2 1 3 167 934 1,101 Spray Subtotal _1 1 138 138 0 Abandoned lands Seed only Subtotal 1 1 40 40 40 40 Accidental burn Seed only .Subtotal 3 3 2,472 2,z;:n 2,472 2~472 Grand total 88 41,062 15)233 Half Shrub All Veg. types 0 �- 48 Table 18. ,Acreages of rangeland treated prior to January 1, 1966 on the Montrose B.L.Ma District. Vegetative Kind of No. of Acres Ac. Seeded as Treatment T;¥:2e Projects Treated Part of Treatment Grass Plow 2 388 388 Subtotal 2 388 388 Perennial forbs Seed only Plow Spray Subtotal Sagebrush Browse 1 1 1 3 200 400 152 752 200 400 0 600 Seed only Harrow Plow Spray Chain Plow & h.arrow Spray & plow Plow & burn Subtotal 3 1 49 18 4 1 1 1 78 762 ll,165 18,137 29,600 4,891 1,350 1,600 173 58,178 762 1,665 18,137 400 1,000 1,350 1,600 173 25,087 Seed only Plow Subtotal 1 1 2 65 84 149 65 0 65 Plow Chain Subtotal 42 43 200 41,818 42,018 200 30,956 31,156 Saltbush Plow Subtotal 1 1 200 200 200 200 Greasewood Spray & chain Subtotal 1 1 380 380 380 380 Half shrub Spray Subtotal 1 1,,150 1,150 12150 1,150 Seed only Plow Plow & h.arrow Subtotal 1 1 3 200 320 60 580 200 320 60 580 Accidental hurn Plow Subtotal 3 3 12226 1,226 12226 1,226 All Veg. types Grand total 137 105,021 6,0,832 Pinyon-juniper Annua 1 w,eeds 1 1 1 �- 49 - Table 19. Acreages of rangeland treated prior to January 1, 1966 on the Canyon City B. L. M. District. Vegetative Kind of No. of Acres Ac. Seeded as Type Treatment Projects Treated Part of Treatment Grass Seed only 2 190 190 Harrow 1 50 50 .-1 Plow 12880 12886 Subtotal 2,12(1) 6 2,120 Sagebrush Rabbitbrush Pinyon-juniper Half Shrub Plow Spray Chain Subtotal 2 2 5 2,053 1,300 12300 4,653 2,053 1,000 12~OO 4,353 Plow Spray Rotobeat Subtotal 4 11 1 16 2~317 l1,nO 169 13,656 2,317 2,920 Chain Subtotal -12 10t358 1(1),358 9,265 9,265 Spray Subtotal _2 1 19 5,237 2 250 250 0 0 Accidental burn Seed only Subtotal 1 1 100 100 100 100 All Veg. types Grand total 49 31,137 21,075 �- 50 - Table 20. Acreages of rangeland treated prior to January l~ 1966~ on the Grand Junction B. L. M. District. Kind of No. of Acres Ac. Seeded as Vegetative Projects .Treated Part of Treatment Treatment T~Ee Seed only 1 139 139 Grass Subtotal 1 139 139 Sagebrush Pinyon-juniper Saltbush Accidental burn All Veg. types 3,037 1,220 1,749 1 3,037 1,220 1,749 2,235 1~790 80 32 10,111 7,796 Seed only Spray Chain Subtotal 1 1 1,000 1,000 7.472 99472 1,000 Other Subtotal 3 3 525 525 525 525 Seed only .Subtotal 8 8 2.693 2,693 21693 Grand t.ota1 52 22,940 17,170 Seed only Harrow Plow Spray Chain Rotobeat Subtotal 9 3 8 6 5 6 8 1,790 5.017 6,017 2,693 �- 51 - Table 21. ,Acreages of rangeland treated prior to January 1, 1966 on the Southern Ute Indian Reservation. Vegetative Kind of "No. of Acres Ac. Seeded as Treatment Projects Treated Part of Treatment T~ee Sagebrush Harrow 1 750 0 3,665 Plow 8 3,665 4,500 Spray ,2 0 Plow & burn _1 110 110 Subtotal 12 3',375 9,025 Pinyon- }uniper Seed only Plow Chain Burn Subtotal Grand t'otal 3 11,684 574 1,500 10. 11,684 574 15,675 1,030 28,963 22 37,988 17 ,533 2 4 1 , All Veg. .types ° 13,758 �- 52 - Table 22. Acreages of rangeland treated prior to January 1, 1966 on the Ute Mountain Indian Reservation. Vegetative Kind of ' No. of Acres Ac. Seeded as Treatment Tyee Projects Treated Part of Treatment Sagebrush Plow 2,500 1 2~SOO Spray 1,900 1 1,900 Rotobeat 0 1 700 Subtotal 3 5,100. 4,400 Browse Pinyon-juniper All Veg. t'ypes Chain Subtotal 1 1 220 220 0 Chain Subtotal -1 1 1'256Q 19!?60 19,560 19,56q 24,880 23,960 Grand total 5 0 �-53 - Table 23. Comparison of rangeland acreages treated prior to January 1, 1966 on each National Forest, B.L.M. District, and Indian Reservation in Colorado. Land Mgt. No. of Acres Ac. Seeded as Agency Projects Treated part of Treatment Uncompahgre 68 48~485 12,619 36,,798 Gunnison 57 8~654 Grand Mesa 42 5,290 22,840 Routt 78 2,230 17,234 San Juan 57 8,292 16,260 Rio Grande 35 5,661 14;3~5 White River 39 3,477 12;916 Pike 29 10,88:6 7,524 San Isabel 14 4,933 6,498 Roosevelt 18 1,729 5,922 -2.§ Arapahoe 4,:UO 9~.2 Subtotal 196,494 463 61,341 Montrose Craig Glenwood Sp. Canyon City Grand Jct. Subtotal 137 94 88 49 52 420 105~O21 58,586 41,062 31,137 22.940 258,746 60,832 35,418 15,233 21,075 17,170 149,728 Southern Ute Ute Mountain Subtotal ---1 22 2.3,96.0 27 37,988 24,880 62,868 41,493 Grand Total 910 ---518,108 252,562 17,533 �- 54 - Table 24. Acreages of rangeland treated prior to January 1, 1966 in the Southwest Region of Colorado Game~ Fish and Parks Department. Vegetative T;n~e Grass Kind of Treatment Seed only Harrow Plow Spray Pl.ov & harrow Spray & ",low Other Subtotal Meadow Seed only Plow Subtotal 2. 1 3 76 15 91 76 15 91 Perennia 1 f orbs Seed only Harrow Plow Spray Plow & h.arrow Subtotal 1 2 200 180 725 172 40 1,317 200 180 725 20 40 1,165 Seed only Harrow Plow Spray Chain Plow & h.arrow Spray & plow Plow & burn Subtotal 10 8 88 81 6 2,399 1,996 34,880 93,118 6,49.1 1,978 1,735 283 142,880 2,399 1,246 34,880 3,340 2.,60(,) 1,978 1,735 283 48,461 65 2,317 12,220 169 14,771 65 2,317 2,920 90 523 925 1 21 105 607 10,203 220 48 40 11,223 0 40 1;578 11 2 13 955 299 1,254 955 299 1,254 Sagebrush Rabbitbrush Browse Conifer Harrow Plow Spray Rotobeat Subtotal Seed only Plow Spray Chain Burn Spray & plow Subtotal Seed only Plow Subtotal No. of Projects 13 10 25 11 4 1 1 65 3 2 1 9 6 3 2 204 1 4 13 1 19 3 2 13 1 1 Acres Treated 701 1,207 7,~85 14.128 415 1,913 11020 26,669 Ac. Seeded as Part of Treatm~n!;; 701 1,207 7,285 75 415 1,913 12020 12,616 5;302 0 �- 55 Table 24. Acreages of rangeiand treated prior to January 1, 1966 in the Southwest Region of Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department. (Continued) Vegetative Kind of No. of Acres Ac. Seeded as e Treatment Projects Treated Part of Treatment Ti:2 11, 684 Pinyon-juniper Seed only 3 1l~684 Plow 3 774 774 Chain 56 87,509 60,619 Burn 1,030 1 0 Brush r.oller 1 160 160 Subtotal 101,157 64 73,237 Aspen Saltbush Seed only Harrow Subtotal 4 ---l! 8 2,642 536 3,178 2,642 536 3;178 Plow Subtotal 1 200 200 200 200 Greasewood Spray & chain Subtotal 1 1 380 380 380 380 Half Shrub Spray Subtotal 3 12400 1,400 12150 3 1,150 1 9 1,208 100 320 910 60 115 2~713 1,208 100 320 0 60 115 1~803 3 Annual Weeds Accidental burn All Veg. types Seed only Harrow Plow Spray Plow & harrow Spray & plow Subtotal 1 4 1 1 1 1 Seed only Subtotal 12226 3 1,220- 1z.226 1,226 Grand total 423 '308,459 151,641 .",.,. �- 56 - Table 25. Acreages of rangeland treated prior to January 1, 1966 in the Northwest Region of Colorado Gamez Fish and Parks DeEar tmen t• ~Continued2 Vegetative Kind of No. of Acres Ac. Seeded as Treatment Projects Treated Part of Treatment TlEe Half shrub Spray 2 153 0 Subtotal 2 153 0 Annual weeds Abandoned lands Accidental burn All Ve8' t'lEes Seed only Harrow Plow Subtotal Seed only Harrow Subtotal 5 3 1 9 -3 2 1 184 170 40 394 154 170 40 364 80 85 80 5 85 8,475 25 8,500 742712 5 Seed only Harrow Subtotal 23 8,475 25 8,500 Grand t.otal 367 163z969 22 1 �- 57 - Table 25. Acreages of rangeland treated prior to January 1, 1966 in the Northwest Region of Colorado Gamez Fish and Parks DeEartment. Vegetative Kind of No. of Acres Ac. Seeded as Treatment Projects Treated Part of Treatment T~]~e Grass Seed only 13 1,078 1,078 Harrow 5 207 207 Plow 8 1,395 1,395 Spray 15 14,013 1,251 Plow & .harrow 2 280 280 Spray & harrow 1 200 200 Spray & plow 2 461 461 Subtotal 46 17,634 4,872 Meadow Sagebrush Harrow Spray Subtotal 1 1 Seed only Harrow Plow Spray Chain Burn Rotobeat Plow & harrow Spray &i!arrow Spray & plow Plow & burn Chain & burn: Other Subtotal 47 8 52 98 17 60 47 107 60 47 107 2 4 1 1 244 12,125 3,615 19,161 61,113 6,578 670 1,223 894 160 835 1,170 200 27 107,771 12,125 3,615 19,161 907 3,950 670 128 894 160 835 1,170 200 27 43, 8L~2 2 5 5 3 1 Browse Harrow Spray Burn Subtotal 2 3 1 6 477 640 55 1,172 477 500 55 1,032 Pinyon- juniper Seed only Spray Chain Subtotal 1 1 22 24 1,000 1,000 24~838 26,838 1,000 0 13z 595 14,595 Aspen Seed only Harrow Subtotal 3 1 4 290 300 590 290 300 590 Saltbush Seed only Other Subtotal 1 3 200 525 725 200 525 725 4 �- 58 - Table 26. Acreages of rangeland treated prior to January 1, 1966 Southeast Region of Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department. Vegetative T)::I!e Grass Kind of Treatment Seed only Harrow Plow Spray Plow & harrow Subtotal Sagebrush Harrow Spray Subtotal No. of Projects 3 3 20 5 2 33 1 Acres Treated 759 693 7,157 3,362 753 12.,724 in the Ac. seeded as Part of Treatment 759 693 7,157 0 753 9,362 3 220 565 785 220 0 220 _2 Rabbitbrush Spray Subtotal 1 1 l~OOO 1,000 0 0 Browse Seed only Subtotal 1 1 150 150 150 150 Pinyon-juniper Harrow Chain Subtotal 1 14 15 460 5&773 6,233 460 5~545 6,005 Annua 1 weeds Harrow Subtotal 1 1 6 6 6 lands Seed only Plow Subtotal 1 4 5 46 56 102 46 56 102 Accidental burn Seed only Subtotal 2 2 22~00 2,500 2 t.5OO 2,500 All Veg. types Grand t.otal 61 23,500 18,345 Abandoned 6 �- 59 - Table 27. ·Acreages of rangeland treated prior to January 1, 1966 in the Northeast Region of Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department. Vegetative Kind of No. of Acres Ac. Seeded as Type Treatment Projects Treated Part of Treatment Grass Seed only 6 220 220 Plow 3 220 220 Subtotal 9 440 440 Meadow Harrow Subtotal 1 1 11 11 11 11 Sagebrush Seed only Harrow Plow Spray Chain Plow & harrow Spray & plow Plow & burn Subtotal 3 1 143 143 80 80 15 14 4~139 11,672 1,540 450 1,930 160 20,114 3,969 205 205 205 205 167 934 167 1,101 167 Conifer Greasewood Annual weeds Abandoned lands Accidental hurn All Veg. types 2 2 2 1 40 o o 450 1,\:)30 160 6,732 Seed only Subtotal 1 Plow Spray Subtotal 2 1 3 Seed only Subtotal 1 1 4 4 4 Seed only Plow & harrow Subtotal 2 20 20 1 3 5 5 25 25 Seed only Subtotal 1 280 280 280 1 Grand total 59 22,180 7,864 1 o 280 �- 60 - Table 28. Acreages treated with aerial and ground spraying equipment and 2,4-D, 2,4,5-T and Kuron chemical herbicides.lf Acres Treated . :>'t:l. co .,..j J..I ::s t:l.0' Ul ...-I co C) .,..j 13 OJ ..d u OJ Aerial Ground Total 2,4-D 2,4,5-T Kuron Total Number Percent 189,860 95% 5% 9,942 .199'.8C>2 100% 194,196 97% 5,586 3% 20 .199,802 0% 100% 1/ Table includes acreages for only a portion of the chemical spray projects inventoried. Information on spray equipment and chemicals used was not available for many spray projects. �Table 29. Acreages treated by anchor chaining, cableing, railing and bu Ll.dozLng i.Ly Kind of "Chaining" Equipment Used Zl Bulldoze Anchor Chain Cable Rail %of Tot. _. %of Tot. %of Tot. 700t Tot. Acres Acres Acres Acres Acres Acres Acres Acres Vegetative Treated Treated Treated Treated Treated Treate~/ Treated Treated type Sagebrush Browse 9,459 65% o o P'Lnyon-jun Lper 83,038 86 0% 3,240 0 0 0 11,839 12 0 0 22% 0 0 1,910. 220 2,683' 13% 100 2 Total Acres Treated 14,609 220 96,934 1.1 Table includes "chaining'equipment information for only a portion of the "chaining" projects inventoried. Infbnnation on equipment used was not available for many "chaining" projects. 2:.,1 In other tables these four kinds of equipment have been combined into one-category called "chaining". 0'\ f-' �- 62 - Table 3D. Plant species used to seed more than two percent of all rangelands seeded in Colorado. Plant Scientific Acres Percent of Total Categories Namell Seeded Acres SeedecQI Grasses AgropyroD cristatum 213,.2.46 84% Bromus inermis 71,750 28 Agropyron intermedium 55,Q'26 22 Agropyron smithii 34,664 14 Agropyron inerme 29,665 12 Elymus ;unceus 22,701 9 Phleum pratense 16,497 7 Agropyron elongatum 12,742 5 Dactylis glomerata 12,725 5 Melica ~,pp. 12,846 5 Agropyron trachycaulum 11,329 4 Elymus cinereus 10,579 4 Poa pratensis 8.876 4 Agropyron S'J?p. 8,655 3 Agropyron sibiricum 7,038 3 Bromus spp. 8,816 3 Elymus s pp , 7,081 3 Eragrostis spp. 7,937 3 Bromus carinatus 6,077 2 Poa spp. 4,808 2 1;'oa. bulbosa 4,816 2 Festuca ovina 4,030 2 Forbs Melilotus spp. .Browse Atriplex canescens Purshia tridentata 118,413 47 6,801 5,999 3 2 II Scientific names were taken from Harrington (1954) and Weintraub (1953). 11 Represents the percent of the total number of acres seeded in Colorado up to January 1, 1966 (252;62 acres), which has been seeded with each plant species . •• �- 63 - Table 31. Plant species used to seed less than two percent of all rangelands seeded in Colorado.11 Grasses Browse Agrostis alba Agrostis palustris Andropo&on spp. Arrhenatherum elatius Bouteloua curtipendula Bouteloua gracilis Bromus erectus Danthoniaspp. Deschampsia s.pp. Erodium s.pp , Festuca s pp. Festuca arizonica Festuca elatior Festuca thurberi Hilaria jamesii Oryzopsis hymenoides Poa compressa Sporobolus s'pp , Stipa s'pp. Cowania Spp. Prunus Spp. Salix Spp , Sambucus Spp. 11 Scientific names were taken from Harrington (1954) and Weintraub (1953). �Table 32. Methods used for reseeding rangelands):./ Method of Seeding .Drill Aerial Broadcast % of Tot. Acres Vegetation Acres % of Tot. Ac. seeded Seeded Ac. seeded Type .Saeded 73% Grass 19,179 o 0% Meadow 26 18 o o Perennial forbs 620 53 o o Sagebrush 60,750 70 6,780 8 Rabbitbrush 5,237 99 o o Browse 563 20 925 34 14 Conifer 199 o o Pinyon-juniper 5,664 6 86 80,618 Aspen 40 56 1 2,100 Saltbush 725 78 o o Greasewood 547 100 o o Half shrub 1,150 100 o o Ann. weeds 670 31 o o Abandoned lands 167 o 79 o Accid. burn 1,565 13 76 9,023 Ground Broadcast Acres 70 of Tot. Seeded Ac. Seeded 27% 6,998 119 82 545 47 19,429 22 65 1 46 86 8 Total Acres Seeded 26,177 145 1,165 86,959 5,302 2,760 1,272 1,260 7,555 1,628 200 43 22 o o o o 1,507 45 1,358 21 11 11,946 1/ Table includes seeding information for only a portion of the seeding projec~i~ventoried. Information on method of seeding was not available for many seeding projects. 69 1,9-59 93,837 3,768 925 547 1,150 2,177 212 0\ +:- �- 65 - Table 33. Seed application Rate Seeded rates used in reseeding Colorado Acres Seeded rangelands. % of Total Number of AcresJ:./ Acres Seeded 1-2 6,168 3-4 5-6 7-8 9-10 43,341 2.7% 18.9 83,511 52,635 24,736 11,300 22.9 10.8 4.9 1bs/acl./ 11-12 13-14 36.3 427 15-16 +16 4,692 3,027 0.2 2.0 1.3 Totals 229,837 100.0% 1/ Rate seeded is shown to the nearest pound per acre. 11 Table includes seeding rates for only a portion of the seeding inventoried. Information seeding projects. on seeding rates was not available projects for many �- 66 - Table 34. on sagebrush and pinyon-juniper e-conversion rior to treatment.l ______~~~r~u~s~ ~ unLper Percent of Percent of Density Acres Tot~Acres Acres Tot. Acres 0-10% 3,419 8% 1,492 4% 11-20 6,077 14 11,023 26 21-30 5,868 13 9,197 22 31-40 10,397 24 0 0 41-50 5,694 13 2,351 5 51-60 5,801 13 12,660 30 61-70 6,105 14 4,840 11 71-80 172 1 0 0 81-90 0 0 719 2 91-100 0 0 0 0 Total 43,533 100% 42,282 100% 1/ Table includes plant density data for only a portion of the sagebrush. and pinyon-juniper control projects inventoried. Information on plant density was not available for many sagebrush and pinyon-juniper projects. �- 67 - Table 35. Average shrub composition on sagebrush and pinyon-juniper range type-conversion project areas prior to treatment 1/ Percent Sagebrush Pinyon-Juniper Shrub Percent of Percent of Cover Acres Tot. Acres Acres Tot. Acres 0-10% 11-20 21-30 31-40 41-50 51-60 61-70 71-80 81-90 91-100 1,035 1,152 0 7,773 17,198 25,879 10,591 0 Total 1/ Table inc u es s ru 2% 2 0 n 25 38 15 0 7 0 100% 0 5,457 1,500 0 0 0 0 17 5 0 0 0 20 36 0 22 100% compos1t10n ata a port10n 0 t e sagebrush and pinyon-juniper control projects inventoried. Information on plant density was not available for many sagebrush and pinyon-juniper projects. �- 68 - Table 36. Range condition for livestock on sagebrush t e-conversion ro iect areas rior to treatment."!/ Range Condition for Livestock Excellent Good to excellent Good Fair to g::>od Fair Poor to fair Poor Very poor to poor Very poor and pinyon-juniper range sagebrush Percent of Total Acres Acres Pinyon-Juniper Percent of Acres Total Acres Sage rus & Pinyon Juniper Combined Percent of To talAcres Acres 0 0 210 11,693 4,985 7,155 27,158 4,997 22400 0 833 0 1,160 600 988 11,926, 0 0 0 833 210 12,853 5,585 8,143 39,084 4,997 22400 0% 0 .£.1 20 9 12 46 9 4 0% 5 0 8 4 6 77 0 0 0% 1 <-1 17 8 11 53 7 3 58,,598 100% 15,507 Total 100% 74,105 100% ]) Table includes livestock range condition data for only a portion of the sagebrush and pinyon-juniper control projects inventoried. Information on livestock range condition was not available for many sagebrush and pinyon-juniper projects. �- 69 - Table 37. Erosion condition on sagebrush and pinyon-juniper range typeconversion project areas prior to treatment}./ Erosion Condition None or slight None to mod. Moderate Mod. to severe Severe None to seve re Total Sagebrush Acres 4,037 22,653 19,193 1,192 8,320 ° 55,395 Percent of Tot .Acres . 7% 41 35 2 15 ° 100% Pinyon-Juniper Percent of Acres Tot. Acres 160 0% 27,420 26 46,166 42 12,416 11 2~,772 21 0 0 108,934 100% II Table includes erosion condition data for only a portion of the sagebrush and pinyon-juniper control projects inventoried. Information on erosion condition was not available for many sagebrush and pinyon-juniper projects. �- 70 - Table 38. Average plant kill resulting from application Total Vegetatative Kind of No. of Acres Treatment Projects Treated T~l2e Sagebrush Plow 3 2,844 Spray 30 36~149 Chain 1 310 Burn 1 460 Spray & plow 1 750 of control treatments .J) Average Plant Plant Kill Range Kill Lower Ul2l2er 93% 90 98 78 10 96 40 90 98 Browse Spray 2 2;:nO 60' 44 76 Pinyon-juniper Chain 15 24,,030 84 55 95 !/ Table includes plant kill estimates for only a portion of the projects inventoried, as plant kill information was collected only on selected· projects. �- 71 - Table 39. Average vegetative cover and plant species composition on four sagebrush spray projects comprising 7,527 acres before and approximately two years after treatment Before After Spraying Spraying Average Vegetative Cover Average shrub composition Average grass composition Average herb composition 36% 44% 31% ·25% 37% 24% 60% 16% Total plant composition 100% 100% �Acreages of rangeland treated to improve conditions for four classes of livestock. TZEe of Livestock Range Cattle and Horses SheeE and Goats Vegetative No. of Acres No. of Acres seeded as Acres Acres Seeded as Type Treated Part of Treatment Projects Projects Treated Part of Treatment 55,616 1.,049 25,439 138 1,049 Grass 10 Meadow 5 145 145 1 64 64 Perennial forbs 6 565 565 600 3 752 219,762 32~003 65,273 Sagebrush 47,467 380 100 7,740 8,031Rabbitbrush 13 2.061 3,241 8 12,013 Browse 2,228 25 3 532 532 ~ ro 834 Conifer 11 420 834 2 420 84.,389 49,053 65,510 Pinyon-juniper 66 27,541 34 3,·418 Aspen 10 3,418 2 350 350 Saltbrush 1 200 725 200 4 725 ·0 1,~81 Greasewood 4 547 0 0 1,303 Half Shrub 1,150 250 0 3 2 3,053 2,143 Annua L'ae eds 17 3 64 34 Abandoned lands 161 161 0 9 0 0 2,467 2,.467 Accidental hurn 21 9,390 9,390 5 -179,094 Total 178 708 112,277 68,996 399,017 Table 40. �Table 41. Changes in cattle carrying capacity and stocking rates after treatment on a small number of selected projects.l/ Carrzing Vegetative Type Sagebrush Kind of Treatment Spray No. of Projects 9 No. of Acres 10,763 CaEacitz Ave. Carrzin~ CaE' Before After Treatment Treatment 5.3 ac/aum 8.0 ae/aum No. of Projects 13 Stockin~ Rate Ave. Stockin~ Rate After No. of Before Treatment Acres Treatment 8.1 ac/aum 6.5 ac/aum 14,278 -...J co Pinzon- uniper Chain 3 3,326 24.0 ac/aum 11.0 ac/aum 5 1/ Information is based on a small number of selected projects for which pre-and-post and stocking rate data were available. 10,528 treatment 11.2 ac/aum 11.4 ac/aum cattle carrying capacity �- 74 - Table 42. Acres of mule deer range treated in Colorado prior to January 1, 1966 by the U. S. Forest Service, Bureau of Land Management,and Bureau of Indian Affairs. Vegetative TY2e Grass Meadow' Perennial forbs Sagebrush Total Acres of Seasonal Deer Range Treated Spring Fall Spring Summer Winter YearWinter Fall Summer Fall long S2ring 129 139 1,705 244 52 459 960 0 907 190 0 50 3,558 166 4,107 1,400 25 4,217 600 419 21,022 10 0 9,462 <, Kind of Treatment Seed only Harrow Plow Spray Plow & h.arrow Spray & harrow Spray & plow Other Subtotal Total 2,728 2,107 13,473 31,513 750 50 645 0 0 3 1,448 0 0 0 200 0 0 200 1,913 0 7,910 0 0 774 461 1,020 29,867 0 0 2,044 0 0 77 0 0 14,191 2,374 12020 54,863 Seed only Harrow Plow Spray Subtotal 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 76 60 0 47 183 0 0 15 0 15 0 0 0 0 0 0 11 0 0 11 76 71 15 47 209 Seed only Harrow· Plow Spray Plow & harrow Subtotal 200 0 650 20 0 0 0 0 0 80 0 0 0 100 75 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 200 180 725 20 0 870 0 0 40 120 0 175 0 0 0 0 40 1,165 7,934 1,047 28,319 42,365 11,849 40 775 55 88 1,145 3,664 0 0 0 2,710 1,325 7,954 69,589 60 80 1,145 0 1,645 14,446 0 0 240 1,293 616 5,260 17,138 1,208 0 128 857 2,415 12,393 18,946 1,552 570 0 13,994 5,491 56,716 166,148 14,609 670 1,223 1,563 0 1,002 230 430 0 3,225 0 0 0 160 0 0 160 2,565 867 0 5 1,063 0 4,500 1,343 0 0 0 160 110 1,613 200 27 98,027 0 0 5,819 0 0 82,720 0 0 17,871 0 0 27,296 0 0 36,843 200 27 268,576 Seed only Harrow Plow Spray Chain Burn Rotobeat Plow & h.arrow Spray & h.ar r ow Spray & plow Plow & burn Chain & burn Other Subtotal 0 �- 75 - Table 42. Acres of mule deer range treated in Colorado prior to January 1, 1966 by the U. S. Forest Service, Bureau of Land Management,and Bureau of Indian Affairs. ~Continued2 Total Acres of Seasonal Deer Range Treated Spring Fall Vegetative Kind of Spring Summer Winter YearTreatment Winter Fall Tx]~e Summer Fall long Total SEring Rabbitbrush Plow 2,176 0 0 0 0 0 2,176 Spray 13,200 0 20 0 0 0 13,220 Rotobeat 169 -- 0 0 0 0 0 169 Subtotal 15,545 0 20 0 0 0 15,565 Browse Conifer PinyonJuniper Aspen Saltbush Greasewood Seed only Harrow Plow Spray Chain Burn Spray & plow Subtotal 90 0 607 1,250 220 48 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 0 0 6,885 0 55 0 2,215 -- 00 6,955 Seed only Plow Subtotal 410 20 0 0 410 20 414 0 414 Seed only Harrow Plow Spray Chain Burn Brush Roller Subtotal 0 460 200 0 87,835 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3,389 0 ° 0 1,000 0 0 1,000 1,000 0 0 88,495 0 0 0 3,389 160 3,160 Seed only Harrow Subtotal 0 0 0 0 46 46 2,932 790 3,722 0 0 Seed only Plow Other Subtotal 200 200 340 740 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Plow Spray Spray & chain Subtotal 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2,208 0 477 0 500 0 0 0 0 105 627 607 10,843 220 103 40 2,248 0 977 0 150 40 12,545 11 299 310 100 0 100 955 299 1,254 0 11,684 0 574 0 24,170 1,030 12,684 460 774 1,000 118,494 1,030 2,100 626 38,084 786 135,228 0 0 0 0 0 2,932 836 3,768 0 0 0 ° 0 0 0 2,100 0 0 0 150 0 0 0 0 0 0 a a 0 °0 °0 0 0 0 0 167 934 0 a 380 380 0 0 0 0 0 0 1,101 0 0 0 0 0 200 200 340 740 167 934 380 1,481 �- 76 - Table 42. Acres of mule deer range treated in Colorado prior to January 1, 1966 by the U. S. FOrest Service, Bureau of Land Managemen~ and Bureau of Indian Affairs. {Continued2 Total Acres of Seasonal Deer Range Treated Spring Fall Vegetative Kind of Spring Summer Winter YearTreatment Winter Fall Summer Fall Total long SEring T:Y:I~e Half Shrub Spray 0 1z353 50 0 0 15 lz288 Subtotal 1,288 0 50 0 15 1,353 0 Annual Weeds Seed only Harrow Plow Spray Plow & harrow Spray & plow Subtotal Abandoned 1,ands Accidental burn All Veg. t:t:Ees 200 95 360 184 75 0 910 18 0 0 0 0 0 0 60 0 115 830 Seed only Harrow Plow Plow & harrow Subtotal 40 0 5 Seed only Harrow Subtotal 7,262 0 7,262 1,076 224z0l7 Grand total .) 0 45 0 90 0 0 0 904 0 0 0 1,396 170 360 910 0 0 0 0 60 0 0 0 1,169 0 18 0 90 0 904 115 3,011 0 40 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 66 0 28 146 5 33 0 45 5 0 5 0 0 94 189 1,076 85 0 85 938 0 938 120 0 120 600 25 625 10,081 25 10,106 7 z735 128 z739 26z474 32z07l 9lz0l7 5102°53 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 �Acres of mule deer range treated in Colorado prior to January 1, 1966 by the U. S. Forest Service, Table 43. Bureau of land management~ and Bureau of Indian affairs where deer use was heayy at the time of treatment. Acres of Heavy-use Seasonal Deer Range Treated Spring Fall Vegetative Kind of Spring Sunnner Winter Treatment Winter Fall Summer Fall Total Year1on~ TlEe S}2ring Grass Seed Only 0 13 150 144 52 0 359 Harrow 0 0 300 0 0 0 300 Plow 2,135 0 100 0 0 1,000 3,235 Spray 20 0 0 0 0 20 0 Plow & harrow 0 280 750 0 0 0 1,030 Subtotal 2,898 0 850 144 52 1,000 4,944 Headow Perennial forbs Sagebrush Rabbitbrush Seed only Subtotal 0 0 0 64 64 0 0 Harrow Plow Subtotal 0 250 250 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 Seed only 5,832 Harrow 1,017 Plow 5,625 Spray 16,615 Chain 2,568 Burn 40 Rotobeat 75 Plow & harrow 213 Spray & harrow 0 Spray & plow 835 Plow & burn 11170 Chain & burn 200 Other 27 Subtotal 34,217 0 80 425 1,275 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1,780 848 0 1,088 17,469 0 60 80 0 Spray Subtotal 640 640 0 100 0 0 64 64 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 250 350 -- 0 0 0 0 19,545 645 1,652 0 0 0 0 160 0 0 0 0 3,187 960 616 2,606 8,223 668 0 128 110 0 1,063 0 0 0 ll~,374 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 730 0 0 0 0 210 0 1,065 2,217 0 460 0 0 0 0 0 0 3,952 8,580 1,713 1l,45~ 47,451 3,236 560 283 323 160 1,898 1,170 200 27 77 ,055 0 0 640 640 0 -..J -..J �Table 43. Acres of mule deer range treated in Colorado prior to January 1, 1966 by the U. S. Forest Service, Bureau of land management2 and Bureau of Indian affairs whe re deer use was heavy at the time of treatment. (Cont..) Acres of Heavy-use Seasonal Deer Range Treated Spring Fall Vegetative Kind of Spring Surrnner Winter Treatment T~]~e Winter Fall Summer Fall SErin~ Yearlin~ Total Browse Seed only 25 0 15 0 0 0 40 Spray 0 0 U40 0 0 0 1,740 Subtotal 25 0 1,755 0 0 0 1,780 Conifer Pinyon-juniper Seed only Plow Subtotal 0 0 0 0 a 0 0 460 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 11 299 310 0 0 0 11 299 310 0 0 0 12889 1,889 1,000 0 1,000 1,000 3,000 0 0 4,057 4,057 1,000 460 1,000 34.422 36,882 2,100 60 2,160 0 0 0 0 0 '0 0 0 0 2,100 60 2,160 0 0 0 75 934 1,009 0 0 0 75 934 1,009 0 0 0 0 0 0 138 138 90 0 0 90 0 90 115 205 0 0 Seed Only Harrow Spray Chain Subtota 1 0 0 27 2476 27 ,936 0 Seed Only Harrow Subtotal 0 0 0 0 Plow Spray Subtotal 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Spray Subtota 1 138 l38 0 0 0 Seed Only Spray & plow Subtotal 0 115 115 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Abandoned l·ands Seed Only Subtotal 40 40 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 40 40 Accidental burn Seed Only Harrow Subtota 1 Grand total 2,779 0 2.ZZ2 69,038 500 0 .5.Q.O. 22280 858 0 120 0 0 25 4,3L.2 9,0~ Aspen Greasewood Half shrub Annual weeds All Veg. types 0 0 0 0 0 0 85 0 0 0 0 0 -.8.5.. .8.5.8. .uo 26,348 7,289 15,955 25 -4,367 125,982 ~ co �- 7?J Table 44. Acres of elk range €rea€ea iti G€Jleia€i~ prior to January 1, 1966 by fif th~ It. S. F6fest SerViI::e J~n(t.iij;i~tau l.an·a }m~}';:i:~ement. . ...... 't.&~al ~lffH!. o f Seasonal Elk Range Treated ~ujffiJer ·l31 --_·W· -1,683 936 2,779 75 166 1,454 776 3,051 19,418 0 40 2,247 0 52 0 0 6,700 294 50 25 0 2,180 1,933 8,268 27,647 50 0 585 0 0 60 695 0 0 0 200 0 0 200 1,913 0 5,884 0 .0 1,771 461 0 25,974 0 0 2,487 0 12020 7,772 0 0 429 2,374 12020 44,317 Seed only Harrow plow Spray Subtotal 0 0 64 60 0 47 171 0 0 0 15 0 15 0 0 11 0 0 11 64 71 15 197 Harrow Plow Spray Plow & h.ar row Subtotal 0 75 20 100 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 180 75 20 0 0 40 315 50 0 1,650 1,523 8,752 106,124 5,511 283 V~~et;aUVe Typ@ Ti?e~~ment; . SeEl4 ~m),y Gra~§ M;:-raw P18w Spray Plow & h.arrow Sprf.lY& h.arrow Spray & jD low Other Subtotal ~adow Perennial forbs Sagebrush Rabbitbrush Fall Winter Spring Spring Summer Fall k{.nd sf §pFifi~ W~H WIJi-€?f 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 95 623 Seed only 810 Harrow 5,918 Plow 41,296 Spray 5,511 Chain 203 Rotobeat Plow & 89Lf harrow Spray & 965 plow Plow & I\>.urin 640 27 Other 56,887 Subtotal plow Spray Subtotal lH 2,176 52110 7,286 0 0 80 0 0 0 0 40 120 140 709 705 1,396 37,885 9, 89/~ 0 -- Yearlong 0 0 0 0 0 100 0 128 Total l~7 0 0 80 0 0 0 298 5,795 0 0 0 0 218 110 0 1,222 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4,243 40,775 0 0 0 0 10,2L;·0 6,203 8,3h9 965 640 27 126,697 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 20 20 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 0 4,095 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1, 1L~0 7,159 0 0 2,176 52130 7,306 �- 80 - Table 44. Acres of elk range treated in Colorado prior to January 1, 1966 by (Continued). Total Acres of Seasonal Elk Range Treated spring Fall Vegiiltative Kind of Spring Summer Winter Tye.~ Treatment Winter Fall Fall Spring Yearlong Total Browse 25 o o 15 o o 40 523 o o o o o 523 Sp't"{iY 1.~90 130 5,450 383 o 925 8,178 BU!;'" o o o o 5~ o 55 !!;yIJtotal 383 o 925 8,796 tha U. S. Forest Service-!nd Bureau of Land Management. ConUer Pinyonjuniper Aapen Half shrub Annual weeds Abandoned lands Accidental burn All Veg. types o o o o o o 124 o o o o o o o· 2,659 2,659 o o o 316 200 290 730 1,020 316 o o o 776 1,582 o o 50 50 o o o o °o 50 50 18 94 75 o o °o III 2 o o 170 40 910 115 1,377 seed only Subtotal 10 ~""""';;:1';:"0 --00 Chain Subtotal 2,659 2,659 o o Seed only Harrow Subtotal o 200 46 46 Spray Subtotal o o Seed only Harrow Plow Spray Spray & plow Subtotal o o o o 115 280 ° °o o o o o 910 o o 18 1,079 o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o Seed only Harrow plow & harrow Subtotal 40 Seed only Subtotal 3,573 3,573 o o 85 85 o o Grand .total 78,658 6,362 75,057 13,225 5 o o o 806 ° 5 5 5 50 o o 360 360 4,018 14,291 10,079 197,672 4,018 �- 81 - Table 45. ·Acres of elk range treated in Colorado prior to January 1, 1966 by the U. S. Forest Service and Bureau of Land Management where elk use was heavy at the time of treatment. Total Acres of Hea~ Use Seasonal Elk Range Treated Spring Fall SUJ;llII1er Winter Year Spring Kind of Vegetative Total Spring Long Fall Fall Summer Winter Treatment T~lle 13 0 0 0 538 144 695 Seed Only Grass plow 0 0 340 200 0 0 540 0 0 0 0 0 1,520 1,520 Spray 0 0 220 0 0 0 220 plow & harrow 0 144 13 0 2,618 200 2,975 Subtotal Seed Only Plow Subtotal Meadow 0 0 0 0 0 0 .64 64 0 15 15 0 0 0 0 0 0 64 15 79 Sagebrush Seed Only plow Spray Rotobeat Plow & harrow Subtotal 15 379 1,265 203 113 1,975 0 0 0 0 0 0 30 0 948 0 0 978 0 0 1,342 0 0 1,342 0 0 190 0 0 190 0 225 300 0 0 525 45 604 4,045 203 113 5,010 Rabbitbrush plow Subtotal 1z000 1,000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 --0 0 0 lz000 1,000 Browse Seed Only Spray Subtotal 25 40 65 0 130 130 15 0 15 0 0 0 0 0 ---0 0 0 -0 40 170 210 Seed. On Iy Spr~y Subt;o;tal 0 0 0 200 0 200 40 0 40 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 240 Annual weeds Harrow Subto}:al 75 75 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 75 Abandoned Lands Sees! Only suJ:li:otal 40 40 0 0 .0 0 0 0 0 0 0 40 40 Seed. Only suhJ;:9tal 576 576 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 576 576 32744 330 ~ z715 12557 190 669 102205 Aspen Accidental bu rn All Veg. types. + 'M Gr~~~ ..total P .0 .J •• 240 75 �- 82 - Table 46. Acres of sage grouse range treated.in Colorado prior to January 1, 1966 by the U. S. Forest Service and Bureau of Land Management. Acres of Sage Grouse Range Treated Vegetative Kind of All Heavily used Type Range 1/ Treatment Range Grass Plow 1,000 o plow & harrow 60 o Subtotal 1,060 o Sagebrush Seed Only Harrow Plow Spray Chain Burn Rotobeat Plow & harrow Spray & plow plow & burn Chain & burn Other Subtotal 3,540 1,763 16,087 59,192 9,152 810 315 2,134 2,765 800 200 27 96,785 Spray Subtotal 1~030 1,030 plow Spray Subtotal 167 934 1,101 934 934 Half shrub Spray Subtotal 15 15 o o Abandoned lands Harrow Subtotal 75 75 o o Accidental burn Seed only Subtotal 220 220 200 200 Rabbitbrush Greasewood All Veg. types Grand total 100,286 1/ Areas where sage grouse use was heavy at the time of treatment. 325 o 5,583 11,567 40 460 75 100 o 640 o 27 18,817 o o o 19,951 �1/ Effects of range type-conversion on deer, elk,and sage grouse.- -.,.. .....• t;l:l:ect: 01: lrear.ment on Wildlife No Effect Detrimental Beneficial Percent No. Percent No. Percent No. Season Total of of Total of of Total of of Kind of Vegetative of Wildlife Acres Acres Acres Treatment Tvoe Use Soecies Deer F-W-Sp Sagebrush Spray 0 0 0 19 83 25,545 4 17 5,428 Deer F-W-Sp Pinyon-Jun. Chain 6 38 9,074 9 56 It.,588 1 6 1,455 Elk F-W-Sp Sagebrush Spray 3 25 4,125 4 33 4,274 5 42 9,428 Sage Grouse All Sagebrush Spray 0 0 0 13 100 20,229 0 0 0 1/ Assessments of the effects of treatment on wildlife summarized in this table were made by Regional Game, Fish and Parks Department Biologists and Area Supervisors for certain range type-conversion projects with which they were personally familiar. Table 47. & ��- 85 - r."'P l,b3 Page 1 HlBITAT MANIPULATION PROJECTS IN COLORADO Colorado Game» Fish and Parks Department 1* PROJECT DESIGNATION 1. Number 2. Name, _ '----------------------- II* LAND STATUS 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Name Nat1. Forest BLM District State Agency SCS District Indian Agency Private (Name & Address) IV Allotment ~~~--~-------- II 1* LOCATION 9. G.F.&P. Region 12. District or Unit County Township 10. W.C.O. District _ 13. Drainage Range Sections 11. Game Mgmt. Unit No. _ ~~~----------P.M. _ SITE DESCRIPTION Dominant 15. Species 17. Topography 18. Percent Slope 19. Exposure 20. Soil Type,~------21. Erosion Condition 22. Range Condition~ 23. Forage Production (lbs/acre)________________ 24. Vegetative Density Bare 25. Shrubs 26, Herbs 27. Litter 28. Ground ---------Density Determined by 29. Agency _ 30. Date Remarks ------------------- 14.* Vegetative Type 16.* Elevation CLIMATIC DATA 31. Avg. Annual Precipitation 33. Avo Annual Temperature 35. Avg. Snow Depth on Area --------------------- VI _ _ --------_ --------- V _ Seasonal 32. Distribution 34. Length Growing Season~ 36~ Station Reporting, _ _ _ RANGE USE (At Treatment) 37t Kind of Livestock~~ 38~ Season of Use 39. Carrying Capacity 40. Grazing System~ 41. Stocking Rate ------------------ Remarks 42~ Kind of Wildlife Season --------------- 43'!'" of Use--------------------- --------~----- --------------------- How Use Determined Remarks -------------- 45. Agency ------------------- -------------------- --- Fig, 1. ----,---- _ _ _ 44. Amount of Use _ _ _ 46. Date _ Standard form used to inventory range type-conversion projects. �- 86 Page 2 VII TREATMENT 47~ No. Acres 48t Purpose of. 49. Special Treatment: Treated Treatment Yes No _ 50~ Kind of Treatment Kind. _ 51~ Date Treated 52~ Equipment, Chemicals, _ 53~l Seeded: Yes No54~ How Seeded, .",... _ 55 Date Seeded 56~ Species Seeded. ---------------57t Rate Seeded 58. Protection Given~ _ 59t Forage Production Determined Quantitatively: Yes No _ Location From Other Projects, _ 0 Remarks, VIII ----------------- EFFECTS OF TREATMENT After 60~ Forage Production (lbs) 61. Vegetative Density (%) 62. Shrubs 63. Herbs 66. Kill·Percent 68. Success Percent 70. Agency Making Determination Remarks~· 720 Kind of Livestock Increase Decrease Species 64. Litter 65. Bare Ground 67. How Kill Determined, 69. How Success Determined, 71. Date 73. Season of Use _ _ _ _ _ _ 74. Type of Grazing System 75. Present Carrying Capacity 76. Date: ~-----77. Present Stocking Rate 78~ Increase of 79 Decrease of. _ 80. No Change '81. How Carrying Capacity & Stocking Rate Determined 83. Date. 82. Agency Making Determination Remarks -------------------------- _ 85. Season 86. Amount Wildlif~e-----------Of Use --------Of Use. 87. More Use By 88. Less Use By 89. Type Cover -;A-::f:-::f:-e-c-t-e-:d~-----------90 • Period Game Gone: _ _ _ 84a Kind of _ TREATMENT 9la Beneficial 95. How Determ~ Remarks 92~ Detrimental 94. Unknown _ 93. No Effect ------ 96 • A gency -----_ ----- 97. Date. --------------------- Information Obtained By Information Obtained Fr-o-m-------------------------Title,__ ------------------Title:__---------------------- _ Field Inspection Made: Yes No _ Date; Location of Photo Station~ _ '" Items "f lagged" are of primary Impor t ance , and special effort should be made to obtain information Q �- 87 - 280,000 260,000 ~ Sagebrush Type ~ Other Types 19361940 19411945 240,000 220,000 200,000 180,000 "0 160,000 Q) .j.J to Q) $-I E-i 140,000 CIl Q) $-I o ~ 120,000 100,000 80,000 60,000 40,000 20,000 0 19461950 19511955 19561960 Date Treated Fig. 2. Acreages of range treated during five year periods from 1936 through 1965. 19611965 �- 88 160,000 140,000 120,000 100,000 "0 Q) .u D Sprayed Plowed Other !II OJ $-I E-t 80,000 (/J Q) 1-1 o <t: 60,000 40,000 20,000 !!!!!!!!!!!!l!!!l!!!l! ° 19361940 19411945 19461950 19511955 19561960 19611965 Date Treated Fig. 3. Acreages of sagebrush range treated during five year periods from 1936 through 1965. 100,000 1m Chain 80,000 D Other 60,000 19461950 19511955 "0 OJ .u !II Q.i 1-1 E-t (/J Q.i $-I 40,000 o <t: 20,000 ° 19561960 19611965 Date Treated Fig. 4. Acreages of Pinyon-Juniper range treated during five year periods from 1946 through 1965. �"~-'"-''''' .. -- - •• -1 -L'o;';:; "' •• _»> "l, . .•• I --' , ~'-'=:l I ! ~~ i I\~ "STCRl!W~ , LEGEND ·\, • Spray w...•.,1 X Plow ~t < Seed Only 1:',-- -~ 'f"0ENVEfI - Harrow or Drag > Chain V Rotobeat 1\ Burn -r'-""'~t..... '\,f" I • o •• 8«·€H'Wtl~ . . , , C ,,'- r+ ._.I t-.,-l_:'.-~~£O_-.\1 ~_. : i ;'~" GAR',EeO', • ",1f \\ ~~I «r··l"J·~ 4 "" . +t: ! ' . 1:1:)1 " rl ~~ : \ Sl.)iH""H*G- \', '\ \-- ~ ~I A-.,"_~ -c, •... ..- ..• , @•• 'v, ~! ~_~_> __ -.I;..-- _. yrm-o _,. ~~"-~:-:"=""-"-'('()WA '\ '\ L-'::.:·;:··'· ..·_' -r- I' Figure 5. -- Locations of sa~ebrush range type-conversion projects. - I.. I �.. 0_00_\00_0_00_ ..- "-'--l-L~;"~i c. '1 ~l\lffi . }-~o~e!!__ I :~ ! ~STIiltllM~ ) , I '-~-~ •• i, -...I• LEGEND / I I - "(! ; -Glfn1U~ ~( "It 1' .• _ -:::. '> Chain < • Seed Only X Plow 1\ Burn DENVER ~ Spray - -\l\-1~\ E ; OUNTY ICOVPCA I I ~NT£iUi.tA ."> •I~,.~ > » oJ!lA-rn .-' i.J--l,......---+-'---' I--?.-----~-- ,/1" w:~1 ( P""'!: ~'" I ywrA.OV$4. t,_!W'J-MQl(,...j t ~Hr~~--- r'1 -J'>i r ~\o/ 's.J .:1.. !. __'')P''~ I. $(lU'tl<fm. rU" I Matlr&.r---- ---' __ L~------ Figure 6. -- Locations of pinyon_juniper range tyne-conversion projects. :. •....• : SIftUN~T<'"e li~- i-,:~ I _ , I Brush Roller , I /~~, -, ,\ ""t.j ,;"e( I �-,.,.- TOO _ '1-" .•-.. ) ··-·--\·L~;;;;.--_.~'. "-~ \ I -"- -r-- -----:i!""" ..---"","1 I , ~Ivffi • r-I' r" :r'ff. I\-,,,,-o-0t-I ~ ! !! (SEO€iW -:. IC ---'1 -1 I, • x • Spray """,1 Plow Harrow or Drag ~ < Seed Only a 6UP.UH$TON Figure 7. -- Locations of grassland range type-conversion projects. 1 /' f!,.d 7\ :r/~~~ �•• ".,.,.,... .•.•. _ • .,."'_ ..•• -..."'_ .•• ,--,."-'*"'» .• __ •• I j ! I LEGEND • Spray <: Seed Only X Plow > Chain Harrow or Drag aURUM~TPM\% 1\ Burn "...,--- -~ ·I, • I•, 1 •, 1 · I ,, I j r :,o,~"o__,__ O-S.O;;%) ~~ .e:w,,,. I ~--~' t o_~~ r ~\*' __ ~ .f{tJ¥f:Mt.vr:tr,~ M.~n,MOlt' Y"IXA ." o_!U!7 - 1,",\ --, ..r" f""ll't 01>(_" \fw~w:~1 M~ ,I 1. i , $O\il"""" rJT' J flYK . .i' '~C'A. ( ~.~~-!:;~:::~---':-.:.... Figure 8. Locations of browse range type conversion projects. �- 93 - Sprayed Un sprayed sagebrush sagebrush adjacent sprayed area to Fig. 9. Comparison of a sprayed sagebrush area,where a heavy sagebrush was obtained and grasses were released,with an adjacent unsprayed area. kill �- 94 - Fig. 10. Plowing (left) has almost eliminated big sagebrush. wheatgrass seed was drilled in the plowed area. Crested Fig. 11. Sagebrush chaining was usually unsuccessful. Large sagebrush plants were removed,but a heavy sagebrush stand soon returned because young sagebrush plants were released. �- 95 - Fig. 12. Open pinyon-juniper stand with a heavy browse understory. Fig. 13. Open pinyon-juniper stand with a heavy understory of big sagebrush. �- 96 - Fig. 14. Heavy pinyon-juniper stand with a very sparse plant understory. �- 97 - Fig. 15. Comparison of an untreated pinyon-juniper stand having a heavy w~owse understory with an adjacent chaining. Browse and grass plants were released by chaining. �- 98 - Fig. 16. Pinyon-juniper stands are often chained in extremely large blocks. Deer use edges of large chainings,but make very little use of the central portions. Fig. 17. Typical pinyon-juniper chaining where trees are uprooted but debris provides some deer cover. and killed, �- 99 - Fig. 18. Comparison of an untreated pinyon-juniper stand with an adjacent area treated with a brush roller. Pinyon and juniper trees were snapped off one or two feet above the ground and branches were crushed. Rolled area has a much cleaner appearance than a chained area. �- 100 - Strip-sprayed Strip-chained sagebrush pinyon and juniper Fig. 19. Spraying and chaining should be done in strips to minimize wildlife losses. Application of type-conversion treatment in large blocks should be avoided. �- 101 - A SYSTEM FOR INVEN'roRY, EVALUATION AND EXCHANGE OF INFORMATION ON RANGE TYPE CONVERSION PROJECTS By Interagency Council on Wildlife Ecology Introduction During recent years the State and Federal land managing agencies have launched an extensive program to improve over 500,000 acres of rangeland in Colorado. Most of the work involves conversion of brushland to grassland, commonly referred to as type conversion projects. An inventory of all completed type conversion projects was made in 1966. Data will be gathered currently on all projects initiated since that time. These data will be placed on ADP cards by the Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department, Game Research Division in Fort Collins. It will be made available to all land managing agencies upon request. Certain project ar-eas will be selected by the Interagency Council on Wildlife Ecology for intensive study. Procedures and methods of improving the wildlife habitat will be determined and hopefully adopted by all land management agencies. Procedure In order to assure a smooth working, efficient system for gathering current data, the following procedures are recommended: 1. When a new range type conversion project is proposed, the land management agency will send a letter and location-map to the Regional Manager, State GF&P, in whose Region the project lies. The letter will briefly describe the proposed work. Sufficient lead time for field inspection, at least one year, will be allowed between notification and the date type conversion work begins. 2. The Regional Manager will arrange a joint field inspection of the proposed project area with the agency personnel. During the inspection, Form GFP #4A will be· completed to the extent possible by the State GF&P personnel, with the assistance of the land-managing agency involved. 3. Upon completion of the treatment work on any area, the land management agency shall notify the Regional Manager (State GF&P) the dates the work was performed and the acres involved. Details on treatment work shall also be given if different from that planned. 4. During the second year following treatment of any area, the Regional Manager (State GF&P) will contact the land management agencies in his region and arrange for a joint evaluation of the area. Form GFP #4B will be completed for each projec t evaluated during the field trip. Joint evaluations will also be made on each type conversion project at the end of the 5th and 10th years following treatment and Form #4B will also be completed during these evaluations. Game research personnel of the Game, Fish and Parks Department will send prompter letters to Game, Fish and Parks Department Regional Offices requesting followup evaluations and completion of Forms "GFP#4B for projects as appropriate. �- 102 - 5· Copies of all letters describing plans for proposed range type conversion projects and copies of completed Forms GFP #4A and 4B, with appropriate comments, will be forwarded currently by the Regional Manager to the Colorado Department of Game, Fish and Parks Game Research Center, Fort Collins, attention Game Range Investigations Project Leader. The material will be placed on ADP cards and the original forms placed on file by projects. Data concerning any type conversion work will be made available to all cooperating land management agencies upon request. Instructions for filling out Forms GFP #4A. and 4B are attached. Note: It is suggested that wherever possible the following information requested on Forms GFP #4A and 4B be derived from the results of surveys made by cooperating Federal agencies using their standard game and livestock range analysis procedures: Space Number Form GFP #4A Form GFP #4B 21 22 2.) 24 14, 15, 16 18 25 19 26 26A 27 28 39 41 44 20 21 22 23 34 36 45 25 27 Information Requested Eronion Condition Range Condition for Livestock, Deer and Elk. For:'lgeProduction for Lives I~ock,Deer and Elk. Ver,eLative Cover ShnJb Cover Herb Cover Grass Cover Litter Bare Ground Carrying Capacity Stocking Rate Amount of use for pach game species. Kill percent Success percent ==============================================~=========================~== Note: Photo points should be established in each area where type conversion is proposed during the initial joint field inspection. Photos should be retaken when the 3rd, 5th and 10th yea,r inspections are made. If land management agencies have photos they will be used to the extent possible. Octob~r, 1967 �IMPORTANT: When completing the bla::tkson this form follow the instructions in the Interagency Council on Wildlife Ecology booklet entitled "A System for _-lnventory Evaluation and Exchange of Information ortRange Type Conversion 'Projects" • -103GFP #4A CO}WLETED Colorado 1* LAND STATUS 3 . Natl. Forest 4. BLM Dis trict 5. S ta te Agency 6. SCS Area 7 • Indian Agency III* LOCATION 9. G.F.&.P. 12. County Township PROJECT Game, Fish and Parks Department PROJECT DESIGNATION I. Number 11* IV HABITAT TYPE CONvERSION 2. Name District Name -~.. or Unit Allotment II. Game Mgmt. Unit No. 10. W.C.O. District Region 13. Dra inage Sections Range P.M. SITE DESCRIPTION Dominant 14.* Vegetative Type 15. Species 16.* Elevation 17. Topography __~ _ 18. Percent Slope 19. Expo su re 20. Soil Type _ 21. Erosion Condition --------------------------~-----------------------------------------------2lA. Method Used to Determine Erosion Condition -------------------------------22. Range Condition for Livestock For Deer For Elk~ _ 22A. Method Used to Determine Range Cond.Livestock Deer Elk _ 23. Forage Production for Livestock For Deer For Elk~ _ 23A. Method Used Determ. Forage Prod. Livestock Deer Elk _ 24. Vegetative Cover 25. Shrubs 26. Herbs 26A. Grass 27. Litter 28. Ground ----------------28A. Hethod Used to Determine VegetativeOover-& Corr.position ~--------------------29. Agency -30. Dat~ ------------------------------Remarks -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- --------------- V CLIMATIC DATA 31. Avg. Annual Precipitation --------33. Avg. Annual Temperature --------_ 33B. Avg. July Temperaturc 35. Avg. Snow Depth on Area -------- VI Seasona 1 32. Distribution ----------------------- _ 33A. Avg. Jan. Temperature _ 34. Length Grmving Season _ 361f Station Reporting, RANGE USE (A t Trea true nt ) 38.* Season of Use 37.* Kind of Livestock -39. Carrying Capacity~--------------------------- 40. Grazing System~--------------------_ Remarks 41. Stocking R~te --------- -------- "'."-' �42 .* Kind of Wildlife --'-__________ 43.* Seasor.~' ~--'-~ of Use 44A. How Use Determined Remarks -------VII 44. Amount of Use _ :-.-------- 45. Agency ------~~--~~ 46. Da te . ----------- TREATMENT .47.* No. Acres Treated -104- of ----------------- 48.* Purpose Treatment -------------------------~--~--- 49.* Kind of Treatment 50. Eq~u~i-p-m-e-n~t~U~s-e-.d~------------------~-51.* Date Treated 52.* Equipment, Ch~mica1s__~ _ 53.* Seeded: Yes No 54.* How Seeded 55.* Date Seeded_~~----------56.*Species Se-e~d~e~d--------------------------~--~ 57.* Rate Seeded 58.* Protection Given Location from Other Projects Remarks ------------------------------------------------ ~----------~----------~~--- MAP OF PROJECT LOCATION· R __ R T 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 s 4· 3 2 1 7 8 9 10 11 12 7 8 9 10 11 12 18 17 16 15 14 13 18 17 16 15 14 13 19 20 21 22 23 24 19 20 21 22 23 24 30 29 28 27 26 25 30 29 28 27 26 25 31 32 33 34 35 36 31 32 33 34 35 36 - 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 7 8 9 10 11 12 7 8 9 10 11 12 18 17 16 15 14 13 18 17 16 15 14 13 19 20 21 22 23 24 19 20 21 22 23 24 30 29 28 27 26 25 30 29 28 27 26 25 T 1---- 31 32 33 34 35 36 31 32 33 34 35 36 -_. ,.......0..-., .--I..".~---.""" * Items "flagged" are of primary importance, and special effort should be made '.- to obtain information. .Form Completed By Title Agency Date~_.,.--:----:-_ (show title and agency of all persons participating in completion of form) �-105- IMPORTANT: When completing the blanks on this form follow the instructions in the Interagency Council on Wildlife Ecology booklet entitled '~ System for Inventory Evaluation and Exchange of Information on Range Type Conversion Projects"• GFP #4B RESULTS AND EFFECTS OF HABITAT TYPE CONVERSION PROJECT Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Division I.~.~ PROJECT DESIGNATION 1. Number 2. Name 110 ~'( LAND STATUS Name 3. Nat'l. Forest 4. BLM District 5. State Agency 6. SCS Area 7. Indian Agency 8. Private (Name and Address) III.~'< IV. LOCATION 9. GoFo&P. Region 12. County Township District or Unit Allotment 10. W.C.G. District. 13. Drainage Sections _ Range 11. Game Mgrnt. _ Unit No.__ ~ __ _ P.M. EFFECTS OF TREATMENT After Increase Decrease Plant Species 14. Forage Production for Livestock~ _ 15. Forage Production for Deer 16. Forage Production for Elk 17. Method Used to Determine Forage Prod. Livestock Deer Elk _A_f_t_e_r Increase Decrease Plant Species 18. Vegetative Cover _ 19. Shrubs 20. Herbs 21. Grass 22. Litter _ 23. Bare Ground _ 24. Method Used to Determine Vegetative Cover & Composition _ 25. Kill percent 26. How Kill Determined _ 27. Success Percent 28. How Success Determined ~------ _ 29. Agency Making Determination 30. Date Remarks _ ---------- 31. Kind of Livestock 34. 36. 39. Present Carrying Capacity Present Stocking Rate No Change Determined 32. Season of Use 33. Type Grazing System 35. Date _ 37. Increase of 38. Decrease of _ 40. How Carrying Capacity & Stocking Rate Continued on Reverse Side �-10641. Agency Making Determination 43. Kind of Wildlife More Use By 46. 44. Season of Use ~42. Date _ 45. Amount of Use~. 47. Less Use By --------------_ _ TREATMENT 48. Beneficial 49. Detrimental 50. No Effect ------------51. Unknown 52. How Determined. ~--~--------------------53. Agency 54. Date _ Remarks _ -------------- Form Completed by Tit1e. _ Agency Date ~---(Show name, title and Agency of all persons participating in completion of form.) �- 107 - :rnSTRUCTIONS FOR COMPLETING FORMS GFP #4A and GRP #4 B FORM GFP #4A I. 1. PROJECT NUMBER: 2. NAME: PROJECT DESIGNATION Each agency should record its own project number Record name of project. II. LAND STATUS No instructions or explanation needed. �f-' o CP III. LOCATION 9, and 10. G.F. and P. P~GION AND W.C.O. DISTRICT: Code No. 1 Northeast Region Radio Location No. 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 343 344 345 347 348 350 352 353 359 363 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 376 377 378 379 380 381 383 S.E. Denver Idaho Springs Idledale Castle Rock Aurora Shawnee Boulder Arvada S.W. Walden N. Ft. Collins E. Walden N. W. Walden Estes Park Loveland Longmont Red Feather Lakes W. Ft. Collins (Poudre) Julesburg Wray Fort Morgan Greeley Akron Brighton Sterling Code No. 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2 Southeast Region Radio No. Location 923 924 925 926 927 928 929 930 934 935 936 937 1166 1167 1168 1169 1170 1171 1172 Walsenburg Beulah W. Trinidad E. Trinidad Westcliffe E. Colo. Spgs. E. Pueblo W. Colo. Spgs. Canon City Buena Vista Salida Fairplay Burlington Las Animas Lamar Hugo Springfield Rocky FQrd Bonny Reservoir Code No. 3 Northwest Region Radio No. Location 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 1111 1112 1113 1114 1115 1122 1123 1124 1125 1126 1127 1128 1135 1136 1137 1138 1139 1140 1141 1143 1149 1150 1151 1152 1154 1155 1156 N. Rifle Glenwood Spgs. Rangely N. Meeker S. Meeker Palisade Carbondale W. Grand Jct. N. Grand Jct. S. Rifle Basalt Collbran Minturn McCoy Eagle Granby E. Kremmling Frisco W. Kremmling Yampa N. Steamboat Spgs. South Craig Slater S. Steamboat Spgs. Hayden Greystone North Craig 11. GAME MA...'T\fA.GEMENT UNIT NO: Record game rnanagement unit number and sub-unit number. Code No. 4 Southwest Region Radio No. Location 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 953 954 955 956 957 958 959 962 966 967 968 969 972 973 974 975 976 977 981 982 983 984 985 986 Dove Creek Dolores Bayfield E. Durango Chimney Rock W. Durango Cortez Pagosa Spgs. Lake City Paonia E. Gunnison W. Gunnison La Jara Alamosa Monte Vista South Fork Creede Saguache Olathe Cedaredge Montrose Nucla Norwood Delta �I-' o \0 O· REGION HDQTS. REGION BOUNDARY ••• SUPERVISOR AREA COLO.GAME-FISH a PARKS DEPT. ---W.C.O. DISTRICT it W.C.A. CAL.L. NUMBER e\Qru2 SUPERVISOR CALL NUMBER 000 W.C.O.CALL NUMBER a OISTRICT NO. 12-2-63 �>-<1( 0:", %m!? 000 • <II: 0: CIIO< •... Z 0:::>0: Zz> ~~:5 (!)(!)IL "'''':::> O:O:CII 01: �I '-"'" ~. i \\"13 1 \\,- 1 I \. I / I 1 I 1~ -":'. ;,- ) f-' f-' f-' o ••• REGION REGION HOQTS. BOUNDARY SUPERVISOR AREA COLO. GAME-FISH a PARKS DEPT. ---W.C.O. DISTRiCT it W.C.A. CALL e\Q.Q.Q 000 SUPERVISOR CALL NUMBER W.C.O. CALL NUMBER DISTRICT a NUMBER NO. 12-2-63 �COLO. GAME-FISH o - REGION HDQTS. REGION BOUNDARY SUPERVISOR AREA a PARKS DEPT. ---W.C.O. DISTRICT it W.C.A. CALL NUMBER I\Q.Q.Q SUPERVISOR CALL NUMBER 000 W.C.O. CALL NUMBER a DISTRICT NO. 12-2-63 f-' l-J ro �- 113 - IV SITE DESCRIPTION 14. VEGETATIVE TYPE AND SUBTYPE: 01- Grassland 02. Meadow 03· Perennial Forbs 04. Sagebrush and Rabbitbrush 1- Sagebrush 2. Rabbitbrush 05· Browse 1- Oakbrush 2. Mountain Mahogany 3· Bitterbrush 4. Serviceberry 5· Willows 06. Conifer 08. Barren 09· Pinyon-Juniper 10. Broad-leaf trees 13· Saltbush 14. Greasewood 15· Winterfat 16. Desert Shrub 17. Half shrub 18. Annual weeds 19· Abandoned lands 20. Cultivated lands 21- Burned area (accidental burn) 15· DOMINANT SPECIES: List the main plant species found in the area. 19· EXPOSURE: 01. North 02. South 03. East 04. West 05· Northeast 06. Northwest 07· Southeast 08. Southwest 09· North and South 10. East and West 11- Northeast and Southwest 12. Northwest and Southeast 13· All exposures 20. SOIL TYPE: (Texture) 01. Clay 02. Sandy clay 03. Silty Clay 04. Sandy Clay Loam 05. Clay Loam 06. Silty clay Loam 07. Sandy Loam 08. Loam 09· Silt Loam 10. Silt 13· Gravely Loam 14. Gravel 11- Loamy sand 12. Sand 15· Rocky Loam 16. Rock 21. EROSION CONDITION: 1. None or slight 2. Moderate 3. Severe 4. None or slight to moderate 5. None or slight to severe 6. Moderate to severe 2lA. METHOD USED TO DETERMINE EROSION CONDITION: Give the name of the method used to determine erosion condition. �- 114 - 22. RANGE CONDITION FOR LIVESTOCK: Use the following categories to indicate range condition for the primary kind of livestock that uses the area. 1. Excellent 2. Good 3. Fair 4. Poor 7· Fair to Good 5· Very Poor 6. Good to excellent 8. Poor to Fair 9· Very Poor to Poor RANGE CONDITION FOR DEER: 1. Excellent 2. Good 3. Fair 4. Poor 7· Fair to Good 5· Very Poor 6. Good to Excellent 8. Poor to Fair 9· Very Poor to Poor RANGE CONDITION FOR ELK: 1. Excellent 2. Good 3. Fair 4. Poor 7· Fair to Good 5. Very Poor 6. Good to Excellent 8. Poor to Fair 9. Very Poor to Poor 22A. METHOD USED TO DETERMINE RANGE CONDITION: Give the name of the method used to determine range condition for livestock, deer and elk. 23· FORAGE PRODUCTION FOR LIVESTOCK: Show in pounds per acre the total weight of forage produced by plants used by the primary .livestock species during an average growing season prior to treatment. FORAGE PRODUCTION FOR DEER: Show in pounds per acre the total weight of forage produced by plants used by deer during an average growing season prior to treatment. FORAGE PRODUCTION FOR ELK: Show in pounds per acre the total weight of forage produced by plants used by elk during an average growing season prior to treatment. 23A. METHOD USED TO DETERMINE FORAGE PRODUCTION: Give the name of the method used to determine forage production for livestock, deer and elk. 24. VEGETATIVE COVER: Record percent plant cover for grasses, forbs and shrubs but not trees. 25. SHRUB COVER: Record percent. 26. HERB COVER: Record percent. 26A. GRASS COVER: Record percent. �- 115 - 27· LITTER: Record percent. 28. BARE GROUND: Record percent. 2SA . .METHOD USED TO DETERM~ VEGETATIVE COVER AND COMPOSITION: Give name of method. 29· AGENCY: Indicate the agency that determined the vegetative cover and composition. 30. DATE: Indicate the date that vegetative cover and composition were determined. V. CLIMATIC DATA 31. AVERAGE ANNUAL PRECIPITATION: Record average precipitation in inches. 32. SEASONAL DISTRIBUTION: precipitation occurs. Indicate the season of the year when most of the 33· AVEfu'\.GE ANNUAL TEMPERATURE: Record average temperature in degrees Fahrenheit. 33A. AVERAGE JANUARY TEMPERATURE: Record average temperature in degrees Fahrenheit. 34. LENGTH OF GROWING SEASON: Show the average number of days in the growing season. 35· AVERAGE SNOW DEPTH ON THE ARF..A:Record in inches. 36. STATION REPORTING: Give the name of the weather station from which weather data recorded on this form were derived. VI. RANGE USE (At Time of Treatment) 37. KIND OF LIVESTOCK: Indicate the primary kind of livestock that uses the area. 3S. SEASON OF USE: Record season of use for the primary kind of livestock that uses the area. Ol. Winter 02. Spring 03. Summer OIl. Fall 05· Winter and Spring 06. Spring and Summer 07· Spring and Fall oS. Summer and Fall 09· Fall and Winter 10. Spring, Summer, Fall ll. Fall, Winter, Spring 12. Year long 39. CARRYING CAPACITY: Record in acres per AUM for the primary kind of livestock that uses the area. �- 116 - 40. GRAZING SYSTEM: Tndicate the grazing system used for the primary kind of livestock that uses the area. 41. STOCKING RATE: Record in acres per ADM for the primary kind of livestock that uses the area. 42. KIND OF WILDLIFE: Indicate which of the following wildlife species occur in the project area. Also indicate the presence of other important wildlife species. Deer Elk Sage Grouse Antelope Bighorn Sheep Mountain Goat Black Bear Turkey Blue Grouse Sharptailed Grouse 43. SEASON OF USE: Show season of use for deerJ elk and sage grouse. 1. Deer Winter 1. Elk Winter 2. Deer Spring, Fall 3. Deer Summer 4. Deer Spring, Summer, Fall 5· Deer Fall, Winter, Spring 6. Deer Yearlong 2. Elk Spring, Fall 3. Elk Summer 4. Elk Spring, Summer, Fall 5· Elk Fall, Winter, Spring 6. Elk Yearlong 1. Sage Grouse, Winter 2. Sage Grouse, Spring, Fall 3. Sage Grouse Summer 4, Sage Grouse, Spring, Summer, Fall 5. Sage Grouse, Fall, Winter, Spring 6. Sage Grouse Yearlong 44. AMOUNT OF USE: 1. Deer Light 2. Deer Moderate 3. Deer Heavy 1. Elk Light 2. Elk Moderate 3. Elk Heavy 1. Sage Grouse Light 2. Sage Grouse Moderate 3. Sage Grouse Heavy 1. Bighorn Sheep Light 2. Bighorn Sheep Moderate 3. Bighorn Sheep Heavy 1. Mountain Goat Light 2. Mountain Goat Moderate 3. Mountain Goat Heavy 1. Antelope Light 2. Antelope Moderate 3. Antelope Heavy 1. Turkey Light 2. Turkey Moderate 3. Turkey Heavy 1. Blue Grouse Light 2. Blue Grouse Moderate 3. Blue Grouse Heavy 1. Black Bear Light 2. Black Bear Moderate 3. Black Bear Heavy 1. Sharptailed Grouse Light 2. Sharptailed Gourse Moderate 3. Sharptailed Grouse Heavy 44A. HOW USE DETERMINED: Give the name of the method used to determine the amount of use for each wildlife species. 45. AGENCY: Indicate the agency that determined the amol1nt of use for each wildlife species. 46. DATE: Show the date the amount of use was determined for each wildlife species. �- 117 - VII. TREATMENT 47. NUMBER OF ACRES TREATED: Record number of acres. 48. PURPOSE OF TREATMENT: Give the primary reason for the treatment. (Example: Range improvement for livestock, Range improvement for wildlife, Range improvement for watershed management purposes, Range improvement in connection with a timber management project, etc.). 49. KIND OF TREATMENT: Indicate what treatment was applied to the area. If the area was seeded only record "none" in this blank. 50. KIND OF EQUIPMENT USED: Indicate the kind of equipment that was used in treating the area or how the treatment was applied. 51. DATE TREATED: Show the date the treatment was applied. 52. CHEMICALS USED: If chemicals were used to treat the area indicate the kind of chemicals. 53. SEEDED: Check "Yes" is the area was seeded, "no" if it was not. 54. HOW SEEDED: If the area was seeded show the method used. 55· DATE SEEDED: If the area was seeded .show the date. 56. SPECIES SEEDED: If the area was seeded list the species planted. 57· RATE SEEDED: If the area was seeded show the total pounds of seed planted per acre. 58. PROTECTION GIVEN: Indicate what measures were taken to protect the area from grazing after the treatment, and how long the area was protected before normal grazing was resumed. �- 118 - FORM GFP #4B I. PROJECT DESIGNATION Follow the same instructions that apply to Forms GFP #4A. III. LOCATION Follow the same instructions that apply to forms GFP #4A. IV. EFFECTS OF TREATMENT 14. FORAGE PRODUCTION FOR LIVESTOCK: Show in pounds per acre the total weight of forage produced by plants used by the primary livestock species during an average growing season after the treatment. Also indicate in pounds per acre an increase or decrease in the total weight of forage produced that has occurred as a result of treatment, and show what plant species were involved in the increase or decrease. 15. FORAGE PRODUCTION FOR DEER: Show in pounds per acre the total weight of forage produced by plants used by deer during an average growing season after the treatment. Also indicate in pounds per acre an increase or decrease in the total weight of forage produced that has occurred as a result of treatment, and show what plant species were involved in the increase or decrease. 16. FORAGE PRODUCTION FOR ELK: Show in pounds per acre the total weight of forage produced by plants used by elk during an average growing season after treatment. Also indicate in pounds per acre an increase or decrease in the total weight of forage produced that has occurred as a result of treatment, and show what plant species were involved in the increase or decrease. 17. ME~IOD USED TO DETERMINE FORAGE PRODUCTION: Give the name of the method used to determine ,forage production for livestock, deer and elk. 18. VEGETATIVE COVER: Record percent plant cover after the treatment for grasses, forbs and shrubs but not trees. Also indicate the percent increase or decrease in vegetative cover thathas occurred as a result of treatment, and show what plant species were involved in the increase or decrease. 19. SHRUBS: Record percent. 20. HERBS: Record percent. 21. GRASS: Record percent. 22,. LITTER: Record percent. 23. BARE GROUND: Record percent. �- 119 24. METHOD USED TO DETERMINE VEGETATIVE COVER AND COMPOSITION: Give name of method. 25. KILL PERCENT: Record percent kill on the primary plant species the project was designed to eradicate. 26. HOW KILL DETERMINED: Give name of method used to determine percent kill on the primary plant species the project was designed to eradicate. 27. SUCCESS PERCENT: Record percent success of plantings. 28. HOW SUCCESS DETERMINED: Give name of method used to determine planting Success. 29· AGENCY MAKING DETERMINATION: Give the name of the agency that determined planting Success. 30. DATE: Record the date planting success was determined. 31. KIND OF LIVESTOCK: Indicate the primary kind of livestock that uses the area. 32. SEASON OF USE: Record season of use for the primary kind of livestock that uses the area. Ole Winter 02. Spring 03· Summer 04. Fall 05. Winter and Spring 06. Spring· and Summer 07· Spring and Fall 08. Summer and Fall 09· Fall and winter 10. Spring, Summer, Fall ll. Fall, Winter, Spring 12. Yearlong 33. TYPE OF GRAZING SYSTEM: Indica te the grazing system used for the primary kind of livestock that uses the area. 34. PRESENT CARRYING CAPACITY: Record in acres per AUM for the primary kind of livestock that uses the area. 35· DATE: Record the date that the present carrying capacity was determined. 36. PRESENT STOCKING RATE: Record in acres per AUM for the primary kind of livestock that uses the area. 37· INCREASE OF: Show the amount of increase in stocking rate in acres per AUM for the primary kind of livestock that uses the area, if the stocking rate has been increased after the area was treated. 38. DECREASE OF: Show the amount of decrease in stocking rate in acres per AUM for the primary kind of livestock that uses the area, if the stocking rate has been decreased after the area was treated. 39· NO CHANGE: Place a check mark in this space if the stocking rate for the primary kind of livestock that uses the area has not changed since the area was treated. �- 120 - 40. HOW CARRYING CAPACITY .AND STOCKING RATE DETERMINED: Give the name of the method used to determine carrying capacity and stocking rate. 41. AGENCY MAKING DETERMINATION: Indicate the agency that determined carrying capacity and stocking rate. 42. DATE: Record the date that carrying capacity ana. stocking rate were determined. 43. KIND OF WILDLIFE: Indicate which of the following wildlife species occur in the project area. life species. Deer Elk Sage Grouse Antelope Also indicate the presence of other important wild- Bighorn Sheep Mountain Goat Black Bear Turkey Blue Grouse Sharptailed Grouse 44. SEASON OF USE: Show season of use for deer, elk and sage grouse. 1- Deer Winter 2. Deer Spring, Fall 3· Deer Summer 4. Deer Spring, Summer, Fall 5· Deer, Fall, Winter, Spring 6. Deer Yearlong 1- 1- Elk Winter 2. Elk, Spring, Fall 3· Elk Summer 4. Elk Spring, Summer, Fall 5· Elk Fall, Winter, Spring 6. Elk Yearlong Sage Grouse Winger 2. Sage Grouse, Spring, Fall 3· Sage Grouse Summer 4. Sage Grouse Spring, Summer, Fall 5· Sage Grouse Fall, Winter, Spring 6. Sage Grouse Yearlong 45. AMOUNT OF USE: 1. Deer light .2. Deer moderate 3. Deer heavy 1. Elk light 2. Elk moderate 3. Elk heavy 1- Sage grouse light 2. Sage grouse moderate 1- Bighorn Sheep light 2. Bighorn Sheep moderate 1- Mountain Goat light 2. Mountain Goat moderate 1- Antelope light 2. Antelope moderate 3· Bighorn Sheep heavy 3· Mountain Goat heavy 3· Antelope heavy 1- Turkey light 2. Turkey moderate 1- Blue Grouse light 2. Blue Grouse moderate 1- Black Bear light 2. Black Bear moderate 3· Turkey heavy 3· Blue Grouse heavy 3· Black Bear heavy 1- Sharptailed Grouse light 2. Sharptailed Grouse moderate 3· Sharptailed Grouse heavy 3· Sage grouse heavy �- 121 - 46. MORE USE BY: Indicate which of the following species are making more use of the area as a result of the treatment. Deer Elk Sage Grouse Antelope Bighorn Sheep Mountain Goat Black Bear Turkey Blue Grouse Sharptailed Grouse 47. LESS USE BY: Indicate which of the following species are making less use of the area as a result of the treatment. Deer Elk SageGrouse Antelope Bighorn Sheep Mountain Goat Black Bear Turkey Blue Grouse Sharptailed Grouse 48, 49, 50 and 51. TREATMENT BENEFICIAL, DETRIMENTAL, NO EFFECT, OR UNKNOWN: Indicate whether the treatment was beneficial, detrimental, had no effect or an unknown effect for each of the following species: Deer Elk Sage Grouse Antelope Bighorn Sheep Mountain Goat Black Bear Turkey Blue Grouse Sharp tailed Grouse 52. HOW DETERMINED: Give the name of the,method used to determine the effects of treatment for each of the following species: Deer Elk Sage Grouse Antelope Bighorn Sheep Mountain Goat Black Bear Turkey Blue Grouse Sharptailed Grouse 53. AGENCY: Indicate the agency that determined the effects of treatment for each of the following species; Deer Elk Sage Grouse Antelope Bighorn Sheep Mountain Goat Black Bear Turkey Blue Grouse Sharp tailed Grouse 54. DATE: Show the date that the effects of treatment were determined for each of the following species Deer Elk Sage Grouse Antelope Bighorn Sheep Mountain Goat Black Bear Turkey Blue Grouse Sharptailed Grouse �� https://cpw.cvlcollections.org/files/original/810764cb465bf73ed8e6a0e2559c1576.pdf 539892eb5ed838e774f3ec0a24f916e1 PDF Text Text .Iuly, 1968 - 123 JOB COMPLETION RESEARCH SEGMENT COLORADO State of Project PROJECT REPORT Game Range Investigations W-IOI-R-IO No. Work Plan No. Job No. 1 1 Title of Job: Effects of Different Intensities of Simulated Browsing on Key Browse Species Period April Covered: Personnel: 1, 1967 through March 31, 1968 Harold R. Shepherd "The Effects of Different Intensities of Simu18.ted Browsing on Key Browse Species" study is a long-term clipping experiment simulating different intensities of game use on five important species of browse plants. Its objective is to learn how the yearly removal of certain percentages of the current annual growth stems and of old stems affects the plants. Field work has been completed and all plot fences have been removed. Data compilations, analyses, graphs, and tables have been made, and a portion of the first draft of a final report to be entitled "Effects of Variable Clipping on Key Browse Species in Southwestern Colorado" has been written. Completion and publication of the final report has been delayed by supervisory duties, but is scheduled for April 1, 1969· Since several years have elapsed since the literature on the study was first reviewed, it was thought advisable to bring the references up to date before completing the writing of the final report. This was done and the updated annotated bibliography presented here was prepared. ��- 125 - ANNOTATED BIBLIOGRAPHY FOR "EFFECTS OF DIFFERENT INTENSITIES OF SIMULATED BROWSING ON KEY BROWSE SPECIES" ALDOUS, Co Mo 1945. A winter Mgmt. 9(2):145-1510 study of mule deer in Nevada. J. Wildl. "Bitterbrush utilization (51 percent) occupied an intermediate position between Cercocarpus ledifolius (100 percent) and Cowania stansburiana (38 percent). Chemical analysis of bitterbrush showed that most nutrients are concentrated in leaves, buds, and twig tips." ALDOUS, Eo SHALER. 1941. Deer management suggestions cedar types. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 5(1):90-94. for northern white "If browsing on northern white cedar is kept below 25 percent of the leafy foliage annually, the smaller trees are potentially the best food producers as most of the foliage is within reach of deer. Only the lower branches of larger trees can be browsed and the new growth is largely out of reach. Priority useage of winter concentration areas for deer and management to that end are advocated." 1952. Deer browse clipping Wildl. Mgmto 16(4):401-4090 study in the Lake States region. J. "The study was conducted on Superior Nato Forest in Cook Co. Minn,. and Dukes Experimental Forest, Upper Peninsula, Mich. "Northern white cedar under 7 feet will produce well and continue to grow when less than 15 to 20 percent of foliage is removed annually. Heaver use causes decline in browse production, retarded growth, gradual death. Larger trees can be browsed heavily below 7 feet without injury, and foliage would be los t by na tura 1 pruning, anyway ''Mountain maple, white birch, beaked hazelnut, pin cherry, willow, and black ash produce well under moderate to heavy use and should be used at least moderately if plant gruwth is to be kept within reach of deer. ''Mountain ash, red osier dogwood, and red-berried elder do not stand up well under heavy use and should be moderately used where possible to insure their continued availability to deer." 0 BAILEY, Jo Ao 19670 Sampling Mgmt. 31(3):437-442. deer browse for crude protein. J. Wildl. "A comparison of methods for sampling witch-hobble (Viburnum alnifolium) deer browse indicated that pieces of browse contained higher concentrations of crude protein when (1) twigs were clipped more closely behind their terminal buds, (2) browse was collected from lower rather than upper portions of the plant crowns, and (3) browse included flower buds or lateral buds rather �- 126 - than only terminal vegetative buds. Effects of these sources of variation among protein levels for pieces of browse were quantified. Sampling efficiency can be increased by standarizing collection methods to eliminate these effects. Protein levels in wL.:h-hobble remained constant during January to mid-March. It is suggested that composite samples of ground browse produce biased results. Deer on overbrowsed range may consume less protein than deer on better range to the extent that they eat more stem tissue and to the extent that overbrowsed plants fail to produce flower buds." BAILEY,Lo n, The standard cyclopedia of horticulture 3:2817-2822. "There are more branches in the top of any plant than can persist; therefore there is struggle for existence. Those which have advantage of position persist. Nature prunes. Dying and dead branches in any neglected tree-top are illustrations of this fact. Whenever the struggle for existence is greatly lessened, the remaining branches receive a greater proportion of the plant's energy, and they therefore make stronger growth, yield better produce, or are more productive in flowers and fruit. Pruning is essentially a thinning processo In itself, pruning is not a devitalizing process; it is devitalizing only when it is carried to excess or when the wounds do not heal and disease sets in. It is rather an invigorating process, since it allows more nourishment to be distributed to the remaining parts of the plant. The notion that pruning is devitalizing arises from false analogy with animals, which suffer shock or injury when parts are removed. The fact that pruning is not a devitalizing process is proved by every tree. The tree is a record of successive prunings. Note the number of branches on .the seedling tree in the nursery or in the forest, and then consider that all these branches, with the exception of the leader itself, will probably perish in the course of timeo The forest tree develops a bole and the side limbs are pruned away by natural causes. Knots are records of this natural pruning. Filamentous fungi kill trees by gaining foothold in dead wood of knot:s, and as they grow destroy living cells. The larger the wound the greater the liability to infection. It is important, therefore, that wounds be small and heal quickly. Best pruning is annual, so branches to be removed do not attain large size. "Heavy pruning of tree top produces very vigorous growth on remaining parts. "So far as healing of wound is concerned, it is perhaps best to prune when the vegetative activities begin in spring so that the wound is quickly covered or "healed". "For the purpose of checking growth and producing other definite results, it may be necessary to prune at other times of the year." BAKER, Fo So, and CLARENCE in the inter-mountain yellow pine forests. "Discusses and sap density Fo KORSTIANo 1931. Suitability of brush lands region for the growth of natural or planted western U. S. Depo Agr. Tech. Bull. 256. 82 p., inus. the root system, leaf size, water content, transpiration index, of bitterbrush to indicate its strong resistance to drought." �- 127 - BISSELL, HAROLD Do, and HELEN STRONGo 1955. The crude protein variations in the browse diet of California deero Calif. Fish and Game 41(2): 145-155. "Crude protein levels (dry-weight basis) at various times of the year were determined for 48 browse specieso Protein content of bitterbrush varied from 6.9 percent in February and March to 1104 percent in August (no data given for June, July, and September). A 7-percent crude protein level is believed adequate for deer maintenance except for periods of prolonged cold or stress." BLAISDELL, JAMES P., and JOSEPH Fo PECHANEC. 1949. Effects moval at various dates on vigor of bluebunch wheatgrass balsamroot. Ecology 30(3):298-3050 of herbage reand arrowleaf "Studies were conducted on spring-fall range at the U. S. Sheep Experiment Station to determine the effect of herbage removal at various dates on the vigor of bluebunch wheatgrass (Agropyron spicatum) and arrow-leaf balsamroot (Balsamorhiza sagittata). Observations were made each year for a 6-year period on a new series of plots located in areas completely protected from grazing. Each species was clipped to ground level on eight groups of plots, a different group being clipped at each of eight dates. An additional group was used as an unclipped check. The effects of clipping were measured the following year. "In general all clipping reduced the following yearVs herbage and flower stalk production, and average leaf heighto The reduction due to the first spring clipping was small; the effect became more pronounced from clippings made as the growing season advanced. The greatest reduction resulted from clippings made in late May and early June. The reduction from late):'clipping was progressively less, and the effect of the late fall clipping was slight. Flower stalk production was impaired more than herbage production, and both were impaired more than Leaf height. Wheatgrass was more adversely affected than balsamroot. Lack of soil moisture was the limiting factor preventing regrowth during the latter part of the season. "From the results of this study the folloWing conclusions are drawn: 1. Complete herbage removal of blue-bunch wheat-grass and arrowleaf balsamroot is most injurious after the date when substantial regrowth is impossible and before maturity. 2. The effect of clipping whea t gra ss and balsamroot apparently depends upon the amount of herbage present during the storage period which follows cessation of growth - reproductive activity is of secondary importanceo 3. Subsequent flower stalk production is more severely affected by ground-level clipping than is herbage; however, vigor can best be judged by a combination of the twoo 4. Average leaf height is not a reliable indication of vigoro" BLAISDELL~ JAMES Po~ Ao Co WIESE~ and Co Wo HODGSON. 19520 Variations in chemical composition of bluebunch wheatgrass, arrowleaf balsamroot, and associated range plants. J. Range. Mgmt. 5(5):346-353. Presents dates. phenology and chemical composition of bitterbrush at several �- 128 - BLAISDELL, J. p., and W. F. MUEGGLER. 1956. Sprouting of bitterbrush (Purshia tridentata) following burning or top removal. Ecology 37(2):365-370. '~ifty percent and 72 percent, respectively, of plants that had been burned and of plants that had been severed 2 inches above ground level produced sprouts. Sprout mortality equaled 33 percent and 25 percent on the burned and severed plants, respectively, within 16 months after treatment. Sprouts originated in two ways: from an existing mass of dormant buds wholly or partly encircling the stem at ground level, or from a callus of meristematic tissue formed beneath the bark after treatment and encircling the stem." BRAMBLE, W. C., and M. K. GOODARD. 1953. Seasonal browsing of woody plants by white-tailed deer in the ridge and valley section of central Penn. J. of Forestry 51(11):815-819. "A 5-year study of the seasonal browse preferences of white-tailed deer was made in the ridge and valley section in central Pennsylvania. Distinct and consistent preferences were shown so that a table of preferred species could be drawn up for the various seasons of the year. Three types of seasonal patterns were recognized in respect to the vital winter season:' (1) Species browsed heavily only in winter, (2) Species browsed heavily in other seasons as well as winter, (3) Species browsed lightly in winter. A knowledge of seasonal preferences is needed for proper evaluation of range inventories in any forest region and is basic to management of deer range." CALIFORNIA FISH AND GAME COMMISSION, INTERSTATE DEER HERD COMMITTEE. 1954. Eighth progress report on the cooperative study of the Devils Garden interstate deer herd and its range. Calif, Fish and Game 40(3):235-266. Fire destroyed extensive stands of bitterbrush and other desirable species, the loss of which contributed to subsequent heavy deer mortality. Data are presented on growth, utilization, and chemical content of bitterbrush and other browse species. COOK, C. W., L. A. STODDART, and L. E. HARRIS 1953" Effects of grazing intensity upon the nutritive value of range forage. J. Range Mgmt. 6(1): 51-54. o "During the winter grazing seasons of 1949 to 1952, digestion studies were conducted on typical saltbush ranges of Utah to evaluate the factors affecting the nutritional value of the foraging animal's diet. As the degree of the utilization increased, the content of the more desirable nutrients in the available forage decreased, and, in addition, the digestibility of these nutrients was lowered markedly. With intensive utilization, the animals were forced to consume the less nutritious portions of the plants and as a result the available nutrients frequently were not adequate to meet the demands of the grazing animals." �- 129 - COOK, CLYDE Jo, Co WAYNE COOK, and LORIN Eo HARRIS. 1948. Utilization of northern Utah summer range plants by sheep. J. Forestry 46(6):416-425. Discusses stems. summer use of bitterbrush by sheepo Sheep prefer leaves to COOK~ Co WAYNE, and Lo Eo HARRIS. 1950. The nutritive content of the grazing sheepvs diet on summer and winter ranges of Utah. Utah State Agr. Exp. Stao Bullo 3420 66p. Presents and seed-drop data on chemical 'composition of bitterbrush stages. during early-seed COOK, Co W. 1959. Chemical content in various portions of the current growth of salt-desert shrubs and grasses during winter. Ecology 40: 644-51. "A study to determine the chemical content of some important saltdesert forage species and the distribution of the various components in different portions of the plant during dormancy was carried out in west central Utah. "Chemical content in all cases varied significantly among specieso Grasses were higher in cellulose; shrubs were higher in ether extract, protein, lignin, phosphorus, and calcium. As the season advanced from October to March, lignin and cellulose generally increased; ether extract, other carbohydrates, and protein tended to decrease. The ash content of shrubs tended to decrease as the season advanced, but tended to increase in grasses. There were no noticeable trends for other constituents with respect to season. "Lignin was consistently higher in the basal portions of the stems compared to the stem tips in both grasses and shrubs. In all species but two, the content of other carbohydrates "(vashigher in the basa 1 portions of the stem. "In general, the ash c ont.ent; of shrubs was higher in the upper portions of stems, but in grasses ash was higher in the lower portions. "The concentration of ether extract, protein, cellulose, phosphorus, calcium, and grass energy in different portions of the stem varied widely among the species. "It would appear that many plants trans locate protein from stem tip to stem base during the winter. Here greater protection from cold seems to permit maintenance of some green ma t er i a L, Even bud swelling may occur during midwinter in some species All these processes tend to make more nutritious forage near the bases of certain species rather than at the stem t Lps ," o COOK, Co Wo, and Lo Ao STODDART. 1960 Physiological responses of big sagebrush to different types of herbage removal J. Range Mgmto 13(1):14-16. 0 o "It was found that clipping all current yearUs growth from one side of big sagebrush during late winter or early spring causes death of that half of the plant after 3 yearsU treatment; whereas clipping half of all current yearVs �- 130 - growth over the entire plant reduced vigor of the entire plant substantially, but only small isolated twigs or branches were killed. At the end of 3 year's treatment, the unharvested half of plants of the first group had grown so vigorously that the increased production about compensated for the loss of the other half of the plant. The study indicates that there is little or no translocation of manufactured food from one side of the plant to the other. Harvested material from clipping all herbage from one side of the plant was higher in lignin and cellulose, whereas herbage from clipping half of each twig over the entire plant was higher in ether extract, protein, and carbohydrates." COOPER, Ho Wo Tensleep, 1953. Amounts of big sagebrush in plant communities near Wyoming as affected by grazing treatment. Ecology 34:186-189. "A study of the vegetation on four neighboring pastures under different ownerships was begun in 1942 and continued until 1949. In three pastures, deferred grazing was practiced, but in the fourth there was no significant change in stocking rate or system of management from 1942 to 1949. "The author concluded that 'When conservative grazing and occasional resting (deferring) of pastures is practiced on this site, climax grasses can largely replace big sagebrush without artificial aid.' "Under favorable weather and grazing conditions, climax grasses can displace big sagebrush on this site within a decade or less." COSTELLO, DAVID Fo, and RAYMOND PRICE. 1939. Weather and plant-development data as determinants of grazing periods on mountain range. U. S. Dep. Agr. Tech. Bull. 686 3lp. Describes phenology and range-readiness indicators for bitterbrush. Readiness indicators include: plants one-half in leaf; flower buds bursting; current twig growth none. CURTIS, 0 Fo, and Do Go CIARK. 1950. An introduction to plant physiology. McGraw-Hill Book Co., Inc. N.Y., Toronto, London. 752 p. 0 CURTIS, ROBERT Oo~ and Fo Mo RUSHMORE. and deer browsing on reproduction Forestry 56(2):116-121. 1958. Some effects of stand density in an Adirondack hardwood stand. J. HIn experimental cuttings in mature northern hardwoods in northern N.Y., residual stands of approximately 70-100 sq. ft. basal area favored reproduction of beech over hard maple and yellow birch. An overstory of 50 ft.2 favored the maple and birch. Hard maple reproduction appeared less tolerant than the species is usually considered. Deer browsing markedly affected species composition of reproduction; maple, birch and white ash developed normally only when protected by deer exclosures; beech was browsed less." DALKE, Po D. 1941. The use and availability of the more common deer browse plants in the Missouri Ozarks. Trans. Sixth N.A. Wildl. Conf. p. 155-160. �- 131 - Plants of at least 200 species are fed upon by white-tailed deer in this region. The extent of utilization was detennined by a clipping study. The yield of browse per acre was calculated o DIETZ~ DONALD Ro 1958. Seasonal variation in the nutritive content of five southwestern Colorado deer browse species. MasterVs thesis, Colo. State Univ., Fort Collins. 111 p. Exploratory analysis of browse samples. Federal Aid in Wildlife Restoration, Fed. Aid Project W-38-R-ll, Work Plan 3, Job. 17. Colo. Div. Game and Fish. 37 p. "Current annual stem and leaf samples were taken from big sagebrush, bitterbrush, mountain mahogany, Gambel oak, and serviceberry growing in Mesa Verde National Park, Colo during spring, summer, fall, and winter. Chemical analyses were made to detennine the protein, phosphorus, and carotene content of stems and leaves and of stems and leaves ·separate. Nutritive composition varied by season of year, plant part, and species Most variation occurred between plant parts, with season and species next in that order. Leaves were highest in protein, carotene, phosphorus, nitrogen-free extract, mOisture, ash, and calcium; stems were higher in crude fiber. Leaves and stems were nearly equal in crude fat. Leaves declined in protein, phosphorus, and carotene content and increased in crude fat, nitrogen-free extract, and calcium content during seasonal progression,while their crude fiber and ash content remained about the same. Nutritive content of stems varied much with season. Protein, phosphorus, carotene, and crude fiber of stems decreased and increased during seasonal progression. Crude fat in stems rose during seasonal progression, while nitrogen-free extract and calcium tended to rise and then fall. Seasons affected protein, phosphorus, crude fat, and crude fiber content of browse species, but affected but little their nitrogen-free extract, ash, and calcium content. Nutrients of the different browse species often reacted in different ways during seasonal progression _..protein content of big sagebrush increased, while it decreased in Gambel oak. "Big sagebrush, a semi-evergreen species, usually reacted differently w i t h respect to nutrient content from the other species, all deciduous shrubs. Bitterbrush and Mountain mahogany, preferred winter browse species, usually reacted alike and different from Gambel oak and serviceberry, which are preferred summer browse. Highest amounts of important nutrients in big sagebrush occurred in ,late winter (the critical period for deer) when other browse, especially summer browse, contained lowest amounts of these nutrientso Big sagebrush had the highest seasonal mean percentages of protein, phosphorus, crude fat, and moisture; however, it had the lowest mean percentages of crude fiber; nitrogenfree extract, and calcium "Stems of bitterbrush and mountain mahogany were higher in the more important nutrients during late fall and late winter than during the growing season. "Gambel oak and serviceberry, which are eaten by deer during late spring and summer, contained more of the important nutrients during the growing season. Leaves of these summer food species were much higher in the important nutrients than were the stems. Also the leaf-to-stem ratios for these species were higher than for winter food species. o o o �- 132 "Correlating seasonal chemical contents of preferred deer browse species with actual deer use of these species during the four seasons, points to fact that deer probably do seek the most nutritious feed available, as stated by SWift." DIETZ, DONALD R., ROBERT u, UDALL, HAROLD n, SHEPHERD, AND LEE Eo YEAGER. 1958. Seasonal progression in chemical content of five key browse species in Colorado. Pr oe ,, Soc. Amer. Po'rest , , Salt Lake City, Utah. "Five key species of deer browse were collected seasonally from Mesa Verde National Park to determine their proximate chemical analysis. Big sagebrush, bitterbrush, mountain mahogany, Gambel oak, and serviceberry were tested. The current annual growth, including leaves, were clipped from each of 25 plants of each species. The material was air-dried and ground in a Wiley mill. Standard chemical tests determined the chemical content. The fractions tested for were mOisture, ash, calcium, phosphorus, crude protein, crude fat, crude fiber, nitrogen-free extract, and carotene. Season for collection had an effect upon content of protein, carotene, phosphorus, crude fat, and crude fiber, but little effect upon nitrogen-free extract, ash, and calcium. Late-spring samples were higher in protein than average of other seasons, and higher in phosphorus and carotene content in late spring than average of other seasons. "Big sagebrush contained highest seasonal mean percentages of protein, phosphorus, and crude fat, and lowest mean percentages of crude fiber, nitrogenfree extract, and calcium. "Gambel oak and serviceberry indicated wide calcium-phosphorus ratios during late-fall, late-winter seasons, when they are only lightly utilized, while bitterbrush and mountain mahogany showed a wide ratio between these minerals during late spring and late summer, seasons of relatively light deer use. "Deer on the study areas were observed to choose browse containing the highest amounts of important nutrients during each season, especially in the case of protein. It is apparent that no one, two, or three browse species can supply a diet nutritionally adequate the year around; thus, the deer range must contain mixtures of preferred browse species to supply sufficient nutrients in balanced form during all seasons of the year." DIETZ, DONALD Ro, ROBERT Ho UDALL, and LEE Eo YEAGERo 1962. Chemical composition and digestibility by mule deer of selected forage species, Cache la Poudre Range, Colorado. Colo. Game and Fish Dept. Tech. Pub. 14. 89 p. Effects of species, seasons, and years on chemical composition of summer range and winter range plants are compared. Results of feeding trials with deer are presented. Bitterbrush is one of the species studied in detail. 1962. Differential digestibility of nutrients in bitterbrush, mountain mahogany, and big sagebrush by deer. First Nat. White-tailed Deer Dis. Symp. 1962:29-36, 39-50. "Sagebrush had higher percentages of digestible protein, fat, and fiber, and more TDN with a better nutritive ratio than bitterbrush and mountain mahogany. Mountain mahogany had higher digestion coefficients than bitterbrush for protein, fat, and fiber; equal in TDN, but with a slightly better nutritive ratio. �- 133 "Bitterbrush and alfalfa were more palatable to the deer than either sagebrush or mountain mahogany. Deer either gained or maintained weight on all feeding combinations, except that with sagebrush, indicating a need for other browse on sagebrush ranges." DIETZ, DONALD Ro 1965. Deer nutrition research in range management. Thirtieth N. Amer. Wildlife and Natur. Resources Conf. Trans. 1965:274-285. "The leaves of bitterbrush contained higher percentages of protein, phosphorus, carotene, fat, nitrogen-free extract, ash, and calcium than the stems in late spring. Protein? phosphorus~ crude fat, and crude fiber levels, and their implications in deer management are discussed for several species including bitterbrush." DRISCOLL, RICHARD So 1963. Ecology 44(4):820-821. Sprouting bitterbrush in central Oregon. Gives percentages of bitterbrush sprouting after two fires. The degree of sprouting was strongly related to soil factors but only weakly related to burn intensity. FERGUSON, Ro Bo, and Jo Vo BASILEo twig growth. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 1966. Topping 30(4):839-841. stimulates bitterbrush "The response of old bitterbrush (Purshia tridentata) shrubs to topping was studied on winter range for deer in SW Idaho. Tops of 15 randomly selected shrubs at least 6 feet tall were cut off 3 feet above ground level; 15 similar shrubs were selected as controls. Current year's growth was sampled on each shrub before topping and annually thereafter for four years. All shrubs produced similiar amounts of twig grmJth the year before treatment. The year after treatment, topped shrubs produced nearly nine times as much twig growth as the control shrubs" In subsequent years, topped shrubs outproduced control shrubs but at a declining rate. Topping old shrubs may be a useful, though perhaps temporary, way to increase production of bitterbrush browse." GARDNER, V. Ro, Co Bo BRADFORD~ and Ho Do HOOI<ER~ JRo of fruit production" McGraw-Hill Co. 1953. The fundamentals A textbqok. GARRISON~ GEORGE Ao 1953" Effects Range Mgmto 6(5):309~317. of clipping on some range shrubs. J. "This study was concerned with the extent to which current twig growth of some eastern Oregon and Washington shrub species which are valuable for big game or livestock forage could be clipped annually yet maintain a healthy, productive condition. Twigs of antelope b Lt t erbrus h , snowbrush ceanot hus , rubber rabbitbrush, creambush rockspirea, and curlleaf mountain mahogany were �- 134 harvested annually, at least four times. Four intensities (one-quarter, onehalf, three-quarters, and all) of the current annual twig growth were clipped during late fall or early winter. "Each species responded somewhat differently to twig removal, yet in general, clipping stimulated twig production to the detriment of flower and fruit production. Production of some shrubs under the heaviest intensities of clipping was remarkable, but after a few years, indications of decreasing vitality appeared. "Results of the study suggest some levels of use for sustained shrub production on winter ranges in Oregon and Washington; for antelope bitterbrush on the best sites, 60 to 65 percent, and 50 percent on poorer bitterbrush sites; for snowbrush ceanothus, 35 to 40 percent; for rubber rabbitbrush, 50 percent, but it is seldom used this much; for creambush rockspirea, 50 to 60 percent; and for curlleaf mountain mahogany plants completely within reach of grazing animals, 50 to 60 percent." 1953. Annual Fluctuation in Production of some eastern Oregon and Washington shrubs. J. Range Mgmt. 6(2):117-121. "Biotic and climatic factors can cause wide variations in the annual production of shrubs. In a 4-year study in eastern Oregon and Washington on antelope bitterbrush, snowbrush ceanothus, rubber rabbitbrush, creambush rockspirea, and big whortleberry, variations in precipitation or damage by rodents and insects reduced the browse in some years to as little as one-third or onefifth of the production in other years. These fluctuations should be considered in grazing management for eastern Oregon and Washington shrub ranges. "Variations in production of bitterbrush exemplified the effects of rodent attacks and annual variations in precipitation. In one instance ••• , the yield for the year of greatest production ••• , was about 3.2 times the yield in the poorest year, Fluctuation in yield of the other bitterbrush plots appeared to be mainly related to rodent damage. The loss was attributed to girdling of basal stems and branches by rodents. Parts of the crowns on girdled plants died." 00.' GOURLEY, JOSEPH H., and FREEMAN So HOWE. MacMillan Co., New York. 579 p. 1. 1941. Modern fruit production. The Pruning of Fruit Plants Effect of Pruning upon Growth. 1. Pruning is a dwarfing process, although immediate effect is increased length of shoots and size of leaves, total growth of unpruned tree is always greater than pruned tree regardless of type or amount of pruning. 2. Pruning gives optical illusion of increased growth. 3. Trunk and branches of unpruned tree thicker as opposed to length. 4. Pruning reduces total root growth detrimentally if conducted long time. Result caused by reduced production phytohormones and carbohydrates by leaves. 5. Reduction in total growth after pruning is proportional to severity of pruning. A. �- 135 6. II. Beneficial effects of pruning: increased size of leaves and decrease in exhaustiveness of fruiting, compensate in part for its dwarfing tendency and loss of leaves. Beneficial effect can more easily equalize small loss than heavy one. Hense the advisability of light pruning. B. Summer pruning versus dormant pruning I. Summer pruning has greater dwarfing effect than dormant pruning; leaves have only recently achieved functional status at expense of stored nutrient materials in wood and bark. Removal in summer prevents leaf function, which is replacement of carbohydrates, and thus tree exhausted by leaf production is deprived of their future product. 2. Any pruning in June or July has more reductive effect than if done earlier or later. C. Localization of pruning effects 1. Growth response to pruning has most effect on branches, shoots and spurs immediately surrounding pruning cut, even though general effect may extend throughout tree. 2. Growth response decreases with distance from cut. 3. Pruning, by reducing surface area, increases water supply to remaining growing pOints, thus produces an effect upon growth in distant portions of tree. D. Effects of pruning on flower-bud formation I. Pruning affects old and young trees differently. (a) Young trees held back in flowering by pruning; 3-5 year delay. (b) Retardation caused by use by stimulated shoots of materials manufactured by leaves which induce flower-bud formation. Some materials used by both shoots and flowers. If it goes to shoots flowers not formed. (c) Apples and pears which flower largely upon spurs will be delayed in flower formation as long as tree is stimulated to produce long, rank shoots upon which few or no flowers develop. (d) Pruning removes flower buds differentiated previous year, reducing total bearing surface. (e) Pruning most beneficial to older trees by stimulating more shoots and spurs. (f) Production of fruits has exhaustive effect and reduces growth of shoots and spurs. Eo Effect of pruning upon fruit setting I. Pruning increases percentage of flowers which develop into fruitso F. Pruning and water supply 1. Both dormant and summer pruning decrease transpiring surface, reducing water stresso 2. Excessive pruning reduces leaf shading effects and causes excessive shoot growth. It will eventually bring about a lowered water supply because of indirect reduction of root growth. Water relations of fruit plants A. Functions of water 1. Predominant physiological processes such as photosynthesis and synthesis of organic nitrogenous compounds from inorganic �- 136 - 2. 3. 4. nitrogen and carbohydrates dependent on available water supply. When cells have a maximum water content, rate of substance formation at maximum. As moisture content is reduced, rate decreases in proportion to reduction of moisture. Maximum rate of cell division depends on complete turgidity of cells concerned, thus growth retarded when turgidity decreased. Cell enlargement, second phase of growth, also greatly retarded by water deficiency. Water deficiency reduces stability and increases mobility of organic nitrogenous compounds. Thus, proteins are hydrolyzed to amino acids, which are subsequently translocated from older to younger leaves. As consequence, many older leaves yellow and abscise. Activity of enzymes affected by water deficiency. The enzymatic hydrolysis of starch with consequent increase of sugars is an example of this. GRANT, So Ao, and Ro Fo HUNTER. 1966. The effects of frequency and season of clipping on the morphology, productivity and chemical composition of heather (Calluna vulgaris)(L) Hull. New Phytol. 65 (2):125-133. '~n experiment conducted in Scotland is described in which heather plants growing in boxes were clipped either in summer or in winter at different yearly frequencies. The effects of the treatments on morphology, productivity and chemical composition are described on the physiological age of the plant and this is determined by the distribution of the dry matter among the leaf and current seasons shoots, the older stems and wood, and roots. It is suggested that a grazing intensity where approximately 60 percent of the current season's shoot length is removed should be the best form of management." HEDRICK, DONALD Wo 1958. Proper utilization -- a problem in evaluating the physiological response of plants to grazing use: A review, J. Range Mgmt. 11(1):34-43. '~ review of literature on the physiological aspects of range and pasture use was made with two purposes in mi.nd: (1) to point out the basis for developing proper use standards applicable on both native and improved forage species, and (2) to consider some of the important factors inf1uenci.ng forage use. How grazing or top removal influences the plant is dependent primarily on the intensity, frequency, and season of use. In general, too heavy, too early, and too frequent removal has resulted in declining forage vigor. The greatest damage occurs during periods of minimum food storage and markedly influences root growth prior to any visible effect on the top." HUBBARD, Ro Lo, and D. DUNAWAY. 1958. Variation in leader length of bitterbrush. U. S. Forest Service. Calif. Forest and Range Expt. Sta. Res. Note 145. 4 p. An unrestricted random sample of 19 to 39 leaders from each of the five bushes would have given a reliable estimate of average leader length. �- 137 HUBBARD, Ro Lo, and Ho R. SANDERSON 0 1960. Herbage production and carrying capacity of bitterbrush. Pac. S.W. Forest and Range Exp. Sta. Research Note 157. "Total herbage production was determined for five mature bitterbrush plants collected in N. E. Calif. The distribution of weight along the leader was studied to provide a basis for converting from percentage of leader length removed to percentage of weight removed. Proper use was assumed to be 60 percent of the leader length or 49 percent of the weight. Assuming that a 100-pound deer eats a pure diet of bitterbrush, it would take 587 of the poorest producing plants and 207 of the highest producers to maintain him for 1 month." HAGEN, HERBERT L. 1953. Nutritive value for deer of some forage plants Calif. Fish and Game 39(2):163-175. the Sierra Nevada. in "Bitterbrush collected in August had a crude protein content of 13.7 percent ° It is present in limited quantity on the summer range, where it shows evidence of heavy use." HART, Go H., H. R. GUILBERT, and H. GOSS. 1932. Seasonal changes in the chemical composition of range forage and their relation to nutrition of animals. Calif. Agr. Exp. Sta. Bu110 543. 62 p. The chemical composition is given for leaves and twigs of bitterbrush at three different dates. Protein and phosphorous content declined with advancing maturity. Lambs ate bitterbrush eagerly. JAMESON~ DONALD Ao 1952. Nutritive value of browse on Montana ranges. J. Range Mgmto 5(5):306-310. winter '~inter fat, greasewood, and shadsca1e were important winter feed on the study pastures, whereas big sagebrush had very little use by cattle. "Abundant, palatable browse plants on winter ranges should provide some nutrients which are deficient in range grasses during the winter months. On this experimental area, the palatable shrubs had some value as sources of protein and carotene, but were not valuable as a phosphorus source. "The following table gives the average winter protein and phosphorus content of shadsca1e, big sagebrush, winterfat, and greasewood. The figures are averages of analyses published by Bidwell and Wooten (1925), Clarke and Tisdale (1945), Cook and Harris (1950), Esplin et a1. (1937), Idaho Experiment Station (1937), McCreary (1927 and 1939), and Wasser (1945)0" Species Shadsca1e Big sagebrush Winterfat Greasewood -Ie One analysis Percent Crude Protein 7.64 10.57 9.46 Percent Phosphorus .080 .300 .107 • 19 ··k �- 138 - 1963. Responses Oct.-Dec.: 532-594. of individual plants to harvesting. Bot. Rev. This is a literature review. Some of the pertinent conclusions follow: "Effects of herbage removal by grazing are similar to effects of clipping only when the amount and kind of herbage removed are the same. "Plant senescence is prevented by clipping. There may, however, be a temporary increase in dry matter yield for one to three years followed by a reduction in yield. Detrimental effects of clipping increase when frequency or degree of clipping is increased. "Seed yield is reduced by clipping and grazing. "Root weights and root growth are generally decreased by clipping. Clipping also reduces the amount of nutrients taken up by the roots. "In perennial plants there is a decrease in carbohydrate accumulations with the onset of spring growth. During the rest of the season carbohydrates of underground parts of plants may increase or decrease. "Carbohydrates and proteins may be associated with ability of the plant to survive drought, freezing and other adverse conditions." JULANDER, ODELL. 1955. Deer and cattle range relations Science 1(2):130-139. in Utah. Forest "Studies were made at Oak Creek deer-cattle range, Utah, to determine grazing patterns of deer and cattle. Forage preference studies were made here and on other deer-cattle ranges throughout Utah. Forage competition between deer and cattle ranged from light to severe on areas studied. On Oak Creek range, deer utilized large areas of good forage that were inaccessible to cattle. Suitable forage was the major factor affecting deer distribution on summer range, whereas desirable forage, exposure, and cover determined deer distribution in midwinter. Cattle distribution was influenced mainly by steepness of slope and availability of water and forage. Cattle grazed chiefly along canyon bottoms and gentle slopes. About a fifth of Oak Creek summer range and a third of winter range were used heavily by both deer and cattle. Management of this deer-cattle range should be based on proper utilization of forage on these areas, where competition for forage is most severe. Forbs and browse accounted for most of summer deer diet. In summer, cattle fed mainly on grass if available; otherwise they fed largely on browse and forbs. Most choice deer forage species were utilized to some extent by cattle, but grass, the choice cattle forage, formed a negligible part of deer diet in summer. Browse formed most of deer diet on deer winter range. More palatable species are bitterbrush, curlleaf mountain mahogany, true mountain mahogany, and cliffrose. Bitterbrush and true mountain mahogany were also palatable to cattle in spring and fall. Curlleaf mountain mahogany, cliffrose, and sagebrush were used little by cattle in spring and fall. Grasses were used heavily by deer only in early spring. On areas studied, maximum sustained grazing use is limited by (a) proper use of perennial grasses for exclusive cattle grazing, (b) proper use of palatable shrubs and forbs for exclusive deer grazing, and (c) proper use of shrubs and forbs palatable to both kinds of animals for maximum combined deer-cattle grazing." �- 139 1966. How mule deer use mountain Arts Let. Proc. 43(2):22-28. rangeland in Utah. Utah Acad. Sci. "This paper describes and explains patterns of deer use of Utah's mountain rangeland, and discusses what these use patterns imply for managers of wildlife habitat. "Home range instinct is so strong in mule deer that once they have established a home range they habitually graze certain areas of winter, spring, summer, and fall ranges year after year. This, together with variation in habitat factors, results in uneven distribution of deer over the range. Some areas on winter ranges are little used while deer concentrate on other areas each year and may starve rather than move to new range. "Overstocking of a given grazing area forces deer to use less desirable range. "Seasonal climatic fluctuations influence the amount of usable range and the length of grazing season for deer on a given winter range. "Forage is a chief factor affecting the distribution of deer on Utah summer ranges, and one of the chief factors on winter ranges. "Steepness of slope and roughness have little direct effect on deer distribution except for ledges and very inaccessible areas. "Exposure, or direction of slope, influences seasonal movements of deer on summer range by affecting stage of growth of forage plants. On winter range exposure affects snow depth, temperature, and wind movement; consequently, it influences seasonal shifts and definitely affects the midwinter distribution of deer." KOVAL, Vo T., and Ho Vo TRACHENKO. 1966. Effect of rejuvenating pruning of the peach on the daily increment of the shoots, pigmentary system, and assimilation surface. UKR Bot. ZH. 23(2) 49-53. . "Intense, rejuvenating pruning of the peach promotes increase in the daily growth increment and time of growth of the shoots. In the leaves of Lhe experimental plants there was more total chlorophyll. Carotenoids are found in smaller quantities in the pruned than in the controls." IGlliFTING~Lo Wo 1953. Effect of cutting mountain of deer browse. Minn. Forest. Notes 21:1-2. maple on the production "Among six species tested, mountain maple (Acer spicatum) a highly preferred deer food, produced the most browse following cutting. Test clumps produced twice as much as uncut clumps in one year. Sixteen years later, the amount of available deer browse remained high, although average stem length had decreased 50 percent. From two and four tenths to four man days were required to treat an acre, using hand tools, but in 1951, the cost, using power equipment, averaged only $3.87 per acre. " KREFTING, Lo Wo, Mo H. STENLUND, and R. K. SEEMEL. 1966. Effect of J. Wildl. simulated and natural deer brOWSing on mountain maple. Mgmt. 30(3):481-488. '~ountain maple (Acer spicatum) is an important browse species over much of its range in the Lake States, northeastern United States, and south-eastern �- 140 - MARTINSEN, CHARLES FREDERICK. 1960. The effects of summer utilization of bitterbrush in northcentral Washington. Master thesis, Univ. of Idaho, Moscow. 69 p. "Use of bitterbrush before August was detrimental to plant condition and forage production. No adverse effect was noted from use after August. Plants were clipped either in June, August, or October for six years; the June plots showed the most hedging and decadence and the largest increase in deadwood." MC CARTY, Eo Co, and RAYMOND PRICE. 1942. Growth and carbohydrate content of important mountain forage plants in Central Utah as affected by clipping and grazing. U. S. Dept. Agr. Tech. Bull. 818. 1-51. "The storage of carbohydrates in perennial range plants, like annual growth, is cyclic and related to the cycle of annual growth. Storage of carbohydrates is at a minimum during periods of greatest growth. Maximum storage occurs during the autumn - Augo and Sept. - with the completion of secondary herbage growth. Early growth in the spring is dependent upon reserve foods in the plants. Subsequent growth is dependent upon the currently assimilated foods. Sucrose and starch are the principal carbohydrates stored. Among clipped plants, highest percentages of yield and greatest carbohydrate storage occurred in plants clipped early - when 4 and 6 inches high - and at the close of the growing season - when foliage was dry. The quantity of carbohydrates stored in the roots and stem bases of plants is related to the amount of foliage present during the normal storage period - Aug. and Sept. at the study area - and is less as the interval decreases between clipping and the normal storage period. The seasonal trend of carbohydrate reserves under repeated grazing was markedly below that of the ungrazed plants, amounting to about 65 percent of the reserves in ungrazed plants at the end of the season. The key to practical grazing use of forage plants on western mountain ranges appears to be moderate use - grazing the grasses to an average height of 3 to 4 inches at about monthly intervals or less frequently, and allowing, at least periodically, for the slackening in the intensity of grazing during the intense reproductive period and the forepart of the fall storage period." 1966. Seasonal variations of availMC CONNELL, Bo R. and G. A. GARRISON. J. Wildl. Hgmt , 30(1):168-172. able carbohydrates in bitterbrush. "Time of grazing should be related to the carbohydrate level to realize maximum plant use while inflicting minimum damage to plant vigor. Grazing is probably most harmful during the carbohydrate depletion state from the start of spring growth through the period of rapid twig growth and early seed formation. Grazing should be less harmful between seed maturity and leaf fall, a period of carbohydrate accumulation. Grazing should be least detrimental to shrub vigor during the winter dormancy." MC NULTY, 10 Bo 1947. The ecology of bitterbrush Univ. of Utah, Salt Lake Cityo in Utah, M.S. Thesis, �- 141 - MEDIN, DEAN Eo 1960. Physical site factors influencing annual production of true mountain mahogany (Cerocarpus montanus). Ecology 41(3):444-460. "The relation of certain physical site factors to the annual production of true mountain mahogany (Cerocarpus montanus) was investigated near Meeker, Colorado. The study was designed to identify the physical site factors significantly influencing the annual production of true mountain mahogany, and to assess the relative importance of these factors. "Joint· observations on site and mahogany stands were made on 125 sample plots, 69 on sandstone and 56 on shale parent soil materials. Plots on soils from sandstone produced an average annual growth of 169.1 lb. per acre. Those on soils from shale produced 134.3 lb. per acre. This difference necessitated separate handling of the data for each parent material. "Site factors contributing significantly to the variation in current annual production on sand-stone-derived soils were soil depth, clay content of the A horizon, and surface stoniness (negatively). Non-significant factors showing moderate importance included lime, phosphate, slope gradient, and aspect. Those factors contributing only very weakly were slope position, rate of water infiltration, organic matter, pH, and potash. "Site factors contributing significantly on shale-derived soils included soil depth, and surface stoniness (negatively). Non-significant factors showing moderate importance were organic matter, aspect, lime, slope position, and clay content of the A horizon. Those factors contributing only very weakly included rate of water infiltration, slope gradient, phosphate, pH, and potash. "Factors influencing soil moisture relations, particularly water-holding capacity, appear to be the key ones influencing the annual production of mountain mahogany. Soil depth was by far the most significant factor regardless of parent material. Clay content of the A horizon was highly important in soils derived from sandstone. "None of the soil nutrients measured contributed significantly to variations in yield. Generally, the nutrient content of the soils examined appears sufficient for the requirements of mountain mahogany." MEGLI, VITTORIOo 1955. Tests on disbudding and their effects on the histogenesis of the wood ring. Nuovo Giorn. Bot. Ital. 62(~):4l-74. "Unlaw studied harmonic effects. Some observations dealing with the consequences of defoliation are reported. After removal of buds of peach tree, the annual ring shows a greater width and a more marked uniformity of st~ucture due to an increased frequency of the vascular elements. Leaf removal checks cambial activity completely. These facts are interpreted in accordance with recent hypotheses. Leaves produce a substance which stimulates formation of wood elements and differentiation of newly-formed elements. The inactive substance of foliar origin, would exert its effects only when buds, toward which it circulates, transforms it into active form. Removal of buds eliminates activation and concentration in organs which operate in the next vegetative period. As a consequence, circulation of the inactive substance produced in the leaves is more marked and induces at the cambium level, where it is probably activated, production of spring wood." �- 142 - Canada. The objectives of the study were: (1) to determine the natural browsing habits of deer in relation to browse production, and (2) to determine the browsing tolerance point of mountain maple, based on natural and simulated browsing. "The first part of the study included 11 years of measurements of the annual growth on 48 clumps of maple subjected to natural deer browsing, followed by a remeasurement of the browse remaining in the spring. The difference between the fall and spring measurement was the amount of browse removed by deer. In nine of 11 years, the summer's regrowth increased or decreased as the previous winter's browse removal increased or decreased. However, analysis of data indicated browsing intensity was not a dominating factor affecting regrowth. "The second and third parts included test clumps within exclosures that were clipped various intensities to simulate deer browsing. One group was clipped the same intensity each year (20, 40, 60, 80, and 100 percent of the annual growth) and another had clumps where clipping alternated between light and heavy clipping. For the first exclosure, there-was no direct relationship between regrowth and clipping intensity. However, for clumps subjected to 100 percent clipping for ten years, the regrowth in 1962 was 83 percent of what it was in 1953. At the second exclosure, the aerial stems of each test clump were cut off at ground level, allowed to grow one season, and then clipped for nine years. Again there was no apparent relationship between clipping intensity and growth response. "Natural browsing and artificial clipping of mountain maple stimulates regrowth, but browsing intensity is not a dominating factor. The species may be subjected to severe browsing, as only one of six clumps was killed after being clipped 100 percent for ten years. Apical dominance may be important, but the effect is not too well understood. Apparently, other environmental factors such as temperature, rainfall, and length of growing season are more important than browsing intensity." LAYCOCK, W. A. 1967. How heavy grazing and protection grass ranges. J. Range Mgmt. 20(4):206-213. affect sagebrush- "On sagebrush-grass ranges at the U. S. Sheep Experiment Station Dubois, Idaho, heavy spring grazing caused rapid deterioration of good condition range; production of palatable forage decreased, and sagebrush increased. Late fall grazing and complete protection maintained good range and improved poor range by increasing production of desirable forage and reducing sagebrush." LAY, D. W. 1965. Effects of periodic clipping on yield of some common browse species. J. Range Mgmt. 18(3):181-184. "Of six browse species clipped annually for 10 years, some maintained production under 50 percent clipping better than others with 25 percent clipping. Optimum appeared to be closer to 25 percent. Under destructive 100 percent monthly clipping of 16 species, the smilaxes, gallberry, and American cyrilla were most tenacious. All plants were in pine forest understory." �- 143 MEYER, BERNARD S., and DONALD B. ANDERSONo 1939. D. Van Nostrand Co., New York, N.Y. 696 po Plant physiology. MILLER, DONALD F. 1958. Composition of cereal grains and forages. Acad. Sci., Nat. Res. Counc. Pub. 585. 663 p. Nat. Lists for bitterbrush foliage the proximate composition fiber, ether extract, crude protein) in immature, flowering, stages, and gives information on mineral composition. (NFE, ash, and mature MILLER, Book Co. New York. Eo C. 1938. Plant physiology, 2d Ed. McGraw-Hill MOINAT, Ao Do 1956. Comparative yields of herbage from oak scrub and interspersed grassland in Colorado. Ecology 37(4):852-854. The study was conducted on Ft. Lewis range lands near Durango, Colo. Samples of herbage were clipped from 25 square-foot areas. Samples were from separate oak clumps and adjacent grass parks. Samples were air-dryed for dry weight determinations. The author concluded: "1. This study of a foothills scrub oak connnunity shows that the yields of herbage average twice as great from the open grass-weed parks between the oak clumps as from the clumps themselves. 2. The forage under the oaks is of fairly high quality being composed almost entirely of bluegrass, while in the parks there are more forbs and drought and sun tolerant grasses. With moderate to heavy grazing, there is a definite trend to the less palatable species while the Arizona fescue and mountain muhly decrease in number and vigor. 3. The results of this study suggest the desirability of further work with records of forage yields from land cleared of oak scrub and seeded to suitable range specieso" MORTON, Ao Do 1950 Yields and utilization of browse on winter ranges in Northern Idaho. MS thesis,Univ. of Idaho. 0 deer Serviceberry and willow (salix spp.) provided most of the available browse forage and received the greatest use. NEFF, D. J. 1963. The effects of clipping on the vigor of big game browse plants and related studies in the Arizona chaparral. PhD Thesis, Oreg. State Univ. 128 po "A five-year clipping experiment was conducted to determine maximum sustained utilization levels for 3 big game browse plant species in central Arizona. The three species were mountain-mahogany (Cerocarpus breviflorus) and de.sert ceanothus (Ceanothus greggii) in the chaparra 1 type, and cliffrose (Cowania mexicana var. stansburiana) in the pinyon-juniper type. Experimental treatments were removal of 0, 25, 50, 75 and 100 percent of current annual twig growth plus a more severe treatment involving removal of all twigs �- 144 larger than 4 rom in diameter. Treatments were applied each October to 10 replications. Data were green and oven-dry weight per plot, total number of current twigs per plot, and mean twig length. Other data obtained were monthly precipitation, weekly maximum-minimum temperatures, monthly twig elongation, and phenological observations. Soil moisture trends were traced by electrical resistance methods during 1961 and 1962. Soil samples were subjected to mechanical analyses and bulk density determinations. Soil moisture content at permanent wilting point and field capacity were estimated from field trend curves, from sample evaporation curves, and from pressure membrane tests at one-third and 15 atmospheres pressure. "The five-year duration of the experiment was not sufficient to establish a definite response to clipping. All species were stimulated initially by heavy clipping. This growth stimulation persisted throughout the study in cliff rose and, to a lesser extent, in mountain-mahogany. Ceanothus 4 mm plots were rapidly dying off at the close of the study and 100 percent plots were showing loss of vigor. It was tentatively concluded that 75 percent use was permissible for cliff rose and probably also for mountain-mahogany. Use on ceanothus probably should not exceed 50 percent. ~hroughout the study, production under moderate use was higher than under no use. "The chaparral site was located on deep granitic soils and was characterized by separate and independent spring and summer growth seasons. Annual browse production was correlated best with annual or summer rainfall. The pinyon-juniper site was located on a limestone out-crop, and growth was strongly dependent upon winter precipitation. After a good Winter, browse growth continued uninterrupted throughout the summer. The difference in growth regimes at the two sites appeared to be the result of highly efficient retention of moisture in the substrate. "Soil moisture depletion in the spring proceeded from the surface downward. The depletion curves were very steep, as would be expected in sandy loam soils. The range of available moisture was about 10 percent. "Spring browse growth began in late March when soil temperatures reached 0 45 to 500 F. Growth cessation occurred about October 1 and appeared to be the result of early frost. The maximum annual growth season ran about 190 days, but high soil moisture stress reduced this season drastically when either winter-spring or summer precipitation was inadequate. Soil moisture data were reported in terms of ohms resistance since calibration data were insufficient for conversion to percent moisture content." NORD, EAMOR Co 1959. Bitterbrush plants can be propagated from stem cuttings. Pacific S.W. For. and Range Exp. Sta., For. Res. Note 149. 4 p. "An experiment was conducted to learn if bitterbrush cuttings can be induced to take root. Cuttings were from 8-11 year old field-grown and l-2-year old greenhouse-grown antelope bitterbrush (P. tridentata). Greenhouse stock of desert bitterbrush glandulosa) was u;ed. Greenhouse plants were in full leaf, some were in flower. Field plants were dormant or had new leaves just starting. Sections of ripened hardwood 4-6 inches long were cut with heel of older wood. These were moistened with water and dipped in connnon rooting harmone preparation containing .1, .3, or .8 percent indol-3-butyric acid in (R. �- 145 talc. Cuttings planted l~ in. deep in flats. Rooting medium made up of equal volumes of sand, sponge rock, vermiculite with neutral reaction (pH 7.0). Fungicide mixed with soil to minimize root-rot diseases. Flats were set on electrically heated bottom units maintaining temperatures of 65-70 degrees F. Cuttings were sprinkled daily with water and given sunlight. '~ntelope bitterbrush rooted; desert bitterbrush did not. Best acid concentration was 0.1 percent. Greenhouse and field stock gave 51 and 66 percent successful rooting, respectively, at end of 58 days. Many cuttings had 2-3 inch roots at 58 days. Roots developed from callus and stems above callus. This shows roots may originate from both newly-formed meristem as well as from root primordia of pericycle. Roots that dominated when plants were 3 months old were all from above the callus. Satisfactory growth continued after .transplanting. " 1965. Autecology 35(3): 307-334. of bitterbrush in California. Ecology Monogr. "The physiological and biological factors associated with •••occurrence, distribution, and abundance of (Purshia tridentata) and (~. glandulosa) were identified. The effects of soil, fire, grazing, tree competition, primary and secondary succession, and other factors on natural stands and the characteristics of individual bitterbrush plants were described and evaluated." PATTON, Do Ro, and B. S. MC GINNES. 1964. Deer browse relative to age and intensity of timber harvesto J. Wildlo Mgmto 28(3):458-463. "The response of deer browse in a forest stand, as influenced by different cutting intensities and the age of cut was studied. Browse was clipped on four uncut and 45 cut areas five tenths acre in size in a mixed oak-pine type. The cuts were made from one to four years prior to this study and had 'from 22 percent to 78 percent of the basal area removed. A conversion factor was computed to convert basal area removed. Each.5 acre unit had four clip plots. The average of the four plots was converted to pounds per acre for the 49 units. Data from the cut units were subjected to a regression analysis using the number of years after cutting and the percent of basal area removed as variables. An R2 of .466 was accepted as significant, as was the total regression. The final estimating equation was log y = 1 011106 + .068343Xl + .013834X2• Using this equation a table was prepared for predicting browse from one to four years after cutting with 30 percent to 80 percent of the basal area removed." 0 PEARCE, J. 1937. The effect of deer browsing on certain western Adirondack forest types. Roosevelt Wildl. Bul. (College of For.,Syracuse, N.Y.) 61 p. This report is written from the forestry point of view, but there is much in it, especially as to preferred browse and degree of utilization, that is of value to the wildlife manager. PRESTON~ Ao p. 1966. Time and degree of pruning black currant. MaIling Reso StaG Annu. Repo 99-101. East "Two degrees of pruning, hard and light, were carried out at two times, immediately after harvesting the crop and during the wintero Twenty-two percent more fruit was yielded when lightly pruned. After one year, both hard pruning and summer pruning resulted in increased berry size." �- 146 PRICE, RAYMOND. 1939. The effects vigor of two important western Yale Univ. of fall clipping intensities on vield and browse plants. Unpublished MS Thesis" "The removal in the fall of all current growth of true mountain-mahogany and mountain snowberry is highly detrimental to the plants, causing a marked reduction in vigor reflected in abnormal growth, with a consequent reduction in their value as a watershed protective cover and as a source of feed for livestock and wildlife. "A system of fall harvesting that permits the leaving of 23;z inches of current twig growth of these plants, except where stocking is based upon the perpetuation of the more palatable herbaceous species, is impracticable, since not all possible forage is utilized and the plants tend to grow rank, with the result that much of the forage becomes unavailable. "The removal of all but an average of 1 inch of current twig growth represents a safe and practical degree of fall utilization for these species as they occur on oak-brush, aspen-fir, and spruce-fir ranges in central Utah and in similar regions." ROBERTS, EDWARD Co, JR. 1965. Precipitation influence on bitterbrush growth. Unpub. student research paper. Colo. State U. annual "Bitterbrush (Purshia tridentata) is a key browse species in determining Colorado winter range carrying capacity for big game. Bitterbrush plants in Roosevelt National Forest, northeastern Colorado, were studied for correlation between total annual precipitation and current annual growth. Plants were clipped at four intensities to measure current annual growth weight (CAGW) and a check plant was used for current annual growth length (CAGL) measurement. Precipitation was considered on the basis of a growth year, August to July. Yearly precipitation and yearly CAGL peaks and declines had a correlation factor of 0.68. Correlation factors between precipitation and CAGW peaks and declines varied with the clipped plant percentage from 0.54 to 0.61. AprilJune was the season of precipitation that determined high CAGL and CAGW. The month of May showed possibilities of being a key precipitation month for bitterbrush growth." ROBERTSON, J. H., and C. TORELLo 1958. Phenology as related to chemical composition of plants and to cattle gains on summer ranges in Nevada. Nevada Agr. Exp. Sta. Tech. Bull. 197. 38 po Bitterbrush is a good source of crude protein, NFE, and crude fat. SAVAGE, Eo F., R. Ao HAYDEN, and Wo Eo WARD. 1963. The effect of type and season of pruning on growth and yield of Dixigem peach trees. Georgia Agr. Exp. Sta. Bull. 109:5-18. The effects of pruning trees tended to be somewhat trunks and smaller volumes. in summer and winter were studied. Summer-pruned dwarfed, producing smaller trees with smaller �- 147 SHAFER, Eo Lo 1965. Deer browsing of hardwoods Forest Sero Research Paper NE-33. in the Northeast. U. S. 1965. Use of fecal cellulose to SHORT, HENRY r.,; and ELMER Eo REMMENGAo 18(3):139-144. estimate plant tissue eaten by deer. J. Range Mgmt. Mule deer were fed on browse diets that included bitterbrush, sagebrush, and mountain mahogany. Discusses relationships between digestible energy and the dry matter, cellulose, lignin, and hemicellulose content of the feed and presents prediction equations relating feed intake and fecal production. Suggests that forage consumption by deer can be predicted from fecal cellulose. SHORT, HENRY 11., DONALD a, DIETZ, and ELMER Eo REMMENGAo 1966. Selected nutrients in mule deer browse plants. Ecology 47(2):222-229. In bitterbrush, "the percentage dry matter and crude fat, and the caloric content varied from high autumn-winter levels to low spring-summer values; and beta carotene and percentage protein, ash, phosphorus, potassium, calcium, sodium, and magnesium levels varied from low autumn-winter values to high spring-summer va1ueso" SMITH~ ARTHUR D. 1952. Digestibility J Wildl. Mgmt 16(3): 309-312. 0 of some native forages for mule deer. 0 "Using standard digestion trials with penned mule deer, it appeared that curlleaf mahogany is better than bitterbrush, and juniper is poorest of the three from the standpoint of amount and character of digestible nutrients. Digestibility coefficients for alfalfa hay appeared to be equal for deer and sheepo" 1953. Consumption of native forage species during summer. J. Range Mgmto 6(1):30-37. by captive mule deer "Penned deer were fed various browse and forbs species, including bitterbrush, from May to October. Except in early May, browse was more important in the diet than forbs. Based on volume consumed, bitterbrush ranked low in the scale as compared with other browse plants." SMITH, ARTHUR Do, and RICHARD t., HUBBARDo 1954 Preference ratings for winter deer forages from northern Utah ranges based on browsing time and forage consumed. J. Range Mgmto 7(6):262-265. 0 "Captive deer were fed 15 browse species Bitterbrush ranked fourth and fifth, based on the time spent and forage consumed, respectively. Cercocarpus ledifolius X ~o montanus hybrid~ ~. ledifo1ius, and Cowania stansburiana ranked first, second, and third. Oak (g. utahensis) ranked fourth, based on forage eaten." o �SMITH, ARTHUR D., digestibility ROBERT B. TURNER, and GRANT A. HARRIS. of lignin by mule deer. J. Range Mgmt. 1956. The apparent 9(3):142-145. "Digestion coefficients were calculated by both the direct method and the lignin-ratio technique for several browse species, including bitterbrush. Because the two methods gave markedly different digestion values, it was concluded that the lignin-ratio technique is of doubtful reliability for the browse species tested." SMITH, ARTHUR D. 1957. Nutritive J. Range Mgmt. 10(4):162-164. value of some browse plants in winter. Digestible nutrients of several browse plants, including were compared with nutrients in some common livestock feeds. bitterbrush, SMITH, A. D. 1959. Adequacy of some important browse tering of mule deer. J. Range Mgmt. 12(1):8-13. species in overwin- Mule deer were fed prescribed osteosperma, and Quercus gambeli. tridentata, SPENCE, L. E. 1937. River watershed. diets of Artemisia Juniperus Root studies of important range plants of the Boise J. Forestry 35(8):747-754. Root systems of 50 species were excavated and charted. Four classes of root systems were recognized: (1) Fibrous; (2) Semifibrous; (3) Semitaproot; (4) Taproot. Communities typical of virgin range lands fill the surface soil with a dense mass of roots which effectively control erosion; while communities typical of depleted ranges, composed principally of taproot and semitaprooted species, have little soil binding power. The author concluded that the erosion problem of the area investigated was largely the result of the replacement of fibrous-rooted plants by those belonging to the taproot and semitaprooted class, and that effective rehabilitation can be attained by a reestablishment of the original grass species or similar fibrous-rooted plants. Amelanchier alnifolia was classed as a semitaprooted plant. A typical semi taproot system begins with a taproot which penetrates the soil from 50 to 80 cm before terminating in secondary leaders. In this branching zone, numerous leaders are developed which give rise to an extensive, though irregular, network of laterals spreading in all directions. STANTON, FRANK WEBSTER. 1959. Autecological studies of bitterbrush (Pur~ tridentata (Pursh) D. C.). PhD thesis, Ore. State College. 203p. "Typical thrifty stands of bitterbrush in each major plant community in central Oregon were sampled with a point frame. Plant composition, density and cover values were determined. Bitterbrush heights and crown diameters were sampled along a transect in each plot, the plants were collected and ages determined by ring counts on 647 plants. "Root growth observations disclosed that the taproot penetrated to 18 inches the first month and up to three feet before the summer drought period. �- 149 "Layering was frequently observed, but crown sprouting was rare. "Seeds remain viable for a period of years and have a pronounced internal dormancy. Seedlings are generally the result of rodent caches. Standard stratification treatment for eight weeks gave the best results for field planting. Significant differences were found in emergence of seeds from various sources. The mean germination of seeds from eight sources was 46 percent. Seeds, rather than fruits, should be planted. "Two-week-old seedlings appeared to survive soil surface temperatures of approximately 1500 F. applied for one hour. "Survival of 128 seedlings in twenty clusters planted by rodents in logged ponderosa pine areas in the Deschutes Forest was 27 percent after four years. "One-fourth of 1153 seedlings on an excellent nursery plot died within six weeks of emerging. Losses were attributed principally to rodents, rabbits, and cutworms. Average survival after the first season was 43 percent; after three years, 34 percent. Fall seeding produced superior results. Rodents and insects contributed substantially to early seedling mortality. Transplanted nursery-grown seedlings resulted in sixty percent survival after one season and this method is recommended rather than seeding on similar sites." STEWART, G., W. p. COTTAM, and S. S. HUTCHINGS. 1940. Influence of unrestricted grazing on northe~n salt desert plant associations in western Utah. J. Agr. Research 60(5):289-316. "Two adjacent areas are compared with respect to plant density, species, vigor, age, soil conditions. One area had been grazed for 70 years and severely -for 50 years. The other area, because less watered, was used heavily only when snow was available, except during the previous 20 years when water was developed. The study showed that instead of drought, unrestricted grazing was the chief cause of lpss of grazing values, invasion of inferior species, and the crowding out of the most palatable range plants. Among the brows~ -; .ic i e s present were big sagebrush, bitterbrush, black sagebrush, curlleaf ;,ount a i.nmahogany, horsebrush, serviceberry, shad sca Le , singleleaf pinon, small. rabbitbrush, spiny hop-sage, winterfat. "Root systems of big sagebrush and spiny hop-sage extended below 30 cm whereas roots of most forage species were largely limited to the upper 30 cm of soil where salt content rarely exceeds 1,000 pop.m. Black sage is preferred to big sagebrush by sheep. "About 28 percent of big sagebrush plants in heavily-grazed area were from 31 to 40 years old; in less heavily-grazed area 22 percent were in that age class. Maximum age of big sagebrush was 110 years; less than 5 percent of plants were this old." STODDART,_ L. A., and J. E. GREAVES. 1942. The composition plants in Utah. Utah Agr. Expo Stao Bull. 305. 22p. of summer range "Gives data on four-year collections of bitterbrush (June-September each year) from northern Utah ranges. Bitterbrush was consistently low in ash, Mg, and S both in early and late season collections, and in P and Ca in late season only. It was consistently high in crude fiber and in Ca:P ratio in early and late season, and in crude fat in late season only. Compared with grasses and forbs, bitterbrush was high in fat and nitrogen-free extract and showed much less seasonal variation in chemical composition." �- 150 - STODDART, LAURENCE A., and ARTHUR Co., New York. 433p. D. SMITH. 1955. Range Mgmt. McGraw-Hill A good textbook. The chapter entitled "Plant Physiology in Relation to Grazing'·! contains useful information indicated by the following topic headings: Food Synthesis of Plants, Factors Influencing Synthesis, Reproduction of Plants, Rhizomes, Other Methods of Reproduction, Root Habits of Plants, Size of Root System, Length of Root System, Roots as Soil Builders, Effect of Grazing upon Production of the Plant, Relationship of Life Form and Grazing Damage, Physiology of the Plant Influenced by Grazing, Relation of Season of Grazing to Food Synthesis, Quality of Forage as Affected by Clipping, Relation of Herbage Removal to Root Growth, Range Management Based on Physiology of the Plant, Effect of Grazing upon Reproduction of the Plant, Relation of Grazing to Seed Production, Influence of Grazing upon Vegetative Reproduction, Other Influences of Grazing upon Vegetation. STEINHOFF, HAROLD W. 1959. Some effects of clipping bitterbrush at different intensities. Trans. Annual Summer Conf. Cent. Mtns. and Plains Sect. Wildl. Soc. 4:23-24. "Five bitterbrush plants were clipped at intensities of zero, 25, 50, 75, and 100 percent from 1949 to 1959 near Pingree Park, Colo. "The 25 and 50-percent plants maintained better forage production than the check plant and maintained good to excellent vigor and seed production. "The 75-percent plant maintained good forage production but poor vigor and seed production. "The 100-percent plants died after three and six years .of clipping respectively, but showed considerable growth stimulation in the first two years of clipping. "Bitterbrush in this area produced current annual growth per pound." about 27,500 ± 2,500 centimeters of STOECKELER, J. H., R. O. STROTHMANN, and L. W. KREFTING. 1957. Effect of deer browsing on re"production in the northern hardwood-hemlock type in northeastern Wisconsin. J. Wildl~ Mgmt. 21(1):75-80. "Results of counts of natural reproduction in deer exclosures in northern hardwood-hemlock stands in north-eastern Wisconsin indicate that after five to eight years of protection against white-tailed deer (Odocoileus virginianus) there was abundant reproduction which had reached a height of 4.6 feet or larger inside the exclosures (average 6,002 per acre) while unfenced controls had fewer seedlings of that height (1,021). Average height of all seedlings present in exclosures was often double that of unprotected seedlings. Populations of 35 to 54 deer per square mile resulted in severe and repeated browsing and malformation of stems .of repr.oduction, and are a seri.ous hindrance t.o sustained-yield f.orest management. Rec.overy .of deer-br.owsed seedlings .occurred .only after a six to eight year period of protection from the deer." TAGUCHI, RYOHEI, and YOSHITSUGU NISHIMURA. 1956. Effect of the branch pruning at various stages .of gr.owth .of the mulberry trees upon their c.ontents .of water and reserve carbohydrates .of ro.ots in late autumn. Res. Repts. Fac. Textile and Sericult. Shinshu Univ. 6:1-3. �- 151 - "Two-year-old branches grown from the stumps of mulberry trees were pruned off in June, July, August, and Sept. and new shoots were regenerated thereafter. At the beginning of Oct., about a month before leaf fall, the roots were taken out and their water content and other properties were determined. The later the pruning time, the higher the water content of the roots and the electric conductivity of the watery extract of the tissue powder of the roots. Therefore, the later pruning during growing season seems to influence the root activity and solutes and water conduction in the roots so markedly that they cease later in autumn. The roots of the trees which had been pruned in Aug. and Sept. had less carbohydrate content than those which had been pruned in June and July. The result seems to show that the branch pruning at the season of intense solar radiation and high temperature retards the accumulation of reserve substances in underground parts until autumn." TAHA, Mo W. A. 1958. Effect of severity of pruning, on the nutrient-element content of concord grape leaf petioles, vine vigor, yield, and fruit quality. Ohio State Univ. PhD Thesis. TUFTS, WARREN P., and RICHARD W. HARRIS. Colo. Agr. Exp. Sta. Cir. 444. Pruning deciduous fruit trees. "Adventitious buds arise at an unusual point other than a leaf axil or the end of a shoot or spur. Such buds may arise on a root, trunk, branch, or shoot. "A latent or trace bud is one that grows only enough after its formation that its growing point remains at or near the surface of the plant. Practically all new growth arising from older branches and trunks of trees come from latent rather than from adventitious buds. "Spring growth is made at the expense of stored food of the previous summer and fall. Food storage becomes greater as the season advances until near leaf fall. "So;ne of the effects of top pruning are: (1) Food supply is decreased by reduction of leaf area. (2) More reserve foods are available to fewer growing points and fruits. (3) Decreased evaporation results in conservation of soil moisture, permitting small tree to survive longer under conditions where water is limited. (4) Root growth is decreased by reduction in energyproducing food manufacture. "Pruning effects on growth are: (1) Heavy cutting produces rank vegetative growth and reduction in fruiting. (2) In bearing trees, a lack of pruning, soil moisture, and nitrogen will result in scanty new wood growth and tendency toward over-production of fruit. If condition is continued, trees soon reach condition where little or no wood or fruit is produced. (3) Pruning that removes much of the old wood and permits a relatively greater nitrogen supply to remaining branches and buds greatly increased vegetativeness of these portions and often fruit production as well. (4) Heavy pruning reduces trunk and root development. (5) Summer pruning reduces leaf area at beginning of maximum food storage in vegetative parts. (6) The more lightly a tree is pruned, the greater the development of both top and root. (7) Cutting any branch or part heavily, lessens total growth in that branch or part. Pruning any part lightly increases the total growth in that part." �- 152 - VALLENTlNE, J. F. 1958-59. Effects of three intensities domestic livestock and deer under yearlong grazing. Oklahoma State Univ. WEAVER, J. E. grazing. tion. 1930. Underground plant development Ecology 11(3):543-557. of grazing by PhD thesis, in its relation to Overgrazing causes poor root growth, and permits little food accumulaThe plants are more likely to die of drought and cold. WEBB, W. L. 1957. Interpretation Mgmt. 21(1):101-103. of over-browsing in NE forests. J. Wildl. "A review of some recent studies on effects of white-tailed deer on forest vegetation by exclusion of animals and bJ simulated browsing. Browsing animals often do damage to forest vegetation, but not all heavy browsing can be interpreted as overbrowsing. In many forest types, and at some stages of forest rotation, heavy browsing is allowable and perhaps even desirable. Evaluation of effects of browsing on forest vegetation must depend on forest type, age of stand, species composition, stand density, and in some cases on the relative economic values of deer and timber." WYMAN, D. 1963. Practical Pruning ornamental shrubs and trees. Arnoldia 23(8):107-110. notes on when and how to prune by an experienced horticulturist YOUNG, VERNON A., and GENE F. PAYNE. 1948. Utilization of "key" browse species in relation to proper grazing practices in cutover western white pine lands in northern Idaho. J. Forestry 46(1):35-40. "By studying the effects of various degrees of removal of new stem growth in spring, midsummer and fall the writers determined the extent to which certain shrubs of northern Idaho might be utilized by sheep. They conclude .that both intensity and season of grazing significantly affect the composition of forage produced. "Results of browse utilization studies in the Clearwater region of northern Idaho established redstem ceanothus, serviceberry, Utah honeysuckle, and rose as the most preferred of the abundant browse species in cutover and burnedover·white pine ranges. It was found that these species varied greatly in both time and amount of growth. "Redstem ceanothus produced by far the most current growth and was the species most preferred by sheep. Although spring and fall clipping up to 7S percent intensity did not affect yields materially, clipping even as little as 50 percent of the new growth in the summer was highly detrimental. This latter fact undoubtedly accounts for the absence of redstem ceanothus on large areas in the Clearwater region that were too heavily grazed during the summers in the past. One hundred percent clipping intensity at: any season caused a significant reduction in current growth but was particularly harmful in the summer and fall periods. Although the reaction of redstem ceanothus to the 50 percent summer clipping is rather difficult to understand physiologically and merits more study, �- 153 - it is evident that areas having a dominance of this species should not be grazed until late summer or early fall. A proper-use factor of 60 percent is suggested for this species when grazed during these later periods. "The removal of 75 percent of the current growth of serviceberry, Utah honeysuckle, and rose during the spring or summer under the environment studied, is too severe for sustained yields. A proper-use factor of 60-65 percent should be applied to these three species for sheep grazing in the Clearwater areas. As would be expected, the plants of these spec Le s , when clipped '100 percent in the spring and summer seasons showed a consistent reduction in current growth as well as a high mortality over the seven-year period. The removal of 100 percent of the current growth in the fall season showed only a small reduction in total forage yield over a six-year period as compared with the production of check plants. "A rather common practice among livestock men using browse ranges in the Northwest has been to utilize the current growth of the more palatable browse species approximately 75 percent each year. It is evident, however, that the current growth of "key" browse species of the Clearwater region cannot be utilized more than 60-65 percent and maintain yields. Grazing these browse species more than 60-65 percent will result in their suppression and shrubs and herbs of low palatability will gain dominance." Approved by: Harold M. Swope Jack R. Grieb Prepared by: .-;¥~-«x? ~c~ Harold R. Shepherd Wildlife Researcher ��July, 1968 - 155 JOB PROGRESS RESEARCH REPORT PROJECT SEGMENT State of C~O~L~O~RA~D~O~ Project No. W~-~10~1~-~R~-~1~0~ _ .Came Range Investigations Work Plan No. ~l Job. No. 4 Title of Job: Paddock Studies on ~ffects Period Covered: April 1, 1967 to March Personnel: _ _ of Varying Intensities of Deer Use 31, 1968 William T. McKean, Richard M. Bartmann, John F. Corey, Julius J. Klein, Donald E. Speers, Harold R. Shepherd, Henry Eo Pedersen, Wallace Jobman, Michael Stone, Gordon East, Larry Green, Kenneth Dillinger, John Monarch, Lyle Bennett, and Richard Adams. Abstract Field work in the paddocks was completed during 1967, but stocking was continued one additionai year. Tabular summaries were made of each set of data, but no analyses were attempted due to the pressing need for completion of work pertaining to the Little Hills Grazing Study. Data collection for the stem length measurements, correlation of tagged stems vS the total bush, browse utilization estimates, and pellet group counts have been completed and the results included in the July, 1967, Game Research Report, Part One. o Forage production estimates indicate generally higher production of all vegetation classes in 1967 than in 1966, reflecting the more favorable growing conditions of 1967. The line intercept transects were reread from July 17 through August 10, 1967 Here again, results reflect the favorable growing conditions of 1967 as, with few exceptions, the density of browse, grass, and forbs increased in every paddock. Overstory density decreased slightly in all paddocks. Increases per paddock in the number of seedling and young browse plants ranged from 12 to 221 percent while, with two exceptions, there were fewer plants in the older age groups. Increases per paddock in the number of plants in hedging class 1 (little or no hedging) ranged from 22 to 141 percent, while decreases occurred 0 �- 156 in all other classes. Both of these situations suggest inconsistency tween observers is a major factor affecting the results. be- Qne condition and trend transect was read in each paddock in September, 1968. There is general disagreement in the trends in browse, litter, and bare ground percentages, in young and decadent browse age classes, and in the 1 and 2 (moderately hedged) browse hedging classes indicated by the condition and trend and line intercept transects. Paddock stocking was maintained as in previous years. Except which died in Paddock One, no difficulties were encountered. for one deer �- 157 Segment Objectives: (1) To determine changes in production and utilization browse by stem length measurement methods. of key species of (2) To determine the relative accuracy of using small samples (one to four branches) or the entire bush to estimate production and utilization, using stem length measurements. (3) To determine, by ocular estimate, herbaceous species. differences in forage production (4) To determine, by ocular estimate, browse species in the paddocks. differences in utilization (5) To relate defecation (6) To determine changes in vegetation composition, density, age and condition -class, the increase or decrease in number of plants and species, and changes in soil surface conditions as might result from various deer stocking rates. (7) To compile and tabulate (8) To maintain paddock stocking, as described in Segment Nine, until data from the paddocks have been analyzed and final conclusions drawn. of of all rates to stocking rates in each paddock. field data. Procedures: A detailed account of techniques was previously given by McKean (1964 and 1965). A brief summary of these is presented below. and Burdick Stem Length Measurements Ten bushes each of bitterbrush, mountain mahogany, and serviceberry were randomly selected in the center acre of each paddock. Each fall, all current annual growth stems were measured in millimeters to determine production. Stems remaining in the spring after stocking were remeasured to determine utilization. Correlation: Tagged Stems vs. Total Bush Four branches were tagged on each bush chosen for stem length measurements. Branches were located in the four cardinal directions whenever possible. Twenty-two stems, in two groups of ten and twelve, were marked with tags on each branch beginning with the outer-most twig. Production and utilization were determined separately for the tagged branches for comparison with the production and utilization on the entire bush. Forage Production Estimates Ten circular mil-acre plots were randomly located in the center acre of each paddock. Estimates were made of grass and weed production during late July or �- 158 or early Augusto Yields of grass and forbs were converted to pounds per acre, oven-dry weight. Browse production estimates were made in the fall after leaf-fall. These yields were expressed in pounds per acre, green weight. Browse Utilization Estimates Browse utilization estimates were made along paced transects which crisscrossed the center acre of every paddock, except the fenced control, in a predetermined pattern. The pace interval between points was randomly chosen. The percent utilization on the browse plant nearest the observer's toe, based on the vertical projection of stems and foliage, at each point was estimated. Pellet Group Counts Total counts of pellet groups were made each year in late April or early May following stocking. String was used to sub-divide each paddock into strips of convenient widths to enable more accurate counting. Every strip was counted tWice, once from each end. The total number of pellet groups in each paddock was divided by the total deer-days achieved to determine the daily defecation rate. The number of groups on the inside "study" acre and the remaining outside acre were kept separate to determine fence effect. Vegetation Inventory Line Intercept Transects--Sixteen 50-foot line intercept transects were randomly established in the center acre of each paddock. The transects were read during the first and fifth years of the study to determine changes in vegetative composition and ground cover densities due to treatmento In addition, a 1 x 50-foot plot was established alongside each transect. Information from these plots is intended to produce better data on browse age and hedging class changes, and reproduction by species. Condition and Trend Transects--One condition and trend transect was read, as per the Interagency big game range analysis procedures, on the central studyacre within each paddock in 1962. A second reading was made in 1967 to determine relative changes in browse composition, density, and vigor. Data Compilation All field data were compiled and tabulated Paddock in preparation for analysis. Stocking Paddock stocking was continued as in previous years except that no weight data or blood samples were collected. Each paddock was stocked as sufficient deer became available. �- 159 - " PADDOCK STUDIES ON EFFECTS OF VARYING INTENSITIES OF DEER USE Richard M. Bartmann Introduction Deer management in Colorado, and in many other states, is based on winter range condition and trend and on yearly browse utilization. Little is known, however, about the actual carrying capacities of these winter range areas or about how different degrees of deer use affect the range and the deer themselves. To obtain better information about this, a study was initiated at the Little Hills Experiment Station to learn how five intensities of deer use (10" 20" 30" 4,0, and 60 deer-days per acre) affect pinyon-juniper range and the health of the deer. One four-acre and five two-acre pens were constructed on deer winter range near the Station. Field work was begun in 1962 and, except for continued stocking of the paddock system, terminated in 1967. This, the sixth Job Progress Report on the study, reports progress made during the period April 1, 1967 through March 31, 1968. Previous reports were published 'in Game Research Reports of the Federal Aid Division of the Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department for the years 1962 through 1967. Findings j\ll field work for the paddock study was completed in 1967 except; for continuation of stocking. Tabular summaries were prepared for each set of data col1ect'ed,'out no attempts at analysis were made due to the pressing need for analysis and publication of results from the Little Hills Grazing Study (Work Plan 2, Job 1). Stem Length Measurements This job was completed as scheduled and the results were included 1967, Game Research Report, Part One. in the July, " Correlation: Tagged Stems vs. Total Bush The data for this correlation, now complete. obtained Forage Production from the stem length measurements, are Estimates Final forage production estimates, completed in 1967, are summarized in Tables 1 and 2. Production of all forage classes was equal to, or greater than, that which occurred the previous year, reflecting the more favorable growing conditions of 1967. �- 160 - Table 1. -- Estimated browse production (in pounds per acre, green weight) under different deer stocking rates in the paddocks at the Little Hills Experiment Station. 1967. Browse Deer-Days Per Acre Unfenced S ecies 60 40 30 20 10 o Control Cercocarpus montanus 6 29 6 17 Purshia tridentata 1 2 13 17 75 Ame1anchier utahensis 17 39 54 55 24 20 19 Syrophoricarpos tetonensis 10 15 18 27 18 23 Pinus edulis !/ 6 258 85 1 44 1 254 Juniperus utahensis 17 9 5 14 1 Artemisia tridentata 1 2 Berberis repens 3 3 6 27 18 5 Totals 126 326 - 159 129 161 49 316 1/ Includes all available needles and current annual growth below a sixfoot height. Table 2. -- Estimated forage production of browse (in pounds per acre, green weight), grass, and forbs (in pounds per acre, oven-dry weight) under different deer stocking rates in the paddocks at the Little Hills Experiment Station. 19670 I5eer-IiaysPer Acre Forage Unfenced Class 60 40 10 30 0 20 Control Browse 126 326 159 129 161 49 316 Grass }j 29 22 39 42 16 43 55 Forbs 1/ 37 59 44 21 19 23 19 ]j Annual grasses and forbs are excluded. Browse Utilization Estimates This job was completed as scheduled and the results were included in the July, 1967, Game Research Report, Part One. Pellet Group Counts This job was completed as scheduled and the results were included in the July, 1967, Game Research Report, Part One. Vegetation Inventory Line Intercept Transects--The 112 line intercept transects established and read in the paddocks in 1962 were reread in 1967 from July 17 through August 10. A summary of the results in presented in Table 3. �- 161 - These results, when compared to those for 1962, reflect the more favorable moisture conditions of 1967. With few exceptions, increases in all paddocks in the composition percentages for browse, grass, and forbs are counterbalanced by decreases in the percentages of litter and bare ground. The slight reduction in overstory density which occurred in every paddock may be real or due to bias in the "eyeballing" technique used to plumb aerial portions of trees above the line. Substantial increases in the number of seedling and young browse plants, mostly serviceberry and snowberry, on sample plots, ranged from 12 to 221 percent within the different paddocks. These two species comprised 56 and 36 percent, respectively, of all seedling and young browse plants counted. Both readily reproduce by vegetative means; serviceberry by root sprouting and snowberry by layering. That serviceberry is normally eaten by deer in winter while snowberry is barely touched, suggests these increases were largely influenced by factors other than treatment. One that appears prominent is inconsistency between observers in assigning age classes to individual plantso This error was apparently at the expense of all older age classes as the number of plants in each of them declined in almost every paddock. A similar situation is evident in the assignment of hedging classes. Increases in the number of plants per paddock in hedging class 1 (little or no hedging) ranged from 22 to 141 percent; while decreases in the number of plants in hedging class 2 (moderately hedged) and 3 (heavily hedged) ranged from 42 to 87 percent. A more detailed inspection of changes by paddock and species may provide better insight concerning the extent and possible effects of these and other problems. Condition and Trend Transects--One condition and trend 'transect was read in each paddock during early September. The results are summarized in Table 4. These results, when compared to those from the 1962 readings, indicate a decrease in the ground cover density of browse in all but one paddock, and general increases in the litter, bare ground, and grass and forb components. These trends are in general disagreement with those shown by the line transects except for grass and forbs. Similar disagreement in,trends indicated by the two methods occurs in the young and decadent browse age classes and in the 1 and 2 hedging classes. Both methods indicated a reduction in overstory density. Stocking Stocking of the paddock system was maintained as in previous years. Entry dates ranged from January 10 to 20, 1968, and removal dates from Januar.y 30 to February 9, 1968. One deer died in Paddock One (60 deer-days per acre) on January 26, four days prior to the scheduled removal date. About 15 inches of snow, with some drifts up to 30 inches deep, were present during the entire stocking period. A crust formed about mid-January which made much forage unavailable to the deer. �Table 3.--Surnmary of data from 16 line intercept transects and 16 1 x 50-foot browse plots in each of seven paddocks stocked with deer at different rates at the Little Hills Experiment Station, 1967. Ground Cover, Age and . Deet-Days pe~'?Acre .: ,,' Unfenced Hedgtng Class, etc. 60 ~ 40 30':<'~ ::20 ::;-10:' o Control Ground cover-(%} .)./", , ',' , Browse:" ..; .7'" 19.26+":24 .•72+'.. 25'~1()+':. ':' '24.62+" 28~9,.2+~:~. 31.64+ 24.80+ Gras's~' .. " 1. 38+,:' 0;44+'" C34+:: ," 0.94+ Oi48+' 1.36+ 1.14Forbs 5.96+ .'; 5~04+ 3.66;:', 2.98+ . 4'~18+ 3.62+ 2.78+ Litter, 62.1654.14-~ 51.66.....' .55.0447.9450.1852.20+ Moss· '. 0.48~ '0.16-.. 0.38-·'·: 0.36:" 0.36*, 1.120.56Bare ground , 10.7615.5017.8616.06~ 18.1212.0818.52Overstory 30.0228~68-: 27.34-, 26.0817~ 8225.1223.62. Browse (No. of plants) Age class Seedling Young Mature Decadent Dead. . 74149+ 2579563- 86+ 177+. 256..• 10471-" 7 ' . 57+ 282+ 381155125- 135+ 266+ 309174+ 114- " ., 138+ 284+ 304164:" 98- ' ~ Hedging class 1 2 ~ 103+ 325+ 452209~ 152. •... 99+ 188+ 238167+ 113- I\) '. I 258+ 16578- 270+ ' 17196- 450+ 267~ 101- , .'- SeedLing origin $eed.' Vegeta t ive .: ~-: '-""- 6;'" ,.,':;' -~. .•... 80+, 1163+ ,~; . - ,.~ ~ ,~ 582+ 33371- 303+ 22763- 2i, :101+ 1+ 98+ 8. :: '1<; 2 0 .. '" .,,0, 0 change ,from th~: 1962 'value. . "", "'. 1 0 . .. ,: ,. 8+' 2-' u :', 55t :.:.. '" ~' 1':27+, ., 435+ 273~ 44__ ~. '0 '. . 436+ 250-.' 63- ., \.: - '~1~:'C ~U7+ '.... ..- , ! .. ~. Grpg~( ~f true sd l g, 2/·) Single . Cl,tl§ter .:. ;'.. 1/ A.+~':or - sign ~following ')":;iridtcates no' change. ", 4 .t , .: 10, 2,:. "', 0::' ..' ,.: 0,: ;~.'.', each figure il,1di,cat:e;s thed:i;rectionof .==&1,=-=..1.£ __ ",__ 1/ Dati f-' . 0\ wi . r- ::, are noe' comparable to those from':1962as only true seedlings~we,re cons['dered:a~' grouped occurrence in 1967; whereas in 1962; all types of seedlings were included. to single or �Table 4.--Summary of data from one condition and trend transect in each of seven paddocks stocked with deer at different rates at the Little Hills Experiment Station, 1967. Ground Cover, Age and Deer-Days per Acre Unfenced Hedging Class, etc. 60 40 30 20 10 0 Control Ground cover (%) 1/ 12.416.4Browse 19.116.715.519.315.61.22.9+ Grass and forbs 4.0+ 2.1+ 2.9+ 0.02.4+ 29.2+ 36.3+ Litter 33.029.8+ 27.8+ 38.2+ 29 7+ 28.0+ 14.7+ Bare ground 19.0+ 21.3+ 27.8+ 21.8+ 27.3+ 28.025.0Overstory 25.030.025.025.025.00 Browse (No. of plants) 1/ Age Class Young Mature Decadent Hedging class 1 2 3 f-J 132422- 15+ 1926- 172116+ 14~ 21+ 10- 1629+ 15+ 1218+ 30- 1527+ 12+ 2016+ 9- 1934+ 26+ 101716+ 17* 1513- 3829+ 12+ 830+ 5- 1717+ 11- LOwMed.')'( High* High')'( LowMed.* High+ High+ Condition ratings High+ LowMed.* Medo~'< Med.Browse composition Med.~'< He d,~'< Med. ')'( Med.* Med.* Browse density High* High+ High~\' Med.+ Med. Browse vigor High+ High+ High* _ High* High* Soil 17 A + or - sign following eac * indicates no change. 11 Includes only key species; serviceberry, mountain mahogany, and bitterbrush. 0\ W �- 164 Litera ture Cited McKean, W.T., and H. Eo Burdicko 1964. Paddock studies on effects of varying intensities of deer use. Pages 27-45. In Game Research Report, P-R Project W-101-R, January, Colo. Game, Fish and Parks Dept., Denver, 121 pp. (processed). 1965. Paddock studies on effects of varying intensities of deer use. Pages 147-166. In Game Research Report, P-R Project W-101-R, July, Part Two, Colo. Game, Fish and Parks Dept., Denver, pp. 127-249 (processed)o Approved by: Harold M. Swope Jack R. Grieb Prepared by: _ Richard M. Bartmann Assistant Res~archer �July, 1968 == 165 - JOB PROGRESS RESFARCH REPORT PROJECT SEGMENT COLORADO "---------------------------- State of Game Range W_-.;.;,1..;.O..;.1_-R_-_1;;;;..O~ _ Pro ject No • Work Plan No. 2 _ Title of Job: Little Hills Grazing Period April Covered: Personnel: Job No. Investigations ~l _ Study 1, 1967 to March 31, 1968 Wil1iamT. McKean, Richard M. Bartmann, John F • Corey, Julius J. Klein, Donald E.Speers, Nelson Cain,Harold R. Shepherd, Henry Pedersen, Bert Baker, Roland Kufeld, Wallace Jobman, Marvin Spaid, Kenneth Dillinger, Michael Stone, Gordon East, Larry Green, John Monarch, Lyle Bennett, Richard Adams, David Gordon, Glen Bishop, Wayne Jewell, Melvin Rose, and White River Honor Camp Inmates. Abstract Pasture stocking with cattle and sheep was accomplished nearly without incident. One ewe was killed" the first night in Pasture Nine during the fall. Deer stocking was completed January 8, 1968 Deer removals have been started but are not complete. 0 During spring, cattle lost weight in the moderately stocked Pasture Eight, while gains were made in all other pastures by both cattle and sheep. In the fall, weight gains were recorded for sheep at moderate stocking levels and for cattle only in the moderately stocked Pasture Eight. Stocking records for cattle and sheep were recalculated on an Animal-Unit basis. Deer records were refigured on a deer-unit basiso Pictures were taken of stocking pastures. operations and vegetational features in the The 14 different soil types with their many sub-divisions were combined to form six major types for data stratification purposes However, none were found suitable for stratification. Either measurement sites could not be relocated in the field or samples within anyone type were too few or lacking, for meaningful analysis. o �- 166 Segment Objectives: (1) To maintain the pasture stocking, as described in Segment Nine, until data from the pastures have been analyzed and final conclusions drawn. (2) To obtain pictures inadequate. (3) To continue analysis to supplement those previously and interpretation obtained and found of data. Procedures: Pasture Stocking The series of nine pastures were stocked and maintained as described in the July, 1959, Quarterly Report and as modified during the seventh segment of Project W-lOl-R when stocking rates in all heavy-use pastures were reduced to one-half their original rateo Weights of cattle and sheep were taken before and after stocking in each pasture by means of a combination squeeze-chute and scale. All stock were "shrunk" overnight before weighing to reduce the effects of fillo The rate of gain or loss per stock-day and per acre were calculated. Photographs Photos were taken of pasture future publications. stocking and vegetational Data Analysis features for use in and Interpretation The soil types originally described in the pastures were combined to form fewer catagories for data stratification purposes. Each set of data was then checked to determine the feasibility of such a procedure. �- 167 - LITTLE HILLS GRAZJNG STUDY Richard M. Bartmann Introduction Livestock and mule deer compete for food to varying degrees on big game winter ranges in Colorado. One of the typical areas where this situation exists is in northwestern Colorado on the Piceance drainage of the White River in the pinyon-juniper vegetation type. The Little Hills Grazing Study was designed to determine the nature and extent of such competition and to measure the effects upon this range type of various intensities of grazing and browsing. Now completing its nineteenth year, the study currently entails analysis of accumulated data, but continues the stocking of all pastures with deer, sheep, and cattle at the scheduled rates. Previous reports were published in Quarterly Reports and Game Research Reports of the Federal Aid Division of the Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department for the years 1949 through 1966. Findings Pasture Stocking Cattle and Sheep--Twelve two-year old heifers were used for stocking the cattle pastures during both spring and fall (Table 1). Sheep pastures were stocked with 35 yearling ewes Ln the spring. In the fall, 43 adult ewes were obtained to make up the deficient Animal Unit Months that resulted in the spring from the use of yearling animals. One ewe died from unknown causes during the first night in Pasture Nine in the fall. The owner was reimbursed. No other difficulties were encountered. Deer--Eighty-seven deer were trapped and stocked from October 31, 1967, to January 8, 1968. Deer removal operations were started in Pastures Five and Seven on March 13 and 14, 1968 Several deer still remain in each of these. Removals in the other pastures are scheduled in April, 1968. Twenty copies of a paper on trapping deer will be submitted. 0 Livestock Weight Responses--Domestic livestock were weighed into and out of each pasture during both the spring and fall grazing periods. Again, as in past years, problems arose. Despite good forage production in 1967, cattle in the moderately grazed Pasture Eight lost weight during spring, while during the same season, weight gains occurred in the other two cattle pastures and in all sheep pastures (Table 2). We suspect the cattle had trouble locating the water provided by a rain catchment device, as has happened in past years. However, malfunctioning scales, a constant problem in the past, could also be partly responsible. �- 168 In the fall, sheep lost weight under heavy stocking and gained at the moderate levels. Cattle gained weight only in the moderately stocked Pasture Eight where the weight loss occurred the previous spring. Stocking Records--The stocking records for cattle and sheep were recalculated on an Animal-Unit basis (Figs. 1, 2, 3, and 4). Animal eqUivalents for cattle and sheep are those recommended by the Department of Animal Husbandry at Colorado State University in a letter dated July 13, 1959 Similar equivalents for deer are unavailable. Deer stocking records, however, were refigured with two fawns equal to one deer-unit. All other sex and age classes were considered as equal to one deer-unit. 0 Pictures Photos of pasture stocking operations the pastures were taken as scheduled. shown in Figs. 5, 6, 7, and 8. Data Analysis and general vegetational features in Several examples of the latter are and Interpretation The 14 soil types with their many sub-divisions originally identified in the pastures were considered two numerous for data stratification purposes. With the assistance of Mro J. L. Nielsen, Soil Scientist, SCS, Glenwood Springs, Colorado, and Mr. T. Baber, Soil Scientist, SCS, Meeker, Colorado, these types were reduced to six major categories (Table 3). Stratification of existing pasture data by soil type was not feasible. Either the original measurement sites could not be relocated in the field, or samples within anyone soil type were too sm~ll or lacking. Also, the major soil classifications occurring in some pastures were either absent or present in relatively small amounts in other pastures, thus preventing inter-pasture comparisons. The soil survey should prove valuable when future studies are designed in the pastures. �Table 1.--Record of sheep and cattle stocking in the experimental pastures at the Little Hills Experiment Station, 1967. Past. Spring 1/ Fall Season No. of No. Species Stocked Removed Stocked Removed Acres of Use Anim. ADM 1/ 2.1 35 Spring 76 37 11-10 10-31 5-9 4-28 Sheep 1 2.8 42 Fall 4.9 Total . } Acres/ ADM 0 2 Cattle 5-27 6-6 9-29 166.25 10-9 Spring Fall 12 12 Total 3 Cattle 5-16 5-26 10-24 161.81 11-3 Spring Fall 12 12 Total 5 8 Sheep Cattle 5-10 5-2 5-22 5-15 11-11 10-10 85 42 11-22 0 205 43 10-23 0 Spring Fall Total 35 42 Spring Fall Total 12 12 15.6 4.0 4.0 8.0 20.8 4.0 4.0 8.0 20.2 2.3 3.1 5.4 15.8 I-' 5.2 .2.d. 10.4 19.8 Spring 35 4.4 Fall 42 ~ Total 10 3 15 1 1/ Yearling ewes were used for spring sheep stocking. Deficient ADM's were made up during fall stocking. 1/ Animal Unit equivalents for sheep and cattle are based on information obtained from the Department of Animal Husbandry at Colorado State University in 1959 9 Sheep 5-23 5-14 10-9 155.55 10-30 0 0\ <o �- 170 - Table 2.--Sunnnary of seasonal weight responses by sheep and cattle under different stocking rates in the experimental pastures at the Little Hills EX2eriment Station2 1967. Pounds Gained or Lost Total per Stocking StockTotal Stockper S2ecies Season Rate Dals Acres Total Acre Dal Sheep Spring Heavy 385 76 37 + 25 +0.1 +0 3 Moderate 420 85.42 +354 +0.4 +2.3 Mod.w/deer 788 155 55 +190 +0.5 +2.2 0 0 0 Fall Cattle Spring Fall Heavy Moderate Mod.w/deer 420 462 882 76.37 85 42 155.55 -218 +105 +190 -0 5 +0.1 +0 4 0 -2.9 +0.7 +2.2 Heavy Moderate Mod.w/deer 120 120 156 166 25 161.81 205 43 0 +130 -235 +475 +1.1 -105 +4.0 +0.8 -1.1 +2.9 Heavy Moderate Mod.w/deer 120 120 156 166.25 161 81 205 43 - 45 +215 -120 -0.4 +1.4 -1.0 -0.3 +1.0 -0.7 0 0 0 0 0 Table 3.--Six major soil categories designated for the Little Hills experimental pastures Soil Category Soil TyPes Tncluded I 1-D, 1-E, 4-E, 12-E, RG II 2-E, 2-F, 5-E, X5-E, 9-E, 9-F, X9-F, 13-E, 13-F, X13-E, X13-F, X13-G, 17-G III 5-D, 6-D, 12-D IV 6-E, X6-D, X6-E, 7-D V VI 6-F, X6-F 7-E, 7-F, 7-G, 8-F, 8-G, 16-E, 16-F, 16-G, RL �- 171 - Past.ur-e Tl,W Ppsture l.'hree Pasture Ei,::;ht Desired Stocking Level ..c +l s::: 0 ~~ 25 .p .r! s::: --'""""' 20 rl C\) S s::: .r! 15 CJ; ~, 10 Q) o, 5 (I) (j) ::.. 0 <i; 19L1-9 52 56 Ye8.r Fig. 1. Cow t i.ng history in the Little fIills experimental Stocking rate in Pss tur-e T\.JO l.-J!'IS reduced by one-sha Lf in 19611-0 s 1949-67. ock pn . ..c ...., s::: . ~? ... +l ----- \ --------- . ,. s t.ur-e s , Pasture One Pa.sture Five P;:;stureVine Desired Stocking Level \ \ 25 \ \ \ .r! s::: P 20 rl CL S s::: .r! 15 <i; ::.. Q) p., 10 I/} Q) ~ 0 -< 5 191.J-9 60 52 67 Year Fig. 2. 1949-67. 3heep stocking history in the Little iIills exoeriment21 pastures, Stocking r!1te in Pasture One w,.,sreduced by one-h.!llfin 196h. �- 172 - , 7 . 6 ...c: ~s.:: 0 , ;:;;:; f..., OJ (j) I I \ I I \ \ (j) 0., ,, , , I I \ .. .. \ I I 4 \ \ \ . \ \ \ \ I I \ I I I I I 3 \ I I ~ f..., " 1\ I 5 P~sture Three P;:>stureFive Pnsture Six Desired ;:itockin.:; Level No Stocking .: \ I en (j) s, 2 0 3ft 5" \ \ ~~ \ <:: 1 1952-53 60-61 56-57 66-67 ;:Jinter Fig. 3. Deer stocking history in the moderately stocked Little Hills exp8riment~1 p~stures, 1952-53 throu~h 1966-67. 6 5 Ppsture Four Pesture Seven Desired Stocking Level --.Jty-- No Stocking \ \ \ \ \......... ...-..... ..A...-- ...."..,'--v 3 -, -"" ~ ~ __-- ,,/ 'wi' 2 1 1952-53 "\I}'inter Fig. 4. Deer .stocking history in the hepvy 2nd libht stocked Little [fills experimental pastures, 1952-53 Vlrou:;h 19(:/,-67. Stockine; rate in Pas t.ur-e Four was reduced by one -he Lf beginning in ','Tinter, 1963-61~. �- 173 - Fig. 5. The effect of trampling by cattle on the steep north-facing hillside, to the left of the fence (arrow), is obvious after i) years of heavy use. A heavy sheep grazing treatment has been applied to the area on the right for the same number of years. Fig. 6. In Pasture Eight, no differences are evident in the vegetal aspect of the area grazed moderately by cattlso on the left, and the area protected from grazing for nine years, on the right. �- 174 - Fig. 7. Thirteen years of heavy deer use, to the left of the fence (arrow), has failed to prodUce any gross changes in the vegetational aspect on this westerly exposure. Open range is to the right. Fig. 8. No vegetational differences are evident between Pasture Six, moderate deer use, on the right, and an area protected from deer since 1956, on the left. �- 175 Demonstrations and Publications The various groups to which presentations Hills are as follows: were made concerning Representatives of the UoS. Forest Service and Department eries, Zambia -- 2 peopleo work at Little of Game and Fish- Advisory Board members and staff of BLM and staff of the Colorado and Parks Department -- 30 people. Colorado State University 3D people. wildlife management seniors and instructors Meeker Elementary 53 peopleo and Junior High School summer students Debeque Colorado, and Rifle, Colorado State Legislative Fish and Parks Department, County Agents 4-H Club members Sub-Committee, and Department from northwestern Private individuals General public attending Colorado from Fort Collins, Game, Fish -- and instructors -- and leaders -- 22 people. investigating staff members the Colorado Game, -- 11 people. -- 6 people. Colorado office dedication -- 2 people. ceremonies -- 75 people. In addition, 58 groups, totaling 170 individuals, made inquiries Little Hills headquarters during the 1967 big game season. at the Citations personnel by Station for publications are as follows: and other written Bartmann, R. Mo 1968 Playing Outdoors 17(1):20-22 0 materials prepared tag with the White River deer herd. Colorado 0 McKean, W. T. 1967. Letter to the editor (rebuttal to article critical of Little Hills Experiment Station by Si Berthelson, local rancher). Meeker Herald, Meeker, Coloradoo April 6 0 7??, /~~4'/ Approved by: Harold M. Swope Jack R. Grieb Prepared by: HichLlrd M.l3artmann Assistant Researcher ��- 177 JOB PROGRESS RESFARCH REPORT PROJECT SEGMENT State of. C_O_LO~RA~DO~ Pr 0 j e ct N 0 ., Game Range Investigations W_-..:l;.;:O..:l:...-~R:...-..:l;.;:O _ Work Plan No. _ ~2 _ Title of Job: Little Hills Grazing Period Covered: Personnel: April Job No. la Study, Publication 1, 1967 to March of Results 31, 1968 Richard M. Bartmann, William T. McKean, Wayne W. Sandfort, Laurence E. Riordan, Dave Bowden. Harold R. Shepherd, Jack R. Grieb, and Abstract All data collected under Work Plan 2, Job 1, were thoroughly reviewed and analyses begun in preparation for publication. Seven types of data were identified: stem length measurements, line intercept transects, forage utilization estimates, meter quadrat chartings, deer rumen content analyses, livestock weight responses, and plant vigor measurements. The line intercept transects previously established in the pastures and exclosures will be reread in 1968 Forage utilization data collected prior to 1956 have been lost. Further problems were encountered with most other sets of data in that the results do not always substantiate each other and do not always appear related to treatment. 0 �- 178 Segment Objectives: To implement the production of a number of technical, semi-technical, and popular types of publications concerning results of the work done under Work Plan 2, Job 1, and to follow through to publication on a portion of these. �- 179 - PUBLICATION OF RESULTS OF LITTLE HILLS GRAZING STUDY Richard M. Bartmann All data collected for the Little Hills Grazing Study were thoroughly reviewed and analyses begun in preparation for publication. Seven types of data were identified: stem length measurements, line intercept transects, forage utilization estimates, meter quadrat chartings, deer rumen content analyses, livestock weight responses, and plant vigor measurements. Various problems arose in the analysis of most sets of data. The majority of these stennned from gross inadequacies in sampling procedures. It is anticipated that the entire grazing study will be combined into one publication, probably in the Department's Technical Publication series. The stem length measurement data collected prior to 1952-53 did not warrant analysis due to general inadequacies in sampling procedures. The 1952-53 data were highly questionable in this respect, but these and all subsequent measurements will be analyzed by Dr. Dave Bowden, Statistician, at the CSU Computer Center. The line intercept transects in the pastures have been measured twice. The original reading was done in 1957 and 1958 and the second in 1962 and 1963. Due to numerous variations in procedures, the results from the two readings are not entirely comparable. Transects were also established and read in each pasture exclosure in 1961. Procedures for browse measurements and browse plant counts on plots are mostly comparable to those for 1957-58. Procedures for overstory measurement vary slightly but probably not significantly. The practicality of rereading all transects was thoroughly discussed with project and other personnel. Since the line transects are the only source of information on vegetative composition changes in the pastures, and two readings are necessary to obtain this information, it was decided to reread all transects in the pastures and exclosures during the sunnner of 1968. Field data from forage utilization estimates made prior to 1956 have been lost, but each year's results are summarized in previous Federal Aid Reports. These sunnnaries, however, do not include enough information for more detailed analyses than have already been made. It was therefore decided that the forage preference chart compiled by Riordan and Campbell (1956) covering the period 1948-55 would have to suffice for this study phase. A second chart was compiled by McKean covering the period 1958-62. �- 180 Forage utilization estimate data collected from 1960 to 1965 have been sunnnarized as have data for meter quadrat chartings, deer rumen content analyses, livestock weight responses, and plant vigor measurements. Results from all of these do not entirely support one ano t lie r , nor do they appear completely related to treatment. Further analyses will be made before final conclusions are rea ched , A review of literature pertaining to deer-domestic livestock relationships has been started. Additional review will be done during Segment 11. Literature Riordan, L.E., and R. L. Campbell. Outdoors 5(2):1-6. Approved by: Harold Jack M. Swope R. Grieb Cited 1956 0 Prepared Harmony on the range. Colorado by: R=-:-i-c"h-a-r~·d;--;M-'-. -,Bar;--r't-m-a-n-n----ABsistant Researcher �July, lC)()S - 181 - JOB PROGRESS RESEARCH State of. Project ~C~O~L~O~RA_D_O~· No. W-lOl-R-lO Work Plan No. ~2~ Title of Job: Rodent Period Covered: Personnel: April Harold REPORT PROJECT SEGMENT _ Game Range _ Effects Job No. on Deer Winter 1, 1967 through R. Shepherd Investigations March and Student 3 _ Range 31, 1968 Assistant Dennison H. Parker. Abstract Sto~ch contents of 125 deer mice (Peromyscus ~niculatus rufinus) and 74 pinyon mice (Peromyscus truei truei) trapped in Mesa Verde National Park, Colorado, were examined microscopically to determine food habits. Seasonal variation in the proportions of plant and insect material eaten was pronounced. When available, insects were preferred by deer mice, and in spring and summer they provided nearly half the food of pinyon mice, also. But in winter, plants, mostly juniper berries, comprised the bulk of the diet of both kinds of mice. No significant use of deer browse plants was made by either species of mice, and because they consume so many juniper berries and tent-caterpillar larvae, their overall effect on a pinyon-juniper deer range may be beneficial. �- 182 Objectives: The long-term, over-all objective is to study how deer mice (Peromyscus maniculatus rufinus) and pinyon mice (Peromyscus truei truei) affect the composition, ground cover, and reproduction of vegetation in a pinyon,juniper type deer range, with particular emphasis on browse plants. The objectives 1. 2. for the period covered by this report are as follows: (a) To prepare miscrocope slides from deer mouse and pinyon mouse stomach materials collected during the summer of 1964. (b) To identify food items in each slide and estimate the percent each is of the whole for all slides prepared during this and previous segments. (a) To compile (b) To complete the compilation, summarization, analysis of food habits and census data. food-habits data by species, season, and age-class. and statistical Procedures: Preparation of Miscroscope Slides from Stomach Contents.--Stomachs were removed from mice shortly after capture, tagged with pertinent data, and preserved in a formaldehyde-alcohol-acetic acid solution. Later, stomach contents were removed and placed on silk bolting cloth stretched loosely and secured with a rubber band over the open end of a coffee can. Holes were punched in the side and bottom of the can to permit wash water to escape. A small stream of water from a faucet was permitted to flow over the stomach contents, through the bolting cloth, and finally through the holes in the can, until stomach juices and preservatives had been removed from stomach contents. When thoroughly washed, stomach contents were placed on small (2 X 2-inch) square's of paper and dried in a drying oven. When dry, stomach contents were placed in paper envelopes on which pertinent data had been recorded, and they were stored until they could be mounted on microscope slides. Preparation of Reference Materials.--Plant and insect materials from nearly all species found in or near the study area were mounted on miscrocope slides. Most species were available both from a collection of dry-mounted specimens and from a collection preserved in formalin solution. Small pieces of vegetative and reproductive plant parts were macerated with needle and forceps to simulate the rodent mastication process. The dried plant material was easier to prepare in this manner than was the formalinpreserved material, and it produced mounts of equal quality. After the plant material was macerated directly on the miscrocope slide, a few drops of Hertwig's clearing solution were added and the slide was placed on a hotplate for boiling. (An alcohol flame is more commonly used for clearing, but a hotplate was found to produce more uniform clearing. It also eliminated slide breakage often caused by too rapid heating over a flame. To avoid scorching the material, care must be taken to heat the slide no more than is required to boil off the clearing solution). �- 183 After clearing, a few drops of Hoyer's mounting medium were placed on the slide and the cover glass was applied. The amount of Hoyer's medium used varied with the volume of material being mounted. Too much is better than too little, because drying causes contraction, and bubbles form if not enough me d Lum is applied. The slides were dried in an oven at 410 to 430 C. for at least 48 honrs before they were handled. Although the Hoyer's mounting medium does not completely harden, it can be oven-dried satisfactorily for examination in a period of 6 weeks to 2 months. Drying was hastened somewhat by increasing the oven temperature. but above 500 C., bubbles tended to form in the medium. If slides were stored a long time, it was found necessary to stack them in a horizontal position to prevent running of the medium. This procedure was used for mounting all reference materials, both plant and insect, and for mounti.ng the rodent stomach contents. Identifying Stomach Contents.--Characteristic portions of each plant and insect usually remained intact and identifiable. In most cases, the hairs from leaves, stems, and fruits were most easily recognizable. Although the size of the hairs was not a reliable criterion, general configuration, varying little between individuals of the same species, {vas useful. Color was an unreliable plant identification feature. But it was the single most important characteristic for identifying insect parts. When present, seedcoats were a very good means of identification. To become familiar with the 166 plant and 52 insect reference slides, drawings were made to show characteristics useful in identifying each species. To help match unknown stomach contents with reference materials, 35 nrrn Kodachrome color transparencies were made of each reference sample (Figs. 1 ,and 2). The photographs were categorized according to similarities and viewed with an automatic slide projector to permit rapid comparisons of known reference materials with unknown food items on microscope slides. All examination and phot ogra phy was done at 35 power through a compound microscope. To facilitate relocation of individual particles on slides, horizontal and vertical scales of 10 equal units each were set up on the misroscope stage. With these scales" "latitude and longitude" coordinates were easy to note and record OIl me}' 13rticle on a slide. Each slide of rodent stomach contents were examined three times, twice for general content and once for the presence of particular browse species. ��- 185 - RODENT EFFECTS ON DEER WINTER RANGE Harold R. Shepherd Introduction Many winter deer ranges in Colorado are deteriorating. They are often marked by the die-off of woody shrubs and by a scarcity of seedling shrubs. Game biologists have become accustomed to blaming this condition on overuse by big game and livestock. However, there is reason to suspect rodents may be partially responsible, for rodent-damaged browse plants have been found in some areas. It is suspected that rodents may be largely responsible for the scarcity of bitterbrush and mountain mahogany seedlings on some ranges. In any sound program of game-range management, all of the factors contributing to range use and deterioration should be taken into consideration, including the effects of rodents. A study was needed to learn how rodents affect deer winter range. Such a study was begun in August of 1956 in Mesa Verde National Park. Field work was terminated in September of 1964. This is the twelfth Job Completion Report on the study. It reports the progress made during the period April 1, 1957 through March 31, 1968 toward accomplishment of the long-term objectives of the study. Previous reports were published in Game Research Report:s of the Federal Aic Division of the Colorado Department of Game, Fish and Parks for the years 1957 through 1967. Results Seasonal Variation in Diet.--The diets of deer mice (Peromyscus manicu1atus rufinus) and pinyon mice (Peromyscus truei truei) varied drastically from summer to winter. During spring and summer, insects made up an important part (39 to 62 percent) of the diet of both kinds of mice. But during the fall and winter months, plants comprised the bulk of their food (Fig. 3 and Tables 1 and 2)0 Importance of Insects in Diet.--When insects were abundant in spring and summer, deer mice preferred them to plants. Then their diet was comprised of 61.9 percent insects. Insects were of less importance in the spring and summer fare of pinyon mice, comprising only 39 percent of the total. The data suggest that insects may comprise a slightly larger proportion the adult than of the juvenile diet for both kinds of mice. of Not all of the insect items found in stomachs have been classified; however, it has been possible to identify six major groups of insects (Table 3). In the stomachs of deer mice and pinyon mice, ants and crickets appeared most frequently, followed by caterpillars, beetles, and stink bugs. �- 186 - Figure 1 - Food items from deer mouse stomach, including juniper berry material and mouse .. hair (X 35). Figure 2 - Insect fragments from deer mouse stomach (X 35)· �- 187 - ....... .... ... . .. .. .. .. " .:: :": :.~: .:.::.::. 81.8'1> Fall and Winter Deer Mice D Insects o .:.:;":.:.6i·.91,·:: ::. .....:: .: . ................. . 38.1'1> Spring and Summer Plants Pinyon Mice Fig.). Seasonal occurrence of insect and plant materials in stomachs of deer mice and pinyon mice. �- 188 Table l.--Frequency of occurrence of insect and plant materials mice stomachs, by percentages. Number of Stomachs Insect Season and Year Fall and Winter }) 22 18.19 (1961 and 1962) Spring and Summer 1/ 103 (1961, '62, '64) Oct. - March. 1/ Fall and Winter: Spring and Summer: April - Sept. 61. 90 in deer Plant 81.81 38.10 2) Table 2.--Frequency of occurrence of insect and plant materials mice stomachs, by percentages. Number of Season and Year Stomachs Insect Fa 11 and Winter 17 9 12.39 (1961 and 1962) Spring and Summer (1961, '63, '64) .v 1/ in pinyon Plant 87.61 1/ 65 39.04 60.96 Fall and Winter: Oct. - March. Spring and Summer: April - Sept. Table 3 --0ccurrence and pinyon mice. 1/ 0 of some major insect groups in stomachs of deer mice Deer Mice Insect Group Ants and crickits Caterpillars 1 Beetles Stink Bugs Meadow - brown butterflies Number 17 of Stomachs 47 30 15 10 3 Percent 37.6 24.0 12.0 8.0 204 Pinyon Mice Ants and crickets 31 Caterpillars 1/ 13 Beetles 9 Stink Bugs 7 Meadow - brown butterflies 0 1/ Data from all age-groups and seasons included. 2/ Lasiocampidae (Malacosoma fragile), Geometridae. Sample Size: 125 deer mice, 74 pinyon mice. 1/ 41. 9 17.6 12.2 9.5 00 0 �- 189 The caterpillars included the tent-caterpillar (Ma1acosoma fragile). The presence of insect parts in winter stomachs suggests that the rodents store them in summer for use during the winter. Larval forms of insects belonging to the Lasiocampidae and Geometridae families were used heavily in the spring months. Importance of Plants in Diet. --Plants comprised the bulk of the fa 11 and winter food of mice and pinyon mice (Fig. 3 and Tables 1 and 2). For .; pinyon mice, .plants made up the bulk of the spring and summer fare, also. The occurrence of selected browse and tree species in stomachs of deer mice and pinyon mice was determined (Table 4). Deer mice appear to be less selective t.han pinyon mice with respect to serviceberry, big sagebrush, mountain mahogany, pinyon pine, and Utah juniper because varying amounts of each were found in their stomachs. In contrast, serviceberry and big sagebrush were not found in any pinyon mouse stomach. The berries of Utah juniper were the most important plant food in the diet of both mice, but it comprised a proportionately larger part of the pinyon mouse diet. More juniper berries were eaten in winter than in summer. Starchy material, probably seed eD:dosperm, was frequently found in the stomachs of both mice, but was hard to identify to species. Second in preference for both mice was mountain mahogany. Forbs and grasses were important in the diet of deer mice during the spring and summer, but appeared to be of less importance to pinyon mice. Table 4.--0ccurrence of selected browse and tree species in the stomachs of deer mice and pinyon mice. ~/ Deer Mice Number~/ of Ave.Frequency Plant SEecies Percent Stomachs Per Stomach Serviceberry (Ame1anchier a1nifo1ia) 8 6.4 5 Big sagebrush (Artemisia tridentata) 1.6 2 2 (CercocarEus montanus) Mt. mahogany 9 20 7.2 Pinyon pine (Pinus edulis) 18 3 2.4 Utah juniper (Juniperus osteosEerma) 24 46 19.2 Serviceberry Big sagebrush Mto mahogany Pinyon pine Utah juniper ~/ ~/ Pinyon Mice (Ame1anchier a1nifo1ia) (Artemisia tridentata) (Cercocarpus montanus) (Pinus edulis) (Juniperus osteosperma) 0 0 4 1 44 Data from all age-groups and seasons included. Sample size: 125 deer mice, 74 pinyon mice. 00 0.0 5.4 1.4 59 5 0 0 0 0 26 1 169 �- 190 - Possible Effects of Mice on Pinyon-Juniper Range.--These stomach analysis results are not complete, since sufficient time was not available for a more detailed species identification of plant in insect materials. For the final report on the comprehensive r.odent effects on Deer Winter Range Study, additional work is planned on the food-habits portion of the study. The effects of deer mice and pinyon mice on the pinyon-juniper range studied can not be assessed alone on the results of this food-habit study. The additional information to be provided by the transect and census data of the larger study, of which the food-habits study is only a part, will be needed. However, since their use of important deer browse species was found to be light, it seems reasonable to assume that deer mice and pinyon mice compete but little with deer for food. Since they eat so many juniper berries, they may in fact act to control the spread of junipers and further the growth of understory browse plants so important to deer. Also, in consuming so many insects, especially crickets and tent-caterpillars which defoliate bitterbrush and other browse plants, deer mice and pinyon mice may benefit a pinyon-juniper deer range. Approved by: Harold M. Swope Jack R. Grieb Prepared by: -;5A?--&-e~/ R J/~~~ Harold R. Shepherd Wildlife Researcher �July, 19bo - 191 - JOB PROGRESS RESEARCH REPORT PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO ------~~~~~------------ Project No.__ ~W_-~I~O~I_-~R~-~I~O _ Game Range Investigations Work Plan No. _ Job No. ~3 3 ------~------------------------- Title of Job: Suryey" Inventory, and Analxsis of Deer and Elk Winter Ranges (Browse Transect Analysis and Applicatl0n) Period Covered: Personnel: April 1, 1967 to March 31, 1968 Leroy W. Carlson and Charles E. Bullock, Student Assistants; Wallace Jobman, Conservation Aide; Sande Jensen, Clerk-Typist; Bertram D. Baker, Assistant Wildlife Researcher. Cooperating: Paul Applegate, BLM State Office, Denver; Neil McCleery, Assistant District Manager, and Robert Jacobsen, Wildlife Management Biologist, BLM District Office, Craig; Stan Colby and Bob Armstrong, BLM White River Resource Area Office, Meeker; BlM Seasonal Range Aids Ernest C. Hafertepen and William W. Wolvin; U. S. Forest Service Region 2 Wildlife Management Biologist Jim Cruse; Range and Wildlife Staff Officers Jerry Martinez, Bill Brown, and Harley Orahood, Gunnison National Forest, Gunnison; Range and Wildlife Staff Officer Ron Schulz, Rio Grande National Forest, Monte Vista; and Alder District Ranger Ted LaNay,' .Rio Grande National Forest, Del Norte. Abstract Two-inch scale township plat and \-inch scale unit maps of winter range on Gunnison National Forest portions of Big Game Management Unit 53 (Coal Creek) were completed and bound in map holders and binder file folders. A narrative report of the Unit 53 big game winter range inventory was also prepared and accompanied the maps that were distributed to Southwest Regional and Denver Game Management Offices. Progress was made in preparing Unit 63 (Smith Fork) inventory maps and a report. Township plat maps of Units 54 (Sapinero) and 55 (Taylor River) were updated and color-coded. The field phase of Unit 22 (Piceance) winter range inventory was finished in cooperation with the BLM Craig District. Approximately 44,000 acres of �- 192 territory were determined to be winter range and inventoried in the summer of 1967, bringing the total acreage of winter range in Unit 22 to about 340,000 acres. The latter figure approximates 53 percent of the total area of the unit which was computed as being 998.9 square miles or 639,300 acres. In averaging Unit 22 browse range condition transect results from 309 transects, it appears that browse composition was slightly better than "medium", and density and vigor were about midway between "low" and "medium". This is interpreted to mean that shrub species mixtures are below optimum but are satisfactory; however, browse quantities and vigor fall short of being satisfactory. Objectives: 1. To make final corrections on and color-code two-inch scale, big game winter range inventory township plat maps of big game management units involving the Gunnison National Forest. 2. To prepare ~-inch scale big game winter range maps of Units 53 and 63. 3. To prepare vegetation type and land category acreage summaries of big game winter range on Gunnison National Forest lands in Units 53 and 63. 4. To prepare winter range inventory reports for Units 53 and 63 as analyses are completed. 5. To bind two-inch scale maps in map holders and ~-inch scale maps, summaries, and reports in binder file folders for Unit 53. 6. To distribute Unit 53 winter range inventory map holders and binder file folders to the Department Southwest Region and Denver Game Management Section. 7. To complete the field phase of cooperative big game winter range in Unit 22. 8. To prepare two-inch scale vegetation west and south of Piceance Creek. BLM-Department inventory of type maps of Unit 22 ·winter ranges Procedures: Denny (1962:5l-96) has detailed the interagency approved big game winter range analysis instructions that were used in the survey of Unit 22 ranges. Supplementary techniques have been presented by Baker (1966: 55-56). �- 193 - SURVEY. INVENTORY. AND ANALYSIS OF DEER AND ELK WINTER RANGES Bertram D. Baker Introduction Maps and a report of the big game winter range inventory in Big Game Management Unit 53 (Coal Creek) were completed, bound, and distributed to the Department Southwest Region and Denver Game Management Section. Job accomplishments that were completed for Unit 63 (Smith Fork) included proofing and color-coding two-inch scale township plat maps, preparing a ~-inch scale unit map, and preparing a preliminary draft of the range inventory report. Three township maps for Unit 54 (Sapinero) were brought up-to-date with the addition of Blue Mesa Reservoir to them. Vegetation type lines and acreages were adjusted on these maps in accord with placement of the reservoir high water line. All Unit 54 and 55 (Taylor River) maps were color-coded in preparation for final processing and distribution in 1968. The Ryans-Story Key Area portion of Unit 22 (Piceance) was inventoried in cooperation with the BLM Craig District. The field phase of Unit 22 analysis thus was concluded. The office phase of Unit 22 winter range analysis was continued with the transferal of inventory annotations on air photos to a two-inch scale map (in two parts) for the area west of Piceance Creek. Landownership status and type acreages remain to be added to the maps. Findings Map Preparation, Binding, and Distribution Gunnison National Forest.--Two-inch scale, four-color township plat maps of seven townships in Unit '53 and two in Unit 63 were proofed using original inventory air photos as guides. Corrections were then made on five copies of each township map. Vegetation types were colored in according to the interagency standard code on a minimum of three copies of each township map. Township plat maps that had been proofed for Units 54 and 55 in the 1966-67 project segment (Baker, 1967:46) were color-coded in the same manner. Proofed and color-coded sets of two-inch scale township plat maps of Unit 53 were then assembled and bound in 21- by l8-inch hinged hardboard holders. Disposition of the holders was as follows: three were given to the Department Southwest Region Office in Montrose; one went to the Department Game Management Section in Denver; and one holder was filed at the Fort Collins Game Research Center. Winter range and key area boundary lines shown on two-inch scale maps of Units 53 and 63 were transferred in red pencil to ~-inch scale Gunnison National �- 194 Forest base maps. These t-inch scale maps, trimmed to 8\- by II-inch size sheets, also had unit boundaries, numbers, and names inked on them in heavy black lettering (Figure 1). A copy of the Unit 53 map was then placed in each of five binder file folders that also had reports, transect records, and other allied information enclosed. Distribution of completed folders was the same as that mentioned in the foregoing paragraph for map holders and was accomplished at the same time. Unit 63 t-inch scale winter range maps are being held pending completion of the winter range inventory report that is being prepared. Already discussed has been that two-inch scale, four-color township plat maps of big game winter range in Units 54 and 55 had vegetation types proofed and color-coded. Three township plats involving partial inventory of winter range south of the Gunnison National Forest in Unit 54, and including areas now inundated by Blue Mesa Reservoir, were updated by placementof the new reservoir on the maps. Type lines and acreages were adjusted where necessary in conformance with location of the reservoir high water line. Grand Mesa-Uncompahgre National Forest.--Similar to the 1966-67 project segment (Baker, 1967:46), no new work was accomplished on two-inch scale maps on hand for this forest. Rio Grande National Forest.--Fifteen two-inch scale township plat maps for Unit 76 (Rio Grande) were submitted to the U. S. Forest Service Region 2 Range and Wildlife Division in 1966 (Baker, 1967: 46). These 15 maps were to have been printed in standard four-color format. Copies of the prints had not been received as of May 31, 1968. San Juan National Forest.--Forty-five two-inch scale township plat maps are currently in the hands of Region 2 U. So Forest Service draftsmen. These maps are being processed for final printing in four-color format. Project W-lOl-R monies have been allocated in the present segment budget to assist the Forest Service Regional Staff with this job. The township maps involve Big Game Management Units 74, 75, 77, and 78. White River Resource Area - Bureau of Land Management.--In August, 1967, following completion of fieldwork in Unit 22, Student Assistants Bullock and Carlson were assigned to the BLM Craig District Office for doing mapwork. Adequate two-inch scale base maps were lacking for the area west of Piceance Creek, so the assistants prepared one in two parts from air photo mosaics. The next step in the procedure was the transfer of air photo notations regarding vegetation type lines, fences, browse range condition transect data, and other pertinent information to the velum base maps. Machine copies from these velum intermediate-step maps were then produced in the Craig District Office. Final-stage maps are pending placement of landownership boundaries and vegetation type acreages on the velum and machine-copying the resulting draft. �GAME , ••..• -••t • UNIT BOUNDARY KEY AREA KEY BOUNDARY AREAS I - Ratt I esnake :3- Thirteenmi 2 - Greasewood 4- Segar Mountain Ie 5 - Hammond - Ba rcus 6 - Barcus - Ryans 15. 25. T 3 S �- 196 Data Reproduction, Compilation, and Analysis Gunnison National Forest.--Tables of vegetation type acreages by landownership within winter range zones were prepared for National Forest portions of Units 53 and 63. The table for Unit 53 is included in the Appendix of this report. The table for Unit 63 is a part of the overall Unit 63 big game winter range inventory report now in preparation. Grand Mesa-Uncompahgre National Forest.--No ported for this National Forest. further accomplishments are re- Rio Grande National Forest.--Pe1Iet group count data were compiled and tabulated from transects read in previous fieldwork in Unit 76. These data were then submitted to Colorado State University Statistician Dave Bowden who had one way analysis of variance tests performed on them by the CSU Computer Center personnel and facilities. Additional testing of significant results from analysis of various computations was begun but have not been completed. The purpose of the attemps to statistically evaluate pellet group count information is to determine if differences exist in intensities of use by deer and elk between the seven "key" areas, primary vegetation types present, and seasonal patterns of range occupation. San Juan National Eo res t Because final four-color prints of two-inch scale maps are not available from this Forest as yet, type acreage compilations must be postponed. c v= White River Resource Area - Bureau of Land Management.--All browse range condition transect and non-transected type writeup forms from Unit 22 surveys for the years 1965, 1966, and 1967 were checked for correctness and legibility. The forms were typed, with one carbon copy and the original field data form being returned to the BLM in January, 1968. Data from the 1967 field season of 1965 and 1966 tables of Unit group count data were tabulated stical analyses similar to what Cooperative we re compiled and tabulated in continuation 22 inventory sunnnarization. Also, pellet separately in contemplation of future statihave been initiated for Unit 76. Big Game Winter Range Field Inventories Rio Grande National Forest.--Portions of winter range were left uninventoried in some of the San Luis Valley game units when fieldwork was done in the years 1962 through 1964. It was felt that effort should be made to fill-in the existing gaps, since map production is being delayed anyway. The original goal was to cover all winter range within National Forest boundaries including the private land holdings. The latter were largely what had been omitted, although some large portions of Forest lands had also been skipped. In light of the foregoing Situation, Assistants Bullock and Carlson were used to help in performing fieldwork in Unit 79 (La Garita) in September, 1967. Activities were concentrated in the area south and east of Agua Ramon Mountain. Fieldwork progressed eastward from Agua Ramon as far as the area immediate to �- 198 Pinyon-juniper or Type 9 clearly dominates the vegetative cover if locations of transects is a reasonable index to plant cover present. This fact undoubtedly will be substantiated when final type acreage summaries can be prepared. Information on Table 2 also indicates that the sagebrush or rabbitbrush type (Type 4) and browse type (Type 5) are relatively equal in importance as Unit 22 vegetative cover. Four browse species are apparently carrying the load in providing Unit 22 big game sustenance. From Table 3 they are big sagebrush (Artemisia tridentata), serviceberry (Amelanchier sPP.), true mountainmahogany (Cercocarpus montanus), and antelope bitterbrush (Purshia tridentata), in that relative order of importance. Douglas rabbitbrush (Chrysothamnus viscidiflorus) and Gambel oak (Quercus gambeli) are important browse species,also, but they are not rated as being "key" in very many circumstances. Oakbrush in particular is not widely distributed; where it is found, it usually is associated with more desirable species and is not utilized very much. A composite picture of Unit 22 browse range condition transect ratings is presented in Table 4. From the table, the overall or average rating for browse composition gives cause for the most optimism. Since composition involves factors of plant preferability by game and occurrence of more highly preferred plants in browse stands, this item is of great importance. Deer and elk thrive where they have access to and can choose good species upon which to forage. It is granted that the "medium" average rating is far from the best possible, but many "high" ratings were necessary to provide this average. Browse density averaged a rating of midway between "low" and "medium", with most t'ransects falling in the "low" category. This finding can not be considered too discouraging when it is realized that "low" can mean any density up to 15 percent and "medium" includes a range of between 16 and 35 percent. The general health or vigor of "key" browse species from transecting procedures involves factors of browse stand age and current past hedging. For this category, the average rating of 1.40 or "low+" seen on Table 4 probably is the most discouraging of the results of Unit 22 winter range analysis. Two-hundred and fifteen of 309 transects or 70 percent had ratings in the "low" bracket. In spite of this situation, casual observations over the 3-year period of fieldwork indicated a possible gradual improvement in browse vigor. This improvement, if such is actually the case, might be correlated with the lowest deer populations and lightest browsing pressure than had occurred in this area in recent history. �"",.,' '" I 'I ,e;. C) ~~ • •.-1 ~ T12S d RESVRI)I I \ ~ • , 1'1 I1 t ~: \ '112.\ I ~1~_1_~;1 I \'''' I _I h", ~~ 1 0 ...• -" ,;, I ~ ---- Q)(J) 0 C) Ob.ObO ~ .,-tt-. o..:;c 0 o 0 O..c:~ o III 0 +> o 0.. '0 ...c. cd (l) P; S ~ "\, ~ _! -----""-, "'---... f" "r" ["'''--'' --_. } •. ' 1:. \ I uot _ J 0' ~ ,f/,If ~ ,\0";, l '" 0 6' • 1".:,_3<.- • \ ,0 .' 'J. - I" 1 - fl~rSC ,; I V.A\.'.: $ ,J 15\1,-: ", ~ I)J \ J <): (,1 ~ 1 ~ l' ~ ,-"tt-, -"; J)llaQtlt~! v: 'I c. " I," I ,(, .1." .~,." '-""" .... ,'" 1\ r •..• )1, '\ v 0, Cty tt 1 Trf"-;~ M' ~./ I.:' '-b vourn cl :)~-~~~""'> I ~ ~ V:'~""~":.. ~ • .:. I i' _ I "I, "~, ,- - • -~ i . •• TV I' I eek~' I~ . I ::3 ~ I \ F ~)r 2 I 9 "I ii' -'C' ' 7" '·--'1 'f4 II [\i~ Ii\ ,~ - -- 1~ 1 ~ IS I I, ,/ • 11m -~---'l , (' "'3' ,:, w uw"r1lk' ; ;\ \1 ,:/,,'~:TI/Ff'K jI \' 1--- _~~,~~!_.£-=-!! ~r R~7~)j~lls:)dd:c,rk I'i.: 1 "' : '••, '-Atn P<l:s ~}. -r J~or!- I i -!,': - J 1 / II l fJ1"-! t <J p -', ~. 1 t,q. -- r- :, ' , -' ~ '- M!n "01"- ts~ .1,-- -' ,,- _ --, 1<P: -, hlg, ~~ I " I ~ I,!, .,../.;.:.~~~. ,(, WILD' J :l. I ," ELI( . '-" I ~~' "-\W: 'I"~;::~. I ••. ~:.o\ 1 l~' ,.. fit., t",mons c.~'" ('~•••.. '~' r~~.; .r:.~:~ 'lIt --- i-"•• I i "'?-Ohio 'Pas~i; "t.t \II ; t . ":) ! t~,'1--'-,_4JE_l I . ,'-._,--. i, J . (r".,tl ,I i ..... _\ :{\~~\ i ! __ ._. .'/,,,, . ~, i!" --""";-.'-.-\ : ) .. _ i A:t.il; ·--·\-··'-·-"·~--'I--·-,-I , I L"r'·__ I .,,-' (0(11,_ •• ] )-r- 'IG">'~ 1 1 c, ~ 'I __ . '" t _-' ~ __ -1- " "po", 'y..,....,-C".}oI>-.;. );\#\~ ---,1,,I ,\ .• ~~ '-!,(\:?,~-J,!\ '0 II -, 2:-1'" \.~'t..:!.!Qr.'~C! _--_'\_ ·-··-=·····-1 ;-- 5- •. -·..•.•... ~hllh.A I , ., ~ ..••.. ~..... p~,'n. 0 :- :'-'"i- ~P"('ler- ' , ..• -" .!f;\'"r ~ -- - :G -,; 'IS':~I c'''I",n''-'PkJI \.' • ""\ \ ,j i t• I LEGE N 0 i)' ~~I~' . 'en,l ;~ : fA k'" AFlB 'cf,:,;; ~:. ,co;, Iou", ~'Jnom ~ ~ 1 ~-,r .'ty '~,,~ -'-; :j 1T (f.·6,?" ' .rr;:, •• I'••• ....j•• )~':, ••.• 1 -'- ,';""~': •...•.. _L'<-,I I "}'ltt.!lhHt~tv\ 1 ,"""~:~: ('111,lH" S'w,lrnpv P"s.:: 1.,1 " V2.- ~ J, ,\t '''\ '-0/1'" - \--- ~~" '- ....~, Mln 0" £\. ,"" :1\ I - l r.-., .... _t -Q- •• .(I"r'\-<~ ""~ '~ATURl,C/\REA -- > I '?,,\...., I, , --1--"· Q __.s!;_H~.e. ,"'t..: 1 ~(~ •• , •. t I fl",,,,,,,, . ~:U~ I ,.,.,,"l " ,,_,;.shc~r - " 4 ~~CnIA j ;,Pars /~ 1 ~~ ! -, - .•. --" -~.."t,5r"'lylk.I!I • , --- I!. - ,," ~" ,", ,7'1,. , n t.l~~"j'''·-''''''·I.<~W'-:. .•.." r 1 .• to. I 1 •..• \ I " I ~ 'I b'~ ~, - :'r~~,,:" • ••• _-- \"'" -, -.--, . ,- i:~ ~r:" ~r. ;r,. r.~. t Q(t·II~;~~.: . I'-"~" ,fr.-'l' It' 1 r :",; : Creek- </', L---::-2_tl- (_1_; ; fW/., 'v< 'b' ' BeckWith: 1P'! ! '~'. 1 t __\.:,", ~ 1 ,I 1.( __ ",-. -'.1. .: I '% ':'It.::~ \:: 1jWES,T /;': ~ -)- n CI~I"''','' ~ICOW("MP ,",.i\~,.L-- ----~-t'..::.:\-"'-----I ..... :..rn' -HI 3::-;' -, :"~/'\': : ~ I"~ _ - '.' , '_';1",1(,0 \ "/',;'.1 I J'- - ij •..... , I~" ~" c,,,~J: -.... ,,: f\ I'" 1::--- :~'~'I \ !('r 1}~Li_v't,--,_~.DII~';\ ' I~':::~I ~{::~o" u. ',.~: ij1'$ ,·";,,,;,'/·· • ~ '.~.,;~ ~; I -p. I ,- -';-1i I I I : I is' "" ~ Pin'" C" 'v": ! ,.-;>", ~'i 17 I -'-'-:",.-"",···rr_';_: .. ·~-......,...-:'""· '-, Beckw,th". 'lo> __ \ (). :1.1 --, 1 I 011 t-fI; Iovfll ['@»",'wfl'Sln'J""'>'"" ~ - I'\..-,. :'~~ t,, '- J __ 0"'1)) 'I" - 1 ~ l YI!f'XITIt:,r ....-,.(£ast ,..,..:." ----:,----1-- I I' SilinS' pcak n i'"''''" ' Mt 'f<-~-r' ~ 1 ' ,. suv..,;-.ni.i,--:I05lt ..•. n·CT ... ,"",,~-,,-»~'"""" ' wi" I 'e... rt"s1t.~~kwlth: ~~:(,LA;cSlnugh f(C#'. ~" ·"·--1--' 1-- '-~- ,-- J' i ·-··~~<··->···:~·'--·I- •.. ,O' I I'? I '~ 'I- --'- •• ••••• I:'-.'j' P~rl. I I 51? --.. •.•_AII('yr CnxA-, -, L_ - PU'"p' •.. ..n:~~b.,l I I ~. I:;>"" 1 I !'Cr •.. ~ .' c~lr>f~el(l ' - --,- ~-,,~,'d), I"~ ',OTHIc:t "I"." l~,'l>f 1<1 -;< " I ----,,1 ,IV i.j-/c~ 1/~<~~ I, r""", t.-- 'I-) ;-, I ',;' (, I - :: .s: U 'c I ("/,,,, " -r (\,11'"''' ~- - 11 i ~. ~.. }.ti ~e~J._~ ~ L~ - BurA r' ~-Croll" I_••• ·-J.--r,'" I MI"n.""'I;;;;;;'--1 I f;",: ,I ",i(,-: : If'l,:.'ll\ ~/"oC"r!: __,_ ,_ ' ,_ ,!~I l: Gel:" -·;··----;-:~·-~~l~ot'"-;~~~,:-i \~~I!) --; 1 ~1 -'11 I ", -&:",-I' ['1"',,,,1/ FI,'s i I '~' i: !.--'~i--I-':'-,rl--'~'-I~' L~.,'~ "-~1~~~ I\ ll,..._.....,r'\I-.Ne.~~!.';.~ _I. i/~n, : I 1'0''';'' I II': -'-------1-"'-\---' /~;t' 19:' -10' I I' \;"'\' --'r '7,.:. - _, ' IMeo::;a, __ I, 5':l II oJ - , ?I;r- '\ ~ow.>hoe Jef. C~ GunrHsonl I Slo), / I I I t i>-,~, i-'~·-"':Cr. j' .•' '-;llfJOoj'.lQ' Il J (,0' --- • I --' .; \~~",'-'1--- II--- COAL_CREEK_'1\ __ ! 1->-I ~1tn' If, ,,' -I' --, I , , 1 i 'Wi' .... ··):5~ 1 ~:' i -j 0-, '-:0',<' _ ' " j1 t •... ; :£."ltn I "''''[''0 l \\..;~ fJ~.---r-== r~791 ~\; I i" -MGT-,UNIT I --~. - 111<""' -I'\ r-- I,', , L}(~\"-\'-:.f." 11':.~ I' _~), _J ~ tll(1otjl" \., ''''SONS'''hO'I)Cctf't,,1 -- -L -- 1. - c,-t- ""7, 520 ~I 1 I j\~",:=--Jl--=-~"""-=-~=4 \£i~ .ri i I Mt'''i I q.ll,:.. '{"",,(K;rLAND$ENP:"r(1S T15S'~~~;:-'---l'--'---------'" " P .10,.,1 \~,\ '''. -- R"-'~>;,~~~-I0-~" ~ ~ J 4' I Co')1 Mesa ',yJ I \-. \' \ MiHcCUmtt J.,;,.__ --" .•.•_ • ~:\ M I i"\•.• ·, I:' I 0, -, Ll-,' I, \ - 1t.:_ll\lI'c)' I C:~':. CO""' 'C"'<A'I_I'---(MIII')' ,r.I!~" '-,..~-'7----t :Yo., - Q " ' Q 'I 1 -CG t - --...i!t-'~-$..: ~) j~ (", I~\_..J"'_' J ~ 'l:; iI, ~,1 )1 I' ':, 'I ,1 0. -s- ',-, II-,·,s Ilf/, ; Ii" ('", ",,~, ---'r' - - ~' "I\!, II ~.\ -- I__ ,~s .• __ IONFfA..,R.1..•. I' l I < j-, II 1 );:- ..•...t "-~,, '~~~2'(ft-:(' J-~'I!: - ,I ...~ ~~III"/"t~ :t~ " 1.,,'/, / .. _1 ).1'\'P --., ~.'" .... }~.;> ~i~! r~:')p ; ~__()_l' ,- \., C)<f __ ~ \or ~ ~J II I.,.iJ'}- ii \ l L[l-~'i'-~----' 1'-"-1 II' I L""'frn----)--:--1-~ ,- ICe,,' I I:~: I ,: ~- ( ~~.j'_,_.li/~':·5"'.!t~, , ,... " " 1 . ¥ ~ '\ ~"~~:;;:; t pass\13 .• "'1. '"""'"---! '!-ON'A,? 1:ESVJi1"~ '''I~ ----;.jl-~-~--~.-,\\I.iJ-\ f I ~ I '//) .~) .IN"- 'flN--~.vPlt(1 I ~ ....•\..._ ,t,ONIA I) ~ \ . ,.. \......-,1},- c;'J-f.. (OJ/,_ ,.li11,,,-i>nd ~~~~._~~ 1 ,( -'>-;,1. t~~~_~_j-.:_i~~ ..~l" .. il (~'~:;\I I ·~T"·--- 1:,1" ~ r; \~ - ( I, . CQt~ '(". • g~-, '----;--1 1 ,,-..-i?"OIl/ \---I-I~;" -~-'---ll_.Q--~, :'--''.. ( ~'r11:+: 1/ ( ..,kJ~!t I ISt~ J~.~t~.~,J._-...I.-~~~ .. l I 1 I ~ I:i:-\f J'' . ,v"rr' :>t-f!vl:J g,-4r.;:\~UI ,-, '11~r; "i--_',.t-; /' ,<1.' If J20 1 "I ~·tW'----="i-...-.,::r-o-,!'~1 ~ ,,-, '-",', -I?- , I~~ 1"'· - , VrR ... ,\ ... :... ;t\" • r 'K'4:LANDSEND' _-~, ,I IIi ";;.;:11 "-- i;J 1 o~••. ,~I,', f \l II )1 ~I'I NTHRACITE • : &CI,o"e'd(,' I K- \! "?£, <"" t?, _~1 j \ -, l L.. I ;, , rf'BM~51'1 ~ GalCna M!n e,,, I I. f')~ I "%1 l--tnnoxMtn @-j I ;K--.1~\.~1.>:...,:<"l ~~..,,? ..• ).:~-- ,- ;" l. 0 L •••') t l. I') ~ I" /, 1 Sf'ilr ~ . :-:'f. I '" Mlnerel , ' .•• ~t L1.1. 'Treasury '' ~ 1'"1J 1', , ~ 15-\1' ',. '1-1 !::t \ ~ 1 tI' 1 <;!.''i/I~ f '" ~ l~.. : 1(-"~1. I' Y'7/ I l : • >' ' : PI.. ("OIJ' f Anlhr;"\f'"I·... P ,">,ss. I , ' I Ri'lsm, '" 'II' -\ le1dlKmg 1.10;' pr Tr<1pd1f.Rid <35N : 1 "':;Wif L I.,.Vd?IHEO..;Ml?i 'I. $il(,'j'l1 I •• ·~:.:·f ~: t-l' Co' [ I RaggcdMtn, I (.rne,::u.:,Y')1 1 __ I,t~t~ \ ..<. SNO'vvr I I ",I ... r' 'rk Whitehouse: I(r') .., c- . '-', i ~ '~I I :Sheepr:,tn --",- • I I N \ ~ {,{, 1:... 1;'/ <C.'.. I \ III \ i I ~ :E'." '\ lI1"\\fq \ I &1 : ~ - •.~, 1,~rk<!.1l5aS ~tI7rat7'( 1 l Iq/ ~_,_,w ~ I, I I I"'" ' HagcrnM'l\ Peak \ 't.t. 1 C"I s ' BELLS :,!1o•••• mas •..• ,f"Ll -, i G I;PQ' ,j'~I, (; I " • • ......• " "",.. Vfl ancucv I Pas .•·~·· ,,8~' I ": I ---~- W.."rlOON Mnrhlc •• '--rl"t%r ..• ; ------- Chair '!:! 1 1{~Mtn~: I:.; ~ I -... ~ 1 "'-)c.}'·I~' 1--- --\--~" 'I ' I " EMI~ 1 In 1 I l\\~ , r -j- ~'-S'· I" - "' is! I 1 I 1'1" ~ ~ I I r • I; - dj-"'rV!J'ILYIAKf I ,j k.~ ' I~ "------- 1/ ' A ' I I I - \ '.[ BOGAN I~ 1\ - I 'I \ ~- [ 0/'1 Jo;" Huc I I, I Ptork " ~ J... _M'~ <~ ./. -,~ 1-:'' I '..",,, -; I /kll'" <4••. '" ,~-~.'..i"po<,--" r-. -I -,.1- • _,"t'-~ - I - . ~ Crj1 - I j rO\ , > b I, IHANJIEP": 1\ '/ '7"1 I e II----I-~I-L,~-,.------~ I' I-'L 1\ I, \ 1 CI ~ 1.••• I '_-O\,t!-L .. ~..,11ill2B"< ~ 'tlt\\SJ' 'leJnnol(l ~ .. '\:~(~ ~ -.\-r: I_. ,~ r-'---~ t; .• ) \ ;...- I II 1T1X'- ••.• 1·}/~·,\J..'.~~I::fNIA --: .• __ ~: _.'t' HotAIk.u:~-~----- I . - '"?f' • 1-- '-', -, ~ttf..y.. 11 I ii 1 ~., v Ch",{ 'I, r---L~"-----~--1'~--'--'-~\~Lr \'"f, , OM K (l?~~1 U' PltK ,: l\~ -.r~·-- ',-~,,,-~~f~-,,,- "'-;-, =n-',~~./ 1~'1~11 f"<~=-I·f-\l. 'I'/:! -~ ". _ " _ ~ (. l!~ I ~ ~ I·'" I '/1- ,;;'"I' 't'~- "' --K- MI NE:SOI'AC::C'R ° I __ ',tI ~. 't --,;,,,,, ,---','-- \ I; - ~.I_. li... •... --"~ '::"---11'" ,- 0''''1 /, ~\_~.J:lPAONIARSt •.. '-~\'-;;"'7·".· " 1'-' I ~·I \ j \ I.$:' • I I I~ I 1 To ,;1 Q 1 ,OW" I I ,1j :j"()llf{.; I~)·U .l~.{\ d Mt 1_ II ., ~>,,.,..~~~.J\~: ---'- ) \ ~ I"'-~J~~ ~~ ~ 1 ,,__ rl·_~' [", ,'" :' ar~ I ~ lrcn Pt ., I ~-- \. (" I' \ I ~ I __ ;1SIll J 0\(IL;. ~~ !! tl ~ I ~ 71' --- .• I 'l>, ~ '-,Q ~~J{j)----I- ,--' f"'" .1(, ,,1_-_7.56~ I 50'! f Ij J~c I ":\, U ''; ' ~ ~ ""'"' ('l/NNISON j \ : .....' Richevc co------~-------~--',' '(,()I ~J-'_"~~ '-- -\"\ - -- ~-- I--- ---- '-- -,I' _.I - - ,:' l.'-T' i! \ l\-t~,,)Ii r'!,~J U o",to. I ~ r- I .~ J1G' ~~,...f! 1 / ..'01 SIt =- b 0(1"-:, -l--~I--J:;-A@;--------,-----l---,,--j,-Jl-, --I, ,<,,-,,~_I= ,-" ,- '( -----j-'--=,'-.--' - - - -- 1 Tum" " t,r" \ I' ",\{~... +---~ ;, RfSYij ~f:r rl. 10 5 I 'J ~\ ~~~" o ~-I:J '--1 I" 1 /1'-(1\ •1:1 '" rc H ,-[]\: ' 1I \ 7:: (,~ i ii'" -, , I ---1'-' I 1 I ,-- Ii - u /_:'~~ __ -\-_ ,'~\ ~, %-.-#~1 I~\ QI ,f 1,1 ~~~",/~ \ ~( :. I)) 1 \ ~7M~\ I, Po ~QI '---" .5 --h"~J-',\ If) ~ " '------'~--- .,. " :' I ('1'1'10"': 1 ~,~ ~ .\ ",,0"' c '('>", ,C~.( 1 I, I I I-» I # I l (_: 1'5G221 ~ I ~ - Cr,,(> I ",f, I ! ~: ,':: ..... c.:- I, ~j-J-"---,,:-----~--t~~-~_,,--IIJ.J1J'IIIIt;tJctJ?J ~ ~\ 1 il ~I" I ~. ! ~~ f'~'H''l ','ei '" ~ ! !I ~ 'I >. , i! ",'0 no , \;----I--'-:::~\--! 1 r. ' ~ : ~ U I 'Sp<in.hou.. ,.,-, Aq)I-J.!-~-)d--",--1 : I-<r~4 t '1- -1-\= t .~ ,0:~ ~- 1\:[ I ~ 1 ~ "". >o,-j-t ;\-'j 0 ~ ,1". '+-i,-j k. <s " <!' ¥ \ ~ •.-1 p.. I- t".f I \ 'v ',--, _ I ~ ._~ I i di ,(""... ..: Ii', i _I ,~, I!" '.::-j'l.J a': :..---;,.'_ ~L:' • • 1 J l~ ',' .:.!' f, _ I i~Q'Q'v~ I l;.r I \ ..I/, nil t•• a;./,-/",,,,,, I~ k~ .,~. 'f! \\~---;;r--)',--- :J-----" u ~ n '" 0' , ;.g:_ " \ 1_. \~ ,\. l_ " Sheep Mtn r~ Ii'. : J CJ.~ ~I I L-._ • \_:«0: '; 0'- I'"Shellpl -.:-' , HM01.N\ Mtll ~'3>t' _" ,\) 1 1 Ill' b p", '~ -~ '-13SI---I"<--__ ' i ' _!J' l Alde~"",):::,:, '~'~~!~ 'i ':"q.•• I r~ .~_ - ~~ <:.:U \. ;)00 I I ] "fJ I :. r.,Q.~ 11119 \ ,\ll\'I\) F. I 1 -:--i'!':P-=k It'ar I \ G\.\ 1 NO f7:"061 '\ 1~(I' ~_~_Pe~~! __ I Cf) I 'b\ I r 11 J t{= ~ ./ __ ~~L_,=~.,.=,~~ I <;& R,chm,,) "'" '4 ~ ~,t, 1-'" [} I ~-;;,t:t=1 -I"'~ \ I ~ J,'; ,..I.~ ' I ' " ' I ' H>n"f:':' l \ 1-' t ~ It \: \! -I' J I:"f''l.!s\, ~-l-~t-~0JC;~V ~I@ I., I' " ~' \ ,"",, ., --,-.~ 'r"--'-I-I--_\. 11 ,;?)""~~,,,.~_~~; ...::, -,-~~-r~' 1 r:;/'- ~-f~-@1; --I,' -,-\." -(,1\'" I-,,~I -is, \"1 I ~ ~~ _I .) f\~ : :\: RoatcaPI ~\ +> •.-1 ~rlT14S---""!Xl •.-1 \'. . ., ctl s:: b.O "'~ Slides ,(lIt ~-.-l.Y'.-Q.: ---.. ~..... Alderl:,C:".;Lil t='•••• t"::(..,..~~UI : ales/! 1 "I QO~ Q) 1 I , : I l, - -------\---'---~-",---,,---,- ~~.... ~ m0) 5 L. I lIen" n [j"~I', I , • ",,-," '- "-~ HCl!dcr50:, _ JI 1 \ ~. Lombard "I "?' Basin '"' Q) •.,. I " I I ,\10.\( I .. ~_I_ I " It, ~\'·ltJ • .,/;_ IAt \' I I, "," i%a RS '; I"' ' J:-',IIt " r I 1-- n I ...•. ~ _' , , C;'''~, Mtn ! I ,\ M,JODY 1 : I ' _;~",\Flectnc -C:-!.~, I Q.ll\ <>-, ---\ '~ ~'Q,,? \G •. ; )I"'~ i:.t~ #--%-4 __ '" ~"d ..- <"'.0 1 __ I q, ,,> 'f __~"-_(l.__ ,\,'f ,1 ~ Q) Q)~ • ) I,l-i. ,u. ,'--~ I '=..oGIlAY \! +'l:>' I ,." ~" 1 1_\4_ -I r;,-;1- I -lOl,1 Q) I ffi~ __ ';"I\I __ I I \ .~... ...1 " ,~ § m~ __ O'Y-1--1--, 'D"ke, III QO I 1/" ~' CRATER~ ' _.. :,~! +'l m ~ _ 1 __ ,~.,J x> I ~ •..•I<. \-/ ~ I ' - 'm' ---,,- ""v,- -/-- . ~ <""\ lJ"\ ~ I' -Q/~E()tJG-J.rRf5t,-';/OLYT[/?RORRESVI?Gotty ~ ~:s -, _ l/ .:, ~ ( r-l QJ m+'l O+l 50'1 RES I \( I.~' _ •...• ' IV H S • 1 n I 1 Q I ,/ () Q) I ,0., 1 I I I 'I' } I, --.".--",,~""-,'"f,- 0 '''-'J 1 _1 >~ I j I•• I j , Q)'H QJ ~ ~ ,.-I ,00., .P ® .'_ \\ ~ J: _~\./ "'> .$ !--.n ,l1'1 ~ .• '~~ G ~~ I ." fJI/,.. ,/,, __,__ -'II<OU,_, I 1 fB' .. -1 \ I' _ 0 !." 0' I ~"-1:'~f44J • •• :- ~ 'r C,- "Y~Cf WEST 7"' - • ' I -: .-~" '"'~ 'M - I t·",-,--~, , :....,~o :,'·.l?o ..•.I,/!le~1 I '~""'\---I;I..,---~,,------:--------r-::.C~: ~: I G0Jf1£NG"..IGH' lJ-{flfib t"'~ I 'el /IO()(";fISH REs~!\CrIlIIHPki\\.}' d k~~" -, r'::'-~~~~I •..•1.:1" cd 00' Gn\ll I ~~ I/) - ~ 1 ,,',, I -~1 10" ' ,~ ~ I T .: t I••. ~ 'I,~ (}i!,{, 1 OV[R~ANj) ;I( I Rfsrr.>vOIRt' (. a= lI A .~ l+l sc- I, I" .:..:; rnH1C4(fY t i' " I • (.1\\'1 , I , '., 'I li (j a (J y C) ~(, l' •.• I ~ ' 'I i/ <.•. 9:>"";j",o- , ~~ 1 m. I I ",/ ,I"" 1 r"',IIOW I l' Chalk, .,'Perk Itt., Mtn' W~\ I Dt,j(1!, '~ I I I C - - ---1, /- Tl1S'--I r-l ~ .-1 ••••• 1'7 I III I _ I ________ , QJ Ii I .~ ~ ___ , •.: .S ..;." GAMEMGT.UNIT BDRY, - AVERAGE LIMITS WINTER RANGE, DEER a ELK -W~-W~ I K- NAME ~.-.-.,,; '\'.:. ;~l __ oP~~2nO!.-'".~.-'IUkf KEY AREA 1··~(-;;;.,~~.:~-+-··-1jJ:···-·~··,-·;rI-/~-t . I·' , . 1 • ~ ~ Sol.th IV ,.~. t ! 1 Ir. I '".".. "'. t.h It_'-f'Ot Cr'f:· ''"'4",...... It...! NI Bel!.:!I _~~~h_!.:.~_rLJ--snulhB92W~~,:.L~,:J:.. ("c~W(o~JJj91,yJ~~IL~t:" ~:::n9_Q'NL:';-:--J ,'I j,R89,~'£.__L __ L1( __L:__ kJR881ft;"I'tll~ KEY AREA BOUNDARY -N,M,P_M_ 11--:--R7WI'~--'--f~r ,--,]-----' R6W-'~ ,~,-',-(,i'\5YWJ.-: _: R5W I ~~": :: R4WI':/: ~-I---,-~'~R3-IjiJ'rI WfC>liD li! J. ltjfFt 'l ... ··\5.f ,I -; - i -ILlt-; : \:-'.--; --:c "4-~--- ;~~6/: -;~/--.-<tP: __ --.-J _' IU::.WR"" "" ~I __ I_ ~ •••~\ ! ~ ~J...lt_l\~-·~ __ 'J &' \~' : ~\~ : .g),~1f;_o:~__ -;~{r;: 441; ,rt1lddlJ ~L •• r'~r 1 QI 1'~ ~'\,i", '1· H S)CjJ '..... I I I 0I,f:t:.,.}1 I 't'" _-'_~ , ,P,Jkly~ July 1967 ~ - Wil . ; J',IOELTA - _ r..-;.......;;. co11,a i (f i~ I';Ii, "t', ,,,; hi;' " ' - I ',,~,--, -, v' ••.• 1'<; " ---,-- t i ,",.,i.,' __ ..•. ~ f '/ --+--~_. ," ,,'-' t -----r--r'~ 40' T 51 N , . ~_~ B. Boker --ll -f-J 'dhldYII1:~: '!i :'," , /' '\' : )i '.,Q , 1 klt""Y .. : t :"JI t .~1 : ~'ffl\}:1 S ,Ill ~(:': ~ l~: : :llA;DMI\r,. I -~'-'':=1 \ ..~~/ ,~ .~:jt~";»~1 -;.'"' 1 >':.1 ~ :.0_: ' ,-."... 7 -~ ~. I);:..~ ~ I t.!) l~, ,&V J I: r}, : jAL:,y-~ I'}' I ... • I . !. I': ~ Ronl,sh"'f"""' ! : ..,../~, t 1./.'_ ;\~1'v I 1 ~~\ h I \. .ri ~ ': iPc~-k Ih~Ofltj-~~:--'l-"")( :;::;,,~l~.ijd~: --·;)---···---·to-\-~,·-·,€!I'" : "'\_I~.uf'roi.! 1 ""';.i;,-I----, 1--·' ..·.<S ,e t~,,~!,j'~l; '~;'~>l--vl K-.. ;j I r -W-·~C;... j \ 1 J-~ -~_,?>1 I ,- -. .-{-- ,~. I # r~JI~:)iir,lfMoNTRos.; -lJ If ,__ '-'I!fco ••.. ~\ .... -1--1,,--j'~ - ~',,: 'f :-.;.-~-:- I 1 1 I ~ (f) ~ I /1 1 j 1 ~.'J> t.:,;_~ �- 200 - Table 1.--Summary of 39 browse range condition transects, Harmiond-Bar cus , Barcus-Ryans, and Ryans-Story Key Areas, Game Unit 22 (Piceance) big game winter range, Summer, 1967. Vegetative Type Number of Number and Name Transects Type Spec Le s" Associated Spe c Le s s= 4 - Sagebrush or 10 Artr, AME,Chde SYM,EUR,Chvd,GUT,Putr Rabbitbrush 5 - Browse 2 AME,Artr, Cemo SYM, GUT 9 - Pinyon-Juniper 25 P ,.T ,AME,Artr ,Cemo, Putr,Chde SYM,ERO,EUR,Chvd,GUT, Quga 18 - Annuals 2 Brte,AME,Chvd GUT, SYfvl, Chde ~'< ~'d~ Species used only in type designations but also listed variously as associated species from compositions arrived at by transecting. Species never used in type designations but recorded in compositions by transecting. Table 2. --Summary of 309 Browse range condition transects, Game Unit 22 (Piceance) big ~~inter range, 1965-67. Vegetative Type Numbe r of . 1/ . d S pecles. 2/ T ype SpeclesNumber and Name Transects A ssoclate 4 - Sagebrush or Rabbitbrush 65 P,J~Artr,Chde,Chna, CH~/, AME,Atco,Cemo, Quga ,SYM, Save; AGRf:.I, Agsm, Bogr, Stco Putr,POL,Eula,Teca,GUT 5 - Browse 67 P ,J,AME,Artr, Chna, Chvd,Cemo,Putr,Quga, SYM;Agsm, CAR, Stco Chde ,CHY-,EPH, GUT ,Teca Conifer 1 DF,J~SYM,AME,Quga PRU P,J ,DF ,AME,Arno,Artr, Cemo,Chde,Chvd,Putr, SYH; AGR.Y Atco,CEA,Chna,cHyl~EPH, ERO,Eula, GUT ,~re ,Quga, Save,Teca,TET2 Atco,Artr,Chvd;Agsm AME,Atnu,Chde,Eula,Save, SYM 6 - 9 - Pinyon-Juniper 169 13 - Sa ltbush 3/ 14 - Greasewood 1 Save,Artr Chvd 18 - Annuals 2 B.cte;AME,Chvd Chde,GUT,SYM Total 309 1) Species used only in type designations but also listed variously associated species from compositions arrived at by transecting. 1/ Species never used in type designations by transecting. 3/ Various mixtures and Chna. of rabbitbrushes ~/ Various mixtures of Agsm and Agin or other Agropyron. 2/ Tesp is present in some desert shrub associations; symbol thus might be for either or both species, depending upon transect location. but recorded (Chrysothamnus as in compositions sPPa), principally Chvd �- 201 Table 3.--Frequency of shrubs listed as key species from vigor ratings on 309 browse range condition transects, by key and total area, Game Unit 22 (Piceance), 1965-1967. as Key 1/ ,'1:./ Frequency Occurrence of Shrub Species Listed Art r AME Cemo Putr Chvd guga Chde Atco Arno Chna GUT Eu1a PRU Key Area 3 2 19 10 20 Rattlesnake 4 2 9 23 15 Greasewood "1 1 8 2 1 16 45 39 Thirteenmi1e 6 6 4 26 24 45 Segar Mountain 1 1 1 3 1 1 2 31 24 18 Hammond-Barcus 1 12 27 2 29 Barcus-Ryans 2 3 6 16 3 Ryans-Story -------------1 1 1 1 2 3 3 14 16 26 171 142 134 Totals ];.1 See Appendix, Chapter 8, Region 2, U. S. Forest Service Range Analysis Handbook or Denney (1962) for plant symbol meanings. ];.1 Vigor computations are made and scored for all species designated as being "key" on a transect. More than one species are very often listed for each transect, thus allowing for the discrepancy between total frequencies and total transects. Table 4.--Summary of ratings for browse and soil, 309 browse range condition transects, Game Unit 22 (Piceance) big game winter range, 1965-67. Rating Overall or Average Ra t Lng= Total Item Low Medium High 2.16 (Medium-!-) Browse Composition 309 122 115 72 No. of Transects 100 40 37 23 % of Total 1.48 (LoW+) Browse Density 309 10 127 172 No. of Transects 100 3 41 56 % of Total Browse Vigor No. of Transects % of Total 215 70 65 21 29 9 Soil Stability 23 220 66 No. of Transects 8 71 21 % of Total Computed on basis of Low=l, Medium=2, 1.40 (Low+) 1.86 (Medium-) 309 100 309 100 and High=3. �- 204 fact that State Highway No. 135 ends at its juncture with State Highway No. 133 near Paonia Reservoir. It is either a county and/or U. S. Forest Service maintained road from that point to Crested Butte. Furthermore, the Gunnison National Forest west boundary north of non-existent State Highway No. 135 does not extend north to intercept "the divide between the North Fork of the Gunnison River and the Crystal River". Department big game season regulation maps were used to guide the placement of unit boundaries on accompanying ~-inch and two-inch scale maps. Territory the unit on the ~-inch scale map was planimetered and yielded an area of approximately 422 square miles or 270,080 acres. of Physical Features: Unit 53 topography is dominated by rugged mountainous terrain in which northward and westward flowing tributaries of the North Fork of the Gunnison River originate and run. Principal tributaries of the North Fork are the Smith Fork on the south side, and Minnesota, Coal, and Anthracite Creeks on the north side of the unit. Mt. Lamborn, Landsend Peak, Coal Mountain, Mt. Gunnison, and several large mesas are found in the western and central part of the unit. Ragged Mountain and the many high peaks of the Ruby, Anthracite, and West Elk Mountain Ranges stand out at the north and east edges of the unit. Intervening high, rough ridges and mountains, sharp canyons, and a large portion of the West Elk Wilderness Area make much of this unit accessible only by horseback. Elevations vary from about 5,300 feet near Hotchkiss to over 12,500 feet on the higher peaks such as Mt. Gunnison, Ruby Peak, and Ragged Mountain. Industry: The small permanent human population in Unit 53 is located mainly along the North Fork of the Gunnison River near and between the towns of Hotchkiss and Paonia. The 1960 census gives populations of 626 and 1,083, respectively, for Hotchkiss and Paonia. Livestock and fruit growing are principal agricultural industries. Bituminous coal mining the Bowie-Somerset area along the North Fork has produced substantial wealth for the region. Summer tourism temporarily adds people and appreciable income to the area and its economy. Limits of Average Winter Range Smith Fork drainage: The winter range zone extends eastward less than a mile into Gunnison County north of the Smith Fork near the Smith Fork Picnic Ground. From upper Second Creek at about 9,800 feet elevation, the zone extends westward into upper Little Coal Creek, thence south, west and northwest of Landsend Peak in variable width. North Fork of Gunnison River drainage: The winter range zone varies in size considerably on the South, East, and Dry Forks of Minnesota Creek. From Dry Fork of Minnesota Creek, the zone extends northeastward to include West Flatiron, but no farther northward than the middle portion of Sylvester Gulch, and from there northwestward to Somerset. Probably due to north exposures, the upper winter range line nearly coincides with the north boundary of Unit 53 from Somerset to about the mouth of Coal Creek. According to Paonia Forest District personnel, there are three isolated high TIleSasthat are used between Deep Creek and Coal Creek, namely East Flatiron, The Pines, and Raven Mesa. Limited to �- 205 west exposures, the winter zone extends southward on Coal Creek about three miles. It then goes eastward about four miles on south exposures of Snowshoe Creek. There are about two sections of winter range inside of the National Forest in the Munsey Creek area north of Anthracite Creek in the Erikson Springs Camp Ground vicinity. General: In Unit 53, as in most other Colorado Game Units that contain both deer and elk, elk largely determine the average upper limits of winter distribution. They are better equipped physically to exist in de~p snow and are naturally more wary and inclined to avoid contac.t with humans. Accompanying two-inch and one-quarter inch to the mile scale maps delineate considerable winter range that was not type mapped and inventoried due to already mentioned time and manpower limitations. These delineated but uninventoried areas are presumed to be used mostly by elk and are included to draw attention to them and the need for further study. The average upper limit of winter use varies elevationally from a low of about 6,000 feet near Somerset to a high of approximately 9,800 feet on upper reaches of Second Creek, a tributary of Smith Fork. Unfortunately, the upper limit line disregards contour lines, varying up and down between the aforementioned extremes depending upon exposure, slope, and vegetative cover of the terrain. This situation makes it impossible to give an average elevation for the upper limits, alrhough it can be stated that the upper limit generally exists between 7,000 and 8,500 feet elevation • .Nowhere within the unit does the lower limit of the winter zone extend inside of the National Forest boundary. Also, the lower limit line was not established on the accompanying ~=inch scale map of the unit because it was outside the scope of this survey. Key Areas Four key areas were delineated in Unit 53. Three were named and are the Anthracite Creek, Land send , and Minnesota Creek Key Areas. Key area lines that are shown on maps correspond with the winter range lines where they tie together on the ~-inch scale map or parallel each other at about a ~-inch interval on the t wo-Tnch scale maps. A greater divergence than one-quarter of an inch on the latter means a significant change of intensity of big game use. Where key areas adjoin each other, such as in the Minnesota Creek and I..andsendvicinities, no dividing boundary was established between them because of the relative unimportance of such a line. One key area was delineated for elk in the Snowshoe Creek-Grouse Spring Creek locale but was not named. This key area falls within the winter range zone believed to have been reported to Mr. McCrain by Forest District personnel. Mapping and transect work was not done in this key area. Land Ownership The big game winter range inventory of Unit 53 is incomplete in that no lands were examined outside of the boundaries of the Gunnison National Forest. Of importance, nevertheless, are facts revealed in Table 1 relative to land ownership and vegetation types of intensively surveyed portions of the National �- 206 - Forest. Some 2,417 acres of a total of 13,397 acres of winter range are in private ownership. In other words, about 18% of inventoried winter range within the National Forest is patented land. Also, browse ranges under patent or 1,475 acres make up about 11% of the total National Forest winter range. Table l.--Vegetation type and land category acreage summary, big game winter range within Gunnison National Forest and Game Unit 53. Acreage Total Private National Forest Type or Land Category 477 112 365 l-Grassland 285 937 652 4-Sagebrush 8,321 1,475 6,846 5-Browse 2 568 566 6-Conifer 252 252 8-Barren (Rock) 2,252 358 1,894 9-Pinyon-Juniper 372 103 269 10-Broad-leaf tree 118 118 Bare soil ~.2 lOO Cultivated Subtotals (Ranges analyzed) 2,417 13,397 222 92662 9,440 Unc Las s Lf i ed= 1o,9sB 20,420 Total Acres *Includes winter range delineated ° ° 2,639 23,059 but not inventoried. Another pertinent statistic is the 23,059 acres of National Forest winter range (including both inventoried and unclassified ranges) that amount to only about 8% of the total area of Unit 53. It is assumed that many of the deer and elk occupying the large expanse of Unit 53 summer ranges do not winter within the unit, but just a small portion of the herds would have to concentrate on known unit winter grounds to make them of great importance in big game management. Vegetation Types Browse type: Of winter range lands that were type mapped, the largest component is Type 5, or Browse Type, with 8,321 acres (Table 1). Oakbrush (Quercus spp.) is the most common dominant shrub species. It is listed in nine types comprising 5,327 acres. In addition, oakbrush is given co- or sub-dominant status in four other browse types. Serviceberry (Amelanchier spp.) is the next most common dominant shrub species. It is awarded such'status in seven types comprising 2,975 acres and is co- or sub-dominant in seven other types. Other shrub species that are commonly found in TypeS associations are squawapple (Peraphyllum ramosissimum), big sagebrush (Artemisia tridentata), snowberrys (Symphoricarpos spp.), and true mountain mahogany (Cercocarpus montanus). Juniper (Juniperus spp.) was listed in one type. Bluestem wheatgrass (Agropyron smithii) is listed twice in type designations and is the only herbaceous species so recognized in the browse types. �- 207 - On the basis of times that they appear in type designations and acreages of the types involved, it must be concluded that serviceberry and oakbrush are the two most important shrub species on Unit 53 winter ranges. With serviceberry and mountain mahogany being rated as desirable for big game, and oakbrush, squawapple, and big sagebrush as intermediate, quality of the forage in the browse types appears to be good. Pinyon-juniper ty£e~ With respect to acreage, Type 9 is the second most extensive vegetation cover. It contributes 2,252 acres of a total of 13,397 acres (Table I). Pinyon pine (Pinus edulis) is not very abundant because it appears with juniper in only one type designation for a total of 268 acres. Juniper is listed singly in the other six types comprising a total of 1,984 acres. Big sagebrush, serviceberry, oakbrush, mountain mahogany, and snowberrys, respectively in that order, are the most important shrub species occurring in the pinyon-juniper and juniper associations. Presence of suitable browse forage species in timber types enhances winter range values of those types by providing food in conjunction with protective cover. Sagebrush type~ The Sagebrush Typ~ or Type 4, is the third most extensive type, providing a total of 937 acres. Big sagebrush is the dominant species in all types. Import u..'1t shrubby species associated with it are serviceberry, snowberrys, and fourwing saltbush (Atriplex canescens). Understory herbaceous plants recorded in sagebrush types include bluegrasses (Poa spP.) and bluestem wheatgrass. --Juniper was listed as a type species in three types. Evidently, abundance of the juniper was light enough not to give the types number 9 designation on the basis of vegetative aspect. However, due to an apparent oversight, the J symbol was not recorded first behind type number 4 as is customarily done for tree species rating type designation in any type. Thus, the types should have read 4-J-Artr, etc. Corrections were not made in conformance with that rule in order to avoid confusion in transect records and mapwork already accomplished. Other types: Minor acreages of abo111 500 acres or less were determined for each of the Type 1 (Grassland), Type 6 (Conifer), Type 8 (Barren), and Type 10 (Broad-leaf tree) categories. Bare soil (which technically should have been included with Type 8), Cultivated, and Unclassified are the other land categories presented in Table 1. Please refer to preceding parag raph s under the headings of Introduction, Limits of Average Winter Range, and Key Areas for explanation of the Unclassified category. Range Transects Browse Range Condition_Transects: Sixteen transects were established and read by Mr. McCrain. No attempt: is made here to draw conclusions on the results of the condition transects. This is in keeping with agreed-upon procedures established jointly by the Department and Forest Service whereby only comparisons between years on the same transect would be deemed valid. A condensed transect data summa.ry and copies of original individual transect data forms accompany this report for handy reference. �- 208 Vigor ratings for each transect were based on total key browse plant hits, regardless of whether these were one or more kinds of key plants. Since 1962, procedure has stipulated that vigor computations should be made for each key species, if more than one is listed, and the lowest rated one or more species provide the vigor rating for the transect. August, 1967 Rev. Jan., 1968 Fort Collins � https://cpw.cvlcollections.org/files/original/f9157d0e23331deee9e391bddcf58290.pdf 5062fe94541053fdd9e59f10439aca2d PDF Text Text July, 1968 - 209 JOB PROGRESS REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO ------------------------ Project No. W-38-R-22 Work Plan No. 1 Deer-Elk Investigations Job No. 5 Title of Job: Experimental Trapping and Marking Techniques Period Covered: April 1, 1967 through March 31, 1968 Personnel: Raymond J. Boyd, M. C. Coghill, Errol E. Ryland, Don Benson, Earl Cochran, Glen Hinshaw, Bernard Goetze, Dan Potts, Gordon East, Pat Waters, Dick McDonald, Herb Browning, Gene Bassett, Wayne Knisley, Russ Mason, Bill Fischer, Harold Gresh, Harvey Bray, Clarence Gore, Dick Lichtenberg, Dallas Morgan, Hal Burdick, Claude White, Bill Roland and Harold Wixon. Abstract During the 1967-68 trapping season, a total of 171 elk were trapped and neck banded. All of these animals were marked with colored collars denoting different trap sites. A set of plans and construction specifications for a new, improved metal ear tag. �- 210 - Objectives: 1. 2. 3. Write a set of specifications for an improved metal or plastic ear tag. Determine the feasibility of marking big game animals from the helicopter with paint or dye. Develop specifications and techniques for a big game "drive-trap!'for both winter and summer trapping. Procedures: 1. Contact various metal companies to see what light metal alloy might be obtained that could be used in a light stamping mill such as those used by ear tag companies. a. b. 2. 3. Contact various tag companies to see if they manufacture an ear tag that is stronger than ones presently available. Contact various plastic wholesalers to obtain plastic material that could be used for light, strong ear tags and markers. Modify the present pressure tank and spray gun that was developed for us by Sky Choppers, Inc. so that a more solid stream of paint can be shot from the spray gun while the copter is in forward motion or hovering within "ground-effect". The first modification will be to make the valves stronger so that the tank can take 1,500 pounds of pressure. Flights by fixed-wing aircraft and helicopters will be made on a bi-weekly basis in all trapping areas to evaluate the visibility of marking devices. Design and assist in the construction of a "drive-trap" in the Saguache area on Sheep Creek. This trap to be basically a large corral with a smaller holding pen, squeeze chutes, and either natural cliffs for wings or 1/4 to 1/2 mile long wings into which the elk will be driven with vehicles or helicopters. Recommendations: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Encourage Regional persoD~el to set up regular: systematic schedules of aerial flights over the various trapping areas in order to determine movements of banded animals and areas of concentration at different seasons of the year. Keep up-to-date maps of each trapping area with a cumulative record of all sightings and tag returns from hunter-killed elk. These mapped locations will be helpful when big game seasons are set within local areas. Assist Regional personnel in selecting sites for new traps and act as State Coordinator for neck band colors and ear tag prefixes so that no duplication occurs. Act as clearing house for band sightings, tag returns and other similar information sent in by hunters and others who see marked elk or deer. Complete construction and revise plans for the portable squeeze chutes to be used in conjunction with the portable group trap. Assist in setting up and running the experimental summer "drive-trap" in Rocky Mountain National Park. �- 211 - EXPERIMENTAL TRAPPING AND MARKING TECHNIQUES Raymond J. Boyd and M. C. Coghill A tentative set of plans was drawn up for the portable squeeze chutes to be used in conjunction with the portable group trap developed under this job in past years (Figs. 1 and 2). The main idea being that the chutes could be used singly or fastened together to make a "string" of chutes if the need arose. All parts were cut on jigs so that any part would fit any other chute. This type of construction would allow easy set-up of the chutes by anyone having use for them. A complete listing of materials, are shown below: Materials their cost and the construction and Specifications for One Portable specifications Squeeze Chute No. Item Cost 2 3 3/4" exterior plywood sheets; 5' x 6' (sides) 3 2 2" x 4" x 12' 2" x 4" X 10' 1 211 X $24.48 16.32 3.51 2.04 .58 20 3/l." exterior 4" x plywood sheets; 2' x 6 i (doors and top) 6! 3/8" X 4" carriage bolts, washers and wing nuts Total Cost' 2.75 $1+9.68 Frame Specifications There are two frames (Fig. 1) required for each single squeeze chute. If a "string" of two or more chutes are required, one less frame than the number of chutes in the "string" will be required (i.e. two chutes, three frames, etc.). Each frame is constructed from 2" x 4" construction gether with 16 penney cement coat nails. grade lumber fastened to- A one-inch by 2 foot slot should be cut out of the top 2" x 4" of the frame~ and a similar size slot is to be cut in the center of the bottom 2" x 4". These slots are to keep the sliding doors from being pushed away by the aniTIk.l inside the chute. The sliding doors are to be constructed with 3/4 inch exterior plywood and should measure 2 feet by 6 feet with a 6 inch by 2 inch slot cut in the top center of the gate for a hand hold to raise and lower the gate. �~ 1" r' x 2' SLOT IN TOP 2" FOR SLIDING x 4" 2 feet 8 inches ---+ I~ GATE 5 feet I\) f-' I\) 2" x 4" FRAME WING NUTS 3/8" holes, 8 in each side 2 feet PLYWOOD SIDE PANEL 1.1 ~ 6 feet 1/ 1" x 2" SLOT CUT IN CENTER OF BOTTOM 2" x 4" TO HOLD BOTTOM OF SLIDING Fig. 1. ,)0 GATE Front view of frame to be used at each end of a portable squeeze chute. constructed exactly alike. Every frame to be �2" x 4" Fig. 2. Side view of p Lywood panels showing method of attachment to frame. �- 214 Side and Top Specifications Sides of the chutes are to be made from 3/4 inch exterior plywood, cut and spliced so that they are 6 feet by 5 feet. Each panel should have four 3/8 inch holes drilled in each end so that they can be bolted to the frame (Fig. 2). The bolts are fastened with wing nuts so that the chutes can be put together rapidly at the trap site. The panels are bolted to the inside of the frame uprights, spaced with a one-inch gap for the sliding gate. Each panel would have two 14 inch holes covered with sliding doors, cut one in each en~ so that the animals could be tagged and banded inside the chute. There is no bottom in the chute, it sets directly on the ground. The top is constructed with 3/4 inch exterior plywood with a one-inch by 2 foot slot cut in each end that fits directly over the slot in the top of the frame. The top is then bolted to the frame with two 3/8 inch carriage bolts at each end. Ear Tag Specifications After a series of communications with the Salt Lake Stamp Co., Salt Lake City, Utah and the National Band and Tag Co., Newport, Kentucky, the following specifications were drawn up for an improved big game ear tag. The tags should be made from a monel metal that measures 0.0625 inches in thickness. Monel, an alloy of aluminum, is of sufficient strength so that bending and breaking of the piercing tip in our present tags should be completely eliminated. Such a tag could be manufactured, but at the present time stamping machines used by both these companies are not strong enough to make tags out of monel. Thus, we are limited, at least for the present, to the aluminum tags we are now using. Various types of plastics were also investigated with the following comments received from both tag companies and Plasticrafts, Inc., of Denver, Colorado. None of these three firms could guarantee a plastic tag that would stay in the ear 100 percent of the time. Plastic tags that are supple enough to handle at the time of tagging get extremely brittle after a year or more exposure to weather extremes. None of the companies knew of any plastic now on the market that eliminates the problem of tags becoming brittle after a long period of exposure. Marking Big Game From a Helicopter The valves in the pressure tank that was originally constructed for us by Sky Choppers, Inc. were not strong enough to hold the amount of air pressure necessary to force the paint out in a stream that would hold together while the copter was in forward motion or hovering within ground-effect. In an effort to utilize this equipment without having to go the expense of purchasing a new pressure tank, we tried to find a stronger type of valve that could be used on our tank. Valves that were strong enough to hold the air pressure we felt was needed (1,500 lbs. per sq. in.) could not be fitted to the tank we had on hand. �- 215 We next tried to locate a combination pump and reservoir tank that could be used for our purposes in the helicopter. There are several readily available items of equipment that would meet our requirements, with the exception of the very important weight factor. The pump and tank that appeared to be most satisfactory for our work weighed 160 Ibs. and was 30 inches high. The height of the equipment made it necessary to mount the tank and pump outside the bubble on the cargo rack of the copter. This amount of weight on one side of the copter was not a safe loading practice, so we had to abandon this piece of equipment. We have been notified by two companies in Grand Junction, Colorado of some new pump/pressure tank equipment that might do the job we required, but have not had a chance to try it in a copter as we did not find out about its avail~ ability before the project segment closed. Our helicopter contractor has offered to keep on the lookout for spray equipment of a type that might be modified to suit our needs in this area. Until such time as satisfactory'equipment becomes available, we are recommending that this phase be dropped. Big Game "Drive-Trap" All fencing, panels, etc. for the "drive-trap" on Sheep Creek near Saguache, were set up during the early winter of 1967-68. Snowfall in this area was very heavy the past winter causing elk to move through the Sheep Creek area very rapidly. We were not able to make a drive because the elk were not in the area for any length of time. We are recommending that Federal Aid project personnel participation in the "drive-trap" efforts on Sheep Creek be discontinued. We have carried this job for three segments and have yet to be-able to find enough elk to make a drive to determine if the set-up will be successful. Regional personnel will continue to try and catch elk in this.area. With some slight modifications, a "drive-trap" for use in the surrrrner is being built by the National Park Service in Rocky Mountain National Park. Northeast Regional personnel and W-38-R personnel will assist in setting up and running the trap during the late summer of 1968. Elk Trapping Record, 1967-68 During the 1967-68 trapping season, there were eight elk traps set up in various areas on the western slope of Colorado constructed according to plans and specifications developed by W-38-R personnel. A total of 171 elk were tagged and banded in these traps. In order to have a published record of trap sites and tag numbers, Tables 1 through 8 list the elk tagged and banded during 1967-68 in Colorado. Project personnel spent time only on trapping at the Sapinero Game Management Area near Gunnison. �- 216 - Information that can be gained from a concentrated banding program is of extreme value to the Management Division. Game Management Unit boundaries were set up in Colorado many years ago, mostly on the basis of opinions of the resident W.C.O. as to the general boundaries of the herd in question. Banding information will help determine if changes in unit boundaries are necessary. Prepared by: Raymond J. Boyd Wildlife Researcher �- 217 - Table 1. Date Tagged 1/5/68 1/5/68 1/5/68 1/5/68 1/5/68 1/16/68 1/5/68 1/8/68 1/8/68 1/11/68 1/11/68 1/13/68 1/15/68 1/16/68 1/16/68 1/16/68 1/23/68 1/30/68 2/5/68 2/7/68 2/5/68 2/5/68 2/5/68 2/7/68 2/11/68 2/12/68 2/12/68 2/12/68 2/12/68 2/15/68 2/15/68 2/15/68 2/15/68 2/15/68 2/20/68 2/20/68 2/20/68 4/6/68 ';'( Elk trapped and tagged at the Coller Management Area, Rio Grande National Forest2 Colorado - winter 1967-68. Ear Tag Neck Band Sex Age Number Color Weight 8L-48 Mature ? Female Wbite & Orange t Calf Female SL-49 White & Orange SL-51 Yearling 285 Male White & Orange SL-52 ? Calf Female White & Orange SL-53 ? Calf Male White & Orange SL-54 Mature 430 Female White & Orange SL-55 t Yearling Female White & Orange SL-56 Male Calf 102 White & Orange SL-60 Mature 220 Female White & Orange SL-62 120 Female Calf White & Orange SL-63 240 Old Female White & Orange SL-64 150 Calf Female White & Orange SL-65 105 Calf White & Orange Female SL-66 100 (est.) Calf Female White & Orange SL-67 490 Mature White & Orange Female SL-68 120 Calf Female White & Orange SL-69 320 Mature White & Orange Female SL-71i( Mature 430 Female White & Orange SL-90i'"* 140 Calf White & Orange Male SL-91 400 Mature White & Orange Female SL-92 Mature 355 Female White & Orange SL_93 Calf 175 White & Orange Female SL-94 110 Calf Male White & Orange SL-95 325 Female Yearling White & Orange SL-96 180 Calf White & Orange Male SL-97 %0 Yearling White & Orange Male SL-98 185 Calf White & Orange Male SL-99 280 Yearling White & Orange Female Calf SL-100 100 White & Orange Male SL-I02 Calf 220 White & Orange Female Calf SL-l03 165 White & Orange Female SL-104~h,,"* White & Orange Male Yearling 305 SL-I05 Yearling 250 (est.) White & Orange Female SL-I06 Calf 175 (est.) White & Orange Female SL-107 Yearling 200 (est.) White & Orange Female SL-108 Yearling 260 White & Orange Male White. & Orange SL-I09 160 (est.) Calf Female SL-110 110 (est.) Calf White & Orange Male Red tag only i,"* Silver tag only *i(* Silver tag only �- 218 - Table 2. Date Tagged 12/18/67 1/5/68 1/5/68 2/17 /68 Elk trapped and tagged at the Mill Creek trap~ San Juan National Forest Colorado - winter 1967-68 Ear Tag Neck Band Sex Age Number Color Weight Male Yearling Red P-223 392 (spike bull) Mature Female P-224 Red 572 Mature Female Red P-225 587 Male Calf P-228 Red 285 Table 3. -- Elk trapped and tagged at the Bayfield frap, San Juan National Forest, Colorado - winter 1967-68 Date Neck Band Ear Tag Tagged Sex Weight Age Number Color Mature 12/30/67 Female White & Orange 563 P-98 Mature, 1/2/68 Female White & Orange 340 P-99 1/2/68 Female Calf White & Orange 290 P-102 1/2/68 Female Calf White & Orange 280 P-l03 1/2/68 Female Calf White & Orange ? (roped) P-104 Female ? (roped) 1/2/68 Calf White & Orange P-l05 1/5/68 Female Calf White & Orange 240 P-106 1/7/68 Female Calf White & Orange P-107 255 Mature 1/7/68 Female White & Orange ? (roped) P-108 Male Yearling White & Orange 435 1/14/68 P-109 Male Yearling White & Orange P-110 495 1/14/68 Female White & Orange 210 Calf P-lll 1/17/68 Mature White & Orange Female 400 1/24/68 P-1l2 Female Old White & Orange 2/2/68 P-1l3 510 Calf White & Orange 2/6/68 Female 230 P-1l4 Female Calf White & Orange 2/6/68 P-1l5 235 White & Orange ? Female Yearling 3/28/68 P-1l6 0 �- 219 - Table 4. Date Tagged 1/8/68 1/9/68 1/9/68 1/9/68 1/10/68 1/10/68 1/11/68 1/15/68 1/15/68 1/15/68 1/15/68 1/18/68 1/22/68 1/31/68 1/31/68 1/31/68 1/31/68 1/31/68 1/31/68 2/9/68 2/9/68 2/13/68 2/13/68 2/15/68 2/15/68 2/15/68 2/15/68 2/20/68 Table 5 • Date Tagged 2/3/68 2/3/68 2/6/68 2/6/68 2/10/68 2/10/68 2/14/68 2/14/68 2/14/68 2/14/68 Elk trapped and tagged at the Falls Creek trap, San Juan National Forest Colorado - winter 1967-68. Ear Tag Neck Band Sex Age Number Color Weight t Calf H-107 Blue ? Female Mature H-108 Blue ? Female Mature H-109 Blue ? Mature Female H-110 Blue ? Mature Female H-1ll Blue t Mature Female H-1l2 Blue ? Mature Female H-1l3 Blue ? Male Blue ? Yearling H-114 Mature Female H-1l5 Blue ? Female Calf Blue ? H-116 Yearling Female Blue ? H-1l7 Male Mature Blue ? H-118 Mature Female Blue H-1l9 .500 (est.) Mature· Female H-123 Blue 450 (est.) Female Yearling Blue 400 (est.) H-124 Female Yearling Blue 400 (est.) H-125 Female Mature Blue 400 (est.) H-126 ? Calf Blue t H-127 Female Blue ? Yearling H-128 Mature Female ? Blue H-129 ? Female Mature H-130 Blue Mature Female Blue ? H-131 Blue Male Yearling 325 (est.) H-132 Mature ? Female. Blue H-133 Blue ? Female Yearling H-134 Blue ? Female Calf H-135 ? Female Calf H-136 Blue Mature ? Female Blue H-137 Elk trapped and tagged at the Dry Gulch trap, Gunnison National Forest Colorado - Winter 1967-68. Ear Tag Neck Band Weight Co Lor Number Sex Age Female Female Male Female Female Female Female Female Female Female Mature Calf Calf Calf Mature Calf Mature Calf Mature Calf S-282 8-283 8-286 8-287 8-289 8-290 8-40 8-41 8-42 8-43 White White White White White White White White White White 525 265 325 230 410 265 530 260 525 265 �- 220 - Table 6. -- Elk trapped and tagged at the Big Beaver trap, White River National Forest, Colorado - winter 1967-68. Date Ear Tag Neck Band Tagged Sex Age Number Color 12/26/67 Male Calf B-24 Blue 12/26/67 Male Calf B-25 Blue 12/27/67 Female Old B-26 Blue 1/6/68 Female Mature Blue B-27 1/6/68 Female Mature RW-128 Blue 1/6/68 Female Calf B-28 Blue 1/6/68 Female Mature B-29 Blue 1/6/68 Female Yearling B-30 Blue 1/6/68 Female RW-23 Blue 1/6/68 RW ..31 Female Mature Blue 1/6/68 Male Calf RW-32 Blue 1/6/68 Female Old RW-33 Blue 1/6/68 Female Yearling RW-34 Blue 1/6/68 Mature Female RW-35 Blue Male 1/6/68 Calf RW-36 Blue 1/6/68 Mature Female Blue RW-37 1/10/68 Female Mature RW-38 Blue 1/10/68 Male Calf RW-39 Blue 1/10/68 Female Mature RW-40 Blue 1/10/68 Male Calf RW-4l Blue 1/15/68 Female Mature RW-42 Blue 1/15/68 Mature Female RW-43 Blue 1/16/68 Female Mature RW-44 Blue Male 1/16/68 Calf RW-45 Blue 1/16/68 Female Old RW-46 Blue Female B":47 Calf 1/16/68 Blue 1/16/68 Female Old B-48 Blue 1/16/68 Female Yearling B-49 Blue Mature 1/21/68 Female B-50 Blue Male 1/21/68 Calf RW-115 Blue Mature 1/21/68 Female RW-116 Blue 2/7 /68 Female Mature B-5l Blue 2/7 /68 Female Yearling B-52 Blue �- 221 - Table 7. -- Elk trapped and tagged at the 81ater trap, Routt National Forest, Colorado - winter 1967-68 Neck Band Ear Tag Date Color Number Age 8ex Tagged 8tripe Red/White Mature 8-27 Female 2/20/67 II II Yearling 8-28 Male 2/28/67 " Yearling 8-29 Male 2/28/67 " " " Mature 8-30 " " Female 2/28/67 " 8-31 " Yearling Female 2/28/67 " " Yearling 8-32 Female 2/28/67 " " "II 8-33 Yearling Male 2/28/67 " " 8-34 Yearling Female 2/28/67 "il " " Calf 8-35 Female 1/10/68 " " 8-36 Mature Female 1/10/68 " " " Calf 8-37 Female 1/10/68 " " " 8-38 Calf Female 1/26/68 " " " S-39 " Female 1/26/68 " " 8-40 Calf " Female 1/26/68 " " 8-41 " " Female 2/15/68 " II 8-42 Female 2/15/68 " " " 8-43 Female " 2/15/68 " 8-44 " " Female 2/15/68 " 8-45 Female 2/15/68 " " "II .~" 8-46 Female 2/15/68 " 8-47 Female " 2/15/68 " "Ii 8-48 " " Female 2/15/68 Table 8. -- Elk trapped and tagged at the Indian Run trap, Routt National Forest Colorado - winter 1967-68 Neck Band Ear Tag Date Color Number Age 8ex Tagged Pink None Mature Female 1/5/68 None " Yearling Female 1/5/68 Mature 1-1 Female 1/13/68 " None Mature Female 1/13/68 " Mature 1-4 Female 1/13/68 " Yearling 1-2 Female 1/17/68 "II Yearling Female 1-5 1/17/68 1-6 Mature Female 1/17/68 " " Mature 1-7 Female 1/17/68 Mature 1-8 " Female 1/17/68 Mature 1-9 Female 1/25/68 " Yearling 1-10 Female 1/25/68 " 1-11 Calf Female 1/25/68 " 1-12 Calf Female 1/25/68 " 1-13 Calf Female 2/23/68 " Calf 1-14 Female 2/23/68 " Mature 1-15 Female 2/23/68 " 1-16 Mature Female 2/23/68 "II 1-17 Mature Female 2/23/68 ��July, 1968 - 223 - JOB PROGRESS REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO --------------------- Project No. W-38-R-22 Work Plan No. 1 Deer-Elk L~vestigations Job No. 6 Title of Job: Experimental Immobilization Techniques Period Covered: April 1, 1967 through H3.rch31, 1968 Personnel: Raymond J. Boyd, Dr. Harry Gorman, Dr. Robert Davis, Harold "Red" Palmer and H. Stevan Logsdon. Abstract A total of 61 native big game animals were immobilized during the past segment. Succinylcholine chloride was used on five bighorn sheep and 34 elk; M-99 was given to four buffalo, two elk and six deer; sernylan was given to six buffalo calves; and a 10:1 mixture of sernylan and succinylcholine chloride was injected into four mature cow elk. Plans and specifications are described for injection of succinylcholine chloride in combination with hunting arrows. �- 224 Objectives: 1. Determine the most efficient immobilizing dosages for Colorado big game species. 2. Compare the euthanization qualities with two types of hunting arrows. and tranquilizing of succinylcholine agents and chloride injected Procedures: 1. Immobilizing agents will be injected into deer, elk and buffalo with Cap-Chur 1/ equipment. Previous work has established usable dosages of succinylcholine chloride and phencyclidine hydrochloride on deer and elk, but further refinements are necessary. In addition to using the aforementioned compounds singly, it is planned to use them in mixtures. Phencyclidine hydrochloride (Sernylan) and succinylcholine chloride (Sucostrin) will be mixed in the ratio of 10:1. Adjustment will be made, as indicated by the results of the mixture, until the most efficient ratio is found. 1/ Palmer Chemical and ~quipment Coo, Douglasville, Georgia. Depending upon availability ofaniTI~ls, at least two deer and two elk will be injected with at least ten replications of each drug mixture. New drugs will also be used as they become available. 2. There are two methods of introducing the euthanization agent, succinylcholine chloride, through an arrow in archery big game hunting. One of these involves a syringe adaptor for Cap-Chur syringes that fit the shaft of an arrow. The syringe is fitted with a barbless 3/4 inch needle for injection of the drug. The other is an adapt ion of the above principal, but differs by using a regular hunting arrow point in combination with a Cap-Chur syringe. Such a combination was developed and built during the past segment under this project. Recommendations: Drugs and their use in wildlife research and management are becoming more and more important every day. Population studies of big game mammals can be improved greatly through marking of individual animals. Marking offers possibilities for study of various population phenomena such as growth rate and patterns, annual adult mortality, social behavior, migration and mechanisms for natural regulation of numbers. Rates of population growth can be measured through repeated aerial counts and/or calculation of population size using Schnabel Estimator Methods or Peterson Index calculations. The history of different age groups can be traced throughout the period of population growth, and changes in the age structure may be studied. It could even be possible to measure changes in natality as the population size increases, as it would to measure changes in the mortality rate in different age groups. Changes in social behavior might occur with an increased population density, and these changes could be studied with special emphasis on territorial behavior. In the area of conservation, drugging of game animals can contribute very significantly to the preservation of wild animals. Considerable moving of game animals may some day be required to adjust wild populations, where possible, changing land-use patterns. Demands may be made to remove big game mammals �·- 225 from farming and grazing land to avoid crop damage, reduce grazing competition, and even to control disease. For these reasons, close contact should be maintained with the College of Veterinary Medicine at Colorado State University concerning new drugs that show promise for use in our field. Further, these drugs should be obtained from pharmaceutical companies for testing in our pens on native game animals. 1. Personnel stationed at the Game Research Center who do not have extensive field assignments should be assigned to these drug studies. 2. Investigate further the euthanization phase with the assistance of Dr. Fred Glover of the Colorado Cooperative Wildlife Research Unit. 3. Summarize all dosage data and publish in the Journal of Wildlife Management. ��- 227 - EXPERIMENTAL IMMOBILIZATION TECHNIQUES Raymond J. Boyd Findings Results of drug tests will be summarized combination of drugs. in sections devoted to each drug or Succinylcholine Chlorideo--Fourteen elk (eight females and six males) were injected a total of 34 ·times~ with 28 of the injections resulting in immobilization. Five bighorn sheep we re given succinylcholine chloride with only one of them becoming immobilized. Results of this work are shown in Table 1. M-99.--The use of the new immobilizating drug, M-99, on native big game animals in the United States is so new that the limited amount of information we were able to collect this past segment will be presented in narrative form so that the various actions of the study animals can be followed. American No.1 - Male buffalo, 11:23 A.M. 1% min. 2 min. 4~ min. 5 min. 8~ min. 10 min. 11 min. 13% min. 14\ min. 17\ min. 21 min. 25 min. 31 min. 34 min. 35 min. 11: 59 2 3 4 6 7 10 12 15 to 25 Buffalo (Bison bison) 6 years old, est. weight 1,700 Ibs. - injected in loin with Cap-Chur equipment combined with 20 mg. of Acepromazine. 2.0 mg. M-99 - standing, irritated by syringe - switching tail violently - ataxic, standing with legs spread wide apart - feeding on grass - wobbly - walking slowly - feeding on grass - front shoulders trembling while walking - standing, hind legs spread wide apart - walked out of sight - grunting wh i.Le being chased by observers - initiated fight w Lt h another bull of similar size - down on knees, fighting - running with peculiar gait (Hackney) - fell down and got back up while fighting another bull A. M. - injected in left hip with Cap-Chur equipment combined with 10 mg. of Acepromazine min. min. min. min. min. min. min. min. LO mg. M-99 - still fighting strongly with another bull (more intense) - quit fighting, circled twice (about 15 foot circle) - started fighting aga i.n - drugged bull becoming - up and down on knees weaker while - quit fighting, running with Hackney - fighting gait lake toward small kicking heels and running out of water in and walking staggering around lake, for water seems to have a desire �- 228 - 28 31 33 to 45 45 min. min. min. min. - walking along water-filled ditch - fell down, got up in less than two minutes - fell d.own three times, not completely innnobilized - lassoed, hauled into horse trailer, taken to corraI 12:55 P.M. - stayed on feet long enough to be guided into loading chute - then collapsed 1:00 P.M. - given 2,400,000 units of Pen-Strep, still down 1:10 P.M. - given 3.5 mg. M-285 I.M., no effect 1:15 P.M. - given 2.5 mg. M-285 I.M. 1:20 P.M. - struggling to arise 1:22 P.M. - breathing improved (deeper and more rapid) 1:26 P.M. - breathing normal 1:32 P.M. - got up and stayed up 1:40 P.M. - loaded into truck, bull normal, but slightly tranquil No.2 - Female buffalo, 14+ years old, est. wt. 800 Ibs. 10:35 A.M. - hit in left hip with 3.5 mg. of M-99 combined with 38 mg. of Acepromazine 10:50 (approx.) down, traveled about It miles (lost her in canyon) 2:10 P.M. - found her, she had been down about 3~ hours 2:43 P.M. - given 4 mg. of M-285, respiration improved rapidly 3:08 P.Me - given 2 mg. of M-285, respiration improved 3:30 P.M. - load.edher into horse trailer (between 2:43 P.M. and 3:30 PoM. we had ropes on her and led her 500-600 yards to a trailer) was slightly bloated and on right side when found, had fallen and slid about 30 feet down slope from first fall area. No. 3 - Female buffalo, 6 years old, est. wto 800 lbs. 10:35 A.M. - hit in left hip with 2.7 mg. of M-99 combined with 4-2mg. of Acepromazine 10:50 A.M. - collapsed, lying on brisket, head up, had traveled one-half to three-quarters miles before collapse 11:50 A.M. - given 4.0 mg. of M-285, up in 4:00, cross-roped and led 150 yards to a horse trailer and loaded. Some slight Nystagmus noticed at 11:15 A.M. No.4 - Male buffalo, 6 years old, est. wto 2,000 Ibs. hit with 5.0 mg. of M-99 in mid rear of right hip 2:50 4:00 5:00 7:05 - slight sign of ataxia, stumbling - pacing nervously. snorting or heavy sharp breathing - very ataxic, stumbling, weaving. - down on right side, head up, good innnobilization 29:00 31:00 tied left hind fool: s o Tie could not kick, removed wire f rom a round hoof, bad looking wound , treated with vet powder and Furacin ointment - gave 40 mg. of Accpromazine I.M. - gave 10 mg. of M-285 I..H. �- 229 38:20 45:00 got up on his own accord, slight quiver in hind quarter - laid down on left side, licked hoof, got up again and was eating hay at about 1 hour SUMMARY down in 7:05 up in 7:20 after N-285 was given I.No American No.1 Elk (Cervus canadensis) - Female elk, 5 - 7 years old, est. wt. 400 lbs. injected in rear of right hip with 2.0 mg. of N-99 combined with 32 mg. of Acepromazine 2:00 2:40 3:00 3:30 3:45 3:50 4:15 4:30 4:45 5:00 5:15 5:30 5:40 6:00 6:40 7:00 8:00 9:00 9:15 9:30 10:40 23:30 24:15 - some slight signs of ataxia - laid down - forced up by us, made to run - wanted to'lie down, kept on feet - slight stumbling and incoordination - hind quarters weak (hump in back) - tried to sit down (hind quarters very weak) - laid down on her own - rolling eyes, white showing - holding head and neck to right side, tipped to one side - forced back on feet by us very incoordinated, stumbling, weaving, weak in hind quarters trying to sit on hind quarters -laid down on her own - tilting head and neck back and to right - approached her, could hardly get up, finally on feet - laid down again, eyes half closed, head tilted to right - head tilted far back - heavy breathing, nostrils flared wide open - rolled on to left side, hind legs extended, on brisket, head turned back, quiver in front shoulders - rolled completely onto left side, shoulder muscle quiver, head slowly lowering to ground level - can almost get up when approached, easily restrained - given 4.0 mg. of N-285 in jugular vein - on feet follows people like a puppy (usually very wild, would not let anyone approach her under normal conditions), gives a squeal occasionally, l3?z minutes after N-285 given would eat some hay. Began to be afraid of us at 13~ minutes, became slightly aggressive Began to act more normal,for her. o No. 2 - Female elk, 5 - 7 years old, est. wt. 425 lbs. injected in left hip with 3.0 mg. of M-99 alone 1:45 2:00 2:15 - eyes droopy - slight ataxia noticed - muscles along back quivering �- 230 - 3:00 7:30 8:30 10:30 .11:45 13:00 13:30 15:00 15:30 15:45 16:15 17:45 18:45 22:15 27:15 29:15 32:45 38:45 44:45 45:45 - weaving slightly in rear quarters nose high in air , choppy gait while trotting - hopping gait, excited, crouch in rear quarters running sideways, almost fell, hopping gait, crouch in rear quarters, front legs extended - sat down, forced up by us, pacing - sitting down, leaning against fence - got up, forced by us - leaned against fence, hind quarters almost on ground - laid down, head tilted back - got up again, weak in hind quarters - sitting down like a dog, fell onto side - lying on brisket, weaving - tried to arise, fell - given 7.5 mg. of M-285 I.M. - almost able to arise, looks more alert on feet by herself, some pacing, mouth open, panting - acting more normal, some pacing - gait almost normal, but unsteady (bumped by another elk and almost lost footing) - some stiffness in front shoulders while walking, gait slightly choppy - appeared very nearly normal and we left her alone SUMMARY able to approach and handle at 17:00 on feet 5:00 after M-285 was given MULE DEER (Odocoileus hemionus) No.1 - Female deer, 28 mo. old., est. wt. 120 lbs. given 0.55 mg. of M-99, never did go down, showed extreme anxiety running with humped back gait, able to finally rope her, drenched her with Thibenzole and released her. She continually ran for 45 minutes, roped her again and gave her 2.2 mg. of M-285, released her. Apparently completely recovered next day. No.2 - Female deer, 15 mo. old, est. wt. 80 lbs. given 0.40 mg. of M-99, never did go down, ran with humped back and rocking gait, laid down at 14:00. Able to catch her by hand. Left her in evening apparently alright, found dead next day. She had persistent diarrhea at time of injection. Cause of death was probably excessive exercise and anxiety. No. 3 - Male deer, 29 mo. old, est. wt. 150 lbs. given 1.5 mg. of M-99, first noticed ataxia at 4:08 went down at 15:45, got up 2~ minutes later. Easily held him, tied him up and weighed him, drenched him with Thibenzole. Gave him 9.0 mg. of M-285 after 33 minutes. On feet in 30 sec., walking nearly normal in one minute. Some anxiety after three minutes, walking well, but some stiffness, maybe from being tied up. �- 231 - No.4 - Female deer, 28 mo. old, est. wto 100 Ibs. given LO mg. of M-99, showed some anxiety and distress at 5:20 ran with humped back at 6:20. Down and good immobilization at 52:41. Drenched her, gave Pen-Strep (1,000,000 units). Gave her 6.0 mg. of M-285 12:30 after immobilization. Up in 53 seconds, some incoordination, but on feet. No. 5 - Female deer~ 28 moo old, est. wt. 125 Ibs. Given 1.5 mg of M-99. Started humping back at 5:00, stumbling at 7:50, chewing and bleating at 13:00 More chewing and bleating at 24:30. Able to grab her and tie her up at 35:10. Gave her 2,000,000 units of Pen-Strep and released her without antidote. Recovered okay. 0 No. 6 - Male deer, 27 mo. old, est. wt. 150 Ibs. Given 1.5 mg. of M-99. Chewing at 7:00, incoordinated gait at 8~00, anxiety while trotting at 10:20. Heaving while standing ~t 13:30, when running crossed front legs, very incoordinated. Threw him by hand at 24:30, tied him up, sawed off antlers, drenched him. No pupil dilation noted. Given 7.5 mg. of 1-'1-285 after 31:00. On feet in 45 seconds, walking normally in 1:03. Sernylan.--Hith the assistance and advice of Harold "Red" Palmer, of the Palmer Chemical and Equipment Coo, manufacturers of the Cap-Chur equ Ipment , six yearling buffalo were injected with 115 mg. of Sernylan each. He di.d not want the animals to go completely down, so something less than an immobilizing dose was chosen for the work. All of the animals became rather ataxic, not too afraid of us and we THere able to herd all six of them 1/4 to 1/2 mile to a corral where we loaded them into a truck for transport to another pasture. They all appeared to be completely recovered two hours after injection" Estimated weights of the buffalo were 400=450 Lbs , each. Drug Mixtures.--In an effort to eliminate undesirable side-effects of Sernylan (bloat) and Succinylcholine chloride (respiratory paralysis)9 it was suggested Tilemix the two compounds in a 10: 1 ratio (Sernylan to Succinyl) and attempt to immobilize elk with the resulting mixture. Additional construction on the pens housing the test animals precluded extensive tests with this mixture on elk, however, four elk were injected with the combination with the following results: No. 1 - Mature cow elk ;tleighing422 Lbs , chloride and 75 mg. of Sernylen. 5:15 8:50 25:00 No , 2 - Yearling chloride 6:45 8:35 given 7.5 mg. of Succinylcholine - showed slight ataxia - some stumbling when walking - no further reactions, left her. cow elk weighing 3lj·0 Lbs , given 7.5 mg. of Succinylcholine and 75 mg. of Sernylan. - showed slight ataxia - some stumbling and incoordination while walking �- 232 9:20 11:00 14:20 16:00 17:00 34:00 46:45 - stiff in front quarters, weaving while standing still - nearly normal running gait - stiff in front quarters, stumbling and weaving while turning in circle - slight incoordination - stiff in front quarters - very slight incoordination still slight incoordination, left her alone Throughout the observation period she gave periodic calls or crying sounds (typical squeal of a calf or young elk) No. 3 - Mature cow elk weighing 422 lbs, given 8.5 mg. of Succinylcholine chloride and 85 mg. of Sernylan. Syringe hit in mid-rear of right hip, bounced out immediately, she became very excited, running while I was in pen, constant trotting along fence after being hit. 15:00 20:00 50:00 - no noticeable effects - no noticeable effects - no noticeable effects, left her. No. 4 - Yearling cow elk weighing 340 lbs. given 8.5 mg. of Succinylcholine chloride and 85 mg. of Sernylan. 7:00 11:00 17:00 20:00 21:15 21:30 22:45 24:00 26:30 60:00 - some licking of lips and nose - more licking of lips - very slight incoordination, lots of licking -slight incoordination, very careful walk, some stumbling - stumbling and weaving while walking - more stumbling and weaving - muscle quiver in front shoulders, hips and loins - weaving while standing still - some stumbling while walking - no further reactions, left her. More tests are needed with an increased dose of succinylcholine chloride but still keeping the 10:1 ratio before we can say whether this mixture is effective on elk. �- 233 Table 1.--Dosages of Succinylcholine chloride used for immobilization of elk and bighorn sheep in Colorado, 1967-68. Est. Total Mg. per ImmobiRecovery (min) A e Wei ht Dosa ze Pounds lized (min Sex mature Bighorn.= female no reaction 135 ~ 19 mg. 0.1407 Bighorn female mature 135 # 21 mg. 0.1556 no reaction Bighorn female mature 140 ift 21 mg. 0 1500 no reaction Bighorn female mature 130 # 22 mg. 0.1691 no reaction Bighorn female 122 #!/ 25 mg. 0.2049 mature 9:00 80:00 Elk ]/ 425 # 15 mg. 0.035 22: 25 female mature 10:20 female mature no reaction Elk 400 # 14 mg. 0.035 Elk 400 if: 13 mg. 0.032 female mature 8:30 10:45 Elk female no reaction mature 450 # 14 mg. 0.031 450 if: 16 mg. 0.035 Elk female no reaction mature Elk mature 23:00 26:00 female 425 # 15 mg. 0.035 18:02 Elk female mature 475 # 18 mg. 0.038 12:58 Elk 20.48 female mature 5:40 450 # 15 mg. 0.033 Elk 14:21 female mature 6:.12 400 # 14 mg. 0.035 Elk female 11:09 5:45 calf 225 # 9 mg. 0.040 Elk 12:31 female calf 7:53 200 # 8 mg. 0.040 17:20 3:42 Elk female mature 475 # 15.4 mg. 0.0324 17:50 6:36 Elk mature 0.0324 female 475 # 15.4 mg. 16:30 mature 3:32 Elk female 475 # 15.4 mg. 0.0324 20:00 5:36 Elk female mature 500 # 18 mg. 0.036 235 il= 9 mg. needle plugged by bone Elk female yearling matu.re 26:56 3: 11 Elk female 0.0315 425 # 13.4 mg. 19: 26 4:38 Elk female yearling 250 # 10 mg. 0.0400 17:20 Elk female mature 47 5 ift 15 4 mg. 0.0324 3:42 475 if: 15.4 mg. 0.0324 17:50 6:36 mature Elk female 16:30 3:32 female mature 475 il= 15. 4 mg. 0.0324 Elk 20:00 15:00 Elk female mature 475 # 18 mg. 0.037 . 20:00 mature 500 # 18 mg. 0.036 6~00 Elk female matu.re 22:50 Elk female 450 # 14 mg. 0.031 10: 30 20:00 8:30 Elk female mature 450 # 14 mg~ 0.031 25: 52 425 # 14 mg. 0 033 4:00 Elk male 22 mo. needle plugged by fat Elk male 450 # 16 mg. 30 mo. 25:00 2:00 Elk 450 # 17 mg. 0.038 male 31 mo. 19:45 5:40 Elk male 37 mo. 700 # 21 mg. 0.030 no reaction 650 # 18 mg. 0.028 Elk male 25 mo. 25: 20 7:00 Elk 650 # 19.5 mg. 0.030 male 25 mo. 23:50 5:45 Elk male 61 mo. 800 # 21 mg. 0.026 15:45 7;44 Elk male 16 moo 400 # 13 mg. 0.0325 19:00 7:12 mature 500 # 15 mg, 0 030 Elk male 0 0 0 0 1/ 2/ }/ (OilS Rocky Mountain Bighorn Sheep canadensis) -these were free-ranging Actual weight (sheep was weigheafter she was immobilized). Rocky Mountain Elk (Cervus canadensis) - these were penned elk sheep. o On the basis of the above work on penned animals, mature female elk take an average immobilizing dose of 0.0336 mg. per lb. of body weight, with a range of 0 031 mg. per lb to 0.038 mg. per lb. Mature male elk, that become immobilized, take an average of 0.0314 mg. per lb. of body weight. 0 o �......•~~ ~- ~'•••..•• ~~ ~....:. ~ ~- ~~~~~.~4 -.......,.. "-"~- """':.~*iI' \.0 _, ~'-.').. ro +" W Figure 1. Female buffalo No. 3 being led to horse trailer. of M-285o Given one-half the immobilizing dosage �ro VJ \Jl Figure 2. Female elk No. 2 showing sitting position assumed by all elk immobilized with M-99. �......----- 1 1/4" "0" RING ~ - IVVW'v"I T =J 11/32" 5/32" .•. 1 [\) W iff: 50 DRILL BIT (70/1,000") . 7/8" Fig. 3. Tapered plug for hunting arrow point. Fits into syringe body onCap-Chur arrow adaptor. Hunting point is silver soldered to the plug and holes are drilled through the point to allow drug passage through the point. (See text for additional specifications.) 0\ �July, 19b8 - 237 - JOB FINAL REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SE~MENT State of COLORADO Project No. W-38-R-20, 21 and 22 Work Plan No. Title of Job: 1 Deer-Elk Investigations Job No. 7 Experimental Telemetering Devices Period Covered: April 1, 19.65to March 31, 1968 Personnel: George D. Bear, Raymond J. Boyd, Marion C. Coghill, Richard N. Denn¥, Richard B. Gill, Dav~d F. Gordon, Leslie D. Hibbs and E. J. Prenzlow. Abstract Objectives were to determine the opportunities and effectiveness of radio telemetry and to test some available telemetering devices on big game. A partially annotated bibliography on wildlife telemetry along with a feasibility report and questionnaire survey were undertaken to ascertain status and effect of other big game telemetry investigations. Six of nine other big game telemetry projects planned to monitor less than ten animals; all were concerned with movement patterns; seven were studying some aspect of behavior; and five were correlating environment to animal use. On this and five of the other nine, acquisition and cost of satisfactory equipment and various problems relating to transmitter efficiency were the promary problems encountered. This project tested eight custom made transmitters using two commercial receivers (Eddystone 770 Rand Markusen VHF, 12 - channel) on two wild and six penned elk. Transmitters operated 45, 63, 90, 121, 133 and 147 days on penned elk. Whip, loop and modified whip transmitter antennas were tested for transmission quality and durability. Modified whip antennas were the most efficient. Eight neon blinker systems, attached by collars to penned animals, were tested for visability and durability. Systems were visible at night over eleven months using two or three 45 volt radio batteries. �- 238 Objectives: 1. Review literature pertaining to schematics, costs and effectiveness of various transmitters and receivers developed and used for radio-tracking. 2. Survey big game research biologists by questionnaire within states to determine present status of big game telemetry. 3. Establish what kinds of telemetry equipment are available and determine most suitable transmitters and receivers to use on big game. 4. Develop and determine most suitable neon blinkers Procedure s: 1. Various professional journals, were reviewed and an annotated personnel. the fifty to use on elk. books and newsletters on radio telemetry bibliography was prepared by project 2. A questionnaire 3. A feasibility and status report concerning radio telemetry in Colorado was prepared and considerable correspondence was mailed and received involving availability of telemetering equipment. Decisions were made to purchase two receivers (Eddystone 770 R Communications Receiver - Markhusen VHF, l2-channel receiver) and eight transmitters with loop and whip antennas. Transmitters were constructed by S. L. Markusen - Electronics Specialties Company, and these were tested on two wild and six penned elk at the Research Center in Fort Collins. 4. Eleven neon blinker systems were constructed and eight were attached by collars to elk in pens at the Research Center. The length and frequency of the blinking light were controlled by different sized capacitors. Five different colored shields made from Aleene 's non-critical liquid plastic resin protected the glow lamp. On six systems two 45 volt U30 radio liB" batteries were used, and on four systems three batteries were used to test if increase wattage would significantly increase life of the unit. Also visibility and durability of each unit were tested. concerning type, amount, quality and methods of collecting big game telemetry data' was mailed to forty-five individuals and agencies. Results were tabulated and incorporated into a synopsis and mailed to parties who requested information. Recommendations: Wait until pendulum has swung to data gathering in telemetry field rather than equipment development. This will alleviate most of the cost of development and production and allow monies to be spent primarily on data collection, which should be our main objective. This however, raises another question. If we wait, when should we start? In my opinion, W-38-R (Big Game Investigations) should not start-rather continue-until considerable and sufficient monies are established for well designed and specific jobs that will answer particular questions on management problems. In other words, be sure we have adequate, well defined problems before going to a lot of expense trying to solve them. The first step would be to get these problems in writing so that they can be analyzed.and considered. �- 239 - EXPERIMENTAL TELEMETERING DEVICES E. J. Prenzlow Results Literature Review and Annotated Bibliography.--Wildlife telemetry literature was reviewed and abstracted periodically during the course of the investigation. Besides obtaining information from major wildlife publications (The Wildlife Telemetry Newsletters, Telemetry, Instrument Society of American Journal and AIBS Bioinstrumentation Advisory Council, personnel attended the the 1966 Biomedical Telemetry Conference. Information published by above sources, and from correspondence to investigators now engaged in wildlife telemetry, were abstracted and compiled into an annotated bibliography with assistance from Mr. William D. Cooper, Wildlife Management student,Colorado State University. Bulk of ~he bibliography was presented in the Segment 21, July 1967, Game Research Report, Part Two. Publications abstracted since, appear in this report (Appendix A). A feasibility and status report were presented concerning wildlife telemetry on big game in Colorado (see Segment 21, July 1967, Game Research Report, Part Two). Report gave a brief history of wildlife telemetry, its potential and deterrence. Alternatives which the Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Division could pursue in utilizing radio telemetry were suggested. Telemetry Questionnaire and Synopsis.--A questionnaire concerning the type, amount, quality and methods of collecting big game telemetry data was mailed to 45 individuals and agencies during 1967 to determine status of other telemetry projects. Of 45 contacted, 9 returned information from big game projects, 7 reported on various species other than American big gam~, 13 stated they were not involved with telemetry and 16 did not respond to the questionnaire. Questions and responses from seven big game projects are listed consecutively as they appeared on questionnaire to orient readers with sequence. It was impractical to include all materials received from the survey. If additional knowledge is desired'on a special project, the particular respondent could provide the most detailed information. Addresses of these individuals and their respective agencies are listed under Question 1, along with addresses and information received from individuals working on various other species. �- 240 1. Is your organization using radio telemetry on big game? Jack W. Lentfer Alaska Department of Fish and Game 1018 International Airport Road Anchorage, Alaska 99502 Thomas W. Mussehl Montana Fish and Game Department Fish and Game Building Montana State University Bozeman, Montana 59715 Gera ld 1. Day Arizona Game and Fish 5971 East 17th Street Tucson, Arizona 85911 William C. Lightfoot Oregon State Game Commission 303 Extension Hall Corvallis, Oregon 97330 W. G. Macgregor California Department of Fish and Game 1416 9th Street Sacramento, California 95801 Donald Beale Utah Fish and Game Division Range Science Utah State University Logan, Utah 84321 L. K. Jeter Florida Game and Fish Commission 319 Adams Drive Crestview, Florida 32536 Douglas J. Pierson Washington Department of Game 600 North Capitol Way Olympia, Washington 98502 J. R. Tester and D. W. Warner Museum of Natural History University of Minnesota Minneapolis, Minnesota 55455 Additional Telemetry Projects Howard A. Baldwin, Director Sensory Systems Laboratory P. O. Box 5145 Tucson, Arizona 85703 Experimentation in telemetry since 1959 collecting movement information together with physiological and environmental correlates; several species including lion, elephant, zebra and buffalo in Africa, Adelic penguin in Antarctic, marine mammals and javelina (collared peccary); methods of transmitter attachment included suturing directly to skin, various collars and a harness arrangement. �- 241 Stephen P. Cross Department of Zoology University of Arizona Tucson, Arizona 85721 Working on dissertation (Ph.D.) requirement on the western University of Arizona utilizing radio telemetry. gray squirrel at G. Edgar Folk, Jr. Department of Physiology College of Medicine University of Iowa Iowa City, Iowa 52240 Custom built transmitters ($25 - 50 each) for implanting in body cavity of small and large mammals. Supplied memorandums and discussed methods of attachment to subject, range, weight and cost of transmitters, circuitry, battery life, transmissio~ through the ground and selection of frequencies. Jon Ghiseler Assistant Professor of Biology Lycoming College Williamsport, Pennsylvania 17701 Telemetry addresses activities are concerned with small rodents. Offered names and of other individuals who are concerned specifically with big game. E. J. McColloch Department of Zoology University of British Columbia Vancouver 8, British Columbia Canada Three year project almost completed on Blue Grouse. Instrumented 6-8 animals using flexible tubing harness of polyethylene. Transmission under one mile in mountainous terrain at 150.30 to 150.55 mco Problems encountered: (1) effect of topography on signal propagation, (2) transmitter power-weight ratio. Elmer R. Norberg Game Bird Supervisor Idaho Fish and Game Department Po O. Box 25 BOise, Idaho 83707 One season results on movement and behavior of Sage Grouse. up to one mile with frequency of 150 - 151 mc. Transmitter has whip antenna and is attached by harness. Operation range (40 - 50 grams) �- 242 - Gary E. Smith Assistant Professor Division of Animal Science University of Wyoming Laramie, Wyoming 82070 Physiological study to determine rumina! pressure changes by utilizing pressure transducer in domestic sheep and cattle. Not concerned with transmission for more than 50 feet. 2. What type of information are you collecting? (Table 1.) 3. How long have you worked in the field of telemetry? Nine big game telemetJ;y projects have been in operation from three to nine years (X = 3.14 years). Two projects '(Alaska and Arizona) related that at this time they were in planning or experimental phases. Other projects (game birds, marine animals, African species and domestic livestock) reported operations from one to eight years (X = 4.0 years). 4. What make of receiver (s) is used? (Table 1.) 5. How many animals are you attempting to instrument at one time? All big game projects are attempting to instrument less than 10 animals except for Utah (10-15 animals). However, Minnesota has a capacity for up to 50 and Florida would like to instrument "as many as I can." 6. What transmitters have you used? (Table 1.) 7. Is transmission line of sight? Alaska Arizona California Florida Minnesota Montana Oregon Utah Washington - "Yes" - "No" - "Yes" - "In most cases" - "Hore or less" - "Essentially" - "Reception distance depends on terrain, weather, and all other factors affecting radio wave transmission." - "For best results - yes" - "Basically, but the hotter transmitters would bend the signa 1 somewhat." �- 243 Table l.--Telemetry projects information reported by questionnaire. Investigation Physiography Alaska Dept. Fish & Game J. W. Lentfer Polar Bear (M,E) Receiver Lockheed Elec. Co. Houston, Texas Transmitter Lockheed Elec. Co. Arizona Game & Fish G. I. Day Javelina (M,B) F Sensory Sys. Lab. Tucson Ariz. Con. ; (Y&L) Sensory Sys. Lab. 148.5-148.9 (W) $50 D-ll; $185 Elec. Unlimited Sacramento, Calif. 31 (L) $35 Rockv canyons 15 - 115 F 3,000-4,000 ' Calif. Dept. Fish & Game W. G. Macgregor 15 - 100 F Mule Deer (M,B) F 5,000-12,000' Fla. Game & Fish Comm. L. K. Jeter Deer (M,B,E) F Roll. sandhill Davco Davidson Co. 24 - 105 F Tallahassee, Fla. Minneapolis, Minn. 60-110' DR- 30; $400; (W&L) 26 (L) $65 Mus. Nat. Hist.,U. Minn. Gently rolling J.R. Tester & D.W.Warner -35 -95 F (L&W) Deer (M,B) F 1000' $75; (L&Y) 500 days; $15 Mont. Fish & Game Dept. T. Mussehl Pronghorn (M,E) F Moose (M,E) F Level-broken -35 -105 F 3,500-4,000' Rough Mtns. -50 -90 F 4,500-7,500' S. L. Markusen Esko, Minn. $500; (Y) S. L. Markusen l50.8l5-l5l.085(W) 12 mos.; $75 Oregon State Game Con~. W. C. Lightfoot Deer & Elk (M,B,E) F&P Broken Mtns. -30 -100 F 400-5,000v Davco Tallahassee, Fla. DR-30; $400 Cochran Design 26-27 (L) 10 mos.; SS Utah Fish & Game Comm. D. Beale Pronghorn (M,B) F Rolling 50 - 100 F 5,000-6,000' Pat Butler Salt Lake City $200; (L&Y) Pat Butler (Cochran) 50 (L) 6 mos.; $30; GG Wash. Dept. of Game D. J. Pierson Bear and Elk (M,B)F&P Rain Forest 20 - 110 F 0-3,000' Boyd's Hobby Shop Tumwater, Wash. D11/M; $250; (L) Cochran Design 30.05-30.19 (L) 12 mos.; $30; EE Abbreviations Used in Table 1: INVESTIGATION - Agency: Investigator: Species; Data obtained (M)=Movement, (B) = Behavior, (E) = Environmental; (F)= Field study, (p)= Pen study PHYSIOGRAPHY - Terrain: Temperature Range: RECEIVER - Manufacturer: (L) = Loop, (W) = Whip Address: Elevation Range: Model no.; Cost; Antenna (Y) = Yagi, TRANSMITTER - Manufacturer: Address: Frequency Range: Antenna (W) = Whip, (L) = Loop; Maximum Life; Cost; Results (SS)= Satisfactory, (GG)= Good, (EE)= Excellent �- 24·4 8. At what distances will your equipment operate efficiently? Table 2. -- Transmission distances of different projects Project Minimum (Feet) Maximum (Miles) Arizona 10 - 50 4 California o 2 Florida 50 1 Minnesota o 5 Montana 10 7 Oregon 2,640 2 Utah 2,640 7 Washington o 19 Optimum (Miles) 1.0 .75 .3 - 1.0 3.0 .1 - 4.0 1/ 1.5 II Open terrain only. 9. What method is used to attach the transmitter package to the subject? All big game respondents stated they used a neck collar of some type (leather, dacron, etc.) with transmitter attached except for Arizona where they also used a shoulder harness on javelina. Respondents working on game birds appeared to favor harness-type attachments, whereas, Dr. G. Edgar Folk, Jr. at the University of Iowa recommends implanting within the abdominal cavity. 10. What is the total weight of the equipment carried by the animal? -- Weight of total transmitter package by species Table 3. Project Alaska California Florida Minnesota Montana Oregon Utah 11. Species Polar Bear Mule Deer Deer Deer Pronghorn Moose Deer & Elk Pronghorn Total Weight (Grams) 1,816 908 227 350 454 908 681 150 Is your telemetry work applicable to wildlife management, and if so in what ways? Alaska "Yes, we hope that telemetry will aid in determining ranges and discreteness of populations of bears off the Alaskan coast. Information will be used in determining amount of harvest that bears in different areas should be subjected to." Arizona "Yes, we need to know more about herd integrity and home range for management. It will also help us to better evaluate inventory data." �- 245 - California "Yes, follow movements" Florida "Determine: (1) home ranges (2) seasonal movements (3) shifts in home ranges (4) diel movement patterns (5) mating behavior (6) movements of released deer." Montana "Evaluation of antelope habitat of herbicides on habitat." Minnesota "See published Oregon "Determine activity and movement patterns, especially nocturnal as related to forage community types, forage preferences, as related to range improvement practices and conifer damage." Utah "Use for research Washington '~ovement studies relating movement to habitat, deterrnine periods and seasons of activity, herd 'distribution and herd interchange. The data can be used to establish recreational harvest seasons which are based upon animal availability and population patterns. Also used to establish management units which are based upon the distribution patterns of the animals." 12. Does the biological requirements and effects reports." data gathered purposes." justify the expense of your program? Alaska "Still unknown" Arizona "None gathered California "Yes" Florida "No expense Minnesota "Yes" Montana "Three instrumented antelope greatly facilitated observing conventionally neck banded antelope in the same area. As in any marking, the greatest expense is manpower to follow animals. We do not find the costs unreasonable and are expanding use of technique." Oregon "Hardly the place for a cost-benefits operation long enough to determine." Utah ''We expect that it will." Washington "Yes" yet" justification has been made." analysis Q Not in �- 246 13. Please number in order of decreasing importance, what you consider to be the main problems encountered using telemetry equipment on big game species. Alaska "Still unknown for this study. A major problem will be doing the amount of flying that will probably be necessary to monitor for meaningful results." Arizona "1. 2. 3. Florida 4. 5. Cost of telemetry equipment. Catching javelina has been a problem in our program. Failure of equipment-especially transmitter-short life one to two months. Tracking problems. Replacement parts and repair." "1. Transmitters. 2. " 4. " " 5. Montana " 3. "1. 2. " " " " Lack of access in certain areas, especially when direct observations are desired. We have since developed a very workable antenna hook-up for use from plane. Reception may be limited in Mtns. - can be overcome with plane since reception range is much farther." Minnesota "1. 2. 3. Capture-recapture. Neck expansion in males. Instability of home ranges." Oregon "1. 2. 3. Electronic component failure. Lack knowledge electronics, biological personnel. Difficulty of recapture specific telemetered animals." Utah "1. 2. 3. Range of transmitter. Longevity of transmitter. Means of attaching to animal without effects. Cost of equipment." 4. producing side Washington 14. 15. "Initially the major problems are the acquisition of satisfactory equipment and the training of personnel for the proper use of the equipment. Equipment maintenance could be a problem if technicians are not readily available. In our present circumstances we have the equipment problems ironed out, and our primary problem in radio tracking elk will be personnel training and equipment maintenance. Sometimes it could be a problem convincing administrators of the usefulness of radio tracking." Would it be possible to visit your operation? All big game projects answered "yes", however, most wanted some kind of notification. Would you like a summary of this survey? All big game projects were interested survey. in receiving a summary of this �- 247 - Telemetry Devices.--Satisfactory telemetry receivers were easily obtainable from several sources.In that few problems were encountered using receivers by other investigators, the majority of our time and effort were spent obtaining and testing transmitters and transmitter antennas. The following paragraphs describe equipment used and tests conducted on several pieces of telemetry gear. Equipment.--An Eddystone 770 R receiver was used occasionally during the first work segment (April 1965 through March 1966). This model is a single conversion communications receiver covering frequency range 19 to 165 Mc/s. It operates directly from all standard AC mains, supplies and receives SW, AM, FM and NBFM signals. Besides having many applications as a test instrument, it operates under extreme climatic conditions and directly calibrated scales indicate clearly frequency to which the receiver is tuned. Two antennas, a Scale 2CA5 and FM stereo, were used with a receiver. A block schematic diagram of the receiver is shown in Figure 1. In 1966, a portable receiver with earphones and hand held directional yagitype antenna were purchased from S. L. Markusen - Electronic Specialties. This 150 Mc/s VHF model with 12 preset channels is a crystal controlled double conversion superhetorodyne made specifically for tracking animals A beat oscillator is incorporated for continuous wave reception and the audio filter can be switched in to give extra sharp selectivity and better signalto-noise ratio. A meter gives visual indication of signal strength. An input signal of .1 uv will give good meter deflection. A vernier tuner will shift frequency of the receiver 4 kc either side of channel center which allows operator to zero signal exactly on the notch of audio filter. The transistorized unit will operate on standard flashlight batteries (Size D) from 50 to 100 hours and weighs 5.5 pounds, including batteries. Appendix B, furnished by Mr. Markusen, gives complete details of the circuitry and specifications of this unit. A detailed instruction manual is available also, but not included in this report. o Transmitters were purchased from S. L. Markusen. These 150 Mc units are crystal controlled with an input range of from one to five IDW. Emission is AO(continuous wave) and frequency stability is better than 0.005% from 0 to 100 F. Transmitters weigh 15 g. and are encapsulated in epoxy resin. Each unit with mercury batteries is enclosed in an aluminum cover bolted to a four-inch wide elk neckband made from heavy duty cotton, covered with vinylcoated nylon fabric and diamond stitched with dacron thread. Collar is 30 in. in circumference and will easily slip over the head of an antlerless elk. Circuit diagram is included as Figure 2. Tests Conducted.--Originally, tests were to be conducted with the 770 R Eddystone receiver and transmitters custom-made by a firm in Denver,Colorado However, at that time, W-37-R personnel (Wild Turkey Project) were using the same model Eddystone with different types of receiving antennas and custommade transmitters with limited results. Their primary problems were with transmitters and receiving antennas, not with the receiver. o In that information was available on the performance of an Eddystone receiver, Mr. Richard N. Denny, then Project Leader of W-38-R, decided to purchase and test transmitters and a VHF receiver from S. L. Markusen with whom he had been corresponding. Markusen's equipment had been used previously �W VI R.F. ~ AMP. ~ 1sT IF ~ MIXER AMP. V6 VS V4 \1....2 IF AMP. 2ND ~ ~~ f-+- V7 IF AMP. IF AMP. ~ 3RD 4TH ()'Q • •..... + · ~ o o 'I' en GAIN os c. ;.;' o IF c> V3 LOCAL J" " - ::r' (l) It j ;:i $I) VIOA AGC RECT . e+ •••• AGe o LINE 0.- •••• $I) " ()'Q '"'I I\> I\) .j::"" ;:i CP ~ o - g. I-' --J --J o ~ I:%l 0.- ...• " 11r "" ~en V8 FM LIMITER ~ V9 FM D I SCR I M VI4A MUT I NG ~ CONTROL .•. ,. 02 & 3 NOISE ~ RE CT. VI3 NOISE AMP. ~ e+ § c ~ (l) (l) f-I. ~ AF IN~UT -- '"'I • •. DI AM DET. VI48 FM VI2 BFO o - VIOB I-+- NOISE: LIMITER 1ST AF AM b ,It •.. .•. , VII METER CONTROL AMP. []J I-J- VISA 2ND AF AMP. V 158 PHASE SPLITTER .•. 1 VI6 & 17 I--+- L.! AF NE ~LI L. OUTPUT ~TE .. -II' I �- 249 - 2N299b f i ~ Antenna. i n p u. +, I +0 5 Milliwatts. + I.S-4.ZV Crystal - International crystal. Crystal Company fifth overtone Frequency is within 0.005% of assigned channel within the range of 30 to,IOO degrees Fahrenheit. In actual use the body heat of animal keeps it within this range. Fig. 2. Circuit diagram of Markusen transmitter. �- 250 with apparently satisfactory results on deer and moose in Maine, Rhode Island and Newfoundland. Another reason for this decision was that it was more feasible to purchase commercially available equipment than construct transmitters and antennas to use with the Eddystone, especially since project personnel had only a limited knowledge of electronics. Originally the Markusen 150 Mc/s receiver and six transmitter collars containing light mercury batteries were purchased. At a later date, two more Markusen transmitters were purchased. Table 4 lists the characteristics and longevity of the eight transmitters that were tested. Table 4.--Characteristics and six penned elk. Transmitter I.D. S-268 S~269 S-270 S-27l S-272 S-273 S-499 S-502 and longevity Frequency 1~0.8l5 Mc 150.830 150.845 150.860 150.875 150.890 150.830 150.845 of transmitters put on two wild Antenna Whip Modified Whip Modified Whip Modified Whip Modified Whip Whip Modified Whip Whip Longevity (Days) 1/ Transmitters put on wild elk and never recovered. Signals were picked up using helicopter for one day. 1/ Operated on the shelf for 31 days before attachment to subject. Antenna broke during attachment while subject was recovering from dosage of succinylcholine chloride. Transmitter operated at least another 60 days because when subject was recaptured, a signal could be detected when receiver was held right next to the transmitter. Two transmitters (8-270 and S-273) were tested first on penned elk. One unit had a standard whip antenna and the other a modified whip (antenna se~~ around the circumference of collar). Both units were received equally well with receiver located in the laboratory 200 yards from the animals, through several walls 'and amongst several power lines. Transmitter collars had apparently no effect on the elk or their acceptance by the remainder of the animals. Two other transmitters (S-268 and S-269) were attached to free-roaming elk in southcentral Colorado. One of these cows was instrumented on Pole Mountain (Rio Grande National Forest) and relocated several times by helicopter that same day to check her condition and transmission quality. At one point, she was tracked for approximately four miles in rough terrain. The next day she could not be relocated. A second cow was instrumented on upper Ute Creek. She also was relocated the same day. Tone of the signal changed accordingly as she stood, walked or ran. from a few yards to approximately one half mile away. The following morning, she was relocated in heavy timber approximately two miles from where she was captured. A cow elk, apparently her because of type of neckband, was observed �- 251 - from other aircraft some six miles south of the original site on two different occasions that following year. It was intended to purchase directional antennas suitable for mounting on aircraft and fly weekly or bi-weekly flights and attempt to monitor these two animals. The Resident Engineer at Biomedical Electronics Laboratory, Denver Research Institute, University of Denver, was contacted regarding specifications for receiving antennas for both helicopter and fixed-wing aircraft. No follow-up was made on this request because of a change in in project personnel, and as a result this portion of the investigation was not completed. However, results were obtained from the original four transmitters placed on cow elk in pens at the Research Center in Fort Collins. Two transmitters, one (8-270 with modified whip antenna) and the other (8-273 with whip antenna), were put on the animals on June 27, 1966. The signal from transmitter 8-270 was last heard on August 29, 1966 (63 days) and from transmitter S-273 on August 10, 1966 (45 days). The transmitter packages were retrieved on January 1, 1967 and other than normal wear, no external damage was evident (Fig. 3). Both transmitters, complete with antennas and attached to the collars, were returned to S. L. Markusen Company for inspection to determine what, if any, malfunction has occurred. Markusen's inspection revealed that the transmitters "showed heavy wear on the antennas". On January 19, 1967, when the above two transmitters were recovered, the same two elk were again instrumented with the last two of original six Markusen transmitters (S-272 and S-27l). The transmitters, both with modified whip antennas, operated 121 days (January 19, 1967, May 19, 1967) and 133 days (January 19, 1967 to May 31, 1967) respectively. Continuous wave transmission was received satisfactorily from all transmitters using Markusen's l2-channel, VHF tracking receiver equipped with a directional yagi- type antenna •. The last two transmitters were ordered from Markusen in July, 1967. These (S-499 and S-502) were put into operation on December 14, 1967 but not attached to penned elk until -January 12, 1968. Transmitter S-502, which was modified for a whip antenna and photo cell in an attempt to increase battery life, transmitted a strong signal up to the time it was placed on a cow elk. However. while she was recovering from a heavy dose of succinylcholine chloride the transmitter antenna broke off at its attachment. Sixty days later when she was recaptured a signal could be detected when the receiver was placed next to the transmitter. No further tests were made on this unit because of a lack of personnel and time. Transmitter S-499 operated satisfactorily for 147 days. This unit had a regular modified whip antenna built by Markusen. Originally this investigation was designed to test several types of transmitters Later, it was decided to limit this investigation to a pilot-type project due to problems encountered in the time required to obtain necessary equipment and then get it into operation. Also, it was apparent that in order to take full advantage of this.method of data retrieval, it would take full-time personnel with considerable experience in electronics and a sizeable budget. Due to the above circumstances, the decision was made to fulfill primary obligations and not instigate any objectives, at least not until a definite need arose. e . �- 252 - Figure 3 - Transmitters 8-270 and 8-273 after being removed from penned elk. Whip antenna attachment is shown on upper collar. Lower collar has a modified whip antenna. �- 253 It was concluded that Markusen's 150 Mc receiver and transmitters were satisfactory for determining location and/or movement of elk in relatively rough terrain. Pen studies indicated that a modified whip antenna would not break away from the transmitters as readily and had about the same signal strength, even when attached around the collar by relatively heavy nylon fabric. Neon Blinker System Eguipment.--Eleven neon blinker systems were constructed from component parts by project personnel. This system of marking big game originally was the idea of Dr. Kenneth Hungerford at the Un Ivers Lt y . of Idaho (Fig. 4), Each unit with batteries was attached to a four-inch wide elk neckband similar to those used for mounting transmitters. The length and frequency of the blink was controlled by capacitors. Four systems had Mallory 2.0 MFD 100 VDC capacitors, three had 1.0 capacitors and three had 0.5 capacitors. Each system included a 1.0 megohm, 1.0 wa t t resistor and was powered by ~5 volt radio batteries (Eveready NEDA No. 415). Figure 4 is a circuit diagram of the system. The 105-125 volt, 1/4 watt General Electric glow lamp (GE NR7 Neon bulb) was protected by a clear plastic capsule filled with different colored Aleen's non-critical liquid plastic resin. The entire unit (glow lamp, resistor, capacitor and battery leads) was potted in resin to prevent breakage and to make it weather resistant. All connections we re soldered and batteries were made waterproof with silastic (Fig.5). Tests Conducted.--One blinker unit with two 45 volt batteries was constructed and left in the laboratory to test the shelf-life of the system, It lasted eight months before diminishing to a point of non-detection. Ten other units were built at a later date and eight of these were placed on penned elk. Six of ten units had two 45 volt batteries while four units contained three 45 volt batteries. It did not appear that the third battery increased life of the system enough to merit the extra expense. Two units malfunctioned at or shortly after construction. It was not practical to repair them because components and soldered connections were already potted in resin. Frequency of the blink was regulated primarily by size of capacitor. A size 0.5 capacitor with two batteries caused a unit to blink 85 times; size 1.0, 59 times; and 2.0, 18 times per minute. However, blink frequency also was affected by number of volts (e.g. a 0.5 capacitor with two batteries blinked 85 times per minute, whereas the same unit with three batteries emitted a constant glow). At night, different units could be distinguished on the basis of blinks per minute with intense observation. Blinks from 0.5 and 2.0 capacitor units were measurably different, but it was difficult to distinguish between units with 1.0 capacitors and the other two. Table 5 lists characteristics and components used to build the units, along with longevity figures. �- 254 - N N GE R Imeg C I mfd IOOv ca p. 45v battery (Burgess B FIG. NE7 neon range 4 bulb resistor HUNGERFORD'S U30B or NEON equiv.l PULSER �- 255 - Figure 5 - Components used in assembly of neon blinker systems. Table 5.--Characteristics and comEonents of ten neon blinker Total Collar Capacitor Batteries Weight Color No. Size (grams) No. 631.5 2 0.5 1 White 2 Green 2.0 2 3 2 Green 594.1 2.0 Green 597.6 2.0 2 4 567.7 2 5 2.0 Green 1.0 6 566.9 2 Green 1.0 1,133.8 3 Orange 7 8 3 Orange 1,114.7 0.5 1.0 Orange 3 9 3 Orange 10 1~014.6 0.5 ..!I Quit working when potted. s:ystems. Operation (da:ys} 354 17 445 414 414 414 400 1/ o II 0349 �Visibility of this system was one quarter mile with binoculars at night. The glow of the element was not visible during daylight hours unless shaded and then it could not be seen for more than about five to ten feet. The element within the neon bulb produced a reddish-orange glow when lighted. Therefore, different colors (clear, yellow, green, red and blue) or resin were used between the glow lamp and the clear plastic capsule in an attempt to change the color produced and therefore provide another way of distinguishing between each system. This did not work. The colored resin did not change the color of the blinker system appreciably, but only reduced visibility. The blinker system without colored resin (clear) could be seen best under all conditions. At first it was thought that the weight of the two or three batteries in the bottom of the collar would maintain the blinker unit on top of the animal's neck. This was not the case. Collars tended to slip to one side of the animal's neck. To eliminate this and assure visibility of the unit from all angles, apiece of U-shaped spring steel was incorporated into the collar and attached upside down with resin to the potted block containing electrical circuit. Also, stability of the collar was improved by placing lead rope in addition to batteries in the bottom of the collar for ballast (Fig. 5). The eight blinker systems placed on penned elk operated efficiently in all types of weather. Durability of the entire unit exceeded expectation, especially in that the electrical circuitry did not break or short-out. Collars showed normal wear and tear when removed from the animals. Earlier tests by W-38-R personnel (Experimental Trapping and Marking Techniques) on the collar alone had indicated that it was satisfactory for use on both deer and elk up to several years. Blinker systems had no apparent effect on the bahavior of penned animals, but as expected, collars wore the hair off the animal's neck. No other adverse effects were noticeable. As a way of marking large animals for individual identification neon blinker systems are a feasible method, especially on a small scale basis where observations on movement of animals can be detected after dark. Prepared by: E. J. Prenzlow Assistant Researcher �- 257 APPENDIX ANNOTATED BIBLIOGRAPHY A ON WILDLIFE TELEMETRY 1/ Barwick, R. E., and p. J. Fullagar. 1967. A bibliography of radio telemetry in biological studies. Proc. Ecolo. Soc. Aust. 2:27-49. Includes 431 references from 1921 to 1967. deals primarily with radio transmission. B.I.A.C. 1967. 19-26. Biotelemetry sources equipment Scope of the bibliography directory. Telemetry 2(6): Lists sources of equipment (manufactures and addresses) which are available for animal tracking, physiological monitoring and industrial uses. Bligh, J. 1964. A temperature telemetering Med. Electron. BioI. Eng., 2:81-83. system with constant accuracy. Brotzman, R. L., and R. H. Giles, Jr. 1966. Electronic data processing of capture-recapture and related ecological data. J. Wildl. Mgmt., 30 (2):286-292. The disadvantages of ecological and wildlife management data processing and analysis by hand and with desk calculators are discussed along with the advantages of electronic data processing. A standard field form is suggested for capture-recapture observations which will facilitate the transfer of data to permanent punched-card storage. A time-cost comparison of manual and electronic processing of these data is presented which shows savings by electronic methods. Suggestions are made for additional use of electronic data processing in ecological studies. Limitations are discussed. Caceres, C. A. (ed.) 1965. and London. 392p. Biomedical telemetry. Academic Press, New York Provides an integrated account of the state of art in telemetry as it affects medicine and biology. Encompasses applications to both research and routine practice. Useful for those who face problems of monitoring patients and subjects. Cochran, W. W. 1965. Techniques in aerial telemetry studies migration of birds. Prog. Rept. 1, NSF GB - 3155. of nocturnal 1/ in Segment 21, References are in addition to main bibliography July 1967. Game Research Report, Part Two. presented �- 258 Cochran, W. W., D. W. Warner, J. R. Tester, and V. B. Kuechle. 1965. Automatic radio-tracking system for monitoring animal movements. Bio Sci. 15(2):98-100. For a given transmitter both range and accuracy increase with greater size and height of the receiving antenna (Lord & Cochran, 1963). Article describes antenna tower and receiving laboratory. Compares results of automatic system to portable, manually operated directional receiver. No costs are quoted. Cochran, W. W., and E. M. Nelson. 1963. The model D-ll direction finder receiver. Minn. Mus. Nat. Rist. Tech. Rept. 2. l4p. Mimeo. Constantine, D. G., J. A. Jensen, and E. S. Tierkel. 1959. The use of radiolabeling in determining prey-predatory relationships. J. Mammal. 40(2):240-242. Radioactive Phosphorus-32 was injected into bats and the bats were fed to carnivores. Duration of retention of absorbed phosphorus in carnivores was proportional to doses administered to bats. Carnivores eating bats injected eight days earlier were radioactive at least one week later. Limited evidence suggests that lowered metabolic rate in bats decreases phosphorus elimination. The use of radiolabeling in determining pre-predator relationships is discussed, and possible sources of error are considered. Cowardin, L. M., and J. E. Ashe. 1965. An automatic camera device for measuring waterfowl use. J. Wildl. Mgmt., 29(3):636-639. A Yashica Sequelle camera was modified and equipped with a timing device so that it would take pictures automatically at l5-minute intervals. Several of these cameras were used to photograph randomly selected quadrats located in different marsh habitats. The number of btrds photographed in the different areas was used as an index of waterfowl use. Craighead, F. C., Jr. and J. J. Craighead. Telemetry 2(5):16-19. 1967. Tracking grizzly bears. Discusses equipment used in tracking grizzly bears and gives a brief sketch of the types of data that are being collected. Dean, F. D., and G. A. Gallaway. 1965. A fortran program for population study with minimal computer training. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 29(4):892-894. A flexible FORTRAN II program for use in population studies is described. The program can be used after brief instruction regarding the IBM 1620 computer and the associated card reader and punches; no knowledge of programming is required. Variable parameters include age and sex distribution of the initial population; maturity limits for both sexes; frequency of �- 259 reproduction for females and birthrate (each is variable by age of the female): proportion of females in each age-class that will breed; maximum number of females bred per male; proportional, density-dependent, and density-independent mortality on an age- and sex-specific basis and in various combinations; maximum length of life; and the length of the run. Certain variables may be changed in midrun. Output may be in the form of punched cards, typed sheets, or graphs and is detailed both within each age-class and for the population as a whole. The program is available from the University of Alaska Computer Center and will be submitted to the IBM 1620 Users Group Program Library. Denny, R. N. 1966. Experimental telemetering devices. Quart. Progr. Rept. 7(2):169-173. Colo. Wildl. Res. Annual segment report on telemetry work being done on elk. Discusses types of equipment used and results of monitoring four elk (2 penned and 2 wild). Dodge, W. E., and Dana p. Snyder. recording wildlife activity. 1960. An automatic camera device for J. Wildl. Mgmt., 24(3):340-341. An automatic photo-recorder with wide application in the wildlife field is described. It is relatively inexpensive, compact, and readily portable without dependence on A.C. power sources. Fullagar, r , J. 1967. The use of radio telemetry in Australian biological research. Proc. Ecol. Soc. Aust. 2:16-26. Griffo, J. V., Jr. 1959. A counting device for recording small mammal activities. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 23(4):461. Kavanau, J. L. 1962. Automatic multi-channel sensing and recording of anima 1 behavior. Ecol. 43(1):138-139. Klonglan, E. L., I. A. Coleman, and E. L. Kozicky. 1956. A pheasant nest activity recording instrument. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 20(2}:173-l76. Kuck, T. L. 1966. Pheasant radio-transmitter study - 1966~ South Dakota. p. R. Project W-7S-R-9. IIp. Field battery life of mallory RM-l mercury battery ranged from 20-27 days. From June 1 through September 1, 1966, (5) pheasants provided 112 total tracking days and 109 locations. Transmitter malfunction great hindrance to study. �- 260 Loveless, C. M., G. N. Sarconi, J. W. DeGraxio, and C. H. Halvorson. 1966. A simplified data-recording method. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 30(3):519-522. A versatile and inexpensive procedure for recording source-data was successfully developed and tested April-October, 1965. The system consists of employing overlay templates with standard, SOO-position Optical Mark Page Reader forms, and recording data in such a manner that they are immediately convertible to machine language on IBM's 1230 series Optical Mark Page Readers. Principal advantages of the template approach over traditional source-data recording methods include: (1) its versatility, convenience~ and adaptability; (2) a reduction in initial cost because necessary materials are inexpensive; and (3) a substantial reduction in the cost and time required to key punch and verify numeric information, or to organize and tabulate data by hand. Mech, L. D., J. R. Tester, and D. W. Warner. 1966. habits of raccoons as determined by telemetry. 450-466. Fall daytime resting J. Mammal. 47(3): The locations of 173 daytime resting sites of seven raccoons (Procyon lotor) in eastcentral Minnesota were studied during September through November 1964. An automatic radio-tracking system was the main method employed to locate animals, although field checks' with a portable receiver also provided data. Persistent field checks apparently disturbed one of the animals. Distributions of resting sites of four of the animals are illustrated, described and analyzed; all individuals generally shifted resting sites from day to day, but each used certain areas more frequently than others. Ground beds in cattail marshes and alder and cedar swamps were used almost exclusively as resting sites. Some individuals shifted resting sites as much as one mile from one day to the next. No apparent patterns of consistencies among individuals were found in the frequency distribution of distances between consecutive resting sites or of activity radii of the sites. Evidence is presented indicating that three individuals using the same general area seemed to maintain a certain minimum d I s t ance among the resting sites chosen by each on any given day. Mech, L. D. 1967. J. Wildl. Mgmt. Telemetry as a technique 31(3):492-496. in the study of predation. Eight snowshoe hares (Lepus americanus) and five cottontail rabbits (Sylvilagus floridanus) were radio-tagged and tracked by an automatic system. Three of the hares, injured upon capture, lived an average of 2.3 days before being killed by predators The remaining five survived, for an average of at least 28.2 days. Of two uninjured rabbits killed, one was preyed upon within an hour after being disturbed; the other evaded predators for 24 days. Red foxes (Vulpes fulva) and owls probably were the main predators. Accounts of each instance of predation are given, including one in which both predator and prey were radio-tagged. The potential of telemetry for predation studies is emphasized, and suggestions are made for setting up such studies. G �- 261 - Miller, D. R., C. Maguire, and E. Heiman. 1965. An economical, portable intercommunication system for aerial surveys and reconnaissance. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 29(4):896-897. A portable intercommunication system has been developed for use during aerial wildlife surveys and reconnaissance. The three-station unit is economical, simple to maintain, and practical. It can be used in any small aircraft and does not affect the pilot's radio communications. Odum, E. P., R. P. Martin and B. C. Loughman. 1962. Scanning systems for the rapid determination of radioactivity in ecological materials. Ecol. 43(1):171-173. Ozoga, J. J. and L. W. Gysel. 1965. A mechanical recorder for measuring deer activity. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 29(3):632-633. An inexpensive device for recording the number of white-tailed deer (Odocoileus virginianus) moving in runways and the time of movement was developed for use in northern Michigan. The record is made by the movement of a trip line attached to a lever which marks a tape attached to a clock; the lever also turns a countershaft. Results of extensive field tests indicate that these recorders have functioned satisfactorily, and observations from blinds have revealed that they provide a reliable index to the intensity and time of deer activity. Prenzlow, E. J. 1967. Experimental telemetering devices. Colo. Wildl. Res. Quart. Progr. Rept. 7:101-126. Annual segment report on telemetry work being done on penned elk. Includes a partially annotated bibliography and telemetry feasibility report. 4p. 1967. Telemetry feasibility report. Typewritten. Colo. Game, Fish and Parks Dept. Brief history of wildlife telemetry, its potential, its.effect.and the problems that may be encountered. 1968. Synopsis of big game telemetry questionnaire. and Parks. 9 p. Mimeo. Colo. Game, Fish Lists information concerning 16 telemetry projects (9 big game and 7 projects concerned with small mammals, birds and domestic livestock) in addition to short summaries on telemetry work carried on by the Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department. �- 262 - Sittler, O. D. 1965. Theoretical basis for estIma t Ing deer population from automatically collected data. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 29(2):381-386. Development of devices for aut.omatically detecting and counting the passage of deer (Odocoileus virsinianus) across a fixed boundary line is currently being carried out at the Welder Wildlife Foundation. A theory for combining data from such a line-crossing detector with knowledge about behavior of deer to yield an estimate for deer population density was derived by developing a simple model for the behavior pattern of a deer in which a deer's movements were considered as a sequence of trips. This behavior model has been analyzed to find a relation for population density in terms of the number of trips crossing a line-crossing detector. The population density would then be given by the'number of counts per unit length of boundary line divided by a factor depending upon the average behavior patterns of deer in the region around the detector. The largest errors in a census estimate based upon this technique would arise from the variability of behavior patterns. New knowledg~ about the effects of weather and other environmental factors on behavior patterns can be incorporated into the analysis to improve the reliability of census estimates. Taylor, J. Mary and H. Jean. 1964. Rechargeable battery power for a portable photographic recorder. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 28(2):406-407. Varney, J. N. D. Alto, Calif. Batteries for biotelemetry. 5p. Mimeo. Philco Corporation, Palo Lists characteristics of five batteries most suitable for biotelemetry. Gives example of how to determine battery life, size and weight of battery pack. �- 263 APPENDIX B VHF TRACKING RECEIVER I: I RF Ampl ifiers Mixer 2J'<t2 9 9 6 (F;.ld effect th :2N3823 ~_ Bea.t Osc i l i o t o r To TRB-I b Me Input r---' ,---:H--i----< i: I IT '---------..1..-- -15 V -4 To IF _-I From TRB-I Squelc.h Volume Aud io to ·:u:70 A ;~.~" ~~: -2 Output J L Meter Amplifier I---r-li ••.•..•• ,..•.••.• /---. Hendpnones ~ / - <~-+~ I / Au.dio Filter / \ / \ \ \ \ ~- Circuit For first and second IF amplifiers of TRB-l IF unit. For audjo amplifier 0-50 M i c r o o rn m e+e r / \ L __ / -15V Switch and second mixer see diagram Gse diagram of TRA-2 unit. �- 264 INTERNATIONAL Crystal Mfg. Co , , Inc. 18 N. Lee Oklahoma City, Oklahoma TRB-l TRANSISTOR IF UNIT Manual 170-153 Issued 2/19/62 Revised 3/14/62 GENERAL The TRB-I i-f strip is a six-transistor, two-diode unit designed for second mixer i-f amplifier use. The IN T ERN A T ION A L TRB -I consists of one high i-f amplifier with untuned input; mixer stage; crystal oscillator; two low i -f amplifier stages; a special detector-noise limiter- squelch circuit developed by IN TERN AT 10 N A L. With AVC on the low i-f amplifier, the TRB-l provides A VC voltage for use on an external r-f stage such as the IN T ERN A T ION A L TRC -1 converter unit •. The TRB-l also provides squelch voltage for use in an audio circuit such as the IN T ERN A T ION A L TRA -2 audio unit. This voltage should be coupled through the IN T E R NA T 10 N A L SO-I squelch coupler. The TRB-l provides positions for two crystals and is supplied for use with an i -f in the range 5800 kc to 6200 kc , SPECIFICA TIONS Input frequency Crystal range standard range standard Low i-f Output 5800 kc - 6200 kc (Others on special order) 2000 kc - 10000 kc Use INTERNATIONAL type FCB-RE crystals. High side injection. 455 kc sensitivity .1 volt 400 cps across 220K requires a pp r ox , 10 microvolts 30% mod. input at 6 rnc , AVC voltage -.26vdc @ 2 microvolts input -.05 vdc @ 500 mic rovolts input Squelch voltage -14.8 -10.0 input Power requirement 15 vdc @ 9 ma positive >:' Transistors >',c Types (6) may change vdc @ 2 microvolts input vdc @ 500 mic rovolts 3 TA2112 I 2NlllO (selected) 1 2NII07 I 2 N408 in production but will be equivalent to the above. ground �- 265 Size 1 3/4" x 5 1/2" x 1 1/2" Weight 4 oz. INSTALLATION The TRB-l is designed for above-chassis mounting using the spacers and bolts provided. Lay the TRB-I on the chassis and mark the four mounting hole locations. Drill 1/8" holes and mount the TRB-I. Do not tighten the corner nuts excessively as this will break the printed circuit board corners. Connect the power and signal circuits as indicated in the following diagram. Ground IF input _ SQUELCH T-3 O( XTAL) @IF L80 Osc o 0-15/ o (blue) (XTAL) T-I (§) 0 G W@~- Squelch -..:.---- IF @MIXC!] @IOG . OSC® green o 0 (Blue) L 7 IF (high) 2N408 IF 2Nll07 r-, 3300 ohms 0-15 0 - 15 AVC Use shielded cable to connect the r-f signal into the TRB-l and the audio signal out. The AVe and squel.ch voltages available are dc variables. The squelch terminal should be connected through a 3300 ohm 1/2 watt resistor to -15 vdc if not used as shown in the transceiver interwiring diagram attached. When connecting to the AVe terminal take care not to short the connection to the case of the mixer transistor. 2/19/62 �- 266 OPERATION Apply power to the TRB-l and note the total current drain. The current should not exc eed 10 ma at 15 vdc , As shipped, the TRB-l has been adjusted with the crystals supplied for a accuracy of ±.0030/0 of input signal. The low i-f transformers have been aligned for this accuracy and should not be readjusted with.out a suitable signal. The accuracy of the first converter crystal will have an effect on the received signal producing the proper i-f signal. After the ove rall system has been assembled the low i-f transformers may be carefully adjusted to bring the signal into the center of the band pas s , Once this adjustment has been made with a known signal, the second oscillator crystals may be changed without further adjustment to select the desired channel. The high i-f coil should be peaked for the frequencies being used. The audio output should be operated into a 250K volume control and high impedance amplifier input such as the IN T ERN AT 10 N A L TRA-2 audio amplifier unit. The squelch voltage change is sufficient to operate the overall transceiver assembly with a change of 1 mic rovolt to the input. CAUTION 1. 2. 3. Operate the TRB-l only on 15 vdc circuits with positive Use INTERNATIONAL type FCB-REcrystals Do not adjust circuits without proper equipment 2/19/62 ground �TRB-I CI9 ·001 • O-----i{ • 150 o T I OET / Ave I 1·0 ~TOAUOlO - 250"1 SQUELCH BOARD • or ( .02 08 ClI TO 13 Y 5. J02 R21 680 f\) C32 -15 AUDIO BOARD 12 AI1 C23 I 02 I. ~ 10 " 8. I.F. IN 9. GNO. 8 Gm) 10. -I~ Y OC A.V.C. 09 12. -15 VOC OSc.~ II. 13. TO SOUELCH 14. AUCIO ONO. 16. AUCIO OUT ~ I.~' 9 .814 I ~"'X I e" L:J~L:J \ 100 SQUELCH 08~' r;l~r;l C" ~1!!.1 G IF 15 e I QOSC. 04 T3 0~7 L8 I QIF 810 8 L7 I ~ 05 TI IF06 T2 IF 13 -= 2-19-62 12 80 0\ -.J �TRB-l .02 ~02 lOOK 1 meg IU 0\ co t- -1 2 - 470 4 15 3 DET/AVC/SQUELCH CIRCUIT SHOWN IN BLOCK DIAGRAM ON TRB-1 CIRCUIT 3/14/62 �- 269 INTERNATIONAL Crystal Mfg. Co., Inc. 18 N. Lee Oklahoma City, Oklahoma Manual 170-150 Issued 3/20/62 Revised 4/10/62 TRA-2 TRANSISTOR AUDIO UNIT GENERAL The TRA -2 is a printed circuit transistor audio amplifie r using push-pull class B output stage. The amplifier may be used as a receiver audio section and for modulating low power transistor transmitters. SPECIFICATIONS Power Output 300 MW (Intermittent 150 MW (Continuous 400 - 7000 cps ± 3 db Response Output voice) sine wave) Impedanc e # I Input Impedance #2 750 ohm 3.2 ohm #1 #2 100,000 50 ohm ohm Overall Gain 600 cps Approximately Power Requirement Current no signal Current 300 MW 15 VDC 15 ma 85·ma Size 5 1/2" x 1 3/4" Weight 10 oz. 60 db x 1 1/2" INST ALLATION • ,l., Spac ers and mounting sc rews are provided for mounting the TRA -2 above a metal chassis. Mount the unit as desired and connect power, input, and output leads to the proper terminals as shown on the attached diagram. OPERATION The TRA -2 should be operated with only one input and output connected at a ti me. If the 3.2 ohm output is used do not connect a load to the 750 ohm terminals. The same procedure should be observed at the input. The 50 ohm input is intended for use with a low impedance dynamic microphone. The 100,000 ohm input is for connection to a 250K volume control and audio input from receiver IF strip such as the International TRB-I. A squelch voltage may be applied to the TRA-2 from an external circuit such as the TRB-l. The operation of TRA -2, however, is not affected if no connection is made to the squelch terminal. For average voice operation the TRA-2 may be used at full 300 MW output. The output should be limited to 150 MW for steady sine wave output. �010 012 T-6 T-5 16 B 750.n T-4 B 100 K 22 E]J 17 10 011 6 23 7 12K R41 21 19 C451 20m' 25 V r R45 C46 + 50mf 15V , . B 2200 18 'I.. ro -..J R43 220 4 C48;r 50m' i. NOTE 16. 750 ohm output 17. 750 ohm output 18. Squelch Yoltoge in 19. 50 ohm Input 20. Ground 21. 50 ohm input 22. 100,00'0 ohm Input high side 23. 100,000 ohm input ground side 24. -15VDC 25. + 15VOC / GROUND 26. 3.2 ohm output 27. 3.2 ohm output o 15V 25 TRA-2 AUDIO UNIT .J..- -15V+6 24 17 0[R... 16-t-=- IZ'>. QPI8 010 @Oll 0(••) I "26 27 Revised 4/10/62 • 2541) 0 24 . ° W tm.I 012 W .19 23 V.I • --l--20 ~ ~. ) 22 21 0 �TRANSCEIVER INTERWIRING DIAGRAM USING INTERNATIONAL TRANSISTOR SUBASSEMBLIES 50 4T O2 - 6" 07 15 14 010 TRB-I TRC-I AVC :5 'II R R 50MF -15VDC T T rl5VDC ~V_ - T - ro -.J }-J 18 28 TRA-2 TRT-2B 19 r - 50n MiC 30 s.zn Spkr. (I) SWITCH - 4 PDT CenfTalab (2) POWER 1457 Of 1458 DRAIN 15 VDC at no siQnal 20 MA .ith signed 100 MA peak r . �- 272- Maximum Response Elements Handle Assemble as indicated in above diagram. Antenna is held with handle horizontal. Elements can be either horizontal or vertical. In general the signal will be stronger with the elements vertical, but the bearing will be sharper with the elements in a horizontal position. This will not always be the case because of local conditions. If the bearing is ambiguous such as two peaks from different directions one is a reflection. The operator should move a little distance and take another bearing. With practice one can soon learn to track down the signal source. �J1l1y~ 1968 - 273 - 'JOB PROGRESS RESEARCH REPORT PROJECT SEGMENT State of ~C~O=LO~RA~D~O~ _ Project No. ~W_-_3_8_-R __-2~2 _ Deer-Elk Investigations 2 ----------------------- Job No., 7~A~ Work Plan No. Title of Job: Period Covered: Personnel: White River Elk Study - Publication April _ of Results 1, 1967 through March 31, 1968 Raymond J. Boyd Abstract Sixty-one pages of rough draft manuscript have been completed. Tables on food habits, seasonal movements and physical characteristics are complete. Move~ent and concentration area maps are also complete. The manuscript is planned to contain 13 sections at the present time. �- 274 Objectives: To publish all of the research project. findings resulting from this investigation Procedures: 1. As each section of the manuscript was started, pertinent literature was reviewed for background information and citations were written up for literature cited in the text. 2. Each section is broken down into three parts; introduction, and findings and discussion. procedures, 3. A preliminary statistical analysis of the winter range data by One-Way Analysis of Variance has been completed. The analysis showed enough promise so that a complete analysis will now be undertaken to determine relationships between elk use and browse density, composition, vigor and soil conditions. 4. The analysis of all daca is not complete enough, at the present time, to make recommendations to management. These recommendations will be formulated when the analysis is completed. Recommendations: Gather all data relative to the research studies on this elk herd and publish the results in 8 final major publication such as a Wildlife Monograph or a Department Technical Bulletin. Included in this final report should be recommendations to management relative to the proper harvest, ideal sex and age ratios in the herd, and proper range management. �- 275 - WHITE RIVER ELK STUDY - PUBLICATION Raymond OF RESULTS J. Boyd Findings Sixty-one pages of the narrative portion of the manuscript have been typed in rough draft form. Summary tables for all physiological data, seasonal movements, food habits and most hunter harvest data have been completed. Maps of movements and concentration areas are completed. A preliminary One-Way Analysis of Variance was completed by Mr. David Bowden of the Colorado State University Statistical Laboratory on the elk winter range data which indicated that this type of analysis could be used on our data. All of the rest of the range survey data from the main White River drainage was summarized into forms for the same statistical analysis and is presently being put through the Computer at Colorado State University. The publication 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. is presently planned to contain 13 sections as follows: Acknowledgment Introduction Study Area Description History of the Study Area Winter Range Analysis Food Habits Physical Characteristics Seasonal Movements Hunter Harvest Data Population Dynamics Recommendations to Management Summary Bibliography Prepared by: Raymonp. J. Boyd Wildlife Researcher ��July, 1968 - 277 - JOB PROGRESS RESEARCH State of Project Work Plan No. _ ~W_-~3~8_-R~-~2~2~ _ 4 ----------------------- Title of Job: Evaluation Period Covered: April Personnel: PROJECT ~C~O~LO~RA~DO~ No., REPORT SEGMENT Deer-Elk Investigations Job No.__~3~c~ of Deer-Highway Crossing 1, 1967 through March Safety Measures 31, 1968 David F. Gordon, Marion C. Coghill, Furman W. Dunham, Marion W. Lowery, and J. Richard Adams Abstract Colorado has tested the effectiveness of van de Ree mirrors to reduce deerveqicle collisions for three years. Although the ratio of deer killed in the mirror section compared to the rest of the test area was relatively wider after installation of the mirrors than before, the data did not indicate a statistically significant difference. The track-count method of determining the number of deer that crossed the highway as used in this study proved to he useless. _ �- 278 Objectives: 1. Determine if van de Ree mirrors reduce mortality of deer on highwayso 2. Determine the most accurate method of counting deer that cross the highway. Procedures: Procedures used in this study were presented in the July, 1966 (Part Two) Game Research Report, pp 180-183. Additional procedures are listed below. 1. Deer counting: a. The number of deer that crossed the highway was tested by the trackcount method on a 200-yard strip of loosened soil in the borrow ditch in each half of the mirror section. b. 2. Counts were made twice a week from December 1, 1967 through March 31, 1968. A survey of other states testing deer-mirrors was conducted (Appendix I) and the general findings summarized in a paper presented at the Midwest Fish and Wildlife Conference. Recommendations: I. Prepare a final report on the study and present the findings at the next meeting of the Western Association of Game and Fish Commissioners. �- 279 - EVALUATION OF DEER-HIGHWAY CROSSING SAFETY MEASURES David F. Gordon Results and Discussion Road-Kill The monthly road-kill on the study area between Grand Valley and Rifle is summarized in Table 1 and Fig. 1. A fairly clear pattern emerged over seven years. The majority of collisions occurred during the winter months from November through March. Table l.--Number of deer killed each month by vehicles on the study area between Grand Valley and Rifle, Colorado - April 1, 1961 through March 31, 1968. Month1:z:Road-Kill Year AEr. Ma:z: Jun. Jul. Aug. SeE_ Oct. Nov. Dec. Jan. Feb. Mar. 1961 7 3 1 2 0 0 0 4 15 10 12 24 1962 8 1 1 2 1 0 1 6 3 9 2 5 1963 3 1 0 0 1 0 1 3 10 9 4 5 1964 3 0 1 4 1 0 2 9 10 9 8 9 1965 5 0 1 2 1 0 2 5 10 14 13 4 1966 1 0 2 1 0 1 5 17 14 6 17 7 1967 4 2 1 1 2 0 6 17 4 6 11 7 ------Total 31 7 11 7 7 1 26 61 71 58 66 62 1.0 Average 404 1 0 106 1.0 0.1 3.7 8.7 10.1 8.3 9.4 8.9 0 The annual road-kill in the mirror section was compared with the kill in the control section to see if a significant reduction in kill occurred after mirrors were installed. The yearly road-kill for the study sections is summarized in Table 2 and Fig. 2. Table 2.--Comparison of the number of road-killed deer along U.S. Highway 624 between Grand Valley and Rifle, Colorado, 1961-1967. Road-Kill Year ~/ Non-Mirror Section Mirror Section Total 1961 55 31 86 1962 26 13 39 1963 21 16 37 1964 E./ 48 8 56 1965 46 11 57 1966 49 22 71 1967 42 19 61 ~7 Project year runs from April 1 through March 31. E/ Mirrors were installed in January 1965, three months before the end of the project year. Therefore these data are excluded in the statistical analysis. �- 280 The ratio of deer killed in the mirror section compared to the rest of the study area was wider after installation than before. However, statistical analysis does not indicate a significant difference. (Calculated chisquare = 7.12. Tabular chi~square at the 5 and 50 percent levels with five degrees of freedom = 11.07 and 4.35 respectively). In 1964, before the mirrors were installed, the road-kill of deer in the mirror section decreased drastically. Subsequently the kill has increased. If the mirrors had been effective, the road-kill through that section of highway should have decreased further at least the first year after their installation, because the yearly total road-kill before and after installation was almost the same (56 and 57 respectively). This did not happen. In subsequent years, the kill in the mirror section increased to better than double the low before mirrors were installed (8 compared to 11, 22 and 19) while the total kill increased only slightly (56 compared to 57, 71 and 61). It was fortunate the low road-kill occurred before installation of the mirrors, otherwise such a drastic decrease would have appeared to be the result of the mirrorso A survey of other states testing deer mirrors revealed that seven of 11 states commenting, reported success in alleviating deer-vehicle collisions at 25 percent or less. Track Counts An attempt was made to test the track-count method as a means of determining the number of deer that cross the highway at a given point. The results were to be compared with kill data to see if there was any correlation. These counts did not show much promise and no correlation was evident. Track count data are listed in Table 3. Ta~le 3.--Monthly totals of deer tracks counted on two, 200-yard long strip~f in the mirror section of the deer-mirror study area between Grand Valley and Rifle Colorado - 1967. Number of Tracks Eastern Half Western Half Month 13 38 November £1 4 15 December o 4 January 1 26 February 74 March 42 af One strip was prepared in each half of the mirror section. ~f Only two counts were made. The track count method of determining the number of deer that cross the highway, as used in this study, was a miserable failure for the following reasons: (1) The length of the strips was too short to get a valid sample. (2) The counting strips were at least 16 feet from the highway. Only twice, when conditions were excellent, was a track that appeared in the strip found to continue on the other side of the highway. At times deer observed in the counting strips were seen to spook off the strip into the brush. Therefore, it was a weak assumption to conclude that every deer entering the counting strip crossed the highway. �- 281 - AVERAGE ROAD-Kill BY OF DEER MONTH (1961 - 1967) 1.2 "G 41» 10 C " G ~ 8 D "" 0:: 0 0 •.. • .a e::t z • at ., •.. ,. 4 G 4( Apr Ma, Jun JuV AUQ Sep Oct Noy Die Jon Fib Mar Month Fig. 1. Graph of the monthly average of road-killed deer along U. S. Highway 6-24 between Grand Valley and Rifle, Colorado -,April l~ 1961 through March 31, 1968. �- 282 - ROAD-Kill OF DEER BY YEAR 60 (April ~ March 31) < < • << < < < < < 50 a.. • • < < 40 < Q ( ( ~ --• :ill: g "a 0 c 10 ~ 30 '0 \ - 0: \ 0 • .a e::5J fJ) •... ..,c ... :::I 0 .~ ::E , Er"" " \ \ ~ \ \ \ 10 - Non-Mirror - - - Mirror Section fl-, , ~ 'i!J I 1 )!1 \ '61 >- 0 0 \ \ es m .5 fJ) \ \ 20 to - •.. , C \ \ Q" z II) I I I I I .8 br < ...." . ~ Section 164 '66 '67 Ytar Fig. 2. Graph of the yearly total of road-killed deer in the study area between Grand Valley and Rifle, Colorado - April 1, 1961 through ..March 31, 1968. �- 283 - (3) Winter counting conditions were generally poor. As long as the ground remained dry tracks could be seen and raked out. If it rained and did not freeze, the tracks could still be seen and raked out. If ' it froze after the ground was wet, tracks could not be raked out and there was no way of telling how many deer crossed while the ground was frozen. (4) Conditions were best when there was a light snow. This, however, was seldom the case. Usually there was a heavy (several inches) snow. Tracks made near the end of the snow and after could be seen. When snow became deep (more than a foot) it was impossible to tell how many deer had used one set of trackso Mirror Maintenance Damage to mirror assemblies was caused by inherent hazards and vandalism. The former included mirrors and posts knocked down byroad graders, mowing machines, snow plows, road repair machinery and vehicles out of control. The latter included theft and mirrors being used as targets. Table 4 summarizes the cost of replacement of posts and mirrors. Table 4.--Sunnnary of numbers, percents and cosfs of posts and van de Ree mirrors lost in the Colorado study -1965-l968~ Mirrors @ $1.40 Posts @ $1010 Destroyed By Destroyed By Inherent Inherent . a/ Total Vandalism Hazards Cost Vandalism Hazards Total Year - Cost % % No. No. 4 a 100 0 4 13 5.60 13 100 0 0 1964 EJ 14.30 16 50 50 8 8 22.40 12 4 33 8 67 1965 13.20 15 33 5 67 21.00 10 21 12 57 9 43 1966 23.10 25 12 48 52 13 35.00 14 3 21 11 79 1967 15.40 e] Year runs from April 1 through March 31. ~I Only the months of January through March 1965 were included in these figures. Prepared by: David F. Gordon Assistant Researcher �- 284 APPENDIX I Questionnaire on Deer-Mirrors 1. Physical Setting of the Study (A photograph 'or slide would help) a. What is the topography in the vicinity of the study area? Flat-Flat Flat-Bank Cliff-Cliff Bank-Bank b. Flat-Cliff Bank-cliff Ridge What is the type and pattern of the vegetation through the study area? Forest (type) Grass _ Brush _ Combination (describe) Ce Other _ What is the highway configuration through the study area? Straight Flat Curved Rolling Steep Hill (more kills up or down} Combination d. 2. What is the traffic pattern through the study area? Heavy Fast Local Light Slow Tourist Method of Installing the Mirrors a. How far apart are the posts? �Questionnaire on Deer-Mirrors D. How far above the ground are the mirrors? C, Are the headlight away from it? Across d, beams deflected across A~oJay --- Is any other type of reflector, being used? _ the line of traffic or _ besides Other ----- the van de Ree mirror, Yes ( describe) No ~ _ 3. From the Deer's Viewpoint a. What species of deer are you dealing with? Whitetail D. What probable Water Other C, Mule Deer ------ reason do the deer have for crossing _ Food Other ------- _ the highway? Combina tion ----- -------------------------------------------------- What season of the year and time of day are the most deer killed? Winter (Jan-Mar) __ Spring (Apr=Jun) Summer (Jul..:Sep) __ PM Noon - 6:00 6: 00 - Midnite _ Midnite Fall (Oct-Dec) _ AM - 6: 00 6:00 - noon ------ -------- d, Can you describe the flash from the mirror as it is seen by the naked, human 'eye? e. In your opinion, how does the flash affect the deer? �- 286 Questionnaire 4. on Deer-Mirrors Effectiveness of the Mirrors (I would like numbers where applicable in the answers to the following questions.) a. How effective have the mirrors proved? 100-75%,--_ 75-50%__ 50-25%,--_ 25-0%,--_ 0% :...---- b. How do you determine the effectiveness of the mirrors? c. How do you figur~ your controls? d. Do you have any historical data on the road-kill in the area before the mirrors were installed? Yes (If so, how many years?) No e. ------ Do you have any effective method of counting the deer that cross the highway? Yes (describe) No"..:.o 5. _ ~ _ _ Miscellaneous 8. Are more local drivers or strangers to the area involved in vehicledeer collision?" Local ----- Tourist ---- �July; 1968 - 287 - JOB FINAL REPORT State of COLORADO -------------~~~------------- Project No. W~-~3~8-~R~-_2~2~ Work Plan No. 4 ----~-------------------- Title of Job: Evaluation _ Deer-Elk Job of Under-Highway Investigation No. 3d --~~----------------------------- Crossing Devices for Big Game Objectives: 1. To evaluate the effectiveness mortality 2G of under-highway of big game on highways. crossings in reducing the To evaluate the effectiveness of baiting and drift fencing as inducements to the use of under-highway crossings by big game animals. For three years attemps have been unsuccessfully made to conduct this study. A light winter during the past segment resulted in no deer moving into the study area. No data have been collected since the initiation of the study. The job is being terminated because the objectives as stated cannot be fulfilled. Prepared by: Raymond J. Boyd Wildlife Researcher ��- 289 - JOB FINAL REPORT State of Co~L~O~RA~DO~ _ Project No., W~-~38~-~R~-~2~2~ _ Deer-Elk Investigation _ Job'No. Work Plan No., ~4 4 --~---------------------------- Title of Job: Evaluation of the Effects of Mountain Lion Predation Objectives: 1. To determine the distribution and population of mountain lions in Colorado. 2. To determine if there is predation selectivity by mountain lions for age, sex, or physical condition of deer or elk; and if there is any particular age-group or condition class of mountain lions that do a major portion of this predationo 3. To determine the extent of mountain lion predation on livestock and under what conditions livestock predation occurs. This study was conducted for one year (Segment 21) and reported in the July, 1967 (Part 2) Game Research Reporto Based on those data it was decided the objectives of the study could not be fulfilled, and the job has been terminated. No time or effort was spent on this job during Segment 22. Prepared by: Raymond J. Boyd Wildlife Researcher ��July, 1968 - 291 - JOB PROGRESS REPOR~ RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO ----~~~~~----------------- Project No. Work Plan No. Title of Job: Period Covered: Personnel: Deer-Elk Investigations W-38-R-22 ~6 _ Job. No. ~l~O _ Determination of the Effects of Spring Elk Use on Native Pasture. April 1, 1967 through November 15, 1967 David F. Gordon, Marion C. Coghill, J. Richard Adams Abstract Oris Albertson made first reference to damage to his native pasture by deer and elk in 1952. Subsequently he has submitted two claims, one in 1957 and one in 1963. Neither of these, nor any other claim for game damage to pasture, has been honored since 19578 Thirteen stations for measurement of production and utilization, and six elk pellet-group transects were located on the study area in the fall of 1966. One pair of plots at each station was clipped in the spring to determine elk use. The second pair was clipped in the fall to determine the effect of elk use on total production. Pellet-group transects were r~n at two-week intervals from the time snow melted until elk left. Elk use was found to be very low, averaging .044 elk days per acre ,from November 3, 1966 to May 17, 1967. Effect on grass production was not measurable. �- 292- Objectives: 1. To determine the kind of pasture and meadow grasses that are eaten by elk in the spring before cattle are admitted to the range. 2. To determine the effect of spring grazing by elk upon availability native pasture and meadow grasses to cattle in summer. of Procedures: 1. Data on the kind of forage eaten by elk in the spring were obtained by inspecting the study plots to determine the species of grass available to and preferred by elk and cattle. 2. Data on the amount follows: a. of forage eaten by elk were obtained and analyzed as Thirteen stations of four, circular, 9.6-square-foot plots each (Fig. 1, 2 and 3) were established in the fall of 1966 for production and utilization estimates. (1) Two of the plots at each station were covered with conical cages after cattle were removed. (2) On May 17, 1967, just before cattle were admitted, grass on one covered and one uncovered plot at each station was clipped, air-dried and weighed to determine the amount of forage eaten by elk in the springo (3) At the same time the other uncovered covered with a conical cage. (4) The following October 3, after cattle were removed from the range, production from the remaining two plots at each station was clipped, air-dried and we Lghe d to determine how much forage cattle are .. deprived of through the summer by this use. (5) A new method of clipping short grass was tested. It worked best before full growth had occurred and was most efficiently performed by two operators. (6) plot on the station was (a) Tools used were two, hand grass clippers, one with a metal basket welded to the blades (Fig. 4), and a hand vacuum sweeper which plugged into an auto cigarette lighter (Fig.5). (b) The first operator removed the cage, scribed the plot and with the basket-clippers cut the longer grasses to about I-inch height (Fig. 6). (c) The second operator, with plain clippers and vacuum, then clipped the grass to the ground collecting the clippings in the sweeper (Fig. 7). These weight data were analyzed by Studentis any difference in production between pairs. t test to determine �- 293 b. On March 15, 1967 one flight was made to observe any evidence of elk in the area. c. Six pellet-group transects were randomly located on November 3, 1966 (Fig. 2),and all pellets either painted or removed. Half the plots were located in the pasture and half in the pinyon-juniper. (1) As soon as snow conditions permitted (AprilS, 1967) the transects were run to determine the number of elk that had,been on the field through the wintere (2) Thereafter, transects were run at approximately two-week intervals (April 19, May 2, and May 17) until just before cattle were admitted to the range. Recommendations: Terminate this study as it now stands. If at some future time circumstances indicate the need, renew the study somewhere elsee �---.... •...-......, . I'- .".• r;lj'~ POrPHYRY MTN. ' 7.609 I '>'''' ~t\ \, i 10" ••• N <, ••S""'''", r\ I • % ( SUGARLO 9,61 ~ , J .# '. 6 ••ttI" I\) \0 +:- 8 9 10 ~ 11 16 ~~ ~ ,'",,,, 15 -;. .., .••... " ~~ x ~«,-' ~~=t~.::::-:, ,-:. -:. .•..•. 14 18 ~ '. Fi.gure - Vicinity map of the native pasture damage study (N~, See. 4, T3S, R86H, NMPM). �'N ""'j;;;- ..•.•••. , ; L!..O I •••••••,.... '. '. .~ " -,.~'~,.•.. ,III ~.. ••••• ....../ 2 • " • ,. P-IO .," 'I ..." P-,....... ", T ., '.,"" .••.:.<-•., "'~~,• •• ,:- ••• / '... "'·'-,-.'P'2 '~, '. ._. '" . "P-IO '?~i J .•. - .•••••-:l ''', ••~.... ,,··.·P·2 ~ " c: "II ,P.I··--··'';P.6 ••• "'..', ..........::.~», .•. "''''' 1\ rA1 dJ • " ""~!'Io. \,001.".-",.". A ""-.::..- O~... •• . ~ •• " --- II I.., ..•••••.•• : ••••- _. . / .P-I' /. / ',. Ijj1 '.". . ''''. '"" d It!! '" •••••• . ......• ..•...• fP ,10 '. 1 c...... station f\) ~ rn1 "".,J._ : IS.! ". '0 \Jl ..•.••.. " "" ••••• >L z-, l -v P-U transect plot "I I......"'.. ~'=:',. / "I Pellet-group Pellet-group 'P'IO •••. " P-S"•• ••'" '. p•• ":::""" 41m llf··.. ...... .p. >',.Ip ,<", 7 "." .,~ ,g, o P'I, •• -..... . 6", "_''::-_~ T-•..op •• p- ') '..••• "'" _ ·P·I -"»>--.!. ••••••". •. "HI"•• rn·, <,.... .•'I '>.>, ----- 0'10 lOr I '" '~~\ ~~" l' "P_9 .,:oXrF"-5 •••••••• ,10.-8 <, ',:::, \\ •-- P- . ,p.IO "., .... '.". "_'" _, _'" " ., ",,_ '_", •.<'h_ __ •••• •••• __ • _". 0" . '.••• , . '. -, '0 •\ •c· .l ·0: I._ <;» Fig. 2. Map of the native pasture damage study area showing location of production-utilization (N~. Sec. 4~ T3S, R86W~ NMPM) - 1967. plots �- 296 - Covered 1st Fall Covered 1st Fa II Clipped SprinG Clipped 2nd FaU Uncovered Uncovered ist Fori 1st FaU Elk Use " - - - Cage moved clipping ,Fig. 3. Elk Use Clipp ed Spring to at- Covered Spring Clipped 2nd Fan Diagram of the method used to determine if spring grazing by elk on native pastures decreased the amount of forage available to cattle through the summero �f\) \0 ---.J Fig. 4 - Clippers with metal basket welded to blades used in initial clipping of longer sprigs of grass. �- 298 - Fig. 5 - Clippers and auto vacuum sweeper used in final clipping of short grass. �- 299 - A B c Fig. 6. (A) Cage removed from production-utilization plot in preparation for clipping. (B) Operator scribing plot with metal pin on 21inch, wire radius. (C) Operator clipping longer sprigs of grass with basket-clippers. �- 300 - Fig. 7 - Final clipping of short grass using auto vacuum sweeper to collect cuttings. �- 301 - METHODS OF DETERMINING ELK USE ON NATIVE PASTURE DURING THE SPRING David F. Gordon Introduction Since 1957 seven claims totaling $6681.25 for elk damage to pastures have been submitted. In 1952 Oris Albertson made first mention of damage to his pastures by big game (1 A1bertson~ personal communication to A. E. Carlson). Five years later he submitted his first claim of $750.00 for damage by elk and deer to his native pasture. In 1963 he submitted another claim of $294.20 for similar damage. None of these claims have been honored. In 1964 study plots at two locations were set out by the U. S. Forest Service on Derby Creek C&H Allotment (2 Quinkert, personal communication to Ray Boyd). Study plots were set out again the next year at one of the same locations and two new ones (3 Quinkert, personal communication). Results of these tests showed only light use by wildlife on bluegrass (Poa sp.), the major forage species. They concluded there was no conflict between wildlife and domestic livestock on the allotment. At the Four-County Livestock Meeting at Craig, Colorado on March 23, 1964~ statements were made that obligated the Department to evaluate game use of pasture lands (4 Evans, personal communication to Dean Coleman). Later Albertson met with the Game, Fish and Parks Commission in connection with his 1963 damage claim and specifically asked, "ao. why hasn't some research been done to come up with some really good figures as to what this actual grass consumption is? Ii (sic) (Colo. Game, Fish and Parks Dept. 1964). Albertson's methods for estimating damage were reasonable. He figured it cost him 2 cents per deer-day and 8 cents per elk-day. (Colo. Game, Fish and Parks Dept. 1964). However~ the numbers of animals counted by Albertson and those counted by department personnel did not agree. Another method he employed was to calculate the cost of hay used to feed his cattle which would otherwise have been on pasture. At a meeting of the Colorado Cattlemen's Association~ before the results of our first yearis study were published~ their Game and Fish Committee recommended (Colo. Cattlemen's Assoc. 1966): ••• we recommend that grass and other range forage be considered by the Game and Fish Department on the same basis as other crops and that proper procedures be developed whereby game damage w~y be accurately measured and paid for by the Department on private range land~ deeded or leased. (sic) In 1965 Coloradovs Game~ Fish and Parks Department initiated a study of the problem on Albertsonvs private land. A trip into the area in question was made with Wildlife Conservation Officer Jim Reser. Subs equerit Ly , after several unsuccessful attemps to contact Albertson a pasture on upper Poison j �02 Creek, Eagle County (Figa land 2) was arbitrarily selected and paired production-utilization plots established in the fall. The spring of 1966, after elk had left the area and before cattle were admitted, one additional plot was located at each station and covered. The grass on all plots at each station was clipped in the fall, air-dried and weighed. Unfortunately most of the cages set out in the spring were destroyed by cattle (Gordon 1967)0 Contact was finally made with Albertson after the present segment's preliminary field work had been completed only to find that this pasture was not his problem area. However, since the study plots had already been established and weather did not permit a change at that time, they were left in place for the year. Albertson has been very pessimistic about rece~v~ng payment even though studies might show he was sustaining damage. This has been his attitude even while entering claims for damage to his native pasture (5 Reigan, personal communication to Gilbert N. Hunter). His pessimism is justified since he was informed (6 Hunter, personal communication to Oris G. Albertson) it is the policy of the Department to reject claims for damage to pasture lands as instructed by the Attorney General. The game damage law was enacted to protect farmers and ranchers from damage to crops which are planted and harvested. Native pasture land does not meet either of these requirements. This pessimistic attitude is reflected in AlbertsonVs disregard of much of our correspondence, the difficulty I have had in trying to contact him in regard to showing us his problem areas and his refusal to cooperate by leaving the elk unmolested in the study field if he thought they were doing damageo Acknowledgments I would like to express my appreciation to Research Assistant Cliff Coghill and Student Assistant Richard Adams for help clipping the production-utilization plots and running the pellet-group transects. Special credit goes to Adams for suggesting the vacuum sweeper method of clipping short grass. Results Species of Grass Available.--Species of grass and grasslike plants on the plots included bluegrass, western wheatgrass (Agropyron smith i) , brome grass (Bromus sp.), blue grama (Bouteloua gracilis) and sedge (Carex sp.). Bluegrass was the most abundant species and showed the heaviest use. Forbs available to the elk were as follows~ Common dandelion False yarrow Geranium Herbaceous cinquefoil Violet Yarrow Composite Taraxacum officionale Chaenactis alpina Geranium sp. Potentilla fruticosa Viola SPa Achillea lanulosa Compositae Forage Production Comparisons.--Conical cages were much more resistant to damage by cattle and wildlife than cylindrical cages. Only one conical cage �- 303 (station No.1, total-exclosure) had been mashed enough for the cattle to graze the grass inside so it could not be sampled. This was a makeshift cone. None of the properly constructed cones were damaged. Station No. 13 had only two plots (elk-use and elk-exclosure) to sample. The snow was too deep at that station when the second pair of plots was set out. In the spring 13 pairs of plots (Fig. 2 and 3) were clipped to determine the amount of forage eaten by elk. Weight of grass from the exclosed plots averaged 43.85 grams with a range of 23.3 - 75.9~ This was not significantly greater than the grass from the grazed plots (Fig. 8) which averaged 39.63 grams with a range of 18.7 - 71.9. (Calculated t = 0.668. Tabular t at the 5 percent level with 24 degrees of freedom = 2 064.) a In the fall 11 pairs of plots (plus one plot at station No.1) (Fig. 2 and 3) were sampled to determine if elk use ultimately reduced production of grass. Samples from total exclosures weighed an average of 281.25 grams ranging from 205.4 - 468.6. This was not significantly different from the weight of elkuse-cattle-exclosure samples (Fig. 9) which averaged 290.67 grams ranging from 168.0 - 465.5 (Calculated! = .013" Tabular! at the 5 percent level with 21 degrees of freedom = 2.080. The new method of clipping grass proved very thorough yet does not gather an exorbitant amount of litter. Dirt that is drawn in can be removed by flotation before drying. The total operation took about one-half a man-hour per plot~ or a little more, depending on circumstances, and the proficiency of the operators. Aerial Census.--The flight in March revealed only 17 elk in the pinyon-juniper northeast of the field and only one set of tracks which merely crossed the field. In the oakbrush, about a half mile south of the field, deer and elk tracks were profuse. Pellet-Group Transects.--The study field is approximately 35 acres in area. Since pellet-group transects were randomly spaced and equally divided between the pasture and the hillside to the northeast I arbitrarily used 35 acres in figuring the elk-days per acre for the latter area, also. Table 1 summarizes elk use in the area between November 3, 1966 and May 17, 1967. On April 19, 1967 no pellet-groups were found on any of the transects, but fresh pellets and other signs were seen in the field. On May 17, 1967 no pellet-groups were found on the hillside transects. �- 304 43.85 I W 23.3 18.7 16 34.37 Fig. 8. 30 11.9 48.87 30.39 20 I 15.9 53.33 40 50 70 60 76 Comparison of the means, 95 percent confidence intervals and ranges of the weights of forage clipped from the elk-exclosure and elkuse plots on upper Poison Creek, Eagle County, Colorado - 1967. 281.25 205t~4:---2-34~'=84========~I==::====32:1}~~66-'--------------------------:46:;8.6 290.67 168~i'0;-----------~2~4~0~'7;7;::::::::tI::::::::~J;4~O~~~1~--------------------~4;,6~l5 168 Fig. 9. 200 250 300 350 400 450 468 Comparison of the means, 95 percent confidence intervals and ranges of the weights of forage clipped from the total-exclosure and elkuse-cattle-exclosure plots on upper Poison Creek, Eagle County, Colorado - 1967. �- 305 Table l.--Summary of elk pellet-groups counted on transects in the native pasture damage study area on upper Poison Creek in 1967. (N~, Sec. 4, T3S. R86W, NMPM) Elk days/acre Number of elk Date of since previous count since previous count count Pasture Hillside Pasture Hillside April .5 .041 .045 224 242 (153 days overwinter) I April 19 May 2 May 17 .100 .004 .062 46 24 28 Average (April 5 - May 17) .043 .019 63 28 .039 287 270 Average (November 3 - May 17) Discussion A considerable amount of damage was done to forage by Richardson ground squirrels (Citellus richardsoni). This rodent was very numerous over the entire study area in 1966. Its presence, coupled with low precipitation, reduced grass production. The rodent and signs of its grazing were evident again in the spring of 1967 (Fig. 10). At that time two government trappers were By fall most of the ground squirrels spreading oats impregnated with 1080 had been eradicated. 0 There was more precipitation in 1967 than 1966. This coupled with eradication of ground squirrels increased grass production. Ground squirrel burrows were not completely denuded of grass (Fig. 11) as they had been the previous YElar. There were still elk in the area on May 17, but their numbers were apparently negligible. The plot clipped two weeks previously at station No.1, an elk concentration area, was barely distinguishable from the rest of the pasture. The remainder of the pairs were clipped at this time because Albertson was due to admit his cattle to the field the next week. Conclusions In the past two years elk use of the study field has shown no significant effect on grass production. The field is apparently above or at the upper limits of normal elk winter range. It is probably most heavily used by elk as they pass from summer to winter range and back in fall or spring. There was no evidence of competition between elk and domestic livestock. �- 306 - Fig. 10. Evidence of Richardson ground squirrel depredation pasture around burrows and in lower foreground. on native �- 307 - Fig. 11. Grass growing on deserted Richardson ground squirrel burrow • . ' �- 308 - Footnotes 1. Oris G. Albertson, Burns, Colo., May 5, 1952. 2. Anthony K. Quinkert, District Ranger, White River National Forest, Glenwood Springs, Colo., February 9, 1965. 3. , April 19, 1966. 4. Robert L. Evans, Northwest Regional Manager, Colo. Game, Fish and Parks Dept., Grand Junction, Colo., July 31, 1964. 5. Robert R. Reigan, Game Damage Control Officer, Colo. Game and Fish Dept., Grand Junction~ Colo., July 12, 1957. 6. Gilbert N. Hunter, State Game Manager, Colo. Game and Fish Dept., Denver, Colo., August 9, 1957. LITERATURE CITED Colo. CattlemenVs Assoc. 1966. Recommendations of the Game and Fish Committee for the State of Colorado. Minutes of the Colo. Cattlemen's Assoc., May 28, 1966, Pueblo, Colo. Colo. Game, Fish and Parks Dept. 1964. Minutes of the Game, Fish and Parks Comm. Meeting, December 3-4, 1964~ Aspen, Colo. Gordon, David F. 1967. Methods of evaluating elk use on native pastures during the spring. Colo. Game, Fish and Parks Dept.~ Game Research Rept., P-R Project W-38-R~21, July, 9 p. Prepared by: David F. Gordon Assistant Researcher �J111y'~1968 - 309 JOB PROGRESS REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO ------------------------Deer-Elk Investigations Project No. W-38-R-22 Work Plan No. 6 Title of Job: Evaluation of Deer Use on Alfalfa Under Different Irrigation Rates Period Covered: April 1, 1967 to September 30, 1967 Personnel: Job No. 11 David F. Gordon, J. Richard Adams, Edgar J. Prenzlow, Marion C. Coghill, Little Hills Personnel and WCO ~rainees. Abstract Two alfalfa fields, one irrigated and one unirrigated, were selected on which to study the effect of spring grazing by deer on production of alfalfa. Vegetation from 50 pairs of 9.6-square-foot,circular plots was clipped, air-dried and weighed to the nearest 0.1 gram. These data were subjected to Chi-square analysis. No significant difference was detected. Deer were counted on the fields and numbers were observed to peak between 7:00 P.M. and midnight MST. Data on temperature and precipitation were obtained. Nutritive value of samples of hay was determined by proximate analysis. �- 310 Objectives: 1. To determine the production between grazed and ungrazed study plots at the first cutting on alfalfa fields that receive adequate irrigation and no irrigation during the growing season. 2. To determine the relation between grazing use and available on production of alfalfa at the first cutting. soil moisture 3. To determine the relation between soil moistening factors (irrigation, temperature, relative humidity, and precipitation) and soil-moisture on the study field. 4. To determine the number of deer and time of greatest grazing use on the study fields and relate their number to the production in order to arrive at an index of deer numbers that can be used to determine the amount of production lost due to deer use. Procedures: The following procedures wer e conducted on two separate fields at Little Hills Game Experiment Station, Meeker, Rio Blanco County, Colorado. One field was irrigated the other left unirrigated (Fig. 1 and 2). 1. Determination of production. (a) Fifty, random pairs of 9.6 square-foot plots were established in each study field for production and utilization estimates as follows: (b) (1) Each field was marked off into grids by stretching the long axis of the field. (2) Stakes were driven at 41-foot (3) At each stake 8 right angle jig was pinned to the ground and stakes driven at 4l-foot intervals along this cross line. (4) These grids were numbered as the sections of a township tinuing consecutively until all squares were numbered. (5) Using Snedecoris (1956) table of random numbers, 50 blocks were selected in each field in which to locate pairsof plots~ (6) Two areas with as nearly uniform ground cover as possible were chosen in each block, staked at their centers and one plot of each pair selected for the exclosure by flipping a coin. The stake centering the unexclosed plot was long enough to be visible about mature.slfalfa plants. intervals a line on along this line. con- Production from the grazed plots was compared to production from the ungrazed plots to determine if there was any difference, as follows: (1) All vegetation from each plot was clipped 8S close to the ground as possible the week of June 26, 1967, just prior to harvest. (2) An attempt was made to count all alfalfa when cl Lpped plants on each plot i; (3) Clippings were collected in gunny sacks, tied, labeled, and hung in the hayloft at Little Hills to dry. �- 311 - (c) 2. AiI--dried samples, including the sack, were weighed to the nearest 0.1 gram between November 6 and 8~ 1967 using an Ohaus triple beam balance. (5) Empty sacks were shaken out, bundled together and weighed platform scale to the nearest 0.25 pound. (6) This weight was averaged, converted to the nearest 0.1 gram and the result subtracted from each sample weight to determine the net weight of hay in each sample. Samples from each treatment were subjected determine food value of the treated hay. to proximate Determination of deer numbers. (a) Deer were counted from a pickup by the method outlined W-38-R-20 from April 1 until May 11. (b) 3. (4) (b) analysis Precipitation a 7-day recording data were obtained Recommendations: 1. Terminate thi-s study as it is designed 2. Redesign alfalfa. the study and expand 3. weD counts should be conducted if use hygrothermograph from the headquartersi to under Segment The deer use-pattern on the field was observed to determine was heavier on the periphery than in the center. Determination of weather. (a) A weather station containing installed at each field. on 8 was rain gauge. at present. it to include a test of deer use on growing on the problem fields for at least two and preferably three hours beginning an hour before deer numbers peak. See detailed instructions under the conclusions of this report. �- 312 - Alfalfa Damage Study Field -little Hills (Unirrlga·ted) ....\ ". t;,\ "• .... '. •.... ••t;,"iJ, .' • ': ..."·':~:f!r ..•.....•. \' N Fig. 1. Map of unirrigated alfalfa damage study field at Little Hills Experiment Station showing location of random blocks for sampling. .•......•.•:...•. r~ '~~'" -...... 1:\~ .. ..... �- 313 - EVALUATION OF DEER USE ON ALFALFA UNDER DIFFERENT IRRIGATION RATES David F. Gordon Introduction and Acknowledgments Originally this segment's study was to be conducted at two locations, Little Hills Game Experiment Station, Meeker, Rio Blanco County and William Prather Ranch, DeBeque, Mesa County, Colorado. When Mr. Prather saw the design and understood that it would entail leaving one field completely unirrigated, he could not see his way clear to permit this. Therefore, the study was limited to Little Hills. I would like to express appreciation for help received in the establishment and conduct of this segment9s study to research personnel, Ed Prenzlow and Cliff Coghill and members of the Little Hills staff. Special mention goes to Student Assistant Richard Adams for his ingenious idea for gridding the field. Results Hay Weight Data.--Table fields at Little.Hills. 1 summarizes the sample weight data for both alfalfa Table l.--Weight of hay from all plots !/onirrigated and unirrigated alfalfa fields at Little Hills Game Experiment Station. Meeker. Colorado - 1967. Weight in Grams Irrigated Plots Unirrigated Plots Grazed Ungrazed Ungrazed Grazed 27,241.9 28,078.0 Total 25,859.0 25,210.4 561. 56 Mean 544.84 504.21 517.18 661. 7-424.0 701. 6- 307 •4 Range 754.7-306.0 790.1-288.2 ~I There were 50 pairs of plots in each field. Fifty pairs of plots were sampled from each field and the data subjected to Chi-square analysis. These data did not indicate there was any difference between grazed and ungrazed plots on either the irrigated or unirrigated field. (Calculated Chi-square = 0.15. Tabular Chi-square with 1 degree of freedom ~ 0.45 at P .50). When plots were clipped counts of the number of alfalfa plants on each plot were made in order to see if any relation existed between numbers of plants and weight of samples. Extremely low correlation was evident. (Co rrc la t Lon coefficients: irrigated field = 0.249 unirrig~ted field - O.iS'. Clipping and counting were completed in 11 man-days of labor. �- 314 - Alfalfa Damaue Study Field - Little Hills (Irrigated) . 4!o" •••• : ~5 ; ~ •••••• i1 : 9 , : •........ -: 20: ~.- •• '1 13 12 ; fl •••• oM •••••••••• ~ 19: i..... of--- -.~ f ;14 ~···-t···-····· : 17: 16 : ; ....·.f-- ...j 26 ~ ; 24 ~ ,:.... ~ •.... _." ,......... f" ••••~ ;56! ~....-~ , ~ ! 46; : 42~ !.;~~r~·I·T50r···r~·;1 l..... & a •.••.••" •••••"._ ••••......•• ~ f 651661 : 59: f·••... : .•..... e &••.•••• 8 •• --. : 78;77 ~ ~72 i 71 i 9••••••.••••• ~ q. •••• ~ •.•...••: •....••.••••• 'y : 79: 80'; ; 84: i····· ~..... ~ : ...•••~•••••~ • ; ..... -.to ••••" 81 : 94: ..o! •••..• $ ; 99: .... J •• ;87: too ••~ •..•. ~.••... ~ : 91 : : 89 : G••••• ••.••• _ ~ ~i021103~ !o.._•. !......•.... J . : II 1 : ~.••..• ~••••• e· •••• e • : I : • i 1221121~ . . : 114; 115: 116: :11 ; .••••.•.••••~••••••••••• .4. a. •••••• _.•_.111 Fig. 2. Map of irrigated alfalfa damage study field at Little Experiment Station showing location of random blocks Hills for sampling. �- 315 - Deer Counts.--Counts of deer are summarized in Tables 2 and 3, and Fig. 3 and 4. Deer began coming onto the fields as soon as the sun had set. Numbers peaked between 7:00 P.Mo and midnight MST. Deer frequented the middle of the fields as much as the edges. Cages had no frightening effect. Two of the cages were severely damaged by deer leaning against them. One night there was a severe snow squall. When the snow and wind hit~ all deer quickly left the open field. WCOis, counting as they normally would, also checked the fields several times. The hours of high and low numbers by their counts fairly closely matched the pattern found by research. When a WCO and research count were made on the same field at the same time, however, they never agreed. When the vehicle approached the field and stopped, the tendency of the deer was to leave, especially before full darke Table 2.--Number of deer and time of visits to upper, unirrigated alfalfa field at Little Hills Game EX2eriment Station~ Meeker! Colorado - 1967. Number of Deer and Time of Count (MST~ Date 1800 1900 2000 2100 2200 2300 0000 0100 0200 0300 12 3/28 11 1 3 21 4/3 7 15 10 5 8 0 11 15 26 4/5 13 0 2 0 0 4 7 16 4/10 40 21 10 5 5 18 9 '0 0 4/12 0 14 4/14 40 10 9 18 34 12 5 0 20 4/17 36 0 0 4 9 4 0 23 4/19 13 8 0 20 8 15 3 0 5 2 4/24 2 0 .2 4 4/26 0 0 11 2 9 7 5 0 0 0 4/29 0 4 1 0 5/2 0 0 0 0 0 4 5/8 0 0 2 1 2 0 0 0 5/10 3 1 1 1 0 53 147 167 Totals 45 36 69 78 35 24 15 4.4 10.5 Averages 12.8 3.5 3.0 5.75 7.1 8.7 8.0 5.0 �- 316 - Weather Data.--The hygrothermographs did not record properlyo Relative humidity was not readable on either chart. Temperature was not complete, but enough readings were obtained to get an estimate of the average monthly temperatures at each field. Precipitation was obtained from Little Hills Headquarters' weather records. The results are summarized in Table 40 Table 4.--Average temperatures at the study fields~ and monthly precipitation at the Little Hills Game Experiment Station Headquarterst Meeker~ Colorado _ 1967. Month April May June TemEerature F Irrigated Field Unirrigated Field Mean Max. Min. Mean MaxG Mino 41 60 23 43 60 26 65 47 30 48 66 31 53 70 35 52 64 39 Total Precipitation in inches 1.24 1.76 3.01 Discussion Hay Weight Comparisons.--From last segment's data (Gordon 1967) it was determined that 58 pairs of production-utilization plots would be necessary to detect a 400-pound per acre difference in production 95 percent of the time. Fifty pairs of plots were used on each field. Weight data from these plots did not indicate there was any difference in production due to grazing by deer. However~ the uncontrolled variables in the experiment were far from equal on both fields. �- 317 - Averaoe Number of Deer over Time of Visit to Unirrigated Alfalfa Field (April' 04 - May 10, 1967) 12 II. :» 10 0 :::c Iio.. C» Q. Q", • • - c 8 0 Iio.. Q» .a e ::» Z 6 ~ QI 10 • (5.0,3) II. • «> 4 (3.5,13 ) . (Average, 2 Number) ----~--~----~--~----~---T----~ o~--__---__--__ 1800 !900 2000 2100 2200 2300 0000 Time Fig. 3. of Visit 0100 0200 0300 (MST) Graph of average number of deer over time at field at Little Hills Experiment StatioT' unI -rigated alfalfa �- 318 - Average Number of Deer over Time of Visit to Irrigated (Apri; Alfalfa Field 1- May lOt 1967) (6.3,3) 3.0 • (3.0,3) •.. ::I 0 ::I: .,•..a. •.. 4D 4D C - 2. • (1.8,14) (1.7.14) {2.3,14} (1.7,14) 0 ... G) .c E ::I Z G) oa •.. 0 4D > <t 1.0 0.5 (Average, Number) 1800 1900 2000 2100 2200 2300 0000 Time Fig. 4. of Visit 0100 0200 0300 (MST) Graph of average number of deer over time at irrigated alfalfa field at Little Hills Experiment Station. �- 319 - The major objective of this study was to determine the effect of grazing by deer in the spring on the first cutting of alfalfa that has not been irrigated. Two fields were used, one was to be left unirrigated until after the first crop was harvested. Unfortunately that field received a complete and adequate, although late, irrigation from a flash flood on June 14, 15. Data from two previous years were not used in the comparison because only irrigated alfalfa was measured, the nine pairs of plots were not randomly distributed over the field and their location in the field was changed each year. Alfalfa in the fields used, though of approximately the same age, was overmature and of unequal vigor. The upper, unirrigated field had a history of adequate yearly irrigation. The lower, irrigated field had a history of irrigation only about one year out of every two or three. Pocket gopher burrows riddled the lower field so completely that a head of water would be swallowed by the burrows for days before filling up. When selecting plots an attempt was made to choose pairs with equal amounts of alfalfa on each. When 'the plots were clipped the original estimate was checked by counting the number of plants on each plot. At best this was a very subjective estimate of plant numbers and variability was compounded when estimates were made by at least four men. Another and more diverse, uncontrolled variable in trying to determine correlation between weight of hay produced and number of alfalfa plants on the plots was weeds. Although the aim was to measure alfalfa production, it was infeasible to clip only the alfalfa plants on each plot. This was tried on the first two pairs and found to take more than one man-hour per pair. At this rate it would have taken more than twice as long to get the alfalfa clipped. Since a mowing machine could not distinguish between alfalfa and weeds all vegetation on each plot was clipped. Thus the variable amount of weeds as well as the subjective count of plants on each plot combined to show extremely low correlation. The method of counting alfalfa plants on each plot might be modified by photographing the plot when selected and again after clipping to get a better estimate. The percent of area covered by vegetation could be used to arrive at a weighted estimate of production on each plot. These estimates could then be used in analysis of the data. Samples of alfalfa from two ranches near Loma, Mesa County, Colorado were obtained and analyzed as a pilot study to evaluate the effect of severe grazing on the physiology of alfalfa. Comparative age of the two stands was not known. Simple inspection of the data (Table 5) seems to indicate that overall production was somewhat lower, but these figures were merely estimates by the ranchers. Otherwise the grazed sample appeared to have less waste (ash and NFE) and more protein than the ungrazed sample. Fat was less and fiber greater in the grazed sample. Examining the proximate analysis data of the Little Hills samples, the pair from the unirrigated field followed the identical pattern of the Loma samples. The irrigated field showed the same trends only for NFE and fiber. Two samples of alfalfa for proximate analysis had been obtained from fields belonging to Albert Marinelli and Victor Giles of Lorna, Mesa County. Marinelli's field had grown without being disturbed. Giles' field had been �- 320 grazed by sheep until the last frost of spring had passed (May 19). Sheep were then removed. Weight of hay produced was estimated by the owners. Table s.--Resu1ts of proximate analysis of hay samples and weight per acre from two ranches near Lornaand two fields on Little Hills Game Experiment Station Meeker Colorado - 1967. Little Hills Lorna Irrigated Field Unirrigated Field Sheep Sheep Covered Uncovered Covered Uncovered Plots Anal:>!:sis Free a/ Grazed b/ Plots Plots Plots % Protein 16.6 17.3 17.12 16.37 14.54 16.54 1.92 % Fat 2.5 2.2 2.58 2.69 3.18 31.01 % Fiber 32.1 35.5 32.33 37.05 33.93 11.91 11.02 % Ash 8.5 8.0 14.10 15.44 % NFE 33.87 33.2 30.7 28.45 39.36 36.59 1.5 2./ 2.81 !:../ T/Acre 2.0 2.1 2.72 !:../ 2.58 !:../ 2.52 !:../ ~/ This field was ungrazed, unsprayed and cut a little early (July 7~ 1967) because of weevils. EI This field was completely grazed by sheep until the last spring frost (May 19, 1967). It was sprayed and cut on June 30, 1967. c/ Nitrogen Free Extract. d/ This is a rough estimate of production by the rancher. ~/ This is calculated estimate based on the average weight of hay from the production-utilization plots on the study fields. Deer Counts and Weather Data.--No deer counts or weather data were obtained during either of the first two segments of this study so no comparison of the relation of deer numbers or weather conditions to alfalfa production can be made. Deer numbers peaked between 7:00 PoM. and 1:00 A.M. MST (Fig. 3 and 4). The major peak appeared earlier (about 8:00) at the upper field which was the more isolated of the two. In Boyd's (1959, 1960) study of spring deer damage to alfalfa deer numbers peaked between 6:30 and 8:00 P.M. MST. The isolation of the upper field at Little Hills was similar to that of Boyd's study field. In neither case was there a major peak after midnight. Approach of a vehicle, especially before dull dark, made the deer nervous and some often left the field. When the WCO tried to count deer as they were leaving the field, counts were not accurate. Within an hour after deer had been spooked, they returned to the field. Conclusions No valid comparison of the effect of irrigation and non-irrigation on the production of alfalfa that is grazed by deer in the spring could be made from the data obtained by this study for the following reasons: (1) A flash flood on June 14, 15 adequately irrigated the field that was to have been left unirrigated. This negated the controlled variable of water. (2) Unequal vigor of the study fields introduced a bias in favor of the unirrigated field to begin with. �- 321 - (3) Weediness of the fields introduced a major variable that could not be properly measured. No valid comparison of the relation of deer numbers or weather conditions on production of alfalfa could be made for the following reasons: (1) No deer counts were made in previous years. (2) Adequate weather data were not obtained during any of the years the study was in progress. (3) Production data, as explained above, were neither sufficient nor valid. Deer count data suggests a method for a WCO to get the most accurate count of deer in an alfalfa field. It is recommended that the field to be counted be visited by the WCO at least one hour before the major peak in deer numbers is expected to occur. He should turn off the motor of his unit and wait a half hour before making a count. At that time~ if it is dark, start the motor and immediately sweep the field with the spotlight counting the.deer as they look at the light~ This procedure should be repeated at half-hour intervals for at least two hours, preferably three. It is assumed that each WCO will be aware of the date when deer numbers are likely to be greatest in the field from previous experience. The peak in deer numbers apparently varies with the proximity of the field to human populations. This is not a firm conclusion, but it seems that the farther the field is from human population centers, the earlier after sunset deer numbers peak~ In any case, studies indicate that deer numbers peak before midnight@ �- 322 - LITERATURE CITED Boyd, Raymond J. 1959. Methods of evaluating deer and elk damage to alfalfa. Colo. Game 7 Fish and Parks Dept., Game Research Rept., P-R Project W-38-R-127 JulY7 pp.53-65 + 12 fig. 1960. Methods of evaluating deer and elk damage to alfalfa in the spring. Colo. Game, Fish and Pa~ks Dept., Game Research Rept., P-R Project W-38-R-13, July, pp. 59-68. Gordon, David F. 1967. Evaluation of deer US2 on alfalfa under differen~ irrigation rates. Colo. Game, Fish and Parks Dept., Game Research Rept., P-R Project W-38-R-21, July, pp. 175-178. Snedecor, George W. 1956. Statistical methods app l.Lcd to experiments :!in p. agriculture and biology: The Iowa State Jniversity Pre ss , Ames. 53:4; Prepared by: Davia F. Gordon .Assistant Researcher �July, 19b8 - 323 JOB PROGRESS REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO Project No. W-38-R-22 Work Plan No. 6 Deer-Elk Investigations Job No. 12 Title of Job: Determination of the Effects of Spring Grazing by Deer on Crested Wheatgrass Period Covered: April IJ 1967 through September 30, 1967 Persorillel: David F. Gordon, Edgar J. Prenzlow, M. Clifford Coghill, J. Richard Adams, Little Hills Staff. Abstract Vegetation on 50 pairs of 9.6-square-foot production-utilization plots was clipped from a field of crested wheatgrass at Little Hills Experiment . Station, air-dried and weighed to the nearest 0.1 gram. These data did not indicate any statistically significant difference between plots that had been grazed by deer and exclosed plots at the .05 level. Counts of deer indicated deer numbers peaked before midnight. Weather data were recorded and proximate analysis of hay samples made. �- 324 - Objectives: 1. To determine the production between grazed. and ungrazed study plots in a field of crested wheatgrass of two age classes. 2. To determine the relation between grazing use and available moisture on production of crested wheatgrass. soil- 3. To determine the relation between weather conditions (temperature, ative humidity, and precipitation) and soil-moisture. 4. To determine the number of deer and time of greatest grazing use on the study field and relate their number to the production in order to arrive at an index of deer numbers that can be used to determine the amount of production lost due to deer use. rel- Procedures: 1. Determination of crested wheatgrass production. a. On April 4, 1967 the field was gridded as follows: (1) A baseline was stretched the length of the field and marker stakes driven every 41 feet. b. (2) From these stakes other stakes were driven every 41 feet in a line at right angles to the baseline. (3) The blocks were then numbered as sections of a township until all squares received a number. (4) Using Snedecor's (1965) table of random numbers, 50 blocks were sel~cted in which to locate paired plots (Fig. 1). Paired plots with as equal crested wheatgrass selected in each block. (1) The plots were staked at their centers. (2) cover as possible were One of each pair was selected randomly to be covered with a conical, production~utilization cage. (c) The week of June 26, 1967 all vegetation was clipped from each plot, collected in gunny sacks, labeled and hung in the hayloft at Little Hills to dry. (d) While clipping an attempt was made to count the individual of crested wheatgrass on each plot. (e) The air-dried samples were weighed on November 8, 1967. (1) Each sack was untied, information from the label recorded and the hay, including the sack, weighed to the nearest 0.1 gram on ~n Ohaus triple-beam balance. (2) Empty sacks were shaken out, bundled and weighed scale to the nearest 0.25 pound. clumps on a platform (3) This weight was averaged, converted to the nearest 0.1 gram and subtracted from the weight of each sample to determine the net weight. �- 325 - 2. f. These data were subjected to Student's t analysis to determine if a difference in production between graz;d and ungrazed plots exis~ed. g. Samples from both treatments were subjected to proximate analysis to determine their food value. Determination of deer numbers. a. Counts of deer were begun the end of March 1967 from high ground northeast of the study field at such a location that the entire field could be seen with the aid of a hand-held spotlight and 7x35 Bushnell binoculars. b. c. 3. Counts were spaced as follows: (1) Every half hour from about 5:00 P.M. until 8:00 P.M. MST. (2) From 8:00 P~Mo until midnight counts were made on the hour. (3) Thereafter until 5:00 or 6:00 A.M. counts were made at two-hour intervals alternating even and odd hours every other count. (4) This sequence was continued until a pattern was detected after which deer were counted until peak numbers had left the field. WCO's, counting as they normally would, also checked the field five times and reported their results. Determination of weather. s. A weather shelter containing a Casella/London recording hygrothermograph was installed at the field. h. Precipitation data were obtained from Little Hills HeadquartersW records. Recommendations: Terminate this study. If st some future'time circumstances indicate the need, renew the study under 8 different design. �- 326 - Crested Wheatgras8 Damage Study Field (Little Hills) I J~ I N Fig. l.--Map of crested wheatgrass damage study field at Little Hills Experiment Station showing location of random blocks for sampling. �- 327 - DETERMINATION OF THE EFFECTS OF SPRING GRAZING BY DEER ON CRESTED WHEATGRASS David F. Gordon Introduction and Acknowledgements This is the third year the crested wheatgrass study has been in progress. This segment's data are the most complete and voluminous of the three years. Help in gathering the information was given by research personnel, Ed Prenzlow and Cliff Coghill and members of the Little Hills staff. Special mention is due Student Assistant Richard Adams for his able assistance in the study. Results Analysis of Production Hay Weight Data.--Table 1 summarizes the weights of samples from the crested wheatgrass field at Little Hills~ Table l.--Weight of hay samples from paired production-utilization plots on a field of crested wheatgrass at Little Hills Game Experiment Station, Meeker, Colorado - 1967. Weight in Grams Ungrazed Plots Grazed Plots Total 19,426 8 19,695&2 Mean 388.5 401 9 Range 646 9 - 17484 748.9 - 176.6 0 0 0 Ninety-nine plots were sampled from the field and the data subjected to Student's ! analysis~ The data did not indicate there was any difference between grazed and ungrazed plotso {Calculated t=00345o Tabular t at the 5 percent level with 98 degress of freedom = 1 982)0 0 When plots were clipped the plants on each plot were counted to see if any relation existed between number of plants and weight of samples. Low correlation was evidento (Correlation coefficient~ Oo21)~ Clipping and counting was completed in four man-days of labor. Proximate Analysiso--Table 2 summarizes results of the proximate analysis of the hay samples obtained from the crested wheatgrass fielda �- 328 Table 2.--Results of proximate analysis of samples of crested wheatgrass and weight per acre from study field at Little Hills Game Experiment Station, Meeker Colorado - 1967. Ungrazed Plots Analysis Grazed Plots '70 Protein 12.40 10.97 1.88 % Fat 3.83 31.82 % Fiber 39.52 % Ash 6.29 5.46 % NFE !!/ 45.66 42.17 1.94 T/Acre 2.01 a/ Nitrogen Free Extract. Deer Numbers.--Counts of deer are summarized in Table 3. Deer began arriving on the field as soon as the sun had set. No particular part of the field was used any more than another. Cages had no apparent deterring effect. One night a sudden snow squall caused the deer to leave the field in a herd. One WCO counted three deer at an 8:00 P.M. MST count. No deer were observed in the study field by WCO's at any other time they counted. Even the research counts registered too few deer to make any definite conclusion on the peak hours. Generally however, the peak occurred between 9:00 P.M. and midnight MST. Weather Data.--The hygrothermograph did not record relative humidity. Temperatures were not complete, but enough readings were obtained to get an estimate of average monthly temperatures. Results are summarized in Table 4. �- 329 Table 4.--Average temperatures at the field of crested wheatgrass precipitation, Little Hills Game Experiment Station Headquarters, Colorado - 1967. Month April May June TemEerature Mean Max 43 60 48 66 52 64 (F) Min 26 31 39 and monthly Meeker, Total Precipitation (inches) 1.24 1.76 3.01 Discussion Hay Weight Comparisons.--Last segment's data indicated that 45 pairs of production-utilization plots would be necessary to detect a 200 pound per acre difference in production 95 percent of the time. Fifty pairs of plots were used. The weight data from these plots did not indicate that there was any difference in production due to grazing by deer. However, uncontrolled variable-s in the experiment left much to be desired. In two previous years data were gathered from nine pairs of piots. They were not randomly distributed, and their position the field was changed each year. Therefore, the data were not used in this comparison. When selecting plots to pair an attempt was made to choose two plots with equal crested wheatgrass cover. All vegetation was removed by clipping and the original selection of pairs checked by counting the number of crested wheatgrass clumps on each plot. This was at best a very subjective estimate of plant numbers and variability was compounded by the fact that at least three men made the estimates. Low correlation was also partially due to the amount of weeds present on the plots. Two of the plots had no crested wheatgrass on them at all. One was pure cheatgrass (Bromus tectorum) and the other various weeds. A method of determining ground cover might be perfected wherein photographs of the plot would be taken when it was selected and again when it was clipped. Actual ground cover would be planimetered and converted to percent. This figure could then be used to arrive at a weighted estimate of vegetative production to be used in analysis of the data. Deer Counts and Weather Data.--No deer counts or weather data were obtained in previous years so no comparison with this segment's data can be made. This year, deer numbers peaked between 9:00 P.M. and midnight MST, strengthening Boyd's (1959, 1960) finding that no major peaks occurred after midnight. Proximate Analysis.--The tistically. proximate analysis data could not be analyzed sta- �- 330 Conclusions No valid comparison of grazed to ungrazed crested wheatgrass can be made due to the following: 1. Lack of sufficient data from previous years. 2. Extreme variability among paired plots. 3. Faulty technique in determining ground cover. No comparison of the effect of deer numbers or weather on production of crested wheatgrass could be made for the following reasons; 1. Lack of data from previous years. 2. Production data, as explained above, was neither sufficient nor valid. LITERA 'lURECITED Royd, Raymond J. 1959. Methods of evaluating deer and elk damage to alfalfa. Colo. Game, Fish and Parks Dept., Game Research Rept., P-R Project W-38-R-12, July, pp. 83-65 + fig. 1960. Methods of evaluating deer and elk damage to alfalfa in the spring. Colo. Game, Fish and Parks Dept., Game Research Rept., P-R Project W-38-R-13, July, pp. 59-68. Snedecor, George W. 1959. Statistical methods applied to experiments in agriculture and biology. The Iowa State University Press, Ames. 534 p. Prepared by: David F. Gordon Assistant Researcher �July, 1968 - 331 JOB PROGRESS REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO ------------------------- Project No. W-38-R-22 Work Plan No. 6 Deer-Elk Investigations Job No. 13 Title of Job: Evaluation of the Effects of Deer and Rodent Use on Pinto Bean Production Period Covered: April 1, 1967 through October 15, 1967 Personnel: David F. Gordon, J. Richard Adams, Marion C. Coghill and Millard E. Graham .Abstract Game damage to pinto beans was studied by comparing three treatments, deer-use, lagomorph-use and combined-use to a control. No statistical difference in production between either deer-use plots or lagomorph-use plots individually compared to the control plots was indicated at the 10 percent level. However, a difference in production did turn up between combined-use plots and the controls. Soil-moisture was well conserved. Animal numbers all peaked between 7:00 and 8:00 P.M. MST. Deer and cottontail rabbits appeared to consume more beans than jackrabbits who were never observed eating beans. �- 332 Objectives: 1. To determine the effects of grazing by deer, rabbits and porcupines upon production of pinto beans. 2. To determine the relation between grazing use and available moisture upon the production of pinto beanso soil- 3. To determine the relation between weather conditions (temperature, lative humidity, and precipitation) and soil-moisture. 4. To determine the number of deer and time of greatest grazing use on the study field and relate this number to production in order to arrive at an index of deer numbers that can be used to determine the amount of production lost due to deer use. 5. To determine any difference in the method of grazing on pinto bean plants by deer, rabbits and porcupines, that can be used to determine the amount of production lost due to deer use. re- Procedures: 1. A field of pinto beans of about 10 acres was quartered and four treatments, total use, deer use, rodent use and total exclosure, applied to each quarter as outlined in segment W-38-R-21. 2~ The pinto beans were sampled at harvest as follows: (a) The threshing was done by a 1962, AFis-Chalmers, with a 7 S-foot header (Fig. 1). model 90 combine' 0 (b) The thresher stopped at the entrance to a plot and waited until aIr beans on the pick-up had been threshed out and deposited in the hopper. (c) It then moved ahead until it reached the end of the exclosure stopped again until all these beans had been threshed out. (u) Beans from the plot windrow were collected in sacks, the sacks tied and labeled and loaded into a pickup for transportation to ranch headquarters. (e) Bean samples were weighed pound (Fig. 2). (f) Empty sacks were shaken out, bundled, weighed and the total averaged. on a Chatillon and spring scale to the nearest to the nearest pound (g)i This average, times the number of sacks in each sample, was subtracted from the gross weight of each sample. (In), 3. Harvested beans were taken to Dove Creek and sampled to determine percent of dirt and waste in them. Oata; 'on soil-moisture were obtained and analyzed the as follows~ «(a~)Stiacks of four soil-moisture resistance blocks 6 inches, 12 inches, 2~ inches and 36 inches deep respectively were set at the center,each en.d·and each side of the study field. �- 333 - Ul f.-t (J) ~ C1l .c: Ul U I ·rl r~ ~ rl c,..; o o +' o ..c:: P-. �w w +- Fig. 2. Photo of procedure used in weighing pinto bean samples with Chatillon scales. �- 335 i(b) Soil-moisture readings were taken with a Colman Meter each week from May 31 through September 20, 19678 4. Data on weather conditions during the growing season were obtained from a weather station at the study area and a raingauge at ranch headquarters and analyzed as outlined under segment W-38-R-2l. 50 Data on numbers of wild animals using the field were obtained as follows: (a) Counts were made from a portable, 14-foot high, counting tower (Figo 3) using an aircraft landing light and 7x35 Bushnell binocularso (b) Counts were begun about 6:00 PoMo MST and continued until about 7:00 A.M. Counts on the half hour were made until 8:00 P.M., on the hour thereafter until midnight and every two hours thereafter, alternating even and odd hours every other count, until morning. (c) Counts were made twice a week frOm July 19 until beans were harvested, about September 30, 1967. (d) Animal numbers were plotted on graphs to determine the time of greatest numbers in the field and their location plotted on a map to determine distribution (Appendix A)e 6 8 Method of grazing pinto beans by the different animals was described and photographed. 7. An inventory of mammals (smaller than cottontails) around the field was taken using the North American Census of Small Mammals technique~ Four traplines, one pair each in the pinyon-juniper type and the sagebrush type around the study field, were run. Recommendations: 1. Continue this study for one more year in order to include years in the analysis. 20 Lease the field from the rancher in order to have tighter controls. 3 Publish the results~ 0 �- 336 - C"'l • �- 337 - EVALUATION OF THE EFFECTS OF DEER AND RODENT USE ON PINTO BEAN PRODUCTION David F. Gordon Introduction and Acknowledgments This year's study was hampered early in the growing season when the rancher's cattle got into the field and practically wiped out all unexclosed beans. The field was replanted and some data obtained. The job of getting this segmentWs study going was very ably handled by Student Assistant Richard Adams. Special commendation is due him for the way he solved the problem of the cows. Research Assistant Cliff Coghill helped install soil-moisture stacks. Thanks also is due Wildlife Conservation Officer Millard Graham for his help collecting deer for stomach samples. Results Production.--The pinto bean study field (Figs. 4 and 5) was planted to Certified San Juan seed on June 8 and 9. The end of that month, when the beans were in two-leaf stage~ Mr. Dicken's cattle broke into the field. A count of bean plants along 400 feet of rows both inside and outside the exclosures yielded the following averages: Unexclosed Exclosed rows ~ Seven bean plants per 100 feet of row had few leaves left on them. Q These plants rows - One-hundred-twenty-six bean plants per 100 feet of row. These plants all had two leaves. Mr. Dicken agreed to plow up and replant the entire field except three exclosures, one of each treatment, in the east half of the field. The replants matured about a week later than the original plantingo Their production averaged about two-thirds the San Juan bean production by weight. Bean production is summarized in Table 1. Weights of the San Juan beans sampled from the east half of the field were omitted from the analysis. Analysis of variance of the data indicated considerable homogeneity in the average production from the three areas of the field used for replications. (Calculated F = 1.125. Tabular F with 2 and 6 degrees of freedom at the 010 level = 3.46). There was a statistically significant difference shown be~ tween average production on the totally exclosed and totally used plots. (Calculated F = 3.867. Tabular F with 3 and 6 degrees of freedom at the .10 level = 3.29). wben confidence limits were set about the individual treatment averages no significant difference in production was demonstrated between either the deer or lagomorph exclosures and the total exclosures at the 10 percent level. �- 338 - N -- .",.-- ....".-..,I--..,. ". ••.••.•••• ",..-- •••• •.• "'" "'","" , "'" " ",," I t3 / _... ,""" -- -, " " ,,/ "'" ," "",",,, ,,, \ \ Fig. 4. , R Rodent Exclolure D Deer Exclosur. T Total ~- Counting Tower EI- Weother Station ®- Soil-Moisture Exclolure Stack Map of pinto bean damage study field indicating location of the plots and their treatment. (Wilmer Dicken Ranch, Egnar, San Miguel County, Colorado. SE~, SW~, Sec. 34, T43N, R19W, NMPM). �- 339 - I' Fig. 5 - Photo of pinto bean damage study field from south end. �- 340 Table l.--Weights of samples of pinto beans collected from plots containing eight rows of beans each 325 feet long on the damage study field at the Wilmer Dicken Ranch, Egnar, San Miguel County. Colorado - 1967. Weight in Pounds of Beans Plot Uncleaned Waste Recleaned NW Quarter Control 67 17 50 Deer Exclosure 138 35 103 Rodent Exclosure 155 39 116 Total Exclosure 142 35 107 SW Quarter Control Deer Exclosure Rodent Exc10sure Total Exclosure E Half (Idaho Ill) Control Deer Exclosure Rodent Exclosure Total Exclosure 123 J20 31 111 28 92 90 83 158 40 118 63 106 127 129 16 27 32 32 47 189 162 204 47 142 40 122 153 30 79 95 97 E Half (San Juan ~/) Control Deer Exclosure Rodent Exc10sure Total Exclosure ~I Weights from this variety statistical analysisa 51 of pinto bean are not included in the Soil moisture.--Soil-moisture data were obtained only in the form of Colman Meter readings The readings for the stack located in the center of the field (Fig. 1) indicated that soil-moisture remained at a fairly constant level, becoming more uniform as the depth increased. The shallowest resistance block recorded readings that were to some extent indicative of precipitation immediately preceding the reading. a Weather.--Precipitation this segment was above average. From May through October a total of 0.50 inches of snow and 16.10 inches of rain was recorded. This was an average of 2.68 inches per month, ranging from 0.30 to 6.15 inches. The rain caused fairly severe washing, especially in the southwest quarter~ burying a good many bean plants in the lower end of the rodent exclosure. Hygrothermograph records summarized in Table 2. from the weather station at the study field are �- 341 Table 2. Summary of monthly temperature and relative humidity recorded at the pinto bean damage study field, Wilmer Dicken Rarich , Egnar, San Miguel County, Colorado - 1967. TemEerature ~F~ Relative Humidity (%) Month Mean Minimum Maximum Mean Minimum Maximum May 50 19 82 48 15 87 June 57 34 87 42 12 86 July 66 50 88 48 13 83 August 64 47 86 45 17 83 September 58 36 82 41 14 83 Animal Counts and Observations· Animal Numbers.--Counts of wild animals using the bean field were begun the first part of July when beans had begun to sprout. They were interrupted when Mr. Dicken's cattle broke into the field and destroyed the unexclosed beans. The field was replanted to Idaho III bean seed, an early maturing variety, and counts resumed on July 19 when the second planting of beans had sprouted. Deer (Odocoileus hemionus) were observed on only five counts, and these between August 30 and September 20. One deer apparently wandered along the south edge of the field on July 21 between hourly counts. Cottontail rabbits (Sylvilagus sp.) were in the field or on its borders on five counts between August I and September 20. Jackrabbits (LeEus californicus) were observed in the field from July 20 thr~ugh August 29 on 14 counts. These observations indicated that animal numbers in the field peaked between 7:00 and 8:00 PoM. MST. This was true for all species (Fig. 6, 7 and 8). Porcupines (Erethizon dorsatllm) were not numerous enough to make any statement about visitations. Animal Distribution.--Deer frequented (Fig. 9) the northeast third of the study field most often, the heaviest concentrations being in the east half of the northeast quarter. One group was recorded in the southwest corner of the field. The study field is bordered on the east by a sagebrush flat adjacent to an extensive area of chained pinyon-juniper. North and south of this flat, and the study field, are sections of standing pinyon-juniper. Between the study field and other cultivated fields extending more than three-quarters of a mile to the west, is a narrow (less than 200 feet Wide) strip of the same type. Deer tended to enter and leave the study area from the sagebrush and and pinyon-juniper covers. Presence of the counting tower and pickup, with motor running on nights when counts were made, deterred them from entering the south end. When, however, reconnaissance of the field was made after an absence of a few days tracks were distributed fairly generally except in the southwest quarter. Cottontail rabbits were concentrated in the extreme southwest extension of the study field (Fig. 9). Two were observed in the northwest quarter, however; one of these may have been a jackrabbit. It was difficult to distinguish from that distance, but droppings at that spot the next morning looked like cottontail. Habitually, however, cottontails did not penetrate the field much more than about 6-8 rows~ or 25 feet. When bean plants became large, about the middle of August, it was difficult to see the small cottontails except in the �- 342 - Average Number of Deer over Time of Visit to Pinto Bean Field -1967- 8.0 • 6.0 4.0 2.0 1.0 'O.S o.o"'~""",~"",,,-1800 1900 •••• -,,,--,,,-,,,-,,,, 2000 2100 2200 2300 __ 0000 0100 ,,,,,_,,_,,,,_ 02,00 0300 0400 Mountain Standard Time Fig. 6. Graph of average numbers of deer and times of visits to pinto bean damage study field. (Wilmer Dicken Ranch, Egnar, San Miguel County, Colorado - 1967)0 �- 343 - Average Number of Cottontaiis over Time of Visit to Pinto Bean Field -1961- 1.0 0.8 1800 1900 2000 2100 2200 2300 2400 0100 0200 0300 0400 Mountain Standard Time rig. 7. Graph of average numbers of cottontails and times of visits to pinto bean damage study field. (Wilmer Dicken Ranch, Egnar, San Miguel County, Colorado - 1967). �- 346 extreme southwest extension opposite the tower. When reconnaissance of the field was made, however, their tracks and droppings were profuse around the entire perimeter. Distribution of jackrabbits was fairly general allover the field except the extreme southern half (Fig. 10). Heaviest concentrations were recorded around the north and east soil-moisture stacks and along the east-west midline. Animal Depredation.--Observations were made on depredation of beans by the different species. Deer were first seen in the field on August 30. Tracks of deer and plants that had been nibbled were noticed on August 14 while the beans were in blossom. The top leaves had been eaten off though no evidence of missing blossoms was seen. On August 24, shortly after the beans had begun setting on, evidence of deer depredation was again noticed (Fig. 11). The top leaves were eaten and the new beans left untouched. By September 5 the beans were almost mature. That was the first time evidence of bean pods being eaten was observed (Fig. 12). When the plants were cut and drying in the shock deer trampled them and threshed out some beans. Stomach samples taken from two deer, the first part of August and the first part of October, showed definite presence of bean leaves. Bean pods were also present in the second sample. The most severe, though not extensive~ damage noted was caused by cottontails. Just before beans were cut, on September 20, there was an area of the field about 6 rows deep and 25-35 feet ,long on the edge, tapering as it extended into the field, that had been severely damaged by cottontails. The most peripheral plants had been almost demolished. These were very small plants (Fig. 13). Size of the plants increased deeper in the field and damage was not quite as extensive. In all cases where the plants had beans on them, these were left. When a cottontail had been eating in an area~ uneaten leaves were often noticed on the ground around a plant (Fig. 14). Jackrabbits were never observed to eat beans. There was evidence of their feeding on both young and older pigweed (Amaranthus retroflexus) (Fig. 15). No evidence of porcupine use of pinto beans or weeds was seen. Some damage was caused by pocket gophers (Thomomys bottae) who cut the roots of the plants (Fig. 16), and pinyon jays (Gyrnnorhinus cyauocephalus) who were seen pulling small bean sprouts out of the ground. Small Mammal Cansus.--An inventory of the species of mammals smaller than rabbits was taken on July 22-24. The same traplines were used that were established last year. Species trapped and surely identified were as follows: Pinyon-Juniper Trapline Deer mouse - - - - - - -Peromyscus maniculatus Chipmunk - - - - - - -Eutamias sp. Red-backed vole - - - - - - - Clethrionomys gapperi Sagebrush Trapline Deer mouse - - - - - - - - - -Peromyscus maniculatus Harvest mouse - - - - - - - - Reithrodontomys sp. Chipmunk - - - - - - - - - - -Eutamias sp. �- 347 - N •.•.-- .. . " / / // "" " ,,, -- ",,, , ..•• .",.-.. ......'" .",..~ •••••• I ,. '" EJ / / ; -' I '\ ,,,, , \ \ "\\ Fig. 10. R Rodent o Deer Exclosure T - Total Exclosure ~ Counfino - Exclosure Tower G- Soli-Moisture EJ - Wea t her Q - Jockrabbit Stack Stat ion e - Porcupine Map indicating distribution of unprotected species in pinto bean damage study field on nights of counts. (Wilmer Dicken Ranch, Egnar, San Miguel County, Colorado - 1967). �- 348 - Figure 11 - Photo of deer damage to growing pinto bean plant. �w +- \0 Fig. 12. Photo of pinto bean that was eaten by deer after the plants were cut. �w Vl o Figure - 13 - Photo of pinto bean plants eaten by cottontails showing size of plants and cut leaves on the ground. �w V1 f--" Fig. 14. Photo of pinto bean plant with larger leaves cut and left on the ground. �- 352 - �..: t I ..• , .. J , l' ••• •, ~¥. - 353 - ..' . ' •• +>• ~ P. .-i s:: Q) <11 .D 0 r... Q) P. +> s:: .,; "d Q) ~ ~ .,; s:: II) ~ 'U "d 0 ::;j r... s Q) 0 P. ..c:: bD +> Q) o .!><: 0 P. fH 0 0 +> 0 ..c:: p.. • -o T-I • bD ·rl P:.. �- 354 - One other species was trapped, but it could not be definitely identified because the skull was crushed. However, it looked like a sagebrush vole (Lagurus curtatus), a rare find for the area. Conclusions Production and Observation on Animal De redations.--Deer probably ate more bean matter (leaves and pods than any of the other species. However, even this species did not do enough damage to show up statistically. Most of the deer remained fairly close to the edge of the field, concentrating in a strip about 100 feet wide. Deer and their tracks were observed in the very center of the field, but this was never more than 230 feet from the edge. When these distances are applied to a large field of 160 acres more or less the area used by deer is relatively small. Deer were not observed to eat more than an occasional bean. When leaves were eaten the plant was not destroyed, although in severe cases growth was retarded and bean production possibly decreased. When a field is surrounded by natural deer cover, as the study field was, it is much more liable to depredation. The closer and more extensive the cover, the greater the chance of deer use. However, in conclusion, either there were not enough deer using the field or they were not distributed extensively enough to cause a significant decrease in bean production. Although cottontails do eat pinto bean plants, very few rabbits were definitely recorded any deeper in the field than 6-8 rows. These peripheral rows are usually of small, relatively unproductive plants. Thus cottontail depredations are negligible in decreasing production. This was borne out by statistical analysis. From evidence on hand, it does not appear that jackrabbits are any danger to beans. In the past,fieldmen have suspected these animals to be the main culprits in damage to pinto beans. Although they are fairly numerous and widespread over the fields, it appears they are dining upon weeds instead of beans. Only minor damage was caused by other species such as pocket gophers and jays. Where natural cover for these species is near by, their depredations are likely to be more pronounced. Soil-moisture and Weather.--Comparison of precipitation and soil-moisture indicated that farming practices, as conducted by the rancher, maintained good soil-moisture levels at effective root depths throughout the,growing season. Moisture was well conserved in the cultivated field. Prepared by: David F. Gordon Assistant Wildlife Researcher �- 355 APPENDIX A,' Map blank on which location of observed animals was plotted. �- 356 APPENDIX A DAMAGE STUDY FORM Project W-38-R Date ----------------~Location -------------- Observer -------------- Time Temperature Barometer Wind Weather Sky Number of ~emarks Deer ~ Total �July, 1968 - 357 JOB PROGRESS REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COIDRADO ----------~~~~~-------- Project No. W-38-R-22 Work Plan No. llA Deer-Elk Investigations Job No. 6 Title of Job: Management Recommendations, Rocky Mountain National Park Cooperative Elk Study Period Covered: April 1, 1967 to March 31, 1968 Personnel: R. Bruce Gill Abstract '~e history of elk populations within Rocky Mountain National Park are 1i:'eviewed concluding with the status of this elk population in 1962, when the present studies were initiated. A review of range studies completed in 1963 indicated that the Park herd was at or exceeding the desired popula.tion levels. Trapping-banding studies revealed that significant portions '0lf !thePark elk herd summer and winter outside the Park and would be vulll1l'elr'able to special hunting seasons held at these times. Experimental :Se'rJl!S'CJnS in these areas in September, and December, 1967, were held with -errcourag Ing results. Population classifications with the use of helicopters were begun in 1966. ' Following appraisal of the results of these counts recommendations were made concerning techniques and precautions to be conside~e~ during future counts. Management recommendations were made which sho~~~ lr'esultin improved management of the Park elk herd. �- 358 Objectives: (1) Determine the over-all aspects of the study as they pertain to the management of this specific population of elk. (2) Publish and report on the findings of this study. (3) Recommend the best possible management for the elk population in the study area as indicated from the findings of preceding jobs. Procedures: (1) Summarize and compile the findings of all previous jobs of this study into one comprehensive report. (2) Prepare manuscripts for various portions of the study for submission to various popular and technical pUblications. (3) PDepare a list of management recommendations based on study findings which will contribute towards better management of elk within and adjacent to Rocky Mountain National Park. �- 359 - ROCKY MOUNTAIN NATIONAL PARK COOPERATIVE ELK STUDY R. Bruce Gill Introduction The Problem The major problem concerning Rocky Mountain National Park elk is one common to many other of our national parks, that of overpopulation of animals. Following the public outcry against direct reduction programs in Yellowstone National Park in the winter of 1961-62, direct reduction programs in Rocky Mountain National Park were discontinued. The result was increasing elk pressures on the major winter concentration areas within and immediately adjacent to the Park. In 1963 the National Park Service, Colorado Game, Fish, and Parks Department, and the U. S. Forest Service began cooperative investigations to determine if ways could be found to control the population increases of Park elk by methods other than reduction programs by Park personnel. Historical Background The areas within and surrounding Rocky Mountain National Park within the history of modern man were probably always populated by a variety of game species. Toll (1962) commented: "After the Arapahos left this region, going north to follow the buffalo which had been driven off by the advance of the white man, the Utes came in, so that many settlers regarded the region as having been permanently occupied by the Utes; while in fact before the white man came, Estes Park was regarded by the Arapahos as their own territory, and held by them against all other tribes. They regarded it as a huge game preserve, and it is the same question which was the principle (sic) one in Indian life here. It occasioned their wars with other tribes, as they wished to keep the game entirely to themselves. It also determined their migrations from winter to summer, as they followed the game up into the mountains in summer and back to the plains in wintertime." Apparently, however, the native elk herds in the region of Estes Park were almost completely extirpated sometime between 1870 and the turn of the century. This was largely the result of settlement of the region by the white man and his subsequent demands on native game populations of his subsistence. Elk were reintroduced into the Park area from Yellowstone National Park and Jackson Hole National Elk Refuge beginning in 1913. Shortly thereafter, in 1915,' Rocky Mountain National Park was established when 229,062 acres were withdrawn from the Colorado (Roosevelt) National Forest. The new elk population within this area was further protected by the establishment of a state game refuge around the north, east, and south boundaries of the Park in 1919. As the elk population slowly began to multiply, further measures were undertaken to hasten the increase. Predator control programs were begun and vigorously pursued during the years 1917-1924 within and surrounding the Park. There was a progressive increase in the elk population from the initial release of 30 elk in 1915 to an estimated 1,200 in 1940. �- 360 The first signs of overpopulation of elk within the Park were extensive "barking" of aspen in the spring of 1930. During 1933-34, 12 exclosures were constructed at various locations within the Park and subsequent studies of vegetation changes within and without the exc10sures were initiated. The results of these studies indicated that abusive over-use by elk was occurring. In order to slow the increase of elk, the predator control programs were abandoned within the Park in 1934, also public hunting was resumed around the Park boundaries in 1939. These measures were largely unsuccessful, and as a result, in 1943-44 the park attempted direct reductions for the first time. This first attempt was not too successful, but the following winter 301 elk were killed. Still the over-use of winter ranges continued and another reduction program was begun in the winter of 1949-50 in which 340 elk were killed. Reductions continued through 1962 during which period 712 elk were removed. Following the cessation of direct reductions in 1963, emphasis for control of the Park elk population was placed upon harvest of surplus animals at a time when they concentrated outside the Park. As a result of banding operations in the Park in 1962-63, a special preseason was held on the east side of the Park in January, 1963, in which nearly 500 elk were harvested. However, locals in the Estes Park area claimed that most of these were elk which resided year-round outside the Park boundaries. The present studies were initiated, in part, to assess the validity of these claims. Summary of Results Range Investigations As a result of range surveys completed in 1962, "keyli elk winter areas within the Park and on adjacent Roosevelt National Forest lands were delineated (Fig. 1). Of the 244,000 acres of National Forest land adjoining the Park on the east side, only 4,245 acres (1. 7 percent) were estimated to be "key" elk winter range. Most of this winter range is comprised of a ponderosa pine overstory with either a grass or browse-type understory. Within the Ponderosa pinebrowse types, browse densities do not generally exceed 15 percent with the dominant browse species being either mountain mahogany or bitterbrush. Heavy use of these browse species within elk concentration areas is evident from vigor ratings assigned to plants along transect survey lines. Approximately 60.6 percent of the key winter areas with browse understories were rated as low vigor areas with the remaining 39.4 percent rating only a medium vigor' classification. Within the Park the story was much the same. Forage use ratings made in 1962 indicated that 45 percent of the aspen and 64 percent of the willow in the Parkis major elk wintering areas had been heavily used in previous years. Park Service employees estimated that winter ranges within the Park could only support from" 400-600 elk, and elk numbers were approaching or exceeding that limit at the conclusion of the range investigations. Migration and Distribution During the wint,er of 1962-63 an intensive trapping and marking program was initiated within the Park to get more specific information concerning the seasonal distribution and migration of the Park elk herd. Trapping and marking continued through 1967 and was accompanied by periodic aerial flights over areas within and adjacent to the Park. As a result of these efforts it was concluded that sizeable portions of the Park herd reside outside the Park boundaries during periods from July through September on the north and west sides and from January through March on the east side (Fig. 1). Observations C0P,'('1'''' n « IL,: �- 361 timing of the migrations revealed that often many of the Park elk were back within the Park boundaries during the regular Colorado big game hunting season from mid-October to mid-November. Therefore, increasing the harvests around the Park during these periods with the intent of removing surplus Park elk probably was not too successful. However~ it was believed that if adequate hunting pressure could be applied outside the Park during periods when Park elk concentrated in these areas, sportsmen might be able to harvest some of these surpluses. Two such seasons were held by the Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department during 1967. An early season was held from September 2-10 in parts of areas MM, BB, and T adjoining the Park on the north and west sides. Hunters were permitted to take one elk of either sex with 298 hunters taking part in the hunt. An estimated 54 elk were taken during this season; 30 bulls, 21 cows~ and 3 calves. During the regular big game season from October 2l-November 9, approximately 252 elk were harvested from these three Game Management units~ but there was no way of assessing how many of these may h<Jve been Park elk. A post-season was held from December 16-31 in the part of Game Management Unit 20 on the east side of the Park with a resultant harvest of 45 elk. It is very difficult to assess the effects of these seasons since there is no way of distinguishing unbanded Park elk from r-es Lderrt elk within these units. Population Composition Population classification counts from helicopt('Y""Here begun in Rocky Mountain National Park in September, 1966. The purpose of these counts was two-fold; one~ to establish trend areas which could be used as indicators of population changes; and two, to evaluate the reproductive performance of this population. The results revealed the following: (1) In order to get valid winter trend comparisons large areas of the Park must be flown, including alpine areas as well as the large basins in the Lower Park meadows. During flights in November, for instance, 63.1 percent of all elk observed and 84.8 percent of all the bulls were seen above timberline. In February, 1967~ 10.7 percent of all elk and 47.8 percent of all bulls counted were seen above timberline. The tendency on past counts has been to restrict all or most of the counting effort to the large meadow areas on the east side of the Park. (2) There is a real. need for prior training before any observer attempts to classify elk. Comparisons between classification results of two different observers revealed differences of 32.8 percent between mature bull:cow rat Los , 31.0 percent between "sp Lke " bull:cow ratios, and 5.4 percent between calf: cow ratios of the two observers. It was believed that one of the observers consistently classified portions of the lispike" bull groups as cows. Also any potential observer who has tendencies towards air-sickness should disqualify himself as an observer. (3) The Park herd is very prolific. The classification counts conducted in 1966-67 resulted in ratios in excess of 50:100 (calves per 100 cm'17s), approaching the ratios obtained from some of the most prolific populations in Colorado. �- 362 - NORTH T ROCKY MOUNTAIN NATIONAL NATIONAL PARK Fi~ure Rocky , . wnterelk l.--Kf'y i '1 r oun t a i.11 . Co op e r a t i.vc r a ng e s Elk ' Studies �- 363 - Recommendations: Using the information summarized above as a base the following gUidelines for managing the Rocky Mountain National Park elk populations are recommended: (1) One of the most urgent management needs concerning the Rocky Mountain National Park elk population is that of obtaining reliable indicators of population levels. Currently the only methods in use are annual The reliability of these counts is questionable since trend counts6 they have, in the past, tended to include primarily areas in the large basins on the east side of the Park such as: Moraine Park, Beaver Meadows, Horseshoe Park, and Hallowell Park6 The alpine areas have "lrgely been ignored, assuming that the bulk of the population do n--: .• .,inter above timberline. Depending on the severity of the winter, this assumption may not be true. It is recommended that these trend counts include alpine areas, particularly Tombstone Ridge, the North side of Forest Canyon, Bighorn Mountain, Fairchild Mountain, Mt. Dunraven, Mt. Dickenson, Dark Mountain, Stormy Peaks, and Signal Mountain. Also a designed system of permanent pellet transects should be installed within the lower meadow areas on the east side of the Park so as to include all locales that elk normally frequent during the winter. These should be read annually and used to compare annual differences in elk concentrations on critical areas. (2) Population classification counts should be conducted at least once each year preferably in November to assess calf production. All elk concentration areas within the Park should be flown, both above and below timberline. (3) Efforts should be made to expand trapping and banding operations to include elk which summer along the north boundary of the Park. These elk have not previously been included in banding operations as they do not normally winter within the vicinities of the Moraine Park and Horseshoe Park trapsites. (4) Special pre- and post-seasons should continue around the west9 north, and east boundaries of the Park in order to provide sportsmen with an opportunity to harvest surplus Park elk. (5) Efforts should be continued to hold an. experimental~ con.trolled elk season by the general public within the Park boundaries. LITERATURE Toll, R. W. 1962. Arapaho CITED trails and names. ��July, 1968 - 365 - JOB PROGRESS REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO Project No. W-38-R-22 Work Plan No. llB Title of Job: Deer-Elk Investigations Job No. 4 Seasonal Movements - Rio Grande Elk Herd Period Covered: April 1, 1967 through March 31, 1968 Personnel: Raymond J. Boyd, M. C. Coghill, Errol E. Ryland, Don Benson, Earl Cochran, Glen Hinshaw and Gordon Saville. Abstract Elk trapping and banding programs in the Rio Grande drainage, from the winter of 1963-64 through the 1965-66 winter, resulted in 188 elk being neck banded. There were 102 banded on Goose Creek, 31 banded in Long Ridge and 55 banded on Shaw Creek. Ear tag returns from 20 hunter-l<:illed elk gave indications of movements from winter trapping sites to elk concentration areas during the October hunting season. ~',1igration routes from winter to summer ranges were determined by analyzing 356 neck band sightings. Maps showing migration routes, winter and summer concentrations, and ear tag return information were made up and included in the report. �- 366 Ob jectives: 1. Determine the normal seasonal movements of the sub-units of this elk herd, and general migration patterns between summer and winter ranges. 2. Determine the movements of individual elk between herds and drainages. Procedures: 1. Schedule bi-weekly fixed-wing aircraft flights within the study area to locate banded elk and concentration areas. Observations of marked elk will also be noted on all other flights in the study area. 2. Collect all band sighting reports and ear tag return information Fort Collins Research Center and mark the locations on maps. at the 3. Combine all sighting and tag return data into a final report on the seasonal movements of elk in Game Management Units 76, 79, and 80. Recommendations: 1. Continue to keep track of neck band sightings and ear tag recoveries maps located at the Fort Collins Research Center. 2. Attempt to mark an additional 3. Include all data on movements of banded elk within final publication on the Rio Grande Elk Studies. on 50 elk on Long Ridge in early winter. the study area in a �SEASONAL MOVEMENTS .: RIO GRANDE ELK HERD Raymond J. Boyd Introduction Aerial censusing of big game populations is an accepted practice of most game departments. The accuracy and value of aerial censusing is dependent upon many factors, including terrain, cover, background, turbulence and perhaps most important, presence of animals to be counted. In many instances, knowledge of the sixe of an elk population alone is not sufficient for an intelligent management program. An insight into migration routes and the time of these migrations is extremely valuable information to the game manager. There were many local people who "knewil just where the elk that wintered in ,various portions of the Rio Grande area spent their summers, but in order to document summer range areas for portions of this elk herd, a program of trapping and banding was initiated March, 1964 on Goose Creek and continued through March, 1967. Elk were marked on Long Ridge in March, 1964 and February, 1965 by using a helicopter and a Cap-Chur l/gun. Some of these elk were captured by junping on them from a helicopter while they were in deep snow. Another portable trap was set up on Shaw Creek in January, 1965 and elk were trapped through the winter of 1966. Goose Creek elk were identified by white neck bands. Long Ridge elk wore rocket red bands and blue collars were used at the Shaw Creek site. A series of aerial fligh~s were set up to be flown twice a month for a period of two years in order to get band sighting information and concentration areas at different seasons of the year. Banded elk locations were also noted on all other types of flights in the study area. Special booklets of neck band observation forms were distributed to Game, Fish and Parks Department personnel, to Forest Service people, livestock pool riders and dude ranch packers who might be in areas where neck bands could be observed. In addition, a concentrated publicity program was initiated immediately prior to the opening of the regular big game season. Radio and newspapers in the San Luis Valley informed the public of our banding program and asked their assistance in reporting neck band sightings to our check stations or to the Research Center. We also emphasized that hunters who killed tagged and banded elk could keep the markers as souvenirs, as long as we could get the numbers from the tags and have a look at the neck band to see how it was wearing. Movement and concentration data were obtained during regular flights to locate concentrations, pre- and post-season sex and age ratio classification counts and on regular aerial trend count flights. Sightings reported by hunters are also included in the maps and figures contained in this report. Figures I through 10 are included in Appendix A. 11 Palmer Chemical and Equipment Co., Douglasville, Georgia. �- 368 Findings Movements from the Goose Creek Trapping Area.--Neck band sightings from the Goose Creek trap were almost entirely within the Goose Creek drainage area. A few sightings of the white bands were made just over the Continental Divide, south of the head of Goose Creek, within the San Juan River drainage on the head of the West Fork of the San Juan River. Trapping and banding was started March 10, 1964 and continued during the winter months of 1965 and 1967. A total of 102 elk were tagged and banded during the three winters of trapping. Public pressure from the citizens in the town of Creede stopped the trapping program in 1966, because of elk losses from cold and starvation. Many calves died that winter and some of them, unfortunately, were banded. The public immediately determined that our trap was killing the elk. Political pressure was brought to bear and we had to close down the trap. If we had not been forced to quit, we certainly could have increased the numbers of banded elk in the Goose Creek area. During normal winters, however, we had no complaints from the public concerning our trapping program. Starting with the 1964 big game season and continuing through the 1967 hunting season, a total of five banded and tagged elk from Goose Creek were reported killed by hunters (Table 1). The tagged kill locations ranged from seven miles south-southwest of the trap to 18 miles north of the trapping site, with an average movement of about l2~ miles. Elk that winter on Goose Creek spend their time on both sides of the drainage from its confluence with the Rio Grande River (8,450 feet in altitude) south to around Haypress Lake, at an altitude of about 9,400 feet. Some of these same elk travel south, up the Goose Creek drainage to the Continental Divide. This is a distance of approximately 21 miles, at an altitude of around 13,100 feet. Many elk are found at or above timberline during July, August, and September. An important factor that has to be considered in conjuction with this movement is the large number of elk that never make this migration from winter to summer range. They have become a resident herd on the lower winter ranges on Soda, Caldwell and Pierce Creeks, between 8,450 feet and 9,000 feet. There are also elk scattered east and west of the creek for the entire length of the drainage during the summer months. These same elk concentrate in an area about six miles long and two miles wide in the winter. In spite of this resident herd, however, the majority of the elk that are banded near the mouth of Goose Creek leave the winter range in late April or early May. They follow the snow line toward the timberline area some 20-25 miles to the south. The bulk of the calves are probably born between Leopard and Roaring Fork Creek, along the benches of Beautiful Mountain, Fisher Mountain and Table Mountain. �- 369 Table l.--Tag return information from 20 marked elk, 1964-67, Rio Grande elk stud~ area 2 Colorado. Months Age Direction Distance Between Tag Date Date When Traveled Traveled and Kill Killed Tagged Sex Tagged Tag Returns Goose Creek south-southwest 15 mi. 43 10-23-67 Mature 3-13- 64 F mi. south-southwest 10 7 3~28-64 10-64 Calf M south-southwest 10 7 mi. 10-16-65 F Mature 1-7-65 informa t ion other no Yearling 1-9-65 F north 18 mi. 9 10-67 1-27-67 F Calf Long Ridge Tag Returns 1-26-65 Old F 1-26-65 Yearling M 2-23-65 Calf 2-9-66 Calf M 2-10-66 Calf M 3-2-66 Calf 3-2-66 Calf 3-65 est. 10-66 10-65 10-67 10-66 10-16-66 10-15-66 3 21 8 Shaw Creek Tag Returns Mature 12-64 F 12-64 Calf M Mature 1-25-65 F 1-25-65 Calf M 12-64 F 12-64 M 12-64 M 12-64 M 10-67 11-2-66 10-67 11- 5-65 10-18-65 10-18-65 10-22-65 11- 3- 65 34 23 20 8 7 7 10 10 10 10 11 2 mi. 42 mi. 12 mi. 23 mi. 4 mi. 14 mi. 9 mi. east southwest north north west-southwest west west-northwest 44 mL 12 mi. 39 mi. 9 mi. 7 mi. 14 mi. 7 mi. 6 mi. northwest south southwest southwest southeast southwest southwest south When the cows and their new born calves can travel, they band up and move to the alpine areas for the remainder of the sununer. Here they congregate in bands of from 10 to 50 head. A few young bulls are found with the cows and calves, but the larger bulls are off by themselves for the greater portion of the sununer. These bulls can usually be found singly or in small groups of five to ten head. They frequent windy points during the heat of the day and grazing in small parks right at timbers edge, usually near springs or other forms of water. Some of the cow/calf herds cross the Continental Divide and spend a few days on the San Juan River drainage, usually not more than a couple of miles south of the Goose Creek drainage. The Goose Creek elk herd (some 400 animals, based upon aerial trend counts) spends virtually the entire year within the drainage proper. Analysis of 146 white neck band sightings indicates that 86.9 percent (127 bands) of the sightings have been made within the Goose Creek drainage area proper; 6.2 percent (nine bands) have been observed on the Elk Creek drainage just east of the trap site; 2.8 percent (four bands) have been sighted on Ivy Creek or Red Mountain Creek inunedialely west of the trapping area and only six bands (4.1 percent) have been signed north or northeast of the trap, across the Rio Grande River (Fig. 4). �- 370 - All of the tagged elk killed by hunters have been shot within the creek drainage itself with the exception of one cow. She traveled 39 miles north into the Saguache Creek drainage, and was killed. This animal was tagged as a calf and shot the next fall as a yearling. Past banding analysis has indicated that yearling animals produce the abnormal movements. This particular elk probably traveled north from the trap to the Bellows-Farmers Creek area. She continued on north through Wasson Park, over Half Moon Pass into the Saguache Creek drainage, and on to Flat Top Mountain in Saguache Park. This was a 39 mile trip in 10 months. In summary, it can confidently be stated that the Goose Creek elk herd migrates virtually entirely within the drainage, traveling 20-25 miles north to south from winter to summer ranges. Movements from the Long Ridge Trapping Area.--Marking of elk in the Long Ridge "trapping area" started on March 17, 1964 and continued sporadically through the winters of 1965 and 1966. Banding of elk in this area was not carried out by using conventional methods. The elk that winter in this area of the upper Rio Grande do not congregate in the large familiar wintering herds, but move around in smaller bunches. They tended to spend the first few weeks of the winter on Long Ridge proper. As winter progresses, they move east along the south slopes of Bristol and Bulldog Mountains, to end up finally on lower Miners, Farmers and Bellows Creeks. We decided to mark elk using the most modern and efficient equipment available; namely, Cap-Chur l/equipment and a helicopter. This decision was made because good trap sites were scarce and elk did not remain in one location long enough to be effectively captured. Elk were immobilized with succinylcholine chloride injected with Cap-Chur equipment shot from the helicopter. As the animal went down, the copter was landed and the elk was sexed, tagged and banded. During the latter stages of the marking, the Cap-Chur equipment was abandoned and the elk captured by junping on them from the helicopter while they were in deep snow (Denney 1966). A total of 31 elk were marked the three years. in this manner in about six days work during Starting with the 1964 big game season, and continuing through the 1967 hunting season, seven tagged and banded elk from this area have been reported killed by hunters (Table 1). The tagged kill locations ranged from two miles east of the tagging site to 42 miles southwest of the banding site, with an average distance traveled between tagging and recovery of about 15 miles. Elk herds that winter on the south slopes and benches north of the Rio Grande River, from Long Ridge to Bellows Creek (some 500 head according to aerial trend counts), tend to leave the wintering area in the spring and head directly west toward the headwaters of the Rio Grande. This is a distance of about 24 miles from Long Ridge proper, and an additional 17 miles from the Bellows Creek area. These elk start moving west and southwest about mid-April or early May, following the various creek drainages or established trails along the south facing benches north of the river. By mid-June the bulk of the elk have moved about 11 miles west of Long Ridge (altitude 10,000 feet), to the Stage Station Flats 17 Palmer Chemical and Equipment Co., Douglasville, Georgia. �- 371 area, near the head of Long Canyon and Crooked Creek, at an altitude of about 10,200 feet. It is in this area or altitudinal belt that the cows slow down the migration and seek suitable calving sites. By late July the cow/calf herds are above timberline at altitudes ranging from 12,500 feet to 13,200 feet on the Lost Trail Creeks and the area west of Pole Mountain. Other bands of cows and calves move into the Upper Rio Grande Primitive Area, at about the same altitudes, on the Ute Creek and Squaw Creek Areas. It is in these locations they spend the summer and early fallon the alpine areas and near timberline. The older bulls are found near the cow/calf herds, but stay on or near the rocky ridges or points. Here they can bed down during the heat of the day on wind swept areas so that torment by flies is at a minimum. Smaller bunches of elk leave Long Ridge at the end of winter, cross the river to the southwest in the vicinity of Fern Creek, and probably follow somewhat the route of the Fern Creek stock driveway south and west into Squaw Creek basin and the head of Trout Creek. Here they summer at altitudes approaching 11,500 to 13,100 feet, traveling a distance of eight or nine miles to this area. The same problem occurs in thi.s area that was found in the Goose Creek portion of Game Management Unit 76. Some elk have become resident,year-long, on what, at one time was strictly winter range. Elk are scattered in mid-summer on the east facing benches of Long Ridge overlooking Santa Maria Reservoir. They are found all along the ridges and drainages north along Spring Creek to the Cebolla Creek divide, west along the river on Black Mountain, around Lost Lakes, on Pole Mountain, the lower Pole Creeks and the lower reaches of Ute Creek and south of Rio Grande Reservoir. Elk can be found throughout the summer and fall along Texas, Fern, Woodfern and Trout Creeks, around Love and Ruby Lakes, and even on the lower portions of Middle Creek, Red Mountain and Lime Creeks. As a general rule, elk from the Long Ridge trapping area move basically west an average of about 32 miles to summer with other portions of the herd heading southwest some eight or nine miles to summer range. Movements from the Shaw Creek Trapping Area.--Trapping of elk in the Shaw Creek area was done only during the winter of 1964-65. A total of 55 elk were neck banded with blue collars. Only 15 of these animals were ear-tagged. Beginning with the 1965 big game season, and continuing through the 1967 hunt. eight banded elk were reported as killed by hunters (Table 1). The band recovery locations ranged from six miles south of the trap to 39 miles southwest. One elk was reported killed 44 miles north of the trapping location. An average recovery distance of l7?t;miles and an average time between tagging and recovery of a little more than 15 months was recorded. Of the 52 neck band sightings reported since the trapping program began, 28 bands (53.8 percent) have been sighted within the Shaw Creek drainage proper (Fig. 6). Four bands (7.7 percent) have been sighted completely outside the Rio Grande River drainage system. One of these was seen in Saguache Park, some 44 miles north-northwest of the trap. One was spotted on the Carson �- 372 - National Forest in north-central New Mexico, some 30 miles straight south of the banding location. Two were reported in the San Juan River drainage, one on lower Mill Creek, about 14 miles southwest of the trap, and one near the Palisade Lakes, on the Pine River drainage, about 39 miles southwest of the banding location. All of the other 24 band sightings (38.5 perc~nt) were reported between Pinos Creek and the South Fork of the Rio Grande River, the bulk of them around the head of Beaver and Little Beaver Creeks in the vicinity of Poague Lake. Elk that winter on Lower Shaw Creek tend to move southwest of the trap to summer near Poague Lake (altitude 11,100 feet) and on the Park Creek drainage around 10,000 to 12,000 feet. A few move west to summer in the Church CreekCross Creek area around 10,200 to 11,000 feet, while others travel to the slopes of Fox Mountain, about 17 miles to the southwest, to summer at altitudes approaching 11,300 feet. In spite of the migration pattern, however, the same condition exists here that was found in the western most portion of the Rio Grande elk winter range, namely, that we have a resident elk herd on the winter range year-long. Elk can be found all summer and fallon Shaw Creek, only three miles south of the trap, all through the Pinos Creek, Schrader, Willow, Cross and Race Creek drainages; allover the Park Creek-Handkerchief Mesa area and south to Fox Mountain, Pass Creek and the head of Wightman Fork of the Alamosa River. Winter Concentration Areas.--The "average" winter range of the Rio Grande elk herd (the area normally used by the elk seven years out of ten) on the north side of the Rio Grande River extends from near Bristol View Guard Station south and east to Bellows and West Bellows Creek (Fig. 2). On winter ranges south of the river there is a definite lack of any big game use west of Red Mountain Creek. This is probably due to steep north and northeast facing timbered slopes. A narrow belt of winter range is found south of the river east of Seven Mile Bridge to Goose Creek. Goose Creek has a fairly wide belt of winter range on both sides of the creek from its confluence with the Rio Grande River, south to Haypress Lake. The Elk Creek drainage, just east of Goose Creek, is also a moderately-sized area of consistently used winter range. The upper limits of the winter range varies considerably in elevation. Elk seem to consistently winter as high as possible, frequently in snow shoulder deep or more. Exposure, more than elevation, seems to dictate where animals are to be found in winter. For example, on some south slopes, particularly southeast of Bristol Head and on upper Farmers Creek, elk have used open coniferous types at elevations as high as 11,000 feet. However, the average winter range limit is found between 9,500 and 10,000 feet. Winter aerial trend counts of elk wintering in the area west of the South Fork of the Rio Grande, and west of East Bellows Creek have averaged 1,185 elk for the 1963-67 period. Counts range from 808 to 1,547 animals. Aerial counts of elk wintering in the area east of the South Fork of the Rio Grande, and south of the main Rio Grande River to Pinos Creek, have averaged 196 head, ranging from 128 to 275. �- 373 - Winter range south of the main river and east of the South Fork of the Rio Grande to Pinos Creek consists of a small area on Church Creek, lower Willow Creek, Wolf, Shaw, Schrader and lower Pinos Creeks. Elk in this area winter from about 8,700 feet to 10,000 feet in altitude (Fig. 2). Summer-Fall Concentration Areas.--Elk are found throughout the area west of the South Fork of the Rio Grande River and Alder Creek during the summer months. There are virtually no areas included in this portion of the Rio Grande drainage that do not have elk during the June through October period. However, greater densities of elk can be found in the following areas: the Goose Creek drainage south of Turret Peak, Middle Creek and the middle portion of Trout Creek and the head of Workman Creek; the entire Squaw Creek drainage and the Love Lake-Ruby Lake area. Two major summer concentration areas are the entire Ute Creek drainage area and the Pole Creek-Lost Trail Creek-Pole Mountain area. Other areas of concentration are located on Kitty, Ruby and Big Buck Creeks, on upper Rito Hondo Creek; around Hermit Lakes and Stage Station Flats, on Snow Mesa and Bristol Head, and isolated locations on the head of Miners, Rat and Willow Creeks. Two lower areas that have goodly numbers of elk during the summer are the Deep Creek-Caldwell-Pierce Creek area and the Sod Creek-Elk Mountain area. The south and east facing benches above the South Fork on Archuleta, Black, Hope, Kitty and Lake Creeks also have a considerable number of elk well scattered throughout the entire area (Fig. 2). Prepared by: Raymond J. Boyd Wlldllfe Researcher �LEGEND - PAVED ---- DIRT ~ ~AKE .>--.. RIVER CREEK ~ HIGHWAY OR GRAVEL OR -t- WOUNTAIN ,•.• ,""/ WILDERNESS ROAO RESERVOIR PEAl< AREA BOUt'DARY Lv -J +" Fig. 1. Migration routes from winter to summer range for elk in the upper Rio Grande River drainage, Colorado. Trapping areas, reading west to east are: Long Ridge ares, Goose Creek and Shaw Creek. �LEGEND ---- ~ ~ --- II PAVED HIGHWAY --- ~,~ .•..• t, «> LAKE .,..... I OR RIVER ~-+ "00''''" ~.. 11" • ,,.,~/ WILDERNESS AAEA BOUNDARY I ~" RESERVOIR .I I' 1. \ ., ( ,I ! t, 1I I CA.' 11 --l I . me -c xrr It . ~ Fig. 2. \ ~l ' .j... Winter concentration areas, Rio Grande River drainage, Months of December, January, February and March. ..1 ' ! [ Ia; _, ::c:::; .!QE( •• !!¥tot .• ."",. _'I' ' -i:--t;'" ~ i q;~;;.; t= .-: .-"..,-; " -z#;:t,,=, ,;::n',aZt:t4t£w s ~ �LEGEND - PAVED ---- , r>--=' I DIRT _ LAKE ...--.. RIVER .>---.. HIGHWAY OR GRAVEL OR ROAD RESERVOIR CREEK -1- WOUNTAIN ,.,,,,,/' WILDERNESS PEAK AREA BOUNDARY t I r II t ' 1, ! f I I ! t I l Fig. 3. Summer-Fall concentration areas, Rio Grande Months of June, July, August, September and Colorado. LA> -.;r 0'-. �~ --- PAVED ---- DIRT .• LAKE HIGHWAY OR GRAVEL OR ROAD RESERVOIR •••••••••••. RIVER ..>----... " r>-<>-= -t- CREEK UOUNTAIH PEAK I~'~./ WILDERNESS AREA BOUNDARY W --J ~1 Fig. 4. Composite of 127 white neck band sightings site, 1964-67. from the 108 bands sighted in the cross-hatched area. 19 bands sighted outside the Goose Creek drainage. trap �~ - PAVED ---- DIRT .• ""- , r>-"""'" / I 1__ ' .>--... -{,•.• ,,,•./ LAKE HIGHWAY OR GRAVEL OR ROAD RESERVOIR RIVER CREEK MOUNTAIN PEAK WILOERNESS AREA BOUNDARY , ••••.••--.(/ \ I I I I I I / / w ~ Fig. 5. ':;' Composite of 49 orange neck band sightings trapping area, 1964-67. from the �LEGEND - PAVED ---- DIRT .• LAKE >--.. CREEK ~ '~ r>--=' I HIGHWAY OR GRAVEL OR ROAD RESERVOfR RIVER -{- MOUNTAIN ,,.,~,./ WILDERNESS PEAK AREA. BOUNDARY W -J \0 e t ~ Fig. 6. 11 I! Composite 1965-67. of 54 blue neck band sightings a from the trap, 28 bands sighted within the cross-hatched area. 24 bands sighted outside the Shaw Creek drainage. ;; __ ~ "__ ¥.~ sesu _+Y! _, __ 4 p .,J, 42 __ 0:0,. &~'"'l'~~'''' _'#?'O .j?- =s; ~_54i! ';C.S'5:*,@~;;a::::p'';:=1S=tJ':'E,:: ,\-,W-bft'!'" ~- :e £t «:..z ,,-..~~l7&_~¥( ts -.,. �o • ~ - PAVED ---- , r>~ HIGHWAY DIRT OR GRAVEL ~ LAKE .....--.. RIVER .>----. -1- OR ROAD RESERVOIR CREEK MOUNTAIN PEAK I '_n/ WILDERNESS AREA BOUNDARY ~ I I o Fig. 7. Kill locations of four banded elk from Goose Creek Shaw Creek • • o Goose Creek elk kill locations. Shaw Creek elk kill locations. from LV CD o �~~.~~..,.,,~- -:-~:-::-:-:~~ • LEGEND - --- PAvED OIRT OR GRAVEL .., LAKE .,....., RIVER ..>------.- - , HIGHWAY - OR ROAD RESERVOIR CREEK ....••. r>~ I (" '-- ..•..•._-_ ..•., \.. .,- MOUNTAIN '''''u'/ WILDERNESS PEAK ARE" BOUNDARY t r I I I I I J f I, I, w co / f--' \! I I • Fig. 8. Kill locations of seven banded elk from the Long area. ! ~ ��July, 1968 - 383 - JOB PROGRESS REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT State of COLORADO ------~~~~~----- Project No Work Plan No. SEGMENT W-38-R-22 Deer-Elk Investigations llc Job No. 1 Title of Job: White River Elk Population Period Covered: April Personnel: Components 1, 1967 through March 31, 1968 William Adrian, Allen Anderson, William Babcock, Bertram B~ker, Richard Bartmann, George Bear, Darrell Bingham, Raymond Boyd, Walter Burkhard, Marion Coghill, Patrick Davies, Larry Finnell, Howard Funk, Bruce Gill, David Gordon, Richard Gregory, Jack Grieb, Donald Hoffman, Richard Hopper, Richard Klein, Ferd Kleinschnitz, Roland Kufeld, Gary Myers, Wesley Nelson, Edgar Prenzlow, Glenn Rogers, William Rutherford, Wayne Sandfort, Robert Schmidt, Harold Shepherd, Warren Snyder, Harold Swope and Donald Weber. Abstract Pre- and post-season classification counts of elk in Area E were made by helicopter. A pre-season ratio of 32 bulls (including spikes) and 59 calves per 100 cows was determined, while the post-season classifications indicated a ratio of 16 bulls (including spikes) and 61 calves per 100 cows. Counts during July from horseback revealed that yearling cows comprised 22 percent of the females. Total elk harvest in Area E was 1,473 elk as determined by report card surveys and was composed of 688 (4710) bulls, 651 (4410) cows and 134 (910) calves. Later, a random survey was mailed to 2,072 license holders. From this information it was projected that 1,383 elk were killed in Area E instead of 1,473 and that the kill consisted of 614 (4410) bulls, 632 (4610) cows and 137 (1010) calves. Wounding loss was estimated at 5.4 percent and 5·2 percent of the legal kill by random survey and check station questionnaire, respectively. Field aging of 669 elk at check stations indicated that almost 92 percent of the kill was in the portion of the elk herd under 4-1/2 years old. Field aging methods were checked in the laboratory by dental cementum technique. Of 256 teeth checked from elk two years old or older, only 78 (3010) were aged correctly by field personnel, while 42 of 47 or 90 percent of the yearlings we re aged correctly. The random survey revealed a success ratio for resident hunters of �- 384 - 32 percent while non-residents enjoyed a success ratio of 42 percent. Overall, 34 percent of 4,041 license holders were successful. Area E hunters expended over 21,000 recreation days during the 1967 season. Mean number of recreation days per hunter was 5.97. A population estimate of 5,232 elk was projected on the study area after the 1967 big game hunting season by using the 1967 corrected kill figures and the 1967 pre- and post-season classification counts. Segments of the population were estimated at 483 (9%) bulls, 2,819 (54%) cows and 1,930 (37%) calves. �Objectives: (1) Review relevant literature the White River elk herd. necessary for proper population analysis of (2) Summarize, evaluate and file all previous information collected on the White River elk herd to better acquaint new project personnel on the history of this job. (3) Test a candidate (4) elk harvest population formula for Area E elk herd. A. Maintain by stabilizing female segment of herd. B. Narrow sex ratio (bull per 100 cows) in an attempt to increase productivity (calves per 100 cows) by specified permits. Determine accurate sex and age structures of the harvest, hunter success ratios and amounts of recreation and associated recreation days expended on the White River elk herd. Procedures: (1) Elk were classified as bulls, cows and calves from a helicopter on the study area in late September and early December. All classifications were recorded on tape by one observer. (2) Project personnel classified cow elk closely with spotting scopes for three days in July to determine yearling-adult ratioso Information on sex and age ratios also are obtained at this time and compared to aerial observations. (3) Special check stations were set up around the study area at Meeker, Deep Creek, New Castle and Ripple Creek. The regular game management check stations at Rifle and Idaho Springs assisted in this portion of the study. Elk killed in the study area were examined at the stations for: sex and age (by tooth wear and eruption), antler point count, lactating or not, day of kill, kill location and whether banded or not. The right, number one incisor tooth of as many elk as feasible also was collected for aging by a dental cementum technique. A comparison was made between this method and the Quimby and Gaab method used at check stations. Data gathered were analyzed by standard statistical tests, age-pyramid techniques and timespecific life tables. (4) This year, a random survey was mailed to 2,072 Area E hunters. This information in combination w i.t h game management's report card system, permitted two independent estimates of the 1967 elk harvest. With the random survey harvest estimate and the 1967 pre- and post-season sex and age ratio counts, an elk popUlation projection was made for the purpose of making harvest recommendations to management for the 1968 elk season in Area E. Recommendations: (1) Continue the aerial pre- and post-season sex a.nd age ratio counts until December 1970. Ground classification sometime in July should also be continued if large enough samples can be obtained to determine calf production and yearling-adult cow ratioso �- 386 (2) Set up and run four research check stations (Meeker, Deep Creek, New Castle and Ripple Creek) for 9 days during the 1968 big game season. These stations, alo~g with the management station at Rifle will collect data on sex and age of the harvest, kill locations, banded-elk sightings, hunter distribution and public reaction to specified permit hunting in Area E. Unsuccessful as well as successful hunters will be surveyed. Specimens including the right, number one incisor tooth from all elk older than calves will be collected to compare dental cementum and Quimby and Gaab aging methods. (3) Conduct a randrnn interview of Area E hunters at check stations to determine hunter attitudes and preferences. (4) Again, take an approximate 50 percent randmn sample of Area E hunters to determine an accurate 1968 harvest to use with the pre- and post-season sex and age ratio counts to estimate the 1968 pre- and post-season populations. (5) A total of 2,500 bull permits and 1,500 cow permits should be issued in 1968 to o~tain the desired harvest in Area E. �- 387 - WHITE RIVER ELK HERD POPULATION COMPONENTS Edgar J. Prenzlow Results and Discussion Data for this report were collected primarily by five different techniques. In addition to the four methods (aerial classifications, ground classifications, check stations and random survey) described in the Procedures, information is included from Game Management's survey (postal cards with questions concerning harvest data which are attached to each big game license and required by law to be returned to the Division of Game, Fish and Parks upon completion of an individuals hunt). Much of the data needed to fulfill the primary objective of this investigation could be gathered by more than one of the techniques and this was done to obtain independent estimates on the same type of data. For instance: harvest data were collected by three different surveys. In this report, results of each survey are presented separately according to how they were collected. In 1967 data from 204 unsuccessful hunters were gathered for the first time at the Meeker and Ripple Creek stations. These data follow immediately similar information collected from successful elk hunters. Composition of the White River Elk Herd - Aerial Surveys Pre-Season Sex and Age-Ratios.--The 1967 pre-season sex and age-ratio counts of the White River elk herd were made on September 19, 20 and 21. These classifications were confined to elk located in Area E (Table 1). A total of 796 elk were classified resulting in a ratio of 32 bulls (including spikes) and 59 calves per 100 cows. �- 388 - Table 1.--Pre-season sex and age ratio counts in Area E2 1967. Mature Young Location Bulls Bulls SEikes Cows Calves Sleepy Cat Area 1 7 9 5 Big Beaver 1 3 4 Missouri Creek 6 9 Sand Peak Area 1 1 13 23 16 Ripple Creek 1 6 16 8 Picket Pin Creek 2 2 Skinny Fish 1 16 11 Lost Park 1 3 Ute Creek 1 2 1 27 15 Marvine Creek 3 5 11 58 29 East Marvine Creek 1 6 8 35 16 Big Ridge 1 1 3 2 Big Fish Creek 2 9 4 Trappers Creek 1 1 1 South Fork 3 3 6 71 48 Park Creek 2 2 8 23 l3 Bloomfield Bench 1 1 4 7 5 Lost Solar Creek 4 5 49 29 South Side South Fork 1 2 4 2 Patterson Creek 2 2 8 31 20 Burro Mountain 1 Bailey Lake 4 1 Peltier Creek 1 3 14 7 Total 22 8 15 54 31 4 28 4 46 106 66 7 15 3 131 48 18 87 9 63 1 5 25 Total Percent 796 100 17 2.1 29 3.7 88 11.1 415 52.1 247 3100 Post-Season Sex and Age Ratioso--Post-season sex and age-ratio counts on the White River elk herd were made on December 18, 19, 20 and 210 All flying was confined to Area Eo A total of 2,338 elk were classified resulting in a ratio of 16 bulls (including spikes) and 61 calves per 100 cows (Table 2). Table 2.--Post-season sex and age ratio counts in Area E, 1967. Mature Young Location Bul1s Bulls Spikes Cows Calves Total Oak Ridge 4 5 18 169 77 273 9-mi1e to Yellowjacket 5 9 78 51 143 Uranium Peak 2 19 53 31 105 Yel10wjacket to Coal and Litt Le Beaver 1 1 17 148 98 265 Big Beaver 2 1 15 151 127 296 Big Beaver to Fawn Creek 1 2 95 59 157 Fawn Creek 1 1 46 26 74 Fawn Creek to Lost Creek 2 46 24 72 Lost Creek 1 1 4 25 15 46 Lost Creek to Deadhorse.Cr. 1 36 21 58 Marvine Creek 1 45 37 83 Ute Creek 1 1 1 1 4 Ute Creek to Buford Peak 3 15 100 47 165 South Fork 7 10 63 325 192 597 Total 18 30 166 1,318 806 2,338 1.3 Percentage 0.7 7.1 56.4 3!+05 100 �Prior classification counts are listed in Tables 3 and 4 for comparative purposes. These counts include only elk from Area E, whereas previous reports for this job listed classification counts for the entire White. River elk herd. Table 3.--Pre-season sex and age classification counts expressed in ratios Eer 100 cows and Eercentages for Area E2 1960 through 1967. Ratios and Percentages Calves Cows Bulls Total Calves Cows Bulls SEikes Year 62 (26.7) 498 133 69 (29.9) 100 (43.3) 216 91 58 1960 75 (34 6) 42 (19.5) 100 (45.9) 871 301 400 94 76 1961 64 (30.6) 47 (22.1) 100 (47.3) 976 298 462 116 100 1962 68 (32.5) 42 (20.0) 100 (47.5) 625 203 297 66 59 1963 56 (29.6) 100 (52.9) 33 (17.5) 686 203 363 91 29 1964 100 (5108) 59 (30.9) 33 (17.3) 1,348 416 699 161 72 1965 57 (31.0) 100 (53 6) 28 (15.4) 172 557 299 54 32 1966 59 (31. 0) 100 (52.2) 32 (16.8) 247 796 415 88 46 1967 0 0 Table 4.--Post-season sex and age classification counts expressed in ratios Eer 100 cows and Eercentages for Area E2 1960 through 1967. Ratios and Percentages Calves Cows Bulls Total Calves Cows Bulls Srikes Year IS ( 8.6) 712 88 (42.8) 100 (48.6) 305 346 46 15 1960 23 (10.6) 100 (46.5) 92 (42.9) 1,001 430 465 74 32 1961 28 (13.8) 75 (37.0) 906 335 100 (49.2) 446 82 43 1962 12 ( 6.7) 100 (55.6) 687 68 (37.7) 260 382 27 18 1963 10 ( 6.0) 100 (58.3) 61 (35.7) 1,939 692 1,130 99 18 1964 9 ( 5.2) 100 (57.1) 66 (37.7) 1,628 613 930 59 26 1965 10 ( 6.1) 100 (58 9) 59 (35.0) 2,112 739 1,245 114 14 1966 16 ( 9.2) 100 (56.4) 61 (34.4) 806 2,338 166 1,318 48 1967 0 Composition of the White River Elk Herd - Ground Surveys.--For the first time during this phase of the White River investigation an attempt was made to classify elk during July from the ground rather than from aircraft. The purpose was to obtain estimates of yearling-adult cow ratios and also to check herd composition information obtained during aerial surveys. Four men classified 272 elk in three days riding horseback during the early morning and evening hours to different sections of the Flat Tops Wilderness Area. Of 144 cows observed, 31 or 21.5 percent were classified as yearlings. Mean size of the 44 groups observed was 6.2 elk. Sex and age ratios were determined to be 34 bulls and 55 calves per 100 cows which compared favorably with the 32:100:59 ratio observed during the aerial pre-season classification count in September Additional herd composition figures are presented in Table 5. �- 390 - Table 5.--Herd composition figures of 272 elk classified in 44 groups during July, 1967, Area E. Class Statistic Mature Mature Yearling Yearling Bulls Bulls Cows Cows Calves Total Number Observed 29 20 113 31 79 272 Percent of Total ,lk 10.7 7.4 41.5 11.4 29.0 100 Freq. in Groups! 11 11 30 11 22 Percent of Groups 25.0 25.0 68.2 25.0 50.0 1.8 Mean Group Size ~f .7 .4 2.6 .7 6.2 !f Frequency of occurrence (e.g. mature bulls were observed in 11 of 44 total groups). ~f Mean group was composed of 6.2 elk of which .7 were mature bulls~ etco Harvest Surveys - Game Management Harvest Composition.--The 1967 elk harvest in Area E was estimated to be 1,473 elk according to the State Game Manager. The kill was composed of 688 '(47%) bulls, 651 (44%) cows and 134 (9%) calves. Data in Tables 6-13 are based upon report card returns and statistical projections as contained in "Resume of Big Game Seasons in Colorado - 1967"a Table 6.--Composition of the 1967 estimated elk kill in Area E by Game Management Unit ~Report Card Survey2. Unit Bulls Cows % Calves % % Total 23 356 344 45.9 76 44.3 9.8 776 ·24 332 307 47.6 44.0 58 8.3 697 Total 688 651 46.7 44.2 134 9.1 1,473 Harvest by Unit and Success Ratios of Residents ahd Non-Residentso--Table 7 lists the number of elk killed in each unit and the success ratio of Area E hunters with ant1erless elk permits. Table 8 shows similar figures for antleredonly permits, while Table 9 lists the combined totals for both antler1ess and antlered permits o Table 7.--Estimated elk kill by Game Management Unit in 1967 on antler1ess elk permits, Area E (Report Card Survey). Number Success of Ratio of Animals Killed on Permit Unit Permits Area Permits Cows Calves Total 344 76 420 23 E 52.3 % 1,500 . 24 307 58 365 Total E 1,500 651 52.3 % 134 785 �- 391 Table 8.--Estimated elk kill by Game Management only elk permits, Area E (Report Card Survey). Number Success of Ratio of Unit Area Permits Permits 23 E 2,500 27.5 % 24 E Total 2,500 27.5 % Unit in 1967 on ant1ered- Animals Bulls 356 332 688 Killed on Permit Total 356 332 688 Table 9.--Total hunters, estimated elk kill and success of all hunters by Game Management Unit in 1967 ,Area E (Report Card Survey). Number Animals Killed Success of Bulls Cows Calves Total Ratio Unit Hunters 76 776 356 344 23 28.3% 2,745 332 307 58 697 24 1,255 55.5% 134 1,473 688 651 Total 4,000 36.8% The number of hunters and success ratio of resident and non-resident hunters are shown in Table 10. Comparisons between these and figures compiled by this investigation will be presented later in this report. Table 10.--Number of resident and non-resident hunters, estimated elk kill and success ratios in 1967, Area E (Report Card Survey). Number Animals Killed Success of Total Ratio Cows & Calves Bulls Hunters Class 620 1,098 478 Resident 32.3% 3,400 210 375 165 622 60.3% Non-resident 688 785 1,473 36.6% Total 4,022 Hunting Pressure by Unit.--Tab1e 11 lists elk hunting pressure in Units 23 and 24 (Area E) for the years 1958 through 1967. In 1967, non-resident hunters came from 33 states and resident hunters came from 43 of the 63 counties in Colorado. A breakdown of hunting pressure by unit and by state or county of residence is shown in Tables 12 and 13. �- 392 - Table lle--Total elk hunting pressure by unit and number of cow licenses Re ort Card Surve issued for Area E 1958 to 1967 Number of Cow Licenses Total Pressure Unit 24 Unit 23 Year 300 E.S. 1958 '1:.7 2,148 1,048 1,100 300 E.S. 2,138 986 1,152 1959 400 E.S. 2,435 1,016 1,419 1960 500,E.S. 3,459 1~663 1,796 1961 500 E.S. 3,710 2,002 1,708 1962 500 E.S. 4,063 2,292 1,771 1963 750 E.So 5,454 3,093 2,361 1964 650 A .L. 4,431 2,427 2,004 1965 3/ 1,000 A.L 3,452 1,878 1,574 1966 1,500 A.L. 4,000 1967 !i/ 1,255 2,745 35,290 17,660 17,630 Total 1/ From 1958-1964, someone with a cow license could kill an elk of either sex (E.S.). Since 1965, antlerless only (A.L.) licenses have been issued which entitled the holder to harvest only an elk without antlers or an elk with antlers 10 inches or less. ~/ Unlimited number of bull elk hunters in these years (1958-1965 inc.) 1/ Only 2,452 bull elk hunters allowed in the area in 1966. ~/ Only 2,500 bull elk hunters allowed in the area in 1967. �- 393 - Table l2.--Elk hunting pressure by unit and state of residence Area E (Report Card Survey). State Alabama Arizona Arkansas California Connecticut Georgia Illinois Indiana Iowa Kansas Kentucky Louisiana Maryland Michigan Minnesota Mississippi Missouri Nebraska Nevada New Jersey New York North Dakota Ohio Oklahoma Pennsylvania South Carolina South Dakota Tennessee Texas Utah Vermont Virginia Wisconsin Total for 1967, Unit 23 Unit 24 Total % 2 2 0 0 16 68 0 0 3 8 12 2 12 3 8 2 2 27 172 1 4 14 10 12 31 7 13 4 31 5 13 8 14 8 3 3 0 3 9 47 21 12 6 1 11 6 23 31 12 1 12 16 48 4 1 6 24 622 .3 .3 4.3 27.7 .2 .6 2.3 1.6 1.9 5.0 1.1 2.1 .6 5.0 2.1 1.4 7.6 3.4 1.9 1.0 .2 .8 3.7 5.0 1.9 .2 1.9 2.6 7.7 .6 .2 1.0 3.8 100.0 11 104 1 4 11 7 4 19 5 1 1 23 8 1 33 13 9 3 1 2 12 25 10 1 4 8 32 4 1 1 12 375 3 2 0 8 8 16 0 0 5 12 247 5 �Table 13.--E1k hunting pressure by unit and county of residence for 1967, Area E (Report Card Survey). County Unit 23 Unit 24 Total Adams Arapahoe Archuleta Bent Boulder Clear Creek Crowley Custer Delta Denver Douglas Eagle Elbert E1 Paso Fremont Garfield Gilpin Huerfano Jefferson Kit Carson Lake Larimer Las Animas Lincoln Logan Mesa Mineral Moffat Montezuma Montrose Morgan Otero Phillips Pitkin Prowers Pueblo Rio Blanco Routt Sedgwick Teller Washington Weld Yuma Total 247 208 12 11 219 0 5 0 3 519 8 3 6 78 3 92 3 9 228 17 32 63 3 23 38 104 3 20 3 3 32 3 9 6 9 29 215 18 6 6 9 72 15 2,389 42 69 0 0 90 3 0 3 6 192 3 0 11 43 0 32 0 0 144 8 12 56 0 3 9 92 0 3 0 3 26 0 3 0 3 6 111 6 0 0 0 29 0 1,008 289 277 12 11 309 3 5 3 9 711 11 3 17 121 3 124 3 9 372 25 44 119 3 26 47 196 3 23 3 6 58 3 12 6 12 35 326 24 6 6 9 101 15 3,397 % 8.5 8.2 .4 .3 9.1 .1 .1 .1 .2 20.9 .3 .1 .5 3.6 01 3.7 .1 .2 11.0 .7 1.3 3.5 .1 07 1.4 5.8 .1 .7 .1 .2 1.7 .1 .4 .2 .4 1.0 9.6 .7 .2 .2 .2 2.8 .4 100.0 �- 395 Harvest Surveys - Research Check Stations Composition of Harvest and Check out by Year and Day.--Four research stations (Meeker, New Castle, Deep Creek, Ripple Creek) were operated for the first nine days during the 1967 big game season. Research personnel at regular management check stations at Rifle and Idaho Springs also checked elk that were harvested from the White River Units (Fig. 1). A total of 1,381 elk and 203 unsuccessful hunters were checked from Game Management Units 12,13, 23, 24, 25, 26, 33 and 34. Information in this section applies principally to the study area, Units 23 and 24 or Area E, unless otherwise stated. Comparable data from the remainder of the units were collected because it was easily obtainable and an important source of information relative to Area E elk. Table 14 lists the average number of elk checked at each station from 1964 through 1967. Appendices A and B are examples of questionnaires used to obtain data presented in this section. Table 14. --Number of elk checked through stations from White River Elk Herd, ~Game Management Units 122 l32 232 242 252 262 33 and 34~ 1964-1967. Average Station 1964 1965 1966 1967 542 506 591 518 Meeker 553 272 303 227 220 Deep Creek 338 228 . 321 166 227 196 New Castle 92 123 124 l38 Rifle 137 110 112 159 Idaho Springs 32 l37 125 129 120 Ripple Creek 4 4 Hamilton Total 1,384 1,381 1,338 1,381 1,204 Percent composition (bulls, cows and calves) of animals checked is presented in Table 15 while Table 16 gives check out by date of 860 elk from Area E. Almost 80 percent of the elk were checked out on the third through the seventh day of the season. Table l5.--Composition stations 1967. Bulls Unit 23 91 Unit 24 296 387 Total of elk checked % 47.2 44.4 45.0 by Game Management Cows 76 282 358 % 39.4 42.3 41.6 Unit through Calves 26 89 115 % 13 4 l3.3 13.4 0 six Total 193 667 860 �N COLORADO c STUOY AREA LEGEND GAME MANAGEMENT GOtr.'JDARY NIGH'WA'( UNIT r.~:::3Ii::::!lUI ::;:=--=-=-:-? S£CONDMY flOAD ---- Fig 1Q -- Study area (Game Management Units 23 ~U1d 24) showing boundar-i.es, drainage patterns and highway systemso Solid dark triangles are active check station locationso 0 �- 397 - Table l6.--Elk check out b:x:date from Area E2 1967. Date 21 24 25 22 23 Unit & Sex Unit 23 16 20 19 0 5 Males 16 6 11 7 0 Females 35 11 27 27 0 Sub-total Unit 24 Males Females Sub-total 4 4 8 23 29 52 52 48 100 57 49 106 Area E Males Females Sub-total Percent of total 4 4 8 0.9 28 35 63 7.3 68 59 127 14.8 74 77 66 56 133 140 15.5 16.3 55 50 105 26 27 28 29 20 16 36 8 12 20 8 9 17 9 10 19 61 71 132 57 37 94 20 23 43 14 14 28 81 87 168 19.5 65 49 114 13.3 28 32 60 6.9 23 24 47 55 0 Aging Statistics.--Of 860 elk checked, 669 were aged from Area E. Age determinations according to Quimby and Gaab (1957) were made on 388 animals; by antler point count and formation 166 aged; and 115 calves were aged according to size and presence of milk teeth. Elk four and one-half years old and younger comprised almost 92 percent (613/ 669) of the elk aged (Table 17). Table 18 lists sex and age of animals by unit checked through stations. �Table l7.--Sex and age of 669 elk killed from Area E 1967. Age (Years) Sex l~ 2~ 3~ ~ 4~ Males Number 60 277 47 13 8 % of Males 14.7 67.7 ri .s 3.2 2.0 % of Total 9.0 41.4 7.0 1.9 1.2 j Females Number % of Females % of Total 55 21.2 8.2 42 16.2 6.3 45 17.3 6.8 43 16.5 6.5 23 8.8 3.5 6~ 5~ 3 7~ 0 .7 .4 13 5.0 1.9 1 8:l:l 9+ Total 0 0 eO .2 .1 .0 .0 .0 .0 409 100.0 61.0 18 6.9 2.7 12 4.6 1.8 6 2.3 .9 3 1.2 .4 260 100.0 39.0 .0 w \0 Total Elk ll5 319 92 56 31 16 18 13 Accum. % 17.2 47.7 13.8 8.4 4.6 2.4 2.7 1.9 6 3 .9 669 .4 100.0 co �Table l8.--Sex and age of elk by unit of kil11 Area El 1967. 8ge {Years} Unit and Sex 2~ 3~ 4~ l~ ~ 23 - Hales 2 12 4 64 14 Number 2.1 12.4 4.1 66.0 % of Total 14.4 1.0 15.7 2.9 .5 % of all Hales 3.4 5~ 6~ 7~ 8~ 9+ Total 1 1.0 .2 0 0 0 0 .0 .0 97 100.0 23.7 0 .0 .0 312 100.0 76.3 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0 24 - Hales Number % of Total % of all Hales 46 14.8 11.2 213 68.3 52.1 35 11.2 8.6 9 2.9 2.2 6 1.9 1.5 2 .6 .5 .0 .0 .3 .2 23 - Females Number % of Total % of all Females 12 19.4 4.6 12 19.4 4.6 9 14.4 3.5 13 21.0 5.0 5 8.1 1.9 3 4.8 1.2 5 8.1 1.9 3 4.8 1.2 0 .0 .0 .0 .0 62 100.0 23.9 24 - Females Number % of total % of all Females 43 21.7 16.5 30 15.2 11.5 36 18.2 13.9 30 15.2 11.5 18 9.1 6.9 10 5.0 3.8 13 6.6 5.0 9 4.5 3.5 6 3.0 2.3 3 1.5 1.2 198 100.0 76.1 1 0 0 .0 .0 0 w <o xo �- two Of 915 elk checked from all White River Units, 303 teeth were collected and aged in the laboratory by a dental cementum technique similar to one described by Erickson (1967). Ages obtained from these teeth were compared with ages determined by check station personnel using Quimby and Gaab's (1957) method of tooth replacement and wear. Assuming ages as determined by the cementum technique to be correct, a comparison between methods revealed an error of 10.6 percent on yearling and 69.5 percent on two-year and older elk in aging by check station personnel (Tables 19 and 20). Table 19.--Percent White River Units Station Meeker Ripple Creek New Castle Deep Creek Rifle Idaho Springs Total error in aging 1967. Dental 1 Cementum-/ 7 4 14 10 1 11 47 47 yearling Field 2/ Aged 7 3 12 9 0 11 42 elk at check stations, all Percent Correct 100.0 75.0 85.7 90.0 0.0 100.0 Percent Error 0.0 25.0 14.3 10.0 100.0 0.0 89.4 10.6 1/ Number of teeth checked in laboratory using cementum technique. ~/ Number of correct ages determined at check station using tooth replacement and wear technique. Table 20.--Percent error in aging 256 elk older than yearlings stations all White River Units 1967. Dental Percent Field 2/ 1/ Station Cementum Aged Correct Meeker 117 41 35.0 Ripple Creek 21 3 14.3 New Castle 44 12 27.3 Deep Creek 42 11 26.2 Rifle 18 8 44.4 21.4 Idaho Springs 14 3 Total 256 78 30.5 1/ Number of teeth checked in laboratory using cementum at check Percent Error 65 0 85.7 72.7 73.8 55.6 78.6 0 69.5 technique. 11 Number of correct ages determined at check station using tooth replacement and wear technique. Tables 21 and 22 give percent error and distribution of error by age class. Of 303 check station assigned ages, 228 (75.2%) were accurate within one year either side of the dental cementum age. Of the 168 incorrectly assigned ages, excluding unknowns, 127 (75.6%) ages were younger than those determined by dental cementum. �- 401 Table 2l.--Percent error between dental cementum and tooth replacement and wear aging techniques by age class of 303 elk, all White River Units , 1967. Age Dental Field Percent Percent Cementum!1 Class Aged ?:.I Correct Error 1 47 42 89.4 10.6 2 53 36 67.9 32.1 3 68 20 29.4 70.6 4 40 11 27.5 72.5 5 36 5 13.9 86.1 6 17 3 17.6 82.4 13 7 1 7.7 92.3 8 3 0 0.0 100.0 81.8 9+ 11 2 18.2 Unknown ]./ 15 0 0.0 100.0 Total 303 120 39.6 60.4 !I Number of teeth checked in laboratory using cementum technique. ~I Number of correct ages determined at check station using tooth replacement and wear technique. 1/ Unknown age class includes at check stations. 15 teeth aged in laboratory that were not aged Table 22.--Distribution of 303 check station assigned ages in relation to 303 ages as determined by dental cementum, all White River Units, 1967. Dental Cementum Check Station Age Class Assigned Ages Total 1 2 3 4 6 5 7 8 Unk. 9 1 42 3 1 1 47 10 36 2 4 2 1 2 55 2 33 20 11 3 1 1 7 75 1 6 18 11 1 2 4 1 4 q·4 1 2 5 7 10 5 5 4 2 1 37 6 1 4 3 5 3 1 1 18 1 7 1 2 3 5 1 13 8 1 1 1 0 3 1 1 9+ 1 1 2 2 1 2 11 Total 58 82 56 42 16 18 9 5 2 15 303 Antler Point Count by Age Class.--This year antler point counts and formation were recorded for 53 elk aged in the laboratory from Area E. Analysis of antler point data to establish a criterion for aging elk have been attempted before with little success because of extreme variability. This variability is present in younger as well as older age classes (Table 23). For example, the "typical" (1-1) or (1-2) count of a yearling elk was observed in age classes 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 9. �- 402 - Table 23.--Denta1 cementum age compared to antler point count of 53 elk, Area E 1967. Number Observed Percent Observed Antler Points (L-R) Age Class Per Age Class Per Age Class 1 9 69.2 1 - 1 1 2 - 1 7.7 2 - 2 1 7.7 1 3 - 1 7.7 1 5 - 5 7.7 2 1 - 1 4 - 4 5 - 3 5 - 5 6 - 5 1 2 1 4 1 11.1 22.2 11.1 44.5 11.1 3 1 - 1 3 - 5 4 - 4 5 - 5 6.- 5 6 - 6 1 1 5 9 2 1 5.3 5.3 26.3 47.3 10.5 5.3 1- 1 3 - 3 5 - 5 6 - 6 1 1 1 2 20.0 20.0 20 0 40.0 1 - 2 4 - 4 5 - 5 6 - 5 1 2 1 1 20.0 40 O 20.0 20.0 6 5 - 5 1 100.0 9 1 - 1 1 100.0 4 5 0 G Lactation Condition by Age C1ass.--Lactation condition of females was checked against their age as determined by dental cementum (Table 24). One of four yearling females was noted as lactating. This is probably an error in the data in that the animal would have had to breed as a calf, which is rather unlikely. �- 403 - Table 24.--Dental cementum age and lactation occurrence in 88 female elk, Area E 1967. Lactation Condition Number Number % Total Non-Lactating Lactating % Age 4 75.0 3 25.0 1 1 6 33.3 2 66.6 4 2 23 39.1 9 60.9 14 3 13 38.5 5 8 61.5 4 19 2 10.5 17 89.5 5 44.4 9 4 55.6 6 5 28.6 7 2 71.4 5 7 1 0.0 0 100.0 1 8 6 16.7 1 83.3 5 9+ 31.8 88 28 60 68.2 Totals Day of Kill by Sex and Age Class.--Information relative to the day of kill by sex and age class is sho~~ in Table 25. Of 909 elk aged at check stations from all White River units, 739, or 81.3 percent were harvested within the first three days. These figures are not representative of the entire White River elk kill but only of those elk killed within the first nine days and brought through check stations. Table 25.--Harvest statistics by day and by sex and age class, all White River Units 1967. Dal of Kill Sex 8 Total 4. 6 9 7 5 3 2 1 and Age 2 529 3 18 9 25 124 76 34 238 Bulls-Yearling 153 0 2 1 13 3 22 9 68 35 Bulls-Mature 1/ 46 1 2 1 3 0 3 10 9 17 Cows-Yearling 181 2 3 3 16 5 12 42 34 64 Cows-Mature ]) Total 387 211 141 58 57 26 15 9 5 909 ]) Elk older than yearlings were classified at mature. Days Hunted by Successful Hunters.--Area E hunters who were successful in harvesting an elk hunted a mean of 2.59 days. Bull hunters needed 2.61 days while antlerless hunters needed a slightly less 2.58 days. Yearling elk were harvested in an average of 1.86 days, as opposed to 2.72 days required for elk two years or older. Table 26 separates these data for residents and nonresidents. �- 404 Table 26.--Mean number of days required to harvest elk in Area E by resident and non-resident hunters. Mean Da~s to Kill An Elk Permit TYEe Bull Cow Elk Resident 2.44 (41) 1) 2.56 (111) 2.53 (152) Non-Resident 3.07 (15~ 2.69 (26) 2.83 (4l~ II Figures in parenthesis indicate number of elk killed. Days Hunted by Unsuccessful Hunters.--Unsuccessful hunters with antlered permits hunted 4.42 days while those with antlerless permits hunted 4.46 days. Non-residents spent an average of 5.46 days pursuing elk and residents 4.29 days. Non-resident, antlerless hunters spent 6.25 days in the field. Abandoned Elk Carcasses.--One-hundred and fifty-six abandoned elk carcasses were observed by 860 successful hunters questioned at check stations. As expected, cow elk are abandoned at a much higher rate than bulls (Table 27). Table 27.--Number of abandoned elk carcasses observed by 860 successful Area E hunters 1967. Number of Successful Number of Abandoned Animals Observed Unit Hunters Bull Cow Calf Total 23 193 4 (.02) 1/ 7 (.04) 1 (.01) 12 (.06) 24 667 9 (.01) 122 (.18) 13 (.02) 144 (.22) Total 860 13 (.02) 129 (.15) 14 (.02) 156 (.18) 11 Figures in parenthesis are mean number of carcasses observed per hunter. Hunter Se1ectivity.--In a preliminary attempt to determine hunter selectivity on elk, the 1967 questionnaire samploo hunter attitudes. One-hundred and forty-three (11.4% of 1,262) hunters did not shoot at the first legal elk they saw and gave responses as to why they did not. (Table 28). These data are from all eight White River Units. �Table 28.--Reasons given by 143 successful hunters for not shooting at first legal elk observed, all White River Units, 1967. Response Shooting distance too great or elk in rough country Waited for easier or better shot Hunter had no chance to shoot at first elk Waited for shot at larger antlerless elk Response not applicable to question Hunter gave no reason for not shooting Preferred not to shoot calf or cow with calf Waited for larger bull or trophy head Rifle not in operating condition Wanted calf or small animal for packing out Allowed another member of party to shoot first Another shot first animal that was seen Chose a wounded or abandoned animal Preferred not to shoot first animal Afraid to shoot - might hit wrong animal Had "buck fever" on first elk seen Another hunter in the way Elk could not be retrieved on private property Wanted spike bull for eating quality Total 11 Percent of hunters who did not shoot first legal elk. 11 Percent of all hunters questioned. Frequency 32 27 17 16 9 7 7 6 4 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 __ 1_ 143 Percent II 22.4 18.9 11.9 11.1 6.3 4.9 4.9 4.2 2.8 2.1 2.1 2.1 1.4 1.4 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 O.7 100.0 Percen~1 2.5 2.1 1.3 1.3 0.7 0.6 0.6 0.5 0.3 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 ~ 11.4 .j:7 o V1 �- 4·06 Location of Harvest.--Accurate records were kept in 1967 on kill locations, using detailed one-half inch to the mile maps, to determine if larger bulls were killed at a higher rate on the south side of the White River in Unit 24 where the Flat Tops Wilderness Area is located. Fifty-two of 78 (67%) mature bulls were harvested on the south side. However, that area contains approximately 342 square miles as compared to 119 square miles north of the river. Table 29 lists the number of elk harvested, percent of each class and kill per square mile north and south of the White River in Unit 24. Table 29.--Elk harvest statistics north and south of the White River in Unit 24 1967. North of White River South of White River Number Kill/Sq. Number Kill/Sq. Class Harvested Mile Harvested % % Mile Total Mature Bulls 26 33.3 .22 52 66.7 .15 78 Yearling Bulls 5/+.5 115 96 .97 45.5 .28 211 1.72 Cows & Calves 205 57.6 151 42.4 .44 356 Totals 346 53.6 2.9l 299 46.4 c 87 645 Random Surveys-Game Research. --Accurate kill estimates, in combination w i t h sex and age ratios, are paramount for making valid population estimates (Dasrnann,'1952). To better estimate the elk kill in Area E, 2,072 permittees (51. 3% sample) were contacted by letter and requested to give information OIl their hunt. Appendix C is a replica of the stamped, pre-addressed card sent to each permittee in the sampleo The original mailing was made on February 16, 1968. On March 8, 1968, 430 follow-up letters were sent to persons who had not responded to the surveyo By the cut-off date, March 25, 1968 1,835 (88 6%) usable cards had been returned. A total of 4,041 licenses were issued for Area E which included 1,893 resident antlered licenses, 1,279 resident ant1er1ess licenses, 651 non-resident antlered licenses and 218 non-resident antlerless licenses. Table 30 gives the results of the 1967 random survey along with results obtained by game management on their report card survey. 0 �- 407 - Table 30.--Comparison of game management's report card survey and Area E 1967 random survey. Resident Non-Resident Antlered Ant1er1ess Antlered Antlerless Total LICENSE ISSUE 651 218 4,041 REPORT CARD RETURN No Hunt No Kill Kill Total Cards Rec, Total Cards Not Reco 478 685 620 739 210 206 165 233 RANDOM SURVEY - FIRST MAILING No Hunt 46 No Kill 483 Kill 157 Sub-Total 686 22 249 258 529 18 221 94 333 39 57 97 RANDOM SURVEY - FOLLOW-UP No Hunt No Kill Kill Sub-Total 8 3 2 60 19 87 o 23 28 54 30 2 9 41 6 8 RANDOM SURVEY - ALL RETURNS No Hunt No Kill Kill Grand Total 54 543 176 773 20 251 103 374 41 63 105 25 272 286 583 1 1 27 1,194 1,473 1,863 2,137 87 992 566 1,6l.5 13 115 62 190 100 1,107 628 1 835 Estimated Kill.--According to the random survey projection, a total of 1,383 elk (614 bulls, 632 cows and 137 calves) were harvested from Area E during 1967 instead of the 1,473 elk (688 bulls, 651 cows and 134 calves) estimated by game management. To pinpoint some of this error--where it comes from, why it exists-a comparison of the two total kill estimates is made in Table 31. Table 3l.--Total resident and non-resident projected elk kill by sex based on report card returns and random survey, Area E, 1967. Resident Non-Resident Surve Antlered Antlerless 1/ Antlered Antlerless 1/ Total Report Card 478 (25.3) 620 (48.5) 210 (32.3) 165 (75.7) 1,473 (36.5) Random 387 (20.4) 630 (49 3) 227 (34.9) 139 (63.8) 1,383 (34.2) 0 11 Includes calf kill 1/ Hunter success (percent) based on total estimate kill per total license sale. From Table 31 we conclude: (1) the report card system over-estimated resident bull kill; (2) the report card method reasonably estimated resident cow kill; �- 408 (3) the report card method under-estimated non-resident bull kill; and (4) the report card method strongly over-estimated non-resident cow kill. Apparently, the high kill estimate of 1,473 was partially caused by an over-estimate of the success of hunters who did not return their report cards. Further, all valid license holders (220/4,041 ~ 5.4%) did not hunt in Area E during 1967. Kill by Unit.--The kill by unit and by sex were also projected from information on the random survey. Table 32 compares this information to the report card survey. Table 32.--Comparison of the kill by unit and sex between the report card and random survey, Area E, 1967. Total Antlerless Antlered % Total % Total % Total Kill Number Kill Number Number Kill Survey REPORT CARD 776 52.7 420 28.5 356 24.2 Unit 23 47.3 697 365 24.8 332 22.5 Unit 24 100.0 1,473 785 53.3 688 46.7 Total RANDOM 1/ Unit 23 Unit 24 Total 268 304 572 21.0 23 9 44.9 0 304 399 703 23.8 31.3 55.1 572 703 1,275 44 8 55 2 100.0 0 0 ]) Does not include 108 kills for which no unit of kill could be assigned. Recreation Days.--Additional information relative to the harvest was requested on the random survey. Table 33 lists information for Area E on total recreation days, days in field per hunter and kill per ten recreation dayso These data agree closely with the same information requested of hunters at check stations. Table 33.--Statistics from random survey concerning recreation days per hunter and elk kill per recreation day in Area E, 1967. II Kill/ lORe c Number Recreation Days Days/Hunter Hunters Days 0 40 5.49 1,774 9,739 Res. Bull Hunters 0 62 6 08 607 3,691 N-Res. Bull Hunters 0.93 5.51 1,224 6,744 Res. Cow Hunters 0 95 6 80 216 1,469 N-Res. Cow Hunters 0 0 Totals & Average 1/ Projected figures 3,821 21,643 0 0 0 0 5.97 0 64 0 from random survey minus 220 no hunts. Wounding Loss._-All agree that information from hunters on wounding loss and number of days hunted has a great amount of bias. To gain some insight, and possibly come up with a correction factor, these data were collected by two independent surveys. Table 34 compares gross wounding loss data from random survey with comparable data from check station questionnaire while Table 35 lists results from both surveys on net wounding loss (gross wounding loss minus number of wounded animals harvested. �Table 34.--Area E wounding loss - comparison of antlered and antler1ess hunters with two different surveys, 1967. Type Survey % of Hunters Number of Wounding % Wounding Loss Projected Elk Loss Hunters and Class Frequency Wounding Elk Kill % Loss-Kill No. 17 % of Pop.47 Random Survey .1 Antlered Lf,c , 37 279 1,058 82 3.5 13.3 7.3 Antlerless Lf,c , 654 22 3.4 349 48 6.3 0.9 Totals Questionnaire ~/ Antlered Lf.c , Antlerless Lf,c , Totals 1,712 59 3.4 628 9,4 130 1.9 566 412 29 46 5.1 11.2 447 413 6.5 1101 40 85 3.5 1.5 978 75 7.7 860 8.7 125 1.9 1/ Actual figures reported from an approximate 50 percent sample of Area E permittees. 1/ Figures based on 860 successful and 204 unsuccessful Area E permittees minus 86 hunters for whom the question was not applicable. Data obtained at check stations. 11 Numbers of elk lost were projected by multiplying percent wounding loss of kill by total estimated kill of 1,383 from Table 310 ~/ Based on population estimate pre-season 1967 of 1,130 bulls and 5,559 cows and calves for a total population of 6,689. +" o \0 �Table 35.--Wounded elk salvaged by hunters and net wounding loss - comparison of two different surveys I Area Ez 1967. Type Survey Number of Woundin~ Loss and Class Elk Killed No. Wounded Wounded Killed Net Loss Percent Los~ Random Survey 11 Antlered Li.c , 279 37 10 27 9.7 Antlerless Lic. 349 22 15 7 2.0 Totals 628 Questionnaire ~I Ant lered Lf,c , Antlerless Lic. Totals 59 25 34 5.4 .j::"" i....J 408 366 29 46 25 10 4 36 1.0 9.8 774 75 35 40 5.2 II Actual figures reported from an approximate 50 percent sample of Area E permittees. 11 Figures from 860 successful Area E permittees minus 86 hunters for whom the question was not applicable. Data obtained from check stations. 11 Percent wounding loss is net loss divided by number of elk killed. 0 �- 4n - The random survey was a representative sample of 51.3 percent of all Area E permittees, whereas, questionnaire data were based on 26.0 percent of hunters who voluntarily stopped at check stations. These 26 percent mayor may not be representative of the total population of active hunters. In Table 34, percent wounding loss figures of legal kill (Random Survey 9.4%; Questionnaire - 8.7%) compare closely with the 9.0 percent and 7.4 percent estimated by Hay, et a l , (1961) and Hunter (1967). However, it is assumed that these figures represent a minimum loss in that all hunters would not admit wounding an elk and that hunters who did not wound an animal, most likely would not respond to the question positively. Additional data on wounding loss will be collected on the 1968-1970 harvests at least by both of the above methods. With more information it may be possible to determine a degree of bias and then make more definite conclusions on the amount and effect of wounding loss. Population Estimates - Game Research.--Using the corrected kill figures from 1966 and 1967 random surveys and pre- and post-season classification counts, elk population estimates were calculated for Area Eo A formula devised by Dr. David Bowden, Colorado State University Computer Center, was used to calculate population estimates. All estimates which have been made, and projections from these esti.mates are included in the following tables for the sake of comparison. Appendix D is an example of how population estimates are calculated and Appendix E illustrates how population projections are determined. Following the 1966 season when an accurate kill was determined, the first population estimate was made on the number of elk in Area E prior to and after the season (Table 36)0 At that time the first population projection was made for 1967 and appears as Table 37. Table 36.--First population estimate of elk in Area E, 1966. Est. Pre-hunt Population Est. Post-hunt Hunt Mort. Calc. Calc. 1/ Count Harvest No. % No. % % 709 311 60 Bull 15.4 1,020 15.4 56.9 611 2,939 Cow 53 7 53.7 3,550 37.1 1,926 Calf 127 30.9 30.9 2,053 0 0 Totals 6,62:;'/100.0 1,447 100.0 1..1 Because 5,176 100.0 Population Count % 6.1 58.9 35.0 100.0 1966 was the base year of all population estimates, calculated percent of bulls, cows and calves could >,i)t be computed. Therefore, these figures are identical to the percentages found during 1966 pre-season classification counts. ~ 2/ Confidence interval, where~== .05 and Z = 1.96, was.i:210 or 6413T !:- 6833. ~. �- 412 - Table 37.--First population projection of elk in Area E, 1967 )./ Est. Pre-hunt Population Hunt Mort. Est. Pos t=hunt; Population Calc. Count Calc. Count No. % % Harvest No. % % Bull 17.1 16.9 625 1,274 649 11.4 9.1 Cow 52.5 52.1 3,902 925 2,977 52.3 56.4 31.0 Calf 30.4 2,263 200 2,063 36.3 34.5 Totals 7,439 100.0 100.0 1,750 5,689 100.0 100.0 1/ Projection based on estimated 25 percent hunter success of 2,500 antlered permits and 75 percent hunter success of 1,500 ant1er1ess permits. Tables 36 and 37 were the necessary data needed to make harvest recommendations for the 1967 season. The above estimate and projection did not take into account natural mortality or wounding loss. However, for the 1967 season an estimated net wounding loss of 5.4 percent was determined (Table 35) by random survey. Realizing this was a minimum figure, and that it would probably change when additional information was collected, the decision was made to use it to allow for the best possible estimate of total hunting mortality. Therefore, the first popUlation estimate (Table 38), the first population projection (Table 39), the 1967 independent population estimate (Table 40) and the 1968 population projection (Table 41) all include 5.4 percent net wounding loss as a part of hunting mortality. Table 38.--Corrected first population estimate of elk in Area E, 1966. 11 Est. Pre-hunt Population Hunt. Mort. Est. Post-hunt Population Calc. Count Har. WolD Tot. No. Calc. Count % % 15.4 53.7 30.9 15.4 53.7 30.9 709 611 127 Totals 6,978 100.0 100.0 1,447 Bull Cow Calf 1,075 3,747 2,156 % 38 33 7 747 644 134 % 328 3,103 2,022 78 1,525 5,453 100.0 1/ Corrected on basis of a 5.4 percent wounding loss of legal kill. Table 39.--Corrected Est. Pre-hunt Calc. No. % Bull 1,339 17.0 Cow 4,114 52.2 Calf 2,427 30.8 Totals 7,880 100.0 Count e % 16.9 52.1 31..0 of elk in Area E 1967)./ Est. Post-hunt Population Count Calc No. % % 692 10.8 3,448 53.7 2,283 35.5 614 632 137 100.0 1,383 33 34 7 74 1,457 6,423 100.0 1/ Corrected on basis of a 5.4 percent wounding loss of legal kill. 2/ Includes actual hunting mortality (1,457) as determined by 1967 random ~urvey instead of the projected harvest (1,750)0 �- 413 Now that the data have been corrected because of better information on total hunting mortality, the second independent population estimate could be made from 1967 pre- and post-season classification counts and 1967 harvest as determined by random survey. Table 40.--Second independent population estimate Est. Pre-hunt Population Hunt Mort. Ca Lc , Count Har. W.L. Tot. % % No. 647 33 614 16.9 16.9 1,130 Bull 666 632 34 52.1 52.I 3,485 Cow 144 137 7 31.0 31.0 2,074 Calf of elk in Area E, 1967. Est. Post-hunt Population Ca Lc , Count % % No. 9.1 483 9.2 56.4 53.9 2,819 34~5 36.9 1,930 100.0 100.0 5,232 74 1,457 1,383 100.0 Totals 6,68~/lOO.0 .05 and Z = 1.96, was 1: 191 or 6498 &-11 Confidence interval, where~= T ::'6880. With this second independent population estimate of elk in Area E came the first real test of a candidate harvest formula. As can be seen when comparing Tables 39 and 40, the pre-season population projection of 7,880 was too high by almost 1,200 elk. This was caused primarily by over-predicting hunter success From past information, hunter success had averaged 75 percent on ant1erless and 25 percent on antlered elk. In 1967, hunter success changed to 58 percent on ant1erless and 28 percent on antlered. Apparently, a relationship exists between the number of permits allowed in a special area and degree of hunter success. Just what this relationship is remains to be seen. e The encouraging portion of the data now collected is that our objectives are and can be accomplished. From 1966 to 1967, the percent of bulls in the postseason population has risen from 6.1 percent to 9.1 percent, while the postseason cow population has remained relatively stable - actually a slight reduction from 3,103 to 2,819. It is too early to detect any change in productivity (calves per 100 cows). By 1968 there may be an indication. Again now, a projection can be n~de for the 1968 pre-season population with the 1967 post-season population information (Table 40) using the method explained in Appendix E. Post-season populations also are included based on two different success ratios for both ant1er1ess and antlered permits. In Table 41, predicted success is based on average hunter success in Area E since 1958, for the sake of continuity, while in Table 42 predictions are based on actual success ratios of the 1966 and 1967 specified permit seasons. �- 414 Table 4l.--Second population projection of elk in Area E, 1968. 1/ Est. Pre-hunt Population Hunt Mort. Est. Post-hunt Population Calc. Count Hare W.L. Tot. Calc. Count No. % % No. % % Bull 1,448 19.4 625 34 659 789 14.0 Cow 3,784 50.7 925 50 975 2,809 49~9 Calf 2,233 29.9 200 11 211 2,022 36.1 Totals 7,465 100.0 1,750 95 1,845 5,620 100.0 !/ Hunting mortality based on 75 percent success on 1,500 ant1erless permits and 25 percent success on 2,500 antlered permits. at 5.4 percent of legal harvest. Wounding loss estimated 1/ Table 42.--Second popUlation projection of elk in Area E, 1968. Est. Pre-hunt Population Hunt Mort. Est. Post-hunt Population Calc. Count Har. W.L. Tot. Calc. Count No. % % No. % % 1,448 Bull 19.4 750 41 79l 657 11.7 Cow 3,784 50.7 826 45 871 2,913 51.9 Calf 2,233 29.9 179 10 189 2,044 36.4 Totals 7,465 100.0 1,755 96 1,851 5,614 100.0 !/ Hunting mortality based on 67 percent success on 1,500 ant1erless permits and 30 percent success on 2,500 antlered permits. 5.4 percent of legal harvest. Wounding loss estimated at As a check on the above projections, the 1968 percentages in Tables 41 and 42 for each class (bull, cow and calf) will be compared with the actual preand post-season sex and age ratio counts of 1968. Th~ 1968 projected kill will be compared with the estimated kill in 1968 taken again by a random survey. Following the 1968 season when the results of the classification counts and estimated kill are determined, a new 1968 pre-season population estimate will be computed by Bowden's formula and compared to the present 1968 pre-season population projection. Note that these comparisons will act as independent estimates of the same thing and, if there is close agreement, will be a good indication that the population estimates are reasonable. �- 415 - LITERATURE CITED Dasmann, R. F. 1952. Methods for estimating deer populations from kill data. California Fish and Game. 38(2):225-233. Erickson, J. A. 1967. Estimating ages of mule deer. Colorado State University, Fort Collins. 93 p. M. S 'IhesLs, Hay, K. G., G. N. Hunter and L. Robbins. 1961. Big Game Management in Colorado, 1949-1958. State of Colorado. Department of Game and Fish. 112p. Hunter, G. N. 1967. Colorado big game harvest, 1959-1965. ment Division, Colorado Game, Fish and Parks. 41p. Game Manage- Quimby, D. C. and J. E. Gaab. 1957. Mandibular dentition as an age indicator in Rocky Mountain Elk. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 21(4):435-451. Prepared by: E. J Prenz10w Wildlife ReGcarcher �- 416 APPENDIX A QUESTIONNAIRE FOR SUCCESSFUL Checker. ELK HUNTERS _ Sheet Noo, _ ELK CHECK STATION WORK SHEET 1. 2. Check Station~ Date 3. Game Management 4a. Age of animal. b. Determined by: Sa. Sex of animal _ 1. _ 2. _ 3. Unit. Dentition Undetermined 4a. Antlers (Check only one) b. Male Female b. If male, antler points - Right c. Left _ d. If female, lactating~ non-lactating --------------------- ------------- Sa. b. Co unknown 6a. Day of season of Kill b. Number of days hunted to get elk c. Resident Non-resident d. If non-resident, list state d. ~. b. c. d. 7a. Number of spike bulls You observed b. Number of mature bulls You observed c. Number of cows and calves You observed 7a. b. c. 8a. How many elk did you hit that you weren't able to get? b. Was the elk you killed wounded by someone else before you shot it? Yes No How many abandoned carcasses did you observe? c. Number bulls (If yes, also plot on d. Number cows appropriate map) e. Number calves 8ao 9. Did you see a banded elk? Yes (If yes, fill out band sighting 9. 10. Did you shoot at the first legal animal you saw? Yes Noo__ lO., If no, on what basis did you select the animal you shot? ~-------No~.----------_ formo) b. c. d. eo _ _ �- 417 APPENDIX B QUESTIONNAIRE FOR UNSUCCESSFUL ELK HUNTERS Checker Sheet No. ------- --------------------UNSUCCESSFUL HUNTER REPORT FORM 11 l. Check Station 1. _ 2. Date 2. _ 3. _ ------- 4. _ 5. _ ---------------- Non-resident------------------ 6a. _ b. _ ------------------ 7 a • b. Number of mature bulls you observed ----------------_ b.c. c. Number of cows and calves you observed _ 3. Game Management Unit 4. Ant lered Permit 5. Number of days hunted Antlerless Permit ------- 6a. Resident b. If non-resident) list state --------------------------- 7a. Number of spike bulls you observed 8. How many elk did you hit that you weren't able to get? 8. 9. How many abandoned carcasses did you observe? a. Number bulls (If yes, also plot b. Number cows on appropriate map) c. Number calves 9. 10. -- _ _ -------- a. -----b. -----c. ------ 10. Did you see a banded elk? Yes---,--~- No -------(If yes, fill out band sighting form) _ !/Determine if this is the last trip through a White River check station. If so, fill out this form on unsuccessful elk hunters. A good sample is all that is required, so during rush periods it is not necessary to use this form. �- 418 APPENDIX C POST CARD RANDOM SURVEY Please list results of your own hunting effort and not information from those with whom you may have hunted. 1. Did you hunt elk in Area "E" during 1967? Yes 2. Number of calendar days huntedo 3. Did you kill an elk in Area "E" in 1967? Yes 4. What kind of elk did you kill? Bu1l 5. In what Game Management unit did you kill an elk? Unit 23 _ No _ _ Cow No _ Ca1f _ Unit 24 ---- 6. How many elk did you hit that you weren't able to get? 7. Was the elk you killed wounded by someone else before you shot it? Yes No--- Fig. 3 -- Sample of post card random survey for Area E hunters in 1967. �- 419 APPENDIX D EXAMPLE - POPULATION FORMULA USING 1967 INFORMATION In September 1967, the pre-season sex and age ratio counts were conducted within Area E with the following results: Total elk classified: No. of bulls: No. of cows: No. of calves: 134 415 247 796 fraction of bulls in count 134/796 = .1683 In December 1967, the post-season sex and age ratio counts were conducted within Area E with the following results: Total elk classified: No. of bulls: No. of cows: No. of calves: 214 1,318 806 2,338 fraction of bulls in count 214/2338 = .0915 In March 1968, a random survey of Area E hunters revealed the following harvest. (This is compared to Game Management Division figures). Kill Resident Antlerless Antlered Non-Resident Antlerless AntIereo Total Report Card 478 620 210 165 1,473 Random 387 1/ 630 227 1/ 139 1,383 }) A total of 387 + 227 gives 614. This figure (614) times 5.41 (wounding loss) indicates a total hunting mortality on bulls of 647. Therefore, the fraction of the bulls in the total hunting mortality of 1,457 is 647/1457 = .4441. With the above information the 1967 pre-season total population estimated can be computed. �- 420 - Let: Then: T = total population K = total kill PI = fraction of bulls in counts (post-hunt) P2 = fraction of bulls in counts (pre-hunt) b = fraction of bulls in total kill T = K (PI - b) (PI - P2 ) T = 1457 ~.0915 - .4441} (.0915 - .1683) T = l457~-.3526~ (-.768) T· = -513.7382 T = 6689 -0.768 When using this formula, the kill figure used is a critical factor. For example, for every animal off in the kill estimate, the population estimate will be off five animals. This is why it is necessary to have the kill figure as accurate as possible. �- 421 - APPENDIX E EXAMPLE - PROJECTION OF 1968 PRE-HUNT POPULATION 1967 Estimated Post-Hunt Population Sex No. Calc. Count % % Bulls Cows Calves 483 2,819 1,930 9.2 53.9 36.9 9.1 56.4 34.5 Totals 5,232 100.0 100.0 Assume that of 1,930 calves, 50 percent (965) are males and 50 percent (965) are females. Then add the post-hunt bulls (483) to (965) and the post-hunt cows (2,819) to (965) to give a 1968 pre-hunt population of 1,448 bulls and 3,784 cows. Multiply the cows (3,784) by 0.59 which is the number of calves per 100 cows in the pre-season classification counts to obtain the number of calves (2,233) This will give an estimate of the pre-hunt population prior to the 1968 season. 1968 Estimated Pre-Hunt Population Calc. No. % Bulls Cows Calves 1,448 3,784 2,233 19.4 50.7 29.9 Totals 7,465 100.0 Sex � https://cpw.cvlcollections.org/files/original/1fe0a0f0cacf4b5003a66c364f5a00ec.pdf d3cc01b805e4a337f82ca55bcbc3c0ca PDF Text Text October, 1968 - 1- JOB PROGRESS PEPOR~ P.ESEARCHPROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO --------~~--~--------------- Project Ho. Work Plan No. Title of Job: w-88-R-13 1 Migratory Bird L""J.vestigations Job No. 1 Waterfowl Production Surveys Period CoveI'ea.: April 1, 1967 to .May31, 1967· Personnel: Those cooperating on the 1967 counts were: Charles tlpete"Bryant and staff, Monte Vi.sta National Wildlife Refuge; Charles Hayes, Dale Horne, and Mitchell Sheldon, U. S. Bureau of Sport Fisheries and Wildlife; and Howard Funk, Richard Hopper, Wayne Russell, and William Rutherford, Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department. Techniques Used: Present breeding-pair and production surveys have been consolidated into a breeding-pair inventory in late May and early June. One week of the inventory requires roughly 30 to 40 hours of aircraft use. All other work is done on the ground, usually in cooperation with local Bureau of Sport Fisheries and Wildlife persollilel. On the basis of these st.ud.tes,reports are made, as r-e qu'i.red , to the Bureau of Sport Fisheries and Wildlife, which constitutes Colorado's part in the annual cooperative breeding ground survey. The 1967 surveys were conducted within the period 10B.y8 to ~1ay31. During this time, ground COQDts were made in the Yampa Valley and Brown's Park, aerial counts were made in the South Platte and Cache la Poudre Valleys and in North Park, and intensive aerial coverages combined with air-ground comparison studies were conducted in theSan Luis Valley. As for the past several years, intensive brood surveys were not conducted this year due to a lack of time. Thus, this final breeding ground report considers only the breeding-pair surveys with last minute notes on weather and water conditions, accompanied by gross observations of early nesting success in the breeding areas. All survey methods and sample areas remained the same as in past years, with the previously mentioned intensive inventory in the San Luis Valley being continued for the fourth year, Flying was done with a Cessna 180 airplane on all aerial counts. Areas which are sampled by blocks or sections were flown with one observer, while areas sampled by transects were flown with two observer-s . ��- 3 - WATERFOWL PRODUCTION SURVEYS William H. Rutherford Weather conditions in Colorado during the spring and early summer were generally good to excellent for nesting waterfowl. Winter snowpack, although not extremely heavy, was late in melting due to a cold spring season. Water supplies were generally good, both from reservoir storage holdover from last year and from heavy spring precipitation. The effect of the wet spring was noticeable in all waterfowl breeding grounds of the state, where nesting habitat was quite abundant. The San Luis Valley was a possible exception; early water was somewhat less abundant than in past years, but recovered during the rainy months of May and June. Table 1 -~ Summary of Colorado Duck Breeding Ground Population Estirmtes, 1967 With 1966 and the 13-year Average for Comparison. Total Estimated Breeding Pairs " 13-year Ave. 1967 1966 1954-1966 San Luis Valley North Park South Platte Valley Cache 1a Poudre Valley Yampa Valley Browns Park 'roTALS 32,774 y Percent Change From From 13-yr. 1966 Average 13,722 8,813 5,735 3,246 441 26,835 11,622 6,701 2,762 2,105 392 27,422 2/ + 22.1 5,607 - + 18.1 4,847 + 31.5 + 107.6 1,903 2,890 + 54.2 132 + 12.5 64,731 50,417 42,801 + 28.4 + 19·5 + 144.7 + 81.8 + 201.4 + 12·3 + 234•1 + 51.2 =============================================================================== 11 This figure includes mallards only on the Monte Vista National Wildlife Refuge. g/ Data on other species not compiled at report date. San Luis Valley averages are based on results of 1964, 1965, and 1966 coverage only. The much less intensive coverage of previous years is not included in the calculations. Examination of the duck breeding-pair estimates by area (Table 1) reveal that the 1967 counts were 28.4 percent above those of 1966, and 51.2 percent above the 1954-1966 13-year average. Comparison of individual breeding ground estimates between 1966 and 1967 showed the changes noted in Table 1. All areas showed increases from both 1966 and from the long-term average, with North Park, the Cache la Poudre Valley, and Browns Park showing the greatest increases. Species composition percentages of the breeding duck population showed minor changes as noted in Table 2. Shovelers and redheads were down somewhat, teals (all species) were up conSiderably, and other species percentages remained stable. �- 4 - Table 2 -- Species Composition of the Colorado, Breeding Duck Population, 1967, 1966, and the 1954-1966 13-year Average. Number of Breeding Pairs 1954-1966 1967 1966 Average Species Composition, Percent 1954-1966 !! 1966 Average 17 1967 M3.11ard Blue-winged or Cinnamon Teal Pintail Gadwall American Widgeon Shoveler Green-winged Teal Redhead Lesser Scaup Ruddy Duck Bufflehead Canvasback Ringneck American Merganser 37,652 28,913 27,581 58.17 57.35 6,354 4,186 6,167 1,035 2,194 4,057 1,368 948 394 3,440 3,018 4,863 164 3,609 745 4,050 943 240 9.82 6.47 9·53 1.60 6.82 5.99 9.65 0·32 7.16 1.48 8103 1.87 0.47 59 311 40 392 3,896 2,887 3,669 528 1,617 1,135 1,668 564 107 5 25 70 279 'IDTALS 64,731 50,417 44,031 6 3d9 - 6.27 2.11 1.46 0.61 T 0.09 0.48 0.08 0·78 100.00 100.00 62.64 8.85 6.56 8d3 1.20 3.67 2.58 3.79 1.28 0.24 0.01 0.06 0.16 0.63 San Luis Valley averages, included here, are for the years 1964, 1965, and 1966 only. In 1967, the western slope Canada goose breeding area showed an increase in . number of geese'and total gosling production over both last year and the longterm average. Flock size was the largest ever recorded since the survey was initiated. Extreme high water did not occur at any time during the spring. Nest hatching was nearly completed at the time of the survey, all hatched nests which were observed had remained high and dry, and no evidence of nest flooding could be detected. Tables 3, 4, and 5 list the numbers, age composition, location, and past years' comparisons of the breeding goose flock. Examination' of these data by area shows that the Yampa and Little Snake Rivers continue to contribute most of the volume of production and total geese observed, but that the Green RiVer is making a rapid and spectacular recovery following the years of construction of Flaming Gorge Reservoir. The flow of the Green is now well stabilized, and in addition, development work on the Browns Park National Wildlife Refuge has progressed to the point that many sloughs (dry ever since the spring floodwaters have been controlled) are filled by pumping from the river. It appears that the production habitat in Browns Park is fast approaching the level existing during the "good" years of the 1950's. The current surveys indicate an above-average production year and a continuation of the excellent status of the Canada goose flock in Moffat County. The management objective continues to be to increase the size of this flock, particularly because of the increase in habitat quantity and quality in Browns Park. �- 5 :F'allF'ligh"tPrediction: It is anticipated that fall duck flights from Colcrado 1, 19b7production will be considerably above average J and also in" creased. over those of 1966. Summer water shortages may occur' in the San Luis Valley, but it is believed that these will not be severe enough to affect brood survival rates. Populations and production of Canada Geese indicate an excellent flock status J but bunting restrictions both in Colorado and in the terminal wintering areas i~l.California are still very much in order, to avoid the origir-al mistake of ov r harvesting. The recommended bag and possession limit for Moffat County for' the 1967 season is one goose. Table 3 -- Number of Canada Geese by Breeding Classification, Moffat Co~~ty~ Colorado, 1967. Little Snake River (lowex'bridge to State line) GR.A.ND 1/ TOTALS 20 9 107 112 c:~~7 67 64 363 416 1,041 Novice pai:r-swhich are potential nesters next year. ~I ~his category includes both eggs and goslings co~~tedo Table 4 -- 'rotalCanada Geese Observed, Moff'at County, Colorado, 19670 ,---~ Area Yam a River Green River Litt'.e Snake River No. Geese Counted 1956-66 1966 1967 Ave. 625 139 277 605 130 235 309 61 190 Y Percent Change From 19)6-.b6' From 1966 Ave 0 + 3 + 7 + 18 + 102 + 128 + 46 ~/ ~----"""""'" TOTALS 1,041 970 560 + 7 Y Little S:aake River not included in survey until 1962. + 86 �- 6 _. Table 5 -- Number of Canada Goose Goslings Estimated~ Moffat County, Colorado) 1967. Number of GOSlin~s 1967 1966 195 -66 Area Ave. yampa River Green River Little Snake River 207 49 107 240 29 66 115 21 TOTALS 363 335 192 56 Y Percent Change From 1966 From 1956-66 Ave. - 14 + + 70 + 133 + 91 }) + 62 + 8 1/ Little Snake River not included in survey until 1962. Prepared by: William Ho Rutherford Wildlife Researcher + 80 89 �October, 1968 - 7 - JOB COMPLETION RESEARCH S tate of _~C~O..=:L:::::O~RAD~O~ PROJECT SEGMENT _ Pro jec t No. ~W_-~8~8_-~R_-=13:::.-_ Migratory Bird Investigations Job No. Work Plan No. 1 Title of Job: Trapping Period Covered: April Personnel: REPORT 2 and Banding Ducks and Geese 1, 1967 to March 31, 1968. Those assisting in trapping and banding operations during Segment 13 included: Charles Hayes, Jack Randall, and Dale Horne, Bureau of Sport Fisheries and Wildlife; Carroll Littlefield, Allan Pakulak, Ray Schmidt, Tom Tooker, and Gary Will, Colorado State University; Harvey Brenner, Bob Clark, Mark Elkins, Dwayne Finch, Millard Graham, Larry Green, Tony Jenson, Bob Kitzmiller, Tom Kitzmiller, Edward Kochman, Russell Mason, William Mink, Horace Moorhead, Gene Nugent, Bruce Poley, Bob Schmidt, Steve Steinert, R. B. Smith, John Torres, Bert Widhalm, Howard Funk, William Rutherford, and Richard Hopper, Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department. ABSTRACT Uearly 10,700 ducks of nire species were banded during 1967-68 (Segment 13) . Mallards constituted slightly over 9,000 of this total, largely because of their predominance in the state and importance in our present banding programs. Pintails and green-winged teals were the next most abundant species banded, with 808 and 463, respectively. Pre-season operations in the $an Luis Valley in August and September resulted in the banding of 2,244 ducks, including 1,639 mallards. Post-season winter banding in the four major areas of eastern Colorado -- Cache laPoudre Valley, South Platte Valley, Bonny Reservoir, Arkansas Valley -- yielded 7,199 ducks, with all except 38 being mallards. About 1,200 ducks were banded in North Park. Goose trapping in Colorado resulted in the banding of 2,115 Canada geese during 1967-68. Nearly one-half of these (920) were winter banded in the Arkansas Valley. An additional 480, consisting mostly of migrants were winter banded in the Fort Collins area. Most ot the remaining 715 geese were banded during .the summer from our resident flocks in the' Denver - Fort Collins area. Twenty-five goslings were banded and released on the Colorado River west of Grand Junction. �- 8 INTRODUCTION This report summarizes all waterfowl banding activities of Project W-88-R-13 for the segment-year April 1, 1967 to March 31, 1968. No attempt is made to analyze band recovery data under this job. Banding analysis work is carried under separate jobs where it has specific application (Work Plan 1, Job 3; Work Plan 3, Job 6). This report simply presents a tabulation of the number of waterfowl banded by species and location during the segmentyear, with comments on trapping techniques and other pertinent information. Ob jectives: (1) To trap and band ducks and geese for the purpose of accumulating migration, life history, and annual mortality data. (2) To report the species and numbers other W-88-R-13 jobs. of ducks and geese banded as part of Techniques Used: The overall banding program remained similar to past years, with operations under three phases -- mid-summer, late summer, and winter banding. Mid-summer activities took place on Colorado breeding grounds and emphasized the banding of young ducks and geese and molting adults. Late summer banding was conducted pre-season in the San Luis Valley as part of our continuing effort to evaluate the experimental hunting season in that area (Work Plan 1, Job 12). Mallards were of greatest concern in. this banding program. Winter mallard banding was continued' in eastern Colorado for the fifth consecutive year as part of the intensive investigation of wintering populations (Work Plan 3, Job 6). This post-season operation was conducted in four general areas: (1) Cache la Poudre Valley, (2) South Platte Valley, (3) Arkansas Valley, and (4) Bonny Reservoir. Winter banding of geese was confined to the Fort Collins area and Arkansas Valley. Work at these two locations was designed to collect management data on the High-line and Short Grass Prairie Canada goose populations. The following types of traps were employed to capture waterfowl during Segment 13: (1) corral trap for drive-trapping during the midsummer duck and goose banding phase, (2) Salt Plains trap for late summer and winter bait-trapping for ducks, and (3) cannon-net trap for bait-trapping ducks and geese in the winter. �- 9 - TRAPPING AND BANDING DUCKS AND GEESE Richard M. Hopper Ducks Table 1 lists the number of ducks banded by species and location. Nearly 10,700 ducks of 9 species were banded during Segment 13. The mallard, as in past years, was the most abundant species in the banded samples during the 1967-68 banding year. This species contributed 9,036, or about 85 percent, of the total ducks banded. Almost 7,200 of these mallards were banded as part of the intensive study of mallard flocks wintering in eastern Colorado. Another 1,639 were banded in the San Luis Valley, while North Park accounted for 236 mallard s banded. Summer Banding on Molting Areas.--Summer banding of ducks on molting areas was again limited to North Park in Jackson County. Trapping operations at this locality yielded a banded sample of 1,221 ducks, a figure considerably lower than last year but about normal compared most other years. Pintails, green-winged teals, and mallards constituted the major porti.on of the banded sample (Table 1). to San Luis Valley Cooperative Study.--Pre-season banding continued to be an important segment of the San Luis Valley Cooperative Mallard Investigation in 1967. Banding operations began in mid-August and extended through mid-September. Banding quotas were again set at 1,000 mallards of each age and sex class, yielding a goal of 4,000 birds for the entire Valley floor. State personnel and Federal Game Agents were assigned to band one-half of this total north of the Rio Grande River, with the other one-half to be banded south of the river by Refuge and other federal men. Banding was not attempted in the mountains to the we s t; of the Valley floor in 1967. Table 1 shows that 2,244 ducks of 9 species were banded north of the Rio Grande River in the San Luis Valley in 1967. Th.is total is less than that for 1966, largely because of the absence of mountain banding in 1967. Mallards constituted 1,639 of the total, with pintails and teals contributing most of the remaining total. Winter Duck Banding in Eastern Co1orado.--Mallard banding was cont Inued in eastern Colorado during the winter of 1967-68 following the close of the hunting season. This was the fifth consecutive year for gathering data on �Table 1.--Number of ducks banded by species and location~ 1967-68. Location Cache la South North Poudre Platte Bonny Arkansas Species Park Valley Valley Reservoir Valley 1,093 1,000 4,078 990 San Luis Valley Totals 1,639 9,036 19 25 3 106 Mallard 236 Gadwall 6 American Widgeon 74 Green-winged Teal 396 67 463 Blue-winged and Cinnamon Teal 84 95 179 Shoveler 1 1 2 Pintail 424 375 808 45 45 2,244 ~10.664 28 1 I-' 3 6 Redhead TOTALS 1.221 _ 1,Q93 ~08~ __ 1,0o_0_. _1,021 0 �-11 - mallard flocks wintering on the plains. Once again our banding 1,000 mallards in each of seven study areas. quota was Nearly 7,200 mallards were banded during this post-season program (Table 1). Few birds of other species were available for trapping and banding. Federal personnel assisted in the banding operation in two of the seven study areas. The winter mallard banding program is reported in detail as a separate Job Completion Report entitled "Investigation of Mallard Management Units of Eastern Colorado" (Work Plan 3, Job 6). Geese Summer and winter goose trapping during Segment 13 (1967-68) resulted in the banding of a total of 2,115 Canada geese and one snow goose (Table 2). The Arkansas Valley, with winter banding only, contributed almost onehalf of this total with 921 birds. The Cache la Poudre Valley was next most important with 725 geese banded. Summer Banding.--Summer operations consisted of banding goslings and molting adults of our resident flock and geese to be transported and released in various parts of the State. Bandings during this period of the year totaled 715 (Table 2). Nearly 250 locals and molting adults were banded from our resident flock in the Fort Collins area of the Cache la Poudre Valley. College Terry, and Watson lakes each contributed to this sample. One hundred and seventy-six (176) goslings were taken from the resident flock at Fort Collins and banded, transported, and released in the South Platte Valley near Longmont. These birds were transplanted to augment the establishment of a resident flock in that area. About 270 goslings and adults were trapped from the flock at the Denver City Park. All adults were banded and shipped immediately to Monte Vista National Wildlife Refuge where they were wing-clipped and penned for future release on the refuge. The goslings were taken to the Fort Collins Wildlife Research Station and hand-reared. Prior to flying age, the goslings were banded, transported, and released at the Alamosa National Wildlife Refuge in the San Luis Valley. Twenty-five goslings were hatched from eggs collected on the Yampa and Little Snake rivers in northwestern Colorado. They were hand-reared, banded, transported, and released in Horsethief Canyon of the Colorado River west of Grand Junction. �- 12 - Winter Banding.--The winte~ goose banding program resulted in the placement of bands ort1,400 Canada geese and one snow goose. The Arkansas. Valley contributed 921 of this total. Birds in this area belong to the Short Grass Prairie Canada Goose Population. The rema~ning 480 Canada geese were banded in the Cache la Poudre Valley near Fort Collins. Resident geese were represented in this sample, but-most of these 480 birds were members of the High-line Goose Population. Table 2.--Number of Canada geese banded by location and season of year. 1967-68. Number Banded Total Winter Location Summer -I, Arkansas Valley Cache la Poudre Valley South Platte Valley San Luis Valley Colorado River 245 176 269 25 TOTALS 715 921 480 921 725 176 269 25 1 401 2 116 Includes one snow goose. Prepared by Richard M. Hopper Wildlife Researcher �October, 1968 - 13 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT S ta t e 0 f _..-:::C..:::O.::;:L..:::O=.:;RAD::=,.O.;:;.,...-. _ Project No. W--88-R-13 Migratory Bird Investigations Job No. Work Plan No. 1 Title of Job: Analysis Period Covered: April 1, 1967 to March 31, 1968 of Waterfowl 3 Banding Data Findings: This is a negative report. Work on other project jobs left no time to devote to this one. It is hoped that an updated deck of IBM recovery cards can be obtained from the banding office next segment. If time allows, this analysis will be initiated then. Prepared by Richard M. Hopper ~i1dlife Researcher �- 14 - Objectives: To analyze recoveries. from all species of waterfowl in North Park to determine: (1) Distribution of recoveries between years by species and age class. (2) Annual mortality (3) Differences in annual mort?lity various species. Techniques geographic banded areas between of each species of waterfowl. between age classes of the Used: (la) Compare distribution of recoveries between years by species. between geographic areas (lb) Compare distribution' of recoveries between geographic between years by age class for each species. areas (2) Calculate annual mortality for each species of waterfowl the "composite dynamic" mortality analysis method. (3a) Calculate waterfowl (3b) Compare annual mortality of waterfowl. using annual mortality by age class for each species of using the·"composite dynamic" mortality analysis method. between age classes for each species �October~ 1968 - 15 - JOB PROGRESS REPORT RESEARCH PROJ-EC'I' SEGMENT State of COLORADO --------~~~~~------------- Project No. Wm'k Plan No. w-88-R-13 1 TLtle of Job: Period Covered: ¥ugratory Bird Investigation Job No. 5 Waterfowl Kill Survey 1967 Objectives: To estimate the state harvest of waterfowl for the 1967-68 hunting season by species, country,and intervals of the season. Methods: Techniques wer-esimilar to those used in the past with hunters' names drawn in a mechanical random fashion from duplicate license stubs of current license sales. One follow-up was sent to non-reporting hunters after an interval of two to three weeks . The questionnaire generally r-emaIned the same in form and context as last year. Questionnaires were sent to 12,100 randomly selected license buyers in 1967 and a total of 7,330 responded for a return of 60.6 per cent, the lowest since the survey started. Of the 7,330 returns, 3,673 reported hunting, 3,487 bought a license but did hot hunt, and 170 were not usable. Most of the hunters not hunting were f'ound, to have purchased a combination hunting and fishing lieense which was used for fishing only. Thus, of the total license sales of 186,695 during 1967, it is estimated that 98,618 hunters hunt.ed one or more species of small game. This is a decrease in the number of hun ber-s (114,492) estimated for 1966, but above the 89,257 estimated in 1965· ��- 17 - WATERFOWL KILL SURVEY Jack R. Grieb ~I Colorado duck stamp sales are plotted in Table 1 revealing that the 1967 sale of 31,064 was larger than the previous year. In fact, this is the most duck stamps sold since 1960, the beginning of the decrease in continental duck populations. Table 1 -- Duck Stamp Sales for Colorado Year Number of Stamps Sold 1954 1955 1956 1957 1958 1959 1960 1961 1962 1963 1964 1965 1966 1967 32,450 39,107 36,303· 41,794 41,897 31,431 30,592 24,854 17,701 22,940 25,282 20,537. 29,377< 31,064 Per Cent Change F-rom Previous Year + 20·5 + 20·5 7·2· + 15·1 + .02 - 24.0 2·7 - 18.8 - 28.8 + 29·6 + 10.2 - 18.8 + 43·0 + 5·7 ============================================================================= Table 2 classifies Duck Stamp buyers by the type of hunting in which they ~ngaged for the past 14 years. Thus, it appears that number of duck hunters were highest since 1960 while goose hunters were about average. There appeared to be an increase in days hunted for both ducks and geese over previous years. Duck Harvest Hunting statistics of the 1967 season are tabulated and compared with past years in Table 3. This reveals that total estimated retrieved kill of 156,730 was sigrlificantly greater than the previous year and largest since 1960. The reason harvest increased so strongly was due to an increase in hunters as a result of relaxed hunting regulations, favorable publicity, and special seasons which offered a variety of hunting opportunity this past fall. In addition, it was estimated that 23,184 birds were crippled for a wounding loss of 12·9 per cent permitting an estimated total hunting mortality of 179,914 ducks for 1967 in Colorado. J::/ Leader, F d.eralAi.d Waterfowl Project, w-88-R. Job 5. Work carried under Plan I, �- 18 - 'I~'a b Le .2.-- Estimated Number of Duck and Goose Hunters, Average Number of Days Hunted and Season Length, by Year. Year Number of Duck Hunters Number of Goose Hunters Average Number Days Hunted for 'Ducks Geese Season Length (days) Ducks Geese Bag and Possession Limit Ducks ---Geese 1954 1955 1956 1957 1958 1959 1960 1961 1962 1963 1964 1965 1966 1967 31,834 37,8H~ 34,793 37,166 38,773 29,060 29,48,0 2 ,920. 13,918 17,989 19,189 l5,37Lt 23,635 25,347 12,136 17,63lj. 12,477 12,057 14,705 13,64'7 14,107 11,245. 9,159 10,841 13,678 11,344 15,807 13,748 7.64 60 75 75 75 90 50 60 30 25 1/ 35 1/ 5-10 5-10 5-10 4-8 4-8 3-6 3-6 2-4 4/ 4-8 "2/ 60 8.87 7·37 6.52 5·78 5·70 6.05 4.40 5·27 5.66 6.30 5·62 5·96 6.49 6.64 7 ·37 5·53 6.25 6.43 40 II 36 II 60 II 60 II 5-10 60 60 60 60 75 75 60 75 75 75 75 75 75 2-2 4-8 21 4-8 "31 3-6 21 3-6 JJ 2-2 2-2 2-2 2-2 2-2 2-2 2-~~ 2-2 2-2 2-2 2-2 2-2 2-2 =============================================================================== ~ Hunting regulations for East Slope. West Slope had.a general season of 75 days with 4 ducks in bag, and 8 in possession in 1962, and 90 days, 4 in bag and 8 in possession in 1963, 1964, and 1965; and 90 days 5 in bag and 10 in possession in 1966 and 1967. ?i Two mallards allowed in bag, and four in possession on East Slope. 11 One mallard and.pintail allowed in bag and two in possession on East Slope, three mallards or three pintails on West Slope. ~I One mallard Ln bag and two in possession on East Slope. Spec Le s composition of the 1967 bag is listed Ln 'I'able4· and compared with the average of the thirteen previous years. These data ind.icate that total duck harvest was about 9 per cent greater than the thirteen-year average. The mallard remains the most common species taken with the green-winged teal next. �- 19 - Table 3 -- Duck Harvest Statistics, 1954 - 1967· Date Number of Hunters Average Seasonal Bag Total Estimated Harvest Wounding Percent Loss Number Total Estimated Hunting ~ Mortality 31,834 37,816 34,793 37,166 38,773 29,060 29,480 22,920 5·6 6·7 5·9 6.8 6.1 4.2 5·0 3·8 179,856 253,367 185,737 254,587 236,515 122,924 147,400 86,408 14.5 13·1 16.3 14.1 12·3 15·5 13·1 21.4 30,396 38,182 36,195 41,679 33,088 22,417 22,257 23,608 210,252 291,549 221,932 296,266 269,603 145,341 169,667 110,016 East West 11,349 2,569 29,507 -,8)992 13·5 11.<1 4,603 1,187 34,110 10,179 TOTAL 13,918 2.6 3·5 2.8 38,499 13·1 5,790 44,289 East West TOTAL 15,627 2,362 17,989 5·1 3.6 4.9 80,167 8,503 88,670, 10·7 9·7 10.6 9,636 916 10,552 89,803 9,419 99,222 East West 16,311 2,878 4.0 4.0 65,244 11,512 10.6 10.4 7,764 1,335 73,008 12,841 TOTAL 19,189 4.0 76,756 10.6 9,099 85,855 East We~t 12,747 2,627 64,245 11,322 15,374 18·7 15·4 18.2 12,007 1,744 TOTAL 5·0 4.3 4.9 13,751 76,252 13,066 89,318 ' East West 19,494 4,141 5·0 4.4 16.4 20.4 19,278 4,715 117,138 . 23,060 TOTAL 23,635 4.9 . 97,860 18,345 116,205- 17·1 23,993 140,198 East West 22,432 2,915 25,347 6·5 3·7 6.2 146,032. 10,698 156,730 12.0 22·9 12·9 20,006 3,178 23,184 166,038 13,876 179,914 Slope 1954 1955 1956 1957 1958 1959 1960 1961 1962 1963 1964 1965 1966 1967 TOTAL 75,567 ! ========================================================================~~=== �- 20 - .. Table 4 -- Species Composition of th~ bag. Number Killed %of Total 13-Year Average 1954 - 1966 Number % of Killed 'I'otal Mallard Pintail Green-wing Teal Blue-wing Teal Baldpate Gadwall Shoveller Scaup Redhead Canvasback Others and Unknown 104,249 6,254 15,932 7,608 3,146 5,742 2,504 1,168 1,838 2,322 5,961- 66·5 4.0r 10.2 4·9 2.0 3·7 1.6 ·7 1.2 1.5 3·7 97,121 4,805 13,100 5,551 1,613 4,133 1,656 1,145 1.1086 918 12,519 67·6 3·3 9·1 3·9 1.1 2·9 1.2 .8 .8 .6 8·7 + 7·3 + 30.2 + 21.6 + 37·1 + 95·0 + 38·9 + 51.2 + 2.0 + 69.2 TOTALS 156,730, 100.0 143,647 100.0 + 1967 Species % Change 1967 From 13-.Year. Average Harvest +152·9 - 52·3 9·1 ============================================================================= Comparison of eastern and western slope species composition is made in Table 5 revealing that despite the longer hunting season which began earlier in the fallon the western slope, the mallard made up an even greater per cent of the total harvest there as compared to the east slope. This probably indicates a lack of other species in this area during the entire fall period so that the hunting season, regardless of when set, is bound to place pressure mainly on mallards. Duck kill and hunt.Lng pressure by 10-day intervals of the season for both east and west slopes is tabulated in Table 6. These data show that harvest for the east slope was fa'rly evenly divided over the season intervals indicating that no one part of the season was better than the other. For the west slope, however, major harvest occurred later in the season, Nov. 26 - Jan 4.. It appears that there was also a greater hunting effort during this time, but not enough to account entirely for the harvest increase. Thus the increased harvest ml1st have been due to increased availability of birds and/or favorable weather conditions. �- 21 - Table 5 -- Comparison of Species Composi.tion Between Duck Harvest. Species East Slope Number % of Tot.al Killed East and West Slope West. Slope Number Killed %---of 'l'otal Mallard Pint.ail Green-wing Teal Blue-wing Teal Baldpate Gadwall Shoveller Scaup Canvasback Redhead others and Unknown 96,236 5,987 15,333 7,448 2,921 5,549 2,)+83 1,168 2,044 1,752 5,111 65·9 4.1 10·5 5·1 2.0 3.8 1.7 .8 1.4 1.2 3·5 8,013 267 599 160 225 193 21 74·9 2·5 5·6 1.5 2.1 1.8 .2 ~:78 86 856 2.6 .8 8.0 TOTAL 146,032 100.0 10,698 100.0 ====================:===:.==;.==.;========================::.=:=======~==:=========:=::=::::~::;::==::=:::::: San Luis Valley Experimental Season -- This was the fifth year of an experimental duck hunting season Ln the San Lui.s Valley. R.easons for the season and results have been report.ed in detail elsewhereJ and will not be repeat.ed. However, information gai.ned through this survey on this season will be presented here. Accordi.ng to questionnaire data 2,804 hunt.er-sbagged an esi.Lmat.ed18,253 ducks in t.he San Luis Valley during the experimental season, October 1-18, 1967· This is compared to an estimated 3,255 hunters and 21,275 ret~ieved kill for the previous year. The indication that kill was d.ecreased in 1967 substantiat.es observations made during the season. However, number of hunters is rather meaningless since they refer to successful hunters rather than estimati.ng total hunters. A special report on the experimental Valley hurrt will be provided later. �- 22 - Table 6 -- Ducks Bagged and Hunting Pressure by 10-day Intervals of the 1967 .. Season Estimated Harvest No. of of Ducks Total % Dates Estimated Hunting Pressure No. of of Hunters Total % EAST SLOPE Expt. Teal Season Sept. 9-17 9,491 9·.5 1,503 6·7 San Luis Valley (Special) Oct. 1-18 18,253 12·5 2,804 12·5 Regular Oct. 28-Nov. 9 Nov. 7-16 Nov. 17-26 Nov. 27-Dec. 6 Dec. 7-16 Dec. 17-26 24,385 20,735 21,320 19,421 16,647 15,770 16·7 14.2 14.6 13 ·3 11.4 10.8 5,900 6,146 6,505 5,316 4,599 3,769 26.3 27·4 29·0 23·7 20·5 16.8 10.2 8·7 6.0 9·3 8.8 11.4 12·9 22.4 10·3 598 548 548 912 703 755 729 886 496 20·5 18.8 18.8 31.3 24.1 25·9 25·0 30.4 17·0 WEST SLOPE Oct. 7-16 Oct. 17-26 Oct. 27-Nov. 5 Nov. 6-15 Nov. 16-25 Nov. 26-Dec. 5 Dec. 6-15 Dec. 16-25 Dec. 26-Jan. 4 1,091 931 642 995 941 1,220 1,380 2,396 1,102 ============================================================================== Goose Harvest Hunting statistics of the goose season presented in Table 7 estimate 13,748 hunters bagged an average of 1·7 geese during the season for a total estimated harvest of 23,732 birds. In addition, another 5,773 birds were reported wounded but not retrieved for a wounding loss of 1998 per cent. This permits a total hunting mortality estimate for Colorado during 1967 of 29,145 geese. �- 23 - Table 7 -- Goose Harvest Statistics, 1954 - 1967· Year Number of Hunters Average Seasonal Bag Total Estimated. Harvest W01hYJ.d.ing Lo ss Number Percent Total Estirn.ated. Hunting Mortality 12,136 17,364 11,541 12,057 14,705 13,647 14,107 11,245 0·7 1.9 1.0 1.2 1.3 1.6 1.1 1.-3 8,168 17,711' ll,310 14,589 19,704 21,972 15,659 14,056. 22.8 18.3 21.6 23·5 22·3. 17·8 20·7. 24·5 2,410 3,884 3,116 10,578 21,24814,426 19,062. 25,359 26,70219,746 18,624. East West 8,828 331 1.5 1.3 13,241' 430 19·5. 3,218. TOTAL 9,159 1.5 13,671- ° 19·1 16,459, 430 3,218 16,889 East West 10,462 379 17,785 114 15·2 3,184 . 10,841 17,899. ° 20,969 114 TOTAL 1.7 0·3 1.6 17·8 3,184 21,083 East West 13,295 383 23,931 192 19·0 5,624 13,678 24,123 ° 29,555 19~ TOTAL 1.8 0·5 1.7 18·9 5,624 29,747 . East West 10,941. 403 1.2 1.0 13,239 419 24.6· 27·0 3,257 113 l6,4·96 532 TOTAL 11,344 1.2: 13,658 24·7 3,370 17,028 East West 15,443 364 1.9 1.1 29,613 420 16.2 5,745 87 35,358 507. TOTAL 15,807 1.9 30,033 16.2- 5,832 35,865 East West 13,598 150 13,748 1.7 1.7 1.7 23, ll7 255 23,732 19·8 19·8 19·8 5,710 63 28,827 , 318 5,773 29,145 Slope 1954 1955 1956 1957 1958 1959 1960 1961 1962 1963 1964 1965 1966 1967 TOTAL 4J473 5,655 4,7304,087 4,568 ° 1/ ° ° Ii ° Ii Thirteen-year average goose harvest is 16,312 -- 1954 - 1967· ============================================================================== �- 24 - Species composition of geese killed was similar between all years of the survey being 98 per cent or above Canad.a geese. The remaining percentages were "other and unknown" species of geese J and were probably mainly Canada geese which hunters were not able to correctly identify. It is known that there were a few snow geese taken in Colorado during this hunting season, and an even smaller number of white fronts. The 1967 goose hunting season was characterized by good water and food conditions in the Arkansas Valley during the fall and w'nter periods. Census figures taken at intervals in the Arkansas Valley indi.cateda large number of geese present in Colorado during the season. These birds seemed to be distributed on all water bodies in the Valley with major concentrations in the Two Buttes and Eads Lakes areas. In addition to the Arkansas Va .LeyJ numbers of winterL g geese in the DenverGreeley - Fort Collins area increased sign'ficantly and undoubtedly contributed to the excellent harvest. During the last three years, goose permits, a six bird season limit, and other special regulatlons were established for Larlmer Cou..n.ty.A random sample drawn from the 3,000 permits issued indicated that 744 persons obtalned permits but did not use them, 2,256 hunters hunted geese one or more times bagging 944 geese in Larimer County, 265 birds i Weld County and 37 birds in Boulder County for a total harvest of 1,246, an increase of 5,2% over the 1,184 birds bagged i 1966, Waterfowl Harvest by COl,::nty The reader is cautioned that information presented in this section is subject to a great deal more error in accuracy than estimates ir:. previous sections, since the original sample has been broken down to courrtyJ thus decreasing the size of sample on which to base estimates. This is probably even more true of geese than ducks, because there were many more duck hunters. Consequently, it is realized that in some counties, both duck and goose kill have been over-estimated, and in others, underestimated. However, despite this error, these data represent the most accurate information on this subject possible at the present time. Tables 8 and 9 compare the 1967 duck and goose kill respectively with average of previous seasons, by county, within each waterfowl region. These regional divisions of the State were located on the basis of waterfowl migration., location, and topographyj and permit a closer evaluation of kill, yearly changes in kill, and the effect of different types of In ':Lngseasons on various portions of Colorado. Grossly, it appears that the increase in duck harvest was mainly in the Central Region, This ind'cates that hunters were still not willing to travel to the eastern parts of the State because of the two ma lIar-d l:i.mit. The eastern slope again contributed the bulk of the duck harvest being about. 87% in 1967 which is slmilar to past years. Weld was sgain t.hehigh harvest county. �- 25 - Table 8 - Duck Kill by Region and County. Waterfowl Region and County 1967 Duck Kill Number Killed Per Cent of Total Estimated 1967 Hunting Pressure N~mber Per cent Hunters of Total Thirteen-year Average 1954 - 1967 .. Number Killed Per Cent of Total East Slope NORTHEAST Cheyenne Kit Carson Lincoln Logan Morgan Phillips Sedgwick Washington Yuma NORTHEAST TOTAL 146 2,482 146 5,84112,413' 0.1 1.7 0.1 4.0 8·5 67 134 67 1,099 1,793 0·3 0.6 876 1,752 2,921 0.6 1.2 2.0 449 404 516 26,577 18.2 4,530 2.0 1.8 2·3 20.2 0.3 4·9 8.0 479 1,589 1,108 0·3 1.0 0·7 5·0 6.6 0.1 2·9 1.5 2·3 7J337 9,598 206 4,008 2,197 3 348 29,870 ============================================================================== SOUTHEAST Baca Bent Crowley Huerfano Kiowa, l,asAnimas Otero Prowers Pueblo 876 0.6 179 2,628 1.8 605 2,336 1.6 426 146 0.1 46 1,022 0.7 179 584 0.4 179 1,460 1.0 449 2,482 1.7 449 ~3~,2~1~5~ ~2~._2 4~26~ SOUTHEAST TOTAL 14,749 10.1 2,938 0.8 1,308 2.7' 3,176 1.9. 2,989 .2 659 0.8 1,642 0.8 1,143 2.0 1,897 2.0 4,112 ~1~.9~ __~3~,~2~8~9 13·1 20,215 0·9 2.2 2.0 0.4 1.1 0.8 1·3 2.9 ~2_.~2 .============================================================================= CENTRAL Adams Arapahoe Boulder Douglas Elbert El Paso -Jefferson Larimer Weld CENTRAL TOTAL 6,133 5,403 11,098 584 146 1,460 1,022 14,603 41,475 4.2 3·7 7·6 0.4 0.1 1,278 920 1,27@ 45 5·7 4.1 5·7 0.2 22- 0.1 1.0 1.3 0.4- 292 90 0·7 10.0, 2,512 28.4 5,384 24.0 11,821 52·7 56.1 11.2 7,448 1,707 7,807 156 296 1,062 1,483 11,424 28,094 ====================================:========'=======.::::::=========:========:====:====== 5·1 1.2 5·3 0.1 0.2 0·7 1.0 7·8 19·4 �- 26 - Table 8 - Duck Kill by Region and County (continued) 1967 Duck Kill Estimated 1967 Hunting Pressure Number Per Cent Hunters of Total Waterfowl Region and County Number Killed Per Cent of Total SAN LUIS VALLEY Alamosa Conejos Costilla Rio Grande Saguache 8,324 1,752 2,33,6 6,133 3,339 5·7 1.2 1.6 4.2 2·3 1,077 269 314 1,875 381 SAN LUIS VALLEY TOTAL 21,904 15·0 2,916 Thirteen-year Average 1954-1967 Number Killed Per Cent of Total- 4.8 1.2 1.4 3·9 1.7 3,961 2,327 712 4,980 3,676 3·2 1.6 0.6 4.0 2·9 13·0 15,657 12·3 ============================================================================== HIGH COUNTRY Chaffee Clear Cre,ek Custer Fremont Gilpin Jackson Lake Park Teller HIGH COUNTRY TOTAL 145 146 146 292 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.2 22 22 22 136 0.1 0.], 0.1 0.6 466 89 295 855 0·3 0.1 0.2 0.8 146 0.1 22 0.1 179 148 250 38 0.1 0.1 0.2 0.0 876 0.6 224 1.0 2,320 , 1.8 ============================================================================== West Slope NORTHWEST Garfield Moffat Rio Blanco Routt NORTHWEST TOTAL 406 342 267 96 1,111 3·8 3·2 2·5 0·9 10.4 184 76 105 105 470 6·3 2.63·6 3·6 16.1 1,536 526 706 829 3,597 8.6 2.8 3·9 4·7 20.0 ============================================================================== WEST CENTRAL Delta Mesa Montrose Ouray 2,717 2,846 1,241 25·4 26.6 11.6 597 652 417 20·5 22·3 11.6 W. CENTRAL TOTAL 6,804 63·6 1,166 63.6 2,870 4,492 2,465 181 10,008 ======================:======================================================== 15·4 24·3 13·3 1.0 54.0 ,) �- 27 - Table 8 --Duck Kill by Region and County (continued) Waterfowl Region and County SOUTHWEST Archuleta Dolores Hinsdale I.a Plata Mineral Montez\lma San Juan San Miguel SOUTHWEST TOTAL 1967 Duck Kill Number Killed Per Cent of Total Estimated 1967 Thirt.een-year Average 1954-1967 .. Hunting Pressure Per Cent Per Cent Number Number of Total of Total Killed Hunters 107 460 1.0 4·3 26 157 0·9 5·4 325 2.2 105 3·6 96 0·9 8.4 52 1.8 133 26 42 1,453 101 75'9 9 181 340 11.7 2,704 899 0.6 0.1 0.2 8.2 0.6 4·3 0.0 1.0 . 15·0 \ =============================================================================== HIGH COlJ-:NTRY Eagle Grand Gunnison Pitkin Summit 138 1,401 75 192 85 1.2 13·1 0·7 1.8 0.8 26 259 52 76 26 0·9 8·9 1.8 2.6 0·9 770 406 517 245 72 4.2 2.2 2.8 1.3 0·5 HIGH COUNTRY TOTAL 1,884 17·6 439 15·1 2,010 11.0. =============================================================================== Summary by Region NORTHEAST 26,577 SOUTHEAST 14,749 81,924 CENTRAL SAN LUIS VALLEY 21,904 876 HIGH COUNTRY (E) 1,111 NORTHWEST 6,804 WEST CENTRAL SOUTHWEST 899HIGH COlThl-WY(W) 1,884 16,9 9·4 52.3 13·9 0.6 0·7 4.3 0.6 1.2 4,530 2,938 11,821 2,916 224 470 1,666 340 439 17·8 11.6 46·7 11.5 0·9 1.8 6.6 1.3 1.7 29,870 20,215 59,477 15,657 2,320 3,597 10,008 2,704 2,010 ' 20,4 13.8 40.810.8 1.6 2·5 6·9 1.8 1.4 TOTAL ·OF REGIONS 100.0 25,347 100.0 145,857 100.0 156,730, =============================================================================== EAST SLOPE WEST SLOPE 1~,6,032 10,698 87·7 12·3 22,432 2,915 88·5 11.5 127 J 536 18,321 87·4 12.6 ======~======================================================================== �- 28 - Table 9 -- Goose Kill by Region and County. Waterfowl Region and County 1967 Goose Kill Number Killed Per Cent of Total Estimated 1967 Hunting Pressure Number Per Cent Hunters of Total Thirteen-year Average 1954-1966 Number Killed Per Cent 'of'Total East Slope NORTHEAST Cheyenne Kit Carson Lincolr). Logan Morgan Phillips Sedgewick Washington Yuma NORTHEAST TOTAL 46 624 0.2 2·7 27 109 857 0.2 0.8 6·3 14 33 8 136 545 347 23 1,040 1.5 0.1 4·5 117 54 1,224 1.3 0.4 9·0 47 99 99 983 0.0 0.2 0.0 0·9 3·5 0.2 0.6 0.6 6.0 =============================================================================== SOUTHEAST :&lca Bent CrowleJ Huerfano Kiowa Las Animas Otero Prowers' Pueblo SOU'rHEAST TOTAL 7,144 3,745 1,017 30·9 16.2 4.4 2,461 1,550 693 18.1 11.4 5·1 2,427 23 139 901,' 162 15,558 10.,5 0.1 0.6 3·9 0·7 67·3 1,115 109 136 802 109 6,975 8.2 0.8 1.0 5·9 0.8 51.3 5,130 1,695 710 131 2,898 112 273 2,208 183 13,340 31.2 10·3 4·3 0.8 17.6 0·7 1.7 13··5 1.1 8r.2 =============================================================================== CE1TTRAL Adams Arapahoe Boulder Douglas Elbert El Paso Jefferson Larimer Weld CENTRAL TOTAL 324 1.4 46 46 231 3,075 2,219 5,941 0.2 0.2 367 285 109 27 2·7 2.1 0.8 0.2 1.0 13·3 9,·6 25·7 109 2,164 1,890 4,951 0.8 15·9 13 ·9 36.4 310 134 55 3 6 8 154414 709 1,793 =============================================================================== 1.9 0.8 0·3 0.0 0.0 0.0 0·9 2·5 4.4 10.8 �- 29 - Table 9 -- Goose Kill by R.egion and County (continued) Estimated 1967 Hunting Pressure 1967 Goose Ki.ll Waterfowl :Number Per Cent :Number Per Cent Region Hunters of Total and Country Killed of Total SAN LUIS VALLEY Alamosa Conejos Costilla Rio Grande Saguache SA..WLUIS VALlE! 'l'OTAL Thirteen-year Average 1954-1966 Per Cent :Number of Total Killed. 231 162 1.0 0·7 67 150 150 0·5 1.1 1.0 5 147 120 2 2 0,0 1.0 0·7 0.0 0.0 393 1.7 367 2·7 276 1.7 =============================================================================== (EAST) HIGH COu"N'ffiY Chaffee Clear Creek Custer Fremont Gilpin Jackson lake Park Teller J-LGH C O1JN'l"Kf TOTAL 162 23 1S5' 0·7 0.1 O.S 54 27 Sl 0.4 0.2 0.6 19 0.1 19 0.1 3 0.0 1 0.0 42 .2 =====:=::::=====;===================================================================== West Slope NOR1"HWEST Ga:cfield Moffat Rio Blanco Routt 234 91. 7 100 25 NORTHWEST TOTAL 234 91. 7 125, 1 66.S 16.6 77 0.0 41. 7 41.7 ==:=========================:======================================================:= WEST CEN'I~ 0.0 1 Delta 0.0 1 Me sa 0.2 2 Mont.rose Ouray TOTAL W. CENil'P..AL 4 ~=:;=:::::================:=:======:==================================================== 0.2 �- 30 Table 9 -- Goose Kill Region and County (continued). Waterfowl Region and County 1967 Goose Kill .l\fumber. Killed Per Cent of Total Estimat.ed 1967 Hunting Pressure Number Per Cent Hunters of Total Thirteen-year Average 1954":1966. Number Killed Per Cent of Total , .... SOUTHWEST Archuleta Dolores Hinsdale La Plata Mineral Montezuma San Juan San Miguel 21 25 16.6 3 0.0 SOUTHWEST TOTAL 21 25 16.6 3 0.0 =============================================================================== HIGH COUNTRY (WEST) Eagle Grand Gunnison Pitkin Summit HIGH COlJNTRY TOTAL =============================================================================== Summary by Region NORTHEAST 1,040 SOUTHEAST 15,558 CENTRAL 5,941 SA-1\[ LUIS VALLEY 393 HIGH COUNTRY (E) 185 NORTHWEST 234 WEST CENTRAL SOlJ'I'HWEST 21 HIGH COUNTRY (W) 4.4 66.6 25·4 1.7 0.8 1.0 1,224 6,975 4,951 367 81 125 8·9 50·7 36.0 2·7 0.6 0·9 0.1 25 0.2 TOTAL OF REGIONS 100.0 13,748 100.0 23,372 983 13,340 1,793 276 42 90 .4 3 18 5·9 80.2 10.8 1.7 0.2 0·5 0.2 0.0 0.1 16,549 100.0 =============================================================================== EAST SLOPE WEST SLOPE 23,117 255 98.8 1.2 13,598 150 16,362 187 =============================================================================== '" �- 31 - The 1967 goose harvest compared.to the thirteen-year average in Table 9 shows that total harvest was c~onsiderablyabove the average. Also, that the Southeast Region accounted for more than 80 per cent of the total goose bag, with Baca, Kiowa, Bent and Prowers the top harvest counties, in that order. WaterfovrlManagement Unj,ts Again this year, harvest information has been gathered on the basis of waterfowl management units (Figure 1). The purpose of this is a better alignment of data to provide information about speci.ficflocks of ducks and geese. For example Unit 1 compasses the area utilized by wintering ducks at Jumbo Re se r> voir, Unit 5 is North Park, and Unit 15 is the San Luis Valley. In many cases duck or goose flock boundaries transcend county lines and it has been difficult to put together county Lnf'or-ma.t.Lon so that we could look at the influence of hunting pressure and harvest on separate flocks. Naturally, we hope that management units will solve this problem. Results are tabulated in Table 10 and are offered.without further comment at this time. Table 10 -- Estimated Waterfowl Hunters and Harvest by Management Unit, 1967· Ducks Management Unit Hunters No. % Bag No. % Geese Hunters No=- Bag 3~..__!~_. j=. East Slope 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Totals 1,346 5·31 5,841 3·72 1,189 4.69 7,594 4.84 4,195 16·57 26,725 17·07 2,826 11.14 17,232 10.99 112 0.44 438 0.27 5,385' 21.26 41,619 26.58 247 0.98 1,460 0.93 426' 1.68' 2,336 1.49 605, 2.38 4,235' 2·70 718 2.83 3,359 2.14 336 1·32 1,022 0.6~ 1,122 4.42 5,549 3.54' 628 2.47 4,089 2.60 224 0.88 730 0.46 -=3~,0_7~3~ __1_2_._1_2 2~3~,~8_0~3~ 1~5.20 22,432 88.49 146,032 93.18 2,203 27 1,210 1.38 3.06 15·74 16.03 0.19 8.80 54 54 1,536 2,789 2,136 503 54 258 0.39 0·39 11.1720·30 15.54 3.65 0·39 1.88 46 185 2,890 7,699 3,953 1,063 13,598 98·91 23,117 190 421 2J163 624 2,612 2,335 23 1,410 2.66 11.18 0.19 0·79 12.38 32.96 16·91 4·54 9·99 .09 6.03 277 l.18 ,----~------------~~--~~ 98·90 ========================:======================================================== West Slope 16 GRAND TOTALS 2,915 11·51 10,698 6.82 150 25,347 100,.0 156,730 100.0 13,748 ,1.09 100.0 255 1.Q2 23,372 100.0 ====~=-========================================================================= ��October, 1968 - 33 JOB PROGRESS RESEARCH State of. Project ~CO~L~O~RA~D~O~ No. Title of Job: Period Covered: ;l~ SEGMENT _ ·W~-8~8~-_1~3~ ~ __ Work Plan No. Personnel: PROJECT REPORT Migratory Job No .. --- San Luis Valley Cooperative April 1, 1967 to March Mallard Bird Investigations 1:;;...2=-------:---....,.-Investigation 31, 1968 Charles Hayes, Jack Randall, Dale Horne, Bureau of Sport Fisheries and Wildlife; Wayne Russell, William Rutherford, Howard Funk, Errol Ryland, Donald Benson, Dick MacDonald, Lyle Bennett, Ken Dillenger, Gordon East, Mike Stone, Larry Green, John Monarch, Tom Kitzmiller, and Richard Hopper, Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Division. Abstract The 1967 aerial breeding-pair survey for the San Luis Valley, corrected by air-ground comparison data, and stratified on the basis of high and low concentration areas, resulted in an estimated 29,143 pairs of ducks (15,502 mallard pairs). Thi$ represents an increase in all species of about 5,200 pairs over 1966, with mallards reaching their highest numbers since initiation of the study in 1964. Sampling er.ror was lower in 1967 than in previous years, with a ± 21.9 percent. The breeding population of the high country was estimated at 3,273 pairs, with. mallards contributing 2,015 pairs. Total number of pairs in 1967 was much higher than that estimated for 1966 (2,316). Likewise, mallards were up about 850 pairs over 1966. Sampling error was a low ± 1.2 percent. Colorado personnel assisted in banding 2,244 ducks during the pre-season banding operation. Mallards contributed 1,639 of the total. Colorado personnel also conducted about 30 hunter performance checks during the October 1-18 hunting season. �- 34 - Objectives: To evaluate the effects of hunting pressure on the local population of mallards breeding in the San Luis Valley. Colorado's part of this study was covered under the following sub-objectives: (1) Determine the size of the breeding population in the San Luis Valley. (2). Determine the size of the breeding population in the high altitude country west of the Valley. (3) Assist in gathering harvest information during the special waterfowl hunting season. Procedures: Procedures followed in the investigation are similar to those in the past and are listed under the major sections in the body of the report. �- 35 - SAN LUIS VALLEY COOPERATIVE MALLARD INVESTIGATION Richard M. Hopper The year 1967 marked the fourth 'consecutive year of the cooperative mallard study in the San Luis Valley between the Colorado Division of Game, Fish and Parks and the Bureau of Sport Fisheries and Wildlife. The objectives stated here are those for which the Colorado Division had primary responsibility in 1967. Only results related to these objectives are presented in this report. A report covering all phases of the study will appear later in 1968 as an Administrative Report prepared by members of both agencies and distributed by the Bureau of Sport Fisheries and Wildlife, Branch of Wildlife Research, Migratory Bird Populations Station. Breeding Population Survey of the Valley Floor History of the San Luis Valley breeding population and methods for estimating breeding-pair numbers prior to the initiation of the cooperative study in 1964 have been presented in earlier reports and need not be repeated here (Grieb and Ballou, 1963; Ballou et al., 1964; Grieb et al., 1965). Some changes have occurred in the breeding population survey each y~ar in an effort to further refine our estimates and to obtain the best possible evaluation of the experimental hunting seasons. Procedures: Techniques for conducting the 1967 breeding population survey remained the same as in 1966 (see Hopper and Rutherford, 1967 for details). A summary of techniques used is presented below: (1) The regular breeding population survey was stratified according to high and low waterfowl concentration areas. The sample of the low concent:ration area consisted of 50 regular air transects totaling 914 linear miles and yielding a sample size of 17.95 percent. (2) High concentration areas included Monte Vista National Wildlife Refuge, Russell Lakes, Mishak Lakes, San Luis Lakes, and Adams Lake. The Refuge breeding population was determined from nesting transect data collected by Refuge personnel. These transects, constituting a 5.5 percent sample, were covered once in May and once in June. Nests "unknown" as to species, were first distributed according to the species composition of the "known" nests for each coverage. Numbers of "unknown" hatched nests were distributed in the same manner. Then, the following formula was used to obtain the estimated number of breeding pairs by species on the Refuge: MN + ((IN) - (MN - MHNU= 5.5 no. of breeding pairs on Refuge �- 36 - Where: MN = no. of nests found on transect during May coverage IN = no. of nests found on transect during June coverage MHN= no. of May nests that hatched 5.5= percent sample size Four regular air transects totaling 8 linear miles were covered on Russell Lakes, producing a sample size of 33.33 percent. Complete counts were made of Mishak Lakes, San Luis Lakes, and Adams Lake. (3) Air-ground comparison studies were conducted on 26 transects totaling 122.5 linear miles. These were all located in the low waterfowl concentration area. Both air and ground counts were made on these transects. (4) Birds unidentified as to species were eliminated from aerial counts of airground comparison and regular air transects. This means that if we obtained a visibility ratio of 0.35 for the mallard using this method, then we would say that the air crew identified, as mallards, 35 percent of the mallards actually present. This method removes the possible bias of distributing unidentified birds according to the percentage species composition of the identified birds. Also, fewer calculations are needed to yield the necessary estimates, thereby reducing time spent and chances of making mathematical errors. Results: Air-Ground Comparison Study--Air and ground counts of the air-ground compa!ison transects are compared by species in Table 1. These visibility ratios were used to correct regular air transect counts to obtain estimates of total breeding pairs for the low concentration area and for Russell Lakes. Aerial Breeding-Pair Inventory--Table 2 presents size, sampling intensity, and estimated breeding pairs for the six areas included in the 1967 survey. Estimates for 1964-66 are also shown for comparison. The 1967 breeding population of ducks was estimated to be 29,143 pairs for the entire Valley floor. This figure represents a considerable increase over 1965 (22,802) and 1966 (23,964), but is somewhat less than the high year of 1964 (32,762). Monte Vista Refuge and Russell Lakes were characterized by fewer breeding pairs in 1967 than in 1966. This situation was reversed in the remainder of the Valley for the two years. Water conditions were better in 1967 and breeding ducks tended to disperse themselves better than in the drier year of 1966 when birds concentrated on permanent water areas including Monte Vista Refuge and Russell Lakes. Table 3 lists the species composition of the 1967 breeding population for the San Luis Valley. Figures for 1964-66 are included for comparison. �- 37 - Table l.--Air-ground comparison of ducks counted on 122.5 miles of transect in the low waterfowl concentration area of the Vallelz 1967. Proportion Estimated Breeding Pairs Indentified Air Ground From the Air Percent Pairs Percent Pairs S{!ecies 0.398 219 60.3 55.0 551 Mallard 0.359 37 10.2 10.4 104 Gadwall 1.1 1.1 0.364 11 4 American Widgeon 25 0.347 6.9 72 7.2 Green-winged Teal 0.336 10.7 116 11.6 39 Blue-winged and Cinnamon Teal 1.4 0.106 47 4.7 5 Shoveler 0.323 21 5.8 65 6.5 Pintail 0.360 2.5 2.5 9 25 Redhead 1.1 1.0 0.400, 4 10 Other Divers 0.363 363 100.0 1 001 100.0 Totals Table 2.--Breeding pairs by density type as estimated from the San Luis Valley regular air transects, and nesting transectsz 1964-67. Estimated Breeding Pairs 17 Sq. Miles Percent 1964 1965 1966 1967 Habitat Sample Type 22 5.50 3,944 3,000 3,964 3,509 Monte Vista NWR 1,452 689 1,440 828 Russell Lakes 6 33.33 San Luis Lakes 60 105 86 7 100.00 Mishak Lakes 4 100.00 187 338 532 1 100.00 ' Adams Lake 6 17 18,866 18, III 24z 171 Remainder of Valley 1,265 17.95 27 ,366 Totals 1,305 17.80 32,762 22,802 23,964 29,143 Determined from nesting transects on Monte Vista National Wildlife Refuge and from aerial transects on all other areas. lJ �Table 3.--S2ecies com2osition of the San Luis Va11el breedin~ E02u1ation~ 1964-67. 1964 1965 1966 ecies Pairs % Pairs % Pairs % S2 Mallard 14,319 43.7 11,177 49.1 13,064 54.5 Gadwall 1,660 5.1 2,779 12.2 2,340 9.8 Pintail 7,531 23.0 1,878 8.2 2,644 11.0 American widgeon 93 0.3 88 0.4 0 0.0 1.7 Green-winged teal 263 0.8 1,981 8.7 409 Blue-winged and ·cinnamon teal 2,337 7.1 3;249 14.2 1,719 7.2 Shoveler 1,030 3.1 978 4.3 1,788 7.5 Redhead 5,017 15.3 667 2.9 1,448 6.0 1.6 Other DiverJI 512 5 ---552 2.3 Totals 32,762 100.0 22,802 100.0 23,964 100.0 + 31.0 % + .05 Standard Error 11 + 28.0 % + 23.4 % 11 Includes lesser scaup, canvasback, ruddy duck, and common merganser. 11 Excluding Monte Vista NWR. 1967 Pairs % 15~502 53.2 3,115 10.6 3,085 10.6 157 0.5 2,100 7.2 2,905 10.0 1,503 5.2 455 1.6 1.1 321 29,143 100.0 + 20.9 % LV 0:> �- 39 - The mallard, as in past years, was the dominant species in 1967, contributing about 53 percent of the total estimated breeding population. The estimated number of mallard breeding pairs for 1967 (15,502) was the highest since initiation of the study in 1964.. Two consecutive years of good mallard produc~ion in the Valley prior to 1967 (1965-1966)probably accounted for this increase. Gadwalls, pintails, and the three ~pecies of teal also showed substantial increases in breeding numbers in 1967. while shovelers and redheads were down from 1966. Sampling error in 1967, calculated at + 20.9 percent, was the lowest since the beginning of the study. This error (t .05 standard error) has gradually decreased each year as a result of stratifying the sample into high and low waterfowl concentration areas. Recommendations: Sampling error now appears to be within allowable limits and little more can be done to stratify the sample and reduce the error. Therefore, techniques used during the 1967 breeding-pair survey should be applied to the 1968 survey. Pre-Season Duck Banding Pre-season banding continued to be a major data collecting activity neces~ary in properly evaluating the results of the experimental hunting season in the San Luis Valley. Flying adult and immature ducks were trapped and banded from mid-August to mid-September, with emphasis placed on mallards. Quotas were again set at 1,000 mallards of each age and sex class, amounting to a goal of 4,000 for the Valley floor as a Whole. No quotas were established for other species. State personnel and Federal Game Agents were assigned to band onehalf of the mallard quota north of the Rio Grande River, and refuge personnel were responsible for the other one-half south of the river. Procedures: Salt Plains bait traps were employed to.capture ducks on all major duck concentration areas. Barley was used as bait. ' Results: Nearly 2,250 ducks of 9 species were banded in the northern one-half of the Valley (Table 5). Mallards made up the largest portion of the total with 1,639. Only the adult male quota was reached in the northern portion of the Valley. In contrast, the adult male quota was the only one not reached in 1966. Immature females were the most difficult to obtain in 1967. The pintail, as in 1966, was the next most numerous species banded in 1967, with 375. Recommendations: Pre-season mallard banding should be retained as an important phase of the overall investigation in 1968. This activity should again begin about mid-August and continue through mid-September. This phase of the study will, of course, depend upon the existence of a:p.experimental duck hunting season in 1968. Harvest Information State personnel helped gather hunter and harvest data during the 1967 experimental duck hunting season in the San Luis Valley. Approximately 30 hunter performance checks were conducted, mostly on the Rio Grande Management Area and surrounding vicinity. A few checks were made on Monte Vista National Wildlife Refuge, but �- 40 - estimate of the total waterfowl population. remained the same as those used in 1966). (For 1967, the techniques Results: The problem of some sample sections being inaccessible at the time of the survey was not as acute as in former years, although six sections could not be visited this year because of snow or high water. The actual number of sections which were surveyed was 69. Table 4, following, presents estimates of the waterfowl breeding-pair population on the study area. Confidence intervals are very narrow, and species composition estimates are considered to be very good; in fact, estimates of both the total population and the species composition are the best which have yet been attained. This is.unquestionably the result of elimination of sections which do not contain waterfowl habitat. Table 4.--Waterfow1 breeding-pair estimates for San Luis Valley high-country study area, 1967. Projecteri Total 95% Total Count Estimated Species Pairs from Confidence (Pairs) on Total Composition Species Sample Sections Interval Lakes Pairs Percentage Mallard 1,711 1683-1729 304 61.6 2,015 Gadwall 133 131-135 312 445 13.6 Green-winged Teal 278 275-281 36 314 9.6 Cinnamon Teal 44 43-45 15 1.8 59 Pintail 100 98-102 17 117 3.6 Redhead 89 87-91 40 129 3.9 Ringneck Duck 33 32-34 1.5 16 49 American Merganser 11 10-12 5 16 0.5 Shoveler No projection 10 10 0.3 Ruddy Duck No projection 1.4 47 47 Blue-winged Teal No projection 17 17 0.5 Lesser Scaup No projection 50 1.5 50 American Widgeon No proJection 4 4 0.1 Hooded Merganser No projection 1 1 0.1 Totals 2,399 2371-2427 874 3,273 100.0 + 1.2% ReCOmmendations: Stratification of the study area has shown that variability can be reduced to a reasonable and workable level. It appears that elimination of sections not containing waterfowl habitat has been satisfactorily accomplished, and that the list of sample sections needs no further changes. It is recommended that the high-country production survey be continued to give us an opportunity to sample the area under various climate and phenology conditions. �- 41 - Table 5.--Numbers of ducks banded by species during pre-season Luis Valley 1967. Number banded Species 1,639 Mallard 19 Gadwall 3 American Widgeon 67 Green-winged Teal 95 Blue-winged and Cinnamon Teal 1 Shoveler 375 Pintail 45 Redhead 2 244 Total in the San Federal men had primary responsibility for this area. All hunter performance checks were given to the Bureau of Sport Fisheries and Wildlife for tabulation and analysis. This information will appear in the joint report mentioned in the beginning of this report. Thus, no tabulation of hunter activities will be presented here. Breeding Population Survey of the San Luis Valley High-Country Waterfowl breeding-pair inventories were continued for the fourth year in the high country on the west side of the San Luis Valley, as a part of the Cooperative Mallard Investigation. Generally, the study area encompasses the Rio Grande National Forest and includes all private lands lying within the major forest boundary as well as a scattering of both public and private lands in habitat types considered to be a part of the high-country area. It is known that this high-country area (that part of the Rio Grande drainage which does not actually lie on the valley floor of the San Luis Valley) supports a population of breeding waterfowl, and may contribute substantially to the total waterfowl production of the Valley. Just what this contribution may be has in the past been a matter of conjecture. Thus, the investigation here described was undertaken in an attempt to express in quantitative terms the waterfowl production of this area. Procedures: The extreme variability in the data encountered during the first year of study was largely overcome during the second year by stratifying the area into low-density and high-density habitat types. Samples were taken within the low-density types, while high-density types (larger lakes) were completely counted. This stratification and sampling of low-density habitat was further refined during 1966 by eliminating a great deal of area which could not possibly contain waterfowl habitat. The remaining sections, totaling 685, were then classified according to National Forest Ranger District, and a sample of sections was then randomly selected from each Ranger District. A total of 75 sections constitutes the sample. Total counts from the larger lakes within the study area were added to the projected figures from the sample sections to give an �42 - Literature Cited Ballou, R. M., J. R. Grieb, and A. D. Geis. 1964. Progress report _ experimental hunting season in the San Luis Valley, 1963. U.S.D I., Bur. Sport Fisheries and Wildl. Migratory Bird Pop. Sta., Admin. Rpt. No. 49, 7 p. Grieb, J. R. and R. M. Ba·l1ou. 1963. An evaluation of a proposed experimental, duck hunting season in the San Luis Valley, Col.or ado, Rpt. to the Central Flyway Council. Aug. 38p. Grieb, J. R., R. M. Hopper, and W. H. Rutherford. 1965. San Luis Valley cooperative mallard Lnves t Iga t Lon , Colo. Game" Fd sh sand Parks Dept., Fed. Aid Game Res. Rpt. Oct. 59-78 p. Hopper, R. M. and W. H. Rutherford. 1967. San Luis Valley cooperative mallard investigation. Colo. Game, Fish and Parks Dept., Fed Aid Game Res. Rpt. Oct. 39-48 p. Prepared by: Richard M. Hopper Wildlife Researcher William H. Rutherford Wildlife Researcher �October, 1968 43 JOB PROGRESS REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of__________________-L COLORADO Project No. w-88-R-13 Work Plan No. 1 Title of Job: _ Migratory Bird Investigations Job No. 13 Determination of Methods for Developing and Managing Waterfowl Habitat--Shallow Impoundment Study Period Covered: April 1, 1967 to March 31, 1968 Personnel: Richard M. Hopper ABSTRACT Selected literature references, dealing mostly with methods of sampling vegetation, were reviewed and abstracted during Segment 13- The Bonny Reservoir property was chosen as the area for conducting the present studyImpoundments will be constructed on two sites, approximately one-half mile apart. Water will be supplied from two wells, one existing and one· to be drilled in July or Augus t., 1968. Slope of land at the impoundment sites is well within limits for desirable pond and marsh development. Soils existing on ~t least one of the sites are capable of maintaining surface water. �- 44 Objectives: (1) To review literature pertaining to wetland ecology and methods of sampling wetland vegetation. (2) TO.se1ect the most desirable study area for conducting the shallow impoundment study. Procedures: (1) Search pertinent bibliographic abstracts and references for books, articles, papers, etc. written on the subject in question. Retrieve this subject matter and read and review it. Abstract information important to this study on index cards and compile a bibliographic list for later reference. (2) Investigate pot-entLa L development sites in the Bonny Reservoir and San Luis Valley areas and select best study area based upon: (a) amount and reliability of water supply; (b) slope of land; (c) amount of land. available in a continuous block; and (d) ability of land to maintain surface water. �- 45 - SHALLOW IMPOUNDMENT STUDY Richard M. Hopper The first year of the shallow impoundment study was devoted to the fulfillment of two primary requisites of any research' investigation; namely, a review of literature pertinent to the subject and the selection of a suitable study area. Literature Review Literature reviewed as part of this investigation related largely to methods of sampling wetland vegetation. Wetland ecology literature was searched secondarily, as time was not available to cover both subjects in a satisfactory manner. In fact, neither subject was covered completely; but additional time will be spent on this as the stUdy progresses. A list of references searched and reviewed are presented at the end of this report in bibliographic form. Most of these were abstracted on index cards. A review of literature, as such, is not presented here since pertinent information related to the subjects in question will be incorporated in later reports where it will be most applicable. Also, because of the long term . nature of the study, reviewing of literature will necessarily be a continous element in the overall investigation, particularly as it relates to wetland ecology. Literature reviewed and abstracted by the author as part of other habitat studies is not included in the listing below. About 200 references relating to waterfowl habitat preferences, a m6Jor aspect of the present study, were abstracted and sununarized in a "review of literature" in 1962. A firm background in this subject matter now exists, but, of course, updating of the literature is needed. Selection of Study Area The Bonny Reservoir property and San Luis Valley were the two general areas under consideration as potential development sites for conducting the shallow impoundment study. Bonny Reservoir was ultimately selected, largely because it is state-controlled property and development could begin almost immediately. The San Luis Valley site is on land administered by the Bureau of Land Management. This federal agency was receptive to our Division doing research on a portion of the land on which they were planning to do waterfowl development work. However, it was later determined that it would be about five years before development funds would be availabie to them for this work. Selection of the best study area was originally to be based upon the four factors mentioned in the "Procedures" section of this report, but the situation discussed above arose unexpectedly and the decision had to be made on �- 46 that basis. Bonny Reservoir, of course, possesses favorable development characteristics, otherwise it would not have been considered in the first plac~. A brief description of the Bonny Reservoir development site follows. Location and General Character of Development Site:--Actually, two separate sites are involved, one being approximately one-half mile from the other. One site (no. 1) lies on a bench above the bottom land of the South Fork of the Republican River at the extreme west end of the Bonny Reservoir property. It occurs on the south side of the river above the inlet to the reservoir and directly adjacent to the pothole blasting study area (Work Plan 1, Job 14). Most of this site presently supports a mixture of sedge, rushes, and grasses, which has been mowed annually for hay. A portion of the site contains undisturbed, heavy stands of tall grass and weed cover. The three permanent impoundments will be developed here. The other site (no. 2), on which the two drawdown ponds will be constructed, is located in the Foster Grove area on the north side of the river and in a northeast direction from site no. 1. Grain crops are presently raised on part of site no. 2, but most of the area supports undisturbed grasses, weeds, and some wetland vegetation. Amount and Reliability of Water SupplY:--An excellent well with a capacity of about 500 gals./min. now exists on site no. 2. Its location on the site is such that water can be delivered with ease to the proposed impoundments. Site no. 1 does not presently have a source of water, but a permit to drill a well has been approved and drilling should begin in July or August of 1968. This well is expected to have a capacity of about 900 gals./min. (2 c.f.s.), which should be adequate for the three permanent impoundments. Slope of Land:--Site within the less than ment work. Definite but most of the area no. 1 is characterized by 0.3-0.5 percent slopes, well one percent slope generally recommended in marsh developslope determinations have not yet been made at site no. 2, appears to be within acceptable limits. Amount of Land Available in a Continuous Block:--Site no. 1 contains approximately 75 acres of land. This amount is sufficient for the three permanent impoundments, allowing a total of 25 acres per impoundment as outlined in the study plan. Site no. 2 occupies 40-50 acres of land, depending upon the outcome of slope measurements. Again, this amount is adequate for two drawdown impoundments as specified in the study plan. Ability of Land to Maintain Surface Water:--Soil Conservation Service soils maps and soil auger samples on site no. 1 indicate a fairly heavy soil capable of retaining surface water for extended periods. Seepage on this site is expected to be low and the well to. be drilled here will be able to maintain permanent water levels in the three impoundments. �- 47 Soils maps of site no. 2 suggest soil types favorable for surface water retention. However, soil samples have not been taken in the field to verify this. Soil texture and depth determination will be made in the near future. References Archibald, E. E. A. 1949. J. Ecol. 37:260-288. Ashby, E. 1948. 14:222-234. The specific character of plant communities. Statistical ecology. II. A reassessment. Bot. Rev. Borman, F. H. 1953. The statistical efficiency of sample plot size and shape in forest ecology. Ecology 34:474-487. Bourdeau, P. F. 1953. A test of random versus systematic sampling. Ecology 34:499-512. Cain, S. A. 1938. 1943. Wyoming. Cochran, W. G. 206-233. The species-area curve. Am. MidI. Nat. 19:573-581. Sample-plot techniques applied to alpine vegetation in Am. J. Bot. 30:240-247. 1963. Sampling techniques. Coker, R. E. 1954. Streams lakes ponds. Press, Chapel Hill. 327p. John Wiley and Sons, N. Y. The University of North Carolina Cottam, G., and B. W. Hale. 1953. Some sampling characteristics of a population of randomly dispersed individuals. Ecology 34:741-757.Curtis, V. T., and R. P. McIntosh. 1950. The interrelations of certain analytic and synthetic characters. Ecology 31:434-455. Cutler, D. D. 1955. A permanent plot system of survey for continuous inventory of ponderosa pine stands in the southwest. J.For. 53(2):186-189. Daubenmire, R. 1959. A canopy-coverage method of vegetative analysis. Northwest Sci. 33(1) :43-64. Deming, W. E. 602p. 1950. Some theory of sampling. John Wiley and Sons, N. Y. Evans, F. C. 1952. The influence of size of quadrant on the distributional patterns of plant populations. Contr. Lab. Vert. BioI. Univ. Mich., 54: 1-15. Goodall, D. W. 1952. Quantitative aspects of plant distribution. Rev. Cambridge Philos. Soc. 27:194-245. Biol. �- 48 Grieg - Smith, P. 1952. The use of random and contiguous quadrants in the study of the structure of plant communities. Ann. Bot. NS 16(62): 293-316. 1957. Quantitative plant ecology. tions, London. 198p. Butterworths Scientific Publica- Hall, O. F. 1959. The contribution of remeasured sample plots to the precision of growth estimates. J. For. 57(11):807-811. Hanson, H. C. 1950. E.cology of the grassland. II. Husch, B. 1963. Forest mensuration and statistics. N. Y. 474p. Bot. Rev. 16:283-360. The Ronald Press Co., Kuchler, A. W. 1955. A comprehensive method of mapping vegetation. Assoc. of Amer. Geog. 65:404-415. Odum, E. P. 546p. 1959. Fundamentals of ecology. Annals. W. B. Saunders Co., Philadelphia. Oosting, H. J. 1956. The study of plant communities. Co., San Francisco. 440p. W. H. Freeman and Osborne, J. G. 1942. Sampling errors of systematic and random surveys of cover-type areas. J. Am. Stat. Assn. 37:256-264. " Pechanee, J. F., and G. Stewart. 1940. Sagebrush-grass range sampling studies: size and structure of sampling unit. J. Am. Soc. Agron. 32:669-682. Penfound, W. T. 1945. A study of phytosociologica1 relationships by means of aggregations of colored cards. Ecology 26:38-57. Phillips, E. A. 1959. Methods of vegetation study. Inc. 107p. Henry Holt and Co., Rice, E. L. 1952. Phytosocio1ogica1 analysis of tall-grass prairie in Marshall County, Oklahoma. Ecology. 33(1):112-116. _____ , and R. W. Kelting. 1955. The species-area curve. Ecology 36:7-11. Schumacher; F. S., and R. A. Chapman. 1948. Sampling methods in forestry and range management. Duke Univ. School of Forestry Bull. 7, rev. ed., 22lp. Spurr, S. H. 340p. 1948. Aerial photographs in Forestry. New York Ronald Press, Swinda1e, D. N., and J. T. Curtis. 1957. Phytosociology of the larger submerged plants in Wisconsin lakes. Ecology 38(3):397-407. �- 49 - Vestal, A. G. 1949.' Minimumareas Monog. 30:1-129. for different vegetations. Ill. BioI. Weller, M. W., and C. S. Spatcher. 1965. Role of habitat in the distribution and abundance of marsh birds. Iowa State Univ. Sci. and Tech., Agr. and HomeEcon. Exp. Sta~, Spec. Rpt. No. 43, 31p. Yates, F. 1953. Sampling methods for censuses Publ. Co., NewYork, p. 230-233. and surveys. Hafner Prepared by: Richard M. Hopper Wildlife Researcher ��October, 1968 - 51 JOB PROGRESS REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT Stat~of ~C~O_L_O_RAD~_O Project No. w-88-R-13 Work Plan No. Title of Job: 1 _ Migratory Bird Investigations Job No. 14 Determination of Methods for Developing and Managing Waterfowl Habitat-Ammonium Nitrate pothole Blasting Study Period Covered: April 1, 1967 to March 31, 1968 Personnel: Cliff Moser, Bruce Poley, Jesse Garrett, Scott Long, and Richard Hopper ABSTRACT Eighty-four potholes were blasted at the west end of the Bonny Reservoir property with the use of an ammonium nitrate-fuel oil mixture (AN-FO). These potholes were of four different sizes" produced by" 25, 50, 75, and 150 pound charge sizes of AN-FO. Twenty-eight potholes were blasted in each ·of three separate study blocks, four rows of seven potholes each and each row of a different charge size. The 25 and 75-lb. charges produced an average of about eight square feet of surface area per pound of AN-FO, while the 50 and 150-lb. sizes were less efficient with less than six square feet per pound. Average cost per 100 square feet of 50-lb., $2.42; 75-lb., $2.01; 150-lb., $2.21. Thus, the 75-lb. potholes were cheapest to produce, followed by the 150-lb. size. Waterfowl use of the~potholes was insignificant during the fall of 1967 prior to freeze-up. However, wintering mallards frequented at least 46 of the 84 potholes after the potholes thawed in late Fecruary. Some were utilized quite heavily. �- 52 - Objectives: 1. To blast 84 potholes at the upper end of Bonny Reservoir. 2. To determine the size of each pothole and the cost of each size of pothole. ·3. To collect waterfowl use and harvest data on the Bonny Reservoir property. Procedures: 1. Layout three blocks of land of equal size on the study area at the upper end of Bonny Reservoir. Separate each block by a buffer zone. Using an arrnnoniumnitrate-fuel oil mixture (AN-FO), blast 28 equally spaced potholes in each block (four rows of seven potholes each). Each block will contain one row of seven potholes blasted with each of the following size AN-FO charges; 25, 50, 75, and 150 pounds. Locate each row at random. 2. Measure the diameter and depth of each pothole with the use of a ISO-foot tape and a calibrated line weighted on the end and attached to a 10-15foot pole. Calculate area and circumference or amount of edge of each pothole from these measurements. Maintain cost records for labor and material required to blast each size of pothole. Calculate cost relationships for the four different sizes of potholes. 3. Conduct semi-monthly counts of numbers and species of waterfowl using each pothole until these areas freeze-up. Each period of counting will consist of morning, mid-day, and evening counts. Make trend counts on Bonny Reservoir and adjacent water areas. Conduct counts from observation points with aid of spotting scope and binoculars. Contact hunters and make bag checks in the field until the potholes freeze-up. Record harvest by species, hours hunted, and hunter success on the potholes, on Bonny Reservoir, and on other adjacent water areas. �- 53 - AMMONIUM NITRATE POTHOLE BLASTING STUDY Richard M. Hopper Introduction The use of ammonium nitrate-fuel oil mixture (AN-FO) as a blasting agent is not new. It has been employed in the mining, quarrying, and heavy construction fields since about 1958. Its introduction in the wildlife field occurred more recently. Biologists of the Michigan Conservation Department and the U. S. Forest Service, beginning in 1963, were among the first to apply this blasting agent to wildlife habitat improvement programs (Mathiak, 1965). Since then, the technique of annnonium nitrate pothole blasting has gained considerable interest from many conservation agencies and private individuals. Past work, and subsequent publications, involving AN-FO blasting for wildlife have been concerned primarily with outlining detailed methods and safety precautions reconnnended for its use. Little attention has been devoted to determining the most efficient and effective size or sizes of charges to use from the standpoint of economy and waterfowl use. Consequently, present pothole blasting programs in this country may be unnecessarily exp~nsive and ineffective. This study will compare four connnonly used charge-sizes' of AN-FO to determine which produces the most economical potholes in relation to (1) waterfowl use, (2) hunting potential, and (3) life expectancy. Obviously, potholes blasted with a small charge will cost less than those blasted with large charges because of differences in amount of materials and labor required to do the blasting. But, if the small potholes attract £ewer ducks or silt-in earlier than the large potholes, then just how important is cost in the overall picture? This study will attempt to answer this question. Study Area: The Bonny Reservoir property was selected as the site for conducting the pothole blasting investigation. Location of the specific study area is shown in Figure 1. It consists of about 70 acres of bottomland marsh adjacent to the south bank of the South Fork of the Republican River at the west end of the property. This area falls into the "t.ype 3" wetlands category (shallow fresh marsh) described by Martin et ale (1953). Its surface soils are waterlogged throughout the year and as much as six inches of standing water occurs at a few sites. Prior to blasting, no more than two acres of open water existed in the dense stands of emergent vegetation. Two ponds, excavated with a dragline, ' contributed most of this open water. The study area, being within the floodplain of the river and subject to periodic flooding, is largely characterized by the presence of sandy surface soils. Some heavier surface soils exist directly below the bench at the south edge of the study area where floodwaters 'reachwith less frequency. Thus, a general graduation from heavy to light soils occurs from south to north on the study area. �LEGEND CD ® @ @ ® ® 0 ® ® R. 43 W. @ @ Parks Superintendent's House Dam Tender's Residence Air Strip Foster Grove Campground Moln Swimming Beach a Campground Concession Area Boot Romp Jetty with Finger Docks Woter Ski Area a L.aunching Romp ~ Fresh Water Wells Overnight Use Areas Limited Day Use Areas © -$- ~~ t 7 T. ~:> t 5 S. •..(J) i .Q) 0'- ~-,E ~\Q L ~~~~ SOOTH i /I/~""" 'O~~'.N-"-7/ - - ~ , ~ ~(9)U;,,\ I~ FORK "j ~~~~J ~~~.... riVYI) \y @ ~~~ ~~ State ~ C\I HighWay@~ C:(I) o . -:> g' <II ~-c.:~ ® 112 &l~E r<l ~C:OC\j ~ # J YUMA 0 COUNTY I mile I W~ SITE PLAN BONNY RECREATION Fig. 1 -- Location of pothole blasting study area (hatch-marks) on the Bonny Reservoir property. AREA �- 55 - Vegetation of the study area is dominated by the following species: threesquare bulrush (Scirpus americanus), spikerushes (Eleocharis spp.), sedges (Carex spp.), rushes (Juncus spp.), Hardstem bulrush (~. acutus), softstem b~h (S. validus), cattails (~ spp.), saltgrass (Distichlis stricta), foxtail barley (Hordeum jubatum), and sweet clovers (Melilotus spp.) Most of this vegetation occurs in extremely dense, tall stands. Past waterfowl use of the study area was restricted because of the scarsity of surface water and open water. Good nesting cover occurred in abundance, but its value was reduced due to a limited amount of territorial, feeding, resting, and loafing space. Results and Conclusions Pothole Blasting Figure 2 shows a "close-up" of the study area and the location and pattern of the 84 potholes blasted with AN-FO. A detailed account of the overall operation follows. Study blocks: This study was designed to evaluate potholes blasted with four different sized charges of AN-FO, utilizing three replications of each charge to enhance the studys' statistical reliability. Three study blocks, each 450 X 900 feet, were. laid out on the 70-acre marsh. These blocks, designated A, B, and C, were placed side-by-side and parallel to each other, but perpendicular to the north-south change in soil texture on the study area. This resulted in a similar gradation of soil texture in all blocks. A "buffer zone" 300 feet wide was established between the blocks to set them apart. Establishment of blasting points: Twenty-eight points, each representing a pothole blasting site, were located in each block with the aid of a Bruntontype surveying compass and ISO-foot tape. These points, established in four rows of seven each, were set 150 feet apart, both within rows and.between rows, and marked with stakes. The four sizes of AN-FO charges to be tested included 25, 50, 75, and 150 pounds. A different size was randomly assigned to each row of Block A. Each size was then replicated in Blocks Band C, using the following criteria: a given size could not occupy (1) an outside row in more than two blocks; (2) the same row (position) in any two blocks; and (3) adjacent rows between blocks. Each block represented a separate study unit directly comparable to the other blocks. . Charge-holes: The four charge sizes tested constituted single charges of 25 and 50 pounds each, and multiple charges totaling 75 and 150 pounds each. Three 25-lb. charges placed 11 feet apart in the form of a triangle yielded the 75-lb. multiple charge. Likewise, three 50-lb. charges set 15 feet apart comprised the ISO-lb. multiple charge. As a result, a single charge-hole was required at each blasting point for the two smallest charges, while three charge-holes were necessary at each 75 and ISO-lb. blasting site. All charge-holes were dug to a depth of 30 inches with the use of manual post-hole diggers. Charge-holes for 25 and 50-lb. charges (both single and multiple) were made 10 and 15 inches in diameter, respectively. �N LEG£NO o Po fho /es- fZZ] Old po n dS' I.s-o SCQle: / /". =3JOl'f. o rs: A °2S o 0..)'0 o o 0 o o 0 /50 07S 0 o 00"0 0 0 o,0 0 . 0 00(;) o B~l7ch B 2,) 0 00 0 00 \Jl 0\ 0 so 025" O 00 0 0 0 o" t:"'\ o o 0~'«:;}0 0 0 0 o Area Fig. 2 -- Pothole blasting study area, showing the position and size of potholes by study area. 0 0 o o o o o o o C 7S 0/$"0 o 00 o 0 o 0 o o 00 <:) 0 o 0 o o 0 o o o �- 57 - Blasting materials and equipment: The following materials were utilized in blasting the 84 potholes: (1) 6,300 pounds, Armours uncoated ammonium nitrate fertilizer in prill form (33.5% nitrogen); (2) 79 gallons, No.2 fuel oil; (3) 336 sticks, 60% Red Cross Extra dynamite; (4) 168, No. 6 electric blasting caps with l2-foot wires; (5) 84. 14 X 35-inch heavy-duty plastic bags; (6) 84, 20 X 36-inch heavy-duty plastic bags; and (7) 175 feet, baling twine. Blasting was done electrically, with the following equipment being employed: (1) Du Pont No. 50 blasting machine; (2) 1,500 feet, firing wire on reel; and (3) Du Pont blasting galvanometer .-(circuittester). Other equipment necessary to the blasting operation included: (1) a one-quart jar for measuring fuel oil; (2) a one-gallon can for dipping water from charge-holes; and (3) a shovel to assist in covering and packing (stemming) the charges. Blasting operation: Twenty-five pounds of ammonium nitrate were put into each of the smaller plastic bags, and 50 pounds into each of the larger bags. No. 2 fuel oil was then poured into each bag at the rate of five quarts per 100 pounds of ammonium nitrate. Contents of the bags were thoroughly mixed and allowed to set a minimum of one hour before detonation. The potholes were blasted one at a time and row-by-row, with all seven potholes in a row being blasted before moving to another row. Two sticks of dynamite were buried side-by .. side in each bag of AN-FO, with an electric blasting cap set in the end of one of the sticks. Each bag was then tied tightly with baling twine and placed in a charge-hole. Excess water was removed from the chargeholes by dipping prior to placement of the charges. Both, the 25 and 50-lb. charges measured 15 inches in height, made possible through the use of two different sizes of plastic bags. 'Thus, with charge-holes 30 inches deep, the tops of all charges were consistently 15 inches from the ground surface. The charges were stemmed as uniformly as possible with the material excavated from the charge-holes. Blasting-cap wires were then attached to the firing' wires, with the multiple charges being wired in series. The galvanometer was used to check for a complete circuit before attempting to detonate a charge. Eighty-four potholes were blasted in the three blocks using the procedures outlined above; seven of each size in each block, or a total of 21 of each size in all three blocks (Fig. 2). Each pothole was assigned a letter and number according to the block occupied, size of charge, and position in the row, i.e., the designation "A253" applies to the third pothole from the south in the 25-lb. row of Block A. Similarly, "C1507" refers to pothole No. 7 in the l50-lb. row of Block C. Pothole Size and Cost Surface area: Two diameter measurements (to the nearest 0.5 foot) were made of each 25 and 50-lb. potholes at the estimated original ground level; one taken in-line with the row and the other at right angles to the row. Measurement of the 75 and ISO-lb. multiple-charge potholes presented somewhat of a problem because they were shaped like a cloverleaf rather than being a perfect circle. For this reason, the maximum distance across these potholes was considered a bias measurement. Therefore, three measurements were taken of each pothole as shown in the illustration presented below. �- 58 - .. ...' I .I ' .......•...... I Measurements of each pothole were averaged and the surface area in square feet ealculatedusing-the formula: A=~r2. Table I compares the efficiency of the four charge-sizes by block in square feet of surface area produced. Average square feet of surface area was generally consistent for each charge size among the three blocks, with the possible exception of the ISO-lb. charge size. Average surface area for the seven ISO-lb. potholes in Block A (931 sq. ft.) was over 100 square feet greater than those in Blocks Band C (794 and 827 sq. ft., respectively). This difference resulted primarily from two potholes in Block A that covered 1,066 and 1,134 square feet of surface area. There was considerable range in surface area among potholes of a given charge size in each block. This variation was expected because of differences in soil texture within each block. The northern portions of the three blocks contained sandy soils, as opposed to heavier soils with some clay at the southern ends. Mathise et al. (1964) indicated a wide variation in AN-FO blasting efficiency by soil types in Michigan and Minnesota. In Wisconsin, Mathiak (1965) found that soil characteristics and water content can change considerably in short distances, resulting in fluctuations in pothole size even when other variables are maintained as constant as possible. Fortunately, in the present study all charge sizes were subject to similar soil variations, and the physical features of the potholes should be comparable. The four charge sizes produced the following average surface areas (sq. ft.) for all blocks combined: 25-lb., 201; 50-lb., 294; 75-lb., 570; and ISO-lb., 851. These data reveal two interesting facts. First, doubling the charge size did not double the surface area produced, as noted in the differences between the 25 and 50-lb. charges and the 75 and l50-lb. charges. The increase in surface area was only about 50 percent in each case. Secondly, the 75-lb. multiplecharge, representing only a 50 percent increase in charge size over the single 50-lb. charge, produced nearly 100 percent more surface area than the 50-lb. charge. Efficiency of the various charge sizes is demonstrated by the amount of surface area created per pound of AN-FO (Table 1). The 25-lb. charges produced an average of 8.0 square feet of surface area per pound of AN-FO, followed closely by the 75-lb. charges with 7.6 square feet per pound. The 50 and l50-lb sizes were less efficient, yielding only 5.9 and 5.7 square feet per'pound, respectively. Thus, 25 pounds of AN-FO per bag appeared to be a more efficient charge size than 50 pounds per bag in terms of surface area produced when placed either singly or in multiples of three. Multiple charges seemed to be only slightly less efficient than single charges when using the same amount of AN-FO per bag. �Table l. Surface area comparisons of 8~1 potholes by charge size and block. Charge Size (lbs.) Range 25 50 75 150 183- 276 254- 322 459- 638 804-1,134 Ave. Surface Area (sq. ft) Block C Block B Range Ave. Range Ave. Total Ave. Ave. Surface Areal lb. (sq. ft.) 210 290 568 931 160-254 214-363 518-559 739-839 187 303 600 827 201 294 570 851 8.0 5.9 7.6 5.7 Block A VI 11 Includes 206 288 541 794 149-201 276-363 560-670 683-924 21 potholes blasted with each charge size (seven of each size in each block). \.0- �- - 60 Depth: A single depth measurement was made of each 25 and 50-lb. pothole, but three readings were taken of the 75 and 150-1b. multiple-charge potholes, one in each segment of the c10ver1eaf~ Measurements were made to the nearest one inch from the original ground level to the deepest points in the potholes. Depths of the potholes were not measured until about seven months after blasting. This allowed time for intia1 sloughing-in and settling of the sides and bottoms, thereby providing more meaningful measurements. Depth measurements taken immediately after blasting would be of little or no value because the greatest and most rapid depth loss in the potholes occurred within the first few months of their existence. Table 2 compares depth measurements of the potholes by charge size and block. Average depths of each charge size were mostly consistent among the three blocks. The greatest variation occurred in the 25-1b. charge size, with a difference of nearly eight inches among the blocks (45.4 inches in Block A to 37.7 inches in Block C). The range in depth of individual potholes of a given charge varied considerably in each block, just as they did with regard to surface area. Again, soil conditions probably contributed greatly to these differences. Table 2. Comparison of depth measurements of 8~1 and block. Charge Size (lbs.) Range 25 50 75 150 35-58 3l-56 35-56 , 32-60 Block A Ave. 45.4 45.7 43.0 42.6 potholes by charge size Depth (inches) Block B Range Ave. Block C Range Ave. Total' Ave. 33-52 42-58 37-42 39-49 27-44 38-54 34-47 37-50 41.1 47.0 41.2 43.'2 40.3 47.9 39.9 43.2 37.7 47.3 40.8 43.6 11 Includes 21 potholes b1ast~d with each charge size (seven of each size in each block. The 50-lb. charges produced potholes averaging 47.0 inches deep for all blocks combined. This was the deepest of the four charge sizes, averaging about six inches more than either the 25 or 75-lb. charges, and about four inches greater than the 150-1b. charge. Cost Comparisons: Costs involved in blasting the four different sized potholes are compared in Tables 3 and 4. All materials utilized in the blasting, operation are shown by charge size in Table 3. Cost per pothole varied from $2.12 for the 25-1b. charges to $10.49 for the 150-1b. charges. The cost of materials did not double by increasing the charge size from 25 to 50 pounds because the amount of dynamite and caps used were the same for both charges. This same situation existed between the 75 and 150-1b. charges. �- 61 Table 3. Charge Size (lbs.) 25 50 75 150 Table 4. Charge Size (lbs.) 25 50 75 150 Cost of materials for each sl..zeof pothole. Cost Per Pothole (dollars) Annnonium Nitrate Plastic Bags Fuel Oil Dynamite Electric Caps Total $1.25 2.50 3.75 7.50 $0.09 0.16 0.27 0.49 $0.06 0.11 0.17 0.34 $0.42 0.42 1.27 1.27 $0.30 0.30 0.89 0.89 $'2.12 3.49 6.35 10.49 Cost of labor for each size of pothole. Ave. Time Per Pothole (man-hours) Digging of Blasting 'l:.,/ Charge- ho les.!.! Total $0.21 0.33 0.53 0.83 $0.89 1.12 1.52 2.50 $1.10 1.45 2.05 3.33 Total Ave. Labor Cost Per Potholel/ (dollars) $2.75 3.62 5.12 8.32 1/ Based on all 21 potholes of each charge size. 2/ Based on 14 potholes of each Size, except the 50-lb.· size which was based on 13 potholes. 3/ Based on a rate of $2.50 per man-hour. Labor time and costs are presented in Table 4 by charge size. Labor included the digging of charge-holes and the actual blasting of the potholes. Time required to measure and mix the fuel oil with the annnonium nitrate was not included. Labor was figured at a rate of $2.50 per man-hour. Labor costs occurred in the same pattern as the cost of materials, ranging from $2.75 per pothole for the 25-lb. charges to $8.32 for the l50-lb. charges. Labor costs exceeded material costs for the two smallest charge sizes (25 and 50-lb.), but the reverse was true for the 75 and ISO-lb. multiple charge sizes. Table 5 sunnnarizes all costs associated with blasting the potholes and compares the four charge sizes in regard to average cost per 100 square feet of surface area produced. On the average, potholes blasted with 75-lb. multiple charges cost less per 100 square feet of surface area created ($2.01) than potholes blasted with the other three charge sizes. The ISO-lb. charges were next in efficiency, with an average cost of $2.21 per 100 square feet. Suprisingly enough, the 25 and 50-lb. charges yielded identical figures of $2.42. This figure was 41 cents or 20 percent, higher than that for the 75-lb. charge. �- 62 Table 5. Charge Size (lbs.) 25 50 75 150 Relationship of total cost and surface area of the four different sizes of potholes. Cost eer Pothole ~dollars2 Materials $ 2.12 3.49 6.35 10.49 Labor $2.75 3.62 5.12 8.32 Total $ 4.87 7.11 11.47 18.81 Ave. Surface Area per Pothole (Sq. Ft.) 201 294 570 851 Average Cost per 100 Sq. Ft. (dollars) $2.42 2.42 2.01 2.21 Waterfowl Use and Harvest Data: The potholes were visited periodically beginning the first week of September and checked for waterfowl use through November 9 when the potholes began to freeze. Spring observations were not due to start until April 1 because it was not anticipated that the potholes would be thawed until then. However, warm weather in late February caused the potholes to thaw out and two days of observations were made in early March. Morning, evening, and sometimes mid-day observations were conducted during each vi·sit. Observations were made by walking each row of potholes and recording the number and species present, or signs of waterfowl use on each pothole. Additional counts were made from observation points located on the bench area above the potholes, with the aid of a spotting scope and binoculars. Fall observations were conducted during the following periods in 1967 (Segment 13): September 5-8,October 11-13, and November 9. Observations were made at least twice daily during each of these three periods, resulting in a total of 12 hours of actual observation time. Waterfowl use on the pothole study area during this time was limited almost entirely to the two old ponds and to small, flooded areas adjacent to the potholes. However, this use averaged less than five ducks (mostly Mallards) observed per hour. The only pothole use witnessed during the above periods occurred on November 9 when the observer flushed a pintail drake from a flooded area adjacent to C1504 and the bird lit on C756. Other pothole use no doubt occurred during the fall, but the potholes did not appear attractive to ducks during this time of year. The birds seemed to prefer the larger water areas, such as Bonny Reservoir and the marshes at the upper end of the reservoir. Wintering mallards began using the pothole study area, including many of the potholes, about the third week in February when the potholes thawed out unexpectedly due to mild weather. Observations were made on March 4-5, 1968, for a period totaling nearly two hours. Each row in each block of potholes was walked and use was recorded based on actual sightings of the birds and/or presence of duck tracks in or on the edge of the potholes. Duck feathers were found in many of the potholes, but their presence alone was not considered as duck use, since feathers could have blown into some of the potholes. �- 63 Table 6 shows the number of potholes by size and block on which ducks and/or duck tracks occurred during the March counting period. Forty-six, or about 55 percent, of the 84 potholes recei.ved duck use between late February and March 5. Potholes in Block C appeared to be the most attractive to ducks, with all except three of the 28 potholes being utilized. Block B was next with 17 of the 28 potholes used by ducks at least once. Use was noted of only four potholes in Block A. Table 6. Duck use of potholes by charge size and block from late February to March· 5, 1968. .Number of ·Potholes Used by Ducks.!? Charge Size Block A % 25 50 75 150 Totals 0 0 0.0 0.0 28.6 28.6 14.3 2 2 4 Block B 1 3 6 7 17 % 14.3 42.9 85.7 100.0 60.7 Block C 6 5 7 7 25 % Total % 85.7 71.4 100.0 100.0 90.0 7 33.3 38.1 71:4 76.2 54.8 8 15 16 46 }) Seven potholes of each size in each block. A higher percentage of the 75 and 150-lb. potholes were used than the smaller potholes (25 and 50-lbs.). This was true for the blocks individually, as well as combined. However, not much confidence can be placed in conclusions based on the data in Table 6, since comparisons can not be made in regard to amount of duck,use of each pothole. Also, ducks could have made use of some of the potholes without leaving tracks. This type of information,can be collected only through long periods of pothole observation. Data gathering of this nature is planned for segment 14. Harvest data was not collected in the Bonny Reservoir area during the 1967 duck hunting season because of the lack of time. This type of information is difficult to obtain here, as hunting pressure is low. Most hunting appears to occur on the reservoir itself, at least until extremely cold weather settles in the area. Only one duck was known to have been killed on the potholes; however, a few more were harvested on the study area, mostly on the large, old pond. More time and man-power will be available to collect harvest data during the 1968-69 hunting season. �- 64 Literature Cited Mathiak, H. A. 1965. Publ. 352, 3lp. Pothole blasting for wildlife. Wisc. Cons. Dept., Mathisen, J., J. Byelich, and R. Radtke. 1964. The use. of ammondum nitrate for marsh blasting. Trans. N. Am. Wildl. Conf. 29:143-150. Martin, A. C., N. Hotchkiss, F. W. Uhler,. and W. S. Bourn. 1953. Classification of the wetlands of the United States. U. S. Fish and Wildl. Serv., Spec. Sc I , Rept.: Wildl. No. 20, l4p. Prepared by: Richard M. Hopper Wildlife Researcher �October, 1968 - 65 JOB PROGRESS REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT COLORADO State of , Project No. w-88-R-13 Work Plan No. 2 Migratory Bird Investigations Job No. Title of Job: Experimental Studies on Improving Status of Canada Goose Populations Period Covered: April 1, 1967 to March 31, 1968 Personnel: 2 Gurney Crawford, Jack Grieb, Richard Hopper, Howard Funk, Gary Will, and William Rutherford ABSTRACT The size of the Larimer County.breeding Canada goose flock and the number of young birds raised showed a higher rate of increase in 1967 than during the previous two years. Production was again centered at three main concentration areas, although more evidence of pioneering to new nesting areas was noted. Additional nesting structures built. during 1967 totaled 43, most of which.were placed in new areas in an attempt to attract nesting geese away from the concentration areas. . . Flock size and production in the Boulder County flock again showed a spectacular increase. This is now a significant goose production area. Additional n~sting structures built in Boulder County during 1967 totaled 16. The transplanting program resulted in a total of 182 goslings trapped in the Fort Collins and Denver areas and released in Boulder County, 85 trapped in Denver and released on the Alamosa National Wildlife Refuge, and 25 hatched from eggs taken in Moffat County and released in Mesa County. The grand total of geese banded in Larimer County and Denver was 994, of which 478 were winter-trapped in an effort to band birds belonging to the migratory High-Line Population. Protective measures, including the season bag limit, permits required, and closed areas,remained the same as in i966. In addition, the number of huntin permits was limited to 3,000, which effectively reduced hunting pressure although harvest remained about the same as the previous year. This harvest level should not be exceededj therefore the 3,000 limit is again recommended. �- 66 Wintering populations of High-Line geese again showed a strong increase, to the point that a special sub-conrrnittee of the Central Flyway Technical Conrrnittee.reconrrnendedthat efforts be made to redistribute these birds and attempt to induce them to winter further south. The specific reconrrnendations of this sub-committee are presented. Recommendations for further transplaI).ting, building hunting regulations are also presented. nesting structures, and Objectives: 1 .. Continue efforts to establish a breeding flock of Canada geese at Valmont Reservoir near Boulder, along with expansion to other lakes in the Boulder-Longmont vicinity. 2. Continue the spread of the College and Terry Lake flock into unoccupied habitat in the Fort Collins-Loveland-Windsor area. 3. Retention of migrant Great Basin goose flocks within the state during the migration and wintering periods .. 4. Begin establishing a breeding flock of Great Basin Canada geese in the Colorado River Valley west of Grand Junction. Procedures: 1. Obtain Canada goose eggs from the Denver area and hatch at the Fort Collins Research Station. Capture goslings in the Denver area and place with hatched goslings on conditioning area at the Research Station. Release these birds at Valmont and other lakes (selected by Gurney Crawford) in the Boulder~Longmont area. 2. Continue recommending placement of nesting structures on various lakes in the Fort Collins-Loveland-Windsor area. 3. Recommend closure to hunting of areas and reservoirs, and hunting season dates and bag limits, in the Fort Collins area. 4. Collect eggs from nesting Great Basin Canada geese in the Yampa-Little Snake River Valleys of Northwestern Colorado. Transport these eggs to the Research Station for hatching and conditioning of goslings. Seledt release sites on the Colorado River west of Grand Junction, and build holding pens and feeders. Release goslings at about 10 weeks of age, hold in pens until accustomed to new environment, and then open the pens. Conduct periodic checks to determine success of transplants. Recommendations: 1. With the Larimer-Boulder-Weld County flock now on a firm footing, emphasis on gosling transplants should be shifted to the San Luis Valley and the South Platte River near Riverside Reservoir. 2. Goslings hatched from eggs taken in Moffat County should continue to be released in Mesa County and/or other areas to be decided, and depending upon availability of goslings. Other areas include Montezuma County and Middle Park. 3. Nesting structures should be placed on desirable locations in all areas where breeding flocks have been, and are being established. 4. Specific reconrrnendations for closed areas and seasons will be discucced at a meeting with all concerned personnel in the Northeast Region. �- 67 - EXPERIMENTAL STUDIES ON IMPROVING STATUS OF CANADA GOOSE POPULATIONS William H. Rutherford The specific assignment of Gurney Crawford, under Project W-llO-D, continues to be the development of breeding Canada goose populations in the Northeast Region. Thus the following report of activities and accomplishments will contain much of the same information which will also be reported in the completion report of W-llO-D. The reason for this duplication is to preserve continuity in reporting results of the establishment of Canada goose flocks initiated under Project W-88-R. Larimer County Flock Production: During the production year of 1967, the size of the breeding goose population and the number of young birds raised showed a higher rate of increase than for the previous two years. Number of nests established was 173, or 67 more than the previous year. Of these, 49 nests were determined to be failures. The net result was 374 young raised to flight, which is 161 more than the previous year (Table 1). Table 1. Larimer County Canada Goose Flock Production Information, 1957-1967. Year No. Birds of Breeding Age No Nests No. Nests Established Hatched No. Birds No. Birds Approx. Size of Flock Raised Planted 1957 1958 1959 1960 1961 1962 1963 1964 1965 1966 1967 0 0 2 8 20 53 135 250 430 1/ 50<>+-=- 0 O· 1 4 7 23 43 68 79 106 0 0 1 4 6 21 31 59 60 75 0 0 5 14 20 79 100 154 178 213 1967 600 ]J 173 124 374 31 23 48 68 95 101 0 0 0 0 No. Birds Moved Out 177 31 54 60 120 210 400 500 600 650 1/ 750+-=1,078 1/ 1/ Difficult to make a good estimate. Some nesting birds continue to pioneer into new areas, as noted in Table 2, but for the most part, production was centered at College Lake, Terry Lake, and Watson Lake, which accounted for 54 percent of all goslings raised to flight. This, however, is less than the 64 percent determined for these three areas in 1966, which indicates a desirable trend of nesting birds away from these concentration areas. �- 68 Table 2. Production Results, Larimer County Canada Goose Flock, Spring, 1967!/. Lake Anderson Pond *Boedecker Lake Claymore Lake College Lake Dean Acres Lake *Deines Res. *Dry Creek Res. Flatiron Gravel Pits *Fossil Creek Res. Herring Lake *Kitchel Lake Lindenmeier Lake *Poudre Res. #1 *Poudre Res. #2 *Poudre Res. #10 *Romley Gravel Pit *South Grey Res. *Specht Ponds Sterling Gravel Pits A Sterling Gravel Pits B *Takes Pond Terry Lake Timnath Res. Watson Lake *Welch Res. Reservoir 118 Bur~ of Standards Lake Annex Res. #8 Elder Lake ~'c'Long Pond Van Sant Pond Totals No. of No. of No. of Nest No. of No. Failed Nests Eggs Failures Young to Mature 3 3 5 42 5 1 2 2 2 4 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 4 1 44 2 24 1 15 19 25 190 25 3 o o 2 12 o 10 12 1 1 1 11 1 20 1 1 1 2 18 4 5 2 5 6 7 4 25 13 17 15 120 17 o 5 6 5 13 o Young Surviving to Date 4 9 3 1 1 14 14 61 16 o o 5 1 4 10 3 59 o o o 6 o o 9 1 3 o o 1 1 o o o 5 6 5 2 1 o o o o 20 2 4 o 18 4 176 96 o 80 11 79 17 62 5 5 o o o 5 o 218 13 12 o 125 6 o o o o 8 3 o o o 6 11 5 o 16** 86 4 51 1 50 173 859 49 580 206 374 11 Table prepared by G. I. Crawford. * New locations where geese nested. ** This group treated as one area because of goose movement. Habitat Improvement: Nesting structures built during 1967 included post-type structures and floating structures. Of the post-type structures, 34 were placed on Larimer County lakes, and 9 floating structures were temporarily placed on Larimer County sites.. Most structures were placed in locations where geese have been observed, although continuing attempts were made to attract geese to ~ew areas through the placement of structures. As noted in the past, natural nesting sites are extremely limited in this area. Therefore, the continued expansion of this population will depend upon construction of nest sites and maintenance of old structures each year. �- 69 Boulder County Flock Production: Boulder County has become a significant goose production area, following the gosling releases which began on Valmont Reservoir in 1963. More recently, releases on Faivre Ponds and Terry Lake have expanded the range of this flock. In 1965, only 11 goslings were raised in Boulder County; in 1966, 52 were raised, and in 1967, 81 were raised (Tables 3 and 4). Table 3. Boulder County Canada Goose Flock Production Information, 1963-1967. Year No. Nests No. Nests No. Birds of Breeding N?;e Established Hatched 1963 1964 1965 1966 1967 l2!1 22 72 No. Birds Raised 86 97 131 116 177 11 52 81 6 15 28 6 22 36 No. Birds Approx. size of flock Planted 175 300 400+ 500+ II Includes mainly adults from the Denver metro population which were attracted to this area. Table 4. Production Results, Boulder County Canada Goose Flock, Spring, 19601/. Lake Faivre Ponds Terry Lake (Longmont}~1 Valmont Reservoir 1 2 33 8 11 151 0 0 8 8 7 88 1 2 19 7 5 69 36 170 8 103 22 81 Totals No. of Young Young No. Failed Surviving to Date to Mature No. of No. of No. of Nest Eggs Failures Nests II Table prepared by G. L Crawford. 21 New location where geese nested. Habitat Improvement: During this project interval, 9 post-type nesting structures were erected on Terry Lake (Longmont), 4 on Faivre Ponds, 2 on Crystal Lake, and one on Ish Reservoir. Transplant Program: During July, 1967, a total of 177 goslings (see Table I) were trapped from the three concentration areas near Fort Collins, and released on Terry Lake north of Longmont. An additional 5 goslings were trapped �- 70 at Denver City Park and released on Faivre Ponds. The rema1n1ng goslings which were trapped at Denver, numbering 85, were released on the Alamosa National Wildlife Refuge in the San Luis Valley. Colorado River Flock In April, 1967, 10 Canada goose nests were found on the Yampa and Little Snake Rivers in Moffat County which were judged to be vulnerable to rising water. The 53 eggs contained in these 10 nests were taken to the Fort Collins Research Station and artificially incubated. The result of this program was 25 goslings which reached maturity. Shortly before the birds were able to fly, they were taken to an island in the Colorado River near Lorna, and released in a previously constructed pen. They were then fed until they were able to fly out of the pen. These birds remained in the vicinity for the summer and presumably migrated with adult birds which summer in the same area. This work was done in an attempt to increase the size of the potential breeding goose population on the Colorado River. Follow-up studies and further gosling releases will be made during the next project segment. Trapping and Banding The results of Larimer and Boulder County Summer goose banding, as well as the banding of geese which were transported elsewhere, will be tabulated in this report simply for the purpose of reporting all activities carried out under this job (Table 5). Also the results of Larimer County winter banding in'196768 are tabulated. In addition, these bandings will also be reported under Work Plan 1, Job 2. Protective Measures Special hunting regulations requiring a permit and limiting harvest to a season bag of six geese per hunter were continued in 1967-68. The permit area, the Larimer-Boulder County closed areas, and the'reservoir. closed areas lying within the permit area remained the same as established for the previous two hunting seasons. The number of permits issued for the 1967-68 North-Central Colorado special season was limited to 3,000, in an effort to avoid exceeding the harvest of the previous year. From questionnaires sent to 491 hunters, it was determined that 744 persons obtaining a permit did not use it; thus, it was estimated that the total number of participating hunters numbered 2,256. Additional hunting statistics indicate that average number of days hunted was 6.7 and the average season, bag was 0.55 geese per hunter. This permits an estimated total harvest of 1,246 birds of which 75.8 percent or 944 were taken in Larimer County; 21.3 percent or 265 in western Weld County; and 2.9 percent or 37 in Boulder County. The harvest of the previous year.was estimated at 1,184; thus, this year's estimated harvest of 1,246 shows that the objective of not significantly increasing the harvest was met by the limitation of permits to 3,000. �- 71 Table 5. Canada Goose Banding Results, Northern Colorado, Summer, 1967 and Winter, 1967-68. Location Number Banded by Age and Sex AM AF 1M IF Trapped, banded and released at Terry Lake, Larimer Co. 77 61 33 31 64 15 14 29 Trapped, banded and released at Watson Lake Trapped, banded and released at College Lake Hatched from eggs taken in Moffat County; transported to Colorado River, Mesa County 1 Total 139 13 12 25 Trapped in Denver~ transported to Alamosa NWR 51 34 85 Trapped in Denver; transported to Faivre Ponds 2 3 5 Trapped at Terry Lake, Larimer Co.; transported to Terry Lake, Boulder Co. 35 30 65 Trapped at Watson Lake; transported to Terry Lake, Boulder Co. 28 33 61 Trapped at College Lake; transported to Terry Lake, Boulder Co. 19 24 43 Trapped, banded and released at Reservoir 118 (Winter). Totals 141 144 98 95 478 266 250 246 232 994 Considering the size of the wintering population and the general flock status, not only of resident birds but also of the migratory High-Line Population, the objective of increasing the size of the population over the next few years should be ad1;leredto. It is recommended that the number of hunters in the permit area continue to be limited to 3,000. Protective measures, in the form of closures to hunting of most of the San Luis Valley and Mesa, Delta, Garfield and Montrose Counties in the Colorado River drainage, have been effected to protect the nucleus transplanted geese while flocks are becoming established. �- 72 Table 6. January Inventory Canada Geese, Northeast Region, 1959 - 1968. Year 1959 196017 1961 1962 1963 1964 1966!t 1967 1968 1965 Original Release Area College Lake 82 180 251 506 1,~50 867 1,250 2,175 Terry Lake 225 450 875 915 650 975 1,785 2,850 Lindenmeier Lake 1,013 480 450 1,825 Res. No.5 1,000 Res. No. 6 400 437 70 165 125 Res. No. 8 15 37 1,703 2,065 4,175 Res. No. 9 605 Res. No. 15 406 Douglas Lake 7 320 25 Rocky Ridge Res. 60 Cobb Lake 34 60 45 25 Eaton Res. 25 39 22 New Windsor 170 20 220 41 115 957 Windsor Res. 10 Warren Lake 200 Timnath Res. 12 15 11 292 114 Fossil Creek Res. 30 370 512 476 100 900 650 450 Boyd Lake 127 288 1,039 482 150 1,000 1,218 475 Greenwalt Lake 1 300 Sub totals 22 660 1,320 1,945 2,686 3,836 4,287 5,966 9,739 12,212 New Release Area Faivre Ponds 84 Lone Tree Res. 50 Terry Lake (Longmont) 15 610 Va1mont Res. 15 65 80 100 112 995 1,565 Swede Lake 15 11 41 Union 392 388 Sub totals 15 65 15 80 100 580' 1,383 2,300 Denver Area No No No Denver Met. Area Count Count Count 301 975 615 761 1,888 729 Lakes East of Management Area Barr Lake 120 130 355 300 85 325 50 81 259 195 Horse Creek Res. 45 12O., 60 10 500 450 96 Milton Res. 110 250 300 100 250 198 Latham Res. 270 22 170 60 20 100 100 20 209 288 Empire Res. 45 100 100 480 Riverside Res. 80 40 10 50 Jackson Lake 432 300 135 300 462 185 120 Prewitt Res. 300 70 50 125 230 Jumbo Res. 40 So. Platte River 602 425 Sub totals 625 1,039 895 670 475 1,260 1,100 1,514 1,723 1,028 Grand totals 662 1,764 2,215 2,916 4,151 5,791 6,248 9,948 14,345 17,269 1/ First year Larimer County closed to goose hunting. 2/ Additional closed area imposed in Boulder County. �Wintering Populations Table 6 tabulates results of the January, 1968, mid-winter inventory by specific lakes within general areas in Larimer, Weld and Boulder Counties. This information reveals the continuing strong increase in wintering goose numbers as a result of area closures begun in 1960. The continuing tendency of geese belonging to the High-Line Population to winter in northern Colorado is now a matter of interstate concern, inasnruch as recent increases in Colorado wintering birds have occurred at New Mexico's expense. At the Central Flyway Technical Committee meeting in Denver in March, 1968, a special sub-committee representing Montana, Wyoming, Colorado and New Mexico discussed this problem, both in its present form and it's possible future form. Further changes in distribution of this Populationare predicted, as a result of Bureau of Reclamation projects in Montana and Wyoming. The tendency is for these birds to continue wintering further north, unless a definite program aimed at moving them south is put into effect. New Mexico sees no practical limit to the amount of winter habitat which they can provide. It therefore behooves us in Colorado to cooperate in attempting to redistribute these geese, as in certain respects we are already past a practical limit. To this ends the following recommendations were agreed upon by the sub-committee, as steps toward altering the distribution, and keeping up with the annual status, of the High-Line Canada Goose Population: 1. Winter feeding on the Colorado wintering grounds, with the exception of College Lake, Crystal Lake, and Valmont Reservoir, should be entirely discontinued. 2. Further opening of areas in Larimer County now closed to hunting should be effected. In this regard, recommendations on boundary changes should be made at the Northeast Region management meeting, and decisions reached. 3. The date of season opening in the Larimer-Weld-Boulder County permit area should be advanced to approximately November 15. 4. New Mexico should gear their harvest to the segment of the Population which still winters in that state, rather than to the size of the entire ";J?opulation. 5. Colorado and New Mexico should continue the winter banding program. 6. Two winter inventories (December and January) should be made, coordinated among all states. George Merrill of New Mexico will act as coordinator for this and any other activity involving interstate cooperation. 7. The harvest survey should also be coordinated, under the conditions set forth in item no. 6. 8. Montana should continue the breeding ground survey, and banding on the breeding grounds. Dale Witt of Montana will conduct these activities, and will also ~onduct the analysis of band recoveries. Prepared by William H. Rutherford Wildlife Researcher ��October, 1968 - 75 JOB PROGRESS REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT .State of COLORAOO --~----------------------W-88-R-13 Work Plan No. 2 Migratory Bird Investigations Job No. Title of Job: Cooperative Canada Goose Investigation Period Covered: April 1, 1967 to September 1, 1968 Personnel: 4b Jack R. Grieb Publication Plan: A manuscript entitled "The Short Grass Prairie Canada Goose Population" was completed and submitted to the editor of "Wildlife Monographs", Mr. Louis A. Krumholz, on September 1, 1968. Prepared by __~J_a~c_k~R~.~G_r_i_e~b~~~~_ Game Research Chief ��October, 1968 - 77 - JOB PROGRESS REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of. C~O~L~O~RA==D~O~ _ Project No.~W_-~8~8_-R~--=13~ -- Work Plan No.__-=2 _ Migratory Bird Investigations Job No. 5 Title of Job: Arkansas Valley Goose Flock Management Studies Period Covered: Personnel: April 1, 1967 to March, 31, 1968 Permanent Employees -- Don Bogart, V. R. Clark,Alden Jack Grieb, William Rutherford, Bert Widhalm. Forbes, Temporary Employees Claude Brock, Robert Kitzmiller, Horace Moorhead, Gene Nugent, Fred Roth, Mary Lou Selch, Jesse Wheeler. Abstract Water, weather and food conditions were judged.to be excellent for the Canada goose flock in the Arkansas Valley of Colorado during the winter of 1967-68. Aerial census flights over the major wintering areas of this flock indicated that flock status remained excellent. Normal numbers of·geese arrived in Colorado, and much higher than normal numbers remained in the Valley throughout the wintering season. Migration of geese into the Valley occurred earlier than has been the case for the previous fiye years. A delayed season opening for the entire Arkansas Valley, plus.a further delay in opening the Two Buttes Wildlife Area to hunting; accounted at least in part for holding large numbers of geese in Colorado •. Hunter use and total goose harvest at the Two Buttes Wildlife Area were low, due to the more restrictive regulations, but individual hunter success was the highest on record •. Throughout the Valley, hunting pressure and goose harvest were below the all-time high of the previous year,but still substantially above the long-term average. The wounding loss study estimated a loss of about 20 percent of the total hunting mortality throughout the Valley, while an intensive survey of the Two Buttes firing-line wounding loss estimated about 38 percent. Information obtained at the Two Buttes check stations showed that early season goose feeding flights were to the south and southeast, shifting to the north later in the season, and that hunter success held up through the course of hunting season much better than last year. Hunter success increased proportionally as the number of days hunted per individual hunter. A total of 912 geese were newly banded. Trapping and check station data showed that juvenile birds made up a smaller percentage of the flock than �- 78 - during the previous year, indicating that 1967 was not as good a production year as 1966. The sex ratio of trapped geese was close to 50:50. Average weights of geese taken by hunters showed'very close agreement with those taken by'trapping at TWo Buttes, and average weights of geese trapped at John Martin Reservoir were somewhat higher. An updated band recovery analysis showed practically no change in mortality estimates from those determined in 1965--29 percent for first-year recoveries of all age classes, and 27 percent and 26 percent, respectively, for juveniles and adults for all banding and recovery. years combined. Weather effects upon hunter success and goose harvest were not particularly noticeable, the good distribution and high'numbers of geese being judged more responsible for the excellent hunting season. Recommendations for continuing management tec~niques in the Arkansas Valley are presented. �- 79 Objectives: (1) To determine the fall movement of geese into the Arkansas Valley and the size of the wintering flock. (2) To. obtain an estimate of production in the flock. (3) To determine the age composition, mortality, wounding loss, and hunting pressure on the flock. (4) To investigate the relationship between Canada geese wintering on various lakes in the Arkansas Valley. (5) To trap, band, and make measurements of geese at various locations in the Arkansas Valley. (6) To develop new approaches to management of the Two Buttes Public Shooting Area. Procedures: Periodic aerial counts were made in the Arkansas Valley of Colorado, coupled with both ground and aerial counts made throughout the wintering grounds of the Short Grass Prairie Canada Goose Population by various State and Federal personnel. These counts were made for the purpose of determining the size and distribution, of the wintering goose population. Check stations were operated at the Two Buttes State Wildlife Area to determine hunting pressure, harvest, wounding loss, and age ratio of the goose flock. Geese were trapped and banded after the close of hunting season to determine age ratios, mortality rates, ~igration information, and morphological characteristics. Recommendations for special hunting season regulations at Two Buttes were made, and the effects of these regulations during the 1967-68 hunting season were evaluated. Recommendations: (1) The operation of check stations to collect management data on age composition, hunter harvest, wounding loss, and hunting pressure at Two Buttes should be continued. (2) Continuing aerial inventory will be a necessary management technique. (3) A delayed season opening for the entire Arkansas Valley Canada goose wintering area is recommended for the 1968-69 hunting season, to begin on November 16. In addition, it is recommended that hunting on the Two Buttes Wildlife Area be further delayed until November 30. (4) After the November 30 opening at Two Buttes, the two sides of the reservoir should be opened and closed to hunting alternately, at weekly intervals. (5) The lake-shore food plot should be maintained, with proso and milo being planted as was done last year, to offer further inducement for geese to remain on Two Buttes Reservoir. (6) The north field should continue to be farmed as in the past, with the Game, Fish and Parks Division's share to remain unharvested in the field. �- 82 Arrival of birds on the wintering grounds in 1967 occur-red earlier than during the five previous seasons. In the Arkansas Valley, the main contingent arrived between November 3 and 5; movement was largely finished by November 7. The first regular inventory flight on November 17 (see Table 1) showed normal wintering numbers. The number peaked on November 28, with a count of 58,900. Unlike the previous year, when goose numbers dwindled rapidly during December, a flock size in excess of 40,000 was maintained throughout the wintering season. Table l.--Aerial Canada Goose Counts, Arkansas Valley, Colorado, by Dates, 1967-68. Location Nov. 17 Nov. 28 Dec. 7 Jan. 10 Cudahy Reservoir 0 0 450 0 Henry Lake 0 25. 0 0 Meredith Lake 1,850 5,275 2,550 1,400 Dyes Reservoir 0 50 500 450 Holbrook Reservoir 0 0 165 0 Horsecreek Reservoir 700 0 0 0 Blue Lake 1,100 1,790 300 0 Swede Lake 900 1,375 250 0 Eads Group: Sweetwater Reservoir 0 900 1,800 3,200 Nee Noshe Reservoir 15,500 9,000 1,800 3,000 Upper Queens Reservoir 450 950 2,700 150 Lower Queens Reservoir 0 0 1,000 3,500 Thurston Reservoir 0 0 '0 35 Sheridan Lake 0 25 150 0 Brandon Ponds 0 15 0 0 Two Buttes Reservoir 13,500 15,500 15,000 16,800* Turk's Pond 5,000 5,000 8,800 11,500* John Martin Reservoir 5,500 15,675 6,000 2,500 Beeker Pond 0 0 0 150 Arkansas River 0 0 0 32 TOTALS 44,500 58,880 41,500 42,682 *Grand counts Table 2.--Post-hunting Season Status of Short Grass Prairie Canada Goose Population, 1960-68, Data Generally from Regular Mid-winter· Inventories. Year Number of Birds Yenr Number of Birds 1960 77 ,709 1965 103,435 1/ 1961 103,355 1966 110,485 1962 80,133 1967 111,452 1963 93,940 1968 127,903 1964 81,221 1/ Inventory of February 15, 1966, substituted for unsatisfactory January inventory. �-~ - Table 3.--January Inventory of Canada Geese, Arkansas Valley, Colorado, 19481968. Goose count Year Goose count Year Goose count Year 40,250 17 1962 25,110 1955 4,798 1948 35,889 1963 24,212 1956 12,286 1949 33,750 1964 24,617 1957 13,170 1950 37,693 1965 35,894 1958 19,320 1951 38,635~1 1966 44,660 1959 30,463 1952 29,835 1967 37,394 1960 20,236 1953 42,682 1968 31,360 1961 20,280 1954 11 Inventory of February 7, 1962, substituted for January, 1962, inventory. 11 Inventory of February 15, 1966 substituted for January, 1966, inventory. Evaluation of Two Buttes Wildlife Area Special Regulations: During the 1967-68 waterfowl hunting season, special regulations for the Two Buttes Management Area were in effect for the first time, as an experiment to determine whether a limitation on the degree of firing-line harassment would be instrumental in holding geese at Two Buttes Reservoir. Past years' experience has indicated that this harassment was the primary contributing factor in a departure of birds from Two Buttes, occurring about mid-December, and subsequent failure of birds to return during the remainder of the wintering season. This mid-December departure had, in fact, become almost a predictable occurrence. In an attempt to retain geese in the Arkansas Valley, in Baca County, and at Two Buttes Reservoir in good numbers during hunting season, the regulations this year called for hunting in the Arkansas Valley, with the exception of the Two Buttes Management Area, to open on November 18, a date calculated to occur after the arrival of geese in the Valley. Experience with delayed opening dates during the past two years has shown that some degree of settling down can be expected of the birds, when they are not subjected to immediate hunting pressure. The regulations called for a further delay in season opening, until December 2, at the Two Buttes Management Area; following this opening, the two sides· of the Reservoir were opened and closed to hunting alternately at weekly intervals. Population figures for the Two Buttes area are, in all cases, given for both Two Buttes Reservoir and Turk's Pond, as there is so much interchange of geese between these two locations that the two are inseparable. Turk's Pond is a small privately owned body of water about 12 miles southeast of Two Buttes Reservoir. On the day before season opening (November 17) the goose population in the Arkansas Valley was 44,500. Of these, 13,500 were at Two Buttes and 5,000 at Turk's Pond. Thus, the Two Buttes area had about 42 percent of the total Valley population. Bright moonlight conditions for opening day and a few days following undoubtedly contributed to rather poor hunter success, as birds did a great deal of night feeding. The numbers and distribution of geese remained fairly constant for about a week, then increased to a total of 58,900 in the Valley on .November 28, with 15,500 at Two Buttes and 5,000 at Turk's. This dropped the Two Buttes area percentage of the total to 35 percent, as most of the increase in goose numbers occurred in the Eads-John Martin areas. However, this distribution lasted only a short time. By November 30, Two Buttes had 18,000 geese and Turk's had 6,000. By December 2, which was opening day at Two Buttes, there �- 8l.t - were 16,000 geese on Two Buttes and 11,000 at Turk's. These rapid population buildups occurred at the expense of the Eads-John Martin areas, where hunting pressure had been heavy following the opening on November 18. Between November 28 and December 7, the peak Valley population of 58,900 dropped to 41,500. This loss probably consisted of birds which would have gone on south to Texas anyway, regardless of hunting pressure, food, or weather conditions. However, while the total Valley population was dropping by about 17,000 geese, the Two Buttes area lost only about 3,000. On December 7, Two Buttes had 15,000 geese and Turk's had 8,800. Thus, the Two Buttes area percentage of the total increased to 57 percent. By December 10, geese were beginning to concentrate at Turk's at the expense of Two Buttes, but the area total continued to remain at about 23,000. The geese were nearly all gone from Two Buttes for a few days (December 12-16), then started to come back. This return was probably a result of hunting pressure at Turk's and occurred in spite of the opening of the Two Buttes south side firing-line during the week of December 16-22. By December 21, there were 13,000 geese at Two Buttes, with the area total still holding at about 24,000. On January 4, there were 16,000 geese at Two Buttes and 13,000 at Turk's. On January 10, the midwinter inventory was flown, showing a total of 42,700 geese in the Valley, of which 16,800 were at Two Buttes and 11,500 at Turk's. Thus, this year's January inventory showed the Two Buttes area with 66 percent of the total Valley goose population, while the January inventory for the previous year showed it as having only 42 percent of the total. These inventories showed that at no time did the Valley population drop below 40,000 birds, and that the percentage of the Valley total continued to increase in the Two Buttes area as the season progressed. Certainly this progressive increase must be attributed in part to the continuing heavy field hunting pressure which occurred in the northern part of the Valley, as well as to the special Two Buttes Management Area regulations. Generally, field hunters did not take advantage of the increased numbers of geese which stayed all during hunting season in Baca County, Some firing-line hunters complained about the restrictions at Two Buttes, and a number of them hunted at Turk's, but the field hunters continued to hunt the-Eads-John Martin areas, probably through force of habit and previous landowner contacts. Then, later in the season, the Two Buttes birds started using the maize field in the closed area on the north side, thus becoming unavailable to field hunters. One week (January 6-12), when all Two Buttes birds were using the north side food plot, and the north side firingline was opened to hunting, accounted for 35 percent of the total season bag on-the Management Area. The departure of geese in mid-December from Two Buttes to Turk's was definitely not related to hunting pressure, as the south side firing-line was closed during the week the movement took place. It is believed that food conditions were mostly responsible for this shift. The return of geese from Turk's back to Two Buttes definitely was related to hunting pressure at Turk's. The small food plot planting of mixed maize and proso between the cabin and the lake was certainly effective in holding geese at Two Buttes, although its effectiveness was obscured by the fact -that it was completely consumed before the opening of hunting on the Management Area. This technique needs to be evaluated further, with the size of the food plot being increased to the maximum area available. �- 85 - Table 4 compares the goose harvest, hunting pressure, and hunter success at the Two Buttes State Wildlife Area during the past season with that of previous years. Although both the number of individual hunters and the total number of hunter-days use of the area were reduced as a result of the. special regulations in effect, the number of geese bagged was only slightly lower than last year. Hunter success, as measured by average bag per hunter and per hunter-day, was the highest on record. Obviously, the reason for the high hunter success was the fact that geese in good numbers were present at Two Buttes throughout the hunting season. The special Two Buttes regulations were unquestionably responsible, at Least;' in part, for holding geese in good numbers in Baca County while areas to the north were losing birds. The interchange between Two Buttes and Turk's is normal, and is to be expected as long as the feeding practices continue at Turk's. While Two Buttes did lose geese to Turk's, they stayed in Baca County instead of going to Texas. Furthermore, they ~ ~ !£ Two Buttes. Past years' experience has shown that once they leave Two Buttes they do not come back in large numbers. We have demonstrated that this type of management works during a good feed year. What effect it will have during a poor feed year remains to be seen. Table 4.--Goose Harvest, Hunting Pressure, and Hunter Success, Two Buttes Wildlife Area, 1961-1967. Ave. bag Ave. bag No. of No. of No. of per hunter geese per individual bagged hunter day days hunter hunters Year 0.20 0.40 945 4,758 2,392 1961-62 0.13 0.28 418 3,178 1,479 1962-63 0.20 0.42 728 3,659 1,750 1963-64 0.19 721 0.36 3,946 1,996 1964-65 0.18 0.36 941 5,264 2,596 1965-66 0.20 0.39 493 1966••67 2,413 1,257 0.28 0.52 433 1,554 840 1967-68 Hunter Harvest: The operation of check stations at the Two Buttes State Wildlife Area during the 1967-68 hunting season resulted in collection of an essentially complete set of data. Table 5 presents data on harvest, wounding loss, hunting pressure, and hunter success. Table 6 compares the current goose harvest in the Arkansas Valley with the thirteen-year average, indicating that the total harvest during the past year was up 11.1 percent from the thirteen-year average, but down 35.9 percent from the record year of 1966-67. Kiowa and ProwersCounties showed decreases in the percentage of total Valley harvest, while Baca and Bent Counties showed increases. Throughout the Valley, the number of hunters was down 25.4 percent from last year, but the average season bag per hunter decreased only slightly from last year's record high of 2.59 to 2.23. �- 86 Table 5.--Goose Harvest, Wounding Loss, Hunting Pressure, and Hunter Success, Two Buttes Wildlife Area 1967-68. Item Resident Non-resident Total Goose Harvest: Adult 214 31 245 Juvenile 144 22 166 Unknown 19 3 22 Total 377 56 433 Per.cent Adults Juveniles 59.7 40.3 58.5 41.5 59.6 40.4 Woundirtg Loss 268 Successful Hunters: Number Av. bg./Suc. hunter 229 1.64 37 1.51 266 1.63 All Hunters: Number Percent Successful Total Hunter days Hunter days/hunter Av. bg./hunter Av. bg./hunter day 731 31.3 1,357 1.85 .52 .28 109 34.0 197 1.81 .51 .28 840 31.7 1,554 1.85 .52 .28 Table 6.--Goose harvest ear County Baca Kiowa Prowers Bent Crowley Pueblo Huerfano Otero Las Animas TOTALS Lakes Two Buttes and Turk's Eads and Blue Two Buttes and Eads John Martin, Blue and Horsecreek Meredith and Henry Horsecreek, Cherew Group, Dyes and Holbrook 13- '70 No. 5,185 3,232 2,329 37.1 23.1 . 16.6 No. 7,144 2,427 901 46.0 15.6 5.8 1,780 691 182 133 12.7 4.9 1.3 0.9 3.745 1,017 162 0 24.1 6.5 1.0 0.0 357 120 14,009 2.5 0.9 100.0 139 23 15,558 0.9 0.1 100.0 '70 �- 87 Table 7 lists goose hunting statistics for the past 14 years, and shows that 1967 stamp sales increased .5.7percent ove;r the previous year. This increase must be attributed to an increase in the number of duck hunters, as goose hunting pressure statewide actually decreased from the year before. It has previously been shown that goose hunting and duck hunting are largely independent of each other. Table 7.--Goose hunting season statistics, 1954-67. Arkansas Va11el Average Estimated Estimated Stamp bag kill goose hunters season season sales Dates of Year 1.04 7,372 12/30 32,450 7,071 1954 11/ 1 1.54 13,904 11/1 12/30 39,107 9,054 1955 1.05 10,276 9,833 36,303 1956 11/9 1/ 7 1.39 12,656· 9,113 11/2 11/31 41,794 1957 1.51 15,205 10,082 11/17 - 1/15 41,897 1958 1.61 14,309 31,431 8,888 1959 10/26 - 1/ 8 1.39 13,62·9 10/26 - 1/ 8 30,592 9,838 1960 1.68 11,724 11/10 24,854 1961 1/ 8 7,577 1.58 1962 1/13 6,021 9,495 10/31 17,701 11/2 22,940 6,668 2.17 14,444 1963 1/15 18,474 1964 11/2 25,282 8,016 2.30 1/15 1.52 9,613 1965 11/2 20,537 6,313 1/15 1966 2.59 24,269 11/19 - 1/15 29,377 9,357 2.23 1967 11/18 1/14 31,064 6,975 15,558 - - - - - Wounding Loss: Wounding loss in the 1967-68 hunting season was estimated by two methods: (1) The small game hunter random survey indicated a loss of 19.8 percent of the total goose harvest mortality; and (2) check station information permits calculation of loss on the firing-line of a minimum of 38.2 percent (Table 8). In the past, check station figures on wounding loss were commonly calculated to be lower than the random survey figures, because of lack of adequate sampling methods. It had long been felt that wounding loss on the firing-line far exceeded overall hunting season wounding loss; and this year a sampling procedure designed to project reported wounding loss to the total number of hunterdays of use on the firing-line was developed. The daily tabulation of hunters asked, number of geese reported wounded, and total hunter registration are presented in Table 8, with the tabular totals and the projected total of geese wounded. It is felt that this estimate of wounding loss on the firing-line is the most accurate one determined to date o Hunter Habits and Characteristics: Table 9 shows the relative goose kill, hunting pressure and hunter success for weekly intervals on the Two Buttes State Wildlife Area. Variations during the season are caused, of course, by the combination of varying hunter use (weather, weekends vs. weekdays, etc.) and varying hunting conditions (weather, goose population present, changes in daily goose flight patterns, etc.). �- 88 - Table 8.--Goose wounding loss. Two Buttes firing-line. 1967-68. No. of hunters No. of geese Total hunters Date in sample reported wounded registered Dec. 2 96 10 208 3 118 13 136 4 50 13 50 5 50 3 50 6 38 10 45 7 44 1 44 8 30 1 42 9 99 12 99 10 64 7 68 11 21 9 21 12 16 4 16 13 9 8 9 14 12 0 12 15 3 0 3 16 21 0 32 17 31 0 31 18 6 1 6 19 5 0 5 20 6 1 6 21 4 0 5 22 7 0 8 23 22 14 22 24 16 6 16 25 0 0 0 26 21 1 21 27 34 6 36 28 38 0 41 29 33 10 38 30 58 3 81 31 24 0 34 Jan. 1 0 0 13 2 0 0 1 3 2 0 10 4 4 0 5 5 6 4 6 6 86 44 88 7 66 18 70 8 14 2 20 9 30 5 32 10 19 6 24 11 23 8 38 12 11 2 20 13 20 0 33 14 2 1 9 TOTALS 1,294 223 1,554 Projected total geese wounded--268, ! �- 89 - Table 9.--Hunting pressure and goose harvest by weekly intervals, Two Buttes Wildlife Area~ 1967-68. Successful No. of geese Av. bag per Number of Side open Week hunter da:y hunter da~s bagged to hunting hunter da~s interval .307 176 147 573 South 12/ 2 to 12/ 8 .143 32 28 224 North 12/ 9 to 12/15 .010 1 1 96 South 12/16 to 12/22 .324 58 44 179 North 12/23 to 12/29 .041 6 6 145 South 12/30 to 1/ 5 .520 153 116 294 II. 6 to 1/12 North .163 7 5 43 South 1/13 to 1/14 .279 433 347 1,554 TOTALS Feeding flights from the Reservoir were generally to the south and southeast during the first two weeks of hunting season. Following this, a shift of flights to the north was noted, which built up until all geese on the reservoir were flying north by late December. This was brought about by the combination of the alternate weekly openings and closings of the two firing-lines, and by the extensive use of the north-side food plot later in the season. Hunter use of the north-side firing-line was not as great as the south-side firing-line because of fewer pits and therefore decreased ability to accommodate hunters, but total goose kill and average bag per hunter-day were greater on the north side (Tables 9 and 10). Check station data were again examined to deternline the influence of repeated trips by hunters upon individual hunter success at the Two Buttes State Wildlife Area. These data are presented in Table 11. There is of course, no question that the hunters who make two or more trips to the area should have a higher rate of success than do the one-trip hunters, based simply on whether the hunter is or is not successful at least once during the season. Thus, it is to be expected that the ratio of successful to unsuccessful hunters should increase as the number of days hunted increases. However, as shown in Table 11, the average bag per hunter day also increases as the number of days hunted increases, indicating that it is the better hunters who make repeat trips to the Two Buttes State Wildlife Area. It is interesti~g to note that the average bag per hunter day for the one-day hunters showed a considerable increase over last year, .229 compared with .163 in 1966-67. Special Banding Investigation: During the 1967-68 wintering season, trapping and banding of geese in the Arkansas Valley was done following the close of hunt~ng season. The trapping site at Two Buttes Reservoir had been pre-baited for about a week, and on January 17 (three days after the close of hunting season) the first catch, consisting of 400 small Canada geese, was made. Following this catch, difficulty was experienced in getting the geese to go back on the bait. The trapping operation was then moved to John Martin Reservoir, where a total of 178 geese, in two separate catches, were trapped. Difficulty was again encountered in getting birds back on the bait at John Martin Reservoir. However, baiting had been continued at the Two Buttes trapping site, and when geese started using the bait again the operation was moved back to Two Buttes. A total of 372 geese, in five separate catches, were trapped following �- 90 - Table 10.--Resident and non-resident 'hunter-days of use by pit location, Two Buttes Wildlife Areaz 1967-68. Pit Hunter-da~s Pit Hunter-da~s Pit Hunter-da~s Pit Hunter-da~s No. Res. Non-res. No. Res. Non-res. No. Res. Non-res~ No. Res. Non-res. South Side 1 13 0 19 18 2 37 5 0 56 13 0 2 -8 9 20 1 18 6 38 2 57 4 2 17 3 0 21 14 4 39 8 2 58 6 1 4 19 0 22 12 9 40 0 2 59 5 0 5 14 3 23 17 2 42 8 1 60 2 0 6 19 1 24 20 2 43 .5 0 61 1 0 7 25 2 25 27 2 44 6 0 62 2 0 8 10 4 26 20 0 45 8 0 65 1 1 9 16 1 27 12 ,1 0 5 10 46 0 66 10 17 8 28 24 1 47 11 0 68 4 0 11 18 4 29 11 0 48 7 0 69 1 0 12 23 5 30 15 1 49 2 7 70 7 0 13 29 1 31 2 7 50 9 1 73 3 0 14 19 1 32 14 3 51 0 2 74 3 0 15 22 1 33 6 3 52 4 1 unk. 0 3 16 27 5 34 8 1 53 2 2 17 10 5 35 5 0 54 8 1 18 16 2 36 7 2 55 3 1 North Side 46 11 19 41 5 20 36 2 21 43 4 22 33 2 23 20 0 24 12 5 25 11 2 26 17 2 27 .Resident: 738 Non-resident: 116 Total: 854 Goose kill:- 190 Bag/hunter-day: 0.22 1 5 0 10 2 4 0 11 3 9 2 12 4 12 0 13 5 12 0 14 6 18 2 15 7 33 6 16 8 34 5 17 9 45 5 18 TOTALS: South Side: GRAND TOTAL: Resident: Non-resident: Total: Goose kill: Bag/hunter-day: 17 .<7 12 9 32 6 23 6 27 0 24 2 22 0 9 4 4 0 North Side: 1,357 197 1,554 433 0.28 28 29 31 32 33 B unk. 2 2 2 2 4 4 2 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 Resident: Non-resident: Total: Goose kill: Bag/hunter-day: 619 81 700 243 0.34 �- 91 - the second move. Trapping was terminated with the quota of 1,000 having been nearly met. The trapping and banding results for the 1967-68 season are presented in Table 12. Table 11.--Re1ationship of number of individual hunters, days hunted, and hunting success, Two Buttes Wildlife Area, 1967-68. Number of Number of Number of Ratio of succ. No. of Average days unsuccessful successful to unsucc. geese bag per hunted hunters hunters hunters bagged hunter day .1 82 371 0.221 104 0.229 2 143 76 103 0.531 0.235 1.200 3 40 48 81 0.307 4 14 34 2.428 54 0.281 5 3 16 43 5.333 0.453 6 1 3 15 0.625 ~.33r/ 7 o 2 12 ~nf.0.857 2 8 1 0.500 0.292 7 9 o o o 0.000 0.000/ . f .-1 10 o 2 ~n 7 0.350 11 o o o 0.000 0.000 / 1 12 o 1 2 0.167 info -/ . f • -1 13 o 1 ~n 5 0.385 TOTALS 266 514 0.463 433 0.279 1/ A number cannot be divided by zero; hence this ratio is expressed as "infinity." Table 12.--Arkansas Valley banding results, 1967-68. .Location Date No. of geese banded No. of recap. 1/17/68 Two Buttes Res. 382 18 1/24/68 John Martin Res. 126 6 1/31/68 John Martin Res. 46 0 2/ 1/68 Two Buttes Res. 34* 0 2/ 4/68 Two Buttes Res. 143 2 2/ 5/68 Two Buttes Res. 52 3 2/ 7/68 Two Buttes Res. 16 1 2/16/68 Two Buttes Res. l13 8 TOTALS 912 38 * Includes one lesser snow goose (Chen hlEerborea). Total 400 132 46 34* 145 55 17 121 950 Information obtained from trapping and banding geese, along with certain information from check stations, is presented under appropriate sub-headings in the following: Age and Sex ComEosition: Age determination of all geese trapped was by notched tail-feather method, double checked by cloacal examination. Age determination of geese checked through check stations was by notched tail-feather method. �- 92 - Table 13 compares the percentage of young birds between the trapped sample and the check station sample, with the trapped sample separated by location. The total of 992 trapped geese listed in Table 13, compared with the total of 950 in Table 12, includes geese which were released without being banded, plus some which became casualties. The total of 409 geese aged in the check station sample as listed in Table 13 is lower than the total of 433 listed in Tables 4 and 5 because some hunters would not allow check station personnel to pull the tail-feathers. Table 13.--Age comparison of the Arkansas Valley Canada goose flock, 1967-68, as estimated bx: traEEing and check station results. No. of Percent No. of Percent Total ~oung adults x:oung adults birds Trapped sample: Two Buttes Res. 220 27.0 595 73.0 815 John Martin Res. 72 40.7 105 59.3 177 Total trapped birds 292 29.4 700 70.6 992 Check station sample: Two Buttes Res. 164 40.1 245 59.9 409 Normally, the percentage of young birds in the check station sample is higher than in the trapped sample, and this condition held true this year. This year, percentages of young birds in both the check station sample and in the trapped sample were lower than last year. These data, combined with information relayed by various people working in Canada, indicate that the Short Grass Prairie Population experienced a poorer production year in 1967 than in 1966. Information on sex ratios was derived from the trapped sample only, and is presented in Table 14. These data show a fairly evenly balanced sex ratio, consistent with the data from previous years. Table l4.--Sex composition of the Arkansas Valley Canada goose flock 1967-68, from traEEed samEle. No. of Percent No. of Percent Total Location males males females females birds Two Buttes Res. 403 49.4 412 50.6 815 John Martin Res. 84 47.5 93 52.5 177 TOTALS 487 49.1 505 50.9 992 Goese Weights: The mean weights of hunter-harvested birds and of trapped birds are presented in Table 15. Of the 433 Canada geese which were checked through the Two Buttes check stations, useable weight data were recorded on 425. The mean weights of birds from both sources show less variation between age classes and between sources than was true last year. Also, while birds trapped at John Martin Reservoir averaged somewhat greater in weight than those trapped at Two Buttes, there was not as much difference as was noted last year. �- 93 Table l5.--Comparison of weights of geese from trapped and check station samples, Arkansas Valley, 1967-68. No. of Average No. of Average Number Average adults wt., lbs. juveniles wt., Lbs , of geese wt., lbs. Source Two Buttes 425 5.34 170 5.23 255 5.41 check station Two Buttes trapping 595 5.36 220 5.15 815 5.31 John Martin trapping 101 5.70 70 5.28 171 5.63 Analysis of Banding Data: Tables 16, 17 and 18 present band recovery data from all Arkansas Valley post-season banding efforts from 1951 through the hunting season of 1966-67. Recovery data from birds banded during 1966-67 have not yet been received from the Migratory Bird Population Station. In each of the three tables, estimates of mortality rates calculated by the composite-dynamic method of analysis have been made. The data show nearly identical estimates of average annual mortality as were calculated by Grieb (1965) following the collection of recovery data from the 1964-65 hunting season. Comparison of mortality rates from birds banded as juveniles with birds banded as adults in the Arkansas Valley during all banding ye?rs continues to indicate very close agreement. The mortality rate for first year recoveries of both age classes combined is .29, while juveniles and adults have mortality rates of .27 and .26, respectively, for all banding and recovery years combined. This close agreement is to be expected, because juveniles have already experiemced their first hunting season by the time they are banded during post-season banding operations, and are no longer juveniles at the time of first-year recovery during the next hunting season. Effects of Weather upon Goose Flights and Harvest: The aerator was again used at Two Buttes Reservoir, but had to be placed in shallow water where its effectiveness was limited. Weather cold enough to freeze the lake occurred in early December, but the geese maintained their own spot of open water a considerable distance to the east of the aerator and at no time did they use the open water provided by the aerator. At the same time, most of the other lakes and reservoirs in the Valley also froze over, so that very little actual effect on goose distribution occurred as a result. The effect of weather upon goose flights was difficult to assess. No major storms occurred during hunting season, and there were a number of "bluebird" days. It would seem that this situ~tion would not be conducive to high hunter success, yet the success as measured by average season bag per hunter was one �- 94 - of the highest in recent years. Excellent distribution of geese and maintenance of a larger than normal flock size during hunting season, making a . maximum number available to hunters, seem to be theprimary reasons for the high success rate. Prepared by: William H. Rutherfora Wildlife Researcher �Table 16.--Composite dynamic analysis of band recoveries from Canada geese banded as adults, Arkansas Valley, Colorado, 1950-1966. Number Year 12 13 10 11 8 9 6 7 5 4 2 3 1 banded banded 1 2 0 2 3 3 12 5 7 10 23 19 45 344 1950-51 2 4 7 7 6 9 11 21 6 23 24 37 71 650 1951-52 2 2 4 6 12 10 20 9 25 31 50 85 55 900 1952-53 X X X X X X X X X X X X X 0 1953-54 X X X X X X X X X X X X 0 1954-55· X X X X X X X X X X X 0 1~55-56 X X X X X X X X X X 0 1956-57 2 2 2 8 8 5 17 27 33 347 1957-58 1 2 1 4 4 9 7 21 217 1958-59 6 4 12 8 6 16 27 250 1959-60 12 4 7 18 13 29 306 1960-61 13 12 5 18 26 334 1961-62 4 20 14 35 369 1962-63 12 14 24 335 1963-64 40 55 780 1964-65 X 0 1965-66 11 8 5 24 15 24 34 59 87 109 270 181 451 4832 Total Recov. Banded birds eligible Recoveries per 1,000 banded 93.3 \56.1 44.7 29.3 26.0 19.6 12.6 9.7 10.7 5.8 1 1 4.2 2.6 0.5 177 .5 45.3 77 .5 132.8 233.6 326.9 , 103.5 57.9 1 1 344 1.01 2.9 ~= 326.9 230.7 Alive going into period 16 994 1894 1894 7.9 15 0 1 1894 1894 1894 2241 2708 3348 4052 2458 3014 3717 4832 4832 14 1 0 0 4.4 11.2 24.9 35.6 17.0 7.0 2.9 3.9/ ~: 1261.9 932.1 Mortality rate 28.5 24.8 25.9 \0 \J1 �Table 17.--Compositedynamic analysis of band recoveries from Canada geese banded as juveniles, Arkansas Valley, Colorado 1950-1966. Year Number banded banded 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1950-51 300 31 25 11 11 4 5 4 7 1 1 o o o 1 1951-52 . 628 58 31 33 20 16 8 7 6 4 4 o 2 5 1 1952-53 52 578 25 25 24 20 11 11 9 2 4 4 1 3 1 1953-54 o X X X X X X X X X X X X X 1954-55; X o X X X X X X X X X X X 1955-56 o X X X X X X X X X X X 1956-57 o X X X X X X X X X X 1957-58 176 21 16 6 4 4 1 4 o 3 1958-59 298 25 16 16 8 7 3 o 1 1959-60 167 10 16 3 14 8 o o 1960-61 248 15 4 4 7 8 7 1961-62 123 12 10 10 o 1 1962-63 399 40 24 9 14 1963";64 251 11 16 11 1964-65 198 .15 7 1965-66 o X -299 1,28 Total Recov. 3366 181 102 68 35 26 23 10 4 9 6 5 3 Banded birds eligible 3366. Recoveries per 1,000 banded 88.8 Alive going -tnto period Mortality rate 3168 3366 40.4 \53.8 306.1 2147 2395 27.0 35.0 163.5 \217.3 29.0 2518 2917 12.1 14.6 88.1 123.1 46.5 61.1 1682 1980 1506 1506 3.7 11.6 217.3 6 .0 22.8 34.4 810.0 19.1 26.8 1506 1506 2.7 15 o o 'cR o 1 928 1506 3.3 4.0 16 1 300 1.1 2.0 I 0 •0 306.11 = 13.1 6.4 10.4 1.1 3.1 1 0.0 1116.1[27.4 �Table 18.--Composite dynamic analysis of band recoveries from Canada geese of all age classes, Arkansas Valley, 1950-1966. Number Year 2 6 10 11 12 banded· 1 3 4 5 7 9 banded 21 11 17 10 4 2 0 48 30 9 3 644 76 1950-51 12 11 68 14 18 13 9 129 57 43 37 7 1278 1951-52 20 21 12 80 45 31 10 6 5 137 75 55 1478 1952-53 ·X X X X X X X X X X X X 0 1953-54 X X X X X X X X X X X 0 X 1954-55 X X X X X X X X X X X 0 1955-56 X X X X X X X X X X 0 1956-57 2 23 12 6 5 54 43 9 9 523 1957-58 2 12 11 1 25 23 5 46 515 1958-59 26 26 4 6 43 16 9 417 1959-60 22 12 14 17 19 44 554 1960-61 22 14 30 5 36 457 1961-62 23 44 18 768 75 1962-63 23 25 40 586 1963-64 47 70 978 1964-65 X 0 1965-66 24 15 14 211 155 94 60 47 34 451 309 750 Total Recov. 8198 ~. Banded birds eligible Recoveries per 1,000 banded 7220 8198 5866 6634 8198 42.8 91.5 4438 12.4 26.4 31.8 \55.0 3923 4855 5409 17.4 7.1 15 1 1 16 1 4 2 1 X 10 2.9 Mortality rate 318.9 \227.4 28.7 I 1.6 L'!: 318.9 225.8 Alive going into period 644 1.0 1.2 4.1 '0 --l 1922 3400 3400 4.4 8.7 10.6 14 2 1 1 3400 3400 3400 13 1 4 5 172.4 97.8 129.6 31.0 54.0 71.4 15.2 886.6 2.6 / 1.6 ~: 1207.1 25.5 26.4 41.6 22.3 6.7 10.8 3.8 ��October, 1968 - 99 JOB PROGRESS REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of - COLORADO Project No. Migratory Bird Investigations W-88-R-13 Work Plan No. ~3 Title of Job: Investigation of Mallard Management Units of Eastern Colorado Period Covered: Personnel: _ Job No. 6 December 1, 1967 through September 1, 1968 Charles Hayes, Dale Horne, Jack Randall, Richard Hopper, Jack Grieb, Bob Kitzmiller, Steve Steinert, Thomas Jensen, Bob Clark, Larry Green, Perry Olson, Gail Boyd, Charles Roberts, Alfred Hemmert, Alfred Heins, Dwayne Finch, Edward Kochman, Russell Mason, Marcus Elkins and Howard Funk. Abstract The fifth year of intensive trapping efforts produced a total of 7,161 mallards banded in eastern Colorado during the winter of 1967-68. As in previous years, wintering mallard. populations were composed of approximately 60 percent males and only about 5 percent of the immature birds present carried lead shot in their bodies. Mallards present in eastern Colorado increased to approximately 300,000 birds in January, 1968. Band recovery reports from the 1964-66 hunting seasons were updated and indicate most mallards wintering in Colorado tend to remain within the western Central Flyway, Alberta and Saskatchewan for their entire life span. The "homing" instinct for these winter-banded birds is very evident. Band recovery rates are relatively low, averaging between land 2 percent and annual survival of males and females is estimated to be almost 90 and 50 percent, respectively. Results of State and Federal wing surveys suggest that the average Colorado mallard bag is composed of approximately 75 percent males. This factor, coupled with high estimated survival of drakes, indicates mallard males could withstand much more hunting pressure than they now receive. �- 100 - Segment Objectives: 1. To trap and band mallards in the following seven study areas for the purpose of obtaining migration, life history and annual mortality data: (a) South Platte Valley Denver to Greeley, (b) South Platte Valley Greeley to Fort Morgan, (c) South Platte Valley Fort Morgan to Sterling, (d) South Platte Valley Sterling to Julesburg, (3) the Fort Collins area, (f) the Bonny Reservoir area, and (g) the Arkansas River Valley". 2. To conduct surveys for the purpose of obtaining winter population estimates of mallards; age and sex ratios in the hunters bag, wintering populations and trap samples; and hunter pressure and harvest data by study areas. 3. To gather and tabulate band recovery data from the Bird Banding Office from mallards banded in Colorado since 1963-64 for use in making preliminary estimates on migration and harvest routes and annual mortality and for use in final analysis during a later segment. Procedures: Methods of trapping and conducting surveys were described in a previous segment report (Funk 1964). Trapping efforts were initiated in the Bonny Reservoir area followed by work in the Arkansas and South Platte valleys. Because all band recovery data from the 1967-68 hunting season were not received from the Bird Banding Office, data from the previous three hunting seasons were updated and compiled for this segment report. Recommendations: Trapping and banding in winter should be continued in eastern Colorado in order to allow detection of changes in migration patterns and annual mortality rates due to possibilities of relaxation in regulations in the near future. However, banding quotas per study area should be reduced to about 600 birds, but the Arkansas Valley should be divided into two study units, each with its own quota. Also, feasibility of banding in the San Luis Valley during"winter should be investigated. Fluoroscopy studies should be terminated because sufficient data for comparison of hunting pressure between flyways has been gathered. �- 101 - INVESTIGATION OF MALLARD MANAGEMENT UNITS OF EASTERN COLORADO Howard D. Funk Introduction In 1963, an intensive mallard investigation was launched to determine the feasibility of managing eastern Colorado wintering mallards on a flock basis. Included in the study was an accelerated winter banding program to facilitate gathering of current data on migration and mortality rates to compare with and/or supplement findings from previous y~ars. A variety of surveys regarding population dynamics, hunting pressure and harvest success were also initiated. The remaining Central Flyway states joined Colorado in a cooperative mallard investigation in 1965 to study flock management possibilities throughout the Flyway. Thus, the Colorado investigation was continued in order to obtain comparable data over a three-year period. Colorado now has five years of banding completed and other states have three years of banding. Final analysis of data will begin after the 1968-69 hunting season. However, this report is concerned only with data gathered from birds banded in Colorado. Results Trapping and Banding: The 1967-68 trapping program was again successful with 7,161 mallards banded in the seven study units. Numbers of mallards banded are shown in Table 1 by age, sex and unit of banding. Figure 1 illustrates locations of the study units in the State. All birds were banded after the close of the 1967-68 duck hunting season. Less than 50 ducks of other species were banded, mainly because they are not present in any great number during winter. The banding quota was to have been 250 mallards of each age and sex for each study unit for a total of 7,000 birds. Adult females again were the most difficult to capture and quotas were not met in most units. However, birds of other sex and age classes were banded in greater number to meet the banding quota of 1,000 mallards per unit. Trapping conditions were excellent in 1967-68 because of heavy snow cover and very cold weather. Thus, little difficulty was experienced in trapping birds, except for adult females. The latter is believed due to relatively 1~ numbers of adult females actually present in the populations and to trap selectivity. Numerous trapped birds were released unban4~d when individual quotas by age and sex were reached in each study unit. The reason for this is that too many banded birds in a population will create a hunter band reporting bias. Therefore, efforts were made to keep total quotas at 1,000 birds per unit and each individual quota by age and sex at 250 birds. All ducks were captured in Salt Plains traps, eliminating comparisons of age and sex ratios of birds captured in various trap types. ��- 103 - Table l.--Numbers and percentages of mallards in the banded sample by sex, age, and area, eastern Colorado. 1967-68. Adult Management Numbers Units Banded (4) Fort Collins 1,093 (6) DenverGreeley 1,061 (3) Gree leyFort Morgan 1,000 (2) Fort MorganSterling 1,017 (1) SterlingJulesburg 1,000 (9) Bonny Reservoir 1,000 (10) Arkansas Valley 990 Totals and Average % 7 ,161 Male No. % Female No. % Immature Male Female No. % No. % 250 22.9 255 23.3 245 22.4 343 31.4 295 27.8 200 18.9 286 27.0 279 26.3 253 25.3 174 17 .4 252 25.2 321 32.1 347 34.1 209 20.5 253 24.8 209 20.6 254 25.4 169 16.9 263 26.3 314,·31.4 248 24.8 187 18.7 267 26.7 298 29.8 270 27.3 238 24.0 261 26.4 221 22.3 20.0 1,827 Z5.5 1,985 27.7 1,917 26.8 1,432 !/For simplicity in reporting, Units 10, 12 and 13 in the Arkansas Valley will be referred to as Unit 10. Winter Sex Ratio Counts: As in past years, ground sex ratio counts were conducted in the various study areas. Purpose of sex ratio counts is to determine flock characteristics by unit and to obtain information to evaluate trapping biases by age and sex. Results indicated wintering mallard flocks in all Colorado study units are composed of approximately 60 percent males (Table 2). This is similar to results from the previous four years of study. Fluoroscopy: Fluoroscopic examination of young-of-the-year mallards for embedded shot was limited to two study units in 1967-68. Purpose of this examination is to obtain comparative information on hunting pressure between areas. Young birds are chosen as best indicators because they carry shot from only the current hunting season. As in other years, immature birds with shot in their bodies averaged about 5 percent after hunting season (Table 3). In contrast, from 10.to 15 percent of young mallards in the Mississippi Flyway carry shot, indicating nruch heavier annual shodting pressure in that Flyway than in the Central Flyway. Winter Aerial Surveys: Aerial duck census figures for 1967-68 are listed in Table 4 by date and study area. Two counts were conducted in northeastern Colorado, November 27 and January 10-11, but due to unfavorable weather, the former count was incomplete. Four counts were made in the Arkansas Valley and show an increase in numbers until December 7 with a rather sharp decline by early January. During the January Inventory, approximately 235,000 ducks were present in the South Platte Valley and 66,000 were observed in the Arkansas Valley. The total for these two areas was about 300,000 birds for an increase of 50,000 over the 1967 January Inventory. As in other years, wintering populations of ducks were composed of approximately 98 percent mallards. �- 104 - Table 2.--Ma11ard sex ratio ground counts by study unit, 1967-68. Number Ducks Counted Male Female Total Date Location DENVER-GREELEY AREA (UNIT 6) 264 189 453 3-4-68 Latham Reservoir GREELEY-FORT MORGAN AREA' (UNIT 3) 3-4-68 South Platte River near Weldona Percent Males 58.2 290 198 488 59.4 122 84 206 59.2 96 339 557 64 235 383 160 574 940 60.0 59.1 59.4 STERLING-JULESBURG AREA (UNIT 1) 3-5-68 South Platte River near Sedgwick 193 128 321 60.1 BONNY RESERVOIR AREA (UNIT 9) 3-7-68 Bonny Reservoir 225 173 398 56.5 102 74 114 290 87 64 86 237 189 138 200 527 54.0 FORT MORGAN-STERLING AREA (UNIT 2) 3-4-68 South Platte River near Hillrose 3-5-68 South Platte River near Fort Morgan Prewitt Reservoir 3-5-68 ARKANSAS VALLEY AREA (UNIT 10) 2-15-68 Verhoeff Pond 2-18-68 Verhoeff Pond 2-18-68 Verhoeff Pond 53.6 57.0 54.9 Table 3.--Numbers of immature mallards fluoroscoped and numbers and percentages with embedded shot, by study unit and sex, eastern Colorado, 1967-68. Study Units Greeley-Fort Morgan Unit 3 Sterling-Julesburg Unit 1 Total and Averages Immature Males Number Number X-rayed With Shot Percent 92 3 3.3 Immature Females Number Number X-rayed With Shot Percent 60 3 5.0 107 8 7.5 77 4 5.2 199 11 5.4 137 7 5.1 �- 105 - Table 4.--Aerial duck counts by interval, study unit and specific location, eastern Colorado 1967-68. Area Fort Collins Area (Unit 4) Cache la Poudre River Ditch S. E. of Timnath Terry Lake Reservoir No. 8 New Windsor Reservoir Woods (Eaton) Lake Slough W. of Hollister Lake Pond near Hollister Lake Boyd Lake Loveland Sugar Factory Slough Sub-Totals Number Ducks by Date November 27. 1967* January 10-11, 1968 650 8,000 150 400 4,000 4,000 6,000 50 30 7,400 30,680 Denver-Greeley Area (Unit 6) St. Vrain River Swede Lake Valmont Reservoir Denver Metropolitan Area Bowmar Area Denver City Park Clearview Farm Lake Sloans Lake Rocky Mountain Arsenal Barr Lake Ditch and Mile High Latham Reservoir South Platte River Sub-Totals 9,000 9,000 28,990 40,706 Greeley-Fort Morgan Area (Unit 3) Riverside Reservoir Jackson Reservoir South Platte River Sub-Totals 11,100 10,800 8,500 30,400 1,500 61,000 62,500 Fort Morgan-Sterling Area (Unit 2) Prewitt Reservoir North Sterling Reservoir South Platte River Sub-Totals .27,500 9,000 700 37,200 3,000 100 5,850 815 1,420 70 203 33 225 o o 2,200 o 42,150 44,350 Sterling-Julesburg Area (Unit 1) Jumbo Reservoir Johnson Pond South Platte River Sub-Totals 38,000 o 3,400 41,400 600 23,350 23,950 Bonny Reservoir Area (Unit 9) Bonny Reservoir 30,700 33,000 �Table 4.--Aerial duck counts by interval, study unit and specific location, eastern Colorado, 1967-68. (cont.) Area Arkansas Va1lel Area Units 10z 11z 12z and 13 Cudahy Reservoir Henry Lake Meredith Lake Dyes Reservoir Holbrook Reservoir Cheraw Group Horsecreek Reservoir Blue Lake Swede Lake : Sweetwater Reservoir Nee Gronda Reservoir Nee Noshe Reservoir Upper Queens Reservoir Lower Queens Reservoir Thurston Reservoir Black. Lake Sheridan Lake Brandon Ponds Two Buttes Reservoir Turk's Pond Beeker Pond John Martin Reservoir Verhoeff Ponds Arkansas River: Pueblo to Rocky Ford Rocky Ford to John Martin 'Inlet John Martin Dam to Lamar Lamar to Kansas Line Sub-Totals South Platte Valley Arkansas Valley * All areas not censused. Nov. 7 1967 200 0 10,000 0 1,000 1,000 5,000 2,000 4,000 2,000 0 12,000 1,500 1,000 500 500 1,000 ·~,OOO 500 400 - Nov. 28 1967 Dec. 7 1967 100 2,000 13,200 3,000 100 600 1,500 100 25,500 350 0 3,150 3,000 5,000 100 1,500 2,500 50 1,000 3,000 0 7,900 18,600 1,600 3,000 475 8,000 3,500 33,700 400 25 2,400 12,000 3,600 900 2,200 2,300 0 200 10,000 500 1,800 5,200 0 - -- - - - Jan. 10, 1968 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 500 0 400 225 4,500 0 0 0 0 500 15,000 8,000 19,000 0 7,720 7,870 46,600 68,050 116,000 1,070 1,455 66,240 46z600 148,700* 68z050 116,000 235,186 66,240 I-' 0 0\ �- 107 - Prior to the hunting season in Colorado, many ducks are present on the various rivers and slough areas. As soon as hunting season begins, most birds group together on reservoirs and become unavailable to most hunters except during cold, stormy periods. After hunting season, the birds again shift back to river areas. The latter can be seen by examination of Table 4, especially in the South Platte Valley areas. Band Recovery Rates: The Bureau of Sport Fisheries and Wildlife has revised their band recovery report cards and no longer punch them for use in IBM machines unless specifically requested. A request for duplicate decks of IBM punch cards for the 1967-68 season has been requested. Therefore, recovery data from hunting seasons prior to 1967-68 are updated in this report, and 1967-68 hunting season recoveries will be covered in the next segment report. Tables 5 through 10 contain data on numbers of birds banded in the seven study units from 1963-64 through 196~-66 along with humbers of birds recovered from each banded cohort by hunting season. Thus, Tables 5 through 7 contain information on first-, second-, and third-year recoveries from birds banded in 1963-64. Tables 8 and 9 include first-year and second-year recoveries from 1964-65 banded birds. First-year recovery data from birds banded in 1965-66 are included in Table 10. All information is listed by unit of banding, and sex and age Qf birds at time of banding. Average recovery rates, by sex and age, are also listed in each table for all units. Recovery rates for all mallards banded since 1963-64 range from 0.44 percent to 4.13 percent and average between 1 and 2 percent. In general, these rates are lower than those from other flyways indicating relatively low hunting pressure on Western Central Flyway birds. Recovery rates for drakes are usually somewhat h{gher than for females which illustrates hunter preference toward drakes, relatively high numbers of drakes actually present in the populations, and also relatively high natural mortality of females. At this time no attempt was made to compare recovery rates by unit for each year of banding. These comparisons will be made in the final report when recovery data from all years of banding are available. Estimated Mortality Rates: Survival and mortality rates were computed for birds banded from 1963-64 through 1965-66 and recovered d~ring hunting seasons from 1964 through 1966. Estimated mortality was calculated by age and sex for all birds banded in all study units for each year of banding. Comparison of mortality rates of birds between study units will be delayed at least a year until data from more years of recovery can be obtained. The Relative Recovery Rate Method of estimating mortality was utilized and results are shown in Table 11. Estimated survival rates in Table 11 vary between year of banding and sex and age group. Some variation is no doubt due to sampling error and will be corrected with the addition of data from more years of banding and band recoveries. However, there are strong indications that drake mallard survival is very high, averaging almost 90 percent. In contrast, estimated annual survival of hen mallards is only about 50 percent. Since band recovery rate for females harvested by hunters' are considerably low in comparison with rates for males, the bulk of female mortality must be from natural.causes. It is suggested that predation on females on nesting grounds may be a major contributing factor to low survival of hens. �- 108 - Table 5.--Numbers of mallards winter-banded in eastern Colorado, 1963-64,' and recovered during the 1964-65 hunting season, by age, sex and unit of banding. Adult Immatures Male Female Male Female Unit of Totals RecovRecovRecovRecovBanding Banded Banded er ed Banded ered Banded ered Banded ered Fort Collins 1,026 553 8 2 ~44 11 197 132 4 Denver Greeley 1,022 496 16 70 5 334 9 122 3 Greeley Fort Morgan 280 99 5 43 1 67 4 71 3 Fort Morgan Sterling 674 336 12 69 1 194 7 75 2 Sterling Julesburg 295 91 0 29 1 112 7 63 2 Bonny Reservoir 256 86 2 24 2 98 6 48 1 Arkansas Va11el 12022 515 I) 105 0 234 7 168 3 Sub-Totals 4,575 2,176 56 484 12 1,236 51 679 18 Average 1st Year Recovery Rate 2.57% : 2.48% 4.13% 2.65% Table 6.--Numbers of mallards winter-banded in eastern Colorado, 1963-64, and recovered during the 1965-66 hunting season, by age, sex and unit of banding. Ad.ult Imma till: e s Ma1g E~I!!Sle Mal~ female Unit of Totals RecovRecovRecovRecovBanding Banded Banded ered Banded ered Banded ered Banded ered Fort Collins 1,026 553 10 144 0 197 9 132 0 Denver Greeley 1,022 496 14 70 2 334 5 122 2 Greeley Fort Morgan 280 99 1 43 1 67 2 71 0 Fort Morgan Sterling 674 336 8 69 0 194 5 75 0 Sterling Julesburg 295 91 2 29 0 112 1 63 0 Bonny Reservoir 256 86 ·0 1 24 98 0 48 1 Arkansas Vallel 12022 515 10 105 2 234 2 168 0 Sub-Totals 4,575 2,176 46 484 5 1,236 24 679 3 Average 2nd Year Recovery Rates 2.11% 1.03% 1.94% 0.44% �- 109 - Table 7.--Numbers of mallards winter-banded in eastern Colorado, 1963-64, and recovered during the 1966-67 hunting season, by age, sex and unit of banding. Adult Immatures Male Female Female Male Totals Unit of RecovRecovRecovRecovBanded ered Banded ered Banding Banded Banded er ed Banded ered 144 197 12 132 1 1,026 553 6 0 Fort Collins Denver Greeley 1,022 496 16 122 70 0 334 1 5 Greeley Fort Morgan 280 0 99 43 0 67 0 71 0 For t Morgan Sterling 674 336 69 1 1 7 194 4 75 Sterling '29 Julesburg 295 91 112 1 0 3 63 0 256 24 Bonny Reservoir 86 1 2 0 98 48 0 515 10 2 Arkansas Va11e~ lz022 105 234 168 4 1 41 484 Sub-Totals 4,575 2,176 3 1,236 30 679 4 Average 3rd Year Recovery Rates 1.88% 0.62% 2.43% 0~59% Table S,.--Numbers of mallards winter-handed in eastern Colorado, 1964-65, and recovered during the 1965-66 hunting season, by age, sex and unit of banding.];.! ~-------------------Ardrl~l]r,t~s~----------------------------~T~mm---a~t-I!Male Female Male Female RecovRecovRecovRecovUnit of Totals Banding d Ba*is eri~" Ban~~~ er~d Ban~;~ e~ed Ba~~:d er;d Ba~r Denver Greeley 1,120 609 128 10 o 241 8 Greeley Fort Morgan 973 423 12 103 2 321 6 For t Morgan Sterling 766 527 114 7 3 2 90 Sterling Julesburg 956 558 8 107 3 201 5 Bonny Reservoir 1,017 615 10 167 1 148 2 Sub-Totals 5,830 3,217 58 738 15 1,239 29 Average 1st Year 1.80% Recovery Rates 2.03% 2.34% 17 No mallards banded in the Arkansas Valley in 1964-65. 142 2 126 1 35 o 90 87 636 3 o 9 1.42% �- 110 - Table 9.--Numbers of mallards winter-banded in eastern Colorado, 1964-65, and recovered during }he 1966-67 hunting season, by age, .sex and unit of banding.! Adult Immatures Male Female Male Female Unit of Totals RecovRecovRecovRecovBanding Banded Banded ered Banded ered Banded ered Banded ered Fort Collins 998 485 11 119 1 238 2 156 0 Denver Greeley 1,120 609 20 128 1 241 1 142 2 Greeley Fort Morgan 973 423 12 103 2 321 8 126 2 Fort Morgan Sterling 766 527 9 114 1 90 o 35 2 Sterling Julesburg 956 558 12 107 o 201 1 90 o Bonny Reservoir 1,017 615 16 167 3 148 2 87 o Sub-Totals 5,830 3,217 80 738 8 1,239 14 636 6 Average 2nd Year Recovery Rates 2.49% 1.08% 1.13% 0.94% 1/ No mallards banded in the Arkansas Valley in 1964-65. Table 10.--Numbers of mallards winter-banded in eastern Colorado, 1965-66, and recovered during the 1966-67 hunting season, by age, sex and unit of banding. Adult Immatures Male Female Male Female Unit of Totals RecovRecovRecovRecovBanding Banded Banded ered Banded ered Banded ered Banded ered Fort Collins 1,006 285 6 188 2 299 11 234 4 Denver Greeley 1,093 481 19 129 1 299 12 184 2 Greeley Fort Morgan 1,000 288 8 171 4 322 11 219 7 Fort Morgan Sterling 1,017 287 7 195 5 329 6 206 2 Sterling Julesburg 1,035 284 6 89 0 362 10 300 4 Bonny Reservoir 997 322 9 162 1 288 7 215 7 Arkansas Va11e~ 922 334 6 133 2 270 3 185 4 Sub-Totals 7,070 2,291 61 1,067 15 2,169 60 1,543 30 Average 1st Year Recovery Rates 2.66% 1.41% 2.77% 1.94% �- 111 - Table 11. Age and Sex Immature Males Relative Recovery Rate Method estimates on survival and mortality rates of mallards winter-banded in eastern Colorado from 1963-64 through 1965-66 by sex and age at time of banding. No. Recoveries Each Year Recovery Rates Each Year Year of Banding 1963-64 1964-65 1965-66 Number Banded 1,236 1,239 2.169 After Banding!1 After Bandin~1 1-n 2-n l-n 2-n cuE..! 54 CU .0437 43 14 .0347 .0113 60 .0277 Survi~q1 Mortagity Rat~~ .Rat~1 .408 .592 Adult Males 1963-64 1964-65 1965-66 2,176 3,217 \2,291 CU 138 61 87 80 CU .0429 .0266 .0400 .0249 .932 .936 .068 .064 Immature Females 1963-64 1964-65 1965-66 679 636 1,543 CU 15 30 7 6 cu .0103 .0094 .436 .485 .564 .515 Adult Females 1963-64 1964-65 1965-66 484 738 1,067 CU 23 15 8 8 CU .0312 .0141 .0165 .0108 .529 .766 .471 .234 All Males 1963-64 1964-65 1965-66 3,412 4,456 4,460 cu 181 121 141 94 CU .0406 .0271 .0413 .0211 1.01711 .779 .221 All Females 1963-64 1964-65 1965-66 1,163 1,374 2 610 CU 38 45 15 14 cu .0129 .0102 .466 .593 .534 .407 .0236 .0194 .0277 .0172 1.259.2) 11 1-n=a11 recoverie~ from each banded segment. 2-n=a11 recoveries except firstyear recoveries. 11 Number of birds banded divided into number recover~d=recovery rate in percent. 11 In percent. Example 1.259=125.9%; or .408=40.8%. ~I CU=cannot use. 11 Survival rate of 100 percent or over impossible. However, survival indicated to be high. Migration and Harvest Patterns: All recoveries from birds banded during winter in eastern Colorado from 1963-64 through 1965-66 and harvested through the 196667 season are shown by years of recovery in Tables 12 through 17. In these tables, recoveries are grouped into those from Canada,' the Central Flyway west of the 100th meridian, the Central Flyway east of the 100th, the Mississippi Flyway, and those from the Pacific Flyway. The recoveries are further broken down by sex and age class of the birds at time of banding. Approximately 80 percent of the recoveries from these Colorado-banded birds come from that portion of the Central Flyway west of the 100th meridian and the provinces of Alberta and Saskatchewan. These figures strQng1y support �- 112 proposals by Central Flyway states to split the Central Flyway into two management units (Grieb et ale 1966 and Funk et ale 1967). As would be expected, the largest single area of recovery for these Coloradobanded mallards is Colorado. The degree to which these birds return to the specific and general area in which they were banded was studied and the results are displayed in Table 18. Units 1, 2 and 9 are considered one group, Units 3, 4 and 6 are another, and Units 10, 12 and 13 are also considered a separate area (see Figure 1). The number of birds harvested in other management units are few and come from various areas including the west slope of Colorado. As observed in Table 18, the groupings of management units of banding and recovery fit together well. The data are split by age and sex of birds at the time of banding, but this seems to have little effect on the proportion of birds which return to and are harvested in the same unit or group of units in which they were banded. For example, adult males banded in Unit 1 are most likely to be recovered in greatest proportion in Unit 1, those banded in Unit 2 are most likely to be recovered in Unit 2, and those banded in Unit 9 are recovered mainly in Unit 9. If not recovered in the specific unit of banding, these birds are then most likely to be recovered in the adjoining units shown under the groupings in Table 18. Therefore, the harvest and/or migration patterns of these birds indicate that three major groups of wintering mallards inhabit eastern Colorado; one in the northeast area, one in the north-central area, and the third in the southeast portion of the state. Differences in migration patterns from these three indicated groups of birds are also displayed throughout the Central Flyway and will be illustrated in the final report when all recoveries through the 1968-69 season can be included. In short, birds from the northeastern portion of Colorado migrate mainly through western Nebraska and South Dakota while recoveries from northcentral Colorado bandings in the above recovery areas are relatively less common. North-central Colorado mallards seem to migrate mai.nly through Wyoming and Montana to reach common breeding and/or staging areas in Alberta and Saskatchewan. The migration pattern of birds banded in southeast Colorado seems to overlap those of both northeast and north-central Colorado birds, but some preference is shown toward migration along the eastern slope of the Rocky Mountains. Wing Surveys: To supplement age and sex ratio data from the Federal wing survey for the 1967-68 season in Colorado, wings were again gathered by state personnel from hunters not receiving Federal wing envelopes. Results of both surveys for Colorado are shown in Tables 19 and 20. The management units were again grouped and because of sampling error present, only totals for each group were examined. Figures from the two surveys seem to be fairly similar to each other by area of collection and age and sex of birds except in the southeast where both samples are small but results vary widely. However, several items of interest are indicated. Adult males average about half of the total mallard bag, and immature males are second with an average of about 25 percent of the total bag Thus, either hunters tend to be highly selective toward males or males are present in the population in sufficient number to be r'epresented at a rate of about 75 .percent of the o �- 113 - Table l2.--Harvest locations of mallards banded in eastern Colorado in 196364 and recovered in 1964-65 by area of recovery, sex, and age at time of banding. Adult Immature ,Male Recovery Female Male Female Location No. % No. % No. % No. % Canada Alberta 6 1 8 1 Saskatchewan 2 0 1 0 Other 1 0 0 0 Sub-totals 9 16.0 T 8.3 9 18.0 1 5.6 Central Flyway West of 100th Meridian Montana Wyoming Colorado New Mexico North Dakota South Dakota Nebraska Kansas Oklahoma Texas Sub-totals 42 Central Flyway East of 100th Meridian North Dakota South Dakota Nebraska Kansas Oklahoma Texas Sub-totals 1 0 0 1 0 0 2 3.6 1 8.3 2 Mississippi Flyway 2 3.6 1 8.3 Pacific Flyway 1 1.8 2 56 100.0 12 Totals 1 1 35 0 0 0 3 0 0 2 75.0 0 0 7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 7 0 1 18 0 1 2 8 2 58.4 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 33 66.0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 4 0 0 0 3 1 0 0 9 50.0 0 2 4.0 1 0 0 1 4 22.2 3 6.0 2 11.1 16.7 3 6.0 2 11.1 100.0 50 100.0 18 100.0 �- 114 - Table l3.--Harvest locations of mallards banded in eastern Colorado in 196364 and recovered in 1965-66 by area of recovery, sex, and age at time of banding Adult Immature 'Male Recovery Female Male Female Location No. % NOe % % No. % No. Canada Alberta 2 1 1 0 Saskatchewan 1 0 0 0 Other 0 0 0 0 Sub-totals 3 6.5 1 20.0 1 4.2 0 Central Flyway West of 100th Meridian Montana Wyoming Colorado New Mexico North Dakota South Dakota Nebraska Kansas Oklahoma Texas Sub-totals 1 0 32 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 36 Central Flyway East of 100th Meridian North Dakota South Dakota Nebraska Kansas Oklahoma Texas Sub-totals 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 BO.O 0 0 12 0 0 0 2 0 0 1 15 6.5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 2.2 3 46 62.5 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0.0 0 0 1 1 0 0 2 B.3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0 3 12.5 1 33.3 6.5 0 0.0 3 12.5 1 33.3 100.0 .5 100.0 24 100.0 3 100.0 7B.3 4 0 1 2 0 0 0 3 Mississippi Flyway Pacific Flyway Totals 33.4 �- 115 - Table l4.--Harvest locations of mallards banded in eastern Colorado in 196364 and recovered in 1966-67 by area of recovery, sex, and age at time of bandigg. Adult Immature Recovery Male Female Male Female Location No. % No % No. % No % Canada Alberta 6 1 2 1 Saskatchewan 3 1 2 0 Other 0 0 0 0 Sub-totals "4 9 22.0 2 66.7 13.3 1 25.0 Central Flyway West of lOOth Meridian Montana Wyoming Colorado New Mexico North Dakota South Dakota Nebraska Kansas Oklahoma Texas Sub-totals Central Flyway East of 100th Meridian North Dakota South Dakota Nebraska Kansas Oklahoma Texas Sub-totals 0 0 21 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 28 68.3 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 33.3 0 0 10 0 0 0 6 1 0 0 17 56.8 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 50.0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0 0 0 0 Mississippi Flyway 1 2.4 0 0.0 1 3.3 1 25.0 Pacific Flyway 3 L3 0 0.0 7 23.3 0 0.0 41 100.0 3 100.0 30 100.0 4 100.0 Totals 0.0 1 3.3 0 0 0 0.0 �- 116 - Table 15.--Harvest locations of mallards banded in eastern Colorado in 196465 and recovered in 1965-66 by area of recovery, sex, and age at time of banding. Immature Adult Female Female Male Male Recovery % % No. % % No. No. No. Location Canada 2 3 3 8 Alberta 0 1 0 Saskatchewan 4 0 0 0 1 Other '4 20.0 13.8 2 22.2 13 22.4 3 Sub-totals Central Flyway West of 100th Meridian Montana Wyoming Colorado New Mexico North Dakota South Dakota Nebraska Kansas Oklahoma Texas Sub-totals 0 0 36 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 40 66.7 0 0 12 0 2 1 3 1 0 0 19 1 0 7 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 69.0 10 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 65.5 '4 44.5 13.3 0 1 1 0 0 0 2 6.9 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0 Central Flyway East of 100th Meridian North Dakota South Dakota Nebraska Kansas Oklahoma Texas 'Sub-totals 1 0 0 0 0 1 1.8 1 0 0 0 2 Mississippi Flyway 2 3.4 0 0.0 1 3.4 0 0.0 Pacific Flyway 2 3.4 0 0.0 3 10.4 3 33.3 58 100.0 15 100.0 29 100.0 9 100.0 Totals 0 1 0 �· - 117 - Table 16.--Harvest locations of mallards banded in eastern Colorado in 196465 and recovered in 1966-67 by area of recovery, sex, and age at time of bandi~. Adult Immature Male Female Recovery Male Female Location No. % No. % No. % No. % Canada Alberta 9 1 1 1 Saskatchewan 5 1 1 2 Other 0 0 0 0 "2 Sub-totals 2 14 17 .5 25.0 14.3 3 50.0 Central Flyway West oflOOth Meridian Montana Wyoming Colorado New Mexico North Dakota South Dakota Nebraska Kansas Oklahoma Texas Sub-totals 0 2 45 0 2 3 6 2 0 0 60 Central Flyway East of lOOth Meridian North Dakota South Dakota Nebraska Kansas Oklahoma Texas Sub-totals 0 0 3 0 1 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 7 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 9 64.3 0 0 2 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 3 50.0 0.0 75.0 (; 1 1 0 0 0 0 2 2.5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0 "2 14.3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Mississippi Flyway 1 1.2 0 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 Pacific Flyway 3 3.8 0 0.0 1 7.1 0 0.0 80 100.0 8 100.0 14 100.0 6 100.0 Totals 75.0 1 0 1 0 0 0 �- 118 - Table l7.--Harvest locations of mallards banded in eastern Colorado in 196566 and recovered in 1966-67 by area of recovery, sex, and age at time of banding. Adult lnunature Recovery Male Female Male Female Location % No! :z, No. NQ. % % No Canada Alberta 5 2 8 3 Saskatchewan 4 0 4 2 Other 0 0 0 1 Sub-totals 9 14.8 2 12 13.3 20.0 6 20.0 Central Flyway West of 100th Meridian Montana Wyoming Colorado New Mexico North Dakota South Dakota Nebraska Kansas Oklahoma Texas Sub-totals Central Flyway East of 100th Meridian North Dakota South Dakota Nebraska Kansas Oklahoma Texas Sub-totals 1 1 39 0 3 1 6 0 0 0 51 83.6 1 0 7 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 9 0 3 19 0 1 1 7 0 0 0 2 9 0 0 2 1 0 0 0 14 60.0 1 32 11.7 "4 13.3 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 20.0 2 2 2 1 0 0 7 53.3 46.7 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1.6 0 2 1 0 3 Mississippi Flyway 0 0.0 1 6.7 3 5.0 1 3.3 Pacific Flyway 0 0.0 0 0.0 6 10.0 5 16.7 61 100.0 15 100.0 60 100.0 30 100.0 Totals Q �- 119 Table l8.--Numbers and recovery locations of mallards banded from 1963-64 through 1965-66 and recovered in Central Flyway Colorado from 1964 through 1966, sex and a e at time of bandin • b unit of bandin Co ora 0 Units 0 Recover! Sample Northeast North-Central Southeast Other 2 1 Size 9 3 4 6 10 Adult Male Northeast 1 13 6 1 0 3 1 0 1 1 2 24 15 2 3 1 1 1 1 0 10 1 1 1 0 9 7 0 0 0 North-Central 3 4 6 20 36 68 0 1 0 2 2 1 0 0 0 11 4 3 2 17 9 4 10 52 0 0 1 1 2 2 Southeast 10 20 0 0 0 0 1 1 17 1 Adult Female Northeast 1 2 9 North-Central 3 4 6 Southeast 10 2 1 1 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 1 0 0 2 0 0 0 1 0 2 4 0 0 1 5 0 0 0 Q 5 0 0 0 1 0 3 0 ,0 0 0 0 0 3 0 2 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 11 0 0 2 0 1 0 0 2 0 7 Immature Male Northeast 1 2 4 6 2 1 0 0 0 North-Central 3 4 6 8 26 22 Southeast 10 3 9 0 0 0 2 0 3 0 0 3 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 4 5 0 0 0 1 2 0 0 1 10 2 7 0 Immature Female Northeast 1 2 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 9 2 0 0 1 North-Central 3 4 0 0 0 4 5 0 0 0 6 6 0 0 0 Southeast 10 1 0 0 0 See Fig. 1 for management unit locations .!7 7 0' t 2 2' 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 2 0 1 1 3 2 0 2 2 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 �- 120 - ma llard harve st in eastern Colorado as County Logan Sedgwick Washington Totals North-central (3,4 and 6) Adams Larime1! MorganWeld Totals Bent Southeast (10,12 and 13) Otero Prowers Totals fs 'FemaIe 9 1 0 0 47 18 (45.6%) (17 .5%) 26 1 1 28 (27.2%) 22 7 2 5 60 36 132 46 219 91 (49.4%) (20.5%) 15 4 11 42 72 (16.3%) 14 2 12 33 61 (13.8%) 58 13 119 253 443 4 0 0 4 13 1 21 1 (60.0%) (2.9%) 3 1 3 7 (20.0%) 5 0 1 6 (17 .1%) 12 5 18 35 40 4 3 o· 10 (9.7%) 93 6 4 103 !! Unit 2 portion of Morgan County included with north-central Colorado data. Table 20.--Age and sex composition of the 1967 mallard harvest in eastern Cq1orado as estimated bl the State win~ survel· Adult Innnature Sample Area Unit Male Female Male Female Size Totals Northeast North-central 1 2 9 3 4 6 Southeast 10 12 13 1 0 2 0 24 12 12 27 (38.6%) (17 .1%) 17 20 (28.6%) 1 2 8 11 (15.7%) 2 7 61 70 37 8 181 49 228 58 (52.7%) (13.4%) 17 21 48 86 (19.9%). 14 19 28 61 (14.0%) 42 85 306 433 2 3 23 13 0 0 26 15 (33.S%) (19.5%) 4 11 2 17 (22.1%) 2 16 1 19 (24.6%) 11 63 3 77 10 1 0 3 �- 121 - total bag. No doubt there is a combination of factors, but the selectivity of hunters must be of most importance because winter sex ratio counts indicate only about 60 percent males. Data in the tables suggest that adult females are harvested at approximately the same rate as immature females for a combined total of about 25 percent of the bag. Obviously, the large proportion of adult males present in the bag coupled with the suggested high survival rates of all males frmn Table 11 become important items to be considered when attempting to increase hunting opportunity with higher bag limits or post-seasons. However, if the objective of a proposed post-season is to harvest surplus drakes and save hens, especially in a year of poor production, care should be exercised in selecting the type of sex-specific regulation to be utilized. Data from both Federal and State wing surveys conducted during hunting seasons from 1964 through 1967 are combined for each agency in Tables 21 and 22, respectively. In general, the data are quite similar for both surveys and again show adult males make up approximately 50 to 55 percent of the total mallard bag and about 70 to 75 percent of the bag is composed of adult and immature males. Percent of adult males in the bag in the southeast area is relatively lower than in the other two areas. Hunting Pressure Surveys: Estimates of numbers of hunters utilizing each management unit and group of units, and their success as to average bag per hunter are listed in Table 23. The north-central units, which include the Fort Collins-Denver-Greeley portion of the study area, had the most hunting pressure with 12,406 hunters taking part in the 1967-68 season. This is expected because of the high human population present. Average bag per . hunter was about 7 birds. Hunting pressure was much lighter in the northeast and southeast areas with only 3,140 and 2,468 hunters participating, respectively. Success in each of these areas was also relatively lower with about 5.5 birds per hunter. Table 21.--Age and sex composition of the mallard harvests in eastern Colorado as estimated by the Federal wing-survey, 1964-1967. Area and Adult Immature Sample Unit Number Male Female Male Female Size Totals Northeast (1,2 and 9) 291 94 (49.7%) (16.0%) 125 (21.3%) 76 (13.0%) 586 North-central 11 (3,4 and 6) 810 304 (52.9%) (19.9%) 202 (13 2%) 215 (14.0%) 1,531 Southeast (10) 118 57 (42.1%) (20.4%) 65 (23.2%) 40 (14.3%) 280 0 11 Unit 2 portion of Morgan County included with north-central Colorado data. �- 122 - Table 22.--Age and sex composition of the mallard harvests in eastern Colorado as estimated b~ the state win~-surve~2 1964-1967. Adult Area and Inunature Sample Male Female Unit Number Male Female Size Totals Northeast (1,2 and 9) 215 63 (55.8%) (16.4%) 60 (15.6%) 47 (12.2%) 385 North-central (3,4 and 6) 632 168 (55.1%) (14.6%) 187 (16.3%) 160 (14.0%) 1,147 Southeast (10) 152 54 (46.8%) (16.6%) 66 (20.3%) 53 (16.3%) 325 Table 23.--Hunter pressure, harvest, and population survey data for comparison between management units and areas, 1966-67 season. Estimated Estimated Average Duck Duck Bag Per No. Ducks No Hunters Present Hunters lJ Bag lJ Hunter Censuse~/Per 100 Ducks Cen. Area 11 Northeast 1 1,346 5,841 4.3 23,950 5.6 2 1,189 7,594 6.4 44,350 2.7 1.8 9 605 42235 7.0 33,000 3,140 17 ,670 5.6 101,300 3.1 North-central 3 4,195 4 2,826. 6 5,385 12,406 Southeast 10 12 13 718 1,122 628 2,468 26,725 17,232 41,619 85,576 6.4 6.1 7.7 6.9 3,359 5,549 4 089 12,997 4.7 4.9 6.5 5.3 62,500 30,680 40,706 133,886 6.7 9.2 13.2 9.3 !il 66,240 -- !il 3.7 11 See Fig. 1 for management unit locations. lJ Grieb, 1968. J./ Table 4. !il January Inventory figures for S.E. not usable except for total. To obtain an estimate of how hunters fared in respect to numbers of birds available, figures from the 1968 January Inventory were introduced into the comparisons in Table 23. The January count is composed of almost 100 percent mallards and harvest figures from the 1968 hunting season represent only about 66 percent mallards. However, proportions of birds present by unit in January can be considered fairly representative of conditions during �- 123 - fall and early winter hunting seasons. Thus, numbers of hunters present per 100 birds censused in each unit were calculated. Comparison of these data provide some interesting suggestions. North-central hunters had the highest average bag with 7 birds per hunter. However, the other two areas were not far behind with about 5.5 birds per hunter. Yet north-central hunters were present at the rate of 9.3 per 100 birds censused while the rate of hunters per 100 birds in the other areas was only from 3.1 to 3.7 hunters. The data suggest the northeast and southeast areas may be able to accomodate approximately three times the amount of hunting pressure they now support without a reduction in average bag per hunter. Further, it is also possible that the north-central area as a whole could withstand more hunting pressure because the average bag in Unit 6 only was 7.7 birds per hunter and number of hunters present was over 5,000 both being the highest figures in all units. Thus, opportunity to harvest more ducks and to increase individual hunter success seems to exist in all areas of eastern Colorado, including the highly populated north-central unit which often seems saturated with hunters. LITERATURE CITED Funk, H. D. 1964. Winter duck banding in eastern Colorado. Fish and Parks Dept. Game Res. Rept. Oct. pp. 79-87. Colo. Game, Funk, H. D., J. R. Grieb, G. Wrakestraw, D. Witt and G. Merrill. 1967. The Central Flyway High Plains Mallard Management Unit, (A supplemental report). Cent. Fly. Tech. Comm. Rept. July. 20pp. Grieb, J. R., H. D. Funk, D. Witt, G. Wrakestraw and L. Serdiuk. (1966). A proposed mallard management unit for the Central Flyway. Cent. Fly. Tech. Comm. Rept. 32pp. Grieb, J. R. 1968. Waterfowl kill survey. Parks Game Res. Rept. Oct. In press. Prepared Colo. Div. of Game, Fish and by _.::H;,:.owa.,..::.;:.rd.-:::....;D=-..... • ...;;Fun:...::;;;:;;k~-,Wildlife Researcher _ ��October, 1968 - 125 - JOB PROGRESS REPORT". RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of. ~C_O_LO_RADO _ Pro ject No • Migratory Bird Investigations W_-8_8_-....;B._-_l...::;3 _ Work Plan No •. __ ...:.4 _ Job No. 3 Title of Job: Trapping and Banding Doves Period Covered: May 1, 1967 through November 1, 1967 Personnel: Thomas Kitzmiller; Larry Green, Charles Hayes, Jack Randall, Dale Horne, Ken Baer, and Howard Funk. Abstract State personnel and Federal Game Management Agents cooperated in banding 2,134 mourning doves in six Colorado areas in 1967. Comparisons were made of trap sample composition by age and sex of birds and time of day captured. Wing molt data suggest considerable difference in peak periods of nesting and hatching between northern and southern Colorado breeding areas. Wing molt data from both trapped birds and those in the hunters' bag strongly suggest that many young doves produced in Colorado are gone frqm the state by September 1. It is estimated that only about 51 percent of the 1967 bag was composed of immature birds whichis,adefinite decline from previous years. Estimated Colorado harvest in 1967 remained quite stable at about 140,000 birds, while numbers of hunters participating increased to about 25,000. �- 126 - Segment Objectives: (1) To band mourning doves in Colorado for the purpose tion, life history and annual mortality data. of obtaining migra- (2) To obtain age and sex ratio data, wing molt information, and estimates on harvest size from hunters through personal contact and mail surveys. (3) To trap and band nestlings and immature birds for a wing aging technique'study. Procedures: State and Federal personnel cooperated mer of 1967 using techniques described 1965). doves and retrap them as flying in banding mourning doves in the sumin a previous segment report (Funk No nestlings were banded because of lack of time and personnel tion of the wing aging technique was accomplished. so no evalua- Hunter bag checks were again made by Wildlife Conservation Officers and project personnel to obtain data on age and sex ratios and ages of immatures in the bag. Recommendations: Attempts to band nestlings and recapture them at later dates to obtain wing molt information should be discontinued because of lack of time and high costs involved. �- 127 - TRAPPING AND BANDING DOVES Howard D. Funk Introduction There is definite need to trap and band as many mourning doves as possible throughout- their range to obtain additional data on annual mortality and migration patterns. Quotas on numbers of birds to be banded by state were suggested by The Bureau of Sport Fisheries and Wildlife several years ago. Colorado, as a hunting state, has made efforts to assist in this program by banding birds in various areas of the State. Results of the 1967 trapping and hunting seasons are presented in this report. Results Trapping and Banding: As illustrated in Table 1, 2,134 mourning doves were banded in six areas in eastern Colorado prior to September 1, 1967. U.S. Game Management Agents banded birds in the Denver, Longmont and Pueblo areas while State personnel accomplished their banding in the Fort Collins and Rocky Ford area. Personnel from both Federal and State agencies joined in trapping doves in the Fort Garland area in the San Luis Valley. . Table l.--Number of mourning qoves banded pre-season by State and Federal personnel in eastern Colorado. 1967. Adult Adult Innnature Totals Area Males Females 176 399 Denver 143 80 Longmont 52 35 ·137 50 320 663 Fort Collins 147 196 6'50 521 Pueblo 60 69 Rocky Ford 110 1 0 111 174 141 Fort Garland 15 18 Totals 589 366 1,179 2,134 Percent of Total (27.6%) (17 .2%) (55.2%) Percentages of birds by.age and sex varied considerably by trapping location as can be seen in Table 1. Proportions of innnature doves in the banded samples in the Fort Collins and Denver areas were considerably lower in 1967 than in previous years (Funk 1966 and 1967),but the overall trapped sample w.as composed of about 55 percent 'young birds. As usual, adult females were the most difficult to trap and made up only 17 percent of the total. �- 128 Wing Molt Data From Captured Immature Doves: Allen (1963) described a technique of assigning ages in days to immature doves. These data can be utilized to estimate peak of hatching. This is accomplished by observation of primary wing feather molt characteristics and back-dating the information to the date of hatch. Wing molt data were gathered from most immature doves captured in 1967,and results are shown in Tables 2 throug~ 7 by trapping area. Table 2.--Immature mourning dove primary wing feather molt sequence in the 1967 tra:eped sam:elezDenver area. Number Last Primar~ Feather Molted 1. Date CaEtured 0 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 6/17/68 3 1 2 6/18/68 12 1 5 5 1 6/19/68 19 8 6 5 6/20/68 19 8 6 5 6/21/68 11 5 2 2 2 6/22/68 9 5 2 2 7/ 8/68 1 1 7/ 9/68 3 1 1 1 7/10/68 9 4 2 1 1 1 7/11/68 13 8 5 7/12/68 1 1 7/13/68 7 2 1 3 1 7/14/68 3 2 1 7/15/68 7 3 2 1 1 7/16/68 4 3 1 7/17/68 10 5 3 2 7/18/68 7 1 4 1 1 8/ 7/68 10 7 1 1 1 8/ 8/68 14 1 1 10 2 8/ 9/68 14 1 3 3 4 3 Totals 176 63 46 44 14 8 1 Percent of (35.8) (26.1)(25.0)(8.0) (4.5) (6.6) Total Table 3.--Immature mourning dove primary wing feather molt sequence in the 1967 tra:eped sam:e1e,Longmont Area. Number Last Primary Feather Molted Date Captured 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 5/31/67 1 1 6/21/67 7 2 2 1 2 6/22/67 4 211 6/23/67 1 1 8/ 9/67 3 1 2 Totals 16 314 3 2 1 2 Percent of (18.8) (6.2) (25.0) (18.8) (12.5) (6.2)(12.5) .Total �- 129 - Table 4.--Innnature mourning dove primary wing feather ·1967 traeeed samelez Fort Collins area. Number Last 2 3 0 6/28/67 1 1 6/29/67 4 3 7/ 1/67 7/ 2/67 9 6 7 4 2 1 7/ 3/67 9 6 2 7/ 5/67 29 19 7 2 1 7/ 6/67 34 23 8 2 1 7/ 7/67 7/ 8/67 7 19 4 13 2 3 1 2 1 7/ 9/67 19 12 6 1 7/10/67 4 2 2 7/15/67 8 3 4 1 7/16/67 26 5 13 6 7/17/67 7/18/67 2 5 1 2 3 1 7/19/67 6 3 2 8/ 4/67 2 1 1 8/ 7/67 8/11/67 1 1 3 3 8/12/67 2 1 196 112 (57.1) Totals Percent Total of 1 Primar~ Feather Caetured Date 4 1 1 1 2 1 1 17 59 (30.1)( 8.7) 7 (3.6) 1 (0.5) in the molt sequence Molted 5 6 7 8 �- 130 Table 5.--Immature mourning dove primary wing feather molt sequence in the 1967 traEEed samE1ez Pueblo area. Number. Last Primar~ Feather Molted Date 0 CaEtured 2 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 6/17/67 1 1 6/18/67 3 3 6/19/67 18 4 4 6 4 6/20/67 2 8 4 2 2 6/21/67 1 1 6/22/67 17 3 11 1 2 6/23/67 16 3 5 4 3 1 6/24/67 16 2 8 .5 1 20 6/25/67 4 7 4 2 3 3, 6/26/67 18 6 8 1 11 6/27/67 4 4 3 17 6/28/67 3 4 6 4 6/29/67 31 9 8 9 4 1 6/30/67 15 4 4 4 3 7/ 1/67 27 3 7 7 7 3 24 7/ 2/67 7 8 6 2 1 7/ 3/67 12 4 4 3 1 7/ 4/67 21 12 3 2 2 1 1 7/ 5/67 23 13 5 2 1 2 7/ 6/67 7 4 1 2 7/ 7/67 10 4 2 3 1 7/10/67 25 9 10 3 1 1 1 7/11/67 24 7 8 5 3 1 7/12/67 14 4 5 3 2 7/13/67 20 6 6 5 3 7/14/67 8 5 3 7/15/67 12 5 6 1 7/16/67 11 3 6 1 1 7/17 /67 10 3 3 2 1 1 7/18/67 8 2 1 4 1 7/19/67 15 7 3 2 2 1 7/20/67 13 3 5 2 2 1 7/21/67 6 2 2 1 1 7/22/67 4 2 2 7/23/67 4 1 '2 1 7/24/67 6 4 1 1 7/25/67 4 3 1 7/26/67 2 1 1 7/27/67 1 1 7/28/67 6 4 1 1 7/29/67 2 1 1 7/30/67 1 1 7/31/67 1· 1 8/ 4/67 4 2 2 8/ 5/67 3 2 1 1 Totals Percent Total 521 of 163 (31.3) 159' 108 (30.5)(20.7) 62 20 (11.9)(3.8) 8 (1.6) 1 (0.2) �- 131 - Table 6.--Immature mourning dove primary wing feather molt sequence in 1967 traeeed samelez Rockl Ford area. Last Primarl Feather Molted Number Date 8/ 4/67 8/ 5/67 8/ 7/67 8/ 8/67 8/ 9/67 8/10/67 8/11/67 8/12/67 8/13/67 8/14/67 8/15/67 8/17/67 Caetured 5 4 4 10 13 10 20 14 18 7 4 1 110 Totals Percent of Total 0 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 1 1 2 1 2 3 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 3 2 2 2 1 3 3 1 3 1 1 1 3 4 1 6 2 2 2 1 1 1 2 4 1 6 7 3 1 1 8 1 2 5 4 8 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 26 11 21 6 1 15 14 9 7 (6.4) (10.0) (13.6)(12.7) (19.1)(8.2)(23.6)(5.5)(6.9) Table 7.--Immature mourning dove primary wing feather molt sequence in 1967 traEEed samE1ez Fort Garland area. Number Date 8/19/67 8/20/67 8/21/67 8/22/67 8/23/67 Last Primarl Feather Molted CaEtured 0 1 2 7 34 44 44 12 1 5 13 10 5 19 14 13 6 8 12 11 3 Totals 141 Percent of Total 3 3 4 1 5 8 1 5 6 7 8 1 32 35 57 14 (22.8) (40.4)(24.8)(9.9) 2 3 (2.1) As shown in the above tables, most trapped immature birds displayed molt patterns between 0 and 2. Relatively few birds had molted more than their third primary feather even though some of the trapping periods extended well over a month. This indicates that most young birds must leave the general trapping area after attaining a certain age, approximately 45 days. Otherwise an increasing proportion of older birds would have been captured as the season progressed. No doubt this factor as well as others tend to bias estimates of peak of hatching in the various areas of the State, but results of back-dating wing molt data are listed in Table 8. �- 132 - Table 8.--Approximate peak periods of hatching for mourning doves in five areas in eastern Colorado 1967. Area Peak Hatching Period Denver Fort Collins Pueblo Rocky Ford Fort Garland June 4 - June 16 June 4 - June 16 May 16 - June 8 May 25 - June 15 July 15 - July 23 Peak periods of hatching indicated in Table 8 for the Denver, Fort Collins and Pueblo areas seem realistic. The earlier peak period suggested for the Pueblo area would be due to the relatively early spring normally experienced in southeastern Colorado. The banding period in the Rocky Ford area was fairly short and the trapped sample quite small but the estimated peak hatching period is 'very similar to that obtained for the Pueblo area. Estimated peak of hatching in the Fort Garland area is suprisingly late but may be well founded because of the high altitude of the San Luis Valley. However, the trapped sample was quite small and the trapping period short, and data may be quite biased. Trapping Rates By Period_Of Day.--Numbers and age and sex of doves trapped during various periods of the day are illustrated in Table 9. All birds were captured near a feed lot in the Fort Collins area. Trapping success varied with time of day and a routine of visiting traps at certain times of the day to band these birds was soon established. Thus, results of the trapping program are listed for four periods of the day. Table 9.--Mourning dove trapping results in the Fort Collins area by age, sex and time of da~. Totals Period of by Adult Male Adult Female Immature Period Number Percent Da;y: Number Percent Number Percent 8 AM-9 AM 131 74 56.5 17 13.0 40 30.5 10 AM-2'PM 67 87 55.2 6 9.0 24 35.8 4 PM-5 PM 212 58 27.4 41.5 88 31.1 66 8 PM-9 PM 207 131 63.3 28 13.5 48 23.2 611 300 139 178 Best trapping success was realized in the late afternoon and evening hours when about two-thirds of the sample was obtained. Proportions of birds captured by age and sex in early morning and mid-day were quite similar to eacQ other. However, number of adult females captured during late afternoon increased to over 40 percent of the sample. It is general knowledge that, once the incubation process is initiated, adult males tend the nest during the day and females incubate the eggs at night. Thus, adult females, in their hasty attempts to feed heavily during late afternoon just prior to switching places on the nest with the males, become very susceptible to the bait traps. Time of day when males and females change places on the �- 133 nest must be sometime between 5 PM and 6 PM because proportions of adult females trapped during late evening are back to normal. However, in late evening it seems that adult males, hungry from their long day on the nest, are in a hurry to feed before dark and become captured in a greater proportion than any other time of day. Data in Table 9 also suggest that immatures tend to roost earlier than adult birds because both number and proportion of young captured in late evening decrease markedly from trap samples earlier in the day. Hunting Season Bag Checks.--Wirigs from birds bagged by hunters were again collected by project personnel and Wildlife Conservation Officers in various parts of the State. Estimates of age composition of the bag are listed in Table 10. Percent immature birds in the samples ranged from about 45 to 62 percent which is a definite decline from previous years. In 1967, percent immatures for the northeast, southeast and southwest areas were 58, 78 and 70 percent, respectively, (Funk 1967) and the overall proportion of immatures present in 1966 was about 67 percent (Funk 1966). Table 10.--Numbers and percentages of doves in bagged samples during the 1967 Colorado huntin~ season b~ a~e and area of collection. Percent Number Sample Adult Immature Adult Immature Area Size Northeast 51.4 48.6 Fort Collins 36 34 70 26 18.7 Fort Morgan 32 6 8l~3 65.2 34.8 Longmont 23 15 8 47.6 Denver 603 316 287 52.4 21 36.8 36 63.2 Bonny Reservoir -2I 785 429 356 54.6 45.4 Sub-totals Southeast Colorado Springs139 Rocky Ford 59 Pritchett 128 San Luis Valley 26 352 Sub-totals 67 24 32 10 133 72 35 96 16 219 48.2 40.7 25.0 38.5 37.8 51.8 59.3 75.0 61.5 62.2 Southwest Durango Sub-totals 14 14 -77 .2 2.Q..J! ~ 7 50.0 50.0 Grand Totals 1,151 569 582 49.4 50.6 Wing primary feather molt data were also collected from a sample of immature doves bagged during the 1967 season and are displayed in Table 11. Sufficient data for comparison were gathered only from the northeast and southeast regions, and there seems to be relatively little difference between the two. A molt pattern of 2 was the most common observed indicating an age of about 35 to 42 days old for these birds and a peak of hatching between July 21 and 27. Comparison with data in Table 8 further suggests that young birds leave �- 134 their Colorado fledging areas after reaching a certain. age ·and apparently most have left the State prior to beginning of hunting season on September 1. Table ll.--Wing primary feather molt data from immature doves in the 1967 Colorado huntin~ season ba~ samEles b~ area. Sample Last Primar~ Feather Molted Area Size 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Northeast Fort Collins 34 7 4 11 8 3 1 0 0 0 Fort Morgan 6 3 1 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 Longmont 8 5 1 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 Denver 287 48 42 77 61 31 18 8 1 1 Bonny Reservoir 21 1 3 2 4 1 1 2 0 Sub-totals 356 64 51 97 75 36 20 9 3 1 Percent of total 18.0 14.3 27.2 21.1 10.1 5.6 2.5 0.9 0.3 .: Southeast Colorado Springs Rocky Ford Pritchett San Luis Valley Sub-totals Percent of total Southwest Durango Grand Totals Percent of total 72 35 96 16 219 18 7 14 2 41 18.7 14 8 12 4 38 17 .4 7 2 1 582 107 18.4 14 13 9 4 34 20 7 2 64 39 29.2 17.8 8 4 8 1 21 9.6 2 3 7 0 12 5.5 '4 0 1.8 0.0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0 2 0 1 0 0 0 90 162 116 15.5 27.8 19.9 57 9.8 33 5.7 13 2.2 3 0.5 '1 0.2 1 3 0 1 0 0 0 o· 0 1967 Dove Harvest Survey.--Estimates of hunting pressure from a small game harvest questionnaire (Grieb 1968) show a sharp increase in hunter participation in 1967, but only a small increase in success over the 12-year average. Data are presented in Table 12 for the 1967 season and for the 1955-66 period. Most of the increase in numbers of hunters took place in the central unit which includes many of the largest cities in the State. Harvest also increased in 1967 in the central unit. Harvest in the southeast declined significantly from the average while number of hunters remained stable. �- 135 Table l2.--Comparisoq of hunting pressure and kill of doves by year and . 1/ regl.on.1967 Region Northeast Southeast Central San Luis Valley Northwest West Central Southwest High Country Totals Number Hunters 2;460 4,600 13,848 589 540 984 737 835 24,593 l2-;¥:earAve. 1955-66 Number Number Hunters Killed 1,898 15,646 4,203 37,551 9,598 60,996 525 3,495 579 3,785 606 2,643 738 5,176 998 5 583 19,147 143,055 Number Killed 15,280 29,437 79,062 2,383 , 3,365 3,2244,434 3 084 140,180 1/ From Grieb, 1968. REFERENCES Allen, J. M. 1963. Primary feather molt rate of wild immature doves in Indiana. Indiana Dept. of Cons., Game Res. Sect. Circ. No.4., Indianapolis. Aug. 4pp. Funk, H. D. 1965. Trapping and banding doves. Colo. Game, Fish and Parks Dept. Game Res. Rept. Fed. Aid Proj. W-88-R. Oct. pp. 161-169. ______ 1966. Trapping and banding doves. Colo. Game, Fish and Parks Dept. Game Res. Rept. Fed. Aid Project W-88-R. Oct. pp. l4U,-150. 1967. Trapping and banding doves. Colo. Game, Fish and Parks Dept. Game Res. Rept. Fed. Aid Project W-88-R. Oct. pp. 97-102. Grieb, J. R. 1968. Colorado small game hunter harvest survey--1967. Dept. of Nat. Res., Colo. Game, Fish and Parks Div. Fed. Aid Project W-88-R. July 1. 27pp. Prepared by Howard D. Funk Wildlife Researcher � https://cpw.cvlcollections.org/files/original/ee8bf72582f28c585521c75b0daae05c.pdf 025c86635c6b681800398ba5ec48b8a5 PDF Text Text January, 1969 - 1- JOB PROGRESS REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO --------~------------------I Project No. W-40-R-9 Work Plan No. 1 Title of Job: Period Covered: Personnel: Antelope Investigations Job No. 10 Review of Literature May 1, 1967 through April 30, 1968 George D. Bear Abstract References pertaining to population determination and census methods for big game animals and studies of antelope food habits were to be reviewed and abstracted. However, very little work was completed on this job during the past segment. �- 2 - Objectives: 1. Continue reviewing and abstracting literature pertaining to population determination and census methods for big game animals, and studies on the food habits of pronghorn antelope. 2. Prepare and publish an annotated bibliography on big game census methods. Procedures: 1. References pertaining to population determination and census methods of big game animals, and stud.Les on the food habits of pr-onghorn antelope were to be reviewed at the Colorado State University Library. Abstracts were to be prepared for the articles needed to fulfill the requirements for Job 13, "Techniques for Determining Population Trendsj" and preparing a manuscript on antelope food habits for Job 2 of this projectj and preparing an annotated bibliography on big game census methods. 2. The bibliographic references shall be compiled in a suitable summary report form under the proper headings (aerial counts, direct observations of animals on the ground , and indirect census on the gr-ound}. This material shall be combined with the 1958 report, "A Review of Literature on Big Game Census Methods", to bring this older report up to date. The same basic outline shall be followed on this revised report as used in the older report. Results: Work on this job during the past segment was intermittent, with a few new articles being abstracted. However, a great portion of the time within this project is scheduled for office and laboratory work during the next segment and it is felt a more concent.rated effort can be directed toward completing the objectives outlined here. Irif'ormat.Lon obtained in this review is needed to complete other jobs in the next segment. Prepared by: George D. Bear Assistant Researcher �January, 1969 - 3 - JOB PROGRESS REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT state of COLORAJ)O Project No. W-40-R-9 Work Plan No. 1 Antelope Investigations Job No. 11 Title of Job: Herd structure and Factors Affecting Herd Structure Period Covered: May 1, 1967 through April 30, 1968 Personnel: George D. Bear Abstract Hunter check stations were established on the Moffat and Larimer County study areas during the hunting season to obtain information on the sex and age of the animals harvested and miscellaneous hunter information. The mean age of the antelope harvested on Units 2A, 2, 4, and 5 were: 2.2, 2.0, 2.2, and 2.2 years, respectively. The mean amount of time required for successful hunters to bag their animals was 6.1, 6.2, 8.3 a~d 6.3 hours on these respective areas. Comparison of the check station data with hQ~ter report cards indicated some hunters report fawns as adult animals on the report ca:rds. The error between ages (fawns, yearling, or adults) determined at the check stations and ages determined by horn length measurements reported by hunters for bucks harvested Was very low (8%). This appears to be a fairly reliable tecQnique for obtaining the age structure of the buck harvest through hunter report card returns. The wounding loss was very low on both study areas. Two animals were found on the Moffat County study area and none were found on the Larimer County study area. Natural mortalities due to predators and diseases appeared to be minor. Several antelope were found caught in woven wire fences. A total of 35 antelope fawns were tagged on the Moffat County study area for the study on aging techniques. Thirteen of these fawns were males and 22 were females. �-4 Objectives: 1. Obtain information on the sex and age of the antelope harvested by hunters and wounding loss on the study areas. 2. Obtain information on antelope mortality due to natural causes. 3. Obtain known-age antelope jaws. Procedures: 1. Check stations were established on the study areas during the antelope hunting season to facilitate collection of harvest information. The age, sex, and location of the kill were recorded for each antelope brought through the check station. The age of the animal was determined by the tooth eruption and wear technique. Hunting information (possible wounding loss, number of hours hunted, and number of animals observed) was also recorded for each hunter. Hunters who killed a buck were requested to record the length of the buck's horns on a report card. This information was compared to the information collected at the check stations to evaluate the possibility of using hunterreported horn lengths as an index to the proportion of yearling antelope in the harvest. Wounding loss was determined by randomly working the study areas on the ground (afoot or by vehicle) during a few days immediately following the hunting season. Funds were scheduled for a helicopter to be used for this work, but one was not available during this period. 2. Information pertaining to natural mortality was to be obtained whenever the opportunity permitted. Carnivores were to be collected and the stomach contents identified. Eagle nests near the study areas were examined for antelope remains. 3. Fawns were tagged on the study area to supply some known-age jaws when the animals are harvested by hunters at a later date. The fawns were captured with a long handled fish net, metal tags placed in their ears, and then released. Results: A total of 57 anteiope were harvested on the Moffat County study area (Unit 2A) during a three-day season in September. Sixty either-sex permits were issued for this area, for a success ratio of 95 percent. Check station personnel aged 52 animals harvested, or 91 percent. Report card data indicated a higher percentage of adult bucks and a lower percentage of fawns in the harvest than check station data (Table 1). This seems to reflect the reluctance of hunters to report a fawn. Many hunters at the check stations referred to fawns as yearlings. �- 5 - Table 1 -- Sex ratio of the 1967 antelope harvest on Unit 2A based on hunter report cards and check station data.* Source Bucks Number % Does Number % Fawns Number % Total Check Station 27 52 14 27 11 21 52 Report Cards 40 70 13 23 4 7 57 =============================================================================== *There were 60 either-sex permits issued for Unit 2A. Most of the land in the Larimer County study area (Unit 5) has been closed to hunting by private landowners for the past two years. This unit was combined with the adjecent unit for management purposes. Approximately 30 antelope were killed on the study area, 14 of these being checked by check station personnel. More than 74 percent of the animals brought through the check stations were killed on the first day of the hunting season. There was very little difference between percentage of bucks killed the first day as compared to the percent of the does killed the first day (Table 2). Units 2 and 2A were open for a three-day season (Saturday through Monday) while Units 4 and 5 were open for a five-day period (Saturday through Wednesday). Most hunters hunted on Saturdayj there was very little hunting activity after mid-afternoon on Sunday. In general, antelope hunters are "weekend hunters" and return home Sunday afternoon regardless of the extended seasons. The average amount of time required by successful hunters to bag their animal ranged 5.9 to 7.1 hours on the various units. This did not seem to be correlated to the number of animals observed by each hunter. The mean ages of the antelope harvested on Units 2A, 2, 4, and 5 were: 2.2, 2.0, and 2.2 years, respectively. The mean age for bucks killed in Unit 2A was higher than the mean age of the does, whereas the mean age was higher for does than bucks on Units 2, 4, and 5. More than 55 percent of the harvest was in the fawn and yearling age classes for all areas. There were 66 report cards issued to hunters harvesting bucks on the study areas. These cards requested the hunters to measure the horn lengths of their animal. Of these cards 53 (80 percent) were filled out and returned. Check station personnel had recorded the names of the hunters on the check station data forms so that information on the report cards could be directly compared to the check station data. The horn length as recorded by the hunter was used to establish the age of the animal (fawn, yearling, or adult). This information was compared to the age determined at the check station by the tooth eruption and wear technique. There were four errors out of the 53 cardreturnsj this is an 8 percent error. It appears that this method (hunter reported horn lengths) may be a reliable method of determining the age structure of buck antelope in the harvest. The wounding loss was determined by moving through the areas on foot and by vehicle. Only two dead animals were fOQnd on Unit 2A (an adult doe and a doe fawn), and no wounded or abandoned antelope were found on Unit 5. �- 6 Table 2 -- Miscellaneous hunter information collected at antelope hunter check stations, 1967· Unit category '5 .., 2A 2 29 5 17 0 15 2 9 3 18 2 13 0 6 5 3 1 47 7 30 0 21 7 12 4 35 28 5·9 5 24 15 107 7·1 15 21 16 41 4.3 10 6 12 20 7·3 19 18 6.1 3 23 13 45 '6.2 7 12 10 70 8·3 8 5 4 30 6.8 4 36 54 24 6.0 4 24 4 4 28 78 6·7 12 ·19 3 0 26 51 5·9 9 6 7 0 16 23 7·1 3 29 1 0 Kill ~cks First Day Second Day Does First Day Second Day Both Sexes First Day Second Day Hunter Observations Buck Hunters Number of hunters checked Antelope observed/hunter Hours hunted/hunter Antelope observed/hunter/hour Bucks observed/100 does Doe Hunters Number of hunters checked Antelope observed/hunter Hours hunted/hunter Antelope observed/hunter/hour Bucks observed/100 does Buck and Doe Hunters Number of hunter checked Antelope observed/hunter Hours hunted/hunter Antelope observed/hunter/hour Bucks observed/100 does Wounded antelope observed Abandoned antelope observed 3 25 =============================================================================== The wounding loss was much lighter on Unit 2A than in past years. This may be due to having either-sex permits rather than specified perm its, and having less hunting pressure in the area. Since most of the Larimer County study area (Unit 5) was closed to hunting, the hunting pressure was very light and the wounding loss appeared to be comparable to other years. Natural mortalities seem to be very limited in older fawns and adult animals. An adult doe and fawn (approximately 3 weeks old) were found to be lame from extreme infection of the leg joints. The doe was collected with a rifle and the fawn was captured alive. The laboratory technician was unable to obtain material for laboratory cultures because the joints were badly abscessed. The organism causing this inflamation of the joints is believed to be a type of polyarthritis found in domestic sheep. Other antelope in this area were found to have this disease during earlier investigations done within this project. There was no evidence of coyote or eagle predation found on either study area. �-7- Four antelope were found caught in net wire fences, three were dead and the forth was released. A local Bureau of Land Management employee reported releasing three antelope from a fence in the same area (Moffat County). A detailed account of these fences is presented in the completion report for Job 5 of this project. Thirty-five fawns were tagged on the Moffat County study area. these were males and 22 were females (Table 4). Thirteen of Table 3 -- Age and sex of antelope checked through hunter check stations, 1967. Age Class (years) unit 2A Fawn 1 2 3 4 5+ TOTAL Mean Age Unit 2 Fawn 1 2 3 Bucks Number % 6 13 5 3 3 3 18 8 o o 5 26 6 32 15 4 9 9 9 2 21 11 1 1 5 5 39 19 33 2·3 4 Does Number % 2.0 29 57 Total Number % 11 19 9 21 5 4 10 4 52 2.2 36 8 32 2 2 18 18 10 2 40 2 5+ TOTAL Mean Age o 1 14 11 25 1.6 2.2 2.0 4 7 27 1 2 3 20 3 4 5+ TOTAL Mean Age 47 o 1 o 7 15 2 18 4 9 1 1 1 1 1 1 14 14 14 14 14 2 29 7 3.4 1.6 8 o 4 Unit 4 Fawn 8 8 4 o 14 37 17 5 8 4 16 4 23 36 18 1 5 2 2 22 2.2 9 9 Unit 5 Fawn 1 2 o 8 73 3 4 5+ TOTAL Mean Age 2 18 o 1 11 2.0 o o 2 10 2 o 1 14 o o 9 71 33 2 3 1 2.8 2.2 14 �- 8 Table 4 -- Antelope fawns tagged in Moffat County in 1967. Date Tag Number 8ex Unit Number 2 Female 96 2 Female 97 Mile 2 227 2-8 228 Female 2-8 Female 229 Male 2-8 230 Female 2-8 326 2A Female June 2 327 Male 2A 328 2A Female 329 2A Female 330 2A Female 331 Female 2-N 332 Mile 2-N June 6 333 Male 2-N 334 Mile 2-N 335 Female 2-N 336 Female 2-N 337 Mile 2-N 338 Female 2-N June 7 339 Female 2-N 340 Female 2-N 341 Male 2-N 342 Female 2-8 June 8 343 Male 2-8 344 Female 2-8 345 Female 2-8 346 2-8 Female 347 Mile 2-8 348 Female 2=8 349 2A Female June 9 350 Male 2-8 June 12 351 Male 2-N June 13 352-353 Female 2-8 June 14 354 Male 2-N 358 Note: Unit 2A is Driers Pasture south of Maybell; Unit 2-8 is that porti.on of the Unit 2 that lays south of the main highway; Unit 2-N is that portion of Unit 2 that lays north of the main highway. May 31 June 1 Prepared by: George D. Bear Assistant Researcher �January, 1969 -9- JOB-PROGRESS REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO Project No. W-40-R-9 Work Plan No. 1 Personnel: Job No. 12 Antelope Census Title of Job: Period Covered: Antelope Investigations May 1, 1967 through April 30, 1968 George D. Bear Abstract Aerial counts were made with a fixed-wing aircraft in two directions (northsouth and east-west) to evaluate the effect of direction of flight on antelope census. The east-west flights yielded a higher total count on all three paired~flights. Light conditions were poorer on two of the north-south flights than on corresponding east-west flights, which may account for some of the variation. It would appear that there is no significant difference between counts flown in an east-west direction as compared to flights in a north-south direction. �- 10 - Objective: Compare antelope counts from flights conducted in a north-south direction and flights conducted in an east-west direction. Procedure: Aerial counts were made with a fixed-wing aircraft. Flights were limited to clear calm days insofar as possible. The study areas were flown in onemile wide strips at an altitude of 100-300 feet. Two flights were made on the same area on successive days. The first-day flight was conducted in an east-west direction and the second-day flight in a north-south direction. Census condition were evaluated as described in earlier reports for this job (Table 2). �- 11 - ANTELOPE CENSUS Three paired flights were conducted on the study areas (Table 1). The eastwest flight in June yielded a higher total count than the north-south flight. Most of the variability was in the fawn age class, since 95 adults were counted on the north-south flight and 93 on the east-west flight. The fawns are not usually running actively with the adults at this time, thus causing some of the variations in the counts. In addition the light was poorer for the north-south flight. The east-west flight yielded a higher total count in July, also. But again the difference (sixteen animals) is not likely to be significant due to the small sample size and other reasons mentioned above. The east-west flight in August yielded a higher count. However, the light conditions were poorer for the north-south flight. The sex ratios were similar for both flights and it is doubtful that there is a significant difference. Table 1 -- Aerial census on the antelope study areas. Location & Date Dir. of Flight Census Conditions Ground Light Air Bucks Antelope Counted Total Does Fawn Buck-DoeFawn Ratio Unit 2 June 26 N-S June 27 E-W July 25 N-S July 26 E-W III III III III II I I I I I I I 27 22 18 23 68 71 58 68 15 41 52 53 110 134 128 144 40-100-22 31-100-58 31-100-89 33-100-77 Unit 5 Aug 2 Aug 3 III III II III I I 89 84 183 177 135 122 407 383 49-100-74 47-100-69 E-W N-S =============================================================================== The east-west flights yielded slightly higher total counts on all three paired. flights. The light conditions were poorer on two of the north-south flights. Since the differences were small, it would appear that there is no significant difference between the flights conducted in a north-south direction as compared to flights conducted in an east-west direction. The data presented here shall be combined with data previously collected in this job for final analysis during the next work segment. Prepared by: George D. Bear Assistant Researcher �- 12 - Table 2 -- Evaluation sheet used on aerial antelope surveys. lLWTELOPE INVESTIGATIONS Aerial Census Form Date Time: ------------------------ Take-off Aircraft --------------- Start census Land -------------------- ------------------ Pilot -------------------- Flight (hrs.) ---------------- ------------------~Finish---------------- Total (hrs.)--------- Observer( s}: ---------------------------------------------------------------------- Counting Conditions: (circle applicable in each category). Snow cover - Condition I. New snow cover, count started within two days of new snow. 100% snow cover. Condition II. 100% snow cover, but old snow with tracks too numerous to locate all animals. Condition III. Light - Air - Spotty snow cover, bare ground, poor background. Condition I. Clear skies. Condition II. Broken overcast 50% of the time. Condition III. Solid overcast. Condition I. Good, solid air. Condition II. Mild to moderate downdraft and turbulence. Condition III. 'S!3¥erej~tll.r1!iulence and downdrafts. Location: Weather and phenological data: development of veg.) (General for period, specific for day, �January, 1969 - 13 JOB PROGRESS REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT· State of COLORADO -------------------------------- Project No. W-40-R-9 Work Plan No. 1 Antelope Investigations 13 Job No. Title of Job: Techniques for Determining Population Trends Period Covered: January 1, 1968 through April 30, 1968 Personnel: George D. Bear Objective: To develop the most effective procedure for determing antelope population trends. Procedure: Herd structure, mortality, and annual increment data were collected under Jobs 11 and 12 of this project for a five-year period. These data were to be graphed, tables prepared, and analyzed to best depict the population trend in each of the two herds under study. Various techniques for analyzing population data will be tested. Results: Nothing was 'accomplished on this job, pending a review of literature on population dynamics (Job 10). References need to be reviewed to find the various methods used in determining population trends. Then the various techniques can be applied to the data to evaluate the best technique for determining antelope population trends. Prepared by: George D. Bear Assistant Researcher ��January, 1969 - 15 - JOB PROGRESS REPORT RESEARCH·PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO --------~~~~------------- Project No. W-40-R-9 Work Plan No. 2 Title of Job: Period Covered: Personnel: Antelope Investigations Job No. 2 Food Habits of Antelope May 1, 1967 through April 30, 1968 George D. Bear Abstract A total of seven antelope were collected on the study areas in Moffat and Saguache counties during this work segment. Rumen samples have been collected from 85 animals. Vegetation surveys were conducted in the locality where each animal was collected to determine the quantity of each plant species available to the antelope. Analysis has been started on a few of the rumen samples, but additional time is needed to complete the work. �- 16 Objectives: 1. Collect antelope needed to complete the scheduled sampling quota and take rumen samples. 2. Conduct vegetation surveys to determine forage availability. 3. Analyze the data collected in this job and compare the results from the vegetation surveys to the results obtained from rumen analysis. Procedures: 1. Antelope were collected at monthly intervals in Moffat and Saguache Co-unties during the period from June 1, 1965 to April 30, 1967 (one year in each Loca.Ltty}. Three animals were collected each month in Moffat County of which two were taken on a rangeland characterized by sagebrush (Artemisia tridentata) and the third on a rangeland characterized by bitterbrush (Pu.rshia tridentata). Two animals were collected each month in Saguache County on rangeland which is characterized by a rabbitbrush (Chrysothamnussp.) overstory. Two-quart rumen samples were taken from each animal and preserved in formalin. There were occasions when animals could not be collected d.uring this initial collecting period; therefore some animals were collected during this work segment to complete the samples. The following antelope were collected on the Saguache County study area: doe, August; buck, October; and buck,November. The following antelope were collected on the Moffat County study area: doe, May; buck, May; doe, September; and doe, December. Vegetation surveys were conducted in the locality where each animal was collected to determine the species of plants available to the animals and the relative quantity of each plant species present. A temporary line-transect was run in each locality with 50 circular plots (3 square feet in size) established on each transect. The plots were placed at l25-foot intervals. Percent coverage was recorded for each plant species occurring on each plot. Percent coverage was determined by visual projection of the plant canopy onto the plane surface of the ground and related to the total area within the plot. 2. 3. The quantity of each plant species in the rumen contents is to be compar-ed to the quantitative data obtained for the same plant species on the vegetation survey transects to deterl1ine preference. Results: As mentioned above, seven antelope were collected to complete the year-long samples for the two study areas. Rumen samples were taken and preserved in formalin. A total of 85 rumen samples have been taken; 69 of these samples have been washed through graduated sieves and sorted into major plant categories. These categories need to be more finely separated, the individual plant species identified, and the quantity of each plant species in each sample determined by weight measurements. �- 17 The vegetation surveys conducted in this segment are presented in Table 1. Some surveys were not completed due to shortage of time and weather conditions. The rumen samples must be completed before a comparison can be made between the plants eaten by the antelope and the plants available for consumption. These data can be analyzed on a seasonal basis in addition to the year-long aspect. Table 1 -- Percent frequency and composition of plant species occurring on the vegetation transects. Collection Number 83 Species Grasses Agropyron sp. Agropyron smithii Bouteloua gracilis Bromus techtorum Buchloe dactyloides Carex sp. Festuca sp . Koleria cristata Muhlenbergia torreyi Oryzopsis hymenoides Poa sp. Sitanion hystrix Sporobolus crytandrus St~ipa comata 86 Freq. Compo Freq. Compo Freq. Compo Freq. Compo (%) (%) (%) (%) (%) (%) (%) (%) 64 27 86 4 30 2 20 5 4 T 16 1 46 4 26( 5 2 T 54 2 42 4 4 T 48 30 3 4 4 52 SUB-TOTAL Forbs Agoseris sp. 4 Allium sp. 38 Antennaria sp. 6 Asclepias sp. 2 Chenopodium sp. Erigeron sp. 30 Erigonum sp. 20 Eriogonum sp. 14 Helianthus sp. lappula redowski 44 Leptodactylon pungens 50 Lesquerella montana 26 Linum lewisi 22 Lupinus sp. 16 Oenothera sp. 2 Oxytropis sp. 4 Penstemon sp. 4 Phlox caespito~a 30 Pseudocymopterus montanus 26 T 2 T 32 4 9 4 32 T T T T 1 T T 2 4 T T T T T T 1 T 58 2 2 2 T T 28 14 2 4 T 2 T T �- 18 - Table 1 -- Percent frequency and composition of plant species occurring on the vegetation transects (continued) Collection Number Species Salso:la kali Sphaeralcea-coccinea Tragopogon porrifolius Trifolium gymnocarpum Unidentified, forbs Freq. Compo Freq. (%) Compo Freq. Compo (%) Compo (%) Freq. (%) (%) (%) (%) (%) 22 1 60 30 37 1 4 10 T T 1 T T 13 4 40 SUB-TOTAL Shrubs Artemisia cana Artemisia frlgida Artemisia tridentata 62 Atriplex canescens 8 Atriplex confertifolia 4 Chrysothamnus nauseosus 4 Chrysothamnus parryi Chrysothamnus viscidiflorus 10 Eurotia lanata 2 Gutierrezia sarothrae 24 -Opunt.Lasp , 6 Purshia tridentata Rhus trilobata SUB-TOTAL Lichens TOTAL 8 16 40 5 2 17 42 10 15 14 4 20 1 T 3 T T 1 2 2 4 8 3 36 12 18 3 6 1 2 T 66 4 54 14 T T 99 7 11 94 22 100 20 50 96 2 100 =============================================================================== Prepared by: George D. Bear Assistant Researcher 100 �January, 1969 - 19 - JOB PROGRESS REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT state of COLORADO --------~~~~~-------------- Project No. W-40-R-9 Work Plan No. 2 Antelope Investigations Job No. Title of Job: ' Physiological Studies Period Covered: May 1, 1967 through April 30, 1968 Personnel: 3 George D. Bear Abstract Measurements were made on seven antelope collected on the Saguache and Moffat County study areas. These animals were needed to complete the sampling quotas established for these areas during the period from June 1, 1965, through April 30, 1967. General information on morphological and physiological characteristics was obtained. Organs and glands were measured, weighed, and their volumes determined. External body measurements were also taken. ~he deg~ee of fat deposition in various parts of carcasses was determined and recorded. �- 20 - Objectives: To measure physiological and morphological characteristics of antelope collected seasonally in Moffat and Saguache Counties to establish "physiological norms" and to provide basic morphological data as related to sex and age classes. Procedures: Antelope were collected in Moffat and Saguache Counties during the period from June 1> 1965 through April 30, 1967. Three animals per month were to be collected in Moffat County and two animals per month in Saguache County. frue to various circumstances this quota was not always filled; therefore, some additional animals were needed to complete the samples. The antelope were collected and necropsied, with data on the following characteristics being recorded. (1) Blood samples were taken as soon as possible after the death of the animal. The blood was analyzed by laboratory technicians for its chemistry and cell volumes. (2) Two carcass weights were made: a bled weight and an eviscerated carcass weight. (3) External anatomical measurements made were:· ear lengths, head length, interorbital width, neck circumference, hoof lengths, hind feet lengths, tail length, mammary gland dimensions, scrotum dimensions, horn measurements, and girth. (4) The following areas of pelage were classified to color: dorsal rostrum, interorbital, dorsal surface between the shoulder blades, and outer thigh. (5) Length, width, and depth measurements, weights, and volumes were made on the following glands: adrenals, thyroid, pituitary, prosttate, and ovaries. (6) Length, width, and depth measurements, weights, and volumes were recorded for the following organs: liver, kidneys, heart, spleen, lungs, brain, eyeballs, and stomach. (7) Several measurements were made on the teeth and lower mandible: length of the mandibular and maxillary teeth series, the mandibular diastema, and the length of the ramus. (8) The length and width of the reproductive tract was obtained. (9) Fat deposition mea sur-ernent.s were made on the br-Lake t, rrimp, mesentary, k.Ldney, and the marrow of the femur and tibia. A more detailed description of all these measurements can be found in the two previous Job Completion Reports for this Project (W-40-R~'7and. W-40-R-8) . �- 21 - PHYSIOLOGICAL S~UDIES Seven antelope were collected and necropsied to complete the sampling schedule as outlined above. Three antelope were collected on the Saguache County study area: a doe in August, a buck in October, and a buck in November. Four antelope were collected on the Moffat County study area: a buck and a doe in May, a doe in September, and a doe in December. Measurements were made and recorded. These data have been combined with previous material for analysis. Analysis was started on the data concerning the fat levels at various locations in the animal. Data are being analyzed in regard to seasonal variations and sex of the antelope. Measurements taken are as follows: depth of thoracic fat, depth of back fat, kidney index, visceral fat index, and bone marrow fat content. The bone marrow measurements include both visual and chemical estimates of fat content. An article will be prepared on these body fat indices, and submitted to a technical journal for pUblication. The other data will also be prepared into articles for submission to technical journals and other publication sources. Prepared by: George D. Bear Assistant Researcher ��January, 1969 - 23 - JOB PROGRESS REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO --------~~~~~-------------- Project No. W-40-R-9 Work Plan No. 2 Antelope Investigations Job No. 5 Title of Job: Evaluation of Structures Placed in Net Wire Fences to Facilitate Antelope Movements Period Covered: June 1, 1967 through April 30, 1968. Personnel: George D. Bear Abstract This study was conducted in northwestern Colorado in areas where newly constructed fences interfered with antelope movements. The three crossing devices which were evaluated were minature cattle-guard-like structures (antelope pass and Powder River Pall and Paul's Pass). The antelope pass measures 4 feet wide by 3-3~ feet across, set on two railroad ties. The placement of this pass was tested by placing it in the original fenceline, and by constructing an offset in the fenceline and placing the passin the offset. Powder River Pass is a standard cattleguard cut in half and placed in the fenceline over a two-foot deep pit. Paul's Pass is a rectangular pen (50 feet by 100 feet) constructed in the fenceline. The periphery of the pass was constructed with a four-strand barbed wire fence. A 26-inch net wire fence bisected the center of the enclosed area. A section of 32-inch fence was also evaluated in this study. Antelope and livestock movements around the structures were evaluated by aerial counts, direct observations, and track counts. Track counts were the most effective method for evaluating animal-usage of the structures. The antelope pass appeared to be the best type of structure for allowing antelope movement. Use was nearly doubled by placing the pass in an offset rather than merely inserting it in the original fenceline. However; this structure needs some modifications to reduce sheep use. Paul's Pass and Powder River Pass received very light use. The 32-inch fence permitted movement of yearling and adult antelope, but less than half of the fawns (3-5 months old) crossed. �- 24 Objective: To determine if structures installed in sheep-tight fences will permit the free movement of antelope of all ages and sexes in Moffat County. Introduction: The selected study area is located in Moffat County, northwestern Colorado. A series of net wire fences were constructed in this area in 1964 to separate grazing allotments and subdivide other allotments into smaller pastures. Sheep-tight fences were constructed of net and barbed wire to an over-all height of 44 inches and 42 inches. Many of these new pastures lacked water development. Antelope were seen walking the fence-lines in efforts to find routes to formerly used waterholes; fifteen animals were found hung-up in the fences. They became entangled in the wire while attempting to jump across or force their way under the fence. This situation resulted in a cooperative study between the Bureau of Land lfBnagement and the Colorado Game, Fish aLd Parks Department to find devices for permitting free movement of antelope. The Bureau of Land Management furnished the f'undsand supervision necessary to install the structures mentioned in this paper, while the Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department supplied the vehicles, personnel, and other materials needed to evaluate the structures. Procedure: Structures--A combi.nation of "Paul's Pass" and antelope passes were used in t.he study. Paul's Pass was designed by Paul Applegate of the Bureau of land Management. It is a rect.angular pen 50 feet across and 100 feet long constructed in the fenceline. The periphery of the pass is constructed with a four-strand barbed wire fence. The wires are spaced with the first 16 inches above the ground; the spacing on the other wires is 6 inches, 8 inches, and 10 inches (Figure 4). The fence bisecting the center of the enclosed area (on the same plane as the original fence) is a 26-inch woven wire Ln one of the Paul's Passes and 26-inch slotted wire in the other pass (Figure 2 and 3). The gene.raL theory behind the construction of this type of pass is that the outer barbed wire fence will prohibit. the movement of cattle, but will all.ow the antelope to crawl under, Then the inner fence (net wire) will prohibit the movement of sheep, but is of a minimum height to facilitate antelope crossing over it. The wire in the second Paul's Pass was cut with slots approximately 5 inches by 12 inches in the bottom tier, The slotted wire was to be evaluated in respect to allowing antelope fawns to crawl through the fence until they were old enough to jump over the top. The third structure i.nthe group was a miniature cattle-guard-like struct1lre called an "antelope pass". This structure is constructed of l-inch steel bars. Its overall dimensions are four feet by four feet. Due to the light construction of these passes they will not support motored vehicles; thus, they were made only four feet wide to prohibit vehicles from passing through. �- 25 Tne overall length of four feet was suggested as a mlnlmum length which might prohibit the movement of domestic livestock. It was intended in the initial planning that the span which an animal would have to clear should be four feet, but in constructing the passes the structures were overlapped on the ties so the actual open span was 3 to 3~ feet, The spacing between the cross bars is 4 inches. The pass is set on a pair of railroad ties (one at either end) to hold it up off the ground. (Figure 5), It was felt that elevating this structure, rather than placing it over a pit as done with cattleguards, would keep this pass from collecting blowing snow, soil, or other items. Therefore, it would reduce maintenance, The structures were grouped in each study area as follows: Paul's Pass with 26-inch woven wire; a 100 foot interval; an antelope pass; another 100 foot interva~; and a Paults Pass with slotted wire (Figure 1), Five groups of these structures were built. In addition to the structures mentioned above, some antelope passes were placed in offsets of the fences (Figure 6), This was done by altering the direction of the fence by placing a 90 degree turn in the fence and running this leg of the fence out for 25 feet then angling it back toward the original fence-line, to intersect with the original fence at a point approximately 100 feet from the 90 degree turn. An antelope pass was placed in the center of the 25-foot leg of the offset. The theory is that an antelope moving along a fence-line is more likely to encounter an antelope pass placed directly across his direction of movement, than an antelope pass placed in the original fence line. This study compared the two techniques for placement of the antelope pass. Tn addition to these newly installed structures, there were two ''PowderRiver Passes" and a section of 32-inch high fence which were evaluated. These structures and fences had been installed about one year in advance of this study. The Powder River Passes were made by cutting a standard cattleguard in half, thus giving a miniature cattleguard measuring four feet wide and six feet long. This structure was placed in the fence-line over a two-foot deep pj_t , Wooden posts were angled down from the fence to the outer corner of the pass. l~ese posts are to force animals to cross the full six-foot span of the pass. These passes were installed in a fence constructed with 26-inch wire placed 2 inches above the ground and one strand of barbed wire 4 inches above the net wire for an overall height of 32 inches. Evaluation of antelope and livestock movements--Movement of antelope and livestock through the structures was determined by track cou.nts,direct observations, and aerial counts. These observations were limited to the period from June 1 to November 1, The structures were built on graded or cleared areas, which facilitated the track counts. The observer recorded the number of animals which crossed each structure and the nUlnberwhich approached the structure but didn't cross. During the summer period (when fawn tracks are noticable smaller than adult trackS) the counts were divided into adult and young categories, Four track counts (two-day intervals between counts) were made at each structure during a ten-day period each month, The tracks were erased with a garden rake following each count, �- 26 In addition to the track counts, an effort was made to obtain information by direct observation of the animals using the structures whenever the opportunity permitted. The following information was recorded: date; time of day; total number crossing; number refusing to cross; sex; age (adult, yearling, fawn); and behavior upon approaching and using the structure. Aerial surveys were conducted in the vici.nity of each set of structures to determine animal numbers and location. Counts were made on either side of the fences containing the structures, to detect any movement across the fencelines. These counts were made at monthly intervals. Fences or natural features whi.ch may serve as a barrier to antelope movements were used as counting boundaries. Results: ~.!'ackCoun.ts Cattle--All the structures effectively prevented movement of cattle across the fences. The number- of animals approaching the structures were as follows: offset-pass, 74; antelope pass in the straight fence, 53; Paults Pass with net wire, 65; Paults Pass with slotted wire, 73; and Powder River Pass, 11. Two animals were recorded to have crossed the structures, both using the offset-pass. One animal was a very small calf, which walked betweeen the cross bars. The other was a yearling animal which jumped the pass. Sheep--Sheep read.ily crossed the antelope passes, but the Paul s Passes effectively limited movements across the fenceline. A total of 370 sheep approached the offset-pass and 70 of these crossed, while 285 approached the antelope pass in the straight fence-line and 24 crossed. In June very few of the sheep attempted to cross these structures and those that crossed walked between the cross-bars. Later in the summer more sheep started crossing these structures and they started jumping across rather than walking between the bars. I 'I'otalsof 275 and 87 sheep approached the Pau'L' s Pass with net wire and Paul IS Pass with slotted wire, respectively. Three sheep crossed through the Paults Pass with net wire and through the Paul! s Pass with slotted wire. These crossings occurred in June and July. In the early part of the summer sheep moving down the fence-line readily walked through the barbed wire portion of the exclosure and out the far side. Later in the summer very few entered the exclosure, but walked around the periphery of the barbed. wire fence. No sheep were observed in the vicinity of the Powd.er River Passes during the study period. Antelope--Antelope use was extremely light on the Paul's Passes and the Powder River Passes; they more readily used the antelope passes. A total of 30 antelope approached. the antelope pass set i.nthe straight fence line and 9 of them crossed. �-- METAL POST a BRACE <, - ~~BUTT ~.UP U) N FENCE ..TO THE ..:...~",.~~.A.NTELOPE to- <9 W V/~' \ -,~~~:. ~~~,,~ U) 1.&.. 1.&.. "' (r o ~F,T !HE '~"':~"''- R. R. TIE ' ,'\.. ffASS ON/~~~OIRJ ~SS" ~=-- . .- RAMP FIG. 5 FI G. 6 . STANDARD 261n. 26 in. SLOT TED f f .r~ • • F ~ (, 40· •. 1'•••1 /I , I 1. • ,,:1. • • • " If ~: I ...J •••• '9-"1~~"'i" , ~w:hLx.7'>&' " flush at oround levet ~ \,. ~.J',~.~-$'~''N FIG. 2 ., ,~ .,. FIG. 3 v n 16-4· •.• .. - , .. - (26- aet .iro) .. -... 4' ..l. .. FI G. l FIG. 4 2'$ 1 v -(26.' slotted-.'r.) T Sd2~ u ••• •. --------...• -100' ro o...J • �- 28 A total of 66 antelope approached the antelope pass in the offset and 38 of these crossed. Track counts in June and July ind.icated only the adult animals were crossing the passes. Totals of 53 and 47 antelope approached the Paul's Pass with the net wire and Paul's Pass with the slotted wire, respectively. Only two adult animals crossed the fence-line using these structures. They both entered the barbed wire exclosure and jumped over the net wire and moved out the other side, without any apparent hesitation. A total of 206 antelope approached the Powder River Passes; however, none of them used these structures. Table 1 -- Antelope and livestock movement around and across structures as indicated by track counts. Type Cattle Antelope Pass (offset) Antelope Pass Paul's Pass (net wire) Paul's Pass (slotted wire) Powder River Pass Sheep Antelope Pass (offset) Antelope Pass Paul's Pass (net wire) Paul IS Pass (slotted wire) Powder River Pass Antelope Antelope Pass (offset) Antelope Pass Paul's Pass (net wire) Paul IS Pass (Slotted Wire) Powder River Pass Number Crossing Number Attempts Percent Crossing 2 0 0 0 0 74 53 65 73 3 11 o 70 24 3 2 370 285 275 85 0 19 38 9 2 0 0 66 30 47 53 206 58 30 4 o o o 8 1 2 o o =============================================================================== Direct Observations Very little success was attained in observing the animals using the various structures. Antelope were observed in the vicinity of the structures on occasions but none were observed to cross. A total of 17 antelope were observed to approach the Powder River Passes., look them over, but refuse to jump. We had reports of some people observing sheep jumping across the antelope passes. �- 29 The 32-inch high fence was located across the tr'avel route of antelope which water at the Yampa River in late summer. Several observations were obtained while the antelope traveled this route. A total of 80 antelope (45 adults and 35 fawns) were observed to approach the fence. Only one of the 45 adults refused to jump the fence, while 20 fawns refused to cross and 15 crossed. These observations were made in September and October when the fawns were at least three months old. Generally, the fawns which jumped the fence cleared. it very easily. On one occasion a fawn milled around the Powder River Pass for about 8 minutes, then went over to the side of the pass and attempted to jump the fence. It got its hind leg caught between the net and barbed wires. However, the fawn struggled free when I attempted to free it. Another fawn (estimated to be 2-3 months old) was found dead hangtng in this fence in the same locality. Most adult and yearling animals seemed to have little difficulty in jumping the fence. However, on October 15, a herd of 15 animals was observed jumping across this fence; 11 cleared it with no difficulty, while the other 4 jumped almost straight in the air and landed astraddle the fence and wriggled on over. LD spite of being able to jump the fence, most antelope milled around the fence or walked along it for as much as 10-15 minutes before jumping across. Aerial Census Aerial counts were conducted at monthly intervals when possible. These counts gave good information on the general numbers of animals in the vicinitJT of each structure and their general dispersion. There was some variability in the counts due to the census conditions (light, background, dispersion of animals, etc.). On some occasions the counts were duplicated. There were very few animals crossing any set of structures during each monthly interval; also movements were in both directions, so these counts proved to be unsuitable for determining use of the structures by any shift in numbers of animals to either side of the fenceline. Table 2 -- Aerial antelope counts in the vicinity of antelope structures.* Date and Location - Bucks Antelope Does Fawns Total Sheep Cattle Remarks Set #1 (east) June 26 June 27 July 25 July 26 Aug. 23 Oct. 16 1 1 0 2 1 5 15 12 17 17 15 18 0 8 14 17 14 12 16 21 31 36 30 35 100 125 100 100 300 250 -Veg. green and good condo ; abundance of water. Set #1 (west) June 26 June 27 July 25 July 26 Aug. 23 Oct. 16 4 0 4 4 0 5 8 19 1 15 2 8 4 13 1 10 4 11 16 32 6 29 6 24 100 100 75 200 200 275 -Same as above. Set #2 (east) Same as #1 (west) -Veg. drying out; -water in all tanks �- 30 Table 2 -- Aerial antelope counts in the vicinity of antelope structures* (cont.) Date and Location Set #2 (west) June 26 June 27 July 25 July 26 Aug. 23 Oct. 16 Bucks Antelope Does Fawns Total Sheep 45 44 100 100 44 40 50 50 150 100 16 22 7 18 18 10 14 12 3 26 8 8 8 25 9 10 5 47 17 Set #3 (north) June 26 o o o o Aug. 23 o o o o Set #3 (south) June 26 Aug. 23 1 1 o o 2 o 1 3 Set #4 (north) June 26 July 25 Aug • 23 7 2 6 13 2 10 16 Oct. 16 14 o o 4 6 3 18 Cattle -Veg •. "'greenand good cond .; abundance of water. -Veg. drying out; -water in all tanks -Veg. green and good cond.; water - good -Veg. drying out. 1,000 1,000 -Same as above. 9 22 21 42 13 35 30 51 38 103 o o 2 3 o 5 2 12 7 5 15 Set #5 (north) July 26 24 Aug. 23 4 Oct. 16 9 34 40 28 19 40 20 Set #5 (south) July 26 Aug. 23 Oct. 16 14 31 4 41 42 27 32 27 Set #4 (south) June 26 July 25 Aug. 23 Oct. 16 16 -Veg. green and good; cond .; water-abund. -Veg. drying out; some waterholes dry. -Veg. dry; animals grouped at river. -Same as above 135 72 Remarks -Same as above -Same as above 77 85 =============================================================================== *Counts were made on either side of the fence containing the structures. �- 31 Discussion: The antelope pass appeared to be the best type of structure for allowing antelope movement. Use was nearly doubled by placing the pass in an offset rather than merely inserting it in the original fenceline. However, sheep use of this pass was also quite high. Therefore the structure needs to be modified to reduce sheep use and hopefully not reduce antelope usage. The open span of the pass must be increased. Just how much is uncertain, possibly to five or even six feet. This should be tested further. At the same time the structure should be modified to discourage sheep from walking between the bars. This might be done by reducing the space between the bars, possibly to three inches. The pass was set on a railroad tie, which raised it off the ground six inches. This height should be at least doubled. All these modifications should be tested so that the structure can meet the minimum requirements which are necessary to contain sheep yet present a minimum barrier to antelope. Young antelope must be given serious consideration in this evaluation; if the young are endangered in any way the net increment of the population is going to be lowered. It was evident in this study that there was a learning period for the animals. Use increased as the antelope became familiar with the passes; and the sheep didn't bother to enter the barbed wire exclosure of Paul's Pass as time progressed. This should be given consideration in evaluation of any new devices. Apparently cattle are not much of a problem because these 3-3~ foot passes adequately contained them and surely a larger pass will do likewise. Serious consideration should be given to the 32-inch fence. This fence permitted movement of yearling and adult animals. The rancher using this allotment said this fence contained the cattle and sheep. We need more information on the fawn class in regard to when they might start crossing a 32-inch fence in greater numbers than indicated in thi.sstudy. If these fawns can negotiate a 32-inch fence by the time the winter migration starts, a 32-inch fence which an antelope could cross anywhere would be much better than a few crossing devices scattered in a higher fence. Again, we need additional information as to whether or not a 32-inch fence will effectively contain livestock under range conditions. Paul's Pass effectively contained livestock, but received little antelope use. Tracks indicated the two antelope that used. these structures didn't have any difficulty in crossing through them. This looks like basically a good idea, but the antelope didn't cooperate. It appeared that the antelope were so used to net wire fences that they did not even attempt to crawl under the barbed wire, as no antelope entered the barbed wire exclosure other than the two that crossed. It appeared that the Paul's Pass with the slotted wire had little advantage over the Paul's Pass with the net wire. By the time the fawns were freely moving with the adults they were fairly large in size, and it is doubtful if they would crawl through these slots. �- 32 - The Powder River Passes had little effect in aiding antelope movements. However, it must be remembered that these passes were set in a 32-inch fence which antelope could jump. On the other hand, 17 antelope were observed to stand directly in front of this structure and look it over as if trying to gather up enough nerve to jump across, then refuse to jump. It would appear that this structure needs some modifications. PeTS onne1 of the Wyoming Game and Fish Commission had suggested using metal posts for brace posts next to the antelope pass and omitting the wooden posts which angled down from the fence to the corners of the pass, as this tended to turn animals out and away from the pass. Observations certainly indicated this to be true. If this pass were placed in an offset, it would likely increase use. There were many problems suggested in this investigation. This study should be continued to evaluate the structures with modifications made as mentioned above, and new ideas should be solicited and evaluated. Prepared by: GeDrge Do Bear· Assistant Researcher �January, 1969 - 33 JOB PROGRESS REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO --------~~~~~-------------Bighorn Sheep and Mountain Work Plan No. Title of Job: Period Covered: Personnel: Goat Investigations W-41-R-1S Project No. Job No. 1 Bighorn Sheep Distribution, populations, and Herd Composition June 1, 1967 to September 1, 1967 L. Dale Hibbs and Tom Woodard ABSTRACT Bighorn sheep herd classification counts were made in the following areas: Pikes Peak, Sangre de Cristo Range, Sheep Creek, Collegiate Range, Buffalo Peaks, Georgetown--Empire, Bowen Pass--Clark's Peak, and Mesa Verde National Park. EWe-lamb ratios ranged from a high of 100:79 on Pikes peak to a low of 100:4 in the Sangre de Cristo Range. Most counts are considered to be low or incomplete, and are useful primarily as trend counts rather than estimates of actual herd size. Hunter comments on the 1967 bighorn sheep hunting season are listed and classified. Because of the death of the former project researcher, Mr. Dale Hibbs, and the subsequent need for completing this report, the detailed distribution maps, written descriptions for access to specific herd areas, and recommendations for census procedures and techniques are not included. It is not known whether these were prepared by Mr. Hibbs. A thorough search of the files failed to locate any of this material. �- 34 - Objectives: 1. Determine bighorn sheep distribution. 2. Determine populations or trends. 3. Determine herd sex and age composition. 4. Prepare detailed range or distribution maps for specific herds with written descriptions for census, and develop standardized forms which can be used by management personnel during routine census and for recording long-term census information. Procedures: 1. Distribution of bighorn sheep in Colorado were determined by aerial and ground observations in.areas of known occupancy, reported but unverified occupancy, and in areas where new herds may have developed close to established herds. Aerial observations were made from fixedwing aircraft and helicopter, and ground observations were made primarily by foot or horseback although trail vehicles, four-wheel drive vehicles, and conventional vehicles were used whenever conditions allowed. Observation data were recorded on field forms which also serve for other portions of this job. Data recorded included: date; observer; game management unit number; herd or area designation; specific location; route of access into area, if a ground observation; manner of making observation (afoot, horseback, veh~cle, fixed-wing or helicopter); time and number of adult males and females, yearlings, and young, unclassified, and totals; elevation; vegetative type; general activity; and comments. A distribution map will be prepared from these data. Forest Service maps, scaled 2 inches per"mile, .will be used where available. L~ districts where these large-scale maps have not been prepared, the -f;:--inch-per-mile maps will be used. 2. Attempts were made to obtain as complete a population census as possible in each area studied., or at least, to establish uniform coverage and counting procedures to provide reliable data from which to determine trend from year to year. These counts are made in conjunction with the distribution observations described under Procedure 1, and recorded on the prepared form. Counts are to be attempted under as nearly comparable situations as possible in succeeding years. Population data will be graphed for each herd or area. 3. In conjunction with the two preceding objectives and procedures, the herds observed will be classified by rams, ewes, yearlings, lambs, unclassified, and totals for sex and age, structure data. These data will enable us to determine productivity, survival and general herd health, on which sound management plans may be based. �- 35 BIGHORN SHEEP DISTRIBUTION, POPULATIONS AND HERD COMPOSITION Thomas N. Woodard Project activities are statewide, but it was impossible to cover many areas during this short work period. Activities involved an attempt to determine the distribution, population and herd composition of the bighorn sheep in the areas covered. Total counts cannot be obtained in most areas because of the wide and sparse distribution of the sheep. However, herd counts can be made and used as trend counts in evaluating the condition of each herd. If these counts are made each year they help determine if the herds are increasing, decreasing or remaining static in numbers. The bighorn sheep ranges that were surveyed during this work period and the number of sheep observed are shown in Table 1. Counts in most of the areas are inadequate because of the short work period. Pikes Peak Area No.6: This herd is one of the largest and healthiest in the state. It numbers approximately 200 animals. The high ewe:2amb ratio offers proof of the healthy condition of the herd. A total of 47 ewes and 37 lamps were observed near Bison Reservoir for a ewe:lamb ratio of 100:79. This is exactly the same ratio as was calculated in 1966 for the Bison Reservoir area. On June 15, 1967 a minimum of 28 rams and a maximum of 41 rams were observed on Sheep Mountain. The discrepancy is because some of the counts may have been duplications. At least 24 of the rams were legal 3/4 curl or better. A total maximum count was not made on Pikes Peak because most time spent in this area was on Job No.. 13 Bighorn Sheep Habitat Studies. Sheep Creek-Antero Peak-Taylor Creek-Area No. 10: The herd in this area is one of the largest and healthiest in the state. The sheep are found in country which is not usually thought of as bighorn sheep habitat. Much of the area consists of small mesas transected by steep walled rocky canyons. On June 5, 1967, 10 mature rams were sighted in the Poncha Pass area from a fixed wing aircraft. This region was added to Area No. 10 for the 1967 hunting season. On June 20, 1967, a total of 50 bighorn sheep were observed in the cliffs north of North Pass Creek. Of this total 3 were rams, 26 were ewes, 13 were lambs and 8 were yearlings. The ewe:lamb ratio was 100:50 which is relatively high. A newborn lamb, about 3 hours old, was observed in the area. It was unable to stand up at this age disproving much of the literature which states that lambs can follow the ewes immediately after birth. �- 36 - Sangre de Cristo Range Area No.9: During this work period, 3 aerial counts were made in this area. A total of 67 sheep were observed including 9 rams, 56 ewes, and only 2 lambs. The extremely low lamb crop was probably a result of the unseasonably cold and wet spring and early summer in this area. The sheep in this area are located in the southern part of the range. Very few are found north of Humboldt Peak which is about 12 miles south and 5 miles west of Westcliffe, Colorado. Buffalo Peaks Area No. 12: There were two aerial counts in this area during the work period. A total of 20 ewes and 9 lambs were observed, making a ewe:lamb ratio of 100:45. Georgetown-Empire Area No. 17: Only one count, on July 10, 1967, was made 'in this area during the work period. Four ewes and one lamb were observed. The lamb was in very poor condition and probably did not survive the summer. This is a very small sample but it does show that the reproduction rate is probably low and, the herd is not in a healthy condition. Limited Observations in Other Areas Bowen Pass-Clarks Peak Area No. 19: On July 25, 1967, 8 ewes and 4 lambs were sighted on Mount Richtofen, for a ewe:lamb ratio of 100:50. Collegiate Range Area No. 11: Only 2 ewes and 1 lamb were seen in the Collegiate Range during the work period. In the past this has been a good area for sheep but in recent years the herd has decreased to an alarmingly low level. Mesa Verde National Park: L~ the late 1940ls mountain sheep were planted in this area. In June of this work period, 3 ewes and 1 lamb were sighted in Pine Canyon which is just south of the southeast border of Mesa Verde National Park. �- 37 - Table 1 - Mountain sheep observations in Colorado during the summer of 1967· Area' Adult Male Female Lamb Pikes Peak Area; No. 6 28 47 37 112 Sangre de Cristo Range Area No. 9 9 '56 2 67 Sheep Creek Area No. 10 13 26 13 Collegiate Range Area No. 11 2 1 3 Buffalo Peaks Area No. 12 20 9 29 Georgetown Empire Area No. 17 4 1 5 Bowen Pass Clark's Peak Area No. 19 8 4 12 Mesa Verde National Park 3 1 4 166 68 TOTALS 50 Yearling 8 8 ============================================================================ Total 60 292 �- 38 Summary of 1967 Bighorn Sheep Hunters' Remarks and Suggestions Approximately 60 bighorn sheep hunters made additional remarks and suggestions on their returned questionnaires. Remarks applicable to all areas, and the number of times suggested were as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13· Agree with 3/4 curl law. Disagree with 3/4 curl law. Believe sheep hunters should be allowed to take a mule deer. Believe sheep hunters should not be allowed to take a mule deer. Open sheep season in October. Longer season. Draw permits earlier Do not allow a successful hunter to apply for a permit for 5 years. Don't schedule other hunting seasons at the same time in the same areas. Achieve a better distribution of hunters by physically distributing the hunters over the area. Or by staggering the permittees hunting time. Help the hunters locate the legal rams. Supply enlarged maps, like those in hunter questionnaires, with permits. 6 1 3 1 2 3 2 2 3 2 1 2 1 Additional remarks applicable only to the separate areas were as follows: Area 1, Poudre River - Too many permits for the limited number of mature rams. Area 2, Gore Range - Domestic sheep were a problem. Area 3, Mount Evans - Too many permits for the number of mature rn~. Too many vehicles Area 9, Sangre de Cristo Range - Not enough sheep available. Area 10, Sheep Creek - Change the boundary of Areas 10 and 22 from North Cochetopa Pass to Cochetopa Pass Road. Area 17, Georgetown - Close the season because of a lack of legal rams. Domestic sheep were a problem. Too many permits for the area. Area 19, Bowen Pass - Domestic sheep were a problem. Area 22, San Luis Peaks - Allow more permits for the area. Area 23, McCurdy Mountain - Not sufficient numbers of sheep in the area. Area 28, Vallecito - Domestic sheep were a problem. Not sufficient numbers of sheep in the area. Approved by: William H. Rutherford Prepared by: Thomas N. Woodard Student Assistant 3 1 3 1 3 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 �January, 1969 - 39 JOB PROGRESS REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO ------~~~~~---------Bighorn Sheep and Mountain Goat Project No. W-41-R-1S Work Plan No. 1 Title of Job: Period Covered: Personnel: Investigations Job No. 13 Bighorn Sheep Habitat Studies June 1, 1967 to May 31, 1965. L. Dale Hibbs and Thomas N. Woodard ABSTRACT Intensive paced-Parker range transects were conducted during the summer of 1967 on the Pikes Peak, Georgetown, Taylor River, and McCurdy Mountain bighorn sheep winter range areas. Plant species encountered on each of the transects; and the forage density indices, plant density indices, number of pellet groups per acre, and sheep days use per acre, are tabulated for each of the areas. �- 40 - Objectives: 1. Determine the vegetative types and vegetative composition on bighorn ranges. 2. Determine forage preferences of bighorn sheep and the competition for forage between this and other species. 3. Determine the topographic features of currently occupied bighorn ranges. Procedures: 1. Modified paced-Parker transects of 100 paces or points, using a 3/4 inch loop, were established in specific herd areas (listed, in part, in "Loca t Lon of work!', ,JobNo.1 of this Work Plan). At least two transects are run in each vegetative type within known herd ranges to obtain vegetative composition. This procedure follows that described in the interagency cooperative big game range analysis condition transects (Chapter 8, Range Analysis Handbook, U.S.F.S., Region II) for browse ranges. For alpine-tundra types "a different form of paced transect is used, similar to that developed for the previous season's use in mountain goat ranges. It, also, is a 100-point paced transect but consists of a pair of them within 50 yards of each other, on which the actual hit is recorded; the nearest plant to a hit, if on litter, moss, bare soil, erosion pavement or rock; and the first, nearest utilized. plant. This gives data for ground cover, composition and utilization, respectively. In addition, ten one-hundredth acre pellet group plots per transect are counted for an index to total range use. Condition and trend of the range are determined from data recorded on a range form, as well as soil ratings, as indicated by the scorecard. Certain modifications may have to be made for alpine areas when data from several transects have been gathered and interpreted. Summer and winter range areas are sampled with transects. 2. Forage preferences are determined by two methods: a. Visual estimates of utilization by species on the transect hits. b. Analysis of stomach contents of h-QDter-harvested sheep. Two quart samples were obtained wherever possible from hunters, and qualitative analyses on one quart performed by the point frame method (Chamard and Box, 1964). While utilization data may not indicate consumption by species of animal, the relative use of the area, as indicated by known or observed animal species, and pellet group counts, are an indication of actual and potential competition which may exist. Pellet group data are gathered on ten one-h-QDdredth acre plots per transect and are recorded on the back of the range form. �- 41 - 3. The topography and terrain of each herd area are determined from ground observation, aerial photographs and contour maps. These data are recorded on a field form. Areas are planimetered from aerial photographs or available maps. Data recorded will include: area or herd name; specific location; herd altitudinal range; geologic formations, elevations, the areas they occupy and their percentages of the total study area; primary game species being studied; associated animal species; aerial photo~~aph numbers; land status (National Forest, National Park, B. L. M., state, private, and total acreages); comments; data; and investigator. A file will be made for each herd area, and range data sheets, type maps, aerial photographs, and other pertinent data will be maintained for each. ��- 43 - BIGHORN SHEEP HABITAT STUDIES Thomas N. Woodard Intensive paced-Parker transects were conducted during the summer of 1967 on the Pike's Peak, Georgetown, Taylor River, and McCurdy Mountain bighorn sheep winter range areas. Each of the areas will be considered separately. Pikes Peak - Area 6: The bighorn sheep winter range is located on the southeast side of the Pikes Peak complex. The main bighorn sheep area is from the head of Oil Creek south to Bison Reservoir and Bull Park. During the winter the bighorn sheep utilize high windswept ridges at elevations of 11,000 to 12,000 feet. The ewes and lambs are found in the Oil Creek and Beaver Creek drainages and around Bison Reservoir. This is essentially the northern and western part of the range. It is an ideal area for lambing because it is characterized by steep slopes and rocky outcroppings which are almost inaccessible. The rams are usually found on or near Sheep Mountain which constitutes the southern and eastern part of the range. An old spruce-fir burn on the south side of Sheep Mountain is heavily utilized by the rams. The predominant plants on the winter range were carex (Carex sp.), wheatgrasses (Agropyron sp.), fescues (Festuca sp.), cinquefoils (Potentilla sp.), and alpine avens (Geum turbinatum). All species of plants that were encountered on the range survey as regular transect hits or as composition hits are shown in Table 1. The results of all the paced-Parker transects for the Pikes Peak bighorn sheep winter range are presented in Table 2. Four one-hundred point paced-Parker transects were rQn on a rid.ge in the Oil Creek Drainage. The condition of the winter range in this area varied from high fair to good. The average forage density index (number of hits per transect on desirable and intermediate species) for the four transects was 45 with a range of 36 to 51. The average plant density index (number of hits per transect on all plants) was 56.3 with a range of 51 to 62. Pellet group counts were made in conjunction with the regular vegetative transects. One-hundredth acre plots were established at every tenth point along the 100-point transects. The number of bighorn sheep pellet groups in the Oil Creek ~rainage area ranged from 630 to 840 per acre. The average bighorn sheep day's use per acre for the four transects was 55.6. �- 44 - Three one-hundred point paced-Parker transects were run on the ridge between the East Fork and the West Fork of West Beaver Creek. The condition of the winter range in this area varied from high poor to low good. The average forage density index for the three transects was 34 with a range of 26 to 45. The average plant density index was 76.7 with a range of 72 to 80,: The number of bighorn sheep pellet groups per acre ranged from 240 to 390 for an average of 25.9 bighorn sheep day's use per acre. Three one-hundred point paced-Parker transect were also run in the sprucefir burn on the south side of Sheep Mountain. The condition of the winter range in this area was high fair to low good. The average forage density index was 45.3 with a range of 42 to 51. The average plant density index was 65.3 with a range of 63 to 70. The number of bighorn sheep pellet groups per acre ranged from 620 to 1150 for an average of 61.6 bighorn sheep day's use per acre. There was very little indication of competition from other animals in this area. The deer and elk populations are low and cattle do not reach these elevations. �- 45 - Table 1 - Plants encountered on range transects conducted on the Pikes Peak winter Bighorn Sheep range, June, 1967. Trees Rocky Mountain juniper JQ~iperus scopulorum Shrubs Willow Shrubby cinquefoil Salix Z. Potentilla fruticosa Forbs Achillea lanulosa Allium sp . Antennaria sp. Western yarrow Wild onion Pussy toes Arenaria fendleri Sandwort Circium sp. Eriogonum sp . Geum turbinatum Oxyria sp. Potentilla sp. Saxifraga rhomboidea Sedum sp. Sibbaldia procumbens Thistle Buckwheat Alpine avens Sorrel Cinquefoils Snowball saxifrage Stonecrop False strawberry Moss campion Alpine clover Dwarf mat clover Silene acaulis Trifolium dasyphyllum T. nanum Grasses Agropyron sp. A. scribneri Carex sp. Festuca ovian Junc~ .sp. Poa sp. Trisetum spicatum Wheatgrass Scribner wheatgrass Sedge Sheep fescue Rush Bluegrass Spiked trisetum ============================================================================ �- 46 - Table 2 - Results of paced-Parker range transects on Pikes Peak bighorn sheep winter range for 1967 Location of Transect FDIl PDI2 PG/A3 SD~ 36 42 51 51 45 51 54 62 58 56·3 630 650 770 840 722·5 48·5 50 59·2 64.6 55·6 26 31 45 34 72 78 80 76·7 390 380 240 336·7 30 29·2 18·5 25·9 51 43 42 45·3 70 63 63 65·3 1150 630 620 800 88·5 48·5 47·7 61.6 Oil Creek Low High Low Low High High Average Beaver Creek Low Medium High Average Sheep Mountain Low Medium High Average 1 FDI--Forage Density Index 2pDI--Plant Density Index 3PG/A-Pellet Groups per Acre 4SDU--Sbeep Day!s Use �- 47 - Georgetown and Empire - Area No. 17: The bighorn sheep winter range in this area north of Highway 6-40 from Dumont to Empire and west of Highway 6 from Empire to Georgetown. The bighorn sheep utilize the steep hillsides next to the highway. These hillsides are characterized by rocky outcroppings and loose shale slides. The overstory consists of a few scattered ponderosa pine (Pinus ponderosa) and Douglas fir (Pseudotsuga menziesii). The major shrubs which make up the understory are fringed sagebrush (Artemisia frigida), mountain mahogany (Cercocarpus . montanus), rabbitbrush (Chrysothamnus sp.), and skunkbush (Rhus trilobata). The.prlneipal grasses are blue grama (Bouteloua gracllis), mountain muhly (Muhlenbergia montana), Indian ricegrass (Oryzopsis hymenoides) and sleepy grass (Stipa rObusta). The species of plants that were encountered on the range survey as regular transect hits or as composition hits are shown in Table 3. A total of eight 100-point paced-Parker transects were run in the Georgetown area. The condition of the winter range in this area varied greatly from poor + to excellent However, the condition of most of the range was no better than fair. For the range west of Highway 6, three miles north of Georgetown, the average forage density index was 23. The average plant density index was 45.5. The average number of bighorn sheep pellet groups per acre was 715 for a sheep day!s use per acre of 55. For the range west of Highway 6, 2 miles north of Georgetown, the average forage density index was 46.5. The average plant density index was 54·5· The average number of bighorn sheep pellet groups per acre was 590 for a sheep day!s use per acre of 45.5. For the range north of Highway 6-40, just before the intersection of Highways 6 and 40, the average forage density index was 15. The average plant density index was 54.5. The average number of bighorn sheep pellet groups per acre was 345 for a sheep day!s use per acre of 26·5. For the range north of Highway 6-40 near Downieville, the average forage density index was 26.5. The average plant density index was 53.5. The average number of bighorn sheep pellet groups per acre was 480 for a sheep day!s use per acre of 36.9. The results of all the paced-Parker transects for the Georgetown bighorn sheep winter range are presented in Table 4. From pellet group counts there was some indication of slight competition with deer in the area. The average number of deer pellet groups per acre was 78.7 for a deer day!s use of 6. �- 48 - Table 3 - Plants encountered on range transects conducted on the Georgetown winter Bighorn Sbeep range, August, 1967. Trees Juniperus scopulorum Rocky Mountain juniper Shrubs Artemisia frigida Cercocarpus montanus Chrysothamnus sp. Rhus trilobata Ribes sp. Fringed sagebrush Mountain mahogany Rabbitbrush Skunkbush Symphoricarpos albus Snowberry Currant Forbs Cryptantha virgata Erigeron sp. Grindelia squarrosa Oenothera sp. Opuntia sp. Penstemon sp. Miners candle Daisy Curlycup gumweed Evening primrose Pricklypear Beardtongue Grasses Agropyron sp. Bouteloua gracilis Bromus carinatus B. tectorum Festuca arizonica Muhlenbergia montana Oryzopsis hymenoides Sitanion hystrix Sporobolus cryptandrus Stipa robusta Wbeatgrass Blue grama· Mountain brome Cheatgrass brome Arizona fescue Mountain muhly Indian ricegrass Bottlebrush squirreltail Sand dropseed Sleepy grass =========================================================================== �- 49 - Table 4 - Results of paced-Parker range transects on Georgetown bighorn ,,,...',.'sheepwlllter range for 1967. Location of ,,'traris'ec't . West of Highway 6 3 miles north of Georgetown Low High Average West of Highway 6 2 miles north of Georgetown Low High Average North of Highway 6-40 east of 6 and 40 intersection Low High Average North of Highway 6-40 near Downieville Low High Average 25 47 21 44 23: 45·5 510 920 715 680 500 590 56 37 46·5 18 57 480 12 52 210 15 54·5 345 29 24 53 54 53 ·5 480 480 480 26·5 lFDI -- Forage Density Index 2PDI -- Plant Density Index 3PG/A - Pellet Groups per Acre 4SDU -- Sheep Day's Use 39·2 70.8 55 �- 50 Taylor Reservoir Herd: The bighorn sheep winter range in this area is northwest of the Taylor River from Almont to approximately five miles upstream. This area consists of steep mountainsides next to the river and characterized by rock outc;roppings and loose shale slides. The overstory consists of a few scattered ponderosa pine (Pinus ponderosa). Many different shrubs were common, the most prevalent. being fringed sagebrush (Artemisia frigida), big sagebrush (Artemisia tridentata), and rabbitbrush (Chrysothamnus sp.). The most common grasses are Indian riceg;rass (Oryzopsis hymenoideS),mountain muhly (Muhlenbergia montana), and needle and thread grass (Stipa comata). The species of plants encountered on the range survey as regular transect hits or as composition hits are shown in Table 5. A total of nine 100-point paced-Parker transects were run in this area. The condition of the range consistently rated poor to poor +. This is due to the unusually large number of hits on bare so1.1and rocks and erosion pavement. The nine transects were run in groups of three, 2.5, 3.2, and 3.6 miles above the Almont Post Office. For the range 2.5 miles above the Almont Post Office the average forage density index was 24.3. The average plant density index was 51.3. The average number of bighorn sheep pellet groups per acre was 363.3 for a sheep day's use of 28. For the range 3.2 miles above the Almont Post Office the average forage density index was 21.3. The average plant density index was 48.3. The average number of pellet groups per acre was 320 for a sheep day's use of 24.6. For the range 3.6 miles above the Almont Post Offl.ce the average forage density index was 26.3. The average plant density index was 40.7. The average number of pellet groups per acre was 293.3 for a sheep day's use of 22.6. The results of the paced-Parker transects for the 'Iaylor Reservoir bighorn sheep winter range are presented in 'I~ble 6. There was some indication of a li.mi ted amount of competition in the area by deer and elk. The average number of d.eerpellet groups per acre was 58.9 for a deer day's use of 4.6. The average number of elk pellet groups per acre was 75.6 for an elk day's use of 5.8. �- 51 - Table 5 ,-Plants encountered on range transects conducted on the Taylor River winter Bighorn Sheep range, August, 1967. Trees .... Juniperus scopulorum Rocky Mountain juniper Shrubs Artemisia frigida Fringed sagebrush A. tridentata Big sagebrush Chrysothamnus sp. Rabbitbrush Holodiscus dumosa Purshia tridentata Rhus trilobata Ribes sp. Bush rockspirea Antelope bitterbrush Skunkbush Currant Symphoricarpos albus Snowberry Forbs Achillea lanulosa Western yarrow Actinea sp. P;Lnque Grasses Blepharoneuron tricholepis Bouteloua gracilis Pine dropseed Blue grama Muhlenbergia montana QEyzopsis hymenoides Mountain muhly Indian ricegrass Sitanion hystrix Bottlebrush squirreltail Stipa comata S. robusta Needle & thread grass Sleepy grass =========================================================================== �- 52 - Table 6 - Results of paced-Parker range transects on Taylor Reservoir bighorn sheep winter range for 1967. Location of tra:nsect FDIl PDI2 PG/A3 SDJ+ 2.5 miles above Almont Post Office Low Medium High Average 24 28 21 24.3 5$ 47 49 51.3 270 370 450 363·3 20.8 28·5 34.8 28 3.2 miles above Almont Post Office Low Medium High Average 24 19 21 21.3 50 45 50 48.3 160 230 570 320 12·3 17·8 43·8 24.6 3.6 miles above Almont Post Office Low Medium High Average 32 24 23 26.3 44 40 38 40.7 150 320 410 293·3 11.5 24.6 31.6 22.6 IFDI -- Forage Density Ind.ex 2PDI -- Plant Density Index 3PG/A - Pellet Groups per Acre 4SDU -- Sheep Day's Use �53 - McCurdy Mountain - Area 23: The bighorn sheep winter range for this area is quite extensive. However, the only range surveyed was that paralleling Colorado 77 below Tarryall Reservoir. This range consists of meadows along Tarryall Creek surrounded on both sides by mountains covered with an open stand of ponderosa pine. Th.epredominant shrubs are fringed sage and shrubby cinquefoil (Potentilla fruticosa). Forb species in the area are common and very diversified. Predomfnarrt grasses are blue grama (Bouteloua gracilis), mountain muhly (MUhlenbergia montana), and other ~hlys (MUhlenbergia sp.). The species of plants encountered on the range survey as regular transect hits or as composition hits are shown in Table 7. A total of four 100-point paced-Parker transects were run on the winter range in this area. Two were on the first ridge east of Sugarloaf Mountain. The average forage density index here was 27':5. The average plant density index was 72. The average number of bighorn sheep pellet groups per acre was 140 for a sheep day's use of 10.8. The other two transects were on winter range south of Tarryall Creek a few miles below Tarryall Reservoir. The average forage density index here was 54.5. The average plant density index was 74.5. The average number of pellet groups per acre was 515 for a sheep day's use of 39.6. The results of the four paced-Parker transects for the McCurdy Mountain bighorn sheep winter range are presented in Table 8. The competition by deer in the area appeared to be very limited. The average number of deer pellet groups per acre was 42.5 for a deer day's use of 3.3. Sheep Creek - Area 10: No 100-point paced-Parker transects were run on the bighorn sheep winter range in this area during this work period. However, six pellet group transects were run near Dabney Ranch on Saguache Creek. This area is characterized by small mesas transected by steep walled rocky canyons. Three transects were placed on top of the mesas 60 feet from the edge of the cliffs. The average number of pellet groups per acre was 1,126.7 for a sheep day's use of 86.7. Three transects were also placed 60 feet from the base of the cliffs. In this area the average number of pellet groups per acre was 483.3 for a sheep day's use of 37.2. �- 54 - Table 7 -. Plants encountered on range transects conducted on the Tarryall winter bighorn sheep range, June, 1967. Shrubs Artemisia frigida . , , . , Fringed sage , Potentilla fruticosa Shrubby cInquefoil Spanish bayonet Yucca glauca Forbs Arenaria fendleri Castilleja sp. Chrysopsis sp. Sandwort Paintbrush Goldaster Erigeron sp. Wild daisy Eriogonum sp. Geranium sp. Mertensia sp. Buckwheat Geranium Bluebell Potentilla sp. Cinquefoil Senecio sp. Groundsel Silene acaulis Moss campion Grasses Blepharoneuron tricholepis Pine dropseed Bouteloua gracilis Carex sp. Blue grama Sedge Festuca arizonica Arizona fescue Juncus sp. Rush Koleria cristata Muhlenbergia sp. Junegrass Muhly M. montana Mountain muhly Poa sp. Bluegrass Stipa comata Nleedle and thread =================~=~======================================================= �- 55 - Table 8 - Results of paced-Parker range transects on McCurdy Mountain bighorn sheep winter range for 1967. Location of ''transect FDII PDI2 PG/A3 SDu4 First ridge east of Sugarloaf Mountain Low High Average 22 33 27·5 67 77 72 70 210 140 5·4 16.2 10.8 Winter range south of Tarryall Creek Low High Average 55 54 54.5 74 75 74·5 320 710 515 24.6 54.6 39·6 IFDI -- Forage Density Index 2PDI -- Plant Density Index 3PG/A - Pellet Groups per Acre 4SDU -- Sheep Day's Use Approved by: William H. Rutherford Prepared by: Thomas N. Woodard Student Assistant ��January, 1969 - 57 - JOB PROGRESS REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO Project No. W-41-R-1S Work Plan No. 2 Title of Job: Period Covered: Personnel: Bighorn Sheep and Mountain Goat Investigations Job No. 4 Mountain Goat Distribution, Populations and Herd Composition June 1, 1967 to September 1, 1967 L. Dale Hibbs and Tom Woodard Abstract Mountain goat herd classification counts during the summer of 1967 were confined to the Collegiate Range. Nanny-kid ratios ranging from 100:95 to 100:112 were determined, indicating the healthy condition of the herds. �- 58 - Objectives: 1. Determine mountain goat distribution. 2. Determine populations or trends. 3· Determine herd sex and age composition. 4. Prepare detailed range or distribution maps for specific herds with written descriptions for census procedures, and develop standardized forms which can be used by management personnel during routin~ census and for recording long-term census information. Procedures: 1. Distribution of mountain goats in Colorado was determined by aerial and ground observations in areas of.known occupancy, unverified reports and possible new distribution resulting from, and close to, established herds. Aerial observations were made from fixed-wing aircraft and helicopter; and ground observations were made primarily by foot or horseback, although trail vehicles, four-wheel drive vehicles and conventional vehicles were used whenever conditions allowed. Observational data were recorded on field forms developed for this project. These forms also will serve for other portions of this job. Data re~orded included date; observer; game management unit number; herd or area designation; manner of making observations; time and number Qf,il;l,d.111trr1El,l,es~, and females, yearlings, young, unclassified, and totals; elevation; vegetative type; general activity; associated animal specie?; aerial photo number, if known or available; and comments. A distribution map will be prepared from these data to add to information already on Figure 1. Forest Service maps, scaled two inches per mile, will be used where available. In districts where these large-scale maps have not been prepared, the t-inch per mile maps will be used. 2. Attempts were made to obtain as complete a population census as possible in each area studied, or at least to establish a uniform coverage and counting procedure to provide reliable data from which to determine trends from year to year. These counts are made in conjunction with the distribution observations described under Procedure 1, and recorded on the prepared form, Counts are to be attempted under as nearly comparable situations as possible in succeeding years. Population data will be graphed for each herd or area. 3· In conjunction with the two preceding objectives and procedures, herds observed will be classified by billies, n~nnies, yearlings, kids and unclassified, and totals for sex and age structure data. These data will enable us to determine productivity, survival and general herd health, on which sound management plans may be based. �- 59 MOUNTAIN GOAT DISTRIBUTION, POPULATIONS AND HERD COMPOSITION Activity on the mountain goat project (W.P. 2, Job No.4) during the summer of 1967 was concerned primarily with attempting to locate mountain goat herds and determining sex and age ratios in the Collegiate Range. Aerial and ground observations, made throughout the Collegiate Range, with emphasis on Mount Shavano and Sheep Mountain, are summarized in Table 1. These two areas are considered keys to management of the mountain goat because they contain over 80% of the productive females. In the Mount Shavano area 32 nannys and 37 kids were observed fDr a nanny: kid ratios of 100:112. On Sheep Mounta~n 39 napnys and 38 kids were observed for a ratio of 100:95. These are very high reproductive rates and indicate the healthy condition of the herds. No counts were made in the San Juan or Mount Evans areas during this work period. Table 1 - Mountain goat observations during the summer of 1967. Area Adult M F Mount Shavano June 6, 1967 July 3, 1967 July 11, 1967 July 20, 1967 August 2, 1967 2 5 Sheep Mountain July 3, 1967 July 18, 1967 July 20, 1967 August 2, 1967 Princeton - Antero July 3, 1967 July 18, 1967 July 20, 1967 Approved by: Yearling Kid Unclassified Total 2 14 6 3 13 9 1 13 13 5 10 13 12 50 10 6 42 33 50 50 1 2 2 10 10 11 8 3 4 4 5 8 11 11 8 4 22 27 28 25 3 2 1 1 1 1 23 72 56 76 William H. Rutherford Prepared by: 3 5 1 65 292 Thomas N. Woodard Student Assistant ��January, 1969 - 61 - JOB PROGRESS REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO --------~-------------------- Project No. W-41-R-18 Work Plan No. 2 Title of Job: Period Covered: Personnel: Bighorn Sheep a~d Mountain Goat Investigations Job No. 5 Mountain Goat Habitat Studies June 1, 1967 to September 1, 1967 L. Dale Hibbs and Tom Woodard Abstract Intensive paced-Parker transect studies were conducted during the summer of 1967 on Sheep Mountain in the Collegiate Range. This is the primary winter range of the mountain goat herd which ranges generally between the Middle Fork and the South Fork of Cottonwood Creek. Plant species encoUntered on the transects are tabulated. Average forage density index was 49.3; average plant density index was 65.3; goat pellet group counts were calculated at an average of 43.8 goat days use per acre. Pellet group counts at two locations on Mount Shavano were calculated at averages of 32.3 and 8.5 goat days use per acre. �- 62 - Objectives: Determine the vegetative ty~es and vegetative composition on mountain goat ranges. Procedures: Modified paced-Parker transects of 100 pOlnts, 'using a 3/4 inch loop, were established on the Sheep Mountain winter goat range, following the procedure described in the inter-agency cooperative big game range analysis condition transects (Chapter 8, Range Analysis Handbook, U. S. F. S., Region II) for browse ranges. The alpine tundra types were sampled with a modification of the paced transect developed for use on mountain goat ranges. It, also, is a 100-point transect, but consists of a pair of them, not necessarily parallel but in a general area within 50 yards of each other, on which the actual hit is recorded; the nearest plant to a hit if on litter, moss, bare soil, erosion pavement, or rock; and the first, nearest utilized plant. This yields data for ground cover, composition, and utilization, respectively. In addition, ten one-hundredth acre pellet group plots per transect were counted for an index to total range use. �- 63 MOUNTAIN GOAT HABITAT STUDIES Intensive paced-Parker transects were conducted during the summer of 1967 on the Sheep Mountain winter range in the Collegiate Range. Sheep Mountain is situated at the north limits of the Rocky Mountain goat range in the Collegiates. It lies just north of Cottonwood Lake and the South Fork of Cottonwood Creek. The south slope is extremely rugged and steep, with many rock outcroppings and shale slides. This area is used extensively by the goats as escape cover. Sheep Mountain has an elevation of a little more than 11,000 feet and the top is characterized by open alpine meadows. The most prevalent grasses in these meadows are bluegrass (Poa sp.), Kobresia (Kobresia bellardi), and sedge (Carex sp.). The most abundant forb, by far, is alpine clover (Trifolium dasyphyllum). The species of plants encountered on the range survey as regular transect hits or as composition hits are listed in Table 1. Three paced-Parker transects were run on Sheep Mountain at an elevation of 11,000 feet. The condition of the winter range in this area ranged from high fair to high good. The average forage density index was 49.3 with a range of 47 to 57. The average plant density index was 65.3 with a range of 57 to 70. The number of Rocky Mountain goat pellet groups per acre ranged from 490 to 600 for an average of 43.8 goat day!s use per acre. There was no indication of competition from other animal species in this area. A total of four pellet group transects were run on the Mount Shavano Rocky .Mountain goat range. Two were run on the north side of Squaw Creek basin at an elevation of 13,000 feet. The average number of Rocky Mountain goat pellet groups per acre was 420 for a goat day!s use of 32.3. Also, two transects were run in Angel Gulch, 200-300 feet below the summit of Mount Shavano. The average number of Rocky Mountain goat pellet groups per acre here was just 110 for a goat day!s use of 8·5. Approved by: William H. Rutherford Project Leader Prepared by: Thomas N. Woodard Student Assistant �- 64 - Table 1 - Plants encountered on range transects conducted on the Sheep -" -,' Mountain Rocky Mountain Goat winter range, July, 1967. Sheep Mountain Rocky Mountain goat winter range 'Scientific Name Common Name Shrubs Happlopappus, macronema Vaccinium scoparium Goldenweed Dwarf Grouseberry Forbs Achillea lanulosa Western yarrow Antennaria sp. Pussy toes Arenaria fendleri Castilleja occidentalis Cirsium scopulorum Eriogonum umbellatum Fragaria ovalis Fendler sandwort Yellow paintbrush Thistle Umbrella plant Strawberry Mertensia alpina Sedum integrifolium Trifolium dasyphyllum Alpine bluebell Kings crown Alpine clover Grasses Agropyron scribneri Scribner's wheatgrass Carex ~r.. Sedge Festuca ovina Kobresia bellardi Alpine Sheep fescue Kobresia Koleria cristata Poa sp. Junegrass Bluegrass ================================~========================================== �- 65 W-105-R-B An Ecological Investigation of the Cache la Poudre Deer Herd, Colorado Allen E. Anderson Project Leader All field work was terminated during mid-1965 (Segment 6). This narrative report of Segment B activities summarizes progress and outlines future plans for analyses and interpretation of pertinent data and for preparation of manuscripts. Publication plans are to submit about 20 papers within the following broad categories: Blood chemistry and blood plasma values, climatic relationships, food preference, harvest relationships, male and female reproductive cycle and performance, morphology, plant phenology, population density, population structure and seasonal behavior. Former project leader, Dean E. Medin, resigned November 11, 1966 and jobs for which he was responsible (Work Plan 3, Job 1, Climatic Environmentj Work Plan 3, Job 3, Vegetative Analysesj and Work Plan 3, Job 5, Food Preference) were inactive during Segment B except for a few weeks when Mr. Medin completed the laboratory portion of Work Plan 3, Job 5 under a Service Agreement between the Intermountain Forest and Range Experiment Station and the Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department (now Division). ��- 67 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT state of COLORADO --------~~~~~-------------An Ecological Investigation of the Project No. W-I05-R-S Work Plan No. 3 Title of Job: Period Covered: Personnel: Cache la Poudre Deer Herd, Colorado Job No. 1 Climatic Environment January, 1967 to February 29, 1965. Allen E. Anderson Objective: Measure the local climate on each of five, selected study locations believed to be representative of the lower-winter, middle-winger, upperwinter, transitional, and summer ranges of the herd so that data relevant to the biota under study can be adequately interpretated, particularly from the standpoint of elevational relationships. Progress: Field work was completed May 31, 1965 (Segment 6). No progress was made in analyses of summarized data or in relating selected climatic variables to forage yields, deer use, plant phenology, or deer physiology during this segment. Future Plans: The monthly and annual summaries now on hand will suffice for general interpretation of data gathered under Work Plan 4, Job 1 (Population Density and Structure), Work Plan 5, Job 2 (Reproductive Studies), and Work Plan 5, Job 3 (Harvest Analysis) . Active work will commence on this job once all manuscripts resulting from data gathered under Work Plans 4 and 5 have been completed. Publications: None. Prepared by: Allen E. Anderson Wildlife Researcher ��- 69 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO Project No. W-105-R-8 Work Plan No. 3 Title of Job: Period Covered: Personnel: An Ecological Investigation of the Cache la Poudre Deer Herd, Colorado Job No. 3 Vegetative Analysis January, 1967 to February 29, 1968. Allen E. Anderson Objectives: (1) Record the phenological development of selected range plants on five study locations believed to be representative of the lowerwinter, middle-winter, upper-winter, transitional, and summer ranges of the herd. (2) Quantitatively describe the vegetation (by vegetative type) of each of the above study areas to: (a) provide basic on vegetative cover and composition and to (b) aid in interpretation of deer distribution, food preference, and activity as related to food and cover. (3) Estimate the mean yield and use of important browse species on the winter range study areas, to provide data relative to the effects of various population levels (Work Plan 4, Job 1) on important seasonal food items. Progress: Field work was completed and a large amount of data tabulated and analyzed in 1965 (Segment 6). No progress was made in investigation of phenology - site, phenology-climatic, or in vegetative composition and cover-deer distribution and density relationships during 1967 (Segment 8). Future Plans: Aetive work will commence on this job once all manuscripts resulting from data gathered under Work Plans 4 and 5 have been completed. Publications: None Prepared by: ~~--~--~~---------Allen E. Anderson Wildlife Researcher ��- 71 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT state of COLORADO ------------------------------- Project No. W-105-R-8 Work Plan No. 3 Title of Job: An Ecological Investigation of the Cache la Poudre Deer Herd, Colorado Job No. 4 Food Cover Relationships Influenced by Environmental Factors Period Covered: January, 1967 to February 29, 1968 Personnel: Charles M. Loveless Objectives: (1) Measure or otherwise appraise selected characteristics of the physical, climatological, and biological factors of a winter-range environment on a representative study area, and evaluate the influence of these factors on deer use of food-cover types. (2) Assess, refine, and develop methods attendant to the research problem. Progress: Mr. Loveless completed the Ph.D. degree at Colorado State University in 1963. During 1966 and 1967, his dissertation fulfilling the above objectives was adapted to the format of a Technical Publication of the Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department. This completes activity on this job. Publications: Loveless, Charles, M. 1967. The Ecological Characteristics of a Mule Deer Winter Range. Tech. Publ. 20, Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department, Denver. 124 p. Prepared by:~~ __~ __~ Allen E. Anderson Wildlife Researcher _ ��- 73 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO --------~~~~------------An Ecological Investigation of the Project No. W-105-R-8 Work Plan No. 3 Title of Job: Period Covered: Personnel: Cache la Poudre Deer Herd, Colorado Job No. 5 Food Preference January, 1967 to February 20, 1968 Dean E. Medin, Allen E. Anderson Objectives: Estimate food preference by season for different elevational ranges and vegetative types so that seasonal forage use by deer can be related to the vegatation at each elevational level under study. Progress: Stomach content samples from 232 mule deer were collected from April 13, 1961 to April 27, 1965.: Botanical identification and quantification of their component parts were completed for samples during 1967 (Segment 8). Data programming was discussed briefly with David C. Bowden of the Colorado State University Statistical Laboratory. Coding of data was initiated. Future Plans: It is anticipated that these comparisons will be made using punch card-computer techniques. Mr. Medin stated on 12 December 1967 that his current duties will not permit any additional Service Agreements but that he hopes to complete the coding and eventually a manuscript. Publications: None Prepared by: "" ~~--~~~-------------- Allen E. Anderson Wildlife Researcher ��- 75 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO ------------------------------ Project No. W-105-R-8 Work Plan No. 3 An Ecological Investigation of the Cache la Poudre Deer Herd, Colorado Job No. , Title of Job: Ecological History of Key Browse Species Period Covered: January, 1967 to February 29, 1968 Personnel: ~6~ Robert D. Roughton Objectives: Determine age structures of selected browse stands and relate to ecology and management of big sagebrush Artemisia tridentata, true mountain mahogany Cercocarpus montanus, wax current Ribes cereum, and skunkbush Rhus trilobata. Progress: Mr. Roughton completed his thesis and received the M. S. degree from Colorado State University (Colorado Oooperative Wildlife Research Unit) ~~ng 1966 (Segment 7). The task of thesis revision for publication was initiated during Segment 8 and carried through to second draft stage. Future Plans: Hopefully, a manuscript will be submitted to ecology for publication during 1968 (Segment 9). Publications: None Prepared by:~~--~~~------------Allen E. Anderson Wildlife Researcher _ ��- 77 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO --------~~~~-------------An Ecological Lnvestigation of the . Project No. W-105-R-8 Work Plan No. 4 Cache la Poudre Deer Herd, Colorado Job No. Title of Job: Population Density and Structure Period Covered: January, 1967 to February 29, 1968 Personnel: 1 Allen E. Anderson Objectives: (1) Estimate population density on each of five study locations believed to be representative of the lower winter, upper winter, transitional, and summer ranges of the herd to: (a) relate density to changing environmental conditions (Work Plan 3), and (b) elucidate density-elevational relationships, particularly between years. (2) Estimate sex and age structure (composition) of the population to provide basic information on herd dynamics. Progress: The status of this job includes the completion of all field work during 1965 and a continuing compilation, summarization, and preliminary analyses during 1967 (Segment 8). These activities emphasized the need to employ a statistician on the problem of developing a more satisfactory analytical and interpretative approach to both pellet group and herd structure data. David C. Bowden of the Colorado State University completed a study of frequency distributions derived from pellet group counts. Future Plans: During Segment 9, emphasis will be placed on: (1) development of improved analytical procedures, (2) deer density-climatic-vegetative and topographic relationships, and (3) herd structure samples as a function of time of day. Preparation of final manuscripts will"begin during 1968 (Segment 9). Publications: None. However, a manuscript tentatively entitled: IIFitting 'models to frequency distributions of fecal group counts of mule deer and cattle in diverse habitats. IIby D. C. Bowden, A. E. Anderson and D. E. Medin was ~ompleted and submitted to colleogues for review as the segment ended. It is planned to submit this manuscript to the J. Wildl. Mgmt. in mid-1968 (Segment 9). Prepared by:~~ ~ Allen E. Anderson Wildlife Researcher _ ��- 79 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO ----------------------------- Project No. W-105-R-8 Work Plan No. 5 Title of Job: Period Covered: Personnel: An Ecological Investigation of th,e, , Cache la Poudre Deer Herd, Colorado Job No. 1 Physical Characteristics January, 1967 to February 29, 1968 Allen E. Anderson Objectives: Measure relevant physiological and morphological characteristics of deer collected seasonally so that: (a) the response of the herd to its erivironment can be more adequately interpreted, (b) establish "physiological norms," and (c) provide basic morphological data as related to sex and age class ', Progress: From April 1, 1961 to April 27, 1965, 192 mule deer were collected at approximate weekly intervals. 'An additional 33 were obtained from other sources, mainly highway mortality. Tabulation of over 40,000 measurements of selected physiological, morphological, and hematological characteristics and some preliminary analyses have been completed. During 1967 (Segment 7) primary emphasis was placed on a continuing review of literature. In addition, endocrine glands donated to the Department of Anatomy, College of Veterinary Medicine, Colorado State University, were the subject of detailed morphologic study by the staff and graduate students. According to Robert W. Davis, Professor and Chairman of the Department of Anatomy: "current studies are at the gross, subgross, and light microscopic level." A summary of current research by the Department of Anatomy on project-donated materials is tabulated below. Gland Pituitary Parathyroid Testes Thyroid Thyroid Investigator. Ken ~. Nicolls F~oyd M. Urschel Jr. Roger R. Markwald Robert W. Davis Robert A. Kainer Degree Pursued Ph.D. . M. S. M. S. Expected Completion (Year) 1969 1967 1968 Indefinite Indefinite =========================================================================== �- 80 - Future Plans: Dur-Ing 1968 (Segment 9), major emphasis will be placed on completion of the final review of literature, statistical consultation, and selection of proper statistical applications. Card-punching and programming will begin during 1968 (Segment 9). Pu~lications - Theses: (By recipients of project materials, funds, or data). Erickson, J. A. 1967. Estimating ages of mule deer. M. S. Thesis Colorado State University, Fort Collins. 93 p. (Two manuscripts based on this thesis were being prepared for submission to the J. Wildl. Mgmt. as the segment ended.) Farris, G. C. 1967. Factors influencing the accumulation of strontium 90, stable strontium a.nd calcium in deer. Ph. D. Dissertation. Colo. State Univ., Fort Collins. 189 p. F. W. Whicker, and A. H. Dahl. 1967. Effect of age on radioactive and stable strontium accumulation in deer bones. pp. 93-102. In. A. Lenihan, J. F. Loutit, and J. H. Martin (Editors) strontium metabolism. Academic Press, Lnc. (London) Ltd. Urschel, F. M. Jr. 1967. A seasonal light microscopic study of the parathy-.coidglands of the mule deer (Odocoileus hemiomus hemionus). M. S. Thesis. Colorado State Univ., Fort Collins, 83 p. Whicker, F. W., R. A. Walters, and A.' H. Dahl. 1967. Fall-out radio nuclides in Colorado d.eer liver. Nature 214:511-513· Prepared by:,, Allen E. Anderson Wildlife Researcher _ �- 81 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO Project No. W-105-R-8 Work Plan No. 5 Title of Job: Period Covered: Personnel: An Ecological Investigation of the Cache la Poudre Deer Herd, Colorado Job No. 2 Reproductive Studies January, 1967 to February 20, 1968 Allen E. Anderson Objectives: Determine the reproductive pattern of the deer herd to provide data on: (a) morphology of the reproductive organs as related to age and season (b) tentatively, the relationship of productivity to the measured factors of the environment. Progress: The reproductive organs of 85 males and 112 females collected at approximate weekly intervals from April 31, 1961 to April 27, 1965 are in various stages of study. No progress was made by project personnel on remaining laboratory work or on summarization and analyses of existing data. Mr. Ture Schultz, University Colorado, Boulder completed histological studies on mule deer ovaries for the M. S. degree but the thesis was not completed. Future Plans: The descriptive histology of the seminiferous tubules from the 1964 and 1965 materials will be further investigated during 1968 (Segment 9). Frequency distributions over time of ovarian and testicular weights and volumes, seasonal flucuations in reproductive tract morphology by age class, and summarization of the reproductive performance of all females and some of the aspects to be examined during Segment 9. Hopefully, Mr. Schultz will submit a manuscript on ovarian histology in late 1968 or early 1969. Publications: Short, Catherine. 1968. Morphological development of the deer fetus (Genus Odocoileus) M. S. Thesis. Stephan F. Austin State College, Nacogdoches, Texas. Prepared by: ~~--~~~~----------Allen E. Anderson Wildlife Researcher ��- 83 - JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO --------~--~--------------- Project No. W-105-R-8 Work Plan No. 5 ------~----------------- Title of Job: Period Covered: Personnel: An Ecological Investigation of the Cache la Poudre Deer Herd, Colorado Job No. 3 Harvest Analysis January, 1967 to February 29, 1968 Allen E. Anderson Objectives: (1) Determine the age and sex structure of deer herd to provide estimates of: (a) net productivity (percent of female yearlings in the kill) and (b) the effects of hunting regulations. (2) Locate the distribution of the kill by subunit to relate the age and sex structure of the kill to elevational levels and harvest intensity. (3) Measure relevant physical characteristics of the deer killed to provide an index of herd response to food quality. Progress: Final analyses of all pertinent data were completed during Segment 8 using the services and facilities of the Colorado State University Statistical Laboratory and Computer Center. Transfer of data from the computer printout sheets to suitable manuscript format was completed during Segment 8. Future Plans: Manuscript preparation will be completed during Segment 9, (1968). Publications: Anderson, A. E. 1967. Hunting and the Cache la Pouare deer herd. Colorado Outdoors 16 (5):13-15· Prepared by: ~~~~~~---------Allen E. Anderson Wildlife Researcher ��- 85 JOB COMPLETION REPORT RESEARCH PROJECT SEGMENT State of COLORADO --------~~~~------------An Ecological Investigation of the. Project No. W-105-R-8 Work Plan No. 5 Title of Job: Period Covered: Personnel: Cache la Poudre Deer Herd, Colorado Job No. 4 Sagebrush Nutrition January, 1967 to February 29, 1968 Julius G. Nagy Objectives: To investigate the status of sagebrus~ (Artemisia spp.) in deer nutrition; i.e.: (1) determine deer feeding habits, particularly in respect to sagebrush, using rumen fistulated deer, (2) determine the effects of feeding different concentrations of the essential oils of sagebrush on rate of digestion using rumen fistulated deer, (3) examine the rumen bacterial species of domesticated and wild deer. Progress: Completed and reported in January, 1966 Game Research Report, pp. 317 -371. Future Plans: Indefinite Publications: Nagy, J. G.~ G. Vidacs, and G. M. Ward. 1967. Previous diet of deer, cattle and their ability to digest alfalfa hay. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 31:443-447. Nagy, J. G. and R. P. Tengerdy. 1967. Antibacterial action of essential oils of Artemisia as an ecological factor. I. Antibacterial action of the volatile oils of Artemisia tridentata and Artemisia rona on aerobic bacteria. Applied Microbiology 15:819-821. Prepared by: ~~--=-~~--------- Allen E. Anderson Wildlife Researcher � https://cpw.cvlcollections.org/files/original/0cf282b1662b4d88d2cc78248d401690.pdf ea51a8f2e782d9f7f68f8b6d97dd704a PDF Text Text April 1969 . - 1 - JOB PROGRESS REPORT State of COLORADO -------~~~~~---------- Pro ject No o__ W_-_3_7___ R_-_2_2 _ Work Plan No. 1 _ Game Bird Survey Job NOo, ~1~2 Job Title: Summarization and Pub lication of Pheasant Research Findings Period Covered: Personnel: April 1, 1968 through March 31, 1969 Howard Funk ABSTRACT Due to changes of duty assignments of personnel formerly connected with this .job, no work was accomplished during the segment. Work will be completed during Segment 23. _ �- 2 - SUMMARIZATION AND PUBLICATION OF PHEASANT RESEARCH FINDINGS Howard D. Funk SEGMENT OBJECTIVES 1. 2. 3. 4. To assemble and compile all pheasant data pertinent to the manuscript. To make a list of all photographs that will appear in the manuscript. To extract and compute all necessary file data for completing tables and figures. To secure photographs for the manuscript (not currently available). METHODS AND MATERIALS Methods and materials were described in previous segment reports. RESULTS AND DISCUSSION Wayne W. Sandfort and Harold M. Swope, formerly connected with the job, were assigned to new duties during the segment. Therefore, no work was accomplished on the job. Other W-37-R personnel will be assigned to complete the work in Segment 23. /:~( Prepared by r: (; :! 1 .:/<..(Q{.(((}0~Jd /eu . l:---- Howard D. Funk Section Chief, Small Game Research �April) 1969 - 3 - JOB PROGRESS REPORT State of COLORADO ~----~~~~-----------Game Bird Survey Project Noo W-37-R-22 ------------------------I Work Plan No. --------------------Job Title: 14 _ Pheasant Hen Harvest Investigation Period Covered: Personnel: Job No~, April 1, 1968 - March 3l~ 1969 Harold Swope, Mark Elkins, ~7ayne Finch, Edward Kochman, Russell Mason, Donald Hoffman, Robert Schmidt, George Bear, Wayne Russell, Dale Reed, John Goettl, Mike Szymczak and Warren Snyder. ABSTRACT Pheasant populations, harvest and environment were measured in the sixth pre-treatment year of this hen harvest study in Northeast Colorado. Rainfall was below average for the study region except during August of 1968. A mid-June hail storm and late December blizzard caused Some pheasant mortality. Dry weather in spring and early summer resulted in short wheat stubble and little or no weed overstory. Spring plowing of stubble lagged until late April. Record high spring sex-ratios were observed and recorded into mid-May. Spring birds-per-mile figures also were high, however, crowing indices dropped from the previous year. The peak of hatch occurred in early July. ·Young-per-hen indices were high, but birdsper-mile counts dropped by a third from levels of the previous two years. The fall population index declined sharply on the experimental area and made a slight increase on the control. Hunting pressure surveys indicated hunting dropped off markedly following the opening weekend of the season. As in previous years, only a small percent of the land was closed to hunting. Most hunters averaged one rooster for about eight hours effort during the opening weekend. Hunting success appeared to drop slightly on the second weekend. ��- 5 - PHEASANT HEN HARVEST Warren INVESTIGATION D. Snyder P. S. OBJECTIVE To determine how the inclusion of one hen in the bag limit in a dryland pheasant population will affect harvest and hunter recreation time. SEGMENT OBJECTIVES 1. 2. 3. To measure pheasant harvest and associated recreation time in the experimental and control areas. To measure pheasant population levels within the two study areas. To measure climatic conditions within the two study areas. METHODS AND MATERIALS The following reference provides information on methods and materials used in this study: Swope, H. M. 1964. Effects of hen pheasant harvest. p. 76, 80, 88, 96. Colo. Div. of Game, Fish and Parks. Game Research Report. April, 1964. Modification of methods used in this study include the following. Three automatic recording rain gauges were installed to supplement records kept by cooperating farmers. Weekly recorders were placed at the John Kafka farm, near the southeast corner of the experimental central township, and at the Soil Conservation District Office in Haxtun. A third recorder, modified to require monthly service, was installed at the Doyle Neiman farm near the southeast corner of the control central township. Transects, measuring vegetative vigor, were completed spring of 1968 instead of at ten day intervals. only twice during the A pre-season flight of the hunting pressure transects was completed on a weekday prior to the opening of pheasant season to record the number of resident vehicles. Field contacts were used to measure hunting success on the two study areas through several weekends of the season. Check stations were set up during evening hours at approaches to the highway between the two study areas on the first and second weekends of season. Hours hunted and birds per hunter information was obtained. DESCRIPTION The reader is referred for this information. OF AREA to the reference listed under Methods And Materials �- 6 RESULTS AND DISCUSSION Measurement Climatic of Environmental Factors Data The automatic recorders provided excellent rainfall information but could not accurately record snowfall precipitation. Table 1 compares information obtained at all stations with normal monthly and annual precipitation. August was the only month in which above average rainfall was received. Heavy rains with accompanying wind and local hail hit portions of the experimental area on June 15 and 16 (Fig. 1). This storm possibly decimated pheasant populations in portions of southern Sedgwick County. However, it was the only significant moisture received from mid-May through early July throughout the region. Fog and light snows were frequent during January and February, 1969, but brought only small moisture accumulations. Approximately four inches of snow was received during a blizzard on December 20, 1968. Some pheasant mortality along roadsides was observed following the storm but mortality in better cover locations did not appear to have been significant. Some pheasant mortality was possibly due to hunter disturbance of pheasants during the storm. Vegetative Growth Measurement Review of five years' wheat growth data indicated little importance as an influence on pheasant production. Therefore, only two measurements of wheat growth were obtained during the spring of 1968 (Table 2). Growth patterns and heights were similar on the two study areas. Because of dry spring weather, post-harvest wheat stubble in most fields was short (Table 2) with little or no significant overstory of weeds. Stubble Tillage Most farme~within the two study regions delayed initial spring ploWing or mulching of wheat stubble because of dry soil conditions (Table 3). Rapid progress was made from late April through the early part of May. Many farmers reported destruction of pheasant nests during this period. Spring tillage progressed at about the same rate on both areas. Computations shown in Table 3 were obtained by sampling field borders adjacent to county roads. Only one side of any field was included in the sample. Linear miles of field edge were accumulated and used to represent sample quantities. Population Studies Sex Ratios Pheasant sex ratios during the spring of 1968 were the highest recorded during the six years of study (Snyder, 1968). They averaged 3.1 hens per cock on the experimental area and 3.3 hens per cock on the control (Table 4). �- 7 Table 1. Precipitation recorded on the experimental and control study areas 1968-69. Month Southeast Southwest Northwest Northeast Haxtun Experimental Area April May June July August September October November December January February March .70 2.51 2.11 1.65 3.74 .10 .27 .19 Recorded Total 1.24 2.42 3.01 1.73 3.87 .88 2.34 2.00 2.57 3.70 --]:./ .30 T .40 .44 .50 .44 T .45 .10 .20 T 11.27 13.91 12.68 NO Record 2.72 1.32 1.55 3.51 .08 .10 .10 9.38 Control Area April May June July August September October November December January February March Recorded Total 1.48 2.18 1.68 2.52 .32 .30 .23 8.71 1/ No record of precipitation. No Record .20 3.44 1.34 1.87 3.55 1.00 2.45 1.41 2.17 3.42 .14 .57 T .44 .27 .33 .17 Norma12/ Rainfall1.91 3.19 3.37 2.46 2.00 1.48 .92 .44 .39 .31 .35 .99 10.40 12.37 17.81 Automatic recorders did not record snowfall precipitation accurately. '2:./ Based on 68 years of U. S. Weather Bureau records. �- 8 - .\ ~ ~. \' Fig. 1. Distribution •• l;;;;l::' '\ ""'\k-"'-' I- 1\· ;"-' ":\ ."- ~ AJ ':' 5: -: Va of hail during the summer of 1968 in the two study region. ..I �- 9 Table 2. Wheat growth, stubble height and weed overs tory measurements collected on the experimental and control area transects in 1968. Transect Green Wheat Measurement Date 5-3-68 5-29-68 Stubble Heisht Weed Overstor;y: September 1968 EXEerimental Area Transects 1 10.43 23.18 8.80 None 2 12.21 22.46 6.64 10.42 3 11.38 22.89 8.66 15.53 4 11.49 21.72 10.20 13 .68 5 9.82 20.33 Hailed 24.12 6 10.79 20.72 Hailed 23.24 7 11.01 21.79 11.14 None 8 11.31 21.66 12.44 None Average 11.05 21.84 9.65 14.92 Control Area Transects 1 9.23 18.42 9.86 None 2 11.13 22.36 11.82 None 3 13.59 24.72 12.62 15.55 4 12.06 20.27 9.28 16.68 5 14.29 28.20 13.76 None 6 13.45 26.06 10.64 None 7 13.64 25.21 12.64 None 8 12.83 23.02 14.14 None Average 12.53 23.53 11.85 13.13 �- 10 - Table 3. of 1968. Progress Status of spring tillage of wheat stubble during the spring April 23 Linear Miles Percent Experimental May 10 Linear Miles Percent Area Plowed 18.30 42.3 45.55 79.7 In progress 1.95 4.6 1.25 2.3 Unplowed 21.90 50.6 4.95 8.7 Mulched 1.10 2.5 5.35 9.3 Control Area Plowed 11. 70 29.4 42.95 67.5 In Progress 3.65 9.4 4.00 6.3 Unplowed 21.95 55.1 7.00 11.0 Mulched 2.45 6.1 9.65 15.2 These ratios continued through mid-May indicating efforts were either delayed or disrupted. that initial nesting Both areas possessed a birds-per-mile index of 3.2 (Table 4). The sample indicates that spring breeding- populations were similar on the two study areas. Crowing Indices Table 5 compares the crowing indices per station and route on the two study areas. These indicate, as the sex ratio did, that pheasant breeding populations were nearly equal on the two study areas. One point of discord is revealed in comparing crowing rates and birds-permile figures with those of previous years (Snyder, 1968). The average crowing rate dropped considerably from averages of the two previous years. In direct contrast, birds-per-mile figures showed an increase. This difference is possibly due to increased sex ratios in 1968. Swope (1964) showed evidence that crowing rates were inversely proportional to harem size. In other words, a rooster with a large harem crowed less frequently than a rooster with a small harem. Additional observations are needed before the relationship of crowing rate to harem size can be accurately plotted. �- 11 Table 4. Pheasant sex ratios obtained on the experimental and control study areas during the spring, 1968. Experimental Area Control Area Cocks 177 181 Hens 548 597 Total 790 814 Hens/cock 3.10 Miles 3.30 245 Birds/mile 254 3.22 3.20 Table 5. Pheasant crowing indices obtained in 1968 on the hen pheasant harvest study routes. Crowing Route EXEerimental Area Central West East East Control Area Central West 1/ 41.6- 37.6 24.6 24.6 26.1 24.0 33.2 35.1 26.4 37.6 28.3 22.6 40.2 40.5 42.5 40.5 41.cJ-/ 40.3 Area High Count Average 1/ I/ 30.4 37.2 Route not completed due to weather. The average number of calls using the highest count per station. 25.8 36.3 �- 12 Production Counts Dry, hot June weather seemed to limit successful pheasant production in the study region. Projected estimates of brood ages indicated hatching peaked in early July (Fig. 2). The pattern and distribution was similar to that of the two previous years (Snyder, 1968). Figure 2 combines the information of both study areas since little discernible difference in period or peak of hatch could be detected. Young-per-hen indices for 1968 are listed in Table 6. Comparison with previous years of study shows they were the highest op record at between 5 and 6 young per heno In direct contrast, during production counts, birdsper-mile figures, averaging about 2.4, were below indices of approximately 3.6 obtained in 1966 and 1967. The reason for these contrasting indices remains uncertain. Possibly it resulted from sampling error. It is also possible that a higher percentage of hens were unable to successfully nest. From past experience, broodless hens seem to be much more difficlt to observe than hens with broods. Fall Population Index As in previous years the fall population index again combines data from the spring sex-ratios, crowing counts, and young-per-hen figures for 1968 (Fig. 3). On the experimental area the index dropped from a peak of 1,094.6 in 1967 to 767.0 in 1968. On the control it increased from a 1967 index of 842.6 to a new high of 866.5. The fall population index and the birds-permile index (Table 6) represent late summer pheasant densities. For the study region as a whole, both indices showed population declines from the previous year. Formulation of Hunting Regulations and Harvest Survey I I Pheasant season opened on November 16 in 1968. In Small Game Management Unit Number 1, which includes both study areas, the season continued through December 1. It reopened on December 14 and was terminated at the end of the year. Hunting Pressure Surveys A pre-season count along the established aerial census routes was completed on Tuesday, November 12, 1968 (Table 7). This count was to serve as a base for obtaining more accurate opening day hunting pressure trends. Subtraction of resident vehicles from the total number counted on the opening day of season should provide an estimate of hunters coming into the region to hunt. Regrettably, weather conditions prevented the regularly scheduled flight on opening day of the 1968 season. The count was rescheduled for Sunday, the second day of the season. Strong, cold winds buffeted the region curtailing hunting effort of most hunters. Many started home early in the day. The much higher pressure evident on the control (Table 7) may be due to this cross-country movement toward the Denver-Boulder area. Because of differences in weather and census dates, hunting pressure comparisons with previous years were not made. However, this 2nd-day flight may be useful in future comparisons. �- 13 - 60 50 40 30 20 10 5 12 19 June 26 3 10 17 24 31 7 July Fig. 2. The 1968 Summer pheasant production estimated obtained in both study areas. 14 August period based on brood age �- 14 Table 6. Pheasant production survey data collected on the experimental and control study areas -- Summe r , 1968. Route Miles Minutes Hens Total Birds Young Young per Hen Birds per Mile Birds per Minute Experimental Area N. Brd. Rte. 27.6 80 4 22 36 5.5 1.3 0.45 E. Crow Rte. 51.4 200 19 74 108 3.9 2.1 0.54 E. Brd. Rte. 52.1 195 25 179 234 7.2 4.5 1.20 C. Brd. Rte. 48.4 160 7 34 43 L~. 9 0.9 - 0.27 C. Crow Rte. 47.0 140 l3 50 99 3.8 2.1 0.71 w. Brd. Rte. 56.8 170 8 52 76 6.5 1.3 0.45 W. Crow Rte. 65.2 230 28 143 196 5.1 3.0 0.85 348.5 1175 104 554 792 5.33 2.27 0.64 Control Area E. Brd. Rte. 53.3 180 l3 69 123 5.3 2.3 0.68 E. Crow Rte. 71.0 235 22 117 193 5.3 2.7 0.82 N. Brd. Rte. 56.1 175 15 73 123 4.9 2.2 0.70 C. Brd. Rte. 51.4 175 11 72 106 6.5 2.1 0.61 C. C'rowRte. 44.7 145 11 62 113 5.6 2.5 0.78 W. Brd. Rte. 47.9 145 8 40 88 5.0 1.8 0.61 W. Crow Rte. 48.2 165 18 148 238 8.2 5.0 1.44 372 .6 1220 98 581 984 5.93 2.64 0.81 -. �- 15 - 1200 1100 1000 900 /' 800 ....- ....- ....- /' -- ....- /' 700 / / / 600 / 500 ...400 300 -"""' , " ,, ,, , '" 200 / / / / / / / / 100 0 1963 1964 1965 1966 1967 1968 Fig. 3. Fall population indices on the experimental and control study areas from 1963 through 1968. �- 16 - Table 7. Numbers of vehicles observed along aerial census routes in the two study areas before and during opening weekend of the 1968 pheasant season. Parked at Farmyards Area Number of Vehicles Vehicles Parked Moving Elsewhere Total Vehicles Prior to Hunting Season Experimental 101 12 8 121 Control 90 11 5 106 Opening Weekend - 2nd Day Experimental 53 57 55 165 Control 96 70 81 247 An approximate density of hunting vehicles per square mile can be obtained for the opening weekend. Approximately 17 percent of the total hunting vehicles in southern Sedgwick Countr were local (Phillips and Sedgwick County) vehicles in 1967 and 1968. Seventeen percent of the 412 vehicles counted (Table 7) would yield 70 vehicles operated by local residents. Subtracting 70 from the pre-season count of 227 would mean 157 of the opening weekend total were non-hunting vehicles. The remaining 255 were hunting vehicles. Biases and errors exist in using this figure but it does provide a general index. .Assuming the errors are within reason, we could estimate there were 255 hunting parties within the 348 square miles sampled. Or there were 1.36 square miles per hunting party. Additional information on hunting pressure was obtained during successive week-days and weekends of the season (Table 8). The miles per hunting party could be restated as approximate square miles per hunting party. Comparison with the opening weekend hunter density can then be made. 1/ Based weekends southern ment and on samples of 60 and 135 vehicles observed during opening season of 1967 and 1968 respectively, at proposed lease plot sites in Sedgwick County. See: Snyder, W. D. 1969. Leased plot developresulting harvest W. P. 1, Job 19 in this Game Research Report text. �- 17 Table 8. A measure of hunting pressure areas during the 1968 pheasant season. on the experimental Date Period Location Mileage Hours 11-18 1st Monday Control 92 3:45 5 18.4 11-19 1st Tuesday Exper. 87 3:00 i 87.0 11-2l Ls t Thursday Both Areas 90 3: 15 4 22.5 11-23 & 24 2nd Weekend Exper. 568 26:30 86 6.6 11-30 & 12-1 3rd Weekend Both Areas 282 12 :00 33 8.6 12-14 & 15 2nd Opening Both Areas 209 7:45 18 11.6 12-21 5th Weekend Both Areas lO9 4:30 4 27.2 and control study Miles per Parties Hunting Party Land Posting Surveys Approximately 85 to 90 percent of the land in both study areas remained unposted during the 1968 season (Table 9). Seven to eight percent of the land was closed to hunting. "Hunting by permission" was allowed on the remainder. Land posting survey routes, primarily following crowing routes, have been established for sampling (Fig. 4). Approximately 200 linear miles of roadside was sampled in each area. Table 9. A comparison of land closure to hunting on the experimental control study areas during the 1968 hunting season. Unposted Land Status "Hunting by Permission" Experimental "No Hunting" and Total Area Miles 180.00 10.00 14.00 204.00 Percent 88.2 4.9 6.9 100.0 Control Area Miles 167.75 12.25 17.00 197.00 Percent 85.2 6.2 8.6 100.0 �- 18 - ·K ' . ' i- 1. ~-l'" I "~ '~ ~ I a-. Fig. 4. Land posting control study areas e- I' T T' ~~',J I survey routes established I .~ I t in the experimental and . �...•... - 19 Hunter Success Field contacts during the day followed by check stations in the evening were employed during the first weekend of the season. Due to manpower limitations, sampling was not uniform throughout the study areas. Check stations we re set up at approaches to the highway between the two study areas. Therefore, most samples came from localities proximal to these stations. Hunter success was not adequately srunpled in the northern part of the experimental area, where pheasant densities 'were Low , nor in the southern part of the control area, where good populations existed. As a result, biases existed that prevented direct reliable comparison of indices on the tHO study areas. The opening and second weekend samples (Table 10) both indicated better hunter success on the experimental area than on the control. This was in direct contrast to pheasant density information presented in Table 6 and Figure 3. There, birds per mile and fall population indices were both higher on the control. According to the data presented in Table 10, hunting success dropped slightly on the second we ekend . Confidence cannot be placed in data for the remainder of the season due to inadequate samples. Table 10. Hunter success 1968 pheasant season. on the experimental and control study areas during Total Birds per Hunter Hours per Bird Period Location Hunters Hours Hunted First Weekend Exper. Control 416 433 2,050 2,020 39 26 140 104 90 ll7 269 247 .65 .57 7.6 8.2 First Weekdays Both Areas 12 23 3 5 0 8 .67 2.9 2nd Weekend Exper. Control 104 90 410 489 8 6 32 20 13 15 53 41 .51 .46 7.7 11.9 3rd Weekend Both Areas 43 120 1 8 3 12 .28 10.0 2nd Opening Dec. 14 & 15 Pheasants Adults Young Harvested Unclass. the .. Both Areas 27 153 2 6 12 20 .74 7.6 �- 20 - I,ITERATURE CITED Snyder, W. D. 1968. Pheasant hen harvest investigations. Colo. Div. of Game, Fish and Parks. Game Research Report. April, 1968. p. 5-30. Swope, H. M. 1964. Effects of hen pheasant harvest. Colo. Div. of Game, Fish and Parks. Game Research Report. April, 1964. p. 73-103. Prepared by VafzJlMJ~ Jky~ I .. Warren D. Snyder Ass t. Wildlife Researcher �- 21 April, JOB PROGRESS 1969 REPORT State of COLORADO ------------------------~-- Project No. __-~3~7_-R~-~2~2~ W Work Plan No. Job Tit1e: Period ~l----------------- Game Bird Survey Job No e__ ....;1:...:6=--- _ ~P~h~e~a~s~a~n~t~N~e~s~t~~S=i=t~e-=S=e=1=e=c~t~i~o~n~S~t~u~d~y~ Covered: April Personnel: _ 1 , 1968 to March _ 31 , 1969 Harold M.·Swope, Howard D. Funk, Warren D. Snyder, Willis G. Mansfield, Lawrence A. Webster, Robert L. Schmidt, and Donald M. Hoffman ABSTRACT During February, 1968 (Segment 21), 15 hens and 3 cocks were stocked in each of the 4 quadrats. These were released from the quadrats at the conclusion of nest searching in 1968 and allowed to range with native pheasants in the vicinity of the Wildlife Research Station. Thirty-three pheasant nests were found in the 48 nesting plots representing 6 vegetative species or combinations of species. Eleven nests were found in alfalfa, 9 in alfalfa-crested wheatgrass, 6 in hairy vetch, 3 in crested wheatgrass, 2 in growing white sweet clover, 1 in winter wheat stubble, and 1 in volunteer forbs. Eighty-two percent of all nests were established less than 15 feet from plot perimeters. In 2 years study, the interior or exterior location of plots within quadrats has not appeared to influence nest establishment. Average clutch size of 28 nests, where it was feasible to determine this, was 7.6. Some variation was found in clutch sizes between cover types. Of the 30 nests not directly affected by mowing and search operations, 17 were determined to be in an active state of incubation and 13 were successfully hatched. Best nesting success occurred in hairy vetch, alfalfa-crested wheatgrass, and crested wheatgrass plots. Each of the 4 quadrats was restocked with a m~nDnum of 15 hens and 2 cocks, wild-trapped and wing-clipped for continuation of the study in 1969. An electric fence was placed around the perimeter of the quadrats to prevent future cat problems and a magpie trap was built and placed in operation late in the segment. �- 22 - RECOMMENDATIONS In order to increase the sample size of nests located and secure additional information on periods of nest establishment, it is recommended that 3 nest searches be tried in 1969. An initial search will again be conducted in early June, a second in early July, and a final search following the mowing of the plots in late July. Nests located in the initial and second searches will again be removed to encourage renesting. Following the conclusion of nest searching in 1969, it is recommended that the remaining 4 winter wheat plots be reworked and seeded to smooth bromegrass and the remaining 4 white sweet clover plots be reqorked and seeded to tall wheatgrass. In addition, grass seedings in 1968 which did not take will have to be reworked and reseeded. As many of the wing-clipped pheasants as possible will be caught and held in a covered pen prior to mowing of plots in 1969. It is recommended that these birds be used to restock the quadrats for the 1970 studies with the addition of more live-trapped pheasants as needed. �- 23 - PHEASANT NEST SITE SELECTION STUDY Donald M. Hoffman Field work on this study was conducted by Harold M. Swope until his assignment as Section Leader of Federal Aid Big Game Projects. The study was continued by Howard D. Funk until the assignment of the writer in August, 1968. Forty-eight vegetative plots, representing 6 species or combination of species, were maintained in the design outlined in the April, 1965, Game Research Report, Part I, pages 29-32. This resulted in 8 replications of each cover type tested. Each quadrat was stocked \.• ith 15 hens and 3 cocks on February 22, 1968, in preparation for the location of pheasant nests in 1968. Po So OBJECTIVE To compare pheasant nesting use of, and success in (1) winter wheat, (2) alfalfa, (3) crested wheatgrass, (4) hairy vetch, (5) white sweet clover, and (6) alfalfa-crested wheatgrass mixture. SEGMENT OBJECTIVES 1. 2. 3. 40 To maintain plotso To measure nesting use. To determine nesting success. To obtain wild pheasants and care for them following release in plotso METHODS AND MATERIALS Fifteen hens and 3 cocks were live-trapped in the dryland wheat area of Phillips and Sedgwick Counties and released in each of the four quadrats (total of 72 pheasants) by February 22, 1968. A domestic cat problem was encountered shortly thereafter, and several cats were trapped and destroyed by Station personnel. The first nest search was made on June 4, 1968. A different method of searching the individual plots was used during 1968 with searchers forming a line and searching each plot systematically rather than dividing the plot into segments with rope. It was decided not to use the ropes because of the limited number of men available for nest searches. Nests were again marked with a lath and eggs and nests were again removed during the first search to encourage renesting. Following mowing of vegetation on July 23, 1968, plots were again thoroughly searched. Distance was measured from each nest to the nearest edge, and to the apex or base of the triangular plots, whichever was closest. Each nest was then located on a scaled diagram of the area. Number of eggs, fate of the nest, and estimated hatching dates were recorded. �- 24 Phenology measurements were again continued during 1968 to ascertain readiness of the various vegetative species for use by nesting pheasants. Vegetative heights in the four cardinal directions from each nest were continued although density of stems were not determined since it appeared that this had very little value. At the conclusion of nest searching in 1968 all birds were allowed to leave the quadrats and range with native pheasants in the vicinity of the Wildlife Research Station. Three of the quadrats were restocked with 15 hens and 2 cocks and 1 with 16 hens and 2 cocks by March 13, 1969 for continuation of the study in 1969. DESCRIPTION Plot Composition Plot Number OF AREA for 1968 (Treatment 1967 Nesting green winter wheat and 4 in stubble 2 - Alfalfa These were all mowed and maintained following the 1967 nesting that 1968 composition was comparable with 19670 Plot Number Season) 1 - Winter Wheat As in 1967, 4 of these were in growing, for residual cover checks. Plot Number following season so 3 - Crested Wheatgrass These were all mowed and maintained following the 1967 nesting that 1968 composition was comparable with 1967. season so Plot Number 4 - Hairy Vetch These were all mowed and rototilled following the 1967 nesting that 1968 composition was comparable with 1967. Plot Number season so 5 - White Sweet Clover Half of these plots were reworked and reseeded back to white sweet clover, and the remaining half were left unmowed to establish volunteer forb cover for the 1968 season. Plot Number 6 - Alfalfa-Crested Wheatgrass Mixture These were all mowed and maintained following the 1967 nesting that 1968 composition was comparable with 1967. season so �- 25 Plot Composition for 1969 (Treatment following 1968 Nesting Season) In accordance with original plans, vegetative types used very little or not practical to establish along roadsides were reworked following the 1968 nesting season. These were then seeded to other vegetative cover types thought to have potential for nesting covero Plot Number 1 - Winter Wheat Four of the 8 original plots planted to winter wheat were left in wheat stubble for a residual cover check in 1969. The other 4 were reworked and seeded to smooth bromegrasso Plot Number 2 - Alfalfa These were all mowed and maintained following the 1968 nesting that 1969 composition will be comparable to 1968 season so 0 Plot Number 3 - Crested Wheatgrass Four of these were mowed and 4 were unmowed following the 1968 nesting season so that a residual cover check may be secured in 1969 on half of the plots and the other half will be comparable to 1968. Plot Number 4 - Hairy Vetch All of these plots were reworked ing the 1968 nesting season. Plot Number 5 - White and seeded to intermediate wheatgrass follow- Sweet Clover Four of these were reworked and seeded to tall wheatgrass and the other 4 were left unmowed following the 1968 nesting season. The 4 unmowed white sweet clover plots will be used to check volunteer forb residual cover in 1969. Plot Number 6 - Alfalfa-Crested Wheatgrass Four of these were mowed and maintained as previously and 4 were left unmowed following the 1968 nesting season. The 4 unmowed plots will be used to test residual cover in 1969 0 RESULTS AND DISCUSSION Location Thirty-three 6 vegetative of Nests pheasant nests were found in the 48 nesting plots representing species or combinations of species. Table I lists numbers of �- 26 nests by various cover types. Figures 1 through 4 show the location of each nest in the 4 quadrats. The key to abbreviations of cover crop species and plot treatment methods listed in the four figures is located in the Appendixo Alfalfa (11 nests) was again the most preferred type for nest establishment followed by alfalfa-crested wheatgrass (9 nests), hairy vetch (6 nests), crested wheatgrass (3 nests), growing white sweet clover (2 nests), winter wheat stubble (1 nest), and volunteer forbs (1 nest)o The smaller number of nests found in 1968 (33) compared with 1967 (54) is thought to have resulted from domestic cat predation within the quadrats. Although an accurate record was not maintained of numbers of pheasants killed by cats, Station personnel believe that losses were extensive. Most of the predation occurred in the northwest quadrat resulting in lowest numbers of nests found. Only 4 live pheasants were found at the end of the nest searching in this quadrat. Table 10 Number of pheasant types, 1968 nests found in 48 plots representing 6 vegetative 0 Plot Number 1 Quadrat NW NE SW SE Total Winter wheat stubble 0 0 0 1 1 Reseeded 0 0 0 0 0 Type 2 Alfalfa 2 3 2 4 11 3 Crested wheatgrass .0 2 0 1 3 4 Hairy vetch 1 1 3 1 6 5 White sweet clover Growing 1 1 0 0 2 Vol. forbs 0 1 0 0 1 A 1fa 1fa-crested wheatgrass 0 3 4 2 9 4 11 9 9 33 6 Total �- 27 370' 6 2 ""~ Mesa (m) 2 I Mesa (m) 12' •• Trae (c) 12' 5 6 Heal (WI,) Hesa-Agcr(m ~ As (~) / / Ag~ (m) \ \ Trae (cr) 12' Detailed Arrangements of Individual Quadrat, Pheasant Selection Study, Work Plan 1, Job 16 Fig. 1. Location of pheasant nests in northwest quadrat, Nest Site 1968. ~ �- 28 - 370' \\ 2 • \\. 12' 5 11~ nea.i, \\ / ) ~um 3 / . ') Agcr v., "es~ct. (m,J 1"1 7 7/ 101 6 .11 Hesa-Agcr ~ "- "- ~ ~ I Tr-ae (c) Trae (cr) 4 ~12 As (mr-) 3 Agcr (rn) Detailed Fig. 2. Arrangements of Individual Quadrat, Pheasant Selection Study, Work Plan 1, Job 16 Location of pheasant nests in nor-theast. Nest Site quadrat, 1968. I· �- 29 - 370' \\ //1 / 4 As (mI') \\ 4 As (mr ) 12' Trae I( cr) , • 6 3 Hesa-Agcr (m) Agcr (rn) l";esa-Agcr \.~ 2 Trae t l,c) / 12' Detailed Fig. 3. (m) Location Arrangements of Individual Quadrat. Pheasant Selection Study, Work Plan 1, Job 16 of pheasant nC3t3 in southwest quadrat, Nest Site 1968. 12' �- 30 370' • 12' As &i) I •• 4 As (mr ) 12' Detailed Arrangements Selection of Individual Quadrat, Pheasant Study, Work Plan L Job 16 j\est Site �- 31 Distances from the nests to the edge of cover were measured plotting of nest locations on scaled diagrams. to enable the Eighty-two percent of all nests in 1968 were established less than 15 feet from plot perimeters as shown in Table 2. Twenty nests were found in interior plots and 13 in exterior plots during 1968. In 1967, 24 nests were found in interior plots and 30 nests in exterior plotso The terms interior and exterior refer to the location of the individual plots in relation to a central point where all four quadrats join. These are indicated in Figures 1 through 4. In 2 years of the study, it therefore appears that the location of the plots within the quadrats in relation to perimeter fencing has had little effect on nest establishment. Table 2. Distance of pheasant nests from plot perimeters - 1968. Distance From Nearest Edge Number Nests Percent o - 5' 6 18 5 - 10' 10 30 10 - 15' 11 34 15 - 20' 3 9 20 - 25' 2 6 25 - 30' 1 3 30 - 35' 0 0 33 100 TOTAL Clutch Sizes Five nests contained an unknown number of eggs. These were robbed by magpies or small rodents and broken and scattered too badly to accurately count. The average clutch size of the remaining 28 nests was 7.6 ranging from 3 to 13 eggs. Some variation was found in clutch sizes between various cover types as listed in Table 3 Largest average clutches occurred in hairy vetch, alfalfa-crested wheatgrass, and crested wheatgrass plots. 0 Fate of Nests Information on fate of nests is listed in Table 4. Of the 33 nests found and recorded, 17 were determined to be in an active state of incubation, 3 were abandoned or pOSSibly unsuccessful due to nest searching operations, mowing operations or for other unknown reasons, and 13 were successfully hatched. The nests found to be in an active state of incubation were removed to encourage renesting and increase the size of the sample.. Highest success in hatching was experienced in hairy vetch, alfalfa-c.restedwheatgrass, and crested wheatgrass plots. �- Table 3. 1968. 32 - Clutch sizes found. in 33 pheasant nests in 6 vegetative types, Clutch Size I 2 3 1 4 2 5 1 6 Plot Number 3 4 7 3 I 4 I I 2 2 9 2 7 2 2 1 1 11 1 12 1 1 1 13 2 2 Unknown 2 1 Total Ave. Clutch Size Table 40 3 I 3 10 Total I 1 8 6 1 2 I 5 1 3 5 1 11 3 6 3 9 33 5.0 6.1 8.3 9.7 5.5 8.7 76 0 Fate of 33 pheasant nests in 6 cover types, 1968 0 Type I 2 Plot Number 3 4 5 6 Total Active 1 5 2 2 I 6 17 Hatched 0 4 I 4 2 2 13 Unsuccessful 0 2 0 0 0 I 3 -:rota I 1 11 3 6 3 9 33 �- 33 - Period ·of Nest Establishment Due to a change in nest search procedures and times of nest searchings during 1968, it is not possible to accurately determine periods of nest establishment. Only 4 nests were located in the first nest searches in early June. Other nest search operations were made in late July just prior to mowing operations and following the removal of vegetation in the quadratso Phenology Phenology measurements of heights of growth were made by Harold M. Swope on May 16 and 26; June 6, 17, 31; and July 11, 21 and 29, 1968. Table 5 lists heights of vegetation in the plots on May 16 and June 17. Vegetative heights were recorded approximately every 10 days until cessation of growth in 1968 in order that vegetative heights could be related to periods of nest establishment. With a complete lack of data on periods of nest establishment due to reasons listed above, it is meaningless to include all vegetative height measurementso A large difference in vegetative heights was found, however, between early May, 1967 and early May, 1968 due to a difference in amounts of early irrigation water supplied. In 1967, Swope found that nearly all plots had adequate cover for pheasant nesting by May 8 In 1968, comparable heights did not occur until mid June. 0 Height of Vegetation Surrounding Nests Nests found prior to mowing and found in uncut plots provided an opportunity for obtaining vegetative height measurements. It was possible to secure vegetative measurements surrounding 17 nests. Table 6 lists average heights of vegetation on the north, east, south and west sides of these nests. Numbers value. of stems were not counted Stocking Quadrats in 1968 since it appears with Pheasants these have little for 1969 Pheasants were captured with a vehicular mounted cannon-net, field set cannonnet, and hand-netting at night in Phillips and Sedgwick Counties. Three of the quadrats were stocked with 15 hens and 2 cocks and 1 quadrat (SE) was stocked with 16 hens and 2 cocks by March 13, 1969 0 An electric fence was erected around the quadrats and charged to prevent predation by domestic cats In addition, a magpie and placed in operation in late March, 1969. o in March, 1969 trap was built �- 34 Table 5. Average height of vegetation in pheasant nesting plots, 1968. Vegetative Type Average Height {Inches~ May 16, 1968 June 17, 1968 Winter wheat (stubble) 1101 12.0 Winter wheat (growing) 3.3 16.3 Alfalfa 3.0 9.0 Crested wheatgrass 5.3 9.2 Hairy vetch 1.5 6.4 White sweet clover (growing) LO 3.2 Volunteer forbs 1/ 1.5 12.0 Alfalfa-Crested wheatgrass 5.4 9.6 1/ Residual growth of last year's sweet clover averaged 6' - 7'. la~4fJ£(l9rf:;¥~v Prepared by Donald M. Hoffmanzif'-Wildlife Researcher �- 35 Table 6. Nest Number Heights and composition of vegetation surrounding 17 pheasant nestso Plot Number Date Measured 1 2 6-4-68 alfalfa 19.8 2 3 6-4-68 crested wheatgrass ll.5 3 2 6-4-68 alfalfa 15 5 4 1 6-4-68 winter wheat stubble 7.5 winter wheat growing 1403 Composition Average Height (Inches) 0 5 4 7-23-68 hairy vetch 908 6 4 7-23-68 hairy vetch n ,» 7 2 7-23-68 alfalfa ll.5 8 2 7-23-68 alfalfa 5.8 9 6 7-23-68 a lfalfa-crested wheatgrass 1103 10 3 7-23-68 crested wheatgrass 18.8 13 6 7-23-68 a lfaIfa-crested wheatgrass 27.0 14 6 7-23-68 alfalfa-crested wheatgrass 15.3 21 5 7-24-68 white sweet clover (growing) 1808 22 5 7-24-68 white sweet clover (volunteer) cheatgrass intermediate wheatgrass 1700 22.0 36.0 23 6 7-24-68 alfalfa alfalfa-crested wheatgrass 27.0 19 5 crested wheatgrass alfalfa-crested wheatgrass 18.5 18 0 alfalfa alfalfa-crested wheatgrass crested wheatgrass 21.0 12.0 16 0 24 25 6 6 7-24-68 7-24-68 0 0 0 �- 36 APPENDIX Key to abbreviations - Figures 1 through 4. Plants Symbol Scientific Name Common Name Agcr Agropyron cristatum Crested wheatgrass Agel Agropyron elongatum Tall wheatgrass Agin Agropyron intermedium Intermediate As Astragalus spp , (Madison strain) Hairy vetch Brin Bromus inermis Smooth bromegrass Meal Melilotus alba White sweet clover Mesa Medicago sativa Alfalfa Trae Triticum aestivum Treatment - following 1967 nesting season. (c) combined only - residual cover check in 1968 (cr) combined and reseeded (m) mowed only (mr) mowed and rototilled (rr) reworked and reseeded (urn) unmowed - residual cover check in 1968 Winter wheat wheatgrass �- 37 April, JOB PROGRESS Game Bird Survey W-37 -R-22 Project Noo 1 Work Plan No. Pheasant Period Covered: Personnel: REPORT COLORA.DO State of Job Title: 1969 April Job NO g Roadside Cover Evaluation 18 Study 1, 1968 - March 31, 1969 Harold Swope and {\farrenSnyder ABSTRACT This report summar Lzes beginning work on an evaluation study designed to ascertain possible benefits of establishing permanent roadside nesting cover for pheasants in Northeast Colorado. Initial phases of this study were completed with selection of more than thirty roadside study groups in Phillips County. Each study group contained a one-quarter mile plot to be seeded to grass, a second plot seeded to a grass-legume mixture and a third one-quarter mile to serve as a control. A majority of the development plots were prepared and seeded during the late summer of 1968. Crested wheatgrass (Agropyron cristatum), intermediate wheatgrass CA. Lnt.ermed-tum) and Western wheatgrass (A. smithii) were the primary grasses planted. Ranger alfalfa (Medicago sativ;) was the main legume. Fair to poor results were obtained from this initial seeding effort. �- 38 - RECOMMENDATIONS 1. Spraying to reduce week dompetition in grass-legume seeded plots is recommended where grasses are well established, but little or no legume vegetation exists. If grass-legume mixtures cannot be successfully established, this study should evaluate pheasant production exclusively in grass seeded plots. 2. Additional study plots should be established adjacent to irrigated farmland. Large acreages in Phillips County and throughout eastern Colorado are being placed under irrigation. Adjacent roadsides not used for turnrows or collecting run-off possess excellent development potential. 3. Additional controls should be established where plots within groups could not be randomly selected for seeding. study �- 39 - PHEASANT ROADSIDE Warren COVER EVALUATION STUDY D. Snyder P. S. OBJECTIVE To compare pheasant production under natural roadside conditions with the following cover types to be established along roadsides: (1) grass (2) grass-legume mixtures. SEGMENT OBJECTIVES 1. 2. To select roadside test areas. To establish grass and grass-legume METHODS Selection cover on roadside test areas. AND MATERIALS of Roadside Study Plots Ninety t-mile long test plots were selected in central and eastern Phillips County. Most of the test plots were arranged in groups of three, with each group containing a plot in natural condition (Control), a plot to be seeded to grass, and one to be seeded to a grass-legume mixture. The three plots within the group were proximally located, preferrably bordering the same field. When possible, plot location within the group was done by random selection. Several factors made it difficult to maintain random selection of a grass, grass-legume and control plot within each study group. In many instances, where telephone or electric utility poles made roadside farming difficult, the farmer requested that the full one-half mile or mile be seeded. By necessity, the control had to be located at some proximal location. Additional controls will be used within the study to compensate for nonrandom selection. Numerous variables were considered in selecting roadside study groups and the three plots within each. Included in the list were: permanence of the road grade, proximity to farm residences, farmed or unfarmed status, width and depth of graded ditch, water drainage, crops adjacent or proximal to the site, and other influences that might create study bias. \'<1olfe and Evans (1967) were unable to detect a preference by hen pheasants for one side or direction of road over another in nest site selection. Therefore, side or direction of the road was not considered in plot establishment. Most of the study plots were located adjacent to wheat or summer fallow in which wheat would be planted. Several plots were positioned adjacent to irrigated land on which beets, corn, or beans were produced. �- 40 Cover-type maps (prepared for Work Plan 1, Job 14) were employed in site selection along with field inspections. Farmers having land adjacent to suitable areas for roadside seeding were contacted. The study was explained and their cooperation was asked. Sites were selected on the basis of landowner cooperation and the qualities of the site. Establishment of Grass and Grass-Legume Cover Farm equipment was obtained for use in establishing roadside cover. This equipment included a model 1020 John Deer tractor with mounted rototiller, springtooth harrow, and gyramor type mower. A grassland drill was used in seeding operations. Plots to be seeded were first mowed, if heavy cover was present, then rototilled to prepare a seed bed. In 1968, seed bed preparation was begun in late July, after the primary nesting period, and continued into August. Drilling of seed was begun in mid-August and continued into early September. Primary species used in roadside seeding included: (1) fairway crested wheatgrass, (2) standard crested wheatgrass, (3) intermediate wheatgrass, (4) tall wheatgrass, (5) smooth bromegrass, and (6) rhyzoma and ranger alfalfa. Selection of species for use in the study was based on information obtained in the nest site selection study at the Fort Collins Wildlife Research Center (Swope, 1968). Hull, et ale (1962) was the source for grass and legume seeding rates. In a few cases where the tractor and drill could not be turned, a full halfmile was planted to either grass or a grass-legume mixture. Future nest search efforts will determine whether these should be divided into two quarter-mile plots or retained as a single half mile plot for analysis. Additional groups will tentatively be incorporated into the study at later dates primarily as replacements for existing sites. Other anticipated methods include: 1. 2. 3. 4. Early spring seeding if and when adequate stands are not established fall. Summer fallow to better prepare plots for fall seeding. Fertilization to stimulate growth if moisture and stand density are adequate. Herbicide treatment of grass plots to reduce weed competition. in A standard form was prepared and used to record location, conditions and habitat manipulations for each study group. This form is illustrated in Fig. 1. DESCRIPTION OF AREA This study is being conducted in the tablelands of Phillips County, Colorado. In past years approximately 90 percent was dryland-farmed for wheat. In recent years large acreages have been pla.ced under i.rrigation. Crop production on these acreages has changed to sugar beets, corn and beans. �- 41 - ROADSIDE PHEASANT COVER Group Name and Number: Legal Description: _ T. Sec. R. Group Width of Seeded Flots Illustr2tion e Depth of Di tch e. on Section D ------ Length of Seeded Plots Adjacent _ Cover Type(s) _ Outside Boundary Type Adjacent Lnndowner(s) Adjacent _ Farmer(s) Plot Selection was Random Part. Random Reason for Sel~ction Pattern if not Random: Factors of Bias or Influence to Group: Planting Procedure: Cultivation Plot I Non-Random _ ~ ~-- Plot 2 of Plots Datf3s: Species Planted Datas Planted Establishment Reseeding: of Stand --------------------- _ Spraying _ Miscellaneous: _ Fig. 1. Form used for recording pertinent study group and plot information. �- 42 U. S. Weather Bureau records for Holyoke indicate normal annual preC1p1tation averages 17.81 inches. The majority of this, 11.02 inches, is received from May through August. Pheasant nesting cover has become a more critical item in eastern Colorado each year. Farming has become more extensive and intensive. Few fence rows now exist. Most barrow ditches along county roads have been plowed or graded level with adjacent fields permitting field borders to be extended to the road shoulder. Reasons for elimination of roadside ditches include reduction of problem weeds, reduction of grasshopper breeding places, and increased farmable acreage. Removal of roadside barrow ditches, in many instances, has eliminated the only remaining permanent nesting cover within a section. Many areas one, two or more square miles in size are nearly or completely devoid of resident pheasant populations because all permanent cover has been removed. RESULTS AND DISCUSSION The Phillips County Commissioners were contacted and informed of the roadside study proposal. Their unanimous support and cooperation was received. Most farmers who were contacted concerning the roadside seeding effort expressed favorable opinions and a cooperative attitude toward the study. Several agreed to continue summer fallow operations on the land until planting time. However, only a few were willing to donate farmed roadside unless telephone or electric utility poles interferred with normal farming operations. Therefore, most of the study plots are bounded on the field side by poles. This line of poles between the cultivated field and the roadside plots will be beneficial in providing a permanent boundary over which the farmer is less likely to trespass with machinery. A few study groups were also established in unfarmed barrow ditches along new or recently elevated roads. Selection of the roadside study. plots was completed during the spring and early summer of 1968. Establishment of grass and gras s= Legume cover was initiated in late July. Table 1 summarizes site selection and initial cover establishment efforts completed during the work segment. Grass and legume abbreviations used in Table 1 are defined in Table 2. Several rains of various amounts were received over most of Phillips County during August, 1968. Amounts were generally inadequate and not persistent enough to produce a strong drought resistant grass stands. Hot, dry weather in late August and throughout September desiccated sprouting plants. Fair to poor stands were noted on several early planted plots. On most plots, however, little or no grass or legume c.over was established. Some of the seed possibly over-wintered due to dry fall and winter c.onditions and will germinate in spring. Severe March winds damaged wheat fields adjacent to several of the roadside plots during the late winter of 1969. Blowing dirt from these fields covered fair grass stands on a few plots. �- 43 - Table 1. Grass the late summer and grass-legume of 1968. seeding •~ o .r-!0 Cooperating .u ~ Farmer of roadsides in Phillips Species County during Planted Z o u r-I Plot 1 Plot 2 0 P-<....:t 13 24 24 30 21 21 28 23 7 7 8 8 9 9 9 15 15 15 17 17 7 7 7 8 7 8 8 8 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 35 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 6 36 36 14 6 7 18 18 18 18 18 29 31 31 32 6 43 43 43 43 44 44 44 44 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 46 46 46 46 11 Common N N E N W S S S N E N W S E S N N N N N S N N N E W N E W N W w p. Travis p. Travis p. Travis E. Axe p. Lappart W. Sprague W. Sprague V. Sprague K. Young K. Young G. Miller L. Miller H. Hassler H. Hassler W. Krueger V. Helgoth V. Helgoth V. He1goth L. Boller L. Boller L. Roll L. Miller L. Miller K. Young K. Young J. Saylor E. Anderson C. Keasling L. Roll D. Neiman D. Neiman D. Neiman H. Gall Agsm Agcr(f) Brin II Agsm Agcr(f) Brin Agsm Agcr(f) Agsm Brin Agin Agcr(f) Agcr(f&st) Agin Agcr(st) Agin Agcr(st) Agin Brin Atsm Agcr(f) Agcr(f) Agin Agin (Seeded Previously) Agin Agsm Agcr(f) Agin Agcr(f) Agin Pavi Bocu Ertr Agin Agcr(f) Agcr(f) Agin Agcr(st) Agcr(st) Agin Agel Ansc Bocu Ertr Agin Agcr(f) Agin Agcr(f) Agin Agcr(f) Agin Agcr(st) Agin Agcr(f) agsm Agin Agcr(f) Agin Agcr(f) Agin Agcr(f) agsm Agin Agcr(f) Agin Agcr(f) Agin Agcr( f) Agcr(f) Agsm Brin Agin Agcr(st) As. Agin Agcr(st) Agin Agcr(st) Mesa Mesa Mesa Mesa As, Mesa Mesa Mesa Mesa Mesa ~I ----2.1 Agcr(st) Mesa As. As. Mesa Mesa As. Mesa Mesa Mesa Mesa Mesa As. Mesa and scientific names for abbreviations are presented in Table 2. species planted in addition to those listed for Plot 1. Additional species were not planted in Plot 2. 21 Supplemental }I E E S W N W W E E S W S S W N S E N N W E E W W Mesa �- 44 Table 2. Abbreviations, commpn names and scientific names of grasses and legumes planted on the roadside study plots - 1968. Abbreviation Scientific Name Ansc Andropogon scoparius Litt le Bluestem Pavi Panicum virgatum SWitchgrass Bocu Bouteloua curtipendula Sideoats grama Ertr Eragrostis trichodes Sand lovegrass Agsm Agropyron smithii Western wheatgrass Agcr (F) Agropyron cristatum Crested wheatgrass Fairway variety Agcr (s t ) Agropyron cristatum Standard variety of Crested wheatgrass Brin Bromus inermis Smooth brome Agin Agropyron intermedium Intermediate wheatgrass Agel Agropyron elongatum Tall wheatgrass Mesa Medicago sativa Alfalfa As Astragalus sp , Hairy vetch Common Name �- 45 One study group located northeast of Holyoke was used as a travel lane from the field, and as a turn row during beet digging operations. This group will be dropped from the study. In expectation of similar problems and other problems in establishing and maintaining quality grass stands, several additional study groups will be added to replace unusable groups. Therefore, maps showing the location of the seeded plots and controls will be presented in a future Game Research Report. LITERATURE CITED Hull, A. C. Jr., D. F. Hervey, C. W. Dor~n, and W. J. McGinnies. 1962. Seeding Colorado range lands.~o1GO. State Univ. Bull. 498-S. Fort Collins, Colo. 46 p. Swope, H. M. 1968. Pheasant nest site selection study. Game, Fish and Parks. Game Research Report. April, Colo. Div. of 1968. p. 31-42. Wolfe, C. W., and R. D. Evans. 1967. Characteristics of roadside pheasant nests. Cent. Mountains and Plains Sect. of the Wildl. Soc. 12th Ann. Conf. (Abstract). Prepared by 2V~P~ Warren D. Snyder Assistant Wildlife Researcher ��April - 47 - JOB PROGRESS 1969 REPORT State of COLOFADO ------~~~~~---------- Project Noo W_-_3_7_-_R_-_22 _ Work Plan No. ---l-------------- Job Title: Game Bird Survey Job NOo -=19~ _ Leased Plot Development and Resulting Harvest ----------------------~----~------~~~~~~~----------------~- Period Covered: Personne 1: April 1, 1968 - March 31; 1969 Richard Norman, Harold M. Swope, Edward Kochman, Robert J. Tully, Robert L. Schmidt, Edgar J. Prenzlow, Howard D. Funk, Gary T. Myers, Richard M. Hopper, Donald Horak, Clait Braun, George D. Bear, Richard M. Bartmann, Bruce Gill, Roland C. Kufeld, John P. Goettl, Walter T. Burkhard, Larry M. Finnell and Warren D. Snyder. ABSTRACT Predevelopment phases were completed on a study enacted to determine the feasibility of acquiring, by lease or purchase, and developing small unfarmed plots for upland game habitat in Northeast Colorado. The study will be completed following acquisition, development and post-development evaluation. Seventeen and eleven pilot study plots were selected in Washington and Sedgwick Counties, respectively. Observers recorded predevelopment hunting pressure, success and harvest on the plots during the opening weekends of the 1967 and 1968 pheasant seasons. In 1967, 230 hunters reported observing 77 pheasants, of which seven were harvested, on the Washington plots. In 1968, 300 hunters observed 58 pheasants and harvested 17. On the Sedgwick plots, 185 hunters reported seeing 203 pheasants and harvesting 12 in 1967. Only 98 were observed by 198 hunters in 1968 and ten were harvested. Information on hunter use in relation to hunter traffic past the plots was obtained in 1968. More than three-fourths of the hunters utilizing the study plots resided outside vJashington, Sedgwick or Phillips Counties. ��- 49 - LEASED PLOT DEVELOPMENT AND RESULTING HARVEST Warren D. Snyder This report covers the pre-treatment phase of a study designed to evaluate habitat acquisition and development for pheasants. As of the time of this report, the study plots have not been acquired. Pending the availability of funds, efforts will be made to first purchase, or second, to lease them for an extended period of years. Habitat manipulation will vary depending on the site, but will be directed toward increased production and harvest of pheasants. Both acquisition and development are assigned to the Division's Field Services Section. Further evaluation will be discontinued until after acquisition and habitat manipulations have been completed. P. S. OBJECTIVE To determine farm plots. the cost per pheasant harvested by leasing and developing small SEGMENT OBJECTIVES 1. 2. 3. Lease concerned plots (non-project). Establish plantings and other developments (non-project). Measure pheasant harvest and hunter use of areas before development. METHODS AND MATERIALS Hunters and harvest were observed on proposed leased plots during the opening weekend of pheasant season. Four Division personnel recorded hunting on Washington County plots during 1967 and 1968. Due to distance from the other plots, plot Number W-l was not observed in 1968. In Sedgwick County, six and five observers were used in 1967 and 1968, respectively. Due to poor site quality, pheasants were not resident on plots S-6 and S-7. Little or no hunting pressure was observed on them in 1967, so they were omitted during the 1968 observations. Observers used personal vehicles and clothing to help elimiate bias while observing and contacting hunters. They were asked to remain as far from the study plots as possible. Binoculars or spotting scopes were used to facilitate observation. When possible, hunters were contacted after they completed their hunt of the area. Observation data were collected throughout the shooting hours of opening weekend. In most instances complete coverage of hunting effort and harvest was obtained. In recording hunting pressure and harvest the observer recorded the number of hunters and the time spent hunting the actual area. Time and harvest in adjacent localities was not tallied. Information on �- 50 - observed and harvested wildlife was also obtained when the hunting party was contacted. Residence of the hunting party was obtained by recording auto license numbers. Where possible, vehicles bypassing the study plots were recorded by license number. The ratio of vehicles stopping with those bypassing the plots provided an additional index to site quality prior to development. DESCRIPTION OF AREA Two pilot study areas were established for initial evaluation. One was located in fair to marginal pheasant range in north central Washington County (Fig. 1). As shown in Fig. 2, it contained 10.5 square miles. Following landowner contacts, seventeen small plots were selected for initial lease and/or acquisition and development. They ranged in size from three to twenty-five acres. Nearly all encompassed or included unfarmed "waste" areas of varied types. Several,in shortgrass, were unfarmed because of limestone "caliche" deposits. Others included abandonded farmyards, low areas (occasionally holding water) or draws. The second pilot area was located in Colorado's best pheasant range in southern Sedgwick County (Fig. 1). Eleven plots (Fig. 3) were selected within the approximate 42 square mile area. All included low areas or drainages that were marginal or unsuitable for farming. The plots ranged from three to forty acres in size. RESULTS AND DISCUSSION The information presented in Tables 1 through 4 provides a general measure of predevelopment hunter use and harvest. It will be more meaningful when compared with hunting and harvest data after the plots are developed. In general, the tables show that hunting pressure was greater and more time was spent on the Sedgwick plots. However, these plots were larger, more attractive and contained more pheasants. The number of hunting parties and hunters using the areas provided one aspect of site quality and attractiveness. The number of pheasants observed served as a second and more important measure. But the pheasants observed on an area did not necessarily represent the population residing there. Many factors influenced observation of pheasants. During an opening weekend the first party into an area usually flushed and scattered any resident birds. Repeated searches by several other parties hunting at different times of the day often would not produce a single additional bird. Total pheasants observed on all the plots in one county seemed to provide a fair indication of pheasant abundance. But as Tables 1 through 4 indicate, harvest was not necessarily related to the observed number of pheasants. On the Washington plots, 7 of 77 pheasants were harvested in 1967. In 1968, 17 of 58 pheasants were killed. �51 - 1'I .® I Fig. 1. Location of the Washington and Sedgwick I II L. County Study Areas. �- 52 - W11D1H'E Hi!..Bl'ril.T DEVE10J:'hll!;NT .r'110T .AREA Washington County, ',If 115 1 ~W-I I I I I I "3 I . w,j I I I _W·/' "'" I w-If I I - -W-? bt W"-~ I '« v- w51'Z I I I I - - -~-:7-- I W-o 1 I - - i'r6 -- m2 AW'/'i , F\t-IZ /V-to I I. - - T W·1f I j I I I W"'S" I ~W-17 fJ$h ,,-:l:l:'! ..... - - $I~ - - - - - 3-i,.I I I I I I ! ~:)c; ..le: 1 .i nc h C[>U':-'·.LS Loc r- t Lcn s :.i1 • .5 I·~orth, Fig. 2. area. ~ vv·7 , I I --- - - - -2-12 - - - I - - -al.jl I I i Colorado Proposed development plots within .J.. .ai l e R. 51 'a , t the. Washington County pilot study �- 53 - WILDLIFE HABITAT DEVELOPMENT PILOT AREA SEDGWICK COUNTY, COLORADO R R -LJ. ') tiT ~5-Z 24 ~-' m".s-a 27 26 34 35 19 25 .lJ. tv" "'* 21 30 29 28 27 31 32 33 34 6 5 4 3 7 8 9 10 ~ T. 10 N. T. 10 N. ~ ...... s~ T. 9 N. 3 2 10 11 12 15 14 13 ~~ s- 9 N. 11 .••• 5-10 R. -45 W T. ~ S-/I R.-44W. N Scale: 3/4 inch equals 1 mile ~ - Proposed development site Fig. 3. area. Proposed development plots within the Sedgwick r County pilot study �- 54 - Table 1. Hunting and harvest observed on the proposed lease sites in Washington County, November 11-12, 1967. Area Hunting Parties Hunters 1 1 3 2 No hunting observed 3 6 4 Total Time Time/!../ Pheasants Harvested Crippled Hunter Pheasants Observed 1/ 45 15 0 0 0 16 5:00 20 0 0 0 3 6 1:10 10 0 0 3 5 4 10 30 5 0 0 0 6 3 12 1:40 10 2 0 13 7 4 9 2:15 15 0 0 0 8 2 3 3 5 0 0 0 9 1 3 1:30 30 0 0 0 10-A No hunting recorded 10-B 3 12 4 :15 20 0 0 0 lO-C 2 7 2:00 20 0 1 3 10-D 3 9 3:45 25 0 0 0 11 No hunting observed 12 14 43 3:00 5 0 0 0 13 4 16 2:00 5 3 0 34 14 8 28 7: 1.5 15 2 0 20 15 2 18 4:00 15 0 0 0 16 3 23 3:30 10 0 0 3 17 2 12 3:00 15 0 0 1 Total 65 230 45:38 10 2/ 7 1 77 1/ Average time hunted recorded to nearest 5 minutes. 2/ Average of totals. Ii Pheasants reported observed by hunters. Four jack rabbits were taken from the areas. �- Table 2. Hunting and harvest observEd County, November 11-12, 1967. Area Hunting Parties Hunters 1 2 5 2 No hunting observed 3 1 4 Total Time '55 - on the proposed TimelY Hunter lease sites in Sedgwick Pheasants Harvested Crippled Pheasants Observed 50 10 o o 10 4 40 10 o o o 3 8 :3: 15 25 o o o 5 18 60 28:45 30 8 2 91 6 No hunting observed 7 5 15 3:45 15 o o o 8 8 19 10: 15 30 o o 5 9 16 40 33:30 50 3 o 90 10 7 19 6:30 20 1 1 4 11 4 15 3:50 15 o o 3 Total 64 185 91:20 30 21 12 3 203 II Average time hunted recorded to nearest 5 minutes. Average of totals. One cottontail bagged on each of plots 3, 5 and 9. II �.. 56 - Table 3. Hunting and harvest observed on the proposed lease sites in Washington County, November 16-17, 1968. Area Hunting Parties Hunters Total Time Time/ ]j Hunter Harvested Pheasants Crippled Observed 2/ 1 Area was not observed in 1968 2 3 10 2.50 15 0 0 0 3 3 5 1.75 20 0 0 0 4 4 30 12.75 25 1 0 l3 5 2 8 2.00 15 1 0 6 6 3 11 10.50 55 1 0 4 7 1 2 0.50 15 0 0 0 8 4 39 9.75 15 5 2 11 9 3 10 2.50 15 0 0 0 10 1 2 0.50 15 0 0 0 11 No hunting observed on area 12 8 20 5.00 15 0 0 0 l3 5 16 4.00 15 0 0 4 14 6 60 15.00 15 8 0 15 15 2 40 10.00 15 1 0 5 16 2 40 10.00 15 0 a 0 17 3 7 1.75 15 0 0 0 50 300 88.50 17.7 min. 17 2 58 1/ Time computed by observers to nearest 15 minutes. "f/ Pheasants reported observed by hunters. �- 57 - Table 4. Hunting and harvest observed on the proposed Sedgwick County, November 16-17, 1968. lease sites in Area Hunting Parties Hunters Total Time Time/ 1...1 Hunter Harvested Pheasants Crippled Observed 1 2 7 1.75 15 0 0 0 2 1 3 0.75 15 1 0 1 3 2 4 1.50 20 0 0 0 4 2 5 2.50 30 0 0 0 5 14 39 18.50 30 3 1 30 6 Area was not observed in 1968 7 Area was not observed in 1968 8 9 29 9.00 20 1 1 9 9 16 63 30.50 30 1 0 40 10 7 27 14.75 30 4 0 13 11 5 21 7.50 20 0 0 1 58 198 86.75 21 min. 10 2 94 !/ Time computed by observers to .nearest 15 minutes. Value of the study plots in providing hunting opportunity probably increases as hunting seasons progress. Pheasants flushed from the areas by the first hunters on opening weekend move back to the areas and are again available to hunters at different times later in the season. Hunting pressure on subsequent weekends is usually light so that hunting parties have a much better expectation of finding pheasants on the plots later in the season. In 1967, approximately 38.7 percent of the pheasant roosters were bagged on the opening weekend in northeast Colorado (Grieb, 1968). In 1968, about 45 percent were harvested in the same period (Funk and Grieb, 1969). This indicates that a high percentage of the total harvest on the study plots was not observed during the opening weekend. In 1968, observers recorded the number of vehicles bypassing the study plots and the number stopping to hunt. This, as shown in Table 5, provided a general index of locality hunting pressure in relation to use of the study plots. This will be used as a base for comparison of plot use with hunting pressure in future years. �- 58 - Table 5. Hunter traffic past the study sites in relation the areas, November 16, 17, 1968. Location Sedgwick Area Hunting Parties Bypassing Sites Parties Hunting One or More Sites 1, 2, 3 24 5 4, 5 23 5 8, 9 19 31 10, 11 lO 13 76 54 2, 3, 7 58 5 4, 5, 6, 8, 12 41 21 9, 10, 11, 17 17 7 15, 16 27 3 143 36 County Total Washington Total to hunter use of County The number of hunters by county of residence using the plots is shown in columns one and three of Table 6. Larger samples in columns two and four include other traffic past the study plots. A percentage of this second category was comprised of non-hunting local farmers traveling to and from their residences. In summary, local hunters and local traffic made up less than a fourth of the total. �- 59 - Table 6. Residence of hunters using and bypassing the proposed lease sites in Washington and Sedgwick Counties, November 11-12, 1967 and November 16-17, 1968. Y Hunter Residence Washington County Hunting Hunting or on Areas Bypassing Sedgwick Hunting on Areas County Hunting or Bypassing 1967 Denver and Suburbs Boulder County Weld County Larimer County Morgan County Logan County Washington County Sedgwick County Phillips County ~/ Non-resident 21 23 1 3 Total Percent local vehicles o o 1 2 2 1 2 9 2 18 26 1 1 3 1 o o 42 1 1 3 1 o o o o o o 1 1 4 2 4 6 2 36 51 41 60 25 35 17 17 60 30 54 4 2 2 4 7 3 3 3 1968 Denver and Suburbs Boulder County Weld County Larimer County Morgan County Logan County Washington County Sedgwick County Phillips County 2/ Moffat County El Paso County Las Animas County Non-resident 16 3 Total Percent local vehicles 1 o o 1 7 o o o o 5 2 20 o o 1 4 o o o o o o 2 18 o o 2 2 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 31 100 42 92 23 20 5 21 1 o 1 o 1/ Based on vehicle license numbers. Vehicles hunting more than one area were recorded only once. ~/ Phillips County licensed vehicles were included as local in the Sedgwick County study area. �- 60 - LITERATURE CITED Funk, H. D., and J. R. Grieb. 1969. Colorado small game hunter harvest survey -- 1968. Colo. Div. of Game, Fish and Parks. 38 p. (mimeo). Grieb, J. R. 1968. Colorado small game hunter harvest survey -- 1967. Colo. Div. of Game, Fish and Parks. 27 p. (mimeo). Prepared by ;rp~o~ Warren D. Snyder Assistant Wildlife Researcher �April 1969 - 61 - JOB PROGRESS REPORT State of, ~C~O~L~O~RA~D~O _ Pro ject No o __ Game Bird Survey ..:.;W~--=3:.:.7_-.::.;R~-..::2..::2 _ Job Noo_-..::8~a~ _ Work Plan No.,_.-..;......;:3=--. _ Effects of Sagebrush Control on Distribution Job Title: and Abundance of Sa~g~e~G~r~o~u~s~e~----~--------------Period Covered: Personnel: April 1, 1968 to September 19, 1968 Clait Braun, Don Clamp, Don Clamp, Jr., Steve Cook, Marcus Elkins, Thvayne Finch, Howard Funk, Don Gore, Richard Imler, Edward Kochman, Russell Mason, Terry May, Dale Reed, Dr. Ronald Ryder, Ray Schmidt, Jr., Warren Snyder, Harold Swope"Mike Szymczak, Melvin Taylor, Clayton Wetherill, Bruce Poley (Principal Investigator). ABSTRACT Strutting ground counts of male sage grouse (Centrocercus urophasianus) showed a slightly lower breeding population than in previous years. The 231 counted in 1968 was 34 lower and 3 lowe~ than in 19&7 and 1966, respectively. A total of 89 sage grouse were trapped, marked and released'. Ten of these were instrumented with VHF radio transmitters. A total of 131 reobservations of 'marked birds were made throughout the spring and summer, primarily on the instrumented birds. Ninety-nine additional bird locations, but not actual sightings, were obtained from the instrumented birds. Four of the marked females traveled an average of 2,580 yards to nest (range =75 to 8,360 yards). The broods traveled to the meadows by following ridges where possible. These seasonal movements were relatively rapid with daily brood movements of as much as 2 miles. Sage grouse used irrigated meadows for summering areas and stayed in these meadows until early fall. In late August or early September, the birds increased their daily movements and began making more use of sagebrush areas. �- 62 - RECOMMENDATIONS 1. This preliminary information indicates sage grouse will nest in the unsprayed strips of the strip-sprayed areas. Any further sagebrush control at this time should be done in strips until more information can be obtained. 2. More females could be trapped by using the mobile cannon-net during the peak of female attendance on the strutting grounds. This would allow a higher number of hens to be instrumented early in the breeding season, thus giving an unbiased estimate of the distances traveled to nest. 3. Wires or small cables should be inserted into the plastic tubes forming the radio transmitter harness. They should be wrapped around the battery at least one time and continue back to the knot at the rear of the transmitter. This would prevent the breakage encountered in this phase of the study. 4. Immediately after the nests under observation hatch, the young should be marked in some manner so that they can be positively identified for later banding. 5. If a second employee were assigned to the study during the second field season, possibly 24 birds could be instrumented and even more detailed observations could be made on each bird. �- 63 - EFFECTS OF SAGEBRUSH CONTROL ON DISTRIBUTION AND ABUNDANCE OF SAGE GROUSE Bruce E. Poley In 1963, the first phase of this project was initiated to determine sage grouse (Centrocercus urophasianus) abundance and distribution in northwestern North Park, Colorado, and re commend patterns for sagebrush control. In June, 1965, the Bureau of Land Management sprayed approximately 4,000 acres of sagebrush (Artemisia tridentata) to the design and specifications determined by these pre-treatment efforts. Immediately following spraying, a post-treatment study began. It was designed to determine the immediate effects of the spraying. A third study is planned to determine the longer term effects of the spray treatment. The work reported here was designed to monitor sage grouse populations and determine their movements through or around these treated areas during the time between the second and third studies. p. S. OBJECTIVE To determine the effects of 2,4-D spraying of sagebrush on: (1) Sage grouse abundance; (2) Sage grouse distribution; (3) Vegetative composition and density. SEGMENT OBJECTIVES 1. 2. Measure sage grouse abundance. Determine sage grouse distribution. METHODS AND MATERIALS Abundance Sage grouse population trends were measured by strutting ground counts. These counts were made according to procedures described in detail by Gill (1965). An indication of productivity was obtained from brood counts made on routes established by Gill (1965). The procedure followed while making these counts has previously been described (Carr 1967). Analysis of harvest data provi.ded an indication of sex and age ratios. These data were collected at two check stations located for the past 14 years at Cowdrey and ~ mile west of Walden, respectively. Age and sex of the birds were determined from the wings according to Crunden (1963). Population estimates were derived from band recoveries of marked birds. The trapping techniques used to capture these birds for marking were described in detail by Carr (1967). A noose pole, long handled dip-nets, and cannonnets were also used for capturing birds. �- 64 - Distribution Distribution and movements were determined from observations of banded birds and by following radio frequency marked hens. All of the grouse captured were marked on the left leg with a Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Division leg-band inscribed with a return address and number. A numbered plastic bandette, color coded according to trapping location, was placed on the right leg. Band sizes for males and females were 16 and 14, respectively, for aluminum bands; and 8 and 7, respectively, for the plastic bandettes. Both types of bands were purchased from the National Band & Tag Co., Newport,Kentucky. All marked chicks were banded with poultry wing bands punched through the patagium of the wing, and leg bands, age permitting. Some of the hens were fitted with very high frequency (VHF) radio transmitters purchased from S. Markusen, Cloquet, Minnesota. A harness arrangement fashioned from the plastic tubes that enclose the battery lead wires was used to attach the transmitters to the birds. This harness was patterned after the one first described by Marshall (1963). NAPA cold weather plastic tape (plastic electrician's tape) was used to fashion the neck loop. The battery, an Eveready E 502 mercury energizer, was soldered to the lead wires. These wires and part of the plastic tubing were wrapped around the battery until it was flush with the neck loop. The ends of the tubing were then passed back through the neck loop and the battery ,vas securely taped to the front of the neck loop (Fig. 1). After the bird's head was passed through the neck loop, the plastic tubes were passed back under the wings and through the loop at the rear of the transmitter, then tied in a surgeon's knot. Excess plastic tube was trimmed from each end and the entire knot and ends wrapped with tape. The instrumented birds were followed with a Markusen constructed, 12 channel, VHF tracking receiver used in conjunction with a hand-held antenna, also obtained from Markusen, or a vehicle-mounted antenna patterned after the hand-held antenna. DESCRIPTION OF AREA The study area is located in the northwest quarter of North Park, Jackson County, Colorado. It is bounded on the north by Independence Mountain, the west by Boettcher Ridge and Sheep Mountain, the south by the North Fork of the the North Platte River, and the east by the North Platte River. The exact boundaries of the area were somewhat flexible depending on bird movements. With the exception of the north end, the study area is surrounded by irrigated hay meadows. Most of the remaining area is rolling sagebrush hills, varying in elevation from 7,900 to 8,200 feet; however, higher elevations do occur on Independence Mountain. Gill (1965) gave a very detailed description of this study are~. The Bureau of Land Management sprayed four areas of sagebrush in 1965. An area of 1,180 acres (Gill 1965) was sprayed in strips 50 yards wide with unsprayed strips 150 yards wide between them. Another 484 acres (Gill 1965) was sprayed in strips of varying widths from 50 to 250 yards and each strip separated by 200 yards of untreated sagebrush. Two acreages were block �- 65 - TOP VIEW A BatterY Arc length from tape to battery is 55 mm. Arrows (A) are the tubes that continue back under the wings and tie through the loop at the rear of the transmitter. SIDE VIEW Battery Fig. 1. Transmitter harness shape and dimensions for female sage grouse. �- 66 - sprayed involving areas of 515 and 1,801 acres (Gill 1965). These 2 blocks are separated by approximately 1,600 acres of unspray~d sagebrush (Gill 1965). Figure 2 shows the general locations of these sprayed areas as well as 2 Crested wheatgrass (Agropyron cristatum) seedings, 1 Russian wildrye (Elymus junceus) seeding, and an area where the sagebrush was mechanically eradicated but not reseeded to grass. RESULTS AND DISCUSSION Abundance Strutting Ground Counts All of the strutting grounds on the study area have been located and named (Rogers 1964). For simplicity each strutting ground was given a code name (Table 1) and they will be referred to by code name throughout this report. The locations of these strutting grounds are shown on Figure 3. Three strutting grounds (SG-I, SG-9, and SG-lO) are located on strip sprayed areas and 2 strutting grounds (SG-2 and SG-5) are located on block sprayed areas. Table 1. Code names and marking in the Lake John area. color codes given to strutting Name of Strutting Code Name Ground grounds Color Code Cowdrey #2 SG- 1 None Cowdrey in SG- 2 Light Green Cowdrey ifr4 SG- 3 None Alkali Lake SG- 4 Yellow Monahan Draw SG- 5 Blue Wattenburg #2 SG- 6 None Wattenburg in SG- 7 None SG- 8 None SG- 9 Red Lake John Road #2 SG-10 None Boettcher SG-ll None SG-12 None Cowdrey #3 Boettcher Lake Junction Flats Lake John Road in �- 67 II ~ "II \\ N ,I i~ • 'I m Scale: o.5,"/1("J,/hl'; II \1 II S'praYp{i q § S'praypg' Str;p QJ CD D C!'('sipa' I !#IJf1tti9!'ASS .. "~ fllj(J f),-s/-(t'a' b"i not S@f>(1I,,1 Fig. 2. Lake John study area showing areas where sagebrush been controlled. has I �68 - N ,I \I II ~ Scale: I \I 1/ Fig. 3. Location o£ strutting grounds in the Lake John Area. 0.$,'/1,,';,/h7,: I �- 69 Strutting ground attendance is somewhat dependent upon the weather. The males were first to arrive, followed in 2 days by the females. The birds first began using the strutting grounds while snow still covered 75-90 percent of each ground. Extensive observations on SG-9 (Fig. 4) show the general attendance pattern of all the strutting grounds in the area. The decrease in numbers between April 4 and April 8 was due to a blizzard that covered the grounds with snow. The overall increase in numbers of birds visiting the grounds did not seem to be changed by the temporary decrease caused by the storm. In 1968 the peak in male attendance was from April 17 to April 30. The peak in female attendance was from April 18 until April 26. These peaks in attendance vary according to the severity of the winter. The winter prior to the 1968 breeding season was a comparatively severe winter so the peak in attendance was as much as 2 weeks later than the peaks observed during the 1963 or 1966 breeding seasons which followed more mild winters (Gill 1965, Carr 1967). The sex ratio of the birds visiting the strutting grounds was quite even when the maximum numbers of each sex were compared (Table 2). However, except for a short time during the peak in numbers of females visiting the ground, the males far outnumbered the females. The numbers of females counted on SG-4 and SG-6 may be lower than the maximum numbers of females actually visiting those strutting grounds. Due to the very deep snow this) year, no counts could be made on SG-4 from closer than one mile, until April 25, and this may have been after the peak in female numbers. SG-6 is located on a wide plateau that has many slight depressions and no actual high points. It also has relatively deep sagebrush for a strutting ground. For this reason, it is very difficult to make an accurate count of hens on this strutting ground. One day before my high count, Don Gore (Local Wildlife Conservation Officer) counted 145 birds on SG-6, -of which 49 could be identified as males. Table 2. Maximum numbers of sage grouse in each sex class observed strutting grounds in 1968. Strutting Ground Males Females on Unclassified SG 1 0 0 0 SG 2 2 0 0 SG 3 0 0 0 SG 4 58 32 0 SG 5 52 54 0 SG 6 36 19 0 SG 7 3 7 0 SG 8 2 19 0 SG 9 71 82 0 SG 10 0 0 0 SG 11 6 2 0 SG 12 1 3 22 Total 231 218 22 �- 70 - 90 9 /1 /1 75 60 ~ .~ ~ \. ~ 15 ;:) ~ 1 / Q / / \ ~ \ .)'0 0\ \ \ \ \ \ /5 / 9, ,, \ / \ / \ \ / \ \ v----0--0 \ / \ / 0 5 // /7 ~J 29 .5 /7 ,,?J 29 ff~ ~n/ L1ulto Fig. 4. 1968 attendance on strutting ground 9 (SG-9) based on the high count of each sex per observation day_ �- 71 - Total numbers of males in 1968 decreased from the 1967 population to about what they had been in 1966 (Table 3). The decrease on SG-4 was probably caused by the increase on SG-6. SG-6 is about 2 miles south of SG-4 and was clear of snow 1 to 2 weeks before SG-4. Birds that usually visit SG-4 probably used SG-6 this year; however, no observations of banded birds could be made in the deep vegetation that covers SG-6. Table 3. Comparison of 1965, 1966, 1967 and 1968 strutting based on maximum numbers of strutting males. ground censuses Year 1965 1966 1967 1968 2 ]j 9 9 10 2 4 53 47 69 58 5 1./ 52 54 59 52 6 0 2 12 36 7 0 0 1 3 8 0 6 5 2 ]j 52 97 81 71 10 ]j 0 6 9 0 11 0 13 15 6 12 0 0 0 1 Total 166 234 265 231 Strutting 9 Ground 1/ Strutting grounds located on block-spray "Jj Strutting grounds located on strip-spray areas. areas. Brood Counts Production seemed above average in 1968. The extensive brood counts made in 1965 and 1966 were not carried out in 1968 because more time was spent on other phases of the study. However, each of the 5 routes used in 1964, 1965, and 1966 was traveled twice between August 8 and August 27. The 2.7 miles traveled per bird observed indicated a lower overall population than the 1.8 miles per bird observed in 1966 (Carr 1967). The strutting ground counts on these 2 years were about the same and 1966 was also considered a "good" production year. The fewer miles traveled to observe each �- 72 - brood in 1968 (30.6) than in 1966 (31.2) (Carr 1967) indicated more broods in 1968. The brood size, from brood count routes, was slightly smaller in 1968 (3.7) than in 1966 (4.0) but higher than 1965 (3.4) (Carr 1967). In each case these brood size figures are from all broods counted, including those incompletely counted. The production indicated by the brood routes was good, but not as good as general observations seemed to indicate. When all of the broods of unmarked hens, observed from June 24 until September 9, 1968, are considered, there were 4.1 young per brood (Table 4). Relatively few broods were observed during the first 20 days in August when many of the brood route counts were being made. The vegetation in the meadows reaches its maximum height at this time and birds are very difficult to see from a vehicle when they are in the hay meadows. Since four of the five brood routes sample this meadow area, counts made in August will be relatively low. The first conclusion many people reach is that the birds had left the meadows; however, the radio frequency marked birds remained in the meadows throughout this time. Most of the hay meadows had been mowed by late August and the birds again became visible. Table 4. 1968. Observation dates of unmarked ComElete Count~ Young Brooded Date June 20-30 0 0 July 1-10 11-20 21-31 1 9 19 1 2 4 August 1-10 11-20 21-31 6 10 21 September 1-10 Total Harvest broods Ave. Brood Size on the Lake John Study Area, IncomElete Count Young Brooded 0 + Ave. Brood Size 15 3 5.0 1.0 4.5 4.8 10 14 7 4 4 2 2.5 3.5 3.5 1 2 4 6.0 5.0 5.2 0 0 19 0 0 5 3.8 14 3 4.7 0 0 80 17 4.7 65 18 3.6 Analysis The increase in production was also evident in the harvest (Table 5). The number of juvenile birds harvested increased 3 fold over 1967 and 2-3 fold over 1966. Part of this increase was due to the increased hunting pressure, �- 73 - but the percent juvenile birds in the bag also made a substantial increase. The harvest of adult females continued to be higher than the harvest of adult males, and higher than the strutting ground count ratios indicated. Part of this apparently high female to male ratio may be due to the hunter's ability to select for the smaller size of the female while hunting (Gill 1965). Estimates of population from "Lincoln Index" projections are questionable because the banded sage grouse were not randomly distributed through the population, the hunter harvest was not a random sample of the population, and some of the banded birds may not have lived until the hunting season (Gill 1965). This estimate is one of the few estimates of the total population; therefore it is used, but with the idea that it is a "rough" approximation of the total population. In 1968 there were 89 sage grouse banded on the study area prior to the hunting season. Nine of these banded birds were shot and reported at the check stations. This is a good indication of the number of banded birds harvested because nearly all the hunters hunting on the study area leave through these check stations. Using the "Lincoln Index", a population estimate of 5,063 was obtained. This estimate is quite likely too high since most of the birds banded were adult or subadult males and the males comprised the smaller percent of the harvest. Distribution and Movements General distribution can be determined by observing the relative population densities in all parts of an area. Movements can be determined by recording changes in these population densities or by observing actual movements of marked birds. In recent years, more reliability has been placed in movements determined from marked birds than in movements determined by changes in population densities. The one major problem resulting from the use of marked birds is lack of reobservations. For instance, in 1964 and 1965 a total of 107 sage grouse were tagged and released in this area, and only 32 were reobserved a total of 62 times (Carr 1967). This was with 2 observers each summer and 1 observer each spring, in addition to the local Wildlife Conservation Officers and ranchers. These reobservations give somewhat scant information on several birds. In 1968, a few females were instrumented with radio transmitters in an effort to get more detailed information on fewer birds. Females were chosen because the results could readily be applied to management situations and aid in making recommendations for sagebrush control. Marking Sage grouse have been trapped and banded on the strutting grounds each year since 1963. In 1968, 69 birds were marked and released on the strutting grounds (Table 6) and 15 more were trapped on non-strutting sites, tagged and released. All of the birds marked on non-strutting ground sites were marked with white bands and birds marked on strutting grounds were banded with colors according to the strutting ground (Table 1). Nine of the females trapped on strutting grounds were also radio frequency marked (RF marked) with transmitters (SG-4 = 2, SG-5 = 1, SG-6 = 1, SG-9 = 5). A tenth female (brooded) was trapped in the west strip-sprayed area and RF marked. �Table 5. Year Sage grouse check station information, North Park, Colorado. l/ Bag Hunters Limit Checked Hours Hunted Adult Cocks Adult Hens Percent Juvenile Adults Cocks Juvenile Hens Percent Juveniles Total Birds Birds Per Hunter Hours Hunted Per Bird 1963 3 492 2,460 62 150 42 113 181 58 506 1.03 4.86 1964 2 217 624 25 81 59 28 45 41 179 .82 3.49 '-l .j.:- 1965 5;.1 2 150 626 27 30 49 26 26 51 116 .77 5.40 1966 2 306 1,227 31 116 56 45 71 44 263 .86 4.67 1967 2 300 1,177 50 127 67 42 46 33 267 .89 4.41 1968 2 546 2,604 80 135 42 156 141 58 512 .94 5.09 II Based on Walden and Cowdrey check station data during opening weekends. ~I A one day season; hence only a one day check. �- 75 Table 6. Marking locations and age and sex classes of birds marked in 1968. Male Female Subadult Young Locations Adult Subadult Adult SG 4 9 2 1 1 0 SG 5 5(2)11 4 0 2 0 SG 6 5 4 1 3 0 SG 9 27(3) 11 5 0 0 4 0 10 11 6 10 Upland Sites (1) Total 47 (6) 21 11 Figures in parentheses indicate birds marked in previous years that were retrapped. Reobservations A marked bird provides no information unless it is reobserved, so I was constantly checking for markers whenever I saw sage grouse. Movements From Banded (only) Birds--During the entire spring and summer, marked birds, other than the RF marked hens, were observed only 6 times on areas other than strutting grounds. The movements involved in these 6 observations ranged in length from 300 yards to 8.0 miles (Fig. 5). All of the observations were on males. No effort was made to intensively study interstrutting ground movements since much work has already been done on that phase of sage grouse movements (Carr 1967, Dalke et al. 1960, Dalke et al. 1963 and Stanton 1958). In 19 observations of marked birds on strutting grounds, I saw no interstrutting ground movements. Movements From Band Returns--Movements of birds from hunting season band returns are often a better indication of hunter distribution than grouse movements. This seemed to be the case in 1968. Wildlife Conservation Officers Don Gore and Lloyd Triplet reported the heaviest hunting pressure to be in the northwest corner of the study area and this is where the majority of the band returns came from (Fig. 6). Movements Of RF Marked Birds--Due to the difficulty in trapping females on the strutting grounds, only 9, from 5 different grounds, instead of 12, from 1 ground, were RF marked before nesting. The instrumented birds were followed for a total of 432 days (Table 7). During this time they were located a total of 206 times. The RF marked hens were observed 107 times during the spring and summer, and located, but not actually seen, the remaining 99 times. Radios are often considered quite expensive, but in terms of dollars per reobservation or "location", it is much more economical to use radio telemetry equipment than to rely on chance sightings of marked birds. �76 - N Scale: o.5,."rJ:/h7,: II \I /j « \I u Fig. 5. Movements of marked birds reobserved in 1968. I I �77 N ). SC6Ie: 0.5,'/1(,,,,/117,; I Fig. 6. Moyements of birds as indicated by September hunting season band returns. I �--- ---- 78 - Distances from Strutting Grounds to Nests--Four of these RF marked birds were followed to their nests. The distances traveled from the strutting grounds to the nest sites (Table 8) were so variable and the sample size so small, statistical confidence limits on an average distance would be meaningless. While traveling through the sagebrush areas during the spring and summer, I found 7 other sage grouse nests from u~~rked hens (Fig. 7). The distances traveled from strutting grounds to these 7 nest sites were only estimates since it was not known which strutting grounds these hens cruae from. Few records of distances traveled to nest are present in the literature. Rqgers (1964) stated the nesting areas in Moffat County, Colorado, were 15-20 miles from the strutting grounds; however, some nesting did take place near the breeding grounds. Patterson (1952) reported hens tend to return to the same area to nest each year, and in one instance a marked hen visited a strutting ground 2 miles from her nest site. There were 4 other breeding grounds closer to her nest. The RF marked hens in this study all nested closer to the strutting ground on which they were marked than any other ground, with one exception. The female that traveled the farthest to nest was closer to SG-8 but this ground has been nearly abandoned in the past 9 years. The marked birds went an average of 2,580 yards, 9r 1.47 miles, to nest, while the nests of unmarked birds were an average of 3.7 miles from the "logical strutting ground". The distance to the "log_ ical strutting ground" was used because in some cases the nearest strutting ground had been nearly abandoned in recent years. A possible bias was introduced because much of my time was spent in the vicinity of the RF marked hen that nested in the far northwest corner of the study area, and therefore 5 of the 7 nests of unmarked birds were found in that area. The date the birds were instrumented introduced a variable with the marked hens. The birds marked first traveled farther than the ones marked late in the season. Hen number 9-2 was trapped on a strutting ground May 29, and located 1 day later, 75 yards from the trapping site on a nest with 6 eggs. It is doubtful that instrumented hen number 2-12, who traveled nearly 5 miles to nest, would visit the strutting ground after she had begun laying, as did hen number 9-2. . Nesting Sites--All of the nesting occurred in sagebrush. Two of the hens marked on SG-9 nested in the strip sprayed area, but in both cases it was in ~n untreated strip. In all but one case the birds preferred medium tall sage and relatively flat areas (Table 9). The average height of sagebrush over the nest cavity was 16.3 inches. Little preference for aspect was exhibited, but more birds nested on slopes facing from southeast.to west than slopes facing the other directions. Gill (1965) also found birds preferred the medium depth sagebrush. Brood Movements--Opinions vary as to how soon after hatching broods leave the nest site. Gill (1965) and Griner (1939) reported the broods stayed near the nest for approximate ly 2 wee ks before beginning their migration to the meadows. However, Lords (1951) thought wa t er limited sage grouse nesting distribution and Girard (1935, l38) ctated, "Chicks need water within a very few hours after they are hatched and they immediately begin their journey to their summer feeding grounds where water is plentiful." �- 79 - Table 70 grouse. Number of days signals were received from radio instrumented sage Bird Table 8. Days of Radio Contact Radio Channel Number Band Number 851 1 0 852 2 - 12 124 853 3 0 854 4 27 855 6 14 861 7 6 862 8 79 863 9 - 2 111 864 10 13 866 5 58 Total 432 Average 43.2 Distances from strutting grounds to sage grouse nests. UlUIlarkedBirds Marked Birds Yards Nearest Ground Miles ]) 3.3 ]j 2.4 300 ]) 2.2 75 1/ 2.1 8360 1584 2.1 1.3 1.1 Average 2580 1/ 1968 nest :1:./ Nest of a previous year 2.1 Logical Ground Miles Jj 5.8 :1:./ 4.6 :1:.1 lJ 3.1 1/ 1/ 4.5 45 J) :1:./ :1:.1 :1:./ 0 4.4 1.3 1.1 3.7 :1:./ II 1/ �- 80 - II ~ II Il \\ N Scale: as,.,,,·,t:/h7,; I [!] 1968 Nest, Marked Female ~ 1968 Nest, Unmarked Female (@] Old Nest, Unmarked Female Fig. 7. Locations of sage grouse nests found during 1968. I �- 81 Table 9. Sage grouse nesting sites. Sagebrush Depth Inches Aspect Percent Slope Active 1968 1..1 14 flat 0 Active 1968 1:/ 14 S 2-5 Active 1968 1..1 15 w 2-5 Active 1968 1..1 27 SE 20-30 Active 1968 12 N 5-10 Inactive 1968 13.5 W 1 Before 1968 21 E 3-4 Before 1968 20 S 5-10 Before 1968 17 S 5-10 Before 1968 8 flat 0 Before 1968 18 NW 3-4 Average 16.3 Nest 6 1..1 Radio Frequency marked birds' nests. Eggs from two of the RF marked hens hatched. One hen remained within 350 yards of her nest for 30 days before starting to the meadow. The other immediately started migrating to the meadow. One of the hens left the nest during the night or in twilight similar to what Griner (1939) found. The other hen left the nest with her brood between 06:55 and 16:38 MST. Migrations of ~ - 27 miles from the strutting grounds and nesting areas to summering areas have been reported (Carr 1967, Dalke et a1. 1963, Gill 1965, Girard 1935, Patterson 1952, and Rogers 1964). Gill (1965), Girard (1935) and Keller et al. (1941) all report sage grouse followed accessible waterways or stream bottoms. This was not the case in North Park during 1968. RF marked hen number 9-2 traveled straight west out of the strip sprayed area, up over a hill and into the rye field (Fig. 8). Her eggs hatched between 18:10 MST, June 25 and 08:05 MST, June 26. By 08:50, June 27, she had moved her brood 600-700 yards west of the nest. During the next five hours she moved her brood another 200-250 yards west. Two days after hatching she was 1.5 miles west of the nest. When the brood reached the rye field, they moved slower and seemingly without direction. This field had small irrigation ditches which provided available water. Six �82 - N 1/ II 1/ 'I \, 'I II II II II "ii •" Scale: 1\ ,I II II o.~/'n('J://n/: I q Summering Areas "~ --::-:::::::::.-::''''" ~ II 1\ Fige 8. Summer movements sage grouse. of 3 brooded and 3 unbrooded "" female I �- 83 - days after hatching, the brood had crossed 4 irrigation ditches, 1-4 feet in width, and were about 2.3 miles west of the nest. They spent most of the summer in this general area. RF marked hen number 2-12, on the other hand, took 4-5 days to move about 1.0 mile to the meadow in which her brood spent most of the summer. They did not begin this movement until the brood was 1 month old. RF marked hen number 5 was instrumented in mid-July in a strip sprayed area. Her brood was approximately 4 weeks old at that time. Twentyseven hours after marking, she and her brood had moved 300 yards southeast, into the small block sprayed area. They seemed to be following the top of a ridge at that time. About 18 hours later she and her brood had crossed California Gulch and were on a ridge in the variable-width strip spray area 1.4 miles east of their previous location. After watching her for the next 5 hours, it became evident she was following the ridge toward the meadows by the North Platte River. She had moved about 0.5 mile in this time. At that point I decided it would be more beneficial to keep her and her brood in the strip sprayed area by slight "herding" with the vehicle, than to follow her down the ridge. She crossed four more sprayed strips before I lost track of her 8 hours later at dusk. Her suspected path is shown between points A and B (Fig. 8), and her actual path is illustrated by the solid line. From 05:40 until 20:27 MST, July 15, 1968, she angled across 5 sprayed strips and 5 unsprayed strips (Table 10), and traveled nearly 2 miles. This distance may be greater than she would have traveled had I not been nearby in the pickup. I carefully marked her route as she crossed the strips, then paced the distances later. She crossed all of the sprayed strips encountered without any apparent hesitation. Even while crossing the sprayed strips, she was seldom more than 15 feet from a live sagebrush plant. Estimates of live sagebrush crown ranged from 0 to 30 percent in the sprayed strips. RF marked hen number 8 was an unsuccessful nester. Her nest, in deep sagebrush and well hidden, was destroyed by ground squirrels (Citellus richardsorrl.) , I was not able to plot her route to the meadow since I was wat ch Lng the broods most of the time. Use of Meadows--Hens that did not nest, or had their nests destroyed in the early stages of incubation, arrived at the meadows before the other females. RF marked hen number 10, who was assumed not to have nested, arrived at a meadow June 6 nearly a month ahead of the next marked bird observed in a meadow, RF marked hen number 9-2. Instrumented hen number 8 was third to arrive at the meadows on July ,12. RF marked hen number 5 arrived July 17 and number 2-12 did not arrive until August 6. I lost contact with female number 10 soon after she reached the meadow, but numbers 2-12 and 8 remained in the meadows for 22 and 19 days respectively, when contact with number 212 was lost, and number 8 died while .the battery was being changed. RF marked hen number 9-2 was in or very near the meadows for 77 days when her transmitter was removed, at the conclusion of the field work. During this time, she and her brood wandered back and forth through 2 square miles of meadow. After 39 days in about 80 acres of meadow area, instrumented hen number 5 began leaving the meadow occasionally, and moved back and forth between 2 meadows across a crested wheatgrass seeding. �- 84 - Table 10. Widths of sprayed and unsprayed strips crossed by female sage grouse number 5, and brood, on July 15, 1968. Width in Yards Strip Shortest Width Path Taken by Bird sprayed 116 122 unsprayed 160 180 sprayed 308 318 unsprayed 94 112 sprayed 178 466 unsprayed 144 172 sprayed 230 264 unsprayed 170 192 sprayed 204 236 unsprayed 154 188 Mowing of the hay in the meadows did not seem to force the birds to leave as reported by Gill (1965), because several birds were observed feeding in areas that had been mowed. However, killing frosts occur at this time, making the forbs less desirable; so as sagebrush becomes more important in the diet, birds begin to leave the meadows. Similar findings have been reported by Dalke et a1. (1960). No daily movements in and out of the meadows were observed. Birds were believed to have roosted in the meadows near the North Platte River and no movements in or out of the other meadows were observed this year. By the mid-September hunting move back into the sagebrush out the study area. season, the sage grouse were beginning to areas, and hunters scattered the birds through- �- 85 - LITERATURE CITED Carr, H. D. 1967. Effects of sagebrush control on abundance, distribution and movements of sage grouse. Colo. Game, Fish and Parks Dept. Proj. W-37-R-17, Work Plan 3, Job 8a. Job Compl. Rept. 106 p. Crunden, C. W. 1963. Age and sex of sage grouse from wings. Mgmt. 27(4):846-849. J. Wildl. Dalke, p. B., D. Bo Pyrah, D. C. Stanton, J. E. Crawford and E. Schlatterer. 1960. Seasonal movements and breeding behavior of sage grouse in Idaho. Trans. N. Am. Wildl. Conf. 25:396-407. Dalke, p. D., D. B. Pyrah, D. C. Stanton, J. D. Crawford and E. F. Schlatterer. 1963. Ecology, productivity and management of sage grouse in Idaho. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 27(4):811-841. Gill, R. B. 1965. Effects of sagebrush control on distribution and abundance of sage grouse. Colo. Game, Fish and Parks De~. Proj. W-37-R-l7, Work Plan 3, Job 8. Job Compl. Rept. 185 p. Girard, G. L. 1935. Life history, habits and food of the sage grouse (Centrocercus urophasianus). M. A. Thesis. Univ. Wyoming, Laramie. 153 p. Griner, L. A. 1939. A study of the sage grouse (Centrocercus urophasianus), with special reference to life history, habitat requirements, and numbers and distribution. M. S. Thesis. Utah State Ag. ColI., Logan. 111 p. Keller, R. J., H. R. Shepherd and R. N. Randall. 1941. Survey of 1941/ North Park, Jackson County, Moffat County, including comparative data of previous seasons. Colo. Game and Fish Dept. Sage Grouse Surv. 3:1-31. Lords, J. L. 1951. Distribution, ecology and population dynamics of the sage grouse in Utah. M. S. Thesis. Univ. Utah, Salt Lake City, 64 p. Marshall, W. H. 1963. Studies of movements, behavior and activities of ruffed grouse using radio telemetry techniques. Univ. Minnesota, Minneapolis, Prog. Rept. 30 p. (multilithed). Patterson, R. L. 1952. The sage grouse in Wyoming. Denver. 341 p. Sage Books, Inc., Rogers, G. E. 1964. Sage grouse investigations in Colorado. Fish and Parks Dept. Tech. Publ. 16. 132 p. Colo. Game, Stanton, D. C. 1958. A study of breeding and reproduction in a sage grouse population in southeastern Idaho. M. So Thesis. Univ. Idaho, Moscow. 87 p. .rl ./ IJ-, "1<.1. I' I Prepared by: {~v:?'':''-r!( A . /["-U-'..:, JJJ)F Bruce E. Poley 7 Student Assistant III J., ��- 87 April, 1969 JOB PROGRESS REPORT State of C~O~L~O~RA~D~O _ Pro ject No o, W_-_3_7_-R_-_2_2 _ Work Plan No. Job Title: Period Covered: 10 Game Bird Survey Job NOo__ ~l~ _ Hungarian Partridge Adaptability April 1, 1968 to March 31', 1969 Personnel: Harold M. Swope, Charlie Brown, Harry Dobbs, Bill Roland and Donald M. Hoffman. ABSTRACT Two-hundred and thirty six more Huns were released in Moffat County on April 30 and May 1, 1968, and 14 were-released in Routt County northeast of Hayden on April 30, 1968. Twenty follow-up mail questionnaires were sent in December, 1968 to landowners in Moffat County who answered the-1966 mail questionnaire. Thirteen of these were returned with 4 reported seeing approximately 130 Huns during 1968 in groups ranging from a few to over 100 birds. One hundred of this total were reported from an area over 55 airline miles from the Round Bottom release sites so it is extremely doubtful that the~e were Hun sightings. Follow-up landowner contacts were not made in 1968 due to project personnel changes, but are planned for the summer of 1969. �- 88 - RECOMMENDATIONS Efforts to appraise past releases through field searches and landowner interviews will be intensified during the next segment. Other potential Hungarian partridge habitat in Moffat County including sites on or near Isles Mountain southwest of Craig and Cedar Mountain northwest of Craig are recommended for releases using stock produced at the Fort Collins Wildlife Research Station. �- 89 - HUNGARIAN PARTRIDGE ADAPTABILITY Donald M. Hoffman p. S. OBJECTIVE To determine the ability of Hungarian partridge to establish reproducing populations in mixed brushland-wheatland habitat in Moffat County, Colorado. SEGMENT OBJECTIVES 1. 2. Introduce Hungarian partridge. Determine presence and dispersal of Huns. a. Landowner contact. b. Observations by Division officers (3) living in area. c. Mail questionnaires. d. Follow-up observations for verification. METHODS AND MATERIALS Twenty follow-up mail questionnaires were sent in December, 1968 to landowners in Moffat County who answered the 1966 mail questionnaire. Due to personnel changes, no landowner contacts were made during 1968. RESULTS AND DISCUSSION Two-hundred and thirty-six more Hungarian partridge produced at the Fort Collins Wildlife Research Station were released in Moffat County on April 30, and May 1, 1968 and 14 from the same source were released in Routt County northeast of Hayden on April 30, 1968. Figure 1 shows one of the Moffat County releases made in 1968. Table 1 lists all field releases of Hungarian partridge from 1964 through 1968. Location of these are shown in Figure 2. To date, 135 Huns have been released in the Douglas Lake area of LarL~er County, 471 in the Round Bottom area of Moffat County, and 14 northeast of Hayden in Routt County. Twenty follow-up questionnaires were mailed in December, 1968 to landowners in Moffat County who answered the 1966 mail questionnaires. The names of the landowners who were sent the 1966 questionnaires had been obtained by Harold Mo Swope from the County Assessors office in Craig. A sample copy of the personal letter and questionnaire are included with this report. These were sent with a copy of a photograph, a brief description of a Hun and an addressed, postage paid envelope. �<o o Fig. 1. Hungarian partridge release, Moffat County, May 1, 1968. (D. Domenick, photo). �91 R. 91W. T.7 N. .. '12 SCALE OF MILES j Fig. 2. Locations of Hungarian partridge releases, Moffat County, 1964 through 1968. �- 92 Table 1. Summary of Hungarian partridge field releases. Number Birds Date Source of Birds Release Area Oregon & Idaho (wild-trapped) Larimer County, Douglas Lake Sec. lT8N R69W Jan. & Feb., 1964 135 II Sub-total 135 March 28, 1964 40 Idaho (wild-trapped) Moffat County, Round Bottom Sec. 34T6N R92W March 23, 1965 124 Oregon (pen-raised) Moffat County, Round Bottom Sec. 33T6N R92W April 18, 1967 71 FCWRS (pen-raised) Moffat County, Round Bottom Sec. 2lT6N R92W April 30 and May 1, 1968 236 FCWRS (pen-raised) Moffat County, Round Bottom Sec. 29T6N R92W April 30, 1968 14 FCWRS (pen-raised) Routt County, Northeast of Hayden Sec. 35T7N R87W Sub-total 485 TOTAL 620 II Twenty-two birds (11 pairs) taken to Rocky Ford Experimental Bird Farm. An additional 51 were received from Oregon on October 6, 1965 and were taken to the Fort Collins Wildlife Research Station for experimental breeding purposes. �- 93 Thirteen of these questionnaires were returned (Table 2) with 4 individuals reporting seeing approximately 130 Huns during 1968 in groups ranging from a few to over 100 birds. The report of one-hundred Huns is from an area in northwest Moffat County which is northeast of Dinosaur National Monument. This area is at least 55 airline miles from the Round Bottom release sites so it is extremely doubtful that these were Hun sightings. The other 30 plus birds reported were from areas near the release sites. Follow-up landowner contacts are planned for the summer of 1969 along with field searches to secure observations where possible. !J ,J/ .. ;, /irc r-/ __'..,/;~ Prepared by . Oyi.-(lt.£,-{ YI1/'!-~;~/ Donald M. Hoffman Wildlife Researcher �- 94 Table 2. Landowner response to.1968 Hungarian partridge questionnaire, Moffat County, Colorado. Name of Landowner Response Approximate Location of Hun Sighting L. Elton Gent Observed 3 Round Bottom Steve Simos Estate by George Raftopoulos Observed 100 Twps. 9 & 10 R. 100, 101, and 102. Lowry Seely Observed 20-25 Williams Fork Harry L. Durham No response Harvey W. Rader No response Kermit I. Osborn No Huns observed Alex Urie No Huns observed Albert Camillett No Huns observed Lester W. Cox, Jr. No Huns observed Gordon C. Winn Observed few Raymond A. Krez No response H. G. Culverwell No Huns observed Lorence Ellgen No response Iva B. Haxton No response David W. Johnson No response Myrtle B. Van Dorn No Huns observed Richard H. McIntyre No Huns observed Gossard Inc. No response Craig Land and Dev. Co. by 1. P, Beckett No Huns observed Jacob Hamill No Huns observed Craig and Hamilton areas. �- 95 STATE OF COLORADO DEPARTMENT OF John NATURAL A. Love, DEf'N< [ MUH or ~!A ruRAL RESOUfKES Richard T. Eckles, Director Governor RESOURCES GAME, FISH AND PARKS COMMISSION DIVISION OF GAME, FISH AND PARKS Harry R. Woodward, Director 6060 Broadway Denver, Colorado 80216 Or osl Gor haz , Pr csidenl I"loyd GUll, Vice President l.eRoy Robson, Sccrctarv I lacry Combs, Memher C. M. r ur noaux, MerntJcr John E. Holden, Member O. K. Nic);:,<.;, Mr]mber William W. Rohinson, Mumbu r (;(d Slronq, Membcr Wildlife Research Stat p. O. Box 632 Fort Collins, Colorado 80521 December Suttle. Mcmbc!r i .i,'rlll 16, 1968 Dear Based upon encouraging reports of sightings, the Colorado Game Fish, and Parks Division has continued with its planting program of Hungarian partridge in Moffat County. We appreciate the interest shown by those who answered a questionnaire sent during 1967. We have enclosed another questionnaire which we hope you will complete return in a stamped, addressed envelope provided for your convenience. If you do not farm the land yourself, please relay the questionnaire the persons most likely to have observed these birds. Thank you for assisting Colorado. our effqrts to establish to this fine game bird in Sincerely, Harry R. Woodward, By: Donald M. Hoffman Wildlife Researcher DMH:mb Enclosure c.c. Director and Director �- 96 - HUNGARIAN PARTRIDGE QUESTIONNAIRE Name _ Address _ Check appropriate boxes: L 1 I have not seen any Hungarian partridge this year. LI I have seen Hungarian partridge this year. f I have positive I this year. knowledge of someone else having seen Hunggrian If you checked either of the last two boxes please How many Hungarian partridge did you see? Approximate date Huns were sighted. Approximate location continue partridge below. _ of sightings. Please list names and addresses partridge this year ~-----(Township, Range, Section -- if known) of other persons known to have seen Hungarian Comments: (Would help to know if birds were seen while cutting grain and if they appeared to be young birds.) _ �- 97 April, 1969 JOB PROGRESS REPORT State of. ~C~O~L~O~~~D~O _ Project Noo W_-_3_7_-_R_-_2_2 _ Game Bird Survey _ Job NOo__~2~ Work .P1an No. Job Title: 1_0 Hungarian Partridge Production Techniques Period Covered: Personnel: _ April 1, 1968 to March 31, 1969 Willis G. Mansfield, Lawrence A. Webster, Robert L. Schmidt, Harold M. Swope, and Donald M. Hoffman ABSTRACT A few more eggs (600 compared with 594), .more of which were fertile (451 compared with 441), were laid by 18 pairs of Hungarian partridge fed the standard 22 percent game bird breeder feed in comparison with 18 pairs fed a similar feed but having 28 percent protein •. A slightly higher percent hatch and a higher percent survival of chicks during the first 7 days were a1sd found with the standard 22 percent protein feed. Stimulighting had positive effect in increasing the number of fertile eggs laid and in increasing the percent hatch of fertile eggs for the birds fed the 22 percent protein feed. It was determined that the test comparing numbers of fertile eggs produced in a series of 8' X 8' pens with 8' X 16' pens was not valid since all the smaller pens (8' X 8') were located on the west side of the breeder house and received less light and warmth than the larger size pens (8' X 16') located on the east side. In two years study, the highest fertile egg production has been from the east facing pens on the south side of the breeder house. The direction in which each series of pens faced had an effect upon egg production. The highest number of eggs (445) were produced by 12 pairs of Huns in the series of 12 pens with an east facing exposure located in the south portion of the large breeding house area. Slightly fewer eggs (444) were produced by 12 pairs of Huns in the series of 12 pens with a west facing exposure, located in the south portion of the large breeding house area. The 12 pairs of Huns in the series of 12 pens with wire floors which are located away from the breeding house area produced 425 eggs and the 12 pairs of Huns in the series of 12 pens in the north portion of the large breeding house area produced 337 eggs. . �- 98 - RECOMMENDATIONS Present pen arrangement has resulted in poor tests for stimu1ighting effects, type of pen floors and pen sizes. A new series of experimental breeding pens would have to be designed and built or existing structures remodeled if valid tests of types of pen floors or pen sites are to be carried out. Stimu1ighting tests will be possible using the wire-floored series including the 3 wire-floored pens built for mountain quail breeding studies. During the 1968 tests, the breeding house, which is a converted nursery shade house was covered with snow fence sections except for the tops of pens number 23 and 24 and half of the top of pen number 22 from which these sections had been earlier removed. Because of the poor showing of the series of pens on the north portion of the large breeding pens in egg production in 1967 and 1968, it was decided to remove every other strip of snow fence from the top and sides (east and west) of the north end for the 1969 tests. This involves pen numbers 25 and 36. In addition, the snow fence sections over pen numbers 22, 23 and 24 were replaced for the 1969 test series. �- 99 - HUNGARIAN PARTRIDGE PRODUCTION TECHNIQUES Donald M. Hoffman Good progress was made in improving production techniques for Hungarian partridge at the Fort Collins Wildlife Research Station. From 51 pairs (102 birds) held for breeders in 1968, there were enough birds to use for breeders in the 1969 tests plus 629 surplus which were released in Moffat County southwest of Craig on April 19, 1969. Only 1967-hatch birds were used for breeders in 1968. The number of birds released in the field (629) in 1969 compares favorably with 250 released in 1968. p. S. OBJECTIVE To develop game farm production techniques for Hungarian partridge. SEGMENT OBJECTIVES 1. 2. 3. 4. To measure the effects of two levels of protein in the feed (22% vs. 28%) on: a. Egg production b. Egg fertility c. Egg hatchability d. Chick vigor for the first 7 days To compare fertile egg production of breeders held in 8' X 8' pens with those in 8' X 16' pens. To compare fertile egg production of breeders receiving normal light to those subjected to extra hours of light each 24-hour period. To measure the relationship of holding breeders on the ground and on wire to fertile egg production. METHODS AND MATERIALS The detailed arrangement of the Hungarian partridge breeding pens is shown in Figure 1. Pens 1 through 36 are located in an old nursery shadehouse and pens 37 through 48 are a separate series of experimental game bir~reeding pens. Table 1 lists the pen schedule for the various tests run in 1968. pair of Hungarian partridge was used in each pen. Protein One mated Levels in Feed Pens 1-6 and 19-48 were used to test the effects of levels of protein in the feed. Birds in even numbered pens were fed the standard game breeder feed containing 22% protein. Those in odd numbered pens were fed exactly the same feed, but containing 28% protein. Eggs were marked and placed in separate incubator drawers to facilitate determination of: (1) fertile eggs produced; (2) numbers of fertile eggs that hatched; (3) numbers of surviving chicks. Chicks were held separately in the brooder until they were 7 days of age to detect differences in survival. �- 100 - N It- 8 ~I i 31 32 33 34 --.IV II! ~I\ II! _ \ 1\ O[ 62' 82' ~ 36 35 \1\ LZ 92' ~G f 75'------------------4 ~ ~ i 39 l~O 41 42 43 L.J+ 45 L/) 47 48 __\ II _ '- \V _I-- \11 _'\11 _~ \ II_~\ V_ 37 38 Ground-floor-eel ,series Wire-floored I ~ Seri~s I r' I[ , / ('t\ (\1 to '.... 0 N ('·2 L --f1 I .~.- \ . , \,n 'I o-, c- M o;~::) r-I I 5 I 10 ~ I I I ., '/ r -"'. Fig. 1. Detailed arrangement of Hungarian partridge breeding pens. ~') f '.0 r-I ~ lJ"\ / ,--i --.:r 'D I-' (.:; I-' ,.".{ '/ '""'"", I .--\ IfoY" I o l~(:I r-' !--- f;.) 1\) I~.-;-)~ 'I 1 �- 101 - Table i , Pen schedule for Hungarian partridge, 1968. Protein Level 28% 22% Pen Nos. 1-6 Even Nos. 7-12 x 13-18 x Pen Size 8'X8' 8'X16' Lighting Extra Normal T x Odd Nos. T T Pen Floor Ground Wire x x x x x x T 19-24 Even Nos. Odd Nos. x 25-30 Even Nos. Odd Nos. x T T 31-36 Even Nos. Odd Nos. x T T 37-42 Even Nos. Odd Nos. (6'3" x 33') x T 43-48 Even Nos. Odd Noso (6'3" x 33') x T Key: T = Pen on Test; x= Pen not on Test. Size of Pens Pens 7-12 are the standard 8' X 16' size while pens 13-18 are 8' X 8'. Mated pairs were placed in each pen and egg records kept to ascertain whether pen size influenced fertile egg production. All of these birds were fed the standard 22% protein feed, received only normal light and were held on the ground. Eggs produced by birds in each pen on test were marked and numbers of fertile eggs produced and hatchability of eggs were determined. Stimulighting Birds in pens 1-6 and 19-24 received 2 hours of artificial light during each 24 hour period in addition to normal light. The extra light was provided during evenings, during the entire egg laying season. These birds were in standard size pens on the ground. Fertile egg production was recorded and compared with records from control pens 25-36 which received only normal light. Since even numbers pens on test were fed 22 percent protein feed and odd numbers were fed 28 percent protein feed, it was necessary to compare the even numbered pens with even and odd numbered pens with odd. Eggs produced by birds in each pen on test were marked and numbers of fertile eggs produced and percent hatch of fertile eggs were determined 0 Type of Floors Pens 25-36 have ground floors and pens 37-48 have wire floors. Otherwise birds in these pens were treated alike. Fertile egg production from the �- 102 - mated pairs placed in these pens was recorded and compared. Production from Huns in even numbered pens was compared with even, odd with odd, for the same reason given under stimulighting. Eggs produced by birds in each pen on test were marked and numbers of fertile eggs produced and percent hatch of fertile eggs were determined. RESULTS AND DISCUSSION Protein Levels in Feed Table 2 lists a comparison of numbers of eggs produced and percent hatch of eggs from breeder pairs in 18 pens using the standard 22 percent protein level of feed with breeder pairs in 18 pens using a similar feed but containing 28 percent protein. A few more eggs (600 compared with 594), more of which were fertile (451 compared with 441) were laid by those fed the standard 22 percent game bird breeder feed. A slightly higher percent hatch, considering both total eggs produced (54.33% compared with 54.03%) and fertile eggs produced (72.28% compared with 71 43%), was also found with the birds fed the standard 22 percent protein feed compared with the 28 percent protein feed. G Table 3 lists a comparison of chick survival during the first 7 days on these 2 different protein levels in the feed. All of the chicks from pens 7-12 and 13-18 fed 22 percent protein feed were combined in this test so that 680 chicks on this ration were used in comparison with 315 chicks on 28 percent protein feed. A slightly higher percent survival was found using the standard game bird breeder feed of 22 percent (84.71%) in comparision with the 28 percent protein feed (82.86%). Size of Pens Table 4 lists information on numbers of fertile eggs produced and hatchability of eggs from 6 pairs of breeders held in pens 8' X 16' and 6 pairs of breeders held in pens 8' X 8'. A total of 217 fertile eggs were laid by the breeders held in the larger pens compared with 191 fertile eggs from the breeders held in the smaller pens. Percent hatch of fertile eggs was 88.02 for the larger pens compared with 72.77 for the smaller pens. Station personnel noted that the breeders held in the larger pens appeared quieter and less nervous during periods of feeding and watering or gathering of eggs because of the additional room in which to move about. This may have contributed to the larger number of fertile eggs produced in the larger size pens. However, all of the smaller pens (8' X 8') are located on the west side of the breeder house and receive less light and warmth than the larger pens (8' X 16') which were located on the east side of the house. Over a 2-year period, egg production has been the highest from the series of east facing pens. Thus, the present pen arrangement does not allow for a very good test on various sizes of pens toward increased fertile egg production. �Table 2. Numbers of eggs produced and hatchability by Hungarian partridge on 2 levels of protein in feed, 1968. Number Infertile Eggs Number Fertile Eggs Number Hatched Percent Hatch (all eggs) Percent Number Hatch (fertile eggs) Pipped No. Dead Number Germs Culls Protein Level Number Pens Number Eggs Produced 22% 18 600 149 451 326 54.33 72.28 9 93 23 28% 18 594 153 441 315 54 03 71.43 10 103 13 Table 3. 0 Survival of Hungarian partridge on 2 levels of protein in feed, 1968. Number Chicks Lost 1st 7 days Number Chicks Survived 7 days Percent Survived (1st 7 days) Protein Level Number Pens Number Chicks Hatched 22% 24 680 104 576 84.71 28% 18 315 53 261 82.86 I-' 0 W Table 4. A comparison of egg production from Hungarian partridge held in different size pens, 1968. Number Infert i le Eggs Number Fertile Eggs Number Hatched Number Pipped No. Dead Germs Number Culls Percent Percent Hatched Hatched (total eggs)(ferti1e eggs) Number Pens Protein Percent Number Eggs Produced Large 8' X 16' 6 22 243 26 217 191 3 10 13 78.60 88.02 Small 8' X 8' 6 22 214 23 191 139 6 39 7 64.95 72.77 49 402- 9 49 20 72.21 80 88 Pen Size ~-"-----'-- Total 457 .. - ---- Average 330 -.-- .. 0 �- 104 - Stimulighting A comparison of numbers of fertile eggs produced and percent hatch of fertile eggs between 6 pens provided an extra 2 hours of light for each 24 hour period and 6 pens with normal light, all fed 22 percent protein feed, is listed in Table 5. A similar comparison is also made for 6 pens provided with an extra 2 hours of light for each 24 hour period and 6 pens with normal light, in which all birds were fed 28 percent protein feed. More fertile eggs were produced (169 compared to 126 for the 22 percent protein feed and 170 cOmpared to 129 for the 28 percent protein feed) with the use of stimulighting procedures. Percentage hatch of fertile eggs was higher (74.55 compared to 64.28) using stimulighting with the 22 percent protein feed but lower (67.64 compared to 89.92) using stimulighting with the 28 percent protein feed. From these figures it appears that stimulighting had a positive effect in increasing the number of fertile eggs laid and in increasing the percent hatch of fertile eggs of the birds fed 22 percent protein. The reason why a higher percent hatch was secured from the normal lighted pens compared with stimulighted pens in the 28 percent protein test is not known. A more valid test of stimulighting effects would be possible if pens were designed and arranged so that all pens received equal amounts of normal lighting and other factors were comparable. Such is not the case with present pen arrangements of the ground-floored pens. The wire-floored series of pens are better suited for extra lighting tests and will be used for this purpos~ starting in 1970. Type of Floors Table 6 lists a comparison of numbers of fertile eggs produced and percent hatch of fertile eggs from 6 pens with wire floors and 6 pens with ground floors using 22% protein feed. The same comparison is listed for 6 pens with wire floors and 6 pens with ground floors using 28% protein feed. More fertile eggs were produced in the 6 wire-floored pens using 22 percent protein feed than the ground-floored pens (156 compared with 126) and more fertile eggs were also produced in the 6 wire-floored pens using 28 percent protein feed than the ground-floored pens (142 compared with 129). The ground-floored pens used in this test were all located in the north portion of the old shadehouse which has been the area of poorest egg production in 2 years of tests. Exposure to sunlight, size of pens, and amount of shading used are not the same between the pens with wire floors and the pens with ground floors so this cannot be considered a good test. Ground-floored pens of construction and size similar to the wire-floored pens are required for a better test. Since experimental breeding pens for mountain quail and holding pens for tinamou are more urgently needed, it will not be possible to build these facilities for several years. Prepared by �Table 5. A comparison of eggs produced by Hungarian partridge provided 2 hours of extra light during each 24 hour period with those receiving normal light. Treatment St imulighted Protein Levels 22% Number Eggs Number Pens Produced 6 218 Number No. fertile Infertile Eggs Number Produced Hatched Eggs 49 169 126 Percent Percent No. Number Dead No. Hatch Hatch (All eggs) (Fertile eggs) Pipped Germs Culls 57.80 74.55 3 35 5 I-' 0 VI Normal Light 28% 6 214 44 170 115 53.74 67.64 7 43 5 22% 6 177 51 126 81 45.76 64.28 5 30 10 28% 6 160 31 129 116 72.50 89.92 1 10 2 �Table 6,. A comparison of eggs produced by Hungarian partridge held on wire with those held on the ground, 1968 Treatment Percent Protein Level Number Pens Number Eggs Laid 22 6 205 Number Infertile Eggs Number Fertile Eggs Number Hatched 156 119 Percent Percent No. Hatch Number Dead No. Hatch (All Eggs) (Fertile Eggs)Pipped Germs Culls On Test Wire floors Ground floors 49 58.05 76.28 1 28 8 28 6 220 78 142 84 38.18 59.15 2 50 6 22 6 177 51 126 81 45.76 64.28 5 30 10 28 6 160 31 129 116 72.50 89.92 1 10 2 22 6 243 26 217 191 .. 3 10 13 22 6 214 23 191 139 - - 6 39 7 Not on Test Ground floors t-' 0 0\ �April 1969 - 107 - JOB PROGRESS REPORT COLORADO .------~~~~~------------ State of Project Noo W_-_3_7_-_R_-_2_2 Work Plan No ., Job Title: 1_2 Game Bird Survey _ _ Job Noo 10 --------------------------------- Relationships of the Productivity and Distribution on the Uncompahgre Plateau to the Environment. Period Covered: of Wild Turkeys April 1, 1968 to March 31, 1969 P. S. OBJECTIVES 1. 2. 3. 4. To determine the size, distribution, and productivity of the wild turkey population on the Uncompahgre Plateau. Record movements of wild turkeys and determine how environmental factors affect these movements. Determine the sex and age structure of the turkey kill on the Uncompahgre. Plateau to provide estimates of total harvest and size of the turkey population. Determine the vegetative types present on the wild turkey summer and winter range and the species compOSition and abundance of food producing species within each type. Also determine the elevation, describe topography, and record certain climatic factors on part of the better turkey summer and winter range. SEGMENT OBJECTIVES To compile, analyze, summarize, and publish information. Progress Field work was completed on October 20, 1967. All data have been summarized, and most data have been analyzed. A manuscript containing these data and results from Work Plan 12, Job 14 is about 2/3 completed. Future Plans The manuscript will be finished in Segment 23. in the form of a technical bulletin. Prepared by Publication will probably be ~~_~~~v~::f--'--~-?2-!~~.~--~--A-(~.. -Gary Myers \... Wildl~fe Researcher ��April, 1969 - 109 - JOB FIN..o\L REPORT State of COLORADO ~----~~~~------------- Project Noo W_-_3_7_-_R_-_2_2 Work Plan No 0._1_2 Job Title: _ Game Bird Survey Job Noo 12 .------------------------------- Wild Turkey Roost Study ------------~--------~~-------------------------------- Period Covered: Personnel: _ April 1, 1968 to October 31, 1968 Donald M. Hoffman ABSTRACT An article covering results of this study was published as follows: Hoffman, D. M. 1968. Roosting sites and habits of Merriam's turkeys in Colorado. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 32(4):859-866. I) 2L . . / 1/- . -: '~'/i/!' f i ,,/ Prepared by.. i-{·"/(,.;~c4 Ifl,< t "c .. --Y;;;.:~. ..,.-;..~ Donald M. Hoffman ,/,:,: Wildlife Researcher ��April 1969 - 111 - JOB FINAL REPORT State of COLORADO ------~~~~~------------ Project Noo W_-_3_7_-_R_-~2_2 Work Plan NOo. ~1~2~ Game Bird Survey _ _ Job No •. ~13~· Job Title: _ Experimental Habitat Improvement for Wild Turkeys -----~----------------~~------------------~-------------- Period Covered: Personnel: April 1, 1964 to March 31, 1969 E. J. Bechaver, J. F. Cordova, H. R. Jones, J. A. Leslie, D. W. Minnich, C. A. Moser, T. L. Ortiz, R. Ottersberg, D. F. Reed, C. Reichert, J. Serra, W.D. Snyder, and several ranchers assisted with various aspects of the study. ABSTRACT The purpose of this study was to compare the effectiveness of food plots and supplemental feeding stations in increasing turkey populations and harvests. The objective was. only partially obtained. Supplemental feeding stations used for 4 winters and a S-acre food plot used for 2 winters were equally effective in holding and maintaining wintering populations. An increase in the turkey population occurred within the study area from 309 in the ~redevelopment period of 1963-64 to 382 in 1967-68. The turkey kill within Game Management Unit Number 85 increased from 44 birds in 1964 to 120 in 1967. The use of supplemental feeding stations and food plots clearly resulted in concentrating wild turkeys during the wintering periods and to some extent during the open hunting seasons. Concentrating turkeys on wintering grounds did not appear to increase predation and no evidence of disease outbreaks was found. �- 112 - RECOMMENDATIONS A serious drawback of this tudy has been that the true value of the developments cannot be determined unless like information be secured for a similar area without developments. Although controls were established within the extensive study area, the wide ranging habits of the wild turkey limited their use as such. When further studies of this nature are to be conducted, at least two discrete wild turkey populations, based upon winter range delineations, should be selected as development and control study areas. �- 113 - EXPERIMENTAL HABITAT IMPROVEMENT FOR MERRIAM'S TURKEYS Donald M. Hoffman The purpose of this study was to compare the effectiveness of experimental habitat improvement measures consisting of supplemental feeding stations using baled oat hay and whole grain or food plots planted to cultivated oats in increasing'wild turkey populations and harvests. Population dynamics and kill trends were measured for a 4-year period following a I-year predevelopment period. The study was scheduled to continue for at least 2 more years, but was discontinued with the assignment of the principal investigator to Fort Collins in August, 1968. Need for Study The wild turkey is not usually considered to be cyclic in nature, however, populations in several of Colorado's better ranges have declined for un~ known reasons since the start of the wild turkey investigations in 1940. This study was initiated in 1964 to determine whether a shortage of natural foods on critical winter ranges was a factor contributing to this situation. The Problem Major habitat changes are known to have occurred in Colorado's wild turkey range since historical days, particularly within winter ranges. These changes have largely resulted from man-induced practices such as cultivation, timber operations, livestock operations, and other land-use practices. Past food habits studies indicate a heavy reliance upon grasses, mast, berries, and small grains (Hoffman, 1962). Due largely to weather factors and available food, they prefer to over-winter in an elevational belt ranging mainly from 7,500 to 8,600 feet, although some range as low as 7,000 feet. This elevational belt (7,500 to 8,600 feet) is also normally used as summer pasture for domestic livestock (cattle mostly) and winter range for deer and elk. Competition for available food on these ranges is often keen and may become serious on overgrazed livestock ranges. P. S. OBJECTIVE To compare the effectiveness of food plots and supplemental in increasing turkey harvest. feeding stations �- 114 - Q) H ,.0 ,.0 r-I e-, a eo Q) ::l ,.!G H .w �- 115 - METHODS AND MATERIALS Annual population levels were determined primarily through winter period flock counts and sex-ratio counts within the study area. Reports from individuals considered to be reliable were also used to some extent where counts could not be obtained. Annual production was determined by securing brood counts during the summer. Numbers of turkeys and sex-ratios were recorded during the winter periods in the vicinity of feeding stations and food plots. Periods of use of feeding stations and food plots were also recorded. Annual hunter checks were conducted within the study area and data collected compared with Game Management Section harvest information. DESCRIPTION OF AREA The study area was selected as being representative of some of the better historical ranges in Colorado. The study area consisted of land bordered by Colorado Highway 69 and the Huerfano River Road on the north, U. S. Highway 85-87 on the east, Colorado Highway 12 and the Abbotts Creek Road on the south, and the top of the Sangre de Cristo Range on the west. Based upon completed movement studies on Merriam's turkeys in Colorado (Myers, 1967) and New Mexico (MacDonald, 1963), it was assumed that even in an area as extensive as this, there would be intermingling between flocks from inside and outside the study area. Summering flocks were observed moving back and forth between the study area and the South Trinchera Ranch located on the west side of the Sangre de Cristo Range. Considering winter range, however, the study area constitutes a relatively discrete wild turkey population. Figure 1 shows the study area, which is located in western Huerfano and Las Animas counties in south central Colorado within historical range. Merriam's turkey range (Fig. 2) is mostly limited to the area between 7,000 feet and 11,000 feet elevations and approximates 900 square miles. The area between the 7,000 and 8,600 feet contours is considered to be primarily winter range and approximates 560 square miles. The area between the 8,600 and 11,000 feet contours (or between the 8,600 feet contour and the top of the Sangre de Cristo Range where this is less than 11,000 feet) is primarily summer range and approximates 340 square miles. Some of the wild turkeys remain at lower elevations yearlong, but the majority are believed to move to higher areas to summer. Figure 3 shows precipitation patterns within the study area as adapted from a map prepared by the Colorado State Planning Division with information from the U. S. Weather Bureau. �- 116 - N 1 , \ STUDY AREA o 5 10 SCALE' M IL!S Trinidad Figure I. Map of the study a rea. �- 117 - N Wint.r Ran9' 7,000 ft. to 8,600 ft 560 Sq. miles Summ.r Ran9' 8,600 ft to 11,000f or top of San9re de Cristo Ran9t 340 Sq. miles Winter Fi9ure 2. Extent of summer and winter ran911 within extensive study elrea. Elevations adopted from ~ashlngton. o. C. 1959. .•. Includes Ronqe " year long ran9' top09raphic mop prepared by Geol09ial Survey. for sam. birds. �- 118 - = o C\J -o ro N FiQure3. Distribution of precipitation by Colorado State PlanninQ Division. within study area as adapted from a map prepared Data from U.S. Weather Bun au. �- 119 - The Apishapa, Cucharas, Huerfano and Purgatoire rivers with numerous tributaries drain the study area. The topography is almost entirely mountainous, varying from foothills to several peaks above timberline in elevation. Distinct vegetative zones found within the Merriam's turkey range include pinon-juniper, ponderosa pine and spruce-fir. RESULTS AND DISCUSSION Populations Annual population levels were basically determined through winter census of birds on wintering grounds or in the vicinity of food plots, count of flocks located by searching other areas,or landowner reports, and sex-ratio counts in conjunction with winter counts and summer brood counts. A serious drawback of this study has been that the true value of the developments cannot be determined unless like information be secured for a similar area without developments. Although controls were established within the extensive study area, the wide ranging habits of the wild turkey limited their use as such. Wintering Period Flock Counts Winter counts were made in the vicinity of baled oat hay feeding stations, food plots, and elsewhere within the extensive study area. Reports from individuals considered to be reliable were also used for areas where no counts could be secured. Developmental areas consisted of 5 natural wintering sites where supplemental feeding stations using baled oat hay and whole grain were provided during the winter periods. Control areas consisted of 5 natural wintering sites left in a natural condition. The experimental food plot located in Sarcillo Canyon is not included with the supplemental feeding station developments since it was in operation for only the last 2 winters of the study. Table 1 lists a comparison of wintering populations by periods. . Sixteen different wintering areas selected by wild turkeys were recorded within the extensive study area of approximately 900 square miles of range. Figure 4 shows the approximate location of all known wintering grounds within the study area. Figure 5 shows locations of developmental and control sites. Figure 6 shows trend in population between the 5 developmental sites and 5 control sites. Sex-Ratio Counts Numbers of males (young and adults) and females (unclassified), recorded whenever birds were observed at close range in conjunction with winter counts, are shown in Table 2.While sex of the birds and young or adult males could be readily identified at close range by general appearances, young and adult hens could not be determined. All hens identified are listed as unclassified hens for this reason. �Table 1. A comparison of wild turkey wintering populations in sixteen areas, by years. Winter Area Period 1963 -64 1964-65 1965-66 1966-67 1967-68 20 30 14 11 20 13 60 0 9 31 20 70 0 45 11 15 32 12 26 44 56 25 0 24 45 95 113 146 129 150 Deve1.£E.menta1 Middle Creek E. Indian Creek Cucharas River Wahatoya Canyon Bear Creek Mesa N. Trujillo Creek-Mavricio Canyon Sub-total Control I Huerfano River-Mosca Pass Pass Creek Santa Clara Creek Wilkins Creek-Whiskey Creek North Fork Sub-total Other . Sarc i.Ll.o Canyon Burro Canyon Del Aqua Canyon Apishapa River Abbotts Creek-Duling Creek Het Canyon Sub-total TOTAL t-' 10 4 11 17 17 18 0 10 10 0 14 7 0 0 7 12 7 0 9 0 13 2 0 16 0 59 38 28 28 31 16 14 62 13 50 0 107 0 13 8 62 0 0 0 120 0 63 10 76 0 102 0 60 0 73 0 70 8 50 0 155 190 193 238 201 309 341 367 395 382 1'-' 0 �121 Fig. 4. Location of major Merriam's turkey wintering areas. �122 T.26S. <0' r. 30$. R73W. R.72W. lOP-.71 W. t; 32 S N ro T.33S T.34 S T.34S. R.70W. R.69W. 1-1.67 W. ro' Key: (f) Site of supplemental feeding station () feeding station control Site of supplemental I-I Site of cultivated Fig. 5. Location ;j. oat food plot of developmental and control sites. GPO B5721~ �- 123 - 160 140 Development areas 120 .,•.. e~ 60 z " . <, <, <, 40 Control areas --- -----20 1963-64 1964-65 1965-66 Winferi Figure 8. Winter populations of 1966-67 1967-68 no Period Merriam's turkeys, 1963-64 to 1967-68. �Table 2. Sex-ratio counts of Merriam's turkeys. Wintering Mature Juvenile Unclassified Period Toms Toms Hens 1963-64 30 5 1964-65 29 1965-66 Total Number Unclassified Birds Flocks Birds/Flock Sex-Ratio 70 7 112 8 14 50 males: 100 females 34 147 31 241 8 30 43 males: 100 females 25 25 135 17 202 5 40 37 males:lOO females 1966-67 54 25 172 144 395 11 36 46 males:lOO females 1967-68 44 38 157 143 382 14 27 52 ma1es:lOO females Total 182 127 681 342 1,332 46 29 44 males:lOO females Average 9 Indicated ""'"' tv .p-. �- 125 - Although considerable variation in numbers of males per 100 females was found by years, these did not vary more than an average of 8 males per 100 females from a mean of 44. Variations in indicated sex-ratios may have been due to differences in sample sizes obtained, differences in numbers of birds which could be classified in relation to total birds observed, or possibly actual differences in sex-ratios occurred by periods. Brood Counts A summary of brood count information for the period 1964 through 1968 is listed in Table 3. Average brood sizes did not vary greatly from the mean of 6.1 during the 5-year period, but numbers of broods tallied showed much greater variation ranging from a low of 21 to a high of 41 (mean 31.6). The variation in numbers of broods is thought to affect reproduction levels more than sizes of broods. Although less time was spent in control areas than in developmental each summer, about equal time was spent each year in overall brood counts. Seasonal Distribution Observations of locations of spring and fall season kills, nesting Sites, brood rearing, and wintering flocks were maintained throughout the study. Table 4 summarizes the spring, summer and early fall observations and Table 5 lists the winter period observations by years. Approximate elevations of the various vegetational zones and communities, based upon altimeter readings secured along 5 routes, are listed in Table 6. The ponderosa pine vegetational zone is clearly the most preferred type used by Merriam's turkeys within this study area, based upon numbers of observations recorded. Flocks may range down into the pinon-juniper zone during periods of heavy snow cover or during years of good pinon nut crops. Most birds are believed to range into the upper ponderosa pine zone or above (into the spruce-fir zone) during the spring and summer months. Clearings, whether natural or man-made, hold a definite attraction for Merriam's turkeys during all seasons of the year, but are probably of most importance during the feeding, nesting and brood rearing periods. Based upon an inspection of aerial photographs of 5 better nesting and brood rearing areas, clearings comprised from 25 to 45 percent of the total land area and forestorbrush1and made up the remainder. Percent of land area in clearings varied by area due to natural variation of habitat. A regular seasonal altitudinal movement of birds occurred from the Copper King Gulch wintering ground at a mean elevation of 8,250 feet toward the top of the Sangre de Cristo Range at a mean elevation of 9,500 feet. It appeared that weather was the controlling factor in time of break-up of wintering concentrations and movement toward nesting ranges. This flock usually dispersed and left the wintering ground in late March or early April, depending upon the weather, and some birds ranged on or near the top of the Sangre de Cristo Range from late April to mid-May, depending largely upon snow melt conditions in the higher area. �Table 3. Brood counts of Merriam's turkeys. Number Number Average Hens with broods Poults Brood Size Year Type of Area 1964 5 Dev , areas 5 Cont. areas Other areas 13 5 20 Sub-total Average 38 5 Dev. areas 5 Cont. areas Other areas 7 2 12 48 13 59 21 120 1965 Sub-total Average 1966 5 Dev. areas 5 Cont. areas Other areas Sub-total Average 1967 1968 TOTAL 5-yr. Average 92 32 132 -- 7.1 6.4 6.6 256 6.7 -- 6.9 6.5 4.9 5.7 13 7 21 75 39 133 41 247 -- 5.8 5.6 6.3 6.0 5 Dev , areas 5 Cont. areas Other areas 7 5 15 Sub-tota 1 Average 5 Devo areas 5 Conto areas Other areas Sub-total Average 27 11 0 20 31 36 31 78 -- 5.1 6.2 5.2 145 68 133 -201 5.4 6.2 6.7 6.5 158 31.6 969 194 6.1 f-' N 0\ �Table 4. Summary of spring, sunnner,and early fall periods Merriam's turkey distribution checks. 1/ Number '1:./ Observations Year 1964 Sub-total Range Mean 1965 Sub-total Range Mean 5 2 27 4 19 3 60 Spring gobbler season kill locations (May 2-12) Nesting site locations Brood rearing locations Grown birds observed locations Field sign locations Fall season kill locations (Octo 3-11) Mean Range Elevation (ft) (ft) 7,800 to 9,500 9,250 to 9,800 7,~00 to 10,200 8,100 to 9,300 7,900 to 10,050 7,200 to 7,800 8,650 9,550 8,400 8,950 8,850 7,600 7,200 to 10,200 8,650 2 3 17 11 49 5 87 Spring gobbler season kill locations(Apr.10-18) Nesting site locations Brood rearing locations Grown birds observed locations Field sign locations Fall season kill locations (Oct. 2-10) 7,800 to 8,050 8,700 to 9,300 7,500 to 9,500 7,700 to 10,500 7,700 to 10,500 7,200 to 9,200 7,950 8,900 8,200 8,200 8,750 8,100 7,200 to 10,500 8,550 1966 Sub-total Range Mean Type of Data Elevationa1 2 25 15 33 4 79 No spring gobbler season held in 1966 Nesting site locations Brood rearing locations Grown birds observed locations Field sign locations Fall season kill locations (Oct. 1-9) 8,800 to 10,500 7,400 to 10,050 7,500 to 10,400 7,200 to 11,100 7,200 to 9,200 9,650 8,200 8,050 8,900 8,200 7,200 to 11,100 8,600 I-' N -...J �II Table 4. Summary of spring, summer, and early fall periods Merriam's turkey distribution checks (continued). Number Observations Year 1967 Sub-total Range Mean 1968 Sub-total Range Mean 3 4 17 11 18 4 57 Type of Data '!:.I Spring gobbler season kill locations(Apr.29-May 7) Nesting site locations Brood rearing locations Grown birds observed locations Field sign locations Fall season kill locations (Oct.7-l5) E1evationa1 Mean Range Elevation (ft) (ft) 7,900 to 9,200 7,000 to 8,250 7,200 to 8,600 7,300 to 9,400 7,400 to 10,300 7,300 to 9,400 8,550 7,750 7,950 8,500 8,600 8,050 7,200 to 10,300 8,250 6 3 19 9 7 5 49 Spring gobbler season kill locations(Apr.27-May 5) Nesting site locations Brood rearing locations Grown birds observed locations Field sign locations Fall season kill locations (Oct.5-l3) 7,600 to 9,200 7,500 to 8,000 7,500 to 10,300 7,700 to 19,000 7,800 to 9,200 7,300 to 9,350 8,200 7,750 8,250 8,900 8,800 8,100 7,300 to 10,300 II Nesting site locations - includes harem flocks observed or nesting hen field sign observed; Brood rearing locations - includes locations where broods observed or reported; Field sign locations - includes observations of droppings, tracks, shed feathers, scratchings, or reports. ~I Period early May to late September except for open seasons where dates are listed. 8,400 t-' N 00 �Table 5. Period Sunnnary of late fall and wi.nter peri.odsMerriam's turkey distribution checks. ]j E1evationa1 Mean Number Range Elevation Observations (ft) (ft) 7,200 to 8,600 7,900 1963-64 25 1964-65 21 7,200 to 8,700 8,050 1965-66 16 7,200 to 8,500 8,050 1966-67 13 7,200 to 8,700 8,100 1967-68 14 7,250 to 8,700 8,000 5 Yr. Ave. 18 7,200 to 8,700 8,000 t-' II Period December 1 to March 15. N 1.0 �Table 6. Approximate elevations of vegetational zones and communities within study area. l/ Vegetational Vegetational Zone Community Range in Elevations 2/(ft) - Pinon-Juniper Below 6,000 to 8,600 Pinon-Juniper-Gambel oak Ponderosa pine 7,100 to 8,600 7,200 to 9,500 Ponderosa pine-Gambel's oak 7,200 to 9,500 Ponderosa pine-Aspen Ponderosa pine-Douglas fir-White fir 8,000 to 9,500 7,500 to 9,500 8,200 to timberline Blue spruce - Aspen 8,200 to 10,000 Lodgepole pine (limited areas only) 9,600 to 10,000 Engelmann Spruce-Alpine fir-Aspen 10,000 to timberline Bristle cone pine (limited areas only) 9,400 to 11,100 t-' Spruce-fir Alpine 11,500 and above 1/ Based upon altimeter readings secured along 5 routes. 1/ Elevations were found to vary as much as 1,000 feet according to wet or dry site conditions. elevations are therefore listed. Average w 0 �- 131 Spring Season Kill Locations Spring seasons on bearded turkeys were held in 4 of the 5 years of the study (Table 7). Dates varied by year from mid-April to early May. Of a total of 25 birds where kill locations were recorded through hunter bag checks, 15 (60%) were killed on typical winter ranges and 10 (40%) were killed on intermediate OI summer range. Most birds recorded (21 out of 25) were killed in a ponderosa pine-Gambel's oak community in the ponderosa pine zone. Two were killed in a ponderosa pine-aspen community in the ponderosa pine zone, and 2 were killed in a lodgepole pine community in the sprucefir zone. All of the developments (5 supplemental feeding stations) and the experimental food plot were located on winter ranges. Thirteen of the 15 birds killed on winter ranges were taken in close proximity (usually within 1 mile) of developmental or food plot sites. Number of hunters contacted (Table 13) for the spring seasons held in 1964, 1965, 1967, and 1968 (no season in 1966) shows very light hunting pressure for 1964 and 1965 and increased overall hunting pressure for 1967 and 1968. The increase in numbers of hunters contacted (from 19 in 1964 to 106 in 1968) was due primarily to the increase in number of hunters on the Spanish Peaks Management Area following State purchase and management starting in 1966. Hunting pressure on other areas remained very light during 1967 and 1968. Weekend bag checks of hunters on the Spanish Peaks Management Area were obtained during 1967 and 1968 and other known turkey hunting areas were checked as personnel and time permitted. Most birds killed on the Spanish Peaks Management Area were taken in the hills which surround the cultivated oat food plot, but no birds are known to have been killed on the food plot proper. It is believed the food plot concentrated the birds and held flocks prior to the opening of the spring seasons of 1967 and 1968. Spring harvests were low because of the difficult hunting conditions encountered during most springs and many birds had left the lower winter ranges and were ranging toward intermediate or summer ranges. The gobblers remaining on or near wintering areas were easiest to find because these lower areas are most accessible during the spring. The mean elevation for all locations was 8,350 with kills recorded as high as 9,500 feet. Fall Season Kill Locations Regular fall seasons have been held from 1949 through 1968 within the study area. Locations of known kills from 1964 through 1968 are listed in Table 8. Of a total of 136 turkeys killed at 20 locations, 122 (90 percent) were killed in typical winter ranges in ponderosa pine-Gambel's oak vegetative communities, and 14 (10 percent) were killed in intermediate or summer ranges in ponderosa pine-aspen vegetative communities. The mean elevation for all locations was 8,050. Kills were recorded as high as 9,400 feet elevation. �Table 7. Spring season kill locations by years. Dates and Year Drainage Number and Sex Killed Approx. Elev. Vegetative Type.!/ Type of Range May 2-12, 1964 Cucharas River Id lewild Canyon N. Trujillo Creek Sarcillo Canyon Tracy Canyon 1 M 1 M 1 M 1 M 1 M 9,300 9,500 8,100 7,800 8,600 Pipo-Potr Pipo-Pifl-Potr Pipo-Quga Pipo-Quga Pipo-Quga Intermediate or Summer Intermediate or Summer Winter Winter Intermediate or Summer Apr. 10-18, 1965 Middle Creek Sarcillo Canyon 1 M 1 M 8,050 7,800 Pipo-Quga Pipo-Quga Intermediate or Summer Winter Middle Creek Sarcillo Canyon Spring Creek 2 M 5 M 1 M 8,500 7,900 9,200 Pipo-Quga Pipo-Quga Pipo-Potr-Pico Intermediate or Summer Winter Intermiediate or Summer Burro Canyon Burro Canyon North Fork N. Trujillo Creek Sarcillo Canyon Spring Creek 1 F(bearded) 1 M 2 M 3 M 2 M 1 M 7,600 7,600 9,200 7,800 7,800 9,200 Pipo-Quga Pipo-Quga Pipo-Quga Pipo-Quga Pipo-Quga Pipo-Potr-Pico Winter Winter Intermediate or Summer Winter Winter Intermediate ot Summer Total 25 (16 locations) No season 1966 Apr. 29-May 7, 1967 Apr. 27-May 5, 1968 Range 7,600-9,500 Mean 8,350 h/ See Appendix for key to species abbreviation. I-' w N �Table 8. Fall season Dates and Years kill locations by years. Drainage Number Killed Approx. Elev. Vegetative Type 1/ Type of Range Oct. 3-11, 1964 N. Trujillo Creek Sarcillo Canyon 4 6 7,800 7,800 Pipo-Quga Pipo-Quga Hinter Hinter Oct. 2-10, 1965 Cucharas River Del Aqua Canyon E. Indian Creek N. Trujillo Creek Sarcillo Canyon .) ') 9,200 7,200 8,300 7,900 7,800 Pipo-Potr Pipo-Quga Pipo-Quga Pipo-Quga Pipo-Quga Intermediate ~)inter Hinter Hinter Winter or Summer 9,200 7,200 8,500 7,900 Pipo-Potr Pipo-Quga Pipo-Potr Pipo-Quga Intermediate Hinter Intermediate Hinter or Summer Pipo-Quga Pipo-Quga Pipo-Potr Pipo-Quga Hinter Hinter Summer lYinter Pipo-Quga Pipo-Quga Pipo-Quga Pipo-Quga Pipo-Potr Ihnter l.;'inter i.Jinter Oct. 1-9, 1966 Cucharas River Del Aqua Canyon Midd Le Creek Sarcillo Canyon 8 2 1 6 3 4 1 22 or Summer I-' w w I Oc t . 7 -15, 1967 Oct. 5-13, 1968 1/ See Appendix Burro Canyon Del Aqua Canyon E. Indian Creek S arc illo Canyon 36 7,600 7,300 9,400 7,900 ijurro Canyon Del Aqua Canyon M. Truj t llo Creek S arc i. 110 Canyon Spring Creek 3 12 2 7 6 7,900 7,300 8,300 7,900 9,300 Total 136 (20 locations) 1 8 I !~.ange 7,200 to 9,400 Hean 8,050 for key to species abbreviations. vI i 1"1 te r -~nU'nTlecliateor Summer �134 - • Harem flock o t:est Fig. 7. Location of nesting sites. �135 - '0' .32 S. N T34 S , , 1355 . - \ ':"CO'L6kArrO-- -::~:>..: ,,' Fig. 8. R.S9W. -~~8WNt-w- -MEXTco--R~;;-;IO~OOl)' "' I :,.,) '-",' ~:~~~~'-' ------R.66w R 65w .•o' �- 136 - Numbers of hunters contacted (Table l3) for the fall seasons held in 1964 through 1968 shows a steady increase in hunting pressure from 33 in 1964 to 195 in 1967 with a decrease to 175 in 1968. This increase in number of hunters is thought to be due to increasing wild turkey populations plus the increase in number of hunters on the Spanish Peaks Management Area following State purchase and management starting in 1966. Reasons for the decrease in numbers of hunters in 1968 are not known. Weekend bag checks of hunters on the Spanish Peaks Management Area were obtained from 1966 through 1968 and other known turkey hunting areas were checked as personnel and time permitted. As with the spring hunts, most birds killed on the Spanish Peaks Management Area were taken in the hills which surround the cultivated oat food plot but no birds are known to have been killed on the food plot proper. All of the developments (5 supplemental feeding stations) and the experimental food plot were located on winter ranges. Eighty four of the 122 birds killed on winter ranges (69 percent) were taken in close proximity (usually within 1 mile) of developmental or food plot sites. Nesting Site Locations Nesting site locations, which include locations where nests were found, harem flocks (one gobbler with a group of hens) were seen, or where nesting hen type droppings were found, are shown in Figure 7. Fourteen of these sites ranged in elevation from 7,000 to 10,500 feet (average 8,500 feet) and half were in a ponderosa pine-Gambel's oak vegetative community. Five sites were in a ponderosa pine-aspen community and 1 each in lodgepole pine and Engelmann spruce communities. All but 1 were observed in close proximity to a clearing indicating a distinct preference for these during the nesting season. There also appeared to be a preference shown by nesting hens for sites near a source of free water where lush green vegetation was available for feed. Brood Rearing Locations Locations of hens with young observed or reported, including both single and multiple broods, in 105 sites from 1964 through 1968 are shown in Figure 8. The mean elevation for all of these sites was 8,200 feet (range 7,200 to 10,400 feet). Eighty-three (79 percent) were located in a ponderosa pineGambel's oak vegetative community and 12 (11 percent) were observed in a ponderosa pine-aspen community. Five (5 percent) were located in a blue spruce-aspen community, 4 (4 percent) in an Engelmann spruce community, and 1 (1 percent) in a lodgepole pine community. No attempt was made to sample all types equally during these surveys. Most broods were found in close proximity to clearing, probably due to a distinct preference for these sites for feeding activity. Sarcillo Canyon was by far the most important brood rearing area during the study period. Other consistent producers of broods include Middle. Creek, East Indian Creek, Cucharas River, Bear Creek Mesa, Trujillo Creek, Mavricio Canyon, Santa Clara Creek, Burro Canyon and Abbotts Creek. �- 137 - Wintering Flock Locations A summary of locations where flocks of turkeys were observed from December 1 through March 15 each year by elevation are listed in Table 5. Most of these observations were in a ponderosa pine-Gambe1's oak vegetative community, but a few were also recorded in the pinon pine-Gambel's oak vegetative com~unity as well. The trend toward fewer numbers of wintering grounds resulted from concentrating flocks in specific locations during the course of the study. While concentrating birds in specific locations may not be a particularly desirable situation from a management standpoint, this occurred as a by-product of winter feeding. Developments Experimental developments consisted of providing supplemental feed in the form of baled oat hay, whole oats, and/or maize within 5 developmental study areas (Figures 9 and 10) from early November through mid-March for 4 years (1964-65 through 1967-68). In addition, a 5 acre food plot planted to cultivated oats in Sarci110 Canyon (Figure 11) was established and maintained during 2 years (1966-67 and 1967-68). The oats in this field were left uncut and all cattle grazing was eliminated in the immediate vicinity. The State of Colorado made the initial purchase of the Spanish Peaks Management Area in Upper Sarci110 Canyon from John Sakariason in 1965 and management practices were started in 1966. The Dochter and Oberhaus1er tracts in upper Burro Canyon were purchased in subsequent years so that the management unit presently consists of over 5,500 acres of land. Experimental management practices on this management unit consisted of establishing food plots, elimination or reduction of cattle grazing, development of additional water, and opening the area to public hunting. The experimental developments resulted in a definite concentration of wild turkeys during the wintering periods and to some extent, during the hunting seasons. A steady increase in overall wild turkey populations and harvests was recorded for the study period (Table 1). A census of populations within the entire extensive study area was made each year so it is believed that an overall population increase occurred as well as a definite increase in developmental area populations. A definite decrease in control area populations occurred during the study period (Table 1 and Figure 6). Periods of Use Following the installation of feeding stations each November, a record was maintained of periods of no, light, and heavy utilization by turkeys based upon weekly visits to the sites. Although there were a few exceptions, heaviest use generally occurred following periods of severe weather in the form of snow, cold temperatures, and/or wind. Turkeys regularly scratched through from 14 to 16 inches of unpacked snow to secure feed when accustomed to feeding at a site. Even though the winter of 1967-68 was more severe than usual with a total of 169 inches of snow from September 1 through �I-' W CI) Fig. 9. A baled oat hay feeding station exclude livestock. (D. Hoffman, photo). installed and ready for use. This site has been fenced to �t-' Vol \0 Fig. 10. A baled oat hay supplemental feeding station late in the winter period showing use by turkeys. Snow vehicle was used to service stations periodically. (D. Hoffman, photo). �I-' +:o Fig. 11. Wild turkeys feeding in a 5-acre cultivated oat food plot on the Spanish Peaks Management Area. CD. Hoffman, photo). �- 141 March 31 recorded at the Copper King Gulch wintering area (Table 9), the flocks remained on their normal wintering grounds, with feed provided regularly. Flocks within these same areas were observed to break-up into small groups of 2 to 6 birds and move to lower elevations during an equally severe winter of 1963-64 with no feed supplied. During 2 winters, a 5-acre food plot planted to cultivated oats on the Spanish Peaks Management Area provided usable supplemental feed for approximately 70 turkeys each winter. An exception was the period from early December, 1967 to mid-January, 1968 when deep crusted snow covered the plot. During this period, baled oat hay was used to provide supplemental feed until the weather moderated and the grain in the food plot again became available. Groups of mule deer, at times consisting of 10 to 12 animals, were commonly observed feeding in the Sarcillo Canyon food plot particularly in the winter period. The baled oat hay piles were not bothered by deer or elk during the study. Weather Factors Table 9 lists snowfall amounts for various wintering areas and the town of La Veta by winters during the study. Table 10 lists precipitation amounts and other related information for the Copper King Gulch wintering area, elevation 8,000 feet, and Table 11 lists similar data for the Sarcillo Canyon wintering area, elevation 7,900 feet, from 1965 through 1968. Natural Food Production Weather is believed to be the most important factor in mast and fruit production. Although this study was of too short a duration for definite correlations between weather and natural food production, the following levels of production were recorded along established roadside trends. Scrub-oak - Excellent crops of acorns occurred in 2 of the 5 years (1964 and 1968) and only a few acorns were produced in the other 3 years (1965, 1966, and 1967). Both of the heavy crops of acorns followed winters of heavier than normal precipitation amounts. ~ - Production of pine nuts was quite erratic during the 5 year period with a good crop of ponderosa pine nuts occurring only in 1964. Poor or no pine nut production occurred in the other 4 years. A bumper crop of pinon nuts was recorded in 1965 and either poor or no nut production in the other 4 years. Rose and Snowberry - These plants, which have persistent fruits, were more consistent producers than either scrub oak or pines. Fair to excellent crops of fruit were found in most years from 1964 to 1968. �Table 9. Amounts of snowfall, in inches measured from September 1 through March 31 each year. Period Area and Elevation La Veta (7,050) Copper King Gulch (8,000) N. Trujillo Cr. (7,800) Sa rcLl.l,o Can. 81 56 (7,900) 1964-65 80 111 1965-66 30 54 not mea-sur-e-d 1966-67 61 104 not measured 1967-68 111 169 not measured Total 282 438 Average 70 109 t-' +N Table 10. Precipitation amounts from January to April, May to August, and September to December; dates of killing frosts; number of days between killing frosts; and number of days between snows, Copper King Gulch wintering area - elevation 8,000 feet. .Ianv-Ap r , Year 1965 Inches of H20 May-Aug. Installed May 3 Sep.-Dec. 10.56 5.00 Total 1966 3.99 8 35 0 3.19 15.53 1967 4027 14.80 5.46 24.53 1968 5.58 11.09 Average 4.61 3-yr. 11.20 4-yr. if 4.55 3-yr. 20.03 2-yr. Killing frost considered to be 27°F or less. Dates of Killing Frost & Tern If Days Between p.Killing Last First Frosts June 3-9 + 26 F May 23-31 + 25°F May 15-22 + 22°F May 27-Jun. 3 + 15°F Late May 4-yr. Sept 24 + 2 jOF Sept. 16 + 27°F Sept. 12 +230F Sept. 16 +18oF Mid-Sep. 4-yr. Days Between Snows Spring-Fa 11 122 122 117 155 122 146 121 151 122 4-yr. 142 4-yr. �Table 11. Precipitation amounts from January to April, May to August and September to December; dates of killing frosts; and number of days between killing frosts, Sarcil10 Canyon wintering area- elevation 7,900 feet. Inches of H20 May-Aug. Sept.-Dec. Year Jan.-Apr. 1965 Insta lled May 6 12.67 3.03 1966 2.63 15.47 1.46 Total 19.56 Dates of Killing Frost & Temp. 1/ First Last Days Between Killing Frosts June 3-10 + 260r Sept. 7-21 + 25°F 107 May 10-16 + 22°F Oct. 1 + 25°F 137 t-' .pLY 1967 2.67 17.43 1968 3.43 9.99 Average 2.91 3-yr. 13.89 4-yr. 3.51 2.66 3-yr. 1/ Killing frost considered to be 27°F or less. 23.61 21.58 2-yr. May 15-22 + 22°F Oct. 2-12 + 270r 140 May 20-27 + 24°F Sept. 16 + 23°F 128 mid-May 4-yr. late Sep. 4-yr. 128 4-yr. �- 144 - Skunkberry - This species produced only a fair amount of fruit in 3 years (1964, 1965 and 1967) and almost no fruit in the other 2 years (1966 and 1968). Costs of Developments Table 12 lists amounts and costs of feed utilized and numbers of turkeys using the developments for 1967-68. The cost of seed and land preparation for the experimental cultivated oat plot in Sarcillo Canyon are also listed. Average cost of feed per bird was $1.03 for the winter. This cost does not include labor utilized in weekly servicing the various supplemental feeding stations or cost of fencing food plots when this is needed. A Comparison of Types of Developments The use of food plots planted to grain and left for wild turkeys to harvest is considered to be by far a better management method for wintering flocks of turkeys than the use of supplemental feeding stations. This is because environmental conditions are maintained in a more natural condition. In instances, preferred wintering sites may not have sites suitable for cultivation, or it may be difficult or impossible to transport farm machinery to isolated sites. In such cases, the use of supplemental feeding stations using baled oat hay and whole grain may be used effectively. Both types were found to be equally effective in holding and maintaining wintering populations of wild turkeys. A distinct disadvantage in using supplemental feeding stations is the amount of time and labor utilized in servicing these stations on a once a week or once every two week basis. A distinct disadvantage found in using food plots planted to cultivated grain and left for the turkeys to harvest, was that feed may become unavailable during extended periods of deep crusted snows when flocks most need feed. Costs of purchasing materials for supplemental feeding stations (baled oat hay and whole grain) are about equal to costs of seed and land preparation for food plots of the size utilized in this study (Table 12). This cost comparison does not include costs of fencing when needed, maintenance costs of removing stray cattle or repairing fences for the food plots, or costs of servicing supplemental feeding stations. These costs may be considerable and should be considered. Harvest Turkey Kill and Hunting Pressure Table 13 lists turkey kill and hunting pressure within Game Management Unit 85 from hunter contacts and Game Management Section data based upon hunter report card returns. �Table 12. A comparison of amounts and costs of supplemental feed and food plot and numbers of turkeys wintered, 1967-68. Area Bear Creek North Trujillo Sarcillo11 Cucharas Canyon Total Creek Mesa River Item Middle East Indian Creek Creek Whole oats (lbs.) 700 950 0 350 400 0 2,400 Whole maize (lbs.) 350 100 250 500 650 0 1,850 Oat hay (bales) 11 29 3 15 16 36 110 Cost of feed :?:.I $ 36.33 49.17 - $ 31.95 $ 37.68 $22.68 $ 177 .81 52.00 52.00 $ Cost of five acre food plot (seed and land preparation) I-' +-- V1 $74.68 $ 229.81 45 73 223 0.84 $ 1.02 $ Sub-totals Number turkeys using development 56 Average cost per bird $ 0.65 $ 25 0 1.97 - 24 $ 1.33 $ 1.03 11 Five acre food plot with cultivated oats is located in upper Sarcillo Canyon on Spanish Peaks Management Area. l:.1Costs basis: Whole oats Whole maize Baled oat hay @ $3.00 @ $2.40 @ $0.63 1 100 lbs. 1 100 Ibs. 1 bale �Table 13. Merriam's turkey kill and indicated hunting pressure within Game Management Unit #85. Year Open Season Dates 1964 May 2-12 5 19 Oct. 3-11 10 33 Sub-totals 15 52 Apr. 10-18 2 19 Oct. 2-10 20 55 1965 Sub-totals 1966 1967 1968 Field Checks No. Turkeys No. Killed Hunters Game Mgmt. See s No. Turkeys Killed 44 Kill Data No. Hunters 127 , 22 74 40 109 Oct. 1-9 30 92 110 174 Apr. 29-May 7 8 91 Oct. 7-15 46 195 Sub-totals 54 286 120 294 Apr. 27-May 5 10 106 Oct. 5-13 18 175 Sub-totals 28 .281 No spring season I-' .j::-- '", �- 147 - 340 300 I 280 / / / / 240 / / / / 200 / / Number hunters / •.. CD .0 / 160 / E / :J Z / 120 ----_."""""-. - --. / .----. / / / 80 Number turkeys -0 killed _ 40 1963 1964 1965 1966 1967 Year Figure '2. Merriam's turkey kill and hunting Unit Number 85, 1963 to 1967. pressure trend within Game Management Data from Game Management Division. �148 - .. ' '0' T.32S. .325. N '0' T.33S. T.34 S. ~ .. ; . ,~,\, ./ -'",,' R.70W, R.69W. '0' R.68 WNEW '05"00' MEXICO R.67 W. R.66W. '0' 'Q- Fig. STUDY AREA 13. of study area in relation Location to Game Management 2nits. ~PO 851235 �- 149 - Figure 12 shows graphically the turkey kill and hunting pressure trends within Game Management Unit Number 85 from 1963 to 1968 based upon Game Management Section data. Game Management Unit Number 85 includes the major portion of the extensive study area (the entire area south of U. S. Highway 160) and also includes the area bordered by Colorado Highway 12 on the north, U. S. Highway 85-87 on the east, the New Mexico state line on the south, and the top of the Sangre de Cristo Range on the west. Since almost all of this southern portion of Game Management Unit 85 is closed to hunting, it is believed that harvest data for this Unit reflects conditions at least for the portion of the study area within Game Management Unit Number 85. Figure 13 shows the study area locations in relation to Game Management Units. The State purchase of the Spanish Peaks Management Area in upper Sarcillo and Burro Canyons began in 1965 and subsequent management practices started in 1966, including development of food plots planted to cultivated oats and opening the area to public hunting. A definite increase in hunting pressure exerted on this flock is believed to be a major factor in the overall increased kill and hunting pressure for the entire study area. CONCLUSIONS Population levels were determined by censusing turkeys within a 900 square mile study area in the vicinity of feed stations and food plots, counts of flocks located by searching other areas, and use of landowner reports from individuals thought to be reliable. An increase in the overall wild turkey population occurred within the study area from 309 in the predevelopment period of 1963-64 to 382 in 1967-68. The turkey kill within Game Management Unit Number 85 according to Game Management Section information increased from 44 birds in 1964 to 120 in 1967. Sixteen natural wintering areas varied from 7,200 feet to 8,600 feet in elevation. Use of food plots of 5 to 10 acres planted to cultivated grains, as oats is more desirable from a management standpoint than use of supplemental feeding stations. During periods of deep crusted snows when feed is unavailable in the plots, as occaSionally occurs, a few bales of oat hay will tide the flock over until the fields open up. The use of supplemental feeding stations and food plots clearly resulted in concentrating wild turkeys during the wintering periods and to some extent during the open hunting seasons. Concentrating turkeys on wintering grounds did not appear to increase predation and no evidence of disease outbreaks was found. Periods of heaviest use of feedgrounds and food plots could generally be correlated with periods of snow cover and/or severe weather conditions. Birds successfully scratched through from 14 to 16 inches of uncrusted snow for feed when accustomed to feeding at a site. Two of the 5 winters (1963-64 and 1967-68) were of a severe nature in regard to amount of snow and winds and the remaining 3 were normal or lighter than normal. In 1963-64 when supplemental feed was not provided, most of the �- 150 - observed winter concentrations broke up into small groups of 2 to 6 birds and ranged lower in elevation than usual, often in the vicinity of farmYirds• In contrast, during the severe winter of 1967-68 when feed was s~pplied and 169 inches of snow fell in the Copper King wintering area from September through March, birds remained on the wintering grounds and did not appear to be under conditions of abnormal winter stress. Green grass was observed to be available in most wintering areas by midFebruary most years, and the spring dispersal of wintering concentrations usually occurrred by late March. The green grass supplements the diet of the birds when available and is used to a greater extent as the breeding season approaches. LITERATURE CITED Hoffman, Donald M. 1962. The wild turkey in eastern Colorado. Game and Fish Dept. Tech. Pub. No. 12. p. 11-14. Colo. MacDonald, Duncan. 1963. Trapping and marking Merriam's wild turkeys. Proc. 43rd Ann. Conf. of West. Assoc. of State Game and Fish Comm. Tucson, Ariz. June 10-12. p. 196-201. Myers, Gary T. 1967. Relationships of the productivity and distribution of wild turkeys on the Uncompahgre Plateau to the environment. Colo. Game, Fish & Parks Dep. Job Compo Rep. WP 12, J 10, W-37-R-20. p. 167-182. Prepared by ~ fuf~ ~ Wildlife Researcher �- 151 - APPENDIX Abbreviations Used in Tables Abco Abies concolor White fir Abla Abies lasiocarpa Alpine fir Ju Juniperus Piar Pinus aristata Bristlecone Pico Pinus contorta Lodgepole Pied Pinus edulis Pinon pine Pien Picea engelmanni Eng1emann Pifl Pinus flexilis Limber pine Pipu Picea pungens Blue spruce Pipo Pinus ponderosa Ponderosa pine Poan Populus angustifolia Narrowleaf cottonwood Potr Populus Aspen Psta Pseudotsuga Quga Quercus sp. Junipers pine pine spruce ) tremuloides taxifolia gambellii Douglas fir Gambel r soak ��April - 153 - JOB PROGRESS 1969 REPORT State of COLORADO ~-------------------------- Project NOo ~W_-~3~7_-R~-2~2~ Work ,Plan No. Job Title: Period _ ~1~2_' _ Game Bird Survey Job Noo Use of Food Plots to Concentrate Covered: April 1, 1968 through 14 ------~~----------------------Wild Turkeys December 2, 1968. P. S. OBJECTIVES Determine the effects of small food plots on fall concentrations harvest of wild turkeys. SEGMENT 1. 2. 3. and OBJECTIVES Determine which of five different crops mature and produce grain under dry land conditions at 7,200 and 8,300 feet elevation on the Uncompahgre Plateau. Determine whether turkeys are concentrated at the food plantings during the October and November turkey seasons. Determine which crops, of those grown, are preferred by turkeys. Progress Field work was completed December 2, 1968. and incorporated in a manuscript containing Work Plan 12, Job 10. Future Data were analyzed, written up, information gathered under W-37-R Plans The manuscript will be finished in Segment in the form of a technical bulletin. Pre pared by 23. Publication will probably :_l_,_~"""?,¥-.;;:;,+_"-_7 __ ]_;_·~:,"",-'{-Yf-.(_~_";:;.2 /._.:2-__ ------Gary T ~(!Jyers :) Wildlife Researcher --<::7:...~' -_- _ be ��April - 155 - JOB PROGRESS State of COLORADO Project No. W-37-R-22 Work Plan No. 15 Game Bird Survey Job No. Job Title: Study of Mountain Period Covered: April 1, 1968 to March Personnel: Thomas J. Sherrill, REPORT 2 Quail Adaptability 31, 1969 Gary T. Myers and Donald M. Hoffman ABSTRACT One report of 4to 6 mountain quail seen in the spring of 1968 was secured from a Mr. Smith near the Blue Creek Ranch headquarters. This location is approximately 7 airline miles southwest of the Indian Creek release made in 1968. Two trips into the general area of releases were made without success of locating any birds. With an absence of brood sightings in the area to date, it is not known whether this game bird has successfully established reproducing populations. 1969 �.•.156 - RECOMMENDATIONS With a total of 372 wild-trapped birds released in Indian Creek, Mesa County to date, it is recommended that other areas similar in vegetation, terrain, and climate be selected for trial releases if and when stock becomes available through propagation efforts at the Fort Collins Wildlife Research Station. The Spanish Peaks Management Area in Las Animas County is recommended for an early trial release of mountain quail. Sites west of the towns of Beulah and Rye are also possibilities for future stocking. N o1 rn.~les I 5 ! .3c:-:.lt: : o Sighting Fig. 1. Locations end of Uncompahgre of mountain quail releases and sightings, National Forest, Mesa County. north �- 157 - STUDY OF MOUNTAIN QUAIL ADAPTABILITY Donald M. Hoffman A total of 372 wild-trapped mountain quail from California and Oregon have been released on the Indian Creek drainage of the Uncompahgre Plateau from August, 1965 to January, 1968 (Table 1). This area consists of mixed brush and pinon-juniper cover types in rough mountainous terrain. The nature of the habitat, while advantageous from the standpoint of having little human disturbance, makes it extremely difficult to secure sightings or even reports of sightings. p. S. OBJECTIVE To determine the ability of mountain quail to establish reproducing populations in areas of mixed brush, pinon-juniper, conifer and aspen on the Uncompahgre Plateau. SEGMENT OBJECTIVES 1. 2. Introduce mountain quail. Determine presence and dispersal of mountain quail. METHODS AND MATERIALS Methods were similar to that described in the April, 1968 Job Progress Report for W-37-R-2l, Work Plan 15, Job 2, page 114. RESULTS AND DISCUSSION Figure 1 shows locations of mountain quail releases and sightings to date. Two trips to the general area of releases on the west side of the Uncompahgre Plateau were made during June and July, 1968. Searches were made on Mesa Creek, South Fork of Mesa Creek, Blue Creek, and Indian Creek without success of locating birds or field signs. Four to six mountain quail were reportedly seen in the spring of 1968 by Mr. Smith who works for the Blue Creek Ranch. These were observed in late March or early April approximately one-fourth mile below Blue Creek Ranch headquarters. This location is approximately 7 airline miles southwest of the Indian Creek release site. �- 158 Reports of possible mountain quail sightings were secured in additional areas, both at lower elevations. The habitat in both of these areas more closely resembles chukar partridge range. Two individuals reported seeing mountain quail crossing Colorado Highway Number 141 in the vicinity of the Hal Ames Ranch near the confluence of the Dolores River and Blue Creek. Hal Ames has never seen any of these birds, but stated that chukar partridges are common in the area. A report of 3 or 4 mountain quail observed in the summer of 1967 on lower Mesa Creek was also in an area inhabited by chukar partridges. All other sightings have been from areas higher in elevation so it is assumed at this time that these individuals saw chukar partridges rather than mountain quail. To date, there has been a complete absence of broad sightings so it is not known whether this game bird has successfully established reproducing populations. Table 1. Summary of mountain quail field releases. Date Number Birds Source of Birds Release Area Aug. 19 and 25, 1965 l43"U California Mesa County, Indian Creek, Sec. 27, Rl7W, T. 5lN Aug. 26, 1966 163 California Mesa County, Indian Creek, approx. 4 miles west of 1965 releases Jan. 25, 1968 66 Oregon Mesa County, Indian Creek, approx. 1 mile east of west Uncompahgre National Forest Boundary Total 372 1/ Sixteen additional birds taken to Fort Collins Wildlife Research Station for experimental breeding studies. Prepared by �",.- 159 - Apri 1, 1969 JOB PROGRESS REPORT State of COLORADO "----------------------------- Pro ject No Work Plan No. Job Title: l_5 _ Job No~ 3 Mountain Quail Production Techniques -------------------------------------------- Period Covered: Personnel: Game Bird Survey W_-_37_-_R_-_2_2 ------ O" __ April 1, 1968 to March 31, 1969 Willis G. Mansfield, Lawrence A. Webster, Robert L. Schmidt, Thomas A. Barber, and Donald M. Hoffman ABSTRACT Procedures were carried-out as outlined in the job description during 1968, but the breeders did not produce any eggs. This may have been due to the poor condition of the birds from confinement in wire-floored pens during a relatively severe winter, stress induced through deworming just prior to the no:r:malegg laying period, and/or use of community-type breeder pens. Since no eggs were laid in 1968, a comparison of numbers of eggs produced "and numbers of fertile eggs produced on 22 percent protein feed compared with 28 percent protein feed was not possible. _ �- 160 - MOUNTAIN QUAIL PRODUCTION TECHNIQUES Donald M. Hoffman p. S. OBJECTIVE To develop game farm production techniques for mountain quail. SEGMENT OBJECTIVE To measure the effects of two levels of protein in the feed (22% vs. 28%) on fertile egg production. METHODS AND MATERIALS Mountain quail placed in breeding pens 1 and 3 were fed the standard game bird breeder feed containing 22 percent protein. Birds in pen 2 were fed a similar feed but with a protein content of 28 percent. Plans were to mark all eggs so that fertile egg production could be determined. RESULTS AND DISCUSSION Procedures were carried-out as outlined in the job description during 1968, but the 40 breeders did not produce any eggs. Station personnel feel that this may have been due to the poor condition of birds from confinement in wire-floored pens during a relatively severe winter. Although the breeders were wintered in these same wire-floored pens successfully the previous winter, the winter of 1967-68 was more severe. This resulted in many mountain quail having sore feet and a general unthrifty condition. During early 1968, all of the mountain quail were medicated with "Piperazine" in the drinking water after a few Trichamonas spp. worms were found in the digestive tract of a bird which had died. This probably induced additional stress in these birds just prior to the normal laying season. In addition, all of the breeders were penned in 3 wire-floored community mating pens during 1968, in contrast to breeding groups of 3 hens with 1 cock or 4 hens with 1 cock in 1967. A total of 146 eggs were produced from 7 hens and 2 cocks in 1967 using these selective group matings. Present plans for 1969 are to compare eggs produced by 3 selected groups of 2 hens and 1 cock with a community pen consisting of 6 hens and 3 cocks, all in ground-floored pens. Prepared by {l~-;/.._;tl.-(!.J./ '.r;.:;i/.:{,/~~.~~;r, __ ~D~0-n-a~1~d~M7.~H~0-f~f~m~a-n~._-.··j;--Wildlife Researcher �April, 1969 - 161 - JOB PROGRESS REPORT State of. C~O~L~O~RA~DO~ _ Pro ject No o, Game Bird Survey -:.W;,....-..;:3;.:,7_-,,;;,R;;,...-..;;:2:,;;;2:..-.._ Work Plan No. ~_1_7 _ Job Noo• 1 Job Title: Inventory of Ptarmigan Populations Period Covered: Personnel: April 1, 1968 to February'28, 1969 Allen E. Anderson, Ron B. Arant, Ron G. Blumberg, Clait E. Braun, Dave A. Cobb, Don Crane, Courtney J. Crawford, Dale A. Hein, Terry A. May, Bruce E. Peley, Charles W. Reichert, Glenn E. Rogers, Ron A. Ryder, Ray K. Schmidt. ABSTRACT Investigations on white-tailed ptarmigan initiated in 1965 and intensified in 1966 continued on four study areas during 1968. Breeding densities in 1968 varied from seven to over 29 birds per square mile and averaged about 19 birds per square mile for all areas. Ne st.Lng success increased over 1967 on two study areas (Rocky Mountain National Park and Crown Point), while no change was noted at Independence Pass and Mt. Evans. Clutch size averaged 5.6 eggs (n = 10), and the average brood size on September 1 was 3.5 chicks (n = 32). Total hunting pressure on all areas increased slightly over 1967. Hunter success was higher in 1968 than in 1966 or 1967 and could be attributed to good weather and improved hunter efficiency. During 1968, 332 ptarmigan were newly banded wh i.Le 140 originally banded in 1966 and 1967 were reobserved. Hunting removed 62.5 percent of the banded ptarmigan at Independence Pass, 58.2 percent at Mt. Evans, and 36.1 percent at Cro,yn Point. Habitat analysis revealed that willow (Salix spp.) size and amount of rock and snow accumulation areas were of critical importance in determining use of alpine areas by ptarmigan. _ �- 162 - RECOMMENDATIONS It is strongly recommended Primary reasons are: that this project be continued for one year. 1. To continue inventory of breeding populations and production on the three hunted areas and the control. Hunting during the 1968 season significantly (p = .05) reduced fall populations on two of the three hunted areas. While a heavy harvest of banded birds was not achieved in 1965, 1966 and 1967, the opportunity is now present to critically evaluate the effect of significant fall population reduction on breeding densities and production during the next breeding season. 2. To provide adequate time for writeup of the final completion report and technical publications. The final Federal Aid project report will be adapted from Braun's dissertation and will be completed by summer, 1969. Publication of a technical bulletin on white-tailed ptarmigan studies in Colorado should be delayed until a series of technical papers have been submitted to scientific journals. Recommendations for management are the same as those presented in the segment report for April 1, 1967 to March 31, 1968. Similar recommendations were made to the Game Research Advisory Council in September, 1968. The active portion of this project involving permanent Division personnel expired March 31, 1968. Work since then has been done under contract with Clait E. Braun. The Division has furnished per diem, a vehicle, casual labor, and a student assistant for this project. No further student assistance is recommended. It is recommended that this project be continued through March 31, 1970, under contract to Braun. �- 163 - INVENTORY OF PTARMIGAN POPULATIONS C1ait E. Braun Investigations first initiated on white-tailed ptarmigan in 1965 and intensified in 1966 and 1967 were carried on again in 1968. Data collected in 1965, 1966, and 1967 were reported in the project segments for those years. Pending completion of the final report in sunnner, 1969, no analysis of data from all four years is reported here. Data reported in this report represent that collected in 1968. The primary objective during 1968 was to continue studies on population densities, production, and harvest. In addition, work was started in 1967 on descriptive vegetation mapping of the study areas was continued and completed for the three East Slope areas. Additional distribution studies were carried out in the Lulu PassThunder Mountain area adjacent to Rocky Mountain National Park. Fifteen birds trapped in this area were shipped to Oregon in partial exchange for Mountain Quail. Due principally to lack of time and low hunting pressure in 1966 and 1967, studies were discontinued at Mesa Seco in 1968. Studies were continued on the four other study areas (Independence Pass, Crown Point, Mt. Evans, and Rocky Mountain National Park) with no changes being made in acreage and particular areas studied. Ray K. Schmidt, a master's candidate at Colorado State University, again contributed greatly to development of census techniques in Rocky Mountain National Park and Independence Pass. In addition, he located one nest in Rocky Mountain National Park and assisted in the location of four others. Bruce E. Poley, student assistant on the North Park Sage Grouse study, helped locate three nests in Rocky Mountain National Park; two of which were located through use of radio transmitters affixed to hens. p. S~ OBJECTIVE To inventory ptarmigan populations in Colorado. SEGMENT OBJECTIVES 1. 2. To determine annual changes in ptarmigan populations. To compile and report all ptarmigan inventory information. METHODS AND MATERIALS Methods and equipment used during 1968 were essentially those developed during the preceding years of the study and described in segment reports for those years. In 1968, census techniques involving use of a portable tape recorder were perfected and used from early May to late September. Census was accomplished through the use of a portable Nore1co tape recorder �- 164 (cassette type) upon which male "challenge" calls and chick "distress" calls were recorded. As an observer walked through an area, the recorder was played and locations of all responding birds were determined. DESCRIPTION OF AREA Locations and general descriptions of all areas studied have been presented in earlier segment reports. Detailed vegetative descriptions for each area will be given in the final completion report. RESULTS AND DISCUSSION Inventory Census of Territorial Pairs Surveys of breeding birds were initiated in April with the first territorial pair being observed on April 12. As in 1966 and 1967, pair bonds established in April were frequently disrupted by adverse weather. Most pair bonds were stabilized by mid-May with no unpaired hens being observed after May 15. Snow conditions during the breeding season were similar to those in 1967. Phenology and timing of breeding events were essentially the same in 1967 and 1968, although about 10-15 days later than in 1966. During 1968, a portable tape recorder was used in conjunction with recorded male screams on all study areas. This greatly facilitated location of all males that were paired and most of the unpaired males. Males that were unpaired and non-territorial did not usually respond, but instead would sit quietly by a rock or in certain situations would flee. In addition to location of territorial males, the tape recorded "male challenge" call was also used in order to help capture males which could not be easily approached. Effectiveness of this technique varied, but in general, it was very effective when males were actively defending territories (from May 3 to July 10). The number of pairs and breeding densities for each study area are given in Table 1. Breeding densities on the Mt. Evans, Crown Point, and Rocky Mountain National Park study areas are considered to be accurate as much time was spent on each of these areas during the breeding season. The density for Independence Pass as shown in Table 1 is minimal, as portions of only three days were used for census during the entire breeding season. The density in 1968 at Independence Pass represents a significant increase in numbers over both 1966 and 1967. This density could be a reflection of better census techniques in 1968, or it could represent an actual increase in birds, possibly due to the excellent production at Independence Pass in 1967. �- 165 - Table 1. 1968. White-tailed ptarmigan breeding population densities, all areas, Square miles pairs Unmated birds Total breeding season population Birds per square mile Tombstone RidgeSundance Mountain 1.25 9 7 males 25 20.0 Toll Memorial .19 6 3 males 15 78.9 Fall River-Gore Turnout .70 10 3 males 23 32.9 Total-Rocky Mountain National Park 2.14 25 13 males 63 29.4 Mt. Go liath-Mt. Evans 1.54 5J;.! o 11 7.1 Crown Point-Crown Mountain 1.93 lS.!! 4 males 35 18.1 Independence 1.32 10 4 males 24 18.2 6.93 55 21 males 133 19.2 Study area Total-All Pass areas 11 One male was apparently mated with two different hens. Breeding densities on the East Slope study areas in 1968 were similar to those in 1966 and 1967. Densities in Rocky Mountain National Park increased about four birds per square mile over 1967 levels, but this indicates a slight increase back to levels first observed in 1966. The density at the Crown Point study area decreased by approximately three birds per square mile from 1967 levels, but the 1968 density was still four birds per square mile higher than the 1966 level. For the East Slope areas studied during the three-year period, only the Mt. Evans density level has not changed more than one bird per square mile. Surveys adjacent to the Mt. Evans study area revealed the presence of at least four more breeding territories in 1968. One of these territories has been occupied since 1966, and it is probable that the other three territories were also occupied during this period. Nesting Success and Production Egg deposition and incubation in 1968 were initiated on all areas between June 10 and 15. During the field season, 10 nests were located during incubation, of which seven hatched successfully and three were destroyed. Destruction of the three nests was caused by carnivores which apparently killed two of the three hens. Destruction could have been indirectly caused Average c.lutch by human disturbance in the immediate area of the nests o �- 166 - size for the 10 clutches was 5.6 eggs, and only 81.1 percent of the 37 eggs in the seven successful nests hatched. The peak of hatch in 1968 was between July 15 and 20, with the seven nests under observation hatching on the following dates: July 13 (1); 14 (2); 15 (1); 18 (1); 21 (1); and August 1 (1). The nest hatching on August 1 was considered to be a renesting attempt because of hatching date and low clutch size (2 eggs). At least one other hen under observation was thought to have renested during 1968. This hen, BG 10, was thought to have been laying or in the early stages of incubation on June 20 when she was captured and fitted with a radio transmitter. She was subsequently relocated almost daily until late June. During this time she associated with two different males and wandered over a much larger area than prior to capture on June 20. On July 3 she was located on a nest which contained five eggs. On July 7, this nest contained six eggs and was being continuously incubated by BG 10. Apparently the handling on June 20, combined with the presence of the transmitter, caused the hen to either temporarily quit laying or to desert her first nest. The second nest attempt was apparently initiated about June 26 or 27, and if it hadn't been destroyed on July 8 or 9, it should have hatched about July 28 or 29. Nesting success in 1968 based on number of different successful (with broods) and unsuccessful (without broods) hens observed varied from less than 30 percent at Mt. Evans, 33 percent at Independence Pass, to 57 percent in Rocky Mountain National Park and over 60 percent at Crown Point. Considering all areas, 47 unsuccessful and 53 successful hens were observed during 1968. These figures may be misleading as hens with broods are located more easily than broodless females. Average brood sizes by area and time period are shown in Table 2. As in 1966 and 1967, there was a gradual decrease in brood size from mid-July to August 31. Brood sizes during September are misleading as there is much shuffling of brood members by this time, with some hens appearing as unsuccessful, while others have up to 12 chicks. Shuffling of chicks was again documented through banding and chick measurement. The largest brood ever recorded (12 chicks) during the four years was observed on September 3 and was composed of two different age classes of chicks. During the 1968 brood season, 86 broods were observed, 30 more than observed in 1966 and 25 more than in 1967. However, this includes a substantial number of reobservations, as only 53 different broods were observed. The increase in number of broods observed during the four-year period is primarily due to increased observer efficiency and improved census techniques. However, nesting success in Rocky Mountain National Park and at Crown Point in 1968 increased significantly over 1967 and closely approximated 1966 levels. Nesting at Mt. Evans for all practical purposes failed for the third consecutive year. This is apparently a result of poor or Low quality breeding and brood habitat. The vegetative analysis of the Mt. Evans area substantiates this reasoning as much of the area Has found to be of poor quality for ptannigan. Hens in this area that may successfully hatch their clutches may appear as unsuccessful later in the season due to their failure to locate suitable brood range. This failure to reach suitable brood range could result in high chick mortality. �- 167 - 11 Table 2. Mean brood size by time period and area, 1968in parenthesis). . (Sample size is Area July 16-31 August 1-15 Mt. GoliathMt. Evans None None 2.0 (1) None None 1 Rocky Mountain National Park 5.0 (1) 4.5 (8) 4.2 (9) 3.6 (25) 5.9 (7) 50 Crown PointCrown Mountain None 4.5 (6) 4.8 (5) 3.0 (6) 5.0 (2) 19 Not Searched Not Searched 3.5 (4) Not Searched 4.0 (1) 5 Independence Pass Other areas Not 3.5 (2) Searched Totals 5.0 (1) 4.4 (16) 1.1 Only distinct broods are included. August 16-31 Total September broods 1-30 observed July 1-15 4.6 (5) 5.0 (1) 8.0 (3) 11 4.2 (24) 3.5 (32) 6.1 (13) 86 Harvest Statistics In 1968, the regular hunting season opened on September 14 and closed on September 30. However, the north side of the Independence Pass study area opened with the "quality deer season" (an early season for bucks with a certain number of antler pOints) on August 24 and closed on September 8. It then reopened with the regular season. Bag and possession limits were four and eight during the regular season in all areas and three and six at Independence Pass during the early season. Hunting pressure and harvest in 1968 for the three hunted study areas are given in Table 3. Table 3. Hunting nressure and harvest on three selected ptarmigan study areas in Colorado, 19681/. Area No. of hunters Hours Birds hunted seen Birds Birds harvested crippled Adult Juvenile Unclassified and lost M F M F Age Sex Total Mt. Evans 83 227 252 3 32 12 3 4 Crown Point 55 213.5 50 2 3 7 5 1 Independence Pass 37 106.5 80+ 0 22 9 2 4 Totals 175 547 382 5 57 28 10 9 54 10 28 13 1 51 13 11 133 1.1 As check stations were operated only on weekends, figures presented rrrustbe considered minimal. �- 168 - Hunting pressure in 1968 increased slightly over 1967 at both Crown Point and Independence Pass, which may be the result of a longer season in 1968 or increased publicity. Hunting pressure at Mt. Evans decreased slightly in 1968, but this was primarily due to closure of the Mt. Evans highway to all traffic on the evening of September 21. It is interesting to note that while hunting pressure at Crown Point has more than doubled since 1966, total kill has not increased more than five birds. As in previous years, the bulk of the kill and most of the hunting pressure occurred on the opening weekend, with fewer hunters afield after that time. Hunting pressure during the week continued to be almost nonexistent. Age ratios in the harvest varied from .2 young per adult at Mt. Evans and Independence Pass to approximately two young per adult at Crown Point. The low young-to-old ratio in the kill indicates low production on the first two areas in 1968. However, due to ptarmigan behavior and hunter distribution patterns, a low young-to-old ratio .in the kill could be normally expected. During fall of the year, males and unsuccessful hens are in relatively large flocks (up to 40 birds) and can be easily harvested, once found. During this same period, hens with broods are typically more scattered and are not associated to any great extent with large flocks. The factors of ptarmigan behavior and hunter distribution also explain why more males are harvested than females during the hunting season. Hunting pressure on all study areas continued to originate primarily from the East Slope population centers of Denver, Fort Collins, and Colorado Springs. Approximately 46 percent of the hunters at Independence Pass originated from that county (Pitkin), mainly the Aspen area, while less than five percent of the hunters at Mt. Evans originated from that county (Clear Creek), mainly Idaho Springs. During 1968, 332 ptarmigan were newly banded, while 140 originally banded in 1966 and 1967 were reobserved. One hundred and sixty-four of these birds were on study areas which were open to hunting. The estimated fall populations for each of the hunted study areas as calculated by Lincoln Index are shown in Table 4. The estimates for Crown Point and Mt. Evans are considered to be very accurate, while the estimate for Independence Pass is considered to be somewhat high. Fall population densities per square mile are not given as they would be misleading. This is principally because some ptarmigan (primarily males and unsuccessful hens) breeding on areas adjacent to the study units at Mt. Evans and Independence Pass move onto these areas in mid and late summer where they become available for banding and harvest. This situation is not found at Crown Point, although a few birds may move off of the study area. Consequently, many of the birds shot at Independence Pass and Mt. Evans are transients (those not breeding on the study area) and represent populations from areas other than those studied. In this respect, both Mt. Evans and Independence Pass are harvest sites for portions of populations from some unknown amount of adjacent area. As long as a heavy harvest of the transients and resident population does not result in a depression of breeding densities in the general area, heavy hunting on these areas should be encouraged. Mt. Evans can be used to illustrate this phenomenon At Mt. Evans during the 1968 hunting season, approximately 100 birds were in several flocks on one 320-acre area. During the hunting season, this one small area was hunted by approximately 75 hunters who harvested 45 of the 54 birds killed on the Mt. Evans study area. These 45 birds probably represented the bulk of the breeding males on a six- to seven-square-mile surrounding area. 0 �- 169 - Estimates Table 4. of fall populations of white-tailed ptarmigan. Estimated fall population (Lincoln Index) Total birds banded Banded birds harvested Total harvest Mt. Evans 55 32 54 93 Crown Point 61 22 28 78 48 30 51 82 Area Independence Pass In 1968, hunters harvested 62.5 percent of the banded birds at Independence Pass, 58.2 percent of those banded at Mt. Evans, and 36.1 percent at Crown Point. This represents the heaviest kill during the period studied. Primary factors for the large number of banded birds harvested were: (1) favorable weather, (2) hunter education, and (3) bird location. Weather is undoubtedly the most important factor determining hunter success as it largely controls access to ptarmigan range. In addition, sudden weather changes drastically affect ptarmigan behavior and movement and hunter behavior and distribution. It is apparent from observing and talking with hunters that many of those successful in one year return to hunt the same area in succeeding years. This eventually can lead to higher harvests as ptarmigan, regardless of experience, seek out certain areas which apparently meet all of their requirements for late summer and fall. Thus, units which meet the bird's requirements are occupied every year. Once these areas become known to hunters through trial and error, they are therefore hunted with increasing intensity in succeeding years o RANGE EVALUATION Habitat Description Vegetative analysis of the three East Slope study areas was completed in 1968. Detailed descriptions of each area and discussion of ptarmigan use and movements as related to vegetation and rock size will be described in the final completion report. It is apparent from the vegetative anaLys Ls that location of wintering areas, breeding territories, nest sites, brood areas, and summer use areas are not haphazard. Definite patterns which are similar throughout ptarmigan range in Colorado do occur. There are some differences between areas which can be related primarily to past grazing history. Willow (Salix spp.) is the key indicator species in determining whether or not ptarmigan will be present in a given area. Buds and twigs of this shrub provide the bulk of the ptarmigan's diet from late September to mid-May. Willow is the major component of every wintering area and is an essential component of every breeding territory. During the course of the study, approximately 100 different breeding territories have been located and all contain willow in varying amounts. As the season progresses, ptarmigan become less dependent on willow, and by early .June may be found some distance �- 170 - from it. The key ingredient for summer use sites for both broods and maleunsuccessful hen flocks appears to be the abundance of rock, principally rocks in the 6- to l2-inch diameter size class. Total rock cover in these areas is over 35 percent and most frequently comprises 50 to 75 percent of the entire cover. In order to be used during the summer period, rocky areas as described above must be in close proximity to areas where there is a substantial amount of rapidly growing short (less than 100 mm in height) vegetation (principally forbs). Areas which meet these criteria are principally seeps and late lying snow accumulation sites. Late summer and fall use areas are similar to those used in midsummer except that the percent of rock cover decreases markedly. Of prime importance in the September-October period are snow accumulation areas. These are the last areas to reach vegetative maturity and are the first to accumulate snow in the fall. They therefore provide abundant food and cover during the autumn period when the birds are changing from brown to white plumage. Prepared by ttu/< ~ Clait E. Braun �- 171 April, JOB PROGRESS State REPORT of COLORADO ~-------------------------- Project Work 1969 No., W_-_3_7_-_R_-_2_2 Plan No •. Job Title: Period _ Job NOo. ~l~ _ P_a_1_e __S~p~0_t_t_e_d __T~i~n~a~m_o~u~P~r_o~d_u~c_t~i_o_n __T~e_c_h_n_i~q~u_e_s Covered: Personnel: ~19~ Game Bird Survey _ April 1, 1968 to March 31, 1969 Willis G. Mansfield, Lawrence A. Webster, Harold M. Swope, and Donald M. Hoffman. Robert L. Schmidt, ABSTRACT A total of 316 eggs were produced by the 37 tinamou breeders of mixed sexes on hand in May, 1968. Of these, 105 were infertile, 83 were dead germs, 12 pipped but did not hatch, 8 were crippled, and 108 were of a good hatch. In considering total eggs hatched, a 5.85 percent better hatch occurred for eggs 'placed in the control incubator where temperature was maintained at a normal 99.750 F and relative humidity was maintained at a normal 54 percent in comparison with eggs hatched in a test incubator with 99.500 F temperature and 50 percent relative humidity. In considering fertile eggs hatched, a 26.16 percent better hatch was experienced using the control incubator. _ �Table 1. A comparison of hatchability of pale spotted tinamous eggs under two levels of temperature and relative humidity, 1968. Item On test 1/ Control 2:./ Number Crippled Number of Good Hatch Percent Total Eggs Hatched Percent Fertile Eggs Hatched Date Set Number Set Number of Infertile 5/16/68 13 5 5 0 0 3 23.08 37.50 6/8/68 27 9 7 0 2 9 40.74 61.11 6/22/68 28 6 9 2 1 10 39.29 50.00 7/6/68 29 7 9 1 0 12 41.38 54.54 7/20/68 28 7 14 1 0 6 21.43 28.57 8/13/68 21 11 3 1 0 6 28.57 60.00 Sub-Total 146 45 (30.8%) 47 (32.2%)5 (3.4%) 3 (2.1%) 46 (31.5%)33.56 34.75 5/4/68 16 12 Dead Genns Number Pipped but Not Hatched 4 0 0 0 0.00 0.00 6/1/68 25 10 5 0 0 10 40.00 66.66 6/15/68 40 10 7 3 4 16 50.00 66.66 6/29/68 35 9 4 2 1 19 57.14 76.92 7/14/68 16 3 3 1 0 9 56.25 69.23 7/28/68 23 7 9 0 0 7 30.43 43.75 8/26/68 15 9 4 1 0 1 6.66 16.66 Sub-Total 170 60 (35.5%) 36 (21.2%)7 (4.1%) 5 (2.9~/O) 62 (36.5%)39.41 60.91 Totals 316 105 8 108 54.98 83 12 36.71 1/ Eggs incubated in a small Humid-Air Model 50 automatic incubator using temperature of 99.500 F and relative humidity of 50 percent. ~/ Eggs incubated in a large Robbins Model H-7 automatic incubator using temperature of 99.750 F and relative humidity of 54 percent. I-' '-l N �- 173 - PALE SPOTTED TINAMOU PRODUCTION TECHNIQUES Donald M. Hoffman Good progress was made in improving production techniques for pale spotted tinamou at the Fort Collins Wildlife Research Station. From the 37 breeders of mixed ages and sexes on hand in May, 1968, there were enough birds for use as breeders in 1969 tests plus 60 extra birds. Thirty percent of these 60 died in holding pens during the winter and an initial release of 42 birds was made on April 8, 1969 in Baca County. A breeding flock consisting of 36 young birds (1968 hatch) including 24 hens and 12 cocks is being held in pens for the 1969 tests (Figure 1). P. S. OBJECTIVE To develop game farm production techniques SEGMENT for pale spottedtinamou. OBJECTIVES 0 To compare the effects of 2 levels of temperature (99.750 F vs. 99.50 and humidity (50% vs. 5)%) during incubation on egg hatchability. F) METHODS AND MATERIALS The detailed arrangement of tinamou breeding pens is shown in Figure 2. The 37 breeders of mixed sexes and ages were housed in these pens with all individual pen doors open so that a community breeding pen was maintained in 1968. Settings of tinamou eggs were made alternately in the test and control incubators every 7 days in so far as possible. Five-day intervals between settings were not feasible due to limited facilities for these tests. Temperature in the control incubator (Robbins, Model H-7) was held at the standard 99.750 F level and relative humidity was held at or near a normal 54 percent. Temge~ature in t~e test.i~cubator (Humid-Air Model 50) was lowered to 99.50 f and relat~ve hum~d~ty was lowered to 50 percent. Considerable difficulty was encountered in adjusting both temperature and humidity due to the lack of a suitable incubating room where environment can be controlled. RESULTS AND DISCUSSION Following culling procedures, eggs produced by the breeders were alternately placed in the control and test incubators every 7 days because only two incubators were available for use in the tests. �I-' -....J .p- Fig. 1. Group of pale spotted tinamou at Fort Collins Wildlife Research Station (D. Domenick, photo) �- 175 - N k---------------30'---------------1 ~--- 12.-- -----})I I •• L() klf------ 12 '---~11 - 0 1 <.D ~ -, / r.f') 00 (\j ~ / -, - en 1/ SCALE' Fig. 2. Detailed arrangement o 5' of Tinamou breeding 10' pens. �- 176 - Table 1 lists hatching success of eggs in the test incubator in comparison with eggs in the control incubator. Results showed a 5.85 percent better hatch of eggs in the control incubator when considering total eggs hatched and 26.16 percent better hatch when considering percent of fertile eggs hatched. Both temperature and humidity were varied in the test incubator and normal temperature and humidity were maintained in the control incubator, so these differences were probably due to changing either temperature or humidity or both. Future tests should determine which variable caused these results. Percent of dead germs was considerably higher (32.2%) in eggs incubated in the test incubator compared with the control incubator (21.2%). This indicates that either temperature or humidity or both were not as good in the test incubator as in the control incubator. Percent of infertile eggs was less (30.8%) in eggs incubated in the test incubator compared with eggs in the control incubator (35.5%). The reason why this variation was found is not known since incubation procedures used should have had little or no effect on numbers of infertile eggs. With present candling procedures, it is difficult to separate infertile eggs from eggs with a blastoderm which dies very early in the holding or incubation period. Variation in percentages of number of pipped eggs which did not hatch and number of crippled birds did not vary more than 1 percent between the test and control incubators. Prepared by /OfMa/yJ ~YI/ 'y.;;~-/~ Donald M. Hoffman Wildlife Researcher �April 1969 - 177 - JOB PROGRESS REPORT State of. C~O~L~O_RA~D~O _ Project Noo W_-_3_7_-_R_-_2_2 _ Work Plan No Job Title: 1_9 __" 0 Job NOo 2 ~S~t~u~d~y~o~f~T~i~n=a=m~o~u~A~d~a~p~t~a=b~i=l=i~tLy Period Covered: Personnel: _ Game Bird Survey _ _ December 1, 1968 to March 31, 1969 Donald M. Hoffman, Howard D. Funk, Warren D. Snyder ABSTRACT - Determination of the pale spotted tinamou's ability to establish reproducing populations in southern Baca County is the purpose of this report. However, pale spotted tinamou, Nothura darwinii, were not available for release during the work segment. Arrangements were made for an April, 1969 release on U. S. Forest Service land in southern Baca County. ��- 179 - STUDY OF TINAMOU ADAPTABILITY Warren D. Snyder P. S. OBJECTIVE To determine the ability of pale spotted tinamou to establish reproducing populations in areas of mixed tall and mid-grasses, sandsage and yucca on the Comanche National Grasslands, Baca County, Colorado. SEGMENT OBJECTIVES 1. 2. Introduce Determine pale spotted tinamou. presence and dispersal of pale spotted tinamou. METHODS AND MATERIALS 1. 2. Selection of release sites on Comanche National Grasslands in Baca County. Determine presence and dispersal of pale spotted tinamou. (a) Conduct personal contacts with persons residing within five miles of the release site to inform them of the releases made and enlist their cooperation in reporting sightings. Maintain close liason with Forest Service personnel responsible for management of the area to secure their assistance in observing tinamou. Inform other area residents of our activities by use of newspaper articles, radio programs, and mounted birds on display. (b) Ask assistance of area Wildlife Conservation Officer in checking likely areas for tinamou. (c) Make follow-up verification checks of reported tinamou sightings (if there is doubt as to the accuracy or completeness of the report). DESCRIPTION OF AREA Initial plants of pale spotted tinamou are to be released in southern Baca County in the extreme southeast corner of Colorado. There, within the Carrizo District of the U. S. Forest Service, rangelands provide some of the best comparative tinamou habitat available in the State. Cover types vary widely within the region from straight shortgrass and reseeded mid-grass prairie through many densities and interspersions with sand sage (Artemisia filifolia) and yucca (Yucca glauca). In most parts of the county, rangelands and pastures are interspersed with private farmland. The reader is referred to Hoffman (1965) and Snyder (1967) for more detailed discussions of the region's habitat. �- 180 Bump and Bohl (1965) reported a number of characteristics of the pale spotted tinamou's native range. These characteristics are summarized in the following paragraphs along with comparative descriptions of the transplant site in Colorado. The native environment of the pale spotted tinamou includes dry grasslands, pastures, open thorny scrub, savannah-like woodlands, cultivated fields and open weedy areas in arid to semi-arid regions. Grass is considered a prime requisite. Southern Baca County rangelands fit well into this type of habitat description. The species occupies level, rolling or hilly country in South Ame?iJca. Elevations range from 400 feet to 12,000 feet above sea level. S~theast Colorado plains are level to rolling. The general elevation of the region is about 4,000 feet. At the release site soils are primarily sandy and alkaline in ph. Soils in the native range vary from sandy to clayish loam. The ph level is about 6 to 8. Precipitation varies from ~ to 26 inches annually within the species range. In semi-arid regions moisture is received throughout the year. Lowest monthly accumulations are during winter and early spring. This pattern of dry winters becomes more pronounced in the arid regions. Drought periods are reported as common and snow is uncommon. Southeast Colorado precipitation fits well within this range. Annual precipitation averages around fifteen inches. Winters are predominately dry. Most rainfall is received in late spring and summer. Snow and blizzards are occasional and snow seldom covers the ground for longer than a week. Temperatures average around 850 to 930 F at maximum in summer and 300 to 400 F at minimum in winter in the species native habitat and in Baca County. Occasionally more severe cold periods of potential detriment to the species do occur in Baca County. However, protective cover, wind chill indices and other factors have to be taken into consideration when comparing winter extremes. The pale spotted tinamou does not require open water. Foods in native range include seeds, fruits, flower heads and leaves in winter. Some insects are included in the diet during summer and fall. Waste grain and alfalfa also are consumed. The many successional stages of range revegetation in southern Baca County should provide a variety of similar foods for consumption. Interspersion of farmland adds to this selection. RESULTS AND DISCUSSION Plans call for an initial plant of pale spotted tinamou early in the forthcoming work segment. U. S. Forest Service personnel were contacted to obtain permission for release of tinamou on Carrizo District land. A site agreeable with Forest Service personnel was selected in a large ungrazed pasture along the Sand Arroyo drainage southeast of Springfield. The location se.lected is within Section 13 of Range 46 West, Township 32 South. Literature concerning the species was also supplied to Forest Servic.e personnel. �- 181 LITERATURE CITED Bump, G., and W. H. Bohl. 1965. Some tinamous of Argentina and Chile. Interim report. u. S. Dept. of the Interior. Bureau of Sport Fisheries and Wildlife. 15 p. Mimeo. (Illust.). Hoffman, D. M. 1965. The scaled quail in Colorado. Fish and Parks Tech. Pub. No. 18. 47 p. Colo. Div. of Game, Snyder, W. D. 1967. Experimental habitat improvement for scaled quail. Colo. Div. of Game, Fish and Parks Tech. Pub. No. 19. 65 p. Prepared by UI~O~ Warren D. Snyder Assistant WiJdlife Researcher � https://cpw.cvlcollections.org/files/original/1bce10cc0a851b15993e184c24cdd61a.pdf 129710fc02057f0af05d10ae40188698 PDF Text Text July, 1969 - 1- JOB FINAL REPORT State of C~O~L~O~RA~D~O~ _ Project No. W-38-R-23 Deer-Elk Work Plan No. 1 Job No. and Marking 5 Job Title: Experimental Period Covered: April 1, 1968 through March 31, 1969 Personnel: Trapping Investigations Techniques M. C. Coghill and Raymond J. Boyd P. S. OBJECTIVE To determine the efficiency of a winged corral drive trap for elk. RESULTS AND DISCUSSION No work was accomplished on this job because of the assignment of project personnel to other more pressing jobs within this project. In discussions with Game Management personnel in the Northeast Region, they will take over the trapping operations planned for Rocky Mountain National Park, thus relieving project W-38-R of this job. All other work on this job has been reported. Prepared by ~~ Wildlife Researcher ��July~ 1969 - 3 - JOB PROGRESS REPORT State of ~C~O~L~O~RA~D~O _ Project No. W-38-R-34 Deer-Elk Work Plan No. 2 Job No. ImTestigations Job Title: White River Elk Study - Publication Period Covered: April 1, 1968 through March 31, 1969 Personnel: of Results Raymond J. Boyd p.So Formulate Rivero 7a a management OBJECTIVE plan for the elk and their habitat on the White SEGMENT OBJECTIVE Publish all the research study. findings resulting from the White River elk RESULTS AND DISCUSSION The third draft of the final manuscript was completed during the past segment and submitted to the Game Research Chief and Section Chiefo Changes were suggested and incorporated in the manuscripto Submission to the editor will be delayed until he has processed a backlog of other work. An estimated date for submission to the printer is December 15, 1969. Prepared by ~ Raymond Jo Boyd Wildlife R£searcher ��July; 1969 - 5 - JOB FINAL REPORT S tate of .=..CO.::;L::.O.::;RA=D::..O=-------- Project No. W-38-R-23 Deer-Elk Investigations Work Plan No. 4 Job No. 3c Crossing Safety Measures Job Title: Evaluation Period April Covered: Personnel: of Deer-Highway 1, 1968 through March David F. Gordon, Marion 3l~ 1969 Co Coghill and Furman W. Dunham ABSTRACT Colorado has tested the effectiveness of van de Ree deer-mirrors to reduce vehicle-deer collisions over eight years. The majority of collisions occurred during winter months. Mirrors were used for three years. Ratios of deer killed between the treated section and the control area did not differ significantly during eight years of observation whether or not mirrors were in use. Neither warning signs nor mirrors had any effect on vehicle speeds. ��- 7 EVALUATION OF DEER-HIGHWAY CROSSING SAFETY MEASURES David F. Gordon Vehicle collisions with deer have occurred since. the automobile and improved roads permitted rapid, night-time traveL The recent boom in high-speed highway construction brought about an alarming increase in highway deer-kill. By 1961 annual reported road-kill of deer in Colorado had exceeded 1,000. Concern for the effect of this situation on our deer herds and public safety prompted our Division to initiate a study of means to alleviate this road hazard. A unique mirror arrangement~ first conceived by A. van de Ree, a Dutch lumber dealer (Grootendorst n.d.), was tested. Theoretically? the mirror reflected rays of headlights, like a spotlight~ into the eyes of deer approaching the road causing the animal to stop before it reached the traffic lane. P. S. OBJECTIVE To evaluate the effectiveness of deer along highways. of deer-scare devices DESCRIPTION OF AREA in reducing mortality During the initial phase of this study road-killed deer were reported by wildlife conservation officers from allover the state. From this information 26 miles of U.S. Highway 6-24 west of Rifle, Colorado (Fig. 1) were selected as the section with the highest incidence of road-kills. Highway 6-·24 runs east-west between the Bookcliffs 9 no more than one-half mile to the north, and the Colorado River, no more than one-half mile to the south. The road is generally straight with wide9 sweeping curves. Topography through the study area is mostly flat with occasional gullies running between the cliffs and the river. Two hills, one near each end of the study area, break the monotony of level to rolling roadway. Vegetation is predominantly shrubs with a few, scattered junipers. Cottonwoods grow along the river bottom. METHODS AND MATERIALS Road Signs Large deer crossing signs (Fig. 2) 6x6 feet, in reflecting letters, with the distance the danger zone extended on an appended sign, were erected at each end of two, continuous, 10-mile stretches west of Rifle. Other, similar signs (Fig. 3) were installed at each end of the mirror section informing motorists of this test. �- 8 - Mirrors Installation The van de Ree mirror (Fig. 4) is a strip of polished~ stainless steel 9x4~ inches bent at the middle. This forms two mirrors 4~ inches square reflecting light at right angles to each other. A brace between the backs of the mirrors), with two tapped holes for bolts9 permitted attachment to a steel T-post. Mirror assemblies were installed (F'ig. 5) along the 2\ miles of highway pr'odueing the highest incidence of collisions in the entire study area. The recommended method of installation (1/ van de Ree~ personal cOImIlunication) was to erect an assembly every 33 feet on alternate sides of the highway. Mirrors were set a uniform 34 inches above the ground and adjusted to re~ fleet across the highway. Our. installation (Fig. 6) spaced the assemblies at 50-foot intervals. In the western mile and one-quarter of the test section mirrors were affixed to the posts as recommended. In the eastern half of the section mirrors were set at varying heights and adjusted to reflect beams of headlights off the highway on the same side of the road as approaching traffic. Haintenance Maintenance consisted of checking the assemblies each month to readjust or replace mirrors and posts that had been knocked askew& damaged or removed; Mirrors were polished twice a year, just prior to spring and fall migrations. Vegetation that obscured mirrors was trimmed each summer. Road~·kill Road-kills of deer were r~porte.d each month by the local weo on Deer-Auto Accident Report forms (Appendix I). From these reports the data and location of the kill were reco rded , These da t a wer-e tested using ehi~square analysis as outlined by Snedecor (1950). RESULTS AND DISCUSSION Ef.fect of Road Signs and Mirrors on Motorists A total of 11'2 deer Were killed on 26 m i Las of U.S. Highway 6-24 west of Rifle in 12 months jus t pr.ior to installation of deer crossing si.gns, On the same stretch of Highway 44 we re killed in 12 morst hs immediately following. Hew ..• ever~ the signs were not erected to test their effectiveness in reducing vehicle-deer collisions. No con.tro L ar-ea was set up. Natural fluctuation of road-kill from year to year precluded using years before and after. lnstalla •.. tian as a valid comparison. 1/ G. Wijma October 22, & Zonen N.Vo~ Timber Me1"'C.hali1ts ...• Sa:wMil1ers~ 1963. A:peldoornp Holland 9 �N .J f ." I If ./ -r $ l : II'· " " ,r J.\V. •••~ ••JIff" f' ( ( J. ,r ~ . .I'"'' ~~ ~..-;'.'V..,.i.Wl ~ lI'-•••••••••• ,#fk •• (' l ( ~ ) j r"- ""'f~'fft·/ \f.;....~t'Clfilon ( II""~I :. \;J I ,I"" ~ _ ,.~4 .,.•• "" .f..\:Jo) 'H J'",I' .•.•. "'~' ~,", t,'~I''t. "-:,~ Leoend an (' J. "J '?, ~N,...v,,J .; ; ""I"..) +•..• Mile Markers J........L Mirror Section -' _. County Line v ~...".J: 'WI' lD90n L'; "'1-#L. { -',..' %.-'I\~ Fig. 1 -- Map of the Van de Ree mirror study area between Mesa-Garfield indicating the mirror section. County line and Rifle, Colorado �- 10 - DEER Figure 2 - Large Deer Crossing signs erected at either end of mirror study area west of Rifle, Colorado. �- 11 - Figure 3 - Signs informing of test section at either end of mirror section west of Rifle, Colorado. �- 12 - stove bolt T steeI fence post with silver top ,, ,, II II ,I II , .I ' --------4- .J.1" - .•....------w 'II 'II ", II II' II' ',I 1,1 t......;----'""'i- _It!. --t-----..J 1 , IJ J, ,, J I Fig. 4. The van de Ree deer-mirro.r assembly as used in Colorado. �- 13 - Figure 5 - Installation U.S. Highway of mirror posts along 6-24 west of Rifle, Colorado. �- 14 - ~. J \ ( Off shoulder def,eC'i2 ~1 I \ \ I \ ~I I -o 10 I \1 ~~\ o o I Across roadway deflection I, \ I I\ "t~---H ~~I-----IJI-- Fig. 6. The deflection of headlights placement along the highway. by the van de Ree mirrors and their �- 15 - Vehicle speeds through the mirror section and summar i.zed in Table 10 Neither the signs informing of the test section nor the presence of mirrors slowed traffic. This indicates, as confirmed by interviews with drivers, that the blink from the mirrors did not affect the average motorist. Table I - Average and Range of Speeds of Vehicles Timed Through Two Miles of the Mirror Section Before and After Mirror Assemblies Were Installedo Treatment Vehicle Average Before Installation 54.7 After Installation 1/ Signs mirror 1/ informing motorists sectiono Number of Vehicles 3004-82.8 133 3803-7901 89 of the test were erected. at each end of the. Effect Monthly (mph) Range Speeds of 'Mirrors on Road-Kill Road-Kill The monthly road-kill of deer since 1961 on the study area between Grand Valley and Rifle is summarized in Fig. 7. It became apparent the great majority of deer in this vicinity were killed in the months November to March when the animals were concentrated on their winter rangeo Yearly Road-Kill Data from the game crossing west of Grand Valley were compared with data from the crossing east of town to determine if the ratio of deer killed east and west of the town varied significantly from year to yearo Four years of data (Table 2) indicated no significant difference. (Calculated chi-square = 60920 Tabular values at the 5 and 50 percent levels with three degrees of freedom 21003 and 11.34 respectively). Since this comparison was made only to be certain there were no drastic changes in deer migration patterns data from the area west of Grand Valley were ignored in the previous and all subsequent paragraphs. �- 16 - PERCENT OF AVERAGE NUMBER OF ROAD-KILLED DEER PER MONTH (1961-1969) 15 10 c: G) o ~ G) a.. • 5 4 May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec Jan Feb Mar Apr Month Fig. 7. Monthly occurrence of deer killed by vehicles on U.S. Highway 6-24 between Grand Valley and Rifle, Colorado, January 1, 1961 through March 31, 1969. �- 17 - Table 2 - Numbers and Ratios of Road-Killed Deer in the Game CrossIngs West and East of Grand Valley ~ Colorado From January 13 1961 through Dece:Ilber 31, 1964. _____ N:;.:'-;::;.u;::;mber of Deer Killed .._ Ten Miles West Sixteen Miles East of Grand Valley of Grand Valley Year Ratio 1961 20 62 1:3.1 1962 33 75 1:2.3 1963 22 29 1:1.3 1964 31 '-t1 ! '7 Yearly road-kill in the section where mirrors were lrrstallec \·18s compared -r..Q t.h the kill in the rest of the study area (Table 3, Fig. 8) to see if a significant reduction in kill occurred after mirror3 wereosed. Al.t.hough the ratio of de e.r killed in the m.iX'ror sectLon , c cmpar ed w;:'t~ the rest of the study area 3 was wider after installation than before, statistical anal.ysi.s do es not: indicate a significant difference. (Cal cu.Lat.ed chi-·squan". = 16JfO. Tabular values at the 5 and 50 percent levels with seven degrees of freedom = 67.50 and 49.33 respectively.) Table 3 - Comparison of the Number. of Road-Killed Deer in tht? Mirror Test. Sect Lon and the Rest of t.he Study Area Between Grand Valley and Rf.f l e, Co1or ado Fr om J anuar)~ .... l..LJJj>.l: tfl'£.ough_M~~Sl:!:...) 1 ~_19 & ~'?....._. ._._. Number --..;;.;..::; Mirror Year of Road+Kf.Tl.ed Deer Secti~n Section Without Mirrors Total 1961 23 39 62 1962 28 47 75 1963 14 15 29 1%4 8 . 39 41 t+3 .53 1965 1./ 10 1966 20 .. "- c,;') 72 1967 20 48 68 ,.. ~7 89 1968-69 2/ _ 22 01 ._---------------1/ Mirrors were 1:../ Mirrors were replaced from April road-kill installed in .Lanu a.r y , 1965. the firs t wE';ek of Avril ~ 1968. 1, 1968 through Mareh JOL~ 1969. Number s r-epr'es •. .n.t; �- 18 - R 0 A D-KILL OF DEER 70 BY YEAR enco ~ .-., .. 60 It: U 0 , ~ co co en ~ - .~ ct cs: .5 e0 i "• > e •.. •• 0 at ~ 0 ~ ~ = Q. ~ .•.. "" I "... • ~ " 0 0 () .." .5 .. :>: .5 0 0- a ::I c:: ...,a CO CO ~ c: ~--G'-I I :! ,, :ie , _ ... kf 10 0 161 162 '63 '64 \ I I I 0--0 Section without [!}---E) Section with lIlirror. '65 '66 '67 lIlirror. '68 Year Fig. 8. Yearly total of road-killed deer in test sections on U.S. Highway 6-24 between Grand Valley and Rifle, Colorado, January 1, 1961 through March 31, 1969. �- 19 - In 1964~ the year before mirrors were installed, the ratio of road-kill in the mirror section compared to the control area dropped 73 percent below a similar comparison for 1963 (93.3 percent in 1963~ 20.5 percent in 1964). If the mirrors had been effective the ratio of kill in the mirror section compared to the control area should have decreased even further at least during the three winter months after their installation. It did not. Instead~ there was a 23 percent increase comparing October-December, 1964 with February-April, 1965 (5.3 percent before installation, 28.0 percent after installation). A similar comparison of the average road-kill for five years without mirrors to three years with mirrors yielded a 4 percent increase in kill when mirrors were in effect (31.4 percent without mirrors, 35.0 percent with mirrors). Probable Reaction of Deer to Mirrors I have noticed, and other observers concur~ that the reflection from a mirror is not like a spotlight, but rather a simple blink of light as the arc of the reflected rays cross the eyes of the observer. The. hoped for effect of this flash on deer was that it would be an attention· catcher which might hold the animal in place, temporarily pondering the blink, while the vehicle passes harmlessly. Mule deer are very adaptable creatures. After repeated attempts to drive these animals from hay fields and haystacks with cherry bombs and cracker shells, they almost ignore the explosions. It could be expected that the unobtrusive blink from a van de Ree mirror would similarly be ignored after a short time. Economics Installation Mirrors and posts cost $1.40 and $1.10 each respectively. Materials~ at this rate, for one mile of mirror assemblies spaced every 50 feet along the road cost $265. Installation took about l~ man-days per mile. Maintenance Assemblies were inspected regularly to keep them properly adjusted. They were subject to two types of damage, inherent hazards and vandalism (Fig's. 9 and 10). The former included mirrors and posts knocked down by road graders, mowing machines, snow plows, road repair machinery and vehicles out of control. The latter included theft of assemblies and use of mirrors as targets. The average yearly cost per mile for replacement of posts was $6.60; of mirrors3 $8.40. Monthly inspection for lost or damage.d assemblies averaged about ~ man-hour per mile. About; 3~ man-hours were required to polish one mile of mirrors. About 4-3/4 man-hours were expendE!d trimming vegetation around assemblies along a mile of highway. Highway maintenance personnel reported that it took about 2~ hours to mow one mile of the roadside with mirror assemblies every 100 feeL �tv o Fig. 9. Two types of mirror damage: Left - hit by road grader; Right - shot by vandals. �- 21 - Figure 10 - Mirror post sheared off by road grader. �- 22 - CONCLUSIONS From information compiled by this study I conclude that van de Ree deermirrors did not reduce the road-kill of deer. More information on why deer cross highways and what factors are connected with vehicle-deer collisions is badly needed. LITERATURE CITED Grootendorst, P. (no date). The road crossing by game animals is no longer a problem. Article on van de Ree deer-mirrors. Reported in the Dutch Magazine De Spiegel (Complete citation not available). Snedecor, G. W 1961. Statistical methods applied to experiments in agriculture and biology. The Iowa State University Press, Ames, 535. 0 Prepared by ~~~~~~ ~ David Fo Gordon Assistant Wildlife _ Researcher �APPENDIX I .---'~--General Map of Vicinity: DEER-AUTO ACCIDENT REPORT fill out one form for each accident or highway kTIr Date of Accident or Report. _ Time of Accident (if known), _ County _ Road xo. (Fed .• State, Co. ) -------- i' Location -------------------- Reported by: 0 No 0 Crossing Marked Yes 0 No 0 Deer Killed: Adult 0 Fawn 0 Sex 0 Officer No. Killed, On Known Deer Crossing Yes this accident -------------No. Injured, this accident -------------- Title Send Completed Forms at End of Month to: Damage to Vehicle (if known)'-------- Ray Boyd 1130 South Third Montrose, Colorado Approximate Personal Injuries: 0 None Fatal Back, Cost to Repair $ -----Minor n --.J. Serious 0 0 Front Not Known 0 ��July, 1969 - 25 - JOB PROGRESS REPORT State of C~O~L~O~RAD==~O~ Project No. W-38-R-23 Deer-Elk Work Plan No. 6 Job No. Investigations 11 Evaluation of the Effects of Spring-Summer Grazing by Deer on Alfalfa Job Title: Period Covered: Personnel: _ April 1, 1968 through October 31, 1968. David F. Gordon, Marion C. Coghill. John F. Corey, Julius J. Klein, Ruel A. Loucks, Orville E. Lance, and Jerry L. Robinson. ABSTRACT Study fields were prepared at two locations, Rifle Gap Recreation Area and Little Hills Experiment Station. The field at the former location was planted and a stand of alfalfa established. Preliminary steps to locate paired plots were taken. Deer counts were made at both study fields until field preparation precluded the counts. A pattern similar to counts made in other areas was observed at Rifle Gap. The area of the field showing highest deer numbers was determined at Little Hills confirming plans to divide the field into natural-deer-use section, control section, and severe-grazing section. ��- 27 - EVALUATION OF THE EFFECTS OF SPRING-SUMMER GRAZING BY DEER ON ALFALFA David Fo Gordon This is the first progress to the following questions report on an all out effort to see if answers can be found: 1. How many deer per acre does it require to reduce yield of first growth alfalfa under adequate irrigation if deer leave after the last frost of spring? 2. Does summer grazing reduce production? 3. How many deer per acre does it require to reduce yield of second growth alfalfa when unirrigated during second growth? of second growth alfalfa with no irrigation Study areas are located at Rifle Gap Recreation Area and Little Hills Experiment Station. The material in this report will be divided into two sections, one for each study area. .(~. P. S. OBJECTIVE To determine alfalfa. the effect of spring-summer grazing by deer on production of SEGMENT OBJECTIVES 1. To establish stands of alfalfa on which to conduct 2. To determine numbers spring and summer. 3. To establish 4. To determine if natural grazing by wild deer on second growth alfalfa causes a reduction in production. of deer that frequent the study. the study fields throughout paired plots in the study fields. METHODS AND MATERIALS - RIFLE GAP AREA Study Field Preparation of Field In April soil samples were taken from the study field according to recognized procedures and sent to the soils laboratory in Fort Collins for analysis to �- 28 - determine the units of nitrate and phosphate necessary to enrich the field. The appropriate fertilizer (phosphate 200 lbo/A) was spread on the field on May 13, 1968 by Consumers Co-op of Fruita~ Colorado. The old lateral ditches which had been used for flood irrigation were leveled out. The main ditch was straightened and the old course filled in. Fortyone check dams were installed in the new main ditch to prevent its cutting a deep gullyo Plowing~ disking and seeding (Ladak alfalfa @ 15 lb./A; Colorado 37 oats @ 30 lb/A) were done between May 20 and June 1, 1968 by the George H. Clutter Company of Grand Junction, Colorado. Irrigation System The field was watered by a Wade-Rain sprinkler system using Rain-Bird sprinkler heads supplied by Thompson Pipe and Steel Company of Denver3 Colorado. Water was pumped from a 300-gallon, oblong stock--tank set in the ditch. A settling pond, approximately 20x60 feet~ was excavated above the tank to catch the silt washed down the new ditch. Water from the settling pond passed through a culvert and into the tank about 2 feet below. Debris was removed from the water by an aluminum screen filter set over the tank. Due to limited irrigation pipe. two tank set-ups were needed to cover the field. One was placed at the west end of the field, the other approximately in the middle of the field. Water pressure to the sprinkler heads was supplied by a high head-eentrifugal pump~ model SS-2H-7, manufactured by Construction Machinery Company of Waterloo, Iowa. The pump was powered by a l2-horsepower, air-cooled engine, model AENLD, manufactured by WiscGnsin Motor Corporation of Milwaukee, Wisconsin. The sprinkler system consisted of 30-foot lengths of 4-inch~ aluminum mainline with a tee-valve every 60 feet. Lateral lines were 30-foot lengths of 2-inch, aluminum pipe with sprinkler heads spaced every 60 feet. The pump was operated 24 hours a day and lateral lines were changed at l2-hour intervals. Hay Harvest Hay was harvested ments were made. the first week of September by a local rancher. No measure- Study Plots The study field was surveyed and mapped by the Northwest Regional Engineer. An aerial photograph was taken after the alfalfa had sprouted. Fifty-two plots were located after the hay was harvested. They were uniformly oriented at right angles to the long axis of the field in order to facilitate irrigation. Plots measured 15x200 feet and were spaced 30 feet apart beginning 60 feet in from the west edge of the newly planted alfalfa. In the northern two-thirds of the field plots were set a uniform 60 feet south of the fence along the road. In the southern third plots were set a uniform 30 feet south of the telephone line �- 29 - along the ditch. In this particular segment of the field, only eight of the plots were 200 feet long. The. remaining ten were ISO feet long because the field was too nar row , All measurements were arbitrary in order to facilitate farming. Deer Numbers Deer that frequented the field were counted and the tallies recorded on a standard Game Damage Form (Appendix I) for each night of counting. The results were averaged and graphed to determine the hours of greatest activity. Deer number s were recorded from a p Lckup parked on the road beside the field using a hand-held spotlight and 7x35 Bushnell binoculars. Counting wa s begun April 1. and continued until May 9~ 1968 after which plowing was begun, Counts were made at half-hour intervals from about one hour b e f ore sunset. until 8:00 P.M. MST and on the hour thereaf:=e.:r. until 6:00 A.M. DESCRIPTION OF AREA - RIFLE GAP AREA The Rifle Gap study area (SEtNEt~ Sec. 34, mvtNWt3 Sec. 35, T4S~ R93W, 6th P.M.) lies in the valley of West Rifle Creek, 11 miles north of Rifle) Garfield County, Colorado (Fig. 1). The field is approximately 16 acres in area and is oriented east-west (Fig. 2). The seil type in the field is clay loam. The western two-thirds of the field is bisected by an irrigation ditch which continues along the south edge of the eastern portion of the field. The West Rifle Creek channel, about 20-30 feet deep, traverses the southern edge of the field. A road borders the field on the north. South of the creeks opposite the weste.rn two= th.irds of the field, is a steep ridge of mixed pinyon-juniper and sagebrush. Beyond this and extending dOl.v!l to the creek opposite the eastern third of the study field are extensive sagebrush areas. Towe r Lng above everything is the Grand Hogback covered with pinyon- juniper, sageb rush and oakbru sh , North of the road is a steep hillside of predom Lrant Ly p Lnyon-ejunLp tion. This is split by ravines at each end of the study field. er vegeta- East of the field is a rise covered with sagebrush. At the norrhwe st end are scattered groves of o akbr-ush , south of which is old pas ture-Tand , �- 30 R93W N 34 '~ ~~I" ••• ," -~ • ali" •....•.. ""/4: c: 4 Y ~ ~ ~1"f'H'" \111\ 2 t ," """'~ ~ ~ ~II' ~ ~ 10 II t: .•. ;: 'IJq,,,""'I\<:;' ~fl(" u S. 6-2" Fig. 1. Vicinity map of Rifle Gap alfalfa damage study field. �I·..--""...------....."-. •. " •. ' ... .0 ._ 00 •. " •.•. .. t' ••• .0 0 ! . . ... :. .0 .' ..... .' , .0 .0 00 ,... w Study N Fig. 2. , , ""--.., .0 Map of Rifle Gap alfalfa damage study field. plot corners �•.32 - RESULTS MW Study Rreparation DISCUSSION Field of the Field Preparation and planting of the study field was accomplished~ but not as thoroughly as desired; The first attempt failed due' to an inadequate tractor for the plow. Hhen a i lar ge r tractor was obtained plowing was completed but lateral ditches were not well leveled nnd the plows were not set deep enough to turn under all the old vegetation on the field. As a result there is a considerable amount of older aged alfalfa scattered throughout the new growth. Seeding was fair except. for several nar-row strips that were skipped, There was one spot in· the southeast cor.ner of the southern one.,third of the field that was completel,; missed" It will have to be reseeded next season. Irrigation of the new seeding was beset with troubles until August), when the summer rains came. The pump was difficult to prime" It had been equipped with an automatic priming device which did not work. Instead of priming the pump , it somehow drew wat ar into the combustion chamber of the engine. This caused carbon to come loose and lodge between the piston and eylinder head mashing the ring grooves at one point on the piston and preventing proper expansion of the piston rings. This appreciably reduced the effiCiency of the pump_ The pump was operated for"'12 days before it was taken to the shop for repairs, After four days it was in operation again ~nd this tim~ ran fer a month and a half. Sufficient water was provided during the second irrigation to sprout and maintain the planting in circler: around each spr·inkler head. There was not enough pressure to overlap water between sprinklers sufficiently to maintain the alfalfa after it s pr ou t.ed, Corrsc que ntLy the growth pat.t.er'n , especially iTh the eastern one-third of the field resembled a string of beads (Fig., 3) By the first part of August it began to rain, By the end of August the plants that had not dried up grew until a fair stand was es tab H shed., except in the eastern third of the field as mentioned aboveo Study Plots Paired, stu'dy plots are not t:'o be' selected until next._summer at f Lr s t cu tt i.ng, The 52 plots located this year will be harvested and the hay from each weighed to determine- which. p'l.ot.s can be LegLt Imat e Lyc pa Lrad , �33 - �- 34 - The. percent of the average number of deer per hour (Table 1) was graphed on time (Fig. 4) to determine hours of greatest activity on the field. Numbers peaked at 8:00 P.M. MST confirming results of previous counts in other areas of the state; Billy Creek Management Area, Little Hills Experiment Station and Egnar. The highest hourly count was 110 deer at 8:00 P.M. on May 8, 1968. Deer entered the field at three points, the east and west ends and the south side. Few deer were seen within a 300-foot radius of the counting station on nights of counting, but tracks and pellet-groups were as numerous in this areas asve Lsewhar-e on the field. This indicates that deer frequent the entire field fairly evenly except on nights of counting. Table 1 - Numbers of Deer and Times of Visits on Visits on Rifle Gap Alfalfa Damage Study Field, 1968. Date of Count Mountain 1800 1900 2000 Standard Time 2100 2200 2300 2400 0100 0200 0300~0400 4-3 o 15 15 4 6 12 4-10 1 26 66 48 41 35 33 27 984 4-17 o 12 65 41 59 46 43 10 8 19 4-24 10 85 96 64 39 18 27 16 29 5-1 34 42 89 87 68 72 67 35 5-8 26 62 110 78 67 65 17 Total 71 242 441 322 280 248 187 5 0500 0600 27 3 2 13 16 7 o 22 24 18 4 46 52 52 13 49 70 54 84 2 o o 137 167 155 207 42 20 �- 35 - PERCENT OF AVERAGE NUMBERS OF DEER (1968) 15 - c: CD o •... CD a. 5 oL--A--~--~~--~--~~--~~~~1800 19002000 210022002300 2400 0100 0200 03000400 0500 0600 Mountain Standard Time Fig. 4. Percent of average number of deer per hour on alfalfa damage field. (Rifle Gap Recreation Area, Garfield County, Colorado, 1968). study �- 36 - METHODS AND MATERIALS - LITTLE HILLS AREA Study Field Preparation of Field In April a soil survey was conducted as outlined under th2 Rifle Gap section. No fertilizer ·'iJas applied this year. The field was cleared of brush and large holes filled. It was then plowed and d lskad , Initial ".70Tk 'ira.8 done by the George H. Clutter Company of Grand Junction. After the field had been irrigated once it was disked by Little Hills personnel to control weeds. They were not able to complete a second disking due to cold weather. Irrigation System A well for irrigation water was drilled and a L9.yne-Bowler.~ turbin.e pump activated by a 20-horsepower electric motor installed. The work was done by, and the pump purchased from, Layne-Western Company of Denver. A Redi-Rain sprinkler system using Rain-Bird sprinkler heads was purchased from Munro Supply Company of Grand Junction. The sprinkler system was installed and tested by Little Hills personnel. Mainline consisting of 74, 30-foot lengths of 6-inch, aluminum pipe followed by 40, 3D-foot lengths of 4-inch aluminum pipe was laid out along tle north edge of the field below the road. This was sufficient pipe to extend along only half of the field at a time and had to be moved to irrigate the other half. Tee-valve openings were spaced every 60 feet along the mainline. Lateral lines consisting of 30-foot and 20-foot lengths of 3-inch, alum"num pipe with sprinkler heads spaced at 50-foot intervals ran from the tee-valves. Study Plots The study field was surveyed and mapped Aerial photographs we re taken. The map sections of approximately 20 acres each study field next summer after the field by the No r thwes t Regional Eng Lnee r , was tentatively divi.ded into three to be specifically located on the i.splanted. Deer Numbers ThE. numbers of deer frequenting t he study field before it was plowed were determined as outlined under the Rifle Gap section, between April 1.and 30, 1968. �- 37 - DESCRIPTION OF AREA - LITTLE HILLS AREA The Little Hills study area lies in the valley of the Dyy Fork of the Piceance Creek about 34 miles SW of Meeker, Rio Blanco County~ Colorado (Fig. 5). The study field is approximately 60 acres (Fig. 6)0 It is a long, narrow strip of land oriented east-west approximately 5 miles east of Little Hills headquarters (E!zNW!z;~ N!zSE!z;~ Sec. 10 and S!zSW!z;s Sec. ll~ TIS, R96W, 6th P.M.). The soil type in the field ranges from sandy shale on the alluvial fans extending into the field through sandy loam to loam. The course of the creek extends the length of the field and meanders from side to side. A road borders the field along the north edge. North of the road is a narrow sagebrush slope above which tower steep hillsides and sandstone cliffs in a pinyon-juniper type. At the west end a small canyon comes down through the bluffso South of the field are steep hillsides of predominantly browse and pinyonjuniper type. The major browse spe.cies are mountain mahog any , bitterbrush and serviceberry. The hills on the south are split by Corral Gulch~ a major canyon opening into Dry Fork half way down the length of the fieldo This canyon is predominantly sagebrush typeo At the west end of the field is a smaller and steeper canyon splitting the hillside. At the east end of the field are corrals and buildings tently occupied. which are intermit- RESULTS AND DISCUSSION Study Field Preparation of Field The study field is to lie fallow until spring, the field, apply fertilizer and plant. Irrigation 1969~ when plans are to plane System The irrigation well was a great success minute (Appendix 11)0 supplying a steady 350 gallons per The mainline of the sprinkling system was found to be too crooked when laid out along the north edge of the field. Consequently it will be moved to the south edge for permanent installationo It will be necessary to purchase additional mainline to complete the system. �N .,/ BASE r- LIN E 3 I 2 I ~ ,- TIS + I Colo. I,. 19 2.0 2,1 22 23 30 U 2& 27 ~. I R98W Fig. 5. 00 1)-7.' 18 17 W I 9 fa , Vicinity map of Little Hills alfalfa damage study fields. �1 Pasture Pasture e 1 Pasture 6 -- - - - - ----------- - - - -- ---- "... - --r -\ -- ' ...• ....• ...• "" ."",- ,-",\(. I I ~ -'" N Fig, 6, Map of Little Hills alfalfa damage study fields, I I w \ " \.0 �~ 40 ~. The preponderance of deer activity was located in the west end of the study field. This suggests that the natural-deer~use field be located at the west end. The middle sect Lcn , opposite Corral Gulch, a natural deer p en , would be fenced as the ccn trc I field. The eastern end with the fewest deer wou l.d serve as a test of the effect of severe grazing by sheep o~!the physiology of alfalfa. Deer Numbers Re lar Iwe Ly few deer were seen in the study field (Table 2). We hope this was caused by a lack of preferred vegetation and will be corrected when alfalfa is established. Counts were terminated early because of the scarcity of deer. Table 2 ~ Numbers of Deer and Times StCldy Fie1d2 1968. of Visits on Little Hills Alfalfa Standard Time Damage Date of Count 1800 1900 2000 2100 4-1 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 3 5 B 2 4 5 4-15 5 0 0 1 5 4 8 7 0 0 5 1+ 0 ",~2"i 0 5 1 1 6 0 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 4~29 0 0 6 11 6 8 7 12 16 5 7 0 0 'T.:'otal5 5 7 12 1'7 12 22 22 21 10 1~ 8 5 Mountain 2200 2300 2400 0100 0200 0300 0400 0500 0600 ~ Prepared by :--~~ David Fo Gordon Assistant Wildlife _ Researcher �- 41 - APPENDIX I D.AMAGE STUDY FOlThI Project W - 38 - R Date ------------------------ Location -------------------- • ; Time O":~s'~rlTer ------------------- 'Number' I I Wind Barometer jTemperature tk;r; IWeai.:.lJ~:r 1 \ " of ! Deer I Remarks i ! ------~----------------------~~~-------+----------~--~---~--------------------------- _____________-+ ~ 4_----~--i--- .~,-------------! ! ; , I ____~------~--------_r--.~-------4, j .-l--_- .--1I .1 ------~------------_4------------~--------~---------+--~------------- -------------------- �--. - ..•.. -y---_.- --..,..----_._- - -- - ..,.... ~ l..""- - 42 -- APPENDIX II WELL CAPACITY TEST DATA 'oate ~i=!y. 2.0.) l.9.6.3 . '.;Vell if 9.Cl.~... . . Job; •..CQ.\.o.r.adQ.. .oap~r:tc:€;n.t. ..QLB.alJ1e..•...f.Ls.h ...8<.. Location ..... LLt:t.l.e ...Hl.l.I.s...~..J\l8Q(..Br'r··Co.I.o::c.;:;:::.. '13........•...•.........•...... FtParks Air Line Length..... f.J .8C.lr.l.C..L'Lne _•...................• Pump Set At ..•.................. l t. .J..' Static Water Level .._ 5.1.~_:-.9.~' _ " Ori fice Tirne Orifice i Inches i I _••.4.'.' Air Line Read:ng GPM Ft. Air Line Reading .._ _ 1n. x Pumping Level (Ft.) i 4:00 4:01 4:02 4:03 4:05 4:07 4:03 4:09 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 70 70 70 70 70 70 '70 70 70 70 70+ 70+. 70+ I I 4: [2 4: 15 i I 4: 18 4:30 5:00 5:30 7:00 7:01 7:02 7:03 7:05 7: 10 7: 15 7:30 7:45 8:00 9:00 10:00 ··;'i : 00 l2:00 i I I .i 201 201 201 201 201 201 201 201 201 201 201 201 20[ 201 201 345 345 345 345 345 345 345 345 345 345 345+ .345+ 345+ ; . ; I i I I 1 i , Midnight 571-7" 2 iT. I nu+es ,i 57'-6" m nu+es 57'-5" 8 hours 57'-3" ::.gge Kc rws.n Little ::ills Re~~i"~$ I IIl Ct oudy I I I' II I I i I ! we+er Clear I I ! [' -8" If/.c. t e;- s~·i i I c12c~ Soma SOI.G Almost s2~d .. :.;~ . .v ~ A coup I c. 61 r - i It 611-2" 61 '-311 I ········_·· I I ! RECOVER,Y .,.,. , I Feet . In ............•............................ Draw Down I I i II I cc: I 57'=6" I 58'-10" ! 59'-0" -, I I 59'-1" 59'-1" ·1 I 59'-1" I 591-1" i 591-1" ! ! 59'-1" 591-1" 591-1" 591-1" 591-111 591-2" 591-2" 601 -I !" 60 I-II" 601- I ! " 60 I-Ill' 60 I -[ l" 60 I -I ill 601-~!" 611-0" 6 I'-0" 61 r -01' I ! I I i i7'.1 nu+e 3~!.............• _ ~i 3'-9" Shut CQ\'iii pi..::7:;J. .. �- 43 - APPENDIX II \;lE:U.. LOG . Type .) Wet;;"! of .Vlaterial Lo c. I ype Dri II i n s I HOLE I R_G_7_' j'_~_I.:.y _ DIAMETC:R: 25 i 70~ so i I - clay G 130 ib,oke~ rock, sand & si Itstones with Iclay s+re aks x 1 1-" .;;u 150 !ho.d .. sandstone _--,-1 ,,""-8_ in. fro ri1:......._-'-''''C- __ ft. to __ '~'~_ ____ in. rrom ••• 70 ____ in. from _ to --'it. _ CASING RECORD i, r. Cem ent ed from I'" -- ! P:ci .• Casing 'j Size-# kind __ Siz e __ , kind --.J:jojjj i~. rc t.om ..... to " ,v " PerrorcrCG Size-J kind __ Size_, kind we: I ~,avel TEST DATA Date T est e d 0 Constant ..• ~ro:;-; " f,G~ :3C1 7::; ,~' :~: O';l ;=-c~:--.: : -s\:,~ . ,'_,2._' ':.--1_2_2_, _,_';;_~_~_'::; _ T yp e 0 f P u rn p ~b,: L en 9th Ccsi:-.S -:t.O;';1 ?acked _ ;::,:-,""::;:------------- f T e s t~8~~~,.'...,_,so....'_ _ ;y..-;~ Yielc_31.5 _ Dr cwdo wn .<-~T___L_Tl I _ R. t.ar son Car l ---i---_uI- .;YNF -\',IFST=R\: I i , being duiy sworn, I , ! ! .. o d it i o o nc Src te o i Cc io rc cio , County l p p o er n e ce s s cry to o r, c om pl t e o Decerr:ber ana I he I rn e :--: ~;~:;.,-. lies s crn e , IS rru o C7 :-'15 ) ss \ 17-:-h me this w e .. log. Of_~A::l.'i,-ac;::"'''~" Su b s cr ib e d cn d s w o r n to before My Comm is s i on e xp ire s jf is described; r _ •....J .•.._ .•" U=-O he 6 _ v\';-' ��- 45 - JOB FINAL REPORT State of COLORADO --------~~~~~--------------- Project No. W-38-R-23 Deer-Elk Work Plan No. 6 Job No. Job Title: Evaluation of Deer, Lagomorph and Porcupine Use on Production of Pinto Beans Period Covered: Personnel: May 1, 1968 through October Investigaticns 13 31, 1968. David F. Gordon, Raymond J. Boyd, Clifford Coghill, Patrick Waters, Millard Graham, R. Bruce Gill, J. Richard Adams, Jerry L. Robinson, Wilmer W. Dicken9 Terry L. Dicken~ and Darrel Dicken. ABSTRACT The effect of animal depredations on pinto beans was studied over four years. Analysis of data from the last two years did not indicate a significant reduction in production of pinto beans due to any single species of animal. Counts indicated animal numbers peaked about 8:00 P.M. MST. By midnight 60-70 percent of the total count of the night had been attained. Animal distribution in the field was recorded. Evidence of deer and cottontail use of beans was recorded. No jackrabbit or porcupine depredation of beans was observed. Jackrabbits were seen eating weeds. Temperature had the most severe effect on pinto bean production. �- 46 - Other photographs on this study were reprooduced in Colorado Report, July, 1968, part three. Photo of Allis-Chalmers page 333. model 90 thresher used to harvest Photo of procedure scales, page 334. used in weighing Photo of portable counting Photo of deer damage Game Research pinto beans, pinto bean samples with Chatillon tower on location, page 336. to growing pinto bean plant, page 348. Photo of pinto bean that was eaten by deer after the plants were cut, page 349. Photo of pinto bean plants eaten by cottontails and cut leaves on the ground, page 350. Photo of pinto bean plant with page 351. showing size of plants larger leaves cut and left on the ground, photo of pigweed that has been eaten by a jackrabbit, Photo of pocket gopher mounds and withered page 352. pinto bean plant, page 353. �- 47 - EVALUATION OF DEER, LAGOMORPH AND PORCUPINE USE ON PRODUCTION OF PINTO BEANS David F. Gordon This report sunnnarizes four years of data compiled during a study to determine whether damage is inflicted on pinto beans by game animals and unprotected species. The first year!s data indicated the need for a new design. This new design was implemented the second season. The third year yielded incomplete data due to unforeseen circumstances. This last year production data from the entire study field have been recorded and analyzed. P. S. OBJECTIVE To determine the effects tion of pinto beans. of deer, lagomorph METHODS and porcupine use on produc- AND MATERIALS Pinto Bean Production Data Plot Design The study field was arbitrarily divided into quarters and four treatments replicated in each segment (Fig. 1). Each treatment plot measured 28~ x 325 feet and contained eight rows of beans to facilitate farming. Plots were fenced by setting braced creosote posts at each corner. T-posts were driven at lO-foot intervals between the wooden posts. was stapled to the corner posts and stretched with a hand winch. Steel Wire Control plots were marked at their corners and left unfenced. Plots which permitted use of the beans by deer only were surrounded with 39-inch-wide, woven-wire fencing the lower portion of which was reinforced with l-inchmesh, poultry netting 36-inches wide to exclude lagomorphs and porcupines. Plots which permitted use of the beans by lagomorphs and porcupines only were surrounded by two courses of 39-inch-wide~ woven-wire fencing, the lower edge of which was raised 4-9 inches above the ground. Plots which excluded all animals were surrounded by 78 inches of woven-wire fencing, the lower portion of which was reinforced with poultry netting as described above. Double courses of woven-wire fencing were clipped together with shoat rings. Poultry netting was hung on the woven wire by the same method. The ends of each fenced plot were closed by removable gates. Gates were hung after planting in the spring. Two or three times each season they were removed and replaced to permit passage of the cultivator. They were removed again and stored after sampling of the beans was completed each year. �~ 4&- N Countlno _ ..••---- ,-",-- -7 '" ,-.".. ." .".. -r-> ;'»" ;,~;' I 0 Weother Shelter ", ,'" ---- """" ;' ..•. """" ", ",,,, ,,, '\ e Soil-Moisture Stock R - Rodent Exclosure .0 - Deer Exclosure T - Total Exclosure C - Control Fig. 1. - Mapof the study field of pinto beans at Egnar indicating location of the plots and their treatment. �- 49 - Farming Practices Beans were planted in early June each year. The preferred variety was Certified San Juan Pinto Bean seed. Idaho III Pinto Bean seed~ an early maturing variety, was used in 1967 when the study field had to be replanted the first part of July. Treflan herbicide was sprayed on the field and disked in previous to planting. Beans were drilled in rows 38 inches apart. Herbicide application reduced weeds a significant amount. Cultivation, two or three times each year, further reduced weeds between the. rows and conserved moisture. Weeds in the rows that survived herbicide treatment were removed by hoeing. Beans were cut during the end of September or beginning of October and left in windrows to cure. The cutter lifted four rows at a time which were raked into a single windrow. The next four rm.;rswere lifted and raked into the same windrow as the cutter returned. Thus each plot contained only one windrow at harvest. Beans were harvested by a 1962 ~ Allis-Chalmers, model 90 combine. Sampling Procedure Pinto beans from the entire windrow inside the plot were collected in sacks as they came through the elevator of the combine. The forward motion of the combine was stopped when the pickup came abreast of the corner posts of a plot. When the elevator was cleared of these beans a sack was placed over its mouth and the combine proceded through the plot stopping again at the other end until all the. beans had been threshed out and collected in the sack , This procedure was repeated for each plot. Sacks of beans thus collected were loaded into a pickup truck and taken to ranch headquarters where they were weighed to the nearest quarter pound on a Chatillon scale. The empty sacks were collected and weighed as a group. The average weight of the sacks to the nearest tenth of a pound was then subtracted from the gross weight of the sa'1lpleto yield the net, uncleaned weight of beans in the sample. The entire harvest of the field was trucked to the elevator in town and sampled by standard procedure to determine the percent of dirt and waste in the harvest o Wildlife Numbers Data and Distribution The number of animals present in the study field each hour was determined by visual count using an aircraft landing light and 7x35 Bushnell binoculars. Counts were made from atop a portable counting tower at least once a week beginning the end of June and continuing until the beans were harvested, or until animal activity in the field ceased. Nightly counts began about one hour before sunset and continued every half hour until 8:00 P.M. MSTo Thereafter, until 6:00 A.M., hourly counts were conducted until a pattern indicating when peak numbers of animals had been in the field was determined. When such �- 50 - a pattern had been established~ hourly counts were made until the peak had passed. Tallies were recorded on Damage Study Forms (Appendix I) and the animal's location marked on a map of the field (Appendix II). A search for pellet groups was made after each night of counting. The observer walked around the field looking for fresh deer tracks. When found they were followe.d and the. area checked for pellet-groups which were tallied and marked with spray paint. It was necessary to distinguish between droppings of the night and older in cases of unmarked pellet-groups. Depredation The locations of animals observed during hourly counts were marked in the field. The morning after counting these spots were visited and plants (both beans and weeds) checked for evidence of grazingo These plants were then compared with untouched plants~ described and photographedo Small Mammal Census A small mammal census to determine the species of animals smaller than cottont a i L:rabb.it;s was conducted according to the North American Census of Small Mam..malsmethod (Appendix III) on four~ permanent transects; two each east and west of the study field in the two predominant vegetative typeso One additional transect was run the last year of the study within the bounds of the study fieldo Weather and Soil-Moisture Data Temperature and relative humidity were recorded at the study field on a Kahlsico~ 3l-day, recording hygro thermograph Precipitation records were taken from the raingauge at ranch headquarters. Soil-moisture reading·s were recorded weekly at permanent stations located at each end of lines quartering the field and at the center (Fig. 1)0 0 Analysis of Data Production data were subjected to analysis of variance. Each yearis data had to be analyzed separately because different varieties of seed were usedo Animal numbers were plotted on a graph to determine the hour of heaviest use of the field. Distribution was plotted on a map. No correlation between animal numbers and bean production was possible. No correlation between pellet-groups and deer numbers was possibleo Weather and soil-moisture data were recorded each year and compared to produr::tiondata by inspectiono �DESCRIPTION OF AREA A study on the effects of depredation by protected game animals and unprotected species of wildlife was LnLtiated in the spring of 1965 on t.he Wilmer W. Dicken ranch, one mile west and two miles north of Egnar~ San Miguel County, Colorado (Fig. 2). A lO-acre field of pinto beans located southeast of ranch headquarters (SE1z;,SW1z;,Sec. 34, T43N~ R91W9 t-.J"MPM) was leased for the purpose. The study field was bordered on the east by a sagebrush flat (Fig. 3) adjacent to an extensive area of chained pinyon-juniper. North and south of this flat and the field were sections of standing pinyon-juniper. Between the study field and other cultivated fields extending more than threequarters of a mile to the west was a narrow (less than 200 feet wide) strip of the same type. RESULTS AND DISCUSSION Evaluation of Bean Production Data Table 1 summarizes production records from the 1968 crop of beans. Analysis of variance of these data indicated no statistically significant difference in average production from any of the treatments at the 10 percent leveL (Calculated F = 0.139. Tabular F with 3 and 9 degrees of freedom at the .10 level = 2.81). Similar analysis of the 1967 data indicated a significant difference in average production between the extreme treatments9 control and total exclosure (Table 2). (Calculated F = 3.867. Tabular F with 3 and 6 degrees of freedom at the .10 Leve I = 3029). The two years could not be compared because different varieties of seed were used each year o Evaluation Wildlife of Wildlife Data Numbers In 1967 nightly counts of wildlife in the study field were begun on July 19 (Table 3). Deer (Odocoileus hemionus) wex e. observed on five nights of count·· ing. Cottontail rabbits (Sylvilagus sp ,) were in the field on five nights. Jackrabbits (Lepus californicus) were observed on 13 nights. Only three porcupines (Erethizon dorsatum) were seen the entire summer. In 1968 (Table 3) deer were observed in the field on five counts during three nights between June 27 and August 21. Cottontails were observed in the field on only one night, July 16. Jackrabbits were observed between July 11 and 30 during three nights of counting. Porcupines were never seen iE the field. �- 52 - To Slick Rock (6 lIliles) RI9W "~ 35 34 33 T43N T43N ~l I Farm Dicken ~ - 36 ~ 2 3 4 1 l)~ • I II 10 9 12 T42N T42N r 1 Egnar 15 16 14 13 ~ To Fig. 2. Dove Creek RI9W , (9 miles) Vicinity map of the pinto bean damage Wilmer Dicken farm, Egnar, San Miguel study area on the County, Colorado. �- 53 - . C"'"l �- 54 - Table 1 - Weights of Samples of Pinto Beans Collected From Plots Containing Eight Rows of Beans Each 325 Feet Long on the Damage Study Field at the Wilmer W. Dicken Ranch, Egnar, San Miguel County, Weight Uncleaned Plot Colorado, 1968. in Pounds of Beans Dockage Recleaned NW Quarter Control 44.4 3.1 41.3 Deer Exclosure 33.4 2.3 31.1 Rodent Exc10sure 50.4 3.5 Total Exclosure 52.9 3.7 Control 52.8 3.7 Deer Exclosure 32.4 203 30 1 Rodent Exclosure 3309 2.4 31.5 Total Exclosure 51.9 306 48.3 49.2 SW Quarter 0 NE Quarter Control 58.4 Deer Exclosure 66.3 406 61.7 Rodent Exclosure 5904 4.2 55.2 Total Exc10sure 5204 3.7 48.7 Control 56.9 4.0 52.9 Deer Exclosure 63.8 4.5 59.3 Rodent Exc10sure 5~.8 309 51.9 Total Exclosure 45.8 3.2 42.6 54.3 SE Quarter �- 55 - Table 2 - Weights of Samples of Pinto Beans Collected From Plots Containing Eight Rows of Beans Each 325 Feet Long on the Damage Study Field at the Wilmer Dicken Ranch, Egnar, San Miguel County, Colorado, 1961. Weight Uncleaned Plot in Pounds of Beans Dockage Recleaned NW Quarter Control 67 17 50 Deer Exclosure 138 35 103 Rodent Exclosure 155 39 116 Total Exclosure 142 35 107 Control 123 31 92 Deer Exclosure 120 30 90 Rodent Exclosure 111 28 83 Total Exclosure 158 40 118 Control 63 16 47 Deer Exclosure 106 27 79 Rodent Exclosure 127 32 95 Total Exclosure 129 32 97 Deer Exclosure 189 47 142 Rodent Exclosure 162 40 122 Total Exclosure 204 51 153 SW Quarter E Half E Half (Idaho Ill) (San Juan a/) Control ~/ Weights from this variety analysis. of pinto beans are not included in the statistical �Table 3. Summary of total number of nightly counts and animals counted per hour on pinto bean damage study field, Wilmer Dicken Ranch, Egnar, San Miguel County, Colorado, 1967 and 1968. 1968 ~/ 1967 Total per Hour Number of Nightly Counts r-l 'r-! s:: co oI.J 'r-! s:: 0 0. :I oI.J oI.J ,..\G 0 0 C,) co ..., 0 p.., 1-1 Q) Q) MST Q) U 1967+1968 Total per Hour Number of Nightly Counts r-l 'r-! co oI.J s:: 0 oI.J oI.J ,..\G 0 0 C,) co ..., 1-1 U 1-1 Q) Q) Total per Hour Number of Nightly Counts r-l 'r-! s:: 'r-! s:: 0 0. :I oI.J oI.J ,..\G 0 0 C,) ...,co 0 Po< 1-1 U Q) co oI.J Q) Q) U U 1-1 1800 17 4 0 5 0 18 0 0 2 35 4 0 7 0 1900 20 37 2 4 0 18 1 1 2 38 38 3 6 0 2000 20 8 3 9 0 18 3 1 2 38 11 4 11 0 2100 18 3 1 5 2 18 2 0 0 36 5 1 5 ,2 2200 17 7 0 2 1 18 0 0 0 35 7 0 2 1 2300 17 23 0 0 0 18 0 0 0 35 23 0 0 0 2400 14 8 0 2 0 17 2 0 2 31 10 0 4 0 0100 6 16 0 0 0 15 0 0 1 21 16 0 1 0 0200 6 10 0 1 0 14 0 0 2 20 10 0 3 0 0300 6 12 0 1 0 14 0 1 2 20 12 1 3 0 0400 4 0 0 0 0 14 1 0 1 18 1 0 1 0 0500 6 2 1 0 0 14 0 0 1 20 2 1 1 0 ~/ No porcupines were observed in 1968. \JI '" �- 57 - ". There were too few animals tallied in 1968 in relation to the number of . counts to get a good picture of attendance upon the field. However, comparing even these poor counts of deer and cottontails with 1967 indicated a similar pattern. When counts from both years we re combined (Table 3) the hour of greatest use of the field for all species was 7:30 - 8:00 P.M. MST (Fig. 4, 5, 6). Minor peaks were recorded until 3:00 AoM. On the average, 60-70 percent of all animals were observed prior to midnight. Not enough animals used the field in 1968 to cause measurable damage~ even between extremes of treatment. In 1967, many more animals were counted and there was a difference in average product Lori between extreme treatments. Wildlife Distribution A composite of two year's distribution data is'sutmnarized in Fig. 7 and 8. Deer - Deer tended to enter and leave the study field mostly from the sagebrush and pinyon-juniper cover north of the area. Occasional groups entered and left from the east and southeasL . The majority of deer were recorded in the northeast third of the 'field with concentrations in the east half of the northeast quarter. OnegroUP'was recorded in the southwest quarter. Ambulatory reconnaissance of the field after an absence of a few days showed tracks fairly generally distributed except in the southwest quartero Pelletgroup counts yielded nothing. Cottontail Rabbits - Cottontail rabbits were concentrated in the extreme southwest extension of the field with only occasional records elsewhere. Cottontails seldom penetrated the field more tha.n 6-8 rows , or about 25 feet. When bean plants became large these small creatures were difficult to see with spotlight and binocularso Reconnaissance, however, showed evidence of their presence around the entire perimetero Jackrabbits and Porcupines - Distribution of jackrabbits was fairly general allover the field except the extreme southern portion. Heaviest concentrations were recorded around the north and east soil-moisture stacks and along the east-west midline. Porcupines (only three individuals in two years) were fairly generally distributed. Wildlife Depredations Deer - The earliest date deer were observed in the field was July 16 although tracks were noted as early as June 27. First evidence of depredation by deer \<JaSJuly 15 before the plants blossomed. At this time, when they were in blossom and after beans began setting on~ only the leaves were eaten. The first evidence of beans being eaten occurred after the bean pod had filled. Inspection of stomach samples from deer collected before and after bean pods had filled confirmed the above observation. �- 58 - PERCENT OF AVERAGE NUMBERS OF DEER 0967-1968) • 30 -., c: (,) .,~ 20 CL 10 8 6 4 • 2 1800 1900 2000 2100 2200 2300 2400 01000200 0300 0400 0500 0600 Mountain Standard Time Fig. 4'. Percent of average number of deer related to times of visits to pinto bean damage study field. (Wilmer Dicken Ranch, Egnar, San Miguel County, Colorado, 1967 and 1968). �- 59:- • PERCENT OF AVERAGE NUMBERS OF COTTONTAILS (1967-1968) 30 c o ~ 20 CD CD Q. • 1800 19002000 • 21002200 2300 2400 0100 0200 0300 0400 0500 0600 Mountain Standard Time Fig. 5. Percent of average numbers of cottontails related to times of visits to pinto bean damage study field. (Wilmer Dicken Ranch, Egnar, San Miguel County, Colorado, 1967 and 1968). �- 60 - PERCENT OF AVERAGE NUMBERS OF JACKRABBITS (1967-1968) -.,... c: ., u 20 Q. 8 6 4 2 1800 1900 2000 2100 2200 2300 2400 0100 0200 03000400 Mountain Standard 0500 0600 Time Fig. 6. Percent of average numbers of jackrabbits related to times of visits to pinto bean damage study field. (Wilmer Dicken Ranch, Egnar, San Miguel County, Colorado, 1967 and 1968). �- 61 - N e R - Rodent Exclosure D - Deer Exc losure T - Total Exclosure • - Deer a - Cottontaii Fig. 7.. Distribution of deer and cottontail rabbits in pinto bean damage study field on nights of counts. (Wilmer Dicken Ranch, Egnar, San Miguel County, Colorado, 1967 and 1968). �- 62 - N R-Rodent Exclosure D - Deer Exclosure T- Total Exclosur. ~- Jackrabbit 8- Porcupine Fig. 8. Distribution ,of jackrabbits and porcupines in pinto bean damage study field on nights of counts. (Wilmer Dicken Ranch, Egnar, San Miguel County, Colorado, 1967 and 1968). �- 63 - On the night of August 22, 1968 there was a frost which shrivelled the leaves on most of the bean plants. The beans themselves were not frosted. No wildlife was seen in the field thereafter. After the beans had been cut evidence of deer pawing the drying vines was observed. Cottontail Rabbits - The most severe, though not extensive~ damage noted was caused by cottontails. Just before the beans were cut in 1967 there was an area of the study field about six rows deep~ 25-35 feet long on the peripheral edge and tapering as it encroached into the field, that had been riddled by cottontails. Plants in the peripheral rows had been almost demolished; however~ these were very small plants with a few, stunted beans (Fig. 14). Size of the plants increased and damage decreased progressively into the field. In all cases where plants had beans on them 1:he beans were left. Many of the larger leaves were slipped off and left as though only the more succulent inner shoots were selected. Unprotected Species - Jackrabbits were never observed to eat beans. There was ample evidence of their feeding on pigweed, (A..TIlaranthus retroflexus) both young and mature plants. No evidence of porcupine depredation was observed either year even though several were seen among the beans. Some damage was caused by pocket gophers (Thomomys bottae) c.utting the roots of plants. Pinyon jays (Gymnorhinus cyanocephalus) were seen pulling small bean sprouts out of the ground.· Small Mammal Inventory An inventory of mammals smaller than cottontail rabbits was taken each year of the study. The results are summarized in Table 4. On August 24-26, 1968 a single trapline was set in the bean field Only one species" deer mouse (Peromyscus maniculatus)~ was trapped. This study was not designed to measure damage caused by these animals. However, minor pocket gopher damage was observed. o Evaluation Precipitation of Weather and Soil Moisture Data and Temperature Precipitation data for the p ast four summers (Table 5) averaged 11.01 inches per year. The monthly average was 1.84 inches and the range 0.00 - 6.15 inches Precipitation during the 1968 growi.ng season was below average. 0 Hygrothermograph records for the past four summers are summarized in Table 6. The night of August 22, 1968 a freeze was recorded. Freezing temperatures were recorded again for the nights of September 13, 14, 18, 19, and 20 while the beans were still standing. None of these freezes were severe enough to cause appreciable bean damage although most of the leaves were shrivelled. Bean development after the end of August was noticeably retarded. �- 64 Table 4 - Summary of Species of Small Mammals Trapped on the Wilmer W. Dicken Ranch, Egnar, San Miguel CountY2 Colorado, 1965 Through 1968. Year Pinyon-Juniper 1965 Peromyscus 1966 1967 Type maniculatus Sagebrush Jeromyscus spp. Eu~amias spp. Microtus longicaudus Citellus spilosoma Peromyscus maniculatus Perol!!Yscusmaniculatus Eutamias spp. Eutamias spp. Microtus longicaudus Q£ychomys leucogaster Thomomys bottae Peromyscus maniculatus spp. Clethrionomys Pero~scus Peromysc~ manicu1atus spp. Reithrodontomy~ Lagurus ~! maniculatus Eutamias ltapperi Bean Field manicu1atus Eutamias Eutamias 1968 Type spo curtatus P~om"yscus 'E..! maniculatus Eutamias spp. Eutamias spp. Onychomys leucogaster Onych~ys leuco~ster Peromyscus man; culatus ~!This specimen was trapped with a sPecial trap just off the established trapline. 'E..! This specimen was not definitely in the trap. identified because the skull was crushed Table 5 - Summary of Precipitation RecOl':dsfor May Through October 1965 Through 1968 at Wilmer W. Dicken Ranch 2 E&.nar, San ~:!guel County. Colorado. Year Precipitation ~Inches) Snow Rain 1965 15.00 2.50 Monthly Average (Inches) Monthly Range (Inches) - 3.90 0.65 - 3.10 1.30 1966 4.00 6.35 1.06 1967 0.50 16.10 2.68 0.30 - 6.15 1968 0.50 6.60 1.10 0.00 - 2.70 �- 65 ~ Table 6 - Summary of Temperatures and Relative Humidity for Summer Months of 1965 Through 1968 at Wilmer Dicken Ranch~ Egnar, San Miguel County~ Colorado. Year and Month Te~perature (F) Relative Hunidity (%) Minimum Maximum 52 22 86 86 41 16 85 25 78 48 16 86 59 33 83 35 14 87 July 67 48 86 42 16 88 August 66 43 88 41 15 85 May 50 19 82 48 15 87 June 57 34 87 42 12 86 July 66 50 88 48 13 83 August 64 47 86 45 17 83 September 58 36 82 41 14 83 July 67 47 87 44 17 85 August 60 54 32 28 79 80 46 34 14 17 83 82 Mean Minimum Maximum Mean July 66 49 85 August 65 45 September 53 June 1965 May June 1966 May September 1967 1968 May June Sel2.tember �- 66 - No production records were kept for the 1965 harvest due to a hard freeze the week before beans were to be cut. Estimated ranch-wide production was 5 sacks/acre of second grade beans. That year there was above average rainfa11 fairly evenly distributed through the sunnner. Temperatures in July and August were generally similar to 1966 and 1967. Had the freeze been delayed two weeks the 196.5 crop would probably have been average or above. Highest production for the ranch as a whole, excluding the study field, in the four years was 7 sacks/acre in 1967. Rainfall was above average and temperatures were normal. Soil-Moisture Data for 1967 indicated soil-moisture remained fairly constant, becoming more uniform as the depth of the recorder increased. Rainfall was above average that year. Readings for 1968 were very inconsistent; however, rainfall was below average. Conclusions Deer and cottontail rabbits did eat pinto beans. However 9 this does not mean their depredations were necessarily damaging. Most deer depredations involved the leaves. Bean pods were seldom eaten until they were filled. Cottontails consistently ate only the tender, inner leaves, sometimes cutting and discarding the mature outer leaves of plants in the peripheral rows. These rows were generally sparsely vegetated with relatively unproductive plants, thus cottontail rabbit depredations were negligible in decreasing overall pinto bean production. Observations of this study indicate the jackrabbit is a much maligned victim when actua11y it should be praised. Many jackrabbits were in the study fi.eld, but their diet was never beans9 only weeds. Porcupines were too scarce to yield any information. I can only conclude there were never enough deer on the study field during the period of this investigation to cause measurable damage, even though in 1967 there was a significant difference in bean production on fields from whicl all animals were excluded and those from which none were excluded. The lowest bean production (2 sacks/acre) was recorded in 1968. Below average rainfall possibly contibuted to this poor crop but not seriously. By time for the third cultivation~ bean plants were too lush to allow passage of the machinery without tearing up many of the plants. Temperatures through July were normal. August was the critical month. The average temperature was four. degrees below the lowest of the three previous years. The maximum temperature was seven degrees below the coldest of the three previous years. The minimun temperature was 11 degrees below the lowest daily minimum recorded in the three previous years. September temper atures were only three deg rees higher than 1965 when it was so cold. �- 67 - The most severe facter affecting pinto bean production, both directly and indire§fly, appeared to be temperature. After the night of the freeze on August 22, 1968 no deer were seen in the field. However, an adjacent field contained a section of the beans that was not frostbitten. Observations indicated the unfrosted beans were used by deer while adjacent, frosted plants were untouched. Therefore, if a section of beans is conspicuously unfrostbitten among other frosted plants it is a potential damage area. In conclusion, temperature proved to be the factor having the most profound effect on pinto bean production, both directly and indirectly. Prepared by . David F. Gordon Assistant Wildlife Researcher _ �- 6& - APPENDIX I DAMAGE STUDY FORM Project W-38-R Date, ~Location - Time > Temperature Barometer -------------------Wind Weather > .. . ., .. '. - Total ~ .....:',. " Observer Sky ---------------= Number of Deer Remarks �- 69 - . APPENDIX II N ,---==~ . , -r-> ,."." -" I 0 / /' Weother Shelter /~" "/ /~ ,~ -" ~ .... -- ...•" , ","" "",,,, ,, \\ \ R - Rodent Exclosure .0 - Deer Exclosure T - Total Exclosure Map blank on which location of observed animals was plotted. �APPEND IX. 11 I North Ameri.::an Census Ccoperat.o'r Location of Small Mammals - F0rms for Reporting Census. : of trapping site: Attempt to IDeate the trapping site accurately enough so that someone else at a later date may locate. the position of the Lf.ne and , if po s s Lb Le , the stations along the line. A map of the area figuring the Lcca t i.on of t.he Li.ne s , if d,,!c> posited in the NACSMf LLes , will help assure such Loc at.Lon , Prior census designation. given in the last annual samp Led previously.) -::---:"~=_:_::"=_~~"'*":"~(List report of the NACSMif this the ce.nsus designation traet was Designation of pattern of Sampling No.1; pp. 4 to 5 of Release No.2; (See pp. 2 to 3 of Release of Release No.3.) pp. 9 to 10 In the table. beLow check the spaces of fill in with data that will exactly speci.fy the pattern c,f sampling which you ar e usLng , Whereve]~ pos si.b Le U: is desir(:'.d that: cooper-at-or-s use. the standard patred B type Ll.ne s pla.c.c'ld par a l.l.e L, However ~ some cooper at.o r s fi.nd it: neces sary u:" desirable to utilize some othc:or spacing betw2:9n stations or some other pattern or a:!"/:a.ngE:ment of the li.ne!:'; I.n r,,,,<la.tionship to each ather The constant fact.ors a:e,~.that thEre at:"e tWE,!nty· stations per Li.ne , the. line should be as straigLt: 98 po's':3ible~ at.:]. that then;! a:;:,"!th:ree traps p2:t" station. If you ant.L ..~:;.p'J.t>·, avat,_'.[;. of nearl.y lOO~ (Ii: more, for twu Li.ne s it: will be best to place 4 t.rap s per sts.tLon or: cth'2:':r.-i.:Ilis,:an adi:.:quat,.;:!s amp Li.ng of th,::! population may n\'itr~"::"'ulto 0 Type of line Intc:(~val bE. t·WF-.e.n stations A 25 ft. B 50 ft. c-=~ 100 Number of Lines Par:all£:d1 End teJ end. (P. 9 ReJ.8a.:3(-; No.3) Random" ') fto Other L A ~ 200 ft. 2. When single r'e Lat.LonshLpe apart, B ~ 400 ft. lines are placed at betwE'en 1i.nes~~~ ap ar t., C = 800 ft. random the envf.ronment , specify through If othe:r\;ili.:3e sPb~ify~~. the �- 71 Date traps were first set: ~--------------------------~~-Time of day traps were first set: Time of day traps were visited First day: Second day: Third day: Remarks ~ . ~ __ ~ 3 days~ ~ ~ =_ =_ __ ~.~~ ~_ ~ __ on the weather: 1. From time of setting to first visit: 2. From first to second visit: 3. From second to third visit: General remarks the population: Remarks on the following _ on the weather ------~------~----~--------------------~_=~ of preceding on the status of the population: Type of trap ~ __~~--~----~~~--~~~. seasons which may have affected ~ _ -----------------------------------~-- ----------------------------------------------------~----~~ ~ _ Type of bait. Location of museum where skins of species recorded in this r<eport are deposited. They should have been taken from some region representative of the area recorded here. ----------------------~------~~--------~-.----.------------ (If no skins are available for identification in museums from your area, prepare one of an adult specimen for each species and deposit them in the U.S. National Museum if no other museum is preferred.) Topography of habitat: SPAMSGS Form 53 ~ ~~ Page 2 ~\ , I _ �- 72 - If photographs of the habitat are available~ insert them in an envelope and attach the envelope here. Do not attach the photographs with staples or paper clips" since they mar the prints. The larger the photograph, the better printed reproduction will result. All suitable photographs will be published in one of the annual reports as soon as funds are available. Floristic Remarks description of habitat: on proximity to differing habitats, agricultural land, etc. Species taken: (List here the full taxonomic name of each kind of animal trapped. When listing the catch on the pink, blue, and yellow sheets, the genus only needs to be given unless a genus has two species represented, or a species has two sub-species represented.) SPAMSGS Form 53 Page 3 �73 AdO':> O~3X u.. , ,"AdO.:> 'O~3X ..... ~---~---,. .__ ~K=:''==::--::::::::"-':::'" -. ,~? .' '-'D !v" !'~._• "~. ::::=- -::-;- ..: "-', ~~~~ .. - ~ .. ..... ;.: ...:..':;~ ~"----,-... ,.-~-:-----~----"..i~'~ ~.::.~ .. t',.". ~.,.-.2 YO ·t,::.~_ .' .-r,\;_~..... !~ .. . . .. ,- .. -.- .. ! r, •• ~ ~;;:":,,,.~,~~~,,~ ••(,.,I ~------.-.--. ------ .. -----i-----------_ .._-,------;----------- ! ---'---,'.----:1:.------------ -----------,--------'--- ! i, _ l • -----:.,/:------------ ,------- --- ---- ----;----------------------;------------.---,---. ---:------------, --------------!-.-~-----.-.--.-..... __._._--------'.. I .----------~-------.------ _.---'.. .------------~-----------,.---.' ._------------------.----_.,_ .._-- '-------------+1---------:--·---·,,----'----:-·--; , ___________;,' ~ . t ' ~ ~ ;,,:.i.- l . ~ ,, .__ :__ -----'.-:1_-----------. -._._-- ,-.--- .,- ---,--------,---}----------_-! ------_._---...;-------_._-------------------------;----_. _ •. ..• __ .- -----~---,-------~-----..---.--------------~-~---~-----<-----------.~--------i-----------------------:------------.--- _. _._. ----------;--------------'----.'i , .....1~~.. -.. -.--.-------i-----------, . .;:.:~~~~--:o:::-=~h .'~ -, " oJ ��- 75 JOB FINAL REPORT State of COLORADO Project No. W-38-R-23 Deer-Elk Investigations Work Plan No. lIB Job No. 4 Job Title: Rio Grande Elk Study - Seasonal Movements Period Covered: Personnel: April 1, 1968 through March 31, 1969 Raymond J. Boyd Po S. OBJECTIVE To develop a comprehensive management plan for the Rio Grande elk herd. RESULTS AND DISCUSSION All information to satisfy re~uirements for this job have been reported in the completion report for Segment 22 of this project (Colorado Game Research Report, July, 1968 No.3, p. 365-381). Since data are available on movements in the Long Ridge area in the previous report, and no personnel available to trap and band elk on Long Ridge, we are recommending this job be dropped because of more important duties. GAme Management personnel in the Southwest Region do not feel they need additional information on the movements of these elk at the present time. Prepared by ��.IuLy , 1969 - 77 - JOB FINAL REPORT Sta te of Project Work ...::C:.::O:,;::L:::O:.:.RA=D:.::O=-_ No. W-38-R-23 Deer-Elk Investigations Plan No. HB Job No. 7 Job Title: Rio Grande Elk Study - Publication Period April Covered: Personnel: Raymond J o 1, 1968 through March of Results 31, 1969 Boyd P, So OBJECTIVE Develop a comprehensive management plan for the Rio Grande RESULTS elk herd. AND DISCUSSION No work was accomplished on this job the past segment because all available time was spent completing the manuscript on the White River elk study. Because of new assignments, and press of other duties within the Division~ we are recommending this job be dropped and that the completion reports submitted for the six research jobs within this work plan be accepted as final reports. Two articles~ one for the Journal of Wildlife Management and one for presentation to the Western Association of Game and Fish Commissioners meeting in 1970 are partially completed and these will be finished for submission in 1970. At the time these articles are published, credit will be given this work plan for data contained within the reports. Prepared by Wildlife Researcher ��- 79 - JOB PROGRESSREFOR'T S t;'l :.~ ~.~.'. of COLORADO Deer-Elk W-38-R-23 14 ,kb 'Li.t.Le; Middle Job Park Deer Study Lnve s t Lg at Lorrs 1 No. Population Distribution l J PerLod Covere.d: December 1, 1968 through March 31) 19690 ! / P~rsonnel: R. Bruch Coghill, M. Ward, Gill, Len H. Carpenter, Michael J. Robert L. Schmidt, Julius J. Klein, and Paul F. Gilbert. Dorrance, Marion C. Jro, Jim B~ Weir, ABSTRACT Trapping and banding op e r a tLon s were initiated in January, 1969 'W'i th trapP:;"·f: to five general trapping areas. Two hundred eighty-eigh t deer ",',2:::"': t aggcd fz om January 13 to Harch 31, for an average of 3.,7 deer tagged p er 02)'= The cat ch by sex and age class was 23.6 percent (67) adult bucks (1 yr. +); 1;).9 percen t (48) buck f awns , 39.4 percent (112) adult does and 20,1 p ez ce.nr. (57) doe. fawns. CO'L1Eir..ed T"lenty-t,w s nowrnob i l.e transects wer e run at semi-monthly interva.ls to r e I ct':.:·. changes in deer distribution to changes in snow depth and ,:r'",st ch ar act e r Ls t.;.~:G, fDur ma.jer periods of change were defined: December l-L5, 1968; December 1.6-3I, 1968; January 1-31,1969; February 1 - March 20,1969. Th-e pr i.nc LpaL c:h2.Ege uor ed was a general shrinkage of winter range avai l.ab i.Li.t y arid use L..• deer with increasing depth and crusting of snow. ��- 81 - MIDDLE PARK DEER STUDY POPULATION DISTRIBUTION Ro Bruce Gill P. S. OBJECTIVE, To delineate deer concentration areas in Middle Park and relate changes in deer distribution in time and space to accumulation and physical properties of snow. SEGMENT OBJECTIVES 1. Define winter range boundaries of the Middle Park deer population mild, moderate, and severe winter conditions. 2. Define 3. Delineate 4. Relate changes in deer distribution perties of snow. under sub-unit boundaries. major deer concentration areas. to accumulation and physical pro- METHODS AND ~ATERIALS 1. Deer will be live-trapped with Clover deer traps in four general areas within Middle Park: (a) Muddy Creek drainage, (b) Blue River drainage~ (c) William Fork River drainage, and (d) Troublesome Creek and Colorado River drainage. Each deer will be eartagged and neckbanded with neck-· bands which are color-coded to the trapping areas and numbered as to identify individual deer. Observations will be recorded whenever marked deer are reported or encountered. 2. Sub-unit boundaries kills of neckbanded 3. Major deer concentration areas will be delineated by monthly fixed-wing flights and by snowmobile cruising over selected portions of the winter ranges. 4. Changes in deer d i.s t r Lbu t Lon will be related to accumu LatLon and selected physical properties of snow by measuring snow depths and recording crust conditions at measuring stations along selected snow transects. This information will be related to deer distribution data from monthly fixedwing flights and snowmobile transect data. will be defined from neckband deer. sightings and hunter �~ 82 - RESULTS AND DISCUSSION Trapping and Marking Trapping operations in Middle Park were initiated January 13, 1969. Thirtyseven Clover deer traps (Clover9 1956) were set out in five areas: (1) Wolford Mountain - Cow Gulch area within the Muddy Creek trapping unit, (2) Harsha Gulch and Williams Peak Road areas within the Blue River trapping unit9 (3) Parshall Divide area within the Troublesome Creek and Colorado River trapping unit, (4) Cedar Ridge area, and (5) Beaver Creek area within the William Fork River trapping unit (Fig. 1). Red neckbands were placed on deer within the Muddy Creek trapping unit, blue neckbands within the Blue River unit, white neckbands within the Troublesome Creek and Colorado River unit, and yellow (does) and pink (bucks) neckbands within the Williams Fork River unit. Most of the neckbands were coded with a diamond and a number to code the trap year and individual animal, respectively. Trapping activities were concluded on March 319 1969. During the 78 days the traps were in operation9 288 deer were tagged, an average of 3.7 deer per day. The summary of trap results by trap unit is presented in Tables 1-5. Sex and age were not recorded for four deer, but of the remaining 284, 23.6 percent (67) were mature bucks (1 + yrs.)9 16.9 percent (48) were buck fawns, 39.4 percent (112) were adult does (1 - yrs.), and 20.1 percent (57) were doe fawns. Seven deer were known to have died as a result of trap injuries, and three more were known to have died from other causes. Three major problems were encountered during trapping operations. F4rst, adult sized neckbands initially were placed upon fawns, but subsequent observations of tagged fawns revealed that at least some had inserted a front leg through the collar and apparently were unable to extract it. Consequently, no neekbands were placed on fawns after February 10. Secondly, rabbit damage to o-c:rtrap nets was extensive. This occurred because we failed to leave a space between the bottom of the trap frame and the netting (Fig. 2). It is believed that a seven inch spacing between the trap frame bar and the netting would minimize this problem. The third problem was the recapture of previously tagged deer. With 37 traps in operation every day for 78 days, an average of only one trap in ten caught an untagged deer each day. Unfortunately, accurate recatch records were not kept, but the total catch per day was at least double the 3.7 deer tagged per day. Transporting deer which were consistently recaught at least two miles from the trap area alleviated this problem somewhat, but this complicated the interpretation of deer movement data based upon band sightings. As a result, transporting of deer was discontinued. Observations of neckbanded deer are summarized for the period January-April, 1969 in Fig 3. Generally, banded deer remained in the vicinity of the trap sites through March but began moving from these sites by April I. Two deer tagged on Beaver Creek crossed the Colorado River and were seen near the Parshall Divide trap site. Also, two observations were recorded of deer tagged at Parshall Divide and later observed along Little Muddy Creek. Three" observations were recorded of deer neckbanded on Wolford. Mountain which sub"" sequently moved to the Gunsight Pass area. �- 83 ~ N HOT SULPHUR SPRINGS AREA 5 ~ AREA 2 ~ VII' SCALE in. = 5 mi. Fig. 1. Areas where deer trapping was conducted in 1969. �Table 1 - Deer TraEEed and TaBBed on Wo1.ford Mountain ~Area 122 Middle Park~ Colorado - Winter 1968-69. Eartag Numbers Sex Age Right Left Neckband Remarks Date Doe Doe Doe Doe Doe Buck Buck Doe Buck Doe Doe 1-16-69 1-16-69 1-17-69 1-17-69 1-18-69 1-18-69 1-20-69 1-24-69 1-26-69 1-26-69 1-26-69 1-26-59 1-27-69 2-5-69 2",,5 •. ·69 2-5-69 2-5-69 1-22-69 Doe Buck Doe Buck Doe Doe 1-23-69 1-25-69 1-29-69 1-29-69 1-30-69 2-1-69 2-2-69 2-2-69 2-2-69 2-2-69 2-3-69 2-4=69 2-4-69 2-4-69 2-4-69 Doe Doe Doe Doe Doe Buck Doe Buck Buck Doe Doe Buck Buck Buck Doe ? Mature Fawn Mature Mature Mature Mature Mature Matture Mature Mature Fawn MP- 2 MP- 5 MP- 8 MP- 9 MP- 11 MP- 12 MP- 23 MP- 28 MP- 33 MP- 34 MP- 35 MP- 36 MP- 43 MP- 47 MP- 48 MP- 49 MP- 50 MP- 54 Red no if Red no il Red no if Red no if Red no il Red no if Red no if Red ok 20 Red ~'(12 Red ~'(11 Red ok. 7 Mature Mature Mature Mature Mature Mature MP- 2 MP- 5 MP- 8 MP- 9 MP- 11 MP- 12 MP- 23 MP- 28 MP- 33 MP- 34 MP- 35 MP- 36 MP- 43 MP- 47 MP- 48 MP- 49 MP- 50 MP- 54 Mature Mature Mature Mature Mature Fawn Mature Mature Mature Mature Mature Fawn Fawn Mature Mature MP- 56 MP- 58 MP- 64 MP- 65 MP- 66 MP- 76 MP- 79 MP- 80 MP- 81 MP- 82 MP- 85 MP- 86 MP- 90 MP- 91 MP- 92 MP- 56 MP- 58 MP- 64 MP- 65 MP- 66 MP- 76 MP- 79 MP- 80 MP- 81 MP- 82 MP- 85 MP- 86 MP- 90 MP- 91 MP- 92 Red ~'( 6 Red * 18 Red ~'( 9 Red ~'(32 Red ok 31 Red ~'(13 Red ~'(14 Red ok 28 Red ~'(29 Red ok 30 Red 'k 16 Red ok 27 no neckband Red ~'(21 .Red i( 3 ? Moved to dump area 3-6-69 Trap mortali ty ? Red * 8 Red ~'(10 Red ~'(4 Red ~'(11 Red ~'( 5 Red ~'( 1 Broken right front leg Road kill 2 mi. N. Kremmling Hwy. 40, 2-8-69 00 +=- Moved to BLM horse corrals 3-6-69 Trap mortality ~--~~-~-----~-~-~----~~~---~--~-~--~---~~--~----------~~----~---~-~-~~~==--~--~--------=~~~-~----Indicates diamond .•. symbol on neckband , i( �TabLe 1- De.e.rTrapped and Tagged on Wolford Mountain (Area 1), Middle Park, Colorado - Winter 1968-69 {continued) Eartag Numbers Remarks Neckband Left Right Sex Age Date 2-5-69 2-5-69 2-6-69 2-6-69 2-7-69 2-7-69 2-7-69 2-8-69 2-9-69 2-11-69 2-11-69 2-21-69 2-12-69 2-12-69 2-13-69 2-13-69 2-13-69 2-15-69 2-16-69 2-10~69 2-10-69 2-11-69 2-17-69 2-17-69 2-18-69 2-19-69 2-19-69 2-19-69 2-19-69 2-21-69 2-20-69 2-20-69 2-20-69 2-20-69 2-20-69 2~27-69 Doe Buck Doe Doe Buck Buck Doe Doe Buck Buck Doe Doe Buck Buck ? Doe Doe Doe Doe Doe Doe Doe Doe Doe Doe Buck Doe Doe Doe Doe Doe Doe Doe Buck Doe Buck Fawn Mature Mature Mature Fawn Mature Fawn Mature Fawn Fawn Fawn Mature Mature Fawn Fawn Mature Mature Fawn Fawn Fawn Mature Mature Mature Fawn Fawn Fawn Mature Mature Fawn Mature Mature Mature Mature Fawn Mature Mature MP- 94 MP~ 95 MP- 102 MP- 103 MP- 108 MP- 109 MP- 110 MP- 119 MP- 124 MP- 126 MP- 127 MP- 134 MP- 135 MP- 136 Mp- 137 MP- 138 MP- 139 Mp- 148 MP- 149 Mp- 153 MP- 154 MP- 159 MP- 161 MP- 162 MP- 165 MP~ 176 MP- 177 MP- 178 MP- 179 MP- 18~ MP- 183 MP- 184 MP- 185 MP- 186 MP- 187 MP- 196 MP- 94 MP- 95 MP- 102 MP- 103 MP- 108 MP- 109 MP- 110 MP- 119 MP- 124 MP- 126 MP- 127 MP- 134 MP- 135 MP- 136 MP- 137 MP- 138 MP- 139 MP- 148 MP- 149 MP- 153 MP- 154 MP- 159 MP- 161 MP- 162 MP- 165 MP- 176 MP- 177 MP- 178 MP- 179 MP- 181 MP- 183 MP- 184 MP- 185 MP- 186 MP- 187 MP- 196 Red ~'(26 Red -{(23 Red ~'(24 Red ~'(33 Red ~'(35 Red ~'(40 Red -{(34 Red ~'(36 Red ~'(37 Red ~'(27 no neckband Red -{(43 Red no it no neckband no neckband Red ~'(42 Red -{(45 no neckband no neckband Red ~~ 38 Red ~'(39 Red -{(41 Red ~'(44 no neckband no neckband no neckband Red -{(46 Red ~'(47 no neckband Red ~'(57 Red -{( 48 Red ~'(49 Red ~'(50 no neckband Red no it Red ~'(29 Died of trap injuries CP VI ~-~~~-~~-~~-~~~-~=-~~~~-~-~-=-~~--~~~~~--~----~-~-~-~----=~=~-----=~~-~=~--~---~-=-~--~---~ symbol on neckband. ~'(Indicates diamond" �Table 1- Deer Trapped and.Tagged on Wolford Mountain (Area 1)~ Middle Pa rk , Colorado - Winter 1968-69 (continued) Ear tag.Nurnber.s Remarks Right Left Neckband Sex Age Date Trap mortality 2-27-69 MP- 197 MP- 197 no neckband ? ? 2-27-69 MP- 201 MP- 201 no neckband Fawn Doe 2-22-69 MP- 202 MP- 202 no neckband Fawn Doe 2-22-69 Moved to dump area 3-6-69 Mature MP- 203 MP- 203 Red * 54 2-22~69 Doe Mature Doe MP- 209 MP- 209 Red * 53 2-23-69 MP- 210 MP- 210 no neckband Fawn Doe 2-23-69 MP- 211 MP- 211 no neckband 2•• 23-69 Fawn Buck MP- 212 MP- 212 no neckband Fawn Doe 2-23-69 Mature Doe MP- 213 MP- 213 Red * 68 2-24-69 Mature Buck MP- 214 MP- 214 Red * 22 2-24-69 Mature Doe MP- 217 MP- 217 Red * 51 2-25-69 Mature Doe MP- 218 MP- 218 Red * 52 2-25-69 Mature Doe MP- 227 MP- 227 Red * 61 3-2-69 3-2~69 Doe MP- 228 MP- 228 Red * 56 Mature Mature MP- 229 MP- 229 Red * 58 Doe 3-2-69 MP- 230 MP" 230 no neckband Fawn Doe 3-2-69 MP- 232 MP- 232 no neckband Fawn Doe 3-3-69 Doe MP- 233 MP- 233 Red * 69 Mature 3-3-69 MP- 239 MP- 239 no neckband Fawn Doe 3-8-69 MP- 240 MP- 240 Red * 64 Mature Doe 3-8-69 Trap mortality 3-9-69 MP- 241 MP- 241 no neckband Fawn Buck 3-8-69 Mature. Doe MP- 242 MP- 242 Red * 63 3-5-69 3-5;;'69 MP- 243 MP- 243 no neckband Fawn Doe Mature MP- 244 MP- 244 Red * 25 Doe 3-5-69 MP- 247 MP- 247 Red * 55 Mature Doe 3-7-69 MP248 MP248 Red * 67 Mature Doe 3-7-69 Mature Doe MP- 249 MP- 249 Red * 72 3-7-69 MP- 252 MP- 252 Red no # Mature Buck 3-12-69 Mature Doe MP260 MP260 Red * 69 3-10-69 MP261 MP261 no neckband Buck Fawn 3-10-69 MP262 MP262 no neckband Fawn Buck 3-10-69 MP265 MP265 no neckband Fawn Doe 3-11-69 MP266 MP266 no neckband Fawn Doe 3-11-69 MP- 267 MP- 267 no neckband Buck Fawn 3-11-69 Could be MP- 267 or MP-268 MP270'1 MP270? Red * 66 Mature Doe 3-11-69 13.9% mature bucks (14) 51.4% mature does (52) SUMMARY: 104 deer tagged 13.9% buck fawns (14) 20.8% doe fawns (21) ?'( Indicates diamond" symbol on neckband, co '" �Blue River (Area 2), Middle Park. Colorado, Winter 1968-69. Table 2 - Deer Trapped and T,!ggecl.on Eartag Numbers Remarks Neckband Age Right Left Sex Date Blue no :ff Fawn Mp- 18 MP- 18 Doe 1-20-69 Blue no if Mature MP19 MP19 Doe 1-20-69 Blue no :ff Mature MP20 MP20 Buck 1-20-69 Blue no :ff Mature MP22 MP22 Buck 1-20-69 Blue ~'( 7 Mature MP87 MP87 Buck 2-4-69 Blue ~'( 4 Mature MP88 MP88 Doe 2-4-69 Blue ~'( Co11. 3-8-69 let thru collar 1 Fawn MP- 93 MP- 93 Doe 2-4-69 Blue i( 9 Mature MP-107 MP-107 Buck 2-6-69 Blue i( 5 Fawn MP-115 MP=115 Doe 2-7-69 no neckband Fawn MP=116 MP-116 Buck 2-7-69 Blue ~'(2 Mature MP-117 MP-117 Doe 2-7-69 Blue ~'(3 Fawn MP-118 MP=118 Doe 2-7-69 Blue ~'(19 Mature MP-121 MP-121 Doe 2-8-69 Blue ~'(8 Fawn MP-122 MP-122 Doe 2-8-69 Blue ~'(17 Mature MP-123 MP-123 Doe 2-8-69 Blue i( 9 Mature MP-131 MP=131 Doe 2-11-69 Blue i( 11 Mature MP-132 MP=132 Doe 2-11-69 no neckband Fawn MP=133 MP-133 Buck 2-11-69 Blue ~'(12 Mature MP-141 MP-141 Doe 2-13-69 Mature MP-142 MP-142 Blue * ? Buck 2-13-69 Mature MP-144 MP-144 Blue * 20 Buck 2-14-69 no neckband Fawn MP-146 MP-146 Buck 2-15-69 Blue i( 10 Mature MP-147 MP-147 Buck 2-15-69 Blue ~'( 6? Mature MP-151 MP-151 Doe 2-9-69 Blue ~'( ? Mature MP-152 MP-152 Buck 2-9-69 Blue no :ff MP-158 MP-158 Mature Buck 2-10-69 Blue no :ff MP-170 MP-170 Mature Buck 2-18-69 Blue no :ff MP-l71 MP-l71 Mature Buck 2-18-69 Blue ~'(21 MP-180 MP=180 Mature Buck 2-21-69 no neckband MP-189 MP=189 Fawn Buck 2-20-69 Blue i( 26 MP=205 MP=205 Mature Doe 2-21-69 Blue ~'( 22 MP-206 MP-206 Mature Buck 2-21-69 no neckband MP=219 MP-219 Buck Fawn 2-25·~69 Blue ~'(30 MP-221 MP-221 Doe Mature 2-28-69 MP-222 no neckband MP-222 Buck Fawn 2-28-69 MP-226 Blue * 13 MP=226 Doe Mature 3-1-69 MP-237 Blue * 14 MP=237 Doe Mature 3-6-69 (13) 3501% mature does (13) 35.1% mature bucks SUMMARY: 37 deer tagged ( 6) 13 5% doe f~'a~w~n~s~~(~J~~)~ _ 16 3% buck fawns ~'(Indicates diamond .•..symbol on nackband , 0 0 00 '-l �Table 3 - Deer TraEEed and Tagged on Parshall Divide (Area 32~ Middle Park~ Colorado - Winter 1968-69 • .Ear.t.ag. Numbers Neckband Remarks Right Left Sex Date Ai1je White no :ff Moved to Sulphur Gulch 3=4=69 Buck Mature MP- 6 MP- 6 1-16-69 White no :ff Mature MP= 13 MP- 13 Doe 1-18-69 MP= 21 MP- 21 White no if Mature Doe 1-14=69 MP= 24 MP- 24 White no if Mature Doe 1-20=69 White ~'(29 MP= 26 Mature MP- 26 Doe 1-23-69 MP- 27 White no if Mature MP- 27 Doe 1-23-69 White ~'( 4· MP- 30 Mature MP- 30 Doe 1=25=69 White ~':10 Mature MP= 31 MP- 31 Buek 1-25-69 White i: 9 Fawn MP= 37 MP- 37 Doe 1-26-69 Whi te ~'~ 5 MP- 38 Buck Fawn MP= 38 1-26-69 White ,'(12 Fawn MP= 45 MP- 45 Buck 1=27-69 White i: 2 MP= 46 Fawn MP= 46 Doe 1=27=69 White ~':11 Fawn MP= 52 MP= 52 Moved to Sulphur Gulch 3-6-69 Buck 1=22=69 White ~'( 1 Mature MP= 53 MP- 53 Doe 1-22=69 White ~': 3 Fawn MP- 57 Doe MP- 57 1-24·-69 no neckband MP= 59 Fawn .MP- 59 Doe 1=28=69 White i: 17 MP- 60 Mature MP- 60 Doe 1-28-69 White i: 13 Right front leg groken MP- 61 Mature MP- 61 Buck 1-28-69 White ,,(15 Mature MP- 67 MP- 67 Doe 1=31-69 White i, 14 Fawn MP- 69 MP- 69 Doe 2=1-69 Whi te ~',20 MP= 70 MP- 70 Mature Doe 2-1=69 White ~':19 Doe. MP", 71 Moved to Sulphur Gulch 3=4-69 MP= 71 Mature 2=1=69 no neckband MP= 72 Fawn MP- 72 Doe 2=1~69 White ~'( 6 MP= 73 Fawn MP= 73 Doe 1=28-69 MP;;··78 White no if Mature MP- 78 Doe 2=2-69 White ~': 8 Mature MP- 84 Doe MP- 84 2-3=69 White no if MP- 89 Mature MP= 89 Buck 2-4-69 White ~'( 6? MP- 96 Buck Mature MP- 96 2-5=69 White "/:21 Moved to Su1phut' Gulch 3-4-69 Fawn MP- 97 MP- 97 Buck 2-5-69 White ,':22 Mature MP- 98 MP- 98 Buck 2-5-69 Whi te ~':26 Fawn MP=104 MP-104 Doe 2-6=69 White ~'(30 MP-1l2 MP112 Buck Mature 2-7-69 White i: 24 Moved to Sulphur Gulch 3~3~69 Fawn MP-1l3 Buck MP=1l3 2-7-69 White ~'(23 MP=120 MP-120 Ruck " ..Hat ur e 2-8-69 ''(Indicatesdiamond •••. symbol on neckband. 00 00 �Table 3 - Deer Trappe4~Ilc:iTagged on Parshall Divide (Area 3) 9 Middle Park, Colorado - Winter_19Q8-69~continued) Eartag Number s Neckband Remarks Age _RiEht Left Sex Date White no If Mature MP-125 MP-125 Buck 2-9-69 White "/< 45 Mature MP=128 MP-128 Buck 2-11-69 White "/< 48 Mature MP-129 MP-129 Buck 2-11-69 Whi te ?',' 46 Mature MP-130 MP-130 Doe 2~11-69 Whi te ?'< 20 Moved to Sulphur Gulch 3-4-69 Mature MP=140 MP-140 Doe 2-13-69 no neckband MP=145 l'1P1L~5 Fawn Buck 2-15-69 no neckband MP-150 Fawn MP-150 Buck 2-16-69 White ?'< 25 MP-l55 MP-155 Mature 2c~10-69 Doe Injured in trap no neckband MP-156 Fawn l'1P=156 Doe 2-10-69 no neckband MP-160 Fawn MP-160 Buck 2-16-69 White ?'< 38 MP-163 Mature MP-l63 Doe 2-17-69 no neckband MP-166 Fawn MP-166 Buck 2=18-69 White no If MP-167 Mature MP-167 Doe 2-18-69 Could be pink White no if ? MP-168 Mature MP-168 Buck 2-18-69 Trap mortality no neckband MP-l72 MP=172 Fawn Doe 2-19-69 Injured in trap no neckband MP-173 Fawn MP-l73 Doe 2-19-69 White "/< 47 MP-174 Mature MP-174 Doe 2-21-69 White "/< 20 MP-175 Mature MP-175 Buck 2-21-69 White -k 35 MP-182 Mature MP-l82 Buck 2-21-69 no neckband MP=188 MP-188 Fawn Doe 2-20-69 no neckband MP=190 MP=190 Fawn Doe 2-21-69 \0 White ?'< 53 MP-191 MP-19l Mature Doe 2-25-69 no neckband MP-l92 Fawn MP-l92 Doe 2=25=69 White ?'< 54 Sulphur Gulch 3-7-69 MP-193 MP-193 Mature Doe 2=25=69 Sulphur Gulch 3=5-69 no neckband MP-194 Fawn MP-194 Buck 2=25=69 Red ?'< 59 Shipped to Fto Collins 3-28-~ MP=195 MP-195 Mature Doe 2-26=69 White ?'< 32 Mature. MP-198 MP-l98 Doe 2-28-69 White ?'< 27 MP-207 MP-207 Mature Doe 2-23-69 no neckband MpcLl5 MP-2l5 Fawn Doe 2-24-69 White ?'< 52 MP-2l6 MP=216 Mature Doe 2-24-69 3-6-69 Doe Mature MP-200 MP-200 White * 37 3-1-69 Doe Mature MP-223 MP-223 White * 51 3-1-69 Doe Mature MP-z24 MP-224 White * 40 3-1-69 Buck Mature MP=225 MP-225 White * 49 3-2-69 Doe Fawn MP-231 MP-23l no neckband 3-3-69 Buck Mature MP-234 MP-234 White no if Injured in trap 3-4-69 Doe Fa~l MP=235 MP-235 no neckband Sul£!rurGulch 3-6-69 3-4-69 Back Mature MPc,236 MP-236 White no 1f: ?'<: Indicates diamond" symbol on nockb and , ()O �Table 3 - Deer TraEEed and Tagged on Parshall Df.vLde .{ Area E22 Middle Parkg Colorado - Winter 1968-69 (continued) .._.Eartag Number s Date Sex Age Right Left Neckband Remarks Buck 3-5-69 Fawn MP-245 MP-2~·5 no neckband Trap mortality 3-25-69 3-7-69 Doe Mature MP-250 MP-250 White "k 56 3-8-69 Doe Fawn MP-251 MP-251 no neckband 3-8-69 Buck Fawn MP-253 MP-253 no neckband 3-8-69 Buck Mature MP-254 MP-254 White "k 11 Buck 3-8-69 Fawn MP-255 MP-255 no neckband 3-9-69 Buck Fawn MP-256 MP-256 no neckband Doe 3-9-69 Fawn MP-257 MP-257 no neckband Injured in trap 3-9-69 Doe Mature White ~'(31 no ear tags 3-10-69 ? ? White ~'(34 MP-263 MP-263 3-10-69 Buck Fawn MP-264 MP-264 no neckband 3-11-69 Doe Mature MP-268 White "k 18 MP-268 3-11-69 Buck Fawn MP-269 MP-269 no neckband 3-12-69 Buck Mature MP-271 MP-271 no neckband 3-12-69 Buck Mature MP-272 MP-272 no neckband 3-12-69 Doe Mature MP-273 MP-273 no neckband 3-21-69 Buck Mature MP-274 MP-274 no neckband 3-13-69 Buck Fawn MP-275 MP-275 no neckband 3-15-69 Buck Fawn MP-276 MP-276 no neckband 3-15-69 Buck Mature White ,'(42 MP-277 MP-277 3-15-69 Doe Fawn White i( 7 MP-278 MP-278 \.0 White ,,(43 0 3-15-69 Buck Mature MP-279 MP-279 3-26-69 Doe Mature MP-280 MP-280 White "k 28 MP-2.81 3-26-69 Doe Fawn MP-281 no neckband 3-26-69 Buck Mature MP-282 MP-282 no neckband 3-26-69 Doe Mature White ,'(16 MP=293 none 3-27-69 Doe Fawn MP-284 MP-284 no neckband Buck 3-28-69 Fawn MP-285 MP-285 no neckband Doe 3-28-69 Mature MP-286 MP-286 no neckband Shipped to Ft. Collins 3-28-69 3-29-69 Buck Fawn MP-288 MP-288 no neckband 3-30-69 Doe Mature MP~289 MP-289 White "k 41 Doe 3-30-69 Fawn MP-290 MP-290 no neckband SUMMARY: 105 deer tagged * Indicates diamond ~ 23.1% mature bucks (24) 19.2% buck fawns (20) symbol on neckband. 35.6% mature does (37) 22.1% doe fawns (23) �Table 4 - Deer Trapped and Tagged at Williams Fork Reservoir ( Area 4). Middle Park. Colorado - Winter 1968~69 Eartag Numbers Date Sex Age Right Left Neckband Remarks Fawn Mature Mature Fawn Fawn Fawn Mature Mature Mature Mature Fawn Fawn Mature Fawn Fawn Mature Mature Fawn Mature Mature Mature Fawn Mature Mature Fawn Mature Fawn 1-14=69 1-14-69 1~16-69 1-17-69 1-18-69 1-18-69 1-19-69 1-20-69 1~25-69 1-25-69 1-25-69 1-25-69 1-27-69 1-30-69 2-3-69 2••2-69 2-3-69 2-5-69 2-.5-69 2-7-69 2-10-69 2-17-69 2-21-69 2-25-69 3-7-69 3-9-69 3-9-69 Buck Buck Doe Buck Buck Doe Buck Doe Doe Doe Doe Doe Buck Buck Buck Buck Buck Buck Doe Doe Doe - Doe Doe Doe Doe Doe Doe SUMMARY: 27 deer tagged -!( Indicates diamond" MP- 3 MP- 4 MP- 7 MP- 10 MP- 14 MP- 15 MP~ 16 MP- 25 MP- 32 MP- 39 MP- 40 MP~ 41 MP- 44 MP- 62 MP~ 68 MP- 77 MP- 83 MP-100 MP-101 MP-114 MP-157 MP-164 MP-204 MP-220 MP-238 MP-258 MP-259 MP- 3 MP~ 4 MP- 7 MP- 10 MP- 14 MP- 15 MP- 16 MP- 25 MP- 32 MP- 39 MP- 40 MP- 41 MP- 44 MP~ 62 MP- 68 MP- 77 MP- 83 MP-IOO MP- 101 MP-ll4 MP~157 MP-164 MP-204 MP-220 MP=238 MP-258 MP-259 18.5% mature bucks (5) 22.2% buck fawns (6) symbol on neckband , no neckband Pink no if Yellow no if Pink no if Pink no if no neckband Pink no if Yellow no if Yellow ~'~ 1 Yellow "k 2 Yellow "k 6 Yellow ~'~7 Pink ~'~16 Yellow ~~ 18 no neckband Pink ~'(24 Pink ~~ 15 Pink no if Yellow i( 19 Yellow ~'( 9 Yellow -!~ 20 no neckband Yellow -!( 31 Ye Ll ow w ? no neckband Yellow ~'(33 no neckband 37.1% mature does (10) 22.2% doe fawns lJU Trap mortality 1-18-69 \0 t-' �Table 5 - Deer TraEEed and Tagged ~n Beaver Creek ~Area 522 Middle Park, Colorado - Winter 1968=69 Date Sex Age Eartag Numbers Right Left 1-14-69 1-19-69 1-24-69 1-25-69 1-21-69 1-22-69 1-30-69 2-1-69 1-28-69 2-5-69 2-6-69 2-14-69 2-18-69 2-28-69 2-23-69 Buck Buck Doe Buck Buck Buck Buck Doe Buck Buck Buck Buck Buck Buck Buck Mature Mature Fawn Mature Mature Mature Mature Fawn Mature Mature Fawn Fawn Mature Mature Mature MP-246 MP- 17 MP- 29 MP- 42 MP- 51 MP- 55 MP- 63 MP- 69 MP- 74 MP- 99 MP-106 MP-143 MP-169 MP-199 MP-208 SUMMARY: 15 deer tagged ~'< Indicates diamond .• MP-246 MP- 17 MP- 29 MP- 42 MP- 51 MP- 55 MP- 63 MP- 69 MP- 74 MP- 99 MP-106 MP-143 MP-169 MP-199 MP-208 73.4% mature bucks (11) 13.3% buck fawns ( 2) symbol onneckband. Neckband Pink ~'(11 Pink no it Yellow ~'(4 Pink ~~12 Pink * 5 no neckband Yellow ~'(19 Pink ~'(14 Pink ~'(10 Pink ~'(2~ Pink no ~ no neckband Pink no it Pink no it Pink ~'(13 0.0% mature does (0) 13.3% doe fawns (2) Remarks Orgina1 eargage MP1 lost Injured in trap 1-30-69 1..0 N �1.0 W Fig. 2. Clover deer trap used in Middle Park deer trapping programo �- 94 - N HOT SULPHUR SPRIN GS SCALE I in. = 5 mi Fig. 3. Summary of neckbanded deer observations for the period January _ April, 1969. �- 95 - Deer Distribution Beginning December 1, 1968 changes in deer distribution were studied. lwenty~ two snowmobile transects w re established throughout potential dEer winter areas in Middle Park (Fig. 4). Att.empts were made to run each of these transects twice each month from December until snowmelt precluded the use of snow~ mobiles. The run scheduled for the first half of January was cancelled because snow cover was too sparse to permit completion of many of the transects. Eighty-five snow measurement po Lnt a we're selecte.d along these t.r ans ec t s , The depth of snow and condition of the crust were recorded at each station each time the transects were run. The number of deer Sten and their locatioI'.s were recorded on a standard form each time a t ransec t was run (Table 6), and ~ in addition, relative abundance of deer sign was recorded into LJIJ.r subjective categories: 0 = little or no deer sign, 1 = light deer sign, 2- moderate deer sign, and 3 = heavy deer sign. Changes on distri.bution were then ma.ppe.d., utilizing all of the above data. During the first half of December dee r were distributed over a 275 square mi.Le area. Distribution was classed as light: over lL3 square miles and moderate to heavy over 162 square miles (Table 7). Average snow depth for '.111 mea strr e> ment stations was 8.2 inches and free.ze crusts were recorded at 31.3 per~ent of the measurement stations (Fig. 5)0 No attempt has been made to quaetiiy the qualitative terms "li.ght", "moder at.e'", and "heavy", but deE-ornumber s associated with the moderate to heavy classes during the. December 1-15 pe r Lod were certainly less than those associated with the same class during the February 1 - March 20 period. The intent was to depict changes in distribution even though changes in density also were implied, and indeed, did 01."::::":.:0:. In the second half of Deeember ch ange s began to occur in d.eer d Lst.r Lbut Lon in the light use areas primarily. At this time these are.as generally were located at higher elevations (8,000 - 9,000 feet) where snow accumulation tended to occur earlier and more rapidly. The average snow depth Lncz ea.sed to 10.1 inches with freeze crusted snow encountered at 66.2 pe:n.::ent of the measurement stations. Deer use was re;::orded as light over an area enc:ompassing 38 square miles and heavy over 141 square miles (Fig. 6). Within the period January 1-31 deer tended to concentrate e'ven more so that by the end of the month deer were shown to be lightly concentrated on oril.y 11 square mi.les and moderately·-heavily concentrated on 83 square miles. During this same period average snow depth remained at 10.1 inehes while tk>.e percent of stations with freeze crusted snow Lncreased to 68.7 pe rcenr (Fig. 7). 'I'hi s apparent patte.rn of eontinual c.oncentrati.on during the entire month did not actually occur without interruption. Fn)!T.1.Ianuary :W~22. teillp'2ratures wet's abnormally h lgh , the average maxfmum temperature being ,~·1.30 F compar-ed tv 33.40 F for the remainder of the month (aver age maxtrnum .Ianuar y tempb:ratuces for the Hot Sulphur Springs reporting station for the period 1961-1968 was 26.50 F). This span of war.m weather was evidenCed by a period of axt.ens Lve snowmelt which bared many south and southwest facing s Lcpe s , DeCi;::O r e spcuded to this period of sriowmeLt by expanding the boundar I.es of t.he i r conc ent.rat i.on areas s omewhat , On January 14 snowfall began, and. betwee'n JaUlll1:l.ey1':",-31 thE:' entire month Us pr ec LpLra t Lcn of 1."7 5 Lnches was rt':c.o.eded. Deer began conc eutrati.ng a.gai.n until their distribution app r ox.Ima.t.ed that dap Ic ced in Fig. 7. �- 98 - l'.able7 - Changes in the Extent of Deer Use Patterns, December 1, 1968 February 20, 1969. Sguare Miles Low Deer Use Area Moderate-High Deer Use Area Dec. 1 - 15 113 162 Dec. 16 - 31 38 141 Jan 1 - 31 11 83 Feb 1 - Mar. 20 11 71 Period �- 99 - N SCALE in. DEC. 1- 15 AVE. SNOW DEPTH LEGEND 11 = 8.2 0/0 of SNOW WITH FREEZE CRUST Fig. 5. = 5 mi = 31.3 0/0 ~ 0. 0 Middle Park deer distribution moderate to light deer little or heavy use use no deer patterns, deer use December 1-15, 1968. �- 100 - N SCALE DEC. 16 - 31 FREEZE SNOW = 10. J II WITH CRUST Fig. 6. 5 mi. deer use LEGEND AVE. SNOW DEPTH 0/0 of in.:: = Middle 66.20/0 Park deer distribution ~ moderate .. light D 0 little patterns, to deer Of no December heavy use deer use 15-31, 1968. �- 101 - N SCALE in. = 5 mi. JAN. 1- LEGEND 31 AVE. SNOW DEPTH of WITH 0/0 SNOW FREEZE Fig. 7. = 10.1" CRUST Middle Park deer distribution ~ moderate to heavy deer D '"tight deer use D little or no deer use patterns, January 1-31, 1969. use �- 102 - N SCALE I in. = 5 mi. FEB. I AVE. SNOW % of SNOW MAR. 20 DEPTH = I 6. 0" CRUST Fig. 8. Middle moderate to heavy deer use D light deer use WITH FREEZE ~ 76.1 % D little or Park deer distribution patterns, February = no deer use 1 - March 20, 1969. �- 103 - The period February 1 - March-20 was one of increasing snow accumulation with an average snow depth for the period of 16.0 inches. Crusted snow was recorded at 76,1 percent of the snow stations during this interval. Deer distribution became even more restricted. Eleven square miles were classed as areas of light deer use) and only 71 square miles were classed as areas of moderate-heavy deer use (Fig. 8). £y April 1 much of the snow on and adjacent to the concentration areas depicted in Fig. 8 had begun to melt. Deer began to reverse the winter concentration trend, and distribution patterns became more widespread as snowmelt progressed. LITERATURE Clover, M~ R. 1956. 42: 199-,201, Single-gate CITED deer trap. Calif, Fish and Game Prepared by: R. Bruce Gill Assistant Wildlife Researcher ��- 105 - JOB PROGRESS State of Project ..::C:..;:o~L:..::O:..:.RA=D:..;:O~ _ No. Work Plan No. W-38-R-23 Deer-Elk Investigations 14 Job No. 2 Middle Park Deer Study Population Density and Structure Job Title: Period REPORT Covered: Personnel: November, 1969 - March, 1969. R. Bruce Gill, Len H. Carpenter, F. Gilbert. Michael J. Dorrance, and Paul ABSTRACT Population density of the Middle Park deer herd was estimated by counting deer on square mile quadrats in the winter from a helicopter. Sample units were chosen according to a stratified random sampling design. The 1968-69 early winter population density was estimated at 15.5 ± 3.4 deer per square mile. The total Middle Park deer population was estimated to be between 7,091 and 11,127. Deer were classified as to bucks, does, and fawns by two methods: helicopter counts and snowmobile counts. Ratios of bucks to does were 53:100, and fawns to does 85:100 from helicopter data. Ratios were 60:100 and 96:100, respectively, from snowmobile data. During the first nine days of hunting season 888 deer taken in Middle Park were checked at the Idaho Springs station. Approximately 55 percent were male, 45 percent female. Of those deer where age determination was possible about 47 percent were adults, 33 percent yearlings and 20 percent fawns. ��- 107 - MIDDLE PARK DEER STUDY POPULATION DENSITY AND STRUCTURE R. Bruce Gill To estimate the density and sex an¢! age structure of the Middle Park deer population in order to harvest this population more efficiently. SEGMENT OBJECTIVES 1. 2. Estimate the size of the total winter population Estimate-the sex and age structure of the Middle METHODS of deer in Middle Park. Park deer population. AND MATERIALS Density Helicopter Quadrat Census Estimates of the total winter population of deer in Middle Park were obtained by counting the number of deer on randomly chosen square mile quadrats from a Bell 47-G3B helicopter. The Middle Park basin was divided into five major smaple areas based upon anticipated discreteness of deer in these areas (P.F. Gilbert, personal communication, 1966). These sample units were: (1) those areas below the treeline (approximately 9,000 ft. in elevation) located in the Muddy Creek drainage and west of Troublesome Creek, (2) areas below treeline in the Blue River drainage, (3) areas below treeline in the Williams Fork River drainage, (4) areas below treeline from Troublesome Creek east to Windy Gap and north of the Colorado River, and (5) areas below treeline in the Granby Basin. Each of these five areas was stratified according to expected high and low deer densities and sample units randomly located within each strata (Fig. 1). Each square mile quadrat was then systematically flown and deer numbers recorded by sex and age classes (i.e. bucks, does, and fawns) when possible. This method was patterned closely after similar methods described by Siniff and Skoog (1964), Evans et ale (1966) and Mangold (1966). Average numbers of deer per square mile were computed for each strata and the total stratified random mean number of deer per square mile estimated by the formula: L yst 1:Nh yh/ n=l N (Cochran, 1963; p. 89) where: h yst Nh stratum number stratified random mean the total number of posoible stratum h yh mean of stratum h N = the total number of possible The total population is estimated by multiplying yst by N sample units sample units in �- 108 An estimate of the variance of yst was obtained by the use of the formula: L V(yst) = l/N2 ~ Nh (Nh-nh_ sh2 I nh n=L or L V(yst) = :£Wh2 n-l L sh2 I nh - .z::..Wh sh 2 IN (Cochran, 1963; p. 94) n-l An initial sample was;.:aken in each of the eight strata. Strata variances were computed and from these variances optimum allocation of sample units per strata were computed using Ney~an's allocation (Cochran, 1963; p. 97). Financial restrictions limited the total number of sample units (n) to approximately 80. Optimum allocation was then computed by the formula: L nh where: optimum n (Nh sh/~Nh sh) n-l nh - the optimum ncmber of sample units for stratun h n - the fixed number of sample units to be counted (80) NH - the total number of possible sample units in stratun h sh - the standard deviation of stratum h allocation of the 80 sample units was then estimated at: 27 for stratum 1 (Muddy Creek--high density) 4 for stratum 2 (Muddy Creek-low density) 22 for stratum 3 (Blue River--high density) 7 for stratum 4 (Blue River--low density 5 for stratum 5 (Wms. Fk. River--nigh density) 1 for stratum 6 (Wms. Fk. River--low density) 12 for stratum 7 (Troublesome Creek East-all high density) 2 for stratum 8 ~Granby Basin--all low density} 80 total sample units to get a better estimate of each stratum mean, it was decided that no stratum Thus the actual allocation of would contain fewer than five sample units. sample units was: 20 for stratum 1 12 for stratum 2 12 for stratum 3 9 for stratum 4 5 for stratum 5 5 for stratum 6 10 for stratum 7 6 for stratum 8 Snowmobile Trand Counts In addition to the helicopter quadrat census. changes in deer densities wer measured from deer counts on the 22 snowmobile transects discussed under Work Plan 14, Job 1. �- 109 - N SPRING SCALE I in. = 5 mi. D LOW DENSITY STRATA ~ HI GH DENSITY STRATA Fig. 1. Locations of square mile deer census quadrats. �- 110 - Fig. 1 (continued). Locations of square mile deer census quadrats. �- III - Sex and Age Classifications Helicopter Classification Counts Sex and age structure of the population was estimated i~ conjunction with the helicopter quadrat census. As many deer as possible were classified as to bucks, does, and fawns. These data were used to compute the percentages in each category and the ratios of bucks:lOO does and fawns:lOO does. Snowmobile Classification Counts Deer observed along the 22 snowmobile transects during the months of December and January were also classified according to sex and age. Percentages ih each category and ratios of bucks: 100 does and fawns:l00 does were computed and compared with helicopter classifications. Check Station Sex and Age Classification During the 1968 big game hunting season, checks were made of the sex and age composition of the hunter harvest brought through the Idaho Springs Big Game Check Station. Data recorded were the sex and age of each animal that could be identified by the checker and th;;location of the kill by drainage or other prominent landmark features. In no instance was the hunter's opinion of the sex and age of the animal recorded. Ages of fawns and one year old animals were estimated by tooth replacement characteristics (Robinette et al, 1957). The ages of all deer which were judged to be older than 16-18 months were estimated by the dental cementum technique described by Erickson and Seliger (1969). When feasible the first incisor tooth was c.ollected from the left mandible. When this was not possible the first incisor from the right mandible was taken. The teeth were sent to the Game Research Laboratory for age determination. RESULTS AND DISCUSSION Density Helicopter Quadrat Census Deer counted per quadrat per stratum, along with strata means and variances, are listed in Table 1. From these data an estimate of the mean number of deer in Middle Park was computed to be.15.5 deer per square mile. The projected total population estimate was 9,109 deer CYst x N). The variance of the mean (s2 cYst» was computed to be 4.25 and the standard error of the mean was estimated at 2.06 (s(yst») or 13.2 percent of the mean. The 90 percent confidence limits about the mean were 12.2 - 18.9 deer per square mile cYst + t s(Yst». The 90 percent confidence limits for the projected total population were 7,091 - 11,127 deer (N yst + t N s (yst». �Table 1 - Numbers of Deer Counted by Quadrat Within the Eight SamE1ing Strataz Middle Parkz Co1oradoz 1968-1969. Granby Troublesome E. Wms. Fk. R. Wms. Fk. R. Blue River Muddy Creek Blue River Muddy Creek High Density Low Density High Density Low Density High Density Low Density All High Density All Low Density 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 6 6 9 12 18 22 31 37 39 46 66 87 99 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 6 15 0 '1 4 15 17 19 20 36 58 88 102 108 0 0 0 0 8 10 29 35 36 - - - 478 21 0 0 0 0 3 - - - - - - 0 4 40 42 45 465 0 0 0 2 2 7 0 0 5 6 15 36 39 41 44 76 - - - - 118 131 3 262 t-' t-' - - N 11 = 1,489 y1 = 23.9 y2 = 1.8 y3 = 38.7 y4 = 13.1 y5 = 26.2 y6 = 0.6 y7 = 26.2 y8 = 1.8 sl = 30.2 s2 = 4.5 s3 = 39.4 s4 = 15.7, s5 = 22.2 s6 ;:;: 1.3 s7 = 25.0 s8 = 2.7 s(yst)= 2.06 v4 = ' 247 ~4 v5 =493.2 v6 = 1.8 v7 = 625.7 v8 - 7.4 v(yst)= 4.25 v1 = 914.4 vs = 20.4 v3 =1555.1 yst = 15.5 �- 113 - Snowmobile Trend Counts A summary of the deer observed on the snowmobile transects for each count period is presented in Table 2. These counts in no way are intended to be indicative of actual population densities but should provide an index to gross changes in animal abundance. Mean numbers of deer sighted per transect count during each period were: 33.4 for December I-IS, 41.3 for December 16-31, 60.2 for January 16-31, 55.4 for February 1-15, 46.2 for February 16-29, and 45.6 for March 1-15. Sex and Age Classification Helicopter Classification Counts Of the 1,489 deer counted during the helicopter census, 1,169 were classified. A summary of the helicopter classification data is presented in Table 3. Bucks comprised 23.3 percent of the total, does 41.9 percent, and fawns 35.8 percent. Ratios of bucks:100 does and fawns:lOO does were 53:100 and 85:100, respectively. There is potential for bias in these classifications. Differences in distribution of buck groups and doe-fawn groups is a possible source of bias. If bucks were found more frequently in low density strata then disparate sampling intensity between strata would favor lower buck:doe ratios. The data have not yet been analyzed to determine whether this kind of bias was important. There also might be visibility bias as affected by behavior. Occasionally it was observed that bucks did not react as markedly to the helicopter as did doefawn groups, but unfortunately, no records were kept on the frequency of this occurrence. If this is a consistent behavioral difference the doe-fawn groups would be more readily observed because of their tendency to run from the helicopter. Variation in flying conditions from day to day probably introduces another source of bias. On clear days the helicopter could be flown close to the deer. On windy days total counts could still be made, but the pilot was unable to approach deer closely enough to be absolutely sure classifications were correct. �Table 2 - Summary of Deer Counts From Semi-Monthly Snowmobile Transect Runs. Number of Deer Observed Jan. 16~31 Feb. 1-15 Transect Number Transect Name Dec. 1-15 Dec. 16-31 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 l3 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 Tyler Mountain Gunsight Pass Deer Creek Antelope Pass Wolford Mountain City Reservoir Trough Road Lawson Ridge Spring Creek Haystack Mountain Horse Gulch Cataract Creek Shane Gulch Pete Gulch Sulphur Gulch Corral Creek Parshall Divide Barger Gulch Cedar Ridge Copper Creek Little Muddy Creek Beaver Creek 17 94 0 109 112 21 0 3 0 33 99 0 29 43 29 46 53 0 19 0 7 34 0 73 0 115 71 26 0 18 23 20 35 0 55 46 89 69 124 15 63 0 23 48 0 11 0 125 118 95 0 69 32 97 204 0 49 Tota1i(~,( 702 Mean No. Deer Per Run 33.4 io'( Feb. 16-29 Mar. 1-15 0 23 0 40 191 70 37 23 6 65 111 0 37 14 73 20 35 70 139 0 27 4 0 22 0 80 235 77 27 74 5 100 34 0 42 67 88 153 42 35 0 48 32 0 64 0 24 99 95 0 29 11 29 72 0 44 0 83 118 197 53 150 0 77 18 867 1,265 1,163 971 957 41.3 60.2 55.4 46.2 45.6 -- Excluding Pete Gulch which was not run on two occasions. 20 36 87 3 92 0 22 7 t-' t-' +:-- �Table 3 - Deer Classifications From Helicopter Counts on Deer Census Quadrats. Dec. 30, 1968 - Jan 4. 1969 Area Ratios Bucks:100 Does Fawns: 100 Does Bucks Does Fawns Total 72 (1704%) 179 164 (39.5%) 415 (100.0%) 40:100 92:100 (4301%) Blue R. 96 (2508%) 157 (42.2%) 119 (32.0%) 372 (100.0%) 61:100 72:100 Wms. Fk. R. 17 (13.3%) 65 (50.8%) 46 (35.9%) 128 (100.0%) 26:100 71:100 Troublesome E. 71 (29.2%) 85 (35.0%) 87 (35.8%) 243 (lOO.O%) 84: 100 102:100 Granby 5 (45.4%) 4 (35.4%) 2 (18.2%) 11 (100.0%) 125:100 50:100 Totals 261 (2203%) 490 (41.9%) 418 (35.8%) 1,169 (100.0%) 53:100 85:100 Muddy Creek I-' I-' V1 �Table 4 - Classifications of Deer From Semi-Monthly Snowmobile Runsz 1968-1969. Period Bucks Does Fawns Class. Total Class Dec. 1-15 112 20.3% 224 40.6% 214 39.1% 550 100.0% 550 73.5% Unc1ass. Total Observed 198 26.5% 748 100.0% 50:100 87:100 Ratios Fawns:100 Does Bucks: 100 Does 96:100 I-' I-' 0'\ Dec. 16-31 148 24.3% 247 40.5% 215 35.2% 610 100.0% 610 66.8% 303 33.2% 913 100.0% 60:100 Jan. 16-31 157 24.2% 307 47.4% 184 28.4% 648 100.0% 648 51.2% 617 48.8% 1,265 100.0% 51:100 60:100 Total 417 23.1% 778 43.0% 613 1,808 . 33.9% 100.0% 1,808 61.8% 1,118 38.2% 2,926 100.0% 54:100 79:100 �- 117 - Snowmobile Classifications Results of deer classifications from snowmobiles are presented in Table 4. Ratios of bucks:lOO does were highest during the period December 16-31 (60:100) possibly because this was the period of greatest rutting activity. Ratios of fawns:lOO does were highest during the period December 1-15 (96:100) and decreased over the next two periods to 60 fawns:100 does by the period January 16-31. This could have been caused by at least two factors: (1) fawns during the last period were larger, making them more difficult to distinguish from does: and (2) unclassified deer during the last period comprised 48.8 percent of all animals observed, compared to 26.5 percent for the first period (Table 4). The unclassified animals during each period were generally in the larger doe-fawn groups, and these were morefrequent during the last period due to concentration of animals. Check Station Sex and Age Clasification Summaries of the 1968 check station data collected during the first nine days of big game season are presented in Tables 5-9. A graphic depiction of the age structure of the checked harvest is presented in Fig. 2. No comments have been made concerning analysis of these data because additional years are needed before meaningful comparisons can be made. �- 118 'I'ab.I,e 5 - October Sex and Age Classes of Deer Checked at Idaho Springs Checking Station, 1968. Adult Yearling Female Females Females Fawns Headless Females Totals 18 12.1% 12 8.1% 149 100.0% 14 6.4% 14 6.4% 28 12.7% 220 100.0% 15 1603% 9 908% 3 3.3% 9 9.8% 92 100.0% 15 6.5% 49 21.1% 18 7.8% 18 7.8% 22 9.5% 232 100.0% 68 7.7% 177 19.7% 58 6.5% 59 6.6% 102 11.5% 888 100.0% Unit No. Adult Males Yearling Males Male Headless Fawns Males 15 24 16.1% 23 1504% 23 15.4% 13 8.7% 31 2008% 5 3.4% 18 41 18.6% 46 20.9% 19 8.6% 14 604% 44 20.0% 27 24 26.1% 18 1905% 8 807% 6 605% 37 30 12.9% 57 24.5% 23 9.9% Total 161 18.2% 181 20.5% 82 9.3% Table 6 - Sex and Ages of Deer Checked at Idaho Springs Checking Station, Excluding Headless Deer. Unit No. Adult Males Yearling Males Male Fawns Adult Females Yearling Females Female Fawns Totals 15 24 19.5% 23 18.5% 23 18.5% 31 25.0% 5 4.0% 18 14.5% 124 100.0% 18 41 23.0% 46 25.8% 19 10.7% 44 24.7% 11+ 7.9% 14 7.9% 178 100.0/ 24 31.1% 18 23.4% 8 10.4% 15 19.5% 9 11.7% 3 309% 100.0% 28 42 29.2% 37 2507% 9 6.3% 38 26.4% 12 8.3% 6 4.1% 144 100.0% 37 30 15.4% 57 29.3% 23 11.8% 49 25.1% 18 9.2% 18 9.2% 195 100.0% Total 161 22.4% 181 25.2% 82 11.4% 177 2407% 58 8.1% 59 802% 718 100.0% 27 0 77 �- 119 Table 7 - Percent of Deer Checked in Each Age Category by Sex C1asses~ Excluding Headless Animals. Unit No. Adult Males Yearling Males Male Fawns Total Adult Females Yearling Females Female Fawns Total 15 24 34.2% 23 32.9% 23 32.9% 70 100.0% 31 5704% 5 903% 18 3303% 54 100 0/0 18 41 38.7% 46 43.4/0 19 17.9% 106 10000% 44~ 61.1% 14 19.4% 14 19.5% 72 100.0% 27 24 48.0% 18 3600% 8 1600% 50 10000% 15 55.6% 9 33.3% 3 11.1% 27 100.0% 28 42 47.7% 37 42.1% 9 10.2% 88 10000% 38 67.9% 12 21.4% 6 10.7% 56 10000% 37 30 27.3% 57 51.8% 23 2009% 110 100.0% 49 57.6% 18 21.2% 18 21.2% 85 100.0% Total 161 38.0% 181 42.7% 82 19.3% 424 100.0% 177 60.2% 58 19.7% 59 20.1% 294 100.0% 0 Table 8 - Yearling Percentages in the Deer Check at Idaho Springs Checking Station October 1968. Total Adult Females Yearling Females Total 23 48.9% 47 10000% 31 86.1% 5 1309% 36 10000% 41 47.1% 46 52.9% 87 100.0% 44 75.9% 14 24.1% 58 100.0% 27 24 5701% 18 42.9% 42 100.0% 15 6205% 9 3705% 24 100.0% 28 42 53.2% 37 46.8% 79 100.0% 38 76.0% 12 2400% 50 100.0% 37 30 34.5% 57 65.5% 87 100.0% 49 7600% 18 24.0% 67 100.0% Total 161 4701% 181 5209% 342 10000% 177 7503% 58 24.7% 235 ,1.0.0.0/0 Unit No. Adult Males Yearling Males 15 24 51.1% 18 '.' �Table 9 _ Age Structure Data From Counts of Dental Cementum Layers in the First Left Incisor Teeth Collected From Deer at Idaho Springs Checking Station, October, 1968. Fawns 1 Yr. MALES 2 Yrs. 3 Yrs. 4 Yrs. 5 Yrs. 6 Yrs. 7 Yrs. 8 Yrs. 9 Yrs. 10 Yrs. 11 Yrs. Unc1. Total 82 19.3% 181 42.7% 51 12.0% 52 12.3% 23 5.4% 14 3.3% 8 1.9% 3 0.7% 4 1.0/0 3 0.7% 1 0.2% 2 0 424 0.5/0 0.0/0 100.0% . Oldest Individual = 12 Yrs. """' N 0 FEMALES 59 20.1% 58 19.7% 40 13.6% 60 20.4% 20 6.8/0 8 2.7% 8 2.7% 8 2.7% 5 1.7% 7 2.4% Oldest Individual = 15 Yrs. 3 1.0% 4 1.4% 294 14 4.8% 100.0% �- 121 - MALES 40% Fig. 2. 30 20 10 Age pyramid of deer harvest checked FEMALES o 10 20% from Middle Park, October, 1968. �- 122 - Cochran, W. G. 1963. York. 413 p , Sampling LITERATURE CITED techniques. John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New Eberhardt, L. 1957. Some uses of stratified sampling in wildlife gations. Mich. Dept. of Conserv. Game Div. Rep. 2158. 5 p. investi- 1969. Efficient sectioning of incisors Erickson, J. A., and W. G. Seliger. for estimating ages of mule deer. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 33(2):384-388. Evans, C. D., W. A. Troyer, and C. J. Lensink. 1966. Aerial census of moose by quadrat sampling units. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 30(4):767-776. Mangold, 8 p. R.E. 1966. How many deer? New Jersye Outdoors. July Issue. 1957. Notes Robinette, W. L., D. A. Jones~ G. Rogers, and J. S. Gashwiler. on tooth development and wear for Rocky Mountain mule deer. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 21(2):134-153. 1964. Aerial censusing of caribou using Diniff, D. B., and R. o. Skoog. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 28(2):391-401. stratified random sampling. Prepared by _ R. Bruce Gill Assistant Wildlife Researcher �- 123 - JOB PROGRESS REPORT State of COLORADO Project No. W-38-R-23 Deer-Elk Work Plan No. 14 Job No. Middle Park Deer Study Population Productivity and Mortality Job Title: Period Covered: Personnel: Investigations May. 1968 through April, 1969. R. Bruce Gill, Len H. Carpenter, Michael J. Dorrance, Paul F. Gilbert, Judd Cooney, Harvey Donoho, Allen E. Anderson, Clait E. Braun, and Bertram D. Baker ABSTRACT Thirty-three deer collections during the winter of 1968-69 yielded a productivity estimate of 2.00 fetuses per doe. Highway and railroad killed does (9) had 1.67 fetuses per doe. Ratios of male fetuses to female fetuses were 150:100 for the collected does and 33:100 for the road-killed does. Post-season ratios of fawns:lOO "mothers" based upon helicopter surveys were 114:100. Calculated estimates of pre-season ratios of fawns:100 "mothers" were 108:100. Winter mortality estimates indicated 4.23 deer per square mile failed to survive the winter of 1967-68. The projected number of winter-lost deer was 1,706. WCO's tallied 54 deer killed on Middle Park highways during the winter of 1967-68. Sixty dead deer were counted along the railroad tracks and were presumed to have been killed in collisions with trains. The 1968 hunter harvest was estimated Park. to be 2,237 deer fpr -. ~, all of Middle ��- 125 - MIDDLE PARK DEER STUDY PRODUCTIVITY AND MORTALITY R. Bruce Gill P. S. OBJECTIVE To estimate increments and losses to the Middle Park deer population order to formulate more efficient harvest regulations. in SEGMENT OBJECTIVES I. 2. 3. Estimate Estimate range. Estimate productivity rates of Middle Park deer. mortality rates of Middle Park deer over the entire winter the magnitude of the hunter harvest. -METHODS AND MATERIALS Productivity Estimates of Middle Park deer productivity were obtained from three sources: (1) female deer which were killed along the railroad tracks and highways, (2) deer collections during the period January 15 - April 15, 1969, and (3) population sex and age classification data. Deer collections were made from all four major winter areas in Middle Park: the Muddy Creek basin, the Blue River basin, the Williams Fork River basin, and the area north of the Colorado River. between Troublesome Creek and Hot Sulphur Springs (Fig 1). Two does were collected each month from each of these four areas so that by April 15 eight does had been collected from each major area. In addition, W.C.O's from Middle Park were requested to report all doe deer freshly killed along the highways and railroad tracks. These deer were used to obtain additional data on productivity. Fetus counts were made from each doe and ovaries were collected for later sectioning and examination for the presence of corpora lutea. The first incisor tooth was collected from the left mandible and an estimate of the age of each doe will be made using the cementum annuli count technique (Erickson and Seliger, 1969). Ratios of fawns:lOO "mothers" were calculated from helicopter surveys (see Job Progress Report for WP 14, Job 2) to provide fawn survival through their first hunting season. classification estimates of �- 126 - -i N :::tJ o C CD r (T1 (/) 69-22.~ (T1 .69-26 SULPHUR SPRIN( SCALE I in. = 5 mi. Fig. 1. Location Colorado. of does collected during the 1968-69 winter in Middle Park, �- 127 - Mortality Winter Mortality Estimates were obtained on four kinds of deer mortality: (1) winter mortality, including starvation, accidents, predation, disease, etc.), (2) 'highway mortality, (3) railroad mortality, and (4) hunter, harvest. No attempt was made to estimate post-natal fawn mortality, wounding mortality, or illegal harvest. Winter mortality was estimated by walking transects chosen at random from among 12 pre-selected strata. The first step in-the design of the sampling scheme was to label each square mile section of winter range as to high, medium, or low expected deer mortality. This was based upon past patterns of mortality and concentrations of deer (P. Fe Gilber't, personal communication, 1966). This stratification was" done within each of the four major deer winter areas previously described. The second step was to select a transect size and shape. Ryel and Bennett (1962) used a belt transect around the perimeters ofa half-section basic sampling unit, with a total of 60 acres searched on each transect. In the present study the basic sampling unit was a squa're-nri.Le section, and the transect used was a belt eight chains wide and one mile long encompassing 64 acres (Fig. 2A). The sections to be searched were located at random with~ in each strata, and the transect chosen at random from 10 possible locations within each section (Fig. 2B). The direction of travel was eigher N,-S or E-W depending upon which direction crossed the maximum number of contours (Fig. 2A). This stipulation was an attempt to align the transect in a direction that would sample a large variety of elevational, slope, and aspect changes. A four-man crew searched each transect by aligning themselves over half the width of the transect. spacing themselves at one chain intervals, and walking the transect from one end to the other. The crew would then move 'over to the second half of the transect and search it back to the beginning point (Fig. 2C). Eighty-two such transects were searc.hed from June 15 - August 15, 1968. This initial sample was used primarily to provide knowledge of the success of stratification, and, as a result, the strata were changed somewhat for 1969 (Fig. 3). Ground rules had to be established regarding when a deer would be counted as present on a transect and whether it was a current carcass. On occasions only part of a carcass would be, found without locating the remainder. Because of this it was decided that the pelvic girdle must be present before the dead deer could be tallied. This was an arbitrary decision, but usually when the pelvis was present at least part of the vertebral column and rib cage also were present. A carcass was judged as current if the body hair still retained essentially its original color, if the hair had not yet become wooly and matted in appear~nce, if the bones were not jet bleached, and if greasy marrow could still be found in the leg bones / . Highway Mortality weo's in the Middle Park valley are required to submit ,a monthly summary on the numbers of deer that were hit and killed by automobiles. These records were used to estimate minim~m highway mortality. �- 128 - I. I I I I I I I I. I I I I I Fig. 2. Location, orientation, j and design of deer winter mortality transects. �- 129 - N SULPHUR SPRINGS SCALE I in. = 5 mi. Fig. 3. Locations of 82 deer winter mortality transects. �- 130 - Railroad Mortality The Denver-Rio Grande Railroad runs from Winter Park through Kremmling, Colorado. Nearly every winter some deer are killed along this rail line, mostly within the section located between Hot Sulphur Springs and Troublesome, Colorado. Each spring in late April senior students majoring in wildlife biology at Colorado State University walk this section of rail line and count the number of current deer carcasses presumed to have been killed by trains. These counts were used to estimate the annual minimum railroad mortality. Hunter Harvest Estimates of the hunter harvest were available for part of the Middle Park basin (Game Management Units 18, 289 and 27) but were not available for the eastern portion of Game Management Units 15 and 27 (Fig. 4). In order to estimate the total harvest a ratio formula was used. The hunter report card estimates from GM Units l8~ 28 and 27 were summed. Then the proportion these three units comprised of the total Middle Park deer check at Idaho Springs was calculated. It was assumed that deer would be checked in the same proportion as they were killed in each unit. Finally the total harvest was estimated by the formula: ~ a~~ x=a~~/r where: r = the ratio of the unit 18, 28, and 37 deer check to the total Middle x Park check = total deer harvest a = unit 18 report card estimate of hunter harvest b unit 28 report card estimate of hunter harvest c = unit 37 report card estimate of hunter harvest A check on the accuracy of this estimate could be made by comparing it to the estimated harvest of Grand and Summit Counties combined. Approximately 45 square miles of Grand County lie outside the area considered as Middle Park, and this would tend to inflate the latter estimate. Also, the projected county estimates from hunter report cards are not as accurate as the Game Management Unit estimates so it is unlikely the two estimates would agree exactly. RESULTS AND DISCUSSION Productivity Collections Thirty-three does were collectea during the period January - May~ 1969, instead of the scheduled 32. An additional doe was collected during May under �- 131 - Middle Park Boundary Parts of Units Fig. 4. Game management unit 15 and 27 outsi.de Mi.ddle Park located within, or partially within, Middle Park. �- 132 the supe rv i.s i.on of Mro Paul F. Gilbert, Area Game, Fish and Parks Supervisor, for use as a necropsy demonstration animal. Everyone of the collected does was found to be pregnant. Six singletons, 22 sets of twins, four sets of triplets~ and one set of quadruplets were tallied, making a total of 66 fetuses for 33 does, or 2.00 fetuses per doe. Thirty-three of the fetuses were males~ 22 were females, and 11 were not old enough to determine t.heir sex. This yielded a fetal sex ratio of 150 males: 100 females (Table 1). Highway and Railroad Kills Nine does were examined which had been killed along highways and the railroad. All nine were pregnant~ with a total of 15 fetuses, for a fetus:doe ratio of 1.67. Of the 15 fetuses 10 were males, three females, and two were unclassified. The fetal sex ratio was 333 males:lOO females (Table 2). Crown-rump lengths were measured on each undamaged fetus, and graphs from Hudson and Browman (L959; p. 296) were used to estimate the ages of each fetus (Fig. 5). By back-dating from these ages, estimates were made of the beginning, end and peak of breeding activity (Fig. 6). Figure seven depicts the approximate rate of growth of Middle Park fetuses. Helicopter Classifications The results of the helicopter classifications were reviewed in the Job Progress Report for WP 14, Job 2. A ratio of 85 fawns:lOO does was reported for all of Middle Park, but this is a misleading figure to use for productivity and survival estimates since the total count of does also includes yearlings which normally have not produced their first fawn. A more meaningful figure would be the ratio of fawns:lOO "mothers" (Anderson, 1965). This estimate is arrived at by subtracting the percentage of yearling females (non-producers), obtained from the female kill sample:=; at the big game checking station, from the total number of does counted during the post-season population survey. Theoretically, then, this will leave only those does capable of producing fawns. Ratios of fawns: 100 does are c.a.Lcu Latad ag aLn , and this figure should approximate the number of fa-wns surv lvj.ng from birth to the time the postseason survey was conducted. The ratio of fawns: 100 "mothers" for pos t-vse ason 1968 was calculated to be 114 fawns:lOO "mothers". No pre-season fawn:cloe counts were conducted, but a calculated estimate of the pre-season ratios can be made by adding the total numbers of estimated fawns and does in the harvest to the estimated postseason populations in these categoriies and recalculating the ratio of fawns: 100 "mothers". This assumes that the only mortality factor operating during the intervening period was hunter harvest. Obviously, this is not true because wounding loss, illegal harvest~ predation, and early winter mortality were all occurring during this period, but the ratio still may be a useful index to compare post-faw~ing survival from year to year providing that the rates of the other mortality factors remain constant (this is probably a very shaky assumption). The calculated pre~season ratio of fawns:lOO "mothers" for 1968 was 108:100 (Table 3)0 �Table 1 - Number Collection Period of Fetuses Per Doe From Deer Collected 69-11 69-16 1 2 0 0 1 2 1 69-19 69-20 1 1 2 3 1 2 69-25 69-29 1 1 1 1 2 2 69-9 69-10 2 3 0 0 2 3 69-12 69-13 1 1 1 69-23 69-24 1 1 1 1 2 2 69-18 69-22 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 March 69-17 69-21 1 1 1 2 1 2 2 !-' 69-27 69-28 69-26 69-32 3 0 0 1 3 1 69-33 0 2 2 7 7 17 (3 un , ) 100 Female Fawns * un. - unidentified. 2 1 2 - - 2 un. 69-14 69-15 Male Fawns: -1 0- 21 un, 1 February Totals 69-4 69-5 0 - - 1969. 1 1 - Winter! Troublesome and East Fk. River Fetuses Collection Fetuses F Total Number M Total M F 69-6 69-7 69=3 - 21 un.·f( 69-8 un. May Colorado; -1 42 un. - April Park2 Williams Blue River Muddl Creek Collection Fetuses Collection Fetuses Collection Number M F Total M F Total Number Number 69-1 69-2 January In Middle = 150:100 69-30 69-31 2 1 0 11 4 19 (4 un , ) 1 2 2 Fetuses 2 3 2 1 0 2 7 6 15 (2 u n , ) : 100 Does = 200:100 8 5 15 2 uno) w w �- 134 - Table 2 - Number of Fetuses Colorado; Winter 1969. Per Doe From Road-Killed Deer, Middle Park, Collection Date Collection Number M Fetuses F Total 2-3-69 69- 4-RK 1 1 2 Byers Canyon Rifle Range 2-5-69 69- 5-RK 1 0 1 Parshall, 2-11-69 69- 7-RK 2 un,,;'( 1 mi. N. Kremmling, 2-28-69 69- 8-RK 1 0 1 Byers Canyon Rifle Range 3-2-69 69-l0-RK 0 1 1 2 mi. E. Kr emrn ling , Colorado 3-3-69 69-ll-RK 2 1 3 2 mi. W. Parshall, 3-17-69 69-l4-RK 1 0 1 1 mi. Wo Troublesome ,Colorado 3-17-69 69-l5-RK 2 0 2 1 mi. Wo Troublesome ,Colorado 4-16-69 69-l7-RK 2 0 2 Parshall, Colorado 10 3 15 (2 un.) Fetuses 100 Does - 167 Totals Male Fetuses 100 Female Fetuses * un. - unidentified. - 333 Collection Area 100 Colorado Colorado Colorado 100 �- 135 - 44 40 360 - 320 2 2 CI) :r: 280 t- (!) Z I.aJ ..J 240 0.. 2 ::> 0:: 200 I Z ~ 0 a:: u 160 120 80 40 o 60 40 20 80 AGE FIG. 5 120 IN DAYS Middle Park deer Browman. 1959). Estimated ages curve Hudson and from of 100 140 160 fetuSlBs (Growth �- 136 - 24 20 . ~16 . en "c o o c o u o •..12 Q) ..Q E ::J Z 8 4 Nov.15-20 Nov.21-25 FIG. 6 Estimated dates of deer fetuses, 1969. Nov.26-30 Dec. 1-5 conception Oec.6-IO of oee.n-ts Middle Pork Dec.IS-ZO �54 MULE DEER FETUSES DAYS L-1 64 DAYS 97 L_ L DAYS .l ~ l;..l -...J ! __ 1 . o , 2 3 134 J 4 L-.i l I L------.1_~1 INCHES Fig. 7. Approximate growth rate of Middle Park deer fetuses, 1968-1969. DAYS �- 140 - LITERATURE CITED Anderson, A. E. 1965. An ecological investigation of the Cache La Poudre deer herdg Colorado. Population studies. Population density and structure. Colo. Game, Fish and Parks Dept., Game Research Div. Fed. Aid Pr o j , W-I05-R~4, Job Comp L, Rept. p-47-74. Game Planning Services. 1969. Resume of bi.g game seascns in Colorado, 1968. Colo. Div. Game, Fish and Parks Rept. (mimeo). 152 p. Erickson, J. A., and W. C. Seliger. 1969. Efficient sectioning cisors for estimating ages of mule deer. J. Widl. Mgmt. 33(2):384-388. of in- Hudson, P., and L. Go Browman. 1959. Embryonic and fetal development the mule deer. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 23(3):295-304. Ryel, L. A., and C. L. Bennett. 1962. and spring 1962 dead deer searches. Rept. No. 2396. 38 p. of Technical report on the fall 1961 Michigan Dept. Conser. Game Div. Prepared by ~ ~ R. Bruce Gill Assistant Wildlife _ Researcher � https://cpw.cvlcollections.org/files/original/6981b27e5a092d5582eaa3376390fe20.pdf 476bafa0a62eb4cf87d5830ac99f2ed2 PDF Text Text ----------------------~ - 141 - JOB PROGRESS REPORT Cr 9 9')n f., ·... .:..u J)/n _" State of COLORADO --------~~~~~-------------- Project No. W-38-R-23 Deer-Elk Investigations Work Plan No. 14 Job No. 4 Job Title: Middle Park Deer Study Physical Characteristics and Food Habits Period Covered: Personnel: November, 1968 through March, 1969. R. Bruce Gill, o. Charles Wa11mo, Vincent H. Reid, Don Reichert, Michael J. Dorrance, Len.H. Carpenter, and Paul F. Gilbert ABSTRACT Methodology of data collection is discussed in some detail. Results discussion of data have not been presented because all material has not been analyzed. . ':. . _."_ -: , ~ ��- 143 - MIDDLE PARK DEER STUDY FOOD HABITS AND PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS ! R. Bruce Gill p. S. OBJECTIVE To measure selected physical characteristics physical condition of deer, and to determine deer in Middle Park. related to the assessment of forage preferences of 'mule SEGMENT OBJECTIVES 1. 2. 3. Estimate forage preferences of deer from stomach content analyses. Estimate forage preferences of deer from tame deer observations. Measure selected physical characteristics of deer which are believed to be indicative of the state of physical condition. METHODS AND MATERIALS Forage Preferences - Stomach Content Analyses Stomach contents were collected from each deer collected in conjunction with WP 14 Job 3. Contents from the rumen and reticulum were mixed and samples were placed in plastic bags and cylindrical cardboard containers. These samples were frozen and will be analyzed for percent species composition by Vincent H. Reid, USB SF & W, at the Rocky Mountain Forest and Range Experiment Station Laboratory in Fort Collins, Colorado. In addition, stomach samples were collected from road-killed deer during the period January - April, 1969. Forage Preferences - Tame, Trained Deer Observations Five deer fawns - four mule and one white-tailed deer - were acquired during June, 1968. These fawns were hand raised. tamed and trained to lead with harnesses by Dr. O. C'.Wallmo and Don Reichert of the Rocky Mountain Forest and Range Experiment Station. Dr. Wallmo and Mr. Reichert had sole responsibility for this phase of Job 4 under a Memorandum of Understanding with the Game, Fish and Parks Division. Three study areas were selected in representative deer winter range zones: (1) early winter use zone, (2) mid-winter use zone, and (3) late winter use zone. Each study plot was 10 chains x 10 chains and marked so that each square chain could be identified during feeding trials. Prior to snowfall data were collected on frequency of occurrence of plant species of each area. Beginning in November feeding trials were started. Deer were allowed to forage on the plots for as long as they displayed an interest in feeding. Data were recorded on the species selected for food and the number of bites. ��- 145 - JOB PROGRESS REPORT State of COLORADO Project No. W-38-R-23 Deer-Elk Investigations Work Plan No, 14 Job No. 5 Job Title: Middle Park Deer Study Increasing Period Covered: April 1, 1968 through March 31, 1969 Personnel: Forage Availability R. Bruce Gill P. S. OBJECTIVE To develop and test devices for increasing forage availability on winter ranges. SEGMENT OBJECTIVES Survey available literature concerning snow-melting devices and techniques in order to: (a) select potential snow-melting agents for testing in Middle Park, and (b) formulate plans for developing devices to apply snow-melting agents. METHODS 1. 2. AND MATERIALS Library research of pertinent published Contact individuals involved in current articles. snow-melting researcho RESULTS AND DISCUSSION Literature surveys and discussions with other scientists indicated that snowmelting would be an expensive and inefficient way of providing additional forage for Middle Park deer in winter. Therefore~ it is reco~mended that this job be relegated to the lowest priority in the sequence of experimental management programs designed to increase deer winter food, Prepared by Ro Bruce Gill Assistant Wildlife ~,~ Researcher ��- 147 - JOB PROGRESS REPORT State of C~O~L~O~RA~D~O~ Project No. W-38-R-23 Deer-Elk Investigations Work Plan No. 15 Job No. 1 Job Title: An Investigation Period Covered: Personnel: January _ of Deer-Auto Accidents 15, 1968 through March 31, 1969 Dale F. Reed, Bruce C. Giunta, Jerome J. Cebula, Dennis L. Money, Claudia A. Doose, Charles L. Merrell, Kenneth C. Dillinger, Gary T. Myers ABSTRACT Factors which might effect the number of deer-auto accidents were measured on 20 miles of Highway 13 south of Meeker and on 18.5 miles of Highway 82 near Glenwood Springs. Deer densities, based on weekly spotlight counts, averaged 156 near Highway 13 and 77 adjacent to Highway 82. Most deer were present in both areas during March. In an eleven month period, automatic traffic counters recorded about 223,000 vehicles on Highway 13 and 1,063,000 vehicles on Highway 82. Traffic on both highways was greatest in August. About 60% of the terrain, classified according to the number of contour intervals, near Highway 13 is gently rolling and rolling, 20% moderately rough, 11% rough, and 6% relatively flat. Vegetation typed within one quarter mile of both sides of Highway 13, was 43% sagebrush, 22% browse, and 10% pinyon-juniper. Tracks counted near the edge of Highway 13 proved to be indicators of roadside deer activity and may provide a rough measure of the number of deer crossing the highway. Colorado traffic accident reports indicate that most deer-auto accidents occur on dry highways when weather is clear. In addition to factors, possibly affecting deer-auto accidents, the number and location of deer killed in such accidents was recorded by quarter mile interval. Vehicles killed 118 deer on Highway 13 and 147 on Highway 82. The information collected is necessary to evaluate the effectiveness of devices designed to reduce deer-auto accidents. �- 148 - RECOMMENDATIONS 1. Wildlife Conservation Officers should be asked when and where deer cross highways in areas where highway construction is anticipated. This information is required to determine if and where structures are needed to reduce or prevent deer-auto accidentso Methods described in the Game Information Leaflet to be published by the Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Division may be used to gather this informationo 2. Evaluate the effectiveness of highway lighting as means of preventing deer-auto accidentso Lighting should be installed and tested on a threequarter mile section of Highway 82 (Sections 8, 9 and 10) where almost 80 deer were killed by vehicles in a six month period (January, February, and March, 1968 and 1969)0 30 A lighted "Deer Xing" sign (similar to the "Icy-Road" signs now used in Colorado) should be designed, installed on about two miles of Highway 82, and tested to see if the number of deer-vehicle accidents decrease in the signed areaso 40 Remove brush on the Highway 13 right of way which might hide deer from motorists. Compare pretreatment deer kill and count data to post-treatment kill and count data to learn the effect of brush removal on the number of deer killed by vehic1eso �- 149 - DEER-AUTO ACCIDENT INVESTIGATION Gary To Myers An estimated 4,000 deer are killed on Colorado highways annuallyo The deerauto accident problem is compounded by the advancement of the Inter-state Highway System through areas of high deer concentrati.ons and across deer migration routes. Improvement of mountain highways, in addition to the Interstate System, will increase the annual drain on the deer resource unless specific practices which will reduce this loss can be recommended to the Colorado Highway Department. The object of this study is to find out what factors affect the occurrence of deer-auto accidents in hopes that certain of the important factors can be controlled to reduce deer-vehicle collisions in Colorado. P. S, OBJECTIVE Determine factors which cause deer-auto accidents on Highway 13 south of the White River bridge in Rio Blanco County and on Highway 82 between Basalt and Glenwood Springs. SEGMENT OBJECTIVES 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Record all auto-deer kills and location of kills in the study areas. Estimate deer densities along the study areas. Measure 'the n1llJffiber of deer crossing highways in the study areas. Measure the vehicle traffic volume. Record driving and road conditions associated with deer-auto accidents. Describe the physical features of the study areas. Determine the type and quantity of vegetation adjacent to the study areas o METHODS AND MATERIALS Number and Location Highway of Vehicle-Deer Kills 13 and 82 The numbers of deer found killed by vehicles in study areas on Highways 13 and 82 were recorded. Each study area was checked by vehicle for dead deer at least three times a week during periods when the 'kill was high. During slack summer months, highways were usually checked twice a week for killso Occasionally evidence of vehicle-deer kills was found (skidmarks, blood smears, and deer hair) with the carcass missing. These apparent kills were included in the dead deer tally. To further facilitate the location of dead deer~ the Highway Department and State Patrol instructed their field men to leave all deer killed by vehicles at kill siteso Occasionally the State Patrol Dispatcher alerted project personnel to deer-auto accidentso These accident sites were. usually examined shortly after notification (Fig. 1). �150 - Fig. 1. Deer and vehicle involved in collision near Glenwood Springs. �The locations of vehicle-deer kills were marked in relation to reflective house numbers and red reflectors placed at 1/4 mile intervals adjacent to highways in both study areas. Quarter mile section number one began at the Rio Blanco and Garfield County Line on Highway 13. Quarter mile sections were numbered from south to north toward Meeker and ended with section number 80 just south of the hunction of Colorado 13 and Colorado 64 near the Stage Coach Inn. On Highway 82. section one began at the Garfield Steel and Welding building south of Glenwood Springs. Sections progressed by quarter mile through section number 74 which ended a few yards northwest of Basalt City Limits. A record of the number of deer killed in each quarter mile section was kept. In addition~ a rough map of each kill site was made to enable approximate relocation of all ki.ll sites. Density Estimates Deer density estimates were obtained by counting the number of deer present within sight of each highway at night with two spotlights attached to a vehicle driven slowly on one side of the highway and down the other side. One estimate was made each week on both highways except when counting conditions were poor due to rain or snow. The number of deer seen in each marked quarter mile of highway were recorded. Deer Crossing Estimates Three sites were selected to evaluate the effectiveness of track counts as they relate to the number of deer which cross highways. These sites, one adjacent to Highway 82, and two along the edge of Highway 139 were chosen because of the suitability of terrain for track strip preparation and because deer were active in these areas. A total of six track strips were established on opposite sides of the highway at the three selected sites. Two strips were established along opposite sides of Highway 82. The strips were 6 feet wide. 1/4 mile long and 15 to 30 gee.t from the pavement edge and were harrowed to a depth of 2 inches. The four remaining strips~ each approximately 1/2 mile long. located 10 to 30 feet from either edge of Highway 13. were bulldozed clear of brush, one-way disked two or three times in opposite di.rections to break up the soil to a depth of 4 inches, harrowed four to six times with a spike tooth harrow having teeth verticle9 hand raked to remove loose stones and vegetation. and then harrowed two to four more times with harrow teeth horizontal for smoothing The resulting four strips. along opposite sides of Highway 13, were about 6 f eet wi.de, All strips were harrowed weekly throughout the elevation period to remove vegetation~ break up crusted soil, or to erase tracks. 0 Tracks were generally counted tri-weekly the strip were counted and recorded. on foot. Only those tracks crossing The time interval between erasure and count was noted~ as were factors which seemed to influence track counting conditions. Only ten track counts were made on strips adjacent to Highway 82 due to insufficient deer activity. but 53 counts were made on the Highway 13 track strips. Evall.i.stionof these data showed that track counts provide an index for estimating the number of deer �- 152 crossing highways. Thus, a track strip about 19 miles long adjacent to Highway 13 was established by bulldozing brush from an area at least 6 feet wide and disk plowing the strip to a depth of 4 inches. The strip was harrowed several times and the lower half of the track strip rototilled during October~ 1968., In winter, deer tracks in snow on one shoulder of either highway were counted when possible by use of a pickup, jeep, or Ski-doo traveling slowly near the edge of the pavement. Attempts were made to count tracks in fresh snow after it had been on the ground for only one night. When necessary, old tracks in the snow were eradicated by dragging, raking, or by running over tracks with a Ski-doo. Records of the number of tracks seen in each marked quarter mile section of highway were kept for each count. Traffic Volume Traffic volume was measured hourly with Streeter Amet electric recorders utilizing buried loop detectors. Recorders and loops were provided and installed by the Highway Department. Vehicle traffic volume was recorded hourly on each highway since February, 1968. Occasionally counters broke but were promptly repaired by the Highway Department. Driving and Road Conditions Driving and road conditions were recorded on Investigators Traffic Accident Reports by the State Patrol when deer-auto accidents were reported. Information regarding these conditions was taken from over 1,600 accident reports relating to deer-auto accidents occuring in 1965-1967. This information was coded, placed on punch cards~ and summarized by computer. Physical Features of Study Areas Physical features of the Highway 82 study area were not measured and described during this segment; however, most of the work relating to Highway 13 was finished. Terrain The area within 1/4 mile on each side of Highway 13 was divided into about 40-50 acre fields on contour maps. The highway side. of each field corresponded to quarter mile marked intervals of highway used to record the location of deer crossings, sightings. and kills. The numbers used to mark these intervals on the ground served to identify each field on the contour map. Diagonals were drawn across each field. The total number of 40 foot contour intervals cut by both diagonals provided a quantitative measure of roughness of terrain. The terrain indexes for fields adjacent to the same length of highway were added to get a measure of terrain next to each quarter mile length of Highway 13. This last index was used to place areas into five general categories. Fields having indexes from 1 to 10 were placed in the flat category, 11 to 20 - gentle rolling, 21 to 30 - rolling, 31 to 40 - medium rough, and 41 to 50 - rough. �- 153 - Elevation Maps having 10 to 50 foot contour intervals were used to estimate elevation of previously marked 1/4 mile lengths of Highway 13. the average The estimated elevation is probably accurate within 20 feet or less. Elevations obtained in this manner were used to place quarter mile lengths of highway into one of three groups, 6. 140 to 6,650, 6,651 to 7,160, and 7,161 to 7,360 elevation. Structures and Haystacks The number of houses and haystacks within 1/4 mile of Highway and recorded for each quarter mile interval of highway. 13 were noted Water Water sources within a mile of either side of Highway 13 were located on aerial photographs, by making field checks and interviewing local ranchers, land owners and sheep herders. Water was then classified according to type, availability. and location, Type and Quantity of Vegetation The fields designated on contour maps were drawn on aerial photographs. The various vegetative types containing 0.5 acres or more and within the boundaries of the fields were designated on aerial photographs and also visited on foot to determine vegetative type and composition by means of pace transects. In small types, a reading was taken every pace. In larger types, a reading was made every second pace, and in the largest types, readings were made every third pace. In all cases, 100 readings were made. Types were based on des~ criptions set forth in Big Game Range Analysis Instructions (Interagency Committee on Big Game Range Analysis, Unpublished Report, June, 1962). Quantity of vegetation was determined by planimetering each designated type. Acreages and percent of each type present within 1/4 mile of Highway 13 were then computed. No vegetative work was done in the Highway DESCRIPTION Highway 82 study area. OF AREA 13 There are two intensive study areas, one of which is located in Rio Blanco County south of Meeker in northwestern Colorado on 20 miles of Highway 13. This highway serves as the boundary between Game Management Units 22 and 23, across which is said to move the largest migrating mule deer herd in the world. During 1968, 7,370 deer were harvested from these two units (Anonymous 1968). Roughly 4-5 deer were harvested per square mile. This study area begins 1/4 mile north of the bridge south of Meeker which spans the White River �- 154 - and continues south to the Rio Blanco-Garfield County Line, The highway in this area is two lane with a speed limit of 60 mph for about 13 miles and 70 mph for the remaining 7 miles. The highway surface is mixed bituminous material. The south end of the study area lies at about 73350 feet elevation while the north end is at roughly 6,300 feet: elevation? Vegetation consists primarily of sagebrush, browse, and Pinyon-juniper types with some grassland and a small amount of cultivated land mostly in whe at; , Both cattle and sheep are grazed on ranges within the study area which is sparsely populated. The area is covered with deep washes and steep hills. The Grand Hogback, a ridge as high as 1,500 feet or more in places and as wide as three miles, parallels the east side of the study area for about 10-1/2 miles. During the interval between April 1968 and March 1969, temperatures in the midportion of the study area ranged from a high of 850 F in July to a low of -240 F in December (Table 1). Precipitation during this same period was 13.67 inches. Highway 82 The other intensive study area is on about 19 miles of Highway 82 between Glenwood Springs and Basalt. Highway 82 is the boundary between Game Management Units 43 and 44 where 3,142 deer were harvested by hunters during 1968. Hunters killed roughly 1-1/2 - 2-1/2 deer per square mile in these two management units? The study area begins a few yards northwest of the City Limits of Basalt and runs continuously to the edge of Glenwood Springs? At the beginning of the study, there were about five miles of four land highway. As of the end of June, 1969. there will be close to 12 miles of four lane highway within the study area. The remaining portion of highway is two lane. All of the highway has mixed bituminous surface. The speed limit is 60 mph except on 3 miles of highway where it is reduced to 50 mph. Highway 82 lies between about 6,200 feet elevation at Glenwood Springs, and about 6,500 elevation near Basalt, This study area contains a large amount of cultivated land. Vegetation includes sagebrush and pinyon-juniper types, Cultivated land is used primarily to raise hay or to produce. pasture for livestoc.k. The Roaring Fork River parallels the southwest side of Highway 82 throughout the length of the study area, Thus, most of the southwest side of the highway is relatively flat with occasional draws. The other side of the highway is somewhat mountainous. Temperatures between April 1968 and March 1969, ranged between 930 F during June and -140 F in Febru.ary in the study area at a point about 7 miles southeast of Glenwood Springs (Table 2), Precipitation during the same period and at the same location was 9.75 inches. �Table 1 - Climatological Data Collected Near Highway 13 Between April 1968 and March 1969. Nov. Dec. Jan. Feb. March 68 50 39 44 44 54 24 13 2 -24 0 -4 0 71 67 57 39 25 35 33 38 46 44 34 29 16 4 19 13 16 .20 1.09 2.78 1.33 1.37 1.67 .47 1.12 .71 .33 3.54 4.83 2.78 3.94 3.82 3.56 2.04 2.74 1.16 4.88 Feb. March Sept. Oct. April May June July Aug. Maximum Temperature (oF) 65 74 85 85 78 80 Minimum Temperature (oF) 5 6 22 29 31 Ave. Maximum Temperature (OF) 47 58 73 78 Ave. Minimum Temperature (oF) 22 30 40 Total Precipitation (In.) 1.70 .95 Ave. Wind Velocity (mvp 2.9 3.30 s h, ) Table 2 - Climatological Data Collected Near Highwa~ 82 BetweenAEril April May June July Aug. 1968 and March 1969. Sept. Oct. Nov. Dec. Jan. 45 56 Maximum Temperature (OF) 71 84 93 92 86 88 83 59 57 45 Minimum Temperature (oF) 18 2L~ 34 33 33 30 18 5 -14 -10 -14 0 Ave. Maximum Temperature (oF) 56 67 81 84 79 76 68 48 38 31 31 38 Ave. Minimum Temperature (oF) 28 35 42 49 47 37 33 22 17 11 9 13 Total Precipitation (In) .79 ,63 .15 1.51 1.32 .30 .93 1.01 .92 1.33 .64 .22 Ave. Wind Velocity (m.p.h.) 4.22 4.18 3.91 2.44 2.57 2.76 2.75 2.37 2.16 2.45 2.32 2.58 i-' \J1 \J1 I �- 156 - RESULTS AND DISCUSSION Deer Kill and Accident Locations Knowledge of when and where dee:t'-autoacc.idents occur is essential·to program aimed at reducing the frequency of deer-vehicle collisions. Highway any 13 Results indicate that at least 118 deer were killed on the 20 mile portion of Highway 13 south of Meeker. Thirty-seven percent, or 44 deer,were killed in deer-auto accidents during October (Fig. 2). Another 20 animals were probably killed by motorists in October, but salvaged by hunters. Less than 15 deer were killed during any other month, with fewest hit by motorists during January, February, April, May and June. The kill was most concentrated about 2/1/2 miles south of the Stage Coach Inn in quarter mile Section 70 where 11 deer were killed (Fig. 3). The kill per mile in that area WJaS 18 and 80 which constitutes the winter range of deer in the Highway 13 study area. Highway 82 One-hundred-forty-seven deer were killed by vehicles on Highway 82 between Glenwood Springs and Basalt during 1968. Three-fourths of the kill, 112 animals, occurred during the first four months of 1968. One-half of the kill, 73 animals, occurred in February and March (Fig. 4). Few deer were hit during the vacation months of May through September, less than 30 animals were hit during the last three months of 1968. Nearly half of the deer (70) were killed in the second and third mile south of Glenwood Springs. More specifically, high kill areas were Sections 9, 10, 8 and 6 with kills of 20, 17, 12 and 10 deer respectively. The most concentrated kill per mile of highway included Sections 8-11 where motorists collided with 55 deer during 1968. Had accidents been randomly distributed, one accident would have occurred every 33 yards throughout the mile of highway (Fig. 5). Deer Density Estimates Highway 13 One of the factors affecting the number of deer killed by vehicles is the number of deer present near the highway. A total of 6,464 deer were seen on 48 counts adjacent to Highway 13 during 1968 for an average of 156 deer per count. Most were seen during late winter and early spring. The highest average, 316 deer, occurred in March (Fig. 6). During all other months except June, July, and August) counts averaged at least 135 deer per month~ meaning that motorists should watch for deer on Highway 13 except during summer. Where should motorists watch for deer? Everywhere, but especially in Sections L~O thru 80 (Fig. 7) The most deer seen in one quarter mile was 339. No deer were seen in section number IS. 0 �-~ HIGHWAY DEER 40 ••. 13 ROAD-KILL 1968 .tlOt- 1 .../ ZIt- t-' V1 I -...! " j ..• lOt- ~ 1 /I ~ • lOt- ~ ~ ot- ••• •••• A .I 6 II II 0 n 6 II II II 1\ II II - - - . --~ ~ ~ ••• ~ ~ Fig. 2. Monthly vehicle-deer kill on Highway 13 study area during 1968. �HIGHWAY 13 DEER ROAD-KILL 1968 : Q '""' '; \Jl co J 0: 1I.,ll/M ••• • • II • Fig. 3. Location and number of deer killed by vehicles on Highway 13 study area during 1968. Each bar represents the kill on one quarter mile of highway, Every fourth quarter mile section is numbered below the horizontal axis, Numbers at the very bottom of the graph are the numbers of deer killed in the four quarter mile sections between dotted vertical lines. Quarter mile section number 1 begins at the Rio Blanco county line. Section 80 ends at the junction of Highway 13 with Highway 64. �HIGHWAY 82 DE ER • ~ ~ •~ ROAD-KILL .> II 19 ,~ ~ =: • 1 ¥ ~ '5 J : •.... &I c! 10 ~ \J1 '" ,II ,II IS 10 I ,. , ) _ M _ ~ n ~ Jt _ ~ ~ n n ~ _ ~ - ~ ~t~ Fig. 4. Monthly vehicle-deer kill on Highway 82 study area during 1968. �AUTO DEER-KILL HIGHWAY 82 1968 .' .i ;• ,.......-, I. t-' l 0\ o '; ; i z ~ : II I. ;; i ~ .: -i ; A , •f Fig, 5. Location and number of deer killed by vehicles on Highway 82 study area during 1968. Each bar represents the kill on one quarter mile of highway. Quarter mile portions of highway are numbered just below the horizontal axis. Section 1 is near the Glenwood Springs city limit. Section 74 is near the Basalt city limit. �HIGHWAY 13 SPOTLIGHT DEER COUNT ,. I l1li f- "0 II I J ~p ~ •..... ~ c!• .•.o J 0'. •..... ) I ~o ~: I!l ~ ~ : ! I) ,I ) ) \ - --~ Fig. 6. Number of deer counted adjacent n ~ ~ ~ ~ -- - to Highway ~ ~. 13 study area by month during 1968. �- HIGHWAY 13 SPOTLIGHT DEER COUNT 1968 "" (j"\ '0 N t-' o Durf"'lI. 72 Fig. 7. 96 82 Location 74 116 387 313 87 222 of deer counted adjacent 116 to Highway 4e6 311 719 MZ 13 study area during 490 76e 1968. 104,' �- 163 - Highway \ 82 About half as many deer were counted on Highway 82 as on Highway 13. A total of 3,641 deer were seen adjacent to Highway 82 on 47 counts in 1968 for an average of 77 deer per count compared to 156 per count near Highway 13. About 85% of the deer were present near Highway 82 during the first four months (Fig. 8). Peak numbers (362) were counted in March while counts averaged less than seven deer during the summer tourist season. The greatest concentration of deer near one quarter mile of highway was 334 (Fig. 9). Over 2,000 deer, or 56% were counted within just three miles of highway. Fewest deer were seen in approximately the middle of the study area. Deer Crossing Preliminary Estimates Testing Some questioned that track counts would provide a worthwhile index to the number of deer crossing highways in the two study areas. Therefore, the procedure was tried first on a small scale.· Wind, rain and trampling by livestock, rabbits, and rodents made deer tracks difficult and sometimes impossible to detect. For example, on six occasions (9.6% of the time) counts could not be made, still track counts were successful to some degree on 57 or 90.4% of the sample occasions (Table 3). Deer tracks also became more difficult to count as the number of tracks increased. Only 17 or 26.9% of 63 paired observations were free from excessive deer wandering and interference. Determination of crossings was also complicated by deer that walked along the strips instead of across strips •. Deer chose to do this 38% of the time. The greater the time interval between track removal and count, the more likelihood that weather, livestock or some other factor would destroy a certain percent of the deer tracks crossing plowed strips. Thus, no more than a twenty-four hour interval between erasure and count is desirable. A comparison of counts between paired strips shows an average difference per count of 3.8 crossings and a range of 0 to 17. The percent difference between pairs ranged from 0% to as much as 70% with the average being 32.8% (excluding pairs containing no crossings.) Strips located on the north and east sides of the highways had a total of 556 crossings whereas their paired counterparts had 475 crossings, a difference of 14.5% for the entire test period. Data show that it is possible to count deer tracks in properly prepared track strips. The work involved in installing the strips for this study varied from little work along Highway 82 to considerable labor requiring heavy equipment in sections along Highway 13. The cost of installing the former strips was $80.00, or nearly $40.00 per mile of track strip. This figure is probably representative of the Highway 13 area; however, proper strip preparation may require considerably more work and investment in areas where the soil is rocky or where vegetation is mere dense than that encountered in test sections. �HIGHWAY 82 SPOTLIGHT DEER COUNT 400 r" - II I- 100I~ )110 I- 1100 '5 J eo 0- :.II. IrI! +- - 100I~ ~ 10 rII ~ o ~ M _ ~ _ •••• ,J., ,., ~ ~ ~ '" _.~ n _ ~ ~ Mont" Fig. 8. Number of deer counted adjacent to Highway 82 study area by month during 1968. �HIGHWAY 82 SPOTLIGHT DEER COUNT 1968 •. t-' (j\ o V1 '0 Fig. 9. Location of deer counted adjacent to Highway 82 study area in 1968. �Table 3 - Information Relative to Track Counts Made in Soft Soil Adjacent to Colorado Highway 13 and Colorado Hi hwa 82. T r a c k s Side of Colorado Highway Difference Hours Between Highway Counted Between Percent Date Erasure & Count No. NE Sides SW Difference ··6,. 21.4 24 82 Apr. 24 28 22 Aprl 24 24 82 16 6 10 62.5 24 May 1 82 0 0 May 2 24 82 1 2 66.7 3 May 3 24 82 0 0 May 7 24 (Muddy) 82 0 2 ? -2 May 8 24 (Horse and Cars) 0 82 0 1 May 9 24 82 0 1 ? May 10 24 82 0 0 May 13 24 (Muddy) 82 0 0 14 May 22 24 13 6 -8 57.1 14 May 23 20 13 8 6 42.8 13 13 May 23 22 10 3 23.0 13 14 May 24 24 (Light rain, hard to read) 13 -1 7.1 May 24 24 (Light rain, hard to read) 13 22 27 18.5 -5 11.7 13 15 17 May 28 20 (DWAS ,,~) -2 13 11 May 28 20 (DWAS) 8 27.2 3 10 18 24 13 44.4 May 29 -8 31.2 16 11 May 29 24 13 5 13 22 30 26.6 May 31 48 (DWAS) -8 14 16 12.5 May 31 48 (DWAS) 13 -2 30 27 10.0 72 (DWAS) 13 3 June 3 21 19 9.5 13 -2 June 3 73 (DWAS) 11 2 18.1 13 9 June 5 48? (Rained; DWAS) 0 13 13 0 48? (Rained; DWAS) 13 June 5 61.1 11 18 7 13 June 7 48 (DWAS) 10 70.0 13 7 3 June 7 48 1 66.7 13 -2 3 June 11 12? (Heavy rain; DWAS) 6 54.5 11 5 12? (Heavy rain; DWAS) 13 June 11 0 11 11 0 June 12 13 28 (DWAS) 33.3 2 3 -1 28 (2 sheep on strip) 13 June 12 16.7 13 6 -1 5 June 13 20 (DWAS) 16.7 6 -1 13 5 20 (Cows trampled part) June 13 t-' ~ ~ �Table 3 - Information Relative to Track and Colorado Highway 82 (continued). Counts Made in Soft Soil Adjacent to Colorado " __ .---- - . Highway 13 I Tv"acks Date June 14 June 14 June 18 June 18 June 19 June 19 . June 20 June 20 June 21 June 21 .Iune 24 June 24 June 25 June 25 June 26 June 26 June 27 June 27· June 28 J1ine28 July 1 July 1 July 2 July 2 July 3 July 3 July 5 July 5 July :9 July 9 Hours Between Erasure 6. Count 24 (DWAS) 24 (Cattle completely trampled 24 (DWAS) . 24 (DWAS) 23 (DWAS) 23 (Cattle trampled) 24 (Cattle trampled) 24 (Cattle trampled) 26 (Cattle trampled) 26 71 (DWAS) 71 (Cattle trampled) . 22 22 (DWAS) 24 (Deer trampled spots) 24 (DWAS) 24 24 (DWAS) 25 (DWAS}'~ 24 (DWAS) -. 72 (DWAS) 72 (DWAS,wind blew) 22 (DWAS) 22· 24 (DWAS) 24 (DWAS) 50 (Rain and rho r sje s ) 50 (Rain and horses) 24 (Heavy rain) ,24 (Heavy rain) Colorado Highway No. 13 13 132. 13 13" 13 13-~ 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 1] 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13-':4,3 Side of Highway Counted NE SW 6 __ Difference Between Sides 8 ,__ 4 Perc~t niff~tence r 2~ 64 59 -- -.;. -2 __ ""2 2 .•4 -- -= -- -- r--- -2 5 -1 7 2 3 -1 5 3 10 -2 17 1 -3 0 3 0 9 ,..".,,2 1 ./ ~--40.Q 23.~ -~ -5 3 21 16 --1 0 14 4 2 5 2 5 6 9 4 11 8 25 15 9 11 26 /' 9 9·" 8 6 9 7 7 10 7 3 3 19 10 4 '. ,.' .....2 ..... - r * Deer Walked Along Strips. ./ . ~~d:....;...~ 5&.0 33.3 ~4.4 i!:.;.....~.,. --~<':;-:'-,;; ? ( . ··c.:" 50.0 50.0 60.0 16.7 55.5 27.2 40.0 18.1 65.3 11.1 33.3 00.0 30.0 00.0 47.3 50.0 .Z5.0, t-<-' Q\ -...J �- 168 - Comparisons of the number of deer £rossings in strips adjacent to the same highway show that deer which cross one strip do not necessarily cross the opposite strip of the highway. In other words, deer which cross a track strip do not necessarily cross the highway. Personal observations bear this out. Deer often approached the edge of a highway only to be frightened away by traffic; the process being repeated varying times before a particular animal finally crosses. A track strip along the highway would sometimes indicate several more crossings than actually occurred. There is no way a single strip or paired strips can completely eliminate errors of this nature. Thus, strips are not good indicators of the actual number of deer crossing a highway. However, track strips may still have value as indicators of roadside deer activity. Tracks crossing strips could be expressed as an activity index which might be proportional to actual highway crossings. The fact that counts were possible about 90% of the time during the study (spring and summer) indicates that the procedure has merit. But track counting success diminishes during periods of adverse weather or when the ground is frozen. Time required to conduct track counts might be a limiting factor. One to three miles of strip, excluding time spent hand raking numerous tracks, could be counted by one man on foot in an hour. The reading of tracks over an extensive system of strips would require vehicle travel of some sort. If counts are made from a vehicle, accuracy can be expected to decline as higher speeds and manipulation of the vehicle divert attention of the observer away from the ground. Tracks were often hard to distinguish, even on foot and with good light conditions. But the error should be constant, and might have little effect on overall results. Highway 13 Six full length tract counts were made on Highway 13, one during December, three in January, and two in February. An average of 26 tracks were counted per mi le of highway during' December, 12 per mi le in January" and 15 per mi le in February (Table 4). The eighteenth mile contained most tracks during December, the ninete~nth and twentieth during January, and the eighteenth in February. Tracks were concentrated primarily between the twelfth and twentieth mile on Highway 13. Highway 82 One good track count was made in snow the full length of the Colorado 82 study area on February 15, 1968. A total of 301 deer tracls were counted, with most tracks occurring in the third and seventeenth mile of the study area (Fig. 10). Nine other track counts were made in the median between lands of traffic in quartermile sections 5-9 and 22-28 (Table 5). Roughly three times more deer tracks were seen per quarter mile of highway in Sections 5-9 than in Sections 22-28. Most tracks, 20.6 per quarter mile, were counted in Sections 5-9 during February, 1969. �- 169 Table 4 - Average Number of Deer Tracks Seen in Snow Adjacent to Highway 13 on Six Counts. Average Number of Deer Tracks Per Mile Mile of Average Total Feb. Jan Highway· Dec. 1 6.0 0.0 0.0 6.0 2.0 2 23.0 3.3 0.5 26.8 8.7 3 0.0 0.0 0.5 0.5 0.2 4 0.0 1.3 0.0 1.3 0.4 5 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 6 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 7 1.0 000 0.5 0.5 0.5 8 0.0 103 0.0 103 0.4 9 6.0 0.0 0.0 6.0 2.0 10 4.0 0.0 0.0 4.0 1.3 11 5.0 2.3 0.0 7.3 2.4 12 39.0 8.0 4.5 51.5 17.2 13 70.0 8.7 29.0 107.7 35.9 14 18.0 2107 1105 51.2 17.1 15 44.0 19.3 24.0 87.3 2901 16 46.0 38.3 29.0 113.3 37.8 17 51.0 33.3 23.5 107.8 35.9 18 92.0 27.6 77.0 196.6 65.5 19 34.0 40.6 44.0 118.6 39.5 20 78.0 40.6 48.0 166.6 55.5 Total 517.0 246.3 292.0 1055.3 Average 25.9 12.3 14.6 17.6 �HIGHWAY 82 TRACK COUNT ;". February IS, 1968 ~ t. :~(:; ~~ :~ -/-0: ! . 15 J 40 .\,. ¥_., ..1 • " .~ :-"~•.;,, It . ·lI'i~': ,:> ''($ i;::'. : ..- • \', i :!' I 40 .~ . , .or a ····r i'-' }:~~:';,~~?1 :. ~. ~ I • 4 • IiIlli ,if I~II I. • ? • • ~ • • • M • • " • • Mil •• Fig. 10. Distribution on February 15, 1968. near Basalt. .t. : t. •• •• uu 1V of 301 deer tracks counted next to Highway 82 in study area Mile number 1 is near Glenwood Springs and mile number 19 ~~ 11, ~ ." :;\)" �- 171 - Table 5 - Average Number of Deer Tracks Seen on None Counts Made in Snow in the Median on Colorado 82 in the Latter Part of 1968 and the First Part. of 1969. Section Number Nov. Average Dec. Tracks Seen Per Quarter Mile Jan. Feb. 5 - 9 0.0 0.4 7.6 20.6 5.2 22 - 28 3.6 2.6 0.5 00.0 1.8 Total Traffic Volume Highway 13 had an annual traffic volume of about 223,000 cars with most traffic in the months of June through October (Fig. II). In comparison9 the annual traffic volume on Highway 82 was about 1,0639000 cars. Most traffic on Hf.ghway 82 occurred during the summer vacation months (Fig. 12). Putting it in simple terms, there was a maximum of about 40 vehicles per hour on Highway 13 compared to a maximum of over 160 per hour on Highway 82 (Fig. 13). A possible result of these different numbers of vehicles per hour may be shown by the fact that about one-half as many deer were counted on Highway 82 as on Highway 13; yet9 the kill on Highway 82 exceeded that of Highway 13. Driving and Road Conditions There were no adverse road conditions associated with more than 98% of 1,627 deer-vehicle collisions on State Highways in Colorado during 1965-1967 (Table 6). What about driving conditions? These conditions were generally good when most deer were hit by vehicleso Almost 75% of 1,617 reported deer-auto accidents occurred in clear weather and 22% were in cloudy weather. In other words, less than 4% of the deer-auto accidents were in rain.~ snow, fog, dust, wind, or some other types of weather (Table 7) Since most accidents a re in fair weather, it follows that road surface conditions associated with most deer-vehicle collisions are also good. This is borne out by the fact that about 98% of 1,623 reported deer-vehicle accidents occurred on dry road surfaceso Only about 5% were when roads were wet~ muddy, snowy 9 iCY9 slushy~ or in some other condition (Table 8). 0 �•.. ' • I~ ~ .. HIGHWAY 13 TRAFFIC VOLUME 1968 'r- If •... Itif- l! o (,) n rOS I-' 1""'. '-l N • c '1) i j 21 , f- ~ IeIfr17 f- •f•• r r - M * ~ n _ _ _ H ~ _ ~ _ ~ ~ Fig. 11. Monthly traffic volume on Highway 13 study area during 1968. �140 HIGHWAY 82 TRAFFIC VOLUME 1968 130 120 110 en a: < o u, 0 100 90 en 0 z < en 80 ::::l 0 :I: I- 70 60 j) 50 ,', Jon Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nav Dee MONTH Fig. 12. Monthly traffic volume on Highway 82 study area during 1968. �HIGHWAY 13 a 82 TRAFFIC VOLUME 1968 •. I,~ « HIGHWAY 13 • HIGHWAY 82 0 10 o t-' ....• LL .p- o \ (J) o z « (J) ;j o :I: I- 20 oI ? '" Jan Feb Mar Apt' May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec M 0 NTH Fig. 13. Comparison of monthly traffic volume on Highway 13 and 82 study areas during 1968. �- 175 Table 6 - Road Conditions in Colorado. Associated With Reported Deer-Vehicle Accidents Adverse Road Condition Deer-Vehicle Accidents 1967 1966 1965 Percent Percent No. No. Percent No. Total Percent None 385 98.47 544 98.55 670 97.95 1~599 98.28 Holes, Ruts, Bumps, etc. 1 .26 2 .36 0 00.00 3 .18 Foreign Material Surface 0 00.00 0 00.00 1 .15 1 .06 Construction or Repair 1 ~26 3 .54 3 .44 7 .43 Loose Surface Material 1 .26 0 00.00 4 .58 5 .31 Other 1 .26 0 00.00 1 .15 2 .12 Unknown 2 .51 3 5 .73 10 1.02 Total 391 1,627 100.44 on 100.2 552 .54 . 99.99 684 100.0 �- 176 Table 7- Weather Conditions Associated With 1,617 Reported Deer-Auto Accidents in Colorado. 'Cond'Lt Lon Deer-Vehicle Accidents 1965 1966 No. Percent No. Percent No Clear 283 73.13 455 83.03 Cloudy 86 22022 80 Rain 7 1.81 Snow 9 Sleet Weather 1967 Percent Total Percent 467 68.48 1,205 74.52 14.60 184 26.98 350 21.65 6 1.09 15 2.20 28 1.73 2033 5 .91 12 1.76 26 1.61 0 00.00 1 .18 0 00.00 1 L36 Fog 0 00.00 1 .18 1 .15 2 1.11 Dust 0 00.00 0 00000 0 00.00 0 00.00 Wind 1 .26 0 00.00 3 .44 4 060 Other 1 .26 0 00.00 0 00000 1 .06 Total 387 100.01 548 99099 682 100001 1,617 102.64 o Table 8 - Road Surface Condition Associated With Reported Deer-Vehicle Accidents in Colorado. Road Surface Condition Deer-Vehicle Accidents 1965 1966 1967 No. Percent No. Percent No. Percent Total Percent Dry 362 92.82 531 96.37 640 93084 1,533 94.45 Wet 18 4062 10 L81 27 3.96 55 3.39 Muddy 0 0.00 0 0.00 0 0.00 0 0.00 Snowy 4 1.03 3 .54 7 1.03 14 086 Icy 5 1.28 5 .91 5 .73 15 092 Slushy 0 0000 0 0.00 0 0.00 0 0000 Other 0 0.00 1 .18 2 .29 3 .18 Unknown 1 .26 1 .18 1 .15 3 .18 Total 390 100.01 551 99.99 682 100.00 1,623 99.98 �- 177 Physical Features of the Highway l3 Study Area Over 60% of the land area within 1/4 mile of Highway 13 was classified as gently rolling and rolling terrain. The remainder consisted of more than 20% moderately rough terrain. 11% rough, and about 6% was relatively flat (Table 9)0 Table 9 - Types of Terrain Within Highway 12 Study Area Type of Terrain 1/4 Mile of Either Side of the Colorado __ ~_~er Terrain Index Mile Sections No. of Sections of Highway Percent Flat 1-10 5 62 Gentle Rolling 11-20 23 28 8 Rolling 21-30 26 3205 Medium Rough 31-40 17 21.2 Rough 41-50 9 11.3 0 0 ;: .. ~ Fourteen of rhe 80 quarter mile intervals of highway had houses, occupied at least one month of the yea"r.,adjacent to one side or the other and within 114 mile of Colorado 13, Sections number 5, 7, 9,14, 15, 25.31,37, 39, 53, 57, 58, 78, and 80 have. occupied house s within them. There were 15 quarter mile sections of Colorado 13 which- had good water present within 1/4 mile on both sides of the highway" 11 with good wat.er on one side and fair on the other, 27 with good water on one side and poor on the other, 7 with fair water on one side and poor on the opposite, and 17 sections had poor water present within 1/4 mile on both sides of the quarter mile section of highway. y"egetation Ad t ace.nt!S Highway 13 ApproximatelY~7~OOO acres of ,vegetation located within one quarter mile of both sides of Highway 13 were t.yped, Types were comprised of 43% sagebrush, 22% browse. 10% pinyon-juniper, 8% grassland, 7% cultivated land" and lesser percentages of nine other types (Table 10). �- 178 - T,ahlelo.- Acreage and Percent of Various 1/4 Mile of the Highway 13 Study Area. Vegetative Types Present Within Vegetative Type Acres Percent Sagebrush 3,112 42.71 Browse 1,607 22.05 Pinyon-juniper 722 9.91 Grassland 563 7.73 Cultivated 543 7.45 Hayland 228 3.13 Greasewood 161 2.21 Half-Shrub 112 1.54 Meadow 94 1.29 49 .67 Hay Pasture 46 .63 Barren 36 .49 Culture 13 .18 Orchard 1 001 7,287 100.00 Broadleaf Total Trees Some factors which may cause deer-auto accidents were measured. Information necessary to determine the importance of these factors was also gathered. These data are now being analyzed. LITERATURE CITED Anonymous. 1969. 1968 Resume of Big Game Seasons in Colorado. Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Division (Game Planning Services). Denver. p. 29. Prepared by . ~ Gary T. Myers Assistant Wildlife _ Researcher �July, 1969 - 179 - JOB PROGRESS REPORT State of COLORADO Project No. W~38-R-23 Deer-Elk Investigations Work Plan No. llc Job No. 1 Job Title: White River Elk Population Period Covered: Personnel: April Components 1, 1968 through March 31, 1969 Richard M. Bartmann, George D. Bear, Raymond J. Boyd, Walter T. Burkhard, Marion C. Coghill, Larry M. Finnell, Howard D. Funk, David F. Gordon, Jack R. Grieb, Donald M. Hoffman, Richard M. Hopper, Donald L. Horak, Roland C. Kufeld, Gary T. Myers, Edgar J. Prenzlow, Dale F. Reed, Glenn E. Rogers, William H. Rutherford, Robert L. Schmidt, Warren D. Snyder, Harold M. Swope, Michael R. Szymczak, and Donald T. Weber. ABSTRACT This is the third annual progress report of a five-year investigation to determine the effects of specified permit seasons (limited number of both antlerless and antlered permits available to hunters) on the White River elk herd in northwestern Colorado. Estimated herd size, determined by formulas using per- and post-season sex and age ratios in combination with harvest levels, was decreased from about 6,800 to 6,300 elk from 1966 to 1968 while pre-season sex ratios (bulls per 100 cows) and age ratios (calves per 100 cows) were increased from about 29 to 37 and 58 to 60, respectively. This resulted from issuing more antlerless and fewer antlered permits to hunters. Methods used to determine harvest rates, sex and age ratios, and age structures of this elk herd are compared and evaluated. Data from check stations, hunter report cards and random surveys also are included and compared to data from other elk investigations. ��- 181 - WHITE RIVER ELK HERD-POPULATION COMPONENTS Edgar J. Prenz10w P. S. OBJECTIVE To develop a harvest formula for the White River elk herd. SEGMENT OBJECTIVES 1. Review literature elk herd. 2. Summarize, evaluate and file all previous infqrmation collected on the Whi te River elk herd to be tter acquaint new project personnel on the history of this job. 3. Test a candidate 4. necessary elk harvest for population formula analysis of the White River for Area E elk herd. a. Maintain wintering population female segment of herd. at about 5,000 elk by stabilizing b. Narrow post-season sex ratios to 20 bulls per 100 cows in an attempt to increase productivity (calves per 100 cows) by specified permits. Determine accurate sex and age structures of the harvest, hunter success ratios and amounts of recreation and associated recreation days expended on the White River elk herd. METHODS AND MATERIALS Data collection (aerial and ground sex and age ratio counts, check stations and mail questionnaires to determine harvest, age composition, recreation days, etc.) for this project has not varied appreciably since its instigation in 1966 (Prenz1ow 1967, 1968). Likewise, methods for determining total population estimates have not changed. However, during the last segment, successful and unsuccessful Area E elk hunters were randomly interviewed at check stations to determine hunter attitudes toward present elk management pr'act Lc e s in Colorado, especially those concerned with specified permit seasons such as Area E. Appendix C is a copy of the survey which required about five minutes with each of the 100 participants. DESCRIPTION OF AREA Physiographies of the White River area are included in Harris (1961f, 1963) and Boyd (unpublished). Their manuscripts are concerned with all eight Game Management Units (12, 13, 23, 24, 25, 26, 33 and 34) whereas the present investigation is limited primarily to Area E or Game Management Units 23 and 24 (Fig. 1) Prenzlow (1967, 1968) described the study area. �- 182 - N • STUDY AREA Fig. 1. Elk Management Area E (Game Management Units 23 and 24) showing boundaries, drainage patterns and highway systems. LEGEND GAME MANAGEMENT UNIT BOUNDARY -=-r HIGHWAY SECONDARY lllVER CllEEIC - PEAK :0,,- ROAD ---- ----------c:::: Check Stations. �- 183 RESULTS. AND DISCUSSION Primary efforts for this report were directed at completing the objectives concerned with literature review and compilation of previous information on the White River elk herd. Several hundred references regarding elk~ other big game species and/or population analysis were indexed. Publications of data which are dir~ctly comparable to the type of information collected by this study are not prevalent. In 1969 and 1970, check stations will again be operated; but only to collect data on sex and age of elk by unit" and hunter attitudes. Now, other Lrrformation relating to Area E (time of kill, elk observed, wounded or abandoned, antler points, etc.) can be analyzed in its entirety. Plans are to compare these data with information from the remaining six White River units. Also, sufficient time will be available during Segments 24 and 25 to tabulate and examine data previously collected from the Rio Grande and San Juan elk areas. By 1971, all data collection for this investigation will cease, and analysis and interpretation of all population parameters can be made for purposes of publication. Sex and Age Composition Aerial Surveys Pre-Season Sex and Age Ratios -- The 1968 pre-season sex and age ratio counts were flown in a helicopter on 23-26 September. These classifications were confined to elk observed within Area E (Table 1). A total of 722 elk were classified resulting in a ratio of 36.9'bulls (including spikes) and 60.4 calves per 100 cows. Summaries of past sex and age ratios for the years 1961 through 1968 are shown in Table 2; while Figs. 2 and 3 illustrate 95 percent confidence intervals for these ratios. Table 3 summarizes pre-season sex and age ratios of elk from other areas in Colorado. This is the only information available for comparison because other state conservation agencies do not conduct aerial per-season classi •• fications on elk. As shown, there is little difference between the eightyear mean (36.7:100:61.6) in Area E from Table 2, and the m~Mcof the other seven areas from Table 3 (37.4: 100:62.8). '.~ �Table 1 - Pre-Season Sex and Age Ratio Counts in Area Ez 1968. Location Mature Bulls Young Bulls Spikes Nine-Mile - - - Oak Ridge - 1 Lost Park - Sleepy Cat Area - Sawmill Mt. - Papoose Creek West Marvine Cows Calves Total 7 3 10 13 48 20 82 2 6 16 16 40 1 6 16 14 37 2 - 1 - - 2 1 - 8 9 19 1 - 4 3 8 Main Marvine 2 5 13 30 15 65 East Marvine 2 1 6 38 23 70 Flat Tops Area 1 8 4 42 23 78 South Fork 3 Park Creek 1 Lost Solar Creek - 5 - - 5 60 36 109 1 7 8 17 1 2 1 4 1 19 9 30 Bloomfield Bench 1 Big Ridge 4 9 18 56 32 119 Big Fish Creek 2 3 5 13 9 32 Total 17 37 81 366 221 722 Percent 2.4 5.1 11.2 50.7 30.6 100,,. ... 00 -I>- �Table 2 - Summaries of Pre-Season Sex and Age Ratios From Area Ez 1961-1968. Ratio No. % Calves No. % 19.6 309 47.3 216 33.1 653 41.4 : 100 : 69.9 216 22.1 462 47.4 298 30.5 .976 46.8 : 100 : 64.5 1963 125 20.0 298 47.5 204 32.5 627 41.9 : 100 : 68.5 1964 120 17.5 363 52.9 203 29.6 686 33.1 : 100 : 55.9 1965 233 17.3 699 51.8 416 30.9 1,348 33.3 : 100 : 59.5 1966 86 15.4 299 53.7 172 30.9 557 28.8 : 100 : 57.5 1967 134 16.8 415 52.2 247 31.0 796 32.3 : 100 : 59.5 1968 135 18.7 366 50.7 221 30.6 722 36.9 : 100 : 60.4 Ave. 147 18.5 401 50.4 247 31.1 795 36.7 Year Bulls No. % 1961 128 1962 Cows Total Bulls : Cows . : Calves· 100 61.6 I-" 00 V1 �- 186 - 60 ..• 50 ~ 0 lot 0 0 s: 40 30 ;:) CO 20 z 0 1961 6!1 63 6" 65 66 67. .68 69 7<) Years Fig. 2. Confidence intervals on pre-season sex ratios, Area E, 1961-1968. l/ Years Fig. 3. Confidenc~ intervals on pre-season age ratios (calves:l00 cows), Area E, 1961-1968.1/ 50 ... 40 ~ 0 u 30 0 0 -:::.. 20 .!!!. I ;:) CO 10 0 1961 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 Years Fig. 4. Confidence intervals on post-season sex ratios, Area E, 1961-1968.1J 1/ Confidence intervals were calculated at~= .05 using a formula from Riney (1956)as follows: 100 calve"s/lOO cows + (100 V (calves + cows) calves/cows3) �- 187 - Table 3 - Mean Pre-Season Sex and Age Ratios From Seven Other.Elk Ar.eas In Colorado Area No. of Years Counted Mean Ratio Bulls : Cows : Calves Citations White River ]j 12 45.4 100 65.5 (Boyd 1962a; 1963; 1964b) (Harris 1959~~1960a; 1961b,c,e) (Owens 1958; 1959a,b) Rio Grande 8 34.5 100 59.5 (Becker 1969) (Boyd 1965; 1966a,c; 1967a) (Ryland 1967a) San Juan 3 28.9 100 63.6 (Becker 1969) (Ryland 1967b; 1968e) Trinchera 2 42.4 100 61.0 (Ryland 1967c; 1968f) Williams Fork 2 18.5 100 66.5 (White 1968) Gunnison 1 41.7 100 69.4 (Becker 1969) South White River 1) 1 14.9 100 44.8 (White 1968) Total and Mean 29 37.4 100 62.8 1/ Sex and age classifications of elk in Units other than 23 or 24 (Area E) Area E, other White River units, and units in the southwest region of Colorado were tested separately and in combination to determine correlation between the number of bulls (Y) and the number of calves (X) produced per 100 cows (Figs. 5, 6, 7 and 8). Area E (r=.58, d.f.) and other White River units (r=.45, 10 d.f.) and no significant correlation, but units in southwestern Colorado (r=.-8l), 8 d.f.) showed a significant negative correlation. Additional point estimates, available after 1969 and 1970, will help to determine the degree of relationship between these variables. Boyd (unpublished) making similar tests, but using 1961-1965 pre-season sex and age ratio data from Area E, did not find a significant correlation (r=.7l, 3 d.f.) between the variable (X) and (Y). �80 80 •.~ 70 '"~ 70 a u 60 0 0 50 -..•.... 40 60 -- 50 L 40 cc 20 ,. .. --.• 30 " 20 a 0 0 .. 30t ::> cc u ::> 10 10 0 40 50 60 Caives/IOO 70 80 0 90 40 50 Caws 60 Caives/IOO Fig. 5. Relationship between bulls and calves per 100 cows, Area E (1961-1968). 70 80' 90 Cows Fig. 6. Relationship between bulls and calves per' 100 cows, White River Game Management Units other than thos~ in Area E (1958-1968). t-' 00 00 80 80 '" 70 ~ a u 60 - 50 «I 20 0 0 '" ~ . •. 1 ..•.. 40 --'"::> 30r 70 a u 60 0 50 .. . ~ .ot .. . ... == '. . .. .. O'~----~------~----~------~-__~ ~ I . .. ::> cc 10 3(; 20 10 40 50 60 Caives/IOO 70 80 90 Caws Fig. 7. Relationship between bulls and calves per 100 cows, Game Management Units in southwestern Colorado (1961-1968). 40 50 60 Caives/IOO 70 80 90 Cows Fig. 8. Relationship between bulls and calves per 100 cows, all areas combined (1958-1968). �- 189 Post-Season Sex and Age Ratios -- Post season sex and age ratio counts were made in Area E on 8-10 December. A total of 1,798 elk were classified resulting in a ratio of 15.6 bulls (including spikes) and 73.5 calves per 100 cows (Tab1(;i 4). Sunnnaries of prior post-se<;l.son sex and age ratios for the years 1961 through 1968 are shown in Table 5. Confidence intervals on postseason sex ratios appear in Fig. 4. Table 4 - Post-Season Sex <;I.ncl Age Ratio Counts in Area Et 1968. Mature Bulls Young Bulls Spikes Cows Calves Total Nine Mile, Yellow Jacket & Uranium Peak 1 3 14 84 47 149 Sawmill, Ellison Mt., Big Beaver 5 9 36 189 149 388 So. Fork, Buford Mountain 1 2 31 350 252 636 Oak Ridge 3 7 26 143 ll2 291 Big Beaver to Snell Cr. o 1 5 141 106 253 Marvine Creeks 4 o o 44 33 81 Totals 14 ll2 951 699 1,798 Percent .8 6.2 52.9 38.9 100.0 Location 1.2 On the national Elk Refuge in Wyoming from 1927 to 1964, cows made up 63.0 percent of 132,664 elk classified (Cole 1964). Blouch and Moran (1965) reported that about 40 percent of the Michigan herd were adult cows. Both percentages were obtained from ground observations in mid-winter or early spring. An average (1961-1968) 55.3 percent of the winter Area E population were cows. Table 6 sunnnarizes post-season sex and age ratios of elk from other areas in Colorado. In these areas a mean of 17.7 bulls per 100 cows remain after a hunting season for all areas and years compared to 14.1 in Area E (T ble 5). Turner (1967, 1968) in New Mexico and Hancock (1955) in Utah reported that aerial classifications of elk in winter resulted in bull:cow ratios of 18.5 and 31.3 per 100 cows, respectively. �Table 5 - Summaries of Post-Season Sex and age ratios from Area E. 1961-1968. Year 1961 1962 1963 1964 1965 1966 Bulls No. % No. % Calves No. % Total Bulls : Ratio Cows : Calves 106 10.6 465 46.5 430 43.0 1,001 22.8 : 100 : 92.5 13.8 446 49.2 335 37.0 906 28.0 : 100 : 75.1 45 6.1 413 55.7 283 38.2 741 10.9 : 100 : 68.5 117 6.0 1,130 58.3 692 35.7 1,939 10.4 : 100 : 61:.2 85 5.2 930 57.1 613 37.7 1,628 9.1 : 100 : 65.9 128 6.1 1,24.5 58.9 739 35.0 2,112 10.3 : 100 : 59.4 214 9.2 1,318 56.4 806 34.5 2,338 16.2 : 100 : 61.2 148 8.2 951 52.9 699 38.9 1,798 15.6 : 100 : 73.5 121 7.8 862 55.3 575 36.9 1,558 14.0 : 100 : 66.7 125 Cows I-' 196'7 1968 Ave. \0 0 �- 191- ,Tah1.e.6.-Mean Po.s.t+Se.ason Sex ang Age Ratios From Other Elk Areas in Colorado No. of Years Counted Bulls White River !/ 8 18.8 100 85.6 (Boyd 1962b; 1964a,c) (Harris 1960h; 1961a, d) (OWens 1959c, d) Rio Grande 7 15.4 100 60.7 (Boyd 1965; 1966b,c; 1967a) (Ryland 1968c; 1969d) San Juan-Piedra 4 21.6 100 66.3 (Becker 1969) (Ryland 1968a; 1969a) Navajo-Blanco 3 21.6 100 67.6 (Becker 1969) (Ryland 1968b; 1969b) Hermosa-Junction Creek 3 18.0 100 70.1 (Becker 1969) Ryland 1968d; 1969c) Williams Fork 3 4.9 100 43.2 '(Boyp'196715) (White'1969) Del Norte Peak 1 35.0 100 60.0 (Ryland 1969f) Gunnison 1 20.8 100 48.8 (Becker 1969) Routt 1 20.7 100 50.0 (White 1969) South White River 1/ 1 9.7 100 54.0 (White 1969) Trinchera 1 22.0 : 100 58.9 (Ryland 196ge) Total and Mean 33 17.0 : ,100 68.3 Area !/ Mean Ratio Cows Calves Citations Sex and age classifications of elk in units other than 23 or 24 (Area E) Norberg (1~55), censusing elk in Idaho by helicopter, f~lt "within reasonable limits" a total elk count could be accomplished, depending upon the ability of the observer and thoroughness with which the area was covered. In 112.7 hours of flying time, Norbert et al. (1956) counted 5,329 elk on 400.1 square miles of winter range, for a density of 13.32 elk per square mile. Evaluation of Aerial Classification Counts -- There is a possibility aerial counts during September affect reproductive potential. Guse et ale (1965) reported that the peak of conception in 1962 for elk ~n the~Rocky Mountain �- 192 - National Park area was about 26 September and ranged from 2 September to 6 November. Pre-season counts take place usually' the last week of September, but apparently this has caused little disturbance since Area E cow-calf ratios have been h~~J:orically high compared with herds in other western states. Similarly, Altmann (1956) stated that fall hunting disturbance may possibly deter elk reproduction. However~ Morrison et ale (1959) and Morrison (1960) suggested that the chanc.e of disturbance was not great; because (1) danger and alarm are constant hazzards to free-ranging elk; (2) elk are believed to commence heat periods during night and estrous may last upwards of 17 hours; and (3) recurrent estrous periods are likely. During the 1968 post-season sex and age ratio count in Area E, Dr. David Bowden~ Assistant Professor of Mathematics, Colorado State University, rode in the helicopter to observe the classification technique and evaluate the sampli.ng procedure. Five possible sources of error were identified which may affect the results of classification counts and in turn the resulting total population estimates. These are discussed below. Immigration and Emigration - - Mobility of the Area E elk herd may cause a sizable bias in the pre-season population estimate. Between pre- and postseason classification counts (approximately two months), two migrations occur. There is one movement onto wintering grounds and another when elk move because of hunter pressure during the October season. This was documented in Idaho by Robel (1960) who found that elk concentrate to different elevations because of hunting pressure, and not by chance alone. What is most important, however, is the net gain or loss of animals to Area E. Since an exact total population figure is not possible because of herd dynamics, only estimates and/or projections are made concerning population size (see section on Population Estimates and Projections). It has been encouraging that projections for the proportions of bulls, cows and calves have been off by less than .25 percent of what is actually counted from a helicopter at a later date. This indicates that when animals do move into or out of Area E, they do so in the same proportion as they occur in the herd. To determine quantitatively the actual number of animals gained or lost, or the influence this has on population size, is impossible, using current procedures. This influence may be negligible for the following reasons: (1) classification counts are conducted at about the same time and in the same general locations each year which tends to keep the movement variable constant, and (2) elk, like many big game species, probably return to the same wintering and summering grounds each year as documented by neck-band sightings, kill locations, and re-capture records. Mortality -- Natural mortality of elk in Area E occurs between cLas si.fLcat Lon counts. Annual herd loss (see section on Natural Mortality) has averaged 14.5 percent for 1967 and 1968. If it is assumed that natural mortality occurs at a constant rate throughout the year, which it does not because the heaviest losses occur in spring (post-natal) and winter, then at most only 2.4 percent (14.5/6) of the pre-season population is lost through natural causes during the interval between classification counts. Observer Error -- Misclassification of animals by bull, cow and calf is possible. But since the total population estimate depends on the percent of �- 193 antlered elk compared to the antlerless elk, misclassification errors have little effect because most errors occur in distinguishing within the antlerless category (e g , separating cows from calves, especially during the po suseason counts). s Random Sampling of Groups of Elk -- Elk may not be grouped at random. If some elk (e.g. bulls) are not classified in the correct proportion as they occur in the herd, this would bias counts. This could happen because of location of animals with respect to counter, or small groups are perhaps not as easily seen. However, this does not appear to be a problem because the proportion of bulls, cows and calves can be closely predicted for both the pre- and postseason counts. Duplicate Counts .- It is possible to classify one elk or one group of elk more than once when making a count. To alleviate this problem, the observer cancels all groups of elk where duplication may exist. If there is some overlap, the bias caused will be minimal because those elk which might be counted more than once will be a small percentage or the total. This is the reason attempts are made to classify at least 1,000 elk during both the preand post-season classifications. Ground Surveys In 1967 and 1968 elk were classified by ground surveys during July. This was done to estimate yearling-adult cow ratios which can not be obtained during aerial classifications and also served as independent estimates of sex and age structures. It is important to determine the proportion of yearling females in the herd and their influence on overall herd productivity. Usually only a small proportion of yearling females breed, but there is considerable conflicting literature on this subject. This is discussed later. Observers on horseback, riding during the early morning and evaning hours, classified elk in different sections of the Flat Tops Wilderness Area. In four dayss two teams of two or three men classified a total of 1,368 elk in July, 1968 (Table 7). Table 7 - Composition of 1,368 Elk Classified In Area E 1968. During Summer Ground Counts Mature Bulls Yearling Bulls Mature Cows Yearling Cows Calves Total Observed 87 79 607 211 384 1,368 Percent Observed 6.3 5.8 44.4 15.4 28.1 100.0 24 27 58 48 42 62 1.4 1.3 9.8 3.4 6.2 22.1 Number Frequency in Group6 ]j Mean Group Composition '!:../ 1/ Frequency (e.g. mature in groups bulls were observed in 24 of 62 total groups). ~/ Mean group size determined by percent of elk observed times 22.1. �- 194 - Sex and age ratios of the 1,368 elk were 20.3 bulls and 46.9 calves per 100 cows. This does not compare favorably with the ratios 36.9:100:60.4 observed during the September aerial survey. A reason for this discrepancy was that the ground survey was made too early in July. As a result, some yearling males were classified as yearling females because the small antlers were not easily seen and calves apparently were not accompanying the females at all times. Of 818 cows observed, 211 or 25.8 percent were classified as yearlings. Ages determined at check stations in 1968 indicated that 22.8 percent of the females were yearlings. This ratio was similar and more accurate because hunters harvest females in about the same proportion as they occur in the herd (see section on Hunter Selectivity on Elk). In 1967, a small sample of 272 elk was classified in July. Of 144 cows, 31 or 21.5 percent were classified as yearlings. Check station figures showed that 20.5 percent of the females were yearlings. Also, the resulting sex and age ratio (34.0:100:54.9) compared more closely with the aerial ratio (32.3:100:59.5). Smith and Williams (1958) and Smith (1959) observed yearling-adult female ratios of 18.3 and 35.8 during the two summer investigations in Area E with samples of 71 and 148, respectively. A sex and age ratio of 29.6:100:80.3 also was determined for 149 elk observed during the summer of 1958. Hunter Observations -- Area E hunters in 1968 saw a mean of 14.4 elk (Table 8). When comparable data were collected in 1966, 924 hunters saw a mean 17.8 elk (15.7 cows and calves, 1.3 spike bulls and .8 mature bulls). All hunters, both successful and unsuccessful, observed 15.4 bulls compared with the preseason aerial ratio of 23.0 bulls per 100 cows and calves. In 1966, hunters saw 13.2 bulls. The pre-season ratio was 18.3 bulls:lOO cows and calves. As would be expected, successful hunters see more elk than unsuccessful hunters. Turner (1967, 1968) in New Mexico stated that on a statewide basis licensees observed 7.0, 10.3 and 8.7 elk per hunter for the years 1965, 1966 and 1967, respectively. Grieb (1967) reported harvest data on 1966 pre- and postseasons from elk management areas adjoining Rocky Mountain National Park and determined that 273 hunters saw 657 elk (2.4 elk per huneer). Elk were observed in a ratio of 66.0:100:28.4. This ratio compares well with the mean sex and age ratio of 62.3:100:46.1 that Gill (1966, 1967) found on pre-season classifications by helicopter within Rocky Mountain National Park during 1965 and 1966. Check Station Surveys Number of Elk Checked -- Four White River elk check stations (Meeker, New Castle, Deep Creek, Ripple Creek) were operated for the first nine days during the 1968 big game season. Research personnel at the permanent check station at Rifle also checked elk from White River units. A total of 1,633 elk and 354 unsuccessful hunters were surveyed from Game Management Units 12, 13, 23, 24, 25, 26, 33 and 34. Information in this section applies principally to the study area, Units 23 and 24 or Area E, unless otherwise stated. Comparable data from the remainder of the units were collected because it was an important source of information relative to Area E elk. Table 9 lists the average number of elk checked at each station from 1964 through 1968. Appendices A and Bare examples of questionnaires used to obtain data presented in this section. �- 195 Table 10 lists checkout by date of 1,155 elk from Area E. More than 80 percent were checked through stations on the third through the seventh day of _ the season. Table 8 - Mean Number of Elk Observed by Area E Hunt.e r s., 1968. Cows and Mature Numb~r of Type of Calves Bulls Spikes Hunters Unit Hunter Total Successful 23 212 1.08 .61 11.44 13.13 24 827 1.34 .89 14.07 16.30 23 24 42 119 .31 .40 .50 .20 1.83 6.69 2.64 7.29 23 254 .95 .59 9.85 11.39 24 946 1.22 .80 13.15 15.17 Area E 1,200 1.16 .76 12.45 14.37 Unsuccessful All Hunters Table 9 - Number of Elk Checked Through Stations From White River Elk Herd, (Game Management Units 122 13, 23, 24, 25, 26, 33 and 34) 1964-1968). Average Station 1964 1965 1966 1967 1968 Meeker 553 506 591 518 725 579 Deep Creek 338 227 220 303 308 279 New Castle 321 196 166 . 227 290 240 Rifle 137 138 124 92 83 115 Idaho Springs 32 137 159 112 120 129 Ripple Creek 227 1,381 1,204 1,384 259 4 4 Hamilton Total 110 1,381 1,63~ 1,397 �- 196 Table 10 - Elk Check Out b:y Date From Area E~ 1968. Unit & Sex Date ~October 1968) 1/ 22 23 24 19 20 21 Males 2 9 6 28 25 Females 3 6 14 28 Sub-Total 5 15 20 Males 3 27 Females 1 Sub-Total 25 ·26 27 9 16 8 3 36 12 17 8 5 56 61 21 33 16 8 81 98 102 61 42 23 16 28 93 69 100 72 57 25 22 4 55 174 167 202 133 99 48 38 Males 5 36 87 126 127 70 58 31 19 Females 4 34 107 97 136 84 74 33 27 Sub-Total 9 70 194 223 263 154 132 64 46 6.1 16.8 19.3 22.8 13.3 11.4 5.5 4.0 Unit 23 Unit 24 Area E Percent of Total 0.8 1/ Checks made during first 9 days of a 20 day hunting season. Sex and Age Composition of Elk Checked -- Percent composition (bulls, cows and calves) of elk checked is presented in Table 11. Sex and age ratios of the 1,155 were 95.6:100:26.1. This compares with 126.8:100:21.2 in 1966 and 108.1:100:32.1 in 1967. During all three years a constant number of antlered permits (2,500) were issued but ant1er1ess permits were changed from 1,000 in 1966 to L,500 in both 1967 and 1968. This partially accounts for the change in ratios. Table II - Composition of Elk Checked by Game Management Unit Through Five Stations 1968. Bulls % Cows % Calves % Total Unit 23 92 39.1 ll7 49.8 26 11.1 235 Unit 24 406 44.1 404 43.9 110 12.0 920 Total 498 43.1 521 45.1 136 11.8 1,155 �- 197 Table 12 lists sex and age composition of harvest data gathered at check stations from other investigations. The mean bull ratio in Area Eof 110.2 compares closely to the mean of 106.0 from other investigations. Calf ratios per 100 cows are lower in Area E (26.5 compared to 33.2:100 cows) than elsewhere. Possibly, Area E hunters checked calves at a greater rate or they had a better opportunity to harvest a cow rather than a calf. The second possibility is more likely. Table 12 - Sex and Age Ratios (bulls:100 cows:calves) Determined From Check Station Data From Other Elk Investigations. Sample Size Ratio Eer 100 Cows Bulls Calves Citation 2,766 103.0 32.0 Nielson (1967) 300 111.4 32.5 Cole (1964) 269 81.7 31.7 Blouch and Moran (1965) 164.0 1.1 32.0 Greer (1965) 102.0 30.0 Janson (1967) 74.0 1:./ 41.0 Yorgason (1963a) 106.0 33.2 Mean Ratio !/ Mean of 1963 and 1965 data. 1:./ Mean from 1955-1962 from Grand Teton National Park hunts. Age Structure of Harvest -- Of 1,155 elk checked, 812 were aged from Area E with the technique described by Quimby and Gaab (1957). Table 13 lists these ages by sex while Table 14 shows similar info~mation by game management unit. Teeth from 648 of the 812 elk aged were collected and taken to the Wildlife Laboratory at the Fort Collins Game Research Center. Here the teeth were again aged but using the cementum technique reported by Keiss (1969). Assuming ages as determined by the cementum method to be correct, a comparison revealed an error of 8.4 percent on yearlings and 66.8 percent on twoyear old and older elk (Tables 15 and 16). ��Table 14 - Sex and Age Determined at Check Stations of 812 Elk b~ Unit of Ki11z Area Ez 1968. Age ~YearsL 1: 5~ 4~ 3~ Total 9+ 8~ 7~ 6~ 1~ 2~ 14 66 18 4 2 2 0 0 0 0 106 % of Total 13.2 62.2 17.0 3.8 1.9 1.9 .0 .0 .0 .0 100.0 % of all Males 3.1 14.5 3.9 .9 .4 .4 .0 .0 .0 .0 23.2 47 212 63 12 8 3 2 3 0 0 350 13.4 60.6 18.0 3.4 2.3 .9 .5 .9 .0 .0 100.0 Unit and Sex 2 23 - Males Number 24 - Males Number % of Total •..... 10.3 46.5 13.8 2.6 1.8 .7 .4 .7 .0 .0 76.8 12 19 19 7 16 3 6 3 0 2 87 % of Total 13.8 21.8 21.8 8.0 18.4 3.5 6.9 3.5 .0 2.3 100.0 % of all Females 3.4 5.3 5.3 2.0 4.5 .8 1.7 .8 .0 .6 24.4 63 45 41 41 29 15 9 7 8 11 269 23.5 16.7 15.2 15.2 10.8 5.6 3.3 2.6 3.0 4.1 100.0 % of all Females 17.7 12.6 11.5 11.5 8.2 4.2 2.5 2.0 2.3 3.1 75.6 % of all Males 23 - Females Number 24 - Females Number % of Total \0 \0 �- 200 Table 15 - Percent Error in Aging 263 Yearling All White River Units 1968. Dental Cementun Elk at Check Stations, Field Aged ];.1 Percent Correct Percent Error 124 112 90.3 9.7 30 27 90.0 10.0 New Castle 61 58 95.1 4.9 Deep Creek 35 31 88.6 11.4 Rifle 13 13 10000 0.0 Total 263 241 91.6 8.4 -S-tat-ion Meeker Ripple Creek 1./ II Number of teeth checked in laboratory using cementum technique. II Number of correct ages determined and wear Table 16 at check station using tooth replacement technique. - Percent Error in Aging 375 Elk Older Than Yearlings at Check Stations, All White River Units, Dental Cementun )j 1968. Field Aged ];.ti Percent Correct Percent Error 174 56 32.2 67.8 59 30 50.8 49.2 New Castle 76 23 . 30.3 6.9.7 Deep Creek 56 15 2608 73.2 Rifle 20 4 20.0 80.0 Total 385 128 33.2 66.8 Station Meeker Ripple Creek II Number of teeth checked in laboratory using cementum technique. at check station using tooth replacement I.I Number of correct ages determined and wear technique. �- 201 Tables 17 and 18 give percent and distribution of error by age class. Overall error was 43.1 percent of the 648 teeth checked. This compares to 60.4 percent in 1967 when ages on 303 teeth were compared.' Of 476 check station assigned ages from Area E elk, 362 (76.1%) were accurate within one year eith~r side of the' cementum age. ,-,'- - Percent Error Between Dental Cementum and Tooth Replacement And Table 17 Wear Aging Techni9,ues by Age Class of 648 Elkz ,All White River Unitsz 1968. Field Aged 1/ Percent Correct Percent Error 263 241 91.6 8.4 2 104 68 65~4 34.6 3 129 36 27.9 72.1 4 48 11 22.9 77 .1 5 34 5 14.7 85.3 6 19 2 10.5 89.5 7 13 2 15.4 84.6 8 4 0 O~O 100.0 9+ 34 4 11.8 88.2 Age 'Class Dental Cementun 1 1./ II Number of teet.Q.checked in laboratory ~I Number of correct ages determined using cementum technique. at check station using tooth replacement and wear technique. To check accuracy of the cementum technique, 70 teeth were drawn at random from the 648 and returned to the laboratory and aged again by the cementum technique. Identical ages were assigned to 47 (67.1%); 15 (21.4%) w~re aged within one 'year of the first cementutnage class assigned; 5 (7.2t) could not be aged again for various reasons; and 3 (4.3%) were aged Lncor rect ly at least 3 years from original cementum age class. In recent years several authors - Cole (1964), Guse et al. (1965), Janson (1967) and Nielson (1967) have cited age structure data on elk. But in moit cases their data are grouped into age categories (e~g. calves, yearlings, prime, old); probably to ,alleviate errors which result when ages are assigned in one year intervals. Blouch and Moran (1965) in Michigan and Greer (1965j 1967, 1968) in Montana~do separate ages by year class. Area E data are compared to data from their investigations in Table 19. The proportion of elk �- 202 - in the older year classes (five through nine) is similar for both Area E (17.9%) and Michigan (20.3%) herds. This is a result of greater population "turn-over" because of the higher harvest rates sustained on these-herds. In the northern Yellowstone herd a greater proportion (x = 45.4) of elk occur in the 5-9 year classes. This herd does not receive great hunter pressures because of location. Table 18 - Distribution of Assigned Ages in Relation to Ages Determined By Dental Cementumz Area Ez 1968. Cementun Age Class 1 2 3 1 151 5 3 2 9 51 3 5 4 Check Station Assigned Ages 4 5 6 7 8 Unkn Total 2 5 166 4 2 5 71 34 30 17 5 4 2 7 107 4 5 13 10 1 ':4 1 2 40 5 3 3 5 7 5 d 3 28 6 2 1 8 3 2 1 1 18 7 1 1 3 1 2 2 1 1 12 8 1 1 0 1 4 9+ 1 Totals 177 98 2 9 1 1 2 1 2 2 3 57 51 17 15 9 9 7 10 20 25 476 �- 203 - Table 19 - Comparison of Female Elk Age Structures in Percent Between 1968 Are.aE Data and Data From Blouch and Moran (1965) in Michigan and Greer (1965, 1967, 1968) in Montana. Sample Size Age Classes 1/ 5 6 7 8 9+ Total 12.6 5.1 4.2 2.8 2.2 3.6 100.0 19.0 13.7 7.2 5.2 1.3 2.0 4.6 100.0 10.9 6.8 11.6 10.2 5.4 3.4 8.S 6.8 100.0 7.5 13.8 16.1 9.2 10.3 6.3 9.2 9.8 13.8 100.0 13.9 11.6 8.8 9.1 6.9 6.6 9.6 7.0 22.2 100.0 C 1 2 3 '4 '];/ 356 21.1 18.0 16.9 13.5 Michigan'];.!153 17.6 13.7 15.7 Montana];./ 147 28.6 7.5 Montana 1/ 174 4.0 Montana 1/ 742 4.3 Herd Area E 1/ Ages determined by tooth replacement and wear techniques. 2/ Ages from harvest data at check stations. 1/ Direct reduction or specimen collections. Numerous methods are available to analyze age structure data. Some of which have been reviewed include Allee el ale (1963), Andersen (1953), Davis (1960), Deevy (1947), Gill (1953), Quick (1960) and Robinette et ale (1957). On Area E data, it is recognized that considerable errors occur because of aging techniques employed earlier. Hopefully, some correlation may be found between the tooth replacement and wear and the cementum techniques being tested. Then, the method which lends itself best to accurately estimating the age composition of Area E elk populations will be utilized. Productivity Data from Harvest -- Of 186 females inspected at check stations from Area E in 1968, 119 (64.0%) were lactating at time of death (Table 20). This compared with 53.8 and 68.2 percent in 1966 and 1967, respectively. Lactation data have been related to age classes determined at check station for three years. Regardless, each season a small percentage of yearling females were noted as lactating (1966-5.3%, N~O; 1967-25.0%, N~; 1968-18.2%, N=33) which indicated these elk were fertile and conceived as calves. This was thought unlikely, and it still is. But recently, Silver (1965) and Follman and Klimstra (1969) reported on fertility rates of male white-tailed deer fawns; while Coffin and Remington (1953) and Saunders (1955) both commented on yearling cow elk which were pregnant. Apparently, female elk can and do breed as calves. Cole (1964) working on the Jackson Hole elk herd, stated that hunters reported 38.9 percent of 270 and 40.9 percent of 252 cows harvested as lactating. Data comparable to Area E were reported by Blouch and Moran (1965) where 69.5 percent of 105 check station aged females were lactating. �- 204 - Table 20 - Dental Cementum Age and Location Occurrence in 186 Female Elk, Area E 1968. Age No. Lactating Percent Non-Lactating No. Percent Total 1 6 18.2 27 81.8 33 2 11 45.8 13 54.2 24 3. 40 75.5 13 24.5 53 4 20 90.9 2 9.1 22 5 11 78.6 3 21.4 14 6 10 90.0 1 9.1 11 7 9 75.0 3 25.0 12 8 1 100.0 a 0.0 1 9+ 11 68.8 5 31.2 16 To.tals 119 64.0 67 36.0 186 Many inve~tigators have examined elk uteri as a method of determining ferti~ lity rates. Greer (1966) found 89 percent of 1,400 females (two years and older) pregnant, and Kittams (1953) also working with large sample sizes, found rates of 86 and 92 percent over a two year period. Murie (1951) reported 98 percent of 334 females pregnant. It is well documented that yearling females become gravis - Blouch and Moran (1965), Boyd (unpublished), Beuchner and Swanson (1955), Coffin and Remington (1953), Guse et ale (1965), Hancock (1955), Morrison (1960) and Murie (1951). However, Harper et ale (1967) reported Roosevelt elk (females) were in their third year before taking part in rutting activities. Greer (1966) reported that from 1963 to 1966 in the northern Yellowstone herd, 104 yearling females had a pregnancy rate of 12 percent after initial herd reductions. Prior to that time when elk were apparently over-populated, yearling pregnancy rates were less than 10 percent. Greer (1967) felt that fecundity in yearlings was variable but that it was a sensitive indicator of an elk herd's reproductive dynamics. Hunter (1967) also suggested that measurement of the yearling harvest was a good·i~.l\l~nagement tool. Calf Sex Ratios -- The male-female calf ratio from Area E check station data in 1968 was 81.3:100. In 1966 it was 158.1:100 and in 1967, 109.1:100. The mean for three years was 116.2:100. Table 21 lists male-female calf ratios from other investigations. �- 205 - Table 21 - Males per 100 Female Calves From Various Other Elk Investigations. Citation Sample Size Males: 100 Females Harvest Data 489 87.6 Norberg Reductions 385 125.1 Guse et a1. (1965) Harvest 375 101.6 Nielson (1967) 150 105.5 Yorgason (1963b) Data 149 122.4 Turner Fetal Exam. 143 69.2 Anderson Reductions 141 143.1 Greer (1968) Harvest Data 83 88.6 Greer (1965) Fetal Exam. 65 97.0 Blouch and Moran Fetal Exam 21 133.3 Denny 1,998 107.3 Source Data Trapping Harvest Total and Mean (1955) (1968) (1967) (1965) (1964) The ratios at which these calves enter and survive in the population are important. For this investigation, population predictions are based on calves surviving at a 100:100 ratio. Mortality Harvest Estimates Estimates Report Card Survey -- The 1968 elk harvest in Area E was estimated at 2,082 from report cards (pre-addressed, postage-paid cards attached to ea~h elk license which are required by regulation to be returned within 15 days after the season). The kill was composed of 900 (43.2%) antlered and 1,182 (56.8%) ant1er1ess elk (Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Division 1969). Table 22 gives percentages of harvest by unit and type of animal. Numbers of hunters and success ratios of resident and non-resident hunters are shown in Table 23. Additional comparisons between these and figures compiled by this investigation will be made later in this report. �- 206 - Tahle 22 - Composition of the 1968 Estimated Elk Harvest Management Unit. Data Are from Report Card Survey~ Antlered Ant1er1ess No. % in Area E by Game Total Unit No. % 23 417 20.0 504 24.2 921 44.2 24 483 23.2 678 32.6 1,161 58.8 Total 900 43.2 1,182 56.8 2,082 100.0 No. % Table 23 - Number of Resident and Non-Resident Hunters, Estimated Elk Kill and Success Ratio in 1968, Area E. Data Are From Report Card Survey. Number of Hunters Success Ratio Resident 2,695 54.2 630 830 1,460 Non-Resident 1,405 44.3 270 352 622 Total 4,100 50.8 900 1,182 2,082 Class 1/ !! This is an error in recording allowed Animals Harvested Antlered Ant1er1ess or projection. Total Only 4,000 permits were for Area E. Random Survey -- Accurate harvest data, in combination with sex and age ratios, are prerequisite to make valid population estimates (Dasmann 1952). To better estimate the elk kill in Area E, 1,971 of 3,906 actual permittees (50.5% sample) were contacted by letter and requested to give information regarding their hunt. Appendix D is a replica of the stamped, pre-addressed postcard sent to each hunter in the sample. Of 1,971 sampled, 1,739 (88.25) returned usable cards. The estimated total harvest was 1,755 (C.I=125, = 1.96) elk with 44.9 percent of the hunters being successful. Table 24 gives results of the survey, including harvest by type of hunter, while Table 25 lists active (those who actually hunted elk) number of hunters and success ratios. Random sampling resulted in a more accurate projection than the report card survey because more than 40 percent of each type of hunter responded to the survey (Table 24). Table 26 compares kill estimates and proportions of the report card and random surveys by residency and type of permit. The report card method over-estimated resident antlered and ant1erless kill, while it estimated the non-resident antlered kill identical to the random survey. �- 207 However, antlerless kill by non-residents was greatly over-estimated. There were only 300 permits of this type issued, yet the pr,ojection indicated that 352 elk were harvested. Small sample sizes, and the fact that successful hunters return report cards at a greater rate, caused the biased estimate. Table 24 - Results of 1968 Random Survey of 312906 Area E Permittees. Antlered Resident Non-Resident Antlerless Resident Non-Resident Total 1,762 692 1,152 300 3,906 Permits in Sample 883 346 593 149 1,971 Percent in Sample 50.1 50.0 51.5 49.7 50.5 Sample Returned 764 290 546 139 1,739 Percent Returned 86.5 83.8 92.1 93.3 88.2 Percent of Total Permits 43.4 41.9 47.4 46.3 44.5 Reported "No Hunts" 41 9 20 2 72 Estimated "No Hunts" 94 21 42 4 161 Reported "Kills" 230 113 351 99 793 Estimated Total Harvest 530 270 741 214 1,755 Permits Issued Table 25 - Number of Hunters Participating During 1968 Area E Elk Season And Success Ratios Per License and Active Hunter. Data Projected From random Surve Antlerless Antlered Non-Resident Resident Non-Resident Total Resident . Active Hunters 1,668 671 1,110 296 3,745 Success (Kill)/Lic. 30.1 39.0 64.3 71.3 44.9 Success (Kill)/Hunter 31.8 40.2 66.8 72.3 46.9 �.•208 T'ab1e 26 - Total Resident and Nori-Re s Lden t Projected Elk Kill by Type of Animal Based on Repqrt Cards and RandomSurveYt Area E", 1968. ,~ Surve!Y :{.',;;~i~ }\~,id~ryt ",~ '.Anclier,l-ess Ant:le-~~ " .. ',"" i' "n03:',t~IMe,nt An't:let~d.,,·~'t$e~less No~ Total Percent Report Card 630 (35.8.!/ 830 (72.0) 210 (39.0) 352 (117.3) 2~082 (53.3) Random 530 (30.~) 270 (39.0) 214 (71.3) 1,755 (44.9) 741 (64.3) 11 Figures in parenthesis indicate success ratios of active hunters. Because of inaccurate kill estimates, success ratios determined by report cards were in error - 53.3 compared to 44.9 percent (random) of licenses issued. This compared with a statewide elk hunter success of 24 percent in 1968 (Colorado Division of Game, Fish and Parks 1969). According to Turner (1967, 1968) in New Mexico overall elk hunter success averages about 20 percent (46.0% either sex, 30.6% antler1ess, 11.6% antlered). Projections from the random survey indicated that 161 of 3,906 (4.1%) licenses were not used. The number of "no hunts" in Area E has averaged 4.8 percent since 1966. Other surveys by Prenzlow (1969 a, b) on elk Areas MM and T and by Turner (1967, 1968) in New Mexico reported rates of unused licenses at 2.5~ 4.0~ 3.4, and 2.9 percent, respectively. Harvest in Relation to Area and Time Location of Harvest Harvest by Game Management Unit was projected from the random survey and appears as Table 27. About half of the harvest was from each unit. Repor t. card data (Table'22) indicated almost 56 percent of the harvest was from Unit 24. Table 27 "t~i;}Sition Management tJil£!le , of 1968 Estimated Elk Harvest in Area E by Game Unit Antlered No. % Antlerless No. % 23 338 22.1 471 26.8 859 48.9 24 412 23.5 484 27.6 896 51.1 Total 800 45.6 955 54.4 1,755 100.0 Total No. % �- 209 Accurate records were kept in 1968 on kill locations, using detailed onehalf inch to the mile maps, to determine if larger bulls were killed at a higher rate on the south side of the White River in Unit 24 where the Flat Tops Wilderness Area is located. Ninety-eight of 158 (62.0%) mature bulls were harvested on the south side. However, that area contains approximately 342 square miles as compared with 119 square miles north of the river. Table 28 lists the numbers of elk harvested, percent of each class and kill per square mile north and south of the White River in Unit 24. Table 28 Harvest North and South of the Main White River in Unit 24, - Elk 1968. Glass North of White River Number Kill/Sq. PerMile Harvested Cent South of White River Kill/Sq. Number PerMile Harvested Cent Total Mature Bulls 60 38.0 .50 98 62.0 .29 158 Yearling Bulls 133 57.8 1.12 97 42.2 .28 230 Cows & Calves 303 59.4 2.55 207 40.6 .61 510 To_tals 496 55.2 4.17 402 44.8 1.18 898 Time Required to Harvest Elk - Hunters who were successful in harvesting an elk needed a mean of 2.39 days compared to 2.59 days in 1967. Times required by both antlered and antlerless hunters according to residence are given in Table 29. Table 29 - Mean Number of Days Required ,toHarvest Elk in Area E by Resident and Non-Resident Hunters, (1968). Permit Type Mean Days Reguired to Kill Antlered Ant1er1ess Resident 2.11 (367) ]) 2.54 (533) 2.37 (900) Non-Resident 2.27 (131) 2.66 (122) 2.46 (253) All Hunters 2.15 (498) 2.56 (655) 2.39 (1,153) !/Figures in parenthesis indicate number of elk killed. Elk �- 210 Hunter Effort and Attitude in Relation to Harvest Information on hunter effort (number of recreation days expended by hunters) was collected at check stations by questionnaire and personal interview, and by the postcard random survey. Hunter attitude information was taken by personal interview of 100 randomly selected Area E hunters to gain insight on response and opinion of elk hunters to current management practices and regulations, especially to determine why hunters prefer one area or type of animal over another. interviewed averaged 9.27 years of experience hunting elk, and in 1968~ 47 percent were successful in bagging their elk. Eight-three percent Hunters of the participants were residents of Colorado. Hunter Effort - Area E elk b.unting provided 19,337 days of recreation in 1968. This was a decrease of about 2,300 man-days compared to 1967 even though in both years 4,000 (2,500.antlered and 1,500 antlerless) permits were issued. The slightly fewer number of active hunters in 1968 (Table 30) accounted for some loss~ but most of the decrease in man-days-use was the result of a more successful season. For instance, in 1968, 45 percent of all pennittees were successful within 5.2 days; in 1967, 5.7 days were required for 34 percent success. Information from hunters interviewed indicated that estimates from the random survey on mean number of recreat Lon days per hunter were low, e spec t a l Ly if all days associated with any particular hunting trip were included. Personal interview data revealed that elk hunting trips (total time away from home) averaged 6.98 days~ of which 1.24 days were spent in the hunting area just prior to the season opening; 3.28 days actually in pursuit of elk; and 2.46 days in camp and/or returning home. In Areas MM and T, Prenzlow (1969 a,o) estimated elk hunters averaged 7.1 and 8.6 days hunting. However, both areas provided pre-season hunts and in Area T there was also a post-season. Peterson (1969) surveyed three different areas in Colorado and determined hunters (deer) spend about six hours hunting each day. Choice of Area - Habit (hunted in area in previous years) accounted for 58 percent of why hunters had chosen to hunt in Area E. Table 31 lists reasons why those hunters interviewed had applied for an Area E pennit in 1968. Hunter Selectivity on Elk - One hundred fifty-five of 1,487 (10.4%) successful elk hunters questioned did not shoot at the first legal elk they saw during the 1968 season (Table 32). This compares to 11.4 percent in 1967. Information on the degree of hunter selectivity on elk is needed to determine if an age ratio bias exists in the antlerless harvest~ which is used to estimate age structure of the he~d. From 1968 information it was projected that 11 (1.2%) of 955 antlerless elk harvested in Area E were actually "selected" because of size or whether it was a rlwet" or "dry" animal. This compares to 1.84 percent in 1967. Seventy-six of 100 hU2ters interviewed preferred to hunt an area where the chances of killing a bull elk we re "good", regardless of size of the animal. Whereas, 24 percent were partial to areas where trophy class bulls were present, even if the proportion of bulls to cows was low. �- 211 - , Table 30 - Recreation day Yl.eld of 4,000 Permits in Area E, 1967-68 1/ Recreation Days Mean/Hunter Active Hunters Total Antlered 1,761 9,662 5.5 Ant1er1ess 1,224 6,742 5.5 Antlered 616 2,74'5 6.1 Ant1er1ess 216 1,468 6.8 Totals and Mean 3,817 21,617 5.7 1,668 8,720 5.2 5,]89 4.9 Year and 'I'ypeof Permit i i Resident .. Non-Resident 1968 . .i'~f:f..i.9~t,\,:: Antlered Antlerless Non-Resident Antlered 671 3,583 5.3 Antlerless 296 1,645 5.6 Totals and Mean 3,745 19,337 5.2 1/ Data from post card surveys and systematic random samples (approximate '50percent) of n = 2,072 (1967) and 1,971 (1968). �- 212 - Table 31 - Reasons Given by 100 Hunters Who Were Interviewed at Check Stations on Why They Had Applied For a Permit in Area E, 1968. Rank Percent 1 .58 Habit - hunted previously. 2 .15 Group - applied for a permit part of a group. 3 .10 Recommended - by friend or literature concerning Area E .83 4 .8 Amount of game - from personal observation or Area E literature .91 5 .5 Convenience - close to home or had friends and/or accommodations in area. .96 6 .3 Number of permits - chance of drawing antlerless permit .99 7 .1 New area - wanted Reasons Cumulative in area Percent .58 as to try new area • In 1968, 4 (.50%) of the estimated 800 antlered elk harvested because of antler or body size. This compares to .32 percent .73 1.00 were "selected" in 1967. Specified Permit Seasons - Only seven percent of the Area E hunters sampled disliked a specified permit type of season as opposed to the 78 percent who preferred it. Fifteen percent expressed no opinion. However, these results are biased, because the sample did not include those hunters who had been unsuccessful in drawing a permit for the area. During the interview, 40 participants gave specific suggestions on what they thought might improve elk hunting, particularly in Area E (Table 33). Separate Elk and Deer Seasons - Seventy-three percent preferred elk and deer seasons to open on the same date and run concurrently. Thirty of the 73 participants gave reasons which supported this system. These included: (24), able to hunt both species at the same time; (3), could not afford (time and expense) to make more than one hunting trip; (2), felt more hunters in the field increased chances of getting an elk because of pressure; and (1) thought if seasons were separated, waste of game meat would increase. Four of the 12 who favored separate elk and deer seasons felt reduced hunter pressure would be an advantage. The remaining 15 percent of the sample were undecided on this question. �Table 32 - Reasons Given by 155 of 1,487 Successful Hunters For Not Shooting at First Legal Elk Observed. All White River Units. 1968. Rank Reasons Number Percent 1 Shooting distance too great or elk in rough country 63 40.64 2 Waited for easier or better shot 26 16.77 3 Hunter had no chance to shoot at first elk 16 10.32 4 Waited for larger bull or trophy head 12 7.75 5 Preferred not to shoot calf or cow with calf 8 5.16 6 Waited for shot at larger antlerless elk 6 3.87 7 Preferred not to shoot first animal 6 3.87 8 Allowed another member of party to shoot first 4 2.58 9 Rifle not in operating condition 3. 1.93 10 Chose a wounded or abandoned animal 3 1.93 11 Wanted calf or small animal for packing out 2 1.29 12 Another shot first animal that was seen 2 1.29 13 Response not applicable to question 1 .65 14 Afraid to shoot - might hit wrong animal 1 .65 15 Another hunter in the way 1 .65 16 Elk cound not be retrieved 1 .65 155 100.00 TOTALS N t-" W �- 214 Table 33 - Sugge s t Loris Offered by 40 of 100 Participants Interviewed at Check Stations on How to Improve Elk Hunting. Particularly in Area E. 1968. Rank· . Suggestions Number Percent 1 Improve secondary roads and horse trails; limit 4-wheet drive use to established roads; additional camping areas. 15 .375 2 Limit successful antlerless once in two ~ears. 5 .125 3 Continue specified permit hunter concentrations. 5 .125 4 Improve license license drawing procedure; fee. reduce 4 .100 5 Increase numbers Forests 2 .050 6 More strict regulations on commercial guides to reduce "guaranteed" bag; require guides and outfitters use permit on National Forest and Wilderness areas. 2 .050 7 Either-sex permits to reduce waste; regulate use of handguns; require "heavier" rifles; Monday as opening day; close season; limit "out-of-staters"; control drunks. 1 ]j .025 applicants seasons to alleviate of elk on National 1/ Seven different suggestions, ;re listed as group (7). to each offered only once by hunters interviewed, Landowner-License Privilege - None of the 100 participants owned land within Area E. Still, 55 percent felt landowners should have a preference in obtaining a specified permit; while 34 percent were opposed and 11 percent undecided. Access Roads - The majority of hunters (69%) were satisfied with the existing access in Area E; whereas, 18 percent suggested that present access should be limited by either improving or closing secondary roads, especially to indiscriminate use of four-wheel drive vehicles. Generally, hunters at check stations commented in favor of the proposed Forest Service closure of the Ripple Creek - Pagoda Peak jeep trail. The remaining 13 percent requested more access roads into elk areas, generally implying that the animals had too many sanctuaries on private property. Seventy-six percent stated they preferred to walk while elk hunting and 16 and 8 percent rode horseback or drove, respectively. These figures do not indicate how many of those hunters who preferred to walk used horses or vehicles to get into and out of hunting locations, or retrieve downed animals •. �- 215 - Cut-off of Elk License Sales - Most (92%) hunters favored the cut-off of elk license sales (after the general elk season began, licenses could only be purchased through Division offices and by signing appropriate affidavits). The remaining eight percent either were opposed (3%) or didn't have an opinion (5%). Many of those in favor of the cut-off implied this was the "smartest" decision the Division had ever made. Estimates of Mortality other than Legal Harvest Wounding Loss - Data on the number of elk crippled or wounded by elk hunters are difficult to obtain. Table 34 compares the number of elk reported wounded from the r andom survey with comp ar abLe data from check station questionnaires. Estimates of net wounding loss (number of elk reported wounded minus number of wounded animals harvested) are presented in Table 35. Random survey information was more accurate, because of reasons stated earlier, whereas questionnaire data were based on about-30 percent of the active hunters who voluntarily stopped at a check station. These 30 percent were not representative of the total population of hunters because all were successful in bagging an elk. Table 36 lists information of proportions of unsuccessful hunters shooting at and wounding elk. It is assumed these wounding loss figures (7.7% - random survey, 3.9% check station questionnaire) represent a minimum loss. Because all hunters would not admit wounding an elk, and hunters who did not wound an animal most likely would not respond to the question positively. The 7.7 percent figure compares closely to 9.0 and 7.4 percent reported by Hay et a I , (1961) and Hunter (1967); and also to the 9.4 and 8.'7 percent determined for Area ~ in 1967. Early records by Smith (1959 b) indicated wounding loss affected about 1.5 percent of the elk herd on the White River Plateau. Tileston (1962) determined that elk wounding loss averaged 10.1 percent (range 6.1 to 11.7) in Colorado from 1946 to 1953. Costley (1948) working with deer in Utah, estimated a sizable crippling loss of 25 percent of the kill on either-sex areas and 42 percent on antlered-only areas. Abandoned Elk Carcasses - One hundred abandoned elk carcasses were observed by 1,153 successful hunters. As expected~ antler1ess elk are abandoned at a much higher rate than antlered (Table 37). Abandonment of elk carcasses was lower in 1968 (.09 elk observed per hunter) than in 1967 (.18). �Table 34 - Area E Wounding Loss - Comparison of Antlered and Ant1er1ess Hunters With Two Different Surveys, 1968. Type Survey No. of No. of Elk % of Hunters No. of Elk % Loss Projected Elk Loss .and Class Hunters Reporting Rep t , Wounded Wounding Elk Rep t , Killed of Kill No·1.! % of Pop.j/ Random Survey Jj Antlered 1,054 Ant1er1ess Totals Questionnaire Antlered Ant1er1ess Totals 37 3.5 343 10.8 86 7.3 685 24 3.5 450 5.3 51 1.0 1,739 61 3.5 793 7.7 137 2.2 21 4.2 498 4.2 34 2.9 24 3.7 657 3.7 35 0.7 1,155 3.9 69 1.1 :1:.! 498 657 1,155 45 3.9 11 Actual figures reported from an approximate 50 percent sample of Area E permittees. ~I Figures based on 1,155 successful Area E permittees. Data obtained at check stations. 11 Numbers of elk lost were projected by multiplying percent wounding loss of reported kill by total estimated kill of 1,755 from Table 24. il Based on population estimate pre-season 1968 of 1,171 bulls and 5,090 cows and calves for a total population of 6,261. N •..... 0'\ �Table 35 - Wounded Elk Salvaged by Hunters and Net Wounding Loss - Comparison of Two Different Surveys, Area_b 1967. Wounding Loss Wounded Killed Net Loss Number of Elk Reported Killed No. Wounded Antlered 343 37 19 18 5.2 Antlerless 450 24 11 13 2.9 Totals 793 61 30 31 3.9 Antlered 498 21 13 8 1.6 Antlerless 657 24 18 6 0.9 Totals 1,155 45 31 14 1.2 Type Survey and Class Percent Loss }/ Random Survey 1/ Questionnaire ]j 1/ Actual figures reported from an approximate 50 percent sample of Area E permittees. ]j Figures from 1,155 successful Area E permittees. Data obtained from check stations. 1/ Percent wounding loss is net loss divided by number of elk reported killed. N to-' --.J �- 218 T,a,bl.e" 3.6.r. Percent; of Unsuccessful Hunters Elk Wounded Area E 1968. Shooting at Elk and Numbers of Type of Pe-rnri-t-, Number of Hunters Hunters ~o. Antlered 136 21 15.4 2 1.5 Antlerless 31 11 35.5 1 3.2 -Totals 167 32 19.2 3 1.8 Table 37 - Number of Abandoned Elk Carcasses Area E Hunters 1968. Shooting -% Observed Elk Wounded No. " '% by 1,153 Successful Unit Number of Hunters Bulls 23 234 2 (.01) }) 8 (.03) 1 (.00) 11 (.05) 24 919 11 (.01) 62 (.07) 16 (.07) 89 (.10) Totals 1,153 13 (.01) 70 (.06) 17 C.01) 100 (.09) 1/ Figures in parenthesis are mean number of carcasses Number of Abandoned Cows Animals Observed Calves Total observed per hunter. Natural Mortality - Crude estimates of natural mortality (losses other than annual harvest) are made by subtracting a particular years population estimate from the population projection made a year earlier. For example, in 1967 it was projected that there would be 7,075 elk in Area E prior to the 1968 season. After the 1968 season, it was estimated by formula that the preseason population was 6,261. The difference, 814 elk or 11.5 percent, was the estimate of animals lost from sources other than actual harvest. This can be done because the projections were based on theoretical populations on Population Estimates and Projections). Annual losses have averaged 14.5 percent for 1967 and 1968; and of this, approximately 2.0 percent can be attributed to wounding loss. What proportion of the remaining 12.5 percent is the result of winter loss, post-natal mortality, predators, illegal kill, disease, etc. is unknown. Herd losses in Wyoming, according to Cole (1964), ayerage at least 6 percent. Harris (1958), working in Area E, examined 23 elk carcasses and found that 14 of 17 cows were extremely "old". Apparently, all carcasses were the result of winter loss. Weckwerth (1968) also found that mature cows were more susceptible to winter loss. Hay e~ ale (1961) speculated that elk winter losses averaged about 5 percent from "normal" winters and 2-3 percent from "light" winters on a statewide basis in Colorado. �- 219 - From field observations in Michigan, an average of 46 calves were seen pe~ 100 cows. Blouch and Moran (1965) estimated this ratio indicated that calf survival was perhaps 66 percent of potential production. Greer (1967) also found heavy calf losses of 20 and 50 percent. Population Total Population Estimates and Projections Estimates Formulas can be used to estimate the total number of elk present in Area E prior to a season. Prenzlow (1968) described this in detail with examples of how ratios of antlered to antlerless elk (from harvest and pre- and postseason classification counts) were used in a formula devised by Dr. Bowden to estimate pre-season populations. = =~ Pre-Season Population Estimate, 1968 - An estimated 6,621 (C.I. 194 1.96, ~= .05) elk were present in Area E prior to the 1968 season (Tabl~ 38). This compares to 6,751 and 6,313 in 1966 and 1967, respectively (Prenzlow 1969c, d). Table 38 - Pre-Season Population Age in Area E, 1968. Estimate and Proportions of Elk by Sex and Item Estimated Number Expected Percent 1/ Observed Percent l/ Bulls 1,171 19.3 18.7 Cows 3,174 50.6 50.7 Calves 1,916 30.1 30.6 Total 6,261 100.0 100.0 1/ Percentages expected from 1967 post-season l/ Percentages observed when making population 1968 pre-season data. classifications by helicopter. Since 1966, the beginning of specified permit seasons, proportions of bulls in the herd have increased from 15.4 to 18.7 percent. Proportions of cows have decreased from 53.7 to 50.7; while proportions of calves have remained essentially the same (30.9 - 30.6%). Increasing the number of bulls has not yet affected productivity (number of calves/lOO cows), at least not significantly. Although productivity in 1968 was 60.4 compared to 57.5 calves per 100 cows in 1966. �- 220 - The encouraging portion of the data collected so far is that no significant differences exist between the observed and expected proportions of animals (bulls, cows and calves) that make up the total population estimates. For instance, from 1967 data it was predicted that 50.6 percent of the elk herd would be cows in 1968. Counts made from a helicopter in September, 1968 established that 50.7 percent of the elk observed were cows. Post-Season Population Estimate, 1968 - An estimated 4,506 Area E elk survived the 1968 season (Table 39). This was calculated by subtracting the elk harvest by class of animal from the pre-season population. Table 39 - Post-Season Population Estimate and Age in Area E, 1968. and Proportions of Elk by Sex Item Pre-Season Population Harvest )j No. Bulls 1,171 800 371 8.2 8.2 Cows 3,174 781 2,393 53.1 52.9 Calves 1,916 174 1,742 38.7 38.9 Totals 6,261 1,755 4,506 100.0 100.0 ]j Based on 1968 random survey. 1/ Proportions remained by class of the total estimated following the 1968 season. 1/ Proportions actually by helicopter. Post-Season Population Exp. % ]j Obs. % ]..1 observed when making number of elk (4,506) that 1968 post-season classification Total post-season populations have declined from 5,336 to 4,506 elk since 1966. This was largely the result of increased harvest of the antlerless animals (696 to 955). Allowing more antlerless permits was necessary, however, so that the composition of the wintering herd could be changed to meet the objective of narrowing the sex ratio (more bulls per 100 cows). Proportions of bulls have increased in the post-season populations from 6.1 to 8.2 percent. A greater change was expected, but Area E hunters had an exceptionally high success ratio in 1968 (33 percent as compared to the average 26 percent for 1966 and 1967 specified permit seasons). �- 221 - Population Projections Each year, based on the post-season population estimate, a projection is made for the next year. Prenzlow (1968) described this procedure in detail using 1967 data as an example. Population Projection for Area E. 1969 - Prior to the 1969 season, it is projected that 6,477 elk will be available to hunters in Area E (Table 40). However, this figure may change slightly if productivity differs significantly from 60.4 oalves per 100 cows. Table 40 - Predicted 1969 Pre-Season Item 1968 Post-Season Population Bulls 371 1,242 'l:.1 19.2 Cows 2,393 3,264 1/ 50.4 Calves 1,742 !il 30.4 Calculated by adding from 1968. Area E. 1969 Pre-Season No. II ]) Assumption that of 1,742 calves, cent are females. 'l:.1 Elk Population, 1,971 50 percent the 371 remaining bulls (871) are males Population Exp. % ~j and 50 per- (1968) and 871 male calves 11 Calculated by adding the 3,494 remaining cows (1968) and 871 female calves from 1968. !il Calculated by multiplying productivity 21 Expected the number of 1969 cows (3,264) by expected (.604). proportions 1969 season. of total projected number of elk (6,477) prior to In previous years, population projections have been high because no losses other than actual hunting mortality were considered. Therefore, the projections were biased. Annual herd losses of 17.5 and 11. 5 percent were determined for 1967 and 1968, respectively. These were calculated by subtracting a particular, years estimate from the projection (Table 41). Recommendation for 1969 Area ESeason - To fulfill objectives 3a and b of the study, it is recommended that 2,200 antlered and 1,000 antlerless permits be issued for the 1969 season. Table 42 illustrates the composition of 1969 pre-season Area E population if the projection is reduced by 10 percent (to account for herd loss). The resulting post-season population is projected also based on no significant change in hunter success. �- 222 -'; Table 41 - Estimates of Annual Year Population Estimate 1966 6,751 1967 1968 Herd Losses in Area E 1967-1968. Population Projection No. 6,313 7,654 1,341 17.5 6,261 7,075 814 11.5 Difference Percent Table 42 - Modified 1969 Area E Pre-Season Population Projection and Resulting Post-Season Population With a Harvest Level of 2,200 Antlered and 1,000 Antlerless Permits. Item Mod. 1969 PreSeason Pop. No. Exp , % Bulls 1,119 10.2 638 481 10.5 Cows 2,938 50.4 490 2,448 53.6 Calves 1,772 30.4 130 1,642 35.'9 Proj. Hunt Mortality No. 1/ Modified projection resulted from subtracting projection of 6,477 in Table 40. 1/ Projected 1969 PostSeason Pop. No. Exp , % 648 elk (10%) from theoretical harvest based on 29% success of 2,200 antlered 1,000 antlerless permits. and 62% success of As a check on the above projections, ratios of bulls, cows and calves observed during classification counts will be compared to expected ratios; harvest data will again be taken by random survey; and pre-season estimates will be calculated by formula. Note that these comparisons will be independent estimates of the same thing and if there is close agreement, it would indicate the above described method is valid for estimating Area E elk populations. �- 223 - LITERATURE CITED Allee, W. C., A. E. Emerson, T. Park, and-Kg P. Schmidt. 1949. Principles of animal ecology. W. B. Saunders Co. Philadelphis, Pennsylvania. 837 p. Altmann, Margaret. 1956. Patterns of herd behavior of Wyoming. Zoological. 4(2):65-71. in free-ranging Andersen, J. 1953. Analysis of a roe-deer population (L.). Danish Review of Game Biology. 2:127-155. Capreolus elk capreolus Anderson, A. E. 1967. Letter to R. J. Boyd, E. E. Ryland, and J. R. Grieb regarding San Juan cow elk reproductive data. Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Division*. Denver, February 21, 1967. 3 p. Becker, Joyce. 1969. Personal communication (telephone) with E. J. Prenzlow regarding 1963 Gunnison pre- and post-season, 1965 San Juan-Piedra postseason, 1966 Hermosa-Junction Creek post-season and 1968 Rio Grande preseason elk sex and age ratio counts. Colorado. June 18, 1969. Beuchner, H. K., and C. V. Swanson. 1955. Increased natality resulting from lowered population density among elk in southwestern Washington. Trans. N. Amer. Wildl. Conf. 20:560-567. Blouch, R. I., and R. J. Moran. 1965. 1964 elk hunt. of Conservation. Report No. 30. 24 p. Michigan Department Boyd, R. J. 1962a. Letter to G. N. Hunter regarding 1962 White River elk pre-season sex and age ratio count. Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Division*. Denver. October 18, 1962. 1 p. 1962b. Letter to G. N. Hunter regarding 1962 White River elk postseason sex and age ratio count. Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Division*. Denver. December 18, 1962. 1 p. 1963. Letter to G. N. Hunter regarding 1963 White River elk preseason sex and age ratio count. Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Division*. Denver, October 15, 1963. 1 p. 1964a. Letter to G. N. Hunter regarding 1963 White River elk postseason sex and age ratio count. Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Division*. Denver, January 16, 1964. 1 p. 1964b. Letter to G. N. Hunter regarding 1964 White River elk preseason sex and age ratio count. Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Division*. Denver. September 11, 1964. 1 p. *1964 and prior known as Game and Fish Department. 1964 changed to Game, Fish and Parks Department. 1968 changed to Game, Fish and Parks Division. �- 224 Boyd, R. J. 1964c. Letter to G. N. Hunter regarding 1964 White River elk post-season sex and age ratio count. Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Division*. Denver. December 11, 1964. 1 p. 1965. Population components - Rio Grande elk study. Colorado. Job Completion Report. W-38-R-19. p. 393-404. 1966a. Letter to G. N. Hunter regarding 1966 Rio Grande elk preseason sex and age ratio counts. Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Division*. Denver. December 30, 1966. 2 p. 1966b. Letter to G. N. Hunter regarding 1966 Rio Grand elk postseason sex and age ratio counts. Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Division*. Denver. December 30, 1966. 2 p. 1966c. Population components - Rio Grande elk. Completion Report. W-38-R-20. p. 269-284. Colorado. Job 1967a. Population components ~ Rio Grande elk. Completion Report. W-38-R-2l. p. 237~245. Colorado. Job 1967b. Letter to R. L. Evans regarding 1966 Williams Fork elk postseason sex and age count. Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Division*. Denver. February 8, 1967. 1 p. (unpub.). The elk of the White River Plateau. and Parks Divisioni(. Denver. Tech. Bull. No. Coffin. A. L.~ and J. D. Remington. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 17(2):223. 1953. Colorado Game, Fish Pregnant yearling cow elk. Cole, G. F. 1964. Jackson Hole cooperative elk studies. National Park Service Progress Report. 1963-1964. 90 p. Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Division*. 1969. Big game kill information, 1968. Unpublisned report. Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Division*. Denver. Mimeo. 152 p. Costley~ R. J. 1948. Crippling losses among mule deer in Utah. Amer. Wildl. Conf. 13:451-458. Trans. N. Dasmann, R. F. 1952. Methods for estimating deer populations from kill data. California Fish and Game. 38(2):225-233. Davis3 D. E. 1960. A chart for estimation of life expectancy. Mgmt. 24(3):344-357. J. Wildl. Deevy~ E. S. 1947. Life tables for natural populations of animals. Quart. Review Viol. 22:283-314. *1964 and prior known as Game and Fish Department. 1964 changed to Game, Fish and Parks Department. 1968 changed to Game, Fish and Parks Division. �- 225 Denny, R. N. 1964. Specific herd studies - population components. Job Completion Report. W-3S-R-17. p. 66-6S. Colorado. Follmann, E. H., and W. D. Klimstra. 1969. Fertility deer fawns. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 33(3):70S-7-ll. in male white-tailed Gill, J. 1953. Remarks on the analysis of kill curves of female deer. Trans. 9th Northeast Section Wildl. Conf. Bretton Woods, New Hampshire. Mimeo. 12 p. Gill, R. B. 1966. Elk population components - Rocky Mountain National Colorado. Job Completion Report. W-3S-R-20. p. 227-231. 1967. Population components - Rocky Mountain Job Completion Report. W-3S-R-2l. p. 209-219. National Greer, K. R. 1965. (Special collections) Collections elk post season, 1965, Northern Yellowstone herd. W-S3-R-S. 17 p. Park. Park. Colorado. from the Gardiner Job Completion Report. 1966. Fertility rates of the northern Yellowstone elk populations. West. Assoc. State Game and Fish Comm., 46th Annual Conf. Butte, Montana. 10 p. 1967. Special collections - Yellowstone Completion Report. W-S3-R-10. 15 p. elk study. Montana. Job 1965. Letter to E. J. Prenzlow regarding age structures of Northern Yellowstone elk herd. Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Division*. Denver. May 17, 1965. 2 p. Grieb, J. R. 1967. Correspondence to Rocky Mountain Park elk technical committee. Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Division * Denver. October 9, 1967. Unpublished. 4 p. Guse, N., B. Rice, L. Carr, and R. Denny. 1965. Rocky Mountain cooperative elk study. Colorado. Research Report. W-3S-R-lS. p. 77-120. Hancock, N. V. Department 1955. A management study of the Cache elk herd. of Fish and Game. Bull. No. 22. 161 p. Utah State Harper, J. A., J. H. Harn, W. W. Bentley, and C. F. Yocom. 1967. The status and ecology of the Roosevelt elk in California. Wildl. Mono. No. 16, 46 p. Harris, J. T. 1955. Collection of data on elk and mule deer enroute from winter to summer range. Colorado. Job Completion Report. W-3S-R-ll. p. 3-S. 1959. Population estimates based on age and sex ratios. Job Completion Report. W-3S-R-12. p. 19-26. Colorado. *1964 and prior known as Game and Fish Department. 1964 changed to Game, Fish and Parks Department. 1968 changed to Game, Fish and Parks Division. �- 226 Harris, J. T. 1960a. Letter to G. N. Hunter regarding 1960 White River elk pre-season and age ratio count. Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Division*. Denver. October 7, 1960. 2 p. 1960b. Letter to G. N. Hunter regarding 1960 White River elk post-season sex and age ratio count. Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Division*. Denver. December 15, 1960. 3 p. 1961a. Letter to G. N. Hunter regarding 1960 White River elk postseason sex and age ratio count. Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Division*. Denver. March 16, 1961. 2 p. 1961b. Letter to G. N. Hunter regarding 1961 White River elk preseason sex and age ratio count. Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Division*. July 27, 1961. 2 p. 1961c. Letter to G. N. Hunter regarding 1961 White River elk preseason sex and age ratio count. Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Division*. Denver. October 6, 1961. 2 p. 1961d. Letter to G. N. Hunter regarding 1961 White River elk postseason sex and age ratio count. Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Division*. Denver. December 24, 1961. 2 p. 1961e. Collection of data on the White River elk herd. Job Completion Report. W-38-R-14. p. 31-62. Colorado. 1963. Population dynamics of the White River elk herd, Colorado. Ph.D. Thesis. Univ. Michigan. Ann Arbor, Michigan. 190 p. Hay, K. G., G. N. Hunter, and L. Robbins. 1961. Big game management in Colorado, 1949-1958. Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Division*. Denver. Tech. Bull. No.8. 112 p. Hunter, G. N. 1967. Colorado big game harvest, 1959-1965. Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Division*. Denver. Special Mgmt. Report. No.1. 41 p. Janson, R. G. Montana. 1967. Big game surveys and investigations - district wide. Job Completion Report. W-72-R-12. 39 p. Keiss, R. E. 1969. Comparison of eruption-wear patterns and cementum annuli as age criteria in elk. J. Wi1d1. Mgmt. 33(1):175-180. Kittams, W. H. 1953. 17(2):177-184. Reproduction of Yellowstone elk. Morrison, J. A., C. E. Trainer, and P. L. Wright. in elk as determined from known-age embryos. Morrison, J. A. 1960. 16:(1-2)84-92. J. Wi1d1. Mgmt. 1959. Breeding season J. Wi1d1. Mgmt. 23(1):24-34. Characteristics of estrus in captive elk. Behaviour. *1964 and prior known as Game and Fish Department. 1964 changed to Game, Fish and Parks Department. 1968 changed to Game, Fish and Parks Division. �- 227 Murie, O. J. 1951. The elk of North America. Pennsylvania. 376 p. Nielson, A. E. 1967. Check station data. W-85-R-17. 13 p. Stackpole Co. Idaho. Harrisburg, Job Completion Report. Norberg~ E. R. 1955. Study of game and range in major winter concentration areas. Idaho. Job Completion Report. W-112-R~1. 9 p. Norberg, E. R., L. Trout, and H. Roberts. 1956. Winter census and big game movements. Idaho. Job Completion Report. W-112-R-2. 22 p. Owens, D. E. 1958. Letter to Po Gilbert regarding 1958 White River elk pre-season sex and age ratio count. Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Division*. Denver. October 3, 1958. lp. 1959ao Letter to P. Gilbert regarding 1959 White River pre~season sex and age ratio count. Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Division*. Denver. July 31, 1959. 1 p , 1959b. Letter to P. Gilbert and J. R. Grieb regarding 1959 White River elk pre-season sex and age ratio count. Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Division*. Denver. September 24, 1959. 1 p. 1959c. Letter to P. Gilbert regarding 1958 White River post-season sex and age ratio count. Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Division*. Denver. March 19, 1959. 1 p. 1959do Letter to Po Gilbert regarding 1959 White River post-season sex and age ratio count. Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Division*o Denver. November 23, 1959. 1 p. Peterson, W. J. 1969. Deer kill as related to hunter access. Colorado State Univ., Fort Collins. 68 p. M.S. Thesis. Prenzlow, E. J. 1967. Population components - White River elk. Job Completion Report. W-38-R-2l. p. 251-276. 1968. White River elk population components. Report. W-38-R-22. p. 383-421. Colorado. Colorado. Job Progress , 1969a. Area MM season sunnnaryfor 1968. Unpublished report. Colorado ---Game, Fish and Parks Division*. Denver. Mimeo. 2 p. 1969b. Area T season sunnnaryfo.r: 1968. Unpublished report. Game, Fish and Parks Division*. Denver. Mimeo. 2 p. Colorado 1969c. Results of Area E random survey - 1966. Unpublished report. Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Division*. Denver. Mimeo. 4 p. *1964 and prior known as Game and Fish Department. 1964 changed to Game, Fish and Parks Department. 1968 changed to Game, Fish and Parks Division. �.s . :~: ." ";" "'\ ::.: .•. 228 •. Prenz1ow, E. J. 1969d. Results of Area Erandom survey - 1967. report. Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Division*. Denver. Quick, H. F. 1960. Animal population analysis. gational techniqu~s, edited by H. S. Mosby. Arbor, Michigan. 7:1-7.35. Quimby, D. C., and J. E. Gaab. 1957. indicator in Rocky Mountain elk. Unpublished Mineo. 6p. In Manual of game investiEdwards Brothers. Ann Mandibular dentition as an age J. Wildl. Mgmt. 21(4):435-451. Riney, T. 1956. Differences in proportion of fawns to herds in red deer Cervus elaphus from several New Zealand environments. Nature. 177:488-489. Robel, R. J. 1960. Detection of elk migration through hunter interviews. J. Wild1. Mgmt. 24(3):337-338. Robinette, W. L., J. S. Gashwiler, J. B. Low, and Da. A. Jones. 1957. Differential mortality by sex and age among mule deer. J. Wi1dl. Mgmt. 31(1):1-16. Ryland, E. E. 1967a. Letter to G. N. Hunter regarding 1967 Rio Grande elk pre-season sex and age ratio count. Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Division*. Denver. September 29, 1967. 2 p. 1967b. Letter to G. N. Hunter regarding 1967 San Juan-Piedra elk pre-season sex and age ratio count. Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Division*. Denver. September 29, 1967. 2 p. _____ 1967c. Letter to G. N. Hunter regarding 1967 Trinchera elk preseason sex and age ratio count. Colorado Game, Fish and Parks D'i.vi sLorrs , Denver. September 29, 1967. 2 p. 1968a. Letter to G. N. Hunter regarding 1967 San Juan-Piedra elk post-season sex and age ratio count. Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Division*. Denver. January 22, 1968. 4 p. 1968b. Letter to G. N. Hunter regarding 1967 Navajo-Blanco elk post-season sex and age ratio count. Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Division*. Denver. January 22, 1968. 2 p. 1968c. Letter to G. N. Hunter regarding 1967 Rio Grande elk postseason sex and age ratio count. Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Division*. Denver. January 23, 1968. 3 p. 1968d. Letter to G. N. Hunter regarding 1967 Hermosa-Junction Creek elk post-season sex and age ratio count. Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Division*. Denver. January 24, 1968. 2 p. >'<-1964 and prior known as Game and Fish Department. 1964 changed to Game, Fish and Parks DepartmenL 1968 changed to Game, Fish and Parks Division. �- 229 Ryland, E. E. 19683. Letter to Game Management regarding 1968 San JuanPiedra elk pre-season sex and age ratio count. Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Division*. Denver. September 23, 1968. 1968f. pre-season Division*. Letter to Game Management regarding 1968 Trinchera elk sex and age ratio count. Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Denver. October 14, 1968. 2 p. 1969a. Letter to Game Management regarding 1968 San Juan-Piedra elk season sex and age ratio count. Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Division*. Denver. January 14, 1969. 3 p. 1969b. Letter to Game Management regarding 1968 Navajo-Blanco elk post-season sex and age ratio count. Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Df.vLs Lon=, Denver. January 14, 1969. 2 p , 1969c. Letter to Game Management regarding 1968 Hermosa-Junction Creek elk post-season sex and age ratio count. Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Division*. Denver. January 14, 1969. 2 p. 1969d. Letter to Game Management regarding post-season sex and age ratio count. Colorado Df.vls Lon+, Denver. February 24, 1969.2 p. 1968 Rio Grande elk Game, Fish and Parks 196ge. Letter to Game Management regarding 1968 Trinchera elk post-season sex and age ratio count. Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Dd.vlsLone , Denver. February 24, 1969. 1 p. 1969f. Letter to Game Management regarding 1968 Del Norte Peak elk post-season sex and age ratio count. Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Dd.vLs Lorre , Denver. February 25, 1969. 2- p. Saunders, J. K., Jr. 1955. J. Mammal. 36(1):145. Fetus in yearling cow elk, Cervus. canadensis. Silver, Helenette. 1965. An instance of fertility fawn. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 29(3):634-636. in a white-tailed buck Smith, D. G., and T. Williams. 1958. Collection of data on elk domestic sheep use on subalpine range. Colorado. Job Completion Report. W-38-R-ll. p. 25-31. Smith, D. G. 1959a. Collection of data on elk and livestock use of subalpine range. Colorado. Job Completion Report. W-38-R-12. p. 99-108. 1959b. Collection of data on the White River elk herd. Job Completion Report. W-38-R-12. p. 33-39. Colorado. *1964 and prior known as Game and Fish Department. 1964 changed to Game, Fish and Parks Department. 1968 changed to Game, Fish and Parks Division. �- 230 Tileston, J. V. 1962. A resume of Colorado big game research projects. 1939-1957. Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Division*. Denver, Tech. Bull. No.9. 81 p. Turner, F. L. 1967. Elk population trends distribution and harvest information. N~w Mexico. Job Completion Report. W-93-R-9. 11 p. 1968. Elk population trends, distribution and harvest information. New Mexico. Job Progress Report. W-93-R-IO. 12 p. Weckwerth, R. P. 1968. Big game surveys and investigations - Lower Clark Fo,rkrecheck, Units 12 and 120. Montana, Job Completion Report. W-7l-R-13. 8 p. White, C. E. 1968. Letter to W. W. Sandfort regarding Williams Fork and South White pre-season elk sex ratio samples. Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Division*. Denver. October 1, 1968. 2 p. 1969~ Pre- and post-season aerial sex and age ratio data from Williams Fork, South White and Routt elk herds. Unpublished report. Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Division*. Denver. Mimeo. N.P. Yorgason, J. 1963a. Coordination. Wyoming. W-66-R-5. p 19-28. Job Completion Report. 1963b. Migration and seasonal distribution of elk in the study area. Wyoming. Job Completion Report. W-66~-5. 11 p. *1964 and prior known as Game and Fish Department. 1964 changed to Game, Fish and Parks Department. 1968 changed to Game, Fish and Parks Division. Prepared by ~~ ~~~ ~ Edgar J. Prenzlow Asst. Wildlife Researcher _ �- 231 APPENDIX QUESTIONNAIRE Checker A FOR SUCCESSFUL ELK HUNTERS Sheet No. -------------------------- WHITE RIVER ELK CHECK STATION WORK SHEET 1. Check Station 1- --------------------------------------------------- 2. Date 3. Game Management 2. 3. Unit 4. Age of animal 5. Determined by: Dentition Undetermined Antlers -----.; 6. Sex of animal: Male 7. If female, lactating Female non-lactating 4. (Check only one) 6. Unknown _ 8. Number of days hunted to get elk 9. Day of season of kill 10. Resident Non-Resident 11. Number of spike bulls you observed 12. Number of mature bulls you observed 13. Number of cows and calves you observed 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. ~ ~--~------- 12. 13. 14. How many elk did you hit that you weren't able to get? 15. Was the elk you killed wounded by someone else before you 14. shot it? Yes How many carcasses 16. Number bulls 17. Number cows 18. Number calves 15. No. did you observe? (if yes, also plot on appropriate map) 17. 18. --------------- 19. Did you shoot at the first legal animal you saw? Yes No Why didn't you shoot at the first one? 16. 19. --- �- 232 APPENDIX QUESTIONNAIRE B FOR UNSUCCESSFUL Checker _ WHITE RIVER ELK UNSUCCESSFUL 1. Check Station 2. Date 3. Game Management !/ 2. 3. Permit _ of spike bulls you observed No _ able to get? Yes 4. 5. 6. -------------------- 7. Did you shoot at an elk? Yes 8. Did you hit any elk that you weren't 7. No ------ 8. _ 9. 10. of mature bulls you observed ~~---------__ ----------------------of cows and calves you observed --_ 11. 12. How many abandoned 13. Number bulls 14. Number cows 15. 'Number calves !/ Determine HUNTER REPORT FORM Unit --------------------- 10. Number 11. Number Sheet No. 1. Ant1er1ess 4. Antlered Permit ______________________________ 5. Number of days hunted 6. Resident Non-Resident 9. Number ELK HUNTERS carcasses did you observe? (If yes, also plot on appropriate map) 12. 13. 14. 15. if this is the last trip through a White River check station. If so, fill out this form on unsuccessful elk hunters. A good sample is all that is required, so during rush periods it is not necessary to use this form. �- 233 - APPENDIX C PERSONAL INTERVIEW - AREA E ELK HUNTERS Date _ Sheet Number _ .WHITERIVER ELK HUNTER INTERVIEWS 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. Are you a resident of Colorado: Yes No 1. How many years have you hunted elk 2. Do you hunt primarily on foot horseback jeep 3. How many days will you be away from home, in total, on your elk hunting trip? 4. How many days were you in the field before the season began 5. How many days did you actually hunt elk 6. Were you successful in filling your license this year: Yes No 7. What day did you kill your elk 8. What Ls your opinion of specified permit seasons in elk areas: favorable unfavorable don't know or care 9. What was your reason for applying for an elk permit in Area E 1. habit 4. amount of game _ 2. convenience 5. wanted to try new area 3. amount of permits 6. others 10. Should a portion of the elk permits be reserved for landowners within a specified area? Yes No Undecided 11. Do you own land within Area E? Yes No 12. What are your thoughts on stopping elk license sales after a season begins: favorable unfavorable don't care 13. Would you like or dislike to have deer and elk seasons separated Yes No Undecided 14. Why _ ________ ~--~~--~~~-----------------------------------15. When you hunt with a bull license, in what type of area would you prefer: (1) an area where there are larger mature bulls but fewer number of bulls, or (2) an area where there are more but younger and smaller antlered bulls 17. What are your thoughts on public access roads into elk hunting areas: Not enough too many other 18. Do you have any specific suggestions on how to improve elk hunting in Area E. 16. 16. 17. 18. Name Address �- 234 - APPENDIX D POST CARD SURVEY - AREA E HUNTERS Please list results of your own hunting effort and not infomation from those with whom you may have hunted. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Did you hunt elk in Area "E" during 1968? YesL::JNo Number of calendar days hunted. Did you kill an elk in Area "E" in 1968? Yes c:::::J No If you killed an elk, what was it? Bull Cow Calf In what Game Management Unit did you kill your elk? Unit 23 c:::::J Unit 24 How many elk did you hit that you weren't able to get? c::J ~~------~==~----~= L:::7 L:::7 c:::::J L:::7 L:::7 Was the elk you killed wounded shot it? No Yes cz: by someone else before you �July, 1969 - 235 - JOB PROGRESS REPORT State of ~C~OL~O~RA~D~O~ Project No. W-38-R-23 Deer-Elk Investigations Work Plan No. 15 Job Noo 2 Title of Job: Develop~ent of an Electronic Period Covered: September, 1968 through September Personnel: _ Deer Counting Device 30, 1969 Traffic Data Systems Inc., Dale F. Reed, Dennis L. Money, Gary T. Myers ABSTRACT A contract was awarded to Traffic Data Systems, Incorporated (TDS) to determine the feasibility and estimated costs of electronic deer detection, counting and alarm devices for use in measuring and minimizing the movement of deer onto highways. TDS developed and tested an electrooptical detector, a counter, and a scare device. TDS is now working on a report of their findings. ��;..237 - '- DEVELOPMENT OF AN ELECTRONIC DEER DETECTION, COUNTING, AND ALARM DEVICE Gary T. Myers A measure of the number of deer crossing a given stretch of highway is necessary to arrive at a pe:t;'centage of animals which cross safely. This information is essential to any comprehensive study of fa~tors causing deer-auto collisions. Yet existing methods do not accurately measure the number of animals which cross highways. In addition, devices are needed to force animals to cross roadways in areas where few deer are killed in proportion to the number which cross. p. S. OBJECTIVE Determine the feasibility and estimated costs of electronic deer detection, counting, and alarm devices for use in measuring and minimizing the movement of deer onto highways. SEGMENT OBJECTIVES 1. 2. 3. Determine type of beam and optimum transmission frequencies which should be used to detect, count, and frighten deer. Obtain one or more basic engineering model of a deer counter and a deer scare device. Test equipment under field conditions. METHODS AND MATERIALS Obviously much of the work required to develop, build and test an electronic deer detection, counting, and scare device is of a technical nature. Therefore, a contract for this job was awarded to Traffic Data Systems, Incorporated (P. O. Box 3337, Colorado Springs, Colorado). Detection and Counting A literature search was initiated by Traffic Data Systems, Inc. (TDS) at the beginning of the contract and continued throughout the contract period. Sensing methods consisdered by TDS included mechanical, magnetic, sonic, and electro-optical techniques. A basic engineering model of an electrooptical detector was developed. Streeter Amet portable recording counters were modified to serve as recorders for detecting devices. Both the counter and detector were field tested. �- 238 Alarm Tests of scarecrow devices were conducted on two domesticated and three wild deer contained in pens at the Game, Fish and Parks Research Center in Fort Collins. Various levels of intensity and pulse rates were used in the 6 to 22 kHz range to see if deer could be disturbed by noise. The reaction of deer subjected to the various noise levels was noted. RESULTS AND DISCUSSION TDS has completed most development and testing. They are presently compiling data into a final report. Nothing more can be said until the report is received at which time the final report for this study will be written. '.o......:-"--"d'--_~_-R- _ Prepared by _-"""xf;J.""'/;;...: Gary TUyers Assistant Wildlife Researcher �- 239 APPENDIX FINAL TECHNICAL REPORT OF THE DEER DETECTOR AND COUNTER SYSTEM CONTRACT I. GENERAL SCOPE A. Perform a technical evaluation and test of practical techniques for detection and counting of deer. Barrier of strip-line detection along highways is desired, as well as detection in open fields. B. Determine feasibility and effectivej:lel3sof an "electronic crow" to control movement of deero C. 110 Prepare STATEMENT a technical report scare- on the results. OF THE PROBLEM A. The technical evaluation and testing of detection and counting techniques is separated into several phases. Initially, a literature search and a review of possible methods of detection are required. This phase is followed by a preliminary evaluation period. The preliminary evaluation period results in a reduction of the number of possible methods, after which a research and development effort is started to develop on effective detector. The definition and characteristics of a counter to operate with a detector are defined as a parallel effort to the detector development. During the final phase of detector-counter development~ the equipment is field tested to determine equipment limitations in the field environment. B. In order to determine the feasibility and effectiveness of an "electronic scarecrow" test equipment must be developed which can stimulate one or more of the animal's ~ensory systems, Field testing of the developed equipment is required to determine effectiveness and ability, if any, to control movement of the deer. C. A final report and development effort is required to provide details and to define the results. of the research �- 240 - III. DETECTOR-COUNTER A. Literature RESEARCH AND DEVELOPMENT EFFORTS Search A literature search was initiated by Traffic Data Systems~ Inc., (TDS9Inc.) at the beginning of the contract and continued throughout the contract period. Principal sources of information were the Denver Public Library, Conservation Library Center and the Technical Sciences Center. Also, Mr. Gary Myers of the Colorado Department of Game, Fish and Parks, provided a considerable amount of reference data and TDS carried out a search of state-of-the-art detection devices. A search was performed by the Denver Public Library personnel in the Conservation Library. The results were negative and a copy of their letter is attached to this report. The search in the Technical Sciences section of the library provided no information on detection systems which are directly applicable to the problem. However, some information was obtained which defined basic limitations of various detection techniques. These limitations provided basic design boundaries for infrared, sonic, ultransonic and visible light which are discussed in the following text. The most rewarding sources of information of direct interest were provided by Mr. Myers. These sources are reviewed as a part of the basic methods discussed in the following text. B. Evaluation of the Barrier or Strip Detection Techniques Basically, the barrier or strip detection system must detect and count any object which passes across a line-of-sight path. Additionally, this barrier line must be capable of being placed along the side of a highway or down a median strip of a divided highway. The technique must be economically feasible so that a minimum of several miles of barrier line may be installed. Initially, several methods of detection were reviewed. These include mechanical, magnetic, sonic, visual light and passive and active infrared. MECHANICAL: Reference material provided to Mr. Myers by Texas A & M University, Department of Wildlife Science, defined a mechanical technique. This technique employs a fence line method by taking advantage of the fact that the animal usually ducks under the botton wire at a specified "deer crossing" and brushes the wire as it goes under. The mechanical contact with the wire causes a micor-switch to close, which is connected to the wire. This results in a count input to the recording counter. The inherent limitations to a mechanical detection system are environmental. Protension of the wire span must be determined and pre-set in order to obtain the optimum switch sensitivity. This imposes limitations on the span length and number of supported spans per switch. If only one span per switch is considered, then a switch-span combination is severaly limited by the realizable length of span that can be used. This interrelates with wire-sag and therefore is limited to fact as compared to hundreds of feet as required for this �- 241 specific problem. When supporting structures are employed to eliminate wire-sag, then a friction is introduced at those points of support. Further, ice and freezing of the switch and span reduce the sensitivity of the system. Where long lengths of wire are used, wind loading caused additional reduction of sensitivity. Because of these limitations, this method of detection was not further considered. TDS, Inc. contacted Texas A & M personnel at the School of Natural Biological Sciences and confirmed these conclusions. MAGNETIC: Magnetic detection was reviewed and immediately eliminated as a possible technique. This method has been used on small marrnnals,but requires "tagging" the animal with a magnetic device since organic matter has no magnetic properties. The requirement to "tag" the animal places this technique outside the scope of this problem. SONIC: Sonic detection techniques are used in intrusion detection devices. However, the application of these techniques are generally restricted to areas where the environment is well defined and stable. An example is the burglar alarm installed in a room. In this application the environment must have a stable air mass and be relatively isolated from any moving objects. Recognizing the potential environmental problems of a sonic detector, an effort was undertaken to develop a sonic beam device which would provide a detection when the beam was broken. A number of piezoelectric ceramic crystals were obtained and incorporated in a sonic transmitter and receiver amplifier circuits. The crystals were operated in the 60 kHz frequency range. The final choice for the operating frequency was based primarily upon convenience of design of the amplifier electronics, A lower frequency may be used put it is desirable to stay above the audible range of the animals, thus a lower limit of 25 kHz was assumed. Figure 1 is a block diagram of the sonic transmitter and receiver units used in the tests. The oscillator consisted of a L - C. O(J7PUT ~ tlA-tf !('a IJ /.JII.Jrb laC-TEeT&,( r i (lIG/IIK;¢N p I I G 11 = IgOl)O /'l/f Figure 1 -- Sonic System Block Diagram t- S(il/lllrr TR,I c« t.= ~ �- 242 - oscillator where the crystal provided the circuit C through a step-up transformer. The receiver used a high input impedance high gain tuned amplifier followed by an amplitude detector and schmitt trigger output. The initial tests in a controlled environment proved the basic concept of the sonic beam principal. The detector operated as designed over ranges of 10 to 100 feet which was considered sufficient for field testing purposes. The field tests which followed demonstrated several basic limitations of a sonic beam detector. Wind gusts across the beam created significant variations in the air density along the beam path. This caused a refraction of the beam and induced false detections. Convection air currents caused by earth surface heating on hot, still days cause a similar beam refraction problem. Additionally, when the transmitter-receiver system was placed within approximately 24 inches of an irregular earth surface reflections from the irregular objects created multiple beam paths. The multiple paths provided unwanted signals at the receiver when the main beam was blocked, thereby making a detection decision more difficult. This had the effect of reducing the signal to noise ratio of the system. The sonic detector was discontinued and the technique was considered ineffective for this application. ELECTRO-OPTICAL: The electro-optical techniques investigated includes visible light sources, near-infrared energy sources, and the laser beam. These techniques were investigated most extensively. Basically, the electro-optical technique uses an energy source, such as an incandescent light, which is directed at a telescopic receiver. The receiver includes a photo-electric cell and an amplifier. The visible light source, i.e., incandescent lamp, has the advantages of economy and availability of numerous sizes and power ratings. Additionally, the typical incandescent or tungsten lamp emits 90% of its energy in the infrared region. The primary limitation is that this light source is visible and therefore has a distraction to animals and humans. This limitation was eliminated by using near-infrared filters, thereby reducing the visible light transmission to less than 1%. Kodak Wratten Filters 87 and 89B were used in this case. Several small lantern size incandescent lamps were used for light sources during laboratory tests and during field tests where the range was less than 50 yards. These lamps were of the 1 to 10 candle power size and were used with a two inch parabolic reflector. For ranges up to 200 yards, several larger lamps were used. These included a 3 1/2 inch, 4,000 candle power, sealed beam lamp; a five inch, 15,000 candle power, sealed beam lamp and a five inch, 60,000 candle power, sealed beam lamp. All lamps had a beam spread of less than 10 degrees, thereby providing a good spot light characteristic. The smaller 4,000 power lamp provided good results for ranges up to 200 yards when good atmospheric conditions existed. However, it was found inadequate when the visibility of the atmosphere dropped to less than 1/4 mile. The larger lamps operated successfully under these conditions. A qualitative measurement could not be made since varying degrees of visibility did not occur during the tests. �- 243 - The basic criterion for a light source was established as a result of the field tests, that is; the amount of light energy transmitted from the light source should be greater than the total energy from the background light as seen by the receiver. To have less light from the source reduces the signal to noise ratio below one and therefore increases the probability of false detections. When the diameter of the light source is increased the intensity of the source may be reduced so long as a reasonable source to background ratio is maintained. It should be noted that when the diameter of the source is increased then it will occupy a greater percentage of the field of view at the receiver causing an improved source to background ratio. For example, a 12 inch diameter white target, placed such that sun light was reflected from it, provided a suitable source at 100 yards range. The laser is an excellent energy source since the energy is concentrated at a point source in the spectrum. This allows the receiver to have a very selective filter, thereby improving the signal-to-noise ratio at the receiver. Additionally, lasers have a very narrow beam and high energy concentration in that beam. The cost of the laser is the principal limitation. It was estimated by TDS that this type of energy source would run in excess of $12,000.00 per mile and that this device would be difficult to operate and maintain in the intended environment. A laser suited for laboratory use was used for a short time during the light source evaluation period. This device had a beam divergence of one milliradian and an output power of one milliwatt in the visible red region. The spot diameter of the laser at 50 yards was approximately two inches. This range was the maximum that was found acceptable and it was concluded that greater ranges would require a larger power level and a smaller beam divergence. This same laser was used as a basis of estimating the cost of such a system. The laboratory model has a basic cost of $250.00. It was estimated that another $100.00 would be required to equip the unit for the field environment. Thus, the basic cost to span a 50 yard interval would be $350.00 or approximately $12,000.00 per mile. The expected life of the laser tube under consideration is 5~000 hours and therefore must be considered as a bas'kc maintenance cost for the system. The cost of the tube replacement for this laser .is $205.00. Consequently, further evaluation of this device was discontinued. A survey of other laser devices with better life beam divergence and power ratings resulted is similar economic limitations. The electro-optical receiver6which were used with the light sources described, were telescopic devices with a phot-conductive light cell and associated electronic amplifier. Four different telescopes were used. These units had magnifications of 10 to 90 and lens diameters of one inch to 4 1/4 inches. The best results, i.e., providing the greatest general use, was a telescope with an object lens of one inch and a focal length of 20 inches. The four telescopes that were used are listed below: �- 246 - IV. "ELECTRONIC SCARECROW" RESEARCH EFFORT A trip was made to the Department of Game, Fish and Parks facility in Fort Collins, Colorado to determine the feasibility of an "electronic scarecrow". Tests were made on two domesticated deer and three wild deer contained in the deer pens there. A cursory test was made to determine the upper limit of the hearing range of the deer. It was found that the deer indicated a response to a frequency of approximately 22 kHz. These tests were made by connecting an audio-generator to a high frequency audio coupler and power amplifier which emitted the sonic tone. The audio coupler (high frequency speakev was held within six inches of the ears of the tame deer and turned on momentarily thereby providing a short tone burst. When the tone was heard by the deer a reflex of the ear, head or eyes could be observed. At the higher frequency, from 18 kHz to 22 kHz, a reaction was observed, however, it was difficult to determine whether the animal was hearing the sound or feeling the sound pressure. The general conclusion was that a response was obtained up to 22 kHz and that the animal was hearing the sound up to approximately 18 kHz. Tests were attempted upon the wild animals with the speaker mounted on the fence. The speaker was romotely switched on when the animals were nearby. It was difficult to determine their hearing range because of their skittish behavior and the test was stopped. Experiments were conducted to determine the feasibility of an electronic scarecrow. These tests were run by setting up the light beam across the pen such that when a deer broke the near-infrared light beam a sonic pulse was generated. These tests were conducted in conjunction with the hearing response tests of the wild deer. Initially, the high frequency signals were used to determine whether the deer heard the signal and if they were scared by it. The reaction of the animals to this test was one of curiosity. After the test personnel were out of sight for a short time the animals approached the audio speaker. The first high frequency pulse, of about 20 kHz, occurred with the animals close to the sound source. The animals appeared to be momentarily startled with the pulse occurrance but, were not frightened away. Continued tests at other frequencies down to 6kHz provided similar negative results. At no time during the sound tests did the'tame or wild animals appear disturbed by continuous or pulsed sound signals. During the night hours tests were performed with a light source. An incandescent 100 watt bulb and a lantern spot light was used. The 100 watt bulb was connected to the detection system in place of the speaker so that a light flash was generated when a deer was detected. These tests as well as flashing and moving the lantern spot light around did not scare the animals. The only thing that scared the wild animals during the tests were the presence of humans. �- 247 - V. SUMMARY The results of the evalultion of detector techniques was generally negative. Only the electro-optical technique showed any promise. However, this technique is limited to clear nights and days of moderate to light surface heatings. Such things as blowing snow, rain or dust will also create false detections. The equipment can be operated when the visibility is reduced to 50% as long as the rate of change of visibility is slow. Normal daily weather changes do not cause any problem, but the abovementioned wind gusts can. Consequently, TDS cannot recommend these techniques for general all weather use. The electro-optical technique can be used on a limited basis. The problem of counting detections was successfully solved by using existing Streeter Amet Portable Counters. This counter has proven reliable and is reasonably priced. The feasibility pf an electronic scarecrow appears to be negative, since the animals are not disturbed by light or sound sources. , �� https://cpw.cvlcollections.org/files/original/e09198a17777b70a05f9c51f8a2bb98a.pdf 49e39c55d62eed682727011a54938dd2 PDF Text Text July, .1969 - 249 - JOB PROGRESS REPORT State of COLORADO Project No. W-10l-R-ll Work Plan No. 1 Job No. 1 Effects of Different Intensities of Simulated Browsing on Key Browse Species Job Title: Period Covered: Personnel: Game Range April 1, 1968 to March 31, 1969 Harold R. Shepherd .c ABSTRACT A final report based on two new data analyses is nearing completion and will b~ submitted for publication as a Technical Publication of the Colorado Division of Game, Fish and Parks. ��- 251 - EFFECTS SIMULATED OF DIFFERENT INTENSITIES OF BROWSING ON KEY BROWSE SPECIES Harold R. Shepherd P. S. OBJECTIVE To publish results of completed field work. SEGMENT 1. 2. 3. OBJECTIVES To complete the first draft of a final report on the study. To make any rev~s~ons in the manuscript an Editorial Committee may find necessary. To submit the corrected manuscript to a publisher for publication, making any changes required by the publisher and following through with editing and revision changes until publication of the final report has been accomplished. RESULTS AND DISCUSSION A re-appraisal of study results as indicated by statistical tests run prior to April 1, 1969 suggested the desirability of a new method of data organization and analysis. Consequently, data were checked for possible errors, reorganized, and subjected to two main new analyses: 1. 2. An analysis of variance for factorial design, testing the ratios of the me~ns for years over the base-year means; An analysis of variance of factorial experiments of yield data expressed as natural logarithms. The different data treatment required the remaking of most of the tables and graphs made for previous analyses and a reinterpretation of results. At this date the first draft of the f~nal report based on the latest analyses is nearly completed, including the Introduction, Description of Study Area, Methods, most of the Results Section, and Annotated Bibliography and all tables and figures prepared in final form. Upon completion of the Results, Discussion, arid Summary sections the first draft will be submitted for review and comment and a final draft prepared for publication as a Technical Publication of the Colorado Division of Game, Fish and Parks. Prepared by ~ 1 HRll/l i.Jt HarOld R. Shepherd Wildlife Researcher ��July~1969 - 253 - JOB PROGRESS REPORT State of C~O~L~O~ru~A=D~O~ Project No. W-10I-R-ll Work Plan No. 2 Job Title: Period Game Range Investigations Job No. 1 Little Hills Grazing Study Covered: Personnel: _ April 1, 1968 thru March 31, 1969. William T. McKean, Richard M. Bartmann, John F. Corey, Julius J. Klein, Donald E. Speers, Charles Bewley, Paul Reddin, George H. Bock, Gary Montgomery, Mark B. Frasier, Ronald E. Lambertson, and Eldie W. Mustard, S.C.S. Cooperator. ABSTRACT Field work completed during the segment consisted of: pasture stocking, making final readings of line transects and condition and trend transects, photos of transects and general views, and tours of the pastures (or adjoining Square S lands) for four groups comprising 175 people. Office work completed is reported under Sub-Job la following. This is the last segment report for Work Plan 2, Job 1. ��- 255 - LITTLE HILLS GRAZING STUDY William T. McKean and Richard M. Bartmann P. S. OBJECTIVE To determine how much cattle, sheep, and deer compete with each other for forage on a lightly, moderately, and heavily-grazed pinyon-juniper range, and to determine some of the effects of this competition on the range. SEGMENT VBJECTIVES 1. To continue determination of differences between, and within, pastures for each set of data, using comparisons and statistical tests best suited for the purpose. 2. To continue preparation of tables, graphs, charts, best suited to the presentation of these data. 3. To re-read 4. To continue stocking the pastures the need for further study. line transects established and illustrations in 1961 and in 1957-58. system only if the results indicate RESULTS AND DISCUSSION Progress Field Work Deer were removed from their pastures after the winter of 1967-68. Livestock were stocked in their pastures only during the spring of 1968. Canfield line transects were re-read during the summer of 1968 in all pastures and pasture exclosures, completing a ten-year span between first and final readings in the pastures (1958-1968) and a seven-year span between readings in the exclosures (1961-1968). Condition and trend transects were re-read in each pasture. These repeated similar recordings made in 1961 in the deer pastures and in 1963 in livestock pastures. Photos of the first three feet of each line transect were repeated and a number of general views were repeated to portray changes in vegetative c.onditions. �- 256 - The various groups to whom presentations were made during the segment concerning work at little Hills Station and adjoining state lands are as follows: 1. Representatives of White River National 1968, 10 people. 2. Colorado State University Wildlife Management structors, May 13-15, 1968, 47 people. 3. Meeker Elementary 48 people. 4. Colorado Section of American Society of Range~Management, September 6 and 7, 1968, 70 people. School students Forest, April 8 and 9, seniors and in- and instructors, June 14, 1968, Office Work See Sub-Job No. la following. Future Plans This is the last segment report for Work Plan 2, Job 1. As of this writing the plan is to submit manuscripts for publication in lieu of a final report. Prepared by 1r~ 7. ?!te/~ WilliamT. McKean Wildlife Researcher �July, 1969 - 257 - JOB PROGRESS REPORT State of COLORADO Project No. W-lOl-R-ll Work Plan No. 2 Game Range Investigations Job No. Job Title: Publications Period Covered: April 1, 1968 thru March 31, 1969 Personnel: la of Results of Little Hills Grazing Study William T. McKean, Richard M. Bartmann, Harold R. Shepherd, Bertram D. Baker, Harold M. Swope, Jack R. Grieb, Wayne W. Sandfort, Laurence E. Riordan, and David Bowden. ABSTRACT Further analysis on seven sets of data has been done and write-ups of results on three of these have been either completed or partially so. A rough draft outline of the proposed bulletin is completed and literature reviews of portions of the subject matter were made. Future plans call for completing the manuscript on at least one publication during Segment 12. Two papers were presented at conferences and two special papers prepared for incorporation in other Department publications and records. ��- 259 - PUBLICATION OF RESULTS OF LITTLE HILLS GRAZING STUDY William T. McKean and Richard M. Bartmann Po So OBJECTIVE To determine how much cattle, sheep, and deer compete with each other for forage on a lightly, moderately, and heavily-grazed pinyon-juniper range, and to determine some of the effects of this competition on the range. SEGMENT OBJECTIVE To continue to implement the production of a number of technical, semitechnical, and popular types of publications concerning results of the work done under Work Plan 2, Job 1, and to follow through to publication on a portion of these. RESULTS AND DISCUSSION 1. Literature reviews of livestock weight responses and livestock-deer relationships were made and were incorporated in part into a rough draft manuscri.pt discussed below. 2. A rough draft: outline of a proposed at hando 3. Canfield line transect data for 1968 have been surrrrnarized. The CoS.U. Computer Center is making an analysis of pasture differences between the years 1957, 1962, and 1968. Comparisons between exclosures and pastures are also being analyzed and written up for the years 1962 and 1968. 4. Conditi.on and trend survey type transect data have been summarized in tables and graphs and a WTite~up of results made into a first draft. 5. Tables and graphs depi.cting the results of all ocular estimates of utilization were prepared. These are separated into two periods (1950 to 1959 and 1960 to 1965) because differing techniques were used in the two periods. Rough draft notes of interpretations and results are comp1e.ted but need to be coordinated with stem length measurement results. Department technical bulletin is �- 260 - 6. Statistical analysis of key browse stem length data for production and utilization differences for the period 1952-1959 were completed by the C.S.D. Computer Center and preliminary interpretations made, but there remains the job of incorporation of this data into a unified whole with the ocular estimate results. 7. Revised as well 8. Vigor data pertaining to two herbaceous pasture species, Indian ricegrass (Oryzopsis Hymenoides) and low phlox (Phlox caespitosa) have been tabulated and graphs made indicating relationships between treatments. Statistical tests supporting the results and conclusions are at hand but need to be incorporated into the bulletin narrative. 9. Tables summarizing completed. 10. Citations for publications and other written materials Station personnel during the segment are as follows: tables and a graph of weight responses of livestock as a first draft narrative discussing results. results of stomach analysis of pasture are at hand deer are prepared by Bartmann, R. M. 1968. Results from an l8-year deer tagging program in northwestern Colorado. Proc. Western Assoc. Game and Fish Comm. Vol. 48:166-172. Bartmann, R. M. 1968. Mule deer migration at the Little Hills Game Experiment Station. Thirteenth Trans. Central Mtns. and Plains Sec., The Wildlife Society. 3 pp. McKean, W. T. 1968. Article about Little Hills Experiment Station. Game Research Review, 1967, featuring research installations, 4 pp. illus. McKean, W. T. 1968. Fencing for mule deer. Coordination Council, 1 p. Future Special report to Research Plans During Segment 12 at least one major publication will be completed special Department bulletin and, hopefully, several short articles Information Leaflets or others. Prepared by as a as Game :}1~'/[("-.'~t.J?.:r):-- '///c::/C;.:;z·" William T. McKean Wildlife Researcher �July, 1969 - 261 JOB PROGRESS REPORT COLORADO State of Project Work Plan No. Job No. 2 Job Title: Rodent Effects Period Covered: Personnel: Game Range Investigations W-10l-R-ll No. April 3 on Deer Winter Range 1, 1968 to March 31, 1969. Harold R. Shepherd ABSTRACT Work on a final report was deferred to permit completion of another writing assignment. The publication of a final report is scheduled March 31, 1970. for ��- 263 - RODENT EFFECTS ON DEER WINTER RANGE Harold R. Shepherd P. S. OBJECTIVE To complete the laboratory work on the food-habits study and publish results of the entire study. portion of the SEGMENT OBJECTIVES 1. 2. To prepare a final report presenting To publish results of the study. results of the study. RESULTS AND DISCUSSION The reassignment of the investigator and the consequent reassessment 'of work priorities resulted in scheduling which dictated that work on this writing assignment be delayed until the completion of another. Consequently, no further work on the above objectives was accomplished. Present plans call for completion and publication of a final report by March 31, 1970. Prepared by t/vu&Li2.1f,~ Harold R. Shepherd Wildlife Researcher ��July, 1969 - 265 - JOB- PROGRESS REPORT State COLORADO Project No~ W-10l-R-ll Work Plan No. 3 Job Title: Survey, Period Covered: Personnel: Inventory Game Range Investigations Job No. and Analysis 3 of Deer and Elk Winter Ranges April 1, 1968 to March 31, 1969. Bill Rutherford, LeRoy Carlson, and Bert Baker. Cooperating: Jack Arney, Jack Bean, Chuck Bentzen, Bill Brown, Jim Cruse, Will Dietzel, Wally Johnson, Ted LaMay, Jerry Martinez, Don Rogers, Ron Schulz, Paul Sebenik, and Paul Senteney, all of U.S. Forest Service; Paul Applegate, Bob Jacobsen, and Neil McCleery, U.S. Bureau of Land Management. ABSTRACT Maps and reports of big game winter range inventories of National Forest portions of Big Game Management Units 54 (Sapinero) and 63 (Smith Fork) were completed, bound, and distributed to appropriate Division Field Services and Game Planning Services offices. Job accomplishments for Unit 55 (Taylor River) included preparation of the following: ~-inch scale unit maps; map holders for binding two-inch scale township plat maps; and a final draft of the range inventory report. Crews composed of assistant rangers from Rio Grande National Forest Districts were trained and assisted in performance of fieldwork necessary to fill gaps left in previous surveys of Units 79 and 82. The office phase of Unit 22 winter range analysis consisted mainly of continued liaison with the BLM Craig District on type acreage computations by landownership ort twoinch scale vegetation type maps. The latter maps had been prepared on velum and had revisions made, in part, where township boundaries were found in error and/or ownership lines had been added. ��- 267 - SURVEY, INVENTORY AND ANALYSIS OF DEER AND ELK WINTER RANGES Bertram D. Baker The 1968-69 work year consisted mostly of continued officework on maps and reports of big game winter range field inventories that had been done previously in Big Game Management Units 22, 54, 55 and 63. Units 54 and 63 maps, reports, and allied data were prepared and distributed to the Division's Southwest Region and Denver Game Planning Services Offices. Additional preparation is continuing in the current segment to bring similar information for Units 22 and 55 to the distributive stage. Also in the 1968-69 segment, Rio Grande National Forest personnel were trained and assisted in performing fieldwork necessary to fill gaps left in earlier surveys of Units 79 and 82. An agreement was effected withithe Regional Office of the U.S. Forest Service in Denver to help finance production of final copy big game winter range township plat maps for both the Rio Grande and San Juan National Forests. P. S. OBJECTIVE To prepare inventories of big game winter range resources on the Grand Mesa-Uncompahgre, Gunnison, Rio Grande, and San Juan National Forests in southwestern Colorado and.Came :Unit 22 (Piceance Creek) in northwestern Colorado. SEGMENT OBJECTIVES 1. To prepare ~-inch scale big game winter range maps of Big Game Management Units 54 and 55 on Gunnison National Forest base maps. 2. To prepare vegetation type and land category acreage summaries of big game winter range on Gunnison National Forest lands in Units 54 and 55 and Division Sapinero Management Area lands in Unit 54. 3. To prepare winter 4. To bind two-inch scale maps in holders and ~-inch scale maps, summaries, and reports in binder file folders for Units 54, 55 and 63. 5. To distribute winter range inventory map holders and binder file folders for Units 54, 55 and 63 to the Division's Southwest Region and Denver Game Planning Services section. 6. To train and assist Rio Grande National Forest personnel in performance of big game winter range inventory fieldwork on portions of Units 79 and 82 omitted in previous surveys. range inventory reports for Units 54, 55 and 63. �- 268 - METHODS AND MATERIALS Interagency-approved big game winter range analysis instructions and supplementary techniques have been detailed by Denney (1962:51-96) and Baker (1964:90-92) in earlier Game Research Reports. Those procedures were followed in doing fieldwork on territorial gaps left in previous surveys of Unite 79 and 82. RESULTS AND DISCUSSION Map Preparation, Gunnison National Binding, and Distribution Forest Two-inch scale township plat maps for Units 54, 55 and 63 were assembled and bound in map holders. The maps had been proofed and vegetation types colored-in according to the interagency standard code in the 1968-69 work segment. Cover labels and index maps were made and attached to ~ach of the 21- by l8-inch hinged hardboard map holders. Each holder for the three units mentioned contain, respectively, 15, 13 and two township plats. Disposition of holders for Units 54 and 63 was as follows: two, plus one unbound map set, of each unit were given to the Southwest Region Division Office in Montrose; one went to the Division Game Planning Services Office in Denver; and one: holder was placed on file at the Fort Collins Research Center. Map holders for Unit 55 are being held pending review and reproduction of that unit's report of the winter range inventory. Following final approval of the latter, copies of the report and allied data will be bound in binder file folders. Then, both file folders and map holders will be distributed simultaneously, and in the same numbers and disposition as those for Units 54 and 63. Winter range and key area boundary lines shown on two-inch scale maps of Units 54 and 55 were transferred in red pencil to ~-inch scale Gunnison National Forest base maps. These maps, trimmed to 8~- by II-inch, or slightly larger, size sheets, also had unit boundaries, numbers, and names inked on them in black. A copy of the ~-inch scale unit map was placed in each binder file folder. The extent of territory covered by these joint surveys with the Gunnison National Forest is shown on Figure 1. From Figure 1 it also can be seen that much winter range still remains unexamined outside of the National Forest. Grand Mesa-Uncompahgre National No new work was accomplished Forest on maps for this forest. �- 269 - Rio Grande National Forest By formal agreement, Project lOl-R monies were made available to the Denver Regional Office of the U.s. Forest Service for production of two-inch scale township plat maps for both the Rio Grande and San Juan National Forests. Since the Forest Service generally prefers to handle map-jobs separately by National Forest, and crews will still be actively gathering information in 1969 for areas omitted in prior field campaigns, the Rio Grand National Forest will be the last for which big game range inventory maps will become available. San Juan National Forest Fifty-two, two-inch scale township plat maps are being processed for printing by the Forest Service. Map production was and is being expedited, in part, through project finances allocated to the Forest Service by the contract agreement discussed previously under the heading for the Rio Grande National Forest. White River Resource Area - Bureau of Land Management Cooperative winter range inventory officework for Unit 22 was continued with BLM Craig District personnel. Activity was largely in the form of consultations on carrying two-inch scale maps to completion, results of transecting, and possible interim uses of inventory results pending availability of maps and a summary report for Unit 22. Winter range inventory vegetation type maps in two-inch scale are being processed for Unit 22 in three parts. The map part that includes the area between Piceance Creek, State Highway No. 64, and State Highway No. 13, known also as the Little Hills Triangle, is complete. Most recent work on the map, in 1967, involved correcting boundary lines of one township and recomputing vegetation type acreages by section for the sections that needed adjustment. The two map parts that concern territory south of State Highway No. 64 and west and south of Piceance Creek had type acreages computed but erroneously and Iruc omp Le t.eLy so. Thus, Wildlife Management Biologist Bob Jacobsen started recently and is now working to bring property boundaries and type acreages by landownership and section up-to-date on the velum master copies •. Data Reproduction, Gunnison National Compilation, and Analysis Forest Vegetation type and land category acreages of National Forest winter ranges were compiled and summarized in table form for Units 54 and 55. The tables are included in winter range inventory final reports that are presented as APPENDIXES A and B of this report. A table of similar content had been made in the 1967-68 segment for Unit 63; it is part of the Unit 63 report which is given herein as APPENDIX C. �- 270 - Copies of winter range inventory reports mentioned previously for Units 54 and 63 were accompanied by transect record forms and summaries, ~-inch scale maps, and allied data in each of five binder file folders for those two units. The Division's Southwest Regional Office was given three folders for each unit, Denver Game Planning Services section one folder, and one folder was filed at the Fort Collins Research Center. That action was simultaneous with the transfer of map holders already disc.ussed in this report. The Unit 55 winter range inventory report is, at this writing, being circulated for final approval. Following any nee.ded changes, it will be reproduced, bound, and distributed in the same manner that the reports for Units 54 and 63 were handled. Transfer of map holders containing final issue twoinch scale maps will be effected at the same time Unit 55 folders are distributed. Grand Mesa-Uncompahgre National Fore.st Nothing more has been accomplished on data reproduction, analysis for this forest's winter range inventory. Rio Grande National compilation, and Forest No further testing has been done on previously determined significant results of analysis of variance computations of Unit 76 pellet group count transects. Hopefully, this will be completed and incorporated in the report for that unit this year. San Juan National Forest Vegetation type and land category acreage compilations are impossible to accomplish for game unit winter ranges on both the San Juan and Rio Grande National Forests pending availability of final-copy two-inch scale maps for basic references. Production of those maps has been discussed in earlier paragraphs of this report. White River Resource Area - Bureau of Land Management Except for mapwork mentioned before, no other work has been accomplished to further process data for Game Unit 22. �~< I ,'''' .~ •• l \ 1 -. BLACK CANYON OF . THE GUNNISON ~ NATIONAL •'1 • MONUMENT • Q~ 'ly0.\1 01- TOWNS ROADS CONTOURS STREAMS LAKES Figure LEGEND COUNTY BDRY: -- - - - - - - .FEDERAL LANDS ___'0000- :SCALE o ---- @ 1.--Extent SDRY. .GAME MGMT. UNIT SDRY. WINTER RANGE INVENTORIED 1:500.000 - - of big game winter ranges inventoried L. Carlson March,I969 cooperatively with the Gunnison National Forest, 1962. �- 272 - COOPERATIVE Rio Grande National BIG GAME WINTER RANGE FIELD INVENTORY Forest In 1967, winter range inventory fieldwork was done on a portion of Unit 79 that had been omitted in earlier surveys (Baker 1968:196-197). That fillin activity was possible because final drafting of two-inch scale maps for the forest was being delayed and student assistant help was available for two weeks to insure a worthwhile effort. Further mapwork delays in 1968 presented the opportunity to continue trying to fill inventory gaps. Thus, in May of 1968, Forest Service Region Two Wildlife Management Biologist, Jim Cruse and I trained and started a crew of assistant district rangers analyzing winter ranges where Student Assistants Bullock and Carlson and I had quit in 1967 (Baker OPe cit.). In addition to the spring fieldwork, Alamosa District Assistant Ranger Chuck Bentzen, Jim Cruse, Division Wildlife Researcher Bill Rutherford, and I type mapped and ran transects on winter range in October in Unit 82. We covered previously uninventoried territory east of the Sand Dunes National Monument from Little Medano Creek on the north to about Horse Canyon on the south. Fieldwork that was accomplished in 1968 in Units 79 and 82 did not complete what was needed; however, the Rio Grande National Forest was obligated to cqrry to completion as much as possible in 1968 and 1969. Despite possible inventory inadequacies that might exist at the end of 1969, all maps of this forest's big game winter range will then be started towards final printing. LITERATURE CITED Baker, B. D. 1964. Browse transect analysis and application, p. 90-92. In Game Res. Rept., January. Colo. Dept. Game, Fish and Parks. _______ . 1968. Browse transect analysis and application, p. 191-208. In Game Res. Rept., July. Colo. Div. of Game, Fish and Parks. Denney, R. N. 1962. Browse transect analysis and application, p. 51-96. In Game Res. Rept., April. Colo. Dept. Game, Fish and Parks. Prepared by Bertram D. Baker Asst. Wildlife Reseracher �- 273 - APPENDIX BIG GAME WINTER A RANGE ANALYSIS GAME UNIT 54 - SAPINERO BertratllD. Baker INTRODUCTION Presented in this report is a de.scription of Big Game Management Unit 54 and a review of an inventory of Unit 54 deer and elk winter range that was done principally within boundaries of the Gunnison National Forest. Also inventoried in this effort was Township 49 North, Range 3 West, New Mexico Principal Meridian between u.S. Highway No. 50 and the National Forest boundary. This area approximates Division and Federal land holdings called the Sapinero Management Area. Fieldwork was ac.c.omplished in the summer of 1962 by a joint Forest ServiceDivision crew headed by Gunnison National Forest Range Analyst Jack McCrain. With Jack on the crew were Division summer employees Dave Stearns and Gary Brown. Map production was done mainly by Region 2 Forest Service Engineers. Considerable map proofing and type acreage recomputations and tallying was done by the author and Range Analysts Wendell Turner and Harley Orahood, who suc ceaded Mr. McCrain. Fishery Management Biologist Bill Brown, presently assigned to the Gunnison National Forest Range and Wildlife Staff, has been very helpful in supplying and updating maps. DESCRIPTION OF UNIT .Location _.- Except for a very small triangular piece of land in eastern Montrose County, Game Unit 54 is located almost entirely in Gunnison County. Acc;ording to Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department Laws and Regulations Handbook, 1965 (p. 9, Chap. 3··Big Game), boundaries of Unit 54 are as follows: "That p o:•... tion of Montrose County northeast of the Gunnison Ri.ve r and southeast of t.he divide between Crystal Creek and Mesa Creek; that portion of Gunnison County north of the Gunnison Ri'ver from the MontroseGun ison County line to its i.ntersection with U.S. Highway No. 59, north of U.S. Highway No. 50 to the town of CurmI.aon , west of State Highway No.135<i from the town of Gunnison to the divide be tween.S'Late Creek and the East River, west of said divide, south of the divide between the Crystal River and the East River~ east of the Curec.anti-Crystal Creek divide and the Cur ec.ant.Le-Dye'r Fork Creeks ~ and south and east of the West Elk Mountain." The desirability of having boundaries of Game Units 53 and 63 revised is discussed in reports for those units. Units 53 and 63 adjoin Unit 54 on its north and west sides~ thus automatically involving Unit 54 in possible future bounde.ry alterations. Al so , a comparison of Unit 54 and 55 boundary de scr Iptions ~ceveals that the common boundary between them does not coincide in the Slate. Creek~East River vic.inity. Some change s have apparently been made in Uni.t:54· boundaries without corresponding changes in adj cining units. �- 274 - Now, in order to help establish and maintain continuity in reports and mapwork, the following boundary resolving descriptions will prevail: (1) to separate, in part, Units 63 and 54, Mesa Creek from its beginning on the Crysta1-Curecanti Creeks divide to its confluence with the Gunnison River rather than the Crystal-Mesa Creeks divide, and (2) the Slate Creek-East River divide to separate, in part, Units 54 and 55. A planimeter was used on a %-inch scale map to determine 690.8 square miles, or 442,112 acres, in Unit 54. there are about Physical features -- Topography of Unit 54 is dominated by rough, mountainous terrain of the West Elk Mountains that top out at the unit's north edge. Long ridges and mesas stand out between the many southward flowing tributary streams of the Gunnison River and Blue Mesa Reservoir. Beginning at the west and going eastward in order are Curecanti, Soap, West Elk, Red, East Elk, Antelope, and Ohio Creeks, and East River as principal tributary watercourses. Ohio Creek and East River meander and are gentle in fall over most of their existence. They support good-sized acreages of irrigated hay and pasture land, whereas the other streams generally have narrow valleys with gradient sloping too rapidly for much irrigated agriculture. The lowest elevation in Unit 54 is about 6,800 feet at the confluence of Mesa Creek and the Gunnison River north of Cimmaron. Highest elevations are reached on Mt. Owen west of Crested Butte, and West Elk Peak, which are 13,102 and 13,035 feet, respectively. There are many mountains over 12,000 feet high, and more than 75 percent of the unit is estimated to be above 9,000 feet in elevation. The westernmost portion of Blue Mesa Reservoir lying north of U.S. Highway No. 50 is in Unit 54 according to the present interpretation of the boundary description. Blue Mesa Reservoir is the only sizable lake or reservoir, or portion thereof, ~resent in the Unit. Industry -- Production and sale of livestock and livestock products comprise the leading agricultural industry in Gunnison County. Cattle ranching operations in the Ohio Creek, East River, and Gunnison River Valleys:-provide the bulk of livestock production. Mineral income was less than livestock income in 1960, with coal being the leading mineral. Zinc, sand and gravel, and lead production followed coal in that order, respectively (Colo. State Planning Division 1961). Upper Ohio Creek mines supply most of the coal that is produced in the unit. Lumbering and ready-cut to the local economy. log manufacturing also are substantial contributors Gunnison, Gunnison County's largest city and county seat, is the point where boundaries of Units 54, 55 and 67 meet. The city had a population of 3,477 people in 1960, which was about 63.5% of the total county population. Be-: cause of the growth of state-supported Western State College, increased tourism due to recreation developments at newly created Blue Mesa Reservoir, and winter sports area developments near Crested Butte, Gunnison has been showing steady gain in wealth and population since 1960. Not to be overlooked is the city's importance as a trading and cultural center for a large area (Colo. State Planning Division 1961). �- 275 - Crested Butte, with a 1960 population of 289, is the only other incorporated town within Unit 5q·. It is best known now for nearby ski resorts (which actually are in Game Unit 55) and for the summer-held Law-Science Academy of America; the latter was attended by some 500 people in 1961 (Colo. State Planning Division 1961). LIMITS OF AVERAGE WINTER RANGE The upper limit of deer and elk winter range varies between 7,800 feet at Cow Creek to 10,000 feet on both upper Oregon Gulch and the southernmost point on Flat Top. Also, this upper limit of winter range is estimated to average somewhere between 8~400 and 9,400 feet elevation. Exposure, slope gradient, and vegetation type and interspersion influence the location of the upper 1imi t. Generally speaking~ the upper limit line of big game winter range in Unit 54 was established by elk. Essentially, thi.s occurred because elk dominate in the wintering zone by (1) possessing better ability than deer to cope with deep snow cover and (2) the interrelated factors of good abundance and wide distribution over coinhabited territory. Furthermore~ the upper boundary of winter range was established to average terrain irregularities such as long ridges having alternating deep-snow in heavy timber cover, and warmer, light-snow exposures. A deep scalloping effect was thus minimized through the technique of "averaging". Nowhere within Unit 54 does the lower limit line enter the Gunnison Forest. National BIG GAME MOVEMENTS Elk -- According to Boyd and Coghill (1967)~ elk have been tagged and/or neckbanded at the Sapinero Management Area since 1957. Tag returns have been obtained from 41 marked wlk that were killed by hunters in open seasons through 1966 (Boyd, personal files). These returns indicate that elk move from high summer-fall ranges in Units 53 and 54 to wintering grounds of the Management Area in Unit 54·and vice versa. Twenty-four airline miles is the greatest tagging-to-reeovery distance that "JaS recorded for an elk within this pattern of movement. Notable exceptions to aforementioned "normal" movem~ntswere elk killed about 53 miles north-northeast on East Sopris Creek and 45 miles south-southeast on Stewart Peak (Boyd and Coghill 1967). Unusual, too, were the c.ow and two 4-5 point bulls that were killed north and east of Almont (Boyd 1965). Banded-elk si.ghtings also were common within 24 miles north and northwest of places of tagging. Odd sightings LncLuded one on Dyer Creek in Unit 63, October 21, 1965, and two on Cottonwood C:r'eekwest of Buena Vista in the spring of 1966 (Boyd, personal files). �- 276 - Deer -- A total of 126 deer have been tagged and/or neck-banded in the main Gunnison River area since 1947. Thirty recoveries (26 returns and four recaptures) of tagged deer from the 126 marked indicate that deer in Unit 54 generally return to winter in the same localities where tagged. They also tend to travel comparatively short diatances to summer, usually up and down drainage-ways. Erratic behavior has been noticed in yearling males in that they contributed the longest recovery distances recorded so far. Three bucks traveled 13, 22 and 26 airline mi~es in one year, respectively, from points of tagging (Gilbert, et a1. 1955). No tag recoveries of Unit 54 deer have been obtained south of the Gunnison River and Blue Mesa Reservoir. This would tend to show that there has been no interchange of deer between Units 54, 66 and 67. Very likely there will be very: little or none in the future with the Reservoir nearing full capacity. KEY AREAS An attempt was made at the start of fieldwork in Unit 54 to standardize the naming of key areas. Our alternative'S were to either give titles to areas between drainage divides or between stream courses. Somewhere along the line, confusion crept into the picture, and both procedures were employed. This is evident on the final two-inch scale township plat maps. Despite admitted inconsistencies in the system of key area nomenclature and delineation, the following paragraphs present key areas that have been designated on two-inch scale township and ~-inch scale unit maps accompanying this report. Flat Top key area --All key winter east and Ohio Creek on the west. range between the Gunnison Steuben Creek key area -- All key winter range between Antelope the east and the Main Creek-Steuben Creek divide on the west. River on the Creek on Willow Creek key area -- All Gunnison National Forest key winter range between the Main Creek-Steuben Creek divide on the east and the Willow Creek-East Elk Creek divide on the west. East Elk key area -- All Gunnison National the Willow Creek-East Elk Creek divide. Forest key winter range west of Dry Creek key area -- All key winter range off the Gunnison National between Willow Creek on the east and East Elk Creek on the west. Forest Dry Gulch key area --All key winter range off the Gunnison National between East Elk Creek on the east and Red Creek on the west. Forest Red Creek key area -- All key winter range between Red Creek on the east and the Red Creek-West Elk Creek divide on the west. Dillon Mesa key area -- Disregard this key area on Township West, N.M.P.M. map of the two-inch scale series in holder. 49 North, Range 4 �- 277 - West Elk key area -- All Gunnison National Forest key winter range between the Red Creek-West Elk Creek divide on the east and the Coal Creek-West Elk Creek divide on the west. Soal? Creek key area ._-All Gunnison National Forest key winter range west of the Coal Creek-West-Elk Creek divide within the Soap Creek drainage. Key area limit: lines that are shown on maps \'.orrespondwith the winter range lines where they tie together on the !z;-inchseale map or parallel each other at about !z;-inc.h interval on the two-inch seale maps. A greater divergence than one-fourth inch on the latter means a significant change of intensity of big game use. LANDOWNERSHIP Unit 54 -- By using a planimeter on the !Z;-inchscale unit map to determine acreage, it was found that about 67% (464.3 sq. mi. of a total of 690.8 sq. mi.) of Unit 54 lies within boundaries of the Gunnison National Forest. Even if the 67% is reduc.ed about three percent for private mining~ grazing, and other patents existing inside Forest boundaries, the resulting 64% still makes the U.S. Forest Servic.e the major landowner in Unit 54. Providing that the Gunnison County landownership summary (Colo. State Planning Division 1961) is acceptable as an indicator of landownership in Unit 54, private tax-roll landholdings outside the National Forest comprise the second largest ownership category. U.S. Department of Interior lands in the parties of the Bureau of Land Management and Park Service are third in extent; Division lands in the Sapinero Management Area rank them fourth; and State ,S,~hool land and miscellaneous local and Federal government helaings provide remaining minor land acreages in the unit. UI1:it 54 Hinter range -- Unit 54 landownership acreages are not available or practicable to obtain, but some idea of the landownership status of the winter range can be drawn by inference. For example, Table 2 shows that Unit 54 contains only 28,000 acres of National Forest winter range. On the other hand, Table I shows nearly 109000 acres of Public Domain winter range i.n one township. Allowing for the fact that this single township might have more than an average a ount of Public Domain, and by checking Jz-inch scale BLM land s t atus maps, it is apparent that B1M controls most of the winte:;:range in Un Lt; 54. Ownership in pL'i.v,;:tte patents is ne.arly equal to Public Domain, ranking private landholdings second. The third and fourth most extensive winter range holdings beLong to the Gunni.son National Forest and Division of Game, Fish and Parks, respectively. �- 278 - Table 1 - Vegetation type and land category acreage summary, big game winter range in T. 49 N. 3 W., N.M.P.M. (Area approx±mating Sapinero Management Area'f~,Colo. Div. Game, Fish and Parks): - Game Unit 54. Type of Land Category G.F. & Pks. Division Bur. of Land Mgmt. Bur. of Reel. Total 83 361 0 444 5,658 10 535 16 806 8,291 42 ,-,638 27 619 159 0 0 0 7 14,108 52 1,172 43 1,432 7,108'''' 9,978 166 17,252 l-Grassland 4-Sagebrush or Rabbitbrush 5-Browse 6-Conifer 8-Barren (Rock) 10-Broad-leaf tree Totals 'f~Acreage listed as 7,129.90 Dept. , 1968. A., "The Fact Finder", Colo. Game, Fish Table 2 - Vegetation type and land category acreage summary, range within Gunnison National Forest and Game Unit 54. Type of Land Category 1 - Grassland 4 - Sagebrush or Rabbitbrush 5 - Browse 6 - Conifer 8 - Barren (Rock) 9 - Pinyon-juniper 10 - Broad-leaf trees Cultivated TOTAL USABLE Water (Blue Mesa Reservoir) Unusable (Exposure, other) TOTAL WINTER ZONE National Forest 111 11,321 1,705 8,994 453 262 4,434 6 27,286 135 205 27,626 & Parks big game winter Acreage Private Total 0 2,023 219 117 0 0 180 340 2,879 0 32 2,911 111 13,344 1,924 9,111 453 262 4,614 346 30,165 135 237 30,537 Bureau of Reclamation landownership acreages given in Table 1 probably should more accurately be allocated to the Park Service, since the latter was given jurisdiction over lands adjacent to Blue Mesa Reservoir for recreation. Credit to the Bureau of Reclamation is made in Table 1 as a consequence of the transferal by sale from the Division's Sapinero Management Area holdings. �- 279 - VEGETATION TYPES The. Lnven cory and surmnarization of Unit 54 game winter range are fragmentary. As a r'esu.Lt , the survey has p-roduced information corresponding with the following two area s and allied general situations: (1) the township contain-ing the Sapine.<.oManageme.nt Area which is fait'ly typical of the lower and middle strata of the ~entral portion of the winter zone, and (2) all National For.est: wi.nt.er' range that corresponds generally (except for an interruption at Ohio Creek) wit.h the upper fringe of the winter zone. Therefore, information that is given in following paragraphs for vegetation type headings will have unit~wide application, whereas cormnents under subheadings will pretty much be r'estr Lct ed to that specific situation. Sagebrush tYEe =- Sagebxush (Type 4) provides the most acreage of Unit 54 vegetation types. Importanc.e of this ve:l!:y valuable vegetation can not be overemphasized. It supported the large deer populations of the 1940's and 1950!s and is still capable of supporting sizable numbers of animals. However, carrying cap acLt.y of the sagebrush is very deceptive; first, because the sage plants: are low in average he.ight, they may frequently be covered with snow; and secondly, the Gunnison Basin c.haracteristically has persistently low, debilitating winter temperatures. Either or both factors may contribute to poor deer winter survival. Brush control programs of ranchers and Federal agencies have reduced the amount of forage for wild ungulates. Creation of Blue Mesa Reservoir also eliminated areas of sagebrush and stream bot.tom types used by big game in winter. Despite these reductions in the food supply, I believe that aforementioned winter climatic factors are more important to the number of animals Unit 54 can sustain. Big sagebrush (Artemisia tridentata) is by far the most abundant plant in the vegetation type. Black sagebrush (I:=,. nova) and silver sagebrush (I:=,. (.:.ana.) oc.casionally OCGur mixed with big sabebrush. Black sagebrush is usually found on the dr Ler ridgetop si.tes. Silver sage.brush prefers moister bottomland and/or deep soil developments. To simplify matters~ all three specLes were. lumped togethe.r under big sagebzush , since no apparent differences have been verified relative to values for big game. Found almost universally but variously abundant with sagebrush is'.Douglas r-abbLt.brush (Chr"lsothamnu.sviscidiflorus) The plant is of shorter, stature than sageb rush but produces voluminous annual growth and is a highly pr-eferred winter and spring big game food. 0 1. SapineTo Management Area: Eleven sagebrush types are recorded on the area, including one listing big sagebrush in the type designation by itself. Oakbrush (Q:uer(~ussp ,) occur-s abundantly with sagebrush in Type 4 associations, generally in interrupted clumpy or patc.hy form. Of over 14~000 acres of sagebrush on the Sapinero Manage.ment Area (Table 1), some 7,500 acres have oakbrush as a codominant plant (APPENDIX, p. 1). Oakbrush greatly anhance s the value of sagebrush as winter range (1) by providing available forage through Lar-ger growth form, when snow is deep, and (2) by adding a moderately desi.rable item in the diet to dilute and/or complement sagebrusho �- 280 - It should be noted that oakbrush distribution ends at about Willow Creek. Oakbrush is susceptible to frost damage, and it seems logical to assume that elevation and interrelated factors of climate and soil very likely prohibit oakbrush establishment farther east in Unit 54. Douglas rahbitblrush, antelope bitterbrush (Purshia tridentata), serviceberry (Amelanchier sp.), and true mountain mahogany (Cercocarpusmontanus) follow oakbrush, in that approximate order, as the most important codominant shrub species in Management Area sagebrush types. The latter two plants are not abundant. Douglas fir (Pseudotsuga menziesii) is listed as a type species in one sagebrush type. Indian ricegrass (Oryzopsis hymenoides) and needlegrasses (Stipa spp.) are given type species designation as subdominants in one type each. 2. Gunnison National Forest: In comparison with the Sapinero Management Area, there are fewer (seven) sagebrush types on this higher elevational National Forest winter range (APPENDIX, p. 2). Also, the proportion of sagebrush acreage is lower in that there are about 13,300 acres of sagebrush in some 30,000 total acres of winter range (Table 2). Douglas rabbitb~sh has codominant status with big sagebrush on about 6,250~ acres of the 13,300 acres of sagebrush. Antelope bitterbrush, oakbrush, and snowberry (Syrnphoricarpos sp.) occur less frequently in sagebrush types •. As might be expected here, Douglas fir is fairly abundant and frequently found associated with big sagebrush. Type combinations of the latter two plants total about 1,055 acres (APPENDIX, p. 2). Conifer type -- Conifer Type (or Type 6) acreages are either the second or third most extensive type (Tables 1 and 2). The principal dominant species is Douglas fir. Much less in abundance are Engelmann spruce (Picea engelmanni) and blue spruce (f. pungens). Aspen (Populus tremuloides), a broad-leaf tree, is widely distributed and frequently associated with the conifers which are generally located on north and east exposures. The principal value of the coniferous vegetation is cover, and, where it was apparent by field reconnaissance that specific types served that purpose, the "e" of "(C)" was added to the type designation (APPENDIX, pp. 1,2). Many stands are open enough, however, to support understories of browse. Those occurrences will be discussed in following paragraphs. 1. Sapinero Management Area: Here the Conifer Type is represented by 1,173 acres, making it the third most extensive vegetative cover. Douglas fir is the only coniferous species given in type designations. Aspen is mentioned as a codominant for 48 ac.res. Big sagebrush occurs as understory browse on 552 acres and is the only shrub recognized in Type 6 designations (APPENDIX, p. 1). Other browse species such as oakbrush and snowberry, however, were recorded as being associated with the conifers (see accompanying Browse Condition Transect Summary). The Conifer Type generally is most valuable for cover here, as it is elsewhere in the unit. Nevertheless, where browse is present, it greatly enhances the value of the standing timber and vice versa by the close association of food and cover. �- 281 - 2. Gunnison National Forest: The total acreage of the Conifer Type on National Forest lands (9,111 A.) makes it the second most extensive type (Table 2). The primary factor responsible for this occurrence is the better moisture conditions that prevail in the higher elevations of the Forest. Douglas fir is the most abundant and widely distributed conifer. Lesser species are Englemann and blue spruce. Aspen is fairly abundant in the coniferous associations. As on tha Management Area, big sa~ebrush is the most common shrub. Other less abundant subdominant prowse species are oakbrush and serviceberry (APPENDIX, p. 2). Broad-leaf tree type -- Again, depending upon which situation is under consideration, the Broad-leaf Tree Type (Type 10) is either the second or third most extensive vegetatnve cover. It is represented mainly by aspen in nearly pure stands, or mixtures of aspen and Douglas fir. Found in limited distribution in stream bottom associationsis narrowleaf cottonwood (Populus angustifolia). Understory shrub and herbaceous species also occur with the broad-leaf trees. 1. Sapinero Management Area: The Broad-leaf Tree Type ranks second in acreage of vegetative cover, providing about 1,400 acres on the Management Area (Table 1). Except for a very small portion of the type acreage that has cottonwood and/or Douglas fir as codominant species with aspen, aspen is the most abundant and dominating tree species present. Aspen twigs and bark are important winter foods for elk; and, where Douglas fir is associated in fair abundance, aspen provides excellent winter cover. Aspen for winter cover declines in value as the abundance of conifers declines in mixed stands. Where aspen stands completely lack conifers and exhibit poor vigor and development, as they do on many Management Area sites, theri total worth is questionable. Those places might be improved by improvement cutting to encourage the browse species. Snowberrys are the only shrub species th.at share type designation billing with aspen, but this type covers a substantial acreage. Species of bluegrasses (~ spp.) are the only herbaceous plants listed in type designations (APPENDIX, p. 1). 2. Gunnison National Forest -- The Broad-leaf Tree Type ranks third in extent on the National Forest winter range (Table 2). Of over 4,600 acres of Type 10 about 2,000 acres are in type 10-A (APPENDIX, p. 2). In most aspen stands there are, generally speaking, mixtures of several grasses and forbs present. So, the only explanation for the dearth of herbaceous species recorded for such a large acreage is that lack of time prevented more thorough examination of the aspen communities. Douglas fir occurs as a codominant overs tory species in about one fourth of the Type 10 acreage. Willows (Salix spp.), snowberry, and big sagebrush are subdominant shrubby plants on minor acreages. Mountain peavine (Lathyrus montanus) is listed as a herbaceous subdominant for over 1,000 acres of aspen cover. �- 282 - Browse type -- The Browse Type (Type 5) has comparatively small acreage in Unit 54, particularly on the Sapinero Management Area (Tables 1, 2). Except for very minor amounts of willows along stream courses, oakbrush singularly dominates this vegetation type (APPENDIX, pp. 1, 2). Big sagebrush is given codominant status in all oakbrush containing Browse Types. For additional discussion on these oakbrush-sagebrush associations, see previous paragraphs on the Sageb~ush Type. I. Sapinero Management Area: There are only 52 acres of Type 5 here. Represented by 5-QUE-Artr, the type blocks are located immediately northwest of the mouth of Dry Creek and probably represent the most eastern distribution of oakbrush in Unit 54. 2. Gunnison National Forest: There are 2,000 plus acres of Type 5 on Forest lands (Table 2). This acreage puts the Browse Type in fourth position and strongly ahead of the remaining vegetation types discussed in the following paragraph. Other Types -- Of remal.nl.ngusable range that was recorded in the inventory, there are variable minor amounts of Type 1 or Grassland, Type 8 or Barren (here as Rock), Type 9 or Pinyon-Juniper (Here as Type 9-Juniper), and the Cultivated Type which is composed almost entirely of native hay (land). Needle and thread (Stipa comata), other needlegrasses, bluegrasses, dandelion (Taraxacum spp.), fescues (Festuca spp.), and fringed sagebrush (Artemisia frigida), are given type designation status in the Grassland Type. Big sagebrush and antelope bitterbrush are found in Type 9 acreages with the typedesignate Rocky Mountain juniper (Juniperus sCQPulo'rum) Rocky outcrops and slopes, mostly devoid of vegetation, are quite COULmon and provide a fairly substantial 453 acres on National Forest winter range (Table 2). 0 Ri~,NGETRANSECTS Browse range condition transects -- Fifty-five brmiise ra.nge condition transects were read in Unit 54. Copies of th,e transect records, and a s'mmary of these, accompany this report in the binder file folder. Repeat future readings of transects, and comparison of results between years, "rill hopefully yield vegetation trend information for types in which transects are located. Some appropriate general findings can be reported at this time. For example, of 55 transects read, big sagebrush is used as a key species on 54 of them, either singly or in combinations with other browse species. This fact reemphasizes the already discussed great importance of sagebrush for deer in this area. Antelope bitt rbrush rates a fairly strong second in importance, based upon the frequency of use as a key species on transects. Considerably behind big sagebrush and bitterbrush in importance a.re oakbrush, true mountain mahogany 9 Douglas rabbi t bru sh, and serviceberry. Further generalizing ~ low ratings for br-owse composition prevail in 34 of the 54 transects, indicating a lack of highly desirable species in the shrub mixtures. Browse density ratings a.re mostly in the medium class, ranging between 16 and 35 percent on 4.3 transects. �- 283 - In the category of browse vigor, 23 low ratings were found. This information could be misleading, however, in attempting to assess the cause. Ten of the low ratings were set by the age structu~e of the key species through plant decadence. This decadence might be due to a residual effect from old range abuses or have been caused by other agents such as diseases and insects. Heavy recent hedging (possibly attributable to use by big game) was the sole low rating determinant on four transects. Twenty-seven transects were rated medium and five high in vigor. This indicates that browse vigor is below optimum but not discouragingly so. The author feels that deer populations generally have been maintained within carrying capacities in recent years. LITERATURE CITED Boyd, R. J. 1965. Experimental trapping and marking techniques. In Game Res. Rept., Colo. Game, Fish and Parks Dept., July. pp. 251-267: Boyd. R. J., and M. C. Coghill. 1967. Experimental trapping and marking techniques. In Game Res. Rept., Colo. Game, Fish and Parks Dept., July. pp. 73-96. Colorado State Planning Division. State of Colorado. 916 pp. 1961. Colorado 1959-61, Yearbook of the Gilbert, P. F., B. D. Baker, R. L. Campbell, and H. R. Shepherd. 1955. Migration between summer and winter ranges. In Quarterly Progress Rept., Colo. Game, Fish and Parks Dept., July. pp. 199-211. September 1968 Fort Collins �- 284 - APPENDIX B BIG GAME WINTER RANGE ANALYSIS GAME UNIT 55 - TAYLOR RIVER Bertram D. Baker INTRODUCTION Like preceding reports on Game Units 53,.54, and 63 big game winter range inventories for the Gunnison National Forest, the following account will present a description of Game Unit 55 and a review of a survey of deer and elk winter ranges of the unit inside Forest boundaries. Field data were collected in the summer of 1962 by Gunnison National Forest Range Analyst Jack McCrain, and Game, Fish and Parks Division seasonal employees Dave Stearns and Gary Brown. Map production was accomplished mainly by U. S. Forest Service Region 2 engineers in Denver. Considerable map proofing and type acreage recomputations and tallying were done by the author and Range Analysts Wendell Turner and Harley Orahood, who succeed Mr. McCrain. Assistance in supplying and updating maps by Fishery Management Biologist Bill Brown, presently assigned to the Gunnison National Forest Range and Wildlife Staff, is gratefully acknowledged. DESCRIPTION OF UNIT Location -- Almost all of Game Unit 55 lies within and at the eastern end of Gunnison County. There is a very small parcel of about 10-15 square miles of Unit 55 located in northern Saguache County near Sargents. It is equivalent to that portion of Saguache County north of U. S. Highway No. 50. Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department Laws and Regulations Handbook, 1965 (p. 9, Chap. 3-Big Game) gives the boundaries of Unit 55 as follows: "That portion of Gunnison County north of Uo S. Highway No. 50 from the town of Gunnison to the Gunnison-Chaffee County line, east of State Highway No. 135 from the town of Gunnison to its intersection with State Highway No. 327, and east of State Highway No. 327 to Schofield Pass; that portion of Saguache County north of U. S. Highway No. 50." Preceding Unit 55 boundaries are incorrect where they concern State Highway No. 327$ since the latter is nonexistent. This error was temporarily resolved in the Unit 54 Big Game Winter Range Report (Baker 1968) with the statement "the Slate Creek-East River divide" will separate, in part, Units 54 and 55. �- 285 - In addition to the "State Highway No. 327" mistake, the legal description leaves a portion of Unit 55 boundaries, it is recommended that the unit perimeter be described as follows: "North of U. S. Highway No. 50 from the Gunnison-Chaffee County line to State Highway No. 135; east of State Highway No. 135 from Uo S. Highway No. 50 to its interception of the East River; east of the East River to the summit of Schofield Pass; south of the East River-Crystal River divide from Schofield Pass eastward to the GunnisonPitkin County line; south and west of the Gunnison-Pitkin and GunnisonChaffee County lines to U. S. Highway No. 50." Area -- Computed by use of a planimeter on a 1/4-inch scale map, the total area of Unit 55 was found to be 1,043.8 square miles, or 668,032 acres. It was also determined that there are about 908.9 square miles, or 87% of the unit inside of the Gunnison National Forest boundary. Physical features -- Unit 55 is very mountainous. Only moderation of the rough terrain is the low foothills fringe north of U. S. Highway No. 50 and east of State Highway No. 135 between Leaps Gulch near Almont and Horn Gulch east of Doyleville. Elsewhere, streams mostly course through canyons that lace a rugged landscape. Pivoting clockwise in order from northwest to south are drainages of the East, Taylor, and Gunnison Rivers, and Quartz and Tomichi Creeks. Bottomlands of the East and Gunnison Rivers and Quartz and Tomichi Creeks produce substantial amounts of irrigated hay. Most other stream gradients are too great and valley bottoms too narrow to allow for much irrigated hay or pasture land agriculture. The largest lake or reservoir in Unit 55 is Taylor Park Reservoir. It is located about 20 miles northeast of Almont at the south end of Taylor Park. Colorado State Planning Division (1961:466) lists a maximum surface area of 2,033 acres and maximum capacity of 106,230 acre feet for the reservoir. The only other notable reservoir is Spring Creek Reservoir. It has an area of 89 surface areas and is located 16 miles northeast of Almont on Spring Creek. Taylor Park, largest park in the unit, has the dubious distinction of having had the coldest Colorado temperature ever recorded; a 60 degree below zero reading on February 1, 1951, at Taylor Park Reservoir dam (U. S. Dept. of Commerce, Weather Bureau 1959)0 While streams, or highways along streams, nearly complete Unit 55 boundaries on the south and west, mountains on the unit's north and east sides establish limits there. The divide atop the east-west oriented Elk Mountains separates the Gunnison River from the Crystal and Roaring Fork Rivers and serves, in part, as the unitls north boundary. On eastward, the ridge of the Elk Mountains joins the crest of the north-south oriented Sawatch Mountains. The Sawatch Range divide is also the Continental Divide and acts as the unit's east boundary. �- 286 - Castle Peak in the Elk Mountains is the highest mountain in Unit 55. Its elevation of 14,259 feet also marks it as the only peak higher than 14,000 feet. A few of th many peaks over l3,OOO-foot elevation are Teocalli Mountain, White Rock Mountain, Grizzly Peak, and Fairview Mountain. So much of the unit is above 12,000 feet, and peaks so numerous in that category, no attempt will be made to list them. By v.sing a U.S.G.S. map of 1:250,000 scale and 200-foot contour interval as a.gui.de, this writer estimates that at least 85 percent of Unit 55 is over 9,000 feet in elevation. Industry the leading 1961:848). Rivers, and duction. Production and sale of livestock and livestock products comprise industry in Gunnison County (Colo. State Planning Division Cattle ranches in the valleys of the East, Taylor, and Gunnison Quartz and Tomichi Creeks provide most of the livestock pro- Mineral income amounted to less than that for livestock in 1960. Coal was the leading mineral, followed by zinc, sand and gravel, and lead production, respectively. Lumbering and ready-cut log manufacturing also added to local wealth (Colo. State Planning Division 1961:782,848). Gunnison, Gunnison County's largest city and county seat, is the place where boundaries of Units 54, 55 and 67 meet. Furthermore, Gunnison is the only incorporated town, or more correctly, part of incorporated town, in Unit 55. Gunnison's population of 3,477 in 1960 approximated 63.5% of that for all of Gunnison County (Colo. State Planning Division 1961:783). The 1970 census should show gains in the economy and population of both city and county due to currently expanding state-supported Western State College and recreation developments at Blue Mesa Reservoir for water sports and Crested Butte for winter sports. LIMITS OF AVERAGE WINTER RANGE Gunnison River-East River-Taylor River draina.ges -- On a 1/4-inch scale map, the big game wintering zone in Unit 55 shows as a shallow triangular patch at the unit's southwestern corner. At the northern angle, a narrow neck of the zone extends northeastward from East River up Cement Creek a short distance. Here the upper limit very likely reaches its highest elevation in the un Lt; , about lO~900 Eee t , on south exposures of Point Lookout. Near and below Round Mountain south of Ce:r..e.nt Creek the upper limit line frequently locates close to the 9~OOO·-foot cont-our to include the Almont Triangle, middle portions of Tepee Gulch~ and upper portions of Fisher~ Leaps~ and Lost Canyon Gulches. From upper Tepee Gulch to Cabin Creek the upper limit line is oriented largely north and south, and its elevation approaches near~ and once just above~ the 10,OOO-foot contour. Tomichi Creek drainage -- From a point on the Cabin-East Cabin Creeks divide at about 9,500 feet elevation, the upper limit line projects roughly on a bearing towards Sargents. Low elevation points on the upper limit line are located on Quartz Creek below Ohio City at about 8~400 feet, on Hot Springs Creek southwest of Waunita Hot Springs at 8,600 feet, and where the line leaves the unit near Sargents at about 8,300 feet elevation. The line occasionally reaches near or just above the 10,OOO-foot contour in the latter vicinity that also includes Dawson Creek drainage. �- 287 - General -- This author estimates that the upper limit line in Unit 55 averages somewhere between 9,300 feet elevation. At no point does a lower limit enter the Gunnison National Forest. Lowest point in the unit is in Gunnison at an elevation of 7,703 feet. KEY AREAS Much of the key area for Unit 55 is not named (see accompanying 2-inch and 1/4-inch scale maps). This occurred because naming key areas resulted first from the need for place references on transect forms as transects were established; then, as stretches of territory were left untransected for various reasons, those areas were also left unnamed. Nevertheless, several key areas did receive names; they are delimited in paragraphs to follow. Except for a few places where winter range inventories were done outside of the Forest boundary short distances, key area descriptions pertain only to portions of National Forest winter range. Round Mountain key area -- All key winter range between the Jacks CabinTaylor River cutoff road and the north-south leg of the National Forest boundary west of Round Mountain. Almont Triangle key area Taylor River cutoff road State Highway No. 135 on Taylor River on the east -- All key winter range bounded by the Jacks Cabinat the north, the National Forest boundary and the west, and Forest Service Road No. 742 along and south. Tepee Gulch key area -- All key winter range within Tepee Gulch drainages. the Copper Creek and Fisher Gulch key area -- All key winter range within drainage. the Fisher Gulch Leaps Gulch key area -- All key winter range within drainage. the Leaps Gulch Big Gulch key area -- All key winter range within northeast of Parlin. the Big Gulch drainage Tomichi Dome key area -- All key winter range between Hot Springs the northwest and Irby Gulch west of Sargents on the southeast. Creek on Dawson Creek key area -- All key winter range east of Irby Gulch in Unit 55. Key area limit lines that are shown on maps correspond with winter range lines where they lie together on the 1/4-inch scale map or parallel each other at about 1/4-inch interval on the two-inch scale maps. A greater divergence than one-fourth inch on the latter means a significant change of intensity of big game use. �- 288 - LANDOWNERSHIP As mentioned previously, approximately 87% of Unit 55 is inside the Gunnison National Forest boundary. There is~ of course, land in private ownership within the forest; however~ the latter, mai.nly in ranching and mining patents, is comparatively i.nsignificant in total area. Examination of BLM land status maps revealed that federal lands of the Bureau are about equal to, or slightly greater, acreage-wise than the total of private lands in Unit 55. Remaining land holdings are miscellaneous minor federal, state, county, and municipal property. Table 1 presents a summary of Unit 55 vegetation and land category acreages by landownership within Forest boundaries. Shown on the table are approximately 42,000 total acres of National Forest winter range. Some 7,300 acres, or 17% of the total, are privately owned. This percentage is considerably biased in that winter ranges coincide with lower Forest areas containing substantial amounts of old grazing patents. Therefore, if all Forest lands are taken into account, a very much lower proportion of private-to-federal holdings would result. Table 1 - Vegetation type and land category acreage summary, big game winter range within Gunnison National Forest and Game Unit 55. Type or Land Category National 'Forest 1 - Grassland 4 - Sagebrush or Rabbitbrush 5 - Browse 6 - Conifer 8 - Barren (Rock) 9 - Juniper 10 - Broad-Leaf Tree Cul Landi or Hay Unclassified Totals 831 19,018 379 7 s 547 20 150 5,936 16 1,115 34,633 VEGETATION Acreage Private Total 125 4,692 89 889 0 131 1,329 10 158 956 23,710 468 8,436 20 281 7,265 26 1,273 7,334 41,967 --- TYPES Sagebru-sh type -- General aspect of Unit 55 winter range conforms with other portions of the upper Gunnison Basin in the manner of Sagebrush or Rabbitbrush Type (Type 4) dominating the landscape. Over one-half of the total area inventoried in this survey (about 24,000 of 42,000 acres) consisted of plant cover ruled by Artemisia and Chrysothamnus genera (Table 1: APPENDIX, pol) e �- 289 - Big sagebrush (Artemisia tridentata) is the most abundant species in Type 4. As is the case in Unit 54 (Baker 1968:11), black sagebrush (~. nova) and silver sagebrush (~. cana) are occasionally found with big sagebrush but are nowhere very abundant. Douglas rabbitbrush (Chrysothamnus viscidiflorus) is a moderately abundant subdominant shrub found almost universally with big sagebrush. It occurs with the later on over 11,000 acres as judged by appearance in type designations (APPENDIX, po I). In addition to its mainly subordinate role to big sagebrush, Douglas rabbitbrush is named as sale dominant shrub in two types that total over 1,300 acres. This species, along with most other rabbitbrushes, is resistant to herbicides; hence, it was virtually unaffected by spraying and replaced sagebrush where treatment had occurred. Probably as abundant as Douglas rabbitbrush in sagebrush associations is antelope bitterbrush (Purshia tridentata). It is listed in type designations for over 11,000 acres. Bitterbrush is rated as being one of the most highly desirable shrub species in big game nutrition. Coupling that recognition with its generally widespread occurrence and good abundance in Unit 55 sagebrush types otherwise lacking top-rated species assures great importance of these wintering grounds. Of lesser significance in sagebrush acreages are Rocky Mountain juniper (Juniperus scopulorum) and ponderosa pine (Pinus ponderosa). Despite the fact that many herbaceous species are found growing with sagebrush, only needle-grasses (Stipa spp.) and Thurber fescue (Festuca thurberi) were abundant enough to rate subdominant status through inclusion in type designations. Conifer ~ -- The Conifer Type (Type 6) comprises 8,436 acres of National Forest winter range in Unit 55 (Table I). This acreage is proportionately smaller to the total than that found for Unit 54 (Baker 1968:9) but still is a substantial amount. Douglas fir (Pseudotsuga menziesii) is the most frequently named coniferous species in type designations. It is listed as a dominant or codominant in 20 different types that total well over 6,000 acres. Other conifers often present as codominants with Douglas fir are lodgepole pine (Pinus contorta latifolia) and ponderosa pine. Rocky Mountain juniper occurred with Douglas fir in one type. Aspen (Populus tremuloides) is a frequently listed broad-lead codominant associated with Douglas fir (APPENDIX, p. 1-2). Several individual Douglas fir types are classified as being used primarily for cover by big game. Such types are indicated by "(C)" at the end of type designations. At times, Douglas fir is eaten by deer and elk. In spite of distinct browse lines on this tree in some localities, it is assumed that normal intake is negligible. Actually, browse lines on conifers very possibly result independently of intensity of use, since many species tend not to replace lost lower branches anyway. Hence, sporadic light use over a span of several years might be equal to one or two seasons of heavy utilization in production of a browse line. �- 290 - Douglas fir frequently occurs in open stands. This growth habit allows for existence of understory forage: here big sagebrush and bitterbrush for big game in Unit 55. These shrub species are abundant enough to be listed as subdominants with Douglas fir in four types totaling about 1,800 acres. Great importance of the good-cover conjunction for big game has been noted and stressed previously in these unit reports and here again is sounded despite risk of being repetitious. Lodgepole pine is perhaps the second most abundant conifer and is dominant or codominant in 14 different types. Aspen is a frequently listed codominant tree existing with lodgepole pine. Involved as a dominant or codominant in five types is ponderosa pine. This species is not very abundant anywhere in the Gunnison Basin and enters type designations only in that part of Unit 55 east of Wood Gulch. Bitterbrush is listed once as a subdominant species with ponderosa pine. Subdominant big sagebrush occurred in two lodgepole pine types and once with ponderosa pine. Broad-leaf tree ty~ -- The 7~265 acres of Type 10 or Broad-leaf Tree Type makes it almost as extensive as the Conifer Type and places it a strong third in total acreage (Table I). Type 10 is represented by aspen in nearly pure stands or mixed with Douglas fir, lodgepole pine, and ponderosa pine in the overstory. Of comparatively minor importance in aspen stands are shrubby subdominants big sagebrush, snowberry, and serviceberry (Amelanchier sp.); each occurs only once in type designations. Representing the herbaceous plant layer under aspen are Thurber fescue, fescue mixtures (Festuca spp.), lupines (Lupinus spp.), and peavine (Lathyrus sp.). The aspen/Thruber fescue association is particularly prominent in that it covers some 2,500 acres. It therefore composes one of the most extensive single types on Unit 55 National Forest winter range (APPENDIX, p. 2). Grassland type -- Ranking a weak fourth in plant cover acreage is the Grassland Type (Type 1) which totals 956 acres. Even this relatively minor acreage is deceptive because 939 acres of it in the Fisher Gulch area, classified here as l-STI-Artr and l-Stco-Artr (APPENDIX, p. 1), originally were classified as sagebrush (Type 4). A 1959 herbicidal spray project changed the type aspect by eliminating most sagebrush on an estimated 1,200acre tract. Enough plants survived and/or had become established between 1959 and 1962, date of this inventory, to warrant having big sagebrush (Artr) included in the type names. Before leaving the subject of vegetation types in general, and sagebrush in particular, attention is again called to the overpowering dominance of big sagebrush on this upper Gunnison Basin big game wintering zone. Disturbances such as fire, herbicide applications, plowing~ and destructive utilization by game very obviously can and have destroyed and retarded sagebrush. However~ big sagebrush is so closely adapted and compatible with this area that, in a natural train of events, there is an overwhelming tendency for the plant to quickly retake any lost ground. �- 291 - Furthermore, native perennial grasses in variable abundance are normally found with sagebrush. On the other hand, it seems obvious that the grasses are meant almost exclusively to the subordinate in the plant scheme here. What this condenses down to is that man, at least for now with present skills, would best benefit himself and the land by not trying to forcefully establish and hold vegetation (in this case grasses) on land that so strongly refuses them dominance. Granted that this attitude favors big game, deer particularly, over livestock. Be that as it may, until we can prove that massive, continuous type conversion is ecologically justifiable, it is recommended that the present selective attitude prevail in applying habitat manipulation practices to these wild lands. Other types -- Remaining vegetation types on Unit 55 winter range are the Browse Type (Type 5), Juniper Type (Type 9), and Barren Type (Type 8). Each type provides a very minor acreage. Willows (Salix spp.), snowberry, and big sagebrush dominate in the browse type designations. Rocky Mountain juniper is the dominant tree species in the one Type 9 type. The Barren Type is represented by rock. There are two unnumbered cover categories. They are "Unclassified: and "Hay or Cultivated". The former category includes about 1,300 acres which were simply not inventoried by the crew when they by-passed territory west of Quartz Creek near Ohio City. Hay lands compose only 26 acres (Table 1). RANGE TRANSECTS Browse range condition transects -- A total of 23 transects were established and read in Unit 55. Copies of transect records and a summary of pertinent data contained on them accompany this report in the binder file folder. Repeated future readings of transects, and comparison of results between years, will hopefully yield vegetation trend information for types in which transects are located. Browse composition data from the 23 transects help to further strengthen this author's conviction that, barring major climatic or other environmental changes, big sagebrush will be the principal plant species on Unit 55 winter ranges for many years to come. Percentages of big sagebrush in compositions varied between 33 and 84 percent and averaged 60.6%. Those findings, plus the fact that big sagebrush occurs as a type'species on over 25,700 acres (APPENDIX, p , 1-2), underscore that shrub is pre-eminenceitl 'Gunnison Basin plant life. Big sagebrush is awarded key species status on all 23 transects, five times singly, and 18 times in combination with bitterbrush and/or Douglas rabbitbrush. The latter two species each rated key designation on ten transects. Serviceberry, although present and fairly abundant in a few types, apparently did not meet enough other essential criteria to be called key on any transects. Therefore, with bitterbrush the only desirable browse species commonly found, it is consistent that 13 transects rate low for composition as it relates to big game nutrition. �- 292 - Browse density ratings average just less than medium. Only two transects are rated as low, and densities on those were not greatly deficient at 9 and 14 percent. Since density serves here as a crude index to total forage volume, there apparently are near-adequate supplies of big game food under ordinary circumstances. Periodically severe winters and variability of weather and snow accumulations within season alter forage availability. Unit 55 ranges, having predominantly low-statured sagebrush and bitterbrush, then can become deficient sources of forage. Consequently~ malnutrition and abnormally high, big-game winter losses follow. Transect results indicate that vigor of the key browse species is poor. For example, 17 of the 23 transects rate low in vigor, four are medium, and only two are high. Unlike Unit 54, where heavy hedging immediately prior to the inventory caused most browse vigor ratings to be low (Baker 1968:17), Unit 55 transects show both plant decadence and hedging characteristics about equally responsible for the low ratings. To review and summarize condition transect results, composition and vigor ratings of browse stands grade so low as to provide reason for concern about these condition factors. Browse densities, generally high enough not to cause concern, are involved in special situations that are treated in following paragraphs. First of all, it is doubtful that sagebrush densities can be increased appreciably in most situations. Plants tend to space themselves in efforts to occupy all usable area. Being a strong competitor, sagebrush is fully capable of filling vacant space if a source of seed is present and other factors are at least partly favorable. Douglas rabbitbrus~ is also a good competitor and frequently outduels sagebrush in quest for living space. Most other species, including woody, shrubby, and herbaceous ones, fall short of ability to outcompete sagebrush. In spite of capabilities for maintaining itself, there are places where sag~ brush has not held its own. These are natural, within-type, stand variations containing perennial bunchgrasses that tend to dominate high percentages of dead and decadent sagebrush plants. "Patches" or sub-types so described are generally too small in area for recognition in mapping or on maps. Locations are mostly south and west exposures of ridge-top and drainagebottom margins. Although small acreage-wise, these special areas are important. With many being situated near highways and roads, the patches are conspicuous and cause for speculation that all winter range is in poor condition for deer. A possible way to restore sagebrush on these run-down areas is to instigate judicious close grazing by cattle accompanied by continued close cropping of deer numbers. Site conditions are very obviously poor, so extreme care would be necessary in each step of a management program in order that further soil loss and site retrogression be avoided. Removal of plant competition by grazing the grasses and minimum browsing pressure by deer would hopefully help sagebrush restock itself. �- 293 - Changing composition of browse plants in sagebrush stands does not appear to be feasible for purposes of effecting deer range improvement. Tallergrowing highly desirable shrub species are conspicuously scarce in Unit 55. Where sagebrush has been disturbed and is not replacing itself, rabbitbrushes frequently take over. Therefore, unless very competitive, nutritionally-good, tall species can be developed or found for introduction, not much can be gained by attempting species changes with present knowledge and techniques. . Browse plant vigor is influenced by diseases, insect enemies, unusual climatic condition, and removal of stems, leaves, and roots,by elk, deer, and rodents for sustenance. The primary objective of big game management is effecting optimum sustained yield of big game populations consistent with forage supplies. Since plant diseases and parasites, climate, and rodents are not ordinarily controllable, proper cropping of big game if the key to the practical influence of browse plant vigor. REFERENCES CITED Baker, B. D. 1968. Big game winter range analysis. Sapinero. September. 17 p. Colorado State Planning Division. 1961. the State of Colorado. 916 p. Colorado Game Unit 54 - 1959-61, Yearbook of U. S. Department of Commerce, Weather Bureau. 1959. Climates of the states-Colorado. Climatography of the U.S. No. 60-5. Washington. December. 16 p. March 1969 Fort Collins �- 294 - APPENDIX C BIG GAME WINTER RANGE ANALYSIS GAME UNIT 63 - SMITH FORK Bertram D. Baker INTRODUCTION Included in this report is a description of geographical features of Big Game Management Unit 63 and a review of results of an inventory of deer and elk winter range within boundaries of the Gunnison National Forest. Range Analyst Jack McCrain accomplished the field work in the fall of 1962 and received assistance from personnel of the Paonia Ranger District. DESCRIPTION OF UNIT Location -- Game Unit 63 is located in portions of Delta, Gunnison, and Montrose Counties in Colorado. According to Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Department Laws and Regulations Handbook, 1965 (page 11, Chapter 3 - Big Game), boundaries of Unit 63 are as follows: "Those portions of Delta, Gunnison and Montrose Counties northeast of the Gunnison River from State Highway No. 92 to Cimarron, west of the divide between Curecanti and Dyer Fork Creeks to the southwest peak of West Elk Mountains, southwest on a line from this peak to Hotchkiss, and south of State Highway 92 from Hotchkiss to the Gunnison River". The need for revision of the Unit 53 legal description was presented in the BIG GAME WINTER RANGE ANALYSIS report for that unit. Since part of the south boundary of Unit 53 is common with a portion of the north boundary of Unit 63, it appears that the Unit 63 legal description should also be updated. After the Unit 53 report was written it was discovered that Mt. Guero most probably was the "southwest peak of West Elk Mountains" of Units 53 and 63 legal descriptions. Before that, South Baldy was thought to have been the pivotal mountain. This finding did not automatically better define what "on a line from this peak to Hotchkiss" meant~ but it at least makes it clearer from which mountain peak the "line" should originate. Unit 63's southeast boundary is also vague. The Dyer Fork-Curecanti Creeks divide technically ends at about the head of South Dyer Creek. From that point southward, the divide is actually between Crystal and Curecanti Creeks. This Crystal-Curecanti Creeks divide and Mesa Creek~ from its start at the latter divide to its confluence with the~Gunnison River, completes the >southeastern boundary of Unit 63 where it adjoins Unit 54. �- 295 - Big game season regulation maps dated prior to 1965 have proven to be invaluable references for placement of game management unit boundaries on -tinch and two-inch scale maps. Thus, although vaguely and inaccurately written legal descriptions prevail for most units, a reasonable degree of reliability can be reached by other means. A planimeter was used on a -t-inch scale map to determine that there are approximately 347 square miles of 222,080 acres in Unit 63. Physical features -- The topography of this unit varies greatly. High, rough terrain of the upper Smith Fork, Crystal, and Mesa Creeks is found on the east side of the unit. Less rugged but still rough lower mesa country that breaks abruptly at the deep Black Canyon of the Gunnison River characterizes the western two thirds of the unit. Elevations vary from 11,740 feet on Mt. Guero at the unit's northeastern corner to about 5,000 feet at the intersection of State Highway 92 and the Gunnison River near Austin. Smith Fork, its northward flowing branch Iron Creek, and the two Crystal Creeks are dominating main drainage systems tributary to the Gunnison River. Used primarily for irrigation purposes, Crawford and Gould Reservoirs are located nearby and south of Crawford. Industry -- A very sparse permanent human population lives along the Smith Fork, Iron Creek, and southwest of Hotchkiss between the North Fork of the Gunnison River and State Highway 92. Crawford's 1960 population was 147. Livestock ranching is the principal agricultural industry. Summer tourism is perhaps a less important item in the economy here than it is in other western slope communities, although it is still an important factor contributing to the area's well-being. LIMITS OF AVERAGE WINTER RANGE Smith Fork drainage -- The small winter range zone south of the Smith Fork, inside of the west Forest boundary, has the following approximate upper elevational limits: 7,100 feet immediately south of the main Smith Fork, and 8,400 feet south of South Saddle Peak. Crystal-Mesa Creeks drainages -- There is a very small area of winter range on lower portions of Crystal and Mesa Creeks on the Gunnison National Forest. This territory generally lies between State Highway 92 and the Forest boundary from Bear Trap Gulch on the west to the Forest Service camp on Mesa Creek on the east. General -- The average upper limit of winter game use varies considerabley, depending chiefly upon exposure. From the low of about 7,100 feet already mentioned on north exposures of the ma.in Smith Fork, the average upper limit extends upward to about 9,000 feet on south and east exposures of Morrow Point. �- 296 - Nowhere within the unit does the average lower limit of winter use penetrate within the National Forest boundary. Also, lower and upper limit lines outside of the Forest boundary were not established because they were beyond the scope of this survey. KEY AREAS The Landsend and Black Canyon Key Areas are the two such key areas designated and delineated for National Forest portions of Unit 63. Landsend Key Area is a very small extension of the same one that originates in Unit 53. The Black Canyon Key Area, as the name implies, is near the Black Canyon of the Gunnison River and includes terrain of Crystal and Mesa Creeks and southerly slopes of the main canyon. Key area limit lines that are shown on maps correspond with the winter range lines where they tie together on the ~-inch scale map or parallel each other at about a ~-inch interval on the two-inch scale maps. A greater divergence than one-fourth inch on the latter meand a significant change of intensity of big game use. LANDOWNERSHIP Similar to the winter range inventory of Unit 53 and other units involving the Gunnison National Forest, the job has only been partially done. No lands in Unit 63 were examined outside National Forest boundaries, and by far the majority of winter range lies outside the, National Forest in this unit. There are a total of 2,203 acres of winter range, including 301 acres that are termed unclassified, within the Gunnison National Forest in Unit 63 (Table 1). Some 201 acres or approximately 10% of the 2,203 acres are under pa nt. VEGETATION TYPES Browse type -- Of 1,833 acres of winter range that were typed mapped and inventoried, the largest category is the Browse Type (Type 5) containing 1,289 acres (Table I). As had occurred in Unit 53, oakbrush (Quercus spp.) is the most common dominant shrub species. It is listed as being present in all browse types (Appendix). It is given primary listing in six type designations totaling 985 acres. In three types totaling 224 acres, it is listed secondarily. Serviceberry (Amelanchier spp.) is the next most common dominant species. It is given that status in three types and is codominant in three other types. Big sagebrush (Artemisia tridentata) and snowberrys (Symphoricarpos spp.) are other shrub species that are found in the Type 5 associations. Bluestem wheatgrass (Agropyron smithii) is listed in one browse type designation. �- 297 - In summary then, oakbrush and serviceberry are the two most important shrub species on Unit 63 National Forest big game winter ranges based on frequency of occurrence in type designations and type acreages involved. Contributing to Type 5 mixtures is sagebrush. This is good because sagebrush is usually more valuable where it is found as a secondary species than in the nearly pure stands it so frequently forms. Broad-leaf tree type -- Of the remaining four lesser vegetation types, the next in order of importance acreage-wise is the Broad-leaf Tree Type or Type 10. This type consists of 225 acres in total in Unit 63 and is dominated mainly by aspen (Populus tremuloides) in associations. Cottonwoods (Populus spp.), found in one stream bottom type, are also present. Oakbrush was . listed with aspen in one type. Conifer type -- Making a total of 186 acres is Type 6 or Conifer Type. Douglas fir (Pseudotsuga menziesii) is the most common dominant conifer. Aspen is listed as a codominant in one type designation. Other types -- Minor vegetation types yielding less than 100 acres total for each are the Type 4 (Sagebrush or Rabbitbrush) and Type 1 (Grassland) categories. Also presented in Table 1 is the land category termed Unclassified. The 370 acres of such lands lie south and west of South Saddle Peak east of Crawford. Lack of time for field work prevented more than approximating where the upper winter range limit line exists in this area. Table 1 - Vegetation type and land category acreage summary, big game winter range within Gunnison National Forest and Game Unit 63. Type or Land Category 1 - Grassland National Forest Acreage Private Total tree 16 97 1,131 186 202 20 0 158 0 23 36 97 1,289 186 225 (Ranges analyzed) 1,632 201 1,833 Unclassified* 370 0 370 Total Acres 2,002 201 2,203 4 - Sagebrush or Rabbitbrush 5 - Browse 6 - Conifer 10 - Broad-leaf Subtotals *Includes winter range delineated but not inventoried. �- 298 - RANGE TRANSECTS Browse range condition transects -- Two browse range condition transects were established and read by Mr. McCrain in the Black Canyon Key Area. Records of these transects accompany this report. As is the case for all game unit reports of winter range inventories, no attempt is made to draw conclusions from results of condition transects. Repeat future readings of transects and comparison of results between years will hopefully yield trend information for the transected vegetation types. Vigor ratings for each transect were based upon total key browse plant hits regardless of the number of species involved. Since 1962, procedures have prescribed that vigor computations be made individually for each key species, the lowest rated one or more species providing the vigor rating for the transect. July, 1968 Fort Collins �July, 1969 - 299 - JOB PROGRESS REPORT State of COLORADO Project No. W-lOl-R-ll Work Plan No. 4 Game Range la Job No. Job Title: Inventory Period Covered: April 1, 1968 to March 31, 1969. Personnel: Investigations of Range Manipulation Projects in Colorado Roland C. Kufeld, Regional Game Biologists, U. S. Forest Service, Bureau of Land Management and Bureau of Indian Affairs personnel. ABSTRACT An inventory was begun of range type-conversion projects completed in Colorado during 1966, 1967 and 1968, on lands administered by the U. S. Forest Service, Bur~au of Land Management and Bureau of Indian Affairs. A new plan for inventorying type-conversions completed after 1968, entitled "A System for Inventory, Evaluation and Exchange of Information on Range Type-Conversion Projec.ts," was coordinated. ��- 301 - INVENTORY OF RANGE MANIPULATION PROJECTS IN COLORADO Roland C. Kufeld INTRODUCTION All range type-conversion projects completed prior to January 1, 1966, in Colorado on lands administered by the U. S. Forest Service, Bureau of Land Management and Bureau of Indian Affairs have been inventoried. Data were analyzed and have been reported by Kufeld (1968). A system for continuing the range type-conversion project inventory was developed by Colorado Division of Game, Fish and Parks through cooperation of the Interagency Council on Wildlife Ecology, a group comprised of various land-management agency personnel in Colorado. The system, entitled "A System for Inventory, Evaluation and Exchange of Information on Range TypeConversion Projects" was adopted for use in Colorado by the Forest Service, Bureau of Land Management and Colorado Division of Game, Fish and Parks, and was placed in operation on January 15, 1968. Procedures for using the "System" were described by Kufeld (1968). Range type-conversion projects completed during 1969, and thereafter, will be inventoried under the new "System". During the 11th and 12th segments of this Federal Aid project an inventory of range type-conversion projects completed during 1966, 1967 and 1968 will be made in order to bring the inventory up to date. p. S. OBJECTIVE To collect information which describes the location, extent, environmental conditions, land-use practices, type of treatment and effects of treatment on the range, livestock and wildlife, for all completed range manipulation projects in Colorado that are located within the ranges of deer, elk, and sage grouse, and develop a processing and evaluation system for these data and for information which describes proposed range manipulation projects. SEGMENT OBJECTIVES 1. 2. 3. To inventory range type-conversion projects in Colorado completed during 1966, 1967 and 1968. To compile, codify, process, and analyze inventory data. To develop a processing and filing system for information about proposed range type-conversion projects in Colorado. �- 302 - METHODS AND MATERIALS Procedures and forms used in collecting Kufeld (1968). data have been described by Range type-conversion projects completed during 1966, 1967 and 1968 by the following land management agencies were inventoried: Routt; Roosevelt, San Juan, Grand Mesa and Uncompahgre National Forests; North Park Resource area of the Glenwood Springs BLM District: San Juan Resource area of the Montrose BLM District: Southern Ute and Ute Mountain Indian Reservations. The inventory of 1966, 1967 and 1968 range type-conversion projects was not completed during the 11th segment. Transfer of data to Mark Page Reader forms and IBM analysis will be accomplished during the next segment after all 1966-1968 type-conversion projects have been inventoried. RESULTS Inventory AND DISCUSSION of 1966, 1967 and 1968 Range Type-Conversion Projects Acreages of range type-conversion projects that were completed during 1966, 1967 and 1968, and inventoried during this project segment are shown in Table 1. �- 303 - Table 1 -- Range type-conversion projects Number of Projects Agency Grand Mesa Nat. Forest o Roosevelt o Nat. Forest completed 1/ during 1966, 1967, 1968.- Vegetative Type Kind of Treatment Acres Treated Routt Nat. Forest 3 Sagebrush Spray 1,451 San Juan Nat. Forest 1 Grass Pinyon-Juniper Spray Chain 546 1,499 2,045 Sagebrush Pinyon-Juniper Spray Chain 2,041 4,476 6,517 1 Uncompahgre Nat. Forest .4 5 Glenwood sp. BLM District; N. Park Res. A. 0 Montrose BLM District; San Juan Res. A. 1 Sagebrush Plow 300 2 Pinyon-Juniper Chain 1,250 1,550 1 Sagebrush Pinyon-Juniper Plow Burn Chained debris 701 4,600 Southern Ute Ind. Res. 1 5,301 Ute Mountain Ind. Res. 1 Pinyon-Juniper Chain 22,986 1/ Includes only those National Forests, BLM Resource areas and Indian Reservations that were inventoried during this project segment. System for Inventory, Evaluation of Information and Exchange on Range Type-Conversion Projects Completed Forms GFP #4A describing range type-conversion projects scheduled for 1969 are being received at the Game Research Center from the Regions, and the "System" appears to be working well. Several minor requests for information have been made and the information has been provided. There has been no major request which required an IBM analysis. This probably stems from the fact that a major IBM analysis of type-conversion project inventory data was completed last year (Kufeld 1968). �- 304 - Although the "System" was to begin with type-conversions scheduled for 1969, not all of the 1969 proposed projects have been inventoried under the "System". This is because planning for some of the 1969 proposed projects was initiated several years before, and comments on these projects were solicited from Colorado Division of Game, Fish and Parks by the land management agencies prior to January 15, 1968, the date the "System" went into effect. Such projects are being inv~ntoried by office contacts along with projects completed during 1966, 1967 and 1968. This same situation could arise with a few projects scheduled for 1970, but the necessity for inventorying by office contacts should become less each year until all of the proposed type-conversions are inventoried under the new "System". Range type-conversions proposed for 1969 are not included in this report because some may still be postponed until later, or plans may be altered prior to completion. Type-conversions will be reported in annual reports after they have been completed. LITERATURE CITED Kufeld, Roland C. 1968. Inventory of range manipulation projects in Colorado. Colorado Dept. of Game, Fish and Parks. P-R Project W-lOl-R-lO, WP-4, J-la, Quart. Rept., July, Part 1. 121 p. Prepared by t:~~} c )~.d2d Roland C. Kufeld Asst. Wildlife Researcher �July, 1969 - 305 - JOB FINAL REPORT COLORADO State of Project Work W-101-R No. Game Range Plan No. Job Title: Period Paddock Covered: Personnel: Studies April on Effects Investigations Job No. 4 of Varying Intensities 1, 1962 to November of Deer Use 30, 1967 Bertram D. Baker, Richard M. Bartmann, Hugh Black, Jr., Raymond J. Boyd, Dr. David C. Bowden, Gary L. Brown, Harold E. Burdick, Nelson Cain, John F. Corey, George W. Crandell, Patrick H. Davies, Dr. Robert W. Davis, Richard N. Denney, Noland Dunnan, Florence G. Fields, Jack R. Grieb, Michael L. Head, Wallace G. Jobman, Robert E. Keiss, Jerry B. King, Julius J. Klein, William T. McKean, Robert C. Moore, Henry A. Pedersen, Thomas M. Pojar, Roger C. Randolph, Lawrence E. Riordan, Harold R. Shepherd, Donald G. Smith, Daniel D. Sorensen, Donald E. Speers and Harold M. Swope. ABSTRACT The effects of mule deer (Odocoileus hemionus) stocked at rates of 10, 20, 30, 40 and 60 deer-days per acre on pinyon-juniper winter range were studied at the Little Hill.s Game Experiment Station in northwestern Colorado from 1962 through 1967. A series of two-acre paddocks were constructed on pinyon-juniper range and different numbers of deer introduced for a 20-day period each winter to attain the desired rates. The only noteworthy treatment effect during the entire study was a reduction in pinyon pine understory at 60 deer-days per acre caused by heavy deer use. Mean weight loss rates fordeer, by paddock, varied from 0.3 to 0.7 pounds per deer-day, but true treatment effects were probably concealed by other factors which affected weight responses. Deer defecation rates ranged from 9.6 to 17.6 groups per day but were not related to stocking intensity. The overall mean rate was 12.9 groups per day, not considering several important sources of error. The lack of conclusive results for all aspects of the study seemed to stem from six basic problems: (1) duration of the study was too short, (2) characteristic large inherent variability associated with range vegetation, (3) inadequate techniques, (4) unmeasurable influence of extraneous variables, (5) unpredictableness of wild deer, and (6) excessive workload for the time and manpower available. Resultantly, no recommendations are made relative to the study objective, but the six above mentioned pitfalls can be considered in this realm. ��- 307 - PADDOCK STUDIES ON EFFECTS OF VARYING INTENSITIES OF DEER USE Richa rd M. Bartmann and Wi 11iam T. McKean Po S. OBJECTIVE To obtain more precise information about how five intensities of deer browsing (10, 20, 30, 40, and 60 deer-days per acre) affect a typical pinyon-juniper type range and the health of the deer. METHODS AND MATERIALS Paddock Construction The paddock system included one four-acre and five two-acre pens plus a four-acre holding area (Fig. 1). Each two-acre paddock was 264 by 330 feet and the four-acre pen 264 by 660 feet. Fences were a combination of woven and barbed wire nearly eight feet high. Construction was completed by a private contractor in the fall of 1962 for $2,598.00. All materials were provided on-site by the Department of Game and Fish at a cost of $1,961.00. The total 1.47 miles of fence including 11 gates cost $4,559.00, or $3,101 36 per mile. Not included are costs for surveying and clearing some fence1ines, all done by the Department. 0 A one-acre study area (200 by 218 feet) was marked in the center of each paddock to minimize "fence effect" variation on vegetation measurements. Another one-acre plot on open range adjacent to the paddocks served as an unfenced control. Paddock Stocking Five stocking rates (10, 20, 30, 40, and 60 deer-days per acre) were selected to encompass deer use ranging from light to excessive. Choice of rates was based on knowledge from previous work at Little Hills. In addition, one paddock was unstocked (fenced control) and another on open range was subject to uncontrolled use. Seventeen deer were required to fill the paddock system. They were stocked for a 20-day period in January or February each year. An exception occurred in 1966 when a shortage of deer delayed final removals in some paddocks until March 19. Six, four, three, and two deer were placed in two-acre pens to achieve 60, 40, 30, and 20 deer-days per acre (dd/acre), respectively. The 10 deer-day rate was accomplished with two deer in the four-acre pen; hopefully two deer would be more content than one o �- 308 Deer were live-trapped from the surrounding range and kept in the holding pen until sufficient animals were available for stocking. Due to the large number of deer sometimes kept in the comparatively small holding area, supplemental feeding was thought desirable. The first two winters, native browse was cut and placed before the deer. However, they hardly touched it even when branches were placed upright in the snow or in live bushes. This feeding proved a formidable task even for a short period, particularly the second year when browse production was negligible. In subsequent years, ~lfalfa hay and commercial sheep pellets were provided which the deer ate more readily. Only adult animals, yearlings or older, were used and were stocked without regard to sex or age. One exception to the no-fawns rule occurred in 1966 when trapping success was poor. Five deer, including one fawn, were obtained from Sapinero. The fawn was placed in the 30 deer-day paddock but died almost immediately. The deer were checked periodically with minimal Dead ones were either replaced or the deficient by extending the stocking period. The desired number of deer-days percent of the time (Table 1). occurred most of the remainder. disturbance to them. deer-days compensated in each paddock was achieved about 40 Slight over-runs, up to 10 percent, Browse Production Annual production of the three more abundant and palatable, or "key" 11 browse species under the different stocking rates was determined by measuring current annual growth (GAG) stems. Ten plants each of true mountain mahogany (Cercocarpus montanus), antelope bitterbrush (Purshia tridentata), and serViceberry (Amelanchier utahensis) were permanently tagged on the central study acre in each paddock (Fig. 2). Where bushes were sufficiently dispersed throughout the acre, selections were made randomly in relation to existing line transects (described later). Every one-foot interval along the 16, 50-foot transects in each paddock was serially numbered and ten numbers chosen per browse species. The nearest bush, three or more feet from the origin point, was tagged. The threefoot distance limit was thought necessary to avoid disturbing vegetation along the line transects while measuring stems. When bushes were relatively few, individual plants were numbered and ten chosen randomly. Personal judgment was exercised to the extent of selecting plants of uniform size and availability to the deer. A scarcity of mountain mahogany plants in Paddock Four forced some selections outside the center acre. This situation also prompted the assignment of non-use to this pen. 11 The term "key", as used here, is merely those species chosen for intensive bitterbrush and serviceberry. a convenient study: true mountain reference mahogany, to antelope �- 309 All GAG stems and root crown sprouts four millimeters or longer, including the terminal bud, were measured in millimeters. Fingernail polish was applied at the terminal bud scale scar to help insure duplicating measurements the following spring. Production measurements were begun as early as August 29 in 1962 and as late as October 27 in 1964. Work was done by two-man crews; one person measuring and one recording. Production measurements were generally completed in one and one-half to two months depending upon the number of crews, mostly from one to three, and the amount of growth. A misunderstanding resulted in no measurements in the fenced control in 1963. The following year, a labor shortage prevented measurements of mountain mahogany and bitterbrush in all paddocks. Browse Utilization Stem Measurements Utilization of key browse was determined by remeasuring GAG stems remaining on tagged bushes following stocking. Work usually began in late March as soon as weather permitted, but in 1964, was not started until May 4. Utilization measurements, also done in two-man crews, were mostly completed in two weekso Rumen Contents Additional data on browse utilization at different stocking levels were acquired from rumen contents. Samples taken at the end of stocking periods from all deer used during 1963 and 1967 were placed in plastic bags and frozen for later analysis. In 1963 only, two additional samples were obtained from deer collected on open range • .In preparation for analysis, rumen contents were thawed and washed through an 8 mm-mesh screen. Food items were separated and identified, while wet, with the aid of a binocular microscope. Materials of each p1a~t species were spread evenly over a gridded background and the volume percentage estimated. Vegetation Ground Cover Pre- and post-treatment determinations of vegetation ground cover were made during the summers of 1962 and 1967, respectively, with 50-foot line intercept transects (Canfield 1941 and 1957). Sixteen transects were permanently marked in each paddock. The methodology employed in transect layout and reading was, with some modification, like that used in big game exc10sures in Colorado (Baker 1961). Each central study acre was sub-divided into four, 50 by 218 foot blocks. Four transects were randomly selected in each block with one foot considered the minimum transect spacing. �- 310 The line, 1/16-inch aircraft cable, was stretched taut and plumbed over pins set in the ground to mark the transect ends. The cable was laid as low to the ground as possible, threading it through bushes where practical. A three-foot long, 1/8-inch diameter brazing rod, one end pOinted, was used to plumb along the line. The dominant ground cover intercepted by the line, to a height of six feet, was measured to the nearest 0.01 foot. Browse was measured at the GAG intercept, excluding leaves. Portions of trees under six feet were treated as browse. Grasses and single stemmed forbs were measured at basal intercept and forbs with basal or rosette leaves were measured at total intercept of those leaves. The few annual grasses and forbs encountered were considered litter. Browse Density Browse plants were counted on one by 50-foot plots established along the right side (from the head end) of each line transect (Mustard 1958 and Baker 1961). All shrubs and trees rooted one-half or more inside each plot were identified and assigned an age and hedging classification in accordance with criteria set forth in the Big Game Range Analysis Procedures (Anon. 1956). The following descriptions are taken therefrom: Age Classes: Young Established seedlings and young plants. Elongate growth form, simple branching; usually less than six years old, and basal stem diameter not over 1/4". Mature--- Mature plants. Distinguished by heavier, often gnarled stems, complex branching, rounded growth form. Crown made up of more than three-fourths living wood. Decadent- Decadent wood. Degrees plants. Crowns made up of more than one-fourth dead of Hedging 1 - Little or no hedging, indicating light use in the past three of four years. Growth tends to be linear. 2 - Moderately hedged. Use past three or four years causing much development of lateral branching and more complex growth form. 3 - Heavily or closely hedged. Heavy use in past three or four years causing a very much "broomed" or "clubbed" appearance. Deer Weight Responses Deer were weighed before and after stocking to determine weight changes relative to treatment levels. In 1963, deer were weighed on a platform �- 311 scale with beam balance. Subsequent weighings were on a cattle squeeze chute-scale combination. The deer were weighed in a plywood crate to confine and quiet them, the crate weight being deducted from the total. Deer Physiology The effects of different intensities of range use on deer physiology cannot be determined from the necropsies of expe~imental animals. This portion of the study objective was merely anticipated during the planning stages and allowances were not made in the experimental design to adequately test for such effects. Since the physiology data have no bearing on the study per se, there is no ensuing discussion of the results. However, for the record, methodology is described below and the data are presented in Appendix B. Necropsies were performed on all deer stocked in the paddocks in 1963 and 1967. Two additional deer were collected on open range in 1963 and treated in like manner. All sample collections and analyses the first year were done by personnel from the College of Veterinary Medicine, Colorado State University, under the supervision of Dr. Robert W. Davis, with Colorado Game and Fish Department personnel assisting. The CSU group assisted with the 1967 necropsies done by Department laboratory technicians from the Fto Collins Research Center under the supervision of Robert E. Keiss. Deer were removed from the paddocks, hog-tied, and hauled about three miles by pickup truck to the Little Hills headquarters for necropsy. Some animals remained in this state up to four hours before any samples were taken. Therefore, caution must be exercised by any interpretation of the physiology data as considerable bias could be present which may invalidate applications to normal situations. Other conditions that should also be noted in this respect are the effects of physical injuries incurred during stocking and confinement, and prolonged stress during the 20-day confinement period. Blood Blood samples were taken from the jugular vein. In 1963, all samples hemolyzed in transit to Fort Collins and no data were obtained. Determinations from the 1967 samples included packed cell volume, hemoglobin, sedimentation rate, cell counts (erythrocyte, leukocyte, and differential), and blood chemistry. All tests were made according to standard procedures described by Hepler (1963). An additional 32 blood samples were collected in 1964, 1965, and 1966 from deer prior to their release from the paddocks. Determinations for these were limited to packed cell volume, hemoglobin, and cell counts. Urine Urine samples were collected from all deer in 1963 and 1967. Urine was aspirated from the bladder when possible, but an attempt was made to catch �- 312 some in a test tube if expelled before such a sample could be taken. Urine so collected was discarded if it appeared contaminated. Analytical procedures for specific gravity, chemical determinations, color, and transparency follow Hepler (1963). Bone Marrow Fat Bone marrow fat content was determined by ether extraction. Only the right femur was analyzed in 1963, and both right and left femurs were tested in 1967. Disease Fifty-three blood samples were tested for brucellosis and leptospirosiso Tests on the 20 samples taken in 1963 were run at the College of Veterinary Medicine, Colorado State University. The remainder were sent to the Cooperative Brucellosis Laboratory in Denver for analysis All samples checked negative for both diseases. o Donations In 1967, various glands, organs, and tissues from the 17 necropsied deer were donated to staff and graduate students in the College of Veterinary Medicine, Colorado State University. Statistical Analyses Statistical methods employed in analyzing the various data sets followed Snedecor (1967). Tests of significance to determine differences between treatment and year means over the years in the browse production and utilization, and vegetation ground cover data were made by analysis of variance with years and treatments as fixed effects and bushes (or transects) random It was hoped year differences, related largely to precipitation, would be minimized by this procedure. All analyses were made at the Colorado State University Statistical Laboratory under the supervision of Dr. David Bowden. o Other Methods Assembled under this section are several varied undertakings which do not contribute materially to the main study objective. Some are jobs for which no worthwhile data were obtained, but they are mentioned here for the record. Others are side ventures which were thought worthy of study to attack a specific problem of interest. Forage Production Estimates Weight estimates of browse, grass, and forb production were made yearly on ten permanent circular mil-acre plots per paddock. Except possibly for the most abundant species, sample sizes were grossly inadequate to allow detection of potential treatment differences, nor were there checks on accuracy �- 313 once estimates were started. Valid comparisons of production paddocks cannot be made and these data will not be presented. Browse Utilization between Estimates Estimates of browse utilization were made each spring along one, 100point paced transect on each central study acre. The percent uti1izization of GAG was estimated for the browse plant nearest the observer's toe, based on vertical projection of aerial stems, at each sampling point. Some preliminary training was done but no checks were made once the actual estimates were begun. The problem of sampling adequacy was also encountered with these estimates and nothing can be gained from the data as originally intended. Instead, the results for the key browse species will be compared to those from the stem measurements. Regression: Browse Uti1izati~n on Production The effects of annual changes in browse production on subsequent utilization under similar deer browsing pressure is a problem that arose during analysis of the browse utilization data. Annual key browse utilization trends, on a paddock-wide basis, seemed to reasonably approximate those for production. Thus, it was deemed desirable to inspect the relationship between the two. Least squares regressions of key browse utilization on production (Snedecor 1967) were calculated on an individual bush basis for all species and on a paddock basis for mountain mahogany and serviceberry only. On the bush basis, separate regressions were calculated with utilization expressed both as actual and percentage use. Only actual use was considered on the paddock basis. Paddocks were combined for mountain mahogany and serviceberry as the analysis of variance for each indicated no significant differences in utilization between treatments. Significance was found for bitterbrush and paddocks were separated. The fenced and unfenced controls were deleted from all analyses. Paced Condition Transects and Line Intercept Transects: A Comparison Paced condition transects were run during the first, third, and fifth years of the study to gain supplemental information on vegetal changes. One transect per paddock was run in accordance with the Big Game Range Analysis Procedures (Anon. 1956). The condition transect entails 100 stops made at predetermined pace intervals. The observer walks only in openings between shrubs and trees and at each stop records the dominant ground cover occurring inside a 3/4-inch loop in front of his toe. Browse crown coverage is determined by angle gauge (Cooper 1957) at each tenth stopo Overstory crown coverage is estimated from an aerial photo by comparison with a crown density guide. Ground cover percentages, for all components are derived through mathematical manipulations. Other information is gathered on the transects but will not be considered here. �- 314 The condition transects cannot detect small differences in vegetation over a short time span and no precision estimate is possible as there was only one transect per paddock. Therefore, the results will not be used as first designed. Instead, a comparison of results will be made with the line intercept transects. The 1964 condition data will not be used as no line transects were run that year. A paired comparisons analysis (Snedecor 1967), using the single transect values from the condition transects and the paddock means from the line transects, was made for each of five broad categories: bare ground (including rock), litter (including moss), total browse, total grasses and forbs, and total overstory. Browse Production and Utilization: Sample versus Total Bush Attempts were made during the process of stem length measurements to investigate the relationship between mean stem length based on a sample of stems as opposed to measurement of all stems on a bush. This technique of estimating browse production and utilization is currently used by game managers in Colorado. Problems arose between methodology in this study and that used by fieldmen which hampered exploration of this relationship. It would not be possible with the paddock data to estimate, as originally conceived, the number of measurements required per bush and the number of bushes required per transect to estimate production or utilization, within specified precision limits, that would be applicable to a field situation. Therefore, no further discussion of this subject will be made. Pellet-group Counts Reactions of wild deer to confinement are unpredictable so it was desirable to secure some type of quantitative data that might reflect deer activity in various parts of the paddocks, particularly on the center acre as opposed to the peripheral acre. Pellet-group counts were made partly for this purpose. A second reason for pellet-group counts was to gain additional information on deer defecation rates in a controlled yet somewhat natural situation. A total count of groups in all paddocks was made in April or early May after stocking. Each pen was sub-divided with string into convenient counting strips. A crew of from two to four persons counted the strips twice, changing positions and directions the second trip. All groups were sprayed with enamel paint from a pressurized can to prevent duplicate counts and to aid in distinguishing old groups from new in subsequent years. Counts on the center and peripheral acres were tallied separately. Rabbit and Rodent Control Some control of rabbits (Sy1vilagus sp. and Lepus sp.) and rodents was thought necessary because of the partial protection the paddocks offered. �- 315 - Rabbits were attracted during winter when deer were fed in the holding pen. When feeding was discontinued, rabbits remained in the area and ate browse. Rabbit and rodent control efforts in the paddock area were mostly token. Methods included the use of strychnine impregnated alfalfa and strychnine water within the pens during summer, and live-trapping and shooting. Although a few animals were eliminated, results were negligible. DESCRIPTION OF AREA General The study area was near the Little Hills Game Experiment Station of the Colorado Division of Game, Fish and Parks about 15 air miles west of Meeker in northwestern Colorado. A detailed physical description of the general area was presented by Riordan (1956) and Mustard (1958). Briefly, the topography is broken, bisected by numerous intermittent drainages (Fig. 3). Elevations range from about 6,000 to 7,500 feet. Pinyon pine (Pinus edulis) and Utah juniper (Juniperus utahensis) are the dominant overstory species. A browse understory consists largely of serviceberry, true mountain mahogany, big sagebrush (Artemisia tridentata), antelope bitterbrush, snowberry (Symphoricarpos tetonensis), Gambel's oak (Quercus gambelli), and several species of rabbitbrush (Chrysothamnus spp.). Precipitation has averaged nearly 13 inches annually since 1946 when weather records were started at the Little Hills Station (U. S. Weather Bureau 1946-67). Roughly one-third occurs as snow. The average maximum and minimum winter temperatures (December through February) are 40 3 F and 5.9 F, respectively. The lowest temperature recorded, which also occurred during the study, was -48 F. 0 Specific After inspection of several potential study sites, a 20-acre tract was chosen near a ridgetop at about 7,500 feet elevation (Fig. 4). The exposure was southwesterly and the slope varied from near level to nearly 20 degrees. Vegetation, though not entirely representative of pinyonjuniper range, was fairly homogeneous over the area. Overstory density averaged about 30 percent. Serviceberry, snowberry, mountain mahogany, and bitterbrush dominated the browse understory. In addition, a few big sagebrush and rabbitbrush plants were scattered through the area. Oregon grape (Berberis repens), a small low-growing evergreen, was also present but was usually covered by snow in winter. The area is spring-fall cattle range but use in the immediate vicinity has been relatively light due to reduced cattle numbers and poor water distribution. Little information is available concerning pre-study deer densities in the vicinity. Hunting season statistics and limited trend-count data suggest populations on the entire wintering complex fluctuated between moderate and high levels prior to 1962 and from moderate to low levels during the study. Evidence of heavy browse use existed at the start of the study. �- 316 RESULTS AND DISCUSSION Browse Production For different reasons, the same treatments and years were not analyzed for each key browse species (Table 2). The 1963 mountain mahogany data were deleted because the mean production in all but one paddock was less than 200 mm: 12 of 50 bushes produced no measurable growth A like situation occurred with bitterbrush that same year but was not considered severe enough to warrant similar action. Data from the unfenced paddock were excluded from all analyses as stocking on open range was unknown. o The influence of precipitation on current annual growth stem production is evident in Fig. 5. It is doubtful that accumulated moisture from January through July is the best index to growing conditions for all three species, but precipitation patterns for that period do approximate production trends, particularly for mountain mahogany and bitterbrush. Although serviceberry responded more subtly, a relationship is still evident. Though efforts were made in the analysis to remove year effects, this was not entirely possible and precipitation and other variables must still be considered when interpreting the results. Prior to analysis, the data were subjected to a Loge transformation. The exponential curve which characterizes the growth process indicated the need for such a transformation to achieve additivity of treatment effects (Snedecor 1967). Estimates of sampling adequacy of the 10-bush samples were calculated on the basis of the Loge transformed data. Expressing the precision estimates this way provides an indication of sampling adequacy in respect to the analyses performed. Expression in respect to the original data yields an assymetrical interval estimate because of the exponential relationship. Both forms are presented. In terms of the transformed data, estimates were indicated sufficient to within about 11 percent of the true mean stem length production at the 90 percent confidence level for all species. In terms of the original data, estimates were adequate within 146, 168, and 136 percent of the means on the upper end, and 59, 63, and 58 percent on the lower end for serviceberry, mountain mahogany, and bitterbrush, respectively, at the same confidence level. Serviceberry production was the least varied of the key species between both paddocks and years (Table 3). Mountain mahogany displayed marked responses to yearly growing conditions and bitterbrush was intermediate in this respect. Production trends by paddock, exclusive of the unfenced control, reveal few relationships to treatment Paddock rankings of stem production for both mountain mahogany and serviceberry, though sometimes changing erratically during interim years, were altered little overall (Table 4)0 Differences between treatment means and the corresponding year means were fairly constant over the years for both species as indicated by a non-significant year x paddock interaction (p > 0.05) (Table 5)0 o �- 317 Significance was found with bitterbrush (p < .01). Production at both 20 and 30 dd/acre was lowest in 1962 and highest in 1966. A c~pensatory drop in rank occurred with all other paddocks. The advance at 20/dd acre was of a constant nature, whereas at 30 dd/acre, production remained low until the final year when it was second highest. At 20 dd/acre, five bitterbrush plants produced increased amounts of GAG nearly every year regardless of growing conditions. In 1966, one bush contributed 52 percent of the GAG measured in that paddock. This growth pattern was not duplicated by any other plants experiencing similar degrees of utilization, thus lessening the probability of a treatment response o Three bitterbrush bushes died in the fenced control during the second or third year. These plants contributed 35 percent of the total stem production measured in that paddock the first year. These deaths, along with several others that occurred during the study, were most likely natural mortality rather than treatment response. Admittedly, the production results may contain some error due to the relationship between stem length and forage weight, a preferred production measure, but evidence indicates it is probably small. Twig length was found highly correlated with weight for bitterbrush (Basile and Hutchings 1966) and several other browse species (Schuster 1965), but the variation between years was not tested. Conceivably, a significant twig length-weight relationship also exists for mountain mahogany and serviceberryo Mean stem length is another often used production indicator. In Table 6 it can be seen that, on the whole, mean stem lengths for the key species responded to yearly growing conditions much as did total stem length. Agreement in the two expressions of production did not hold true between paddocks within years as rankings of mean stem length are unlike those for total stem length (Table 7)0 However, most of this disagreement probably would not be statistically significant due to the large variability associated with the stem measurementso The most notable aspect of the rankings in Table 6 is the almost immediate decline in mean stem length of all species in the fenced control relative to the other paddocks. This trend towards shorter mean stem length under non-use was found by Neff (1963)0 Shepherd (1958) had similar results for all species except mountain mahogany which produced longer stems under non-use. The downward pattern by serviceberry at 10 dd/acre may be reflective of slightly lighter use. Several other paddock ranking changes can be seen for serviceberry but all are difficult to interpret because when one paddock goes up or down in position, one or more others must make a compensatory changeo The same is true with both other specieso The above trends are only relative. True production trends are almost impossible to determine unless the effects of other variables, primarily precipitation, can be removed or at least minimized. �- 318 - It should be noted that only four of the five years of production measurements were made subsequent to paddock stocking. Though it was possible to get another set of measurements after the last stocking period, it is unlikely that the final outcome would have changed markedly. Browse Utilization Stem Measurements Browse utilization data were analyzed on the basis of total current annual growth stem length consumed. Treatment levels of 10 through 60 dd/acre for all five years were included in the analysis for serviceberry. Only four years' data were available for bitterbrush and mountain mahogany. The outside paddock was excluded in all cases because of unknown stocking. Sampling sizes for utilization were considerably less than desirable. The 10-bush samples were estimated sufficient within 30, 60, and 90 percent of the true mean utilization at the 90 percent confidence level for serviceberry, mountain mahogany, and bitterbrush, respectively. Annual changes in key browse utilization approximated production patterns (Fig. 6). This was most apparent with mahogany and somewhat less so with bitterbrush. Serviceberry digressed from this relationship in 1966 when utilization in all paddocks dropped slightly despite one of the best production years of the study. This may have been the result of heavier use of other species. Mahogany utilization in most paddocks in 1966 was 18 to 50 percent greater than the previous highs in 1963. Bitterbrush use was about 50 to 80 percent below the 1963 levels in all but the 20 and 30 dd/acre paddocks where consumption more than doubled over previous highs. Regrettably, the lack of production and utilization data for other forage species limits any conclusions. Utilization of browse species, either individually or collectively, was generally misaligned with stocking intensities. The six-fold difference in rates between the lightest and heaviest stocked paddock usually yielded less than a three-fold difference in utilization (Table 8). During the first two years, mahogany use at 10 dd/acre slightly exceeded that at 60 dd/acre. The above relationships are easily seen in the paddock rankings of utilization in Table 9. All key species considered, the greatest browse use occurred at 60 dd/acre only 6 out of a possible 13 times; three with bitterbrush, twice with serviceberry, and once with mahogany. Conversely, the lowest use occurred at 10 dd/acre only 5 out of 13 times; four with serViceberry and once with mahogany. The above statements are exclusive of the unfenced paddock. Differences over the years between treatment means and the corresponding year means were found significant only for bitterbrush (p <.01) (Table 10). However, the lack of any reasonable relationship between utilization and stocking intensities, coupled with the uncoordinated nature of changes in paddock rankings, renders this significance meaningless. �- 319 - "Proper use" levels for various browse species have been established largely from clipping study results. Culley et ale (1933) presented differences between clipping methods and natural grazing by animals which prevent unqualified application of such results. Probably the most important pertain to methodology in selection and removal of forage. Neff (1963) cautions widespread application of clipping results until we acquire a better basic ecological understanding of the different plant communities. Recommended "proper use" values for bitterbrush vary between 50 and 65 percent removal of GAG (Garrison 1953, Hormay 1943, Hubbard et ale 1960, and Steinhoff 1959). Price (1939) stated that leaving an average one inch of GAG on mahogany appears to represent a safe and practical degree of utilization. His recommendations cannot be assigned a percentage value due to fluctuating annual production and because he clipped only "accessible" twigs, a qualification subject to varied interpretations. Some work has been done with species related generically to those in the paddocks: Cercocarpus breviflorus (Neff 1963), Cercocarpus ledifolius (Garrison 1953), and Amelanchier alnifolia (Young and Payne 1948). Recommended "proper use" for these species varies from 50 to 75 percent. In the paddocks, utilization in excess of 60 percent was recorded 12 out of a possible 65 times (Table 11). In 1963, utilization of mountain mahogany under all five stocking rates exceeded this level. The 65 percent mark was surpassed seven times and only with bitterbrush and mahogany. Application of Price's criteria of leaving one inch of GAG on mahogany, disregarding the accessibility factor, indicates excessive use of this species 12 out of 20 times. Nearly all occurred when the mean stem length before browsing was already less than, or was only slightly greater than, one inch. Since utilization should vary with annual production under a given browsing pressure, study averages are more realistic values for assessing "proper use". Average minimum and maximum utilization percentages in the paddocks were 42 and 58 for mahogany, 28 and 55 for bitterbrush, and 17 and 38 for serviceberry. Paddock rankings on this basis directly reflect stocking intensities, but again not in true proportions. Similarity in utilization between treatments suggests maximum browse use was approached under existing conditions even at some of the lighter stocking rates. A condition most noticeable in this respect was snow cover (Fig. 7). Loveless (1967) stated snow depth was probably the prime deterrent to winter forage utilization by deer. Cowan (1947) stated that six or more inches of snow could be expected to alter food habits of big game 0 Mean annual snow depths during the paddock study were from 8 to 18 inches. It might be expected that increased snow depth would tend to narrow the range in utilization between paddocks, but this did not happeno Possibly the critical mean depth that materially affects deer foraging habits, at least in the Piceance area, is near eight inches. Snow crusting, depending upon its severity, could have a profound effect on browse utilizationo Crusting did occur some years, but no records were kept of ito �- 320 Several other factors influenced utilization to varied but unknown degrees. Each year a few bushes showed evidence of rabbit use. Most was of minor consequence, but in 1967, mountain mahogany was eaten quite extensively in two paddocks. Three of ten tagged plants at 60 dd/acre and nine at 10 dd/acre incurred moderate to heavy rabbit damage. On one bush in the latter pen, 94 percent of the GAG plus considerable older wood was nipped off. How much, if any, the deer also ate is not known. Rabbits did not bother serviceberry and bitterbrush much but they often ate snowberry, which the deer used only sparingly. Poor condition of the experimental animals undoubtedly affected utilization in some cases. Nearly all deer were bruised or injured during stocking. They would dash repeatedly into fences, many receiving lacerations about the head. Sore mouths quite likely led to reduced food consumption by some animals. Most injuries were not obvious from casual inspection, but even if they were, it is impossible to quantify their effects on deer browsing habits. A final and quite nebulous factor is the effects on foraging habits of behavioral changes exhibited by wild deer in confinement. Unfortunately, we probably know the least about this most important consideration. Rumen Contents Rumen content samples from deer stocked during the first and fifth years reveal little in regard to key browse utilization between treatments (Table 12). All three species were found only in small amounts or not at all in most samples, except that noticeably greater quantities of serviceberry were present in samples from 10 dd/acre both years. The most conspicuous aspect of the food habits data is the large amount of pinyon pine eaten by all deer. Estimated proportions of this food, by paddock, ranged from 30 to 84 percent in 1963, and from 55 to 93 percent in 1967. Pine consumption was not entirely related to stocking rates, but the smallest percentages were found in the 10 dd/acre samples both years. The approximate 20 percent higher averages in 1967 may be mostly related to lower forage production and deeper snow. Samples from the two deer collected on open range in 1963 contained the same general proportions of the various forage species as did those from the paddock deer. The high percentage of pine eaten under natural conditions may be normal, but conclusions cannot be based on only two samples. Rumen content samples were taken the last day of stocking and are indicative of forage use only for that time. What deer browsing habits were like at the start and how they changed during the 20-day period is unknown. Superficially, these results tend to support the implication that maximum utilization of key browse was approached under existing conditions even at some of the lighter stocking rates. However, the small sample sizes (only two to six deer per paddock) and lack of information throughout the stocking period leave many questions unanswered. �- 321 Vegetation Ground Cover Only the ground cover components of total browse, key browse, grass, and forbs were treated statistically-. Here again, as with the production and utilization data, sampling adequacy fell short of expected levels. The precision attained with 16 transects per paddock was estimated to be within 30 and 45 percent of the true mean ground cover percentages at the 90 percent confidence level for total and key browse, respectively. For grasses and forbs, precision was estimated to be only within 60 and 45 percent of the true means, respectively, at the same confidence level. In 1967, ground coverage of nearly all understory vegetation was slightly advanced over that in 1962 (Table 13). Much of these increases was probably elicited by greater precipitation in 1967, 8.6 inches (January through July) versus 6.8 inches in 1962, but observer error is also suspecto I Increases in total browse ranged from 2.6 to 8.8 percento The largest gains were recorded at 0 and 10 dd/acre and the smallest at 20 and 60 dd/acreo Differences between treatment means and the corresponding year means were fairly constant as indicated by a non-significant year x treatment interaction (p) 0.05) (Table 14). Further analysis of the browse category by combined key species reveals a reversed trend, lesser crown cover at all stocking rates except 10 dd/acre. But here again, no significance was found (p> .05). Serviceberry comprised about 90 percent of the key browse intercept and changes were influenced by it. Separate analyses by species were not warranted due to the infrequent occurrence of both bitterbrush and mountain mahogany along transects, but a summary of browse intercepts by species is presented in Table 15 0 Reductions of serviceberry ranged from 0.1 to 4.4 percent. The largest occurred at 30 and 40 dd/acre and the smallest under non-use. Mahogany generally decreased and bitterbrush showed mostly slight gains, but changes in both species were generally less than 0.5 percent The significance of reduced serviceberry cover is enhanced in terms of precipitation differences between years, but is nullified by the narrow ranges in utilization between paddocks. o Perhaps the most noteworthy change in regard to "other browse" occurred with pinyon pineo Pine understory intercept increased 3 1 to 8.8 percent in all pens except 60 dd/acre There pine, though comprising only 101 percent of the composition in 1962, disappeared entirely from transects in 1967. This supports observations of heavy pine utilization at 60 dd/ acre late in the study (Fig. 8). The implication of overstocking is not justified in this instance as no other supporting data exist. 0 o Large increases in pinyon intercept in some paddocks suggest errors in measurement rather than true change. Pines in this semi-arid climate do not grow as fast as indicated by some of the figures and no increase in tree density was detected. Both grass and forb intercepts increased paddock-wide except in the unfenced control where grass declined 0.8 percent Differences between o �- 322 treatment means and the corresponding year means were significant for grass (p < .05) but not forbs (p > .05) (Table 14). It is inconceivable that grasses and forbs would be directly affected by deer use in the paddocks as they were largely unavailable under the snow. Instead, treatment induced changes would more likely be in response to large alterations in browse cover which did not happen. As indicated paddock-wide reduction in overstory ranged from 0 8 to 3.9 percent. It is improbable that deer browsing would materially affect the tree canopy beyond the animal's reach in only five yearso The small declines could reflect observer differences in the "eyeballing" technique used to plumb aerial portions of trees above the transect line as much as anything. However, some large trees in the area did die during the study. 0 As expected, the non-vegetal aspects of litter and bare ground decreased. These changes have little meaning as a negative reflection of vegetative responses was the only alternative. Browse Density The numbers of browse plants counted on 1 x 50-foot plots during 1962 and 1967 are shown in Table 16. No attempt was made at analysis by age and hedging class due to observational errors between years. One of these stemmed from personal judgment in delineating individual plants. This problem was most acute with serviceberry and snowberry because of their growth characteristics and abundance. Serviceberry sprouts profusely from a large spreading root system. Snowberry readily reproduces by layering, often creating a maze of plants. The new bushes thus formed are still attached to the parent yet possess their own root systems to varying degrees. Smaller units of serviceberry clumps were considered individual plants. Though the same guidelines were used both years, the first few transects in 1967 produced nearly twice the total number of plants counted in 1962 which was obviously erroneous. An on-site revision of the criteria yielded numbers seemingly more comparable although some large discrepancies still persisted. Judgment error was also present in the assignment of age and hedging classes as indicated by some consistently large differences between years in all paddocks. For the key browse category, the proportions of young plants increased an average 19 percent, mostly at the expense of the mature class. The spread is even greater for the "other browse" category where the proportions of young plants increased an average 53 percent and the mature and decadent classes decreased 32 and 21 percent, respectively. The situation with hedging class assignments of young plants in hedging class 1 generally the expense of the two older classes. is similar. The proportions increased considerably at �- 323 - It is possible these changes are reflections of true happenings. However, problems with bush delineation and age and hedging class assignments make this an unsafe assumption. During the course of the study, a photographic record was kept of one bush per paddock of each key speci~s. Figures 9 through 12 depict preand post-study appearances of bushes in a few selected paddocks. All pictures were taken during late fall after plant dormancy and prior to stocking. In general, serviceberry showed comparatively little change in appearance over the five-year period regardless of stocking rate. Bitterbrush at 60 dd/acre produced most of its growth within one foot of the ground where snow cover afforded some protection from browsing. Mahogany in this paddock produced numerous root sprouts which were apparently not hindered by browsing as evidenced by the fair degree of vertical development. Bitterbrush at 40 dd/acre showed arrestment of vertical development, but the appearance of mahogany remained essentially unchanged. At all lesser stocking rates, bitterbrush and mahogany both increased considerably in size and developed linear growth forms indicative of light use. These photographs tend to portray a reasonable relationship between deer stocking intensities and vigoro The representativeness of these selected plants can be questioned. Casual obs~rvations, particularly in the lighter and non-use paddocks, indicate some examples slightly exaggerate the typical plant responses. Deer Weight Responses Most of the 57 deer for which complete records are available lost weight during confinement in the paddocks. Five does, two each at 30 and 40 dd/acre and one at 20/dd acre, maintained their initial weights. The high and low mean weight loss rates of 0 7 and 0.3 pounds per day occurred at 20 and 10 dd/acre, respectively (Table 17). High individual variability coupled with small sample sizes do not justify a sex and age breakdown by paddock or statistical analysis of the data. It looks obvious though, that there are no appreciable differences between paddocks except possibly for the almost consistently smaller losses at 10 dd/acre. Of note is that indicated weight losses in all paddocks in 1964 were among the least of any year despite the lowest browse production of the study. This situation is just cause for suspicion. 0 The paddocks were stocked during what is generally the severest part of the winter. During this time deer normally decline in weight and condition. Thus, the degree of reduction should be considered but cannot. Any projection of the data to an entire winter period would entail the invalid ~ssumption of constant weight loss rates. This was done, however, but only as a matter of interest. All data were combined by sex, and study means calculated. Mean losses were then projected to a 70-day crucial wintering period (Smith 1959) and expressed as a percentage of the initial mean weight of deer used in the paddockso �- 324 At stocking time, bucks averaged 134 pounds and does 128 pounds. Projected losses based on these figures were 37 and 27 percent for bucks and does, respectively. The maximum sustainable weight loss by white-tailed deer (Odocoi1eus virginianus) has been reported at 30 percent by Davenport (1939) and Verme (1968) and 25 percent by Severinghaus (1947). Leopold et a1. (1951) reported that a mule deer buck in California lost 37 percent of its original weight in 4-1/2 months and s~rvived. Based on the above percentages for white-tails, nearly all the bucks and many of the does in the paddocks theoretically would have died before the end of winter. Caution is required in consideration of the weight data from a standpOint of mechanics. Improperly functioning scales resulted in rejection of all weights taken in 1965. Problems with scale adjustment, together with a few "odd" weights at other times, cast some doubt on the validity of remaining ones, particularly for the five does which presumably lost no weight. Condition of the animals could also have a large bearing on the results. Injuries incurred during stocking and confinement, overexertion during both stocking and removal operations, and stress during confinement could, separately or all together, have a tremendous effect on weight changes and conceal any true responses to treatment. Other Results Browse Utilization Estimates The utilization estimates for the key browse species are expressed as actual percentage differences from the results of the stem measurements (Table 18). The average deviations of the estimates from the measurements were similar for all species; 13 to 16 percent disregarding sign. Estimates of bitterbrush and serviceberry utilization were mostly low while those for mahogany favored the high side. There were no discernible correlations between the size of deviation and stocking intensity. Thus, it could be assumed that the observer was not appreciably influenced by prior knowledge of stocking rates. Although some deviations were quite small, there were considerably large ones. One-third of them were greater than ± 15 percent and one-fourth greater than t 25 percent. Estimates were also much more variable than the measurement. Even when only four or five hits were made on a palatable species, it was not uncommon for individual estimates to range from 0 to 90 percent. In consideration of the preparation and work involved and the high variability encountered, ocular browse utilization estimates, as done in the paddocks, were little better than a wild guess. �- 325 - Regression: Browse Utilization on Production Browse utilization, when expressed in actual stem length removed, was linearly correlated with production for all three species (p <.05) (Table 19). All correlations were positive except for serviceberry on an individual bush basis, which was negative. On a bush basis, production accounted for 4 and 45 percent of the variation associated with utilization of serviceberry and mountain mahogany, respectively, and from 19 to 56 percent of that with bitterbrush. On a paddock basis, the accountable variation for serviceberry and mahogany increased to 19 and 90 percent, respectively, which suggests deer responded more to production over a wider area rather than on smaller entities such as a plant. The lesser increase for serviceberry could relate to lower preference for this species. The large standard errors in all cases evidence great variability which severely hinders application of the data for prediction purposes. The relationships with production become poorer in all respects with utilization expressed in percent. In only four cases were significant linear correlations demonstrated (p <.05) and the highest accountable variation for any species was only 23 percent. This implies percent utilization is a poor indicator of browsing pressure, at least within the production limits experienced here, and should be related to production to get a truer picture of events. In several California studies the volume of browse consumed by livestock remained fairly constant although percentage utilization fluctuated (Dasmann and Blaisdell 1954, and Interstate Deer Herd Committee 1954). Range pressure by deer, however, was more variable. Harris (1954) found percent utilization of major forage species by livestock was generally higher during dry years. Paced Condition Transects and Line Intercept Transects: A Comparison The largest differences between the condition and the line intercept transect results were with litter, the line transects yielding significantly higher percentages (p <.01) (Table 20). The only other significant difference occurred with total browse (p < 001) 0 Again, the line transects had consistently higher percentages. It is obvious in the data that a distinct year difference existed in some cases. The use of different crews each time was probably the biggest reason for this. In light of this situation, separate analyses were made by year. This time only differences in total grass and forb percentages in 1962 and overstory percentages in 1967 were not significant (p > 005) • Reasons for disparities in results from the two methods stem basically from procedural differences. Several major ones are summarized as follows together with the effect each theoretically has on results. �- 326 - Condition 1. Overstory growth within six feet of the ground was considere~ browse. 2. Measurements were made along a straight line regardless of obstacles. Higher litter and lower bare ground percentages the line transects. Overstory was considered ground cover component. Effect: 1. Higher browse percentage with line transects. Observer walked only in open~ngs between shrubs and trees. Effect: 3. Line Intercept Transects No overstory species was considered browse regardless of height. Effect: 2. Tradsects a 3 0 with Overstory was not considered a ground cover component but was figured separately. Slightly higher percentages for all ground cover categories with the line transects. Most of the the above effects are reflected in the results in Table 19. One notable exception is the consistently higher bare ground percentages along line transects in 1967. This comparison substantiates that procedural differences invalidate direct comparison of results from paced condition transects and line intercept transects. This is an important consideration when comparing seemingly similar quantities arrived at by different techniques. Pellet-group Counts The proportions of deer pellet groups on the interior study acres in the paddocks ranged from 34 to 65 percent with a mean of 52 percent (Table 21). As expected, deer did "walk the fences" as evidenced by well-trodden trails in the snow, but such activity was probably not excessive. No data adjustments were applied in reference to pellet-group distributions as in only a two or four-acre area it is presumptuous to assume deer activity in various portions of each pen was truly proportionate to pellet-group densities. Defecation rates were not figures for those paddocks in which one or more deer died during confine~ent or where they did not appear to act normally. Neither were data from 1964 used because counts that year were made by one person in late May and early June, after plant growth was well underway. Resultantly, only 16 of the 25 possible counts were considered. Because of the small sample sizes, statistical comparisons between paddocks and years were not made, but confidence limits were set on the overall mean. Deer defecation rates were'quite variable, more so between years than paddocks (Table 22). The rates do not bear any relationship to browse production or utilization based on stem measurements. This is understandable as not all forage species were considered. �- 327 - Defecation rate extremes were 9.6 and 17.6 groups per day and the study mean was 12.9 groups. The 95 percent confidence interval of 11.7 to 14.1 groups per day encompasses the 13.0 groups rate commonly used. Smith (1964) emphasized the importance of fawns on pellet-group deposition rates. He found a 16.9 groups per day average for mule deer fawns fed a native forage diet in winter and even higher rates when concentrates were added. In contrast, Eberhardt and Van Etten (1956) reported lower rates for white-tail fawns than for adults in winter. No attempt was made to adjust the paddock data for the absence of fawns as the results would be essentially meaningless in light of the limited and conflicting information available on the subject. A variety of other factors also have pronounced effects on calculated defecation rates. Neff (1968) summarized most of these in his review of the pellet-group count technique. Probably the most important is missed groups error. In the paddocks, each strip was double-checked. In 1967, the second round produced an average 10.3 percent of the total groups tallied. A third search was not made but certainly groups were still missed. Some error was attributable to inseparable groups. Generally, there was little problem distinguishing the current year pellets. Older pellets were decidely weathered and remnants of paint were still visible. Most difficulty arose in separating current groups. Though not indicated in the data, the problem became acute at the heavier stocking rates where a greater number of groups would be superimposed. Also, groups deposited along fence lines were usually strewn out and churned by deer walking the same path. Characteristics of size, shape, and color were considered in all cases. One factor not mentioned by Neff, but of some importance in the paddocks, was condition of the animals. As mentioned earlier, some deer sustained varying degrees of injury during stocking operations, many of which went unnoticed. In 1967, when one of the two deer at 20 dd/acre suffered a fractured sternabrae (as later determined during necropsy), the mean defecation rate for that pen was only 8.3 groups per day. Since this animal displayed visible signs of injury while confined, the count was not used. Smith (1964) observed higher defecation rates when deer were switched from natural forage to artificial feeds, particularly concentrates It could logically be assumed that the reverse may also be trueo Prior to stocking the last three years, deer in the holding pen were fed alfalfa hay and commercial sheep pellets. Some coalesced groups found in the paddocks were probably aftermaths of this feeding. o Neff (1964) reported numerous small groups and a high mean defecation rate caused by hyperactivity in a penned wild buck. All deer used in the paddocks were wild-trapped each year. Whether or not captivity evoked similar responses from them is not known. �- 328 - CONCLUSIONS It is quite apparent from the preceding discussions of the study results that no decisive changes in those range or animal characteristics measured were detected under any deer stocking rate. Excessive utilization of pinyon pine at 60 dd/acre produced the only gross visible change in the vegetation, but implications of this situation are weakened in that no other browse species appeared overutilized. That key browse production and vegetative density were not materially affected over the study period is understandable in terms of utilization which was not excessive even under the heaviest stocking. Ranges in utilization were also quite small. The maximum differences between studylong paddock means were only 16 percent for mahogany, 21 percent for serviceberry, and 27 percent for bitterbrush. As results pertaining to all aspects of the paddock study are generally inconclusive in terms of the original objective, no recommendations are forthcoming along these lines. Instead, the greatest value to be gained from this work probably is the knowledge of problems that can arise in a study of this type. The major pitfalls encountered are listed below and each is then further discussed relative to the paddock study. Some are difficulties inherent in most research endeavors and others are more specific in nature. 1. 2. 3 4. 5. 6. 0 Duration of the study was too short. Characteristic large inherent variability associated with range vegetation. Inadequate techniques. Unmeasurable influence of extraneous variables. Unpredictableness of wild deer. Excessive workload for the time and manpower available. 1. Duration of the study was too short -- Even if high levels of browse utilization had been attained in the paddocks, it is doubtful that any definite conclusions would have been possible in the short time span of the study. Neff (1963) concluded from his browse clipping project in Arizona that five years was not sufficient to fully establish the response of shrubs to treatment. He found most significant differences between treatments for three browse species to be manifested in mean twig length, the longer stems being associated with the heavier clips. Shepherd's (1958) preliminary results after eight years of clipping at Mesa Verde National Park indicate no significant differences in forage weight production, and few for mean stem length, between treatments ranging from 0 to 100 percent removal of current annual growth. The final analyses and report on this study, not yet complete, may provide a clearer picture of events. Evidently the hardy resistance of range shrubs to both browsing and precipitation extremes tends to render most short-term studies of this type impractical Until we can identify and interpret precursory responses of such plants to various stimuli, studies of longer duration seem the only alternative o o 2. Characteristic large inherent variability associated with range vegetation -- The large degree of he t erogened.t y associated with range vegetation �- 329 creates tremendous sampling problems. More often than not, sample sizes for a desired precision level must be larger than is practical, or even possible, to attain. Sampling designs must be carefully developed to achieve optimum efficienty in effort expended and results received. This ties in with the next problem, inadequate techniques. 3. Inadequate techniques -- Admittedly, better sampling techniques are available than some of those used in the paddocks. Although, even most newer techniques are quite limited in their effectiveness in coping with highly variable populations. This problem is elementary and little more needs to be said in this regard. 4. Unmeasurable influence of extraneous variables -- Separating treatment effects from those produced by other factors is an impossible task. Minimization of these effects is our only hope. Probably the most important ones in this study were those associated with the use of wild deer (which are discussed separately) precipitation, and observer differences. Of all conditions affecting forage production, precipitation was perhaps foremost. It would have been impossible to detect any except very large treatment responses due to its overriding influence. Even when significant treatment differences were detected, precipitation, together with a multitude of other variables, prohibited drawing conclusions. Though not demonstrated in the data, deep snow probably altered patterns of forage utilization by deer. A late fall or early winter stocking period would have allowed fuller impact of deer use on the range and the possibility of snow would have been reduced. However, it was believed physiological responses of deer to varying range conditions would be elicited quicker and be more pronounced during the severest part of the winter. This reasoning was the determining factor in choosing stocking dates. Observer error was obvious in several sets of the paddock data and highly suspect in most others. Rarely did the same people do the same work two years in a row, much less over the entire study period. It is important to preserve continuity of personnel in the actual data gathering. Fulltime researchers should do this work with temporaries assigned closely supervised assistant roles. A complete set of detailed procedures for each is a necessity. This will not only reduce many problems resulting from personnel change-over, but will also serve as a refresher for the same personnel, especially when a job is repeated only once every few years. 5. Unpredictableness of wild deer -- The use of wild deer as experimental animals created problems not only in application of treatment, but also in the analysis and interpretation of results. No set of data was free from these effects. Poor condition of the deer resulting from injuries and exhaustion was of definite consequence in some cases. Most, if not all, of the 15 deaths that occurred during stocking, or shortly thereafter, were probably directly related to these hardships. �- 330 - Perhaps the greatest question with the use of wild deer is the unknown effects of confinement on behavior. There is no doubt that deer behavior was altered in the paddocks, but in what way and to what extent remain mysteries. Kaufmann and Kaufmann (1963), commenting on the relationship between field and laboratory studies, state: "in general, distortions in behaviour can be expected to increase in proportion to the following three factors: the amount of spatial restriction beyond that normally encountered by wild populations, the number and nature of stimuli normally encountered in undisturbed (by man) wild situations that are lacking in the study situation, and the number and nature of stimuli found in the study situations which are not normally encountered by undisturbed wild populations." The most feasible alternative to using wild deer in situations such as this is to use tame or semi-tame animals; tame at least to the extent they will tolerate the presence of man without exhibiting undue fright. This introduces other behavioral considerations, but the ease of handling with resultant fewer injuries would probably more than compensate for any disadvantages. One final consideration pertaining to the animals, whether wild or tame, is achieving similarity in sex and age classes between treatments and years. It is impossible to approximate normal herd composition with small numbers of deer and this would minimize another important variable. 6. Excessive workload for the time and manpower available -- Any research endeavor should be limited to those jobs which relate specifically to the study objectives and that can be accomplished within the time and manpower reserves available. Exploration of problems unrelated to the study objectives usually takes valuable time away from more important activities and the end result of such ventures generally produce little additional knowledge. A critical review of the entire project on an annual basis will enable revising or weeding out those jobs which are not producing or are impossible to accomplish. The time for change is immediately, not five years later. Prepared by~~~~~~~~~~~~ Ri M. Bartmann Asst. Wildlife Researcher �- 331 - LITERATURE Anonymous. 1956. Range Analysis Forest Service, Region Two. CITED Handbook. U. S. Dept. Agriculture, Chap. 8. Mimeo. Baker, B. D. 1961. A directory of Colorado big game exclosures concerning program history, study techniques, locations, and other general information. Colorado Game and Fish Dept. Spec. Rept., P-R Proj. W-I0I-R-3. 5lp. Basile, J. V., and S. S. Hutchings. 1966. Twig diameter-length-weight relations of bitterbrush. J. Range Mgmt. 19(1):34-38. Canfield, R. H. 1941. Application of the line interception sampling range vegetation. J. For. 39(4):388-394. method in 1957. Sampling ranges by the line interception method. Southwestern Forest and Range Exp. Sta., Forest Service, Res. Repto 4. 28p. Cooper, C. F. density. 1957. The variable plot method J. Range Mgmt. 10(3):111-115. for estimating shrub Cowan, I. McT. 1947. Range competition between mule deer, bighorn sheep, and elk in Jasper Park, Alberta. Trans. N. Am. Wildl. Conf. 12:223-227. Culley, M. J., R. S. Campbell, and R. H. Canfield. 1933. Values and limitations of clipped quadrats. Ecology l4(1)~35-39. Dasmann, W. p., and J. A. Blaisdell. 1954. Deer and forage relationships on the Lassen-Washoe interstate winter deer range. Calif. Fish and Game 40(3):215-234. Davenport, A. D. 1939. Results of deer feeding trials at Cusino, Michigan. Trans. N. Am. Wildl. Conf. 4:268-274. Eberhardt, L., and R. C. Van Etten. 1956. Evaluation of the pellet group count as a deer census method. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 20(1):70-74. Garrison, G. A. 1953. Effects Range Mgmt. 6(5):309-317. of clipping on some range shrubs. J. Harris, R. W. 1954. Fluctuation in forage utilization on ponderosa pine ranges in eastern Oregon. J. Range Mgmt. 7(6):250-255. Hepler, Opal E. 1957. Manual of clinical Thomas, Springfield, 1110 387p. laboratory methods. C. C. Hormay, A. L. 1943. A method of estimating grazing use of bitterbrush. Calif. Forest and Range Exp. Sta., Res. Note 35. 4p. �- 332 Hubbard, R. L., H. R. Sanderson, and D. Dunaway. 1960. Herbage production and carrying capacity of bitterbrush. Pacific Southwest For. and Range Exp. Sta., Res. Note 157. 6p. Interstate Deer Herd Committee. 1954. Eighth progress cooperative study of the Devil's Garden interstate its range. Calif. Fish and Game 40(3):235-266. report on the deer herd and Kaufmann, J. H., and Arleen Kaufmann. 1963. Some comments on the relationship between field and laboratory studies of behaviour with special reference to coatis. Anim. Behavior 11(4):464-469. Leopold, A. S., T. Riney, R. McCain, and L. Tevis, Jr. 1951 The Jawbone deer herd. Calif. Div. Fish and Game, Game Bull. 4. 139po 0 Loveless, C. M. 1967. Ecological char~cteristics of a mule deer winter range. Colorado Dept. Game, Fish and Parks, Tech. Publ. 20 124po 0 Mustard, E. Wo, Jr. 1958. Browse differences in experimental pastures under controlled stocking with cattle, sheep, and mule deer in northwest Colorado. M.S. Thesis, Colorado State Univ., Ft. Collins. 105p. Neff, Do Jo 1963. The effects of clipping on the vigor of big game browse plants and related studies in the Arizona chaparral. PhoD. Dissertation, Oregon State Univ., Corvallis. 117p. 1964 Deer population Fish Dept., Job Completion Multilith. 0 trend techniques. Arizona Rept., P-R Proj. W-78-R-8. Game and 6po 1968. The pellet-group count technique for big game trend, census, and distribution: a review. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 32(3):597-614. Price, R, 1939. The effects of fall clipping intensities on yield and vigor of two important western browse plants. M.S. Thesis, Yale Univ. New Haven, Conn. 52p. Riordan, L. E. 1956. Selectivity and utilization of three key species of range forage for cattle, sheep, and deer in western Colorado. M.So Thesis, Colorado State Univ., Ft. Collins. 196p. Schuster, J. L. 1965. Estimating browse from twig and stem measurements. Jo Range Mgmt. 18(4):220-222. Severinghaus, Co W. 1947. Relationship of weather to winter mortality and population levels among deer in the Adirondack region of New York. Trans. N. Am. Wildl. Conf. 12:212-223 0 Shepherd, H. R. 1958. Mesa Verde clip plot study. p. 33-45. In 1958 Quarterly Rept., July, Job Completion Rept. W-38-R-ll. Colorado Game and Fish Dept., Denver. Multilith. �- 333 Smith, A. D. 1959. Adequacy of some important browse species in overwintering of mule deer. J. Range Mgmt. 12(1):8-13. 1964. Defecation 28(3):435-444. Snedecor, G. W. Press, Ames 0 J. Wi1d1. Mgmt. rates of mule deer. 1967. Statistical 593p. Methods. The Iowa State College Steinhoff, H. W. 1959. Some effects of clipping bitterbrush at different intensities. Trans. Ann. Summe r Conf ,, Central Mts. and Plains Sect., The Wild1. Soc. 4:23-24. U. S. Weather Bureau. 1946-67. Climatological data: Colorado (monthly summaries, Little Hills). Vo1s. 51-72. Verme, L. U. 1968. An index to winter weather deer. J. Wi1d1. Mgmt. 32(3):566-574. severity for northern Young, V. A., and G. F. Payne. 1948. Utilization of "key" browse species in relation to proper grazing practices in cutover western white pine lands in northern Idaho. J. For. 46(1):35-40. �- 334 - List of Figures Fig. I. Paddock system layout. Example of the sample design used on the center study acres in the paddockso Fig. 3~ Typical winter range around Little Hills~ The view is to the north and the paddocks lie along the ridgetop near the right side of the picture. Fig. 4~ Aerial view of the paddocks. Fig. 50 Relationship between key browse production and precipitation. Production values are averages of all paddocks. Fig. 6. Relationship between key browse production Values are averages of all paddocks. Fig. 7. Deep snow in the paddocks during stocking usually covered many of the shorter plants such as this bitterbrush. Fig. 8. Pinyon pine at 60 deer-days per acre (left) was used destructively by deer, whereas pine trees were in good shape at the next lower stocking rate of 40 deer-days per acre. Fig. 9. Pre- and post-treatment photos of the same key browse plants at 60 deer-days per acre. A and B are true mountain mahogany, C and D are antelope bitterbrush, and E and F are serviceberry. Fig. 10. Pre- and post-treatment photos of the same key browse plants at 40 deer-days per acre. A and B are true mountain mahogany~ C and D are antelope bitterbrush and E and F are serviceberry. Fig. II. Pre- and post-treatment photos of the same key browse plants at 10 deer-days per acre. A and B are true mountain mahogany, C and D are antelope bitterbrush, a~d E and F are serviceberry. Fig. 120 Pre- and post-treatment photos of the same key browse plants in the non-use (fenced control) paddocko A and B are true mountain mahogany, C and D are antelope bitterbrush, and E and Fare serviceberry. Appendix Fig. 1. and utilization. B Distribution of bone marrow fat percentages by estimated age of mule deer in the paddockso All but one value are for the right femur. �- 335 - r-----, I Paddock 1 1 1 (2 acres) 1 160 deer-days I I L.. per acre (6 deer) I ..J1 r----l I Paddock 2 I I (2 acres) I 40 deer-days I per acre I (4 deer) L I I I ..J r------, I Paddock 3 I I (2 acres) 1 30 dee r-days] r-----, I Paddock 6 I I (4 acres) I 10 deer-daysl I per acre I I (2 deer) I L J Handling chute V __L-~====~~~------;, ~,-r------, 1 I I per acre IL(3 deer) ...J I Paddock 4 1 I (2 acres) I fenced control I Holding pen (4 acres) 1 1 (no deer) I L .J r-----, I Paddock 5 I I (2 acres) I 20 deer-daysl I per acre I I (2 deer)_ J L 7.; Paddock (i-acre study plot) unfenced control (stocking variable) r-----, I I I I 1 I I L ....• I I Deer-proof ~- fence Gate One-acre study plot boundary Scale o ---100 feet Fig. 1. Paddock system layout. 200 �- 336 - ,50 reet -. ..•• - 50 feet ---•.••. -50 feet ~ 50 reet 1 ----r- x X , , .""""'i':'::"":':':"""'/"'!!!!'!":"":~'i' :~::::::::::~::::::::::::/0;17" X X •• • 218 feet X • • X ,• I'l!!!l'm!~!t:""""",:,:",:"""""""":,:,,,:"':':'::':':':':'::':'::::0:::,:':':: 50-foot line intercept transect • 1 x 50-foot belt transect , Tagged mountain mahogany bush X Tagged serviceberry bush Tagged bitterbrush bush Fig. 2. Example of the sample design used on the center study acres in the paddocks. �- 337 - Fig. 3. Typical winter range around Little Hills. The view is to the north and the paddocks lie along the ridgetop near the right side of the picture. �- 338 - Fig. 4. Aerial view of the paddockso �- 339 - Precipitation True mountain mahogany ----- Antelope bitterbrush ------------ Serviceberry 24 12 22 11 ...-.. 20 10 II) ~ ~ S 18 9 .£! bO ·rl rl rl ·rl ::J 8 s 16 Ct-! 0 II) 11m 14 7 II) ::J 0 .£! ~ '--' 12 6 m ~ s::: < ~s::: / 10 8 5 \ t' m ~ m '--' / 4 / 4 \ / Q) ~ C4 0 3 II) Q) .£! o s::: .,", •..•... , .•........ ," "' ... ,- " 1962 ·rl 0... Ct-! '\ I ,," ,~ I ~ I ,,~ 2 ~ m ~ o / 6 s::: ·rl \ ~ ~ ~ (.) \ \ Q) ::J ~ ~ 0 ·rl 1\ a rl 0 .£! 'J .£! ~0 ~ .s ~ Q) Q) ...-.. 2 H 1 1964 1966 Year Fig. 5. Relationship between key browse production and precipitation. Production values are aver~ges of all paddocks. �- 340 - -------- Production ----- Utilization 2~ 22 20 True Mountain Mahogany 18 16 1~ 12 1'0 8 6 ~ 2 12 Antelope Bitterbrush 10 8 6 ~ 2 Serviceberry 6 ~ 2 ----- ----------------.........•. 1962-63 1965-66 1963-6~ Year Fig. 6. Relationship between key browse production and utilization. Values are averages of all p~ddocks. 1966-67 �- 341 " t Fig. 7. Deep snow in the paddocks during stocking usually many of the shorter plants such as this bitte:cbrush o covered �w .pi'" Fig. 8. Pinyon pine at 60 deer-days per acre (left) was used destructively by deer, whereas pine trees were in good shape at the next lower stocking rate of 40 deer-days per acre. �- 343 = A. Pre-treatment, true mountain mahogany. B. Post-treatment, true mountain mahogany. Figo 9 Pre- and post-treatment photos of the same key browse plants at 60 deer-days per acreo A and B are true mountain mahogany, C and D are antelope bitterbrush, and E and F are serviceberry. 0 �- 344 - C. Pre-treatment, antelope bitterbrush. D. Post-treatment, antelope bitterbrush. Fig. 9. Pre- and post-treatment photos of the same key browse plants at 60 deer-days per acre. A and B are true mountain mahogany, C and D are antelope bitterbrush, and E and F are serviceberry (continued). �- 345 - E. Pre-treatment, serviceberry. F. Post-treatment, serviceberry. Fig. 9 Pre- and post-treatment photos of the same key browse plants at 60 deer-days per acre. A and B are true mountain mahogany, C and D are antelope bitterbrush, and E and F are serviceberry (continued). 0 �c. 346 ~. A. Pre-'treatment,true mountain mahogany. B. Post-treatment, true mountain mahogany. Figo 10 Pre- and post-treatment photos of the same key browse plants at 40 deer=days per acre, A and B are true mountain mahogany, C and D are antelope bitterbrush, and E and F are serviceberry. 0 �- 347 - C. Pre-treatment, antelope bitterbrush a D. Post-treatment, antelope bitterbrush. Fig. 10& Pre- and post-treatment photos of the same key browse plants at 40 deer-days per acre. A and B are true mountain mahogany, e and D are antelope bitterbrush, and E and Fare serviceberrYo(continued). �- 348 - E. Pre-treatment, serviceberry. F. Post-treatment, serviceberry. Figo 10 Pre- and post-treatment photos of the same key browse plants at 40 deer-days per acreo A and B are true mountain mahogany, C and D are antelope bitterbrush~ and E and F are serviceberry. 0 �- %9 - A. Pre-treatment, true mountain mahogany. B. Post-treatment, true mountain mahogany. Fig. 110 Pra- and posc-Lrearrnent photos of the same key browse plants at 10 deer-days per acre. A and B are true mountain mahogany, C and D are antelope bitterbrush, and E and F are serviceberry. �- 350 - C. Pre-treatment, antelope bitterbrush. D. Post-treatment, antelope bitterbrush. Fig. lIe Pre- and post-treatment photos of the same key browse plants at 10 deer-days per acre. A and B are true mountain mahogany, C and D are antelope bitterbrush, and E and F are serviceberry (continued). �- 351 - E. Pre-treatment, serviceberry. F. Post-treatment, serviceberry. Fig. 11. Pre- and post-treatment photos of the same key browse plants at 10 deer-days per acre. A and B are true mountain mahogany, C and D are antelope bitterbrush, and E and F are serviceberry (continued). �.. 352 ~. A. Pre-treatment, true mountain mahogany. B. Post-treatment, true mountain mahogany. ELg , 120 Pre- and post=t.rearmerrt photos of the same key browse plants in the non-use (Eenced control) paddock, A and B are true mountain mahogaIlY, G and D are antelope bitterbrush~ and E and Fare serviceperry. �- 353 - C. Pre-treatment, antelope bitterbrush. D. Post-treatment, antelope bitterbrush. Fig. 12. Pre- and post-treatment photos of the same key browse plants in the non-use (fenced control) paddock. A and B are true mountain mahogany, C and D are antelope bitterbrush, and E and F are serviceberry. �- 354 - E. Pre-treatment, serviceberry. F. Post-treatment, serviceberry. Fig. 12. Pre- and post-treatment photos of the same key browse plants in the non-use (fenced control) paddockQ A and B are true mountain mahogany, C and D are antelope bitterbrush, and E and F are serviceberry (continued). �- 355 - Table 1. Five-year summary of deer stocking Game Experiment Station, 1963-67. in the paddocks, Little Hills Paddock Deer-days per Acre Desired 1963 Deer-days 1964 1 60 60 6211 62?j 2 40 402/ 4221 3 30 30 32 4 0 5 20 20 21 22 20 21 21 6 10 10 101/ 11 10 10 10 7 1/ 2/ 3/ ~/ 1967 Five-year Mean 60 63 61 44 40 42 42 33 270 30 30 Eer Acre Achieved 1966 1965 fenced control unfenced control - no stocking 0 - open range, stocking variable Three deer died and were replaced with others to maintain stocking. Two deer died, one date estimated, and no replacements were added. One deer died and was replaced with another to maintain stocking. Two deer died and were replaced with others to maintain stocking. �- 356 - Table 2. Years and treatments included in the analysis of variance of production for true mountain mahogany (M), antelope bitterbrush (B), and serviceberry (S). Year 0 1962 M 1963 1/ Deer-days 20 10 MB Y 1964 S MB S per Acre 30 MB 40 60 S M B S M B S B S B S B S B S B S S S S S S 1965 M MB S MB S M B S M B S M B S 1966 M MB S M B S M B S M B S M B S 1/ The fenced control was not measured True mountain mahogany and antelope due to a labor shortage. 2/ in 1963. bitterbrush were not measured in 1964 �Table 3. Current annual growth stem production (mm/plant) of key browse species in the paddocks, Little Hills Game Experiment Station, 1962-66 1/. Deer-dazs Eer Acre 40 30 60 Variable 14,376 12,485 11 ,848 18 149 164 76 26,025 21,546 29,568 22,209 22,142 6,009 5,587 3,467 5,193 5,576 2,699 9,422 9,651 8,059 8,601 9,252 10,231 10,373 1963 not measured 218 1,336 226 437 1,639 412 1965 7,857 11 ,265 13 ,892 9,554 10,213 11,434 7,868 1966 1,957 2,495 11 ,641 5,934 3,797 5,353 2,526 1962 3,920 3,969 4,813 5,469 4,699 4,814 7,099 1963 not measured 1,072 1,574 1,187 1,850 1,347 1,899 1964 1,649 2,210 3,299 4,559 4,765 4,354 3,764 1965 2,113 2,932 5,163 4,621 6,147 4,343 7,888 1966 2,211 2,550 3,832 4,517 4,292 3,919 4,102 20 Species Year ° 10 True mountain mahogany 1962 8,101 15,903 14,696 13,904 1963 not measured 438 120 1965 15,008 25,590 1966 2,538 1962 Antelope Bi tterbrush Serviceberry w 1/ No measurements of true mountain mahogany and antelope bitterbrush were made in 1964 due to a labor shortage. V1 ...•..• �- 358 - Table 4. Paddock rankings of current annual growth stem production browse species, Little Hills Game Experiment Station, 1962-66 y. Species Rank 1962 19631/ Deer-days True mountain mahogany Antelope bitterbrush Serviceberry 1 964'i/ of key 1965 1966 per Acre 1 (high) 10 10 40 10 2 20 60 20 20 3 40 40 10 60 4 30 20 60 40 5 60 30 30 30· 6 (low) 0 0 0 1 (high) 60 60 20 20 2 10 20 60 30 3 0 40 10 60 4 40 30 40 40 5 30 10 30 10 6 (low) 20 0 0 1 (high) 30 40 40 40 30 2 60 20 30 20 40 3 20 60 60 30 60 4 40 30 20 60 20 5 10 10 10 10 10 6 (low) 0 0 0 0 1/ The variable paddock is excluded. No measurements were made in the fenced control in 1963. True mountain mahogany and antelope bitterbrush .were not measured due to a labor shortage. 2/ Ii in 1964 �- 359 - Table 5. Analysis of variance of current annual growth stem production of key browse species in the paddocks, Little Hills Game Experiment Station, 1962-66. Species Source of Variation df True mountain mahogany Total 179 Paddocks 5 8.2719 Bushes/paddocks 54 3.4734 Years 2 50.6487 Years x paddocks 10 0.7722 108 0.7102 Error Antelope bitterbrush Serviceberry Significant (bushes /years x paddocks) F 1.087 199 Total Paddocks 4 7.3938 Bushes/paddocks 45 2.6120 Years 3 210.3844 Years x paddocks 12 5.3621 Error 135 1.3562 (bushes /years x paddocks) 3. 954~b': 249 Total Paddocks 4 1.7616 Bushes/paddocks 45 2.8826 Years 4 13 .6853 Years x paddocks 16 0.3562 180 0.4414 Error i':,~ MS (bushes/years at the 0.01 level. x paddocks) 0.807 �Table 6. Mean current annual growth stem lengths (rom) of key browse species in the paddocks, Little Hills Game Experiment Station, 1962-66. 1/ Species Year 0 10 Deer-da~s Eer Acre 30 40 20 60 Variable True mountain mahogany 1962 71 70 69 64 72 82 65 1963 not measured 17 12 6 17 18 6 1965 74 113 97 86 98 115 90 1966 29 38 34 29 35 43 27 1962 67 65 48 60 65 68 60 1963 not measured 11 20 20 21 47 14 1965 57 75 72 76 74 84 79 1966 26 31 38 48 39 50 32 1962 26 26 23 23 19 21 25 1963 not measured 21 20 19 18 22 15 1964 10 24 30 28 19 24 32 1965 9 23 32 32 28 31 36 1966 20 20 23 28 27 27 19 Antelope bitterbrush Serviceberry 1/ True mountain mahogany and antelope bitterbrush were not measured in 1964 due to a labor shortage. w 0'\ 0 �- 361 - Table 7. Paddock rankings of mean current annual growth stem lengths of key browse species, Little Hills Game Experiment Station, 1962-66. !I Species Rank 1962 1965 1966 Deer-days per Acre True mountain mahogany Antelope bitterbrush Serviceberry II 1 (high) 60 60 60 60 2 40 40 10 10 3 o lO 40 40 4 10 20 20 20 5 20 30 30 30 6 (low) 30 o o 1 (high) 60 60 60 60 2 o 40 30 30 3 40 30 lO 40 4 10 20 40 20 5 30 10 20 lO 6 (low) 20 o o 1 (high) lO 60 20 30 30 2 o 10 30 20 60 3 30 20 60 60 40 4 20 30 10 40 20 5 60 40 40 10 10 6 (low) 40 o o o The variable paddock is excluded. 21 No measurements were made in the fenced control in 1963. II True mountain mahogany and antelope bitterbrush were not measured in 1964 due to a labor shortage. �Table 8. Utilization of key browse current annual growth stems (mm/p1ant) by deer in the paddocks, Little Hills Game Experiment Station, 1963-67. 1/ Deer-days per Acre 30 40 Species Year 10 20 True mountain mahogany 1963 9,717 9,280 10,258 1964 99 44 1966 9,535 1967 Antelope bitterbrush Serviceberry 60 Variable 9,699 9,283 7,434 5 41 54 20 13,994 13,776 13,426 10,967 4,328 2,706 3,514 977 3,852 4,252 1,488 1963 2,466 1,383 3,306 5,496 5,940 5,733 1964 117 697 103 272 1,360 141 1966 1,218 5,075 7,092 1,077 3,049 365 1967 489 1,345 425 1,651 2,716 1,299 1963 1,180 2,041 3,130 1,556 2,179 2,486 1964 304 646 437 1,203 815 1,234 1965 148 765 994 904 1,134 1,164 1966 72 267 643 368 792 581 1967 520 115 1,375 1,751 1,690 172 1/ No measurements of true mountain mahogany and antelope bitterbrush were made in 1965 due to a labor shortage. W 0\ N �- 363 - Table 9. Paddock rankings of key browse current annual growth stem utilization in the paddocks, Little Hills Game Experiment Station, 1963-67. Y Species Rank 1963 1964 19651/ 1966 1967 Deer-days per Acre True mountain mahogany Antelope bitterbrush Serviceberry 1 (high) 30 10 20 60 2 10 60 30 40 3 40 20 40 20 4 60 40 60 10 5 (low) 20 30 10 30 1 (high) 60 60 30 60 2 40 20 20 40 3 30 40 60 20 4 10 10 10 10 5 (low) 20 30 40 30 1 (high) 30 40 60 60 40 2 60 60 30 30 60 3 20 20 40 40 30 4 40 30 20 20 10 5 (low) 10 10 10 10 20 1/ The variable paddock is excluded. True mountain mahogany and antelope bitterbrush were not measured in 1965 due to a labor shortage. -:Xj �- 364 - Table 10. Analysis of variance of key browse current annual growth stem utilization in the paddocks, Little Hills Game Experiment Station, 1963-67. Species Source True mountain mahogany Total ''(i'~ Significant MS F 199 4 10,153,570 Bushes/paddocks 45 48,478,495 Years 3 1,620,876,550 Years x paddocks 12 15,869,640 135 17,414,317 (bushes/years x paddocks) Total 0.911 199 Paddocks 4 26,812,190 Bushes/paddocks 45 14,112,111 Years 3 126,770,590 Years x paddocks 12 29,927,978 135 6,074,808 Error Serviceberry df Paddocks Error Antelope bitterbrush of Variation (bushes/years x paddocks) Total 4.9271<7< 249 Paddocks 4 7,379,575 Bushes/paddocks 45 2,934,795 Years 4 18,951,189 Years x paddocks 16 1,747,257 Error 180 1,209,664 (bus he s /yea rs x paddocks) at the 0.01 level. / 1.444 �- 365 Table 11. Percent utilization of key browse current annual growth stems by deer in the paddocks, Little Hills Game Experiment Station, 1963-67. Deer-days per Acre 60 30 40 Species Year 1/ 10 20 True mountain mahogany 1963 61 63 74 67 74 70 1964 . 23 36 28 28 33 5 1966 37 54 64 45 49 14 1967 45 60 28 74 76 52 Four-year mean 42 53 48 54 58 35 1963 26 17 38 59 58 55 1964 54 52 46 62 83 25 1966 11 37 74 11 27 2 1967 20 12 7 43 51 45 Four-year mean 28 30 41 44 55 32 1963 30 42 57 33 45 34 1964 28 41 37 65 60 64 1965 7 23 22 19 26 28 1966 2 5 14 6 18 5 1967 20 3 30 37 43 4 Five-year mean 17 23 32 32 38 27 Antelope bitterbrush Serviceberry Variable II True mountain mahogany and antelope bitterbrush were not measured in 1965 due to a labor shortage. �Table 12. Estimated volume percentages of food items identified in rumen samples from deer stocked in the paddocks, Little Hills Game Experiment Station, 1963 and 1967. Sample sizes are in parentheses. 10 Mean Vol. Year 20 Freq. Mean Vol. (2) 1963 Browse True mountain mahogany Antelope bitterbrush Serviceberry Pinyon pine Utah juniper Snowberry Big sagebrush Grass Forbs Freq. Deer-days per Acre 30 40 Mean Mean Vol. Freq. Vol. Freq. (3) (3) 5 1.00 1 0.67 1 12 38 30 7 tr. 2 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.50 1.00 tr. 9 47 37 6 - 0.33 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.33 -- 6 1.00 tr, - -- tr. 1.00 60 Mean Vol •• Freq. Variable Mean Vol. Freq. (6) (2) (4) 1.00 tr, 0.50 5 0.83 1 0.50 - -- 6 70 9 12 1 tr. 1 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.67 0.33 0.67 tr. 6 84 6 1 0.50 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.75 tr. 5 77 12 1 0.67 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.50 -- - -- 2 10 65 12 2 8 0.50 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.50 0.50 tr. 3 0.25 0.75 tr. 0.33 0.33 - tr, - --- w 0'\ 0'\ I (2) 1967 Browse True mountain mahogany Antelope bitterbrush Serviceberry Pinyon pine Utah juniper Snowberry Oregon grape Grass Forbs (2) (3) (4) (6) 0.50 - -- - -- tr. 0.25 - -- 43 55 1 tr. 0.50 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.50 0.50 1 5 93 1 tr. -- tr. 10 80 8 2 tr. 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.67 0.67 t r, 1.00 1.00 0.50 0.50 4 88 5 3 0.25 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 tr. 5 92 2 1 0.17 1.00 1.00 0.83 0.50 --- - -- tr. - 0.67 tr. 0.25 t r, 0.17 0.33 1 - - tr. �Table 13. Ground cover percentages of major components along 16, 50-foot line intercept transects per paddock, Little Hills Game Experiment Station, 1962 and 1967. Year 1962 1967 Change from 1962 to 1967 Ground Cover Component Deer-da~s Eer Acre 30 40 60 Variable 18.8 0.2 0.7 61.3 19.0 16.7 0.7 1.4 67.4 13 .8 20.6 1.9 0.6 52.4 24.5 14.7 28.1 15.4 32.5 12.8 33.9 14.3 25.7 24.6 0.9 3.0 55.4 16.1 25.1 1.3 3.7 52.0 17.9 24.7 0.5 5.0 54.3 15.5 19.3 1.4 6.0 62.6 10.7 24.8 1.1 2.8 52.8 18.5 19.8 17.8 12.9 26.1 9.8 27.3 11.7 28.7 9.9 30.0 11.6 23.6 +8.8 +0.3 +2.6 -4.0 -7.7 +7.2 +0.4 +3.4 -8.0 -3.0 +2.7 +0.1 +2.6 -1.5 -3.9 +3.7 +0.9 +2.8 -1.5 -5.9 +5.9 +0.3 +4.3 -7.0 -3.5 +2.6 +0.7 +4.6 -4.8 -3.1 +4.2 -0.8 +2.2 +0.4 -6.0 same -3.9 same -1.1 -1.5 -1.8 -4.9 -0.8 -3.7 -3.8 -2.9 -3.9 -2.7 -2.1 0 10 20 Browse Grass Forbs Litter Bare ground 23.2 1.1 1.0 54.9 19.8 21. 7 0.1 0.8 56.3 21.1 21. 9 0.8 0.4 56.9 20.0 21.4 0.4 0.9 53.5 23.8 Key browse Overs tory 12.3 29.0 19.8 18.9 14.4 27.9 Browse Grass Forbs Litter Bare ground 32.0 1.4 3.6 50.9 12.1 28.9 0.5 4.2 48.3 18.1 Key browse Overs tory 12.3 25.1 Browse Grass Forbs Litter Bare ground Key browse Overs tory w (J\ -...J �- 368 - Table 14. Analysis of variance of vegetal ground cover Hills Game Experiment Station, 1962 and 1967. Vegetation Class Total browse Key browse Grass Forbs "k'k Highly Source in the paddocks, of Variation df Total Paddocks Transects/paddocks Years Years x paddocks Error (transects/years x paddocks) 223 6 105 1 6 105 717,678 634,557 3,535,088 111,519 82,500 x paddocks) 223 6 105 1 6 105 634,937 463,682 688,645 68,783 33,454 x paddocks) 223 6 105 1 6 105 16,049 3,469 11 ,543 5,655 1,465 x paddocks) 223 6 105 1 6 105 38,720 16,007 1,446,9l0 17,237 8,890 Total Paddocks Transects/paddocks Years Years x paddocks Error (transects/years Total Paddocks Transects/paddocks Years Years x paddocks Error (transects/years Total Paddocks Transects/paddocks Years Years x paddocks Error (transects/years significant (.01 level). MS Little F 1.352 2.056 3.861-id{ 1. 939 �Table 15. Ground cover percentages of browse, by species, along 16, 50-foot line intercept transects per paddock, Little Hills Game Experiment Station, 1962 and 1967. Year 1962 1967 Change from 1962 to 1967 0 10 20 Serviceberry Snowberry True mountain mahogany Pinyon pine Antelope bitterbrush Utah juniper Oregon grape Big sagebrush Little rabbitbrush Big rabbitbrush 12.3 9.6 19.0 1.0 tr. 0.7 0.8 0.1 0.1 13.9 7.1 0.4 0.2 0.1 tr. 0.2 Serviceberry Snowberry True mountain mahogany Pinyon pine Antelope bitterbrush Utah juniper Oregon grape Big sagebrush Little rabbitbrush Big rabbitbrush 12.2 9.9 Serviceberry Snowberry True mountain mahogany Pinyon pine Antelope bitterbrush Utah juniper Oregon grape Big sagebrush Little rabbitbrush Big rabbitbrush -0.1 +0.3 Species 0.6 0.5 0.1 0.1 tr. - 7.5 0.1 1.7 0.1 0.2 0.3 - - +7.0 +0.1 +1.1 same +0.1 +0.3 - - 17.5 2.0 tr. 5.5 2.3 1.4 0.1 - 12.4 7.5 0.1 3.3 0.2 1.0 0.1 0.1 - -1.5 +1.0 same +4.8 +1.5 +1.3 same -1.5 +0.4 -0.3 +3.1 +0.1 +1.0 -0.1 - - +0.1 - - Deer-days Eer Acre 40 30 60 Variable 12.0 2.8 0.5 1.1 0.2 0.1 12.6 6.0 1.6 - 0.1 0.1 10.5 6.5 1.4 4.1 0.1 1.9 l3 .4 5.2 0.5 1.2 0.7 12.7 2.8 2.2 0.5 0.5 0.2 0.2 tr. 0.1 9.0 5.2 0.3 9.7 0.4 0.3 0.1 0.1 8.7 3.2 1.7 9.3 1.3 0.4 0.1 9.3 3.4 0.3 - - -- -4.4 same -0.2 +8.5 -0.3 +0.3 -0.1 -0.1 -tr. -4.0 +0.4 -0.5 +8.8 +0.8 +0.4 same -2.7 +0.6 -0.2 -1.1 +0.2 +0.1 +5.7 - - - - - - -- - - 0.4 0.2 5.7 -- - 0.1 0.1 0.3 tr. -2.2 +0.5 -0.2 +4.1 same +1.8 -0.1 +0.2 +tr. VJ 0\0 �Table 16. Total numbers of browse plants, by species, on 16, 1 x 50-foot plots per paddock, Little Hills Game Experiment Station, 1962 and 1967. Deer-days per Acre Year Species a 10 20 30 40 60 Variable 1962 Serviceberry Snowberry Oregon grape True mountain mahogany Pinyon pine Antelope bitterbrush Juniper Big sagebrush Little rabbitbrush Big rabbitbrush 625 368 12 714 93 43 11 10 16 2 498 175 54 2 6 5 2 509 223 29 10 5 8 1 407 147 27 89 11 9 406 201 8 29 11 6 3 1 383 149 14 64 4 1 1 1 4 a 10 a 4 2 5 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a I 1967 Serviceberry Snowberry Oregon grape True mountain mahogany Pinyon pine Antelope bitterbrush Juniper Big sagebrush Little rabbitbrush Big rabbitbrush 582 466 20 a 10 a 4 1 6 a 566 241 42 14 9 14 4 a a a 432 340 92 2 7 5 5 a a 1 475 351 29 1 8 5 a a 6 a 378 167 30 26 9 6 6 a a 1 335 202 5 13 17 1 1 1 a a 391 226 16 46 3 1 1 1 7 a w a " �Table 17. Mean weight loss rates (pounds/deer-day) for deer stocked in paddocks for 20-day periods during winter, Little Hills Game Experiment Station, 1963-67. Deer-days per Acre Annual Mean 60 40 30 20 10 Wt. loss d-d Year Total d-d Wt. Loee] d-d Total d-d Wt. Loee] d-d Total d-d Wt. 10ss/ d-d Total d-d Wt. 10ss/ d-d Total d-d Wt.10ss/ Total d-d d-d 1963 40 0.2 31 0.5 60 0.3 80 0.6 120 0.7 331 0.5 1964 23 0.2 42 0.6 63 0.4 63 0$1 63 0.3 254 0.4 1965 - - - Scales did not function properly . w -....I I-' 1966 40 0.4 40 1.1 19 0.6 60 0.7 80 0.8 239 0.7 1967 42 0.4 21 0.6 60 0.9 84 0.6 126 0.7 333 0.7 Paddock Mean 145 0.3 134 0.7 202 0.6 287 0.5 389 0.6 1,157 0.6 All males: 421 0.7 All females: 736 0.5 �- 372 - Table 18. Actual percent deviations of utilization estimate results from stem length measurement results in the paddocks, Little Hills Game Experiment Station, 1963-67. Deer-days per Acre 30 40 Species Year 10 20 True mountain mahogany 1963 +29 +22 +11 1964 - 3 + 9 1966 +12 1967 Antelope bitterbrush Serviceberry 60 Variable - 2 +17 +11 - 3 +14 +44 +31 -12 - 3 - 5 + 7 + 1 -25 -10 + 7 - 7 +19 - 9 1963 - 7 +14 -28 +10 - 4 No comparison 1964 -28 -16 - 1 +33 -32 -25 1966 - 9 - 1 - 1 - 9 -11 - 2 1967 same -12 - 5 -37 - 6 - 5 1963 -24 -29 -37 -22 +10 - 7 1964 -18 -30 -18 -24 -25 -30 1965 + 2 -14 same - 2 - 8 -10 1966 same - 3 - 4 + 4 - 4 - 4 1967 - 5 - 2 -21 -16 - 5 +17 �- 373 Table 19. Sunnnary of least squares.regressions of key browse production on utilization in the paddocks. Sample Size Prediction Equation (n) (Y =) Prod. on uti1. (rom) Bush basis True mountain mahogany}j 200 5213 + 0.515 X 0.669*ic 0.448 3129 Serviceberry 'lj 250 1405 - 0.109 X -0.201~'rlc 0.040 1362 Antelope bitterbrush 1/ 60 dd/acre 40 dd/acre 30 dd/acre 20 dd/acre 10 dd/acre 40 40 40 40 40 1016 + 0.312 X 620 + 0.254 X - 831 + 0.586 X - 315 + 0.282 X 150 + 0.156 X 0.489~'c* 0.4367,"* O. 739m~ 0.751~~~~ 0.440*7( 0.239 0.190 0.546 0.564 0.194 2985 2373 7728 2803 1659 Paddock basis True mountain mahogany 20 707 + 0.499 X 0.949*"k 0.901 1683 Serviceberry 25 181 + 0.222 X 0.432* 0.187 686 Prod. on utile (%) bush basis True mountain mahogany 200 39.2 + 0.00070 X 0.298*ic 0.089 27.3 Serviceberry 250 25.0 + 0.00031 X 0.036 0.001 22.6 Antelope bitterbrush 60 dd/acre 40 dd/acre 30 dd/acre 20 dd/acre 10 dd/acre 40 40 40 40 40 64.9 - 0.00177 X 47.1 - 0.00121 X 21.1 + 0.00229 X 18.7 + 0.00025 X 17.3 + 0.00023 X -0.329* -0.166 O. 339~~ 0.127 0.483** 0.108 0.028 0.115 0.016 0.233 27.3 33.4 33.0 21.9 24.7 Regression and Species Std. Error r 1/ Stocking rates of 10 through 60 deer-days per acre and years 1962, 1963, 1965, and 1966 included in analyses for true mountain mahogany. ~/ Stocking rates of 10 through 60 deer-days per acre and the years 1962-66 included in analyses for serviceberry. 1/ Years of 1962, 1963, 1965, and 1966 included in analyses for antelope bitterbrush. * Significant at the 0.05 level. ** Significant at the 0.01 level. �- 374 - Table 20. Actual percent deviations of condition transect results from line intercept transects results in the paddocks, Little Hills Game Experiment Station, 1963 and 1967. l/ Sample sizes are in parentheses. Ground Cover 1962 (7) and forbs Litter l/ (14) - 6 •l"~j~ + 1.0 -2 - 0.9 -26.9** -21. 2jn'~ -24 .lj~* - 8.3jd - 1.4 + 0.2 + 2.9 Bare Ground Overstory (7) -10 .Oj~* Browse Grasses Percent Deviation 1967 Both Years .8'i'('1'~ <" + 5. 6j~ Based on one paced condition transect and 16, 50-foot transects per paddock. * Significant at the 0.05 level. ** Significant at the 0.01 level. line intercept �- 375 - Table 21. Proportions of deer fecal pellet center and peripheral acres in the paddocks, Station, 1963-67. groups counted on the entire Little Hills Game Experiment Deer-days 20 30 40 60 Center .65 .49 .56 .57 .51 Peripheral .35 .51 .44 .43 .49 Acre 1963 1964 Counts were made by only one person under Center less than ideal conditions. Peripheral 1965 1966 1967 Mean Grand Mean per Acre 10 1./ Year Center .56 .55 .55 .52 .53 Peripheral .44 .45 .45 .48 .47 Center .49 .45 .54 .61 .52 Peripheral .51 .55 .46 .39 .48 Center .57 .34 .46 .50 .50 Peripheral .43 .66 .54 .50 .50 Center .57 .46 .53 .55 .52 Peripheral .43 .54 .47 .45 .48 Center .52 Peripheral .48 1/ Counts at 10 deer-days per acre were adjusted between the center and peripheral acres. to equate area differences �- 376 Table 22. Mean daily defecation rates of deer based on total counts of p'e11et groups in the paddocks, Little Hills Game Experiment Station, 1963-67. ]] Deer-days per Acre Year 1963 1965 1966 1967 Category 10 20 30 Total deer-days 40 40 60 Groups/deer-day. 13.3 16.1 14.2 Total deer-days 44 44 66 88 Groups/deer-day 11.9 12.7 10.2 9.6 Total deer-days 40 40 2:./ 80 120 280 Groups/deer-day 11.0 11.1 11.4 12.3 11.7 Total deer-days 42 2:./ 60 84 126 312 Groups/deer-day 17.6 14.4 13.0 12.1 13.5 Mean Total deer-days Groups/deer-day 40 2:./ 60 Mean 120 260 14.9 14.6 2:./ 242 10.7 166 124 186 252 366 13.5 13.3 12.9 11.3 13.1 1094 12.9 1/ Counts in 1964 are excluded as they were made by only one person under less than ideal conditions. 2:./ The total number of deer-days is uncertain as one or more deer died during the stocking period. �APPENDIX A Table 1. Record of deer stocking in the paddocks, Little Hills Game Experiment Station, 1963-67. Date Sex Deer Est. Age (Years) Tag No. Stocked Removed Year Deer-days per Acre 1963 60 Female Female Female Female Female Male 2~ 3~ 8+ 8+ 3~ 2~ 309 124 265 B46 118 257 1- 8 1- 8 1- 8 1- 8 1- 8 1- 8 1-28 1-28 1-28 1-28 1-28 1-28 40 Female Female Female Male Male ? A2529 312 B1 251 267 1- 8 1- 9 1- 8 1- 8 1- 8 1- 9 1-28 1-28 1-28 1-28 Female Male Male 2~ 1~ 1~ A2841 271 273 1- 8 1- 8 1- 8 1-28 1-28 1-28 20 Female Female Male 2~ 7~ 1~ 283 334 318 1-13 1-19 1-12 1-28 1-28 1-28 10 Female Male 2~ 1~ 269 310 1- 8 1- 8 1-28 1-28 30 1~ 8~ 1~ 1~ Remarks Died - stocking injuries w '"-J '"-J Stocked late due to an insufficient number of animals available on 1-8-63 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------~--------------------------- �Appendix A Table 1. Record of deer stocking in the paddocks, Little Hills Game Experiment Station, 1963-67 (continued). Deer Year Deer-days per Acre 1964 60 Date Sex Est. Age (Years) Tag No. Stocked Removed Female Female Female Female Female Female Male Male 1+ 1+ 1+ 1+ 1+ 1+ 1~ 1~ L172 A21 L205 324 L63 No tags L145 L131 1-14 1-14 2- 2 1-28 1-14 1-14 1-14 1-14 2- 4 2- 4 2- 4 2- 4 1-27 2-3 2- 4 2- 3 Female Female Female Female Female 1+ 1+ 1+ 1+ 1+, L141 1139 L119 No tags B13 1-14 1-14 1-14 1-14 1-21 1-21 2- 4 2- 4 2- 4 2 -4 30 Female Female Female 1+ 1+ 1+ L129 1143 R55 1-14 1-14 1-14 2- 4 2- 4 2- 4 20 Female Female 1+ 1+ A63 A991 1-14 1-14 2- 4 2- 4 10 Female Female Male 1+ 1+ 291 332 L135 1-14 1-14 1-24 2- 6 1-20 2- 6 40 2+ Remarks Died Died Died Died - broken back Vol '-J 00 Died - broken back -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- �Appendix A Table 1. Record of deer stocking in the paddocks, Little Hills Game Experiment Station, 1963-67 (continued). Date Deer Year Deer-days per Acre 1965 60 40 - Sex Est. Age (Years) Tag No. Stocked Removed Remarks Female Female Female Female Female Male 1+ 1+ 1+ 1+ 1+ l~ L546 A1922 L496 L542 L538 L572 1-25 1-25 1-25 1-25 1-25 1-25 2-16 Died after removal Died about 2-9-65 Died Injured by buck Female Female Male Male 1+ 1+ 2+ 2+ 148 L548 287 L221 1-25 1-25 1-25 1-25 ? 2-15 2-16 2-16 2-16 2-16 2-16 2-16 2-16 Torn ear Died after removal w -...J \0 I 30 Female Female Male 1+ 1+ 1~ L528 L566 L562 1-25 1-25 1-25 2-16 2-16 2-16 20 Male Male 2+ 1~ L574 L568 1-25 1-25 2-16 2-16 10 Female Male 1+ l~ A2565 L286 1-25 1-25 2-16 2-16 Died after removal -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- �Appendix A Table 1. Record of deer stocking in the paddocks, Little Hills Game Experiment Station, 1963-67 (continued). Deer Year Deer-days per Acre 1966 Date Sex Est. Age (Years) Tag No. Stocked Removed Remarks 60 Female Female Female Female Female Male 1+ 1+ 1+ 1+ 1+ l~ L71 A19l4 L705 No tags L542 L282 2-15 2-15 2-15 2-15 2-15 2-15 3- 7 3- 7 3- 7 3- 7 3- 7 3- 7 Died after removal 40 Female Female Female Male 1+ 1+ 1+ 2+ L324 A2947 L362 A2628 2-18 2-18 2-18 2-18 3-10 3-10 3-10 3-10 Died after removal w 00 0 30 Female Male Male Male Male Female Male 20 10 1+ 2+ 2+ l~ 1+ 2+ A2l L727 A2636 A2638 A2644 L324 A2628 3- 9 3- 9 2-27 2-27 2-27 3-15 3-15 3-18 3-18 3-18 3-11 2 -27 3-18 3-18 Trapped at Sapinero Trapped at Sapinero - Died Trapped at Sapinero - Died Previously used at 40 dd/acre Previously used at 40 dd/acre Male Male 2+ 2+ A2640 A2642 2-27 2-27 3-19 3-19 Trapped at Sapinero Trapped at Sapinero Female Male 1+ 2+ L672 L725 2-15 2-15 3- 7 3- 7 O~ -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- �Appendix A Table 1. Record of deer stocking in the paddocks, Little Hills Game Experiment Station, 1963-67 (continued). Date Deer Sex Est. Age (Years) Tag No. Stocked Removed 60 Female Female Female Female Female Male 8+ 8+ 3~ 5~ 8+ 1~ L672 No tags L861 L770 B9 L875 1-12 1-12 1-12 1-12 1-12 1-12 2- 2 2- 2 2- 2 2- 2 2- 2 2- 2 40 Female Female Female Male 5~ 3~ 7~ 1~ L763 L895 L897 L755 1-13 1-13 1-13 1-13 2- 3 2- 3 2- 3 2- 3 Year Deer-days per Acre 1967 Remarks Vol 00 •.... I 30 Female Male Male 8+ 2~ l~ L776 L849 L851 1-15 1-15 1-15 2- 4 2- 4 2- 4 20 Female Male 1~ l~ L772 L845 1-13 1-13 2- 3 2- 3 10 Male Male 1~ 1~ A2634 1-12 1-12 2- 2 2- 2 L873 Fractured sternabrae Torn lower lip �- 382 Appendix A Table 2. Summary of winter temperatures (F), Little Hills Game Experiment Station, December through February, 1962-63 through 1966-67. l! Winter Month High Low Mean Mean Max. Mean Min. 1962-63 December 61 -37 24.4 45.0 3.7 January 51 -48 14.8 33.6 -4.0 February 73 - 7 32.7 51.7 13.7 December ?J 55 -18 21.5 41.5 1.5 January 53 -29 17.8 36.7 -1.1 February 53 -20 18.0 38.1 -2.2 December ?:..I 50 -21 26.7 39.8 13.6 January ?:..I 51 o 26.1 40.3 11.9 February ?J 55 -21 24.3 41.3 7.2 December 59 -12 24.3 40.4 8.2 January 51 -26 20.1 38.8 1.4 February 48 -17 20.4 39.4 1.4 December 63 -20 19.1 35.5 2.7 January 53 -20 21.8 39.0 4.5 February 55 - 5 27.4 45.1 9.7 1963-64 1964-65 1965-66 1966-67 II Data source, U. S. Weather Bureau, 1962-67. Climatological data: (monthly summaries, Little Hills). Vo1s. 67-72. ?:..I One or more days of record are missing. Colorado �Appendix A Table 3. Daily temperatures (F) and precipitation (inches) during winter stocking periods in the paddocks, Little Hills Game Experiment Station, 1963-67. 1/ Day 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 l3 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 1-8-63 to 1-28-63 TemE' High Low Precip. 45 45 31 10 - 6 8 17 37 33 32 25 11 27 40 44 34 49 40 30 40 41 -10 3 6 -22 -48 -42 -16 0 3 0 3 -31 -14 - 8 - 4 -11 -11 18 - 3 -12 2 - - 0.04 - - - tr. tr. 0.10 - - - - - 1-14-64 to 2-6-64 TemE' High Low Precip. 27 33 41 41 40 37 46 49 42 33 30 38 44 45 47 46 41 42 46 39 33 -25 -22 -14 - 1 23 - 7 20 16 20 2 - 2 8 l3 - 4 - 3 - 5 - 2 0 0 10 -16 - - - tr. 0.11 0.08 0.05 - - -- tr. 0.14 - 1-25-65 to 2-16-65 TemE' High Low Precip. 32 31 35 40 45 49 51 45 45 55 54 54 47 44 37 37 31 26 22 30 28 15 2 2 12 32 32 30 9 2 15 15 19 30 24 - 1 12 25 5 -l3 -21 17 0.38 - - - -- - 0.15 - 0.35 0.20 - - 2-15-66 to 3-19-66 TemE' High Low Precip. 29 34 38 45 48 45 41 40 45 46 43 40 40 45 40 37 21 26 40 43 53 7 -17 - 5 8 6 6 9 1 - 2 - 2 17 19 4 5 20 12 14 -18 -22 11 14 0.04 -- - -0.02 - 0.35 0.22 - - 1-12-67 to 2-4-67 TemE' High Low Precip. 39 40 41 45 39 30 31 43 47 53 45 45 40 45 43 48 45 51 50 47 42 - 5 5 12 4 15 -12 - 2 6 2 12 25 25 9 15 - 4 22 11 20 20 32 15 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 0.19 - 0.12 0.17 0.02 w 00 w �Appendix A Table 3. Daily temperatures (F) and precipitation (inches) during winter stocking periods in the paddocks, Little Hills Game Experiment Station, 1963-67. 1/ (continued). Day 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 1-8-63 to 1-28-63 TemE· High Low Precip. . r-I "" 0 0\ C"/ I II II II Ix Ix :><: <r r-I . 1-14-64 to 2-6-64 TemE· High Low Precip. 35 41 29 -15 - 8 - 6 - tr. 0.04 1-25-65 to 2-16-65 TemE· High Low Precip. 30 34 - 7 -17 N . "" 0\ 0 0.22 - 0 "" W 0\ C"/ co 0 N "" . I 0 II II II Ix Ix :><: VI C"/ . 0 r-I r-I C"/ II II II Ix Ix :><: vi 2-15-66 to 3-19-66 TemE· High Low Precip. 54 57 57 50 57 58 68 64 60 49 54 60 C"/ . 18 25 21 20 10 10 10 22 32 19 9 24 -- - 42 40 41 . 7 5 4 . 0 r-I 0 0 r-I C"/ "" 0 LI"I II II II Ix Ix :><: VI C"/ C"/ \0 "" 0\ 0 II II Ix Ix \0 1-12-67 to 2-4-67 TemE· High Low Precip. :><: 'VI 1/ Data source: U. S. Weather Bureau, 1963-67. Hills) . Vo1s. 68-72. Climatological data: Colorado (monthly summaries, Little w 00 .j::- �Appendix A (inches) at the Little Hills Game Experiment Station, 1962-67. 1/ Table 4. Summary of monthly precipitation Year Jan. Feb. Mar. Apr. May Month July June Aug. Sept. Oct. Nov. Dec. Annual 1962 0.65 3.09 0.29 1.62 0.58 0.46 0.11 0.17 1.01 0.25 0.75 0.78 9.76 1963 0.19 0.20 0.46 1.17 0.15 0.84 0.73 2.83 0.63 0.42 0.82 0.41 8.85 1964 0.49 0.46 1.14 2.24 1.72 1.37 0.90 2.07 0.54 0.02 1.52 1.54 14.01 1965 0.76 0.92 0.84 1.00 2.91 1.96 1.95 0.59 1.88 0.51 1.19 1.51 16.02 1966 0.42 0.64 0.81 0.15 1.68 0.18 0.71 0.66 0.65 1.67'Y 0.38 1.79 9.7tJ../ 1967 0.73 0.49 0.40 1.24 1.76 3.01 1.00 1.34 1.83 0.68 0.44 2.25 15.17 1:..1 Data Source: U. S. Weather Bureau, 1962-67. Climatological data: Colorado (monthly summaries, Little Hills) . V 0 Ls , 67 -72 . 2/ Published climatological records show 0.46 for October, 1966, which is in error. 1..1 Published climatological records show 8.53 for 1966 total which is in error. Vol 00 V1 �100, > 'U • 90~ +'CIS rx. ~ 0 1-< 1-< CIS ::E: Q) 80 -I • ::~ • • • ~ February 2-4, 1967 CQ 40 Q) o 1-< 30 20 10 •• • • " • " w 00 C'\ ,. " X )( •• X • 1-8 2-8 " w 3-8 • • - w " xx ··x l ~ tIl • • 0 & B- • January 28, 1963 50 ~ +'~ • ~ 4-8 " 5-8 • 6-8 7-8 " 8+ Age (years - months) Fig. 1- Distribution of bone marrow fat percentages by estimated age of mule deer in the paddocks. All but one value are for the right femur. �- 387 APPENDIX B Table 1. Bone marrow fat percentages for 37 mule deer stocked in the paddocks during winter, Little Hills Game Experiment Station, 1963 and 1967. Deer No. Date Collected 309 124 265 B46 118 257 312 B1 251 267 A2841 271 273 283 334 318 269 310 A29 293 L672 None L861 L770 B9 L875 L763 L895 L897 L755 L776 L849 L851 L772 L845 A2634 L873 1-28-63 1-28-63 1-28-63 1-28-63 1-28-63 1-28-63 1-28-63 1-28-63 1-28-63 1-28-63 1-28-63 1-28-63 1-28-63 1-28-63 1-28-63 1-28-63 1-28-63 1-28-63 1-28-63 1-28-63 2-2-67 2-2-67 2-2-67 2-2-67 2-2-67 2-2-67 2-3-67 2-3-67 2-3-67 2-3-67 2-4-67 2-4-67 2-4-67 2-3-67 2-3-67 2-2-67 2-2-67 Sex F F F F F F F F M M F M M F F M F M F M F F F F F M F F F M F F M F M M M Estimated Age (yrs.-mos.) 2-8 3-8 8+ 8+ 3-8 2-8 1-8 8+ 1-8 1-8 2-8 1-8 1-8 2-8 7-8 1-8 2-8 1-8 3-8 2-8 8+ 8+ 3-8 5-8 8+ 1-8 5-8 3-8 7-8 1-8 8+ 2-8 1-8 1-8 1-8 1-8 1-8 Stocking Rate (dd/acre) 60 60 60 60 60 60 40 40 40 40 30 30 30 20 20 20 10 10 Open range Open range 60 60 60 60 60 60 40 40 40 40 30 30 30 20 20 10 10 Bone Marrow Fat {%~ Right Left Femur Femur 58.1 83.2 16.7 4.2 66.7 7.1 63.2 17.3 5.2 16.3 45.8 3.1 4.8 94.1 48.2 13.7 85.2 81.3 87.7 59.0 29.6 10.7 26.2 10.6 18.2 1.2 11.6 15.2 0.4 0.8 2.4 7.5 32.9 4.0 10.1 7.4 38.8 60.5 24.7 14.6 38.3 10.0 22.0 0.7 9.1 16.7 1.0 0.5 2.7 11.0 18.1 6.6 10.2 13.3 �Appendix B Table 2. Urinalyses for 29 mule deer stocked in the paddocks during winter, Little Hills Game Experiment Station, 1963 and 1967. Deer No. Date ce n . Sex. 309 124 265 B46 257 312 B1 251 267 271 318 310 1-28-63 1-28-63 1-28-63 1-28-63 1-28-63 1-28-63 1-28-63 1-28-63 1-28-63 1-28-63 1-28-63 1-28-63 1-28-63 1-28-63 2-2-67 2-2-67 2-2-67 2-2-67 2-3-67 2-3-67 2-3-67 2-3-67 2-4-67 2-4-67 2-4-67 2-3-67 2-3-67 2-2-67 2-2-67 F F F F F F F M M M M M F M A29 293 None L770 B9 L875 L763 L895 L897 L755 L776 L849 L851 L772 L845 A2634 L873 F F F M F F F M F M M F M M M Stocking Est. Age Rate (yrs.-mos.) (dd/acre) 2-8 3-8 8+ 8+ 2-8 1-8 8-8 1-8 1-8 1-8 1-8 1-8 3-8 2-8 8+ 5-8 8+ 1-8 5-8 3-8 7-8 1-8 8+ 2-8 1-8 1-8 1-8 1-8 1-8 60 60 60 60 60 40 40 40 40 30 20 10 open range open range 60 60 60 60 40 40 40 40 30 30 30 20 20 10 10 Urinalysis pH Spec. Grav. 5.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 5.5 6.0 5.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.5 5.5 7.0 6.0 6.0 5.5 5.5 8.0 7.0 6.0 5.5 5.5 6.0 5.5 5.5 1.038 1.044 1 036 1 024 1.045 1 046 1.038 1.034 1.033 1 033 '1.039 1.036 1.028 1.038 1.035 1.030 1.032 :> 1.039 1.037 > 1.039 > 1.039 1.021 1.021 » 1.039 > 1.039 1.039 > 1.039 > 1.039 > 1.039 0 0 0 0 Sugar Albumin Acetone 0 ++ ++ + tr. tr. ++ + + ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ +++ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 tr. 0 0 0 0 0 0 t r, 0 tr. 0 0 0 0 0 + + + ++ + + ++ + + + + + + + + * -H- + + +++ tr, tr. ++ -H- +++ -H- + ++++ +++ ++ 0 tr. ++ + 0 0 0 0 0 0 Color yellow dk. yellow dk , yellow yellow dk , yellow yellow yellow yellow yellow dk , yellow dk , yellow dk , yellow yellow yellow smoky yellow smoky amber dk , yellow dk , yellow straw yellow yellow lt , yellow amber dk , yellow smoky amber yellow Characteristic cloudy cloudy cloudy cloudy cloudy cloudy cloudy cloudy cloudy cloudy cloudy cloudy cloudy cloudy cloudy cloudy cloudy cloudy cloudy clear cloudy viscous clear clear cloudy cloudy cloudy cloudy clear cloudy w 00 00 �Appendix B Table 3. Blood analysis of 20 male and 29 female mule deer stocked in the paddocks during winter, Little Hills Game Experiment Station, 1964-67. Deer Number Category Date collected (month-day-year) Sex Estimated age (years-months) Stocking rate (deer-days per acre) Blood: Packed cell volume (%) Hemoglobin (g/lOO m1) Sedimentation rate (mm/hr) Erythrocyte count (mi11ions/rom3) Leukocyte count (hundreds/mm3) Differential count (% of 100) Segmented neutrophi1s Band neutrophils Lymphocytes Monocytes Eosinophils Basophils Salts Ca (mg/lOO ml ) P (mg/lOO m1) K (meq/liter) Na (meq/liter) Chloride (NaCl) (meq/liter) Cholesterol (mg/100 m1) Creatinine (mg/100 m1) Protein (g/lOO m1) Blood urea nitrogen (mg/100 ml) None L119 A991 R55 L542 L538 148 L548 2-4-64 Female 1+ 40 2-4-64 Female 1+ 40 2-4-64 Female 1+ 20 2-4-64 Female 1+ 30 2-16-65 Female 1+ 60 2-16-65 Female 1+ 60 2-16-65 Female 1+ 40 2-16-65 2-16-65 Female Female 1+ 1+ 40 30 2-16-65 Fei:nale 1+ 30 49 21.0 45 21.0 48 15.7 44 14.9 44 18.6 40 16.1 59 20.3 48 17.7 43 17.6 47 17.6 9.98 39.5 9.64 31.0 9.83 23.5 8.08 68.0 7.73 18.5 8.25 17.5 8.65 17.5 8.30 16.7 6.68 13.5 9.45 18.7 50 51 40 54 23 - - 47 44 44 - - 30 32 - - - 49 1 0 0 40 8 1 0 43 14 3 0 -, - 35 11 0 0 52 25 44 8 41 15 47 6 50 20 - 49 17 - - - - 0 1 0 3 0 - L528 L566 - - 2 w 00 -0 �Appendix B Table 3. Blood analysis of 20 male and 29 female mule deer stocked in the paddocks during winter, Little Hills Game Experiment Station, 1964-67 (continued). Deer Number Category Date collected (month-day-year) Sex Estimated age (years-months) Stocking rate (deer-days per acre) Blood: Packed cell volume (%) Hemoglobin (g/lOO ml) Sedimentation rate (rom/hr) Erythrocyte count (millions/rom3) Leukocyte count (hundreds/rom3) Differential count (% of 100) Segmented neutrophils Band neutrophils Lymphocytes Monocytes Eosinophils Basophils Salts Ca (mg/lOO ml ) P (mg/100 ml) K (meq/liter) Na (meq/1iter) Chloride (NaCl) (meq/liter) Cholesterol (mg/100 ml) Creatinine (mg/lOO m1) Protein (g/100 ml) Blood urea nitrogen (mg/lOO m1) L572 287 L22l L562 L574 L568 L286 L282 L725 A2628 2-16-65 Male 1-8 60 2-16-65 Male 2+ 40 2-16-65 Male 2+ 40 2-16-65 Male 1-8 30 2-16-65 Male 2+ 20 2-16-65 Male 1-8 20 2-16-65 Male 1-8 10 3-7-66 Male 1-9 60 3-7-66 Male 2+ 10 3-10-66 Male 2+ 40 48 16.2 50 18.5 44 16.3 43 15.3 43 17.3 43 18.6 42 18.4 48 16.6 47 16.1 49 15.7 8.75 15.7 8.65 17.7 7.52 15.5 8.80 15.5 7.21 18.5 8.42 17.5 9.26 18.5 8.85 40.0 8.50 21.0 9.58 20.0 35 33 48 38 29 42 34 24 16 26 64 0 57 10 46 3 54 7 48 21 - - 46 12 47 18 0 3 1 - - 0 1 68 8 0 0 84 0 0 0 42 24 8 0 - 1 - - - - -2 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- w ~ 0 �Appendix B Table 3. Blood analysis of 20 male and 29 female mule deer stocked in the paddockd during winter, Little Hills Game Experiment Station, 1964-67 (continued). Deer Number Category Date collected (month-day-year) Sex Estimated age (years-months) Stocking rate (deer-days per acre) Blood: Packed cell volume (%) Hemoglobin (g/100 m1) Sedimentation rate (mm/hr) Erythrocyte count (millions/mm3) Leukocyte count (hundreds/mm3) Differential count (% of 100) Segmented neutrophils Band neutrophi1s Lymphocytes Monocytes Eosinophils Basophils Salts Ca (mg/lOO ml) P (mg/lOO ml) K (meq/liter) Na (meq/ liter) Chloride (NaCl) (meq/liter) Cholesterol (mg/100 ml) Creatinine (mg/lOO ml) Protein (g/lOO ml) Blood urea nitrogen (mg/100 ml) L672 2:./ L71 A19l3 L705 L362 3-7-66 Female 1+ 10 3-7-66 Female 1+ 60 3-7-66 Female 1+ 60 3-7-66 Female 1+ 60 3-10-66 Female 1+ 40 53 17.1 46 15.3 34 13.0 44 14.5 54 18.6 47 14.9 44 13.4 9.67 41.0 9.50 32.0 8.35 20.0 5.60 28.5 7.65 29.5 9.75 16.5 7.45 12.5 6.79 12.0 47 22 16 48 36 32 25 14 36 47 6 60 14 4 0 52 0 0 0 52 4 8 0 52 8 8 0 64 7 4 0 70 8 8 0 52 8 4 0 A2565 None L542 2-16-65 Female 1+ 10 3-7-66 Female 1+ 60 3-7-66 Female 1+ 60 46 17.7 54 18.0 8.34 18.6 - - 2 - - - 64 16 4 0 ~ -- - - - - - - - - - 1/ Deer number L672 was used at 10 deer-days per acre in 1966 and again at 60 deer-days per acre in 1967. A2947 L672 2:./ 3-10-66 2-2-67 Female Female 8+ 1+ 60 40 - - 44 13 .1 4.0 6.5 52.0 57 3 28 w 9 ~ 3 I 0 <: 2.5 7.9 5.4 85 91.9 62.1 3.0 6.2 10 �vppend Lx B Cable 3. Blood analysis of 20 male and 29 female mule deer stocked in the paddocks during winter, Little Hills Game ~xperiment Station, 1964-67 (continued). Deer Number Category Date collected (month-day-year) Sex Estimated age (years-months) Stocking rate (deer-days per acre) Blood: Packed cell volume (%) Hemoglobin (g/lOO ml) Sedimentation rate (rom/hr) Erythrocyte count (millions/rom3) Leukocyte count (hundreds/rom3) Differential count (% of 100) Segmented neutrophils Band neutrophils Lymphocytes Monocytes Eosinophils Basophils Salts Ca (mg/lOO ml) P (mg/lOO ml.) K (meq/liter) Na (meqfliter) Chloride (NaCl) (meq/liter) Cholesterol (mg/lOO ml) Creatinine (mg/lOO ml) Protein (g/lOO ml) Blood urea nitrogen (mg/lOO ml) A2636.:V A2640}) A26421.l L875 L755 L849 L85l L845 3-18-66 Male 3-19-66 3-19-66 Male Male 2-2-67 Male 1-8 60 2-3-67 Male 1-8 40 2-4-67 Male 2-8 30 2-4-67 Male 1-8 30 2--3-67 2-2-67 Male Male 1-8 1-8 10 20 2-2-67 Male 1-8 10 41 13.0 6.0 8.5 51.0 45 14.5 5.0 8.0 26.0 47 14.5 5.0 10.0 67.5 47 15.3 5.0 9.5 55.0 45 14.1 1.5 12.0 29.0 44 14.5 5.5 8.0 33.0 46 8 30 11 48 25 59 2 2 9 37 52 17 24 4 1 2+ 2+ 2+ 30 20 20 39 13.0 45 13.7 41 13.0 8.15 20.0 8.85 25.0 8.30 12.0 48 14.9 2.5 9.5 43.0 34 32 20 57 64 46 7 6 2 26 47 4 5 50 14 2 o 64 4 o o 72 0 8 0 27 9 o o o 2.5 2.8 » 9.2 5.2 87 87.8 88.9 3.0 8.8 10 o .> 9.2 5.4 102 91.9 62.1 3.2 7.8 10 8 5 A2634 7 o o 5 o o o o 2.5 2.5 7.0 5.9 70 113.7 78.5 2.5 6.0 40 5.8 7.2 5.4 70 116.4 95.1 2.9 7.6 20 3.2 5.4 5.9 107 90.9 107.5 2.8 < 2.5 ;> 9.2 7.5 85 104.6 89.1 2.8 8.6 20 5.7 5.4 102 127.3 . 66.2 6.2 2.4 6.4 15 10 --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1/ These deer were originally trapped at Sapinero. L873 W \.0 tv �Appendix B Table 3 Blood analysis of 20 male and 29 female mule deer stocked in the paddockd during winter, Little Hills Game Experiment Station, 1964-67 (continued). 0 Deer Number Category Date collected (month-day-year) Sex Estimated age (years-months) Stocking rate (deer-days per acre) Blood: Packed cell volume (%) Hemoglobin (g/lOO ml) Sedimentation rate (mm/hr) Erythrocyte count (millions/mm3) Leukocyte count (hundreds/mm3) Differential count (% of 100) Segmented neutrophi1s Band neutrophils Lymphocytes Monocytes Eosinophils Basophils Salts Ca (mg/100 m1) P (mg/lOO m1) K (meq/liter) Na (meq/liter) Chloride (NaC1) (meq/1iter) Cholesterol (mg/100 m1) Creatinine (mg/100 m1) Protein (g/100 m1) Blood urea nitrogen (mg/100 m1) None L86l L770 B9 L763 L895 L897 L776 L772 2-2-67 Female 8+ 60 2-2-67 Female 3-8 60 2-2-67 Female 5-8 60 2-2-67 Female 8+ 60 2-3-67 Female 5-8 40 2-3-67 Female 3-8 40 2-3-67 Female 7-8 40 2-4-67 Female 8+ 30 2-3-67 Female 1-8 20 40 12.6 4.0 8.5 45.0 51 15.7 4.5 10.8 66.0 46 14.9 4.2 12.5 62.0 42 13.4 14.5 7.5 90.0 41 12.6 2.2 9.5 25.0 45 14.5 3.5 8.0 48.0 42 14.5 2.0 8.5 46.5 44 14.5 3.5 6.5 74.5 48 14.9 2.5 9.5 43.0 64 6 22 8 0 0 61 10 13 12 3 0 72 2 22 4 0 0 79 4 14 3 0 0 43 3 50 4 0 a 57 1 29 9 4 0 76 0 23 1 0 a 83 0 15 1 0 1 57 7 27 9 0 0 < 2.5 3.8 7.0 5.6 100 91.9 93.1 2.6 8.0 25 < 2.5 4.8 8.6 4.8 87 3.6 6.2 5.1 98 92.7 101.3 2.9 8.0 10 2.5 5.9 4.9 88 127.3 70.3 3.0 7.3 10 4.5 4.9 5.6 98 104.6 95.1 2.1 5.8 10 3.6 4.7 7.2 113 101.8 86.8 2.6 8.3 70 3.2 >9.2 6.3 98 91.8 60.0 1.8 7.8 20 5.4 5.8 88 109.1 82.7 3.8 7.6 10 8.0 7.3 100 129.1 119.9 2.5 7.8 35 t ia.z 99.2 1.6 6.9 15 1/ w \0 w � https://cpw.cvlcollections.org/files/original/a393e23952c9b11aaa9151c06977dc6e.pdf 48d70bae7fef8c110ae56c7720e06cc2 PDF Text Text October, - 1- JOB PROGRESS REPORT State of COLORADO Project No. W-88-R-14 Migratory Work Plan No. 1 Job No. Job Title: Waterfowl Period Covered: Personnel: Production Bird Investigations 1 Survey April 1, 1968 to July 31, 1968 Charles "Pete" Bryant and staff, Monte Vista National Wildlife Refuge; Char~es Hayes, Jack Randall and Robert Pearson, Bureau of Sport Fisheries and Wildlife; Gary Will, Colorado State University; Harvey Bray, Gurney Crawford, Howard Funk, Jack Grieb, Richard Hopper, Edward Kochman, Russell Mason, Bill Roland, Wayne Russell, William Rutherford, Steve Steinert, Louis Vidakovich and Michael Szymczak, Colorado Division of Game, Fish and Parks. ABSTRACT Weather and water conditions were generally favorable for waterfowl nesting and brood survival in Colorado in 1968. The total duck breeding pair estimate of 72,714 was above the 1967 level. Slight decreases in breeding pairs were noted in the San Luis Valley and Yampa Valley, whereas North Park, the South Platte and Cache la Poudre Valleys and Brown's Park each showed an increase. The mallard remains the most numerous of Colorado's breeding species with an estimated 36,644 breeding pairs. Goose production and numbers in northwest Colorado reached their highest point since the survey began with an estimated population size of 833 adults and 487 goslings. Nesting geese in the Larimer-Boulder County area raised a total of 696 young to the flight stage. 1969 ��- 3 - WATERFOWL PRODUCTION Michael SURVEYS R. Szymczak P. S. OBJECTIVE To formulate waterfowl harvest regulations. SEGMENT OBJECTIVES To determine, through statistically reliable sampling techniques, the number of duck and goose breeding pairs, by species, in each major Colorado waterfowl breeding ground. METHODS AND MATERIALS Present duck breeding-pair and production surveys pair inventory of only major production areas. consist of a breeding The 1968 duck surveys were conducted during the period May 13 to May 31. Ground counts were made in the Yampa Valley and Brown's Park. Aerial surveys were conducted in North Park and the South platte and Cache 1a Poudre Valleys. Intensive aerial counts combined with air-ground comparison studies were conducted in the San Luis Valley. All survey methods and sample areas remained the same as in previous years. Flying was accomplished with a Cessna 185 aircraft. Areas sampled by section or block were flown with one observer, while two observers were used in sampling by transect. Ground surveys of Canada goose production were conducted within the period of April 1 to July 31. Production estimates were made from as complete a count as possible of breeding pairs, goslings and eggs. On the basis of these studies, a report is made to the Bureau of Sport Fisheries and Wildlife, which constitutes Colorado's part in the annual continental cooperative breeding ground survey. RESULTS AND DISCUSSION Weather conditions favorable for waterfowl nesting existed in Colorado during the spring and early summer of 1968. Winter snowpack, heavy in some areas, was delayed in melting because of cool spring weather. Water supplies were generally good, with about normal precipitation and reservoir storage holdover. Water conditions were less desirable on the eastern plains in 1968 than in 1967. The reverse situation was true for the mountain parks and valleys. �-4 Figures in Table 1 reveal that total duck breeding pair estimates for 1968 were larger than in 1967. The San Luis Valley and Yampa Valley showed slight decreases from 1967, but still maintained numbers above the l4-year average. More intensive coverage of production areas may have caused, in part, the large increase in breeding pairs in Brown's Park. Table 1. Summary of Colorado duck breeding ground population 1968, with 1967 and the l4-year average for comparison. Total Estimated 1968 1967 Breeding Pairs l4-yr. Ave. 1954-1967 San Luis Valley 27,611 29,143 27,545'1:'/ North Park 19,777'1'/ 13,722 6,187 South Platte Valley 14,000 8,813 Cache 7,403 Area la Poudre Valley Yampa Valley Brown's Park Totals 1/ Does not include estimates, 1/ Percent ChangeFrom From l4-yr. 1967 Average - 5.3 + 5,130 +58.9 +172.9 5,735 2,177 +29.1 +242.1 2,985 3,246 2,915 - 8.0 + 2.4 938 441 154 +112.7 +509.1 72,714 61,100 44,108 +11.8 + 13.9 North Park data because of change in method 0.2 of projection in 1968. ~ San Luis Valley averages are based on results of 1964-1967 only. The much less intensive coverage of previous years is not included in the calculations. 1/ Aerial counts corrected by species from visibility ratios obtained in the San Luis Valley in 1968. The increase in pair estimates. in North Park was caused at least in part, by a change in the method of projection; thus, 1968 figures for this area are not comparable to 1967 or to the l4-year average. For all years prior to 1968, a visibility ratio correction factor of 0.45 was applied to all species for aerial counts in North Park. Air-ground comparison studies in the United States and Canada have shown that the various species of ducks are not observed at the same rate in all areas from the air. Studies in the San Luis Valley indicate that a viSibility ratio of 0.45 is too large, even for the mallard. The Similarity in habitat between North Park and the San Luis Valley prompted the application of San Luis Valley visibility ratios by species to North Park aerial counts in 1968. A realistic estimate by species now seems apparent, particularly for gadwalls, pintails, and teals. �- 5 - Table 2 shows the composition ·of the Colorado breeding duck population by species for 1968, 1967, and the long-term average. Application of the San Luis Valley correction factors for species visibility to North Park data changed the entire Colorado percent species composition only slightly. The change reduced the percent species composition for mallards and increased the percentages of pintails, gadwalls, and green-winged teal. Table 2. Species composition of the Colorado 1967, 1968 and the l4-year average. breeding duck population, 1968 Composition, % 1954-1967 !I 1967 Average Species Number of Species 1968 1967 1954-196 T£ Average Mallard 36,644 34,829 28,099 50.4 57.0 62.1 Blue-winged and Cinnamon Teal 6,463 6,449 4,078 8.9 10.6 9.0 Pintail 7,970 4,093 2,973 11.0 6.7 6.6 Gadwall 8,425 5,850 3,825 11.6 9.6 8.5 343 1,008 562 0.5 1.6 1.2 3,645 2,105 1,652 5.0 3.4 3.7 5,411 3,692 1,318 7.4 6.0 2.9 Redhead 2,063 1,383 1,648 2.8 2.3 3.6 Other Divers 1,750 1,691 1,095 2.4 2.8 2.4 Totals 72,714 61,100 45,250 100.0 100.0 100.0 American Widgeon Shoveler Green-winged Teal 1/ A change in methods of projecting estimates in North Park in 1968 affects the comparability of the figures between 1968 and 1967, as well as the l4-year average. ~/ San Luis Valley averages, included here, are for the years 1964-1967 only. Table 3 categorizes all geese observed during the 1968 spring survey in Moffat County by location and breeding status. Figures presented for the Craig to Juniper Springs area on the Yampa are somewhat misleading. Fiftyone of the 116 estimated goslings were produced from eggs taken from nests �- 6 - and artificially incubated. These eggs were removed from nests for use in Colorado's transplant program on the 18th of April and the production survey was made the week of the 20th of May. Therefore, nesting pairs associated with nests from which eggs were removed were not included in the "Nes ting Pairs" total. Table 3. Colorado, Number of Canada geese by breeding 1968. Nesting Pairs Area sub-adult Pairs! classification, Moffat County, Estimated ~o. No. Birds Goslings£ in Groups Total Birds Yampa River 241/ 17 116~/ 93 291 9 11 54 52 146 Lily Park 15 16 69 56 187 YAMPA TOTALS 38 44 239 221 624 23 33 139 112 363 22 16 109 148 333 93 93 487 461 1,320 Craig to Juniper Juniper Spgs. to Cross Mtn. Green River (Brown's Park) Little Snake River (lower bridge State line) GRAND TOTALS to II Novice pairs which are potential nesters next year. both eggs and goslings counted. Includes nesting pairs associated with nests from which eggs were removed for transplant purposes. ~I Includes 51 goslings hatched from eggs taken from nests before final survey and released on fue·Colorado River below Grand Junction. 21 Includes II Tables 4 and 5 reveal that total flock size and gosling production in 1968 showed a considerable increase from 1967. This situation is primarily the result of an increase in goose use and production at Brown's Park National Wildlife Refuge along the Green River. A different method of survey, utilized on the. Green River in 1968 may have had some effect on the number of birds observed and production estimates. �- 7 Table 4. Total Canada geese observed, Moffat County, Colorado, 1968. Percent Change From 1956-67 Ave. From 1967 Area No. Geese Counted 1956-67 Ave. 1967 1968 Yampa River 624 625 335 0.2 + 86.3 Green River 363 l39 68 +161.2 +433.8 Little Snake River 333 277 204J:./ + 20.2 + 63.2 1,320 1,041 607 + 26.8 +117.5 TOTALS ]) Little Snake River not included in survey until 1962. Table 5. 1968. Number of Canada goose goslings estimated, Moffat County, Colorado Percent Change From 1956-67 Ave. From 1967 Area Number of Goslings 1956-67 Ave. 1967 1968 Yampa River 239 207 123 + 15.5 + 94.3 Green River l39 49 23 +183.7 +504.3 Little Snake River 109 107 64!..1 + 1.9 + 70.3 TOTALS 487 363 210 + 34.2 +l3l.9 II Little Snake River not included in survey until 1962. High water on the Yampa, Green and Little Snake Rivers appeared to have very little effect on goose production. Cool spring weather delayed runoff until most nests had hatched. Also, eggs were picked up from nests in danger of destruction from flooding on the Yampa between Craig and Juniper Springs. Table 6 presents production estimates for the resident Canada goose population nesting in Larimer-Boulder County area. This is the first time estimates of productions for Canada geese nesting in north-central Colorado This population continues to have been presented as a part of this report. show excellent growth. �- 8 - Table 6. Canada goose production data for the Larimer-Boulder County area, 1968. County Estimate No. of Birds of Breeding Age Larimer 700 Boulder 150 Fall Flight No. of Nests Es tab lis hed No. of Nests Hatched No. of Birds Raised 267 185 564 57 44 132 Prediction Expected fall flights of ducks from Colorado's 1968 production will be well above average, and somewhat over those of 1967. Water conditions appear favorable in most areas, which should result in good brood survival rates. The 1968 survey of western slope Canada goose populations suggests an excellent production in Colorado, with a strong increase in flock size and production over 1967. All categories of geese (nesting pairs, sub-adult pairs, grouped birds, and goslings) were the largest ever recorded. Production of Canada geese in north-central Colorado was considered lent in 1968. This flock continues to grow and expand its breeding Prepared by: ·--m~L --JP ,/f. ~ -." Michael R. Szymczak! ~ Wildlife Researcher Candidate 1 excelrange. �October, 1969 - 9 JOB PROGRESS REPORT State of COLORADO .--------~~~~------------- Pr,oject Noo W_-_8_8_-_R_-_1_4 Work .Plan No. 1~---------------- Migratory Bird Investigations _ Job NOo 2 _ Job Title: Trapping and Banding Ducks and Geese Period Covered: July 1, 1968 to March 31; 1969 Personnel: Charles Hayes, Jack Randall, and Dale Horne, Bureau of Sport Fisheries and Wildlife; Ron Arant, Ron Blumberg, Bob Clark, Don Crane, Courtney Crawford, Gurney Crawford, Larry Green, Bob Kitzmiller, Harold Lanning, Bob Oakleaf, Charles Reichert, Errol Ryland, Steve Steinert, Lee Swenson, Ken Wagner, Howard Funk, Mike Szymczak, and Richard Hopper, Colorado Game, Fish and Parks DiviSion. ABSTRACT Slightly over 19;300 ducks of 12 species were .banded during 1968-69 (Segment 14). Mallard comprised nearly 7,100 of this total. Pintails and greenwinged teals were the next most abundant species banded, with 1,447 and 1,043, respectively. Post-season winter banding in eastern Colorado contributed-the most ducks to the banded sample (4,476). Pre-season banding in the San Luis Valley yielded 3,213 ducks, while North Park and South Park provided 1,669 and 965, respectfully. Goose trapping in Colorado resulted in the banding of 1,426 Canada geese during 1968-69. Nearly 1,100 of this total were winter banded in the Arkansas Valley. Cos Lfng ctransp Lant s made up the remainder of the total: South Platte Valley (218), San Luis Valley (70), and Colorado River west of Grand Junction (49). �RECOMMENDATIONS �- 11 - TRAPPING AND BANDING DUCKS AND GEESE Richard M. Hopper This report summarizes all waterfowl banding activities of Projfct W-88-R-14 for the segment year April 1, 1968 to March 31, 1969. Banding analysis work is carried as a separate job (Work Plan 1, Job 3), and no attempt will be made to analyze recovery data here. This report merely shows a tabulation of numbers of ducks and geese banded by species and location during the segment. P. S. OBJECTIVE To formulate waterfowl harvest regulations. SEGMENT OBJECTIVES 1. To trap and band ducks and geese for the purpose of accumulating migration, life history, and annual mortality data. 2. To report species and numbers of ducks and geese banded as part of other W-88-R-14 jobs. METHODS AND MATERIALS Methods employed and materials used during Segment 14 remained the same as in Segment 13 (Hopper, 1968). Banding locations and times were also the same as in Segment 13 except that pre-season banding was initiated in South Park and winter banding of geese was not conducted in the Fort Collins area. RESULTS AND DISCUSSION Ducks The number of ducks banded during Segment 14 is shown in Table 1 by species and location. Over 10,300 ducks of 12 species were banded and released. Mallards comprised 7,074, or 68.5 percent, of the total number of ducks banded. Winter banding in eastern Colorado and pre-season banding in the San Luis Valley contributed most to the mallard total. Pintails and greenwinged teals were the next most abundant species in the banded sample with 1,447 and 1,043, respectively. Summer trapping on molting areas in North Park resulted in the banding of 1,669 ducks (Table 1). Green-winged teals, pintails, mallards, and bluewinged and cinnamon teal accounted for most of the total. Banding operations took place at three locations in North Park: Walden Lake, Lake John Annex, and MacFarlane Reservoir. �Table 1. Number of ducks banded by species and location, 1968-69 Location Species North Park Cache la Poudre Valley South Platte Valley Bonny Reservoir Mallard 319 603 2,359 599 894 Black Duck -- -- -- I Gadwall 7 -- -- American Widgeon 139 - .. -- --- Green-winged Teal 506 -- -- Blue-winged and Cinnamon Teal 288 -- Shoveler 5 Pintail South Park Total 2,000 300 7,074 -- -- -- I -- 74 2 83 -- 2 12 153 -- 3 279 255 1,043 -- -- -- 135 23 446 -- -- -- -- -- -- 5 397 -- -- -- 17 661 372 1,447 Redhead -- -- 62 1 63 6 -- -- 6 2 -- -- -- --- -- ~f1ehead ---- -- Ring-necked Duck --- -- 2 1,669 603 2,359 600 914 3,213 965 10,323 Total Arkansas San Luis Valley Valley t-' N �- 13 Pre-season banding was conducted for the sixth consecutive year in the San Luis Valley. Slightly over 3,200 ducks were banded during the period August IS-September 20. The quota of 2,000 mallards was reached in the northern one-half of the Valley. Pintails made up most of the remaining number with 661. / Pre-season banding was initiated in So~th Park during Segment 14, mainly to learn the migration and recovery characteristics of birds in this area in relation to those of North Park and the San Luis Valley. Trapping operations, which occurred mostly at Antero Reservoir, yielded a banded sample of 965 birds. This total consisted largely of three species: pintails (372), mallards (300), and green-winged teal (255). About 4,500 mallards were banded during the winter (post-season) of 1968-69 in eastern Colorado. This total is substantially less than in previous years because quotas were reduced from 1,000 mallards to 600 mallards in each of the seven banding areas in Segment 14, except the Arkansas Valley. A detailed account of this winter mallard banding program is reported as a separate Job Completion Report entitled "Investigation of Mallard Management Units of Eastern Colorado" (Work Plan 3, Job 6). Geese Table 2 lists the number of Canada geese banded in Colorado by location and season of year in the 1968-69 banding segment. Over 1,400 geese were banded during both the summer and winter banding periods. Winter banding in the Arkansas Valley resulted in nearly 1,100 of this total. Table 2. 1968-69. Number of Canada geese banded by location and season of year, Location Arkansas Number Banded Summer Winter Total 1,089 1,089 Valley South Platte Valley 218 218 San Luis Valley 70 70 Colorado 49 49 Total River 337 1,089 1,426 �- 14 Summer banding consisted entirely of the placement of bands on 337 goslings to be transported and released in the South Platte Valley, San Luis Valley, and Colorado River west of Grand Junction. The South Platte Valley and San Luis Valley transplants originally came from the Fort Collins and Denver resident flocks. Forty-nine goslings were hatched from eggs collected on the Yampa River west of Craig and later released on the Colorado River. LITERATURE CITED Hopper, R. M. 1968. Trapping and banding ducks and geese. Fish and Parks Div., Game Research Rept. Oct., p 7-12 . Prepared by: .... /,f '~/JZ .I ~ <' /). -' )~~L---L Richard M. Hopper Wildlife Researcher rr , Colo. Game, �October 1969 - 15 - JOB PROGRESS REPORT State of COLORADO ~-------------------------- Project Noo Migratory Bird Investigations W_-_8_8_-_R_-_l_4 _ Work Plan No., l__" _ Job No., 3 ~ _ Job Title: Analysis of Waterfowl Banding Data ------~--------~---~~--~~~~----------------------------------- Period Covered: Personnel: February 1, 1969 through March 31, 1969 Steve Steinert, Richard M. Hopper and Michael R. Szymczak ABSTRACT From 1954 through 1967, 12,165 ducks were banded in the North Park area of Colorado. A total of 485 banded birds have been recovered. About 77 percent of all mallard recoveries were taken in Colorado; 67.9 percent in the Central Flyway portion. About 44 percent of all mallard recoveries in Colorado were taken in the Cache la Poudre-South Platte Valley, while the San Luis Valley accounted for 26.2 percent of mallard recoveries. About 56 percent of the pintails banded in North Park were recovered in Texas and Louisiana, generally in the Gulf Coast region. Another 16 percent of pintail recoveries were from the Great Salt Lake area of Utah and the Sacramento Valley of California. The location of green-winged teal recoveries indicates a general scattering from North Park banding sites with about 50 percent recovered in Texas and California. The annual mortality rates calculated for mallards by sex and age at time of banding were as follows: innnaturemale, .478; innnature female, .688; adult male, .352; adult female, .420. All categories of mallards except adult males were characterized by generally small banded samples. Annual mortality rates for adult male and female pintails were calculated to be .307 and .313 respectively. The annual mortality rate for adult male green-winged teal was .318. ��- 17 ANALYSIS OF WATERFOWL Michael BANDING DATA R. Szymczak North Park is an intermountain valley located in Jackson County in northcentral Colorado. The elevation of the park is around 8,000 feet. It is one of Colorado's major duck breeding areas. Duck banding in North Park began in the summer of 1954 and has continued on an annual basis since that time. Drive trapping of young and flightless adults has been the method employed in all but the first two years of banding. These efforts have resulted in 12,165 ducks banded through 1967. P. S. OBJECTIVE To formulate waterfowl harvest regulations. SEGMENT OBJECTIVES 1. To analyze recoveries Park to determine: from all species a. Distribution of recoveries by species and age class. b. Annual mortality c. Differences species. between of each species in annual mortality of waterfowl geographic banded in North areas between years of waterfowl. between age classes of the various METHODS AND MATERIALS All data used were obtained either from banding schedules or from IBM band recovery cards received from the Bird Banding Laboratory at Patuxent Wildlife Research Center. Only recoveries from banded birds shot or found dead during the hunting season were utilized. Where applicable, recovery cards were sorted manually as to species, sex, age, when banded, banding year, and location and year of recovery. Location of recoveries were plotted on maps by latitude and longitude. Estimates of mortality rates were computed by the composite dynamic method. Recoveries through the 1967 hunting season were analyzed. �- 18 RESULTS AND DISCUSSION Number and Distribution of Recoveries Bands were placed on thirteen species of ducks. The number of birds banded and recoveries received are presented by species in Table 1. Table 1. Number of birds banded by species in North Park, 1954-67, and recoveries received, 1954-1968. Species No. Birds Banded No. Bands Recovered Percent Recovered Mallard 2,698 268 9.9 Pintail 2,955 94 3.1 Green-winged Teal 3,047 68 2.2 American Widgeon 1,364 20 1.5 Blue-winged and Cinnamon Teal 1,210 14 1.2 Gadwall 394 5 1.3 American Coot 275 4 1.5 Shoveler 112 2 1.8 Common Merganser 47 4 8.5 Ring-necked Duck 40 4 10.0 Lesser Scaup 13 1 7.7 Canvasback 10 1 10.0 Number of recoveries for all species except the mallard are quite small. This is a result of low recovery rates of Some species and small banded samples of others. Because of the small number of recoveries of other species, only information on the mallard, pintail and green-winged teal will be considered. Recovery rates for these three species are presented in Table 2 by sex and age. �- 19 - Table 2. Recovery rates by sex and age for mallards, pintails and greenwinged teal banded in North Park, Colorado, 1954-67. No. Bands Recovered Percent Recovered 1,672 183 10.9 Innnature 285 31 10.9 Adult 483 38 7.9 258 16 6.2 1,905 66 3.5 Innnature 58 4 6.9 Adult 912 18 2.0 80 6 7.5 2,689 66 2.5 Innnature 43 o 0.0 Adult 260 2 0.8 55 o 0.0 No. Birds Banded Species Mallard Adult Male Female Innnature Pintail Adult Male Female Innnature Green-winged Teal Adult Male Female Innnature �- 20 Locations of recoveries of male mallards are presented in Table 3. Table 3. Distribution of recoveries from male mallards banded in North Park, Colorado, 1954-67. Direct No. % Indirect No. % Total No. % 0 0 0.0 0.0 4 2 4.1 2.0 4 2 1.9 0.9 0 0.0 6 6.1 6 2.8 Montana North Dakota Wyoming South Dakota Nebraska Colorado New Mexico Oklahoma Texas 1 1 2 0 2 91 3 0 2 0.9 0.9 1.7 0.0 1.7 78.4 2.6 0.0 1.7 0 1 2 1 4 62 2 1 3 0.0 1.0 2.0 1.0 4.1 63.3 2.0 1.0 3.1 1 2 4 1 6 153 5 1 5 0.5 0.9 1.9 0.5 2.8 71.5 2.3 0.5 2.3 Sub-Total 102 87.9 76 77.6 178 83.2 0 1 0 10 2 0.0 0.9 0.0 8.6 1.7 2 2 1 9 1 2.0 2.0 1.0 9.2 1.0 2 3 1 19 3 0.9 1.4 0.5 8.9 1.4 l3 11.2 15 15.3 28 l3.1 1 1.0 1 0.5 92 93.9 207 96.7 1 0.5 214 100.0 Area Canada Alberta Saskatchewan Sub-Total (Canada) United States Central Flyway Pacific Flyway Montana Idaho Washington Colorado New Mexico Sub-Total Mississippi Flyway Louisiana Mexico Totals Sub-Total (U.S·)115 99.1 1 0.9 116 100.0 98 100.0 �- 21 - Approximately 97 percent of the North Park banded male mallards recoverd are reported taken in the United States. About 83 percent of the recoveries are taken in the Central Flyway with 78.4 percent and 63.6 percent of the direct and indirect recoveries respectively, or 71.5 percent of the total recoveries taken in Colorado. An additional 8.9 percent of male recoveries are reported taken in the Pacific Flyway portion of Colorado. Information on female mallards based on far fewer recoveries indicate that 74.0 percent of the females are taken in the Central Flyway with 53.7 percent coming from Colorado (Table 4). An additional 9.3 percent of the female mallards are reported recovered in the Pacific Flyway portion of Colorado. A total of 80.4 percent of the male mallards and 63.0 percent of the female mallards banded in North Park are reported taken in Colorado. The distribution of mallard recoveries within Colorado are presented in Table 5 by sex and age. The Cache la Poudre-South Platte Valley is the prime Colorado harvest location for mallards banded in North Park with 44.2 percent of all recoveries reported taken in that area. About 26 percent of the North Park mallard recoveries are taken in the San Luis Valley. Most of the birds reported taken in the Valley were recovered during the early October experimental seasons which were first initiated in 1964. As indicated by Table 5, North Park males are taken in the San Luis Valley at approximately three times the rate of North Park females. This may be the result of differential migration of sexes by time with males moving from North Park into the San Luis Valley prior to opening of the early experimental season when hunting pressure is greatest. Recoveries from North Park, the area of banding, amounted to only 4.4 percent of the total indicating the birds normally leave the park prior to the season opening. The distribution of recoveries of male and female pintails is presented in Table 6 and 7 respectively. Only four of the 70 male recoveries were from birds banded as immatures. Six of the 24 female recoveries were banded as immatures. Texas and Louisiana are the prime recovery areas for both sexes of pintails banded in North Park. A total of 58.5 percent of the males and 50.0 of the females were reported taken in those two states with 83.0 percent of those recoveries coming from Gulf Coast areas. The Pacific Flyway states of Utah and California account for another 17 percent of pintail recoveries. About 16 percent of the males and 20.8 percent of the females are reported taken in those two states. Nine of the ten California pintail recoveries were reported taken in the Sacramento Valley, with all male recoveries being indirect and the females recovered directly. Other than Colorado, Mexico was the only other recovery area of significance with 7.4 percent of all recoveries. Five of the six recoveries in Colorado were taken in the South Platte Valley. The distribution of adult male green-winged teal recoveries is presented in Table 8. The locations of recoveries indicate a general scattering of birds from North Park banding sites. About 51 percent of the recoveries are from California and Texas. Distribution of recoveries from these two states shows only general patterns with the Sacramento and Imperial Valleys in California and the Gulf coast of Texas as major recovery areas. Five of the nine recoveries from Colorado were taken in the South Platte Valley and three from the northern end of the San Luis Valley. It is interesting to note that one direct recovery was reported from each of the states of Minnesota and Michigan. The two adult females noted in Table 2 were recovered in Arizona. �- 22 - Table 4. Distribution of recoveries from female mallards banded in North Park, Colorado, 1954-67. Direct No. % Indirect No. % No. % 0 0.0 3 13.3 3 5.6 0 0.0 3 13.3 3 5.6 Wyoming South Dakota Colorado Kansas New Mexico Texas 4 0 18 0 1 1 12.9 0.0 58.1 0.0 3.2 3.2 0 1 11 1 2 1 0.0 4.3 48.0 4.3 8.6 4.3 4 1 29 1 3 2 7.4 1.8 53.7 1.8 5.6 3.7 Sub-Total 24 77.4 16 69.5 40 74.0 0 3 2 0.0 9.7 6.5 1 2 0 4.3 8.6 0.0 1 5 2 1.8 9.3 3.7 5 16.1 3 12.9 8 14.8 2 6.S 1 4.3 3 5.6 31 100.0 20 86.7 51 94.4 31 100.0 23 100.0 54 100.0 Area Total Canada Alberta Sub-Total (Canada) United States Central Flyway Pacific Flyway Nevada Colorado Arizona Sub-Total Mississippi Flyway Louisiana Sub-Total (U.S.) Total �Table 5. Distribution of recoveries in Colorado from mallards banded in North Park. Harvest Area Age and Sex Cache la PoudreS. Platte Vallels % No. San Luis Va11el % No. Arkansas Vallel % No. North Park No. % Pacific Flywal % No. Others % No. Total No. % Adult Male 59 39.6 46 30.9 9 6.0 8 5.4 18 12.1 9 6.0 149 100 Innnature Male 11 47.8 5 21. 7 6 26.1 0 0.0 1 4.4 0 0.0 23 100 Sub-Total 70 40.7 51 29.7 15 8.7 8 4.7 19 11.0 9 5.2 172 . 100 I Adult Female 16 61.5 2 7.7 0 0.0 0 0.0 5 19.2 3 11.6 26 100 Innnature Female 5 62.5 1 12.5 1 12.5 1 12.5 0 0.0 0 0.0 8 100 Sub-Total 21 61.8 3 8.8 1 2.9 1 2.9 5 14.8 3 8.8 34 100 91 44.2 54 26.2 16 7.8 9 4.4 24 11.7 12 5.8 206 100 Total N W �- 24 Table 6. Distribution of recoveries from male pintai1s banded in North Park, Colorado, 1954-67. Direct No. % Indirect No. % No. % 0 0.0 1 2.1 1 1.4 0 0.0 1 2.1 1 1.4 South Dakota Colorado Kansas New Mexico Texas 0 2 0 1 6 0.0 9.1 0.0 4.5 27.3 1 2 1 0 16 2.1 4.2 2.1 0.0 33.3 1 4 1 1 22 1.4 5.7 1.4 1.4 31.4 Sub-Total 9 40.9 20 41.7 29 41.4 1 0 4.5 0.0 3 7 6.3 14.6 4 7 5.7 10.0 1 4.5 10 20.8 11 15.7 0 1 0 8 0.0 4.5 0.0 36.4 1 0 1 11 2.1 0.0 2.1 22.9 1 1 1 19 1.4 1.4 1.4 27.1 9 40.9 13 27.1 22 31.4 0 0.0 1 2.1 1 1.4 Sub-Total (U.S.) 19 86.4 44 91.7 63 90.0 Mexico 3 13.6 3 6.3 6 8.6 Total 22 100.0 48 100.0 70 100.0 Area Total Canada Alberta Sub-Total (Canada) United States Central Flyway Pacific Flyway Utah California Sub-Total Mississippi Flyway Indiana Missouri Tennessee Louisiana Sub-Total Atlantic Flyway North Carolina �- 25 - Table 7. Distribution of recoveries from female pintails banded in North Park, Colorado, 1954-67. Direct No. 10 Area Total Indirect 10 No. No. % Canada 0 0.0 1 5.9 1 4.2 0 0.0 1 5.9 1 4.2 0 3 0.0 42.9 2 4 11.8 23.5 2 7 8.3 29.2 3 42.9 6 35.3 9 37.5 0 2 0 0.0 28.6 0.0 2 1 2 11.8 5.9 11.8 2 3 2 8.3 12.5 8.3 2 28.6 5 29.4 7 29.2 0 2 0.0 28.6 1 3 5.9 17.6 1 5 4.2 20.8 Sub-Total 2 28.6 4 23.5 6 25.0 Sub -Total(U.S .) 7 100.0 15 88.2 22 91.7 Mexico 0 0.0 1 5.9 1 4.2 Total 7 100.0 17 100.0 24 100.0 Alberta Sub-Total (Canada) United States Central Fl~al Colorado Texas Sub-Total Pacific Fl~al Utah California Arizona Sub-Total Mississippi Fl~ay Arkansas Louisiana �- 26 Table 8. Distribution of recoveries from adult male greeft-winged teal banded in North Park, Colorado, 1954-67. Direct Area Indirect No. % No. % 2 5 1 7 5.9 14.7 2.9 20.6 0 3 1 9 0.0 9.4 3.1 28.1 15 42.9 13 1 3 7 1 2.9 8.8 20.6 2.9 12 Total No. % 2 8 2 16 3.0 12.1 3.0 24.2 40.6 28 42.4 0 1 11 2 0.0 3.1 34.4 6.3 1 4 18 3 1.5 6.1 27.3 4.5 35.3 14 43.8 26 39.4 1 1 1 0 1 2.9 2.9 2.9 0.0 2.9 0 0 0 1 3 0.0 0.0 0.0 3.1 9.4 1 1 1 1 4 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 6.1 Sub-Total 4 11.8 4 12.5 8 12.1 Total (U. S.) 31 91.2 31 96.9 62 93.9 Mexico 3 8.8 1 3.1 4 6.1 Total 34 100.0 32 100.0 66 100.0 United States Central Flyway Nebraska Colorado New Mexico Texas Sub-Total Pacific Flyway Colorado Utah California Arizona Sub-Total Mississippi Flyway Michigan Minnesota Missouri Arkansas Louisiana �- 27 Annual Mortality Mortality rates were calculated for mallards of each sex and age class at the time of banding. Calculations by the composite dynamic method are presented in Tables 9 through 12. The validity of the rates determined for immatures of both sexes, as presented in Tables 11 and 12, is questionable because of the small banded sample of each group. Calculations of mortality rates for adult male and female mallards are presented in Tables 9 and 10, respectively. The computations indicate that the average annual mortality rates are .352 and.420 for males and females, respectively. The information on females, as in both immature groups, is based on limited banded samples. However, mortality rates for both sexes are similar to those of winter mallard populations in northeast Colorado as reported by Grieb et al. (1966). Their computed rates were .330 for males and .419 for females. Mortality rates for pintails were calculated for adult males and females only (Tables 13 and 14). The computations presented in Tables 13 and 14 reveal that both sexes of adult pintails have annual mortality rates near 31 percent. This rate is much lower than the .367 computed using the same method for pintails banded during the winter in the San Luis Valley (Grieb and Ballou, 1963). One unusual aspect of the adult pintail mortality rates is the low average first year mortality rate in comparison with succeeding years. Information on recoveries of immatures is presented in Tables 15 and 16, but because of small banded samples, no mortality rates were computed. The mortality rate for adult male green-winged teal banded in North Park was calculated (Table 17). These birds show a first year average mortality rate of .331 and average annual rate of .318. Because of small banded samples and an inadequate number of recoveries, no mortaility rates were computed for any other species. �Table 9. The composite dynamic method of estimating mortality rate of adult male mallards banded in North Park, 1954-67. -Year of Banding Number Birds Banded Recoveries b~ Huntins Season 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 4 2 1 1 1 1 2 0 2 7 6 16 42 l3 2 3 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 7 4 5 18 1 3 0 0 3 0 0 2 1 4 3 6 1 4 0 0 2 0 0 2 1 0 1 98 41 23 11 5 3 1 0 1 Banded birds available 1,672 1,450 795 563 434 317 270 198 183 Recoveries/1,000 birds banded 58.6 28.3 28.9 19.5 3.7 0 5.5 165.5 Alive going into period 165.5 106.9 78.6 49.7 9.2 5.5 5.5 469.8 Mortality rate .354 11.5 9.5 106.9 30.2 18.7 304.3 .351 1954 1955 1956 1957 1958 1959 1960 1961 1962 1963 1964 1965 1966 1967 40 78 18 7 25 15 15 72 47 117 129 232 655 222 Total Banded 1,672 Total Recovered 0 0 1 0 0 0 3 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 8 9 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 N 00 .352 �Table 10. The composite dynamic method of estimating mortality rate of adult female mallards banded in North Park, 1954-67. -Year of Banding Number of Birds Banded Recoveries b~ Hunting Season 6 3 4 5 7 1 2 8 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 1 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 1 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 20 8 3 2 4 0 0 1 Banded birds available 483 469 359 356 352 311 307 286 Recoveries/1,000 birds banded 41.4 17.1 8.4 0 0 3.5 87.4 Alive going into period 87.4 46.0 28.9 3.5 3.5 3.5 208.2 Mortality rate .474 11.4 46.0 20.5 14.9 120.8 .381 1954 1955 1956 1957 1958 1959 1960 1961 1962 1963 1964 1965 1966 1967 110 14 Total Banded 483 96 l38 12 2 16 12 10 21 4 41 4 3 Total Recovered 0 2 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 N \.0 5.6 .420 �Table 11. The composite dynamic method of estimating mortality rate of immature male mallards banded in North Park, 1954-67. Year of Banding Number of Birds Banded 1 Recoveries by Huntin~ Season 2 3 4 5 6 3 5 3 1 1 1 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 18 4 4 1 3 0 1 Banded birds available Recoveries/1,000 birds banded 285 63.2 277 14.4 275 14.5 256 11.7 255 0 244 4.1 111.5 Alive going into period ll1.5 48.3 33.9 15.8 4.1 4.1 237.1 Mortality rate .567 274 3.6 48.3 19.4 125.6 .384 1954 1955 1956 1957 1958 1959 1960 1961 1962 1963 1964 1965 1966 1967 Total Banded 49 56 54 13 23 23 26 II 1 18 1 2 8 0 285 Total Recovered 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 7 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 w 0 .470 �Table 12. The composite dynamic method of estimating mortality rate of immature female mallards banded in North Park, 1954-67. Year of Banding Recoveries bl Huntins Season 3 2 1 Number of Birds Banded 2 4 4 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 11 3 2 Banded birds available 258 246 244 Recoveries/1,000 birds banded 42.6 12.2 1954 1955 1956 1957 1958 1959 1960 1961 1962 1963 1964 1965 1966 1967 58 81 39 6 7 25 14 8 0 6 0 2 12 0 W I-' Total Banded 258 Total Recovered 8.2 63.0 8.2 91.6 20.4 Alive going into period 63.0 Mortality rate .676 20.4 28.6 .713 .688 �Table 13. The composite dynamic method of estimating mortality rate of adult male pintai1s banded in North Park, 1954-67. -Year of Banding 1954 1955 1956 1957 1958 1959 1960 1961 1962 1963 1964 1965 1966 1967 Number of Birds Banded 4 4 5 4 44 57 15 523 101 51 99 90 564 344 1 Recoveries bl Huntin~ Season 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 0 0 1 1 10 5 0 0 0 0 2 2 0 2 0 0 0 3 6 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 2 1 1 0 22 15 8 11 5 4 1 Banded birds available 1,905 1,561 997 907 808 757 656 Recoveries/1,000 birds banded 11.5 9.6 8.0 5.3 1.5 54.2 Alive going into period 54.2 42.7 33.1 6.8 1.5 176.4 Mortality rate .212 12.1 6.2 42.7 25.1 13.0 122.2 .349 Total Banded 1,905 Total Recovered 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 lO 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 3 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 l.oJ N .307 �Table 14. The composite dynamic method of estimating mortality rate of adult female pintai1s banded in North Park, 1954-67. -Year of Banding Number of Birds Banded 1 1954 1955 1956 1957 1958 1959 1960 1961 1962 1963 1964 1965 1966 1967 11 14 7 12 21 52 21 177 57 70 34 32 359 45 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 2 0 0 0 Total Banded 912 5 6 1 3 2 1 Banded birds available 912 867 508 476 442 372 Recoveries/1,000 5.5 6.9 2.0 4.5 2.7 27.9 Alive going into period 27.9 22.4 15.5 7.2 2.7 89.2 Mortality rate .197 6.3 22.4 l3 .5 61.3 .365 birds banded Total Recovered Recoveries by Hunting Season 2 3 4 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 w w .313 �- 34 - Table 15. Recoveries by hunting season of immature male pintai1s banded in North Park, 1954-67. Year of Banding Number of Birds Banded Recoveries by Hunting Season 1 2 1954 4 0 0 1955 8 0 0 1956 8 0 1 1957 1 0 0 1958 4 0 0 1959 7 0 0 1960 3 0 1 1961 1 0 0 1962 1 0 0 1963 5 0 0 1964 0 0 1965 6 0 0 1966 3 1 0 1967 7 1 Total Banded 58 Total Recovered 2 2 �- 35 Table 16. Recoveries by hunting season of immature female pintai1s banded in North Park, 1954-67 Number of Birds Banded Year of Banding Recoveries by Hunting Season 1 2 3 1954 9 0 1 1 1955 28 1 1 0 1956 10 1 1 0 1957 3 0 0 0 1958 0 1959 6 0 0 0 1960 5 0 0 0 1961 1 0 0 0 1962 3 0 0 0 1963 7 0 0 0 1964 0 1965 2 0 0 0 1966 1 0 0 1967 5 Total Banded 80 0 Total Recovered 2 3 1 �Table 17. The composite dynamic method of estimating mortality rate of adult male green-winged teal banded in North Park, 1954-67. Year of Banding Number of Birds Banded Recoveries by Hunting Season 3 4 5 6 1 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 5 1 19 7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 4 1 7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 1 2 1 34 17 7 Banded birds available 2,689 2,298 Recoveries/1,000 birds banded 12.6 7.4 5.3 Alive going into period 38.1 25.5 18.1 Mortality rate .331 1954 1955 1956 1957 1958 1959 1960 1961 1962 1963 1964 1965 1966 1967 Total Banded 0 27 1 28 62 60 32 261 208 283 270 98 968 391 2,689 Total Recovered 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 .0 0 0 0 0 2 0 7 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 w 0\ 2 2 2 2 1,330 1,232 862 579 371 1.6 2.3 25.5 11.2 12.8 81.9 .311 3.5 5.4 38.1 8.9 5.4 120.0 .318 �- 37 - LITERATURE CITED Grieb, J.R., and R.M. Ballou. 1963. An evaluation of a proposed experimental duck hunting season in the San Luis Valley, Colorado. A report to The Central Flyway Council. 38p. Grieb, J.R., H. Funk, D. Witt, G. Wrakestraw, and L. Serdiuk. 1966. A proposed mallard management unit for the Central Flyway. Central Flyway Tech. Comm. Rep. 32p. ��October 1969 - 39 - JOB PROGRESS REPORT State of COLORADO ---------------------------- Pro ject No ,__ W_-8_8_-R_-_1_4 Work Plan No •. ~ __l__·_------ Migratory Bird Investigations _ Job Noo• 5 _ Job Title: Waterfowl Kill Survey -----------------------~--------------------------------------- Period Covered: Personnel: October 1, 1968 through'March 31, 1969 Velma Merkle, Velma Fredrickson, Jack Grieb and Howard Funk. ABSTRAct Duck stamps sold in Colorado in 1968 numbered 31,218, the most since 1959. Number of duck hunters increased to 23,006 on the east slope. Regular season length was decreased to 33 days and duck bag and possession limits were left at three and six, respectively; two and four, respectively~ which could be mallards. Regular season harvest was estimated at almost 78,000 ducks. Harvest on the west slope increased to 26,000 ducks taken by approximately 3,500 hunters. About 3,000 hunters took over 22,000 ducks during the special San Luis Valley season. An estimated 7,454 hunters harvested about 42,600 ducks during the late mallard drake season on the east slope. For the second consecutive year, Canada goose harvest was shown to have decreased in Colorado. Number of hunters was quite similar to 1967 results at about 13,500 but harvest dropped from over 23,000 in 1967 to just over 1'9,000 in 1968. Reduced numbers of geese wintering in the Arkansas Valley was probably responsible for much of this reduction. Harvest of geese in the Larimer, Weld and Boulder County permit area was estimated to have increased 211 percent over 1967 with a total kill of 2,631 birds. ��- 41 - WATERFOWL KILL SURVEY Howard D. Funk This random survey of Colorado small game harvest is a cooperative venture of Federal Aid Project W-88":R and The Game Planning Section of the Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Division. SEGMENT To estimate by species, OBJECTIVES the State harvest of waterfowl for the 1968-69 hunting County, and interval of the season. METHODS season AND MATERIALS Techniques were similar to those used in the past with hunters' names drawn in a mechanical random fashion from duplicate license stubs of current license sales. One follow-up was sent to non-reporting hunters after an interval of two to three weeks. The questionnaire generally remained the same in form and context as last year. RESULTS AND DISCUSSION Questionnaires were sent to 14,000 randomly selected license buyers in 1968 and a total of 8,486 responded for a return of 60.6 percent, the lowest since the survey started. Of the 8,486 returns, 4,583 reported hunting, 3,522 bought a license but did not hunt, and 381 were not usable. Most of the hunters not hunting were found to have purchased a combination hunting and fishing license which was used for fishing only. Thus, of the total sale of licenses permitting small game hunting during 1968 (174,214), it is estimated that 134,606 hunters hunted one or more species of small game. This is a strong increase in the number of hunters (98,618) estimated for 1967, and significantly greater than the 114,492 estimated for 1966. Colorado duck stamp sales are plotted in Table 1 revealing that the 1968 sale of 31,218 was larger than the previous year. In fact, this is the most duck stamps sold since 1960, the beginning of the decrease in continental duck populations. Table 2 classifies Duck Stamp buyers by the type of hunting in which they engaged for the past 15 years. Thus, it appears that number of duck hunters were highest since 1960 while goose hunters were about average. Duck Harvest Hunting statistics of the 1968 season are tabulated and compared with past years in Table 3. This reveals that total estimated retrieved kill of 168,532 was significantly greater than the previous year and largest since 1960. �- 42 Table 1. Duck stamp sales for Colorado. Year Number of Stamps Sold Percent Change From Previous Year 1954 32,450 + 20.5 1955 39,107 + 20.5 1956 36,303 7.2 1957 41,794 + 15.1 1958 41,897 + 1959 31,431 - 24.9 1960 30,592 2.7 1961 24,854 - 18.8 1962 17,701 - 28.8 1963 22,940 + 29.6 1964 25,282 + lO.2 1965 20,537 - 18.8 1966 29,377 + 43.0 1967 31,064 + 5.7 1968 31,218 + .02 .5 The reason harvest increased so strongly was due to an increase in hunters as a result of relaxed hunting regulations, favorable publicity, and special seasons which offered a variety of hunting opportunity this past fall. In addition, it was estimated that 20,645 birds were crippled for a wounding loss of 10.9 percent permitting an estimated total hunting mortality of 189,177 ducks for 1968 in Colorado. Species composition of the 1968 bag is listed in Table 4 and compared with the average of the fourteen previous years. These data indicate that total duck harvest was about 17 percent greater than the fourteen-year average. The mallard remains the most common species taken with the green-winged teal next. �- 43 - Table 2. Estimated number of duck and goose hunters, average number of days hunted and season length, by year. Year Number Number of Duck of Goose Hunters Hunters 1954 31,834 12,136 1955 37,816 17,634 1956 34,793 1957 Average Number Days Hunted for Ducks Geese Season Length (days) Geese Ducks Bag and Possession Limit Ducks Geese 60 60 5-10 2-2 8.87 75 60 5-10 2-2 12,477 7.37 75 60 5-10 2-2 37,166 12,057 6.52 75 60 5-10 2-2 1958 38,773 14,705 5.78 90 60 4-8 2-2 1959 29,060 13 ,647 5.70 50 75 4-8 2-2 1960 29,480 14,107 6.05 60 75 3-6 2-2 1961 22,920 11 ,245 4.40 30 60 3-6 2-2 1962 13,918 9,159 5.27 25 1/ 75 2-4 Y 2-2 1963 17,989 10,841 5.66 6.64 35 !! 75 4-8 ?J 2-2 1964 19,189 13,678 6.30 7.37 40 1/ 75 4-8 ?J 2-2 1965 15,374 11,344 5.62 5.53 36 Y 75 4-8 'l/ 2-2 1966 23,635 15,807 5.96 6.25 60 !! 75 3-6 ?J 2-2 1967 25,347 13,748 6.49 6.43 60 !! 75 3-6 ?J 2-2 1968 26,528 13 ,467 6.18 6.48 33 Y 75 3-6 ?J 2-2 60 7.64 !! Hunting regulations for East Slope. West Slope had a general season of 75 days with 4 ducks in bag, and 8 in possession in 1962, and 90 days, 4 in bag and 8 in possession in 1963, 1964, and 1965; and 90 days 5 in bag and 10 in possession in 1966 and 1967, and 86 days, 5 in bag and 10 in possession of which 3 and 6, respectively, could be mallards in 1968. ?J Two mallards allowed in bag, and four in possession on East Slope. 11 One mallard and pintail allowed in bag and two in possession on East Slope, three mallards or three pintai1s on West Slope. Y One mallard in bag and two in possession on East Slope. �- 44 - Table 3. Date Duck harvest statistics, 1954-1967. Slope 1954 1955 1956 1957 1958 1959 1960 1961 Number of Hunters Average Seasonal Bag Total Estimated Harvest Woundin8 Percent Loss Number Total Estimated Hunting Mortality 31,834 37,816 34,793 37,166 38,773 29,060 29,480 22,920 5.6 6.7 5.9 6.8 6.1 4.2 5.0 3.8 179,856 253,367 185,737 254,587 236,515 122,924 147 ,400 86,408 14.5 13.1 16.3 14.1 12.3 15.5 13.1 21.4 30,396 38,182 36,195 41,679 33,088 22,417 22,257 23,608 210,252 291,549 221,932 296,266 269,603 145,341 169,667 110,016 1962 East West TOTAL 11,349 2 569 13,918 2.6 3.5 2.8 29,507 82992 38,499 13.5 11.7 13.1 4,603 12187 5,790 34,110 1°2179 44,289 1963 East West TOTAL 15,627 22362 17 ,989 5.1 3.6 4.9 80,167 82503 88,670 10.7 9.7 10.6 9,636 916 10,552 89,803 92419 99,222 1964 East West TOTAL 16,311 22878 19,189 4.0 4.0 4.0 65,244 112512 76,756 10.6 10.4 10.6 7,764 12335 9,099 73,008 122847 85,855 1965 East West TOTAL 12,747 22627 15,374 5.0 4.3 4.9 64,245 11 z322 75,567 18.7 15.4 18.2 12,007 12744 13,751 76,252 132°66 89,318 1966 East West TOTAL 19,494 42141 23,635 5.0 4.4 4.9 97,860 182345 116,205 16.4 20.4 17.1 19,278 42715 23,993 117,138 232°60 140,198 1967 East West TOTAL 22,432 22915 25,347 6.5 3.7 6.2 146,032 1°2698 156,730 12.0 22.9 12.9 20,006 32178 23,184 166,038 132876 179,914 1968 East West TOTAL 23,006 32522 26,528 6.2 7.4 6.4 142,578 252954 168,532 10.9 10.9 10.9 17,466 32179 20,645 160,044 292133 189,177 �- 45 - Table 4. Species composition of the bag. Species 1968 Number % of Killed Total l4-Year Average 1954-1967 Number % of Killed Total Mallard 130,782 77 .6 97,630 67.8 + 34.0 Pintail 5,393 3.2 4,909 3.4 + 10.0 Green-winged Teal 9,269 5.5 12,826 8.9 - 27.7 Blue-winged Teal 2,865 1.7 5,698 4.0 - 33.3 Baldpate 1,685 1.0 1,723 1.2 2.2 Gadwall 4,719 2.8 4,248 2.9 + 11.0 Shoveller 1,348 .8 1,634 1.1 - 17.5 Scaup 843 .5 1,160 .8 - 27.3 Redhead 1,348 .8 1,140 .8 + 18.2 Canvasback 1,685 1.0 1,018 .7 + 65.5 Others and Unknown 8,595 5.1 12,051 8.4 - 28.7 168,532 100.0 144,037 100.0 + 17.0 TOTALS Percent Change 1968 From l4-Year Average Harvest Duck kill and hunting pressure by 10-day intervals of the season for both east and west slopes are tabulated in Table 5. These data show that harvest for the east slope was fairly evenly divided over the season intervals but that the beginning of the regular season and the late drake-only season drew the most interest and harvest. For the west slope, however, hunting pressure was rather evenly spread throughout the season while harvest dwindled as the season progressed. San Luis Valley Experimental Season This was the sixth year of an experimental duck hunting season in the San Luis Valley. Reasons for the season and results have been reported in detail elsewhere, and will not be repeated. However, information gained through this survey on this season will be presented here. �- 46 Table 5. season. Ducks bagged and hunting pressure by 10-day intervals of the 1968 Dates Estimated Harvest No. of % of Ducks Total Estimated Hunting Pressure No. of % of Hunters Total EAST SLOPE San Luis Valley (Special) Oct. 1-18 22,242 15.6 3,083 13.4 Oct. 26-Nov. 4 34,219 24.0 6,948 30.2 Nov. 5-14 22,242 15.6 5,890 25.6 Nov. 15-27 21,244 14.9 5,383 23.4 42,631 29.9 7,454 32.4 Regular Exp. Mallard Drake Season Dec. 14-Jan. 5 WEST SLOPE Regular Oct. 12-21 4,075 15.7 1,077 30.6 Oct. 22-31 3,244 12.5 881 25.0 Nov. 1-10 2,829 10.9 881 25.0 Nov. 11-20 2,647 10.2 972 27.6 Nov. 21-30 3,582 13.8 972 27.6 Dec. 1-10 1,921 7.4 630 17.9 Dec. 11-20 2,855 11.0 789 22.4 Dec. 21-30 2,829 10.9 754 21.4 Dec. 31-Jan. 5 1,973 7.6 556 15.8 �- 47 - According to questionnaire data 3,083 hunters bagged an estimated 22,242 ducks in the San Luis Valley during the experimental season, October 1-18, 1968. This is compared to an estimated 2,804 hunters and 18,253 retrieved kill for the previous year. However, number of hunters is rather meaningless since they refer to successful hunters rather than estimating total hunters. A special report on the experimental Valley hunt will be provided later. Experimental Mallard Drake-only Season. An experimental mallard drakeonly season was granted in the Central Flyway portion of Colorado in 1968 to allow hunting pressure on an undershot population of mallards, especially drakes. Full justification for the season is reported elsewhere and will not be presented here. The season was from December 14, 1968 through January 5, 1969. Bag limit was four greenheads with eight in possession. Questionnaire data reveal that 7,454 hunters bagged an estimated 42,631 ducks during this experimental season (Table 5). Being the season was a "first", no comparative data are available. However, the season was deemed a success and was certainly popular with the hunters. About 32 percent of the total hunters in the State participated in the season and harvest during this period made up about 30 percent of the total State duck kill. A special report on the season is available. Goose Harvest Hunting statistics of the goose season presented in Table 6 estimate 13,467 hunters bagged an average of 1.4 geese during the season for a total estimated harvest of 19,379 birds. In addition, another 3,864 birds were reported wounded but not retrieved for a wounding loss of 16.6 percent. This permits a total hunting mortality estimate for Colorado during 1968 of 23,243 geese. Species composition of geese killed was similar between all years of the survey being 99 percent, or above, Canada geese. The remaining percentages were "other and unknown" species of geese, and were probably mainly Canada geese which hunters were not able to correctly identify. It is known that there were a few snow geese taken in Colorado during this hunting season, and an even smaller number of white fronts. The 1968 goose hunting season was characterized by good water and food conditions in the Arkansas Valley during the fall and winter periods. Census figures taken at intervals in the Arkansas Valley indicated a large number of geese present in Colorado during the season. These birds seemed to be distributed on all water bodies in the Valley with major concentrations in the Two Buttes and Eads Lakes areas. In addition to the Arkansas Valley, Greeley-Fort Collins area increased to the excellent harvest. numbers of wintering geese in the Denversignificantly and undoubtedly contributed �- 48 - Table 6. Goose harvest statistics, 1954-1968. Total Estimated Hunting Mortality Number of Hunters Average Seasonal Bag Total Estimated Harvest 12,136 17,364 11,541 12,057 14,705 13,647 14,107 11,245 0.7 1.0 1.0 1.2 1.3 1.6 1.1 1.3 8,168 17 ,711 11,310 14,589 19,704 21,972 15,659 14,056 22.8 18.3 21.6 23.5 22.3 17.8 20.7 24.5 2,410 3,884 3,116 4,473 5,655 4,730 4,087 4,568 10,578 21,248 14,426 19,062 25,359 26,702 19,746 18,624 East West TOTAL 8,828 331 9,159 1.5 1.3 1.5 l3,241 430 13,671 19.5 3,218 19.1 ° 1./ 3,218 16,459 430 16,889 East West TOTAL 10,462 379 10,841 1.7 0.3 1.6 17 ,785 114 17 ,899 15.2 3,184 17.8 ° 1./ 3.184 20,969 114 21,083 East West TOTAL l3,295 383 13,678 1.8 0.5 1.7 23.931 192 24.123 19.0 5,624 18.9 ° jj 5,624 29,555 192 29,747 1965 East West TOTAL 10,941 403 11,344 1.2 1.0 1.2 13,239 419 l3,658 24.6 27.0 24.7 3,257 113 3,370 16,496 532 17,028 1966 East West TOTAL 15,443 364 15,807 1.9 1.1 1.9 29,6l3 420 30,033 16.2 16.2 ° 5,745 87 5,832 35,358 507 35,865 1967 East West TOTAL l3,598 150 13,748 1.7 1.7 1.7 23,117 255 23,372 19.8 19.8 19.8 5,710 63 5,773 28,827 318 29,145 1968 East West TOTAL 13,050 417 13,467 1.5 .7 1.4 19,088 291 19,379 16.6 16.6 16.6 3,806 58 3,864 22,894 349 23,243 Year Slope 1954 1955 1956 1957 1958 1959 1960 1961 1962 1963 1964 Wounding Loss Percent Number ° ° ° Fourteen-year average goose harvest (1954-68) is 16,531. ]J No cripples reported on the west slope. �- 49 - During the last four years, goose permits, a six bird season limit, and other special regulations were established for Larimer County. A random sample drawn from the 3,000 permits issued indicated that 621 persons obtained permits but did not use them, 2,379 hunters hunted geese one or more times bagging 1,584 geese in Larimer County, 886 birds in Weld County and 161 birds in Boulder County for a total harvest of 2,631, an increase of 211% over the 1,246 birds bagged in 1967. Waterfowl Harvest by County The reader is cautioned that information presented in this section is subject to a great deal more error in accuracy than estimated in previous sections, since the original sample has been broken down to county, thus decreasing the size of sample on which to base estimates. This is probably even more true of geese than ducks, because there were many more duck hunters. Consequently, it is realized that in some counties, both duck and goose kill have been over-estimated, and in others, underestimated. However, despite this error, these data represent the most accurate information on this subject possible at the present time. Tables 7 and 8 compare the 1968 duck and goose kill, respectively, with average of previous seasons, by county, within each waterfowl region. These regional divisions of the State were located on the basis of waterfowl migration, location, and topography; and permit a closer evaluation of kill, yearly changes in kill, and the effect of different types of hunting seasons on various portions of Colorado. Grossly, it appears that the increase in duck harvest was again mainly in the Central Region, although the percentage of total kill for this area decreased somewhat. This indicates that hunters were still not willing to travel to the eastern parts of the State because of the two mallard limit. The eastern slope again contributed the bulk of the duck harvest being about 85% in 1967, which is similar to past years. Weld was again the high harvest county. Harvest on the west slope increased significantly in some regions. The 1968 goose harvest compared to the fourteen-year average in Table 8 shows that total harvest was considerably above the average. Also, that the Southeast Region accounted for about 59 percent of the total goose bag, with Baca, Prowers, Bent and Kiowa the top harvest counties, in that order, in the Southeast Region. Waterfowl Management Units Again this year, harvest information has been gathered on the basis of waterfowl management units (Figure 1). The purpose of this is a better alignment of data to provide information about specific flocks of ducks and geese. For example, Unit 1 encompasses the area utilized by wintering ducks at Jumbo Reservoir, Unit 5 is North Park, and Unit 15 is the San Luis Valley. �- 50 Table 7. Duck kill by Region and County. Waterfowl Region and County 1968 Duck Kill Number Percent Killed of Total Estimated 1968 Hunting Pressure Number Percent Hunters of Total Fourteen-year Average 1954-1967 Nwnber Percent Killed of Total EAST SLOPE NORTHEAST Cheyenne Kit Carson Lincoln Logan Morgan Phillips Sedgwick Washington Yuma 843 168 6,910 12,640 168 2,022 1,180 2,191 0.6 0.1 4.8 8.9 0.1 1.4 0.8 1.6 186 80 1,273 2,124 80 425 186 451 0.8 0.3 5.5 9.3 0.3 1.8 0.8 2.0 459 1,552 1,094 7,147 9,331 191 3,860 2,145 3,227 0.3 1.2 0.9 5.7 7.5 0.1 3.1 1.7 2.6 NORTHEAST TOTAL 26,122 18.3 4,805 20.8 29,006 23.1 0.5 2.8 1.8 0.1 0.7 0.5 2.3 2.3 3.2 1,250 3,153 2,866 640 1,609 1,082 1,852 3,966 3,222 1.0 2.5 2.3 0.5 1.3 0.8 1.5 3.2 2.6 SOUTHEAST Baca Bent Crowley Huerfano Kiowa Las Animas Otero Prowers Pueblo 337 3,539 1,517 0.2 2.5 1.1 505 1,348 2,697 2,697 4,887 0.3 0.9 1.9 1.9 3.5 133 637 425 26 159 133 530 530 716 SOUTHEAST TOTAL 17,527 12.3 3,289 14.2 19,640 15.7 Adams Arapahoe Boulder Douglas Elbert E1 Paso Jefferson Larimer Weld 7,921 843 9,269 168 168 1,011 2,022 17,529 30,676 5.6 0.6 6.5 0.1 0.1 0.7 1.4 12.3 21.6 1,247 265 1,776 80 26 265 344 2,864 4,377 5.4 1.1 7.8 0.3 0.1 1.1 1.5 12.5 19.0 7,413 1,788 7,544 152 282 1,035 1,405 11 ,226 27,424 5.9 1.4 6.1 0.1 0.2 0.8 1.1 9.0 21.9 CENTRAL TOTAL 69,607 48.9 11,244 48.8 58,269 46.5 CENTRAL �- 51 Table 7. Duck kill by Region and County (continued). Waterfowl Region and County 1968 Duck Kill Number Percent Killed of Total Estimated 1968 Huntin~ Pressure Number Percent Hunters of Total Fourteen-year Average 1954-1967 Number Percent Killed of Total SAN LUIS VALLEY Alamosa Conejos Costilla Rio Grande Saguache SAN LUIS VALLEY TOTAL 8,427 3,708 1,348 9,437 3z539 5.9 2.6 1.0 6.6 2.5 1,247 345 159 955 612 5.4 1.5 0.8 4.1 2.6 4,105 2,343 745 5,198 3z826 3.3 1.9 0.6 4.1 3.0 26,459 18.6 3,318 14.4 16,217 12.9 337 0.2 26 0.1 337 674 0.2 0.5 53 159 0.2 0.8 461 90 281 836 0.4 0.1 0.2 0.7 843 0.7 337 168 2,696 0.2 0.1 1.9 53 26 53 53 423 0.2 0.1 0.2 0.2 1.8 187 144 253 35 2,287 0.1 0.1 0.2 0.0 1.8 HIGH COUNTRY Chaffee Clear Creek Custer Fremont Gilpin Jackson Lake Park Teller HIGH COUNTRY TOTAL WEST SLOPE NORTHWEST Garfield Moffat Rio Blanco Routt NORTHWEST TOTAL 1,348 843 1,180 168 3,539 5.2 3.3 4.6 0.6 l3.6 265 133 106 106 610 7.7 3.8 3.1 3.1 17.7 1,566 520 697 793 3,576 8.5 2.8 3.8 4.4 19.5 WEST CENTRAL Delta Mesa Montrose Ouray W. CENTRAL TOTAL 5,056 5,056 2,697 337 13,146 19.3 19.3 10.4 1.3 50.3 610 716 346 26 1,698 17 .7 20.8 10.0 0.7 49.2 2,947 4,507 2,390 169 10,0l3 16.1 24.6 l3.0 1.0 54.7 168 0.6 53 1.6 505 1,348 1.9 5.2 26 239 0.7 6.9 2,528 9.7 337 4,886 1.3 18.7 186 26 53 583 5.4 0.7 1.6 16.9 124 25 39 1,432 100 796 16 184 2,716 0.7 0.1 0.2 7.9 0.5 4.4 0.0 1.0 14.8 SOUTHWEST Archuleta Dolores Hinsdale La Plata Mineral Montezuma San Juan San Miguel SOUTHWEST TOTAL �- 52 - Table 7. Duck kill by Region and County (continued). Waterfowl Region and County 1968 Duck Kill Number Percent Killed of Total HIGH COUNTRY Eagle Grand Gunnison Pitkin Summit HIGH COUNTRY TOTAL 843 1,011 1,854 674 168 4,550 Estimated 1968 Huntin~ Pressure Number Percent Hunters of Total 3.2 3.9 7.1 2.6 0.6 17.4 l33 133 186 53 53 558 Fourteen-year Average 1954-1967 Number Percent Killed of Total 3.8 3.8 5.4 1.6 1.6 16.2 743 411 523 254 85 2,016 4.1 2.2 2.8 1.4 0.5 11.0 Summary by Region NORTHEAST SOUTHEAST CENTRAL SAN LUIS VALLEY HIGH COUNTRY (E) NORTHWEST WEST CENTRAL SOUTHWEST HIGH COUNTRY (W) TOTAL OF REGIONS 26,122 17,527 69,607 26,459 2,696 3,539 l3,146 4,886 42550 168,532 15.5 10.4 41.3 15.7 1.6 2.1 7.8 2.9 2.7 100.0 4,805 3,289 11,244 3,318 423 610 1,698 583 558 26,528 18.1 12.4 42.4 12.5 1.6 2.3 6.4 2.2 2.1 100.0 29,006 19,640 58,269 16,217 2,287 3,576 10,0l3 2,716 22016 143,740 20.2 13.7 40.5 11.3 1.6 2.5 6.9 1.9 1.4 100.0 EAST SLOPE WEST SLOPE 142,411 26,121 84.5 15.5 23,079 3,449 87.0 l3.0 125,417 18,323 87.3 12.7 Table 8. Goose kill by Region and County. Waterfowl Region and County 1968 Goose Kill Number Percent Killed of Total Estimated 1968 Huntin~ Pressure Number Percent Hunters of Total Fourteen-year Average 1954-1967 Number Percent Killed of Total EAST SLOPE NORTHEAST Cheyenne Kit Carson Lincoln Logan Morgan Phillips Sedgwick Washington Yuma NORTHEAST TOTAL l3 13 0.1 0.1 39 911 0.2 4.7 l35 781 5.9 23 30 15 155 532 58 39 19 1,066 0.3 0.2 0.1 5.5 108 108 l3 1,171 0.8 0.8 0.1 8.9 49 99 95 998 1.1 0.1 0.2 0.0 0.9 3.1 0.3 0.6 0.5 5.7 �- 53 Table 8. Goose kill by Region and County (continued) • Waterfowl Region and County SOUTHEAST Baca Bent Crowley .Huerfano Kiowa Las Animas Otero Prowers Pueblo SOUTHEAST TOTAL CENTRAL Adams Arapahoe Boulder Douglas Elbert E1 Paso Jefferson Larimer Weld CENTRAL TOTAL SAN LUIS VALLEY Alamosa Conejos Costilla Rio Grande Saguache S.L.VALLEY TOTALS HIGH COUNTRY (EAST) Chaffee Clear Creek Custer Fremont Gilpin Jackson Lake Park Teller HIGH COUNTRY TOTAL 1968 Goose Kill Number Percent Killed of Total Estimated 1968 Hunting Pressure Number Percent Hunters of Total Fourteen-year Average 1954-1967 Number Percent Killed of Total 12.8 10.9 5.6 0.1 7.5 1.5 2.7 7.8 2.0 50.9 5,331 1,919 712 124 3,175 113 341 2,226 181 14,122 30.8 11.0 4.1 0.7 18.3 0.6 2.0 12.8 1.1 81.4 314 135 53 3 6 8 147 482 780 1,928 1.8 0.8 0.3 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.8 2.9 4.5 11.1 0.1 0.8 0.7 0.0 0.0 1.6 4,613 1,802 523 24.2 9.4 2.7 1,318 252 426 1,957 155 11,046 6.9 1.3 2.2 10.3 0.8 57.8 1,672 1,414 740 13 983 202 364 1,011 269 6,668 349 174 77 1.8 0.9 0.5 363 175 296 2.8 1.3 2.3 175 349 3,257 2z132 6,513 0.9 1.8 17 .0 11.2 34.1 13 108 108 2,130 1z496 4,689 0.1 0.8 0.8 16.3 11.5 35.9 39 58 0.2 0.3 40 135 202 0.3 1.0 1.5 97 0.5 377 2.9 5 145 130 2 2 284 39 290 0.2 1.6 13 81 0.1 0.6 20 0.1 58 0.3 81 0.6 19 0.1 13 0.1 3 0.0 1 0.0 ,43 0.2 387 2.1 188 1.4 �- 54 Table 8. Goose kill by Region and County (continued). Waterfowl Region and County 1968 Goose Kill Number Percent Killed of Total Estimated 1968 Hunting Pressure Number Percent Hunters of Total Fourteen-year Average 1954-1967 Number Percent Killed of Total WEST SLOPE NORTHWEST Garfield Moffat Rio Blanco Routt NORTHWEST TOTAL WEST CENTRAL Delta Mesa Montrose Ouray W.CENTRAL TOTAL SOUTHWEST Archuleta Dolores Hinsdale La Plata Mineral Montezum9. San Juan San Miguel SOUTHWEST TOTAL HIGH COUNTRY (WEST) Eagle Grand Gunnison Pitkin Summit HIGH COUNTRY TOTAL 1 100 0.7 73.0 101 73.7 3.5 3 1 2 4.0 .1 .3 13 3.5 6 4.4 26 7.0 136 19 77 232 50.4 7.0 28.6 86.0 283 13 13 309 75.8 3.4 3.4 82.6 19 7.0 13 19 7.0 0 0.0 26 7.0 3 3 2.2 2.2 19 7.0 13 13 3.5 3.5 27 19.7 19 7.0 26 7.0 27 19.7 8.7 49.5 34.8 2.8 1.4 2.3 0.1 0.2 0.2 100.0 998 14,122 1,928 284 43 101 6 3 27 17,512 5.7 80.6 11.0 1.6 0.2 0.6 0.1 0.0 0.2 100.0 97.3 2.7 17,375 137 99.2 0.8 SummarJ::bJ::Rel:2ion NORTHEAST SOUTHEAST CENTRAL SAN LUIS VALLEY HIGH COUNTRY (E) NORTHWEST WEST CENTRAL SOUTHWEST HIGH COUNTRY (W) TOTAL OF REGIONS 1,066 11,046 6,513 97 387 232 19 5.5 57.0 33.6 0.5 2.0 1.2 0.1 19 19,379 0.1 100.0 1,171 6,668 4,689 377 188 309 13 26 26 13,467 EAST SLOPE WEST SLOPE 19,109 270 98.6 1.4 13,093 374 �WATERFOWL MANAGEMENT UNITS K WYOMING GFP-R-M-l Fig. 1. Waterfowl Hanagemerrt; Unit Map. M E X I C 0 , " A OKLAHOMA �- 56 In many cases, duck or goose flock boundaries transcend county lines and it has been difficult to put together county information so that we could look at the influence of hunting pressure and harvest on separate flocks. Naturally, we hope that management units will solve this problem. Results are tabulated in Table 9 and are offered without further comment at this time. Table 9. Estimated waterfowl hunters and harvest by management units, 1968. Ducks Management Hunters Number Percent Unit Bag Number Percent Geese Hunters Bag Number Percent Number Percent 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1,565 2,095 4,590 2,679 106 3,954 318 424 451 637 212 1,379 902 318 3,688 5.9 7.9 17.3 10.1 0.4 14.9 1.2 1.6 1.7 2.4 0.8 5.2 3.4 1.2 13.9 EAST SLOPE 10,280 6.1 11,629 6.9 26,966 16.0 18,201 10.8 1,180 0.7 27,470 16.3 1.0 1,685 1,180 0.7 1.3 2,191 1.5 2,528 1,011 0.6 7,752 4.6 3,876 2.3 1.4 2,359 26,292 15.6 269 619 1,858 1,886 40 997 148 121 40 1,522 2,263 2,196 862 162 242 2.0 4.6 13.8 14.0 0.3 7.4 1.1 0.9 0.3 11.3 16.8 16.3 6.4 1.2 1.8 2,849 4,767 2,907 795 174 19 0.5 4.6 11.0 17.9 0.2 4.7 0.6 0.0 0.0 14.7 24.6 15.0 4.1 0.9 0.1 TOTALS 23,318 87.9 144,600 85.8 13 ,225 98.2 19,166 98.9 16 3,210 12.1 WEST SLOPE 23,932 14.2 242 1.8 213 1.1 GRAND TOTALS 26,528 100.0 168,532 13,467 100.0 19,379 100.0 Prepared 100.0 by31~(£J :I).L<·/j~k --~~~~~~~~~~----~~-----Howard D. Funk, Section Chief Small Game Research 97 891 2,132 3,469 39 911 116 �October, 1969 - 57 - JOB PROGRESS REPORT State of. ~C~O~L~O~RA~D~O Pro ject No o W_-_8_8_-_R_-_l_4 _ Work Plan No., l _ Migratory Bird Investigations _ Job NOo, ~1=2~ ~ _ , Job Title: San Luis Valley Cooperative Mallard Investigation Period Covered: Personnel: May 13, 1969 to October 18, 1969 Charles Hayes, Jack Randall, Dale Horne, Bureau of Sport Fisheries and Wildlife; Ron Arant, Ron Blumberg, Harvey Bray, Don Crane, Courtney Crawford, Wayne Knisley, Ed Kochman, Dick MacDona~d, Russell Mason, Bob Oakleaf, Charles Reichert, Wayne Russell, Errol Ryland, Steve Steinert, William Rutherford, Howard Funk, Mike Szymczak and Richard Hopper, Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Division. ABSTRACT The 1968 breeding population survey for the San Luis Valley, corrected by air-ground comparison data, and stratified on the basis of high and low concentration areas, yielded an estimated 27,611 pairs of ducks, including 14,816 pairs of mallards. This represented a decrease of 5~3 percent for all species combined from 1967. Mallard numbers were only slightly below the 1967 level. Sampling error (i 23.8 percent) was similar to the two previous years. The October 1-18, 1968 experimental duck season in the San Luis Valley was based on a point-system regulation aimed at directing shooting pressure toward certain species and sexes of ducks. A 70 point bag daily limit was in effect, with mallard drakes counting 10 points each, mallard hens 40 points each, and all other ducks and coots 30 points each. Colorado personnel assisted in conducting about 50 hunter pe.rformance surveys on public and private land to evaluate the new pOint-system regulation. ��- 59 - SAN LUIS VALLEY COOPERATIVE MALLARD INVESTIGATION Richard M. Hopper The cooperative mallard study between the Colorado Game, Fish and Parks Division and the Bureau of Sport Fisheries and Wildlife was continued in 1968 in the San Luis Valley. The objectives stated here relate to the data gathering program necessary in evaluating the experimental season and are those for which the Colorado Division had primary responsibility. Only results related to these objectives are presented in this report. Results of the 1968 experimental season and interpretation of the data appear in Administrative Report No. 175 (Geis et a1. 1969) prepared by members of both agencies and distributed by the Bureau of Sport Fisheries and Wildlife, Branch of Wildlife Research, Migratory Bird Populations Station. p. S. OBJECTIVE To develop a harvest formula for the San Luis Valley mallard population. SEGMENT OBJECTIVES To evaluate the effects of hunting pressure mallards breeding in the San Luis Valley. Colorado's on the local population part of this study is covered under the following minor of objectives: 1. Determine Valley. the size of the breeding population of ducks in the San Luis 2. Determine the size of the breeding of the Valley. population in the high altitude 3. Assist in gathering harvest information duck hunting season in 1968. METHODS west during the early experimental AND MATERIALS Techniques for conducting the 1968 breeding population survey, air-ground comparison study, and hunter performance survey remained identical to those in 1967 (Segment 13). A discussion of these techniques appears in a previous report (Hopper and Rutherford 1968) and will not be repeated here. RESULTS AND DISCUSSION Breeding Air-Ground Comparison Population Survey of the Valley Floor Study Air and ground counts of ducks on selected transects are compared by species �- 60 in Table 1. The proportion identified from the air (visibility ratio) was highest for the mallard (0.392) and lowest for the teal and redhead (0.056 to 0.079). The visibility ratio for the mallard, for example, means that the air crew identified, as mallards, 39.2 percent of the mallards actually present on the air-ground comparison transects. These visibility ratios were applied to the regular air transect counts as correction factors in calculating estimates of total breeding pairs for the low concentration area and for Russell Lakes. Duck Breeding Population Estimate Table 2 presents size, sampling intensity, and estimated ducks for the six areas included in the 1968 inventory. 1964-1967 are also shown for comparison. breeding pairs of Estimates for The 1968 breeding population of ducks was estimated at 27,611 pairs for the Valley floor. This was slightly below the 1967 estimate (29,143), but somewhat more than the 1965 and 1966 figures. The estimate for 1964 (32,762) still remains the highest since initiation of the study. However, in regard to individual areas, Monte Vista Refuge and Russell Lakes attained higher estimates in 1968 than in any previous year of the study, with 4,054 and 1,845 pairs, respectively. Table 1. Air-ground in the low waterfowl comparison of ducks counted on 122.5 miles of transect concentration area of the Valley, 1968. Species Estimated Breeding Pairs Ground Air Pairs Percent Pairs Percent Mallard 564 48.5 221 76.7 0.392 Gadwall 116 10.0 22 7.7 0.190 Pintail 139 11.9 15 5.2 0.108 Blue-winged and Cinnamon Teal 198 17.0 10 3.5 0.056 Green-winged 38 3.3 3 1.0 0.079 Shoveler 63 5.4 11 3.8 0.175 Redhead 26 2.2 2 0.7 0.077 Other Divers 20 1.7 4 1.4 0.200 1,164 100.0 288 100.0 0.222 Totals Teal Proportion Identified From the Air �Table 2. Breeding pairs by density type as estimated from the San Luis Valley regular air transects, and nesting transects, 1964-1968. Type Sq. Miles Habitat Percent Sample 1964 Estimated Breeding Pairs 1/ 1965 1966 1967 1968 Monte Vista NWR 22 5.50 3,944 3,000 3,964 3,509 4,054 Russell Lakes 6 33.33 1,452. 689 1,440 828 1,845 San Luis Lakes 7 100.00 -- 60 105 86 277 Mishak Lakes 4 100.00 -- 187 338 532 204 Adams Lake 1 100.00 -- -- 6 17 26 Remainder of Valley 1,265 17.95 27,366 18,866 18,111 24,171 21,205 Totals 1,305 17.80 32,762 22,802 23,964 29,143 27,611 0\ 1/ Determined from nesting transects on Monte Vista National Wildlife Refuge and from aerial transects on all other areas. t-' �- 62 Species composition of the 1968 breeding population is shown in Table 3 for the San Luis Valley. Figures for the previous years are included for comparison. Mallards made up about 54 percent of the total estimated breeding population, again producing by far the largest number of breeding pairs (14,816). Bluewinged and cinnamon teal were the next most abundant species, contributing 12 percent of the total. Pintails and gadwalls were close behind with about 10 percent each. All species, except blue-winged and cinnamon teal and redheads, showed decreases from 1967. Although mallards were down from the 1967 figure (15,502 pairs), they were higher than all other years since the beginning of the study in 1964. The sampling error was calculated at ± 23.8 percent for the 1968 breeding population estimate. This was a little higher than in 1967, but still lower than in 1964 and 1965 when the sample was not stratified to its present extent. Breeding Population Survey of the San Luis Valley High-Country The high-country breeding population survey was not conducted in 1968. Data collected during the previous four years of study were thought sufficient to determine its contribution to the overall San Luis Valley breeding population. A final report covering this segment of the investigation will be prepared. Harvest Information A point-system regulation was tested during the 1968 experimental duck season in the San Luis Valley. The point allocation was 10 points for each mallard drake, 40 points for each hen mallard, and 30 points for each of all other ducks and coots. The daily bag was reached when the points relating to the last duck taken caused the total points for the day to reach or exceed 70 points. This differed from the 1967 regulation in which the bag limit was 6, provided 4 were mallard drakes. Under the point-system regulation ducks taken could be identified in the hand and mistakes made in selecting flying birds did not result in violation. The pOint-system is designed to give the hunter the incentive to select the species and sexes of ducks that have the lowest mortality rates and can withstand more shooting pressure. State personnal assisted in collecting hunter and harvest data during the 1968 season. Approximately 50 hunter performance surveys were made, with more emphasis placed on obtaining data on private lands than in previous years. These surveys were made to determine the degree to which hunters abided by the point-system regulation. All performance cards were submitted to the Bureau of Sport Fisheries and Wildlife for tabulation and analysis, and the results appear in the joint report mentioned earlier in this report (Geis et al. 1969). Thus, no information on hunter activities will be presented here. �Table 3. Species composition of the San Luis Valley duck breeding population, 1964-1968. 1964 Pairs % Mallard 14,319 Gadwall Pintail 1965 1966 Pairs % 1967 Pairs 49.1 13,064 54.5 15,502 2,779 12.2 2,340 9.8 23.0 1,878 8.2 2,644 263 0.8 1,981 8.7 Blue-winged and Cinnamon Teal 2,337 7.1 3,249 Shoveler 1,030 3.1 Redhead 5,017 American Widgeon Other Divers J) 1968 Pairs % 53.2 14,816 53.7 3,115 10.6 2,570 9.3 11.0 3,085 10.6 2,737 9.9 409 1.7 2,100 7.2 1,561 5.6 14.2 1,719 7.2 2,905 10.0 3,310 12.0 978 4.3 1,788 7.5 1,503 5.2 1,211 4.4 15.3 667 2.9 1,448 6.0 455 1.6 1,252 4.5 93 0.3 88 0.4 0 0.0 157 0.5 0 0.0 512 1.6 5 -- 552 2.3 321 1.1 154 0.6 Totals 32,762 100.0 22,802 100.0 23,964 100.0 29,143 100.0 27,611 100.0 ± .05 Standard Error J:.I ±31.0% Species Pairs % 43.7 11,177 1,660 5.1 7,531 Green-winged Teal ±28.0% ±23.0% 11 Includes lesser scaup, canvas back, ruddy duck and common merganser. ~I Excluding Monte Vista NWR. ±20.9% % ±23.8% 0\ W �- 64 - LITERATURE CITED Geis, A. D., E. M. Martin, R. Hopper, H. Funk, and R. Buller. 1969. Progress report: 1968 experimental duck hunting season in the San Luis Valley of Colorado - an evaluation of the "point system" in regulating harvest. U.S.D.I., Bur. Sport Fisheries and Wildl., Migratory Bird Pop. Sta., Admin. Rpt. No. 175. 20 p. Hopper, R. M., and W. H. Rutherford. 1968. San Luis Valley cooperative mallard investigation. Colo. Game, Fish and Parks Div., Fed. Aid Game Res. Rpt. Oct. p. 33-42. Prepared by .~;jiaJ! l?1. ;.C~ ichard M. Hopper Wildlife Researcher �October 1969 - 65 JOB PROGRESS REPORT State of COLORADO .--------~~~~------------- Pro j ect No •. W_-_8_8_-_R_-_1 __ 4 _ Migratory Bird Investigations Work Plan No , l : Job No.,_· _---:;1::.;;3~----------_ Determinations of Methods for Developing and Managing Job Title: Waterfowl Habitat -- Shallow Impoundment Study Period Covered: April 1, 1968 to March 31, 1969 Personnel: Robert J. Oakleaf and Richard M. Hopper ABSTRACT Dike and ditch systems were completed for the three shallow, permanent impoundments on the Bonny Reservoir property as part of a study aimed at increasing our knowledge of waterfowl habitat development and management, particularly on state-owned properties. This involved the cons~ruction of 7,755 feet of dike with a total volume of 9,345 cubic feet of earth for the t~ree impoundments combined. The ditch systems comprised 1,525 feet of ditch across impoundment Nos. 2 and 3. An earthen, emergency spillway was constructed for impoundment No. 3 and a water control structure was installed for each impoundment. Total construction costs amounted to $4,901. A well with a yield of about 450 gallons per minute (1 e.f.s.) was drilled for supplying water to the impoundments. The well was fitted with a 7.5 horsepower electric pump, and a pumphouse was constructed to complete the facility. Cost of the well, pump, and pumphouse totaled about $5,000. ��- 67 - SHALLOW IMPOUNDMENT STUDY Richard M. Hopper This report covers the second year of a long-term investigation aimed at acquiring more knowledge regarding the development and management of waterfowl habitat, particularly on state-owned properties. Selection, location and description of the proposed impoundment sites were discussed in the first progress report for this job and need not be repeated here (Hopper 1968). p. S. OBJECTIVE To determine the effects of (a) shallow, permanent impoundments; and (b) shallow, drawdown impoundments on waterfowl use and harvest at Bonny Reservoir. SEGMENT OBJECTIVES 1. 2. 3. Design and construct dikes and ditching systems for first permanent impoundment and both drawdown impoundments. Conduct pre-impoundment studies of above three impoundment sites. Flood three impoundment sites in September and record waterfowl use until freeze-up. METHODS AND MATERIALS Dike and Ditch Work It was decided to construct the dike systems for all three permanent impoundments during Segment 14 and delay those for the drawdown impoundments until a future segment. The dike systems for the three permanent impoundments, all being on the same general site, would involve a lower overall construction cost if built at the same,time rather than at two-year intervals. Also, the drawdown impoundment phase of the study is shorter termed, and construction of the dikes could be postponed without prolonging the entire study. A contour map (2-foot interval) was used as a base for designing the dike and ditch systems for the three shallow, permanent impoundments. Dike and ditch locations were drawn on an overlay of this map, keeping in mind that the three resulting impoundments should be as nearly equal in size as the topography of the site would allow. Cubic yards (yd3) of earthwork required, including 10 percent for settlement, were computed using the height and length of each lOO-foot section of dike. These sections were then added together to determine total yardage of earthwork for each impoundment's dike system. Locations of the dikes were staked on the ground with laths. The following dike and ditch specifications were outlined: �- 68 1. 2. Dike work (a) Side slopes of dikes - 3:1 (both faces) (b) Top width of dikes - 6 feet (c) Source of fill for dikes - Fill material should be obtained from the upstream side of dikes. The barrow area should be sufficiently wide (50 feet or more) to produce a gently sloping and shallow depression adjacent to the upstream toe of the dikes. Excavation of fill material should not exceed one foot below the original ground level. This criteria will determine the actual width of the barrow area. Material for the deeper fills (over 3.5 feet) of Some dike sections in impoundment Nos. 2 and 3 should be taken from the area immediately north of No. 3 on the edge of the bench directly above the existing pond. (d) Clearing dike locations and barrow areas - The area to be covered by the bases of the dikes should be scraped and cleared of all vegetation, including roots, to a depth of four inches below the original ground level. Mowing and burning is also recommended to reduce the bulk of debris. Similar removal of vegetation in the barrow area should be to a depth of at least two inches be~w fue original ground level. Cleared material is to be deposited over the edge of the bench east of impoundment No.3. (e) Compaction of dikes - Suitable compaction should be attained by traveling over the dikes with heavy rubber-tired equipment or similar machinery periodically during construction. Compaction of this nature should occur after the addition of each layer of fill material on the dike. The fill material should be wetted if it is otherwise too dry for desirable compaction. (f) Installation of water control structures - Three water control structures of the flash-board design were purchased and delivered to the construction site. The contractor need only install these structures. The horizontal tube should be placed a little below the original ground level and in line with the ditches to be constructed across impoundment Nos. 2 and 3. (g) Emergency spillway - An earthen spillway only for impoundment No.3. is to be constructed Ditch work (a) Location of ditches - Ditches are to be constructed across impoundment Nos. 2 and 3. The ditch across impoundment No.2 should extend in a straight line from the water control structure on impoundment No.1 to the water control structure on impoundment No.2 The ditch across impoundment No.3 should extend in a similar manner between water control structures of impoundment Nos. 2 and 3. These ditches are necessary to transfer water across the impoundments prior to the time they �- 69 are to be flooded. (b) Type of ditches - The ditches are to be well trenched farmtype ditches (deep vee) with excavated soil pulled away. Water flowing in ditches should be largely restricted to below original ground level to reduce seepage. The contract for construction of the dikes and ditches was awarded to the Hale Soil Conservation District. They, in turn, subcontracted the work to Virgil Brueggeman of Wray, Colorado. Well and Pump Work A permit to drill a well was obtained from the State Engineers' office in April, 1967, as noted in the previous report (Hopper, 1968). Specifications called for a well with a casing of 14 inches and a yield of 900 gallons per minute (2 c.f.s.). A 15 horsepower electric pump was recommended. LayneWestern Company of Denver was named the drilling contractor. RESULTS AND DISCUSSION Dike and Ditch Work The dike and ditch work for the three shallow, permanent impoundments was completed in March, 1969. Figure 1 comprises a map of the resulting dike and ditch systems, while Table 1 presents a summary of some of the physical features. The construction work involved 7,755 feet of dike requ~r~ng 9,345 cubic yards of earth fill for all three impoundments combined. The dike system for impoundment No. 1 was longer and contained more volume of earth than those of the other two impoundments. The dike forming impoundment No.3 was much shorter than those for the other two impoundments, but required practically as many cubic yards of earth fill as impoundment No. 1 because of its greater height. An earthen, emergency spillway was constructed for impoundment No.3. Construction costs for the three impoundments amounted to $4,901, including dike and ditch work, spillway construction, and installation of water control structures. Dike construction was figured at $0.50 per cubic yard of earth whork, while ditches were constructed at the rate of $0.15 per linear foot. Spillway construction and installation of water control structures were included as part of the dike construction costs. Well and Pump Work Well drilling, pump installation, and pumphouse construction were completed in September, 1968, but several corrections had to be made by the contractor in October, 1968. Yield of the well was about 450 gallons per minute (1 c.f.s.), only one-half of the desired capacity. As a result, a 7.S horsepower pump was installed in place of the anticipated 15 horsepower pump. Total cost of this facility was about $5,000. �fJ . fi ~J tl ~ Emergency Spillway -Dike ->- Oitch o Water Control Structure ® Well -~ Property Line Ii I, ~, ~ ~ .'fl h· Iii;: 375 ft. ~ .N ~ h a II (1 rJ ~ r;= ~~ ---......... _ jl " I ....• I. N t~ o 2 11 !l 1j j,' ~~ {f f1 e 'toI I· ~ 3 IJ ~~ !; liLf--~f--_x--~~=~=;~~t!~::::X==-l I,; f.:tl * ~I! , I If i Fig. 1. £#%2. ill!! # "c 5.'. if 14W i .em *" i -¥ ~ ¢ lii.S I mWMiFG 13ISZ Dike and ditch systems of three shallow, permanent impoundments, Bonny Reservoir. I �- 71 Table 1. Physical Impoundment No. characteristics Length (Ft.) of three permanent Dikes Earth Fill (Cu. Yds.) impoundments. Y Ditch Length 1 3,850 3,320 0 2 2,275 2,729 550 3 1,630 3,296 975 7,755 9,345 1,525 Total 1/ Includes 10 percent (Ft.) for settlement. Pre-impoundment Studies and Flooding Pre-impoundment studies of impoundment No. 1 were to be conducted during the summer after completion of the dike work. However, the dike work was not finished until the end of the segment in March and such studies will not be initiated until the summer of 1969. Flooding of impoundment No. 1 was scheduled for late summer of 1968, but, again, the dike work was not completed in time to allow this operation. In addition, it appears that the well capacity will be insufficient to fill even impoundment No.1. Therefore, a request has been made for a second well. LITERATURE CITED Hopper, R. M. 1968. Determination of methods for developing and managing waterfowl habitat--sha11ow impoundment study. Colo. Game, Fish and Parks Div., Fed. Aid Game Res. Rpt. Oct. p. 43-49. 7C) Prepared by ;;/ {;'- r} "'7 f 1/l..•• "df,4,y/7J /, 1:t:J;f'j"/6 Richard M. Hopper Wildlife Researcher ��October, - 73 - JOB PROGRESS Sta te of REPORT C::,:O::.;L::,:O:..:RA=.:.::D:..,:O _ Migratory Bird Pro je ct No o_---.;W:.:..-.....:8:..:8=--...;:R.:...-...;:1~4 _ Work Plan NO o __ .::1 _ Determination Job Title: Waterfowl Habitat Period Covered: Personnel: 1969 J ob NOo_----:l~4~ of Methods -- Ammonium . _ for Developing and Managing Nitrate Pothole Blasting Study April 8, 1968 to March 21, 1969 Robert Oakleaf, Steinert, Steve Investigations Richard Hopper ABSTRACT Waterfowl-use observations during the spring, summer, and fall of 1968 re-suIted in a total of 502 duck-visits for the 82 potholes studied. One duckvisit occurred each time a duck utilized a pothole. Blocks A, B, and C received 92, 192, and 218 duck-visits, respectively. Nearly all of this use occurred during the spring observation periods. Seventy percent of the duck 'use was by mallards, 18 percent by teal (mostly bluewings), and about five percent by divers (mostly lesser scaup). Potholes blasted with 7S-lb. charges received more use than those blasted with the other three charge sizes (3.95 duck-visits per hour) for all three blocks combined. The 150-lb. potholes were close behind with 3.52 duckvisits per hour, while the 25- and 50-lb. potholes received much lower use with 1.20 and 1.60 duck-visits per hour, respectively. The 7S-lb. potholes were also the most efficient size in regard to cost per duck-visit in 1968, for-all three blocks combined. ��- 75 - AMMONIUM NITRATE POTHOLE BLASTING STUDY Richard M. Hopper The pothole blasting study continued during Segment 14 for the second consecutive year of the investigation. The first year was devoted largely to designing the study, selecting a study area, and the actual blasting of the 84 potholes. Measurements and cost estimates were also made and compared by pothole size. A detailed account of the first year's accomplishments appear in the previous report (Hopper 1968). The second year of study, as reported here, included the evaluation of the potholes in regard to waterfowl use during the spring, summer, and fall periods of 1968. Collection of vegetative data was also begun during Segment 14. p. S. OBJECTIVE To evaluate various size potholes blasted with ammonium nitrate in terms of (a) life expectancy, (b) plant succession, (c) soil and water characters, (d) waterfowl use and hunting potential, and (e) cost. SEGMENT OBJECTIVES 1. Collect data pertaining to the vegetation, associated with the potholes. 2. Obtain 3. Collect waterfowl soil, and water characteristics pothole measurements. use and harvest data on and adjacent to the potholes. METHODS AND MATERIALS Vegetative, Soil, and Water Characteristics Each of the 84 potholes was sampled with a garden rake during the period August 13-15, 1968 to determine the presence or absence and abundance of submerged aquatic vegetation. A rope was attached to the end of the rake handle opposite the head to facilitate pulling the rake across each pothole. The rake head was placed teeth-down at points on the edge of each pothole and pulled slowly to the opposite edge. The amount of rake head covered (no. of teeth) by each species of vegetation was recorded after each pass of the rake through the potholes. The potholes were sampled roughly in proportion to their size, with the following number of passes of the rake being made through each pothole of each size: 25-lb., 3; 50-lb., 4; 75-lb., 6; ISO-lb., 8. �- 76 - One pothole in each of the 12 rows was randomly selected for photographing. Two photographs, one black and white and one color, were taken of each sample pothole from atop a 6-foot aluminum ladder on April 10, 1968 and again on August 16, 1968. The ladder was placed 10 paces south of the south edge of the 25- and 50-lb. potholes, and 15 paces south of the south edge of the 75- and 150-1b. potholes. Waterfowl Use and Harvest The potholes were observed for waterfowl use at 2-4 week intervals from early April, 1968 until freeze-up in mid-November, 1968. Binoculars and a spotting scope were employed to watch the potholes from observation pOints on the bench area (Fig. 1). These "watches" consisted of both morning and evening counts, each lasting at least one hour. Morning watches began onehalf hour before sunrise and evening watches ended no earlier than one-half hour after sunset. Mid-day watches were initiated but later abandoned because of the small amount of waterfowl activity at that time of day. Waterfowl use was recorded by species, sex and pothole number when birds were observed landing or leaving a pothole, or when sitting on or at the edge of a pothole. Fifteen nesting transects, representing a 10 percent sample, were systematically established on the pothole study area. These were permanently marked with 6-foot fence posts painted orange. Each transect was walked on May 8 and June 10-11, 1968. Nests found within 8.5 feet of either side of the transect line were recorded. Information obtained at each nest site included: transect number, species of bird, number of eggs, species and height of vegetation, and distance from nearest pothole. A white lath was placed 15 paces east of each nest to facilitate finding them again to determine nest fate. Hunter-use and success were observed on the pothole study area during the hunting season prior to the time the potholes froze-over. RESULTS AND DISCUSSION Vegetative, Soil, and Water Characteristics Submerged acquatic vegetative samples were collected during Segment 14, but the resulting data were not tabulated and analyzed because of lack of time. Other project commitments were more pressing and the compilation of the 441 samples collected was not possible. This work is planned for Segment 15, along with the description of vegetation surrounding the potholes and the collection of soil and water samples. �N LEG£ND c PotholeS' ~ Old pondS' /JO Scale: / /". =3Jo{,1: o rs: A o 2S o o o 0 0 B 2S" 0 /,,0 0 '00 . 0 0050 07S oo 0 0 00 o 0 0 00 . G r 0.5"0 o I Bench O 0 0 0 -...j -...j 0 so o <:) o 0 0 00 o 0~ c '«<)00 0 0 o Area 0 0 o o o C 25" 0015" o o o ISO 0 (=) o o 0 (:) o 0(:) (:) o o Fig. 1. Pothole blasting study area, showing the position and size of potholes by study areas. o 0 0 o o o 0 o �- 78 - Pothole Measurements Depth and width measurements of the potholes were originally planned to be taken each year, but it was decided later that every other year would suffice. Measurements taken shortly after blasting were presented in the previous report (Hopper 1968). No measurements were taken during Segment 14. The next measurements will be obtained in March or April, 1970. Waterfowl Determination of Waterfowl Use and Harvest Use by Watching Waterfowl-use observations were conducted during eight periods in the spring, summer, and fall of 1968, beginning on April 8 and ending when the potholes froze over on November 15. These eight observation periods varied from two to four days in length and totaled 26 days. Potholes in Block A were observed for a total of 46.26 hours, while those in Blocks Band C were watched for 57.09 and 47.43 hours, respectively. Two potholes, A1507 and C1504 (Fig. 1) were eliminated from the study because they were believed to be biased in regard to the amount of duck use they received. Ducks were the only group of waterfowl observed to use the potholes in 1968. During the above periods and hours of observation, ducks used the 82 potholes in all three blocks combined a total of 502 times, i.e. 502 instances of a duck using a pothole. Each of these instances of duck use represents and will be referred to as one duck-visit in this report. By definition, one duck-visit occurred each time a duck utilized a pothole. For example, if a pair of mallards landed on A755 and later left and landed on A50l, each of these potholes would be credited with two duck-visits. If this same pair later left A50l and returned to A755 and landed, pothole A755 would have then received two additional duck-visits, or a total use of four duck-visits during the observation period. Thus, duck-use figures presented in this report do not represent individual ducks, since many individuals were observed to utilize more than one pothole. Blocks A, B, and C received 92, 192, and 218 duck-visits, respectively, in 1968. These figures are not completely comparable because the three blocks were not observed for exactly the same number of hours. Mallards accounted for about 70 percent of the duck use, while teal, largely bluewings, provided nearly 18 percent. Divers, mainly lesser scaup, contributed about five percent of the total duck use of the potholes. Tables 1-3 show duck use per hour of observation by observation period for Blocks A, B, and C separately, while Table 4 presents this information for all three blocks combined. Block C potholes received the greatest amount of duck use of the three blocks in 1968 with an average of 4.81 duck-visits per hour of observation, followed by Block B potholes with 3.36 duck-visits per hour and Block A potholes with 2.10 duck-visits per hour. These figures totaled 10.27 duck-visits per hour for the 82 potholes in all three blocks combined. The most duck use occurred during the three spring observation periods in each of the three blocks of potholes. Practically no use was recorded during �- 79 the summer and fall observation periods, suggesting that the major response to these potholes by ducks was one of a breeding nature. Mallards, particularly, established and defended definite breeding territories, which included one or more potholes. The study area offered seclusion and abundant territorial space for breeding pairs by providing numerous, small water areas (potholes); exactly the same principle that operates in the vast pothole country of Canada and the northcentral U.S. A comparison of duck use on potholes produced with the four different charge sizes showed that the 75-lb. potholes were frequented more than the other sizes (3.95 duck-visits per hour) for all three blocks combined (Table 4). The ISO-lb. potholes were close behind with 3.52 duck-visits per hour, while the 25- and 50-lb. potholes received much lower use with 1.20 and 1.60 duck-visits per hour, respectively. The 7S-lb. potholes received the most use in Blocks Band C but the ISO-lb. potholes gained this honor in Block A (Tables 1-3). The 50-lb. potholes were used more than the 2S-lb. potholes in Blocks A and B, but the reverse was true in Block C. Cost-duck use relationships among the four pothole charge sizes are compared in Table 5. The cost figures presented are merely comparative and not actual, since they represent duck use that occurred only during the observation periods. The 50-lb. potholes cost less per duck-visit ($1.91) than the other three charge sizes in Block A, but the 7S-lb. size was the least expensive in Block B ($0.93) and for all blocks combined ($1.20). The 2S-lb. potholes were the most expensive of the charge sizes in Blocks A and B, but the least expensive in Block C. It appeared then, that in 1968, the 75-lb. potholes were the most efficient size in regard to cost per duck-visit for all three blocks combined. These potholes cost 2.35 times more than the 2S-lb. potholes and 1.61 times more than the 50-lb. potholes, but received 3.41 and 2.51 times more duck-visits, respe~tively. Further, the 7S-lb. potholes not only cost less than the ISO-lb. potholes, but they also supported 1.24 times more duck-visits. It can be recalled from the previous segment report that the 7S-lb. potholes were also the most efficient size in terms of cost per 100 square feet of surface area created (Hopper 1968). Tests of statistical significance in this section will be conducted in the final report. Nesting among the many duck-use figures presented upon termination of the study for submission Study Four duck nests (all mallard) were found on the nesting transects in 1968, two during the May search and two on the June search. Three other mallard nests were located off-transect. This indicated, according to the 10 percent sample size, that 40 duck nests were established on the study area in 1968. However, it is usually dangerous to make such a projection based upon a small number of nests found. Distance from each nest to the nearest pothole varied from 48 to 75 feet for the seven nests observed. Average distance was 61 feet. All seven nests were located in dead sedge (Carex spp.) or three-square bulrush (Scirpus americanus), �- 80 or a mixture and averaged Harvest of the two. Height of vegetation 13.7 inches. ranged from 9 to 20 inches and Hunter-Use No hunter-use was observed on the pothole study area during the period November 12-15, 1968. Bonny Reservoir receives low duck hunting pressure, largely because it is located a great distance from population centers and because of rather restrictive bag limits in recent years. Only two ducks are known to have been harvested from the potholes, one each during the 1967-68 and 1968-69 seasons. It is doubtful that the harvest would increase much on the study area even if hunting pressure increased, simply because waterfowl use of the potholes appears to be extremely low in the fall and winter. The type of habitat offered by the potholes does not seem to be attractive to waterfowl during these periods of the year. LITERA TURE CITED Hopper, R. M. 1968. Determination of methods for developing and managing waterfowl habitat-ammonium nitrate pothole blasting study. Colo. Game, Fish and Parks Div., Fed Aid Game Res. Rpt. Oct. p. 51-64. Prepared by Uzad! n '~'L Richard M. Hopper Wildlife Researcher �Table 1. 1968. Duck use of potholes in Block A by charge size, based upon watching from observation pOints, Observation Period Hours Observed 25 Ave. No. Duck-Visits/Hour Charge Size Tl 50 75 150 Total Spring 4/8-4/11 4/23-4/25 5/6-5/9 Sub-total o 1./ 13.08 4.91 8.02 0.20 0.25 0 2.85 1.50 2.24 1.50 0.18 4.28 2.04 26.01 0.12 1.00 0.88 1.53 -- 0 0.18 9.57 5.29 3.53 Summe r I 6/10-6/11 7/29-7/31 00 3.50 2.00 0 0 0 0 0.28 0 0 0 0.28 0 5.50 0 0 0.18 0 0.18 5.92 1.58 7.25 0 0 0.69 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.69 Sub-total 14.75 0.34 0 0 0 0.34 TOTAL 46.26 0.17 0.56 0.52 0.85 2.10 Sub-total Fall 9/18-9/20 10/8-10/10 11/12-11/15 - 1/ Seven potholes of each charge size except for the ISO-lb. size which had only six potholes. 1./ Combined duck use for all seven potholes in the row. I-' �Table 2. 1968. Duck use of potholes in Block B by charge size, based upon watching from observation pOints, Ave. No. Duck-Visits/Hour Charge Size 17 - . 50 75 150 Total 0.72 0.34 0.61 1.85 0.09 3.67 3.08 0.69 1.68 3.59 0.77 5.96 9.24 1.89 34.50 0.32 0.78 2.49 1.91 3.50 2.00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.57 0 0.57 0 5.50 0 0 0 0.36 0.36 5.92 3.92 7.25 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Sub-total 17.09 0 0 0 0 0 TOTAL 57.09 0.19 0.47 1.51 1.19 3.36 Observation Period Hours Observed 25 13.08 9.75 11.67 Spring 4/8-4/11 4/23-4/25 5/6-5/9 Sub-total o ~/ -- 5.51 Summer 6/10-6/11 7/29-7/31 Sub-total Fall 9/18-9/20 10/8-10/10 11/12-11/15 1/ Seven potholes of each charge size. 2/ Combined duck use for all seven potholes in the row. 00 N �Table 3. 1968. Duck use of potholes in Block C by charge size, based upon watching from observation pOints, 25 Ave. No. Duck-Visits/Hour Charge Size I7 150 75 50 13.08 5.33 8.02 0.99 2:./ 2.81 1.50 1.38 0.94 0.50 3.36 6.19 1.37 2.86. 4.82 0.87 26.43 1.51 1.02 3.33 2.65 Hours Observed Observation Period Total Spring 4/8-4/11 4/23-4/25 5/6-5/9 Sub-total 8.59 14.76 4.24 -- 8.51 Sunnner I 6/10-6/11 7/29-7/31 Sub-total 3.50 2.00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5.50 0 0 0 0 0 5.92 2.33 7.25 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.51 0 0 0 0 0 0.51 0 0 0.19 4.81 Fall 9/18-9/20 10/8-10/10 11/12-11/15 Sub-total 15.50 0 0 0.19 0 TOTAL 47.43 0.84 0.57 1.92 1.48 1/ Seven potholes of each charge size except for the 150-1b. size which had only six potholes. 2:./ Combined duck use for all seven potholes in the row. -- 00 w �Tab Le 4. Duck use of potholes in Blocks A, B, and C combined by charge size, based upon watching from observation pOints, 1968. Hours Observed Observation Point 25 Ave. NOt Duck-VisitsLHour Charge Size 7 150 50 75 Total 0.99 :!:./ 3.73 2.09 1.99 5.64 2.09 14.73 33.57 11.42 Spring 4/8-4/11 4/23-4/25 5/6-5/9 39.24 19.99 27.71 7.03 11.51 3.56 4.72 12.69 3.68 -Sub-total 86.94 1.95 2.80 6.70 6.09 17.54 Summer -- I 6/10-6/11 7/29-7/31 10.50 6.00 0 0 0 0 0.28 0 0.57 0 0.85 0 16.50 0 0 0.18 0.36 0.54 17.76 7.83 21. 75 0 0 0.69 0 0 0 0.51 0 0 0 0 0 0.51 0 0.69 Sub-total 47.34 0.34 0 0.19 0 0.53 TOTAL 150.78 1.20 1.60 3.95 3 52 10.27 -Sub-total Fall 9/18-9/20 10/8-10/10 11/12-11/15 0 1/ Twenty-one potholes of each charge size except for the l50-lb. size which had only 19 potholes. :!:./ Combined duck use for all 21 potholes of the same charge size in the three blocks. 00 .p- �Table 5. Relationship of pothole cost and duck use among the four charge sizes by block during the observation periods, 1968. BLOCK B A Charge Size (lbs.) Ave. Cost/ Pothole (dollars) Duck Visits Cost/ Duck-Visits (dollars) Duck Visits Total C Costl Duck-Visits (dollars) Duck Visits Cost/ Duck-Visits (dollars) Costl Duck Visits Duck-Visits (dollars) I 25 4087 8 4026 11 3010 40 0.85 59 1073 50 7.11 26 1.91 27 1.84 27 1.84 80 1.87 75 11047 24 3.34 86 0.93 91 0.88 201 1.20 150 18.81 34 3.32 1/ 68 1094 60 1088 162 2.21 Total 10036 92 3001 192 1054 218 1027 502 1.69 II I/ Adjusted to express use of only six potholes of this charge size in Block A and C instead of seven. co \.Jl II ��October 1969 - 87 JOB PROGRESS REPORT State of COLORADO "----------------------------- Project No. W_-_8~8_-_R_-_1~4 _ Work Plan No. ~2~" _ Migratory Bird Investigations Job NOo ~2 ~ _ Job Title: Experimental Studies on Improving Status of Canada Goose Populations Period Covered: Personnel: April 1, 1968 to March 31, 1969 Charles Hayes, Dale Horn, Bureau of Sport Fisheries and Wildlife; William Borden, Gurney Crawford, Jack Grieb, Richard Hopper, Howard Funk, Robert Oakleaf, Steve Steinert, Lou Vidakovich, Gary Will and Michael Szymczak, Colorado Game, Fish and Parks. ABSTRACT In Larimer County in 1968, 267 nests were established and 185 hatched, producing a total of 564 birds "to the flight stage. The total flock size in Larimer County was estimated to be 1,555. In Boulder County 57 nests were established, 44 hatched, producing 132 birds to the flight stage. Nests were established on 17 new areas in Larimer County and 2 new areas in Boulder County. Seventy goslings were released on the Alamosa National Wildlife Refuge in the San Luis Valley. Band recovery cards were received on 48 of the 1967 San Luis Valley transplants. " Only 9 birds were reported bagged by hunters. The others were found dead on the Monte Vista National Wildlife Refuge, apparently the victim of fowl cholera. In June of 1968, 51 goslings were released on the Colorado River near Loma. Between 30 and 50 geese were Sighted in the Colorado River transplant area in March of 1969. Goose hunting in north-central Colorado was on a permit basis with a limit of 3,000 permits and a season bag of six birds. It was estimated that 2;379 permit holders actually hunted. They hunted an average of 9.2 days per season and bagged an average of 1.11 birds. The total harvest in the permit areas was estimated to be 2,631 birds. Great Basin Canada geese are beginning to winter along the Green River below Flaming Gorge Reservoir. ��- 89 - EXPERIMENTAL STUDIES ON IMPROVING STATUS OF CANADA GOOSE POPlrrATIONS Michael R. Szymczak P. S. OBJECTIVE To develop a technique for establishing a breeding population of Canda geese (Branta canadensis) in suitable habitat where they do not presently exist in Colorado. SEGMENT OBJECTIVES 1. Continue efforts to expand the breeding flock of Canada geese in Boulder County from Va1mont Reservoir to other lakes in the Bou1derLongmont vicinity. 2. Continue the spread of the College and Terry Lake flock into unocupied habitat in the Fort Collins-Love land-Windsor area. 3. Expansion 4. Continue efforts toward establishment of a breeding flock of Great Basin Canada geese in the Colorado River Valley west of Grand Juntion. 5. Management of migrant Great Basin goose flocks within the migration and wintering periods. of the breeding flock of Canada geese in the San Luis Valley. the state during The specific assignment of Gurney Crawford, under Project W-110-D, continues to be the development of breeding Canada goose populations in the Northeast Region. Thus, the following report of activities and accomplishments will contain much of the same information which will also be reported in the completion report of W-110-D. The reason for this duplication is to preserve continuity in reporting results of the establishment of Canada goose flocks initiated under Project W-88-R. METHODS AND MATERIALS Production data for the Larimer and Boulder County flocks were obtained from information obtained through nest searches. Winter counts of Canada geese in north-central Colorado were obtained through coordinated ground counts. Information on goose harvest and hunting pressure in north-central Colorado was obtained from hunter questionnaires distributed to a portion of north-central Colorado goose hunting permit holders. �- 90 ~ RESULTS AND DISCUSSION Larimer County Flock Production Production in Larimer County in 1968 showed a substantial increase over 1967 levels (Table 1). Of 267 nests established, 185 hatched producing a total of 564 birds to the flight stage. The total flock size was estimated to be 1;555. Table 1. Larimer County Canada Goose Flock Production Information, 1957-1967. Year No. Birds of No. Nests Breeding Age!! Established No. Nests Hatched No. Birds No. Birds Raised Planted Approx. Size of Flock 1957 0 0 0 0 31 31 1958 0 0 0 0 23 54 1959 2 1 1 5 48 60 1960 8 4 4 14 68 120 1961 20 7 6 20 95 210 1962 53 23 21 79 101 400 1963 135 43 31 100 0 500 1964 250 68 59 154 0 600 1965 430 79 60 178 0 650 1966 500+ 106 75 213 0 750+ ]j No Birds Moved OutY 1967 600 173 124 374 177 1,078 1968 700 267 185 564 218 1,555 1/ Difficult to make a good estimate. ~ Birds transplanted to other areas in the state. Comparative figures on nest establishment and success are presented by specific area for 1967 and 1968 in Table 2. Fourteen of the 31 areas showed increases in the number of nests established, whereas only three areas showed declines. The increase on these areas amounted to about 35 percent of the 1967 total. However, hatching success showed only 12.7 percent increase over 1967.· �- 91 Table 2. areas. Comparison of 1967 and 1968 nest success in Larimer County by specific Water Area No. of Nests Established 1968 1967 8 1 57 7 1 38 2 2 3 1 3 30 5 0 5 1 2 1 1 3 0 2 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 4 1 31 2 1 18 1 2 1 3 1 3 40 7 0 2 2 3 5 1 4 1 2 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 7 1 40 4 1 23 2 234 124 158 Anderson Pond Annex No. 8 Boedeaker Reservoir Bur. of Standards Pond 1 Claymore Lake College Lake Dean Acres Deines Reservoir Divide No. 8 Dry Creek Reservoir Elder Reservoir Flat Iron Gravel Pits Fossil Creek Reservoir Herring Lake Kitchel Reservoir Lindenmeier Lake Long Pond N. Poudre No. 1 N. Poudre No. 2 N. Poudre No. 10 Romily Gravel Pit S. Grey Reservoir Specht Ponds Sterling Gravel Pits A Sterling Gravel Pits B Takes Pond Terry Lake Timnath Reservoir Van Sant Pond Watson Lake Welch Reservoir 3 2 3 1 5 42 5 1 7 2 4 2 2 4 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 4 1 44 2 1 24 1 3 4 7 2 6 48 8 1 9 2 3 5 7 4 1 3 0 1 0 1 1 1 2 Total 173 % Change from 1967 L +35.3 No. of Nests Hatchin~ 1968 1967 3 +12.7 In addition, nests were established for the first time on 17 new areas. Of the 20 nests established on these areas, 15 were successful in hatching. The new nest sites indicate that geese are continuing to pioneer in Larimer County. �- 92 Habitat Improvement Both single post and floating-type nesting structures were constructed for use in Larimer County by G. I. Crawford. A total of 43 post-type structures were built at 20 water areas. Six of the 43 were placed at Lindenmeier Lake and five on Timnath Reservoir. Ten of the portable float type structures were built for use in both Larimer and Boulder County. More specific details on habitat improvement are presented in the progress report for W-llO-D. BOULDER COUNTY FLOCK Production Production in Boulder County continued the increasing trend established in 1965 (Table 3). The flock is now considered capable of increasing without the addition of any more birds from other areas. Therefore, no birds were planted in Boulder County in 1968. Table 3. Year Boulder County Canada goose flock production information. No. Birds of Breeding Age No. Nests Established No. Nests Hatch No. Birds No. Birds Approximate Raised on Area Planted Size of Flock 1963 86 1964 97 175 1965 12 6 6 11 131 300 1966 22 22 15 52 116 400+ 1967 72 36 28 81 177 500+ 1968 150 57 44 132 0 Birds were produced on five areas in 1968 (Table 4). All areas showed increases in numbers of nests established with two areas maintaining nests for the first time. The total number of nests established increased approximately 60 percent over the previous years' level. �- 93 Table 4. area. Comparison of 1967 and 1968 nest success in Boulder County by specific Water Area No. of Nests Established 1968 1967 No. of Nests Hatchins 1968 1967 3 Boulder Valley Farm 0 3 Faivre Ponds 1 5 Peaceful Valley Resort 0 1 Terry Lake 2 5 2 4 Valmont Reservoir 33 43 25 31 Total 36 57 27 44 % Change from 1967 +59.3 5 1 1 +63.0 Habitat Improvement Nine pole-type structures were constructed on water areas in Boulder County. Three were erected on the Boulder Valley Farm, two each at Faivre Ponds and Hayden Lake and one each at Ish Lake and Loyal King Pond. In addition, some of the ten portable floating structur,eswere constructed specifically for use in Boulder County. SAN LUIS VALLEY FLOCK For the second year, Canada goose goslings were released on the Alamosa National Wildlife Refuge in the San Luis Valley. A total of 70 birds, trapped at Denver City Park and in the Fort Collins area, were released on the refuge in early July. These birds were provided with feed until they were capable of flight, at which time they quickly left the area. The birds were marked only with U. S. Fish and Wildlife Service leg bands, therefore continued observations of these specific birds was not possible. Portions of Conejos, Alamosa, Mineral and Rio Grande counties were closed to goose hunting during the 1968-69 season in an effort to protect the transplanted birds. A number of the birds transplanted to the San Luis Valley in the summer of 1967 have been recovered. Of the 48 birds reported recovered only nine were reported to have been bagged by hunters. The others were found dead on the �- 94 Monte Vista National Wildlife Refuge, with the majority apparently succumbing to fowl cholera (Charles Bryant, pers. comm.). All but four of the birds found dead were adults which had been wing clipped and held captive for approximately one year. All of the birds bagged by hunters were immatures. Of the nine birds reported shot, 6 were taken in New Mexico, of which five were recovered on the Bosque Del Apache National Wildlife Refuge. The other New Mexico bird was taken near Albuquerque. The other three birds were taken in Mexico, near Salt Lake City, Utah and in northeastern Saskatchewan. The Saskatchewan bird was the only indirect recovery. COLORADO RIVER FLOCK In April 1968, 10 nests of Great Basin Canada geese (~. £. Moffitti) judged to be vulnerable to rising water were found on islands along the Yampa River between Craig and Juniper Springs. Fifty-six eggs were taken from these nests and incubated artificially at the Fort Collins Wildlife Research Station. Of the 51 goslings which hatched successfully, 49 survived. Shortly before they were able to fly, these birds were transported to an open topped holding pen on an island in the Colorado River near Loma. Feed was provided. Green neckbands with two white circles were placed on each bird for sight identification purposes. The birds remained in the vicinity through the remainder of the summer. No specific observations of neckbanded birds were made during the winter. However, approximately 250 geese were present in the area throughout the winter and it is probable that a portion of these birds originated from the release. In late March of 1969, between 30 and 50 geese were present along the Colorado River between Fruita and the Colorado-Utah border. A few pairs began nesting attempts on islands in the river in late March. It is probable the nesting birds were not members of the original July, 1967 gosling transplant since Canada geese do not generally breed until approximately three years of age. The nesting birds were apparently older birds that had been attracted to the area. The Colorado counties of Delta, Montrose, Mesa and Garfield were closed to goose hunting during the 1968-69 season for the protection of the transplanted birds. Also the Utah State Division of Fish and Game agreed to close adjacent Grand County, Utah to goose hunting to help protect the transplants. Apparently none of the geese transplanted in July of 1967 were bagged by hunters during the 1967-68 waterfowl season, as no band recovery cards were received from the Migratory Bird Population Station. MANAGEMENT OF MIGRANT FLOCKS Special goose hunting regulations were again in effect in north-central Colorado during the 1968-69 hunting season. Hunting was on a permit basis with a limit of 3,000 permits and a season bag of six birds per hunter. The permit area was changed slightly with the addition of approximately 100 square miles in Boulder County which had previously been closed to goose hunting. In addition, the closed area surrounding New Windsor Reservoir was reduced from 12 to 4 square miles. �- 95 The goose season in the permit 'area opened on November 11, two weeks earlier than the previous year, in an attempt to apply hunting pressure to the migrant birds when they first arrived in the area. The objective was to try to move some of the birds on south to New Mexico. Coordinated surveys were initiated in Montana, Wyoming, Colorado and New Mexico to determine Hi-Line population size and changes in distribution. These surveys indicated the total population was composed of approximately 34,000 birds. Colorado accounted for 70 to 80 percent of the population during each survey (Table 5). New Mexico totaled 2,000 birds during the November 20 survey and 3,300 during the December 17 count. The New Mexico increase between the two surveys was attributed, in part, to the early season opening in Colorado. Results of the 1969 counts in Colorado are presented in Table 6. Table 5. Results of the coordinated surveys for the Hi-Line population. State November 20 December 19 January 2 Montana 5,368 2,795 2,755 Wyoming 2,430 500 1,480 Colorado 21,976 26,161 26,117 New Mexico 2,023 3,318 3,448 Totals 31,797 32,774 33,800 It is interesting to note, that the percentage of the goose population using the Brighton-Gree1ey-Fort Morgan area, which is located east of the Larimer and Boulder County closed areas decreased from 12.1 percent on November 20 to 4.0 percent on January 13 (Table 6). The change in distribution was probably precipitated by hunting pressure. The mid-winter inventory for the entire northeast Colorado region showed an increase of approximately 9,000 birds over the 1968 level (Table 7). Of the 26,156 birds present, 75.3 percent were located in the original release area, 13.9 percent in the Boulder County release area, 6.1 percent in the Denver area, and 4.7 percent on water areas along the South Platte River, east of the original release sites. �- 96 Table 6. Results of 1968-69 winter Canada goose counts, Hi-Line Area, Colorado. Location November 20 December 19 January 13 1,925 165 1,500 3,600 450 2,000 275 5,100 5,350 3,180 152 1,700 100 300 250 800 35 3,100 330 4,500 3,085 435 153 2,354 23 2,100 55 830 Ft. Co11ins-Love1and-Gree1ey College Lake Sterling Pond Terry Lake Lindenmeier Lake Douglas Lake Greenwalt Lake Reservoir No. 8 Reservoir No. 8 Annex Elder Lake Reservoir No. 6 New Windsor Reservoir Hollister Lake Timnath Reservoir Cobb Lake Woods Lake Boyd Lake Horseshoe Lake Fossil Creek Reservoir Bureau of Standards Lake Watson Lake Warren Lake Sub-total 3 2,100 1,105 1,350 350 1,515 o 50 175 60 88 332 1,080 o o o 1,038 o o 178 45 818 o o o 75 550 o o o 15,848 20,905 968 103 345 271 19,693 o Longmont-Bou1der-Denver Lon Hagler Lake Terry Lake (Longmont) Swede Lake Faivre Ponds Boulder Reservoir Va1mont Reservoir 32 190 16 80 253 1,525 o o 932 1,700 o o 15 45 o 1,715 o 1,900 Denver Metro Area: Standley Lake Sloans Lake Bowles and Tu1e Lakes Denver City Park Rocky Mountain Arsenal Others Sub-Total 37 160 578 550 17 23 3,461 o 126 920 500 o 28 4,236 01/ 941./ 673]) 4501/ 1211 01./ 4,874 �- 97 - Table 6. Results of 1968-69 winter Canada goose counts, Hi-Line Area, Colorado, Continued-- Location November 20 December 19 January 13 Barr Lake Prospect Reservoir Horse Creek Reservoir Milton Reservoir Latham Reservoir Riverside Reservoir S. Platte R. near Riverside Empire Reservoir Jackson Reservoir Sub-Total 90 50 800 35 142 715 85 400 350 2,667 150 0 520 35 0 0 150 115 200 1,170 50~/ 1751:./ 250 250 0 200.!.! 1,025 Grand Total 21,976 26,311 25,592 Brighton-Gree1ey-Fort Morgan ]) Counts made on January 2, 1969 011 6oJ-1 4oJ;/ �Table 7. January Inventory Canada Geese, Northeast Region, 1959 - 1969. 1959 Ori~ina1 Release Area College Lake Terry Lake Lindenmeier Lake Res. No.5 Res. No.6 Res. No.8 Res. No.9 Res. No. 15 Douglas Lake Rocky Ridge Res. Cobb Lake Woods Lake (Eaton ResJ New Windsor Hollister Lake (Old Windsor Res.) Warren Lake Timnath Res. Fossil Creek Res. Boyd Lake Greenwalt Lake S ter ling Pond Reservoir No.8 Annex Elder Lake Bureau of Standards Lake Watson Lake Sub-Totals Boulder County Release Area Faivre Ponds· Lone Tree Reservoir Terry Lake (Longmont) Va1mont Reservoir Swede Lake Union Sub-Totals 1960.!/ 75 1961 1962 1963 Year 1964 82 225 180 450 251 875 506 915 400 37 437 70 1,000 165 1965 1966~ 1967 1968 1969 1,150 650 1,013 867 975 480 1,250 1,785 450 2,175 2,850 1,825 3.100 4,500 3,085 1,703 .2,065 125 4,175 55 2,354 605 406 320 170 25 7 34 25 20 60 435 60 25 45 220 41 39 957 22 115 178 45 830 1.0 00 10 12 22 15 15 30 660 370 127 11 512 288 1,320 1,945 1,039 292 476 482 200 114 100 150 2,686 3,836 4,287 65 80 100 80 100 15 15 65 15 271 900 650 1,000 1,218 1,300 450 475 5,966 9,739 12,212 50 15 995 112 11 392 388 580 1,383 968 818 153 330 23 . 2,100 103 345 19,693 84 45 610 1,565 41 1,700 1,900 2,300 3,645 �Table 7. January Inventory Canada Geese, Northeast Region, 1959-1969.-- Continued Denver Area Denver Metro Area 1959 19601/ 1961 1962 Year 1963 1964 1965 1966Z/ 1967 1968 1969 No Count No Count No Count 301 975 615 761 1,888 1,500 1,729 1,229 130 120 250 22 45 40 432 355 60 300 10 85 50 450 170 60 325 500 100 100 100 81 96 250 20 Lakes East of Management Area 120 Barr Lake Horse Creek Reservoir 45 Milton Reservoir no 270 Latham Reservoir Empire Reservoir 80 Riverside Reservoir Jackson Lake Prewitt Reservoir Jumbo Reservoir South Platte River Johnson Pond Sub-Totals 625 662 Grand Totals 10 300 135 300 1,039 1,764 895 2,215 670 2,9l6 t~Additional First year Larimer County closed to goose hunting. closed area imposed in Boulder County. - 300 20 100 70 475 4,151 1,260 5,791 100 480 50 300 50 1,100 6,248 462 125 1,514 9,948 259 198 209 195 288 185 120 230 40 202 75 350 400 1,723 1,028 14,345 17,269 50 60 40 175 250 200 50 285 480 1,590 26,156 \0 \0 �- 100 - The results of the hunter harvest survey in the special permit area is presented in Table 8. It was estimated that 2,379 of the 3,000 permit holders actually hunted. They hunted an average of 9.2 days per season and bagged an average of 1.11 birds. The permit area harvest was estimated to be 2,631 birds; more than twice the previous years total. The rate of increase in harvest in Boulder and Weld counties was substantially greater than in Larimer County. It was estimated that the goose kill in Larimer County was 1,584 birds or 60.2 percent of the total kill as compared to 75.8 percent during the previous season. Weld County contributed 886 birds or 33.7 percent of the kill. In Boulder County, 161 birds were bagged which constituted 6.1 percent of the total. GREAT BASIN CANADA GEESE The daily bag and possession limit for geese in Moffat County, which includes the major breeding range of Great Basin Canada geese in Colorado, was one bird during the 1968-69 hunting season. The restrictive regulation in this area was designed to protect the breeding population and encourage it's expansion. Until recent years, no geese remained in Moffat County throughout the winter. Most generally, they spent the winter along the lower Colorado River near Yuma, Arizona or in the Imperial Valley of California. The construction of Flaming Gorge Dam and Reservoir created an unnatural situation downstream along the Green River. The flow of the river is of course, dependent entirely on water releases through the dam. All water released originates from the base of the reservoir and it is "warm" during the winter months. Therefore, the river downstream from the dam remains open during the winter rather than freezing as it has in the past. The warm water has also encouraged the production of algae in the river. The open water, plus algae as a food supply, has enabled Canada geese to remain in the area throughout the winter. The build-up in geese in the area during the winter months is depicted by the line graph presented in Figure 1. Brown's Park National Wildlife Refuge is located along the Green River from the Colorado border approximately 10 river miles downstream. Hunting of Canada geese was permitted along the Green River upstream from the refuge in Utah. Hunting pressure there forced many of the birds to stay in Colorado on the refuge where they were unavailable to hunters. This is an unhealthy situation and possibly steps should be taken to move these geese on down their historic migration paths. Prepared by �1000 - -1966-67 -0 -1967-68 --1968-69 900 80-0 700 600 CIl en I £!/ I COO EIe 500 CIl CIl (!) ..- 400 0 .0 ~ z <, 300 oj I\. 200-1 / 100~ 0 '\ 0"\ 0" V / r-; / // c4 I o 0 1-' o <, \ '" 0 / 1-' -, -, - ---- o \'o ---..... "~ -, / V \0 ~o_o_o- ~/ <, !!} -............--- Vi o Sept. Oct. Nov. Dec. Jan. Feb. Mar. Apr. Fig. 1. Numbers of Canada geese at Brown's Park National Wildlife Refuge, September through May, 1966-69. May �Table 8. Results of hunter harvest survey in the north-central Colorado special permit area. Year No. Permits Issued Est. No. Active Hunters Ave. Days Hunted Ave. Seasonal Bag/Hunter Larimer 1964-65 1,608 1,427 6.1 .48 504 181 1965-66 2,335 1,578 6.5 .53 665 144 29 838 1966-67 3,996 2,910 5.1 .41 764 409 11 1,184 1967-68 3,000 2,256 6.7 .55 944 265 37 1,246 1968-69 3,000 2,379 9.2 1.11 1,584 886 161 2,631 Estimated Harvest Weld Boulder Total 685 t-' 0 N �October 1969 - 103 - JOB PROGRESS REPORT State of COLORADO ~------~~~~------------ Project Noo W__-8_8_--R---l-4----------- Work Plan No.__ Job Title: ~_2 Migratory Bird Investigations : Job No 0 __ 5 A_r_k_a_n_s_a_s __V_a_l __le_y~·_G __o_o~s-e--F-l-o-c_k __M_a_n_a~g~e_m_e_n_t __S_t_u_d __i_e_s Period Covered: _ -- _ November 16, 1968 to February Personnel: Permanent Employees: Don Bogart, V. R. Clark, Don Crane, Rusty Forbes, Larry Green, Jack Grieb, Dick Hopper, Don Minnich, Charles Reichert, Gorden Saville, Michael Szymczak, Ber~ Widhalm. Temporary Employees: Velma Fredrickson, Mary Lou Selch, John Casper, Don Fox, John Gonzales, Mike Hickey, Raymond Johnson, Robert Kitzmill~r, Horace Moorhead, Gene Nugent, Larry Repphun, Fred Roth, Lee Swenson. ABSTRACT Water levels were about normal at most reservo trs in the Arkansas Valley. Food conditions were considered poor with only irrigated plantings producing fair crops.Weather.was generally clear and mild throughout the hunting season. The first aerial survey in southeast Colorado on November 20 recorded 45,000 geese, but the number dwindled to 25,000 by December· 5 and remained essentially the same throughout the hunting season. The mid-winter inventory on the major wintering areas of Short Grass Prairie Geese totaled 112,399, about 15,000 fewer than the previous year. Hunting activity decreased slightly from the previous year throughout southeast Colorado. An estimated total of 11,046 geese were bagged by 6,668 hunters for an average season bag of .1.66 birds per hunter. Only 792 hunters used the Two Buttes Management Area and they were successful in bagging 243 geese. At the Lamar Management Area 598 hunters bagged 160 geese. A total of the 1,143 geese captured post-season in southeast Colorad-o, only 187 were immature. Bands were placed on 1,li9 of these birds. Canada continues to be the major harvest area with 47.8 percent of 1967-68 hunting season band recoveries coming from that area. 'The annual mortality rate of all age classes combined was calculated to be approximately 27 percent. It was determined that a general delayed goose season opening in southeast Colorado had not been effective in retaining geese throughout the Arkansas Valley but a further delay in the season in the Two-ButtesTurk's area had definitely helped retain geese in Baca County. Alternating the firing line at Two Buttes was not successful in retaining geese throughout the season on that Reservoir. ��- 105 - P. S. OBJECTIVE To collect management information on the wintering Short Grass Prairie Canada Goose Population in Southeastern Colorado which will permit an evaluation of the annual status and contribute to the management of this population. SEGMENT OBJECTIVES 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. To determine the fall movement of geese into the Arkansas Valley and the size of the wintering flock. To obtain an estimate of production in the flock. To determine the age composition, mortality, wounding loss, and hunting pressure on the flock. To investigate the relationship between Canada geese wintering on various lakes in the Arkansas Valley. To trap, band and take measurements of geese at various locations in the Arkansas Valley. To develop new approaches to management of the Two Buttes Public Shooting Area. METHODS AND MATERIALS Periodic aerial counts of Canada geese (Branta canadensis parvipes) were made in southeast Colorado. The December 5 and January 2 counts were coordinated with both ground and aerial counts made by various State and Federal personnel throughout the wintering grounds of the Short Grass Prairie Canada Goose Population. These counts were made for the purpose of determining the size and distribution of the wintering goose population. Check stations were operated at the Two Buttes Management Area and the Lamar-Eads Management Area, which is a new area for decoy hunting only. Information on hunting pressure, harvest and wounding loss was collected. Tail fans from bagged geese were collected at all check stations in order to determine age ratios in the kill. The weights of birds bagged were also recorded. Geese were trapped and banded after the close of the hunting season to obtain information on age ratios, mortality rates, migration patterns and morphological characteristics. The effects of hunting season regulations were evaluated and recommendations were made for the 1969-70 season. RESULTS AND DISCUSSION Water, Food and Weather Conditions Water levels of most lakes and reservoirs in the Arkansas Valley were about normal with the exception of levels at Two Buttes and John Martin. The water level at Two Buttes had continued its decline which began after the spring flood of 1965. However, it is doubtful that the low water level had any effect on the use of the reservoir by Canada geese. At John Martin, �- 106 virtually all water had been removed from the reservoir during the summer of 1968 and the gates remained open until the first week in November. On November 20, John Martin had approximately 12,000 geese, but the numbers dwindled to 4,000 by December 5. The extremely low water level may have affected use of the reservoir by the geese. Food conditions were somewhat variable in southeast Colorado. Most winter wheat in the Two Buttes area showed poor growth, if any, and dryland milo was not as productive as it had been the previous year. Irrigated plantings made fair crops throughout southeast Colorado. In general, food conditions in the northern portion of the Arkansas Valley were considered better than in the southern portion. Weather was generally clear and mild throughout the hunting season, with most reservoirs remaining open until mid-December. A warming trend in mid-January created large open water areas on all reservoirs. Weather was considered good for geese but poor for goose hunting. Migrational Movements and Distribution of the Wintering Population Large flights of Canada geese began arriving in southeast Colorado on November 16 and 17. This was their latest fall arrival in the Arkansas Valley since 1963. The first aerial survey on November 20 recorded 45,000 geese (Table 1). The geese were distributed throughout southeast Colorado with large concentrations at John Martin, Turk's Pond and Two Buttes. Total numbers dwindled to about 25,000 by December 5, and remained essentially the same throughout the remainder of the hunting season. The inventory on January 16 showed an increase to about 33,000. Unseasonably warm weather in southeast Colorado was probably responsible for an influx of birds from more southerly sections of the winter range. As the hunting season progressed and many of the smaller reservoirs froze over, the geese began to concentrate on the larger reservoirs. By January 2, 90 percent of the remaining birds were on Meredith, John Martin, Eads and Two Buttes-Turk's. Although John Martin did maintain birds throughout the winter, numbers dropped considerably after November 20 (Table 1). The number of birds at Meredith also declined. A portion of the Meredith birds began using the King Barrett Slough area, which is located approximately 10 miles southwest of Meredith, just north of the Arkansas River. The two coordinated surveys of the entire Short Grass Prairie Canada Goose Population winter range were flown on December 5 and January 2. The survey on December 5 recorded only 72,668 but the January inventory count totaled 112,399 as apparently Some birds were missed in December. Results of previous mid-winter inventories of the entire Short Grass Prairie Population and of Colorado are presented in Tables 2 and 3, respectively. Figures in Table 2 show the population was down considerably from the previous year. This is a reversal of the recent trend of a steadily increasing population, yet it is based only on one inventory and currently there is little need for concern. The Arkansas Valley population dropped to its lowest January level since 1957 (Table 3). There has been a sporadic decline in Arkansas Valley numbers since 1962 as more birds have moved on to Texas in some years. �- 107 Table 1. Results of aerial Canada goose surveys, Arkansas Valley, Colorado, 1968-69. Location 20 Nov. 5 Dec. 17 Dec. C F & I Reservoir 2 Jan. 16 Jan. 65 3,810 1,075 600 600 890 Holbrook Reservoir o o 15 o o Cheraw Reservoir o o o o 12 Horsecreek Reservoir 450 o o o o Blue Lake 350 400 300 o o Pond N. E. of Blue Lake 100 o o o o o 50 o 175 o 100 700 120 Sweetwater Reservoir 185 3,700 o o o Nee Grande Reservoir 0 o 1,100 o o Nee Noshe Reservoir 6,400 4,500 5,000 7,000 9,000 Upper Queens Reservoir 150 o 1,500 500 3,200 Lower Queens Reservoir 0 150 o o o 80 o o o o 300 o Meredith Lake Black Lake Swede Lake Eads Group: Thurston Reservoir Brandon Ponds 125 Two Buttes Reservoir 11,500 600 500 600 11,000 Turk's Pond 9,500 10,000 15,000 11 ,000 4,500 John Martin Reservoir 12,300 4,000 700 3,500 4,500 106 1,725 550 o 2 2 16 19 24,833 26,592 24,591 33,366 King Barrett Slough Arkansas River TOTALS 45,000 �- 108 Table 2. Post-hunting season status of Short Grass Prairie Canada Goose Population, 1960-69, data generally from regular mid-winter inventories. Year Number of Birds Year Number of Birds 1960 77,709 1965 103,435 1961 103,355 1966 110 ,485 !! 1962 80,133 1967 111,452 1963 93,940 1968 127,903 1964 81,221 1969 112,399 . II Inventory of February 15, 1966, substituted for unsatisfactory January inventory. Table 3. January Inventory of Canada geese, Arkansas Valley, Colorado, 1948-1969. Year Goose Count Year Goose Count Year Goose Count 1948 4,798 1955 25,110 1962 40,250 ]J 1949 12,286 1956 24,212 1963 35,889 1950 13 ,170 1957 24,617 1964 33,750 1951 19,320 1958 35,894 1965 37,693 1952 30,463 1959 44,660 1966 38,635 ~I 1953 20,236 1960 37,394 1967 29,835 1954 20,280 1961 31,360 1968 42,682 1969 29,201 II Inventory of February 7, 1962 substituted for January, 1962 inventory. Zi Inventory of February 15, 1966 substituted for January, 1966 inventory. �- 109 - Age Composition and Production In order to obtain an estimate of age composition of the harvest, tail fans from bagged birds were collected. Collections were made at Two Buttes and Lamar-Eads Management Area check stations and also in the Meredith Lake area. Tails collected at Two Buttes were from firing line hunting only. Tails collected at Lamar were from decoy hunters and those at Meredith were from both types of hunting. Age was determined by the notched tail feather method. Four hundred and forty-six usable tail fans were collected of which 41 percent were from innnature birds (Table 4). Innnature geese of the Short Grass Prairie Population are about 1.6 times more likely to be bagged than adults through the entire season, but they become less vulnerable as the season progresses (Rutherford 1968). Therefore, innnatures are generally most vulnerable on Canadian staging areas and least vulnerable in Colorado. By applying the 1.6 ratio to the kill composition in both Canada and Colorado, the probable outside limits of the actual population age composition can be obtained. Computations on the Colorado information indicate the Colorado population was composed of about 30 percent innnatures. The Canadian kill was composed of 55.7 percent innnatures (A. Dzubin, pers. comm.). Table 4. Age comparison of Arkansas Valley Canada geese, 1968-69, as estimated by check station and trapping results. No. of Young Percent Young No. of Adults Percent Adults Total Birds Two Buttes 84 38.2 136 61.8 220 Lamar-Eads Mgmt. Area 75 48.7 79 51.3 154 Meredith Lake Area 24 33.3 48 66.7 72 183 41.0 263 59.0 446 Two Buttes Reservoir 135 17 .0 657 83.0 792 Upper Queen's Res. 52 14.8 299 85.2 351 187 16.4 956 83.6 1,143 Check Station Sample: Total Trapped Sample Total �- 110 - Table 5. Goose harvest, wounding loss, hunting pressure, and hunter success, Two Buttes and Lamar Management areas. Item Two Buttes Lamar Adult 136 79 Juvenile 84 75 Unknown 23 6 Total 243 160 Adult 61.8 51.3 Juvenile 38.2 48.7 Goose Harvest Percent Successful Hunters Number 166 Average bag/sue. hunter 1.46 All Hunters Number 792 Percent successful 21.0 Total hunter days 1,309 1,062 Hunter days/hunter 1.65 1. 78 Average bag/hunter 0.31 0.27 Average bag/hunter day 0.19 0.15 598 �- III - Adjusting the Canadian kill for vulnerability reveals that about 44 percent of the population was composed of immature birds. It is probably safe to assume that, according to the age ratio of the kill, the actual entire population was composed of not less than 30 percent nor more than 44 percent immatures. It is difficult to obtain any estimate of production from these data because the percent of sub-adult geese in the population is not known. The age of all geese trapped also was determined by the notched tail feather method and then double-checked by cloacal examination. The results are presented in Table 4. Percentages of immatures in the trapped samples are much smaller than in the check station samples and the smallest recorded since goose trapping was initiated in southeast Colorado. Raveling (1966), working with B. c. interior in southern Illinois, found that age ratio information derived from baited cannon-net trapping generally was not indicative of the actual structure of the population. He found that when geese were crowded densely onto a baited trap site, a higher percent of adults would usually be obtained in trap samples than under less crowded conditions. In the Arkansas Valley in 1969 the percent of immatures in four catches made when geese were considered "crowded" on the trap site ranged from 13.4 to 18.9. Only one catch was made under less crowded conditions and, of the 53 birds captured, 15 or 28.3 percent were immature. Goose Harvest, Hunting Pressure and Hunter Success-Two Buttes and Lamar-Eads Management Areas Information on goose harvest, hunting pressure and hunter success for the two management areas are presented in Table 5. More geese were bagged at Two Buttes than at Lamar-Eads. However, average bag per hunter and per hunter day were similar for both areas. Immatures made up a larger portion of the birds bagged at Lamar-Eads than at Two Buttes. This is to be expected, as immature birds are more vulnerable than adults to decoy hunting than under firing line hunting conditions, such as at Two Buttes (Rutherford 1968). Comparing the average number of days an individual hunted indicates hunters were about equally persistent at either area, even though the goose population was much more stable in the Lamar-Eads Management Area. Some comparative statistics for Two Buttes from previous years are presented in Table 6. Hunting pressure and goose kill declined to what is probably a record low during the 1968-69 season. The delayed season opening and alternation of the firing line have been the prime causes of the decline in hunting pressure the last two years. Comparing the last two seasons, it seemS the size of the goose population at Two Buttes did not affect hunter activity to a great degree. Hunters responded quite similarly in both years despite the fact that geese were present in good numbers throughout most of the 1967-68 season but not through the 1968-69 season. In both seasons, between 50 and 60 percent of total hunter days were accumulated either during the opening week or the last ten days of the season. Hunters did not take advantage of the large population present throughout most of the 1967-68 season. �- 112 Table 6. Goose harvest, hunt{ng Management Area, 1961-68. pressure, and hunter success, Two Buttes No. of Individual Hunters No. of Hunter Days No. of Geese Bagged Ave. Bag per Hunter Ave. Bag per Hunter Day 1961-62 2,392 4,758 945 0.40 0.20 1962-63 1,479 3,178 418 0.28 0.13 1963-64 1,750 3,659 728 0.42 0.20 1964-65 1,996 3,946 721 0.36 0.19 1965-66 2,596 5,264 941 0.36 0.18 1966-67 1,257 2,413 493 0.39 0.20 1967-68 840 1,554 433 0.52 0.28 1968-69 792 1,309 243 0.31 0.19 Year Hunting pressure at the Lamar Management area was fairly steady through the season (Table 7). This was probably, in part, a function of the stability of the goose population in the area. Size of the goose population at Two Buttes during any period season is reflected in the average bag per hunter day (Table were present in large numbers only during the first two days days of the season, with about 12,000 being on the reservoir periods. of the 1968-69 8). Geese and last five during both Two Buttes check sta~ion data were examined to determine the influence of repeated trips by hunters upon individual hunter success (Table 9). Again, as in the past, the percent of hunters successful, increased as the number of days hunted increased. The sample size for the 1968-69 data is not reliable beyond the fourth day. Wounding Loss Inf9rmation on wounding loss was gathered at the Two Buttes check station. A sample of hunters were asked how many geese they wounded by could not retrieve, if any. Results of this sample were projected to the total number of Two Buttes hunters. This was the second year this method was utilized and the data from both years are presented in Table 10. Adding the projected wounding loss to the total retrieved kill results in a total flock loss by hunting at Two Buttes of 369 geese. About 34 percent of this loss was attributed to wounding. �Table 7. Hunter activity at the Lamar Management Area by time interval. Week Interval Hunter Days Percent of Total 11/16 - 11/22 155 14.6 11/23 - 11/29 180 17.0 11/30 - 12/6 101 9.5 12/7 - 12/13 23 2.2 12/14 - 12/20 151 14.2 12/21 - 12/27 147 13.8 12/28 - 1/3 65 6.1 1/4 - 1/10 93 8.8 1/11 - 1/15 147 13 .8 Table 8. Hunter activity and goose harvest by weekly intervals, Two Buttes Reservoir, 1968-69. Week Interval Side Open to Hunting Number of Hunter Days 1.1 Successful Hunter Days 11/30 - 12/6 South 510 (39.0) 123 182 0.36 12/7 - 12/13 North 130 (9.9) 1 1 0.01 12/14 - 12/20 South 216 (16.5) 11 12 0.05 12/21 - 12/27 North 88 (6.7) 4 4 0.05 12/28 - 1/3 South 184 (14.0) 11 12 0.07 1/4 - 1/10 North 27 (2.1) 0 0 0.00 1/11 - 1/15 South 154 (11.8) 24 32 0.21 1,309 (100.0) 174 243 0.19 Totals If Percent of total in parentheses. No. of Ave. Bag per Geese Bagged Hunter Day �- 114 Table 9. The relationship of individual hunter activity to hunting success, Two Buttes Reservoir, 1968-69. Number of Days Hunted Total No. of Hunters No. of Succ. Hunters Percent of Hunters Succ. No. of Geese Bagged Ave. Bag/ Hunter Day 1 440 56 12.7 88 0.20 2 235 60 25.5 79 0.17 3 83 32 38.6 44 0.18 4 26 13 50.0 23 0.22 5 4 2 50.0 3 0.15 6 2 2 100.0 3 0.25 7 0 0 8 1 0 9 0 0 10 1 1 100.0 3 0.30 Totals 792 166 21.0 243 0.19 0 0.0 0 0.0 0 Table 10. Estimated goose wounding loss, Two Buttes firing line, 1967-69. Year No. of Hunters in Sample No. of Geese Reported Wounded Total Hunters Registered Projected Total Geese Wounded Percent of Total Kill Composed of Wounding Loss 1967-68 1,294 223 1,554 268 38.2 1968-69 447 43 1,309 126 34.1 �- 115 - Hunting Pressure and Goose Harvest - Southeast Colorado Information on goose hunting pressure and kill in the Arkansas Valley is presented in Table 11 (Funk and Grieb, 1969). Number of goose hunters in the Arkansas Valley declined slightly from the 1967 level. The average season bag declined about 0.5 bird to 1.66 which resulted in a total retrieved kill of 11,046 - a decrease of about 4,500 birds from the 1967 total. The decrease in kill is the result, in part, of the smaller goose population in southeast Colorado during the 1968-69 season. An additional estimated 2,198 geese were crippled but not retrieved making the total hunting mortality of 13,243 birds. Table 11. Goose hunting season statistics, 1954-68. Arkansas Vallez Estimated Average Estimated Goose Hunters Season Bag Kill Year Dates of Season Stamp Sales 1954 1l/1 - 12/30 32,450 7,071 1.04 7,372 1955 1l/1 - 12/30 39,107 9,054 1.54 13,904 1956 11/9 -1/7 36,303 9,833 1.05 10,276 1957 11/2 - 11/31 41,794 9,113 1.39 12,656 1958 11/17 - 1/15 41,897 10,082 1.51 15,205 1959 10/26 - 1/8 31,431 8,888 1.61 14,309 1960 10/26 - 1/8 30,592 9,838 1.39 13,629 1961 1l/10 - 1/8 24,854 7,577 1.68 11,724 1962 10/31 - 1/13 17,701 6,021 1.58 9,495 1963 11/2 - 1/15 22,940 6,668 2.17 14,444 1964 11/2 - 1/15 25,282 8,016 2.30 18,474 1965 11/2 - 1/15 20,537 6,313 1.52 9,613 1966 11/19 - 1/15 29,377 9,357 2.59 24,269 1967 11/18 - 1/14 31,064 6,975 2.23 15,558 1968 11/16 - 1/15 31,218 6,668 1.66 11,046 �- 116 - The retrieved kill by county is presented in Table 12 (Funk and Grieb, 1969). The kill in all four major counties declined from 1967-68 levels. Baca County continues to contribute the most birds to the goose hunters bag in southeast Colorado. Table 12. Comparison of the 1968-69 Arkansas Valley goose harvest, by county with the l4-year average, 1954-67, based on the results of the random small game survey. County Lakes and Reservoirs Number and Percent of Geese Bagged l4-year Average 1968-69 % % No. No. Baca Two Buttes and Turks 4,613 41.8 5,331 37.7 Kiowa Eads and Blue 1,318 11.9 3,175 22.5 Prowers Two Buttes and Eads 1,957 17.7 2,226 15.8 Bent John Martin, Blue and Horsecreek 1,802 16.3 1,919 13.6 Crowley Meredith and Henry 523 4.7 712 5.0 155 1.4 181 1.3 426 3.9 341 2.4 252 2.3 113 0.7 11,046 100.0 14,122 100.0 Pueblo Otero Las Animas Total Horsecreek, Cheraw, Dyes and Holbrook Banding Investigations Trapping and banding was accomplished after the close of the 1968-69 hunting season in southeast Colorado. Objectives were to band approximately 500 Canada geese in the Two Buttes area and the same at another location in the Arkansas Valley. Because of a large goose concentration, Upper Queens Reservoir was selected as the second banding site. Difficulty was encountered in trapping birds at Upper Queens, therefore, only 315 of 1,089 birds banded were captured there. Results. of the trapping and banding effort are presented in Table 13. �- 117 - Table 13. Arkansas Valley banding results, 1969. Date Location 1-18-69 Two Buttes Res. 1-20-69 No. of Geese Banded No. of Recaptures Total 269 7 276 Two Buttes Res. 169 6 175 1-24-69 Upper Queens Res. 262 9 271 1-30-69 Upper Queens Res. 53 2 55 2-2-69 Two Buttes Res. 20 0 20 2-3-69 Two Buttes Res. 316 6 322 1,089 30 1,119 Totals Age and Sex Composition Data on the age composition of trapped samples were presented and discussed in a previous section. Of the total birds banded, only 184 were immatures. Information on the sex ratios of the trapped sample is presented in Table 14. These data show an evenly balanced sex ratio, consistent with data from previous years. Table 14. 1969. Sex composition of Canada geese captures in the Arkansas Valley, No. of Males Percent Males No. of Females Percent Females Total Birds Two Buttes Res. 396 50.00 396 50.00 792 Upper Queens Res. 176 50.14 175 49.86 351 Totals 572 50.04 571 49.96 1,143 Location. �- 118 Weights The mean weights of both trapped and harvested birds are presented in Table 15. In past years mean weights of birds bagged have been consistently larger than mean weights of birds trapped post season at Two Buttes. The same was true this year. It has been postulated by Rutherford (1967) that these differences may be caused by either: (1) firing-line shooters selecting the larger birds as their target or (2) weight loss during the hunting season. Interpretation of firing line-trapping weight comparisons made by specific time intervals during the years of 1961-62 (Rutherford 1963) and 1962-63 (Rutherford 1964), when in-season banding was conducted, resulted in the conclusion that there was essentially no difference in weights of geese obtained by the two methods. Possibly more emphasis should be placed on determining why the weight differences occur. It is possible that the baited cannon-net trapping technique may be selective toward the smaller races or sub-populations of geese when more than one race or sub-population is present in the trapping area. Table 15. Comparison of weights of geese from trap and check station samples, Arkansas Valley, 1968-69. Total No. Average of Geese WLLbs. No. of Adults Average WLLbs. No. of Juveniles Average WLLbs. Two Buttes Check Station 134 5.32 79 5.00 213 5.20 Two Buttes Trapping 616 4.90 135 4.89 751 4.90 Total 750 4.98 214 4.93 964 4.97 Lamar Mgmt.Area Check Station 78 5.46 74 5.51 152 5.48 Upper Queens Trapping 315 5.41 55 5.39 370 5.41 Total 393 5.42 129 5.46 522 5.43 Source As in the four previous trapping years, geese caught in the more northern areas of southeast Colorado's winter range weighed more than those trapped at Two Buttes. This year it was noted that birds trapped at Upper Queens seemed to be in better physical condition than those trapped at Two Buttes. �- 119 - Food conditions were generally' considered better in the Upper Queens area than in the Two Buttes area. The average weight of birds bagged or trapped at Two Buttes during the winter of 1968-69 was less than comparative weights for six of the previous seven years. Although a definite factor in winter of 1968-69, it is doubtful that body condition alone is responsible for the consistent weight differences between Two Buttes and the more northern areas. It is possible that the majority of the population of these two geographic areas are different genetic strains. Distribution of Harvest The distribution of band recoveries through the 1967-68 hunting season from Canada geese banded in southeast Colorado is presented in Table 16. Alberta, Saskatchewan and Colorado continue to be the primary harvest areas. In recent years the percent of harvest taken in Saskatchewan has been increasing whereas the percentage taken in Alberta has been declining. During the 196768 hunting season, Saskatchewan's harvest of banded birds exceeded that of Alberta. Assuming that band reporting rates for all recovery areas are equal, the Canadian harvest amounted to 47.8 percent of the total harvest during the 1967-68 season. The 17 year average for Canada is 53.8 percent. Of the 134 banded birds reported being recovered during the 1967-68 season, 54 were taken from birds banded in the Arkasas Valley proper, either at John Martin Reservoir or in the Eads lakes area. It is of interest that 14.8 percent of these 54 recoveries were taken outside of the normal migration and Wintering areas described by Rutherford, 1965. Only two, or 2.5 percent, of the 80 recoveries from Two Buttes banded birds were from outside the normal recovery areas. This adds to the increasing evidence that there may be some differences between populations utilizing Two Buttes and those wintering in the northern areas of southeast Colorado. Analysis of Banding Data Tables 17 through 22 present band recovery data from all Arkansas Valley post-season banding efforts from 1951 through the hunting season of 1967-68. Recovery data from birds banded post-season 1968 have not yet been received. Tables 17, 18 and 19 present estimates of mortality rates calculated by the composite-dynamic method. Tables 20, 21 and 22 present these same estimates calculated by the relative recovery rate method. No banding was conducted in 1965-66, which left a void in recovery data. Therefore, the analysis by the relative recovery rate method can be completed only for birds banded through 1964-65. Comparison of mortality rates calculated by the composite method for birds banded as juveniles with those banded as adults shows very close agreement (Tables 17 and 18). The first year mortality rate for both age groups is about 28 percent for all banding and recovery years combined. Annual mortality for all age classes remains at 26 percent, consistent with last years' estimates (Table 19). �Table 16. Percentages of total band recoveries, Arkansas Valley post-season bandings, by area and year of recovery, all banding years combined. Recovery Year 1958- 1959- 196059 60 61 1961-'--f962-196362 63 64 1964:"-T965- 1966- 196765 66 67 68 PercenTotal No. tage of of Recov- Total Recoverie s eries Area 1951----1952- 195354 52 53 195455 195556 195657 195758 far North above 530 10.5 9.0 9.0 10.7 10.5 6.2 6.3 7.0 7.9 7.7 7.9 6.3 15.5 15.2 4.7 10,4 7.5 226 9 •.0 26.4 18.5 23.4 17.6 31.0 24.3 33.3 17.3 28.2 10.5 29.7 9.4 39.3 9.8 35.4 14.6 33.3 9.4 38.7 9.0 34.9 9.3 33.3 19.4 28.4 17.4 26.8 8.5 27.9 10.9 19.4 16.4 14.2 24.6 729 365 29.6 14.8 0.7 1.5 4 0.2 0.7 0.5 9.0 29.1 13 1 14 4 155 707 Provinces below 530 Alberta Saskatchewan B. C., Manitoba, Ontario Central Flyway Hontana N. Dakota Wyoming S. Dakota Nebraska Colora.do Kansas Oklahoma New Nexico Texas Panhandle Waggoner Ranch Gulf Coast Pacific Flyway 1.3 1.3 1.1 0.5 1.3 1.3 7.9 25.0 0.5 1.0 1.3 0.7 0.7 3.2 23.1 0.5 0.5 1.6 4.3 22.9 0.5 2.4 1.9 6.0 23.8 0.7 0.7 2,0 7.4 7.4 2,1 D,S 2.1 1.4 1.3 5.2 0.5 2.8 8.1 36.3 5.5 39.0 0.8 8.9 24.0 1.6 1.8 1.6 0,8 0,8 2.3 2,3 4.5 0.9 2.4 3.2 2.7 0.6 0.7 0.7 5.5 21.7 1.0 0.5 1.0 6.7 30.1 2.0 1.4 8.8 35.4 0.7 1.4 0.7 0.7 9.7 32.4 0.7 1.5 0.7 15 20 4.6 0,8 0.8 4.0 2.0 7.3 2.4 2.7 2.0 7.5 0.7 7.5 3.8 1.0 0.6 2.2 93 43 14 0.8 1.5 1.2 0.7 48 1.9 0.7 2 0.1 1 T 0.7 1.4 1.3 4.9 28.3 0.7 1.4 0.7 7.2 36.6 6.4 26.6 2.8 0.7 0.7 0.7 1.4 2,8 1.4 3,9 5.2 1.2 0.5 5,4 31.5 0.8 5.4 4.8 3.1 30.9 9 0.6 1.4 0,8 Mississippi Flyway 0.5 Mexico Total Number of Recoveries 1.8 76 188 210 150 124 128 112 144 138 155 129 129 201 164 147 134 134 2463 T 0.6 0.2 6.3 28.7 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 .7 0.6 •... N o �Table 17 • Composite Dynamic Analysis of Band RecoverIes from Canada Geese Banded as Juveniles, Arkansas Valle, Year Banded Number Banded 1950-51 1951-52 1952-53 1953-54 1954-55 1955-56 1956-57 1957-58 1958-59 1959-60 1960-61 1961-62 1962-63 1963-64 1964-65 1965-66 1966-67 300 628 578 0 0 0 0 176 298 167 248 123 399 251 198 0 285 Colorado, 1951-1967, Recoveries by Year Following Banding 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 31 58 57. 25 31 25 11 33 25 11 20 24 4 16 20 5 8 11 4 7 11 7 6 9 1 4 2 1 4 4 0 0 4 0 5 1 0 2 3 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 4 0 0 2 0 1 1 X X X X X X X X 21 25 16 15 10 40 16 15 16 16 10 5 12 24 11 7 6 16 3 4 10 9 11 8 X X X X 4 8 14 7 0 14 13 X X 4 7 8 8 1 6 1 3 0 7 1 X 3 1 X X X 1 '-' '-' N 18 Total Recover i es 3,651 317 182 136 115 74 36 28 24 11 10 4 6 5 3 2 0 0 Banded Birds rligib1e 3651 3366 3366 3168 2917 2518 2395 2147 1980 1682 1506 1506 1506 1506 1506 928 300 Recoveries Per 1,000 Ba nded 86,8 54,1 40,4 36.3 25.4 14,3 11.7 11.2 5,6 5.9 2.7 4,0 3.3 2.0 218.2 Alive Going into Period 305.0 r'!orta1ityRate 28.5% 218.2 164.1 123.7 87.4 62.0 47,7 36.0 818.2 26.7% 1.3 0.0 0.0 f:: 305.0 24.8 19.2 13.3 10.6 6.6 3.3 1.3 0.0 I = 1123.2 27.2% 0.0 �Table 18, Composite Dynamic Analysis of Band Recoveries from Canada Geese Banded as Adults, Arkansas Valley, Colorado, 1951-1967. Year Number Banded Banded 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 1950-51 1951-52 1952-53 1953-54 1954-55 1955-56 1956-57 1957-58 1958-59 1959-60 1960-61 1961-62 1962-63 1963-64 1964-65 1965-66 1966-67 344 650 900 0 0 0 0 347 217 250 306 334 369 335 780 0 389 45 71 85 23 37 55 19 24 50 10 23 31 7 21 25 12 6 20 5 11 9 3 6 12 3 9 10 2 7 6 2 7 2 0 4 4 1 2 2 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 8 2 4 7 3 2 1 6 3 2 0 2 Recoveries by Year Following Banding X X X X X X X X 33 21 27 29 26 35 24 55 27 9 16 13 18 20 12 40 17 7 6 18 12 14 14 20 8 4 12 12 5 4 10 X X 5 4 8 4 13 11 X X X 2 1 3 X X •.... N N 29 -Total Recoveries 5,221 480 270 201 119 98 62 37 27 24 17 11 8 5 1 2 1 0 Banded Birds Eligible 5221 4832 4832 4052 3717 3348 3014 2708 2458 2241 1894 1894 1894 1894 1894 944 344 Recoveries Per 1,000 Banded 91,9 Alive Going Into Period 318,6 Morta 1ity Rate 28,8/, 55,9 226,7 41.6 29,4 170,8 129,2 26,4 99,8 18,5 73,4 12,3 54,9 10,0 226,7 42,6 888,3 25,5% 9,8 7,6 5,8 4,2 2,6 0,5 1.1 1,0 0,0 1,0 0,0 r -:: 318,6 32,6 22,8 15,2 9,4 5,2 2,6 2,1 r", 12C6,9 26,4% �Table 19. Composite Dynamic Analysis of Band Recoveries from Canada Geese Banded in All Age Classes, Arkansas Valley, Colorado, 1951-1967. Year Banded Number Banded 1950-51 1951-52 1952- 53 1953-54 1954-55 1955- 56 1956-57 1957-58 1958-59 1959-60 1960-61 1961-62 1962-63 1963-64 1964-65 1965-66 1966-67 Total Recoveries Recoveries by Year Following Banding 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 644 1,278 1,478 0 0 0 0 523 515 417 554 457 768 586 978 0 674 76 129 137 48 68 80 30 57 75 21 43 55 11 37 45 17 14 31 9 18 20 10 12 21 4 13 12 3 11 10 2 7 6 0 9 5 1 4 5 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 0 0 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 54 46 43 44 36 75 40 70 43 25 26 18 30 44 23 47 23 23 9 22 22 23 25 28 9 5 4 14 6 1 6 5 X X 8,872 797 452 337 234 172 98 65 51 35 27 15 14 10 4 4 1 0 8872 8198 8198 7220 6634 5866 5409 4858 4438 3923 3400 3400 3400 3400 3400 1922 644 Banded Birds Eligible Recoveries Per 1,000 Banded Alive Going Into Period Morta 1ity Rate X X 12 12 26 19 5 18 23 9 11 16 12 14 17 X X X X X X X X X 2 2 4 5 1 3 X X 4 •.... N w 47 89,8 55.1 41.1 32.4 25.9 16.7 12,0 10.5 7,9 6.9 4,4 4.1 2.9 1.2 29.1 21.2 14.3 9.9 5.8 2.9 222,8 312.6 28.7% 222.8 167.7 126.6 94.2 68.3 51.6 39.6 856,8 26.0% r: 312.6 1.2 0.5 0.0 1.7 0.5 0,0 .r -= 1168.8 26,7% �Table 20. Relative recovery rate analysis of band recoveries from Canada geese banded as juveniles, Arkansas Valley, Colorado, 1951-1965. Survival Rate Mortality Rate .2367 .762 .238 .2182 .653 .347 --- .2216 .858 .142 52 .2584 .1745 .560 .440 52 36 .3114 .2156 1.114 248 48 33 .1935 .1331 .482 .518 1961-62 123 34 24 .2764 .1951 .837 .163 1962-63 399 93 53 .2331 .1328 .654 .346 1963-64 251 51 35 .2032 .1706 1.126 1964-65 198 30 CU .1515 1.6982 7.046 Number Recoveries 1 - n 2 - n Recover:2:Rates 2 - n 1 - n Winter Banded Number Banded 1950-51 300 CUll 71 --- 1951-52 628 195 137 .3105 1952-53 578 193 CU .3339 1957-58 176 CU 39 1958-59 298 77 1959-60 167 1960-61 t-' N +:' I 3,366 2.2719 Average survival rates Average mortality rates 1/ Cannot use. .747 .253 .783 .217 ��Table 22. Relative recovery rate analysis of band recoveries from Canada geese banded in all age classes, Arkansas Valley, Colorado, 1951-65. Winter Banded Number Banded 1950-51 644 CU 1/ 160 --- 1951-52 1,278 424 295 .3318 1952-53 1,478 505 CU .3417 1957 -58 523 CU 112 1958-59 515 126 1959-60 417 1960-61 Number Recoveries 1 - n 2 - n Recover:z Rates 2 - n 1 - n Survival Rate Mortality Rate .2484 .749 .251 .2308 .675 .325 --- .2141 .875 .125 80 .2447 .1553 .483 .517 134 91 .3213 .2l82 .902 .098 554 134 90 .2419 .1625 .669 .331 1961-62 457 111 75 .2429 .1641 .7l2 .288 1962 -63 768 177 102 .2305 .1328 .701 .299 1963-64 586 III 7l .1894 .1212 .817 .183 1964-65 978 145 CU .1483 1.6426 6.563 ..-. N 0'\ I 8,198 2.2925 Average survival rates Average mortality rates Y Cannot use. .7l7 .283 .729 .27l �- 127 - Analysis by the relative recovery rate method gives estimates of annual mortality for birds banded during anyone year. By averaging these esti~ mates an average mortality rate for an age class and/or population can be obtained. Rates calculated by the relative method are slightly higher than those determined by the composite dynamic method for adults and both age classes combined. This is consistent with Grieb's (unpublished data) findings. Mortality rates for juveniles calculated by the relative method are lower than that of the composite dynamic method. Juvenile rates also show a decline of five percent in comparison with Grieb's figures derived by the same method for this population through the 1963-64 hunting season. Two juvenile cohorts have calculated survival rates that are over one. Small banded samples of juveniles are probably responsible for these inconsistencies. The Effect of Special Regulations on the Number and Distribution of Geese in the Arkansas Valley For the past five years Colorado has been experimenting with various special regulations in the southeastern portion of the state in an attempt to retain more of the wintering Short Grass Prairie Canada Goose Population. The primary tool has been delayed openings. We have also experimented with weekly alternation of the firing line at Two Buttes Reservoir. The areas subject to delayed openings have been variable from year to year. During the 1967-68 and 1968-69 seasons some consistency was established with the entire Arkansas Valley opening delayed until mid-November and Two Buttes opening two weeks later. In evaluating these regulations, two assumptions have been made: (1) southeast Colorado is capable of maintaining more geese than it has in the past, and (2) as the total Short Grass Prairie Population increases, the Colorado population will increase proportionately. The two coordinated aerial surveys - December Status Count and January Inventory - give an estimate of the size of the total Short Grass Prairie Population and its distribution. In Colorado these surveys normally fall after the season has begun in all areas and before the shooting has stopped, thus giving an estimate of the huntab1e population. By using the results of these two surveys only, the percent of Short Grass Prairie geese wintering in Colorado each year has been calculated (Fig. 1). On the same figure, arrival times for geese in the Valley and the season dates have been recorded. In 1963 and 1968, the geese arrived later than normal, thus eliminating any possible effects of the general delayed season. During the 1965-66 season, Colorado held between 45 and 50 percent of the Short Grass Prairie Populations. The following two years the geese arrived prior to the season opening, but the percent of the total population in Colorado declined thus indicating the delayed season probably had no effect on retention of geese. A further delay of hunting in portions of extreme southeastern Colorado has definitely affected the distribution of geese in the state. In four of the previous five years there has been a delay in the southern part of the winter range in Colorado. The results have been that the Two Buttes - Turks area in Baca County has retained about 40 percent of the Valley population during these four years. �("f) tI) .j..J o 0 - 128 - r-.... r-.... r-l . :> NN N N 0 Z :> :> 0 ZZ 0 r-l r-l Q) CIl < -o OJ .j..J . :> N t\I Q 0 r-l t\I r-l r-l () :> QZ 0 s:: Q) 0 tI) H Q) Q) H ;::l tI) I=Q H ::: Q) Q) t\I .j..J · N N N r-l N r-l 0 0 . :> 0 0 Z Z .j..J .j..J I=Q CIl r-l . . :> :> Q) .j..J .j..J Q) I=QO 00 ("f) tI) Q) H ()..c 0 I tI) I t\I < . :> :> t\I I .j..J N Nr-l Z o H p.., t\I 0 Z 0'1 r-l I=Q ~ 0 tI) 0 I t\I Q) s:: :> Z tI) H 0 · :>. N O..c H .j..J p..,O · :> 0 r-l r-l < O..c ~b . :> ("f) 0 Q) 0 ..c ~ 0 .j..J r-, 0 r-l ;::l tI) I=Q H . :> 0 r-l . :> 0 Z Z Z Z Z Z Z 1962 1963 1964 1965 1966 1967 1968 :> .,-1 H H < 60 50 40 Percent 30 20 10 Figure 1. The percent of Short Grass Prairie Geese wintering in Colorado, by year, based on the averages of "December Status Count and "January Inventory". �- 129 At Two Buttes, a weekly alternation of the firing-line was in effect through the 1967-68 and 1968-69 seasons. This regulation was designed to help in the retention of geese on Two Buttes Reservoir. During the 1967-68 season, Two Buttes held better than 50 percent of the Baca County population, or 12,000 birds, through most of the season as food conditions in the Tvl0 Buttes Reservoir area were considered good. In the fall of 1968, the geese arrived in the Arkansas Valley on November 16. Baca County had an ilmnediate build-up with 11,500 at Two Buttes and 9,500 on Turks. Population numbers in Baca County remained stable through the season, but the distribution changed considerably. By November 29, Two Buttes had about 14,000 birds. On November 30, the Two Buttes south side firing line opened and most geese flew west and southwest. Many missed the firing line completely, but 152 birds were bagged, 135 of those from areas five and six. Throughout the day, geese were continually harassed in the fields. On December 1 the birds flew primarily west and northwest, missing the firing line completely. A few geese did fly straight south. The total number of birds on Two Buttes was down considerably from the November 29 count. Field harassment definitely lessened on the 1st. By December 2, Two Buttes had probably less than 5,000 geese and by December 4 the total was down to about 2,100. After that there was no significant change in distribution in Baca County until December 7 when Two Buttes had 7,000 birds. The next count on December 16 revealed 1,800 on Two Buttes. Until January 9 the distribution stayed essentially the same with numbers at Two Buttes varying from a low of 79 to a high of 4,500. On January 9 the number of birds at Two Buttes began to increase at the expense of Turk's. By January 14 there were 14,000 geese back at Two Buttes. Apparently 3 new pits were placed near the edge of Turk's Pond about the time geese began to return to Two Buttes. Except for the first weekend, hunting pressure at Two Buttes could not be considered heavy, and therefore, probably not a factor in changes in distribution. Two years of information have now been collected on the effects of the special Two Buttes regulation. The reaction of geese to our firing line regulations in 1968 was a complete reversal from the previous year. Approximately the same number of geese sustained about the same amount of firing line hunting pressure during opening day in 1967 and 1968. In 1967, the geese continued to fly generally south and southeast over the open firing line during the first week of the season. By the second day of the 1968 season the geese had changed their direction of flight from west-southwest to west-northwest. By the third day of the 1968 season, the geese had essentially abandoned Two Buttes. Comparing the two years leaves no doubt that Two Buttes firing line pressure is not the ultimate factor determining goose distribution in Baca County. The basic differences between the two years in the Two Buttes area were the water and feed conditions. Water at Two Buttes was extremely low in 1968. However, this did not seem to affect the pre-season concentration. Because of weather conditions and lack of irrigation water, no crop was produced on the lake-shore food plot or the large north-side field in 1968. In 1967 both of these areas were considered somewhat instrumental in retaining geese at Two Buttes. In 1967 the lakeshore food plot was completely consumed prior to December 2. Yet, it may have had Some effect on the retention of birds at Two Buttes through the first week of the season. In 1967, birds began using the north side maize field late in December. They continued to use the field despite the opening of the north side firing line on January 6. It seems that an unmolested location in which to feed may be the key to retaining geese at Two Buttes. �- 130 - LITERATURE CITED Funk, H.D., and J.R. Grieb. 1969. Colorado small game hunter harvest .survey--1968. Dept. Natural Resources, Colo. Game, Fish and Parks Div., Fed. Aid Project W-88-R. 37p. Raveling, D.G. 1966. Factors affecting age ratios of samples of Canada geese caught with cannon-nets. J. Wildl. Mgmt. 30(4) :682-691. Rutherford, W.R. 1963. Investigation of the Arkansas Valley wintering goose flock. Colo. Game and Fish Dept., Game Res. Rept., Fed. Aid Project W-88-R, Jan. pp 69-88. 1964. Investigation of the Arkansas Valley wintering goose flock. Colo. Game, Fish and Parks Dept., Game Res. Rept., Fed. Aid Project W-88-R, July pp 27-46. __________ , ed. 1965. Description common to the Central Flyways. of Canada goose populations Colo. Game, Fish and Parks Dept. 1967. Arkansas Valley goose flock management studies. Colo. Game, Fish and Parks Dept., Game Res. Rept., Fed. Aid Project W-88-R, Oct. pp 61-73. Prepared by ~ --n: ~A Michael R. Szymczak ~(/~-Assistant Wildlife Researcher ~ �October 1969 - 131 - JOB PROGRESS REPORT ( State of COLORADO .------~~~~---------- Project No W_-_8_8_-_R_-_l_4 _ Work Plan No. ~3--. o _ Migratory Bird Investigations Job Noo 6 _ Job Title: Investigation of Mallard Management Units of Eastern Colorado Period Covered: Personnel:· December 1, 1968 through October, 1969 Charles Hayes, Dale Horne and Jack Randall, Bureau of Sport Fisheries and Wildlife; Richard Hopper, Jack Grieb, Mike Szymczak, Robert Kitzmiller, Larry Green, Steve Steinert, Lee Swenson, Howard Funk and many other members of the Colorado Game, Fish and Parks. ABSTRACT Ducks banded in eight study units in eastern Colorado in the winter of 1968-69 numbered 4,416. Wintering populations of mallards in these areas were considered normal at approximately 250,000 birds. Post-season sex ratio counts again indicated these populations were composed of about 60 percent males. Analyses of band recoveries from the 1967-68 season again showed the degree of discreteness in migration patterns displayed by mallards banded during previous winters. Over 80 percent of the recoveries from these birds come from the High Plains Unit, Alberta and Saskatchewan. Most of the birds return year after year to the general area in which they were banded. Analyses of recovery data indicate survival rates for male mallards banded as adults are highest, adult females and immature males being second in rank, and the mortality rates for immature female mallards being greatest. Mallard harvest during the regular season again was composed of approximately 75 percent drakes. An additional harvest of about 38,000 drakes occurred during the late experimental mallard drake season. This season was looked upon as a success and a step forward in waterfowl management. ��- 133 - INVESTIGATION OF MALLARD MANAGEMENT UNITS OF EASTERN COLORADO Howard D. Funk Introduction The intensive mallard investigation initiated in eastern Colorado in 1963 was continued not only to further identify and monitor individual populations present, but to assist in a cooperative Central Flyway program aimed at refinement of mallard management techniques. Banding quotas were met, population and sex ratio surveys were conducted, and past band recovery data were analyzed. Results of 1968-69 efforts are presented in this report along with some information on the experimental late mallard drake season in Montana, Wyoming and Colorado. P. S. OBJECTIVE To develop a harvest formula for Colorado mallard management units. SEGMENT OBJECTIVES 1. To trap and band mallards in the following seven study areas for the purpose of obtaining migration, life history and annual mortality data: (a) South Platte Valley Denver to Greeley, (b) South Platte Valley Greeley to Fort Morgan, (c) South Platte Valley Fort Morgan to Sterling, (d) South Platte Valley Sterling to Julesburg, (e) the Fort Collins area, (f) the Bonny Reservoir area, and (g) the Arkansas River Valley. 2. To conduct surveys for the purpose of obtaining winter population estimates of mallards; age and sex ratios in the hunter's bag, wintering populations and trap samples; and hunter pressure and harvest data by study areas. 3. To gather and tabulate band recovery data from the Bird Banding Office from mallards banded in Colorado since 1963-64 for use in making preliminary estimates on migration and harvest routes and annual mortality, and for use in final analysis during a later segment. 4. Analyze results of the 1968-69 experimental mallard drake season. METHODS AND MATERIALS Changes in procedures in trapping and conducting surveys were described in previous segment reports (Funk 1964, 1965, 1966, 1967, and 1968). During the first year of study we set up seven study units and banding quotas were 1,000 birds in each. Efforts were made to band equal numbers of mallards �- 134 by age and sex (adult and immature males and females). For various reasons, this was not always accomplished. In 1968-69, the Arkansas Valley area was divided into two units, making a total of eight study areas. The western area extends from Pueblo to Rocky Ford and the eastern unit is from Rocky Ford to Lamar. Quotas of birds to be banded by unit were reduced from 1,000 to 600 mallards in 1968-69. Fluoroscopic examination of samples of trapped ducks for embedded shot was not accomplished during the segment and will not be continued in future segments unless a need for more data exists. Data collected in past segments were sufficient to show gross differences in hunting pressure between the High Plains Unit and other areas as indicated by percent of immature birds carrying shot in their bodies. No effort will be made to determine differences in hunting pressure between study units in Colorado by this method because it would be too expensive and time consuming. One other objective has been to trap samples of mallards in cannon-nets to help determine the degree of bias in cage-type trapping methods. We know males are trapped in cage traps in a disproportional ratio, but we don't know to what degree. Actually, cannon-net data may also be biased. Also, cannon-net samples are difficult to obtain in many areas, especially along rivers, so we will not stress making catches of this type unless we have sufficient time and manpower. RESULTS AND DISCUSSION Trapping and Banding In previous years, seven study areas were delineated with quotas of 1,000 mallards to be banded in each. In 1968-69, the Arkansas Valley area was divided into two units for the purpose of banding quotas, but number of birds to be banded in all areas was reduced to 600. As illustrated in Table 1, quotas for the two Arkansas Valley units were not met. Yet the trapping and banding effort yielded 4,416 mallards banded in all areas in January and February, 1969 and this was considered quite successful. Study units are shown in Figure 1. Unseasonably warm weather severely hampered the banding program as it was difficult to get birds to go into the traps. This is particularly evident in banding ratios illustrated in Table I. Attempts were again made to band equal numbers of adult and immature males and females in each study unit. However, in order to obtain samples of 600 birds from all units within the months of January and February, it was necessary to move on to other areas before reaching specific quotas by age and sex. For some reason it was most difficult to trap immature females; probably an indication of reduced production in 1968. The reason immature male quotas were met is that immatures, like adult males seem much more aggressive when attempting to get to the bait in the traps. Thus, they are easier to capture and our trapping ratios are not indicative of true population composition. As in other years, a considerable number of trapped males, especially adults, were released unbanded. ( \ \ �Table 1. Numbers and percentages of mallards in the banded sample by sex, age, and area, eastern Colorado, 1968-69. Adult Immature Management Units Numbers Banded Male No. % Female No. % No. % No. % (4) Fort Collins 603 153 25.4 203 33.7 160 26.5 87 14.4 (6) Denver-Greeley 520 151 29.1 153 29.4 116 22.3 100 19.2 (3) Greeley-Fort Morgan 600 163 27.2 138 23.0 152 25.3 147 24.5 (2) Fort Morgan-Sterling 600 154 25.7 180 30.0 164 27.3 102 17.0 (1) Sterling-Julesburg 600 150 25.0 140 23.3 188 31.4 122 20.3 (9) Bonny Reservoir 599 153 25.5 153 25.5 173 28.9 120 20.1 Male Female f-' w VI (12) Rocky Ford-Lamar 525 125 23.8 74 14.1 176 33.5 150 28.6 (13) Pueblo-Rocky Ford 369 170 46.1 86 23.3 75 20.3 38 10.3 4,416 1,219 27.6 1,127 25.5 1,204 27.3 866 19.6 �WATERFOWL MANAGEMENT GFP-R-M-l Fig. 1. Waterfowl Manage~ehe Unit map. MEXICO UNII~ NEB R ASK A �- 137 - Winter Sex Ratio Counts Results of ground counts on sex ratios are shown in Table 2. Data were obtained in only five of the study units but the outcome was similar to results of previous years in that approximately 60 percent of the various mallard wintering populations were composed of males. Wing surveys indicate that up to 75 percent of regular season harvest of mallards is composed of males. Also, the late drake mallard season was responsible for almost 40,000 additional drakes being harvested in Colorado as will be shown later in this report. Therefore, since most of these sex ratio counts were obtained after the close of hunting season, the pre-season population in Colorado must have been composed of more than 60 percent males. Winter Aerial Surveys Four aerial censuses were conducted at two week intervals in eastern Colorado from December 5, 1968 through January 16, 1969. Results of the counts are revealed in Table 3 by study unit of census and date. Peak numbers (262,000) were censused during the December 19 count, six days after beginning of the late mallard drake season. By January 16, 1969, which was after the close of the drake season, numbers counted dropped to about 223,000 birds. This is a reduction of about 40,000 birds or a number similar to the estimated drake season harvest in Colorado. No doubt there are many factors which entered into this reduction in count figures, such as movement of birds from one unit into another and/or movement completely out of the state, as is believed to have happened in Unit 1. Also, a sizable portion of the late season harvest must have occurred prior to the December 19 census. However, the comparison between census figures and the harvest estimate is of noteworthy interest. As in past years, it was estimated that wintering populations were composed of 98 percent mallards. The San Luis Valley was censused only during the January 2, 1969 period when approximately 39,000 birds were counted. This area was also open during the late drake season. Table 2 does not include San Luis Valley figures. The table also does not show the manner in which the ducks changed their habits regarding rest areas. On December 5, 1968, approximately 35,000 birds were present on the South Platte River and adjacent sloughs. By December 19, when the late season was in progress, only 10,000 birds were seen on river areas. This was the trend through the January 2, 1969 census, while the season was still on, with about 11,500 birds present on the river system. By January 16, the river and slough areas accounted for 45,000 birds. This pattern change is normal in northeastern Colorado. Ducks seem to favor river areas when they are not under stress by hunters, but they will utilize the numerous large reservoirs for resting during a hunting season. Here they become inaccessible to hunters, a factor which is very much responsible for the relatively low Colorado harvest success and extremely high survival rates of mallards, especially drakes. Hunting success is generally low except during periods of cold weather and heavy or extended periods of snow cover. �- 138 - Table 2. Mallard sex ratio ground counts by study unit, 1968-69. Date Location Number Ducks Counted Male Female Total Percent Males 315 215 194 128 89 194 311 314 182 185 120 124 75 43 120 216 188 129 506 335 318 203 l32 314 527 502 311 63.0 64.2 61.0 63.1 67.4 61.8 59.0 62.5 58.5 1,942 1,200 3,142 61.8 318 283 206 213 524 496 60.7 57.1 601 419 1,020 58.9 166 320 98 183 264 503 62.9 63.6 486 281 767 63.4 304 322 698 322 308 197 232 236 497 217 199 122 536 558 1,195 539 507 319 56.7 57.7 58.4 59.7 60.7 61.8 2,151 1,503 3,654 58.9 311 322 312 213 142 186 197 153 453 508 509 366 68.7 63.4 61.3 58.2 1,158 678 1,836 63.1 Fort Collins Area (Unit 4) 12-3-68 12-21-68 12-22-68 12-22-68 12-22-68 12-29-68 12-29-68 1-22-69 1-22-69 Hollister Lake Hollister Lake Hollister Lake New Windsor Reservoir Eaton Reservoir Hollister Lake Eaton Reservoir Eaton Reservoir Hollister Lake Sub-Total Greeley-Fort Morgan (Unit 3) 1-15-69 1-16-69 South Platte River South Platte River Sub-Total Fort Morgan-Sterling 1-15-69 1-16 -69 (Unit 2) South Platte River South Platte River Sub-Total Bonny Reservoir Area (Unit 9) 12-3-68 12-4-68 12-6-68 12 -7 -68 1-3-69 1-5-69 Bonny Reservoir Bonny Reservoir Bonny Reservoir Bonny Reservoir Bonny Reservoir Bonny Reservoir Sub-Total Arkansas Valley (Unit 10) 1-14-69 1-30-69 1-31-69 2-18-69 Sub-Total Turk's Pond Queen's Reservoir Queen's Reservoir Holbrook Reservoir �- 139 - Table 3. 1968-69. Aerial duck counts by interval and study unit, eastern Colorado, 11 Area and Study Unit Dec. 5,1968 Number Ducks Counted b:yDate Jan. 2,1969 Dec. 19,1968 Jan. 16,1969 (4) Fort Collins 31,660 28,950 16,595 46,670 (6) Denver-Greeley 42,700 52,490 61,898 45,215 (3) Greeley-Fort Morgan 40,150 30,670 50,780 32,460 (2) Fort Morgan-Sterling 55,030 42,110 36,390 21,750 (1) Sterling-Julesburg 31,660 37,280 4,288 28,370 (9) Bonny Reservoir 27,500 30,000 29,000 19,500 (10) Arkansas Valley 18,293 40,647 34,930 29,397 Grand Totals 246,993 262,147 233,881 223,362 1/ Counts do not include San Luis Valley. Band Recover:y Rates Number of mallards recovered anywhere from initiation of this study in 1963-64 through 1965-66 were updated and tallied in the previous segment report (Funk 1968). All band recoveries from the 1968-69 season have not yet been processed at the Bird Banding office in Maryland. Further, it has been impossible to obtain updated recovery data for all birds banded and recovered since 1963-64. However, results of the 1967-68 season were hand tallied and numbers of birds recovered from banded samples since 1963-64 are presented in chronological order in Tables 4 through 7. As illustrated in Table 4, recovery rates for males banded during the initial year of concentrated effort, 1963-64, are still relatively high at between 1 and 1.4 percent. Percent of recoveries from females banded are much lower. More discussion will be presented on this subject later in this report. An idea as to where most hunting pressure occurs is also indicated in the following tables. The Denver-Greeley area usually shows the highest number of recoveries, which seems natural because of high numbers of hunters utilizing this area. However, for some reason the number of recoveries from birds banded in the Fort Collins area has become relatively low. The cause of this is not fully known. �- 140 - Table 4. Numbers of mallards winter-banded in eastern Colorado, 1963-64, and recovered during the 1967-68 hunting season, by age, sex and unit of banding. Unit of Banding Totals Banded Fort Collins 1,026 Denver-Greeley 1,022 Greeley-Fort Morgan 280 Fort MorganSterling 674 Sterling-Julesburg 295 Bonny Reservoir 256 Arkansas Valley 1,022 Sub-Totals Average 4th Year Recovery Rates 4,575 Adult Male Female RecovRecovBanded ered Banded ered Immatures Male Female RecovRecovBanded ered Banded ered 553 496 7 9 144 70 °° 197 334 3 3 132 122 0 1 99 1 43 1 67 1 71 2 336 91 86 515 8 °1 5 69 29 24 105 0 0 1 2 194 112 98 234 2 1 3 1 75 63 48 168 °° °0 2,176 31 484 4 1,236 14 679 3 1.42% 0.83% 1.13% 0.44% Table 5. Numbers of mallards winter-banded in Eastern Colorado, 1964-65, and recovered during the 1967-68 hunting season, by age, sex and unit of banding. 1/ Unit of Banding Totals Banded Fort Collins 998 Denver-Greeley 1,120 Greeley-Fort Morgan 973 Fort MorganSterling 766 SterlingJulesburg 956 Bonny Reservoir 1,017 Sub-Totals 5,830 Average 3rd Year Recovery Rates Adults Male Female RecovRecovBanded ered Banded ered Immatures Male Female RecovRecovBanded ered Banded ered 485 609 4 24 119 128 1 1 238 241 15 156 142 0 2 423 9 103 1 321 5 126 2 527 12 114 2 90 o 35 0 558 615 14 7 107 167 0 2 201 148 9 1 90 87 1 1 3,217 70 738 7 1,239 31 636 6 2.18% 0.95% 1/ No mallards banded in the Arkansas Valley in 1964-65. 1 2.50% 0.94% �- 141 - Table 6. recovered Numbers of mallards winter-banded in eastern Colorado, 1965-66, and during the 1967-68 hunting season, by age, sex and unit of banding. Adults Male Female RecovRecovBanded ered Banded ered Immatures Male Female RecovRecovBanded ered Banded ered Unit of Banding Totals Banded Fort Collins Denver-Greeley Greeley-Fort Morgan Fort MorganSterling SterlingJulesburg Bonny Reservoir Arkansas Valley 1,006 1,093 285 481 13 20 188 129 5 4 299 299 8 5 234 184 4 1 1,000 288 10 171 2 322 5 219 1 1,017 287 7 195 3 329 13 206 4 1,035 997 922 284 322 334 11 6 8 89 162 133 °° 3 362 288 270 6 7 4 300 215 185 5 2 2 7,070 2,291 75 1,067 17 2,169 48 1,543 19 Sub-Totals Average 2nd Year Recovery Rates Table 7. recovered 3.27% 1.59% 2.21% 1.23% Numbers of mallards winter-banded in eastern Colorado, 1966-67 and during the 1967-68 hunting season, by age, sex and unit of banding. Adults Male Female RecovRecovBanded ered Banded ered ImmatUl:e12 EemaJe RecovRecovBanded ered Banded ered Male Unit of Banding Totals Banded Fort Collins Denver-Greeley Greeley-Fort Morgan Fort MorganSterling SterlingJulesburg Bonny Reservoir Arkansas Valley 1,013 912 290 249 4 16 210 179 3 ° 289 266 4 26 224 218 13 1,000 250 14 152 6 320 14 278 12 923 431 12 108 2 266 10 118 6 1,000 999 1,174 298 259 321 14 2 7 69 148 270 °2 4 340 277 307 10 9 10 293 315 276 7 7 8 7,021 2,098 69 1,136 17 2,065 83 1,722 53 Sub-Totals Average 1st Year Recovery Rates 3.29% 1.50% 4.02% 3.08% ° �- 142 - Estimated Mortality Rates Survival and mortality rates for birds banded from 1963-64 through 1966-67 and recovered from 1964-65 through 1967-68 were computed by the Relative Recovery Rate Method. Results of computations are presented in Table 8 by year of banding and recovery, sex, and age of birds at time of banding. As in the section on band recovery rates, it should be noted that results in Table 8 are from hand tallies of recovery cards received from the Bird Banding Office and it is possible that results are not completely accurate and complete. However, results again indicate extremely high survival in males, especially the adults. For some reason, there is a suggestion that survival of males banded as immatures has been decreasing. In past segments, survival rates computed for females have remained close to 50 percent for adult and immature females. This trend is continuing with the immatures with the addition of the 1966-67 band recoveries but indicated survival rates have been increasing in the adult segment. It is possible that sampling error, reduction in band reporting rates, and/or a number of variables, including the need for a complete, updated recovery deck, may have more impact on the results than realized. Perhaps the best estimates of survival are those listed for all males at about 80 percent and approximately 55 percent for all females. Numbers of first-year recoveries also were tallied for all birds banded since 1963-64. These were divided by the number of birds banded to get an average percent of recovery by age and sex for the four hunting seasons. Results of these computations were interesting. Approximately 3.3 percent of the bands from immature males were reported while the percentage for adult males was only 2.5 percent. This suggests that in the hunting season following banding, males banded as immatures were 1.3 times as vulnerable to hunting mortality as those banded as adults. Percent of recoveries obtained from immature females was 2.4 as compared to only 1.7 percent for adult females producing a ratio similar to that for males at 1.4/1. It has been Common knowledge that immature birds going into their first hunting season are much more vulnerable to hunting than adults, but these data seem to strongly indicate there also is a differential vulnerability ratio in the second year of a mallard's life. The percentages of band recoveries by age and sex shown above were also compared between adult males and females and between immature males and females. Ratios obtained were 1.5/1 and 1.4/1, respectively. Although the ratios are quite Similar, the probability of occurrence of a recovery from an adult female in relation to an adult male is somewhat less than for an immature female in relation to an immature male. Several more inferences could be drawn from these comparisons, but they will not be discussed in this segment. �- 143 - Table 8. Relative Recovery Rate Method estimates on survival and mortality rates of mallards winter-banded in eastern Colorado from 1963-64 through 1966-67 by sex and age at time of banding. Age and Sex No. Recoveries Each Year After BandingY 1-n 2-n Year of Banding Number Banded Immature Males 1963-64 1964-65 1965-66 1966-67 1,236 1,239 2,169 2,065 74 108 83 Adult Males 1963-64 1964-65 1965-66 1966-67 2,176 3,217 2,291 2,098 CU 209 136 69 ll8 151 75 Immature Females 1963-64 1964-65 1965-66 1966-67 679 636 1,543 1,722 CU 21 49 53 Adult Females 1963-64 1964-65 1965-66 1966-67 484 738 1,067 1,136 All Males 1963-64 1964-65 1965-66 1966-67 All Females 1963-64 1964-65 1965-66 1966-67 ctf.±/ 68 45 48 Recovery Rates Each Year After BandingY 1-n 2-n cu Survival Mortality Ratd! Rate'll .0550 .0363 .0221 .921 .729 .550 .079 .271 .450 CU .0650 .0594 .0329 .0542 .0469 .0327 .834 .790 .994 .166 .210 .006 10 12 19 CU .0330 .0318 .0307 .0147 .0189 .0123 .445 .594 .401 .555 .406 .599 CU 30 32 17 12 15 17 CU .0407 .0300 .0150 .0248 .0203 .0159 .609 .677 1.0602./ .391 .323 3,412 4,456 4,460 4,163 CU 283 244 152 186 196 123 CU .0635 .0547 .0365 .0545 .0440 .0276 .858 .804 .756 .142 .196 .244 1,163 1,374 2,610 2,858 CU 51 81 70 22 27 36 CU .0371 .0310 .0245 .0189 .0197 .0138 .509 .635 .563 .491 .365 .437 .0597 .0498 .0402 Y 1-n - all recoveries from each banded segment. 2-n = all recoveries except first-year recoveries. 21 Number of birds banded divided into number recovered = recovery rate in percent. 31 In percent. Example 41 CU = cannot use. .921 = 92.1%. II Survival rate of 100 percent or over impossible. However, survival indicated to be high. �- 144 - The Composite-Dynamic Method of estimating mortality usually is not utilized until enough hunting seasons have gone by to obtain all or most of the recoveries from the first segment of birds banded in a series of study years. However, the recovery data gathered to date were inserted into the formula and, for what they are worth, the results are quite interesting. First of all, first-year mortality for adult males was estimated a low 29 percent. Similar estimates for immature males and adult females were about 37 percent while first-year immature female mortality was estimated at 52 percent. While the actual computed rates from this method are higher than those from the Relative Recovery Rate Method, the pattern is very similar. Adult males show the lowest mortality rate with both methods, immature males and adult females show a somewhat higher rate, and immature females are judged to have the highest mortality rate over this period of study years. Migration and Harvest Patterns Locations of recoveries from birds banded from 1963-64 through 1966-67 and recovered in 1967-68 are listed in Tables 9 through 12; Major location groups are Canada, the Central Flyway west of the 100th meridian, the Central Flyway east of the 100th meridian, the Mississippi Flyway and the Pacific Flyway. Also, the data are separated as to sex and age of birds at time of banding. As in previous years, the majority of recoveries come from Alberta, western Saskatchewan, and the Central Flyway portion west of the 100th meridian. Percentages of recoveries from this area are generally about 80 percent of the total for the first year after banding and gradually increase to well over 90 percent in later years. This gradual increase is indicative of the relatively low hunting pressure within the High Plains Unit. Thus, mallards which wander from this unit after being banded during winter in Colorado are harvested at a higher rate than birds which remain. However, there does seem to be a relatively greater tendency for immature female mallards to wander from the High Plains Unit than birds of the other sex and age classes. Recoveries of mallards harvested in Colorado during the 1967-68 season were sorted by study unit of banding as opposed to unit of recovery. Purpose of this was to determine the degree to which birds return to the specific and general areas of banding during hunting seasons following banding. Results are displayed in Table 13 by sex and age of birds at the time of banding. Although results in the table are not shown as percentages, it is quite evident that the majority of birds return to and are harvested in the same unit or at least the units adjacent to the one in which they were banded. Birds occupying Units 1, 2 and 9 seem to be closely related in migration habits and birds in Units 3, 4 and 6 seem to be of another group. The same is true for those banded in the Arkasas Valley. However, there is some mixing of birds between these general groups, particularly noticeable in shifts of immature birds from the northeast group of units to those in the northcentral area. Yet the greater degree of hunting pressure in the northcentral area and the apparently greater vulnerability of younger birds as opposed to adults has to contribute somewhat to this supposition regarding this type of shift. In other words, there may be no significant difference in magnitude of shift of birds of any sex or age class from anyone general study area to another. �- 145 - Table 9. Harvest locations of mallards banded in eastern Colorado in 1963-64 and recovered in 1967-68 by area of recovery, sex, and age at time of banding. Recovery Location Male No. % Female No. % Immature Female Male No. No. % 10 Canada Alberta Saskatchewan Other Sub-totals 3 0 0 3 9.7 1 0 0 1 25.0 1 0 0 1 Central Flyway West of 100th Meridian Montana Wyoming Colorado New Mexico North Dakota South Dakota Nebraska Kansas Oklahoma Texas Sub-totals 0 1 22 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 26 83.9 0 0 2 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 3 75.0 0 0 12 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 13 Central Flyway East of 100th Meridian North Dakota South Dakota Nebraska Kansas Oklahoma Texas Sub-totals 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Mississippi 2 Adult Flyway Pacific Flyway 0 Totals 31 6.4 100.0 7.1 0 0 0 0 92.9 1 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 100.0 14 100.0 3 100.0 100.0 �- 146 - Table 10. Harvest locations of mallards banded in eastern Colorado in 1964-65 and recovered in 1967-68 by area of recovery, sex and age at time of banding. Adult Recovery Location Male No. % Female No. % Innnature Male Female No. % No. % Canada Alberta Saskatchewan Other Sub-totals 7 1 o o o 1 1 4 o o Central Flyway West of 100th Meridian Montana Wyoming Colorado New Mexico North Dakota South Dakota Nebraska Kansas Oklahoma Texas Sub-totals Central Flyway East of 100th Meridian North Dakota South Dakota Nebraska Kansas Oklahoma Texas Sub-totals o 8 11.4 1 1 43 o o o o 1 o o 5 18 3 o o o o o o o o 8 1 1 1 o 80.0 7 100.0 1 o o 4.3 23 o o o o o o o o 1 Hississippi Flyway o Pacific Flyway 3 4.3 o Totals 70 100.0 7 100.0 1 16.7 o o o o o o o o o o 1 19.4 4 o o 1 1 3 1 6 o 1 56 o o o o 74.2 3 50.0 o o 1 o o 1 16.7 3.2 1 16.7 1 3.2 o 31 100.0 6 100.0 �- 147 Table 11. Harvest locations of mallards banded in eastern Colorado in 1965-66 and recovered in 1967-68 by area of recovery, sex and age at time of banding. Adult Recovery Location Canada Alberta Saskatchewan Other Sub-totals Central Flyway West of 100th Meridian Montana Wyoming Colorado New Mexico North Dakota South Dakota Nebraska Kansas Oklahoma Texas Sub-totals Central Flyway East of 100th Meridian North Dakota South Dakota Nebraska Kansas Oklahoma Texas Sub-totals Male No. % Female No. % Innnature Male Female No. % No. % 5 4 o 2 2 5 o 9 o 12.0 2 o 11.8 7 o o 1 52 12 28 o 1 1 o o 1 7 o 10 o o 1 o o 63 o o 15 36 o o 75.0 63.2 o o 1 1 o 4 8.3 1 5.3 2.1 2 10.5 1 5.3 19 100.0 1.3 Mississippi Flyway 1 1.3 o 1 Pacific Flyway 1 1.3 o o Totals 75 100.0 17 o o 100.0 12 o o 1 o o 3 o 2 o o o o o 1 2 o o 15.7 o o 88.2 3 1 6 o o o o 14.6 o o 84.1 1 2 48 1 100.0 �- 148 Table 12. Harvest locations of mallards banded in eastern Colorado in 1966-67 and recovered in 1967-68 by area of recovery, sex and age at time of banding. Adult Recovery Location Male No. % Female No. % Innnature Male Female No. % No. % Canada Alberta Saskatchewan Other Sub-totals 6 5 0 11 15.9 3 0 0 3 17.6 7 2 0 9 Central Flyway West of 100th Meridian Montana Wyoming Colorado New Mexico North Dakota South Dakota Nebraska Kansas Oklahoma Texas Sub-totals 1 1 44 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 50 72 .5 0 0 8 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 11 64.7 0 2 42 0 1 3 10 1 0 0 59 Central Flyway East of lOOth Meridian North Dakota South Dakota Nebraska Kansas Oklahoma Texas Sub-totals 0 0 1 2 1 0 4 5.8 0 0 1 0 0 1 2 11.8 Mississippi Flyway 1 1.4 0 Pacific Flyway 3 4.4 1 69 100.0 17 Totals 10.8 6 5 0 11 20.8 71.1 1 1 22 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 28 52.8 1 2 2 2 0 0 7 8.5 0 1 2 1 1 1 6 11.3 2 2.4 2 3.8 5.9 6 7.2 6 11.3 100.0 83 100.0 53 100.0 �- 149 Table 13. Numbers and recovery locations of mallards banded from 1963-64 through 1966-67 and recoverd in Central Flyway, Colorado in 1967, by unit of banding, sex and age at time of banding. Colorado Unit of Banding 11 Sample Size Northeast 1 2 Colorado Units of Recovery North-Centra1 Southeast 3 9 4 6 10 Other Adult Male Northeast 1 2 9 North-Central 3 4 6 Southeast 10 Northeast 1 2 9 North-Central 3 4 6 Southeast 10 Northeast 1 2 9 North-Central 3 4 6 Southeast 10 Northeast 1 2 9 North-Central 3 4 6 Southeast 10 17 20 5 11 4 0 2 10 0 0 0 4 1 3 0 0 1 0 2 2 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 22 26 57 1 0 2 4 0 0 0 0 0 6 1 5 1 12 19 8 12 30 1 0 1 1 1 0 12 1 1 0 1 Adult Female 0 0 8 1 0 5 2 0 2 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 6 6 4 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 1 1 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 0 1 0 InnnatureMale 0 0 1 2 10 16 6 6 0 0 1 4 6 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 17 12 33 2 0 0 0 4 0 0 2 0 1 0 1 2 0 0 0 0 0 7 1 2 3 4 7 4 5 23 0 1 0 0 1 0 6 0 0 0 0 InnnatureFemale 0 2 4 0 3 4 2 1 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 11 3 8 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 6 1 2 1 2 0 1 0 5 0 0 0 1 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 jJ See Fig. 1 for management unit locations. 1 3 �- 150 Wing Surveys Age and sex data were again obtained for mallards harvested during the regular season in Colorado in 1968. As in the past several years, the data were gathered from two sources; the regular Federal wing survey and from a special State survey in which Colorado hunters not receiving Federal envelopes were contacted. Data collected by these two methods are presented in Tables 14 and 15, respectively. Study units were again separated into the three seemingly related groups and none of the data are weighted in any manner. Although there are some differences in percentages by sex and age class between areas within each survey, and also between surveys, results are relatively similar. All results indicate harvest was composed of over 50 percent adult males. Immature males were present in the harvest at an average of close to 20 percent. Adult and immature females made up about 18 and 10 percent of the totals, respectively. Thus, over 70 percent of the regular 1968 season harvest in Colorado was composed of mallard drakes. This is similar to results from past years. Data collected from Federal and State regular season wing surveys from 1964 through 1968 are presented in Tables 16 and 17 respectively. Certainly, there are faults with making comparisons of this sort. However, indications are that average mallard harvest over this period of years has been composed of 70 to 75 percent males, of which about 50 percent have been adults, and 20 to 25 percent females, of which adults composed a somewhat greater portion. Hunting Pressure Surveys Numbers of hunters estimated utilizing the study units for duck hunting purposes and duck harvest estimates by study unit are presented in Table 18. These figures were obtained from the waterfowl harvest survey for the 1968-69 season (Funk 1969). All data shown were gathered from both the regular waterfowl season of 1968 as well as the special mallard drake season of 1968-69. The overall harvest is estimated to have been composed of from 70 to 80 percent mallards. Average bag per hunter in most units was between 6 and 7 ducks with a Somewhat lower average bag estimated for Arkansas Valley duck hunters. This is similar to results obtained in 1967 (Funk 1968). Comparison of data between the two years also indicated a sizable reduction in hunting pressure in Unit 6, the Denver-Greeley area and harvest was also reduced greatly in this unit. Harvest was increased in most other units in comparison with 1967 data. However, the increase apparently was not enough to offset the reduction in Unit 6 because total harvest in all units was estimated to have been lower in 1968 than in 1967 (Funk 1969). Mallard harvest during the experimental drake season of 1968-69 was estimated at approximately 40,000 birds. Thus, the 1968 regular season must have been very poor in comparison to the 1967 season. �- 151 - Table 14. Age and sex composition of the 1968 regular season mallard harvest in eastern Colorado as estimated by the Federal wing survey. Area and Unit Number County Adult Male Female Male Northeast Logan 22 8 12 7 49 Sedgwick 12 0 3 2 17 Washington 3 2 1 0 6 Yuma 14 9 3 0 26 19 (19.4%) 9 (9.2%) 98 (1,2&9) Totals 19 51 (52.0%) (19.4%) Innnature Female Sample Size Totals North-central Adams 10 8 9 6 33 (3,4 and 6) Larimer 44 5 17 9 75 Morgan 11 30 4 13 5 52 Weld 109 30 44 16 199 Boulder 28 11 9 7 55 Arapaho 0 0 1 0 1 93 (22.4'70) 43 (10.4%) 415 Totals Southeast 221 58 (53.3%) (14.0%) Bent 9 4 3 1 17 (10,12 and l3) Otero 10 5 4 4 23 Prowers 1 0 0 1 2 Kiowa 4 0 1 1 6 Baca 1 0 0 0 1 Crowley 3 3 0 3 9 Las Animas 10 3 2 0 15 Totals 38 15 10 10 73 (l3.7%) (13.7%) (52.1%) (20.5%) 1/ Unit 2 portion of Morgan County included with north-central Colorado data. �- 152 - Table 15. Age and sex composition of the 1968 regular season mallard harvest in eastern Colorado as estimated by the State wing survey. Area Unit Adult Male Female Male Northeast 1 99 21 21 12 153 2 12 7 4 2 25 9 21 5 4 1 31 29 (l3.9%) 15 (7.2%) 209 Totals North-central Sample Size Totals 3 35 22 14 15 86 4 9 2 0 1 12 6 83 24 34 21 162 48 (18.5%) 37 260 (14.2/0) Totals Southeast 132 33 (63.2%) (15.8%) Immature Female 127 48 (48.8%) (18.5%) 10 5 2 4 0 11 12 l3 4 1 2 20 l3 11 2 3 3 19 8 (16.0%) 5 (10.0%) 50 Totals 29 8 (58.0%) (16.0%) �- 153 Table 16. Age and sex composition of the regular season mallard harvests in eastern Colorado as estimated by the Federal wing surveys 1964-1968. Area and Unit Number Adult Male Female Male Northeast (1,2 and 9) 342 113 (50.0%) (16.5%) 144 (21.1%) 85 (12.4%) 684 North-central y (3, 4, and 6) 1,031 362 (53.0%) (18.6%) 295 (15.2%) 258 (13.3%) 1,946 Southeast (10, 12, l3) 156 72 (44.2%) 20.4%) 75 (21.2%) 50 (14.2%) 353 Innnature Female Sample Size Totals 1/ Unit 2 portion of Morgan County included with north-central Colorado data. Table 17. Age and sex composition of the regular season mallard harvests in eastern Colorado as estimated by the State wing surveys, 1964-1968. Area and Unit Number Adult Male Female Male Northeast (1, 2 and 9) 347 96 (58.4%) (16.2%) 89 (15.0%) 62 (10.4%) 594 North-central (3, 4 and 6) 759 216 (53.9%) (15.4%) 235 (16.7%) 197 (14.0%) 1,407 Southeast (10,12,l3) 181 62 (48.3%) (16.5%) 74 (19.7%) 58 (15.5%) 375 Innnature Female Sample Size Totals �- 154 Table 18. Hunter pressure, harvest and population survey data for comparison between management units and areas, 1968-69 regular and late mallard drake seasons. Area 1.1 Estimated Duck Huntersy' Estimated Average Duck Bag Per Bagy' Hunter Number Ducks Censused l! No. Hunters Present Per 100 Ducks Censused Northeast 1 1,565 10,280 6.6 34,470 4.5 2 2,095 11 ,629 5.6 44,510 4.7 9 451 2,191 4.9 28,833 1.6 4,111 24,100 5.9 107,813 3.8 3 4,590 26,966 5.9 40,533 11.3 4 2,679 18,201 6.8 25,735 10.4 6 3,954 27,470 6.9 52,362 7.6 11 ,223 72 ,637 6.5 118,630 9.5 -y North-central Southeast 10 637 2,528 4.0 12 1,379 7,752 5.6 13 902 3,876 4.3 2,918 14,156 4.9 31,290 9.4 1/ See Fig. 1 for management unit locations. 2/ Funk, 1969 3/ Data from Table 3, average of December 5 and 19, and January 2 censuses. ~ Inventory figures for Arkansas Valley usable only as total. �- 155 - Information as to how hunter pressure was distributed in relation to number of ducks present in the various study units is also displayed in Table 18. Number of hunters per 100 ducks censused was again lowest in the Bonny Reservoir unit, Units 1 and 2 were second and third lowest, respectively. Most pressure occurred in the north-central area in Units 3, 4 and 6, the areas containing the greatest human populations. Results of a comparison of this sort can vary greatly, depending on shifts in duck numbers from unit to unit and a variety of other items. The average of the December 5 and 19, and the January 2 censuses was used in the calculations. The results seem quite logical. When comparing numbers of hunters per 100 birds censused with average bag per hunter, the data suggest hunters in the northeast area fared much better in comparison with the rest. The Experimental Mallard Drake Season In 1968, a step was made in the direction of gaining much needed information concerning future waterfowl management. The Central Flyway cooperative study to determine the feasibility of establishing two management units within the Flyway started to bear results when the Bureau of Sport Fisheries and Wildlife granted an experimental drake season. The experiment was conducted in the Central Flyway portions of Montana, Wyoming and Colorado. Season length was 23 days and covered four weekends. Bag limit was set at four drakes per day with possession limit of eight. Shooting hours were from sunrise to sunset all days of the season. Dates selected in Colorado were from December 15, 1968 through January 5, 1969. Seven days were subtracted from the Colorado regular duck season to cover expected losses of ducks other than mallard drakes. All participants were required to obtain a free permit to hunt from the Game, Fish and Parks Division. Special wing collection packets were sent to a sample of the hunters to obtain information on distripution of harvest and age ratios of harvested drakes. Results of the season have been assembled in a cooperative report to the Central Flyway Technical Committee (Grieb, et al., 1969). More specific analyses will be forthcoming when additional band recovery information can be obtained from the Bird Banding Office. Also, a more condensed paper on the season will be presented at the North American Wildlife Conference in Chicago in March, 1970 (Grieb et al., 1970). Some of the highlights of the Colorado season can be briefly discussed herein. Total number of permits issued was 17,161. Estimated number of permittees who actually hunted was 11,081 or about 65 percent of those who applied for permits. Total harvest of ducks was calculated at almost 43,000 birds. Hunter performance studies indicated that about 10.8 percent of this harvest was composed of illegal birds (4,631 ducks), leaVing the projected drake mallard harvest at 38,252 birds. Mallard hen kill was estimated at 3,143 birds or 7.3 percent of the total harvest. Overall reaction to the season by hunters was thought to have been excellent, especially for the first season of this type in existence on a large scale. It is believed that hunters can learn to become even more efficient in their hunting habits if given the opportunity to again participate in such a season. The season offered a challenge to the hunter and most comments offered by them were highly in favor of the season. �- 156 - LITERATURE CITED Funk, H. D. 1964. Winter duck banding in eastern Colorado. Fish and Parks Dept. Game Res. Rept. Oct. pp.79-87. 1965. Winter duck banding in eastern Colorado. and Parks Dept. Game Res. Rept. Oct. pp.12l-l28. Colo. Game, Colo. Game, Fish 1966. Investigation of mallard management units of eastern Colorado. Colo. Game, Fish and Parks Dept. Game Res. Rept. Oct. pp.127-l45. 1967. Investigation of mallard management units of eastern Colorado. Colo. Game, Fish and Parks Dept. Game Res. Rept. Oct. pp. 75-95. 1968. Investigation of mallard management units of eastern Colorado. Colo. Game, Fish and Parks Div. Game Res. Rept. Oct. pp.99-l23. 1969. Waterfowl kill survey. Game Res. Rept. Oct. In press. Colo. Game, Fish and Parks Div. Grieb, J. R., H. D. Funk, R. M. Hopper, G. F. Wrakestraw and D. Witt. 1969. Preliminary evaluation of the 1968-69 experimental mallard drake season in the Central Flyway portions of Montana, Wyoming and Colorado. Cent. ·Fly. Tech. Conun.Rept. March. 8 pp. + 16 tables and appendix. 1970. Evaluation of the 1968-69 experimental mallard drake season in Montana, Wyoming and Colorado. N. Amer. Wildl. Conf., Chicago. March. In press. Prepared by Howard D. Funk, Section Chief Small Game Research �October 1969 - 157 JOB PROGRESS REPORT State of COLORADO .------~~~~~------------- Project No. W_-_8_8_-_R_-_l_4 Work .Plan No. Job Tit1e: ~4 Migratory Bird Investigations _ Job No. 3 ------~------------------------- T_r_a~p~p~in~g~a~n_d~B~a~n~d~i~n~g~D~o~v~e~s~ Period Covered: Personnel: _ _ May 1, 1968 through September, 1968 Charles Hayes, Jack Randall and Dale Horne, Bureau of Sport Fisheries and Wildlife; Steve Steinert, Billy Borden, Larry Green and Howard Funk, Colorado Division of Game, Fish and Parks • ABSTRACT In 1968, 2,336 mourning doves were banded east of the Continental Divide in Colorado by State personnel and Federal Game Management Agents. Of these, 1,475 were immature birds, 434 were adult males, and 427 were adult females. Wing molt data collected from trapped imroatures again showed peak of hatching of approximately mid-June. Wing molt data from bagged birds again indicated most early hatched birds were gone from Colorado prior to September 1. ��- 159 - TRAPPING AND BANDING DOVES Howard D. Funk Colorado, a dove hunting state, recognizes the need to obtain information on migration patterns and annual mortality rates of mourning doves in an attempt to improve management techniques and make wisest use of the resource. Thus, we have been willing to make every effort to meet banding quotas set by the Bureau of Sport Fisheries and Wildlife. The 1968 quota for Colorado was 2,000 birds. This report covers results of the 1968 banding program as well as other items pertaining to harvest and general observations gathered throughout the period. P. S. OBJECTIVE To develop a harvest Management Unit. formula for doves in Colorado and the Central Dove SEGMENT OBJECTIVES 1. To band mourning doves in Colorado for the purpose life history and annual mortality data. of obtaining migration, 2. To obtain age and sex ratio data, wing molt information, and estimates on harvest size from hunters through personal contact and mail surveys. 3. To trap and band nestlings and immature doves and retrap them later in the year to study wing molt characteristics and sequence. METHODS AND MATERIALS Techniques utilized in banding and other data gathering efforts were described in a previous segment report (Funk 1965). However, due to lack of time, personnel and suitable trapping sites, mist nets were not used in 1968 to capture birds. Also, attempts to band nestlings and recapture them at later dates to evaluate the wing aging technique were abandoned because this program is not feasible with present manpower limits. DESCRIPTION OF AREA Most trapping in 1968 was accomplished at sites utilized in previous years. In the Fort Collins area, these were located at feed lots northeast of the city. Most of these feed lots were surrounded by grain fields. Doves are attracted to these areas by waste grain scattered throughout the sites and also by piles of chopped grains present in associated trench silos. Numerous trees are present throughout this farming area and are used by doves for nesting and roosting. �- 160 The situation is similar for other trapping areas except near Denver. Here, most trapping success was obtained at the Rocky Mountain Arsenal. Most of this area is flat and void of trees with little feed present other than natural vegetation. However, numerous gravel roads are present and they are frequented by doves for the purpose of picking up grit. Doves were trapped in the area north of Fort Morgan for the first time in 1968. Much of this area is farmland but there are some large pastures present. The trap sites found most successful were in groves of trees which doves used as roost sites. These groves were not very numerous and therefore usually contained relatively large numbers of birds. Stock tanks and windmill sites present also created dove concentrations as these are the only sources of drinking water for many miles. RESULTS AND DISCUSSION Trapping and Banding Through the combined efforts of State personnel and Federal Game Management Agents, 2,336 mourning doves were banded in eastern Colorado in 1968 (Table 1). The Fort Morgan and Fort Collins birds were banded by state personnel. As illustrated, the majority (63%) were immature birds. However, age and sex composition of trap samples varied by location. Almost half of the Fort Collins sample was composed of adult males while the Denver and Fort Morgan samples were nearly 90 percent immatures. Immatures usually flock together and frequent areas where food and water are readily available. Adult birds usually remain scattered throughout nesting areas and do not begin to flock together until mid-August. Federal trapping regulations prohibit baiting and trapping migratory birds within 10 days of the start of hunting season, which in the case of doves is after August 21. Therefore, numbers of adult doves in many banded samples are often quite limited except where sizable numbers of nesting birds can be found feeding and/or watering at specific communal locations. Wing Molt Data From Captured Immatures As in previous years, wing molt data from immature doves were recorded use in assigning ages in days and determining peak of hatch of trapped samples. The technique was described by Allen (1963). for Results of back-dating wing molt data were similar to those from previous years for most trapping areas. The pattern usually shows peak of hatching for birds in trapped samples to have been from early to mid-June. However, length of time spent trapping at a site, number of birds captured, and specific time of spring, Summer and fall spent at a certain trap site all seem to have an effect on back-dating results. �- 161 - Table 1. Number of mourning doves banded pre-season by State and Federal personnel in eastern Colorado, 1968, by age, sex and area. Adult Males Number Percent Area Adult Females Number Percent Innnatures Number Percent Totals Denver 40 6.3 38 5.9 562 87.8 640 Fort Collins 222 46.4 115 24.0 142 29.6 479 Fort Morgan 20 6.3 27 8.5 272 85.2 319 Vineland-Rocky Ford 152 16.9 247 27.5 499 55.6 898 Totals 434 18.6 427 18.3 1,475 63.1 2,336 .In most cases, wing molt readings seem to be on a sliding scale. Because young birds seem to leave most of our trapping areas after they reach a certain age, wing molt readings for the most part remain within the 0- to 4-molt group, no matter how long we trap in a specific area. However, there are exceptions. For example, a group of 272 innnaturebirds captured near Fort Morgan was composed of relatively older birds. These were trapped in the short period of August 6-16. Approximately half the birds had a molt pattern of between 3 and 5. Peak of hatching for this group was estimated at between June 17 and 25, quite similar to other groups. Apparently we found one of the staging or gathering places utilized in Colorado by young birds after they left their hatching areas. Hunting Season Bag Checks A concentrated statewide effort to collect dove wings from hunters was not made in 1968. Past results of wing molt checks on innnaturebirds have strongly suggested that most immature doves banded earlier in the year (April through July) are gone from the state by September 1. Number of wings collected in extreme southwest Colorado from September 2-4 again verified past findings. Spot checking of this sort probably can be continued in coming years without much effort expended. However, it is believed the point is proven regarding movement of many early hatched young birds out of Colorado prior to hunting season. �- 162 - LITERATURE CITED Allen, J. M. 1963. Primary feather molt rate of wild immature doves in Indiana. Ind. Dept. of Cons., Game Res. Sect. Circ. No.4. Indianapolis. Aug. 4 p. Funk, H. D. 1965. Trapping and banding doves. Colo. Game, Fish and Parks Dept. Game Res. Rept., Fed. Aid Proj. W-88-R. Oct. pp. 161-169. ( , Prepared by 1 , , t I L ( i -, ) c,-,_ c li "(.' '\ , ---H=-ow--a-r~d-D~.-F~u-n-k~-------------, l � Dublin Core The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/. Title A name given to the resource Federal Aid Wildlife Quarterly/Annual Reports Description An account of the resource In 1937 the U.S. Congress enacted, and President Franklin D. Roosevelt signed, the Federal Aid to Wildlife Restoration Act (50S-917). This milestone in wildlife financing is popularly known as the Pittman-Robertson act. The Colorado Federal Aid to Wildlife Restoration program began in 1937, shortly after enabling legislation by the Congress in 1936. Reports of progress, as required by the Federal Aid Act, first appeared in 1938. Federal Aid reports have been prepared continuously since. Beginning in 1947 and continuing through 2000, Colorado Federal Aid Reports were issued quarterly, in January, April, July and October. <strong>Starting in 2001</strong>, reports were issued annually.&nbsp;<br /><br />Current reports cover both federal aid and non-federal aid research and summarize (≤6 pages each with tables and figures) preliminary results of wildlife research projects and support services updates conducted by the Mammals<br />Research Team.&nbsp;&nbsp;<br /><br />The title of the reports has changed over the years. Reports from 1938-1945 were issued under specific job title.&nbsp; For a listing of individual projects see <a href="https://cpw.cvlcollections.org/exhibits/show/mammals-research/progress-reports">Mammals Research: Progress Reports (1939-current)</a>.<br /><br />Quarterly Progress Report (1946-1956)<br /><a href="https://cpw.cvlcollections.org/items/show/674">1946-1956</a><br /><br />Quarterly Report (1957-1962)<br /><a href="https://cpw.cvlcollections.org/items/show/673">1957-1962</a><br /><br />Game Research Report (1963-1979)<br /><a href="https://cpw.cvlcollections.org/items/show/454">1963-1969</a><br /><a href="https://cpw.cvlcollections.org/items/show/455">1970-1979</a> <p>Wildlife Research Report (1980-2000)<br /><a href="https://cpw.cvlcollections.org/items/show/451">1980-1987</a><br /><a href="https://cpw.cvlcollections.org/items/show/452">1988-1994</a><br /><a href="https://cpw.cvlcollections.org/items/show/453">1995-2000</a></p> <p>Wildlife Research Report. Mammals (2001-2023)<br /><a href="https://cpw.cvlcollections.org/items/show/611" class="permalink">2001-2023</a><br /><br />Mammals Research Summary Report (2024-&nbsp; )<br /><a href="https://cpw.cvlcollections.org/items/show/612">2024-present</a></p> Text A resource consisting primarily of words for reading. Examples include books, letters, dissertations, poems, newspapers, articles, archives of mailing lists. Note that facsimiles or images of texts are still of the genre Text. Dublin Core The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/. Title A name given to the resource Game Research Report (1963-1969) Description An account of the resource <p>Published under title: <em>Game Research Report</em> from 1963-1979. (1963-1972 published by Colorado Game Fish &amp; Parks Dept., 1973-1979 published by Colorado Division of Wildlife.) This set contains <strong>1963-1969</strong>.<br /><a href="https://cpw.cvlcollections.org/items/show/455">Game Research Report (1970-1979)</a><br /><br />Progress reports for mammals and avian Federal Aid research. See&nbsp;<a href="https://cpw.cvlcollections.org/exhibits/show/mammals-research/progress-reports">Mammals Research: Progress Reports (1939-current)</a>&nbsp;for a listing of collated reports for each mammals project (avian to be added in the future).</p> <p>Some quarters contain multiple volumes.</p> <p>Continues: <a href="https://cpw.cvlcollections.org/items/show/673">Quarterly Report (1957-1962)</a></p> <p>Continued by: Wildlife Research Report&nbsp;<br />&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;<a href="https://cpw.cvlcollections.org/items/show/451">1980-1987</a>&nbsp; |&nbsp; &nbsp;<a href="https://cpw.cvlcollections.org/items/show/452">1988-1994</a>&nbsp; |&nbsp; <a href="https://cpw.cvlcollections.org/items/show/453">1995-2000</a></p> Print copy: Federal Aid binders Rights Information about rights held in and over the resource <a href="http://rightsstatements.org/vocab/InC-NC/1.0/">IN COPYRIGHT - NON-COMMERCIAL USE PERMITTED</a> Type The nature or genre of the resource Text Format The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource application/pdf Language A language of the resource English Creator An entity primarily responsible for making the resource Colorado Game Fish &amp; Parks Dept. Colorado Division of Wildlife